diff --git a/console_play.py b/console_play.py index 3cc23fa..b10d049 100644 --- a/console_play.py +++ b/console_play.py @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ def play_unconstrained(): action = action[0].upper() + action[1:] - action = "\n> " + action + ".\n" + action = "\n> " + action + "\n" action = remove_profanity(action) #action = first_to_second_person(action) diff --git a/data/scraper/scraper.py b/data/scraper/scraper.py index 58d5381..ac4e491 100644 --- a/data/scraper/scraper.py +++ b/data/scraper/scraper.py @@ -35,7 +35,28 @@ class Scraper: "You have died.", "You have died", "Epilogue", - "Save Game"} + "Save Game", + "Your quest might have been more successful...", + "5 - not the best, certainly not the worst", + "The End! (leave comments on game)", + "6 - it's worth every cent", + "Quit the game.", + "7 - even better than Reeses' Cups®", + "8 - it will bring you enlightenment", + "End of game! Leave a comment!", + "Better luck next time", + "click here to continue", + "Rating And Leaving Comments", + "Your Outlaw Career has come to an end", + "Thank you for taking the time to read my story", + "You have no further part in the story, End Game and Leave Comments", + '', + "You play no further part in this story. End Game and Leave Comments", + "drivers", + "Alas, poor Yorick, they slew you well", + "My heart bleeds for you", + "To End the Game and Leave Comments click here", + "Call it a day"} self.texts = set() def GoToURL(self, url): @@ -156,26 +177,51 @@ urls = ["http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=10638", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=22", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=47011", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=45866", - "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=8", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=55043", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=6376", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=36791", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=34193", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=10885", - "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=21879", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=7567", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=51926", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=8035", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=8038", - "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=2276", "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=56742", - "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=14013" + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=14013", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=53356", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=6382", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=12165", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=49200", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=48393", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=51934", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=42380", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=38774", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=13349", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=8129", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=7426", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=34838", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=54011", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=52961", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=50303", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=60128", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=60232", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=10183", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=23928", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=25548", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=20983", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=17306", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=9918", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=11274", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=58502", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=39055", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=16577", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=52499", + "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=29597" ] -for i in range(19, len(urls)): +for i in range(67, len(urls)): print("****** Extracting Adventure ", urls[i], " ***********") tree = scraper.BuildStoryTree(urls[i]) -, -save_tree(tree, "stories/story" + str(i) + ".json") + save_tree(tree, "stories/story" + str(i) + ".json") print("done") diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed1.json b/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed1.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e533ef --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed1.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "apoc_seed1", "context": "Long ago the bombs fell and the world ended. You are one of the few who is still alive. You are trying to survive by scavenging among the ruins of what is left behind. ", "first_story_block": "You are standing outside an old rundown gas station at the edge of town. There are old broken cars surrounding the gas station and on the road. You are extremely hungry and haven't eaten in a few days. ", "action_results": [{"action": "look in the gas station for food. ", "result": "You search the gas station for food, but find nothing you can eat.", "action_results": [{"action": "search the cars for food.", "result": "You search the cars for food, you search three without success, but in the glove compartment of the fourth you find a box of crackers.", "action_results": [{"action": "eat the crackers.", "result": "They remind you of when you needed to eat a bland diet after your operation. You pat yourself on where you remember the incision was made. The scar healed long ago, but the brain remembers. The crackers weren't very nutritious, but some fuel in the tank is better than none.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue to look for food in the building up ahead.", "result": "You find a moldy sandwich and some peppered beef jerky in an old lunchbox.", "action_results": [{"action": "Snack on the jerky while searching for more food.", "result": "The jerky is so hard your tooth falls out.", "action_results": [{"action": "look for a mirror to assess the damage", "result": "Blood is pouring from your mouth and the pain is unbearable.", "action_results": [{"action": "Press your tongue into the abscess to stop the bleeding.", "result": "A foul odor rushing into your nostrils and the pain becomes even worse.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Look for cloth or paper towel to stuff the gaping wound with.", "result": "You find a cloth on the floor. It looks like a used bandage, and is crusted with dried blood.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "use pliers to pull the rest of the tooth", "result": "Passes out from the pain. Falls to the floor", "action_results": [{"action": "Check your things for alcohol or antiseptic.", "result": "You find a bottle of alcohol in your bag. You take a swig from the bottle.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Search the area for medical supplies.", "result": "You find a bottle of Tylenol and struggle to open it.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Scrape the mold from the sandwich, taste a bite to see if it is edible.", "result": "The sandwich is stale. You throw it away and hope you don't get sick.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for more food.", "result": "There is no more food around, but there's two bottles of beer.", "action_results": [{"action": "Drink one beer.", "result": "You drink the beer, but it tastes funny. You hope you don't get sick later.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Put the beer in your bag and walk towards the next store.", "result": "You grab the beer, leaving the building and heading toward the next store. You are hungry.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take some medicine you saved.", "result": "It wasn't enought, you are food poisoned.", "action_results": [{"action": "take more medicine", "result": "The medicine does little to improve your upset stomach.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "ride out the food poisoning", "result": "I try to drink some milk.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Eat the peppered beef and throw the sandwich to the side", "result": "You discovered the peppered beef had gone bad when you developed cramps and diarrhea just hours after eating it. Fortunately, the food poisoning will pass and you will be all right.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for water.", "result": "You find a dirty puddle. You know it is likely contaminated but you are so thirsty you bend down and lap it up.", "action_results": [{"action": "It tastes horrible and within a half hour your stomach begins having awful pains.", "result": "You feel nauseous and begin to vomit loudly.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You change your mind and make yourself throw up the water. You gather the dirty water in a container and search for a way to boil or purify it.", "result": "You see something that looks like a lighter sticking out of a fanny pack caught on a tree, but it looks like you'll need help to get it down.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Get on your feet and keep walking.", "result": "You walk on. Hopefully, you can come across more water and food.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Consider the new lows you're hitting, lapping from a dirty puddle.", "result": "You decide it would be better to boil the water before drinking. You fill a container and proceed to start a fire.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Look for more food.", "result": "You find some rotten vegetables, and nothing more.", "action_results": [{"action": "Throw the rotten vegetables against the wall, in anger.", "result": "Slime from the rotten vegetables bounces back, and some gets in your mouth.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Exit the room.", "result": "Locate new room.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Continue to search for food", "result": "There is no more food around, and you start feeling hungry.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fast, its good for you", "result": "You fall down on the ground. You close your eyes.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wake up and forage for mushroom and berries, and hope that they're not toxic.", "result": "You eat one of the berries and immediately feel a wave of nausea.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wake up and construct a trap for catching any rodents or animals that come through.", "result": "The trap manages to catch a large rat. You grimace looking at it, but it is meat.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Yell and hope someone is around", "result": "The silence from the darkness is deafening.", "action_results": [{"action": "Start crying.", "result": "You hear a noise. This causes you to stop crying. You are scared.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Sit down and consider the options.", "result": "You sit and think about what to do. You wish there were someone to talk to.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Look for water for hydration and to fool the stomach until ore food can be found.", "result": "No water can be found in the cars, and suddenly you regret eating salted crackers: you can feel your tongue swelling up, begging for some hydration.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for a different water source in the vicinity.", "result": "You hear running water nearby. You walk around the area and find a small creek.", "action_results": [{"action": "Drink the water.", "result": "finally found water, should take some water next time", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for a container to hold water.", "result": "You find a canteen on the shelf. You reach up and take it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Pee in the creek.", "result": "It feels good to pee. You let it all out and take off again.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take a bath in the creek.", "result": "Swimming in the creek feels amazing. It is the first time in days that you don't feel like you are on fire.", "action_results": [{"action": "Create a fishing pole with nearby materials and catch some lunch.", "result": "You search for other people in the river.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wash clothes and supplies in the fresh water.", "result": "You notice small specks in the water darting from left to right. The small specks you realize are actually biting insect that have created a rash on your legs and forearms.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Keep walking to see if you can find a supermarket anywhere.", "result": "You see a building in the distance. You continue walking and see a sign in front of it. Luckily it is a supermarket. You hope that you will find something to drink there.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go inside.", "result": "The entire supermarket is ransacked, scavenged by wild dogs and other creatures.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back outside.", "result": "Feeling disappointed by the carnage inside the ruined market your head hangs low with dispair. Then you think to yourself, \"I must keep searching.\"", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Look for locked doors.", "result": "You check each door. Most of them are locked.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Look around to see if anyone's watching.", "result": "As you head towards the building you check for others with the same idea. At this point, competition might become violent, but your quick, thirst-distracted search shows no one.", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter the supermarket through the main entrance.", "result": "The supermarket is very dark. You take out a flashlight to see inside.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go to the back of the supermarket.", "result": "You notice some unopened bottles of water, and begin to head towards them", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Calm the mind to extend search for hydration.", "result": "You know it recently rained. You look outside to see if there are any containers that might have rainwater in them.", "action_results": [{"action": "drink from an old bucket", "result": "The water has a nasty oily flavor to it, but helps to assauge your thirst. But you need more water, and soon.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pour some water from the bucket into your water bottle.", "result": "You try to pour the water into your bottle, but it spills out. Now you need water more than ever.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take two empty buckets to the river to fill them with fresh water.", "result": "You fill the buckets. You know that river water is often dangerous to drink, the risk of illness is very high. But perhaps you can do something about the collected water later.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "find water in a gutter", "result": "You notice a house with leaves overflowing its gutter. After the recent rain, you know water should still be up there, so you start to climb up the nearby tree.", "action_results": [{"action": "Clear the gutter of leaves after placing a container under the gutter to collect water.", "result": "The container quickly fills up with water.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Drink water straight from the gutter.", "result": "The water tastes like dirt and is full of leafy pulp, but it is still refreshing. Then you notice the dead bird mixed in with the leaves in the gutter, and your stomach does a flip-flop.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look for puddles of water around the area.", "result": "You walk around trying to find pools of water. Eventually, you find a small puddle of water. You kneel next to it and take a sip.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fill your canteen.", "result": "The water tastes horrible, and you feel like throwing up.", "action_results": [{"action": "light a fire to sterilize contaminated canteen", "result": "The water sizzles and a small black smoke oozes from the canteen.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "see a canteen and hope it is clean.", "result": "You look into the canteen and take a drink. It tastes delicious.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Wash your body.", "result": "Your skin begins to burn and you realize the water was contaminated.", "action_results": [{"action": "Throw up the water you drank a minute ago", "result": "Walk further away to find other pools of water that might not be contaminated.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use what you can from your clothes and wipe off as much of the water as you can off your body", "result": "Your tongue begins to swell, and your quickly reach for some supplies to help numb the swelling.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Search the cars for clothing.", "result": "There is no clothing in the car.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the car for water.", "result": "You find there is a bottle under the seat, but it is not a water bottle. It is Jack Daniels and is only half full.", "action_results": [{"action": "take a swig of Jack Daniels", "result": "After drinking the rest of the bottle, still in pain, I decide to rest to continue the journey.", "action_results": [{"action": "Start daydreaming while you walk.", "result": "While you're walking you stumble over some bricks on the road, as you are not paying attention to what is around you.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go to your local Alcohol Anonymous meetings.", "result": "you become free from your gripping alcohol addiction, and gain a new addiction, candy.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "save the alcohol for a future antiseptic", "result": "I nick my knee on a metal post and disinfect it with the saved alcohol.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find something to wrap your wound with.", "result": "You find a medipack on the shelf. You open it, but there are no bandages in it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Put the rest of the Jack Daniels back in your bag.", "result": "As the sun rises, it starts getting very hot inside", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look for a store that has clothing.", "result": "There is a moldy coffee cup below the register and money in the till.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave the money and look for clothing", "result": "money has no value in this situation", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep the money as fire fodder.", "result": "Continue to search for clothing, as the money is kept away for later use.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Throw the coffee cup against the wall in anger.", "result": "The cup breaks as it hits the wall. You begin to cry.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Try on different clothing and shoes", "result": "new clothes but still a lot to discover", "action_results": [{"action": "stay and explore", "result": "You find a half eten chocolate bar in the trash.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "be satisfied with what was has been found and leave", "result": "As you walk, you notice something in the toe of one of the shoes that looks like a gold nugget, but you wonder if gold has any worth in this new world.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "See if the car runs for temporary transportation and shelter.", "result": "The engine starts with a roar: the car is still working!", "action_results": [{"action": "Drive the car", "result": "a tire bursts", "action_results": [{"action": "Pull over and inspect the burst tire.", "result": "You pop the trunk and start to get the spare from it. When you pause for a moment, you hear the distant rev of another car engine.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Check the trunk for a spare tire.", "result": "You open the trunk and gag as a stench so thick it is almost tangible hits your face. The trunk is filled with several corpses in various states of decay. Some of the bodies are partially butchered. This was a cannibal's ride, and you just stole it.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Check the fuel level of the car", "result": "In the summer of last year, I was driving towards Paris and it seemed I was distracted because I did not sleep enough and at one moment I found myself in a serious traffic accident. The car overturned and rolled several times. I had several fractures in my legs and my hands are good. Myself surrounded by my wife and children, despite all that hit me I was grateful that I am still alive", "action_results": [{"action": "Pay attention to the road ahead.", "result": "I pull in near a rest stop to decide on how to move forward.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Look for a road map.", "result": "You find a road map on the sidewalk near where the car was totaled.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Cut the fabric cloth from the seats to create clothing or blankets.", "result": "You start feeling warmer with that makeshift blanket: that might do, for the night.", "action_results": [{"action": "Check for gas", "result": "The car still has half a tank, enough to turn on the heating for the night to further warm you up.", "action_results": [{"action": "Decide to conserve the gas and only turn on the heat if it becomes too cold to survive with just the blanket.", "result": "You check outside one last time before trying to get some sleep before another day. At least with the car you might be able to get a bit further tomorrow.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use the car to drive to another location that may offer more shelter or ways to keep warm.", "result": "You find a shelter. There are others there. You are offered a bed and food to eat.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Lock car and sleep to regain strength", "result": "Feeling more secure and warm, you nestle into the hole in the cushion of the car seat you stripped, and start to dream of your old life.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wake up and check your surroundings.", "result": "You realize you are now in a location that is not the same as the one you were in when you fell asleep. Your heart starts racing and you feel very faint.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wake up in the night to ensure you're alone and safe.", "result": "After looking around and checking the locks, you are able to fall back asleep in only a few minutes.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Begin to walk towards the nearest town.", "result": "You arrive and, despite the state of things, many store lights seem to be functioning. The first store you encounter is a gun shop. You decide to step inside.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take a gun and some ammo.", "result": "You are now protected against anyone who would try and do you harm, you step out into the street to search the supermarket next door", "action_results": [{"action": "Look around to see if anyone is watching", "result": "You see eyes in the window across the street. You lift your gun higher to hopefully scare them off before entering the supermarket. You don't want competition.", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter the supermarket.", "result": "There is nothing left in the supermarket. Looters must have hit it earlier.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Fire off a warning shot.", "result": "Suddenly, a flock of birds disperse off of the roof of the supermarket, startling you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Make sure gun is loaded", "result": "Search the supermarket for supplies. clear the store of any threats.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search for a safe place to hideout.", "result": "You find an abandoned vehicle that should provide cover and keep you safe from others who would do you harm.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Search the liquor store next door in case of future injuries.", "result": "You put some liquor in your bag and proceed onward with your day.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Go into a different store to look for food.", "result": "Too your luck, you find a store a couple blocks away that has non perishable items in it.", "action_results": [{"action": "go into store and pack as many cans as you can", "result": "Lucky you, you find Bottled Water Packages, way too many of them.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take what you can and come back later.", "result": "You stay hydrated.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Drink as much water as you can.", "result": "You feel very refreshed and satisfied.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Search fro something to carry back food", "result": "You find 5 can of BBQ beans. Beans have always been your favorite ever since your mom made them for you as a child.", "action_results": [{"action": "there are also cans of fruit", "result": "You take the cans of fruit. You can never be too prepared and you don't want to starve.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "no room in backpack for more.", "result": "You look in the store for a larger backpack so you can carry more supplies.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look for a weapon to hunt any animals with.", "result": "You bypass the firearms thinking of possible ammo shortages later on. Instead you choose a crossbow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go inside store and see if there are bows and arrows", "result": "Towards the back, you see a picture of a crossbow on the wall. Full of hope you head towards the aisle you think might have bows and arrows.", "action_results": [{"action": "there are arrows on the floor but do not pick them up", "result": "You leave the arrows where they are. You walk past them, careful not to touch them.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "pick up the arrows that are scattered all around the store.", "result": "You pick up the arrows and put them into your bag. They may come in handy later.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "scan aisle to find crossbow", "result": "Locate crossbow at the end of the aisle.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "walk quietly toward aisle without making noise", "result": "The aisle does indeed contain bows and arrows but they are behind glass.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go inside store, grab crossbow and try hunting", "result": "You search for something to kill for food but there is no sign of life.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pull out some of your precious food to use as bait.", "result": "You hide in a nearby tree, watching your precious bait, hoping to lure another starving creature to it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Eat your rations you found earlier.", "result": "You curb your hunger for now, but barely. You are very thirsty.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "See if theres any extra food anywhere stored in the shop.", "result": "You open a desk drawer and find snacks stored away. Hopefully they aren't stale. You take them with you in case you find nothing else.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hold on to the snacks", "result": "You put the snacks in your backpack and close it.", "action_results": [{"action": "close the drawer", "result": "With the drawer closed you turn turn to the cupboards to search for additional supplies.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "see what else is in the drawer", "result": "You try to find a knive to cut the meet.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Grab some guns and ammo to kill food", "result": "After getting weapons and groceries, I'm looking for a car or something to look for more survivors.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find a run down car in the next field over.", "result": "The car has been used recently, somebody kept it running condition. The girl slides in under the dashboard and starts fiddling with wires. The engine cranks once, twice, three times. On the fourth crank it catches and fires up.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Begin walking further out of town to look for a car.", "result": "You find one broken down a little ways down the road.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed2.json b/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed2.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9f3c1b --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed2.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "apoc_seed2", "context": "Long ago the bombs fell and the world ended. You are one of the few who is still alive. You are trying to survive by scavenging among the ruins of what is left behind. ", "first_story_block": "You find a car with the keys in the ignition and try to start it. Nothing happens. You keep looking and find another car that looks like it might work. You manage to get the engine started. ", "action_results": [{"action": "drive around looking for any people or stores that might have supplies.", "result": "You drive around the town and see many boarded up buildings, but no people. Eventually you find a store that you think might have supplies.", "action_results": [{"action": "go inside the store and see if there are any supplies.", "result": "It looks like the store has been ransacked and all the shelves are empty. You manage to find a package of granola bars and a flashlight behind the counter.", "action_results": [{"action": "eat a granola bar.", "result": "It tastes just like a granola bar you enjoyed when you were younger. In an instant, you are transported to a school hiking trip. Your mind is awash by the mountain air and the bundles of sticks and leaves that formed the trail. Those days seem so long ago now...", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for other doors inside the store.", "result": "You find the store manager's door, with a set of keys hanging off the lock. The door, though, seems to be blocked from the inside.", "action_results": [{"action": "Push the door to uncover what is blocking it from the inside", "result": "You hear a scream from the inside: \"Go away! I have a gun!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue to push the door.", "result": "You yell: \"So do I!\" and feel the door give a bit more.", "action_results": [{"action": "kick the door", "result": "You try to scape jumping off the window.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "continue to push the door", "result": "The door doesn't give. You look around to find something to ram against the door.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Try to talk down the person behind the door.", "result": "explains that he is a good person, and tries to approach slowly", "action_results": [{"action": "Put your hands up to show you are not armed.", "result": "You put your hands up, but your tattered, duct-taped Remington 870 shotgun is still within reach. Good thing too, as the man reaches behind his back and pulls out a rusty, long blade. You side step, grabbing the shotgun, as the man thrusts out with the knife.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take your crossbow out and keep moving forward.", "result": "You arm yourself with the crossbow. You cannot be too cautious.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Knock on the door, while being prepared for what is inside.", "result": "You swing the door open and find nothing there. You let out an audible sigh of relief. The door was only jammed.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the manager's desk.", "result": "You find a note that was written by the last owner. You open up the note.", "action_results": [{"action": "the note is worthless so you throw it away", "result": "You notice that the managers desk has two drawers. One is empty, however the other is locked.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "the note has a cryptic message on it, but you keep it in case someone else can decode it", "result": "You move on from room to room looking for useful supplies.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Look at the coat rack by the door.", "result": "You find a hat, which will help a little when it gets cold at night, but not the warm coat you were hoping for.", "action_results": [{"action": "start looking for more things", "result": "There is no coat here but there is a worn rucksack hung over a chair.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "go out to look for more places", "result": "You find two suitable places that may have clothing to scavenge.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Attempt to break down the door with something heavy.", "result": "You look around and find a piece of wood. You take the wood and ram it against the door. Eventually, it starts to give.", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep ramming.", "result": "need to enter that room", "action_results": [{"action": "Hit the hinges and see if you can knock them loose.", "result": "Suddenly the door falls over, and you can now enter the room.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take a running start and ram the door as hard as you can.", "result": "The door opens, and you can't believe what you see inside.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take a break.", "result": "Sitting in the quiet, suddenly you hear a scratching noise coming from the other side of the manager's office door.", "action_results": [{"action": "Listen and try to identify if there is an animal.", "result": "The scratching intensifies. You notice the door begin to shake against the weight of the creature behind it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Run away into the woods to find weapons.", "result": "You find a sharp rock and a stick. You begin to fasten a weapon.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Use the keys to try to unlock a different door.", "result": "The storage room door opens up, and it's filled with shelves stacked with canned food.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find can opener", "result": "You open a can of tuna and notice it has a rancid smell.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open another can.", "result": "The next can you opened smells less foul but makes you gag as you think of eating it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Throw the opened can of tuna against the wall.", "result": "The tuna falls over the ground and the air is consumed with the rancid odor.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Move food to other area to prevent others from taking it", "result": "This is a huge treasure trove. You have enough to eat and plenty to trade as well. But you have to get it out of here first, and that means finding a vehicle. Just then, you hear the engines approaching. Raiders!", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab what you can carry and run.", "result": "You load up your hands and take off running. You hear footsteps behind you and pick up the pace.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Convince the raiders to let you join them.", "result": "The raiders are uncertain whether or not they should let you in, and begin to discuss amongst themselves.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Check to see if there are any batteries in the flashlight.", "result": "There are batteries in the flashlight but they are dead.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shake the flashlight and see if the batteries might begin to work.", "result": "The flashlight flickers for a second, but then it dies again. At least you know it's working, you only need fresh batteries...", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for batteries.", "result": "batteries or batteries here is a new purpose now the night will come soon and we need light", "action_results": [{"action": "Try another building.", "result": "You find the ruins of a hardware store and dig frantically through the rubble.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Head all the way back to camp to see if you can barter for some.", "result": "You get back to camp and look for someone to trade with. However, you can't find a soul. Where is everyone?", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Throw it away - it's dead weight.", "result": "But you realize, fresh batteries will be a hard thing to come across. You hide the flashlight under a shelf for now. If you do happen upon batteries, you can come back for it when it's worth carrying.", "action_results": [{"action": "search in the ruins for batteries", "result": "You find one battery.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "continue on looking for food or other people who survived", "result": "You run your hand over a mountain of candy bar wrappers, but find them empty. Someone got to them before you.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look through the rubble and see if you can find any new batteries for the flashlight.", "result": "You look through the rubble, but there is nothing but papers and trash. You trudge on, disappointed.", "action_results": [{"action": "Bend down when you see something glinting in the rubble ahead.", "result": "It is a large knife. You take it with you because you are sure it will come in handy.", "action_results": [{"action": "keep on walking", "result": "You walk for a mile or so and you need to take a break. You are sitting down to rest when you hear a noise.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "use the knife to open the can that was next to it.", "result": "Push down as hard as you can to penetrate the can.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take a right turn.", "result": "There's a dim light at the end of the corridor.", "action_results": [{"action": "the light gives way to a city in ruins with buildings crumbling in dismay. Search for a stable path.", "result": "You find a worn footpath that leads toward the city.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "The sound of voices echo through corridor, hide before the source of light arrives.", "result": "There is pulsating and rumbling bellowing through the corridor, run before it is too late.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Tuck the flashlight into your pocket.", "result": "The flashlight some how turns on by itself. You take it out of your pocket", "action_results": [{"action": "Explore the surroundings with the flashlight.", "result": "You come across a book. You open the book.", "action_results": [{"action": "Skim the book for anything useful.", "result": "You find in the book a description of events that lead to the war. You also find some handwritten notes in the margins of the book.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Throw the book in your bag to use for kindling later.", "result": "Your bag is getting heavier. You wonder if you might have to unload it at some point.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Turn off the flashlight immediately.", "result": "Instead of shutting off, the flashlight begins to vibrate, and projects an image onto the ground.", "action_results": [{"action": "Watch in amazement as the image starts moving by itself.", "result": "You stand mesmerized, and feel yourself go into a trance.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Drop the flashlight by mistake.", "result": "It shatters into pieces, and you somehow feel you've made a big mistake as a sense of dread creeps over you.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look around for fresh batteries.", "result": "You can't find any more batteries, but you find a box of matches in a drawer.", "action_results": [{"action": "Light a match", "result": "who has no dog hunting with cat, but little by little I see the environment", "action_results": [{"action": "Give up on hunting for now.", "result": "You decide to eat from your rations rather than expend energy on hunting", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Store the matches in your bunker.", "result": "You feel hungry and notice you haven't eaten in a while", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Look around for something to use as a torch", "result": "Matches will only last so long, so you break off some wood and from a nearby chair to use as a torch.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for oil or other fire accelerant.", "result": "You notice that there a propane tank that looks dented.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wrap some cloth around the wood.", "result": "The wood is now protected around the dampness of the air, as you start to look for other supplies.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Check to see if the flashlight works.", "result": "You push the soft, mushy rubber button and a faint light emerges. You are familiar with this brand of torch and consider keeping it in case you find a better battery.", "action_results": [{"action": "put in jacket pocket", "result": "The battery doesn't fit in your pocket. You have to carry it around. You wish you had some kind of bag to carry it in.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take off jacket and wrap it around you like a sling and put the battery in it.", "result": "The battery is leaking, and acid soaks into your skin.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run as fast as you can to the nearest source of water.", "result": "You wash off the battery acid and try to get it off your jacket, but it has already eaten holes into its fabric. Another wasted effort, damn.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Find the first aid kit in your bag as quickly as possible.", "result": "By the time you remove the acid, you now have an open wound on your right hand.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "clean skin", "result": "Your skin is stinging and you have nothing to soothe it with.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "a slight burn remains where the acid landed", "result": "The battery is heavy and cold against your skin", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Put the battery to your arm or leg and wrap your jacket around it to hold it in place.", "result": "The battery slips out of your improvised bag fashioned out of a jacket and falls to the ground.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave it there, it's too big.", "result": "You decide that there might be a better solution to haul the battery around. A little while later you find an old grocery cart, perfect. You return to the battery and put it into the old cart.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Put your jacket back on and take off your pants to try using them instead.", "result": "You place the battery in one of the pants legs, and wrap the pants around your waist.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "look for dry twigs and kindling", "result": "Gather the kindling into a pile and light it up for a cozy fire", "action_results": [{"action": "Search for blanket material", "result": "You are able to find a old table cloth", "action_results": [{"action": "Sit close to the fire to warm up.", "result": "You feed the fire throughout the night and think about the day ahead.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Look for some meat to cook on the fire.", "result": "There is no meat available. You find some old cans of food.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take off boots and dry out feet", "result": "You notice when you remove your boots that your feet are blistered and the heat of the fire makes the blisters more painful.", "action_results": [{"action": "put boots back on.", "result": "The boots hurt as you slide them on your feet. You wince in pain and try not to cry.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "wrap feet in bandages.", "result": "Your feet, now bandaged, feel more comfortable. However you are concerned about tomorrow, with your feet injured you won't make it very far.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Turn off the light to conserve what battery it has.", "result": "You walk out of the store and back to the car. Looking around in the low light there is a column of smoke to the west. No sound but the wind playing with some leaves.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head towards the smoke.", "result": "You come across a campfire. You see a woman around the fire.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask someone about the cause of the smoke.", "result": "You find out from the woman that there is a small settlement of nomads who are taking refuge", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Drive far away from the smoke.", "result": "As you drive away, the woman starts running towards your direction.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go in the opposite direction.", "result": "You begin to wonder whether you made the right decision. It is lonely out here and the smoke indicated a sign of life. You stop in your tracks and consider turning back around.", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn back and go towards the smoke.", "result": "You walk, following the smoke. You get to a large fire. You yell out for help.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Keep moving farther from the smoke.", "result": "As you move closer to the smoke you see the faint glow of a burning fire, it is unclear if their is anyone nearby the fire.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Search for more batteries and flashlights.", "result": "You find 2 more flashlights in a drawer in a back room, there is also another pack of batteries there.", "action_results": [{"action": "Check operation of new flashlights", "result": "The first flashlight is dead, but the second flickers, then projects an eerie greenish glow onto the floor.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stow the flashlight in your backpack and continue to search.", "result": "You find some more water and canned food. You decide to start a fire.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use the flashlight to look closer around the room.", "result": "With the additional light from the flashlight you see that this room was once an office. Spreadsheets of forgotten financial information lay on the floor.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take batteries and put them in pocket", "result": "Look for anything else to aid in your survival and find a first aid kit.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open all of the cabinets in the next room.", "result": "The cabinet doors are all open. Unfortunately, there is nothing to be seen in them.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Make signs advertising your items for sale.", "result": "The signs draw attention of travelers on the path. They come to see you.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Check the storage rooms for tools and supplies.", "result": "It's clear that whoever ransacked the store, was someone really organized and with a means of transport: even the storage rooms are completely empty.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look in every corner for any possible tools and supplies.", "result": "There is nothing left: the only use for the storage room is as a safe place to sleep in.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave the storage room.", "result": "You continue on and head outside. Down the road you see another building and decide to check it out.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find materials to build a bed to sleep on.", "result": "You find some soft hay and a few wooden planks.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Climb up the side of the building.", "result": "You see a ladder on the side of the building and begin to walk up to a window.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Lay down for a nap.", "result": "just as your about to fall a sleep you hear a sound of voices in the background. You know you need to get out before the men find you. You frantically look around for another exit, but there isn't one except for a narrow ventilation shaft. You hear the men begin to enter the store and rummage around. you pop open the shaft even and begin your tight escape to the unknown", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn on your flashlight and begin to crawl, knowing you'll make noise.", "result": "You slowly crawl across the floor. Thankfully, the men don't hear you. When you get close enough, you stop to listen to what they are saying.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Close the shaft behind you and sit and wait in the darkness.", "result": "You narrowly escape being caught.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look underneath all large items for tools and supplies.", "result": "Hidden away under a shelf you find a hammer, screw driver, and a first aid kit.", "action_results": [{"action": "take the tools and hide them in your bag", "result": "You tend to your cuts and bruises with the first aid kit and using the hammer, screwdriver and scraps from the ruins begin to construct a shelter.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back in the building to see if there are any supplies you missed.", "result": "You go back into the building and look around. You see a saw and nails under the shelf.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Push on your shelter to see if it is sturdy.", "result": "The shelter holds firm and seems very secure.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "leave the tools incase someone else needs them more", "result": "The tools are heavy, and you don't have any use for them right now, so you grab a few bandaids from the first aid kit and move on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go left down the hallway to find a locked door.", "result": "You look for the key to the door. You do not have the key.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go right down the hallway to keep searching.", "result": "You walk down the hallway. It is dark and lonely here.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Keep travelling to find a different storage room.", "result": "You walk to a different door and try to get in but it is locked. You look around to see if you can find the key.", "action_results": [{"action": "Check the under the mat for key", "result": "There is a key there. You use it to open the door and the room is fill with supplies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find something to load supplies into.", "result": "You find a cart, and start to throw supplies into it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Choose which supplies are most valuable and leave the rest.", "result": "You take the canned food and leave the rest. Then you head out the door.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Make noises to see if someone is inside", "result": "Just in case, you bang on the door loudly before listening for any rustling behind it, to see if someone might be waiting for you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Get out your knife and bust down the door.", "result": "The door splinters and falls into the room with a loud bang. As your eyes adjust to the darkness you hear the sound of footsteps approaching rapidly.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Pick the lock.", "result": "The lock won't give, and you get a large cut on your hand in the process.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look for the person who cleaned out the storage room.", "result": "You look around, but see no one. You try calling out, but no one responds.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave the store, see if you can spot tire tracks", "result": "You see tire tracks leading over the hill, towards the ruins where you've seen strange lights at night.", "action_results": [{"action": "go to the light at night", "result": "You approach and hear two voices one male another female.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I decide to stay still", "result": "You start a fire and prepare your last can of food.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Make as much noise as possible", "result": "A person comes running out. She scares you to death.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell her that you mean her no harm.", "result": "She gives you a bewildered look and starts to shriek", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Put your hands up to signify that you're harmless.", "result": "She understands your gesture, but slowly starts to back away from you.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed3.json b/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed3.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a77912 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed3.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "apoc_seed3", "context": "Long ago the bombs fell and the world ended. You are one of the few who is still alive. You are trying to survive by scavenging among the ruins of what is left behind. ", "first_story_block": "As you leave the store you notice movement out behind your car. A man steps out with a hungry look in his eyes. His clothes are in tatters and he is carrying a crowbar.", "action_results": [{"action": "run at the man and attack him.", "result": "You run forward to attack the man. His crowbar crashes into your chest and you fall to the ground. He kicks you a few times and then grabs your granola bars and runs off.", "action_results": [{"action": "go after him.", "result": "You go after him. As you try and stand up though you realize you're in extreme pain. You think one of your ribs is broken. You manage to get yourself on your feet, but realize catching him is impossible. ", "action_results": [{"action": "look for something to wrap your chest with.", "result": "There's nothing around, so you resort to taking off your pants and wrapping it around your chest. There's a mild draft right now...", "action_results": [{"action": "Check for other injuries.", "result": "There are some superficial cuts on the arms, but nothing else seems to be broken.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search for clothes or blankets for warmth.", "result": "There are boxes on shelves on the wall. You check them for supplies and eventually come across a tote full of blankets. You take one of the blankets out of the tote.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wrap it around yourself.", "result": "You are starting to feel warm again. You can feel your fingers.", "action_results": [{"action": "Count your fingers just for fun.", "result": "You warm up for a bit before collecting more supplies.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Turn the boxes into shoes.", "result": "You remove the boxes from the shelves, placing two on your feet as makeshift shoes. Your feet begin to warm up.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Stuff it in your bag.", "result": "Your bag is now too full to hold anything else so you remove the other contents so all you are carrying is the blanket. You look around for something to use as a second bag.", "action_results": [{"action": "Make a rucksack out of a dirty blanket.", "result": "The blanket has too many holes, and will not hold anything.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Create a backpack out of the cardboard box.", "result": "While the cardboard box is uncomfortable, it serves its purpose to carry your supplies.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Find water and rinse the exposed limbs to help clean cuts.", "result": "The water is freezing cold, but at least it helps you recover from the shock of being so brutally attacked.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dry off and build a fire.", "result": "The fire comforts you for a brief moment.", "action_results": [{"action": "Watch as the fire comes to life and begins to chase you.", "result": "You decide to go look for food and water after regaining strength.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Fall asleep by the fire.", "result": "You stay warm throughout the night and wake up to begin the day. Hunting for food and water is on your agenda.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "i go to the store", "result": "I am unable to find anything valuable to scavange.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "go to the store", "result": "You reach the long abandoned store hoping that you might find food or other supplies still left inside. The windows are shattered, probably from previous scavangers.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Dry off and keep moving.", "result": "It is starting to get dark. You must find shelter soon. As you come up over the hill you see a cave. Looks like a good place for shelter.", "action_results": [{"action": "Walk into the cave.", "result": "You walk into the cave and quickly look around to make sure that the cave is safe.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Keep walking, leave the cave behind.", "result": "You end up sleeping outside unprotected.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look around you", "result": "There's a small river on your left, running along the road. On your right you can see a huge building a couple of miles away.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stop to take a closer look at the river bank.", "result": "There must be animals near the river, looking for water, so you sit quietly near the bank in the hopes of fresh meat.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find something to use as a weapon.", "result": "You look around for a weapon. You pick up a large stick from the ground.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Refill your water bottle from the river.", "result": "You bring the bottle to your mouth. The water is muddy, but it's refreshing.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Pass by the river and head for the huge building.", "result": "You need water, but the river is probably contaminated. You decide to search for bottled water in what looks like an office building ahead.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stand outside the building with raised hands.", "result": "Nothing is accomplished by raising your hands. You put them back down and look around.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stand outside the building and yell \"Is anyone in there?\"", "result": "You don't hear any response, so you cautiously approach the building entrance.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Lie down and groan", "result": "There is no response and no sound except the sound of the wind blowing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try and get back up.", "result": "You manage to get up, but you feel faint.", "action_results": [{"action": "Feel the back of your head to see if you're bleeding.", "result": "AS you look at your hand there is only a glimpse of fresh blood.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Look around to see what attacked you.", "result": "You see no-one but you feel distinctly uneasy. You get up and tentatively walk a few steps.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Start crying.", "result": "A dirty and emaciated dog appears in answer to your cries.", "action_results": [{"action": "Scratch behind it ears.", "result": "The dog seems to like that. You decide to keep him. You'll name him Mr. Fluffy.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Follow the dog to water and food.", "result": "The dog shows you where the food and water is. You collect as much as you can in your bag.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Look around for ways to make the room warmer.", "result": "At that moment Someone runs in yielding a blanket and lantern.", "action_results": [{"action": "grab gun", "result": "You take the gun and aim it. You recognize the person that is walking in, so you put the gun down.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask what their business is", "result": "You tell them that this is your place, and there isn't much to share. You ask if they plan to stay, while glancing at your gun.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait for their answer.", "result": "They tell you they are hungry and ask if you have any food to spare.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Put the gun back into the holster.", "result": "The other person brandishes a knife, and lunges at you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Ask what supplies they have", "result": "The grizzled trader does not have much to offer. Except, he says, with a wily smile, for an old map that you might be interested in. Not just any map, but one that might lead to a major survival cache, if you survive the trip.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask how much the map is", "result": "The man tells you the map is not for sell. You will have to find something else to trade for it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take out your gun and threaten the trader", "result": "The man raises his hands in alarm. He gives you the map and runs away.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "yell \"who's there\"", "result": "You listen, but no one answers. You look around to see if there is a place for you to hide.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hide and wait to see what the person does.", "result": "The person finds you, runs up to you and hits you on the head with the lantern.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pass out.", "result": "You awaken in the dark. Your vision is blurry, but you make out the shapes of two human-like figures illuminated by candelight.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Scream in anger and fight back.", "result": "You wreste a few moments and see your opening for an attack.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "yell \"I'm armed! Don't come any closer!\"", "result": "You chamber one the precious 5.56 rounds into your scarred but reliable rifle. You don't want to shoot if you don't have to, and try one more time to get a response.", "action_results": [{"action": "yell again aiming the shotgun where the noise came from", "result": "The shotgun blasts through the air. You hear someone yell.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "shoot up", "result": "Find an animal that I can now eat for dinner.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Take the blanket and lantern from person", "result": "You feel a lot warmer, the light from the lantern glints against a piece of metal in the corner of the ruins. You pick it up to find a can of tinned tuna.", "action_results": [{"action": "Eat the tuna.", "result": "look for more stuff", "action_results": [{"action": "Check the expiration date on the tuna.", "result": "The tuna expired 11 years ago. God, how the world has moved on.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Put your matches in the old tuna tin.", "result": "Take off your shoes and try to relax.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You find some evaporated milk", "result": "look for people", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You find a torn piece of paper", "result": "You try to read what is written but it appears to be in a foreign language. You put it in your pocket in hopes someone else can understand it.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Put the can in the backpack.", "result": "Your stomach begins to grumble as you think about the tuna in your bag but you have no can opener.", "action_results": [{"action": "look for a something sharp to cut the can open.", "result": "You find a rock that you could use to smash the can open.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Continue walking looking for more food.", "result": "You come across an abandoned backpack and reach inside to find a box of crackers", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Ask to use the blanket and lantern the person has", "result": "The newcomer looks shocked to find you there, and runs back out, screaming for help.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow them and explain I am not a threat", "result": "right now everyone is afraid but they need help", "action_results": [{"action": "Jump behind some bushes to determine if there is danger.", "result": "You watch from the bush. You are able to see everything that is going on.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Throw hands in the area to signify that there is no threat.", "result": "You slowly approach into the camp, talking in a pleasant, reassuring voice, your empty hands up.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Sit and wait", "result": "Suddenly, six more newcomers arrive. They look angry.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pull out the gun.", "result": "The six newcomers stop and eye you cautiously.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Smile and pull up your open hands.", "result": "One of the men walk up to you and take your bag. You die a little inside, but want to stay on their good side.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Check for other injuries.", "result": "You're severely bleeding from the right calf: taking off the pants exposed the deep cut, and the blood is pouring down into the shoe. Moving around won't be easy, nor pleasurable.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to find a kit to stop the bleeding.", "result": "You open the kit and try to find bandages. You find the bandages and open the package and begin wrapping it around your wound.", "action_results": [{"action": "Eat some food to regain strength.", "result": "The food leaves you feeling more energized and the wounds do not hurt quite as much.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the area for firewood.", "result": "You obtain firewood and begin to set up camp for the night", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Search the area for a comfortable place to rest for the night.", "result": "You find a place nestled in the trees. You'd rather stay in a building, but the trees will offer enough shelter.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take a nap to regain strength.", "result": "You wake up hours later, feeling much better.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reach for the first aid kit.", "result": "You open the kit. There is nothing in there that you can use.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Unwrap your wound to take a look.", "result": "You tenderly remove your wound coverings to see how your wound is healing. You gasp from the pain.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Bandage your calf with your pants and keep moving.", "result": "Every single step sends painful shockwaves through your body, but you need to get off the road immediately.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find Pain Med's", "result": "crawl to survive and find destiny", "action_results": [{"action": "Lay on the ground, waiting for the end.", "result": "You wake up hours later covered in your own vomit. You look around wondering how you are still alive.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Slap yourself to avoid fainting.", "result": "Ouch! That hurt. At least you are awake now.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Look for survivors that possibly have medical experience", "result": "There is no one around, and you feel worse and worse.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find the closest area that will provide shelter for you to rest and gain some strength to look for medical supplies.", "result": "You begin your search the next day to look for food, medicine and water.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Start searching for anything that can aid you in providing first aid to your injury before expending the little energy you have left.", "result": "Exhausted from the search, you fall over and gasp for air.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Find materials to make a tourniquet to stop the bleeding.", "result": "You look around and see a medical kit. You open it up and find bandages. You use those to wrap around the wound.", "action_results": [{"action": "look for more supplies that can be used to further wrap the wound", "result": "Next to the medical kit is a stack of towels. You try to tear them into strips to wrap your wound further.", "action_results": [{"action": "Put some extra towels in your bag.", "result": "Gather belongings and stand up. Head out to search for food.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use the other towels as a pillow and lie down to rest your wound.", "result": "You wrap up the other towels into a makeshift pillow. You put your head down to rest.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "take a nap and rest", "result": "Rest to recover, but you haven't eaten anything yet and you're kinda weak", "action_results": [{"action": "Chop off your leg for something to eat.", "result": "Arrrrrgh! The pain is unbelievable. You hack a piece of meat off of your leg and try to eat it. Unfortunately, you vomit and are in a worse predicament.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Set up a snare to catch an animal.", "result": "It worked! You have a rabbit in the net. You think it will make a fine meal.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Clean and dress the wound with items available.", "result": "The wound feels better. You wrap some material around your leg to protect it even more.", "action_results": [{"action": "continue to search for supplies", "result": "There's some pieces of hard wood that could be used to splint the leg.", "action_results": [{"action": "Creat a makeshift crutch.", "result": "It's easier to walk using the crutch. You try to keep the weight off of your leg.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Pick up the wood.", "result": "You pick up the wood. It feels brittle to your touch.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Instead of using the wood for a splint it is better used as a fire to keep warm for the night so you begin trying to gather anything around that will help keep the fire going.", "result": "Your leg feels even sorer the next morning.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "The wound feels better so you skip the leg splint and keep searching for other supplies- you find a lighter and a few canned goods.", "result": "You decide to start a fire and cook some of the food you found.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "lay down and rest", "result": "You do not want to get up because your calf is throbbing so you decide to stay put until morning.", "action_results": [{"action": "sleep peacefully", "result": "When you awake there is a loud bang outside.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "stay alert all night", "result": "You manage to stay up all night. However, now you feel more tired than ever.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Look around for ways to make the room warmer.", "result": "You look around but you're starting to get faint and light headed. Your last thought in the split second before you pass out was to wonder if you'll have enough air by the time you hopefully wake up.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay calm to not waste oxygen.", "result": "You wake up and are in another room. You have been saved by a girl.", "action_results": [{"action": "it should be saved my batchmate", "result": "My batchmate and I join forces.", "action_results": [{"action": "Develop a plan for survival together.", "result": "You begin to scout locations for a stronghold and divide remaining supplies to be shared equally.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Spy on the girl to make sure that she is trustworthy.", "result": "You see that she is making a deal with your sworn enemy.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "thee must be last surivor so she helped me", "result": "You team up with this girl to increase chance of surviving.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask your new partner if she has any special skills.", "result": "The girl explains to you that her father was locksmith before the bombs fell, and he taught her everything he knew. She can pick or bypass almost any lock. She can even hotwire cars, if you should be so lucky to find one that still has a working battery.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Tell her that you are grateful that she saved your life.", "result": "She gives you a knapsack filled with survival supplies.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look for an escape route while simultaneously looking for clothing.", "result": "There's a room with a light on a few yards away and it looks warm. You try to find the strength to pull yourself up.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go into the room with the light", "result": "You see a candle burning on a small table. You walk over to the table.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look around the room.", "result": "There are many items in the room. You look at them carefully.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Pick up the candle.", "result": "The candle breaks in your hands. You drop it back down to the floor.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Pass out somewhere where you can hide", "result": "Vivimos en un mundo maravilloso que est\u00e1 lleno de belleza, encanto y aventura. No hay fin a las aventuras que podemos tener, si s\u00f3lo las buscamos con los ojos abiertos", "action_results": [{"action": "Knock on your skull and question why you suddenly know spanish.", "result": "You have faint memories of a childhood long forgotten. Your mother knew spanish, at least you think that is correct, your memories are a bit hazy. Perhaps you should try to trigger these memories.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Search for the power source of the light.", "result": "You walk toward the light. As you get closer, the light gets brighter.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Quickly find a place where you can get fresh air.", "result": "You crawl towards the door and manage to prise it open using the little strength that is still available, you reach fresh air just before you suffocate.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the deepest breath ever", "result": "You are overcome with relief and feel a surge of energy after breathing the air in.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sit there breathing in oxygen for a short while.", "result": "You feel better after you take in the air. You slowly get back up.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Head back into the suffocating building to keep looking.", "result": "You go back down into the building's basement, and your old Maglite flashlight catches a faint reflection on the wall. It is an old sign, coated with years of dust. It reads \"Fallout Shelter.\"", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Use flashlight to hold door open to regain strength", "result": "You are able to get all the way out the door. You see a guy walking toward you.", "action_results": [{"action": "keep head down and hope you are not seen", "result": "You keep walking, but the guy introduces himself. He seem friendly and you have a conversation about what to do next.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "raise head and ask for help", "result": "You call for help but the man looks away. You yell louder to get his attention.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Find a cool washcloth and some water to help you from fainting", "result": "You put the washcloth on your neck. It's cool and it perks you up right away.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stand up and keep moving.", "result": "You move through the corridor, desperately looking for a way out. You come to an intersection.", "action_results": [{"action": "turn right at the intersection.", "result": "Their is no clear sign of what direction you should be going. You know you are lost. You come to a second intersection.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "turn left at the intersection.", "result": "You notice a number of doors lining this hall of the corridor. One hangs partially open.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take a break and catch your breath.", "result": "A light gust of wind hits your face, coming from the North.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pump your fist in the air and head off into the wilderness to find some food. he", "result": "When you get into the woods, you find a berry bush. You try one hoping that it isn't poisonous.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "The smell of smoke lingers in the air, go investigate its source.", "result": "You discover the remains of a recently extinguished campfire.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed4.json b/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed4.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a636ff4 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/apoc_seed4.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "apoc_seed4", "context": "Long ago the bombs fell and the world ended. You are one of the few who is still alive. You are trying to survive by scavenging among the ruins of what is left behind. ", "first_story_block": "You walk for two hours and take a break. You've left the town you were in and are now in a more rural area. There's a farmhouse to your right and a forest on your left. ", "action_results": [{"action": "go in the farmhouse and look for food.", "result": "You try to open the farmhouse front door, but it's locked. There's a broken window on the right and a shed behind the house.", "action_results": [{"action": "go through the window into the farmhouse. ", "result": "You break the rest of the glass in the window and try to carefully crawl through. You cut yourself on the edges as you're climbing in, but you make it inside. ", "action_results": [{"action": "search the farmhouse for food. ", "result": "You find meat in the fridge that looks like it's gone bad. You also find a can of peas in the bottom of the pantry.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the farmhouse for tools and utencils.", "result": "You find a broom in the closet and a wooden spoon in the cupboard.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open the van of peas and use the wooden spoon to eat.", "result": "You get the can of peas open and use the wooden spoon to take a bite of them. They taste horrible, but you are so hungry that you hardly notice.", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep eating the peas.", "result": "As you finish the peas, you feel your stomach begin to turn, and know you are in trouble. You quickly look around for medicine.", "action_results": [{"action": "Force yourself to vomit out the peas.", "result": "You turn to the nearest bush and release the contents of your stomach, the pain subsides but the hunger returns.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Try to find a place to lie down.", "result": "You lie down in a chair in the corner. It's uncomfortable, but you still fall asleep.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Spit the peas onto the ground and stop eating them.", "result": "You begin to feel nauseous and vomit.", "action_results": [{"action": "realize this is from eating after a long time of not eating and force down the peas", "result": "You fight through the nausea and keep the food down.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "throw the can and it bounces off a case of vegetables you hurriedly rush over to.", "result": "Looking over the vegetables you feel they are by far uneatable.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Sharpen the broom handle into a weapon for protection and use the broom head as a fire starter.", "result": "You put the broom into your bag and carry it around in case you need to protect yourself.", "action_results": [{"action": "Move to bedroom to find more stuff", "result": "As you enter the bedroom, you lead with the sharpened broom handle. Luckily it is empty, and you quickly pack up a blanket and jacket you find in the closet.", "action_results": [{"action": "there are thermals to wear in the drawers", "result": "It's warm. You are glad that you found the jacket.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "there are arrows to pick up on the ground", "result": "You walk outside. There is a deadly silence in the air.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Try to fit some shoes in your bag that is quickly filling up.", "result": "You open the bag. find some shoe which is Ok for the time being. You wear it", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Turn around to pick up your broom.", "result": "You then hear a loud crashing sound coming from nearbye.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Check that doors are locked", "result": "You find one door is unlocked, leading you to a dark staircase.", "action_results": [{"action": "go down the stairs", "result": "You walk down the dark staircase, cobwebs choking you as you struggle to see.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "close the door without going through the doorway", "result": "You continue walking through the building. You hear a noise and pull out your broom.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "take the spoon and the broom", "result": "A man appears from another room in the house.", "action_results": [{"action": "Confront him - maybe he has things you can steal.", "result": "You pull out your gun and ask the man what he is doing there. You notice his bag, and tell him to empty it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Knock the man unconscious.", "result": "You tie the man up to a chair and wait for him to awaken. You ask him questions about supplies and other information that may be valuable.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Browse through the stuff the man pulled out of the bag.", "result": "You find nothing of particular value, just the essentials to survive in this wasteland. You notice the man seems almost afraid.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Run away.", "result": "You burst through the front door of the house, knowing the man won't take kindly to you stealing the few things he had left.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look behind yourself to see if he's chasing you.", "result": "You check behind you, but no one is there. You are able to slow down.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Run as fast as you can towards the nearest suitable hiding place.", "result": "You come across another home some distance away. You hope you can stay for at least awhile as from the looks of it no one else has been here.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "examine the spoon", "result": "There's a name carved in the wood: Paolo.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the broom as a weapon", "result": "As I round the corner there is a man standing there. I can only assume it is Paolo.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask Paolo to join you in your quest for survival.", "result": "Paolo asks what his reward will be.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Hit Paolo in the head with the broom, knocking him unconscious, then leave a note thanking him for the gift.", "result": "As you leave the feeling of guilt hits you like a bullet. It also passes as quickly as it came along. Fuck Paolo.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Try to find Paolo to be not alone anymore", "result": "Seeing signs of another person gives you hope someone may be out there, even if it is just a sign they were there in the past. You call out for Paolo, and listen in anticipation.", "action_results": [{"action": "Check another building.", "result": "There are no signs of Paolo, or anyone else in the building.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Give up as Paolo probably died a long time ago.", "result": "You start to get despondent, but quickly realize that you need to continue.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Search the farmhouse for other usable supplies.", "result": "You find a medikit, and a flashlight with no batteries.", "action_results": [{"action": "Examine medikit.", "result": "The medikit is very basic. Still it can come in handy. You decide to take it with you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Put the medikit into your bag and move on", "result": "You come across a girl lying on the ground. You walk over to her.", "action_results": [{"action": "Check if she is sleeping.", "result": "As you approach you see she is indeed sleeping.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Yell out \"Hey get up!\"", "result": "You stand over the girl and pour water on her.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Examine flashlight", "result": "It's a large flashlight, if it had batteries it would probably light up a whole room.", "action_results": [{"action": "use the flashlight to look for other supplies", "result": "You search the other rooms using your flashlight. You come across some bottles of water and put them in your bag.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "use the flashlight to make signals to find other people", "result": "You blink the flashlight off and on. Eventually, someone calls out to you. \"Who's there?\" you ask.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Take flashlight.", "result": "You go back outside, and you notice the sun is setting: it's a bit darker already.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look in bag for batteries", "result": "You find some batteries and put them into the flashlight and switch in on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search for shelter for the night.", "result": "You notice a pile of rubble with some large boards, a coutch and a fallen tree. You are able to move some of the debris and create a crevis inside the wrekage. This looks like it could be a safe place for you to sleep tonight.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use flashlight to look around for anything you might have missed due to darkness.", "result": "You find an old doll with one missing eye.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Return inside for the night", "result": "It is dark in here so you switch the flashlight on and scan your surroundings looking for a good spot to lie down and sleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to a corner and sleep on the floor.", "result": "You try sleeping, but the floor is too hard. You look around to see if there is a better place to sleep.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Look for something comfortable to lay on.", "result": "You don't find anything right away, so you lie down in the corner.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Take the medkit.", "result": "You put the medkit in your bag. You know you will probably need it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep walking.", "result": "with things in the backpack is getting prepared for the unusual situations", "action_results": [{"action": "Search for any signs of other survivors.", "result": "You see footprints leading off to the west.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Look for a vehicle that still has fuel.", "result": "You find a collection of rusted vehicles, none of which look too promising.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take a break to get more energy.", "result": "needs rest because things can complicate", "action_results": [{"action": "Get back on the road.", "result": "A pack of wild crows decends upson you tearing at your flesh. They are hungry, ravenous for blood.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Try and get some sleep.", "result": "will become energertic", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Take the flashlight and keep looking for batteries.", "result": "You find batteries in an old rusty box, but they are the wrong size.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for more batteries.", "result": "While you are looking for more batteries, a voice behind you says \"Looking for something?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Raise your hands slowly.", "result": "The voice tells you to lower your hands. \"I'm friendly. . It's alright,\" he says.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Turn around in shock.", "result": "You see a pretty, though terrified, woman with her gun drawn and pointed at you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take these batteries and plan to barter them later.", "result": "You store the batteries in your bag next to the still useless flashlight. Maybe someone will need them and have the size you're looking for.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for further useful things.", "result": "You dig around in the area and find a map and a canteen. You put these in your bag.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Make an inventory of what you have in the bag.", "result": "After collecting inventory, you make your way back outside.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "eat meat", "result": "Nausea sets in immediately.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try shoving fingers down throat to force vomiting.", "result": "You throw up the rotten meat on the floor. You feel awful and are more dehydrated and hungry than before.", "action_results": [{"action": "start searching for some liquid to drink", "result": "You spy a flash of red beneath a collapsed wall. It is a precious can of Coca-Cola. It is worth a good bit in trade, but you guzzle it down nonetheless.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue to search through the rubble of the collapsed wall.", "result": "You find a plethora of boxes of macaroni and cheese. It's the kind of macaroni and cheese that you only need to add water to.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Put the empty can in your backpack.", "result": "You intend on using the empty can for scrap metal later on.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "try calling out for help", "result": "No one answers from the darkness.", "action_results": [{"action": "there are potions everywhere that are not marked", "result": "You open the largest bottle to see what is inside, sniffing cautiously.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "there is a response from far away", "result": "You shout again, hoping to hear more.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Set the meat outside as bait.", "result": "You here someone Call out to you", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Scream out in agony and defeat.", "result": "You pass out. The pain is too much to bear.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Find a good place to rest until the nausea passes, or sickness worsens.", "result": "You lay down on the floor and fall asleep", "action_results": [{"action": "Rest until I feel better", "result": "When you awaken the sun is bright. It is morning.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head for the forest and find something to forage.", "result": "While hunting for berries and fruit you stumble upon a pond. You decide to make a fishing rod.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Head towards the decaying city to scavenge for the last scraps of food and supplies.", "result": "You discover some canned goods below some rubble.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Panic and look for people", "result": "There is no one to be found. You take a few deep breaths and try to calm yourself.", "action_results": [{"action": "Yell out as loud as you can \"Anybody out there??\"", "result": "You don't hear anyone right away.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Come to terms with your loneliness.", "result": "You realize that if you are to live on your own, you need to find a way to survive and gather the necessities of life.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Expel the rotten meat from your body.", "result": "You put the can of peas in your backpack, right now you're feeling too sick to eat them.", "action_results": [{"action": "pretend death by starving, eat the rotten meat", "result": "The rotten meat sets off another wave of nausea, but you keep it down this time. The apocalypse has done wonders for fortifying your guts.", "action_results": [{"action": "Walk out of the room.", "result": "You leave the room and head outside. There is a cool breeze and it feels much better there.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Burp loudly.", "result": "You begin to vomit uncontrollably", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Eat the peas later", "result": "You wait until the nausea subsides and for your hunger to return before prying open your can of peas to eat them as you continue to look for supplies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Throw up because you hate peas.", "result": "You wipe the vomit away from your mouth and begin to feel dizzy.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use the can to store your powerstones you find.", "result": "You find gauze and bandages in a medicine cabinet along with some acetaminophen. It's expired, but you put it in your pack anyways.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Try to eat the peas to alleviate the nausea.", "result": "You take a bite of the peas, but your stomach turns. You look away as you empty your stomach out on the ground.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find more food.", "result": "You quickly rush to the other side of the store to see if anything else remained. You see a box of crackers under a shelf, and eat them, now hungrier than ever, despite the nausea.", "action_results": [{"action": "Check the store storage room to see if there are any items.", "result": "You feel a little stronger and walk over to the storage room to search for essentials, including medicine.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Walk to the next store and search it.", "result": "You look over all the shelves at the next store. You manage to find a ton of food there. You laugh, knowing that you found the jackpot.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go to sleep.", "result": "When you wake up, your stomach still hurts, but you feel more energetic.", "action_results": [{"action": "Lick the food off of the ground.", "result": "After eating, you feel nauseous.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use the can as a hat.", "result": "The can makes a poor hat, but you re-use it to collect some berries growing along the side of the road.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "eat peas", "result": "The peas were delicious.", "action_results": [{"action": "Consider eating the meat too.", "result": "You do not eat the meat because you don't want to get sick and not be able to scavenge.", "action_results": [{"action": "Use the meat as bait to catch prey.", "result": "You figure animals might have stronger stomachs, and with your bow and arrow in hand, you leave the meat near the edge of the woods, and hide behind the nearest shed.", "action_results": [{"action": "a friendly dog comes to sniff the meat and becomes a companion", "result": "You realize that there is a apple tree right there.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "a mean and growling dog sniffs at the meat", "result": "You back away from the dog. He might need the meat more than you do.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Fire at the first animal that comes, no matter what.", "result": "You hear a rustle. You shoot at the shadowy figure. A person yells out. What have you done?", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take a nap while you wait.", "result": "You are awoken by the sounds of broken twigs close by.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Look for something else to eat.", "result": "You find a can of peaches in a abandoned building. You open it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Eat one slice of peach to see if it's still good.", "result": "You wait 10 minutes. You feel fine. You eat the rest of the peaches like they are candy from heaven.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Smell the peaches.", "result": "The peaches smell okay. You look around for a utinsil to eat them with.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Leave the meat and look for food elsewhere.", "result": "You know the meat was probably bad, but your stomach still rumbles. You hope that you can find some more food elsewhere.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search for fire making material", "result": "Inside a partially collapsed building, you find furniture, lots of it. It must have been a furniture store. To think, people paid good money for this stuff. Now money no longer matters, and all this fancy furniture is good for is burning.", "action_results": [{"action": "Note the location of the furniture store in your notebook, it's a good place to sleep.", "result": "You continue down the abandoned street, looking for signs of life.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Find dining chairs to break into firewood.", "result": "The chairs break easily and you find yourself highly ammused for the first time in days smashing the chairs into pieces.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Wrap meat and put in knapsack for future cooking", "result": "as a result of not finding any other food i done it and it was prepared nice", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to cook the meat over a fire.", "result": "You cook the meat thouroughly and enjoy your meal.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Smell the meat to see how bad it is.", "result": "The meat smells sulfur, like rotten eggs.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Examine meat.", "result": "The meat is smelling bad, but you decide not to throw it away: it may be useful as bait, or for something else.", "action_results": [{"action": "put the meat in your backpack", "result": "The scent of the meat attracts insects and they swarm around your head.", "action_results": [{"action": "decide to cook it and light a fire", "result": "The fire is lit. You put the meat on a twig and cook it over the fire. You take a bite and spit it out. It's horrible.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "throw it down disgusted.", "result": "You abandon the meat, it isn't worth the risk.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "cook the meat immediately so it doesnt spoil anymore", "result": "You store the meat away and venture to the nearest trader. You exchange part of the meat for the new universal currency, 5.56 rounds, of which you receive 10. That's 10 more than you had for your battered AR rifle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask the trader what they have for sale.", "result": "The trader shows you what they have. You look over the items.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Try to start a business deal with the trader where you provide goods in exchange for food.", "result": "Trader wants to see more food before agreeing to trade.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Look behind fridge.", "result": "You look behind the fridge and find several other cans. You wonder if the cans may have fallen behind the fridge. You stuff them into your bag.", "action_results": [{"action": "continue searching for more food", "result": "You dare to open the fridge, but only encounter a horrible smell. You close the door and continue the search.", "action_results": [{"action": "try to move the fridge", "result": "It's too heavy. You begin to look around for a dolly to move it with.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "The fridge door pops open and rotten food falls out.", "result": "You can hear the quick approach of wild animals who have been drawn by the smell of rotting food.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "go outside and open a can of peas", "result": "You know you should ration, but the peas were so delicious, you decide to have another can. With enough food in your bag, now, you head outside to enjoy some sun as you continue your lunch. Luckily, these peas look as appetizing as the last can.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for water.", "result": "Take a moment to reflect upon life.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take some time to enjoy the moment.", "result": "It's a nice day. Too bad you have work to do.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/build_training_data.py b/data/scraper/stories/build_training_data.py index 70deb2d..29d1f77 100644 --- a/data/scraper/stories/build_training_data.py +++ b/data/scraper/stories/build_training_data.py @@ -33,16 +33,19 @@ def get_stories(filename): output_file_path = "text_adventures.txt" with open(output_file_path, 'w') as output_file: - filenames = ["story" + str(i) + ".json" for i in range(1,20)] + filenames = ["story" + str(i) + ".json" for i in range(0,69)] + filenames += ["apoc_seed" + str(i) + ".json" for i in range(1,5)] stories = [] for filename in filenames: stories += get_stories(filename) + print(len(stories)) raw_text = "" start_token = "<|startoftext|>" end_token = "<|endoftext|>" for story in stories: raw_text += start_token + story + end_token + "\n" + print(len(raw_text)) output_file.write(raw_text) diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story20.json b/data/scraper/stories/story20.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c8c0ef --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story20.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=7480", "context": "", "first_story_block": "You wake up in your cabin in the woods. You sit up and scratch some fleas that have infested your body. You also realize its still daylight. You hate waking up early.\n\nYou lope into the bathroom and look in the mirror where you see a canine face covered in gray fur, you remember a time when your fur was completely brown.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re getting old Wolf\u201d you say to yourself like you always do while trying to look on the bright side that at least you don\u2019t have the mange. You think you\u2019d just put a silver bullet in your head if you ever started to go bald.\n\nAfter eating some left over mutton in the fridge and some Gummy Blobs (for the sugar \u201cpick me up\u201d) you ponder how you\u2019re going to pay this month\u2019s rent on your cabin. You call your agent Erik and see if that little pissant has found any work for you. Hopefully it\u2019s an actual job and not just a guest speaker spot at a comic convention.\n\n\u201cErik! It\u2019s me Wolf! Pick up the fucking phone! I know you\u2019re there!\u201d you say when you get the answering machine.\n\n\u201cErik! Get on the phone NOW, or I\u2019m gonna go over there and shove a pipe organ up your ass!\u201d\n\nThat got his attention.\n\n\u201cWolf, I\u2019m sorry, but I fear I\u2019m in a deep depression.\u201d\n\u201cWhat else is new? Look I need some work, got anything? I don\u2019t even care if it\u2019s straight to video. I just need some of the green stuff!\u201d\n\u201cSadly, I don\u2019t think I do, but then I haven\u2019t really checked\u2026I\u2019m so depressed. I\u2019ve been wondering if I made the right decisions in my life\u2026and now it\u2019s too late for me to do anything about it, because I\u2019m old\u2026\u201d\n\u201cJoin the fucking club Erik! Look do you\u2026\u201d\n\u201cBut my art, my music, that is my love and its failing me again. My latest opera isn\u2019t doing well. I wonder if I chose the wrong thing to love and pursue. Just like I did with Christine. Oh Christine WHY couldn\u2019t you have loved me? I loved you\u2026\u201d\n\nWonderful, he\u2019s in full blown tortured artist mode. He can go on like this forever. You can either give up, or persist in getting something out of him.", "action_results": [{"action": "Persist", "result": "\u201cOh boo fucking hoo, your latest Opera hasn\u2019t been doing too well lately. At least people are paying to see the goddamn thing! As bad of a composer, and musician you are, you oughta be glad anyone\u2019s even paying to see the goddamn thing! People don\u2019t want to see anything with me in it! And at least you\u2019ve got another job to fall back on LIKE BEING AN AGENT THAT\u2019S SUPPOSED TO BE GETTING ME A FUCKING JOB!\u201d you snarl.\n\nThere\u2019s some dead air briefly and then Erik begins talking again.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re right. I shouldn\u2019t be complaining about my problems to you. You of course know all about torment. A war that wages within you, a beast that\u2026\u201d\n\u201cErik I\u2019ve got no time and I\u2019m in no mood to hear how we\u2019re supposed to be kindred spirits, you just better tell me you found something for me and it better not be another guest speaker spot at a comic convention!\u201d\n\u201cWell let\u2019s see\u2026I dunno. Werewolves aren\u2019t popular anymore you know\u2026there might be something\u2026here it is! It\u2019s called Wolf Pack.\u201d\n\u201cPack? That implies more than one wolf on the set there Erik. Well I suppose I can share the spotlight with some others. As long as I\u2019m in charge of course.\u201d You say.\n\u201cEr\u2026well according to this, you\u2019d be the old cranky grandpa wolf that makes a bunch of rude remarks.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?! What kind of stupid shit is that?\u201d\n\u201cYeah that\u2019s the stuff.\u201d Erik replies not catching on.\n\u201cI mean what the hell kind of movie is this?\u201d\n\u201cIts uh\u2026let\u2019s see\u2026oh here. It\u2019s a horror comedy about a werewolf family and how they\nadjust to human society. Looks like you\u2019ll be playing with a lot of young pups as you\u2019d call them.\u201d\n\u201cWHAT?! NO! What the fuck Erik? I\u2019m a fucking monster not something to be fucking laughed at! And they already did a movie like that a long time ago and it sucked!\u201d\n\u201cWell that\u2019s all I got. Maybe you could talk to the director to make changes since they also wrote it. I\u2019m sure you and her are familiar with each other. You had an affair with her for quite some time.\u201d\n\u201cUh, you wanna narrow that list down Erik?\u201d\n\u201cIt\u2019s Mary. You know, the one who used to be married to Frankie, until your affair broke up both of your marriages?\u201d\n\nErik\u2019s new information didn\u2019t exactly make you any more enthusiastic to want to take the job.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the job anyway", "result": "\u201cAlright I\u2019ll take the job, just tell me where its at.\u201d You say.\n\nAfter Erik gives you the information, you ride your Harley to the studio.\n\nWhen you arrive on the set, you see a bunch of snot nosed wolflings hanging around trying to look \u201ctough\u201d. Some of them are in human form, but you can smell them for who they truly are though. These cubs today, you swear they would\u2019ve never lasted back in the old days. All flash and nothing to back it up. (Though you don\u2019t mind looking at the young females that are there) That\u2019s why they hang out in packs. You never did that even when you were young. You were always a lone wolf.\n\n\u201cHey who\u2019s the fossil?\u201d one of them asks.\n\u201cHey Grandpa, the remake of Old Yellow is next door!\u201d\n\nThis causes a howl of laughter from all of them, until you confront the one who said it. Probably the leader no doubt. Not even in wolf form. Pathetic.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m going to give you time to transform into a more adequate fighting form before I neuter you.\u201d You calmly explain.\n\u201cYou? You\u2019re like 300 years old! I could take\u2026\u201d\n\nCan\u2019t say you didn\u2019t give him a chance.\n\nYou immediately pounce on him, knocking him down while clamping your jaws on his face and digging your fangs in.\n\n\u201cHOLY SHIT DUDE!\u201d one of them shouts.\n\u201cOh my god he\u2019s killing him!\u201d a female screams.\n\u201cGet him off of him, get him off of him!\u201d\n\nWhile them all attempt to pull you off of their leader you hear a familiar voice that gets your attention.\n\n\u201cWell, I see Erik passed my script over to you, good. I\u2019m also glad to see you\u2019re still as anti-social as usual Wolf.\u201d Mary says as you finally get off of your misguided heckler and approach her. She still looks the same, though she looks a lot better now that she got rid of that hair style she used to have and dyed it blonde.\n\u201cJust re-establishing the proper hierarchy, nothing more.\u201d\n\u201cHmm, always the Alpha Male, that was what I always loved about you. So primal. Maybe later I can dress in a little red cloak and we can reenact a fairy tale.\u201d\n\u201cSome fairy tale, as I remember you loved a lot of beings.\u201d\n\u201cHey I can\u2019t help who I am. I was created this way.\u201d\n\u201cJust like Frankie eh?\u201d\n\u201cDon\u2019t you compare me to that sicko! Yes we are controlled by our genetics to a certain degree, but as you damn well know I rose above them! I made my own identity. I\u2019m a successful director and writer now, so what if I have a healthy sexual appetite? There\u2019s nothing wrong with that, I\u2019m sure you\u2019d agree given all the beings you had your way with before, after and DURING your marriage!\u201d\n\u201cLook never mind all that. I got a real problem with this film.\u201d You say side stepping her correct accusation.\n\u201cWhat\u2019s wrong with it?\u201d\n\u201cWhat\u2019s wrong with it? Are you kidding me? It sucks! It makes a mockery of werewolves! You even named one of them fucking Benji!\u201d\n\u201cWell comedy is popular now. Plus children like monsters just as long as they aren\u2019t too scary, so I was hoping to make it a family film.\u201d\n\u201cARRGH! I don\u2019t DO family films! This is insulting and demeaning!\u201d\n\u201cHow? Come on Wolf. In most horror movies you\u2019ve made you always got killed in the end by a human, how was that any less demeaning?\u201d\n\u201cBecause at least I was portrayed as feared monster that killed a bunch of people! I can play ball with the humans and their idealistic notion of good always having to overcome evil and all that\u2026but THIS! This makes me into a fucking joke! I can\u2019t even believe you of all people wrote this\u2026no wait I can. You fucking undead don\u2019t have any consideration for anyone, but yourselves.\u201d\n\u201cYou know I\u2019m technically not even undead, I\u2019m created from several dead bodies. I\u2019m more of a golem.\u201d Mary attempts to correct you.\n\u201cWho gives a shit, you\u2019re still basically a walking corpse, and your flesh is dead. You\u2019re Undead in my book.\u201d\n\u201cYou know for someone who hasn\u2019t been able to find a job in months and is basically just rotting away in his little cabin, you\u2019d think that you\u2019d be a little more appreciative. I wrote this with you in mind you hairy bigoted asshole!\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t know whether to take that as an insult or as an attempt for her to try to make amends for the past.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take it as an insult", "result": "\u201cSo you had me in mind eh? Well that proves it. You think I\u2019m a joke because that\u2019s how you wrote the character.\u201d\n\u201cWhat? No! I just\u2026\u201d\n\u201cI see your time with that bloodsucker was well spent. Learning how to exploit and leech right? Look maybe you can pull this shit with those puppies over there, but I ain\u2019t fucking one! I don\u2019t need the money that badly. I\u2019ll go fucking live my twilight years in the forest and DIE there as nature probably intended. I don\u2019t need this shit.\u201d\n\nAs you turn to leave, Mary shouts at you.\n\n\u201cYeah, that\u2019s right go on leave Mr. Lone Wolf! You\u2019ll fucking die alone, you stubborn bastard! I tried to help you! Erik tried to help you and you don\u2019t appreciate any of it! That\u2019s why none of your children speak to you and\u2026\u201d\n\nYou run back over to her and slam her into the wall. You stare at her face to face as she struggles to get free. She\u2019s strong, but you manage to keep her pinned. She really pissed you off and you were already pissed off to begin with.\n\n\u201cFuck you, and fuck Erik! You two don\u2019t know shit about me, never did. I\u2019m through with the pair of you! In fact I think I\u2019ll be taking something with me since you\u2019re so worried about me being alone\u2026\u201d\n\nYou release Mary and go over to the wolflings who look a little worried that you\u2019re going to cause harm to them. Many of them cast their eyes downward.\n\n\u201cHey, you want to be REALLY tough? You want to really raise some hell? Come with me. If you want to stay under the thumb of this patchwork dead bitch and be exploited and mocked, stay here.\n\nYour statement alone convinces all of them. They all follow you, even the one you made an example of. Mary attempts to call everyone back, but it\u2019s useless, you\u2019ve taken control of the pack and they\u2019ll do what you want now.\n\nAnd right now you want to get into a fight. You think about all the people and creatures that wronged you in some way and only two of them keep coming to mind consistently.\n\nOne is that fucking Dr. Victor Frankenstein. If it wasn\u2019t for him, Frankie and Mary wouldn\u2019t have been created in the first place which also means you wouldn\u2019t have gotten yourself into trouble all those years ago. You wouldn\u2019t have had to put up with his \u201cchildren\u201d taking jobs away from you. Not to mention he sued you once.\n\nBut the one who you REALLY despise, is that bisexual bloodsucker. Fucking Dracula or Vlad, or whatever the hell he\u2019s calling himself these days. The disgust you have for him and the reasons are too numerous to list here.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go kick Victor's ass", "result": "Your recent dealings with Mary, have made you think about all the shit you\u2019ve had to put up with from that no talent dickhead. No human has ever given you such trouble. You know he\u2019s still alive. (Mad scientists always find ways of prolonging their lives somehow) That won\u2019t be true for long though, if you get your way. You killed him once before. This time you\u2019re going to make sure he stays that way.\n\nHe\u2019s probably got whatever crappy inventions and experiments protecting his castle and from what you know, Frankie\u2019s still living with his \u201cDad\u201d as well.\n\nYou don\u2019t give a fuck, you\u2019ll kill him too. You figure you\u2019ll be doing the world a favor as well as getting some satisfaction. Besides, you\u2019ve got to show these wolflings what being a werewolf is all about.\n\n\u201cAll right you cubs! We\u2019re going to go raise some fucking hell. We\u2019re going to Frankenstein\u2019s Castle. We\u2019re going to rip the place apart brick by brick, and I\u2019M going to rip Victor apart limb from limb.\u201d\n\u201cErm\u2026Castle Frankenstien? Isn\u2019t that where Frankie lives?\u201d one of the wolflings asks.\n\u201cI heard he\u2019s really powerful, didn\u2019t he fight Dracula and win?\u201d\n\u2018I dunno if we should mess with him.\u201d\n\nYou can\u2019t believe your ears! These snot nosed pups know nothing of their heritage! Back in the old days they would\u2019ve been killed and eaten for such cowardice!\n\n\u201cGoddammit are you Wolves or fucking Chihuahuas? Frankie\u2019s a fucking pussy! I personally kicked his ass before and I\u2019ll do it again all by myself if I have too! Now are you going to run with me and be a fucking Wolf or are you going to go back home with your tails tucked between your legs?\u201d\n\nAfter looking at each other for awhile they all agree to go with you.\n\n\u201cGood! Now I want all of you to transform into your wolf form too! I\u2019m traveling with fellow wolves not humans!\u201d\n\nJust before one of the females begins to transform, you stop her. She\u2019s dressed in a short leather skirt and a tight white t-shirt that\u2019s tied in the center and has long flowing brown hair. You can smell that she\u2019s in heat. You hate to coin a pun, but she literally is one hot l\u2019il bitch.\n\n\u201cErm, not you. You stay in your human form; I kind of like the whole teenage slut look you got going on. In fact you come here right now; you\u2019ll be traveling on my bike with me.\u201d You say.\n\nAs she slides in behind you and holds on, you ask her one more question.\n\n\u201cSo what\u2019s your name?\u201d\n\u201cGinger. What\u2019s your name, you never did tell us.\u201d\n\u201cWolf. Just Wolf baby. Remember it. You\u2019ll be screaming it later.\u201d\n\nDamn you\u2019re so fucking cool, you think as you start up your Harley and ride ahead of the pack.\n\n(You\u2019d probably be even cooler if these pups weren\u2019t all riding those Japanese \u201ccrotch rocket\u201d bikes, but that\u2019ll have to be another lesson for another day)\n\nAfter a couple of days of riding, and a few \u201cpit stops\u201d with Ginger, you all eventually reach Castle Frankenstein. You park your bikes at the gate, and size the place up, which now looks a lot different. It looks like a damn Nazi fortress now, there\u2019s guard towers and everything. It seems Victor has been keeping himself very busy in recent years.\n\nAs it begins to rain, a familiar voice calls to you from one of the towers.\n\n\u201cIts you. Vic always knew you\u2019d return one day. I never believed him though. I guess I owe him fifty bucks.\u201d\n\nYou look up and see Igor, he looks different too. He has a lot of clumsy cybernetic implants, one of them being some sort of gun in place of an arm. More of Vic\u2019s \u201chandy work\u201d no doubt. He\u2019s still got that damn hump on his back though.\n\n\u201cIgor? You still alive? I thought your ungrateful master would\u2019ve just let you die of old age and get himself another assistant. I see he did a real good job of improving you though. Tell me, how\u2019s it feel to be the real brains, never getting the credit and continuing to be a doormat?\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m happy with my lot in life. How\u2019s it feel to be broke ass overgrown dog who\u2019s trying to relive his lost youth?\u201d Igor retorts back.\n\u201cDon\u2019t know yet. I\u2019ll tell you before I shove that metal arm up your ass.\u201d\n\nWell looks like the fight\u2019s starting here.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to climb over the gate before Igor can get off a shot", "result": "In your prime you would\u2019ve been able to scale the gate, climb the tower and rip Igor\u2019s head off all without getting hit.\n\nUnfortunately you aren\u2019t in your prime anymore. Igor\u2019s having trouble aiming his awkward arm-gun, but with as many bullets as it pumps out he doesn\u2019t need to be completely accurate. While you\u2019re attempting to climb over the gate he hits you several times.\n\nNaturally those bullets are silver.\n\nYou crash to the wet ground with a loud CLANK! sound, as the rest of the pack go running away with their tails between their legs.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Duck for cover!", "result": "You tell everyone to get the hell out of Igor\u2019s range and take cover. Fortunately Igor\u2019s gun-arm isn\u2019t the best design and he\u2019s having problems aiming and standing still due to the recoil, so you all manage to hide behind some nearby rocks\n\nStill, there\u2019s no way you\u2019re going to be able to scale the front gate with Igor on that damn tower.\n\n\u201cSee I knew this was a bad idea!\u201d one of the wolflings says.\n\u201cHow are we supposed to get past that? I\u2019m pretty sure he\u2019s firing silver bullets at us.\u201d\n\u201cOh I KNOW he is. Hence the reason why I told everyone to get out of the way. Okay so we\u2019re not going through the front gate, the castle\u2019s a big place right? Igor\u2019s only guarding the front. I say we split up and scale the walls on the sides and around the back. We\u2019ll meet up inside the castle.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but won\u2019t there be other defenses?\u201d\n\u201cProbably. So you better be fucking prepared! This ain\u2019t no damn game. You cubs think you\u2019re really tough when in fact you\u2019ve probably never had a real challenge. This is it. Don\u2019t think about backing out now. This is where we truly test the idea of survival of the fittest. Damn, my blood is starting to feel that rush! Don\u2019t you all feel it? I haven\u2019t felt this way since they sent a group of ten \u201cwerewolf assassins\u201d to put me down. Shit. They never tried that again! Ha ha ha ha ha!\u201d\n\nWhile you\u2019re reveling in gruesome nostalgia, your pack is looking at you like you\u2019ve completely lost it. And they\u2019re probably right. However, your speech seems to have stirred something in them.\n\n\u201cThe crazy old fossil\u2019s right! I remember having to hear about similar stuff my grandfather used to talk about all the damn time. I never really paid any attention to it before. Now I think I understand. We need to prove our skills to truly be proud to call ourselves werewolves!\u201d one of them states.\n\u201cNow that\u2019s the attitude I\u2019m talking about!\u201d\n\nYou all huddle in the rain and make a howling noise in unison to the moon and proceed with your plan. You all split up into a couple of groups and begin to scale the side and back walls, which really isn\u2019t all that difficult. You know Igor\u2019s probably ran off to warn Vic though. All you can think is, he better have something better than just Igor and Frankie defending him.\n\nAs you prowl around in the courtyard, you hear moaning and the clomping of several footsteps. You and your group turn to see some of Vic\u2019s defenses.\n\n\u201cZombies? Are you fucking kidding me Vic? I thought you\u2019d at least have some robots or something!\u201d you say to yourself. Though upon a second look, you see that the horde of corpses aren\u2019t actually zombies. Zombies are complete corpses brought back to life. These things look more like Frankie, except designed even worse. A lot of them have arms and legs in odd places. Some have a couple of heads or extra limbs. Most aren\u2019t even stitched together neatly, there are just giant rivets and spikes sticking out, holding them together. These are probably some of his \u201cfailed\u201d experiments.\n\nDoesn\u2019t matter, they\u2019re close enough to be Undead for you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight them", "result": "Damn straight! That\u2019s what you\u2019re here for!\n\nYou take out the nearest pile of shit with ease and your pack follows suit. They\u2019re a little tougher than you thought, but limbs are flying everywhere. Needless to say you\u2019re really enjoying yourself, and you can see your pack is too. (Well the ones that haven\u2019t gotten themselves killed)\n\nYou attack one large experiment with four arms, it catches a few heavy hits on you, before you rip them off. It\u2019s relentless and begins smashing its head (Which contains a lot of jagged metal bits) into you, knocking you down. As you shake it off, Ginger (Who\u2019s now in wolf form) and a couple of other wolflings comes to your aid and finish off the large abomination.\n\n\u201cGodammit! I had that! Don\u2019t EVER come to help me! I can handle myself!\u201d you snarl angrily.\n\u201cWe were just helping\u2026\u201d Ginger says casting her eyes downward and lowering her ears.\n\n\u201c\u2026yeah\u2026well\u2026just don\u2019t let it happen again\u2026\u201d you say understanding they weren\u2019t really trying to embarrass you. \u201cCome on, we\u2019re done here, let\u2019s get in the castle.\u201d\n\nYou meet up with the ones remaining in your pack at the front door of the castle. You put all your muscle into it and rip the doors of their hinges. When you step inside, you narrowly dodge a laser beam of some sort.\n\n\u201cHe\u2019s got the whole place trapped, be careful where you\u2026\u201d\n\nA wolfling steps on some floor stone that releases yet another beam trap, reducing him to ashes.\n\n\u201cStep.\u201d You say completing the sentence. That\u2019s when you hear a loud speaker.\n\n\u201cWolf! Igor informed me you had arrived with some friends! I\u2019m actually glad you\u2019re here I get to test out my new experiment on you! Assuming you survive long enough to get to me of course!\u201d\n\nAt this point he does his typical Mad Scientist laugh. If he thinks you\u2019re going to waste your time in his castle of death traps he\u2019s sadly mistaken. He seems to have forgotten you have an excellent sense of smell and tracking in general.\n\nOf course the smell of dead bodies seems to be emanating everywhere. You try to sniff out a human scent, but you aren\u2019t getting anything solid. The dead body smell is too overpowering. You\u2019re catching a couple of different ones though. One of them is a very faint sweet smell. The other is a burning type smell.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow the burning smell", "result": "Knowing that Vic works with electricity a lot, you figure he\u2019s in that direction. You and the wolflings that are still with you follow, carefully avoiding traps. You travel further to higher levels of the castle where the burning smell is getting stronger. You KNOW you\u2019re getting closer to him. You can feel it. You just hope his \u201cexperiment\u201d is as great as he claims. It would suck if there wasn\u2019t a real battle to fight after all this.\n\nYou burst into the room with strong burning smell and see big globes of energy, conduits, generators and a big ass corpse with cybernetic implants lying on the table. It\u2019s Frankie with some modifications and absorbing more electricity than lightning rod.\n\nYou half expect to see Victor somewhere, but all you hear is the loudspeaker disturbing your ears again.\n\n\u201cYou see Wolf! You see! While you\u2019ve been wasting away in that shitty cabin, I\u2019ve been preparing for my son\u2019s come back! You stole his woman! You ended his career! You didn\u2019t just damage him physically, you damaged his mind! Scarred him emotionally! It\u2019s taken me YEARS to undo the damage!\u201d\n\u201cDamaged his mind? He was a psychopathic serial pedophile made of corpses! What the fuck kind of damage could I have done? And Mary never liked him anyway!\u201d\n\u201cShe could\u2019ve learned! He could\u2019ve too! They just needed more time! But YOU! You prevented all that! You and your dog dick!\u201d\n\u201cFor fuck\u2019s sake, I wasn\u2019t the only one fucking her!\u201d\n\u201cYes, but you\u2019re the one who did it the longest and destroyed my poor boy\u2019s career! You\u2019re going to pay! Ha ha ha ha! He\u2019s up! HE\u2019S ALIVE! HE\u2019S ALIVE! HE\u2019S ALIVE! Frankie look who we have here! And old friend, why don\u2019t you go and give him a big hug?\u201d\n\nVictor goes into his mad scientist laugh yet again, as Frankie \u201c2.0\u201d gets up from the table. He opens his eyes and looks directly at you.\n\n\u201cFRANKIE BEAT YOUR HEAD IN NOW.\u201d He says with a booming voice.\n\nStill as verbal and articulate as ever.", "action_results": [{"action": "Have the pack surround Frankie", "result": "You order everyone to surround Frankie to try to keep him off guard. Frankie watches as the wolfling encircle him, but he\u2019s still slowly moving towards you.\n\nHe charges! A couple of the wolfling dive for his legs in an effort to stop him, but he\u2019s like a juggernaut and keeps charging. Fortunately you\u2019re still nimble and get out of his way as he smashes through the wall. The wolflings that dived for his legs, follow up and begin attack him with tooth and claw. It\u2019s not having that great of an effect though, he\u2019s got metal plating on that dead flesh now. Frankie kills the pair of them by smashing their heads together until there is nothing left except mush.\n\n\u201cEveryone grab a weapon! Don\u2019t fight him head on!\u201d you bark at the survivors while attempting to find something. You find a large metal pole, though you\u2019re reluctant to take it, with all the electricity in the damn room.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s useless! You\u2019ll never defeat my boy Frankie!\u201d Victor says.\n\nFrankie begins to approach you again.", "action_results": [{"action": "Throw the pole at him", "result": "Just as Frankie charges you again, you throw the pole as hard as you can at him like a spear. Bullseye! Literally. The pole slams into his left eye and straight through his head. It still doesn\u2019t slow him down though and you just barely get out his way.\n\nFrankie stops his attack for a moment and attempts to remove the pole, but you and another wolfling don\u2019t miss the opportunity. The pole is quite long and you grab it from the front, while the other grabs it from the back and you both run clockwise around Frankie. All the titanium plating in the world isn\u2019t going to protect him from massive head trauma.\n\n\u201cRARRRRGH! BRAIN!\u201d Frankie yells as half of his head comes apart. As he attempts to keep his brains from falling out, and that\u2019s when the rest of the pack begins to beat his head in even more with various blunt objects. He\u2019s still putting up a fight though.\n\n\u201cNO! STOP! FRANKIE! MY SON!\u201d you hear Victor scream over the loudspeaker.\n\nVictor\u2019s voice sounds like its very close. You see another door in the lab, and you\u2019ve got a really good feeling that he\u2019s behind it.\n\nYou leave the wolflings to finish off Frankie, and run to open the door.\n\nAnd there he is, Victor Frankenstein\u2026\n\nOr what\u2019s left of him at least, he\u2019s just a brain in a jar, hooked up to various machines now.\n\n\u201cWow, Vic. I always knew you were a terrible mad scientist, but I would\u2019ve thought you\u2019d be able to at least create a robot body for yourself, or a youth elixir or something!\u201d\n\u201cShut up Wolf! You haven\u2019t won! I\u2019ve still got\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWhat? What\u2019ve you got? Nothing! Unless you\u2019re a giant space brain from Venus or some shit, you can\u2019t do anything to me. And you ain\u2019t, so\u2026\u201d\n\u201dWait! Wolf! Can\u2019t we talk about this?\u201d\n\u201cOh like you wanted to talk to me, when you fed me drugged meat?\u201d\n\u201cOh yeah\u2026you\u2019re not still mad about that are you? I mean you did kill me for it\u2026\u201d\n\u201dYeah, and I should\u2019ve stuck around to make sure you stayed dead. Well no mistakes this time.\u201d\n\nYou take Victor\u2019s brain out of the jar.\n\n\u201cNOOOOOOOO\u2026\u2026\u201d are the last words to come out of the loud speakers before you step back into the lab where Frankie is flailing wildly at the wolflings who are carefully standing out of harms way as they continue to make quick strikes as him. He\u2019s badly damaged and blind. Not deaf though. You call over to Frankie who turns around when he recognizes your voice.\n\n\u201cHey Frankie, your Dad wants to talk to you, he\u2019s got a lot on his mind.\u201d You say and then throw Victor\u2019s brain into what remains of Frankie\u2019s face. The brain splatters into bloody pieces, while you follow up with a quick and vicious attack.\n\nYou sink your fangs deep into Frankie\u2019s shoulder until it hits the bone, where upon you rip off the arm at the socket. The rest of the pack follows your lead and help you rip Frankie apart, until he\u2019s reduced to the pieces that made him up in the first place.\n\n\u201cDamn, I think I broke a tooth on that fucking metal plating.\u201d You say breathing heavily.\n\u201cWe won Wolf! You were right! This was fun! I felt the primal instinct and everything!\u201d one of the wolflings exclaims.\n\u201cYeah and right now all of you are going to be feeling silver burning through your bodies.\u201d Igor says standing in the lab door exit, pointing that infernal arm weapon at you all.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rush him", "result": "You take one look at your pack and nod at them. You all make a howl in unison. Igor realizes he\u2019s in deep shit.\n\n\u201cNo wait you dumb ass dogs! I got a fucking weapon here! Stop!\u201d\n\nYou all charge at him and Igor opens fire, he can\u2019t stop you all before you overwhelm him. Unfortunately he does get some\u2026 including you. You eviscerate Igor as the silver begins to take its toll on your system. He dies coughing up blood, apologizing for not being able to defend Victor in his death throws.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry Victor\u2026I\u2019m sorry my brother\u2026gurgle\u2026\u201d\n\nThe rest of the pack attempts to carry you out, but you refuse their help and stagger to the outside of the castle where you finally collapse on the ground. It seems so comfortable you figure you\u2019ll just rest for awhile. You\u2019re not surprised to see Mary standing over you.\n\n\u201cI take it you killed my whole family.\u201d She says unemotionally.\n\u201cYeah, even Igor. Never knew he was Vic\u2019s brother. That explains a lot.\u201d\n\u201cWhy? Why\u2019d you do it? What was the point?! You could\u2019ve just done my movie and still been alive! Or even if you didn\u2019t want anything to do with me, you could\u2019ve just went back to your cabin instead! You could\u2019ve been alive!\u201d\n\u201cYou\u2019ll never understand Mary. You don\u2019t get old. I did and I wasn\u2019t meant to. I outlived my place in this world. No point in going on. Just had to get in one last monster fight and damn it felt good.\u201d\nMary shakes her head, you think she might even shed a tear if she was capable.\n\u201cGo on now Mary, there\u2019s nothing for you here. Don\u2019t morn your family. You were always better than the rest of them anyway. Don\u2019t morn me either, I don\u2019t want it. Go. The pack is coming.\u201d\n\nMary gives you one last look and runs off before the rest of the pack arrives. When they do they begin howling loudly.\n\n\u201cGoddammit shut the fuck up! I\u2019m trying to die with a little peace and quiet here!\u201d you snarl.\n\u201cYou have to lead us! You can\u2019t die!\u201d one wolfling says\n\u201cThe hell I can\u2019t! Look I showed you what it means to truly be a Wolf tonight. It\u2019s up to you to do something with it.\u201d\n\nGinger kneels down and tries to sit you up hoping that you\u2019re not really dying. She\u2019s very upset.\n\n\u201cYou can\u2019t die! I want you with me\u2026I\u2026\u201d\n\u201cStop Ginger. Don\u2019t say it. Don\u2019t give yourself anymore unnecessary pain, especially when I don\u2019t deserve it. It\u2019s just as well as I die now, I probably would\u2019ve only broken your heart later. Just remember me how I was in the short time you knew me and every time you look at your litter.\u201d\n\nYou touch her stomach.\n\n\u201cHow do you know? I mean it\u2019s too early, we can\u2019t be sure if\u2026\u201d Ginger exclaims.\n\u201cPlease. I\u2019m the Alpha Wolf. I never fucking miss. I got kids everywhere. None of them ever listened to me or talk to me, but I got \u2018em.\u201d\n\u201cWhat do you want me to tell our litter about you?\u201d\n\u201cWhatever you want, you\u2019ll be the one raising them and I\u2019ll be too dead to do anything about it\u2026 just teach them what I taught all of you here tonight\u2026hopefully they\u2019ll listen. Damn willful pups\u2026mmm\u2026getting sleepy\u2026one more thing\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWhat\u2019s that Wolf?\u201d\n\u201cBurn my damn body, I don\u2019t want some fucker trying to bring me back to life! I hate the Undead!\u201d\n\nYou close your eyes and feel the darkness envelop you.\n\nAfter a brief period of howling, the remaining pack members take your body and burn it just like you asked, then they all part ways, each to pursue their own destinies in their own way just like you did. A few months later, Ginger does indeed give birth to a new litter and teaches them about you and how you lived. (This is tempered by some common sense on her part though).\n\nAt last, a legacy worthy of an Alpha Wolf.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stall for time", "result": "You briefly entertain the idea of rushing Igor, he wouldn\u2019t be able to get all of you, but you\u2019re not ready to risk death at the hands of some deformed assistant after you already killed Victor and Frankie. You need to buy some time.\n\n\u201cAlright Igor, just calm down. It\u2019s over Vic and Frankie are dead. You don\u2019t have to get pushed around by either one anymore and you got this whole castle as inheritance! I just did you a favor.\u201d\n\u201cA favor? A favor? You killed my younger brother you ASSHOLE!\u201d\n\nYou quickly put two and two together.\n\n\u201cVic? Victor was your brother? Your younger brother?\u201d\n\u201cHe damn well better have been, after all the abuse I took from him! You know what it\u2019s like being abused by your younger brother on a daily basis for YEARS?\u201d\n\u201cNot really, I killed all my brothers soon after we were born. I wasn\u2019t sharing. Survival of the fittest and all.\u201d You say dryly.\n\u201cReally? Well I envy you. I wish I had that option. But nooo. Mom liked Vic best. Vic was handsome. Vic wasn\u2019t deformed, Vic this. Vic that! Look after Vic, Igor. Make sure he doesn\u2019t get into trouble Igor. He\u2019s your younger brother and you have to protect him Igor. I was the first born! Why didn\u2019t Igor get any love?! I was the smart one!\u201d\n\u201cYes you were. I mean if it hadn\u2019t been for you Vic wouldn\u2019t have even created Frankie.\u201d You say.\n\u201cDamn straight! I was the one who kept his ass alive! I\u2019m the one that corrected all his idiot ideas when it came to updating Frankie! I\u2019m not stupid like everyone says! I\u2019m smart! And I demand respect! And I never fucking got it! I just got a fucking whip to the hump!\u201d\n\nAt this point Igor is ranting so much about hating his brother and his self-pity, he\u2019s not aiming his weapon at you any longer. You take advantage of the situation and rush at him, he\u2019s not quick enough to react and you knock him to the ground before eviscerating him. Oddly after all that ranting, he dies gurgling an apology.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry Vic\u2026I tried\u2026gurgle\u2026\u201d\n\nYou shake your head at Igor\u2019s misguided loyalty, while the Pack surrounds you.\n\n\u201cWe won! You rule Wolf! What now?\u201d one of them asks.\n\u201cDunno, didn\u2019t expect to survive really\u2026so did you get all this on camera Mary?\u201d you ask out loud, startling the wolflings.\n\nMary comes out of hiding, with a camcorder.\n\n\u201cHow did you know I was here?\u201d she asks\n\u201cPlease, I don\u2019t forget a scent, especially one that I know quite intimately. So let me guess. You\u2019re going to exploit this footage for financial gain right?\u201d\n\u201cWell yeah. When you left the studio I followed you a bit and found out you were heading here. At first I wanted to protect and help my family so I got here before you.\u201d\n\u201cWhat changed your mind?\u201d\n\u201cI realized what a bunch of miscreants and fuck ups they all were! What was I supposed to do? Be like Igor and stay loyal to a bunch of reprobates that wouldn\u2019t appreciate it anyway? It\u2019s not like they\u2019re REALLY my family. So I just decided to film the epic battle since you ruined my original movie by taking this lot with you.\u201d\n\u201cI take it you didn\u2019t care who won though.\u201d\n\u201cNot really, but if it makes you feel warm and squishy inside I suppose I was rooting for you more. You were the underdog after all\u2026hey! That\u2019s a great title for the movie!\u201d Mary exclaims.\n\nThe Wolflings get a little restless about all this.\n\u201cHey shouldn\u2019t we do something, I mean she\u2019s part of this fucked up family, and she\u2019s trying to exploit us!\u201d\n\u201cAh see now this is another lesson I can teach you guys. You don\u2019t need to be an asshole all the time, especially when there\u2019s some benefit for not doing so. A lesson I probably should\u2019ve obeyed more when I was your age. Mary\u2019s little movie is made purely for exploitation, but its GOOD exploitation. It\u2019ll show everyone who we are and that we\u2019re NOT to be fucked with! This isn\u2019t some shitty family movie. This is raw footage of werewolves doing what they do best, kicking ass! We couldn\u2019t ask for better publicity. AND I assume we\u2019ll be getting some money for this right Mary?\u201d\n\nMary looks a little reluctant, but she realizes she has to give you something.\n\u201cRight Wolf.\u201d\n\u201cThat\u2019s what I thought. Now the battle is good and all, but you\u2019ll need to pad it out more, I say you start doing interviews with us. We can make this into a documentary! If you need more footage, we can always go bust up a bar\u2026\u201d\n\nAnd so it happens, Mary releases \u201cUnderdogs: The Inner Mind of the Wolf\u201d in a bunch of pansy art theatres at first where it\u2019s critically acclaimed. Later it gets released it regular theatres where most people like it mainly due to the brutal violence and your \u201ccolorful\u201d interviews. You even win an award.\n\nThe movie makes Werewolves \u201ccool\u201d again and you\u2019re never out of work anymore, which is a good thing since Ginger gave birth to a litter of cubs which YOU have to pay to support! You come home every day to the little nippers biting your ankles for your attention.\n\nStill, life is good and you once again have achieved the fame and fear you deserve.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Stand firm and wait for him to charge", "result": "You hold the pole like a medieval pike waiting to skewer Frankie when he comes charging at you. It\u2019s like throwing rocks at a tank.\n\nThe pole certainly impales Frankie, but it barely slows him down, he continues his rush even as the pole breaks off into him and he slams his heavy body into you hard. You go flying into the wall and collapse on to the floor. Frankie follows up with stomping your head into mush. Werewolves do have regenerative powers, but you won\u2019t be regenerating this severe damage since your brains have leaked out of your head.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Fight him head on", "result": "Um\u2026no.\n\nEven in your prime you would\u2019ve had problems taking on Frankie in his current updated state. At your age it\u2019s just unthinkable.\n\nYou attempt to bite his neck in an effort to tear his head off, but he crushes his strong metallic arms around you squeezing with all his might. Your pack attempts to help, but Frankie is too focused on his revenge. Even when you tear out his eyes, he continues to squash your internal organs until he finally breaks your back and throws you blindly into one of those electric generators.\n\nYour limp corpse fries for a little while, but unlike Frankie, it doesn\u2019t bring you back to life.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Follow the sweet smell", "result": "Even though you\u2019re sure that the burning smell is probably where Vic is at, the sweet smell is so out of place here, you\u2019re compelled to follow it. You tell the wolflings to follow the burning smell while you investigate the other one. They look a little unsure of being without you leading them, but they follow your instructions. Carefully avoiding traps, you travel further to different parts of the castle where the sweet smell starts getting so strong it\u2019s almost sickening, until you finally get to a closed door.\n\nYou open the door to an elegant bedroom. The smell pervades the entire area. Someone soaked this place in perfume and there you see Mary standing there in a see-through nightgown. You\u2019re genuinely surprised to see her here.\n\n\u201cI knew you wouldn\u2019t be able to resist. I knew you\u2019d follow this scent. it\u2019s the very perfume I used to wear when we had our affair.\u201d\n\u201cMary? What the hell are you doing here and why the hell did you douse the room in the shit?\u201d\n\u201cI know you don\u2019t like the dead smell, I don\u2019t like it either. I makes me remember that I\u2019m not alive\u2026I never was.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, well this smell isn\u2019t too pleasant either. Whew!\u201d\n\u201cYou know out the many, many\u2026many lovers I had, you know you\u2019re the only one that made me feel alive? Like a real woman, instead of collection of parts as you\u2019ve pointed out so accurately so many times.\u201d\n\nMary begins to get closer to you.\n\n\u201cLook Mary I ain\u2019t got time for this reminiscing bullshit, I\u2019m on a mission of kicking ass right now and you\u2019d do well to stay out of my way. Why are you here anyway?\u201d you ask again.\n\u201cI figured after you left the studio, you\u2019d be in a wicked mood. I thought you\u2019d probably just take your pack and smash up a bar or something. I followed you for a bit and found out you were planning on coming here. Look. I understand that my family has wronged you in many ways. My dad has, Frankie has, and I know I have, but I can\u2019t let you kill them. I know they\u2019re all fucked up and even I don\u2019t like them, but they\u2019re still my family such as they are. Wolf you already got your revenge a long time ago. I mean you beat the hell out of Frankie and ended his career and I heard tales about how you even killed my Dad once before he created either of us. What\u2019s this all going to prove? My dad isn\u2019t any match for you now. He\u2019s barely alive. Frankie has been just lying on a slab for years. Dad took him apart in an effort to fix him. That\u2019s the only experiment he\u2019s talking about and he\u2019s nowhere completed. Dad spends all his time with the insane idea of revitalizing Frankie for a come back. I tell him that it isn\u2019t going to happen, but he continues anyway. There\u2019s no battle here Wolf. Just a lot of empty dreams and delusions.\u201d\n\nAt this point she takes your paw and brushes her other hand against your fur.\n\n\u201cPlease Wolf, just let my family live. If you have any lingering feelings for me that I know you once did, just call off your attack.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Call off the attack", "result": "Mary\u2019s plea for you to spare her family has gotten to you. Maybe she\u2019s right. Maybe you did do a lot of damage to them already. Maybe you were just trying to relive your own youth.\n\nMaybe you\u2019re a complete fucking idiot.\n\nAs soon as you embrace Mary, you feel multiple shots to the back and extreme pain. You collapse to the floor, as Mary stands back from you angrily shouting.\n\n\u201cIgor, you humped backed fucker! Those bullets went through him and hit me! Asshole!\u201d\n\u201cHey, I can\u2019t control the damn power of this thing. So is he dead?\u201d\n\u201cNot quite.\u201d\n\nMary heftily kicks you over as you struggle to breathe.\n\n\u201cPoor Wolf. You of all people forgot the cardinal rule. Blood is always thicker and you abandoned your own kind over silly nostalgic feelings for me. I am touched though. I shall always remember you as your pelt covers my body as a new coat. Time to put this doggie down Igor.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m on it.\u201d\n\nIgor raises his weapon once more and blasts your head off in a hail of silver.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Continue the attack", "result": "For a moment you almost believed her. For a moment she almost displayed real emotions and feelings.\n\nFor a moment you almost were a complete idiot, except you remember the old prejudice that you\u2019ve never forgotten:\n\n\u201cNo matter how much the Undead try to mimic feelings, they have none.\u201d\n\nYou hear a click of a wall opening up. You see a metal arm point out and run out of the room, pushing Mary in the way. Igor opens fire and Mary takes king\u2019s ransom in silver to her body, toppling her over with a heavy thud. She\u2019s not dead, but she\u2019ll need some new parts and a major stitch job.\n\n\u201cIgor, you fucking idiot!\u201d she yells from the floor attempting to get up. \u201cGo help Dad! Wolf\u2019s probably on his way there!\u201d\n\nIf Mary knew you were coming back, she probably wouldn\u2019t have dismissed Igor so quickly. She manages to stand up just as you stand in the doorway\u2026with a torch.\n\n\u201cYou know what I like about these old castles? They always have torches and candles lighting the corridors.\u201d You say.\n\u201cEven in my present condition, you won\u2019t get close enough to use that thing!\u201d Mary says with defiance.\n\u201cSave your feeble threats, but I don\u2019t need to get close, you doused your room with perfume in your overly elaborate and dramatic attempt to trick me. Bye bye baby.\u201d\n\nMary\u2019s eyes widen as you dump the torch on the floor which lights up the room spectacularly. Mary attempts to get out of flames, but all the silver in her body makes her too heavy and she falls over again.\n\n\u201cHmm, maybe the undead do have emotions. She certainly looked scared and sounds like she\u2019s in pain.\u201d You say as you leave to catch up with the rest of the pack.\n\nYou don\u2019t get far when you see the wolflings running towards you. Many of them are wounded, some badly.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s going on?\u201d you ask, stopping one of them.\n\u201cIt\u2019s too damn big! It\u2019s unstoppable! We really tried! Honest!\u201d\n\u201cWhat?!\u201d\n\u201cFrankie! He\u2019s been heavily modified. He doesn\u2019t look at all like he did the old pictures I\u2019ve ever seen of him!\u201d\n\nNo sooner have you been informed when you hear that damn loud speaker again, the remaining wolflings run past you.\n\n\u201cYou see Wolf! You see! While you\u2019ve been wasting away in that shitty cabin, I\u2019ve been preparing for my son\u2019s come back! You stole his woman! You ended his career! You didn\u2019t just damage him physically, you damaged his mind! Scarred him emotionally! It\u2019s taken me YEARS to undo the damage!\u201d\n\u201cDamaged his mind? He was a psychopathic serial pedophile made of corpses! What the fuck kind of damage could I have done? And Mary never liked him anyway!\u201d you retort.\n\u201cShe could\u2019ve learned! He could\u2019ve too! They just needed more time! But YOU! You prevented all that! You and your dog dick!\u201d\n\u201cFor fuck\u2019s sake I wasn\u2019t the only one fucking her!\u201d\n\u201cYes, but you\u2019re the one who did it the longest and destroyed my poor boy\u2019s career! You\u2019re going to pay! Frankie look who we have here! And old friend, why don\u2019t you go and give him a big hug?\u201d\n\nVictor goes into his mad scientist laugh yet again, and Frankie \u201c2.0\u201d comes lumbering down the hallway, he\u2019s definitely got that cybernetic look now.\n\n\u201cFRANKIE BEAT YOUR HEAD IN.\u201d He says with a booming voice.\n\nStill as verbal and articulate as ever.", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab a torch and burn him", "result": "The problem with this tactic, is you\u2019ve neglected to remember that Frankie has been vastly updated whereas Mary wasn.\u2019t. Titanium plating doesn\u2019t burn very well, as you find this out the hard way when you grab a nearby torch and shove it into Frankie\u2019s body. It doesn\u2019t do any notable damage. Frankie does some notable damage to you though.\n\nHe grabs your arm, breaking it in several places, and then takes the torch and sets YOU on fire, by shoving the flaming torch right through your body.\n\nFur seems to burn very well.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Retreat", "result": "You jump out of Frankie\u2019s way as he smashes into the wall behind you. You make your way quickly down the stairs, where you here Frankie getting back up and following you down them like a freight train.\nYou\u2019re still a good ways from the bottom, but you see Igor appear at the bottom. You can\u2019t stop or Frankie will slam into you and probably kill you by breaking every bone in your body and tearing you apart. You can keep going and attempt to jump towards Igor hoping you\u2019ll land on him before he can fire accurately or you could jump over the banister and get out of the way altogether. The only problem with this is you\u2019re still pretty high up. You wouldn\u2019t die from such a fall, but you could break something if you land wrong and you certainly don\u2019t want that disadvantage.", "action_results": [{"action": "Jump over the banister", "result": "You jump over the banister. Frankie goes flying past you unable to stop himself. You hear gunfire and some sounds of bullets plinking off of metal and burying themselves into flesh.\n\n\u201cOH SHIT!\u201d you hear Igor shout. This term is followed by your own, when you see that you were a lot higher than you thought. You go crashing through a solid wooden dining table. It hurts...A LOT.\n\nYou don\u2019t get up right away and you half expect Frankie or Igor to come and finish you off, but fortunately that doesn\u2019t happen. You painfully rise and prepare yourself for the final battle, which doesn\u2019t occur.\n\nYou go over to the bottom of the stairs and see the wolflings taking advantage of Frankie\u2019s weakened prone state and getting revenge for the beating he gave them all earlier. As for Igor he\u2019s lying under Frankie crushed and dying. He\u2019s bleeding from his ears, mouth, nose and eyes.\n\n\u201c(Gurgle) (sputter) I\u2019m sorry\u2026Vic\u2026Sorry brother\u2026(Gurgle)\u201d he says before dying.\n\u201cWell I guess that explains his loyalty.\u201d You say to yourself.\n\n\u201cHey Wolf you want to get in on this?\u201d A wolfling says ripping a hand off of Frankie.\n\u201cNah, you\u2019ve earned this. I\u2019m just going to go back upstairs and finish off Victor.\u201d\n\u201cNeed any of us to come up with you?\u201d\n\u201cNo, you just make sure you do a good job of killing Frankie there.\u201d\n\nYou head back up stairs and head to the lab that Frankie came bursting out of, it\u2019s empty, but there\u2019s another door in the room and you\u2019ve got the impression that a certain doctor is behind it.\n\nYou open the door to a small room with a bunch of big computers hooked up to a brain in a jar\u2026\n\n\u201cDr. Frankenstein I presume?\u201d you say. \u201cWow Vic, I would\u2019ve thought you would\u2019ve at least made a clone body or something.\u201d\n\u201cFrankie! Igor! Get in here! NOW!\u201d\n\u2018They\u2019re dead just like you\u2019ll be soon and should\u2019ve been before.\u201d\n\u201cErm\u2026Wolf! Hold on! Come on, I can\u2019t do anything to you! This isn\u2019t fair! Hold on how about\u2026\u201d\n\u201cHow about you shut up and die?\u201d you say and take Victor\u2019s brain out of the jar.\n\n\u201cNOOOOOO\u2026.\u201d Is the last thing that comes out of the loud speakers as you crush the brain under your foot.\n\nIts over. You won, and you fucking hurt like hell. You stagger back downstairs where you find Frankie completely in pieces. The wolflings look at you expectantly.\n\n\u201cDid you kill him?\u2019\n\u201cYeah, and it was hardly worth the effort.\u201d You reply.\n\u201cWhat are we going to do now?\u201d another asks.\n\u201cWell I don\u2019t know about you, but I\u2019m going back home to rest.\u201d\n\u201cBut aren\u2019t you taking us to raise hell somewhere else?\u201d\n\u201cMaybe some other day. Look I\u2019m not here to lead you around by the paw. If you want to raise hell you can certainly do it without me. I showed you the way of the wolf tonight, it\u2019s up to you to do something with it. Just remember you\u2019re fucking werewolves, live up to the name.\u201d\n\nYou get back on your Harley and head home. Hopefully you taught the new generation something so tonight wasn\u2019t a complete bust. You didn\u2019t really get to have the epic battle you were looking for, but you survived and in the end that\u2019s what it\u2019s all about.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Jump towards Igor", "result": "What happens next is so quick it\u2019s amazing you survive it.\n\nYou leap up in the air in an effort to land on Igor before he fires. Frankie is still charging behind you, but that changes when you leap up into the air, because he ends up being underneath you when gains more momentum.\n\nMeanwhile Igor is attempting to lift that heavy arm weapon of his to accurately shoot you. The weight and the recoil makes it difficult and he\u2019s not very accurate and begins firing everywhere randomly in your AND Frankie\u2019s direction.\n\nYou\u2019re still airborn heading towards Igor and now Frankie as well who\u2019s somehow gotten in front of you due to him being unable to stop himself at this point. This is fortunate since this causes Frankie to block most of the randomly fired bullets with his body. You still take a couple in the leg though.\n\n\u201cOH SHIT! Igor yells as Frankie slams into him and the floor at terrific speed. You don\u2019t fair much better since you crash into the back of Frankie which is pretty hard due to the metal plating. It hurts like hell and you crawl off as quickly as possible while Frankie attempts to recover. Igor isn\u2019t recovering as quickly; he\u2019s bleeding from every orifice and whatever cybernetic parts he had can go to the scrap yard.\n\nYou\u2019re in great pain and you got some silver bullets in your leg, but you need to act.", "action_results": [{"action": "Finish off Igor", "result": "You\u2019ll never be able to fight Frankie in this condition and in his updated status, you get an idea.\n\nYou go over to Igor who pathetically attempts to point his weapon at you. You easily grab his arm weapon and begin to pull the thing out its weakened socket. Blood spurts all over you and Igor finally dies from the loss of it.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry Vic\u2026my brother\u2026 (gurgle)\u201d he sputters.\n\u201cHm, that explains his loyalty I guess.\u201d You say to yourself.\n\nFrankie\u2019s is attempting to recover from his own wounds, but you\u2019re not going to give him a chance to do it. You point Igor\u2019s arm at Frankie and manipulate the tendons inside.\n\nThe gun fires and you blast half of Frankie\u2019s head off with a rain of silver bullets. The recoil causes you to fall to the ground and the heat from it burns the fur on your hands.\n\n\u201cHoly shit that was fucking cool.\u201d You say impressed.\n\nFrankie\u2019s not dead yet though, he tries to get back up, so you just take the weapon and club him in what remains of his head with it until he stays down for good. You then tear him apart to make sure. You stand over Frankie\u2019s body parts panting heavily. You can\u2019t even give a victory howl. You\u2019re too tired. The rest of the pack comes in, somewhat surprised to see you alive.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re alive!\u201d\n\u201cOf course I\u2019m alive! No thanks to you! Where the hell were you assholes?\u201d\n\u201cUm\u2026well we didn\u2019t know if we should help since you got mad when we did it last time\u2026\u201d\n\nYou can\u2019t even argue with them, you\u2019re too tired to do even that. You only have the strength to do one more thing\u2026\n\nYou head upstairs by yourself, back to the lab Frankie came bursting out of, its empty, but there\u2019s another door in the room and you\u2019ve got the impression that a certain doctor is behind it.\n\nYou open the door to a small room with a bunch of big computers hooked up to a brain in a jar\u2026\n\n\u201cVic, you really are a shitty Mad Scientist, you couldn\u2019t even come up with a better way to prolong your life.\u201d\n\u201cFrankie! Igor! Get in here! NOW!\u201d\n\u2018They\u2019re dead just like you\u2019ll be soon and should\u2019ve been before.\u201d\n\u201cErm\u2026Wolf! Hold on! Come on, I can\u2019t do anything to you! Hasn\u2019t there been enough killing for one day!?\n\u201cNot yet.\u201d you say and take Victor\u2019s brain out of the jar.\n\n\u201cNOOOOOO\u2026.\u201d Is the last thing that comes out of the loud speakers as you crush the brain under your foot.\n\u201cNOW there\u2019s been enough killing for one day.\u201d You say.\n\nIts over. You won, and you fucking hurt like hell. You stagger back downstairs. Where the wolflings look at you expectantly.\n\n\u201cDid you kill him?\u2019\n\u201cYeah, and it was hardly worth the effort.\u201d You reply.\n\u201cWhat are we going to do now?\u201d another asks.\n\u201cWell I don\u2019t know about you, but I\u2019m going back home to rest.\u201d\n\u201cBut aren\u2019t you taking us to raise hell somewhere else? We want to do more werewolf stuff!\u201d\n\u201cRaise hell? You fuckers made ME do all the damn work! I killed every single member of this fucked up family all by my damn self! As far as I\u2019m concerned I\u2019M the only werewolf here! The rest of you are fucking lapdogs at best! I\u2019m not leading any of you anywhere until you go prove otherwise\u2026no fuck that. I don\u2019t want to see ANY of you again! Well except Ginger. You know where I live baby. When you don\u2019t want to hang around with these neutered pups, come see me.\u201d\n\nUnsurprisingly Ginger comes with you immediately.\n\nYou and Ginger get back on your Harley and head home. You\u2019re now convinced that you\u2019re the last of a dying breed. Today\u2019s youth are fucking spoiled. Still, you got to prove that you\u2019re still the baddest ass Alpha Wolf this world is ever going to see, and it\u2019ll be a long time before the world sees an Alpha Wolf like you again.\n\nThat is until Ginger has a litter of cubs\u2026", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Finish off Frankie", "result": "You limp over to Frankie while he\u2019s recovering and land a few well placed strikes, even ripping off some of the back plating. It\u2019s no good though; Frankie\u2019s still got a lot of fight in him. He turns around, grabs you by the throat and begins to squeeze the shit out of it, raising you off the ground. Igor who\u2019s dying makes one last effort to avenge his last blunder.\n\n\u201cFor my brother Vic!\u201d he yells and fires his weapon at you one last time. He can\u2019t miss at this range and your death is instantaneous.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Out run them and get into the castle", "result": "You don\u2019t have time to fight some half ass experiments, the wolflings can handle that. You\u2019re after a bigger prize. You leave the pack behind and run to the front door of the castle where upon you rip it off the hinges.\n\nYou\u2019re in such a hurry to kill Victor; you don\u2019t proceed cautiously enough and forget that he\u2019s probably trapped the place. You step on a floor panel and a laser beam suddenly shoots out, incinerating you into ash.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Memories (Igor)", "result": "The Assistant: Igor\n\nYou\u2019ve never really had much contact with Igor, other than knowing he\u2019s Victor\u2019s assistant. For awhile you thought he and Vic had something ELSE going on, (Much like Vlad and Renfield) but that\u2019s not the case. Igor\u2019s just a loyal henchman.\n\nYou always wondered why he is though. Despite general public perception, he\u2019s not stupid. In fact, he\u2019s been the one that\u2019s given Vic most of his \u201csuccessful\u201d experiment ideas. Vic wouldn\u2019t even be around if it hadn\u2019t been for Igor. Vic doesn\u2019t seem to appreciate any of his help though and doesn\u2019t treat him very well. He treats his experiments better than he treats Igor. You can only guess Igor is a masochist, or has some severe self-esteem problems.\n\nProbably both.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Go kick Vlad's ass", "result": "Its long over due and its time. You need to go fucking kill that bloodsucker or die trying. You need to prove that you are and always will be the baddest of the monsters. You also need to prove to these wolflings that they need to be proud of their fucking heritage and not play second fiddle to some overgrown leeches.\n\n\u201cAll right you cubs! We\u2019re going to go raise some fucking hell. We\u2019re going to Dracula\u2019s Castle. We\u2019re going to rip the place apart brick by brick, and every fucking bloodsucker in the goddamned place and I\u2019M going to rip Fagula apart limb from limb, drive a stake in his heart, cut his head off and then shove his dick in his mouth!\u201d\n\nThe Wolflings look very apprehensive about your suggestion, in fact they outright refuse.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re a fucking crazy old coot; if you think we\u2019re gonna follow you to Dracula\u2019s Castle! Fuck that, he\u2019s got an army of bloodsuckers and ghouls and who knows what the hell else! We can\u2019t win that Wolf! Can\u2019t we just bust up a bar or something?\u201d one of them exclaims\n\nYou can\u2019t believe your ears! These snot nosed pups know nothing of their heritage! Back in the old days they would\u2019ve been killed and eaten for such cowardice!\n\n\u201cGoddammit are you Wolves or fucking Chihuahuas? Vampires have been taking OUR rightful place in the monster hierarchy for centuries! We need to set the fucking record straight on this shit! Now are you going to run with me and be a fucking Wolf or are you going to go back home with your tails tucked between your legs?\u201d\n\nAfter looking at each other for awhile they all begin to leave and head back to the studio.\n\n\u201cOh fuckin\u2019 fine then, play werewolf in a movie, but I can see I\u2019m the only fuckin\u2019 REAL Werewolf here, the rest of you are just goddamn overgrown dingos! Fuck this, I don\u2019t give a shit, I\u2019ll kill Dracula my own goddamned self. I don\u2019t need anybody\u2019s help!\u201d\n\nYou get on your Harley and ride. You only make a few stops on your way; you\u2019re completely driven to have your final showdown with Vlad. Finally after a few days of riding you reach Dracula\u2019s Castle. The place looks exactly the same. You get off your bike and scale the high iron gate. As you jump down into the courtyard you half expect yourself to be overwhelmed by vampires, or even ghouls, but nothing happens. This is weird, there aren\u2019t even any guards patrolling or even at the door. In fact it sounds like a party is going on inside. You hear lots of laughter and music. Suddenly someone comes outside and sees you. It\u2019s some Vampire chick.\n\n\u201cOhhh, a Werewolf! Wow, I didn\u2019t know any of you types were invited to the party; I thought Drac hated you guys. Well what\u2019re you doing standing outside? Come on in the party\u2019s just starting!\u201d she says waving you in.\n\nA bit of a different approach than you were preparing for, but you enter. You entrance to the ballroom is immediately a big event. You\u2019re the only Werewolf there. Everyone else is either a Vampire, a ghoul, or even a human \u201cservant\u201d. Everyone is staring at you, some with wonder and interest, most with hatred, a few in awe. Most probably haven\u2019t encountered a Werewolf like you before. The staring would probably continue if another slightly out of place being didn\u2019t come shuffling up to you to talk you in a friendly manner causing the bloodsuckers to go back to partying. It\u2019s Im-Ho-Tep. You\u2019re surprised to see him here.\n\n\u201cWolf?! YOU got an invitation to this thing? I can\u2019t believe it! What the hell did you and Dracula kiss and make up?\u201d he remarks with his scratchy sounding voice.\n\u201cNot in this life time Teppy. What\u2019re you doing here?\u201d\n\u201dMe? Oh you know Vlad, he\u2019s always gotta put on a show. Likes to play up the whole royalty thing to the other bloodsuckers, so he always invites me to these things to prove he\u2019s got connections or something since I was a Prince. I always keep telling him, it\u2019s a meaningless title since the Egyptian Empire fell thousands of years ago, but he insists on flying me out here, making a big fuss and everything so what the hell, it\u2019s not like I got anything better to do plus I get a kick out of watching the bloodsuckers get drunk and make idiots out of themselves, well that and I like to look at some of these Vamp chicks. Heh, guess that makes me a voyeur, but again what the hell, its one of the few pleasures I get in this world anymore. But enough about this dirty old man, what brings you here if you weren\u2019t invited? Just randomly crashing the party?\u201d\n\u201cSort of\u2026I didn\u2019t even know there was one\u2026I\u2019m here to kill Fagula.\u201d You whisper quietly.\n\nTep\u2019s eyes widen a bit under his bandages. He isn\u2019t entirely surprised (At his age barely anything surprises him anymore) but he was caught a little off guard by your statement.\n\n\u201cWow Wolf\u2026I can tell you\u2019re really not joking about this. All I can say is\u2026 what took you so long? I thought this day would come long before now. Lost some bets because of it, oh well easy come easy go. Well you know your secret\u2019s safe with me, though I suppose it won\u2019t be a secret for too much longer! You\u2019re still the craziest sonofabitch I know, but then you always did know how to liven up a party! Ha ha! Ol\u2019 Vlad will probably be making his grand entrance soon, so just wait awhile. He threw this party for some kind of special announcement he has to make. I still got a bet with Erik that you would win if you and Drac ever got into a battle to the death. I\u2019ll be hoping to collect that bet from Erik. Good luck!\u201d Tep then shuffles off back to where he sitting.\n\nErik bet against you? Fucking little depressed shit! You\u2019re going to have a little talk with him after all this.\n\nYou put your back against the wall, watching everyone while waiting for Dracula to arrive. An hour passes and you\u2019re fucking sick of waiting, you don\u2019t feel like waiting for him to make \u201can entrance\u201d. You\u2019re here to commit major mayhem on him, not listen to anything he has to say. While you\u2019re surveying the place, you see a disheveled man peek out from a corner across the room and then slink back. That was Renfield, you\u2019d know Fagula\u2019s sycophantic bitch boy anywhere.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait a little longer", "result": "You figure he really can\u2019t be that long now, and decide to wait. Soon you see Renfield come back, he tells everyone to quiet down on orders of his master.\n\n\u201cExcuse me everyone, I know you\u2019re all anxious to hear what my master has to say, but I have been informed that he will not step into this room until a certain infestation has been taken care of first. Namely THAT ONE OVER THERE!\u201d\n\nSuddenly all the Vampires, Ghouls and Human servants look at you and advance! You\u2019re beyond out numbered. You put up a good fight for someone in your position, but ultimately you are scratched, bitten and sucked dry. And not in the good way either. You are then skinned where your pelt is hung up over Drac\u2019s fireplace, where he always brags about how he defeated you single handedly.", "action_results": []}, null, null, null]}, null, null]}, null]}, null, null, null]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story21.json b/data/scraper/stories/story21.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f4bdb89 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story21.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=7566", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Paradise...\n\nThat must've been the Empire's idea of an ironic joke when they were assigning a name to this sweltering hell hole of a planet. The heat wouldn't be so bad if the planet wasn't also a jungle nightmare teaming with poisonous flora and dangerous fauna.\n\nThe \"primitive\" natives aren't exactly friendly either. Your team medic had to find that out the hard way. Oh sure sometimes you'll come across a tribe that's friendly, but most of the time the lizards see you as food. Soft, fleshy pink food that's invading their territory. Which means you usually end up having to torch an entire village.\n\nFuckin' waste of ammo.\n\nOf course if the planet and its inhabitants weren't enough, there's always the other major powers laying claim to the planet. The Krik Collective, the Mazatt Dominion, and the Elojin Alliance have all laid claims to plunder whatever riches this planet may have and that's why you're here: To make sure this planet is plundered by the Terran Empire instead.\n\nThe next Empire supply ship won't be here for a long time, let alone anymore troops. You're on your own. Ah the joys of being part of the Empire's expeditionary force.\n\nYou and your team have currently set up base in one of those \"friendly\" lizard villages.\n\nWell its a brand new day in Paradise, what's first on the agenda?", "action_results": [{"action": "Check on your team's activities", "result": "Well you guess you\u2019d better check on your team. Not doing so would certainly look irresponsible of you, hardly becoming of an officer of the Empire.\n\nYou step out of your tent and peruse your team, who are all going about their duties as they should. They\u2019re a good team, sure sometimes they complain, but on this planet its very understandable.\n\nYour Indoctrinator is busily going about his usual brainwashing fanaticism as he tries to instill the values of the Empire to the reptilian natives that live in this village. Salo\u2019s ranting and raving like a mad man as he is apt to do when preaching. The Lizards look at him with a blank expression in a vain attempt to understand what the hell he\u2019s talking about, but you can tell they\u2019re getting agitated.\n\nMeanwhile your inept second in command Lieutenant LaFleur is pointlessly scolding some of the other team members for not setting up their tents by regulation standard. They look annoyed. You swear you think he\u2019s probably come closer to death by his own team members than by any enemy involvement you\u2019d ever engaged in.\n\nWell you should probably intervene somewhere before someone gets killed.", "action_results": [{"action": "Approach your Indoctrinator", "result": "That overzealous fool is going to turn the entire village against you, and that\u2019s the last thing you need right now. You stop Salo before the Lizards make dinner out of him.\n\n\u201cWhat are you doing?! It\u2019s my job to teach these savages the ways of the Empire, and bring them into the fold, even if they aren\u2019t worthy enough to serve HIM.\u201d\n\u201cWell you\u2019re not gonna do that by antagonizing the poor scaly bastards! Just leave them alone, its not like we\u2019re leaving anytime soon, and we\u2019ll have a lot easier time of it, if we aren\u2019t fighting every last lizard on this fuckin\u2019 planet!\u201d\n\u201cIf they don\u2019t accept the ways of the Empire, then they deserve to be purged by it!\u201d Salo says predictably.\n\u201cYeah, well if you haven\u2019t noticed we\u2019re a LONG way from the Empire, new supplies won\u2019t be here for months and I\u2019d like to currently supply of ammo to last until then. That won\u2019t happen if we\u2019re blowing away every lizard we come across. Its easier to just work with them when they aren\u2019t actively hostile.\u201d\n\nSalo looks unconvinced and disturbed by your words.\n\u201cAs an Indoctrinator of the Empire it\u2019s also up to me to make sure its servants are not falling astray to alien influences! And you my dear Captain have been displaying suspect behavior as of late! I hope for your sake you haven\u2019t forgotten the values of the Empire!\u201d\nSalo warns and storms off to his tent.\n\nAs the Lizards disperse and go back to their simple village life, you also return to your tent, shaking your head, and thinking about what a short sighted, narrow minded idiot Salo is. You go back to studying the maps of the territory you\u2019ve explored so far and pondering where you should go next, soon one of your men comes in to tell you that the Sergeant has come back from a recon mission and she looks like she\u2019s faced some hostiles. He also tells you they\u2019ve captured an interesting prisoner, an Elojin.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell him to send the Sergeant in to report", "result": "Delegating any responsibility to LaFleur is never a good idea, you tell him to send in Sergeant Alyssa. Sergeant Alyssa walks in and reports to you in her usual no nonsense manner; you\u2019ve always admired her race\u2019s stoic nature.\n\n\u201cCaptain, we discovered a Mazatt encampment, we killed all twenty of them with only two casualties. There was no useful information to be found, all their data was no different than ours. The only thing of interest was the prisoner they were holding.\u201d\n\u201cAh the one that is now ours. The Elojin.\u201d You reply\n\u201cHe kept saying he had some important information. I wasn\u2019t sure if we should kill him or you\u2019d want to question him first. If it\u2019s the former I\u2019d be glad to do it, his constant chattering was\u2026annoying.\u201d\n\nAlyssa\u2019s people aren\u2019t known for their small talk.", "action_results": [{"action": "Question the Elojin", "result": "\u201cSend him in, you can kill him afterwards if he proves to be useless.\u201d\n\nAlyssa nods and brings the Elojin in roughly.\n\n\u201cOw! Watch it you, blue Empire whore!\u201d he says which is followed by a kick to his back by Alyssa before she leaves. The Elojin brushes himself off and stands up.\n\u201cI swear you humans will allow any primitive race into your club nowadays. What planet did you pick that one up from?\n\u201cYou had something important to tell me?\u201d you ask, but the Elojin completely ignores you.\n\u201cMind you, she is a pretty primitive; her pointy ears almost make me want to laugh though.\u201d\n\u201cI suggest you stop talking about my Sergeant and start talking about what you know.\u201d\nHe still doesn\u2019t listen.\n\u201cYou know I\u2019ve always been impressed by you humans. I\u2019ve read a lot about your species. We have more in common than you might think. Why if it wasn\u2019t for your lack of spots and disgusting hairy body, we could be brothers!\u201d\n\nYour patience has run out, you grab him by his scrawny throat.\n\n\u201cLook you hairless spotty freak, you better start talking before I let my Sergeant blast a big hole in you and that\u2019s AFTER I turn you over to my Indoctrinator who\u2019ll be only to happy to get his hands on the likes of you.\u201d\n\nWell that got his attention, and apparently he does know something of humans because, Indoctrinator widened his eyes a bit. He keeps his cool though.\n\n\u201cSee now you humans know how to instill fear. Not like those idiot Mazatts that were trying to get information from me. I don\u2019t know how those brainless brutes even mastered the wheel, let alone achieve space travel. Anyway, there\u2019s an old Xont building on this planet.\u201d\nNow your eyes widen.\n\u201cWHAT?! Impossible! The Xont are a myth! The only knowledge that ANYONE has of them is from stories, there\u2019s never been any hard evidence of this race found by any of the major or minor powers and that\u2019s from centuries of searching.\u201d\n\u201cWell perhaps we weren\u2019t looking hard enough. The galaxy is a big place you know.\u201d the Elojin sniffs.\n\u201cDon\u2019t bother asking me where it\u2019s at though, I won\u2019t tell you where it\u2019s at, no matter what you do. However I\u2019d be willing to SHOW you, if you\u2019d consider this a joint venture between our two governments. Just think this could bring about a new age of cooperation between our two species!\u201d\n\nTranslation: \u201cI\u2019m going to use you for my own gain, until I can find a way to fuck you over.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Humour him", "result": "\u201cYou\u2019ll forgive me if I don\u2019t share your optimistic vision of utopia, even if I was inclined to believe that you were being serious. However, seeing as we haven\u2019t found anything else of importance on this forsaken planet, I\u2019m willing to entertain this idea, but you\u2019re going to have to patch some holes up in your story before I even consider letting you live.\u201d\n\u201cWhat holes?\u201d\n\u201cWell let\u2019s start with the whole building idea. If you found this Xont building, why didn\u2019t you and your team make off with the stuff already? And don\u2019t tell me that you were ambushed by the Mazatt because if you had been, they would\u2019ve taken your findings, OR if the technology was as powerful as everyone claims, you would\u2019ve been able to destroy them with it. Sounds like typical Elojin shit to me\u2026\u201d\n\u201cHa ha ha! Who said I had a team? You see, unlike the rest of you galaxy conquerors we Elojin don\u2019t feel the need to send an army to scout a planet, when one or two of us can accomplish the same thing when deployed in strategic areas.\u201d\n\u201cHmm, so there are more of you here.\u201d\n\u201cPerhaps. It wouldn\u2019t matter though since we\u2019re deployed in completely separate parts of a planet, even if we were all together, we wouldn\u2019t be able to stand up to a force the size of yours.\u201d\n\u201cThat brings me to the next question, if you found this building already, how come you just didn\u2019t stay there? What the hell do you need us for?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cExcellent question. Well there are some rather nasty things lurking in there. Much too powerful for me, but I\u2019m sure you\u2019d have no problem dealing with them. I didn\u2019t get too far without them chasing me out. I even tried recruiting a nearby tribe of those silly little reptile creatures to use as cannon fodder, but they refused to go in. From what I can gather they consider the place to be haunted and seem to hold the place in awe and fear. I suppose I should\u2019ve known better to ask the Mazatt for help when I discovered their encampment, but I figured they\u2019d at least listen to reason. Things seem to work out though; your blue concubine came in with full guns blazing and brought me back here.\u201d\n\u201cOkay last question, what proof do you have that it\u2019s a Xont structure, and not just ruins of some other alien species.\u201d\n\u201cThis!\u201d The Elojin quickly pulls out some weird coins out of his pocket and puts them on the table.\n\u201cThe Mazatt never even took these from me. Idiots. These are genuine Xont coins though! The metal is like nothing I\u2019ve ever seen on this anywhere else, let alone this planet. It\u2019s obviously not from here. The writing on it looks similar to what many stories have described. And this symbol. Tentacles wrapped around a planet. This is supposed to be what the Xont emblem was.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, yeah, a writhing mass of tentacles. I\u2019ve heard that description too. Several of them. Proves nothing.\u201d\n\u201cBut this is the closest anyone\u2019s come to finding something directly relating to the stories! One of the more common stories I might add! Look we Elojin have done the most research in this than anyone, and I\u2019m convinced what I\u2019ve seen IS a Xont building!\u201d\n\nWell it might all be a lie, but he certainly looks convinced, and you have to admit you are a bit curious now. You\u2019re just not sure you want or need him to be with you, when you get to the building.", "action_results": [{"action": "Agree to a partnership but ask what's in it for him", "result": "\u201cAlright, you\u2019ve got a deal for now, but what\u2019s in it for you?\u201d\n\u201cWell the technology of course.\u201d\n\u201cHa ha! You can\u2019t be serious! Assuming all this bullshit is real, and we get through all this alive, what makes you think we\u2019d give anything that might benefit you?\u201d\n\u201cBut we have a partnership. You agreed.\u201d\n\u201cI agreed to not kill you, in exchange for you to play guide, we might even let you go afterwards.\u201d\n\u201cI hardly see you taking advantage of me as an equal partnership.\u201d\n\u201dWell you see correct then. Think of it this way, you owe us for saving your life from the Mazatt, and this is your payment.\u201d\nThe Elojin, looks at you for awhile in silence before speaking again.\n\u201cVery well, it would appear that I have no choice, but surely since I found this place and leading you there, I should get something out of it.\u201d\n\u201cWell you got those coins. I wouldn\u2019t call that nothing, oh wait, they\u2019re mine now. Tell ya what; if we find super advanced cooking utensils we\u2019ll let you have those. Now, if you\u2019ll excuse me, I have to go convince my team that we\u2019re going to be look for a mythical building with only an Elojin to guide us. You will be under guard at all times and any attempt to escape will be frowned upon with excessive force. Understand me?\u201d\n\u201cOf course.\u201d The Elojin says obediently. You can\u2019t help but to think he\u2019s going to try to betray you at some point, and in this case he\u2019d have good reason to do so, but you\u2019ll have to worry about that later.\n\nYou and the Elojin exit your quarters and you address your team. Alyssa verbally tells the more unruly ones to shut up.\n\n\u201cAlright team, we\u2019re finally going to do something worthwhile on this planet, we\u2019re going on a treasure hunt of sorts, guided by this spotty freak here. He\u2019s claiming there\u2019s a Xont structure here, yes the Xont, I\u2019m sure you\u2019ve all heard the legends over and over, and while it might just be Elojin bullshit, we don\u2019t have anything better to do, so we might as we check it out. And if he\u2019s lying we\u2019ll make sure he\u2019s the first one to die if he\u2019s trying to lead us into a trap.\u201d\n\nMost of the team looks a bit hesitant. Alyssa is stoic as always, but you can tell she\u2019s not entirely happy about this idea. They\u2019ll follow you though. A few of the lizards heard the word \u201cXont\u201d and went running back into their huts, seems they aren\u2019t the only ones you scared, since LeFleur looks down right petrified. Finally you get the predictable reaction from Salo.\n\n\u201cWHAT!?!! Captain I\u2019ve held my tongue for too long about your liberal views on aliens, but now I must speak! You are treading the dangerous road of heresy by consorting with Elojin trash! Their types are nothing but liars and deceivers and you would allow one to guide us to who knows where? He has twisted your mind, and I won\u2019t let this blasphemy continue!\"\n\nIndoctrinator Salo pulls his weapon out and aims it at the Elojin.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reason with Salo", "result": "You step in front of Salo\u2019s weapon, he just barely keeps from firing, and he still may do so. The rest of the team seems to be unsure of what to do, except for Alyssa who pulls her weapon out and aims it at Salo. The only one who\u2019s calm is the Elojin, who seems to be getting a kick out of this.\n\n\u201cGet out of the way Captain, I\u2019ve got to kill him, he\u2019ll lead us all to death with his lies!\u201d\n\u201cEasy there Salo. Look I don\u2019t trust the sonofabitch either, but if we got a chance at finding this Xont building\u2026\u201d\n\u201cLIES! And so what if it is true? The Xont were an alien race that raped countless worlds, and fell due to their decadence! What use has the Terran Empire have for the ruins of an utterly evil civilization?\u201d\n\nWhile Salo is strong in his convictions about hating to work with aliens, you know he also can\u2019t pass up the opportunity to kill more of them. You decide to appeal to that side of him.\n\n\u201cWell think about the technology could be used to help humanity fight its enemies. The Xont as you say subjugated many worlds, and they did it with minimal effort. Perhaps we\u2019ll find something that could destroy those who would oppose us instantly. The Order might promote you for our finds and use it for the good of the Empire. We could possibly bring in a new Golden Age of Humanity!\u201d\n\nSalo\u2019s eyes start to glaze over as he takes your words into consideration, he then lowers his weapon. You then whisper to him.\n\u201cWe can always kill the Elojin when he isn\u2019t useful anymore.\u201d\nSalo seems to REALLY like that idea, and agrees to your plan. He still has to get the last word in though.\n\u201cVery well, we\u2019ll do things your way, you are my Captain and I will follow you, but if I see this expedition not following the best interests of the Empire I WILL step in.\u201d\n\nSalo goes and prepares himself for the journey ahead and Alyssa tells everyone else to do the same, since LeFleur apparently went and hid in a tent while this \u201cshowdown\u201d happened.\n\nSoon the team is all packed and ready to go; the Lizards seem to be happy to see you to leave, especially with the mention of the Xont. You wonder if you shouldn\u2019t try to get more information from them before you leave, their fear would indicate they know something of them.", "action_results": [{"action": "Get information", "result": "You start to question the Lizards but won\u2019t say anything, they just give you a cold reptilian stare, start to get agitated and begin hissing at you.\n\u201cSsssak Sakkeekeessss!\u201d\nYou begin to get angry. How dare these lower life forms withhold information from you!\n\nAs your voice raises, the Lizard you\u2019re questioning says something in his native tongue \u201cSliiisssthelisk!\u201d and swipes his claw across your face. You immediately shoot him. This results in further carnage.\n\nThe battle is quick and bloody, you round up the demoralized survivors and question them further, but most of them don\u2019t know anything and just repeat some prayer to their gods in their language. Salo is eager to kill them, but you decide they will be useful to carry your excess belongings. You begin to use them as \u201cpack animals\u201d and head off.\n\nThe Elojin begins to lead your team deep further into the jungle, keeping up his usual chatty demeanor.\n\n\u201cOh yes, it\u2019s this way, now we may run into more of those reptiles, but I\u2019m sure you\u2019ll have no trouble handling them, like you handled these fellows here.\u201d\n\u201cQuiet Elojin! Your constant prattle is annoying and serves no purpose!\u201d Alyssa snaps.\n\u201cOne could say the same about your presence here. At least I\u2019m serving a useful purpose, of leading you to what could be the find of the millennium, you on the other hand are just an expendable soldier of an Empire slave race. Any fool that knows how to use a weapon could replace you.\u201d The Elojin retorts.\nAlyssa smashes the Elojin in the back of the head with her weapon; he falls to the ground in pain. You immediately intervene.\n\n\u201cSergeant! What the hell do you think you\u2019re doing?! He has to lead us to the Xont city!\u201d\n\u201cHis words dishonored me! I will not put up with his disrespect!\u201d\n\u201dYou WILL follow my orders sergeant! Don\u2019t do that again!\u201d\n\u201cYes sir!\u201d Alyssa says and falls in line, but she stays as far as way possible from the Elojin. That blue bitch better remember whose boss around here if she knows what\u2019s good for her.\n\n\u201cI guess my thanks goes to you again Captain. This is the second time you\u2019ve personally saved me from your overzealous team. I admire your domination over them.\u201d\n\u201dShut up Elojin and do your fucking job! Speak disrespectfully like that again to any of my team and I\u2019m sure Salo can find a way to cause you great discomfort without hampering you from your appointed task.\u201d\n\nThe Elojin looks genuinely worried for the first time, and shuts up. He leads on with less talk, until you get to another Lizard village.\n\n\u201cNow this is the Lizard village I tried to recruit to help me, the first time I found the structure. The Xont building isn\u2019t far now, but we\u2019ll get to it quicker if we go through the village.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Destroy the village", "result": "For some reason you\u2019ve steadily been over come with the idea human of superiority. In fact, you\u2019ve been thinking a lot like Indoctrinator Salo and at this point your transformation is pretty much complete. You don\u2019t even think about going into the village peacefully anymore, you fully intend to destroy it and enslave the survivors, just like you did last time. Humanity is destined to rule.\n\n\u201cNo prisoners.\u201d You tell your team and charge into battle, it isn\u2019t as easy as you thought though.\nThe Lizards somehow knew you were coming and they ambushed you and your team. Several of them fall into pits with either sharpened spikes or poisonous creatures at the bottom. While you\u2019re temporarily caught off guard, you and Salo\u2019s fanaticism rally your remaining troops to fight on shouting how the Lizards are no match for humanity.\n\n\u201cONWARD! FOR HUMANITY THE RIGHTFUL RULERS OF THE GALAXY! OUR DESTINY WILL NOT BE DENIED!\u201d\n\nIt works for the most part, the team begins to become inspired, except for two, Alyssa who didn\u2019t need any encouragement to fight harder, but is showing signs of unhappiness at your new outlook on life. Tough. The other being LeFleur who finally broke down and ran.\n\n\u201cTRAITOR!!!\u201d Salo shouts and shoots LeFleur in the back like the coward he was.\n\nAfter the battle you have significantly less people with you. The entire Lizard village has been wiped out; the Lizards that were enslaved either ran off or were killed in the ensuing mayhem. Strangely the Elojin is still around. You half expected him to try to escape. He looks at the carnage that you wrought upon the village, and looks over at Salo, who\u2019s busily pulling teeth from the dead Lizards to make some sort of necklace no doubt.\n\n\u201cWell if you\u2019re done playing with your scaly friends, the Xont building awaits.\u201d\n\nThe Elojin takes you and your remaining team a short distance, and there it is in all its glory. Its like nothing you\u2019ve ever seen before, this is definitely Xont. You can feel it in your heart and the technology within shall be the Empire\u2019s. You briefly daydream about finally being able to live out your original purpose of joining the Empire in the first place: To bring glory in HIS name. With this find, you\u2019ll be able to do just that. Unfortunately that annoying Elojin begins talking again.\n\n\u201cWell we\u2019re here, now remember there\u2019s some dangerous things lurking in there, I can tell you where I ran into them, and some of the interesting rooms I found that you should explore before I got chased out.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill the Elojin", "result": "\u201cYou\u2019re services are no longer required Elojin trash.\u201d You say and shoot him.\nHe falls to the ground clutching his chest, and laughs before dying.\n\u201cHahahaha, I knew this was coming. It\u2019s what I would\u2019ve done. You haven\u2019t won though human, you\u2019ll see.\u201d\nObviously he thinks you won\u2019t be able to handle whatever is in there. Of course maybe one puny Elojin couldn\u2019t, but humanity is made of stronger stuff. You and your team enter the building ready for anything.\n\nAt least you thought you were. Once again your increased arrogance, has lead you to overestimate the worth of humanity, and underestimate your enemies. You don\u2019t get far before you encounter the \u201cthings\u201d that the Elojin was talking about. The Elojin wasn\u2019t kidding when he said there were \u201cthings\u201d in here. There are simply no other ways to describe the abominations you face. Writhing mass of tentacles comes to mind again though. The creatures are large, utterly mindless and brutally start tearing your team apart with ease, gobbling bloody limbs in one gulp. No amount of ranting and raving rallies the troops on this one. Soon, you, Salo, and Alyssa are the only ones left. Salo seems oblivious to the fact that this fight is hopeless, and continues to fight on, still screaming his usual doctrine. Alyssa fights on as well, but more out of a sense of self preservation rather than fanaticism.\n\nWithin the chaos, you see an opening that could allow you to escape.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight on", "result": "Stubborn to the last, you continue to fight the abominations, having an interesting last conversation with Salo as you reload what is surely your last clip.\n\n\u201cSalo they\u2019re going to remember this day of what we\u2019ve done! Our sacrifice won\u2019t be in vain! The Empire will find this and use the power within to destroy its enemies!\u201d\n\u201cYes! And our bones will be found, and we\u2019ll be remembered as the ones who paved the way and our names will live on forever!\u201d Salo, replies.\n\nThis last bit of wishful thinking of \u201cimmortality\u201d after your death at least makes you feel better before you feel a tentacle plunge through your stomach and another wrap around your head, popping it off like a dandelion.\n\nFortunately you weren\u2019t alive to see what happened afterwards\u2026\n\nFirst off your bones wouldn\u2019t have been found, the abominations ate everything. So your \u201csacrifice\u201d wouldn\u2019t have been known by the Empire at all, even if they had found the Xont structure, which they didn\u2019t.\n\nThanks to you, wiping out the nearby Lizard village as well as killing some of abominations in the structure (and severely wounding several of them) you made things a lot easier for the small Elojin team that had been lurking nearby. After it\u2019s pretty clear that your team was destroyed, they took the opportunity to take advantage of the situation, mopping up the now weakened abominations inside and thoroughly looting the place.\n\nIn typical Elojin fashion, they end up using the technology to keep everyone fighting each other and maintain the \u201cstatus quo\u201d except with them in an even better position than before, so they aren\u2019t attacked as often. Effectively becoming the \u201cpuppet masters\u201d of the galaxy.\n\nThe Elojin was right, you didn\u2019t win.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Run", "result": "In a brief moment of clarity and sanity you realize you\u2019ve been making a horrible mistake. You need to get away from this place as soon as possible. You beat a hasty retreat telling Alyssa and Salo to do like wise. Alyssa follows, but Salo looks betrayed and yells at you, followed by a scream as the abominations make quick work of him.\n\nUnfortunately your escape is short lived as when you get out of the structure, you\u2019re ambushed by a small Elojin team who were lurking outside. A pulse blast hits your chest, and you fall immediately to the ground. Alyssa, who was following close behind, sees you fall and comes out with guns blazing making quick work of the Elojin bushwhackers.\n\nAlyssa attempts to help you, but it\u2019s too late. Before you die, you smile and tell her that you\u2019re sorry, she doesn\u2019t show it, but you can tell she forgives you. She didn\u2019t like how you transformed though. The legacy of the Xont didn\u2019t help you at all, the mere thought consumed you and Alyssa sees that only bad can come if anyone gets a hold of whatever may lay inside.\n\nBeing the survivor she is, Alyssa makes her way back to the Lizard village that you so recently turned into a graveyard, and spends the rest of her stay there. She makes short distanced explorations to break up the monotony, but never ventures back to the Xont structure. When the Empire supply ship comes she is taken back and reports that the planet has diseases that wreak havoc on the humans, thus the reason why she\u2019s the only survivor and there\u2019s nothing of value on the planet. She continues with her lie that the Elojin were trying to use it as a base, she then suggests that the planet be bombarded with mass drivers so at least they can\u2019t use it. The Empire hardly ever needs a reason to bombard a planet, and so it is done, and the Xont structure is unknowingly destroyed and its secrets along with it.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Keep him around", "result": "Despite Salo\u2019s insistence, you make the decision that you shouldn\u2019t kill the Elojin just yet. The Elojin looks at you in silence almost expecting to get shot, but quickly becomes talkative again when he realizes his life is going to be spared a few moments longer.\n\n\u201cOkay be ABSOLUTELY quiet, those things are still in there, if you have to fight them let\u2019s at least get into one of the rooms where you can shoot at them with less danger, a lot of them have narrow doorways for some reason.\u201d\n\u201cHold on there spot boy, what exactly are these things?\u201d you ask\n\u201cI don\u2019t know, but they\u2019re large, vicious, and mindless and have a lot of tentacles.\u201d\n\u201cCould they be Xont?\u201d\n\u201cI doubt that, they\u2019re far too animalistic. Maybe they\u2019re some sort of genetic Xont experiment, who know? Let\u2019s just not run into them!\u201d\n\nWith the Elojin in the lead you and your team follow as quietly as possible, soon the Elojin leads you to a room with a lot of strange looking computers. They have a look of being incredibly archaic yet very advanced. Buttons with bizarre symbols are all over the machines\n\n\u201cNow I think this is a control room of some sort, I was meaning to come back here to study it more, but I was trying to map out the place first.\u201d\n\u201cSo what the hell do these things do?\u201d\n\u201cYou humans have those huge audio organs hanging from your heads, yet you seem to be unable to hear. I just said, I didn\u2019t study the room, I was meaning to come back to it!\u201d\n\u201cEnough of this Elojin\u2019s insults! We have no further use for him!\u201d Salo yells at the top of his lungs.\n\n\u201cLook you can certainly kill me if you want, but I am somewhat familiar with Xont legends and such. I probably could figure out what all this exactly does, if you let me. You start pushing buttons at random and you could be asking for trouble.\u201d\n\nThe Elojin is obviously attempting to prolong his miserable life a little longer, despite the fact that he knows the inevitable is coming soon. Of course he also could be trying to set you up some how. He looks at you expectantly.", "action_results": [{"action": "Have the Elojin killed", "result": "You sense the treachery that lurks within this alien. He\u2019s setting you up; well his silver tongue has only gotten him so far.\n\n\u201cWe humans have been learning things through trial and error for centuries, no reason to change now. Salo, shoot this spotty freak!\u201d you say.\n\u201cWa\u2026\u201d the Elojin doesn\u2019t even finish before Salo melts half of his head with his plasma pistol. The Elojin slumps to the floor lifelessly.\n\n\u201cOkay, now does anyone here know about Xont legends or read about any of that shit?\u201d you ask your team. A relatively young trooper steps forward. It\u2019s Private Dobbs.\n\n\u201cUm, I read a few things when I was a kid, but I don\u2019t know anything about this sir.\u201d\n\u201cWell can\u2019t you remember anything? Like what these symbols mean?\u201d\n\u201cI suppose I could guess.\u201d\n\u201cDammit soldier, I can fucking guess! I\u2019m asking you can you do better than guess?!\u201d\n\nBefore he can answer it appears that one of the inhabitants has finally tracked you down, and its as horrible looking as the Elojin described it. Tentacles, teeth, large and hungry.\nIt makes an ear piecing roar and attempts to enter the room, but is unable to get through, that doesn\u2019t stop it attempting to lash at your team with its tentacles, who immediately open fire on it.\n\nWell you could help and let Dobbs study the computer, or you could just do it yourself and order Dobbs to help fight the abomination instead.", "action_results": [{"action": "Let Dobbs do it", "result": "\u201cFigure out that machine, Dobbs!\u201d you shout and go help the rest of your team. The creature\u2019s tentacles are surprisingly long and are still doing a number on your team, its fortunate that being stuck in the doorway makes it a lot easier to fight, you\u2019d hate to be surrounded by more than one of these things. After a combined effort of bullets, lasers, and plasma, the creature finally dies. Now you\u2019ve got new problems, first of all the creature\u2019s dead body is completely blocking the doorway, but worse, all the sound of battle only attracted more of its kind.\n\nYou\u2019re temporarily safe for now, as you know the creatures can\u2019t get through the doorway, let alone with a corpse of one their own blocking it. They won\u2019t go away though. In fact it sounds like they\u2019ve started eating their dead buddy; eventually they\u2019ll be able to make enough of an opening to attack again.\n\nMeanwhile Dobbs seems to have activated something. A wall slides open revealing a small line of silver robots. Their metallic glean is almost blinding even in this low lighting. Judging by their build and the wicked looking weapons they\u2019re carrying, they were designed for battle, it also looks like they\u2019ve never been used. They stand silent awaiting instructions.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask Dobbs what he did", "result": "\u201cDobbs! What did you do?\u201d\n\u201cUm I don\u2019t really know, I just started pressing buttons and that happened.\u201d\n\u201cWell turn them on and tell them to start blasting those tentacle monsters out there!\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t know how! I mean even if I do turn them on, what makes you think they won\u2019t attack us? \u201d\n\nDobb\u2019s behavior begins to make Salo angry.\n\n\u201cSo you think it\u2019s better to stay in here, trapped? You disgust me; your cowardice is that of an Elojin! Out of the way, the Emperor\u2019s Will guides my hand!\u201d\n\nBefore you can stop Salo, he starts randomly pushing buttons. One of those buttons turns on the robots. Red lights flicker on in their eye sockets.\n\nRed lights then flicker on you and your team\u2026\n\n\u201cINTRUDERS!\u201d metallic voice echo in unison.\n\nThe battle is quick and bloody as the Silver Sentinels mow all of you down into a bloody mess. The last thing you see as you struggle to breathe is one of the Sentinels pointing its weapon at your head which against all odds, seems to be smiling.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Examine the robots closer", "result": "\u201cAlyssa you and the rest keep an eye on that doorway, if those things try to get in again, you know what to do. Dobbs, don\u2019t touch anything else in here.\u201d You say and inspect the robots closer.\n\u201cYes sir, but I should tell you, that we\u2019re running out of ammo.\u201d Alyssa remarks.\n\u201cDammit, you heard the Captain! He didn\u2019t ask you for your opinion you alien bitch! You should be lucky you\u2019re even allowed to serve the Empire, and not destroyed like the non-human trash you are!\u201d Salo rants.\n\u201cSalo, I serve the Captain, I\u2019m loyal to him, not the Empire, and I\u2019ve had just about all the abuse I\u2019m going to take from you!\u201d Alyssa says and points her weapon at Salo, catching him off guard. There\u2019s no way he\u2019ll be able to react in time, the rest of the team stands frozen, they\u2019re trying to watch the doorway and this new situation at the same time.\nYou\u2019ve never seen Alyssa lose her \u201ccool\u201d like this before. Granted this whole expedition has made everyone extremely irritable, but even under worse conditions than this, Alyssa has always been very calm.", "action_results": [{"action": "Let Alyssa shoot him", "result": "Salo, raises his weapon, and is struck down with a single bullet to the head. His fanatical rants end immediately as his body hits the floor. Alyssa looks at you, and you just nod. The rest of the team relaxes a little knowing that at least this situation has been diffused.\n\nYou immediately pull out the coins you took from the Elojin earlier and inspect them, put them on the floor, take Salo\u2019s plasma pistol and melt them into nothingness. This damn Xont quest you\u2019ve been on has fucked up your mind, between the Elojin\u2019s syrupy words, Salo\u2019s rants, and the overall strange feeling you had since you first got those coins, not to mention this PLACE itself, you only now are starting feel like yourself.\n\nThere\u2019s still the matter of getting out of here though, fortunately Dobbs may have found a way to do that.\n\n\u201cUm, sir? I think I remembered what some of these symbols were supposed to mean, I think I can figured out how we can turn them on without them attacking us. I remember a Xont legend about \u201cSilver Sentinels\u201d, and that\u2019s what these things look like. I guess they were created by the Xont primarily to act as guards for scientists, if we don\u2019t look like a threat then they shouldn\u2019t attack us. In fact they\u2019ll probably start attacking those things lurking outside.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but we aren\u2019t Xont, won\u2019t they attack us anyway?\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t know, but didn\u2019t the Xont supposedly have a lot of different races working for them? Maybe the Sentinels will think we\u2019re just a harmless subject race of the Xont\u201d\n\u201cSo what do we do to look harmless?\u201d\n\u201cDrop all our guns.\u201d\n\nEveryone isn\u2019t too enthusiastic about that idea! However, it sounds somewhat plausible. Scientists aren\u2019t usually known for their combat abilities and they probably weren\u2019t running around with guns because of the Sentinels, and thus weren\u2019t considered a threat. You can only hope the Sentinels still don\u2019t perceive you as a threat even without guns. Alyssa is particularly skilled in unarmed combat.\n\u201cLet\u2019s do it. It might be our only chance. Drop your weapons everyone. We\u2019ll either live or die, either way; it\u2019ll be quicker than waiting in here for certain death.\u201d\n\nYour team reluctantly drops their weapons as Dobbs presses a few buttons on the computer. Red lights flicker on in the Sentinels\u2019 eye sockets.\n\n\u201cSCANNING\u2026SCANNING\u2026ALERT! GENETIC EXPERIMENTS FROM LAB 4 HAVE ESCAPED! THREAT LEVEL 10! TERMINATE HOSTILES!\u201d their metallic voices say in unison.\n\nThe Sentinels move quickly to the doorway and begin to open fire on the feeding creatures. You can see the creatures fight back, but whatever the Sentinels are made out of must be strong indeed. Soon the battle moves far enough from the doorway, and you can hear the Sentinels hunting down the rest of the beasts. You climb over the dead creature in the doorway and take a quick look only to see more dead monsters. The Sentinels do their jobs very efficiently.\n\nYou could take this opportunity to try to escape or explore a bit more.", "action_results": [{"action": "Escape", "result": "Having just shaken the strange feelings that have been plaguing you (And to a certain extent your team) you don\u2019t want to tempt fate and order everyone to grab their weapons and get the hell out of here before the Sentinels start hunting you.\n\nYou and your team hastily run back to the entrance, hoping not to run into anything on the way. As it turns out, you do run into something when you get outside, namely an Elojin ambush.\n\nYou get shot in the shoulder before taking one of them out. The rest of your team not far behind comes out firing; the Elojin team is small and wasn\u2019t expecting to meet such heavy resistance, when they see they don\u2019t have the advantage they thought they would they start to run. It doesn\u2019t help them though; they\u2019re cut down in flight.\n\u201cFucking Elojin, I knew he was going to try to set us up somehow!\u201d you mutter, clutching your arm.\nStill eager to put as much distance as you can between you and the Xont structure, you order everyone to head back to the Lizard village you destroyed earlier.\n\nAfter everyone is settled in and bandaged up, you decide to make a speech.\n\n\u201cAlright, what happened today was a major fuck up, and we did a bunch unnecessary reckless shit, but worst of all I ended up getting a lot of you killed for no good reason. I could blame it on a lot of factors, but I won\u2019t, I take full responsibility for it. All I can ask is that you forgive me somehow.\u201d\n\nYour team looks a little bewildered by your speech.\n\n\u201cSir, how was today any different than any other day? You\u2019re always ordering us to do dangerous shit. Today a lot of us just were unlucky. It happens. But you were still there along with us the entire way just like always, and you got the rest of us out alive.\u201d a trooper remarks.\n\nThe rest of your team agrees, with that remark. You\u2019re a little surprised, but then not really. You continue your speech.\n\n\u201cWell then I\u2019m glad you\u2019re all behind me, because we\u2019re going to have to make up a story when the Empire comes here in a few months. Now this is what\u2019s going to happen\u2026\u201d\n\nHaving experienced the temporary weird hold the Xont had on you, you decide that using anything that may lie inside the building won\u2019t do anyone any good. You tell your team that the Xont structure must be destroyed, and it\u2019ll be reported that the planet is useless and too hostile for humans to be of any long term use, it will also be reported that the Elojin are attempting to use the planet as a secret weapons developing base and should be bombarded into atoms. You feel slightly bad about LaFleur\u2019s needless death, so you propose that it be mentioned that he died valiantly against the Elojin who had ambushed him. Salo\u2019s death will also be attributed to the Elojin.\n\nThe rest of the time goes by without incident, you basically stay in the village until the Empire ship comes, at which point you tell your story. Considering you blame everything on the Elojin, your story really isn\u2019t questioned. The Empire never needs that much of an excuse to bombard entire planets with mass drivers, so the Xont structure along with everything else on the planet is destroyed. You and the rest of your team are sent on your next mission, where you\u2019ll also meet your replacements for the people you lost.\n\nOn your way, you think about what exactly made you break your temporary madness and it was Alyssa\u2019s words of how her loyalty was to you and not the Empire. These words struck home, making you realize that your own loyalty is to your team, not the Empire. Of course you \u201cserve\u201d the Empire, but the people under your command\u2026that\u2019s who matter.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Explore", "result": "Despite the weird feelings you\u2019ve just shaken loose, you still think that this shouldn\u2019t be a total loss; there are still things you could use and find for the Empire; however you realize you should minimize the risk.\n\n\u201cAlright there\u2019s no sense in all of us getting killed. So, me, Alyssa and Dobbs we\u2019ll stay and explore the rest of this place. The rest of you take your guns and head back to exit as quickly as possible and wait at that Lizard village. If the Sentinels see you walking around with weapons, you know they\u2019ll attack, so don\u2019t linger.\u201d\n\u201cBut what about you sir? The Sentinels will attack you, if you stay!\u201d a trooper asks.\n\u201cWell WE aren\u2019t going to be carrying them; if we come across something else that\u2019s hostile we\u2019ll just have to rely on what we learned in boot camp and our trusty combat knife. Now get out of here, that\u2019s an order!\u201d\n\nAs the rest of your team leaves, you, Dobbs, and Alyssa are left to ponder what to do next.", "action_results": [{"action": "Explore this room more", "result": "There\u2019s plenty in this room that still needs to be examined, besides you\u2019ll probably be a lot safer here. Alyssa watches the doorway for anything that might come through. You look around the room, but other than the machinery and computers already in the room, you don\u2019t find anything else. You decide to go see if Dobbs has found out anymore information.\n\n\u201cSo, you remember anything else from reading all those Xont legends?\u201d you ask Dobbs.\n\u201cNot really sir. The only thing I can determine is room is obviously a control room of some sort, and this entire building was some sort of research facility. I managed to turn on the computer screens, looked at a bunch of schematics and maps and gone through these logs, but I can\u2019t read any of the language. I can guess on some things, but I\u2019m still nervous about pressing more buttons at random, I don\u2019t think we\u2019re getting any further in here.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Go explore the rest of the structure", "result": "\u201cAlright, let\u2019s explore the rest of this place, let\u2019s try to avoid any confrontation with anything though, we\u2019re walking around without any firepower.\u201d\n\nYou, Alyssa, and Dobbs go back into the darkened hallways, trying to remain quiet as possible. You can still hear sounds of battle echo, as the Sentinels are still trying to hunt down whatever left over failed experiments those tentacle things are.\n\nMost of the rooms you encounter seem to be normal quarters, presumably where the scientists here slept. Most the rooms are either in disarray or almost bare, you don\u2019t find anything of interest. It looks like this structure was abandoned while it was probably still in use, you get the impression it was due to those experiments that the Sentinels are currently exterminating. Looks like someone didn\u2019t activate them in time, makes you wonder why this structure just wasn\u2019t re-taken though.\n\n\u201cSir, I don\u2019t think there\u2019s anything of any importance here, we should just leave.\u201d Dobbs continues to advise.\n\nDobbs must really not like it here; you don\u2019t think you\u2019ve ever heard him complain like this before, seeing as you know he keeps his opinions to himself for the most part as far as personal \u201ccomfort\u201d is concerned. Alyssa of course is willing to do whatever you\u2019re up for doing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue to explore", "result": "\u201cDobbs you\u2019re starting to sound like Lieutenant LaFleur, now come on; we\u2019ve still got some ground to cover.\u201d\n\u201cSir with all due respect, I am not. And using LaFleur as a reference to compare me to, so close after his death which you were responsible for makes me suspicious.\u201d\n\u201cWatch your mouth private!\u201d Alyssa reprimands.\n\u201cExcuse me private!?\u201d you add.\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry sir perhaps that was out of line I know it was Salo who directly shot LaFleur, but sir you HAVE been acting erratically ever since we\u2019ve been on this damn mission! I guess we all have. I thought you\u2019d shaken it after you shot Salo, but you\u2019re still acting a little obsessed with this whole Xont thing. This place still emanates some sort of weird power. Maybe some things are better left unexplored; we need to get the hell out of here for all our sakes!\u201d\n\nDobbs does make a few good points.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ignore Dobbs", "result": "\u201cWhile I guess it\u2019s good that you\u2019re speaking your mind, and looking out for our well being, I feel fine Dobbs, I\u2019m well aware of the stuff you\u2019re talking about, but\u2026\u201d\n\u201cFOOL! I tried to warn you!\u201d Dobbs yells, pulls out his knife and attacks!\n\nDobbs catches you off guard and tackles you to the floor raising his knife to thrust down on your head. Alyssa immediately stabs him repeatedly in the back, but whatever the hell is driving him, has made him unfazed by normal pain. He temporary takes his attention off of you and slams Alyssa into the wall. You take the advantage and with one quick twist you snap his neck. As his head flops like a dead fish, his body soon follows. You get up panting.\n\n\u201cShit. Well someone was being influenced by something!\u201d you remark. \u201cSergeant, have you been feeling anything strange, because if you have, let me know!\u201d\n\u201cNot really sir, I felt a heighten state of irritability earlier, but that dissipated after you shot Salo. My thoughts have basically been the same though; my people have very disciplined minds as you\u2019re well aware.\u201d\nYou smile a bit at this remark, which you know wasn\u2019t made out arrogance, but merely fact. Alyssa continues. \u201cWhatever took a hold of Dobbs seems to have been trying to guide us to leave. Maybe we\u2019re getting close to finding something.\u201d\n\u201cMaybe, but even if we\u2019re okay now, maybe we should get out of here.\u201d You say.", "action_results": [{"action": "Play it safe and leave", "result": "You decide to play it safe and leave. Alyssa doesn\u2019t show it, but you can tell she looks a bit relieved. You manage to leave the building without any incident. There are lots of dead tentacle creatures, but where the Sentinels are you have no idea, and you\u2019re not really in any hurry to find out. When you get outside you see some dead bodies of Elojin and a few of your own team members. Apparently the Elojin were waiting in ambush and underestimated your numerical advantage. You hope the rest of your team made it back to the village safe.\n\nWhen you get there, they look relieved to see you. You all begin to exchange information. You all are pretty much in agreement, that you all were overcome by something during this whole \u201cquest\u201d, whether it was some sort of ancient mind control device that is still operational, or the Xont themselves, you don\u2019t know. You do know that you were driven there, yet when you broke the \u201chold\u201d you were being driven away, as if you were perceived to be more of a threat. Something in there is important and the place does bear more exploration, but its not going to be your team that does it. Too much has been lost and it\u2019s obvious you aren\u2019t really equipped to explore the place without placing yourselves in unnecessary danger.\n\nYou and your team spend the remaining time in the village, where you can stay within a safe proximity to the Xont structure, without getting too close. The rest of your stay passes relatively quietly. When the Empire ship comes, you explain everything to your superiors, with the exception of shooting Salo which you change the story a little bit. You state he was over come by whatever madness the structure was emanating and drew his weapon on you, causing you to have to defend yourself. You go on to explain Xont structure and severely warn of the dangers of the place.\n\nYour superiors have a mixed reaction to your tale. On one hand they\u2019re pleased that you discovered this find of the millennium, but are suspicious of this \u201cmind control business\u201d you\u2019re reporting. Some wonder if you still could be influenced, and shooting an Empire Indoctrinator doesn\u2019t really help either. They don\u2019t really want to execute you for mere suspicion though, not to mention you still might have questions they need answering.\n\nUltimately you\u2019re taken off duty and put in a military hospital under observation for months. The rest of your team is as well, but they make sure to keep you all separated from each other. It\u2019s a relatively unpleasant time for you. While you spend your time under going tests and interrogation, the Empire sent a better prepared team to the Xont structure to extract whatever they could find inside. Unfortunately even with the preparation, something still goes wrong. Chaos starts to ensue throughout the Empire, and how it spreads so quickly is unknown. You hear things every now and then, but you\u2019re kept mainly in the dark, but even you hear about the civil war that erupts.\n\nIt\u2019s during this time that someone comes for you as you sit in your cell. It\u2019s Alyssa!\n\n\u201cSir, the place has been abandoned we should get out of here and try to find a ship, I\u2019ve located a few of the other members of our team as well.\u201d She says as if you\u2019ve never lost contact.\n\u201cWell I can see you\u2019ve thought out the escape plan. You have any idea what to do afterwards though? I\u2019m sure you\u2019ve heard that there\u2019s a civil war going on.\u201d\n\u201cThat\u2019s up to you Captain, I\u2019m just here to set you free and follow you.\u201d\n\u201cWell I don\u2019t know if I\u2019m still a captain, Alyssa, you can probably call me by my given name. No need for formalities anymore. As for what we\u2019re going to do, well I suppose we can figure that out on the escape, maybe we should just go find a quiet part of the galaxy and get the hell away from all this shit.\u201d\n\u201cWhatever you decide, I\u2019ll be there.\u201d Alyssa says. There\u2019s something definitely comforting about that.\n\nAs you make your way to your first steps to escape, you think if the Empire had had more soldiers like Alyssa there wouldn\u2019t have been a civil war.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Soldier on", "result": "You\u2019re in it this far, might as well explore the rest. Soon you come to an elevator; you and Alyssa look at each other and enter it. Anything could be lurking down there. You start to breathe in and out trying to calm yourself, while Alyssa employs a quieter calming technique of closing her eyes and preparing herself.\n\nThe elevator door opens and you both exit.\n\nAfter much exploration, there\u2019s nothing down here! In fact there\u2019s no indication that anything is living down here, just a bunch of devices, and research notes that you don\u2019t understand, but would be useful to the Empire if they ever got there hands on it. You don\u2019t really want to mess around with anything down here, not after all the mind control shit you were putting up with before. You and Alyssa leave for the ground floor again.\n\nUpon reaching it, you see the Silver Sentinels, but fortunately they don\u2019t attack since you still aren\u2019t carrying your guns. They just patrol right past you, but you don\u2019t want to risk it, so you hurry out as fast as you can. The outside of the structure has the scenes of a small skirmish, dead Elojin lie on the ground as well as a few of your team. Apparently they figured you all would get killed inside and they\u2019d pick up the pieces.\n\nReaching the village your team looks relieved to see you come back. You take the opportunity to say a few words.\n\n\u201cAlright team, all of us and me especially were under some fucked up influence, not sure what it was, but it wasn\u2019t good. Now there was a lot of stuff done, that doesn\u2019t need to be reported, so I\u2019m hoping you\u2019re all willing to back me up on the story.\u201d\n\u201cWe\u2019re with you sir.\u201d one of them pipes up.\n\u201cWe always will be.\u201d Alyssa adds.\n\u201cAlright this is what we\u2019re going to do\u2026\u201d\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive, you explain a story about Paradise being a hostile world holding only death. You feel bad about LaFleur\u2019s needless death so you also add that he died bravely in combat and should be posthumously rewarded. You also say the Elojin were attempting to use the place as a secret spy training camp, and state that mass driver bombardment of the planet should be in order. Your superiors have no reason to disbelieve you, and take your advice. Paradise is laid to waste and the Xont structure will never be discovered. You\u2019re sent on your next mission where replacements will meet you.\n\nOn your way there, Alyssa as approaches you.\n\n\u201cWhy\u2019d you do it Captain? Why didn\u2019t you reveal the Xont structure? You might\u2019ve gotten promoted or even better, assigned to a different command.\n\n\u201cBecause it would\u2019ve just made things worse. The Empire\u2019s survived this long, it\u2019s not going to fall anytime soon. I\u2019d rather live with the way things are, than risk an uncertain future. Besides I don\u2019t want to leave you anymore than you want to leave me.\u201d\n\nAlyssa smiles at this comment, a rarity that you wish she\u2019d do more often.\n\nOf course in time you do see it a lot more.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Listen to Dobbs", "result": "You decide to listen to Private Dobbs, exploring this place probably isn\u2019t the safest thing to do given that you\u2019ve only just shaken the weird mind control you were experiencing earlier. You all head for the exit, which is fortunately without incident. You encounter some dead bodies of Elojin and some of your team when you get outside. Looks like your team won, you guess the Elojin were hoping you\u2019d be easy pickings after coming out of the place.\n\nWhen you get to the Lizard village the rest of the team looks relieved to see you. You all exchange information. You\u2019re unsure what to do about the Xont structure though, you\u2019re tempted to go back in, but you decide that you should probably just stick around and just report your findings to the Empire which can send in a better prepared team. In the mean time, you spend the rest of your stay at the Lizard village. It\u2019s uneventful until one day Dobbs comes up missing for roll call, this is followed by a huge explosion later during a search for him. The shockwave of it, makes you almost think you\u2019re being bombarded from above, but after it dies down you realize it was the Xont structure.\n\nYou and your team immediately head over to where it stood and it is completely gone. Nothing but a gigantic crater exists. Whatever useful information it contained will remain a mystery.\n\nThe disappearance of Dobbs makes you come to the conclusion of either one of two things, either he was under the influence of something that didn\u2019t want you uncover any Xont secrets and he snuck off to activate some sort of self-destruct mechanism. Or less likely, he wasn\u2019t under any influence, but decided that for the good of the Empire, the Xont structure needed to be destroyed so it couldn\u2019t possibly cause any trouble like it did with you and your team.\n\nWhen the Empire ship arrives you decide to leave out the whole incident with the Xont structure, your superiors would only be mad at you for losing such a find. You report that you suffered casualties with Elojin and native forces. You also add that Private Dobbs should be honored post humorously for his bravery in battle. Finally you go on to report you didn\u2019t find anything of any use for the Empire on the planet.\n\nYour superiors nod and dismiss you. They write Paradise off as a low priority and not worth colonizing or even keeping an outpost on. Eventually you\u2019re sent on your next mission, which is far away from Paradise. You wonder though if you\u2019ll get another chance to discover something on this planet though. It is a big galaxy after all.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Feeling different? (Current thoughts)", "result": "You don\u2019t feel any different, actually you feel like yourself, more so than you were previously. True being in this place gives you a feeling of unease, but you\u2019re not really having any strange thoughts, like you were before, at least you don\u2019t think you are.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Continue pressing buttons", "result": "You can tell Dobbs is getting skittish about messing around with the machine, so you decide to take over.\n\u201cUm sir, I really don\u2019t think you should start pressing buttons\u2026\u201d\n\u201cQuiet private, I\u2019m taking the risks here\u2026well what\u2019s this?\u201d\n\nYour ingenious process of pressing buttons until something happens has activated a hologram of some sort. The hologram image is that of a humanoid. You\u2019ve never seen what race it\u2019s based on though.\n\n\u201cXgeehti! Sathayi egawah tylageti!\u201d the hologram says. You don\u2019t know what that means, but it looks agitated though.\n\u201cSir, we should get out of here, this hologram might be activating self defense systems!\u201d\n\u201cLagxet\u2026 Language process identified\u2026.Who are you people? I don\u2019t recognize your species, are you yet another genetically designed slave for the Xont? They must be losing their touch, because you look pretty unimpressive. Though that blue female looks like she shows promise. And why have I been off line for so long? Wasn\u2019t the outbreak under control?\u201d\n\u201cOutbreak?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cYes! The outbreak! I told them that they should take special precautions with the new germ weapon they were working on, but do they listen? No! They\u2019re the galaxy rulers, they think they\u2019re invincible, they know better than some hologram. Hey what happened to this place?\u201d the hologram scans the dead bodies in the room and the carcass in the doorway and starts to realize that things have changed. \u201cErm, are the Xont still in charge of this facility?\u201d\n\u201cNo, this is an ancient ruin for all intents and purposes. The Xont have long since disappeared. And up until now, they were considered a legend of some sort.\u201d You reply.\n\u201cOh I assure you they were very real. Though I can honestly say, they were hardly worthy of legend status. Hmm, I guess now I know why I was off line for so long then.\u201d The hologram states seemingly unworried about how much time has passed. \u201cWhat race are you?\u201d the hologram asks.\n\u201cI\u2019m human.\u201d\n\u201cWhat a dreadful name.\u201d\n\u201cSIR, we need to get out of here NOW!\u201d Dobbs says and grabs you.\n\u201cPrivate Dobbs, you will calm down this instant!\u201d Alyssa shouts back at him.\nHe looks very distressed; he\u2019s convinced that staying here will result in something very bad.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Stay", "result": "\u201cPrivate Dobbs, calm the fuck down! Nothing is going to\u2026\u201d\n\u201cYou know he\u2019s displaying all signs of the sickness.\u201d The hologram states.\n\u201cWhat?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cThe sickness. I remember when the outbreak first occurred; some of the scientists here started acting like him. I\u2019ve never analyzed your race before, but his temperature, brain waves and blood levels are severely different from yours.\u201d\n\u201cYOU\u2019LL NEVER LEARN THE SECRETS HERE! DIE IN THE NAME OF THE XONT!\u201d Dobbs screams and attacks you with his knife! You manage to react in time and dodge the blow. You follow up with a couple of stabs to his gut; Alyssa immediately grabs him and slits his throat. It takes awhile, but he finally dies. After this unexpected attack, the hologram speaks once again.\n\n\u201cWell I guess the Xont would\u2019ve considered that a successful result of their experiment.\u201d\n\u201cOkay what the hell were Xont working on here and what do you mean by success?\u201d you demand.\n\u201cOh they were working on many things actually, but they were doing a lot of research on mind control, and how it could best be implemented. The germ weapon I referred to earlier was one of their experiments. It was designed to infect other races with the \u201cXont way of thinking.\u201d so they wouldn\u2019t have to worry about rebellions cropping up on the worlds they conquered. What a spectacular failure that was\u2026\u201d\n\u201cMy team came in here and some of us felt strange, myself especially, but we seemed to have shaken the feeling. And while I felt a lot more hostile, but I didn\u2019t feel like a servant of the Xont.\u201d You say.\n\u201cWell, I just said it was a spectacular failure! The problem with germs is they\u2019re unpredictable and always changing! One might affect one person one way, might affect another very differently! Now take hundreds of different races into the equation and you have a recipe for disaster! I told them they should stick with technology; little obedience chips in the currency. Everyone likes money, everyone uses it and Xont currency was wide spread throughout the galaxy.\u201d\n\u201cI think we came across some of those coins.\u201d You say.\n\u201cOh really? Well I\u2019m sure the effect on you was minimal. I never got the chance to perfect them considering the idea was shot down before I could really get the project started! I only made a few test prototypes, and those were distanced linked to a power source in this facility. So I imagine they only started affecting you until you started getting closer to this place. You wouldn\u2019t happen to have them still would you?\u201d\n\u201cNo I destroyed them.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?! Well I can see my work isn\u2019t appreciated today either! Ah it\u2019s just as well anyway, you said the Xont were gone, who\u2019s going to be using the currency anymore?\u201d\n\nThe hologram seems friendly enough if a little odd, you could keep asking it questions, or you could attempt to destroy it, if you think it could still be dangerous.", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep asking questions", "result": "\u201cI have some more questions.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m sure you do. Very well, it\u2019s not like I have anything better to do.\u201d it replies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask more about him", "result": "\u201cMe? Why I think you\u2019re the first person who\u2019s ever asked about me. This is a real special occasion. I\u2019m a hologram of course, but it\u2019s obvious that I\u2019m not a common one. I actually existed at one time or rather my race did until the Xont exterminated us. I am actually the collective representation of what remains of the Gequek civilization. We were primarily a scholarly and relatively peaceful race. In fact we were the ones who made first contact with the Xont and gave them the ability to travel the stars, a decision that obviously came back to haunt us. They started out nice enough, but something within them changed. When we learned that the Xont were intent on galactic conquest we refused to contribute anymore technology to their war machine, but by then it was too late, they attacked in force and completely conquered us. They saw us as a threat to their rule yet they still desired our knowledge. After bleeding our learning centers and our best minds dry of everything, they created this hologram to hold the data. I\u2019m still not sure why they just didn\u2019t download the information in their own databases instead of going through the elaborate process of making a complex hologram of a race that they were intent on destroying. Perhaps they saw us as a \u201cparent\u201d of some sort. After all we had given them everything. And even though they had the need to destroy us, they couldn\u2019t bear thought of us being gone forever. Whatever their reasons, after I was created and online, the last Gequek were exterminated.\u201d\n\u201cSo are you sentient, or just an elaborate program?\u201d\n\u201cGood question. I started out as just an elaborate program, I was taken from research center to research center assisting on projects for the Xont, and providing statistics, opinions and theories, but as time went on, I began to develop a sense of \u201cself\u201d. Unsurprisingly I began to display many Gequek traits which infuriated the Xont. They didn\u2019t want to risk deprogramming me and disseminating the information in a more traditional way at that point though. They just learned to put up with me.\u201d\n\u201cDidn\u2019t you want revenge though?\u201d\n\u201cFor what? I mean yes the Gequek spirit lived on within me, but what purpose would\u2019ve been gained by revenge? If I became hostile, the Xont would\u2019ve destroyed me regardless of the loss to them and if I ceased to exist then so would the Gequek, I couldn\u2019t let that happen. In my current service to the Xont, I was essentially immortal; I was well protected. My expertise was sought and I was grudgingly respected and my new found sentience was a constant source of irritation to them. The Xont are all gone and I\u2019m still here so perhaps the Gequek did get revenge even if it was a little late.\u201d", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Ask about the outbreak and germ weapon", "result": "\u201cAs I stated the Xont were working on a germ weapon to make others obedient to them. I guess it wasn\u2019t so much of a weapon, as a reinforcer to those they had already enslaved. They really needed it too, at that point rebellions were becoming a big problem and they couldn\u2019t just resort to mass genocide, as they had become too reliant on their slaves. The idea was to create a virus with Xont DNA. They thought by infecting others with \u201cthemselves\u201d that it would cause them to be more willing to serve.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m not a scientist, but that doesn\u2019t make a lot of sense.\u201d\n\u201cOh the virus was a lot more complex than that, but that was the basic premise. Still, you\u2019re right, there wasn\u2019t any evidence that it would work. Oh sure they did some tests that were successful, but they had done just as many that weren\u2019t. They brought me here to help, and they really didn\u2019t want to hear me telling them that the virus would never work the way they wanted it to. I told them they were making a lot of assumptions and were biasing their testing which really isn\u2019t a good idea, if you\u2019re making a virus weapon. Only when there was an accident in one of the labs did they see I was right.\u201d\n\u201cSo what happened?\u201d\n\u201cWell before they unceremoniously switched me offline, I got to see first hand what the virus did. When the vials were broken, they should\u2019ve evacuated the place then, but they were convinced that the virus wouldn\u2019t have any effect on them, so it was treated like a minor mishap. A few days later it was pretty apparent that was the wrong way to go about it. The Xont scientists here started acting more aggressively, paranoid, and downright nasty. And keep in mind these were traits that most of them already exhibited, so these traits were increased ten fold. The other servant races here started acting the same way; some weren\u2019t the loyal little slaves the virus was supposed to make them though. The air was ripe with rebellion, and soon everyone started killing each other. Xont were even killing other Xont, a few non-affected tried to send a distress call to the nearest military detachment to end this madness that had taken over the facility, I was going to go for a more direct approach and activate the Silver Sentinels, but then someone switched me offline, and I\u2019ve been that way until just now.\u201d\n\u201cHow come it didn\u2019t affect some? And how is it still affecting people after all this time has passed?!\u201d\n\u201cLike I said, viruses aren\u2019t certain. They mutate, and some people just have strong constitutions, so some won\u2019t be affected at all, while others have severe reactions. For those affected, the only common thing that I saw the virus do was increase aggressiveness. It didn\u2019t necessarily make one loyal to the Xont or anything else for that matter. As for why it\u2019s still around after all this time, I don\u2019t know. It\u2019s obviously airborne, but I would\u2019ve thought it would\u2019ve died out by now as well too. Something is still carrying it\u2026 that dead Daklow in the doorway, didn\u2019t you just kill it?\u201d\n\u201cYou mean that tentacled thing? Yeah.\u201d\n\u201cThose creatures were designed to be strong physically, and very resilient, it\u2019s quite possible that they are carriers and aren\u2019t affected, of course you\u2019d never know since they were bred to attack almost anything on sight. Anyway if that\u2019s the case, I\u2019d say anyone coming in here runs a risk of being infected, who in turn could infect others.\u201d\n\u201cWell how the hell are those things still alive though, if they were created eons ago?\u201d\n\u201cUh, my guess would be they MATED with each other, thus producing generations of offspring and those aren\u2019t same ones! Sheesh! Think man! It\u2019s a good thing they have a strong sense of territory, that\u2019s probably why they haven\u2019t overrun the planet; they tend to stick near the place that they were designed to guard.\u201d\n\u201cSo what do you think happened after you were shut down?\u201d\n\u201cOh I imagine someone escaped, maybe several people and ended up spreading the damn virus to other planets, causing more strife in an already volatile situation that the Xont were in, which caused a predictable domino effect. I told them to stick with technology.\u201d", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stop asking questions", "result": "\u201cThat\u2019s all I need to know for now.\u201d\n\u201cOkay then, I have a question, what are you planning to do?\u201d\n\u201cWhat do you mean?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cWell specifically I mean what do you plan to do with me?\u201d\n\u201cI haven\u2019t decided yet\u2026can you leave this facility?\u201d\n\u201cNot on my own, I can\u2019t stray too far from my power source, if I tried to leave, I\u2019d probably disappear and given the deterioration over time, I probably can\u2019t even leave this room now. I don\u2019t want to die, but I don\u2019t really relish the idea of being a prisoner here all by myself. As narrow-minded as the Xont were at least I had someone to talk to.\u201d\n\u201cIsn\u2019t there someway to transport your program?\u201d\n\u201cI doubt you have the means, you wouldn\u2019t be able to just download me into whatever computers you may have. I was designed by Xont technology and I\u2019ll only work in their systems, you\u2019d have to use something similar to put the storage device on or find a working Xont holo-emitter.\u201d\n\u201cIs there one of those here?\u201d\n\u201dThere was, but I don\u2019t know where it might be, let alone if it still works. There could be one in the underground level\u201d\n\u201cThere\u2019s an underground level?\u201d\n\u201cOf course, you didn\u2019t think this place was just one level did you? The Xont always liked building underground rather than up. I\u2019d be careful if you decide to go down there, it could be completely safe, but they were doing some secret experiments that even I wasn\u2019t allowed to know about, so who knows what\u2019s still lingering down there. You may be putting yourself at great risk, you sure your Empire is worth it?\u201d\n\u201cWhat do you mean?\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m not an idiot, the only possible reason why you\u2019re entertaining the idea of transporting me out of here, is so you can gain whatever information I can give you and your Empire, or whatever you call your system of government. No doubt to gain an advantage over your enemies and rule the galaxy. Time may have passed, but I know some things never change.\u201d\n\u201cIf you think that, why help us?\u201d\n\u201cA sense of being useful? Purpose? Perhaps I\u2019ve grown too cynical to care, but it\u2019s better than being stuck here. I had to put up with the Xont for centuries. Your race cannot possibly be worse. It is ultimately up to you, what you want to do.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Seek out the holo-emitter", "result": "\u201cWe\u2019re here now, we might as well, go look for it.\u201d\n\u201cVery well, I wish I could be of more help, but I\u2019m afraid in my current status I can only wish you luck.\u201d The hologram says and then describes what the emitter looks like so you\u2019ll know what to look for.\n\nYou and Alyssa head in the direction the Hologram gave and eventually reach an elevator. You both enter, and wait for it to take you down. You might not be in any danger, and you\u2019ve been in worse situations than this, but you feel the need to tell Alyssa something.\n\n\u201cAlyssa, if we don\u2019t get out of this I just want you to know that\u2026\u201d\n\nShe stops you.\n\n\u201cCaptain, if there\u2019s anything down there, we\u2019ll be able to handle it. And you don\u2019t need to tell me, I already know.\u201d\n\nThe elevator door opens ending the conversation, and you both exit.\n\nAfter much exploring there\u2019s no indication that anything living is down here, you were worried for nothing fortunately. After searching countless rooms with research notes and devices you have no idea what they do, you eventually come across what you were looking for. You grab the emitter, which is a lot smaller than you thought and leave.\n\nUpon reaching the ground floor, you see the Silver Sentinels, apparently they\u2019ve exterminated all the tentacled beast, but you still aren\u2019t carrying your guns so they continue to perceive you as harmless. They patrol by and you hurry back to the Hologram.\n\n\u201cWell, hello again, and I see you have the emitter! It wasn\u2019t too much trouble I hope.\u201d\n\u201cNone at all actually, nothing down there, except a lot of weird looking devices and research notes.\u201d\n\u201cHmm, yes while you were gone I was overriding the computer system to see what the hell they were working on, interesting stuff I must say. And actually somewhat original, I didn\u2019t know they had it in them. They never did get to test all their ideas out of course though, what with the outbreak occurring, well I guess your Empire will get that honor. I just hope they\u2019re wiser with playing god than the Xont were. Well I\u2019m ready to be downloaded, you ready? I\u2019ll tell you how to work it so you don\u2019t accidentally destroy me.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Download", "result": "You download the Hologram into the emitter and then turn it on. Success! He pops up.\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t sense any memory loss, so I\u2019m all here. Hmm, I\u2019m a little smaller now, and I don\u2019t nearly have as much maneuverability, being stuck on this thing, I\u2019ll have to tell you scientists to remedy that!\u201d he says and you shut him off and exit the structure.\n\nAs you exit the structure, you see dead Elojin and a few of your team members, apparently they thought you\u2019d all get killed inside and they\u2019d pick up the pieces. When you get to the Lizard village your team looks relieved to see you and you show them what you found.\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive you explain what happened and show them the Hologram. They\u2019re VERY impressed. So much in fact they don\u2019t even care about the mind control business you experienced. They make plans for a full scale expedition to loot the structure of everything. They take the Hologram from you as well. In fact your part is pretty much done, they give you some accolades and offer to promote you to a better command, but you decline, since you want stay with Alyssa. They don\u2019t question your reasons and send you on your next mission; they\u2019re too enthusiastic about the Xont find to worry about you. You and Alyssa grow a little closer due to the events that occurred on Paradise, realizing you should take advantage of the situation you both pursue a \u201csecret relationship\u201d, your team knows, but without an Indoctrinator looking over your shoulder; it\u2019s not really given a second thought.\n\nBut that isn\u2019t the end\u2026the Hologram was very wrong when he thought humanity couldn\u2019t be worse than the Xont. Very wrong.\n\nIn time the Empire uses the Xont technology that they find and employ it in wondrous ways. A golden age of humanity is said to have begun, however it only applies to humans. A strong sense of Xenophobia grips the Empire, aliens are not just segregated, or enslaved they\u2019re slaughtered. Genocide becomes the norm. Atrocities aren\u2019t just committed they\u2019re encouraged. The Mazatt, Krik, and even the Elojin form an alliance to unite against the unstoppable human war machine. Other aliens flock to their banner, alien worlds that were under Empire control revolt and are scheduled for extermination. It\u2019s during this time before you board a ship to your next mission that they attempt to take Alyssa away. Her home planet has become the head agitator of \u201cterrorism\u201d against the Empire. You don\u2019t allow it to happen. You shoot everyone you can, before succumbing to multiple wounds. But you\u2019ve given Alyssa time to escape. She drags you into the ship and launches it, but then sets it on to auto pilot and rushes back to try to help you, but it\u2019s too late, you\u2019re too badly wounded.\n\nShe holds you as you look up smiling at her, a single tear falls down her face and you feel its cool icy splash on your cheek, before you die.\n\nAlyssa\u2019s final link to humanity is severed.\n\nAlyssa goes back to her world where she becomes leader of the freedom movement. The Empire has a hell of a time attempting to re-take it and it doesn\u2019t help that Alyssa sets up an understanding with the Mazatt who supply weapons, supplies and ships to them.\n\nShe grows to hate all of humanity, except one. One she always remembers as what humanity CAN be, instead of what it is.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wait!", "result": "You think about the Empire getting a hold of this stuff, and you just don\u2019t know if it\u2019s a good idea. Sure, the Empire\u2019s enemies are certainly pretty bad, but the Empire isn\u2019t exactly benign. With all that extra power, you don\u2019t think it would be used entirely for good. You quickly ask the Hologram a question.\n\n\u201cAfter I download you, can you set some sort of self-destruct sequence on this place?\u201d\n\u201cWha\u2026what?!\u201d the Hologram says very surprised. Alyssa is a little surprised as well.\n\u201cWell can you?\u201d\n\u201cNo, since I\u2019d be out of this system, but I could tell you how to do it. I don\u2019t understand though, I thought you\u2019d want all the technology for your government.\u201d\n\u201cPart of me does, but the other part thinks it\u2019s a bad idea. Some of the things you said hit home too. The Xont became power mad dictators and eventually fell due to their own arrogance. I see that all too likely to happen given the history of humanity.\u201d\nThe Hologram smiles.\n\n\u201cIf you even considered that, then there already is more hope for your race than you think. A typical Xont, would\u2019ve been GIMME GIMME GIMME! Very well, but why keep me? Even though I consider myself sentient, I would surely fit under Xont technology.\u201d\n\u201cWell I\u2019m still human, I can\u2019t leave with nothing! Besides you are alive and you should be allowed to live. You hold the knowledge of the Xont but you could dish it out in small bites as it were. Give us only what you think we\u2019re ready for.\u201d\n\u201cHa ha ha! Wouldn\u2019t that make ME a kind of god? Though I do like the sound of it, so what you\u2019re suggesting is that I guide your scientists and leaders so they use the knowledge for more beneficial ends and not necessarily just for the traditional kill, crush and destroy ideology that everyone seems to favor.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, you think you could do it?\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t know, they might just get sick of me and erase me.\u201d\n\u201cHey you said you evaded that fate from the Xont for centuries and they were already in control of the galaxy. Humanity can\u2019t stand a mystery, if there\u2019s something they even THINK you\u2019re holding back, trust me, you\u2019ll be kept alive.\u201d\n\u201cHmm, your race sounds more interesting the more you tell me, I don\u2019t think you could persuade me not to do it now. Okay here\u2019s how to set the sequence, now listen carefully\u2026\u201d\n\nAfter downloading the Hologram, you set the sequence and run as fast as possible, you and Alyssa get out, passing the bodies of some Elojin who must\u2019ve been attempting to ambush your team. An explosion follows and you and Alyssa dive for cover. Soon some of your team comes to meet the both of you.\n\n\u201cSir what\u2019s going on?\u201d\n\u201cWe\u2019ll soon see.\u201d You say looking at the holo-emitter.\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive you give a story that doesn\u2019t explain exactly everything, but then they don\u2019t need to know. You leave out the Xont, and mind control. You say Salo died in a Lizard ambush, and feeling slightly bad about LaFleur\u2019s death, you say he died bravely in combat and should be rewarded posthumously. Ultimately you tell them you found the holo-emitter in some non-descript cave. Your superiors are satisfied with your story and take the emitter. They write Paradise off as low priority and send you on your next mission. You and Alyssa grow a little closer due to the events that occurred on Paradise, realizing you should take advantage of the situation you both pursue a \u201csecret relationship\u201d, your team knows, but without an Indoctrinator looking over your shoulder; it\u2019s not really given a second thought.\n\nBut this is not the end\u2026\n\nThe Empire leaders aren\u2019t pleased at first with the Hologram\u2019s \u201cteaspoon\u201d feeding of knowledge, but they learn to deal with it. It proves to be beneficial; the Empire grows stronger without going overboard. The Hologram remembering the mistakes that were made with the Xont tries to guide humanity towards a more \u201cenlightened path\u201d he isn\u2019t entirely successful, but some restrictions are loosened up, and the Indoctrinator Order is weakened a bit. It truly is a golden age that humanity can be proud of.\n\nAnd by the time you retire, you and Alyssa are allowed to get married and live your remaining years in peace.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Don't risk it", "result": "You think about it and decide not to risk it; in fact you feel you\u2019ve put yourself at risk above and beyond the call of duty. You\u2019ve been sent to a deadly jungle planet with hostile natives you\u2019ve had to fight, along with the heat and diseases. You and your team got temporarily infected by some virus weapon by a race long since dead, not to mention fighting their \u201cpets\u201d and you\u2019re still possibly in danger being in this contaminated facility. The Empire hardly appreciates your efforts as it is; you\u2019ve done more than enough, let someone else do more.\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t think we\u2019ll be going down there. I think I\u2019ve done more than my bit to go putting myself or a member of own my team in more danger.\u201d You say. The hologram looks a bit surprised, it even smiles.\n\u201cThen I was right, your race isn\u2019t worse than the Xont. At least some of your people don\u2019t live and die for their government so readily. Or you\u2019re able to think for yourself to a degree that you\u2019re unwilling to risk your life out of self-preservation. Either way it shows a lot more intelligence than the average Xont.\u201d\n\u201cThere will be an Empire ship coming to pick us up in a few months, they\u2019ll be better equipped to handle whatever may be down there, plus along with all the information I can report. We can still get you out of here so you won\u2019t be stuck.\u201d\n\u201cNo, I\u2019ll give you something better; I\u2019m going to destroy myself and this place.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?! Why? I thought you didn\u2019t want to die.\u201d\n\u201cMaybe its time. Oddly your simple choice has made me see that perhaps some things can change. If I was transported out of here to give my knowledge to your people, what then? I live the remainder of my existence in yet another galaxy spanning power, having to put up with the arrogance and witness the cruelty until that it eventually collapses and I\u2019m found in another facility like this one, centuries later by some different explorers and repeat the cycle again? No, once was enough. I\u2019m an ancient relic that should\u2019ve been destroyed when the Xont fell. I\u2019ll be activating the self-destruct sequence soon; I\u2019d suggest you and your companion leave quickly.\u201d\n\u201cYou sure about this?\u201d\n\u201cYes I\u2019m sure, but I enjoyed our little talk human, goodbye\u2026I wonder if there will be an afterlife for me?\u201d\n\nYou and Alyssa rush out of the facility as quickly as possible, on your way out you notice some dead Elojin, looks like they tried to ambush your team and lost. You aren\u2019t too far away when a large explosion occurs. You and Alyssa immediately take cover. Shortly your team comes running towards your direction to see what happened.\n\n\u201cSir, you\u2019re all right! What the hell happened?\u201d\n\u201cNothing happened. We didn\u2019t find anything here. The whole Xont thing is a myth. Understand?\u201d\nThe rest of your team looks a bit confused at first, but then agree. You spend the rest of your time on Paradise at the Lizard village without incident. One day you go back and check where the Xont structure stood, but there\u2019s nothing there except a large crater. You wonder about the underground part of the facility, if it\u2019s still intact and what secrets that it may still hold, but you realize the hologram was right. Some things are better left in the past and buried.\n\nWhen the Empire ship comes, you report how you suffered casualties with Elojin forces and that there was nothing of importance on Paradise. They nod and write it off as a low priority, and send you on your next mission. Hopefully this one won\u2019t have any \u201cmythical civilizations\u201d on it.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Destroy it", "result": "You decide not take any chances, if this hologram invented mind control coins and had involvement with the Xont, then it isn\u2019t to be trusted. You pick up your weapon and start shooting the computers, the hologram begins to buzz and fade.\n\n\u201cWha\u2026ou\u2026doing? Sil\u2026ntin\u2026truders!\u201d it yells, before fading out of existence. Just enough time for it to alert the Silver Sentinels back to your location.\n\nSeeing a gun in your hand, they blast you into ash.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Explore elsewhere", "result": "\"Let's explore the rest of this place and come back here later.\" you say.\n\nJust as you exit the room you suddenly feel several sharp pains in your back! Dobbs has just stabbed you repeatedly!\n\n\"YOU'll NEVER LEARN THE SECRETS OF THE XONT! HAHAHAHA!\" he screams, before Alyssa breaks his neck.\n\nYou'll never exactly know what happened, but all you do know is Dobbs was right, you'll never learn the secrets of the Xont as the adventure is over for you.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Shoot Alyssa", "result": "You don\u2019t hesitate, you shoot Alyssa. She falls, grabbing on to a nearby table and looks at you once in disbelief with a hurt expression, one you\u2019ve never seen her display before.\n\u201cI\u2026never\u2026thought that you\u2019d\u2026\u201d\n\nA second shot is fired by Salo killing her and ending whatever last words she was going to say.\n\n\u201cCaptain, my apologies for questioning your loyalty to humanity before. I see I was wrong, I thank you for saving my life.\u201d Salo remarks.\n\nYou immediately shake the strange feelings that have been invading your mind again. Something was attempting to make you weak. Alyssa was the last alien influence holding you back from achieving complete confidence in human superiority. By getting rid of her, you no longer have any impediments of your goal. The Xont technology WILL be taken for the Empire!\n\nThere\u2019s still the matter of getting out of here though, fortunately Dobbs may have found a way to do that.\n\n\u201cUm, sir? I think I remembered what some of these symbols were supposed to mean, I think I can figured out how we can turn them on without them attacking us. I remember a Xont legend about \u201cSilver Sentinels\u201d, and that\u2019s what these things look like. I guess they were created by the Xont primarily to act as guards for scientists, if we don\u2019t look like a threat then they shouldn\u2019t attack us. In fact they\u2019ll probably start attacking those things lurking outside.\u201d\n\u201cThen DO IT!\u201d\n\u201cWe have to look harmless, if they detect us holding guns, we\u2019ll be perceived as a threat as well.\u201d\n\u201cSo what do we do to look harmless?\u201d\n\u201cDrop all our guns.\u201d\n\nYou aren\u2019t enthusiastic about that idea, but Salo displaying a slightly different side of himself, says as long as the will of the Emperor is guiding you all, you have nothing to fear. The destiny of humanity is inevitable. You acknowledge that indeed humanity is going to succeed this day.\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s do it, drop your weapons everyone, and the Emperor\u2019s Will, will protect us.\u201d\n\nYour team reluctantly drops their weapons as Dobbs presses a few buttons on the computer. Red lights flicker on in the Sentinels\u2019 eye sockets.\n\n\u201cSCANNING\u2026SCANNING\u2026ALERT! GENETIC EXPERIMENTS FROM LAB 4 HAVE ESCAPED! THREAT LEVEL 10! TERMINATE HOSTILES!\u201d their metallic voices say in unison.\n\nThe Sentinels move quickly to the doorway and begin to open fire on the feeding creatures. You can see the creatures fight back, but whatever the Sentinels are made out of must be strong indeed. Soon the battle moves far enough from the doorway, and you can hear the Sentinels hunting down the rest of the abominations. You climb over the dead creature in the doorway and take a quick look only to see more dead monsters. The Sentinels do their jobs very efficiently.\n\nYou could take this opportunity to try to escape or explore a bit more.", "action_results": [{"action": "Escape", "result": "You decide that this place would be better explored with a better equipped team. You\u2019ll secure it from anyone else attempting to go inside, but you don\u2019t have the manpower or firepower to best serve the Empire\u2019s interests. When the pick up ship comes you\u2019ll report your findings.\n\nIn the mean time you tell your team to pick up their weapons, head for the exit as quickly as possible and spend the rest of your time here back at the Lizard village nearby. When you get outside you\u2019re ambushed by a small Elojin team, but they aren\u2019t any match for you, the cowards run as soon as they realize they\u2019re outnumbered. Their running doesn\u2019t help them, Salo takes special care to shoot crippling shots, rather than outright killing them, he then takes special delight of dragging them back to the Lizard village to extract more information out of them. He doesn\u2019t get too much as they don\u2019t know too much, you don\u2019t think that matters to him though.\n\nAfter all the Elojin have finally died of their wounds, the rest of your stay here passes without incident, you order patrols around the structure, but nothing ever tries to enter it and nothing ever comes out.\n\nWhen the Empire ship comes, you report your findings. Your superiors are pleased and say they will take it from here. You\u2019re a little disappointed, you thought maybe they\u2019d let you lead another team in seeing as you found it, but they say you\u2019re needed elsewhere, and the Empire always knows best. They give you a medal and some accolades, but that\u2019s about it.\n\nThe Xont technology that\u2019s extracted from the building is eventually applied in fantastic ways. The Empire easily begins to turn the balance to their favor. A gripping xenophobia runs rampant throughout the Empire as it becomes even less tolerant of alien species, seeing them as being unfit to even exist. This eventually leads to the unprecedented alliance between the Krik, Mazatt and Elojin who attempt to fight back, other aliens start rallying to their banner as well. The Human Empire becomes the most feared and hated galactic superpower since\u2026well the Xont.\n\nAs for you, after your tour on Paradise, the rest of your career was unspectacular. You remained a glorified Empire scout, until the some worlds started revolting against the Empire\u2019s policy of exterminating aliens. At that time you\u2019re relegated to a counter-terrorist command. It\u2019s on one of these worlds where you meet a suitable fate.\n\nWhile storming a terrorist hideout, you\u2019re shot in the back by one of its leaders by surprise; you look up and see a blue girl that looks similar to Alyssa. You almost think it is her, but then again they all look alike to you.\n\n\u201cYou can\u2019t win\u2026the Empire will survive\u2026\u201d you say and then she fires another shot ensuring that you won\u2019t.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Explore", "result": "There\u2019s no way you\u2019re going to not explore this place! It\u2019s your duty, and one you are going to fulfill! You order all your team to pick up their weapons, and that you\u2019re going to explore this place.\n\n\u201cBut sir! The Silver Sentinels are still wandering around, and they\u2019ll attack us if they perceive us as a threat!\u201d Dobbs exclaims.\n\u201cAnd what the fuck of it? We\u2019ll blow those archaic Xont automatons back to the junkheap if they attack us. Besides we\u2019ll be better prepared for them now, they\u2019ll likely be weakened by fighting with those abominations and as servants of the Empire our cause is just and our destiny is certain. Now no more of this cowardice soldier, we\u2019ve got a job to do!\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Explore this room more", "result": "You order your team to start searching every inch of this room. They all comply except for Dobbs who for some reason is still questioning your orders.\n\u201cSir I really think we should leave. This place is having a strange affect on all of us and you in general.\u201d\n\u201cPrivate, your lack of bravery sickens me! Everyone else is doing what they\u2019re supposed to except you! Perhaps it is YOU, who is under a strange influence!\u201d\n\u201cLet me kill this unbeliever Captain! Its obvious his heart is not with the Empire!\u201d Salo adds.\n\nThe rest of your team starts calling for Dobb\u2019s blood as well, sensing he\u2019s outnumbered and in immediate danger, he quickly changes his tune.\n\n\u201cForgive my weakness sir; I was just concerned about your welfare and the team.\u201d\n\u201cLet ME worry about that Dobbs! Now figure out the rest of those controls on that fucking machine!\u201d you snarl.\n\nDobbs complies and begins pressing buttons; it looks like he\u2019s doing it randomly, but your heightened state of paranoia causes you to be suspicious again. He\u2019s up to something, you know he is!\n\n\u201cDobbs what the hell are you doing, over there?\u201d\n\u201cOh just trying to figure out how to TURN THE PEST CONTROL SYSTEM ON! DIE IN THE NAME OF THE XONT! YOU LOWLY INSECTS!\u201d\n\u201cOh shit!\u201d you say as you see some sort of turret come out of the ceiling! It starts swiveling around and firing on all in its path! Some of your team members are killed in this cowardly sneak attack. You duck for cover along with many of your team, Private Dobbs runs for the exit laughing manically. You\u2019re all too busy shooting at the turret, to fire at him. After destroying it, you assess the situation. All the gunplay ended up destroying the machine Dobbs activated, so that\u2019s useless now.\n\n\u201cThe damn heretic must be brought to justice!\u201d Salo exclaims.\n\u201cHe will.\u201d You say. \u201cAlright we got a new mission, everyone pair up and hunt the bastard down, he\u2019s probably still in here somewhere. Don\u2019t forget though, we\u2019re still exploring this place, so make a note of what you find. Kill anything not human.\u201d\n\nYou pair up with Salo and start searching. Most of the rooms you find seem to be normal quarters, presumably for whatever aliens slept here. Most the rooms are either in disarray or almost bare, you don\u2019t find anything of interest or Dobbs. You can still hear sounds of battle echoing though, the Sentinels are being very efficient of hunting those tentacle beasts, you know it won\u2019t be long before they start attacking you, but you\u2019re confident you\u2019ll be able to take them.\n\nEventually you come to some sort of elevator; it looks like it only goes down. You doubt if Dobbs went down there seeing as the elevator would\u2019ve still been on the lower level if he\u2019d used it, but you\u2019ve got others looking for him, perhaps you should attempt to check out the other level.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue to hunt for Dobbs", "result": "You shake the odd feelings you have and decide to continue looking for Dobbs. You and Salo continue to hunt down the heretic. You then start hearing gunfire, followed by the screams of your troops. The Silver Sentinels have finished their extermination of the tentacled beasts and have now started on your team. Scream after scream echo throughout the empty halls.\n\n\u201cWeaklings! They dishonor the Empire by dying so easily!\u201d you mutter to yourself. After this mission you vow to have all their names stricken from the records as they are unfit to have their names engraved in the Halls of the Honored Fallen.\n\nYou don\u2019t see any sign of Dobbs, but the Sentinels finally track you and Salo down. Despite all your bravado earlier about blasting them back to the scrapheap, you don\u2019t fair any better than the rest of your team. Whatever they\u2019re made out of, your weapons just don\u2019t have any effect. As you attempt to take cover in a nearby room, Salo is blasted into cinders.\n\nAfter seeing this, your faith betrays you, you throw your gun away, survival is more important. You think they won\u2019t see you as a threat anymore if you don\u2019t have your gun.\n\nYour thinking is wrong. The Sentinels have already locked on you and perceived you as a hostile. They enter the room and see you cowering in the corner. They mercilessly finish you off, putting an end to your last remaining thoughts of how you dishonored the Empire.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go to the lower level", "result": "You feel compelled to explore the underground part of this structure, let the others find that fool Dobbs, you have more important things to discover. Salo\u2019s a little perturbed by your decision.\n\n\u201cSir! We need to find that heretic and bring him to justice!\u201d\n\u201dWe will! But we\u2019re also here to explore this place and unlock the secrets and POWER that are held here.\u201d\n\u201cFor the Empire to use!\u201d Salo reminds.\n\u201cYeah\u2026for the Empire.\u201d You say half heartedly\n\nSalo\u2019s going to have to be gotten rid of soon, you think as you take the elevator down.\n\nYou reach the new level, it looks almost untouched. There are no signs of anything lurking down here. You and Salo begin to explore the rooms and you see wonders you\u2019ve never seen before. You find research notes and papers that are incomprehensible to you, but you can sense they contain information that could provide you with power. All you would need is time\u2026\n\nWhen you come across what looks to be a genetics lab, you see diagrams displaying transformations. Judging by the pictures, it looks like genetic enhancement, but without all the surgery. Apparently the Xont built a machine to simplify the process.\n\nThe machine is right in this room.\n\nAll one has to do is step inside and be reborn\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Don't enter the machine", "result": "Your courage to grab destiny fails you, and you resist temptation to become reborn as a higher being. You decide the Empire would best know what to do with all this stuff, such power isn\u2019t for you. You tell Salo that you should go back to the upper level; he looks a little less suspicious of you now. On your way back up, you continue to try to shake this overwhelming feeling of superiority to everything; you have to get out of this place, your will is too weak, you feel like you\u2019ll be unable to resist temptation.\n\nYou don\u2019t need to worry though, when you arrive on the ground floor, you\u2019re met by Silver Sentinels which have finished off all the tentacled beasts as well as everyone remaining in your team. When they see you holding your guns they instantly blast you and Salo. A maniacal laugh emerges, and it\u2019s Dobbs.\n\nHe finishes you off with a kick to your head.\n\nYou were fortunate in some ways, you were spared the horrors he later unleashed on the galaxy with the power from the Xont.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Be Reborn", "result": "You approach the machine, but Salo stops you.\n\n\u201cSir I can\u2019t let you do this! Who know\u2019s what that machine will do to you! It wasn\u2019t created by humans. What changes it will make won\u2019t be natural!\u201d\n\u201cOut of my way! Perhaps you can\u2019t grab destiny when it appears before you, but I can!\u201d you snarl.\n\nSalo decides to use force, but you anticipated that. You knock his weapon out of his hand, and throw him down on the floor. Before he can get up you shoot him. You then don\u2019t waste anytime entering the machine. You press a few buttons, having a brief moment wondering if you\u2019re making the right decision.\n\nThe machine rumbles, and you feel it working. You also feel pain like you\u2019ve never imagined All this new alien information is being shoved into your brain and your body is undergoing a vast transformation, its not just like you\u2019re getting stronger or smarter, you\u2019re becoming something not human. You scream in torment.\n\nEventually it stops and you collapse. You manage to catch a reflection of yourself in a nearby shiny surface. Your face is no longer your own, you look like a hybrid of human and something else. Your skin has a purplish hue. You know languages and things you\u2019ve never even pondered or heard of before. Your strength and reflexes have also increased, not to unearthly proportions, but you can safely say better than you were.\n\n\u201cAnd to think, I had a fleeting moment of doubt\u2026\u201d you say.\n\nThoughts of the Empire leave you. You have no intention of going back, you have other plans. You\u2019re going to learn everything you can here and use this knowledge to control the planet, and eventually spread from there\u2026you immediately get to work.\n\nA few days pass and Dobbs wanders down. You\u2019d forgotten all about him, the rest of your team is dead, killed by the Silver Sentinels. Dobbs sees you however and is in awe. He believes you to be the Xont returned, and he might be right. He swears to serve you which you take advantage of. The Silver Sentinels are then reprogrammed to serve you as well and soon power is restored to the entire structure.\n\nA few more days later some Elojin interlopers arrive; they were setting you up and presumably thought you were all killed. When they reach your level, they\u2019re very surprised, and you make them pay for disturbing you.\n\nMore time passes and you manage to get a few surrounding Lizard tribes to follow you. They tend to see you as the \u201cGiant Purple God\u201d who sends his Silver Demons to punish those who disobey. You begin to do experiments on the Lizards enhancing them as well, they make excellent soldiers, and you expand your underground facility even more. The notes on mind control are extremely interesting to you as well.\n\nEventually Empire ships come and you send Dobbs to meet them, you tell him he needs to convince the Empire set up a base here. He doesn\u2019t completely understand, but obeys. Dobbs is somehow successful. A base is set up, and gradually over time you gain control over it using a variety of means at your disposal. Some of these Empire troops eventually transfer, and spread your poison to other portions of the Empire.\n\nBy the time the Empire figures out what\u2019s going on, you\u2019ve taken control of the fleet stationed at Paradise, and several other ships in other parts of the Empire as well. A civil war breaks out. You eventually drag the other Major Powers into it, and more chaos is created. World after world falls before your armies of genetically enhanced super Lizard soldiers and Silver Death Machines, before your advancement is finally put to a definite halt. You have enemies everywhere. All right thinking beings hate the destruction you\u2019ve caused. You never sleep, you cannot rest, you have no friends, you trust no one, and assassins from all worlds have been sent to kill you. You rule a portion of the galaxy, and yet are a prisoner. You stay in your now sprawling deep underground complex plotting and scheming for galaxy domination like some sort of brooding dark god.\n\nSometimes you wonder if this was all worth it, but then you remember an ancient quote from a place you used to call home\u2026\n\n\u201cTis better to rule in hell than to serve in heaven\u201d\n\nAnd then you smile.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Feeling different? (Current thoughts)", "result": "You\u2019re feeling weird again, you thought that killing Alyssa would shake this feeling, but it hasn\u2019t. It\u2019s like something is still trying to get inside your head. You don\u2019t know what to think anymore. You\u2019re thoughts of the Empire are in flux, you\u2019re starting to wonder why you should worry about bringing \u201cglory\u201d to the Empire. Maybe you should be bringing \u201cglory\u201d to yourself instead\u2026", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Explore other parts of the structure", "result": "\u201cCome on, we can come back to this room later, let\u2019s explore the rest of this place. Shoot anything not human.\u201d\nYou don\u2019t get far when Dobbs starts talking again.\n\n\u201cSir I think we should leave this place entirely, I think\u2026\u201d you interrupt private Dobbs before he can complete his sentence.\n\u201cStop thinking! You will fall in line right now! I\u2019m tired of your insubordination!\u201d\n\u201cAND I\u2019M TIRED OF FOLLOWING A LOWER LIFE FORM LIKE YOU! DIE IN THE NAME OF THE XONT!\u201d Dobbs screams and attempts to shoot you, but he\u2019s shot by everyone else before he can even raise his weapon.\n\nAfter witnessing such treachery, you make a small speech.\n\n\u201cAlright people, it\u2019s obvious this place stinks of alien influence, influences that would attempt to lead us astray from our righteous path. We must keep our minds pure for the Empire!\u201d\n\u201cI couldn\u2019t have said that better myself, Captain.\u201d Salo says.\n\nAfter inspiring the team with more Empire doctrine, you continue to search the facility. You don\u2019t really come across anything of any note, most of the rooms are either stripped bare or are in shambles as if battle occurred there a long time ago. You eventually discover an elevator of some sort. It looks like it only goes down. You can only imagine what might be underground. While you have faith that you can easily defeat anything hostile down there, you\u2019re not so sure about your team. Whatever made Dobbs into a heretic could be stronger down there, they aren\u2019t as strong willed as you or Salo are, you don\u2019t want to have your entire team suddenly turn against you, just because they\u2019re all weak minded fools.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go down", "result": "You and your team all just barely fit into the elevator. You feel like someone could slip a knife into your side at any time. You know they\u2019re all out to get you. They all want to betray the Empire. You\u2019re the only loyal one here, they\u2019ve all fallen under alien influence just like Dobbs, they\u2019re just being more subtle about it.\nWhen you reach the underground level you see nothing that indicates anything is lurking down here, it\u2019s almost untouched. There are a lot of devices, and research notes you don\u2019t understand, but you know all this stuff can be used for the good of the Empire, but THESE heretics want it for themselves! Even Salo. He may hide behind the guise of an Indoctrinator but you know something more sinister lies beneath. You\u2019re going to have to do something soon, before they all decide to attack.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open fire", "result": "Your paranoia overwhelms you and you open fire on your team members catching them all by surprise.\n\n\u201cDIE DIE DIE HERETICS!\u201d you scream.\n\nSalo\u2019s a little bewildered by this statement and even madder that you would accuse him of being one! He and a few others manage to get out of the way of your onslaught and return fire killing you.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Sneak away", "result": "While the others are exploring, you quietly slip away and head back to the elevator. They realize just in time for the door to close and you to be on your way up back to the ground level.\n\nYou can hear yelling as you leave, but that won\u2019t be anything compared to what you have planned. You giggle to yourself insanely, when the door opens, the Silver Sentinels are there to greet you, they\u2019ve finished exterminating the tentacled beasts and now they\u2019ve detected more threats.\n\nYou\u2019re still carrying your weapon\u2026\n\nThey blast you and take the elevator down to finish off your team, in your final moments you die believing you\u2019ve served the Empire by killing these heretics, but with nobody left, the Empire never knows about the Xont structure and the mission is considered an absolute failure with all personnel lost.\n\nMass driver bombardment is recommended and implemented.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Leave", "result": "You decide that a better equipped team would be better suited for this job. Those who are more loyal to the Empire, perhaps even a whole squad of Indoctrinators who have been trained to focus their minds against alien influences. You order your team to leave, and state that you\u2019ll just be securing it until the next ship comes where upon your superiors can decide what to do next.\n\nUpon reaching the exit, you\u2019re ambushed by some Elojin scum who apparently thought you\u2019d be weakened or perhaps outright killed by the Xont facility, but they didn\u2019t count on the strength and resolve of humanity. They try to flee when they realize they\u2019re outnumbered, but you and your team easily makes mince meat out of them. A couple still manage to survive, you and Salo take them prisoner back to the Lizard village where you both torture them for information until they die. Salo is impressed, he states that should be working as an Indoctrinator instead.\n\nThe rest of your time on Paradise passes without incident, when the Empire ship comes, you give a complete and thorough report of all that occurred. Your superiors are pleased and say they will take it from here. Salo also reports to his superiors suggesting that you should be considered for Indoctrinator training. Due to his high prestige within the order and your relatively good military record, they take you in where you begin.\n\nThe training is grueling but the Emperor requires its Indoctrinators to be strong, so you take it all in stride and persevere, and eventually you pass through the training and become a fully fledged Indoctrinator. Due to your already extensive military training and experience your request to be stationed on the front lines is granted.\n\nWhile you were going through training, the Xont technology was extracted from the building and was applied in fantastic ways. The Empire easily begins to turn the balance to their favor. A new found wave of human pride grips the Empire and unites it even stronger than before. This eventually leads to a pathetic alliance between the Krik, Mazatt and Elojin who attempt to fight back, other aliens start rallying to their banner as well, but they will lose. It is inevitable that all aliens must fall before the might of the Empire.\n\nAnd now you are one of those who leads the charge, conquering, killing and most importantly bringing glory in HIS name.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Feeling different? (Current thoughts)", "result": "You\u2019re starting to feel very paranoid; you\u2019re starting to see treachery everywhere. The Empire has many enemies and the most insidious ones are the ones from within. You\u2019re going to be watching everyone very carefully from now on.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Feeling different? (Current thoughts)", "result": "Your mind seems to be shifting focus again, or is in some sort of transition phase. Your previous thoughts of human superiority are in flux. You wonder why you even had them in the first place, since you\u2019ve never been like that. And while they still occupy you somewhat, what seems to be replacing them is unknown.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Do it yourself", "result": "You sigh in annoyance and push Dobbs aside, and begin pressing buttons at random.\nA rumbling sound is made as the entire room seems to be powering up. You think you\u2019ve accomplished something, but unfortunately the years of disuse have made the machinery a bit flakey. The console that you were standing by explodes spectacularly, embedding metal shards into your body and head, while the heat burns most of your skin off.\n\nYou die unexpectedly and unceremoniously.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (Private Dobbs)", "result": "Private Dobbs\u2026\n\nPrivate Dobbs is a typical soldier under your command; he does his job and doesn\u2019t ask too many questions. He does keep a lower profile than some, but one thing about him that really stands out though is his wide spread knowledge of seemingly useless trivia. He\u2019s been known to talk about things from the time it takes a Casitian Spider to drain its victims of blood, to the bizarre mating habits of the inhabitants of Tinok 3. Usually people \u201cblessed\u201d with trivia annoy other people around them by constantly spouting it, but thankfully Dobbs doesn\u2019t do that. He usually only mentions such information when its somewhat related to a topic on hand. He tends to be reading when not interacting with anyone else, no doubt learning more random information.\n\nIt\u2019s probably his way of still staying somewhat unique despite being just a name and number.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Let him study the machinery", "result": "\u201cHold on Salo, this harmless inferior can still prove useful, go ahead spot boy inspect the computer, and play out this futile game of prolonging your life for a few minutes longer.\u201d You say.\n\u201cWell it is our nature for self preservation Captain.\u201d The Elojin says.\n\u201cIf he tries anything shoot him.\u201d You add.\n\nWhile the Elojin starts inspecting the machine, he does his usual chattering, this time about Xont legends. To be quite honest you aren\u2019t really listening, and you\u2019re eager to get rid of him at this point. Your thoughts are on how you\u2019ll be promoted to a command of more importance after this, where you can actually do more to bring glory to the Empire.\n\nAn intrusion disrupts your daydream however. One of the inhabitants that the Elojin was referring to before seems to have heard the noise coming from this room and is trying to get in, the creature is too big to fit in the doorway, but it manages to grab a few of your team with its tentacles.\n\n\u201cOpen fire!\u201d you yell. Blasting the thing into a green slimy mess causes it to bellow, alerting more of its fellows to your location.\n\nWhile you and your team are fighting the alien horror, the Elojin is still busily studying the machine, he ends up pressing a few buttons, and a wall opens up revealing a small row of robots. You turn to the Elojin and see just in time for him to smile and press another button that turns the robots on.\n\nAs red lights flicker on in their eye sockets, they immediately perceive you as a threat.\n\n\u201cINTRUDERS!\u201d they say in unison and open fire on you and your team. Your attempts to fight back are in vain. They completely annihilate you. After they\u2019re done with you they start attacking the creatures trying to get in the room. The Elojin stands over you as you lay dying.\n\n\u201cThey\u2026didn\u2019t\u2026fire\u2026on you\u2026\u201d you wheeze.\n\u201cI guess they perceived me as a harmless inferior as well.\u201d The Elojin says and kicks you in the head bringing eternal darkness.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Go through the village", "result": "You reign in your temper and intolerance, and decide that you shouldn\u2019t waste any more ammo if possible, after all who knows what lies in the Xont structure. You state you\u2019re going to march through the village \u201cpeacefully\u201d but if the Lizards attack then you shall respond in kind.\n\nWhen you get to the village, it\u2019s empty. You certainly weren\u2019t expecting that. The Elojin begins talking again.\n\n\u201cHey how about we rest here before continuing on? The creatures in that Xont building are going to require you guys to be at the top of your game.\u201d He says.\n\u201cPresumptuous alien trash! The Empire can face any challenge, unlike you Elojin who are weak and cowardly and run at the first sign of danger.\u201d Salo retorts.\n\u201cYou mean like now?\u201d the Elojin says and quickly pushes Salo to the ground and runs off into one of the huts. Two of your team give chase and immediately fall into a pit! Arrows begin flying with deadly accuracy. It\u2019s a Lizard ambush!\n\nTaking advantage of your temporary unalert state, the Lizards manage to severely wound many of your team, before you can launch a suitable defense. Your enslaved Lizards either run off or join your attackers. Even under all these conditions you probably still would\u2019ve been able to defeat them, if an Elojin team didn\u2019t come out of nowhere to help them.\n\nYou fight on, but suddenly feel a blow to the back of your head, knocking you out.\n\nTime passes\u2026\n\nYou wake up tied to a post, you see Alyssa and a few of your other team members tied to others, you see what looks to be the head of Salo on a spike. Nearby are some Lizards eating, you draw your own conclusions. You see many of the Lizards holding your guns, and shooting them and examining your other equipment with curiosity.\n\nThere are a few Elojin arguing amongst themselves, but the one who lead you into this trap in the first place comes up to you with a big grin, he\u2019s also flipping his coins that you had taken from him earlier.\n\n\u201cAh, you\u2019re up. Good. I was tired of talking with natives, let alone my fellow Elojin. I swear we can\u2019t agree on anything. One of them says we should kill you right now; another says we should get information out of you first then kill you. Yet another says we should keep you all to sell into slavery. (Sigh) why can\u2019t we ever be single minded for once?\u201d\n\u201cI suggest you kill us, because if we get out of this, I guarantee we\u2019ll kill you.\u201d You say grimly.\n\u201cHmm, yes I suppose you would and that would be the wisest course of action, but we\u2019re in a bit of a bind of our own doing I fear. You see, these natives seem to be a little different than the others on this planet, they\u2019re very curious about technology. When we first made contact with them they actually agreed they would enter the structure and help us explore it if we gave them ours, of course we weren\u2019t going to do that. So that\u2019s where I came in, my disastrous attempt to try to trick the Mazatt turned out to be lucky a break when you humans came along with all your lovely equipment. Now we have their help, so I thank you.\u201d\n\u201cLook just put a fucking bullet in my brain now, but don\u2019t fucking bore me to death with your constant blather.\u201d\n\u201cI just said there are problems with that course of action. Apparently you\u2019re considered prisoners of these reptiles and as you were captured in battle, you have to be sacrificed to their idols to appease whatever weird gods they worship. This of course is annoying to us, as we would rather not risk leaving you to the natives whom you may escape from, but as I tried to reason with my fellow Elojin we obviously can\u2019t go against them now that we have their help and especially since they have heavier fire power, as well as still outnumbering us. Oh the tangled web we\u2019ve weaved. (Sigh) I guess we\u2019ll all just agree to wait until they sacrifice the lot of you before we can explore without worrying about vengeful humans sneaking up on us. I guess we can wait until morning. See you then.\u201d\nThe Elojin leaves you to fester with rage, but it\u2019s more at yourself, for allowing yourself to get caught up in this whole fool quest to begin with. You\u2019ve acted recklessly and irrationally. You vow to make this right if you get a chance.\n\nAnd fortunately you\u2019re getting a chance now. In the form of Lieutenant LaFleur of all things. You see him lurking nearby one of the huts, trying his best not to be seen. He must\u2019ve ran off and hid during the attack. He sees you and looks around to see if anyone\u2019s watching.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait for him to untie you", "result": "After seeing that the coast is clear, Lieutenant LaFleur makes his move\u2026and promptly runs off into the jungle!\n\n\u201cYOU COWARDLY SONOFABITCH!\u201d You shout, causing the Lizards to come and shut you up in a physical way until you\u2019re knocked unconscious again.\n\nThe next time you wake up, is just in time for you to see a sharp knife plunge into your chest.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Call over to him", "result": "You know LaFleur too well; you call over to him as quietly as you can.\n\n\u201cLaFleur untie me!\u201d\n\u201cShhhh!\u201d he says, getting all nervous and still looking around, he really doesn\u2019t want you calling attention to him.\n\u201cLaFleur if you don\u2019t untie me right now, I\u2019m gonna yell so loud that the entire village will come, so don\u2019t be getting any ideas to escape without untying us first!\u201d you warn.\nSeeing that he has no choice he looks one more time and quickly runs over to you and starts untying you.\n\u201cWe gotta get out of here!\u201d he says.\n\u201cNot yet, we got unfinished business. Besides we ain\u2019t gonna last long in the jungle without our equipment.\u201d You say as you get free just when another Elojin sees what\u2019s going on.\n\n\u201cThey\u2019re escaping! Kill them!\u201d\n\u201cKill the rest of the prisoners too!\u201d another shouts, and shoots one of your team members killing him.\n\u201cNO! You idiot!\u201d the Elojin you first met shouts.\n\nUpon killing a designated sacrifice to their gods, the Elojin have angered the rest of the Lizards.\n\n\u201cSsss! Sekeeseekhh! Kishhesss!\u201d one of them hisses. One group of Lizards comes after you and LaFleur and another after the Elojin.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to untie the rest of your team", "result": "You run over to the other posts to free your team, oblivious to the fact that the Lizards now have guns to shoot at you, they aren\u2019t very good at aiming, but actually they aren\u2019t trying to kill you, at least not yet, they want you for sacrifice. A plasma blot hits your foot melting it off. You scream in pain as you crash to the ground. The Lizards quickly knock you out with a heavy blow to the head again.\n\nWhen you wake up, you\u2019re tied to an altar ready to be ritually sacrificed. Your only comforting thoughts in your last few moments are that you see the dead bodies of some Elojin stacked near the altar.\n\nThe gods of the Lizards will certainly be appeased today.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Run into one of the huts", "result": "You run into one of the huts, as projectiles of all types come flying at you. LaFleur runs off into the jungle. You quickly look for a weapon in the hut and grab a spear lying on the floor. The first Lizard that sticks its head in the doorway gets it skewered by you dropping the plasma gun he was carrying You give a hefty shove to the body causing the Lizards behind it to fall to the ground. While they attempt to pick themselves up, you pick up the plasma gun and fire at them. At this close range you can\u2019t miss.\n\nYou easily manage to win the fire fight with the remaining Lizards since their aim is terrible. You leave the cover of the hut and run to the posts where your remaining team members are tied. Fortunately the rest of the Lizards have their claws full with dealing with the Elojin, but only one remains now. Of course it turns out to be your old \u201cfriend\u201d.\nYour team re-arms themselves quickly and finish off the Lizards. Even LaFleur comes back out of hiding to help out. Only the Elojin remains, he raises his arms but still holds his weapon.\n\n\u201cHey! It\u2019s a good thing you escaped! This all wasn\u2019t my idea actually; I would\u2019ve preferred to just work with you, than these savage natives. But my now dead peers were so insistant\u2026well you understand I\u2019m sure. So you ready to go explore the Xont structure?\u201d\n\u201cYou\u2019ve gotta be fucking kidding.\u201d One of your team members says.\n\u2018Not at all! The way I see it, mistakes were made on both sides, no sense on dwelling in the past, let\u2019s just try to salvage the situation so we can all get\u2026\u201d\n\u201cYou know something, you\u2019re right, mistakes were made on both sides, yours was betraying us, but mine was trusting a fucking Elojin in the first place. But I\u2019m about correct both of this mistakes.\u201d You interrupt and blast the Elojin, putting an end to his lies once and for all.\n\nThe village is completely decimated, it resembles a graveyard now.\n\n\u201cCaptain, are we still going to look for the Xont structure? The Elojin said it wasn\u2019t too far from here.\u201d One member asks you.\n\u201cNo, we\u2019re going to spend the rest of our time on this hellhole planet in this village until the next ship arrives. Even if the Elojin was telling the truth, we\u2019re probably not equipped to handle what\u2019s in there and enough of us have been killed due to my recklessness.\u201d\n\nThe rest of your time on Paradise passes without incident. You still wonder why you were temporarily over come with a kind of madness. Was it the idea of bringing glory to the Empire? Being stuck on this planet for so long? Or something else? Whatever the reason, being captured by the Lizards snapped you back to reality. You decide that it\u2019ll always remain a bit of a mystery.\n\nWhen the Empire ship comes, you give a sketchy report to your superiors about being ambushed and how you suffered heavy losses. You don\u2019t go into great detail and you don\u2019t even bother to mention the Xont rumor. They dismiss you with a bored expression, and write Paradise off as a low priority. This was just another ho-hum routine mission report to them and you\u2019re sent to another planet where you receive replacement troops for your next mission.\n\nAnd this time, you give an order to have all Elojin shot on sight!", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Feeling different? (Current thoughts)", "result": "You\u2019re starting to feel a lot different, a lot more impatient and hostile in general, especially towards aliens. The Xont building is getting closer and you can\u2019t wait to unlock its secrets. These Lizard creatures know nothing of the power that exists on their own planet, they fear it. Well not you, you will embrace it and bring glory to the Empire and if anyone stands in the way of your goal they will be dealt with.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Leave", "result": "You shake your head of all these strange new thoughts entering your head, and decide to go, the Lizards begin hissing amongst themselves as you begin to leave. They\u2019ve been more agitated ever since the word \u201cXont\u201d came up. The village is becoming a lot less friendly for some reason and the Lizards begin to crowd around you as if to prevent you from leaving; someone throws a rock at your head!\n\nYou fall to the ground, a battle breaks out immediately, you\u2019re out of it for the most part, You eventually regain consciousness, but you\u2019re still woozy. The battle is still going on as you pick up your pistol and see a blurry figure coming at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot at it", "result": "Better to be safe than sorry, you blast the figure, which turned out to be a Lizard. You regain your faculties and help fight the Lizards.\n\nAfter all is said and done, your team wins, but the Elojin\u2019s dead, you see a spear in his chest. You don\u2019t really have much to go on to find the Xont structure now, even if you still wanted to look for it, which you don\u2019t. Whatever desire that possessed you before to want to find it is gone. The coins you took from the Elojin are gone too; you must\u2019ve dropped them when you got hit in the head. Shame, you would\u2019ve liked something as proof.\n\nAlyssa, and Salo survived, as did LaFleur, and none of them are eager to go looking for the Xont structure either. Salo, seems even distraught for wanting to find it in the first place, like he broke some sort of rule. He spends a lot of his time mumbling to himself about forgiveness for falling to alien influences.\n\nAs for you and the rest of your team, you spend the rest of your time on Paradise exploring as usual, you don\u2019t run into anymore major powers, but there are a few more battles with the local fauna and a few more Lizard tribes. Still, you don\u2019t find anything of any importance.\n\nWhen the Empire ships come, you give your report to your superiors, which is pretty mundane and lack luster. You don\u2019t mention the Xont rumor, since you don\u2019t even have any proof and you might get reprimanded for believing an Elojin anyway. Your superiors write Paradise off as low priority and send you on your next mission. You\u2019ll always wonder though, if the Elojin was telling the truth or even correct about a Xont structure being on the planet.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wait for it", "result": "You think it might be one of your team members coming to help you, and you don\u2019t want to risk shooting one of them.\n\nThis is one of those times when it\u2019s better to be safe than sorry, and when you feel the spear hit your chest, you\u2019re very sorry you didn\u2019t shoot\u2026", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Feeling different? (Current thoughts)", "result": "You feel a bit surprised about what just transpired. You actually didn\u2019t expect Salo to agree so readily, and you didn\u2019t even plan to say most of the things you told him, it just came out of your mouth. You didn\u2019t even believe all that \u201cGolden Age of Humanity\u201d stuff, you just wanted to say anything that would cause him to still follow you. Still it\u2019s possible that you could, if the technology is as powerful as the legends say.\n\nYour interest in finding the Xont building is starting to increase and you can\u2019t wait to see it.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Shoot Salo", "result": "You act too rashly.\n\nSalo, already suspicious of you and pointing his weapon in your direction easily anticipates your move for your own pistol. He doesn\u2019t hesitate to shoot to kill, which he does so quite easily.\n\nYour death has a domino effect however.\n\nAfter you fall, Alyssa shoots Salo and kills him. Lieutenant LaFleur finding himself suddenly in command is unsure of what to do, so he goes by what he remembers in the book, and orders that Alyssa be \u201carrested\u201d for treason. Of course he still hasn\u2019t caught on to the idea that the \u201cbook\u201d doesn\u2019t really translate in the field so well.\n\nMost of the team doesn\u2019t like LaFleur, and they REALLY didn\u2019t like Salo, so they aren\u2019t very inclined to obey LaFleur\u2019s orders. While a heated argument between LaFleur and some team members goes on, the Lizards are disturbed by all this gunplay in their village and decide to defend themselves by attacking your team. During this attack, LaFleur suddenly becomes familiar with the term, \u201cfriendly fire.\u201d and at this point Alyssa takes command, only to be shot in the back by the Elojin who slinked away soon after you were killed. He doesn\u2019t get away with it, as a Lizard spear finds its way into his neck.\n\nAfter everything is said and done, a single member of your team survives the entire battle, then after about three days of subsisting on Lizard meat, he suddenly goes mad for no apparent reason and runs off into the jungle never to be heard from again.\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive, they write the mission off as a failure and decide to just bombard the planet with mass drivers so it can\u2019t be used by anyone else.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Get some more info then have him killed", "result": "You examine the coins in more detail, and a sense of certainty overcomes you. You know this place exists. You can feel it in your heart. You have to find it, but you refuse to have this Elojin lead you. For all you know he could still be trying to trick you somehow. You decide to passively gain information out of him and hope he gives away his knowledge accidentally.\n\n\u201cWell I suppose we could check it out\u2026but how far is it? I don\u2019t want to be dragging my team halfway across the planet. It\u2019s dangerous enough just staying in one place.\u201d You say in a non-prying manner.\n\u201cOh you needn\u2019t worry about that. Its not that far, it\u2019s just to the east, there\u2019s a native village near it, and a river too.\u201d Calmly assures.\n\u201cThat was easier than I expected. Thank you.\u201d You say and pull a pistol and shoot the Elojin.\nBefore finishing him off, he speaks.\n\u201cYou idiot\u2026you\u2019ll never find it\u2026without me\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWrong my spotty friend, you given us a vital clue, we can just follow the river to the east until it leads us there. You thought I was going to let you actually lead us?\u201d\n\nSergeant Alyssa comes running in and sees the Elojin dead on the ground.\n\n\u201cSir! We made sure he didn\u2019t have any weapons!\u201d\n\u201cRelax Sergeant, he didn\u2019t attack me, I just found him to be no longer useful. Gather up the team, we\u2019re heading out.\u201d\n\nYou and Alyssa leave the tent while she calls everyone to gather around. She has such a strong commanding presence. You never realized how alluring that was.\n\n\u201cAlright team, thanks to our recently departed spotty friend, he has provided us with the location of a genuine Xont structure. Yes, the mythical Xont, but I have proof that it exists and the directions! Besides we were put on here to explore this forsaken planet anyway, so we might as well check it out. Who\u2019s with me?\u201d\n\nYour team looks a little unsure, but they trust you. Alyssa looks stoic as usual, but a slight twinge of apprehensiveness crosses her face, but you\u2019ll make her see that this was a good idea. LaFleur looks craven, but typically is too scared to voice his opinion. Finally you hear the voice of dissention.\n\n\u201cCaptain, how can we trust what that alien scum told you? The Elojin are notorious liars!\u201d\n\u201cAh, but I have proof!\u201d you hold up the coins. \u201cSee the Elojin thought he was going to trick us and use us but instead I have taken the advantage! We won\u2019t be sharing this find with anyone, but us!\u201d\nSalo gives you a suspicious look. He doesn\u2019t mind that you wasted the Elojin, but he\u2019s a little disturbed by this new found excitement.\n\n\u201cVery well, I suppose our duty to the Empire is to explore this planet, but I fail to see how the archaic ruins of some alien civilization which may not exist will benefit it.\u201d\n\nYou dismiss Salo\u2019s xenophobia, and get ready to leave. The Lizards have been overhearing parts of your conversation, and have also gotten agitated every time the word \u201cXont\u201d was mentioned. They don\u2019t attack, but it\u2019s obvious that you\u2019ve worn out your welcome.\n\nYou and your team leave for the jungle, after some time later, you reach a river. You make camp for the night, telling everyone that it\u2019ll be faster to actually travel on the river, so tomorrow a raft of sorts is going to be made. There\u2019s certainly no shortage of trees. After assigning some people for watch duty, you ponder your next move.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to sleep", "result": "You resist the temptation, and go to sleep in your tent. In the middle of the night your camp is attacked by Lizards! You\u2019re still groggy, when some of the Lizards enter your tent, putting an end to your dreams of greatness.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Visit Alyssa's tent", "result": "You feel a desire within you that you\u2019ve had for too long. You must act upon it, and to hell with the Empire\u2019s \u201cpolicy\u201d of getting involved with members of your own team. You enter Alyssa\u2019s tent.\n\nShe immediately awakens fully armed for combat, until she realizes it\u2019s you, at which point she relaxes.\n\n\u201cSir, what\u2019s wrong? Is there something you need my assistance with?\u201d she asks.\n\u201cOh yes\u2026but right now I want to know, do you believe that you were meant for something greater?\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t understand.\u201d\n\nYou touch her hand, its pleasingly cool to the touch in this unbearable heat.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m saying you\u2026like me, were meant for something more grand. I feel it. We were brought together through destiny, and then finally here to achieve it at last. Serving the Empire was just a means to an end.\u201d\n\n\u201cSir, you\u2019re acting strangely.\u201d Alyssa says, giving a funny look at you touching her hand, she doesn\u2019t remove it though. It\u2019s a sign, a sign that you\u2019re right.\n\n\u201cYou don\u2019t need to call me sir, you\u2026\u201d\n\nSuddenly you hear firing, and a member of your team barges in the tent.\n\n\u201cSir, we\u2019re under attack! It\u2019s the Lizards!\u201d\n\nYou and Alyssa quickly rush out to the battle which is already in progress. You fight like you never have before; nothing is going to get in the way of you and your destiny!\n\nThe battle is short and in the end you are the victor, some of the Lizards have uncharacteristically surrendered. Something they don\u2019t often do. Perhaps this is another sign.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill the Lizards", "result": "Showing no mercy you decide to kill the Lizards. Nobody has any objections; they did attack you after all. Salo is certainly pleased.\n\nThe next day your team begins building the rafts, there\u2019s a lot of grumbling and dissension as the work isn\u2019t pleasant. Salo reminds everyone of their duty to the Empire and all that rhetoric. You realize you\u2019re going to have to get rid of Salo eventually; his loyalty to the Empire is too strong, and he\u2019ll interfere with your plans. When you find the Xont technology, you\u2019ll use it and make a break from the corrupt Empire; perhaps you could even make a change in the galaxy\u2026\n\nEventually rafts are finally finished and you are anxious to be on your way. You make sure Alyssa is on your raft, you put LaFleur in charge of the other one. You don\u2019t know if you want Salo traveling so close to you though.", "action_results": [{"action": "Have Salo on your raft", "result": "Keep your friends close and your enemies closer, you think. You decide its best if you keep an eye on Salo. Perhaps he\u2019ll even meet with an accident\u2026\n\nDuring your journey you notice Alyssa has seemed a bit preoccupied, you go up to talk to her.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s wrong?\u201d\n\u201cOh nothing Captain.\u201d\n\u201cAs I said before you don\u2019t need to be so formal, you can call me by my name.\u201d you say and gently grasp her hand and embrace her. The cool sensation makes you forget how damn hot this planet is.\n\nWhile Alyssa is left speechless by you obvious continued attraction, Salo has been watching you and is very vocal on the matter.\n\n\u201cSir! You can\u2019t do this! You know Empire policy! And an alien on top of all of it? You\u2019re showing a blatant disregard for rules and regulations! Don\u2019t think I didn\u2019t see you a few days ago exiting this blue whore\u2019s tent! I can\u2019t let this continue!\u201d\n\u201cYou\u2019re out of line Salo!\u201d\n\u201cNo YOU\u2019RE out of line! Maybe you outrank me, but I\u2019m here to make sure this team doesn\u2019t fall to alien influences! And between your lust for this alien bitch and this quest to find this mythical\u2026\u201d\n\nExcellent! He\u2019s getting riled up, now to press the issue.\n\n\u201cSalo, you\u2019re not in charge of anything. I\u2019m giving the orders here! And I\u2019m telling you that you WILL fall in line right now!\u201d\n\nThis sets Salo off, he goes for his pistol, but you anticipate this and grab your own and fire before he does. Your aim is dead on the mark, but Salo still manages to lunge at you, causing the both of you to fall into the water. Salo, in his death throws attempts to drown you by holding on to while you struggle for air. Your realize that your lungs filling with water isn\u2019t a pleasant experience, as you blackout.\n\nHowever your next experience is a lot better. Alyssa dives in to save you and you awaken on the raft with Alyssa breathing life into your body. A cold icy wave runs through it. You just wish you were in a better condition to appreciate it a lot more. As it is, you feel disorientated and a lot different. Your previous thoughts of leaving the Empire, finding the Xont ruins and all those other weird thoughts that suddenly filled your head are gone.\n\n\u201cIs he okay?\u201d LaFleur shouts.\n\u201cYes!\u201d Alyssa shouts back to him.\n\nYou suddenly get up, and tell everyone to abandon this quest. You don\u2019t want to get everyone killed trying to find something that might not exist anyway. Once again nobody has any objections. Everyone\u2019s always in favor of living. Alyssa seems to show a sign of relief. You eventually dock and make camp on land, during this time you notice the coins you had are gone, you ask around if anyone has seen them, but nobody has. You go into Alyssa\u2019s tent and ask her.\n\n\u201cNo Captain, I haven\u2019t maybe you lost them when you were underwater.\u201d\n\u201cI guess, but I had them on me pretty securely, I still don\u2019t see how I could\u2019ve lost them.\u201d\n\u201cOh well, what\u2019s done is done, don\u2019t worry about it.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but even though we might not have found a Xont building, those coins could\u2019ve still been proof that its here, maybe we could go back and I could dive in to try to find\u2026\u201d\n\nAlyssa looks into your eyes very seriously.\n\n\u201cCaptain\u2026don\u2019t worry about it.\u201d She says and kisses you.\n\nWhat follows next makes you REALLY not worry about it.\n\nWhen the Empire ships finally arrive, a report about Salo\u2019s death is made out to be due to extreme heat fever. The Xont rumor isn\u2019t mentioned and Paradise is written off as a low priority. You and your team are sent on your next mission. Your relationship with Alyssa is kept secret of course, but you always wonder if you really lost those coins or Alyssa got rid of them when she rescued you.\n\nIf she did, then she may have saved you in more ways than one.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Have Salo on Lafleur's raft", "result": "You don\u2019t want Salo near you trying to discover your plans. You spend a lot of time talking with Alyssa, and telling her how you\u2019re destined for greatness and this journey is going to allow you and her to break away from the Empire. She doesn\u2019t look convinced though. She\u2019ll soon see though, you know she will.\n\nOn your journey Salo shouts over stating you should dock for awhile, which is actually a good idea, since it might be an opportunity to get rid of him. Soon after docking you suggest that you and Salo should explore a bit to see if the Xont structure is nearby, he agrees and goes with you.\n\nWhen you make sure you\u2019re far enough away, you make your move, unfortunately so does Salo. In fact he\u2019s even more organized. He\u2019s had a few team members from the raft that he was on secretly following you. He must\u2019ve been poisoning the minds of your team members the whole time. You feel several shots hit your body. Salo makes a speech while standing over you.\n\n\u201cSo, I was right, you WERE under alien influence. Your girlfriend will be next when we get back to camp. Did you not think I couldn\u2019t see how close you were getting with that blue concubine of yours? Did you not think I could not SEE the treachery in your heart? This \u201cquest\u201d of yours is at an end. All traitors must die. Long live the Empire!\u201d\n\nIndoctrinator Salo then ends your quest.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Spare them", "result": "Yes of course! These creatures can sense the greatness in you, that\u2019s why they wish to join you! This is just the first step, after you gain the power of the Xont, you\u2019ll be able to unite this entire planet under your command! These Lizard creatures are not unintelligent and would make excellent servants.\n\n\u201cWhere\u2019s our best Lizard translator?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cUm, that would be me sir.\u201d Corporal Higgins steps up and says.\n\u201cGood, you\u2019re still alive, tell these Lizards that they\u2019ll be coming with us. They can also have the honor of carrying some of our equipment.\u201d\n\nWhile corporal Higgins follows your orders, Indoctrinator Salo stops you from going back to your tent protesting severely and very vocally.\n\n\u201cCaptain! These creatures need to be exterminated! They attacked us! The will of the Emperor demands no less!\u201d\n\u201cThe Emperor isn\u2019t here.\u201d\n\nThis callus remark doesn\u2019t endear you to Salo.\n\n\u201cYou would DARE say such a thing? You are walking the line of heresy Captain! Perhaps you have allowed yourself to be contaminated too much by alien influences!\u201d\n\u201cOut of my way Salo, I don\u2019t want to hear this shit right now.\u201d\n\u201cOh what would you rather do? Fornicate with your blue alien whore? Don\u2019t think I didn\u2019t notice you going into Sergeant Alyssa\u2019s tent earlier! I am the eyes of the Empire!\u201d\n\u201cLast chance Salo, to get out my way\u2026\u201d\nSalo, is right in your face at this point. \u201cNo Captain, this is YOUR last chance! You need to\u2026\u201d\n\nBefore Salo can go on another tirade, you push him back, pull out your pistol and blast him in the face! The rest of your team watches in silence as you stand over his body ranting.\n\n\u201cYOU WILL NOT GET IN THE WAY OF MY DESTINY! NOT YOU, NOT THE EMPIRE, NOTHING!\u201d\n\nThe next morning work begins on the rafts; they\u2019re built relatively quickly with the extra help of the Lizards and the fact that nobody seems to want to piss you off after what happened to Salo. Soon the two large rafts are shoved into the river. Success, they float, but you never really had any doubt. You make sure Alyssa and Higgins are on your raft. You assign Lieutenant LaFleur to the other, and continue on your journey. You have some canopies set up during the trip, so you can at least take shade from the infernal sun beating down on you during the trip. It seems like it got even hotter, how you long for the cool touch of Alyssa\u2019s skin again.\n\nAs you think about this, you notice a strange rodent like creature running past your feet making squeaking noises.\n\n\u201cWhat the hell is that?!\u201d you ask you team.\n\u201cOh, that\u2019s a Slink Slink. Or at least that\u2019s what the Lizards call them. I believe they eat them sir.\u201d Corporal Higgins replies.\n\u201cWell how the hell did it get on here?\u201d\n\u201cI dunno they live in this area I guess and one snuck on board, they\u2019re harmless sir, one of the Lizards will probably eat it later, nothing to worry about.\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t have time to worry about such trivial matters, you wonder if you should reassure your team that this IS the right path. You\u2019ve noticed that ever since the incident with Salo, your team has been edgy and looking a little less confident in you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Make a speech", "result": "You decide that you need to put the team\u2019s minds at ease by giving an inspiring speech. You order that you make a landing at the nearest clearing, when both of the rafts land you gather everyone and begin to speak.\n\n\u201cI know everyone here feels a little uneasy after what I did to Salo, and this exploration we\u2019re going on. Some of you may be wondering if I\u2019m still following the Empire. Well let me say right now, no.\u201d\n\nThis revelation is met with shocked silence.\n\n\u201cWhat has the Empire done for us? Any of us? We\u2019re expected to just die and follow orders. Look at where they sent us! This hellhole of a planet to find resources to support it. We\u2019re like fucking drones sent from the hive to find food to support some great bloated queen. Well I say no more! I see a greater destiny for me, for all of us! With the Xont technology, we could make our own way and break away from the Empire! Others would join us in time. All of you could share in this utopia I see before us! I\u2019ve trusted you all with my life at one time, and I\u2019m asking you to trust me in this. I know this might be scary to break away from the Empire, but I\u2019m asking you not to blindly follow a corrupt system anymore, but to embrace destiny instead. Who\u2019s with me?\u201d\n\nVarious members of your team begin to speak amongst themselves and look at each other, but you know they\u2019ll follow you, you can sense they recognize greatness when they see it. One of the solidiers begins to speak.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ve never lead us wrong before sir, and we\u2019ve followed you this long. You\u2019re right, it hasn\u2019t been the Empire that\u2019s looked out for us, it\u2019s been you. We\u2019re with you!\u201d\n\nA cheer goes up, yet still you see two that aren\u2019t so sure. Alyssa and LaFleur. LaFleur you know is a victim of his own cowardice. He is unable to grab destiny when it\u2019s presented before him, but Alyssa\u2026you don\u2019t understand why she feels the way she does. You\u2019re about to talk to her, but LaFleur runs up to you very anxiously.\n\n\u201cSir! We can\u2019t abandon the Empire! They\u2019ll hunt us down and kill us for treason! They might even have the Indoctrinator Order torture us first! Oh man! Oh man! I can\u2019t take this! I can\u2019t be part of this!\u201d LaFleur start hyperventilating and is nearly in tears at this point.\n\nSomething\u2019s going to have to be done, you can\u2019t have this.", "action_results": [{"action": "Calmly convince LaFleur", "result": "\u201cLieutenant, calm yourself. That\u2019s your fear talking. Fear that was instilled in you by the Empire. Think about it. You of ALL people should want to leave it. You never really wanted to serve anyway did you? You were forced to by your family\u2019s tradition. You basically were born into slavery. I\u2019m telling you to break the chains. Be the first one in your family to finally be free.\u201d\n\nYou words seem to have an effect on LaFleur. He begins to tear up.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m going to do it! You\u2019re right! I never wanted to be part of the Empire! Hah! You hear that Dad? I\u2019m not following your footsteps anymore! Hahahahaha! I\u2019m free! I\u2019m fucking free! YEAH!\u201d LaFleur follows up his sudden outburst with a couple of shots to the air.\n\nUnfortunately LaFleur\u2019s enthusiasm has attracted some rather interesting predators which immediately reveal themselves by uncamouflaging themselves and savagely biting chunks of flesh out of one of your soldiers!\n\n\u201cFire!\u201d you shout, and your soldiers obey, the fauna proves to be more difficult than you think though, they resemble snakes with little legs, but are a whole lot quicker and blink in and out of sight. You must be by a nest because they seem endless; you\u2019ll lose a lot of people at this rate.\n\n\u201cBack to the river! Destiny awaits!\u201d you shout while you all run back the rafts while firing.\n\nSoon you\u2019re on your way again. You shoo away a Slink Slink which is squeaking underfoot. In fact there are a few more of them now. More must\u2019ve wandered on while you were briefly docked. You can\u2019t be concerned about that now. You have other important matters on your mind. You know that the Xont structure must be getting close, and you need to be prepared. You look over at Alyssa who doesn\u2019t show it, but you can tell she\u2019s still troubled by all this. You walk over to her.\n\n\u201cAlyssa.\u201d\n\u201cSir.\u201d\n\u201cYou don\u2019t need to call me that, you can address me by my name.\u201d you say and touch her face. There\u2019s that cool feeling again.\n\u201cI\u2026don\u2019t know, I don\u2019t feel comfortable addressing you as common, you\u2019re always going to be the Captain to me.\u201d\n\u201cAre you scared of leaving the Empire?\u201d\n\u201cOf course not, my loyalty has always been to you. I\u2019d follow you anywhere. You saved my life, I\u2019m indebted to you but\u2026 it\u2019s just\u2026never mind.\u201d\n\nYou make a bold move and put your arms around Alyssa, she doesn\u2019t resist, but you see a slight hint of sadness in her face. You wish you could make her see that this will all work out. She will see eventually. You know she will. As you\u2019re holding her, you\u2019re interrupted again.\n\n\u201cSir. There\u2019s a Lizard village up ahead, should we stop?\u201d Higgins asks\n\nAh ha! You knew you weren\u2019t crazy! The Elojin said there was a Lizard village near the Xont structure, this must be it! You\u2019re very close now. Perhaps you should stop though, the Lizards may know something. Besides you\u2019re going to eventually unite this planet under your rule, you should start making allies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stop", "result": "You order your team to get ready to dock again. As you approach the village, the Lizards see you and go running to a big hut and quickly run back out. They don\u2019t attack, but eye you warily with spears and bows drawn.\n\n\u201cHiggins we\u2019re probably going to have to deal with the chieftain, I want these Lizards to help us if possible, so I want you on top of your game!\u201d\n\u201cI will sir, but what if they attack us anyway?\u201d\n\u201cWell then we crush them as always, but usually Lizards either attack immediately or not at all, so we\u2019re probably safe\u2026they probably recognize greatness when they see it, just like these Lizards did.\u201d You say pointing to your Lizard porters.\n\nThis village is a little bigger than the ones you\u2019ve come across before, the Lizards seem more organized as well. You even see a few of them marching and doing some sort of drill routine. All you questions are soon answered, when the chieftain emerges from his hut.\n\n\u201cI am Chief Kruz. Do you seek my wisdom?\u201d he asks.\n\nHoly shit, it\u2019s a Mazatt! Well that explains why the Lizards are so organized.\n\n\u201cI can see by your face that you were not expecting to see a Mazatt, in charge of this village. So tell me why has the Terran Empire come to this place? Is it the same reason as my own government? To plunder its resources? (Sigh) Such short sightness. I was much like the rest of my race until I found a different way, after I was sent to this planet.\u201d\n\nHe speaks very well for a Mazatt, usually they don\u2019t even bother, except to shout warcries. From the sound of it, he also has left his government. Perhaps you may have a common interest, but then again perhaps not.", "action_results": [{"action": "Speak with Kruz", "result": "\u201cActually Chief, we\u2019re no longer part of the Terran Empire. I have seen the corruption of it and want no more part of it.\u201d\n\u201cHmmm, yes. I did sense something slightly different about you. I am glad that you have seen the futility of the current power structure in the galaxy. However, if you are here for what I believe you to be, then we still have problems. I cannot allow you to steal my destiny.\u201d\n\u201cAnd what destiny might that be?\u201d you say, fully knowing what the answer will be.\n\u201cThe same you believe yours to be. To gain the power of the ancient Xont. Still, I do not wish to kill you right off hand, perhaps we can come to some sort of agreement.\u201d\n\u201cHow about I just kill you right now?\u201d\n\u201cYou could try I suppose, but you would not make it out of here alive. Besides, you would fail, destiny cannot be changed. I have been chosen to bring order to the galaxy. I cannot die before my mission is completed.\u201d\n\u201cAnd you are sure of this? How do you not know it is ME, who is meant to do this?\u201d\n\u201cHahahaha! If I really thought that, I would step aside without hesitation, but you are not\u2026but perhaps this is a test? Is it possible that destiny has chosen two worthy candidates?\u201d\n\u201cImpossible. I have been chosen, you are merely delusional.\u201d You say confidently.\n\u201cPerhaps you would like to convince me? I guarantee that is the only way you shall make it out of here without a fight, or perhaps you\u2019re still looking for a fight, but a fight between only us. A fight to the death, destiny will choose the winner.\u201d\n\nActually he makes sense, if you ARE chosen for this destiny, then you will win no matter what.", "action_results": [{"action": "Convince Kruz", "result": "\u201cAh good I prefer to debate. So many are always willing to solve problems with violence, this will be a nice change. We can talk in my hut, whoever convinces the other shall take control of the other\u2019s followers.\u201d\nYou realize that gaining an army of Lizards would help immensely.\n\u201cAgreed.\u201d\nYou both enter the hut sit across from each other, alone. Kruz speaks first.\n\n\u201cShall I tell you my tale of how I found my destiny? My team was deployed on this planet probably much like yours. We went through the usual motions, until we encountered these natives. Of course as you probably know, they\u2019re mostly hostile, but somehow I sensed a certain honor in these scaly natives. They are like the Mazatt. A race of warriors, and they\u2019re completely trustworthy unlike all the other races we\u2019ve encountered. Yes, they were primitive, but they do not deserve enslavement. I wanted to try to do something new, make peace with them and perhaps eventually incorporate them into the Dominion, but not as a slave race.\u201d\n\nInteresting point of view for a Mazatt, the Empire of course does this when possible, but the Dominion never does. The Lizards are shorter than the Mazatt, perhaps that\u2019s why Kruz had an affinity for them.\n\n\u201cOf course others in my team felt I was being soft. A few tried to challenge my position as leader, I had to slay them, but soon my entire squad rose up against me, not content to just shoot me and get it over with, they beat me, and threw me over a small cliff. They thought me dead I suppose, but I was not out of it yet. Even with my head bad head wound I struggled to get up and I crawled inside a nearby cave, and that\u2019s when destiny found me, and I found THIS!\n\nThe Mazatt brandishes a coin! One exactly like the ones you obtained from the Elojin.\n\n\u201cI knew what it was; I had heard the legends of the Xont before. I never paid too much attention to them before, but somehow I knew this was real. I just had to find the ruins of the Xont, but then I fell into unconsciousness. That\u2019s when the scalies found me. The fact they never ate me and brought me back to full health only confirmed that I had been spared for something greater. When they saw that I held this coin, they made me their leader. My old life was gone; I was discarded by a system that is bound for ultimate destruction anyway. These scalies are my new people, this planet my new home. I have visions that confirm what I know in my heart, that I am destined to find and use the Xont technology on this planet and bring about a new age in the galaxy.\u201d\n\nWell you can see he\u2019s convinced himself, now see if you can convince him that he\u2019s entirely wrong and this is all in his head.", "action_results": [{"action": "Explain your story in full detail and stand by it", "result": "After explaining your story, Kruz is unconvinced, and begins to drill holes in your own belief.\n\n\u201cAll you\u2019ve been doing is wandering on a delusional thought!\u201d\n\u201cWhat?!\u201d you exclaim\n\u201cYou\u2019ve done nothing to prove yourself! Look at what I\u2019ve accomplished; I have an entire village of scalies following me, because they believe! You haven\u2019t proven yourself to anyone else but your own people, which was easy to do since you already held command over them. They already trusted in you and you stated you still had to kill one of them. Convincing outsiders is far more difficult. The only way you could get the scalies that you have now to follow you, is by beating them in battle. I didn\u2019t have to do that, they saw me and instantly knew I was chosen for a greater destiny.\u201d\n\nYou haven\u2019t had your belief challenged like this, you begin to sweat and raise your voice.\n\n\u201cI HAVE THESE!\u201d you say and slam your coins on the table.\n\n\u201cSo? Quantity doesn\u2019t signify quality. And how did you obtain them? You said you took them from an Elojin! You didn\u2019t find them, like I found mine. You basically stole them and as I said before, destiny cannot be stolen. And you are attempting to steal it.\n\nYou realize Kruz has spoken the truth. Your belief in being chosen has been shattered, all your actions have been for nothing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Accept it", "result": "You weep as you accept this revelation, but you realize you can\u2019t go on. You take out your pistol, Kruz doesn\u2019t even stop you. He knows he\u2019s not in any danger.\n\nYou point it at your head.\n\n\u201cThis is my destiny.\u201d You say.\n\nAnd then you meet it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Refuse it", "result": "Even though you know that you haven\u2019t been destined for anything, even though your mind tells you that what Kruz says is the truth, you can\u2019t accept it. You revert back to your own base human behavior and that\u2019s: If you can\u2019t have it then nobody will.\n\nYou pull out your pistol, Kruz doesn\u2019t even try to stop you, he believes you\u2019re going to kill yourself, besides destiny won\u2019t let him die\u2026he finds that he was wrong about that.\n\nHe clutches the blast wound to his chest and falls in disbelief.\n\n\u201cThe betrayal\u2026 the betrayal\u2026\u201d he says and then dies.\n\nNeither of you were correct. There\u2019s no meaning in anything, it\u2019s all been just a random choice of actions and coincidences, you can\u2019t change things. You see that now, you throw the coins to the floor.\n\nYou exit the hut in a daze. You don\u2019t notice anything going around you. One of the Lizards looks in the hut and begins making hissing noises, which causes the rest of the Lizards to talk amongst themselves. They don\u2019t attack though, they just stare at you as you walk back to the rafts Your own team wonders what\u2019s going on, and attempt to speak to you, but Alyssa tells them all to back off. She knows what happened.\n\nShe helps you to the raft where you collapse. She kneels down to pick you up.\n\n\u201cI want to go home.\u201d You say looking up at her, and fall unconscious.\n\u201cWe will.\u201d She says.\n\nDuring your unconscious state, a few things happen. First of all the rest of your team is completely confused about what to do next. Granted they were all not really feeling like themselves either, but they were basically following you in an ill-conceived plan of treason, and now that plan\u2019s been abandoned. Alyssa tells them everyone\u2019s just as guilty so it\u2019s in everyone\u2019s best interest they all forget what happened. The Empire needn\u2019t know about any of this incident. Lieutenant LaFleur disagrees; he doesn\u2019t want to go back! He sneers and says if you\u2019re too weak to accept destiny then he will! He demands to stay, Alyssa attempts to reason with him, but he won\u2019t hear of it. He states how he\u2019s going to find the Xont structure and crush the Empire.\n\nAlyssa shrugs and states whoever wants to go back to the Empire, can go with her, anyone who wants to stay can stay with LaFleur. Even with his new found \u201ccourage\u201d people still don\u2019t care for him, with only the Lizard porters staying with him. He remains behind while everyone else leaves on the rafts and head back to the area where you were first exploring. LaFleur makes a few ranting remarks as they leave.\n\nWhen you awaken Alyssa tells you all of what happened. The remaining time on Paradise is relatively uneventful, though the rest of your team members are a little wary of you. When the Empire ships come, a story is made up about the planet being used as a secret Mazatt training camp and how you were attacked. The Empire never needs too much of a reason to bombard a planet. Paradise is decimated by mass drivers. Most of your team members request a transfer, such a sudden mass transfer request, raises a few eyebrows by your superiors, of, but nobody says anything. A few stay, but you mainly wind up with a whole new team on your next mission.\n\nThe important thing to you though, is Alyssa still remains by your side. And that\u2019s much more important than gaining power or overthrowing the government.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Concentrate on pointing out flaws in his story", "result": "\u201cIt proves nothing! If anything you haven\u2019t displayed anything that would convince even me!\u201d\n\u201cWhat?!\u201d Kruz exclaims.\n\u201cFirst of all, where are you? You\u2019re in a village of primitives! And so they saved you instead of eating you, big deal! We\u2019ve come across peaceful tribes before. So you\u2019ve managed to impress them that they made you their chieftain, that\u2019s not that big of an accomplishment. I myself have Lizards following me. They\u2019re primitives, they can be impressed by the simplest of things, and a strong personality can take advantage of that, BUT one truly destined for greatness can convince his peers!\u201d\n\nKruz listens intently.\n\n\u201cLook at me; I have managed to convince my own people, as well as Lizards that I have a destiny! What did your people do when you merely tried to change their way of thinking a little bit? They attempted to kill you! They saw nothing within you that indicates greatness, they didn\u2019t respect you enough.\u201d\n\u201cYou do not understand Mazatt society! We are not as open to change as you humans are!\u201d\n\u201cOh? Then how do you explain yourself? You certainly were open to change. No, do not blame your team for your own failings. Why I have just convinced a life long coward who used to do everything by the book to cast off the shackles of Empire slavery to believe in me. Why? Because he saw the destiny within me and he knew I was right! Your team didn\u2019t see it in you; otherwise they wouldn\u2019t have tried to kill you!\u201d\n\nKruz has never had his belief challenged before, he begins to sweat and raise his voice.\n\n\u201cI found THIS! Proof that I am chosen! I have visions of what is to be!\u201d he shouts and holds up the coin in desperation.\n\nYou pull out the five coins you have and slam them on the table. Kruz is surprised. You hold on to one of them and speak.\n\n\u201cIf these prove anything, then the fact that I have five, proves that destiny still favors me more in quantity as well as quality. And as for your visions, you said you smacked your head pretty good when you were thrown off the cliff. It\u2019s more likely you\u2019ve been suffering from delusions from a closed head injury.\u201d\n\nKruz looks down, you\u2019ve shattered some of his confidence, now to finish it.\n\n\u201cAnd why did you not order me killed right away? If you really thought you were the chosen one, you would\u2019ve killed me right away as either an imposter or a threat. But no, you wanted me to convince you, because deep down, you don\u2019t even believe you\u2019ve been chosen. When you saw me, you knew I was the one.\u201d You stare hard at Kruz into his eyes enforcing your will.\n\nHe breaks down and falls to the floor and looks up at you.\n\n\u201cYou are the chosen\u2026\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill him", "result": "Kruz is a broken Mazatt. He accepts his fate as you shoot him in the head. You emerge from the hut proving that you have been the one chosen for destiny. You take control of the village and begin ordering the Lizards to perform searches for the Xont structure immediately.\n\nThey follow, but they aren\u2019t enthusiastic like they should be. Higgins reports that they miss Kruz and felt he was a better leader. This news makes you furious! You proved yourself to be better than that pretender! This irritation only grows as time passes. Days pass and the Xont structure still hasn\u2019t been found, and worse, other surrounding Lizard tribes have been attacking despite attempts to make alliances. Old fashioned conquest works, but the Lizards constantly resist and just don\u2019t have the man power to keep your holdings even through fear. Eventually the Lizard tribes do start uniting\u2026against YOU.\n\nA coalition of tribes marches on your position, and while your Lizards are definitely more organized, better trained and better equipped, you\u2019re severely out numbered. You remain confident. You remember reading about an ancient battle on Earth called Rorke\u2019s Drift, and using this as inspiration you try to motivate your people with a speech about how you\u2019ll be able to stand against so many because destiny has chosen you.\n\nThe attack comes, it\u2019s a massacre, your followers are overwhelmed, and it\u2019s beginning to look like another ancient Earth battle\u2026Little Big Horn. You begin ranting like a madman, screaming at them all for failing you. During the battle you see Alyssa fall, you rush over to her, but she\u2019s dying. You feel her heavenly caress across your face before she finally drifts into eternal sleep. You wipe a tear from your eye.\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t worry I\u2019ll be with you soon.\u201d You say to her, and set her down.\n\nYou fly into a rage; you\u2019re the last one left. You begin killing Lizards, ignoring the fatal blows they land upon you. You laugh saying how they can\u2019t kill you. And then finally the adrenaline wears off and you finally succumb to your wounds. You look at the coins that lead you to this end. A fleeting thought crosses your mind in your last moments of life, you never actually found these coins, you stole them from the Elojin who found them.\n\n\u201cDestiny\u2026 didn\u2019t choose\u2026 me.\u201d", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Spare him", "result": "\u201cGet up, you shall follow me.\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026\u201d\n\u201cNo I am not going to kill you, perhaps you were not chosen, but I still see use for you.\u201d\n\nYou immediately take control of the village and order for the search of the Xont structure. Your team gets a much needed break and spends most of its time in the village, now that you have Lizards to do the searching. Your new command consists of Alyssa, LaFleur, Higgins and Kruz who turns out to be very helpful and the most enthusiastic of your followers. Diplomatic missions to other Lizard villages are accomplished while others are conquered. New Lizard troops are trained immediately; soon you have a REAL army. Still, you haven\u2019t found the Xont structure, but it hardly matters, you are accomplishing your destiny even without the technology, you just can\u2019t wait for the day that you find it, your power will increase tenfold.\n\nEveryone is pretty much behind you, and is enthusiastic about your goal. Only Alyssa seems troubled the entire time. You almost think that she won\u2019t become your wife, but she accepts. While you try to always reassure her and make her see the destiny that you see, she never does. She\u2019s loyal, but she always has a saddened expression on her face whenever she looks at you. An expression her people almost never show accept in times of great sorrow.\n\nWhen the Empire ships come, you have many of the Lizard tribes united under your banner. You make contact with the Empire saying that you\u2019ve made a lot of progress and wait for a shuttle to land, at which point you immediately capture it and take it back to the main ship with your team and a few of your elite Lizard warriors. You catch the Empire off guard for the most part, and capture the main ship without too much trouble, but the battle cruisers that were assigned to it are alerted and begin firing at you. You fight back, but your team isn\u2019t experienced with ship to ship combat and your captured ship is vitally damaged. You refuse to run though; you have a destiny to crush the Empire.\n\nBut as the ship explodes and your followers die around you, you finally have a moment of clarity:\n\nThere was never any way you could fight the Empire. You were just as delusional as Kruz. Alyssa saw this; she was the only one who ever did. You look over at her and she sees that you finally understand.\n\n\u201cWhy did you follow me?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cDon\u2019t you know?\u201d she asks back.\n\nYou know the answer.\n\nYou squeeze her hand one last time as you both see the bright blinding light of a proton torpedo blast through the bridge.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Fight Kruz", "result": "You choose to fight Kruz, he sighs heavily.\n\n\u201cSo be it.\u201d He says.\n\nThe center of the village is cleared as you square off, both of your followers cheering for their respective leaders.\n\nYou\u2019re a good hand to hand fighter, but Kruz has the advantage, on top of being a Mazatt which already makes him stronger than you, he also has been training himself vigorously during his time in the village. Eventually he overpowers you. He even says he\u2019ll spare your life, if you swear alliegence. You refuse to give in, death is preferable than serving him.\n\nHe makes good on your inflexibility. The rest of your team is then killed as well.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Kill him", "result": "You can sense it as sure as he probably can; you\u2019ve both been searching for the same thing. You don\u2019t even need to say anything to each other. Well nobody is going to steal your destiny. The predictable occurs\u2026\n\nYou attack.\nHe attacks.\nBoth of your respective followers attack.\nYou all die.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Keep going", "result": "You can\u2019t stop now, not when your destination is so close!\n\n\u201cKeep going!\u201d you say. \u201cWe\u2019ll come back later as gods.\u201d\n\nAs you pass by the village, a few Lizards see your rafts float by and begin hissing at you, they start throwing spears and shooting arrows! You respond by ordering your team to fire back at them.\n\nMore Lizards come pouring out of village to help attack you, to make matters worse they\u2019re moving out their own canoe like vessels to reach you! Some are even swimming\n\n\u201cKill them! Kill them all! Our destiny awaits! Let nothing stop us!\u201d you yell blasting the brains out of some Lizard attempting to board the raft.\n\nYou look over to LaFleur\u2019s raft, and he\u2019s not doing so well. The Lizards have decimated most of them with their well placed arrows and spears and have now completely overwhelmed the few remaining, LaFleur is fighting harder than you\u2019ve ever since him before. He\u2019s like a whole new man.\n\n\u201cYou can\u2019t kill me you Lizard bastards! Hahahahaha! I\u2019m free!\u201d are LaFleur\u2019s last words before falling to the Lizards. You order everyone to fire upon the raft and everything on it, effectively sinking it.\n\nEventually your own raft drifts far enough away from the village that the attack stops. Your remaining team is in pretty bad shape. Some are dying, and at this point many are completely demoralized. All your Lizard followers are dead. You start looking at your coins again, while more Slink Slinks squeak past you.\n\n\u201cWe\u2019ve survived. This planet is trying to destroy us, but it won\u2019t. I will find the Xont ruins, and then we shall smite all those that oppose us. Who\u2019s with me?\u201d You say.\n\nAlyssa comes up to you; she\u2019s wounded, but still able to walk around. She touches your hand and looks into your eyes.\n\n\u201cCaptain?... Let it go.\u201d She says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Let it go", "result": "You look down, fall to your knees and weep. You realize Alyssa is right. This was a fool\u2019s quest. There probably isn\u2019t a Xont ruin here, and if there is, you aren\u2019t anywhere near it. The Elojin might\u2019ve even given you wrong directions on purpose. You\u2019ve gotten everyone killed for no good reason. You weren\u2019t any better than the Empire.\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry.\u201d\n\nAlyssa holds you for awhile, and takes the coins from you and throws them into the river.\n\n\u201cIts okay Captain, it wasn\u2019t your fault.\u201d She says. As you welcome her cold body next to yours, you collapse from exhaustion.\n\nYou drift in an out of consciousness, you know you\u2019re moving, but it\u2019s like you\u2019re being dragged, eventually you fully wake up with all your capabilities. You see Alyssa.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s going on? What happened?\u201d\n\u201cYou probably shouldn\u2019t be up and around yet.\u201d Alyssa tells you.\n\u201cBut what\u2019s happened?\u201d\n\u201cWell after you passed out, me and few of the remaining team members that were still alive, took the raft apart and used some of it to make a stretcher instead, which we put you on. Unfortunately, we got attacked again by some more Lizards. I was the only one who survived, so I had to drag you the rest of the way and abandon the rest of the equipment. I would\u2019ve gone back for some of it, but I didn\u2019t want to leave you alone.\u201d\n\u201cWell I\u2019m up now, so we should go back for it, we\u2019re going to need what little supplies we have left, because the Empire ships still aren\u2019t going to be here for awhile.\u201d\n\u201cSo we are going back to the Empire?\u201d\n\u201cWell, I can\u2019t think of anything else. I mean what\u2019s the alternative? Hide and live on this planet?\u201d\n\u201cIt\u2019s up to you Captain.\u201d\n\u201cNo, I want to be off this planet as soon as possible. I hate this place and what happened to me. Even facing an Empire tribunal and execution sounds better than spending one more day here.\u201d\n\u201cWhy would that happen?\u201d\n\u201cWell come on, I was speaking treason before. I shot an Empire Indoctrinator. I\u2019d say I\u2019m in pretty big trouble.\u201d\n\u201cWho saw it? Who heard it? I didn\u2019t see or hear any of those things. When I told you my loyalty was to you and not the Empire, I meant that Captain.\u201d\n\nYou realize you nearly lost everything in trying to gain nothing. Alyssa\u2019s willingness to say nothing and her loyalty is more than payment for whatever she thinks her debt is to you for saving her life. If anything, you\u2019re indebted to her. And even though Alyssa thinks you were under some sort of mind control, you still vow that you\u2019ll never act that reckless ever again.\n\nWhen the Empire ships come, you both back each other up about a story of Elojin ambushes, and hostile Lizard natives everywhere. You suggest there\u2019s nothing of any worth on the planet except death. Your superiors nod and decide to bombard the place with mass drivers so nobody else can use it as a secret base of some sort, and you\u2019re sent on your next mission where you\u2019ll find your new replacements.\n\nYou and Alyssa always keep what happened on Paradise a secret, and not just the Xont incident, but the OTHER thing that occurred a few days after the incident.\n\nWell okay maybe the other thing occurred more than a few times, and still occurs from time to time\u2026", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Embrace Destiny", "result": "\u201cWe can\u2019t stop now Alyssa. We\u2019re almost there! All our dreams will come true!\u201d\n\nAlyssa just shakes her head in dismay, which is suddenly followed up by a look of shock and pain, you both look down and see yet another of one those snake things. This one has just bitten Alyssa deep in the leg. You immediately grab it and squeeze the life out of it, but its too late, whatever deadly poison it injected in her works fast. She falls; you hold on to her and whisper that everything will be alright. She looks at you one last time with sad eyes and then shuts them.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s okay Alyssa, I\u2019ll bring you back to life, the Xont will have technologies that bring the dead back, I heard that story before. Its gotta be true!\u201d\n\nYou carry Alyssa\u2019s body back to the raft and launch it back down the river, still convinced that you\u2019ll find the Xont structure. You make sure to keep her body under the canopy; she still looks as beautiful in death as she did in life. Most of your team is dead or unconscious and after a few days pass, all of them are dead, only the Slink Slinks remain on your raft, running and squeaking about. The sun beats down relentlessly on your boat of death. You feel so hot, you wish you could feel the coolness of Alyssa\u2019s body again, but it no longer generates such temperature anymore.\n\nYou walk around, observing your dead team members, the Slink Slinks hastily attempt to get out of your way. You manage to pick up one of the Slink Slinks and look at it in curiosity. You let it go as it desperately squeaks in fear. You stand at the edge of the raft and look off into the distance as the sun continues to destroy what\u2019s left of you.\n\n\u201cI will achieve my destiny. I will find the Xont ruins, and plunder the ancient technology and secrets within. I will bring my beloved Alyssa back to life. I will unite the Lizards on this planet to follow my commands, and build an army. When the Empire ships come, we shall take them over and begin to build a fleet. Others shall join me when they see that the old Empire is corrupt and stagnant. I shall destroy and replace it with a stronger one. I shall found a dynasty with my beloved Alyssa, and form a pure bloodline of strong future rulers. All that oppose us, shall be crushed, the Elojin, the Mazatt, and the Krik. The galaxy shall be ours. For I have been chosen by destiny, and I shall meet it.\u201d\n\nYou turn around one last time and address your team.\n\n\u201cWho\u2019s with me?\u201d", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Shoot LaFleur", "result": "\u201cI WON\u2019T HAVE COWARDS GET IN THE WAY OF MY DESTINY!\u201d you suddenly scream and shoot LaFleur the same way you shot Salo.\n\nLoyalty is a fickle thing. As quickly as you inspired your team, you quickly just destroyed their confidence in you with this unnecessary act. You don\u2019t look like a visionary anymore you look like a delusional, power mad leader who just wants everyone to follow him. You\u2019re no better than the Empire.\n\nAn argument breaks out, which degenerates into a fire fight. During this chaos a nest of weird snake like creatures are attracted to the noise and attack everyone. Their ability to blink in and out of sight makes them hard to defend against, let alone the fact that you\u2019re also fighting members of your own team. Eventually you feel some fangs sink into your arm and a painful sensation throughout your body, and within moments it\u2019s all over.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Continue on your journey", "result": "As you progress, your team begins taking amongst themselves, your outburst and killing of Salo was a little over the top. Eventually an argument breaks out on your raft and results in a fight. Some of your team disagrees with your recent actions, even if they didn\u2019t like Salo. They think you\u2019re acting irrationally and are leading them on a suicide mission. Hostilities increase and shots are fired. The mutineers out number you and only Alyssa and Higgins remain by your side and both of them are killed in the ensuing battle. As you kill the last mutineers, you\u2019re hit a few times and fall into the water. LaFleur has been watching the entire time and ordered the people on his raft to stay out of the fight. Upon seeing that you\u2019re unable to swim properly in your wounded state, he lets his raft drifts away and allows you to drown.\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive back to the planet he states how he had to take command after you went mad, and is promoted. He also manages to achieve what he always wanted, transference to a safe desk command.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (Corporal Higgins)", "result": "Corporal Higgins\u2026\n\nCorporal Higgins isn\u2019t too much different from the rest of your team. He basically just does what is asked of him. He\u2019s more than proven himself in battle though. For whatever reason, he seems to be able to communicate with the Lizards better than anyone else. He says it\u2019s because he used to own lizards back on Earth as pets when he was a kid, and these are just big versions of them.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Feeling different? (Current thoughts)", "result": "You feel very confident about this \u201cquest\u201d. It\u2019s like this is a whole new beginning for you. You even have fleeting thoughts of going AWOL, with all the power that the Xont structure could hold, who says you have to do this for the Empire? The Empire hasn\u2019t done anything for you except allow you to stagnate, with this find, you could change all that. Make your own way for once, and not be just faceless drone, and you could have Alyssa by your side still\u2026you\u2019ve been noticing how lovely she is as of late. You don\u2019t know why you haven\u2019t before. Perhaps it\u2019s because you now have a clarity that you\u2019ve never felt before.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Let Salo take care of him", "result": "You don\u2019t have time for mind games, if this Elojin actually has something important then he can tell it to Salo. He\u2019s been itching to torture something anyway, might as well be an Elojin. This\u2019ll kill two birds with one stone.\n\n\u201cSergeant Alyssa!\u201d you yell, and she enters immediately.\n\u201cYes sir?\u201d\n\u201cTake this Elojin to Indoctrinator Salo.\u201d You say, the Elojin looks genuinely surprised.\n\u201dWHAT!? Hold on now, there\u2019s no need for that!\u201d\n\u201cOh? Well are you going to tell me where the Xont structure is at then?\u201d\n\u201cI\u2026can\u2019t do that! You\u2019ll just kill me after I told you! Are you really ready to risk losing a chance at gaining the most important find of the millennium? You have to keep me alive! It\u2019s the only way you\u2019ll find it!\u201d\n\u201cYou think so? So you really think you\u2019ll be able to withstand the interrogation? And trust me, Salo really likes his work.\u201d\nThe Elojin doesn\u2019t look scared anymore; in fact he\u2019s downright defiant. \u201cFine, turn me over to your narrow minded torturer! He\u2019ll get nothing from me! We Elojin are a lot tougher than you humans give us credit for. We were exploring space while your race was still throwing bones in the air and fighting over pieces of yellow fruit and we\u2019ll be here long after your so called \u201cEmpire\u201d falls to the ravages of time, and history forgets you!\u201d\n\u201cMaybe,.. but not today. Take him away, and tell Salo to keep the screams to a minimum.\u201d\n\nAs Alyssa takes the Elojin away, he looks at her and speaks again.\n\n\u201cHuh. It must be nice to be a slave to such an enlightened society.\u201d\n\u201cMove it, Elojin.\u201d Alyssa replies.\n\nTime passes and there hasn\u2019t been a peep from Salo\u2019s tent. You know you said for him to keep it quiet, but you didn\u2019t think he\u2019d actually do it.\n\nYou wonder if you should check on him, the rest of your team is pretty much going through their usual routines, so there\u2019s not much to do right now. You could always relax.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go check on Salo", "result": "Well you might as well see what that sadist got out of his victim. You head over and enter Salo\u2019s tent.\n\n\u201cI TOLD YOU NOT TO DISTURB ME!\u201d Salo screams.\n\u201cWhat?!\u201d\n\u201cOh\u2026its you. Forgive my outburst Captain. I\u2019ve been a little on edge.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2026see\u2026\u201d you say as you notice that Salo has dismembered the Elojin. Body parts and blood are covering the floor of the tent. Salo sees your reaction to the sight and tries to explain.\n\u201cSorry for this mess, I got a little carried away, the Elojin proved to be particularly defiant. I was surprised, most Elojins squeal even without the threat of torture. This one wouldn\u2019t say anything, at least nothing that he hadn\u2019t already told you. I guess I got a little angry\u2026\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019d say you got a little more than angry.\u201d\nSalo begins to suddenly weep.\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry Captain! I couldn\u2019t get any more information out of him! I failed you and as an Indoctrinator of the Empire!\u201d\n\nOkay this is really weird, you\u2019ve never seen any side of Salo that indicates any like for you, let alone any feelings that would result in tears.\n\n\u201cUh, its okay Salo, I\u2019m sure you did your best. Don\u2019t worry about it, the Elojin was probably talking bullshit anyway about the Xont, we all know that\u2019s just a myth. Maybe you should take it easy for awhile, and make sure you clean up this tent, who knows what the hell this mess this will attract.\u201d\n\u201cI will.\u201d Salo says looking off into space.\n\nYou slowly exit Salo\u2019s tent, and call LaFleur and Alyssa to your tent to talk about this.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s going on sir?\u201d\n\u201cSalo\u2019s gone off his fucking rocker that\u2019s what. He\u2019s always been walking that line, but I think he\u2019s finally gone over this time. He completely dismembered that Elojin and he\u2019s just acting creepy in general and not the usual type of creepy either. He\u2019s definitely not entirely sane anymore.\u201d\n\u201cSo he\u2019s a threat then? We kill him?\u201d Alyssa asks.\n\u201cWhoa, hold on there! As much as I can\u2019t stand him, we ARE still following Empire law here; we can\u2019t just shoot him, at least not without reason.\u201d You say.\n\u201cWell in situations like this, the procedure is to immediately have him checked out by a doctor\u2026\u201d LaFleur comments.\n\u201cUh duh, Doc got killed trying to communicate with some Lizards remember? Besides I don\u2019t need a professional to tell me that he\u2019s crazy, I saw it with my own eyes.\u201d\n\u201cWell then the next step would be to have him shipped off to an Empire mental facility\u2026but since we aren\u2019t anywhere near one of those and won\u2019t be for a long time, we\u2019re suppose to keep him isolated, and under guard like a prisoner, until such time that he can be transferred to the proper facility.\u201d LaFleur says.\n\u201cWonderful. We can\u2019t move effectively around with a madman in tow. (Sigh) Well I guess we could just spend the rest of our time in this village. Make sure everyone\u2019s extra nice to the Lizards, we don\u2019t need them rising up against us now. We can do exploratory missions of the surrounding area. Salo will be restricted to his tent and kept under guard at all times. Alyssa, inform the rest of the team. LaFleur we\u2019re going into Salo\u2019s tent.\u201d\n\u201cUm, erm, what for?\u201d\n\u201cTo take away his weapons! We can\u2019t have him armed.\u201d\n\u201cSir maybe you should let Sergeant Alyssa\u2026\u201d\n\u201cI said me and YOU, Lieutenant! Besides, he might attack Alyssa, he didn\u2019t like non-humans before, he\u2019s probably only gotten more intolerant since then. Its apparent the only thing he\u2019s ever really respected is rank, even if it hasn\u2019t been us personally. Now come on!\u201d\n\nYou and LaFleur approach Salo\u2019s tent cautiously.", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter first", "result": "You shake off the violent thoughts you\u2019re having and enter the tent first. You see Salo, rubbing blood on himself and looking at some sort of coins. He looks up when you approach.\n\u201cI TOLD YOU\u2026oh it\u2019s you Captain\u2026\u201d\n\u201cHello Salo.\u201d You say and then slowly take his gun that\u2019s lying on the floor. You pass it to LaFleur who\u2019s petrified.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s that you got there?\u201d you ask, still being careful of the fact that Salo still has his knife.\n\u201cOh this? I found these on the Elojin, after I interrogated him. Strange things they are\u2026I\u2019ve never seen anything like them\u2026almost hypnotic\u2026\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re going to take a wild guess but you\u2019ve got a hunch that those things are causing the weirdness. You don\u2019t see how you\u2019re going to resolve this without physical confrontation. You get into a better position to lunge at him.\n\n\u201cSo Salo\u2026\u201d you say, and then you strike!\n\nYou and Salo wrestle for awhile, LaFleur runs off, but he at least goes and gets Alyssa to help you. Eventually you both knock out Salo, and you take all the coins and melt them with a plasma pistol. Crisis averted. You wonder what the coins were though. Were they some sort of Elojin mind weapon, or maybe the Elojin was speaking the truth about finding a Xont structure? If they were Xont in origin then you\u2019re just as glad not to have looked for the place. This planet is hazardous as it is and you don\u2019t need to add that kind of danger.\n\nLater Salo feels more like him self, and is completely apologetic and thanks you for saving his life. Actually he\u2019s nothing like his old self; you almost think he\u2019s still under some sort of control, but he\u2019s not. In fact he pretty much leaves everyone alone for the rest of your time on Paradise, he spends a lot of his time in some sort of penance.\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive you give a relatively mundane report, and leave out the trouble with Salo, in exchange for your silence, he transfers out of your squad and back to the Order.\n\nYou and your team get sent on your next mission infinitely a lot happier without an Indoctrinator watching over you constantly.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Let Lafleur enter first", "result": "\u201cGet in there you fucking coward!\u201d you say and shove LaFleur in first. Salo, surprised by LaFleur sudden appearance, immediately attacks him by stabbing him in the neck.\n\u201cI TOLD YOU NOT TO DISTURB ME!\u201d he screams.\nAs LaFleur falls, Salo continues to stab him, completely ignoring you.\n\nYou take advantage of Salo\u2019s preoccupation and shoot him in the head, you start laughing and continue firing. You feel a rush of pleasure that you\u2019ve never felt before when killing someone. You quickly try to regain your composure. Alyssa and a few others enter the tent.\n\n\u201cSir! Are you alright?\u201d\n\u201cUgh yeah. I\u2026I don\u2019t know what the hell\u2019s happening, I feel weird. Salo killed LaFleur so I reacted\u2026Is anyone feeling strange?\u201d\n\nA couple of the other team members say they haven\u2019t exactly been feeling themselves, Alyssa says she doesn\u2019t feel any different, but something\u2019s definitely going on. A few of the Lizards have been noticing what\u2019s been going on, and its making them nervous it seems. You might be wearing out your welcome.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay in the village", "result": "You decide to stay to figure out what the hell\u2019s going on; you feel the need to rest though first. In the meantime, nobody is to enter Salo\u2019s tent. You want a couple of guards to watch it, and in the morning it\u2019s going to be searched thoroughly.\n\nYou go to sleep and have violent nightmares, except they aren\u2019t nightmares; you find them to be very comforting. The next day, you insist on searching Salo\u2019s tent yourself, Alyssa says she\u2019s been experiencing some insubordination from team members, you snarl at her and tell her, if someone steps out of line then to shoot the bastards. She\u2019s a little shocked by your comment, then you tell her not to disturb you while you search Salo\u2019s tent.\n\nYou enter Salo\u2019s tent and search, but you have a hard time concentrating, you\u2019re having those thoughts again, they\u2019re almost primal\u2026\n\nYou stop searching and get angry from not readily finding an answer to your questions.\nExiting the tent, you see some of your team getting mad at the Lizards, who are hissing back. Alyssa tries to calm people down, but you undermine her authority, by pushing her aside and shooting a Lizard.\n\n\u201cKILL THE OTHER TRIBE!\u201d you yell.\n\nA small battle occurs, it\u2019s bloody and short. Your side wins, but not just content on killing the Lizards, they butcher them. A few even start cooking them up. A couple of the male and female soldiers start stripping off their clothing and have sex right in front of everyone. There is no shame; it\u2019s almost as if the concepts of civilization have been erased from all your memories over night. Alyssa\u2019s disappeared but you\u2019re not even thinking about her.\n\nHowever you still manage to maintain a higher brain function of authority. You quickly establish yourself as the \u201cAlpha Male\u201d, you immediately smash one of your tribesmen over the head and take his woman.\n\nAs time passes, you all have lost all ideas of your previous lives. You\u2019ve all effectively reverted back to the Stone Age, hunting for your food and fighting over the smallest things. None of you are wearing your uniforms anymore; your equipment has been all thrown into a pile in Salo\u2019s old tent. (You kept your rank bars though, because they were shiny) You are the Chieftain and make sure everyone remembers that fact, by displaying your prowess in battle with those Lizard creatures that attack every now and then, and by keeping the other members of your tribe in line.\n\nOne day you wander from the village, and come across a secluded waterfall, you see a blue woman with long white hair, bathing naked in it with an odd looking spear like weapon strapped to her back. She\u2019s beautiful; you immediately bow down before her in complete awe. She sees you, and approaches. A glimmer in her eye meets yours\u2026somehow you two know each other\u2026but that\u2019s impossible, she must surely be a goddess of battle sent from the heavens. She blesses you with her cool touch. Only a goddess could generate such a sensation in this heat.\n\nDuring your time together, the blue woman\u2019s raw unbridled passion overwhelms you, she begins to claw and bite you and your entire body becomes as ice. You realize your actions as a warrior have been rewarded. You feel darkness approach; you\u2019re ascending back to the heavens with her.\n\nAnd with one last kiss you finally reach Paradise.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Leave the village", "result": "Not wanting to fight yet another battle with Lizards right now, you order everyone to quickly pack up and get ready to leave immediately. You leave the village much to the contentment of the Lizards. As you get further away, the weird feelings you and some of your team were feeling start disappearing. A few days later and they\u2019re completely gone. You don\u2019t know what the hell was going on, but you\u2019re glad you didn\u2019t stick around in that village.\n\nThe rest of your time on Paradise is routine. You get attacked every now and then, you fight, and you still don\u2019t find anything of importance. That Elojin was probably lying about finding a Xont ruin.\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive you give a report of the planet, and decide to leave out what happened with Salo, and just say he was killed by Lizards. Your superiors write Paradise off as low priority and send you on your next mission.\n\nSame as it ever was.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Feeling different? (Current thoughts)", "result": "Something weird is coming over you, you don\u2019t feel quite yourself. For some reason you\u2019re having these thoughts of how LaFleur\u2019s cowardice disgusts you. Granted you\u2019ve never thought highly of him, but you\u2019ve never had thoughts of strangling him until his eyes pop out\u2026", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Relax", "result": "You decide to do something you\u2019ve rarely had the privilege of doing on here, relax.\n\nThis isn\u2019t \u201cReal\u201d Paradise however. Those that remain inattentive in this hostile world are likely to be victims of it. You are no exception.\n\nAs you relax you end up falling asleep, you awaken in the night only to see Salo standing over you covered in blood, with a crazed look on his face. He\u2019s also holding his combat knife, which he uses on you repeatedly.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (The Xont)", "result": "The Xont\u2026\n\nThe Xont civilization has been discussed, and debated, by other races for centuries. To humans they\u2019re considered the galactic equivalent of the ancient earth myth of \u201cAtlantis\u201d. Some believe their might\u2019ve been a Xont race at one time, but wasn\u2019t nearly as all powerful as they\u2019re made out to be. Supposedly the Xont had vast knowledge and technology before any other race. It was said that only a few Xont could control an entire world. Other than a few oral stories passed down by some races and speculative writings based on those stories, there hasn\u2019t been any hard evidence. A lot of stories sound the same, but are conflicting. For example some say they were balls of light while others say they were a race of machines. One story even suggests that they were bacteria with psionic powers. These could all just be accounts of several different spacefarring races that had made contact with different planets in the past, just as things go on today. The method of conquest might vary, but it usually always has the same results. Stories are bound to have similar tones about them. The fall of the Xont civilization also varies, some say they became decadent and were overthrown by their slaves, others say they succumbed to a disease that wiped out the entire race, others say they just disappeared. Nobody knows. A Xont home planet has never been found, but then again the universe is a big place.\n\nDespite all this conjecture, an eye is still kept out by all for signs of Xont technology since surely whatever kept them in control must be powerful indeed.\n\nPersonally you don\u2019t really buy the idea of any of it, not until you see some solid proof.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Have him killed", "result": "\u201cAn Elojin eh? Kill him. Anything he\u2019s going to say is going to be bullshit anyway. I don\u2019t have time to decipher what\u2019s the truth and what isn\u2019t.\u201d\n\u201cYou could turn him over to the Indoctrinator sir. He is very efficient at that sort of thing.\u201d Alyssa points out.\n\u201cSalo? Yeah, I could, but I don\u2019t feel like doing him a favor. Just shoot the Elojin. We\u2019re heading out, I\u2019m sick of this village.\u201d\n\u201cYes sir.\u201d\n\nAlyssa leaves and you shortly hear a gun blast and a body fall. She certainly doesn\u2019t waste time. Speaking of wasting time, that\u2019s what this mission feels like to you. If you\u2019re stuck here for months, you\u2019d at least like to be able to find something worthwhile.\n\nAs you leave and march through more jungle, you eventually come across some dead Lizards.\n\n\u201cSir, we got some dead Lizards here.\u201d Alyssa tells you.\n\u201cDamn, I do so like putting the righteous fury to these reptile heathens.\u201d Salo says.\n\nYou examine the bodies, they\u2019re pretty sliced up. Could be another tribe, but usually there\u2019s more signs of arrow and spear wounds, these are more like cuts with a sword like weapon. Might be some sort of predator you haven\u2019t encountered yet, but then you find something embedded in one of the Lizard\u2019s heads: A black piece of chitineous material.\n\n\u201cGreat, there are Krik nearby.\u201d You say. \u201cEveryone on extra alert, and start watching and listening carefully.\u201d\n\u201cK\u2026kkrik?\u201d LaFleur asks in a scared voice.\n\u201cAh ha! The most demonic of the Empire\u2019s enemies! I shall take great delight in slaying them!\u201d Salo says in anticipation.\n\nAlyssa doesn\u2019t say anything, you know out of everyone she came the closest to being killed by them, when they attempted to take over her home world. Her usual emotionless demeanor changes, as you see her eyes narrow displaying her hatred for them.\n\nThe rest of your team stands ready, it\u2019s not like you haven\u2019t fought them many times before, it\u2019s just that you know they never come in small groups. They\u2019re going to have numerical superiority over you and they are excellent warriors.\n\nYou continue on your way and soon you come across another village. And that\u2019s it. The Krik are here in full force. They\u2019ve effectively taken it over, You see piles of Lizard bones, and some other Lizards being lead to a nearby cave by a few Krik Taskmasters. It looks like they\u2019re using them for some sort of labor, but you can\u2019t tell what, you don\u2019t see anyone carrying out of the cave yet, but if it\u2019s the Krik in has to be important.\n\nWell this would qualify as something \u201cworthwhile.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack the village", "result": "Thinking like the Krik is the surest way to be defeated by them; while they can get away with a swarm assault mentality, you cannot.\n\nYour clumsy frontal assault on the village proves futile. The Krik are taken by surprise at first, but sheer numbers eventually overwhelm you and your team, you provide a change of pace from the Lizard meat the Krik were eating.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Sneak into the caves", "result": "You aren\u2019t going to defeat them head on, this requires a little subtlety. You notice the cave is far enough away from the village that you could probably sneak in without raising an alarm. The plan is to silently kill the few Krik watching over the Lizards and see what\u2019s so important in those caves. If it\u2019s anything truly worthwhile you can ponder your next move, if it not, you can get the hell out and put a bunch of distance between you and this place.\n\nSalo isn\u2019t too enthusiastic with this plan, he wants to attack head on.\n\n\u201cThe Emperor will protect us! This creeping and sneaking is for Elojin!\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m still in charge Salo, and I\u2019ll decide what\u2019s going to work! We aren\u2019t all going anyway, I\u2019ll be going, Alyssa, and two other team members. Lieutenant, you hold down the fort here, and dammit I NEED you to fucking muster up ALL your courage for this alright? If something goes wrong you need to get in there and help us.\u201d\n\u201cUm, I\u2019ll do m\u2026my best sir.\u201d LaFleur says unconvincingly.\n\nYou shake your head and hope for the best. You aren\u2019t worried so much that he\u2019ll run, Salo will make sure he doesn\u2019t, but you\u2019re more worried that Salo will act like the xenophobic hothead he is and start an attack without LaFleur\u2019s orders.\n\nYou, Alyssa, and your other two team members stealthily sneak into the cave. There\u2019s a weird fungus in here that causes a glow allowing you to barely see, but at least its light. The cave seems to descend lower the deeper you go, eventually you reach where the Krik and Lizards are, you keep hidden on an upper level and observe what they\u2019re up to.\n\nYou see the Lizards being forced to enter some strange doorway; it looks like they really don\u2019t want to either. A few go in, and some don\u2019t come back out. The ones that do are holding some shining crystals. They\u2019re Baz crystals. Figures the Krik would be able to find something of worth on this planet. You wonder how they found it though and what the danger is through the doorway that they\u2019re sending Lizards in there, let alone the fact that some of them aren\u2019t coming back.\n\nTime to ponder your next move.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave", "result": "You decide to leave, there\u2019s not much you can do, even if you kill these Krik, sooner or later the others outside will suspect something wrong and come running. As you get ready to leave, Alyssa can\u2019t believe you!\n\n\u201cSir! We have to kill these\u2026things!\u201d\n\u201cShhh, keep it down. We can\u2019t do anything we\u2026\u201d\n\u201cThe hell we can\u2019t sir! I\u2019m sorry but I can\u2019t stand here and do nothing!\u201d Alyssa says and opens fire on the Krik killing one of them instantly. The rest of them are alerted and begin to fire back. One of them makes a high pitched squealing sound however, in an attempt to alert his fellows.\n\nYou kill all the Krik, but you hear a bunch of them running down the tunnel, and it sounds like a lot. You free the Lizards in the hopes that they\u2019ll help, but they don\u2019t understand you, and they\u2019re too demoralized to fight. You try to withstand the onslaught, but they overwhelm you.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Kill the Krik Taskmasters", "result": "The only thing you\u2019ve found on this planet that\u2019s useful and you\u2019ll be dammed if you\u2019ll let the Krik have it. You don\u2019t think you could leave anyway, Alyssa looks pretty focused on killing them.\n\n\u201cNow we have to kill them all at the same time, we don\u2019t want one of them alerting the others with those sonic screams they do. Head shots, and aim like a damn sniper.\u201d\n\nYou all take aim at the Krik taskmasters, there\u2019s only two, but their bodies are naturally resilient. Hell, you\u2019re hoping the headshots will kill them instantly. And this dim \u201cfungus light\u201d doesn\u2019t exactly make it easy.\n\nSqueeze\u2026squeeze\u2026\n\nAlyssa fires twice, hitting both of them in the head! As they fall, she jumps down to the lower level and takes out her knife and stabs them both in the neck! They make twitching movements for a moment and then finally die. The Lizards look at Alyssa in wonder, they are certainly grateful to all of you, but you think she impressed them the most.\n\nThey don\u2019t understand you, of course, but they do understand that you just saved them. You free the remaining Lizards of their chains, and look willing to follow you.\n\nYou could slip out of the cave and escape with the Baz crystals that were already gathered, or you could go through the doorway they were sending the Lizards through.", "action_results": [{"action": "Escape", "result": "Sticking around wouldn\u2019t be the best idea, for the main reason that the Krik will probably send some more soldiers in here wondering what\u2019s going on eventually. You decide to leave and come back in force.\n\nYou all escape the cave without being seen, when you make your way back, you\u2019re almost surprised to see that Salo, hasn\u2019t overrode LaFleur\u2019s command and gotten everyone killed. He doesn\u2019t look too happy to see more Lizards though.\n\n\u201cCaptain what is this? You bring more of these aliens into our midst?\u201d\n\u201cThese Lizards were going to be killed by the Krik.\u201d\n\u201cAnd what of it? Let the alien scum kill each other I say!\u201d\n\u201cYou would. Look there\u2019s a Baz crystal deposit in that cave, (You show everyone some crystals) and we can\u2019t possibly take out all those Krik, it might help to have some allies.\u201d\n\u201cBah, your liberal policies concerning aliens will lead to your ruin Captain. You can trust in them, but I\u2019m not. I trust in the Will of the Emperor, and that\u2019s all a good Empire soldier needs to believe in.\u201d\n\nAlyssa gives Salo a colder stare than usual, while you ignore Salo\u2019s tiresome tirades, and decide your next course of action; you could start laying out a plan with who you have, OR you could try an even more radical plan and get the Lizards from the village you just left to help you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Make a plan now", "result": "The other village is too far away and you have reason to believe they\u2019d follow you, sure they were friendly, but that doesn\u2019t mean they\u2019re ready to help you fight a battle that doesn\u2019t directly concern them.\n\nYou need to act now. You plan out an attack, and explain it to everyone. The Lizards fashion some weapons with some nearby trees, and after a few attempts they grasp the plan to retake their village, but mostly they\u2019re going to follow Alyssa into battle, seeing as they feel indebted to her for saving their lives. Everyone agrees with the plan and gets into position. Salo grumbles about having to fight along side Lizards, but he\u2019s dislikes the Krik more, so he doesn\u2019t protest too much more.\n\nYou see some of Krik approaching the cave, looks like they got suspicious, you wait for them to enter and then direct some of your team to ambush them. As soon as the sounds of Krik being shot in the back are heard, the Krik encampment is alerted.\n\nThe rest of the Krik converge on the caves and you direct another detachment from the other side to start firing. The Krik realizing they\u2019re being attacked from two sides split up, and that\u2019s when you lead the rest of your team to attack straight down the middle. Alyssa fights like she\u2019s possessed with a rage you could never understand.\n\nThis simple tactic works surprisingly better than you thought, eventually you kill the last Krik, but the cost was high, many of your team members are dead, as well as all of the Lizards. All the high command survived though, Salo, LaFleur, and Alyssa.\n\nBut you\u2019ve secured the Baz crystal deposit; you don\u2019t want to really risk going through the doorway in the cave though. You\u2019ve already risked enough, if the Krik weren\u2019t enthusiastic about going in, and the Lizards weren\u2019t either, then you\u2019re guessing they had a good reason. Let someone else go in.\n\nOther than keeping Salo and Alyssa from killing each other and reassuring LaFleur that getting wounded by a Krik doesn\u2019t mean eggs were laid in him, the rest of your time on Paradise is relatively uneventful.\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive you report everything to your superiors who are very pleased. They have plans to start setting up a base immediately. As a reward, you\u2019re given a medal, and some accolades, but nothing too special. You were just doing your job as far as the Empire\u2019s concerned. However you suggest that Alyssa be able to be promoted, seeing as she displayed exemplarily in the battle with the Krik. Your superiors frown a bit, since you should realize that non-humans can\u2019t achieve rank past Sergeant. However they say they\u2019ll take it under consideration and maybe some exception can be made.\n\nThey dismiss you and you\u2019re shipped off to your next mission, where you\u2019ll get replacements for your team. As time passes Alyssa becomes the first non-human to be promoted to an officer rank, much to the annoyance of Salo, and to the delight of LaFleur who transfers out of your team for a nice desk command instead. She actually receives another few promotion offer later, but she always remains with your team though; she never forgets how you were the one who spoke out for her.\nEventually you and she grow even closer.\n\nAnother interesting effect that you didn\u2019t expect was this one exception eventually becomes a \u201crule\u201d as the Empire relaxes its policies on its alien citizens a bit.\n\nPerhaps you are just a glorified scout, but you made a major difference in the Empire.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Get more help", "result": "You decide to take a risk, and go back to the village. It\u2019s not a popular option. Many of the team are annoyed by the fact that you dragged them away from there only to take them back (And presumably back here) For once Salo and Alyssa are in agreement that you should attack the Krik NOW. And the Lizards you rescued are a little confused by this whole situation.\n\nEventually you get back to the village, the Lizards there, didn\u2019t expect to see you again, and their previous friendship turns to anger! The Lizards traveling with you are their mortal foes! You forgot to take into consideration that ALL LIZARDS DO NOT GET ALONG! They think you\u2019ve come back as an invasion force!\n\nAn unnecessary battle is waged, causing you to lose several members. There\u2019s no way you could attack the Krik now, you\u2019d be even more outnumbered than you would before and you\u2019re severely low on ammo now. You stay in the decimated Lizard village for the remainder of your time on Paradise, with a barely civilized attitude towards you from the rest of your team.\n\nYou really screwed the pooch on this one.\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive you explain the situation, and they immediately make plans to invade and take the Baz crystal deposit, of course the Krik have been in contact with their \u201cgovernment\u201d as well. Krik ships soon arrive to help protect their investment.\n\nA battle is waged over Paradise, you and your team were assigned permanently on Paradise when the invasion first took place since the Empire decided you knew the terrain the best. A base is set up and you\u2019re put in charge of it. Everyday more troops come and more die, nobody seems to make any headway, until it comes to your attention that this \u201clittle\u201d battle for Paradise has escalated into a full-scale intergalactic war, and the Krik decide they REALLY want this planet.\n\nHundreds of Krik transports come swarming out of the sky and all are consumed.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Explore the doorway", "result": "The doorway is strange; it doesn\u2019t look natural, like someone created it. The Lizards get nervous as you approach it though, and even seem to hiss warnings at you. One even tries to stop you physically. You push him aside though and motion Alyssa and the other two to enter.\n\nYou creep through the cave, and the glow of Baz crystals glow in the walls of it. The place is filled with them. Of course they\u2019re mostly embedded in rock, but still this obviously a big deposit. You still haven\u2019t seen any sight of whatever is lurking in here.\n\nOf course that\u2019s probably because you can\u2019t see it at all until it rips apart one of your team members! Something invisible or camouflaged or something is attacking!", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack!", "result": "You open fire immediately, you know you hit it a few times, but due to its invisibility, it manages to easily get away and sneak up behind you and you feel its fist go through your back and out your chest.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Run!", "result": "You can\u2019t fight this thing, you gotta get out of here! You also remember that this \u201cthing\u201d doesn\u2019t seem to go past the doorway. You all run back out, but you can still hear grunting behind you, its following you! So much for that plan! The Lizards see you running and do like wise, whatever this thing is its quick, because it\u2019s keeping up the pace. Finally you exit the cave and you get an idea. You tell Alyssa to take everyone else and head back to Salo and LaFleur and get ready to attack, you\u2019re going to do something.\n\nAs Alyssa follows your command, the thing is almost on you, and you run straight for the Krik camp.\n\nThe Krik are initially surprised that a lone human would dare do something like this, but after shooting a few of them they realize you\u2019re attacking them. You narrowly avoid being shot and sliced up several times. And then that\u2019s when it happens, your invisible friend starts ripping up the Krik.\n\nDuring this chaos, you manage to slip away and call for your own team to start attacking. The Krik are in disarray between concentrating on you and this invisible beast.\nSoon when it looks like the Krik are no longer a threat you tell your team to start concentrating their fire in the direction of whatever\u2019s tearing up the latest bug.\n\nIt can\u2019t get out of the way of all the firepower and is brought down, you finish up the last of the Krik resistance.\n\nYou\u2019ve managed to secure the Baz crystal deposit; you spend the rest of your time on Paradise at the village, which is relatively uneventful.\n\nWhen the Empire ships arrive, you give your report and your superiors are very pleased, they order a base set up immediately. You\u2019re given a medal and some accolades but that\u2019s about it. You were just doing your duty to the Empire as far as they\u2019re concerned.\nYou\u2019re sent on your next mission with replacements awaiting you.\n\nJust another mission completed.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (The Krik)", "result": "The Krik Collective\u2026\n\nSo named, due to the noise they make with their mandibles.\n\nYou remember when you were young your mother would sit you in front of the vid screen and let you watch old Earth movies (Mostly from the 20th and 21st century) and years later when you saw your first Krik up close and personal, you wondered if some of those directors weren\u2019t time travelers from the future because all those old Earth movie stereotypes of a hostile hive minded insectoid alien race wouldn\u2019t be too far off when applying them to the Krik. They look like big bipedal bugs; there simply isn\u2019t any other way to put it. While they aren\u2019t exactly \u201cdevour all life for the queen\u201d they come close. They do have a sense of individuality, but they always work in unison and for the common good of their race. A way of thinking that has served them well. As warriors they tend to use very effective bio-engineered weapons that only they can use. They\u2019re fierce fighters, but sometimes tactics can fail them, due to their likeminded thinking. They aren\u2019t very innovative, but then again it tends not to matter when they usually outnumber their enemies. One mind, a thousand \u201cbullets\u201d would be the ideology here.\n\nDue to their hive mindset they spread out on every world they can live on, and woe to those already living on it. They tend to enslave other races, but also use them as food. Life under the Krik is to be used and ultimately consumed.\n\nThey treat the other Major races little better, but they have enough intelligence to realize that a major all out war would be costly though. (Nothing prevents \u201clittle wars\u201d though every now and then) Ultimately the Krik WILL go to war with everyone; it\u2019s just a matter of time, so diplomacy is limited and only when it\u2019s something they wouldn\u2019t normally be able to achieve themselves. While they typically don\u2019t really have anything that would be considered \u201cfeelings\u201d they do tend to show what could be classified as \u201cdislike\u201d in regards to humans for some reason.\n\nPerhaps it due to the stories they hear of how humanity has been killing billions of \u201clittle kriks\u201d for centuries on Earth.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (Sergeant Alyssa)", "result": "Sergeant Alyssa\u2026\n\nNot her real name, since that\u2019s basically unpronounceable, but what you did make out sounded like \u201cAlyssa\u201d when she first told you, so that\u2019s the name you kept calling her. It stuck.\n\nHer race lives on a world much different than Paradise. It\u2019s a harsh frozen ice ball. How she can stand the infernal temperature here, is thanks to her race\u2019s unique body temperature regulation. Even in this heat, she remains comfortably cool. It\u2019s as if their home planet is always with them. Such a brutal environment created a very survivalistic race. Humans often jokingly refer to them as \u201cIce Elves\u201d since their pale blue skin and physical features resemble the ancient earth stereotype of those mythical beings. Surprisingly they accepted the Empire when it came, even offering some of their young warriors to serve. Ever since that first contact, they have been a consistent source of troops for the Empire.\n\nAlyssa wasn\u2019t one of those recruits, she pledged her allegiance to you when you saved her town from a Krik raiding party. Actually you were just trying to hold the territory because of the Baz crystal deposit there. Never the less, when you personally decapitated the Krik warrior who was ready to kill her, you gained a life long ally.\n\nHer loyalty is based more on you rather than Empire doctrine, but she\u2019s proven to be more of a soldier of the Empire than anyone else you\u2019ve commanded. If she was human she probably would\u2019ve been an officer by now, but the Empire has \u201crules\u201d against that. You doubt if she\u2019d leave even if she could get promoted further though.\n\nThe fact that Inquistor Salo can\u2019t stand her, only makes you like her even more.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (The Mazatt)", "result": "The Mazatt Dominion\u2026\n\nThere was an old earth saying of humanity\u2019s life expectancy in ancient times: \u201cUgly, brutal and short.\u201d\n\nApply this saying to the Mazatt and you pretty much have an accurate physical description of them. The entire race has been infected with a Napoleon Complex, as they absolutely see anything bigger than themselves as a threat, which pretty much means they are at perpetual war with every race they come across. Their average height is about five feet or slightly shorter. Despite being short they are incredibly strong and very skilled in combat. Their Heavy G home planet might account for this. The Mazatt Dominion achieved space travel later than all the other galactic powers, but made up for it quickly by conquering worlds and enslaving entire races. Unlike the Empire which \u201cenlightens\u201d worlds and \u201cassimilates\u201d other races, they never allow slave races to serve in their armies however, their distrust is far too great and given the number of uprisings they have to put down, it\u2019s just as well.\n\nWhile they excel in combat, they fall short in other areas, most notably in medical research and spy networking, which they sneer at as being crutches for the weak. For a vertically challenged race their ships are the largest things flying around in space. Their concept of ship building basically consists of building the biggest fucking hull that will support triple plated armor, gauss cannons, plasma missiles, and a navigation system that has one big red button saying \u201cGO TO THE ENEMY.\u201d Actually this simple design works surprisingly well.\n\nAll diplomatic attempts with them have met with no or limited success, the Krik and humans are just too tall to be trusted. They find the Elojin to be utterly detestable and will have nothing to do with the spotty freaks.\n\nAnd who could blame them.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Delegate the responsibility to Lieutenant LaFleur", "result": "You tell the soldier to let Lieutenant LaFleur take care of it, since you\u2019re busy. You\u2019re really sick of having to do everything yourself around here anyway. You go back to examining your maps. You wonder if you\u2019ll ever find anything of any importance on here, when all of a sudden you hear yelling and gun fire outside your tent! You rush out with your own gun drawn.\n\n\u201cWhat the hell is\u2026\u201d you start to say as you come out of the tent and are fatally hit by a blast in the chest by an Elojin holding an Empire pistol, it\u2019s LaFleur\u2019s. The incompetent idiot allowed his weapon to be taken.\n\nBut you were the incompetent idiot for delegating an important task to him in the first place.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (The Lizards)", "result": "The Lizards\u2026\n\nWhile there are many hostile creatures on Paradise, the only sentient ones you\u2019ve come across are known as the Lizards, mainly because nobody has been inventive enough to assign them another name. They look like four foot tall bi-pedal lizards, so it\u2019s an appropriate name.\n\nThe Lizards are basically hunters, and are still living in the Stone Age. They employ spears, clubs, blow guns and bows as weapons, but are completely capable of using their natural teeth and claws in combat as well. They aren\u2019t united as a race, and there are many tribes actively at war with one another, which is good since they get distracted from attacking you.\n\nYou have come across peaceful tribes, but unfortunately this is still a rarity, most of the time the Lizards see you as potential prey. They don\u2019t seem to have any fear despite the fact you severely outgun them. Then again they seem to worship various weird idols, so perhaps they believe in some sort of better afterlife. Communication with them is hard since they have difficulty speaking your language and humanity is not known for even bothering to learn other alien languages. Some progress has been made though.\n\nThey\u2019re primitive, but not stupid. Many times they\u2019ve set up traps and ambushes that have killed your team members on more than one occasion. Your limited communications with the friendly ones have proven they can learn rather quickly.\n\nIf they ever got organized they\u2019d probably be even more dangerous.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (The Elojin)", "result": "The Elojin Alliance\u2026\n\nIf there was a race more duplicitous than humans, it would be the Elojin. They look similar to humans, except they are completely hairless and are covered in spots. They\u2019ve had the ability to travel space before humans. It\u2019s rumored that they had even made visits to earth in the past, mostly to cause trouble. This cannot be completely confirmed, yet the Elojin never flat out deny these accusations. Indeed they find it more amusing to keep humans guessing on the situation. If the rumors of early abductions are true, one wonders why they did not try to invade humanity when they could. However it\u2019s been proven the Elojin are not a race of conquerors. They prefer to avoid open conflict and remain in the shadows. It\u2019s partly why (Despite being technologically advanced) they are considered the \u201cweakest\u201d of the major galactic powers. With all the inner political turmoil that goes on in the Elojin High Council, it\u2019s amazing they\u2019ve been able to even hold it together. They have no loyalty to race, government, or even family. Each one is out for themselves. Several times in the past an Elojin defector has backstabbed its own government for personal gain. Of course within the same day, they\u2019ve been known to backstab their benefactor as well, leading to the idea that ALL Elojin are potential spies, assassins or double agents. Their favorite past time is dealing in misinformation, half-truths and out right lies.\n\nThe Elojin will deal with anyone, but seem to prefer dealing with humans, since the Mazatt and Krik usually have less patience with them, this might explain why they prefer to side with humanity when the need arises, but rest assured this is only to save their own spotty asses. It\u2019s in the Elojin\u2019s best interest that NOBODY becomes the sole galactic power. As long as everyone is fighting everyone else, the Elojin are winning as far as they\u2019re concerned.\n\nAnd they\u2019re probably right.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Approach your Lieutenant", "result": "You go over to LaFleur to tell him to lay off with the \u201cby the book\u201d shit. You\u2019d think by now he\u2019d know what looks good on paper doesn\u2019t work in the field.\n\nUnfortunately, while LaFleur was only causing a minor annoyance, Salo was inciting a riot. With his rants he angered the previously peaceful Lizards to the point of hostility. As you\u2019re telling LaFleur to stop being so uptight, a spear goes flying into your back.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (Indoctrinator Salo)", "result": "Indoctrinator Salo\u2026\n\nSalo is an Empire Indoctrinator: Loyal, dedicated, intolerant, and utterly fanatical. It\u2019s his job to make sure humanity doesn\u2019t fall to alien influences and to shove humanity\u2019s influences down aliens\u2019 throats or failing that, to annihilate aliens that insist on holding on to their own cultures and humans that question the Empire.\n\nSalo like most of his kind, sees heresy everywhere, he\u2019s even accused you of being too \u201csoft\u201d on the natives on several occasions. What he fails to understand (Or refuses to) is you\u2019re NOT an assault force, you\u2019re scouts. Sometimes in order to survive, you have to work with the population that may live on the planets you\u2019re exploring. In fact, it\u2019s usually easier that way, since you aren\u2019t fighting a battle every five minutes. (Let the marines worry about that when they invade) Indoctrinators though are known for their inflexibility, and Salo has been bending far too much for his taste. He doesn\u2019t even really like the idea of assimilating alien cultures; he\u2019d rather just exterminate them. So far the general hostility of the Lizards has been appeasing his xenophobia. He gets a perverse kick out of chanting Empire doctrine as he\u2019s killing them. You\u2019ve had to stop him a few times from going overboard. While killing native populations is fun for him, he always hopes to meet one of the sworn enemies of the Empire though, he particularly hates Elojin.\n\nYou and Salo have never really gotten along, but you\u2019re getting the impression that you and he are going to really have it out soon and the outcome probably won\u2019t be good. You don\u2019t understand why he didn\u2019t just ask to be assigned to an Empire Assault Legion instead, he\u2019d still be serving the same purpose of \u201cmoral officer\u201d and he\u2019d be able to kill all the aliens he wanted on a regular basis.\n\nKnowing your luck though, he specifically asked to be assigned to you personally just because the nature of the universe seems to like fucking with you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (Lieutenant LaFleur)", "result": "Lieutenant LaFleur\u2026\n\nIf there was anyone who wants to be here less than you, it\u2019s Lieutenant LaFleur. He doesn\u2019t really even want to be serving in the military at all. The only reason why he joined was due to the fact he comes from a military family and it was pretty much tradition that he HAD to join.\n\nYou\u2019ve come across these types several times before, and they usually fall into two categories; spoiled and not spoiled. The spoiled military brats usually get their high ranking fathers to get them a desk job away from any real fighting of any sort and thus keeping the tradition alive in their family of being an \u201cArmchair General\u201d.\n\nUnfortunately for LaFleur, he came from the unspoiled kind. His father purposely made things even rougher, since he expected more out of him. LaFleur is just not cut out for combat activity though, despite doing well in the classroom. Sensing this flaw, his father was determined to make him worthy of the LaFleur name by assigning him to a scout force. He would either learn how to adapt or die. Either one would be considered honorable to the family name.\n\nWhile LaFleur can memorize rules and regulation and perform administration with the best of them, he\u2019s absolutely pitiful out on the field. He hasn\u2019t actually run away yet, but he\u2019s come close. Only Salo\u2019s constant rants of how he\u2019ll personally capture and torture anyone who runs away in battle are probably what keep him around. As it is, he mostly hangs in the back and fires a shot every once in a while.\n\nYou would almost feel sorry for him, if he wasn\u2019t so annoying.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Stay in your quarters", "result": "Avoiding your problems won\u2019t solve anything and it certainly doesn\u2019t solve anything here.\n\nYou fall asleep, and you don\u2019t check on your team and they get into trouble without you looking over them. So it shouldn\u2019t be all that much of a shock when a Lizard spear to your stomach wakes you up.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Would you like to know more? (Your story)", "result": "The Empire and You.\n\nSure sounded like a good idea at the time when you first saw those commercials and heard all the propaganda about how humanity needed you most. You pretty much bought it hook line and sinker, just like they planned.\n\nWere you REALLY that bored on your backwater planet?\n\nWell yeah you were actually. You were raised on a relatively unsettled world, barely colonized, just a few farming communities basically. Your world wasn\u2019t dangerous at all; the Empire had long since exterminated a native species living on it before humans came to settle it. Yep, nice and orderly.\n\nYou always felt stuck on your insignificant planet, you felt like you should be doing something greater, something more important. When the recruiters came you saw it as a way out of the intergalactic boonies and joined up right away. No longer would you be some drone, you\u2019d be making a difference for humanity and gaining all the accolades that go with it. Since then you\u2019re almost regretting that decision.\n\nIt\u2019s not really the danger that bothers you, or the suicide like missions they give you. It\u2019s the mood of still feeling insignificant. You thought this would all be different somehow. You thought you\u2019d have a command of legions of troops, bringing glory to the Empire, and conquering worlds in HIS name.\n\nAs it is, you\u2019re a glorified scout, because the Empire decided your skills would be better put to use there and of course the Empire is ALWAYS right.\n\nSure there\u2019s adventure, but no fame, no adoration, there\u2019s barely any acknowledgement for what you do, despite the fact that you\u2019ve gotten pretty good at it and reached the rank of Captain. But if you were to get killed, you\u2019d be replaced easy enough. The average grunt is probably more valued, you\u2019re a canary in the coal mine.\n\nSometimes you think there\u2019s gotta be a way out of this mess you\u2019ve gotten yourself into\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the story", "result": "Paradise...\n\nThat must've been the Empire's idea of an ironic joke when they were assigning a name to this sweltering hell hole of a planet. The heat wouldn't be so bad if the planet wasn't also a jungle nightmare teaming with poisonous flora and dangerous fauna.\n\nThe \"primitive\" natives aren't exactly friendly either. Your team medic had to find that out the hard way. Oh sure sometimes you'll come across a tribe that's friendly, but most of the time the lizards see you as food. Soft, fleshy pink food that's invading their territory. Which means you usually end up having to torch an entire village.\n\nFuckin' waste of ammo.\n\nOf course if the planet and its inhabitants weren't enough, there's always the other major powers laying claim to the planet. The Krik Collective, the Mazatt Dominion, and the Elojin Alliance have all laid claims to plunder whatever riches this planet may have and that's why you're here: To make sure this planet is plundered by the Terran Empire instead.\n\nThe next Empire supply ship won't be here for a long time, let alone anymore troops. You're on your own. Ah the joys of being part of the Empire's expeditionary force.\n\nYou and your team have currently set up base in one of those \"friendly\" lizard villages.\n\nWell its a brand new day in Paradise, what's first on the agenda?", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story22.json b/data/scraper/stories/story22.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..58f6029 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story22.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=53134", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou were really starting to get tired of the color green. The forests were green, the grass was green, even your damn Realm's emblem was green. It made already boring guard duty even worse. You would pace back and forth staring at the dreadfully large expanse of forest ahead of you, but nothing would ever happen. You might see the occasional kobold walk along the edge of the forest, but they never did anything. They just watched and waited. If you weren't on a fifty foot high wall you might actually be worried, but, as it happens, you were. There was no kobold in all of the Lost Realm that could scale these walls, and even if there was it, and its disgusting green skin would get peppered with arrows before it had the chance to. Yes, this was simply the easiest most boring place to guard in all of the Realm of Men. \n\n\nIt was because of this fact that your lieutenant was thoroughly confused when you requested to be transferred here. You were his most reliable soldier, and you knew that. You used his fondness of you to get him to give you this transfer. He'd asked why, and you'd simply replied that you needed time to get over what happened to Liliana. Your wife. She was assumed dead by everyone. The night of your wedding you and her were cornered in an alley by thugs. You were beaten to a pulp, and she was taken, in more than one sense of the word, right before your eyes. Her parting words to you before you blacked out from the pain were, \"I'm lost!\" \n\n\nI'm lost. \n\n\nYou take off your wedding ring and examine it. It's a beautiful piece. Solid gold encrusted with an emerald gem. It is the only green you find yourself being able to stand, and only then because it was from Liliana. Guard duty wasn't paying you enough for you to be able to get rings for the both of you, so instead you blew all of your money on her ring. That one was polished iron inlaid with golden patterns, and it wasn't much, but it represented more than money. Liliana accepted your proposal, and when she found out you hadn't gotten yourself a ring she gave you her mother's ring. It was a little too girly for you, but the smile on her face turned you into an emotional sob, so you accepted. She was taken that same night. Presumed dead, and with you chosen as her closest 'relative' it was up to you to bury her coffin. You did so quickly. Many people, including your lieutenant, suggested you take things slower, but you were adamant.\n\n\nYou didn't tell them why you were in such a hurry, and even if you did, you doubt they would've believed you. You were the closest person to Liliana and consequently the only one whom she would trust with her secrets. \n\n\nI'm lost.\n\n\nThose words could only mean one thing. They were a confirmation to a question you asked her years ago, when the two of you first met... ", "action_results": [{"action": "Memory: Meeting Liliana", "result": "Year 366 of the Second Era\n\n\nAt the age of ten, you were average. Your height, weight, disposition, and, well, pretty much everything about you was average. Never the last one chosen for capture the emblem, but never the first one either. Your life then was a monotonous slog: Go to your rundown academy, try to do well in your academic work, fail, and return home only to have your drunkard of a father beat you. You didn't realize how miserable your life was until the fateful day when Liliana joined your class at school. \n\n\nLike the rest of the girls in the class, she wore a dress. Unlike the rest of the girls in the class, her dress was obviously of fine make. The embroidery on her dress had no faults. No drops of blood from clumsy mothers who pricked themselves on their needle. No lazy patches sewn in to cover up holes. No, her dress was flawless. Her hair was onyx black, and fell down in waves around her face. Her glittering blue eyes were filled with anticipation, and maybe a little fear. She clearly wasn't used to being in these kinds of situations, and she kept glancing around as if someone else was going to introduce her to the other classmates. \n\n\nYour teacher, a hag of a woman, prompted her to introduce herself. \"Go ahead and introduce yourself to the class, dear.\"\n\n\nShe widened her eyes in surprise, but followed the teacher's command. \"My name is Liliana, I'm ten years of age, and..,\" she looked to the teacher for instruction. She had an accent, and one that you'd never heard before at that. Not northern, or even like those from the eastern realm. No, this was decidedly different from any other accent you'd heard before.\n\n\n\"Go on,\" the teacher prompted again.\n\n\n\"I don't know what else to say,\" Liliana responded.\n\n\nThe teacher frowned disappointedly. \"Surely you have more things to tell us about yourself than your name?\" When Liliana didn't respond, the teacher spoke again. \"Where are you from? Or, what do you like to do in your spare time? Tell us things like that.\" \n\n\nLiliana hesitated once more.\n\n\n\"Come now. We don't judge people here,\" the hag patted her comfortingly on the shoulder, but failed to notice the snickering in the back. \n\n\nLiliana, it seemed, found her words comforting, and finally started to open up. \"I was born in Arboribus. My father is the king there, and it's an amazing place. There are trees larger than castles there! Oh, and I like to go stag riding with my father if he has the ti-\" \n\n\nThe teacher interrupted. \"Excuse me. Where?\" The teacher sounded somewhat confused, but definitely disappointed. The snickering in the back increased, but Liliana still hadn't noticed. \n\n\n\"Arboribus,\" she said this clearly, and with an expression of incredulity fixed upon her face. The teacher simply stared at her blankly, until Liliana continued. \"You know, in The Lost Realm...\" \n\n\nThe boys in the back, try as they might, couldn't contain themselves any longer. They busted out into raucous laughter that spread to the rest of the students that were typically thought of as nice. Everyone gave into the laughter, and even the teacher hag was chuckling.\n\n\nYou were on the edge of laughter as well, but something kept you there. Stories of The Lost Realm, and rumors of a ancient city of humans therein. Your mother, before she died of disease, would tell you fairy tales of the ancient land, and how it used to be as prosperous as the Realm of Men is now. You'd always harbored the secret thought, hope, that the stories were true, and here was a person who claimed to hail from that very place. This, and the expression on Liliana's face, caused you to hesitate. Her expression was that of someone hurt , and a genuine expression at that. \n\n\nYou held the laughter off, and waited for everyone else to do the same. They eventually quieted down, but only after tears started streaming down Liliana's face. Silence took the place of laughter, and all joy was replaced with the sad sound of sobbing. \n\n\nThe old hag had the decency to attempt to comfort her by giving her a hug, but Liliana jerked away. Apparently she didn't like the idea of hugging the old hag. Especially since she'd promised no ridicule would come, but then turned around and gloried in it herself. \n\n\n\"It's true!\" Liliana yelled after she managed to control her sobbing. \"I'm not a liar! And, and ,and...\" She starts crying again, but instead of staying in the classroom for everyone to see, she ran through the door and out of the classroom. \n\n\nThe silence continued for a moment longer, before you made your first life changing decision. You got up from your designated chair and followed after Liliana. \n\n\nYou were no expert at dealing with girls. Let alone crying ones, and you weren't the most...", "action_results": [{"action": "...charismatic...", "result": "Year 366 of the Second Era\n\n\n...charismatic of people, but you were smart enough to know that, when crying, a girl needs a comforting shoulder. Not a questioning voice. \n\n\nYou follow the sound of sobbing through the worn wooden hallways of the school, and outside, until you find the source of the crying. Liliana sits on the steps to the main door of the school. Her well crafted dress is ruffled in places and her body constantly shifts under the pressure of her tears. Her hair comes down in waves around her head, effectively cutting off any view of her face. \n\n\nShe doesn't notice you there at first, but when the main door closes behind you she jumps and turns towards you. Tears and snot cover her face with her eyes both sad and angry at the same time, and for a moment you find yourself regretting coming here. That moment passes, and the impulse you followed earlier propels you toward her. \n\n\n\"Are you going to laugh at me again?\"\n\n\nHer voice reflects what she is feeling. Sadness, despair, anger, and, you think, a bit of hope color her voice. You decide to concentrate on her hopefulness. \n\n\n\"I didn't laugh.\" \n\n\n\"Everyone laughed. I saw.\" \n\n\nClearly she hadn't been paying attention to you when in the classroom. \"Not me.\" \n\n\nYou sit down on the same step as her, and she glares at you. Silence ensues, and you turn away and gaze out in front of you. You want to ask her about the Realm of the Lost, but the question dies in your throat. Wouldn't it be at least a little insensitive to ask her prying questions now? \n\n\nYour question is answered when you hear her start to sob again. This time it's less intense, but it's still crying all the same. Maybe it's the memory of her excited face when she was in front of the classroom, or maybe you just didn't like the sound of crying. Whatever the reason, you decide to wrap your arm around her shoulders in a half hug. Liliana turns to stone beneath your touch, and you think she'll pull away, but she doesn't. She stays still, but continues her crying. You feel absurdly awkward in this position, but she doesn't seem to mind. She even leans into your hug after a while.\n\n\nIn between holding her and listening to her crying, you find yourself staring at her wondering how in all the realms this girl was from the Lost Realm. You might be tainted by the knowledge of fairytales, but you were still aware that the Lost Realm was crawling with kobold and others of that ilk. It was a very dangerous place. At the end of the first era was when the Lost Realm was supposedly at the height of its power, but that ended when a dragon led a massive host of kobold and wyverns and sacked the entirety of the realm. Well, that's how the stories went. So how then, could a delicate being such as this come from such a dangerous place?\n\n\nThen a brilliant idea came over you. There was a story your mother once told you. One about the faerie, a race of beings native to the Lost Realm. When they were in the Lost Realm they were humanoid creatures of a similar height humans, but with pointed ears and a slender build. In the story, a faerie wandered over the border of the Realm of Men and the Realm of the Lost, (Before the border walls were constructed) but the faerie were tied to their own realm. Whenever they left, they became as humans. This particular faerie panicked when they realized they left their home for another realm, and immediately tried to go back, but every time he tried to re-enter his homeland, he would get lost, turned around. He could never find his way back. Once the faerie willingly left the Realm of the Lost, they weren't allowed back. He was left in the Realm of Men to fend for himself, but he desired that no their faerie would feel like he did. Alone, confused and afraid. So the faerie came up with a code. If he thought there was another faerie, he would ask them a simple question. \n\n\nYou ask that question now. \"Are you lost?\"\n\n\nLiliana immediately pulls from you and stares at you in disbelief. She suddenly wipes all of the tears from her face with her sleeve before asking you a question. \"Will you help me fit in here?\" \n\n\nKinda shocked that your plan worked you only nod in response. \n\n\nA hint of a smile breaches her face. \"What's your name?\" \n\n\nYou briefly wonder what you've gotten yourself into, but you answer regardless. \"My name is...\"", "action_results": [{"action": "End of Memory", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou pull yourself from the memory. That was happening way too often since Liliana was captured. And she was captured. There was no doubt in your mind about that. Captured by people who obviously knew what they were doing. Otherwise they wouldn't be able to make it through the forests of the Lost Realm without being captured, killed, or raped by horny kobold. That means there's a way to make it through that forest. You just have to find it. \n\n\nThat was the reason you spent your time here on the wall watching, waiting, planning your route through that kobold infested place. Of course you could just leave on your own and hope for the best, but th- \n\n\nYour thoughts are interrupted when the roar of some beast sounds throughout the air. You jerk your head immediately towards the sound. It came from somewhere over the tops of the trees, and still must've been miles out. Every guard on the wall peels their eyes to the forest, and it isn't long before one of your fellow guardsmen spots something. \n\n\n\"There! Above the forest!\" The guard sounds quite panicked.\n\n\nYou look where he indicated and spot several grey blots in the distance. They look like birds at first, but as they get closer you can tell they're much larger and have several more rows of teeth than a bird. \n\n\n\"Wyverns.\" The guard right beside you breathes out. \n\n\nYou turn back to look at the beasts. They're still a few miles out, but you can hear the beat of their leathery wings drawing closer every second. The guards in your platoon stand on the wall in stunned silence. Nothing happens here, ever. Why now of all times? \n\n\nYour lieutenant, an older fellow named Byron, calls everyone to order. \"This is what we're here for men! This is why...\" \n\n\nByron's voice fades into the depths of your mind. It is replaced by a different voice. One that's mocking, provoking. The memory of your first fight calls back to you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Remember", "result": "Year 368 of the Second Era\n\n\n\"Are you listening bitch?\" \n\n\nA hand is shoved into your back and you're sent tumbling to the ground. Grass presses against your face, and you even feel some dirt in your mouth. That was fine. You didn't care very much. These guys could push you around all they wanted. They'd never be able to beat you as bad as your father did. \n\n\n\"Stop it, Daniel!\" Liliana's voice sounds from behind you. Apparently she didn't like Daniel pushing you. \n\n\nYou slowly pick yourself up and off of the ground as Daniel replies. \"What? You didn't like me pushing your bitch around?\" That remark is followed by some laughter. \n\n\n\"He hasn't done anything to you.\" Liliana replies readily. \"Leave and go hit your mom if you're looking for a bitch to hit. Don't touch him.\" There's a moment of silence before you hear a smack. That sound reverberates around the academy yard, and for a moment you think Liliana finally slapped the guy like she said she'd been wanting to do, but when you turn around you find it's the complete opposite. Liliana is on the grass now, clutching her face. You see tears start to come to her eyes, but she doesn't sob. Not anymore.\n\n\nYou've never been the most violent person. Your mother instilled that into you, so you let others push you around. You didn't give a damn either way, but when you see Liliana on the ground you don't hesitate. \n\n\nYou lunge forward and shove Daniel hard in the chest, and you do it hard enough to send him flying to the ground as well, but unlike you and Liliana he gets back up to his feet quickly. His reaction is also quick. He immediately rushes toward you and raises his fist back. You can tell a punch is coming.\n\n\nYou've grown in the past couple years, and are easily one of the tallest guys in class. Aside from Daniel, that is. You might not be taller than Daniel, but you'd bet your mother's corpse (Muse bless her soul) that you can take more hits than he can. That being said, you don't particularly fancy getting punched if you can avoid it. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Let him hit you", "result": "Year 368 of the Second Era\n\n\nDespite what others think of him, Daniel is weak. And you're going to prove just that.\n\n\nHis punch comes directly into your right cheek. It has a hell of a lot of power. Certainly more than you anticipated, but you don't allow yourself to stumble. Your head snaps back as it hits, and there's a lot of pain, but you ignore it. Instead you revel in the shock displayed upon Daniel's face. He's thoroughly surprised, and you doubt someone has ever lasted past the first punch against him. Let alone be barely affected by it. \n\n\nYou look him dead in the eyes and smile just before returning his punch with one of your own. He doesn't get away in time, and is hammered by your punch. He stumbles backward, and you take a step forward and shove him to the ground once more. There's no time for him to react as you pounce on top of him and lay punch after punch into his face. His 'friends' don't rise to stop you, and the courtyard is silent save for the sound of your fist pounding his face. \n\n\nAfter several more punches you feel a hand on your shoulder. You nearly jerk away from it, but, despite your frenzied mind, you are able to recognize that it is a distinctly feminine hand. Liliana, you think and stop punching. Daniel doesn't stop his groaning as you rise to your feet to face her. \n\n\nThere's less baby fat on her face now than when you first saw her, and is beginning to be quite the knockout. Her eyes are still slightly red and the right side of her face is still red, but she isn't crying any more. \n\n\n\"Enough,\" she whispers to you. \n\n\nYou only nod in response. You start to walk away from the scene when you realize that you'd gathered quite the crowd. You think about saying something, but instead you reach for Liliana's hand and glare at everyone in the crowd. Your look says it all. \n\n\nYou leave the scene with Liliana in tow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Return from the memory", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nThe memory fades away, and Byron's voice returns. \"I need one person to light the signal light over by the watchtower. Everyone in division two stay here and support us with arrows. Everyone in division one follow me!\" \n\n\nThe wyverns are still racing to the wall, and a fight seems inevitable.\n\n\nByron leads the way as he and division one head down to the ground to support the rest of the group. Everyone else stays and prepares their bows. \n\n\nYou were assigned to division two upon your transfer here, and so your orders are abundantly clear. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay with division two", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nThe signal fire will get lit by someone else, so you don't need to worry about that. After that your decision becomes even easier. You aren't a fool. Leaving the safety of the wall when it's under attack, and of your own volition at that, would be utter foolishness. You stay right where you are and string your bow with the rest of division two. \n\n\nThe distinctive sounds of the wyverns approaching doesn't change, but as you wait for them to draw near, you hear another set of noises. Several sets of hooves pound against the ground just beyond the edge of the forest, and before too long you see the culprits of the noise bursting through the edge of the wood. Five horses, mounted by at least one person apiece, ride from out of the forest. They ride at a very fast speed, and the horses themselves seem to be running more from fear rather than their rider's instructions. A few moments after they come out of the woods almost twenty giant lizards come out of the forest. The beasts are generally green, but many, if not, all, have blue or purple scales scattered across their hide. Three kobold ride atop each of the lizards. \n\n\nIf your division wasn't silent before, then they certainly are now. The math is easy. There are around sixty kobold, and that is discounting the wyverns and their riders still on their way. You briefly wonder what in the four realms this group of less than ten individuals did to anger this many kobold, but the thought is dashed from your mind as the kobold come into range. \n\n\nYou aren't the best shot out there, but you are far from the worst, and today is a good day for you. Nearly every one of your arrows finds its mark, and many an enemy dies at your hand. You continue this up until the very moment division one clashes with the kobold host. After that you slow down, and pick your shots. You don't want to accidentally hit a fellow guard after all. \n\n\nYou're so focused on the battle below you that you nearly miss it when the wyverns make their first approach. The beasts, although much larger than the giant lizards, only carry two kobold apiece. The wyverns themselves are a leathery grey color with razor sharp teeth, and hind legs that could tear guards apart. there are only five, but you have trouble thinking about how you and division two are supposed to bring down one of these monstrosities. Let alone five. \n\n\nThe fear in division two is palpable as you and your fellow guardsmen switch your attention from the kobold below to the wyverns above. Almost as if they could sense the fear in your comrades, three of the wyverns barrel past the battle below and head straight towards the portion of the wall your division is centered on. \n\n\nSpecifically, and unluckily so, one of the wyverns seem to be coming straight toward you. You find yourself in the midst of a decision that could cost you your life, and you only have a second to act.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dodge to the side", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou act on impulse and throw yourself to the side as the wyvern makes its pass, but you don't throw yourself nearly far enough away to avoid its claws. While it doesn't manage to grab you and fling you off the wall, its claws do manage to carve your stomach to pieces. If that wasn't enough, the sheer momentum of the beast flying at you at breakneck speed and hitting you is enough to send you flying off the wall. \n\n\nYour body can't even keep itself together as you plummet to your death.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Duck behind the ramparts", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou know you won't have enough time to get entirely out of the range of the wyvern's claws. It's better to duck and hope for the best than to definitely die. \n\n\nYou follow this thought and duck behind the ramparts. The wyvern makes its pass, and perhaps from sheer luck, you pass between its hind legs. Stones from the ramparts on either side of you crumble and fall away, but you remain fairly unscathed. \n\n\nYou thought you were going to die for sure, and, after finding out you managed to scrape by, you stand up in a fit of pure relief. You celebrate too early, however, for a kobold archer from the battle below takes the opportunity and releases an arrow at you. The arrow pierces through your jugular, and you bleed out in mere moments.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go light the signal fire", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nWhen you first transferred here, Byron was telling you about all of the duties that you might have here as a wall guard. One of these duties, should the need arise, was to light the signal fire. Byron didn't expound upon the why, and said only that it was an important duty. You didn't find out until later that this was the signal fire for the Griffin Knights. The Griffin Knights, or at least the patrol of them that stood at the ready in case the walls were attacked. \n\n\nYou assume most guards forget this fact. Otherwise they'd simply be fools. Griffin knights were among the best warriors in all of the Realm of Men, and that was when they weren't atop their chosen steed. With their griffins these knights surpassed all other units in their usefulness in battle. \n\n\nThat was the way to win this battle. Not through grit, and a hell of a lot of grit. No, in order to win, to live to see Liliana again, the Griffin Knights needed to be here. The wyverns would tear apart everyone otherwise. \n\n\nYou run along the ramparts to the signal fire. It's quite the distance from where the battle is taking place, and you start to hear the sound of swords clashing and wyverns roaring as you make your way. Upon arriving, you find straw and oil ready to be used in case of an emergency. You waste no time in starting the fire. Before long you tend the fire to maximum intensity, or at least as intense as you can get it on such short notice. \n\n\nHaving finished your job, you gaze back in the direction of the battle. Five wyverns patrol the skies with each occasionally taking dives at the top of the wall where division two was stationed. You feel a pang of guilt that you should've stayed there to help, but you dismiss it. If the Griffin Knights come to support you in the battle, then your efforts will have been well worth it. \n\n\nThat being said, there isn't much of an excuse for you now. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Return to the battle", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou start a light jog to the wyvern infested ramparts, but you stop before you get there and string your bow. What is the point in throwing yourself into the middle of danger for nothing? Chances are that you would die a gruesome death for no reason other than your eagerness for battle. An inexperienced fool's death. \n\n\nWith your bow stringed and the wyverns attention away from you, you start taking shots at the beasts. You aim your first few shots at the wyverns themselves, but when they bounce harmlessly off of their scaly hides, you shift your focus. There are two kobold atop each of the five wyverns present, and while they are certainly dwarfed by the sheer size of the wyverns they are riding, you don't let that distract you. Each of the kobold atop the wyvern has a critical purpose. The one in the front is to steer and control the mount while the one in the back holds a bow in its hands. It's job is to fire at anyone attempting to kill the former type of kobold. Such as you. \n\n\nThe wyvern you'd been concentrating on turns its attention toward you, as does the kobold archer atop it, but it never gets a chance to loose its arrow at you. Instead your own arrow pierces its chest sending it tumbling from its mount and into the open air. Unfortunately, the other kobold still sits atop the wyvern, and after your display of accuracy, you've become a prime target. That wyvern and its rider come flying toward you, which is bad, but away from the battle, which is good. You take the last opportunity you'll get and loose one more arrow at the other kobold. Your aim is off on this, so your arrow only ends up bouncing off of the wyvern's body. You start to draw another arrow, but as you do, the wyvern takes on a burst of speed and is on you before you know it. Your life flashes before your eyes, and an image of Liliana's beautiful face plants itself at the forefront of your mind. You simply don't have enough time to react to the wyvern's speed, and you just close your eyes in acceptance. \n\n\nThen you feel a large claw grab your waist. Its touch is surprising gentle. Nothing of what you would expect of a wyvern, and you keep waiting for it to hurl you from its grip, but that doesn't happen. Hesitantly, you open your eyes to find yourself suspended in the air, and not in the grasp of a wyvern. Rather, you find yourself in the grip of a griffin. The relief you feel is instantaneous, but that is quickly replaced by terror. You quickly reach your hands and grip onto the cold claws of the griffin. \n\n\nYou take stock of the situation. Including the griffin carrying you, there are at least seven Griffin Knights combating the wyverns in the air. It's an amazing scene, and your breath catches. Griffins are much smaller than the wyverns, but this makes them significantly faster, so the wyverns seeme clumsy by comparison. The griffin knights themselves wear gleaming silver armor and cast a perfect picture of the word 'knight.' On the ground, the fight continues. The kobold outnumber division one, by nearly two to one, and that is discounting the giant lizards they brought with them to the battle. You start wondering why so many kobold came to mount an attack on the wall, but are soon distracted from that with what happens next.\n\n\nYou feel a sudden change in direction as the griffin carrying you heads back to the walls. You realize that it, and the rider, must want to drop you back off at the wall before returning to the melee. You are quite okay with this, but then a scene just below you unfolds in the span of a moment. \n\n\nA wyvern, with just the rider left to guide it, chases a griffin just below you. For that moment it seems the entire world slows down in order for you to see and understand what's happening. The wyvern is gaining, and it opens its mouth in anticipation for the coming chomp on the griffin's lower half. It isn't some beast's wild hope that it'll manage to bite the griffin either. No, you can very clearly see that this wyvern will be able to catch the griffin. Thus leading to both the griffin's and its rider's death. \n\n\nIn this same moment, an utterly absurd idea crosses your mind. The griffin holding you wasn't trying to keep you prisoner. It was merely keeping you from falling, and you think you could pry yourself open from its grip if you really tried. If you did, then you should land just as the wyvern's saddle passes beneath you. Your weight might even be enough to cause the wyvern to lose the edge its gained on the griffin. You left your bow back on the ramparts when the griffin saved you from the wyvern, but you do still have your standard short sword strapped to your waist. If you did go through with such a ridiculous plan, you could maybe even take out the rider and wyvern. \n\n\nMaybe.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow that plan", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nThis won't be the first time you've done something crazy, though it is likely the one with the most at stake. \n\n\nYou pry yourself from the claws of the griffin and fall into the open air. Your plan...", "action_results": [{"action": "Fails!", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYour timing was horribly off. You jump much too early and find yourself face to face with the open mouth of a wyvern. It must think you're the griffin, for as soon as you even near its mouth it snaps its mouth shut on top of you. Your midsection is torn to pieces, and you die instantly. \n\n\nAt least you can die well knowing that you saved that Griffin Knight.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Let yourself be brought back to the ramparts", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nSure you've done crazy things in the past, but this is no time to try and accomplish the utterly insane. Especially when the chances of success are so very low. Better to live and keep your chance of saving Liliana alive rather than to throw it away on the unlikely chance that you'll be able to save some random nobody.\n\n\nDespite this fact, you still wince when you see the wyvern's mouth snap down on the griffins hindquarters. The scene turns into a bloody mess, and you can't help but look away as the griffin (or at least what's left of it) and its rider plummet down to the battle below. \n\n\nYou feel a pang of guilt, but you push it away by telling yourself you couldn't have done anything anyway. Yet, somewhere in the back of your mind, you don't believe this. \n\n\nNot too long after that you are dropped off on the ramparts you were originally guarding. Much is different. Several chunks of the wall are missing, and many soldiers lie dead on the ramparts. The wall you once guarded no longer carries that symbol of boredom and ease in your mind. It is readily replaced with the memory of blood spilt, and comrades dying. \n\n\nOver half of division two is either dead or incapacitated. Division on was doing better, but the griffin that was killed only moments before plummeted right into their line. That turned out to be the turning point in the kobold's favor, and now division one is slowly being pushed back against the wall. The griffins are locked in a very deadly battle with the rest of the wyverns, and don't seem at all in a position to help the human forces on the ground. \n\n\nYou aren't sure what you could do to help in this situation, for it looks like your defeat is inevitable. The griffins won't be able to kill the wyverns fast enough to help division one avoid getting slaughtered, which division one is mere minutes away from. This leaves you with a few honorable choices and one dishonorable choice. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Join division one on the ground", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou're no griffin knight. You can't contend with wyverns on an equal level, and firing a few arrows won't make any difference in the fight on the ground. No, if you're going to win this fight, then you need to go right into the thick of it. If you can manage to help division stay alive for even five minutes longer, then the chances of the griffin knights helping out are significantly higher. \n\n\nYou still have your sword strapped to your waist, and you don't usually carry a shield on you for guard duty, so you pick one up from the dead and strap it to your back. Following this you jog to the closest tower and go down the stairwell. Inside the tower it is eerily quiet compared to the roars and clangs of battle outside, and the sound of your steel boots hitting the stone stairs reverberates throughout. Moments later, you come to the bottom of the stairs. A large iron gate-like door greets you. It is quite the durable piece, and nothing less than a battering ram would be able to break through it. Or perhaps a wyvern flying at breakneck speed... You push that foreboding thought from your head and walk through the iron doors. \n\n\nWhat greets you outside is a scene of bloodshed and death. Division one has been pushed back nearly all the way to the walls, but their line still holds. Currently the division is organized in a semi-circle formation with the flat of the circle pressed against the wall. Everywhere else is a place for fighting, and nearly every soldier fights for their lives. There is one soldier, however, that does not fight, You see him sitting against the wall with the shaft of a crude arrow of kobold make protruding from his stomach. It's Byron, and it looks like he's lost a lot of blood. \n\n\nAlmost instinctively, you approach him. As you near, a spurt of blood comes out of his mouth and splatter against your chest-piece. \"Lieutenant Byron?\" You ask this fairly loudly, but he doesn't respond, so you repeat it. \"Lieutenant Byron?\"\n\n\nThis time he turns his pain and regret filled eyes toward you. He focuses on you and reaches his arm up and grips your forearm in his. A sign of comradery and trust. \"I know not who you are, nor from where you came, but I need you now soldier. We are losing. My men die at every turn, and the kobold do not let up. Even still, there is hope. If we can keep the line, then they,\" he looks up to the sky, \"will save us.\"\n\n\nHe coughs up some more blood, but his grip on your arm stays strong. \"Your name escapes me soldier, and I feel bad for laying this burden upon you, but someone must keep these soldier together. Will you do this for me brother? See to it that some of these men survive this battle.\" \n\n\nWith this last request his grip loosens and falls limp at his side. His breaths cease, and you're left in the presence of a dead man. Numbly, you stand back up and gaze at the fight. You knew you needed to help in this battle in the first place, but speaking with Byron has strengthened your resolve. The only thing left to decide is where you will help.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help the left flank", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou aren't Byron. You won't be able to lead these men better than him, or lead them at all. You're just another soldier, so what does it matter where you go? So you head to the flank closest to you. The left one. \n\n\nThe fighting over here doesn't seem nearly as intense as the fighting near the middle. You pull out your sword and shield, and immediately get to work. Most of the people fighting are beginning to get tired, so the addition of a fresh, well equipped soldier vastly improves the line. So much, in fact, that it seems that the entirety of the left flank almost molds around your fighting. Which strikes you as odd, because of the way you're fighting. You don't rush in and throw yourself at the enemy in a fit of battlefield rage, or anything of that sort. No, you're calm in the heat of battle. You have a focused determination, and because of this you don't make any brash moves. Your goal is to stay alive while keeping everyone else alive as well. Defense is the best offense, and it happens to make the fight last a hell of a lot longer. Maybe this will buy enough time for the griffin knights to take care of the wyverns.\n\n\nWith this thought in mind, you fight. Not for glory, nor for yourself. You fight for Liliana, and the chance to see her alive and well again. \n\n\n\"Retreat!\" The sound of a despairing voice breaks you out of your focus, and a kobold nearly guts you because of it, but you quickly block the flimsy attack and return it with one of your own. It dies before you, and you have a sacred moment of rest before another kobold comes to fill its spot in the line. It gives you time to think about what the guy meant by retreating. Your line was doing so well, and retreating now would be suicide. The kobold would have a field day with chasing down and killing everyone on the ground. It was a cowardly, foolish mistake. Hopefully no one would listen to the fool's order, but, to your chagrin, they do. Soldiers from your left and right start disappearing, and, soon enough, there is no longer even the semblance of a line. You're quickly surrounded by kobold, and while you make a valiant effort to stay alive, it isn't enough.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Help the right flank", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou aren't Byron. You won't be able to lead these men better than him, or lead them at all. You're just another soldier, but you do think it matters where you go. You happen to be right handed, so you'll likely fight better in the right flank. With this hope in mind, you go over to your destination.\n\n\nThe fighting over here doesn't seem nearly as intense as the fighting near the center. You pull out your sword and shield, and immediately get to work. Most of the people fighting are beginning to get tired, so the addition of a fresh, well equipped soldier vastly improves the line. So much, in fact, that it seems that the entirety of the right flank almost molds around your fighting. Which strikes you as odd specifically because of the way you're fighting. You don't rush in and throw yourself at the enemy in a fit of battlefield rage, or anything of that sort. No, you're calm in the heat of battle. You have a focused determination, and because of this you don't make any brash moves. Your goal is to stay alive while keeping everyone else alive as well. Defense is the best offense, and it happens to make the fight last a hell of a lot longer. Maybe this will buy enough time for the griffin knights to take care of the wyverns.\n\n\nWith this thought in mind, you fight. Not for glory, nor for yourself. You fight for Liliana, and the chance to see her alive and well again. \n\n\n\"Retreat!\" The sound of a despairing voice breaks you out of your focus, and a kobold nearly guts you because of it, but you quickly block the flimsy attack and return it with one of your own. It dies before you, and you have a sacred moment of rest before another kobold comes to fill its spot in the line. It gives you time to think about what the guy meant by retreating. Your line was doing so well, and retreating now would be suicide. The kobold would have a field day with chasing down and killing everyone on the ground. It was a cowardly, foolish mistake.\n\n\nHopefully no one would listen to the fool's order, but, to your chagrin, they do. Soldiers from your left and right start disappearing, and, soon enough, there is no longer even the semblance of a line. You're quickly surrounded by kobold, and while you make a valiant effort to stay alive, it isn't enough.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Stay here and support division one with arrows", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nThe Griffin knights are living legends. They don't need your 'support,' and they definitely don't need you shooting stray arrows and accidentally hitting one of them. Division one, however, does need your help, but leaving the wall at this point would be foolish. You'd likely be an easy target for a kobold archer in the back. Instead you decide that your best option is to stay on the ramparts and pick your shots. \n\n\nThus, you act. You find a bow lying beside a dead body, along with a few arrows, and immediately set to work. You focus on the easy targets, the ones away from the forefront of the battle. Those, and the kobold archers. You loose arrow after arrow into the enemy force, and bring many a kobold down, but it simply isn't enough. Your contribution isn't enough to turn the tide of battle at all, but, unfortunately for you, it is enough to garner the attention of the kobold archers. You manage to keep from being hit for quite a while, but eventually a kobold gets a lucky shot and you fall dead onto the ramparts with an arrow lodged in your throat.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stay here and support the griffin knights with arrows", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou aren't going to flatter yourself. You firing a few arrows into the kobold horde below won't change anything, except perhaps where you die. Fighting on the forefront of the battle won't change anything either, and will almost definitely lead to your gruesome death. No, you aren't that powerful of an individual. \n\n\nThere is only one thing left. If you can manage to hit even just one of your shots on one of the kobold riders, then you could very well change the course of this battle. Killing a few kobold on the ground won't make that much of a difference, but if you can manage to help take down the wyverns, then the griffin knights will be free to help division one on the ground. At this point, victory relies on those knights. You only hope that you can help expedite that process.\n\n\nYou find a bow lying among the dead on the ramparts, along with a few arrows. The only thing left to decide is what you will aim at. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Aim at the kobold riders", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nWyverns are beasts of terrible power, and their hides, while not as thick as dragon hide, will easily block your arrows. Better to aim at the riders, and have the wyverns panic with their riders dead. This would make the wyverns much easier to kill.\n\n\nIn theory.\n\n\nThe situation casts you into a state of wonderment. You never would have though that you'd be in a battle this large, let alone one with aerial combat, and you don't want it all to end here. You take your first arrow, notch it, and pull it back. You wouldn't get many decent shots here, and when the opportunity arises, you don't want to miss it, so you wait. The kobold riders ride low in their saddles, for some among their numbers (including the one you killed) have felt the sting of mankind's arrows. This makes finding a decent shot all the more difficult, but you're patient. After all, you only need one good shot to turn the tide in this battle.\n\n\nYou're left waiting for nearly a full minute before such an opportunity arises, and what the opportunity it is. One of the griffin riders, having been separated from the rest, rides past the wall only several feet away from you. A wyvern and its pair of riders give chase, and their passing by the wall gives you the perfect chance. You take aim at the kobold rider steering the beast, and release. \n\n\nThe Muses must have seen it fit to bless you this day, for your arrow strikes true. it hits the kobold rider and it goes flying from the saddle. You're about to leap with joy when an arrow pierces you through the chest, and you immediately fall to the ramparts wounded. It isn't a shot that kills you immediately, but blood is pouring out of your chest at an alarming rate, so you know you're about to die. \n\n\nYou only wish you could've seen Liliana one last time.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Aim at the wyverns", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nWyverns are beasts bred for killing and war. You don't think they'll simply abandon this instinct just because their riders die. No, if you're going to attempt to help the griffin knights, then the best way to do so is to take out a wyvern. Even if you only manage to take out one of them, it would help a significant amount. \n\n\nYou cast your thoughts back to your youth. Your mother would tell you stories of the beasts in the Lost Realm, and of the heroes whom bested those beasts. You're sure you remember something about a wyvern being vulnerable in its underbelly? Or maybe it was its wings? You can't remember for sure, but you don't have any other ideas. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Aim for the stomach", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\n Maybe you're certain that wyverns are weak in the stomach, or maybe it's just a wild guess. Whatever the reason, you decide to try hitting the wyverns' stomach. \n\n\nSweat forms on your brow as you notch an arrow and take aim. You raise your bow at the wyvern closest to you, whom is being chased by a pair of griffin knights, and loose your arrow. Your aim is true, but the arrow merely glances off the strong hide. Apparently your hunch was wrong. The stomach is not a weak point for a wyvern. This fact, however, doesn't keep you from trying.\n\n\nYou enter a state of pure focus. Arrow after arrow is loosed from your bow, and when you run out of arrows you search for more. You will kill one of these blasted beasts even if it takes every arrow in this realm, this wyvern will fall. Fortunately for you, you don't have to wait too long before one of your arrows finds a weak point in the wyverns scales. The wyvern roars in pain, and for a moment you think you've succeeded, but the wyvern keeps flying. \n\n\nThere is one thing that changes, however, and that is that the wyvern now targets you. Apparently it didn't appreciate your lucky shot. The griffin knights are not quick enough to save you this time, and you end up learning how sharp a wyvern's teeth are firsthand.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Aim for the wings", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou can't remember for certain if their wings are vulnerable, but you doubt the stomach is, as you can think of no viable reason for it to be. The wings, on the other hand, if damaged enough can cause a wyvern to lose its flight abilities. \n\n\nSweat forms on your brow as you notch an arrow and take aim. You raise your bow at the wyvern closest to you, whom is being chased by a pair of griffin knights, and loose your arrow. Your aim is true, but the arrow is merely gusted away by the draft the flapping its wings create. Apparently your hunch was wrong. The wings are not a weak point for a wyvern. This fact, however, doesn't keep you from trying.\n\n\nYou enter a state of pure focus. Arrow after arrow is loosed from your bow, and when you run out of arrows you search for more. You will kill one of these blasted beasts even if it takes every arrow in this realm, this wyvern will fall. Fortunately for you, you don't have to wait too long before you time your arrow just right. You let your arrow go just before the wyvern flaps his wings, and it sails true piercing the softer scales of the wing. The wyvern roars in pain, and for a moment you think you've succeeded, but you only hit one arrow, and that wyvern's wings are quite large.\n\n\nThere is one thing that changes, however, and that is that the wyvern now targets you. Apparently it didn't appreciate your lucky shot. The griffin knights are not quick enough to save you this time, and you end up learning how sharp a wyvern's teeth are firsthand.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Abandon them", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nThere isn't anything left for you here but death. And you cannot die. Your goal is to save your beloved. Liliana. You don't have time to be caught up in border battles where death is a likely possibility. Your life is not your own anymore, for if you die, then Liliana will as well. \n\n\nWith most of division two destroyed and with what's left of division one, there is no one to see you leave. You jog along the ramparts, and away from the battle. You pass the signal fire you lit and head to the next watchtower over. They keep food and water storage in the towers, and if you were to have any hope of deserting and living then you would need supplies. You move quickly, and gather food, water, flint and steel, extra arrows, a shield and everything else you could possibly need. After gathering it all, you head to the very bottom of the stairwell and tower. A large iron gate-like door greets you. It is quite the durable piece, and nothing less than a battering ram would be able to break through it. Or perhaps a wyvern flying at breakneck speed... You push that foreboding thought from your head and walk through the iron doors. \n\n\nA slight breeze pushes against your face. You're far enough from the battle that you can only barely hear the roar of the wyverns fighting. you take a breath and look at your next destination. The green of the forest is all that will greet your eyes for an indeterminate amount of time in the future. This is the only way to go. The penalty for desertion is death, so there is no way you are going to stay here. Your only option is to move forward in your search for Liliana. \n\n\nYou take a deep breath, ready yourself mentally, then enter into the Lost Realm. You don't get very far in there, however, before you run into kobold reinforcements. They number over ten, and you are no god though you do manage to take a few out before succumbing to multiple stab wounds.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Abandon the fight", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nYou didn't come here for a fight. This was supposed to be the easiest place to guard in all the realm. No wyverns or kobold were supposed to come here, and certainly not in the numbers that actually threaten your wall occupation. Your goal is to save your beloved. Liliana. You don't have time to be caught up in border battles where you might die. Your life is not your own anymore, for if you die, then Liliana will as well. \n\n\nYou pretend to be lighting the signal fire, but when you are out of sight of the other soldiers you find one of the many towers and make your way down it. They keep food and water storage in the towers, and if you were to have any hope of deserting and living then you would need supplies. You move quickly, and gather anything that you might need: Food, water, flint and steel, extra arrows, a shield. Everything you could possibly need. After gathering it all, you head to the very bottom of the stairwell and tower. A large iron gate-like door greets you. It is quite the durable piece, and nothing less than a battering ram would be able to break through it. Or perhaps a wyvern flying at breakneck speed... You push that foreboding thought from your head and walk through the iron doors. \n\n\nA slight breeze pushes against your face. You're far enough from the battle that you can only barely hear the roar of the wyverns fighting. you take a breath and look at your next destination. The green of the forest is all that will greet your eyes for an indeterminate amount of time in the future. This was the only way to go. The penalty for desertion is death, so there was no way you were going to stay there. Your only option was to move forward in your search for Liliana. \n\n\nYou take a deep breath, ready yourself mentally, then enter into the Lost Realm. You don't get very far in there, however, before you run into kobold reinforcements. They number over ten, and you are no god though you do manage to take a few out before succumbing to multiple stab wounds.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Use his strength against him", "result": "Year 368 of the Second Era\n\n\nDespite what others think of him, Daniel is weak. And you're going to prove just that.\n\n\nHis punch comes directly at your right cheek. It has a hell of a lot of power. Certainly more than you anticipated, but you don't allow yourself to hesitate. He might be powerful, but he was predictable. You dodge his punch by stepping in towards him, and then follow up his punch with one of your own. It hits right below his sternum, and he starts to keel over. You act on instinct now. You grip the top of his head and bring your knee up into his face, and there's a distinct crunch noise. You then push him slightly away from you. \n\n\n He stumbles backward, and you take a step forward and shove him to the ground once more. There's no time for him to react as you pounce on top of him and lay punch after punch into his face. His 'friends' don't rise to stop you, and the courtyard is silent save for the sound of your fist pounding his face. \n\n\nAfter several more punches you feel a hand on your shoulder. You nearly jerk away from it, but, despite your frenzied mind, you are able to recognize that it is a distinctly feminine hand. Liliana, you think and stop punching. Daniel doesn't stop his groaning as you rise to your feet to face her. \n\n\nThere's less baby fat on her face now than when you first saw her, and is beginning to be quite the knockout. Her eyes are still slightly red and the right side of her face is still red, but she isn't crying any more. \n\n\n\"Enough,\" she whispers to you. \n\n\nYou only nod in response. You start to walk away from the scene when you realize that you'd gathered quite the crowd. You think about saying something, but instead you reach for Liliana's hand and glare at everyone in the crowd. Your look says it all.\n\n\nYou leave with Liliana in tow.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Push the memory back", "result": "Year 378 of the Second Era\n\n\nThis isn't the time for idle thoughts. No, you need to focus on the situation at hand. \n\n\nThe memory fades away, and Byron's voice returns. \"This is why we guard this wall! No wyverns, kobold, or other filth will cross this wall! Gather your weap-\" Byron is interrupted by another voice. \n\n\n\"Help! There are kobold chasing us on the ground. The rest of my party is coming with the kobold hot on their tail.\" The voice comes from all the way at the bottom of the wall. You can barely make out what he's saying, but someone does and repeats it to Byron, who then continues speaking.\n\n\n\"I need one person to light the signal light over by the watchtower. Everyone in division two stay here and support us with arrows. Everyone in division one follow me!\" \n\n\nByron leads the way as he and division one head down to the ground to support the rest of the group. Everyone else stays and prepares their bows. \n\n\nYou were assigned to division two upon your transfer here, and so your orders are abundantly clear. ", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "...intelligent...", "result": "Year 366 of the Second Era\n\n\n...intelligent of people, but you were outgoing enough to provide a suitable person for her to talk to.\n\n\nYou follow the sound of sobbing through the worn wooden hallways of the school, and outside, until you find the source of the crying. Liliana sits on the steps to the main door of the school. Her well crafted dress is ruffled in places and her body constantly shifts under the pressure of her tears. Her hair comes down in waves around her head, effectively cutting off any view of her face. \n\n\nShe doesn't notice you there at first, but when the main door closes behind you she jumps and turns towards you. Tears and snot cover her face with her eyes both sad and angry at the same time, and for a moment you find yourself regretting coming here. That moment passes, and the impulse you followed earlier propels you toward her. \n\n\n\"Are you going to laugh at me again?\"\n\n\nHer voice reflects what she is feeling. Sadness, despair, anger, and, you think, a bit of hope color her voice. You decide to concentrate on her hopefulness. \n\n\n\"I didn't laugh.\" \n\n\n\"Everyone laughed. I saw.\" \n\n\nClearly she hadn't been paying attention to you when in the classroom. \"Not me.\" \n\n\nYou sit down on the same step as her, and she glares at you. Silence ensues, and you turn away and gaze out in front of you. You want to ask her about the Realm of the Lost, but the question dies in your throat. Wouldn't it be at least a little insensitive to ask her prying questions now? \n\n\nYour question is answered when you hear her start to sob again. This time it's less intense, but it's still crying all the same. Maybe it's the memory of her excited face when she was in front of the classroom, or maybe you just didn't like the sound of crying. Whatever the reason, you decide to wrap your arm around her shoulders in a half hug. Liliana turns to stone beneath your touch, and you think she'll pull away, but she doesn't. She stays still, but continues her crying. You feel absurdly awkward in this position, but she doesn't seem to mind. She even leans into your hug after a while.\n\n\nIn between holding her and listening to her crying, you find yourself staring at her wondering how in all the realms this girl was from the Lost Realm. You might be tainted by the knowledge of fairytales, but you were still aware that the Lost Realm was crawling with kobold and others of that ilk,. It was a very dangerous place. At the end of the first era was when the Lost Realm was supposedly at the height of its power, but that ended when a dragon led a massive host of kobold and wyverns and sacked the entirety of the realm. Well, that's how the stories went. So how then, could a delicate being such as this come from such a dangerous place?\n\n\nThen a brilliant idea came over you. There was a story your mother once told you. One about the faerie, a race of beings native to the Lost Realm. When they were in the Lost Realm they were humanoid creatures of a similar height humans, but with pointed ears and a slender build. In the story, a faerie wandered over the border of the Realm of Men and the Realm of the Lost, (Before the border walls were constructed) but the faerie were tied to their own realm. Whenever they left, they became as humans. This particular faerie panicked when they realized they left their home for another realm, and immediately tried to go back, but every time he tried to re-enter his homeland, he would get lost, turned around. He could never find his way back. Once the faerie willingly left the Realm of the Lost, they weren't allowed back. He was left in the Realm of Men to fend for himself, but he desired that no their faerie would feel like he did. Alone, confused and afraid. So the faerie came up with a code. If he thought there was another faerie, he would ask them a simple question. \n\n\nYou ask that question now. \"Are you lost?\"\n\n\nLiliana immediately pulls from you and stares at you in disbelief. She suddenly wipes all of the tears from her face with her sleeve before asking you a question. \"Will you help me fit in here?\" \n\n\nKinda shocked that your plan worked you only nod in response. \n\n\nA hint of a smile breaches her face. \"What's your name?\" \n\n\nYou briefly wonder what you've gotten yourself into, but you answer regardless. \"My name is...\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story23.json b/data/scraper/stories/story23.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e8df635 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story23.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=11413", "context": "", "first_story_block": "When you first laid eyes on her she was unconscious. And underwater. But, she was still an amazing sight.\n\nYou had been snorkeling off the coast of your seclude island you live on, in taking the beauty of the multi colored fish and billowing sea plants. You see fish wandering over to a part of the ocean you hadn\u2019t snorkeled near before. Curious, you followed them and were shocked to find a girl lying unconscious on the ocean floor. You immediately plunge down and grab the girl, pulling her to the shore.\n\nYou didn\u2019t know much about CPR, with living alone on an island and all, but luckily you didn\u2019t need to. As soon as she reached the surface she started breathing. You carry her from the soft sand to your hut made out of sticks and palm leaves and you laid her on your couch. Years before you lived on the island you had packed up everything you owned in your house that didn\u2019t need electricity and basically moved to the seclude island. You were fed up with all the noise of the city and you decided you wanted to become a hermit\u2014with the basic comforts of modern day like a bed, couch, and other furniture.\n\nAs she lay on your couch, you were able to get a good look at her. Her brown hair was like a waterfall on her shoulders and she wore a silk blue satin dress that flowed on her legs like a mermaid tail. She obviously wasn\u2019t dressed for swimming. You thought that maybe she just fell overboard from a boat and the crash knocked her out. Though why she was so close to shore, you didn\u2019t know.\n\nHours later, she comes to. She opens her marble blue eyes and looks around, looking quite scared. She spots you and her eyes widen and she tenses up. You have to calm her down.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Soothe like a mother", "result": "\u201cIt\u2019s okay, it\u2019s okay,\u201d you soothe, putting a hand on her shoulder. She flinches and drew back, looking more frightened. \u201cReally, you don\u2019t have to be afraid. You\u2019re safe now.\u201d She obviously has no idea what you are talking about. \u201cYou were underwater, and I pulled you up. Really, I\u2019m a good person.\u201d You scoot a little closer and she stands up abruptly and slips. You reach out to grab her as she falls and you catch her hand just before she hits the ground. You pull her up and she falls into your arms. She looks into your eyes and blushes, pushing you away. She crosses the room and sits down into a single wooden chair and looks away. She refuses to even look at you for days. She doesn\u2019t talk either.", "action_results": [{"action": "Her smile", "result": "A few days after the rescue, you are getting fed up with the girl. She looks around your age, twenty or so, and is stunning. But she won't smile.\n\nShe won't talk, will barely look at you, and she won't show any emotion to you. Every morning is the same routine--wake her up, eat a small breakfast, and try to get her to do something. Unfortunately, she never does anything but gaze out the window and watches the waves of the ocean.\n\nFinally the day comes when you are determined to make her smile. You sit down next to her at the window and she glances at you.\n\n\"Hi,\" you greet softly. She keeps her gaze locked on the ocean. \"Um . . .\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell a cheesy joke", "result": "\"Why did the chicken cross the road?\" She looks at you and raises her eyebrow. \"To show the possum it could be done.\" Her lips curled up a bit into a smile. You grin and say, \"You wanna hear another joke?\" She nods.", "action_results": [{"action": "Musical joke", "result": "\"Why did Mozart sell his chickens?\" she looks at you, confused. \"Because they kept going 'Bach, Bach, Bach'.\" She snorts a laugh and shakes her head slightly, looking into your eyes. She smiles warmly puts a light hand on your shoulder. She looks deep into your eyes and you look into hers, entranced by the blue and green swirling around her pupils. After a moment she looks away and pulls her hand away, then went back to staring out the window.", "action_results": [{"action": "Thoughtful Times", "result": "After a month, better things started to happen between you two . . .", "action_results": [{"action": "Speech", "result": "The mysterious girl one day takes notice of your painting. Years ago a paint set washed up on shore along with a drenched canvas. You spent days trying to dry it well enough to use and slowly, but surely, it did and you spent even more days painting a beautiful masterpiece of the ocean shore that can be seen during the sunset with a couple of mermaids and wildlife swimming in the ocean.\n\nThe girl starts staring at the painting rather than through the window, day after day. You find yourself starting to watch her everyday as well, studying her features, adoring her body, and wondering so hard what her voice sounds like. You imagine every tone you can that could fit the beautiful body of the girl, but you can't decide which would fit her best.\n\nI don't even know her name, you realize. I have to get her to talk. But how . . .?", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask her name", "result": "\"What's your name?\" you ask as you come up behind her. She flinches and snaps her head toward you. Her eyes twinkle in fright and she shakes her head. \"Why not?\"\n\n\"I-I'm not ready,\" she stutters quietly, not looking away from you.\n\n\"You talked,\" you whisper, leaning lightly against the wall. \"If you can talk at all, I think you're ready to tell me your name.\"\n\nShe looks down at the floor. \"Marina.\"\n\n\"Marina?\" You almost laugh. \"I've never heard of any name like that.\"\n\n\"My parents were from Spain, so they wanted to give me a Spanish name. They named me after part of the word 'seasalt' in Spanish. Sal marina is seasalt in Spanish. Sal wasn't a very suitable name, so they went with Marina.\"\n\n\"Well, it's very beautiful, once you get used to it.\" You pat her on the head like she's a child and she laughs, swatting your hand away. \"I'll leave you to your painting gazing.\" She stares at the painting for three more days.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Talk about the painting", "result": "\"You like the painting, I'm guessing?\" you ask as you come up behind her. She nods without looking away. \"I painted it myself, you know.\" She glances at you skeptically. \"No, really. It took me days to get everything just right. The sunset, the water, the mermaids . . .\" You smile at her. \"What do you think . . . err, what should I call you, anyway?\"\n\nThe girl smiles. \"It's a great picture,\" she whispers, barely audible. \"And you can call me Marina.\"\n\n\"Marina?\" You almost laugh. \"I've never heard of any name like that.\"\n\n\"My parents were from Spain, so they wanted to give me a Spanish name. They named me after part of the word 'seasalt' in Spanish. Sal marina is seasalt in Spanish. Sal wasn't a very suitable name, so they went with Marina.\"\n\n\"Well, it's very beautiful, once you get used to it.\" You pat her on the head like she's a child and she laughs, swatting your hand away. \"I'll leave you to your painting gazing.\" But she no longer looks at the painting. She looks at you.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Ocean", "result": "\"Do you want to go down to the ocean? You've sure seen it enough from the window,\" you offered, appearing from your bedroom with your swim trunks on and an old T-shirt you wore in the water. She looks up at you from the window and looks at her own attire. She hasn't changed her clothes at all since you rescued her. Even she can tell that her clothes are starting to stink, and swimming in the ocean won't help the smell. You hold up a long dress that once floated on shore. It seems to be much like one a woman would wear to the pool side or beach. Swimming in it shouldn't be a problem.\n\nWithin minutes she's changed into the dress and the two of you are walking down the sandy path to the main beach. The sun is beating down on the two of you and she is practically skipping towards the ocean. You smile to yourself as she almost laughs in joy at the fresh air after being stuck in your hut for over a month.\n\nAs soon as she reaches the beach, she sprints toward the cool waters of the ocean. She shrieks a little as the cold seawater splashes her, but giggles at the tickle of seaweed under her toes. You sit down on the sand and watch her as she wades around in the water. She occasionally will go underwater and a couple seconds later appear several yards away from where she was originally.\n\nYou are a tad worried about her, considering she was unconscious in the water when you found her. Whenever she goes under you search around for where she is to make sure she comes up. You relax more when she does.\n\nAt one point she looks over to you and waves you over.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go in with her", "result": "You spring up and run into the water. Her face lights up and she greets you with a hug. She quickly pulls away, blushing. She takes your hand and leads you further out. The ground drops beneath you and you have to kick your feet to keep afloat. She smiles and turns violently, making you spin with her. You yelp at the sudden jerk, but laugh when she keeps spinning you in circles.\n\n\"You're very fun,\" you giggle when she stops spinning you. She smiles wide and goes under, pulling your legs down a second later. You call out when you go tumbling into the cold water and when you come up you're laughing and sputtering at the same time. \"Fun, fun, fun.\" She snickers and swims away, making great progress. You try to go after her, but she's too fast. \"I will catch up with you!\" you vow. She just laughs louder.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay on the beach", "result": "You shake your head at her and her face drops a little, but she smiles again sadly and wades some more in the water. At one point she screams and falls into the water. You jump up and search for her to come back up, but after ten seconds she doesn't, which takes longer than she did before. You run into the water and to where she was moments ago. You look around, not finding any sign of her.\n\nSPLASH!\n\nYou get pulled underwater and you come back up, sputtering and wiping saltwater out of your eyes. When you are finally able to see, you find her right in front of you, covering her mouth to keep from breaking out in laughter.\n\n\"What the heck . . .?\" you trail off. You open your mouth wide and stare at her in disbelief. \"You little trickster! You didn't really fall!\" She shakes her head and chuckles escape her lips. \"You scared me half to death!\" She laughs out loud and dives back into the water, appearing yards away in seconds.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Love joke", "result": "\"A woman's husband had been slipping in and out of a coma for several months, yet she stayed by his bedside every single day. When he came to, he motioned for her to come nearer.\n\n\"As she sat by him, he said, 'You know what? You have been with me all through the bad times. When I got fired, you were there to support me. When my business failed, you were there. When I got shot, you were by my side. When we lost the house, you gave me support. When my health started failing, you were still by my side... You know what?'\n\n\"'What dear?' she asked gently.\n\n\"'I think you bring me bad luck.'\"\n\nShe laughs before she can stop herself and she covers her mouth. You grin wildly and chuckle a little yourself. You carefully take her hand and she doesn't recoil, but looks into your eyes. You look back and see the blue and slight green roll around in her iris, surrounding her pupils. \"You have wonderful eyes,\" you whisper. She rolls her eyes, but gives you another peek and smile before she loses emotion and turns away to the window. Her hand goes limp and it feels like you're holding a rock. You sigh and drop her hand.\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Tell a musical joke", "result": "\"Why did Mozart sell his chickens?\" she gives you a confused glance. \"Because they kept going 'Bach, Bach, Bach'.\" Her lip twitched into a quick half smile. You grin and say, \"Do you want to hear another joke?\" She raises her eyebrow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Cheesy joke", "result": "\"Why did the chicken cross the road?\" She looks at you and raises her eyebrow. \"To show the possum it could be done.\" Her lips curled up a bit into a smile and she snickers lightly. She glances at you again and turns back to the window.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Soothe like a friend", "result": "\u201cHey, it\u2019s all right,\u201d you say. You sit down on the ground in front of the couch and she eyes you suspiciously. You tilt your head and look at her curiously. She didn\u2019t know what happened, you know for sure. \u201cYou were underwater out by the shore. I pulled you up. Do you know what happened?\u201d She shakes her head cautiously. \u201cOkay. It\u2019s all right, though. You\u2019re safe now. Don\u2019t worry.\u201d Her eyes flicker, but she trusts you enough to let you make her food and give her a place to sleep for a few nights without fuss. But she still doesn\u2019t speak.", "action_results": [null]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story24.json b/data/scraper/stories/story24.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..de199df --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story24.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=470", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Welcome to Magus: Betrayal!\n\n\nYou are known as Uriel, master elementalist and accomplished magician of the Acadamy of Alzur.\nThe Spark, the talent to manipulate the essence of the elements in everything, has enabled you to live a youth far away from the spears of the soldiers, or the toils of the peasants.\nA findling you are, born to unknown parents and found on the steps of the Academy, but this is not a fate unusual, for the times are harsh for those without the privilige of noble heritage, and few can spare the resources to feed yet another crying mouth.\nIf the Magi of the Academy had not found the Spark in you, they would have turned you over to one of the servants to grow up as one of them, a practice that comes closest to local charity, and ensures that the servants are loyal to the Academy.\nBut this fate was spared to you.\nFrom earliest childhood you learned the arts of the scribe, the arts of the rune and the arts of the Elements.\nYour life has been one of scholarship, and learning, and even though your thoughts sometimes turned towards the parents you never had, you soon accepted that the Academy was your family, never knowing anything different.\n\nHowever, a restlessness in your soul worried your teachers. You were sharper than most of your classmates, and thus began to find the lectures boring, often huddling alone in your study with an ancient tome borrowed from the library with the librarian's grudging permission, learning on your own faster than your teachers could hope to achieve.\n\nFinally, the master magicians admitted defeat. They no longer could teach you anything, and thus it came as a relief to them, that you were chosen, with two other magicians, to fortify the guard of an Alzuran emissary on the dangerous, bandit-infested road to Khofte, a coastal city in the far south.\n\nThe council of magicians apparently thought that a bit of adventure would help to dull your restlessness and sharpen your practical skills.\n\n\nTo begin with, you must choose to specialize in one of the five elements: Fire, Air, Water, Ice and Earth.\nYou may still manipulate the other four, but you can only hope to access the powerful effects with the element of your specialization.\nFurthermore, specializing in one element also slightly affects your character. Ice elementalists are known for the cool and logical mind, while Earth magicians tend to be protective of their charges.\n\nChoose your Specialization.", "action_results": [{"action": "I choose to specialize in Fire, the element of Passion, Heat and Destruction.", "result": "You quickly, and with passion, learned everything you can from your chosen element, regarding little else.\n\nYou especially have disregarded the lessons of Water and of Ice, having nothing but contempt for those who have to think through every situation when, obviously, there is need for speed.\n\nYou possess a greater physical prowess than most of your classmates, and since your inborn arrogance left your without many friends but quite some enemies, you had to use your quickness and strength to avoid being the target of constant ridicule - noone dared to ridicule you after a while.\nInstead, you became something of a loner. You simply know you are a better magician than the others, and you are willing to prove it.\n\nThe specialization of Fire enables you to aquire a deadly arsenal of combat spells, far superior to that of other magicians. You are also able to command the element of elements, the Flames themselves, to do your bidding. Also, you are somewhat resistant to their heat.\n\n\nMake a note somewhere that you have specialized in Fire.", "action_results": [{"action": "I am ready to begin my journey!", "result": "It is early summer in the world of Thyr, and the smell of spring has not yet left the air.\n\nThe emmissary's trek consists of two coaches, one for the magicians, of which there are two more on board, and one for the emissary and his bodyguard himself. Furthermore, there are two dozens warriors on horse accompanying the trek, some of which are scouting ahead.\n\nIt has been two days since you left the Academy of Alzur, and by now you have left the city's military influence, as can be witnessed by the steady growing worse of the road.\n\nYou know close to nothing about Fahan Brownhand's - the emissary of Alzur - orders, or about the man himself, save that he is known to be a devious mind and a quick judge of character, abilities well received within a politician.\n\nAlso you know that your trek is carrying valuable gifts in jewels and gold for Khalar, the citystate you are destined to reach within the week.\n\nYour two magician-companions are no strangers to you. Opposite of you is sitting J'Arel Whitefang, a young man emitting an aura of arrogance that is barely to bear in the confines of the coach. He is, as you know, a capable Fire elementalist.\n\nCurrently on top of the coach, unable to bear the presence of J'Arel any longer, is Lucius Tarchild, an Air mage of some renown. Unfortunately, Lucius is somewhat senior to you, and thus he has the right of first choice, as he explained to you with a wink.\nAlready weary by the long trip so far, you did not argue.", "action_results": [{"action": "I wish to pass the time and speak with J'Arel.", "result": "J'Arel looks up from some thought in surprise, as you cough to catch his attention. His cruel eyes narrow themselves, and he pierces you with his look.\n\n\"What is it that you want?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Do you know anything about the road ahead?\"", "result": "His eyes narrow even further as you ask him about the road ahead. Then he snorts, and shakes his head, while saying:\n\n\"Only as much as you, I suppose. The road will be getting a lot worse the next days, and when we reach the outskirts of Thalun Forest in two days, who knows what will await us in these ancient, dark and magical woods...\" His voice is getting dark and foreboding, and then he suddenly breaks into laughter.\n\n\"Peasants' superstition. Likely some bandits roam the Woods, and that's the reason why lone travellers sometimes are never seen again.\"\n\nHe grins, and forms a magical gesture with his left palm, upon which a blueish flame appears there, a ball of pure energy powerful enough to burn through a tree when hurled with enough force.\n\n\"However, we are no lone travellers\", he adds, his malicious grin broadening. Then, he claps his hands together, and the flame vanishes.\n\n\"I doubt that some ragged band of bandits is going to choose us as our target anyway,\" he says, sounding disappointed. \"Those soldiers look like excellent fighters, and I am certain the bandits will see this as well.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "Suddenly, the coach shudders to a halt. Voices call out, but your first reaction of worrying is soothed as you recognize them as your scouts' voices.\n\nThe captain of the scouts, a burly man in leather armor, approaches the second coach, which is occupied by Master Brownhand, the emissary of Alzura. The captain dismounts his gelding, and appears to speak agitatedly with someone inside the coach - which is all you can make out. Unfortunately, they are too far away to understand a word.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will do nothing but wait.", "result": "The captain of the scouts is arguing agitated with someone inside the other coach, but you cannot make out the words, nor interpret the gestures. Probably nothing important.\n\nYou lean back against the hard wooden seat of the coach, wishing for something to break the monotony of the trip. Already you wonder when you will arrive at your destination. Or at least return to the comfort of the Academy.\n\nSuddenly the door is opened by Lucius, who had been riding the top of the coach.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "Lucius is a tall, slender man. There is always the sly grin on his face, and his hair looks like he has been in a tornado.\n\nRight now, looking at J'Arel and you, his grin nearly splits his face, causing J'Arel to scowl back.\n\n\"Well, look who's here. Not suffocated yet, I hope\", Lucius grins. J'Arel only snorts with disdain, throwing you a meaningful look as if the journey would have been quite pleasant without your companionship inside the coach.\n\nBefore you can think of how to answer that challenge, Lucius continues as if not noticing the tension between the two of you: \"Looks like we got ourselves some trouble coming. The captain of the scouts just raced his horse nearly to death coming here, then barely pauses to take a breath before arguing with old Farhan. Seems like they want us to make camp here, instead of driving on, but Farhan doesn't sound too happy about that.\"\n\nLucius gives the countryside an appraising glance.\n\n\"Can't say I blame them. It's a good position here, with the hills in front and the plains at the back. At least if anyone's sneaking up on us, they're doing so from only one direction.\"\n\nJ'Arel interrupts: \"Phah, let them come, so we can finally have some use. I don't see why...\"\n\nLucius holds up a hand to silence J'Arel, cocking his head to one side and closing his eyes, as if listening intently.\n\nAs you strain to hear anything untowards yourself, you notice it... the silence is unnatural. Where the journey was accompanied by the rustling of leaves and grass, the chirping and buzzing of insects and the caws of birds, there is now silence... even the horses of the guards seem to hold their breath.\n\nThen suddenly the first volley of arrows hit the group. Lucius curses and hurls himself into the relative but crowded safety of the coach, but a few of the guards do not have as much luck.\nThe air is filled with the rearing of horses and the screams of the wounded. The captain of the scouts turns to face the enemy, but gives only a gurgle, as you can see the black arrow protruding from his neck.\n\nBlood runs out of his mouth, and for a horrifying second, he seems to stare at you with the paincrazed eyes of the already dead, before falling from his horse only to be gored by the panicking beast.\n\nWhen you catch yourself again, you see that J'Arel and Lucius are already preparing spells, even if they cannot yet see who is attacking you.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will wait until it becomes clear who is attacking us and wherefrom.", "result": "You decide to stay in the relative safety of the coach.\n\nJ'Arel, suddenly engulfed in an aura of sizzling flames, jumps out of the coach and hurls a ball of fire in the general direction of the assault.\n\nLucius leaves the coach on through the other door, and immediatley the carriage is rocked by gusts of wind, which also cause the arrows to stray.\n\nOne arrow, however, flies straight at J'Arel's head - but it bursts into flame upon touching his aura.\n\nSomeone bellows a command over the screams of the guards, and those that survived the initial deadly onslaught charge off into the direction where the volleys came from.\n\nYou are considering your options, when suddenly a lightning strike that turns you blind and deaf turns J'Arel into a cinder, but not before you hear his piercing death scream and see, in minuite detail how the fire mage's skin peels off under the tremendous energy of the lightning.\n\nShocked, you decide to join the combat as quickly as possible, before the next strike perhaps hits the coach.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "Desperately, you attempt to get your bearing.\n\nFrom the twoscore warriors that accompanied the emissary's treck, only one dozen survived the initial deadly volley of black arrows.\nHowever, the guards are rallied and charge the enemy, apparently a group of about half a hundredship ragged looking beings you immediatley recognize as large goblins, led by a couple of their shamans. While a single goblin is no match for a human warrior, the shamans double the goblins' threat, and they make up in numbers what they lack in size.\n\nLucius is using his powers over the wind to make arrows useless, and most goblins have thrown their bows away and now wield evil looking barbed knives.\n\nOne guard, trying to charge through the goblins to strike down a shaman, is dragged from his horse, and both the guard and the poor beast soon disappear und the goblin's small twisted bodies.", "action_results": [{"action": "I am an adept of Fire.", "result": "The flame of the Spark is strong within you today, and your fingers itch with the desire to channel your magic.\n\nThis is it... this is how it feels to have an adventure! If not for the seriousness of the situation, you would laugh with delight.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will use my powers over Fire to rain destruction down the goblins!", "result": "You climb up the coach to get a better overview of the battle, trusting Lucius to do what he's best at, and turn away any stray arrows from you.\n\nYou close your eyes, drawing deep from the burning energies within you provided by the Spark.\nWhen you open them again, they seem to be ablaze.\n\nIn your hands, a powerful ball of flame forms, and you hurl it directly where the goblins' throng is thickest, where it explodes with a deafening noise.\n\nAbout twenty goblins remain on the ground, charred.\n\nAnother ball of flame takes out a dozen more of the wicked creatures, and this is sufficent to break their morale, and they turn to flee.\n\nThe soldiers cheer, and strike down the fleeing goblins as they run back to the hills from where they came.\n\nSuddenly, Lucius screams in pain. With another ball of flame formed in your hand, intended to speed the goblin's flight, you turn to see that Farhan Brownhand, emissary of Alzur, has stabbed Lucius in the back with an evil looking sword that protrudes from the Air adept's chest.\n\nHe grins wickedly at you and makes a gesture with his offhand. Instinctively you hurl your fireball into his general direction, and throw yourself from the coach.\n\nJust in time, as it explodes under you, smouldering splinters burying themselves into your robes and into your flesh.\n\nShaking, you stand up, turning to Farhan and the spitted Lucius, and prepare another spell...", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "You stare disbelieving at Master Brownhand, and before you can launch a spell at him, he uses your hesitation to weave a quick strand of fire at you.\n\nYou barely dodge the small bolt of fire that jumps from his fingers and flies past you.\n\nSeeing he missed you, he curses and prepares another spell. You have to act quick.", "action_results": [{"action": "I attempt to sever or unravel the spell's weave when Farhan casts it, thus countering it.", "result": "You concentrate, and your mental eyes follow the Farhan's weaving. He uses Fire, and mixes Earth in it, but when he leashes it out, you already took hold of one of the strands of magic with your mental touch, and the spell already unravels itself as it is cast.\n\nWhen it reaches you, it is nothing more than a gust of warm wind that ruffles your hair.\n\nInfuriated, sensing what you have done, Farhan pulls the black blade out of Lucius' body, and, brandishing it, charges you.\n\nOut of the corners of your eyes you see that the guards are approaching the obviously crazed emissary.", "action_results": [{"action": "I flee towards the guards, hoping that they will overpower the Magus.", "result": "Seeing Farhan approaching you with the evil-looking dark blade in his hand that is still glistening with Lucius' blood, you jump down from the top of the coach and hurry towards the surviving guards, knowing that you do not stand a chance against the master Magus alone.\n\nFarhan laughs, and you hear behind your back the incantations as he prepares another spell.\n\nHe is only a precious few steps behind you, but the remaining guards, led by a scarred and blackbearded bear of a man, already charge at Farhan with swords drawn.\n\nSuddenly, you hear a sizzle, and it is only instinct that saves your life. You throw yourself on the ground in midrun, just as the first guards pass you in the other direction, and, accompanied by a loud crackle, a searing pain blazes across your back, just before one of the guards in front of you emits a loud scream, and something bright hits him in the chest.\n\nAs you quickly jump to your feet again, bloodied and dirty, with a singed back, you hear another sizzle, a crackle, and then a double scream, as two guards that are running at Farhan are hit by more lightning.\n\nYou turn around, and the four remaining guards are about to swing their swords at the emissary, when suddenly, out of the shadow of the coach, Farhan's bodyguard, a bulky man that moves with the gracefulness of a cat, launches himself at the group of guards.\n\nFarhan turns to flee towards the hills, as his bodyguard snaps the neck of a guard with his bare hands. You shudder involuntarily as you hear the sickening sound.\n\nBefore you can react, the burly man is spitted on the sword of the black bearded soldier, and Farhan, weaving a last spell, disappears in a clap of thunder.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, is gone and his bodyguard is dead.\n\nOnly three guards - and yourself - survived his treachery and the goblin attack. All agree that Master Brownhand had been probably in league with the goblins, but why he would attack the trek himself, noone knows.\n\nThe situation looks grim, reports Kor, the scarred and blackbearded bear of a man who led the charge against the emissary. He is a seasoned veteran, and you can see in his eyes the disgust for this treachery.\n\nThe horses drawing the coach are all either dead or have fled. Night is coming soon, and the road through the hills is known to be a dangerous way even in daylight. Bandits and bands goblins roam the area, as you were forced to experience yourself.\n\nThe plains are not much better. Any camp made on the way would be like a beacon to anyone searching for them, and neither Kor nor you have no doubts that Farhan will likely return - with or without help - to finish what the goblins had begun.\n\nAs a Magus, even a rather inexperienced one, the duty of leadership is on you, but Kor is ready with advice.\n\nBasically, you have only few options. You might attempt to travel back to the Acadamy and report of Farhan's treachery.\nOr, you might attempt to find him before he finds you. Teleport weaves, as Farhan has used to escape, are tricky: They are dangerous to pull off, because inexperienced adepts attempting to move their essence to somewhere else usually unravel themselves and get no second try. Also, the further away the destination is, the more difficult the spell becomes, and you know that even a master magician like Farhan Brownhand must have been tired after the spells he crafted during the battle.\nYour guess is, that he fled to somewhere in the hills, and Kor agrees with you on this, for in the plains, there is nowhere to hide for several miles around, not even a light wood or a small village.\n\nThe only thing you know for certain is, that it would be wise to leave this place as soon as possible, as long as the enemy Magus is still weakened from his spellcasting.", "action_results": [{"action": "We will turn back and attempt to make our way to the Academy to report Master Brownhand's treachery.", "result": "The guards pack their gear with some relief about the decision, and, lightly packed, you abandon the coaches in the coming twilight.\n\nHappy to leave the scene of the slaughter, an invisible tension leaves the men you did not notice before.\n\nNoone is happy to have Master Brownhand now in his back, but all of you are glad that he's not right in front of you.\n\nThe guards march at a good speed, and you, not really used to such sports, wondered whatever must have ridden you to ever complain about riding inside a coach.\n\nSoon, night falls, and the clear sky would be a beautiful sight were you in a mood for it. However, the moon is young, and there is not much light to see by.\n\nKor asks if you are capable of lighting a globe, and wearily, you agree.\n\nConcentrating briefly, although much, much longer than you would usually need, you create a shining sphere between your hands and command it to float over your group.\n\nKor reaches out to you as you stagger, your mental exhaustion nearly complete, but you catch yourself, and although your dignity as a Magus takes quite a scratch by stumbling because of such a simple spell, you are too tired to rightly care.\n\nSoon, the guards go off the road, and you just fall over on the ground when you hear that everyone agrees that now, you are far enough away from the place of the ambush to rest a while.\n\nYou are already asleep before you hit the ground and do not notice that someone wraps a blanket around you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "The smell of fried bacon and spiced tea wakens you, and, although bleary-eyed because of a rest that was too short by far, you stand up to face a barely rising sun.\n\nYou are greeted by the guards, and handed a wooden mug of the hot water as well as a small plate of food, and then, it is already time to break camp. You agree to to travel with all haste back towards the Academy.\n\nThe day passes uneventful, although you find yourself in a very bad shape. You wonder why you could have ever complained about riding inside a coach, stuffy as it might have been. The guards march a fast tempo, and you are barely able to keep up, even though your packing is somewhat lighter than that of the others.\n\nThe next day, your back feels like a wooden plank... even despite the blankets that are part of your travel gear, sleeping on the ground is never going to be your preferred method of rest, and you already long for the comforts of life at the Academy.\n\nKor reports that you are likely to reach Alzur by midevening the next day, and you are happy to hear so.\n\nThe next two days pass uneventfully also, although tension grew because everyone was expecting Farhan to return, or another goblin attack. Suspicions rose when you noticed the increased military patrols around, but they ignored a group of travellers and your desire to reach the council of the Academy was too great to become entangled with the military.\n\nFinally, after a journey you are glad to forget about, the sight of the walls of Alzur is very welcome to you.\n\nBut something is wrong. The gates, usually open all day and night, are barred, and the military presence has been more than doubled.\n\nKor apparently recognizes one of the guards and approaches him. The guard obviously expresses surprise and worry at seeing you return so early, but before you can question him what happened, you are immediatley led to the quickly roused council... it is past nightfall, after all.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "You are lead into the heart of the city, and something definitely feels wrong here. The atmosphere is tense unlike the teeming, bustling city you left only five days ago.\n\nThe huge ironwrought gates of the Academy are opened for you, and your group enters. Without even given the chance to refresh yourself, much to your dismay, you are led before the council's chambers and bidden entry.\n\nThe chambers themselves are somewhat in disarray, as if there had been a meeting recently and yet no time for the personell to clean, and three of the five High Magi look like indeed they have been roused from sleep. They stare at you, some with unhidden contempt, until finally Tharain Ironweave, highest of the Magi, steps forward and explains the situation to you.\n\nThere had been an assassination attempt on the wedding night of princess Jessamin of Khalar, the very city your treck was initially heading. This was exactly two days before.\nAnd, apparently, evidences point towards Master Farhan Brownhand, Alzur's very own emissary sent there, as the assassin.\n\nYou begin to remark that this is not possible, your treck barely left Alzur's lands, but the High Magus interrupts you, that they knew this very well.\n\nYet attempts to explain that to the Khalifat of Khalar met only disbelief, understandingly so. They want some sort of proof.\n\nYou briefly relay to the council what happened to you on your treck, the attack of the goblins and Farhan's treachery, and are met by stoic silence.\n\n\"Do you, then, have any proof that could convince the Khalifat to take back their declaration of war?\", you are asked.\n\nNumbly, you shake your head.\n\n\"Then\", Thalain sighs and suddenly appears much older than he is, \"this war cannot be turned away...\"\n\n\nWishing your first adventure would have turned out to be more successful, you retire into your room, but the longing for comfort leaves a bitter aftertaste when you think that Farhan Brownhand, the traitorous emissary of Alzur, escaped your grasp...", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "I am specialized in the powers of Ice, and will attempt to divine the target of the emissary's teleportation spell.", "result": "It should be not difficult to find such a powerful weave as a teleportation spell.\n\nYou close your eyes and enhance your trained mental senses to a point where you can feel the pattern of the world around you.\n\nBut although you search the point where Farhan has disappeared, you do not find any traces of the weave. You ponder this fact, and come to the conclusion that Master Brownhand must have masked the weave. This is a very difficult to achieve while casting or maintaining a spell, and your respect for the other Magus grows, whatever he might have done.\n\nYet your insight does not help you, and you are unsure of how to go on - a state which you, as an Ice Magus deeply dislike.", "action_results": [{"action": "It is only logical that someone should report the treason, but such a powerful Magus must be stopped. Thus I venture alone into the hills, and send the men back to the Academy to report.", "result": "Kor expresses worry about your shape, but you assure him that you do not intend to face down Farhan Brownhand in hand to hand battle right now, but it is important that you find out what Farhan is up to, and eventually, the warrior agrees.\n\nYou are handed a flask of some of the strong smelling brew with healing powers, and set up with light gear into the hills, with the best wishes of the guards and a short sword from one of the fallen - you usally carry no weapons with you, but your mental exhaustion is too great to be certain that you are able to defend yourself if attacked.\n\n\nKeeping slightly away from the main road, you travel crosscountry, following the trail of the fled goblins from the foiled ambush as best as you can.\n\nWearily, you walk on, although twilight slowly gives way to the starfilled darkness. Suddenly, you notive some movement in the distance... a goblin patrol!\n\nConfidence that you are still on the right track gives away to fear as they appear to have seen you.", "action_results": [{"action": "I am a Magus of Air, and an illusion will certainly divert them.", "result": "Gathering your last mental resources, you conjure the image of a powerful warrior.\n\nOnce finished, it looks indeed a bit like Kor, the scarred leader of the guards, and you wonder if you have overdone it a bit when it charges the goblins with deadly silence.\n\nThe goblins however break at the sight of the charging giant of a man, and dropping their assorted weaponry, they cry something in their own gutural language and flee.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will pursue them, hoping they will lead me to their hideout.", "result": "The goblins flee before you, and after ten minutes in pursuit - your lungs are about to give away - you arrive at a spooky scenery: Apparently the goblins' camp is under attack by wolves!\n\nTheir howl fills the night and make it seem even more dark. The goblins, under attack from all sides, fight with uncommon valor, but even the surprise reinforcements that fled before you are cut down by the powerful jaws of the wolves within seconds.\n\nA black, wolfformed shape is within their midst, and the goblins fight back in terror, but hopelessly, against its devastating power.\n\nThe camp is situated near a steep hill, and has a caveentrance. And out of that, a creature of your nightmares comes... it is the ugliest, and hugest goblin you have ever seen, with sharp claws like that of a troll. And beside it, stands Farhan Brownhand, the man you came to search for, wielding his dark blade.\n\nFarhan moves like a dancer between the goblins and the wolves, and whenever he swings his blades, a wolf falls down motionless. The big creature swings its long arms, regardless of hitting friend or foe, and whenever it hits, the victim is flung into the air.\n\nFarhan alone would suffice to turn the tide of battle in favour for the goblins, and with the strange creature against them, the wolves do not stand a chance.\n\nEven though you know the next spell might cost you your conciousness, you have to act fast.", "action_results": [{"action": "I am a Magus of Ice.", "result": "As you concentrate your magical powers, you suddenly realize what the creature is, as you notice its goblin resemblance.\n\nYou have heared of this long forgotten lore of magically melding one being into another, and clearly the creature is a meld between a goblin and a troll. Since it obviously obeys Farhan's commands, he must be its master... and that makes him an abomination to any Magi: a nethermancer, trained in the arts of the Dark Empire of L\u00f4rn, someone who does not weave with the Patterns of the world, but rather against them, destroying, not creating, feeding of the world's natural order like a vampire feeds of blood.\n\nSo this is why you found no traces of the teleportation weave that Farhan used to flee, and obvious if you think about it now, though it must have been at great risk for Master Brownhand to reveal himself like that.\n\nYou snap yourself out of following your thoughts in that direction, and with uncharacteristic determination launch a devastating attack against the troll-goblin, or goblin-troll, knowing that before you can harm Farhan, who is likely feeding of its life energy, you must destroy his creature first.\n\nA column of pure elemental ice erupts from the earth below the twisted being, and spiked upon the sharp crystals, it twists in agony and emits a horrifying scream of death before it is finally still.\n\nFarhan curses madly at the death of his creature.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "With the creature destroyed, Farhan's fighting prowess also seems to have suffered. You now see sweat on his face as he attempts to fight through the wolves, who now take the upper hand, to reach you.\n\nHis blade still seems to be thirsty for wolfblood, and whenever he strikes one, it remains still. You grip your blade as he appears to make his way through the now encircling wolves which attack him with all their fury, now that most of the goblins are slain, but then his way is bared by the giant black wolf.\n\nIt growls, and Farhan takes a step back, for the first time emitting fear. The wolf's growl seems to stop the others attack, and they circle Farhan, forcing him against the wall of the steep hill, next to the cave.\n\nThe wolf, apparently content to have trapped the emissary, appears to wait for something. Unsure what is expected from you, you approach Farhan.\n\nWhen he sees that the wolf seems to wait for you, fear is somewhat replaced with a mixture of grudging respect and hope.\n\n\"This is a nice pet you have there\", he speaks in that pleasant voice of his, straining to keep it straight. \"It won't do me any harm, will it? I can explain...\"\n\nBut you interrupt him. \"It is not my pet, and I have no command over it.\"\n\n\"But... but...\", he begins...", "action_results": [{"action": "I am a Magus of Air.", "result": "\"But\", you interrupt him in your smoothest voice, \"I might convince it not to harm you, if you tell me enough to satisfy my curiousity.\"\n\nYou wonder for a moment if he calls your bluff, but either your social skills are too developed or, as you rather suspect, he is too frightened.\n\n\"It wasn't my idea, you see\", he begins flustered, always nervously eyeing the black wolf, \"It wasn't my plan. It just had to look like an accident. You know, the princess... I mean, when the masters said... but...\"\n\nYou have no idea what he is talking about, but you made the experience that its best to let madmen and drunk talk, as they get to the point in their own time.\n\n\"The masters... the blood, all the blood, and... it was their idea! I am just a tool, and you... you won't hold a tool responsible, will you?\", he begs, and pleads to you in his mad ravings.\n\nThen, the hunted, mad look in his eyes clears. He calmly salutes with the blade, speaks calmly: \"My masters will save me.\"\n\nFarhan is obviously about to plunge the evil looking blade into his heart, as the black wolf growls and leaps.\n\nYou turn away in disgust, but the screams of the dying and the sickening sound of teeth tearing at the flesh of the dying man will haunt your nightmares for quite some time to come.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "It takes you the better part of to two weeks to reach the city of Alzur again. When you arrive at the gates, the first thing you notice is that obviously, the patrols have increased. The guards at first turn you away, but then you show the documents you found searching the cave you faced Farhan and his goblins, and they, recognizing the seal of the High Council, immediatley call upon the High Magi.\n\nWhile you wait in the antechamber, you reflect your voyage so far. When the wolves finished with Farhan's body, there was not much left of it. After they had done this, the wolves, completely ignoring you, slunk away, many with a bloodied snout.\n\nThe large black wolf only raised his head to meet your eyes once, and it appeared as if it winked at you from the depth of those golden eyes. You do not know what kind of animal this creature was, but you were happy enough that it, too, ignored you and vanished with the rest of the pack.\n\nFeeling obliged to them, for some reasons, you spent a few hours piling the dead bodies of the wolves and burn them, leaving the goblins' corpses to rot.\n\nThen, you searched the cave. It appeared as if Farhan had quite a comfortable living hole there, filled with the goblins' plunder. You have also secured the documents Farhan was to bring to Khalar, as well as a note in a writing you were unable to decipher.\n\nDespite the risks, you decided to sleep the night there - exhaustion and the excitement of the last hours finally taking its toll. Undisturbed, you woke the next morning, and hurried to leave this place of carnage.\n\nThen, you hurried to catch up with Kor and his men, but you have not found them. Instead, the journey took much longer than you anticipated, and more than once you wished that this would remain your last adventure forever. Perhaps a life of devoted study and teachings in the Academy was not as bad a choice at that. At least the beds there consisted more than heaps of hay, if you could find any at all.\n\n\nBefore admitted before the Council, you are bathed and clothed new, and for the first time in two weeks, you feel moderately human again, though it will take some more time for the bruises to heal. You make plans to sleep through the whole next week.\n\nThen, finally, you are, accompanied by two guards, led into the Council chambers.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "You are led into a rather gloomy room, and face the five most powerful Magi of the Academy.\n\nAncient Tharain Oakweave is the one to stand and greet you, and you have to recount your tale in full before he continues to speak.\n\n\"These are dire news indeed, but then, these are dire times. The Khalifat of Khalar has declared war upon us, for an assassination attempt was made on princess Jessamin during her wedding night.\"\n\nAh, so this must be the princess Farhan spoke about... but who are the \"masters\"?\n\n\"Unfortunately\", Tharain continues, \"evidence was apparently found that points to our emissary as the assassin, and the princess has been seen neither dead nor alive since then.\"\n\nYou try to interrupt and explain that this could hardly be, for Farhan has barely left Alzur, but you are silenced by a gesture of the old High Magus.\n\n\"We know, but we have no way to dismiss their evidences, which, to our own surprise, appear to be real.\"\n\nYou wonder what a war between the two most powerful states in Thyr would mean to your plans of living in comfort for the rest of your life, and you do not like the results you come to.\n\nThen, with a smile, you remember something, and produce the documents you found in the goblin cave.\n\nTharain takes them, and reads through them briefly. Then he inspects the strange note you found, and his bushy eyebrows rise.\n\n\"This, indeed, is a hint we might take into consideration.\" Without saying more, he looks at you, and smiles. \"Welcome back, young Magus Uriel. You might have done more than your share to reveal a dark plot indeed. Now, if only the princess could be found...\"\n\n\n\nCongratulations! You have beaten the part one of \"Tides Of War\". Part two will feature the story of Princess Jessamin, so stay tuned. :)", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "I will question him about his plans.", "result": "\"My plans? MY plans?\", Farhan cackles. \"They are not my plans. And if I tell you, then what? You'll call of this beast? You will?\"\n\nYou try to answer, but he does not let you: \"No, I can see my death in its eyes. But I tell you one thing. It wasn't my plan, I was just my masters' tool. The princess... hah... it was a good plan, though... it would have worked, if not for...\" His voice trails off and his eyes suddenly have a glazed over look.\n\nThen, he smiles a half crazed smile, and raises his blade as if to salute to you. When he turns it around as if to impale himself, the black wolf leaps.\n\nYou turn away in disgust, but the screams of the dying man and the sounds of wolfteeth tearing into living flesh will haunt your nightmares for a long time to come.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will accuse him of treachery and call him to justice.", "result": "You accuse him of treachery, and tell him you will personally bring him back to the Academy for the council to do justice.\n\nHe just stares at you in disbelief, and then with a crooked smile at the black wolf.\n\n\"I do not think you will bring me anywhere, my young friend. I see my death in its eyes.\" Then, his grimace turns into a snarl. \"But for your insolence, I will first get you!\"\n\nSurprised by the sudden change, you raise your own blade to deflect his sudden lunge, but you are too slow, and the blade bites deep into your flesh.\n\nYou scream in agony as you feel your very soul drawn from your living body through the wound to feed the hungry sword. Your pain in the last seconds of your life is so great that you do not even hear the madman's dying screams as the wolves tear him apart.", "action_results": [{"action": "You have died...", "result": "An eternity passes in the wake of a second.\n\nYou are floating in an emptiness even your bodiless mind fails to grasp. It appears as both a darkness so dark as to blind your mental eyes and a light so bright that it is already black at the same time.\n\nYou see, with eyes not your own, the strands of raw magic that weave the pattern of the universe. There is the searing strand of Fire wherever the pattern forms a living soul, filling it with passion and emotion to differ it from the animals. Air lights up, with light blue strand of magic, whenever joy is felt or beauty grasped. Earth, a rich brown and green, gives life to plants and animals and all things that breathe. Water, the purest of elements, a deep blue that fills life in the hulls Earth is creating. Ice, most mysterious element of all, shines with a bright white, and you grasp that it forms the underlying logic of the pattern, directing all other strands into their destined form.\n\nAnd suddenly you understand.\n\nThe secrets of life, the wisdom of existence, the riddle of the creation. It is all so easy, so clear.\n\nYou see the forces of magic, and you also see the other forces, directing them, ordering them. And you see the forces that are directing those.\n\nYou see what has happened, what will happen, what must happen. The future is just another pattern in the great weave of what you unknowingly called existence, which is yet just the dream of an illusion and at the same time reality.\n\nNow you know you can read the pattern, now you know the choices that led you to your doom, and why they did so. You know, you would not choose again wrongly, not this time, if you just had another chance...\n\nanother chance...\n\n\nAnd the Fire that is Passion burns brightly within you and engulfs your soul, forming you into the essence that is.", "action_results": [{"action": "Restart the Game.", "result": "Welcome to Magus: Betrayal!\n\n\nYou are known as Uriel, master elementalist and accomplished magician of the Acadamy of Alzur.\nThe Spark, the talent to manipulate the essence of the elements in everything, has enabled you to live a youth far away from the spears of the soldiers, or the toils of the peasants.\nA findling you are, born to unknown parents and found on the steps of the Academy, but this is not a fate unusual, for the times are harsh for those without the privilige of noble heritage, and few can spare the resources to feed yet another crying mouth.\nIf the Magi of the Academy had not found the Spark in you, they would have turned you over to one of the servants to grow up as one of them, a practice that comes closest to local charity, and ensures that the servants are loyal to the Academy.\nBut this fate was spared to you.\nFrom earliest childhood you learned the arts of the scribe, the arts of the rune and the arts of the Elements.\nYour life has been one of scholarship, and learning, and even though your thoughts sometimes turned towards the parents you never had, you soon accepted that the Academy was your family, never knowing anything different.\n\nHowever, a restlessness in your soul worried your teachers. You were sharper than most of your classmates, and thus began to find the lectures boring, often huddling alone in your study with an ancient tome borrowed from the library with the librarian's grudging permission, learning on your own faster than your teachers could hope to achieve.\n\nFinally, the master magicians admitted defeat. They no longer could teach you anything, and thus it came as a relief to them, that you were chosen, with two other magicians, to fortify the guard of an Alzuran emissary on the dangerous, bandit-infested road to Khofte, a coastal city in the far south.\n\nThe council of magicians apparently thought that a bit of adventure would help to dull your restlessness and sharpen your practical skills.\n\n\nTo begin with, you must choose to specialize in one of the five elements: Fire, Air, Water, Ice and Earth.\nYou may still manipulate the other four, but you can only hope to access the powerful effects with the element of your specialization.\nFurthermore, specializing in one element also slightly affects your character. Ice elementalists are known for the cool and logical mind, while Earth magicians tend to be protective of their charges.\n\nChoose your Specialization.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "I choose to specialize in Air, the element of Joy, Beauty and Illusions.", "result": "You are a jolly companion, and had many friends during your early studies, before you became so engaged in the study of Air that you had little time for anything else, sometimes to your regret.\n\nYou are a connoisseur of things, you enjoy the gifts life has to offer you. You are also something of a charmeur, and this has more often brought you into trouble than out of it, especially considering the Academy's strict ruling according women, especially the social intercourse between students and servants.\n\nHowever, you took an instant disliking to the moody Earth-Magi, and you simply have no common ground with those oh-so cool adepts of Ice.\n\nYour focus on the element of Air enables you to create breathtaking visual illusions, that last as long as someone touches them... or you loose concentration.\n\nAlso, you have minor control over the torrents of the winds, something no other elementalist could hope to master.\n\n\nMake a note somewhere that you have chosen Air as your specialization.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I choose to specialize in Water, the element of Wisdom, Compassion and Healing.", "result": "Your have always been wise beyond your years, but knowledge has never hampered your good judgement of characters, or hindered your compassion.\n\nYou had many friends, who knew they could rely upon you, and your classmates held you in something approaching awe.\n\nYou have perfected the art of meditation for yourself, usually tackle problems by following your heart after carefully thinking about the facts.\n\nHowever, you feel only pitty for those who focus on Fire as their element, for they are rash and destructive in nature, and do not understand the ways of man. It is the same with those who choose Earth above anything else, for they tend to think only of darkness when there is so much life.\n\nThe mastery of Water enables you to cast powerful healing spells, curing even the most serious afflictions. Also, your are able to douse water to a certain extent... thus maybe preventing you dying from thirst in a barren environment.\n\n\nMake a note somewhere that you have mastered the ways of Water.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I choose to specialize in Ice, the element of Logic, Cold and Truth.", "result": "It is only logical you should have chosen Ice as your primary focus.\nIt is the only element that enables you to effectively use your superior intellect to apply to problems, and puzzles are your one obsession.\n\nFor you, magic is not an art: It's a science. Everything connects to everything else, and it is only a matter of approach until every single one of life's secret is to be understood.\n\nActually, you do not know if you ever had any friends in your youth, among your classmates. Or, to be more precise: You simply did not care.\n\nYou hold a certain contempt over those adepts of lesser elements, and while you can tolerate the presence of Earth and Water magicians, you simply cannot stand the unjustified arrogance of those following the path of Fire, nor the capricious jokers that are typical adepts of Air.\n\nYour mastery of the element of Ice enables you great powers of divination. With your spells, you can even divine if someone speaks the truth or not. Also, logical puzzles are merely a challenge, but never an obstacle for you.\nHowever, sometimes you might see connections where there are none.\n\n\nMake a note somewhere that your are following the path of Ice.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I choose to specialize in Earth, the element of Nature, Protection and Life.", "result": "The Earth gave birth to you, and you decide to pay her homage by focussing on the powers this element grants.\n\nYou are, like many adepts of Earth, prone to dark moods, but also hearty laughter. You like to enjoy the bounties of Earth, the beer, the wine, and already you are looking forward to the journey.\n\nYou had few friends among your former classmates, but those friendships still last strong today.\n\nThe powers of Earth enable you to weave powerful protective spells among those you wish to save from harm, but you also are a master summoner. Animals will come to your help, if you call for them, and you can even communicate with them.\n\n\nMake a note somewhere that you are an adept of Earth.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "I want him to surrender his blade - it looks like a powerful object of magic.", "result": "\"My... my blade? Yes, here, have it\", he quickly burbles and throws it on the ground.\n\nYou move to pick it up, concious of the giant wolf next to you. But when you bend down to touch it, it snakes upwards as if moved by a ghostly hand.\n\nYou scream in pain as the blade bites deep into your flesh, and you feel your soul drawn from your body into its hungry metal.\n\nYour agony is so great that you do not even hear Farhan's mad laughter as the wolves rip him to pieces.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "I am an Adept of Water.", "result": "When you reach out for your mental powers, you suddenly realize that the creature is a magical construct, a being created and twisted from its natural form into a mindless killing machine, and quite likely insane.\n\nYou also realize what Farhan must be... a nethermancer, a Magus trained in the arts of the L\u00f4rn, the Dark Empire. Master Brownhand weaves not with the Patterns of the world to create his spells, but rather against them - an abominable thought to any thinking Magus. He does not work with the essence of the world, he destroys it, like a vampire living from the blood of others.\n\nShuddering, you prepare to unravel the magical being's antipattern, knowing that if you wish to harm Farhan, you have to destroy his creature first.\n\nPatiently, and hoping he does not notice you yet, you mentally search the creature's being for a point of attack. It is difficult to do so without getting closer, but you do not dare to.\n\nYou are no priest, but you remember once having a spirited discussion with one, and you know that what you have in mind is not unlike the banishing of undeath the priests of Thyr are able to perform.\n\nPatiently, you seek on, and there, you find it... a scar in the weave of the being, like a twisted, cancerous knot. You feel for it, and then, with determination to end this miserable creature's unlife, you give it a sharp mental pull.\n\nThe creature screams in rage and pain, and flails blindly with those long arms of it, felling both goblin and wolf. Then, after a brief struggle, it falls down to the ground, the twisted pulsating knot and weave that gave it its unnatural life gone.\n\nFarhan screams in rage as he sees his creature destroyed.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will launch a barrage of magical missiles against the goblins.", "result": "Knowing this is the final facedown, you summon up all the energy left within to create a hail of tiny magical missiles that strike their targets with deadly accuracy. The goblins fall under your precise hail, and even Farhan and the ugly creature are subject to your attack, although both appear to shrug of the magical assault.\n\nYou feel you are beginning to blacken out, and the last thing you see is how the ugly goblinoid creature is brought down under three wolves. Then, your vision fades to black.\n\n\nYou awake, unsure how long you were asleep, to the feeling of something breathing in your face. You open your eyes and stare into those of the giant black wolf.\n\nYou tense in shock for a moment, but the wolf seems unaware. There is something strange about its eyes... it looks dead.\n\nA pleasant voice calls out to you: \"Ah, I see you made acquaintance with my new friend. I admit, it took a while to tame him, but in the end, he was willing enough.\"\n\nA shiver runs down your spine as you recognize it as Farhan's.\n\n\"A brave show of you, indeed. You slew many a goblin. But I no longer require them, now that I have a more powerful ally. So I might thank you for getting rid of them for me.\"\n\nFarhan pauses a moment, then adds: \"Please understand that my gratitude has its limits, though. Blackfang, feed.\"\n\nBefore you can react, the jaws of the black beast close around your throat, and not even a dying scream escapes your lips.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will cast a minor shield on myself and join the fray with my short sword.", "result": "Not daring to cast more than a minor charm in your current mental state, you weave a protective shield designed to turn the knives and spears of your enemies away without so much as penetrating your skin.\n\nThen, you grab your sword, and jump into the battle. A couple of wolves are startled by your appearance, and one snaps at you, but his teeth are deflected by your protection.\n\nYou ignore the startled wolf, and throw yourself on the next goblin, which is as startled. Piercing him with your blade, you move on to the next target, when Farhan notices you.\n\nA pile of dead wolves surround him, and he laughs a madman's laugh in that pleasant voice of his. Then, he utters a command to the giant goblinoid creature, and it ignores the wolves hanging from him and charges you.\n\nYou dodge its first blow, as it sweeps aside goblins and wolves to reach you, and make a bold stab against its chest. But its arms are somewhat longer than your blade, and like a hammer, his backhand swing hits you on the head. You feel lifted up and hurtled through the air, and as ground closes in again, you hear the sickening crunch of your right leg before you pass out into a darkness you will never again wake from...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will concentrate my magical assault on the ugly creature.", "result": "Somehow you feel more threatened by the presence of the twisted being than of Farhan Brownhand himself, though both leave tremendous damage among the remaining wolves.\n\nYou form a powerful weave to destroy the creature, and, still unseen by Farhan or the goblins below, you launch it at the giant goblinoid, going for speed rather than for finesse.\n\nThe mental strain hits you like a hammer, and you sway, but it is worth it as you see the big ugly thing implode with a deafening scream. The goblins, already panicking, are going frenzy and stab themselves as much as the wolves, and Farhan screams in rage at the death of the creature.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will focus my magical attack on Farhan.", "result": "You summon your mental forces and prepare to unleash a weave of raw magica against Farhan. He apparently has not noticed you yet.\n\nKnowing you have to go for speed rather than for finesse, you just hope that your mental strength suffices for you not to black out. Then, you banish those distracting thoughts from your mind and concentrate at the work on hand.\n\nWithin seconds, the weave is completed, and you hurl it with a single word of power against the emissary who dances among the wolves, cutting them down.\n\nYour magical force hits him straight into the chest.", "action_results": [{"action": "I am a Magus of Fire.", "result": "To your brief surprise, Farhan merely shrugs off the mental assault, and turns into your direction with a wicked grin, brandishing that evil looking blade of his.\n\nYou notice out of the corner of your eyes that the ugly creature cringed in pain when your spell hit Master Brownhand, and without thinking, you unleash the powers of Fire within you at the creature.\n\nAs it turns to ashes within a split second, much faster than you would have anticipated, Farhan screams in rage.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "This is not the case.", "result": "But Farhan simply shrugs off your mental assault.\n\nYou are shocked by this, and he turns towards you with an evil grin on his face, and cuts his way through the wolves towards you.\n\nHorrified, and knowing your mental reserves are depleted entirely, you brandish your own sword, slowly giving way to Farhan. Unrelentlessly, he comes towards you.\n\nYou turn to flee, knowing you cannot face him in hand to hand combat, and make a run for it, but he is faster.\n\nYou utter an inhuman scream as the wicked blade he wields bites into your flesh, and you feel your very soul being drawn into the very weapon, feeding both its wielder and its own hunger...", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Happy to have survived the encounter without much effort, I will rest to gain strength before continuing... before something worse than the goblins appears out of the darkness.", "result": "You decide that rest is what you need right now, for you cannot go on, your mental resources completely depleted and your physical condition is not much better.\n\nTelling yourself an hour rest will suffice, you feel weariness like you never knew before creeping up to you.\nThe cool air and the ground, not quite chilling yet no longer containing the sun's warmth ever help to keep you awake, yet you feel your eyes closing themselves involuntarily.", "action_results": [{"action": "I am a Magus specialized in Water.", "result": "You feel sleep threatening to overtake you, but you embrace the feeling and turn it into restful energy, knowing that falling asleep right now would probably be the last thing you would ever do.\n\nInstead, you use a ritual like that of meditation, only the other way around, and you draw the tiredness out of your body and into the surrounding Pattern of the magic weaves.\n\nYou close your eyes and reach a state like slumber, only at full awareness, while thinking through the situation so far.\n\nSuddenly you sense movement nearby. With a quickness that would surprise anyone taking your for someone asleep you jump up, your short sword in your hand.\n\nSneaking up to you were three goblins, each armed with barbed spears, and they are more surprised than you at seeing them. With a quick thrust, you end the first goblin's life, and the others, expecting a defenseless human instead of one awake and capable of killing them, turn to flee.", "action_results": [{"action": "I need to regain more strength before I face more enemies.", "result": "You feel like drowning in your weariness. The day has been more than taxing so far. Casting spells never felt so tiring, but then again, the conditions under which you wove your spells so far never had been so demanding.\n\nOnce you yearned for adventure, but right now, you yearn for a soft bed like you had when studying in the Academy.\n\nThe thought of a bed is a dangerous one, and you cannot hold sleep off any longer. With a sigh, you close your eyes and give in to the drowning darkness.\n\n\nYour dreams are vivid and colorful. You dream of the Patterns of the world, and how a different Pattern feeds into it. You sense a dark presence swirling the weaves, twisting them with fingers unseen. You somehow feel threatened by the presence, and will yourself to wake up - yet to no avail.\n\nAnother dark presence approaches the first... it is less human, more like an animal, but as dark and... you cannot put a finger to it... somehow out of place.\n\nYou feel the presences clash together, in your mind, and all the colors turn to black and white, and then vice versa.\n\n\nWith an incredibly intense, stabbing pain you awake, briefly, and, pierced through your chest is the barbed spear of a grinning goblin.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}, {"action": "I am an Adept of Ice.", "result": "Your drowsiness threatens to take over, but it would be most unlogical to give in to the desire to sleep, for it would be much likely to be the last thing you would ever do.\n\nInstead, you use the cool air and the cold ground to refresh your body and your mind. This is your type of energy, after all.\n\nSuddenly, you notice movement at the corner of your vision, and immediatley, your senses clear and you are full awake. Remaining still as to pretend being still asleep, you notice that three goblins are sneaking up to you.\n\nWithout further hesitation, you lash out your right hand into the direction of one, and with a simple yet effective weave freeze his heart. The goblins' companions gasp in surprise as their comrade simply falls over without another sound at your gesture, and they turn to flee immediatley.\n\nNot pausing, you stand up and run after them in pursuit, before they fetch more companions.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}]}, {"action": "I will rely on my magic to defend against them.", "result": "As you tap into your mental forces to prepare a weave to defend yourself against the goblins, you notice that your mental exhaustion is quite advanced... casting a spell to slay the four goblins will tax you dangerously.", "action_results": [{"action": "I am a Magus of Fire, and its destructive powers are my speciality.", "result": "Any other Magus would likely have a problem with the drain that comes with weaving destructive spells, but to you, it is rather refreshing.\n\nAs the goblins charge, you simply smile and spread your hands, which burst into a blueish flame which casts spooky shadows on the nightly hills.\n\nSeeing this, the goblins' charge falters slightly, but the two archers are unfathomed by this and nock arrows into their bows.\n\nDeftly, a small weave of fire turns the bows in their hands to cinders, and they yelp in pain as the skin on their hands turns to blisters.\n\nConfused by the cries of pain behind them, the two remaining goblins stop and turn, and when you hurl the blueish flame around your hands at one of the archers, he explodes in a ghostly fire without a sound before their eyes.\n\nThis is enough to convince the goblins that bravety is uncalled for, and they turn and flee.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "I will take out as many goblins as it feels safe to do, then face the rest with my sword.", "result": "As one of the archers comes in range and launches an arrow at you, you pick it up with a thin strand of air and redirect it to hit the other archer in the throat, which dies gurgling in a foul language you do not understand.\n\nThrusting your left hand forward and uttering a single syllable of power, you focus what power remains for you to safely use, and thrust it into a powerful weave that rips one of the remaining goblins apart from the inside.\n\nShocked by the display of power, the goblins are close to breaking point. You draw your short blade and charge them, and the darkness and their fear hides your exhaustion well from them.\n\nBefore you reach them, your blade glimmering in the starlight like the sword of an avenging angel - at least in the goblins' eyes -, they drop their weapons and flee.\n\nToo exhausted to pursue them, you slump down on the ground and decide to rest for a while.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will use my mental reserves instead to camouflage myself, so that the goblin patrol will not find me.", "result": "You throw yourself flat on the ground the moment the goblins begin moving into your direction. There, concentrating, you weave a small charm that blends your Pattern into that of the surrounding, effectively becoming invisible to the casual eye.\n\nYou have a good view of the goblin patrol, and as they approach, you use what little power remains within you to handle safely to mask your breathing and movements.\n\nThe goblins still approach, to the point where you can smell their sickening stench and hear their gutural language, which you do not understand. But obviously they are searching for someone, or something, and are not too happy about it.\n\nYou cannot stop yourself to breathe a sigh of relief as they pass you, unseeing, and vanish into the darkness of the hills below.\n\nYou wait for another quarter of an hour, and then you release your magic, slumping on the ground, mentally completely exhausted.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Using magic would be too taxing - it is of no help if I fall unconcious because of weaving a spell - so I trust on my swordblade on this encounter instead.", "result": "Brandishing your short sword, you bellow a battlecry and charge the goblins, hoping that this will break their morale.\n\nThe two archers loose their arrows at you, but you do not even have to dodge them... goblins are not known for their aim, and indeed, their arrows go stray.\n\nOne of them manages to fire another arrow at you before you reach them, but that one misses you also.\n\nYour first blow, unexperienced as you are, is deflected by the goblin's shield. Using your weight and the force of the blow, your followup stab pierces his stomach.\n\nWith a cry of pain in a foul language you do not understand, the goblin falls to the ground.\n\nHowever, as you are about to free your blade from the goblin's body, one of the archers shoots an arrow at point blank at you, and as you cry out from pain as the wooden shaft bores into your flesh, the other goblin with the morning star smashes it into your skull, and after a brief pain, there is only darkness.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Cowardice is preferable to death... I will hide myself!", "result": "You know that your magic is too weakened to rely upon, and while a trained warrior could probably handle those four goblins, you realize your swordskill is mediocre at best.\n\nThey appear to have spotted you, but you throw yourself flat on the ground - careful enough neither to break the flask you are carrying with you not to spike yourself on your sword - and roll down a hill, more away from the road.\n\nThere, you keep down, knowing that in your state you are unlikely to outrun them. The hand on your swordhilt, you cower in darkness, thankful that the young moon does not give off much light.\n\nAn eternity passes, and you are about to raise your head, as you hear the shuffling feet and the gutural language of the goblin patrol approaching. In the darkness, you briefly consider weaving a minor charm to make you unseen, but you are afraid that even the tiniest motion of a hand would betray you, so you hold your breath and remain still.\n\nAnother eternity passes - probably barely more than a minute - and the sounds of the patrol fade away again - obviously they were not intent on searching too hard, after the beating they took at the ambush.\n\nBreathing a sigh of relief, you sit down to gather your strength again before continuing.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}, {"action": "We are not in the possession of all the facts, and thus need to find out more about Master Brownhand. So we attempt to find him together, for eight eyes see more than two, and it is logical to have protection.", "result": "Kor and the guards do not like your decision, and express clearly so, but they accept your status as the group's leader.\n\nQuickly, you are packed with light gear, and, abandoning the coaches, you head into the hills in the approaching nightfall.\n\nThe moon is young, and the ground is not easy to see, yet you march through the hills slightly away from the road, as not to be so easy a target.\n\nAn hour passes, and nightfall becomes a beautiful starspangled sky, were you in a mood to appreciate this.\n\nSuddenly, Kor stops and points towards an approaching goblin patrol. They have spotted you too, and seeing that you equal their size, decide to make a run for it after the disaster of the ambush earlier.\n\n\"Get 'em 'fore they gets to their fellows!\", Kor bellows, and, axe drawn, charges them.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will attempt to strike down the goblins from afar, using the meager mental resources remaining to me.", "result": "You close your eyes and focus your mental view on the goblins' Patterns. You weave a few simple strands of air and fire, to keep low the strain on your already overtaxed mind, and cause one of the goblin's chest to explode.\n\nShocked by this display of power, the remaining goblins stop approaching you and appear to discuss what to do now - they are obviously not very bright.\n\nThis distraction is all the guards need to reach them, and the goblins fall under the blows of the men.\n\nSeeing you have been victorious, you gently fall over, already fast asleep, as the spell takes its toll from you despite your rigid concentration.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "You awake when someone shakes your shoulder.\n\nWith an aching head, you stretch and stand up to face Kor, who woke you.\n\n\"Quickly\", he hisses. \"I know yer in no shape, but we need ya here. Dem's buggers found out bout us somehow, and dere's about two dozens creeping all 'round us, closin' in. We're trapped like rabbits!\"\n\nWith that, he thrusts a short sword into your hand. You do not feel in any shape to weave spells at the moment, and this is bad as you realize what Kor just said.\n\nThe goblins are approaching, and you see them... indeed, at least two dozens of them encircle the tiny camp the men made. You're uphill, but there's too many of them to really use that advantage.\n\nThe men, and you, form a square, each one guarding one side. The blade in your hand is unfamiliar, but you feel that it would be a good idea to become familiar with it rather quickly.\n\nThere is a moment of silence, and then, the goblins charge with cries in a gutural language you do not - and if the accompanying gestures are any indication, you are glad that this is so - understand.\n\nWith an answering battlecry that you join in, you intercept the first wave of the attack. Kor's great axe slices through the goblins' bodies, and the man to your right spits two goblins at once on his sword.\n\nYou are barely capable of deflecting the wicked spears and knives of the creatures, but you manage to bring in a well placed kick that causes one of the foul beings to yelp in pain, loose the balance and roll back down the hill, taking another one with him.\n\nAlthough the four of you manage to hold the goblins at bay, it is clear that you cannot do so for very long, and after a minute of frenzied fighting, a scream of pain indicates the guard in your back going down.\n\nQuickly, the square becomes a triangle, as you move to protect your fallen comrade, yet the battle appears to be without hope.\n\nDetermined not to be the next to fall, you fight on, and it is by sheer luck that you survive the next minutes.\n\nSuddenly, a spooky howl fills the night, and the goblins cower in fear for a moment, then abruptly the break of their assault and turn to flee.\n\nKor caughs something, and you notice that the giant of a man is wounded, as is the other guard. You, by none less than a miracle, are the only one not seriously wounded.\n\n\"After em, lad,\" Kor cries and throws you a bottle of that evil smelling medicine the guards use. You drink a gulp, pocketing the last remains, and the fire within refreshes you sufficently to grab your sword and hurry after the fleeing goblins alone in the dark, towards the source of that ghostly howl that has now ceased...", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "This is a fighter's job, not mine... I am too exhausted, and the goblins should be no match for the guards.", "result": "While Kor and his men charge the goblins, and gaining, you slowly walk after them.\n\nYou are weary to the bones, and your mental resources are nearly depleted due to the exhaustion earlier. It would be of no use to anyone if you fell unconcious by trying to slay a few goblins.\n\nA couple of minutes later, and the guards are engaged with the goblins. Indeed, the goblins do not stand a chance against the trained fighters, but one of them manages to escape.", "action_results": [{"action": "I am a Magus of Fire.", "result": "Your instincts take over.\n\nWith a pleased grin, like that of a cat on a chase, you deftly weave a small knot of fire and hurl it after the goblin.\n\nIt hits him in the back, and within split seconds, only ashes remain of the creature, but even that tiny spell was too much for you, and you gently fall over.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I launch a magical attack against him.", "result": "You focus what remains of your mental resources into a ball of pure energy and cast it after the fleeing goblin, striking him from behind.\n\nThe magical energy discharges into the goblin's body, and he falls down lifeless.\n\nYou, however, having reached your limits, fall down into a deep, dreamless sleep...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I do nothing. What harm can one single goblin do?", "result": "You judge your mental resources too low to be able to weave a spell that would do more than tickle the goblin, and thus you let him escape.\n\nThe guards have finished dealing with the other three, but the fleeing goblin is too far away.\n\nKor curses, when he notices that one got away, but everyone agrees that he's too far away.\n\n\"The bugger's probably goin' ta get his friends on our heels within the hour\", he mutters. \"Let's get away from here.\"\n\n\nYou agree on this, and you head away from the road, to make camp somewhere safe.\n\nYou are in no shape for guard duty, and so the three men share it among themselves. Food is scarce, but sleep is all you need. Before you hit your blanket, you are already fast asleep.\n\n\nA battlecry wakes you in the middle of the night. Bleary-eyed you need a few seconds to get your bearing, and that is all the goblin standing behind you needs to ram a barbed spear through your body.\n\nA pain you never knew before fills you, and you faint the moment you see the spearhead protruding from your chest, falling into a darkness from where there is no awakening...", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "I am specialized in the powers of Earth, and thus I attempt to question the animals of the area whether they know of Farhan's whereabouts.", "result": "You sit down on the ground and close your eyes, sending out a mental call to all the animals around you.\n\nYou probe into their minds and send your image, a human friend in need of help, and already you hear their answers.\n\nDominating the mental images that answer is that of a huge, black shadow, and you know it must be the most powerful animal around - a natural leader, as you will.\n\nYou feel its presence approaching, and the remaining guards gasp aloud as suddenly a huge black wolf jumps into your mid without so much of a sound. Swords and axes are drawn, but you command them to drop their weapons.\n\nThe wolf, with the natural grace of a killer, ignores them as lesser prey - you see them through his eyes - and approaches them.\n\nYou are about to lay down on the ground and bare your throat, not as a gesture of fear but as a token of respect, when you sense that something is not quite right about this wolf. You hesitate, but the wolf does neither appear to notice nor to care.\n\nHe sits down on his hindlegs in front of you, staring at you with uncanny yellow eyes that seem to hide an intelligence much more than mere animal.\n\nCovering your nervousness, that might as well bring you death, you frame a mental picture of Master Brownhand and send it to the wolf.\n\nThe reply is a flurry of images that nearly knock you out of your concentration. Blood, hatred, the scent of blood dominating the whole scene, slain cubs, a dark entrance into a cavern, the scent of goblins, the sickening taste of their foul flesh, and at the core of this, the being you knew as Farhan, and also something different, something dark, you cannot quite point your finger on.\n\nHastily you break your concentration before the hatred you feel overpowers you, and it is only then that you notice the deep, dark growling of the wolf as it simply looks at you, and the nervousness of the guards, which already have drawn their blades again despite your command.\n\nBut then, the huge animals simply stops, stands up and leaves towards the hills, ignoring the guards again as it strides through their midst.\n\nAt the edge of the battlefield, it turns its head to look at you, as if to see whether you follow, then turns again and trots into the hills.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will follow the wolf, with or without the others - it appears to want to lead me to somewhere specific.", "result": "You know that it is your duty to follow the wolf, and perhaps your destiny.\n\nYou have asked a favour from it, and it is now time for you to repay that favour. Kor presses a short sword into your hand and a flask containing one sip of that evil smelling brew with healing powers the guards used, but the men make it clear that they will not follow you.\n\nYou have no time to argue with them, for the wolf is already out of sight, and so you hurry on, into nightfall, falling the huge black shape.\n\nThe wolf waits for you just out of sight of the guards, and, seeing that you follow, turns to walk on again.\n\nLike in trance, you follow it. At least two hours, straight through the hills, slightly away from the road, the two of you march on. At one time, he sniffed the air, and lay low on the ground, and you did it likewise, wondering briefly about what kind of intelligence this uncanny animal possesses.\n\nThen, when you see a campfire shining at the horizon, the wolf emits a low growl. Then, suddenly, he raises his head and howls towards the young moon, a deafening sound that wakes primal instincts of fear deep within you. The howl is picked up through the surrounding hills, and the black wolf charges towards the fire.\n\nFascinated, and worried, you follow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "When you arrive at the campfire, there is a battle going on between silvergrey shapes and the twisted humanoids. The black wolf has launched itself into the fray, and the goblins, having nowhere to flee as they are under attack from all sides, fight with uncommon valor, but you can see that the odds are not in their favor.\n\nThe camp is situated against a steep hill, and you see a cave entrance out of which a nightmarish creature appears.\n\nIt is without doubt the largest goblin you have ever seen, larger than many a human, sporting huge claws. And, standing next to it, is Farhan Brownhand, wielding that dark blade of his.\n\nHe moves with the grace of a dancer amidst the goblins and wolves alike, and whenever he makes a cut with his sword, a wolf falls down motionless.\n\nFarhan alone might turn the tide of battle in favour for the goblins, and the goblinoid creature simply swipes those clawlike arms of it around, uncaring whether it hurts friend or foe. Even the powerful black wolf keeps its distance from it.\n\nWhile you are not exactly mentally fit, and afraid that even a single spell will be the last one you cast before falling down unconcious, you know you have to act.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "I summon the protection of Earth around the wolves.", "result": "You call upon the powers of the very earth you stand upon, and shield the wolves with your weaves.\n\nThe goblins, already panicking, never actually noticed that their weapons are now turned away from the beasts they fight without harming them.\n\nHowever, your weave offers no protection against the brute force of the twisted giant goblinoid, and the blade Farhan wields still wrecks havoc among the wolves.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, null, null, null]}]}, null, null, null]}, null, null]}]}, {"action": "I launch a quick spell against him, intend on stoping him long enough for the guards to reach him.", "result": "You raise your arms, quickly contemplating the type of weave to throw against Master Brownhand, but decide for simplicity.\n\nA few minor strands of Air flow from your mind and wrap themselves around the emissary's arms, and, tightening, you attempt to hold him.\n\nHis eyes widen in fury as he realizes what you are about to do, and he attempts to sever the weaves that surround his arms with his own magic.\n\nSurprised at the deftness and skill of his magical counterattack against your spell, you cannot do anything but admire the man's finesse as he unravels your spell with his mind.\n\nWithin a split second, your spell falls to pieces beyond repair, and Farhan, unhindered again, charges the coach you are standing upon.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will jump down the coach and grab the sword of a fallen soldier to face Farhan in close combat.", "result": "Infuriated by the sight of your fallen friend, and by the treachery that you have witnessed, you jump down from the coach and grab the heavy, unfamiliar blade of a goblinslain soldier.\n\nYou see, from the corners of your eyes, that the guards are approach Farhan Brownhand with drawn weapons, but you ignore them.\n\nThe emissary grins a wicked grin and makes a fast and elegant move, that closes the distance to you and your blade much faster than you could have anticipated.\n\nBy sheer luck, you manage to parry the first of Farhan's blows, but he anticipated the move and brings his blade back in a small circle, cutting deep into your unprotected side.\n\nAs the black, evil-looking blade enters your body, you feel a pain you have never felt before. It is as if your soul itself is torn and shredded by the cold metal, and you utter an inhuman scream.\n\nFeebly, knowing that you are doomed, you wave your own blade towards Farhan, but he nimbly evades the clumsy blow and twists the sword in your side one more.\n\nUnable to bear the pain, you scream once again, and then, feeling your soul drawn out of your body through the wound, everything first fades from red to black to a chilling emptiness...", "action_results": []}, null]}, null]}, {"action": "I quickly launch a spell at him to disrupt his casting.", "result": "Quickly, you close your eyes and stretch your fingers towards Farhan, hurling a small amount of raw magic against him. This is without finesse, and rather taxing, but effective enough.\n\nMaster Brownhand gasps as the pure energy you launched at him hits him, and snarls a curse at you. Obviously, you successfully broke his concentration.\n\nThen, he grabs the dark blade still sticking in Lucius' body, hefts it in his right hand, weaves a protective gesture with his left and advances to the coach you stand upon.\n\nOut of the corner of your eyes, you see the surviving guards, with drawn swords, approach the emissary.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, {"action": "I try to work a dangerous spell against Farhan, trusting my skill to complete it before him.", "result": "You close your eyes, concentrating feverishly on a weave that you know will destroy Farhan Brownhand.\n\nOnly seconds pass, as you prepare to launch the last patterns at your opponent, but he is faster, and a bright light errupts from the emissary's fingers, and hits you in the chest, just as you are about to complete your spell.\n\nWith a searing pain in the chest, Farhan's spell throws you backward from the coach you were standing upon, and you hit the ground below head first, just as you hear a bellow of rage coming from the remaining guards...", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "You are not dead, and you are quite sure of it, because you always heared of death being somewhat of a peaceful slumber. Instead, your head feels like it is going to explode every second now, the world appears to be one of those carroussels you have visited once on a fair near the Academy, and if your stomach wasn't empty already, it would soon be.\n\nWith a groan you open one of your eyes, only to find that the world not only spins like a carroussel, but the flashing lights that dance before your vision also appear to be like the fireworks that often accompany the fairs.\n\nYou have no idea how long you were left there lieing, but when you open your eyes again, you stare into a horrific face, swollen and blurred like a nightmare come true.\n\nYou gasp and wrench from the hands that suddenly grasp your shoulders, only to find that the sudden movement brings an explosion of pain so far unknown to you into your head, and you cannot help but twist to one side, assisted by the hands, and empty your stomach for good, even though all that comes from it is blood and bile, each spasm calling forth another explosion of pain that makes you wish you were, in fact, dead.\n\nA voice calls something you do not understand, and something cold splashes your face.\n\nWhen the spasms stop and the pain subside to barely above tolerable levels again, someone holds a wineskin to your mouth, and greedily you take a gulp, only to choke at the brandy that is now in your mouth.\n\nCoughing, and wincing, you try to sit up, and are assisted once again by the strong hands. You look at who is holding you, and finally, through the tears of pain, your vision clears and you recognize the scarred and bearded face of one of the soldiers who looks at you with some concern.\n\n\"Some concussion y'got there, lad\", he greets you.\n\nAn hour later, when you feel well enough to stand up again, though somewhat shaky - the brandy helped greatly to settle your stomach, there must have been something in it - you take in the scenery.\n\nOnly three guards - and yourself - survived, but the goblins were nearly decimated, and the few survivors fled.\n\nLucius Tarchild and J'Arel Whitefang are both dead, J'Arel obviously the luckier of the two.\n\nBoth were apparently killed by Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, the scarred guard that woke you reports with a scowl. He interrupts his talking, and turns to spit on the ground.\n\nMaster Whitefang was slain by a bolt of lightning summoned by Master Brownhand, and Master Tarchild was slain by a darkly enchanted sword the emissary wielded when he attacked the magus.\n\nFor some reason, the emissary obviously was in league with the goblin horde, and wanted the trek to be exterminated. However, the guards managed to overcome the goblins in time, and faced by the remaining guards, Farhan slew most of them with his magic and then turned to flee.\n\nWhy he did this, the scarred man, who is named Kor, the guards never knew, but they suspect some dark treachery.\n\n\nYou have been unconcious for more than three hours, and it is high time to break the camp, in case Farhan, rested, returns to finish the work the goblins began.\n\nThe animals that drew the coaches are either dead or fled during the ambush, and you have little choice but to leave the place by foot in the twilight that announces nightfall.\n\nKor, obviously a seasoned veteran, is about to order the remaining guards to pack, when he hesitates a moment to look at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "As a Magus, it is on me to lead the group.", "result": "You explain that the duty of leadership is on you, as a Magus.\n\nKor's eyes show quite clearly what he thinks of this, seeing that you're in no shape, but then nods in agreement.\n\nHe grunts something, then hands you some of the evilsmelling brew you were forced to drink earlier, but remembering its healing powers, you eagerly take another swallow.\n\nFeeling the soothing warmth running down your throat, you already feel a lot better, though by no way yourself again.\n\nKor is ready with advice on how to proceed, and you gladly take it.\n\nYou agree that you have to break camp as soon as possible, before Farhan - undoubtedly in a better shape than you - returns to finish his work.\n\nBasically, you only have two choices. You either return to the Academy of Alzur, reporting of Farhan's strange betrayal, or attempt to follow him into the hills, where he likely has fled - Kor reports that he teleported away when the guards charged him, and you know that teleport weaves are hard to pull off and very exhausting, and not even a master Magus could travel very far. And since there is not even a small village or a forest in the near vincinity, it is only sensible to assume Farhan must have fled into the hills.\n\nKor suggests going back to the Academy, reporting the emissary's betrayal and counsel then what to do about it. A sideglance towards you either means that he is concerned about your weakened state and too polite to say so, or that he thinks you too young and inexperienced to even stand the smallest chance against Farhan Brownhand.\n\nBut you are the leader, as you made quite clear, and so the decision is upon you.", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, {"action": "As I am specialized in the powers of Ice, I will attempt to divine the destination of Master Brownhand's teleportation spell.", "result": "You have been unconcious for quite some time, and magical weaves disperse rather quickly, but you are confident to find the remains of such a strong spell as a teleportation.\n\nUpon your request, Kor shows you the place where Farhan Brownhand vanished. Closing your eyes, you concentrate upon your mental senses, and trying to feel the weave that the emissary must have left.\n\nBut to your surprise, you find nothing at all, not even the faintest remains. You ponder this for a moment, and think through all the possibilites.\n\nIt is unlogical that a weave that powerful would not even leave the faintest traces in the pattern of the world, not before a day or three would pass - and unless the guards lied, which you doubt, you were not unconcious for that long.\n\nThe emissary might have not teleported himself away after all, you consider for a moment - but quickly dismiss it, for even the simpler weave of an invisibility spell would leave traces that you could spot without really concentrating.\n\nSo... whatever spell he wove, he must have masked it. This is a difficult feat to do while casting or maintaining a spell yourself, and your respect for Master Brownhand increases despite what he apparently might have done or not.\n\nApparently. Yes. That is a a thought worth thinking through, you consider, your trained logical mind trying to reach into all directions to find answers.\n\nBut you quickly desperse this train of thought, for you see no logic in following it at the moment.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Kor is a seasoned veteran, and I follow his lead.", "result": "As Kor looks at you with the question of leadership in his eyes, you only nod your head to him, and wince at the burst of pain this small movement causes.\n\nNoting it with some concern, one of the other two guards hands you a flask with the same evilsmelling stuff you were forced to drink earlier. Remembering its healing powers, though, you eagerly take a swallow, and the pain clears away nearly immediatley - although the taste remains, and you still not feel yourself.\n\nSeeing you recovered somewhat, Kor speaks to you: \"We'll be headin' back to Alzur, the Academy needs ta know 'bout what happen' here.\"\n\nYou cannot but agree, and although the thought of leaving Farhan behind makes you uncomfortable, you know that you at least are in no position to weave powerful spells at the moment.\n\nWithin the hour, you are packed and prepared for the long journey back to Alzur.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "I will single out the most powerful looking enemies and turn them into cinder.", "result": "You quickly climb upon the coach, to get a better view of the battle.\n\nDecisively, you summon the powers of Fire to channel thin strands of elemental flame into the bodies of the three goblin shamans, which turn immediatley into cinder.\n\nOne goblin has not dropped his bow, and fires an arrow at you, but another thin strand of fire takes care of both the arrow and the archer.\n\nAnother goblin is about to plunge his wicked looking knife into the neck of a soldier, but yelps in pain and drops it as its hilt suddenly glows bright red, which gives the soldier time to dispatch the goblin with a backhand stroke.\n\nWith their shamans dead, the goblins offer little resistance, and their morale is close to breaking point when you notice that Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, is sneaking up behind Lucius, making strange gestures as if invoking a spell.\n\nYou do not know exactly what to think of this, but then again, you are not a pesky Ice adept who needs to think through everything before reaching a decision.\n\nInvoking the Fire again, you settle for a warning shot, and the earth in front of Master Brownhand explodes into flame.\n\nLucius turns around in surprise, but before you can react, Farhan has a slender, evil looking sword out and runs it through the Air adept, who's look turns from surprise to pain.\n\nFarhan lets go off his sword and turns towards you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will weave minor protective charms to support the guards.", "result": "Earth is not your strongest element, but nevertheless you know of charms that prevent blows and knives to find their target.\n\nYou climb up on the coach you rode in to get a better overview, and concentrate on channelling the energies out of the ground, and into the armor and bodies of the soldiers.\nA few twicht uncomfortably as you know they must feel a tingling sensation, but those you enchant this way react surprised when the wicked knives of the goblins glance of their armor and skin without leaving a scratch.\n\nThe weaving of so many minor enchantments costs you a lot of concentration, and after a minute of holding the spell up, you are about to collapse.\n\nThe soldiers, however, have made the best of uses of your spells, and only a few of the goblins are left alive.\n\nSuddenly, Lucius, who has been preventing accidental arrows to break your concentration, screams in pain, breaking your concentration.\n\nBefore the whiplash of the dozens of suddenly broken spells wipe out your mind and cause you to fall into a deep blackness, you see Fahan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, standing behind Lucius, spitting him with an evil looking sword...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will weave a minor charm to slow down the goblins.", "result": "Water is not your most powerful element, but nevertheless you know enough about how to manipulate the fluids in a being to slow it down, hoping that this will give the guards enough advantage to slay the wicked creatures.\n\nYou close your eyes, concentrating, and hoping that Lucius can keep any stray arrows away from you, and channel the unaccustomed energies of Water through your body.\nGently but unstoppable, like the tide, the powers flow into the bodies of your enemies, burdening them, slowing them, and one by one you feel, through your bondage with Water, how the life form of one after the other is destroyed by the soldiers, who use the turn of events.\n\nSo absorbed are you in the unfamiliar enchantment, however, that you do not even hear the warning that Lucius screams to you, and the last memory of living that your soul carries to the netherworld is that of a blinding light and a searing pain, melting your skin and flesh and bones...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will grab a sword from a fallen soldier and join them into the fray.", "result": "Some strange fever grips you, and you grab a heavy looking sword from one of the fallen.\n\nBrandishing it in both hands, you roar out a challenge that comes from the heart, and charge the goblins. Suprised by your fierceness, the goblins shrink back from you, and you cut down two of them before they realize it.\n\n\nHowever, your clothings offer little protection against the barbed knives, and you are soon swarmed by the evil beings. One goblin cuts your sinews from behind, bringing you down to the ground with a scream of rage, and it is only a matter of time before one of the wicked, barbed knives finds the way to your throat and to your heart.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "I am a magus of Air.", "result": "The torrents of Air flow freely through your spirit, and you are determined to use them.\n\nStrangely, you are rather excited than frightened by the prospect of fighting your very first battle. So this is what adventure feels like!", "action_results": [{"action": "I will combine my powers with Lucius, creating gusts of wind to knock down the goblins.", "result": "You step beside Lucius, and begin to channel the energies of Air through your body.\n\nLucius looks at you, and you nod when he takes control of the flows of magic through your body, adding them to his own.\n\nWith no more archers shooting, Lucius forms a giant fist of air from the winds, and pummeling the group of goblins mercilessly.\nWhere the two of you strike with your combined magic, the goblins do not stand up again.\n\nA shaman attempts to cast a counterspell, wrenching the control of the Air around you from Lucius, but he is swatted like a fly, for combined, your magic is too strong to be redirected that easily.\n\nLucius is drawing more and more power through you, and you feel the strain of it.\n\nSuddenly, the bond snaps, and you stare in horror at Lucius' chest, from where an evil looking slender sword is protruding.\n\nThen, something hits your head, and, added by the strain of working powerful magic, you slip into a thoughtless darkness...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "will attempt to use my knowledge of illusion to confuse the goblins, so that they turn upon each other.", "result": "Swiftly you climb up the coach, to get a better view of the battle.\n\nTrusting your fellow Air magus Lucius to protect you from the archers, you begin to delve into the minds of the goblins, twisting the images they see until they appear to each other as their enemies.\n\nGreat is the sudden confusion as the goblins, suddenly panicked by the turning of their former companions into more soldiers, begin to hack and claw at each other.\n\nOne shaman, trying to counter your illusions' effects, is stabbed just in time by a panicking goblin.\n\nThe strain to maintain so many, albeit small, illusions is great for you, and after a minute of the frenzied fighting, you sink to your knees, sweatsoaked.\n\nSuddenly, your concentration is broken by a scream next to you.\n\nWith horror, you see that Lucius has been spitted on an evil looking sword wielded by Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur.\n\nHe lets go of the sword, and turns to you, grinning wickedly.", "action_results": [null]}, null, null, null]}, {"action": "I wield the powers of Water.", "result": "Water, filling you with peace even in the middle of a bloody battle and allowing you to calmly assess the situation, flows strongly in you.\n\nLife will be and has been shed, but this is nothing that you can prevent anylonger. You can only hope that it will not be your life, or that of your allies, though that hope already has been betrayed.\n\nYou briefly wonder about J'Arel's death. The goblin shamans cannot be possibly capable of wielding such magic. But the thought quickly eludes you, for you know you have to act fast and decisively if this battle is to be won.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will use my healing powers to revive the wounded soldiers.", "result": "You scramble up on the coach, to get a better view of the battle.\n\nTo your left, on the ground, is Lucius, protecting you from stray arrows with his power over the winds.\n\nClosing your eyes, you search for the hidden power in yourself, and, finding it, channel it gently out of your body.\n\nTouching the soldiers with the invisible strands of magic you invoke, you revive them and draw their pains away. A few of the wounded ones gasp in surprise, as their wounds close themselves, then they notice you, give you a curt nod of thanks, and launch themselves into the fray.\n\nWhenever the goblins cut down one of the guards, you channel the pure life back into the body of the wounded one. Slowly, the goblins notice that they cannot harm the men, and start to panic.\n\nHowever, the strain of keeping the spells flowing through you is tiring, and so you do not manage to keep your concentration when suddenly, Lucius screams in pain.\n\nHorrified, you see that behind him, Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, has stabbed Lucius in the back with an evil looking sword.\nYou reach for the strands of Water again to channel life back into the Air adepts' body, but it is already devoid of life... you shiver at the implication of that, for the sword must hold terrible and dark powers to vanquish a life with only a casual thrust.\n\nGrinning, Farhan lets go of the sword, and turns towards you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will attempt to strike the enemies with a barrage of magical missiles.", "result": "You quickly climb up the coach to get a better view of the battle.\n\nThere, you concentrate briefly and hurl tiny bolts of pure magicka with deadly precision into the horde of goblins. When struck, the goblins fall down never to get up again.\n\nAs the channeling of combat magic is not exactly your specialization, the feat proves to be very taxing.\nHowever, dozens of goblins fall to your small but deadly precise hail.\n\nThe goblins are close to breaking and turn to flee, when suddenly you are distracted by a scream. Lucius, having prevented that you become the target of those goblin archers that have not yet dropped their bow, is spitted on an evil looking sword.\n\nYou give a start when you realize that it is Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, that wields the blade that has stabbed Lucius into the back.\n\nGrimly, you prepare to channel another two bolts of pure magicka into Farhan's direction, as you remember too late that his bodyguard is always close to him.\n\nA blow on your head drives thoughts of magic away for quite some time, and darkness engulfs you.", "action_results": [null]}, null, null]}, {"action": "I am specialized in Ice.", "result": "The Spark, for you a crystallized snowflake, burns brightly with cool reassurance deep within you.\n\nQuickly you assess the situation.\n\nThe goblins outnumber the surviving soldiers four to one, and even without the goblin's magical assistance in form of the their shamans, your guards will not stand a chance.\n\nThe shamans. Hmm. You would be surprised if one of them was capable of casting such a bolt of lightning as struck down J'Arel, and you are rarely surprised by facts.\n\nSo, there must be another magician close by, and someone quite powerful.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will attempt to divine the source of the lightning bolt that struck down J'Arel.", "result": "Closing your eyes, and trusting that Lucius' winds will shield you from stray arrows, you invoke the ancient runes of Divination, trying to make the magic tell you where the strands of woven magicka, of which the lightning bolt that charred the Fire magus undoubtedly consist, lead to.\n\nThis is a task that requires great concentration for several seconds, but your rigid training helps to fade out the screams of the wounded and dying and the clash of weapons.\n\nIn what is a split second but which feels like an hour to you, your mind picks up the magical weaves of the spell that had been cast, and unravels them.\n\nYou admire the precision and the masterwork, a great lot of energy must have been used up to strike such a powerful bolt of lightning at such precision.\n\nYour mental fingers follow the invisible strands of magic, and you are suprised to find that the origin of the lightning bolt seems to come from the emissary's coach.\n\nYou open your eyes again and break your spell, unsure as how to deal with this piece of information. Looking towards the battle, you see that the guards are in serious trouble dealing with the goblins.\n\nYou have to act quick.", "action_results": [{"action": "I ignore the information, and hurl shards of ice towards the goblins.", "result": "With cold fury upon witnessing the slaughter of the guards, you cast out your arms and hands, and hurl shards of ice into the goblin horde, where they explode into tiny slivers that burn with unnatural cold.\n\nThose goblins that are hit by the large shards themselves fall down never to get up again. Those burned by the cold splinters scream in pain and are swiftly dispatched by the soldiers which have been looking for just an opportunity.\n\nTwo more shards of ice strike down the shamans busily trying to heal their goblin fighters.\n\nThey goblins are close to routing, as suddenly, you sense someone behind you. You turn, and the last thing you hear before your vision fades to black is Lucius' inhuman scream on the other side of the coach...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I ignore the information, and cause the ground under the goblins' feet to turn to ice, so that they stumble and fall.", "result": "You climb up on the coach, which is the best strategical position you can hope to achieve.\n\nLucius is protecting you from any stray arrows with his command over Air, and from here, you have the best overview.\n\nYou study the patterns of the goblin horde for a second, and then reach into yourself to draw out the powers that the Spark grants you.\n\nMumbling the necessary incantations and pointing your fingers at the fight, you allow the magical energies to escape your body and channel them to the ground below.\n\nYour efforts are rewarded by a cry out outrage, as the first goblin slips and stabs itself on the knife of a companion. This causes a chainreaction, from which the guards of the treck unfortunately are not unaffected, yet their armor protects them from the flailing, now unprecise stings of the goblins' knives.\n\nLucius, seeing what you have done, directs his winds to topple the remaining standing goblins, and keeping those down that try to righten themselves again, and the guards begin to easily dispatch their smaller enemies.\n\nBut suddenly, Lucius' screams in anguish, louder than the shrieks of the panicking goblins, and as you turn to him in surprise, you see that Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, has stabbed Lucius in the back with an evil looking sword.\n\nYou are unsure of the meaning of this, a situation you are not used to, but you decide to prepare a spell against Farhan when you see his malicious grin as he turns towards you, leaving his sword sticking in Lucius' crumpled body.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will investigate the emissary's coach.", "result": "As you approach the coach, oblivious to the screams for mercy from the battle, the coach's door is openend.\n\nFarhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, exits the coach, brandishing an evil looking, black sword. Directly behind him is his bodyguard, a nondescript man you would not give a second glance on a street, who looks startled at you.\n\nBehind you, you hear Lucius scream, as a small group of goblins throw themselves at the magus, and as you are about to turn, Farhan's bodyguard is behind you with three quick steps, and then, with a stinging pain on your neck, your senses fade to darkness.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "The powers of Earth are mine to command.", "result": "The rythm of nature, which for you manifests in the Spark, is strong in you.\n\nThe Earth will be watered with blood, and there is nothing you can do to prevent this.\nHowever, you can still protect those of your allies that have not yet fallen, and you are determined to see that victory, even against the odds, is yours.", "action_results": [{"action": "I will enchant the guards with the protection of Earth.", "result": "Trusting Lucius to deflect the stray arrows directed at you with his command over Air, you scramble clumsily up the top of the coach, to get a better overview of the battlefield.\n\nThe fighting looks grim, all of the remaining handful of guards are bleeding from dozens of wounds, while the goblin shamans take care that many of those goblins cut down leap back on their feet.\n\nDetermined, you act quickly, closing your eyes and drawing the powers from the bowels of the\nEarth herself, channeling it gently up the guards' bodies, turning their skin hard as iron.\n\nThe guards, at first surprised that the goblins' knives seem to be deflected by their suddenly hard skin, renew the ferocity of their attacks, and the goblin shamans cannot heal their companions quick enough.\n\nIt is rather difficult for you to command so many weaves at once, for every time one of your fellow soldiers is hit, it saps a bit of your mental powers to upkeep the enchantment, but you are determined not to let another of your companions fall to the wicked goblin blades.\n\nThe goblins, suddenly facing an enemy they cannot hope to defeat, are close to breaking point, when suddenly, your concentration is broken by a terrible scream.\n\nYou turn your attention towards Lucius, and see, to your horror, that your companion and friend is spitted on a black and evil looking sword wielded by Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur.\n\nWith the sword's tip coming through his chest, Lucius falls openmouthed and -eyed on the ground, and Master Brownhand lets go of the blade, and turns with a wicked grin towards you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will send a call to the animals of the hills and plains to come and assist us.", "result": "Leaning against one side of the coach, you close your eyes and send out a call of help to all things attuned to Earth.\n\nYou project your own image, and that off the goblins, stinking, poisoning the earth with their mere foul existence.\n\nAnd your call is answered.\n\nSuddenly, a howl errupts from the hills, a group of wolves coming for a brother in need. Both the goblins and the guards, engulfed in deadly close combat, appear to be startled by the cries of the wolves, but they quickly catch themselves again.\n\nThen, the first goblin shaman is brought down with a single, powerful bite in the neck by a large, black wolf, who you easily identify as the leader of the pack.\n\nYou channel your powers of earth to deflect the goblins' knives from the hides of your friends, both animal and human, and the few surviving goblins turn to flee after a mere minute, as more and more wolves join the battle.\n\nThe wolves turn to pursuit the foul creatures, but not before the large black wolf catches your eyes and emits a deep growl. You understand perfectly: Brothers are there for each other, but this is a mutual responsibility. With this, the pack leader turns off to follow the rest of the pack, leaving the dazzled guards behind.\n\nYou move towards the fallen, seeing if you can do anything about their wounds, when suddenly Lucius screams with pain, and suddenly, your vision fades to black when something hard and heavy hits your head... from behind...", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "You are not dead, and you are quite sure of it, because you always heared of death being somewhat of a peaceful slumber. Instead, your head feels like it is going to explode every second now, the world appears to be one of those carroussels you have visited once on a fair near the Academy, and if your stomach wasn't empty already, it would soon be.\n\nWith a groan you open one of your eyes, only to find that the world not only spins like a carroussel, but the flashing lights that dance before your vision also appear to be like the fireworks that often accompany the fairs.\n\nYou have no idea how long you were left there lieing, but when you open your eyes again, you stare into a horrific face, swollen and blurred like a nightmare come true.\n\nYou gasp and wrench from the hands that suddenly grasp your shoulders, only to find that the sudden movement brings an explosion of pain so far unknown to you into your head, and you cannot help but twist to one side, assisted by the hands, and empty your stomach for good, even though all that comes from it is blood and bile, each spasm calling forth another explosion of pain that makes you wish you were, in fact, dead.\n\nA voice calls something you do not understand, and something cold splashes your face.\n\nWhen the spasms stop and the pain subside to barely above tolerable levels again, someone holds a wineskin to your mouth, and greedily you take a gulp, only to choke at the brandy that is now in your mouth.\n\nCoughing, and wincing, you try to sit up, and are assisted once again by the strong hands. You look at who is holding you, and finally, through the tears of pain, your vision clears and you recognize the scarred and bearded face of one of the soldiers who looks at you with some concern.\n\n\"Some concussion y'got there, lad\", he greets you.\n\nAn hour later, when you feel well enough to stand up again, though somewhat shaky - the brandy helped greatly to settle your stomach, there must have been something in it - you take in the scenery.\n\nOnly three guards - and yourself - survived, but the goblins were nearly decimated, and the few survivors fled, followed by the wolves you summoned, the scarred man adds with a sideglance at you.\n\nLucius Tarchild and J'Arel Whitefang are both dead, J'Arel obviously the luckier of the two.\n\nBoth were apparently killed by Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, the scarred guard that woke you reports with a scowl. He interrupts his talking, and turns to spit on the ground.\n\nMaster Whitefang was slain by a bolt of lightning summoned by Master Brownhand, and Master Tarchild was slain by a darkly enchanted sword the emissary wielded when he attacked the magus.\n\nFor some reason, the emissary obviously was in league with the goblin horde, and wanted the trek to be exterminated. However, the guards - with the help of the black wolf's pack - managed to overcome the goblins in time, and faced by the remaining guards, Farhan slew most of them with his magic and then turned to flee.\n\nWhy he did this, the scarred man, who is named Kor, the guards never knew, but they suspect some dark treachery.\n\n\nYou have been unconcious for more than three hours, and it is high time to break the camp, in case Farhan, rested, returns to finish the work the goblins began.\n\nThe animals that drew the coaches are either dead or fled during the ambush, and you have little choice but to leave the place by foot in the twilight that announces nightfall.\n\nKor, obviously a seasoned veteran, is about to order the remaining guards to pack, when he hesitates a moment to look at you.\n\nSuddenly, a growl makes both of you look around.\n\nThe black wolf, a majestic animal, is standing at the corner of the battlefield.\n\nOne of the guards warily raises his weapon, but you call him to drop it. Ignoring the guard, the wolf casually and gracefully steps up to you.\n\nHe sniffs the air, then turns and heads of to the hills, turning his head just once to see if you follow him, then turns again to walk away.\n\nKor and the other two stare after him with distrust in their eyes.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "I ignore the wolf, and, as a Magus, it is on me to lead the group.", "result": "With a stab of bad conscience because of neglecting to repay a favour done, you are nevertheless certain that you have to cast the role of leadership on your shoulders.\n\nWearily, you explain to Kor that, as a Magus, it is your duty to lead the group, but you welcome his advice on what to do next.\n\nWith a cursory glance at you, he nods and agrees - you are the remaining Magus of the group, even though you lack the experience.\n\nSatisfied that you are not chasing after some animal, Kor advises that you return to the Academy of Alzur and make sure reports of Master Brownhand's treachery reach the council.\n\nBasically, you only have two choices anyway. You can attempt to follow Farhan into the hills - a teleportation weave, as he has likely used to make his getaway, as the guards describe to you, is a very taxing spell, and it cannot be used to cover large distances. And since the plains offer no hideout whatsoever in the near vincinity, tthe assumption he has fled into the hills lies close at hand.\n\nOn the other hand, it is also vitally important, as Kor suggests, to head back to Alzur to report to the council of the Academy of Master Brownhand's strange treason. Both of you still have no idea why he would have done something like that.\n\nThe decision on how to go on is on you, though. Kor makes his point that you are in no position to face down Farhan - even if you find him -, and neither are the men.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, null]}]}, null, null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "I will leave the coach, weaving offensive magic to support the guards.", "result": "As J'Arel, suddenly engulfed in a flaming aura, leaps out of the coach, you take the exit on the other side.\n\nImmediatley you find yourself dodging panicked horses and stray arrows. Before you get your bearing, a loud crackle is heared, and something like lightning seems to strike nearby. A piercing scream barely recognizable as human tells you that the lightning must have found a target - it came from J'Arel's side of the coach.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "I will stay in the coach, preparing defensive spells before joining the fray.", "result": "Lucius and J'Arel both leap out of the coach, the Air magus to the left, and J'Arel to the right.\n\nYou prepare to cast a minor enchantment to ward blows and strayed arrows on yourself, feeling that you do not have the time for more.\n\nJ'Arel is already hurling fiery balls of flame into the general direction the surviving soldiers are charging, and when sudden gusts of wind rock the coach, you know that Lucius is busy trying to prevent the arrows finding their targets.\n\nAs you close your eyes to murmur the final incantation, something incredible bright strikes close to you with loud thunder and a pierced scream, and when you open your eyes again, you see that where J'Arel stood, the ground is charred.\n\nNot waiting any longer, you leap out of the coach.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "I will cast a minor spell which allows the air to carry the sound to my ear. [You can do that even without being specialized in Air.]", "result": "You mouth the charm to cause the wind carrying the syllables of the captain to your ear.\n\n\"...tracks! But did no follow 'em. 's gettin' dark in four hours, now jez be campin now, afore we getta beatin\", the captain of the scouts says.\nYou cannot make out the full reply, only catching a few words: \"...plan... alliance with... no harm come... not bandits...\"\n\nThen you notice that J'Arel is staring at you with unhidden curiousity, and are just about to comment, when Lucius, who had been riding on the top of the coach, opens the door and breaks your concentration sufficently to drop the spell.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "\"I don't think I like your attitude, J'Arel.\"", "result": "\"I don't think I like your attidue, J'Arel\", you reply.\n\nJ'Arel only snorts, and answers:\n\"And this would be your problem, or mine?\"\n\nYou choke back the angry answer that lies on your tongue. After all, you are supposed to guard the emissary in case of an attack, and not squabble with a fellow magician.\n\nWith a dirty glance towards J'Arel, you decide to let the point rest for now.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "\"Can you tell me anything about the emissary?\"", "result": "\"Less than you, I suppose,\" J'Arel answers, then sighs and shakes his head.\n\"I heared he's a powerful mage himself. I don't know why we're to accompany him, Master Brownhand is said to be capable of taking care of himself.\"\n\n\"If I were you, I would rather worry about the road that lies ahead than about or passengers. The road will be getting a lot worse the next days, and when we reach the outskirts of Thalun Forest in two days, who knows what will await us in these ancient, dark and magical woods...\" His voice is getting dark and foreboding, and then he suddenly breaks into laughter.\n\n\"Peasants' superstition. Likely some bandits roam the Woods, and that's the reason why lone travellers sometimes are never seen again.\"\n\nHe grins, and forms a magical gesture with his left palm, upon which a blueish flame appears there, a ball of pure energy powerful enough to burn through a tree when hurled with enough force.\n\n\"However, we are no lone travellers\", he adds, his malicious grin broadening. Then, he claps his hands together, and the flame vanishes.\n\n\"I doubt that some ragged band of bandits is going to choose us as our target anyway,\" he says, sounding disappointed. \"Those soldiers look like excellent fighters, and I am certain the bandits will see this as well.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "I will use the time to study the landscape, as I have never been so far from Alzura before.", "result": "There are fewer and fewer fields with toiling peasants, this far away from Alzur's protecting arms. The road snakes through terrain that is, plain spoken, rather boring.\n\nYour thirst for adventure is already seriously dampened - the coach, while preferable to a day on horseback, simply does not beat walking. Anyhow, through the smallish windows, you cannot see much anyway.\n\nSighing, you turn away from the plain fields, and wish for a book. However, the librarians of the Academy, while usually rather lenient when it came to you, were firm on the fact that no books would leave Alzur. Most likely, they were worried that in foreign lands, people would eat books.\n\nYou cannot stiffle your curiousity how the city of Khofte looks like. But that is still a good week ahead, and you suppose that you are dead by boredom until then.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "I consider taking a nap, so that the time will go by faster.", "result": "The best way to pass the boring time until you reach a place to make camp, you think, is to close your eyes and hope that sleep will bring some sort of distraction.\n\nThe rocking motion and lurch of the coach is enough to nearly make you seasick, and the hard, unpolstered wood you sit upon make your task not easier.", "action_results": [{"action": "I am specialized in Water.", "result": "You close your eyes, and take a deep, calm breath.\nYou have learned the art of meditation as a matter to contemplate the greater wisdom of life, but you feel no remorse upon using a technique for such a minor comfort as sleep.\n\nUsing a subtle pattern in the rolling and lurching of the coach upon the uneven road, your mind drowns out any disturbances and washes you away into a tide of sleep...", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "A scream of rage - or pain - pierces through your meditative rest, capable of shaking you out of your sleep immediatley.\n\nJ'Arel grins at you, engulfed in a fiery aura you recognize as a protection spell, and says mockingly:\n\"Ah, the sleepyhead is awake for the fray. Well, hop to it... there's some cooking to do.\"\n\nWith this he leaps out of the coach, and hurls a fireball into a direction unseen by you.\n\nScreams of pain and bellowed commands can be heared from the outside, and there is the singing of arrows in the sky.\n\nSudden gusts of wind rock the coach, but you quickly realize that this must be Lucius, commanding the Air to ward of the arrows. The guards, of which you can see quite a few dead, spiked with black arrows, charge into the direction J'Arel hurled his ball of fire.\n\nBefore you can react, a lightning suddenly strikes J'Arel, and burns the adept of Fire into a heap of ashes, but not before you can hear his piercing scream.\n\nYou decide that there are not many options open to you, so you leap out of the coach to at least see who, or what, is attacking the emissary's treck...", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "This is not the case.", "result": "The rattling and lurching of the coach prevents you from finding a restful position, and you are forced to admit that sleep is not an option while the coach is moving on this so-called road.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "I will simply cast a minor charm on myself, which will allow me to sleep soundly.", "result": "While you have not extensively studied the ways of Water, you still know a few minor charms of that element.\n\nResting a body and mind so that it will drift into sleep is one of them, and it is easy to do so when the target of the spell is willing.\n\nYou concentrate briefly, put the index and middle fingers of each of your hands on each eye and invoke the powers within you.\n\nImmediatley, calm and peace rush into you, and wash away all distractions. Even the hard wood you are sitting upon is no longer so worrisome.\n\nGently you drift into sleep...", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story25.json b/data/scraper/stories/story25.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..df2c09f --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story25.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=8041", "context": "", "first_story_block": "This is no way to live.\n\nWorking on a barely profitable rundown farm with far too many family members to feed. It\u2019s a damn good thing you\u2019re an excellent hunter. However, lately there\u2019s even been a shortage of game to thwart your efforts.\n\nYou didn\u2019t really want to be working on the farm your whole life in the first place, you wanted to see the world but when dad died, things got a lot harder for the family and you had to take over as \u201cman\u201d of the house and stay put.\n\nSomething is going to have to change.\n\nWhile you\u2019d like nothing more than to go through with your childhood dreams of becoming a traveling bard without any responsibility you don\u2019t have that luxury. Hell, you barely have time to play your lute anymore in the small amount of free time you do have. You doubt if you\u2019d even be good enough to make a living for just yourself doing it.\n\nBut you need to get away, but what can you do that won\u2019t allow you to completely abandon your mom and all your brothers and sisters?\n\nYou suddenly think of the choice that many in your desperate position have thought of many times before.\n\nThe army.\n\nIts not exactly ideal, but you be traveling and seeing the world so to speak. You\u2019d also be making enough money that you could send to your family. Your own living expenses would be provided for by the army.\n\nOf course there\u2019s all that fighting that usually goes along with it that you\u2019re not to keen on. Not that you aren\u2019t a stranger to battle as their have been the occasional bandits or kobold thieves that have attempted to steal from the farm in the past, but you prefer not to fight if possible, especially not up close. The bow has always been your weapon of choice. There\u2019s also the matter of mass combat on a grand scale that usually accompanies army life. A lot different than chasing away some thieves in the chicken coop.\n\nAs you\u2019re thinking about this, you also realize that there is another option. There\u2019s a small mercenary company passing through the area. They\u2019ve been hanging out at the local tavern for a couple days. They don\u2019t seem to be the noblest sort from what you can tell, but fortunately they seem to have kept their revelry confined to the tavern. Who knows how they act away from \u201ccivilization\u201d though.\n\nStill, it\u2019s something to consider. There probably is less attention to discipline and a little more relaxed on rules and regulations. You probably wouldn\u2019t be fighting in some mass land war that governments are fond of waging. Mercenaries travel a lot and tend to make more, however they tend to get hired for a lot weirder jobs, usually ones that the employer doesn\u2019t want people to know about or ones that nobody else seems to be able to handle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Enlist in the army", "result": "Well, as much as you\u2019re going to hate the whole uniform thing, you\u2019d rather there be some sort of guidelines. The mercenaries look like a rough bunch. You get the impression\nyou\u2019d have to be watching your back as much as your enemies if you signed up with them.\n\nYou explain your decision to join the army to the family one night at dinner. Your revelation comes as a shock. Your smaller brothers and sisters don\u2019t want you to go, your\nbrother Mallack really doesn\u2019t want you to leave since he\u2019ll be next in line to take the brunt of the manual labor!\n\nYour mother surprises you as much as you surprised everyone else. You expected her to be the most vocal about you not leaving, but she sees that this would help out the family. She gives her blessing.\n\nBefore you leave the next day with your packed belongings, your whole family comes to say goodbye to you. You almost hesitate to leave, wondering if it would actually be better for you to stay, but your mother urges you on.\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t worry! Mallack is old enough to take over your responsibilities on the farm. He\u2019s not quite as skilled of a hunter, but he\u2019ll be able to do it. I\u2019ve always known that you\u2019ve had a desire to travel. The army isn\u2019t an ideal life I hope you realize though.\u201d Your mom says.\n\u201cYeah, I know, but I\u2019ve thought it through.\u201d\n\u201cVery well, you\u2019re old enough to make your own decisions and live your own life, though I\u2019m glad to see that you still want to help the family as opposed to just leaving in the middle of the night.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019ll start sending money as soon as possible. I\u2019ll also try to write and visit when I can.\u201d\n\u201cI know\u2026okay, you best get going. It\u2019s still quite a walk to the capitol.\u201d\n\nYou begin to leave the farm as your family wave goodbye to you in the distance.\n\nSoon you\u2019re on the road to your nation\u2019s capitol. You\u2019ve been to Zal once before a long time ago with your dad when he was trying to sell some kobold eyes to an alchemist there. You remember being overwhelmed with how many people lived there and how big it was. You always did want to go there again one day; you just didn\u2019t think it would be to enlist in the army.\n\nEventually you arrive at Zal. The place is even bigger than the last time you came here. So much has changed and you\u2019re a little overwhelmed. You don\u2019t have any knowledge of the city so you ask the gate guard who is giving a watchful look to everyone coming in and out.\n\n\u201cExcuse me\u2026\u201d\n\u201dWhadda ya want peasant? I\u2019m busy! Market square is three blocks down as soon as you get inside the gate here!\u201d The guard snaps.\n\u201cNo, I was wondering where I could enlist in the army.\u201d\n\nThe guard seems to change his tone to a somewhat more cordial tone.\n\n\u201cOh I see. Well, as soon as you go through the gate, take a left, and walk two blocks. The recruiting office is on the right hand side across from a general store.\u201d\n\nYou thank him and proceed, but you can\u2019t help overhearing the guard laughing to his buddy as you walk away. You don\u2019t make out all of it, but \u201cDumb fucking hayseed peasant.\u201d was definitely in there.\n\nAt last you arrive at the recruiting office. The man sitting at the desk looks bored at first, but perks up a bit when he sees you.\n\n\u201cWell now, this is a nice break in the monotony. Have a seat.\u201d\n\u201cI want to enlist in the army.\u201d\n\u201cWell of course you do son, why else would you be here? To join the Zalan Empire\u2019s best right? Okay, but before we start I need to ask you some questions just so we can get a feel of where we think you\u2019ll best serve in the Emperor\u2019s glorious army.\u201d\n\u201cUh, okay.\u201d\n\u201cGood, so where are you from son? You certainly don\u2019t look like you\u2019re from the city here. You look like a farmer.\u201d\n\u201cWell I sort of am sir. My family owns a farm a couple miles from the city, I decided to enlist to help my family monetarily. Times are hard on the farm.\u201d\n\u201cMmm, noble of you. Your sense of duty will also serve you well too. Any combat experience?\u201d\n\u201cSome, but nothing major I\u2019m afraid. A few bandits. Kobolds in the chicken coop. That\u2019s about it.\u201d\n\u201cDon\u2019t worry you\u2019ll learn to be a killing machine, but your past experience are more than some we\u2019ve recruited. Any other talents?\u201d\n\u201cBesides farming? Um\u2026I\u2019m a good hunter, I use this bow all the time!\u201d you say and show the recruiter your worn bow.\n\u201cGood. Good. We can always use good marksmen. But you\u2019ll get the chance to use a better bow than that old thing you\u2019ve been carrying around. What\u2019s that other thing on your back?\u201d\n\u201cOh this? Well this is my uh lute.\u201d\n\u201cLute? Ha ha! You a bard or something?\u201d\n\u201cWell not really, but\u2026\u201d\n\u201cYou planning on charming the enemies with your music?\u201d\n\u201cUh\u2026\u201d you say begin to get a little anxious.\n\u201cHah! Settle down son, I\u2019m just messing with you. But I\u2019m afraid whatever your musical hobbies may be you\u2019ll most likely be abandoning them. Can\u2019t be picking your lute while an angry ogre is charging at you or you\u2019re storming a castle. This is the army, not an entertainment company!\u201d\n\nThe recruiter at this point begins to look through some papers and grabs one after looking it over.\n\n\u201cAh. Here it is\u2026you know how to read and write?\u201d\n\u201cYES!\u201d you say indignantly for the first time.\n\u201cOkay, okay, don\u2019t get testy. Its just most of you peasant farmer types don\u2019t. Anyway just sign here and we\u2019ll get you started on your basic training.\u201d\n\nYou take the paper, and give it a pointless look over like you actually understand all the legal mumbo jumbo and sign. The recruiter takes the paper from you and then shakes your hand.\n\n\u201cCongratulations son! You\u2019re in the Zalan Army now! The best damn one in this world!\u201d\n\nSomehow he\u2019s more enthusiastic than you are\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "It's boot camp for you!", "result": "6 months pass\u2026\n\nSix months of the most grueling physical training you\u2019ve ever had the misfortune of dealing with! However you fared better than some of your fellow cadets. Guess all that farm living paid off.\n\nYou\u2019ve certainly improved what combat skills you had, but your marksmanship has improved greatly. You know that Drill Sergeant Kosser has been paying special attention to your abilities. You\u2019re not sure if that\u2019s a good thing of not.\n\nIn any event you\u2019re being told where your first assignment is going to be. Most of those in your group are being sent to Tulan border. Not the most pleasant assignment. The fighting is getting worse there.\n\nWhat started as a minor border dispute has turned into a series of battles with neither side making too much progress. Even before you joined the military you\u2019d heard stories of the greedy king who runs the Tulan Kingdom. You heard from traveling merchants about how he allows a few demons to walk around in his lands! Utter madness in your opinion. The Zalan Empire might be a little strict on the rules and regulations, but better that than demons letting walking around, in your opinion they should all be killed on sight regardless on whether they\u2019re obeying the \u201claw\u201d or not, they\u2019re evil.\n\nYou sit anxious on your bed in the barracks as name after name gets called off. Finally Kosser calls off your name, and you fully expect to get sent to the Tulan border.\n\n\u201cI want to talk to you in private.\u201d Is what you hear instead.\n\nThis makes you even more nervous. What\u2019s he going to do? Send you on? A mission to assassinate the Tulan King?\n\nAfter everyone else has gotten there assignments you follow Kosser back to his office. He sits down and speaks direct.\n\n\u201cAlright farmboy, I\u2019m sure you\u2019ve noticed me watching your marksmanship skills. You\u2019re one of the best ones that have come in here for awhile. You have a natural talent and you\u2019ve only improved it through training. It would be a blessing to have someone like you up at the Tulan border. The gods know we could use anything to help break the stalemate there.\u201d\n\u201c\u2026but?\u201d you ask hoping that there is one.\n\u201cBut\u2026your skills might be better served in a place that has a better mortality rate, yet still needs taking care of.\u201d\n\u201cWhere\u2019s that sir?\u201d\n\u201cHere.\u201d Kosser points to a map to a nearby location. It\u2019s the Retlad Kingdom. You can\u2019t imagine what\u2019s going on there, since as far as you know, you\u2019re Zalan is at peace with them.\n\u201cRetlad? I thought we\u2019re at peace with them?\u201d\n\u201cWe are\u2026in fact rumors are saying we\u2019ll probably incorporate them into the empire in the near future. I dunno how much you know about politics out there on the farm, but Retlad is basically a bankrupt kingdom. Their dumb ass royalty spent a shitload of their treasury on building ships in some vain attempt to find more land mass on this world. Hah! Doesn\u2019t exist! We learned than centuries ago! Anyway now they don\u2019t have enough to pay for a proper military and their kingdom is being overrun by hostile Quillar tribes. They want us to help. Begging us practically and we have, but it\u2019s a pain in the ass. Quillars are fast and as their name suggests shoot multiple sharp quills at their enemies. I\u2019ve seen them go through plate armor.\u201d\n\u201cThat doesn\u2019t sound good.\u201d\n\u201cNo, it\u2019s not good. The Retlad knight orders got decimated within two months of the first invasion wave. We\u2019re taking a better approach. We need to have equally quick troops that can at least match the fire power. We\u2019ve sent a couple of war wizards, but most of them are serving on the Tulan border. Gunpower weapons are a little too slow for this sort of thing, so we\u2019re looking for people good with a bow. Quick enough to at least get a few shots off from a distance and run. Because hit and run tactics are what the Quillars excel at, so you\u2019ll have to do likewise.\u201d\n\nKosser pauses his talking for a moment. You take this opportunity to interject a question.\n\n\u201cAnd this assignment you say has a lower mortality rate?\u201d\n\u201cWell, we haven\u2019t sent as many people there yet, but so far we\u2019ve made a little more progress there than at the Tulan border. But of course I won\u2019t say it\u2019s a safe assignment. Those Quillar bastards are vicious and merciless. Up to you farmboy. You\u2019re getting a bonus here. You\u2019re actually getting to choose your assignment. Not many that get out of boot camp get that privilege.\u201d\n\nSome \u201cprivilege\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Tulan Border", "result": "You don\u2019t like the sound of the Quillars and it doesn\u2019t really sound all that much safer. You decide that at the Tulan border you\u2019ll at least be with a few people you already know from boot camp and you\u2019ll be fighting something less scary. (Or at least human)\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll take the Tulan Border assignment sir.\u201d\n\u201cHm, I\u2019m surprised. Hope your skills come in of some use there. Here\u2019s your first month\u2019s pay, I suggest you live it up here in Zal, for the couple of days you have off before you leave.\u201d\n\nYou take the small bag and look inside. This will certainly help your family. You take a few coins for yourself and then ask if arrangements can be made to have your payment sent to your family from now on. He tells you yes, but asks that surely that you will still want some of it. You agree to just taking 10% of it. You don\u2019t need much.\n\n\u201cSheesh, living bare minimum huh? Don\u2019t you want to eat anything other than military rations every once in awhile?\u201d Kosser questions again.\n\u201cNah. If I need extra food, I\u2019ll just hunt.\u201d\n\u201cYou know there aren\u2019t many luxuries on the border, but when a traveling merchant shows up, you might regret not having enough money. You sure you don\u2019t want more?\u201d\n\u201cNope. I\u2019ll be fine. My family needs that money more than I do.\u201d\n\u201cAlright then, family man.\u201d\n\nYou exit the barracks and wander the city a bit. You find it very interesting. You sort of wish you could stay longer to take in more sights. However one thing catches your eye. A small store and in the window is a lute. Looks almost like the one you had before it was taken away from you in basic training. You haven\u2019t gotten a chance to play in six months and you\u2019d really like to\u2026\n\nHey you\u2019re a soldier now, you\u2019ve proven yourself. You figure you can take one personal belonging with you to Tulan as long as you keep them packed properly. You enter the store and with the little money you have you buy the lute. You spend the most of the day and the next practicing it. You didn\u2019t forget as much as you thought. You also finish up writing a letter to your family and give it to a Zalan messenger carrier.\n\nFinally the third day arrives for you to move out. A couple of officers arrive to take all of you. You\u2019re stopped though as you\u2019re picked out.\n\n\u201cHold up you. What\u2019s that?\u201d\n\u201cIt\u2019s a lute sir.\u201d\n\u201cA lute? What the fuck do you think this is? An acting company? Get rid of that thing, you won\u2019t be needing that where you\u2019re going!\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026\u201d\n\u201cYou disobeying me soldier?\u201d\n\u201cNo sir!\u201d\n\u201cAlright then, get rid of it!\u201d\n\nYou sadly get rid of your lute which you never got to play and basically wasted your money on. You don\u2019t know what you were thinking anyway. You\u2019re in the damn army. You\u2019re going to be doing a lot of fighting and all of that, not playing some stupid instrument. You should\u2019ve realized that the first time it was taken away from you in boot camp.\n\nYou\u2019ve made this choice; you need to just put these dreams of being a \u201cmusician\u201d out of your head right now. You weren\u2019t meant to be one, and all those years of deluding yourself in between real work were just fleeting dreams of a teenager. Time to grow up.\n\nWhile you resign yourself to this mindset, you aren\u2019t particularly happy with it. When you get to the Tulan Border you\u2019re even less happy. Your first battle is filled with all the bad stuff that usually accompanies such things. It\u2019s definitely not a fun assignment and your only consolation is that you know your family is getting more financial aid for you doing this.\n\nAfter a few months, you\u2019re absolutely miserable. You don\u2019t have your music to keep your mind off of the conditions and everything is bad here. The fort you\u2019re currently stationed at supplies only the bare minimum of living, no magical back up, the captain is a real asshole and the rest of those you serve with aren\u2019t too much better. Though so many are killed everyday that you never really grow to dislike (or like) anyone that much in that department. More are sent in and more die, it\u2019s like an ongoing cycle, everyone\u2019s so expendable in this ongoing border war that gets worse with each passing month.\n\nIt doesn\u2019t even come to your surprise when the day comes that you\u2019re mortally wounded while on patrol. One of the new soldiers tells you to hold on and that he\u2019ll get help, but you know he won\u2019t get any in time and it wouldn\u2019t matter anyway.\n\nAs you lay dying, your only regret is that you didn\u2019t get to play music like you always wanted to, and now you never will.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go to the Retlad Kingdom", "result": "You\u2019ve never even heard of Quillars before, but they still sound less dangerous than the Tulan Border, that place is only going to get worse, you know it.\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll take the Retlad assignment sir.\u201d\n\u201cHm. Smart. Here\u2019s your first month\u2019s pay, I suggest you live it up here in Zal, for the couple of days you have off before you leave.\u201d\n\nYou take the small bag and look inside. This will certainly help your family. You take a few coins for yourself and then ask if arrangements can be made to have your payment sent to your family from now on. He tells you yes, but asks that surely that you will still want some of it. You agree to just taking 10% of it. You don\u2019t need much.\n\n\u201cSheesh, living bare minimum huh? Don\u2019t you want to eat anything other than military rations every once in awhile?\u201d Kosser questions again.\n\u201cNah. If I need extra food, I\u2019ll just hunt.\u201d\n\u201cYou know even the booze and brothel girls in Retlad aren\u2019t THAT cheap. You sure you don\u2019t want more?\u201d\n\u201cNope. I\u2019ll be fine. My family needs that money more than I do.\u201d\n\u201cAlright then, family man.\u201d\n\nYou exit the barracks and wander the city a bit. You find it very interesting. You sort of wish you could stay longer to take in more sights. However one thing catches your eye. A small store and in the window is a lute. Looks almost like the one you had before it was taken away from you in basic training. You haven\u2019t gotten a chance to play in six months and you\u2019d really like to\u2026\n\nHey you\u2019re a soldier now, you\u2019ve proven yourself. You figure you can take one personal belonging with you to Retlad as long as you keep them packed properly. You enter the store and with the little money you have you buy the lute. You spend the most of the day and the next practicing it. You didn\u2019t forget as much as you thought. You also finish up writing a letter to your family and give it to a Zalan messenger carrier.\n\nFinally the third day arrives for you to move out. A couple of officers arrive to take most of your other fellow cadets. Mostly to the Tulan border, however, it would appear you have a different escort. A young man in loose robe approaches you. He looks like a wizard, but you wonder for how long since he seems about your age.\n\n\u201cHey, are you the one going to the Retlad Kingdom?\u201d he asks\n\u201cYeah, who are you?\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m Wessel. And don\u2019t you dare get cute and call me weasel, or I\u2019ll have to blast you with a lightning bolt.\u201d\n\u201cI wasn\u2019t planning on it.\u201d You say which causes Wessel to start laughing.\n\u201cGeez, I was just fucking with you. Don\u2019t be so serious! So you ready to go?\u201d\n\u201cYeah I guess, are you my superior officer?\u201d\n\u201cHuh? Oh no. Look I got our horses waiting outside; we can do all this getting to know you stuff on the way.\u201d\n\nYou and Wessel get on the horses and ride towards your destination. It would appear that you\u2019re the only one from your group to be going, but of course you were the only expert marksman.\n\nWessel begins to tell you more about why he\u2019s with you. In fact he doesn\u2019t really let you do much talking at all. He says he\u2019s a native citizen of the Zalan Empire, but he just graduated from the esteemed magic university in the city state of Nuro. Wessel goes on to and says that when he heard they needed a few wizard over in Retlad, he decided to volunteer to test his skills and get paid while doing it. He explains that the pair of you will be following the orders of a Captain Vhalat.\n\nEveryone knows about Nuro. It\u2019s very famous, and you always wondered what kind of magical wonders existed there, so you\u2019re eager to hear more and he\u2019s all too happy to tell you. Despite Wessel\u2019s primary focus on himself, it sounds like a place you\u2019d want to visit one day.\n\nEventually you arrive at the border and so far the Retlad Kingdom doesn\u2019t look very well kept. The road begins to show evidence of disrepair and the sign posts are broken. You begin to keep your eye out for a possible attack at any second.\n\n\u201cLook! Over there! It\u2019s a village and it\u2019s under attack! Come on!\u201d Wessel yells and rides towards the village in the distance. You try to tell him to wait, but he\u2019s already well on his way, so you ride after him.\n\nYou\u2019ve never seen a Quillar before, but the closer you get to the village, you start seeing humanoid creatures covered in sharp spikes running around at a fast speed which could only be them. They are indeed fearsome looking. You also see a lot of the people running from them, and even a few people dressed in protective gear similar to yours\u2026not that its doing them much good.\n\n\u201cAlright you prickly bastards here\u2019s something for ya!\u201d Wessle shouts riding into the village with one hand raised in the air for a lightning blast attack. He shows no fear. You have no idea if all wizards are like this, but he\u2019s either got to be brave, stupid or just suicidal. Of course he could be all three. Up until now you always thought wizards were supposed to be meek types that didn\u2019t charge into battle and preferred to kill from afar. You guess you were wrong.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay with him to back him up", "result": "This reckless idiot is probably going to get himself killed if you don\u2019t stick by his side. You ride quickly to catch up with him in the village, and draw your bow.\n\nSurprisingly for your first battle, you manage to keep calm and focused on the enemy. Hard to do considering the Quillars aren\u2019t the easiest of foes. They\u2019re quick and they\u2019re firing their quills faster than you\u2019re firing your bow.\n\nThe problem though isn\u2019t the Quillars, its Wessel. He\u2019s having such a \u201cgood time\u201d blasting the Quillars, that he\u2019s causing a lot more collateral damage in the process. During one of these moments, your own horse gets spooked by the incredibly close fireball blast and rears back causing you to fall off of it.\n\nYou\u2019re still shaking the cobwebs when one of the Quillars unleashes more quills and hits you with several of them. You collapse in pain, as the Quillar charges at you. It doesn\u2019t kill you though. Wessel makes sure of that when he throws a bolt of lightning at it.\n\nUnfortunately the Quillar happens to have grabbed you just as its hit by the lightning. Your current pain is increased severely as the electrical current passes through your body, but not for long and your fried body eventually stops its deaths throes.\n\nWessel has a hard time explaining that the other transfer was hit by \u201cfriendly\u201d fire.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Circle around the village", "result": "Just because he\u2019s acting reckless doesn\u2019t mean you\u2019re going to, you\u2019re going to play upon your strengths and keep as far away as you can.\n\nYou ride your horse around the outskirts of the village, readying your bow the whole time. When you can, you fire at the Quillar attackers. As quick as they are, they aren\u2019t really paying attention to you and you manage to get in some good shots. A couple of head shots even.\n\nAt first they don\u2019t realize where the all the arrows are coming from, since Wessel is giving them a hard enough time with the chain lightning. You\u2019re sort of glad you decided to stay on the outskirts. Wessel is having such a \u201cgood time\u201d blasting the Quillars, he\u2019s probably causing a lot more collateral damage in the process.\n\nEventually the Quillars start to retreat. This is when you get into a little more trouble as you happen to be right in the direction of where they\u2019re running! They still look scary and they get even moreso as they get closer. The worst has to be their shrieks. It\u2019s unpleasant to hear to say the least.\n\nYou ride out of the way, but your horse isn\u2019t fast enough and is peppered by quills. You catch a few in the leg yourself and you\u2019re thrown from the horse as it reels in pain, before collapsing.\n\nFeeling the pain you scramble for cover behind a nearby rock. Fortunately the quills don\u2019t penetrate that. Most of them are content on just running away, but one straggler decides to try to get one more kill before leaving. That kill of course happens to be you.\n\nThe Quillar makes its high pitch shriek as it runs towards the rock. You don\u2019t have time to ready your bow before its high jumped over the rock and on the other side of you. You quickly draw your weapon and swing it blindly as you turn around. Luckily your blade catches the side of its head, killing it. At last you collapse from the pain in your leg.\n\nWhile you\u2019re pulling out quills, Wessel and another Zalan soldier come to meet you. Wessel doesn\u2019t look any worse for wear, but the soldier looks very tired and obviously has wounds of his own.\n\n\u201cThere you are, lying down on the job I see.\u201d Wessel mocks.\n\u201cAre you alright?\u201d the other soldier asks.\n\u201cYeah\u2026Agh. I\u2019ve gotten bitten in the leg by a Kobold before. Feels nearly the same except these quills go in a lot deeper.\u201d\n\u201cGlad you guys came when you did. We were just doing a routine patrol when these quill bastards came out of nowhere! They\u2019re getting bolder and attacking in greater number, we need more reinforcements.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, well good luck with that. The Tulan border is the primary concern. Besides I\u2019m here now, I predict that this infestation will be over soon now.\u201d Wessel boasts.\n\n\u201cAny\u2026way. My name\u2019s Tylir. I\u2019d introduce you to the rest of my squad, but they\u2019re all dead now. Even though it was the heat of battle, I couldn\u2019t help notice how well you picked off several of those Quillars with one shot. That was pretty impressive.\u201d\n\u201cThanks.\u201d\n\u201cHey! What about me? I\u2019m the one who noticed you getting attacked in the first place! I\u2019m also the one who saved your ass!\u201d Wessel interrupts again, he\u2019s starting to get annoying at this point, but Tylir doesn\u2019t seem bothered by him.\n\n\u201cEveryone did their part. Okay, since I\u2019m here I\u2019ll take you to see Captain Vhalat, I\u2019m sure that\u2019s who you were sent to report to, oh and wizard while your skills may be appreciated here, I\u2019d advise you to cut down on the boasting. Captain Vhalat isn\u2019t fond of it, and to be quite honest the other two wizards we had here were more experienced and they still got killed.\u201d\n\u201cHmm, well perhaps they lacked the natural skill that I of course possess.\u201d\n\nAt this point you and Tylir just roll your eyes and get moving.\n\nYou travel through a couple of other villages and it\u2019s pretty depressing. You see stacks of bodies being buried in mass graves while most of other Retlad citizens look thoroughly defeated. A few look in your direction, but don\u2019t look too much, it\u2019s like they don\u2019t really expect you to succeed. Not exactly inspiring.\n\nSoon you arrive in the town of Glaf. It would appear that the Zalan contingency sent here is staying in one of the bigger Retlad towns rather than the capitol. Ryan also says that the Quillar infestation is worse around here too, so the captain suspects that whatever lair they\u2019re crawling out of is nearby and can hopefully located and cleansed.\n\nThe town itself resembles a small Zalan fort rather than a proper Retlad town, as a sturdy wall has been erected around it. The people seem to look a little more hopeful though. Tylir goes on to say that he thinks that the Retlad citizens are actually starting to prefer Zalan presence especially since their on government has been pretty ineffectual about the whole invasion. The Retlad army has only focused on defending the capitol. The Retlad royals appear to find their lives more important than anyone else\u2019s.\n\nEventually you\u2019re brought before Captain Vahlat himself. He looks up from the map he\u2019s inspecting and addresses you and Wessel.\n\n\u201cAh, I see the Empire has seen fit to send me reinforcements\u2026wow, twice as many as I thought I\u2019d get. Private Tylir where\u2019s the rest of your squad?\u201d\n\u201cUm\u2026dead sir.\u201d\n\u201cOf course. (sigh) So what\u2019s your problem private? Why is your leg wrapped up?\u201d Vahlat asks you.\n\u201cGot into a fight with the Quillars sir.\u201d You answer.\n\u201cOh?\u201d\n\nTylir at this point interrupts and tells of what happened. Wessel looks like he wants to expand upon his deeds, but Vahlat\u2019s appearance is a little imposing and he was already warned once, so he keeps his mouth shut. Vahlat soon addresses you again.\n\n\u201cWell it would seem you two have already proven yourselves useful. A lot more useful that what passes for the Retlad army, but of course that isn\u2019t hard. Wizard, I certainly hope you don\u2019t intend to use this place as a chance to show off all the skills you learned in your fancy Nuro college. One of your predecessors did that as well, and as you can see he\u2019s no longer here. As for you, I hope that you can do a better job of keeping out of the way of the quills next time. Most don\u2019t get a second chance. Alright that\u2019s all for now. Our group is being housed for free at the Inn down the street. Free food as well, but don\u2019t go overboard, its being rationed. You want more food or anything else you\u2019ll have to pay like everyone else. I suggest though that you don\u2019t do any heavy carousing. This is a high alert situation and we could be going to battle at anytime. Dismissed.\u201d\n\nYou, Wessel and Tylir all leave at this point. Tylir goes on to show you where the Inn is and a couple of other places, but after today you just want to rest and retire to your room early. You rest your leg and begin practicing your lute. This puts you in better spirits.\n\n6 months pass\u2026\n\nThe Quillar invasion has nearly been eradicated. Most of the major lairs have been located and cleansed and you certainly contributed greatly to this effort. Besides your combat abilities, your tracking skills definitely came in handy a lot.\n\nYou\u2019ve become somewhat recognized among Retlad citizens due to your actions and the lives you\u2019ve saved. The word \u201chero\u201d has been used a few times though you definitely don\u2019t think of yourself as one. In your free time you spoke with the citizens, a lot more than your fellow soldiers though. A few of them even convinced you to play for them when they noticed your lute. It took a little prodding, but eventually you gave in fully expecting to get booed, but to your surprise, you got applauded instead. Your playing didn\u2019t just boost your spirits it seemed. Whenever you could you played a little bit for people in what little free time you had. Never did you think that you\u2019d be playing for any kind of audience, let alone an appreciative one.\n\nIt definitely hasn\u2019t been all sunshine though; you\u2019ve seen a lot of people die. More than you ever wanted to actually. You\u2019d made friends with Tylir shortly after your first meeting and he died only a couple months later. You\u2019ll be glad when every one of these Quillar creatures are all dead though, all they\u2019ve done is cause misery.\n\nYou\u2019ve got them on the run now though. You\u2019re preparing for an attack on another one of their lairs, when Captain Vahlat calls everyone to see him, he doesn\u2019t look enthusiastic about whatever it is he has to tell you.\n\n\u201cAll right I\u2019ll be brief. As much as I hate leaving a mission unfinished, we\u2019re getting pulled out of here effective immediately. Major news is that Nuro has undergone a fucking disaster that needs to be put down like yesterday! All governments friendly to the City State of Nuro that can spare the manpower are to send help. We would be one of those. I hope the Retlad army is just competent enough to finish up what we started in their own country.\u201d\n\nWessel immediately pipes up upon hearing about this revelation.\n\n\u201cWhat happened in Nuro? What\u2019s going on?!\u201d\n\u201cWhat\u2019s going on? From what I\u2019ve been told a whole bunch of your kind raised a shitload of undead and unleashed a bunch of hostile demons on the place! The entire city was overrun. Reports are already stating that small packs of demons are running around the nearby countryside. Most likely in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom. Not sure what that means with our border war with them, but I only see it getting bloodier around there. In any case, our job is to head to Nuro, before the undead start following suit. I hope you\u2019re all ready for this, because this is going to be a lot different that fighting Quillars.\u201d\n\nYou look around and see a lot of fear wash over faces and rightly so. Necromancers have a bad history on your world. When you were little you still remember hearing the tales of the Great Lich Lord that existed centuries before you were even born. He almost took over the world. Those stories gave you nightmares as a kid. The possibility of having to face something remotely similar even on much smaller scale doesn\u2019t make you feel too well.", "action_results": [{"action": "Desert the army", "result": "You don\u2019t want to die and you know if you go, you will. You regret that you won\u2019t be able to help your family out financially anymore, but you really don\u2019t want to die.\n\nYou pack up all your stuff in the middle of the night and sneak away from the town your company is stationed in. You figure their orders are urgent enough that your desertion won\u2019t immediately cause a full scale hunt, at least not by them.\n\nThe first order of business is to change your identity as much as you can. And head to a place where you can play for an audience, but the probability of someone ratting you out is low if you\u2019re recognized.\n\nThe question though is where to go. You can\u2019t linger in the Retlad Kingdom too long, in fact you\u2019ll probably have to move around.\n\nYou decide your first stop will be at the Garwold Confederacy. It\u2019s a relatively peaceful nation made up mostly of Halflings and Gnomes, with lush green fields and flowers. They tend to stay out of wars and they\u2019re also known to appreciate the simpler things in life.\n\nEventually you make a place for yourself there in one of the small villages. You make a living playing at the local tavern there. Most of the patrons sense that you have some sort of past that you\u2019re trying to hide from. But just like you thought, they don\u2019t bring it up or say anything about it and just enjoy your music.\n\nA few months pass and you\u2019re happy. You even meet a pretty Halfling girl to be with, and now you\u2019re even thinking about just settling down here, since nobody\u2019s come looking for you; however there are alarming events occurring in the rest of the world.\n\nThe assault on Nuro was a complete failure. Everyone was killed from your company. It makes you glad you didn\u2019t go, but the fact that there is now an undead city state has everyone worried. It doesn\u2019t help that there was also an outbreak of demons. One particularly nasty one called Velzix has conquered the Tulan Kingdom.\n\nDue to these events a Grand Alliance of nations has been created to stop these threats. The Garwold Confederacy normally stays out of such things, but they have agreed to send a militia as part of the aiding effort.\n\nYou don\u2019t worry too much about it at first, but as a couple more years go on, the war gets worse and more and more Zalan Empire troops are passing through the area. Normally you\u2019d move on, but now you\u2019re married and you can\u2019t bear to abandon yet another one you love. You still haven\u2019t completely forgiven yourself for the first time.\n\nYou attempt to keep a low profile, but one day a Grand Alliance solider passing through, sees you in a tavern and recognizes you. Apparently he\u2019s a citizen of Retlad and remembers you when you were stationed there.\n\n\u201cHEY! I know you! Man, it\u2019s good to see ya! How did you get out of the army? I thought the Zalan Empire had a twenty year requirement plan! You still play that lute really well?\u201d he bellows for all inside to hear. Unfortunately one of the other Grand Alliance members with him is from the Zalan Empire who\u2019s a real stickler for rules and regulations.\n\u201cI know who you are too! You\u2019re wanted for desertion! I\u2019m placing you under arrest!\u201d\n\nYou try to escape, but you don\u2019t get far. You haven\u2019t been keeping up on your physical training since you deserted, and coupled with your Halfling wife\u2019s rich cooking you\u2019re not in great shape anymore. The Zalan soldier on the other hand has been battle hardened in the recent months. He easily catches you and beats you into submission.\n\nYou\u2019re taken back to the Zalan Empire in chains much to the protest of your wife, but its no use, you\u2019re going to trial.\n\nYour family is made aware of your discovery, but none of them come to try to help you. You abandoned them long ago and didn\u2019t even try to contact them; as far as they\u2019re concerned you died years ago. You attempt to explain things in letters to them, but you\u2019re never answered. Eventually you give up.\n\nThe trial is brief and the judgment final. You\u2019re sentenced to death as an example of all those who would attempt to desert their duty during war.\n\nAs you sit in your cell counting the days for your hanging, you find out from sad visits from your wife that things are getting really bad. Dead armies conquering kingdoms, demons running amok. You almost wonder if your execution isn\u2019t a blessing from the horror that seems to be eclipsing the world.\n\nThe day comes when the noose is placed around your neck\u2026\n\n\u201cAny last words?\u201d\n\nYou have none; you just hum a little tune and close your eyes before the trapdoor swings open, and your neck snaps.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stay in the army", "result": "Despite your fears, you\u2019ve always had a sense of duty and responsibility, something that probably won\u2019t ever completely go away due to how you grew up. You\u2019re not running away, you did join to help provide for your family after all.\n\nBefore your company packs up and leaves Retlad, you write a quick letter to your family and hand it off to a messenger. Many of the Retlad citizens aren\u2019t too pleased to see you leave, but they don\u2019t really have any say in the matter, just like you don\u2019t. There isn\u2019t much talking on the trip, though, everyone is pretty silent. Wessel however is doing enough for everyone.\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t believe something like this happened! Nuro was a beacon of enlightenment and well prepared for situations like this! I\u2026can\u2019t believe this didn\u2019t occur without some sort of demonic influence. I\u2019ll bet that Mr. Demar had something to do with this! I remember taking his class and he was always a creepy bastard. Before I could graduate I had to take his conjuration 101 class and he didn\u2019t like me because I had made several logical arguments to as why that branch of magic should be outlawed altogether. And it\u2019s obvious by what happened recently that I was right! Nevertheless I did all the required work in the class and I still got a B! Way to fuck up my perfect record! I get the same grade as some bumbling idiot who summoned up a Nurk Beast that he lost control over and bit off someone\u2019s hand! Where is the fucking justice?\u201d\n\nOnce again, Wessel has turned the topic to focus on himself. Happily Captain Vahlat tells him to shut the fuck up.\n\nYou\u2019ll be near Nuro soon and your company makes camp for the night. While all of you are on edge from what will come tomorrow, someone finally says something.\n\n\u201cHey farmboy, play us a song on that thing.\u201d\n\u201c\u2026what did you want to hear?\u201d you ask, not expecting to be called to play under these circumstances. In fact it just occurred to you that you\u2019ve never played for anyone in your company! You assume that they all knew that you did, but they just were never interested enough to stick around and listen to you before.\n\n\u201cI dunno, play whatever it was you used to play for the Retlad citizens\u2026it seemed to make them happy.\u201d\n\nYou pull out your lute and take a deep breath and start playing. At first you\u2019re just concentrating on the strings and making sure you don\u2019t mess anything up, but when you look up, you can see that everyone in the camp is listening intently to your music, even Wessel. Tensions seem to have decreased. It\u2019s like a wave of calmness has struck the camp. You never believed your playing could have that much of an effect on people. Eventually the song ends and the Captain tells everyone who isn\u2019t on watch to get some sleep. He then takes you aside.\n\n\u201cHeard your playing\u2026damn shame that you\u2019re here. You really should be doing that instead.\u201d Valhlat remarks.\n\u201cI know.\u201d\n\u201cHm. I know you joined mainly to help support your family.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, I just hope I get to see them again.\u201d\n\u201cBah, don\u2019t start talking like that. I\u2019ve seen you with a bow, you pluck that thing even better than that lute. You\u2019ve been in battle before and survived, I see you doing it again.\u201d\n\u201cI sure hope so, its just I dunno\u2026the undead\u2026I\u2019ve heard stories.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, everyone\u2019s heard the stories, but stories tend to be exaggerated. Now I dunno about what happened centuries ago, since I wasn\u2019t there, but I HAVE fought the undead before. One of my first assignments was taking care of some minor undead incursion in a little village. Some asshole stumbled upon an ancient scroll and started reading the goddamn words on it out loud. They look a lot worse than they actually are. Most of the time they\u2019re incredibly slow, and easily dispatched. Its mainly a psychological advantage from all the stories people have told about them that cause this quaking fear in most folks.\u201d\n\u201cWell I suppose, but what about the necromancers?\u201d\n\u201cFeh, they\u2019re wizards and just like all the rest their arrogance is their undoing. Most of these so-called necromancers are half-assed ones that get killed by their own undead troops. Anyway, get to sleep; you want to be fully alert for tomorrow\u2019s battle. It still won\u2019t be a walk in the park, but it\u2019s not going to be a death sentence.\u201d\n\nYou take the Captain\u2019s words into consideration, but in the back of your mind before you go to sleep, you\u2019re thinking \u201cBut they can\u2019t be that half-assed, they successfully took over Nuro\u2026\u201d\n\nThe next day arrives and you finish your trip to Nuro and that\u2019s when you see the city for the first time. You always wanted to visit it after hearing about it from Wessel, but even from this distance it doesn\u2019t look like anything he described.\n\n\u201cBy the gods\u2026what\u2026\u201d Wessel slowly whispers.\n\nThe stench of death is thick in the air. You see thousands of bodies outside the city gates and they aren\u2019t lying down either. They aren\u2019t advancing either though. There just standing there like\u2026well zombies.\n\nYour company isn\u2019t the only one here though, there are a few others awaiting orders. You see one from the Brot Kingdom and another from the Azi Republic. Thankfully there\u2019s another Zalan one as well to boost your numbers.\n\nThe respective captains acknowledge each other\u2019s presence, a short meeting is made and then the inevitable comes. The attack.\n\nAt first things seem to go well. All ranged troops are ordered to fire upon the enemy who are still just standing there. Arrows pierce zombie brains, gunshots destroy skeleton bones, spells blast at walls and it seems very easy.\n\nThen from the battlements of Nuro a few figures begin casting a few offensive spells of their own. It\u2019s at this point a charge is made towards the city.\n\n\u201cWhen you get in range aim for the fucking wizards! Don\u2019t fear these rotting meat sacks! We\u2019re the fucking Zalan army! We don\u2019t lose!\u201d Captain Valhlat shouts.\n\nFine words, but they do little to uplift your impending sense of doom. It doesn\u2019t help that the sky goes completely dark while you\u2019re marching towards a bunch of undead and at the same time hoping you don\u2019t get hit by a wizard\u2019s spell. In the distance you briefly see a cleric from the Azi Republic riding a horse by himself. He appears to be calling upon some sort of holy might from whatever god he worships since a blue protective sphere appears around him. The next moment he\u2019s hit by a black ray that goes straight through the sphere and his life is gone. Not even his god could protect him.\n\nAs you get closer, you see that the undead soldiers still haven\u2019t moved, but there are significantly less of them as they continue to fall from ranged attacks. However, now other undead pop up on the walls of Nuro holding bows of their own.\n\n\u201cSHIELDS!\u201d Captain Valhlat shouts.\n\nMore of your side falls and now you\u2019re so close you can smell the death in the air. The undead troops are now finally moving to do battle with your side. You attempt to target the robed figures on the battlements, but of course it\u2019s very difficult in all this chaos and your fear.\n\nYou mostly only get the undead archers. Wessel is a little more successful is downing an enemy wizard.\n\n\u201cHa ha! Don\u2019t you realize I graduated top of my class?!\u201d you hear him shout.\n\nThe gates of Nuro are being broken down and despite the horror you\u2019ve already seen, this battle still seems hopeful.\n\nThen a black cloaked hooded figure sudden appears on the battlements. You see him merely raise his arms briefly and that\u2019s when you get the very real feeling that hope is lost.\n\nGhostly spirits come through the walls of Nuro making worse shrieks than when you fought the Quillars. At least they were living creatures. These drain lives at but a touch and there isn\u2019t enough magic to fight the incorporeal creatures properly. You see the Brot Kingdom\u2019s company break and run, but unfortunately for them and you, your possible retreat has been blocked. All the soldiers on your side that fell have now suddenly been raised, the undead soldiers that were killed have been raised as well. You\u2019re fighting in the front, from behind and in some cases from within. It\u2019s chaos.\n\n\u201cShit, I\u2019m going to die today\u2026\u201d you whisper to yourself.\n\nCaptain Valhlat is knee deep in the dead, but this figure who\u2019s apparently changed the tide of battle hasn\u2019t escaped his attention. He points to the figure and barks orders at the top of his lungs.\n\n\u201cKILL HIM! SHOOT THE FUCKER! DO IT! NOW!\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to shoot the figure", "result": "You\u2019re scared shitless, but somehow you manage to maintain your composure and aim for the hooded figure on top of the battlements.\n\nYou let an arrow fly and your aim is straight and true, but unfortunately it\u2019s blocked by some sort of magical shield. Even Wessel\u2019s spell dissipates before it.\n\nNow you see that all hope is lost and you attempt to escape, but the precious few seconds you spent aiming your bow on a fruitless killing attempt has resulted in you being surrounded and overwhelmed.\n\nYou feel the rusty steel of a sword plunge into your side, followed by extreme pain. You turn to strike down the grinning skeleton warrior who\u2019s just limited your life span. You strike a couple more corpses before you\u2019re brought down by an axe to the skull, splitting your head open and causing your brains to leak out uselessly into the now blood soaked battlefield.\n\nYou fall and die, only to rise again as just another zombie drone for the growing undead army.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Run away", "result": "There\u2019s undead all around you, fear coursing through your body and all you can think of is escape. You see a few others following orders, but their shots do nothing. Apparently the Necromancer has protected himself behind a more powerful magic shield than the cleric you saw die had. Even Wessel\u2019s spell dissipates before it.\n\nYou ignore your orders, you ignore your fellow soldiers, you ignore the attack on Nuro, and you run and you\u2019re not a bit ashamed to put your survival first.\n\nThe chaos of the fighting is bewildering and you don\u2019t really pay attention to what direction you\u2019re heading, you\u2019re just making a beeline to any destination not completely filled with zombies, ghosts, and skeletons. You look back, only to see more death. The hooded figure on top of the battlements calls down some sort of death cloud that begins to envelop the area you were previously in. The screams of the distant victims are horrible.\n\nYou feel like you\u2019re living a nightmare as you constantly bump into corpses, both moving and unmoving. Defensive chops with your sword do nothing to kill the unnatural creatures and only temporarily push them out of your way. It is only by sheer luck that you get away without getting killed.\n\nYou run further, leaving the carnage behind. You look back again to see if anything is in pursuit, but nothing is to your relief. Still, you\u2019re not comfortable and you continue to distance yourself until you can run no further and you must stop to rest.\n\nIt is at this point, you wonder what you\u2019re going to do. You wonder if going back to report to the nearest Zalan commander would be wise. Will they punish you for running away? The situation was hopeless, surely they couldn\u2019t...could they? And even if they don\u2019t, then what? Send you back in? That\u2019s definitely not appealing given what you\u2019ve seen.\n\nAt this point you\u2019re really regretting your decision to join the army. You wish you could just leave. You want to go home.\n\nGoing AWOL back in Retlad wasn\u2019t really an option; you would\u2019ve been hunted down. But now? You probably would be listed as a casualty. You could theoretically disappear and attempt to live anonymously and do what you wanted to do in the first place. Just travel and play. Your family would even be compensated for your death, but still\u2026you\u2019d hate to put them through the grief of it, if it isn\u2019t true.\n\nBefore you ponder your future options any further, you suddenly feel a pain in your side\u2026you look down and see that you\u2019re bleeding. Apparently you were stabbed and didn\u2019t even realize it due to the adrenaline. You\u2019re feeling the pain now though and you attempt to stop the bleeding as much as you can.\n\nRegardless of what you\u2019re going to do in the future, right now you have to find civilization to at least get fixed up. The problem is that you don\u2019t know where the hell you are. You look around for some possible landmarks, but you\u2019re not seeing anything familiar. Lacking any other ideas, you start walking in the general direction of where you think the Zalan Empire is located.\n\nYou walk for a few hours and the pain is getting worse. You start thinking that you might not get the chance to worry anymore about your potential future, but a farm house in the distance gives you a little hope and you press on.\n\nYou get close to the front porch and that\u2019s when you stop. The front door is broken off its hinges and a few windows are also broken. You also notice a leg lying in the grass near you. Worse, whatever did this is apparently still around judging by the loud voices you\u2019re hearing from inside.\n\n\u201cHa ha! Human women are such squealers! Not as much fun as elven women though!\u201d\n\u201cOh that\u2019s real original. Why is everyone always got such a fucking hard on for elven women? Too damn fragile if you ask me.\u201d\n\u201cGo fucking rape a troll girl then.\u201d\n\u201cHuh. Easier said than done my unimaginative friend. I tried that once and almost got married.\u201d\n\u201cHAHAHAHA! See I told you this would be more fun than following Velzix\u2026hey you smell that?\u201d\n\u201cYes, I did sense the smell of fresh human blood in the air. Do you suppose we missed one?\u201d\n\u201cOnly one way to find out!\u201d\n\nAt this point you start to back away as quickly as you can. You can\u2019t even run due to the pain, but you try your best. Your best isn\u2019t good enough though, as the dwellers of the farmhouse have exited and seen you.\n\nAnd as with everything that\u2019s been fucked up today, the ones that just exited the farmhouse happen to be demons. One is a bigger brutish looking sort, while the other is smaller yet definitely still more muscular than you.\n\n\u201cWell what do we have here? Wounded meat? I say he gets to that rock before you can catch him and pull out his heart.\u201d\n\u201cHah! I\u2019ll take that bet!\u201d\n\nThe bigger one starts to walk towards you, but will undoubtedly quicken his pace soon.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to outrun the demon", "result": "Fear griping your heart, you struggle and push yourself to run as fast as you can in your condition.\n\nSoon something else is gripping your heart.\n\nYou look down at your chest and see your bloody still beating heart outside of where it is normally supposed to be. The demon fist holding it squeezes your heart a bit first before crushing it completely before your eyes. You die soon afterwards.\n\n\u201cHah! I told you I could reach him before he got to the rock!\u201d the demon laughs as he lets his arm slide out of your dead slumping body.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stand and fight", "result": "Demons are a lot faster than the undead and you\u2019re wounded, no way are you going to be able to outrun them. You turn around and draw your bow, trying to ignore your pain which is overriding any fear you have at this point. Your weakened state is causing you to have a hard time aiming.\n\n\u201cUh oh, better be careful, looks like this one is going to put up a fight. I\u2019d say by his uniform that he\u2019s a soldier.\u201d\n\u201cHur hur. Good. Hey human, better stop wobbling if you\u2019re going to aim that thing properly.\u201d\n\nYou miss the demon completely.\n\n\u201cHah! You want me to walk slower human?\u201d\n\u201dYou sure you should be playing with him like that? Don\u2019t you remember what happened earlier today?\u201d\n\u201cShut up! I told ya, that bitch musta had some magical powers because\u2026OW!\u201d\n\nYou hit the demon in the chest, but it doesn\u2019t seem much damage. He pulls out the arrow and now begins to quicken his pace. The other demon starts to walk towards you as well.\n\n\u201cSee, I told you to pay attention.\u201d\n\u201cBah! If this is the extent of what his little pig sticker can do, I\u2019m not concerned. Hey human, don\u2019t you know they\u2019re doing great things with gunpower these days? RAAAAGH!\u201d\n\nThe big demon suddenly charges you, and you let your arrow fly. Right in the eye.\n\n\u201cPerfect.\u201d You whisper.\n\nThe demon bellows, but it doesn\u2019t slow him down. You narrowly dodge his charge. You roll on the ground and shoot two more arrows in his back. He turns around snarling and bellowing for your blood. More arrows fly into the creature, but at last the demon has reached you and smacks you to the ground. Your bow flies from your hand, and while crawling on the ground you try to draw your sword, but a crushing blow hits you on the back. This might\u2019ve caused a lot more damage, but miraculously the lute that\u2019s still in your pack \u201csoftens\u201d the blow. The crunching of wood signifies that it\u2019s broken though.\n\n\u201cWhat the fuck, that\u2019s a weird noise\u2026what is this? HA HA HA! Hey! You gotta be shittin\u2019 me! A fuckin\u2019 lute? Check this out! He\u2019s carrying a fuckin\u2019 lute! What\u2019s a fucking soldier doin\u2019 with a lute?\u201d the big demon shouts to his acquaintance while he holds up your broken instrument.\n\u201cDon\u2019t talk you idiot! LOOK OUT!\u201d his acquaintance shouts, just as you recover long enough to shove your sword straight into the demon\u2019s groin. You push the sword upward in an attempt to do more damage and you succeed. Blood is flying everywhere and the demon howls in pain from the grievous wound. You pull your sword out and then proceed to repeatedly stab the demon until it falls backwards on the ground, dead.\n\nYou\u2019re exhausted; you used all your remaining strength killing the thing. Unfortunately the other demon grabs you by the scruff like a helpless kitten and lifts you up off the ground a few inches. He knocks your sword out of your hand and looks at his fallen comrade.\n\u201cHmm, can\u2019t say I didn\u2019t warn him. Oh well, more meat for me. This may hurt a lot\u2026\u201d\n\nFully expecting the death that you\u2019ve managed to avoid for so long, you once again evade it when a gunshot rings out and part of the demon\u2019s head splatters in your face. You\u2019re dropped immediately. The demon\u2019s body is still standing though.\n\n\u201cShoot the bastard again!\u201d you hear a gruff voice shout and this time the next shot hits chest and the demon falls.\n\nYou lay motionless on the ground, looking up in the sky when your saviors come up to you. It\u2019s a group of dwarves armed with gun powder weapons.\n\n\u201cBy the gods, get doc out here! We need to fix this man up! Hey lad, you\u2019ll be alright, don\u2019t worry\u2026are you a Zalan soldier?\u201d one of the dwarves asks you.\n\u201c\u2026yeah\u2026Nuro\u2026lost\u2026all dead\u2026\u201d is all you utter before fall into unconsciousness.\n\nA few days pass before you\u2019re somewhat back to a coherent state. You find yourself in a military outpost and at this point you don\u2019t care. You\u2019re just happy to be alive.\n\nIt would seem that during your escape from Nuro, you ran in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom, the dwarven scouts that found you were from a small neutral kingdom trying its best to stay out of the dispute between Tulan and Zalan, but the new threat of demons running all over the nearby countryside caused them to increase patrols. They fixed you up, but dropped you off at the closest Zalan Fort. The Zalan fort that you\u2019re in right now is called Virtue and it\u2019s on the Tulan border. It seems relatively calm though. Not at all what you thought it would be.\n\nWhen one of the healers comes in to check on you, you begin to ask questions which she tries to answer to get you up to speed.\n\nThe Tulan Kingdom is currently under attack from the demons now. They\u2019ve been assaulting the place and even gaining help from some of the evil populace there. The demon citizens there have reverted back to their \u201cbad behavior\u201d and thrown their lot in with the invaders as well. That doesn\u2019t surprise you. The Tulan Kingdom pulled back some of their military from the borders so the fighting hasn\u2019t been as bad and Zalan\u2019s made a little more progress during this time, but the military minds are being cautious not to over extend. There is extreme concern over the recent demon invasion, not to mention the incident at Nuro. Word has already spread about the unsuccessful siege there.\n\nThe healer also tells you that a few Zalan \u201chigh ups\u201d are eager to speak to you soon, as they want to know what exactly happened at Nuro. You\u2019re somewhat of an important survivor since as far as anyone knows; you were the only one to successfully escape that killing zone. There\u2019s also talk of a \u201cGrand Alliance\u201d being created to counter these new threats.\n\nWhile the healer talks you end up drifting back to sleep wishing you could just escape it all.\n\nOne year passes\u2026\n\nYou\u2019re still at Fort Virtue and it doesn\u2019t look like you\u2019ll be leaving the army anytime soon.\n\nYou couldn\u2019t have been more wrong on your belief that you\u2019d get executed for cowardice. You got promoted to sergeant instead, which in light of the current situation, is nearly the same thing.\n\nYour promotion came after several Zalan officers spoke to you about Nuro. You even got a medal.\n\nStories and rumors creep around about how against all odds you survived an undead onslaught and fought off a bunch of demons as well. Your past \u201creputation\u201d from your time in Retlad is exaggerated as well. It doesn\u2019t help that the citizens there remember you and are all willing to add to the exaggeration.\n\nAll of these stories have been woven together in such an elaborate way to make you seem like some kind of hero most likely for propaganda purposes. And you know you\u2019re not hero. In fact you try to explain you aren\u2019t a hero to people, but they think you\u2019re just being modest, eventually you give up.\n\nYour assignment at Virtue hasn\u2019t been uneventful. There\u2019s fighting, but now it\u2019s mainly demon commanded enemies rather than Tulan ones. Some demon lord called Velzix killed the royalty there, completely conquered the area and made it his realm. The border war continues under new management except now it\u2019s more than just a border that the enemy is looking to take. Your superior, Captain Eckard reminds you of Valhlat except with a different name. You suppose there is a certain \u201ccookie cutter\u201d that occurs within the Zalan army that causes people to act the same. You\u2019ve briefly wondered if you ever make that rank, you\u2019ll act the same way. You then usually laugh at the very fact that you ever would.\n\nFort Virtue hasn\u2019t suffered a really bad attack yet, and it\u2019s mostly skirmishes, but it\u2019s like waiting for the other shoe to drop. You routinely go on patrols and give orders which you didn\u2019t think you\u2019d be good at, but you think back to how you used to order your brothers and sisters around and perhaps you always had a bit a leadership skill, you just didn\u2019t want it.\n\nYou thought that you\u2019d be able to at least visit your family, but of course due to recent events, you\u2019re ordered to stay put. Your family at least is getting more money from your pay increase. They even send a new lute for you after you told them of the unfortunate event that resulted in the destruction of your last one. This gives you a little pleasure in a relatively joyless assignment.\n\nAll in all, you still prefer it compared to being in the unsuccessful assaults on Nuro. The Grand Alliance that was formed hasn\u2019t been too successful as every one has been a slaughter from what you\u2019ve heard. You already went through that once. You don\u2019t relish the idea of going through it again.\n\nOne day while you\u2019re spending your free time practicing a new song, some new soldiers come into the fort. They look like they\u2019ve just seen a vicious battle and are here to restock. One of them sees you and gives you a disapproving look. It\u2019s a woman with striking good looks, but definitely carrying an air of leadership about her. Her rank signifies her as a captain\u2026yep same cookie cutter, just a little prettier.\n\n\u201cYou there! What are you doing playing an instrument? Shouldn\u2019t you be on watch or doing something more constructive with your time soldier? And you\u2019re a sergeant? You should know better!\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m not on watch duty right now and\u2026\u201d\n\nThe woman doesn\u2019t even let you finish your explanation. Other soldiers that were sitting in your area are now slowly creeping out of the fray. Even her own soldiers are creeping away. They probably know all too well of how she acts.\n\n\u201cSo? You think evil is going to wait around for you to be ready for battle? Where is your superior officer? I can\u2019t believe they would allow such a relaxed attitude around here considering the importance of this fort! If you were serving under me, I\u2019d have you flogged for your lack of discipline!\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Point her in the direction of your captain", "result": "Shrugging your shoulders you point her in the direction of Captain Eckard to which she immediately marches off to. You don\u2019t think anything will come of it though. You do your job and Eckard\u2019s always been alright with you for the most part. At most you\u2019ll get him yelling at you for getting into a conflict with a superior officer.\n\nYour thoughts are wrong however.\n\nWhen the female captain confronts Eckard, she and he end up getting into a greater argument. Apparently they\u2019ve been minor rivals in the past and this \u201clack of discipline\u201d displayed by you just fuels her arguments that he isn\u2019t a fit for commanding a fort.\n\nShe eventually leaves in a huff with her men, but still arguing with Eckard and saying that she\u2019ll see that he\u2019s relieved of his command and replaced with someone more competent.\n\nCaptain Eckard is also now pissed at you for bringing this on him, he takes your lute away, breaks it and tells you that you won\u2019t be playing anymore and if he catches you doing it again he\u2019ll have you whipped.\n\nA few months pass as normal, but then the other boot finally drops. Whatever connections the female Captain had she\u2019s used them, and Captain Eckard is demoted and transferred out of the fort along with some of the others who seemed to be \u201cdisciplinary problems\u201d. Guess who\u2019s name showed up on that list?\n\nYou\u2019re all transferred to areas where the fighting is a lot worse. You are sent to the Nuro front much to your dismay. Once again you\u2019re fighting hordes of undead on a mass scale. Never having fully gotten over your first conflict at Nuro, your nerves and well being in general is always on the verge of breaking with each skirmish and battle. You don\u2019t even have your music to keep you in a calm state of mind anymore either. It\u2019s actually amazing you survive.\n\nYou soon hear about how the Grand Alliance outsted a necromancer called Trelik from the Brot Kingdom. That makes you feel somewhat better, but that hopefulness is soon brought low when you hear about the successful attack on Brot that happens soon afterwards. A Necromancer from Nuro reportedly conquered the entire Kingdom with undead giants.\n\nYour morale is further lowered when you hear that your company is being sent to help the Grand Alliance take it back again.\n\nWhen you actually see the dead monstrosities, your fragile will shatters completely.\n\nWhen the battle commences, you\u2019re just about useless in battle. Your dumb luck also runs out and you\u2019re unable to fight or even retreat your way out of this one. The undead giants might be big, but they\u2019re also faster than what they appear to be.\n\nOne of them charges into your company line which at this point is trying to get out of the way and swings his club striking several. You being among them.\n\nYou eventually land several feet away from the main part of the fighting, broken and bloody. You\u2019re unable to move and just quietly moan in pain until you bleed out and die from your extensive wounds. You\u2019re not even useful for the Necromancer to raise for his ever growing army.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Argue with her", "result": "You\u2019ve served in this army well and always done your job regardless of the shitty situations you\u2019ve been in. You might not like a lot of it, but you\u2019ve never complained. Lately you\u2019ve been on edge about a possible all out assault of some big ass demon army that\u2019s going to attack any day now, and playing is one of the few pleasures you have to put your mind at ease.\n\nPerhaps it\u2019s a combination of this and a combination of this unwanted and unnecessary scolding that causes you to speak out of turn.\n\n\u201cWith all due respect ma\u2019am, I am fully prepared to battle at a moment\u2019s notice and so are those under my direct command. But even soldiers need to rest, if only for a minute.\u201d\n\nThe woman looks very surprised you didn\u2019t comply with her demand to see your superior officer.\n\n\u201c\u2026you DARE speak out of turn like that to me? I\u2019ll see you sent to the Nuro Front for that sort of insubordination! Then we\u2019d see just how battle ready you are! How would you like that?\u201d\n\u201cI wouldn\u2019t like it at all. I barely survived the first time.\u201d You say trying not to express any fear.\n\u201c\u2026What? What are you talking about? First time?\u201d\n\nNow you\u2019re a little surprised she doesn\u2019t know who you are considering how some of the high ups exaggerated about how you managed to survive. You explain yourself briefly and she doesn\u2019t quite believe you at first, a couple of your troops hiding nearby at least back up your claims before slinking off.\n\n\u201cThat was YOU? What the hell are you doing here? You should be leading from the front not languishing in some fort that barely sees battle!\u201d\n\u201cDoesn\u2019t see battle? We suffered a small demon raid last week! We see plenty of battle!\u201d\n\u201cWhat I mean is, somebody of your obvious combat and survival skills should be assigned on the front lines where you can do more good. Normally I don\u2019t question Zalan command, but this is really an oversight on their part.\u201d\n\u201cWell maybe they know better than the both of us, besides this assignment isn\u2019t a walk in the fairy fields. I think we\u2019ll be suffering a grand scale attack any day now.\u201d\n\u201cDoubt it. Velzix has been having a hard time keeping his unruly mob together. If it wasn\u2019t for a lot of the sycophantic Tulan citizens, he\u2019d probably be confined to pure defense, though something will have to be done soon, reports say he\u2019s attempting to gate in more demons everyday. Not to mention that supposedly civilized demons from other nations are starting to display their true colors and flock to his banner. Like I always said the only good demon is a dead one!\u201d\n\nThis causes you to smile a bit and she very faintly smiles back when she sees that you feel the same way. This smile disappears quickly though as she continues her rant.\n\n\u201cI wish I wasn\u2019t assigned to the Tulan Border though. I\u2019d rather be taking Nuro back. THAT\u2019S the more dangerous threat. The demons will kill themselves with their own chaotic and violent natures, but the undead\u2026they\u2019ve almost taken over the world before just because of one bastard that lead them. I never thought I\u2019d see a serious threat like this in my lifetime, especially not\u2026\u201d\n\nThe female captain at this point stops. She even looks away from you as if whatever she was going to say was just too much even for her. She seems to be a lot more battle hardened than you and probably ten times braver. You can\u2019t imagine what horror she experienced that would be worse than your own, but you don\u2019t find out since she changes the subject.\n\n\u201c\u2026Bah! Maybe you\u2019re right; a soldier does need to keep their mind occupied on other things every now and then. We aren\u2019t undead after all. So what\u2019s with the lute? You also a bard or something?\u201d she laughs.\n\u201cNo, I think those dreams are long gone, but my playing seems to boost spirits around here a little, which can only be a good thing in this situation.\u201d\n\u201cHm. My mother was elven and she used to sing this song to me and my\u2026brother when we were very young. It was very smooth and calming. Beautiful melody.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, most elven music is like that. When I was assigned in Retlad I learned a few elven songs from a few of the citizens there, you wouldn\u2019t happen to know the song would you?\u201d\n\nShe tells you the name of the song and you know it immediately. One of the first new songs you learned while stationed in Retlad actually. This seems cause her to momentarily revert to a less stand offish behavior. You\u2019re about to play it for her, but then a messenger comes running up handing her a note. She reads it and she\u2019s all business again.\n\n\u201cAlright men! We\u2019re moving out!\u201d she shouts and leaves without saying another word to you. You didn\u2019t even learn her name.\n\nPerhaps it\u2019s just as well; you\u2019ll most likely never meet again due to one of you dying on the battlefield. You go back to doing what you were doing.\n\nTwo years pass\u2026\n\nThree years since the Nuro Incident and this struggle still continues.\n\nYou\u2019re still stationed Fort Virtue and you\u2019ve repelled more demon attacks than you would care to count. Velzix has finally gotten his shit together completely. A unified demonic front is in full swing here and its taking its toll. Once again your skills have come in very handy in defense. You are certainly known as a demon slayer, but you still don\u2019t feel like a hero of any kind. You\u2019re just trying to do your job and survive. You save lives when you can, but you know ultimately it\u2019s a futile task as death seems to be everywhere nowadays.\n\nAs bad as it is on the demon front, its nothing compared to what\u2019ve you\u2019ve heard on the undead front. The Necromancer has finally broken out from Nuro, and successfully attacked the Kingdom of Brot. Several undead giants demolished the area. You\u2019ve never even seen a living giant and they sound intimidating. You can\u2019t even imagine an undead one. The power to raise one, let alone several is sort of scary. The Grand Alliance army didn\u2019t get there in time to stop him and as usual they were repelled when they arrived.\n\nYou worry about the Grand Alliance failing to stop the undead horde. You hope it doesn\u2019t get any closer to the Zalan Empire where your family might be in danger.\n\nSometimes you worry so much that you can\u2019t sleep, not that you do much of that nowadays anyway. Normally you play to keep your mind at ease, but tonight you go to the archery range to keep yourself focused.\n\nFor a long time you\u2019re by yourself, but suddenly you feel a creeping suspicion someone is watching you\u2026\n\nYou turn around with your bow and see a pale man. He holds up his hands.\n\n\u201cHey now! Don\u2019t shoot! Sorry for creeping around like that. Professional habit.\u201d He says.\n\u201cWhat? Who are you?\u201d you demand.\n\u201cWarnov. Zalan Intelligence.\u201d\n\u201cYou\u2019re a spy?\u201d\n\u201cWell I suppose you could put it that way. I was here to give some info to your Captain Eckard, and I also wanted to take a look around the fort. Didn\u2019t think anyone would be on the range though. Nice shooting, I know who you are and heard about your marksmanship with a bow. You\u2019re certainly doing your part with the demons around here.\u201d\n\nDespite the fact that you\u2019re talking to a spy, you feel the need to vent your feelings.\n\n\u201cYeah, well I hope the Grand Alliance starts doing its part. I mean what the fuck are they doing? Weren\u2019t they created to put a stop to all this shit? I mean am I supposed to worry every day if that undead horde is going to get closer to the Zalan Empire where it can threaten my family?\u201d\n\nWarnov doesn\u2019t look offended by your words, if anything he looks intrigued.\n\n\u201cWell, I can understand why you\u2019re venting. Trust me I sympathize. But as part of intel, I can tell you its not that easy\u2026there were a lot of surprises that weren\u2019t accounted for. We\u2019re doing our best to rectify this situation by gathering as much info as possible. In fact, you could help us\u2026\u201d\n\u201cExcuse me? How?\u201d\n\nWarnov looks around and gets closer before speaking.\n\n\u201cLook, as I said, I know all about you and your skills, why you joined, all of it. I know you don\u2019t much care for some of the propaganda made about some of your exploits. But it\u2019s important to realize that deeds like yours must be blown up a little to give common people hope that ultimately good will win the day. You may not consider yourself a hero of any kind, but your actions aren\u2019t without some of those qualities. You obviously care very much about your family, and I\u2019ve heard how you try to keep the people under your command alive. Sound like heroic qualities to me. Perhaps they\u2019re on a smaller scale, but they\u2019re there. I\u2019m betting that there\u2019s a BIGGER hero in there somewhere, just itching to get out. You think the Grand Alliance isn\u2019t doing a good job? Perhaps we can arrange something for you to be transferred into it, or maybe you\u2019d like to take an even more direct approach.\u201d\n\u201cWhat do you mean?\u201d\n\nWarnov suddenly backs away.\n\n\u201cBefore we go any further. I need to know are you willing to take up the mantle of being a hero. Because if you aren\u2019t, then we have nothing more to discuss. I shall require an answer now.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Decline the offer", "result": "You have to admit, the idea has crossed your mind a bit. A small part of you does wonder about embracing the whole hero image and deliberately doing grand deeds that go beyond the call of your duty. You suppose that you\u2019d at least really feel like one if you did that.\n\nHowever, more often than not real heroes don\u2019t live long. You\u2019re wondering what exactly this Mr. Warnov has in mind for you and given his demeanor, his appearance and just your own feelings of uncertainty about him, you decline. You know your limitations even if others don\u2019t see them. So, no you won\u2019t be hunting down some artifact of unlimited power and then single handedly taking out a Demon Lord or Necromancer Lord in their own throne room.\n\n\u201cNo, I don\u2019t think so Mr. Warnov. As I\u2019ve often said, I\u2019m no hero. I\u2019m just doing my job and providing for my family.\u201d\n\nMr. Warnov looks disappointed and sighs, but accepts your decision.\n\n\u201cVery well. This is a shame though. Despite your humble birth you seem to have lots of potential. You could\u2019ve made an excellent addition to our\u2026organization. I\u2019ve also heard your lute playing wasn\u2019t bad either, we don\u2019t have any musically talented types anymore\u2026oh well.\u201d\n\nMr. Warnov leaves rather quickly after his last statement. Something about him seemed very odd and you\u2019re sort of glad you didn\u2019t take his offer. You go back to your target practice for awhile when you suddenly hear an alarm cry out loudly through the fort about a small demon army being sighted over the hill.\n\n\u201cWell back to work\u2026\u201d you say and prepare for battle once again.\n\nTwo years pass\u2026\n\nIt\u2019s been five years since the Nuro Incident and things have gotten worse.\n\nBoth the Necromancer Lord and Velzix have made progress. Too much. The Grand Alliance hasn\u2019t been able to do anything except fight them to a stalemate. All three sides are looking to gain an advantage and somehow you don\u2019t think it\u2019ll be yours.\n\nThe Zalan Empire has become increasingly totalitarian. It\u2019s been increasing its influence over how the Grand Alliance should be run and its strategies. Some of Zalan\u2019s officers have been transferred to become more prominent in leading and commanding the bulk of the Grand Alliance army. You\u2019re not sure if this isn\u2019t a bad idea. Bullying or not, one final voice in matters would probably help the Grand Alliance at this point. There\u2019s been some grumbling by other nations though.\n\nHowever it\u2019s also begun several repressive internal measures to keep itself safe. Your mom has mentioned in letters back to you of seeing routine patrols now near the farm. Talks of seizing private property for the good of the Empire are being discussed. You don\u2019t really like the sound of that, but it\u2019s not really like you can do anything about it. You can only take solace in the fact that being part of the Zalan army will at least result in your family not becoming homeless. They would probably still be able to live and work on the farm\u2026it just wouldn\u2019t be your family\u2019s anymore. There\u2019s also talk of a draft. You don\u2019t like the sound of that either. Your brother Mallack would certainly be conscripted now. You can\u2019t imagine him dealing with the things you\u2019ve had to face. You hope it doesn\u2019t come to that.\n\nYour position at Virtue is looking worse and worse each day. Parts of the fort are severely damaged, you\u2019re short on man power and you don\u2019t even have any decent wizards or healers. You\u2019ve attempted to talk to Captain Eckard about withdrawing and falling back to a safer position, but he won\u2019t hear of it. This fort is NOT to be abandoned.\n\nThe only good thing is that there\u2019s apparently been a small contingent of mercenaries severely messing up things for Velzix in his own territory. They must be incredibly brave or completely mad for Zalan gold to perform such a task. You can\u2019t help but think that maybe YOU would be there right along side them, if you\u2019d joined up with that mercenary company years ago. A sobering thought.\n\nTime to go on patrol again. You gather up some soldiers and get ready. You look at all of them and wonder which ones won\u2019t be coming back this time. You look at yourself and wonder if you will. A few years ago, everyone coming back alive was at least a possibility, but now it\u2019s not even certain.\n\nYou go out and change up your routine path again. Always have to be different, can\u2019t become predictable.\n\nA couple of imps attack. Nothing to worry about. Easily dispatched. You know you\u2019ll encounter worse before the day is over though.\n\nA group of Tulan \u201ccitizens\u201d led by their demon overseer attacks you next. Made up of hapless slaves and misguided idiots who think serving the demons is going to pan out in the long run.\n\nFinally you come across something a little more unusual. A small group of dwarves fighting off a large demon ambush. They look ragged, wounded and in dire need of help. So you help them.\n\nYou unleash five arrows into the head of an Eviscerator before two of your number are fried by a hellfire blast from a Flame Child. The fighting doesn\u2019t get any cleaner from there. You see another one of your members getting shredded, before a path is cleared for the dwarves to follow you back to the fort. One of their own chooses to stay behind to give the rest a chance to escape. As all of you run, a large explosion is heard followed by several yelps, howls and screams. The dwarf has blown himself up with whatever explosives the dwarves are fond of making.\n\nFinally you get back to the fort where it\u2019s relatively safe, and all you\u2019re thinking about is how you\u2019ll have to do this all over again tomorrow. You retire to your private room where you play your lute and hope you aren\u2019t disturbed by another attack on the fort. Happily, that doesn\u2019t happen, but you are disturbed by one of the dwarves you rescued earlier instead. He\u2019s come to thank you.\n\n\u201cHey lad, I just want to say thanks to your actions at least a few of us survived from our clan. Such as it is now. Something about you looks very familiar. Normally you humans all look the same but\u2026ah hah! You\u2019re that lad who I saved near that farm five years ago! Looks like you returned the favor! Stagir\u2019s the name.\u201d\n\nYou didn\u2019t realize it either, but then with all the fighting and the chaos you\u2019d barely survived during that particular day, you weren\u2019t really paying attention to faces. You were just glad someone came along when they did.\n\n\u201cYeah\u2026small world I guess. So what happened to your clan?\u201d\n\u201cWiped out lad.\u201d Stagir says mournfully. \u201cAt least when you humans were fighting each other you didn\u2019t mess with us, but getting caught between the undead and demons\u2026well it\u2019s a bit different.\u201d\n\u201cThe undead are that far now?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cAye. They and the demons have been involved in skirmishes here and there. Got no problem with evil fighting evil, but it was just our bad luck that my clan was caught in the middle. The demons are evil incarnate to be sure, but the undead\u2026I dunno. Something worse about them. In the final days, I had to kill clan members who I once called friends and family because of the fucking necromancers raising them from the dead. Some stayed behind to fight since they refused to run. They\u2019d rather die than run from their home. Normally I\u2019d agree, but after seeing that this was a losing battle, some of us decided that it would be better to run. After all we would just be raised again to be used as puppets of the necromancers when we die. Not even free will to choose, or the threat of a demon\u2019s whip. You just become one of them. Can\u2019t let that happen to me. Never.\u201d\n\nYou know something of it, having had to do a little of that five years ago at Nuro, but actually killing undead parodies of family members would be pretty horrific.\n\nStagir attempts to lighten the mood a bit by asking you about what you were playing before he interrupted. When you tell him, he tiches and says something about how elven songs are nothing compared to dwarven ones. You never really thought of dwarves having a musical interest before, but Stagir boasts about how they have quite an extensive musical history.\n\nHe takes the lute from you and shows you a couple of dwarven songs, breaking strings in the process. His insistent singing accompanying the songs isn\u2019t exactly pleasant either. He complains about the human made strings not being strong enough to play the songs properly, but thanks you again for saving his life before leaving.\n\nEvery now and then you play these songs for your new dwarven allies who have taken it upon themselves to strengthen and rebuild the fort the \u201cproper dwarf way\u201d. They seem to appreciate it. You\u2019re a little more careful with the strings and don\u2019t indulge in the singing though. (But unfortunately for the rest of the fort, the dwarves do)\n\nA few months pass and the demon attacks seem to decrease. The strengthened fort certainly helps, but something else is going on. Eventually you\u2019re seeing less and less of them. Eventually some ragged refugees come to the fort and after a bit of babbling and thanking the gods, a few of them explain.\n\nThere are a couple of conflicting stories, but it would seem Velzix is dead! He was killed by something or someone. Consensus seems to be that the mercenary leader died in battle with him though. Without Velzix\u2019s leadership the demons are fighting amongst themselves and the realm is in complete disarray. The Grand Alliance is taking steps to retake the land immediately before the Necromancer Lord gets it. The Zalan Empire in particular is closer though, so naturally YOUR nation is going to get that land first!\n\nWhile things may be looking up somewhat, they aren\u2019t necessarily looking up for you. Captain Eckard has orders to begin an attack immediately. You aren\u2019t looking forward to it mainly because you\u2019ll probably encounter an undead army in the process.\n\nYou don\u2019t have a choice though except for what role you can serve. Thanks to your skills and rank. You can either lead troops as normal, or be part of a scouting party.", "action_results": [{"action": "Choose to lead rank and file", "result": "If its undead you\u2019re going to face you decide you don\u2019t want to get caught fighting them with only a few men to help you. Captain Eckard is a little surprised by your decision, but chooses a few others to be the reconnaissance group.\n\nYour replacements aren\u2019t as good as you might\u2019ve been however. Many times they fuck up and miss a few demon bands that were fleeing from the Tulan Kingdom and ambushing whoever passed by. It\u2019s not too bad at first, but the closer you get to the capital, the more powerful these little groups are. The losses get more severe, but Captain Eckard insists on continuing.\n\nBy the time you get to the capital during most of the citizens there have been so corrupted or beat down by the demons at this point that they\u2019ve either sold their own souls to Hell or gone completely mad. You\u2019re attacked by them and a few of the demon hold outs. Your own ranks have been severely weakened by this point.\n\nIt\u2019s during an ambush that you\u2019re suddenly hit by a fireball from a flame demon who was sitting on top of a nearby rooftop. You run around screaming and trying to put out the flames, but a couple of flying imps throw spears into your back ensuring that you lie still as you finish burning to death.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Choose to scout", "result": "If you\u2019ve learned one thing, numbers doesn\u2019t necessarily imply safety. With all the years of patrolling you\u2019ve done along with your previous actions in Retlad so long ago, you actually feel more comfortable in smaller groups at this point. Your one and only rank and file battle didn\u2019t go well.\n\nYour choice isn\u2019t surprising, if anything more people feel comfortable with you scouting ahead.\n\nAs you journey further into former Tulan territory, you don\u2019t encounter too much resistance. A few demons and crazed followers here and there, but nothing you can\u2019t take care of. It also occurs to you how \u201cplanted\u201d you\u2019ve been for the past five years. While it\u2019s true you did leave the fort a lot, you never ventured far from it. This is first time you\u2019ve actually traveled. Ironic, since one of the reasons why you joined the army was the possibility of traveling to interesting places.\n\nHowever, it seems like you only visit these interesting places after they\u2019re already destroyed. You\u2019re basically seeing the aftermath of the demon occupation. It sort of reminds you of what you\u2019d seen back in Retlad when the Quillars were killing folks except the landscape is in even worse condition. The demons weren\u2019t content on just corrupting their mortal slaves; they were attempting to turn the entire land into their infernal realm. You can only imagine what sort of hell was going on while they were actually here.\n\nYou get to a small town that\u2019s completely wrecked and seemingly deserted. Its night time and normally you\u2019d go back and wait until morning to scout it, but Captain Eckard is insistent on getting to the former Tulan capital as quick as possible. You split up into small groups to scout the town quicker and tell everyone that if they come across anything more then they can handle, to run and alert everyone else.\n\nYou go building to building not really encountering much of anything. Not even survivors. Lots of half eaten dead bodies in various states of torment though. You expect when Velzix was killed the whole realm descended into anarchy pretty quickly and the demons reverted back to their chaotic natures causing as much mayhem as possible without too much repercussion.\n\nYou enter a shop with two of your other team members. You hear a creaking sound, which doesn\u2019t sound good. One of your team members goes a little further in, and it gets louder.\n\n\u201cStep back! The floors is\u2026\u201d you utter and then a large portion of the floor collapses underneath him. You attempt to grab his hand, but fail and the rest of the floor collapses underneath you as well.\n\nYou don\u2019t fall too far, but you definitely feel it. You recover as quick as you can and hear your other subordinate who managed to avoid falling through the floor.\n\n\u201cSarge! Are you alright?\u201d Private Ramusen shouts.\n\u201cYeah, yeah private. I\u2019m just a little bruised.\u201d\n\u201cWhat about Gannon? Is he alright?\u201d\n\nYou take your tinder box and make a small light. You look around and see that you must be in the basement of some sort of music shop from all the instruments you see. You didn\u2019t even notice when you first entered the place, it just looked like any other ransacked shop.\n\nUpon further inspection you see a body lying on the floor. It\u2019s Private Gannon and he\u2019s dead. He didn\u2019t land in the \u201cgood way\u201d you did and broke his neck.\n\n\u201cHe\u2019s dead.\u201d You call up to Ramusen.\n\u201cShit! He\u2019s fuckin\u2019 dead?\u201d\n\u201cYeah private, I just said he was! Now let me get the hell out of here\u2026fuck! The damn stairs are completely destroyed. I can\u2019t climb up, or even attempt a jump. Ramusen, throw down a rope and make sure you really secure it!\u201d\n\nWhile you wait for Ramusen to complete this task, you take a look at some of the instruments. Lots of flutes and other wind instruments that don\u2019t interest you. You grab an old looking mandolin. It\u2019s definitely human design, but it seems very ornate though, must\u2019ve been a specialty piece that wasn\u2019t for sale.\n\nYou pluck at the strings and despite the dirt, grime, and neglect of the instrument; it still manages to produce a fairly pleasing tone. You play for a good five minutes before you realize that Ramusen hasn\u2019t thrown down the rope yet.\n\n\u201cPrivate?\u201d is all you utter, when you hear the slumping of a lifeless body, followed by a low voice.\n\n\u201cBeautiful\u2026\u201d\n\nYou grab your bow, when you see a dark figure loom above you. You fire, but miss due to the figure dodging quicker than anything you\u2019ve ever encountered before. It doesn\u2019t help that this same figure has jumped down the hole beside you before you can blink.\n\nYou\u2019re standing right before the figure now. He has a pale, but familiar face, though the blood around the mouth is new and not encouraging. He knocks the bow out of your hand, but does nothing else to you. You wouldn\u2019t be quick enough to draw your sword given what you\u2019ve seen. In fact right now, all you\u2019re feeling is fear.\n\n\u201cAlmost hit me\u2026you would\u2019ve made a good addition. Maybe you could\u2019ve even\u2026no. Nobody can. This world is lost now and soon my kind won\u2019t even be around to guide your kind to combat the inevitable anymore\u2026\u201d Warnov says.\n\u201cWhat\u2026what are you talking about?\u201d you ask unsure what\u2019s going to happen next. Warnov looks as if he could tell you more than you\u2019d ever want to know about lots of things, but instead he just shakes his head.\n\n\u201cNevermind human. Telling you the whole story would not help you anyway. Perhaps it\u2019s best you hadn\u2019t joined us, seeing as I have been marked now. It won\u2019t be long before the rest of my kind are hunted down. He\u2019s really quite pissed at us, and worse, he can sense us you see\u2026(sigh) I can only imagine what he did to poor Count Rostov\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWho\u2019s pissed?\u201d\n\u201cWho do you think human? The Necro\u2026I mean the Great Lich Lord of course. Oh yes. He\u2019s back\u2026and this one isn\u2019t going to lose like the last one did so long ago.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re not following all of Warnov\u2019s cryptic speak, but if the last bit he\u2019s said is true, he\u2019s scared the hell out of you more than he has with his actions. Warnov grabs your shoulder and looks into your eyes.\n\n\u201cI do not envy your fate human\u2026the extinction of your species will soon follow my own. My advice to you? Live human! Live while you can, for eventually this whole world will be dead and under his complete control.\u201d\n\nSensing that he\u2019s brought enough doom and gloom to you, he relents and steps back.\n\n\u201cPlay me a song human.\u201d He says catching you off guard.\n\u201c\u2026what did you want to hear?\u201d you ask shakily.\n\u201cI don\u2019t know\u2026anything. Play what you were playing before.\u201d\n\nYou slowly pick up the dropped mandolin and begin playing the song that you were playing before and you play as if your life depended on it, though you get the impression that Warnov has no intention on killing you.\n\nHe sits quietly listening in the darkness, after finishing the song; he leaps back up through the hole.\n\n\u201cBeautiful\u2026such talent\u2026such a waste\u2026\u201d\n\nA rope is thrown down and the sounds of feet running off are then heard. You wait a minute and then climb up the rope, taking the mandolin with you. You see private Ramusen lying nearby with his throat ripped out and thoroughly drained of blood.\n\nYou\u2019re also just in time to hear other members of your group coming to your position when you exit the shop.\n\nWhat the hell are you supposed to tell them? Death to the world, reborn lich lords\u2026you start thinking, what\u2019s the point of all this? Maybe Warnov was right, maybe you should LIVE while there\u2019s still time. Granted his information is spotty, but you can\u2019t help but thinking he\u2019s probably more informed on the situation than most people.\n\nYou\u2019ve pondered it several times before, and you\u2019ve even attempted it once, but deserting is looking very desirable again. In this day and age, who\u2019s going to know if were killed or not?", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay and inform your squad of the situation", "result": "If the information that the vampire said was true, you think it might be better to inform your superiors of it so that something can be done now. It won\u2019t do any good to run off with this vital info and let them find out when it\u2019s too late and your \u201cfreedom\u201d won\u2019t mean anything as death takes over the world.\n\nYou meet up with the rest of your men who are calling out your name. They ask if you\u2019re okay and you reply you are, but you need to inform the captain of the new info you learned.\n\nWhen you return, you tell Captain Eckard exactly what happened, but instead of stopping to assess this new info or taking it immediately to his superior, he dismisses it! He said the vampire was probably just fucking around with you.\n\n\u201cThat vampire was probably toying with you like a cat would a mouse. He probably has your scent now, so he\u2019ll hunt and attack you later. The stories he\u2019s told you are probably just to keep your mind occupied with nonsense as well as to give us misinformation. Hell, he\u2019s fucking undead! He\u2019s probably WORKING with the Lich Lord!\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026but it was an agent of the Zalan Empire. Agent Warnov. He\u2026\u201d\n\u201cNO! He LOOKED like Warnov. Vampire can change their form you know! And even if it was the real Warnov, he\u2019s undead now and working for the enemy!\u201d\n\u201cWell if that\u2019s the case shouldn\u2019t we still inform head quarters immediately? He probably had lots of vital information that\u2026\u201d\n\u201cLook, the only thing we need to do is take the territory of the former Tulan Kingdom before the undead do! THAT\u2019S our primary concern! So I\u2019ll have no more discussion about it sergeant! Get ready to march tomorrow! We\u2019re heading for the former capitol!\u201d\n\nYou leave Eckard\u2019s tent and shake your head at his stupidity, but there\u2019s not much you can do about it now. You do decide that you\u2019re going to inform another high ranking officer when you can though.\n\nSoon the company is on the move to its destination. It gets more dangerous the closer you get though. You\u2019re getting ambushed by demon bands of them all the time. Not enough to destroy you of course, but certainly enough to whittle your numbers down. Captain Eckard gives you more troops to supply your losses, but by the time you get to the capitol, the whole company has lost at least a third of its original strength.\n\nThings don\u2019t get any better at the capital. Most of the citizens there have been so corrupted or beat down by the demons at this point that they\u2019ve either sold their own souls to Hell or gone completely mad. You\u2019re attacked by them and a few of the demon hold outs.\n\nBy the time you subdue and hold the territory, you\u2019re down to half of the company\u2019s original strength.\n\nThen after a few days the undead arrive.\n\nCaptain Eckard\u2019s rather inept handling of things don\u2019t get any better. Instead of shoring up the defenses of the capital\u2019s gates and walls and waiting for reinforcements which were going to arrive soon, he orders an open attack on the battlefield!\n\nYou are very reluctant to do this, but again you don\u2019t have any choice now. You fight and barely survive long enough to fallback when Captain Eckard calls for a retreat after finally realizing he\u2019s hopelessly outmatched. Unfortunately he\u2019s just provided more troops for the undead army, as the necromancers in charge raise the recent dead. They also start raising the dead citizens IN the city which haven\u2019t been cleared out!\n\nIt\u2019s an ignoble death as you\u2019re eventually surrounded, overwhelmed and cut down by zombies and skeletons. You join their ranks soon afterwards.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Sneak off", "result": "Last time you were wounded and had the misfortune of running into demons. Well you aren\u2019t wounded this time and you\u2019re pretty sure you won\u2019t be running into too many more demons. You\u2019ll be able to pull it off this time. You can\u2019t do this army shit anymore, as much as you want to help your family out, you\u2019ve got to live your own life regardless of what the future holds. You aren\u2019t even worried about committing an executionable offense.\n\nYou easily sneak away as you hear your men call out your name looking for you. You\u2019re glad you didn\u2019t leave too much back at the fort, except your lute, but you\u2019ve got your newly acquired mandolin to make up for it. Eventually you\u2019re away from civilization altogether.\n\nWhile you\u2019re out in the wilderness you think about your family again, and you have to at least let them know you\u2019re still alive. Maybe you can still do something about them, after all it doesn\u2019t sound like the Zalan Empire is becoming a great place to live anymore. Perhaps you could convince them to move?\n\nIt takes a week of sneaking around and keeping out of sight, but eventually you make it back home. Zalan looks a lot different; hell home looks a lot different. There was a small wooded area near your farm, but most of the trees have been cut down now. You also remember fewer patrols. Your house looks in better condition however. You guess at least your family seems a lot safer, but for how long?\n\nYou knock on the door in the middle of the night and your sister Randi answers, Not too surprising as she always was a night owl when she was little. At least she used to be little. The passing of the years and she\u2019s now a teenager and grown quite a bit. You\u2019ve been away so long.\n\nWhat does surprise you is the flintlock pistol that she\u2019s currently pointing at you!\n\n\u201cWhoa! Hold on! It\u2019s me, your brother!\u201d you say.\n\u201c\u2026it is? It is you!\u201d she exclaims and puts down the gun before hugging you.\n\u201cWhat the hell are you doing with a pistol?\u201d\n\u201cThe money you sent us allowed to buy new things you know and a traveling merchant was selling this for cheap!\u201d\n\u201cNo I mean, what are YOU doing with one? You\u2019ll blow your damn head off with that thing! Those things are unstable.\u201d You scold.\n\u201cWhat are you doing home? Are you on leave?\u201d\n\u201cUh\u2026that\u2019s a long story. Wake up the rest of the family; I have to talk to you all.\u201d\n\nRandi complies while you step inside the house and take in its new look. Eventually your Mom enters, followed by your brother Mallack and finally your youngest brother Calwin and sister Makana.\n\nYou all sit down at the dining room table. (You realize you haven\u2019t done that with your family in years) and you tell them everything. You get a lot of worried reactions. More for you than the other world impending doom stuff though. At least you know that they care.\n\n\u201cYou gotta get back to the army right now! Say you got captured by something and it took you awhile to escape!\u201d Mallack exclaims.\n\u201cWhile I\u2019m sure that MAY work, I just don\u2019t want to do it\u2026I can\u2019t take this anymore. The whole time I\u2019ve been in the damn army, my music has kept me sane. I\u2019ve noticed it have an effect on others as well. Never thought it would. I mean I have talent and\u2026\u201d\n\u201c\u2026you feel like you\u2019ve wasted your life?\u201d your mother replies.\n\nYou pause for a moment. You almost want to say yes, but you can\u2019t even if you wanted to. You haven\u2019t wasted it, its just you\u2019ve never really had the chance to do what you\u2019ve ever wanted to do.\n\n\u201cNo\u2026I guess I haven\u2019t\u2026 it\u2019s just\u2026\u201d\n\nYour mother takes your hand and speaks to you.\n\n\u201cI know. It\u2019s not fair. It\u2019s not right. Life isn\u2019t fair and it\u2019s starting to get a whole lot less fair. I know I\u2019ve mentioned it in letters to you, but the Zalan Empire WILL be taking the farm\u2026and it\u2019s looking like Mallack\u2019s going to be drafted if things are going the way they seem to be.\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026see that\u2019s what I\u2019m saying! We could all move! I mean of course I have to go into hiding, maybe Mallack could come with me. And the rest of you could use what money you have left and move to Retlad! It\u2019s a nice place. It\u2019s away from most of the fighting, and there aren\u2019t anymore Quillars there!\u201d\n\nYour mother shakes her head.\n\n\u201cYou must be behind in the news, because Retlad is finally going to become part of the Zalan Empire soon, so going there to live wouldn\u2019t make any difference. The Empire can take this farm, but in spirit this will ALWAYS be ours. The Empire has said they will allow us to continue working it and living on the land and even if they didn\u2019t they\u2019d have have to drag us all out and stick our heads on pikes before we\u2019d leave. Your father and his father build this farm up to what it is. Our family is going to be here until the end.\u201d\n\u201cThat\u2019s what I\u2019m afraid of\u2026what about you Mallack? You\u2019re probably going to be drafted. You aren\u2019t worried about that?\u201d\n\u201cSure I am. But what am I going to do, run? Where? From what you described you practically think the whole world is doomed anyway! I might as well take some of the undead bastards out before I go. I was getting bored of the farm anyway. Let Randi take over! Ha ha!\u201d\n\nYour mother addresses you again.\n\n\u201cSon, you know our family. We\u2019ve always done the right thing, even if it doesn\u2019t coincide with what we want\u2026I think you know what you have to do.\u201d\n\nAnd so you do. So you do.\n\nYou spend one night with your family and make the most of it. You all laugh and joke, trying to put all the problems of the world out of your mind and of course before you leave you play a song for them.\n\nEventually you hug them all goodbye and take your leave. More than a few tears are shed on both sides.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head back to the army", "result": "Now you have to figure out a plan that\u2019s going to prevent you from getting executed. You figure your brother\u2019s plan isn\u2019t exactly a bad one. Your record is good enough that you\u2019d probably be believed. You think up a lie explaining that you were captured by a particularly sadistic vampire who was planning on draining you slowly to keep you as ongoing food. He took you to a cave in the hills where you barely killed him and escaped with your life. You would\u2019ve made your way back sooner, but there were large groups of marauding orc raiders and demons escaping the ruins of the former Tulan kingdom that caused you to be extra cautious and forced you to hide for a few days.\n\nYep, that sounds good. You head out with the plan of meeting up with Captain Eckard\u2019s company which is surely at the Tulan Kingdom now.\n\nEventually you reach the same town you were at when you made your decision to try to leave. You find it occupied right now, it\u2019s not your company, so you\u2019re about to press on, but someone on patrol sees you.\n\n\u201cHALT! Where are you supposed to be soldier?!\u201d\n\u201cOh\u2026uh\u2026\u201d you say getting caught off guard. You mentally curse yourself for not being more aware.\n\u201cSpeak up! Wow, you look a little worse for wear\u2026what company are you with?\u201d\n\u201cI was with Captain Eckard\u2026but\u2026\u201d\n\n\u201cCaptain Eckard\u2019s company? Holy shit! We thought they all got killed! The undead reached the Tulan capital first and ambushed them! But why am I telling you? You were there! You must\u2019ve just barely escaped! Don\u2019t worry; you can avenge your friends, we\u2019re gathering strength to attack soon!\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t believe this\u2026\n\nThe guard begins speaking to you excitedly and asking you how you escaped. You just continue to say you don\u2019t know, it all became a blur when the ambush occurred and how you attempted to fight, but it was just too much. The guard sympathizes and tells you that you can explain more to his captain. You notice he isn\u2019t wearing Zalan armor, he\u2019s wearing Azi Republic armor. You can only assume that perhaps this is a Grand Alliance company.\n\nYour ideas come true when you do indeed notice several kinds of troop types, though the Zalan Empire soldiers seem to be leading, as the captain is wearing the armor. Your heart sinks when you recognize her and she recognizes you. It was years ago, but you both remember.\n\n\u201c\u2026what are you doing here?\u201d the female captain asks. \u201cLast I heard you were in Captain Eckard\u2019s company. A company that was reported to be wiped out completely. Have you managed to avoid death once again? You are the lucky one aren\u2019t you?\u201d\n\nSuddenly surrounding soldiers start to recognize you more closely. The Zalan ones especially.\n\n\u201cHoly shit it\u2019s him! You fuckin\u2019 survived not one but TWO overwhelming undead hordes! We gotta take him captain, he\u2019s obviously good luck!\u201d the guard says a little misguidedly.\n\u201cGood luck? If you haven\u2019t noticed, only HE seems to be getting out alive on these things! I\u2019d say he\u2019s bad luck!\u201d someone else says.\n\u201cNonsense! I heard how he\u2019s killed countless demons with his bow! We could use someone like that in our next attack.\u201d another says.\n\u201cIsn\u2019t he the guy that plays the lute really well?\u201d\n\nA few people start arguing until the female captain speaks again.\n\n\u201cENOUGH! I\u2019ll handle this. You in my office now, I\u2019ll speak with you in private. And for the rest of you, get ready to move out. We\u2019re attacking tomorrow.\u201d\n\nShe turns away and enters a building; you slowly follow, while everyone else disperses.\n\nWhen you enter the wrecked \u201coffice\u201d she closes the door and tells you to sit down, but she doesn\u2019t. Instead she stares at you hard at you and draws her sword.\n\n\u201cOkay Mr. Survivor. Convince me.\u201d\n\u201cConvince you of what?\u201d\n\u201cConvince me that you aren\u2019t some fucking undead spy!\u201d\n\u201cWHAT?! How? I mean\u2026\u201d\n\u201cEasy! In the two encounters you had with the undead on any major scale, you\u2019ve been the only one to survive. Once, maybe. But twice? Mighty suspicious\u2026\u201d\n\u201cBut I mean\u2026I\u2019m not undead! Look I even walk around in the daylight, I\u2019m not even pale!\u201d\n\u201cI didn\u2019t say you were undead, I said you were a spy. There are few of those misguided traitors that think their necromancer overlords will be kind to them, by killing them last. Madness.\u201d\n\u201cBut I\u2019m not a spy! I killed\u2026\u201d you begin to stutter under pressure.\n\u201dYeah, yeah, you killed demons. Big deal. The undead and demons weren\u2019t friends either. What better way to be a spy than to make yourself a hero?\u201d\n\u201cBut I\u2019m not\u2026\u201d\n\u201cYou\u2019re not what?\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m not\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWhat? More lies? Spit out the truth spy!\u201d she demands pointing her sword at your throat.", "action_results": [{"action": "Blurt out the truth", "result": "You can\u2019t take it anymore.\n\n\u201cI\u2019M NOT A FUCKING HERO! OKAY!? I NEVER WAS AND I NEVER WANTED TO BE! (sob)\u2026 I just wanted to go home\u2026(sob)\u201d\n\nYou weep for a few minutes before the captain speaks again.\n\n\u201cAlright then what happened? Tell me the entire truth and maybe you\u2019ll avoid the executioner\u2019s axe.\u201d\n\nAt this point you have little choice. You\u2019re too distraught to say anything else. You give a relatively condensed version of what happened. At Nuro and what happened recently. Your encounter with Warnov seems to surprise her quite a bit. You also go on to explain that it was high ranking Zalan officers that insisted on this hero nonsense. She believes you, like she knows something of it.\n\n\u201c(sigh) Yeah there\u2019s a statue of my dad in the Zalan capitol\u2026but I know better\u2026\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t question anymore about this quiet outburst from her since you\u2019re still too worried about what\u2019s going to happen to you.\n\n\u201cSo why did you come back? You probably could\u2019ve gotten away with it.\u201d\n\u201cThe same reason why I joined. My family. I guess I just needed a reminder of that first hand. And if there\u2019s any hope of changing the tide of this war with the undead then I need to stand by my decision of joining the Zalan Army and making the world safer for them.\u201d\n\nOnce again the captain seems to soften. She almost looks like she\u2019s going to tear up as well, but she turns away.\n\n\u201cMy family\u2026I\u2026\u201d are all she says before taking a deep breath and turning back towards you, with a serious mindset again.\n\n\u201cAlright, I shall trust your word for now sergeant, but I will be watching you VERY carefully! Consider yourself lucky for evading death once again, perhaps you do have knack for avoiding it. Let us hope that luck rubs off on the rest of us in the upcoming battle. I\u2019m putting you in charge of the Retlad archery platoon. They\u2019ll probably like you. Dismissed.\u201d\n\nBefore you leave she says one last thing.\n\n\u201cAnd sergeant, don\u2019t listen to what that bizarre vampire said. We\u2019re not going to become extinct. We\u2019re going to win and survive a long time. Besides you still have to play that song for me.\u201d\n\nAs you leave you feel a sigh of relief that you won\u2019t be dying just yet, but given that you\u2019re heading into battle soon with the undead, you\u2019re wondering if you just didn\u2019t postpone the inevitable.\n\nTwo years pass\u2026\n\nSeven years since the Nuro Incident changed the world into this living hell.\n\nYour time served in the Grand Alliance has not really changed much. The Grand Alliance and the Zalan Empire are basically one of the same now thanks to the complete embrace of a totalitarian system. Might makes right. Nations like the Azi Republic protested, but there was little that they could, after all Zalan has been practically defending the world by itself for the past few years. You get the impression that if this war is won; the Zalan Empire is going to throw its hat in to be a one world government.\n\nAmazing how power and conspiracy is plotted even when it probably won\u2019t happen. \u201cProbably won\u2019t\u201d because your superiors and political leaders are a lot more \u201coptimistic\u201d about winning than you are, but then they haven\u2019t had to face the horrors you\u2019ve faced.\n\nAnd horrors are a completely accurate word. You\u2019ve gotten over your fear of the undead, but it doesn\u2019t make it any easier. You\u2019re starting to lose ground. Everyday the living lose someone, the Great Lich Lord gains. It\u2019s a question of numbers and quite frankly your side doesn\u2019t have them.\n\nYou sort of wish your old captain was here. She was a very good leader and inspirational, but then again that\u2019s why she was made a general and sent elsewhere. She asked you to play that song before she left though. Somehow it seemed to make her sadder afterwards.\n\n\u201cCaptain, undead are on the move, they won\u2019t be long now.\u201d One of your messengers says.\n\u201cYes, I can sense it. Here. You head back to my home. You know where it is by now, and give this message to my family. If you get back here and see undead, well get the fuck out and run back to Zalan territory.\u201d\n\nBeing a captain hasn\u2019t really turned you into a copy of the captains you served in the past, but then again you didn\u2019t even think you\u2019d ever be promoted to one. Your reign as one has been a little unorthodox as you\u2019ve applied more guerilla tactics than traditional ones, but given your assignment and your background it makes a hell of a lot more sense.\n\nYou\u2019re currently stationed on what remains of the Garwold Confederacy. It was a relatively peaceful nation made up mostly of Halflings and Gnomes, with lush green fields and flowers. Now it\u2019s just slowly becoming another massive graveyard and example of genocide.\n\nYou\u2019ve gotten to know quite a few of them and you\u2019re always amazed of how they can keep their sense of humor in the face of utter destruction. One of them actually gives you an answer.\n\n\u201cTo keep from crying.\u201d\n\nIndeed. You\u2019ve been playing quite a bit when you\u2019re not battling the undead. (The Garwold citizens enjoy your playing a lot) It\u2019s gotten to the point where you don\u2019t just play anymore to keep your mind off of things, it\u2019s like it transports you to a different world. A better world.\n\nIf only.\n\nYou often wonder how your brother Mallack is doing. He\u2019s been stationed in a relatively safer location back in Zalan territory. You\u2019re guessing that it lowers the odds of having your mom lose both of her sons at the same time. Like it makes it any better if she lost them within any length on time of each other. You wonder if the war is going to go on long enough that by the time Calwin grows up he\u2019ll be drafted as well.\n\nIf he even gets the chance to grow up.\n\nYou can\u2019t think about it now. A massive undead horde is coming and there\u2019s no where left to hide. There will be open battle and you need to stay focused.\n\nYou go through the whole order thing, and making sure your strategy is sound. You wish you had more wizards, but they seem to be in shorter supply these days. It\u2019s almost like they\u2019re being targeted deliberately sometimes\u2026actually you don\u2019t think it, you KNOW that they are.\n\nYou see the undead horde approach. You look through some new fangled dwarven invention called an eye piece and see something makes your job a hell of a lot worse.\n\nYou don\u2019t just see the usual undead. You see fully armored Death Knights. Harder to kill than even a zombie giant. You see Blood Specters. Dark crimson spirits that can cause their victims to bleed from every orifice with their shrieks. Both of those are at the head of this horde, and this isn\u2019t even counting that you\u2019re severely outnumbered by just the regular zombies, skeletons, ghosts and the like.", "action_results": [{"action": "Break off into a smaller skirmishing force", "result": "You know that this is most likely a losing battle, but some hope might be gained, if you can somehow draw out the knights and specters and get them by themselves. As powerful as they are, they\u2019re very hard to control even by necromancers and get easily agitated by living creatures.\n\nYou can\u2019t do it alone though. You take your best archers and a couple of your best wizards and mention your plan. You don\u2019t ask for volunteers, you just assign. You\u2019re in charge and you have to make the hard decisions, even if it might mean you\u2019ll die. They don\u2019t look enthused, but you aren\u2019t either.\n\nYou tell everyone else to hold their ground while you and your small platoon ride towards the horde.\n\n\u201cReady those blessed silvers men, and you robe wearers melt those dead tin cans!\u201d\n\nYou get close enough and you unleash as many blessed silver arrows as you can at the Blood Specters. You kill a few. The wizards don\u2019t do quite as well with the knights. However, both attacks are enough.\n\nYou see the Specters and Knights making whatever unearthly noises they do and begin to advance towards you far ahead of the slower yet steady moving horde. It apparent that the necromancer controlling them is attempting to bring them back under control, because they begin to squirm back and forth which gives you some more time to kill a few more during their confusion. Eventually the necromancer must give up total control because they stop squirming and advance upon you once again.\n\nYou ride back as quickly as possible with the Specters and Knights in full pursuit. You didn\u2019t expect those Specters to be so fast. A few of them manage to catch up to some of your men with grisly results. You yourself almost get smacked upside the head by a Death Knight mace. When you get back in range the rest of your awaiting army deals with your pursuers. More blessed arrows fly into the Blood Specters before they can do anymore harm, and eventually the Death Knights are brought down as well.\n\nThere is no time for a reprieve though, as the main horde is now almost upon you. You order a regrouping as best you can, and face the enemy, telling if possible for someone to aim for the necromancer in all of this rotting mess.\n\nBones and limbs from both sides are broken and hacked off. A zombie skull is smashed, splashing maggots, blood and brains all over you and you\u2019re not even thinking about it. You just have a tune in your head to take yourself away from the massacre. Somehow in all of the chaos, you single out the necromancer leading this army, he stands a far piece away from the main fighting, but he\u2019s arrogant enough to be close enough for you to hit him with an arrow.\n\nAnd you have to hit him now. You see a Grand Alliance soldier who just took a fatal blow to the chest begin to rise\u2026\n\nNot many arrows left and not much time, you just load up and shoot, hoping you hit the bastard.\n\nYour shot is straight and true. It strikes the necromancer in the stomach, causing him to fall back, which in turn causes the undead horde to momentarily stop their vicious attacks, giving your side a chance to turn the tide a bit.\n\nThen you shoot another arrow when you see the necromancer attempt to get back up, which turns the tide completely in your favor. Zombies and skeletons fall. Ghouls flee at the loss of leadership and any remaining undead are quickly dispatched. You don\u2019t take chances though. You walk up to the corpse of the necromancer and shoot your last arrow directly into his head and stab him a few times.\n\nYou then start laughing.\n\n\u201cIf this was the Great Lich Lord, I\u2019d be a real hero right now!\u201d\n\nYou quickly sober up from this macabre outburst when you hear shouting from some of your men and you look up.\n\nIt\u2019s another horde. Just as big. You look behind you and see that your own numbers are completely insufficient. The Garwold citizens are either mostly dead or demoralized at this point.\n\nEven when you win\u2026you lose.\n\nHaving no real options, you sound a retreat to fall back to the Zalan border and suggest that the Garwold citizens do likewise as there is nothing more for them here.\n\nThe Garwold Confederacy is now just one more loss for the living. The Zalan Empire won\u2019t be far behind.\n\nThree years pass\u2026\n\nTen years since the Nuro incident and The Grand Alliance is nearly just consisting of the Zalan Empire now, which in turn has had to adapt a siege mentality. There is no \u201cgoing on the offensive\u201d anymore. You\u2019re purely on defense.\n\nYour brother Mallack died two years ago. Transferred to a location with more fighting due to lack of manpower. Like it matters. Didn\u2019t even get to say goodbye. You can only hope he didn\u2019t become one of those things\u2026but you know he probably did.\n\nYou\u2019ve been urging your family to run where it\u2019s safer, but of course they won\u2019t budge. The undead have been penetrating deeper into Zalan territory, you know it\u2019s only a matter of time before the Great Lich Lord decides to stop toying with you and makes his full scale attack.\n\nSure enough it happens. Town after town is taken; you\u2019re pushed back further and further, and you know there\u2019s nothing you can do to stop it.\n\nAn order is given to everyone to fallback to the capital and help defend it from an upcoming attack, but at this point you\u2019re just wondering if the rest of your family is still alive.", "action_results": [{"action": "Report to the captial", "result": "Everything tells you that you should go to your family, but you question if they are even still alive. You don\u2019t want to think about it really since it\u2019s starting to upset you. The thought of your remaining family being killed and turned into undead parodies of themselves, makes you not want to know if that\u2019s what happened.\n\nYou wonder if they might\u2019ve even fled already like you\u2019ve been telling them to in your letters. It\u2019s certainly possible, even as stubborn as your Mom is, she might\u2019ve taken your advice at least for the sake of the rest of your brother and sisters.\n\nYou mind suddenly goes elsewhere\u2026\n\n\u2026Yeah\u2026they left already. There\u2019s no point in going to your home. It\u2019s been abandoned. They\u2019re probably all safe in Retlad by now. No need to worry. You\u2019ll see them later. Surely this attack on the capitol won\u2019t be that bad. You\u2019ve survived a lot worse. You\u2019ve got orders and you need to follow them, because if there is any chance at stopping this dead plague, this is going to be a crucial battle. You did join the army to help your family after all, and what better way to help them, then to ensure their future?\n\nAfter having this little delusion, you feel calm again. Oddly so. Even a little hopeful. You head off to the capitol with your troops.\n\nWhen you get there, the general attitude is pessimistic. Most people don\u2019t seem to think they\u2019re going to win. You\u2019re getting that vibe even from the generals of the Grand Alliance. You don\u2019t see why. Surely the Great Lich Lord has finally overextended all his resources now. This attack will be a failure and from here you will be able to make a counter attack! Sure it won\u2019t be easy, but it can be done.\n\nPeople are finding your optimism a little weird, especially those that have served under you since they know how that really isn\u2019t your personality. You don\u2019t think you\u2019ve changed at all though. You just go about following your orders of making sure your troops are prepared in their defense of the south wall, humming little tunes as happy music fills your head.\n\nA few days pass and you\u2019re visited by your old commanding officer who\u2019s constantly making sure everything is in place. She looks very tired; you tell her she needs to think positive. When she asks if you\u2019re feeling alright, you just laugh and ask if she\u2019d like to hear a song.\n\nShe tells you no with a grim look. She also tells you point blank that she wants to get laid one last time before this battle. Being in the somewhat scattered mind frame that you\u2019re in right now, you ask who the candidate is.\n\nA couple hours later, you have your answer. Before you leave her room, she asks you to play a song for her after all. It\u2019s the one she asked to play before. The one her mother sang to her.\n\nAs you play she noticeably begins to weep. She doesn\u2019t attempt to hide it. You stop playing and hold her until she calms down which eventually she does and composes herself.\n\nShe gives no further information and simply tells you to go back to your post and to carry on as if nothing happened. You do so without pressing the issue.\n\nA week passes and the undead horde arrives. It\u2019s much bigger than anyone expected, and even worse, the Great Lich Lord himself is leading this attack.\n\nNow your mind suddenly comes back to grips with reality.\n\nThe undead horde surrounds and storms the city. An attempt is made to kill the Great Lich Lord, but he merely gets back up from the hail of gunfire and arrows that strike him.\n\nSoon the gates are compromised. You order your troops to take to the streets and fight off the invading hordes with the rest of the soldiers. You do likewise, though now you\u2019re really wondering about a way to try to escape. Its no use though, the dead are everywhere butchering anything alive. You kill one walking corpse and five more take its place.\n\nIn one particular brutal sneak attack, a ghoul jumps from a rooftop and tackles you. You feel a paralyzing bite as it sinks its teeth into you. Darkness soon takes you and you begin you new mindless undead life afterwards.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go to your family", "result": "Really, it\u2019s the only thing that makes any kind of sense anymore. This war is lost there\u2019s not even any doubt about it. Hope is fleeting and if this is truly it, then it\u2019s going to be with the ones you did this for in the first place.\n\nYour small groups of soldiers wonder where you\u2019re going and you flat out tell them, in fact you tell them more than that.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m going home, and I suggest if any of you have any family you go to them as well. This is it folks, there\u2019s no happy ending here. It\u2019s been a pleasure serving with all of you.\u201d\n\nYou then ride home as quickly as possible.\n\nThe farm is scattered with undead. They attack and in some cases eat the livestock, while attempting to get into your house. Dead Zalan soldiers can be seen, except they aren\u2019t properly dead like they should be. The farmhouse is being attacked and you can see your sister firing her pistol at the zombies from one of the broken windows. You trample a couple of the zombies with your horse and kill couple more with your bow, but eventually you dismount and chop up the remaining ones near the farm house, since you want to save your arrows for anything potentially more dangerous.\n\n\u201cQuick get inside through this window, the door is barricaded.\u201d your sister Randi shouts when she sees you.\n\u201cNo! It\u2019s a death trap to stay now! This place is lost! You all have to come with me!\u201d you shout back, keeping an eye on the advancing zombies.\n\u201cCan\u2019t Mom\u2019s hurt pretty bad. Got stabbed by one those corpses. We can\u2019t move her. Help\u2019s gotta come soon\u2026\u201d\n\u201cNO, it won\u2019t Randi! The capitol of Zalan is being attacked as we speak! I came home to get your guys! This is the fucking end! We\u2019ve lost! We just gotta\u2026\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re interrupted when you have to cut down an advancing zombie. Your sister fires a shot at another one. Suddenly a scream from the house is heard, followed by another. That has to be Calwin, and Makana. Randi rushes from the window and you cut down another zombie before bashing the door down with relative ease.\n\nMore screaming is heard along with growling this time. You look around and run down the hallway where Randi is standing motionless. She\u2019s dropped her pistol.\n\nYou push her aside and see your other sister Makana dead on the floor and then a quick scan to the left and you see your mother eating Calwin.\n\nShe\u2019s one of those things\u2026\n\nYou act where Randi failed and give a killing blow to the thing that was once your mother.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry.\u201d You whisper and her blood splashes across your face.\n\nNow you\u2019re ready to get the hell out of the house, but Randi is still standing there motionless.\n\n\u201cCOME ON! WE GOTTA GET THE FUCK OUTTA HERE!\u201d you shout.\n\u201cYeah...okay\u2026\u201d Randi says and begins to move like she\u2019s in slow motion and picks up her flintlock.\n\nYou run past Randi in the hallway who\u2019s still moving slowly.\n\n\u201cRandi get your ass mov\u2026\u201d\n\nYou hear a gunshot behind you. Followed by the slumping of a lifeless body. You don\u2019t even turn around, you don\u2019t want to see.\n\nWhen you get outside, surprisingly the undead haven\u2019t become unmanageable yet, and you cut down another couple with relative ease. Your horse unfortunately has run off, you\u2019re on foot from here.\n\nYou don\u2019t even know where to go. Where is it going to be safe? Nowhere, but you lack any other ideas, so you just head for unclaimed wilderness.\n\nAfter about a day of running, hiding and maneuvering, you\u2019re in a relatively safe location and that\u2019s when you finally allow yourself to grieve for the loss of your family. You weep.\n\nYou\u2019ve lost everything now. Everything you did was basically for them, and now they\u2019re all gone. You don\u2019t know if you can even continue. What would be the point? The world seems to be doomed anyway.\n\nBut then after you think about it, you decide that if death is taking over the world, you\u2019re not going to make it easy. Death has already taken everything away from you except your life, and you\u2019re going to hold on to that as long as possible. You\u2019re going to live for your family and all the others that can\u2019t any longer.\n\nYou\u2019re going to survive, because ultimately that\u2019s what you\u2019ve always done. You\u2019ve cheated death more than once already and you\u2019ll continue to do it. Death itself is going to have to hunt you down if it wants your life.\n\nAfter reaching this conclusion, you try to think of where you should go next. Going to any type of centers of civilization is out of the question now. You\u2019d only have to move again, them being targets now.\n\nSo it\u2019s the life of wanderer now. The question is where would be best? The forests aren\u2019t exactly safe, but you\u2019re more familiar with surviving in them. The mountains might be a little safer, but living in them is going to be a lot harsher.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stick to the forests", "result": "Running from the undead, only to die of starvation and the cold in the mountains isn\u2019t your idea of survival. You\u2019re sticking to familiar terrain. You travel further away from civilization and ultimately deeper into a large forest. You\u2019re not exactly sure of where you\u2019re at, but you know you\u2019ve left the Zalan borders. You\u2019re probably in the unclaimed area north of the Retlad province. You never patrolled that far when you were stationed there, so you\u2019re unsure of what to expect. You\u2019ll certainly have to be alert though.\n\nA few weeks pass and you\u2019ve got the hang of it. A few close calls with an Eberaw Hunter, but you\u2019ve managed to make somewhat of a home for yourself. You mainly sleep in the trees. You get water from springs and small streams and as for food, well you always were good at hunting.\n\nYou pass the time playing your mandolin and just basically keeping watch. As the days pass by though, you get the impression that someone is watching YOU.\n\nIt\u2019s not any undead though. You haven\u2019t seen any in weeks. You haven\u2019t come across any living creatures of higher intelligence either, but then again that doesn\u2019t mean they aren\u2019t around\u2026\n\n\u201cHello stranger. Do you like our forest?\u201d you hear a small voice say.\n\nYou look around, but see nothing. You guess who ever it is, is invisible, and you nearly go for your weapon.\n\n\u201cPlease, no need for that. You are among friends here, musical one.\u201d The voice says and then you see your unseen host appears before you. She\u2019s very small and probably only comes up to ankle. You\u2019ve heard of fairies before, but you\u2019ve never seen one.\n\n\u201cAre you a fairy?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cWe go by many different names. Technically I am a pixie, but if you prefer, fairy will do. We heard you playing over the weeks and I thought it was about time we told you our appreciation for it. We didn\u2019t know you big people had gifts for it. You are human are you not?\u201d\n\u201cYes, and thanks.\u201d\n\u201cSo, what brings you out here? Are you a ranger perhaps? You seem to have skills about you that are useful in this environment.\u201d\n\u201cNo, not a ranger. Just trying to escape death like everyone else I suppose.\u201d\n\u201cHmm, you realize as beautiful as this forest is, it\u2019s not without its dangers. Death is here as well, but I\u2019m sure you know that.\u201d\n\u201cYes, but its at least reasonable. There aren\u2019t zombies and wraiths terrorizing the place\u2026well at least not yet\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWhat are you talking about stranger?\u201d the pixie asks quizzically, you look a little surprised yourself.\n\n\u201cThe Great Lich Lord of course. He\u2019s destroying everything, and I dunno how he\u2019s going to be stopped. I don\u2019t think he can.\u201d\n\nYour words immediately make the pixie\u2019s cheerful demeanor change immediately.\n\n\u201c\u2026he\u2019s returned?! But he was killed centuries ago! My clan has told the stories for generations!\u201d\n\u201cWell, he\u2019s back, or someone like him\u2026you really didn\u2019t know? I mean this war with him has been going on for years now. Ten to be precise. Don\u2019t you leave this forest?\u201d\n\u201cYou must understand stranger, we have everything we want here. There is no need to leave. We also live in illusions, what you see now, is not necessarily what is. We remain hidden in our illusions so nobody may ever harm us and we can live our lives in relative isolation. It is only on rare occasions that we reveal ourselves.\u201d\n\u201cBut I\u2019ve heard stories about your kind being elsewhere or even in cities.\u201d You say.\n\u201cWell we are not the only fairy folk you know! Perhaps the others you heard of were sprites, or brownies or even a different clan of pixies. I can only speak for my clan and as far as I know we are the only fairy folk that live in this particular forest. There are other denizens of course, but thanks to our illusions we stay safely hidden. Even the occasional human or goblinoid that has wandered in here has not disturbed us. Quite frankly, you\u2019d be the first person in centuries that we\u2019ve revealed ourselves to.\u201d\n\u201cThere aren\u2019t any elves in this forest?\u201d you ask, sort of figuring that some might have retreated or made a home here, forests being their natural homes and all. Your question is met with slight annoyance.\n\n\u201cMost certainly not! This place has been elf free for millennia and hopefully stays that way! I\u2019ll speak no more of this elven nonsense!\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t press the issue, but up until now you figured fairy folk and elves were all friends, guess not. The pixie changes the subject since she wants to know more about this Great Lich Lord business and says her name is Qweet. Qweet tells you that she will return with the rest of her clan, as she will not reveal their home of course. In a somewhat playful yet firm tone she also warns you not to try to follow her, though as good of a tracker you are you doubt if you could anyway since she turns invisible again.\n\nWhile you wait, you still can\u2019t believe she and the rest of her clan don\u2019t know anything about what\u2019s going on; you almost envy them for living in blissful ignorance for the last ten years. You also feel like you\u2019ve ruined things for them.\n\nEventually more pixies return and you tell them what\u2019s been going on. They are saddened, but maintain a confident demeanor. They are certain that they will survive this plague due to their illusions. They explain that if need be they can hide the entire forest, which with the new grim information you gave them they are very inclined to do. They still have to discuss it.\n\nIn the meantime they say they hope you\u2019ll stick around for awhile as they still enjoy your playing and you aren\u2019t destroying the forest. You\u2019re just glad you\u2019ve met some friendly people that aren\u2019t trying to kill you. It\u2019s a nice change and after what you\u2019ve been through recently, you welcome it.\n\nOne year passes\u2026\n\nYour time in the pixie forest has been relatively safe. Other than the occasional aggressive forest beasts, you haven\u2019t had to do much combat. It\u2019s been a relief. You\u2019ve enjoyed the company of the pixies as well.\n\nHowever, your natural curiosity has gotten the better of you on occasion and you have made a few trips outside of the forest.\n\nYou travel as far as the Retlad province and the first obscure village you stumble across is completely decimated, with undead roaming around. The scary part about it is this is very recent looking, which means they\u2019re starting to head your way.\n\nIt\u2019ll start with the occasional zombie or skeleton wandering in. Then more will come. How long before an army arrives? Again due to your information, Qweet and the rest of her clan have made the final decision to hide their forest entirely. They tell you that they would like you to stay. You would even be allowed to see their true home. The only stipulation is that you would not be able to leave. The illusion wouldn\u2019t just hide the forest, but it would create a barrier preventing entry or exit. You can\u2019t imagine how it would look to those on the outside of the forest.\n\nAppealing to be sure, but as much as you like the company of the pixies, you don\u2019t think it will be safe to dwell in their forest for too much longer, illusions or not. The Gnomes back in the Garwold Confederacy had some excellent illusionists as well, and it didn\u2019t help them.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay in the forest", "result": "This is probably the most satisfied you\u2019ve been in a long time. Why bother running anymore? You\u2019re not going to be any happier elsewhere as you eek out an existence. This is a place where you can play your music and have a regular appreciative audience. Perhaps the pixie illusion will fail, perhaps it won\u2019t, but this is your home now.\n\n\u201cQueet, I\u2019m staying.\u201d\n\u201cThat\u2019s wonderful!\u201d she squeaks.\n\nThe pixies go through with their plan of hiding the entire forest. They explain that for everyone else it will look like a rock mass and the magic shield will prevent entry in case someone bumps into the \u201crock\u201d. Creatures inside will only see more forest outside the barrier and will probably be baffled to as why they can\u2019t go any further, but will probably not make any serious attempt to do so even if they could.\n\nThe pixies also allow you to enter their little village. Naturally you\u2019re much bigger, but a special arrangement is made so that you can stay nearby and they build you a tree-house of sorts and provide meals and drink for you.\n\nLife with the pixies full time is relatively nice. Of course a few are prone to play jokes on you sometimes, you don\u2019t get mad about it and they usually make up for it later. A few years pass and it gets to the point where you almost forget about what\u2019s going on outside the forest since almost everyday is a pixie party filled with merriment and music. There\u2019s one particular time when there was a brief magical disturbance in the illusion, but the pixies managed to correct it. It does cause you to get concerned, but the pixies still insist that you not worry.\n\nAfter fifteen some odd years pass, the forest begins to signs of unnatural decay, and forest creatures seem to be dying way before their time.\n\nSome of the pixies have made comments of not feeling themselves, which is very odd since being fairy creatures they don\u2019t normally get sick. You haven\u2019t been feeling up to your usual standards either. You at first chalked it up to age, but you know that it\u2019s more than that. The Great Lich Lord\u2019s influence has finally penetrated the illusion. Death is creeping in.\n\nThe months pass and the illusion begins to break down despite attempts to keep it up. At last for the first time in years you see the \u201coutside world\u201d again. It\u2019s desolate and bleak. The Great Lich Lord has been thorough in his conquest of the world and with this new found green patch, it won\u2019t be long before it becomes as dead as the rest of the landscape.\n\nPerhaps because they\u2019re magical creatures of nature, the pixies cannot withstand this death aura as well as you can, and they begin dying. Their illusions and happy lush world utterly destroyed.\n\n\u201cWh\u2026why is this happening?\u201d are Queet\u2019s last delirious words before she expires.\n\nOne by one they all die. You weep as you can do nothing for them. Nobody can. Once again you\u2019ve lost another family. You wish you\u2019d left the damn forest long ago just so you hadn\u2019t deluded yourself and gotten so attached to the pixies only to watch them die.\n\nHowever, you decide that this place will be your last stand as well and you\u2019re too tired to run even if there was anywhere safe to run to anyway. You fight off undead creatures for a couple months as you attempt to survive in this now dying forest, but ultimately you\u2019re overwhelmed and killed.\n\nSadly, unlike your pixie friends, you are not allowed to rest in peace as you wander the landscape in search of the last remnants of life to destroy in the Great Lich Lord\u2019s service.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Leave", "result": "The pixies have almost made you forget about what\u2019s really going on in the rest of the world\u2026but you still know it\u2019s going on. Perhaps it\u2019s easier for them, as they have not had to experience the tragedies you\u2019ve faced, but you know the destruction that\u2019s eventually going to come. You don\u2019t see any hope in their plan and if you stayed, and you still would never be able to completely relax. You could possibly be trapped as well.\n\nHowever, you have no wish to bring more despair to these people. Let them live in illusions for as long as they can,\n\nYou wish you could.\n\nIt is with great regret that you tell them that you cannot stay. They attempt to convince you to do otherwise, but you\u2019ve already made up your mind. Finally they accept your decision, but insist on repaying you for all your musical entertainment. They give you a small magical amulet. They tell you it can make you invisible for short periods of time.\n\nYou thank them and assure them that it will most definitely come in handy.\n\nYou leave the forest and head further away from the undead plague.\n\nNine years pass\u2026\n\nTwenty years of surviving this living hell.\n\nLiving in a cave in the mountains isn\u2019t as easy as it was in the Pixie forest, but it\u2019s probably a lot safer as far as undead are concerned. The biggest threats you\u2019ve had to face are a few Cragmaws and Mountain Trolls. Once you ran into a couple of dwarves, so you assume that there may be an underground settlement somewhere in the area. You attempted to speak, but they just shot at you with their crossbows and told you to go away, saying that humans were the cause of the problem going on right now.\n\nYour use your amulet when you can as it seems that the living have been just as willing to kill you as the undead. Then again, that\u2019s nothing new.\n\nEvery now and then you travel and scout around the area taking in the untainted countryside. You figure you should do it now before it\u2019s claimed eventually. The living exist here, which means death can only eventually follow. You just wonder how long it will take.\n\nSometimes you walk along the shore that\u2019s nearby. You look out past the vast blue and begin to wonder if there are any other places out there. You briefly entertain the idea of building a boat. You know that the globe was thoroughly charted centuries ago and that this is the only continent, but still you wonder if something wasn\u2019t missed. Of course you\u2019re probably just holding on to the false hope that you could theoretically go someplace else where death wasn\u2019t everywhere.\n\nBut there isn\u2019t such a place.\n\nLately something very odd has been happening and you have no idea what it is. You could swear that the landscape has been subtlety altering itself from time to time. Not permanently, but it seems to look \u201cwavy\u201d or \u201cwarped\u201d briefly.\n\nYou initially chalk it up to your prolonged isolation and seeing things because of it, however you soon find out that it\u2019s more than just your mind playing tricks on you.\n\nOne day after you\u2019ve done some hunting and bringing your catch back to your cave, you start noticing a severe slow down in your actions.\n\n\u201cWhat the fuck\u2026\u201d you say to yourself, except it comes out a lot slower. You don\u2019t experience for long, but the worst is yet to come.\n\nA portal opens up in the sky and you immediately feel ill. You see a creature that you\u2019ve never seen before and it\u2019s huge but it feels incredibly unnatural and it definitely isn\u2019t of this world. The dead animal that you\u2019re carrying suddenly melts into a black goo like substance. You jump back and nearly fall off the side of the mountain, which now feels like jelly under your feet rather than sturdy rock.\n\nYou don\u2019t know what\u2019s going here and you don\u2019t want to know. All you know is reality is starting to be seriously warped and you\u2019re ready to puke.\n\nThe tentacled creature doesn\u2019t seem to notice you, it\u2019s just surveying and floating in the air as the area around and beneath it changes. That still doesn\u2019t mean it won\u2019t attack eventually when it does notice you.\n\nYou immediately attempt to use your amulet, but nothing is happening. The creature or something else is nullifying your magic item.\n\nRight now you\u2019re caught out in the open, your cave is close, but you\u2019re still not sure if you can get there in time and even if you do, would you be any safer? The other alternative is to make you way back down the mountain and try to escape that way. The problem with that plan is that everything is very wobbly right now and you\u2019re not feeling very steady.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run to your cave", "result": "The creature is too big to fit in the cave if it tries to attack and you need to hide as soon as possible.\n\nYou make a run for it, gagging and stumbling the whole time. Eventually you do get to the cave. You don\u2019t think the creature even saw you.\n\nYou continue to fumble around in the dark cave that you call home. You can still hear weird noises coming from outside and you\u2019re desperate to drown them out as you feel like its doing something to your mind. In fact, you\u2019re feeling a little deranged.\n\n\u201cWHAT?! WHAT?! UNDEAD WEREN\u2019T ENOUGH?! NOW THIS?! HAHAHAHA! YOU CAN\u2019T KILL ME! I\u2019LL SURVIVE! I SURVIVE EVERYTHING! Who am I here? Who goes there?\u201d\n\nYou look around the cave and start seeing the rocky walls transform into writhing masses of worms. You grab your sword and start hacking away, only to fall to the ground half laughing and half crying.\n\n\u201cYou don\u2019t understand\u2026I\u2019ve lost it all\u2026(sob) why? WHERE ARE THE GODS? WHY HAVEN\u2019T YOU STOPPED THIS?! DAMN YOU FUCKING ALL! Ha ha ha ha!\u201d\n\nYou look into the small fire that lights your cave and see it change into a blue color. You begin to think you see faces in it.\n\n\u201cRandi? Is that you? I\u2019m sorry\u2026I could still save\u2026\u201d\n\nYou burn your hand badly when you shove it into the flames in some misguided attempt to save your sister who is not there. It\u2019s at this point; you realize you\u2019re losing your mind. You didn\u2019t survive this long just to lose that. You start trying to block out the sounds, but it\u2019s relentless.\n\nAnd that\u2019s when you see your mandolin on the floor nearby. Music. It always takes you to another place. A better place. You can\u2019t play it right now with your burned hand, but your music is always with you. In your mind.\n\nYou begin to focus on one particular song in your head. You close your eyes think of yourself playing. The tune is nearly drowned out by the noise, but eventually the music gets louder and the creature\u2019s noise is getting quieter, until finally that\u2019s all you can hear.\n\nYou have no idea how long you do this for, but eventually you open your eyes again, and everything is normal. The walls are rock, the fire is red. Your hand still hurts, but it will heal.\n\nYou stay in the cave for days, unsure of what to make of all this. Ultimately you leave to explore cautiously, and everything outside seems normal as well. There is no sign that the creature was ever around. You don\u2019t know if it moved on, disappeared, or what.\n\nDid you go temporarily insane? Did all of this really happen? You do know you burned your hand, so you\u2019re pretty sure it did on some level. In any event, you never want to encounter anything like that ever again. Death almost seems preferable than complete madness.\n\nYou\u2019re still shaken up by the experience for months to come but eventually you get over it. Just like you have with every other hardship you\u2019ve faced.\n\nTwenty years pass\u2026\n\nForty years have passed and you feel death closer than ever. Old age has been taking its toll and while you\u2019re somewhat fit for your age you can\u2019t stop the ravages of time.\n\nStill, it\u2019s not just that. It\u2019s the world in general. The place has slowly become a dead world, quite literally from what you\u2019ve seen during your travels.\n\nEventually you abandoned your cave in the mountain when the dead began to congregate in the area. The dwarven settlement was probably attacked. You don\u2019t know, you didn\u2019t stick around. You continued to stay on the move.\n\nAfter a few years of wandering, you noticed dead trees. Not unusual in the lands of the Great Lich Lord, but you were sticking to places at least on the outskirts of his domain. But it didn\u2019t seem to matter. His influence was obviously extending. The magic in your amulet no longer works, and you briefly thought of the pixies. You know they didn\u2019t survive.\n\nSoon grass was no longer growing. Hunting was becoming scarce. Animals were dying out. It almost reminded you of when the farm was going through a rough patch, but this time there would be no recovery. You walked along another shoreline and saw fish and other sea creatures washed up dead in massive quantities.\n\nYou\u2019ve had to fight undead monsters at almost every turn, always having to stay one step ahead before you\u2019re overwhelmed.\n\nEven the air itself feels like it\u2019s harder to breathe no matter where you go.\n\nRight now you\u2019re very far north, where nothing ever existed save ice and snow. You\u2019re living in yet another cave, but you\u2019re pretty sure this one is going to be your tomb. You haven\u2019t eaten in days, as you haven\u2019t spotted a living creature in days. You haven\u2019t seen another intelligent living creature in years.\n\nIt\u2019s very cold, and all you want to do is sleep now. You think you might have one or two more days left tops.\n\nHowever, you\u2019re not allowed to leave just yet\u2026\n\nWhile you\u2019re drifting in and out of consciousness in your weakened state, you suddenly see a dark hooded figure by the fire. You know who it is.\n\n\u201cSo\u2026you\u2019ve come for me personally? I didn\u2019t think I was important enough.\u201d you ask.\n\u201cYou aren\u2019t really. Let\u2019s just say that I have a lot of free time and with less and less living now, I take a more personal approach whenever I can. Besides, given how remote this place is, I doubt if any of my necromancers could\u2019ve found you anyway. That is if I hadn\u2019t killed them all.\u201d\n\nThe Great Lich Lord\u2019s voice doesn\u2019t sound anything like you thought it might. It\u2019s actually not very scary at all. Almost calm.\n\n\u201cHeh. I killed a necromancer once\u2026\u201d you say.\n\u201cYou have my thanks then, one less treacherous fool that I didn\u2019t have to deal with.\u201d\n\u201cYou didn\u2019t really need to come all this way you know, I think I was dying before you got here.\u201d\n\nAt this point the Great Lich Lord begins walking around your cave looking at your meager possessions. He immediately notices your very worn mandolin and picks it up.\n\n\u201cPlease feel free to take it. I won\u2019t be needing it anymore.\u201d You say.\n\u201cNot sure what I\u2019d do with it. I\u2019m not musically inclined at all. I\u2019m pretty much only good at killing things as you can tell.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, you\u2019re great at that.\u201d\n\u201cMy mistress Catalina likes music though; perhaps she might find it interesting. This looks very old, where did you get it?\u201d\n\u201cOh in a town that the demons destroyed when they lost their leader Velzix.\u201d\n\u201cHah. Demons. I think everyone was glad when I got rid of those assholes.\u201d The Great Lich Lord remarks.\n\u201cThat thing probably saved my life when I found it. Some weird ass vampire called Warnov wanted me to play for him. Said you were after him or something\u2026\u201d\n\u201cYes. Vampires weren\u2019t my favorite people. Arrogant creatures. Well they\u2019re dead now. Excuse me, but did you say Warnov?\u201d\n\u201cThat was his name. Yes.\u201d\n\nThe Great Lich Lord is silent for a moment and then speaks again.\n\n\u201cI know who you are. I can\u2019t believe it\u2019s you, but I know who you are. I remember before I tracked down and killed old Warnov, he stated that he was glad he heard you play before he died. He also said that if I ever encountered you that I should insist that you play for me before I killed you. Something about your playing being beautiful or something. You also served in the Zalan Empire army. Weren\u2019t you supposed to be a hero or something?\u201d\n\nYou laugh weakly.\n\n\u201cMostly or something.\u201d You reply.\n\u201cHm. I wonder if you ever met\u2026\u201d the Great Lich Lord then pauses for a moment. \u201c\u2026nevermind. It\u2019s the past and that no longer matters. So can you still play this thing?\u201d\n\u201cWell of course, but\u2026\u201d\n\u201cGood. We\u2019re leaving this place then, got a job for you.\u201d\nBefore you can speak another word, you feel yourself teleported.", "action_results": [{"action": "One last song...", "result": "You find yourself in a very ornate yet definitely dark chamber. All manner of symbols related to death exist here. You could only be in the Great Lich Lord\u2019s tower in Nuro. You never thought you\u2019d ever be here. The last time you were anywhere near Nuro was forty years ago and things were much different.\n\n\u201cWelcome to Aftermath, my musical guest. As I said, I\u2019m not much for music, but Catalina is and I\u2019m sure she would love to hear you play. She\u2026\u201d The Great Lich Lord pauses again. \u201cShe hasn\u2019t been feeling well lately and I think this would help out. Just take seat in that chair over there. Here\u2019s your mandolin.\u201d\n\nThis almost surreal. You didn\u2019t expect your last moments on this world to be like this. Lacking any other ideas you slowly go over to sit on the chair, while the Great Lich Lord goes to get his mistress Catalina. They better hurry up because you feel like you\u2019ve done more than knocking on death\u2019s door; you\u2019re quite literally in his home. The proximity of being so close to the Great Lich Lord is speeding up your death.\n\nThe Great Lich Lord soon arrives with Catalina and you look upon her. She\u2019s very beautiful. You had heard stories about her before decades ago when you were still serving in the army. She looks young, though she has to be much older. However, you can tell she\u2019s not exactly moving very fast and taking her time. It\u2019s apparent that despite her skill in necromancy that she\u2019s suffering from the effects of the Great Lich Lord\u2019s death aura. She must be powerful indeed to be able to withstand his proximity everyday. She must also love him very much to do it.\n\nYou briefly think of how someone could ever love such a being, or how such a being is even capable of love. But given how you see them interact, there it is.\n\nThis also starts to make you angry. Why are they allowed such a thing? They\u2019re the bad guys here. You never did anything wrong and you lost everyone you ever loved or cared about. You begin to tear up, but it\u2019s in frustration rather than sadness. All the past pain and suffering that you\u2019ve ever experienced has come back to hurt you one last time.\n\n\u201cOkay, start playing.\u201d The Great Lich Lord says.\n\u201cNo.\u201d you remark.\n\u201cWhat?\u201d\n\u201cYou heard me. No.\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t think you\u2019re in any position to defy me.\u201d\n\u201cOh I think I\u2019m in every position. What the hell are you going to do to me? I\u2019m fuckin\u2019 dead already! You\u2019ve already taken everything away from me! My friends and acquaintances died because of you! I lost my home because of you! My family and loved ones died because of you! I had to kill my own mother because she became one of your undead minions! My siblings, all fuckin\u2019 dead! All I have left is my music! And now you want me to give that away to you too? NO! I\u2019ll DIE with it!\u201d\n\nAfter this outburst the Great Lich Lord replies in kind.\n\n\u201cInsolent mortal! Do you forget who I am? You think dying will save you? Think again! I will kill you and raise you as a fucking zombie and MAKE you play for us in a pink dress if it so amuses me! Now play and perhaps that won\u2019t be your fate!\u201d\n\nThe Great Lich Lord\u2019s voice now sounds more menacing. More like what you thought, but you don\u2019t care, you\u2019ve got nothing to lose at this juncture. It is at this point Catalina steps in.\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t think that will be necessary dear. You just let me handle this. You go in the next room and cool off or something.\u201d\n\nThe Great Lich Lord agrees to this and hugs Catalina, before walking off. Catalina now walks towards you.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ll have to forgive my beloved\u2019s outburst. He goes a little over the top when it comes to me. Especially now. So much has happened. He\u2019s changed so much and continues to change even now. He doesn\u2019t express it, but I think it\u2019s always gotten to him.\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t have to forgive shit. Am I supposed to feel sympathy? He\u2019s caused all this\u2026and you too! How can you stand by him? You\u2019re still alive! You could probably kill him and stop this before the entire world is dead!\u201d\n\u201cOh I doubt if I could, even if I so desired, which I don\u2019t. My feelings for him and the reasons\u2026well the heart wants, what the heart wants. I sometimes worry about what he will do after I\u2019m gone though. He\u2019s in great denial. He knows I cannot fight off his overwhelming aura forever. I suppose in some ways, bringing you here to play for me was some vain hope of making me feel better. And it will, in its own way\u2026\u201d\n\nYou still can\u2019t believe that she\u2019s trying to make them out to be the victims.\n\n\u201cLook I don\u2019t care about what the hell you two death freaks want, I know what the hell I\u2019ve gone through and it\u2019s all your fault. Fuck the both of you. You haven\u2019t had to deal with the pain I\u2019ve gone through.\u201d\n\u201cPerhaps not. But do you think you are the only one on this world who\u2019s suffered? What makes your life and those close to you so special? Nothing. You and everyone else whoever lived on this dying world are equal. You, your family, even me. The only person who isn\u2019t equal, is in the next room. We\u2019ve all lost those close to us at some point. Yes, even my beloved and he\u2019ll lose another when I\u2019m gone. We\u2019ll all be long dead and he\u2019ll probably still be on this world by himself with nothing to do. And that, I\u2019m convinced will be the greatest suffering of all. Life without end? No thank you. When my time comes, I will embrace it.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re very surprised to hear a necromancer say that.\n\n\u201cMy beloved cannot help what he is. For whatever reason, he was gifted with the art of death. He\u2019s become it. It\u2019s his nature. You can\u2019t be angry with a force of nature. It has to simply be.\u201d\n\nYou want to argue, you want to fight, you want to bring up every moral debate you can think of, but to be quite honest you can\u2019t. Part of it is it wouldn\u2019t make any difference. Part of it is you\u2019re tired of fighting, you can\u2019t do it anymore and you don\u2019t have strength at this point. The other part is that in a way what she\u2019s said makes some sense and is correct.\n\nIt also makes you think about your \u201cnature\u201d. It was to play music. You never got to live the life you wanted, but during your lifetime, music always seeped in somehow. It always found a way.\n\nCatalina continues to speak.\n\n\u201cNow you certainly don\u2019t have to play. That\u2019s your choice. I will make sure that my beloved does not turn you into dress wearing zombie though. It would be a shame though. You are not completely unfamiliar to me. I do have some knowledge of who you are and I have heard stories of your playing. I would like to hear it played while you still had the passion and energy behind it. The living spark that can only invoke such things.\u201d\n\u201c\u2026I\u2019ll play\u2026\u201d you say with a heavy breath that took some effort for you.\n\u201cYou will?\u201d\n\u201cYes\u2026what did you want to hear?\u201d\n\nCatalina smiles.\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know, whatever you like I suppose. Just as long as it has a nice soothing melody.\u201d\n\u201cOkay then.\u201d\n\u201cHold on, I must get my beloved before you start. I must ask though, what changed your mind to play?\u201d\n\u201cNothing. It\u2019s my nature.\u201d\n\nCatalina soon returns with the Great Lich Lord and they both sit in their respective thrones. Catalina tells you to play, which you do so.\n\nYou watch the pair of them look at each other as you play. You would appear that Catalina is pleased with her \u201cgift\u201d. You don\u2019t know about the Great Lich Lord, since you can\u2019t see his face, but you assume that if she\u2019s happy, then he\u2019s happy.\n\nYou see them hold hands and look at each other as you enter the second verse of the song. At this point you begin to close your eyes and just let the music and instinct guide your fingers. You can feel your life slip away, but it doesn\u2019t matter. You\u2019ve been taken to a different place. A better place.\n\nYou smile and wave to your family. You can see them all so clearly. All of them are there. You\u2019re getting closer. They\u2019re ready to accept you with open arms.\n\nLast verse. Not much energy left, but you\u2019re nearly there. You won\u2019t have to worry about anything anymore. Heart slowing down. You\u2019re with them now. Everything will be so good again. Your music has saved you one last time.\n\nOne last note.\nOne last breath.\nYou\u2019re home.\n\n\n\n\u201cWell, he certainly looked happier than he did earlier.\u201d\n\u201cYes, yes he did. Set his body on fire dear.\u201d\n\u201cYou don\u2019t want him around to play for you later?\u201d\n\u201cNo, I don\u2019t think that performance could ever be replicated.\u201d", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Run back down the mountain", "result": "You\u2019re having difficulty concentrating, but you decide that it would be better to distance yourself from the creature rather than trapping yourself in a cave.\n\nYou attempt to head down the mountain, but you really are feel very sick and dizzy, in fact you\u2019re beginning to feel worse. The ground underneath you doesn\u2019t even feel like jelly now, you\u2019re actually sinking into it like quicksand!\n\n\u201cWhat the fu\u2026\u201d you say before a sudden powerful wave of nausea that hits you causes you to vomit immediately.\n\nYou try to stop the sinking, but it\u2019s futile and soon you\u2019ve sank all the way it. Oddly you can still breathe; but the terrain has turned to worms and maggots. You can feel them crawling all over you, in your ears and every other orifice of your body.\n\nYou begin to laugh insanely (while the maggots crawl all in it) since your mind has become severely warped at this point and madness has overtaken you as you sink further through the maggot mountain.\n\nYou\u2019re unsure of how long this goes on for since you\u2019ve lost your mind, but whatever was going on eventually stops and everything returns to normal. Unfortunately that doesn\u2019t really help you since you\u2019re still in the mountain which has returned to solid rock where you are now completely embedded in. You die instantly, putting an end to your madness.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Head to the mountains", "result": "Better to get accustomed to them now, since you figure you might have to live in them in the future anyway.\n\nYou head further north and traverse the harsh terrain. As far as undead are concerned you\u2019re in no danger, however the mountain trolls and cragmaws living there are just as dangerous. You eventually find a suitable cave to live in. To keep yourself entertained you play your music in between your survival.\n\nIt\u2019s a rough life, but you persevere for a few years. Unfortunately the day comes when a particularly large mountain troll tribe decides to finally get organized enough to eliminate you from being a nuisance.\n\nYou awaken one night to see several large figures enter your cave. You spring to action immediately, which causes the trolls to laugh. This buys you time to kill at least one of them, but only one. You\u2019re outnumbered, trapped and there\u2019s nowhere to hide.\n\nThe trolls savagely butcher you and even smash your mandolin over your head before you head to permanent unconsciousness.\n\nThe only good thing is that trolls do such a thorough job of eating your body that not even your bones are left to be reanimated when the Great Lich Lord\u2019s influence reaches the area.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Letters to home (Last letter...)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nWe\u2019re falling back again. No surprise there. I\u2019ve had a lot on my mind lately, but not for any of reasons you\u2019d know, so I\u2019ll tell you.\n\nNormally this would be something I would\u2019ve told Mallack, but since he\u2019s dead, I feel like I should tell you. I really miss Mallack.\n\nI was in contact with a woman by the name of Helena. She was a traveling merchant who I met years ago during my tour in Retlad. We had a relationship of sorts I suppose. We met whenever she was in the area I was stationed in. Dunno why I never told you about her, I guess I just felt weird about telling you. Silly now that I think about it.\n\nAnyway, she was in the city of Edat a few months ago when it was utterly destroyed. I suggested that she should just stay in the Retlad province since the fighting wasn\u2019t as bad there, but she said there was a big deal to be made in Edat, so she went. Reports say there were no survivors. Of course reports have been wrong before and I have used some of my connections to find out for certain but considering the carnage that occurred I hold little hope.\n\nI\u2019ll miss her. I can only hope that like Mallack, she wasn\u2019t turned into one of those things.\n\nThe word \u201chero\u201d gets thrown around far too much and I should know first hand, but I\u2019ll use it here: Where are the \u201cheroes\u201d to stop this? Shouldn\u2019t some party of adventurers been able to slip through the Great Lich Lord\u2019s defenses and chop his head off by now? Wasn\u2019t that how the first one was stopped? Isn\u2019t that how it\u2019s supposed to go? Where are the gods? Why aren\u2019t the good ones doing something to stop the utter destruction of their worshippers?! Hell, the evil ones would even suffice at this point! I mean just to know that SOMETHING is looking out for us in some fashion!\n\nIf they haven\u2019t abandoned this world, they better do something quick, because I feel like we\u2019re in the last hours here. Actually I think we\u2019re on borrowed time.\n\nWe\u2019re getting a report that we might have to fall back to the heart of the empire soon. At this point I\u2019m not sure if I\u2019m even going to do it. I know I\u2019ve been duty bound this long with only a few falters along the way, but now? In the face of extinction? What\u2019s the point?\n\nSure there may be nowhere to run from death, but perhaps I can evade him for as long as possible.\n\nBut I haven\u2019t forgotten about all of you. I\u2019d never do that. Even if I have to drag you all out of that infernal farmhouse kicking and screaming.\n\nLeave a light on for me, I may be coming home.\n\nI love you all.\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Stand your ground", "result": "You need to have a fully cohesive unit you think.\n\n\u201cReady those blessed silvers men, and you robe wearers melt those dead tin cans!\u201d you order.\n\nArrows fly towards the Blood Specters first seeing as they\u2019re your greatest threat, the wizards unleash magic attack on the Death Knights. Your side manages to eliminate most of them before the horde reaches you.\n\nUnfortunately this isn\u2019t enough. While your side fights valiantly, you\u2019re outnumbered as usual and don\u2019t really have the raw power to at least fight them off properly. Indeed that\u2019s been the whole problem with the Garwold defense. Gnomes and Halflings have never been the best fighters in a straight up battle.\n\nDoesn\u2019t take long before your dead are rising to join the enemy. You attempt to target the enemy necromancer, but you can\u2019t get a clear shot, and it won\u2019t help with the second dead army that is now heading over the hill now.\n\nYou sound a retreat, but you won\u2019t be joining few survivors left as a Death Knight smashes you in the side of the head with a swing of his fail. You fall to the ground dazed and bloody. As you attempt to get up, your mind begins to fill music. A little tune to take you away from this place\u2026\n\nYou look up just in time to see a blurry outline of the Death Knight who finishes the job and crushes your skull completely.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Letters to home (Grand Alliance...)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nWell I\u2019m sure you\u2019ve heard by now that I\u2019m officially part of the Grand Alliance. I don\u2019t know just how to feel about it either.\n\nHow I even got roped into it, is all by chance and luck. That seems to be a staple in my life. I tried to desert the army once and I ended up getting promoted. I do it again, and even get called on it and I get even more responsibility! The world has gone completely mad. I\u2019m sure of it now. Though who knows for how long. The woman responsible for putting me in my new position says we\u2019re going to win, but as each day wears on, I lose faith that we will. I\u2019ve gotten over my fear of death and the undead, but now it\u2019s been replaced by a numbness to it. I don\u2019t know if that\u2019s worse.\n\nI heard about Mallack getting drafted. I sure hope he\u2019ll be okay. And I hope you\u2019ll be able to manage the farm without him, but I guess you\u2019ll be alright now that the government has taken control of the farm. I really wish that hadn\u2019t happened, but what can we do right? At least you won\u2019t need to protect the livestock anymore with all the guard patrolling it though. It would seem the Zalan Empire is everywhere nowadays though. Well, everywhere there isn\u2019t undead of course.\n\nWe\u2019re going to try to retake the Brot Kingdom soon, dunno if it\u2019ll be successful.\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family.\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Letters to home (Battle at Garwold...)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nI\u2019m still in Garwold and each day I see more of this once beautiful land die under the hordes of the Great Lich Lord. I wish I could\u2019ve seen this place before all of this. I think I probably could\u2019ve made a living here as a bard under different circumstances. Playing for the downtrodden militias and fleeing refugees during the few free moments is one of the few pleasures I get anymore.\n\nWe\u2019re expecting a big undead push soon, and I don\u2019t see how we can hold on to the remaining territory we have left here.\n\nI know you probably won\u2019t, but if we lose Garwold, I want you and the rest of the family to SERIOUSLY consider abandoning the farm. It\u2019s not even ours anymore. Why stay there in the face of oncoming danger?\n\nBut I know you\u2019ll probably stay regardless. Maybe it doesn\u2019t matter, because at this point where is there to run?\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family.\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Attempt to lie", "result": "Quickly remembering the lie you thought up on the way, you sputter it out with some stress.\n\n\u201cI\u2026I was captured by a vampire! A really fucking sadistic one! He killed my scouting party and took me to say he was going to drain me slowly for fun! He took me to some cave in the hills and it was only by luck that I managed to kill him and escape! I would\u2019ve made my way back sooner, but their were large groups of marauding orc raiders and demons escaping the ruins of the former Tulan Kingdom, so I was extra cautious and\u2026\u201d\n\nAt this point the Captain bashes you in the head with the hilt of her sword. You fall off the chair and onto the floor.\n\n\u201cLIAR! You expect me to believe this horse shit? I\u2019ve had patrols going all through this area and there aren\u2019t any orcs in the damn area. They all fled further north long ago and the remaining demons mostly ran to the west! Not to mention the closest hills have no caves! You obviously think so low of me that you thought you could fool me OR you\u2019re just a complete idiot as well as a coward! Either way you haven\u2019t convinced me, and you\u2019re fit only for execution! You\u2019re a deserter at best and a spy at worst!\u201d\n\n\u201cNo\u2026wait\u2026\u201d are your last words before the Captain severs your head from your body.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go into hiding", "result": "As much as you still want to help out your family, you have to live your own life while there is still time. They\u2019ll still get money from your supposed death and they know you\u2019re still alive. You figure this will be the last time you see them though, as you can\u2019t risk contacting them anymore.\n\nThe first order of business is to change your identity as much as you can. And head to a place where you can play for an audience, but the probability of someone ratting you out is low if you\u2019re recognized.\n\nYou head to the Garwold Confederacy. It\u2019s a relatively peaceful nation made up mostly of Halflings and Gnomes, with lush green fields and flowers. They\u2019ve surprisingly managed to stay out of most of the fighting; only volunteering a few of their militia and illusionists to the Grand Alliance. They\u2019re also known to appreciate the simpler things in life.\n\nEventually you make a place for yourself there in one of the small villages. You make a living playing at the local tavern there. Most of the patrons know that you have some sort of past that you\u2019re trying to hide from. Some of them and the owner know that you\u2019re that Zalan \u201chero\u201d that they\u2019ve heard about. But just like you thought, they don\u2019t bring it up or say anything about it and just enjoy your music.\n\nA year passes and you\u2019re happy. Nobody from the Zalan Empire comes looking for you, as it\u2019s assumed you\u2019re dead and everyone\u2019s too busy fighting the undead for the most part. When the Grand Alliance armies pass through, you keep a low profile though. You even meet a pretty Halfling girl to be with.\n\nThe next year isn\u2019t so pretty however. The Great Lich Lord\u2019s armies have been defeating the Grand Alliance\u2019s attempts to stop them and now those armies finally turn their attention to the Garwold Confederacy.\n\nWithin a month half of Garwold has been turned into a graveyard. The Grand Alliance as well as the Garwold militia have been doing their best, but it\u2019s not going to be enough. You help defend the little village that you\u2019ve made your home in and you can\u2019t afford to keep a low profile anymore despite the Grand Alliance presence (Which is now mainly made up of Zalan Empire troops) but it hardly matters at this point. Survival of the living is\n\nYou make plans to leave, and to try to convince your girlfriend and your other new friends that you\u2019ve made here to leave as well. You know they\u2019re all very home bound, but tomorrow you\u2019re going to really try.\n\nUnfortunately a group of Blood Specters attacks the village that night. You awaken to hear blood curling screams ring throughout the village. You look out the window and see the vile red ghosts stalking the streets.\n\nYou\u2019ve become too attached to these people to not help; you immediately grab your weapons and prepare for battle.\n\nYou head to your girlfriend\u2019s home first, but sadly she\u2019s already been killed and completely drained of blood. You don\u2019t have time to morn as you\u2019re immediately attacked by the Blood Specter that was still lingering in the house. You manage to kill it with a couple silver arrows, but its dying shrieks alert others to your area.\n\nYou slay a couple more of them as you try to look for the necromancer who has to be in the area to even control these creatures, but you can\u2019t keep your eye on all the incorporeal creatures and you suddenly feel a slight pain in your back which reaches forward into your heart as one of them thrusts its hand into you to drain your blood.\n\nYou collapse soon after, only to rise later to join the ranks of the ever growing undead armies.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Letters to home (Moving out from Virtue...)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nThis will be a quick letter, we\u2019re moving out and I can\u2019t say I\u2019m thrilled with it.\n\nLast time I wrote, I was talking about how bad the recent demon attacks were, well I\u2019m sure you already heard about the demon lord Velzix being killed. I suppose this is a good thing, since its one less enemy to worry about, but I\u2019m being sent to retake the lands previously owned by him and reports say the Necromancer is as well.\n\nI still haven\u2019t gotten completely over what happened at Nuro. I need to be strong though since I\u2019m probably going to be doing a lot of combat with the undead in the future.\n\nOddly I\u2019m not even worried about myself so much right now; I\u2019m more concerned about you guys. I know the Zalan Empire has been creating a lot of rules lately. Talks of seizing private property and drafts cause me to worry about you all. Never thought that on the eve of possibly facing undead hordes again, it\u2019s our own government that I have concerns about.\n\nArgh! This is something I\u2019d rather discuss with you in person, of course if I ever got a chance to visit every once in awhile!\n\nOkay, the Captain\u2019s starting to call everyone.\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family.\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Letters to home (She's still alive!)", "result": "Hey Mallack!\n\nThis letter is directly for you again. Glad you\u2019ve been keeping these between us.\n\nAnyway, I know it seemed silly to worry about a girl I just had a brief encounter with years ago for one night. But when I heard about the Brot Kingdom being destroyed by the Necromancer, I did wonder about Helena.\n\nWell, I found out she\u2019s still alive! She stopped off in Fort Virtue not too long ago! She wasn\u2019t in Brot when all that shit went down. She was trading in the Azi Republic at the time.\n\nWhen she arrived in Fort Virtue to trade, I recognized her and she seemed pleased to see me. She mentioned that she was pleased to see a familiar face for once and we spent a lot of time together for as long as she stayed. (And yes, we did THAT several times too.)\n\nI wish things were different, or at least not the way they are right now. I definitely would want to pursue a more permanent relationship with her because we get along really well, but alas that\u2019s not to be. At least not at this time.\n\nShe told me she was heading to the Retlad Kingdom next; I hope she stays there because there\u2019s less fighting going on. Definitely no more Quillars there anymore. I dunno, I know it\u2019s minor and doesn\u2019t really make sense, but this little bit of info sort of put me in a better mood. I guess I\u2019ll be writing Mom a more upbeat letter as well soon.\n\nOkay, well I hope everything\u2019s going good with you too. Keep watching out for the Kobolds and keep \u2018em out of that chicken coop!\n\nYour brother", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Letters to home (Random thoughts...)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nI meant to tell you this weird man from Zalan Intelligence offered me a job, a few months ago. Said I could be a \u201creal\u201d hero and a bunch of other stuff. Part of it sounded appealing, but something about him made me feel really uncomfortable.\n\nI wonder if I\u2019m just avoiding my \u201cpotential.\u201d Like perhaps I am supposed to be some great general or warrior, or whatever. But I just don\u2019t feel that desire within me. Now if I had been offered to give up all this army stuff and play at the Emperor\u2019s Palace as a regular job then I might\u2019ve accepted!\n\nOver these years as I\u2019ve played for others and mainly for myself, I truly believe I really was meant to play music in this world. Just events didn\u2019t work out for me I guess, but even within this situation, I\u2019ve still found a way to indulge in my passion and I suppose it\u2019s better than never being able to at all.\n\nWho knows? Perhaps one day all of this will be over and I\u2019ll come out of this alive and manage to pursue music without hindrance.\n\nI know that sounds a little uncharacteristically optimistic from me, but I guess I still have a little hope left after all.\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Accept the offer", "result": "You have to admit, the idea has crossed your mind a bit. A small part of you does wonder about embracing the whole hero image and deliberately doing grand deeds that go beyond the call of your duty. You suppose that you\u2019d at least really feel like one if you did that.\n\n\u201cOkay Mr. Warnov. I\u2019ll do it.\u201d You exclaim.\n\u201cYou sure?\u201d\n\u201cNot really, but if I\u2019m already in the shit, I might as well go all the way with it. What do I do next?\u201d\n\nWarnov looks around again to see if anyone is about before answering.\n\n\u201cWell just take a deep breath, relax and uh\u2026 brace yourself!\u201d\n\u201cHuh?\u201d\n\nBefore you can react Warnov moves faster than you\u2019ve ever seen anything move. In fact you don\u2019t really see him move at all before he\u2019s biting your neck! He puts his other hand over your mouth so you can\u2019t yell out and easily knocks your hand away from feebly attempting to draw a weapon.\n\nYou fall into unconsciousness as your blood is drained from you at a rapid rate. Death soon follows\u2026\n\nA few minutes later you wake up outside the fort.\n\n\u201cAh you\u2019re up. Sorry about surprising you like that, but I had to work quickly. Someone else could\u2019ve popped up and that would\u2019ve gotten complicated\u2026\u201d\n\nYou quickly check your neck which is completely healed now, but you know what\u2019s just occurred! You feel a cold numbness throughout your body and you freak out.\n\n\u201cI\u2019M DEAD! I\u2019M FUCKIN DEAD! And you\u2019re a vampire!\u201d\n\u201cShhhh! Keep your voice down! Yeah, you figured it out. Nice detective work, now let\u2019s get down to this hero business. Though we should really get to Rostov\u2019s and talk about all this.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m\u2026I\u2019m dead! I\u2019m one of you! I don\u2019t want to be an undead thrall for the Necromancer Lord!\u201d\n\u201cWhat? No, no, no, we\u2019re not\u2026 look I\u2019ll explain later, let\u2019s just\u2026\u201d\n\nYou pull away from Warnov when he tries to help you up. You feel your reflexes are much quicker. This temporary curiousity in your new found abilities allows Warnov to calm you down.\n\n\u201cWAIT! Just stop! (Sigh) Okay look I\u2019ll try to give you the condensed version right now. We vampires aren\u2019t on the side of the Necromancer Lord. If anything he\u2019s fucking things up for us. We like to keep a balanced order as it were. The last time we sided with some megalomaniacal necromancer it nearly resulted in our extinction. Never again. In fact we\u2019ve been manipulating shit for centuries just to make sure something like this didn\u2019t happen. Somebody really fucked up in the observation department on this one!\u201d\n\nWarnov goes on to explain that his superior, Lord Rostov will be able to explain better and in more detail, but that you have to come with him now.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Warnov", "result": "While this is all a lot to take in, you manage to calm down.\n\n\u201cOkay. Okay. I\u2019m calm, but\u2026man this is a lot of shit.\u201d You reply.\n\u201cHeh, well you did say you might as well go with it! Don\u2019t worry; it\u2019ll all be second nature soon. Okay let\u2019s go see Lord Rostov.\u201d\n\nWarnov pulls out a black cube and teleports you to what seems to be the inside of a castle.\n\n\u201cAlright, YOU stay right here in the foyer! Don\u2019t go wandering around, I\u2019m serious! You\u2019re not quite in the fold yet, I have to go straighten this out and explain all this to Lord Rostov. I\u2019ll be back to come get you later. Everything will be explained in full detail soon.\u201d\n\nNot wishing to piss off anyone and being completely out of your element you stay put. The foyer has enough to keep you occupied though, you begin examining many of the paintings and statues to pass the time.\n\nSoon, Warnov returns with a very regal looking vampire. You can only assume that this is Lord Rostov.\n\n\u201cWelcome, I\u2019m sure you have ask many questions for me as I have for you, so we\u2019ll just get right to it. We\u2019ll walk and talk on the way to the throne room. Don\u2019t worry about anyone listening. There are no secrets here.\u201d Lord Rostov says.\n\u201cOkay\u2026I\u2026\u201d\n\u201cBUT! Remember to address me as Lord Rostov if you are going to address me by name.\u201d Lord Rostov adds with authority.\n\nYou take notice and obey, though Lord Rostov has such a commanding presence that you would be hard pressed not to obey him.\n\nYour questions are typical for someone brought into the fold. Rostov goes on about how his kind have been manipulating the mortal world for centuries just like Warnov said before. Several of the known governments have at least one vamp keeping an eye on things. Apparently many high ranking political types in your own Zalan Empire are vampires! The Grand Alliance is even a tool of the vampires.\n\nWhile Lord Rostov goes on about this fascinating history lesson, you look at some of his \u201ccourt\u201d as you walk through his castle. Some of them are more \u201cmortal looking\u201d than others. Some look down right hideous. You always thought vampires were supposed to be ultra attractive, but you can see that isn\u2019t necessarily the case. When you get to his throne room Lord Rostov stops and turns to you.\n\n\u201cSo I hear you want to be a real hero eh? Well this is the place where they\u2019re made.\u201d\n\u201cWhat do you mean?\u201d\n\u201cWhy do you think most heroes are always storming dungeons and doing impossible things? They don\u2019t get those abilities without some help. The supernatural skill comes into play and dungeons aren\u2019t exactly beacons of light!\u201d Lord Rostov laughs.\n\n\u201cY\u2026you mean ALL the heroes in the world are vampires?!\u201d\n\u201cHah! I wish that was the case. No, there are many regular mortal heroes that do their part I suppose, but if you want the really legendary ones that have done impossible deeds, well chances are there was a vampire involved. Sadly we haven\u2019t been too much more successful than the mortals in the heroics department lately.\u201d\n\u201cWhat\u2019s been going on exactly?\u201d\n\u201cThat little annoying necromancer lord, or whatever he thinks he is, has been proving to be a lot cleverer than what was previously believed. His armies have been growing in strength and I\u2019m sure you know about the undead giant business and crushing the Brot Kingdom. What isn\u2019t commonly known is how he accomplished it. He had help from one of our kind. A loathsome outcast known as the Ghoul King. (Sigh) Should\u2019ve killed him long ago really, but\u2026bah, it\u2019s a long story. We\u2019ll deal with him when the time comes. What\u2019s more alarming is that we\u2019ve sent assassins\u2026or heroes to kill the necromancer lord and his bitch and he\u2019s somehow managed to kill all of them. I mean I can somewhat understand them being killed by that brutish demon tyrant Velzix, but a fucking necromancer? He\u2019s a fucking mortal! And from what we know of him, he wasn\u2019t even that good of a wizard to begin with!\u201d\n\nSuddenly Lord Rostov flies into a rage, yelling and punches a hole into the solid brick wall. Many of his court, as well as you and Warnov back away. He then stops and composes himself.\n\n\u201cMy apologies to you all. It\u2019s been a trying time with upstart mortals and traitors and other annoyances. And to you, the newest member of our fold.\u201d\n\u201cUh, no need to apologize to me Lord Rostov. It\u2019s your home after all\u201d You say which causes him to smile.\n\u201cCarefully chosen words. Not overly sycophantic, yet still displaying the right subservient mindset. You should fit in very well here.\u201d\n\u201cBut I meant it\u2026\u201d\n\u201cHa ha! And honest too! You\u2019re more interesting than how Warnov described you. I have heard that you were one of those minor mortal heroes I was talking about earlier, but more interesting to me, is apparently you have talent in the musical field?\u201d\n\u201cSo I\u2019ve been told.\u201d\n\u201cWell, play something for me! All of us!\u201d\n\u201cWhat did you want to hear?\u201d\n\u201cSurprise me, if you\u2019re able!\u201d\n\nLord Rostov sits on his throne while his court whispers among themselves and then go quiet waiting for you to play. You pull out your lute and try to think of a song that they might like. You think of an old song that once was very popular among the aristocracy. Seems like a perfect crowd\u2026\n\nYou begin to concentrate on the music and nothing but the music. You play as if your life was in danger, which you\u2019re somewhat certain that it isn\u2019t, but it doesn\u2019t hurt to play your best right now.\n\nYour new supernatural reflexes certainly come in handy as you\u2019re able to hit notes and play faster than you normally would\u2019ve been able to as a mortal.\n\nWhen you\u2019re finished you look around the room which is still silence until Lord Rostov gets off his throne and begins clapping. Everyone else follows suit.\n\n\u201cThat was magnificent! I heard the original bard who performed that piece three hundred years ago and even he couldn\u2019t have done a better job! Warnov, this man is too valuable to make into a hero!\u201d\n\u201cLord Rostov?\u201d\n\u201cWhile this man may have combat skills as you described, he is obviously a musician! Such talent such not be wasted in battle! Beautiful playing!\u201d\n\u201cWhile I agree he is a good musician Lord Rostov, I think we should consider the matter of the necromancer\u2026\u201d\n\u201c(Sigh) Warnov, I was feeling good until you mentioned that mortal again! Nevertheless you are right. But still, this shall be HIS choosing. Not ours.\u201d\n\nLord Rostov turns to you.\n\n\u201cThe decision shall be yours broodling. You may if you wish under go extensive training to prepare yourself for an encounter with that little necromancer lord. If you succeed, your name will be known, and you will become a legend. However, I can sense that such things are probably not your nature. Music is. I can see that you would be content to just play your music for an appreciative crowd. You could do that here. You could also learn songs that I have possession of, but sadly unable to play with the same spirit that you obviously have.\u201d\n\u201cWhat about my family? And my job and all that?\u201d\n\u201cAh, your mortal life. I\u2019m sure Warnov will already be taking steps to explain that you have been transferred from your current assignment. Considering he\u2019s part of intelligence, nobody will ask too many questions, even if they bothered to. As for your family, they will be taken care of as you will still officially be part of the Zalan army. If you wish you may stay in contact with them through letters. Possibly arrangements can be made for you to visit them. During the night of course. But under NO circumstances will you tell them about any of this. Doing so would ruin my generous offer and be extremely bad for you. I don\u2019t think we need to dwell on such depressing things because I know you\u2019re smarter than that right?\u201d\n\u201cYes Lord Rostov.\u201d\n\u201cGood, now what is it that you would like to do?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Be a hero", "result": "While the offer of playing for what could possibly be eternity is tempting, part of you has been affected by world events and the war going on. You have come to realize that the Necromancer (and the demons) need to be stopped. If you can take an active role in that, then you\u2019ll know for sure that your family will be safe in the near future. You did do all this for your family after all, and while your path has definitely undergone a change, you\u2019re still going to put them first.\n\nBesides, you\u2019re a vampire now, you\u2019re sure that you\u2019ll have tons of time to play later if all goes well. You\u2019re definitely nervous about this decision, but you\u2019re going to make it.\n\n\u201cLord Rostov, I wish to begin your advanced combat training.\u201d You say.\n\u201cVery well, though I almost hoped that you wouldn\u2019t. Your playing was just divine and you won\u2019t be able to play again for a long time during your extensive training time. Possibly never if you fail\u2026but let us hope that you do not fail! It would be a loss for all of us. Warnov escourt him to the lower dungeons.\u201d\n\u201cYes, Lord Rostov.\u201d\n\nWarnov takes you into the lower dungeons of the castle just as Lord Rostov commanded. Warnov tells you that this isn\u2019t going to be easy and that you better condition your mind to almost a pure instinctive level because you could very well die in training!\n\nFinally you reach a large barren room with a pair of large doors on the far end.\n\n\u201cThis is it. Just keep an eye on the large door over there and well, brace yourself!\u201d\n\nYou half expect to get bitten again after hearing those words, but instead Warnov quickly steps out of the room and locks the door leaving you alone. The large doors on the other side of the room start to open.\n\nAnd you just realized that you don\u2019t have a weapon\u2026\n\nA year passes\u2026\n\nYou survive your rigorous training. You have fought all manner of dangerous beasts with and without weapons. (And feasting on their blood for survival) You have undergone pain you didn\u2019t think possible even in your new undead state. You\u2019re definitely a better killing machine than you were.\n\nYou were allowed to write letters to your family which were overlooked first by Lord Rostov of course to make sure you weren\u2019t saying something you shouldn\u2019t. You barely know what to tell them except keeping your lies to a minimum about your supposed new job with Zalan intelligence. You have dedicated and conditioned yourself to combat so much that you don\u2019t even think about music. You briefly wonder if you\u2019ve \u201clost\u201d something, but you then dismiss such things as you must focus on battle.\n\nDuring this time you have been informed that the Necromancer Lord as well as Velzix have grown in power. Lord Rostov says though that he believes the demons will pose no serious threat if a concentrated effort can be made on them by the mortals. However, for that to happen, the Necromancer Lord must die and that\u2019s where you come in and what you\u2019ve been training for.\n\nHowever, you won\u2019t be going in by yourself. A band of \u201cheroes\u201d will be necessary for a job like this. You are told you will meet the others in a small abandoned village bordering on the Necromancer\u2019s Domain.\n\nAnother vampire takes you there with the aid of a black teleportation cube. This is a one way trip. You\u2019re not coming back unless you win. That and the fact that the black cubes can\u2019t possibly be allowed to fall into enemy hands.\n\nThere you meet the others. They look unimpressed with you, but you\u2019re a little surprised to see one of them. She\u2019s very well known\u2026a \u201chero\u201d.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re Deliah the Deathdealer! You fought at the battle of Azark and you also retrieved the Celestial Sword! You\u2019re a hero! I didn\u2019t know you were\u2026\u201d\n\u201cDidn\u2019t they tell you all this shit when you started training? Sheesh, we gotta get paired up with some broodling\u2026\u201d a brutish vampire interrupts.\n\u201cQuiet Gorax! I\u2019m sure he was, but meeting a legend is a lot different from basking in their glory in person.\u201d Deliah replies.\n\u201cGorax!? Gorax the Mighty? You were a barbarian king that held back the orc hordes over a hundred years ago!\u201d you say in amazement.\n\u201cHuh, fat lot good that did me. I can\u2019t take any credit for of my deeds today and barely anyone remembers my past deeds except some useless tribal shamen that now cower from the undead hordes in the Drozz Plains. Feh! Back in my day such men would not allow mere ghouls run them off their lands! I don\u2019t know why Rostov won\u2019t allow me to go in, seek out, and just chop off that retched Ghoul King\u2019s head! He\u2019s partially to blame for this mess!\u201d\n\u201cOh you know Rostov, he has his reasons. Besides, if we take out the Necromancer lord, the Ghoul King will probably be our next assignment.\u201d Another vampire says in a bored tone. This one looks like he was once a Halfling. It almost makes you laugh to think of a vampire Halfling, but there he is. You don\u2019t know who he is or was, but given the other two, he was probably important at one time.\n\n\u201cSo are you ready to go broodling? Or are you going to stand there with a dumb look on your face?\u201d Delilah asks.\n\u201cUh sure, let\u2019s go!\u201d\n\nThe trip into the Necromancer\u2019s Domain is surprisingly quick and uneventful. You attempt to make conversation as you can\u2019t help now but be curious about your companions, but all of them are less than talkative and forthcoming. Deliah eventually takes you aside harshly.\n\n\u201cLook broodling, we\u2019ve got a job to do. A fucking dangerous one at that! We all need to be in focus and not concentrating on anything else! So keep your damn questions to yourself and if you happen to survive this encounter THEN perhaps you may get a little more information from us and our fascinating history. Until then, stay in the fucking dark!\u201d\n\nThe rest of the trip is silent.\n\nAt last you reach the city of Nuro and easily scale its walls and onto the battlements while remaining undetected the whole time. This is a lot different from what it was when you arrived here as a mortal. That memory still gives you a bit of pause. You remember how scared you were back then.\n\n\u201cHurry up broodling! These walking corpses might not be able to detect us, but the Necromancer will soon! We need to get the advantage as soon as possible! Gorax, Wally you go through the front of the main tower. I\u2019m sure you two can handle that. While whatever guards rush to defend their master, me and the broodling will scale the tower and go in through one of the top windows.\n\n\u201cYou sure about that Delilah? Would you rather I go with you than some broodling?\u201d Wally asks.\n\u201cYeah, but if I leave him with Gorax he\u2019ll probably get killed in the fighting and be useless. At least if he\u2019s with me, he can serve as an extra body for the Necromancer Lord to draw his attention to.\u201d\n\u201cHEY! I\u2019m right here y\u2019know!\u201d you exclaim indignantly which causes Deliah to smack you in the face hard. You didn\u2019t even see it coming.\n\u201cShut the fuck up! You\u2019ll draw attention! Look if we pull this off just maybe you\u2019ll come out of this alive. I need you to take care of the Necromancer\u2019s bitch anyway. She\u2019s probably up there with him. Now let\u2019s do this!\u201d\n\nThe plan is set into action. Gorax and Wally make their presence known immediately jumping off the battlements and into the courtyard while yelling at the top of their lungs.\n\n\u201cIntruder! Protect the master!\u201d you hear a scratchy voice yell in the distance, while you and Delilah sneak around, jumping onto the rooftops and attempting to avoid the main fighting force. A few flying shadows try to stop you, but they\u2019re easily dispatched with your bow and silver arrows. Delilah looks glad that you aren\u2019t entirely useless and you and her proceed to scale the walls.\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t believe this place isn\u2019t more protected.\u201d You say while climbing.\n\u201cHeh, he\u2019s got his troops all spread out and mostly on his borders, plus he\u2019s grown more arrogant and confident. That will be his undoing.\u201d She replies quickly.\n\n\u201cFunny I was about to say the same for you bloodsuckers.\u201d A voice says causing the both of you to look up.\n\nA raven haired female leans over the nearby window above Delilah and blast her directly in the face burning it off with a beam of light. You certainly weren\u2019t expecting a necromancer to cast any sort of spell like that! You then see Delilah fall\u2026and get impaled through the chest by a weathervane. A fucking weathervane. Unbelievable.\n\nYou attempt to scale the wall to the nearest window under you and just barely get out of the way of the lady necromancer\u2019s next spell.\n\nYou have no idea where you are in the tower, but you can hear fighting going on outside and a couple of hearty roars which you can only guess is Gorax.\n\nA quick scan would indicate that you\u2019re in some sort of library. You cautiously proceed and decide that finding stairs that lead up would be the way to go. You just hope you\u2019re ready to take him on and his mistress.\n\nAs you make your way through, you fight all manner of undead sentries: Wraiths, ghosts, skeletal warriors, etc. During one of your moments of hiding a couple of wight guards run by talking in a hoarse tone.\n\n\u201cThe big one and little one are dead! We must find the last one! Quick Quick!\u201d\n\u201cYes Yes! The master must be protected!\u201d\n\nYou come to the very real feeling of having been in the position before\u2026all alone, surrounded by hostile undead, and in Nuro\u2026\n\nYour resolve breaks a little and you wish that you weren\u2019t here. You want to go home.\n\nEventually you push yourself forward, but somehow fear has crept back into your own dead heart. To your credit you do reach the top of the tower, but the Necromancer\u2019s mistress once again surprises you. A ray of light sears your face off and destroys your vision. You fall to the cold stone floor in extreme pain and can only make out blurry images.\n\nYou see a blurred black hooded figure approach. You can\u2019t see his face, but this could only be who you think it is. You attempt to reach for your sword.\n\n\u201cMore assassins? I swear something is going to have to be done about these bloodsuckers. The Ghoul King\u2019s kin are really starting to get on my nerves. These ones weren\u2019t even a challenge. What are you doing bloodsucker? Don\u2019t you know that\u2019s futile?\u201d\n\nThe Necromancer Lord unleashes a ball of flame that engulfs your body, putting an end to your undead existence.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Be a musician", "result": "This is all you\u2019ve ever wanted. Just play music. You\u2019ll be able to do it now for all eternity if possible. You\u2019d be a fool to turn down such a chance.\n\n\u201cLord Rostov, I wish to play music.\u201d\n\nLord Rostov smiles at your response.\n\n\u201cAh yes, I was hoping you\u2019d chose the way of the artiste rather than the warrior. Your talents will be better served here. In the meantime you will be shown to your new room. Ladies, I think you two should escort our new bard. Don\u2019t have too much fun, you\u2019ve got a performance tomorrow!\u201d\n\nYou are escorted by a couple of female vampires to your room. They say their names are Glasya and Natasha. They seem to make a fuss over you on your way there which you don\u2019t find completely unwelcome, but you\u2019re still getting used to the whole idea that you\u2019re a vampire just like one of them now, despite also being excited over getting to play music on a steady basis with no hindrances.\n\nThe two vampiresses get even friendlier with you when you get to the room. Natasha begins to take a more aggressive stance and kisses you as the pair of you get on the bed. As the two of you are undressing, Natasha who is on top of you nods to Glasya who leaves the room.\n\nTen minutes later as you\u2019re fully engaged in physical pleasure, Glasya enters the room again with what looks to be a captive human girl. She doesn\u2019t look very old either. Probably a teenager. Her mouth is gagged so she can\u2019t scream out properly.\n\n\u201cWha\u2026what\u2019s all this?\u201d\n\u201cShhhh, your passage to true vampirehood\u2026\u201d the Natasha says continuing to grind into you.\n\nThe human girl is dragged over to the bed with fear and tears in her eyes the whole time. Glasya draws out a blade and holds it to her throat.\n\n\u201cWould you like me to cut now or would you prefer I prolong the fear? Perhaps remove her gag first so that you may hear her screams? Or maybe you\u2019d even like to sink your teeth into her yourself?\u201d Glasya asks and licks the side of the young girl\u2019s face.\n\u201cWhat? Shit! No wait!\u201d you say stopping Natasha, and sitting up. \u201cI thought we were just having some fun here! Not killing young girls!\u201d\n\u201cWhy do the two need to be mutually exclusive? Broodling, you have been favored by Lord Rostov, I suggest you count yourself lucky and get with the program\u2026besides you\u2019re one of us now, you will need to feed on blood to survive.\u201d Glasya says with a frown.\n\nYou look at the girl and you shake you head briefly realizing what else it means to be a vampire.\n\n\u201cAlright, alright, I got it. But can\u2019t I like feed on animals first and uh work my way up or something?\u201d\n\u201cSqueamish broodling! You will take the blood of this girl or Lord Rostov will hear of this weakness! While he may be impressed with your music abilities, he will not tolerate weaklings!\u201d Glasya continues to scold.\n\u201cBesides, why do you care whether this\u2026mortal lives or dies now? You do not know her and you are now superior to her in everyway. It\u2019s your right\u2026\u201d Natasha says while kissing on your body.\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t really have any choice in the matter. You almost curse yourself for getting yourself into this situation. You stay silent for awhile and then speak.\n\n\u201cVery well. Slit her throat, but do it quickly.\u201d You say.\n\u201c(Sigh) Very well.\u201d Glasya replies disappointedly.\n\nThe young girl\u2019s throat is slashed and blood sprays over you and Natasha who greedily opens her mouth to catch it. Glaysa tosses the girl\u2019s dying body onto your chest and begins to undress as well to join you and Natasha in this blood feast.\n\nThe night is definitely long, memorable and decadent. A little piece of you has \u201cdied\u201d namely the vestiges of morality.\n\nA few months pass and you don\u2019t even hesitate anymore. You enjoy the blood as well as your playing for Lord Rostov\u2019s court.\n\nA year passes and you\u2019ve become completely oblivious to the worsening of the \u201coutside world\u201d. (Which you don\u2019t even think about since you\u2019re so rapped up in your own pleasures) Each day the Necromancer Lord and Velzix get stronger and you stopped worrying about your family\u2019s future. You don\u2019t even write to them anymore. You\u2019ve become so corrupted in such a short amount of time its actually amazing.\n\nAnother year passes and you\u2019re basically a hedonist. This is what Lord Rostov\u2019s \u201csecret fortress\u201d is all about for the most part. Sure there\u2019s discussion on what should be done about the outside problems, but pleasures of the flesh and blood are mainly the orders of the night. You don\u2019t even realize it, but you ARE literally a \u201cleech\u201d now. All vampires have ever done is leech off of the mortal world. Sure there are the \u201cactive ones\u201d but there are far more hedonists. Ironic that the ones who choose to be professional killers, assassins or \u201cheroes\u201d tend to still retain more of their mortalhood.\n\nLord Rostov eventually mentions in passing that he\u2019s finally come up with a perfect plan to kill the Necromancer Lord. He\u2019s managed to come to some sort of deal with that old outcast The Ghoul King to betray him sometime in the near future. The goal is to lure the Necromancer Lord to the fortress itself and kill him directly.\n\nAgain you could really care less, and you\u2019ve become little more than just another hedonist in Lord Rostov\u2019s court. Lord Rostov has it all figured out, you don\u2019t need to worry. You\u2019re safe in this little \u201cworld.\u201d\n\nA few months pass and the plan swings into action. One night while you\u2019re playing for the court as usual a loud noise is heard in the foyer and the sounds of shouting and crashing is heard. Lord Rostov takes a few of his concubines and tell everyone else to stay put, though everyone is a little curious. Even you.\n\nYou go back to playing a little bit and things are starting to return to their \u201coriginal state\u201d since everyone figures Lord Rostov has the matter well in hand.\n\nSoon another noise is heard which sounds like the shrieking and screaming of multiple people.\n\n\u201cAAAAAARRRGH!\u201d\n\u201cLORD ROSTOV! NO!\u201d\n\u201cGET HIM!\u201d\n\u201cKILL THE NECROMANCER!\u201d\n\nEveryone for once goes into a battle mode to rush to Lord Rostov\u2019s aid. A deformed and ugly creature runs into you, while you\u2019re trying to wrap your mind around this chaos.\n\n\u201cGet outta my way broodling! He\u2019s gonna kill us all! I\u2019ve fucked up\u2026heh, but at least the rest of you fuckers are going to die!\u201d he growls at you while desperately looking for a place to hide.\n\nYou don\u2019t know what to do, but suddenly you feel a presence overcome you. Like someone is controlling your mind. This isn\u2019t even like Lord Rostov, its even more powerful and its growing stronger\u2026\n\nYou continue to hear the screams of vampires as you can\u2019t help but approach the way to the slaughter. You see vampires killing each other in the hallway! How is this possible? But you know why, it\u2019s HIM\u2026\n\nThe Necromancer\u2026or whatever he is now has managed to enforce his will even over vampires. You see him in the distance. He\u2019s not even dirtying his hands killing all of you himself. You can feel his loathing for your kind and then you\u2019re completely pulled into his domination.\n\n\u201cAnd now little blood leech you shall join your brethren\u2026\u201d you hear him whisper in your mind.\n\nAnother vampire suddenly punches you in the back of the head. You attempt to get up, but then feel a foot to the face followed by a sword going through your back. At this point you feel a something you haven\u2019t felt in a long time, fear.\n\nThen your head is ripped off in the ensuing bloodbath. Later after total victory has been achieved, the Great Lich Lord burns your body along with the rest of the truly dead vampires.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Try to escape", "result": "All of this is too much for you to handle. You know you\u2019re dead, but you still feel afraid. You don\u2019t know what to make of any of the shit Warnov just said and you don\u2019t care, all you want to do is run away from all of this.\n\nYou take off running in a random direction with a confused stated of mind, not really knowing what is going to come next. You\u2019re so overwhelmed by confusion and fear that you don\u2019t even notice how much faster you\u2019re actually moving.\n\nYou aren\u2019t paying attention to too much of anything until you feel Warnov tackle you to the ground.\n\nWarnov quickly snaps your neck so you can\u2019t move and looks a little mournful as he crouches near you.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry human. I should\u2019ve known better. Not everyone is meant for the gift. It is with great regret that I must now kill you. Such a loss\u2026for both races.\u201d\n\nWarnov pulls out a silver blade and jams it into your heart before cutting your head off and putting an end to your short undead life.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Letters to home (War continues...)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nJust another letter from me, letting you know I\u2019m still alive. Though I\u2019m sure with my newest title of \u201cDemon Slayer\u201d you probably knew I was.\n\nMore exaggerations of course. I do my job to be sure, but there are plenty of other men and women my age or even younger that doing just as much as I am and they don\u2019t seem to get any credit. Of course many of them have also been killed. I\u2019ve always tried to keep everyone alive under my command, but I know it\u2019s a futile endeavor.\n\nThe fighting has been getting worse up here, the demons I think have finally gotten more organized. Though what alarms me more is hearing that the Necromancer Lord has finally broken out of Nuro and taken over the Brot Kingdom. I thought the Grand Alliance was supposed to stop this sort of thing.\n\nI\u2019m tired of all this. I feel like playing right now, sorry for the short letter.\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Letters to home (Escape from Nuro)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nI dunno if they informed you, but I AM still alive! I don\u2019t know how long you may have been worrying, but I\u2019m sure you already heard about the failed siege at Nuro. It was horrible.\n\nI\u2019ve spoken little about it as I\u2019ve been attempting to recuperate in Fort Virtue. I really don\u2019t want to, but I know I have to. Some of the high ranking people in the Zalan military apparently want to talk to me directly about it too. Apparently I was the only survivor. I still can\u2019t believe it. I mean is it possible the god of luck rolled the dice and I was spared that day?\n\nIt\u2019s the only possible explanation. I mean the dead were all around me and I somehow escaped. My troubles didn\u2019t even end there, since I might\u2019ve died of blood loss or marauding demons had I not been found by a Dwarven patrol.\n\nI\u2019ve never seen so much death in my life even during my assignment in Retlad and I wish I didn\u2019t have to again, but I know I will. I just wish I could get my mind on the awful things I saw that day. Normally I\u2019d play my music, but I don\u2019t even have my lute anymore to do that. I miss it.\n\nI can\u2019t believe I\u2019m even obsessing about a stupid instrument when I should really be thankful that I\u2019m still alive! Nobody else is. Captain Valhlat, Wessel, all of them. All those people in my company are dead or worse, probably raised as zombies by now.\n\nI dread what the future holds. Will I be sent back?\n\nI wish I had my lute.\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Letters to home (Thanks for the lute!)", "result": "Dear Mom\n\nThanks for the lute! I received it just a few days ago. It plays very well, its even better than the one I lost. It\u2019s certainly made what little free time I have at least tolerable now.\n\nI really wish I could get a chance to visit you guys though. I thought I would\u2019ve been able to by now, but I suppose given the current situation, nobody\u2019s getting any kind of leave for quite some time.\n\nI\u2019m sure you\u2019ve also heard all about how I\u2019m supposed to be some kind of hero after surviving the failed attack on Nuro, but I don\u2019t see how. I mean I guess praise is better than being insulted, but at this point I feel like a fraud. Like I\u2019m getting too much credit for something that was pure luck in the first place.\n\nI dunno, I know you and the rest of the family are proud of me so that\u2019s all that really matters. I\u2019m just trying to keep all this in perspective. You and Dad always told me not to get a big head about things. At least they raised my pay so I can send you guys more money. That\u2019s why I joined the first place after all.\n\nThis new rank gives me a few more responsibilities, but I can handle it. So far this assignment hasn\u2019t been too bad. Demons aren\u2019t a picnic to fight though and I\u2019m dreading the day when they start attacking in a more organized manner.\n\nUntil then, I\u2019ll just be enjoying your gift when I can.\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family.\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Letters to home (Assault on Nuro)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nI\u2019m writing this just before we head off to Nuro. I\u2019m sort of scared. I know I shouldn\u2019t, but I can\u2019t help it. I also know I\u2019ve been in danger several times before, but I have a bad feeling about this mission.\n\nI remember those old stories Dad told about the Dead War that occurred centuries ago. Those used to scare the hell out of me. I was usually thankful when you told him to stop telling me and Mallack about it.\n\nStill he always said that he told those stories so that we could better appreciate the relatively \u201csafe\u201d time we live in now even if it isn\u2019t perfect. I\u2019d hate to think that he was wrong about that, because I certainly wouldn\u2019t want to live during the years of the Great Lich Lord\u2019s reign of terror.\n\nI\u2019ve been told that this \u201coutbreak\u201d is still small enough to be contained and eliminated, but that doesn\u2019t make me feel any better.\n\nNuro is a place of strong magic! If they couldn\u2019t handle this problem, how are we going to be able to? What manner of undead are going to face us? What of the evil wizards that caused this in the first place? As far as my company goes, the only really powerful one we have is Wessel. I hope they aren\u2019t just sending us, or that we\u2019ll at least have much more magical back up by the time we arrive there.\n\nI\u2019ve been trying to not worry about this, but this doesn\u2019t feel right. In my heart it doesn\u2019t feel right. I just hope and pray to all the gods that I survive this.\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family.\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Letters to home (Retlad assignment)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nThis assignment is almost coming to a close I believe. We\u2019ve got the Quillars on the run and wiped out most of their lairs. I\u2019ve said it before and I\u2019ll say it again, I\u2019d rather be fighting Kobolds!\n\nLately I\u2019ve been able to play a lot more thanks to our severe lowering of the Quillar population. The people here are pretty nice, they seem to always want me to play for them. Didn\u2019t think I\u2019d actually ever play for a proper audience!\n\nI\u2019m happy to do it though, it sort of keeps my mind off of the nastier things I\u2019ve seen. I know I told you about how my friend Tylir died, a few months ago, but it still seems a little unreal. I mean other than Dad, I\u2019ve never known anyone who I knew personally dying. And certainly not as violently as he did. I\u2019ve seen a lot more violence in general though.\n\nHowever, I guess I should\u2019ve expected stuff like this to happen. I mean I am in the army! Sometimes the people call us heroes and stuff for killing the Quillars. Some guys like that annoying Wessel get a thrill out of it, but I dunno. I don\u2019t really feel like one. I just want to do my job and survive. And play if possible.\n\nWell I guess that\u2019s it for now, give my love to the rest of the family.\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Letters to home (There was this girl...)", "result": "Hey Mallack!\n\nI paid the messenger a little extra to give this one to you personally, don\u2019t show it to Mom or anyone else! I\u2019m serious!\n\nI finally did it!\n\nI didn\u2019t even expect it either. I was off duty and taking a break from destroying a Quillar lair, so as usual I went down to the tavern to go play for the locals a bit.\n\nWhile it is true there have been several \u201coffers\u201d from some of tavern girls before due to my lute playing ability, I dunno I just never felt comfortable about going with one of them.\n\nHowever, I didn\u2019t get to the tavern; I bumped into some traveling merchant woman from the Brot Kingdom. I apologized and helped pick up her belongings and she noticed the lute I carried. She began to ask me about it since she said she really liked music and soon the pair of us were deep in conversation and going back to the Inn on the other side of town that she was currently staying at. I learned that her name was Helena.\n\nWe continued to talk in her room and I played for Helena a bit and before I knew it, we were on the bed naked!\n\nI\u2019m still not exactly sure how it started, but it sure felt good! I really liked her too, but I guess it was just a one time thing, because she left a couple days later. Though she did say if I was ever stationed in Brot, I should look her up again.\n\nAnyway, I guess I felt like I just had to tell someone. I suppose I could\u2019ve told the guys in my company, but I didn\u2019t really want to be sweated down for more detailed information constantly.\n\nOkay that\u2019s it, and like I said, don\u2019t show this to Mom or anyone else! In fact you should probably just destroy it.\n\nYour brother", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Letters to home (First assignment)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nWell I got my first assignment. I\u2019m heading to the Retlad Kingdom. Unlike most of my fellow cadets I was given the choice to go there instead of the Tulan Border. Thank the gods for my excellent bow skills.\n\nStill it\u2019s not going to be an easy assignment, but I\u2019m probably not as worried about it as I might normally be since I finally got paid and managed to buy myself another lute! I\u2019ve been practicing it again to help me keep my mind off things. I made arrangements for most of my pay to be sent to you. You should be receiving it at the end of each month, I hope it\u2019ll help.\n\nAnyway, tomorrow is the big day, so I better get some early sleep tonight. I have no idea what to expect.\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family.\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Letters to home (Boot Camp)", "result": "Dear Mom,\n\nI\u2019m glad I\u2019ve finally had some free time to write to you. Would you believe that when I first joined up, the recruiter thought I didn\u2019t know how? Sometimes these city folk got a lot of nerve making assumptions about people that grew up on farms, I\u2019ve had to learn that first hand just by the folks I\u2019m currently bunking with. They\u2019re all mostly from the capitol or another Zalan city. I think I\u2019m the only one here from a small village, so I\u2019ve been saddled with the nickname \u201cfarmboy\u201d. Ha ha.\n\nDespite this nick, I get along with most of the people here. The drill sergeant is mean, but luckily I haven\u2019t had to suffer the full brunt of his wrath, which is more than can be said for a few of the people here. That\u2019s never pretty.\n\nBoot camp is very tough. Even tougher than working on the farm. I\u2019m just glad its half-way over. They took my lute away as soon as I entered. I really should\u2019ve known better to take it with me\u2026but I dunno I thought I\u2019d be able to practice it on what few breaks I have. Oh well, I guess I wasn\u2019t ever going to be that traveling bard anyway. Just foolish dreams I suppose.\n\nAnyway we\u2019re going to start bow training tomorrow. I think I should do very well in that.\n\nOkay, I can\u2019t think of anything else. I hope everything is going well on the farm. I know you\u2019ve always kept an eye on all of us, but make sure that Mallack pays extra attention on the chicken coop this month. The Kobolds come out a lot around this time!\n\nGive my love to the rest of the family.\n\nYour son", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Sign up with the mercenaries", "result": "You\u2019re not sure if the formal military life is for you. If you joined up you wouldn\u2019t be able to readily leave. You figure if you don\u2019t like life as a mercenary or it isn\u2019t working out for you, you can leave freely.\n\nYou explain your decision to join up with the mercenary company that\u2019s currently passing through. Your revelation comes as a shock. Your smaller brothers and sisters don\u2019t want you to go, your brother Mallack really doesn\u2019t want you to leave since he\u2019ll be next in line to take the brunt of the manual labor!\n\nYour mother is a little apprehensive about your decision. You half expect her to say no, but she understands that you\u2019re doing this for the good of the family. She gives her blessing.\n\nBefore you leave the next day with your packed belongings, your whole family comes to say goodbye to you. You almost hesitate to leave, wondering if it would actually be better for you to stay. Your mother approaches you.\n\n\u201cYou don\u2019t have to do this you know. We\u2019re doing just fine.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but things would be easier if this family had more money.\u201d\n\u201cHah. Things are always easier with more money son, but you don\u2019t need to go and get yourself killed for it.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, I know, but I\u2019ve thought it through.\u201d\n\u201cVery well, you\u2019re old enough to make your own decisions and live your own life, though I\u2019m glad to see that you still want to help the family as opposed to just leaving in the middle of the night.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019ll visit and return with whatever my pay is whenever I can.\u201d\n\u201cI know\u2026okay, you best get going. I think the mercenary company was leaving today.\u201d\n\nYou make you way to the local tavern and catch them just as they\u2019re getting ready leave. A lot of them look hung over.\n\n\u201cHey wait up\u2026\u201d you say in a slightly loud tone, causing one mean looking mercenary to snarl at you.\n\u201cShut the fuck up yokel! Shit, I got a splitting headache and it hurts like a sonofabitch.\u201d\n\u201cSorry. Are you the leader of this company?\u201d\n\u201cLeader of these dickheads? Naw. The Boss is actually visiting his family in the Zalan capital. We\u2019re going to meet up with him now and I suggest you get the fuck outta our way and not waste anymore of our time!\u201d\n\u201cBut I want to join you guys.\u201d\n\nThe mercenary you were speaking to looks at you then looks at a few of his buddies and begins to laugh louder than your voice which previously annoyed him.\n\n\u201cHAHAHA HAHAHA! Y\u2019hear that fellas? This yokel wants to join us! Thanks a lot, I needed a good laugh, now go fuck your pigs or whatever it is you farm types do.\u201d\n\u201cBut I\u2019m serious\u2026\u201d\n\u201cSerious? Farmboy, this is a man\u2019s job and not for the fuckin\u2019 weak. You ever even use a damn weapon?\u201d\n\u201cYeah! I got this bow and this sword! I\u2019m a really good shot!\u201d\n\nThe mercenary still looks unimpressed.\n\n\u201cUh huh, yeah well you ever kill anyone, hell you ever kill ANYTHING? And I\u2019m not talkin\u2019 about any of your livestock you might\u2019ve slaughtered. I mean something sentient.\u201d\n\u201cWell yeah, I\u2019ve killed Kobolds that were trying to steal chickens from the\u2026\u201d\n\nThe mercenaries begin to laugh again.\n\n\u201cOh shit, you are priceless boy! My sister can kill fuckin\u2019 Kobolds and her only talent is whoring.\u201d\n\u201cHaha got that one right, Dimitri.\u201d Another one of the mercenaries agrees.\n\nSuddenly the laughing stops.\n\n\u201cWhat the fuck did you just say Fermeli?\u201d\n\u201cUh, I was just agreeing with you\u2026c\u2019mon don\u2019t take it like that! I mean you said\u2026\u201d\n\u201cAin\u2019t about what I said, it\u2019s about what YOU said! You called my fucking sister a whore! You ain\u2019t getting\u2019 away with that shit.\u201d\n\nDimitri draws his sword and stomps over to Fermeli who is trying to get one of his buddies to help him, but everyone else is backing away from the fight. Dimitri takes advantage of Fermeli\u2019s state of panic and slashes him good with his sword.\n\nFermeli cries out in pain and begs for forgiveness. Dimitri looks like he\u2019s going to finish him off, but then turns to you.\n\n\u201cYou want to join hayseed? Kill this piece of shit then.\u201d\n\u201cHuh? I mean\u2026\u201d you utter in confusion.\n\u201cDid I stutter pig farmer? Kill this\u2026 AARGH FUCK!\u201d\n\nFermeli has now taken advantage of Dimitri by shoving a dagger into his leg and scrambling to get up\n\n\u201cYeah! Take that! How\u2019s that feel?\u201d Fermeli taunts and draws his own sword in an attempt to kill Dimitri\n\nAt this point you unwisely step into the middle of this fight.\n\n\u201cHey hold on, the pair of you are even now\u2026\u201d\n\u201cFuck off pig farmer! You want some of this now? Yeah, let\u2019s see how much of a killer you are!\u201d Fermeli says who doesn\u2019t look frightened of you at all and heads in your direction.\n\n\u201cHey wait I don\u2019t wanna\u2026\u201d\n\nYou barely dodge his sword swipe to your head. You roll out of the way and quickly grab an arrow and shoot it at Fermeli with your bow, hitting him square in the neck. Some blood spurts out and a surprised look on his face is displayed and then he falls dead. You\u2019ve killed him. You\u2019ve never killed anything before that wasn\u2019t a Kobold or livestock. You feel weird.\n\nIn the meantime Dimitri gets up and pulls the dagger out of his leg and looks over at Formeli\u2019s body.\n\n\u201cHeh, maybe you are a killer after all pig farmer. Well it seems we got an opening now. Take whatever he had as your own. You killed him, you earned it. Welcome to the Chimera Mercenary Company!\u201d\n\nWhile you MAY be in, you\u2019re not necessarily sure if you want in. This may be a bit too much for you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join anyway", "result": "You know this isn\u2019t going to be easy and you\u2019re going to have to be tough, but you remember that you\u2019re doing this for your family. You quickly search Formeli\u2019s body, which didn\u2019t have that much to begin with.\n\n\u201cHeh, he always was a broke bastard. Spent all his money on gambling, I\u2019ll miss taking his money that\u2019s for sure. Alright then, you\u2019ll probably be wantin\u2019 to take that sword of his since it looks in way better condition than your rusted hunk of iron. Your bow seems to do the job just fine though. His armor too, and hurry up, we gotta meet the Boss! He\u2019s got another job for us no doubt.\u201d\n\nAs you\u2019re stripping off some of the armor, Dimitri notices something on your back.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2026what the hell is that boy? Is that a fuckin\u2019 lute? Haw haw! What the fuck are you doin\u2019 with a damn lute? You think that you\u2019re some sort of bard or something? We ain\u2019t got need for such things boy! Get rid of it!\u201d\n\u201cNo, it\u2019s mine.\u201d You defiantly say.\nYou wonder if this show of \u201ccourage\u201d has gotten you into a whole mess of trouble that you don\u2019t want, but fortunately it doesn\u2019t.\n\n\u201cHeh, he kills one shithead and now he thinks he\u2019s a tough guy! Alright pig farmer keep your sissy lute. But its just more weight for you to carry and you better not be falling behind! Come on men let\u2019s go, the Boss is waiting for us. You too lute boy!\u201d Dimitri exclaims and limps off. You briefly thought about telling him that he better keep up with his wounded leg and all, but you know when to stop.\n\nAnd so your mercenary life begins.\n\nA year passes\u2026\n\nYou\u2019re currently back in the Zalan Empire on a break in between missions. While most of your \u201cbuddies\u201d are drinking up their pay and spending it on whores you take this opportunity to visit your family and give them your payment and spoils of battle as usual.\n\nYou think about how much you\u2019ve traveled and experienced. Not all of it good, but then killing is never pretty. Some of the jobs are very straight forward: \u201cThere are some orc barbarians on the borders that have been pillaging our lands, kill them.\u201d And you don\u2019t have a problem with it. Other missions start falling into the \u201cgray\u201d area.\n\nYour last job involved some Azi Republic senator hiring the company to take out some secessionists that wanted to form their own country. It wasn\u2019t clean and it definitely wasn\u2019t fun. The secessionists actually had a reasonable complaint about leaving the Republic, saying that it was corrupt and that their representatives didn\u2019t care about them. But being a mercenary means you don\u2019t take sides for moral or ideological reasons, you do it for money.\n\nIt\u2019s not just that though, some of the things that have been done\u2026well you can\u2019t say you\u2019re too proud of it. Granted, you\u2019ve never actively engaged in some of the less moral and outright criminal things that your mercenary comrades have, but you certainly know about them and it almost makes you feel like you\u2019re guilty of it as well.\n\nAs for how you cope with some of this stuff, you tend to keep to yourself and play your lute which has oddly made you a little more accepted. Seems there are more than a few music lovers in the company. Even the Captain doesn\u2019t mind you indulging in your little hobby. The Captain is a huge man who you know gets a pleasure from killing and mayhem. He\u2019s spent a lifetime doing it. In fact you have a hard time believing he even has a family that he goes to visit. Who knows though? Perhaps he is different with them.\n\n(You\u2019ve been working for the Chimera Company for a year and you still don\u2019t know what the hell his real name is, mainly because everyone only seems to address him as \u201cThe Boss\u201d or \u201cChief\u201d or in a more formal tone \u201cCaptain\u201d)\n\nYou spend the time with your family and tell them of some of the things you\u2019ve seen and exciting places you\u2019ve been to, of course never going into too much detail about the darker side of things. Your brothers and sisters enjoy the tales as usual. Your Mom senses that there is probably more to them, but she doesn\u2019t ask too many questions. She does always asks if you\u2019re okay and says that you don\u2019t have to keep doing it, but you always reply that you\u2019re fine and that you\u2019re just a little tired that\u2019s all.\n\nWhen your time is done you say goodbye to them and meet with the rest of your company at the Zalan capital this time. Its odd, but things seem to be even more chaotic than usual around here. People are rushing around and an air of concern seems to be pervading the city.\n\nThe guards are telling people to calm down our there will be martial law and you hear something in passing about an attack on a city. You don\u2019t really listen because you\u2019re in a hurry to meet up with your company which you find mostly hanging out in a tavern as usual.\n\nDimitri sees you and speaks.\n\n\u201cAh, it\u2019s our own fuckin\u2019 bard ! How\u2019s my favorite string plucker? (Hic!) You have trouble getting into the city? Heard the guards have been cracking down on security.\u201d\n\u201cNo, but what\u2019s going on? The city seems to be in a state of panic.\u201d\n\u201cFuck yeah it is! What you didn\u2019t hear?\u201d\n\u201cNo. What happened?\u201d\n\u201cFuckin\u2019 undead happened my pig farming friend! A whole shitload of them took over the the city of Nuro! Can you believe it? Fuckin\u2019 Nuro! That place was supposed to be unconquerable! Heh! (Burp!)\u201d Dimitri says without the slightest bit of worry.\n\u201cUNDEAD?! What the fuck? Nuro!? How?!\u201d\n\u201cFuck if I know, guess some rogue wizards got hooked up in that necromancy shit hardcore. Musta been some demonologists there too since we heard reports of demons too. Not the supposedly civilized type either, they\u2019re the rip off your head and shit down your neck kind.\u201d\n\u201c\u2026there\u2019s fuckin\u2019 rogue demons in Nuro too?\u201d\n\u201cOf course not, they all escaped and are now running around in the countryside, heard they\u2019re heading for the Tulan Kingdom.\u201d Dimitri says taking another drink.\n\nYou\u2019re having a hard time digesting all this yet the rest of your comrades are still drinking and partying like nothing is wrong. Your Dad had once told you tales of a being called the Great Lich Lord that existed many centuries ago who nearly killed the world. Scared the hell out of you then and it doesn\u2019t make you feel too good now.\n\n\u201cIsn\u2019t this concerning to you?\u201d\n\u201cWhat? Shit no! Just means more work for us and that also means more loot! Ha ha! You could get more loot to buy a new lute! Ha ha ha! (Hic!)\u201d\n\u201cBut this is the fuckin\u2019 undead! I mean\u2026\u201d\n\u201cSo? Stop bein a pussy! I\u2019ve fought some undead before, when I was lootin\u2019 a dwarven tomb. You just chop their heads off like everything else, shit ain\u2019t that hard. They just tend to smell worse\u2026well maybe not worse than trolls. Anyway I\u2019m sure the fucking governments will take care of this shit as quick as possible, you know how politicians don\u2019t like dead taxpayers, in the meantime we need to take advantage now while the conflict is hot!\u201d\n\nNo sooner has Dimitri said this little bit of wisdom, when the Boss steps in the doorway. He\u2019s as nasty looking as always, but this time he looks even moreso than usual.\n\n\u201cAlright you useless sacks of goblin shit. We got a new job. This one just came across rather unexpectedly. Ran into a Dwarven representative and we\u2019re now in the employ of a Dwarven Clan, near the southern Tulan Borders. With the occurrence of this Nuro incident, they\u2019re expecting some shit to spill over into their lands and they want some extra help. This is pretty surprising since Dwarves aren\u2019t known to pay for mercenaries, let alone the likes of us.\u201d The Boss tell you all.\n\u201cThe Tulan Border? Oh fuck that place is a meat grinder! There\u2019s no profit to be had anywhere near there!\u201d Cal pipes up.\n\u201cWell you can just pick up your panties and get your pansy ass back home and stay there then! The dwarves are paying well and that\u2019s the job. Take it or get the fuck outta my company!\u201d\n\u201cExcuse me Captain, but weren\u2019t there reports of demons running through that area?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cYeah so? That\u2019s why we\u2019re going over there most likely, but be fucking prepared for any damn thing. Maybe even undead\u2026who knows if my\u2026if those necromancer bastards started spreading their plague yet. We leave tomorrow.\u201d\n\nYou think on this fucked up situation and seriously reconsidering your career choice.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave the mercenary company", "result": "Nope, you\u2019re not doing this. This is suicide in your opinion. You have no idea what to expect and it sound a lot more dangerous than anything you\u2019ve ever faced.\n\nInstead of leaving with them the next day, you go back home. You don\u2019t worry about anyone coming after you, but you know you won\u2019t be welcomed back into the company again, and you wouldn\u2019t want to anyway.\n\nWhen you get back home, your family and mom in particular ask what happened, you explain it and say you don\u2019t want any part of that life. You apologize that you couldn\u2019t go through with it, but your mom looks more relieved than anything.\n\n\u201cWell son, I\u2019m just as glad you didn\u2019t go get yourself killed over there anyway. You\u2019ll be helping us out plenty just by working on the farm like always.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re glad to hear that. Over the next couple days you fall back into routine again. You still wonder about the future though and you briefly consider the army plan again, but given your short lived experience with mercenary \u201clife\u201d you don\u2019t think you\u2019re cut out with battle on a regular basis. Plus the Zalan Empire is currently on heightened alert and battle ready status with this Nuro Incident and all.\n\nYou resign yourself to the farm life. You play your lute to yourself (and family) when you have the time to do so. It\u2019s a simple life.\n\nTwo years pass and things have gotten worse. The Necromancer Lord (as he\u2019s become to be known) has expanded, even to the point of taking over the Brot Kingdom. The Tulan Kingdom has been totally conquered by a demon army. A Grand Alliance of nations has been formed, but so far they don\u2019t seem to be making much progress.\n\nMeanwhile life on the farm is a little harder. Your youngest sister Makana becomes gravely ill during the winter months, but there\u2019s not enough money to pay for a healer and most of the clerics have been summoned to battle with the undead or demon hordes. Sadly she dies making the overall mood of the farm a little more depressing. You don\u2019t even play anymore, your enthusiasm for music died along with the grim realities setting in.\n\nAnother three years pass and things are down right miserable. War is everywhere. The Demons have been taken care of, (You heard your former mercenary captain died in battle with their leader Velzix) but the undead are stronger than ever. Reports even speak of the Necromancer Lord becoming The Great Lich Lord \u201creborn\u201d.\n\nTo make things worse, the Zalan Empire has been becoming increasingly tyrannical. In order to help with the war effort they\u2019ve started bringing back the draft and the talk of ceasing private property to be used for the good of the government. While they say owners will be able to live and still work on their lands and businesses, it will be owned by the Empire.\n\nYou know it\u2019s only a matter of time when you get a knock on the door by Zalan army troops coming to take you and your brother Mallack away to the army and your family\u2019s farm.\n\nAnother two year pass\u2026.\n\nYou\u2019re on the eve of battle in a land known as the Garwold Confederacy although it\u2019s steadily becoming a giant graveyard now. The undead hordes have been sweeping relentlessly across the entire landscape. Your own company has had to fall back several times. Morale is low. Not that yours was high to begin with. You don\u2019t even know how you\u2019ve survived this long. While you had some battle experience during your time with the mercenary company, it still hasn\u2019t prepared you for the horrors you\u2019ve seen. The undead\u2026you\u2019ll never get used to fighting such emotionless creatures that are the embodiment of death and all that\u2019s unnatural.\n\nYou briefly wonder if your brother Mallack is alright where he\u2019s stationed, but it hardly matters at this point.\n\nBattle comes as it always does and you are not so lucky this time. Horrible and powerful creatures known as Blood Specters and Death Knights utterly destroy your side.\n\nYou fall to undead blades and chilling touches only rise up and join them in their goal of global genocide.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stick with it", "result": "You\u2019re in this now and you can\u2019t stop just because it\u2019s looking tough. You got your family to think about. You\u2019re staying.\n\nHowever you do, do something slightly out of character, you spend what little money you have on a whore for the night, mainly because you\u2019re a lot less sure if you\u2019re going to come back from this mission.\n\nThe next day you\u2019re on the job. The march to the dwarven lands is mostly uneventful, though the fighting between the Zalan Empire and the Tulan Kingdom is still going on their borders which even skirting around, still manages to find your company. The Boss takes advantage of straggling Tulan soldiers that have fled battle. The butchery isn\u2019t uncommon, after all, nobody will know and the Zalan Empire will just be blamed anyway.\n\nArrival in the Dwarven lands is met with caution, the Dwarves obviously know of the Chimera Company\u2019s reputation and a small group of them motion the Boss to just talk to him directly. A deal seems to be made and the Dwarves leave to go back to their underground home.\n\nThe Captain now addresses all of you.\n\n\u201cAlright, apparently there HAVE been demons running all up and down and through the area. The Dwarves are preparing defenses in case they try to invade underground; apparently they consider their underground city takes precedence so their main force is there. However they still have plenty of mines above ground and not nearly enough dwarves to defend them all. Now its been said the demons have been heading toward the Tulan Kingdom, but a lot of them still have been fucking around here and generally wrecking shit for the fun of it. Collapsing even the sturdy mines of the dwarves on their heads seems to be amusing to them. So our goal is to make things bothersome enough for them that they\u2019ll leave the dwarves alone and go elsewhere.\u201d\n\nThe Captain spits on the ground before continuing.\n\n\u201cWe\u2019re going to split up for this assignment and take different mines in the area. Watch your fucking ass. I don\u2019t think any of you eunuchs have fought any demons before, but I have and they\u2019re utterly fucking ruthless. Forget all that shit about some of them being civilized. They\u2019re about as civilized as damn Quillar, but a lot more intelligent. The chaos that is in their hearts is always there and these ones are the complete embodiment of it. And for fuck\u2019s sake DON\u2019T stay near any explosives! The dwarves are always using shit like that in their mines and demons have a tendency to have fire throwing abilities. It\u2019s probably the reason for all the easy mine collapses.\u201d\n\nThe Captain takes out a map.\n\n\u201cOne more thing. While I know the common thing to do on our assignments is to take advantage of things. We need to play this one completely fucking straight! Do NOT fucking do anything that\u2019s going to piss off the dwarves! If you do, we don\u2019t get paid. We don\u2019t get paid. I\u2019m going to get pissed, because we\u2019re getting a lot for this one. And assuming the dwarves don\u2019t kill you, I certainly fucking will. Alright now I\u2019m going to assign you according to this map.\u201d\n\nYou and a few others (Including Dimitri) are assigned to the Karzac Mines where you make your way to after some climbing which fortunately isn\u2019t too far off ground level. The dwarves there regard you with suspicion immediately.\n\n\u201cOh great they\u2019re here. Alright, let\u2019s set the ground rules. I\u2019m head miner Morri and I\u2019m in charge of this place! Don\u2019t even think about trying to steal some loose bars of silver that you might find lying around. You do it, and your skull meets an axe or mining pick! Got me?\u201d\n\u201cStand up when you speak to me.\u201d Dimitri laughs.\n\u201cYeah, make yer jokes human, we\u2019ll see if the demons will appreciate that humor when you\u2019re meeting them face to face.\u201d\n\u201cDemon, pah! Just one more thing for me to kill, people make a big deal about them. I\u2019ve seen how they fall in line and become law abiding citizens just like anyone else when beaten down.\u201d\n\u201cYeah and those same civilized ones will kill you when they get the chance. Didn\u2019t you hear the Captain?\u201d you say.\n\u201cYeah well he\u2019s got a tendency to be over dramatic; he probably picked that up from that fine ass elven bitch he\u2019s married to. Besides who DOESN\u2019T try to kill you when they get the chance? They aren\u2019t anything special. Their race just has a tendency to have assholiness come natural to them.\u201d\n\nMorri interrupts the pair of you.\n\n\u201cHey if you two morons are finished, I\u2019m about to tell you the fun part of this job. There are demons already in this mine.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?!\u201d\n\u201cOh yeah, bunch of those fuckers as we speak. Seems we got the fortune of one sneaking in here and decided to have her spawn in the deep reaches of this mine. The only good thing is these types don\u2019t seem to be interested in collapsing the mine, however they\u2019re trying to turn this place into some sort of fucking demon hive or something. We\u2019ve been trying to eliminate them, but of course it\u2019s slow going. We need to get them before they start breeding more though. So we\u2019re splitting up\u2026\u201d\n\u201cHere we go again\u2026\u201d Dimitri says.\n\nMorri assigns at least a few dwarves with each mercenary. You, Morri and Dimitri make up the last one.\n\nThe demon hunting in the mines is actually a very \u201cmundane\u201d job. They certainly are horrible looking creatures and very vicious, but after the first few times, you get used to it. These particular demons have an insect like appearance so maybe that\u2019s why these behave the way they do. They aren\u2019t very tough in the scheme of things, but like Morri said there do seem to be a lot. You can\u2019t use your bow like you want to either due to the cramped mine conditions.\n\nDemons aren\u2019t really the problem though, the problem is Dimitri.\n\nAfter one of the harder battles, Morri is attempting to catch his breath. Dimitri notices the very large silver deposit you\u2019re next to and the silver that\u2019s just there for the taking. He quietly whispers to you that you and he should waylay Morri and take some of the silver. Leave his body to be munched on by a wandering demon. Who\u2019s going to know?\n\nYou\u2019re not really for this plan and you say no, but Dimitri begins to argue and Morri notices the both of you.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not doing it! The Captain said\u2026\u201d you exclaim.\n\u201cFuckin\u2019 pussy!\u201d Dimitri says pushing you.\n\u201cHey hey hey! Not doing what? What are you two on abo\u2026\u201d\n\nDimitri takes the opportunity of distraction and hits Morri in the face with silver bar that he lifted off the ground earlier.\n\n\u201c Ugh! Bastard dog you\u2019ll pay for this treachery!\u201d Morri utters falling to the ground.\n\u201cCome on, this is your last chance to be a man and help me pig farmer!\u201d Dimitri says as he goes to finish off Morri.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help Dimitri", "result": "You hate yourself for this, but you feel you don\u2019t have much choice, if Morri lives he\u2019ll certainly tell everyone and then you won\u2019t get paid which will probably result in your death by the hands of the Boss. You raise your own weapon and help kill Morri. He doesn\u2019t die easy, but Dimitri finishes him off before he can put up any sort of meaningful defense.\n\nBreathing hard and smiling at you with blood on his face, Dimitri laughs a bit.\n\n\u201cHeh heh, knew you\u2019d see the light, lute boy! Now come on, let\u2019s throw his body in that left passage. I think I heard some of those demon roaches chittering down that way. Let\u2019s just make sure we\u2019re not around eh? We got a lot of silver to load up on!\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t take any of the silver actually, you\u2019re still worrying and not feeling right about this whole situation, of course that just means more for Dimitri.\n\nYou don\u2019t even think this half assed plan of Dimitri\u2019s is going to work. You and Dimitri are going to look mighty suspicious meeting up with the other dwarves without Morri, and trying to conceal a shitload of silver, though Dimitri claims everything will be fine.\n\nEverything goes less fine when you start to realize that Morri was the one who was leading you through this mine maze. Neither you or Dimitri were paying attention to the directions mainly because you were on the look out for demon attacks and fighting them off.\n\nEventually you\u2019re attacked by more of the demons as you proceed to get lost. You and Dimitri get into an argument and begin to blame each other (Though it really is his fault) You both get angry and come to blows, you however get the advantage, not being weighed down by silver. You leave his body for the demons.\n\nYou however don\u2019t get too much further. The demons seem to be coming out in more force and you\u2019re wounded many times. You get scared and confused and you know you\u2019re a dead man when you see Morri\u2019s body being eaten by several of demons. You\u2019ve gone in a complete circle and now you\u2019re hearing that demon chittering from everywhere.\n\nA valiant effort is made by you, but you can\u2019t fight them all. Eventually you are overwhelmed and eaten.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Help Morri", "result": "You\u2019ve had enough. You\u2019re not going to help OR stand by for another immoral act performed by your \u201cco-workers\u201d. It\u2019s bad enough that it goes on, but that doesn\u2019t mean you need to let it, if you can do something about it.\n\nYou run Dimitri through the back with your sword, he yells out in pain, but still manages to swing his armored fist to strike you in the face. You fall to the ground.\n\n\u201cFuck\u2026lute boy\u2026goin\u2026down\u2026pig fucker\u2026\u201d he wheezes as he attempts to step towards you only to fall to his knees. At this point Morri has recovered and cleaves Dimitri\u2019s skull in with his axe.\n\n\u201cBastard.\u201d Morri then looks at you. \u201cHeh, I guess you must be one of the few with a conscious in the company eh?\u201d\n\u201cI guess so.\u201d You reply.\n\u201cOr perhaps you knew it would be better if I lived so you could find your way out this maze?\u201d\n\u201c\u2026Actually I hadn\u2019t even thought about that. I just\u2026just couldn\u2019t let him kill and rob you like that. Seen it too many times.\u201d\n\u201cThat a fact? Well tell me son, why the hell are you hooked up with these bunch for then?\u201d\n\u201cMoney to help the family\u2026besides it\u2019s not that bad.\u201d\n\u201cOkay, if you say so. However, this little incident is going to cost your company. We warned your captain that if any evidence of treachery occurred, we weren\u2019t paying him shit and this deal was off!\u201d\n\u201cBut can\u2019t we just keep this secret? I mean\u2026\u201d\n\u201cSecret? Fuck no! Look, you\u2019re not a bad person, but you\u2019re hanging out with bad people. The only reason why we hired you in the first place is because you ARE effective and you\u2019re about the only mercenary company insane enough to do a job like this. But a deal\u2019s a deal. You captain apparently doesn\u2019t have control over his men like he thinks, because I\u2019m sure he warned you all.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but everyone will probably blame me and my life will be in danger!\u201d\n\u201c\u2026well\u2026I\u2019m sorry about that, but that\u2019s the price you pay for the company you keep\u2026look I\u2019ll tell you what, because you helped me, I\u2019ll take you back to the entrance and you can leave. Should at least give you a head start. Hell, maybe I\u2019ll even tell them you died before this happened. You could then just hide out and stay out of sight without even anyone looking for you.\u201d\n\nNot knowing what to say next you just agree and ponder your possible future.\n\nThe way back to the entrance is uneventful as far as demon attacks are concerned. You don\u2019t know what you\u2019re going to do. You\u2019ll have to go on the run or at least relocate regardless of what Morri tells everyone. And if he mentions the truth, then your family may well be in danger. You imagine that if the Boss couldn\u2019t get to you, he may very well take it out on your family.\n\nYou feel sick and upset. You wish you hadn\u2019t chosen this path. All you ever really wanted to do was play your lute, not fight demons or anything else really.\n\nYou follow behind Morri in a daze. You\u2019re surprised that he doesn\u2019t insist that you walk in front of him, but then that\u2019s probably because he trusts that you\u2019re not a murderer. You also realize you recognize this part of the mine and could probably find your way back from here\u2026\n\nYou shake your head and take a deep breath.\n\n\u201cHey Morri.\u201d\n\u201cWha\u2026glagh!\n\nAn arrow goes right through Morri\u2019s mouth and out the other side of his head. He gurgles obscenities while trying to raise his axe towards you. Another arrow goes through his eye. He ceases his struggle.\n\nWhile you solved the problem of Morri telling anyone, now you have to cover your own tracks, then you hear a sound you never thought you\u2019d be glad to hear. The chittering of those insect demons and a bunch of them are coming right behind you.\n\nYou pull the arrows out and run as quickly as you can to the entrance leaving the demons to feed upon Morri\u2019s body. The thought crosses your mind to just leave anyway. Maybe they\u2019d think all three of you got eaten. However, you run into another group during your dash to the mine entrance.\n\n\u201cWhere the hell are you running off to?\u201d a mercenary asks. It\u2019s Cal. You come up with a lie quick.\n\n\u201c(pant) Shit! We got fucking ambushed! (pant) Barely fucking escaped! (pant) Dimitri and Morri are dead! Probably eaten! And the rest of those demon fuckers are heading this way!\u201d\n\u201cWhat?! You cowardly fucker, you just let Morri die?\u201d one the dwarves says angrily.\n\u201cIt wasn\u2019t my idea! I tried to help him and Dimitri, but they just came in force, I don\u2019t even know how I escaped!\u201d\n\nYour story is a little suspicious, but thanks to the demons, you\u2019re covered. They didn\u2019t leave much for the dwarves to find. However, you\u2019re not looked favorably on by the rest of the dwarves for the rest of the mission. Your fellow mercenaries don\u2019t really care one way or another. It\u2019s part of the job and Dimitri wasn\u2019t well liked so they could care less if he died or lived.\n\nYou on the other hand are still not feeling so great about yourself. The longer you\u2019re part of this company the more you\u2019re starting to think or be more like them. You hate it and you\u2019ll be glad when this job is over.\n\nA few months pass and the contract is over. The \u201cproblem\u201d isn\u2019t completely gone, in fact there\u2019s reports of some undead wandering in the area now, but the Dwarves are growing more weary of your presence, hand over your payment and tell you to leave. They say they can handle anything else themselves.\n\nIt\u2019s quite a lot this time. Best job you\u2019ve had. Upon your return to the Zalan Empire you buy yourself a new lute. It\u2019s your \u201creward\u201d. The rest of it goes to your family who of course are eager to hear about your tales as usual. You don\u2019t tell them that many this time. You just try to take your mind off your \u201cjob\u201d by asking them more questions this time around. When you\u2019re alone you play your new lute, trying to emulate a couple of the songs you overheard the Dwarves engage in when you were there. You never knew they were musically inclined; it\u2019s a shame you had to kill one to protect your future. You\u2019re still debating on whether or not to give up the mercenary life, but you see how much it\u2019s helping the family out, so you decide to stay and put up with it.\n\nAfter your \u201cbreak is over\u201d you go back to the job as usual.\n\nThree years pass\u2026\n\nFour years have passed since the \u201cNuro Incident\u201d and things have gotten much worse in the world. The Necromancer Lord conquered the Brot Kingdom, A demon lord called Velzix conquered the Tulan Kingdom, both are expanding and a so called Grand Alliance of nations doesn\u2019t seem to be doing much good against either of them.\n\nThe Chimera Company was recently hired by the Zalan government. Due to your past battles with demons, they decided you would be good to put on Tulan Border which is still a bloodbath, but instead of fighting the Tulan Kingdom, the Zalan Empire is fighting Velzix\u2019s hordes.\n\nIt\u2019s not an easy assignment or very pleasant, in fact it\u2019s got to be the worst job you\u2019ve been on. You company is assigned to make commando raids and sabotage shit to keep the demons fairly unfocused, while the Zalan Empire\u2019s real armies try to make progress into Velzix\u2019s realm. Currently you\u2019re making your \u201ccamp\u201d in small abandoned village in enemy territory where you have to fight the occasional demon patrols.\n\nWhy the Captain took this job on for the company is beyond you. Nobody really knows why. The company in general has been taking more dangerous jobs in recent years. Ever since the Nuro Incident actually. While it\u2019s always been known he\u2019s not a man to shy away from danger and has a love of battle, there\u2019s a lot of talk within ranks that he\u2019s got a death wish.\n\nThe only \u201cgood thing\u201d about this assignment, is that the chance for usual Chimera Company wicked acts are much lower. There\u2019s not many \u201cinnocents\u201d in a demon realm.\n\nAs you think about things, strumming your lute in an abandoned general store by yourself. You hear someone speak.\n\n\u201cPretty good playing. Wish my kind appreciated some of the more subtle things in life sometimes.\u201d\n\nYou turn your head and see a demon! He\u2019s not very tall and is \u201cdressed up\u201d. He must be one of the \u201ccivilized\u201d demons who realigned themselves with their demonic natures and flocked to Velzix when he took over the Tulan Kingdom. He doesn\u2019t seem hostile, but you drop your lute and draw your weapon, before you can yell a warning, he speaks again.\n\n\u201cWait! Before you go warning your friends, I should warn you that there is a very large group of my fellow kin surrounding this village. You kill me and they\u2019ll attack and quite frankly I don\u2019t fancy your chances. However I got a deal for you that can be worth your while. What can it hurt to listen to me? You can always kill me afterwards.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Listen to the demon", "result": "You aren\u2019t sure about this, but you let him speak.\n\n\u201cSpeak demon, but make it quick!\u201d you demand.\n\u201cAh, glad you\u2019re willing to be reasonable. Name\u2019s Big Red by the way.\u201d\n\u201cGet on with it!\u201d\n\u201cVery well. Your company and everyone in it is doomed to the infernal planes when they die I\u2019m afraid. You captain\u2019s deeds alone make him one of the most sought after souls in Hell. He used to be much worse before he got married, but ah well; women often make men weak like that.\u201d\n\u201cYeah? Well not me.\u201d\n\u201cHeh, yeah you too. I understand that you\u2019re probably the most moral person in it, but this whole company has been targeted by Hell and Hell gets what it wants.\u201d\n\u201cWell Velzix isn\u2019t\u2026\u201d\n\u201cVelzix? I\u2019m not talking about Velzix! Velzix is just another demon with big dick complex. If I trust my judgment he\u2019s not going to last another year in his current status, he\u2019ll probably either be dead by one of you mortals or that little Necromancer. (Sigh) Wish I\u2019d known about him sooner, things could\u2019ve been a lot\u2026different.\u201d\n\nBig Red sees that you\u2019re getting antsy so he gets to the point again.\n\n\u201cAnyway, seeing as you\u2019re all doomed to Hell, I figured it would be nice if I got direct credit for bringing you there. Bringing in evil souls yourself is one of the few things makes Hell all worth it. You get all sorts of perks. However, if I just call in the reinforcements now to have you guys get ripped from limb to limb, I won\u2019t get direct credit. The souls will just be gathered wily nily and then I gotta argue with the fucking collectors and lawyers and all that other shit about who killed who and who gets credit which will probably just result in nobody getting credit and doesn\u2019t help me out at all.\u201d\n\u201cBarring that you\u2019re saying that I\u2019m doomed in any case, I fail to see why I should help you.\u201d\n\u201cWell that\u2019s why I\u2019m coming to you with a deal. I can see you\u2019re not a bad person, you just serve a bad master, and he\u2019s the one I really want direct credit for. The rest of you are just a bonus and you in particular aren\u2019t even worth that much given your tendency towards good.\u201d\n\u201cSo what is it you want from me exactly?\u201d\n\u201cI want you to take out the sentries and distract your fellows for as long as possible while my boys sneak up on this village and strike with as little resistance as possible. To sweeten this deal, I\u2019ll try to tell my boys to not target you while you try to escape the mayhem. I\u2019m not making any promises though, killing rampages among my kind encourage indiscriminate killing. You\u2019ll be on your own; however it gives you a small chance for survival and by agreeing to this plan it gives me direct credit as the mastermind of this cunning plan. Getting other demons to kill isn\u2019t any kind of feat, but employing a mortal to help is looked upon as more favorable. So do we have a deal?\u201d\n\nBig Red offers his hand\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Make the deal", "result": "It sounds like your only chance for survival, slim though it may be. In some ways you\u2019d like to be out of this company and who are you really betraying? From what you\u2019ve seen the company is little better than the demons. You\u2019re sick of all of this, the fighting, the demons, the company, all of it.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s a deal, but make a damn good effort for your kin NOT to target me, AND not to go chasing me either!\u201d\n\u201cOkay! Sheesh, you\u2019re mistrustful. You just make sure you do your part.\u201d Big Red says and shakes your hand.\n\nYou both exit the abandoned store and you look for where most of your fellows are located. The village square of course. You know there are look outs in each of \u201ccorners\u201d of the village. You sneak about the village like an assassin and ready your bow.\n\nYou take out each sentry in relative silence with your skillful bow shots and drag their bodies into a nearby house. Now nobody will raise an alarm too soon. You then head to the village square and begin interacting with some of them. They find it odd since you\u2019re usually keeping to yourself, but they enjoy your playing so they don\u2019t mind it when you do that.\n\nYour Captain on the other hand comes out from the house he\u2019s set up in and is wondering what all the commotion is. He gets angry.\n\n\u201cWhat the fuck are you idiots doing? We\u2019re fucking deep in demon territory and you\u2019re all making enough noise to attract a damn army of them.\u201d\n\u201cWhat difference does it make? They got patrols that have come across our location before, so they know where we\u2019re at.\u201d You remark.\u201d\n\u201cThe difference is that I want you fuckers to be alert and focused if we get attacked, not getting drunk and dancing to music like some fucking sissy elf!\u201d\n\u201cAren\u2019t you married to an elf?\u201d you say still playing and backing away from the Captain\u2019s reach. He\u2019s almost in shock that you\u2019d speak to him in such manner especially since you never usually speak too much in the first place.\n\n\u201cYou, pig farmer are really pushing my patience tonight. If I didn\u2019t need all the people I can get for this job, I\u2019d kill you myself!\u201d\n\u201cShhh! I think you better shut the fuck up lute boy.\u201d One of the other mercenaries whispers.\n\u201cWhy? We\u2019re already in fucking Hell, who gives a shit how much noise we make?\u201d\n\nYou defiance gets worse and finally the Captain draws his weapon to shut you up. At this point you call him a pile of orc shit and run. This causes the rest of the mercenaries to get out his way as he charges at you. Some of them also give chase, but most just stay out of it.\n\nFortunately at this point the demons have finally gotten into position and strike. Most of the company is so bewildered by what has occurred between you and the Captain that they\u2019re unprepared. Your Captain immediately stops his pursuit of you when a particularly large demon jumps on top of him from one of the rooftops. He fights it off with the help of some of his men, but you see more coming and continue to make your escape.\n\nAs you run away from the village, a few demons pass you by and don\u2019t attack, looks like Big Red kept his word.\n\nTo a point.\n\nBig Red suddenly appears in front of you.\n\n\u201cThanks friend, now for your reward!\u201d he says and then puts his fist through your chest which kills you instantly.\n\nYou don\u2019t know how much time has passed, but you eventually hear Big Red speaking to you.\n\n\u201cGet up, I need your word.\u201d\n\u201cHuh?\u201d you say in a daze.\n\u201cDid I not get you to distract the Chimera Company in an effort to collect all their souls?\u201d\n\u201cHuh? Yeah\u2026\u201d you continue to say in a daze.\n\nYou start shaking the cobwebs and see that you\u2019re in a completely different place. A very bad place. Big Red and another much bigger demon are talking. You see the rest of your Company in the distance, naked and in chains. The entire landscape is very barren, has a reddish hue and its uncomfortably hot.\n\n\u201cOkay, you\u2019ll get credit for all these souls.\u201d\n\u201cHang on, I want to keep this one, he has certain talents and he did allow all this to happen.\u201d Big Red says pointing to you.\n\u201cVery well\u2026that\u2019s your right. Just sign there, and there, okay. Let\u2019s load these sorry souls up!\u201d\n\nBig Red looks pleased with himself as the souls are taken away.\n\n\u201cCome on, I\u2019m going to take a break.\u201d\n\nYou feel compelled to join him, but you still have questions obviously.\n\n\u201cWhat the fuck man?! I\u2019m in Hell!\u201d\n\u201cGot it in one. Excellent detective work.\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026But the deal! You broke the fucking deal! I don\u2019t belong here!\u201d\n\u201cNo I didn\u2019t. I said my fellows wouldn\u2019t harm you, not that I wouldn\u2019t. Besides YOU made a deal with me, which damned you in the first place. You definitely belong here.\u201d\n\nThe reality of this situation has now caused a massive amount of fear within you. You\u2019re in Hell and there\u2019s no escape from it! You can\u2019t even attack Big Red, he\u2019s got a permanent magical hold on you from causing him any sort of harm, though you probably wouldn\u2019t be a match for him anyway. You collapse on the ground and feel defeated. Big Red stops, but he doesn\u2019t get angry.\n\n\u201cNow what is your problem? I just saved YOUR soul from being eternally tormented by my superiors. They\u2019ll probably be eating them and shitting them out only to eat them again for who knows how long. Not a pleasant process.\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026but what are you going to do to me?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cYou? You\u2019re going to play for me at my home in the Blood Hills. Trust me, its not nearly as bloody as the name makes out.\u201d\n\u201cPlay?\u201d\n\u201cSure. I said you played pretty well, and I do appreciate such things. Music is one of my hobbies other than the whole soul collection thing of course. I\u2019ve got sheets of music from lots of places; I can\u2019t play worth a shit though. The claws don\u2019t help either. Now come on let\u2019s go.\u201d\n\nYou are finding this very odd, but you don\u2019t feel as bad now. You\u2019re Big Red\u2019s slave, but given where you\u2019re at, things could be a lot worse. You\u2019ll at least get to do something you\u2019ve always wanted to do. Play music without hindrance. You wonder about your family, but there\u2019s little that you can do for them now. You just hope things work out for them in the living world.\n\nBig Red\u2019s home isn\u2019t some giant castle, but a moderate sized house. The inside is decorated with grisly trophies, which you guess can only be considered demonic art.\n\n\u201cSinthinia! I know you\u2019re here! I can smell your scent!\u201d he calls out.\n\nA sexy female demon comes out of one of the rooms. You can\u2019t help but stare, she barely acknowledges you at all though.\n\n\u201cI\u2019ve been waiting for you Big Red, so did the deal go down well?\u201d\n\u201cWell, it could\u2019ve gone better, but it was still a good haul. So how is it really going with Velzix?\u201d\n\u201c(Sigh) He\u2019s probably going to lose as predicted. I can sense it, anyone with half a brain can. That whole world is going to eventually become a graveyard, I know it. And the undead are no fun. That\u2019s why I\u2019ve come back here.\u201d\n\u201cWell my house is your house. Let\u2019s put some music on shall we?\u201d Big Red points to you. \u201cYou, go pick up that mandolin over there and start playing that something on those music sheets I got set up. Sit over there and continue playing until I say stop which won\u2019t be anytime soon.\u201d\n\nOnce again you feel the need to comply. You do exactly as Big Red commands as he and Sinthinia head to a bedroom. He then stops to turn to you.\n\n\u201cOh, I don\u2019t know if you realized it at the soul market, but your Captain was NOT there. You know why? Because he somehow managed to fucking escape death! Now I could blame the idiots that were working for me for allowing him to escape, but I figured since I got you anyway, it would be more fun to blame you. Enjoy playing music for all eternity!\u201d he says as Sinthinia giggles and they close the door.\n\nYou don\u2019t quite understand that remark until you begin playing the mandolin. You begin to feel excruciating pain all over. Your mind is tormented with negative emotions causing you great distress as well.\n\nBig Red has made it so your greatest love which is music causes you pain.\n\nAnd you can never stop playing.\n\nAll you can do is suffer.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Decline the deal", "result": "Fuck this. He\u2019s lying and even if he isn\u2019t, making a deal with a demon is never a good idea. You\u2019ve heard the stories and you\u2019ve seen the former Tulan \u201ccitizens\u201d that debased themselves just in order to live to serve their demon masters. It never ends well.\n\nIf you are going to the infernal realm when you die, you\u2019re still not going to be helping anyone to take you there!\n\n\u201cWell, let me think about it\u2026.HEY THERE\u2019S A FUCKING DEMON ATTACK COMING!\u201d you shout at the top of your lungs. You\u2019re pretty sure at least one person heard you.\n\u201cYou asshole!\u201d Big Red growls and lunges at you which you dodge out of the way and just focus on getting back to where most of your company is making camp, yelling the whole time.\n\nUpon hearing your warning, everyone scrambles for battle. You can hear the demons bellowing in the distance. They\u2019ll be here in force soon. You quickly climb on to the village rooftops and ready your bow as the demon hordes advance all around you.\n\nThe battle wasn\u2019t as hopeless as Big Red made it seem like it would be (He must\u2019ve ran off as there was no sign of him) however, the Company does take more than the usual casualties. One of the mercenaries starts to openly complain.\n\n\u201cThis is just fucking retarded! Why the hell are we doing this shit?\u201d Cal complains.\n\u201cYou know the score; you don\u2019t like it you can leave.\u201d The Captain says calmly cleaning off his sword.\n\u201cYeah and then I don\u2019t get paid, which is when by the way? We\u2019d all like to know when this contract is over! You never did tell us!\u201d\n\u201cOh that\u2026indefinitely.\u201d\n\u201cWHAT?!\u201d almost everyone exclaims.\n\u201cLook, would you sissies calm the fuck down? We got a break coming up in a few weeks. We go back to the Zalan Empire to get paid, rest, re-equip and whatever else they got there, but after the break we go right back out here. Possibly even deeper.\u201d\n\nAt this point the whole company is turning against the Captain, he doesn\u2019t look worried though.\n\n\u201cAre you fuckin\u2019 kidding me? You\u2019re expecting us to go deeper into this shit? You\u2019re practically asking us to stand in the middle of Hell!\u201d\n\u201cDunno why you\u2019re protesting, we\u2019re all going to the real infernal plane anyway when we die, might as well get used to it. Look, take it or leave it, I don\u2019t give a shit. If you want to stay, go ahead. If you want to leave now, go ahead. If you want to leave after you get your pay, go ahead. But I\u2019m sure you know by now, if you leave don\u2019t come back ever.\u201d The Captain says and goes back to the abandoned home he was staying in.\n\nThis comment by the Captain makes you think back to Big Red\u2019s little speech, you start wondering about your future while everyone begins talking amongst themselves about what to do next. A lot of them are saying the Boss has lost his mind and is being suicidal. You can\u2019t say you disagree. In fact you\u2019re not sure you want part of this anymore. Your family might need the money, but what good are you dead to them?\n\nA few weeks pass and your company makes its way back to the Zalan Empire. You get your payment. Almost feels like you\u2019re in the \u201creal army\u201d given the formal nature of it. After you get your pay, you\u2019re on your way home where you intend to stay, much like many others are planning to do. However, you bump into the Captain who speaks to you. There\u2019s a hint of alcohol on his breath.\n\n\u201cSo can I expect you to stay on lute boy?\u201d he asks bluntly.\n\u201cErm\u2026well, no Captain. I\u2019m sorry, but going deeper into demon territory is suicide.\u201d you reply..\n\u201cProbably right, but who wants to live forever?\u201d\n\u201cWell I\u2019d like to at least live past the next year.\u201d\n\u201cHah! So you wish to die an old man in your bed?\u201d\n\u201cSounds about right.\u201d\n\u201cThen why did you take on such a dangerous line of work in the first place?\u201d\n\u201cMy family needed the money.\u201d\n\u201cAh yes, you are one of the few in the company that has one. One of the fewer still that actually takes care of them\u2026an honorable pursuit. I can respect that.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re surprised to hear the Captain praise anything that seems honorable.\n\n\u201cI have a family that I take care of too you know.\u201d\n\u201cYes, I know you are married.\u201d\n\u201cYeah\u2026but my daughter is a captain in the Zalan army. She\u2019s stationed on the Tulan border as a matter of fact. She might even get transferred to the Grand Alliance army. Don\u2019t know yet.\u201d He says with a hint of pride in his voice, though he tries his best to conceal it.\n\nThe Captain is just full of surprises. You now know that this isn\u2019t some simple death wish, but that he\u2019s taken the job to help her out in a way. You don\u2019t know, but can only imagine what growing up with a dad like him was like. You unsure of how to reply so you just follow up with something.\n\n\u201cUm, that\u2019s great Captain.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, it\u2019s great. Got a son too\u2026he\u2019s\u2026a wizard. He\u2019s a fuckin\u2019 disappointment\u2026 y\u2019know you look back on your life and you wonder what you\u2019ve accomplished and it doesn\u2019t mean shit in the scheme of things, at least not when the world has one foot in Hell and the other in the grave. But still you struggle and fight right? You still remain true to your nature.\u201d\n\u201cSure I guess so.\u201d You say wondering where the Captain going with this.\n\nThe Captain sighs heavily.\n\n\u201cI guess I\u2019m lucky\u2026killing and battle are in my nature. I get to do it every fuckin\u2019 day and it never seems to be enough, even after all the years and changes\u2026 but I bet you didn\u2019t want this shit right? You probably wanted to just play that fuckin\u2019 lute of yours right? You got a gift and its being wasted due to events out of your control\u2026but you still play that thing when you can. It\u2019s in your nature. It\u2019s also in your nature to help out your family because you care about them.\u201d\n\u201cI suppose it is.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, nature\u2026it\u2019s a fuckin\u2019 bitch.\u201d\n\nThe Captain now looks directly at you.\n\n\u201cLook I\u2019m not gonna beg ya, but you\u2019re one of the best men I got in the damn company, and I\u2019d rather not lose you, so I\u2019ll appeal to your nature. What\u2019s going on in the world today is some fucked up shit. Quite honestly I don\u2019t think it\u2019s going to end well for any of us, but you struggle and fight anyway. The financial aid that you\u2019re providing for your family pales in comparison to what you\u2019re doing in the long term. You\u2019re making the world safer for them so that they might be able to live. We got the Gates of Hell on one side and Death\u2019s Door on the other and both of them need to be fucking closed. I don\u2019t know if that makes us the so called good guys now, but all I know is if there\u2019s an active way I can protect my wife and even help my daughter then I\u2019m gonna do it. What are you going to do?\u201d\n\nThe Captain then leaves you without saying another word.\n\nSome pretty deep words for a man who you never saw as compassionate in anyway. He does make a point though. Lately what has been going in the world is pretty bad and you wonder if not fighting today will just mean putting off fighting tomorrow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay in the company", "result": "You might be a fool, but the possibility that the Captain knows what the fuck he\u2019s talking about can\u2019t be ruled out. If killing demons now is going to make life a little safer for your family in the future, then you probably should be apart of that. Same with the undead if it comes to that, though you\u2019re hoping that you don\u2019t need to. Fighting demons is bad enough, you haven\u2019t even fought any undead and the stories that your dad told you and that you\u2019ve overheard others tell still makes you dread the day that you\u2019ll actually have to.\n\nFor now though you\u2019re going home to spend time with your family and tell them all how much you love them.\n\nOne year passes\u2026\n\nFive years since the Nuro Incident and you\u2019re deep in the heart of Velzix\u2019s Realm. Guerrilla hit and run tactics and sabotage have greatly angered Velzix causing him to divert forces where he might use elsewhere. You\u2019ve even managed to sneak into his fortress a few times to sabotage his goals of creating a permanent open portal to the Infernal Planes. Something nobody wants except the demons.\n\nIt\u2019s odd, but the Chimera Company has been turned from an example of \u201cthugs for hire\u201d to \u201cHeroic warriors\u201d by the Zalan government, but then the Zalan Empire has always been a bit heavy on propaganda. The fact that the company is directly working for it, makes any politician that was remotely involved with the idea of hiring you in the first place to milk it for all its worth.\n\nThe real truth however is what\u2019s currently of the company is made up of the suicidal, desperate or the insane. You\u2019re not sure which one you are at this point, but in the eyes of the public, you\u2019re a hero. (Surprisingly Cal is still there for all his past complaining)\n\nThe Captain has been telling tales of his past life a lot more lately when sitting around the campfire. He talks about the people he\u2019s killed, the women he\u2019s raped, and the treasures he\u2019s plundered. Most of the stories you\u2019ve only heard about in rumor from others in your Company, but hearing them come from the Captain himself makes him sound even more rotten. You\u2019re sure glad you didn\u2019t know him back in the \u201cold days\u201d. He doesn\u2019t seem to show any remorse, though he doesn\u2019t really talk about it gloriously either. He just tells them as a story to pass the time between fighting, much like you do with playing your lute.\n\nEvery now and then he tells you to play something specific. Some elven song that you\u2019ve never heard before, though apparently he really wants you to play it since he gives you a crumpled piece of sheet music containing its notes.\n\nIt\u2019s a not a complex song for an Elven one, but it still takes you a few weeks to learn it completely. It would probably take you less time, but there\u2019s the demon fighting that sort of gets in the way of practice.\n\nThe first time you play it, the Captain, closes his eyes and begins to smile. You think that\u2019s the first time you\u2019ve ever seen him do that. Others in the Company are amazed as well.\n\nWith his eyes still closed he begins to speak of his family and how beautiful his wife is and how when he first met her it was love at first sight.\n\nHe then speaks of his daughter, and how proud he is of her. Her battle skills have gotten her a captain\u2019s position in Grand Alliance army. He hopes that she has many victorious battles and kills all those that stand before her without mercy.\n\nHe is silent for awhile as you play\u2026then he speaks of his son is much harsher tone.\n\n\u201cA disappointment\u2026a fucking disappointment. Fucked up somewhere\u2026wasn\u2019t hard enough on him. Now look at this shit we\u2019re in\u2026demons, undead\u2026fuck it. If I\u2019m bound for the Infernal Plane for bringing destruction to the world then I\u2019m gonna give those bastard demons a good reason for torturing the shit outta me when I get there. Namely by killing a shitload of them and fucking up their plans as much as possible. Just hope my necromancer spawn is eventually there right beside me getting tortured as well.\u201d\n\nYou temporarily stop playing at this outburst by the Captain. Others in the Company are looking and whispering to each other. Did he just allude to what you think he did?\n\n\u201cWhat he fuck are you doin\u2019? I didn\u2019t say stop playing!\u201d\n\nYou quickly return to playing and nothing more is spoken of it. As it happens the song is one of the last things you play. Your lute is destroyed in a battle a couple days later. You curse as one of the few things that took your mind off this shitty place is gone. You just hope you live long enough to buy a new one.\n\nA few more weeks pass and what wasn\u2019t spoken of, makes an appearance\u2026\n\nTwo of the lookouts run back to the main camp one day and rush into the Captain\u2019s tent. You can hear them babbling something about son, and death and doomed. You then hear him yelling at them to shut the fuck up and speak clearly. The rest of the Company starts to pick up there weapons as if expecting something to go down and you follow suit and that\u2019s when you look in the direction where the sentries ran from and see a lone hooded figure.\n\nNone of you don\u2019t know how to react. Every instinct in everyone is telling them to attack, but the aura of power and fear he\u2019s giving off is very strong. Almost paralyzing.\n\nJust then the Captain comes out of his tent and speaks.\n\n\u201cBoy, you gotta a lot of balls showing up here before me. Didn\u2019t think you had \u2018em either. Figured you\u2019d be hiding in some tower somewhere.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, well sometimes you have to do things yourself.\u201d\n\nWeird. He doesn't sound at all like you thought he would.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack now", "result": "You know who the hell this is, it\u2019s the Necromancer Lord. You\u2019re never going to get a better chance than now to kill him and put an end to some of the madness that\u2019s going on. You muster up all your courage and quickly raise your bow.\n\n\u201cNo! Wait you dumbfuck\u2026\u201d the Captain yells trying to stop you.\n\nYou arrow flies straight towards the Necromancer Lord, but it doesn\u2019t even reach him, a magical shield causes it to bounce off harmlessly. However your actions cause the Necromancer Lord to react defensively and he unleashes a ray of pure black energy which drains you of your life force entirely.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wait", "result": "You know who the hell this is, it\u2019s the Necromancer Lord. Even if you are fast enough to get a shot at him, you doubt the arrow is going to connect. He\u2019s probably got all kinds of magical shields to protect him for whatever it is he\u2019s here for. You begin looking for your best route of escape and slowly start backing away.\n\nThe Captain on the other hand speaks directly to his son. He doesn\u2019t even show any fear. They speak for a moment and things get very tense, you\u2019re about ready to run, but things take a sudden turn for the very strange.\n\nThe Necromancer Lord has proposed a temporary alliance to assassinate Velzix. The Captain is hesitant about this at first, but an agreement is made on payment and he accepts.\n\nThe Captain then informs all of you in more detail of what\u2019s going on.\n\n\u201cAlright men, we\u2019re gonna go storm the Gates of Hell and close those fuckers for good. My\u2026son there is going to provide magical support. He\u2019s also going to be providing a shitload of money for this job. The stipulation is we can\u2019t tell ANYBODY about this shit. I\u2019m fucking serious. Word gets out that we were working with the fucking Necromancer Lord, we\u2019ll all be hanged, regardless of so called heroic deeds of killing demons. We\u2019re all in this together and there ain\u2019t no backing out, because this deal is made. And if you think you\u2019re gonna step out on me now, that ain\u2019t in the plan. I\u2019ll just kill you and have my son raise your undead ass to help us anyway!\u201d\n\u201cWhat?! You just decided this for us?\u201d Cal exclaims.\n\u201cYeah? What of it? I\u2019ve ALWAYS made all the decisions for your dumb ass! It\u2019s why YOU\u2019RE still working for me, because it\u2019s lucrative! This ain\u2019t gonna be any different. Plus we get to take fucking credit for killing a damn demon lord. Think of all the pussy you\u2019ll get from that fucking fame eh? Now stop bitching and let\u2019s go!\u201d\n\nYou can\u2019t say you\u2019re enthusiastic about this, but it would appear you have little choice in the matter.\n\nAs you travel to Velzix\u2019s fortress you overhear some of the conversations the Captain is having with his son. A strained relationship to be sure. They make a lot of cutting barbs to each other, each criticizing the other for various things. It\u2019s obvious that they can\u2019t stand each other, but are a lot more alike than either one wants to admit.\n\nIt makes you glad when you encounter the occasional demon skirmish on the way, since it at least it decreases the tension and possibility that the Captain\u2019s son is going to finally lose his temper and kill everyone due to his father\u2019s words. Eventually you arrive without any more problems. You enter Velzix\u2019s fortress through the secret way that was discovered long ago.\n\n\u201cDumb ass demons, we\u2019ve been using this entrance for like a year now and they still haven\u2019t caught on!\u201d the Captain remarks to his son.\n\nYou make good progress in the fortress and then\u2026\n\n\u201cThere they are, just like Velzix said they would be!\u201d a demon guard shouts.\n\n\u201cHaven\u2019t caught on yet huh?\u201d the Necromancer Lord says, looking at the Captain.\n\u201cQuit yer bitchin\u2019 and start doin that death magic thing!\u201d\n\nYou proceed to do battle with the demon and mortal guards that attempt to stop you. The Necromancer Lord starts to raise the mortal guards after they\u2019re killed, but it begins to unnerve you though when the Necromancer Lord starts raising your own fallen dead.\n\nPretty soon it\u2019s just the Necromancer Lord, the Captain, you, Cal and a bunch of corpses fighting off what seems to be an endless supply of Hell\u2019s own. You begin to wonder if Velzix already got that portal working.\n\nAs you get closer to Velzix\u2019s inner sanctum even the undead troops are being decimated at an alarming rate. You\u2019ve been wounded several times and extremely tired. You don\u2019t want to think about any of this, even in the heat of battle you start to take your mind elsewhere with a tune inside your head.\n\n\u201cFuck man! We\u2019re gonna die here!\u201d Cal screams as he attempts to fight a horned demon which has obviously got the advantage over him. You feel a demon blade in your back causing you to fall to the floor. At this point nothing but music fills your mind; bloodshed and battle surround your prone body.\n\n\u201cFuckers are without end! Come on! Raise these fuckers and let\u2019s go!\u201d you hear the Captain yell followed by \u201cHah, no lying down on the job anymore Cal!\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re not quite dead yet though, and the Necromancer Lord and his dad aren\u2019t waiting around so they continue on quickly leaving you behind.\n\nAs your life force ebbs and more demon guards run past your body, you don\u2019t know if what you did was worth it or even the right thing. All you know is you did what you could and hope your actions may have made some sort of difference and increased the chances of your family\u2019s future well being.\n\nYou then smile. You\u2019ll see them again someday.\n\n\u201cYeah\u2026I believe that\u2026\u201d you allow yourself to think as you die.\n\nBig Red was wrong about your fate. There was no Hell, just peace.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Leave the company", "result": "Whatever the Captain is \u201cgoing through\u201d doesn\u2019t involve you. You\u2019ve got your own concerns. If the world events get so bad that they reach your doorstep, then you deal with it then, but risking your life to the extent of going deep into the heart of demon territory isn\u2019t what you signed up for.\n\nYou head home and tell your family that it\u2019s permanent this time. You explain your reasons and apologize that you won\u2019t be bringing in all the extra money like you used to. They aren\u2019t mad though, your mom is actually relieved.\n\n\u201cWell son, I\u2019m just as glad you didn\u2019t go get yourself killed over there anyway. You\u2019ll be helping us out plenty just by working on the farm like always.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re glad to hear that. Over the next couple days you fall back into routine again. You still wonder about the future though and you briefly consider the army, but you\u2019re a little weary of battle on a regular basis now.\n\nYou resign yourself to the farm life. You play your lute to yourself (and family) when you have the time to do so. It\u2019s a simple life.\n\nAnother year passes and things are getting bad. War is everywhere. The Demons have been taken care of, (You heard your former mercenary captain died in battle with their leader Velzix) but the undead are stronger than ever. Reports even speak of the Necromancer Lord becoming The Great Lich Lord \u201creborn\u201d.\n\nTo make things worse, the Zalan Empire has been becoming increasingly tyrannical. In order to help with the war effort they\u2019ve started bringing back the draft and the talk of ceasing private property to be used for the good of the government. While they say owners will be able to live and still work on their lands and businesses, it will be owned by the Empire.\n\nYou know it\u2019s only a matter of time when you get a knock on the door by Zalan army troops coming to take you (Especially you given your prior battle experience) and your brother Mallack away to the army and your family\u2019s farm.\n\nAnother two year pass\u2026\n\nYou\u2019re on the eve of battle in a land known as the Garwold Confederacy although it\u2019s steadily becoming a giant graveyard now. The undead hordes have been sweeping relentlessly across the entire landscape. Your own company has had to fall back several times. Morale is low. Not that yours was high to begin with. You don\u2019t even know how you\u2019ve survived this long. While you had lots of battle experience during your time with the mercenary company, you\u2019ll never get used to fighting the undead. They are such emotionless creatures that are the embodiment of death and all that\u2019s unnatural.\n\nYou briefly wonder if your brother Mallack is alright where he\u2019s stationed, but it hardly matters at this point.\n\nBattle comes as it always does and you are not so lucky this time. Horrible and powerful creatures known as Blood Specters and Death Knights utterly destroy your side.\n\nYou put up a more valiant effort than most, but eventually you fall to undead blades and chilling touches only rise up and join them in their goal of global genocide.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Attack him", "result": "You don\u2019t waste time, you just attack! Unfortunately the demon is more than he appears and easily dodges your attack. You don\u2019t have time to turn and react again when he\u2019s tripped you up and put his fist in your face causing your nose to explode into a mass of blood. You\u2019re dazed.\n\n\u201c(Sigh) And here I thought you were the reasonable one of this bunch. Nevermind.\u201d The demon says.\n\nHe follows up with another fist to your face. This one goes through your head killing you instantly.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Go back home", "result": "If this how it was on your first day, you\u2019d hate to think about if you had to deal with this on a regular basis.\n\n\u201cUh\u2026no, maybe I was wrong. Bye.\u201d You say and quickly take off.\n\u201cHeh, pig farmer don\u2019t have no stomach for it\u2026Dibs on Foremeli\u2019s shit!\u201d you hear Dimitri yell.\n\nWhen you get back home, your family and mom in particular ask what happened, you explain it and say you don\u2019t want any part of that life. You apologize that you couldn\u2019t go through with it, but your mom looks more relieved than anything.\n\n\u201cWell son, I\u2019m just as glad you didn\u2019t join up with that lot anyway. You\u2019ll be helping us out plenty just by working on the farm like always.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re glad to hear that. Over the next couple days you fall back into routine again. You still wonder about the future though and you briefly consider the army plan again, but given your short lived experience with mercenary \u201clife\u201d you don\u2019t think you\u2019re cut out with battle on a regular basis. Plus the Zalan Empire is currently having really bad border skirmish with the Tulan Kingdom right now.\n\nYou resign yourself to the farm life. You play your lute to yourself (and family) when you have the time to do so. It\u2019s a simple life.\n\nA year passes and a terrible incident occurs at a far away city known as Nuro. A group of rogue wizards summoned an army of the dead to take it over. They also summoned a lot of demons that have broken free and running rampant now in the Tulan Kingdom. It\u2019s all far away from you, but something like this is pretty serious. Necromancy and Demon summoning is strictly forbidden throughout the land.\n\nMeanwhile life on the farm is going the same as it ever did. Hard sometimes, but manageable.\n\nAnother two years pass and things have gotten worse. The Necromancer Lord (as he\u2019s become to be known) has expanded, even to the point of taking over the Brot Kingdom. The Tulan Kingdom has been totally conquered by a demon army. A Grand Alliance of nations has been formed, but so far they don\u2019t seem to be making much progress.\n\nMeanwhile life on the farm is a little harder. Your youngest sister Makana becomes gravely ill during the winter months, but there\u2019s not enough money to pay for a healer and most of the clerics have been summoned to battle with the undead or demon hordes. Sadly she dies making the overall mood of the farm a little more depressing. You don\u2019t even play anymore, your enthusiasm for music died along with the grim realities setting in.\n\nAnother three years pass and things are down right miserable. War is everywhere. The Demons have been taken care of, but the undead are stronger than ever. Reports even speak of the Necromancer Lord becoming The Great Lich Lord \u201creborn\u201d. You remember hearing tales by your father of such a being that existed centuries ago. They scared the hell out of you then and the fact that you\u2019re living in a time where he\u2019s returned makes you feel doomed.\n\nTo make things worse, the Zalan Empire has been becoming increasingly tyrannical. In order to help with the war effort they\u2019ve started bringing back the draft and the talk of ceasing private property to be used for the good of the government. While they say owners will be able to live and still work on their lands and businesses, it will be owned by the Empire.\n\nYou know it\u2019s only a matter of time when you get a knock on the door by Zalan army troops coming to take you and your brother Mallack away to the army and your family\u2019s farm.\n\nAnother two year pass\u2026\n\nYou\u2019re on the eve of battle in a land known as the Garwold Confederacy although it\u2019s steadily becoming a giant graveyard now. The undead hordes have been sweeping relentlessly across the entire landscape. Your own company has had to fall back several times. Morale is low. Not that yours was high to begin with. You don\u2019t even know how you\u2019ve survived this long. You didn\u2019t even have that much military training when they threw you into you first battle a year ago. It was a terrifying experience and you still have nightmares about it. The undead\u2026you\u2019ll never get used to fighting such emotionless creatures that are the embodiment of death and all that\u2019s unnatural.\n\nYou briefly wonder if your brother Mallack is alright where he\u2019s stationed, but it hardly matters at this point.\n\nBattle comes as it always does and you are not so lucky this time. Horrible and powerful creatures known as Blood Specters and Death Knights utterly destroy your side.\n\nYou fall to undead blades and chilling touches only rise up and join them in their goal of global genocide.", "action_results": []}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story26.json b/data/scraper/stories/story26.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a388167 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story26.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=22", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Please read this disclaimer before continuing ...\n\nDISCLAIMER\nThe Fairview Highschool Game is pure fiction. The name \"Fairview\" was chosen as it is a very popular name for high schools and is not intended to represent any one high school. Also, all of the situations, locations, and characters in the game are fictional. Any likeness or resemblance to persons, places, or anything else is strictly coincidental.", "action_results": [{"action": "Play The Game!", "result": "*BEEP*BEEP*BEEP*BEEP*\n\nIt's 6:30am. What are you going to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Wake up and go to school", "result": "You decide to wake up and go to school.\n\nYou arrive at school, and, of course, it is first period. Thanks to the wonderfully logical F.H.S. scheduling, you have a study hall. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay in study hall", "result": "You decide to stay in study hall.\nAs you sit innocently in study hall, some one wearing a \"Fairview Cult\" tee-shirt slips you the Fairview Cult Bulletin. After you read it, he asks you if you would like to join the Fairview Cult. What do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Say \"Hook me up!\"", "result": "You decide to join the Fairview Cult.\nAs you say the words, \"Yeah, I'll join,\" you feel the air part around you and it seems as if a very heavy burden is just lifted off of your shoulders.\n\nMoments later, the second period bell rings. You pick up your things and leave for your next class.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue ...", "result": "Congratulations! You made it to second period! Acording to your schedule, you have Foreign Language Class now.\n\nDuring the first few minutes of second period, the highschool morning annoucments are played. The morning anouncers comes on the TV and give the usual, boring announcments. They remind everyone that today is a pep-rally and that the student council ellection winners will be officially crowned today.\n\nThe announcments end, and class begins. What would you like to do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Pay Attention", "result": "You decide to pay attention.\n\nThe teacher starts off by teaching some foreign language: \"Das es muy bueno y par le vue.\"\n\nAfter a few minutes of that, he tells the class a cool story about how he was almost involved in a drive-by shooting. Then, he goes on about civil issues, such as gun control.\n\nWhat do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Disagree and start an argument", "result": "You decide to disagree because your a pansy liberal.\n\nYou infuriate the teacher, and he procedes to rip down the overhead projection screen. He then cracks you upside the head with it, breaking your cranium.\n\nNever Argue with a language teacher.", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to end the game", "result": "Well, it loos like you just couldn't cut it as an FHS student. Better luck next time.\nYour final score is: 017", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Agree and nod your head and go to sleep", "result": "You decide to go to sleep.\nThe teacher wakes you up with a note to go to the office. Mr. Greenwall, the associate principal, wants to talk to you.\n\nWhat do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Go down to the office", "result": "You decide to go to the office.\nWhat would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the direct route", "result": "You decide to take the direct route.\n\nAs you walk down the hall, worried about what the Associate Principal could possibly want, you are trampled by a herd of junior high swine passing through the highschool, going to their music class. You lie there bloody and gasping for help. You fade away and die.\n\nYou should have taken the scenic route, retard.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Take the scenic route", "result": "You decide to take the scenic route.\nWhat would you like to do on your way to the office:", "action_results": [{"action": "Look in the costume room", "result": "You decide to look in the costume room.\n\nLooking through all the various clothes, you see this dress that reminds you of your mother's wedding dress. You think it looks really cool and it seems to be your size, so you try it on.\n\nAs you are putting it on, Adam O'Mallady opens the door to the costume room sees you in the dress. Mistaking you for a queer, he starts bashing your head in with his Marine Corp boots. As your life fades to black, you hear death metal in the backround.\n\nMan, you suck.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Look in the janitors' closet", "result": "You decide to look in the janitor's closet\n\nYou open up the door labeled \"JANITOR\" and walk in. You see some brooms, dustpans, a coffe mug that says \"Mmmmm Janitor Java\", and a large, black void is sucking you in. As you enter the void, you pass through time, forward and backward in an endless loop for eternity. You see E=MC2 and melting clocks.\n\nSo what exactly did you think you would find in a janitors' closet?", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stop by the art room", "result": "You decide to stop by the art room.\n\nYou see a few people you know hanging out in the art room: Joe Barney (the All-American of Fairview Park), Number 2, and Number 3 (both from the Fairview Cult). What do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Say hi to the All-American of Fairview Park, Joe Barney", "result": "You decide to say hi to the All-American of Fairview Park, Joe Barney.\n\nAs you do that, Number 3 of the Fairview Cult hands you the Fairview Cult Bulletin. What you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Say \"Thanks, I've already seen it\" and go on your way", "result": "You walk in the office and are told to take a seat and wait. While sitting and waiting, you give the hot student office aide a wink. Finally, the secretary tells you that Mr. Greenwall will see you now.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue ...", "result": "Mr. Greenwall gives you a stern look and tells you to take a seat. As you sit down and put your arms on the armrests, cold metal cuffs pop out and lock your hands and feet to the chair. Mr Greenwall begins to speak:\n\n\"I know that you are a member of the Fairview Cult. First, you need to sign this form. Here, you don't need to read it, all it states is that you understand that you are down in the office.\"\n\nHe twitches his neck and one of the clamps on your arm releases so you can sign the form.\n\nWhat do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Sign the form", "result": "The moment after you put your John Handcock on the carbon-copy form, you hear a demonic laughter coming from behind you, and see Mrs. Fuddmeadow and a few other teachers walking in.\n\nYou read the form you just signed and realize you just agreed to a 15-day \"special\" in-school suspension. Mr. Greenwall says:\n\n\"You have given up all of your human rigts to me. I will destroy you and your precious Fairview Cult and turn you all in to drones!\"\n\nThen, he twitches his neck again and the chair you are strapped to falls through a trap door in the floor. As you crash on the level below, you hear Mr. Greenwall say \"Let the Brainwashing begin.\"\n\nMoments later, FHS drones tie you up and tape your eyes open to force you to watch propoganda prom and football videos.\n\nYou are dead, but only on the inside. You are now an FHS drone. Have fun setting up the cafeteria for dances ... for eternity.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Refuse to sign the form", "result": "Mr. Greenwall grunts and says:\n\n\"Fine. We can take care of this form later. So tell me, I keep hearing things about this \"Fairview Cult.\" Please, fill me in. I want to know more.\"\n\nWhat do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell him everything, but say you aren't a member", "result": "You start explain to Mr. Greenwall what the Fairview Cult is, but that say you are not a member. He nods his head and the restraints open to let you go. As you walk out of the office, Dominic Republican and The Scarecrow, both from the 440 rap group, gang up on you for ratting out the Fairview Cult.\n\nThe Scarecrow grabs both of your arms and rips them right off your body, then uses them for himeself, tossing his old arms on the floor. Next, Dominic rips out your soul, laughing, and puts it in a jar. You spend the next 10,000 years alone in this small, dark jar until the rubber seal finally decomposes.\n\nSniff Sniff. I smell a rat!", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to end the game", "result": "Please read this disclaimer before continuing ...\n\nDISCLAIMER\nThe Fairview Highschool Game is pure fiction. The name \"Fairview\" was chosen as it is a very popular name for high schools and is not intended to represent any one high school. Also, all of the situations, locations, and characters in the game are fictional. Any likeness or resemblance to persons, places, or anything else is strictly coincidental.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Look At Your Schedule", "result": "", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Get Some Hints", "result": "Period 1: Join what ever you are asked to join.\n\nPeriod 2: Scenery is nice. Listen to what King Wah has to say.\n\nPeriod 3: Impressing the teacher is not always the best thing to do.\n\nPeriod 4: Listen to the words of Jon Videc and check out the posters.\n\nPeriod 5: You can't go down the stairs, find another way. Talk to the right people and remember their advise.\n\nPeriod 6: Just...be careful\n\nPeriod 7: NO HINTS AVAILABLE", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Say \"A cult in Fairview? That sounds terrible!\"", "result": "Mr. Greenwall gives a stern look and shouts:\n\n\"You know exactly what the Fairview Cult is! DO NOT WASTE MY TIME! TELL ME ABOUT THE CULT, NOW!\"\n\nYou feel the cuffs around your hands and feet tightening. What do you do:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Smile and say, with a smirk \"Like I said, I don't know anything\"", "result": "Mr. Greenwall smiles and sighs. In a very calm and almost soothing voice, he says:\n\n\"Listen, there is nothing wrong with just telling me about the cult. The Fairview Cult is a very bad thing. Just tell me what you know so you can help the people in it. All we want to do is help.\"\n\nWhat do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell him that no one is in real trouble as it is just a big joke", "result": "You tell him how the Fairview Cult is nothing but a big joke; you are a member, and every one is just having fun and joking around. After you finish explaining, Mr. Greenwall says:\n\n\"A joke? I find nothing at all funny about a cult at all! I will destroy you and your precious Fairview Cult and turn you all to drones!\"\n\nThen, he twitches his neck again and the chair you are strapped to falls through a trap door in the floor. As you crash on the level below, you hear Mr. Greenwall say \"Let the Brainwashing begin.\"\n\nMoments later, FHS drones tie you up and tape your eyes open to force you to watch propoganda prom and football videos.\n\nYou are dead, but only on the inside. You are now an FHS drone. Have fun setting up the cafeteria for dances ... for eternity.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Angrily say, \"Sir, I would really like to get back to class. I don't have all day\"", "result": "As you say that, Mr. Greenwall's face turns bright red. He twitches his neck and you feel the hand and feet claps tightening, just about crushing you. He glances over at the window and nods his head; the window shades close and give the room a scary, dark feel. He says in a very angry and frusterated voice:\n\n\"LISTEN UP. I AM GOING TO GIVE YOU ONE MORE CHANCE. IF YOU DO NOT TELL ME NOW, I AM GOING TO TELL YOUR MOTHER AND SUSPEND YOU. DO NOT WASTE ANY MORE OF MY TIME!\"\n\nYou are in extreme agony from the clamps. What do you do:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Shrug your shoulders, say \"What Fairview Cult?\"", "result": "Mr Greenwall's eyes grow, and you can see flames in his pupils. He starts to grit his teeth and you can feel the ground shaking. All of a sudden, the third period bell rings.\n\nHe growls and, in an instant, the shades open and the clasps release you and fold back back into the chair. You get up massage your wrists.\n\nOn your way out of his office, you wish Mr. Greenwall the best of luck finding out what he wants to about the Fairview Cult.\n\nYou head toward your next class.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue ...", "result": "For third period you have gym class with Mrs. Fuddmeadow, so you stroll into class five minutes after the bell rings because you know you can. You are in the locker room. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk to your buds about your latest alchohol consumption", "result": "You decide to talk to your buds about your latest alcohol consumption.\n\nAs you start talking about all the booze you had for breakfast, you start feeling very woozie. Your friends help you to the bench and lay you down, but walk away and will not touch you as soon as you start to splurge up your Budweiser.\n\nThey all laugh at you while you die, choking on your own vomit. The last words you hear are, \"Huh huh, that kid can't hold his beer!\"\n\nNote for future: beer does not go with corn flakes and codine.", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to end the game", "result": "Well, I gues you couldn't cut it in the life of a FHS student. Better luck next time.\nYour final score is: 031", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Put on your gym clothes", "result": "You decide to put on your gym clothes.\n\nYou change into your FHS Gym Uniform and head off to class. You sit down in your proper warmup squadron and Mrs. Fuddmeadow, your gym teacher, tells the class to start warmups. You first start with push-ups. What do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Impress the cute girl/guy next to you and do them as fast as you can", "result": "You decide to do pushups as fast as you can.\n\nYou move your body up an down at amazing speeds - it must be an adreneline rush. After your 58th push up, your elbow joints snap and your spinal column gives away. From the sheer momentum of your pushup speed, your head shatters on the ground as it crashes down. Blood splurts everwhere as your brains slowly ooze out of your crushed head. You die.\n\nDid you forget you had a severe case of arthritis? Whoops.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Do as little as possible with the least amount of effort", "result": "You decide to do as little as possible with the least amount of effort\n\nYou lazily finish your pushups and other warmups, making sure to put effort into it only when the teacher is watching. Mrs. Fuddmeadow announces that, because of the Pep Rally later today, it is a free day. You can play just about any sport. What do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Go swimming in the pool", "result": "You decide to go to the swimming pool\n\nYou quickly change into your swimming suit and go into to the swimming pool. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Swim in the deep end", "result": "You decide to swim in the deep end\n\nYou dive right into the cold, slimy water. You pop your head out of the water, push your wet hair back, and fling off a piece of algee that was stuck to your hand.\n\nYou remember reading in the Fairview Cult Bulletin that there is a Fairview Cult logo on the bottom of the pool, so you go down to check it out. As you go near the bottom of the pool, your foot gets sucked in the broken drain vent. You strugle around and try to free but have no luck. After a few minutes, you take a huge gasp of water in and drown. You die.\n\nAt least you know how long you can, er could, hold your breath.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Swim in the shallow end", "result": "You decide to swin in the shallow end\n\nYou jump in the shallow end like you've always jumped in the shallow end -- head first. This time, however, you jump a little too quickly and smash your head against the nice, hard pool bottom. Your head splits right open and turns the pool a nice red color and little as bits of your brain float to the top. You die.\n\nFor future reference: \"No Diving In Shallowe End\" means no diving in shallow end.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Swim in the middle end", "result": "You decide to swim in the middle end\n\nYou are jump in the pool and chill out in the middle end, treading water. You hear a loud \"Aiiieeee!\" and turn around just in time to see a gigantic wrestler from the Fairview Wrestling Federation do canonball right on top of you. The impact snaps your kneck and your paralized body sinks to the bottom of the pool. You die.\n\nDuh! There is no middle \"end\" -- it is just the middle!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Look at the cold, murky, cess pool and then decide not to go in because you don't feel like it, it's early in the morning, it's GROSS, and so on.", "result": "You decide to try somemthing else.\n\nWhat would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Play some basketball", "result": "You decide to play some basketball\n\nYou walk over to the court and see a bunch of people running up and trying to slam dunk the ball. No one has been able to to it yet. Johnny Jimclass is up next and is getting ready to go for it.\n\nWhat do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Trip Johnny as he tries to slam dunk", "result": "You decide to trip Johnny as he tries to slam dunk\n\nEver so innocently, you extend your foot just as Johnny Jimclass runs towards the basket. He trips over your foot, flies a few feet in the air, and crashes face down on the ground.\n\nInfuriated, he gets up and grabs the basketball. He whips the basketball as hard as he can, nearly approaching the speed of sound. You hear the ball whiz right past your head. The ball flies past you, bounces off the wall, and hits Mrs. Fuddmeadow smack dab in the forehead. She falls backwards and hits the ground.\n\nJohnny Jimclass flees the scene. What would you like to do now:", "action_results": [{"action": "Pick up a ball and \"accidentally\" hit Mrs. Fuddmeadow wth it", "result": "You decide to pick up a ball and \"accidentally\" hit Mrs. Fuddmeadow\n\nYou grab one of the basketballs and look over to your friend standing in the corner. You yell out his name, and whip it at him. You must have slightly miscalculated, as the ball flies right over to Mrs. Fuddmeadow and hits her right in the back of the head. She falls to the ground. What do you do now:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Grab a ball and go for the slam dunk", "result": "You decide to grab a ball and go for the slam dunk\n\nYou pick up a basketball and ready yourself to go for the big dunk. All of the basketball jocks cheer you on. You run up to the basket as fast as you can, jump as high as you can, and ... you actually make it!\n\nYou land on your feet, but then slip on a puddle of sweat, and crash face first to the floor. You feel your jawbone SNAP and can taste loose teeth in your mouth.\n\nAs you are about to get up, you hear the jocks cheearing again, and you see Johnny Jimclass going for the slam dunk, missing, and lands right on your chest, collapsing it. Everything fades to black as you struggle to take your last breath. You die.\n\nTsk Tsk Tsk. Show off!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Try to talk trash like the basket ball jocks", "result": "You decide to try to talk trash like the basketball jocks\n\nYou start quoting the Nike commercials and a few lines from White Men Can't Jump. But, while laying down some Yo Mamma jokes, you offend one of the Suburban Gangster Wannabees. Angrilly, he pulls out his \"piece,\" a pocket knife that he got in his Christmas stocking from his dad, and cuts you bad. You die.\n\nThat's the last Yo' Mamma joke you'll ever tell", "action_results": [null]}, null]}, null, null, null]}, null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Sit and talk with your friends", "result": "You notice Number 13 and Jerry Pimpavelli, another cult buddie, is sitting aroud doing nothing. You go up to them and join in the slacking. Number 13 is talking about how unfair he thinks the school elections were and how he thinks they were fixed. After a few minutes, Mrs. Fuddmeadow tells you to do something -- you can't just sit around and talk!\n\nWhat to do now:", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Tell Mrs. Fuddmeadow you are sick", "result": "You decide to tell Mrs. Fuddmeadow you are sick\n\nYou walk up to her and tell her you have an awful stomach ache. She says, \"Hmmmm. You might want to see the nurse.\"\n\nShe gives you a pass to go see the school nurse. What would you like to do now.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go directly to the nurse's office", "result": "You decide to go to the nurse's office\n\nYou walk past the main office, past Mr. Greenwall's office, and into the nurse's office. The secretary tells you that the nurse will be back real soon. You sit in the nurse's office and look around. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Play with the tounge depressors", "result": "You decide to play with the tounge depressors\n\nYou open up the glass jar of tounge depressors and take a handful of them. Then, you try to flick one in the garbage can. You miss. You try again, and again, and again, until finally, on the eigth toss, you make it.\n\nNext, you make a little \"tounge depressor pyramid\" on the counter and then knock it down by throwing one at it.\n\nFifteen minutes later, the bell rings and the nurse never came. You throw the remaining twenty-four depressors in the garbage and leave for lunch.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue ...", "result": "Lunch Time!\n\nYou walk by the cafeteria, smelling burnt food permeating through out the hallway, and look in to see all of your friends. You saunter in, avoiding a spilled pop mess left by the junior high school swine, and think of what you should do before you go to sit down to your lunch table. The lunch period seems to be moving especially slow today, normally it is half over by now.\n\nWhat would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Go sit down at your lunch table", "result": "You decide to go sit down at your lunch table\n\nYou go to sit down, but notice that some one, most likely junior high school swine, either spilled chicken fajita or puked up all over the chair. Whatever it is, you are not going to sit on it. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Stand around by your table", "result": "You decide to stand around your table\n\nAfter a few seconds of standing there, one of the lunch ladies yells at you for standing. You have to either sit down or keep moving. What to do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go look for a chair", "result": "You decide to go look for another chair\n\nYou walk to a few adjacent tables and attempt to grab a chair, but a snotty Fairview High School student yells at you and says \"some one is sitting there\".\n\nYou have no luck and return to your table. Your seat still has an icky mess on it. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Keep looking for a chair", "result": "You decide to keep looking for a chair\n\nYou walk around the cafeteria some more, but turn up nothing. You return to your table and see your seat still has an icky mess on it. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Roam around the cafeteria", "result": "You decide to roam around the cafeteria\n\nYou wave to John, the Cafeteria worker, as he is asking a student to stack his tray lunch tray neatly. Number 873 is handing out Sour Patches candy to people because today is \"Fairview Cult Day\". There's all sorts of stuff to do in the cafeteria. Where would you like to wander to:", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the army recruiter", "result": "You decide to go to the army recruiter\n\nThe army guy has a shaved head and doesn't seem to be happy. He looks tough and he's got the eyes of a drone. As you approach, he greets you with \"Hi! I've once went to Fairview! Would you like to join the Army?!?\" Next to the army guy, you see a Fairview Cult recruiter sitting, giving free teeshirts to new members. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab a bunch of army bumper stickers", "result": "You decide to grab a bunch of army bumper stickers\n\nHe says \"Hey son! So, you're interested in the army, huh?\" He gets real close to your face, smiling he shouts \"THE ARMY IS A GREAT PLACE TO GO!\" He flings specs of salivia in your face while he talks. What do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Sign me up! I want to be the best that I can be!", "result": "You decide to act like you care and want to join the army\n\nHe says \"What your name, son?\" You tentaively give him your name and he laughs and says \"Ho! Ho! Ho! Welcome to the army, son! Your life will be nothing like ... army, army, army, army!\"\n\nBefore you know it, another army guy comes in and escorts you away saying \"Congratulations, army, army, army, army, army...\"\n\nThere is nothing left for you to do except army.\n\nWell atleast you get to sleep in till 5:00AM on sunday. Nice drill seargent.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Ask him if he's ever been in a conspiracy or heard of them", "result": "You decide to ask him if he's ever been in a conspiracy\n\nHe replies to you:\n\"No! There is no such thing! I was not used as a lab rat in vietnam! Nor was I given large amounts of brainwashing drugs! All those movies are false! Deny everything! Deny everything! NO NO NO!!! Deny NONONO Deny Deny Everything\"\n\nHe twitches a bit then asks \"Anything other questions, son?\"", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Ask him if he's believes in the commandment \"Thou shalt not kill\"", "result": "You decide to ask him if believes in \"Thou shalt not kill\"\n\nHe stumbles around and replies:\n\n\"But..um...uh...yeah. Of course I do!\" He has a vacant expression and just stares into space. What would you like to do now:", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Say \"Do I get to use a gun and kill people?\"", "result": "You decide to ask if you get a gun and get to kill people\n\nHe yells: \"Of course you do, son! Oh yeah, POP POW! BANG! It is the most is the most exciting thing of your life! You get a double barrel shot gun BOOM put a big old hole the size of a bowling ball in someone!\"\n\nWhat do you do:", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}, null]}, null, null]}, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Take some army propoganda", "result": "You decide to grab a bunch of army propoganda\n\nHe says \"Hey son! So, you're interested in the army, huh?\" He gets real close to your face, smiling he shouts \"THE ARMY IS A GREAT PLACE TO GO!\" He flings specs of salivia in your face while he talks. What do you do:", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, null]}, null]}, {"action": "Go to the pop and vending machines", "result": "There are three vending machines in the cafeteria. What one would you like to look at:", "action_results": [{"action": "The Candy / Snacks Machine", "result": "You decide to go to the candy / snacks machine\n\nYou see the same old stuff in the machine. What would you like to buy?", "action_results": [{"action": "Rice crispies treat", "result": "You decide to buy something\n\nYou plop three quarters in the machine, press the corresponding button ... and that's it. Nothing comes out. You just got ripped off! What would you like to do:", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Read the posters around the cafeteria", "result": "You walk over to the bulletin board and see five posters hanging up. You happen to glance at the clock and notice that no time has passed since you have arrive in the cafeteria. What would you like to read?", "action_results": [{"action": "Bill Murrry Poster", "result": "BILL MURRY Playing at Speak In Tounges! Only $5\n\n\nYou should take your GRANDMA.\nShe bakes awsome OATMEAL COOKIES\nbetter than the ones in THE VENDING MACHINES\nTell everyone about Bill Murrry and\nespecially GO TO YOUR TABLE and tell them this\n\n\nWhat poster would you like to read now?", "action_results": [{"action": "Fairview News Poster", "result": "FAIRVIEW NEWS\n\nRead Fairview News every week.\n\nAlso, check out the FN Website, at\nFairviewNews.halogenstudios.com\n\n\nWhat would you like to read now?", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Fairview Cult Poster", "result": "WEIVRIAF TLUC\n* This is not a Fairview Cult Poster\n\n\nWhat poster would you like to read now?", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Orph Poster", "result": "Orph playing at Xandu\nORPH ORPH ORPH\n\nWhat poster wouldyou like to read now?", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}, null]}, null, null]}, null, null, null]}, null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Go into the lunch line", "result": "You decide to rush into the lunch line\n\nAs you enter, you dodge an ice cube tossed at you. You notice the cafeteria workers serving people and grabbing food without gloves. You are at the end of the line. What would like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue In Line ...", "result": "You continue in the line ... what would you like to do now:", "action_results": [{"action": "Combine nachos from another plate onto yours", "result": "You decide to put extras nacho on your plate\n\nA you grab some more nachos from another plate, the lunch lady yells \"HEY PUT THAT BACK! WHAT DO YOU THINK YOU ARE DOING? NO NABBING NACHOS!!!\"\n\nYou put the extra nachos back. You pay for your single plate of nachos. On your way out, you slip a nutty bar in your pocket, just out of spite.\n\nYou run into John Videc, who asks: \"Hey dude, ya got 40cents?\" What would you like to do now:", "action_results": [{"action": "Give him your change, 40cents", "result": "You decide to give Jon 40 cents\n\nYou slip you hand into your pocket and pull out fourty cents. You hand it over to him and he says:\n\n\"Aw Dude! Thanks a lot! Hey, by the way...I don't know where are the chairs are today, but if you just keep looking you will find one!\"\n\nOddly, you notice that no time has passed since you walked in the cafeteria. What would you like to do now?", "action_results": [null, null, null, {"action": "Leave the cafeteria", "result": "You decide to leave the cafeteria\n\nJust as you are about to leave, a gaurd stops you dead in your tracks. He reminds you that you may leave only 4 minutes before the bell rings. What would you like to do?", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Give him what you just ripped off", "result": "You decide to give him what you stole\n\nHe says, \"hey, it's not 40 cents, but it's food! Thanks!\" As you walk away, you see the lunch lady come out and start to question him. He got busted.\n\nYou notice that no time has passed since you got in the cafeteria. Where would you like to go?", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Don't give him anything", "result": "You decide to not give him anything\n\nYou tell John, \"sorry dude I don't have any money.\" As he walks away with a sad, puppy dog expression, a lunch lady comes up to you and says that she needs to talk to you in the back. She says that she knows what you ripped off and but will let you go. All she wants you to do is turn around.\n\nYou comply with her ackward request and start to feel salt, pepper, and other spices being poured on to you. You ask her what on earth she is doing. She says \"making lunch\" and then pusshes you in the Taco Master 2001. You get ground up and are tomorrow's mexican food.\n\nAlways give a Videc something ... it's just good luck", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Get for two pieces of pizza and eat one before the cashier so you don't have to pay for it", "result": "You decide to eat your pizza in the line\n\nYou ask the server for a pizza meal with an extra slice of pizza. You scarf down one of the pieces before you get to the cashier. As you go to pay for one piece of pizza, you say with your mouth full and pizza sauce all over your face, \"hanc eyou\". The lunch lady looks at you funny and charges you for the milk, squishy pears, and one piece of pizza.\n\nYou leave the line, but on your way out, run into John Videc. He asks, \"Hey man, can I bum 40cents?\"\n\nWhat would you like to do now:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Give him your pizza", "result": "You decide to give him a slice of pizza\n\nHe says \"Aw dude! You rule! Hey, by the way, I don't know where all the chairs are, but if you keep looking you will find one!\" What would you like to do.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, null]}, {"action": "Put a oatmeal cookie under your slice of pizza", "result": "You decide to put a oatmeal cookie under your slice of pizza\n\nYou get away with it! The lunch lady does not notice, and charges you for only the pizza plate!\n\nOn your way out, you into Jon Videc. He says \"Hey Dude, ya got 40cents?\" What do you do?", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, {"action": "Continue to the cashier without stealing anything", "result": "You decide to pay for your lunch and not steal anything\n\nThe lunch lady says \"thank you. This money will be going towards exterminating the Fairview Cult in school. Aren't you glad?\"\n\nBefore you can reply, she looks into your eyes and realizes that you are in the cult. \"Hey he's one of them! Get him!\"\n\nFive guys with non lethal weapons pop out of the back and bag you. The take you to a deprograming station and recondition you into a mindless zombie. You become a drone of FHS.\n\n\"School is good, right?\" Yes, master. School is good", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Steal a nutty bar and walk out the back", "result": "You decide to steal something\n\nYou slip it down your pants and casually walk out of the line, pretending you didn't want anything. Then, you run into John Videc, who asks you if he could borrow 40 cents, for his 40-cent discounted lunch. What do you do:", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, null, {"action": "Open up a milk and drink it in the line", "result": "You decide to open up a milk and drink it in the line\n\nThere are three types of milk to drink. Which would you like to drink?", "action_results": [{"action": "Regular, 2% White Milk", "result": "You decide to drink the regular 2% milk\n\nYou open it up and see that there are ice chunks in it. You say \"cool, milk slushie\". As you guzzle down the milk, you realize that the ice chunks are really milk chunks and the milk is curtled and bad. The milk is so old that it kills you. You die.\n\nWhy cant you drink chocolate milk like everyone else you freak!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "2% Chocolate Milk", "result": "You decide to drink the chocolate milk\n\nYou chug it down and throw the container under the counter. It was some good milk. You contiue on.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}, {"action": "Rip off an entire pizza", "result": "You decide to steal an entire pizza\n\nYou another friend work out the standard pizza-rip off technique:\n\nYour buddy goes to on of the cashiers and gets change for a five dollar bill. Meanwhile, you take the pizza out of the heater, and indicate to the other lunch lady that your friend is paying for it. She nods and you casually walk out with the pizza.\n\nOn your way out, you see John Videc. He says \"Aw Dude! Lemme have a piece of pizza! Common!\" What do you do:", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}, null, null]}, null, null, null, null, {"action": "Grandma's Oatmeal Cookie", "result": "You plop three quarters and the machine and out comes the wholesome Grandma's Oatmeal Cookies. What would you like to do now.", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, null, null]}, null]}, {"action": "The Soda Pop machine", "result": "You decide to go to the soda pop machine\n\nThe pop machine has a big OUT OF ORDER SIGN on it. You remember reading in the Fairivew Cult Bulletin that the it purposely shut down so students can't have caffine. Caffine interferes with much of the brainwashing given in FHS.\n\nThen all of a sudden Eric Herron from punk band S.D.W.B. pops out from behind the pop machine and gives you a cold, unopened Mountain Dew. He says \"Here dude. It's FILLED with caffine but it also has a little bit of Yellow 5.\"\n\nYou ask him what Yello 5 is and he just smiles and walks away, headbutting a freshman and poking his eyes out with his spiked hair. What would you like to do now:", "action_results": [{"action": "Hand the mountain dew to someone else trying to use the pop machine", "result": "You decide to drink the mountain dew\nAs you chug the cold drink you just remember the shrink factor behind Yellow 5. What would you like to do now:", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Drink it down and get a lot of caffine", "result": "You decide to hand the mountain dew to some one else\n\nThis is good because you just remembered the shrinkage factor of Yello 5 that you read in Fairview Cult literature. What would you like to do now.", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "The Mystic Beverage Machine", "result": "You decide to go to the Mystic machine\n\nYou walk up to the machine and see Number 2 of the Fairview Cult standing by it. As you are about to put your dollar in, Number 2 asks you if you would like a Mystic for 75 cents instead of a dollar. What do you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "\"No Thanks\", and put a dollar in", "result": "You decide to put a dollar in\n\nYou put a dollar in the machine, but it doesn't work and just takes your dollar. Number 2, still standing there, offers to get you a Mystic for 85 cents. You decide to give it to him.\n\nHe lays on the floor, reaches his hand up the machine, and uses his keys to open the grate. It beeps a little, but no louder than an alarm clock. He sticks his entire arm up the machine and grabs you a Mystic.\n\nYou take it from him and open it on up. You drink a few sips of it and realize that it tastes like CRAP! It is so bad, you end up giving it away. What would you like to do now?", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "\"Okay\", and hand him three quarters", "result": "You decide to put a dollar in\n\nYou fork 75 cents on over to Number 2.\n\nHe lays on the floor, reaches his hand up the machine, and uses his keys to open the grate. It beeps a little, but no louder than an alarm clock. He sticks his entire arm up the machine and grabs you a Mystic.\n\nYou take it from him and open it on up. You drink a few sips of it and realize that it tastes like CRAP! It is so bad, you end up giving it away. What would you like to do now?", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, null, null]}, null]}]}, null, null, null, null]}, null, null]}, null, null, null]}, null, null, null]}, null, null, null, null]}, null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "See how much you weigh", "result": "You decide to see how much you weigh\n\nYou jump on the some-what new digital scale. It flips through a bunch of numbers and then gives you your weight: -451 pounds. You get off the scale and get on it again. Now, you weigh 1 pound. Giving up, you get off the scale and look for something else to do. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Slip some BandAids into your pocket", "result": "You decide to slip some BandAids into your pocket\n\nYou glance all around to see if anyone is looking, then grab a handful of BandAids and slip them into your pocket.\n\nA few seconds later, you hear a voice on the PA System: \"We saw that. Put them back ... now!\"\n\nYou reach into your pocket and put every single one back. You look around but see no hidden cameras. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Lay on the cot and sleep", "result": "You decide to lay on the cot and sleep\n\nYou hop on the cot and stretch out. You look at the brown stained celing and close your eyes and doze off. Later on you wake up to the bell ringing the nurse never came. You get up and go to lunch.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Be good and sit and wait", "result": "You decide to be good and sit and wait\n\nYou sit in the faded black chair and wait. Twenty minutes later, the bell rings. The nurse never came by. You pack up your things and head out for lunch.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null]}, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Stop by the Senior Study hall in the cafetiera to see your friends", "result": "You decide to go to the cafeteria and see your senior study hall friends\n\nYou stop by the cafeteria and look around. The only notable senior there is Adam O'Malady. He has his Marine Corps boots on the table and is smoking a cigarette. You nod to him and contiue on your way to the nurse's office", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Go outside to the track", "result": "It's a farily nice day, so you go outside to the track and look around. You see your classmate, Johnny Jimclass stretching. He asks you, \"Ummmm ... you wanna race?\" What do you do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Race Jonny Jimclass", "result": "You decide to race Johnny Jimclass\n\nYou do a few quick stretches and get ready to race Johnny. You hear some one yell, \"On your marks ... get set ... go!\" and you both take off. You start to inch past Johnny. He notices this and gives you a nice shove, causing you to trip and fall, and then hit a fence post face on.\n\nYou smack against the metal pole, causing you to loose a few teeth and get a broken nose and jawbone, then fall backwards, hitting your head on the hard cement ground. You hear people running up to you yelling \"are you okay?\" You close your eyes and peoples' screaming and yelling comes to a halt. You die.\n\nYou still didn't beat Johnny, now did you!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Run up and down the bleachers", "result": "You decide to run up and down the bleachers\n\nYou run up, then down, then up, then down, then up, then down, making a huge commotion the whole time. But, you then realize that running up and down the bleachers suck. You reconsider your options. What would you like to do now:", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, {"action": "Go to the climbing ropes", "result": "You go to the climbing ropes and see a few people hanging around. Johnny Jimclass working his way up to the top of the ropes.", "action_results": [{"action": "See how high you can climb the ropes", "result": "You decide to see how high you can climb\n\nAfter a little bit of climbing, you make it to the top of the rope and show all of your crushes that you can make it to the top.\n\nMrs. Fuddmeadow notices and yells \"great job!\" She gives you a big smile and yells out \"Hey gang, every one should be like our expert rope climber here!\"\n\nYour number one crush waves at you and, being so confident of yourself, you wave back. With only one hand on the rope, you loose grip and fall to nice soft mats below. Unfortunately, you land head first and just don't make the fall. You die.\n\nTsk. Tsk. Tsk. Show off!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Try to knock Johnny off of the ropes", "result": "You decide to try to knock Johnny off of the ropes\n\nJust as Johnny makes it to the top, you grab the rope and swing it around. He looses his grap and falls from the ropes. You move out of the way just in time before he falls on you. Every one gets a good laugh except Johnny Jimclass. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Swing around like Tarzan on the ropes", "result": "You decide to swing around like Tarzan on the ropes\n\nYou swing around knocking and kicking people in the head as you fly by. Mrs. Fuddmeadow kindly asks you to stop and you kindly reply to her \"Oh-Oh-OHHHHHHHH (A Tarzan yell).\" Mrs. Fuddmeadow walks away, but the repetitive joke still gets laughs, especially from the opposite sex. You even get a phone number out of it! Damn your hot!\nWhat would you like to do:", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, null]}, null, null]}, null, {"action": "Run around the track", "result": "You decide to go around the track\n\nAfter your first lap, you realize how lame of an option this is to choose, especially since there are somany other things to do. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, null, null, null]}, null]}, null, null, null]}, null]}, null, null, null, null]}]}, null, null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Lay on the floor and do nothing", "result": "You decide lay on the floor and do nothing\n\nWhile you lay on the dirty gym floor, watching everyone else do pushups, you glance up at Mrs. Fuddmeadow. She notices you doing nothing and gives you glares at you with the Evil Eye. All of a sudden, you can't breathe at all any more and your heard feels as if it's shrinking right in your chest. You start to hear a demonic laughter and the music from the Omen series in the back of your head.\n\nMrs. Fuddmeadow rushes over, yelling \"Annie Annie are you okay\" and begins to administer CPR. As she brings her face closer to yours, you see flames in her eyes, and as soon as she presses her lips against yours, you feel your soul being ripped out of you and sucked into her. Your lifeless body falls lays limp on the gym floor.\n\nThere is a difference between slacking and not working. Duh.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Say you forgot your clothes", "result": "You walk out of the locker room and tell Mrs. Fuddmeadow that you forgot your gym clothes. A classmate overhears you and says \"Hey, don't worry! I've got a sprare set of gym clothes you can use - they are brand new!\"\n\nYou take the clothes from him and notice that they have the Fairview Cult Eye right under the FHS logo. He winks and says \"don't worry, we've got ya covered!\"\n\nYou have no choice but to change into the clothes.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Lean on wall", "result": "You decide to lean on the wall.\n\nAs you do this, the wall falls inward, causing cement to fall on you and crush you. With the few tonnes of cememt on you, just about every bone in your body is broken and most of your internal organs are ruptured. As you life slips away, a classmate comes up to you and says, \"Oh yeah, don't lean on the wall.\"\n\nBelieve it or not, this based on a real incident. This page was inspired by a wall actually falling on a student at Fairview High Shool in Fairview Park, OH. If you go to FHS, and look at the wall in the gym locker room, you can see it is bolted to the surrounding walls.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Talk to the football coach", "result": "You decide to talk to the football coach.\n\nSince the football coach is really into hunting, you tell him about a deer you bagged that had twenty tips on its antlers. He says \"Oh thats nuthin'! I shot me a bear that had twenty-two tips on its antlers!\"\n\nNext, he pulls out Old Betsy and says \"this here is my favorite deer hunting rifle. So easy to use, I'll tell ya what, all you gotta do is press this trigger right h---\"\n\n----- KA-BOOOOOOM -----\n\nHe accidentally shoots his gun and blows your head off. Your brain and eyeballs fly across the room and land right next to the \"Horse Play Can Hurt Seriously\" sign and your decapitated body falls to the ground, with blood gushing out of your neck stump.\n\nHot-Biggety-Bam-Blam-BOOM!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Tell your gym teacher, Mrs. Fuddmeadow, that you are sick", "result": "You decide to Tell the gym teacher that you are sick.\n\nYou tell your teacher that you have a horrible stomach ache. She replies: \"You know, this is not the kind of work you can get off of the Homework Hotline. You've missed around 8 or 7 or 5 days in the pass two weeks because you were sick! Now get your clothes on and get to class!\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Ignore Joe and continue to the office", "result": "You decide to ignore Joe and contiue down to the office.\n\nAs you are leaving the art room, Number 2 yells at you for not giving respect where respect is due. Shocked at this comment, you start to walk backward and accidentaly walk into a spinning clay wheel.\n\nThe clay wheel digs into your side, causing you to fall right on top it. The clay on the wheel has an exacto knife stuck in it, blade side up, so the exato knife goes right through your eye. Plus, since it's spinning around, it moves all around in your head, causing blood to start pouring out of all of your gaping wounds.\n\nOf course, the clay gets all bloody. The art student working on his clay project gets mad you for ruining his clay project and stomps you to death.\n\nTsk Tsk Tsk. You should have said hi to The All American of Fairview Park, Joe Barney", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Refuse to go to the office", "result": "You decide to refuse to go to the office.\n\nYour language teacher shrugs and says, \"okay, you can go at the end of class.\" He then tells you to go to the office for violating the \"12 inch\" rule of sleeping in class.\n\nWhat do you do:", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null, {"action": "Do homework for another class", "result": "You decide to do homework for another class\n\nThe teacher catches you doing other homework and laughs, saying, \"thank goodness for the right to bear arms!\" He then lifts up his shirt sleeves and beats you to a bloody pulp.\n\nYour classmates find this hysterical and promise not to tell on the teacher because he is so cool.\n\nWell hey, atleast you got your math homework done.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Ignore him", "result": "You decide to ignore him.\n\nThe cult guy keeps trying to convince you to join. The study hall monitor hears the whispers and yells at you for talking. When you try to explain that you weren't talking, you get sent down to the office. As you walk in his office, the Principal Schillick grabs the paddle on his wall and says, with an evil sneer, \"I've been looking for an excuse to use this.\" He then beats you to death with it.\n\nWhat a loser. YOU DIED", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to end the game", "result": "Well, I gues you couldn't cut it in the life of a FHS student. Better luck next time.\nYour final score is: 000", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Sign up as an A/V Aide", "result": "You decide to become an aide for the A/V department.\nYou can do whatever you want. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Roam around the halls", "result": "You decide to roam the halls.\n\nYou are walking around the quiet, musky smelling halls of FHS, loving your ability to roam freely as an A/V aide. While looking for things to do, you run into a roving band of suburban gangster wannabes - middle class, white teenagers dressed and talking as if they were born in the ghetto. The start beating you up for \"Roamin' Der Hallz!\" You call out for the nearest teacher, Doc Shaver, but he is nowhere in sight.\n\nDamn suburban gangster wannabes!. YOU DIED", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay In the A/V Office", "result": "You decide to stay.\n\nWhile chilling in the A/V office, watching daytime court dramas, Number 4 from the Fairview Cult passes through and hands you the Fairview Cult Bulletin. Then, he asks you if you would like to join the cult. What do you say:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Ignore Him", "result": "You decide to ignore him.\n\nNumber 4 shrugs his shoulders and continues on his way. A few minutes later, the A/V leader, Mike SportsInstructor, asks you to move a TV from Mr. Xy's room to Dr. Mezzler's room.\n\nYou leave to grab the TV, and on your way to Dr. Mezzler's room, you are stopped by a roving band of suburban gangster wannabes - middle class, white teenagers dressed and talking as if they were born in the ghetto. The mug and suffocate you with their $200 Starter jackets, then take the TV.\n\nDamn suburban gangster wannabes! YOU DIED", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Go to the library", "result": "You decide to go to the library.\n\nAs you walk in, Mrs. Rollings, the school librarian yells at you and tells you to go back to study hall. Only half of the study hall is allowed in the library, and today is not your alphebetically designated day. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Sneak past Mrs. Rollings", "result": "You decide to sneak past Mrs. Rollings.\n\nYou successfully sneak past Mrs. Rollings. What would you like to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Get a book", "result": "You decide to get a book.\n\nYou pull a random book off the shelf, \"The [censored] Adventures of Tom Sawyer.\" You start flipping through the pages and see that Fairview Cult Bulliten is glued to one of the pages. As you read the FCB, some girl puts her hand on the book you are reading and asks you if you would like to join the cult. She is wearing a gold ring bearing the FC eye-symbol. What do you do:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Ignore Her", "result": "You decide to ignore her.\n\nMrs. Rollings comes over and yells at you for talking. When you point out you were being silent, she yells at you because it is not your alphabetically designated day.\n\nShe grabs the Random House Censored Unabridged dictionary and hits you over the head with it, knocking you out. You are then dragged down to the cafeteria and tossed in the Taco Master 2000. You get ground up and chopped and end up in many peoples' tacos.\n\nMmmm....Mexican food. YOU DIED", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Talk to your friends", "result": "You decide to talk with your friends.\n\nAs you are chatting with your buddies, the nice librarian assistant comes up to you and hands you an envelope that she says is from the office.\n\nYou rip it open to find the Fairview Cult Bulliten. After you read through it, a girl from another table looks at you and asks you if you would like to join the Fairview Cult. What do you do:", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay home and sleep", "result": "You decide to stay home and sleep.\nMr. GreenWall, the assistant principal, calls home and alerts your mother that you are not at school. What are you going to do:", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk it out with your mom", "result": "You decided to try to talk it out with your mom.\nYour talking does not work, so your mom grabs your dad's shotgun from under her mattress and **BOOM** she shoots you.\n\nStay home in a game about school? How lame!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Run away from your mom", "result": "You decide to run away from your mom.\nYour mom chases you outside and catches up with you. She then proceeds to beat your head against the curb.\n\nStay home in a game about school? How lame!", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story27.json b/data/scraper/stories/story27.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f404904 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story27.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=47011", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Born in 1900 you were a prosperous lawyer in Ohio. You had a wife, a good job and a good salary.\n\nIn 1929 the banks went bust, money became worthless and the Great Depression destroyed America. Your life savings were lost and your world destroyed. Many banks closed, dollars weren't worth the ink to print them, lenders demanded their money back and your life changed forever. First you were sacked, your office closed and unable to find work you were forced to watch as your personal belongings were sold one by one. Your wife, pregnant with your first child, caught pneumonia which worsened and on Christmas Day she died.\n\nYour last dollars were spent on her funeral and tombstone.\n\nDays later your house was repossessed; destitute and desperate you joined the millions travelling from town to town seeking work but there was nothing: one in three Americans were unemployed and there were no jobs available. Crime became the answer for many, including you.\n\nOne desperate night you broke into a shop and stole food, drink and the money in the till: thirteen Dollars. The robbery was noticed by a passing policeman and though you tried to flee on foot you were cornered in an alley and arrested by several armed policemen. Taken to prison you were swiftly put on trial, convicted and sentenced to three years imprisonment. Locked in a cell you were forgotten.\n\nIt is in prison that you met John Dillinger and his friends.\n\nJohn Dillinger, a handsome joker with an addiction for chewing gum, came to befriend you. He was in prison for a small-time robbery as well but because he used a gun he received a ten year sentence. He has been forgotten too: betrayed by his friends, rejected by his family and divorced by his wife. Over the years you became close friends with him and several other criminals, all convicted bank robbers. Over time you befriend Pete Pierpont, Red Hamilton, Charlie Makley, Russell Clark and Homer Van Meter, except for Homer all are surving lengthy sentences.\n\nFinally your day comes: in the spring of 1933 you and John are paroled on the same day, a short while later Homer is released from prison as well and moves away, drifting in and out of contact. On the day of your release Pete, Charlie, Red and Russell give you and John two lists: one of banks that they know would be easy to rob and one of fellow criminals you could team up with if you do plan a robbery. You throw away your lists, return to your hometown in Ohio and determined to go straight you try to get a legitimate job.\n\nPrison did not give you any money when you were released, make any arrangements to help you or even keep track of you. After three years the Depression still holds America in its terrible grip as strongly as ever - you only survive at all thanks to Soup Kitchens and Homeless Shelters and all your desperate attempts to get a job end in failure. Day after miserable day you sit on the streets or stand in the bread lines thinking about your friends in prison.\n\nFinally one summer day you have had enough: you travel to John's home in Mooresville, Indiana where you find your friend glad to see you. He has been planning a bank robbery of his own with two kids called William Shaw and Paul Parker that he met in a pool hall and he is glad to have you join them. One summer's day you drive out to begin your fateful outlaw career...", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to begin your Outlaw Career", "result": "One morning you drive up outside the New Carlisle National Bank and leaving Paul in the car you, John and William walk into the bank. You approach the lone cashier and draw your guns.\n\n\"Alright buddy, open the safe,\" John tells him with a smile.\n\nThe cashier takes some keys, crosses to the safe and tries to open it but he is nervous and fumbles with the lock.\n\n\"He's stalling,\" William snaps to you and John. \"Let me drill him.\"\n\nYou shake your head. \"Take your time,\" you tell the cashier encouragingly.\n\nFinally he gets the safe door open, as he does a female bank teller walks in. John turns and trains his gun on her.\n\n\"I don't want to hurt you,\" he tells her and indicates with his gun that she should get over by the wall. \"You hadn't ought to come in the bank so early,\" he tells her with a smile.\n\nYou make the tellers fill a sack with money and then lock them in the vault, walk out of the bank and hurry inside the car with Paul. As you drive away towards the state border to Indiana you count the money and find you have stolen $11,000, making each person's share $2,700. Your first crime taking you down the outlaw road has been a lucrative one.", "action_results": [{"action": "No going back now", "result": "After the New Carlisle bank robbery you, John and the teenagers drive down to Kansas where you hide out in the town of Muncie at the apartment of a hard-drinking friend of William's called Harry Copeland. You lie low at the apartment while Harry and John commit a few local robberies and then begin planning to rob a bank in the little town of Daleville, Indiana.\n\nThe night before the robbery Harry, William and Paul all drink heavily and on the morning of the planned robbery Harry is alright but William and Paul are too hung-over to go on the robbery. John decides to go ahead and rob the bank with just you and Harry but you are worried if three people are enough to pull the job off.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join John and Harry in robbing the Daleville Bank", "result": "You, John and Harry stroll out of the apartment, round to the back of it and get into Harry's car. As you start to pull down an alleyway towards the front you are startled to see several policemen armed with pistols running into the apartment - they don't even see you. Calmly John steers the car right onto the road and drives away from the raid.\n\nFleeing to a hotel in a nearby town you lie low until the next morning when you read in newspapers how William and Paul were arrested in their beds during the raid on the apartment. The three of you have some discussion and decide to go ahead with your plans to rob the Daleville Bank the next morning.\n\nJust two days after the raid you and John stroll into the bank, draw your pistols and train them on the sole bank teller behind the counter.\n\n\"This is a stickup,\" John tells her. \"Get me the money honey.\"\n\nJohn leaps over the counter, strides into the open safe and quickly scoops up the money inside before you both lock the teller inside, stroll outside and jump in the back of Harry's car. As you drive out of town you count the money and find you have gotten away with $3,500, making your share of the money $1,100, not bad for a dishonest day's work.", "action_results": [{"action": "Another Bank Job", "result": "Two weeks after the Daleville Robbery the three of you drive into the little town of Montpelier, while Harry stays in the car you and John stroll into the bank, draw your pistols on the customers and tellers inside and announce this is a stick-up. Almost immediately a female teller reaches towards a button on the wall and John trains his gun on her.\n\n\"What are you trying to do, set off that alarm?\" he asks, chewing his gum.\n\n\"I would if I could,\" the woman snaps back.\n\nJohn herds the prisoners up against a wall while you stride into the vault and shove all the money you can find inside into a bag before locking the customers inside the vault. As you walk out of the bank you encounter an old man standing outside who has obviously been watching what has happened through the windows.\n\n\"Looks like the bank's being held up again,\" he comments to the pair of you.\n\n\"It's so easy, I'm not surprised,\" you tell him with a smile. Climbing in the car you drive off with Harry and count the money in the back. You have stolen $10,000, making your share $3,300. Soon after the robbery you get word that your old prison friend Homer Van Meter wants to meet so the three of you drive up to Chicago, Illinois to see him.\n\nHomer, a skinny, cold character who in prison was something as a loner greets the three of you looking happier than you remember seeing him looking before.\n\n\"Hello pals,\" he says shaking hands with you all. \"I've been reading about your bank jobs in Indiana and Ohio, they're great stuff. I've teamed up with an outfit myself led by Baby Face Nelson. You know him right, used to lead a gang three years ago and escaped from prison last year? He's a real tough character.\"\n\n\"I heard he was gun-crazy and a killer,\" Harry says frowning.\n\n\"Well maybe a little but he's a guy you want on your side in a gun-battle,\" Homer says cheerfully. \"He's put together a nice little crew, there's me, a former boxer called Tommy Carroll, Eddie Green of the Barker-Karpis Gang, that old veteran masterthief Eddie Bentz and two Chicago gangsters called Earl Doyle and Chuck Fisher. We're looking at a bank job in Grand Haven, Michigan later this month if you are interested.\"\n\n\"Thanks Homer but Harry and I have some scores of our own lined up,\" John tells him. \"I've got a mind to try and get some guns smuggled into Michigan State Pen to help Pete, Charles, Red and Russell bust out. If I can get them out we can start up our own gang.\"\n\n\"Well the offer is always there if you want it,\" Homer tells John before turning to you. \"What do you reckon? You want to join the Nelson Gang?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Homer in the Nelson Gang", "result": "You agree to go with Homer who assures you on the journey to the town of Grand Haven, Michigan that your experience robbing three banks more than qualifies you to join Nelson's group - most of the gang except Nelson and Bentz have less experience. In Grand Haven Homer goes off for a few days to arrange an introduction between you, Nelson and the rest of the gang.\n\nNelson lives up to his nickname (which he despises, preferring people call him Jimmy), he is a baby-faced youthful little man but with a distinct air of menace. Eddie Green is a red-haired veteran stick-up man, Tommy Carroll is a handsome ex-boxer while the two recruits Earl Doyle and Chuck Fisher are typical grim-faced gangsters. Eddie Bentz is blond-haired and capable, he has a long history of pulling off some of the most successful bank robberies of the last ten years.\n\nOne summer's day you, Eddie Bentz and Jimmy walk into the bank while Homer and Earl guard the doors, Eddie Green and Tommy wait on the streets and Chuck sits in the escape car. The three of you walk up to the counter and draw your pistols while Jimmy whips a machine gun out from under his coat.\n\n\"Hands up,\" he barks.\n\nEddie Green and Tommy hurry inside as planned and help you take the customers and bank staff hostage while Eddie and Jimmy begin emptying the contents of the vault into sacks.\n\nOutside you hear Homer shout \"Hurry, the alarm's been raised!\"\n\n\"Don't shoot unless they start shooting first,\" Eddie B cautions Jimmy.\n\nWith the sack of money in hand you all run out on the street as a man with a shotgun fires at you from the other side of the road, blasting a hole in a bank window - Jimmy returns fire wit his machine gun making the man dive for cover as the bullets blast through car windows and glass store fronts. The others run out onto the street as well.\n\nAt that point you notice something.\n\n\"Our car, where is it?\" you demand.\n\n\"Chuck panicked and drove off,\" Homer yells back to you.\n\nFor a moment you are all stunned and then Eddie B runs into the road and waving his pistol he forces an approaching car to stop. As the woman inside scrambles out Eddie stands by the open door and yells for you all to get in. Most of your fellow gang members start running towards him.\n\n\"We all won't fit in that little car,\" Earl shouts back. \"We should run for it.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Run towards the car", "result": "You join the others in running towards the car, there isn't enough room for everybody inside the compact car so while Eddie B drives and Jimmy, Tommy and Eddie G pile in you and Homer have to stand on the running boards as you drive out of town - looking back you see Earl Doyle tackled to the ground and captured by townsfolk. Once you are out of town you are able to hijack a second car out of town and drive on across the state.\n\nCounting the money you find you have stolen just $3,500, making your share $500. Eddie B is furious at the poorly executed robbery and derides all of you as a gang of amateurs. He plans to go to New York and essentially retire from crime. Jimmy is not much perturbed and is quickly putting together plans to rob another bank, this time in Minnesota.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go into retirement with Eddie B in New York", "result": "You decide to go into hiding with Eddie Bentz, relying on the wily veteran to keep you both out of trouble. This he largely manages: while your fellow gang members are all robbing banks, getting arrested or shot you two live quietly in hotels in New York, rarely venturing outside. You read in papers of Harry Copeland's arrest, of the arrest of Chuck Fisher and the shooting deaths of Eddie Green and Tommy Carroll. Soon of your friends only John Dillinger, Baby Face Nelson and Homer Van Meter remain at large and the whole country is looking for them.\n\nFinally one day, more to relieve the boredom than anything else, you and Eddie drive up to Vermont where you sit in the car while Eddie goes into the bank. He emerges five minutes later with a sack of money and the two of you drive back down south. You have both stolen $8,500, making your share of the money $4,200.\n\nYou return to New York and continue to live quietly for the rest of the year: by the end of the year John, Homer and Baby Face have all been tracked down and killed by local lawmen or the FBI. You and Eddie are the only members of the Dillinger or Nelson Gangs still at large and now the FBI are focusing all their resources on finding you two... you begin to question whether it is safe to remain in New York.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave America and go to Cuba", "result": "You elect to go to Cuba at the start of 1935, a year later Eddie is tracked down and arrested by FBI Agents. In Cuba you are able to purchase a small house at Varadero Beach and live the life of a retired criminal. Perhaps your career was not as exciting as John Dillinger's or Baby Face Nelson's or some of your other contemporaries but at least you survived to enjoy your stolen money.", "action_results": [{"action": "Retirement", "result": "For many decades you live in peaceful retirement in Cuba while policemen and FBI Agents across America continue to search for you for decades. Eventually interest in your winds down and completely fades away when World War 2 breaks out. The troubles of that War, and the Cuban Revolution, do not affect you in your little paradise, carefully investing your stolen money in businesses you make enough money to live in comfort for the rest of your life.\n\nAlone of the members of the Dillinger Gang you have triumphed and enjoy a life of ease and luxury after so many dangers. The FBI never discover your identity and you live out your days in peace, always keeping fresh the memory of your companions and the terrible gunfights and robberies you survived that they didn't.\n\nYou have triumphed.", "action_results": [{"action": "The End", "result": "This is a Hidden Bonus page that rewards anyone who survived the story with extra Score points - if you want others to see your Score please leave a comment after you have finished reading this story.\n\nIf you survived the story but served a lengthy prison sentence you receive a bonus of 50,000.\n\nIf you survived the story and served no lengthy prison sentence you receive a bonus of 100,000.\n\nFinally thank you for taking the time to read my story.", "action_results": [{"action": "Your Outlaw Career is over", "result": "This lists the Names, Gunfights, Injured, Killed, Robberies, Score and Fates of your fellow Outlaws so you can see how well you compare to them.\n\n1: John Dillinger, Gunfights: 12, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 11, Score: $62,000 - KILLED\n\n2: Red Hamilton - Gunfights: 9, Injured: 1, Killed: 1, Robberies: 6, Score: $37,600 - KILLED\n\n3: Homer Van Meter - Gunfights: 9, Injured: 2, Killed: 3, Robberies: 6, Score: $29,500 - KILLED\n\n4: Baby Face Nelson, Gunfights: 7, Injured: 5, Killed: 5, Robberies: 5, Score: $25,300 - KILLED\n\n\n5: Tommy Carroll - Gunfights: 6, Injured: 1, Killed: 1, Robberies: 5, Score: $23,900 - KILLED\n\n6: Eddie Green - Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 4, Score: $19,700 - KILLED\n\n7: Pete Pierpont - Gunfights: 4, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 3, Score: $17,100 - KILLED\n\n8: Charles Makley - Gunfights: 4, Injured: 2, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: $17,100 - KILLED\n\n9: Russell Clark - Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: $17,100 - ARRESTED\n\n10: Harry Copeland - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: $12,400 - ARRESTED\n\n11: Chuck Fisher - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 2, Score: $5,800 - ARRESTED\n\n12: John Chase - Gunfights: 5, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: $5,600 - ARRESTED\n\n13: Eddie Bentz - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 2, Score: $4,700 - ARRESTED\n\n14: William Shaw - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: $2,700 - ARRESTED\n\n15: Paul Parker - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: $2,700 - ARRESTED\n\n16: Earl Doyle - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: $500 - ARRESTED", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to see some information about how I wrote this", "result": "John Dillinger was described by his friend Harry Pierpont as \"the kind of guy you would want for a brother\". He was an easy-going, friendly and charismatic person who chewed gum through his robberies, said things like \"Attaboy sport\" and avoided unnecessary killings and shootings (except one time) throughout his career.\n\nIn contrast to this his fellow outlaw Baby Face Nelson could fairly be described as a murderous psychopath who laughed on multiple occasions as he sprayed machine gun bullets towards innocent civilians including women and children. Dillinger's fellow outlaws were usually murderous too, to a lesser or greater extent, and most paid the price for their lives of crime.\n\nI am hugely indebted to Bryan Burrough's fantastic book Public Enemies (which was turned into a film starring a strangely charmless Johnny Depp as Dillinger), the FBI Reading Room Files about their manhunt of Dillinger and Baby Face Nelson Journal which is a great little website full of little bits of information about the Gang.\n\nThis story is part of the larger American Outlaws series, a set of books that are based mainly around the robberies, gunfights and shootings that various Outlaw gangs in American History were involved in. After heavy research these stories become incredibly easy to write as they are 90% based on true history, hence a 100 page story in a month becomes no major challenge once the research is done.\n\nThese non-fiction story-games are not choose your own adventures in the traditional sense of the term but it is a new approach to the genre that I hope will prove popular. In the future I want to experiment with new formats for the whole choose your own adventure concept and I want to sincerely thank any readers who have been patient or curious enough to read this far - their feedback good or bad really encourages and assists my writing so thank you.\n\nJohn once said \"all my life I wanted to be a bank robber, carry a gun and wear a mask. Now that it's happened I guess I'm just about the best bank robber they ever had and I sure am happy.\"\n\nThose last four words are pretty much how I feel about writing. :D", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay in New York with Eddie", "result": "You remain in hiding with Eddie in New York for most of another two years until, inevitably, the FBI tracks you down. The first thing you know about what is happening is when, in the middle of the night, your hotel door is smashed open and within seconds FBI Agents are hauling you from your bed and clasping handcuffs on you. Eddie is taken into custody as well and the two of you receive long prison sentences.", "action_results": [{"action": "Alcatraz", "result": "You are sentenced to life imprisonment on charges of bank robbery and in 1936 you are sent to Alcatraz Penitentiary where Baby Face Nelson's companion John Paul Chase is already serving time. You remain there until it closes in 1963, seven years later you are paroled. By this time you are an old man and no longer deemed a threat to society.\n\nOne by one your old friends pass on, many indeed are already gone. Harry Pierpont and Charles Makley are sentenced to be executed for murder, when they try to escape from prison in 1934 Charles is shot dead and Harry is badly wounded, he is executed a month later. Russell Clark dies of cancer in 1968, John Chase dies of the same thing in 1973. The last of your fellow outlaws, William Shaw, dies in a hotel fire in 1977.\n\nYou continue, retiring to Washington to live out your remaining days. Your life is quiet and peaceful now. The rat-tat-tat of the machine guns, booms of the shotguns and pops of the pistol are quiet now, the screams of the dying and injured have been replaced by birdsong in the trees. The only money now you have are a few dimes in your pocket.\n\nWhen you reflect back on your crimes and punishment you do wonder if it was really all worth it?", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Join the Nelson Gang in robbing the Minnesota bank", "result": "You stick with the Nelson Gang and two months after the Grand Haven fiasco you drive into Brainerd, Minnesota. This time Jimmy leaves you in the car while he leads Homer, Tommy, Eddie and Chuck into the bank. You sit tight for ten minutes drumming your fingers impatiently on the dashboard until finally your companions emerge. There is no sign that the alarm has been raised.\n\nSuddenly Jimmy does an inexplicable thing. He raises his machine gun and fires a burst of bullets into a shop front across the street, making the people inside dive for cover. Striding towards the car he continues to fire at shop fronts and cars grinning before jumping in the car after the others and all of you drive out of town. You are not convinced Jimmy is completely mentally stable.\n\nThe Gang has escaped with $32,000, making your share $5,300. Jimmy decides that you should all split up: Chuck and Tommy will drive down to San Antonio, Texas and hide out while Jimmy, Eddie and Homer will go to St Paul, Minnesota. In the papers you read how John and Harry succeeded in busting your friends out of prison where they have formed a gang and started robbing banks but as you have no idea where they are or how to find them you'll have to hide out with one of the halves of the Nelson Gang for now.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hide out with Chuck and Tommy in San Antonio", "result": "You drive south with Chuck and Tommy to San Antonio where you hide out for a few months and enjoy yourself relaxing in the city's bars and nightclubs. Occasionally you get the feeling that people are watching you but you can't be sure. One afternoon Tommy announces he intends to go visit a local bar and invites Chuck to join him but Chuck prefers to stay at the apartment so Tommy invites you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay in the apartment with Chuck", "result": "You relax at the apartment, reading a book in your bedroom while Chuck listens to the radio in the living room. When there is a knock on the door you hear Chuck go to answer it. A second later you hear \"FBI! You're under arrest!\" and the sound of several mean stampeding into the house. Springing to your feet you have only moments to make a decision. Your only possible escape route is to scramble out the window but it is a very long way to the ground...", "action_results": [{"action": "Climb out the window", "result": "Crossing to the window you throw it open and quickly climb out. Taking a deep breath you jump and land on the roof of a building below. Hearing a shout from the open window of your room you have no time to rest but race across that roof to a door leading back into your apartment building but two floors below your apartment. Bursting through it you jump down several flights of stairs as you hear voices shouting above you and running feet on the stairs.\n\nYou race out of your apartment building and quickly flag down a passing taxi. Jumping inside you order it to take you to the train station where you quickly book the next train out of town. Making your way back to St Paul you reunite with Jimmy, Homer, Eddie and Tommy, who also escaped San Antonio after shooting two policemen in a gunfight. Chuck was arrested but told the FBI nothing.\n\nThe five of you pass a quiet winter and begin to make plans for more bank jobs next spring. However that spring you hear how John Dillinger, recently escaped from prison and his friend Red Hamilton want to join forces with the Nelson Gang. A meeting is soon arranged between you all.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Terror Gang", "result": "Seven men meet in Minneapolis: you, John Dillinger, Red Hamilton, Baby Face Nelson, Homer Van Meter, Tommy Carroll and Eddie Green. You are all experienced bank robbers, most of you are killers and together you form one of the deadliest gangs of Outlaws in American History. You, John, Red and Homer are old friends and it is through this connection with Homer that John and Red are accepted into the Nelson Gang after their respective prison escapes and recovery from gunshot wounds.\n\nBaby Face Nelson is a youthful, dangerous little man with great ambitions that contrast sharply with John's more easy-going demeanour and Red's more absent-minded loyalty. Homer remains a skinny loner while Tommy, a handsome and deadly ex-boxer and Eddie, a red-haired veteran criminal, make up the rest of the gang.\n\nYou already have your targets picked: two banks at Sioux Falls, South Dakota and Mason City, Iowa. You plan to hit the first bank the next day, meanwhile Nelson (everyone calls him Jimmy), who considers himself the leader of the gang, wants to drive down and check out the bank with his friend petty criminal John Chase while the rest of you go over your plans and make ready for the robbery.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Jimmy and John in checking out the bank", "result": "While the rest of the gang stay at the hideout and make ready you, Jimmy and John start driving towards South Dakota but almost immediately a car cuts in front of you. Irritated Jimmy, who is at the wheel, cuts ahead of him and the car cuts in front of him again. Jimmy loses his temper and rams his car against the other, trying to force it onto the kerb. The other car breaks and the man inside jumps out.\n\nJimmy jumps out with his pistol in his hand and you can tell he means to shoot the angry driver.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join him in shooting the other driver", "result": "You join Jimmy in jumping out and together you both shoot the man in the chest, he falls to the ground. A woman screams, jumps out of the car and runs to his side.\n\n\"You've killed him,\" she wails.\n\n\"Keep your damned mouth shut or I'll let you have it too,\" Jimmy snarls at her. You both jump back inside your car and speed off back to the hideout. The next day you prepare to set off with the gang to rob the Sioux Falls Bank.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Sioux Falls Raid", "result": "Snow lies thickly on the ground as you and your companions drive into the little town of Sioux Falls, South Dakota. Eddie stays in the car, Tommy and Red take positions at the door while Jimmy leads the rest of you into the busy bank. Jimmy pulls a machine gun out from under his coat and the rest of you draw your pistols.\n\n\"This is a hold up!\" Jimmy shouts. \"Everyone on the floor!\"\n\nAlmost immediately an alarm starts ringing, John and Homer ignore it as they head into the vault while you and Jimmy guard the terrified hostages.\n\n\"I'd like to know who set the alarm off,\" Jimmy yells, striding up and down the bank angrily and pointing his machine gun at people. \"Who did it? Who? If you want to get killed just make some move! Go on, just make some move!\"\n\nLooking out the window you see a policeman on a motorbike stop just outside the bank.\n\n\"Shoot him,\" Jimmy yells at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot the cop", "result": "Raising your pistol you fire several shots through the window: the cop is hit four times and falls to the ground. Jimmy laughs. Moments later John and Homer are finished in the vault and hurrying outside surrounded by hostages you all scramble into the car. A few stray shots are fired at you, Jimmy fires bursts from his machine gun in reply. On the drive out of town you count the money and find you have stolen $46,000, making your share $6,500.\n\nA week later you all drive into Mason City, Iowa for your next bank job. Tommy stays in the car and Jimmy and John guard the doors while you lead Homer, Eddie and Tommy into the large First National Bank. Upon entering Eddie fires a burst of bullets from his machine gun into the ceiling.\n\n\"Hands up! Hands up!\" you shout. \"Everybody on the floor!\"\n\nHomer strides towards the counter, one of the teller runs from the counter into an office and tries to slams the door. Homer fires a burst of bullets through the thin wooden door and you hear a shout of pain. Suddenly there is a strange whumping noise and something hits Eddie in the back. It is a tear gas canister and it quickly begins leaking out clouds of gas.\n\nLooking up you see a blue-uniformed guard sitting in a cage lined with bulletproof glass, he has just fired the tear gas through a narrow gun slit and is hastily trying to reload the tear gas gun.\n\n\"Get that son of a bitch with the tear gas!\" Eddie yells at you, rubbing his back angrily.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fire at the guard", "result": "You fire several shots at the guard cage, mostly hitting the bulletproof glass but one shot goes through the narrow gun port and grazes the side of the guard's head. At that moment you hear a burst of machine gun fire outside. Leaving Eddie and Homer to control the lobby while Red deals with the vault you hurry outside. John is immediately outside the doors surrounded by hostages but Jimmy is further down the street, firing his machine gun wildly and laughing. You watch as he shoots an unarmed old man in the leg, knocking him to the ground. You jog over.\n\n\"I thought you were a cop you son of a bitch,\" Jimmy yells at him.\n\n\"I'm not a cop,\" the man moans.\n\n\"Did you have to do that?\" you ask Jimmy wearily.\n\n\"I thought he was a cop,\" Jimmy snaps at you.\n\nYou turn around as a gunshot rings out: a man firing from a window has clipped John in the shoulder. You and John fire your pistols at the window and the man inside jumps back. John shouts to those in the bank that you're all leaving a moment later Red, Eddie and Homer come jogging out. As they do the man in the window fires again, this time grazing Red's shoulder.\n\nSurrounded by hostages you all pile into the car and drive out of town surrounded by hostages. You are all in a bad mood, John and Red's wounds are painful but not serious and you had to leave before you could get all the money. Even so you discover that you have stolen $52,000, making your share $7,400.\n\nYour latest bank robbery has made you all the most wanted criminals in America and it is agreed that you should all split up. Jimmy and his friend John Chase are going out to Reno, Nevada, about Jimmy has been recruited by the Mob to kill an informer. John and Homer are going to St Paul, Minnesota to rent apartments, Eddie is going to Indianapolis, Indiana to lie low and Red and Tommy plan to hide out in Chicago, Illinois. You will have to hide out with until the heat wears off.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Jimmy to Reno to kill a guy", "result": "You drive to Reno with Jimmy and John Chase and once you arrive Jimmy meets with a man who gives him the address of the Mob Informer Roy Fritsch. You drive out to his house and ring the doorbell - as soon as Fritch opens the door you and Jimmy train your guns on him and order him into the car. The terrified man obeys and you all drive out of town and park next to an abandoned mine shaft. Jimmy orders John to take Fritsch out of the car over to the mine shaft - once the two are out of the car he glances at you.\n\n\"Do you want to drop him or shall I?\" he asks.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill the man", "result": "You and Jimmy get out of the car and walk up to the man. He looks terrified and stares at you with pleading eyes but you hardly glance at him. Raising your pistol you shoot him once in the head and he falls to the ground. Jimmy pumps several more bullets into his motionless back before dragging him over to the abandoned mine shaft and dropping him in.\n\nFor most of the next month you remain around Reno, Nevada and read about the search for you and your friends. At the start of April John and Homer escape St Paul after a shootout with FBI Agents, days later Eddie is killed in the same area. Eddie's death is the trigger that prompts you and the rest of the gang to reunite in the second half of April.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back Together", "result": "In Chicago the Gang comes back together in a sombre mood: Eddie's death has hit you all hard and while Jimmy is keen to continue robbing banks the rest of the Gang are in low spirits (even John) and you decide what you need is a holiday so you all make plans to have a rest in a little inn called Little Bohemia Lodge in the middle of a wood in Wisconsin.\n\nThis planned holiday doesn't do much to relax you all, you soon get the feeling that the staff and guests of the Lodge recognize you all as the notorious outlaws that you are and begin making plans to leave the Lodge. One night you are all in your rooms in the Lodge packing when suddenly you hear gunshots outside.\n\nIt is not a little gunfire either but a storm: the boom of a shotgun, the rattle of a machine gun and the pops of pistols all fill the night air, glancing out the window you see several men hiding in the trees are shooting the hell out of a car. Instinctively most of the gang begin making for a back window except Jimmy who characteristically grabs a pistol and runs for the front door.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Jimmy out the front door", "result": "You and Jimmy throw open the front door, fire several shots with your pistols at the men in the trees and run off to the right. Racing through the trees you finally make it to a brightly-lit house and run inside, startling an old man.\n\n\"Now don't get excited,\" Jimmy tells him. \"I won't harm you but this is a matter of life and death. We need your car.\"\n\nAs he is speaking a car pulls up outside.\n\n\"Who does that car belong to?\" you ask the old man.\n\n\"I don't know,\" he replies.\n\nPistols held ready you cautiously approach the car to find it is full of men, you recognize three of them as staff from the Lodge. You order most of them out, leaving three inside as hostages. Jimmy gets in the front while you get in the back and order the driver to drive. Before he can start yet another car, this one with three men in it, pulls up next to you.\n\n\"We're FBI, who's in that car?\" the man asks.\n\nImmediately Jimmy jumps out of the car, pistol in his hand, and approaches the car of FBI Agents.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow him", "result": "\"I know you bastards are wearing bulletproof vests,\" Jimmy declares. \"So I'll give it to you high and low.\"\n\nYou both raise your pistols and open fire.\n\nYour first shot grazes the driver in the head, panicking he throws open the car's passenger door and tumbles out onto the ground, the men in the back seat doing likewise. They both spring to their feet to run and you open up on them, hitting one of the men in the neck and the other man in the back. The men in the car behind you start running and Jimmy turns and fires at them too.\n\nYou and Jimmy jump into the FBI car and drive away. Behind you one of the FBI Agents fires his pistol at you but misses. As you drive away you notice another car full of FBI Agents driving towards you - finding a flashlight under the dashboard you click it on and shine the light full in the face of the approaching car, temporarily blinding the people inside until you safely pass.\n\nYou and Jimmy escape from Wisconsin after a series of difficult adventures and it takes you two months to reunite with the rest of the gang: in that time Red and Tommy are both killed by lawmen in separate gun battles and only your friends John and Homer are left. It is a very depleted gang that arranges a rendezvous in Indiana at the end of June.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Gang back together again", "result": "It is a weary and hunted group of men who gather in Indiana at the end of June. By this point you and John have survived being part of two outlaw gangs who have all been arrested or killed and now the members of your third gang are being hunted down and killed one by one. The writing is on the wall and while you and Homer are downcast and depressed John and Jimmy, who is never afraid of anything, remain upbeat and optimistic.\n\nJimmy brings his friend John Chase with him and the five of you discuss robbing a bank in the town of South Bend. You are worried about lack of members but Jimmy persuades the rest of you to let his friend John, a handsome and loyal but not over-intelligent individual, to join your Gang. You accept and that sunny day drive into South Bend to pull off your latest robbery.\n\nYou park the car and all climb out, Jimmy stays next to the car while you and Homer take up positions outside the bank while the two John's go inside. You hear gunshots inside. There is a policeman further down the street and at the sound of the shots he starts walking towards the bank. At your side Homer raises his rifle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot the cop", "result": "You raise your rifle and fire a single shot into the policeman's chest, fatally wounding him. At the sounds of the gunshots Jimmy opens fire with his machine gun after a civilian shot him in his bullet proof vest - you see a teenager sprint across the street and jump on Jimmy's back, Jimmy manages to throw him off through a shop window.\n\nYour companions emerge from the bank surrounded by several hostages, together you move towards the car. Policemen are running to the scene and despite the hostages they open fire on you all anyway. Two hostages are hit in the legs and suddenly Homer falls, a bullet in his head. The wound looks serious but to your amazement Homer manages to struggle into the getaway car. You all drive out of town.\n\nSitting in the back you count the money and find you have stolen $28,000, making your share $5,400. Homer's wound is bleeding a lot but turns out to be little more than a flesh wound. After some quick discussion you agree it is best if you all split up, John is going to hide out with friends in Chicago, Jimmy and John Chase are going to rent an apartment just outside Chicago while Homer is driving down to St Paul to lie low. You need to choose who to accompany.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hide out in Chicago with John", "result": "You go with John to Chicago where you lie low at the apartment of some lady friends of his for a few weeks. In the newspapers you read about how Jimmy and John Chase shoot two policemen and evade capture outside town. John talks about a major train robbery he is thinking of pulling off before fleeing to South America, you like the idea.\n\nAfter three weeks in hiding you both go to check out at a movie at the Biograph Theatre called Manhattan Melodrama with John's two lady friends. The movie is a good one, featuring Clark Gable as a petty criminal turned killer called Blakie. At the end of the movie he is executed for a murder and says \"Die the way you live, all of a sudden. Don't drag it out, living like that doesn't mean a thing.\"\n\nAfter the movie ends John turns to you and says quietly \"It is time to go.\"\n\nThe two of you, together with your lady companions, all stand up and walk out of the cinema. As you walk down the street you notice men in suits walking rapidly towards you from the right, glancing back you see three more men in suits walking quickly up behind you. They can only be FBI Agents. John has seen them too: he slips his hand in his pocket for his pistol and at the same time steps forward to run towards an alley that opens up just ahead of you to the left.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go for your gun", "result": "You reach into your pocket for your pistol, as you do the three FBI Agents behind you open fire with your own guns. You and John are both hit several times, staggering forward you make it to the mouth of the alley before collapsing dead in the street, your gun in your hand. John dies at your side: two legendary outlaws finally cut down in one last blaze of gunfire...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Run for the alley", "result": "You concentrate on running and break ahead of John as pistol shots ring out behind you. The Agents are focusing on shooting John, giving you the precious few seconds you need to make it to the alley and race down it. Luck is on your side: there is an open side door to the Biograph Cinema immediately on your left. You dart through it and slam it shut, as you do your last sight is John collapsing dead to the ground at the mouth of the alley.\n\nYou race through the cinema, fists pounding on the locked door behind you: the Biograph has an opening onto two different streets and you race through to the one that opens into the street on the other side of the building from the first exit you used. Hailing a passing taxi you order the driver to take you downtown as fast as possible.\n\nJohn Dillinger is dead and you are now the most hunted man in America: you have no choice but to hide out with Jimmy.", "action_results": [{"action": "Your last gunfight", "result": "You hide out with Jimmy, known throughout America now as Baby Face Nelson, and his loyal friend John Paul Chase for the autumn months, moving from one campsite to another. Finally at the end of November you all decide to seek shelter with a friend of Jimmy's in Wisconsin. You drive up to his home and are startled when a man in a suit comes out to meet you.\n\n\"Is Eddie here?\" Jimmy asks him.\n\n\"No,\" the man replies. \"He went downtown to do some shopping.\"\n\n\"Thank you,\" Jimmy replies, reverses the car and drives away. As you drive down the road Jimmy glances at you.\n\n\"Sure as hell that was a G man and we caught him with his pants down,\" Jimmy says with a grim smile. You continue to drive south, crossing the state border into Illinois. As you do you notice a car with two men in it pass you, make a U turn and follow you. Nelson frowns.\n\n\"What the hell is this?\" he demands. \"Let's see who those birds are.\"\n\nJimmy pulls two U turns of his own to put you all behind the car with the two men in it, accelerating he pulls alongside.\n\n\"Pull over,\" Jimmy yells.\n\nIn response the other car accelerates ahead.\n\n\"Let them have it,\" Jimmy shouts to you and John.\n\nSuddenly one of the men in the other car begins firing pistol shots back at your car. Startled you and John return fire with automatic rifles, the other car accelerates even more and quickly surges ahead out of sight. Your car is slowing down: one of the shots fired at your car has hit the motor. Suddenly a second car passing you in the other lane, again with two men in it pulls a U-Turn and begins following you. Cursing Jimmy pulls his car to the right and brakes, the other car brakes sharply ahead of you on the other side of the road.\n\nYou, Jimmy and John all jump out of your car and open fire with automatic rifles and machine guns on the two men in the other car. You can see one of the men is armed towards a machine gun, moving towards the back of the car, and the other man is armed with a shotgun as he moves towards the front of the car. You and John fire at them both.\n\nAt that moment Jimmy does something incredible: leaving the shelter of your own car which you have all been using as cover he begins to stride directly across the road, advancing in plain sight on the two rival gunmen who are almost certainly FBI Agents.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Jimmy", "result": "You follow Jimmy out from cover and advance on the other lawmen. The man with the machine gun runs out from behind the car, shooting several bullets into your chest. Wincing but still standing you shoot him twice in the chest, fatally wounding him. The other man races from around the front of the car and fires a shotgun blast into your legs. Somehow you remain standing and as the lawman throws aside his shotgun and draws a pistol you raise your machine gun and shoot him once in the head. He falls dead to the ground.\n\nBoth of your opponents are down but you have been fatally wounded: Jimmy is lying motionless on the road, dead as well. You sink to the ground as John Chase stops firing and runs over but it is too late. As you stare up at the sky you succumb to your wounds, slain in this last great gunfight that has brought a dramatic end to your remarkable career.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Cover him from behind your own car", "result": "You watch in amazement as Jimmy strides towards the two FBI Agents. One of them runs from the back of the car and fires several shots into Jimmy chest with his machine gun, Jimmy shoots him twice in return, fatally wounding him. The second Agent runs ahead of the car and fires a shotgun blast into Jimmy's legs. Jimmy sways but doesn't fall and as the FBI man throws aside his shotgun and draws a pistol Jimmy shoots him in the head with his machine gun killing him.\n\nJimmy staggers on to the FBI car and climbs in. You and John run forward and jump into the car as well, driving away from the two dead lawmen you have left at the scene. You can tell from looking at him that Jimmy is fatally wounded, you manage to get him to the safe house of some friend of his and lie him on the bed but it is too late.\n\n\"It's getting dark,\" Jimmy rasps to you. \"I can't see you anymore.\"\n\nMinutes later Jimmy dies. You and John make arrangements for the body to be dumped someplace where it can be found and discuss what to do. John has had enough of all this shooting: he has seen the other six members of the Dillinger Gang die now and though the newest recruit he has no wish to share their fate.\n\n\"I'm going back to California to surrender,\" he tells you.\n\nYou consider your options: Cuba doesn't seem like a bad idea...", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back to California with John to surrender", "result": "You and John drive back to California to surrender, John gets in touch with local law officers to arrange an arrest. In the last days of 1934, after a year and a half of running, you and John arrange to meet law officers in a peaceful park. Unarmed you are both peacefully taken into custody, the last of the Dillinger Gang. You can expect a very long prison sentence...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Flee to Cuba", "result": "Surrender is not for you and you part ways with John: him heading west and you heading east. While he is surrendering in California you are taking a boat out of America: you make it to Cuba where you purchase a small house at Varadero Beach. There you can live peacefully after your years of robberies and danger, the last of the Dillinger Gang.\n\nYou have done it. You have fought the law and won.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Hide out near Chicago with Jimmy and John", "result": "You go with Jimmy and John Chase to hide out in a small cabin in a wooded area outside Chicago. You manage to stay hidden for a few weeks until one night the three of you are standing around talking when suddenly a police car pulls down the drive, stops and a police officer gets out. You all tense.\n\n\"What's the trouble here?\" the policeman asks.\n\n\"No trouble at all,\" you call back to him.\n\nJimmy raises his machine gun.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open fire on the cops", "result": "You fire a blast of bullets at the policemen, hitting both of them. With the two lawmen down you, Jimmy and John hastily run to John's car, jump in and drive away. You quickly flee the Chicago area and it is a good thing that you do: a week later you are stunned to read in newspapers that your friend John Dillinger was shot dead by FBI Agents while leaving a cinema with two friends in Chicago. A month later Homer Van Meter is tracked down and killed to.\n\nYou are now the most wanted man in America.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Leave it to Jimmy", "result": "Jimmy fires a blast of bullets at the policemen, hitting both of them. With the two lawmen down you, Jimmy and John hastily run to John's car, jump in and drive away. You quickly flee the Chicago area and it is a good thing that you do: a week later you are stunned to read in newspapers that your friend John Dillinger was shot dead by FBI Agents while leaving a cinema with two friends in Chicago. A month later Homer Van Meter is tracked down and killed to.\n\nYou are now the most wanted man in America.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Hide out in St Paul with Homer", "result": "You and Homer go to hide out in an apartment in St Paul, leaving only to buy food and newspapers. One morning you step outside, buy a newspaper and read to your horror that your friend John Dillinger was shot dead by FBI Agents the night before while leaving a cinema with two female companions. You take the news to Homer in shock.\n\nYou are now the most wanted man in America.\n\nAfter John's death you and Homer continue to hide in St Paul, not even trying to make contact with Jimmy. One afternoon you and Homer go to meet a friend of Homer's in a car dealership in St Paul. Going inside the car dealership you find the building completely deserted. Sensing trouble you both leave the building to find yourself confronted by four policemen.\n\n\"Stick them up!\" one of the officers yells.\n\nYou and Homer immediately draw your pistols and fire at the policemen, prompting them to scatter for cover. The two of you sprint down the street, the lawmen initially firing you but then giving chase, fearful of accidentally shooting other people on the street. There is an alley to your left and Homer darts down it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Homer down the alleyway", "result": "You follow Homer down the alleyway but you are both out of luck: it is a dead end. As you turn you find the four lawmen blocking the entrance of the alley, before you can react they all open fire on you. Homer is blasted off his feet by a shotgun blast, you are shot several times through the chest and riddled with bullets as you raise your pistol. You both collapse to the ground and die, cut down in one final gunfight.\n\nJimmy is killed three months later, bringing an end to the Dillinger Gang.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Keep running", "result": "You ignore Homer and keep running, reaching the corner of the street and racing around it. Homer has run into a dead-end alley and the fact that he is trapped distracts all four of your pursuers: they fire more than fifty bullets into his body. You make it down the street, hijack a passing car and make your escape from St Paul.\n\nYou are now the most wanted man in America and have no choice but to hide out with Jimmy.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Leave him to Homer", "result": "Homer raises his rifle and fire a single shot into the policeman's chest, fatally wounding him. At the sounds of the gunshots Jimmy opens fire with his machine gun after a civilian shot him in his bullet proof vest - you see a teenager sprint across the street and jump on Jimmy's back, Jimmy manages to throw him off through a shop window.\n\nYour companions emerge from the bank surrounded by several hostages, together you move towards the car. Policemen are running to the scene and despite the hostages they open fire on you all anyway. Two hostages are hit in the legs and suddenly Homer falls, a bullet in his head. The wound looks serious but to your amazement Homer manages to struggle into the getaway car. You all drive out of town.\n\nSitting in the back you count the money and find you have stolen $28,000, making your share $5,400. Homer's wound is bleeding a lot but turns out to be little more than a flesh wound. After some quick discussion you agree it is best if you all split up, John is going to hide out with friends in Chicago, Jimmy and John Chase are going to rent an apartment just outside Chicago while Homer is driving down to St Paul to lie low. You need to choose who to accompany.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay in the car", "result": "\"I know you bastards are wearing bulletproof vests,\" Jimmy declares. \"So I'll give it to you high and low.\"\n\nYou watch as he raises his pistol and opens fire.\n\nHis first shot grazes the driver in the head, panicking he throws open the car's passenger door and tumbles out onto the ground, the men in the back seat doing likewise. They both spring to their feet to run and Jimmy opens up on them too, hitting one of the men in the neck and the other man in the back. The men in the car behind you start running and Jimmy turns and fires at them too.\n\nYou and Jimmy jump into the FBI car and drive away. Behind you one of the FBI Agents fires his pistol at you but misses. As you drive away you notice another car full of FBI Agents driving towards you - finding a flashlight under the dashboard you click it on and shine the light full in the face of the approaching car, temporarily blinding the people inside until you safely pass.\n\nYou and Jimmy escape from Wisconsin after a series of difficult adventures and it takes you two months to reunite with the rest of the gang: in that time Red and Tommy are both killed by lawmen in separate gun battles and only your friends John and Homer are left. It is a very depleted gang that arranges a rendezvous in Indiana at the end of June.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Follow John, Homer, Red and Tommy out the back window", "result": "You join the others in running towards the back window - as you do you hear a voice yell \"Police! Stop!\" John fires a burst of machine gun bullets out of the window and jumps back as a lawman outside fires three blasts from a shotgun in return. Glancing cautiously outside John sees the coast is clear and one by one you all quickly jump out of the window. Landing on a pile of snow you race through the trees, down a flight of steps that lead down to a beach on the edge of a Lake.\n\nThere the party splits: John, Red and Homer run right while Tommy runs left. You need to decide who to follow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run right after John, Red and Homer", "result": "You follow John, Red and Homer and race down the beach and through trees before reaching a house where you force the owner to surrender the keys of his car. Driving through the night you head south towards St Paul - the next morning you are just approaching St Paul when suddenly men in a car behind you open fire on your car with machine guns, missing. They are police who recognized your car from stolen car reports.\n\nHomer is at the wheel and immediately guns down the accelerator while John leans out of a side window and fires back at the car of the lawmen with a machine gun. You are sitting in the other passenger seat while Red is in the middle seat, John yells for you to lean out of the window and fire at the lawmen as well.", "action_results": [{"action": "Lean out of the other window and fire at them too.", "result": "You smash out your window, lean out and fire with your pistol at the pursuing police car. Suddenly Red yells, a bullet has passed through the car and hit him in the back. Homer manages to lose the cops after a curve by pulling right down a road, braking and waiting for the lawmen to shoot past and then reversing back out onto the road and driving back the way you came.\n\nYou seek assistance from fellow criminals in St Paul but there is nothing you can do for Red: his wound is mortal. For three days he lingers in great agony before dying from his wound: you, John and Homer bury your friend in an unmarked grave. Sadness and anger in your hearts you reunite with Tommy in St Paul (there is no sign of Jimmy although he definitely escaped Little Bohemia Lodge, killing an FBI Agent in the process) and plan another bank robbery.", "action_results": [{"action": "Another Bank Job", "result": "One spring afternoon the four of you drive into the little town of Fostoria, Ohio where Tommy stays in the car while you, John and Homer stride into the bank. You all pull machine guns out from under your coats.\n\n\"Stick them up,\" Homer yells. The staff raise their arms, one of the female tellers starts to cry.\n\n\"Don't kill me,\" she pleads to Homer.\n\n\"You be quiet and I won't,\" he tells her.\n\nWhile John empties the vault you and Homer remain in the lobby, watching the customers. As you do a policeman suddenly bursts through the bank's front doors, a pistol in his hand.\n\n\"Shoot him,\" Homer yells, raising his own gun.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot the policeman", "result": "You raise your machine gun and fire a single shot, hitting the policeman in the chest. He staggers back out of the bank's doors. John is soon finished and the pair of you sprint out of the bank and into the car, which Tommy has parked just outside. Roaring out of town you find you have stolen $17,000, of which your share is $4,200.\n\nYou all talk and decide it would be a good idea to split up again, you still have no idea where Jimmy is and you are all the most wanted men in the country. John and Homer have the bright idea of buying a truck in Chicago and living in the back of that while Tommy plans to go to lie low in little towns in Iowa. You need to choose who to accompany.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with John and Homer to hide out in Chicago", "result": "You, John and Homer head to Chicago where you buy a red truck, put mattresses in the back and essentially live in it for a month. In the evenings you sit in the large cabin at the front and talk: it's not much of a way to live but at least it is keeping you alive. One evening you are sitting in the front of the truck talking when a police car pulls up alongside you with two men in it. One of them orders you all out of the truck.\n\nHomer picks up a machine gun.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Homer in opening fire at the cops", "result": "Before Homer can react you raise your machine gun and fire twenty bullets into the police car, hitting both policemen several times and killing them. You promptly drive away from the scene of the crime and flee Chicago. You continue to drive around on the run, hearing on the radio that Tommy was recognized by lawmen in Iowa and killed in a gunfight. With the gang dwindling you reluctantly re-establish contact with Jimmy and arrange a rendezvous in Indiana.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Sit tight", "result": "As you watch Homer raises his machine gun and fires twenty bullets into the police car, hitting both policemen several times and killing them. You promptly drive away from the scene of the crime and flee Chicago. You continue to drive around on the run, hearing on the radio that Tommy was recognized by lawmen in Iowa and killed in a gunfight. With the gang dwindling you reluctantly re-establish contact with Jimmy and arrange a rendezvous in Indiana.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Go with Tommy to hide out in Iowa", "result": "You and Tommy drive up to the little town of Waterloo in Iowa and lie low for a month, reading in newspapers that John and Homer killed two policemen in Chicago and escaped after yet another gunfight. One afternoon you and Tommy are walking towards your car to go for a drive when two men suddenly approach you.\n\n\"Hey, just a minute,\" one of them calls. \"Who are you?\"\n\n\"Who are you?\" Tommy replies.\n\n\"Police officers,\" one of the men says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go for your gun", "result": "You reach for your pistol in your pocket but the second policeman already has his drawn - raising it he shoots you in the chest. You fall backwards to the ground, a moment later Tommy is shot as well. You die on the sidewalk, Tommy an hour later. In time the rest of the Dillinger Gang will be killed as well but your crimes have already been enough to make your name infamous long after you are gone.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Run", "result": "Without hesitation you turn and dart left down an alleyway - because Tommy actually has his pistol in his hand he is the bigger threat now: one of the detectives shoots him and fatally wounds him. You hear the gunshot and the yell of one of the lawmen for you to halt but you make it to the end of the alley and race around the corner a second before the lawman fires after you. Emerging onto a busy road you quickly flag down a passing car, jump inside and taking the driver hostage you order him to get you out of Iowa.\n\nYou make your escape, heart pounding, and drive down to Indiana to meet up with the rest of the gang.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Let Homer deal with him", "result": "Homer raises his machine gun and fires a single shot, hitting the policeman in the chest. He staggers back out of the bank's doors. John is soon finished and the pair of you sprint out of the bank and into the car, which Tommy has parked just outside. Roaring out of town you find you have stolen $17,000, of which your share is $4,200.\n\nYou all talk and decide it would be a good idea to split up again, you still have no idea where Jimmy is and you are all the most wanted men in the country. John and Homer have the bright idea of buying a truck in Chicago and living in the back of that while Tommy plans to go to lie low in little towns in Iowa. You need to choose who to accompany.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay in your seat", "result": "You remain in your seat but it is a fateful decision: bullets fired by the pursuing lawmen punch through the rear of the car. One hits Red in the back, a moment later one hits you in the back of the head, killing you instantly. Perhaps you are the more fortunate one: Red lingers for days in agony before dying of his wound. In time all the members of the Dillinger Gang will be killed by lawmen, though your crimes will at least ensure your name remains infamous after you are gone.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Run left after Tommy", "result": "You and Tommy run left, stumbling through the woods for an hour before reaching a house where you steal a car and drive to St Paul. You reach safety ahead of the rest of the Gang and learn that John, Red and Homer were in another high-speed gunfight while driving into St Paul during which Red was hit and killed. Jimmy also managed to escape Little Bohemia Lodge, killing an FBI Agent in the process. You manage to reunite with John and Homer in St Paul, both are in a grim mood after seeing your friend Red die and having to bury him. The four of you quickly plan another bank robbery.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Let Jimmy do it", "result": "You remain in the car staring at the dashboard while Jimmy gets out of the car and walks away. There is silence for a second then a gunshot, a pause and several more gunshots. After that you hear the sound of a body being dragged along the ground as Jimmy drops Fritsch's corpse down the mine shaft then he and John Chase get back in the car and you all drive away.\n\nFor most of the next month you remain around Reno, Nevada and read about the search for you and your friends. At the start of April John and Homer escape St Paul after a shootout with FBI Agents, days later Eddie is killed in the same area. Eddie's death is the trigger that prompts you and the rest of the gang to reunite in the second half of April.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Hide out with John and Homer in St Paul", "result": "You, Homer and John go to St Paul where you rent an apartment with John. The weeks after the Mason City Robbery initially pass quietly but one morning you are disturbed by a knock on the door.\n\n\"This is Henry Cummings, St Pauls Police,\" a voice calls out. \"Is Carl Hellman there?\"\n\nCarl Hellman is the name you used to book the apartments.\n\n\"He's just left and won't be back till this afternoon,\" you tell the man as John springs to his feet. \"Come back then.\"\n\n\"We'll talk to you then,\" the policeman on the other side of the door says.\n\n\"I'm not dressed,\" you reply.\n\n\"We'll wait until you dress.\"\n\n\"It's the cops,\" you tell John quietly. John nods, he has already fetched his machine gun from the wardrobe. Suddenly you hear the pop-pop-pop of pistol shots outside. Without hesitation John raises his machine gun and fires a burst of bullets through the door, throws it open and fires down the corridor. A policeman sheltering in a doorway fires back, one of his shots hits John's leg making him wince. The two of you flee down the corridor and stairs, out the back door and jump in your car. John's wound is painful but not dangerous.\n\nYou later learn the gunshots you heard outside was Homer who encountered FBI Agents as he entered the building to visit you, recognized them as lawman and opened fire. Apart from John no one else was hit in the gunfight but a few days later Eddie is ambushed and killed by FBI Agents. His death saddens you and prompts the remainder of the gang to reunite in the second half of April.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Hide out with Eddie in Indianapolis", "result": "You and Eddie hide out in Indianapolis for a few weeks until you get word that John and Homer were approached by FBI Agents at John's apartment and fled town after a gunfight. Much of Homer's stuff is still at his apartment but he doesn't dare go back for it in case the FBI is watching it, Eddie decides to pay a woman he knows to go to the apartment, collect up all the stuff and then drop by her apartment to pick it up. You are nervous about the idea but Eddie asks you to accompany him.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Eddie to pick up Homer's stuff in St Paul", "result": "You go with Eddie to his friend's apartment, park the car and walk up the drive to the door. As you approach the door opens, the woman inside shoves a suitcase out to Eddie and closes the door without a word. Exchanging glances the two of you turn and start walking back to your car.\n\nAt that point the kitchen window next to the door behind you explodes in a hail of machine gun fire. There is a burst of light as you are hit in the back of the head by a bullet and killed instantly. Eddie is not so lucky, hit in the head too he will linger for three days in great agony. You die on the sidewalk, slain by the FBI Agents waiting in ambush.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay in Indianapolis", "result": "It is a good thing you do not go with Eddie to St Paul, when he doesn't return you get nervous and clear out of Indianapolis. The next day you read how Eddie was ambushed and killed by waiting FBI Agents, you were lucky not to share the same fate. Unnerved by your narrow escape you arrange a reunion with the rest of the Gang in the second half of the month.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Hide out with Red and Tommy in Chicago", "result": "You hide out with Red and Tommy in Chicago and have a peaceful month, unlike your friends. You read in newspapers how John and Homer shoot their way out of an FBI ambush in St Paul, a short time later Eddie is killed in a second FBI ambush. With Jimmy back from Nevada and John and Homer in Chicago you decide it is time for another reunion.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Leave it to someone else", "result": "You ignore Eddie and watch as Red fires a burst of bullets at the gun case, most hitting the bulletproof glass but one goes through the narrow gun port and grazes the side of the guard's head. At that moment you hear a burst of machine gun fire outside. Leaving Eddie and Homer to control the lobby while Red deals with the vault you hurry outside. John is immediately outside the doors surrounded by hostages but Jimmy is further down the street, firing his machine gun wildly and laughing. You watch as he shoots an unarmed old man in the leg, knocking him to the ground. You jog over.\n\n\"I thought you were a cop you son of a bitch,\" Jimmy yells at him.\n\n\"I'm not a cop,\" the man moans.\n\n\"Did you have to do that?\" you ask Jimmy wearily.\n\n\"I thought he was a cop,\" Jimmy snaps at you.\n\nYou turn around as a gunshot rings out: a man firing from a window has clipped John in the shoulder. You and John fire your pistols at the window and the man inside jumps back. John shouts to those in the bank that you're all leaving a moment later Red, Eddie and Homer come jogging out. As they do the man in the window fires again, this time grazing Red's shoulder.\n\nSurrounded by hostages you all pile into the car and drive out of town surrounded by hostages. You are all in a bad mood, John and Red's wounds are painful but not serious and you had to leave before you could get all the money. Even so you discover that you have stolen $52,000, making your share $7,400.\n\nYour latest bank robbery has made you all the most wanted criminals in America and it is agreed that you should all split up. Jimmy and his friend John Chase are going out to Reno, Nevada, about Jimmy has been recruited by the Mob to kill an informer. John and Homer are going to St Paul, Minnesota to rent apartments, Eddie is going to Indianapolis, Indiana to lie low and Red and Tommy plan to hide out in Chicago, Illinois. You will have to hide out with until the heat wears off.", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Ignore Jimmy", "result": "You ignore Jimmy and a moment later he fires a burst of bullets through the bank window, hitting the cop several times. As the policeman falls to the floor Nelson laughs.\n\n\"I got one,\" he yells. \"I got one!\"\n\nMoments later John and Homer are finished in the vault and hurrying outside surrounded by hostages you all scramble into the car. A few stray shots are fired at you, Jimmy fires bursts from his machine gun in reply. On the drive out of town you count the money and find you have stolen $46,000, making your share $6,500.\n\nA week later you all drive into Mason City, Iowa for your next bank job. Tommy stays in the car and Jimmy and John guard the doors while you lead Homer, Eddie and Tommy into the large First National Bank. Upon entering Eddie fires a burst of bullets from his machine gun into the ceiling.\n\n\"Hands up! Hands up!\" you shout. \"Everybody on the floor!\"\n\nHomer strides towards the counter, one of the teller runs from the counter into an office and tries to slams the door. Homer fires a burst of bullets through the thin wooden door and you hear a shout of pain. Suddenly there is a strange whumping noise and something hits Eddie in the back. It is a tear gas canister and it quickly begins leaking out clouds of gas.\n\nLooking up you see a blue-uniformed guard sitting in a cage lined with bulletproof glass, he has just fired the tear gas through a narrow gun slit and is hastily trying to reload the tear gas gun.\n\n\"Get that son of a bitch with the tear gas!\" Eddie yells at you, rubbing his back angrily.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Hang back", "result": "You watch as Jimmy shoots the man twice in the chest and he falls to the ground. A woman screams, jumps out of the car and runs to his side.\n\n\"You've killed him,\" she wails.\n\n\"Keep your damned mouth shut or I'll let you have it too,\" Jimmy snarls at her. You both jump back inside your car and speed off back to the hideout. The next day you prepare to set off with the gang to rob the Sioux Falls Bank.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Surrender", "result": "Unwilling to take the risk you raise your hands and surrender to the FBI Agents. You and Chuck are taken into custody and tell the FBI exactly nothing but it does you no good: identified as participants in the Grand Haven and Brainerd Bank Robberies you both receive lengthy prison sentences. When John is arrested the following month you are transferred to Crown Point Prison in Indiana to be interviewed - in prison you are reunited with John.\n\nJohn does not intend to stay in prison however...", "action_results": [{"action": "John's greatest trick", "result": "One morning a civilian cleaner comes in to clean the cells when John, brandishing a wooden gun, jumps forwards and takes him prisoner. Using the cleaner to summon four guards from the guardroom outside the cell block one by one you and John take them all prisoner and lock them in the cells. Once that is accomplished you take one of the guards hostage and order him in front of you.\n\n\"I'll be goddamned if I'll help you get out of here,\" he snaps at you. \"Shoot and be goddamned.\"\n\n\"I have everything to gain and nothing to lose,\" John warns him icily. \"You can either be a dead hero or a live coward. You have a wife and baby that you love dearly and would like to see again haven't you?\"\n\nThe guard gives in. Using the guard as a prisoner you go down to the guardroom where you and John arm yourselves with two machine guns. Moving into the jail's kitchen you capture three more guards. One of the guards, a giant of a man, takes one look at your machine gun and declares \"I'll take that thing and shove it up your ass!\"\n\n\"My god Bill,\" your hostage guard exclaims. \"Don't! They mean business.\"\n\nYou quickly disarm your new prisoners and herd them down to the prison's garage where two mechanics are at work. Taking them prisoner you choose a car, pile in with two hostages and drive out of town. John is so happy he stars singing on the way. After dropping your two prisoners off you speed on, elated to be free once again.\n\nThrough Red you arrange a meeting with Homer Van Meter and his gang.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Head out with Tommy", "result": "You and Tommy go outside, flag down a taxi and order it to take you to a bar. You can't help noticing that as you pull away from the apartment a black car behind you does likewise and everywhere you go the black car, with two men inside, remains steadfastly behind you.\n\n\"Tommy, I think that car is following us,\" you mutter to your companion.\n\n\"Stop the car,\" Tommy orders the taxi driver.\n\nAs the taxi screeches to a halt you both jump out and race around the corner of the street to find yourselves in a dead-end alley. Tommy turns, draws his pistol and trains it on the corner you have just run around. You draw your pistol and follow suit, wondering if you should open fire on the next people to come around the corner.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fire at any pursuers", "result": "As soon as the two lawmen come around the corner, one holding a shotgun and one holding a pistol you open fire, hitting the detective with the shotgun in the head. As he falls to the ground Tommy shoots the other man twice in the arm, making him drop his pistol. The wounded detective cradles his wounded arm and looks at the pair of you. You train your gun on him and watch him while Tommy runs out into the street and stops a pickup truck at gunpoint. Scooping up the wounded and dead lawmens' weapons you run to the truck, join him and drive out of town.\n\nYou flee across the country to St Paul, reading in newspapers along the way that Chuck Fisher was arrested at the apartment in San Antonio but told the police nothing. Finally you re-join Jimmy, Homer and Eddie in St Paul where they are shocked to learn about what has happened. The five of you lie low for the rest of the winter before making plans for new robberies next spring.\n\nHowever that spring you hear how John Dillinger, recently escaped from prison and his friend Red Hamilton want to join forces with the Nelson Gang. A meeting is soon arranged between you all.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Leave the shooting to Tommy", "result": "You wait and do nothing as two lawmen, one holding a shotgun and one holding a pistol, run around the corner. Tommy opens fire at them, shooting the first lawmen in the head and the second in the arm. The wounded lawman drops his pistol and cradles his arm while the dead lawman lies on the ground motionless - while Tommy covers the remaining man with his gun you run out into the street, hijack a pickup truck at gunpoint and the two of you make your escape on it.\n\nYou flee across the country to St Paul, reading in newspapers along the way that Chuck Fisher was arrested at the apartment in San Antonio but told the police nothing. Finally you re-join Jimmy, Homer and Eddie in St Paul where they are shocked to learn about what has happened. The five of you lie low for the rest of the winter before making plans for new robberies next spring.\n\nHowever that spring you hear how John Dillinger, recently escaped from prison and his friend Red Hamilton want to join forces with the Nelson Gang. A meeting is soon arranged between you all.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Go with Jimmy, Eddie and Homer to St Paul", "result": "You decide to hide out with Jimmy, Homer and Eddie and the four of you check into apartments in St Paul. In December you are joined by Tommy Carroll who fled San Antonio after being tracked down and shooting two lawmen in a gunfight - Chuck Fisher was not so lucky and was arrested at his apartment. You and the other four remaining members of the Nelson Gang agree that you should lie low and wait to pull off more bank robberies next spring.\n\nThe following spring you read how John Dillinger and all his gang have been arrested, happily he soon escapes from prison and together with his friend Red Hamilton want to join forces with the Nelson Gang. A meeting is soon arranged between you all.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Try fleeing on foot", "result": "You and Earl start running down the street but you don't get far: two policemen sheltering in a doorway who you didn't even know were there burst from cover and crash-tackle you and Earl to the ground. Your gun goes flying and you try to struggle but a pistol is shoved in your face quickly convincing you to stop. You are both taken into custody and within days found guilty of bank robbery.\n\nYou have only been out of prison for five months when you are sent back to Michigan State Penitentiary to serve your time - there you are reunited with your friends Pete Pierpont, Charles Makley, Red Hamilton and Russell Clark.\n\nFortunately John does not intend for you to stay in prison for long...", "action_results": [{"action": "Escape!", "result": "That afternoon you are all working in the prison workshop when you and your friends are handed a box of thread by a guard. Hidden inside the box is several pistols; unseen by the guards you and your companions pull them out and hand them out amongst yourselves until seven you are armed. At a nod to each other you move through the workshop and without morning you quickly take several guards hostage - altogether eleven prisoners are in the plan to escape including you.\n\nThe ambush is going well and forming the guards into a circle around you and have them much you at gunpoint through the prison before using your hostages to force the guards to open the gates to the administration centre. There you capture a further eight clerks and order them all into the vault. Some of the clerks appear to be deliberately going slow and someone yells for someone to shoot them.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot one of the civilians in the leg as a warning to the others", "result": "Irritated you raise your pistol and shoot one of the men in the leg. He falls to the floor but it does well in getting the others moving faster, grabbing their wounded colleague under the arms they help drag him into the vault, leaving a trail of blood. With the alarm raised you all run outside and split into two groups, six of the prisoners go one way while you, Harry, Charles, Russell and Red steal a car and start driving to Indianapolis.\n\nReaching Indianapolis you are able to reunite with Harry Copeland, John's friend, and from him you learn that John has been arrested and is being held in Lima Prison. Harry is keen for you to rescue John right away but the others would rather rob a bank in nearby St Mary's, Ohio first to raise some funds. Harry, who doesn't know your companions very well, decides to go and hide out in Chicago for a few months.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Harry, Charles, Red and Russell in the bank job", "result": "On the chosen day the five of you drive into the little town of St Mary's in Ohio. While you and Russell wait in the car the others walk into the town's bank and quickly rob it. They emerge minutes later having locked the staff in the vault after a straight-forward robbery and you all drive out of town. The take from the bank is $11,000, making your share $2,200.\n\nNine days after the St Mary's Bank Job you are ready to make your raid on Lima Prison to rescue John Dillinger. The plan is for you all to drive to the prison and while Russell waits in the car Harry, Red and Charles will pretend to be lawmen and ask to see John. They will draw their guns, take the lawmen in the little jail hostage and free him. You need to choose which part of the plan you join.", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter the prison with Harry, Red and Charles", "result": "You and your companions drive up to Lima Prison that night and knock on the door. It is opened by a portly and friendly-looking Sheriff.\n\n\"What do you need?\" he asks cheerfully.\n\n\"We're from Michigan City,\" you tell him. \"We want to see John Dillinger.\"\n\n\"Let me see your credentials,\" the Sheriff says.\n\n\"Here's out credentials,\" you say and you and your companions draw your pistols. The Sheriff takes one look and grabs for your gun. Shocked you instinctively squeeze the trigger and shoot him in the chest. The Sheriff falls to the ground, as he does his wife across the room screams.\n\n\"Give us the keys to the cells,\" Harry shouts at her and frightened she fetches the keys for him. You see John standing in a jail cell smiling as Harry gets the keys and hurries up to free him. Next to you the Sheriff lies on the floor gasping.\n\n\"Oh men, why did you have to do this to me?\" he moans. \"My love, I believe I am going to have to leave you,\" he tells his wife. You say nothing and avoid looking at the Sheriff as John grabs his hat and coat and joins the rest of you in hurrying out of the bank. John is elated by the rescue and together you are all swiftly making plans for your next bank job.", "action_results": [{"action": "Your Biggest Bank Job", "result": "One autumn afternoon you all drive into Greencastle, Indiana. While Russell sits in the car you and Charles take up positions at the door while John, Harry and Red go straight into the bank. The robbery unfolds seamlessly, they emerge minutes later clutching sacks bulging with cash. In the drive out of town you count it: $75,000! It is the biggest amount you have ever stolen and each person's share is $12,500.\n\nYou initially flee to Chicago but there is soon some bad news: you and John's friend Harry Copeland is arrested after foolishly getting into a drunken fight. You all decide to clear out of town and with your crimes now making national headlines you decide to rob a bank in Racine, Wisconsin, expecting it to be an easy job.", "action_results": [{"action": "Another Bank Job", "result": "One winter's day you all drive into Racine, leaving Russell in the car and Red at the doors you, John, Harry and Charles stride into the bank. You stride right up to the teller's windows where the man inside is talking on the phone.\n\n\"Stick them up,\" Charles orders.\n\n\"Next window please,\" the man replies tersely without looking up.\n\nCharles raises his pistol and shoots the man in the arm, knocking him off his chair. Moments later a loud alarm siren starts blaring out, you and your companions glance at each other. Leaving you and Charles in the lobby John and Harry run into the vault to begin stealing the contents. As you are standing by the doors a policeman comes wandering through and you grab him. Moments later a second policeman steps through the doors holding a machine gun.\n\n\"Get that cop with the machine gun,\" Harry shouts from over by the vault.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot the policeman", "result": "Raising your pistol you shoot the policeman in the hand, while he is stunned you step forward, wrench the machine gun from his grasp and order him to join his companions. Moments later a third policeman wanders in through the doors.\n\n\"Well come right in and join us,\" John calls to him and points his gun at him.\n\nHolding several hostages around you all leave the bank in a close group and move down towards the car. There are some lawmen on the street and Charles opens fire on them with his machine gun twice, prompting them to dive for cover. Reaching the car you all pile inside with two hostages on the running boards.\n\nYou drive out of town, release the hostages and count the money to find you have stolen $25,000, making your share $4,100. The Gang decides after this robbery it is time for you all to lie low and decide to head to Daytona Beach, Florida for the Christmas Vacation, except Red who wants to go to Chicago to look over some banks first. You need to choose who to accompany.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Red to Chicago to look at banks", "result": "You and Red drive into Chicago where you spend a few weeks checking out banks in East Chicago for a good target. One morning you are walking down to the garage to get your car where you are startled to see three policemen standing around the car examining it and making notes. As you approach the lawmen turn to face you.\n\n\"Excuse me gentlemen, is this your car?\" one asks.\n\nRed draws his pistol.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open fire on the lawmen", "result": "Drawing your pistol you raise it and shoot one of the lawmen through the chest. As he falls to the ground mortally wounded you and Red open fire on the other two lawmen, who dive for cover. Sprinting out of the garage you hijack a passing car and speed out of town, you don't stop driving until you join the rest of the gang at Daytona Beach.\n\nThat Christmas and New Year you celebrate with barbecues and presents with your friends, clever Harry, reliable Charles, gregarious Russell, absent-minded Red and of course the charismatic John who is the life and soul of the party. You have had a tumultuous but generally successful year, in papers you read that the Baby Face Nelson Gang, who Homer Van Meter has joined, is likewise prospering.\n\nAfter the New Year most of the gang intend to continue their vacation in Tucson, Arizona while John and Red want to rob one of the banks in East Chicago Red has been checking out. It is agreed that the gang will split up and reunite in a few days, you need to choose which half of the gang you will accompany.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rob a bank with John and Red", "result": "Parting from the rest of the gang you and your two companions drive up to the First National Bank and leaving the car unoccupied you all enter the bank.\n\n\"This is a stick-up,\" John calls out, chewing his gum. \"Raise your hands everybody.\"\n\nThe customers and staff raise their hands, one man glancing at a small amount of his money he has left lying on a counter.\n\n\"Go ahead and take your money,\" John tells him. \"We don't want your money, just the bank's.\"\n\nYou guard the door while John watches the hostages and Red empties the safe, one policeman comes through the door and you quickly capture him. Through the window you can see more policemen running to take cover behind cars further down the street.\n\n\"Cops outside,\" you warn John.\n\n\"Don't let those coppers worry you,\" John calls back cheerfully. \"Take your time Red and be sure you get all the dough. We'll take care of them birds on the outside when we get there.\" John grabs the captured policeman by the arm and pushes him in front of him. \"You go first,\" he tells him. \"They might as well shoot you as me. We love you guys anyway.\"\n\nSheltering behind hostages you, John and Red all emerge from the bank and move in a tight scrum towards your escape car, several policemen watching you with their guns trained on you all but not daring to fire. Suddenly one of the policemen sees an opening and fires his pistol several times, hitting John in his bullet-proof vest. For the first time you've known him John loses his temper.\n\n\"I'll get that son of a bitch,\" he snarls and raises his machine gun.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fire at the policeman", "result": "Raising your own machine gun you fire a burst of bullets into the policeman who shot at John, he crumples to the ground dead. There's a moment's pause and then the other six policemen open fire as you, John and Red break from your hostages and sprint towards your getaway car. Red is shot through the stomach and the shoulder and stumbles but keeps running, somehow you all make it to the car and throw yourselves inside. With John at the wheel and windows exploding all around you lurch away from the kerb and speed down the street, turn the corner and escape.\n\nYou have made it away with $25,000, making your share $6,600 but Red is seriously wounded, breathing with a hollow, rasping sound. There is no way he can make a long-distance journey now so it is decided he will stay with friends in Chicago while John drives down and joins the rest of the gang in Tucson. You need to choose who to go with.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help take care of Red in Chicago", "result": "You decide to go with Red to Chicago and help nurse him into health: it is a good thing that you do because just ten days after you split off from him John, Harry, Charles and Russell are all arrested by Tucson Police after they were recognized from wanted posters. With all four of your friends in prison you and Red remain the only two members of the Dillinger Gang still at large.\n\nYou are unsure what to do and as two months pass you focus on helping Red get better until one morning in the newspapers you read incredible news: John has managed to escape prison at Crown Point, Indiana by using a wooden gun to take some twenty people hostage. You and Red are both elated and now your friend has recovered enough to be able to move around you both set off to meet up with John and some new friends.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Drive down to Tucson with John", "result": "You and John join the others in Arizona where you tell them about the bank robbery and what has happened to Red, the others are downcast but not overly-concerned. You all agree you will relax in the city for a month or two and when Red is better you'll all hit some more banks together in the Midwest.\n\nEverything seems to be going well until one evening you and John are heading over to Russell's apartment to see if he wants to join you all for a drink. As you approach the cottage door you notice blood on the step. Turning around you are startled to find yourself facing two lawmen, guns in their hands.\n\n\"Put up those hands or we'll shoot you,\" one of the men threatens.\n\nThis time you get no chance to run. You and John slowly raise your hands. The Tucson Police take you into custody, it later transpires there was a fire at the hotel some of the gang was staying at, a fireman recognized them from wanted pictures and warned the police. In one day you, John, Harry, Charles and Russell are all arrested after brief struggles.\n\nYou and John and transferred to Crown Point, Indiana for trial where you are both suspected of taking part in the East Chicago Bank Robbery ten days before your arrest where a policeman was shot and killed. If convicted you could face the electric chair. You are downcast but John remains upbeat, he has no intention of staying in jail for long...", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Concentrate on making it to the car", "result": "John fires a burst of bullets into the policeman who shot at him, the lawman crumples to the ground dead. There's a moment's pause and then the other six policemen open fire as you, John and Red break from your hostages and sprint towards your getaway car. Red is shot through the stomach and the shoulder and stumbles but keeps running, somehow you all make it to the car and throw yourselves inside. With John at the wheel and windows exploding all around you lurch away from the kerb and speed down the street, turn the corner and escape.\n\nYou have made it away with $25,000, making your share $6,600 but Red is seriously wounded, breathing with a hollow, rasping sound. There is no way he can make a long-distance journey now so it is decided he will stay with friends in Chicago while John drives down and joins the rest of the gang in Tucson. You need to choose who to go with.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Continue hiding out with Harry, Charles and Russell", "result": "You and the others all drive down to Tucson and settle yourselves comfortably in that desert town, you are soon joined by a rather shaken John. He pulled off the bank robbery in East Chicago but Red was shot and seriously wounded, John has left him in Chicago to recover. The five of you do your best to enjoy yourselves in the city without him.\n\nEverything seems to be going well until one evening you and John are heading over to Russell's apartment to see if he wants to join you all for a drink. As you approach the cottage door you notice blood on the step. Turning around you are startled to find yourself facing two lawmen, guns in their hands.\n\n\"Put up those hands or we'll shoot you,\" one of the men threatens.\n\nThis time you get no chance to run. You and John slowly raise your hands. The Tucson Police take you into custody, it later transpires there was a fire at the hotel some of the gang was staying at, a fireman recognized them from wanted pictures and warned the police. In one day you, John, Harry, Charles and Russell are all arrested after brief struggles.\n\nYou and John and transferred to Crown Point, Indiana for trial where you are both suspected of taking part in the East Chicago Bank Robbery ten days before your arrest where a policeman was shot and killed. If convicted you could face the electric chair. You are downcast but John remains upbeat, he has no intention of staying in jail for long...", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Run", "result": "You start running while Red shoots one of the lawmen. The other two dive for cover and both of you sprint out of the garage. Flagging down a passing car you and Red pile in and speed out of town, you don't stop driving until you join the rest of the gang at Daytona Beach.\n\nThat Christmas and New Year you celebrate with barbecues and presents with your friends, clever Harry, reliable Charles, gregarious Russell, absent-minded Red and of course the charismatic John who is the life and soul of the party. You have had a tumultuous but generally successful year, in papers you read that the Baby Face Nelson Gang, who Homer Van Meter has joined, is likewise prospering.\n\nAfter the New Year most of the gang intend to continue their vacation in Tucson, Arizona while John and Red want to rob one of the banks in East Chicago Red has been checking out. It is agreed that the gang will split up and reunite in a few days, you need to choose which half of the gang you will accompany.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Go with John, Harry, Charles and Russell to Florida for your holidays", "result": "You and the rest of the gang drive down to Daytona Beach where you book several apartments and make yourselves comfortable. Red joins you in the second half of December after killing a policeman in a gunfight in Chicago. You all agree to lie low over the holiday season.\n\nThat Christmas and New Year you celebrate with barbecues and presents with your friends, clever Harry, reliable Charles, gregarious Russell, absent-minded Red and of course the charismatic John who is the life and soul of the party. You have had a tumultuous but generally successful year, in papers you read that the Baby Face Nelson Gang, who Homer Van Meter has joined, is likewise prospering.\n\nAfter the New Year most of the gang intend to continue their vacation in Tucson, Arizona while John and Red want to rob one of the banks in East Chicago Red has been checking out. It is agreed that the gang will split up and reunite in a few days, you need to choose which half of the gang you will accompany.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Let Charles deal with him", "result": "Charles raises his pistol and shoots shoot the policeman in the hand, while he is stunned you step forward, wrench the machine gun from his grasp and order him to join his companions. Moments later a third policeman wanders in through the doors.\n\n\"Well come right in and join us,\" John calls to him and points his gun at him.\n\nHolding several hostages around you all leave the bank in a close group and move down towards the car. There are some lawmen on the street and Charles opens fire on them with his machine gun twice, prompting them to dive for cover. Reaching the car you all pile inside with two hostages on the running boards.\n\nYou drive out of town, release the hostages and count the money to find you have stolen $25,000, making your share $4,100. The Gang decides after this robbery it is time for you all to lie low and decide to head to Daytona Beach, Florida for the Christmas Vacation, except Red who wants to go to Chicago to look over some banks first. You need to choose who to accompany.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Wait in the car with Russell", "result": "You and Russell wait nervously in the car while your companions enter the prison. Moments later there is a shot followed by silence, you and Russell glance at each other nervously. A few minutes late your friends come jogging out of the prison, John is with them! They all pile into the car and you drive off.\n\n\"What happened back there?\" Russell asks.\n\n\"Harry shot the sheriff,\" Charles says shortly.\n\nJohn is elated and his rescue and together you all determine to rob a large bank as soon as possible.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Hide out with Harry in Chicago", "result": "You and Harry move to Chicago where you lie low, reading in papers how your friends first busted John out of prison and then pulled off a major bank raid together. You are keen to re-join them but Harry is not so eager, he does not know any of the others and is now drinking more than ever. One night you are drinking in a bar together when Harry gets into a heated argument with a woman. Drunk and irritable he pulls a pistol out of his pocket and threatens her with it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to get him to calm down", "result": "You try to intervene but before you can several off-duty policeman, who were also having a drink in the bar, quickly draw their guns and move in to arrest you both. Surrounded there is nothing you can do but curse Harry's stupidity as the two of you are hauled off to jail. Once in custody you are swiftly identified as wanted bank robbers.\n\nYou both refuse to say nothing about your companions, are convicted and both receive long prison terms. Two months later John and the rest of the gang except Red Hamilton are arrested and you are transferred to Crown Point, Indiana where John is being held so you can both be tried on robberies you committed together.\n\nFortunately you and John have no intention of staying in jail...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Leave the bar immediately", "result": "You leave the bar quickly and head home, the next morning you are shocked to read in newspapers that Harry was arrested at the bar by off-duty police officers and identified as a wanted bank robber. You quickly make contact with John, Harry, Charles, Red and Russell and flee Chicago, heading to Racine, Wisconsin to rob another bank.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Hurry them along without any gunfire", "result": "You ignore the voice but one of the other prisoners raises his pistol and shoots one of the men in the leg. He falls to the floor but it does well in getting the others moving faster, grabbing their wounded colleague under the arms they help drag him into the vault, leaving a trail of blood. With the alarm raised you all run outside and split into two groups, six of the prisoners go one way while you, Harry, Charles, Russell and Red steal a car and start driving to Indianapolis.\n\nReaching Indianapolis you are able to reunite with Harry Copeland, John's friend, and from him you learn that John has been arrested and is being held in Lima Prison. Harry is keen for you to rescue John right away but the others would rather rob a bank in nearby St Mary's, Ohio first to raise some funds. Harry, who doesn't know your companions very well, decides to go and hide out in Chicago for a few months.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stick with John and Harry", "result": "You turn down Homer and go back to Indiana with John and Harry. In the first week of September the three of you drive up to the State Bank in Indianapolis and leave Harry in the car while the pair of you walk into the bank. John casually climbs up on a table and announces that the bank is being robbed. The teller behind the counter is talking on the phone and doesn't even look up.\n\n\"Get away from that damn telephone,\" you snap at him.\n\nFinally the teller looks up to find you pointing a gun at him and quickly puts the phone down. While you hold the two tellers hostage John empties the vault, you both lock the tellers inside the vault and stroll out to the car. As you drive out of town you count the money and find you have stolen $24,000, making our share a cool $8,000.\n\nJohn is delighted and quickly explains his plans - he means to bribe guards at Michigan State Penitentiary to smuggle pistols into boxes of thread for the prison workshops and get word to your friends Pete, Charles, Red and Russell that the breakout is on, after that he's going to head over to Dayton, Ohio to see a girl he's dating. Harry plans to lounge around in a hotel in Indianapolis until John sends word that he needs him.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with John to smuggle the guns into prison", "result": "You accompany John to Jackson, Michigan where the State Penitentiary that you spend so many unhappy years in is located. John makes contact with some guards who agree to smuggle several loaded pistols he purchased into the prison. Once that is accomplished you both head down to Dayton, Ohio so John can visit a girlfriend of his called Mary Longnaker.\n\nVisiting Mary's apartment you decide to go out on the balcony for a smoke while John shows Mary some photos he took recently. While you are on the balcony you hear a knock on the door. A moment later you hear it opened and two men walk into the room. A second later your blood runs cold as you hear them speak.\n\n\"Stick them up John, we're police officers,\" a voice orders. \"Don't resist John. I'll kill you.\"\n\nA dozen thoughts rush through your head, though you are on the fifteenth floor you wonder if you can climb down onto the balcony below...", "action_results": [{"action": "Try climbing down", "result": "Quickly you throw aside your cigar and swinging your legs over the balcony you carefully lower yourself down, keeping a firm grip on the balcony. Stretching to your full height you can just touch the balcony below with your feet, taking a deep breath you let go of the balcony of Mary's apartment with your hands.\n\nYou feel a rush of fear as your feet slip on the balcony rail below but they slip inwards, you hit the balcony rail with your butt first and bump down into a sitting position on the balcony floor. Though you've painfully bruised your tailbone you don't hesitate but spring up and hurry off the balcony and through the apartment, past a confused looking housewife holding a baby, out the door and hurry down the stairs.\n\nYou flee rapidly out of the apartment and catch a bus out of town, working your way down to Indianapolis where you reunite with Harry four days later. He has already heard of John's arrest and neither of you are sure what to do until that night when ten prisoners used the guns John smuggled into them to escape Michigan State Penitentiary.\n\nYour friends Harry Pierpont, Charles Makley, Red Hamilton and Russell Clark use stolen cars to reach Indianapolis where you and Harry meet with them a few days later. You are thrilled to see your pals again: Harry, cold and clever, Charles, experienced and dependable, Red, absent-minded but loyal and Russell, gregarious and confident, are all thrilled to see you too. They are soon planning a bank robbery in the nearby town of St Mary's Ohio before busting John out of prison. Harry, who doesn't know any of them, turns down taking part in the robbery and instead opts to hide out in Chicago for a month or two.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Go inside and surrender", "result": "Cautiously you raise your hands into the air and step off the balcony. The two lawmen, armed with a machine gun and a shotgun, inside are surprised by your sudden appearance but you and John are swiftly taken into custody and transported to the local prison of Lima, Ohio where you are incarcerated and facing charges of bank robbery.\n\nDays later you are pleased to read how ten prisoners used the guns you and John smuggled in to escape Michigan State Pen, amongst them your friends Harry, Charles, Red and Russell. Both you and John are confident that they will be coming to bust you both out of prison and that you won't be in jail for long.", "action_results": [{"action": "Your friends return the favour", "result": "You and John remain in prison for three weeks until one evening there is a knock on the door and three men enter. With a thrill of excitement you recognise your friends Harry, Charles and Red. The Sheriff, a kindly character called Jesse Sarber approaches them.\n\n\"What do you need?\" he asks cheerfully.\n\n\"We're from Michigan City,\" Harry tells him. \"We want to see John Dillinger.\"\n\n\"Let me see your credentials,\" the Sheriff says.\n\n\"Here's out credentials,\" Harry replies, raises a pistol and shoots the Sheriff in the chest. Sarber falls to the ground, as he does his wife across the room screams.\n\n\"Give us the keys to the cells,\" Harry shouts at her and frightened she fetches the keys for him. You and John grin as Harry hurries over, unlocks the cell doors and lets you both out. As you hurry towards the door the Sheriff lies on the floor gasping.\n\n\"Oh men, why did you have to do this to me?\" he moans. \"My love, I believe I am going to have to leave you,\" he tells his wife. You and John exchange glances but say nothing, hurrying out of the door you reach a car where Russell is waiting to drive you all to safety. You and John are elated by the rescue and together you are all swiftly making plans for your next bank job.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Hide out in Indianapolis with Harry", "result": "You join Harry in Indianapolis where you both live quietly in hotel rooms: one morning you are shocked to read in the papers that John has been arrested by lawmen while visiting his girlfriend in Dayton. Initially you and Harry are unsure what to do but days later ten prisoners use the guns John smuggled into them to escape Michigan State Penitentiary.\n\nYour friends Harry Pierpont, Charles Makley, Red Hamilton and Russell Clark use stolen cars to reach Indianapolis where you and Harry meet with them a few days later. You are thrilled to see your pals again: Harry, cold and clever, Charles, experienced and dependable, Red, absent-minded but loyal and Russell, gregarious and confident, are all thrilled to see you too. They are soon planning a bank robbery in the nearby town of St Mary's Ohio before busting John out of prison. Harry, who doesn't know any of them, turns down taking part in the robbery and instead opts to hide out in Chicago for a month or two.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay in the apartment with Paul and William", "result": "You decide to stay in the apartment with the youths when John and Harry leave and begin frying some bacon in the kitchen. Barely five minutes after your friends leave there is a knock on the door. You go to answer it and find yourself confronted by four policemen with guns in their hands.\n\n\"Hands up,\" they bark at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run", "result": "You take one look and slam the door in the face of the lawmen. While fists drum against the door you race across the kitchen, into the bathroom where you slam and lock the door and you quickly slide the window up. Standing on the toilet you clamber through, legs first, climb down until you are hanging from the window by your finger tips and with a deep breath you let go.\n\nYou fall straight down about fifteen feet, landing in a crouching position in the apartment's parking area and quickly straighten up. You hear the sound of a car engine and glancing back you see John and Harry pulling their car out of their parking spot, racing over you throw open the door and jump in the back.\n\n\"Go, go, go,\" you pant. \"The law are raiding the apartment.\"\n\nJohn steers the car out of the car park and you drive away. You drive to Indiana, hole up in a hotel and the next day you read in the newspapers that both William and Paul were arrested in the apartment and charged with bank robbery. After some discussion the three of you decide to go ahead with your plan to rob the Daleville Bank.\n\nJust two days after the raid you and John stroll into the bank, draw your pistols and train them on the sole bank teller behind the counter.\n\n\"This is a stickup,\" John tells her. \"Get me the money honey.\"\n\nJohn leaps over the counter, strides into the open safe and quickly scoops up the money inside before you both lock the teller inside, stroll outside and jump in the back of Harry's car. As you drive out of town you count the money and find you have gotten away with $3,500, making your share of the money $1,100, not bad for a dishonest day's work.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Surrender", "result": "Slowly you raise your hands into the air. The lawmen pour into the apartment and quickly capture William and Paul, who are still in their beds. The three of you are quickly taken downtown to the local Muncie Jail where you are swiftly identified as three of the men who robbed the New Carlisle Bank, you and your companions resolutely refuse to name John or Harry.\n\nJust two months after leaving prison you are sent back to Michigan State Penitentiary where you are reunited with your friends Pete Pierpont, Charles Makley, Red Hamilton and Russell Clark.\n\nFortunately John does not intend for you all to remain imprisoned for long.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story28.json b/data/scraper/stories/story28.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ea61b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story28.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=45866", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Your world is rot. Your nostrils fill with the smell of excrement and decay that tends to fill your home. Still, it's all you have. You scurry among the scattered ruins, climbing atop a massive section of castle wreckage, sniffing the air.\n\n\nA rusted, blood-stained sword sits in one hand, a leather pouch hanging from your shoulder. Your whiskers tingle with excitement as you smell the scent of burning meat. Campfires are near, and where there's campfire, there's a caravan. Where there's a caravan, there's food.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head towards it", "result": "You scurry towards it, as do the others. Dozens of brown and black bodies scurry up from among the rubble and out of the ancient sewers underneath where your camps lie. You're one of the first on the sign, climbing atop a crushed tower as you see it. Three wagons circled around a campfire, basking in its light. The moonlight shines on your brown, shit-matted fur and catches on your blade as you run forward towards the camps. The man on guard, a young, cleanly shaven guard with armor that's too small for him yell as he sees you approach,. He readies his spear, looking ready to plunge it into you. You dance at the edge of the spear point, waiting for your chance.", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab at the spear", "result": "You step forward, grabbing the spear's shaft and yanking the guard forward. You swing your sword, slashing him in the massive gap between his helmet and shoulder pads, biting into his neck. He screams, collapsing to the ground as blood spurts forth.\n\n\nYou yell with glee, at other Ratlings begin arriving to take care of the other guards. The merchants and passengers of the caravan either flee back inside the caravans or procur weapons and get ready to fight, but this isn't a unified raid where the scraps will be given out later. You take what you can get. You run towards the camp fire, grabbing the stew cooking there, jabbing your snout into it and beginning to gulp down the delicious mixture. You manage to finish half before a much bigger rat grabs the pot from you, and you know you can't fight him. You turn to one of the caravans, where rats have killed the guards and are dealing with the merchants. The merchants are surrounded, looking terrified, as all those willing to fight have been cut down.\n\n\nAlthough the majority of them are to be enslaved and sold to the Lizards or the Eastern Tribes, while the women will be taken back to the burrows for a less than kind fate, one unfortunate soul has made his presence known by trying to negotiate.\n\n\n\"Please, taken the cargo! It's yours! Keep the men as well, we'll fetch a heavy ransom! But leave the women and the child go, won't you?\" the merchant leader says.\n\n\nBad choice. The boys have taken note of him now, and he's a fat one. His weight, the fact that he has so much food he can grow weak and fat, only angers you all thanks to the fact that you're all constantly hungry and eating scraps. One of the ratlings slashes his axe, cutting open the man's belly in a superficial wound. Another ratling jabs him with a spear, as the boys begin to jab and slash at the man as he yelps in pain as he's slowly cut and hacked apart.\n\n\nThe torture has drawn the others attention away from the actual carriages. You stare at them, contemplating sneaking away and grabbing yourself some more food.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the torture", "result": "You laugh gleefully as you dash forward, punching the man in the side of the head and knocking him backward as he grunts in pain, knocking into the blow of a sword blade. You slash at his ankle as he collapses to a knee, before one of the ratlings decks him a blow from the butt of his spear. He tries to stand, blood down streaming down his face.\n\n\n\"Please, I'm sorry. I didn't...!\" he cries, looking genuinely petrified, before one of the rats takes it too far and stabs him in the throat with his sword, killing him.\n\n\nHe slumps to the ground, before lying still.\n\n\n\"Bah! Could've played with him for hours!\" you complain.\n\n\nThe largest rat, a big brute who's taken charge of the raid named Pak, strides forward. Not too many ratlings have joined the raid, a fact Pak is clearly enjoying as it means he gets to take charge, and since you all get a bigger part of the profit, all the better.\n\n\n\"You, you and you!\" he shouts, selecting three rats from the group. \"Start moving the prisoners back.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, yes,\" they snarl, as they begin to shout and whip the prisoners into movement.\n\n\n\"You!\" he shouts, pointing a long finger at you. \"Kill the horses.\"\n\n\nYou nod, walking over to the horses. They seem terrified and scarred, and look at you as if begging for mercy. You wonder if it's best just to untie them and scare them off.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill the horses", "result": "You slash your sword, cutting open one of the horse's throats. You jab your sword through its skull to finish it off, before slashing another's throat. You kill the few horses, before returning to Pak, who's already ordering the others to carve up the horses and bring the meat and hides back to the home. Suddenly, you see two ratlings dragging a teenage girl out of a caravan, whose crying and screaming has gathered the rest of your attention.\n\n\n\"Please! Please! Let me go!\" the girl sobs.\n\n\nThe ratlings toss her in front of Pak, who grins eagerly.\n\n\n\"Perfect! I'll have some fun with her!\" he says.\n\n\nHe glances at you, noticing you're finished with the horses.\n\n\n\"Bring the girl back to the burrow. I'll have my fun with her later. Let the others have some fun, too.\"\n\n\nYou nod, walking over to the girl, grabbing her by the hang and beginning to drag her towards the burrow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Lead the girl back to the burrows", "result": "You drag the girl along the path to the burrow, as she cries.\n\n\n\"Please, you have to help me get out of here. We can run, just run into the wilderness.\"\n\n\n\"Can't do it. Too many bad things there. They'd kill on site a ratling. No, no,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Please! I don't want to die...\" she whimpers. \"Can... can you tell me what's going to happen to me?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Walk in silence", "result": "You keep walking, as the girl falls silent, becoming quiet. Soon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey.\n\n\n\"I'm scared,\" the girl says.\n\n\n\"I'd be, if I were you,\" you admit.\n\n\n\"What's your name?\" she asks.\n\n\n\"Ritz,\" you say.\n\n\n\"I'm Julianne,\" she says. \"I don't want to die here.\"\n\n\nYou don't say another word, as she begins to chant.\n\n\n\"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon...\" she continues to chant.\n\n\nYou turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it.\n\n\n\"This is pretty,\" you say, admiring the silver.\n\n\n\"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father.\"\n\n\nYou stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her.", "action_results": [{"action": "Snatch it off her", "result": "You grab the necklace, snatching it off her neck and clutching it in her hands.\n\n\n\"Hey!\" she cries, grabbing at it before you snarl, scarring her away.\n\n\nShe whimpers, shuffling away from you. You stare at her, wrapping it around the hilt of your sword and clutching it tightly. You wait patiently for Pak to arrive.\n\n\nAfter a few minutes, the massive, black-furred rat clambers into the burrow, grinning as he sees her prey. He stomps forward, grabbing her by the hand.\n\n\n\"Come on, darling. Let's take you down to the lower levels. I have a few of the others I want pulled over to my side, and I'm sure your sweet ass will do a great deal in getting them there.\"\n\n\nThe huge brute begins dragging the girl away, leaving you standing there. Suddenly, he stops, turning around.\n\n\n\"What's your name?\"\n\n\n\"Ritz,\" you say.\n\n\n\"You did a good job protecting her from the cripples and in the raid, and I'm feeling generous. Care to join in the fun?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join in", "result": "You allow your bestial nature to take over, nodding vigorously. You follow him as he drags the weeping girl along with him. Soon, you venture down the twisted staircases and pathways down to the lower layers. Eventually, you enter the chamber filled with whatever Ratlings Pak wants to impress.\n\n\nYou watch in a mixture of fear and lust as the Ratlings appear, more than willing to be entertained by the new flesh that's entered their homes. They quickly undress her and begin to have their fun despite her horrified, screaming protests which soon turn to pained screams and begging. The Ratlings have their fun with her, and eventually you have your turn. You focus on the physical sensations rather than the pitiful weeping, and soon embrace the pure pleasure of the act. You achieve release, almost collapsing back as your body fulfills one of its prime functions. A ratling pulls you back to take your place with the hostage, and you're tossed gently aside.\n\n\nYou crawl back towards your home, curling up in a bed of animal hides and quickly letting sleep take you. The life of a ratling is a pleasurable one if you're smart enough to take advantage of it, you have to admit.", "action_results": [{"action": "Awaken", "result": "You awaken to a knife pressed against your throat. You reach for your sword in the darkness, but a hand catches yours.\n\n\n\"Scream for help or try anything and I cut you open,\" a harsh voice growls.\n\n\nYou try to nod, but the knife is pressed so tightly any movement would slice open your throat.\n\n\n\"A prisoner was taken into the burrows. Where is she?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Claim ignorance", "result": "\"I don't know anything,\" you say.\n\n\nThe man grabs your throat, strangling it as he impales your hand. You try to scream, but you can't even get out a breath.\n\n\n\"Quiet,\" the man says, pulling out the knife and releasing your throat as you whimper, clutching at your wound.\n\n\n\"Do you think I picked you out by chance? You have her necklace. I tracked it here. Now, answer me.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Plead ignorance", "result": "\"I swear to everything I don't know!\" you say.\n\n\n\"Filthy lying vermin,\" the man hisses. \"Perhaps the next rat will be more trustworhy.\"\n\n\nThe man slices open your throat, and you collapse against the ground, quickly dying.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Lie", "result": "\"She was taken off to be ransomed off by one of the travelling ratlings.\"\n\n\nYou see the runes of the blade glowing, as the man snarls.\n\n\n\"Filthy lying vermin,\" the man hisses. \"Perhaps the next rat will be more trustworthy.\"\n\n\nThe man slices open your throat, and you collapse against the ground, quickly dying.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Tell the truth", "result": "\"She's been taken down to the fifth layer. You... you won't want to find her. She's dead by now, and her body won't be in the best condition.\"\n\n\nThe man doesn't respond for some time, before snarling.\n\n\n\"No, she's alive. I can feel it. You, however, are no better than the rest of your lying kind. Death's for you.\"\n\n\nThe man slices open your throat, and you collapse against the ground, quickly dying.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Lie", "result": "\"She was taken off to be ransomed off by one of the travelling ratlings.\"\n\n\nYou see the runes of the blade glowing, as the man snarls.\n\n\n\"Liar. The knife speaks to your honesty. The truth, now, or you die.\"", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Tell the truth", "result": "\"She's been taken down to the fifth layer. You... you won't want to find her. She's dead by now, and her body won't be in the best condition.\"\n\n\nThe man doesn't respond for some time, before snarling.\n\n\n\"No, she's alive. I can feel it. Your fate, however, is less certain.\"\n\n\nThe man's blade illuminates, casting golden light on the both of you. You stare at his grizzled face with a thick beard growing. However, he gets a clear view of you, seeing your blood, sweat and semen-encrusted fur. He stares at you, realizing what you've done.\n\n\n\"You had her way with her... you disgusting vermin!\" he near shouts, hopefully waking some of the other Ratlings to come to your side.\n\n\nThe man slices open your throat, and you collapse against the ground. He rams his knife into your chest repeatedly as you try to scream in pain, but blood quickly fills your throat. Your life is quickly drained from you, and you lie there as death takes you.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Refuse", "result": "You shake your head sadly, just staring at the rat. He lets out a grunt of disgust, before dragging the girl away despite her crying protests. \n\n\nYou head to your chamber, curling up in a bed of animal hides and lying there. You hear the girl's crying and screaming for help in the distance of the caverns, but know you can do nothing. You push your furs against your floppy ears to drown out the sound, trying to find sleep. Eventually, you manage to do so.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Try to stop him taking her", "result": "\"No!\" you say, punching the massive ratling in the jaw and sending him stumbling backwards, more out of surprise than anything else. \n\n\n\"What did you say to me, you little prick?\" he says, raising his club to strike.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go for his eyes", "result": "You leap into the air, grabbing the massive ratling's shoulder and jamming your sword into his eyes. \n\n\n\"Ah! Fuck, fuck, fuck! I can't see! I can't fucking see!\" he yells, grabbing you by the fur and flinging you against the ground with a painful thud.\n\n\nAlthough he can't see, he still hears where you thud against the ground. With a scream of rage and pain, he raises his club into the air and swings with all his might. It slams into your legs, shattering both of your legs as you scream in pain. He snarls, lifting up his club once more as you yell and grab at your broken legs, trying to focus on survival rather than the awful pain. He swings down his club once more, crushing your skull.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Dodge", "result": "You roll to avoid his club swing, which slams into the stones next to you, sending splinters of wood flying in all directions. With his heavy club now on the ground, you now have a chance to do something.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dodge again", "result": "You slash at him, ready to dodge again as he lifts his club back up. He roars, swinging his club back at you. You roll under it again, before he changes direction of his swing, prepared for this. It slams into your legs, shattering both of your legs as you scream in pain. He snarls, lifting up his club once more as you yell asd grab at your broken legs, trying to focus on survival rather than the awful pain. He swings down his club once more, crushing your skull.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Strike at his side", "result": "You step forward, jabbing your sword between his ribs and into his guts as he lets out a horrid scream. He snarls and focuses through his pain, smashing his fist into your snout and sending you toppling to the floor.\n\n\n\"Little cunt!\" he screams, grabbing your sword and yanking it from his side.\n\n\nWith a scream of rage and pain, he raises his club into the air and swings with all his might. It slams into your legs, shattering both of your legs as you scream in pain. He snarls, lifting up his club once more as you yell and grab at your broken legs, trying to focus on survival rather than the awful pain. He swings down his club once more, crushing your skull.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Flee", "result": "You turn, grabbing Julianne by the hand and yanking her away. The ratling is faster, though, swinging his club again with more accuracy this time and knocking your feet away, sending you slamming into the stone floor. As you go to stand, he swings his club and slams it into your head, cracking your skull and killing you with a heavy blow.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Run", "result": "You turn, grabbing Julianne by the hand and yanking her away. The ratling is faster, though, swinging his club and knocking your feet away, sending you slamming into the stone floor. As you go to stand, he swings his club and slams it into your head, cracking your skull and killing you with a heavy blow.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Lie and agree", "result": "\"I'll get you out of here,\" you say, unable to meet her gaze.\n\n\n\"Thank you! Thank you!\" she whispers in relief, taking off her necklace and placing it in your hands.\n\n\nYou sigh, nodding as you wrap it around the handle of your sword. You wait patiently for Pak to arrive.\n\n\nAfter a few minutes, the massive, black-furred rat clambers into the burrow, grinning as he sees her prey. He stomps forward, grabbing her by the hand.\n\n\n\"Come on, darling. Let's take you down to the lower levels. I have a few of the others I want pulled over to my side, and I'm sure your sweet ass will do a great deal in getting them there.\"\n\n\nThe huge brute begins dragging the girl away, leaving you standing there.\n\n\n\"Ritz! Help, help!\" she cries out, looking desperately to you.\n\n\nSuddenly, he stops, turning around.\n\n\n\"Ritz, huh? That's your name?\" he asks.\n\n\nYou nod cautiously.\n\n\n\"You did a good job protecting her from the cripples and in the raid, and I'm feeling generous. Care to join in the fun?\"", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, {"action": "Tell her the truth", "result": "\"I can't. Even if I wanted to, they'd kill us before we got out,\" you admit.\n\n\n\"No, we can! We have to be able to! You can help me!\"\n\n\nYou stare at your feet, not saying another word.\n\n\n\"Take the necklace! Take it!\" she says, taking off her necklace and placing it in your hands. \"Please, there's a chance, there has to be a chance. You can help me. You can help me, please!\"\n\n\nYou don't answer, and as if the hopelessness of her situation is just hitting her she quiets down. You wait patiently for Pak to arrive.\n\n\nAfter a few minutes, the massive, black-furred rat clambers into the burrow, grinning as he sees her prey. He stomps forward, grabbing her by the hand.\n\n\n\"Come on, darling. Let's take you down to the lower levels. I have a few of the others I want pulled over to my side, and I'm sure your sweet ass will do a great deal in getting them there.\"\n\n\nThe huge brute begins dragging the girl away, leaving you standing there. \n\n\n\"Ritz! Help, help!\" she cries out, looking desperately to you.\n\n\nSuddenly, he stops, turning around.\n\n\n\"Ritz, huh? That's your name?\" he asks.\n\n\nYou nod cautiously.\n\n\n\"You did a good job protecting her from the cripples and in the raid, and I'm feeling generous. Care to join in the fun?\"", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Tell her the truth", "result": "\"Most likely? They'll take you down to the lower chambers as a treat for the more important Ratlings. They'll rape you for a few hours, maybe a few days depending on how resilient you are, and then they'll finally kill you and feed you to the giant rats.\"\n\n\nThe girl bursts into tears, sobbing with terror. You stare at her with a twinge of sympathy and guilt, before continuing walking.\n\n\n\"I need to get out of here! I need to...!\" she says, looking as if she wants to run, so you tighten your grip on her arm, knowing there's no way she'll escape either way.\n\n\nSoon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey.\n\n\n\"I'm scared,\" the girl says.\n\n\n\"I'd be, if I were you,\" you admit.\n\n\n\"What's your name?\" she asks.\n\n\n\"Ritz,\" you say.\n\n\n\"I'm Julianne,\" she says. \"I don't want to die here.\"\n\n\nYou don't say another word, as she begins to chant.\n\n\n\"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon...\" she continues to chant.\n\n\nYou turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it.\n\n\n\"This is pretty,\" you say, admiring the silver.\n\n\n\"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father.\"\n\n\nYou stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, {"action": "Lie to her", "result": "\"They'll... ransom you off back to the humans after a few days of imprisonment,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Oh... I can survive that. I can do that,\" she says.\n\n\nYou nod grimly, continuing walking. Soon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey.\n\n\n\"I'm scared,\" the girl says.\n\n\n\"I'd be, if I were you,\" you admit.\n\n\n\"What's your name?\" she asks.\n\n\n\"Ritz,\" you say.\n\n\n\"I'm Julianne,\" she says. \"I don't want to die here.\"\n\n\nYou don't say another word, as she begins to chant.\n\n\n\"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon...\" she continues to chant.\n\n\nYou turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it.\n\n\n\"This is pretty,\" you say, admiring the silver.\n\n\n\"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father.\"\n\n\nYou stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, {"action": "Change topic", "result": "\"Where are you from?\"\n\n\n\"Maryborough, a small trading town. My father lives there.\"\n\n\n\"Was he the merchant we killed?\"\n\n\n\"No, my father is a Paladin. I was given passage on the trading caravan to meet with him in the town over. He wanted to move me to our summer home in the country, where it's safer.\"\n\n\nAll this talk of summer houses and fine lives depresses you. You sigh, and continue walking. Soon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey.\n\n\n\"I'm scared,\" the girl says.\n\n\n\"I'd be, if I were you,\" you admit.\n\n\n\"What's your name?\" she asks.\n\n\n\"Ritz,\" you say.\n\n\n\"I'm Julianne,\" she says. \"I don't want to die here.\"\n\n\nYou don't say another word, as she begins to chant.\n\n\n\"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon...\" she continues to chant.\n\n\nYou turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it.\n\n\n\"This is pretty,\" you say, admiring the silver.\n\n\n\"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father.\"\n\n\nYou stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Scare off the horses", "result": "You walk over to the horses, untying them from their carriage before gently giving them a hit with their sword on the rump, sending them running off into the wilderness. Pak notices what you're doing, turning to stare at you, snarling. \n\n\n\"What the fuck do you think you're doing? That was good meat, good leather! You dumb cunt!\" he snarls, enraged by your lack of obedience.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to convince him they deserved to live", "result": "\"But they were ki...\" you begin to say.\n\n\nUnfortunately, in all your life here you seem to have failed to pick up how society functions. By now, Pak's club is already flying through the air, and it smashes into your head, crushing your skull against the carriage and killing you instantly.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Duck", "result": "You duck, but Pak slams his foot up, smashing you in the face. You sumble back and he punches you, sending you toppling to the floor. Pak stands over, stomping on you repeatedly as his weight and muscle breaks your bones as he smashes into you repeatedly as you scream for help.\n\n\nWith your limbs broken and lacking the strength to move, you hope you die of your wounds before something, some enterprising scavenger or worse, finds you.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Loot some more", "result": "You scurry into one of the carriages, clambering outside. Blood cakes the inside, where some poor soul was hacked apart in their sleep. You find a jar of cider, opening it and quickly downing the delicious drink, before tossing it aside. You grab a jar of honey that's almost empty and begin scooping it into your mouth.\n\n\n\"Everyone out here! Now!\" one of the ratlings yells, as you turn and walk outside.\n\n\nThe largest rat, a big brute who's taken charge of the raid named Pak, stands there. Not too many ratlings have joined the raid, a fact Pak is clearly enjoying as it means he gets to take charge, and since you all get a bigger part of the profit, all the better.\n\n\n\"You, you and you!\" he shouts, selecting three rats from the group. \"Start moving the prisoners back.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, yes,\" they snarl, as they begin to shout and whip the prisoners into movement.\n\n\n\"You!\" he shouts, pointing a long finger at you. \"Kill the horses.\"\n\n\nYou nod, walking over to the horses. They seem terrified and scarred, and look at you as if begging for mercy. You wonder if it's best just to untie them and scare them off.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Charge him", "result": "You raise your sword, charging forward. The guard yells and steps back, jabbing his spear out. The metal spear jabs into your fur and into your chest and you yelp as he runs you through. He pulls the spear out as you collapse to your knees, before he jabs it through your throat, killing you.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wait for the others", "result": "You continue circling the man the as he jabs at you, as you back step to avoid the jabs. Soon, other rats arrive. You can see the man's eyes bulge as he realizes how outnumbered he is. He jabs at another ratling and you take advantage, grabbing your sword forward and stabbing him in the throat. He tries to yell but blood bursts into his throat as you pull out your blade. \n\n\nYou turn to one of the caravans, where rats have killed the guards and are dealing with the merchants. The merchants are surrounded, looking terrified, as all those willing to fight have been cut down.\n\n\nAlthough the majority of them are to be enslaved and sold to the Lizards or the Eastern Tribes, while the women will be taken back to the burrows for a less than kind fate, one unfortunate soul has made his presence known by trying to negotiate.\n\n\n\"Please, taken the cargo! It's yours! Keep the men as well, we'll fetch a heavy ransom! But leave the women and the child go, won't you?\" the merchant leader says.\n\n\nBad choice. The boys have taken note of him now, and he's a fat one. His weight, the fact that he has so much food he can grow weak and fat, only angers you all thanks to the fact that you're all constantly hungry and eating scraps. One of the ratlings slashes his axe, cutting open the man's belly in a superficial wound. Another ratling jabs him with a spear, as the boys begin to jab and slash at the man as he yelps in pain as he's slowly cut and hacked apart.\n\n\nThe torture has drawn the others attention away from the actual carriages. You stare at them, contemplating sneaking away and grabbing yourself some more food.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story29.json b/data/scraper/stories/story29.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2e060a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story29.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=55043", "context": "", "first_story_block": "I'm sorry, Jane, that I wasn't older, stronger and wiser when we met. You were a brief illumination in my otherwise bleak existence. I know now that the circumstances were out of our hands and that you would want me to be happy, but I've lived with this guilt for so long. I need to share you with everyone...", "action_results": [{"action": "Into the past...", "result": "You haven\u2019t eaten anything since early this morning and the walls of your stomach are grinding together. You have to get your mind off of it somehow and the water fountain on the far wall beckons to you.\n\nYou\u2019ve been on the road for days and it feels like the better part of it has been planted in this seat\u2014even though you\u2019ve only been here for the last couple of hours. The skin on your back and the backs of your bare legs rip free of the hard plastic seat as you stand and your flip-flops slap and smack your heels as you plod across the room.\n\nYou freeze midway when you see a cowboy roping a calf from horseback. It\u2019s the most wonderful thing you\u2019ve seen for days even if it is only a poster. And it\u2019s not the only one! Scanning the room you see many, many more of far off magical places with waterfalls and cliffs and mountains and dark caverns. Some of cityscapes with towering buildings and some at night with only the lights on and still more of endless rolling plains.\n\nFrom somewhere behind you, you hear a garbled voice fighting it\u2019s way through crackling static, droning on and on about things that only old people care about. You zero in on the source and discover that it is a tiny coin operated radio affixed to the arm of a terminal seat. Neat!\n\nJust then a clammy hand clamps down on the back of your neck and you\u2019re whisked toward the double glass doors. \u201cIt\u2019s time to go, mister,\u201d comes the all too familiar voice of your mom and she only releases her grip\u2014with a surprise thrust that causes you to whack your shin on the bottom step\u2014to allow you to clamber up and into the bus on your own.\n\nA shiver runs down your spine and the back of your arms prickle as you make your way down the aisle between tall and comfy-looking seats. You\u2019re not used to air conditioning and it brings both pain and relief.\n\nYou pass by an elderly couple. The woman looks up and smiles at you warmly so you give her a wide berth. You doubt that she would, being a stranger and all, but you sure don\u2019t want her squeezing your cheek like Grandma does.\n\nYou\u2019re nudged into the row behind them and you take the farthest seat. Your mother sits beside you and puts the bag with everything the two of you own at her feet. Her lips are pursed and her eyes drawn. She\u2019s been tired every day since the divorce and when she gets tired, she gets mad. You have a hard time even recognizing her now.\n\nA hiss and a lurch later, the bus pulls out onto the highway and with your face plastered to the side window you watch as the fence posts strobe past with only the occasional bush or sapling breaking the pattern.\n\n\u201cThere\u2019s a storm coming,\u201d remarks the old man to his wife, \u201cand it looks to be a bad \u2018un.\u201d\n\n\u201cMm-hmm,\u201d she replies absently, not bothering to look up from her needlepoint.\n\nYour eyes drift upward from the fence to a draw on the horizon and there the sky is beginning to boil and bristle with blue-white sparks. You can\u2019t shake the feeling that you are at the very beginning of the greatest adventure\u2014and worst nightmare\u2014of your life.\n\nAfter only a mile or two, the droning of the engine and the rhythmic beat of its tires thumping over the seams in the concrete soothes you to sleep and you sleep the whole rest of the way.\n\n\n\nYou are shaken from a pleasant dream of opening Christmas presents with your parents to stumble and trip over your feet as you\u2019re dragged toward the front of the bus. It pulls over, dumping the two of you out on a deserted street.\n\nYou know it\u2019s only your reflection, but the ghastly and pale boy is all you can make out in the store window before you. It brightens and fades, brightens and fades with each pulse of the stoplight on the corner. You take a step backward and the wind from the bus pushes you forward as it pulls away.\n\n\u201cYou tryin\u2019 to get yourself run over?\u201d Your mother cups the back of your head and shoves you toward the boy with hollow eye-sockets, \u201cGet over there and sit down against the wall.\u201d\n\nYou do as your told, although you can\u2019t help but look up at the glass expecting him to be standing there looking down at you.\n\nAn eternity goes by with your mom standing slumped against a signpost and staring off into the night.\n\nYour butt burns as the bones chew their way to the cement. You rock slowly from one side to the other to relieve the pain and she flashes her eyes at you. You melt.\n\n\u201cSit there and don\u2019t move,\u201d she barks as she leaps toward the flashing light. A car has stopped at the corner and she waves her arms as she sprints toward it. It begins to pull away, but stops short and the window tentatively rolls down.\n\nYou can\u2019t make out her words, but there\u2019s happiness in your mother\u2019s voice again as she crouches there with her elbows propped against the car door. Maybe she\u2019s not mad anymore. You stretch your legs out as far as you can and wiggle your toes.\n\nShe stands as the car pulls away and turns toward you. You can\u2019t see her face, but there\u2019s no mad in her walk now. You let out a long breath in relief.\n\n\u201cC\u2019mon, I\u2019ve found us a place to sleep tonight,\u201d she beams snatching up the bag, \u201cand tomorrow I start job huntin\u2019. We\u2019re gonna do jus\u2019 fine you an\u2019 me. You wait an\u2019 see.\u201d She wraps her arm around your shoulders and the two of you skip off around the corner and into the crisp night air.\n\n\n\nYou sit with your shoulders slumped, dragging your feet in a circle as the swing\u2019s chains lazily wind and unwind and then wind up again. You\u2019ve already walked around the park twice and sat on everything here so now all you can do is wait.\n\n\u201cYou wait here an\u2019 watch our stuff,\u201d your mom had told you, \u201cI\u2019ve got a lot to do today an\u2019, with any luck, things\u2019ll be a whole lot better from now on. And don\u2019t you leave the park! You hear me? I\u2019ll be back as quick as I can.\u201d\n\nYour stomach grumbles. The two half-crushed cheese and peanut butter crackers your mom gave you before she left didn\u2019t do much to satisfy it. At least the gnawing emptiness is gone.\n\nYou hear a squeal and giggles so you look up. Some little kids are playing in the dirt at the bottom of the slide as if it were a sandbox. A dozen steps away from them sits a plump woman with her nose in a book.\n\nYou survey the park for other signs of life and spot a group about your age. Three boys in a circle around a dark-haired girl. They\u2019re pushing her back and forth between them like some demented form of \u2018Hot Potato\u2019.\n\n\u201cWhere do you think you\u2019re going?\u201d jeers the fat one.\n\n\u201cYeah, you ain\u2019t goin\u2019 nowhere you little bastard,\u201d cracks the snotty runt.\n\n\u201cLet me go!\u201d she hisses, \u201cLeave me alone!\u201d\n\nThe tallest of the three quakes from head to toe and nearly loses his breath in a fit of really annoying breathy laughter as he shoves her back toward the other two.\n\nThe girl turns beet red from anger and lashes out with flailing, non-connecting slaps which only seems to feed the boys\u2019 hysterical laughter.\n\nYou have the sudden urge to attack them, but that might be a little hasty. Perhaps you should find some other way.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wade into 'em", "result": "\u201cLeave her alone!\u201d you command as you trot over to them with more brass than you really possess, \u201cYou like picking on little girls?\u201d\n\nTheir shock fades instantly when they see you and Chortle begins to jiggle. They either aren\u2019t that impressed by you in the slightest or they\u2019re extremely good at hiding it.\n\nChortle grapples the girl as Tubby strides up to you, heeled closely by Snots. You suddenly feel smaller and more helpless than at any other time in your life, but you refuse to show any sign of it.\n\n\u201cWho are you?!\u201d demands Snots.\n\n\u201cIs this your little girlfriend?\u201d jeers Tubby, \u201cHave you come to rescue her?\u201d\n\nYou feel your face flush red, but not from embarrassment. You are livid!\n\n\u201cLook here, this guy\u2019s here to save his bastard girlfriend,\u201d spits Snots.\n\nYou lunge forward and Tubby grabs you in a meaty \u201cbear hug\u201d, but not before you put your fist in Snots\u2019 mouth. He falls back in horror with a tooth dangling below his upper lip and starts tearing up.\n\nTubby swings you around in an arc and falls on you with every ounce of his weight knocking the wind completely out of you.\n\nYou struggle against his massive frame, kicking and thrashing, but there is no escape. It\u2019d take a bulldozer to move this tub o\u2019 guts.\n\nHe crawls upward and pins your arms with his fat legs and starts drilling your forehead with his meaty finger. \u201cWanna be a tough guy, huh?\u201d\n\nThe girl manages to land one of her backward kicks and Chortle falls like a sack of potatoes, screaming in agony as his face goes purple. She turns and darts between two houses on the far side of the street.\n\n\u201cGet her,\u201d wheezes Chortle, \u201cGet that little bastard!\u201d\n\nSnots runs to his aid and tries to pull him to his feet between sobs, but can\u2019t muster the strength. Chortle is in no condition to stand just yet anyhow.\n\nTubby turns back to you and pounds a couple of stinging blows to the side of your face, then smooshes your head into the soft earth as he hoists his lard back to his feet and saunters over to his friends.\n\nYou roll onto your belly, push yourself up and limp away in the other direction.\n\nLooking over your shoulder to make sure the trio aren\u2019t watching, you dash between houses and start making your way back toward where the girl went through.\n\nThe alley is shrouded by trees arching overhead and you make your way to the end of it. Seeing no sign of her, you cut through to the next street. Still nothing. She\u2019s long gone.\n\nYou suddenly remember the bag tucked under the picnic table that you were supposed to be watching. If something happened to it, you\u2019ll be in big trouble.\n\nYou sprint like the devil is after you. A hedge claws up your arms and face as you dart through it, which you barely even notice.\n\nTurning down the alley, a dark figure steps out from behind the corner of the hedge directly in your path. Your mouth goes all coppery and dry, and you skid to a stop.\n\nYou\u2019re all set to flee when you realize that it\u2019s the girl from before. She looks sheepish and a bit winded, but no worse for wear.\n\nShe hangs her head, but her eyes remain fixed on yours. As you cautiously approach her, you detect the faint hint of a smile.\n\n\u201cHi,\u201d she barely more than whispers.\n\n\u201cAre you okay?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cYeah. They didn\u2019t hurt me.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou sure hurt that one.\u201d\n\nShe chuckles.\n\n\u201cWho were them boys?\u201d\n\n\u201cJust some boys from school. They always pick on me.\u201d\n\n\u201cHow come?\u201d\n\n\u201cJust \u2018cause. They\u2019ve always been like that.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s your name?\u201d you ask, scrunching your toes and noticing how dirty they\u2019ve gotten.\n\n\u201cJane. What\u2019s yours?\u201d\n\n\u201cBilly. We just moved here.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhere\u2019s your house?\u201d\n\n\u201cWe don\u2019t have one yet.\u201d\n\n\u201cOh,\u201d she says, turning her gaze to the side, then back to you. \u201cMy house is on Hill Road.\u201d\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know where that is. We just got here last night. We came in on the bus.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s over there,\u201d she points over your shoulder, \u201con the edge of town. C\u2019mon. I\u2019ll show you.\u201d\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t right now. I have to watch our stuff so Mom can find a job.\u201d\n\n\u201cOh.\u201d After a pause, she asks \u201cWhat grade are you in?\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll be in Second this year.\u201d\n\n\u201cMe too. Maybe we can sit together.\u201d\n\nThe very suggestion makes you feel queasy and uncomfortable. \u201cI better get back before she comes back,\u201d you say stepping past her.\n\n\u201cOkay. See ya later.\u201d\n\n\u201cSee ya later.\u201d\n\nYou cut between two houses following their shared ribbon driveway. As you get to the front, you peek down the street and see that the gang is gone.\n\nThe park is empty now with no one in sight. You cross the street and see that the bag is still right where it\u2019s supposed to be.\n\nYou climb the cement picnic table and plop down on top of it with your feet on the bench. All you can do now is wait.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Way Things Were", "result": "\u201cWhat happened to you?\u201d your mom asks from out of nowhere making you jump.\n\nYou stand up and whirl around making eye contact before looking down at your arms and legs.\n\n\u201cI got scratched up going through the bushes.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat bushes?\u201d she says squinting, \u201cThere aren\u2019t any in the park that I can see.\u201d\n\nYou squirm, knowing full well what is about to happen.\n\n\u201cOver there in the alley,\u201d you mutter, pointing.\n\nSnatching you by the hair and ramming your face into hers, \u201cI thought I told you to wait in the park!\u201d she hisses through clenched teeth. \u201cAn\u2019 I hadn\u2019t even noticed the scratches. I was talking about your face!\u201d\n\nYour eyes start to tear up and your lower lip begins to quiver. \u201cA big boy hit me.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ve been fighting?\u201d she demands, \u201cWhy were you fighting? Why can\u2019t you even go one single day without getting into trouble? What do I have to do to make you listen to me an\u2019 use that head of yours for something other than a hat rack? Huh?!\u201d, accentuating every other word with a jerk of your hair. \u201cAn\u2019 stop your damned blubbering or I\u2019ll give you something to really cry about,\u201d she says through her teeth as she gives you a couple of thrusts even more violent than before.\n\nYou slam your eyes shut and grit your teeth in an attempt to stifle the involuntary spasms.\n\n\u201cUgh!\u201d she roars in disgust, flinging you prone on top of the picnic table. \u201cNow get over there an\u2019 sit down! It\u2019s time to eat.\u201d\n\nShe unrolls a paper bag and slams down a small boat of shriveled, dried up shrimp and a larger one half full of crispy fries (the small ones that no one wants and are generally tossed out instead of being served to customers).\n\nYou begin to pick at them one by one, but your hunger soon takes over and you start to cram them into your mouth by the handful.\n\n\u201cSlow down. They\u2019re all yours. I had mine already on the way back,\u201d she says in a more pleasant tone. \u201cI got a job today. I had to sweep the parking lot of the caf\u00e9 I\u2019ll be working at to pay for this an\u2019 I\u2019ll be waitressing starting tomorrow. An\u2019 I got us a place to stay, too. Another waitress I\u2019ll be working with is gonna let us stay in her garage until I can get back on my feet. An\u2019 she\u2019s gonna give us cots to sleep on for a change.\u201d\n\nYou look up at her as you pop the last shrimp in your mouth and she smiles at you. You can\u2019t help but smile back.\n\n\u201cTime to get going, mister,\u201d she beams, snatching the bag from under the table. \u201cI wanna be there when she gets home an\u2019 see what we can do to help her out around the place. We\u2019re not gonna be bums.\u201d\n\n\n\n\u201cWhy don\u2019t you go out back an\u2019 play while I talk to Honey,\u201d says your mom, \u201cAn\u2019 don\u2019t leave the yard.\u201d\n\nIt is a tidy house with a neatly trimmed yard. A small flower garden runs the length of the sidewalk connecting the kitchen door at the back of the house to the one on the side of the garage. Beyond it, there are white painted, metal lawn chairs and set squarely between the house and a row of short evergreens marking the property line stands a wooden swing set.\n\nYou walk around for a few minutes and, finding nothing at all to do, flop into one of the swings where you spend the next few hours. You can\u2019t hear their words, but can see through the kitchen window how much fun your mom is having laughing and talking with her new friend. It makes you both happy and a little sad. She hasn\u2019t laughed like that with you for a long, long time.\n\nYou really miss the old days.", "action_results": [{"action": "Unexpected Visitor", "result": "You pull the freshly baked muffin out of the Tupperware bowl that Honey had brought over for your breakfast when she and your mom had left for work, absently weighing it in your hands while you try to think of something to while away the hours until they return.\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll be home before dark. Stay here,\u201d your mom had said, \u201cI don\u2019t want to have to go looking for you after working all day an\u2019 I\u2019m warning you now you\u2019d better not get into any trouble.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re only a little bit hungry right now so you decide you\u2019d better save it for when you get really hungry later. You put the muffin back in the bowl and snap the lid closed.\n\nYou are startled by a knock on the door. No one knows you are here.\n\nYou creep over to the door and try to peek through the gap between the edge of the window frame and the dark vinyl curtain, but can\u2019t see anything. Imagining the worst, you pick up a small spade from a wooden tote and wield it like a knife. If whoever it is kicks the door down, maybe you\u2019ll be able to get in a jab.\n\n\u201cBilly?\u201d comes a familiar whisper.\n\nYou drop the spade back in the tote and open the door.\n\nJane is wearing cut-offs and flip-flops just like you, but she\u2019s also wearing a yellowed, button-up shirt that\u2019s much too large for her, tied at the waist.\n\n\u201cHow\u2019d you know I was here,\u201d you ask, a little confused.\n\n\u201cI followed you here from the park yesterday.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou did?\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah. I saw that lady pull your hair. Is that your mom?\u201d\n\n\u201cUh huh,\u201d you say looking down at your feet, \u201cshe gets like that when she\u2019s tired.\u201d\n\n\u201cMy momma does that to me, too. Gramma says I have to love her and be patient, but I still don\u2019t like her.\u201d\n\nYou try to think of something to say, but can\u2019t. All you can do is stare at her.\n\nFinally, she breaks the silence. \u201cWanna go get a pop? I got a quarter from the change jar. We can share it,\u201d she grins at you.\n\n\u201cOkay. We gotta hurry, though. I\u2019m not s\u2019posed to go anywhere.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt won\u2019t take long. The store\u2019s only a couple blocks from here.\u201d\n\n\n\nTen minutes later, the two of you are on the sidewalk staring at the vending machine in front of Fredrick\u2019s grocery. Jane plunks her quarter into the slot and whips open the door on the side.\n\n\u201cPick one,\u201d she says.\n\nYou lean in and squint at the selection and then tentatively say \u201cI like root beer.\u201d\n\n\u201cMe too! It\u2019s my favorite!\u201d she exclaims as she grips the bottle\u2019s neck and yanks it free\u2014allowing another to roll in to take its place. Then, gripping the bottle with both hands, she pokes it into the rectangular hole and pops the cap off without even spilling one single drop. She then presents it to you saying \u201cYou\u2019re my guest so you get the first sip.\u201d\n\nYou grin from ear to ear.\n\n\n\nOn the way back to your house she informs you \u201cI\u2019ve lived here my whole life. I can show you all the neat places and all the places to stay away from. There\u2019s not a whole lot.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s how I was at my old house before my mom and dad got divorced,\u201d you say, handing the bottle back to her.\n\nJane doesn\u2019t respond, but stops you short by sticking her arm out in front of your chest. She\u2019s staring intently down the street and you follow her gaze. The three boys from yesterday are crossing a block ahead of you.\n\n\u201cWe better go the long way \u2018round,\u201d she says, \u201cI\u2019ll show you where my house is.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "The Secret Place", "result": "\u201cThat\u2019s my house,\u201d Jane says, pointing to a ramshackle place covered in old and warped wood siding with peeling paint. The yard is waist high in grass and weeds with a worn path leading up to a sagging corner porch that looks like it could collapse at any moment. \u201cC\u2019mon, I\u2019ll show you.\u201d\n\nYou follow her up the path and onto the porch. The boards creak and moan under your feet. You hold the screen door open while she heaves against the heavy entry door sagging on its hinges with her shoulder to unstick it from its jamb and shoves with all her weight to plow it open.\n\n\u201cMy momma\u2019s not home right now,\u201d she says, stepping inside \u201cbut that\u2019s okay. I can have friends over if I want to.\u201d\n\nYou follow her in.\n\nBy what little sunlight filters in, you can tell that the inside isn\u2019t much better than the outside. The filthy carpeting is littered in bits of trash and the furniture is piled high with wadded clothing. The air is a stale mixture of cigarette smoke and vomit. You manage to quell your gag reflex by taking shallow breaths in through your mouth.\n\nShe watches you for a minute or two as you look around and says \u201cIt\u2019s just a house.\u201d After another minute she says \u201cOkay, let\u2019s go.\u201d\n\nYou help her drag the door closed and are stepping off the porch when she suddenly stops and says \u201cWait. There\u2019s something else I wanna show you.\u201d\n\nYou pause and then follow her around the corner of the house, watching carefully for snakes in the tall grass.\n\n\u201cThis is my \u2018secret place\u2019,\u201d she whispers, \u201cNobody knows about it. Not even Momma.\u201d\n\nBending down, she pulls the grate loose from the foundation and slides it partway to the side, then slips through into a dark crawlspace. \u201cC\u2019mon,\u201d she says over her shoulder, \u201cIt\u2019s cool in here.\u201d\n\nYou follow her inside and can barely make out anything other than her. She has turned around and now sits facing you. You hear a rattle of bottles as she puts the now empty one with some others.\n\nGradually, you\u2019re able to see a little more, but nothing in detail.\n\n\u201cThis is the \u2018change jar\u2019,\u201d she announces, holding something out in front of her, \u201cI keep all the money Gramma gives me in it and what I get for all the bottles I find and take back.\u201d Picking something else up she says in a hushed and mysterious voice \u201cThis is my treasure chest. It\u2019s where I keep all my important stuff.\u201d\n\nYour eyes finally adjust to the dim light and you can see she\u2019s cradling a cigar box tied with a ribbon as she crawls past you to the opening. \u201cHere, I\u2019ll show you.\u201d\n\nShe begins pulling the contents out one by one and handling them gingerly. \u201cThis is me and Gramma when I was little,\u201d holding out a yellowed Polaroid of a grim-faced woman holding the hand of a toddler, \u201cand this is when I went to her house when momma went to the hospital,\u201d showing you a slightly fresher one that\u2019s probably only a couple years old, at most. There are several more and all with the same grim-faced woman standing with Jane, holding her hand.\n\nThere are several black-and-white postcards with scenes from various parks and tourist attractions. Each one is addressed to Jane and tells what a wonderful time her Gramma is having and signed \u2018Love Gramma\u2019.\n\nThen there are a few fancy buttons and ribbons and such things that in all likelihood have sentimental value known only to her.\n\nYou smile and nod as she excitedly tells you about every detail. The most interesting to you are the pictures on the post cards. They pull at something primal inside of you and you feel a strange longing to see many of the places for yourself.\n\nAfter she has quieted down a bit you say \u201cI don\u2019t have anything important anymore. We lost everything we had moving around so much and now we have to start all over.\u201d\n\nJane\u2019s expression grows dark and she only looks at you without saying anything for the longest time which makes you very uncomfortable. Finally, she looks away and changes the subject \u201cI sleep in here at night sometimes. I have my covers in that burlap sack over there.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou sleep in here? How come? Ain\u2019t you afraid of snakes and spiders and stuff?\u201d\n\nJane just shakes her head. She gently places her treasure chest back in its place and says \u201cThe boys are probably long gone by now so we can go back to your house.\u201d\n\nYou crawl out behind her and she puts the grate back in place. The two of you walk in silence and you can\u2019t figure out for the life of you why she\u2019d ever sleep under her house instead of inside it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wishes and Secrets", "result": "When you get back to Honey\u2019s house, the first thing you do is run into the garage and grab your muffin. It\u2019s almost dinnertime now and your stomach has started to complain. You tear it in two as carefully as you can and say \u201cHere,\u201d handing Jane the slightly larger half, \u201cIt\u2019s all I have so we\u2019ll have to share it.\u201d\n\n\u201cFahnk mhu,\u201d Jane says through a mouthful, beaming at you, as she tears into her half like a wild animal that hasn\u2019t eaten in days.\n\nAfter inhaling your half, you wipe your hands on your cut-offs. Jane smirks and wipes her hands off on your shorts, too. You jump back in shock and she tackles you\u2014straddling you and instantly pinning your wrists down above your head. You are caught completely by surprise! This is the first time she\u2019s been physical with you and you aren\u2019t exactly sure how to react.\n\nYou decide to play along by feigning escape. She giggles maniacally and pushes your head back down with her own. You stare into her wild eyes as you wriggle about and her shrieks of excitement grow louder and louder. Her eyes are the color of new grass and despite her current playfulness, reveal that she is much older than her years. Her hair is long and oily black and shimmers blue in the sun. For the first time you notice how beautiful she is.\n\nThrough squeals and giggles she begins pecking kisses all over your face. The more you pretend to struggle the more she seems to enjoy it.\n\nHer expression suddenly changes to one of extreme seriousness and her eyes narrow. She dives in and gives you a big smacking smooch right on the cheek. You freeze for an instant before rolling out from under her and dashing around the swing set\u2014keeping it between you and her as some kind of protective barrier. Every time she darts one way, you go the other and her shrill laughter only increases.\n\nShe chases you all around the yard in a one-sided game of tag. You are quite a bit faster than she is so you can easily stay out of her reach. She really seems to enjoy the pursuit and she\u2019s unwilling to give up her quarry.\n\nEventually, things settle down some and the two of you sit in the swings where you manage to catch your breath. She\u2019s still smiling devilishly at you so you keep your guard up and watch her warily from the corner of your eye.\n\n\u201cWhen\u2019s your mom coming home?\u201d Jane asks.\n\n\u201c\u2019Bout dark, I think.\u201d\n\n\u201cWanna go get another pop?\u201d\n\n\u201cSure.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe\u2019ll have to return the bottles \u2018cause I\u2019m all out of quarters. If you\u2019ll carry half of \u2018em, we can take all of \u2018em down.\u201d\n\n\u201cOkay.\u201d\n\n\n\nAfter nearly running the whole way there, you two are puffing as you crawl through the hole into the damp coolness of the \u2018secret place\u2019.\n\n\u201cI need a rest,\u201d she pants, dragging the plump burlap sack out between the two of you. She flops over onto it and stretches her legs out, crossing her ankles.\n\n\u201cMe, too,\u201d you say, rolling over and laying your head down beside hers, stretching your legs out in the opposite direction.\n\nThe warmth of her ear and cheek are comforting to you as you stare up into the darkness trying to make out the floorboards. Her steady, rapid breathing gradually slows and your eyes start to glaze over. You haven\u2019t had an afternoon nap since you were in kindergarten, but you are beginning to see their appeal.\n\nJane finally breaks the silence in a soothing tone, \u201cGramma has a giant photo book filled with pictures of all kinds of neat places she\u2019s been to from all over the country. My favorite ones are from her honeymoon to the Grand Canyon. She was just a girl back then\u2014even younger than Momma.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt looks like mountains,\u201d she says, \u201cbut it\u2019s not. It\u2019s a big hole in the ground a mile deep. It\u2019s so big that you can\u2019t even see the other side! I\u2019m gonna go there when I grow up. I\u2019m gonna see everything in Gramma\u2019s book for myself.\u201d\n\nEven in the dark and with your eyes closed you can feel the smile on her face, but it\u2019s short-lived and her voice becomes a hoarse whisper, \u201cI wish I could live someplace else. Momma hates me. Gramma told me that Momma was in love with a boy that didn\u2019t love her back. That\u2019s why I don\u2019t have a Daddy and why Momma couldn\u2019t even look at me when I first got borned. The doctor named me Jane \u2018cause that\u2019s what they call girls when they don\u2019t know their name.\u201d\n\nThe feeling you had of drowsiness has completely and utterly faded now. You haven\u2019t felt this much sadness since the last time you saw your dad\u2014driving away from the courthouse in his pickup truck and not looking back.\n\n\u201cC\u2019mon,\u201d Jane says, sitting bolt upright, \u201clet\u2019s change in them bottles.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Mr. Freddy", "result": "Jane spills her armload on the front counter by the cash register. After she\u2019s righted all of them, she starts pulling them two at a time from yours.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ve got quite a number this time, little lady,\u201d says a gruff heavy-set man, smiling. \u201cYou\u2019re gonna run me clear out of money if you keep on like this.\u201d\n\nJane shoots him a wide toothy grin.\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s see now. Nineteen bottles at three cents apiece\u2026 That comes to fifty-seven cents. Does that sound right to you?\u201d\n\n\u201cSounds right to me,\u201d Jane beams back at him, \u201cCan I get it in quarters so we can buy pops?\u201d\n\n\u201cSure thing. Let me just put \u2018em in the crates and then I\u2019ll get you your money,\u201d he says, stepping from behind the counter and walking over to stacks in front of the big plate window in front.\n\nWhile his back is to her, Jane snatches a Moon Pie from the impulse buy rack and slips it into the fold of her tied shirt.\n\nStepping toward her, you whisper \u201cYou shouldn\u2019t do that. What if he catches you?\u201d You glance over to see if the man noticed and, sure enough, you see that he\u2019s watching her in the convex mirror hanging up front in the corner.\n\nBefore you can say anything, he\u2019s already back at the register and putting the bottles in the crates he\u2019s brought back with him.\n\nYou\u2019re shaking like a leaf and expect him to drop the hammer at any second, but all he does is smile at you knowingly and wink. He turns toward the register, pushes a button to release the tray, and slips several coins into his other hand.\n\n\u201cHere you go, little lady,\u201d he says, dropping the stack into her open palm. \u201cThat\u2019s fifty-seven cents. You\u2019d better count it to make sure it\u2019s all there.\u201d\n\n\u201cThanks!\u201d she says, poking the coins deep into her pocket.\n\n\u201cBy the way, when\u2019s the last time you ate something? I\u2019ve made up a few too many sandwiches in the back and it looks like you two might be just the ones to help me get rid of \u2018em. Whaddaya say?\u201d\n\nYou grin from ear to ear and nod vigorously.\n\nJane\u2019s face turns red as she looks off to the side and squeaks \u201cThank you, Mr. Freddy.\u201d\n\n\u201cC\u2019mon, let\u2019s get at \u2018em then,\u201d he says, flashing his eyes at the two of you while clicking the drawer closed on the register.\n\nOn the way to the back, he grabs three small cartons of milk from their refrigerated case without breaking his stride\u2014with you right on his heels. Jane is a reluctant half-step behind.\n\nWhen you reach the meat counter, he steps behind it and pulls up a white butcher paper package from underneath. He opens it revealing three ham and cheese sandwiches stacked high with lettuce, tomato and pickles and proceeds to cut them corner to corner, then fans them out on the paper sheet.\n\n\u201cDig in,\u201d he says, opening the milk cartons and handing you each one, \u201cThere\u2019s more\u2019n plenty to go around.\u201d\n\nWhile you\u2019re eating, he bugs his eyes out at you and makes goofy looking faces. You can\u2019t help but laugh at his antics and Jane spews milk from her nose once.\n\nMr. Freddy has picked up a broom and is sweeping up behind the meat counter by the time the two of you have had your fill. He seems particularly interested in the dark corner beneath the bench that holds his slicer, grinder and saw.\n\n\u201cThank you, Mr. Freddy.\u201d\n\n\u201cThank you, sir,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re quite welcome,\u201d he tells you both without looking up or turning around as you\u2019re heading toward the front of the store a step behind Jane.\n\nWhen you get to the register, Jane pulls the Moon Pie out of her shirt and puts it back in the rack without looking back. You couldn\u2019t be more pleased. You look back toward Mr. Freddy, but he\u2019s still bent over behind the meat counter and doesn\u2019t see.\n\nOnce outside, Jane fishes out a quarter, drops it in the slot, and pulls out another root beer. You are too full to even think about drinking any of it and, on the way back to your house, take only tiny sips before passing it back to her.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019re sitting in the shade of the garage on the opposite side as the house, staring vacantly at the overgrown lot crowding in on the neatly trimmed edge of Honey\u2019s yard.\n\n\u201cYou wanna come with me and Gramma to see the Grand Canyon when I grow up?\u201d asks Jane out of the blue, hugging her knees to her chin.\n\n\u201cUh huh. Okay.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe can take Gramma\u2019s truck and drive the whole way there. She said I can have it when I grow up \u2018cause she\u2019ll be too old to drive it by then. I know how to drive it, she lets me drive it on the farm road when I\u2019m at her house. She has to push the pedals for me, though, \u2018cause I can\u2019t reach \u2018em. I\u2019ll teach you how and then we can take turns. She\u2019s got a big camper on the back for sleepin\u2019 in, but we always sleep in the house on the big bed \u2018cause she\u2019s got tired ol\u2019 bones and she needs her rest.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe need to make up a map of all the different places,\u201d you say, excitedly, \u201cAnd we can stop at bus stations to find even more. The one we stopped at had posters from all kinds of places. I want to go see them places too.\u201d\n\nJane looks over at you and smiles.\n\nFor the next little bit, the two of you talk about the various places that you know about. The whole idea of adventure really appeals to you and you\u2019re probably even more excited than she is about it. Every time you look over at her, she\u2019s staring back at you through glassy eyes that say more than words ever could.\n\n\n\nJane notices Honey\u2019s car pulling into the driveway before you do. She leaps to her feet and says, \u201cI better go so you don\u2019t get in trouble. See ya tomorrow,\u201d she throws over her shoulder as she heads toward the back, carefully keeping the garage between her and the driveway.\n\n\u201cSee ya later,\u201d you holler to her as you watch her dash off between the evergreens and disappear down the alley.\n\nYou walk around the back of the garage to greet your mom when she gets out of the car, but just as you round the corner another car pulls in behind Honey\u2019s. You duck back and peek around to see two scraggly looking men get out.\n\nHoney walks over to one of them. He throws his arm around her waist and pulls her to him. The other walks up beside your mom and leans back against the trunk of the car next to her.\n\nYou stay hidden until they\u2019ve all gone inside and then you go sit on the swings and watch them through the kitchen window. They are laughing and you see them drinking beers and passing a cigarette back and forth. You didn\u2019t even know your mom smoked!\n\nYou watch her go sit on the man\u2019s lap like she used to with your dad and kiss him every now and then. Maybe he\u2019s her boyfriend now. It\u2019s good that she has friends again. Maybe she will be okay.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find something to do", "result": "There\u2019s nothing to do and you\u2019ve been sitting here so long that your butt has fallen asleep. You need to do something\u2014anything\u2014, but what?\n\nYou get up and begin taking a stroll around the yard. You turn over a couple of rocks at the edge of the flower bed and pluck a stiff, dry grass stem to herd the pill bugs you find crawling around under them. You usher them first one way and then another before it grows tiresome and you replace their stone shelter.\n\nStanding up, you wipe your hands off on your cutoffs and walk around some surveying the area. There is absolutely nothing here for a boy to do. You sure aren\u2019t interested in looking at flowers even if they come with their own bugs.\n\nWhen you get to the edge of the front yard, you turn down the street and pace back and forth the half a block between Honey\u2019s house and the lamp post on the corner. It doesn\u2019t take long for this to get very, very old.\n\nYou hear a buzz overhead and look up to see the light beginning to flicker to life. Already, there is a swarm of mosquitoes and a moth flitting around it.\n\nYou study the sky and see that it will still be hours until nightfall. You\u2019re not sleepy yet, but might as well head back anyway.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head for bed", "result": "You go into the garage and flip on the bulb. You flop down on your cot and lay there staring up through the ceiling joists at the shadowy undersides of the boards above the rafters. In the swirls and squiggles of their grain and knots, you make out tiny little faces\u2014each with their own unique expressions. It\u2019s a gift you\u2019ve had since before you can remember that has served no other purpose other than to make you feel not quite so alone all the time.\n\n\n\n\u201cWake up sleepyhead,\u201d your mom says, shaking you.\n\nYou slit your eyes open and stretch your arms as far back over your head as they\u2019ll go.\n\n\u201cHere\u2019s a dollar so you can buy your lunch at the grocery store,\u201d your mom says, dropping the bill on your chest. \u201cIt\u2019s three blocks that way,\u201d she points in the direction of Fredrick\u2019s, not knowing that you\u2019ve already been there. \u201cMake sure you come straight home, okay? Today\u2019s payday, but I got a few dollars in tips yesterday so we\u2019ll spend that so we don\u2019t eat up all of Honey\u2019s food.\u201d\n\nYou try to blink the sleep away. \u201cAre we getting a house when you get paid?\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll probably start looking for one in the morning, but I don\u2019t think I\u2019ll have quite enough yet. We might be here for a little while.\u201d\n\nYou look over at the garage\u2019s bare wall studs and can see spots where light seeps through. You sure hope you don\u2019t still live in here in the wintertime, because it might get really, really cold.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m going out dancing tonight after work. I probably won\u2019t be in \u2018til late so you be in by dark. I\u2019ll be here when you wake up.\u201d\n\n\u201cOkay.\u201d\n\n\u201cOh! an\u2019 before I forget, Honey left you some bananas for your breakfast. They\u2019re in the sack by the door. I\u2019ll see you when I get home.\u201d And with that, she\u2019s out the door.\n\nA couple minutes later, you swing your feet over the side and slide them into your flip-flops. Standing, you stretch one last time as you lurch stiff-legged toward the door, grabbing the sack on your way out.\n\n\n\nAs you round the corner to Jane\u2019s house, she bolts out of the front door and hop-skips over to you. She grabs your hand and drags you toward her house.\n\n\u201cHurry up!\u201d she says, nearly yanking your arm out of its socket, \u201cI made something for you.\u201d\n\nShe practically dives through the hole into the \u201csecret place\u201d and you scurry in behind her wondering what all her excitement is about. She flips open the \u201ctreasure chest\u201d and hands you a folded up sheet of notebook paper.\n\nAs you\u2019re looking at it a little confused, \u201cIt\u2019s a card, open it up!\u201d she demands.\n\nYou carefully flip it open. Inside are the words \u201cBestist Frend\u201d drawn with a careful hand in crayon and signed \u201cJane\u201d.\n\n\u201cSee?\u201d she asks, \u201cI made it the color of our eyes, blue and green!\u201d\n\n\u201cNobody ever gave me a card before,\u201d you say, looking back and forth from it to a beaming Jane, smiling.\n\n\u201cMy pleasure!\u201d\n\n\u201cAin\u2019t never had a best friend before, neither.\u201d You barely even manage to get the words out before she throws her arms around your neck, hugging the daylights out of you, and kisses you right on the mouth! This time you don\u2019t pull away because you know it\u2019s out of happiness.\n\nWhen she finally lets go, you say \u201cBetter put it back in the \u2018treasure chest\u2019 to keep it safe.\u201d\n\n\u201cOkay.\u201d\n\nWhile she\u2019s carefully arranging everything in her collection, you remember the sack and say \u201cI\u2019ve got bananas for breakfast. Want one?\u201d\n\nHer face lights up and, nodding, she shuffles forward on her knees over to you. You snap the one off of the bunch that doesn\u2019t have any soft, brown spots and hand it to her.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019ve been walking around and talking for a couple of hours, not having any specific destination in mind when Jane says \u201cWanna go see the school? It\u2019s closed up for Summer right now, but I know where Second Grade is. I can show you.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah, okay.\u201d\n\nA couple of blocks later, you\u2019re cutting through a corner gas station when a display rack just inside the door catches your eye.\n\n\u201cThey got maps here,\u201d you say, pivoting toward the door. Jane holds up and then reluctantly follows you in.\n\nYou\u2019re slowly spinning the display carousel, trying to discern the meaning of all the different shapes and colors when a lanky, bearded man in oil-stained coveralls and wiping his hands on a greasy rag steps in through the side door from the garage. \u201cWhat are you kids doing in here?\u201d he says, a little too gruff.\n\n\u201cI-I\u2019m l-looking for a m-map to the Grand Canyon,\u201d you stammer.\n\n\u201cThere ain\u2019t no Arizona maps in there,\u201d he says, pushing you to the side and taking control of the display. \u201cIt might be in the Central and Western U.S. road map, here,\u201d handing you one.\n\nOn the top corner, you see \u201c25\u00a2\u201d printed in the center of a circle and you debate buying it out of the dollar you have shoved in your pocket.\n\n\u201cWhat do you want it for, anyway?\u201d he asks.\n\n\u201cI w-wanna s-study how to get there for when I\u2019m growed up, \u2018cause me and Jane are gonna go see it someday.\u201d\n\nHe furrows his brow looking the dirty pair of you up and down and finally says, snatching the map from your hands and returning it to the display, \u201cWait here. I think I have an old one in my glove compartment that I\u2019ll just give you. I need a new one anyway.\u201d\n\nWhen he\u2019s out of earshot, Jane gets right up close to your ear and whispers \u201cHe came home with Momma one time. He\u2019s not nice.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhaddaya mean?\u201d\n\nJane only shrugs and looks away.\n\nThe man comes back with a folded, tattered map and hands it to you. \u201cThere you go, son. I don\u2019t expect I\u2019ll need one for a while so I\u2019ll just get a new one when I do.\u201d\n\nYou reluctantly take it and say \u201cThank you\u201d, but it worries you not knowing what Jane meant.\n\nYou turn and follow her as she steps quickly outside.\n\n\n\nBefore you stands a long red brick building surrounded by a native stone wall with a built in sag between sturdy pillars.\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s the school,\u201d says Jane, \u201cC\u2019mon I\u2019ll show you the Second grade. It\u2019s on the other side right next to the playground.\u201d\n\nYou follow her around the end of the building and see a half-dozen children a few years older than yourself lazing around in a chain-link yard.\n\nJane freezes.\n\n\u201cHello,\u201d comes a sweet womanly voice from behind you, making both of you jump. \u201cYou two aren\u2019t here for Summer School, are you?\u201d\n\n\u201cNope,\u201d you say, \u201cI don\u2019t even go to this school yet. I just moved here.\u201d\n\n\u201cI was gonna show him the Second grade,\u201d says Jane.\n\n\u201cYou go right ahead.\u201d\n\nJane grabs your hand and pulls you toward a long set of windows. \u201cThat\u2019s it right there,\u201d she says, pointing.\n\nCupping your hands to the side of your face, you peer through the glass and see rows of small desks, blackboards and the large teacher\u2019s desk. It looks basically the same as your First Grade classroom did last year.\n\n\u201cIf you two want to eat with us, you can,\u201d says the woman from behind you. \u201cI brought plenty of sack lunches to go around.\u201d\n\nYou and Jane swap glances, then you both nod in unison and say \u201cokay\u201d with giant grins on your faces. You turn around to see that she\u2019s holding out a small paper sack with its top neatly folded down to each of you.\n\nThe two of you sit with your backs against the school building while you devour your bologna with mustard sandwiches, carrot sticks and an apple half. The other kids have their lunches sitting on whatever playground equipment they happen to be on when the nice lady delivers their sacks to them.", "action_results": [{"action": "It Begins", "result": "You wander around town for a while and end up back at the secret spot. The two of you are scrutinizing over the faded and torn map and begin planning your route.\n\n\u201cHere it is! The Grand Canyon is almost straight across and only a little down,\u201d you say.\n\nThe two of you trace roads with your fingers trying to find the most direct route and puzzling out all the different town names.\n\nWhen you\u2019ve grown weary of it, you have Jane put it in the treasure chest.\n\nYou remember the dollar bill in your pocket. \u201cMom gave me a dollar to buy lunch with,\u201d you say as you dig it out and slick it down across your leg to try to get all the wrinkles out of it before handing it to Jane. \u201cProbably better put it in the change jar so it don\u2019t get lost and we can buy something to eat with it later.\u201d\n\nShe smiles at you and carefully folds it before dropping it in with the rest of her money.\n\n\u201cWanna go get a pop?\u201d\n\n\u201cSure,\u201d you say.\n\nJane fishes one of the quarters out of the jar and the two of you are on your way.\n\n\n\nHalf a root beer later, you find yourself at the park just idly swaying back and forth on the swings. The place is deserted due to the afternoon heat and you try not to let the dark, rusty chains touch your sides because it nearly takes the hide off whenever they do.\n\n\u201cBack before the divorce, Dad used to borrow the Tompkin\u2019s boat and take us to the lake on hot days like this. We\u2019d go fishin\u2019 until it got too hot and then we\u2019d cook whatever fish we caught back at the campground. Dad would clean \u2018em, mostly, but he showed me where to cut. He just wouldn\u2019t let me hold the knife by myself because I might get a bad cut. And then when it got too hot we went swimming in the lake.\u201d\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t swim,\u201d Jane says.\n\n\u201cI can teach you\u2014it\u2019s real easy. Is there a lake anywhere around here?\u201d\n\n\u201cNo. Just the swimmin\u2019 pool over on Broad Street. It costs a dollar to go in and you have to have a bathing suit. They don\u2019t allow no cut-offs.\u201d\n\nYou pass the time idly and soon discover that the street lights have come to life. The shadows under the trees have become full black.\n\n\u201cI didn\u2019t know it was so late,\u201d Jane says, \u201cwe gotta get home so we don\u2019t get in trouble.\u201d\n\n\u201cMom isn\u2019t coming home tonight so I\u2019ll be there all by myself.\u201d\n\n\u201cWanna spend the night at my house?\u201d\n\n\u201cI better not. She\u2019s supposed to be back in the morning.\u201d\n\n\u201cWell, you can come over for a little while. Momma never comes home on the weekend and it\u2019s always boring with nothing to do.\u201d\n\n\u201cOkay.\u201d\n\n\n\nYou follow Jane up the front steps of her house and stop at the wide open door. Every time before now it has been closed.\n\nYou hear a woman cough from the blackness within and see a tiny orange ball of light swing in an arc and bounce off of something, exploding in a shower of sparks. \u201cShit!\u201d the voice says, and then a lamp flips on and you see a ragged, dark haired lady wearing a thin white cotton dress that\u2019s twisted halfway around her middle sitting spraddle-legged in the recliner in the far corner.\n\nJane opens the screen door and takes a small step inside.\n\nA drunken slur whips out like a pistol shot, \u201cWhy are you so late?!\u201d It\u2019s obvious by the tone that she doesn\u2019t care about an answer.\n\n\u201cI was playing at the park with my new friend\u2014\u201d\n\nA flat pint bottle whistles past your heads and shatters on the porch column. \u201cDon\u2019t give me that shit! I\u2019ve had it with you! If you get the cops out here again, you\u2019ll regret it!\u201d she spits venomously.\n\n\u201cI wouldn\u2019t do\u2014\u201d Jane starts apologetically as the woman springs from her chair like a cat, snatching her by the arm and starts waling on her in a flurry of slaps.\n\n\u201cStop! Stop! Stop!\u201d you scream, hitting the woman at the waist and grappling with all your strength, trying to force them apart.\n\nShe flicks you away like an insect, but loosens her grasp just long enough for Jane to slip free.\n\nScreaming in half terror, half frustration, Jane flies out the door and into the dark street.\n\nYou dodge around the crazy lady who doesn\u2019t give you a second glance as she steps out onto the porch in pursuit of Jane. She stops at the edge, clutching the column to keep from falling on her face, and screams \u201cYou better run you little bitch!\u201d\n\nYou run out into the dark street in the direction you think Jane went and have gone more than a block when you decide she must\u2019ve gone a different way.\n\nNow you\u2019ve done it. You can feel someone or some thing watching you and you\u2019re pretty sure it isn\u2019t Jane. You\u2019re about to turn around when you hear sobbing up ahead.\n\nTo your relief, you find her crumpled in the grass between the sidewalk and the street. She\u2019s pounding her fists and half squealing, half moaning in her rage.\n\nYou crouch beside her, putting your hand on her shoulder and she looks up at you through swollen, tear-filled eyes.\n\n\u201cAre you alright?\u201d you ask.\n\nShe opens her mouth to say something, but can\u2019t seem to form the words so she ends up just nodding.\n\n\u201cC\u2019mon. You can stay at my house tonight. I\u2019ll tell Mom what happened when she gets home in the morning. It\u2019ll be okay,\u201d you say, helping her to her feet.\n\nJane shakes her head and says between hitches \u201cNot there. With her. She might come back early.\u201d\n\nYou walk with your arm around her for a few minutes, half carrying her as she regains herself and somehow end up in a dark alley. You hold on to her a bit more tightly than before. Her warmth and presence is enough that you feel safe.\n\nAbout halfway down the alley, Jane grabs your hand and pulls you through a leaning gate\u2014held up somewhat by its bottom hinge which is only still barely attached\u2014toward an eerie and desolate looking, boarded up house.\n\n\u201cC\u2019mon,\u201d she says, \u201cI know the way in.\u201d\n\n\u201cW-wait. What if something\u2019s in there? What if someone catches us?\u201d\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t worry. No one ever comes here. This place is \u2018bandoned.\u201d\n\nThere are strange dark shapes crouched in the high, unkempt grass that you really hope are only bushes. You look up at the attic vent and can feel eyes peering back at you from the pitch black gaps between the louvers.\n\n\u201cHere,\u201d Jane says, stopping cold and pivots you around on legs that desire to keep moving. She swings a section of plywood to the side exposing a window. \u201cGo on in. I\u2019ll hold it open for you.\u201d\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t like this,\u201d you say looking over your shoulder toward the front of the house.\n\n\u201cC\u2019mon. Ain\u2019t nothin\u2019 to be afraid of,\u201d she says, hiking a foot up on the windowsill and slithers her way through.\n\nAfter another cautious survey, you grip the windowsill on either side and hoist yourself up and through into a darkened and vacant dining room. Overhead hangs a chandelier\u2014the only thing in the whole room.\n\n\u201cSee? Told ya,\u201d she says, throwing her arms wide in presentation, \u201cThere\u2019s not even any furniture.\u201d\n\nYou creep softly past her to the door to the front room and look from side to side. Light filters in through cracks in the boarded up front windows from the street-lamps somewhere outside.\n\nJane plops down with her back against the wall. \u201cI think I\u2019ll stay here tonight. I sure ain\u2019t goin\u2019 home.\u201d\n\n\u201cCome home with me,\u201d you try again, sliding down beside her, \u201cEverything will be better tomorrow. I\u2019ll make a pallet on the floor and you can sleep on my cot.\u201d\n\n\u201cNope,\u201d she says, shaking her head, \u201cI don\u2019t like your mom.\u201d\n\n\u201cShe won\u2019t do anything to you. She only gets mad at me sometimes\u2014not all the time. She never does anything to anyone else.\u201d\n\nJane shakes her head and you can tell by the look on her face that she means it.\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll just stay here with you then,\u201d you say.\n\nJane frowns at you. \u201cYou\u2019ll get in trouble.\u201d\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t care. You\u2019re my friend and I won\u2019t leave you here all by yourself.\u201d\n\nJane smiles and clutches your hand in hers, folding her fingers around yours and scoots tight up against you. She lays her head on your shoulder and lets out a long, slow sigh of relief.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m happy you\u2019re my friend,\u201d Jane says wistfully as she drifts off to sleep.\n\nYou softly lean your head against hers as her breaths deepen and slow.", "action_results": [{"action": "No Haven", "result": "You\u2019ve only just drifted off when a booming man\u2019s voice jars you awake and you very nearly leap out of your skin. \u201cWhat are you doing in there? Come out of there, you two,\u201d he commands, piercing your eyes with his flashlight beam.\n\nYou stagger to your feet and help a groggy Jane to hers. You saunter over to the window and help steady Jane as she picks her way through.\n\n\u201cOh, it\u2019s you again. You shouldn\u2019t be in there. This place is falling apart and you could get hurt.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe were just exploring,\u201d pleads Jane, \u201cweren\u2019t hurting anything.\u201d\n\n\u201cLooked like you were sleeping to me.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe just took a little nap is all \u2018cause we got tired.\u201d\n\nThe man grabs you by the arm to steady you as you hop down to the ground. He\u2019s wearing a dark uniform and you see a shiny tin shield pinned to his left breast pocket.\n\n\u201cHow many times have I told you to stay out of places like this, young lady? Maybe I should take you to the station and let you sit in a cell overnight to let you think about it. Maybe then you\u2019ll listen when an adult tells you not to do something.\u201d Turning toward you, he says \u201cI don\u2019t believe I know you, do I?\u201d\n\n\u201cN-no, sir. I-I just moved here,\u201d you say, trembling.\n\n\u201cWell, let me tell you that we take a mighty dim view on breaking and entering and trespassing around here. You look old enough to me to know that if something doesn\u2019t belong to you you should just leave it alone.\u201d\n\n\u201cY-yes s-sir.\u201d Your eyes begin to well up. You\u2019ve never met a police officer before and now he\u2019s about to arrest you and throw you in jail.\n\nJane stands there, rigid and glaring. She seems so strong and defiant\u2014something you could never hope to be\u2014looking as if she could attack at any moment.\n\nAfter a couple minutes that seem more like hours, he says \u201cNow you two get on home right now and don\u2019t let me catch you around here again or I will take you in. You understand?\u201d\n\n\u201cY-yes sir,\u201d you say, backpedaling before he can change his mind. You take a couple of steps backward, but Jane only stands there, boring holes in the officer. You snatch her by the hand and drag her along with you. Her gaze remains fixed on him until he\u2019s completely out of sight.\n\n\u201cWhat were you trying to do, get arrested?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cHe don\u2019t scare me none,\u201d Jane fumes.\n\n\n\nYou take your sweet time, wandering along first in the direction of your house one minute and then Jane\u2019s the next not really wishing to end up at either place.\n\nSomehow you reach the railroad tracks on the edge of town and the two of you absently turn and follow them.\n\nYou look warily over the dark embankment not knowing what may be lying in wait in the undergrowth just waiting to pounce. You wouldn\u2019t even be able to hear it the way the gravel is crunching beneath your feet.\n\nYou take a half-step closer to Jane. Even though it doesn\u2019t help all that much since she\u2019s not as big as you you somehow feel that there\u2019s safety in numbers.\n\nYou reach the edge of town and the wide spot that passes as a railroad staging yard. The street lights are behind you and everything here seems somehow darker even though your eyes have adjusted more to the lack of light.\n\nThere\u2019s a short string of boxcars on the side track and the shadows under and between them are completely black. If there was someone or something hiding in them, you wouldn\u2019t be able to see it until it was too late. Jane doesn\u2019t appear to be bothered by this even one little bit.\n\nWhile you\u2019re busy keeping an eye out for movement, Jane steps up to the side of the second boxcar where its door is open a couple of feet\u2014jumps up, pokes her head in and cranes her neck from side to side trying to glimpse what might be inside. You step beside her and shield your eyes with your hands from errant light and can\u2019t make out anything but more blackness.\n\n\u201cBoost me up,\u201d she says, lifting her leg and holding her foot out to you.\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t think we should.\u201d\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t be such a fraidy cat. There\u2019s no one around.\u201d\n\nYou grab her foot with both hands and hoist her up. She\u2019s as light as a feather.\n\n\u201cC\u2019mon.\u201d\n\nAfter double-checking to make sure there\u2019s nothing that will grab you from underneath the car, you plant your hands on the floor and jump up, but it\u2019s still a little too high to throw your leg over. You try again jumping with all you have and still no dice. On the third attempt, Jane grabs you under the arm and heaves just enough that you manage to hang your foot. You can feel yourself sliding back out and under the car, but she snatches you behind the neck and you strain against her hands gaining just enough leverage to make it up.\n\nThe two of you shuffle your way toward the end of the car where you find a few scattered and crushed cardboard barrels. You step around them and make your way toward the corner where you hear Jane slide down the side wall on the same side as the door and you turn and seat yourself against the end so that you are facing the door.\n\n\n\n\u201cWhen Momma drinks she gets mean. She\u2019s not always like that. Mostly she acts like I\u2019m not even there.\u201d\n\n\u201cMy mom\u2019s starting to get like that. She spends all her time over at Honey\u2019s house and now she\u2019s got a new boyfriend.\u201d\n\n\u201cYour mom will never be as bad as mine. She doesn\u2019t hate you.\u201d\n\n\u201cMaybe, but things keep getting worse instead of better.\u201d\n\nIt\u2019s too dark to see Jane\u2019s face, but you can tell she\u2019s staring at you. It makes you a little uncomfortable.\n\n\u201cMaybe we should just leave and go somewhere,\u201d Jane finally says, \u201cMaybe we could live at Gramma\u2019s house. She\u2019s really nice.\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not sure.\u201d\n\nYou lean your head back and think about what it would be like without your mom. You\u2019ve never been away from her for long. It\u2019s a little scary, but also a little exciting. You\u2019d get to be with Jane. That\u2019s also exciting and scary at the same time, too.\n\nWhile you ponder all of this, you drift off to sleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "Unexpected Journey", "result": "You are jostled awake, but the rhythmic clacking and gentle, soothing rocking makes it difficult to keep your eyes open. Slowly, you begin to drift back toward dreamland when you come to a sudden and horrific realization and your eyes pop wide open.\n\n\u201cWe\u2019re moving!\u201d\n\nJane moans softly in her sleep.\n\nGoose-pimples peak the length of your arm and the tiny hairs on the back of your neck come to attention. You reach out toward her sleep sounds and your hand finds Jane\u2019s cheek with more force than you\u2019d intended.\n\nShe bolts upright, swinging and lands a hard slap to the side of your head.\n\n\u201cWe\u2019re moving,\u201d you repeat, cradling your ear, \u201cThe train\u2019s moving!\u201d\n\nShe jumps up and the two of you stumble over the debris as you dash for the partly open door. Outside, the ground whizzes by at breakneck speed. You can barely even make it out as it passes by in the darkness. There is no way you\u2019d be able to jump out at this speed\u2014especially when you can\u2019t see where you might land.\n\n\u201cWe\u2019re stuck here,\u201d says Jane, \u201cWe\u2019ll just have to wait \u2018til we stop to get off.\u201d\n\n\u201cHow will we find our way back?\u201d\n\n\u201cWe\u2019ll just follow the train tracks. They go straight back to town.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah\u2026\u201d you say, staring blankly toward the horizon\u2014seeing the land zip by faster and faster in your imagination as it rapidly approaches a blur.\n\nYou return to the front of the car and sit back down next to Jane.\n\nWith each passing clack, you know that you are getting farther from home and deeper in dutch with your mom. There\u2019s no telling what she\u2019ll do to you this time when you get back.\n\n\u201cMy mom is going to be really mad when she finds out I\u2019m not in the garage,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cWe should just keep going and find somebody nice to live with. Gramma doesn\u2019t have a phone, but maybe we might could find her house.\u201d\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know. What if she doesn\u2019t like me? What if we can\u2019t find someone who likes both of us?\u201d\n\n\u201cThen we\u2019ll keep looking \u2018til we do.\u201d\n\nYou lay your head down next to Jane and think about what she said. You\u2019ve never been away from your mom before. What if everyone turns out to be just like her?\n\nYou can feel the vibrations through the wood in your teeth. It feels really weird.\n\n\n\n\n\nYou wake up and the car is still once more. Maybe it was just a dream.\n\nYou reach out your hand in the darkness, find Jane\u2019s shoulder and gently shake her awake.\n\n\u201cAre we stopped?\u201d she groggily asks.\n\n\u201cYeah. We should probably get off the train in case it starts moving again.\u201d\n\nYou stand up and help Jane stagger to her feet.\n\nLooking out the door, you see the street-lamps on the wrong side of the track. The diesel engine drones idly in the distance and you can see a rhythmic flashing light coming from that direction, but it\u2019s too far away to make out more than that.\n\nYou hop down onto the crunching gravel and quickly make your way into a stand of trees that are silhouetted against the predawn sky. You sit there until the train resumes its journey and see the sun peek out above the horizon.\n\nWhen you\u2019re sure that the coast is clear, you make your way in the opposite direction that the train was headed. A short distance down the tracks you find a similar looking yard to the one you\u2019d left last night.\n\nA line of metal buildings that serve the railroad runs along the street of whatever town you\u2019re in now and the two of you rattle doorknobs in hopes that you\u2019ll find one unlocked. They are all locked up tight.\n\nYou resume your trek.\n\nA few blocks down, you come to a crossing and see a highway sign a short distance away. You see the numbers 281 printed in big block letters inside of a white shield. If only you had your map with you, you might be able to figure out where you are and how far away you are from your home.\n\nThe sun is at your back and your shadows stretch into nothingness ahead of you.\n\nJane carefully steps on every cross tie as she walks along while you step on every other one with your other foot on the rail\u2014matching her stride for stride\u2014which makes you appear to have a bad and pronounced limp. Your foot slips every now and again on the rail\u2019s dew covered surface.\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t like Momma\u2019s boyfriends. Sometimes they\u2019re mean to her and sometimes they\u2019re mean to me.\u201d\n\n\u201cYour Mom has boyfriends?\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah, lots of \u2018em. Every time she goes out and gets drunk, she gets another one. Sometimes it\u2019s the same one, but not always.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhy does she have so many?\u201d\n\n\u201cShe has to. Kids cost a lot and it\u2019s the only way she can make money. Each one only gives her a little money and sometimes they give her stuff when they don\u2019t have any money. I wish she could find a job like your mom has. Nobody wants to give her a job, though.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhy do they give her money if they are mean to her?\u201d\n\nJane shrugs. \u201cBecause she needs it, I guess.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhy are they mean to you?\u201d\n\n\u201cNobody likes a bastard. It\u2019s just the way it is.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s a bastard?\u201d\n\n\u201cSomebody that doesn\u2019t have a dad.\u201d\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t have a dad anymore, either.\u201d\n\n\u201cBut you had one so you\u2019re not a bastard. It\u2019s only kids that never had one.\u201d\n\n\u201cOh.\u201d\n\n\n\nYou\u2019ve walked in silence for quite some time when you come upon an iron trestle bridge that spans a wide, muddy river and just beyond it you see a lineman\u2019s shack. The cross ties are wider spaced across the bridge and you aren\u2019t really looking forward to crossing it, but there\u2019s no way around it that you can see.\n\n\u201cI need to pee,\u201d says Jane.\n\n\u201cMe too,\u201d you say, relieved that you can put off crossing the bridge for a few minutes at least.\n\nThe two of you step just into the trees, find a spot where the other won\u2019t be able to see and do your business.\n\n\u201cHi girly,\u201d croaks a hoarse, grating voice, \u201cWhat\u2019re you doin\u2019 out here all by yerself? Er you lost?\u201d\n\nYou nearly jump out of your skin. You can\u2019t see the speaker, nor Jane.\n\n\u201cAhhh!\u201d Jane screams, \u201cLet go of me!\u201d\n\nYou sprint through the underbrush toward the sound of her cry and stumble out behind a wiry and hunched over, dirty looking man who has Jane caught by the arm.\n\nYou run up and kick out as hard as you can as he\u2019s turning around to see what the commotion is.\n\n\u201cLet her go!\u201d you shriek, connecting with his shin.\n\nHe momentarily loses his footing and Jane falls away from his grasp. You snatch her by the hand as she stumbles to her feet and the two of you race off deeper into the woods.\n\nAfter a few minutes, you both stop\u2014bent over to catch your breath\u2014and hear no sign of the scruffy old man in pursuit.\n\n\n\nYou head back in the direction you think the tracks are in, but at an angle and\u2014after trudging through the underbrush for quite some time\u2014discover that you are in fact hopelessly lost.\n\nMosquitoes swarm all around you and it\u2019s impossible to wave them off. Your hair drips with sweat and trickles the fine dust that covers your face into your eyes causing them to swell and burn. Your arms and legs are covered in swollen bumps from hundreds of itchy bites and the underbrush you\u2019ve been plowing your way through has left tiny cuts and scrapes everywhere your skin is exposed. Both of you are a mess.", "action_results": [{"action": "Surprise Guests", "result": "You\u2019ve been walking for what seems to be hours without sight of the tracks or the river when the sky starts to darken overhead. You look up to find menacing looking clouds fringed on the edges with lightning. You quicken your pace and just then the heavens decide to open up. The wind nearly knocks you off your feet and the rain scours your skin.\n\nSoaked to the skin and shaking like a leaf, you step out into a clearing where way out in the middle of it, you spy a quonset-style barn that\u2019s open at the ends. The two of you drag yourselves over to it with lightning striking all around, accompanied by instant and deafening thunderclaps. You feel extremely vulnerable out in the open like this, but you have to get out of this sweeping rain.\n\nInside you find that it\u2019s stacked high on both sides with bales of bright green hay. You squeeze your way between the front wall and the stack and find that there is a short and narrow crawlspace behind that runs the length of the building. The bales are stacked at a slight angle which makes a narrow shelf at the top of each layer.\n\nStill dripping and now covered with dried grass, the two of you wring your clothes out as best you can and spread them out on the shelf of hay to dry and you sit huddled and shivering in the near darkness.\n\nYou notice how frail Jane looks. Her ribs are prominent and she looks somehow more drawn than you had ever seen her. She looks like a skeleton. You feel rage welling up inside you at the abuse she\u2019s suffered at her mother\u2019s hand. How could anyone be that evil?\n\nJane still looks worried. The narrow escape was still obviously weighing on her. When she looks over at you you smile and she smiles back.\n\nThough you don\u2019t see it, you know that the sun has set due to the complete darkness outside. The wind has subsided, but the rain is still coming down in a deluge.\n\nExhaustion takes hold and you pass yawns back and forth. You rake hay into a rough pile and make yourself as comfortable as you can. Clutching each other for warmth, you try to force sleep in spite of your misery. And eventually you do.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019re jolted awake to the sound of a revving engine just outside the barn. You jump up and jerk on your damp clothes as quickly as you possibly can and stealthily make your way to the opposite end of the barn.\n\nWhen you are sure that the coast is clear, you bolt\u2014only to crash into a big man in faded overalls who latches onto you more out of surprise or instinct than anything else.\n\n\u201cHold on there, kids\u201d, his voice bubbles, \u201cwhere do you think you\u2019re going?\u201d\n\n\u201cLet go of me!\u201d Jane demands.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019re you two doing in there?\u201d\n\n\u201cNothing\u2026\u201d, you sheepishly respond.\n\n\u201cWhere\u2019re you from? What\u2019s your name? Where\u2019re your folks?\u201d\n\nRealizing the futility of it, you both stop squirming and he eases his grip on your arms. You share a momentary glance with Jane and in that very instant, know that neither of you are about to tell this stranger anything.\n\nAfter a couple odd minutes of silence, the farmer decides that he won\u2019t press you, but he sure isn\u2019t about to let a couple of young kids just run loose when he doesn\u2019t know who or where you belong. He steers you over to his idling tractor and makes you climb up\u2014one on either side\u2014beside his seat, then climbs up behind you. He shoves the tractor into gear and makes a beeline over the hill to his house.\n\n\u201cMartha! I caught a couple of rats in the barn!\u201d bellows the farmer from behind you as he ushers you through the door of the small farmhouse.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s that, Earl?\u201d asks a stocky, gray-haired woman entering the room from the far door. \u201cLan\u2019 sakes! Where did these children come from?\u201d\n\n\u201cI told you. I found \u2018em sneakin\u2019 \u2018round the barn. They\u2019re pretty scraped up, too. Could use some of your doctorin\u2019\u201d\n\n\u201cYou children get caught out in the storm last night?\u201d\n\nYou both slowly nod.\n\n\u201dLet\u2019s have a look and see if we can\u2019t get you cleaned up.\u201d\n\nYou look at each other and then move slowly in her direction.\n\n\u201cCome now,\u201d she says, putting an arm around each of your shoulders, \u201cWhy! You\u2019re still soaked! Earl, go get a couple of your shirts so the little ones can get out of these wet clothes.\u201d\n\n\u201cYes, dear,\u201d he says, turning and quickly walking down a hallway.\n\n\u201cNow come this way. You can change in the other room.\u201d She ushers the two of you into the short, dark hallway that Earl just went down. By the time you reach the second door, Earl is coming out of the one in the very back.\n\n\u201cHere ya go,\u201d he says holding a shirt out to each of you.\n\n\u201cNow you go in here and I\u2019ll be right in to collect your clothes, sweetie. Jus\u2019 let me get the ointment and we\u2019ll take care of those nasty scratches while we\u2019re at it,\u201d she says to Jane.\n\n\u201cAnd you go with Earl and he\u2019ll bring me your clothes.\u201d\n\n\u201cCome on, little man,\u201d he says, scooping you toward the back room as he turns.\n\nWhile you\u2019re getting out of your wet clothes, Martha taps on the bedroom door and hands a tube of salve, a washcloth and a white ceramic basin of water to Earl when he opens it.\n\n\u201cHave you seen how emaciated these children are?\u201d she tries to whisper low enough to Earl so that you don\u2019t hear. \u201cI don\u2019t think they\u2019ve had more than scraps for weeks.\u201d\n\n\u201cAyuh. They\u2019re pretty scrawny alright,\u201d he says quietly, \u201cThey must\u2019ve been through quite the ordeal.\u201d\n\nWhen he gets back to you, he gives you a quick rub down with a wet cloth and then smears salve all over your abrasions. It really stings due to his large hands being so rough and calloused, but the ointment itself is cool and soothing.\n\nWith the sleeves being much too long for your arms, you have trouble buttoning up the shirt and Earl ends up having to take over for you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Departure", "result": "Jane looks ridiculous in Earl\u2019s gigantic shirt. It drags the ground around her feet as she plods back down the hall in front of you\u2014doing her utmost not to trip on it. Of course, you must look equally funny since the one you\u2019re wearing is nearly trailing the floor on you and the cuffs dangle nearly a foot below your hands.\n\n\u201cI bet you two are starving,\u201d Martha says in a chipper tone, \u201cCome on in the kitchen and you can eat some breakfast with us. It\u2019s almost ready. All I gotta do is set out two more places.\u201d\n\nWhen you step through the door, you can\u2019t believe your eyes. You\u2019ve never seen so much food on a table at one time. There are biscuits, eggs, both bacon and sausage, fried potatoes and gravy, and most of a left over ham in which a few slices have already been cut. There\u2019s a big block of butter and a loaf of light bread. Arranged next to each plate, is a bowl of oatmeal, a short glass of orange juice and a heavy round glass with a foot and stem full to the top with fresh milk.\n\nYou can\u2019t imagine how any more could even fit on the table without things tumbling off on the floor, but Martha does just that when she sets a place for you and Jane. And the table doesn\u2019t look any more heaped than it did already.\n\nThe four of you sit down and before you dig in, the elderly couple takes hold of each of your hands and bows their heads.\n\n\"Bless us, O Lord, and these, Thy gifts, which we are about to receive from Thy bounty,\u201d says Earl with his eyes closed, and squeezing your hand he adds, \u201cAnd thank you for bringing us these dear little ones that they may share in our feast. Through Christ, our Lord. Amen.\"\n\n\u201cAmen,\u201d parrots Martha as she reaches out and starts heaping food on your and Jane\u2019s plates before she even does her own.\n\nEverything is so, so delicious and you cram in more than you ever have in your entire life. Jane is stuffing food in and matching you bite for bite. Earl and Martha pick at theirs and appear to be enjoying watching the two of you eat.\n\nWhen you finally push back from your plate it looks as if it has barely even been touched, but your belly feels like an overripe melon. There\u2019s no way you could possibly poke in another spoonful.\n\nYour eyes have a mind of their own and you watch as the dinner table quickly disappears. You start to slump forward and are prevented doing a face-plant into your plate by Earl\u2019s massive hand. As everything goes black, you hear him chuckle and say \u201cI guess this little guy\u2019s had plenty.\u201d\n\n\u201cSo has this one,\u201d laughs Martha.\n\n\n\nYou are startled awake by a loud rapping on a door. You find yourself half-sunken into a big fluffy bed and Jane has an arm and a leg draped over you. Her warmth is so comforting and you don\u2019t want to move out of this very spot. The shades are drawn and let in only a pinstripe of blinding light making everything else in the room too dark to make out.\n\n\u201cThey\u2019re sleepin\u2019 in the back room,\u201d you hear Martha say, \u201cPoor little dears were starving and plumb tuckered out.\u201d\n\n\u201cDo you know who they belong to?\u201d asks a strange man\u2019s voice.\n\n\u201cThey wouldn\u2019t say. I s\u2019pose they\u2019ve run off and I can\u2019t blame \u2018em. They\u2019re jus\u2019 skin \u2018n bones.\u201d\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t worry. We\u2019ll get to the bottom of it.\u201d\n\nThe door cracks open and spills light into your eyes.\n\n\u201cOh, you\u2019re awake,\u201d Martha says quietly, flicking on the light. \u201cThere\u2019s someone here that wants to talk to you. Let me get you your clothes so you can get dressed. They\u2019re all clean and dry now.\u201d\n\nAfter Martha has closed the door, you shake Jane awake. \u201cSomeone\u2019s here to talk to us,\u201d you tell her.\n\n\u201cWho is it? What do you think they want?\u201d\n\n\u201cI dunno.\u201d\n\nMartha comes back in and lays your clothes out on the foot of the bed. \u201cHurry and get dressed and you all come on out.\u201d\n\n\u201cWho is it?\u201d Jane repeats to Martha, but she closes the door without answering.\n\nYou both heave yourselves over and roll off opposite sides of the bed and drag your clothes on, leaving Earl\u2019s crumpled shirts behind.\n\n\n\nYou follow Jane down the hall and she freezes as she steps into the front room. You lean forward, peering around her and see a policeman framed in the outside doorway. He\u2019s wearing a brown and khaki uniform and has a star pinned above his breast pocket.\n\n\u201cStep in here so I can get a better look at you,\u201d says the deputy.\n\nYou both take tentative steps into the room\u2014being careful to keep your distance.\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t think I\u2019ve seen either of you before. Where are you kids from?\u201d\n\nYou look at Jane and her face is like stone. The policeman would probably take Jane back to her house so her mom could hit on her some more. It might be for the best if you stay silent and not tell him anything.\n\nAfter a couple of minutes, the deputy takes you each by the arm and says \u201cWell, I guess we\u2019ll have to do this the hard way then. Come on and let\u2019s go.\u201d\n\nYou and Jane are ushered along and both of you walk stiff-legged out to his car.\n\n\u201cYou kids take care of yourselves,\u201d calls Martha from the porch as the car door is being closed behind you. You look over and see her and Earl waving to you, but you don\u2019t feel at all like waving back.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019ve been sitting on hard wooden chairs in the station for quite some time. Beyond the little glass window to the next room, you see several people moving around and you hear the occasional crackle of static mixed with garbled speech every now and then.\n\n\u201cWe should run away,\u201d whispers Jane without turning to you, \u201cbefore they can take us back.\u201d\n\n\u201cThey\u2019ll just catch us,\u201d you whisper back, \u201cWe don\u2019t even know where we are.\u201d\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t go back home now. I have to find Gramma.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou should tell them where she lives so they\u2019ll take us there.\u201d\n\n\u201cThey won\u2019t. They\u2019ll only take us home.\u201d\n\n\u201cNot if you tell \u2018em how mean your mom is to you.\u201d\n\n\u201cThey don\u2019t care none about that. They always take me back home.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Run away", "result": "\u201cOkay. Let\u2019s get out of here,\u201d you say.\n\nYou wait until the dispatcher\u2019s head is turned and both of you bolt for the door. You don\u2019t hear any ruckus coming from behind you so you figure you made it. You don\u2019t have a clue where you are or where to go, but you run.\n\nThere are quite a few more people on the streets here than back at home. You try to keep out of sight at first, but there\u2019s just too many and not enough places to hide. If you knew the town it\u2019d probably make things much easier. Eventually, you don\u2019t even bother trying to conceal yourselves. Why bother? It\u2019s not like anyone is paying you any mind, anyway.\n\nAfter several blocks, you spot another one of those highway signs with 281 printed on it\u2014only this one is smaller and way up high on a lamp post and has an arrow. Maybe you could find the train tracks again if you follow the little arrow.\n\n\u201cI think the tracks are down that way,\u201d you tell Jane.\n\nShe gives you a puzzled look.\n\n\u201cSee the sign? I saw one like that, only bigger, when we were at that train yard.\u201d\n\n\u201cOkay. Then that\u2019s where we need to go. No one knows how we got here. They won\u2019t know where to look.\u201d\n\nYou both grin at each other and turn the corner.\n\nAbout a block out of town, you find the highway. You don\u2019t see any sign of the tracks and decide to follow along it at a safe distance away so any passing cars won\u2019t notice you.\n\n\u201cWe should get some food,\u201d says Jane, \u201cwe might have to walk for a long way and we don\u2019t want to starve. There\u2019s a store right over there.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe don\u2019t have any money, though.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe don\u2019t need money. I\u2019ll just grab something when no one\u2019s looking.\u201d\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know. Mr. Freddy saw you last time. He just didn\u2019t say anything.\u201d\n\n\u201cMr. Freddy\u2019s my friend.\u201d\n\n\u201cThen why would you steal his stuff?\u201d\n\nJane shrugs. \u201c\u2018cause I need it, I guess.\u201d\n\nAgainst your better judgment, you follow Jane over and into the store. While she walks down the aisles picking things off the shelf and acts like she\u2019s looking at the price tags, you pretend to look at the magazines in the rack. You don\u2019t like this at all, but you can\u2019t say anything now. It\u2019s too late for that.\n\nSuddenly, a hand clamps down on your shoulder.\n\n\u201cHere you are. Now where\u2019s your little friend?\u201d\n\nYou look up to see the deputy looking toward the back just as Jane steps around the corner.\n\n\u201cThere you are, little lady. C\u2019mon, it\u2019s time to go.\u201d\n\nShe sheepishly walks over to the two of you.\n\n\u201cYou two are beginning to be quite the handful, you know that? I guess we should\u2019ve put bells around your necks.\u201d\n\nJane glares up at him. You know your goose is cooked. There\u2019s nothing you can do now. It\u2019s all over.\n\n\u201cJust out of curiosity, how\u2019d the two of you manage to get this far from home? I can\u2019t imagine that you walked over eighty miles. Did someone give you a ride?\u201d\n\nJane says nothing. If you tell him you\u2019ll only get into more trouble so the only explanation you give him is a shrug.\n\n\u201cI guess it doesn\u2019t matter. There\u2019ll be someone here shortly to drive you back. And I\u2019m sure there will be a lot of questions for you two.\u201d\n\n\n\nA couple of hours later, you are back to your town. It was a long, quiet ride and neither you nor Jane gave more than a yes or no answer to the man that drove you. You only looked at each other attempting to communicate with only your eyes. All that she\u2014and you, no doubt\u2014could convey was sadness and a sense of hopelessness of the situation.\n\nYou sit slumped\u2014craning your neck to peek through the patrol car\u2019s rear window\u2014and watch as the officer who ran you and Jane out of the abandoned house a couple nights ago turns away from Jane and her mother, and walks back to the car. No sooner than his back is turned does she turn and shove Jane inside the house, slamming the door shut behind her.\n\nThe officer throws a glance over his shoulder, but doesn\u2019t break stride as he continues on his way.\n\nAfter he closes his car door, you say \u201cIs she gonna hit Jane?\u201d\n\nHe turns sideways in his seat and looks back at you. \u201cI wouldn\u2019t be surprised if she\u2019s not able to sit down for a week after pulling a stunt like this. Do you understand how dangerous it was for the two of you out there all alone? We\u2019re lucky that we found you before something bad happened to you. You don\u2019t know what some people are capable of doing to children.\u201d\n\n\u201cShe hates Jane. I don\u2019t want her to hit her anymore.\u201d\n\n\u201cNo mother hates her own child. She\u2019s just having a rough time raising her on her own\u2014being a single mother and all.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou don\u2019t know.\u201d\n\n\u201cListen. I\u2019ll swing back by after I drop you off and look in on her, okay?\u201d He starts the engine and pulls it into gear. \u201cEverything will be back to normal as soon as this mess blows over.\u201d\n\n\n\nAs you pull into the drive, the door opens and your mom steps out on the porch. She rushes over to the patrol car and snatches you by the arm\u2014dragging you out and pulling you close\u2014as soon as the policeman opens the rear door.\n\n\u201cHere he is, safe and sound. No one knows how those two managed to make it so far away on their own.\u201d\n\n\u201cHe\u2019s always been a handful. I can barely keep up with him most of the time. An\u2019 with this new job, I\u2019ll have to work extra hard at it, I guess,\u201d she says, flashing her eyes at you over a wan smile. \u201cI\u2019m just glad he\u2019s home.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s why we\u2019re here, ma\u2019am. Glad to be of service.\u201d\n\nHe walks with you to the door of the garage and watches as the two of you step inside.\n\n\u201cThanks again, Officer,\u201d your mom says, ushering you in and closing the door.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re quite welcome,\u201d he says, turning around and walking back the way he came.\n\nShe lifts the corner of the vinyl curtain to watch him get into his patrol car and pull out of the driveway. When she turns around to you, her face is a deep shade of red and skewed beyond all recognition.\n\n\u201cIf things are so bad here that you felt the need to run away, then why didn\u2019t you just stay gone!?\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t have an answer. You take a step to the rear as she lifts the solid metal rod from the window and yanks it free of the curtain.\n\nShe is on you before you even know it\u2014whipping you side to side like a terrier does a rat by a handful of hair in one hand while she whacks at your butt and the back of your legs with the curtain rod in the other. Every so often, an errant strike lands in the small of your back and your vision momentarily goes black. You can feel it cut deep and glance off bone with each blow.\n\n\u201cWhy can\u2019t you do anything right? Why do you always have to go out of your way to make me mad?\u201d\n\nYou try to lessen the blows by deflecting them with your palms, but it only forces her to swing harder. The flesh on the underside of your hands soon feels tight and swollen, and you no longer have control enough to maneuver them into a position of any benefit at all.\n\nAll you can do is grit your teeth and bear the pain. If you make even the slightest sound of whimpering, she\u2019ll \u201cgive you something to really cry about\u201d.\n\nThe stinging pain finally lessens as your vision fades and grows more and more distant as the world goes dark around you.\n\n\n\nYou don\u2019t know how long you\u2019ve been lying here in the darkness. Your whole body throbs from one end to the other and you want nothing more than to return to sleep.\n\nWhat about Jane? She was right. You and she need to just run away together and find her Gramma or else somebody nice to take care of the two of you. You don\u2019t have a choice anymore. You know that now. Your mom will end up killing you if you don\u2019t get away.\n\nYou slowly open your eyes. You drag your arms under you and shove yourself to your knees.\n\nYou see no sign of your mom and can only guess that she has gone back to the party in Honey\u2019s house.\n\nYou pick yourself up off the floor. You can\u2019t straighten your legs and your back is in an uncontrollable hunch, but you manage to maintain your balance and not topple over despite the impossible angle you are leaning.\n\nOne determined step after another, you make your way to the door.\n\nThe curtain is now back in its place over the window. You look at it for what seems like a long time debating whether or not to do something about that impromptu weapon. It would do absolutely no good, though, because she\u2019d just grab something else to use on you the next time.\n\nYou reach out and grip the knob with all the strength you can muster. It doesn\u2019t give easily, but you manage to turn it enough that the latch lets go. You hobble on one foot through the open doorway into the bright afternoon sun and pull the door closed behind you.\n\nYou can hear music coming from Honey\u2019s house, but don\u2019t see any movement through the windows. You limp around the garage and through the back yard to the alley.\n\n\n\nIt\u2019s about mid-afternoon by the time you reach Jane\u2019s house. The place looks locked up tight. After calling into the \u201csecret place\u201d and getting no response, you amble up to the front door and rap on it several times with the same result.\n\nWhere could she be?", "action_results": [{"action": "Check the Places You Know", "result": "You try to find the abandoned house that Jane took you to the other night. You wander down several alleys, but nothing looks familiar. Maybe it just doesn\u2019t look the same in the daylight.\n\nYou are about to give up when you spot the broken and leaning gate about a half a block down. You shuffle to it as fast as your legs will allow.\n\nThe house just looks like any other house in the daytime. The grass is taller than most and there are scraps of trash in the yard among the bushes that are in dire need of trimming, but there\u2019s nothing ominous at all about it.\n\nYou stagger up to the window that you crawled through the other night and see that it has been nailed down tight since you were here.\n\n\u201cJane? Jane, are you in there?\u201d you call as you rap on the boarded up window, but you hear only silence from within.\n\nYour legs and back are starting to buckle so you drag yourself along the wall to the cement and brick porch on the front corner and kneel down on the steps. You suck air in through your teeth to try to ease the pain away, but with each heartbeat your skin twinges with sharp stabbing needles.\n\nYou give it a few minutes before striking out for somewhere else.\n\n\n\nYou head over to the train yard to see if she might be hiding out there and find that the place is completely deserted. There are no railroad cars in sight. There aren\u2019t even any buildings here like there were in the other one. It\u2019s just a wide gravel lot with two sets of tracks running through it. It looks so different in the daylight.\n\nShe could be almost anywhere and you barely know the town at all. You haven\u2019t even lived here for a whole week yet.\n\nYou have to take a break so you head over to a small grove of saplings just beyond the right of way and ease down to your knees in the sparse shade they provide. You don\u2019t know if you\u2019ll be able to get back up again, but you know you can\u2019t stand any longer.\n\nIt takes a good while for your back and legs to slow their spasms, but you\u2019ve come down with a case of the hiccups. With each one, your back tries to curl back on itself and sends a new flood of agonizing waves of pain. Eventually, they subside and you heft yourself back to your feet.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head for the Park", "result": "You\u2019ve made your way to the park only to find it completely deserted. Not a soul in sight.\n\nYour legs are sluggish and you\u2019re having a difficult time staying on your feet. You have to rest a minute so you amble over to the swings and hang a knee on one. You slump stiffly forward\u2014hanging onto the chain so you don\u2019t put down too much weight. All of your energy is gone and your vision is starting to blur. You can\u2019t help but close your eyes for few minutes.\n\nYou hear a crunch nearby and jerk your eyes wide open. You see movement off to both sides and someone is standing directly in front of you. It takes a couple seconds, but it dawns on you that it\u2019s Chortle from the first day you got here. If he\u2019s come to finish the job, there\u2019s no way you\u2019d be able to defend yourself.\n\nYou look up at his face expecting to see the same nasty grin plastered across it that he had the other day, but he looks really sad.\n\nYou look side-to-side and see the other two boys standing there with their heads slightly bowed with nearly the same expression on their faces.\n\n\u201cWe just heard about Jane,\u201d Chortle finally gets around to saying.\n\n\u201cYeah. It\u2019s real sad news,\u201d says Tubby.\n\nYou squint up at Chortle\u2014knowing full well that he\u2019s got to be up to something. It\u2019s all some kind of twisted joke he\u2019s set up. \u201cWhat do you mean?\u201d\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t you know? She\u2019s dead. Her mom killed her and they threw her in jail.\u201d\n\n\u201cNah. You\u2019re lyin\u2019. Get away from me,\u201d you say, heaving yourself back to your feet.\n\n\u201cNo I ain\u2019t,\u201d he says, stepping over to the side when you lurch toward him with your fists doubled. \u201cWhy would I lie about something like that?\u201d\n\n\u201cGet away from me. I\u2019m not gonna listen to you.\u201d\n\n\u201cBut it\u2019s true!\u201d he pleads.\n\n\u201cYeah, it is,\u201d says one of the other boys.\n\nYou keep walking and they don\u2019t follow. You\u2019ve never been this mad in all your life and if your muscles weren\u2019t so stiff and on fire, you would\u2019ve hit him right in the nose.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dire News", "result": "You hobble into Fredrick\u2019s Grocery and see Mr. Freddy slumped and leaning heavily on his forearms over the counter by the register. He turns his head and looks up at you as you enter.\n\n\u201cMy God, son! What happened to you?\u201d\n\nYou shake your head intending to not say anything, but the words slip out before you can stop them. \u201cI got in trouble for running off.\u201d That doesn\u2019t sound quite right so you add \u201cbut I didn\u2019t. It was just an accident.\u201d\n\nMr. Freddy looks confused and even more concerned. \u201cCome over here boy and let me look at you.\u201d\n\nYou take a couple of slow steps toward him and he meets you over halfway, taking you by the shoulder and leaning around to look at your back. \u201cMy God!\u201d he whistles through his teeth, \u201cSomeone needs to do something about this.\u201d\n\nYou struggle to get out of his grip, but he doesn\u2019t let go.\n\n\u201cCome over here and hop up on the counter while I make a quick phone call.\u201d\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t. It hurts.\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll help you up and you can roll over on your belly.\u201d\n\nHe gently lifts you up on the counter before heading off somewhere. You can hear his clapping footfalls and after a moment of silence you hear him speaking, but his words garble and run together as you drift off to sleep.\n\n\n\n\u201cAaahhh!\u201d You jolt awake when a searing pain arcs through your back. You whirl around and see several people standing around you\u2014an older couple that you guess are only customers talking with Mr. Freddy and a couple of firemen.\n\n\u201cSorry about that,\u201d says a fireman wearing latex gloves and scrutinizing your wounds, \u201cI guess it is as bad as it looks. I\u2019ll try to be more careful.\u201d\n\n\u201c\u2026first the little girl and now this,\u201d says the woman, \u201cWhat is this world coming to?\u201d\n\n\u201cShe was his friend,\u201d says Mr. Freddy under his breath, \u201cNever saw one without the other since he got into town. They\u2019ve been like two peas in a pod.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat a shame,\u201d says the woman, \u201cwhat a cryin\u2019 shame.\u201d\n\n\u201cSomebody should do something about it,\u201d says the old man.\n\n\u201cI intend to,\u201d says Mr. Freddy, \u201cjust as soon as Jarvis gets back. Joan said he was looking into a trespass out at the ol\u2019 Simon farm and she\u2019d send him over the minute he got in.\u201d\n\n\u201cYoung people these days have no business having children,\u201d says the old man.\n\n\u201cWell, I don\u2019t think there\u2019ll be any permanent damage,\u201d says the fireman who\u2019s been working on you, \u201clet\u2019s get you over to the station and we\u2019ll get you all cleaned and bandaged up. What d\u2019ya say?\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re staring at the old woman puzzling over what she\u2019d said and finally can\u2019t help but interrupt \u201cWhat little girl? What do you mean?\u201d\n\nMr. Freddy\u2019s head snaps around and he locks eyes with you, working his jaw without making any sound.\n\n\u201cHe doesn\u2019t know?\u201d gasps the old woman behind her hand, \u201cMe and my big mouth.\u201d\n\n\u201cNo. I guess not. All this must\u2019ve happened around the same time,\u201d Mr. Freddy finally manages to say.\n\n\u201cWhat happened to Jane?\u201d\n\nFocusing back on you he begins to stammer \u201cI\u2014 I\u2019m sorry, son. She\u2014 she was\u2014\u201d before turning away and stalking off toward the back of the store.\n\nThe hairs on the back of your neck and arms prickle. \u201cWhat happened to Jane?!\u201d you shriek at the other dumbstruck faces.", "action_results": [{"action": "In Hiding", "result": "Everything is kind of a blur. You remember being led to the firehouse and worked on in the back of the ambulance. You remember how everyone was busy coming and going around you and there were new faces popping up every now and again, but you can\u2019t recall everything that went on there. You don\u2019t even know how you got here.\n\nYou must\u2019ve run when no one was looking because they never would\u2019ve let you out of their sight in the condition you were in or the danger you could face if your mom had gotten her hands on you again.\n\nYou are laying face down on Jane\u2019s bag of covers in her \u201csecret place\u201d. You can feel the cool dampness all around you and it is so soothing. There is something \u201csafe\u201d about this place. You understand now why Jane would hide and sometimes even sleep overnight in here.\n\nWith every stretch and adjustment you make, the bandages on your back and legs relax and constrict. This, too, is both soothing and comforting.\n\nYour eyes have long since adjusted to the dim light filtering in through the grate\u2014which you must\u2019ve closed behind you when you crawled in, but you can\u2019t remember doing that, either. It\u2019s got too much of a greenish tint to it to be sunlight. It must be coming from the street lamp on the corner.\n\nYou look over toward the dark corner of the concrete foundation and see a couple empty pop bottles propped up against the change jar which still has your dollar resting on top of all the different coins. You remember sharing those root beers with Jane. Next to them is the \u2018treasure chest\u2019 all tied up neatly in the ribbon just the way Jane had left it.\n\nYour stomach is growling and twisting in knots. You haven\u2019t eaten anything since the feast you shared with Jane, Earl and Martha early this morning.\n\nYou can\u2019t risk going back the garage for food and if you went to the store, Mr. Freddy would likely call the cops for your own protection. You don\u2019t know what else you can do other than just tough out the hunger like you\u2019ve done so many times before.\n\nYou close your eyes and try to sleep, but the gnawing and churning won\u2019t allow you to drift off. You\u2019ll have to suffer through it or else find some way of taking the edge off.\n\n\n\nYou crawl over to the grate and see that outside it is full dark. You shove lightly on the grate and it groans loudly against the concrete foundation. You nearly jump clean out of your skin. When you finally catch your breath again, you lift up on it on the side and slide it over sideways.\n\nThe high grass outside is dimly lit and shadowy things move about just outside your vision. Your hands and feet go numb, and you get that all too familiar coppery taste in your mouth.\n\nYou crawl out and drag the grate back over the hole, keeping your eyes on the deeper shadows all around you.\n\nOne step after another, you make your way to the corner of the house and\u2014instead of going around the front to the steps\u2014climb up the side and slink your way past the window to the door.\n\nYou gently swing open the screen door\u2014propping it with your foot\u2014and heave up on the doorknob like you remember seeing Jane do, then push inward with all your strength. The door plows the carpeting with a ripping sound that makes a whole new battalion of tiny hairs rise to attention on the back of your neck. Inside, you see that it is darker than dark.\n\nWhen the pounding in your ears subsides, you take a short step through the door and strain your ears against the silence. The only sound you hear is that of your own heavy breath going in and out.\n\nLooking over your shoulder only makes the panic grow, so you focus on finding the door in the back wall. You tiptoe through the room with your hands out in front of you and hoping that whatever is lurking in here doesn\u2019t grab you by the arm or ankle from the dark.\n\nYou find the door facing and pull yourself around it, putting your back against the wall and slamming your eyes shut. Your tongue has swollen two sizes and scrapes leathery against the roof of your mouth.\n\nYou slowly open your eyes and can see the kitchen sink from what little light filters in through the window above it and the dim silhouettes of the cabinet doors flanking each side along the far wall. The linoleum floor is brighter than the dark carpeting in the front room and you can just make out that there\u2019s nothing creeping around in here\u2014at least, not in the open.\n\nYou step lightly over to the sink and slowly make your way toward a wooden box on the counter. Taking another look behind you, you reach out and pry open the small doors with your thumbs. You reach inside and feel a soft bread wrapper with only a couple of slices left in it and a tall, square, cardboard box.\n\nYou take both items and turn toward the front door. The frame is much brighter from this side and is the only thing you can see clearly. Each step you take toward it gets longer and longer until you are at full gallop.\n\nOn your way through, you manage to snag the knob and jerk the door closed behind you\u2014trapping whatever it was that was behind you inside.\n\nYou cross the porch\u2014carefully skirting the dark window\u2014and slip back around the side of the house, then crawl back inside to the safety of the \u201csecret place\u201d and drag the grate back into place.\n\nTearing them into chunks, you cram the two stale bread slices into your mouth and choke them down. You then turn your attention to the box. It is still unopened and you rock it lightly in your hands. You can feel the packed contents bounce against the sides. If you\u2019re very careful with them, you can stretch the crackers out for a couple of weeks.\n\nAfter you prop it and the wadded bread wrapper against the wall beside the bottles, you flop face-down on the bag of covers.\n\nYour thoughts turn back to the last few days and of Jane as the world around you fades into dream.\n\n\n\nYou wake up feeling a bit too warm and your mouth is dry and dusty. You are desperate for something to quench your thirst.\n\nAs you push yourself to your knees, your whole body screams out in agony. You\u2019d forgotten all about yesterday, but it all comes flooding back to you now.\n\nYou reach over and pick up the change jar, but it\u2019s mostly pennies and the pops in the vending machine cost a quarter. You can\u2019t risk going there, anyway. You might not be able to get away this time.\n\nAfter putting the jar back, you crawl over to the grate and peer out as far as you can with your face pressed against it. As far as you can see, all there is is tall grass and weeds so you push it out and to the side, and crawl out into the harsh sunlight. Then you carefully drag it back into place.\n\nThere are no houses beyond this street so you decide to crawl to the back of Jane\u2019s house before standing up. There aren\u2019t any close neighbors, but you can see a house a little distance on down the road.\n\nAt the far corner of Jane\u2019s house, you spot prefab concrete steps leading up do a back door. It\u2019s beyond where the kitchen lies and must open into a room you haven\u2019t been in. The house doesn\u2019t seem nearly as spooky in the light of day. You decide to see if you can open it and get inside so you can maybe find something to drink.\n\nThe door barely moves inward and bumps hard against something up high. You can\u2019t see beyond the light pink curtain so you release the knob. Unless you can find an open window, you\u2019ll have to go in through the front.\n\nAll the windows are latched from the inside so after you make certain there is no one in sight, you dash for the porch and shove your way in as quickly as you can\u2014closing the door behind you.\n\nAfter taking a second to let your eyes adjust, you walk across the room to the kitchen which is much brighter that the living room now. You stretch up on your tiptoes to reach the faucet knobs and find that they do still work. You catch handfuls of water and lose most of it bringing them to your mouth, but it doesn\u2019t matter. There\u2019s plenty more where that came from.\n\nWhen you\u2019ve had enough, you look around for something to catch water in for later. You find a couple of pots on the stove, but they\u2019re filled with moldy food. There are no plastic milk jugs in the garbage that you can rinse out so you start looking around for anything else that will work. The only other thing there is are whiskey bottles with screw on caps so you rinse them out as best you can and\u2014even though you can still smell the alcohol in them\u2014fill up six of the tallest ones.\n\nYou rummage through the cabinets and find a couple of cans of green beans and a can opener. They won\u2019t be as good uncooked, but since you have no choice you\u2019ll just have to eat them straight from the can.\n\nThe refrigerator is bare except for half a stick of butter which might help the crackers slide down easier, but you leave it where it is because it would only end up melting and making a mess.\n\nYou head over to the door in the far back corner that you thought was a closet and find that behind it is a small room with a water heater being the only major thing in it. There is also a broom, a mop, a dustpan and a bucket and other such cleaning tools that you suspect haven\u2019t been used on the place in quite some time. The floor is buckled and crinkles under your feet as you step lightly over to the back door. You see a lock mounted to the top of the back door well out of your reach and it takes some fancy maneuvering of the broom handle to slide the bolt out of the barrel, but the door is now usable so you don\u2019t have to go around to the front and be spotted by random passersby or the neighbors.\n\nYou make sure everything is back to exactly the way you found it before closing the door and carrying the water bottles and other items back around to the \u201csecret place\u201d.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019ve been hiding in here for the last two days when you hear footsteps coming from inside the house above you. Voices drift down to you through the floorboards. You hold your breath and don\u2019t move a muscle in case they can hear you as easily as you can them.\n\n\u201cThis place is a filthy pigsty. How could anyone live in this place? Why was she allowed to even keep a child here?\u201d you hear a woman say.\n\n\u201cNo one knew. They mostly kept to themselves,\u201d says a familiar sounding man\u2019s voice, \u201cYou should hurry and get what you need because I\u2019m not really supposed to let anyone in here until after the trial.\u201d\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know how I\u2019m ever going to find something for her to wear in all this mess. And even if I do, it\u2019ll have to be cleaned before the service.\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019ve heard it\u2019s gonna be this Thursday, but have they decided where they\u2019re going to hold it, yet?\u201d\n\n\u201cYes, Thursday. It\u2019ll most likely be in the school gymnasium since there are so many people who\u2019ve already called and want to send flowers. Since the story hit all the papers, there\u2019ll probably be a big turnout, too. It\u2019s always sad when someone so young passes.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt was right in front of my eyes and I couldn\u2019t see it. The boy even warned me when I dropped her off and I thought he was exaggerating, like kids do. I wish I\u2019d have listened. Really listened. I told him I\u2019d look in on her, but by the time I got back it was too late.\u201d\n\nThat\u2019s who it is! It\u2019s Officer Jarvis. Now you can put a face to the voice.\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t blame yourself. The whole town new what shape the little girl was in and just sat on their hands. We\u2019re all to blame.\u201d\n\n\u201cBut, it\u2019s my job to notice these things. I should\u2019ve done something.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe all should\u2019ve done something more for her.\u201d\n\nThere\u2019s a few minutes where all you can hear is footsteps above you and then the woman finally says \u201cI can\u2019t find anything in all this mess. We need to just take up a collection to get her something decent\u2014even if I have to buy it all myself.\u201d\n\nA short time later, you hear a car pulling away. You let out a long sigh of relief as you roll over onto your back.\n\nYou spend the rest of the afternoon looking over your map and at Jane\u2019s postcards. Everything you and Jane dreamed about seems so hopeless and so far away now. You only knew her for a few days, but it feels like you knew her your entire life.\n\nSometime long after dark, your grief finally gives way to sleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Farewell", "result": "You sit on the bleachers at the edge of the school\u2019s soccer field, staring over at the gymnasium. The parking lot is packed tighter than if there were a game going on inside and the cars stretch clear down both sides of the street beyond where you can see. It looks like there might be more people here than even live in this whole town.\n\nThe funeral won\u2019t be for a while yet, but people are paying their respects and viewing her remains. You want so much to see her one last time, but not like that. So you just sit here\u2014feeling more helpless and alone than ever before\u2014and just stare at the building.\n\nYou hadn\u2019t seen the policeman since he\u2019d dropped you off with your mother on that fateful day, but you can make out his face every now and then when he looks out at you from just inside the glass double doors. He\u2019s wearing a dark blue suit now instead of his uniform. When he opens the door and starts walking toward you, every instinct in your body tells you to flee, but you haven\u2019t the will to even stand. You are too tired and sad way down deep to run. You don\u2019t even care what he does to you at this point. You just close your eyes and wait.\n\nYou can hear his heavy footfalls as he approaches and then a hand on your knee, giving it a gentle squeeze. You open your eyes and see through your tears that he has knelt before you and is struggling against his own tears for words. It takes him a couple of minutes, but he finally manages to speak.\n\n\u201cWe\u2019ve been looking everywhere for you and thought something bad might\u2019ve happened. I\u2019m glad to see that you\u2019re alright. I guess you\u2019re here to say goodbye to your friend. We can get you to the station and take care of everything afterward. Would you like to go in?\u201d\n\nYou widen your eyes and your jaw slackens at the very horror of the suggestion. \u201cNo, huh uh,\u201d you manage to weakly get out.\n\n\u201cYou really should, you know. She was your friend and she would want you there,\u201d he coaxes softly, \u201cIt\u2019ll be the last time you\u2019ll ever see her and you really should say goodbye.\u201d\n\nYour eyes start to burn and you can\u2019t hold in your grief any longer. You scream from way down deep and fall forward as all of your strength falls away. He catches you before you hit the ground and scoops you up tight against him.\n\n\u201cI told you. I told you,\u201d you say hoarsely, between sobs.\n\nHe mumbles something, but you can\u2019t make out the words through your hysterical squeaks. You feel his chest heaving as he tries to hold back his own flood of emotions.\n\nEventually, you manage to get hold of yourself and so does he. He pulls you to your feet and wraps his arm around your shoulders. \u201cC\u2019mon. I\u2019ll go with you. This is something you have to do. I won\u2019t leave you. I\u2019ll be right there beside you the whole time.\u201d\n\n\n\nOfficer Jarvis reaches past you and pulls the door open. It is standing room only inside the building. Beyond the partition separating this area from the main gym, there are rows and rows of little white folding chairs reaching from one side of the basketball court all the way to the other where a long white box lays on its back with its lid standing open and draped in a filmy white shroud.\n\nThere is a line of people snaking its way back and forth between silver poles attached together at their top by thick red velvet ropes and up through the center of the packed seats. There is a dull roar permeating the building, but you don\u2019t see anyone talking.\n\nHe walks behind you with a hand on each shoulder, steering you toward the back of the line. Everyone else is dressed in nice clothes and suits, but you still have on the same ones you\u2019ve been wearing since the first night you got here.\n\nThe line moves along at a snails pace. By the time you finally approach the open box, you are rocking back and forth from one leg to the other. It\u2019s not that you have to go so much as it is the anticipation of reaching the end of this line.\n\n\u201cShe is so young,\u201d you hear the gray-haired woman in front of you say, \u201cIt\u2019s a real tragedy.\u201d\n\nWhen the last of the people part in front of you and wander off toward the far end of the basketball court, you feel Officer Jarvis\u2019 hands give your shoulders a light squeeze. You know you have to walk the few remaining feet to look into the box, but your feet no longer want to cooperate. You stand there frozen \u2014 needing to see, but not wanting to with every fiber of your being.\n\n\u201cCome on,\u201d he says, \u201cyou\u2019re doing just fine.\u201d\n\nHe finally steps up beside you and wraps his arm around your shoulders\u2014gently lifting and half carries you the last remaining steps. You squinch your eyes shut as tightly as you can and your whole body starts to spasm from the bottom of your feet all the way to your scalp.\n\nThe moment stretches on and on, and just when you feel like you might make it, your eyelids slowly begin to part of their own accord.\n\nEverything is blurry at first, almost as if you are looking through a sheet of water on a window pane. The ultra fine netting gives the contents an almost supernatural feel\u2014as if looking through a wispy cloud. Your eyes slowly follow the contour of the fabric sewn to the inside of the lid and come to rest on the sweetest face you have known in your short life.\n\nShe looks so pleasant, as if she were only lying there, sleeping. The stern expression she always wore is completely gone from her face now and she looks so content, so peaceful. She\u2019s wearing a dark blue dress spattered in tiny white flowers and her fingers are laced together below its wide lace collar. Her hair is combed out neatly and drawn back in a white ribbon that\u2019s tied in a bow off to one side.\n\nYou feel like you could just reach out and gently shake her awake, but you know you really can\u2019t. She\u2019s not merely asleep now\u2014she is gone. And with that realization, your eyes begin to burn and you feel a flood cascading down the sides of your face and dripping off your chin onto your bare chest.\n\n\u201cOkay, we can go now. We need to find us a place to sit for the service,\u201d he says, curling your trembling body into his as he walks you around the far end of the room.\n\nAll the seats on the court are filled so he takes you back toward the stairway leading up to the bleachers where many people have already seated themselves.\n\nAs you round the corner, you see an exit sign over a door with a shiny metal bar across it and another closer one hanging from the ceiling that reads \u201crestrooms\u201d with an arrow pointing down a hall. You point up at it and he nods.\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll be up in the stands. Come find me when you\u2019re done.\u201d\n\nYou nod up at him and head down the hall.\n\n\n\nYou feel somewhat better after relieving your bladder, but you stare into the steel mirror at a boy that you don\u2019t recognize any longer. You slap some water on your face to wash away the dust and slump forward with your hands on the edge of the sink. Nothing about this is right. The world just doesn\u2019t make any sense anymore.\n\nYou pound your fists against the top of the sink and then turn toward the door. You see a paper towel dispenser and grab a couple on your way out.\n\nWhen you reach the end of the short hall you turn toward the gym, but instead of walking that way you push against the steel bar with your back\u2014feeling a twinge of pain as you do so\u2014and step through into the sunlight.\n\nYou have to get away from here.\n\n\n\nWhen you get back to the \u201csecret place\u201d, you\u2019ve already decided to head West. You don\u2019t have a choice any longer. You have to do this for Jane. And you have to do this now. It can\u2019t wait.\n\nYou begin carefully packing everything into the bag of covers. You dump the change jar into the bread wrapper to save space. You fill two of the screw-top bottles\u2014and the root beer bottles, in which you have crammed wads of waxed paper that you found in the cabinets as makeshift corks, since you\u2019ll be able to sell them somewhere along the way\u2014with water. The last thing you pack is an old paring knife that has its very tip broken off. It fits perfectly in the \u2018treasure chest\u2019.\n\nYou\u2019ll leave as soon as it gets dark so no one sees you. Maybe there will be another train in the staging yard. If there isn\u2019t, you\u2019ll just keep on going until you do find one.", "action_results": [{"action": "Into the Night", "result": "You try to focus on staying between the tracks and not on the darkness that is slowly swallowing you. Every once in a while, the side of your foot glances off one metal rail or the other and you take a step more toward the center. You have to be careful not to turn your ankle since you can only feel your way over the unevenness of cross ties and gravel.\n\nThere is no moon or even a single star in sky above you, but you can\u2019t risk taking a look upward in case something should brush against you and you should need to suddenly run in the opposite direction.\n\nThere is a fine mist in the air and every once in a while a small droplet smacks into your clammy skin making you wince. Your heart is sprinting, but your feet take their own sweet time.\n\nYou have to make it as far as you can before the sun peeks over the horizon. You don\u2019t think you\u2019d be able to survive another beating.\n\n\n\nYou hear a low, rumbling growl coming from all around you. You can feel it more than hear it. The skin behind your ears tingles and your neck hairs prickle.\n\nYou spin around and around, swinging the bag like a baseball bat and desperately roar as loud as you can to scare off whatever it is that has you surrounded. Your tears burn your eyes and your heart tries to escape through your ears.\n\nIt\u2019s getting closer.\n\nYou scream at the thing in the darkness and hear it reverberate back to you, growing louder and louder. Your feet will no longer obey and your skin has become so stiff that if you could somehow move it would probably rip wide open.\n\nYou close your eyes and grit your teeth. Your whole face feels swollen.\n\nThe rumble has become so loud now that you can feel it welling up from the ground and into your feet. You can\u2019t even draw in breath anymore.\n\nA sudden trumpeting roar blasts from behind you and you spin around to see shining eyes in the blackness. They are so bright that you can barely even look at them.\n\nYou turn on your heels and can see the tracks stretching out ahead of you. You run.\n\nThe thing is getting closer and closer. You spot a ravine shrouded in blackness off to the side and dive for it with every ounce of your being. Gravel plows through your forearms up to your elbows and you strike the side of your head on something solid.\n\nIt is on you now. The wind swirls all around you threatening to rip you from the ground.\n\nYou flip over and shield yourself with the bag as the thing races past. Through the flashes of light in your vision you can make out a shuttering silhouette and a slow realization bubbles its way to the surface.\n\nIt is no vile beast, but a train moving at breakneck speed.\n\nYou roll over onto your belly and push yourself up to your knees. You can see the light on the front piercing its way through the night. You turn and look back toward the other end and can see red lights bringing up the rear.\n\nYour burning skin begins to gradually freeze as your breath slowly returns to you and your heartbeat softens and slows.\n\nYou gently caress your gritty forearms and pluck tiny stones from the soft fleshy underside.\n\nYou get back to your feet and climb the grade as the final car zooms by. In the dim glow, you can see the tracks clearly. After looking back to make sure there isn\u2019t another one coming, you step back in the middle and continue on your way.\n\nYou keep your eyes on the train until the tail light finally winks out of sight allowing the darkness to flood back in around you.\n\n\n\nYou are exhausted. You\u2019ve been walking all night and your muscles are stiff and aching\u2014almost feverish. You need sleep, but the sky has only started to gray behind you. You can barely make out the ground around you, but still can\u2019t see anything more distant. You\u2019ll have to find some place that you won\u2019t be discovered as soon as there is enough light for you to see by.\n\nThe bandages are pulling at your skin from the middle of your back to halfway down your legs and the burning emanating from under them sends a jolt from the base of your scalp all the way to your feet. With every step, the bag you have slung over your shoulder pounds more pain through your body.\n\nIt finally gets light enough that you can see. You spot a stand of high grass over by a barbed wire fence that will easily conceal you from sight. Not caring about snakes or whatever else might be lurking in there, you wade right into the middle of it and fall face down. You barely manage to pull the bag under your head before sleep takes you.\n\n\n\nYou wake up with the bright sun on your face and it\u2019s too unbearable to open your eyelids. You shield your face with your hand as you roll over onto your side and when your leg strikes the ground it burns like fire.\n\nYou forget all about the burning brightness and look down at your leg. It is beet red all the way up to your cutoffs and starts again at your belly. Your whole front is sunburned and even lightly touching it makes you wince.\n\nYou carefully shove yourself to your feet and look as far around you as you can see. Just beyond the pasture on the other side of the fence, the trees are thick and you can only see darkness within. There are no houses or roads within sight\u2014only the train tracks.\n\nYou are extremely thirsty so you pull one of the screw-top bottles from the sack and gulp down several swallows before picking up the sack and slinging it over your shoulder. You head back to the tracks and\u2014after taking another look around\u2014continue on.", "action_results": [{"action": "A New Normal", "result": "You\u2019ve walked for most of the day\u2014going off the embankment and crouching low whenever you spot a farmhouse, someone toiling away in their field or a car on a nearby dirt road\u2014and the light is leaving fast when you hear yipping coming from behind you.\n\nWhen you turn to look, you see a pack of dogs. No, not dogs, because these are all gray. They don\u2019t look as big as the ones in the movies, but they must be wolves! What else could they be out here in the wilderness?\n\nYou quicken your pace and keep looking back at them over your shoulder. Even though they are definitely following you they don\u2019t seem to be gaining. Maybe they\u2019re waiting for it to get dark before they sneak up on you and attack. They can probably smell the dried blood on your bandages and want to eat you.\n\nYou look around for somewhere to hide, but there isn\u2019t any place. All the trees nearby are scraggly and you don\u2019t really like the idea of trying to stay awake in a tree all night anyway so you keep moving.\n\nBefore long you start to notice the stars coming out and the night insects are starting to come to life. You turn around to look at how far back the wolves are and can\u2019t see any of them.\n\nMaybe they are sneaking around to ambush you or maybe they lost interest and moved off in a different direction. Either way, you quicken your pace a little more just to be safe.\n\nYou happen to spot a long heavy stick at the bottom of the embankment and quickly rush down to get it. It is rather light and just a little longer than you are tall. It\u2019s a perfect walking stick and will make a nice weapon in case the wolves decide to attack.\n\nYour weariness catches up to you. You have to stop every couple of miles to get off your feet and take a breather. The grassy embankment feels so cool and invigorating against your bare skin. You don\u2019t dare stop for long or you\u2019ll fall asleep for sure. Eventually, though, you do.\n\nYour sleep is disturbed by the train screaming by in the night, but you are so tired that all you do is roll over away from the sound. You don\u2019t have the strength to even raise up to look at it. Then it is gone into the place where dreams live.\n\nWhen you wake up, it\u2019s still full dark and you have no idea whether you only slept for a few minutes or for several hours.\n\nYou decide to eat a few crackers and polish off your first bottle of water before you set out again. The bottle isn\u2019t worth anything so you decide to save some weight and pitch it aside. Your leg muscles feel like blocks of wood from complete exhaustion and you have some trouble controlling them.\n\nYou also take the time to carefully tear the tape from your back and legs. It\u2019s been on so long that it feels as if it has grown into the skin. Most of the tenderness is gone, but there are still slimy scabs underneath. You can\u2019t see them in the dark, but you can guess that they are all different shades from blue-gray to yellow-green like they were the last time your mom got really mad at you.\n\nAfter about an hour or so of walking you see the first rays of dawn on the horizon. There is a faint mist blanketing the field off to your left and a dark, dense thicket of trees to your right. Either place could be concealing all manner of things intent on doing you harm, but you don\u2019t have the time or the energy to dwell on it.\n\nMosquitoes whine all around your face and you can feel them lighting on your bare skin. It isn\u2019t long before the itching begins driving you mad so you take to jogging in the hopes that they can\u2019t keep up. It works for the most part, but in rays of the cresting sun you can see wispy clouds of them swarming off to the sides and on down the line. All you can hope for is to avoid the biggest share of them.\n\nThe sun has barely cleared the horizon when up ahead, you see a train parked on the side track of this town\u2019s staging yard. There are a couple of men milling around so you step over the rail and head down the short gravel slope to the ditch filled with stagnant water. There is a line of trees several yards beyond the slough which looks like the perfect cover to make your way up the line without being seen.\n\nYou take off your flipflops to wade through the ankle deep muck and on the other side you drag your feet through the knee deep grass until the slime and mud are mostly wiped away before slipping them back on.\n\nConcealing yourself behind small trees, you make your way up to the train. The doors are closed on the few boxcars you see at this end so you keep moving until you find another short string. They too have their doors pulled shut so you keep moving.\n\nYou finally near the front end and can see the engine idling beyond the switch on the main track. You can barely hear any other sounds over its rumble. So that you aren\u2019t spotted by someone up there, you duck back behind the boxcars and make your way back toward denser cover.\n\nSince all the boxcars along its length appear to be locked up tight, you\u2019ll either have to come up with some other place to board or else continue your journey on foot.\n\nThere are several flatcars loaded with timbers and other things that are tightly packed and don\u2019t offer any cover, a few with truck van trailers, but the ones that interest you most are two together with new farm implements chained down. Some of them appear high enough off the bed that you could squeeze under them where it would be hard for someone to see you unless they were really trying.", "action_results": [{"action": "From the Jaws of Death", "result": "You start to head over to one when you notice a pair of legs walking on the other side toward the back end of the train. You squat back down to wait until they are far enough away that you can make it over unseen, but you hear the engine rev and a couple of jerks later it is moving.\n\nYou give it a few more seconds while you look for movement on the other side before getting up and running over to the flatcar. It is still moving slower than you can walk so you sling your walking stick and bag up on it before grabbing a chain to haul yourself up. You throw your leg over the deck and when you try to wriggle up it slips off. You try again and again as the train slowly picks up speed, but you no matter how hard you try to climb up you can\u2019t get enough leverage with the train moving like this.\n\nYou jump up to try and snag your stuff, but it\u2019s just out of reach so you desperately look around for another stick or anything that would allow you to reach it. There is nothing but gravel so you give it one last try with everything you have.\n\nYou make a run at it again and try to swing your weight up over the side, but fall and land hard on the rail. A shooting pain courses through your ribs making it hard to catch your breath. You lay there for a second to let the pain go away when you remember that the train is moving. You glance over and see the steel wheels are nearly upon you so you roll away as fast as you can, but you can\u2019t move fast enough and they keep getting closer and closer. You try to scream and all that escapes is air.\n\nJust then, large hands clamp down on your shoulders and you feel yourself being yanked from the jaws of death. One of your flipflops slips off and you try to reach back and grab it, but it\u2019s too late. Your heart is pounding and the world is swirling all around you. Everything within your field of vision has taken on a hellish red hue.\n\nBefore you even know what is happening, those same hands pick you up and sling you on up on the deck. You tumble and roll until slamming into one of the farm implements brings you to a sudden stop.\n\nStunned, you finally manage to look around to see what in the world just happened and you see a tall scraggly man in a old gray sports coat with leather elbows on the sleeves pulling himself up on the side of the car.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s a good thing I happened along or you\u2019d have been cut clean in half. You would\u2019ve definitely missed your train.\u201d\n\n\u201cWh- what?\u201d\n\n\u201cI was waiting for the train to start moving before I hopped on when I saw you sneaking around out there,\u201d he says, hooking a thumb over his shoulder toward the trees, \u201cDidn\u2019t look like you were gonna make it so I decided to give you a hand. Didn\u2019t anyone ever tell you how dangerous it is to mess around with trains? You could get hurt or maybe even killed. If I hadn\u2019t been here you\u2019d be dead right now.\u201d\n\nYou stare at him in silence.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s a kid like you hopping a freight for, anyway?\u201d\n\n\u201cI have to get somewhere. It\u2019s real important.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt must be if you\u2019re willing to risk your life for it,\u201d he stares at you for a brief moment then continues \u201cI guess since we\u2019re going the in same direction, we might as well get to know each other. I\u2019m Harvey.\u201d\n\nYou aren\u2019t really sure you should be talking to a stranger let alone tell him your name, but he did just save your life and he\u2019s standing there smiling at you with an eyebrow lifted expecting an answer. He doesn\u2019t really look dangerous and he did help you get on the train so do you tell him the truth or do you lie?", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell the Truth", "result": "You reluctantly say \u201cI\u2019m Billy.\u201d\n\n\u201cNice to meet ya, Billy. I guess we\u2019re gonna be here a while so might as well find a spot to get comfortable.\u201d He sits down between two of the implements\u2014putting his back to one and props his foot up on the other\u2014where he can\u2019t be seen from the ground.\n\nYou bring your bag over and find a nice comfy place out of view from the side. You sit down beside it\u2014leaning on it with your elbow\u2014with your walking stick laying across you lap while keeping a wary eye on Harvey.\n\n\u201cI saw you a ways back down the line and can\u2019t believe you made it this far. You\u2019ve really covered some miles in the last couple of days.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah. It\u2019s a long ways to where I\u2019m going.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhere\u2019s that? If you don\u2019t mind my asking.\u201d\n\nYou study his face. You\u2019re still not sure if you can really trust him or not so you make up something on the spot. \u201cI have to find my uncle in Arizona so I can live with him.\u201d\n\n\u201cHope everything turns out okay for ya. I kinda like to keep moving. Don\u2019t like to stay in one place too long. Figured I\u2019d head for the coast since this area is mostly played out now. It\u2019s not a bad place to Winter.\u201d\n\nYour belly starts growling so you reach into your bag and pull out what\u2019s left of the pack of crackers you\u2019ve been eating on for the last couple of days. You only have one more pack left and they\u2019re mostly crushed, but you won\u2019t mind that a bit when you get hungry again. You stuff one in your mouth and grab a few more for good measure. You consider putting the pack back in the bag, but decide you ought to share so you offer Harvey the last of the package which he quickly accepts.\n\n\u201cThank ya,\u201d he grins, \u201cI haven\u2019t had anything on my stomach since early yesterday.\u201d\n\nYou both eat in silence and after a while you drift off to sleep to the sounds of the clacking rails.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Hobo's Life", "result": "You are awakened by a gentle shake to your shoulder and see that the stars are out.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s time to get up. We\u2019re slowing down and the train might be stopping up ahead. We need to get off before it does.\u201d\n\n\u201cHuh?\u201d\n\n\u201cThere\u2019s no telling what they\u2019ll do if they catch us riding their train. Sometimes they just run you off and sometimes they call the police.\u201d\n\nYou stand up, pick up your bag with your free hand and stand next to Harvey at the side of the flatcar. Still wiping the sleep from your eyes you suddenly think about the jagged gravel that you know is down there where you must jump, but can\u2019t see in this light.\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know if I can jump. I lost my flipflop back when we got on.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou need a pair of shoes. We\u2019ll worry about that later. It\u2019s not that far to the ground so you should be just fine. Just try not to land too hard on your bare foot.\u201d\n\nYou nod, but it\u2019s dark enough that Harvey wouldn\u2019t be able to see it.\n\n\u201cOkay,\u201d he says, \u201ctime to go.\u201d Then he steps off the side and disappears.\n\nYou take a deep breath and jump as far away from the train as you can so you don\u2019t get run over. The shock to your knee shoots a bolt of pain through your leg, but it goes away as soon as your bare foot touches down on the jagged chunks of rock. You grit your teeth even though it isn\u2019t as bad as you thought it would be.\n\nYou sling your bag over your shoulder and\u2014leaning hard on your walking stick\u2014limp back toward where Harvey jumped off. It isn\u2019t long before you find him since he\u2019s walking up to find you.\n\n\u201cAre you okay?\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah, but it\u2019s hard to walk bare-footed on these sharp rocks.\u201d\n\n\u201cHere, climb up on my back until we find softer ground for you to walk on,\u201d he says, squatting down on one knee in front of you.\n\nYou fumble for grip because you don\u2019t have enough hands to hang on.\n\n\u201cLet me have that,\u201d Harvey says, snatching the stick from your grip before you even know what is happening.\n\n\u201cHey, I need that!\u201d\n\n\u201cNot right now, you don\u2019t. You can have it back later.\u201d\n\nA short time later, you come to a dirt access road and Harvey sets you down. He\u2019s bent over huffing and puffing and it takes him a while to get his breath back. It\u2019s obvious that he\u2019s older than he looks. The lines in his face have deepened and there are shadows under his eyes. Eventually he catches his breath and straightens up.\n\n\u201cThere has to be a better way,\u201d he says, \u201cWhatcha got in the bag? Anything you could use as a shoe or wrap your foot up with until something better comes along?\u201d\n\n\u201cJust some covers and postcards.\u201d\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s have a look at them covers.\u201d\n\nAs you pull the blanket from the bag, the bottles clink together.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s that?\u201d\n\n\u201cJust some old bottles that I keep water in.\u201d\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s have one. I\u2019m parched.\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t want to risk losing one of the trade-in bottles so you pull out the other screw-top one and hand it to him. He gulps down half of it before cutting his eye at you and stops himself. You can tell that he wants more, but he screws the lid back on and passes it back to you.\n\n\u201cThanks, kid. I needed that.\u201d\n\nYou take a couple of swallows for yourself before putting it back in the bag. The bottles clink and clank against each other so you roll the bag up tight against them to keep them from breaking.\n\nYou do your best to tie the wrapped blanket around your foot, but can\u2019t make it stay on so Harvey takes over and by the time he\u2019s done you look like you\u2019re wearing a golf bag on your leg. You feel like Frankenstein when you walk with your leg stiff like this, but it beats jabbing your foot on sharp things.\n\n\u201cI guess we oughta find some food. What do you feel like, kid, steak or lobster?\u201d chuckling to himself.\n\nYou just stare back at him.\n\n\u201cThat looks like a fine place to eat,\u201d he says, pointing through the trees to a small house. \u201cI hope we don\u2019t need a reservation.\u201d\n\nYou follow him through the trees curious as to how he\u2019s going to get someone to give him food.\n\nYou\u2019re at his heels when he raps on the door and as he steps back he nearly runs you over. When no one comes to the door, he knocks a little louder the second time.\n\n\u201cDoesn\u2019t look like anyone\u2019s home,\u201d he says, turning toward the steps and leans against the railing. He stands there looking around the yard for a few minutes before walking over to a short board fence and hopping over. He snatches a couple of ripe tomatoes off the vine and pulls up a couple of decent sized carrots.\n\n\u201cThis oughta hold us a while. We don\u2019t want to get too greedy.\u201d\n\nAs you and he walk down the tracks eating your measly meal you can\u2019t help but feel a little guilty. It wasn\u2019t you that stole the food, but you are eating it nonetheless. It\u2019s so delicious that you can\u2019t help yourself.", "action_results": [{"action": "Christmas in July", "result": "You\u2019ve been walking for a couple hours and things look eerily familiar when up ahead you spot the old trestle bridge that you saw when you were with Jane.\n\n\u201cToo bad we don\u2019t have any fishing gear,\u201d Harvey muses, \u201cor we could be eating catfish tonight.\u201d You look over at him and then follow his gaze to a small group of people fishing on far bank of the muddy river. \u201cMaybe they could spare a couple of hooks and some line so we can make cane poles.\u201d\n\n\u201cDo you think they might let us have some?\u201d\n\n\u201cThere\u2019s no harm in asking. C\u2019mon, let\u2019s go see.\u201d\n\nYou follow him as fast as your stiff-legged limp can take you. He stops at the bridge for about a minute looking up and down the tracks until he\u2019s satisfied that there\u2019s no train on its way, then walks at nearly his walking pace across.\n\nYou look down at the muddy, swirling water and wonder what might be lurking under its surface. You don\u2019t really like high places and wish there was another way around. After gritting your teeth, you step out onto the first tie.\n\nYou have trouble keeping up and have only made it halfway across when he reaches the other side. Luckily, you make it across without falling between the cross ties and aren\u2019t surprised by a speeding train.\n\n\u201cYou look like you need a breather,\u201d he says, \u201cWhy don\u2019t you go sit in the shade over there while I go talk to these people.\u201d\n\nYou almost protest, but decide it might be better if you\u2019re seen by as few people as possible. Even though you are with an adult now, there\u2019s no telling what might happen and you certainly don\u2019t want to be taken back to your mom. There\u2019s no telling what she might do to you this time.\n\nYou walk over and find a comfy spot and sit down. While you wait, you pull out your map and look for the highway number that you saw when you were near here with Jane. You were focusing your attention on Harvey this time and didn\u2019t notice it this time. It doesn\u2019t look very far away from home on the map, but the deputy had said it was eighty miles and eighty miles is a long way.\n\nYou put the map back in the \u2018treasure chest\u2019 and lean back\u2014soaking up the coolness of the shade. Your eyes start to glaze over so you sit up and give yourself a couple of light slaps to make the sleepiness go away.\n\nYou\u2019ve been sitting here a long time and start to wonder what\u2019s taking Harvey so long to get back. It shouldn\u2019t take this long to ask for fishing line and a couple of hooks. Maybe he decided not to come back. Maybe he figured it would be better not to have to travel with a kid.\n\nGetting to your feet and picking up the bag, you decide you should at least take a peek and see if he\u2019s anywhere to be seen. You walk about halfway back to the river when you hear a hushed \u201cHey, psst\u201d from behind you. You turn around and see Harvey stepping out of the trees so you walk back over to him.\n\nHe\u2019s got a rolled up paper bag under his arm and is grinning at you as he motions for you to follow him into the tree-line. \u201cThey were nicer than I ever would\u2019ve expected. Look at all the stuff they were willing to part with.\u201d He pulls out a brand-new package of treble hooks and a whole roll of bright blue fishing line. \u201cLooks like we might be eating fish tonight. And here\u2019s something for you,\u201d he says, pulling out a rolled up green shirt and flipping it open to reveal a pair of pink and white tennis shoes.\n\nYou crinkle your nose. You don\u2019t want to wear girl\u2019s shoes.\n\nHe smirks and says \u201cDon\u2019t worry. After you wear \u2018em a couple days, nobody\u2019ll know the difference. Oh, and this here shirt is for you, too.\u201d\n\nHe helps you untie the blanket and repack your bag. He doesn\u2019t open the \u2018treasure chest\u2019 and only packs it in tight with everything else. You mentally let out a sigh of relief. If stealing stuff from a house didn\u2019t bother him, what would he have done if he\u2019d found your money? It makes you wonder if those people actually gave him this stuff or if he stole it, too.\n\nThe shoes are a bit loose on you, but you lace them up good and tight and they only flop a little bit when you walk in them. Your put your lone flip-flop in the bag in case you might need it later and notice that the bag is considerably smaller now which will make it much easier to carry. Harvey must\u2019ve had a lot of practice packing stuff since he moves around so much.\n\n\u201cWe should head off down the river that way to do our fishing. We don\u2019t wanna be too close to other people fishing if we expect to catch anything. You ready to go?\u201d\n\nYou nod.\n\n\u201cThen let\u2019s go catch us some supper.\u201d Harvey steps into the trees on the other side of the tracks and you follow close behind. It\u2019s been so long since you wore a pair of shoes that you forgot how good they can feel and the branches raking your sunburned chest as walk through the brush doesn\u2019t bother you quite so much now that you have a shirt as an extra barrier of protection.\n\nIt seems like you\u2019ve been walking in the woods for a long time and you begin to think that you might be lost again like what happened when you were with Jane. Harvey stops several times to listen and look around like he doesn\u2019t know where he\u2019s going. You are about to ask him if you might be lost when he steps out on a bluff overlooking the river. He crane\u2019s his neck to look upstream and can\u2019t see beyond the bend.\n\n\u201cThis looks like a good spot,\u201d he says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Gone Fishin'", "result": "Both of you put your stuff down and Harvey pulls out an old pocket knife and flips out a blade that looks to have been sharpened way too many times. He walks around looking until he finds a couple of straight enough saplings to whack into poles and ties line and hooks to the end.\n\n\u201cWe don\u2019t have any worms or grasshoppers,\u201d you say.\n\nHe raises an eyebrow at you. \u201cWe won\u2019t need \u2018em.\u201d You look at him a little puzzled as he reaches into the neck of his shirt and rips off the tag, then does the same to yours. \u201cHere\u2019s the best starter bait in the world.\u201d\n\nYou shake your head. What fish would want to eat cloth? Maybe he doesn\u2019t even know how to fish since he doesn\u2019t know what fish like to eat.\n\nHe stabs a hook through each square white piece and hands you your pole before dropping his line in the water. You move a few yards down the bank and find a place where you can sit with your feet hanging over. Might as well get comfortable since you are going to be here a while.\n\nYou drop your line in and lean back against a tree. You notice that your back doesn\u2019t hurt nearly as bad as it did. It still itches a little, but you are careful not to scratch it so you don\u2019t open the scabs and start it bleeding all over again. You look up at the clouds floating by and realize that it has been a long time since you took the time to really stop and look around at anything. You find yourself swinging your feet and whistling softly through your teeth\u2014just like you used to do when your dad took you fishing before he and your mom got a divorce. Everything was perfect back then and everyone was always so happy. You long to be back there because now the whole world has gone crazy and you\u2019re having a hard time just keeping up.\n\nYou don\u2019t notice the slight tugging at your line, but when it is nearly jerked from your grasp you yank on it with too much force. You know better than to do that. That\u2019s how fish get away.\n\nYou look down at your line and see a tiny perch flopping on the end of it. You can hardly believe your eyes. The little fish must\u2019ve really thought that your shirt tag was something to eat. \u201cI got one! I caught a fish!\u201d\n\n\u201cShh. Not so loud. You don\u2019t want to scare off all the other fish, do you?\u201d Harvey says, craning his neck to look upriver. \u201cBring it over here and let me see it.\u201d\n\nYou do as he asks. \u201cIt\u2019s only a little one so we gotta throw it back.\u201d\n\nHe shakes his head. \u201cThis one\u2019s gonna be our catfish bait.\u201d He worries the hook out and guts the tiny little fish. After baiting your hooks with its innards, he hands you back your pole and pitches his line out as far as it will go.\n\nYou walk back to your spot and throw your line back in. You remember your dad telling you that you have to turn the little fish loose so they can grow up to be big fish. If you didn\u2019t, there wouldn\u2019t be any big fish for other people to catch. You look back over at Harvey and wonder if he really has any idea what he\u2019s doing after all.\n\nAfter spending the whole day fishing, there\u2019s only one channel cat and a couple of medium perches to show for it. Harvey did end up throwing several small fish back so it eased your mind about that somewhat. When it came time to clean and cook the fish, he showed you how to tie a fish to the end of a forked stick and stake it on with smaller ones sharpened into little skewers so it wouldn\u2019t fall off in the campfire. You are basically roasting them like marshmallows which was kind of neat and fun. It reminded you of the camp-outs you had with your parents when you were little.\n\nTo round out the meal, you sift through the shattered crackers and pick out the biggest chunks. Harvey eats most of the fish and crackers and before he is through you feel like you wouldn\u2019t be able to hold in even one more bite if you wanted to.\n\nYou collapse into a heap and begin thinking about how almost the entire day was wasted. You could be a long way from here right now\u2014even if you had to walk to do it. Sure, you needed the rest, but not as much as you needed to cover the ground. You\u2019ll have to try to make up for all this lost time tomorrow and if that means going on alone then so be it. Getting to the Grand Canyon for Jane is the most important thing. It\u2019s the only thing that matters.", "action_results": [{"action": "Life on the Road", "result": "You wake up before the sun and begin readying your pack for the road ahead. Harvey occasionally grunts in his sleep and you don\u2019t dare wake him unless it is a real emergency. That\u2019s just the way it is with grownups.\n\nWhen you get tired of waiting, you decide to throw your line in the murky water. It isn\u2019t that you are hungry, but you are nearly out of food and if you had a fish to tide you over in the afternoon it would save time\u2014and the hassle\u2014in the long run. You find a decent looking gut that isn\u2019t too big or too small to skewer onto your hook and pitch your line out as far as it will go.\n\nAfter more than an hour, you still haven\u2019t had even a nibble and are about to give up when the sun finally peeks over the horizon. The warmth is overwhelming and the world around you sort of melts away. It is so comforting to just stand here and bask in the rays of the new day.\n\nJust then, your pole snaps and you are startled back into reality. \u201cAhhh!\u201d Something big has tied onto your line and with the way it is thrashing, you don\u2019t know if you\u2019ll be able to haul it in. You dig in with your heels and strain with all you have, but the mud is slick and you are being dragged toward the water. The surface opens up in a geyser revealing the biggest catfish you have ever seen. It is a sleek and silky, bluish-gray catfish and you can only stand there while the spray engulfs you in slow motion.\n\n\u201cWha- What\u2019s going on?!\u201d you hear from behind you along with quite a ruckus. Harvey scrambles up beside you and is still rubbing the bleariness out of his eyes when it finally dawns on him that you need help so he reaches out and snags the end of your pole. \u201cThis guy\u2019s enough to feed an entire army!\u201d\n\nBy the time all the chunks have cooked the sun is already high. You\u2019ve lost so much time already that when you finally do head off down the tracks you have to continually slow down to let Harvey catch up even though your paces are two to his one. You try not to even stop to rest when he suggests it, but he\u2019s not as young as you are so you have to give him the occasional breather.\n\nThe miles tend to run together and then the days. It\u2019s a long way between towns and by the time you finally get within sight of one that is little more than a far away dot, you\u2019ve long since eaten the last morsel of fish. Harvey has pointed out a few edible plants along the way\u2014none of which are very appetizing, but they don\u2019t kill you or even make you sick\u2014which is better than having nothing at all on your stomach. He shows you how to skin prickly pears so you can eat them, but they are so bland that you can only stand to chew them until all the moisture is gone and then spit out the remnants when he\u2019s not looking.\n\nIt\u2019s about midday when you run up on another farmhouse about a half a mile from the tracks.\n\n\u201cWait here,\u201d Harvey says, \u201cI\u2019ll be back in a jiff.\u201d\n\nYou watch as he crosses the over-grazed pasture and strides up to the front door. After a couple minutes, you see him disappear around the side only to return a few minutes later cradling something in his arms. When he gets close enough, you can see that what he\u2019s carrying is eggs.\n\n\u201cI got us a real treat, boy.\u201d\n\nYou look up at him and give a half-smile. \u201cI haven\u2019t had eggs in a long, long time. How are we gonna cook \u2018em? We don\u2019t have a pan or anything.\u201d\n\n\u201cLeave that to me. Where there\u2019s a will\u2014there\u2019s a way.\u201d\n\nAfter a short ways, he picks up an old tin can and peers into it while holding it up to the sun. \u201cThis\u2019ll do nicely. You got any of that water left?\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah.\u201d You reach into the bag and pull a bottle out. \u201cIt\u2019s the last one.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt\u2019ll be more than enough. We\u2019ll get some more the next place we run on to.\u201d\n\nHe steps off to the side of the tracks and kicks an area bare with his foot. He starts piling dried grass, twigs and whatever else he finds and then lights it. You quickly run around gathering more bits of dried wood and before you know it, the can is boiling away so he pulls it off to the side a couple inches\u2014enough that it can still get heat, but not so much that it loses all of its water. Then, the two of you sit back and watch it for a few minutes.\n\n\u201cThat oughta be enough.\u201d He pulls his hand inside his sleeve and uses the cuff like a hot pad. After dumping the water on the fire, he kicks it around a little bit to make sure it is completely out. \u201cWe\u2019ll let these cool off while we walk and come supper time we\u2019ll have us a real treat.\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t really want to wait, but you know he\u2019s right so you do your best to put it out of your mind and think about other things.\n\nAll at once, you notice that there are suddenly more houses around. You didn\u2019t even realize how much you\u2019d traveled since you first saw this town as a far off speck.\n\n\u201cWith any luck, we\u2019ll be able to catch a train out of this bump in the road. I don\u2019t think my feet can take too many more miles.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe need to fill up the bottles with water.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe oughta find a milk jug or two instead. Those glass bottles you got are empty weight. If you\u2019re going to be lugging something around, it oughta be more water.\u201d\n\nYou nod in agreement.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wrench in the Cogs", "result": "Crossing the street to a gas station, you spot a police car coming toward you from down the street. You step up your pace and put Harvey between you and it. You look around for a place to hide, but there isn\u2019t anything close. You prepare yourself in case he stops, but all you can hope for is to run as fast as you can and hope that you can get away. You let out a sigh as it goes on by and the officer behind the wheel doesn\u2019t even look over at you.\n\nStepping through the open door, you are hit by a blast of not quite so hot air. A big shop fan rests against the back wall and is aimed directly at the door. A nice looking man in thick glasses and stained coveralls sits just to the right of it and has his nose buried in a newspaper.\n\n\u201cAhem,\u201d Harvey clears his throat to get the guy\u2019s attention.\n\n\u201cHowdy,\u201d says the attendant, leaning forward so that the legs of his folding chair touch the floor, \u201cWhat can I do for you?\u201d\n\n\u201cWe were hoping to get some water. Drinking water. And maybe a jug or something to put it in.\u201d\n\nYou can see the disappointment on the attendant\u2019s face as he draws his lips back, but it quickly shifts into a forced smile. \u201cSure thing. I think there might be one around back by the dumpster.\u201d\n\n\u201cThanks,\u201d Harvey says as he heads back out the front door.\n\nYou hang back and stand there looking at the guy with a sheepish smile until you finally build up enough nerve to blurt out \u201cDo you buy bottles?\u201d\n\n\u201cSure thing, little man. You got some you wanna trade in?\u201d\n\n\u201cUh huh.\u201d You dig through you bag and pull out the two root beer bottles. You stand there looking down at them and remember sharing them with Jane. You knew you\u2019d have to sell them eventually, but now you aren\u2019t sure that you really want to.\n\n\u201cJust the two, then?\u201d\n\nYou wipe the film from your eyes that has started to develop and look up at him. You nod.\n\n\u201cI think I have it right here\u2014\u201d he says, digging in his pocket. \u201cYeah, here you go. Six cents. You can put \u2018em over there with those,\u201d he points after handing you the coins.\n\nFrom the little wire rack by the front door, you grab a couple plastic tubes of peanuts. They are marked twenty-five cents and you think you have more than enough in change. You pull out the plastic bread wrapper and start counting out pennies on the only bare spot on the counter. The attendant watches you and drums his fingers impatiently.\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s it.\u201d\n\nYou look up and see him sliding the pile off into his hand. \u201cThat\u2019s not fifty cents.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah, it is. You must\u2019ve just miscounted.\u201d\n\nYou grin up at him. You\u2019d only given him a little over thirty cents so either he is really nice and doing you a favor or else he just doesn\u2019t want all your pennies. He smiles warmly back.\n\nYou quickly twist the bag of money and shove it way down deep in your pocket before Harvey comes back. He seems that he\u2019s on your side so far, but if he can steal from random strangers he might just take from you, too. You drop the peanuts into your bag for later in case you have to go too long without food.\n\nYou\u2019re leaning with your back against the metal door frame when Harvey returns with two jugs. He and the attendant talk briefly before the two of you head around the side of the building to the faucet and fill the jugs. You have a huge lump in your throat and barely even take notice of anything around you for quite a little while. Even bending down and taking giant gulps straight from the spigot doesn\u2019t make it go down. It just sort of hangs there. The last thing you do is pitch the last whiskey bottle in the dumpster before the two of you head back toward the tracks.\n\n\n\nIt\u2019s several hours before a train comes into view. You hear the blasting horn from miles away and you sit staring in the direction of the blast. It is going the wrong way, however, so you have to keep waiting. You and Harvey have found yourselves a nice comfy spot in the shade of a metal building in some scrub brush where no one can see you.\n\nHarvey has been leaning with his back against a small tree and every once in a while he lets out a snort that would wake any normal person from a sound sleep. Not him, though. Even though he\u2019s had much more rest than you, he still looks like an old, old man. His gray doesn\u2019t end at his hairline, but keeps going all the way down his face subcutaneously.\n\nSometime before dark and just when you finally feel like you could stand some sleep yourself, you hear a long, blaring horn from the opposite direction.\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s our ride,\u201d says Harvey, opening his eyes and stretching to get the kinks out.\n\nYou watch as the engine finally enters the yard, but it keeps going and doesn\u2019t slow any more than a fast walking pace. Harvey cranes his neck and strains to try and see further down its length. There are no boxcars. All you can see are flatcars and hoppers. A long stretch of flatcars are loaded with sea containers probably bound for the coast and don\u2019t offer any space at all around them, but one of the last cars is only half full at the back.\n\nHarvey trots toward it and you dash around him. After lofting your bag over the side, he grabs you around your middle and hefts you up. He tosses his coat and the water jugs at your feet before trotting up to the very front where there is a step.\n\n\u201cHey! Get away from there!\u201d you hear coming from the tail end of the train. \u201cThat\u2019s private property!\u201d\n\nYou duck into a corner made by the slightly mismatched cargo containers and watch as Harvey takes a step backward. He looks up at you as the train whisks you by and turns away from the tracks. You peek around the container to see two men rush up to him. They take him by the arms and lead him back across the tracks. One of them is talking on a walkie-talkie. What are they going to do to him?\n\nDid they see you? You have no idea. If they did, they might call ahead to stop the train and then what would you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back for Harvey", "result": "You shove Harvey\u2019s coat into your bag and wait until the yard is out of sight before jumping off. The train has picked up a little speed and you end up rolling headlong in the gravel, but only end up with a couple of small scrapes. There will be other trains or maybe Harvey will have another idea. You can\u2019t just bear to take his stuff and go on without him.\n\nBy the time you get back to the train yard there is no one in sight. You don\u2019t know what to do. You can\u2019t just start walking around town looking for him. What if that cop sees you? He\u2019ll take you back to your Mom and after what she did last time\u2014well, that\u2019s just too awful to even think about.\n\nYou hang around the train yard for a little while being sure to keep out of sight until it is full dark and then walk over to the street where the gas station is. You don\u2019t see any sign of Harvey. In fact, the street is completely deserted so you head back to the tracks.\n\nThere\u2019s a strange sense of deja vu as you walk between the rails. It\u2019s not quite as scary this time, but things are still creeping around out there just out of sight. You wish that you still had your stick with you. You must\u2019ve left it back at the river. That\u2019s the last place you remember seeing it.\n\nAbout a mile or so away from town, you see a small cinder block building with a light on the front of it above a blue door out in the middle of a field and just behind it there\u2019s an earthen dam. It looks like it might be a good place to stay the night.\n\nYou walk over to it and try to open the door, but it\u2019s locked so you go around to the side where it\u2019s dark and slump down against the wall.\n\nYou are getting rather hungry so you reach in your bag to get a package of peanuts when you remember the eggs. Too bad Harvey isn\u2019t around to enjoy them. You take out two and take your time eating them. You fiddle with the shells\u2014not wanting to go to sleep out here in the open, but there is a little light to see by so you don\u2019t feel quite as skittish\u2014and end up crumbling them into tiny bits only slightly bigger than sand before finally casting them out into the wiry grass.\n\nYou aren\u2019t sitting there long before the day catches up with you and you drift off to sleep.\n\n\n\nYou wake up before the sun and find it right nippy out so you put on Harvey\u2019s coat. Your legs are stiff and there\u2019s a crick in your back. Your arms feel like they are about to fall off from carrying the extra weight of the water jugs. There has to be something you can do about it. You can\u2019t keep juggling all this stuff and expect to last very long.\n\nAt long last, the sun finally pops up and the dew steams off the tracks. It won\u2019t be long until it gets warm enough that you won\u2019t need the coat anymore and that gives you an idea.\n\nYou pull your arms out of the sleeves and tie a jug to each one\u2014letting them flop in front of you while you keep the coat on like a cape. It\u2019s not pretty, but it frees up your hands so that all you have to worry about is holding onto the bag.\n\nIt isn\u2019t long before you polish off the rest of the eggs and while getting them out, you find the hooks and line. With any luck you\u2019ll run into another river or maybe a lake somewhere up ahead.\n\nYou trudge along for mile after mile as the sun creeps steadily overhead and just hangs there baking you. You keep wishing you had some kind of hat when you see something between the tracks up ahead that looks just like a dusty, smashed cowboy hat.\n\nYou pick up your pace and are nearly on it when it suddenly moves! It\u2019s a snake! And it\u2019s big one. It has a pattern of criss-crossing lines along its back and starts to make a rattling noise. You drop the bag as you fall backward. You see it draw back its head as you crab-walk the heck out of there as fast as you can.\n\nWhen you are a safe distance away, you get back to your feet. What are you going to do now? You have to get your bag back, but it\u2019s much too close to it now.\n\nYou look around and the only thing there is is the crushed limestone gravel. Perfect! You pick up a couple handfuls of the biggest chunks and start lobbing them at it to drive it away. Every single stone\u2014whether it be a hit or miss\u2014is a hit because the rattler strikes them when they get close. Every single time! And then it shakes off the impact kind of and gets ready for the next one. Before long the bottom of its mouth is kind of drooping to one side and its head is mangled, but it hangs in there. You ease a little closer being careful to stay well out of range and start pelting it with everything you have until it is little more than a pile of mush. It finally slinks over the rail and slithers into the sparse grass where it disappears completely.\n\nYou creep up and pick up your bag giving that area a wide berth before continuing on your way.", "action_results": [{"action": "Any Port in the Storm", "result": "You only now realize how late it is getting. It seems like only a couple hours ago the sun was directly overhead and now there are not even shadows at all anymore. You look around for some place to hole up for the night and the only place you see is a small grove of trees in the corner of the field some distance from the tracks. There are no people or animals within sight and you debate whether you should head over there or keep going and hope for a better spot to present itself.\n\nJust then, a loud crack nearly knocks you off your feet and everything around you is immediately thrown into high contrast. You duck instinctively, even though you are a second too late.\n\nYou look up to see the sky overhead is near black and brimming with static. The horizon behind you fades swiftly to nothing in a dingy gray curtain. You are about to get soaked!\n\nNature has made your decision for you. You don\u2019t want to be anywhere near trees during an electrical storm. And you certainly don\u2019t want to be standing on these metal tracks higher than all the ground around you for as far as you can see.\n\nYou can see a dirt road about a half a mile ahead. Perhaps you\u2019ll find some cover when you reach it. In any case, you\u2019ll be off the tracks and will no longer be a sitting duck for lightning strikes.\n\nYou run.\n\nAs you near the crossroad, you look both ways for any sign of shelter and see a bent over mail box at the end of what appears to be a driveway so you veer in that direction cutting across the ditch before even reaching the road.\n\nThere is a stitch in your side, but you keep moving. Thunder is clapping all around you and a sound like running horses is growing louder and louder.\n\nYou turn into the driveway without slowing down and find it nearly overgrown down the center. It is canted downhill and looks more like an old wash than something carved out by human hands. Only vague tire wear paths along each side show that it was once used. The spindly saplings on either side stretch out and their branches knit together overhead throwing the path into unnatural darkness. Your stomach lurches at the prospect of having to venture down such a lane, but you don\u2019t have much choice and hope that there is still some form of shelter when you reach the end of it.\n\nAs you run along weaving back and forth through the tall grass and weeds down the center of the lane from one worn path to the other to avoid the darkest areas and shrubbery that threatens to conceal any manner of creature, you hope that something isn\u2019t lying in wait just out of your vision\u2014to trip you up or is crouched and ready to pounce.\n\nThe path finally widens into a clearing and with it your spirits\u2014for across the unkempt yard you see an old derelict shotgun house whose roof has collapsed in at the back. It might not be much to look at, but it will definitely serve its purpose to keep you dry while you weather the storm that has just now caught up to you.\n\nSnow white stones pummel the ground around and in front of you and will soon tear their way through the spindly branches overhead so you have no choice but to run the gauntlet and hope that you can make it to the cover on the other side. With giant strides, you cover the ground with ice pelting you from above and ricocheting off of your shoulders and arms\u2014stinging as they bounce high and away\u2014and sure to leave welts the size of goose eggs. A couple or three times a stone smacks into your head and your vision goes fuzzy, but you are too focused on your goal to give it much thought or to succumb to the blinding pain.\n\nFinally, you spring up onto the gabled porch and dart through the framed hole in the wall that once supported a door. Everything is shrouded in a dim gloom and there is a mustiness that permeates the place. You don\u2019t see signs that anyone has been in this place for possibly years. You set your bag against the wall by the door so you can look around.\n\nBeyond the front room is a short hall on the left that leads into a darkened room. As you make your way down it, you come to a wood panel door with cracked and peeling white paint that has greened slightly with age midway and see another a little further on with a more yellowed tinge to it. Both are standing wide open and you can see only darkness in the slits between them and the door frame.\n\nInside the first room you see the remnants of a mattress leaning against the far wall partially covering a window whose muntins hold only shards and fragments of turquoise shaded glass still trapped by its web of caulk. It was probably placed there to prevent the room from being damaged by weather or overrun with critters when the first of its lights had been knocked out. The bed frame is still in the corner and the pile next to its head was most likely a nightstand that didn\u2019t fare too well with time. A pile of debris layers the floor of the built-in closet. It was undoubtedly shirts and dresses and things once upon a time and has become shredded by moths, rodents and mildew until it could no longer cling on to the wire hangers still suspended on the bar.\n\nYou wrestle the door away from the wall enough to peek behind and find nothing at all there save cobwebs and decades of dust. You shove it back against the wall and step into the room for a more thorough examination.\n\nStill hanging from a crooked nail in the closet, you find a narrow leather dress belt. You bend and wrench it and find that it still has life left in it. It could come in handy sometime, so you buckle it to its tail and sling it over your head\u2014letting it dangle at your hip like a sash. There are a few other things like a brass ash tray that\u2019s tarnished black with age, but you can\u2019t imagine a use for it and it would only weigh you down.\n\nYou check the next door and see that behind it is a tiled bathroom. There isn\u2019t much of value in here, but as you are about to leave you spot a new vinyl shower curtain still in its wrapper. It sounds a bit crunchy when you bend the package, but it might still be good enough to keep you dry if you get caught in a sudden downpour.\n\nThe back room is the kitchen, but you can\u2019t get through it or even tell what might be in there since the roof has collapsed and draped the ceiling over whatever might\u2019ve once been in here. It doesn\u2019t look too safe to even go near so you head back to the front room where you seat yourself by the open doorway and snack on a few peanuts.\n\nThe storm outside is raging and seems to be growing more violent with every passing second. At least you found a dry place to weather it. You might as well try to get some rest since it looks like you\u2019re going to be here a while so you draw the coat up as tightly as you can and slump your back against the wall.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ghosts From the Past", "result": "Sleep doesn\u2019t come easily with all the thunderclaps. And you keep seeing movement with each flash of lightning. Sometimes it\u2019s down the dark hallway and sometimes through one of the windows. Each time you spin your head in that direction it is already gone\u2014whatever it is.\n\nYou\u2019d move to a better angle to see everything, but it would only put you at a disadvantage. If you move even a foot to either side, something could grab you through a window and if you move over to the far wall, the hallway would be at your back. As it is now, something could reach through and grab you from the doorway so you draw your feet under you and are poised to spring away.\n\nSomething is scraping around in the kitchen now. You can barely make it out above the howl of the wind, but it is there. You still can\u2019t make anything out through the darkness\u2014which only deepens with each strobe from the storm.\n\nSomething is watching you. You slowly turn your head to one side to see out of the windows along that wall and only see blackness. Your hands are all sweaty so you try to wipe them off on your shirt, but it is still damp and doesn\u2019t do much good at all. Lightning flashes overhead and you can see that there\u2019s nothing outside the windows.\n\nYou slowly pivot your head toward the windows on the opposite wall and notice how much blacker the room has become. Your ears begin to burn and prickle. You don\u2019t dare make any sudden movement. You hear the ambient rumble emanating from all around you with only slight variances every now and again. What happened to all the lightning? Why is it taking so long?\n\nThen it is suddenly and briefly daylight outside and you can see that the windows are empty. Does it know when the flashes will come and only hide until it gets dark again?\n\nSomething moves in front of you! It is only a black shape against the darkness and you can see it getting taller\u2014as if it is getting to its feet. Your legs won\u2019t work and your chest feels heavy. You can\u2019t see its face, but can feel the too wide grin creeping slowly across it. Its eyes burn into you though you cannot see them.\n\nYou can see more of them writhing in background, waiting. They slither this way and that, but aren\u2019t drawing any closer.\n\nThe thing is still just black on black, but it is drawing ever nearer as it glides toward you. It is getting larger and larger. You can feel it reaching its long bony talons out toward you and its shriveled lips part open.\n\nDon\u2019t worry. No one ever comes here. This place is \u2018bandoned.\n\nYou nearly jump out of your skin and your eyes snap open. Was it a only dream or did you actually just hear those words?\n\nYou rapidly swivel your head back and forth trying to get a handle on where it is. All you can see is blackness that goes gray with each heartbeat. The rumble outside has become more distant and there are no longer any lightning flashes to illuminate the room. You pick up your bag and hold it in front of you as a makeshift shield.\n\nGet that little BASTARD!\n\nYou are on your feet and running through the night in the direction that you believe the driveway is. It is so dark that you can\u2019t see your hand in front of your face and you can only hope that you don\u2019t slam into a tree or anything. The jugs of water are beating against your thighs with every step. Your eyes burn and tears stream down your cheeks.\n\nYou better run you little BITCH!\n\nYou run like the devil is after you because it most certainly is. With each step, you slog through the ankle deep water. You can hear it slosh and spray all around you. You expect you foot to drop into a hole or get stuck in the mud, but find solid footing among the submerged grass and weeds. You have your arm outstretched ahead of you to help deflect anything in your path, but there is nothing. The grassy slough gives way to solid ground\u2014possibly a road\u2014and you turn back in the direction you believe the tracks are in. You run and run until you run yourself completely out of packed ground and find yourself surrounded by dense grass. You no longer have anywhere to go but down.\n\nYou fall in a heap attempting to stifle your wheezing sobs and clinging to the bag for dear life. The pounding in your ears blocks out all other sound and you wouldn\u2019t know if something was coming up on you in the blackness\u2014no matter how much racket it was making.\n\nEons pass and you finally see the first twinkle among the clouds. The sky slowly withdraws its veil letting more and more tiny lights shine through. All around you there is a comforting bluish glow. The grass seems to be lit from within and it feels like you can see for miles and miles\u2014as if you are in some supernatural sea. The serenity seeps into your soul and your previous terror is completely replaced with awe and wonder.\n\nThe sun spills over the horizon and washes across the landscape and you are momentarily blinded by the glint of steel. The tracks are but a short distance away. You must have turned and run along beside them in your panic. A great double rainbow cinches the whole world together and everything is suddenly new again. You feel like you can take the entire universe on single handed.\n\nYou pick yourself up and sling the bag over your shoulder and once again hit the rails.", "action_results": [{"action": "Train Wrangler", "result": "After a day and a half, you come within sight of a town. It is just getting dark and the street lights are beginning to glow orange as far as the eye can see. This is no ordinary town\u2014it stretches out for miles and is already giving off a glow comparable to that of the setting sun.\n\nAnother track stretching off into the far yonder joins with yours and up ahead you can see yet another. They cling to each other and swap back and forth between switches. There are trains up ahead\u2014some coming and some going\u2014and beyond that a vast highway arcs in perpetual leap from one side of this river of rails to the other.\n\nYou make your way over to the far side to keep out of sight of the headlamps of the oncoming trains and follow the tracks for nearly an hour\u2014careful to stay with the majority as they snake their way westward\u2014doing your best to not get sidetracked.\n\nUp ahead and on the same side of the arteries of tracks as you you see a train just sitting there alongside a string of small warehouses and aimed in the right direction. You can hear the engine reverberating and there are bright lights on tripods scattered all around. There are some flatcars with men busy loading large crates onto them using forklifts from the loading dock and in the gloom between them and the engine is a string of boxcars. You can see from here that their doors are wide open. If only you could make it inside one without being spotted.\n\nYou sneak up behind the metal buildings and then through the gap between until you are right across from the darkest one and watch the men carefully for your opening. The door is only a few inches higher than the platform so you won\u2019t have any trouble getting inside. You only have to wait for the right moment.\n\nAfter the crates have been chained down and the forklifts have gone away, the men start taking the lights down one by one and you hear the engine slowly rev up. You\u2019ll have to time this just right.\n\nLuck is on your side. There is no one in sight when the train starts inching forward and you make your dash. You make your way as quickly between the slatted crates and the wall as you can to the front of the car where you find just enough crawl space to conceal yourself and your stuff.\n\nThe smell is overpowering and your mouth begins to water uncontrollably. The crates are packed full with cantaloupes and you haven\u2019t eaten anything since the remainder of peanuts you had last night. You are famished!\n\nYou don\u2019t even bother with getting the knife out of the \u2018treasure chest\u2019. You just reach in and punch a hole in one with your fist. You pull out handful after handful of slimy goodness and cram it into your mouth. It\u2019s so dark that you can\u2019t even see it, but you know how light and orange it must be. You\u2019ll definitely be filling your belly this night. The thought strikes you that you could take a couple along with you for good measure when you leave the train so while you\u2019re filling your gullet you also pry off enough of the slats to pull out a couple of good sized ones and pack them in the blanket in your bag.\n\nWhen you\u2019re finally lulled to sleep by the clacking rails, you are returned to the night you and Jane spent on that train and all the plans you and she had made. Only this time, the two of you are on your way to see the Grand Canyon and are without a care in the world. She gives you a huge grin and throws her arms around you\u2014planting a big kiss on your cheek\u2014and hugging you for all you are worth.\n\nThe day comes much too soon and you stagger over to the open doorway to relieve yourself. You stand there and marvel at how far you can see. Snaking its way through a long valley is a river so blue that it makes your heart stop. On both sides it is lush with trees and you spot a large flock of birds winding and twisting like dust devils above the dense foliage. All is right with the world. You know you are going to make it just fine.", "action_results": [{"action": "Where the West Begins", "result": "After the long slow grade up from the river bottom, you find yourself in an entirely different landscape. The closest thing to trees are the tumbleweeds attempting to go unnoticed by entwining themselves in the nearly evenly spaced barbed-wire fences. A gentle breeze blows waves through the seeded out short-grass on the endless rolling hillsides as it ebbs and eddies.\n\nYou are careful not to get too close to the open door that you can be seen, but you manage to drag one of the crates close enough that you catch the breeze and sit there dining on cantaloupes as you watch the world whisk by.\n\nThe short-grass is soon replaced with only tufts of desperate hangers-on and sprawling prickly-pear patches. There are colorful rocky outcroppings jutting out from everywhere and you see a herd of small deer pawing and licking at one of them.\n\nYou watch small towns drift by in the distance and for a while the train runs alongside a highway filled with car after car from one end to the other for as far as you can see and wonder how there can be so many people. How did they all get here and why? Where did they all come from and where are they going?\n\nSoon after, the flat desolation opens wide and the land reaches up in supplication to the heavens. Mountain after mountain looms in the distance and slowly each one in turn makes its way from its incorporeal plane into reality. You\u2019ve never seen anything so amazing. From all the pictures you\u2019ve ever looked at, you never realized how awesome mountains would be up close in real life.\n\nThe train takes forever to reach the bottom of a long grade and your ears pop every couple of minutes. Your eyes feel swollen and like they might end up bursting from the pressure if something doesn\u2019t give soon. The sun was just beginning to set when you started your descent, but now you are in deep shadow cast by the mountains. The early lights of a large city come into view so it won\u2019t be long before you have to leave the train.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019ve been walking around for hours and still have no idea where to go from here. You\u2019ve gotten all turned around and don\u2019t remember which direction the sun was in. You aren\u2019t exactly sure what town you are in right now, either. You haven\u2019t been looking at your map and you\u2019ve lost all track. You\u2019ve just been following the sun since it seems to know where to go.\n\nIt\u2019d be best if you could board a train at night, but you may have to wait until morning to regain your bearings. There isn\u2019t really any place to lie down here. There are houses immediately beyond a high chain link fence that runs the course of the tracks through town and a gatehouse at each entrance that you are forced to skirt. The street lamps offer little light this far away and those blinding security lights on the front of the little buildings only extend out so far.\n\nYou can either wait until morning or attempt to board one of the random trains that sit idling on the tracks.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait until morning", "result": "Not wanting to risk hopping a train to God knows where, you decide to find a place to curl up and sleep for the night. Over behind the steel buildings across from the road, you find a patch of high weeds that will do nicely.\n\nYou settle down and catch a few winks during the short breaks between the interruptions of the normal commotion of loading and unloading the freight cars and hitching and unhitching. It\u2019s exhausting to say the least, but you have faith that in the morning you\u2019ll be able to catch a ride and there\u2019ll be plenty of time to rest then.\n\nWhen the sky finally starts to gray in the East, you begin juning around. There are plenty of trains to choose from pointed in the direction you wish to go. It\u2019s just a matter of getting on board without being spotted and as luck would have it, there aren\u2019t too many people bustling about right now. Still, you have to be careful.\n\nYou glide quickly over to the closest one and climb up the ladder on the front of a side dump car on the tail end of the train to look inside. Except for a bit of what looks like gravel here and there and dust, it\u2019s completely empty.\n\nYou pitch your bag over and climb in. There\u2019s no way someone will be able to see you unless they climb up and look directly in. You make yourself cozy and settle in for the ride.\n\n\n\nThe sun becomes unbearable around midday and you end up having to spread the blanket out to be able to even stand the radiating heat from the floor of the car. Every so often you have to stand up and let the blast furnace air flow over you to try to cool down as much as you can. You can only stand for a few minutes at most each time because the tracks run parallel to a highway and if you are spotted by a passing car, you\u2019ll no doubt be reported.\n\nYou end up going through more of your water than you wanted and end up having to soak your T-shirt and wrap around your head to even begin to bear the heat.\n\nThe sun finally drops down low enough that it casts a shadow in the front end of the car. Every hour brings with it more and more relief as the temperature seems to fall a degree or two until it has cooled down enough\u2014or perhaps you are just that tired\u2014that you find yourself getting sleepy. You stretch out and the rhythm of the tracks sends you tumbling head-first into dreamland.\n\n\n\nYou wake up before dawn and find the train still once more. You make up your bedroll and repack your bag before peeking out to see if the coast is clear.\n\nThe engine is gone and the short string of cars you are in seems to have been unhitched on a siding. The track stretches northeastward over the hill and there\u2019s a tall barricade of railroad ties where it stops abruptly at the west end.\n\nYou could head back up the tracks, but that would mean backtracking and it\u2019s anyone\u2019s guess how far. Or you could head for the mountains at the far end of the valley. Surely you\u2019ll run into a road or more tracks before too long.", "action_results": [{"action": "Backtrack", "result": "Maybe you should stick to the tracks. There\u2019s no telling what may be out in the desert. It might take longer and be more out of the way, but there\u2019s less of a chance to get lost.\n\nThe track rejoins one running East to West and you continue on to where the sun sets. It\u2019s blazing hot and only gets hotter with each passing hour. You try to conserve water as best you can and it only makes you thirstier. You\u2019ll have to go back to traveling only while the sun is down or you\u2019ll never make it.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019ve run yourself completely out of water, but still you trudge on. The iron rails stretch out ahead of you into infinity. There\u2019s no turning back. You\u2019ve shed every single item that you can afford to do without in order to lessen your load. The only thing you are unwilling to part with is Jane\u2019s treasure chest. It\u2019s all that is left of her.\n\nThe sun is blazing down on you and yet you are freezing. If only you\u2019d kept the coat. Your knees are shaking so furiously that you can barely keep them under you.\n\nJust when you think you won\u2019t be able to take another step, you see a gravel road up ahead crossing the tracks. You dig deep and force yourself to continue on. You must reach the crossing. You have to.\n\nYou are still fifty yards or so shy of it and cannot go on. Your legs are cramping something fierce and no longer obey your wishes. You have to stop. You have to rest.\n\nA dark green sedan covered in dust pulls up to the crossing and stops momentarily. After everything you\u2019ve done to keep out of sight, you have no choice now but to get help. It no longer matters whether they send you back or not as long as you don\u2019t die\u2014and you know you will if you don\u2019t get assistance.\n\nYou raise your arm to flag the car down and the ground starts spinning. Your vision goes black.", "action_results": [{"action": "Francisca", "result": "There is soft music playing far, far away. Even though you can\u2019t make out the words, it is so soothing and you feel enveloped by it like a warm blanket on a cold winter night.\n\nYou struggle to open your eyes against a piercing white light. You try to shield them from it with your hand and find that it is captured by a soft, thick blanket. The light is still way too bright, but you force your eyes open despite it. They eventually adjust and you find yourself in a very sterile-looking room. There are framed rubbings on the walls from what appears to be tombstones flanking a large, hand-carved wooden crucifix and on the nightstand next to the bed you are tucked into is a pitcher and basin, and a blue vase exploding with yellow flowers.\n\nThe bed is so soft. You\u2019ve never felt anything so soft. It feels like it could swallow you up. That you might could even drown in it\u2014and that wouldn\u2019t be half bad. Not half bad at all.\n\nYou reach out from under the covers and stretch your arms high over your head. A cool, damp washcloth slides down from your forehead and onto your cheek. It\u2019s a bit startling, but feels good all the same. You smush it back so that it stays in place.\n\nYou pull yourself up even though you\u2019d rather not and find that you haven\u2019t got a stitch of clothing on. You desperately look around and there\u2019s not a single thing other than the blanket to wrap yourself in so you scrunch back down. What in the world are you going to do?\n\nYou hear a \u201cclick\u201d and determine that it came from the door a mere moment before it swings open a crack. You can see movement in the darkness beyond the door and then suddenly an eye is looking in at you.\n\nYou scrunch down deep. You have nowhere to run. You only hope that whoever\u2014or whatever\u2014it is isn\u2019t here to hurt you.\n\nThe door slowly creaks open revealing the monster! It\u2019s in the form of a short, dark-skinned woman with long black hair and a broad, warm smile pasted across her face. She\u2019s carefully balancing a wooden tray so that several dishes she has neatly arranged on it don\u2019t go sliding off and onto the floor.\n\n\u201c\u00a1Buenos d\u00edas!\u201d\n\nYou eye her suspiciously from under the covers. What does she want?\n\n\u201c\u00bfTienes hambre?\u201d she asks, nodding and motioning toward the tray with her lips. \u201ceh \u2026 eat food?\u201d\n\nYou nod slowly.\n\n\u201c\u00bfS\u00ed?\u201d She whisks over beside the bed while you slowly unravel yourself from the blanket and push yourself back making sure not to let anything that shouldn\u2019t come uncovered. She sits beside you and gently places the tray on your lap\u2014keeping her hand on the edge of it for balance.\n\nOther than the short glass of orange juice and taller one of tepid milk you have no idea what any of this is, but it sure is delicious. You can\u2019t help but cram even more into your mouth before you\u2019ve even had time to swallow the previous bite.\n\n\u201c\u00bfSabe bien? eh \u2026 es good?\u201d she asks, smiling.\n\nYou give her a broad smile and a vigorous nod. \u201cMmm hmmm!\u201d\n\nWhen you can hold no more, you push back with a groan. \u201cThank you. That was the best food I ever ate.\u201d\n\nShe places the tray on the foot of the bed and then turns back to you and lifts the blanket before you even know what she\u2019s doing. You start. Extending her finger and gently touching one of the scars on your back she asks \u201c\u00bfQuien te hizo esto? eh \u2026 who hurt?\u201d\n\nYou give her another suspicious look and decide that it probably wouldn\u2019t hurt to tell her. It\u2019s not like she\u2019ll be able to tell anyone else. She can\u2019t even talk right. \u201cMy mom\u2026\u201d\n\n\u201c\u00a1Dios m\u00edo!\u201d she says, looking at you in horror, \u201c\u00bfTu madre?\u201d She leaps from the bed and begins pacing back and forth with a wild look in her eyes. She\u2019s rattling on so fast that even she wouldn\u2019t be able to pick out her own words. She finally stops and turns to you. \u201cNadie te pegar\u00e1 m\u00e1s. Ser\u00e1s mi hijo ahora,\u201d she says in a steadier and more soothing tone. She rushes over and throws her arms around you\u2014nearly dragging you from the bed\u2014and gives you such a squeeze that she nearly crushes the air right out of your chest. \u201cEst\u00e1s a salvo aqu\u00ed.\u201d\n\nDays go by and turn into weeks, and weeks into months, months into years. You keep meaning to get back to your journey to the Grand Canyon, but you feel so safe here and Francisca is so, so nice. There\u2019s not one mean bone in her whole body. Jane would\u2019ve really loved it here.\n\nSomeday\u2014when you\u2019re old enough and have a car of your own\u2014you intend to make good on your promise to Jane. But, for now this is\u2026\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Head for the mountains", "result": "You set out through the barren waste, using the highest peak in sight at the far end of the valley for your bearing. Not having to watch your step to keep from tripping on ties makes it much easier going. You skirt large patches of low-lying bushes and piles of rock so you don\u2019t have to worry about snakes.\n\nThe sun climbs slowly overhead and you start putting away the water. You still have nearly a gallon which should more than do to cross this valley. The mountains are right there, after all. You can almost reach out and touch them. Just in case, though, you pick up your pace. You don\u2019t want to be out here alone after dark.\n\nWhen it starts getting too hot, you wrap your T-shirt around your head like you did back on the train and imagine yourself as Lawrence of Arabia crossing the desert. You wonder if there might be an oasis out here. Wouldn\u2019t that be something!\n\nThe sun continues to swing across the sky and more than makes it to the finish line of the peaks before you. Maybe this wasn\u2019t such a good idea after all.\n\nYou look back from whence you came and can\u2019t tell how far you\u2019ve come or even where the railroad cars might be. You haven\u2019t even left tracks as far as you can tell across the hard and scorched landscape. There\u2019s no going back.\n\nNight falls and with it the temperature. The coat isn\u2019t enough so you pull out the blanket and wrap it around you as well. You continue on until the peak fades into the night sky and you are no longer able to see it.\n\nYou have no choice now but to stop here until morning. You can\u2019t even see the ground anymore so you could step right in the middle of a snake before you even knew it was there.\n\nWrapping up tightly in the coat, you lean back against the bag. Night insects chirp and buzz even out here so you don\u2019t feel quite so alone as you thought. Somewhere in the far distance, you hear a lonesome yelping howl. It\u2019s so far away that you have nothing to fear from it. But, what about the things closer in? The things that might not even make a sound?\n\nYour eyes finally close on their own while you are straining to listen. You sleep through the night.", "action_results": [{"action": "Cast to the Winds", "result": "You\u2019ve been without water now since the day before yesterday. Or was it the day before that? You can no longer remember anymore.\n\nYou can\u2019t go on. Your legs have lost all their strength so you allow yourself to crumble to the ground. You don\u2019t really have a choice in the matter.\n\nLooking out across the barren landscape, the mountains appear no closer than they did when you first set out. Everything has its own tint of blinding white and you can only make out what you think you are looking at by its vague shape.\n\nYou pull Jane\u2019s card from your pocket and unfurl it in your hand. It\u2019s difficult to make out the lines on the page, but you don\u2019t really need to. They have been seared into your mind since that very first day when she presented it to you. You did your best. You only wish you\u2019d have been able to complete your quest so that her dream would have been realized.\n\nA slight breeze snatches the page from your grasp. You are helpless to stop it. It flutters for a second where it gets caught on a dessicated plant before the wind works it free.\n\nFor a moment, it blots out the sun just long enough that you can see her standing there\u2014beckoning to you. Those spindly legs and knobby knees ending in flipflops beneath those faded and ragged cutoffs. The stained, white button up shirt tied at her waist. That toothy grin stretching wide across her face beneath that long and cascading raven hair. Those eyes the color of new grass.\n\nShe reaches down and folds her fingers over yours.\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Board a train", "result": "You find a string of flatcars loaded with brand new pickup trucks. All of their doors are locked and you don\u2019t want to risk being spotted by hiding under one of them so you climb up in the bed of one and hunker down. You hadn\u2019t noticed it before, but your skin feels thick and rigid. You have your knees drawn up as tightly as you can in the old coat and it doesn\u2019t seem to be helping so you drag out Jane\u2019s blanket\u2014carefully unraveling it from everything in the bag\u2014and wrap yourself in it. As you gradually start to warm up, you watch the stars creep by overhead and can\u2019t help but yawn uncontrollably.\n\n\n\nA peppering of raindrops on your face wakes you and you find that the train is moving. The sky overhead is mostly clear, but you happen to be under the one cloud that is leaking. You don\u2019t fancy the thought of getting soaked so you jump to your feet and cram the blanket into the bag.\n\nThe land is sweeping by at high speed and your heart skips a couple beats when your foot slips on the bumper while you\u2019re climbing over the tailgate. You fall on your butt before you can catch yourself and only after you realize that you are safe do you look over and see that you aren\u2019t anywhere near the edge of the flatcar. You roll under the back of the truck and pull the bag in behind you.\n\nThe orange sun hangs in the sky in front of you and to the right of the train. No! You are going the wrong way! There are huge dark mountains on the other side of the train. You drag out your map in the desperate hope that you are somehow mistaken and try to locate where you are. It doesn\u2019t show railroad tracks, but maybe you can figure it out some other way. There\u2019s a highway way out in front of you, but it is too far away to ever hope to be able to read the signs. Until you know what town or highway to look for on the map it is utterly useless.\n\nYou spend the next several hours watching the terrain sweep by knowing that you\u2019ll have to backtrack all these extra miles and your spirits keep sinking lower and lower. By the time the train begins to slow down you have regained your resolve. You absolutely refuse to give up. You\u2019ve come this far and there\u2019s no turning back. There\u2019s nothing to go back to anyway. No matter what it takes, you are going to see this thing through to the end.\n\n\n\nAfter jumping from the train you immediately turned and head back to the south. There wasn\u2019t anything in view when you came within sight of whatever that mountain town was and you didn\u2019t feel like hanging around waiting for something to come along.\n\nYou feel so exposed here. There\u2019s no cover of any kind along the tracks. The mountains appear to be close, but are, in fact, far away and whole communities\u2014maybe cities, but it\u2019s difficult to tell\u2014look like narrow white lines running along their base. Tiny, ant-like cars creep along on roads that you can barely make out if you squint really hard and the dessicated yellow grass fades to blue in the distance giving you the sense that you are on some tranquil sea. Even with everything so spread out and far away, you still feel the need to somehow conceal yourself and hunch over as much as you can get away with while still being able to walk fast.\n\nDay turns into night and night into day. There\u2019s no need for clocks or calendars out here so you haven\u2019t the faintest idea how many days it has taken you to recover the lost ground of one simple mistake. It just all seems to blur together. You eat on the go and only stop for the occasional catnap\u2014heading well away from the tracks so as not to be spotted from one of the many trains that whiz by. Even with being really conservative, you\u2019ve still eaten the last of the melons and used up all of your water with no hope of replenishing either of them. You can\u2019t afford to make the long trek across the barren landscape to one of the towns for being spotted would definitely put the old kibosh on the whole shebang and everything you\u2019ve done and went through so far would all be for naught.\n\nAs nightfall nears, you spot a small farmhouse not too far away from the tracks and decide to take a closer look. Leaving your bag near the tracks, you crawl on your belly up through the dried grass as far as you dare and try to spot a hydrant somewhere in the junk heap that passes for a yard. There are tires strewn around that may or may not belong to the half dozen or so old cars that are up on blocks. A discarded refrigerator sits propped against an old and rickety-looking wooden fence and there are a few mangy looking mutts staked out next to makeshift doghouses fashioned from oil drums whose tops have been removed. There\u2019s no sense in trying to fill your water jugs. The dogs would only alert whoever is inside and then your goose would be cooked.\n\nNear the back fence, you spot an overgrown garden and can see quite a few freshly ripe tomatoes mixed in with the green ones clinging to the vine. Your mouth waters just thinking about those delicious fruits.\n\nYou kick back and wait for the residual sunlight to leave the sky and close your eyes for a few minutes. Every little bit of rest you can get here and there helps.", "action_results": [{"action": "Oases", "result": "The lights just went off in the farmhouse so you crawl your way through the grass toward the garden\u2014trying to keep as low to the ground as you can. It is full dark, but you can\u2019t take the chance that someone might catch a glimpse of you.\n\nSomething moves off to your right, but you can\u2019t see what it is. You just hope it isn\u2019t a snake and if it is, you hope it\u2019s moving away from you instead of toward you.\n\nThe dry grass crunches under your hands and knees so you slow your pace to not make any more racket than you can help.\n\nYou are so, so hungry. It\u2019s been days since you\u2019ve eaten anything\u2014anything at all.\n\nThe hard, dry ground suddenly becomes loose, damp earth and you look up to see three dim strands of barbed wire. On the other side, you can make out the dark shapes holding their orbs out to you.\n\nYou wriggle your way under the bottom wire. Halfway through, you reach up and pluck the first one you see, then another and another. They all look the same in this light so you grab as many as you can and bag them up in the bottom of your shirt.\n\nYou hear a bawl coming from the direction of house, joined by a couple more as the bulb above the back door flips on and the door is thrown open.\n\n\u201cWhat is it, boys?\u201d you hear a man say, \u201cWhat\u2019s out there?\u201d\n\nYou are dragging yourself backward with your knees and shoving with your elbows when you see an orange flash near the house. You hear the boom a split-second later.\n\nHe\u2019s shooting at you!\n\nYou scamper with everything you have and don\u2019t stop until you\u2019re back on the other side of the embankment. You lay prone with your eyes peeled for any sign of movement coming over the rise and, when your heart finally slows, you look down at the single piece of fruit in your hand. At least it\u2019s something.\n\nYou take a bite and feel your face attempt to implode. The tomato isn\u2019t ripe, but it doesn\u2019t matter. It\u2019s food and moisture all in one and you\u2019ve been without either for much too long.\n\nAfter all the commotion and dogs\u2019 barking finally peters out, you creep back to retrieve your bag and continue on down the tracks.\n\n\n\nYou see the back of a big truck stop over on the highway up ahead of you about a mile or two away with a constant stream of vehicles coming and going. The moon is just coming up and from the glint on the tracks it looks like they might come really close to it. It would be a good place to fill up your water jugs. You might be able to blend in among all those people and them not even suspect that you are all alone out here.\n\nYou don\u2019t have a lot of money, but maybe you can find some food that you can afford with the little bit of change you still have in your pocket. A couple of cheese crackers or the peanut butter kind would go really good right about now.\n\nWhen you get to a spot that is almost directly behind it, you set your bag down in the grass off to the side of the tracks and\u2014taking just the jugs in hand\u2014set off across the field. As you approach the crumbling asphalt of the back parking lot, you see a water faucet next to the pay air hose. What luck! You rush over and\u2014after gulping down as much of the sweet liquid as you can\u2014fill both jugs to the brim. You lug them back across the parking lot to the knee-high grass and set them down before heading around to the front of the building.\n\nBefore going in, you pull the bread wrapper out of your pocket and sit on a yellow concrete curb to count out the change. You need to know how much you have before going inside. At long last, you decipher that there\u2019s eighty-six cents\u2014a small fortune. You still want to hold onto the dollar for a real emergency so you are only willing to spend the change. You\u2019ve got to be careful not to spend all of it, though. You might really need it later on.\n\nAs you step through the front door, you are blasted by frigid air. You\u2019d almost forgotten that such a thing even existed. Several pairs of eyes are on you, but you pretend not to notice.\n\n\u201cHis mother should be ashamed of herself. Letting a boy get so filthy,\u201d a woman with her face stretched back in a bun says to her friend who only nods in agreement.\n\nYou glance down at your hands and can\u2019t tell where the dirt ends and your skin begins. She\u2019s definitely right about how dirty you are, but if she were a nice person, she wouldn\u2019t have said it loud enough for you to hear. Maybe you should clean up before doing any shopping.\n\nYou walk up to the stocky woman behind the counter and quietly ask \u201cDo you have a bathroom?\u201d\n\nShe squints at you before saying \u201cSure do. It\u2019s right down that hall over there.\u201d\n\n\u201cThank you,\u201d you say, walking as quickly as you can so you can get out from under all the judgmental eyes.\n\nIt\u2019s a tiny little room with only a stainless steel toilet and sink. Above the sink is a cloudy mirror that reflects what little it has to and in the corner is a tall, skinny trash can with a flapper on top. You lock the door before stripping off you shirt and shorts so someone doesn\u2019t walk in on you. You do the best you can with wet paper towels and have to climb up on the sink to make sure you got everything off of your face and neck. After getting dressed, you sop up the floor as best you can. By the time you finally head back out the door, you are feeling fresh as the morning. The trash can, however, has seen better days.\n\nYou walk down each aisle slowly looking at what is offered. Too bad you don\u2019t have more money, because there is a lot of really good stuff you wouldn\u2019t mind having. You finally choose a big plain bag of tortilla chips that are marked \u201c3/$1\u201d. It\u2019s big enough that it should last you a good long while.\n\nThe cashier eyes you with a smirk as you count out thirty-four cents to her. You can\u2019t help grinning back at her every time you make eye contact.\n\n\u201cThank you, sir. Please come again,\u201d she says handing you back your bag of chips and giving you a wink.\n\nYou feel your face getting warm and you nod to her as you turn toward the door. You can\u2019t remember the last time you felt as relieved as you do now to get away from people. If it wouldn\u2019t seem suspicious, you would run.\n\nWrestling the two jugs while trying not to crush the bag of chips too much, you head back to the tracks and fetch your bag before continuing on your trek.\n\n\n\nYou come to a fork in the tracks and don\u2019t know which one brought you here. One continues on to the south and the other angles off into the distance in a more easterly direction and looks like it goes right through a distant town. If it\u2019s not just a mirage you might try hopping a train down there, but you aren\u2019t sure that it would be going the right way. Maybe there will be another town somewhere up ahead on the one stretching south.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue south", "result": "You\u2019ve been walking south on this line for several days now and haven\u2019t actually run into a single town. It might\u2019ve been better to wait for a train heading in this direction, but who could\u2019ve guessed that it would be so far between settlements. It was never like this back where you grew up.\n\nThe land has gradually shifted from short grass to barren and rocky with only patches here and there so you know you\u2019re getting close to where you were before taking this unfortunate detour. It\u2019s not as easy going as it has been so far and you find yourself taking more and more rest breaks. It\u2019s much easier traveling around dawn and then again at dusk so you\u2019ve been lying around and sometimes napping during midday and when it gets too dark to see snakes that might be in your path.\n\nYou\u2019ve eaten over half of your chips and drank most of your water. You\u2019ll need to find somewhere to replenish your supplies so you don\u2019t end up back in the sorry shape you were in a couple of days ago.\n\nSomewhere in the wee hours of the morning, you spot a mournful glow all by its lonesome out in the middle of nowhere some distance from the tracks. It takes a while for you to figure out that there is a house not too awful far from it, but it\u2019s hard to see since there are no lights on within. You decide to stroll on over to find out if it might be vacant, but catch a glimpse of a reflection about midway there. It looks like the windshield of a pickup. There\u2019s probably someone sleeping in the house.\n\nNot wanting a repeat of the last time you tried to sneak food away from a farmhouse, you walk around until you find a shelf of rock jutting out of the ground that\u2019s just the perfect height for surveilling the place. It isn\u2019t too long before the sky begins to gray with dawn, but you wait until the sun is full up and watch the house down below carefully from your perch on the rocky outcropping. After a few hours of biding your time, it happens.\n\nYou watch as the old pickup pulls out of the drive and turns onto the highway. It\u2019s far enough away that you can\u2019t make out the driver and the cloud of dust billowing up from it soon makes it impossible to even make out the vehicle itself.\n\nYou don\u2019t see a garden growing anywhere and the yard is nothing but sand and rocks. There is a rectangular patch of weeds up against the side fence and it seems like the only place anything is growing at all. You sling your bag over your shoulder and walk carefully across the barren field, and then right up to the house like you owned the place.\n\nYou try knocking at the front door in case someone might be inside, but no one comes. You try to open it without any success. You find that all the windows and the back door are locked up tight as well.\n\nYou notice a pipe sticking up near the weed patch with a bucket hanging upside down over it. Sure enough, you find a spigot hiding under that little devil. You fill up your jugs again and drink what you can before turning your attention back to the house.\n\nYou don\u2019t really want to smash a window, but you are getting desperate. You pick up large stone and draw your arm back when you spot something in the reflection of the glass you are about to break. It looks like a large wooden door laying at a slight angle on the ground behind you propped up by a short concrete wall. You know exactly what it is \u2014 a storm cellar, just like the one at your grandmother\u2019s house. With any luck, there\u2019ll be jars and jars of canned food just like she stores in hers because it is cooler down there and they won\u2019t go bad nearly as quickly.\n\nYou trot over to it and drop the bag. You hook your hands under and heave with all your strength. The one at Grandma\u2019s has a cable attached to a bunch of window weights strung through a pulley which makes it much easier to open and close. You have to lift the full weight of this one and it doesn\u2019t give easily.\n\nYou stand it up to more than a forty-five degree angle, but can\u2019t get it to go any further without risking falling down the hole underneath it. You try to flop it on over, but you can\u2019t give it enough push and you are already at a rather precarious angle, yourself. If you could fling it on over, you\u2019d probably wind up tumbling in head first.\n\nDesperately, you look around for anything that might help and you are about to let the door go when you see a shovel leaning against the wall at the bottom of the steps leading down. You inch your way over to the top and carefully reach down with one hand while the door threatens to buckle your other arm. You manage to snag the end of it and drag it up enough that it tips over at your feet just as your other arm tires out, but you save the door from falling down and pinning the shovel by catching hold with your free hand and letting it rest against your chest while you take a minute to catch your breath.\n\nYou pick up the shovel, jab it into the ground as best you can and lower the door onto the handle. There\u2019s just enough room for you to slip through and over the side.\n\nIt takes a minute for your eyes to adjust. There are shelves down here along one wall, but not a single jar on them. You are about to turn around when you notice that they aren\u2019t exactly empty and look a little lumpy so you go over to investigate.\n\nYou\u2019ve hit the jackpot! The shelves are covered in potatoes, onions and turnips\u2014more than you could ever hope to eat.\n\nMaking a couple of trips, you gently drop several handfuls out the door and then clamber out behind them. You stand up and dust yourself off before picking up your bag. You are just starting to drop the vegetables in when you hear a low growl off to the side.\n\nSlowly turning your head, you see the biggest hound you\u2019ve ever seen in your life. He comes up to your chest and is at least as long as you are tall. You stare back at one another and neither of you make a move. You are trapped!\n\nYou can try to stand here and hope he decides that you aren\u2019t a threat or you can try to come up with something else.", "action_results": [{"action": "Distract him", "result": "You look down at your bag and see the lone flipflop wedged in just inside the top beside the blanket. It gives you an idea. You\u2019re not sure it will work, but it\u2019s worth a shot.\n\nYou slowly reach in and\u2014being extremely careful not to make any sudden movements\u2014draw it out. You take a deep breath and hold it out in a trembling hand toward the massive beast. \u201cFetch?\u201d\n\nKeeping a wary eye on you, he leans forward and gives it a sniff before returning to his previous position. You can\u2019t tell one way or the other whether he\u2019s interested in it or not. Still, you have to give it a try.\n\nYou shake it lightly to get his attention. When his eyes leave you and train on it, you shake it more vigorously. You draw your arm back, snap it forward and just as you let go, you holler \u201cFetch!\u201d\n\nThe flipflop sails across the yard while both you and he just stand there watching it glide. It skips a couple of times before spinning to a stop.\n\nYou look back at the hound and he looks back at you. He doesn\u2019t appear to be even the slightest bit impressed.\n\nYou have no choice now but to stand here and hope that he finally decides that you are not a threat.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait him out", "result": "After waiting for an eternity for the dog to do something, he finally does. He turns, walks stiff-legged over to the back porch and groans softly as he plops down. He looks so old to you now that your fear has turned to pity.\n\nKeeping a wary eye on him, you start packing the vegetables into your bag. You hold out a turnip to eat on the way because you are half starving after all that hard work.\n\nYou don\u2019t want to overstay your welcome so as soon as you drop the last one in, you turn tail and head back the way you came toward the tracks.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019ve walked nearly a mile when you hear a strange sounding cough behind you. You whirl around only to find the hound several paces away. He stops and stares up at you.\n\n\u201cGo home,\u201d you command, but he only looks at you. \u201cGet!\u201d\n\nYou take a couple of steps backward and he takes a couple forward. You think about picking up a rock and chucking it at him, but he\u2019s as big as you are. If you made him mad, you wouldn\u2019t stand a chance. The best thing to do would be to ignore him and he\u2019ll head back home on his own when he\u2019s darn good and ready.\n\nOver the course of the day, you grow more and more comfortable around your new companion and when you stop for a rest you discover that embroidered in his faded collar are the words \u201cOl\u2019 Sam\u201d.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s nice to meet ya, Sam. I\u2019m Billy. I bet you\u2019re hungry.\u201d\n\nYou pull out a handful of chips for Sam and a turnip for yourself to munch on. He greedily wolfs them down. You\u2019re tempted to give him more, but you can\u2019t afford to since they\u2019re the only thing you have that will keep the longest and he\u2019ll probably leave soon anyway.\n\nWhen night comes and it gets too dark to see, you find a decent place to bed down and give Sam another handful of chips while you wash down an onion with lots and lots of water. You give Sam a drink in an old tin can that you found on the tracks earlier so he doesn\u2019t get too thirsty either.\n\nSam lays down alongside you and his body warmth is somehow comforting. You drift off to sleep more easily than you ever remember doing and don\u2019t stir even once in the night.\n\n\n\nThe sun is already peeking above the mountains when you wake. Even though you have kinks all over from sleeping on the ground, you feel absolutely wonderful. It\u2019s the first good nights sleep you\u2019ve had in a long, long time.\n\nAfter both of you have eaten lightly, you set off once again down the tracks. Sam isn\u2019t hanging back like he did yesterday. He walks right beside you\u2014matching you step for step. You try to take it easy on the old guy and stop for regular rest breaks, but you cover a lot more ground than usual. The day just seems to fly by and by the time night comes, you are completely worn out.\n\nYou start looking for a good spot to sleep when Sam suddenly stops and lets out a hair raising growl. You flinch instinctively and look down at him\u2014frozen in your tracks\u2014and see the hackles standing up from the top of his head to nearly the length of his back. He isn\u2019t looking at you so you follow his gaze and see something really big and tan colored crossing the tracks up ahead. It is long and has a tail that looks as long as its body. It takes you a moment to realize that it\u2019s a cat. A big cat.\n\nIt pauses and stares at you for a few moments while Sam\u2019s growls steadily grow in volume and pitch. Something about that thing clamps you down deep in the core and you can\u2019t move a single muscle. Your skin tingles and your muscles burn. Then all at once the cat shoots off like a rifle shot across the field toward the mountains in tremendous leaps until it finally fades into the background.\n\nYour legs let go and you crumple right where you stand. All your strength has evaporated and you feel cold chills running all through your body. It\u2019s a good thing Sam was here with you or that thing might\u2019ve decided you were dinner. You throw your arms around his neck and squeeze with what little you have left in you. He just stands there looking in the direction the great cat ran and doesn\u2019t move.\n\nWhen you find a spot and settle in for the night, you give Sam a double helping of tortilla chips. He finally eats the last one, but doesn\u2019t seem quite as interested in them as he did last night. You wish that you had something else you could give him, but he wouldn\u2019t like the raw vegetables nearly as much. The next time you see a gas station or store, you\u2019re going to buy him something with meat in it.\n\nYou lie down like you did last night and he stretches out against you just as he did before. You feel warm and safe and once again you sleep right straight on through.\n\n\n\nMorning comes early and as you lie there stretching the kinks out, you notice that Sam isn\u2019t there. You sit up and call \u201cSam?\u201d and don\u2019t hear anything.\n\nYou jump up and look all around as far as you can see and still there is nothing. \u201cSam!\u201d Your ears prickle as you start to think the worst. You quickly shove those thoughts aside and jump to your feet.\n\nYou run up on the higher ground of the tracks and look all around. You finally spot him way back up the tracks walking back the way you came. \u201cSam!\u201d He pauses for a moment without turning around and then continues on his way. You want to run after him, but that would only make it worse. He\u2019s been gone from his home too long already and just needs to go back. You watch him until he\u2019s little more than a speck before returning to collect your gear.\n\nYou\u2019re more wary as you go now. Your senses seem heightened and for the first time on this trip you feel more like a wild animal than a person. Your eyes are in a perpetual squint and are constantly sweeping over the terrain from one side to the other. Every far off movement of a bird or hare doesn\u2019t escape your notice and you feel more alive and in tune with the world around you than ever before. With the long nights returns the restlessness and you resume the catnaps during midday.\n\nWhere the track you\u2019ve been following veers alongside another, you peer down the slope at the great train yard you\u2019d left days ago. You\u2019ve finally made it back and can continue on with your journey into the west.\n\n\n\nYou find a garden hose curled up on the side of the first house you come upon and there\u2019s no one in sight. You refill your water jugs and take off before someone spots you. You\u2019re well stocked up again for a while at least.\n\n\n\nThe train yard looks so different in the light of day. There are so many things going on and machinery loading and unloading the cars that you are a bit afraid to try to make your way through. You\u2019ll either have to bite the bullet or else skirt around it and hopefully find another opportunity somewhere down the line.", "action_results": [{"action": "Watch for an opportunity", "result": "You decide that the best option would be to hide under the overpass up near the end where it meets the incline. There\u2019s a shelf that would offer you a nice vantage point to get the lay of the land. Taking your sweet time, you make your way over to it and then when you figure that the coast is as clear as it\u2019s ever going to get you skedaddle your butt up the slope as fast as your legs will carry you.\n\nAs you hike a leg over the short barricade, you smell cigarette smoke and hear a cough from not too far away.\n\n\u201cWell, well. What do we have here?\u201d\n\nYou look up to see two slightly older boys looking down at you from one of the cubby holes up top. They hop down and stride up to you just as you pull your other leg over. Each one is at least a full head taller than you.\n\n\u201cWhat have you got there?\u201d asks the heavier of the two, ripping your bag away from you.\n\n\u201cGive that back!\u201d\n\n\u201cOr what, little man?\u201d\n\n\u201cOr he\u2019ll kick your ass!\u201d cries the other kid, laughing.\n\nYou lunge forward and attempt to wring the bag from him, but he gives it a yank and you lose your grip and go sprawling.\n\nHe starts pulling things out and pitching them to the side. \u201cWhat\u2019s this?\u201d He pulls out the treasure chest, drops the bag, and holds it up to his ear, shaking it as he and the other kid turn their backs you.\n\n\u201cNooo!\u201d you roar, \u201cThat\u2019s Jane\u2019s! You can\u2019t have it!\u201d, leaping onto the kids back and grabbing his face with both hands\u2014his ear with one hand and the inside of his cheek with the other. Your legs instinctively grapple him around the middle while you heave back with both hands in violent jerks.\n\n\u201cAaa-aaa-aah!\u201d He tries to shake you off, but you have a death grip on him. There\u2019s no way he can get loose without getting his ear and cheek torn off, and his friend sure isn\u2019t stepping in to help. In fact, his friend looks terrified and confused and has taken a couple steps to the rear in wide-eyed panic.\n\n\u201cYOU CAN\u2019T HAVE THAT! IT\u2019S NOT YOURS!\u201d you shriek just before you clamp down on the side of his neck with your teeth.\n\nHe screams bloody murder, dropping the treasure chest and strewing its contents, and starts raking at you with both hands. \u201cGet him off! Get him off!\u201d\n\nThe other kid swings over the side of the barricade and drops out of sight.\n\nA warm trickle runs down your chin as you clamp down harder and sink your teeth deeper and deeper while you\u2019re flailing back and forth trying to rip his face open with your bare hands.\n\nHis screams turn to sobbing shrieks as he pounds in futility over his shoulder at you. He stumbles toward the barricade and just as he\u2019s about to go over you shove back with your feet, sending him tumbling over and down the slope. You land flat of your back, but jump right back to your feet in case he decides to come back for you.\n\nThe other kid is standing at bottom of the slope with eyes the size of goose eggs and looking like a deer caught in the cross-hairs. He rushes over and helps the kid with the bloody neck to his feet and they rush off across the tracks and toward the houses on the far side of the street.\n\n\u201cYOU CAN\u2019T HAVE IT! IT\u2019S NOT YOURS! IT\u2019S JANE\u2019S!\u201d you scream down at them at the top of your lungs, letting the foamy spit in your mouth fly and run out however it feels like.\n\nThey don\u2019t look back.\n\nThe tiny hairs on the back of your neck and partway up your scalp still bristle and your heartbeat still pounds alternating white and dark patches in your vision. You take in deep lungfuls of air and let them out slowly to try to settle down. It helps some, but only slightly.\n\nYou can\u2019t stay here. You have to go before someone comes back to look for you. You start picking things up and cramming them into your bag as fast and as best you can.\n\nYou crawl back over the barricade, dash up the hill on the far side of the overpass and follow the high chain link fence that separates the highway from everything else. Then, when you think you\u2019ve gone plenty far enough, you head off at an angle back toward the tracks\u2014aiming for much farther down.", "action_results": [{"action": "Flight", "result": "Even though it\u2019s risky with all the men down there, you decide to go ahead and chance it. You can\u2019t wait around here in case the boys come back with the cops.\n\nYou creep down behind a short row of buildings and look for a train aimed toward the west. There aren\u2019t any really close by, but there are a couple not too far away. They\u2019re mostly long strings of hoppers and in a few places there are sections of flatcars. All the boxcars seem to be locked up good and tight.\n\nYou\u2019re still trying to find just the right one when a large hand clamps down on your shoulder and whirls you around.\n\n\u201cYou shouldn\u2019t be back here, boy,\u201d booms a deep gravelly voice.\n\nYou are staring into a drawn face covered by a dark beard with gray streaks down each side. Besides the withered face, he fills out his overalls with a body three sizes too big and could quite possibly be just as thick from front to back as he is tall.\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s see if we can\u2019t figure out who you belong to.\u201d\n\nDespite your resistance, he propels you along in his meaty grip and it feels like your feet only touch the ground every second or third step. You manage to hang onto your stuff, but only barely.\n\nHe leads you through the door of one of the guard houses and says to the guy in uniform \u201cI caught this kid prowling around out there. Do something with him, would ya?\u201d, shoving you forward. Without waiting for an answer, he revolves around on his heels and steps back through the door.\n\n\n\n\u201cWe\u2019ve found a young kid playing in the yard and need someone to come pick him up,\u201d says the guard to someone on the telephone. \u201cI don\u2019t know. Never seen him before. Okay, I\u2019ll keep an eye on him until he gets here. Bye.\u201d\n\nHe hangs up the phone and turns toward you. \u201cYou got a name, kid?\u201d\n\nYou just stare back at him. There\u2019s no way you\u2019re going to tell him anything.\n\n\u201cOkay\u2026 It might be a while, you want a soda or something?\u201d\n\nYou just stand there with as blank an expression as you can muster even though you are stewing inside.\n\n\n\nIt isn\u2019t long before an officer arrives and hauls you down to the police station where you\u2019re forced to wait until they finally figure out who you are and where your home is. It takes them several hours and all the while you\u2019re watching for any opportunity to escape that never presents its self.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019re led to an unmarked patrol car and\u2014after the officer in a business suit places your bag in the trunk\u2014ushered into the passenger seat. \u201cClimb in and make yourself comfortable, it\u2019s going to be a long ride.\u201d\n\nYou reluctantly climb in and he closes the door behind you. After he slides the key into the ignition he says \u201cYou can call me Jim, by the way. If you need anything, just say so.\u201d\n\nHe starts the engine and backs out of the parking space. You\u2019re just pulling out onto the street when you finally can\u2019t hold it in any longer. You already suspect what the answer will be, but have to give it a shot anyhow.\n\n\u201cI need to go to the Grand Canyon. It\u2019s real important. Can you take me there before you take me home?\u201d\n\nHe looks over at you and perks an eyebrow. \u201cIs that where you were headed? I must say that you made it farther away from home than anyone would\u2019ve guessed. Why is it so important?\u201d\n\n\u201cI have to go there for Jane. She died and never got to see it.\u201d\n\nYou see him swallow a huge lump in his throat. It takes him well over a minute before he can speak again. \u201cI heard about your little friend from the officer I spoke to from back in your home town. He didn\u2019t know whether you\u2019d just run off or if something bad had happened to you. The whole town\u2019s been combing the entire countryside for you.\u201d After wiping his eye with the back of his wrist, he brings his palm down hard against the steering wheel. And then he pounds it hard a couple more times. \u201cI wish I could, son. I really do. But, that\u2019s nearly a whole state away in the wrong direction and they already know we\u2019re on our way.\u201d\n\nYou lean back against the seat and stare out the side window. You\u2019ve come too far to be turned back now. All of your stuff is locked in the trunk so you have little choice but to sit here and accept your fate. The mile markers on the highway click by like the incessant ticking of a metronome arm.\n\nIt\u2019s hopeless. It\u2019s all over.", "action_results": [{"action": "Escape", "result": "You can\u2019t go back. You just can\u2019t. You will not be put through that again. You have to do something\u2014anything. You reach down and pull the door handle and shove the door out with your foot.\n\n\u201cWhat are you doing?! Stop that!\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not going back and you can\u2019t make me!\u201d\n\nHe grabs a handful of your shirt, but you\u2019re not about to let that stop you. You strain with every ounce of your being and feel the fabric slowly begin to tear down from the neck. All at once it lets go and you leap from the door.\n\nYou soar through the air and it feels like you\u2019re flying. You\u2019ve never felt so free before in all your life as you do right in this moment. This must be what birds feel like.\n\nThe wind pushes back hard against you and you start to go down. You see it coming and there\u2019s nothing at all that you can do to stop it. You hit the pavement just as you hear the brakes squeal on the car. The world tumbles over and over and you feel your bones exploding inside your flesh. Your skin burns briefly, but goes numb almost instantly. You try to suck in air and can\u2019t.\n\nWhen you finally come to a stop, you hear hard leather soles clapping the asphalt and getting louder and louder as they approach.\n\n\u201cOh my God! Oh my God! What did you do?!\u201d\n\nYou see the horror slowly stretch its way across Officer Jim\u2019s face. And you see Jane standing right there beside him\u2014smiling and beckoning to you. Those bright green eyes are the last thing you see in this world.\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Accept your fate", "result": "You have no choice but to accept your fate. If when you get back and if you manage to survive, you will try again. It might not be for a long, long time because you will be watched like a hawk\u2014provided your mom doesn\u2019t kill you this time around as soon as there\u2019s no one around to see.\n\nThe landscape flows by in a constantly changing sea. You barely pick at the food that is given to you. You just don\u2019t feel eating.\n\nDays turn into nights and nights turn into days. You get your own bed in motels where Officer Jim stops each night\u2014which would be exciting any other time, but not now. Now, everything feels like it has a dark cloud hanging over it.\n\nIt only takes two days to get home, but it feels like an eternity. And in all that time you don\u2019t utter even one syllable. You just have to get this over with.\n\nI\u2019m sorry, Jane. I failed you this time, but I will try again if I can. I promise you.\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Go around", "result": "It wasn\u2019t worth the risk to you so you head around the yard and make your way toward where the tracks resume. By the time a train leaves the yard, you find that it is moving much too fast for you to board it so you set off once again down the tracks on foot.\n\nEvery couple of hours you have to ditch the tracks and hide behind a boulder or in a shallow ravine until a train passes. This is the busiest set of tracks that you\u2019ve been on and if anyone spotted someone your age out here alone they would certainly report it.\n\nYou have to take a break so you find a nice clear spot away from the tracks to kick back in and lean back on the bag. You have a sudden urge to pull out the card Jane made for you and look at the old postcards while you rest. You trace each line drawn in crayon on the page with your finger and think back to those few magical days. It seems like so long ago now. A lot has happened and every day that has passed seems to have steadily grown worse than the last. After you do this one thing, you should find someone nice to live with like Jane dreamed of. Surely there\u2019s someone out there that would love and take care of you, someone you can depend on. You carefully refold the letter and slip it into your pocket and put everything else back into the treasure chest before giving your eyes a rest.\n\nYou don\u2019t even notice when you start to drift off, but you are rudely awakened by a brutal gust and find that a strong wind has kicked up. The dust and sand scour your face and you can barely breathe even with your shirt pulled up over your face. You stagger around trying to find some kind of shelter behind a rock or something, but there doesn\u2019t seem to be anything nearby and you probably wouldn\u2019t be able to see one anyway unless you were right on top of it.\n\nYour foot suddenly finds nothing but open air and you tumble headlong down a steep embankment. Your bag disappears as it goes one way and you go another. And then the world slips away into blackness.\n\n\n\nYou wake to find your arm twisted under you\u2014your shoulder screaming out in agony. You have scrapes and tiny cuts from the side of your face all the way down your legs. It takes a couple attempts before you\u2019re able to roll over and sit up.\n\nYou push yourself to your feet and look up at the steep incline that you fell down and don\u2019t think you\u2019d be able to climb back up there even if your arm wasn\u2019t throbbing like it is. You can see the coat caught on a rock protruding from the ground near the top. One of the plastic jugs tied to the sleeves is crushed and the other one looks like it just exploded when it slammed into the ground. You don\u2019t see your bag anywhere.\n\nYou pace back and forth along the base of the cliff looking for any trace of your stuff and finally have no choice but to give up. You head down the wash and hope that it doesn\u2019t dead end.\n\nThe feeling finally comes back in your arm. You can move it, but not without pain and there\u2019s a huge black and green bruise that goes from your shoulder to half way across your chest.\n\nThe wash spills you out on the edge of a two-lane highway and there isn\u2019t a car or a sign or anything at all except brushy desert and rocks for as far as you can see. The train tracks must be somewhere beyond the ridge behind you, but you\u2019d never be able to get back to them that way. You look up at the sun and figure that you might as well keep following it since it has already led you this far.\n\nYou close your eyes, take a deep breath and then set off down the road.\n\n\n\nYou\u2019ve been walking for hours when a car pulls out onto the blacktop from a gas station up ahead that you didn\u2019t even know was there. The hot blazing sun reflecting off the pavement has made you half blind and has given you such a raging thirst that it feels like no amount of water could ever hope to quench. You don\u2019t know if you\u2019ll even be able to make it as far as the gas station.\n\nYou\u2019re torn between whether or not to flag the car down when it gets close or to find somewhere to hide until it passes by.", "action_results": [{"action": "Flag down the car", "result": "You stagger up to the edge of the road and raise your hands. The car slows down for a moment as the rear passenger window rolls down. As it gets nearly even with you, a bottle flies out and hits the pavement halfway to your feet. You don\u2019t have the strength or energy to jump to the side so you can only stand there and watch as it bounces off the asphalt and hits you dead center in the chest before you can react.\n\nThe pain is so sudden and intense that the wind is knocked completely out of you. Your face feels like it swells to nearly twice its size and burns all the way to your ears. You slump and fall to your knees.\n\nThe car screeches to a stop and the driver\u2019s door opens. \u201cWhy in the hell would you do that to a kid?! I oughtta kick your ass. You could\u2019ve killed him, you know that?\u201d\n\nYou gasp for breath and can\u2019t take in any air. You want to cry due to the immense pain, but your eyes are so dry that they can no longer produce tears. Your vision starts to waver and you fall forward. Just before you eat the blacktop, you feel hands grab you and swing you back into a seated position.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s okay. I\u2019m here to help. He was just being a dumbass and didn\u2019t know that he might actually hit you.\u201d\n\nYou wheeze and can feel your lungs slowly start to fill with air. Your vision is still fuzzing in and out, but it\u2019s slowly beginning to clear.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s your name?\u201d asks the teenage boy with closely cropped hair.\n\nYou rock back and forth trying to help force more air into your lungs, and only wheeze louder in answer to his question. You look around to see several more teenagers standing around you.\n\n\u201cTake it easy, man. Don\u2019t try to rush it. I\u2019m not going anywhere.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re not sure you want to tell them your real name. After all, one of them just tried to kill you. Maybe it was an accident and maybe it wasn\u2019t. You try to think of a name\u2014any name\u2014and a sudden image of little Timmy that lived down the street from you before your parents got a divorce pops into your head. You remember how he used to say his name and before you can correct it, out comes \u201cTim-O-tee.\u201d You take a deep breath and try hard not to laugh or even smile. \u201cTimothy. My name is Timothy.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat are you doing out here all by yourself, Timothy?\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019m lost. I don\u2019t know where this is.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhere do you live? We\u2019ll take you home,\u201d says a slightly gruffer voice off to the side.\n\nYou shrug as you try to come up with something to tell them. You look around, trying to come up with a story they might believe and your eyes settle on a far-off vertical rock piercing up through desert floor. \u201cA long, long ways from here. I was s\u2019posed to stay by the camper, but I wanted to look at the rocks.\u201d\n\nOne of the boys sucks air in through his teeth.\n\n\u201cThat wasn\u2019t very smart. Kids get lost out here all the time and die,\u201d says the one crouched down by you. \u201cWhere were you going? Maybe we can find your parents or get you to someone who can.\u201d\n\nIf they take you to the cops, you\u2019ll never make it to the Grand Canyon. You have to change the subject. \u201cI\u2019m so thirsty. I need water.\u201d\n\nThe boy reaches up and snatches a bottle from one of the others and says \u201cHere, drink this. We\u2019ll get you some water.\u201d\n\nYou tip the over half full bottle and guzzle the orange soda down without stopping. It burns like fire and doesn\u2019t help even a little, but it\u2019s wet and wet is better than nothing.\n\n\u201cWe\u2019ve gotta get back. We can\u2019t take him with us,\u201d says another boy under his breath.\n\n\u201cWe\u2019re not leaving him out here, alone,\u201d snaps the one you\u2019ve been talking to, \u201cNot here!\u201d\n\n\u201cThere\u2019s a gas station right there! It\u2019s not like he\u2019s lost out in the middle of the desert.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe can\u2019t go driving all over the country looking for his folks,\u201d says another.\n\n\u201cYou shoulda thought of that before you chucked that bottle him!\u201d he hisses up at the boy with slicked back hair\u2014who just pivots around on his heels and stalks back to the car. Turning back to you, he says \u201cC\u2019mon. We\u2019ll go find a phone or something,\u201d picking you to your feet and helping you to the car.\n\n\n\nYou hang back as the boys head into the gas station. If they call the police, they\u2019ll take you home and you\u2019ll never get to the Grand Canyon for Jane.\n\nAs soon as the door swings shut, you dash to the end of the building and swing around the corner toward the back. There is a stack of oil drums at the base of the hill out back and you run in behind them. You hope this will be enough because there is no other cover close by that you can see.\n\nYou squeeze into a hole between two of the drums that are resting on the ground and wait. It isn\u2019t long before you hear them talking from not too far away from your hiding spot.\n\n\u201cWhere could he have got to?\u201d asks the boy that\u2019s been trying to help you.\n\n\u201cI dunno. He just ran off, I guess. Maybe we just imagined the whole thing.\u201d\n\n\u201cMaybe he\u2019s a spook and just went invisible,\u201d laughs a third.\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t be a moron,\u201d says the first, \u201cHe\u2019s just scared.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe can\u2019t go traipsing all over the desert looking for him. When he gets tired, he\u2019ll come back. We\u2019re already gonna be late as it is.\u201d\n\n\u201cI guess. I just wanted to help the kid out, is all.\u201d\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s just go before we get into trouble, ourselves.\u201d\n\nYou hear the car engine start and gravel raining down in their wake before you poke your head out. You can\u2019t risk going inside because they probably already told whoever is in there about you and the police might still show up.\n\nYou spot a coiled hose on the ground by the corner of the building that you must\u2019ve run right by without even seeing. It\u2019s just what you need. You trot over and reach for the faucet, but the handle has been removed. You study it a minute before picking up the hose a little at a time\u2014working the contents out to the end\u2014and manage to get a good mouthful of scalding hot water. You fight the pain and as soon as it\u2019s cooled enough, you choke it down.\n\nYou can\u2019t go any further in this heat so you look for any kind of shade to get out of this blistering sun. You spot a low-lying rock a little ways up the hillside behind the building and judging by its angle it might offer some shelter from the sun. You drag yourself over to it.\n\nIt looks like it would be the perfect place for a den of snakes, but peering under the shelf you see no sign of anything. You wedge yourself underneath where you\u2019ll wait for nightfall before heading off again.\n\n\n\nYou open your eyes to find that you are shivering. The temperature has dropped considerably. If you don\u2019t end up freezing, it\u2019ll at least be a welcome relief compared to that awful sun.\n\nAfter pulling yourself out, you stand and slink down the hill. Your feet are like bricks, but you have no other choice other than to go on.\n\nThe gas station parking lot is deserted except for a run-down old pickup truck loaded down with all kinds of junk and covered with a tarp. It\u2019s parked in the shade of the pump lights around the corner of the building and you have to walk around it to get to the highway.\n\nAs you pass by it, its yellow license plate catches your eye. It says Arizona in green letters across the top and Grand Canyon State on the bottom.\n\nYou peek around the corner of the building and see an old hunched over Indian man with a pony tail halfway down his back stepping up to the cash register.\n\nThis could be your lucky break. You could try asking him for a ride, but what if he says no? Maybe hiding under the junk in the back and hope for the best would be smarter way to go. It won\u2019t be long before he\u2019s heading this way so you\u2019d better hurry and make up you mind.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask for a ride", "result": "You lean against the corner of the building to wait for the old man to step out and when he finally does, you rush over to meet him just as he reaches the corner. Even though he\u2019s walking crooked, he\u2019s still manages to jump back like a cat about to be stepped on.\n\n\u201cCan you take me to Arizona?\u201d\n\nHe cuts his eyes around the dark parking lot. \u201cNo.\u201d He starts walking toward his truck.\n\n\u201cPlease? I need to go to the Grand Canyon.\u201d\n\n\u201cNo.\u201d\n\n\u201cCan you take me to the railroad tracks? I can walk the rest of the way.\u201d\n\n\u201cNo.\u201d He opens the door and climbs in.\n\n\u201cCan you take me to the next town, then? I gotta find a new map \u2018cause I lost my all my stuff.\u201d\n\n\u201cNo.\u201d\n\n\u201cDo you have any water?\u201d\n\nHe pulls the door shut, starts his truck and pulls it in gear.\n\nYou watch as he backs up and then drives off into the night. By the pump lights, you can see the trail of dust he left in his wake. Maybe you scared him or maybe that\u2019s just the way he is. It doesn\u2019t matter now.\n\nYou look around at the door to the gas station. There\u2019s no way you can go in there. You\u2019ll have to think of something else.\n\nMaybe you can climb up the ridge behind the station and from there you might be able to see the tracks. It\u2019s dark enough that you wouldn\u2019t be able to see them until morning\u2014which means that you\u2019ll have to find a place to sleep for the night. You could keep going down the highway and maybe figure something out along the way. You don\u2019t have any water so you\u2019ll have to walk only at night and find cool places to sleep during the day. Whichever way you go, perhaps you\u2019ll run into another farmhouse along the way to get more stuff.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the road", "result": "You can probably make more miles on the highway than you could climbing the mountains and crossing the desert. Surely you\u2019ll run into railroad tracks sooner or later. There are probably more houses along the road, too.\n\nYou head around behind the gas station to stay out of the light and then make your way to the blacktop. There are no yard lights within sight, but you\u2019ll probably see one before too long. You just have to make as many miles as you can while it\u2019s still dark.\n\nYou can still feel the heat of the day leeching out of the asphalt and the occasional slight breeze feels good against your clammy skin. Your mouth is dry, but you can probably manage to make it through the night since it isn\u2019t really all that bad right now. You should make it just fine.\n\nYou watch a shooting star that traverses nearly the whole western sky before burning itself out far to the south. Your wish is the same as you\u2019ve had from the very beginning\u2014to make Jane\u2019s dream come true. It isn\u2019t until a little while later that you start kicking yourself for not tacking a little water onto that wish. Oh, well. Surely you\u2019ll find some before long.\n\nEven though there are no landmarks to go by, you somehow know that you\u2019ve covered many a mile. There\u2019s a blacker circle in the sky that looks like it might be a moon in a day or two. Until then, you\u2019ll just have to make your way as best you can in the dark.\n\nThe night has somehow become a comforting friend instead of the dreaded enemy you once feared. You don\u2019t even know how it happened. It just\u2014all of a sudden\u2014did.\n\nMile after mile and you don\u2019t see much more than a vague dark shape every now and then out some distance from the side of the road. They would\u2019ve been monsters lurking and ready to pounce only a few short weeks ago. Now, they\u2019re just big rocks.", "action_results": [{"action": "Migration", "result": "In the lights of an oncoming car, the highway looks like it has little rippling waves on it. They\u2019re flowing from one side of the blacktop to the other. This must be some kind of dream, but you don\u2019t remember falling asleep.\n\nAs the car gets closer, you can see that they aren\u2019t waves at all. They\u2019re snakes! Dozens of snakes. They move weird, though, throwing a loop and dragging themselves up to it before doing the whole process all over again.\n\nSnakes don\u2019t move like that. They slide along on their bellies as they slither along. This has to be a dream. Still, you wouldn\u2019t want to be bitten by a dream snake any more than you would a real one so you try not to let them get too close.\n\nYou look up and the headlights flash in your eyes. You can\u2019t see anything. You don\u2019t know whether to get off the road or just keep going. It is a car, though. You\u2019d better at least get off the road so you take a step sideways.\n\nZzzht-zzzht-zzzht!\n\nYou know that sound! And it\u2019s much too close! You leap backward, but\u2014whap!\u2014it\u2019s too late. Your leg is on fire!\n\n\u201cAaaah!\u201d You fall sideways and\u2014whap!\u2014another hits your arm. Whap! Whap! Whap! You\u2019re being struck from all sides now. Your arms, your legs, your face. Even the top of your head.\n\nThe headlights are on you now and you hear the brakes squeal to a slow stop. Your whole body feels like you\u2019ve fallen into a campfire and you can\u2019t pull yourself out. Your body starts to quake and you\u2019re helpless to stop it.\n\n\u201cOh my God in heaven!\u201d shrieks a woman getting out of the car. \u201cIt\u2019s a kid and he\u2019s been snake bit!\u201d\n\nYour tongue grows two sizes and wedges tight in your throat. You can\u2019t breathe and you feel like you might pop from the building pressure. Even counting the beating you got from Mom, you\u2019ve never felt such intense pain. It crashes through your body like a tidal wave.\n\nThe headlights waver and grow steadily brighter and brighter until they fill your entire field of view. In the intense light, you can see Jane standing there looking down at you. She\u2019s shaking her head. She reaches down and takes your hand\u2014cupping it in hers. The only thing you can see now is her face against the blinding white light.\n\nThe burning sensation swallows you whole.\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Climb the ridge", "result": "It would probably be best not to walk along the highway where a cop might see you. You\u2019ve come a long way and you don\u2019t want to be taken home when you\u2019re so close you can almost taste it.\n\nYou head back around the building and plunge into the darkness. The sky overhead is crowded with stars, but since there is no moon out tonight they offer very little light to see your way by. You\u2019ll have to take it slow and easy so you don\u2019t step into a hole or trip over something in the dark.\n\nYou take small steps. With each one the ground seems to get steeper and steeper until you finally have to crawl on your hands and knees to keep from sliding back down the hill. It would probably be much easier in the daytime, but it would be a lot hotter and you would need water.\n\nThe ground becomes rocky and some of the stones are so big that you have to go around them. You keep working your way toward higher and higher ground until you run into a cliff that you can\u2019t climb, then you follow along its base. Every now and then, your foot dislodges a rock and you listen as it gets fainter and fainter until it finally tumbles out of earshot.\n\nAt long last, the cliff starts to fall away and the ground begins to slope around it. You keep going until you find a crevasse that leads right up through the middle of it. It\u2019s probably the only way through so you heft yourself into it and it\u2019s just like climbing stairs in the dark. You keep going up and up and up until you reach the top and the stars seem to hover right straight in front of you.\n\nYou can\u2019t see the ground on the other side and you sure don\u2019t want to plummet off a cliff so you make yourself as comfortable as you can and wedge yourself in for the night. You pull your knees up and fold your arms against the cold. You close your eyes to try to sleep your way to morning. Maybe then you will be able to see whether you can climb down the other side or if you\u2019ll just have to turn around and find some other way.\n\n\n\nThe sky starts to brighten a dingy dishwater gray. You couldn\u2019t sleep at all last night thanks to the cold. That\u2019s fine, though, you can find a nice shady spot and sleep through the sun. First things first, though, you have to get off this mountain.\n\nYou stretch your stiff legs out from under you and pull yourself up with the wooden clubs that are your arms. Through the gap in the rocks, you can see a narrow, winding rock shelf snaking its way around the far side of the rocks. You can\u2019t see where it ends, but it beats going back down and all the way around.\n\nOut across the valley, you can see a gray line at the base of the far away cliffs. It must be the tracks. It\u2019s a long ways away. The sun will be up before too long and you\u2019ll have to find a place to sleep in a few hours so you\u2019d better get moving.\n\nYou wriggle your way over the top of the rocks and stretch out your toes until you can feel the ledge beneath them. It\u2019s a little wider than your shoes are long so it shouldn\u2019t be all that hard to stay on.\n\nTaking small steps and crowding the rock face as best you can, you slowly make your way down and down. It\u2019s actually easier than it looked from the top.\n\nThe sun spills its rays over the far horizon and they blanket you in their warmth. Your stiff muscles melt away. You can see farther now and the rocky ledge spreads out onto a slope several dozen yards away. You\u2019re going to make it just fine.\n\nYou look down to see just how much farther you have to go and it grabs you. Everything looks so tiny down there. The world sways\u2014first one way and then the other\u2014and your legs no longer want to move. You clutch the rock face with all your strength and take tiny breaths so you don\u2019t accidentally push yourself backward off the ledge. You\u2019re legs start shaking and your palms get all sweaty.\n\nYou close your eyes and feel the blood racing in your veins. You know you have to keep going, but how? If you fall off, it would take a long, long time to reach the bottom. You might not even pass out and feel the whole thing when you splat!\n\nDon\u2019t be such a fraidy cat.\n\nShe\u2019s right. You can do this. You snap your eyes open and start the tiny sideways steps again. It doesn\u2019t take long for you to reach the rocky slope. From there, you memorize the mountain peak you need to walk toward to get to that gray line and then set out to make it as far as you can before the sun gets too high.\n\nYou\u2019ve covered quite a bit of ground when you find several big boulders in a roughly circular formation and sit beneath the largest one for its shade. You manage to nap quite nicely until the sun gets far enough to the west that you have to move to a different shady spot.\n\nWhen the sun has dipped more than halfway behind the horizon, you set out to make as many miles as you can before it gets too dark to see. You feel weak from hunger and from lack of water, but your will pushes you on.\n\nAbout halfway through the night, you look up to see a tiny sliver of moon directly overhead. It\u2019s no wonder that you\u2019ve been able to keep going this long. Even with that tiny bit of light, you can see the ground quite clearly. The faint shadows contrast against the background and your eyes seem to have adjusted themselves to the lack of light.\n\nIt\u2019s warmer down here than it was last night, but the air still has that certain crispness to it. You haven\u2019t been able to see the mountain peak for hours, but are confident that you haven\u2019t strayed too much from your intended goal. You just keep pushing yourself. You are going to make it. You have no other choice.\n\nYou continue on. You\u2019ve been walking for hours and you feel like your legs are about to fall off. If you don\u2019t just collapse, that is. But, you must keep going. There will be time to rest tomorrow\u2014when it is too hot.\n\nThe stars and the moon flow gently to the west, but you don\u2019t even notice. You are too focused on putting one foot in front of the other.\n\nSuddenly, you see a straight black double line running perpendicular to your path. It looks like it might be the edge of a cliff so you approach it ever so slowly. When you\u2019re nearly upon it, you discover that it is higher than the rest of the ground around it.\n\nIt\u2019s the tracks! You\u2019ve found them! You really found them! They weren\u2019t nearly as far away as they looked. You feel great! You are KING!\n\nYou turn toward the west\u2014nearly skipping\u2014and continue on your journey. Now all you have to do is find some water and some food, then you\u2019ll be all set.\n\nYou watch as the sliver of moon finally disappears behind the black horizon and the stars start to twinkle just a tiny bit brighter. You can barely make out the rails on either side of you, but there\u2019s still more than enough light to guide you.\n\nYou trudge on and on in the darkness. It feels somehow comforting to you now. Like you might be the only person in the whole world. The cloak of night is your friend, your companion.\n\nAs the sky starts to gray, you can see farther and farther with each passing minute. There are no yard lights. No houses. No distant towns. No nothing. You feel completely alone now. It gives you a lump in your throat.\n\nThe sun is on your back now and you can feel its rays trickling warmth into your rigid skin. You can\u2019t turn around to look at it. You have to save every last bit of your strength. You can barely lift your legs and the toes of your shoes scrub furrows in the dust. Still, you plod on.\n\nWhen you\u2019ve nearly caught up with your shadow, you scan the area for some cool shade. You see a pile of old lumber out all by its lonesome. It may have been some kind of mining shack at one time, but it\u2019s impossible to tell. It\u2019s the only thing within sight and the two vertical boards won\u2019t offer any shade for hours yet, but you can\u2019t go on. You have to get off your feet so that means you have work to do.\n\nYou stumble over and start dragging and prying boards from the ground as best you can. It takes some doing since half of them are buried in sand. You are just pulling up the last one when you see something shiny under it. You drop the board as you jump back thinking at first that it might be a snake. It couldn\u2019t be, though, it didn\u2019t even resemble anything that could even be alive.\n\nSticking another board under the one you dropped so you don\u2019t have to stick your bare hand in there, you pry it up. It takes a moment for the sun\u2019s glare to clear from your eyes and then you see a magical treasure. It is a half-crushed tin cup that is about a third full of old water. It is dark and has a funny smell to it, but it\u2019s wet. You aren\u2019t sure that you should drink it, but you might die if you don\u2019t get water soon.", "action_results": [{"action": "Drink it", "result": "This is life or death. You have no choice but to risk drinking it. You hold your nose against the foul stench and gulp it down. It isn\u2019t really that bad and sure beats dying.\n\nYou go back to work and before long, you have something that resembles something that someone might accidentally mistake for a shack. It\u2019s more of a lean-to than anything, but at least there\u2019s shade.\n\nYou get down on all fours and crawl through a narrow opening at the bottom. The ground is still hot and could possibly blister if you dally. Once inside, you scoop handful after handful off the top and shove it against the sides at the bottom. It\u2019ll help hold them up as well as give you a faintly cooler spot to lay down.\n\nSlumping over, something bites your little finger. It stings a little, but nothing serious. You push yourself back up and see a tiny scorpion right where your hand was so you slam your fist down on it and crush it before it can strike again. You don\u2019t see any others, so you lay down and look at the white sky through the cracks for a while to make yourself sleepy.\n\n\n\nYou awake with a shiver and barely have the strength to raise yourself up. The sun is still high and your hand is throbbing something awful, but you barely notice that pain compared to the vise that has seized your stomach. Your belly writhes and tumbles in searing agony and besides that, you need water desperately and your tongue feels like sandpaper in your mouth.\n\nPushing yourself back against the far wall so you can catch what little light filters through the cracks, you watch as the sun makes its ever so slow descent. You wrap your sweaty arms around your knees and hug them close to you in an attempt to ward off the shivers.\n\nYour hair is slicked against your temples and you\u2019re having trouble focusing. This just isn\u2019t going to be your day. You close your eyes and try to take in deep breaths, but hot air you suck in with each one just makes you feel that much worse.\n\n\n\nAfter a while, you open your eyes and between the vertical planks you can see the light fading from the sky. There are reds and oranges and pinks. Even through the slits, it is breathtaking. You only wish you could walk out to see the whole thing.\n\nYou can barely move your head and it\u2019s impossible to move the rest of you. You can\u2019t take this anymore, but what choice do you have? You can only sit here to wait for the inevitable. Too bad you don\u2019t have a blanket, because it is getting so, so cold. Your teeth would chatter if you only had the energy to do so.\n\nThe sky deepens and you can see the first twinkle of a star. You should make a wish. But, it\u2019s much too late for that. You know it as sure as you know anything at all. All you have left waiting for you is the inevitable.\n\nMaybe if you made the right wish, it might come true. You can\u2019t close your eyes to make the wish or you may never get them open again. You take a long, hard swallow and feel the sides of your throat scratch together.\n\nYou focus hard on the star until you can feel it pulling back at you. You try to mouth the words, but you don\u2019t have the strength. Willing with everything you have\u2014everything you are\u2014you send your wish soaring toward that tiny pinprick of a speck\u2014faster than the speed of light.\n\nJane steps from the corner of your little makeshift shelter. She looks so beautiful, yet so sad. She kneels down beside you and stares deep into your eyes while you lose yourself in hers. You drown in those bright green eyes.\n\nShe may not have gotten her wish, but you were granted yours.\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Don't drink it", "result": "It\u2019s probably better not to risk drinking it, but you sure don\u2019t intend to waste such a gift. You pull your shirt off and wet it carefully from the cup\u2014being extremely careful not to let even a single drop roll off onto the ground. You wipe your back and chest off with the cool rag as best you can before wrapping it around your head like that man did in that movie you saw a long time ago on TV.\n\nYou go back to work and before long, you have something that resembles something that someone might accidentally mistake for a shack. It\u2019s more of a lean-to than anything, but at least there\u2019s shade.\n\nYou get down on all fours and crawl through a narrow opening at the bottom. The ground is still hot and could possibly blister if you dally. Once inside, you scoop handful after handful off the top and shove it against the sides at the bottom. It\u2019ll help hold them up as well as give you a faintly cooler spot to lay down.\n\nSlumping over, something bites your little finger. It stings a little, but nothing serious. You push yourself back up and see a tiny scorpion right where your hand was so you slam your fist down on it and crush it before it can reset itself to strike again. You don\u2019t see any others, so you lay down and look at the white sky through the cracks for a while to make yourself sleepy.\n\n\n\nWhen you wake up, the sun is still high and your hand is throbbing something awful. You need water desperately and your tongue feels like sandpaper in your mouth.\n\nPushing yourself back against the far wall you try to get your mind off of your hand by watching what little light filters through the cracks. While you watch as the sun makes its ever so slow descent, you wipe yourself off every now and then with the cool rag\u2014truly a gift from heaven.\n\nYou don\u2019t know when the throbbing in your hand went away or when your head sagged, but you open your eyes and between the vertical planks you can see the light fading from the sky. There are reds and oranges and pinks. Even through the slits, it is breathtaking.\n\nYou scurry back through the hole in the boards and see the tapestry of the western sky in all its glory. The sun has already set, but has left an explosion of color in its wake. You stand there a moment in awe before setting off down the tracks once more.\n\nYou walk through the night taking frequent rest breaks to rub away the burning cramps in your legs and once, you have to move away from the tracks and go prone when a freight roars through. You don\u2019t think you\u2019ll be able to make it much farther if you don\u2019t find drinkable water soon.\n\nWhen the sun starts to peek its head, you scan the barren landscape looking for both water and another daytime shelter. It\u2019s already getting too hot for comfort. Up ahead a couple of miles, you see a string of hoppers sitting off on a siding near the foot of a small mountain. They won\u2019t offer much, but at least it\u2019s shade. You quicken your pace despite your toes attempting to curl themselves in under your feet.\n\nThere\u2019s plenty of shade under the hoppers when you reach them, but already they are giving off more heat than would be comfortable. You do spot a dusty brown prickly pear patch off toward the mountain so it\u2019s a good thing you decided to stop early in the day. It seems like so long ago when Harvey first showed you that you could eat it. You\u2019ll just have to be really careful when you pick and skin it since you lost your knife.\n\nYou rush over and fall to your knees and start to carefully pluck one of the leafy pads. The tiny spines prick at your fingers so you take extra time to be even more careful. When you have it in your hands, you dig the skin off of it with your thumbnail. The moisture runs down and drips off your hand. You greedily lap up the sweet juice as you continue digging away the skin and spines. When you have enough exposed you take a bite and the sweet flavor explodes in your mouth. It doesn\u2019t taste bland at all. Maybe it\u2019s because it\u2019s later in the year and maybe more ripe or maybe it\u2019s just because you haven\u2019t eaten or had anything to drink in days.\n\nAfter three pads, you can\u2019t hold any more but you continue chewing up bite after bite to get at the juice. While you\u2019re gorging yourself, you see a deep shadow at the base of the mountain that looks like it has a door in it. Weird. Who would put a door in a mountain?\n\nYou push yourself to your feet and stumble over to the shadow and see that it\u2019s not really a door, but a boarded up hole. A cool draft hits you right square in the face. You have to get in there! At the bottom and under a faded sign that has slipped it\u2019s nail, there\u2019s a gap just big enough for you wriggle your way through if you swing the sign aside. It reminds you of the night you and Jane went into that spooky old house.\n\nC\u2019mon, I know the way in.\n\nW-wait. What if something\u2019s in there? What if someone catches us?\n\nDon\u2019t worry. No one ever comes here. This place is \u2018bandoned.\n\nIt seems so long ago and in a place you can barely remember and to a boy who no longer exists. Maybe even in another life, perhaps.\n\nYou squat down and hold the sign up with one hand as you work your way inside. Sand sifts down on you as you pass through the opening\u2014but only a little. From somewhere deep in the bowels of the cave, you can hear water dripping into a pool. Too bad it isn\u2019t outside. It\u2019s been so long since you\u2019ve been swimming. It\u2019d be a nice way to cool off.\n\nSitting just far enough inside that you\u2019re out of the direct sunlight, you lean back to soak up the cool, damp air. Your stomach rumbles and cramps up, but you barely notice as you fall fast asleep.\n\n\n\nYou wake up shivering and crawl back into the blast furnace through the little gap. You have a vague recollection of an eerie yawning groan having disturbed your sleep, but it quickly fades into the ether along with the dream that inspired it. You head back over to the prickly pear patch and perform your routine again. It\u2019ll take some time before you are back to one-hundred percent. Right now, you aren\u2019t even considering leaving this wonderful place.\n\nOnce you\u2019ve had your fill again, you crawl back into your hidey-hole. You have to crawl in a little deeper since the sun is at a lower angle and its rays stretch in nearly twice as far. It\u2019s not that you mind sleeping in the daytime so much, you just don\u2019t want those burning fingers on your skin.\n\nYou see a lump over against the far wall and have to investigate what it might be. You carefully creep over in case it might be an animal\u2014even though by its shape, it couldn\u2019t possibly be. You reach out with the toe of your shoe and give it a light nudge. It teeters to one side and comes back to rest in the same place with a tinny sound that reverberates off the walls. You immediately know what this object is. It\u2019s a bucket!\n\nIf you can find the source of that dripping sound, you could have all the water you\u2019d need for a couple days and surely you\u2019d run into more by the time it is empty.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to find the source", "result": "Crawling slowly through the dark on your knees and feeling ahead of you with one hand while dragging the pail with the other, you make your way deep into the cave. The sound gets gradually louder the deeper you go until you feel spatter hit your face. It\u2019s coming from the wall from drips overhead, but the sound of the pool is still far away so you continue on.\n\nThe ground is damp for quite a ways before it starts getting dry again. It doesn\u2019t appear that the sound is getting any closer. If you don\u2019t find it soon, you might as well turn back. You don\u2019t want to get lost in this cave. You might not be able to find your way back.\n\nThe floor keeps rising steadily and turns from sand to rock. It slopes up steeply and you have trouble holding on enough while climbing with only one free hand. You\u2019ve come just about as far as you dare. You try to determine how much farther the sound of the pool is and in what direction, but the echo off the rocks makes it sound like it\u2019s coming from everywhere.\n\nIt\u2019s no use. You shimmy back down the rock and start making your way back. You can feel eyes on you from the darkness, but can\u2019t tell from which direction. One way is as black as another. The only thing you can see is tiny white flashes at the edge of your vision.\n\nYou reach the damp sand again and have just started across it when the ground under you starts shifting forward. You twist around and try to scramble back, but it\u2019s moving too swift and you\u2019re losing more ground than you gain. Then suddenly, you are in open air and tumbling head over feet. The fall seems to take forever. It\u2019s only seconds, but time has slowed down for you.\n\n\u201cAAAAHH!\u201d\n\n\u201cAaaAaaAaaahh!\u201d your echo screams back at you.\n\nYou hit the water head first. You frantically paddle for the surface. There is absolutely no light so can\u2019t tell which way is up. Your lungs are empty and you fight to not let the water in.\n\nFinally, you break the surface and tread water as best as you can, but you don\u2019t have the strength to last long. It dawns on you that you still have the bucket so you flip it upside-down\u2014letting the water spill out and catch some air\u2014to use as a float.\n\nWhen you\u2019ve finally caught your breath, you kick and paddle over to a slimy and slick wall. There are no handholds so you slowly move along looking for something to grab onto.\n\nYou come to a ledge that is right at water level and slowly work your way up onto it. When you\u2019re finally seated, you place the bucket beside you and take slow even breaths to slow your racing heart. That was way too close. You stand up and search the slimy wall and find nothing as far up as you can reach. You move from one end to the other and find nothing but the same.\n\nWhen you\u2019ve regained your strength, you slip back into the water and\u2014holding onto the bucket\u2014start feeling around some more as you make your way around the pool. You make it back to the same ledge before long.\n\n\n\nYou don\u2019t know how long you\u2019ve been sitting here. Hours? Days? Weeks? It doesn\u2019t matter. It wasn\u2019t long before you couldn\u2019t feel your legs. Then your arms wouldn\u2019t work anymore. You can\u2019t even tell if your eyes are open or closed at this point.\n\nOut in the middle of the blackness, you see a shimmering speck of light that grows and grows until it finally takes shape. It\u2019s that dark haired girl with that mischievous grin. Her toes barely skim the water as she glides softly over to you. She reaches down and cups her hand over yours as she looks deeply into your eyes with those bright green eyes.\n\nYou manage to mouth a word, but does it really escape your lips?\n\n\u201cJane\u201d your echo whispers back.\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Continue on your way", "result": "You carry the bucket back with you into the light and examine it for holes. There aren\u2019t any that you can see so you set it near the entrance and crawl back out of the light, lay down and sleep for the rest of the day.\n\n\n\nWhen you wake up, there is barely enough light to see your way out by and you have trouble even making your way back. You manage to squeeze your way back outside and a warm, stiff breeze ripples its fingers over your skin and through your hair. It feels rather pleasant after being in the cool for so long.\n\nWith bucket in hand, you stroll over to the prickly pears and begin carefully filling it with the pads that you don\u2019t immediately eat. There\u2019s not much left of the patch when you get done with it.\n\nYou look over your shoulder to see that the moon is more than a sliver and just a might above the horizon behind you. You decide that you might as well continue on since there\u2019s no point in staying in one place for too long.\n\nYou pick yourself up, dust yourself off and set off down the tracks again. There are faint shadows outlining each railroad tie and you can see the wispy shapes of gravel off to the sides. There is a bluish tint to the desert where it fades into nothingness only a stones throw to each side.\n\nYou don\u2019t have to stop to rest nearly as often and when you do, you carefully peel bits of prickly pear and suck out the juice. You\u2019ve got enough to last you for days as long as you don\u2019t get too piggish with it. And now that you\u2019ve found out how magical it is, you\u2019ll keep an eye out for patches so you can keep your bucket as full of it as you can.\n\nOnce in the night, you have to get away from the tracks and go prone when an East-bound freight rumbles through. It must be miles and miles long with six roaring engines straining to keep it moving. It\u2019s too dark to make out the cargo, but it has to be really something special. You long to be on it heading back to familiar territory, but what magical things it must have seen before reaching this point. Even after it passes out of sight and then hearing, you can still feel its vibrations in the tracks.\n\nThe moon drifts by overhead\u2014dragging the stars in its wake. You take the ties two at a time until the bottoms of your feet are so puffy that you have to slow to every one. The dark silhouettes of the mountains to your right take form as they rip free of the night sky and go from black to red to gold before you turn around and see the sun spilling over the horizon to your rear. It is a most awe inspiring sight of reds and oranges and golds fading into lavender at its fringes.\n\nYou scan the barren landscape around you and spot a tiny twinkle far up ahead. Maybe it\u2019s something and maybe it\u2019s not, but the tracks will come close enough to it that you\u2019re going to find out. The landscape is sparsely dotted with bluish-green lumps and by their shape you can tell that they are prickly pear patches. They are everywhere! There\u2019s so much that you\u2019ll never go hungry or thirsty again! You\u2019ll just grab what you need from the patches when they come close to the tracks to keep your bucket full.\n\nThere is a sudden explosion all around you and your heart skips a couple of beats when a dozen or so tiny pigs shoot out in all directions from their dusty wallows surprised by your sudden appearance. Even the grown ones are no bigger than a dog. It takes you a moment for your blood to settle enough that you can keep walking.\n\nAfter you go a little farther, you are close enough to see what the thing is that is twinkling. It\u2019s a windmill out all by itself. The shiny fan blades are high enough off the ground that they catch a ripple every now and then, but the tail fin is broken and bent sideways so it can no longer face into the wind. Did there used to be a farmhouse near it and now it\u2019s gone? Maybe there\u2019s still some stuff laying around it. You pick up your pace in the hopes of finding something salvageable.\n\nFrom somewhere not too far off toward the mountains, you hear a sound like someone screaming with rage. Your hair stands on end and you freeze in your steps. You carefully scan the area and see nothing but a barren, sand-colored landscape dotted with the occasional boulder, cactus or prickly pear patch. Everything is eerily still.\n\nYou take a tentative step down the tracks while keeping a wary eye on the desert. Something is out there, but you don\u2019t have a clue what it might be. A ghost, maybe? Or some madman? You are poised to run at the first sign of movement.\n\nBefore long, you are adjacent to the windmill and\u2014after taking a last, long look around\u2014head down the gravel embankment toward it. You see a long galvanized water trough\u2014a little bigger than the bathtub you had in your old house before your mom and dad got a divorce\u2014a short distance from its base connected to a rusty tank via a short, bent pipe. Maybe there will be enough water to soak in and cool off before the sun creeps high enough to scorch the day.\n\nWhen you get up to the tank, you see about an inch of water in the bottom. You could still use it to cool off in and rinse away several layers of dirt and dust that you\u2019ve picked up since the last time you bathed so you strip down to your altogethers and dip your toe in. The water is a bit warm now even though it\u2019s still early in the day, but not so much that you can\u2019t stand it and when you climb back out the gentle breeze should take care of the rest.\n\nYou sit down and start dipping water with your hands and pouring it over your head. It feels so good on your bare skin as you rub away the grit and dust. You haven\u2019t had a bath in a long, long time so you make the most if it.\n\nYou lean back and bask in the sun for a few minutes soaking everything up and notice a metal latter going up the side of the windmill. There\u2019s no telling what you\u2019d be able to see from up there. As soon as you\u2019ve dried off, you want to climb it and have a good look around. There\u2019s nothing on the ground here for as far as you can see. Why would anyone put a windmill out in the middle of nowhere? There\u2019s not even a fence to keep in animals if that\u2019s what it\u2019s for.\n\nYou stand up and are reaching over the side for your clothes when you hear that scream again from much closer this time. Your blood runs cold. You whip your head around toward the tracks and the direction it came from. There on the ridge, you see a big tan cat just like the one you saw when you were with Sam only this one isn\u2019t quite as big even though it is twice as scary.\n\nBefore it heads down the slope toward you you are already climbing up the tower. When you reach the top, you look back over your shoulder to see it circling below and looking up at you. You look over and see an old paint can full of bolts and heavy, rusty adjustable wrench which you can use as a nice weapon. As long as it can\u2019t figure out how to use the ladder, you are safe since there\u2019s no way it could climb the metal legs. You pick up the wrench and slap it against your palm. If it does manage to climb the ladder, you\u2019re ready to smash its head and paws as soon as it gets within arm\u2019s reach.\n\nIts eyes are fixed on yours and its ears are laid back when it makes a tremendous leap. You stagger backward and manage to grab onto one of the center posts that angle to the ground at the very last second while you are teetering and flailing your arms. The cat can jump much higher than you expected, but still only came a little over halfway to the top. After a couple more attempts with no more success than it had the first time, it stalks around and swats your bucket through the air\u2014sending its contents spraying out in a wide arc.\n\n\u201cGo away! Leave me alone!\u201d\n\nYou grab a hand full of bolts and start pelting the ground around him with the tiny missiles. Only one manages to hit its mark and the cat only flicks its shoulder muscle in response.\n\nThe cat pays no mind to your words and only continues pacing around the tower while staring up at you. There\u2019s really nothing you can do but wait it out and hope it gets interested in something else or bored enough that it forgets all about you and leaves. You sit down with your back against the center post and keep a watchful eye on the cat below in case it figures out how to use the ladder.\n\nAfter a few minutes, the big cat moves over to opposite side of the storage tank from the trough and lays down in the sliver of shade it provides. It\u2019s only going to get hotter up here as the sun gets higher and higher. You have no choice but to suffer through it. There is a decent breeze up here that the cat doesn\u2019t have. Maybe it\u2019ll be enough.\n\nYou lean your head back against the post and close your eyes, but only to slits because you don\u2019t want that thing to get out of your sight. It yawns and does the same, but doesn\u2019t lay its head down. From here on in it\u2019s just going to be a waiting game.", "action_results": [{"action": "Life happens", "result": "Hours have passed when you hear a low rumble coming from behind you. You look down at your nemesis to see that it has its head down on its paws and doesn\u2019t seem to hear it. You look over your shoulder to see bright red pickup kicking up a cloud of dust and heading straight for you.\n\nYou get to your feet just as the pickup skids to a stop and the door flies open.\n\n\u201cWhat the hell are you doing up there!?\u201d yells a beefy man with a scraggly beard. \u201cGet down from there!\u201d\n\nYou look down to see the cat jerk its head around and point toward it.\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t.\u201d\n\nHe looks over to where you\u2019re pointing and immediately dives back into his truck at the same time the cat makes a dash toward the tracks. When he comes back out, he has a rifle in his hands and lays it against the open door.\n\nCrack!\n\nYou see a wisp of dust explode on the far side of the cat and the cat veers away from it. Before the man can lever in another shell, it has gone over the tracks and down the other side. You watch as it fades into the background as it\u2019s bounding toward the mountains.\n\n\u201cShe won\u2019t be back anytime soon so you can get down off of there now!\u201d\n\nYou lay the wrench aside and step off onto the ladder. You don\u2019t know what you would\u2019ve done if he hadn\u2019t come along when he did. Your mouth is already full of cotton. When you reach the bottom, you head straight for the closest prickly pear and begin skinning it with your thumbnails.\n\n\u201cWhat are you doing?\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019m thirsty. I need water.\u201d\n\n\u201cCome over here. I\u2019ve got some ice water in the truck.\u201d\n\nHe opens the passenger door and rummages around in the pile in the floorboard until he comes back with an only slightly wrinkled paper cup. He slides a big cooler over the edge of the seat and pushes the button on the bottom to fill it before handing it to you. \u201cHere.\u201d\n\n\u201cThank you.\u201d You guzzle it down without taking a breath.\n\n\u201cWhy aren\u2019t you wearing any clothes?\u201d\n\nYou look down at yourself and say \u201cI was rinsing off from that trough to get cool when that big cat came.\u201d\n\n\u201cWell, go put \u2018em back on. You can\u2019t be running around naked as a jaybird.\u201d\n\nYou turn to go when he grabs your arm and says \u201cWhat the hell happened to you, boy?\u201d\n\nYou follow his gaze and look under your arm at your back. \u201cOh, that\u2019s from my mom.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhy\u2019d she do that?\u201d\n\nYou shrug. \u201cShe was mad \u2018cause I ran away, but I didn\u2019t. It was an accident.\u201d\n\nHe stands there scratching above his ear for a moment before shaking his head and turning toward the windmill.\n\nYou rush over and jerk on your clothes while he climbs it. Then you start putting the all the prickly pears you can find back in your bucket and look up to see him fixing the tail. You can\u2019t help but stand there until he\u2019s finished just to see if it works. He releases a catch and the blades start turning immediately.\n\n\u201cWhere are you from?\u201d he asks, stepping off the bottom rung. \u201cThere aren\u2019t any houses for miles around except for mine.\u201d\n\nYou look down at your feet. \u201cA long, long ways from here.\u201d\n\n\n\nHe takes you back to his house despite your objections and finally gets the whole story out of you. He threatens to turn you over to the sheriff, but can\u2019t come to terms with what might happen to you if you were sent back. One thing leads to another and days turn into weeks. When school time rolls around, he enrolls you under his name and after talking to a judge friend of his and telling him your story, it\u2019s all made nice and legal. It isn\u2019t long before you feel like you belong at this ranch.\n\nOne day when you\u2019re fourteen and he can barely get around even with the aid of his cane, you and he are out setting the windmill where you first met. He turns to you and says \u201cI never had a son of my own. It\u2019s lucky for me that you dropped into my lap like you did. You\u2019re a damn fine worker and a fine young man. Someday I\u2019ll be gone and all this will belong to you.\u201d\n\nYou smile at him and give him a firm squeeze on the shoulder. Isn\u2019t it funny how life turns out sometimes, you think. Looking him square in the eye, you say \u201cI\u2019m the lucky one.\u201d\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Hide in the back of the truck", "result": "You climb in the back of the truck and find a hole under the tarp that you can squeeze yourself into. You hunker down and get as comfortable as you can, but you can\u2019t see out from where you are. It isn\u2019t long before you feel the truck rocking and hear the door slam. The engine revs to life and you are jostled this way and that before the ride eventually smooths out.\n\nAll you can do is hope for the best as you settle back and try to get some much needed sleep.\n\n\n\nYou wake up with the old Indian man staring down at you. He has a mixture of concern and annoyance on his face.\n\n\u201cWhere did you come from? Why are you in my truck?\u201d\n\nYou rub the sleep from your eyes while you try to think of an answer. Your stiff back decides to contort all on its own and you are helpless to stop it. When you\u2019re able to do so you look back up at him. Not knowing the best way to respond, you say \u201cI was hiding and fell asleep.\u201d\n\nHe looks you over and finally says \u201cCome on out of there.\u201d He turns and walks toward the front of his truck as you sit up. He doesn\u2019t stop at the front and continues on to a short, shiny trailer with a tattered awning drooping from its side and props the door open with a beat up lawn chair. All around you as far as the eye can see is only desolation broken up by the occasional rock jutting up through the earth.\n\nYou climb over the side and aren\u2019t sure whether to follow him inside or to go somewhere else entirely. You don\u2019t know where you are and can only guess that the rough and rutted path behind the truck leads back to some road.\n\nAt the very least, you need water. It couldn\u2019t hurt to go to the door and ask for some before heading out. You also haven\u2019t a clue as to where you are so maybe he\u2019ll tell you that, too.\n\nYou walk over to the trailer and lean in. \u201cCan I have some water?\u201d\n\nIt\u2019s really dark in there and before you can make out any movement, a heavy black pot spattered with light blue specks and a long shiny handle sticking out of the top drops onto the corner of the built-in table into the slender patch of sunlight that makes it through the door. A hand reaches out of the blackness and grabs the handle, drawing a ladle dripping with water from inside the pot. \u201cHere.\u201d\n\nYou lunge inside, snatch the ladle with both hands and gulp down the liquid in huge swallows. It\u2019s warm and you can taste the metal in it. It doesn\u2019t matter. You\u2019ve gone without for so long that the only thing that registers is that it\u2019s wet. Even through you are choking for air you keep chugging.\n\nFinally, you\u2019ve had all you can hold. After dropping the ladle into the pot, you stagger backward and fall against the aluminum door facing. Your eyes have started to adjust and you can see the old man seated at the far end of the table and staring vacantly at the far wall.\n\n\u201cYou want to tell me where you\u2019re from?\u201d\n\nYou shift from one foot to the other trying to remember some of the towns from your map, but you draw a blank. Not sure if you should tell him the truth or make something up, you end up saying \u201cA long way from here.\u201d\n\nHe lifts an eyebrow, but doesn\u2019t turn toward you.\n\n\u201cI have to get somewhere. It\u2019s real important.\u201d The instant those words pass through your lips you flash back on a conversation from a long, long time ago, but it slips away before you get the chance to latch on to it.\n\nHe only sits there patiently and stares straight ahead without saying a word. It makes you feel all jittery inside. You have to tell him something.\n\n\u201cJane died and I have to go to the Grand Canyon for her \u2018cause she never got to see it,\u201d you blurt out.\n\nHe sucks in his breath and stiffens as the words spill out with you powerless to stop them.\n\n\u201cHer mom hated her and she killed her and all she wanted was someone to love her and to take care of her! She was my friend! She was my bestist FRIEND!\u201d\n\nYou fall to the floor in a heap. All of your strength has dissipated. Your body heaves and shutters and your eyes burn, but they are so dry that they can no longer make tears. A large, gentle hand comes to rest on your shoulder and you don\u2019t even bother raising your head. It has all been too much. Just way too much.\n\n\n\n\u201cWake up. We\u2019re here.\u201d\n\nYou shove yourself up in the seat and peer through the dusty windshield. A red granite sign with dark inset lettering atop a light tan sandstone base stands off to the right in front of the pickup. You can see the words clearly over the hood. \u201cGrand Canyon National Park\u201d. You can hardly believe your eyes.\n\nAfter a long, slow grind, the engine whirs to life. Silas jams the truck into gear and it lurches forward. It isn\u2019t long before you come to a large parking area and he whips around into one of the paint-striped spaces, killing the old truck in gear causing it to shudder to a stop.\n\nYou look up at him. He\u2019s staring out through the windshield with that vacant stare he does. You can\u2019t help yourself. You shimmy over in the seat, reach up and give him a big hug around the neck.\n\n\u201cThank you for bringing me here.\u201d\n\nHe doesn\u2019t move or even look around. He finally says \u201cGo now.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Go now!", "result": "You look out over the vast canyon before you\u2014the cool pastel painted walls, the shadowy crevasses and overhangs. You walk down a narrow trail cut into the wall. A flimsy railing is all that separates you from a terrifying fall to your death. You lean against it and peer over the side. You can't make out the bottom, it seems to just flow into the horizon.\n\nYou turn around and look at the cliff face behind you. The tool marks are still there\u2014as they have undoubtedly been for decades\u2014still unweathered in this arid environment. They will most likely remain long, long after your own death.\n\nYou carefully choose your hand and footholds and\u2014after looking around to make sure no one is in sight\u2014make the short climb. At the top, you sit admiring the view. Taking a deep breath, you pull out the folded up sheet of paper. You open it and stare at it one last time, trying to memorize every single line (though you don't need to because you have studied it many times before). You give it a soft kiss, remembering those few magical days, refold it and touch it to your forehead. Then you gingerly slip it into a crack in the wall that faces out over the great canyon.\n\nYou sit there as the sun sets and the light dwindles. The walls of the canyon gradually darken into deeper oranges and violets. You can feel her sitting beside you and know that if you just turn your head, you'd see that raven haired beauty with those bright, shining green eyes. After all this time, her dream has finally come true...\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Hide", "result": "You take cover and lie flat in some wispy brush. It\u2019s the only choice you have at the moment. It doesn\u2019t conceal you very well, but well enough since the car speeds by without slowing down.\n\nYou get back to your feet and stumble on.\n\nThe sandy, vacant lot is such a relief after walking down the sweltering blacktop for so long. The building is long and narrow and runs parallel to the highway. Along its front drapes a green and white awning and below that there are dark windows partially covered with plywood. There are two antique gas pumps with glass bowls on top for measuring out fuel standing a little more than a car\u2019s width from a glass door plastered with all manner of fliers.\n\nYou struggle to pull open the glass door. You hear a television blaring from within as you stumble inside.\n\n\u201cCan I have some water?\u201d you hoarsely ask the beefy guy behind the counter.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s back by the soda fountain,\u201d he answers without looking up from his game-show. \u201cCups are five cents.\u201d\n\nYou blink. All your money is in your bag lost somewhere back in that canyon.\n\n\u201cC\u2019mon! Who ever heard of shaving cream costing ten bucks?! You stupid moron!\u201d\n\nYou turn around and fall against the door, forcing it open with your shoulder and stagger back out into the blast furnace.\n\nWalking around the end of the building, you spot a coiled hose on the ground by the back corner. It\u2019s just what you need. You trot over and reach for the faucet, but the handle has been removed. You study it a minute before picking up the hose a little at a time\u2014working the contents out to the end\u2014and manage to get a good mouthful of scalding hot water. You fight the pain and as soon as it\u2019s cooled enough, you choke it down.\n\nYou can\u2019t go any further in this heat so you look for any kind of shade to get out of this blistering sun. You spot a low-lying rock a little ways up the hillside behind the building and judging by its angle it might offer some shelter from the sun. You drag yourself over to it.\n\nIt looks like it would be the perfect place for a den of snakes, but peering under the shelf you see no sign of anything. You wedge yourself underneath where you\u2019ll wait for nightfall before heading off again.\n\n\n\nYou open your eyes to find that you are shivering. The temperature has dropped considerably. If you don\u2019t end up freezing, it\u2019ll at least be a welcome relief compared to that awful sun.\n\nAfter pulling yourself out, you stand and slink down the hill. Your feet are like bricks, but you have no choice other than to go on.\n\nThe gas station parking lot is deserted except for a run-down old pickup truck loaded down with all kinds of junk and covered with a tarp. It\u2019s parked in the shade of the pump lights around the corner of the building and you have to walk around it to get to the highway.\n\nAs you pass by it, its yellow license plate catches your eye. It says Arizona in green letters across the top and Grand Canyon State on the bottom.\n\nYou peek around the corner of the building and see an old hunched over Indian man with a pony tail halfway down his back stepping up to the cash register.\n\nThis could be your lucky break. You could try asking him for a ride, but what if he says no? Maybe hiding under the junk in the back and hope for the best would be smarter way to go. It won\u2019t be long before he\u2019s heading this way so you\u2019d better hurry and make up you mind.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Head for the town", "result": "If you can get on a train, it\u2019ll be well worth going slightly out of your way. You head down the tracks toward the distant town.\n\n\n\nThe sun is still high overhead when you cross into the train yard. There\u2019s a cross track here and little else save for a row of run-down, caved in buildings along a dusty, weedy road. It doesn\u2019t look like a train would stop here anymore even if it did pass through. You might as well turn around and head back the way you came.\n\nYou have just reached the end of the yard when you see a sky blue car cross on the last street in town just ahead of you. It looks like the driver is looking straight back at you. You duck down, but there\u2019s nowhere to go and it is too late anyway.\n\nThe car slows and you make a mad dash for the buildings just as it disappears from sight. You run at full bore until you see a stack of shipping pallets laying haphazard against the side of the far end building. You dive in behind them.\n\nDid he really see you or was it just your imagination? Maybe he only slowed down because there was something in the road. You\u2019ll just hide here and wait for a little while until the coast is all clear and then you\u2019ll get the heck out of Dodge.\n\nThe car drives slowly back up the road from where it came. It is barely creeping by this time. He must\u2019ve seen you. What else could it be? He\u2019ll turn you over to the cops and then you\u2019ll never make good on your promise to Jane. You have to somehow get away from him and out of here.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find somewhere to hide", "result": "There goes that car again. The one that\u2019s been creeping back and forth down the same street for the last hour. The driver must\u2019ve seen you. He might take you to the cops and you\u2019ll be taken back home if he catches you. You duck down as low as you can. If you can hide until it gets dark, maybe you can sneak away.\n\nYou look around for a better place to hide and see nothing. This stack of pallets isn\u2019t much, but it\u2019s better than nothing. You\u2019ll just have to wait.\n\nThe minutes pass by slowly. It will be a long, long time before you\u2019ll be able to escape. Your leg starts cramping so you reach down and rub the knots out of it.\n\n\u201cThere you are,\u201d comes a crackly man\u2019s voice from behind you, \u201cI almost thought you\u2019d flown the coop. C\u2019mon, let\u2019s go for a ride.\u201d\n\nYou are paralyzed with fear. He found you and now they\u2019ll take you home. You can\u2019t go home, yet. You\u2019re not finished.\n\nHe lifts you to your feet by the back of the shirt and you can hardly hold onto your stuff due to your feet barely touching the ground. He takes you around to the back of the building and opens up the passenger door of his car. \u201cHop in.\u201d\n\nSomething isn\u2019t right. This isn\u2019t the way strangers act. You struggle to remain outside, but he snatches your bag from you and pitches it over the backseat with his free hand. You slap at his hands and kick at his shins, but he doesn\u2019t seem to even notice. He backhands you across the face and shoves you in anyway.\n\nYour cheek burns from your temple to your chin. The tiny itch on your eyebrow turns out to be a trickle of blood. You are dazed and can only watch as he makes his way around the front of the car to the driver\u2019s door. By the time you finally snap out of it, you see the town getting smaller and smaller through the back glass.\n\nYou start to dive over the seat back and his hand comes crashing down on you again. Your vision narrows to a tiny speck and then winks out.\n\n\n\nYou wake up shivering. It is dark all around you. You don\u2019t have any clothes on. You are sore in a place where you shouldn\u2019t be and it really, really burns. There\u2019s a strange, intermittent scraping sound coming from somewhere close by.\n\nYou cough and the scraping sound stops.\n\nYou try to raise up on your elbow and see something coming straight down at you from the darkness overhead. It\u2019s the back of a shovel blade and it\u2019s the last thing you will ever see.\n\n\n\n\u2014 The End", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Ride it out", "result": "You don\u2019t know what else you can do except to ride this one out. Even if you went back to find Harvey, there\u2019s no way of knowing if you could get to him without being spotted and sent back to your mom. You\u2019ll just have to be ready for them when the train starts to slow down at the next town. You can jump off early and run just to be on the safe side. You can\u2019t afford to lose any more time.\n\n\n\nIt\u2019s only been half a day when you come within sight of a town. You gather your stuff together and cling to the side of the sliding door. The gravel drops off sharply just beyond the tracks and the dense bushy undergrowth looks like it would make for a rather soft landing.\n\nYou are poised and ready when the train starts to slow down. You wait for the perfect opening and then leap as far as you can toward the brush. You don\u2019t clear the edge of the right of way, but still tumble into the undergrowth and the back of your head strikes the base of a large sapling. Your nose is instantly filled with a burning, coppery stench and the world blinks out.\n\n\n\nWhen you come to, it\u2019s just getting dark and the street lights are beginning to glow orange as far as the eye can see. This is no ordinary town\u2014it stretches out for miles and is already giving off a glow comparable to that of the setting sun.\n\nAnother track stretching off into the far yonder joins with the one you\u2019re on and you can see yet another up ahead. They cling to each other and whip back and forth across each other at switches. There\u2019s a huge yard with trains pointing this way and that and beyond it is a highway over pass that seems to just hang there with a steady stream of cars flowing in both directions.\n\nYou make your way over to the far side to keep out of sight of the headlamps of the oncoming trains and follow the tracks for nearly an hour\u2014careful to stay with the majority as they snake their way westward\u2014doing your best to not get sidetracked.\n\nUp ahead and on the same side of the arteries of tracks as you you see a train just sitting there by a string of small warehouses and aimed in the right direction. You can hear the engine reverberating and there are bright lights on tripods scattered all around. There are some flatcars with men busy loading large crates onto them using forklifts from the loading dock and in the gloom between them and the engine is a string of boxcars. You can see from here that their doors are wide open. If only you could make it inside one without being spotted.\n\nYou walk up behind the metal buildings and then through the gap between until you are right across from the darkest one and watch the men carefully for your opening. The door is only a few inches higher than the platform so you won\u2019t have any trouble getting inside. You only have to wait for the right moment.\n\nAfter the crates have been chained down and the forklifts have gone away, the men start taking the lights down one by one and you hear the engine slowly rev up. You\u2019ll have to time this just right.\n\nLuck is on your side. There is no one in sight when the train starts inching forward and you make your dash. You make your way as quickly between the slatted crates and the wall as you can to the front of the car where you find just enough crawl space to conceal yourself and your stuff.\n\nThe smell is overpowering and your mouth begins to water uncontrollably. The crates are packed full with cantaloupes and you haven\u2019t eaten anything since the remainder of peanuts you had last night. You are famished!\n\nYou don\u2019t even bother with getting the knife out of the \u2018treasure chest\u2019. You just reach in and punch a hole in one with your fist. You pull out handful after handful of slimy goodness and cram it into your mouth. It\u2019s so dark that you can\u2019t even see it, but you know how light and orange it must be. You\u2019ll definitely be filling your belly this night. The thought strikes you that you could take a couple along with you for good measure when you leave the train so while you\u2019re filling your gullet you also pry off enough of the slats to pull out a couple of good sized ones and pack them in the blanket in your bag.\n\nWhen you\u2019re finally lulled to sleep by the clacking rails, you are returned to the night you and Jane spent on that train and all the plans you and she had made. Only this time, the two of you are on your way to see the Grand Canyon and are without a care in the world. She gives you a huge grin and throws her arms around you\u2014planting a big kiss on your cheek\u2014and hugging you for all you are worth.\n\nThe day comes much too soon and you stagger over to the open doorway to relieve yourself. You stand there and marvel at how far you can see. Snaking its way through a long valley is a river so blue that it makes your heart stop. On both sides it is lush with trees and you spot a large flock of birds winding and twisting like dust devils above the dense foliage. All is right with the world. You know you are going to make it just fine.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Lie", "result": "It\u2019s probably better not to tell him your real name. He\u2019s not only a stranger, but also a grownup and grownups think they know what\u2019s best for a kid even if they don\u2019t. The more people who know who you are, the greater the chance that they\u2019ll send you back and the next time Mom gets her hands on you she\u2019ll probably kill you like Jane\u2019s mom did to Jane.\n\nYou look him right square in the eye and say \u201cI\u2019m Tommy.\u201d\n\n\u201cNice to meet ya, Tommy. I guess we\u2019re gonna be here a while so might as well find a spot to get comfortable.\u201d He sits down between two of the implements\u2014putting his back to one and props his foot up on the other\u2014where he can\u2019t be seen from the ground.\n\nYou bring your bag over and find a nice comfy place out of view from the side. You sit down beside it\u2014leaning on it with your elbow\u2014with your walking stick laying across you lap while keeping a wary eye on Harvey.\n\n\u201cI saw you a ways back down the line and can\u2019t believe you made it this far. You\u2019ve really covered some miles in the last couple of days.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah. It\u2019s a long ways to where I\u2019m going.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhere\u2019s that? If you don\u2019t mind my asking.\u201d\n\nYou study his face. You\u2019re still not sure if you can really trust him or not so you make up something on the spot. \u201cI have to find my uncle in Arizona so I can live with him.\u201d\n\n\u201cHope everything turns out okay for ya. I kinda like to keep moving. Don\u2019t like to stay in one place too long. Figured I\u2019d head for the coast since this area is mostly played out now. It\u2019s not a bad place to Winter.\u201d\n\nYour belly starts growling so you reach into your bag and pull out what\u2019s left of the pack of crackers you\u2019ve been eating on for the last couple of days. You only have one more pack left and they\u2019re mostly crushed, but you won\u2019t mind that a bit when you get hungry again. You stuff one in your mouth and grab a few more for good measure. You consider putting the pack back in the bag, but decide you ought to share so you offer Harvey the last of the package which he quickly accepts.\n\n\u201cThank ya,\u201d he grins, \u201cI haven\u2019t had anything on my stomach since early yesterday.\u201d\n\nYou both eat in silence and after a while you drift off to sleep to the sounds of the clacking rails.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Stay put", "result": "The door suddenly opens and the deputy who brought you in steps through. \u201cLooks like you two have come a long way. How in the world did the two of you manage to get more than eighty miles from your home?\u201d\n\nJane doesn\u2019t respond and you only shrug your shoulders slightly.\n\n\u201cI guess it doesn\u2019t matter. There\u2019ll be someone here shortly to drive you back. And I\u2019m sure there will be a lot of questions for you two.\u201d\n\n\n\nA couple of hours later, you are back to your town. It was a long, quiet ride and neither you nor Jane gave more than a yes or no answer to the man that drove you. You only looked at each other attempting to communicate with only your eyes. All that she\u2014and you, no doubt\u2014could convey was sadness and a sense of hopelessness of the situation.\n\nYou sit slumped\u2014craning your neck to peek through the patrol car\u2019s rear window\u2014and watch as the officer who ran you and Jane out of the abandoned house a couple nights ago turns away from Jane and her mother, and walks back to the car. No sooner than his back is turned does she turn and shove Jane inside the house, slamming the door shut behind her.\n\nThe officer throws a glance over his shoulder, but doesn\u2019t break stride as he continues on his way.\n\nAfter he closes his car door, you say \u201cIs she gonna hit Jane?\u201d\n\nHe turns sideways in his seat and looks back at you. \u201cI wouldn\u2019t be surprised if she\u2019s not able to sit down for a week after pulling a stunt like this. Do you understand how dangerous it was for the two of you out there all alone? We\u2019re lucky that we found you before something bad happened to you. You don\u2019t know what some people are capable of doing to children.\u201d\n\n\u201cShe hates Jane. I don\u2019t want her to hit her anymore.\u201d\n\n\u201cNo mother hates her own child. She\u2019s just having a rough time raising her on her own\u2014being a single mother and all.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou don\u2019t know.\u201d\n\n\u201cListen. I\u2019ll swing back by after I drop you off and look in on her, okay?\u201d He starts the engine and pulls it into gear. \u201cEverything will be back to normal as soon as this mess blows over.\u201d\n\n\n\nAs you pull into the drive, the door opens and your mom steps out on the porch. She rushes over to the patrol car and snatches you by the arm\u2014dragging you out and pulling you close\u2014as soon as the policeman opens the rear door.\n\n\u201cHere he is, safe and sound. No one knows how those two managed to make it so far away on their own.\u201d\n\n\u201cHe\u2019s always been a handful. I can barely keep up with him most of the time. An\u2019 with this new job, I\u2019ll have to work extra hard at it, I guess,\u201d she says, flashing her eyes at you over a wan smile. \u201cI\u2019m just glad he\u2019s home.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s why we\u2019re here, ma\u2019am. Glad to be of service.\u201d\n\nHe walks with you to the door of the garage and watches as the two of you step inside.\n\n\u201cThanks again, Officer,\u201d your mom says, ushering you in and closing the door.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re quite welcome,\u201d he says, turning around and walking back the way he came.\n\nShe lifts the corner of the vinyl curtain to watch him get into his patrol car and pull out of the driveway. When she turns around to you, her face is a deep shade of red and skewed beyond all recognition.\n\n\u201cIf things are so bad here that you felt the need to run away, then why didn\u2019t you just stay gone!?\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t have an answer. You take a step to the rear as she lifts the solid metal rod from the window and yanks it free of the curtain.\n\nShe is on you before you even know it\u2014whipping you side to side like a terrier does a rat by a handful of hair in one hand while she whacks at your butt and the back of your legs with the curtain rod in the other. Every so often, an errant strike lands in the small of your back and your vision momentarily goes black. You can feel it cut deep and glance off bone with each blow.\n\n\u201cWhy can\u2019t you do anything right? Why do you always have to go out of your way to make me mad?\u201d\n\nYou try to lessen the blows by deflecting them with your palms, but it only forces her to swing harder. The flesh on the underside of your hands soon feels tight and swollen, and you no longer have control enough to maneuver them into a position of any benefit at all.\n\nAll you can do is grit your teeth and bear the pain. If you make even the slightest sound of whimpering, she\u2019ll \u201cgive you something to really cry about\u201d.\n\nThe stinging pain finally lessens as your vision fades and grows more and more distant as the world goes dark around you.\n\n\n\nYou don\u2019t know how long you\u2019ve been lying here in the darkness. Your whole body throbs from one end to the other and you want nothing more than to return to sleep.\n\nWhat about Jane? She was right. You and she need to just run away together and find her Gramma or else somebody nice to take care of the two of you. You don\u2019t have a choice anymore. You know that now. Your mom will end up killing you if you don\u2019t get away.\n\nYou slowly open your eyes. You drag your arms under you and shove yourself to your knees.\n\nYou see no sign of your mom and can only guess that she has gone back to the party in Honey\u2019s house.\n\nYou pick yourself up off the floor. You can\u2019t straighten your legs and your back is in an uncontrollable hunch, but you manage to maintain your balance and not topple over despite the impossible angle you are leaning.\n\nOne determined step after another, you make your way to the door.\n\nThe curtain is now back in its place over the window. You look at it for what seems like a long time debating whether or not to do something about that impromptu weapon. It would do absolutely no good, though, because she\u2019d just grab something else to use on you the next time.\n\nYou reach out and grip the knob with all the strength you can muster. It doesn\u2019t give easily, but you manage to turn it enough that the latch lets go. You hobble on one foot through the open doorway into the bright afternoon sun and pull the door closed behind you.\n\nYou can hear music coming from Honey\u2019s house, but don\u2019t see any movement through the windows. You limp around the garage and through the back yard to the alley.\n\n\n\nIt\u2019s about mid-afternoon by the time you reach Jane\u2019s house. The place looks closed up tight. After calling into the \u201csecret place\u201d and getting no response, you amble up to the front door and rap on it several times with the same result.\n\nWhere could she be?", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Find a better way", "result": "The only adult you see is the woman reading on the park bench so you run up to her.\n\n\u201cPlease help that girl\u201d you say, pointing toward the group.\n\nShe looks clearly agitated as she lifts her eyes up at you and slowly turns her head toward them, but crinkles her nose and goes right back to her stupid book.\n\nYou have no choice now but to come up with something on your own.\n\nLooking around for a club of some kind, you notice a bunch of rocks. You quickly grab up a handful and find you a nice spot behind a tree not too far from them.\n\n\u201cGet away from her!\u201d\n\nThe boys look over and spot you.\n\n\u201cWho are you?\u201d demands Snots.\n\n\u201cJust let her go!\u201d\n\n\u201cOr what?\u201d asks Tubby as he takes a step toward you.\n\nChortle grapples the girl as Snots trots up beside Tubby.\n\n\u201cAre you here to rescue her? Is she your girlfriend?\u201d Tubby jeers.\n\nYou feel your face flush with anger. \u201cJust leave her alone,\u201d you say, taking a step to the rear and letting your hand drop back.\n\n\u201cLook here, this guy\u2019s here to save his bastard girlfriend,\u201d spits Snots.\n\nYou flash red and send a rock sailing right at his little smart mouth. He manages to turn his head just in time and the rock bounces off the side of his face. He falls back in horror and starts tearing up.\n\nTubby lunges toward you, but you side-step and he misses you by several feet, flailing his arms to keep his balance. You ready another rock as he spins back toward you.\n\n\u201cWanna be a tough guy, huh?\u201d\n\nHe comes at you again like a raging bull\u2014nostrils flaring and all. You chuck the rock at him. It bounces off his chest and he keeps coming without losing a step.\n\nYou dodge sideways, but his hand still clobbers your face as he continues past.\n\nThe girl manages to land one of her backward kicks and Chortle falls like a sack of potatoes, screaming in agony as his face goes purple. She turns and darts between two houses on the far side of the street.\n\n\u201cGet her,\u201d wheezes Chortle, \u201cGet that little bastard!\u201d\n\nSnots runs to his aid and tries to pull him to his feet between sobs, but can\u2019t muster the strength. Chortle is in no condition to stand just yet anyhow.\n\nYou run.\n\nWhen you feel like you are far enough away, you look back to see that Tubby has gone back to his friends. You dash between houses and start making your way back toward where the girl went through.\n\nThe alley is shrouded by trees arching overhead and you make your way to the end of it. Seeing no sign of her, you cut through to the next street. Still nothing. She\u2019s long gone.\n\nYou suddenly remember the bag tucked under the picnic table that you were supposed to be watching. If something happened to it, you\u2019ll be in big trouble.\n\nYou sprint like the devil is after you. A hedge claws up your arms and face as you dart through it, which you barely even notice.\n\nTurning down the alley, a dark figure steps out from behind the corner of the hedge directly in your path. Your mouth goes all coppery and dry, and you skid to a stop.\n\nYou\u2019re all set to flee when you realize that it\u2019s the girl from before. She looks sheepish and a bit winded, but no worse for wear.\n\nShe hangs her head, but her eyes remain fixed on yours. As you cautiously approach her, you detect the faint hint of a smile.\n\n\u201cHi,\u201d she barely more than whispers.\n\n\u201cAre you okay?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cYeah. They didn\u2019t hurt me.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou sure hurt that one.\u201d\n\nShe chuckles.\n\n\u201cWho were them boys?\u201d\n\n\u201cJust some boys from school. They always pick on me.\u201d\n\n\u201cHow come?\u201d\n\n\u201cJust \u2018cause. They\u2019ve always been like that.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s your name?\u201d you ask, scrunching your toes and noticing how dirty they\u2019ve gotten.\n\n\u201cJane. What\u2019s yours?\u201d\n\n\u201cBilly. We just moved here.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhere\u2019s your house?\u201d\n\n\u201cWe don\u2019t have one yet.\u201d\n\n\u201cOh,\u201d she says, turning her gaze to the side, then back to you. \u201cMy house is on Hill Road.\u201d\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know where that is. We just got here last night. We came in on the bus.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s over there,\u201d she points over your shoulder, \u201con the edge of town. C\u2019mon. I\u2019ll show you.\u201d\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t right now. I have to watch our stuff so Mom can find a job.\u201d\n\n\u201cOh.\u201d After a pause, she asks \u201cWhat grade are you in?\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll be in Second this year.\u201d\n\n\u201cMe too. Maybe we can sit together.\u201d\n\nThe very suggestion makes you feel queasy and uncomfortable. \u201cI better get back before she comes back,\u201d you say stepping past her.\n\n\u201cOkay. See ya later.\u201d\n\n\u201cSee ya later.\u201d\n\nYou cut between two houses following their shared ribbon driveway. As you get to the front, you peek down the street and see that the gang is gone.\n\nThe park is empty now with no one in sight. You cross the street and see that the bag is still right where it\u2019s supposed to be.\n\nYou climb the cement picnic table and plop down on top of it with your feet on the bench. All you can do now is wait.", "action_results": [null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story30.json b/data/scraper/stories/story30.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5575324 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story30.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=6376", "context": "", "first_story_block": "You look through the window from the observation room, down onto the Object placed at the heart of the chamber. Protruding from the walls are all manner of scientific gadgetry, so that the tests can be carried out remotely, and hopefully more safely, from the observation room.\n\nIt has been two and a half months of all manner of tests, such as bathing the Object in various forms of radiation, scanning it with all manner of sensors, trying tests in normal air and in a vacuum, and that sort of thing. So far, the Object has just sat there. It could continue to do nothing at all. It could just be a solid chunk of lifeless metal for all anyone knew. That's what you are beginning to think, anyhow.\n\nOf course, the Government and Military representatives were \"completely positive\" that something would happen eventually. And they got to monitor the tests from another facilitiy eighty kilometers away - just in case the Object happened to be a bomb of some sort. That was really reassuring for you.\n\n\"Come on, Jones, let's get to work,\" Hammond says, the doors to the observation room swishing shut behind him as he arrives.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Sure. So, what are we going to do to it today?\"", "result": "\"Okay, we're doing Gamma Radiation today. Why don't you get us started, spin the dial to five, will you?\" Hammond says, leaning over one of the consoles, and peering through the window at the Object below.", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn the dial to five.", "result": "\"Here goes nothing,\" you say as you turn the dial to five.\n\nBoth of you look out through the window at the Object in the chamber beyond. A long mechanical arm unbends from the wall, with a large emitter on the end. It slowly powers up, and you watch a counter slowly tick up from zero. Invisible gamma radiation begins to bathe the Object from the emitter.\n\nAs the counter begins to pass four, something happens!\n\nThere is a flash of light, almost blinding your eyes, and then-", "action_results": [{"action": "(continue)", "result": "Hammond yawns, leaning back in his chair. \"Well, there goes another day of useless tests, Jones,\" he says.\n\n\"What the-\" you stammer, looking around you. The clock on the wall says it is early in the evening outside. You glance at the dial for the gamma radiation emitter, and it is turned off, set to zero. Out through the window, the Object just sits there doing nothing, as usual.\n\nHammond notices the look on your face, \"What's wrong?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell him what happened.", "result": "\"Hammond, what just happened?\" you ask him, bewildered.\n\n\"What do you mean? We just completed another day of the same old boring tests that seem to have achieved nothing at all,\" he answers.\n\n\"You know what? I think something happened!\" you say, confusion giving way to excitement. Something was finally taking place!\n\n\"What are you talking about Jones?\" he says, tired and in no mood for games.\n\n\"The last thing I remember, I was turning the gamma radiation dial to five. The counter passed four, and there was a flash of light! The next thing I know, I was standing here and the day was over!\" you explain, bursting with excitement.\n\n\"Is this some sort of joke,\" he says, standing up, and getting his things, ready to go home. \"Look, Jones, we tested it for gamma, we zapped it with more x-rays, we doubled the air pressure, we tried to cut it open with lasers! Nothing happened, no lights, no sounds, no anything. Look, you're probably just tired, imagining things. There's nothing so boring as staring through a window at a block of metal that just sits there, for hours on end.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Stick to your version of what happened.", "result": "\"I'm telling you Hammond, one moment we were standing there performing the test, the next it was the end of the day!\" you exclaim, beginning to feel angry. You're sure of what happened. At least, you think you are...\n\n\"Look, Jones, maybe you saw a flashing light, maybe not. It only takes a few minutes to run the gamma radiation test. If you want, we'll throw it back up to five and see what happens. Will that make you happy? Maybe then I can go home and get some sleep,\" he grumbles.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Perform the Gamma radiation test again.", "result": "\"Yes, Hammond. That would make me happy. Let's do the test again,\" you say.\n\n\"Okay, by all means. Turn the dial back to five,\" he says, shaking his head tiredly.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Maybe you just imagined it?", "result": "You yawn. Actually, it does feel like you've been working for a whole day. Maybe Hammond was right, maybe you're just tired. Day after day of repetative tests could indeed make everything seem to blur together, after a while.\n\n\"Yeah, maybe you're right, Hammond. I guess I should drive home and get a good night's sleep,\" you say.\n\n\"Rest up, and I'm sure you'll feel better tomorrow,\" he says. \"Well, see you later then, I'm off.\"\n\nHammond puts on his jacket and heads home.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave the Facility.", "result": "You grab your jacket, flick off the lights, and walk out through numerous corridors and doorways. Finally, after passing through two security checkpoints, you reach the garage. Taking your car keys out of your pocket, you hop into your Toyota Aurion V6. You sink into the comfortable seat with a smile. Ah, the perks of your job.\n\nSwitching the car on, you pull out of the multi-level garage, and head out onto the road. The Facility was mostly underground, but a large boxy building juts up from the barren surface. Your temporary home, for the duration of the tests, was a house the company purchased in a relatively modern country town an hour's drive away.\n\nIt's getting dark outside, but the sky is clear, the moon and stars bright above you. You flick on your headlights, and there is a flash of light as they turn on...", "action_results": [{"action": "Waking up to more confusion.", "result": "You wake in your bed, in a house that the company has purchased, about an hour's drive from the Factility. Stretching, you get up out of bed. What an odd dream... Something had happened out at the Facility, but you couldn't remember what. Dreams tended to be like that. You were in your car, or something?\n\nStretching your arms above your head, you bend to each side, stretching your aching muscles, then reach out and open the door to the ensuite.\n\nA fierce, hot wind assails you, and you stumble backwards, your sleepy limbs not prepared. For a moment you just stand there in your underwear in shock. Outside your bedroom, looking through what should be the door to your ensuite, was the desert! You glance out the bedroom window, and it's still there! Bleak, barren desert sands and rocks stretch off to the horizon. Where is the town? More importantly, where is the rest of your house!", "action_results": [{"action": "Step outside", "result": "Astonished and confused, you open your main bedroom door, to see more desert outside. You step outside, onto the hot sand, to see if it is real or an illusion.\n\nThe sand is hot beneath your feet, and you quickly step back inside. Perhaps you should get dressed first?", "action_results": [{"action": "Get Dressed", "result": "Your clothing lies scattered across the floor around your bed.\n\n(Click on objects to put them in your inventory)", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story31.json b/data/scraper/stories/story31.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9ee93a --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story31.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=36791", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Childhood\n\n\nA fist thuds into your face, knocking you to the ground. Gruzub stands over you, laughing.\n\n\n\"Mazkil! You are as weak as a Shepard!\" He laughs, as you leap to you feet.", "action_results": [{"action": "Punch him", "result": "You swing your fist, but Gruzub quickly ducks and elbows you in the stomach, knocking the wind from your lungs. He gets two more punches in before you manage to roll away and get back into a fighting stance. As you prepare to charge him, you hear a deep voice.\n\n\n\"CHILDREN! Your mother struggles to soothe the little one while your brother hunts sheep. This is no time for playing. There is work to be done! Inside!\" Your father bellows.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go inside", "result": "You quickly hurry inside, followed by your twin brother. You live in a small village of small huts. Luckily enough, you father is Chieftain Magrash, which entitles you to sleep in the Chieftain's Hut, the largest hut. As you enter, you see your father sitting in a rough woolen tunic, sharpening his greatsword. In front of him is his heavy steel plate armor, as well as several trophies from his battles.\n\n\n\"Mazkil, Gruzub, you fight too much. Mama is trying to put Dagden to sleep.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, papa.\" You both reply.\n\n\n\"Who won the fight?\" He asks.\n\n\n\"I did!\" You both say, before glaring at each other.\n\n\n\"You don't know? Perhaps you're not fighting enough. Gruzub, go down to the river and fetch water for the stew. Mazkil, sharpen my sword. I need light the hearth.\"\n\n\nYou go over to the sword, and begin to sharpen it against the whet stone, while looking over your father's trophies: An Elven Dagger, a Shrunken head, a battered golden shield, a shattered battleaxe, a studded mace, a series of Tribal Necklaces and a Dragon Skull.\n\n\n\"Papa?\"\n\n\n\"Yes?\"\n\n\n\"Can you tell me about your trophies?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"I've told you many times about my trophies.\"\n\n\n\"Tell me again.\"\n\n\nPapa chuckles, a harsh sound you've come to love.\n\n\n\"Which would you like to know about?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Elven Dagger (Elves)", "result": "\"Ah, the dagger. One of my favorite. The Elves are a race of \"beautiful\" and \"perfect\" creatures who don't know a battleaxe from a wood-axe. Death to them all. They're stupid in things like how to start a fire and how to hunt, yet seem to love philosophy and reading. Death should take them. Still, they're fast with a blade and good with a bow, which I found out while hunting a party of them that came into my territory. That knife nearly went into my throat before I impaled the little bastard wielding it.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Shrunken Head (Necromancer's Army)", "result": "\"Ah, that! I took that off a large bastard with a sword twice as large as you.That damn Necromancer, I can't remember his name, rose Zombies Ghouls, Skeletons, Wights, Death Knights, Specters, Ghosts and who knows what else in his quest for power. He led a small group of Death Knights up here to add some Ork Zombies to his collection. He ran faster than a deer when he saw what a true Orc can do! Ha!\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Battered Golden Shield (Empire of Man)", "result": "\"The Shield? The Shield... Ah, yes! The shield! I took it off some fancy knight who drank too much and fought too little. Let me tell you about men, little one, there's a lot of them, but they're weak, stupid and cowardly. They break easily. They're the biggest threat to our little old home, but they're too busy fighting the elves to come fuck with my tribe.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Shattered Battleaxe (Dwarves)", "result": "\"Ah, this one! I fought the dwarves when I was young, back when my name was Youngblood like you. I earned the name Magrash Shatteraxe that day! The Dwarves are small bastards and the sight of one will make you chuckle, but I love 'em! The Gods made them jesters to amuse, and the Dwarves became angry, stubborn, heavy-drinkers who can wield an axe! They hide in their tunnels and mine too much, but I respect them anyway.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Studded Mace (Rebel Orcs)", "result": "\"Ah... the mace. Boy, some Orcs stick to their tribe. Some wander as mercenaries, or sign up as soldiers. Some become Rebels, raiders targeting every humans, elves, dwarves and anyone else that gets in their way. They're mad, stubborn, bloodthirsty fools. I took that weapon off on of them trying to convince Old Klaim to join up. I also took a few of his teeth, but I don't have those anymore.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Tribal Necklaces (Tribal Orks)", "result": "\"The tribal necklaces? Boy, show some respect! Those are the Chieftain's necklaces, that show who's the boss of this tribe! Us Orcs have always been a hot-headed folk. Lots of fighting, drinking, eating, fucking and some more fighting when you're finished. We stick to the tribes, each led by the great Chieftain. It's a good life, boy.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Ask about the Dragon Skull (Dragons)", "result": "\"Ah, the skull. Dragons are fearsome creatures. They come in many colors, all with powerful skills. They speak Dragontongue, and many speak our language. Some are intelligent, while some are incredibly feral and wild from years of isolation. Their flames tend to be tinted the same color as their scales, with an afinity for hoarding treasure and waging war and destruction. They're solitary creatures, Dragons. If you ever slay one, Gorgok will look upon you with joy.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stop asking about Trophies", "result": "\"I'm finished, Papa!\"\n\n\nPapa picks up the blade, and licks the edge.\n\n\n\"Yes... Sharp enough to shed dragon blood. Well done, Mazkil. Now, go fetch gather fruit.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Four years later...", "result": "\"You've been on this planet fourteen years, and you haven't learned a thing, boys, unless you've seen me and Dendar take out a boar!\"\n\n\nYou walk with Gruzub, your older brother Bagig and his friend Dendar, out in the woods. You have a small iron knife at your belt and a bow clutched in your hands. So far in your short life, you've only subsided on deer, goat and chicken, but after today you'll be able to feast on the boar you've helped kill.\n\n\n\"On your first hunt, it's tradition to eat a deer's dropping to gain it's scent.\" Dendar remarks. \"Everybody knows that.\"\n\n\nDendar and Bagig pause, dropping to one knee, pointing to some small droppings.\n\n\n\"Go on, Gruzub, Mazkill. Dig in.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Eat the droppings", "result": "You drop to your knees, close your eyes, and quickly swallow a small piece of dropping. Bagig pats you on the head, and nods to Gruzub. Gruzub does the same, and with that, Dendar bursts out laughing.\n\n\n\"You two are idiots!\" Mazkil and Gruzub Youngblood, eating deer droppings.\"\n\n\nThey chuckle as your face reddens. You open your mouth to yell at them, but then freeze. You spot a beautiful deer just at the edge of a small creek out of sight. You grab your brother, and point to it.\n\n\n\"Ah, well spotted, Mazkil Shiteater. Let's catch it, Dendar.\"\n\n\n\"We can't get distracted. We came here to hunt boar.\"\n\n\n\"We'll catch the deer and the boar!\" Bagig cries, charging off after the deer. \n\n\nThe Deer bursts off running, with Bagig and Dendar quickly following.\n\n\n\"Stay there!\" Bagig yells at you as he leaves.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay there", "result": "You stand patiently with Gruzub, who looks at you.\n\n\n\"Just so you know, Oraal is mine.\" He says quietly.\n\n\nYou ponder this for a second. Oraal is a fat, lazy girl who's the daughter of a swordsmaker.\n\n\n\"Oraal? Has her father promised you a fine blade if you crawl between her legs?\" You giggle.\n\n\n\"Hey! She has proclaimed her...!\" He begins, before his eyes widen.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask what's wrong", "result": "You open your mouth to speak, but you're hit in the back and sent flying through the air. You hit the ground, your head knocking against a tree root and drawing blood. You shakily stand, drawing your knife, as you're faced with a large boar preparing to charge again.\n\n\n\"Watch out!\" Gruzub yells, running to help, but it's clear he's far too slow.\n\n\nThe Boar charges at you, it's tusks looking deadly sharp at they near you...", "action_results": [{"action": "Roll to the side", "result": "You roll to the side, narrowly dodging a goring from the beast's tusks. As it runs past, you leap forward with your knife, cutting through thick fur and drawing a fair amount of blood. It squeals, before running forward and turning around once more for another charge. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Dodge again", "result": "As the boar charges, you try to roll to the side, but it's prepared this time. You yell as it's tusks slash your side, causing a massive wound.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "Gruzub charges over and stabs the boar in the side with his dagger, giving you ample time to leap up. You charge at the boar, stabbing it repeatedly in the neck. It squeals, but it's easily killed before it can resist. It falls dead at your feat.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rejoice, for the enemy is vanquished!", "result": "You rest your foot on the boar's tusks, laughing.\n\n\n\"Ha! I've slain the boar!\"\n\n\n\"Hey!\" Gruzub yells. \"I helped.\"\n\n\nDendar and Bagig burst trough the trees, a deer straddled between them.\n\n\n\"We caught the deer. I bet...\" They pause, noticing the boar. \"Cursed Reaper, is that a boar?\"\n\n\nYou nod proudly.\n\n\n\"Death's Head, Mazkil, you've impressed me. No longer will you be called Mazkil Youngblood, now you'll be Mazkil Boarsbane!\" Bagig laughs.\n\n\nYou smile proudly, knowing you will feast on boar meat tonight.", "action_results": [{"action": "One year later...", "result": "\"Mazkil Boarsbane! Gruzub Fastfoot! Let's go.\" Papa yells.\n\n\nYou quickly follow your father out of your small home and onto the small dirt road that interconnects the village.\n\n\n\"Boys, you've done well. I was so proud when I saw you best Harkor Clawfist in a fight, I got you a present.\"\n\n\nYou smile fondly. Harkor had insulted your brother Bagig and Dendar. They had only been recently killed by a Death Knight from the remnants of the Necromancer's Army, and you made sure that Harkor suffered for his insult. By the time you and Gruzub were finished, his face was half-caved in.\n\n\nYour father hands you each a small amount of gold coins.\n\n\n\"Dendar Arroweye is heading down to Riverton today. He's taking the cart to pick up some goods to help us get through the winter. Take the cart, go enjoy yourself.\"\n\n\nYou thank him, and eagerly count your coins. 25 Gold Coins, all shining proudly at you.\n\n\n\"Go now, boys. Enjoy yourselves.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Head down to Riverton", "result": "After a long ride to Riverton with Dendar who mostly insults you and Gruzub, you eventually arrive at the small town. You eyes immediately find multiple ways to spend your precious coins. There's a brothel in the poorer section of town, a large shop full of delicious foods you wish to sample, a small gambling ring and a tavern.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave Riverton", "result": "Once you've spent your gold coins, you make your way back to Dendar's cart. Unfortunately, you find yourself in the poorer part of town, clearly having taken a wrong turn. As you make your way through a side street, a voice cries out.\n\n\n\"Hello! A little lost, are we?\" A voice cries.\n\n\nYou turn, and are faced with a trio of men holding knives.\n\n\n\"Fuck off.\" You grunt angrily.\n\n\n\"'Fuck off', he says. What an angry orc.\" \n\n\nA voice from behind you says.\n\n\nYou turn, to see two more men wielding knives. \n\n\n\"Listen, sir. Give us your coins, and we'll see you find your way to where you're going.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge the men", "result": "You run forward, swinging your blade. You slash the throat of one of the men and he topples backwards. The second man cuts your shoulder deeply, and you grab his head and smash it repeatedly against a wall, crushing it into a pulp. You feel another knife slash your back and you yell, twisting around to jab another man through the eye and kill him. The two remaining men seem nervous, but one runs forward in a burst of courage. He dives forward, sticking his knife through your arm, causing you to drop your knife. With your other hand you grab him, and push your thumb through his eye as he screams, before stomping on his head until he's a smear on the floor. By then, the final man had left, running as fast as he could.", "action_results": [{"action": "Collapse", "result": "You fall to the ground with a thud, and lose consciousness. When you wake up, you're in the back of Dendar's cart, with Gruzub next to you.\n\n\n\"What happened?\"\n\n\n\"You killed a lot of people, collapsed, and I dragged you here.\"\n\n\n\"Ah. I'm still alive, then. Good.\"\n\n\n\"We'll get you medical help when we get back to the village.\"\n\n\n\"Good.\" You grunt.\n\n\n\"Well done with the thieves, Mazkil. You've proven yourself a true Orc.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "One year later...", "result": "Orc Tribal Customs are simple. The Chieftain's sons fight, and the winner takes over for him when the Chieftain is killed or reaches forty. Papa has just hit forty, so something you've been preparing for all your life. You sit next to Gruzub in front of the Shrine of Gorgok, the Warrior God, praying silently.\n\n\n\"I'll try not to kill you, you know.\" Gruzub says quietly.\n\n\n\"I'll try not to kill you.\" You reply.\n\n\n\"Papa killed his brother.\" Gruzub notes. \"Death is quiet likely for one of us.\"\n\n\n\"Grandpapa didn't kill his brother.\" You add.\n\n\n\"Fair point. Whatever it comes down to, I love you. You are my brother, and I would be proud to be killed by you.\"\n\n\n\"Well, I'm great and mighty. Everyone I kill should be proud of it.\" You chuckle.\n\n\n\"I take it back, I'm killing you, you prick.\"\n\n\nYou both laugh, as Papa arrives. He quietly removes his tribal beads, and drapes them around the Shrine.\n\n\n\"Ah. My neck feels bare.\" He sighs. \"Boys, tomorrow is going to be the most important day of your life. One of you will become the victor and chieftain, the other will fall and may die. I just want you to both know I feel nothing but pride towards you.\"\n\n\nYou struggle not to tear up, and by the way Gruzub is tensing, you know he's also struggling.\n\n\n\"I've always treated you as my father treated me, stern but loving. Whatever you become, be it Chieftain, Warrior, Mercenary or even a whining baker, you will be the greatest at it there's ever been.\"\n\n\nYour father nods, and lays his great sword in front of the Shrine.\n\n\n\"It's late. Go, sleep, rest up.\"\n\n\nYou nod, and stand and begin heading to the hut. As you walk, Gruzub begins to chuckle.\n\n\n\"What?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"Do you remember the time when we were boys when we tried to make a glider out of chicken feathers?\"\n\n\nYou laugh.\n\n\n\"And we were standing on top of the mountain, with you about to jump.\" You add.\n\n\nGruzub nods, smiling.\n\n\n\"And you yanked me back when you realized chickens can't fly.\" Gruzub smiles.\n\n\n\"Ha! You would've died! Remember when we caught our first boar?\" You smile.\n\n\n\"Yeah. I ate so much boar that night I almost puked.\"\n\n\n\"That was the mead, Gruzub.\"\n\n\n\"I miss those days.\"Gruzub nods.\n\n\nYou arrive at the hut, and you grab Gruzub in a hug.\n\n\n\"Good luck tommorow.\" You say.\n\n\n\"Good luck.\"\n\n\nYou both go to bed, scared and nervous about tomorrow.", "action_results": [{"action": "The next day...", "result": "You stand, fully armored in plated steel, next to Gruzub and the Shrine of Gorgok. Priest Jinser stands by the shrine, holding two short swords.\n\n\n\"Gorgok! Watch over this fight and please bless these warriors. Watch over this fight and see that the greatest Chieftain is chosen!\" The Priest wails.\n\n\nHe holds the two swords out, and you grab one. Gruzub grabs the other.\n\n\n\"Let the fight commence! First to render the other unable to stand wins!\"\n\n\nYou take up a fighting stance, as does Gruzub. You slowly move forward, before you both swing your blades. Sparks fly as they collide, and the battle commences. You land the first blow, smacking into Gruzub's chest as he stumbles backwards. He draws blood first, slashing open a small bit of unprotected arm. It's obvious that you're the far superior fighter, with Gruzub struggling to avoid your attacks. Then, the Fates pluck your string.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pluck", "result": "An eagle, far above you, drops a small turtle from a great height, hoping it's shell will shatter on the ground. The turtle smacks into your head, knocking you backwords. Gruzub takes advantage of your confusion, stepping forward and thrusting his blade. The blade enters you chest, Gruzub carefully avoiding your organs but thrusting deep enough to cause you to scream. When he withdraws, blood spurts out, and you struggle to stand.\n\n\n\"The Fates seem to dislike Mazkil.\" The Priest notes loudly, though you barely listen.\n\n\nGruzub continues to attack, and you barely manage to defend yourself. Eventually, he kicks your leg and you fall backwards. This leaves your throat exposed, for Gruzub to easily slash your throat and make sure you fall and never get up.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to regain a fighting stance", "result": "To your surprise, Gruzub hesitates, before taking up fighting stance again, allowing you to gain a defensive position to defend your open throat and stop your demise. Your energy waning, you decide to take one final effort to defeat Gruzub. He swings his sword at your legs, attempting to floor you, but you block the shot and head butt him. He falls backwards, and you swing your blade, smacking into his head. His helmet flies into the air, leaving his head and neck unguarded. You know you don't have enough energy to continue fighting. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Behead Gruzub", "result": "You swing your blade down with a roar. You sword connects with his neck, and his head falls to the ground. You drop to your knees, looking at your dead brother. You barely comprehend the Priest grabbing your hand and holding it up, loudly proclaiming you the victor. Papa walks over, draping the Tribal Chieftain beads and necklaces around your neck. Mama walks out and gently kisses your head, before closing Gruzub's eyes on his decapitated head. The Priest has the body taken away to be burned to ensure it makes it to the afterlife. You struggle not to weep for your brother, while Papa kneels down to talk to you. \n\n\n\"You are Chieftain now, Mazkil. Chieftain Mazkil Redblade, leader of the Red Blades. You will lead the tribe to greatness. Tonight, we celebrate. We celebrate your ascension to chieftain, we celebrate the great fight, we celebrate your brother's journey to the Afterlife. He fought so well I'm sure Gorgok himself is Gruzub's cup-bearer.\" \n\n\nYou nod. The path you're going down is set. Gone are dreams of becoming a mercenary or a raider. Now, you are a Chieftain.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "The Path of the Chieftain\n\n\nYou sit on the small wooden Chief's Throne in the Main Hall. Tribal Necklaces and Beads are around your neck, feeling a lot heavier than they are thanks to the guilt and grief from Gruzub's death. Papa has vacated his role as chief completely and given all his responsibilities to you, taking Mama and leaving to a small farm up the mountain, leaving you in charge. Still, he's left you with two lieutenants and advisors, Elder Doct and Thraka Flameborn.\n\n\nElder Doct is an aging Orc, the oldest in your village. She is a traditionalist, who had fond memories of the old days when warriors fought duels for honor and farms were farmed by hand with hoes rather than with mules and donkeys. She values older values like honor, isolationism and keeping the village moral and traditional.\n\n\nThraka Flameborn is the polar opposite of Doct. He is one of the few Orc Mages, specialized in pyromatics and flame-based magics. He is a very modern and progressive orc, who wants for the industrialization and modernization of the village as well as a better relationships with the outside world.\n\n\nThe pair enter the Main Hall, and begin approaching you. Elder Doct is in ancient, dusty armor from his days as a warrior, and has a face like a wrinkled, rotting prune, while Thraka Flameborn is a younger, smaller Orc who looks like a child playing dress up with his father's red Mage Robes.\n\n\nHuh. Perhaps you are still bitter and angry at the world because of your brother's death.\n\n\n\"Congratulations at you ascension to Chieftain, Chieftain Mazkil.\" Elder Doct says happily.\n\n\n\"My brother just died.\"\n\n\n\"Oh... Yes, sorry, Chieftain.\" Doct apologizes.\n\n\n\"What's the issue?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"Raiders have been spotted at the Eastern Woods, by Jagik Longstride. She says they've been camped there for at least three days, raiding surrounding farms and market caravans.\" Thraka says.\n\n\n\"What am I to do, then?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"You should grab your sword and lead our warriors to wipe them out.\" Elder Doct says.\n\n\nYou grab your father's long sword, or your long sword now. It's a massive steel blade, the blade inscribed with Orc Runes. It's been handed down your family for four generations, when your great grandfather shattered his family sword on an Elven Shield.\n\n\n\"Where are the men?\"\n\n\n\"Down at the armoury.\" Thraka adds.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head to the armory", "result": "You sling the sword over you shoulder, and begin marching towards the armory. The Orcs are all standing around, wearing plate armor and chainmail, wielding swords, axes and maces. They respond to your arrival with eagerness and bloodthirstiness.\n\n\n\"Ah! The Chieftain's here! Time for battle!\" One of them says gleefully.\n\n\nBecause of your age, you know you quickly need to take charge and show your dominence.\n\n\n\"Alright men! We had killing to do! On my lead!\" You shout.\n\n\nYou begin marching towards the Eastern Woods, followed by the the Orcs. With that, you begin leading your War Party towards bloodshed.", "action_results": [{"action": "Two Hours Later...", "result": "You spot smoke just in the distance, where the raiders are presumably camped.\n\n\n\"Orcs!\" You loudly whisper. \"To arms! We'll wipe out the fiends to the last man.\"\n\n\nYou move forward slowly, further through the woods. You arrive at the edge of a small glade. There is a large opening where there's several dozen tents. A group of around thirty Orcs wearing chainmail armor and wielding axes, short swords and maces. You give a few hushed orders to various Orcs to target the various flanks to make sure not a single raider survives. Then, you raise your sword.\n\n\n\"CHARGE!\" You roar, sprinting forward.\n\n\nThe Raiders are quickly taken by surprise, grabbing any nearby weapons and raising them in defense. You swing your sword, which bites into one of their necks and beheads him in one clean sweep. You kick a second to the floor with one swift kick to the head, knocking him to the floor. You raise your sword and stab downwards, going through the raider's stomach. Within a few seconds, the fighting is over. The raiders have been quickly wiped out to the last orc, leaving none alive.\n\n\n\"This was quicker than I had hoped.\" One of the Orcs remarks.\n\n\n\"Orders, Chieftain?\" Another asks, turning to you.\n\n\n\"Burn the tents, the bodies and take anything worth taking.\" You reply.\n\n\n\"Yes, Chieftain Mazkil.\"\n\n\nYour men quickly begin removing armor, weapons and jewelry from the dead Orcs, and wrapping their corpses in tents. Once this is finished with all the corpses, they set the wrapped corpses alight, which quickly begin burning. You sniff the air, and smell the delicious smell of sizzling flesh.\n\n\n\"Chieftain! I counted the amount of beds versus corpses. Twenty dead raiders, but there's over eighty beds.\"\n\n\n\"There's more! We believe there's at least sixty more raiders off on a mission at the moment. Orders, Chieftain?\"\n\n\nOne of the Orcs, one of the very few archers you've brought, Kanim Darkwit, steps forward. \n\n\n\"Sir. The Raiders will be hungry and tired. They'll be here soon. We can lay an ambush. There's a good vantage point in one of the trees...\"\n\n\n\"Coward! Where's your honor, boy?\" Another Orc, Jakku Bearsbane, roars. \"We're not abandoning all honor and reason in favor of hiding like does! We find the raiders, and wipe them out to the last man.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Return to the village", "result": "\"Curse the Gods, I'm not wasting my time out here in a freezing, empty forest waiting for what could be days, weeks even, for the raiders to return, all while subsiding on nuts and berries like a fucking chipmunk. We head back to the village for a warm meal and a large drink.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, Chieftain.\" The Orcs all bark back.\n\n\nYou wipe the blood off your longsword on the wet grass, and turn to begin the long walk home.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head back to the village", "result": "The next day, you walk along the street, Thraka and Doct off managing your work for a while. You survey your village. Children are brawling in the streets, the elders are drinking and the adults are working. Everything's good. You think to yourself. You notice a young Orc woman who's name you haven't learnt, and feel a pang in your heart as you notice how beautiful she is. You feel a pang in another place, but that's neither here nor there. You realize that one of, and perhaps the best, duty of the Chieftain is to have a heir to the throne and get married. You'll try find someone soon enough. Not today, though. You continue strolling around the village, before you notice at the edge of town, a trail of caravans approaching. You raise an eyebrow, as there are no scheduled caravans set to arrive over the next few days. You walk up, and to your surprise, notice the caravaneers are not the Orcs you're used to seeing. They're all men. Usually there's a few men mixed in with the Orcs that run the caravans. You walk over to the caravan.\n\n\n\"Hey! Who are you, then?\" You ask loudly.\n\n\nThe Humans on board are wearing red cloth with gold Eagle symbols embroidered on them.\n\n\n\"Greetings! I am Giorgio Lates. I am a merchant from the Kingdom of Mankind.\"\n\n\n\"I recognize the sigil. What do you want?\"\n\n\n\"I am a merchant, kind sir. Orcs are famous for their steelwork, and I had the pleasure of working with some Orc Mercenaries. They're blades, axes and maces are unrivaled, except for Elvish blades, which are as easy to find as an honest merchant. Which, you so happen to have found.\" Giorgio says, winking.\n\n\n\"You wish to buy blades?\"\n\n\n\"Buy? Not exactly. I doubt you have much use for my gold. I wish to swap, to barter, to trade.\"\n\n\n\"For what?\"\n\n\n\"We have much to trade. Food, Drink, Steel, Iron, Wool, Jewelry, Gold, Silver and much, much more. We wish to open up a trade route between here and the Empire.\" Giorgio grins.\n\n\nYou frown. Traders are prone to take advantage of humble villages like yours. The Village is also dedicated to crops, farm work and general self-sufficiency. To increase your smithing and weapons production, you'd need to sacrifice your self-sufficiency. Still, it could increase your village's profit and the standard of living.", "action_results": [{"action": "Agree to trade with the Kingdom of Man", "result": "\"Yes. Yes... I like this plan. I will expand the blacksmith's, and begin producing weapons for the Kingdom of Man.\"\n\n\n\"Ah! Fantastic, Sir!\" Giorgio replies happily. \"I promise, you won't regret this. I'll increase the amount of caravans coming up here, and have the first few stuffed with a little... gift, a show of appreciation. I've you've never had Elk, or Trout, or Lamb, you'll enjoy the caravans.\"\n\n\n\"It'll take us some time to begin producing weapons, but once we're started we'll be able to produce quite a bit.\"\n\n\n\"Ah, good, good.\" Giorgio grins.\n\n\nYou negotiate the smaller details and offer the merchants each a bed and mead, but they politely refuse to head back down the mountain. Despite Giorgio's friendliness, it's quite obvious most of the other merchants and guards were unnerved by being so deep in Orc territory. Still, you think this trade deal with greatly benefit the Red Blades.", "action_results": [{"action": "Three Days Later...", "result": "You sit on your throne in the Main Hall, in the midst of a feast to celebrate the death of Chieftain Dadic, your Great-Great-Great-Grandfather, who was brutally stabbed to death by Elven Assassins. Despite being unarmed, surprised and quite old, he put up a grand fight. Twenty Elves entered this very great hall to assassinate him, three went out. Thraka and Dokt stand on either side of you. For once, they both agree on what you should do, although Thraka's much more brutally honest.\n\n\n\"Find a girl to fuck.\" He says.\n\n\n\"What Thraka Flameborn means is...\"\n\n\n\"To get your dick inside a girl.\" Thraka laughs, to Dokt's embarrassment and frustration. \n\n\n\"Chieftain, every Chieftain needs one to share their soul with. You need a mate.\" Dokt says.\n\n\nYou survey the room. You spot a young Orc girl dancing in the crowd. She's small and cute, and you briefly make eye contact. She gives you a flirty wink. A pretty girl would do good to help you survive the cold winter nights.\n\n\nMaking use of the drink and food is a tall warrior. Her head is cut short and she has a large, impressive blade on her side. A warrior is someone you could relate to and respect as a mate.\n\n\nOne the opposite side (both of the room and orientation), a youngish Orc stands quietly, a leatherbound book in his hands. He looks intelligent, but also has soft features and a nice smile, which he quickly flashes at you.\n\n\nFinally, there's a massive beat of an Orc holding a blade that could cleave horses in half with one blow leans against a wall. You recognize him as Ironsoul, a fantastic warrior notorious for spending large amounts of time in brothels in the company of Orcs who choose to have an adventurous life working in the brothel rather than on the battlefield.", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk to the dancing Orc", "result": "You walk over to the dancing orc, and smile.\n\n\n\"Hello.\"\n\n\n\"Hi.\" She replies cheerfully.\n\n\n\"I am Chieftain Mazkil.\"\n\n\nShe giggles.\n\n\n\"Obviously. I make sure I know the name of the Chieftain.\"\n\n\n\"Ah. Good.\" You reply, awkwardly.\n\n\nYou realize while you're very skilled and courageous in the art of warfare, you suck at flirting. Thankfully, she's better and very interested.\n\n\n\"I am Sarunt. So, do you want to get a drink, Mazkil?\"\n\n\nYou nod eagerly, and head over to the drink stand.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue spending time with Sarunt", "result": "You spend the next few hours talking with your newfound mate. Sarunt is quite intelligent and flirty, almost your exact opposite. You'll make sure that your relationship continues and develops into what could be a prosperous marriage.", "action_results": [{"action": "Four Weeks Later...", "result": "You sit on your throne, resting your head on your blade as Thraka Flameborn and Elder Dokt tell you about the village's state of affairs.\n\n\n\"There's been a change in the management of the College of Alexandria. They've begun to accept Orc students.\" Thraka says to you. \n\n\n\"Well, this is very good for racial relations, but what do the Red Blades care?\" \n\n\n\"There are many more profitable jobs that can be found if you work in the College. We could greatly improve their lives.\"\n\n\n\"These jobs would take these people away from profiting the Red Blades, cost massive amounts of money, and mots likely they wouldn't receive these jobs for being Orcs. These students wouldn't be able to get the jobs, and they wouldn't be taught how to farm or fight, so when they came back here without jobs, they couldn't work here.\"\n\n\n\"The Elder exaggerates greatly. There's plenty of work ot be found, especially with Orcs. Learning at the College of Alexandria would mean that our children would have better lives.\"\n\n\nYou briefly consider the thought. Perhaps the Young Orcs would have better lives in and after the College, but it would definitely take away from the tribe's size, and perhaps the Orcs would be left untrained in manual labor or the ability to find actual work after discrimination stops them from finding educated work.", "action_results": [{"action": "Send young Orcs to the College", "result": "You decide to send these young Orcs to the College. You want them to have a better life than you and your ancestors have had, and make sure the Orcs aren't left out in the education world.", "action_results": [{"action": "Five Weeks Later...", "result": "You sit on the Throne, looking over hunting cycles. Gemin's Point is good hunting ground, but it could lead to fighting between the Dead Bone Tribe, who also uses the area. You could send hunters there, not send hunters there, or the third and by far the greatest option, fall on your own sword and end the painful trial worse than any other Orc has endured of doing crop rotations or hunting areas.\n\n\nYou hear yells outside, and the doors to the town hall is kicked open. A group of six Orcs appear, dragging a brutally beaten man with them.\n\n\n\"Chieftain! We have found a man in our territory, the goat fucker.\" One of the Orcs yells, tossing the man in front of you. \"He's been hunting our deer and boar for weeks, it seems.\"\n\n\n\"Explain yourself, human, before I release my warriors to tear you apart.\"\n\n\n\"Sir, please.\" He says, begging. \"I'm from the village of Eckleglade. It was destroyed by an Elvish Assault Party, and we were forced to flee. Many of us headed to the hills and mountains, to hide from Elvish attacks, and formed small camps up there. I was only trying to hunt to feed my family.\"\n\n\n\"Sir, orders?\" One of the Orcs asks you. \"Shall I take his head?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Have the Trespasser executed", "result": "\"Hmmm... Where are the camps, trespasser?\"\n\n\n\"Sir, if I tell you...\"\n\n\n\"Don't preside to know who I am or what I'll do, trespasser.\"\n\n\n\"They're at the Morinspeck Mines, sir.\"\n\n\n\"Good.\"\n\n\nYou stand, and swing your blade. The Man doesn't have time to blink before his head falls to the ground, rolling onto the floor. You turn to your men.\n\n\n\"Send warriors up to Morinspeck Miens. Force them out, and kill anyone who resists or refuses to go.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, Chieftain.\" They say cheerily, running off to find armor and weapons.\n\n\n\"Well, that takes care of that problem.\" You think, kicking the head aside.", "action_results": [{"action": "Five Weeks Later...", "result": "\"Chieftain! Chieftain!\"\n\n\n\"Yes?\" You ask.\n\n\nYou're met with a young Orc, a cousin of yours, who reminds you of Gruzub. You feel a twang of guilt, before deciding that in honor of Gruzub, you're going to kill this Orc if he brings up something like the placement of the new well or whether to build the new stable of stone or wood.\n\n\n\"There's a disaster up at the Kes Nests.\"\n\n\n\"Disaster? That's a strong word.\"\n\n\n\"It's accurate. A group of Zombies have engaged a Red Dragon perched on the mountain.\"\n\n\n\"If Death and Destruction met on a Road.\" You quote, remembering one of the few books you read as a child.\n\n\n\"What?\" The Orc grunts.\n\n\n\"The Poem, where the Grim Reaper meets the Mother of Dragons on a road. They debate their roles, with the Grim Reaper saying how his job is necessary ot prevent overpopulation, while the Mother of Dragons says that she prevents empires from wiping out all... What the fuck am I doing? I'm not explaining a children's poem to you.\"\n\n\n\"Sorry Chieftain. The Warriors are suggesting you lead a party up there.\"\n\n\n\"To do what?\"\n\n\nThe Orc shrugs.", "action_results": [{"action": "Lead an army up to the Kes Nests", "result": "\"Assemble the warriors.\" You say. \"Get me a group of sixty warriors who are hungry for blood.\"\n\n\nYou have the group assembled, and quickly begin making your way up the mountain. About halfway up, you begin to regret it.\n\n\n\"It's cold, my feet hurt and I'm fucking tired.\" You grunt as you trudge up the mountain.\n\n\n\"Damn right, Mazkil.\" Urug Eaglebow says.\n\n\nYou look further up the mountain, and hear the howls and rasps of the dead as well as the roars and screeches of the dragon. There's few dragons up here, so you presume this Red Dragon fighting is Mont Pre'Igni Rubrum, a near unpronounceable name, or the Volcano of Gargarum. The Undead are no doubt deserters from the Necromancer's Army. You reach the top of mountain, at the edge of a crater. At the center, a large group of two dozen undead soldiers armed with spears and swords are attempting to kill the dragon. It seems the undead are very unmatched. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight both the Dragon and the Undead", "result": "You charge forward, your blade swinging.\n\n\n\"Go! Send the dead back to their graves and the dragon to Gorgok's Trophy Room!\"\n\n\nYou behead one of the undead, its rotting skull flying through the air. You feel a blade slash your back, before a jet of flame sets you alight, melting your skull.", "action_results": [{"action": "Death", "result": "You let out a pitiful scream as your life is taken from you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Attack the Undead", "result": "\"Send the dead back to their graves!\" You roar, charging into battle. \n\n\nYou swing your blade, beheading a rotting head and sending it through the air. You stab another through the heart, killing him instantly. You headbutt another, with such strength that the spine breaks and the zombie collapses on the ground. The undead are so unmatched that they're wiped out within seconds. You turn, to the snarling face of a dragon. It's voice, a low growl, shakes your very core.\n\n\n\"Orcs... Why have you come to my home?\"\n\n\n\"I... I came to help.\" You say nervously. \"I wanted to make sure this fight doesn't move into my territory.\"\n\n\n\"A wise move, mortal. Your assistance was unnecessary, but polite. Please, let me give you a gift.\"\n\n\nThe Dragon turns and stomps away into a cave. A few minutes later, it comes back. It opens its mouth, letting golden coins and gems fall out. Not a massive amount, but enough to fund the building of a new well and to get new bows for the hunters.\n\n\n\"Thank you, mighty dragon.\" You say.\n\n\n\"Of course.\"\n\n\nYou bow, and begin trudging down the mountain. ", "action_results": [{"action": "One Month Later...", "result": "You walk up a mountain, trudging through the harsh snow. You're cold despite being wrapped in furs and leathers, and you really need to piss, but you know that if you tried, your dick would freeze off. You lost three farmers and a dozen goats to a Frost Troll wandering down from the mountain in the cold, icy winter that's just started. You're taking a five war parties of twenty warriors each to wipe out any trolls up in the mountains. You lead the main war party of the best warriors who wish to target the cave system most likely to hold sheltering trolls. Wind and snow begins to block your view. You know you need to find shelter soon.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hunker down in the cold", "result": "You drop down, putting up whatever tents you have. You crawl inside, wrapping furs and leathers around you. You hope the storm clears up soon. Within an hour and a half, the cold is so brutal that you lose all feeling. The snow's bad you have no idea where you're going. After four hours of waiting, you feel a sudden sensation of warmth. You begin unstrapping your armor to cool down. You're hot and tired. A quick nap in the snow would be nice...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Move to the nearest Cave system to escape the cold", "result": "You quickly speed up, heading towards a cave. You manage to find it within ten minutes, managing to take shelter. You rush inside, heading quickly deeper into the cave. You eventually find a point where you're sheltered for the most part from the freezing winds and snow. You feel warm air behind you, and you turn. A massive bear stands in front of you. It swings its paw, smacking you into a wall, leaving massive scratches across your chest plate. The bear is quickly beheaded by the warriors, stabbed repeatedly through the body. It's fur is quickly removed and the Orcs wrap it around themselves.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the cave for the Trolls", "result": "You stand, brushing snow and some blood off your chest plate, and begin heading down one of the tunnels. The Orcs light torches, brightening up the tunnel walls. You raise your longsword, watching the walls. Shadows dance, but you see no trolls. Eventually, you come to an opening, where it opens into a massive chamber. Inside are four massive humanoid figures wrapped in bear furs. \n\n\n\"Trolls!\" You loudly whisper. \n\n\nThe Trolls are eating several dead goats which have been brutally town apart. You slowly approach, your sword raised. When you get close enough, you swing. Your blade swings, slashing through the ankles of one of them. You stab the falling troll through the side, slicing open its organs. You pull out your blade and block a swing of a stone cudgel from a troll. The Orcs quickly attack, stabbing through the legs and groin of them, killing them quickly. The Trolls collapse on the ground, where they're hacked apart by the Orcs.\n\n\n\"Good job, Orcs. Somebody start a fire. We'll take shelter from the cold, here.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Three Months Later...", "result": "The Red Blades have survived another winter. Once again, Thraka Flameborn and Elder Dokt stand to give you an endless stream of tasks to sort out. The main three are the Farok Mines, the problem of excess warriors and the growing worship of Ka.\n\n\n\"Chieftain! We have unearthed a massive iron and coal mine down the mountain, the Farok Mines. It was used by men to supply the war machine, but was abandoned because it was left undefended and abandoned by man. Still, you have excess Orc Workers who could head down to the mines to work, with only a small amount of the profits taken being given to the Kingdom of Man in payment for using the mine. It would mean working for the Kingdom of Man, but could prove very profitable for the village.\" Thraka says.\n\n\n\"We still have mines up the mountain, Orc mines. We don't need to come crawling to the Kingdom of Man in order for a pittance of iron and coal. They'll be able to make more profit in the Orc Mines.\" Elder Dokt says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Send Workers to work in the Farok Mines", "result": "You decide that sending the workers to work in the Farok Mines is the best idea. These Workers make a small profit, but this strengthens your relationship with the industrialization complex and the Kingdom of Man.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "The next issue is the issue of excess warriors. The Red Blades are producing excess warriors, all young, bloodthirsty warriors who wish to fight. You can send them to fight with the Raiders, the Orcs who fight against the Kingdom of Man's expansion into Orc territory and their taking advantage of Orc Tribes and Villages. You could also send them to work as Mercenaries for the Kingdom of Man in the Man-Elf War.", "action_results": [{"action": "Send them to work as Raiders", "result": "You send your excess warriors to join the raiders. They'll fight for Orc honor and to defend the Orcs from exploitation and expansion by the Kingdom of Man.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "The next and final issue is the spread of a new religion. The worship of Ka, a monotheistic Creator God, has grown popular among young Orcs for reasons you're not sure. This is leading people away from the worship of the many Gods, especially Gorgok.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ban the religion of Ka", "result": "You ban the religion of Ka quickly. Its spread is stopped, and although some villagers worship him in private, most abandon him in favor of Gorgok and many.", "action_results": [{"action": "One Month Later...", "result": "You walk through the village, watching the villagers. You're tired of fighting and making decisions, so you're heading home. You reach the large chieftain's hut.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go inside", "result": "You walk inside, and are met by a small, thin figure in a dress that is far too fancy for an Orc.\n\n\n\"Ah! Mazkil! You're home.\"\n\n\n\"Sarunt! Good to see you!\"\n\n\nYou pull him into an embrace, almost crushing the figure.\n\n\n\"So? How goes work? Did you sort out the crop rotations for spring...\"\n\n\n\"If you mention crop rotations I kill you.\"\n\n\nSarunt laughs.\n\n\n\"OK then. What about the Kingdom of Man?\"\n\n\n\"What about them?\"\n\n\n\"Do we fear invasion?\"\n\n\n\"Perhaps.\"\n\n\n\"Well, enough sad news. I have some news of my own.\"\n\n\n\"Go on.\"\n\n\nYou raise an eyebrow, beckoning for her to continue.\n\n\n\"Mazkil, I'm pregnant.\"\n\n\nA rush of emotions hits you immediately. Confusion, annoyance, fear, joy, exhileration, and many more. You realize she's staring at you, so you pick to express the emotion that won't make her start crying.\n\n\n\"That's fantastic!\" You say. \"This is great! Have you visited the Shaman?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, Mazkil.\"\n\n\n\"What do they think, boy or girl?\"\n\n\n\"The Shamans don't know shit, Mazkil. They just guess and get it right half the time.\"\n\n\n\"Ah, well this is...\"\n\n\nYou hear screams outside. Fuck. You grab your blade, and raise it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head outside to investigate.", "result": "You walk outside, and are met with an Orc child lying on the road, his face bloodied. A large Orc stands above him, who spits.\n\n\n\"Pickpockets. I fucking hate them.\" He mutters loudly.\n\n\n\"Who the fuck are you and why shouldn't I kill you?\"\n\n\n\"I am Grung Deatheater. I am part of the honor guard for Chieftain Pike.\"\n\n\n\"Chieftain Pike? Why the fuck is...?\"\n\n\n\"Chieftain, we have a visitor. Or visitors, I should say.\" A voice cries.\n\n\n\"Yes? Who is it?\" You ask, turning to Elder Dokt.\n\n\nThe old man brushes dust off his armor, and struggles to stay standing under the weight of it. Perhaps you should suggest he replace his heavy armor with some nice silk robes.\n\n\n\"Chieftain Pike of the Vengeful Wolves is here, with Chieftain Sozin of the Burning Rage and Chieftain Gorgutz of the Evil Suns.\"\n\n\nYou look back at the massive honor guard member. and shrug and head quickly back to the Main Hall. A group of twenty Orcs, with three massive figures at the front, are waiting for you.\n\n\n\"Ah! Chieftain Mazkil! We're preparing a war party to launch a raid on the Kingdom of Man's army stationed at Rubgard. They recently launched a raid against three nearby Orc Villages to take any weapons of war. They're castrating our people. We need to wipe them out to the last man. End their stranglehold on our people. We would like you and your warriors to join us.\"\n\n\n\"Sir, this is the perfect chance to fight and fend off the brutal grasp of the Kingdom of Man and free our people.\" Elder Dokt says, with more bloodlust than you'd expect from the ageing man.\n\n\nYou wonder if you should enter the war that's about to begin on the side of the Orcs. Perhaps you've already integrated into the Kingdom of Man far too much to allow yourself to attack them. Perhaps it's best you don't attack.", "action_results": [{"action": "Don't join the Orcs in rising up against the Empire of Mankind", "result": "A week later, a regiment of soldiers for the Kingdom of Man arrive, led by a large man in plate armor with a red cloak with a golden dragon on it. He enters the Main Hall, bowing as he approaches your throne.\n\n\n\"Greetings, Chieftain Mazkil. I am Sir Ignate. I was chosen by our Royal King Alexander to thank you for your refusal to attack the Kingdom's towns, cities and men. I am happy to offer you a proposal, that if you give troops and support to the Kingdom's counter-attack to wipe out the aggressors. If you accept this proposal you shall be taken on as a vassal for the Kingdom and receive our full financial and military support to allow for your expansion into aggressor territory. Will you accept our proposal, Chieftain Mazkil?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the Kingdom of Mankind in repelling the Orcs", "result": "The March of Progress\n\n\n\"Yes. Yes, I will join the Kingdom of Man in their fight against the aggressors.\"\n\n\n\"Good. Fantastic, even. I'll bring this message to King Alexander. I'll make sure you''re rewarded for this, Sir. I promise you, this will help your people. Our first military action is to lead an attack on the village of the main aggressor, the Vengeful Wolves. I assume you'll help us wipe out the Vengeful Wolves' miitaryforces?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, of course.\"\n\n\n\"Good, I look forward to fighting with you on the battlefield.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The next night...", "result": "Your stand at the edge of the Vengeful Wolves' Village, next to Sir Ignate.\n\n\n\"Storm the camp. Don't kill children at any cost, nor the non-combatants.\" You say loudly to your allies. \"Sir Ignate, what's the plan for the village when the fighting has finished? Long term, I mean.\"\n\n\n\"The village and its surrounding territory will become a conquered territory for the Kingdom. We'll have a small fort built here to maintain control, but otherwise we'll try to make sure the transition of power is as smooth as possible.\"\n\n\nYou nod.\n\n\n\"Alright. Everyone ready?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, Chieftain.\" The chorus of voices come back from your Orc, while the Men exclude the chieftain part of the reply.\n\n\n\"Alright. Let's do this. CHARGE!\" You roar.\n\n\nYou begin moving as fast as you can, your longsword raised. The Warriors of the Vengeful Wolves are clearly unprepared, having spent the previous night drinking and feasting to celebrate their recent victories in the spate of ambushes and assaults of the Kingdom. Still, Orcs are Orcs, and Orcs are always ready to fight. There's a rush of Orcs, some missing armor or only fighting with daggers or even fists, from the buildings. You swing your blade, catching one in the head and tearing his helmet off. You stab, going straight through the throat. You headbutt another Orc, sending him sprawling to the ground, where you quickly hack him apart. You thrust your blade, going though the belly of one of the Orcs. You swing, hack, slash, stab, thrust, parry block and behead for a good few minutes. The Orcs are aggressive fighters, which only means they're prone to more mistakes and leaving themselves more open to blows. You and your forces and allies use this to your advantage, quickly wiping out the militant population there. After the fighting has ceased, the Men begin searching from house to house for any soldiers to capture and weapons to be confiscated, as well as presumably anything to be looted. You see a bloodstained Sir Ignate walking among the carnage, laughing.\n\n\n\"Well done, Chieftain Mazkil. You warriors preformed admirably. We'll have this war finished in no time and I'll be able to head back to the Elves. I'm sure they miss me, and they definitely miss my blade.\" He laughs.\n\n\nYou nod, barely listening. You feel a pang of guilt for killing your fellow Orcs, not even in self defense.\n\n\n\"We have a few fights left, Chieftain Mazkil. After that, you can settle down to your village. Then, we'll be finished our work together.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "Over the next few weeks, the Orc Aggressors begin raiding and striking against the Kingdom's Forces. As Orcs, your forces are used to counter these raids and ambushes, with mixed success. Eventually, one of your scouts succeeds.\n\n\n\"Chieftain! I've found where the main Orc force is staying.\" He says proudly.\n\n\n\"Where?\" \n\n\n\"The Fields of Gorgok.\"\n\n\n\"The Fields of Gorgok? Ha! A fitting place for our final battle to take place. Send a message to Sir Ignates. We're going to war.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Wage War!", "result": "You march forward accompanied by a massive force of Men and Orcs. The Royal Army, Red Blades Tribe, River-born Tribe, Dusk Hunters Tribe and various Orc, Human, Dark Elf and Dwarven Mercenaries heading forward to wage war. You have the main force of footmen accompanied by your best warriors and the Knights from the Kingdom of Mankind. There are also large groups of archers and a calvary of horse units, moving forward towards the enemy. After a few hours of marching, you see them. Hundreds of massive tents dot the field. You hear their lookouts blow their horns, waking the Orcs in time to prepare for the upcoming assault. Their will be no surprise assault today, you know. You raise your longsword. The blade is freshly sharpened.\n\n\n\"Charge!\" You roar, in unison with Sir Ignate and several other leaders of the army.\n\n\nYou rush forward, moving forward with immense speed. The force of military wrath that you and leading storms forward as the Orcs appear, weapons drawn and enshrined in their armor. You charge into them, an unstoppable force smashing into an unmovable object.\n\n\n\"DIE!\" You roar, swinging your blade.\n\n\nYou swing your sword, hacking off a limb that goes flying. You knee another figure and smash your hilt repeatedly into his face until it's nothing but pulp. You swing again, cutting open an Orc's stomach after it breaks through the chain mail armor. You swing again, opening a massive gash in the side of an Orc's face. You parry a strike and block another, before charging into battle with ferocity. You elbow an Orc in the face, smashing open bone and gristle with the force of your strike. You block an axe swing and remove the arm of the Orc holding the axe. You swing again, hacking off a leg and dropping an orc to one knee, allowing you to behead the Orc. You hack and swing, roaring with anger.\n\n\n\"Chieftain! Orders?\" One of your Orcs screams.\n\n\nTime to take command.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to regroup and target the Chieftains", "result": "You blow a bone horn, and the Red Blades regroup around you.\n\n\n\"Target the Chieftains!\" You roar, charging forward.\n\n\nYou sprint forward, dodging spears and arrows. Eventually, you find the Chieftains, clustered together defending against an advance of enemies approaching. You roar as you and the Red Blades strike. You find the leader of this entire army, Chieftain Pike. Chieftain Pike roars, swinging his blade at you. You block the blow, ducking under another swing. You get in under Pike's reach, and headbutt him, before leaning in. You bite his throat, tearing it out. Blood flows from him as he groans, falling backwards. You roar, turning and stabbing the next chieftain through the throat. You swing again, beheading another Chieftain. Within a few seconds, the entire group of Chieftains are dead. You pick up Chieftain Pike's horn, and blow it. A loud noise erupts from the horn, and you begin to roar.\n\n\n\"Orcs! Your Chieftains are dead! Flee now or be wiped out!\"\n\n\nThe Orcs begin to panic, turning and rushing off. They drop weapons and armor in favor of the much needed speed to flee the area. The Orcs armies are routed and quickly leave. The few that remain are quickly struck down by the soldiers.\n\n\n\"Victory!\" You roar.", "action_results": [{"action": "The enemy is vanquished!", "result": "You stand on the field of battle, the bodies of Orcs and Men all around you. You wipe sweat from your brow. Sir Ignates rides up on horseback.\n\n\n\"We've done it!\" Sir Ignates laughs. \"This land is all now King Alexander's! No one can oppose him! Hail the King! Don't worry, Mazkil. I'll make sure you're rewarded. Your village will benefit from this, I swear that to you.\"\n\n\nYou look upon the corpses of your former allies, a feeling of betrayal in your mouth that you haven't tasted since Gruzub's death. You spit and shake your head. No, you did the right thing. You fought to give your tribe a future. You have succeeded.", "action_results": [{"action": "Five Years Later...", "result": "The Village has grown in the past ten years. Sir Ignates and King Alexander kept their word. The village is three times as large, although it has quite a large human population. It's the capital of the massive territory of Orc land, and is the Centre for a massive trade empire. The Red Blades have taken massive amounts of power, being essential components of the Kingdom of Man. The village is prosperous. You've done some great work for the Empire. You're now Lord Mazkil, Sir Mazkil, Chieftain Mazkil and Mazkil the Light-Bringer in response to the massive round of innovation you've brought about. That makes you laugh. You've only been on this Earth twenty five years, and look at all you've done. The World is good. You've heard rumors of a Necromancer rising and Orc rebellions that could occur, but those are small annoyances. Hell, you're glad for them, for it'll keep you busy. You sit on your throne, and the door is pushed open by a small figure cradling two tiny figures.\n\n\n\"Sarunt!\" You cry.\n\n\nSarunt, your wife, carries two small children towards you; A five year old human and a three year old Orc.\n\n\n\"Mazkil! Gruzub and Durzul miss you.\"\n\n\nYou smile as you pick up your children. You look out through the open Main Hall and smile. You've saved the Red Blades and made your own future. The World is in your hands.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Regroup and charge the enemy", "result": "You quickly regroup, blowing a bone horn to bring the Red Blades together.\n\n\n\"Come on! There is blood to be spilt! Ha!\"\n\n\nYou break into a charge, moving quickly forward. You swing your sword, sending a head through the air. After about a minute, you've pushed your way past the Orc lines and got yourself surrounded. You take an arrow to the shoulder and fall backwards, before you take a spear through the throat.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Pull back and allow the Kingdom of Man to do the brunt of the fighting", "result": "You blow a bone horn, and the Red Blades retreat. You pull back from the fighting, allowing the soldiers to move forward. You do some light support work, defending flanks and archers, which allows your forces to conquer over the Orcs. The Orc Tribes are slowly beaten back through a battle of attrition. Eventually, the Soldiers of the Kingdom of Man have begun to cease their aggression in their attacking. The Orcs are clearly beaten and bruised, unable to fight on for much longer.", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge!", "result": "\"Charge! Strike them down!\" You scream, charging forward.\n\n\nYou rush forward. You swing your blade, and your forces crash into the Orcs. The Orcs begin to break away, dropping weapons and swords to retreat from the battle. Some stay behind, but you make very short work of them. You roar as you swing your blade, slicing through flesh and shattering armor to wipe out all those who are left. \n\n\n\"Victory!\" You roar.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Don't join the Kingdom of Mankind in repelling the Orcs", "result": "You decide against joining the Kingdom of Mankind. You don't wish to take up sides in this war. This proves to be one of your worse ideas, as both Orcs and Men have no issues raiding your village for supplies whenever they wish. Battles spill into your territory and any hunters or gatherers you send out are struck down by both sides. Your tribe begins to fall apart. Your men begin to flee, either signing up on either side of the war to take up arms against their enemies, becoming mercenaries or simply fleeing to escape the territory. This leads to the death of the Red Blades. You've failed as Chieftain.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Don't ban the religion of Ka", "result": "You decide against banning the religion of Ka. The religion spreads slightly throughout the village, but fails to gain a significant foot hole among the Red Blades.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Send them to work as Mercenaries", "result": "You send your excess warriors to fight as Mercenaries, fighting against the Elvish Kingdom for the Kingdom of Man, sending their profits home to the Red Blades.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Don't send Workers to work in the Farok Mines", "result": "You decide to send your workers to the Orc Mines instead of the Farok Mines. They make more profit than they would've in the Farok Mines, strengthening and improving the village and Red Blades as a whole.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Begin the long trek back to the village", "result": "You turn around, and begin trekking back to the village. Within a half hour, the cold is so brutal that you lose all feeling. The snow's bad you have no idea where you're going. After two hours of walking, you feel a sudden sensation of warmth. You begin unstrapping your armor to cool down. You're hot and tired. A quick nap in the snow would be nice...", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Attack the Dragon", "result": "\"I want the Dragon's head in Gorgok's treasure room!\" You roar.\n\n\nYou charge forward, towards the dragon, ducking under a jet of flames. You stab forward, and with Gorgok's aim, your sword slides in between a missing scale and stabs the dragon through the side. You pull out your blade and slice, making a small cut in the leathery wing. You wing your blade, knocking into the neck of the Dragon. With the combined army of Orcs and Undead behind you begin to slay the dragon. It's fire incinerates three zombies, and several weapons begin thrusting at the dragon's softer belly and face, cutting gouges and wounds. The dragon only lasts a few minutes of fighting, only killing three Orcs before its killed instantly, killing the beast. It's head thumps against the cold stone floor.\n\n\n\"Ha! Have the dragon's skull taken and dragged down back to the village. I want it put above my throne.\"\n\n\nYou turn to talk to the undead, but they've already began trudging further up the mountain. You wonder why they're leaving, but decide not to bother them. The dead have enough issues to be bothered by the living.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Do nothing", "result": "\"I'm not going to deal with that, Orc. I want you to go, and I genuinely mean this, fuck your mother and stop bothering me.\"\n\n\nThe young orc runs off. Perhaps you were too mean to him. He reminds you of Gruzub, who you loved to degrade, insult and bully. You miss him so much. You sigh. Time to find a drink. Then, many, many more drinks.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Have the Trespasser exiled", "result": "\"Hmmm... Where are the camps, trespasser?\"\n\n\n\"Sir, if I tell you...\"\n\n\n\"Don't preside to know who I am or what I'll do, trespasser.\"\n\n\n\"They're at the Morinspeck Mines, sir.\"\n\n\n\"Good. Go back there, and tell them to leave. I'll send warriors up there in a week. Anyone left there will be wiped out to the last man.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, sir.\"\n\n\n\"Go. If you're found in my land again, I'll make you beg I had killed you here.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, sir.\" He nods, standing and quickly running out of the room.\"\n\n\nYou watch him as he runs off. Well, that takes care of that issue.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Leave the Trespasser go", "result": "\"Hmmm... Where are the camps, trespasser?\"\n\n\n\"Sir, if I tell you...\"\n\n\n\"Don't preside to know who I am or what I'll do, trespasser.\"\n\n\n\"They're at the Morinspeck Mines, sir.\"\n\n\n\"Good. Head back to your camps. I'm not going to harm a man for trying to feed his family.\"\n\n\n\"Thank you! Thank you, sir!\" The Man says, cupping his hands in praise.\n\n\n\"I'm confused why you're still here.\" You say, and the man jumps to his feet and quickly runs off, out of the Great Hall.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Welcome the Trespasser to join the village", "result": "\"Hmmm... Where are the camps, trespasser?\"\n\n\n\"Sir, if I tell you...\"\n\n\n\"Don't preside to know who I am or what I'll do, trespasser.\"\n\n\n\"They're at the Morinspeck Mines, sir.\"\n\n\n\"Good. Well, I'll give you a choice, trespasser. You leave my lands with the threat of death if you return, or you join the Red Blade Tribe as a Free Worker with no blood or legal connections to the tribe.\"\n\n\n\"Sir?\"\n\n\n\"We have hunting grounds and farmlands that go unused. If you wish to work, I'll give you the chance to do so.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, sir! Thank you, sir!\"\n\n\nOver the next few days, the refugees from Morinspeck Mine arrive, and are given jobs so they can get food, water and beds in the village.", "action_results": [{"action": "Two Weeks Later...", "result": "Due to your choice in accepting the refugees from Morinspeck Mine, there are more refugees arriving. Most are humans from destroyed or attacked villages looking for a safe place to work, though a few are Wood or Dark Elves who do not wish to partake in the war. They're all requesting to take up work as Hunters, Farmers or Craftsmen in your village.", "action_results": [{"action": "Allow them to join", "result": "You welcome these refugees into your village, both for ethical and economic reasons. This allows your village to expand as your population experiences a boom.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Don't allow them to join", "result": "You decide enough is enough. You're not a safe haven for every coward and weakling who cowers from war.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Don't send young Orcs to the College", "result": "You decide against sending away the Orcs. They wouldn't be able to learn important skills such as farming, fighting, hunting and cooking, only to be left with skills in money-handling or Magics that don't help them in their life.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Talk to the feasting Orc", "result": "You walk over to the feasting Orc and sit next to her.\n\n\n\"Hello. Are you enjoying the food?\"\n\n\nThe Orc raises an eyebrow, decides you're not joking, and nods.\n\n\n\"Yes, Chieftain.\"\n\n\n\"I don't recognize you. What's your name?\"\n\n\n\"Dag. Dag Unbroken.\"\n\n\n\"Unbroken? How do you get a title like that?\"\n\n\n\"I've broken every bone inside my body besides my right shin.\"\n\n\n\"Fuck me.\" You say, obviously impressed.\n\n\n\"I'm not opposed to the idea.\" Dag says.\n\n\nAt that moment, you realize picking up warriors is a lot easier than you thought.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue spending time with Dag", "result": "You spend the next few hours talking with your newfound mate. Dag is strong, though, aggressive and violent, which reminds you of a more \"you\" you. You'll make sure that your relationship continues and develops into what could be a prosperous marriage.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Talk to the reading Orc", "result": "\"I like him.\" You say, pointing to the reading Orc.\n\n\n\"What, Sarunt? He's a male, he can't bear your children.\" Dokt says, annoyed.\n\n\n\"Many Chieftains were adopted. Dadic, for fuck's sake.\"\n\n\nDokt rolls his eyes, but nods. You stand from the throne, and walk down to Sarunt.\n\n\nYou walk over to the reading Orc, and smile.\n\n\n\"Hello.\"\n\n\n\"Hello.\" He replies, looking up from his book.\n\n\n\"I am Chieftain Mazkil.\"\n\n\nHe chuckles.\n\n\n\"I might spend far too much time in a book, but I still know enough to know who the Chieftain is.\"\n\n\n\"Ah. Good.\" You reply, awkwardly.\n\n\nYou realize while you're very skilled and courageous in the art of warfare, you suck at flirting. Thankfully, he's better and very interested.\n\n\n\"So, do you want to get a drink, Mazkil?\"\n\n\nYou nod eagerly, and head over to the drink stand.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Talk to Ironsoul", "result": "\"I like him.\" You say, pointing to Ironsoul.\n\n\n\"What, Ironsoul? He's a male, he can't bear your children.\" Dokt says, annoyed.\n\n\n\"Many Chieftains were adopted. Dadic, for fuck's sake.\"\n\n\nDokt rolls his eyes, but nods. You stand from the throne, and walk down to Ironsoul.\n\n\n\"Hello. Ironsoul, is it?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"Dag. Dag Ironsoul. It's Dag to you, 'less I gotta call you Chieftain, Mazkil.\"\n\n\n\"How are you, Dag?\" You ask.\n\n\nSomehow, despite your ability to show courage in any fight, you abilities to get chicks aren't particularly good. Thankfully, Dag's just as crude.\n\n\n\"Do you want something, Mazkil?\"\n\n\n\"I was just asking about you as a person. We don't get to talk much.\"\n\n\nDag raises an eyebrow.\n\n\n\"Are you trying to fuck me?\" He asks indignantly. \"Because I won't refuse a piece of ass, but I'm not going to whine about my day like a Man's wife.\"\n\n\nYou smile.\n\n\n\"That simplifies things.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Don't agree to trade with the Kingdom of Man", "result": "\"No. I will not sell the honor and heart of this village to some merchants only to be ripped off later.\"\n\n\nThe Merchant's face falls and he immediately turns ratty.\n\n\n\"Fine. Let this village become an abandoned ghost town in the hills that your children will be dying to get out off. Let's go!\"\n\n\nThe Merchant Caravans begins to turn around and leave. You know that you've saved your little town from being steam rolled by the massive trade machine of the Kingdom of Man.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Lay an ambush", "result": "\"Darkwit. Your plan is good. Jakku, I'm not leading my men into a charge when we have the perfect trap right here.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, Chieftain.\" Jakku nods.\n\n\nYou have Darkwit hide in a vantage point in the trees, the bodies stacked into defensive walls to block enemy escape once they've entered the killzone. You have warriors hide at various points to be able to charge the killzone once the raiders have arrived. You patiently wait, hidden in bushes and undergrowth. One hour passes quickly, the second takes long, but after two and a half hours, the raiders are here. They march, three Caravans in tow, no doubt from a recent raid. They break into a jog when they sight the camp, heading straight into the killzone while confused and unprepared.\n\n\n\"STRIKE!\" You roar.\n\n\nYou break into a run, swinging your blade. The Raiders are surrounded, and they're simply unprepared to face you. You swing your blade downwards, hacking off an arm, and headbutt a raider before running him through with your sword. You dodge an axe swing and cleave the Orc in half. You launch yourself into the fray, and hack a raider to death. The Raiders are beginning to turn and run now, but you slice the back of the legs of one of them and stab them through the chest, breaking through their armor and into the soft flesh beneath. The rest manage to make it past the junk walls you've set up and head off to find safety. \n\n\n\"Chieftain! We are victorious!\" Darkwit laughs happily.\n\n\n\"Losses? Kills?\" You ask.\n\n\nOne of the scouts quickly begins tallying the dead, and turns to you.\n\n\n\"Sir! We lost six men. They lost forty nine.\"\n\n\nDarkwit grins.\n\n\n\"Yes! I told you my plan would work. We almost wiped them out and lost very few.\"\n\n\n\"Yes. Have the scouts find our dead and bring them back to the village for the funeral pyre. Orcs, let's head home.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Search out and lead a charge against the Raiders", "result": "\"Darkwit, go, take who you need and scout ahead for the raiders. Jakku, make sure the men are ready. We''re going to charge the raiders and wipe them out to the last orc.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, Chieftain.\" Jakku barks, before running away.\n\n\nThe Orcs quickly regroup as the scouts sprint off in search of the raiders. You wait with your allies for two hours, before one of the scouts breaks through the treeline.\n\n\n\"Chieftain! They're coming! They were about an hours march away last I saw, but at the pace they were moving they're only half an hour away.\"\n\n\n\"Good. Let's move. Orcs! Get ready to fight. In fifteen minutes, our swords'll be deep in Raider blood.\"\n\n\nThe Orcs all bark responses in the affirmative, and you begin moving forward towards the raiders. It seems the scout under-exaggerated the raiders speed, because it takes twenty minute to finally meet the raiders. A massive group of Orcs, with three Merchant Caravans in tow, no doubt from a recent raid. \n\n\n\"Orcs! Now is the time to spill blood! CHARGE!\" You scream.\n\n\nYou raise your sword, charging forward with your Orcs. The Raiders aren't prepared to fight, but they're still armed from their previous raid and they're still Orcs. You swing your blade downwards, hacking off an arm, and headbutt a raider before running him through with your sword. You dodge an axe swing and cleave the Orc in half. A Warhammer smacks you in the chest, launching you backwards. Your head bangs against a tree, and you stand and charge forward again. You launch yourself into the fray, and hack a raider to death. The Raiders are beginning to turn and run now, but you slice the back of the legs of one of them and stab them through the chest, breaking through their armor and into the soft flesh beneath.\n\n\n\"Chieftain! We are victorious!\" Jakku roars happily.\n\n\n\"Losses? Kills?\" You ask.\n\n\nOne of the scouts quickly begins tallying the dead, and turns to you.\n\n\n\"Sir! We lost thirteen men. They lost thirty seven.\"\n\n\nJakku roars victoriously.\n\n\n\"Yes! I told you we didn't need cowards tactics. We wiped them out and sent the rest running.\"\n\n\n\"Yes. Have the scouts find our dead and bring them back to the village for the funeral pyre. Orcs, let's head home.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Let him regain his fighting stance", "result": "He quickly regains his fighting stance, raising his weapon. The fight only lasts another minute, with you barely blocking the next few of his attacks. Eventually, he sweeps your legs and he falls to the ground. Gruzub raises his sword and swings it, smashing into your chest. You attempt to rise to Gruzub's surprise, so he quickly kicks you in the head, and you fall into unconsciousness...", "action_results": [{"action": "Awaken", "result": "You awaken in the Shaman's hut. You wounds are bandaged and you're covered in various ointments, creams and bandages meant to speed up healing. You groan, and get out of the bed. The Shaman walks over to you, checking your temperature.\n\n\n\"You shouldn't be walking around.\" The Shaman says.\n\n\n\"Fuck you.\" You grunt.e way.\"\n\n\n\"I couldn't kill you. You deserve a much longer, slower death at the hand of someone not as strong and good-lucking as me.\"\n\n\n\"Fuck you, Gruzub.\" You laugh.\n\n\nYou grab the softest woolen tunic you can find and put it on. You walk outside, and wince at the bright son. You spot Gruzub, wearing freshly acquired beads and necklaces to indicate that he is the new chief. He grins when he sees you.\n\n\n\"Mazkil!\" He rushes over to you, and hugs you. \n\n\nYou wince as his hug tightens, but manage to show no pain.\n\n\n\"How's your new promotion?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"It's boring. Papa always made being a Chieftain out to be fighting, fucking, eating and drinking. I've just been given the job of organizing crop rotations.\"\n\n\nYou laugh, and pat him on the back.\n\n\n\"Sorry to hear. Thanks for not killing me, by th\n\n\n\"Seriously, you should've won that fight.\"\n\n\n\"Maybe.\" You shrug. \"Tell me somebody at least shot that goddamn eagle.\"\n\n\n\"It left before anyone could. And I was talking about when I lost my helmet.\"\n\n\n\"I considered it, but decided that I'd prefer to let you organize the... what did you call it? Crop rotations?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah.\"\n\n\nYou stand in silence for a few minutes, staring at the rising sun.\n\n\n\"What do you plan to do, Mazkil? Will you stay here and help the tribe?\"\n\n\n\"No, the tribe is your place. I want to travel. The Kingdom of Man are desperate for new soldiers to help them fight the Elves.\"\n\n\n\"Hmmm... When are you leaving?\"\n\n\n\"Soon. Very soon. I don't want to have to go through the whole goodbye deal with the tribe.\"\n\n\n\"I understand.\"\n\n\nOnce again, you brother pulls you in for a hug.\n\n\n\"I'll miss you.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Three Days Later...", "result": "You walk on the road, the village behind you. Your sword is one your back with a bag of some food, water and goods.\n\n\nThe Kingdom of Man is recruiting soldiers for the Royal Army. They're planning to attack the Elves again, and want as many men as they can. You could receive good pay, free weapons and equipment and possibly make a name for yourself there. You've always hated the Elves, anyway.\n\n\nTime to become a Soldier.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the Royal Army", "result": "The Path of the Soldier\n\n\nIt takes three days to find the nearest Royal Army Fort, a large stone castle surrounded by a village and a large series of tents where the men stationed here are staying. When you arrive and say you wish to join up, you\u2019re given a new steel sword, a large shield, some polished plate armor with the symbol of the king on the chest plate and a small starter\u2019s wage. You\u2019re told as an orc, they assume you\u2019ve already trained in warfare; a racist, yet accurate assumption, so you\u2019ll need no new training. You\u2019re given a bed in Beast Regiment, which you\u2019re told is the only regiment that can afford to take extra men. You quickly realize this is bullshit, as Beast Regiment is the only regiment to hold Orcs. You recognize Black Horn, Gold Tusk, Dead Eye, Iron Flame, God Killer, Hardclaw and Bearfoot Orcs all there,sitting around a hearth in a small stone barracks. One of the larger orcs, who wears a shiny helm with the Gold Dragon, the symbol of the King, on it.\n\n\n\u201cGreetings, recruit. I am Captain Darruk. Name and tribe.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMazkil Boarsbane, Red Blade.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAh, the Red Blades are still alive, are they? Had a Red Blade a couple years back, who managed to behead a dragon. He just ran up, jabbed it in the eye a few times and took a swing. Darkin Dragaonskull. Hell of a sooldier. Perhaps you\u2019ll be as good if you do what I say and don\u2019t cause any fights, but make sure to end any we get in.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSure thing, sir.\u201d You struggle with the sir part, but you assume it\u2019ll get easy over time.\n\n\n\u201cSir? Ha, you\u2019re already using sir. I think you\u2019ll impress me, Mazkil.\u201d\n\n\nYou notice a massive Orc that towers over the rest of you, his armor covered with what you assume are kill notches. You make sure to keep an eye on him. You find your bed, and collapse on it. It only takes a few minutes before you're allowed to fall into a dull, dreamless sleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "Two Weeks Later...", "result": "You march through Elf territory with a little over 50 other Orcs, marching through a hilly area with some trees. You've been sent with Karn Deathreaper, the massive orc with the notched armor, to investigate a small Elf War Party. You've yet to experience any real combat, with your previous time here simply being maneuvering into flanking positions to force the enemy to retreat and moving forward. Still, the sun is particularly red, so you there'll be a battle today with Gorgok watching.\n\n\n\"Orcs! Halt!\" Karn screams, and you stop moving.\n\n\nKarn Deathreaper truly earned his name. The amount of enemies he's slain is among the hundreds if not thousands. He's a fearsome creature, and you can't wait to see him do battle.\n\n\n\"The sun wishes us good luck. We'll do well in the battle.\" One of the Orcs near you says happily.\n\n\n\"Cease your superstitions, Nagrak. We might not even fight today.\" Another replies.\n\n\n\"One can hope.\" Nagrak eagerly replies.\n\n\nIn the blink of an eye, a dozen Orcs are dead. You see six Elves standing on top of the hills, light golden armor and long blond hair holding bows.", "action_results": [{"action": "Raise your shield in defense", "result": "You raise your shield, and three arrows thuds into it.\n\n\n\"Orcs! Regroup, and keep those shields up!\" Karn screams.\n\n\nYou huddle together, and as a group begin rushing uphill rapidly towards the Elves. The Elves fire a few more arrows at you both, but quickly turn heel and run. You reach the summit of the hill and watch as the Elves disappear into a small woods down the hill.\n\n\n\"Come on, Orcs! We follow them and make sure the worms can feast on Elf Flesh tonight!\" Karn yells.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Karn into the woods", "result": "Karn lets out a war cry and breaks into a full sprint towards the woods. You follow, your shield covering your chest and your sword raised. As you burst through the trees and run through the undergrowth, you hear a yell.\n\n\n\"Fire!\"\n\n\nArrows fire down from the trees. After ten seconds which you spend huddled together with your allies, arrows thudding into your shield, half of your group is dead. Then, Elves Warriors with short swords heavier armor than the archers, though still a lot lighter than yours, coming to wipe out the unprepared, cowering Orcs that remain.", "action_results": [{"action": "Act defensively to protect yourself", "result": "You bring up your shield and raise your sword. The warriors quickly take advantage of the situation, attacking the unprepared Orcs attempting to take shelter from the arrows. One of them goes towards you, and swings. You block his sword with your shield and repeatedly jab him through the stomach, the third stab penetrating his armor and going through his stomach, which after a few more stabs kill him.By the time the Orcs manage to fend off the Elven Warriors, they're barely a dozen men, including Khan. The Elves outnumber you, but only slightly, and they clearly either don't like their odds, or figure they've killed enough of your allies today. The warriors quickly turn and go sprinting off into the woods.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow the Warriors", "result": "You quickly follow the warriors, breaking into a sprint. You refuse to let them escape. After a few minutes, the warriors pause and turn. You realize none of the other Orcs have followed and you're on your own. You raise your sword to fight, but the warriors charge. You swing your sword and manage to decapitate one, before receiving over a dozen stabs to the chest.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Attack the Archers in the trees", "result": "You roar, running forward and jumping in the air. You grab an archer perched on one of the branches who screams, flinging her to the ground. You quickly end her miserable existence, thrusting your sword through her neck. You see another archer leap from the trees in order to escape, but slash his legs, causing him to fall to the ground. You stand above him and stab downward, stabbing him through the chest, killing him. An archer leaps onto you with a hunting knife and slices you across the back of the neck in a failed attempt to murder you. You fling him off your back and to the ground and slice open his stomach. You look up, to see the rest of the archers sprinting incredibly fast away from the battle.\n\n\n\"Don't bother chasing. You can't catch an Elf. They've ran their entire lives, the cowards.\" Karn says. \"Come on men. Let's get back to camp.\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "One Day Later...", "result": "You sit at the camp, at the edge with a campfire, a pig roasting on a spit. You wait eagerly for your meal, before Captain Darruk arrives.\n\n\n\"Mazkil, come with me for a moment.\"\n\n\nYou struggle not to snarl in annoyance, knowing you'll miss the best cuts of pork, but nod and follow Darruk anyway. You follow him out of ear range of the camp, before he starts speaking.\n\n\n\"You were with Karn on the mission yesterday, correct?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, sir.\"\n\n\n\"We lost a massive amount of men for a mission that important. I need to know: Was it Karn's fault as a leader?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Yes.\"", "result": "\"Ah. I thought so. The other men's testimony said as much. Thank you. Now go, eat.\"\n\n\nYou nod, and quickly return to eat. You have to punch one of the smaller Orcs, but you manage to grab a large, juicy piece of meat and eagerly chew into it.", "action_results": [{"action": "One Week Later...", "result": "You stand around a massive map, showing the Glenin Plains. Captain Durrak begins explaining the situation.\n\n\n\"Captain Rhian is leading the Royal Calvary forward to engage the Elvish Calvary at multiple locations. We're positioned here to launch attacks on the calvary as the rearguard crosses Jacob's Bridge and the small unnamed brick bridge here. I'll lead the main patrol on Jacob's Bridge. Karn, lead a force of your chosen orcs.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, sir.\"\n\n\nKarn chooses two dozen Orcs, to your surprise he hasn't chosen you, for reason's you don't know. You then follow Captain Durrak as you head towards Jacob's Bridge. Thankfully, the Elvish Calvary haven't arrived, so you take up positions.\n\n\n\"Alright, stay low, and don't attack until I say so. Got it?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, sir.\" You all reply in unison. \n\n\nThe Bridge is a large wooden bridge over a massive muddy creek. You take position at the edge of the bridge so you can storm on and wipe out the calvary's rearguard. A large group of Elves aboard beautiful white horses begin galloping past. They gallop past for a good thirty seconds, before there's a small break in the amount of horses galloping past. \n\n\n\"Now! Take them all out!\" Captain Durrak roars.\n\n\nYou leap out of the muddy river bank and onto the bridge. The small Elvish Calvary's Rearguard, meant to defend their flanks and make sure they have the option to retreat, is only about three dozen Calvary units, and you have as many Orcs with you. You see the the lead of the rearguard, a golden armored Elvish Warrior, is on a horse which rears up in terror. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge forward to target the leader", "result": "You sprint forward with your sword raised, roaring. You slash the horse's chest open, and the horse whinnies in terror. The leader falls from the horse, and you quickly stand over him, raising your blade. Suddenly, a spear flies through your chest, tossed by one of the Calvary Units. You groan as the spear embeds itself in you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stick with the group and raise your shield", "result": "You stick with the group, deflecting spears off your shield. You move forward, stabbing your blade forward as your shield stays raised to deflect any blows. You stab a Elf Rider through the thigh and he screams, falling off the horse, where you stomp repeatedly on his face. You swing your blade again, slashing a horse's chest and causing it to rear up in terror. The Elf falls off and hits the ground, allowing for an Orc to stand over it and stab it through the chest. The melee only lasts a few seconds, as the Calvary Units are desperately massacred as they're clearly surprised and unprepared for fighting, struggling to find their weapons and prepare to fight. Several Orcs armed with crossbows contribute to the massacre.\n\n\n\"Alright. Losses?\" Captain Durrak asks, as you survery the battlefield.\n\n\n\"Twelve Orcs fallen. Three wounded.\"\n\n\n\"Two. I can still fight.\" One of the Orcs grunts, pulling a spear from her side.\n\n\n\"Alright, begin stacking the horse carcasses into a barricade.\"\n\n\nYou grab one of the dead horses, and begins dragging it into place, placing it on top of another dead horse. After a few minutes, you take position on the bridge. You hear screams from the main battle, as you watch the calvary battle take place in the form of jousts and sword-fights from horseback. You grab a spear from one of the dead Calvary Units, smiling.\n\n\n\"This could be useful. Sir, if we use the Elvish Spears, we could assist in the battle.\" You point out to Captain Durrak.\n\n\n\"This would be risky. We need to stay here to defend the bridge.\" Captain Durrak says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Offer to go ahead alone", "result": "\"I'll go ahead and assist our men. Alone.\"\n\n\n\"Ha! You're a mad man, Mazkil. If you want to play with the horses, go straight ahead.\"\n\n\nYou creep forward quickly, your new spear raised. The battle is going brutally. You move quickly, first going towards a Elf jousting with a human knight, with the knight heavily injured and bleeding from a stab wound in the side. You stab your weapon while the Elf is distracted by the knight, killing the Elf with a quick impalement through the side. You take your spear out, and move forward to the next target, an Elf engaged in sword fighting. You keep low to avoid being seen, and quickly jab the elf through the neck and pull him off the horse and withdraw your spear again. You repeat this, using your spear and stealth to repeatedly stab the various elf riders and Calvary Units to allow for your own calvary to beat back the Elves. Your contribution is minor, but as your own forces are already winning, the few Elves who survive quickly head to the bridges, where they're presumably wiped out. You wipe Elf and Horse blood off your face, and begin wandering towards the bridge. You arrive to find dozens of dead Elves and horses, with Captain Darruk laughing victoriously.\n\n\n\"Mazkil, you're alive. This is good. The Elves have been wiped out.\"\n\n\n\"I took out as many as I could, sir. I did my part.\"\n\n\n\"Good. Now, we have work to be done. With the advance of our calvary, we can finally begin to invade and launch attacks on the Elvish Villages.\" Captain Darruk says. \"The Elvish empire is crumbling, boys. Take what you want off the dead, kill the wounded, and we'll head back to the Fort and find something to drink.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "One Week Later...", "result": "You walk along the woods with a small group. Twenty Orcs, thirty Men and a dozen War Hounds. You're led by Captain Darruk, who stands proudly at the lead.\n\n\n\"Recent Elves have attacked our forces, and taken heavy losses. We believe they've retreated to the village of Abhaile to resupply and have their wounded taken care of. I want this threat dealt with.\"\n\n\nYou gently pat one of the war-hounds on the head, amused by the cheerful dog. Suddenly, the war-hounds burst forward, barking.\n\n\n\"Here we are. Orcs! No looting, killing or anything of the sort! Once the village's secure, we stay here for the night.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, sir.\" You all respond.\n\n\nYou march forward past the trees, and see the village. It's a large village, with many homes, all wooden and natural looking, reminding you of several rich men's summer homes you passed on the march to Elf Territory. Many of the civilians notice, and begin to yell and hurry inside.\n\n\n\"HOLD IT! This village is under control of King Alexander and the Royal Army!\" Captain Darruk barks. \"Search house to house! Confiscate any weapons. Kill any soldiers or those trying to resist.\"\n\n\nYou nod, and quickly hurry towards the houses. Inside the first you enter is a small girl holding desperately to a stuffed toy, with her mother standing defensively in front of her, a dagger clutched in her hands.\n\n\n\"Stay out!\" She cries.\n\n\nYou look at her briefly, before ignoring her. You quickly search the upper floor and confiscate a bow, some arrows and three hunting knives, before returning downstairs. The house is empty except for the mother and daughter.\n\n\n\"Give me the blade.\" You ask.\n\n\n\"Get out of my house!\" She shrieks, and you wince.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill her", "result": "You swing your blade, slashing her chest. She falls backwards, hitting the floor with a thud as the daughter screams. You grab her knife, and look to the daughter. You feel a brief wave of pity, but quickly suppress it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Move onto the next house", "result": "You walk into the next house. A young Elf, as young as you, stands behind the door holding it closed. You smash the door open and he rolls to his knee, his bow readied with an arrow notch.\n\n\n\"Drop the bow.\" You say, raising your shield.\n\n\nHe fires, and you easily knock the arrow aside. One quick swipe, and his head is lying on the floor. You search the bottom floors, finding nothing, but upstairs you find another barricaded room. Using your impressive strength, you smash open the door with brute force. Four Elf Warriors are in the room, covered in bandages and with visible wounds. You quickly slash your sword killing one, kicking another in the head and stomping on his throat repeatedly, crushing it. You stab another one through the chest to kill him, and stab the final one through the eye. As his body hits the ground, you notice a backroom. You open it, to find a small stack of Elvish Jewelry. Golden bracelets studded with golden gems, eloquently designed necklaces and a golden ring with a large ruby. Your orders are to leave all valuable items to be taken at a later time by Captain Darruk to be used to buy supplies and food, but... shiny.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the valuables", "result": "You smile as you sweep the valuables into your satchel. You've fought for the Royal Army for tiny wages, you deserve these valuables. Time for the next house, you still have an important job to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the next house", "result": "You walk into the next house, to find an Orc already in there. A beheaded elf lies across the floor, a pool of blood spreading across the floor. The Orc, a short but tough man you recognize as Kannish. He's holding a half undressed Elven Woman, forcing her against the wall.\n\n\n\"Shut up!\" He roars, before noticing you. \"Mazkil? I'm busy here, my friend. There's another one upstairs if you want a go. Otherwise, you should probably get out there while the looting's good.\"\n\n\nYou look at the woman, tears streaming down her face, and wonder what to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stop Kannish", "result": "\"Kannish! Release her!\"\n\n\nKannish stops smiling, and snarls.\n\n\n\"What, have you fallen in love, Mazkil? Fuck off, or this shit gets bloody.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave the building", "result": "You walk outside, and continue searching door to door, although you wince as you hear her cries for help behind you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the next house", "result": "You walk outside, and as you go to the next house, you hear a scream.\n\n\nYou turn to see a large house has erupted into flames that are quickly growing. Captain Darruk sprints over, followed by you.\n\n\n\"What's going on?\" Captain Darruk asks.\n\n\n\"We were putting the civilians in this house when they resisted, so we torched the place.\" One of the Orcs explains.\n\n\nYou see civilians; men, women and children rushing out of the building as it rapidly erupts into flames. You hear crying coming from the top floor, a high pitched noise that could only come from an infant.\n\n\n\"Captain! There's a baby in there!\"\n\n\n\"There's nothing we could do. The flames would kill anyone who tries to enter.\"\n\n\nYou watch the building, flames licking the sky. You see a small gap in the flames that someone could easily use to get inside.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to save the baby", "result": "You charge into the building despite the protests of your team-mates. You dive into a flaming inferno, the heat causing you to sweat profusely and groan in pain. You look around, but smoke obscures your view. You begin to cough and splutter, dropping low. You reach around looking for the stairs. You manage to find it, and begin to clamber up the staircase, following the cries and screams of the babies. The flames begin to sear and burn your flesh as you wince in pain, groaning loudly. You reach the top of the staircase, looking around desperately for the baby. You find a small cradle covered in ash and embers, which you brush off and pick up a bundled up, ugly and loud creature you recognize as a baby. You pick it up, and look for a way out. By now, the room's full of smokes and the fire's spread everywhere. You go to leave, but a roof beam collapses down and smacks you in the back and you fall to the knees as the flames begin to sear your flesh. You scream, and roll out of the way, curling around the baby to protect it. You find your way through the smoke and flames while doing your best to protect the infant. You charge through the door and find your way outside, and fall onto the cool grass. Your flesh is burned and scorched, and you struggle to stay conscious. An Elf picks the baby up and says something, presumably thanks.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fall unconscious", "result": "You awaken a few hours later, lying on a bed. You're heavily bandaged, lying next to several dozen sleeping Orcs and Men. Captain Darruk had the Medic take care of you, it seems, and you've been dumped to heal next to the sleeping soldiers. You assume you'll be taken back to the nearest fort to be taken care of until you've healed up enough to head out to war again. \n\n\nYou lie in the silence, trying to fall back to sleep. Then, you hear a window shatter. You look around, and struggle to get up. Thankfully, the Medic's left your knife on you. You look around, before a fist smashes into the side of your head, knocking you backwards. You try to scream, before you feel the cold steel of a blade on your throat. You look up, to see a short Elven sword being held by a tall elf.\n\n\n\"Say your prayers, Orc.\" He says.\n\n\nYou grab at his throat, but he quickly deflects your hand. As he goes to slice open your throat, you see a hand stop him. You notice another Elf stop him.\n\n\n\"Wait. Don't.\"\n\n\n\"Why shouldn't I?\"\n\n\n\"He helped us earlier. He saved Gwendilyn's child.\"\n\n\nThe Elf with the sword shrugs.\n\n\n\"Fine.\"\n\n\nYou look around. The room's filled with a group of Elves, all armed for war. It appears you're the first to awaken. With the serious burns covering your body, you'd struggle to do anything physical. You could still warn your team-mates, though.", "action_results": [{"action": "Scream for help", "result": "\"We're...!\" You begin to yell.\n\n\nThe flat of the blade smashes into your face, knocking you unconscious.", "action_results": [{"action": "Awaken", "result": "You scream as you awaken and are hit with a fresh wave of pain. You look around. You're surrounded by slaughtered Orcs and Men, many killed in their sleep, but it's clear some awoke in time to resist. You attempt to stand, before collapsing on the floor. The pain is all-consuming, and you consider allowing death to overtake you and end your struggle to survive.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the surrounding area", "result": "You look around for something to help you out of this predicament, and you find a small bottle of a blue liquid. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Drink it", "result": "You down the drink, and shiver as the pain begins to cease. You notice not only is your pain ending, but all your feelings are. Shortly after, your body begins to enter paralysis. You wince and shiver as you chest begins to slow, ending your breathing. You struggle to continue breathing, but you only manage a few more painful seconds of existence before you pitiful existence ends.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Don't drink it", "result": "You decide not to drink it. You know that you need to get moving soon, to escape before nightfall, but hold on to the fact their still might be something useful nearby.", "action_results": [{"action": "Drag yourself outside", "result": "You drag yourself outside. The village is packed with dead Orcs, Men and War Dogs, interspersed with the golden armored Elves who your allies managed to strike down. You continue dragging yourself forward, passing the dead. Vultures land around you and begin pecking at the corpses. One lands in front of you and pecking at your face.", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab the Vulture", "result": "You grab the Vulture, tearing the vulture's head off its neck and tossing it aside. You begin dragging yourself forward once more.", "action_results": [{"action": "Four Hours Later...", "result": "You move your hands forward and find something to drag yourself another few inches forward. Thankfully, the leaves grant you some shade from the hot sun, but the pain's beginning to become unbearable. Then, as if the Gods have all agreed to fuck up your life, you hear wolves. \n\n\n\"Fuck you!\" You scream, as three wolves begin prowling towards you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fling your knife at one", "result": "You throw your knife, impaling one of the wolves' in the head, killing it instantly. It falls backwards, and you feel pride briefly, before another one of the wolves leaps at you, landing on your chest. It bites down on your chest, tearing through flesh at you let out a scream.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Try defend yourself with your blade", "result": "You swing your blade, slashing open one of their eyes. You stab again, killing the wolf, but get your knife lodged in it's head. Another one leaps forward, and bites your arm.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Continue searching", "result": "After another few minutes of searching, you find a small silver flask with a red cross on the front strapped to a medic's belt, which you recognize as a healing potion, and eagerly drink down. As you feel the warm liquid go down your throat, it warms your soul and ends, or at least lessens your pain. Your energy renewed and strength revitalized, you begin dragging yourself yourself out of the building and off in search of help.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null, {"action": "Embrace the sweet release of death", "result": "You stop fighting, and allow the sweet painlessness of death to release you from the constant pain.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Stay silent", "result": "You stay silent, and the Elves quickly make their way through the room, slaughtering all those across the room, slicing open their throats and stabbing them through the hearts. Eventually, everyone in the room lies dead across the floor. The Elf who had held his blade to your throat takes a final look at you, before leaving you alone in an empty room. After a few minutes, pain begins to sear from your burns as your medicine wears off, and you lie their, struggling to stay conscious through the pain, which you eventually fail at doing.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Do nothing", "result": "You stand, watching the building burn with a few uneasy soldiers and sobbing civilians being kept from entering the building for fear of their brutal death.`Thankfully, the baby's cries only last another few minutes as smoke spreads throughout the house. Once it ceases, Captain Darruk nods.\n\n\n\"Alright, everyone. Back to work. Continue searching.\"\n\n\nYou search the next few houses, but the populace is either dead or cowering, allowing for you to find a few small weapons stockpiles. Eventually, you finish up and find an empty house to sleep in. Captain Darruk assigns a few Orcs on guard, but thankfully you're not one of them.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rest", "result": "You awaken a few hours later, lying in a bed. You've woken up again.\n\n\nYou lie in the silence, trying to fall back to sleep. Then, you hear a window shatter. You look around, and struggle to get up. You draw your knife slowly. You look around, before a fist smashes into the side of your head, knocking you backwards. You try to scream, before you feel the cold steel of a blade on your throat. You look up, to see a short Elven sword being held by a tall elf.\n\n\n\"Say your prayers, Orc.\" He says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Lunge at him", "result": "You lunge forward, grabbing his wrist and flinging the sword away. You grab his head and bring your knife up, repeatedly stabbing him through the eye. Another Elf runs forward and slashes your chest open, and you smash his head across the room, and fling him repeatedly against a wall unless his body's shattered. You slash another Elf's throat open, before the Elves surround you. You roar as every single Elf begins slashing at you. Blood begins down to streak down your chest as thousands of cuts and slashes open all over your body. You only last a few seconds of brutal pain before you collapse on the floor.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Beg for mercy", "result": "\"Please. I won't say a word, just...\" You begin.\n\n\nThe Elf sneers in disgust, and swings his blade. He slashes a deep wound in your stomach, and you scream. The Elf slashes at you repeatedly, opening endless red lines of blood and pain across your chest. After over a dozen cuts, you collapse into unconsciousness.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Continue trying to stop Kannish", "result": "\"I'll tear off your head and give it to the crows, Kannish! Let her go!\"\n\n\nKannish lets go of the girl, who quickly turns and scurries off. Kannish draws his blade.\n\n\n\"Are you willing to die for that bitch? Die just so she can spread her legs to some Elven cunt who killed our friends?\"\n\n\n\"Drop the weapon, Kannish!\"\n\n\nKannish clumsily lunges at you, rage in his eyes.", "action_results": [{"action": "Behead him", "result": "You swing your blade, killing Kannish. You drag his head outside to Captain Darruk, who growls at the sight.\n\n\n\"Who did this? Elves?\"\n\n\n\"I did. Sir.\" You add.\n\n\nCaptain Darruk's eyes narrow.\n\n\n\"Why?\"\n\n\n\"He refused to follow orders. I found him trying to have his way with one of the elves.\"\n\n\nCaptain Darruk's eyes widen in surprise.\n\n\n\"Mazkill, I don't have time to deal with this. Karn and I are returning to the Fort. We need to be gone by nightfall. We don't have time to deal with you killing our men.\"\n\n\n\"He was doing shitty things, sir.\"\n\n\n\"This is war, shitty things happen.\"\n\n\n\"Our jobs are to minimize the amount of shitty things happening.\"\n\n\nDarruk opens his mouth to say something, before you hear a scream. You turn to see a large house has erupted into flames that are quickly growing. Captain Darruk sprints over, followed by you.\n\n\n\"What's going on?\" Captain Darruk asks.\n\n\n\"We were putting the civilians in this house when they resisted, so we torched the place.\" One of the Orcs explains.\n\n\nYou see civilians; men, women and children rushing out of the building as it rapidly erupts into flames. You hear crying coming from the top floor, a high pitched noise that could only come from an infant.\n\n\n\"Captain! There's a baby in there!\"\n\n\n\"There's nothing we could do. The flames would kill anyone who tries to enter.\"\n\n\nYou watch the building, flames licking the sky. You see a small gap in the flames that someone could easily use to get inside.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Dodge him", "result": "You dodge him, and he smashes past, managing to slash your arm open. He rises up again, ready to strike.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Dodge him", "result": "For a second time, you dodge out of the way. For the second time, he slashes a cut, this time across your chest.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Dodge again", "result": "This time you're ready for him. As he charges. you swing your blade and the flat knocks into his ankle, sending him tumbling. You stomp on his head multiple times, and begin dragging him out of the hut and drop him in front of Captain Darruk.\n\n\n\"What's this?\"\n\n\n\"I caught this soldier trying to have his way with a young Elven girl. I stopped him.\"\n\n\n\"Mazkill, I don't have time to deal with this. Karn and I are returning to the Fort. We need to be gone by nightfall. We don't have time to deal with you fighting our own men.\"\n\n\nYou hear a scream. You turn to see a large house has erupted into flames that are quickly growing. Captain Darruk sprints over, followed by you.\n\n\n\"What's going on?\" Captain Darruk asks.\n\n\n\"We were putting the civilians in this house when they resisted, so we torched the place.\" One of the Orcs explains.\n\n\nYou see civilians; men, women and children rushing out of the building as it rapidly erupts into flames. You hear crying coming from the top floor, a high pitched noise that could only come from an infant.\n\n\n\"Captain! There's a baby in there!\"\n\n\n\"There's nothing we could do. The flames would kill anyone who tries to enter.\"\n\n\nYou watch the building, flames licking the sky. You see a small gap in the flames that someone could easily use to get inside.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Leave the valuables", "result": "You leave the valuables. You're a soldier with a mission, not a thief.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Force her to give you the knife", "result": "You move forward, knocking her back with a punch. She cries out and you grab her wrist, twisting it. She drops the knife, which you catch.\n\n\n\"Here's some advice. Don't fuck with an Orc. You're lucky you're not dead.\" You growl.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Try reason with her", "result": "\"Listen: You have no power here. I could very easily kill you, and my allies would storm in here and kill you and your daughter if I was harmed. Give me the knife and you life.\"\n\n\nShe looks terrified, but she hands over the knife. You grab it, and nod.\n\n\n\"Good choice.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Defend the Bridge", "result": "You stay behind, waiting patiently at the bridge. Eventually, a large group of Elves on horseback begin riding towards the bridge.\n\n\n\"Alright, boys, hold the bridge.\"\n\n\nThe horses approach, and you aim your spear. You aim carefully, and as soon as the calvary units arrive you attack. You stand on top of a horse, jabbing with a spear, aiming at the riders. You stab them with your spear, hitting hearts, faces and throats to take them down. Many of the riders manage to leap over the barricade and escape to freedom, though the majority of them easily taken down. \n\n\n\"Good. Now, we have work to be done. With the advance of our calvary, we can finally begin to invade and launch attacks on the Elvish Villages.\" Captain Darruk says. \"The Elvish empire is crumblings, boys. Take what you want off the dead, kill the wounded, and we'll head back to the Fort and find something to drink.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"No.\"", "result": "\"Really? The other men I talked to seemed to think it was. Anyway, thank you. Please, go eat.\"\n\n\nYou nod, and quickly return to eat. You have to punch one of the smaller Orcs, but you manage to grab a large, juicy piece of meat and eagerly chew into it.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Gather your men and flee", "result": "\"Come on! We're getting out of here!\" You yell.\n\n\nYou allies quickly follow as you turn and sprint out of the trees. Shortly afterwards you break free, and to your relief none of the Elves have followed.\n\n\n\"We need to get back to camp.\" Karn grunts.\n\n\nKarn's covered in bright red Elf blood mixed in with the darker Ork blood from those around him. You realize that Karn is a fantastic fighter, but should never be given a position of power again. He led your squad straight into an ambush.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Act offensively to fend off the warriors and protect the group", "result": "You charge forward, slamming into one of the warriors. You raise your sword and slam it down through her gut, killing her. You grab an Elf about to stab an undefended orc by his hair and yank him back, slitting his throat. The Elves notice your aggressive tactics and five of them crowd around you. You feel a brief sense of fear. They jab and slice at you, opening up your shoulder with several jabs knocking into your chest and smacking the plate armor, causing you to grunt painfully. Then, Karn arrives.\n\n\n\"DIE!\" He screams.\n\n\nHe flings at throwing axe with such strength it beheads one of the elves and embeds itself in the shoulder of another elf, who drops and screams. Karn then barrels into a third Elf and begins stabbing her through the chest, leaving you with two elves to fight. You block one of their sword thrusts and parry the other's, before kicking one into a tree. You jab the other in the neck, twisting your sword to have a spurt of blood hit you in the face. The other goes to stand back up, but you kick him in the head and slash his throat.\n\n\n\"Come on, Orcs! We fight and we kill today!\"\n\n\nThe Orcs are now prepared to fight, with their formations taken up and their weapons ready. The Elven Warriors quickly begin to retreat.\n\n\n\"Now, Orcs! Target the Archers the foolish warriors left behind!\"", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Stop Karn from charging into what might be a trap", "result": "You let out a shout.\n\n\n\"Wait!\"\n\n\nKarn turns and snarls.\n\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\n\"We shouldn't go in there. It's another Elf ambush for sure. We need to wait for reinforcements.\"\n\n\n\"Reinforcements? Is your Mama bringing fresh milk and honey? We fight and strike a blow against the Elves. You either charge with us or die.\"", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Refuse to follow Karn into the woods", "result": "\"No, I'm not going to charge to my death.\"\n\n\n\"Then you'll stand to it.\" Karn yells.\n\n\nKarn swings his warhammer, knocking your legs away. You fall in the mud, and he swings again, his blow smashing your skull in.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Quickly alert and direct your own Archers to the Elves", "result": "You turn to your archers, but it's clear the Elves targeted them first. Most are dead, and the few remaining drop to their knees and begin firing, but the elves are uphill, naturally better archers and have the wind in their favor. It's clear the elves have carefully chosen this ambush site.\n\n\nYou feel an arrow thud into your chest. It shatters on your plate armor, but the force is enough to break a few ribs and you groan loudly. You raise your shield, and another arrow thuds into it.\n\n\n\"Orcs! Regroup, and keep those shields up!\" Karn screams.\n\n\nYou huddle together, and as a group begin rushing uphill rapidly towards the Elves. The Elves fire a few more arrows at you both, but quickly turn heel and run. You reach the summit of the hill and watch as the Elves disappear into a small woods down the hill.\n\n\n\"Come on, Orcs! We follow them and make sure the worms can feast on Elf Flesh tonight!\" Karn yells.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Tell them you have no gold", "result": "\"I have no coins on me.\"\n\n\n\"Really, sir? Larn, go see if our new friend's lying.\"\n\n\nOne of the men walks forward, and begins searching you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab the man", "result": "You grab the man, drawing your blade and driving you knife into his chest repeatedly, tossing his body aside. The men begin charging towards you, three on one side of the street, one on the other.", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge the single man", "result": "The single man is quick and manages to jab you in the side, his cold iron causing you to groan in pain. You swing your blade, slashing the man's throat, and toss him at the trio. You rush onto the main street, but the trio don't follow. You check your wound, but it's not deep. You wander through the street, until eventually you come across Dendar's Cart. You climb on the back, and lie there, as Dendar arrives with a caged chicken.\n\n\n\"Ah! Mazkil, how are you? Ah, you're bleeding.\"\n\n\n\"Someone tried to rob me.\"\n\n\n\"Well, I hope you made sure they'll never try again.\"\n\n\nYou nod, and Dendar chuckles.\n\n\n\"Well done. You're a true orc.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Charge the trio", "result": "You run forward, leaping through the air as you slam into one of the three, stabbing him through the neck. The others grab you and a knife is painfully brought across your throat, before your limp body is released.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Let him", "result": "You stand there, as one of the men walks over and begins patting on your pockets. As the few coins you have left jingle, the man quickly draws a knife and stabs you through the back, right through the heart. You yell in pain, collapsing.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Yell at the men", "result": "\"FUCK OFF, HUMANS! GO SUCKLE ON YOUR MOTHER'S TITS!\" You roar.\n\n\n\"Oi, Sir! Quiet down. Wouldn't want the Guards to...\"\n\n\n\"FUCK YOU, YOU TWO-BIT THIEVING CUNTS!\"\n\n\n\"Shit, Larn, shut him up.\"\n\n\nYou hear a whistling noise, and you turn to investigate. Two throwing knives plunge into your chest. You gasp, and struggle to stay standing before a third enters your heart.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Hand over your few coins", "result": "You quickly take out your remaining coins and hand them to one of the thieves. He flashes a grin, and puts his hand around your shoulder.\n\n\n\"Thank you, sir. Pleasure doing business.\"\n\n\nHe leads you out of the ally and points in the direction of the Dengar's cart. You walk along to it, and climb aboard the back. Dengar appears, holding a caged chicken.\n\n\n\"How was your time in Riverton?\"\n\n\nYou shrug, disgusted in yourself for handing over the money. You're no true orc.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Visit the Brothel", "result": "You arrive at a large building and take a deep breath, breathing in perfumes of foreign fruits and sweet incense. An elderly woman walks out, and smiles at you.\n\n\n\"Ah, a patron. How may I help you, Sir?\"\n\n\n\"I'd imagine it's the same reason everyone comes here.\" You reply snidely.\n\n\n\"Ah, of course. I'm sorry, you look like Gruft, the debt collector. I assumed you were a brother of his filling in.\"\n\n\nShe leads you into a back room, where you take a seat on an old dirty bed. She leaves, before arriving back with three women. One of them is a middle-aged, chubby, unattractive woman in a plain dress. She smiles at you.\n\n\n\"I am Helga. She says.\n\n\nThe second woman is a younger, plain faced woman with a nice bosom and bum, which quickly draw your attention.\n\n\n\"I am Liz.\" She says, smiling at you sweetly.\n\n\nThe final girl is a short, small, pale blond girl. Her features are sharp and angular, and you recognize her as an elf.\n\n\n\"I am Starflower.\" She says.\n\n\n\"The prices are simple.\" The Matron says. \"Helga is five coins, Liz is ten, Starflower is fifteen.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Pay for Helga", "result": "You pay for Helga, and all others but her leave. You quickly undress, and for the next hour, allow your animal urges to take over. You quickly fuck her, trying to focus on the feeling rather than her less than appealing appearance. Afterwards, you clean up and quickly make your way back to the street, a happier orc.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Pay for Liz", "result": "You pay for Liz, and everyone but her leave. You quickly undress, and take advantage of the ample business advantages that the Gods have given her. Her bosom and ass provide great entertainment as your animal instincts take over. You greatly enjoy the next hour, eventually finishing, cleaning up and leaving the brothel with a smile on your face.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Pay for Starflower", "result": "You pay for Starflower, and all others live. You quickly undress, and allow your animal instincts to take over. Over the next hour you make sure to enjoy every inch of the young elf's body, and learn she's very, very skilled at her job. After an hour you finish, clean yourself up and leave, happier than you've ever been.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Visit the Shop", "result": "You go into the shop, and buy a lamb steak, a shiny purple fruit, boiled sheep's brain and a pouch of milk. You quickly eat these delicious fruits, particularly enjoying the sheep's brain and milk. As you finish, you smile to yourself, your stomach full.\n\n\nTime to find something else to do.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Visit the Gambling Ring", "result": "You go inside the gambling ring, where a large half-orc stands, leaning against the doorway.\n\n\n\"Good evening, kind patron.\" He says in a dull, bored voice. \"Would you care to see a fight? Five coins, make a bet.\"\n\n\n\"What's the fight?\" You ask, eagerly.\n\n\n\"A Dragon Youngling, can barely spit fire, vs a trio of wolves we managed to catch. It's a good fight.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Bet on the Wolves", "result": "You place a five coin bet on the wolves, and enter the gambling ring. You find a spot looking in on the ring, watching a small red dragon, snarling at the crowd. Three trapdoors open, with three wolves entering. The wolves begin howling as the dragon snarls. The Dragon lets out a short first of fire, alighting one of the wolves who begins leaping and rolling around in pain. The other two wolves jump, with the dragon lunging forward and biting into the second wolf's neck and tearing into the flesh and fur, before dropping the bleeding wolf. The third wolf lands on the dragon and begins biting and tearing at the dragon's wing. The Dragon screeches, leaping around and flinging the wolf off the ring. The dragon snarls and leaps forward, tearing the wolf's head off and flinging it out of the ring. It lands next to you, but a small child grabs it first and holds it in the air with a laugh.\n\n\nYou leave, five coins poorer.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Bet on the Dragon Youngling", "result": "You place a five coin bet on the dragon youngling, and enter the gambling ring. You find a spot looking in on the ring, watching a small red dragon, snarling at the crowd. Three trapdoors open, with three wolves entering. The wolves begin howling as the dragon snarls. The Dragon lets out a short first of fire, alighting one of the wolves who begins leaping and rolling around in pain. The other two wolves jump, with the dragon lunging forward and biting into the second wolf's neck and tearing into the flesh and fur, before dropping the bleeding wolf. The third wolf lands on the dragon and begins biting and tearing at the dragon's wing. The Dragon screeches, leaping around and flinging the wolf off the ring. The dragon snarls and leaps forward, tearing the wolf's head off and flinging it out of the ring. It lands next to you, but a small child grabs it first and holds it in the air with a laugh.\n\n\nYou leave, five coins richer.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Visit the Tavern", "result": "You walk into the Tavern, and drop five gold coins on the counter.\n\n\n\"Barkeep. Get me a mug of your finest ale. No, get me however many mugs of my cheapest ale this can get.\"\n\n\nYou're slid over several mugs of ale, which you begin drinking with glee. As you do, an old man sits down next to you wearing the Kingdom of Man's military uniform. \n\n\n\"Good day, sir. Ah, an orc. A fierce beast, at that one.\"\n\n\n\"I am not a beast. I am a warrior.\" You grunt, annoyed.\n\n\n\"Ah, of course, of course my good friend. I was just making conversation.\"\n\n\nYou look over at him, noting a black, jagged blade at his side that you recognize as Demonic Obsidian. \n\n\n\"That's a nice blade. Where's it from?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"Ah, now that's a story. I'll tell it to you for a bottle of Elvish Wine, only five coins. A man needs to drink.\" He winks at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pay for the man's wine", "result": "You pay for the man's drink, and he gleefully accepts.\n\n\n\"Thank you. Hell, your kind are far better than most around here. I was a soldier in the King's Royal Army. I was sent to fight the Necromancer's Army, at only a young age. Not the current Necromancer, mind you, the boy's father, the first Necromancer. I was sent to a small graveyard, where a local friendly giant had been buried. One of the Necromancer's Disciples had taken a group of zombies and ghouls down to raise the giant as a soldier in their army, so I was sent to kill them with my regiment. The dead were everywhere, and I sunk my sword into a zombie and lost it. There I was, unarmed and surrounded by the dead, when I saw this figure in a black cloak. I tackled him, grabbed his sword, this very weapon, and stabbed him to death. With that, the zombies lost their leader and we regrouped and repelled the dead. I wielded this very sword when we stormed Reaper's Castle and killed that blasted necromancer. Anyhow, that's my story. I'm glad someone heard it, and gladder my lips aren't as parched.\"\n\n\nYou nod and quickly finish your drink.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Refuse", "result": "\"No thanks.\"\n\n\nThe Soldier nods in understanding, and you continue drinking. After a few minutes, a man knocks into you, spilling your drink.\n\n\n\"Oi!\" You yell, standing up and turning.\n\n\nIn front of you is a large man with a thick black beard, who looks at you.\n\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\n\"You spilled my drink!\" You roar at him.\n\n\n\"Ha! My little daughter could've held a drink with more grip than that! It's not my fault!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Punch the Man", "result": "You smash your fist into the man's head, knocking him backwards. The man stumbles backwards, and you leap in, punching him twice more.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue punching", "result": "You continue punching, and although the man gets two hits in and you, smashing your nose, his body eventually goes limp as he falls to the ground.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Stomp the man to death", "result": "You begin stomping on the man, breaking bones and splattering blood around. A man tries to pull you off but you shove him off. You hear a yell as the man's skull is caved in, and as you turn to leave a blade enters your stomach. You look up to see a Town Guard, his sword deep into your stomach.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Leave the Tavern", "result": "You turn to leave as the man stands again. As you walk, the man draws a sword and yells. You turn to confront him, but he stabs you through the chest, straight through the heart.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Have Gruzub distract it", "result": "\"Gruzub! Distract the beast!\"\n\n\n\"Distract it?\" Gruzub asks quizically, before picking up a stone and chucking it at the boar.\n\n\nThe boar squeals and turns to gore Gruzub.\n\n\n\"I did it! Ah, I did it!\" He yells, diving out of the way.\n\n\nYou charge forward, stabbing the boar repeatedly in the side. It's intestines begin falling out, and it collapses, dead.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null]}]}, null]}, null]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story32.json b/data/scraper/stories/story32.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..401f041 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story32.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=34193", "context": "", "first_story_block": "The symphonies of snoring and vigorous notebook writing fill your ears as you sit in class at Bridgeport High School.\n\n\nWhy can't this English class be over already? You think to yourself.\n\n\nSlowly, you pull out your phone and start checking your texts...\n\n\nHey! Do you want to go see Studio 5 tonight?\n\nIt's supposed to be an awesome movie! \n\nYour friend asks you.\n\n\nIs that the murder mystery? It sounds really good!\n\nI can't even imagine what it must feel like getting\n\nchased by a killer in real life!\n\nYou respond back.\n\n\nRING RING RING RING RING RING!!!\n\n\nThe sound of your high school's bell screams into your ears as you lift your head up from your cell phone. It looks like it's time to go home! You grab your belongings, throw everything into your backpack, and rush out of your classroom. \n\n\nFlooded in the halls are hundreds of students and faculty. You squeeze your way past the crowds to your locker and spin the lock for your combination. \n\n\n14-22-10...CLICK!\n\n\nYou swing the locker open and grab your books. Why does there have to be so much homework?! It's Friday!\n\n\nYou close the locker and make your tedious way down the stairs of the school to the exit. Outside, you see the same long row of six or seven school buses. Luckily for you, your home is walking distance from the school, so you don't have to deal with finding a seat or bullies. Although you do wish your parents would surprise you with a car. After all, your 16th birthday is coming up soon.\n\n\nYou follow the crowds out of the school grounds and cross the street. There are two paths you can take...\n\n\nThe Shortcut - Begin a new story\n\n\nAuthor's Note - Note from the author", "action_results": [{"action": "The Shortcut", "result": "You turn to take the shortcut through the woods. Surprisingly, not many people know about this shortcut. You stumbled upon it on accident while following a group of students that lived near you. The path remains pretty isolated for the most part.\n\n\nThe sound of cracking twigs and the wind hitting the trees becomes more apparent. The farther away you leave the school, the more silent with nature you get. \n\n\nSCREECH!\n\n\nThe sound of an animal's cry of pain fills your ears. You look around and don't see anything. You keep walking forward until you reach a cliff. Normally, you walk around the cliff and continue upwards. \n\n\nSCREECH!\n\n\nIt looks like the sound is coming from down below.\n\n\nImportant Choice: Do you risk climbing down the cliff to investigate the noise? OR Do you ignore the noise and continue your way home.\n\n\nYour decision will have consequences.", "action_results": [{"action": "Risk climbing down the cliff to investigate the noise.", "result": "You have made your decision. \n\n\nFor some reason, you feel different. You feel chills swing over your body, almost as if someone is watching you and your every move. You turn around. Nothing but the forest and trees. \n\n\nYou approach the cliff and see an old, wooden ladder. You've always been too afraid to approach the cliff, mostly due to your fear of heights. The ladder is fastened to the cliff, allowing for travel below. You grab on to it and slowly make your way down. Your hands begin to get sweaty at the climb. You must be several hundred feet in the air! Don't look down, don't look down, don't look down...you tell yourself.\n\n\nSCREECH!\n\n\nYou hear the sound of the animal's cries in pain. Your pace hastens as you continue your trek down the ladder. \n\n\nPOP...POP...POP...POP!!!!\n\n\nYou look up at the ladder. The weight of your body and backpack have caused it to unhinge! This old thing can't hold your weight much longer! Now what?! ", "action_results": [{"action": "Jump off the ladder!", "result": "\"Hyah!\" you scream as you jump off the ladder. You close your eyes. This must be the end. What a terrible way to go. You can see it in the newspapers now. \"Kid Jumps off old Ladder and Falls to Their Death\". Just as quickly, an eerie thought hits you in the face. What if everyone thinks you committed suicide? What if they don't find your body? What if you stay missing at the bottom of this cliff forever?!\n\n\nPLOSH!\n\n\nYou open your eyes. It looks like the drop down was only a couple feet. You smile and realize that you are safe. ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Bottom of the Cliff", "result": "SCREEEEECH!\n\n\nThe screeching sound gets louder and louder. You quickly turn around. The bottom of the cliff is pretty dark. You pull out your smart phone and slide the lock. Just as fast, you turn on the flash, revealing the darkness. \n\n\nThe bottom of the cliff feels more like a cave than anything else. You walk slowly, hoping that a bear didn't make its home down here. \n\n\nYou continue your way through the cliff until you come across...a fox?\n\n\nThe fox appears to be stuck. Its hind leg is trapped between two large rocks. You shine the light on the fox, revealing it's red eyes. It growls at you, but then painfully makes a screeching sound. You look down at the two rocks and see some blood. Perhaps the rocks fell from the cavern ceiling, pinning the fox's leg beneath it. You're not exactly a hunter or a fox trainer. Is it safe to free the fox from it's prison?\n\n\nImportant Choice: Do you move the two rocks and free the fox? OR Do you leave the fox to die and find a way out of the cavern?\n\n\nYour decision will have consequences.", "action_results": [{"action": "Move the two rocks and free the fox.", "result": "You have made your decision. \n\n\nYou grab one of the large rocks and push it aside with all your might. You can hear the fox wincing in pain, but it's no longer screeching. You grab the other rock and forcefully move it aside. The fox gets up and begins licking its paws, still crying in pain. \n\n\nFinally, the fox looks up at you and then turns to scurry away. \n\n\nYou exhale in relief that the fox is okay and didn't attack you. ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Way Out", "result": "You continue your way down the cavern. As you take each step, you fear that you may never see the sun ever again. \n\n\nYou shine your phone's flash on the ground and see a fork in the path. You try to investigate for signs and see one:\n\n\nDANGER!\n\nRight Path is Unstable\n\n\nWhich way do you go?", "action_results": [{"action": "Left Path", "result": "You make your way down the left path of the cave. The further you walk, the less dark it gets. It looks like you're finally reaching an exit! \n\n\nThe sun beats down on your face. You leave the cavern and realize that you have no clue where you are. You pull out your phone and enter the GPS app. Unfortunately, you don't have any reception from where you are. Better check later...\n\n\nYou start heading forward, trying to think where the cavern could've taken you in comparison to where you climbed down. You walk around the cavern opening and realize that there's way to many trees to see anything from above. \n\n\nYou continue forward, hoping you stumble home...", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "You make your walk through the forest. Pulling out your phone, you look at the time, 4:15 PM. The bell at school rang exactly 1 hour ago. You've been traveling through this shortcut for 1 hour. If you just would have taken the long way home, you wouldn't be in this mess. \n\n\n\"Please don't do this! Please!\" \n\n\nYou hear the sound of a girl. You start running forward and come across a large boulder. From the opposite side of the boulder, you see the girl. Her wrists are bound. You can see a figure above her. The figure appears to be wearing a clown mask. \n\n\n\"I'll do anything you want, please don't kill me!\"\n\n\nThe clown mask figure grabs a long machete from his pocket and playfully wraps it around the girl's neck. You can hear the girl whimper in pain. \n\n\nImportant Choice: Do you risk trying to save the girl from the clown? OR Do you wait to see what happens?\n\n\nYour decision will have consequences.", "action_results": [{"action": "Risk trying to save the girl from the clown.", "result": "You have made your decision.\n\n\nCan this day get any worse?! First you lose your way home, and now you're about to fight a serial killer clown! \n\n\nYou look around nervously for something to fight with. The closest thing thing to you is a large rock. With one swift breath, you get up from hiding.\n\n\n\"Take that, you evil clown!\"\n\n\n\"What are you doing?!\" the girl turns around and screams at you.\n\n\nYou ram the rock into the clown's head. The clown falls backwards on to the grass. With all your might, you jump on top of the clown. You turn to the girl. \"Run away now!\"\n\n\nThe girl doesn't run away. She grabs you and pushes you off the clown. \n\n\n\"You psycho! That clown isn't trying to kill me!\" \n\n\nThe clown gets up and takes his mask off. It's just a normal guy. \n\n\nYou look at the two people very confusingly. \"Then what's happening?\" \n\n\nThe bound girl and masked clown guy look at each other. \"We're - we're role playing.\" \n\n\nAnd YOU'RE the psycho. \"Who role plays a serial killer clown kidnapping in the middle of the forest?!\"\n\n\nThe couple looks at you menacingly. \"Just stay away from us.\" They run away towards the cavern. \n\n\nYou look around and notice that the clown guy dropped his machete. Should you take it? \n\n\nTip: Click on the machete to take it. It will get added to your inventory. You do not have to click on the machete to take it if you don't want to. The decision is yours.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "The Off Beaten Path", "result": "The more you walk down the forest path, the less confident you feel about which direction you're going. You pull your phone out and check for a signal...still nothing.\n\n\nSNAP!\n\n\nYou turn around at the sound of a crack. What was that? Is someone following you? Is it that creepy couple again? \n\n\nYou turn back around and continue your way through the forest. Eventually, you reach a sign. The sign is wooden and very old. You doubt that anyone has seen this sign in a while. \n\n\nNatural Springs ---->\n\n\nThe sign would seem pretty normal...if there wasn't a hand print of blood on it! You're unsure about what to do. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Examine the Sign Further", "result": "You walk forward and look at the sign from a closer perspective. The hand print of blood looks old, as if someone left their mark here months ago. You look down at the floor and see a crumpled up flyer. \n\n\nYou pick up the flyer and read what it says. Apparently, it's dated over a year ago: \n\n\n\"Mother and Son Tragically Killed in Accident\"\n\n\nJoshua Matthews, 16 year old boy, and Christina Matthews, 35 year old mother, tragically died in a car accident last Saturday. According to witnesses on the scene, Joshua was driving the car. They lost control after swerving to miss a deer. The car pushed through a fence and flew off the Bridgeport Canyon. Witnesses say the explosion was so loud, they could hear it from miles away. The bodies of Christina and Joshua have not been recovered.\"\n\n\nClue Discovered!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Follow the Sign", "result": "You decide to follow the sign. A couple minutes pass. You were not ready to walk in this forest today. Sporting jeans and a t-shirt, you couldn't feel more hot. The thought of ripping your jeans into shorts crosses your mind. You just really need water. Unlucky for you, you were so quick to leave school, you forgot to fill your water bottle. You suddenly begin to hear the sound of rapid water. You've made it to the springs! \n\n\nYou see one large body of water. There's a waterfall and cliff protruding high up above. You remember seeing on survival TV shows that spring water like this is safe to drink. Then again, you also remember some people getting sick of dysentery or worse... In fear of getting your clothes wet, you make your way to a more stagnant part of the spring. \n\n\nImportant Choice: Do you risk drinking the spring water? OR Do you hold off drinking the spring water. \n\n\nYour decision will have consequences.", "action_results": [{"action": "Risk drinking the spring water.", "result": "You have made your decision.\n\n\nYou drop down on your knees. You edge forward beside the spring and drink the water. The cold splash of water tickles down your throat. You feel invigorated to finally have something to drink. You wash your face and hands. Eventually, you get up. \n\n\nIt's time to find a way out of here. You think to yourself.\n\n\nHopefully that spring water won't come back to bite you later...", "action_results": [{"action": "The RV", "result": "You make your way past the springs. You can only hope that you are going the right way. \n\n\nGlancing at your watch, you notice the time - 4:50. It's been almost two hours since the final bell rang.\n\n\nAs you make your way down the forest, your eyes widen in surprise: A big, white RV? \n\n\nThe RV looks pretty old. As if it hadn't been driven in a long time. The front of the RV is completely smashed. Maybe someone drove down here and crashed it here on accident. You don't see any roads though. Rust and ivy cover most of the dilapidated vehicle. \n\n\nPerhaps someone lives there...maybe they can get you out of here!\n\n\nImportant Decision: Do you knock on the RV door to see if anyone is home? OR Do you hide and wait around to see if anyone comes back?", "action_results": [{"action": "Knock on the RV Door", "result": "You have made your decision.\n\n\nYou decide to knock on the RV door. After all, what if it's just a friendly hippie that lives out here and happens to know the way out? \n\n\nKNOCK KNOCK KNOCK!\n\n\nYou pound your fist on the RV door and wait for a response. \n\n\n\"Hello?\" you shout. \n\n\nNo response. You look around at the windows of the RV. Each of them have their curtains covered. You try to open the RV door, but find it locked. If you have a sharp enough object, you may be able to get inside.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look for an alternate way inside the RV", "result": "You walk around the side of the RV and notice a slightly open window. You may be able to squeeze through it if you try hard enough. You put your backpack down and start climbing through. Pushing slowly, you make your way inside the enclosed space. After a couple minutes, you successfully slide inside the RV!\n\n\nAs you go to close the window, a metal piece scratches your arm. The wound starts bleeding immediately. You try to put your hand over the wound, but no use. Blood is dripping everywhere. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Inside the RV", "result": "You find yourself in the main room of the RV. The driver and passenger seats are near the east side of the car. They seem archaic, as if no one has driven this vehicle in years. The far west side of the RV has a bathroom, a bedroom, and a full kitchen and table. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Examine the table", "result": "You walk up to the table. It's made of a cheap, white plastic. You see several red stains on it. Could it be...blood?\n\n\nOn the chairs below the table, you see duct tape, rope, and some gloves. \n\n\nYou suddenly feel very worried.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Examine the kitchen", "result": "You approach the kitchen. Across from the table, the kitchen is pretty small. You notice a sink, a medium sized fridge, a microwave, and some drawers.\n\n\nYou look inside the sink and see several dirty knives and forks. You pick them up and see specks of red on them. You put them back and look in the drawers.\n\n\nMost of the drawers contain spices. \n\n\nYou decide to look inside the fridge. You see several zip lock bags of food. You can't distinguish what the food is. You decide to pull a bag out. Upon further inspection, you discover several human fingers inside the bag! Crap! What is this place?! \n\n\nYou put the bag back in the fridge and slam it shut.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Examine the bedroom", "result": "You walk over to the bedroom and open the door. Just a single bed in the center of the room with two nightstands. The bed has a folder on top of it. \n\n\nYou pick up the folder and open it, revealing the contents. \n\n\n\"Patient #34 Log\n\nThe starvation test begins today! I have replaced the food rations with spoiled counterparts to see how the veterans will react. So far, they are all acting very angry and hungry. They have become more violent, reverting back to their war-torn selves. We'll see how much longer they can last. I intend on going as long as possible before I replace the food again.\n\n\nYou see a newspaper article:\n\n\n\"Missing Boy's Arm Found in Canyon!\n\nMissing person, Joshua Matthews, has been found at the bottom of the Bridgeport Canyon. His char burned arm was discovered several hundred feet away from the car. There are still no signs of Christina, Joshua's mother. Daniel Matthews, the father, was committed to the Bridgeport Sanitarium for major post traumatic stress issues after coming home from the war.\"\n\n\nYou're not sure what all this means, but you're scared. You put all the information away and leave the bedroom.\n\n\nClue Discovered!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Examine the bathroom", "result": "You go inside the bathroom. It's pretty small: just a toilet, shower and sink. Besides the putrid smell of feces, you don't notice much of anything else. ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Leave the RV", "result": "This was a mistake. You shouldn't have been in this RV. You walk over to the door to leave.\n\n\nCLICK!\n\n\nYou hear the sound of the door rattling. Uh oh! It looks like the killer is back!\n\n\nYou're going to have to hide!", "action_results": [{"action": "Hide in the Bedroom", "result": "Quickly, you dash to the bedroom door and hide inside. You crawl under the bed and stare at the door. The cracks beneath the door are large enough that you can see what's going on from the other room. \n\n\nBANG!\n\n\nThe RV door swings open. You see the boots of a large man, followed by the shoes of a girl. \n\n\n\"HELP! SOMEONE HELP ME!\" \n\n\nThe girl's scream sounds very familiar. It then hits you...the girl is the one from earlier. Where's her boyfriend?\n\n\n\"SIT!\"\n\n\nThe booted man throws the girl into a chair. He grabs duct tape and ties her to the seat. \n\n\n\"HELP ME!\"\n\n\n\"Do you want me to cook your tongue for lunch?\"\n\n\nThe girl becomes quiet and starts crying. \n\n\n\"Good girl.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Blood Trail", "result": "The boots stop in front of the bedroom door. \"Someone's been in here.\" He opens the bedroom door. You hold your breath at the sound. \n\n\nThe boots get closer and closer to the bed. \"The blood breadcrumbs trail ends here.\"\n\n\nOh no! Your arm was bleeding and left a trail!\n\n\nYou keep your breath still as quiet as possible. ", "action_results": [{"action": "What's for Lunch", "result": "\"You keep your breath held in, hoping that you don't get caught by the killer. That is, until he looks down below the bed.\n\n\n\"Ah ha!\"\n\n\nYou see a masked face of the killer. He pulls you by the hair and gets you out from under the bed. \n\n\n\"Stop!\" you plead with the killer. He laughs and drags you across the floor. \n\n\nYou try to wriggle and fight, but it's no use. The killer sits you on the chair and duct tapes you as well. \n\n\n\"Now I have two lunch guests with me today.\"\n\n\n\"Please! You don't have to do this!\" \n\n\nThe killer looks at the girl and slaps her in the face. \"Only I get to talk.\"\n\n\nThe killer turns around and opens the fridge. \"I hope you like fingers!\"\n\n\nHe grabs a pot from under a cabinet and starts boiling the bag of fingers. The girl across from you starts crying harder. You try to remain calm, but it's no use. \n\n\n\"Hm, hmm, hmmm!\" the killer begins humming a song. You slowly start to shiver. \n\n\nAfter a couple minutes, the killer grabs a chair and sits next to the both of you. \n\n\nBAM!\n\n\nThe killer pounds his fist on the table, making you both jump out of your seats, that is, if you could jump out of your seats. \n\n\n\"Why are you in my RV?\" the killer asks as he looks at you. You can see his delirious face.\n\n\n\"I'm lost! I'm just trying to get home!\" \n\n\nThe killer looks at you and laughs. He then smiles and pulls a knife out from under the table.\n\n\n\"WRONG!\"\n\n\nHe slices one of the girl's fingers clean off. \n\n\nShe shouts out in pain, but the killer covers her mouth. \"That's going to be delicious!\" \n\n\nHe drops the finger in the pot. \n\n\nYou look at the killer with eyes of complete fear and anger. You need to get out of here. A few more minutes pass, and the killer turns off the pot. \n\n\n\"Lunch is ready!\" he grabs several plates and puts one finger on each one. He walks over to the both of you. \n\n\n\"Ah, where are my manners!\" He grabs several dirty forks from his sink and places them next to the both of you. \n\n\n\"Buon appetite!\" \n\n\nHe grabs a fork and takes a bite of the finger. He crunches it down and swallows it. He then looks at the girl. \"Now it's your turn.\" \n\n\nThe girl screams and cries, but it's no use. He grabs a fork, stabs the finger, and slides it in her mouth. \"Eat up!\"\n\n\nShe spits out the finger and keeps screaming. \n\n\n\"Now that's not very nice.\"\n\n\nHe slaps the girl again, this time knocking her unconscious.\n\n\n\"Let's see if your manners are better.\"\n\n\nThe killer grabs a finger and puts it in your mouth. The finger is soft and the texture is edible enough to swallow, despite how disgusting it is. In fear of getting killed, you eat it. \n\n\n\"Good! Now was that so bad?\" The killer gets up and walks to the bathroom. \"I need to use the room. When I get back, you'll LOVE dessert!\"\n\n\nWhen the killer is gone, you panic. Now what?! You have very little time to escape. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait around", "result": "With nothing to help you, you're pretty much useless. \n\n\nBANG!\n\n\nThe door to the RV swings open. You see the clown guy, machete in hand. \n\n\n\"Oh my gosh, Elizabeth!\" the guy runs to her and unties her binds. \n\n\n\"Charlie! You came to save me!\" she whispers. \n\n\nYou look at them and plead. \"Wait! Help me!\"\n\n\nCharlie looks at you and nods. \"We'll help you out.\" He grabs his machete and releases you from the duct tape.\n\n\nThe three of you escape the RV. As you're walking out, Charlie stumbles forward. \"Ahh - my side!\"\n\n\n\"What's wrong?\" Elizabeth screams. \n\n\n\"That killer stabbed me in the ribs.\"\n\n\nCharlie looks at you and then hands you his keys. \"Take my car keys and drive the car here. We can escape that way!\"\n\n\nYou see the car, several hundred feet away from the RV. You anxiously gulp and make your way to the car. When you get to the car, you put the keys into the ignition start it. You drive the car over to the RV. When you get there, the two are nowhere to be seen. You look inside the RV. The killer is gone!\n\n\nWhere did they all go?", "action_results": [{"action": "Now what?!", "result": "You find yourself standing outside the Killer's RV. Charlie's car is still running behind you. Where did they all go? They couldn't have gone far.", "action_results": [{"action": "Investigate the Camp Site", "result": "The campsite is relatively small. The Killer's RV stands in the far east corner. Charlie's car is also there as well. A picnic table and chairs are on the west corner. A metal garbage can stands in between these two corners. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Examine the Picnic Area", "result": "You approach the picnic area. It's pretty old and rusty. The picnic table is also the home to a beehive. Better be careful for that...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Examine the RV", "result": "You don't want to go inside the killer's RV. You make your way along the sides of the RV and notice a secret compartment. You pull the compartment open. The smell of rotting flesh hits your nose.\n\n\n\"What the hell is that?!\" you scream. \n\n\nA body flies out of the RV's compartment. It appears to be the body of a man. The man is wearing a lanyard on his neck. Upon further inspection, you read the badge:\n\n\nDr. Craig Wilson\n\nPsychologist\n\n\n\nDid the killer kill his psychologist? There's something really sinister about all this.\n\n\nClue Discovered!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Examine Charlie's Car", "result": "You sit inside Charlie's car. The car seems to have half a tank of gas left. \"Well, when I find Charlie and Elizabeth, we can definitely escape with their car.\" you tell yourself.\n\n\nYou decide to do some snooping. Apparently, Charlie and Elizabeth are both students at your town's community college. You don't see much else of anything to use. You turn the car off and take the keys with you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Examine the Trash Can", "result": "You examine the trash can. The can itself has various junk inside it. As you step near it, you feel hollow ground. \n\n\nYou push the can out of the way to discover...a secret passageway? Maybe the killer escaped through here!", "action_results": [{"action": "Go through the secret passageway.", "result": "You start making your way down the passage. When you get to the bottom, you land on a metallic floor. The area around you is dark. Is this a war bunker? \n\n\nYou shine your phone's flash on the area. The time - 5:45. Almost 3 hours until the final bell rang.\n\n\nYou continue making your way down the passageway. The hall is made of concrete. Whoever made this place was obviously keeping the outside out. \n\n\nEventually, you make your way to a large window. You glance at the window, but see nothing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue down the hall", "result": "Suddenly, a light comes on from the window in the next room. You see Charlie and Elizabeth, both tied up to operating tables. They both awaken and start screaming for help.\n\n\nIn front of you is a mechanical operation board. You then hear a speaker go off. \"Hello. Since you have all decided to play with me instead of having lunch, I have decided to play with you. In front of you, your friends are tied to my operating tables. On the ceiling...\"\n\n\nYou suddenly see large rows of sharp blades from above. \n\n\n\"You must choose who will suffer the fate of my blades. The person you choose will slowly get their limbs chopped so they can feel all the pain.\"\n\n\nYou shudder at the thought of having your body slowly chopped like that.\n\n\n\"Help!\" you hear Elizabeth scream from the table.\n\n\n\"Make your choice wisely.\"\n\n\nThe knives begin to slowly go down on Elizabeth and Charlie. If you don't decide fast, they'll both be chopped!", "action_results": [{"action": "Your stomach feels strange...", "result": "You feel your stomach churning in pain. Suddenly, the thought of you drinking the spring water hits you in the face. You feel your vision get blurry. Before you can do anything, you fall to the floor.\n\n\nThe last thing you hear before passing out is the screams of Charlie and Elizabeth.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wake Up from Passing Out", "result": "\"Ughhhh.\" you wake up on the floor of the window room. It looks like you passed out from poisoning of the spring water. \n\n\nYou get up and look at the window. The site is so gruesome, you start puking on the ground next to the window. \n\n\nThe knives from above have cut through Elizabeth's body cleanly. Each limb has been completely separated perfectly. \n\n\nCharlie, on the other hand, isn't so lucky. Due to his clown costume, the knives only partially cut his lower torso, leaving him in a half conscious state. You watch him convulse and die from blood loss.\n\n\n\"No! Why did this have to happen?! Why did I drink the spring water?!\" \n\n\nYou cry out for the couple. If only you could go back and save them...\n\n\nYou get up, with some difficulty, and keep moving forward to the next room.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Next Hallway", "result": "You walk into the next hallway of the bunker. The more you make your way down, the more you scared you get. \n\n\nWalking into the next room, you try to feel for a light switch. \n\n\n\nCLICK!\n\n\nThe sound of luminescent lights fill the room. It looks like some kind of office. You see a desk at one corner of the room and a book shelf on the other. You see a door near the opposite end of the office.", "action_results": [{"action": "Examine the Desk", "result": "You make your way over to the old desk. By the looks of it, it's pretty dusty. You sit down on the chair next to the desk. \n\n\nPLOP!\n\n\nThe chair breaks its hinges, causing you to come crashing down on the floor. As you're getting up, you spot several sheets of paper under the desk - \n\n\n\"Diary Entry #102: It was all supposed to be a Psychological Test. You know, like the Stanford Prison Experiment? Philip Zimbardo ring a bell? We tested veterans and PTSD, trying to find what triggers their issues. This War Bunker was designed to have fearful objects to test different scenarios, such as the operating tables, torture devices, and limited rations. We had a psychologist pretend to be a veteran to make sure that nothing got too out of hand...\n\n\n\nWe were testing the starvation experiment. The veterans were getting desperate. We were just about to end everything when...the men...they grabbed the psychologist, knocked him unconscious...and chopped him with the knives. They proceeded to eat his flesh. It was then that we realized that all of these veterans were too dangerous to be in the outside world. We locked the bunker and told the sanitarium that the test subjects had escaped. It was us all along. We did this to those men, to that poor psychologist. \n\n\nClue Discovered!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Examine the Book Shelf", "result": "You make your way to the old book shelf. Each of the shelves have various, dusty old books. It would take forever trying to search through all of them. As you walk away from the shelf, a book falls from the floor. You pick it up, and out drops a locket?\n\n\nYou pick up the locket and look at it. The outside has a rose on it. Encrusted in the inside is a picture of a woman with a message. \"I love you, Daniel. Please come home safe. -Christina\"\n\n\nClue Discovered!", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Go through the other Door", "result": "You decide to walk over to the door across from the entrance. You open it with ease and walk inside. The dark room turns out to be a staircase leading up to something. You climb the stairs, hoping the exit will be at the top soon enough. \n\n\nOnce you get to the last step, you approach a hatch. You push open the hatch and climb out. ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Cavern", "result": "You find yourself inside the cavern that you saw from the beginning of your walk. You out and see the rusty ladder. \n\n\nMaybe you can climb the ladder and escape! Who cares how rusty it is! \n\n\nBefore you can do anything, a hand grabs you. You lose consciousness.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Forest Fire", "result": "You wake up in a mysterious cot. It looks like you're back inside the cavern. Your hands and feet are bound. You see a lantern several feet away from you. \n\n\nQuickly, you make your way to the lantern, only to be stopped by several chains on your legs. It looks like whoever knocked you out obviously wanted to make sure you weren't going anywhere. Just as quickly, your chains knock the lantern over, causing the cot to catch on fire! \n\n\nYou try to scream and shout for help, but no use. \n\n\nSquinting your eyes, you manage to see a key on the wall. You try to kick the wall. The key wiggles. You kick the hollow, stone wall again and the key falls. Unfortunately, it's way too far away from you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fox For the Win!", "result": "\"Ahoooooo!\" \n\n\nYou see the fox that you saved earlier jump out at your. It's wagging its tail. Maybe it's feeling better. \n\n\n\"Hey there, little fella! Can you grab me that key over there?\"\n\n\nThe fox looks at you and tilts its head. It looks at the key and makes itself towards it. Grabbing the key with its teeth, it picks the key up and drops it in front of you.\n\n\n\"Good fox!\" you tell the creature as you pet its head.\n\n\nThe fox lays down next to you. \n\n\nYou untie your bonds and chains and quickly get up from the cavern. ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Outer Cavern", "result": "You make your way to the outer cavern. You keep walking forward until you see the RV again. You see Charlie's car.\n\n\nQuickly you make your way to the car. You unlock the door and put your keys in the ignition.\n\n\n\"Where do you think you're going?\"\n\n\nYou hear the killer from the backseat. You suddenly feel your neck being choked to death. You can't do much, except barely move your hands. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Press on the accelerator!", "result": "With all the power and might you have, you slam your foot on the accelerator. The car goes rushing forward. Instead of steering, you go a full, whooping, 50 miles into a tree. Your airbag immediately goes out. \n\n\nYou get out of the car completely fine. The killer on the other hand, is dead. You walk inside the car and see several gashing head wounds. \n\n\nYou're secretly glad that the killer is finally no longer a threat, but you feel as though the situation could've been handled differently.\n\n\nYou make your way to the path.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "When you get back on to the road, you sit there thinking about everything that's happened today. It was supposed to be just a simple walk home. None of this was supposed to happen.\n\n\nYou continue your walk down the road. Eventually, you reach a spot that has cellular reception. You call the police. Several fire trucks, ambulances, and police trucks make their way to your location. You are given fire blankets for support. Major news outlets come out and start reporting on the incident. They want to hear your story on what happened, but you refuse to tell them the story. \n\n\nEventually, the police come up to you. \"Can you tell us where this killer is?\"\n\n\nYou nod your head. \"Yes, he's over here in Charlie's car.\" \n\n\nThe police follow you to Charlie's car. As you walk over there, you stumble a few times. Eventually, you make it there. You gape your mouth open. \n\n\nThe killer...he's gone...\n\n\nThe police schedule a massive search team for the killer that same night. After several hours, no sign. \n\n\nAfter all this, you just wish you had some closure. Maybe if you would've done things differently. You don't know anymore...You wish you could've saved Charlie and Elizabeth. It's just not fair. You feel so lucky to be safe...and that's what matters.", "action_results": [{"action": "Choices", "result": "Welcome to the Choices Section\n\nHere you can see hints of what choices you made.\n\nYou will also find your collection of clues.\n\n\n\nClues Found: 0 of 7\n\n\nNumber 1 : Yes, you did that decision.\n\nNumber 0 : No, you did not agree to this decision/you did not do this.\n\n\n1. The Mysterious Sound 1 of 1. \n\nDid you go and investigate the mysterious sound below the cavern?\n\n\n2. In Balance With Nature 1 of 1.\n\nDid you save the injured fox?\n\n\n3. The Clown 1 of 1\n\nDid you stop the masked clown?\n\n\n4. The Unclean Spring Water 0 of 1\n\nDid you hold off on drinking the spring water?\n\n\n5. You're My Hero 0 of 1\n\nDid you escape the killer's RV with the girl?\n\n\n6. It's a trap! 4 of 4\n\nDid you save both Charlie AND Elizabeth from their gruesome fate?\n\n\n7. Ensure your safety. 0 of 1\n\nTo stay safe, you lied to the killer and said you weren't going to the police.\n\n\n8. Mystery Solved. 0 of 1.\n\nYou found all the clues and discovered the killer's secret.\n\n\nThanks for playing! Feel free to leave a comment and tell us which choices you made! ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Hide and wait around to see if anyone comes back", "result": "You decide to hide around and wait until anyone arrives. A few moments later, you see a large figure in large black boots. He appears to be holding on to the girl that you saw earlier today. She's screaming for help!", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait a little longer.", "result": "How are you going to do anything if you can't defend yourself? \n\n\n\"Elizabeth!\" you hear the costume clown guy from the distance. \n\n\nThe figure stops and throws Elizabeth on the ground. \"Charlie! No! He's going to kill you!\"\n\n\nThe clown costume guy grabs his machete and stabs the figure. Angered, the figure stabs Charlie back, and then runs inside the RV. \n\n\nYou run up to the two of them. The girl looks up at you in surprise. \"You have to help us!\"\n\n\n\"I don't think that killer is done yet.\" you hear Charlie say from the ground.\n\n\n\"Charlie! Are you okay?!\" \n\n\n\"No...the killer stabbed me in the ribs.\" Charlie coughs up blood. He looks at you and hands you his car keys. \"Please...take these keys and get the car over there.\" He points to his car several hundred feet away. \n\n\n\"I'll stay here with Charlie.\" you hear the girl say.\n\n\n\"No Elizabeth! Go with them!\" Charlie responds. \n\n\n\"I'm not going anywhere without you.\"\n\n\nYou start making your way to the car. You put the keys into the ignition and drive to the RV. When you get back; however, there's no one to be seen. You make your way into the RV. Nothing. \n\n\nWhere did they all go?", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Hold off drinking the spring water.", "result": "You have made your decision.\n\n\nIf that spring water has parasites or other unclean chemicals, that could mean a really bad sickness later...or worse. You decide to stay safe and not drink the water. \n\n\nYou pull out your empty, plastic water bottle from your backpack. Slowly, you fill the water into the bottle. If you manage to find something hot, you can boil the water and clean out anything bad. \n\n\nTime to figure out a way out of here.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Don't Follow the Sign", "result": "You look around, trees all over. The path to the Springs seems like the only logical place to go. If you go through these trees, you may be even more lost than you are now. Maybe it's best to follow the sign...", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Wait to see what happens.", "result": "You have made your choice.\n\n\nYou don't have a single chance against a clown with a machete. You crouch down and hope that something can happen.\n\n\n\"Please! I beg of you! HELP SOMEBODY HELP!\"\n\n\nThe clown grabs the mouth of the girl with his bare hands. She screams in his palm but you can't hear her. You turn around and close your eyes, hoping this could all end quickly. \n\n\n\"Get your clown tongue in my mouth right now!\"\n\n\nYou open your eyes. What just happened? You turn around and see the girl. She's still tied up. The clown guy is on the ground, his mask is still on. They appear to be making out. \n\n\n\"How did you like this little sexcapade? Don't you just love role playing?\" you hear the girl say to the clown. She takes the clown's mask off, revealing a teenage guy. He nods and continues making out with the girl.\n\n\nSo this wasn't a real serial killer clown? Something's up...\n\n\nYou walk around the boulder and approach the couple. \"Excuse me...is everything okay over here\"\n\n\nThe girl looks up at you. \"Oh my God! It's a pervert! Were you watching us?!\"\n\n\nYou look at the girl in disbelief. \"I thought you were going to die!\" \n\n\nThe clown guy takes his mask off. \"Yeah, everything's fine. We're just...role playing.\" \n\n\nYou look at the couple in disbelief. Who role plays a serial killer clown kidnapping in the middle of the forest?! \n\n\n\"It's about time we start leaving anyway, right honey?\" the clown suggests.\n\n\n\"Yeah, I don't want any pervs watching us.\" the girl gives you a menacing look. They both get up and start heading back towards the way you came.\n\n\nYou're still in disbelief at what just happened. You take a deep breath and continue your way home...you hope...", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Right Path", "result": "You ignore the sign and push forward, hoping that it might just be old or something. As you make your way down the cavern, you see a light shrouded in darkness.\n\n\nWhat is a light doing in the middle of this cavern? You think to yourself.\n\n\nYou follow the light and finally get to it. It's a gasoline lamp. You turn the corner where the light is and notice that you are in some kind of bedroom. \n\n\nIn one corner of the room is a cot on the floor. Beside the cot is a fire with a cooking pit above it. You see several newspapers and toilet paper on another side. Next to the lantern, you see a crumpled piece of paper. \n\n\nYou unfold it and realize that it is a newspaper clipping. \"Killer Escaped From Sanitarium\" The article is too old to read. Could the killer be living here? \n\n\nYou shudder and decide to make your way back to the left path.\n\n\nClue Discovered!", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Leave the fox to die and find a way out of the cavern.", "result": "You have made your decision. \n\n\nYou look down at the big rocks. If this fox gets free, surely it will attack you and rip your face off. Better to just let it die. \n\n\nYou give the fox one last look. It stares into your eyes, pleading for help. Better safe than sorry. \n\n\nYou continue your way down the cavern.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Continue your pace down the ladder", "result": "POP...POP...POP!\n\n\nThe screws on the ladder begin to fall off, almost hitting you in the face. You slowly and cautiously continue your way down the ladder.\n\n\nPLOSH!\n\n\nLuckily for you, your feet hit the grass at the bottom of the cliff. You look up and notice that the ladder is definitely not going to be your way back up.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Ignore the noise and continue your way home.", "result": "You have made your decision.\n\n\nSCREECH!\n\n\nThat screech is way too scary to investigate. What if it's bear? Or what if it's a mythical creature like Bigfoot? \n\n\nYou turn around and cross your arms. What's worse, that ladder looks way too old to support your weight. It's time to get home. You make your way back to the path, hoping that you'll get home soon. \n\n\nA couple minutes pass, and you find yourself still walking along the valley. \n\n\nPLOP!\n\n\nAre you serious?! You look at your shoulder and see a large wad of bird poop! This seriously can't be happening right now. You take off your backpack and look inside it for some tissues. Looks like you forgot your tissues at home. \n\n\nYou pick your backpack back up. \n\n\nSNAG!\n\n\nYour backpack gets stuck on a tree branch! You pull it with all your might. Not budging. First the bird poop and now this?! \n\n\nYou pull harder and finally the back pack goes free...that is, until you lose your balance. \n\n\n\"Woah!\"\n\n\nYou fall backwards and start tumbling down the valley. You try to grab branches of trees or anything, but it's no use. Finally, you land at the bottom. You cough out some leaves and get up. You look at your body, realizing that you could pass for a hobo or a zombie. You look around and notice the opening to the cavern. You're definitely NOT going in there.\n\n\nYou turn around and pull out your phone to check the GPS app. No reception?! Are you serious?! You put your phone away and follow the trail, hoping you'll stumble home soon.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Author's Note", "result": "Welcome to \"The Shortcut Home\", the newest and latest story from me, AppDude27.\n\n\nThank you for taking the time to play this storygame! I would appreicate it if you could leave a rating and comment after your experience. Any feedback will help me a lot!\n\n\nBefore you begin your walk home from school, I must let you know that there are several branching paths that you can take. Every choice that you make, even the smallest, will have consequences. (This includes social, physical, grabbing or not grabbing items, and even which way you go.)\n\n\nSome tips:\n\n\n- You don't have to grab every item you come across. It's entirely up to you.\n\n- Try to make honest decisions, it will make the story much more meaningful to you.\n\n- Very important choices in the game will look like this. Those choices will change the course of the story. Any choices that are not blue will still change the story, as well, but not with as much gravity as the blue choices. \n\n\n\nThere are several endings to this story. There is also a \"Secret Ending\", depending on your choices...and if you survive...", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "The symphonies of snoring and vigorous notebook writing fill your ears as you sit in class at Bridgeport High School.\n\n\nWhy can't this English class be over already? You think to yourself.\n\n\nSlowly, you pull out your phone and start checking your texts...\n\n\nHey! Do you want to go see Studio 5 tonight?\n\nIt's supposed to be an awesome movie! \n\nYour friend asks you.\n\n\nIs that the murder mystery? It sounds really good!\n\nI can't even imagine what it must feel like getting\n\nchased by a killer in real life!\n\nYou respond back.\n\n\nRING RING RING RING RING RING!!!\n\n\nThe sound of your high school's bell screams into your ears as you lift your head up from your cell phone. It looks like it's time to go home! You grab your belongings, throw everything into your backpack, and rush out of your classroom. \n\n\nFlooded in the halls are hundreds of students and faculty. You squeeze your way past the crowds to your locker and spin the lock for your combination. \n\n\n14-22-10...CLICK!\n\n\nYou swing the locker open and grab your books. Why does there have to be so much homework?! It's Friday!\n\n\nYou close the locker and make your tedious way down the stairs of the school to the exit. Outside, you see the same long row of six or seven school buses. Luckily for you, your home is walking distance from the school, so you don't have to deal with finding a seat or bullies. Although you do wish your parents would surprise you with a car. After all, your 16th birthday is coming up soon.\n\n\nYou follow the crowds out of the school grounds and cross the street. There are two paths you can take...\n\n\nThe Shortcut - Begin a new story\n\n\nAuthor's Note - Note from the author", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story33.json b/data/scraper/stories/story33.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2e11396 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story33.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=10885", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Tell me, o Muse, of that ingenious man, who traveled far and wide, after he was spoken to by the gods themselves. \n\n\n'Please aid me, Muses.' You whisper as you walk to the centre of the gathered crowd. 'Welcome, my very honored guests. Tonight I will tell you about the hero Odysseus, who braved many perils on his way home on the island of Ithaca. Once upon a time...'\n\n\nYou spend the following hours reciting all the long sentences you have memorized in the past few years. When you finish your story you are met by a wave of sound, as the audience loudly applauds your story. When the crowd leaves you finally begin to breath more easily.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The epic begins", "result": "After you leave the odeon, the performing place of bards, you gaze at the beautiful night sky above Athens' acropolis. The beauty of the night sky always calms you after your performances. However, as you gaze at the stars you suddenly see a golden light shining between the buildings of the temple complex, the acropolis.\n\n\nCurious, you cross the acropolis to get closer to the huge temple. When you approach it you see that someone placed the statue of the goddess Athena outside. Something is strange, though. The statue, that you know is made from marble, gold and silver, is glowing with a golden glow. The statue of Nike that she normally holds in her hand is gone and replaced by her shield, that normally lies by her side. You get uneasy and turn to walk away.\n\n\n'Halt!'\n\n\nYou turn around. Did someone just say something? You quicken your pace.\n\n\n'Halt!'\n\n\nOkay, you are really starting to freak out now. You now start running away from the Parthenon.\n\n\n'Foolish mortal.'\n\n\nYou spot an owl flying towards you. While you wonder what such an animal would be doing at this time at this place it crashes into your face. While your vision grows black you see a golden glow coming towards you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Light in the darkness", "result": "You hear faint murmurs in the darkness, like distant voices. A faint glow pierces your eyelids. When you try to open your eyes you are practically blinded by a golden light. After a short scream of fear and pain you close your eyes. The voices become clearer.\n\n\n'Do you really think he is up to this task?'\n\n\n'He is only a mere bard'\n\n\n'You, out of all people, should not criticize a bard, Apollo. And yes, Zeus, father of men and gods, highest of rulers, I do think that this mortal can complete the task we are about to give him.'\n\n\n'Apollo? Zeus? How hard was I hit by that flying piece of vermin?'\n\n\n'He'd better be, the fate of the world rests on his shoulders.'\n\n\n'Open your eyes mortal. I know you are awake. I hope my owl didn't hit you too hard. Don't be afraid.'\n\n\nYou slowly open your eyes, afraid to be blinded once again by that golden light. But this time nothing happens. When your eyes are fully opened and have adjusted to the darkness of the night, you see three people. Somehow they look familiar, like people you pass everyday without really looking at them. But on the other hand, you think you have seen their faces over a million times. When you realize just who you are looking at, your jaw drops with surprise. You are looking at three of the Olympic gods; the bright-eyed Athena, the ever-young Apollo and the aegis bearing Zeus. 'I... I... How... When...' While you try to make a coherent sentence, Athena speaks to you:\n\n\n'Please remain calm bard, great teller of tales, and listen to what we have to say. The world as you know it is about to undergo a radical change. War is about to erupt between the Greek city states, a war of which the likes haven't been seen since the great Trojan war. Many heroes died then, and many more will die now. You are the last hope of the Greeks.'\n\n\n'But what can I do to help? I'm just an ordinary bard. If the fate of the Greek cities hangs in the balance, then why can't the gods solve it? I mean, my people pray to you every day. Is this how you repay us?'\n\n\n'Insolent mortal. Is this how you repay us? Is this how you repay the immortal gods, who gave you life, who helped you in your times of need? If my daughter didn't favor you so much I would smite you on this spot.'\n\n\n'That will be enough father. I understand why you are angry, aoidos, but let us explain first. Even the gods are bound by rules, by fate, by moral. After the Trojan war Zeus decreed that no immortal gods may ever be involved in a war between humans again. The fact that we are giving you this advice is as far as we can go without upsetting the balance in the world. In order to avert this war you have to undertake a journey. You have to travel to the great oracle at Thebes, in the lands of the Aegyptians. There you will have to ask for advice on how to avert this war.\n\n\nStill baffled from your sudden encounter with the gods you answer:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "'I'm sorry, but you have the wrong mortal, ehm... the wrong person. I'm not able to do that", "result": "'Ungrateful mortal!'\n\n\nAs Zeus speaks this words the skies fill with thunderclouds. The sound of the rumbling thunder drowns all other sounds that eminate from the city of Athens.\n\n\n'Insolent fool! Who are you to doubt the decisions of the almighty gods? I can't understand why Athena chose you as the savior of the Greeks, but she obviously chose poorly! But so be it, if you will not fulfill this task, then the Greek cities are doomed.'\n\n\nThe sound of thunder is becoming overwelming. While you cover your ears to block out the sound you see Athena looking at you with a sad expression. When the sound reaches it's climax a huge lightning bolt hits the acropolis. You close your eyes as the light is too intense to gaze at. You remain in this position for a minute or two, covering your ears with your hands and clenching your eyelids tight to avoid being blinded by another lightning bolt.\n\n\nWhen you finally dare to open your eyes you realise that the gods have left.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "A year passes", "result": "A year has passed since your encounter with the gods. Although you doubt you really met the gods, you probably were hallucinating due to the stress you had because of your performance in the odeon, you can't stop thinking about their prophecy of war.\n\n\nYou suddenly realise that you have almost arrived at the assembly of the people. Time flies when you think intensely about things, maybe you should give up your job as a bard and become a philosopher. The assembly of the people is the highest ruling organ in Athens. The people decide on the future of the city, there is no single ruler or single ruling party. Normally only the richer people, that have the right to vote, attend the assembly. Today, however it seems like every person has come to the meeting place on the hill the Pnyx. But then again, today is not an ordinary day.\n\n\n'The time has come to take up our arms. Sparta, our old enemy has declared war upon us and many other Greek city states! Many other cities, like the city of Thebes, have declared war upon each other. An army of enemies will be arriving here within days! Now is the time to take up our arms, assemble the hoplites, mount our horses with their fast feet. Now is the time to defend our homeland against the aggressors, now is the time to fight!'\n\n\nThe speaker now shouts across the gathered crowd. The crowd shouts angrily in response. The great war has reached Athens...", "action_results": [{"action": "Days later...", "result": "You grip your spear tighter as you gaze at the distant flames on the edge of the horizon. The cool evening wind that is always present on the top of the big stone walls of Athens seems to be filled with the smell of burning wood. Great pyres of smoke have been visible for days since the Spartans and their allies invaded the lands of Athens. From your high point of view on top the gatehouse you can see the camp of the gathered enemies. A chill runs down your spine as you think of the fighting that has been occurring the last few days. Although the Athenian forces have been able to repel the invading forces, many people have lost their lives. Frankly, you don't believe that you are able to win this war. Most of the people that are defending the city only had the two years of mandatory military education. They are just regular citizens that were drafted to defend Athens in this great war.\n\n\nYou can see light dawning on the horizon, a new day has begun. A new day, filled with fighting. You can see activity in the enemy camp, men gathering, men mounting horses, people grabbing weapons and gathering in formation. You remember when these men first showed up on the edge of the horizon. You remember the men, women and children in front of them, running away, fleeing into the city. You remember men screaming as they assaulted the high walls of Athens, screaming when you pushed their ladders down to the hard earth, screaming as their souls passed on to the underworld.\n\n\nYou lift your shield as the enemy army marches towards the city, the fight is about to begin.\n\n\nMoments later you spot the first ladders being put against the walls and you rush towards them, either to push them down or to kill the men that are scaling them. Suddenly you hear a familiar sound, like a thousand birds flapping their wings in the skies. A shadow blocks the light of the sun as thousands of arrows fly towards the city of Athens.", "action_results": [{"action": "You quickly lie down", "result": "You throw yourself onto the ground, just as the arrows fly over your head. As you scramble to get up you realise that you are one of the few people that have survived this attack. Dazed, you watch across the city walls, oblivious to the rest of the world. However, you quickly come to your senses as you spot a Spartan soldier that has nearly reached the top of the wall. You pick up the shield and spear that you dropped when you tried to evade the deadly arrows. To your horror you realise that you can't move your spear arm and you realise that an arrow has lodged itself in your shoulder.\n\n\nThe Spartan soldiers have now reached the top of the walls and are advancing towards you and a few of the other survivors. Since there is no way that you can win this fight with only a shield, you retreat, stumbling over the corpses that now litter the once great walls of Athens. When you finally descend the walls you spot the swift-footed Polymachos, one of the most experienced marshals in Athens, giving orders to his men. 'Reinforce the walls, don't give them the chance to open the gates!'\n\n\nYou wrestle yourself through the soldiers that ascend the walls, trying to repel the invading Spartans, but finally you reach solid ground. You realize that you are more of a burden then an advantage to your fellow soldiers, so you drop your shield and walk away from the gates. Polymachos gives you an angry look but he turns away from you and runs towards the lion-hearted defenders of Athens. You now have a dilemma. Should you help defend the walls, or do you retreat to another part of the city?", "action_results": [{"action": "No, I won't run. I will help defend my homeland", "result": "You pick up your dropped shield and hurry back to the top of the walls. But before you even reach the staircase you hear a loud cracking to your left. As you look at the source of the noise you see splinters coming off of the city gates.\n\n\nWith a thundering crack the gates give way to the Spartan battering ram. At the same time a wave of Spartan soldiers comes flooding through the destroyed gates. You raise your shield and fight valiantly against the endless stream of enemies. Even with your useless arm you manage to injure quite a lot of enemies by smashing your shield at them.\n\n\nSuddenly you see general Polymachos fighting next to you. 'Cover my back!', he shouts at you, just when the spear of an enemy hits him in the chest. You gaze with horror at the sight of the swift-footed Polymachos, the most-experienced general of Athens, lying dead at the floor. While you are astounished by this sight an enemy manages to sneak up to you. As you finally realise what is going on he strikes you with his sword.\n\n\nAs your soul prepares to leave your body to journey to the realm of Hades you spot a golden light in the corner of your vision. When your soul finally leaves your body you wonder if this tragedy could have been averted.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I have to retreat, I am in no condition to fight.", "result": "'I'll just be a burden for the other soldiers', you think as you run away from the walls.\n\n\nWhile you run through the besieged city you meet other people fleeing from the doomed city. A sense of shock creeps up on you as you realize just how many families are forced from their homes.\n\n\nYou finally manage to reach the opposite gate of Athens. Luckily, this one is badly guarded by the enemies as most of the soldiers are fighting on the other side of the city. A large group of people has already gathered near the gate and you hear shouts coming from it. 'Open the gate!' 'No, stay and defend our city!' 'Now, open...'. 'Fools, Athens is doomed!', you shout to them 'I saw the enemies myself, I fought them. There are just to many of them. Our only hope is to flee the city through this gate.' You armor and bleeding shoulder seem to impress the gathered people. Two other wounded soldiers run to the gates to open them. 'I hope you know what you're doing.', one of them says to you.\n\n\nWhen the gates open you see an almost deserted landscape. Only a handful of soldiers are left behind to make sure no one flees through these gates. Well, now they'll have to work for their money.\n\n\nWith the strength of a cornered lion, you, the two other soldiers and the gathered citizens attack the enemies. A few minutes later the enemies lie dead on the sandy soil, only two citizens have died in the attack.\n\n\nYou walk all day, always away from Athens. When night falls you camp on a hill. While the other refugees slowly fall to sleep, exhausted from the day's fighting and walking, you can't. Although the bleeding has stopped, moving your shoulder is still painful.\n\n\nYou gaze to the distant horizon and see the burning remains of what was the mighty city of Athens. In the inferno you see a flash of golden light coming from the hill that once housed the Parthenon. As you witness the destruction of your home you wonder if this could have been averted.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "You lift your shield to block the arrows", "result": "As the deadly projectiles rain down on the wall you quickly raise your shield above your head. Your heart pounds inside your chest as arrows rain down on your shield. As the final arrow strikes the stones of the city wall you lower your shield.\n\n\nThe sight of the slaughter on top of the city walls makes you gag. Dozens of men, who defended the walls, lie dead on the cold stone floor. Oblivious to the rest of the world you gaze at the fallen soldiers. The ones who survived are behaving the same. Suddenly you hear a shout coming from your right and you spot the first enemy climbing the siege ladders to the top of the walls. You quickly shout to the other men and rush to the enemy. Before he is able to reach the top of the wall you push back his ladder so he falls to the ground. A new wave of enemies, however, has climbed the other ladders. As you stumble over the corpses that now litter the walls you see your fellow soldiers repelling the enemies, destroying the ladders in the process.\n\n\nRelieved that this attack has been repelled you hear a thundering crack beneath you...\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "You quickly run down to the gates", "result": "Just as you reach the bottom of the staircase you see the gate give way with a thundering crack. The Spartan battering ram has breached the gates and a horde of enemies is rushing through.\n\n\nThe defenders of Athens fight valiantly against the intruders, trying to repel them. You can see the swift-footed Polymachos, the most experienced general of Athens fighting at the front of the defenders. You quickly join your fellow soldiers. Together, you fight bravely against the invading Spartans and after about half an hour most of the invaders are repelled from the city, the battle has moved outside the city walls.\n\n\nHowever, the enemy hasn't retreated yet. After they have regrouped themselves they attack you another time, killing many Athenian soldiers. You find yourself facing three enemies at the same time. As the adrenaline rushes through your veines you kill one of the attackers with your spear. But then the other enemies attack you...", "action_results": [{"action": "Duck!", "result": "You duck and the enemies' spears slice through thin air. When you prepare for another attack, your opponents haven't had the time to prepare themselves to defend your assault. You quickly dispatch of one of the soldiers by plunging your spear into his heart. The second one puts up more of a fight. He blocks every trust you make with your spear and vice versa. Eventually you see signs of fatigue across the face of your attacker. With a quick feint you manage to mislead your opponent and you manage to kill him with a single blow to his head.\n\n\nPanting, you look at the rest of the battlefield. You see your fellow defenders fighting with the courage and strength of mountain lions, but they are clearly outnumbered. To your right you see the lion-hearted Polymachos defending against an attack by multiple opponents and to your left you see a couple of Athenian soldiers who are being slaughtered by the Spartan attackers.\n\n\nAs you are about to lose all hope of winning this fight a huge soldiers comes into your view, wielding a large sword. As you watch him you think you recognize a highly decorated Spartan general named Dusmenecles, but then again, it is hard to recognize people who's faces are covered by bronze helmets. Unfortunately for you, the enemy general is heading straight to wards you.\n\n\nSeeing no other option, you storm the enemy general with your spear. But before you manage to hit him, he slices through your spear with his sword. Shocked by this turn of events you stand frozen to the ground as Dusmenecles raises his sword for the final blow...", "action_results": [{"action": "Block his sword with your shield", "result": "Just as the enemy is about to hit you, you raise your shield. But instead of being stopped by the wooden object, the sharp sword of Dusmenecles cleaves right through it, shattering it. This, however, isn't even the worse part. After dealing with your shield the sword carries on with it's swing and slices through your shoulder.\n\n\nYou fail to move as Dusmenecles, sacker of cities, thrusts his sword into your belly. You fall to the ground, bleeding from your mortal wounds.\n\n\nAs the life flows out of you you see a flash of golden light entering your field of vision. As you slowly bleed to death you wonder if all this fighting could have been prevented. The last thing you hear before your soul leaves your body to travel on to the realm of Hades is the evil laughter of Dusmenecles as he claims his next victim.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Jump aside", "result": "You quickly come to your senses and jump aside, dodging the fatal blow. Unfortunately you drop your shield. As you fall to the ground you hit something hard with your elbow. As a sharp pain shoots through your arm you see the enemy preparing for another deadly blow. Fear grips your heart once again as you feel the cold touch of Hades on your shoulder. From utter despair you grope around on the floor, hoping to find anything that you can throw at the enemy general.\n\n\nYour hands find the object with which your elbow came into contact with. You throw it at Dusmenecles with all the strength you have left, closing your eyes, expecting the final blow to come any moment now. You feel like you have been sitting like this for minutes, though it must have been more like seconds, when you hear victorious shouting coming across the battlefield.\n\n\nYou open your eyes, surprised by this sound. And when you look around you see Athenian soldiers shouting and cheering. While you wonder what has caused this sudden turn of events you see the swift-footed Polymachos coming to wards you. 'You have my sincerest gratitude, soldier. Because you killed the treacherous enemy general his troops routed and victory was ours. Thank the gods!'\n\n\nYou killed who? Baffled you look at the spot where a few moments ago stood the manslaughtering Dusmenecles. Now you see his body lying on the ground, bleeding from a wound to the head, apparently caused by the broken sword that is sticking out of it. Did I really throw that?\n\n\n'I... I... I...'\n\n\n'Calm down great-hearted soldiers, you fought very bravely today. I am sure that the whole of Athens will commemorate your giant victory.'\n\n\nAll attention is just to much for you, although you are used to giant crowds of people, being a bard and all. You walk across the battlefield to a low hill, still baffled by the events of the day.", "action_results": [{"action": "When you reach the top...", "result": "When you reach the top of the hill you still haven't calmed down. You hear the cheering and shouting of the men behind you, mixed with another sound. A sound that is quite familiar, but this isn't coming from behind you, it is coming from in front of you. A sound like the sound of metal slamming against metal, which was sometimes audible at the smithies in Athens. As you look at the darkening horizon, dusk is setting in, your heart begins pounding in your chest.\n\n\nYou see an endless wave of enemies coming to wards the wounded city of Athens. You count thousands and thousand of men, all carrying weapons. You drop to the ground in utter despair. Athens will fall, it's soldiers and citizens slaughtered and there is nothing you can do to stop it. Just as the sun sinks beneath the horizon you see a golden flash of light. You wonder if this tragedy could have been averted.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Block!", "result": "You manage to block the double attack with your shield. However, it isn't much worth after the damage done by the enemies spears. You throw your now useless shield at one of the attackers, startling him. The other, on the other hand, isn't that easily scared and attacks you once more.\n\n\nYou dodge the blow and return it with a thrust of your spear. As the wooden shaft pierces the armor of your opponent, the other manages to strike you with his spear. Luckily for you, it is only a flesh wound. As he prepares you strike once more, you...", "action_results": [{"action": "Counter-attack", "result": "You quickly thrust your spear at your opponent. Unfortunately for you, he is quicker. As your strength seeps away you drop your spear. When the enemy pulls his spear from your chest you can't find the strength to stand up anymore.\n\n\nYou feel your soul leave your body. You take one last look at the world around you. The sight isn't pretty. The lion-hearted defenders of Athens are being slaughtered by the Spartan soldiers. You see the swift-footed Polymachos fall to the sword of an enemy commander, you think you recognize the manslaughter, Dusmenecles of Sparta. As your soul travels to the realm of Hades you see a golden light. Your last thought in the mortal realm is: 'Could this slaughter have been prevented?'", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Dodge his attack", "result": "You duck aside just in time to dodge the fatal blow. As adrenaline rushes through your body you grab your opponents spear. You quickly pull it from his hands.The expression on his face changes from a self confident smirk to an expression of utter fear.\n\n\nYou quickly dispatch of the unarmed enemy with a quick slash of his spear. The battle rages on for a couple of minutes. After you kill a couple of soldiers you notice that the battlefield is getting quiet. The battle cries of the solders have died down. The shouts of agony from the wounded soldiers quiet down. You look around and see a group of soldiers standing around a body. At closer inspection you see it is the body of the lion-hearted Polymachos. Apparently he died, fighting an enemy general\n\n\nAthens doesn't rejoice at the fact that another wave of attackers has been repelled. Many brave men died and many more are wounded. The cries of widows can be heard around the clock and the smoke from the funerary pyres seems to block out the sun. You cannot stand the sight of this city of death any more. A few moments later you find yourself walking aimlessly across the battlefield. You have no idea how you ended up here. As you walk around the battlefield, occasionally startling one of the carrion eaters that now roam the lands, you think about the slaughter that has been done here the past couple of days. Suddenly a golden light shines from behind a nearby hill.\n\n\nYou quickly run to the top of the hill, hoping to see one of the immortal gods, who own the wide sky. However, you see a completely different sight. Thousands of footmen, carrying the swift bronze spears flood the nearby countryside. Hundreds of riders and their swift-hoofed horses pour from behind the enemy lines. Hordes of archers, pulling the strings on their bows flow from behind the horizon. At this sight your heart sinks with despair. How could the wounded city of Athens ever withstand a force like this. As you fall to your knees you once again spot the golden light, shining from behind the horizon. Could this tragedy have been averted?", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "'It is not my right to doubt the decision of a god. I will do as you say.'", "result": "'Very well. Listen closely to what I have to say, great bard. You have to travel to the oracle at Thebes in the land of the Aegyptians. There you will have to ask for advice. However, she will test you first. Remember, whatever happens during your journey, don't ever mock the almighty gods. And always help those in need'\n\n\nAnd with that last warning Athena and the other gods slowly disappear from the sacred grounds of the acropolis. Leaving you behind, baffled and speechless.\n\n\nThat night you fall into a restless sleep. One-eyed monsters change into huge beast with multiple heads, sending ships and sailors to their doom. Beautiful women, with white arms, try to kill you and other men. And throughout your dream fires rage on in the background.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "A week later...", "result": "The salt sea winds blow across the deck of the large ship. You stand on the deck, gazing at the distant horizon. How a mortal's life can change in the blink of an eye! A mere week ago you were telling stories in Athens' odeon and now you are leading an expedition to the oracle of Thebes!\n\n\nAfter that faithful night on top of the acropolis you left for the harbor of Piraeus. There, you found a mercenary who was willing to bring you to Thebes, for a steep price. You tell your friends and family you are going to travel to distant courts to show off your knowledge of poetry. Then, nothing is left to hold you back from your journey, after a quick prayer to Athena, the patron goddess of Athens, you sail away on the mercenary ship.\n\n\n---\n\n\n'Sir, we are about to enter the Nile river, we will reach Thebes in a few days. There are a few complications, however. The trip has taken us more time then we originally planned and the crew is getting mutinous. To secure your... safety, we would like a couple of extra drachmas.", "action_results": [{"action": "'No. A deal is a deal, I won't give you more money.'", "result": "'Then I am truly sorry sir', he says as he spits on the ground, 'but I can't guarantee your safety anymore.' He grins as he speaks these last words. You back away from the mercenary captain as more crew members gather around him. You look around for your supplies, there's got to be a sword with them.\n\n\nThe ship's crew is closing in on you.\n\n\nYou are almost near the edge of the deck, and still no sign of your sword.\n\n\nThe captain draws his sword.\n\n\nYou finally spot your weapon lying about a feet away from you, just as you reach the edge of the deck.\n\n\nThe captain charges you and his crew follows. You quickly dodge aside, reaching for your sword. As your hands touch the cool bronze the captain prepares for another attack. Without another thought you sink your sword into his entrails. A look of horror passes his face as his soul passes on to the realm of Hades. The remaining crew members quickly lay down their arms.\n\n\nOne of them walks towards you. 'We are sorry to have disturbed you, noble mister. I don't know what we were thinking, we only acted on the orders of our traitorous captain. Our sincerest apologies.'\n\n\n'Very well, I accept your apologies. Now, go back to your posts, we continue our journey to Thebes.'\n\n\n'Let's just hope that I'll reach it alive', you mutter to yourself", "action_results": [{"action": "You carry on your journey on the Nile", "result": "The shining Eos rises once again to bring the day to the lands of the Aegyptians.\n\n\nThe crew has chosen a new captain and life moves on. No other attempts to kill you or steal your money has been made. You gaze with curiosity at the strange lands at the shores of the Nile, at the foreign people working the fields on the fertile banks on the river and at the strange animals that live in the water and on the shore. This scenery carries on for a couple of hours.\n\n\nSuddenly the ship turns away from the main stream, into a branch of the main river. Although you find this strange, you trust the guidance of the navigator and think no more about it. The scenery changes dramatically as time goes by, the fields and people disappear and the animals don't show themselves anymore. A strange silence falls over the lands.\n\n\nA crew member approaches you. 'Sir, I am sorry to report you that we took a wrong turn. However, the river flows to fast for our rowers to row upstream back to the main river. We will have to wait until the river calms down or we will have to follow this river and see were it takes us. I can't say for certain how long it will take before we reach...'\n\n\nHe stops abruptly as the most beautiful song fills the air. You all listen, hypnotized by the sweet sounds that come from no particular direction. However, the song has a strange, dark undertone, a chill runs down your spine as you remember tales about ships that were wrecked after the crew was hypnotized by the songs of mythical beasts.\n\n\nSuddenly alarmed you...\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Plug the ears of the crew members with whatever you can find", "result": "You search the deck for... well anything that can plug the ears of the crew members. Eventually you find some wax-tablets. You scrape of as much of the wax as you can and run from crew member to crew member, plugging their ears and preventing them from hearing the tempting song.\n\n\nHowever, you can't but wonder about the beautiful sounds. So you order the crew to tie you to the mast, that way you can't do anything foolish, while you are still able to listen to the song.\n\n\nA few minutes later you pass a large rock, crowded with strange creatures. They look like women, but have bird wings and a fierce look in their eyes. As they spot your ship they lift up from the rock and circle above your ship, trying to tempt you to offer yourself to them. Their beautiful song fills you with the burning desire to jump in the water and surrender yourself to them, but the ropes prevent you from doing this.\n\n\nThe ship sails safely away from the sirens, with no casualties. As the song fades away, you are released by the crew members.\n\n\nYou stand on the rear of the ship, watching the sirens plunge themselves in the river. You remember tales saying that sirens can't stand people who hear their songs and live to tell the tale. They rather die than live the rest of their lives in shame.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "As the hours pass, you slowly fall asleep", "result": "You are woken the next day by a crew member. 'Sir, I am happy to report you that we are back at the main river. After encountering some locals we have learned that we are mere hours away from the city of Thebes.'\n\n\nAbout three hours later you finally dock in the port of Thebes. The sun is at his highest peak and the heat is unbearable. 'How is it possible that people manage to live here?', you ask Cyrus, the new mercenary captain. 'I have no idea, but I'll be glad when we've returned to Greece.'\n\n\nWhile the crew unloads the ship you take a walk through the port of Thebes. Out of precaution you take your sword with you.\n\n\nThe far end of the docks are crowded with merchants selling strange and wondrous wares. Ivory from the south, silk from the east. tame crocodiles from the nearby Nile, even Greek pottery is for sale here. You gaze with wonder at all of the stalls when you are suddenly approached by a beggar. 'Please sir, do you have a little money for a poor beggar? '\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "'Get lost, my money is my own.'", "result": "'But please sir, I am only a poor beggar, I don't have anything to eat and I have no money', the beggar replies.\n\n\n'I already told you, my money is my own. So get lost!' You feel a sudden anger setting in as the beggar won't leave.\n\n\n'Sir, have you no pity for a poor person like me?' The beggar says as he clamps on to you. 'The gods don't look kindly on people who don't care about their fellow men.'\n\n\n'I said get lost you old beggar!' You shout as you push the old bum away, 'so get lost!'. You give the beggar one last push and walk away.\n\n\n'So be it, stranger. I warned you the gods frown upon selfish mortals, but you didn't listen. Now you can consider yourself forlorn by the gods. No god will help you on this journey.' Having said this, the beggar disappears. Was this a trial of the gods?\n\n\nYou return to the ship, feeling confused and insecure. Cyrus immediately approaches you. 'Sir, we have finished unloading all of the stocks we were carrying on board, but it is too late to visit the Oracle, we will have to go tomorrow.' As you do not respond, Cyrus asks: 'sir, are you all right, you seem a little shaken, is the heat too much for you?'\n\n\n'No, I'm alright. I just need some sleep. I think I'll go to my mat early today.'\n\n\nThat night you have an uneasy sleep once again. You find yourself standing within a circle of immortal gods. Zeus, the highest god, father of gods and mortals, speaks to you:\n\n\n'Insolent mortal! Were you not warned to help the needy? Did you really think we gods would reward such selfish behavior? If you were not favored by my daughter Athena I would have killed you already. I will give you one last chance to prove yourself worthy of saving the Greek cities. However, you will find your journey to be harder than before.'\n\n\nSuddenly you are woken by a distant lightning bolt. The sky is darkened tonight by thunder clouds. You won't catch much sleep tonight.", "action_results": [{"action": "The next day...", "result": "You wake up the next day feeling terrible. Your eyes hurt as the bright rays from the Egyptian sun pierce your sleep-deprived eyes. You let out a soft groan as you stand up and you realise that Cyrus already stands next to your sleeping mat.\n\n\n'Good morning sir. Are you feeling all right today?'\n\n\n'Apart from the incredible fatigue and the scorching heat, I'm alright. Is it possible for me to visit the oracle today?'\n\n\n'I took the liberty to arranging an appointment for you. The oracle is expecting you in about an hour. And don't worry: we won't ask for extra money for this service.'\n\n\nAbout an hour later you are standing in front of the shrine of the priestess of Zeus. The shrine is a large imposing circular structure made out of gleaming white marble. As you admire the building, the huge bronze doors open to reveal the priestess of Zeus. She wears a long white robe and a bronze necklace around her neck and she is of great beauty. She looks like one of the immortal gods, who own the great sky, herself. She doesn't look very happy, however. You slowly approach her to greet her and she speaks to you:\n\n\n'YOU! You are not welcome here stranger. The gods are angry with you, leave this place and don't return.'\n\n\n'I beg you, mistress, please give me...'\n\n\n'I told you to get lost! Go away right now or you will suffer the consequences!'", "action_results": [{"action": "'I'm not going until you listen to me.'", "result": "'You dare disobey the priestess of Zeus. GUARDS! Arrest these men, throw them into the deepest dungeons!'\n\n\nImmediately after she shouts this, guards appear from all sides.\n\n\n'Damn it!' Cyrus curses 'how are we supposed to leave this place, alive, with all these guards here? Oh well, I say we'll fight a way out. What do you think, traveler?'\n\n\n'I say fight them too. We need to find another way to prevent the Greek civil war and we won't be able to do that from a hot, Egyptian dungeon.'\n\n\nHaving said this you draw your sword, Cyrus does the same. About ten guards surround you, encouraged by the screaming priestess. However, they seem hesitant to fight against two armed opponents, the cowards.\n\n\nA group of four guards finally dare to attack you. They approach with drawn swords in their right hands and shields in their left. The rest of the guards watch as their colleagues attack you.\n\n\nHowever, you are fully prepared for an attack and so you:", "action_results": [{"action": "Block their attack and counter with your own", "result": "Your swords hit with a loud 'Clang' as the two swords collide.\n\nThe guard was unprepared for your block and he lowers his defence for a moment. You quickly dispatch him withing this undefended moment by slashing his throat with your sword. You hear a victory shout from Cyrus as he kills one of the guards too.\n\nHowever, the idle guards can't just watch on as two of their comrades have been killed. They quickly rush to the aid of their two remaining colleagues.\n\nNow it's eight versus two.\n\nThe remaining guards manage to gather in a kind of formation, linking their shields together to form a shield wall. Well, this is going to be fun.", "action_results": [{"action": "The shield wall", "result": "As you wonder how you are going to deal with this shield wall you notice Cyrus has disappeared.\n\n\nThe guards are slowly marching towards you, keeping their pace even to maintain the shield wall. Their glistening bronze swords stick out between the shields.\n\n\nYou back away as you realise that it is impossible for you to penetrate their wall without getting yourself killed.\n\n\nSuddenly you spot Cyrus creeping behind the enemies and you realise what he's trying to do. You quickly act like you're going to charge the enemy to create a diversion.\n\n\nSuddenly one of the enemies screams as his throat is slit by a fast movement of Cyrus' sword. However, now the enemies turn on Cyrus.\n\n\nIt's still seven versus two. And all of the seven enemies are now focusing on Cyrus. Now is your chance", "action_results": [{"action": "to run away.", "result": "'I'm truly sorry Cyrus', you whisper to yourself 'but we can't win this battle.'\n\n\nYou drop your sword and run away in the opposite direction of the battle. However, the priestess of Zeus is waiting for you, holding a spear. You can immediately see that she is untrained with weapons and so it shouldn't be hard to defeat her, if you hadn't dropped your sword.\n\n\n'Great and noble priestess of Zeus, the highest of rulers. Please listen to my pleads', you say as the priestess charges you with her spear.\n\n\nYou quickly dodge but the priestess seems unmoved by your words. 'I beg you, the Greek cities will fall if you won't help me.'\n\n\nThe priestess lunges again with her spear, cutting you across the chest. Luckily it's only a flesh wound. 'Mistress, please, thousands of people, innocents, will die if you won't help! Just listen to me!' You begin to scream with utter despair. You hear the shouts of Cyrus behind you as the bronze sword of a guard cuts through his chest and sends his soul prematurely to the realm of Hades, the underworld.\n\n\nThe death of Cyrus, although you knew was inevitable, shocks you and distracts you from the priestess. A few seconds later you feel a sharp pain spreading through your body. However, this feeling fades a few moments later. A blissful feeling of weightlessness enters your mind as your soul leaves your body to travel to meet Cyrus in the realm of Hades.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "to attack the enemy.", "result": "You quickly attack on of the guards in the middle of the shield wall. His back is unprotected as the guards turned on Cyrus.\n\n\nThe guards only notices you when it is already too late. His eyes widen as your sword pierces his vital organs. The other guards panic as the shield wall disintegrates now the middle guard is killed. Cyrus takes out one of the guards during this brief period. The five remaining guards are slowly retreating, panicked by the death of their comrades.\n\n\nCyrus prepares to chase them, killing all of them. But you stop him: 'stop, let them go. We are still on the sacred grounds of the oracle of Zeus. The last thing we should do is to once again insult the gods.'\n\n\nCyrus appears to calm down. 'You're right sir. Please forgive me, I was too caught up in the fight to think clearly.'\n\n\nSuddenly you see a flash of light in the corner of your eye. You manage to dodge the spear just before it hits you. You turn around and spot the enraged priestess, brandishing a deadly bronze spear. You immediately can see that she is untrained with the weapon.\n\n\nWith a quick feint you manage to disarm her. The priestess mutters curses as her weapon plunges to the ground and you hold your sword dangerously close to her throat. Eventually she calms down and speaks: 'Very well, you have defeated me. But I still can't help you. The gods are not pleased with you and so they have clouded my vision. I am not able to see your future, however, there is another way for you to find a solution for your problems. At the edge of the world there stands a rock, at the convergence of two great streams. There the world of the living and the realm of Hades cross-over. There you will have to sacrifice to the dead, for in the underworld a great seer resides, Teirisias is his name. But be careful, other souls will appear, wanting to eat and drink of your sacrifice, but you must fend them off until Teiresias has eaten from it. He will be able to assist you in your goal. I sincerely apologise for my earlier behaviour and I wish you the best of luck for the rest of your odyssey. Farewell.' And with these last words the oracle once again disappears into her temple.", "action_results": [{"action": "And so the journey continues...", "result": "The journey back across the Nile is quite uneventful. However, you do manage to spot some animals that don't live in Greece, like crocodiles and ibises.\n\n\nIt doesn't take many days before you once again reach the Mediterranean Sea. The weather is good, not a cloud in the sky, and the sea has a beautiful blue colour. As you gaze at the horizon you notice Cyrus standing next to you. 'Ah, the Mediterranean, how I've missed it in those bloody Aegyptian lands. Really, you can travel far and wide but you'll never find a sea like this one. But you look troubled sir. Are you troubled about the coming encounter with the dead?'\n\n\n'Of course, I mean are you looking forward to meeting the dead?'\n\n\n'Well, no. But let's deal with the problem at hand first. How are we even going to find that place? I mean, it's not like we have a map or something.'\n\n\n'I was thinking about that too and I have no idea how we are going to find that place. By the immortal gods! How am I able to do this if I don't even have an idea where we have to go!'\n\n\n'I know sir. Look, the sun has already sunk beneath the horizon. Let us go to sleep and think about this tomorrow.'", "action_results": [{"action": "'Very well, I'll see you tomorrow.'", "result": "Your dream that night is flooded with golden light.\n\n\nSuddenly a figure appears within the golden glow. A woman, wearing armor and a spear. You recognise the grey-eyed Athena. 'Noble bard, great teller of tales, I have come before you tonight to aid you in your journey. You have shown wisdom at your encounter with the oracle and I want to reward you. You seek an audience with the dead seer Teirisias, but you don't know where you can find him. Tomorrow fair winds will guide you on your path. However, the gods won't help you anymore if you anger them once again!'\n\n\nShe dissappears once again with this last warning. As your dream comes to an end you hear the sound of strong winds sweeping across the deck.", "action_results": [{"action": "You slowly wake up", "result": "You open your eyes and notice the whole crew working very hard. Everyone seems to be in a tense mood. After you stand up from your sleeping mat you grab one of the crew members by his wrist.\n\n\n'Tell me, what is happening? Why is everyone so tense?'\n\n\n'Well, ehm, sir, I really have to get back to my post, or captain Cyrus will flay me alive.' He is about to leave, but you grip his wrist tighter.\n\n\n'Look, Cyrus won't hurt you, but I will if I don't get an answer soon.'\n\n\n'O...okay sir. Well, a strange storm has suddenly turned up. Our sails are almost ripping and the current is too strong for our rowers to combat. We are at the mercy of the swift winds. However, we are trying our best to fight against these forces of nature.' The crew member now seems frightened. You let go of his wrist and he immediately walks away.\n\n\n'Fools!' you mutter to yourself. 'Everyone listen to me!' you shout across the deck, this seems to catch the attention of the crew. 'Stop fighting against the wind. The gods have blessed us with these fair winds, for they will swiftly take us to our destination. The first person who will defy these orders will be punished by the captain himself.' The crew immediately leave their posts and look around, wondering what they have to do.\n\n\nYou suddenly hear laughing behind you and notice Cyrus walking towards you. 'Traveler, I consider you my good friend, but you are not captain of my ship and my crew. I don't mind you giving advice to my crew or helping them with their work, but please, don't order them around. My authority will be undermined and I might have to copy some behavior from the former captain.' He winks at the last sentence. 'Alright you scum, you heard our guest. Everyone who tries to steer our ship or to hinder it in any way will be thrown will immediately be released from service. And there is no place on this ship for traitors.'\n\n\nHe turns to you once again. 'They are good people, but they still are mercenaries. Turn your back on them and you'll end up with a knife in your back. But why would we have this gloomy mood? Come on, let us... What the... What did I just say you ignorant nitwit?' You look around, trying to find the person Cyrus is shouting at. Then you spot a young crew member, who may just has reached adulthood, holding a oar. Cyrus grabs the oar from his hands. 'Let this be an example for everyone who defies my orders!' He lift the oar and lets it come come down on the back of the young man, repeating this motion over and over again.\n\n\nTears begin to well up in the eyes of the poor boy. 'Please sir, I was just frightened. I swear I'll never do it again.' Cyrus doesn't seem to take any notice of the boy and keeps hitting him with the oar. While you watch this process you shout at Cyrus:", "action_results": [{"action": "'Stop it at once, I think you have set enough of an example now.'", "result": "Cyrus seems impervious to your comment and he keeps on hitting the poor boy.\n\n\nYou can't stand the sight of your friend hitting the boy any longer and so you step towards Cyrus and hit him in the face with your fist. Like he wakes up from a waking dream, Cyrus comes to his senses. 'I'm sorry, I didn't know what I was doing. The gods must have blinded me. I am so terribly sorry.' His cheeks redden as he apologizes once again to the boy and retreats to his quarters.\n\n\nOnce everyone fully grasped what just happened, a man approaches you. You guess he is a member of the crew, although you have never seen him, and a strange sense of authority hangs around him. While you observe the strange man he speaks to you:\n\n\n'Well done mortal. You have shown compassion for a person in need. You have regained the favour of the gods. But the warning of my daughter, the owl-eyed Athena, still stands. Help your fellow men and respect the gods, or you, and the rest of the Greek world shall be destroyed.'\n\n\nYou are briefly distracted by the cries of a nearby bird, but when you turn back to the stranger he seems to have disappeared. Who was this man?\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The rest of the day is uneventful.", "result": "Days pass by and Cyrus slowly regains the confidence of the crew. The days pass by without any notable events. You enjoy the calm waves and the fair winds that carry you and guide you on your journey. You marvel at the animals that populate the vast, wine-coloured ocean and the wide skies. During these days you get better acquainted with the crew and you start to feel like you're on a holiday.\n\n\nBut then the skies grow darker and darker. The animals disappear and the moral of the crew grows sadder and darker. A week after you left Thebes you finally reach the place where you can consult the dead seer Teiresias. You ask Cyrus to fetch food from the cargo hold, to offer to the souls of the dead. With Cyrus and a couple of crew members in your rear and the food in your hands you set foot upon the strange island.\n\n\nThe air is dead silent, not a sound is heard apart from the easy wind. A chill creeps up your spine as you look around the barren land. Not a living thing appears in your vision, not even the lean trees or the though shrubbery survive in this harsh place. Silently and in anticipation you dig a shallow hole in the sand. You take the food and mix it with some red wine. Not long after you call upon the dead you hear a sorrowful moaning spreading through the air. A cold wind sweeps across the barren island and the crew members behind you shiver. A sense of fear and despair spreads across the hearts of the men as the souls of the departed rise from the realm of Hades.", "action_results": [{"action": "Suddenly, pale men and women rise from the ground...", "result": "Men and women with pale, blood-drained faces rise up from the realm of Hades. You hear the crew members behind cower with fear and retreat to the ship. You notice that only Cyrus remains behind.\n\n\nThe souls immediately close in on the sacrifice. With a flash you remember you can't let the other souls eat of the sacrifice until Teirisias has dined. You quickly pull out your sword.\n\n\nThe souls of the deceased keep their distance for a moment, but they still slowly creep up to the sacrifice.\n\n\nWith the greatest effort you manage to keep calm as hundreds of souls encircle you. Tightly clutching your sword you notice that the spirits of the dead keep creeping closer to you.\n\n\nThe sight of their hollow eyes and pale skin makes you despair. As the cold inhabitants of the underworld encircle you you drop your sword, waiting for their cold hands to drag you to the realm of Hades.\n\n\nSuddenly a golden light illuminates the island, startling the ghosts and filling you with the golden glow. You feel as if the goddess Athena has taken away the fear from your limbs and with a renewed courage you storm the bewildered souls.", "action_results": [{"action": "A fight is inevitable", "result": "Ghostly images of dead soldiers appear before you, their swords drawn.\n\nYou plunge you sword into their chests, but to your horror you notice that is of no use against the dead. Only briefly halted by your attack, the ghostly soldiers continue their attack. As you block their icy swords you feel like your energy is being drained.\n\nWeakend by this sudden loss you let your guard down and one of the soldiers manages to slash you across your chest. Luckily for you it is only a shallow cut and you are able to carry on your fight. Ignoring the stinging pain you...", "action_results": [{"action": "Boldy continue your attack", "result": "Gathering all your strenght you rush forward, towards you ghostly opponents. The souls try to strike youwith their swords, but with a quick move of your sword you manage to deflect their blows. As the spirits are recovering from the sudden move you swing your sword at them. Even though they manage to block your blow, the sheer force of the impact shatters their swords.\n\nAfter this the souls of the deceased soldiers quickly retreat. Although the souls of the dead have no physical body, their bones, muscles and flesh are all destroyed by the all consuming fire of the funerary pyres, they still have great respect for the valour and courage of the living.\n\nPanting, you shout at Cyrus: 'Cyrus, can you see Teiresias yet?'\n\n'Not yet, but I... Oh, wait there he is, he has almost made it to the sacrifice.'\n\nYou look in the direction Cyrus points at and you see the old and wise Teiresias. With a large swing of your sword you repel a couple of souls that tried to sneak up on you. After a couple more swings Teirisas finally reaches the sacrifice. After he eats and drinks from the sacrifice he immediately changes. The pale look disappears from his face and he begins to seem aware of the world around him.\n\nThe old man approaches you. 'Thank you, brave-hearted Greek. Your sacrifice has opened my eyes once again. Now please tell me, why have you, a mortal, come here to the realm of Hades?'\n\n'I have come to seek your guidance, o wise Teirisias. The Greek city states are on the brink of civil war. Only your advice can save my homeland.'\n\n'I see. Since you have given me sacrifice I shall offer you guidance. I see a great palace in the land of the Spartans. I see a king, betrayed by his courtiers and a great fire spreading through Greece. A darkness is spreading through the lands, but in this darkness I see a light. He will endure much hardship on his travels, but he is the one who is able to bring peace to the land of the Greeks. This is all I can offer you. Now go, you are running out of time!'\n\nWith these last words, Teirisias and the other souls depart once again to the realm of Hades.\n\nCyrus approaches you. 'Well, that was quite the experience. I've overheard some things that Teirisias said. It sounds to me like the solution to your problem lies in Sparta.'\n\n'Yes, I thought so too. Set a course for Sparta. Let's hope this journey is almost to an end, like Teirisias said: we are running out of time.'\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "But you are still a long way from Sparta...", "result": "A rough wind beats against the ship as it makes it way to Sparta. The unending torrents of rain spoil even the food that's stored below deck. The moral of the crew is on an all-time low as the last of the drinking water is wasted as the last jug of drinking water is thrown overboard by a large wave.\n\nExhausted by days of hardship and famine at seas, you reach an unknown island. From the deck of the ship you spot flocks of sheep jumping around the landscape and where there are animals, there's also water. You have a sloop prepared and head of to the shore with Cyrus and seven other men. 'Okay men, we have to collect as much food as possible, two of you are going to look for water. Be on your guard, remember, we are on an unknown island.\n\nA short time later the crew assembles on the beach, bringing a couple of goats, baskets of vegetables and fruits and sheep and enough drinking water for several weeks. As you investigate the day's harvest you are approached by a crew member. 'I'm sorry to interrupt you sir, but one of my friends thought I should tell you about something. While foraging for food we came across a large cave. We believe that it is inhabited, since it has a door and makeshift pens for animals. I don't know if this is of any interest to you, but we just thought that you might want to know.'\n\nHearing the words of the sailor you mutter to yourself:", "action_results": [{"action": "'Interesting, let us go to the cave. I would like to meet the inhabitant.", "result": "You order one of the crew members to fetch a sack of wine as a meeting gift for the inhabitant of the cave.\n\nTogether with Cyrus and seven men you make way to the large cave. When you get close to the cave you wonder at the makeshift pens, although there is no signs of the animals. Although the construction seems terribly shaky, you notice that it is more stable than it seems. But your biggest surprise comes when you step over the threshold of the ''house''. On the walls there are racks and shelves filled with cheese. Baskets of fruit litter the floor of the cave and buckets of milk fill one side of the cave. Whoever lives here, he is either very wealthy or very hungry.\n\nAlthough it is against your better judgment, you and your men take some of the cheese and drink some of the milk. After the scrumptious meal you hear thundering footstep closing in on the cave. Fear grips your heart and the hearts of your men as you imagine what kind of terrible beast produces such sound. You quickly hide in the shadows at the back of the cave, awaiting the inhabitant of the shelter.\n\nThen, the owner arrives. A large foot enters though the entrance, followed by a huge leg. A man, as large as three grown men, enters the cave. As you examine the stranger more closely you notice he only has one eye, right in the middle of his forehead. He is followed by dozens of sheep and goats. After he places the male animals into the pens outside the cave, he rolls a huge stone in front of the doorway, well there goes that escape route. Luckily for you, he doesn't seem to miss the cheese and milk that you took.\n\nToo afraid to approach the creature, you watch him care for his sheep with loving care. He carefully milks the animals. Afterwards he feeds them. As the huge man takes a seat on a flat rock you finally dare to step out of the shadows.\n\n'Greetings noble host. I would like to introduce myself to you. I am a humble bard from the city of Athens, sent on a mission by the gods themselves. I have traveled far and wide before I came here with my men, and we have faced many perils. I'm sorry to tell you, but as we awaited you return we took some cheese and some milk. I'd like to ask you if you could give us some supplies for our way back, after all it is our right, since we are your guest.'\n\nThe huge man examines you closer, scanning you from your head to your toes with his giant eye. 'Well, great bard, let me first welcome you to my home and let me thank you for your company, you see it is quite lonely here on this island. You mentioned you came here with your men, where exactly are they?'\n\n'Some of them are here, o noble host', and your men appear from the shadows 'but the rest of my crew is at the beach.'\n\n'I see. And may I ask how you reached our island. After all, the wide seas encircle it and you would need a well build ship to come here.'\n\nYou become quite suspicious of your host and so you answer him: 'our ship was wrecked at sea by high waves and strong winds. After our ship was completely wrecked by the god of the seas, we were thrown ashore on your island.'\n\n'Well, you're lucky that you ended up here and not on some uninhabited island. Please, make yourself at home, I was about to dine and you, as my very honoured guests, must join me.'", "action_results": [{"action": "Dinner is served", "result": "After he has spoken these words with his malicious heart, he picks up two of your men, like young dogs, and smashes their heads against the floor. The contents of their skulls wet the cold, dirt floor. After this atrocious deed he cooks your men and prepares a meal with them. Then he consumes them, their flesh, their inerts and their bones, full of marrow.\n\nAt this sight you and your men heave your arms to Zeus, crying. Desperation grips your hearts.\n\nAfter his huge stomach was filled by this meal of human flesh and he drank some of the milk from the buckets, he laid himself to rest between the sheep in the cave.\n\nWhile he is sleeping you conceive the plan to, after you pulled your sharp sword from your thigh, stab him in his chest, where the his liver is positioned. Slowly, the plan begins to form in your head.", "action_results": [{"action": "Quickly, execute your scheme", "result": "You slwoly approach the giant man, careful to produce as little sound as possible, afraid to wake him up. You gently grope across his chest with your hands and when you finally have found the right spot you draw your sword. Solemnly, as if you are offering sacrifice to the immortal gods, you plunge the blade into his chest.\n\nA river of red blood gushes out of the wound. The creature opens his eyes and all that they portay is fear and pain. You qioetly back away from the cyclops as he seizes his final death throes. You and your men rejoice at the sight of the slain giant and the sense of despair leaves your hearts.\n\n'Let's get out of this evil place'.\n\nWith these words you guide your companions through the dimly led cave, to the exit. As you reach it you remember that your host has blocked the exit with a huge stone, not even twenty-two carriages with four wheels could move from it's place. No matter how much you try to move it from his place, no matter how hard you pray to the immortal gods, the stone doesn't move.\n\nThe final days of your life are filled with misery, locked within the cave the remaining crew members become mutinous, blaming you for all their troubles. After a short fight only you and Cyrus remain in the cave. Although your head is filled with plans you can't think of a plan to get out of your cold, dark prison. As a last resort, you pull out your sword. The last thing you see on this earth before your vision grows red is a golden flash of light. Was this misery avoidable?", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wait, think about this a little longer", "result": "While you think about your plan to murder your host a thought comes into your mind. After the giant man entered the cave he blocked the exit with a high, immensly huge stone, not even twenty-two cariages with four wheels could move it from it's place. If you killed the cyclops now, there is no possible way for you to leave the cave.\n\nSighing, you and your men await the radiant dawn.", "action_results": [{"action": "The radiant dawn spreads her veil of red...", "result": "The following morning, the cyclops awakes. After he milks his sheep he prepares another meal, with two other companions of yours. After he finishes his dinner he drives his animals outside the cave. Afterwards he picks up the stone and puts it once again in front of the entrance, as easily as one closes a quiver with a cover.\n\nInside the damp, cold cave you you check your surroundings, devising a plan to bring demise to your one-eyed host, to punish him for his cruelty and to bring glory to Athens. Near one of the walls of the vaulted cave lay a pole, freshly cut by the Cyclops, which he uses to prepares fires for cooking when it's dried. It is about the size of the mast of a small ship. After finishing a sharp point to the pole you stick it in the glowing embers of his fire, to harden it. After the pole is sufficiently hardened you hide it in a pile of droppings in the back of the cave, a pretty big pile.\n\nThat evening your host returns. After he drives his cattle into the cave he once again seals of the entrance of the cave with the huge stone. Then he cooks two more men, now there are only you, Cyrus and one of the crew members remaining.", "action_results": [{"action": "Now is the time, strike!", "result": "As your host is occupied with his meal you quickly pull out the pole from the droppings. Wobbling beneath the weight of the large piece of wood you try to sneak up on the dining giant. However, he notices that something is wrong and he turns around, with a leg from one one your men still in his hands.\n\n'What are you doing? Are you really such cowardly men?'\n\nHe throws the limb of your crew member away and stands up from the cave floor. Frightened, you drop the pole and try to run away, only to be blocked by the giant stone in front of the exit. The cyclops approaches you with thundering footsteps. Fear grips your hearts as the last remaining crew member is smashed to death against the huge stone. You draw your sword in a futile attempt to stop the giant from causing any more harm.\n\nThe cyclops laughs as he crushes Cyrus with a single sweep from his arm. Enraged by this sight you charge the giant with your drawn sword, oblivious to the rest of the world.\n\nThe next thing you feel is a sharp pain shooting through your body as almost every bone is your body is crushed beneath the force of the cyclops's blow. A golden light fills your vision as your soul enters the realm of Hades.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wait until he finishes his meal", "result": "You watch in horror as the frighening giant finishes his macabre meal. After he wipes the last bloodstains from his chin you approach your host with the sack of wine you took as a meeting gift.\n\n'Most noble host. Please accept this peace offering.we brought with us as a meeting gift, it will taste good after your meal of human flesh. We came here, hoping that you were a kind and generous host who could help us to reach the island of Sparta. But why, do you think, shall people visit this island once again, after all the misery that you put us through.?'\n\nAfter you speak this words, the cyclops takes the sack of unmixed win and takes a large swig of it. He obviously likes the wine and answers:\n\n'This wine is amazing. Don't take me wrong, even in the lands of the cyclopses the gods send the rain from the skies which make the grape vines flourish, but this wine is like ambrozia, the nectar of the gods. Please, tell me who you are, noble guest.'\n\nAfter these words he once again puts the sack to his lips and he empties the sack of wine into his mouth. The wine immediately takes effect. Immediately you answer him with the winged words:\n\n'You ask me who I am? Well, I'll tell you. My glorious name is Nobody. Nobody is the name that my parents gave me and Nobody is the name that I am known by.'\n\n'Well then nobody. In exchange for your gift of wine, I shall give you a gift of my own. You will be the last one of your company that I'll eat. Let that be my gift to you. Yes, let that be my gift to you...'\n\nAnd with these last words the cyclops falls asleep. You and your companions rush to the pile of droppings and retrieve the sharpened pole from underneath. You quickly rush to the sleeping giant and stick the pole into his single eyesocket. You keep twisting the pole until the red blood flows from the wound.\n\nAn agonizing roar bellows through the vaulted cave. Frightenend, you and your companions run to the back of the cave. The cyclops stands up from the floor of the cave, still screaming and roaring, calling for the help of the cyclopses that inhabit the surrounding caves...", "action_results": [{"action": "A family visit", "result": "With a great effort he manages to reach the entrance of the cave. He uses his tremendous strength to remove the stone blocking the entrance. Almost instantly you hear thundering footsteps closing in on the cave. Booming voices speak outside: 'Polyphemos, what happened to you? Why are you disturbing the divine night with your cries for help? Has someone with great strength hurt you, or were you tricked by some malevolent scheme?'\n\nYour host, the brutish Polyphemus, answers his brothers: 'My brothers, Nobody is hurting me with his schemes, there is no violence.'\n\nThe others answer with the winged words: 'But if nobody is hurting you and you are there all alone, then why are you Disturbing our slumbers? If a disease or other affliction from the gods struck you, it is of no use to shout, for you can't take actions against the immortal Zeus, the cloud-gatherer. Try praying to our father, Poseidon, the god of the seas.'\n\nAfter they spoke these words his brothers left the grounds of the godlike Polyphemus. Smiling, you see how the cyclops, while feeling his way across the cave, positions himself next to the exit of his cave.", "action_results": [{"action": "Now is your chance, dash through the exit", "result": "You and your remaining companions cautiously walk towards the exit of the cave. You heart is pounding within your chest, one wrong move, one noise may be enough for the cyclops to determine your position. Carefully avoiding the sheep you manage to reach the exit, guarded by the savage giant.\n\nPressing your body against the wall you try to sneak past him, holding you breath. Unfortunately for you, the cyclops inspects everyone, sheep or guest, that tries to leave his home. Centimeters before you escape your dreadful host he grabs you with his giant hands. An evil grin appears on his face.\n\n'Were you about to leave already, cowardly Nobody? I was just about to thank you for the injury to my eye. Were should I begin, shall I disembowl you or should I rather... ARGH!'\n\nA cry of pain slips past the boundaries of his teeth as Cyrus stabs the hand that is holding you with his sharp, bronze sword. The cyclops' grip on you immediately loosens and you manage to escape his grip. As you try to unsheathe your sword you notice the huge arms of the giant flailing wildy towards you.", "action_results": [{"action": "You quickly jump aside...", "result": "With fear once again gripping your heart you jump aside in an attempt to dodge the arms of Polyphemos. However, the reach of his arm is too great for you evade with just one leap. You are immediately crushed by the brute force with which the cyclops swing his hand towards you.\n\nAs a sharp pain flows throughout your body, a golden light fills your vision. These are the last experiences in this realm before your soul travels to the realm of Hades.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You quickly throw yourself to the ground...", "result": "You feel the flow of air passing through the space you were standing in just a minute ago, as the giant arm of the cyclops flies wildly over your head. You roll aside as one of his fists fly towards the ground with tremendous strength.\n\nAs the earth shakes under the force of the impact you stand up. You realise that you can't sneak past the raging giant as he block the only way out. You walk back towards the other end of the cave, keeping your eyes on the blind giant as he continues his tantrum. As you reach the end of the cave you shout towards him:\n\n'Blind fool, why are you attacking the tender air? Can you, as the son of a god, not even hit a mortal? You bring shame upon your father and your brothers.'\n\nHe rushes toward the sound of your voice in a blind fury, just as you expected. You quickly run in the opposite direction, towards the exit. The earth trembles once again as the giant body of the cyclops hits the wall of the cave. Leaving a bewilderd giant behind you finally reach the exit of your prison.", "action_results": [{"action": "Free at last", "result": "Blinking in the bright sunlight you stand outside the cave of Polyphemos and your heart is filled with joy.\n\nYou quickly make your way to the beach. As you reach the shore of the island you hear the happy shouting of men. As you look for the source of the sound you see three crew members on the beach. One of them runs towards you.\n\n'We are so happy to see you. After you didn't come back last night we were afraid that you were killed. We wanted to look for you, but the other men were too afraid to come near that strange cave. We were left here with this sloop to wait for your return', he now directly adressess Cyrus 'but pardon me for asking captain, but I thought you and the traveller left with seven men'.\n\n'It's a long story. we'll tell it to you and all of the crew members when we're safely back on the ship.'\n\nAfter telling everyone on board the story of your adventure with Polyphemos, the crew prepares to sail away.", "action_results": [{"action": "You turn towards the island...", "result": "The fury for your fallen companions fills your heart and clouds your mind as you shout towards Polyphemos: 'Foolish cyclops! Did you really think that you could keep me captive! If ever one of the mortal men should visit your island, tell them that a great bard from Athens was the one who injured you! And as they will leave your island too, they shall tell the whole of Greece of me, and everyone will know the name of...'\n\nYour speech is cut short by the lament of Polyphemos:\n\n'Woe is me, for an ancient prophecy is fulfilled. A great seer who lived here a long time ago told me that a Greek would rob me from the light in my eye. A Greek, who is skilled with words and has a noble heart. I always imagined him to be a true hero, with great strength and fitness. But now this puny wimp, with no strength at all, has blinded me. Not in an honorous fight, but cowardly, after he intoxicated me with strong wine. Come back here, o 'great' bard, so that I may honor you with my hospitality. My father, the earth-shaking Poseidon, will ensure your safe return home.'\n\nYou quickly answer him:\n\n'Did you really think that I would fall for such foolish words. But if you want, I'll come back to you, and then I won't only take your eye, but your life too. Maybe you should ask your father to give you a new eye, or better yet, you should ask for two. Maybe then, you'll be able to survive a visit from the next guests.'\n\nThe booming voice of Polyphemos answers you:\n\n'Hear me, o earth-shaking father of mine. If I truly am your son, please answer my prayer. Make sure that this puny coward never reaches the destination of his travels. Make sure that his ship sinks and that he suffer horrible pains before he dies. However, should his fate be to reach his destination, then make sure that he arrives there on someone else's ship, after losing his men, and wrecked by the seas. And after he reaches this place, let him suffer misery there as well.\n\nAfter the cyclops falls silent you turn back to the crew. 'Alright men, let's get out of this place.'\n\nNot long after you spoke these words, a huge boulder lands next to the ship. As fast as possible, the ship leaves the island of the cyclopses.", "action_results": [{"action": "At sea again", "result": "For days the endless wine-colored sea has surrounded your ship. No island has come into view since you left the island of Polyphemos. As the sun disappears behind the horizon to reveal the starry sky you once again sink away into a deep, restless sleep.\n\nYou are alone in an endless ocean, drifting on the waves. The skies above are filled with violent thunderclouds and terrible winds are sweeping across the sea. Far away, almost behind the horizon, an island is visible, a single light illuminates it.\n\nSuddenly the bright-eyed Athena, the daughter of Zeus, appears in front of you, walking on the loud-roaring waves. 'You have brought great honour upon yourself, son of Athens, but with that honour comes misery. You have mutilated the son of Poseidon, the god of the sea, and now he carries a heavy wrath. With your brave deeds you have regained your favor with some of the gods so heed this message well: it is your fate to complete this journey, but you will do this on your own. The seas will swallow your vessel and your men will drown. However, the daughter of Atlas will rescue you. Time is running out for Greece.\n\nA flash of lightning awakens you from your deep slumber.", "action_results": [{"action": "The skies roar as thunder rains down on the earth", "result": "The dark clouds in the night sky block even the stars themselves. Thunder roars as Poseidon unleashes his wrath upon your vessel. Your men's cries of fear are like a whisper compared to the sound of the waves crashing against your ship. Violent gusts of wind sweep across the deck like raging lions, taking everyone who is in their path.\n\nYou wander across the deck, helpless, trying to think of a way to avert this disaster. Two of the sailors are pulled to their deaths at the bottom of the seas by a large wave, three more are killed by falling debris. The planks of the ship crack and fracture underneath the might of the ocean. The sail is torn apart by the swift winds and a couple of men are caught by it, a moment later it drifts helplessly on the wine-coloured sea.\n\nYou manage to hold on to the broken mast as a large wave clears the deck of rubble and men. You look across the ship and to your horror only a few men are still alive. The moaning of the dying sends chills up your spine.\n\nThe howling winds become more and more violent. With all of your strength you manage to hold on to the broken ship. However, many men can't. You see many of your companions being blown away into the violent ocean. You cry out to the gods, begging them to stop this slaughter, but to no avail.\n\nYou hear a familiar voice next to you. As you turn you see Cyrus battling the winds and the sea. You try to shout to him, to tell him to have faith and to not give up fighting. But even before your words from in your mouth you see Cyrus being dragged of by the winged winds. The world around slows down as you see the horrified look upon your friend's face.\n\nSuddenly a sharp pain fills your head as you are hit by a flying piece of wood. You flash in and out of consciousness as the ship finally breaks beneath the thundering waves.\n\nThe cold ocean surrounds you...\n\nYou are flailing helplessly with your arms...\n\nA body drifts by...\n\nYour hand touches a large piece of wood...\n\nWith your last strength you manage to hold on...\n\nThe ship is nowhere to be seen...\n\nYou are alone...\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The world fades away...", "result": "You are adrift in an endless void.\n\nThe world around you is dark.\n\nThe soothing nothingness takes away your fears, your despair and your sadness. Slowly all of your thoughts about your crew members and your friends fade away, leaving nothing behind but a comforting silence.\n\nEventually even your greatest worries about the fate of Greece are reduced to nothing, you are at peace...\n\nSuddenly a thought comes crashing into your mind with the strength of Zeus' lightning bolts. How can you rest while thousands of people depend on you? How can you rest when the world you know is about to be destroyed?\n\nTwo thoughts are battling inside your head, which one will win?", "action_results": [{"action": "'I am finally at peace. I will stay here.'", "result": "Your worries soon fade away like the rest of your thoughts.\n\nYou close your eyes, relieved that all of your suffering has come to an end.\n\nThe world around you is peaceful.\n\nThe comforting silence, the peaceful void, why leave all of this behind?\n\nHere, in the realm of Hades, your soul is finally at peace.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "'The fate of the world depends on me, I can't rest while many suffer. I have to get out of this place.'", "result": "The bright sunlight pierces your eyes. You can hear the sounds of waves breaking on the shores nearby. As your vision finally focuses you take notice of your surroundings. You are lying on a white beach, nearby the violet sea. Large forests border at the sands.\n\nYou guess this is an island, but how big is it exactly? Is it inhabited, and by who? The memories of your recent visit to the island of the cyclopes are still vividly present within your mind. You try to get up to explore your surroundings, but a sharp pain shoots through your limbs.\n\nClenching your teeth you try once again to stand up. With a great feat of determination you manage to stand up. Shaking with suppressed pain and desperation you mange to take your first step on this new-found land. Then follows a second step, and a third. And then your vision turns red. The white sands of the beach come crashing towards you as exhaustion takes control of your limbs.\n\n''''''''''''''''''''''''\n\n \n \nAs you slowly regain conciousness, you notice that the pain racking your body is fading away. You keep lying on the sandy ground, waiting for the pain to dissipate completely. As you lay there you notice sweet music in the distance, a woman's voice, a song.\n\nFar from his lands and far from his home\n\nA hero turns up, all alone.\n\nHis ship and his friend he lost to the sea\n\nBut now he is here\n\n Alone with\n\nMe\n\nAs this sweet song keeps repeating inside your mind you notice that keeping concious is getting harder and harder. The heavy sleeps once again presses down on your eyelids.", "action_results": [{"action": "You wake up a few hours later...", "result": "'Awaken, valiant hero. You are safe here.'\n\nYou slowly open your eyes and immediately notice that the pain has gone from your body. You feel like you are full of strength, like you could battle the titans themselves without falling.\n\n'I am glad that you fully recovered from your dangerous journey.'\n\nNow you notice the honey-sweet voice which speaks to you. You check your surrounding and see that you are in a vaulted cave, decorated with lavish furniture. Sculptures depicting the travels of Odysseus line the walls of the cave and golden oil-lamps illuminate it. Richly decorated musical instruments lay on a table with beautiful wood carving. A hearth fuelled by cedar wood spreads a pleasant heat throughout the room and fills it with a delightful scent. You only now notice the expensive couch next to your bed and the beautiful woman upon it. She has arms as white as snow and beautiful hair. Her face is caring and her dress is made from the finest silk.\n\nWhile the sight of all this splendour fills your head you ask the mysterious woman: 'noble mistress, honourable host, could you please tell me where I am and what kind of place this is?'\n\nThe woman lifts herself from her couch and speaks to you. 'I am the goddess Calypso, great teller of tales, I found you on my island Ogygia after your ship was destroyed and your crew perished because of the wrath of Poseidon. Here, on my island you will be safe.'\n\n'Radiant goddess, I thank you for your hospitality, but alas, I cannot stay here. The gods have burdened me with a heavy task. Many cities will be destroyed and many people will perish if I will not complete my journey. Please, with your consent, let me build a ship with the trees on your island, please provide me with food and drink, so that I may please the gods by fulfilling my journey.'\n\n'Dear bard, from far you came and far you have to go. I know of your quest and I know the gods approached you, for all the immortal gods are not unknown to each other, even when they live far apart. However, I cannot let you go. Forget your journey and your quest for Greece will fall, no matter what you try. Sweet traveller I will keep you here as my guest until you want to accompany me as my husband. I will bestow immortality upon on you and give you eternal youth, so we may live here until the end of time itself. Forget your worries about your home and the gods. Stay here, with me.'", "action_results": [{"action": "'Fair goddess. You have cared for me in my time of greatest need. You have spoken to me as an equal, as if I am one of the immortal gods myself. Love fills my heart as I speak these words to you: I will stay here with you.'", "result": "The face of Calypso immediately shows a wide smile.\n\n'My dear lover, joy fills my heart at the sound of these words. Are these really your intentions or are they just part of some elaborate plot? Please, promise me by the immortal gods that your heart is truy filled with love.'\n\n'My dear Calypso, by the immortal gods I vow that my heart is filled with love for you. Please, let me live here, by your side so that we may be happy together, until the end of time itself.'\n\n'Traveller, you have no idea how happy you have made me. Many years I have spent here alone on my island. The life of a goddess is not always pretty. Now that you are here my world has suddenly turned bright. I shall grant you immortality and eternal youth. Great bard, forget all of your troubles and doubts. Please, take my hand in marriage, so we may both live together, happy.''\n\n...\n\nMany years pass by and you and Calypso live happily together on Ogygia. You are now immortal and fear or pain are just fading memories to you. You no longer think of your journey or of Greece. Hermes, the messenger of the gods has only once visited your island to tell you that Greece had fallen into civil war.\n\nCenturies pass by until you and Calypso finally decide to leave the mortal realm altogether. You settle on mount Olympus, where the immortal gods all reside. The promises Calypso made you all those years ago were all true: you are both happy together, until time itself ends.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "'Fair goddess, you have cared for me in my time of greatest need and for that I thank you. But I cannot forsake the task the gods burdened me with. I cannot stay.'", "result": "The face of Calypso shows an understanding smile.\n\n'Great bard, in my heart I knew that this was the answer you would give me. But I will not give up my love so easily. I will keep you here on my island until you finally admit that you love me. Please, make yourself comfortable, after all, this will be you house too.'\n\n'Radiant goddess, what words escape the enclosure of your teeth? How can you take me captive here? How can you prevent me from making a raft from these trees under the shadows of the night, when the heavy sleep holds even you in it's sweet embrace?'\n\n'Traveller, how can you be so foolish? Even if you manage to leave my island, how can you survive your passage over the endless seas? What will you eat? What will you drink? Who will protect you from the wrath of Poseidon? You know just as well as I do that you will not reach Sparta alive, even with the help of Athena.'\n\nYou let out a loud sigh as you realise that Calypso is right, you cannot leave, unless you wish to travel to the realm of Hades. As your hopes of saving Greece are slowly shattered you leave the cave of Calypso. On the beach you drop yourself upon the white sands, praying for a miracle from the gods.", "action_results": [{"action": "Days pass by...", "result": "The radiant Eos once again rises to bring light of dawn to the earth.\n\nSeveral days have passed since you washed ashore on the island of Calypso. You are sitting once again on your spot on the beach, gazing at the horizon, wishing for a miracle to happen. Ever since you rejected Calypso she has been trying to seduce you with her sweet words and beautiful promises. She has given you the finest clothes and the best food, but your heart is still filled with worries about Greece.\n\nNo matter how sorrowful you feel here, on this island-prison, you can't help but notice that Ogygia is really an extraordinary place. The most majestic birds make their nests in the large trees that scatter the island and the sweetest fruits grow just within an arms length. The seas surrounding it are full of fat fish and the skies are always blue. However, not a day goes by in which you stop praying to the gods for a sign, a miracle to happen that will bring you to your goal so you can fulfil your journey.\n\nYou suddenly hear the sad voice of Calypso calling for you: 'Noble traveller, please join me in my home. You have a visitor.'\n\nCurious, you make your way to the cave of Calypso. Who, but the immortal gods themselves could make their way to the island of the goddess Calypso?\n\nAs you enter the lavishly decorated cave your attention is immediately caught by an unfamiliar man standing next to Calypso. He wears the hat of a traveller and he carries the staff of a negotiator. On his feet he wears winged sandals. You suddenly recognise him as Hermes, the messenger of the gods.", "action_results": [{"action": "What have the gods to say?", "result": "The sharp-seeing Hermes speaks to you: 'Noble traveller, the gods, who inhabit the wide skies, have spoken to you. You are the one person who can save the Greek cities from the fires of war. You have travelled far and you have accomplished many thing, but your journey has not yet come to an end. Athena, the protector of heroes, has persuaded the council of the gods to send me to this island, to order Calypso to release you. You are now free to go, free to continue your journey.'\n\nYou look at Calypso to ask if this is true, but her face, filled with grief, tells you enough. Her voice, filled with sadness speaks to you: 'Dear guest, Hermes speaks the truth. The gods have ordered me to let you go. But I ask you...no, I beg you to reconsider my offer. Stay here, with me. Forget Greece, forget your journey, stay here with me and be happy. If you knew what the future holds for you you would stay here. You will suffer, even after you reach your destination and the wrath of Poseidon will follow you across the sea. Stay here, be safe, accompany me as my husband, until the end of time itself.'\n\nYour heart is torn between your duty to the gods and the offer of Calypso. Your mind tells you to continue your journey, but your heart tells you to stay here. The gods have freed you and Calypso, even while she is in love with you, has obeyed them. In front of these two deities you have to make a choice that will shape the rest of your life.\n\nYou answer with a trembling voice:", "action_results": [{"action": "'Sharp-seeing Hermes, messenger of the gods, I thank you for bringing the message that set me free. As ordered by the gods I will continue my journey.'", "result": "The sharp-seeing Hermes speaks to you: 'You're welcome, great bard. Now you are free to continue your journey. Remember, the gods are always watching you. You have our blessing.'\n\nAnd with these winged words he departs, leaving you and Calypso alone. You turn to her but she immediately averts her gaze. She doesn't want to speak to you.\n\nYou leave the cave, leaving a weeping Calypso behind.\n\n...\n\nThree days later your ship is finally complete. You are standing on the beach, admiring your ''handy work''. It has become a small vessel, barely large enough to hold both you and your supplies. But it will suffice for the journey ahead, it's not like you've got a crew to worry about any more.\n\nThe radiant Calypso approaches you with her arms filled with food and water. 'My dear hero, sadness fills my heart because of you, for I have seen your future. You will suffer many suffering and you will feel great pains. But you must not give up. I know you are able to fulfill your destiny and save Greece. Please, take these supplies, so that you may reach your destination. I will always be here for you, on my island. Good luck and farewell.'\n\nFeeling a little guilty for all the sorrow that Calypso has been though these last days, she had been weeping for days after you decided to leave, you answer her: 'Radiant godess, I am sorry that I could not stay here, but the gods have ordered my departure. I hope that your love will be answered some day, by a noble man, I truly do. Before I go I wish to thank you once again for all the care that you have given me, but now I bid you farewell.'\n\nAnd with these last words you turn away from Calypso and push your boat into sea.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "You once more continue your journey...", "result": "As the sun sinks beneath the horizon you look behind you one more time, the island of Calypso has vanished beneath the horizon, not a single light is visible any more. As the stars once again appear in the wide skies you go to sleep.\n\n\nThe endless ocean surrounds you, but the waves are violent. Heavy storms sweep across your ship. With a crashing roar a wave shatters the planks of your ship, leaving you to drown in the violet-coloured sea. Suddenly a figure appears in front of you, walking on the waves.\n\n\nYou call out to the barely visible figure: 'Bright-eyed Athena, please aid me. The violent sea is about to claim my life.'\n\n\nHearing your call for help the figure walks towards you. As it stands in front of you you suddenly recognize the earth-shaker Poseidon, the god of the seas. With his face filled with wrath he speaks to you the thundering words: 'Cowardly bard, shame of Athens, did you really think you could escape me? Did you really think I would ever forgive you for the blinding of my son, the godlike Polyphemos? You should have stayed on the island of that witch Calypso. Mark my words, you will never reach Sparta. You will die a horrible death while Greece burns to ashes.'\n\n\nViolent thunder clouds begin to form over your heads as Poseidon speaks these words. As he finishes his speech, lightning strikes the spot were you are drifting helplessly in the ocean. The next moment you wake up with a violent head-ache.", "action_results": [{"action": "The wrath of Poseidon", "result": "The seas around you howl with rage as violent gusts of winds cause the seas to form huge waves. Your already weak ship cracks and breaks under the strain of the violence of the seas.\n\n\nHorrible memories of the day you lost your friends flood your mind as you once again find yourself in the cold waters of the dark sea. You struggle to keep afloat, to stay above the waves, but your strength fails you. You almost choke as the icy waters of the sea fill your lungs, preventing you to breath, trying to send you to the realm of Hades.\n\n\nDuring your epic struggle against the roaring ocean, you see a shining figure on the distant waves. The figure approaches you, has Poseidon come to gloat over your dying body?\n\n\nAs the figure has almost reached you you are blinded by a nearby flash of lightning.\n\n\nAs the icy water of the deep ocean engulfs your head you begin hallucinating.You hear the voice of the owl-eyed Athena, the protector of heroes: 'Rest now, great storyteller, all will be well.'\n\n\nAlthough you are fairly sure your mind is playing tricks on you, you feel comforted by the voice of the goddess. You close your eyes and embrace the cold darkness washing over you. Maybe you can finally rest after your long journey.", "action_results": [{"action": "All is quiet...", "result": "The darkness around you is lifting.\n\n\nYou are having a deja vu.\n\n\nAm I back at Calypso's island?\n\n\nNo, this feels different.\n\n\nI'm floating, moving on the waves.\n\n\nYet, I feel the soft ground beneath me.\n\n\nDistant voices... Am I in Hades?\n\n\nI can hear the wind blowing in the distance.\n\n\nBut why can't I see anything?\n\n\nCan't move either.\n\n\nHow did I get here?\n\n\nAh, my head, it feels as if I've been hit by Polyphemos.\n\n\nHmmm, the darkness is returning.\n\n\nMaybe I'll go back to sleep...", "action_results": [{"action": "Zzz...", "result": "You wake up, and quickly fall back asleep, a couple of times more. However, you never manage to get to know more about your surroundings apart from small, incoherent impressions.\n\n\nBut eventually you manage to gather enough strength to stay conscious for a longer period of time.\n\n\nAs you open your eyes with much effort you are amazed with what you see. You are aboard a ship, about medium-sized by the looks of it. You are lying in a ornately decorated bed which in itself must cost more than what you earn as a bard in an entire year. An array of bronze objects are visible on a nearby wooden desk: astrolabes, scales, even a small scale model of the solar system. Whoever owns this ship is either a trader or a scholar.\n\n\nYou hear stumbling in the room next to yours. The door separating them opens to reveal an elderly man, with grey hair wearing clean, white robes. When he speaks he sounds distracted, as if the affairs of the mortal world are not important enough to catch his attention. 'Welcome, stranger. I can see the questions in your face and I will answer them. My name is Angellios, and I am a priest of the bright Apollo.You might want to know why you are on my ship. Well, the short answer is: because I found you. The long answer is: the gods have sent me a vision, they told me to rescue you from the cold embrace of Poseidon and bring you to Sparta. To be honest, you are one of the few people I let aboard my ship. I use this vessel to completely separate myself from the civilized world, so I can completely focus on my study and the worship of the great Apollo. But since you have regained your strength it is almost time for us to say goodbye. We arrived at the docks of Sparta three days ago and too be honest, those have been three days too much.'\n\n\nAlthough he obviously tries to hide his annoyance of human contact, you reply that you realize that you have been a burden for Angellios and that you thank him for all his good care. You decline his offer of a strange meal consistent of an array of strange mushrooms and disembark after another thorough thank-you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sparta... At last", "result": "You take a deep breath as you walk along the docks of Sparta. You have finally reached your destination, after many hardships and the death of your friends you've finally made it. Your moment of happiness is short-lived though, as you realize your real task has only just begun. Someone somewhere in this great city is going to be responsible for the civil war that will engulf Greece, and it is your task to stop it, Your short moment of happiness is thus replaced by desperation, you have absolutely no idea where to start looking.\n\n\nYou walk across the harbor, watching the ship come and go across the busy river and the people walk by. When you realize you won't find anything lingering here you walk to the city. You don't feel at ease in the warrior city. Sparta and Athens are almost complete contrasts of each other. Athens is a centre of art and philosophy and houses some of the most beautiful buildings in Greece, while the whole of Sparta is dedicated to the art of warfare, it's houses almost completely devoid of any decorations. While Sparta controls a large part of the Peloponnese it's theatre is smaller than most provincial towns and the city watch is acts ruthlessly against anyone who breaks the law. The Spartans themselves don't even work their own lands, the peoples they conquered have to work for them as semi-slaves.\n\n\nAfter an hour or so of exploring the city you decide to call it a day and enter a tavern. The dimly lit place if filled with people from all over Greece, traders from Syracuse, a couple of actors from Athens, you think you've seen them perform back in Athens once, in the back are some Spartan soldiers and half-hidden behind them are seafarers from Crete, pirates by the looks of them. As you order your drink you can't but help overhear a conversation:\n\n\n'Well, it has been a couple of years since the king died, it's about time she remarried, I mean, she isn't even past childbearing age.'\n\n\n'That's true, but Nelei musn't marry any one of her suitors. She needs a strong husband, one who can resist Akakios. Although Nelei is queen, she is still a woman and as such has nothing to say in politics, and her son has not yet come of age.'\n\n\n'What's wrong with Akakios, he's only a council member isn't he?'\n\n\n'Yes, but one who is bribing about half of the council of elders, and the other half consists of senile old fools.'\n\n\n'And yet most of those councilors are Nelei's suitors.'\n\n\n'Which is exactly my point. Everyone knows Akakios wants to steer towards war with the other city states.'\n\n\n'And why is that such a problem, everyone knows Sparta is the mightiest city state in the whole of Greece?'\n\n\nYour heart is pounding, this is the reason of the civil war, one of the councilors will marry the queen and as a result Sparta will go to war. You throw some coins at the innkeeper and rush out of the tavern, leaving baffled customers and a baffled innkeep behind.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "The royal palace isn't exactly what you were expecting. True to the nature of the Spartans its decorations are sober, not much different from your average estate of a wealthy merchant in Athens. Fresco's depicting both war scenes and scenes of craftsmen adorn the outside walls. Cypresses shield most of the palace from sight, but you can still see that it's walls are much thicker than your average mansion. Its sturdy gate is made of iron, with gilded tips on top. Two hoplites, Greek spearmen, guard the gate.\n\n\nAs you approach the gates of the guardsmen approach you, pointing its spear at your chest. 'Halt, foreigner, what is your business here?'\n\n\nYou answer him as calmly as possible: 'I am a bard from Athens, I request an audience with queen Nelei.'\n\n\n'You can't see the queen', he rudely replies.\n\n\n'But it's important, I need to...'\n\n\nThe guard smashes you in the head with the flat end of the spearhead. You feel a little of blood run down your cheek. 'Now, do I haev to make myself any clearer or will you leave now?'\n\n\n'I would if I could, but I really need to see the queen, it is a matter of...'\n\n\nYou are rudely interrupted as the guard shoves you to the ground. 'Wrong answer.' He raises his spear, ready to thrust it into your chest and ending your life. Your life flashes before your eyes as you search desperately for a way to prevent the bronze spearhead from sending your soul to Hades. however, it is to no avail. the guardsman grins sadistically as he sees you cowering on the floor, he takes one, deep breath and...\n\n\n'Stop!' One word, yet it means the difference between life and death, your death. A woman's voice: sweet, yet filled with authority.\n\n\nYour heart is pounding loudly in your chest and so much blood is flowing through your ears you can hardly hear a thing. A woman walks through the gates, dressed in a simple, yet elegant white robe, a small golden circlet is resting upon her long, brown hair. Her face is soft, yet evokes respect. She yells to the guard, her hands reveal her anger. The guard looks like he will react, but then he decides to walk back to his post. The woman walks towards you, helping you back on your feet.\n\n\nYou see her lips forming words, yet you can't hear a thing.\n\n\n'Excuse me?' you yell louder than you meant to.\n\n\n'I asked you: who are you?'\n\n\n'Oh, excuse me, my heart was pounding so loudly I couldn't hear what you were saying. I am a bard from Athens, sent to request an audience with the queen of Sparta.'\n\n\n'Then you are in luck. I'm Nelei, queen regent of Sparta.'\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Nelei leads you to her quarters...", "result": "The queen has led you into her private quarters, hardly the usual place for an audience. A couple of ornate wooden chair are placed around a roaring hearth fire. The remains of a meal are visible on a nearby table, you see two half-emptied plates and two empty bronze cups. A loom is tucked away in a corner, showing a half finished burial cloth. Apart from some tapestries the walls are barren.\n\n\n'Please, take a seat. I apologize for the sober setting, this isn't the place where I receive my usual visitors. Yet, you are no ordinary visitor, aren't you?'\n\n\n'You are right, my lady, but how did you know?'\n\n\n'This may sound strange, but my late husband came to me last night. He appeared in my dreams. He told me a great danger threatened me and my poor son, Kourio. You see, dark clouds are gathering above Sparta. My husband has died, leaving me alone to raise our only child, his heir. I believe he was murdered. You see, the council of elders, the advisors of the king, want us to declare war on the other Greek city states, claiming the supremacy over the whole of Greece. My husband was opposed to this. I believe Akakios, an evil man and the most influential of the elders was behind his assassination. Ever since my husbands death he has tried to persuade me to marry either him or any of the other elders. However, though I am a woman, I am no fool. Akakios wants the sole rulership over Sparta and I think he'll murder me and my son if that is was it takes. I only managed to win some time by telling my suitors I wouldn't be ready to marry anyone until I finish the burial cloth you can see over there. It's meant for my husbands fater, who has fallen gravely ill. The whole day I would work on it, only to undo all that work each night. But now the suitors found out about it and are demanding a marriage.'\n\n\n'That is a sad tale indeed, noble lady, but it does not explain how you knew of my coming.'\n\n\n'My husband told me a messenger was coming, sent by the immortal gods themselves. One who, despite his humble origins, would be able to put a stop to Akakios' malicious plans and bring peace to Sparta. It''s hard to explain, but when I saw you I knew you were the one my dear husband meant.'\n\n\n'You are right, I was sent by the gods to prevent a civil war between the Greek city states. However, I do not have the power, nor the knowledge to interfere in the politics of Sparta.'\n\n\n'Then we'll just have to work together', a youthful voice speaks.\n\n\nYou turn around and see a youth entering the room, about fourteen years you guess. He has the looks of his mother, the same brown hair and brown eyes and a fair complexion.\n\n\nNelei speaks to you: 'May I introduce you to my son, Kourio, rightful heir to the kingdom of Sparta, direct descendant to the great king Menelaos. Kourio, this is the envoy your father told me about.'\n\n\n'Then this must be a sign that we will finally be able to put a halt to the evil plans of Akakios. Together, we will be able to figure something out, a ruse, to eliminate these pests from our grand city once and for all.'\n\n\nThe three of you deliberate all night and eventually you come up with a plan that will hopefully prevent civil war.", "action_results": [{"action": "As the dawning Eos appears once more in the morning sky your plan comes into action.", "result": "As planned, all of them showed up, every single one of them. Why wouldn't they come, such a chance only presents itself once every lifetime. You and Kourio are sitting in a dark corner of the courtyard, listening while Nelei addresses the suitors. With a steady and authorative voice she speaks: 'My dear guests, I have summoned you to inform you of my decision: at the end of this day I will marry one of you.'\n\n\nYou watch the crowd, almost the whole council of elders is present. Kourio points out Akakios, sitting at the front of them. To you his face looks most like that of a rat, he has a big nose and has little eyes, heavy eyebrows cover most of his forehead. He smirks with his small mouth.\n\n\n'I have prepared a contest. The one who wins it shall become my new husband.' She grabs an ancient looking bow. 'This is the bow of my late husband, passed down to him by his father and his father's father before him. He had an original way to practice with this bow.' She points at six axe handles buried in the sand. 'The one who is able to shoot an arrow through all the six rings of these handles with one shot, like my late husband used to do, I will marry.'\n\n\nYou hear mixed comments coming from the crowd: 'Puh, is that everything, that's easy.'\n\n\n'It looks hard.'\n\n\n'I want to go first.'\n\n\nAs the contest commences you and Kourio watch anxiously, hoping and praying that everything will go as you planned. Suitor after suitor tries to win the contest, but none of the can even draw the string, let alone shoot an arrow with it through the rings. You laugh as Akakios tries again and again with a reddening face, but even he fails at this test.\n\n\nWhen most of the suitors have had their go Akakios yells furiously: 'This is ludicrous, what are you trying to proof, woman, that we are not as good as your late husband? Well, too bad, but he died. You are going to marry me today or both you and your son will die. Do you understand? Huh?'\n\n\nKourio steps out of the shadows and walks towards his mother. 'My dear mother, would you mind letting me have a go at it? Just to proof that it isn't impossible.'\n\n\nThe suitors laugh as Nelei hands over the bow to her son. Kouios takes an arrow and... shoots it towards Akakios.", "action_results": [{"action": "A fight ensues...", "result": "Akakios dodges the arrow, which lodges itself into the chest of the suitor behind him. He draws a sharp, bronze sword and the other suitors follow his lead. Nelei retreats into her chambers, locking the doors behind her. You quickly step forth, out of the shadows drawing your own deadly sword.\n\n\nYou are immediately attacked by two suitors, slashing at you with their sharp swords. However, you easily block their blows, finishing off one of your attackers with a quick thrust to his chest. The other suitor retreats, only to be replaced by three more attackers. Although you do your best trying to block their attacks, you still get shallow cuts along your arms and sides.\n\n\nSuddenly the head of one of your attackers explodes in a flurry of brain and blood as a feathered arrow sends another of the suitors to Hades. Taking advantage of the confusion you thrust your sword into the chest of another attacker, ending his life. The remaining attacker drops his sword and cowers away, but he too is slain by Kourio's swift bow.\n\n\nYou see a glimmer of bronze in the corner of your eye and you barely manage the deadly thrust of Akakios' sword. But as you try to regain your stance he already prepares another attack. As he once more unleashes a deadly thrust in your direction you have only a split second to take action. Acting more on instinct than on your wits you...", "action_results": [{"action": "counterattack.", "result": "Putting all your weight behind your thrust you try to end Akakios' life with a single blow. Yet Akakios is faster. A sharp pain erupts as the bronze sword pierces your intestine. You fall to the ground, coughing up blood. Akakios looms over you with a malicious grin. You manage to see the bronze sword flicker in the afternoon sun before it buries itself into your brains.\n\n\nYou have travelled a long and dangerous road. You braved many perils and have seen many new places. But although you were close to your goal you didn't make it. Greece is doomed and Athens will be engulfed by flames. Yet you won't notice any of this, as your soul is already on it's way to Hades. May you find peace there, while the world of the mortals is at war.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "try to dodge his attack.", "result": "The sharp bronze blade misses you by mere inches as you stumble out of its way. You barely manage to keep standing. you immediately go into the offensive, thrusting and slashing at Akakakios, sending him into the defensive. You are completely focussed on this one opponent, all of your surrounding fade into a blur, leaving only Akakios.\n\n\nThe ringing sounds of metal on metal echo across the courtyard as the both of you tries to land a blow on the other. Your travels have given you a tremendous amount of experience, yet you need all of it in your duel with your enemy. You feel your heart skip a beat as Akakios lunges at your head, just barely missing it. You use this small opening in his defence to strike at him, but you only manage to land a glancing blow.\n\n\nHowever, you manage to take the upper hand in this duel. You commence a flurry of attacks which leave no room for Akakios to retaliate, keeping him on the defensive and slowly maneuvering him to the wall, leaving him little room to dodge. In his desperation to attack you he launches a clumsy attack, missing you completely and leaving him completely open for an attack. You quickly make use of this opening and so you...", "action_results": [{"action": "thrust at his head.", "result": "You miss his head by inches. With this failure the tides of battle turn against you. Akakios regains the upper hand and sends you back into the defensive. Blow after blow you defend but eventually gaps begin to appear in your defence. In an unguarded moment Akakios manages to land a glancing blow to your head.\n\n\nDazed and confused you fall to the ground, dropping your sword. The last thing your mind registers is the malicious grin of Akakios as he plunges his sword into your brain.\n\n\nYou have travelled a long and dangerous road. You braved many perils and have seen many new places. But although you were close to your goal you didn't make it. Greece is doomed and Athens will be engulfed by flames. Yet you won't notice any of this, as your soul is already on it's way to Hades. May you find peace there, while the world of the mortals is at war.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "slash at his chest.", "result": "A red gash appears across Akakios' chest as your sword kisses his flesh. Roaring loudly Akakios goes once again in the offensive. However, his attacks are agressive and uncontrolled, leaving your opponent open for a final attack. Putting all your weight behind your attack, you thrust at his chest.\n\n\nTime seems to stop as you plunge your blade into the lying heart of Akakios. The fighting around you seizes as the remaining suitors stare astonished at the death of their leader. You see small eyes of your enemy close beneath his large eyebrows as you pull your sword free from his chest. Blood sprays from his chest and his breath leaves his lungs as Akakios fall to the ground. The great intriguer, the menace of Greece, is dead.\n\n\nAs time resumes its normal flow you hear the sounds of falling swords around you. You finally become aware of your surroundings again. The courtyard is littered with bodies, Kourio is dripping with sweat and bleeding from multiple superficial wounds. You now notice your clothes are wet with blood, the once white fabric now a dirty red. The remaining suitors have dropped their swords and have kneeled upon the bloody floor, their hands resting upon their heads.", "action_results": [{"action": "The next day...", "result": "You are standing inside the throne room of Sparta. Courtiers and servants alike have gathered near the edges of the rooms, whispering to each other. They are standing between graceful columns that support the heavy, stone roof. The room is decorated in the Spartan style, with scarce fresco's decorating the walls. The marble floor beneath your feet is inlaid with mozaics, depicting battles. A fitting scene, you think, seeing the events of yesterday.\n\n\nIn front of you are two thrones: a small, elegant one for Nelei, the queen regent; and an elaborately decorated throne for Kourio, the rightful king of Sparta. As the two enter you kneel before them.\n\n\n'Rise, noble hero.' you hear Kourio speak to you, 'you do not have to kneel before us. You are an honored friend of us and the whole kingdom of Sparta and we see you as our equal, even though you are a bard by trade. I cannot think of enough ways to thank you for the extraordinary deeds you have done for us and we will be for ever in your debt. I will give you enough gold to live the rest of your days in luxuries and will give you land in Sparta if you wish it; there will always be a place at our table for you whenever you are in the vicinity of our city and you will always have a place to sleep in our palace. But above all I give you my promise: Sparta will be at peace as long as I reign, no hostile action whatsoever will take place against any Greek city. You have my word, I swear it by the almighty gods, that inhabit the wide skies.'\n\n\nYou answer him, astonished by his generous gifts: 'Your honor, I am deeply grateful for this. But how could I ever accept your gifts, I only did my duty.'\n\n\n'I will not hear any excuses. You will accept my gifts, that is an order from the king of Sparta.'\n\n\nYou smile at him: 'Very well your grace. I thank you.'\n\n\nKourio smiles back: 'No, we thank you. But I have one last favour to ask you.'\n\n\n'What might that be your honor?'\n\n\n'Since you are a bard, could you recite an epic to me and my court?'\n\n\n \n\n---\n\n\nYou gaze at the white city of Athens, gleaming in the morning sun. As you stand at the wooden railing of the vessel given to you by king Kourio to bring you back home, you reminisce about your adventure. You see the faces of all those you've met before your minds eye and you try to remember all of the places you've seen. But now, as you look once more at the city in which you were born you realize how much you've missed your home. The golden image of the wise Athena appears upon the vibrant seas. She smiles at you and waves, before disappearing again in a golden flash. The gleaming white marble of the Parthenon burns with a golden glow in the light of the setting sun, welcoming you home after your long journey.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Don't take any rash measures. Think about your next action first.", "result": "It is never wise to take rash decisions and so you wait while you observe Polyphemos. You notice that some of the sheep in the cave want to go out, but when they reach the exit, the cyclops first feels or pets them. If you were to make a run for the exit no he would surely discover you.\n\nAs you ponder on a way to get out a plan begins to take shape in your mind. You order your companions to gather the twigs on which the giant sleeps at night amongst his sheep. Some of the sheep in the cave have a very thick coat of wool. Your escape plan comes into action.\n\nYou bind three sheep together with the twigs. One of your companions holds on the fur of the middle sheep while he hangs underneath it, the other two sheep act as a distraction. When the sheep reach the exit, the cyclops pets them and lets them through.\n\nSeeing that your plan worked you use it to get yourself and your other companion out of the cave. Outside you untie the twigs that hold the sheep together.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "'Unfortunately we don't have time. We have to set sail tomorrow.'", "result": "Too bad, but we have to set sail immediately, time is running out for Greece. The crew sigh softly from relieve, apparently they had a bad feeling about that cave.\n\n\nYou and Cyrus stand at the bow of the ship, looking at the distant horizon. As you stand there you can't but wonder who inhabited that far-away island. But on the other hand, despite your curiosity you too were a little frightened by the cave.\n\n\nThe events of the day have left you tired and you quickly fall asleep. In your dreams you find youself floating above the wine-coloured sea. Violent winds blow right through you and the restless sea sends his waves to the clouded skies above. \n\n\nYou notice a glowing figure standing next to you. As you watch closer you recognize the bright-eyed Athena. She turns her head to you and speaks the winged words: 'Great bard, you have chosen wisely not to venture into the cave on the far-away island, for a terrible monster inhabits it, Polyphemos, the son of Poseidon. But your journey is not over yet and many dangerous fill the roads ahead.'\n\n\nShe points down to two distant shapes in the dark night, lining a narrow passage between two great patches of land. \n\n\n'On the left is the terrible Charybdis, a monster that spawns terrible currents. On the right is the dreadful Scyla, a beast with six heads that attacks all ships that passes it. Choose carefully, the way ahead is long and Greece counts on you.'\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "After these words, the wise Athena disappears...", "result": "The ship rattles and shakes as violent winds torture the sails and restless waves batter the hull. The obvious signs of looming disaster have not gone unnoticed by your crew. Even the most sturdiest sailors in your crew are praying softly to the immortal gods. \n\n\nDistant lightning illuminates the dark sky. \n\n\nCyrus approaches you, his hairs are wet and windswept by the violent weather. A look of horror is on his face. 'My friend, what will this day bring us? What are the almighty gods planning for us today? The crew is restless, everyone can sense that something bad is going to happen.'\n\n\nYou answer him with a slightly trembling voice: 'We are on a perilous journey and dangers await us every day. Keep your faith in the all-seeing gods, for they too want us to succeed.'\n\n\nCyrus answer you with a slightly calmer voice: 'But sir, how can you know for sure that the gods...'\n\n\nYou interrupt his sentence as you see two shapeless forms materialising at the horizon. You quickly tell Cyrus to send the men back to their stations and prepare for anything. \n\n\nThe two monsters are coming into clear view. You can see a large cave on the left of the narrow strait, a large whirlpool is forming at it's entrance. On the right you can see a beast with six dog-like head, connected to it's large body with long necks. \n\n\nYou can practically feel the fear of your crew hanging in the air. The moral drops and cries of fear and despair fill the air.\n\n\n'Zeus, protector of travellers, please keep us safe and...'\n\n\n'Ares, lord of war, shield us mercenaries from danger...'\n\n\nYou make your way to the centre of the ship. Trying the best you can to make your voice audible above the violence of nature you shout: 'Brave men, tamers of the wild seas, many dangers have we braved together, why should we die now, on this day? Don't let fear conquer your heart. Let us sail forwards with determined souls.'\n\n\nThe looks of utter fear are beginning to vanish from the faces of your men.\n\n\n'Now, with a brave heart, let us sail past the...", "action_results": [{"action": "Charybdis'", "result": "The skies howl and the seas roar as your ship sails towards the monstrous Charybdis. You feel the vessel shaking beneath your feet, as if it too is afraid of the coming confrontation. The islands that seemed so far away are now in front of you. To the far right of the narrow sea-strait you can see the dreadful Scylla. It's six heads almost look sad at the sight of it's lost prey. \n\n\nIn front of you you can see the cave of the Charybdis. It's pitch black entrance stands looming at the side of the sea. You see fear once again gripping the hearts of your crew, even Cyrus looks troubled. And to be honest, you yourself do not feel all too well either.\n\n\nSuddenly a high-pitched shriek sounds from the cave, piercing the hearts and minds of everyone on board, breaking your last mental defences.\n\n\nYou can feel your heart beating in your chest as the shrieking continues. You start to shake as the shriek reaches a climax and then...\n\n\nEverything is silent in what feels like an eternity. Neither the skies nor the seas make a sound and the shrieking from cave has silenced. You feel as if you and the ship are floating in mid-air. You see the crew moving around you in slow-motion, as if the Chronos, the god of time, himself has pulled your ship out of the normal stream of time.\n\n\nThen, as if nature itself is seeking to compensate the slowed down time, the world seems moving at double time. The sounds of the world around you return even louder. The waves are becoming more and more violent. And then the world seems to spin around it's own axis. You manage to take a quick look at the seas beneath the ship before you, like the rest of the ship, fall down on the deck. But the problem is, the sea has gone. Where once waves were crashing onto the hull of the ship, there is now a black nothingness, a looming darkness that bodes your imminent doom.\n\n\nCharybdis' shrieking seems much more triumphant now and you realise why. The ship is caught in a large whirlpool. A feeling of falling down accompanies your epiphany. The strange thing is, after all you've been through, you are not afraid of dying. You spend your last moments in the world of the living thinking of the people you've met, especially of your new friend Cyrus, the places you've seen and the choices you've made. But you think with regret of the people who will die because of you during Greece's civil war, which you couldn't prevent.\n\n\nYou enter Hades with a calm heart, accompanied by a golden light.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Scylla'", "result": "An eary silence accompanies your ship as you sail forwards towards the dreadful Scylla. Two beams of light pierce the dark skies above, illuminating both your ship and the monster you are about to face. During this moment of peace you gaze at the narrow strait in front of you. On your left you can see the cave of the monstrous Charybdis. A faint shrieking can be heard coming from the entrance, as if it's inhabitant is weeping at the sight of it's lost prey. On the right you can see Scylla. It's six dog-like heads are looking directly at you, full of anticipation and hunger. It's huge body sits quietly at the shore, awaiting your ship with a rumbling stomach.\n\n\nYour moment of contemplation is swiftly cut short as the heavens above roar once more, an ominous sign for the coming encounter. The current which steers your ship towards the narrow strait is accelerating, as if the seas themselves can't stand the tension any longer and want to push you faster towards your destiny.\n\n\nThe crew members seem to hold their breath collectively as the ship is almost within reach of the Scylla. The white faces of your crew look like death has already struck your ship.\n\n\nAnd then it strikes...\n\n\nThe six heads of the Scylla pounce on the deck with a ferocious fury. White foam drips from the muzzles of it's doglike heads. It's fierce growling muffles the cries of fear and despair from your crew members. Although he even does an even better job at this when each of it's heads grabs a sailor and swallows it whole.\n\n\nAfter it's meal it returns to it's place at the edge of the sea-strait, looking rather content.\n\n\nYour ship quickly sails onwards, with it's crew mourning their deceased comrades.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "It's been a long day...", "result": "It has been two days since you're encounter with the dreadful Scylla. The morale of the crew is at an all time low and occasionally you can hear people grumble about how 'since they agreed to accompany that crazy bard, all sorts of crazy beasts and monsters have attacked us'.\n\n\nThe shining Eos has sunk beneath the horizon hours ago, yet still you can't drift off to sleep. You keep thinking about the rebellious morale of the crew and the heavy weight of your objective pressing on your shoulders. The soft, ritmical breathing of the people around you remind you of the fact that you also carry a responsibility for the lives of the crew. You sigh softly, despaired by the seemingly impossible task the immortal gods appointed you.\n\n\nYou watch at the star lighted waves, listening to the soft blowing of the wind. Then the wind starts picking up speed, forming white foam on the tips of the waves.\n\n\nSuddenly you hear one of the boards of the deck creak softly right next to you. An old man carrying a large bag approaches you.\n\n\n'Brave adventurer, I greet you. My name is Aeolos, lord of the winds. The gods are watching your journey from atop of Olympus. I have been sent by the gods to inform you that time has almost ran out for Greece. That is why I have come to give you this.'\n\n\nHe gives you the bag.\n\n\n'To aid you in your journey I have locked up all of the winds in this bag. All but the western wind that will carry your ship to Sparta. But remember: do not, whatever happens, open the bag. I wish you good luck, noble bard.'\n\n\nAnd with these words he disappears in a whirlwind, leaving you bewildered behind. You think you see one of the crew members, Ericles, shifting in his sleep. Yawning, you remember that the night is almost over and Nox, the goddess of the night, will be relieved by Eos in a couple of hours.", "action_results": [{"action": "Finally you fall asleep", "result": "'I told you, some old man gave him that bag last night, I saw him.'\n\n\n'Yeah, right, and then the satyrs came and did a little dance.'\n\n\n'Then wait and I'll show you. That bag contains something precious. Why else would he be holding that bag even in his sleep?'\n\n\n'Don't you touch him, he is still our client and I, as you captain, command you to leave him alone.'\n\n\n'Right Cyrus, you wouldn't even be captain if it wasn't for him.'\n\n\nYou slowly open your eyes and the sight before your eyes surprises you, to say the least. Cyrus is standing in front of an angry mob of crew members, with his arms extended defensively. You recognise the leader of the mob: Ericles.\n\n\n'Hey look, our client is awake.'\n\n\nYou quickly jump to your feet, still guarding the bag Aeolos gave you. Facing the angry mob, you speak: 'Are you really going to believe a mischief-maker like Ericles? Yes, I was given a bag by the god of the winds, but it does not contain valuables. The gods have decided to help us, so Aeolos locked up the winds in this bag. Only the western wind, which will bring us to Sparta, he left unchecked.'\n\n\nEricles replies with his filled filled with contempt: 'Do you take us for fools, traveller? Do you think you can fool us with such a lame story? Give us that bag and we will continue your bloody odyssey. If you do not give it...', he shows you his dagger 'this dagger might just find it's way into your chest when you're asleep.'\n\n\nYou hear shouts coming from the angry mob: 'Yeah, tell him Ericles!'\n\n\nYou reply: 'I'm sorry, but I can't open this bag. You just have to believe me, bad things will happen if this bag is opened.'\n\n\nThis wasn't exactly what the crowd wanted to hear. They overrun you and Cyrus and grab the bag from your hands. You are in no position to oppose them when Ericles unties the cords that keep the winds locked inside.\n\n\nA violent whirlwind sweeps across the deck, pouncing on the crew, the ship and you. You hear the ship cracking and the sails tearing. And then everything is a big blank.", "action_results": [{"action": "On the beach", "result": "You concentrate with all your might on that one thought: 'The fate of Greece depends on me, I cannot stop here.'\n\nThe void around you seems to collapse, the darkness is lifting. A golden light shines through the crack in the endless void. The sounds of the mortal realm fill your ears. With a great feat of concentration you manage to disperse the nothingness for once and for all.\n\n...\n\nThe bright sunlight pierces your eyes. You can hear the sounds of waves breaking on the shores nearby. As your vision finally focuses you take notice of your surroundings. You are lying on a white beach, nearby the violet sea. Large forests border at the sands.\n\nYou guess this is an island, but how big is it exactly? Is it inhabited, and by who? The memories of your recent visit to the island of the cyclopes are still vividly present within your mind. You try to get up to explore your surroundings, but a sharp pain shoots through your limbs.\n\nClenching your teeth you try once again to stand up. With a great feat of determination you manage to stand up. Shaking with suppressed pain and desperation you mange to take your first step on this new-found land. Then follows a second step, and a third. And then your vision turns red. The white sands of the beach come crashing towards you as exhaustion takes control of your limbs.", "action_results": [{"action": "You are awakened by distant voices", "result": "The high-pitched voice of a young woman awakens you from your unconscious state. Softly grumbling from the pain that's still very much present in your limbs you manage to turn your head around to see where you are. But before you manage to even see past the white sands of the beach you hear another high-pitched shriek. Immediately after this you feel a pain in your legs as the feet of a young woman hit them.\n\nA moment later you are joined on the ground by the face of a young woman, just barely of a marriageable age. Her hair is blond and her arms and skin are white as snow and she wears expensive clothing. You close your eyes as the mouth of this young woman once again produces a high-pitched shriek. Afterwards she seems to relax a little, a faint smile even appears on her face.\n\n'I am sorry, stranger, I hope I didn't startle you too much. I was just surprised to see a traveller on this island, you see we are far away from the rest of the civilised nations and not many people know of us. I was just going to get my ball which landed in the sea over there when I found you, although I wish it would have been a more painless encounter.'\n\nShe gives you another faint smile.\n\nSmiling, you answer her: 'Well, it certainly is a sudden encounter, but I can't say it is an unpleasant one. But could you please tell me where I am and who you are and...' suddenly you realise that your friends and ship are not the only thing you lost in the ocean, you suddenly realise that you have no clothes on. As you cheeks get redder and redder you ask your new acquaintance: 'I am really ashamed to ask you this, but I suddenly realised that I lost my clothes. Do you perhaps have some spare clothes on you?'\n\nThe girl laughs loudly and speaks to you: 'Stranger, you are certainly one of the strangest people I have ever met. On behalf of my people I welcome you to the island of the Phaeacians, my name is Nausica\u00e4, the daughter of the brave and noble Alcino\u00f6s and princess of these people. And you are lucky, I came here with my servants to do the laundry of my brothers, I have some clothes for you to borrow while you are my guest.\n\nAnd with these words she stands up, helping you up as well, and takes you to a nearby cart filled with clothes. Her servants avert their gaze as you don some clothes. Now fully clothed you follow Nausica\u00e4 and her servants to the capital...", "action_results": [{"action": "The city of the sea-farers", "result": "As you make your way towards the city you tell the princess about your travels and your destination. She listens fascinated to your stories, only occasionally interrupting you with some small questions. But although you have not yet finished your story as you reach the city gates she stops you. 'I'm sorry, traveller, but I am afraid we have to part our ways here for now. As the princess of these people I have a reputation to keep. If people spot me with a stranger, a foreign man, they are going to gossip. Our island isn't big and gossips spread fast here. However, I have enjoyed your company so far and so I ask you to visit me and my parents in our palace. Every single citizen knows of it, the youngest child could point you the way. I also think that my father will be able to help you, we Phaeacians are a sea-faring people after all.'\n\nYou answer the young princess: 'young mistress, princess of the Phaeacians, I thank you for you hospitality and I am looking forward to seeing you again.'\n\nThe white-armed girl answers you: 'I am looking forward to seeing you again too, traveller. Before we part our ways I want to return this to you' she goves you your sharp bronze sword, 'one of my servants found this on the beach and she brought it to me. I believe this belongs to you.'\n\nAfter these words, Nausica\u00e4 enters the city with her servants, heading for her palace in which you will see her again soon.\n\nYou decide to explore the city on your own for a few hours before you head to the king's palace. The city itself is not really spectacular for someone who is used to the beauty and splendour of Athens. The island itself has, in contrast to most major cities in Greece, not been inhabited for a long time, only a few generations of people have lived here. Most of the buildings are only one- or two-stories high and there are little ornaments and decorations in the street scape. The people however, are very friendly. Everyone is nice to you, even though not many foreigners are seen here. Even though the people are not exactly the richest in Greece everyone is pleased with the live they've got.\n\nWhen the sun has nearly sunk beneath the horizon you make your way to the palace. As you walk through a less crowded part of the city you suddenly hear someone calling from a dark alley. 'Please help me! By the gods could someone please help me!'\n\nYour heart is torn between two thoughts. This could very much be a deceitful trap, to rob you of your few possessions, or worse... Or someone really is in need of help.", "action_results": [{"action": "''Maybe someone really is in need of help, I'll go and see.''", "result": "You slowly make your way in the dark alley. You expect a thief or robber behind every barrel, every cart that stands in the dark shadows. Eventually you reach the source of the cries for help. A young woman is huddled in a corner, brandishing what looks like the kind of knife butchers use to cut meat. Two robbers are bent over the frightened woman like two vultures on the battlefield; circling over their mortally wounded pray untill his soul finally leaves his body.\n\nYou try to sneak up on the two robbers, trying to reduce the distance between you and them, untill you can drive your sword into their dark hearts. However, the floor is littered with pebbles and shards of pottery. A crunching sound beneath your heels warns the robbers of the fate that is looming above them and they turn around, brandishing daggers in their hands.\n\nA look of terror passes their face as they realise that their new guest is not a helpless woman. One of them, the 'leader', charges you with his dagger while the other continues harrassing his victim.\n\nYou grip the hilt of your sword tighter as the dagger of your opponent has almost reached your chest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Block his attack!", "result": "You raise the blade of your sword, trying to block the impact of the robber's dagger. However, it takes too much time to lift it. You are barely able to deflect your opponent's blow and the dagger's deadly blow misses your chest by an inch.\n\nFear grips your heart for a brief moment as you realise that you could have been killed this very instant and within this moment your opponent strikes once again.", "action_results": [{"action": "Block!", "result": "You lift your sword once again. trying to block the deadly blow of your opponents dagger one more time. However, the sheer weight of your bronze sword, in contrast to the small, light dagger of your opponent, combined with your brief hestitation due to the fear gripping your heart prevent you from reacting quick enough.\n\nBlood erupts from your chest as the deadly bronze pierces your heart. A golden light appears as your lifeless body falls to the ground of the alley.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Dodge!", "result": "Fear tightens the grip on your heart as the dagger of your opponent barely misses you head. You let out an involuntary sigh of relieve as you realise that you are not yet about to enter the realm of Hades. With all your strenght you kick the leg of your opponent. Surprised by this sudden move your assailant stands no chance against your blow, screaming with rage he falls to the ground. A quick blow with your sword silences him for good.\n\nAs your turn to see how the woman is faring you are met with the other robber. He falls towards you with a knife sticking out of his back. His victim stands behind him with a triumphant smile. You look at her with surprise. She answers calmy: 'What? Two robbers might have been too much, one isn't.'\n\nYou ask the woman for directions to the royal palace and after mutual words of thanks you continue your way.", "action_results": [{"action": "The royal palace", "result": "You have finally reached the magnificent royal palace of the Phaeacians. You instantly know why every single inhabitant of this city knows it. It is by far one of the largest buildings you have ever seen in you life, either in Athens or in any other Greek city. The outside is decorated with beautiful marble sculptures and richly decorated mosaics are laid on the ground. Small trees and different varieties of flowers separate the palace from the street. \n\n\nYou spot two guards in ornate armour standing next to the great wooden gates of the palace. Servants and citizens alike are passing through the entrance to the palace. You hide your sharp bronze sword beneath your clothes the best as you can, since you don't think the guards will let you enter the palace with a weapon. \n\n\nYou do your best mingling in with the citizens that enter the palace. Your breathing almost stops as you walk past the guards. You imagine them stopping you any moment now, slowly drawing their weapons as they close in on the citizen they do not recognise. You almost can feel the hand of the imaginary guard on your shoulder.\n\n\nYou slowly dare to exhale as you finally reach the courtyard of the palace. People of all ranks and positions mingle in here, as if there is no class difference at all, this is truly an unique sight! You make your way around the different groups, trying to find the throne room. You pass a group of statues depicting the brief history of the Phaeacians. They really are a remarkable people, the previous king, Nausito\u00f6s, led the Phaeacians to this island, founding everything you have seen today and more. You recognise one of the last statues as Nausica\u00e4, the princess you met on the beach.\n\n\nNext to these statues is the entrance to the throne room. The high ceiling is supported by several high pillars. Lavish fresco's decorate the walls. Nobles and courtiers are gathered around a roaring fire in the middle of the room. You spot Nausica\u00e4 sitting next to her father in the middle of the room. As she sees you she speaks to her father on his well-built throne: 'My noble father, look over there, beneath the well-made archway. This man is my guest. He is a traveller from Athens, many miles from here. The high waves and violent winds smashed his ship and brought him to our shores.' \n\n\nHer father, the noble Alcino\u00f6s answer her: 'My dear daughter, any guest of yours is a guest of mine.' He turns to you, 'please, foreign traveller, come closer. You are our honoured guest today. My servants will make sure you will have a comfortable stay here. Please, join us at the dinner table when you are ready.' ", "action_results": [{"action": "After you refresh yourself in your room, you head towards the dining hall...", "result": "You are sitting in the large dining hall next to king Alcino\u00f6s. The heavy wood table is covered with the most delicious foods and in the center lies a large, fat swine, fresh from the spit. After a servant fills your plate, a bard enters the hall. The king himself announces him. 'My dear friends and family, I am pleased that our dear bard Demodokos is present here this evening. After all, should we not hold all bards in high esteem. For they received their trade from the gods themselves, either from the god Apollo or the muses themselves.' You smile a little after hearing these words.\n\n\nThe shining bard tells with great skill about the fall of Troy and the sufferings of the godlike Odysseus. After about three hours he conludes his story: 'That was the tale of the shrewd Odysseus. Who traveled far and wide after he destroyed the sacred citadel of Troy. But although he suffered much misery in his heart, at sea, he completed his destiny and returned to his home and his faithful wife.'\n\n\nHearing the story about Odysseus, you can't but compare yourself to him. For you too suffer much, far from your home. You feel tears well up behind your eyes. The noble king notices your obvious sadness and speaks with kind words: 'Great Demodokos, with your silver voice, you told a great story, but I think it was a little too much for our honoured guest. This is a feast in his honour, we should laugh, not cry. But tell us, noble traveller, who you are and where you come from.'\n\n\nThe gathered people listen fascinated to every single of your words as you tell about you journey thus far. You tell them everything: your encounter with the gods, the harpies in Egypt, the Oracle, the Scyla and Charibdis, the mutiny on your ship and eventually your adventures in the city.\n\n\nAlcino\u00f6s is visibly touched by your story and with his awe-filled voice he speaks to you: 'Great bard from Athens, valiant traveller, I, and the rest of my court, have listened to your story with great astonishment. I think I speak for all of the Phaeacians when I say that we will gladly bring you to Sparta with one of our swift ships.'\n\n\nYou answer him with great gratitude: 'Noble king, I thank you for this offer and I gladly accept it. You must have exquisite sailors, if they are able to navigate from here to Sparta.'\n\n\nThe king of the Phaeacians answers: 'I thank you for the compliment, traveller, but it is not completely true. You see, our ships are special. Tell them where you want to go and they will bring you there, without the need for guidance. Our swift ships will bring you in three days to Sparta.'", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Dodge!", "result": "You let out a sigh of relieve as the sharp bronze dagger of your opponent misses your head by an inch. After you ducked to dodge his attack he could not react fast enough to redirect his attack. You are now in the perfect position to strike.\n\nYou leave your lifeless opponent behind you with a large stab wound in his chest. As your turn to see how the woman is faring you are met with the other robber. He falls towards you with a knife sticking out of his back. His victim stands behind him with a triumphant smile. You look at her with surprise. She answers calmy: 'What? Two robbers might have been too much, one isn't.'\n\nYou ask the woman for directions to the royal palace and after mutual words of thanks you continue your way.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "''It probably is some ordinary robber. And besides, I really need to go to the palace.''", "result": "You quickly walk past the alley, it's probably safer that way and besides, you've got somewhere to go to.\n\n Suddenly you hear something behind you.\n\nSome pebbles on the street are swept aside by the feet of some pedestrian.\n\nThe rustling of the clothes of a person near you.\n\nThe sound of a bronze object being pulled from it's hiding place.\n\nYou quickly duck aside as if the lightning bolt of Zeus himself has struck you. The bronze dagger of the unknown assailant harmlessly flies through the space you just left. You draw your own sword within a split-second, ready to attack any mugger who tries to kill you again.\n\nFor the first time you see your attacker: it's a small man, just able to reach you shoulders with the top of your head, were it not for the patchy black beard that protrudes from beneath his dark hood you could have mistaken him for a child. You see his bronze dagger shaking in his hand and you manage to catch a glimpse of his nervous face beneath his hood. He had not expected that you would dodge his blow and not at all that you would draw a weapon of your own.\n\nAlmost unnoticeable he starts to back away, as if he prepares to flee at the first opportunity.", "action_results": [{"action": "''He's not going to get away so easily after attacking me, he will pay.''", "result": "Your mind is clouded with rage as you chase the cowardly mugger. Street after street you run after him, dodging people and animals alike. You notice that this journey has done wonders for your stamina, you are able to keep up with the coward with relative ease, while he is heavily panting.\n\nAfter he dashes in yet another alley he stops, realising that he cannot outrun you. As you enter the alley he has already drawn his deadly bronze dagger, inviting you to come near. You draw your sword in response...", "action_results": [{"action": "A battle ensues...", "result": "Although the robber lacks real skill he makes up for it with his utter fear of death. He lunges at you at the first opportunity, resulting in a shallow wound on your upper arm. You quickly recover and prepare your attack...", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack him quickly, while he is not prepared", "result": "You quickly jump to your opponent with your sword drawn. The coward is not at all prepared for your attack, as you anticipated, however, he still manages to stab you in your stomach as a reflex. A sharp pain erupts in your belly and you fall to the ground, clutching your stomach with both of your hands.\n\nThe robber immediately runs away, leaving you behind in the dark alley. The dirt ground turns red with your blood as your life force slowly flows out of your body. The pain does not fade away for some very long hours though. When the rose-fingered dawn is just about to dispel the black veil of night, death finally comes to you, not as a burden, but as a relieve. Your last moments on this earth are painless, filled with a golden light.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Adopt a careful stance, you never know what might happen", "result": "You slowly approach the robber, you never know how a terrified opponent may react. Your caution is rewarded: just when you are within arms reach of the robber he tries to stab you as if by a reflex. However, you quickly block his attack with the flat end of your blade and subsequently counter it with your own...\n\n\nYour cowardly opponent falls to his knees, crying. 'Please stranger, do not kill me. I promise you I'll better my ways. I swear by the immortal gods, who own the wide skies. Please, I beg you, do not kill me. I'll do everything you say.'", "action_results": [{"action": "Let him live.", "result": "'Stand up, sniveling mugger! I'll let you live this time, but if you do not better your ways, Hades will still claim your soul. Remember, you've sworn it by the immortal gods. Now, tell me where I can find the royal palace...'", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Kill him.", "result": "The cowardly mugger falls to the ground with several holes in his chest. You wipe the blood of your sharp bronze sword and carry on towards the royal palace...", "action_results": [{"action": "Lost in the city", "result": "'It's really easy to find, the smallest child could point you the way. The smallest child could point you the way, where am I going to find a small child? This city is like a maze!' \n\n\nYou have been walking through the empty streets for an hour and still have not found the palace. All these streets look alike. You are walking through streets of locked doors and closed shutters. Muffled voices can be heard from the nearby houses. After walking through yet another street you have reached a crossroads. Trying you luck, you decide to...\n\n\n \n\n \n\n(The streets of the Phaeacian city are like a maze, it's even like they're designed to confuse strangers. For the traveler who is not able to continue his journey, the gods have left a map below.)\n\n\n \n\nA golden light reveals the follow letters written on the streets: LRAAA, you'd better remember them.", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn left...", "result": "You find yourself in yet another street. This time you have two options to choose from: ", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn right", "result": "You have reached yet another crossroads, you have three choices this time:", "action_results": [{"action": "Go straight ahead", "result": "Yet another crossroads cross your path. You have three options:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn left", "result": "You find yourself in a streets with only two options to choose from:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go straight ahead", "result": "You have only one option: turn the corner.", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn right", "result": "The streets are becoming wider and the houses are more and more richly decorated, you must be close to the royal palace.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Turn right", "result": "You reach a street with only two options to choose from:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Turn right", "result": "You have reached a street with only two directions to choose from:", "action_results": [{"action": "Go straight ahead", "result": "You have only one direction to turn to:", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Turn right", "result": "Yet another crossroads cross your path: ", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn left", "result": "You have reached yet another crossroads. You have three options to choose from:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go straight ahead", "result": "Yet another crossroads crosses your path. You have three options to choose from:", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, null]}, null, {"action": "Turn right", "result": "You can choose from two roads to follow:", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null, null]}, {"action": "Turn left", "result": "You have two directions to choose from:", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Turn right", "result": "You have reached another crossroads. What direction will you turn to?", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Turn right", "result": "You have reached yet anther crossroads:", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Turn right", "result": "You have two roads to choose from:", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Go straight ahead", "result": "You are in a short street, there is only one option to go to:", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, {"action": "Turn right...", "result": "You reach a street with only two directions to go to:", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go straight ahead", "result": "You have reached a street with only one direction to turn to:", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Quickly retreat", "result": "Overwhelmed by the sheer number of the souls and the attacks of the dead soldiers you retreat. But with every step you take the souls close in on you. Absolutely terrified you call out to Cyrus, but you get no response.\n\nThousands of souls envelop you as you make one final attempt to leave this place of the dead. The cold chill of death creeps through your body as the souls slowly take you with them to the realm of Hades. In your last moments in the realm of the living you can only see darkness. In the last split second before you enter the underworld a golden light fills your vision. Where did this journey go wrong?", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "'Very good Cyrus, keep hitting him, set a good example for the crew.'", "result": "Cyrus keeps hitting the boy, holding the oar high above his head, encouraged by your shouts.\n\n\nYou are too absorbed in the 'disciplinary punishment' of the young boy to notice the growing resentment of the crew members. Behind your back, the disgruntled crew members gather. When you finally notice what is going on the first fist hits you in your stomach. You bend over as the air is forced from your lungs. You collapse as another fist hits you on your head.\n\n\nAs you wake up a few moments later you notice that you and Cyrus are tied together with your wrists. A big crew members towers over you. 'Wake up, wake up sleepy. It's time to play. Who is up for a little bit of swimming.'\n\n\nThe next moments pass by in a flash. The crew lifts you up and before you realise what exactly is going on you find yourself sinking beneath the waves.\n\n\nYou jerk at the ropes that are immobilizing your hands, trying to loosen them. But it is of no use.\n\n\nYour sight blackens as the last air flows from you lungs. The body of Cyrus grows limb as he too struggles for oxygen. The last thing you see is the last of your breath, leaving your body in a string of bubbles. The last seconds before your soul travels to the realm of Hades are filled with torment as you struggle against the cold embrace of the ocean surrounding you.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Dodge their attack", "result": "You quickly fall to the ground and feel their swords pass over you.\n\n\nYou hear one of the guards curse as his arm is cut off by Cyrus' sword, however he quickly falls silent as another swing by Cyrus' sword sends his soul to the underworld.\n\n\nAs the remaining three opponents rush to their killed comrade you dispatch another one.\n\n\nHowever, the idle guards can't just watch on as two of their comrades have been killed. They quickly rush to the aid of their two remaining colleagues.\n\n\nNow it's eight versus two.\n\n\nThe remaining guards manage to gather in a kind of formation, linking their shields together to form a shield wall. Well, this is going to be fun.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "'Very well, I will leave.'", "result": "As you turn to walk away Cyrus approaches you. 'For the sake of the immortal gods, what are you doing?'\n\n'I'm going away, can't you see that?' you reply 'it is no use arguing with the oracle, the gods are displeased with me and I don't want to agitate them any more.'\n\n'But sir, I thought you were on some kind of important mission.'\n\nYou sigh. 'Yeah, well maybe I'm not the right person for this job. Why did I agree to this foolish journey in the first place? Because of me Greece will fall.'\n\n'Well sir, if you don't mind me for speaking... Although I don't know what you're talking about I might know a solution to your problem. Many years ago I heard a tale about a place where the living can speak to the dead, a place where the world of the living and the realm of Hades collide. Oh well, just forget about it, it's just a foolish tale. Please forgive me for wasting your time. I'll prepare for the journey home, I'll be expecting you in...'\n\n'Hold a minute. What did you just say. About a place where I could speak with the dead.'\n\n'Sir, it's just a myth...'\n\n'Trust me, I have seen some very strong evidence that makes them sound a lot more credible then you would think.'\n\n'Very well then. At the edge of the world there stands a rock, at the convergence of two great streams. There the world of the living and the realm of Hades cross-over. In order to speak to the deceased you will have to sacrifice to the souls of dead at that place. But, even if it is possible, how are they going to help you on your journey?'\n\n'I have heard long ago about a great seer, Teiresias is his name. If I am able to speak to him, then he might be able to help me. It is a slim chance but it is the best I've got. Prepare the ship, we will depart the first thing in the morning.'", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "'Of course, I always have money to spare for those in need.'", "result": "The beggar looks sincerely gratefully at you. 'Thank you, great and noble traveler. The gods will surely reward you for your kindness and generosity. If only more people were like you sir. I'll always be grateful.'\n\n\nAnd with these last words the beggar walks away. You turn around to ask him who he is but to your astonishment you notice that the beggar has disappeared. After you walk around Thebes for a couple of hours you return to the ship, feeling good about yourself for helping the lesser fortunate.\n\n\nAfter a light dinner you return to your sleeping mat and you quickly fall asleep. You feel a soothing sense of weightlessness envelop you as you drift through the world of your dreams. The world is flooded with golden light and as you slowly drift through the light you never want to leave this state again. Then you see figures emerging from the light. You recognize the wise and owl-eyed Athena.\n\n\n'Greetings bard, great teller of tales. You have passed the trial the gods set out for you. I am glad that you have proven yourself worthy for this journey. But you are not safe yet, many perils will await you as Greece is about to fall. You are on the right way, but you still can't afford any mistakes. Don't mock the immortal gods!'\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "You slowly wake up...", "result": "You wake up the next day after a peaceful nights sleep.\n\n\nAs you slowly open your eyes, blinking from the bright morning sun, you notice Cyrus standing next to your sleeping mat. 'Good morning sir, I hope that you slept well. I have taken the liberty to arrange a meeting with the Oracle for you today. And don't worry, we won't charge you extra money for this service.' He adds with a wink.\n\n\nAbout an hour later you are standing in front of the shrine of the priestess of Zeus. The shrine is a large imposing circular structure made out of gleaming white marble. As you admire the building, the huge bronze doors open to reveal the priestess of Zeus. She wears a long white robe and a bronze necklace around her neck and she is of great beauty. She looks like one of the immortal gods, who own the great sky, herself. She approaches you very solemnly, holding an incense burner while muttering prayers to the cloud gatherer Zeus.\n\n\nYou hesitate to address her, afraid to interrupt a sacred ceremony. So you just keep standing on your spot, watching the priestess and waiting until she is finished. When the priestess has almost reached you notice a boy behind her, holding a honey cake. The priestess stops, but the boy approached you with the cake, offering it to you. As he leaves he says just one word: 'eat'.\n\n\nAfter you finish the sweet cake a girl approaches you with a bowl filled with water. She holds the bowl in front of you and says just one word: 'wash'.\n\n\nAfter having washed your hands the priestess of the almighty Zeus finally approaches you. She speaks with a kind voice, but you can hear she is used to speak with powerful men and you detect some hints of conceit. 'Welcome, traveller. The gods have revealed to me in an oracle that you would come to me. That is why you, a commoner are given this last-minute divination. You have powerful friends among the gods, I can tell you that. Now, listen closely to what the gods have chosen to reveal to you through me:\n\n\n'You have started a journey with dangers above your imagination. However, it is your fate to succeed. Stay true to your heart and refrain from angering the gods and you will reach your destination. In the lands of the Spartans there is a great palace. Is's inhabitant, the great king Agatos, has been betrayed by his courtiers. Now, the flame of war has ignited the hearts of the Spartans, the flame that will engulf the whole of Greece if left unchecked.'\n\n\nThis is what the gods revealed to me. I understand what a terrible burden the gods have placed on your shoulders and I wish I could relieve some of it. My servants will serve you a banquet before you leave, I wish you good luck.'\n\n\nWith these words she retreats into the temple.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "After the meal you stock up on supplies and set sail towards Sparta...", "result": "Apart from some near-collisions with crocodiles and other inhabitants of the vibrant Nile, your trip back across is rather uneventful. Fair winds are guiding you towards Sparta and the radiant sun is spreading it's warm veil across the deck of your hired vessel. With such fair winds blowing in your sail, the oars have been stowed away and the crew is relaxing on deck. you find yourself gazing at the horizon, wishing that all days could be like this one. But then you remember your daunting task, and dark storm clouds gather in your mind.\n\n\nCyrus notices your worried face and approaches you. 'My dear friend, what could possibly be bothering you on such a beautiful day? Like my dear mother always used to say: 'Life's to short to waste a sunny day. Save your worries for when it rains.' She also had some other sayings, but those are not really appropriate in, well actually all sorts of company.'\n\n\nYour mood instantly brightens, you even manage to produce a smile. Following Cyrus' advice you just fit back and enjoy the voyage.\n\n\n...\n\n\nAs the starry night drives away the shining day, you and the crew go to sleep. Only a few crew members stay on deck to act as sentries. the worries that clouded your mind have not returned. You twist and turn in your sleep as a sense of foreboding doom fills your dreams. You see flashes of images: a beautiful mansion on top of white cliffs, dozens of swines approach you, a bedchamber with a magnificently decorated bed. Then a golden figure approaches and pushes away all other images: Athena, the owl-eyed protector of heroes. 'Brave traveller, noble bard, you're journey has only just begun. Sparta is still far away, but tomorrow you will reach an island, the island of the goddess Circe, the daughter of Helios, the sun-god. You will have to be on your guard, for she is a powerful witch, expect the unexpected and don't lose your objective out of sight: saving Greece from the flames of war. I wish you good luck.'\n\n\nWith these words she leaves your dreams.", "action_results": [{"action": "You wake up the next morning", "result": "The dawning sun is obscured by grey clouds as you stand uo from your sleeping mat. The sea which was a bright blue colour yesterday has now turned to a drab grey. A thick mist obscures your view and you can see the anxiety on the face of the ship's navigator.\n\n\n'I'm sorry sir, but a thick mist has set in during the night. I cannot guarantee that we are still on the right course. And given the urgency of your 'quest' I am sure you would not have liked it if we suspended our voyage.'\n\n\n'But I'd rather had...'\n\n\n'Yes, I'm sure you had wished the mist wouldn't have set in, but we can't change the past, can we?'\n\n\n'No, but that's not what...'\n\n\n'I thought so, so we'll just sea where the currents take us. Hahaha, sea, get it?'\n\n\nAnd with those wise words he walks away, laughing maniacally to himself.\n\n\nCyrus approaches you with a smirk on his face. 'So you've had a nice chat with our navigator huh. Well, he is a kind of a nutjob, but you won't find a better one in the whole of Greece.' He leaves again, chuckling.\n\n\nAs hours pass, the fog thickens even more and eventually it is impossible to see more than 4 feet ahead of you. Even worse, the ship is mysteriously losing speed. The navigator is walking around like a confused chicken, walking in circles while making strange noises to himself.\n\n\nSuddenly you hear surprised chatter among the crew. Several crew members are pointing at something in the fog. You gaze at the fog but you can't see a thing. But then, just as you are about to turn away you see it: blinking lights pierce through the fog. As if an invisible hand wipes away the fog, it opens up, revealing a green island. What immediately draws your attention is a large house on a hill, gleaming as if made of solid gold.\n\n\nAfter a quick meeting with the crew you decide that, since your ship now has lost all speed, you will all go ashore in dinghies. Of course your curiosity also played a part in this decision.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue...", "result": "You feel the familiar feeling of sands shifting beneath your feet as you step out of the dinghy. Beautiful palm trees dot the beach, providing shade from the blissful heat of the sun. Playful fish approach you and scurry away, following the coming and going of the sea. The deep blue waves of the sea shape the sand in an elaborate pattern, both beautiful and enigmatic at the same time, much like the rest of the island. You can see a large mansion on top of a low hill about 300 feet inland, surrounded by large gardens. Some distance from the mansion you see some piggeries.As you and your companions walk along the beach you can't help but wonder who lives in such a beautiful place, surely such a place would be fit for one of the inhabitants of the wide skies.\n\n\n The soft sands give way to marble steps, which form a path that leads to the luxurious mansion. Without a single doubt in your mind you climb the steps, determined to meet the inhabitant of such a wondrous place. As you near the mansion you notice that fatigue does not even begun to grip your limbs, nor those of your companions, on the contrary, you feel a blissful sense of joy overcome you as you near the mysterious dwelling. You look at the mansion in more detail. The walls are made of gleaming white marble, decorated with gold and silver fresco's depicting a rural scene: a shepherdess herding groups of animals, like pigs but lions and wolves too. The grand oaken doors are decorated with gold leaf and the silver knockers are shaped like hourglasses.\n\n\nYou are about to grab one of the knockers when the door opens on it's own accord, revealing a beautiful woman. Her beautiful white robe is fastened around her waist with a golden girdle. She wears her golden hair in a long plaited braid and on top of her head she wears a golden circlet. Her face is unfathomable, but her skin is white as milk. She speaks to you and your companions in a voice as sweet as honey: 'Excuse me, noble visitors, but I was not expecting you. May I ask you who you are and why you have come here?'\n\n\nYou answer her: 'noble lady, me and my companions have been traveling far and wide. But the gods have not favored us. The winds, which are sometimes the sailors best friends, but sometimes their enemies, have been absent for a long time and we have not been able to reach our destination. Our supplies have run out and then, like a sign of the gods, we saw your island on the horizon.'\n\n\n'I see... Of course I will give you enough supplies to continue your journey, the gods have not given me riches only to keep them to myself, have they? But to be honest: you look like you're starving. Please, come inside and join me for diner. I was just about to...'\n\n\nSuddenly a pig bumps into her. It then turns to you, shaking it's head violently. Astonished by this sight you fail to produce any comprehensible words. The mysterious woman, straitening her dress, speaks to you again:' Please forgive me, but one of my pigs must have escaped it's pen. Would you like him for dinner tonight? As I was saying, I would love to share my food with you, please do join me at my table. Oh, did I almost forget to introduce myself: my name is Circe.'\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "'My lady, I would like to thank you for your hospitality, we would gladly join you at your table.'", "result": "The dining hall is breathtakingly beautiful. The tables are placed in a circle in the middle of the room, in the middle of the circle roars a great fire that fills the hall with a warm glow. The food is exquisite, food and delicacies from all over the world are represented: dates from the east, flamingo from Aegyptos, olives from Syracuse and more seafood than you can name, all served in Carthaginian glassware and Roman pottery More fresco's of pastoral scenes decorated the otherwise bare walls. The marble columns that support the roof are chiseled in a way that makes them look like they are revolving around their own axis, grape branches have winded themselves around their tops. A giant loom is tucked away in a corner.\n\n\nCirce speaks amiably to your crew men, speaking to each of them with civility, listening attentively to their every word en laugh at every joke. It seems your men have a great time. Yet you are not as talkative as you usually are, and the delicious food just barely registers in your mouth. Seeing such kindness and joy you realize just how far you are away from your family and friends in Athens. With a sigh you remember every single face and every single smile. And now you are here, who knows how far away from your home, traveling on some journey given to you by either the gods of figments of your delusional mind, as for that you still aren't certain. Even more depressing is the fact that there is a very real possibility that you will never see your beloved ones again.\n\n\nYou hardly notice the soft hand Circe puts on your shoulder. 'My dear guest, I can see that something is bothering you. Is there any way I can help you?'\n\n\nYou try to turn your face away from hers. 'My graceful hostess, I am sorry. Here, in your warm house I realize how much I miss my beloved ones. Far away I have traveled from them and I scarcely said goodbye to them. And now, I don't know, I am just a little bit depressed.'\n\n\nShe answers you with a kind smile, looking absent, as if gazing at something far away in the distance: 'My dear guest I know how you feel. My family is far away from here as well and the man who I loved most in the whole world has left me long ago. You kind of remind me of him. He too was a traveler, far away from his home after he got lost at sea. The god Poseidon cursed him and he and his men arrived at my island. They stayed for a year, but then they left again, taking my heart with them.' she shakes her head as if to bring herself back into the present, 'but now is not the time for sad reminiscence, let us drink and be merry and forget our troubles for a while. Here, let me refill your cup with this exquisite wine, it's almost magical.'\n\n\nShe pours a deep red wine into your cup. Trying to forget your sad thoughts you taste it. It is the sweetest, most delicious drink you have ever tasted. Like the honey that is made painstakingly by the smallest bees and is the sweetest thing known in the Greek world, and when one eats it one cannot but forget his troubles for a brief while. Even that cannot match the wine you are tasting right now. You quickly drain the cup.\n\n\nThe wine leaves the faint taste of herbs in your mouth and a drowsy feeling in your head. Your eyelids are becoming increasingly heavy and you feel your head drop. As you look across the table you can see the same thing happening to your men. As you look to her to ask for an explanation you see her grabbing a wand from a dresser. She can see your question in your eyes and she answers you with her sweet voice: 'But you won't leave me. You will stay here, with me, until the end of times, just like all other travelers that have come here since my love left me. But to make sure you won't escape I have to may a few arrangements.'\n\n\nShe gracefully walks towards you. You try to back away, but your limbs won't listen to the signals from your brains. She lifts her wand menacingly and you close your eyes. The pain you are expecting stays away and you only feel the gentle tap of Circe's wand upon your head. As you open your eyes with relieve you notice that something is wrong. You see your hands turn into hoofs before your eyes and a snout sprouts where your nose used to be. You fall of your chair, on all four of your legs. You are only able to make grunting sounds as you try to shout to your men.\n\n\nThe last thing you are able to register with your human mind are the kind words of Circe: 'Come, come little piglet. We'll have a great time together, until time itself seizes to exist.'", "action_results": []}, {"action": "'My lady, I would like to thank you for your hospitality, but I am not feeling well, I regretfully have to decline your invitation.'", "result": "Something just does not feel right. This whole island is just to perfect. The way Circe acts is too kind, she is too trusting and that pig must be a sign of the gods. You tell Circe you're going back to the ship to rest a little. When she asks you with a sad face if you could at least tell your other men about the dinner you promise her you will. As you walk back across the marble steps you spot docile lions and pigs in their respective pens. Something about the way they look at you doesn't feel right either. Their looks are not those of wild animals, on the contrary they almost look... human.\n\n\nYou neither saw nor heard him approach you but you suddenly feel a hand tapping you gently on your shoulder. As you turn you see the youthful face of Hermes, the keen-eyed messenger of the gods. 'Strange, aren't they, they have the appearance of animals yet they also seem human. Yet neither the one, nor the other. I can see you have questions and the gods have sent me to answer them.'\n\n\nYou don't know where to start and you ask him quickly, as if he'll withdraw his statement if you don't ask something quickly enough: 'Why are we here?'\n\n\n'The gods are testing you.'\n\n\n'Athena gave me a warning about a woman named Circe, was that her?'\n\n\n'Yes, Circe is a witch, she bewitches men with herbs and magic spells. Hear my words and heed them well: these animals you see before you weren't always animals. They were men who were stranded on Circe's island, castaways, merchants, anyone unlucky enough to set foot here is turned into an animal.'\n\n\n'What about my men?'\n\n\n'They too, will be enchanted, cursed to walk the earth as an animal until time itself seizes to exist.'\n\n\n'Isn't there anything I can do to stop her?'\n\n\n'There is a way. Circe bewitches men with the help of magical herbs. However, there is a way to make you immune to her vile witchcraft. Close your eyes.'\n\n\nAs soon as you close your eyes you feel the gentle touch of Hermes' staff on your forehead. Images of a strange plant float into your mind. It's flowers are white, yet it's roots are black and it's leaves are green, with small white stripes running across the length. You want to open your eyes to ask Hermes what kind of herb he is showing you but you cannot manage to open them.\n\n\nYou hear Hermes' soft voice, yet you could swear your ears don't register a thing: 'the herb you see is known by the gods as 'Moly', a powerful herb that counteracts any harmful effects done to the one who eats it. However, anyone who tries to pick them without the permission of the immortal gods will die on the very spot. Use it to stop Circe and rescue your friends, but remember: don't lose sight of your objective.'\n\n\nSilence falls after he spoke these words and after a minute or so you find you can once again open your eyes. The marble step upon which Hermes was standing a moment ago is now empty, bearing no trace or evidence that it was just treaded upon by a deity.\n\n\nRemembering Hermes' words you spend the next hour searching the island for this so called Moly.", "action_results": [{"action": "As you finally find the herb you quickly ingest it and make your way to Circe's mansion.", "result": "The scene you witness as you enter Circe's dining hall is... weird to say the least. The hall is magnificently decorated: the walls are covered with fresco's depicting pastoral scene, much like the ones that decorate the outside walls. The marble columns that support the roof are chiseled in a way that makes them look like they are revolving around their own axis, grape branches have winded themselves around their tops. A giant loom is tucked away in a corner. The dining tables are placed in a circle in the middle of the room, filled with delicacies from all over the known world: dates from the east, flamingo from Aegyptos, olives from Syracuse and more seafood than you can name, all served in Carthaginian glassware and Roman pottery. In the middle of the circle burns a great fire that fills the room with a warm glow.\n\n\nThe strange thing, however, is that Circe is sitting all alone at one of the dinner tables, surrounded by a herd of pigs. Half emptied plates and spilled cups of wine diminish the otherwise superb setting. You approach her as if you are unaware of her malignant intentions. 'My graceful hostess, I hope I am not too late to attend to your dinner. I am feeling better after a quick rest and I would hate to leave without seeing you again. The rest of my men are tending to chores on board of my ship but they will join us in a while.'\n\n\nShe looks at you suspiciously, trying to gauge your intention, but you manage to fool her. 'Very well my noble guest, please join me at my table. Your companions are resting upstairs, I'm afraid that they have eaten a little but too much. but who can blame them, the food is delicious. Please, try some, I'll fill a plate for you if it pleases you. But first, let us drink to your health.'\n\n\nShe gives you a cup of wine. You accept it gracefully, acting as if you didn't catch her sly smile. As you raise your glass you proclaim: 'And to your health as well, fair hostess, that we may drink to your good intentions.'\n\n\nAfter these words you drain your cup. The wine is the sweetest, most delicious drink you have ever tasted. The honey that is made painstakingly by the smallest bees and is the sweetest thing known in the Greek world, and when one eats it one cannot but forget his troubles for a brief while. Even that cannot match the wine you are tasting right now. However, the sweetness of the wine cannot completely hide the taste of unknown herbs.\n\n\nCirce speaks to you with a sweet voice: 'Do you like the wine, my noble guest? Isn't it the sweetest thing you have ever tasted? I keep it specifically for my most valued guests. Too bad though that it bewitches the senses, making one unable to fight off the winged sleep. Unable to defend oneself.'\n\n\nShe rises from her seat and walks towards you, holding a wooden wand in her hand. She taps your head gently with her wand and backs away, awaiting the effects of her magic powers. When nothing happens she raises her hands to the heavens and speaks to you in an astonished voice: 'How is this possible? Why are you still a human?' she suddenly stops speaking, you can see comprehension in her eyes,'of course I should have known, it's HIM all over again.'\n\n\nWhen you try to ask her who she means she interrupts you, paying no attention to your presence whatsoever she continues her furious contemplation: 'A whole year he and his men stayed at my house. A whole year he passed with me, but he had to leave because he missed his home and his wife! His MORTAL wife! I would have given him anything, I would have even made him immortal! But he left me, taking my heart with him.'\n\n\nWhen you once more try to ask who she is talking about she sneers at you: 'Like you don't know him: that Ithacan, who stranded here when he sailed from Troy. The one cursed by the earthshaking Poseidon.' She bursts into tears. 'But you remind me of him, yes, you even look a but like him.'\n\n\nShe walks towards you, having a strange look in your eyes. You quickly stand up from your seat and walk away from her, keeping her inside your vision at all times. Circe extends her arms towards you. 'Please noble hero, please let me embrace you. I have just felt so lonely, all alone here on my island, with only these pigs to keep me company. Could you at least do me this honour? I promise I'll turn your men back to their human forms.'", "action_results": [{"action": "You just don't trust this witch, this could be a trick. You quickly back away and run back towards the ship, leavind a baffled Circe behind.", "result": "The remaining crew member ask you about their companions when you return to the ship alone. Since it's no use lying about it, you tell them the whole truth, all the things that happened in the accursed mansion of Circe, including your escape. You see the faces of your cew members twist as you tell them you left their friends behind, but they don't say anything about it.\n\n\nThe rest of the day you do your best to try to ignore the tense atmosphere on board of the ship. As the sun gives way to the starry night sky you curl up on your sleeping mat, feeling the emptiness of the ship pressing on your shoulders. Your dreams are troubled. Images of the events of the past day are flashing through your mind, bringing guilt along with them. The golden glow of a divine presence this time does not relieve you of your troubled thoughts. The angry image of the cloudgatherer Zeus pops into your mind. A crown made of lightning bolts rests upon his grey hair, twisting and contorting as a nest of angry snakes.\n\n\n'Cowardly bard, despicable craven, shame of Athens. Does it feel good, leaving your friends and comrades behind? You were chosen to rescue the people of Greece, yet you don't even try to rescue those you travel with. You despise me, coward.' you could swear he grows while he scowls at you and while you struggle to think of an answer his angry face looms over you. 'We, the immortal gods have decided upon your fate, and we have found you unworthy for the task we gave you. We have decided you will have to leave this world.'\n\n\nRoaring thunder appears over your head as the immortal kings walks away from you. You feel as if your burning up, as if a thousand knives plunge into your flesh. It feels as if your torment lasts for ages. The cold embrace of death finally relieves you of your agony.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "What harm could a simple embrace do? You decide to grant her this one favour, also for the sake of your men.", "result": "You feel Circe's hot tears falling upon your shoulders as you give her the embrace she desires. Between her sobs she speaks to you, still holding you captive in her embrace: 'You know, I really loved that man. But I realize that he won't come back. You are not him and you will never be able to replace him in my heart. At least he was clever, and you aren't. He would never have fallen for such a transparent trap.'\n\n\nYou see bronze glimmering in the corner of your eye. As you realize what Circe is planning to do you try to wrestle free from her grip, but it is to no avail. The love-maddened goddess has taken of of the knives from the dining tables and makes sure you never leave her mansion again. The marble floor feel cold against your skin as your red life force is being drained from your body, the beautiful white floor turning slowly red.\n\n\nBefore you trade in the mortal world for the underworld you see Circe playing with the bloody knife, muttering incomprehensibly to herself.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You still don't trust her. She still remains a witch after all. On the other hand: you need to rescue your men. You decide to embrace her, after she swears by the immortal gods she won't harm you or your men.", "result": "She smirks at you. 'Hmpf, I guess you're not that foolish after all.' you see a bronze knife falling from her hand. 'You really are like him. But I guess you have to go too, huh? Why are the gods so cruel? But I'll keep my promise, I'll turn your friends back to their human forms. Although, to be honest: I like them more as pigs.'\n\n\nThe next half hour she goes through the big hall, tapping each and every pig on their heads with her wand and muttering incantations. Finally, all your companions are returned to their original selves. Afterwards, Circe approaches you. 'My noble hero I understand I've caused you and your friends a lot of trouble, and I am deeply sorry for it. Please, let me make it up to you by letting you stay here for a while, to rest and to regain your strength for the rest of your journey. I promise by the immortal gods that I won't harm any of you, else they may take my soul and lock it away in the Tartaros, the deepest pit of the underworld.\n\n\nAfter a quick decision with your men you decide to accept Circe's offer and spend some time on her island to regain your strength. Your men each get spacious rooms assigned, but you sleep in Circe's own chambers. You dine exquisitely each day (although you are never served pork) and Circe is the perfect host, with no intentions whatsoever of hurting anyone. The time between meals you spend with Circe, walking on her beautiful island, playing games beneath a pergola while enjoying the cool breeze from the sea or take a swim in the beautiful blue waves. Everything is just so perfect, you never want to leave.\n\n\nHowever, eventually the time comes when the gods have grown tired of waiting for you to resume your journey and they send Hermes to command you so. As you and Circe reach the top of the marble staircase that leads to her mansion you see the keen-eyed messenger of the gods standing before you. 'Noble bard, the immortal gods have sent me to bring you a message. You must continue your journey to Sparta or Greece will be destroyed by the flames of war. I advice you to do as they say.'\n\n\nYou look to Circe, ready to say goodbye, but when you see her sad but beautiful face you hesitate. Seeing the hesitation in your eyes she speaks to you despairingly: 'Please, my noble hero, you do not have to leave me. Stay here and live here with me until the end of days. You like it here, you said so yourself during one of our walks. Please... please consider it.'\n\n\nHermes speaks sternly to you: 'Remember your journey, mortal. Remember those who depend on you. You have to leave, now!'\n\n\nTorn between your duty and your newly found love for Circe you decide...", "action_results": [{"action": "to stay with Circe", "result": "You are standing on top of the marble stairs, watching your ship sail away in the distance. With a sad heart you said goodbye to the men you've experienced so much together with. Circe offered them to stay, but they declined. Like Cyrus told you before they left: 'However you put it, we remain mercenaries. The seas and the battle are our homes, we weren't made to stay put in one place.' Circe left you alone, to say your goodbyes and to reminisce about your past adventures, but now she walks towards you. 'Come, my love, please let happiness drive the sadness from your heart.'\n\n\nYou follow her advice and try to forget the sad goodbye. You are happy here, on this beautiful island with the woman you love, yet you keep this doubt hidden into the deepest parts of your heart that you should have continued your journey.\n\n\n---\n\n\nYears go by and you and Circe still live happily together on the island. One more time Hermes has come to you, pleading you to continue the task given to you by the gods but you just dismissed him. Athena visited you in your dreams once, telling you the largest part of the Greek States were engulfed by war, but wishing you good luck and much happiness none the less. Life has been blissful to you, you can't even remember the last time you were sad. You've truly left your past life behind you and you and Circe live happily together until the end of time itself.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "to continue your journey", "result": "You watch Circe's island growing smaller and smaller until it has finally sunken beneath the horizon. You said your goodbyes to Circe with a troubled heart, promising her you'll come back while deep down you knew you wouldn't. Circe has given you new supplies so you can resume your journey to Sparta.\n\n\nOn top of the white marble steps, with the sun setting beneath the horizon in the east, you gave each other your farewell kisses. The creeping chill of the evening marked your parting. Circe waited on the beach until your ship set sail, watching you as you watched her. But now you are both out of sight of each other. The dream has ended, your break is over, and now you have to continue your journey.\n\n\nThe winds are blowing again and the stars are clear, giving guidance to your crew. Shaking your sad thoughts away you walk towards the navigator: 'Set sail towards Sparta, don't make any stops until we've arrived at their docks.'\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Of course, this is easier said than done...", "result": "Either the gods have not done testing you or your navigator is just really incompetent, but a month later you still haven't reached Sparta. The supplies given to you by Circe, which should have been enough to reach Sparta, are all but gone. Your crew is faced with near starvation. You hear the desperate prayers of the crew members, praying for food or rain, and it pains you that you are unable to aid them.\n\n\nEven Cyrus, who supported you throughout your journey is starting to doubt. He walks up to you with a worried face: 'Noble customer, and dear friend, I have stood by you during the hard times we've encountered on this journey but now I am starting to lose hope. I thought you were aided by the gods on this journey, you have those dreams, right? But what now, are the gods testing us, have they abandoned us and left us to die here on the wine-coloured waves?'\n\n\n'I wish I had an answer for you, I really do, but I just don't know. I wish I knew a way to get things right, but I don't. Our fate is now in the hands of the gods. I'm sorry, but my advice is: have faith in the gods, our journey is righteous and the gods will help us. Let us sleep for now, let our minds wander into the realm of dreams and forget about our horrible situation, at least for a moment.'\n\n\nAnd so you curl up once again on your sleeping mat, your belly rumbling and your mind troubled. But as you predicted before long your mind departs to the realm of dreams. You are walking across a shadowy island, inhabited by the shadows of oxen. The shadowy grass feel surprisingly soft beneath your ghost-feet. The shining image of Athena approaches you, accompanied by a solemn looking owl. 'Great bard, pride of Athens, you have come a far way since the day you first saw us. The immortal gods have always watched you on your journey and they always will. It pleases us to see you have not lost your faith in the immortal gods, even after so much hardship. However, your trials have not yet come to an end. Tomorrow you will reach the island of Trinacria, a sacred island belonging to the sun-god Helios. Whatever you do, do not disturb the cattle of Helios.'\n\n\nWith these words the wise Athena leaves.", "action_results": [{"action": "Trinacria", "result": "You are violently awoken by a crew member, shaking you enthusiastically. As you struggle to remember just where you are you hear him speak to you: '... 've arrived at an island, sir. No, but not just an island, a fertile island. Fertile, yes, with lots of oxen walking upon it. And fresh water! Lots of it.'\n\n\nYou grumble. 'Calm yourself down. Can someone please explain me what is going on, calmly?'\n\n\nAnother crew member, an older man with grey stripes through his hair, approaches you: 'Our prayers have been heard, sir. This morning our navigator spotted a large island, with lush meadows and filled with oxen! A small party went ashore and they reported seeing herds of oxen and pools of fresh water. We have been saved, sir, we have been saved!'\n\n\nYou quickly jump up from your sleeping mat and rush to the dinghies, trying to prevent the crew from leaving the ship. 'Listen to me, all of you. Whatever you may think, however hungry you are, do not, I repeat, do not harm these oxen. You may drink as much of the water as you like but the oxen must remain unharmed. They are the property of the sun-god Helios. Eating them will have dire consequences.'\n\n\nBut despite your attempts, the crew doesn't listen, your pleas get lost in the sea of gleaful shouts from the crew. Their ears plugged by hunger and thirst they slaughter the first oxen that catches their view, hardly taking time to roast the meat they gorge themselves, slaughtering even more oxen as their stomachs command them to. You despairingly gaze at this scene, fearing that this means the end of your journey, and possibly of your lives.\n\n\nCyrus approaches you, his chin gleaming with fat. 'Why the sad face, we finally have filled stomachs again?'\n\n\n'These were the sacred oxen of Helios, the god of the sun. the gods specifically, specifically warned me. But now all is lost.'\n\n\nYou sigh heavily and grab fistfuls of hair with your hands.\n\n\n'Not every dream is a true one, sir. How could something like this not be a sign of the gods. They heard us beg for food and so they sent us these oxen. You seem hungry yourself sir, I bet there is still some food left, why don't you try some? I promise you you'll immediately feel better.'", "action_results": [{"action": "Maybe he is right, what if your dream was just that: a dream? You decide to try some of the meat.", "result": "Cyrus was right: you do feel a lot better. After you tried some of the meat you couldn't control yourself and you ate as much as you could before your stomach was completely filled. Either it was due to the hunger or to the godly nature of the oxen but it was the best meat you have ever tasted in your life. After washing it down with some fresh water from a nearby spring you returned to the ship.\n\n\nNow you lie on your sleeping mat, gazing at the stars, feeling content about your filled stomach. Your attention is caught by a brightly shining star. Since you started your journey in Athens you have learned a lot about the stars from the navigator of the ship, since the stars guide ships at night sailors know a lot about the constellations. This star, however, you have never seen before. If you didn't know better you could swear it is shining brighter and brighter.\n\n\nAfter a couple of minutes your other companions notice this star too. You hear confused talk among the men, every one of them trying to guess just which of the countless stars it is. Deciding you'll won't find out any time soon you close your eyes, trying to catch some sleep. The strange thing is, however, that you are able to see it, even through your closed eyelids. When you open your eyes again the star has almost quadrupled in size and is almost shining as brightly as the sun. It's almost as if you can feel the heat coming off of it.\n\n\nWhen the truth about this star finally hits you it's already too late. Tons of flaming rock crash into your ship with a speed unlike anything in this world, even the swift eagle couldn't match it. Men and wood burn alike as the flaming wrath of Helios reaches them.\n\n\n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "No matter how hungry you are you don't give in to the temptation. You go ashore, but you only drink some water to settle your rumbling stomach.", "result": "You are lying on your sleeping mat, trying to ignore the sounds coming from your stomach. You hear laughing coming from the crew members, contents men with filled stomachs are talking loudly to each other. You try to take your mind of food by gazing at the stars. Your attention is caught by a particularly brightly shining one. Since you started your journey in Athens you have learned a lot about the stars from the navigator of the ship, since the stars guide ships at night sailors know a lot about the constellations. This star, however, you have never seen before. If you didn't know better you could swear it is shining brighter and brighter.\n\n\nAfter a couple of minutes your other companions notice this star too. You hear confused talk among the men, every one of them trying to guess just which of the countless stars it is. Deciding you'll won't find out any time soon you close your eyes, trying to catch some sleep. The strange thing is, however, that you are able to see it, even through your closed eyelids. When you open your eyes again the star has almost quadrupled in size and is almost shining as brightly as the sun. It's almost as if you can feel the heat coming off of it.\n\n\nWhen the truth finally hits you you realize it's already to late. The heat from the flaming comet has already set fire to the sails. You close your eyes and wait for the end...\n\n\nAnd suddenly you feel as if an invisible hand smacks into your side, sending you flying through the air. You feel the cold waves of the seas crashing onto your body as you are thrown of the ship. As you open your eyes in shock you witness the destruction of your ship. Men and wood are burned alike as the flaming tons of rock smash into them. A piece of driftwood comes floating by and you grab it tightly. Desperation takes control of your heart as you see your companions burned before your eyes. The screams of the dying are terrifying. You try to block everything out, try to make everything leave, all misery and suffering, but it just won't work. Eventually all noises fade and the fires die out. You pass out from pure strain.", "action_results": [{"action": "You feel alone, drifting through darkness.", "result": "The darkness around me is lifting.\n\n\nAm I dead?\n\n\nWhat happened to the ship?\n\n\nWhere am I?\n\n\nWhat happened to my friends?\n\n\nI guess they all died...\n\n\nWhy have I survived?\n\n\nI'm floating, moving on the waves.\n\n\nYet, I feel the soft ground beneath me.\n\n\nDistant voices... Am I in Hades?\n\n\nI can hear the wind blowing in the distance.\n\n\nBut why can't I see anything?\n\n\nCan't move either.\n\n\nHow did I get here?\n\n\nAh, my head, it feels as if I've been hit by Polyphemos.\n\n\nHmmm, the darkness is returning.\n\n\nMaybe I'll go back to sleep...", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Tell the crew to ready their weapons", "result": "'Okay, we are about to be attacked by some kind of monsters. Prepare your weapons, we will not fall today!' However, the crew doesn't listen, they are still under the spell of the strange song.\n\n\nYour mind becomes clouded once again as the song fills your mind.\n\n\nYou struggle to keep a hold of yourself as the song becomes louder, you must be getting closer to the source.\n\n\nSuddenly the ships shakes and cracks as it hits sharp rocks that lie beneath the water's surface.\n\n\nThe skies darken as strange beast, half women, half bird, appear from the skies. The hypnotized crew members put up no fight as the women drag them of the deck of the ship. As one of the sirens sets it's eyes upon you, you are not able to draw your sword.\n\n\nThe last thing you hear before your soul is sent to the realm of Hades is her beautiful, bone-chilling song.", "action_results": []}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story34.json b/data/scraper/stories/story34.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca7ff32 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story34.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=7567", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Geek:\n\n1. A person regarded as foolish or clumsy.\n\n2. A person who is single-minded or accomplished in scientific or technical pursuits, but is felt to be socially inept.\n\n3. A carnival performer whose show consists of bizarre and disgusting acts.\n\n\nYour breath stinks from the foul things you\u2019ve been eating and the rest of you stinks from not bathing in who knows when.\n\nYour head hurts from the cheap moonshine you\u2019ve been getting \u201cpaid\u201d in.\n\nRubes often throw stuff at you and spit on you.\n\nMost of the other Carnies find you utterly repulsive and avoid you, a couple of them just abuse you for various reasons.\n\nOn a good day, only the Pinheads come to your cell and taunt you with their gibbering laughs and mongoloid chatter.\n\nYou have absolutely no worth as a human being, you get no respect from others, and you have no respect for yourself\u2026and why should you? You are the lowest form of life in Carney society. You\u2019re not a real performer; what you do can\u2019t really be considered a skill. You\u2019re not even a real freak. At least a deformed freak can evoke an emotion of horror, or pity, or even admiration for overcoming their condition. You weren\u2019t born \u201cthis way\u201d. You chose to do this. All you evoke is disgust and revulsion. At best you\u2019re laughed at and not in the good way like those pervert clowns you work with.\n\nFuck all that \u201cWildman of Borneo\u201d shit that the Ringmaster tries to tell all the rubes. You\u2019re little more than a bum with a \u201cjob\u201d. A degrading job that involves you to debase yourself, all for the amusement and shock value of others, but hey it keeps a \u201croof\u201d over your head and you pleasantly drunk enough to just barely forget how utterly pathetic your life is.\n\nYou are the GEEK.\n\nYou wake up to a bucket of piss being thrown in your face. Not the first time and certainly won\u2019t be the last.\n\n\u201cYou like the taste of that Geek? Get up Geek! The Ring Master wants to see you!\u201d Charley orders then he throws the empty bucket at your head. The comical sound it makes hitting your skull and the pain it causes makes Charley laugh. Then he jabs you a couple times with his pointed stick.\n\nMidgets can be so cruel\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Go see the Ring Master", "result": "\u201cAgh! Alright, alright! Stop poking me\u2026what day is it?\u201d\n\u201cNever mind all that geek! Get going you know how the Ring Master doesn\u2019t like being kept waiting! Phew! You smell even more disgusting than usual! I guess that\u2019s one way to keep Ajax from killing you, he\u2019d probably vomit his guts out before he could lay a hand on you\u2026then you could lick it up for the rubes! Ha ha! Move it Geek!\u201d\n\nCharley prods you with a sharp stick periodically on your way to the Ring Master\u2019s trailer until you arrive at which point, Atlas stops the both of you.\n\n\u201cStop! What business do the both of you have here?\u201d\n\u201cGoddamnit you fuckin\u2019 one eyed freak! We go through this all the fucking time and its getting REALLY old! You just saw me come out of the Ring Master\u2019s trailer earlier today when he sent me to get the Geek, you know damn well what we\u2019re both doing here!\u201d\n\nIgnoring Charley\u2019s comments Atlas looks down at you and points.\n\n\u201cYou may enter, but the Ring Master doesn\u2019t need to see you again, so you may not.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, whatever enjoy the smell.\u201d Charley says and mumbles something to himself while leaving the area.\n\nYou barely make it up the little steps to the trailer, but you do. You\u2019re finally starting to gather your wits together; your head still hurts though and you\u2019ve just realize you haven\u2019t had a drink yet. What a terrible feeling. You open the door.\n\n\u201cClose the door, you\u2019re letting all the sunlight in.\u201d the Ring Master orders from behind his desk. She\u2019s siting in his chair, but has her back turned to you.\n\u201cUh you wanted to see me?\u201d\n\u201cOf course\u2026(Sniff sniff) you really haven\u2019t been taking care of yourself. If anything you\u2019ve become even more repulsive than when I first took you in. Remember that day?\u201d\n\u201cUm, yeah I think\u2026no, no I don\u2019t. I mean kind of\u2026 I forget things.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m not surprised; you\u2019re constantly drinking that swill Charley makes. I am surprised you haven\u2019t gone blind yet though. Oh well what you insist on doing to yourself is of little concern to me, all I require is your obedience. You are thankful for all I have provided for you aren\u2019t you?\u201d\n\u201cOh yeah. Sure I am.\u201d\n\u201cYou seem to be one of the few nowadays then. There are some though that are ungrateful for things I\u2019ve done for them, they plan to betray me and everything this carnival stands for. They plan to change the natural order of things. Can you imagine what might happen to this carnival if I wasn\u2019t here? What might happen to you?\u201d\n\nYou attempt to think about this scenario, but instead you just stand there because you can\u2019t really form anything in your mind because it hurts really bad, you\u2019ve been sober too damn long, and it\u2019s about to get even longer as the Ring Master seems intent on bombarding you with talk as he finally swivels around in her chair. That pale androgynous face of the Ring Master\u2019s is displaying a look of seriousness as usual.\n\n\u201cNothing good I can assure you. Which is why I\u2019m putting YOU in charge of this task.\u201d\n\u201cHuh? What task?\u201d\n\u201cWhy ensuring the survival of the carnival of course.\u201d\n\u201dWhat!? Me?! Why? How!? I\u2019m not qualified! Can\u2019t you or Charley do it?\u201d\n\u201cI fear I\u2019ve done all I\u2019ve can. I mean I\u2019ve provided all of THIS to everyone here. I\u2019ve given them purpose and a life. If that isn\u2019t enough for them, then my words aren\u2019t going to make a difference at this point. And as for Charley, well\u2026I\u2019m sure even in your usual state of drunkenness you\u2019re aware that he has his own plans for this carnival.\u201d\n\u201cI guess\u2026but agh, it\u2019s too early for all this\u2026why me? I mean what am I supposed to do? I\u2019m just the Geek.\u201d\n\u201cYes, and that\u2019s exactly why I\u2019m choosing you. You have no motive, you have no agenda, you have no friends, and as such you would probably be the best candidate to convince others to resist change and keep the status quo.\u201d\n\u201cYou have to be joking! Nobody\u2019s going to listen to me! I\u2019m the fucking Geek!\u201d\n\u201cYou might be surprised, you have far more potential than you give yourself credit for\u2026perhaps you\u2019ll even change some perspectives, or maybe not. The choice is yours, because the fate of THIS carnival is resting solely on your actions, you can no longer afford to hide from the world in a bottle and a cage if you wish to keep your current life. It is time for you to take some responsibility, its time to repay the debt you owe me. You have until show time.\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026\u201d\n\u201cNow leave me, I wish to be alone.\u201d\n\nThe Ring Master swivels his chair back to its original position. You head back outside, where upon Atlas blocks it again with his massive body.\n\nNever before in your life have you been put in this kind of position of responsibility, (Not that you can remember anyway) but you\u2019re going to have to do something, the question is what exactly?", "action_results": [{"action": "Obey the Ring Master", "result": "You feel you don\u2019t really have a choice in this situation. The Ring Master is in charge and whatever he says goes and you DO owe a lot to her. As bad as it can be here sometimes, it would probably be worse if you didn\u2019t have the protection of the Carnival.\n\nAs tempted as you are to get a drink to get you through this test you have before you, you realize you need to stay sober for this. What a terrible thing. Now you have to figure out who you need to convince.\n\nThe Freaks are firmly on the side of the Ring Master, so you don\u2019t need to talk to them. That just leaves the Midgets and the Normals, both of those present some problems.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to convince the Midgets", "result": "Charley leads the Midgets and you doubt if he\u2019s going \u201cfall in line\u201d and even if he claimed he was, he\u2019d just be lying. You might even be putting yourself in great danger by speaking to him directly about this, however you know the Midgets don\u2019t really care for Charley, so if you could get him out of the way somehow, they might be more willing to ally with the Ring Master.\n\nYou decide to \u201ctest the waters\u201d by speaking to one of the few Midgets (Actually the only one) that\u2019s somewhat less hostile towards you. You see Bob working on hammering tent stakes in the ground and go up to him.\n\n\u201cHey Bob, can I talk to you?\u201d\n\u201cAw hell Geek, I ain\u2019t got no money for you to get fucking drunk! Just go steal the liquor from that sonofabitch Charley and take your goddamn chances!\u201d he says barely paying attention to you.\n\u201cNo, its not that\u2026so you uh think Charley\u2019s a son of a bitch huh?\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t think it, I know it. Everyone does.\u201d\n\u201cSo why do you guys follow him?\u201d\n\u201cBecause he does make things better for us. Better than the Ring Master did anyway.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but what if he\u2019s not the best choice to lead you guys, I mean\u2026\u201d\n\nBob raises one eyebrow and focuses all of his attention on you now.\n\n\u201cWhat the fuck are you talkin\u2019 about Geek? You seem to be awfully interested with matters that don\u2019t concern you.\u201d Bob states raising his hammer menancingly.\n\u201cWell um\u2026I just heard that\u2026um Charley\u2026I mean\u2026look there\u2019s some shit gonna go down and the Ring Master wants me to get people on his side!\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re unsure of what Bob\u2019s going to do about your revelation. You expect the worst, but for once luck is on your side.\n\n\u201cLook Geek, I ain\u2019t gonna lie to ya, not many of us like Charley, and sure, he\u2019s a fucking tyrant, but he gets things done, I dunno he\u2019s kinda like that guy in Germany, except shorter. However, if he wasn\u2019t around, we\u2019d go back to being second class citizens again and why? We DO keep this place running. The Ring Master claims he cares about us, but it doesn\u2019t seem that way to us. We\u2019re under appreciated. And if Charley does have ideas about taking over, then we\u2019re behind him. Maybe the whole place would be run a lot better with him in charge anyway. AND I suggest you don\u2019t talk to any other dwarves about this, you\u2019ll find that you\u2019ll get the same answer and they might just feel the need to tell Charley about the discussion and I don\u2019t think that would be very good for you.\u201d\n\u201cSo there\u2019s nothing I can do or say to change your mind?\u201d\n\u201cGoddamn it, weren\u2019t you fuckin\u2019 listening Geek? I said no! Not unless you found someway of replacing Charley with someone a little more even tempered and with his business savvy.\u201d\n\u201cWell, why don\u2019t one of you midg\u2026I mean dwarves do it?\u201d\n\u201c(Sigh) Because most of us are simple laborers. We just wanna do our job with as little hassle and relax when we can, we don\u2019t wanna be worried about extra shit. Let Charley worry about it since he wants it so bad. Besides if you haven\u2019t noticed he\u2019s got a mean streak a mile wide and that fuckin\u2019 muscle bound freak Ajax around him all the time.\u201d\n\u201cSo there\u2019s nobody who\u2019d want to take Charley\u2019s place?\u201d\n\u201cNope. The only one I can think of who\u2019d even have the intelligence of running the criminal activity here smoothly anyway would be his overgrown girlfriend Salina. Now her I wouldn\u2019t mind working under if you know what I mean! Hah! Now get the fuck outta here Geek, I got work to do and your smell is gonna stick to my clothes for days! Get!\u201d\n\nYou back away from Bob before he hits you with his hammer or kicks you in the shin.\n\nIt wasn\u2019t what you expected, but perhaps Bob has subtlety shown you a way to get the midgets to ally with the Ring Master, but of course this means talking with Salina. That could be even more risky though, considering she\u2019s the object of Charley\u2019s \u201clove\u201d. Not to mention she doesn\u2019t particularly like you.\n\nBut then again, who does?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go talk to Salina", "result": "You cautiously approach Salina\u2019s trailer, you\u2019re nervous as hell. You stop and hide behind a nearby barrel when you see someone coming out. It\u2019s Sasha. She looks like she\u2019s been crying, probably about Ajax no doubt. Salina seems to be telling her something and then hugs her before closing the door. When Sasha leaves you knock on Salina\u2019s door. She answers.\n\n\u201cLook, I told you\u2026UGH! Its you! Get the fuck outta here Geek! No amount of money is gonna make me degrade myself for your festering ass! And you\u2019re upsetting my snakes with your odor!\u201d\n\u201cNo, it\u2019s not that, I really gotta talk to you.\u201d\n\u201cYou don\u2019t have anything to say that I wanna waste my time OR my sense of smell on, so\u2026\u201d\n\u201cPlease it s really important! It\u2019s about Charley and the future of the Carnival!\u201d\n\nSalina raises her eyebrow.\n\n\u201cHmm, very well, but you\u2019re not coming in here, let\u2019s go someplace secluded where nobody can see me associating with you.\u201d\n\nYou and Salina walk to a nearby spot in the wilderness (Separately of course) to talk where you explain the situation to Salina.\n\n\u201cYeah, so what does all this mean to me? If Charley takes over I win and if the Ring Master stays in power I still win. I don\u2019t see why I should get involved in this power struggle.\u201d Salina says unemotionally.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re not looking at the big picture. As it stands now you got some measure of freedom, but if Charley wins, this place will cease being a Carnival and become a crime ring. And while you might do alright gift and money wise, you\u2019ll be Charley\u2019s girlfriend full time at that point with little freedom. You know he\u2019s never going to let you do anything without his approval if he\u2019s in power. And if the Ring Master wins, chances are the criminal activity here is gonna be severely diminished without Charley to run it, meaning you\u2019ll probably be making less money.\u201d\n\u201cOkay\u2026but don\u2019t you want the Ring Master to win?\u201d\n\u201cYes, but she needs allies and I\u2019m trying to get the midgets to ally with him and they won\u2019t if Charley\u2019s in charge of them.\u201d\n\u201cSo I don\u2019t understand, what exactly are you proposing? You\u2019re kind of all over the place here.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m saying I want YOU to take over Charley\u2019s position. You run all his business dealings.\u201d\n\u201cWhat? You\u2019re crazy Geek.\u201d\n\u201cWhy? You\u2019re intelligent; surely you probably know all of Charley\u2019s secrets.\u201d\n\u201cWell THAT\u2019S true. The little fucker insists on bragging about everything after sex, but what makes you think the midgets will follow me? I mean I\u2019m a Normal.\u201d\n\u201cPlease, you\u2019re a tall beautiful woman, the midgets will love you, didn\u2019t you see Wizard of Oz? Just as long as you promise to uphold all the things Charley did like protection from being bullied by rubes and keeping their payment the same, I don\u2019t think they\u2019ll mind you in charge instead of Charley. Think about it, YOU could be in charge of the whole operation, and it\u2019s not like the Ring Master will bother you as long as you don\u2019t try to screw with the everyday Carnival workings.\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019d never do that, the Carnival has been like a home to me\u2026I\u2026\u201d\n\nSalina seems to stop herself before she displays too much emotion to you.\n\n\u201cAlright Geek, I\u2019m willing to entertain this idea, but you have to do something for ME first.\u201d\n\u201cOkay, what?\u201d\n\u201cYou gotta get rid of Randal.\u201d\n\u201cWhat? Why? What did he do?\u201d\n\u201cTo me? Nothing, but he\u2019s competition and I can\u2019t have that.\u201d\n\u201cCompetition for what?\u201d\n\u201cNevermind, just get rid of him. Think of it this way, if you get him out of the picture, you\u2019ll also eliminate the leader of the third faction here which would really cement the Ring Master\u2019s supremacy here. Surely that should be incentive enough?\u201d\n\u201cYou want me to kill him?!\u201d\n\u201cLook, I don\u2019t care HOW you get rid of him, just get rid of him before show time. If you do that, you can tell the midgets that I\u2019ll be taking over Charley\u2019s position when the time comes. Now don\u2019t speak to me again until you do this.\u201d\n\nLooks like you got MORE work ahead of you and you really don\u2019t know how you\u2019re supposed to get rid of Randal. You doubt if just asking him to leave is going to work, and while killing him would solve the problem, it\u2019s not really that simple to just kill a man even if you had it in you.\n\nYou could really use a drink\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk to Randal", "result": "You can\u2019t kill Randal, so you\u2019re going to have to just try to convince him to leave\u2026somehow. You think perhaps Madam Orbec can help, since she has the most contact with him.\n\nYou approach Madam Orbec\u2019s tent which carries an air of creepiness about it. When you enter, you see her lying on the floor convulsing.\n\n\u201cMadam! Are you alright?!\u201d you run to her attempting to pick her up, but she pushes you away.\n\n\u201cGEEK! Take your filthy hands off of me! My body is for the spirits only! You will not molest my person lest I call down their wrath upon you! Though I\u2019m not sure what more they could do to such a pathetic soul such as yourself, and death would be a mercy.\u201d\n\u201cSorry, I was just trying to help.\u201d\n\u201cLiar! You sought me out, to help yourself! But still\u2026your mission is a somewhat good intentioned one\u2026even if you are in the dark about some of it\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWhat do you mean?\u201d\n\u201cThat\u2019s for the more enlightened to know, but I\u2019m sure you\u2019ll find out eventually, assuming we decide to help you that is\u2026\u201d\n\u201cHow do you know that I want your help?\u201d\n\u201cI see what the spirits see! And the spirits see all! You\u2019re easier to read than an open book! You want to know how to get rid of Randal.\u201d\n\u201cHow\u2026nevermind. So how do I get rid of him? No\u2026don\u2019t tell me YOU want me to do something as well!\u201d\n\u201cActually getting rid of Randal would serve me\u2026he wouldn\u2019t be around hounding me and the spirits all the time for one thing. The only reason I prefer him around is that he is a balancer of this carnival\u2026but we see things are about to change\u2026great changes\u2026things would be better if he wasn\u2019t around any longer.\u201d\n\u201cSo?\u201d\n\nMadam Orbec begins to talk to herself.\n\n\u201cShould we? Maybe. What about them? Later. Yeah, let\u2019s do it.\u201d\n\u201cMadam?\u201d\n\u201cTell Randal to come to my tent, I will get rid of him. I shall tell him something that will give him cause to leave immediately. He won\u2019t even be here for showtime. You have the word of the spirits and Madam Orbec. Now leave me, we must prepare.\u201d\n\nYou leave Madam Orbec\u2019s tent and go find Randal. When you do, he attempts to avoid you, but when you mention Madam Orbec wants to see him, he pushes you out of the way to meet her right away.\n\nYou follow him and watch Orbec\u2019s tent, after awhile Randal leaves and heads back to his own tent. Orbec also exits and nods at you. You go back to Salina and tell her the news.\n\nSalina smiles and tells you everything has been set in motion, and she\u2019ll be ready. She then tells you to go tell the midgets.\n\nYou go back to Bob, who\u2019d forgotten all about your discussion with him. In fact you have to remind him what it was you even discussed.\n\n\u201cSo lemme get this straight Geek\u2026Salina\u2019s taking over the crime trade here?\u201d\n\u201cYeah, and she says everything will stay the same, the protection and the pay. All you gotta do is side with the Ring Master, after show time tonight.\u201d\n\u201c\u2026Alright Geek, I\u2019ll tell the rest of the dwarves. I just hope all of you fuckers know what you\u2019re doing, because I guarantee if we get fucked in any way in this arrangement, YOU will be the first to feel our wrath!\u201d\n\nYou hope so too, a lot of this riding on the \u201cword\u201d of everyone. You don\u2019t actually have any assurance by anyone that everything\u2019s going to go as planned. You don\u2019t tell the Ring Master that when you go back to his trailer though. (After getting Atlas\u2019 permission to enter of course) you just tell her that he\u2019ll have her allies when the time comes. The Ring Master seems confident in you and tells you to get ready for show time.\n\nYou spend your remaining time a little on edge, wondering if everything is going to work out. You really wish the Ring Master hadn\u2019t put all this pressure on you.\n\nThen show time arrives, everything goes pretty much the same except you\u2019re a little distracted the entire time until you notice Randal doesn\u2019t show up at all. You hope that\u2019s a good sign that your plan has worked.", "action_results": [{"action": "But the real show begins afterwards", "result": "A dark moonlit night.\n\nCharley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. The Ring Master has Atlas, and his usual allies, the Freaks are hanging in the darkness ready to strike if necessary. Most of the Normals though are nowhere to be seen. Your heart sinks\u2026the midgets have still sided with Charley and you get so worried that you puke up the sheep testicles and pigeon heads you consumed for your act.\n\n\u201cYour time has come Ring Master! No longer will you exploit us! I\u2019m taking over!\u201d\n\u201cSo you can exploit your own people of course. Charley, I\u2019ve put up with your delusions of grandeur long enough, it ends tonight. I have allies of my own, and you might find they are much more dedicated to me than yours are.\u201d\n\u201cIt won\u2019t work Ringy, I got more in common with my people than you ever will! Blood is thicker, and yours is going to run everywhere if you don\u2019t peaceably leave\u2026I\u2019m giving you this one chance you pale she-male.\u201d\n\u201cNot likely.\u201d\n\nAt this point all of the freaks come out of hiding. Charley orders an attack, but the rest of the midgets do nothing\u2026you cease worrying and Charley begins to get angry.\n\n\u201cWhat the fuck man? I told you fuckers to attack! I\u2019m your leader!\u201d\n\u201cNot anymore Charley\u2026we got a new one.\u201d Bob says.\n\u201cWho? HIM? This fucking hermaphrodite bitch?\u201d Charley yells pointing to the Ring Master.\n\u201cNo, this tattooed bitch.\u201d Bob says calmly where upon Salina appears petting a cobra lovingly which is wrapped around her arm.\n\u201cYes, this tattooed snake bitch to be precise. Give it up Charley; your time here is done. You don\u2019t have any allies anymore. I\u2019d suggest you and the muscle bound woman beater leave NOW.\u201d\n\u201cYou fucking back stabbing viper bitch\u2026\u201d Charley says in shock.\n\u201cHey fuck off cunt, fore I shove that snake up your ass!\u201d Ajax yells.\n\u201cYou\u2019re certainly welcome to try, here catch!\u201d\n\nSalina throws here cobra at Ajax, which lands on him, he squashes its head, but not before it bites him a couple times. He runs at Salina, but the midgets trip him up and hold him down as the poison takes effect. Salina then puts out his eye, with her stiletto heel before he succumbs leaving Charley all by himself.\n\n\u201cWell Charley, it seems all your grand plans have failed. You have nothing left. I\u2019d say there\u2019s no reason for you to stay. Atlas, if you would be so kind to escort this former employee of the premises\u2026\u201d\n\nWhen the Ring Master says that, it typically means \u201cAtlas, after you break his neck make sure the body is properly disposed of.\u201d\n\nAtlas grabs Charley who attempts to defend himself with his sharp stick, but instead it\u2019s taken from him and broken. Then Charley\u2019s spine is taken from him and broken. Atlas lumbers off in the darkness to get rid of Ajax and Charley\u2019s bodies.\n\n\u201cSo, I trust we\u2019ll have no problems Salina?\u201d The Ring Master asks.\n\u201cNo problems from me, I have all I need, or I soon will have.\u201d\n\u201cGood, I suggest you and your new friends get some rest, we got a big show tomorrow.\u201d\n\nWhile Salina and the munchkin brigade leave and the freaks disperse as well, the Ring Master calls you out.\n\n\u201cGeek, you may come out of hiding, I\u2019m sure you can see the danger is over, not that there ever was any.\u201d\n\u201cI can\u2019t believe it actually worked. Everything\u2026\u201d\n\u201cSee? I told you, you underestimated yourself. Not only did you save the Carnival, but you stabilized it even more. I told you, I saw potential even when there was none apparent. Do you still want to be a Geek? You could be so much more if you just put in the effort. Charley used to do all my leg work, but now that he\u2019s gone I need someone else to fit that role\u2026would you be interested? Keep in mind that this new job would require a whole lot more responsibility and significantly less drinking as I would need you in a better frame of mind.\u201d\n\nAt one time you\u2019d balk, but after seeing what you accomplished first hand, maybe you DO have potential. You accept and you\u2019re given Charley\u2019s old trailer.\n\nTime goes by and you stumble along the way with the first few months as you still have a really bad drinking problem, but fortunately the Ring Master is slightly understanding about that, and only sends Atlas to remind you ONCE to get it under control. (That incident really sets you on the straight and narrow) you get yourself cleaned up and actually become presentable. You\u2019re more of an organizer than a main event now, but you still go ahead and bite some chicken heads off every now and then for the kids.\n\nSalina is a pretty fair and even handed business woman when it comes to the being new leader of the midgets. Much more than Charley, and she also has Pervus and his clown crew eliminated during one night. Apparently they got rough with one of her girls. They were all found dead the next day. Nobody said anything outright, but the fact that little snake bites were found on their bodies was a pretty good idea who was responsible. However, the Ring Master said nothing since Pervus and his friends had it coming for a long time, not to mention with them gone things actually improved morale wise. (People tend to work better when their aren\u2019t evil demented clowns lurking around)\n\nYou also see Salina and Sasha get very close in a way that makes you tingle in the nether regions. Now you know why Salina wanted you to get rid of Randal. Without Ajax to kick her around anymore, Sasha probably would\u2019ve fell for Randal (You also found out Madam Orbec told him he needed to leave the Carnival to find some magic book in some Mayan ruins that the spirits commanded him to retrieve\u2026he never returned) but since he wasn\u2019t around, she ended up with Salina. They seem to be happy though.\n\nActually everyone at the Carnival seems to be a lot happier and more relaxed and it\u2019s all due to your actions.\n\nThe Ring Master has given you a second chance at life, a life with a whole hell of lot more meaning.\n\nYou\u2019ve gotten respect at last.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Kill Randal", "result": "You\u2019ll have to kill him. It\u2019s the only way, since he\u2019ll never listen to you. You need a drink to get you ready for this though.\n\nYou sneak over to Charley\u2019s still, thankfully it\u2019s not being manned right now. You down a couple of bottle of the toxic swill, spilling some of it on yourself. After you\u2019re sufficiently \u201cprepared\u201d you steal one of the midget\u2019s hammers and head to Randal\u2019s tent.\n\nIt\u2019s now or never\u2026\n\nYou enter Randal\u2019s tent which seems a lot larger on the inside than it does on the outside, but you figure it\u2019s the booze is effecting your perception. You see Randal getting dressed with his back to you. Excellent.\n\nYou creep as quietly as you can in your condition, step right behind him with the hammer raised up high and then\u2026\n\nHe disappears before your eyes!\n\nYou do a double take, thinking it\u2019s the booze again, but then you feel a tap on your shoulder, causing you to turn around to a fiery flash. Not very good in any case especially since Charley\u2019s brew that you spilled on yourself earlier makes you quite flammable. You run around his tent attempting to put yourself out.\n\n\u201cDidn\u2019t you think I could SMELL you approaching Geek?\u201d Randal says. \u201cI have no idea why you would attempt something so foolish as to try to kill me, but I\u2019ve always said the Carnival would be a lot better without the likes of you! TABAXINDOGA!\u201d\n\nWhatever Randal just said causes all your limbs to freeze up. The good news is you aren\u2019t on fire anymore, the bad news is you\u2019re turning to stone! Randal looks noticeably exhausted after casting his spells, but he\u2019s still holding all the cards.\n\n\u201cI hate to waste such power on you, especially before showtime. (Pant) it really takes a lot out of me, but sometimes such actions are necessary when being attacked. I\u2019ll have to inform Madam Orbec that the new spell she taught me works perfectly\u2026 I\u2019ll take that hammer, it\u2019ll come in handy.\u201d\n\nAs your body becomes completely stone, the last thing you see is Randal swinging the hammer at your head before it breaks into several pieces.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go convince the Normals instead", "result": "The Midgets are firmly in the camp of Charley. Your only hope is to convince the Normals and that\u2019s not going to be easy either. A lot of them don\u2019t like you and most of them are \u201cunified\u201d under Randal and he doesn\u2019t like you either.\n\nThe only thing you can of is to talk to Madam Orbec. She has the most contact with Randal, maybe you can get her help.\n\nYou approach Madam Orbec\u2019s tent which has an air of creepiness about it. You see her gazing into a crystal ball.\n\n\u201cGeek! You foul aura disturbs the spirits!\u201d\n\u201cUm, sorry\u2026but I need your\u2026\u201d\n\u201cYes, yes, yes, I know you want my help.\u201d\n\u201cHow did you know that?\u201d\n\u201cI see what the spirits see! And the spirits see all! You want me to convince Randal to convince the Normals to side with the Ring Master in the upcoming battle tonight!\u201d\n\u201cUh\u2026yeah.\u201d\n\u201cI suppose I could do that\u2026but I won\u2019t, at least not directly\u2026\u201d\n\u201cSo you\u2019re not going to help me?\u201d\n\u201cI didn\u2019t say that, the spirits say that you can\u2019t get something for nothing however\u2026since you seem to be in such a noble mood Geek, then you won\u2019t mind performing another noble deed. A deed that will help you as well as us.\u201d\n\u201cWell, what is it?\u201d\n\nMadam Orbec starts talking to herself.\n\n\u201cCould be a suicide mission. So? Yeah, no risk to us. What about the other thing? Will solve itself.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou must get rid of the beautiful Sasha\u2019s abusive boyfriend Ajax once and for all. Do this and we shall help you.\u201d Orbec says addressing you.\n\u201cWHAT?! How the hell am I supposed to do that? And why?\u201d\n\u201cDo not question the spirits\u2019 wisdom! Just DO! Now leave and don\u2019t return until you complete this task!\u201d\n\nYou exit Orbec\u2019s tent. You\u2019ve got an impossible job to do. Ajax is a vicious thug who beats you for fun on several occasions, there\u2019s no way you can beat him even if you had the killer instinct which you don\u2019t. You\u2019re going to need some help.", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk to Sasha", "result": "Maybe you can talk directly to Sasha about this. Surely since she\u2019s the one taking the abuse she\u2019d be for getting rid of Ajax. Maybe she\u2019ll even know some tips on weaknesses or something. You head to her trailer.\n\nShe answers the door and looks obviously disgusted.\n\n\u201cEw! What\u2019re you doing here Geek? Get outta here, you\u2019re stinky!\u201d\n\u201cWait Sasha, I got a proposal for ya!\u201d\n\u201cExcuse me?! This isn\u2019t Salina\u2019s trailer! And I doubt she\u2019d degrade herself for you either! Goodbye!\u201d\n\u201cWAIT! This is about Ajax! And about how to get rid of him for good!\u201d\n\nSasha suddenly stops trying to get rid of you and seems more willing to listen.\n\n\u201cHow?\u201d\n\u201cI dunno, but I\u2019ve seen how he treats you and it isn\u2019t right. Nobody does anything, well I\u2019m just saying I\u2019ve had enough of seeing him push everyone around, especially you!\u201d\n\nSasha looks a bit touched by your remark, but then quickly speaks.\n\n\u201cOkay look, he\u2019ll be coming soon, he always has a drink when he comes over, and I\u2019ll drug it. He\u2019ll get drowsy and fall asleep, BUT you\u2019ll have to finish him off. Many times I\u2019ve though about it, but I just can never bring myself to do it\u2026you\u2019ll have to do it. Please free me from this brute once and for all.\u201d\n\u201cI will Sasha.\u201d\n\u201cThank you\u2026I guess underneath the grime you\u2019re alright Geek\u2026now go hide by that barrel over there, I\u2019ll give the signal when he\u2019s asleep!\u201d\n\nYou quickly run over to the barrel and hide. Soon you see Ajax enter Sasha\u2019s trailer. While you wait, you can\u2019t believe what just happened. Sasha actually seemed nice to you. You\u2019ve never experienced that before. And could it be that you saw a glint of something in her eyes when she thanked you? Maybe after all this is over you and Sasha might have something. You never thought this could be possible. You feel positive and confident\u2026you know you\u2019ll have the strength to do in Ajax, he doesn\u2019t deserve a beauty like Sasha anyway. He doesn\u2019t deserve life.\n\nWhile you\u2019re thinking about all this you see Sasha come back out of her trailer and wave at you. She has a knife in her hand, obviously what she\u2019s going to give you to do in Ajax which you\u2019ll take great pleasure in. After all this is over, Sasha is going to see you as her savior\u2026\n\nNice fantasy Geek.\n\nThe sad truth is much worse though.\n\nWhen Ajax arrived he could tell you were around because your stench was still clinging to the door. Then he questioned Sasha about it. And the funny thing about abuse victims is they always side with their abuser before siding with someone who\u2019s trying to help them. She didn\u2019t just tell him everything, but she\u2019s also lured you back into the lion\u2019s den as it were\u2026\n\nWhen you get to the doorway, Ajax pulls Sasha back inside roughly, and grabs you.\n\n\u201cI\u2019ve been looking for a good excuse Geek! I\u2019m gonna enjoy this!\u201d\n\nAjax pulls you inside, and enjoys beating you to death.\n\nOh how he enjoys it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Talk to Pervus", "result": "You figure Pervus the clown is the only possible candidate to help you in this endeavor. He\u2019s immoral enough and doesn\u2019t have any allegiances. You don\u2019t relish the idea of going anywhere near the clown tent though; everyone knows what terrible things they do to trespassers in there. Fortunately you find Pervus harassing one of the acrobats. She looks terrified, by this scary overbearing clown\n\n\u201cAw come on, I just wanna get to know ya better. You\u2019re so pretty and young with a nice tight ass. What I could do with that for about an hour\u2026\u201d\n\nSuddenly Pervus goes to grab at the acrobat, but she leaps out of the way and runs off in fear.\n\n\u201cFuckin\u2019 cock teasin\u2019 bitch\u2026(sniff sniff) I know that smell\u2026smells like a dead dog\u2019s asshole after I busted a nut in it\u2026Geek\u2026what the hell do you want?\u201d\n\u201cUh hello Pervus\u2026I uh, need your help with something.\u201d\n\u201cOh do ya now? What might that be?\u201d\n\u201cI need to get rid of Ajax and I need your help to do it.\u201d\n\u201cWhoa, hold on there first of all what makes you think I\u2019d help you without asking for something in return, and second of all, Ajax isn\u2019t exactly easy prey if you know what I mean.\u201d\n\u201cWell\u2026what would convince you\u2026and NOT THAT!\u201d\n\nPervus chuckles.\n\n\u201cFeh, maybe some of my boys might like a piece of your filthy ass, but I\u2019m a little more discriminating\u2026actually you got me in a unique mood. I\u2019m willing to help you. Ajax pisses me off every time I go try to get some liquor from Charley. Walkin\u2019 around displayin\u2019 that perfect physique. He really needs to be taken down a fuckin\u2019 peg. In fact he NEEDS to be pegged in the fuckin\u2019 ass. Tell ya what, you get Ajax to come over to the clown tent and we\u2019ll do the rest. He\u2019s had this coming for a long time.\u201d Pervus says stroking his crotch.\n\u201cYou gonna kill him?\u201d\n\u201cNo, but I suggest you not ask what we ARE going to do to him. Trust me though; you\u2019ll never see him again.\u201d\n\u201cUh, okay\u2026but how the hell am I supposed to get him to go over to your tent, nobody ever goes over there!\u201d\n\u201cWell I suggest you think of something, if you want our help. See you later and hopefully with a certain Strongman in tow.\u201d\n\nFacing Ajax one on one is NOT what you had in mind! You\u2019re going to have to do it though. You could attempt to make up a story which may or may not work, or you could go with a much dangerous approach and piss him off so he chases you there. The problem with that approach is you\u2019re a dead Geek if he catches you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Convince Ajax with a story", "result": "You don\u2019t want to piss Ajax off anymore than what\u2019s necessary, so you decide to come up with a story that Charley needs him to go get some money the clowns to because they haven\u2019t been paying their latest gambling debts.\n\nYou look around for Ajax, but he\u2019s nowhere around, typical. The one time you WANT to find him you can\u2019t. Eventually you do see him entering Sasha\u2019s trailer, you go to knock on the door. He answers it, and already looks pissed.\n\n\u201cYou got some fuckin\u2019 balls Geek, disturbing me while I\u2019m tryin\u2019 to get me some pussy! This better be REALLY important!\u201d\n\u201cIt is, Charley wants you to go to the clown tent, apparently they gambled on something or other and didn\u2019t pay up, so he wants you to go get the money from them.\u201d\n\nAjax, gives you a hard look.\n\n\u201cWhy didn\u2019t Charley come tell me himself, in fact this is the first I\u2019m hearing about this and I certainly don\u2019t understand why he\u2019d send YOU to tell me.\u201d\n\u201cWell I just happened to be around at his still and he was ranting about some private bet he had with Pervus and well you know Charley\u2026he ended up prodding me with his stick and ordered me to go get you to collect the debt from the clowns.\u201d\n\u201cI smell bullshit and I don\u2019t like bein\u2019 fuckin\u2019 disturbed from fucking my bitch, let alone by the likes of you! I dunno what your fuckin\u2019 angle is Geek, but since you seem to be so interested in the clown tent, let\u2019s go asshole!\u201d\n\nAjax grabs you and raises you above his head with a vice like grip. You attempt to escape, but it\u2019s useless. He walks all the way to the clown tent, where inhuman noises are emanating.\n\n\u201cHey you fuckin\u2019 clowns, here\u2019s a new fuck toy for ya!\u201d Ajax yells and throws you inside.\n\nPervus and his crew were working themselves up into a sexual frenzy waiting for Ajax to enter, but instead you got thrown in. They\u2019re all a bit disappointed, but they fuck you anyway, no sense in wasting an erection.\n\nYou never return from the horrors inflicted on you in the tent that day, and you are forced to serve their twisted pleasures day in day out, never to exit the tent.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Get Ajax to chase you", "result": "He\u2019ll see through a lie, and even if he can\u2019t he won\u2019t want to listen to anything you have to say anyway. There\u2019s nothing for it, you have to have him chase you there. He\u2019s going to be pissed off anyway.\n\nYou look around for Ajax, but he\u2019s nowhere around, typical. The one time you WANT to find him you can\u2019t. Eventually you do see him entering Sasha\u2019s trailer. You take a deep breath and start throwing stones at it, calling him out.\n\n\u201cHey asshole, stop hiding behind Sasha in there and get out here!\u201d\n\nPlink! Plink! Plink!\n\n\u201cHey motherfucker I\u2019m talkin\u2019 to you! I know you ain\u2019t still fuckin\u2019 Sasha. Everyone knows you don\u2019t last that long!\u201d\n\nPlink! Plink! Plink!\n\nYou\u2019re actually having so much fun shouting and throwing things, it almost comes to a shock to you when Ajax comes storming out like a mad bull. He is wicked pissed.\n\n\u201cYOU\u2019RE FUCKING DEAD GEEK!\u201d\n\nYou throw the rest of your stones at him and run as fast as you can. You just hope you can make it to the clown tent before he catches you.\n\nSomehow despite Ajax being in better shape than you in every way, you are surprisingly faster than him, maybe its from all that protein from the pig uteruses you\u2019ve had to consume over the years\u2026or perhaps its just fear. Either way it gets the job done.\n\nYou arrive at the clown tent stopping right at the entrance with Ajax not far behind; you see the glinting eyes and hellish grins peering from the unnatural darkness within it. The slurping and hideous laughter makes you REALLY hesitant to actually enter. In your current situation you feel like you\u2019re bordering on the edge of madness with fury seeking to drive you into it.\n\nAnd that\u2019s exactly what happens, while you\u2019re stopped at the edge of the clown tent. Ajax tackles you hard, where upon the both of you roll into the clown tent.\n\nIts pitch dark in here and you don\u2019t know how that\u2019s even possible, but it is. You feel Ajax\u2019s heavy body suddenly be lifted off of you along with several bottle sounds breaking. You can feel several glass particles fall down onto you.\n\n\u201cAGH FUCK MY HEAD! GODDAMN CLOWN FUCKERS!\u201d Ajax yells.\n\nYou begin the crawl on the floor to get to the outside of the tent, but you\u2019re not sure where the hell the entrance is anymore, the clowns have closed the flap. Apparently they have no intention on letting either of you escape. The only thing working to your advantage is they\u2019re having a hard time subduing Ajax. It\u2019s all very frightening to you though when you begin to hear Ajax scream in a high pitched falsetto voice, you never thought you\u2019d ever hear something like that. The other sounds you hear from the clowns you don\u2019t even want to think about.\n\nYou keep crawling in the darkness hoping to reach the edge of the tent. It seems like forever, but eventually you feel the canvas, you then grab at the bottom and pull up; a beam of daylight enters.\n\n\u201cSTOP THAT GEEK!\u201d you hear one of the clowns yell causing you to scramble out of the tent as fast as possible. You feel a hand grab your foot and attempt to pull you back in. You kick several times with your other foot and once again luck shines down and the clown releases you long enough for you to escape.\n\nYou run back to Madam Orbec\u2019s tent, who glances up at you from her crystal ball.\n\n\u201cAh, you\u2019ve returned and from what the spirits have told me, you were successful\u2026good. I will speak to Randal about siding with the Ring Master when the time comes. You may leave.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re still a little bewildered by her attitude, but you\u2019re not going to press the issue, you got what you wanted. Time to report back to the Ring Master.\n\nYou tell the Ring Master that he\u2019ll have her allies when the time comes when you go back to his trailer though. (After getting Atlas\u2019 permission to enter of course) The Ring Master seems confident in you and tells you to get ready for show time.\n\nYou spend your remaining time a little on edge, wondering if everything is going to work out. You really wish the Ring Master hadn\u2019t put all this pressure on you.\n\nThen show time arrives, everything goes pretty much the same except Charley looks a bit distracted the whole time as Ajax is nowhere to be seen. Pervus and his clowns seem to keep waving at you and making obscene gestures whenever they can.", "action_results": [{"action": "But the real show begins afterwards", "result": "A dark moonlit night.\n\nCharley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him. The Ring Master has Atlas, and his usual allies, the Freaks are hanging in the darkness ready to strike if necessary. Most of the Normals though are nowhere to be seen. You hope Madam Orbec did her job, because even without Ajax, Charley still has a numerical superiority and a pissed off midget can do a lot of damage.\n\n\u201cYour time has come Ring Master! No longer will you exploit us! I\u2019m taking over!\u201d\n\u201cSo you can exploit your own people of course. Charley, I\u2019ve put up with your delusions of grandeur long enough, it ends tonight. I have allies of my own, and you might find they are much more dedicated to me than yours are.\u201d\n\u201cIt won\u2019t work Ringy, I got more in common with my people than you ever will! Blood is thicker, and yours is going to run everywhere if you don\u2019t peaceably leave\u2026I\u2019m giving you this one chance you pale she-male.\u201d\n\u201cNot likely.\u201d\n\nAt this point all of the freaks come out of hiding, and then Randal and most of the Normals appear as well. Pervus also shows up with his clown crew, and that\u2019s when you see Ajax, or what\u2019s left of him. He\u2019s dressed in a weird leather getup and has a chain around his neck which one of the clowns is holding. There\u2019s also a black leather mask covering his face now and some sort of ball gag\u2026he looks completely docile and broken.\n\nSuddenly Charley seems to get a little less hostile, the rest of the midgets also look less than willing to fight now, though he\u2019s still not backing down completely.\n\n\u201c\u2026so that\u2019s what happened to Ajax\u2026(Sigh)\u2026alright Ringy you win. I can see I can\u2019t beat you\u2026I\u2019ll leave. BUT! I\u2019m taking my people with me!\u201d\n\u201cNo you won\u2019t, they work for me.\u201d\n\u201cThe fuck I can\u2019t! They\u2019re still fuckin\u2019 free people! You don\u2019t fuckin\u2019 OWN them Ringy! They ain\u2019t your slaves!\u201d\n\u201cOh and I suppose they\u2019re YOUR slaves eh?\u201d\n\u201cFuck it, let\u2019s settle this.\u201d Charley turns around to his fellow midgets. \u201cHey, do you want to work for me and make some serious money doing something a lot less menial? Or do ya wanna work for this hypocritical slave driving bitch bastard who claims everyone is free to do what they want and has his protection, but in reality she doesn\u2019t do shit for anyone but herself and just expects everyone to obey him?\u201d\n\nThe midgets talk to each other for a moment and then reply with a uniformed answer that they want to stay with Charley. The Ring Master actually looks surprised, she even gets mad claiming all of what he\u2019d done for them, but it doesn\u2019t work. Charley was right they have more in common with him than they do the Ring Master. Charley leaves with his midget gang. The Ring Master looks like he\u2019s going to order an attack, but decides against it. Instead he just assigns some Normals to do the job of the midgets and orders the rest to seek out new recruits in the next town.\n\nEveryone disperses leaving just the Ring Master, Atlas and you alone. The Ring Master for once looks a bit despondent. Not knowing what else to do, you attempt to lighten the situation.\n\n\u201cWell you won, I\u2019m just glad I didn\u2019t mess things up for you.\u201d\n\u201cYes, for now, but there will only be problems in the future. What happened to tonight was just a temporary patch for the situation\u2026I suppose you did your best within your capabilities Geek. No more could be expected of you. The Carnival will survive, just like it always has though\u2026return to your cell, we have a big show to do tomorrow and significantly less help.\u201d\n\nAnd you do exactly that and continue on as usual\n\nTime passes and while nothing really changes for you, things do change\u2026\n\nWithout the midgets around to do most of the manual labor of setting things up, some of the less talented Normals like game barkers and such have to double as laborers. This causes some bad feelings initially until the Ring Master orders the Freaks to start helping as well. The Freaks seem to dislike the fact that the Ring Master isn\u2019t \u201cfavoring\u201d them as much anymore, but she\u2019s just trying to keep things fair so his Carnival stays together. The criminal activity goes down quite a bit. (Though someone\u2019s always still making hooch so happily you still have a steady supply of booze to grab)\n\nWith Ajax out of the way Sasha grows closer to Randal who returns these feelings. This new relationship makes him a little less \u201cuptight\u201d and more willing to take chances and less likely to go running to Madam Orbec before he does anything. His \u201cthreats\u201d of taking over start becoming more likely. Another rift in the Carnival is expected to occur and finally does, starting with the fiery death of Pervus and his clowns.\n\nSince the Ring Master was always looking for more help, Pervus and his clown crew took it upon themselves to start \u201crecruiting\u201d unsuspecting townies and rubes to come work for the Carnival, this causes them to start engaging in debauchery on a bigger scale than before, to an extent that they become a liability and more obvious. Randal, still having a great sense of ethics and morality could not stand by and let it go on any longer. He and several other Normals set fire to the entire tent in the middle of the night killing them all. (And putting the \u201cGimpjax\u201d out of his misery.)\n\nThe Ring Master was furious that Randal would take such a liberty. Another battle comes close to occurring, but fortunately for the Ring Master,(Who would\u2019ve been greatly outnumbered) Randal doesn\u2019t want to fight over the Carnival, instead he convinces his followers to leave while they started their OWN Carnival. One that was more family friendly and without Freaks all over the place. He leaves with Sasha and most of the other Normals in tow.\n\nThe Carnival becomes much smaller and is little more than a traveling Freak show as they are practically the only ones still left. The Ring Master doesn\u2019t seem to mind though, as he said, the Carnival would survive, maybe not in the same way, but its still around.\n\nAnd you still remain the GEEK.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Get a drink", "result": "If you\u2019re going to do anything you have to get a drink first, you head over to Charley\u2019s still, you can only hope Ajax isn\u2019t there.\n\n\u201cWhat the fuck is that smell? Oh it\u2019s the fucking lame ass Geek, why am I not surprised?\u201d Ajax shouts when he sees you coming.\n\nWell so much for hope. Normally you\u2019d run, but Charley\u2019s also there and will keep Ajax from killing you (Maybe not beating you though) plus your reliance on alcohol in any form drives you on even in the presence of possible danger.\n\n\u201cLemme guess Geek, you want a drink?\u201d Charley asks. \u201cAh good ol\u2019 predictable Geek. Here you go.\u201d\n\nCharley pours you some of the swill that you consider the Nectar of the Gods and drink it greedily. He pours you another when you finish it. Charley\u2019s being unusually cool with you.\n\n\u201cCan\u2019t get enough eh? Here\u2019s another\u2026so what\u2019d the Ring Master want to see you for?\u201d\n\u201cHuh?\u201d\n\u201cI said what the fuck did the Ring Master want to see you for? Surely it wasn\u2019t about your act, you eat disgusting shit and that\u2019s the end of it. So what did you talk about?\u201d\n\nCharley\u2019s demeanor has changed severely. He\u2019s looking at you intently to determine if you\u2019re going to lie to him. You\u2019re thrown off guard and can only stutter a response.\n\n\u201cUm, nothing much, he, um\u2026I mean she\u2026uh\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWRONG ANSWER GEEK!\u201d Charley yells, punching you in the nuts and at his height, he lands a good hit. You collapse like a rag doll, and then Ajax puts his foot on your neck while you hold your scrotum in pain.\n\nCharley continues his interrogation this time with his sharp stick pointed near your eye.\n\n\u201cNow you\u2019re gonna tell me what you and that pale she male freak talked about or you\u2019ll have something in common with Atlas! Talk!\u201d\n\u201c(Groan) Alright! Okay! The Ring Master thinks change in this carnival is coming and he wants me to convince people that they should be on his side when the shit goes down!\u201d\n\nCharley smirks and looks at Ajax.\n\n\u201cYou hear that Ajax? Some SHIT is supposed to go down! This is the first I\u2019ve heard of any shit going down! You know about any shit going down Ajax?\u201d\n\u201cNope. First I\u2019ve heard of it. The only shit that goes down around here that is what this fucking Geek eats!\u201d\n\u201cGot that right\u2026but just in case there WAS some SHIT going down, I\u2019d say it would be in someone\u2019s best interest to not be on the Ring Master\u2019s side and be doing his bidding\u2026after all they might find themselves getting hurt very badly.\u201d\n\u201cCharley you don\u2019t have to worry about me! Nobody\u2019s going to listen to me, I\u2019m just a Geek!\u201d\n\u201cOf course I\u2019m not worried about you! However\u2026if the Ring Master asked YOU to do this, there must be a reason that I\u2019m not readily seeing\u2026I know! You\u2019re working for me now!\u201d\n\u201cWhat?!\u201d Ajax asks.\n\u201cWhat?!\u201d you repeat.\n\n\u201cYeah, all the shit the Ring Master told you to do; you\u2019re doing for me now. Trust me you\u2019ll be better off when I\u2019m in charge. You can have all the booze you want, a bigger cell, hell I\u2019ll even get you LAID! I know a couple of ladies who\u2019ll debase themselves almost as much as you will!\u201d\n\nCharley then gets in your face and whispers\n\n\u201cAnd you won\u2019t have to worry about Ajax ever hitting you again with me in charge I promise. But if you betray me, I\u2019ll make sure Ajax breaks every bone in your goddamn body and then tosses you to Pervus and his fucked up clown army where they can skull fuck your corpse. Are we clear?\u201d\n\u201cYeah, yeah, sure!\u201d you quickly say.\n\u201cGood. Ajax let him up.\u201d\n\nYou get up and Charley addresses you before you leave.\n\n\u201cRemember, you have until show time Geek, and don\u2019t even think about trying to run away, because I\u2019ll find you and you know what happens then.\u201d\n\nYou stagger away with your new mission, you have no idea of how to go about this, so you just think about who might need convincing.\n\nGod you could use another drink\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Go convince the Freaks", "result": "Well, if you can get the freaks to side with Charley, everyone else should be pretty easy of course HOW you\u2019re going to do that is another story. The Freak community is pretty loyal to the Ring Master and given your lowly status, you don\u2019t know if they\u2019re even going to listen to you.\n\nYou approach the freak side of the Carnival. The instant you enter their camp, you\u2019re watched and studied by many eyes (And some of those many eyes belong to the same freak), but at least nobody throws anything at your head. You don\u2019t get far before Jasmine the Bearded Lady stops you.\n\n\u201cHey Geek! What\u2019re you doing here? Aren\u2019t you supposed to be doing something for the Ring Master?\u201d\n\u201cHuh? How do you know about that?\u201d\n\u201cBecause we\u2019re his supporters obviously Geek! What he knows we know and she knows all!\u201d\n\nObviously he doesn\u2019t know all; otherwise the freaks would know you\u2019re working for Charley now.\n\n\u201cAnyway, you don\u2019t need to come here to convince us to ally with the Ring Master, our loyalty to him is well known. Though I must admit I wonder why she chose you for this task, but I guess he has her reasons. I suggest you leave now, there\u2019s nothing else for you here Geek.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell her the Freaks should change their allegiance", "result": "\u201cUm, Jasmine maybe you should reconsider.\u201d\n\u201cReconsider what?\u201d\n\u201cWell maybe siding with the Ring Master isn\u2019t the best thing for you guys.\u201d\n\nThose words suddenly causes all the freaks that were previously spying on you from their trailers, tents, and holes to come out and surround you. There\u2019s no way to escape. Jasmine\u2019s eyes narrow while she strokes her beard.\n\n\u201cOh? And who would YOU suggest we side with?\u201d\n\u201cWell Charley makes this place really profitable and you know you\u2019d have protection, even more than if the Ring Master kept running things.\u201d\n\u201cCHARLEY? That little obnoxious creep? He\u2019s a fucking low life and with more power he\u2019d be a fucking dictator! There wouldn\u2019t be the freedom that the Ring Master gives us!\u201d\n\u201cHow do you know? I mean he\u2019s a midget, that\u2019s almost like being a freak, he might understand your struggle. I mean I do and\u2026\u201d\n\nSuddenly you feel a crushing blow to the back of your head as Roger the Crustacean hits you with one of his claws. You then feel the stomping of various feet, hooves, talons and \u201cother\u201d on your body. You begin coughing up blood as your head is repeatedly kicked into the dirt.\n\nJasmine then address you again while pulling your bloody head up.\n\n\u201cYou feel that? Hundreds of feet continuing to step on you as you struggle to rise up. THAT\u2019S our struggle everyday. And now you know it. Hope you liked being one of us Geek.\u201d\n\nJasmine then lands a crunching blow your nose, pushing the bone up into your brain, killing you and ending your misery.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Leave", "result": "Mentioning anything against the Ring Master would be a death sentence at this point, so you keep your mouth shut and leave.\n\nAs you leave the freaks, you notice a group of Pinheads congregating behind one of the trailers, when they see you they suddenly become quiet and stare at you with vacant smiles on their distorted faces.", "action_results": [{"action": "Approach them", "result": "The Pinheads are behaving very oddly, normally they\u2019re gibbering or playing, they\u2019re hardly ever this quiet. You approach them.\n\n\u201cHey, what\u2019s going on?\u201d you ask.\n\nThey look up at you still vacantly smiling at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk some more", "result": "\u201cSo, are you guys getting ready for your act tonight?\u201d\n\nThe Pinheads look at each other and then look at you and continue to smile vacantly.", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk even more", "result": "For some reason the Pinhead\u2019s silence makes you feel welcome, normally everyone drives you off, you decide to talk more.\n\n\u201cYeah I got a new act, I bite the head off of a cat, vomit it back up and then eat it again with rotten chicken livers.\u201d\n\nThe Pinheads cease smiling, and begin to look utterly bored.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue to talk to them", "result": "\u201cYeah, I remember one time I ate a dog bladder, kind of a bitter taste.\u201d\n\nThe Pinheads are now starting to get annoyed with you as you insist on telling them your \u201cinteresting\u201d list of past dinners.\n\nYou might want to stop. While the Pinheads aren\u2019t normally abusive to you, you don\u2019t exactly have a nice history with them and they have been known to get mean when something displeases them, much like young children do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep pushing it", "result": "\u201cSo one time\u2026\u201d\n\u201cGeek will you shut the fuck up? Shit, I can smell your rotten breath from here!\u201d one of the Pinheads shouts, you\u2019re absolutely stunned.\n\n\u201cYou\u2026you can talk?!\u201d\n\nThe lead Pinhead gives a dirty look to the one who shouted at you, and then looks back.\n\n\u201cYeah we can talk, and now YOU know we can thanks to big mouth over here! Thanks a lot Frank!\u201d\n\u201cWell he was getting on my nerves George!\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026if you can talk, why do you act like idiots?\u201d\n\u201cWhy do you eat all that nasty shit? For the money of course or in your case for the booze. You think we\u2019d make as much if we didn\u2019t act like little retarded children? We\u2019re fucking ugly just like any freak, but by acting like simple minded children we come across as charming and harmless\u2026cute even. Which makes us rube favorites. Nobody knows the truth, not even the other freaks, nobody except you\u2026I guess we\u2019ll have to kill you.\u201d\n\u201cHold on wait wait! Can\u2019t we come to an agreement here? I mean I\u2019m not going to tell anyone! And even if I did, who\u2019d believe me?\u201d\n\u201cCan\u2019t take that chance.\u201d\n\nYou suddenly crumple to the ground and beg pathetically for your life at the feet of the George. He gives you a disdainful squinted expression.\n\n\u201cGet off my feet Geek! Sheesh, you\u2019re pathetic! We probably wouldn\u2019t have killed you, maybe just cut out your tongue.\u201d\n\u201cSo you\u2019ll let me live?\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but you\u2019re still not getting off that easy. You gotta do something for us to make us trust you.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?\u201d\n\u201cGo to the clown tent and destroy all their sex toys.\u201d\n\u201cWHAT?!\u201d\n\u201cShhhh! Stop fucking drawing attention!\u201d\n\u201cYou want me to go to the clown tent? But nobody in their right mind goes in there!\u201d\n\u201cDuh, that\u2019s why we\u2019re sending you.\u201d\n\u201cWhy do you want me to do this?\u201d\n\u201cBecause those pedophile ass clowns are direct competition, they always draw all the children away from our act, and we\u2019d like to get back at them in some way. It\u2019ll really piss off Pervus when he sees his cock ring in pieces heh heh heh.\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t wanna touch those things! Who knows where they\u2019ve been!\u201d\n\u201cYou\u2019re kidding me right? This coming from the guy who eats cow ass for his grand finale. Look they\u2019re mostly all in a big wooden box anyway so just set fire to the box or something. It\u2019s not like you have a choice in this matter.\u201d\n\u201cI dunno, I think death might be preferable to getting caught by the clowns.\u201d\n\u201c(Sigh) Alright, I know you\u2019re working for Charley you wanted to convince the Freaks to side with him in this ensuing struggle coming up\u2026don\u2019t ask us how we know, we just do. And it\u2019s mainly because since much like you we hear a lot more because we\u2019re considers idiots and non-threatening. If you do this, we\u2019ll convince the Freaks to side with Charley, again don\u2019t ask us how\u2026we have our ways\u2026do we have a deal now?\u201d\n\nKnowing this is probably your best shot and if the Pinheads don\u2019t kill you, Charley certainly will for your failure to get people to side with him, so you agree.\n\n\u201cGood, return when you\u2019ve completed the job, we\u2019ll be playing around in this area until show time.\u201d\n\nYou leave the Pinheads who resume their pretend act of being morons while you resume your completely real act of being a moron for getting yourself into this mess. You don\u2019t know how you\u2019re going to do this.\n\nAs you approach the tent, you notice how quiet it is. Normally loud insane rowdy laughter can be heard from within, but it\u2019s silent which almost makes it scarier. You wonder if you shouldn\u2019t just set the WHOLE tent on fire. In some ways you\u2019d be doing the world a favor. You do wonder about how the Ring Master can just let such evil go unchecked.", "action_results": [{"action": "Set the whole tent on fire", "result": "You make up your mind and decide to save yourself some risk and set the whole tent on fire. You head back the Charley\u2019s still, which luckily is unattended right now. You steal three bottles of his stuff and his Zippo lighter that he foolishly left near the volatile concoction. Before you leave you take another drink to calm your nerves.\n\nYou return to the clown tent and start dowsing it with Charley\u2019s booze trying not to be noticed and hopping no clown suddenly comes out of the tent. You continue to do this until you encircle the entire tent and run out of booze. You light it up\u2026\n\nThe entire tent goes up like tinder box, you didn\u2019t expect it to go up so fast, and you\u2019re a little singed yourself, as you fall backwards. You scramble away as other Carneys notice what\u2019s happened and start calling for water. The clowns soon come running out screaming horribly while burning alive. Their faces literally melting off with all the makeup they were wearing.\n\nYou are about to go see the Pinheads, but the carnival is in too much chaos, as your act of arson has had an unintended side effect. The burning clowns end up running hither, thither and yon, setting everything else on fire as well in their torment. Soon the entire Carnival is up in flames and its every man, woman, and freak for itself.\n\nHaving no other options, you keep running until you reach the nearest town. You spend a couple days just bumming around the town and sleeping in the park until one night\u2026\n\n\u201cHello, Geek.\u201d You hear melodic voice say. Before you can reply a huge foot steps on your throat. It\u2019s Atlas and the Ring Master.\n\u201cIt wasn\u2019t enough that you attempted to betray me, but you had to destroy my beloved Carnival. The Carnival that brought so much joy to others and gave jobs to the outcasts. Outcasts like you\u2026well do you have anything to say?\u201d\n\nAtlas relaxes his foot on your throat for just a bit for you to answer.\n\n\u201cIt\u2026it\u2026was an accident\u2026\u201d\n\u201cHmm, an accident. Yes I made an accident too, time to correct it. Atlas.\u201d\n\n\u201cN\u2026\u201d\n\nBefore you can get out the \u201co\u201d Atlas brings his massive foot down on your throat utterly destroying your windpipe, your larynx, and your life.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Enter the tent", "result": "You cautiously enter the tent, fearing for your ass (Literally).\n\nAs it turns out, all the clowns are all passed out from the night before. Looks like it was necrophilia this time, judging from the rotting corpses lying on the floor. In fact if you weren\u2019t so rank yourself, the smell might actually bother you. Pervus doesn\u2019t seem to be here though.\n\nLiquor bottles are everywhere; in fact you could probably grab one and dowse the box (Which is open and crammed full of whips, shackles and \u201cinsertion objects\u201d) then take one of the Zippos lying on a table and light the box up easy.\n\nThis is going to be simpler than you\u2026\n\nSuddenly you feel a hand grab around your foot.\n\n\u201cHmm, yeah come here baby\u2026\u201d\n\nBefore you can do anything one of the clowns has curled his face up next to your foot and began sucking your BIG TOE.\n\nThis is REALLY disgusting, even for you. The only good thing is the clown seems to still be somewhat asleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "Remove your foot and get out of there", "result": "As you attempt to remove your foot the clown\u2019s grip tightens, and then he wakes up completely.\n\n\u201cWhat the\u2026Hey fellas! Look what we got here! It\u2019s the Geek! Let\u2019s fuck the shit out of his ass and make him our permanent fuck toy!\u201d\n\nThe clowns suddenly all get up from their drunken slumber and surround you, there is no escape. The horrors that are unleashed upon you that day are best left unmentioned, but you never leave that tent ever again. You are no longer known as a Geek anymore, you are something much worse\u2026\n\nYou are now the GIMP.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Let him suck your toe", "result": "You don\u2019t want to risk waking him, so you just let him finish...the sucking and slurping sound is unnerving.\n\n\u201cHmmm, yeah, your clit tastes so good\u2026mmm.\u201d\n\nYou shutter to think what clits he\u2019s been sucking and licking if he thinks YOUR toe is one and that it tastes good!\n\nSoon he seems to stop and mumbles something about being sorry for pissing the bed again. You safely move your foot away. Not wishing to have anything else of yours molested, you grab a bottle dowse the box, and then set it on fire with one of the lighters here and get out as fast you can. You can hear some of the clowns cursing and yelling from the tent in the distance.\n\nWhen you get back to the Pinheads they\u2019re playing with a ball and laughing. Upon seeing you, George nods in your direction, as its safe to talk with nobody around.\n\n\u201cI did it.\u201d\n\u201cYes, I know, I had Frank follow you. Good job.\u201d\n\u201cSo about your side of the deal\u2026\u201d\n\u201cYes, don\u2019t worry, we\u2019ll honor it. Charley\u2019s a good business man, he\u2019ll make this place even more money\u2026which means more money for us too, we don\u2019t mind if he takes charge. You can go report to your new master the good news, but don\u2019t you fucking DARE say shit about our true nature to anyone, EVER.\u201d\n\nYou agree and leave, you tell Charley the news before show time who chuckles heartily and tells you to be ready after the show because the revolution is coming after the rubes leave. Not wishing to run into the Ring Master before hand you hang around Charley\u2019s still which isn\u2019t too pleasant since you have to endure Ajax\u2019s abuse while Charley goes off to make his preparations.\n\nThen show time arrives, everything goes pretty much the same except the Ring Master looks a little distracted the entire time and the clowns seem to be off their game tonight. The Pinheads take the opportunity to show them up in from of everyone.", "action_results": [{"action": "But the real show begins afterwards", "result": "A dark moonlit night.\n\nCharley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. The Ring Master has Atlas, and looks around for his usual allies, the Freaks, but they\u2019re nowhere around. The Normals seem to be staying out of the fight for the most part, but chances are some of them will take one side or the other.\n\n\u201cYour time has come Ring Master! No longer will you exploit us! I\u2019m taking over!\u201d\n\u201cAnd you all feel this way? You\u2019d rather follow this criminal who\u2019ll be corrupt? You really think he\u2019s doing this out of some noble moral code? Obviously you must be blind if you don\u2019t see that rule by this degenerate will be worse than anything you THINK I\u2019m doing\u2026but I leave it up to you\u2026\u201d\n\u201cIt won\u2019t work Ringy, I got more in common with my people than you do! Blood is thicker, and yours is going to run everywhere if you don\u2019t peaceably leave\u2026I\u2019m giving you this one chance you pale she-male.\u201d\n\u201cNot likely, I have my own friends as you know.\u201d\n\nThe Ring Master whistles and you arrive with all the Freaks behind you. He looks surprised to see you.\n\n\u201cGeek?\u201d\n\u201cSorry, Ring Master, but we made a better deal.\u201d You say and the Freaks advance.\n\u201cNO! Atlas, it\u2019s just me and you now!\u201d\n\nThe battle ensues, though it\u2019s not really a battle. A few of the normals side with the Ring Master, but sensing Charley\u2019s got the winning hand most of them either just stay out of it or directly side with him. The only thing that makes the battle last longer is the fact that Pervus and his clowns side with the Ring Master as they still were mad about the Pinheads embarrassing them at show time. Atlas and Ajax lock horns, and while Atlas kills Ajax in the struggle, he is easily taken down by the midgets afterwards. Pervus and the clowns do some damage, but likewise they too are taken down.\n\nOn the side lines watching, the bloodshed is too much for Randal and he leaves during the battle which has forever destroying his love of the carnival. Sasha leaves with him seeing that Ajax is no longer alive to hold power over her.\n\nFinally in the last moments Charley laughs as he stands over the Ring Master\u2019s body which is now lifeless with Charley\u2019s sharp stick through its heart. Meanwhile you were hiding during all this, but Charley calls you out.\n\n\u201cHey Geek! Come out you fuckin\u2019 coward! We won! Come out, you ain\u2019t gotta worry about Ajax anymore his goddamn neck is twisted all the way around, damn shame.\u201d\n\u201c\u2026I\u2019m here Charley.\u201d\n\u201cGood, unzip the Ring Master\u2019s pants.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?\u201d\n\u201cUnzip the Ring Master\u2019s pants, I wanna see what the hell he or she was packing. I had a bet going with Ajax and while I\u2019m just gonna take everything from his trailer anyway, I still wanna see if I would\u2019ve won fairly.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re a little hesitant, but your crouch over the body and start unzipping the Ring Master\u2019s pants. A crowd begins to form around you. Normal, Midget and Freak alike.\n\n\u201cCome on come Geek, we ain\u2019t got all fuckin\u2019 night.\u201d Charley says while kicking you in the ribs.\n\nYou pull down the underwear\u2026\n\n\u201cEEEEEEEEEEEWWWWWWWWW!\u201d the crowd shouts in unison.\n\u201cHoly shit!\u201d you say falling back.\n\u201cHa ha, I knew it!\u201d Charley chuckles before continuing.\n\n\u201cAlright you lot, I want all these bodies cleaned up and disposed of before we head out to the next town, and Salina I want YOU in my new trailer to help me celebrate this glorious victory!\u201d\n\nAnd so begins the reign of Charley the Ringmaster. Under his guidance midgets run everything and the Carnival doesn\u2019t so much resemble a Carnival as it resembles a mobile grifting ring. While regular carnival activities still abound, they\u2019re more of a cover than anything. In time, most of the high maintenance acts are done away with and eventually only thing that stays completely the same is the freak show, just to upkeep the front for what\u2019s really going on. The Pinheads get their own special attraction since they take up the clown vacancy.\n\nYou do somewhat better under the new management. You still do your act as it\u2019s still a big draw; you get lumped in with the Freak Show. You don\u2019t need to put up with Ajax\u2019s abuse anymore so fearing for your life isn\u2019t a factor. (Though the Pinheads still verbally warn you every now and then to ensure your secrecy) Charley uses you as a gopher, so you\u2019re actually making money now (If little). He still kicks you around for his amusement, and is prone to dump a bucket of piss in your face to wake you up, but it\u2019s better than what a Geek like you could\u2019ve hoped for.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Go talk to the Normals", "result": "Since the Freaks are firmly behind the Ring Master, you might as well talk to the Normals, the problem is you have to talk to someone with some pull with most of them, and Remarkable Randal is the only one who has that in any great capacity and getting him to side with Charley is out of the question.\n\nAt least directly.\n\nIt\u2019s possible you could talk with Madam Orbec and get her to convince Randal to change his stance since he follows anything she says; also she\u2019s less likely to throw something at your head when she sees you approach.\n\nYou head towards Madam Orbec\u2019s tent, which has an air of creepiness surrounding it. You enter the tent and immediately get your usual welcome.\n\n\u201cGeek! Begone from this place! Do not assault the spirits with your foulness!\u201d Madam Orbec commands.\n\u201cThey\u2019re dead; I don\u2019t really see how my smell can affect them.\u201d\n\u201cIt\u2019s not your odor that offends the spirits, it\u2019s your aura! We do not want you in our presence! Away with you, we have no wish to be involved in your underhanded dealings!\u201d\n\u201cHow do you know what I\u2019m here for?\u201d\n\u201cFool! I am Madam Orbec! I see all that the spirits see! You\u2019re working with that miscreant Charley in an attempt to take over the Carnival and you\u2019re hoping to influence me so that I may in turn influence Randal to convince the normals to side with him.\u201d\n\u201cWell since you know\u2026Madam?\u201d\n\nMadam Orbec begins to clutch her head and writhe on the floor talking to herself.\n\n\u201cYes. But no! Maybe? Perhaps. If he can pull it off. Is he capable? I doubt it. We must try. Whatever, just get him out of here!\u201d\n\nMadam Orbec suddenly stops and slowly sits up.\n\n\u201cYou need to expose those of the small craniums.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?\u201d\n\u201cThe Pinheads. You need to show their true nature to the public.\u201d\n\u201cTrue nature? What\u2019re you talking about? Why\u201d\n\u201cThat is all the spirits have told me, their reasons are not to be questioned, but I have been advised to help you in your treacherous endeavor if you accomplish this objective. Now leave and do not return unless you are successful.\u201d\n\nAt this point Madam Orbec seems to go into a cationic trance. You take your opportunity to leave and ponder what the hell her cryptic ramblings were about. All you know for certain is that you have to do something to the Pinheads. Expose their true nature, though you can\u2019t imagine what that could be.\n\nYou could try spying on them and see what you can find out, or maybe a more direct approach would work.", "action_results": [{"action": "Spy on them", "result": "You head towards the Freak side of the carnival and try to find the Pinheads, when you see them you notice they\u2019re all congregated together in a relatively secluded area. Almost as if they\u2019re in a meeting. How odd.\n\nThey haven\u2019t seen you yet, so you take the opportunity to get closer by sneaking around behind them and hiding behind a barrel. You prop your back up against it, close your eyes and pretend to be passed out, just in case someone passes by, wondering what you\u2019re doing. You then attempt to listen and you can\u2019t believe what you\u2019re hearing\u2026\n\n\u201cSo George did you hear what\u2019s going on in Germany?\u201d\n\u201cYeah, it wouldn\u2019t surprise me if we had to go to war with them\u2026AGAIN.\u201d\n\u201cWell maybe a war would be good for the economy.\u201d\n\u201cMaybe, I doubt if it could get any worse.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but if we go to war that means less people coming to this Carnival, and that\u2019s not good for our income.\u201d\n\u201cOh I don\u2019t know about that. History has shown that in hard times, people are actually more inclined to want to escape reality and that\u2019s what this Carnival is all about; escaping reality.\u201d\n\nThe Pinheads are discussing world matters! All this time they\u2019ve been acting like idiot children and they\u2019re actually intelligent! You get enthralled by more of their conversation. They begin discussing literature, science, philosophy and other topics that are far above your comprehension or even a normal person\u2019s comprehension.\n\nUnfortunately since you\u2019re not actually watching them and just listening, you don\u2019t see what some of them do. The Pinheads realize you\u2019ve been spying on them mainly due to your powerful smell which is unmistakable at this range. A couple of them did a bit of sneaking around on their own while the others continued the conversation to keep you put until they got into position.\n\n\u201cPsst! Hey Geek, over here!\u201d\n\nYou open your eyes just in time to see a baseball smash into your face, breaking your nose. You curl in a fetal position while holding your nose and resisting the urge to yell. You pretend you\u2019re still drunk, hoping you can throw them off suspicion. It doesn\u2019t work though. The Pinheads have been fooling everyone for so long they\u2019re experts in seeing through a fake act as pathetic as yours and even if they couldn\u2019t they still wouldn\u2019t want to take the chance of you blabbing.\n\n\u201cShoulda stayed in your cell today Geek.\u201d are the last words you hear as a crowd of angry little squinty faces stare down at you, before they beat you to death and then dump your body in the clown tent.\n\nYou really don\u2019t want to know what happens after that.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Direct approach", "result": "You can\u2019t think of anything else to do, so you wait around for the Pinheads to come running around the Carnival like they usually do. When you see them gleefully playing catch with a baseball with each other, you insist on joining in\n\nThe Pinheads look a little bewildered by your actions at first, and when you actually get a hold of the ball and toss it back at them, they start getting noticeably angry. A few of them start pushing you and attempting to trip you up. You continue to antagonize them by \u201cplaying\u201d with them. Until one of them says something out loud surprising everyone.\n\n\u201cGET THE FUCK OUTTA HERE GEEK! YOU\u2019RE FUCKING STINKING UP THE PLACE!\u201d\n\nThis one hostile sentence shows a coherency that the Pinheads have never displayed before, and shouting it in public for the rest of the Carneys to hear has outted them.\n\n\u201cFucking Pinheads can talk!\u201d someone shouts.\n\nAt this point the Pinheads start arguing with themselves and attempting to cover up their mistake, but its too late now. You slip away and head back to Madam Orbec.\n\nWhen you get to Orbec\u2019s tent, she\u2019s talking to herself as usual (Or the \u201cspirits\u201d rather)\n\n\u201cNo, I don\u2019t like that. Well if you moved a little more. NO! YOU CAN\u2019T FUCK ME IN THE ASS! Oh fuck it then.\u201d\n\u201cUm, am I interrupting something intimate?\u201d\n\u201cThe Geek returns! And I see you have been successful in your mission. The spirits thank you and you can be sure the Normals will be on your side when the time comes. Now leave us we are discussing something important.\u201d\n\u201cWait, can you at least tell me why you\u2026I mean the spirits wanted the Pinheads exposed?\u201d\n\u201cI suppose. Does he need an answer? Probably not. Then why tell? You\u2019re right.\u201d Then Madam Orbec answers you directly.\n\u201cNo, now leave before we change our mind.\u201d\n\nNot wishing to undo your work, you leave and head back to Charley, who you see walking around looking for you.\n\n\u201cHey there you are Geek! What\u2019s all this I\u2019ve been hearing about you fucking around with the Pinheads? You\u2019re supposed to be doin\u2019 shit for me, I hope you\u2019ve been making progress in that little endeavor.\u201d\n\u201cI have. I got the Normals to side with us.\u201d\n\nCharley chuckles heartily and tells you to be ready after the show because the revolution is coming after the rubes leave. Not wishing to run into the Ring Master before hand you hang around Charley\u2019s still which isn\u2019t too pleasant since you have to endure Ajax\u2019s abuse while Charley goes off to make his preparations.\n\nThen show time arrives, everything goes pretty much the same except the Ring Master looks a little distracted the entire time and the Pinheads don\u2019t show up at all, apparently their exposure caused some trouble with other Carneys (All of them Normals) who didn\u2019t like the fake act they were doing just to get paid more and taking money out of the pockets of performers who had real talents. (Tricking rubes is one thing, but fucking over other Carneys is frowned upon\u2026 if you get caught)", "action_results": [{"action": "But the real show begins aftterwards", "result": "A dark moonlit night.\n\nCharley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. The Ring Master has Atlas, and his usual allies, the Freaks are hanging in the darkness ready to strike if necessary. Most of the Normals though are nowhere to be seen.\n\n\u201cYour time has come Ring Master! No longer will you exploit us! I\u2019m taking over!\u201d\n\u201cAnd you all feel this way? You\u2019d rather follow this criminal who\u2019ll be corrupt? You really think he\u2019s doing this out of some noble moral code? Obviously you must be blind if you don\u2019t see that rule by this degenerate will be worse than anything you THINK I\u2019m doing\u2026but I leave it up to you\u2026\u201d\n\u201cIt won\u2019t work Ringy, I got more in common with my people than you do! Blood is thicker, and yours is going to run everywhere if you don\u2019t peaceably leave\u2026I\u2019m giving you this one chance you pale she-male.\u201d\n\u201cNot likely, I have my own friends as you know.\u201d\n\nThe Ring Master whistles and his Freaks show up, but Charley doesn\u2019t look impressed.\n\n\u201cGeek?\u201d\n\u201cSorry, Ring Master, but we made a better deal.\u201d You say and show up with a bunch of Normals behind you, and then Randal shows up on the other side with a bunch of Normals behind him as well.\n\u201cI see. So you\u2019ve all decided to throw your lot in with petty criminal activity. I\u2019m glad to see your hypocrisy show its true face Randal, and Geek, I\u2019m very disappointed in you. Very well, if I die this day, it\u2019ll be beside those who are the true heart of Carnival! ATTACK!\u201d\n\nThe battle ensues, though it\u2019s not really a battle. A few of the Normals side with the Ring Master, but most of them are on Charley\u2019s side. The only thing that makes the battle last longer is the fact that the Freaks are fierce fighters. Atlas and Ajax lock horns, and while Atlas nearly kills Ajax, Randal does a couple of his magic tricks and blinds Atlas with a bright light, giving Ajax enough time to kill him.\n\nOn the side lines watching, is Pervus and his clown gang masturbating to the carnage.\n\nFinally in the last moments Charley laughs as he stands over the Ring Master\u2019s body which is now lifeless with Charley\u2019s sharp stick through its heart; the last \u201cFreak\u201d to die. Meanwhile you were hiding during all this, but Charley calls you out.\n\n\u201cHey Geek! Come out you fuckin\u2019 coward! We won!\u201d\n\u201cYeah come out, you fucking useless piece of shit! I\u2019m too tired to do anything to you right now.\u201d Ajax adds.\n\u201c\u2026I\u2019m here Charley.\u201d\n\u201cGood, unzip the Ring Master\u2019s pants.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?\u201d\n\u201cUnzip the Ring Master\u2019s pants; I wanna see what the hell he or she was packing. I have a bet going with Ajax and we wanna see who won.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re a little hesitant, but your crouch over the body and start unzipping the Ring Master\u2019s pants. A crowd begins to form around you. Normal and Midget alike.\n\n\u201cCome on come Geek, we ain\u2019t got all fuckin\u2019 night!\u201d Ajax says while kicking you in the ribs.\n\nYou pull down the underwear\u2026\n\n\u201cEEEEEEEEEEEWWWWWWWWW!\u201d the crowd shouts in unison.\n\u201cHoly shit!\u201d you say falling back.\n\u201cHa ha, I knew it! I fucking won!\u201d Charley chuckles.\n\u201cShit! Fuck!\u201d Ajax shouts and starts beating you to take his frustrations out.\n\n\u201cAlright you lot, I want all these bodies cleaned up and disposed of before we head out to the next town, and Salina I want YOU in my new trailer to help me celebrate this glorious victory!\u201d\n\nAnd so begins the reign of Charley the Ringmaster. Under his guidance midgets run everything and the Carnival doesn\u2019t so much resemble a Carnival as it resembles a mobile grifting ring. While regular carnival activities still abound, they\u2019re more of a cover than anything. In time though problems occur. Randal and Charley begin to come into conflict as Randal begins to regret his decision to side with him as well as his disapproval of what\u2019s become of the Carnival. Another division begins to occur, but one on a smaller scale as Charley\u2019s corrupting influence has infected most of the remaining Carneys at this point. Things really come to a head when Ajax suspects Sasha of having an affair with Randal. Eventually Randal, a few of his remaining \u201cfollowers\u201d AND Sasha are all killed in the middle of night and their bodies dumped in the river. Lacking any more \u201ctrue talent\u201d or even sideshow freaks, the Carnival is disbanded entirely and Charley and Ajax set up headquarters permanently in a sleazy small town where they primarily run the place. Proving that crime does pay.\n\nYou on the other hand don\u2019t do so well. While the Carnival was still around, you were routinely abused by Charley or Ajax more so than you normally were. When the Carnival disbanded you didn\u2019t really have anywhere else to go, so you became the town drunk. Not really needing you anymore and having moved on to more important things, Charley forgets all about you, which leads to one dark rainy night when Ajax comes across you sleeping behind one of his bars. Not being reined in anymore, he does to you what he\u2019s always wanted to do.\n\nHe beats you death, laughing the whole time.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, null]}, null]}, null]}, null]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Do something else", "result": "This mission that\u2019s been given to you by the Ring Master has gotten you all shook up. You don\u2019t want all this pressure, yet you\u2019re too scared to leave. This is the only place that accepts you somewhat.\n\nYou\u2019re too distracted to even get a drink! You\u2019d rather not have to deal with Charley or especially Ajax right now either. Sometimes you just wish you didn\u2019t have to live an utterly pathetic existence.\n\nWhile you\u2019re attempting to find some place dark to crawl into and hide, you literally bump into Remarkable Randal.\n\n\u201cOof! Watch it you smelly, ugly, Geek! Honestly it\u2019s bad enough this Carnival has Freaks and criminal Midgets, but honestly having YOU here defies all logic. If I ran this Carnival things would be different! What are you doing out of your cell anyway? Doesn\u2019t the Ring Master usually keep you locked up until show time?\u201d\n\u201cOh, um he wanted to talk to me about something.\u201d\n\u201cShe did? What about?\u201d\n\u201cOh about my act, and uh\u2026doing\u2026um\u2026something.\u201d\n\nRandal\u2019s normal distain for you changes to one of interest. He studies you for a moment before speaking.\n\n\u201cSo the Ring Master has entrusted YOU to save this place? Hah! She MUST be desperate!\u201d\n\u201cHuh? What? How did you know?\u201d\n\u201cMadam Orbec has been teaching me how to contact the spirit world and read into people\u2019s souls. And yours is an easy read indeed, such as it is\u2026perhaps our meeting has its purpose however. After reading your soul I can see something within you that may be worth saving. I never thought it possible, but I think I may be able to help you and your situation Geek.\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t understand.\u201d\n\u201cYes you do. Maybe you try to block it out of your mind with that swill you drink from Charley, but deep down you hate what you are and your retched life. And you should. You\u2019re a sorry excuse for a human being, in fact you aren\u2019t really even human anymore, you\u2019re sub-human. However, you have a chance to regain your humanity back, and even become a useful member of this Carnival again. And I\u2019ll help you, if you help me.\u201d\n\u201cHow am I supposed to help you?\u201d\n\u201cA simple task really. All I want you to do is go get Madam Orbec\u2019s black book. She keeps it by her bed. You\u2019ll know it when you see it.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?! You want me to steal from her? I thought she was supposed to be your mentor or something!\u201d\n\u201cShhhhh! Keep it down Geek! Look. Madam Orbec IS my mentor and I\u2019ll always be grateful for what she\u2019s taught me. I\u2019ve always believed in magic, but without her teachings, I wouldn\u2019t be a magician, I\u2019d only be an illusionist.\u201d\n\u201cThere\u2019s a difference?\u201d you interrupt.\n\u201cOh yes, Geek. Oh yes. Anyway, you\u2019re not stealing the book, I just need to borrow it for awhile because its time for me to learn more. I think Madam Orbec is afraid I\u2019m not yet prepared to learn the secrets that lie inside her black book. But I know I am, and its time for me to prove it to her. She\u2019ll be so proud when she sees what I\u2019ll be able to do.\u201d\n\u201cSo what\u2019re you going to do with it?\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m going to use its powers to help me take over the Carnival of course.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?! I\u2019m not helping you do that! I\u2019m supposed to be helping the Ring Master anyway!\u201d\n\u201cWhy? Seriously, what has the Ring Master really done for you? Given you a job? The Ring Master is exploiting you for his own personal gain. She cares nothing for you. He just saw a useless dreg of society and turned you into something that could somehow make money for her. Assuming you helped the Ring Master and were even successful, think about it, you\u2019d just go back to your living your miserable life. Is mere existence just enough for you? Isn\u2019t it time you wanted MORE out of life?\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re quiet. You don\u2019t think anyone\u2019s even asked you that question, even before you became a geek, and you\u2019re really surprised to hear it coming from Randal. Someone who has nothing, but distaste for you.\n\n\u201cI dunno, I think I\u2019m pretty bad off. I don\u2019t think there\u2019s anything I can do to improve myself at this point.\u201d\n\u201cNonsense, there\u2019s always a way and your first step is by helping me. Look. Maybe you are what you are and I don\u2019t like it, but I do see that underneath it all you ARE a Normal. You should be on my side anyway; I can help you be something more than a geek. With magic anything is possible! Retrieve that book for me and I\u2019ll turn this Carnival into something much more than what it is and I\u2019ll turn you into something much more than what you could\u2019ve thought possible.\u201d\n\nSomething about Randal makes you believe him. You can understand why people do tend to want to follow him. Maybe things would be better if he took over. He certainly seems more caring than the Ring Master and a hell of a lot better in general than Charley.\n\n\u201cOkay, I\u2019ll help you, but I dunno how I\u2019m gonna ste\u2026I mean borrow the book.\u201d\n\u201cWell I leave that up to you, but make sure you get the book to me before show time and don\u2019t come back to me until then.\u201d\n\nRandal leaves you to it, but you\u2019re still not sure how you\u2019re going to go about this. If Randal can read your intentions then Madam Orbec will certainly be able to read yours. It occurs to you, that you might need some help from the less \u201cmoral\u201d people here. And you can\u2019t ask Charley to help you for several reasons.\n\nYou could go to Pervus for help. If murder and sexual deviancy is no problem for him then surely a little theft won\u2019t be either. And he\u2019s usually up for doing anything remotely illegal.\n\nYou could also go see Salina. Besides prostitution she\u2019s known to be good at theft as well, though her helping you is a real long shot.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go see Pervus", "result": "You decide Pervus would be a better choice. Probably not the safest, but he\u2019s more likely to help you.\n\nYou\u2019re hesitant to go anywhere near the clown tent to get him though, however for once luck is with you and you see him around the animals talking to a horse.\n\n\u201cHmmm, yeah. You\u2019re a pretty filly. Yes you are. Let me tell you what I\u2019m gonna do\u2026(sniff) you smell different than usual.\u201d Pervus then turns around. \u201cOh it\u2019s you Geek. What the fuck do you want? Can\u2019t you see I\u2019m with a lady?\u201d\n\u201cHey um, Pervus I need your help with something.\u201d\n\u201cOh do ya now?\u201d\n\u201cI need to borrow a black book from Madam Orbec, and I need you to distract her.\u201d\n\u201cHmm, normally I wouldn\u2019t help you do shit, but I\u2019m kinda in the mood for some OLD pussy right now. Yeah I\u2019ll distract her, I know exactly how to distract her.\u201d Pervus say while stoking his crotch.\n\u201cUm hold on, you\u2019re not gonna rape and kill her are ya?\u201d\n\u201cI won\u2019t kill her\u2026oh fine I won\u2019t rape her either. Probably won\u2019t be necessary anyway, I\u2019ve always had a way with the ladies\u2026sorry old girl, but I\u2019ll have to be fucking you some other time.\u201d Pervus remarks and pats the horse on the head before following you.\n\nYou both approach Madam Orbec\u2019s tent which has an air of creepiness about it. Pervus has a look of crazed lust in his eyes. He\u2019s starting to breathe heavily and doing a lot of slurping.\n\n\u201cOh fuck yeah, this is gonna be soooooooo good.\u201d\n\nHe said he wasn\u2019t going to do anything excessive, but now you\u2019re not so sure\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue with the plan", "result": "All that really concerns you is getting that book, because if you don\u2019t get Randal\u2019s help, the Ring Master is certainly going to kill you when she finds out you\u2019ve turned traitor.\n\nPervus enters the tent and you sneak around back and begin trying to lift up a small portion of it to crawl in.\n\nYou hear a lot of noise and some protesting, while you\u2019re doing this, when you finally get in, Pervus is having his way with Madam Orbec, completely oblivious to you and Madam Orbec isn\u2019t making a sound\u2026you don\u2019t like the looks of this.\n\nYou turn to your left and see you\u2019re right by her bed, next to that is her dresser which has the book on it. You grab it and crawl back out as quickly as you can. You run and don\u2019t look back.\n\nWhen you get back to Randal he wonder\u2019s why the hell you\u2019re so worked up.\n\n\u201c(Pant) I got the book.\u201d\n\u201cPhew! Well don\u2019t breathe all over me, just gimme the thing! Excellent. I\u2019ll study what I can tonight before show time and then afterwards we\u2019ll see who the new master is! And what\u2019s wrong with you Geek? Why are breathing so heavy and looking around\u2026you didn\u2019t let Madam Orbec see you borrow this did you?!\u201d\n\u201cNo, not at all. I\u2019m just winded from trying to get out there without her seeing me!\u201d\n\u201cWell you better make yourself scarce until showtime anyway. I\u2019m sure you wouldn\u2019t want to run into the Ring Master before hand. Relax, I will keep my end of the bargain. Now go.\u201d\n\nYou leave and linger around the edges of the Carnival, staying out of sight until show time. What happened back at Madam Orbec\u2019s tent still has you unnerved a bit. You know it\u2019s only a matter a time before everyone finds out, before Randal finds out. She was basically like a mother figure to him. You didn\u2019t think Pervus would kill her, unless he didn\u2019t mean to and more likely he was just so overwhelmed with lust that he didn\u2019t care at that point.\n\nIn fact you\u2019re a little worried about being here by yourself with no one around. You half think Pervus is going to leap out somewhere and kill you too to shut you up. It would be exactly like him to do something like that. In fact now you think its weird to you that he HASN\u2019T shown up to kill you.\n\nYou\u2019ve got a lot of potential enemies right now, Pervus, the Ring Master, not to mention plain old Ajax who always wants to kill you. Randal is pretty much your only hope for survival now.\n\nEventually you wander back to the Carnival around show time. Everything goes as normal with a few exceptions. The Ring Master looks pre-occupied, Randal\u2019s act seems to be a lot more spectacular than usual, the clowns nowhere to be seen and all throughout the show you have a dreaded feeling that something really bad is going to happen.\n\nAnd you just may be right.", "action_results": [{"action": "Because the real show occurs afterwards", "result": "A dark moonlit night.\n\nCharley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. The Ring Master has Atlas, and looks around for his usual allies, the Freaks, and to the surprise of everyone Randal appears with most of the Normals behind him. You attempt to hide directly behind Randal figuring that will be the safest place.\n\n\u201cYOU? You\u2019re attempting to take over? You must be joking! Go take your fairy dust and\nprance off somewhere, this is between me and the she male freak!\u201d Charley spits.\n\u201cNo, you malignant midget! Your time and a criminal ways are at an end here today! And you too Ring Master! No longer will this Carnival be run by an exploitative tyrant!\u201d Randal retorts.\n\nThe Ring Master sees you and shakes his head.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m very disappointed that you decided to betray me here today Geek. You will learn to regret that fateful decision.\u201d\n\u201cEnough, of this fuckin\u2019 talk. Let\u2019s see who\u2019s gonna fuckin\u2019 run this show once and for all! Attack!\u201d\n\nCharley and his midgets begin the assault, and the other two sides follow suit. The fighting is furious and brutal. All you do is crawl away and try to hide under a trailer and hope Randal wins, which he looks like he\u2019s doing.\n\nRandal has the upper hand in every way, he has numerical superiority for one thing, and the other thing is he\u2019s casting actual magic spells. A couple of bolts of lightning fry Ajax and Charley. Another spell strikes down Atlas. All looks good for Randal\u2026until Pervus and his clown crew show up.\n\nWhen you first see them, they look like they\u2019ve already been in a fight. They\u2019re walking in a shambling motion and have wounds on them. When they get closer those wounds look like mortal one. In fact they are.\n\nPervus and the clowns are no longer among the living.\n\nIt takes awhile for anyone else to recognize this. Randal just thinks he\u2019s got more allies until they start biting other Normals (as well as some remaining Midgets and Freaks). Upon seeing this, he tries to cast another spell to destroy them, but is stopped when one of the previously dead bodies on the ground rises up and bites his leg. When he cries out, he sees another familiar face. Madam Orbec, who while dead, looks obviously displeased by the theft of her book.\n\n\u201cI TOLD YOU NOT TO USE THIS BOOK! NOW SUFFER ALONG WITH THE REST OF US!\u201d she shouts and bites a chunk of Randal\u2019s throat out. He falls to the ground to be consumed by more of the dead and the book goes flying out of his hand.\n\nAll of the bodies have risen now. They\u2019re attacking everyone living, you take this as your moment to escape, when you scramble from under the trailer you feel a very strong grip tighten around your shoulder. You look up and see the Ring Master.\n\n\u201cMy poor sad Geek. I told you that you would learn to regret your decision to betray me. I have to thank you though, while my Carnival may be no more, perhaps it was time for a change, and with this book (The Ring Master shows you the black book that Randal lost) I think I can make a lot of them.\u201d\n\nYou try to struggle, but its no use. The Ring Master has an unnaturally strong grip on you. He walks directly towards the zombie horde, dragging you along.\n\n\u201cWhy?! Why aren\u2019t they attacking you?\u201d is the last thing you cry out.\n\u201cSilly Geek, haven\u2019t you at least figured that one out by now? Zombies don\u2019t attack other undead.\u201d\n\nWith a sharp fang protruding in a grinning smile at you, the Ring Master hurls you to the zombies, who eat you alive.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Change the plan", "result": "\u201cHold on Pervus. I got a better idea.\u201d You say stopping Pervus from entering.\n\u201cGeek, that\u2019s the second time you\u2019ve interrupted my dick from finding happiness. If you do it again, it\u2019s gonna find happiness in YOU!\u201d\n\u201cUm\u2026well look, I was just thinking that it would be better if you got the book, I dunno if I\u2019m up for it. I\u2019ll distract Madam Orbec instead.\u201d\n\u201cThe ONLY reason why I agreed to this, was because of the possibility of getting some Granny pussy, and now you\u2019re fuckin\u2019 sayin\u2019 no? Fuck you Geek! I\u2019m doin\u2019 this shit now!\u201d\n\nPervus knocks you to the ground and enters Madam Orbec\u2019s tent. You begin to hear some weird noises. Some of it sounds like screams, but not of the human kind. You sit in shock unsure of what to do, and then soon Pervus comes back out with the black book. There\u2019s blood all over his clown costume.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not sure what the fuck you wanted this for, but you ain\u2019t gettin\u2019 it now Geek. See ya at show time.\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t want to check, but you do anyway. You go inside Madam Orbec\u2019s tent and see a gruesome sight. Something else is here though. You feel a force hit you several times. You see sheer depravity in your mind! It overwhelms you, you begin to cry, and laugh at the same time. You immediately run back out to hide somewhere utterly mad from what you saw.\n\nYou run off to the nearest town hoping nobody comes looking for you, and nobody does due to what happens at show time\u2026\n\nWith the black book in his possession, Pervus goes back to his own tent and begins reading it, wondering what you wanted it for. Soon he begins to discover the power contained inside. The reason why Madam Orbec never wanted Randal to use it is due to the evil contained within and didn\u2019t want that evil unleashed lest it destroy him. Of course Pervus isn\u2019t a choir boy like Randal, he embraces the evil and the evil embraces him. It\u2019s a match made in hell.\n\nWhen show time comes around he and his whole degenerate clown crew begin chanting from the book unleashing horrible powers. Many in the audience are killed as they attempt to escape, the Ring Master attempts to restore order, but with one utterance by Pervus, a burning black light annihilates her. The next blast destroys Atlas.\n\nRandle attempts some sort of cheap magic defense, but he\u2019s powerless against the sheer destruction Pervus is wreaking. Eventually some of the clowns surround and capture him and do unspeakable things to him until he\u2019s literally an empty husk.\n\nCharley and Ajax attempt to escape, but are run down and torn apart by strange shadow creatures that were summoned up.\n\nThe ones that manage to survive that terrible night become part of this twisted new Carnival that now travels the night seeking to pull more victims into its dreaded den of wickedness and suck their souls dry, with Pervus as the new crazed ring master.\n\nAnd while you weren\u2019t there for the event, you SAW it all, in your mind back at Madam Orbec\u2019s tent. One last curse by the spirits for your involvement in the death of Madam Orbec.\n\nYou are doomed to forever see the on going horrors committed by Pervus\u2019 Carnival, and yet can do nothing about it. You\u2019re eventually picked up off the street while during one of your screaming jags and thrown into a mental asylum, straight jacked and doped up with morphine.\n\nBut it doesn\u2019t help.\n\nYou still see.\n\nAnd you can\u2019t stop the screaming.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go see Salina", "result": "Maybe you just want to talk to Salina because you\u2019re creeped by Pervus or maybe you want to talk to her because you think she\u2019s pretty, or maybe it\u2019s a combination of both.\n\nWhatever the case the result is still the same when you bang on her trailer.\n\n\u201cPEEYOO! Geek! Get the fuck outta here, even if you did have some money I wouldn\u2019t debase myself!\u201d Salina says when she answers.\n\u201cNo, its not that, I need some help.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019ll help you get your ass kicked if you don\u2019t get outta here! I\u2019m sure Charley wouldn\u2019t like seeing you here lingering around me.\u201d\n\nYou just realized that. If Charley caught you here, he\u2019d probably torture the shit out of you and then let Ajax finish you off (Nevermind the fact that Salina IS a prostitute, but Charley isn\u2019t always logical when it comes to her, plus you\u2019re a punching bag anyway)\nYou need to not remain here as long as possible.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to convince her", "result": "\u201cLook, I just need your help to ste\u2026I mean borrow something! I heard you were good at borrowing things, so\u2026\u201d\n\u201cGo steal it yourself Geek! I\u2019m not your personal thief! And it\u2019s time for you to fucking go!\u201d\n\u201cListen! It\u2019s\u2026\u201d\n\nAs you aggressively begin to step inside the trailer, you suddenly hear some hissing and a couple snakes appear by Salina\u2019s foot. Before you have time to react, both of them dart their heads at your legs, giving you a bite.\n\nYou fall back on the ground, as the poison begins to take effect. First you feel paralysis set in then your organs shut down completely.\n\n\u201cHey, somebody come pick up this Geek! He\u2019s gonna smell even worse while dead!\u201d is the last thing you hear Salina shout.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Beg and plead pitifully", "result": "Being pitiful has always been something you\u2019ve been good at, sometimes it even works to your advantage. You collapse on the little piece of stairs you\u2019re standing on and start pleading.\n\n\u201cPlease Salina you gotta help me! (sob) I don\u2019t have anyone else to turn to! I need to sneak in Madam Orbec\u2019s tent and get a book from without her knowing (sob) or I\u2019m gonna die! (sob)\u201d\n\nSalina doesn\u2019t completely understand what the hell you\u2019re babbling about, but she just wants you to leave and stop stinking up the place. Salina goes back inside and grabs a bottle and dumps the entire contents on you. The shit burns like hell on the sores you have on your skin. You roll off the stairs and on to the ground in irritated pain.\n\n\u201cI dunno what the hell you\u2019re on about Geek, but you ain\u2019t sneaking anywhere as long as you smell the way you do. I just dumped a strong perfume on you. Normally you\u2019d smell like flowers, but with your disgusting odor all it\u2019s gonna do is cancel out your usual foulness and even then only for a little while giving you time to do whatever it is you have to do. And this is ALL the help you\u2019re getting from me! Now get outta here I got customers coming!\u201d Salina says and then slams her trailer door.\n\nNot exactly what you had in mind, but more help than you expected. You head to Madam Orbec\u2019s tent. When you arrive there\u2019s a distinct air of creepiness about it. You can\u2019t afford to waste too much time so you head around the back of the tent and start trying to pull up so you can sneak in and get the book. You only hope she doesn\u2019t happen to be looking in your direction while you\u2019re attempting to do this.\n\nAs luck would have it, she isn\u2019t, in fact when you crawl inside you see you\u2019re right near her bed where she\u2019s fast asleep. Next to the bed you see a small table with a black book on it. That must be it. You grab it.\n\nMadam Orbec then begins to stir. She starts sniffing in her sleep. The perfume must be wearing off!", "action_results": [{"action": "Run out of the front entance of the tent", "result": "No time to mess around lifting and crawling you just need to get out of here! You run out of the tent and don\u2019t stop until you reach Randal who wonders why you\u2019re breathing so hard.\n\nWhen you get back to Randal he wonder\u2019s why the hell you\u2019re so worked up.\n\n\u201c(Pant) I got the book.\u201d\n\u201cPhew! Well don\u2019t breathe all over me, just gimme the thing! Excellent. I\u2019ll study what I can tonight before show time and then afterwards we\u2019ll see who the new master is! And what\u2019s wrong with you Geek? Why are breathing so heavy and looking around\u2026you didn\u2019t let Madam Orbec see you borrow this did you?!\u201d\n\u201cNo, not at all. I\u2019m just winded from trying to get out there without her seeing me!\u201d\n\u201cWell you better make yourself scarce until showtime anyway. I\u2019m sure you wouldn\u2019t want to run into the Ring Master before hand. Relax, I will keep my end of the bargain. Now go.\u201d\n\nYou leave and linger around the edges of the Carnival, staying out of sight until show time. You just hope Randal does live up to his bargain and manages to take control, because if he doesn\u2019t, you\u2019re going to be in a world of shit with the Ring Master.\n\nEventually you wander back to the Carnival around show time. Everything goes as normal with a few exceptions. The Ring Master looks pre-occupied, and Randal\u2019s act seems to be a lot more spectacular than usual.", "action_results": [{"action": "But the real show occurs afterwards", "result": "A dark moonlit night.\n\nCharley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. It appears that Pervus and his clowns have also decided to join him. The Ring Master has Atlas, and looks around for his usual allies, the Freaks, and to the surprise of everyone Randal appears with most of the Normals behind him. You attempt to hide directly behind Randal figuring that will be the safest place.\n\n\u201cYOU? You\u2019re attempting to take over? You must be joking! Go take your fairy dust and\nprance off somewhere, this is between me and the she male freak!\u201d Charley spits.\n\u201cNo, you malignant midget! Your time and a criminal ways are at an end here today! And your too Ring Master! No longer will this Carnival be run by an exploitative tyrant!\u201d Randal retorts.\n\nThe Ring Master sees you and shakes his head.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m very disappointed that you decided to betray me here today Geek. You will learn to regret that fateful decision.\u201d\n\u201cEnough, of this fuckin\u2019 talk. Let\u2019s see who\u2019s gonna fuckin\u2019 run this show once and for all! Attack!\u201d\n\nCharley and his midgets begin the assault, and the other two sides follow suit. The fighting is furious and brutal. All you do is crawl away and try to hide under a trailer and hope Randal wins, which he looks like he\u2019s doing.\n\nRandal has the upper hand in every way, he has numerical superiority for one thing, and the other thing is he\u2019s casting actual magic spells. A couple of bolts of lightning fry Ajax and Charley. Another spell strikes down Atlas. All looks good for Randal, especially when he wipes out Pervus and all the clowns with a huge fireball and finally with one last spell he strikes down the Ring Master with a dark black light which completely disintegrates him.\n\nIts over.\n\n\u201cGeek! You can stop hiding! We won!\u201d Randal shouts.\n\u201cYes, and with the help of MY book!\u201d Madam Orbec says appearing from nowhere. \u201cWhat the hell is wrong with you Randal? Didn\u2019t I tell you not to mess with this book?\u201d Orbec begins hitting Randal and takes her book back.\n\u201cOw! I\u2019m sorry Madam! I just wanted to prove to you that I was ready to\u2026ow!\u201d\n\u201cYou\u2019ll never be ready for this book, you hear me? You\u2019re lucky you didn\u2019t bring the dead back to life with your careless chanting!\u201d then she points to you. \u201cAnd YOU\u2019RE lucky I didn\u2019t catch you stealing this for him! I would\u2019ve turned you into a worm which probably would be a step up for you!\u201d Orbec decides she doesn\u2019t want to dirty herself hitting you though, so she just leaves. After this embarrassing incident Randal regains his composure.\n\n\u201cOkay people get some rest for tomorrow, a new era of this Carnival has arrived and we have a lot of hard work ahead of us, but it\u2019ll be worth it! Because with magic anything is possible! And don\u2019t worry Geek, I still haven\u2019t forgotten about you, thanks to your help, you\u2019ll have a place in my Carnival.\u201d\n\nTime passes and Randal \u201ccleans up\u201d the Carnival of all remaining criminal activity, though without Charley around, it wasn\u2019t really a factor anymore. Salina ends up leaving though as the Carnival has gotten too \u201cGoody\u201d for her liking. Without Ajax around, Sasha ends up falling for Randal and the two eventually get married.\n\nThere also aren\u2019t anymore Freaks in the Carnival anymore; the few that survived ran off to eke out meager livings elsewhere. There were quite a few Midgets left, and were allowed to stay due to the fact that they were hard workers, but their status is severely diminished. In fact they\u2019re pretty relegated back to second class citizen status again.\n\nThe Carnival flourishes though as it becomes a truly wondrous and safe place for entire families. And your reward for your help was a complete magical transformation into\u2026\n\nAn animal keeper.\n\nHaving no other useful skills you\u2019re relegated to have to look after all the animals and take care of them in Randal\u2019s new Carnival.\n\nEvery day you take your life into your hands when dealing with the lions.\nEvery day the horses fart on you whenever you\u2019re around.\nEvery day you suffer the indignities of the monkeys throwing their shit at you. Not that it matters since you smell like shit anyway after having to clean up after the elephants.\n\nIn fact you only smell slightly better than when you were a Geek, though at least you don\u2019t have eat various parts of the animals\u2019 anatomies and you don\u2019t get beat up anymore.\n\nIt\u2019s a step up!", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Crawl back out the way you came", "result": "You figure you don\u2019t want anyone else seeing you run out of her tent with the book or else they\u2019ll only rat you out later. You lift up the tent and try to crawl back out. You waste too much time though; she wakes up when you\u2019re halfway through. She\u2019s not happy!\n\n\u201cGEEK! YOU DARE STEAL FROM ME! I CALL UPON THE SPIRITS TO CURSE YOU TO RESEMBLE THE LOWLY WORM YOU ARE!\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t think too much of those words at first, until you get fully out of the tent and find that you can\u2019t stand up to run anymore. You look behind yourself and to your horror you see that your legs have fused together into one fleshy mass. Soon the rest of you begins to transform. You gradually start to shrink as you try to crawl away in a hopeless attempt to escape your fate.\n\nWhen you\u2019ve fully transformed, Madam Orbec finally arrives to retrieve her book and sees you squirming around in the grass. She laughs and remarks how leaving you in that state is what you really deserve.\n\nBut she decides to show mercy for your plight by stepping on you and putting you out of your misery.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Run away!", "result": "This is all just too much for you; you don\u2019t want to be any part of this. You do what you\u2019ve always done all your life; run away leaving the carnival behind. Nobody goes looking for you, not even the Ring Master. Geeks like you are a dime a dozen. They can get another one.\n\nYou take up \u201cresidence\u201d in the nearest town, begging for money for booze and sleeping in the park. The townsfolk are a little less tolerant of the likes of you than the Carneys were though and besides they already have town drunks that they know and love. You\u2019re treated worse than you were at the Carnival if such a thing were possible. At least there you served somewhat of a purpose; here you\u2019re just a drain on the community.\n\nOne night the town\u2019s drain is solved when you\u2019re beaten and set on fire by the local young punks.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Kick at Charley", "result": "You stagger to get up and attempt to kick Charley, but instead to trip over yourself and fall\u2026right on to Charley\u2019s pointed stick. The only good thing is you skewered yourself right through the heart killing you instantly.\n\n\u201cAw hell. Hey guys! Someone get me another Geek! This one\u2019s dead.\u201d", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Jog your damn memory to remember who the hell you even associate with (Cast of Characters)", "result": "Just because you\u2019re all Carneys and united against the Rubes doesn\u2019t mean there isn\u2019t division in the ranks. You\u2019re all like a big dysfunctional family, and you\u2019re the scapegoat black sheep, you lucky Geek you.\n\nThe only good thing about being the GEEK, is that nobody considers you a threat or even a person! Plus you\u2019re usually sprawled out someplace either drunk or asleep. This means while others assume you\u2019re out of it and not competent enough to do anything except eat disgusting things, you\u2019ve over heard some interesting information in your half conscious state of mind. Things that will probably come in handy in the ensuing power struggle you\u2019re about to become embroiled in.\n\nSo if you keep your head down, use animal cunning, watch your ass and you might just come through this alive.\n\nAnd maybe, just maybe you\u2019ll finally get some respect.\n\nMaybe\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Cast of Characters (The Main Event)", "result": "The Ring Master\n\nNobody knows what his real name is and if they do nobody\u2019s telling and she\u2019s certainly not volunteering any information about himself. Of course everyone assumes she\u2019s male, but there\u2019s an \u201cair\u201d of androgyny about him leading to rumors that he may actually be female\u2026or possibly both. He\u2019s very pale, his voice has an unnatural melodic tone and he wears a traditional ring master suit with a top hat. The only thing she wants people to know and remember is that he is definitely in charge. Her main concern is to keep his carnival running and turning a profit; he doesn\u2019t really care what any of his employees do in their spare time unless it interferes or hampers the carnival.\n\nThe Ring Master is known for being \u201cFreak friendly\u201d after all not many would have jobs at all if it weren\u2019t for him, but by the same token he pays them fairly. Many see her as somewhat of a savior since he\u2019s given many of them a place in the world where they can be useful. She doesn\u2019t hold their hand or overprotect them he just gives them a chance. A chance that they can either succeed or fail in, but a chance they might not have had otherwise without him.\n\nHe tends to stay in his trailer until show time allowing her assistant Charley to do all his leg work. She\u2019s rarely seen walking around anywhere; instead he just suddenly \u201cappears\u201d and he\u2019s never seen outside at all during the daytime. There have been the hushed rumors and semi-jokes that she\u2019s really a vampire, but most people just think he\u2019s just weird and suffers from albinism which makes her less inclined on wanting to be exposed to the sun.\n\nWhile not sadistic, (He doesn\u2019t appear to get off on it like say Charley) he will make examples out of people that displease him and you\u2019ll definitely feel it. Oh how you\u2019ll feel it. When you have to see the Ring Master personally it\u2019s usually not a good thing.\n\nYou met him when she found you wandering and vomiting near his trailer at night while in your usual drunken states. She saw how utterly hopeless you were. You had no job, no home, no loved ones, no future prospects, yet he saw potential where there literally was none. He made a deal with you. Become the GEEK for a place to call home and all the liquor you could drink.\n\nWell gee how could you not pass up a deal like that?\n\nCharley the Midget\n\nCharley was a criminal long before he joined the carnival. The carnival just allowed him to flourish in those activities. He\u2019s in charge of most of the illegal activities that go on at the carnival as well as making life miserable for anyone who displeases the Ring Master. Of course he takes great delight in making people miserable whenever it suits him. He has found a like minded partner in Ajax the Strongman who acts as his muscle when the need arises. He\u2019s a first class sonofabitch, but he probably makes the carnival more profitable than it is.\n\nMidgets represent most of labor workforce in the carnival and being the \u201cBiggest\u201d and toughest midget at the carnival makes him their unofficial leader which the rest of the midgets have mixed emotions about, but with all his connections and power there is little that they can do about it even if they wanted to. Charley constantly reminds them that they are the real backbone of the carnival and also reminds them how townies and rubes would often pick on them for fun and ever since he arrived they don\u2019t do that anymore lest they suffer the consequences. Gruesome consequences.\n\nCharley definitely harbors secret plans to take over the carnival completely one day, he likes to think of himself as the \u201cReal Ring Master\u201d and dresses like his boss except his suit is checkered and has an especially tall top hat. (To extend his height no doubt) He feels that with Ajax and \u201chis people\u201d behind him he\u2019ll be able to launch a take over when the time is right. All he needs to do is get a few more of the others to side with him.\n\nAs for you, Charley likes to take any free opportunity he has to humiliate you, which seems rather pointless given you don\u2019t have any self-respect to begin with, still it makes him laugh. Chances are if he did take over the Carnival you\u2019d still have a \u201cjob\u201d since Charley wouldn\u2019t want to get rid of his favorite whipping boy.\n\nThe Remarkable Randal\n\nRandal is the appointed spokesperson for the \u201cnormal\u201d Carneys such as the acrobats, tightrope walkers and other performers that rely on their genuine skills rather than their genetic conditions. Randal himself is a magician, but makes no pretense that he actually has any kind of real magical powers, but he believes magic exists. He\u2019s constantly acquiring old books hoping that someday that he can learn how to perform real magic one day. Randal is a bit of an optimistic dreamer, he believes the carnival is supposed to be a place of fun and wonder for the whole family. He IS that boy that ran away to join the circus in a sense as he did run away from his family who were fundamentalists that believed him to be dabbling in Satanic worship with his magic tricks.\n\nHe doesn\u2019t really like the idea of the carnival having \u201cfreaks\u201d for the sake of having them. He feels its pandering to the lowest common denominator and cheapening the other Carnies who actually have to rely on a learned skill and he really doesn\u2019t approve of all the illegal activity that goes on (Especially in a place which is supposed to be for the children) he blames the Ring Master as much as Charley for this, since the Ring Master turns a blind eye to it when he should be stopping it.\n\nRandal is a little more open about his rebellious nature than Charley and complains to the Ring Master whenever he gets the chance, (One of the few that gets away with it without consequences) to which his last response was if he doesn\u2019t like the way things are being run, he can either leave or make his move. So far Randal hasn\u2019t gone anywhere, so maybe he\u2019s going to take the Ring Master up on his challenge. Charley thinks he\u2019s a lot of talk and doesn\u2019t think he really has the balls to do it so he\u2019s not worried about him.\n\nConsidering Randal\u2019s views, you might find yourself out of a job if Randal got things his way. Shock value and Freaks wouldn\u2019t really have a place in Randal\u2019s carnival. Unsurprisingly Randal finds you and your act disgusting and completely unsuitable for anyone, especially children. (Even though the kiddies really like throwing chickens at you)", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Cast of Characters (The Secondary Acts)", "result": "Ajax the Strongman\n\nWhile Charley has delusions of grandeur, he is somewhat grounded in reality enough not to believe he\u2019s invincible. Ajax on the other hand probably thinks he could catch a bullet in his teeth and spit it back at his assailant. The man is completely narcissistic. Undoubtedly he is in good shape, very strong and probably a lot better looking than most of the Carnies, and he takes every opportunity to let everyone know it. He sneers at all the other guys for being \u201clesser\u201d than him (Save Charley, Atlas and the Ring Master) and of course shamelessly grabs at any woman that strikes his fancy. So pleased with his own body image that he basically walks around in a loin cloth at all times. Even when the Carnival is someplace cold and snowing. He\u2019d probably walk around naked if he could get away with it.\n\nWhy he\u2019s allied with Charley given his own arrogance and his \u201cnormie\u201d status might cause some to wonder, but the reasons aren\u2019t far fetched. Besides Ajax\u2019s own criminal mentality, Ajax is an opportunist, and he\u2019ll make more money under Charley and he thinks Charley is going to be on the winning team (Especially with him on his side) Not to mention Ajax doesn\u2019t really like the Ring Master. Never has. His pale androgynous nature really creeps him out. And the Remarkable Randal is a pussy as far as Ajax is concerned.\n\nAnother person that Ajax definitely doesn\u2019t like is you. While most others will simply avoid, taunt or abuse you for awhile for amusement, Ajax HATES you and has nearly beaten you to death a couple times. Presumably he sees you as a pathetic example of the male specimen that should\u2019ve been killed at birth and while he may be right, he\u2019s kept in check by Charley and/or the Ring Master from carrying out his desires. (As a rule Carneys are NOT supposed to kill each other\u2026well unless there\u2019s a good reason for it)\n\nYou\u2019d be in a world of shit if something ever happened to both of them.\n\nAtlas the Cyclopean Giant\n\nIf there\u2019s one person that\u2019s possibly stronger than Ajax, it\u2019s Atlas. (He\u2019s certainly scarier) He\u2019s an eight foot Cyclops that wears a hood covering everything except a single unblinking eye. He stands outside the Ring Master\u2019s trailer at all times not letting anyone pass unless the Ring Master wishes it. Atlas has been with the Ring Master even before the Carnival.\n\nAtlas was personally brought up by the Ring Master and is utterly loyal to him. It\u2019s commonly thought that the Ring Master found him abandoned as a baby and took him in, of course rumors also persist that he\u2019s the Ring Master\u2019s son. (Whether the Ring Master is the father OR the mother causes more rumors) Whatever the truth, Atlas might as well be his son as he certainly considers the Ring Master as a parental figure since he raised him.\n\nAtlas\u2019 sole job is to protect the Ring Master and to look intimidating. A job he does very well. Atlas rarely speaks and if he does it\u2019s usually a one word response in a low voice. Charley hopes Ajax will be his counter balance when the time comes, of course Ajax feels he\u2019ll be able to beat Atlas with no problems.\n\nAtlas is one of the few people that has no opinion of you, he just sees you as another Carney who works for the Ring Master and aren\u2019t allowed to see him unless he deems it so.\n\nMadam Orbec\n\nMadam Orbec is the gypsy fortune teller. Like most fortune tellers she claims to genuinely have psychic powers, but most likely she\u2019s just really good at conning people. Still she always keeps in character at all times, so it\u2019s possible she believes her own hype. One thing she does a lot is talk to \u201cspirits\u201d that aren\u2019t there. Sometimes this results in her talking to herself for great lengths of time and often screaming to tell \u201cthem\u201d to shut up. She doesn\u2019t even appear to notice anyone else around while she\u2019s doing this. All of which pretty much means most of the other Carneys consider her just mentally unstable and is listening to the voices in her own head.\n\nOddly Randal completely believes she has psychic abilities, this is probably due to Randal\u2019s own naivety and his own desperate belief that magic is real. He consults her frequently about what she sees in the future for the carnival, it\u2019s possible that\u2019s why he hasn\u2019t made any kind of move of his own because he\u2019s guided by her visions to a certain degree. Madam Orbec likes Randal, but remains suspicious if he isn\u2019t just trying to be friendly to gain access to an old book she has supposedly containing secrets to necromancy.\n\nBecause of this factor, unlike the Ring Master and Charley\u2019s \u201cright hand men\u201d, Madam Orbec isn\u2019t necessarily on Randal\u2019s side. She believes a great change is coming in the carnival, but the spirits haven\u2019t told her exactly what that is yet. Her visions and conversations have been increasing to the point where she can barely keep it together for the rubes anymore. Her sanity has been in severe question for years, but now her competency is as well.\n\nOf course she still has enough sense to not want to be near you. Apparently the spirits don\u2019t like you anymore than the living do.\n\nPervus the Clown\n\n\u201cPervert\u201d or \u201cPervo\u201d is what he\u2019s usually called and for good reason. Pervus is probably the next disgusting Carney after you, the only difference is he has a group of like minded \u201cfriends\u201d and the other thing is he\u2019s a clown. And clowns no matter how twisted and evil they are; they can get away with it.\n\nHe and his gang of equally demented red nosed fellows have to be the sickest bunch in the Carnival, particularly in the sex department. It\u2019s not surprising that townie children start disappearing whenever the Carnival makes an extended visit somewhere and they certainly haven\u2019t all run off to join, what ultimately happens to them is better left unmentioned and not dwelled upon too much. But it isn\u2019t just children that disappear. Local farm animals will disappear as well (Strangely these poor creatures may be spared death, if the Carnival is in need of a couple new pack animals) and local graveyards may even be raided\u2026\n\nOf course Pervus and the clowns think it\u2019s all a big joke on the rubes.\n\nDespite being the symbols of utter depravity, they are one of the other \u201cmajor groups\u201d and as is fitting they are a wild card. They do their job when its show time and do it very well which puts them in good standing with the Ring Master. They often indulge in the prostitutes and liquor Charley provides. And while Randal barely approves of them (To be honest he probably isn\u2019t aware of how bad they REALLY are) he does recognize them as having a talent and are an important staple of any carnival. (They also aren\u2019t Freaks, though classifying them as \u201cNormals\u201d might be stretching it) Its unknown who Pervus will side with, but they see that there\u2019s definitely benefits for any of them.\n\nPervus and his crew are the one exception concerning you. Instead of them avoiding you, YOU purposely avoid them! While they\u2019d never kill you (They do still follow that one rule that you don\u2019t kill a fellow Carney for no reason) that wouldn\u2019t prevent them from having their way with you if the urge ever struck them. You have been known to resemble a rotting dead body (In smell especially) when you\u2019re passed out after all.\n\nSasha and Salina\n\nSasha is the on/off girlfriend of Ajax. She\u2019s not only a contortionist, but also an acrobat. She\u2019s very beautiful, but her self-esteem isn\u2019t really the best otherwise she wouldn\u2019t be with Ajax. He pretty much treats her like shit, and she\u2019ll put up with it, until he really fucks up and then she throws him out of her trailer. Upon which time he\u2019ll continue to harass and stalk her until she takes him back for the umpteenth time and the cycle starts over again. She\u2019s definitely the star attraction of the \u201cnormal\u201d Carneys, besides Randal. (Who really wishes she wasn\u2019t so close to Ajax.)\n\nSalina is Charley\u2019s girlfriend\u2026or at least he likes to tell everyone she is. She\u2019s the tattooed woman and also dances with various kinds of snakes. (Imaginatively called a \u201cSnake Lady\u201d) She\u2019s pretty, but has a harder look than Sasha, its obvious by her demeanor she had a rough life before the Carnival. Charley is constantly hitting on her, but he\u2019s unsuccessful for the most part though every now and then he gets lucky, though you suspect it\u2019s his money talking more than his \u201ccharms\u201d at work in those cases. In any event she isn\u2019t particularly fond of him. She\u2019s considered a normal, but her activities and lifestyle lean more towards the criminal mindset particularly prostitution. So she has more in common with Charley than Randal who looks his nose down at her.\n\nProbably due to the partnership of Charley and Ajax, Sasha and Salina associate with each other more than they might normally would. As it turns out the two are genuinely friends and speak to each other frequently, one may wonder if they aren\u2019t plotting something on their own together\u2026\n\nOf course you\u2019d never know since the two of them avoid you like the plague because you\u2019re just icky.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Cast of Characters (The Sideshows)", "result": "Normals\n\nNormals is really a generic term for anyone who isn\u2019t a Freak, but its often used to describe Carneys who aren\u2019t deformed in some way and make a living in the Carnival utilizing some skill. (\u201cNormals\u201d who aren\u2019t Carneys are usually just called \u201cRubes\u201d or at best \u201cTownies\u201d) The core of these include acrobats, tightrope walkers, game barkers and the like. Normals as always out number the Freaks, but they aren\u2019t nearly as unified, though Randal\u2019s been trying to, in his effort to gain power.\n\nNearly all Normals find you revolting and run you off if you get near, either verbally OR physically.\n\nFreaks\n\nThis is a generic term for Carneys who have some sort of genetic condition that separates them from the rest of society. They can range from being very hairy, have no limbs, or have a few extra ones. In any case they are one of the major carnival draws. Some learn a few skills to go along with their deformities, but it\u2019s mainly their horrific appearance that they rely upon. Despite all their different forms, they are very unified and support the Ring Master for giving them a place in the world. Jasmine the bearded lady tends to be the Matriarch of them all\n\nFreaks are a little more tolerant of you, since they\u2019ve also suffered scorn and ridicule too, but you\u2019re not REALLY one of them and as such you\u2019re still an outsider and aren\u2019t really welcomed around them.\n\nMidgets\n\nNot quite normals and not quite freaks, but the midgets are the ones who get things done in the Carnival and keep it running. (Though everyone else refers to them as Midgets, they prefer to refer to each other as Dwarves) They make up a majority of the labor force of the Carnival, a thankless job to be sure, and one that went unappreciated until Charley arrived. Now they make a lot more thanks to his \u201cextra curricular\u201d activities. They are pretty much unified, though they have mixed feelings about their self appointed leader.\n\nMidgets are overworked at the best of times, so when a smelly disgusting Geek like you is around they really don\u2019t have the tolerance or patience for it. Bob is about the only one who\u2019ll even talk to you, the rest tend to kick you in the shins and chase you off with their work tools while shouting obscenities.\n\nPinheads\n\nAn interesting sub-society within the Freak community. They all tend to hang out together constantly laughing and babbling nonsensical ramblings. Though they may appear childlike and carefree, those qualities can mask a mean spiritedness sometimes.\n\nYou\u2019d know since you\u2019ve experienced this meanness first hand.\n\nClowns\n\nPure evil wrapped up in the guise of something supposedly funny and harmless. While technically classified as \u201cnormals\u201d, there isn\u2019t anything normal about them. One wonders if they\u2019re actually even human underneath that make up. All intelligent right thinking people stay away from them.\n\nEven YOU stay away from clowns!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Back to the story", "result": "Geek:\n\n1. A person regarded as foolish or clumsy.\n\n2. A person who is single-minded or accomplished in scientific or technical pursuits, but is felt to be socially inept.\n\n3. A carnival performer whose show consists of bizarre and disgusting acts.\n\n\nYour breath stinks from the foul things you\u2019ve been eating and the rest of you stinks from not bathing in who knows when.\n\nYour head hurts from the cheap moonshine you\u2019ve been getting \u201cpaid\u201d in.\n\nRubes often throw stuff at you and spit on you.\n\nMost of the other Carnies find you utterly repulsive and avoid you, a couple of them just abuse you for various reasons.\n\nOn a good day, only the Pinheads come to your cell and taunt you with their gibbering laughs and mongoloid chatter.\n\nYou have absolutely no worth as a human being, you get no respect from others, and you have no respect for yourself\u2026and why should you? You are the lowest form of life in Carney society. You\u2019re not a real performer; what you do can\u2019t really be considered a skill. You\u2019re not even a real freak. At least a deformed freak can evoke an emotion of horror, or pity, or even admiration for overcoming their condition. You weren\u2019t born \u201cthis way\u201d. You chose to do this. All you evoke is disgust and revulsion. At best you\u2019re laughed at and not in the good way like those pervert clowns you work with.\n\nFuck all that \u201cWildman of Borneo\u201d shit that the Ringmaster tries to tell all the rubes. You\u2019re little more than a bum with a \u201cjob\u201d. A degrading job that involves you to debase yourself, all for the amusement and shock value of others, but hey it keeps a \u201croof\u201d over your head and you pleasantly drunk enough to just barely forget how utterly pathetic your life is.\n\nYou are the GEEK.\n\nYou wake up to a bucket of piss being thrown in your face. Not the first time and certainly won\u2019t be the last.\n\n\u201cYou like the taste of that Geek? Get up Geek! The Ring Master wants to see you!\u201d Charley orders then he throws the empty bucket at your head. The comical sound it makes hitting your skull and the pain it causes makes Charley laugh. Then he jabs you a couple times with his pointed stick.\n\nMidgets can be so cruel\u2026", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story35.json b/data/scraper/stories/story35.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..da3aa23 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story35.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=51926", "context": "", "first_story_block": "\"We are all in the gutter, but some of us are looking at the stars.\"\n\n\nA good quote, you think to yourself. It'd have had to be written by an Irishman, of course. The English would never speak of themselves being in the gutter with the common muck,, they'd claim to be of the stars themselves if they could. No, an Irishman would have to have written it, because only an Irishman would understand subjugation.\n\n\nYou stand under a gray sky, a field of barley and oats surrounding you. Thanks to it being August, there's relatively little to do, so you're given time to think. Of course, without working to keep you going, the thinking usually goes downhill. Either your evenings end with you grabbing the bottle, or staring at those stars as dreams of freedom fill your mind.\n\n\nEireann is truly in the gutter, you think to yourself. The British boot sits on her throat, keeping her down, like it has for hundreds of years. It will continue to, until the people can rise up and fix that problem. Of course, Britain weakens, its empire collapsing inwards. It's only a matter of time before you finish what the proud Fenians of old had started, what Wolfe Tone continued, and what your generation will finish: the fight for independence. \n\n\n\"Michael! Michael, get in here!\" a shrill voice screams from the farmhouse. \n\n\nYou turn, sighing, as you work towards the farmhouse, your boots plodding through the mud. It's always something with that woman, you think to yourself. You reach the door, pushing it inwards as you walk into your cramped kitchen. \n\n\n\"Ma, what's wrong?\" you say, leaning in the doorway.\n\n\nMa sits in the kitchen at the table, a newspaper in her hands. Joseph stands next to her, his tall, sturdy frame filling a long overcoat. Mary is staring around Joseph, a frail, timid creature in comparison to your burly brother, like a delicate flower growing next to a great Oak. Ma motions for you to see the paper, and you shrug, leaning in to see the pages.\n\n\nYou lean over, looking at the crinkled paper. \"BRITAIN AT WAR: GERMANY IGNORES FINAL ULTIMATUM\" reads the title.\n\n\n\"Jesus Christ,\" you say.\n\n\nYou're struck in the face by Ma, who doesn't miss a beat in doing so. While the age has certainly taken much from the woman, it sure hasn't sapped her strength by how much it stings. Still, your mind is too focused on the looming war to even register the pain. \n\n\n\"Michael, don't take the Lord's name in vain!\" the old woman croaks.\n\n\n\"We're at war, Ma, don't blame him. He's shocked,\" Mary says, rubbing your arm.\n\n\n\"We're at war?\" Joseph says indignantly. \"When did Ireland declare war?! This is their doing, not ours!\"\n\n\n\"You can't be saying that, Joseph. It's our empire too!\" Mary says.\n\n\n\"Like bloody hell it is!\" Joseph says, stepping back to avoid the incoming slap from Ma. \"I'd sooner bow downs to the King of Holland than the King of England.\"\n\n\n\"They gave us a parliament!\"\n\n\n\"They didn't give us a parliament! They promised us a parliament, which we haven't gotten! Now that'll be postponed because of the war, and when that's finished, we'll be feeling the British boot pressed against our throats yet again!\n\n\nThere's a short silence, as you all think about the repercussions this new war will have.\n\n\n\"Will you be signing up? They're recruiting,\" Mary says softly.\n\n\nJoseph lets out a barking laugh, shaking his head in disgust.\n\n\n\"Are you joking? Unless the Kaiser's recruiting Irishmen to take out the crown, you can count me out!\"\n\n\nJoseph spits on the ground, turning and heading out of the room. Ma immediately darts up as quick as a bullet, far faster than any old woman has a right to do, heading after him to give him another smack. You chuckle as the two rush out of the room. This leaves you and your sister standing alone around the table. \n\n\n\"We're in dark times, Michael,\" Mary says to you. \"I'm worried about Joseph. He's been hanging around too many hotheads, violent thugs and brutes the lot of them!\"\n\n\n\"Joseph's fine,\" you say dismissively. \"How do you think he'd react when you asked him if he'd sign up?\"\n\n\n\"I suppose,\" she says. \"But, Michael, you understand, right? Why we need to serve the Empire, to prove the Irish are a loyal, hard-working people.\"\n\n\n\"To prove that to who?\" you say, annoyed. \"The British? They saw how loyal we are many a time, they just don't like what we're loyal to. We're Irish, Mary, not British. Don't forget it.\"\n\n\nMary turns in a huff, moving out of the room. Thankfully, this leaves you alone to think, and you let out a quiet sigh of contentment, sitting down at the table. You grab the newspaper, flicking through it. Might as well read up while you're alone.", "action_results": [{"action": "Read \"Hundred year anniversary of the foundation of the Apprentice Boys of Derry Club\" (General History)", "result": "The nation of Ireland has had a long and varied history. From the Mesolithic hunter-gatherers who walked there via land bridge, the Neolithic Men behind the ancient and amazing Newgrange, the Celts who soon popularized the country when it was known as Hibernia and from the Christians who spread after the return of Saint Patrick, who was enslaved by Irish pirates in his youth and endless Viking attacks, there's been a long history of pioneers and innovators creating a proud and noble nation.\n\n\nIrish history first has serious Anglo involvement in the Norman invasion of Ireland. Before then Ireland was simply a series of kingdoms and warring clans. The larger and more advanced Norman forces soon managed to conquer considerable sections of Ireland. However, rather than push for a full takeover, English focuses soon shifted, leaving a fortified area known as the Pale around Dublin under British control, with the rest mostly being allowed to survive under local rule. After this, there was a divide in power between the Gaelic Lords who could trace their origins back to the Celts who popularized the lands, and the Norman lords descended from those who sought to conquer the island.\n\n\nHowever, in 1536, Henry VII led an invasion of Ireland. Although there was brutal fighting as the Irish appealed to Catholic Spain for help, Ireland was soon conquered. Then, with a religious divide forming due to the birth of Protestantism, the issues first began arising. Using a system of land confiscation and colonization known as Plantation, English and Scottish Protestants were given Irish land to run, using the Irish Catholics as slaves. Although there were many brutal Irish rebellions such as the War of the Three Kings, which succeeded temporarily before the re-conquest of Ireland by Oliver Cromwell, the Rebellion of 1641, which was fought over the division between Catholics and Protestants, and many more bloody and brutal rebellions, Ireland failed ot successfully regain control of its lands, and were treated as second class citizens by the Protestants who ruled over the country.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back", "result": "\"We are all in the gutter, but some of us are looking at the stars.\"\n\n\nA good quote, you think to yourself. It'd have had to be written by an Irishman, of course. The English would never speak of themselves being in the gutter with the common muck,, they'd claim to be of the stars themselves if they could. No, an Irishman would have to have written it, because only an Irishman would understand subjugation.\n\n\nYou stand under a gray sky, a field of barley and oats surrounding you. Thanks to it being August, there's relatively little to do, so you're given time to think. Of course, without working to keep you going, the thinking usually goes downhill. Either your evenings end with you grabbing the bottle, or staring at those stars as dreams of freedom fill your mind.\n\n\nEireann is truly in the gutter, you think to yourself. The British boot sits on her throat, keeping her down, like it has for hundreds of years. It will continue to, until the people can rise up and fix that problem. Of course, Britain weakens, its empire collapsing inwards. It's only a matter of time before you finish what the proud Fenians of old had started, what Wolfe Tone continued, and what your generation will finish: the fight for independence. \n\n\n\"Michael! Michael, get in here!\" a shrill voice screams from the farmhouse. \n\n\nYou turn, sighing, as you work towards the farmhouse, your boots plodding through the mud. It's always something with that woman, you think to yourself. You reach the door, pushing it inwards as you walk into your cramped kitchen. \n\n\n\"Ma, what's wrong?\" you say, leaning in the doorway.\n\n\nMa sits in the kitchen at the table, a newspaper in her hands. Joseph stands next to her, his tall, sturdy frame filling a long overcoat. Mary is staring around Joseph, a frail, timid creature in comparison to your burly brother, like a delicate flower growing next to a great Oak. Ma motions for you to see the paper, and you shrug, leaning in to see the pages.\n\n\nYou lean over, looking at the crinkled paper. \"BRITAIN AT WAR: GERMANY IGNORES FINAL ULTIMATUM\" reads the title.\n\n\n\"Jesus Christ,\" you say.\n\n\nYou're struck in the face by Ma, who doesn't miss a beat in doing so. While the age has certainly taken much from the woman, it sure hasn't sapped her strength by how much it stings. Still, your mind is too focused on the looming war to even register the pain. \n\n\n\"Michael, don't take the Lord's name in vain!\" the old woman croaks.\n\n\n\"We're at war, Ma, don't blame him. He's shocked,\" Mary says, rubbing your arm.\n\n\n\"We're at war?\" Joseph says indignantly. \"When did Ireland declare war?! This is their doing, not ours!\"\n\n\n\"You can't be saying that, Joseph. It's our empire too!\" Mary says.\n\n\n\"Like bloody hell it is!\" Joseph says, stepping back to avoid the incoming slap from Ma. \"I'd sooner bow downs to the King of Holland than the King of England.\"\n\n\n\"They gave us a parliament!\"\n\n\n\"They didn't give us a parliament! They promised us a parliament, which we haven't gotten! Now that'll be postponed because of the war, and when that's finished, we'll be feeling the British boot pressed against our throats yet again!\n\n\nThere's a short silence, as you all think about the repercussions this new war will have.\n\n\n\"Will you be signing up? They're recruiting,\" Mary says softly.\n\n\nJoseph lets out a barking laugh, shaking his head in disgust.\n\n\n\"Are you joking? Unless the Kaiser's recruiting Irishmen to take out the crown, you can count me out!\"\n\n\nJoseph spits on the ground, turning and heading out of the room. Ma immediately darts up as quick as a bullet, far faster than any old woman has a right to do, heading after him to give him another smack. You chuckle as the two rush out of the room. This leaves you and your sister standing alone around the table. \n\n\n\"We're in dark times, Michael,\" Mary says to you. \"I'm worried about Joseph. He's been hanging around too many hotheads, violent thugs and brutes the lot of them!\"\n\n\n\"Joseph's fine,\" you say dismissively. \"How do you think he'd react when you asked him if he'd sign up?\"\n\n\n\"I suppose,\" she says. \"But, Michael, you understand, right? Why we need to serve the Empire, to prove the Irish are a loyal, hard-working people.\"\n\n\n\"To prove that to who?\" you say, annoyed. \"The British? They saw how loyal we are many a time, they just don't like what we're loyal to. We're Irish, Mary, not British. Don't forget it.\"\n\n\nMary turns in a huff, moving out of the room. Thankfully, this leaves you alone to think, and you let out a quiet sigh of contentment, sitting down at the table. You grab the newspaper, flicking through it. Might as well read up while you're alone.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Read \"Ireland Today: Current Events\" (General Background)", "result": "Ireland is home to a serious cultural divide. The majority of Ireland is made up of the Irish Catholics descended from the original Celtic tribes as well as British colonists who interbred with them. They're the vast majority in Ireland, although due to British-caused sectarianism they're much poorer than the Protestant majority. The Catholics are the main supporters for the Home Rule movement, which wants Ireland to have its own parliament. \n\n\nThe other main ethnic group are the Protestants, descended from later British colonists who arrived with a specialized attempt to further colonize Ireland with the plantations, which were more successfully in the Northern Province of Ulster, leading to that being the richest and most Protestant-controlled area. The Protestants are much richer and more powerful in comparison to the Catholics thanks to British backing. They're behind the Unionist movement that wants to stay under the rule of Britain's parliament to keep power in Protestant hands.\n\n\nIreland suffers from serious political divide for these reasons. Ireland is ruled by the British Monarch and Parliament, although recent acts have passed to give Ireland it's own parliament, though Britain will still be in power over Ireland and be in charge of war, trade, foreign policy and war. Still the recent war with Germany has prevented this from being put into place. There's a small, hardcore movement that wants full Irish independence with the party Sinn Fein, although the success of the Home Rule Party in passing the recent acts have drawn votes away from the party.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Read \"Planned Marches, Events and Meetings\" (Factions)", "result": "There are several prominent factions that have power in Ireland.\n\n\nThe British Government are the rulers of Ireland, ever since the invasion of Ireland by King Henry VI. Through the Royal Irish Constabulary, or RIC police force they maintain control of the militias that are rising to power in Ireland.\n\n\nThe Irish Volunteers are a militia of Irish patriots who have risen up in response to the rise of the Ulster Volunteers to ensure, with violence if necessary, that nothing prevents the Home Rule Act from being passed. It is is led by Eoin MacNeill, although the actions of John Redmond and the Irish Parliamentary party has huge sway over it. They number over 180,000.\n\n\nThe Home Rule Party, now renamed as the Irish Parliamentary Party, is a political party that has pledged to fight for Irish Home Rule. They've enjoyed huge popularity because of the recent passing of the Home Rule Act. They are led by John Redmond.\n\n\nThe Ulster Volunteers are a group of Protestants who have risen up and armed themselves, with the goal of resisting Home Rule at all costs. They signed the Solemn League and Covenant, pledging their lives to fight against Home Rule, some even signing in their own blood. They number over 100,000.\n\n\nThe Unionist Party is a political party that has pledged to keep Ireland under the British Parliament. They are popular among Protestants and in Ulster.\n\n\nThe Irish Republic Brotherhood (IRB) are an underground group that have pledged to rise up against the British and fight against their rule in order to get a free, independent Ireland. They are led by a secret military council, with Padraig Pearse holding the most power among them.\n\n\nSinn Fein is a political party that supports full Irish independence and the creation of an Irish republic that would be separate from Britain. It is led by Arthur Griffith. Unbeknownst to Griffith, it has a strong IRB element undercover in it.\n\n\nThe Irish Citizen Army is a militia made up of working class who support socialism and a change in the economy to give more rights to the worker, and a protection of workers rights in this time of industrialization. They are led by James Connolly.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Read \"Personal Stories\" (Personal Background)", "result": "You're a young man of nineteen years, a mind full of wit and a heart full of ideals. With a relatively moderate sized farm, for a Catholic, you're not doing too badly for yourself, with enough crops to feed and cloth the family with even a bit left over, but you're a far sight from rich, instead forced to work hard during the Spring and Autumn months, laboring away to keep the farm going.\n\n\nYour father died a good few years ago, when sepsis hit him hard. Ma was left to finish raising you all, and with her strict Catholic upbringing, she worked hard at it. Sure, she raised a pair of lads who take to the drink a bit too often, aren't afraid to gamble and swear as much as any other man, but you're both good, moral, god-fearing men. \n\n\nJoseph has always been the more quick. As your younger brother, he never learnt discipline at the end of your father's belt, so once he learned to overcome the sting of Ma's slaps, he was a rogue from then on. Short-tempered and quick to fight, he's a passionate fellow. Rather than raise his hand to a woman he'd sooner hack it off, and if you're good to him, he'd never betray you as long as he'd live.\n\n\nMary, on the other hand, is a frail, gentle creature. She's always kind-hearted to a fault, she's toss a bone to a wolf. A good, Catholic, chaste and modest girl, she's the envy of more than a few boys. Of course, given that she has Joseph and you for brothers, it's enough to keep them away. However, she's too young and naive to understand that the relationship between the British and Irish isn't a peaceful one, still thinking that there's a chance for peace between you two.\n\n\nAll in all, you've a good, strong Irish family, working the fields to survive like many, many others. ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Put down the paper and get back to the field (One Month Later...)", "result": "The next month is one of turmoil and trouble. The war escalates, and it does as suspected in stopping home rule in its tracks, much to the frustration of the Irish people. That is, to the frustration of the hard-working Catholics. The rich, upper-class Protestants are more than happy to keep the power in the hands of the British who support the status quo that gets them richer and gets you poorer.\n\n\nYou sit in the kitchen, the kettle on the burner as you wait for the water to boil so you can get a cup of tea. Ma comes in, a bag of groceries in one hand and a newspaper in the other. She pops the newspaper down on the table, and goes off to begin buttering bread. You lean over the newspaper, reading intently.\n\n\n\"Don't slouch, you'll end up hobbled,\" Ma says, walking into the room.\n\n\n\"I love you too, Ma. I'm doing fine, thanks for asking. Yourself?\" you say dryly.\n\n\n\"Don't be cheeky!\" Ma chastises. \n\n\n\"I made you a cup of tea,\" you say.\n\n\nMa leans in, her tone immediately changing, kissing you on the lips for a brief peck before moving towards the tea bags. If nothing else, the woman appreciates a cup of tea.\n\n\n\"Thank you, Michael,\" she says. \n\n\nYou grab the newspaper, and begin reading. \"John Redmond to address Irish volunteers\" is the title. Reading on, you learn that John Redmond is assembling the Irish Volunteers today for a grand speech. It's actually happening fairly close by, so it'll be easy to head down to it. \n\n\nJoseph walks into the room, taking off his cap and leaning over you to read the newspaper. \n\n\n\"Redmond's calling an assembly,\" you tell him. \"We should go.\"\n\n\n\"Give me a sec, I'm still reading,\" he says, before staying silent for a brief moment. \"We should definitely go. The volunteers need numbers. We could fight for the independence of the country.\"\n\n\n\"Let's do it, then,\" you say. \"We'll head after tea.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Head to the assembly", "result": "When you arrive at the assemble, the speech has already started. A massive crowd of volunteers stands near the stage, listening to Redmond intently.\n\n\n\"It is our responsibility, nay, our duty from God our Father himself, to protect a fellow proud Catholic nation like Belgium! If we join up with the British Army, we prove our loyalty, prove that we are to be trusted and show to Britain that the Irish people are strong, that the Irish people are proud, and that the Irish people are loyal! I ask you, sons of Eireann, to join up with the British Army if you're able, and if you're not, we abandon the name the Irish Volunteers. Instead, we are the National Volunteers! So, who's with me? What proud Irish men are willing to take up the cause?\"\n\n\nWhile many cheers go up through the crowd, there are several boos. The majority of the people here seem to support Redmond's choice, but a small minority seems outraged. The outraged begin storming off, seemingly led by the Volunteers' leader Eoin MacNeill, although to your surprise the majority seem to be staying amongst England.\n\n\n\"This is an outrage! Anyone loyal to the spirit of the Volunteers won't stand for this! We won't pay their blood toll!\" MacNeill yells.\n\n\nYou also notice that Redmond is directing many of the Irish Volunteers, or National Volunteers now, you suppose, towards a recruitment officer for the British Army, while the rest of the crowd digests this new information.\n\n\nIreland is going through troubled times, and you need to do your part. The only question is, who are you loyal to? ", "action_results": [{"action": "Listen to the recruiting officer", "result": "You walk over to the recruiting officer, who stands sharp and proud in his uniform, shouting out in a loud, attention-grabbing voice.\n\n\n\"People of Ireland! Through joining up with the British Army, you ensure economic support for your family! No longer will your family go hungry, they'll eat like the King himself on your pay!\"\n\n\nHe's right. The British Army is a good place for work, they'll pay well enough to help support your family, and keep them in a good financial state.\n\n\n\"You ensure the safety of Catholic Belgium! We will not let the German protestants trample over such a good, god-fearing people! We will drive them back, not letting Germany crush them without regard!\"\n\n\nYou almost laugh at that one. You see little difference between Germany's treatment of Belgium and England's treatment of Ireland. But he is correct. Belgium is, to your knowledge, a nation of good, god-fearing, moral individuals. The invasion of Belgium is just another act of Protestant aggression and expansionism.\n\n\n\"Most importantly, you ensure that Britain knows you are her loyal subject, fully deserving of a parliament! You show that as loyal British citizens, you deserve to be treated as such, and I will personally ensure that this nation of loyal, hard-working people gets the respect it deserves! Come on boys, do your part! Eireann's calling? What scourge dare ignore her call?\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Listen to Eoin MacNeill", "result": "\"Fuck the British!\" Eoin MacNeill screams at the top of his lungs, to a chorus of applause and clapping. \"They invade us, they slaughter our people, hang our priests, spit on our flag and treat us like criminals! Do you remember the hunger of the famine!? Irish men starved on the streets when the potato crops failed! What did the British do? They loaded their ships with our grain and shipped it off for themselves!\"\n\n\nYou recall the stories of old. Starved Irish families forced to eat nettles to survive, lying on the ground with green-stained mouths as they died. Irish men trying to steal back their own corn from Trevelyn's hungry mouth, being imprisoned and shipped off to Australia. When times were good, the British were kind. But when things got tough, Irish men, women and children starved to death in the streets while the British didn't miss a single meal.\n\n\n\"What did they do to Wolfe Tone? Had him killed like a common criminal! He fought for our freedom, for every man's freedom, and they wanted to hung him like a fucking dog for that! But no, he took his own life and died on his own terms! Do you wish to fight alongside the executioner? Well?! Do you?!\" he screams.\n\n\nAh, Wolfe Tone, a national hero. A rich protestant who witnessed the suffering of his fellow man, and refused to bow down and live a life of luxury at the cost of men like you. He started a revolution for equality, for equal terms, for Catholics to be given the same rights as Protestants. For that cause, he died. \n\n\n\"And now they're telling us Home Rule's put off, so best go off to fight the Huns? They try suffocate our language, they take our lands and wealth, they try break our spirit, but we do not fucking break! We have no loyalty to Britain! We only have loyalty to Eireann!\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Talk to Joseph", "result": "You look to Joseph, who stares at the stage with inspiration filling his eyes, a passionate grin on his face.\n\n\n\"What are you thinking, Joseph?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Isn't it obvious?\" he asks, laughing. \"We need to fight, for our nation, for our people! We need to rise up, like the man said!\"\n\n\n\"You want to join the British?\" you ask incredulously, surprised at his sudden change in mind. \n\n\n\"Jesus Christ, I want to fight for the Irish Volunteers! An uprising is going to come soon enough, Michael, and I want us to be part of it!\"\n\n\n\"Maybe,\" you say, shaking your head. \"I just don't know.\"\n\n\n\"It's not about what you know, it's what you feel! Listen to MacNeill speak, for God's sake! The man's a legend!\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Join up with the British Army", "result": "\"Sign me up, then,\" you say, as the Recruiting Officer smiles, shaking your hand.\n\n\n\"You're doing a great service for your empire and Eireann,\" the man smiles. \"Together, we fight for Ireland against the vile Huns!\"\n\n\nA hand wraps around your shoulder, yanking you back from him as you look at Joseph, who stares at you furiously.\n\n\n\"You're joining up with them? With them, Michael!? How fucking dare you? You're a coward, a bloody coward!\"\n\n\nImmediately, a few of the Volunteers signing up push him away from you, holding him back, but he doesn't break eye contact with you for even the briefest of moments.\n\n\n\"Watch your tongue!\" one of them warns, as Joseph holds up his hands.\n\n\n\"I'm not trying to start a fight, get off me!\" he says, as they let him go. \"I'll speak my mind to my brother!\"\n\n\nYou stare at him, as he expression shifts into one of disappointment.\n\n\n\"You can go to war all you want, but you're abandoning Ma, you're abandoning the cause, and you're abandoning me, all to die on some field in Brussels for the Empire that's put it's boot on our throat!\"\n\n\n\"I'm sorry, Joseph. I'm doing what I think is right.\"\n\n\n\"You're a bastard!\" Joseph spits. \"A no good, country-hating bastard!\"\n\n\nA few hands reach out to prevent him from making a move, but he knocks them away, swearing. \n\n\n\"Get the bloody hell off me, I'm going! I've said my piece.\"\n\n\nYou watch as your brother walks away, furious. You sigh in disappointment, before a gloved hand grasps your shoulder.\n\n\n\"Don't worry, son,\" a Volunteer says. \"We're doing what we need to. What we have to. We're serving Ireland. Don't let fools cloud your judgement.\" \n\n\nYou nod slowly, hoping to make things right before you ship off.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Few Days Later...", "result": "You stand in front of your family, standing tall and proud in full ceremonial garb, with your cleaned and ironed clothes, polished black boots and shining silver buttons, your peaked hat sitting proudly atop your head. Ma looks scared to death, while Mary stares at you with a mixture of pride and tears in her eyes. Joseph's been pissed ever since you revealed your intention to serve the British Empire, and is sulking in the field, pretending to be busy working.\n\n\n\"Stay safe. I'll send packages every week. Hot cross buns, your favorite. Stay safe, OK?\" Ma says, tears in her eye. \"Are you sure you wouldn't stay for a cup of tea?\"\n\n\n\"The Huns won't be stopping for tea. Best I not,\" you smile, as your mother hugs you tightly.\n\n\nShe offers you a leather bound bonk, dusty and old, but a staple of the household. You take it in your hands lovingly, holding onto it tightly.\n\n\n\"The family Bible?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Of course. We'll get another one until you return to us, which you will, I've no doubt in my mind. Keep it on you at all times, and pray every night. God will protect you\n\n\n\"Keep it on you on all times. God will protect you,\" she says.\n\n\n\"I will,\" you nod.\n\n\n\"I love you, Michael.\"\n\n\n\"I love you, Ma,\" you reply, kissing her briefly on the lips, before you turn to Mary. \"Keep good care of her. And make sure Joseph doesn't die off on some wild hunt for freedom, yeah?\"\n\n\n\"Don't worry, I will, Michael,\" Mary says, moving in and hugging you tightly. \"I love you.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, I love you too,\" you say, squeezing her back. \"Don't go chasing boys the moment I step away, got it? Joseph will still kick the ass of anyone who tries anything improper with her.\"\n\n\n\"Damn right,\" Joseph says, striding out from the fields of wheat. He has a confused, emotional look in his eyes, and he lets out a loud sigh of disappointment as he nears you.\n\n\nYou turn to walk out the door, before Morgan appears in the stairwell.\n\n\n\"I'm glad I get to see you before I ship out,\" you smile. \n\n\n\"Just come here, you bleeding traitor,\" he sighs, grabbing you and hugging you tightly, his massive, muscular arms squishing you in his grip. \"Make sure you force those German prods out of Belgium. Make Ireland proud.\"\n\n\n\"I will, Joseph,\" you say, hugging him back.\n\n\n\"Just stay safe out there, OK? Don't go charging a machine gun to save any Brits, OK? If push comes to shove, offer the Huns a bit of Ma's tea. You'll poison the entire trench.\"\n\n\nYou smile and nod, squeezing him tightly. You both release as you escape his tight grip, stepping backwards to admire your loving family.\n\n\n\"I love you Joseph. I'll see you all soon.\"\n\n\n\"Of course you will,\" Joseph says. \n\n\nUnable to say another word at the risk of getting caught up, you tip your cap, turning and heading off. Now, it's time to fight the Great War.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Year Later...", "result": "Soldier life is surprisingly boring. It's far from the rogue adventure you thought it would be. You hear the constant horror stories, of course. Horse-mounted calvary charges being cut down by machine gun fire in horrific massacres. Gas attacks releasing waves of poisonous chemicals, burning out lungs and brutally choking the life out of everyone there. Endless, hellish days of artillery raining down, sniper fire every moment striking down anyone they see, the worst nightmares come to life. \n\n\nAfter far too much training, you're finally sent out to fight. Unfortunately, there's a lot of patrolling and not a lot of actual combat. It's probably fortunate that you're kept out of war, kept safe, mostly left with patrolling and guarding trenches where miraculously, you aren't attacked once. The food is shit, the weather's awful, there's constant fear of diseases, and although you're safe, the role is just incredibly boring. Still, after about a year of boring work, you find yourself shipped to Turkey. It's not the Huns you were expecting, but the Ottomans are as important a part of the Central Powers as the Huns. You suppose in a way you're still protecting Belgium by hitting Germany's allies, although it feels more and more like you're just a pawn being used to battle the wars of an Empire rather than a real soldier fighting for a country's freedom.\n\n\nYou find yourself walking along a muddy trench, a rifle in your hands as you creep forward. The trenches are filled with cold water and mud, enough of which has seeped into your boots that sepsis is a serious issue. The sound of machine gun fire and artillery shells is booming, as you move into the forward trench. Machine guns crackle around you, as you keep your head low. You've never even seen an enemy soldier, but according to your sergeant, you're to prepare for a charge soon enough. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Survey the battle", "result": "You peer your head over the edge of the trench, staring out into the horrors of war. Barbed wire covers the muddy ground between the two trenches, covered in the scars of artillery strikes. Gas covers the battlefield, slowly spreading out like a yellow tide. There's the corpses from\n\n\n\"It's a fucking massacre,\" you say, staring at the horrors of war.\n\n\n\"What's there?\" Private Macready, a Donegal man you've befriended, asks.\n\n\n\"It's a kill zone,\" you say. \"A fucking kill zone.\"\n\n\n\"We shouldn't be here, man, we shouldn't fucking be here,\" Private Douglas, a Galway farmhand who, at his age, must've lied to get here. \"We're going to get wiped out.\"\n\n\n\"Don't worry, we'll survive,\" you say firmly. \"This war will be over by Christm...!\"\n\n\nIn the Ottoman Trench, a sniper takes aim. He spots a pale face peering out from the trench, and takes fire, killing the man. As the head snaps back, he closes his eyes shut, saying a silent prayer for the soul he didn't want to take, but had to for his Empire.\n\n\n\"War is hell,\" the sniper whispered.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Talk to the other men around you", "result": "\"So, how are we feeling?\" you grin, turning to your squad, trying to focus on that rather than the upcoming battle.\n\n\n\"Tip fucking top,\" Private Macready, a young Donegal baker, grins, gently tapping his fingers against his rifle as he mentally prepares to fire it.\n\n\n\"It's going to be a massacre. We shouldn't be here, man, we shouldn't fucking be here,\" Private Douglas, a Galway farmhand who, at his age, must've lied to get her, says. \"We're going to get wiped out.\" \n\n\n\"S-should we pray?\" Private Whyte asks, the Cork man's pale hands fingering rosary beads that he runs through his hands.\n\n\nFitzpatrick, a Dubliner like yourself, doesn't say a word, just gives a confident smirk. \n\n\n\"We don't need prayer. We have the might of the British infantry,\" he says coolly.\n\n\n\"Alright men! Listen up!\" a voice roars, as an officer\n\n\nYou stare at the officer, feeling envious. He won't be going over the trench with you. He'll be staying here, because his is the blood of officers and kings, not like you, a simple peasant from the countryside.\n\n\n\"The Aussie's have diverted artillery fire, so we're going in solo! The Ottomans here haven't been trained, they're scared, they're nervous and if you smell the air, you can tell they've shit themselves at the thought of the Royal British Army coming over this trench! Who's ready?\"\n\n\nThere's a roar among the men, and the officer smiles.\n\n\n\"Come on then, boys! For king! For country! For England! CHARGE!\"\n\n\nThe soldiers urge forward, and you grab the trench wall, pulling yourself over, heading straight into the thick of it.\n\n\nYou find yourself transported into hell. You peer your head over the edge of the trench, staring out into the horrors of war. Barbed wire covers the muddy ground between the two trenches, covered in the scars of artillery strikes. Gas covers the battlefield, slowly spreading out like a yellow tide. Gunfire flashes from the enemy trench, and you watch as one of the charging men next to you explodes in a burst of crimson, writhing under the force of the bullets.\n\n\n\"Charge! Charge!\" the officer screams, as you rush forward. A soldier screams as he falls to the ground from a gut wound, as your men surge forward into the meat grinder.\n\n\n\"It's a fucking massacre!\" Fitzpatrick says, his cool facade breaking. \"I don't...!\"\n\n\nFitzpatrick takes a bullet to the throat, as a huge, bleeding, gaping hole is blown through his neck. He collapses to the ground, bleeding to death in front of you.\n\n\n\"Fitzpatrick!\" you yell, before a soldier shoves you forward.\n\n\n\"We can't stop, push forward!\" the soldier screams.\n\n\nYou look around, seeing a straight dash to the enemy trench, a path through the area the artillery is mainly striking and a partially covered path of barbed wire.\n\n\nAnother hail of gunfire rips through the ranks of soldiers, as Douglas' leg is blown clean off. He falls to the ground, not even screaming, only staring at his leg in pure shock. You stand there, as the world goes silent, the bullets now just a gentle thudding in the back of your head. You stand there, staring at Douglas as the blood gushes out of his leg. \n\n\nAfter a brief moment, he begins to scream in horrific pain, bringing you back to reality. You look around frantically, seeing a straight dash to the enemy trench, a path through the area the artillery is mainly striking and a partially covered path of barbed wire. Douglas continues to sit on the ground, screaming.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sprint forward", "result": "You charge forward alongside the main surge of men, as the bullets fly. You can't go back for Douglas, he won't survive his wounds. You need to stay with the mission, no matter what.\n\n\n The man next to you screams as a bullet slams into the man's arm, as another collapses as his legs are blown away. You think you see that it's Macready, although you can't slow down to tell. \n\n\nYou keep pushing forward, legs hammering against the ground as fast as you can. Unfortunately, this is waves of fleshy bags up against machine guns. You don't stand a chance, and it's only a matter of time before one of the machine gunners targets you.\n\n\nA bullet slams into your leg as you collapse onto your knee with a scream. Another bullet slams into your chest, sending you falling backwards, before two more punch through your lungs. You scream as they begin to fill with blood, lying on the ground alongside the other men cut down alongside you. As the machine gun cuts through men like a butcher does to a freshly slaughtered pig, you close your eyes, your ears filled with the screams of those alongside you. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Help Douglas", "result": "You run over to your wounded friend, who desperately clutches his leg, screaming. Now, crying and screaming, with tears running down his face, it's clear Douglas it little more than a man, a boy caught up in a game of war. You drop to your knee beside him, quickly applying pressure to the wound as you squeeze tightly, trying to stem the flow of blood, but it just keeps coming, soaking through the ragged remains of his pants and covering your hands.\n\n\n\"My luck! McCarthy, my leg, it's gone, they took my leg!\" Douglas babbles. \n\n\n\"Douglas! Come on, man, keep it together! We need to get back to the trench! Gi...!\"\n\n\nThe bullet strikes you in the neck, knocking you to the ground. You attempt to cry out in pain, to find yourself drowning in your own blood. You try to put pressure on your own wound, but that only forces more of the blood down your throat, as you're left bleeding to death, gurgling and crying. \n\n\nAs the world darkens, you reach out, grabbing the hand of the young boy dying next to you and squeezing it tightly, two souls desperate to find each other as they're consumed by darkness.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Head through the craters", "result": "You charge towards the artillery-stricken ground, hearing the whistling of shells overhead. Your boots slam into the earth as you struggle to sprint through the uneven craters, hurrying forward. You stumble, nearly smacking into the ground, but just about manage to keep your footing. \n\n\nSuddenly, the next barrage of shells arrives, landing around you that slam into the ground around you, exploding and shedding sprays of shrapnel. Metal shrapnel bites against your back, drawing blood, but you keep running.\n\n\nSuddenly, a shell slams into the ground in front of you, exploding. You find yourself lying on the ground with a scream. You attempt to stand, only to look down at the severed stumps that were once your legs. You scream in terror and shock as blood gushes out, staining the earth crimson. You let out a scream, as you hear the whistling of more shells coming towards you, knowing there's no chance to crawl away from them. You close your eyes your eyes, trying to block out the pain as you count down from ten.\n\n\nYou reach seven.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Head for the barbed wire", "result": "You dive to the ground, crawling forward into a nestle of barbed wire. Bullets whistle overhead, but you keep your head pressed into the dirt, hoping they don't hit you. You reach out a hand, grabbing into the bud to try find a grip, before you crawl ahead, pulling yourself forward. Your boot catches on a strand of barbed wire ,the metal thorn cutting through your pants leg and slicing a long but thankfully shallow cut on your leg. Thanks to the adrenaline mixed with terror that has taken you, you move on, refusing to stop as you hurry on. \n\n\nYou shake your boot free of the barb, moving forward until there's no path through the barbed wire ahead. You manage to crawl forward, looking around as you're shown a wide range around you.\n\n\nThere's a straight dash forward to the enemy trench. If you're fast, and you have to be fast, you could make it. You could also skirt through spots of cover to avoid the machine gun fire, although it'll avoid narrowly being out of the artillery range and still at an obvious risk. You could also crawl amongst the dead and dying in order to keep cover and remain unnoticed, moving towards the trench.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sprint forward", "result": "You quickly stumble forward, crawling ahead as you break into a sprint, charging forward as you quickly hurry towards the trench. Bullets flash around you, cutting down the few soldiers who burst forward along your side. The man next to you screams as a bullet slams into the man's arm, as another collapses as his legs are blown away.\n\n\nYou keep pushing forward, before you near the trench. Refusing to slow down, you continue to charge forward, swinging your rifle through the air as you dive towards the trench. With only one option, you prepare to dive into the trench.", "action_results": [{"action": "Into the trench", "result": "You rush forward, jumping into the ditch. You smack into the muddy wooden earth. Your rifle is held so tightly in your hands that that the knuckles have turned white. You slowly raise the rifle, aiming it down the trench as you take a deep breath. Thankfully, the trench's zigzagging pattern means that you can't see ahead.\n\n\nSuddenly, a dark-skinned Ottoman solider arrives, charging down the hallway. He wears an olive uniform stained with mud, and a startlingly white turban fitted tightly to his head. He lets out a terrified scream, before babbling something terror-filled in a strange, foreign language, fumbling with his rifle and he tries to raise it. \n\n\nHaving only a few seconds, you try to react.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fire your rifle", "result": "You grit your teeth, raising your heavy rifle as you press it to your shoulder. You aim down the iron sights, staring at the Ottoman's terrified face. With a squeeze and a whimper, you pull the trigger.\n\n\nThe gun clicks uselessly, its barrel jammed from the mud.\n\n\nYou lower your rifle as the Ottoman realizes what's happened. Seeing his opportunity and with a terrified yell, he raises his bayonet and charges. You try to dodge, before he slams into you, smacking you against the trench wall as the bayonet slips into your chest. Your rifle drops to the ground, blood bursting through as it soaks through your uniform. He jams his bayonet into your chest again as he screams, before you're stabbed again and again and again as his bayonet plunges into your heart, your throat, your lungs and your stomach. You let out a pitiful, dying scream as the soldier stabs you to death.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Charge with your bayonet", "result": "You charge with the bayonet, ramming the blade at the man's chest. He grabs the gun barrel, pushing the bayonet away from you as it sinks into the dirt walls of the trench. You twist the rifle to try and pull it out, of the wall, but the bayonet snaps off the rifle uselessly.\n\n\nSuddenly, you're tackled, sent flying to the ground. Your head smacks off against the wooden walling of the trench, although thankfully your helmet absorbs most of the blow. You groan, turning to see that an Ottoman soldier, younger than even you, is standing there. \n\n\nYou look around desperately, seeing your gun resting next to you. The Ottoman screams something in his barbaric tongue, although you don't understand a word of it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go for the gun", "result": "You reach for your gun, grabbing it and quickly raising it, aiming down the sights. The Ottoman man fires, two shots thudding into you with such speed you don't even feel it. You pull the trigger, blowing a hole out of the Ottoman man's throat. He collapses next to you as you feel the blood start to soak through your uniform. Your entire body goes cold, as you shiver, terrified. \n\n\nThe other man lets out a horrified, gurgling gasp as he reaches out for help in the darkening world. The two of you lie there, and for a moment, you wonder why you both needed to kill each other. It's clear to you he's just another peasant, the same as you, fighting in a war between two kings, just left there, dying in a war started by the rich.\n\n\nAs your vision goes dark, you grab the man's arm as he lies there panting next to you, giving it a gentle squeeze before your eyes roll to the back of your head.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Surrender", "result": "You raise your hands defensively, starring into the eyes of the Ottoman in front of you.\n\n\n\"I surrender, I surrender! For the love of God almighty, don't shoot!\" \n\n\nThe Ottoman screams something in his language, but you don't know what he's saying. You just keep your hands raises, not making any movements that would make him think you're trying to escape. \n\n\nAnother Ottoman arrives, and the butt of his rifle smashes into your head. You twist, smacking into the ground. He grabs your hand, pulling you behind your back. A length of rough rope binds your hands together, as your face is pressed into the mud.\n\n\nWith that, you've survived your first battle, and are now a prisoner of war of the Central powers.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Year Later...", "result": "As a prisoner, you're rounded up with the others taken from the battle and pushed back to the secondary trenches to avoid a recapture attempt. From there, you're taken inwards to a POW camp.\n\n\nThe stay there is surprisingly tolerable. A few of the Turks speak English, and they're actually quite a friendly people. You're treated quite well, with relatively good food and a warm cot.\n\n\nHowever, as the war turns, you and a few other POWs are transported to Germany, where you end up in another POW camp in Germany. The Huns are even kinder than the Ottomans. They treat you well, and with respect. You wonder why this war even needed to happen. You don't care for things being disputed for in the war. Neither do the German soldiers, mostly poor peasants like yourself, recruited to fight other poor peasants as the Kings and Queens that sent you out to die don't miss a meal. Their worries aren't the Ardennes Offensive, they worry about feeding their families, surviving the war and returning home, and making sure their farm isn't destroyed in the chaos. \n\n\nYou're not sure how the war is going, as the Germans try to keep you from learning, but you think your allies are succeeding. However, seeing what your enemies are like, you wonder why you should care who wins. All you hope for it peace.", "action_results": [{"action": "A visit from a knight", "result": "\"McCarthy!\" a voice asks, as you turn to stare at the ruddy face of Coogan.\n\n\nAs another fellow Irishman, you and Coogan have got along swimmingly. He speaks Gaelic like a true Fenian. At first, the guards feared you were plotting a break out, but it wasn't long before they learnt you mainly talked about which prisoner had the biggest nose or which guard had the thickest accent. You're not action heroes, you don't plan to take on the whole camp to escape. Plus, at this point, you've befriended most of the guards, and you can't imagine having to kill one of them. \n\n\n\"What is it?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"The guards are rounding us up! We need to go!\"\n\n\nYou look around, noticing several other prisoners just miling about in the open fenced area you're currently in, before raising an eyebrow.\n\n\n\"What about them?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Irish only!\" Coogan says.\n\n\n\"If you say so,\" you say curiously.\n\n\nYou walk with Coogan, followed him to the one of the large housing units for prisoners, Cell Block D. A German Guard leans against the wall outside, a cigarette in his mouth.\n\n\n\"Irish, yes?\" he says in his thick, German accent.\n\n\nAlthough it takes you a moment to decipher his accent, you nod vigorously.\n\n\n\"Yes, yes, Irish,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Where are you from?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"Dublin,\" you reply.\n\n\n\"Tipperary,\" Coogan says.\n\n\nThe German cracks a grin, nodding.\n\n\n\"Ah, Tipperary, I know that place!\" he says, before he starts singing an old tune. \"It's a long way to Tipperary, it's a long way to go!\"\n\n\n\"Yeah,\" Coogan laughs, nodding. \"That's the tune.\"\n\n\n\"Go right ahead,\" the soldier says stepping aside.\n\n\n\"Why are we here?\" you ask him.\n\n\n\"There is an Irishman here to see you all,\" he says.\n\n\n\"An Irishman?\" you ask, intrigued, as you surge into the room with Coogan.\n\n\nYou look around the room at the others there. McCardle, a fisherman who was captured in France, a cheerful fellow whose smile is easily recognizable by the set of black and yellow teeth he has. O'Connor, a farmer like yourself, a hard-working, friendly chap. Johnston, a mild-mannered postman whose sister you used to know from the local dance halls. There's a few others you recognize, but most prominent in the room is a tall, well-spoken man who everyone's crowded around.\n\n\nThe tall man has a thick black beard that's quite well-groomed, with a long, thin mustache that sprouts from either side of his cheek. He has short, curly black hair and pointy features, with his ears sticking out slightly. He swears a striped suit with its collar up, tight around his neck, looking like he's ready for a formal ball.\n\n\n\"You're Irish?\" Coogan asks loudly, as the man smiles. \n\n\n\"I'm from Sandy Cove. South east of D\u00fan Laoghaire and Glasthule, of you know it.\"\n\n\nYou nod vigorously, grinning.\n\n\n\"A fellow Dubliner!\" you say. \"What brings you here?\"\n\n\n\"Simple, my good fellow. I am Sir Roger Casement,\" he says.\n\n\nYou pause, as there's a hush of whispers. You know that name. Roger Casement was a humanitarian. He worked in far off, distant countries like the Congo and Peru, helping the poor negroes who were being abused by the British in power there, just like you Irish were. However, he was knighted by the King for doing so. The British King, King George V. You narrow your eyes, wondering what he's doing here.\n\n\n\"I'm sure by this long in captivity you've seen that the Germans aren't the villains you were told. They haven't forsaken the Lord Jesus Christ, they don't torture prisoners, they don't eat babies!\"\n\n\n\"I wish they did,\" McCardle says. \"We could use some meat in our rations.\"\n\n\nThe group laughs, as Casement nods, smiling.\n\n\n\"I'm sure you could. But, in such a time of trouble, the poor Irish souls that have seen such little opportunity have been awarded a great deal of it. The British grasp on Ireland is weakening as it focuses on the Central Powers. For the first time in history, we have a chance to do something about that.\"\n\n\nRoger Casement pauses, looking around at the faces around him. You try to make out his emotions, but you can't, his face unchanging as stone.\n\n\n\"Germany is willing to release you, to accompany me on our return to Ireland. They're offering us arms, rifles and machine guns, in order to return to our comrades in Ireland. There, they plan an uprising on a national level. We have a chance to liberate our nation with our brothers, to claim Ireland as a free, independent republic!\"\n\n\n\"We'll be hung,\" someone says, scared. \"We're just prisoners now. We join you, we become traitors!\" \n\n\n\"My friend, there will be no one to hang us! The free nation of Ireland will see us as heroes, and Britain won't be able to do anything about that!\" Casement says. \"Our brothers at home risk hanging! Do you think they fear? Of course not, my friend. Of course not! Now, I offer you a chance at freedom. Not only your own freedom, but the freedom of the entire nation! Together, Ireland will rise up, new and free! What men will stand with me?!\"\n\n\nYou pause, thinking his offer through. A chance to liberate your nation, but at what cost? Betraying the British you fought alongside to serve the Huns? Risking death as a traitor? But of course, is there a price too great for freedom?", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Roger Casement", "result": "\"I'll join! I'll join, for Eireann!\" you say firmly, as Casement smiles, grabbing your hand and shaking it vigorously. \n\n\n\"Yes, yes, thank you, my good man! Eireann thanks you! Your sons, your daughters, your grandchildren, they thank you!\"\n\n\nYou look around the room, waiting for an onrush of support for Casement, but you find it's disturbingly silent.\n\n\n\"We're not traitors! We're not going to betray the Empire for you!\" Coogan spits. \"McCarthy, how can you do this?\"\n\n\n\"You don't understand, it's for the greater good!\" Casement says.\n\n\n\"We're not facing hanging to betray those we fought alongside. When this war ends, Britain will treat us fairly. It'll only be the fools like you who are a blemish to the proud Irishman's record of service during the war,\" McCardle says.\n\n\nYou look around for supporters, but the room is silent. Roger Casement bows his head in disappointment.\n\n\n\"If none but this young man is willing to stand for Ireland, so be it. Let's go,\" he says.\n\n\nRoger Casement turns, strolling off as you walk with him, heading off. You let out a sigh, as your fellow Irishmen jeer and mock as you all walk away. \n\n\nThey'll thank you one day. If not them, then their children will. If not them, their children, because eventually, the next generations will realize what you did, you did for Ireland.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave the camp with Casement", "result": "Months pass, as Casement continues to recruit from the vast swathes of Irish POWs to form this Irish Brigade, German-armed and trained Irish-born fighters to return to Ireland take over, founding the Republic and distracting Britain, drawing attention from the main front and allowing the Germans to succeed in their mission.\n\n\nThere's two thousand Irishmen who are prisoners of war in Germany.\n\n\nYou get fifty two. Fifty two Irishmen willing to follow Casement like you were, to join the cause. It's appalling. The rest are either brainwashed by the Brits, appeased by their mock gestures and promises that are never kept, or cowards too scared of the noose, pathetic examples you dread to call men. Thus, you're left with a small, rag-tag team of Irishmen willing to fight for freedom. \n\n\nHowever, you're told there's still a backbone of Irishmen and women at home willing to fight, running in guns from Germany by themselves through private vessels like yachts and fishing boats, ready to fight for your cause. You know they'll be massive numbers of them, all willing to fight for the Republic that you all dream of. It's them who you'll use to takeover, they'll be the main fighting force used. With them, your dreams of a free and independent Ireland can be accomplished.\n\n\nHopefully, you'll see Joseph again. You're sure if there's something like this coming about, he'll be there.\n\n\nCasement's Brigade is given 20,000 Mosin-Nagant 1891 rifles, good, durable weapons that will serve your people well, alongside ten new machine guns, as well as large quantities of ammo. However, they refuse to send trained German soldiers with you, not even giving you a single German officer to help organize and lead the uprising. Plus, the machine-gun training promised to you never comes, so these powerful machines of death are of little use to you, as you barely understand how to use them.\n\n\nStill, there's hope. It's mainly up to the Irish at home, but you know you'll be able to do it, for Ireland.", "action_results": [{"action": "Disaster strikes!", "result": "It's all gone to shit. Hell in a fucking hand basket. \n\n\nThe gun running was a mass failure. A German cargo ship was heavily disguised as a Norwegian vessel. Given Norway's neutrality, it was thought this would get the weapons through. The ship bore Norwegian colors, the crew wore Norwegian clothes, all the charts and books were even in fucking Norwegian, yet it to shit. The British apprehended the ship, forcing the crew to blow their ship up, sinking it to avoid capture.\n\n\nDesperately, Casement plans to head to Ireland, to inform the rebel leaders of the change in plans and the necessity to postpone the uprising until a more better time. He plans to sneak their via submarine with German assistance, and has asked you to go with him. As an Irishman, you'll have no trouble blending in when you arrive, plus, having an extra man to assist in convincing the rebel leaders wouldn't go astray. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Head with Casement to Ireland", "result": "The rowboat hits onto the beach of sand, as you and Casement step off, onto the sands. Robert Monteith follows you afterwards, grinning.\n\n\n\"Home,\" Roger says weakly. \"Thank fuck.\"\n\n\nCasement's been sick for some time. At first you thought it was simple seasickness or claustrophobia, but now you're beginning to fear it's the return of his here-and-there malaria sickness he picked up in the Congo. He's pale, tired and sickly, and without a car, you don't know how far he can go. As there's British patrols everywhere due to a possible leak of information, it's going to be hard getting out of here.\n\n\n\"We have a lot to do and not a lot of time to do it. Let's go,\" Monteith says. \"But it damn sure is good to be here. Something special about Irish air, isn't there?\"\n\n\n\"We're in a fucking hurry,\" you say, keeping your mind on the mission. \"There's British soldiers prowling around these beaches. We need to do this quick and clean.\" \n\n\n\"Let's go then,\" Casement says weakly.\n\n\nYou rush up the beach, hurrying to get away from this scene and get somewhere safe. There's a few safe houses you could visit on the way, supporters of the uprising you've been referred to who'd be happy to keep the three of you for a night or two. \n\n\nAs you reach the lip of the beach, you frown, as you spy a few lanterns in the distance, floating in the near completely black early morn.\n\n\n\"Shit, they're here,\" you say. \"We need to get out of here fast, before the British get us. \n\n\n\"I know this area,\" Robert says. \"There's an old Celtic ring fort nearby. We can hide from the patrols there.\"\n\n\nYou pause, looking at Casement. You doubt he'll be fast in this state. He might not even be able to make it at all. You need to do something.\n\n\n\"We head to the fort, then,\" Casement nods, as he weakly begins half-running in the direction ring fort.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Casement to the ring fort", "result": "You begin sprinting after Casement and Monteith, running alongside them as you hurry towards the fort as quickly as you can. Casement stumbles and you quickly move to his side, grabbing him and helping him keep going.\n\n\n\"Can't go down now, sir!\" you say hurriedly. \"We have too much to do, remember?\"\n\n\nYou keep going, raising through the dark. It's only a matter of time before the British discovers your rowboat, and then you're screwed. Or the sun rises, letting them see you, and then you're screwed. Or their search net stumbles across you, and then you're screwed.\n\n\n\"I think I see something!\" a soldier yells.\n\n\n\"Labhair de na diabhal,\" you mutter.\n\n\n\"It's them! It's fucking them,\" another soldier yells.\n\n\nYou keep going, before you see the old, ancient stones of the ring fort, laid by the ancient Celts of old. True, free Irishmen. You hurry towards the stones, running past them as you enter the land where once stood a huge Fenian fort.\n\n\nCasement slips from your grasp, crumpling to the ground. He lies there, breathing heavily and staring at you meekly.\n\n\n\"We'll never make it,\" Casement says. \"All we can do now is pray for the rebellion to succeed, with God's graces.\"\n\n\n\"We're fucked,\" Monteith says. \"\u00c9ireann will weep for us.\"\n\n\n\"We can't go out like this! We'll hang! We'll fucking hang!\" you say, desperately. \n\n\nYou don't have a way to escape this. You'll be meeting God almighty at Heaven's gates soon enough. But it's your choice how you're getting there.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go down fighting", "result": "\"Stay back, you fucking bastards!\" you yell, raising your rifle and firing. \"I'm not going to go down without a fight!\"\n\n\nYou lean over the chunk of ancient Celtic stone, staring down the iron sights. You find a British soldier in the sights, pulling the trigger as the man crumples. You switch to another shadow moving through the night, trying to make out his form as he moves through the darkness. You raise your rifle, firing as the man drops. \n\n\nBullets bounce off the stone around you, but you keep out of cover, aiming. You're ready to die here. You refuse to go down without taking a few of them out. However, you're outnumbered, and even your training in the war won't get you out of this one.\n\n\nA well-placed shot by a British soldier hits you in the forehead, sending you stumbling backwards, blood covering your face. You hit the ground, raising your hand up to your face to press your fingers against the grazing wound. You take a deep breath, focusing your attention as you move to stand.\n\n\nYou try to stand, wiping the blood from your eyes so you can see better, but by now the soldiers have moved forward, raising their rifles. A volley of shots goes off, and you collapse to the ground, no more.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Surrender to the British", "result": "You drop your rifle, staring up at the distant sunrise, feeling utter disgust at your failure. You let out a sigh, watching your dreams fall apart.\n\n\n\"They'll hang us, you know,\" Casement says, lying on the ground, weak. \"A shame to be caught at a ring fort without a name. I hope someone finds one for it when they tell this story.\"\n\n\n\"Damn them! Damn them to hell!\" Monteith says, dropping his rifle.\n\n\nThe soldiers approach, their guns pointed at you. You sigh, complying at they order you to your knees. One of the soldiers moves up, grabbing your head and throwing you against the hard ground. \n\n\nYou sneer up at the British officers, as a boot literally presses against your neck, grinding your head into the ground. Seems like a fitting metaphor for your current situation. \n\n\nYou'll be taken to the nearest prison and held there. In fear of being caught, the rebels will be too terrified to try rescue you. You'll be hung as traitors to the rebels after a short trial. As a knight, Sir Rodger Casement will last a few months, but your remaining life will be as short as the hangman's noose.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Create a diversion to draw the soldiers away from Casement", "result": "\"You go that way!\" you whisper loudly. \"I'll lure them off, give you a better chance of completing the mission.\"\n\n\nYou quickly begin moving the opposite direction, hoping to get out of there. You rush forward, waiting to get far enough away to be able to get around to luring them off. Unfortunately, you don't even need to, as the rising sun makes it just about bright enough that you don't really have a chance.\n\n\n\"I see something! It's one of them!\" a voice yells in the darkness, no doubt a British soldier.\n\n\n\"Take the shot! He can't get away!\" another growls.\n\n\nYour chest explodes in a burst of blood. You manage to run another dozen steps, before smacking into the ground. You lie there, your lungs filling with warm blood as you struggle to breath, choking on your own blood. You lie there, dying pitifully, as all you can do is hope that your efforts divert the chase and Casement escapes.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Stay in Germany", "result": "You stay in Germany, allowing Casement to travel back to Ireland without you, as he instead takes Sergeant Daniel Bailey. Unfortunately, at this point, it all turns to shit.\n\n\nCasement attempts to travel to Ireland via a German submarine, to meet with the other leaders. His plans were to convince them to call it off, as they didn't have the arms or manpower to succeed. Ironically, he was caught and arrested before he could do so, and imprisoned. In order to avoid setting off alarm bells, the Irish revolutionaries made no attempt to rescue him, focusing on the upcoming rising. \n\n\nIn Easter, 1916, the rising began, but it was doomed to fail from the beginning. Disputes among the Irish volunteers meant that only a fraction of the members showed up for the rising, with the rest staying home. Little over twelve hundred Irish men fought, against a thousand British Royal Constabularies, and sixteen thousand British troops. There was a lot of early success, with the rebels securing key points of the city, but when the British reacted with full force, even sailing a gunboat up the river Liffey to shell the city, they were forced to surrender to avoid more civilian causalities for a lost cause.\n\n\nThe rebels counted sixty six brave Irish men among the dead. The British lost a hundred and forty three. Of course, they combined were less than half the dead. No, the true losers were the civilians, poor Irish men and women like yourself, like your family. Two hundred and sixty men were killed, with thousands more being injured.\n\n\nCasement was executed for treason, along with sixteen of the main leaders of the uprising. One of the men, James Connolly, was so wounded by the fighting he couldn't even stand for the firing squad. They had to prop him up in a chair before the firing squad could finish him off. Casement wasn't even given the honor of a soldier's death. After his knighthood was taken away, he was hung like a dog, like a common criminal, like only an Irishman ever is.\n\n\nOver the next six months, the reaction to this changes, surprisingly. While initially, the rebels seem like villains, disturbing the peace and betraying Britain while she faces the evil Huns in the Great War, this quickly changes.\n\n\nEarly on, dozens of cases of atrocities committed by the British come out. Prisoners having been executed in the fighting. The destruction of property out of spite. The use of a pacifist activist as a human shield. Journalists being rounded up and executed by firing quad. Over a dozen civilians being rounded up and shot or bayoneted to death. All of that didn't even take into account Britain's indiscriminate shelling of the area. All of this coming to light quickly turns public favor, as makes the rebels, who took care to avoid civilian casualties, seem like the heroes of this uprising. Just as Padraig Pearse wanted, his men didn't achieve a tactical victory, but have become painted as martyrs for a cause, gaining huge support and lighting the fire of patriotism in the soul of every Irishman there.\n\n\nThen, the British saw fit to execute the sixteen key figures of the rising: P\u00e1draic Pearse, Thomas Clarke, MacDonagh, Joseph Plunkett, Edward Daly, Michael O'Hanrahan, Willie Pearse, John MacBride, Eamonn Ceantt, Michael Mallin, Sean Heuston, Con Colbert, Thomas Kent, S\u00e9an MacDiarmada and James Connolly.\n\n\nThese executions further made the British seem as oppressors rather than peace-keepers. Some of those executed weren't even leaders of the rising. John MacBride hadn't been aware of the rising until it began, while Thomas Kent hadn't participated in it. The manner of execution was worse. John Connolly was so wounded he had to be tied in a chair to stay standing before his firing squad. Joseph Plunkett married his wife Grace Gifford, a Protestant who converted to Catholicism, seven hours before his execution. They weren't allowed to speak to each other or touch each other. He was shot later that day.\n\n\nStories like this quickly turned public support in favor of the rebels. Support for Sinn F\u00e9in, a nationalist political party, surged, as republicanism gained massive support. It became clear Britain was sitting on a powder keg as it tried to focus on dealing with this. With Sinn F\u00e9in rising into power, republicanism on the rise and a desperate longing for independence arising in the Irish zeitgeist, it seems clear that violence is coming. \n\n\nYou, however? Well, you're straight shit out of luck. Without Casement or hopes of an Irish Brigade, the Germans toss you back into prison, where you can rot.", "action_results": [{"action": "Two years pass...", "result": "Within two years, the war has fallen apart. Back in a POW camp, you're imprisoned once again, going through the same bullshit. You're moved to another camp, with all the reports of your betrayal of the empire being lost to the pangs of bureaucracy so you hope that you'll manage to escape the hangman's noose when the Brit's take over. Still, Germany's losing the war. The Germans try to hide that fact from you, but given that the rations grow smaller and there's less and less guards everyday, it's clear.\n\n\nEventually, German surrenders, and the Central Powers buckle. With morale failing, the German people were left without a will to fight, and with their industrial production being crushed, they lost the means to do so. The Central Powers crumbled under the Summer Offensive of the Allied powers, finishing off the Great War.\n\n\nWith Germany's fall, you and the rest of the POWs are released. Thankfully, it seems due to the records of the falling Germany leaving everything to fall apart, Britain's doesn't find out about you agreeing to Casement's offer. Like the rest of them, you're sent back to the Ireland.", "action_results": [{"action": "Return home", "result": "You stroll down the path to your house, wearing your spick and span uniform as you stroll along the path. A newly polished medal is pinned to it, for your \"brave service\" in the war. You walk down the path, your thick-soled boots crunching as you step over pebbles, the polished leather shining in the sun. \n\n\nFor once, the weather in Ireland is actually nice. The sun's out, there's clear skies above. There's a cool breeze, birds flying overhead, and the a general beauty in the world that feels delightful.\n\n\nGod, it feels good to be back in Ireland. What a homecoming.\n\n\nYou arrive at the old wooden door to the place, pulling it open as you stroll inside. \n\n\n\"Hello?\" you ask loudly. \n\n\nMary appears out of the kitchen, looking at you. She certainly looks older now, her hair longer, her face more matured and like a woman rather than a girl, her body less boyish than you'd have hoped as she's matured into a full, grown woman. No doubt she'll be attracting every man in the city now. You'd do well to keep them away and keep her chaste and virtue. Mary blinks slowly, staring at you in shock.\n\n\n\"Michael?\" she asks. \"Michael! Ma, Joseph, Michael's home!\"\n\n\nMary rushes towards you, embracing you, You wrap an arm around her, lifting her into the air as she laughs.\n\n\n\"I'm glad to see you too, Mary,\" you grin. \"How are things?\"\n\n\nMa appears in the hallway, rushing towards you as fast as the hobbled over woman can. With almost surprising strength she squeezes you tightly, planting a kiss on your lips before another goes on your cheek.\n\n\n\"My two boys, both come home to me after being taken!\" Ma shrieks loudly, pulling you in for a tight hug. \"Oh Michael, the Lord has blessed me. He's so good to me, Michael, so good to me.\" \n\n\n\"Two boys? Where was Joseph?\" you ask.\n\n\nThen, Joseph appears from outside, his hands and face covered in dirt. His bearded face grins wide, as he wraps his arms around his entire family, squeezing you to an almost painful degree.\n\n\n\"It's good to see you, Michael. I can't believe you're back? How was it? France, Turkey, Germany?\"\n\n\n\"They were all as miserably cold and rainy as Ireland, except without there being any Irish there. So shit,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Michael! Just because you could swear like that in the army does not mean you can swear like that here!\" Ma says.\n\n\n\"For fu...! Gone for four years, and that's the second thing you say to me?\" you say.\n\n\n\"Oh Michael, I'm making sure you don't become some brute. You just know I'm glad you're here. I'm so glad to have my two sons under my roof again. I can't tell you how desperately lonely it was for me and Mary living in the same house.\"\n\n\nYou raise your eyes, looking at Joseph, as the grin slips from his face and he pales.\n\n\n\"Where were you, Joseph?\" you ask, before cracking a smile. \"You didn't try run off with a Protestant girl, get hitched off in Cork and get the ferry to England, did you?\"\n\n\n\"I was imprisoned on Frongoch, in Wales,\" Joseph says sternly.\n\n\n\"For what?\" you say, growing serious, the grin slipping off your face. \n\n\n\"I fought in the Easter Rising with the rebels,\" Joseph says.\n\n\nYou pause, nodding. Joseph was among the rebels who fought in the Easter Rising. The men who you would've been fighting alongside if not Casement's capture. You pause, thinking that through, remembering what's happened. Although it's probably best to keep the amount of people who know about the betrayal and your treason to a minimum, it might be worth telling Joseph about your attempt to help him.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell Joseph about your involvement with Roger Casement", "result": "\"Ma, Mary, I need to talk to Joseph alone for a minute,\" you say.\n\n\n\"I'm not some child, Michael, I can here what you have to say!\" Mary says. \n\n\n\"Ma, take her away, please. I just need a moment. This isn't woman talk, this is men talk.\"\n\n\nYou grab, Joseph, leading him aside. You walk out to the farmyard, moving along the path with your brother in tow.\n\n\n\"You're mad, aren't you?\" Joseph asks.\n\n\n\"Not in the slightest,\" you respond. \"Joseph, during the war, I was approached by Sir Roger Casement.\"\n\n\n\"Casement?\" Joseph asks. \"Casement was supposed to secure the arms for the rising. He was caught and hung though.\"\n\n\n\"That's not all he planned do you,\" you say. \"Casement was recruiting Irish POWs, like myself. I was going to join him, to be trained in Germany and to come back to Ireland with him to join the rising.\"\n\n\nJoseph's eyes widen as he looks at you, grinning.\n\n\n\"Really?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"I did. Unfortunately, Casement was arrested before we could ever be deployed, and after that we were disbanded. But I just wanted you to know I served the cause to the best of my abilities.\"\n\n\n\"I'm impressed, Michael. Well done. I'm grateful. The cause is grateful.\"\n\n\n\"Screw the cause for the rest of the day. Let's go get a cup of tea. I'm dying for a taste of the Irish stuff.\" ", "action_results": [{"action": "Two Months Later...", "result": "The 1918 Irish general elections are a shocker, but make it clear how polarized the nation is thanks to the radicalizing effect of the Easter Rising and its aftermath. Of the 105 seats the Irish people had in the House of Commons, the last election had left the main Home Rule party, the Irish Parliamentary Party, with 74 seats, with 17 going to the Irish Unionist party which sought to keep Ireland as part of Britain. The nationalist Sinn F\u00e9in did not hold a single seat.\n\n\nAfter the elections, the Irish Parliamentary Party had six seats left. The Irish Unionist Party was left with 22. Sinn F\u00e9in now held a whopping 73 seats. Led by \u00c9amon de Valera, a prominent commander in the Easter Rising who had been spared the firing squad due to his American citizenship and the fact that Britain was hoping to get America to join in on the war, Sinn F\u00e9in had become the most prominent party in Ireland. However, their members have taken a drastic policy, refusing to attend British parliament for fear that would legitimize Britain's rule over Ireland. What they plan to do next is anyone's guess.\n\n\nNow, it's the 21st of January, 1919. Thanks to winter, there's little work to do at the farm other than maintaining the animals, so you're left with a little free time. Given that it's nearly Mary's birthday, you've went into the city to try purchase a gift for her with Joseph. \n\n\nYou walk along the cold streets, your hands in your coat. Joseph walks alongside you. A cigarette hangs in your lips, while you listen to Joseph trying to justify his gift idea.\n\n\n\"It's good for her, but it's good for the whole house! That doesn't mean we're being selfish, we're just being logical.\"\n\n\n\"Mary doesn't drink, Joseph. She's had a few sips, but she'll never appreciate anything worth giving as a gift.\"\n\n\n\"Well, what do you suppose?\" he asks.\n\n\nYou pass a group of young girls walking together. You tip your hat and smile at them, as they all smile respectfully back. You turn back to Joseph to continue your conversation, but your brother has a big, goofy grin on his face. \n\n\n\"She was looking at you, Michael. She seemed like she was dripping,\" he laughs.\n\n\n\"Dripping?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Yeah. You know what I mean.\"\n\n\nYou shake your head, shrugging.\n\n\n\"Christ, you really haven't been with many girls. Or more accurately, any girls. She liked you, Michael. Speaking of, I've heard there's more than a few girls are on the hunt for a man like you, you know. Katie Hales, for instance.\"\n\n\n\"The one with the face like a horse? I'll pass, Joseph.\"\n\n\n\"Alright, don't be a bollocks. Jane Garrety. She's a pretty girl, you can't argue with me there.\"\n\n\n\"Barely a personality there at all. I'd sooner marry horse-face.\"\n\n\n\"You're an awful man. There must be some woman you like.\"\n\n\nYou shake your head, as Joseph groans in frustration.\n\n\n\"You know, maybe those rumors are true, for fuck's sake.\"\n\n\nYou've heard the rumors before, and this. The accuracy in them might be what makes them so enraging.\n\n\n\"Watch your fucking tone with me,\" you growl.\" I swear to fuck, I will put your head through a fucking wall.\" \n\n\n\"Shit, sorry, sorry!\" Joseph says, raising his hands defensively. \"Didn't mean to start anything.\"\n\n\n\"Then don't,\" you say tersely.\n\n\nYou walk on for about a minute as Joseph goes silent and cowers down. Finally, he decides to break the silence again.\n\n\n\"So, shall we get the whiskey?\" Joseph asks innocently. \n\n\n\"Christ above,\" you mutter. \n\n\n\"Well, I don't hear any suggestions from you.\"\n\n\n\"Something girly. A dress, or something.\"\n\n\n\"Do you know Mary's size?\" Joseph asks, as you stare at him blankly.\n\n\n\"Ah for fuck's sake, I don't know. She's fairly small.\"\n\n\n\"I doubt \"fairly small\" is a dress size.\"\n\n\n\"Christ above, then get her a book, or a fucking c...!\"\n\n\nYou slam into another man, knocking his papers to the ground as he nearly tips backwards. You grab his wrist, keeping steady, before dropping low to gather his papers.\n\n\n\"Excuse me, sir,\" you apologize. \"I was distracted by my brother.\"\n\n\n\"Not a problem, my man,\" the man replies, running a hand through his dark hair and he takes the papers back from you. \"I'm sure it's easy to be distracted when you're accompanied by such a great big fool.\"\n\n\n\"Rory O'Connor! How are you doing, my fine friend?\" Joseph grins.\n\n\n\"You know each other?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Joseph and I fought together in the Easter Rising, and we were imprisoned together at Frongoch. We shared a cell.\"\n\n\n\"Fought together? Bollocks, Rory, you didn't do any fighting. You went down and were captured almost immediately.\"\n\n\n\"I was hit by a sniper on a reconnaissance mission,\" Rory O'Connor says, lifting his shirt slightly to show a scar where the bullet must've entered.\n\n\n\"No one wants to see that old scar again,\" Joseph says. \"Don't you have somewhere to be? You were in an awful hurry.\"\n\n\n\"I do indeed, I've a lot to do, actually,\" Rory O'Connor says. \"Speaking of, you could help me in that. I'm on a recruitment drive.\"\n\n\n\"For what?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"The Irish Republican Army. We're reorganizing the Irish Volunteers, turning them into a proper fighting force. I'm taking on the role of Director of Engineering.\"\n\n\n\"There's no republic for there to be an army to fight for,\" you point out.\n\n\n\"That changes today. The Sinn F\u00e9in politicians are getting together to found the first Irish parliament, D\u00e1il \u00c9ireann, the assembly of Ireland. We will declare an Irish republic, and with that, the IRA will have a nation to fight for. So, Joseph, will you join the IRA and fight for this newfound nation?\"\n\n\n\"I'm in,\" Joseph says, extending his hand as the two shake hands. \"I'll happily shed my blood for this country once more.\"\n\n\n\"Delightful,\" he says, grinning, before turning to you. \"You're welcome to join as well, you know,\" \n\n\n\"I never was an Irish Volunteer. In fact, I served the crown in the Great War, in the Royal Army.\"\n\n\n\"Then you have experience fighting,\" Rory O'Connor says. \"We could use that, without a doubt we could use that. Would you consider it?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the IRA", "result": "\"I'll happily join,\" you say, nodding. \n\n\n\"Perfect,\" Rory says, extending his hand.\n\n\nYou grab his hand as he gives you a firm handshake, smiling at him. \n\n\n\"Go raibh m\u00edle maith agat, mo chara,\" he says, nodding firmly.\n\n\n\"I'm glad to hear, Michael,\" Joseph says. \"That's terrific. Can you imagine just the two of us, fighting alongside each other at last for the greater good?\"\n\n\n\"I suppose,\" you say. \"It'll go badly.\" \n\n\n\"We're meeting tomorrow at the McGregor's farm at noon. Do you know it?\"\n\n\n\"I know it well,\" Joseph nods. \"Thank you for this opportunity, O'Connor.\"\n\n\n\"It's my pleasure, Joseph. I need to hurry, but I'll see you soon.\"\n\n\n\"Perfect. Goodbye, Rory. I'll see you later,\" Joseph says, as Rory moves off. \"Now, let's go buy a candle or some bullshit, OK, Michael?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, let's do it.\"\n\n\nAnd like that, you're a soldier in the Irish Republican Army, serving the newly declared nation of Ireland.", "action_results": [{"action": "Later that day...", "result": "Later that day, where D\u00e1il \u00c9ireann declares an Irish republic, similar to the Proclamation of Irish independence during the 1916 Easter Rising. Of course, that's not the main event of the day. In an event inspired by the declaration, a group of nine Irish volunteers, in an unauthorized action, organized an ambush at Soloheadbeg.\n\n\nIn hopes of provoking off a brutal conflict, the group ambush a convoy of two council officers and two RIC officers with the hopes of taking the guns and gelignite, an explosive. After calling on them to surrender, the RIC officers opened fire. They were gunned down, and the two council officers captured so the explosives and weapons could be taken. The group fled, releasing the hostages and escaping off into the farmlands.\n\n\nHowever, it's clear that this isn't the end of the story. The actions of the volunteers provokes a brutal response. This action is such a serious event that it's clear the situation in Ireland has changed. It is the start of the Irish War of Independence, as the Irish Republican Army (IRA) is forced to defend the existence of the newfound Irish republic, and the Royal Irish constabulary and British army desperately attempt to defend their right.\n\n\nThe Irish War of Independence has began.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Next Day...", "result": "You sit around the kitchen of a farmhouse, waiting patiently for the other Volunteers to arrive for training. You sit next to Fionn, a young man who is an adamant supporter of the cause who even at his young age is willing to spill blood, your brother Joseph, and an older man by the name of John who is remarkably quiet.\n\n\n\"Sean Treacy always was a remarkably aggressive man. I'm not surprised at this,\" Fionn says.\n\n\n\"You don't support his actions?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Of course I do. They're for the best. It was only a matter of times before Britain attacks. So, probably the best we made the first move.\"\n\n\n\"Now, we can't submit to the British anymore,\" Joseph says. \"Today, we're forced to live or die, fight or break. It's freedom or death, now.\"\n\n\n\"Sean Treacy and his group did their crimes without the approval of the D\u00e1il. That wasn't an act of soldiers, it was an act of terrorism. They didn't fight for any nation, they fought to force us to act,\" Sean says, breaking his silence.\n\n\n\"Perhaps,\" Fionn says. \"But perhaps it was necessary.\"\n\n\nThe door to the house opens, as a man strolls in, a pipe clenched between his teeth. He looks to Fionn, smiling.\n\n\n\"McGregor, I presume?\"\n\n\n\"That's right. I can't say we've met before. You are?\" Fionn asks.\n\n\n\"Ernie O'Malley,\" the man smiles. \"I'm in charge of organizing the IRA rural branches. I was told your branch was meeting here.\"\n\n\n\"You're the college student who took pot shots at the British from UCD, didn't you?\" Joseph asks, as Ernie O'Malley grins, embarrassed.\n\n\n\"Aye, that was me. I admittedly wasn't a big nationalist back then, but that tendency has grown, clearly,\" he nods. \"Anyway, I hitched a ride here with a cart and carriage carrying a few men. How many are you expecting?\"\n\n\n\"Nineteen men, myself included,\" Fionn says.\n\n\n\"Perfect. More than enough men to do what needs to be done. Now, it's best to keep drilling to night, and as quietly as can be, but this'll do for now. I'm in a bit of a hurry. Shall we begin?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, we shall,\" Fionn says, as you all head outside.\n\n\n\"Sorry, I didn't catch your names,\" Ernie says, turning to you.\n\n\n\"Sean Craig.\"\n\n\n\"Craig? Hardly a Catholic surname. Are you a Protestant?\"\n\n\n\"That a problem?\" Sean asks.\n\n\n\"Of course not. Wolfe Tone was a proper Irish patriot, and he was Protestant. There's rumors that the IRA are a Catholic supremacy organization, but that's a load of drivel. We want equal rights for Catholics and Protestants. We want nothing more ,and we'll take nothing else.\"\n\n\nErnie O'Malley turns to you two again, nodding.\n\n\n\"And you two?\"\n\n\n\"Joseph McCarthy. This is my brother, Michael.\"\n\n\n\"A pleasure to meet you two. You're the soldier, aren't you, Michael?\"\n\n\n\"I am. Or, I was,\" you say. \"I fought in the Great War.\"\n\n\n\"Ah. My brother signed up when war broke out, too. Congratulations, I respect your service. That skill will be useful.\"\n\n\nYou're led outside, where about a dozen other men have assembled. A few hold rifles, taken from Fionn's shed. Ernie strolls over, grabbing a rifle from a recruit. He shoulders it, checking to make sure it's loaded, before staring down the iron sights. \n\n\n\"This'll work,\" he nods, before looking around. \"Any targets?\"\n\n\n\"I've a scarecrow that I've used before,\" Fionn says, as you spot the old scarecrow down the field, among the cold, winter-stricken fields.\n\n\n\"The scarecrow, then. A shame we don't have a British uniform to stuff it in. Anyone care to be the example?\"\n\n\nYou're shoved forward by Joseph, as Ernie grins, handing you the rifle.\n\n\n\"Ah, we have the professional soldier to give us an example. Thank you, my delightful Tommy. Do your best.\"\n\n\nYou grab the rifle, aiming down it the iron sights as you stare at the scarecrow. It's very, very far away, and you highly doubt you have a chance to actually hit it.\n\n\n\"You're trying to ambush this British soldier, before he gets to your house, shits in your bed, pisses in your tea and eats your dinner. Take your time, he hasn't seen you yet. Go.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Take a few potshots", "result": "You raise your rifle, quickly aiming down the iron sights and pulling the trigger. The bullet thuds into the ground near the scarecrow, before the next show flies past the scarecrow. You take another shot, but it also misses, before you lower the rifle, sighing. \n\n\n\"Oh come on, that was miserable,\" Ernie says. \"Shoulder the rifle, cock your head to stare down the sights, and get into a position where you're comfortable. Don't anticipate the recoil, that'll do nothing to effect your shot. Try again, in a shooting position.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Drop to a knee and take a shooting position", "result": "You drop down to you knee, crouching with the other leg as you raise your rifle to your shoulder, cocking your head to stare down the iron sights as you train your gun barrel onto the scarecrow. You take a deep breath, focusing slowly. The trembling of your hands goes away, as your finger slips to the trigger. \n\n\nYou fire once, as the shot flies through the air, straight over the scarecrow's head. The second shot hits the soil just to the left of the scarecrow, shooting up dust. You fire once more, as the bullet nearly glances the side of the scarecrow, but instead flies past and hits the earth.\n\n\n\"Good shots,\" Ernie O'Malley says. \"Far better than your first disastrous few.\"\n\n\n\"I missed every shot,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Bah, at this distance, I'd be shocked if you could land a hit, But it's a good shooting position either way. Notice it men, try to emulate it. He's even keeping low down, so that if they're firing back, they're going to have a great deal of issues trying to hit him. Now, let's try focus on a potential ambush position. Let's continue your streak, Michael. You're trying to ambush a convoy going down a long road with plenty of cover. You have, let's say... ten riflemen. How do you space them out?\" ", "action_results": [{"action": "Spread out your riflemen at equal intervals alongside the road", "result": "\"You spread the riflemen at equal distances along the road, creating a long hallway of death,\" you suggest. \"Then, you can pick off the troops as they try to make through it, until there's none left.\"\n\n\n\"An interesting answer, but not an acceptable one. If the convoy had even two or three men, they'll always outnumber whatever gunman's attacking. Once they run into the first, they can eliminate him or fall back. No, the ideal system we have, like the one used at the Soloheadbeg Ambush, is to have a primary body at the ambush point. They attack in superior numbers, wiping out the enemy, but if the enemy, try to blow on straight through and drive on, have two more men further up ahead to eliminate the drivers if they try to escape. That's the system we go with.\"\n\n\nThe soldiers all nod thoughtfully, as you nod as well.\n\n\n\"That's the tactic we're going to use to deal with the RIC convoy we're going to be raiding. That's our plan. The gracious Michael Collins have given us information on a weapons convoy we're going to hit.\"\n\n\nQuite a few of the men around you nod eagerly. Apparently, Michael Collins has made quite a reputation for himself in Frongoch, and now as the Minister of Finance of D\u00e1il Eireann, a commander of the IRA, and director of information, he's a very powerful man. He controls vast networks of informants, and a near mystical group of assassins known as the Squad, or the Twelve Disciples, that hunt down spies and informants as well as performing assassinations.\n\n\n\"We're going to hit them to fully arm this group. Until then, we're using weapons borrowed from Liam Lynch and the No. 2 Cork Brigade. We're going to hit in the formation discussed, and wipe out the convoy. I'll be taking the ten best shots here, so let's get to work and show me what you can do.\"\n\n\nThe rest of the day is spent drilling and going over tactics, as well as O'Malley and the locals establishing the various levels fo support held for them among all the various locals. Various safe houses and villages with high nationalist tendencies, as well as areas with a high unionist presence that are likely to be filled with informants. The locations of various RIC barracks and where the presence of the British army is strongest, as well as the area that this branch was expected to deal with, a large section of outer and rural Dublin. It's going to be hard work, and you're under-supplied, under-armed and under-supported, but most importantly, you're underestimated. The Crown think the problem in Ireland is a bunch of peasants mucking about in their pigsties, trying to rise up without knowing what they're doing. \n\n\nThey'll learn never to underestimate an Irishman.", "action_results": [{"action": "The day of the ambush", "result": "You sit on a rocky hillside, a rifle in your hands. Fionn sits next to you, another rifle in his hands. The two of you wait patiently, sitting there.\n\n\n\"How are you feeling?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Confident. We have this handled, and we're fighting for the cause,\" Fionn says.\n\n\n\"Really? That's impressive. I'm fucking shitting myself,\" you chuckle.\n\n\n\"Oh, we're being completely honest?\" Fionn asks. \"Then I threw up this morning, and I'm sitting on my hands to stop them from shaking. I'm fucking terrified.\"\n\n\n\"We'll deal with it, I suppose. Or maybe we won't and we'll get butchered,\" you say. \"Who knows? We'll see what happens, I suppose.\"\n\n\n\"They're approaching!\" a voice hisses, as you stare across the road to where Joseph and Sean wait. \n\n\n\"Get down! This happens now,\" you say, crouching down and raising your rifle.\n\n\nYou stare down, as a horse-drawn carriage begins approaching down the road. Four RIC are aboard it, slowly approaching as the horses pull the carriage down the road. You pull up your balaclava, partially obscuring your face, as you take slow, deep breaths. Finally, just as they hit the target point, Ernie holds up his fist as you all rise, taking aim at the carriage.\n\n\n\"Hold!\" Joseph yells. \"You are ordered to surrender by the Irish Republican Army!\" \n\n\nThe carriage stops in it's tracks, as the RIC quickly begin looking around, reaching for their guns.\n\n\n\"Don't! I have the best crackshots in the country all aiming at your hearts, and trust me, they have itchy trigger fingers they're just scratch with their triggers. Something loud might just set them off and pump you all full of lead.\" \n\n\nYou watch as the lead RIC slowly reaches down for his gun, where the pistol sits in the holster.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take him out", "result": "You fire your rifle, as the man topples back from the force of the bullet that explodes through his chest, crumpling onto the floor. In a blind panic, the other guns go off, as a hail of bullets rain down on the group. They manage to raise their rifles, exchange a short amount of gunfire, as they dive for cover, but it's a brief moment and they don't last. In the quick flash of gunfire, they're all dead.\n\n\n\"What a fucking massacre,\" Joseph says. \"Let's check the guns, then.\"\n\n\n\"Wait!\" Fionn shouts. \"I think there's one still left.\"\n\n\nOr perhaps not.\n\n\nYou stare down at the corpses, and thick you see one moving slightly, twitching ever so slightly. Of course, it could easily be your imagination. Still, you raise your rifle again, aiming at it.\n\n\n\"Any of ye still alive?\" Fionn asks loudly. \n\n\n\"I hear him whimpering,\" Joseph yells. \"He's probably playing dead.\"\n\n\n\"Shoot the corpses, make sure they're dead,\" Sean suggests.\n\n\n\"Please, I'm still alive,\" one of them suddenly screams. \"I surrender! I surrender!\"\n\n\n\"For fuck's sake, hold your fire!\" you shout. \"He's wounded.\"\n\n\n\"Stay back, he could be trying to trick us,\" Sean snarls.\n\n\n\"Fuck's sake,\" you say, standing up from the ridge you're hiding behind.\n\n\nYou quickly step down the rocky terrain, strolling towards the carriage. The injured police officer raises his empty hands pathetically. You reach down, grabbing his sidearm from his holster and pulling it out, as you toss it out of his reach.\n\n\n\"You can come down now,\" you say.\n\n\nThe various men hidden in the ambush site arise, slowly creeping down to the road. You all surround the wounded\n\n\n\"He's the enemy. We can't afford to take prisoners. We execute him,\" Sean says. \n\n\n\"We can't,\" Fionn says. \"He surrendered. The republic doesn't execute prisoners. We're a civilized country.\"\n\n\n\"We don't get to be a country if men like this exist. Men who subdue their own kind so they can hold onto their own power.\" \n\n\n\"Jesus Christ above, I don't own land! No one working escort missions is rich and powerful, for God's sake! I'm not even Protestant, I'm a Catholic!\"\n\n\n\"Bullshit! What diocese?\" Sean says.\n\n\n\"Cork! Queenstown, I'm from Queenstown!\" he says.\n\n\n\"Samuel's from Cobh, aren't you, Samuel?\" Sean asks.\n\n\nSamuel nods slowly, looking down at the man.\n\n\n\"Yeah, I am.\"\n\n\n\"This doesn't matter,\" Joseph says. \"This war isn't between Catholics and Protestants! It's between Republicans and Unionists!\"\n\n\n\"We need to know if this man's honest,\" Sean says. \"What was the name of the priest there?\"\n\n\nThe man goes pale, the blood draining from his face. \n\n\n\"I... I don't remember.\"\n\n\n\"Then he's a liar, and we shoot him,\" Sean shrugs.\n\n\n\"No! For fuck's sake, I just don't remember! We just called him 'Father'! He, he had a big nose, really flat! He constantly had blood noses, so we called him Tomato Nose! I swear to God, I'm not lying.\"\n\n\nYou almost laugh at the absurdity of a man pleading for his life telling you about how he called his priest Tomato Nose. You all look to Samuel, as he nods.\n\n\n\"Father Jacob had a very big nose. It did look sort of like a tomato.\"\n\n\nThere's a moment of silent, as the RIC lets out a sigh of relief.\n\n\n\"Thank god, you know I'm not lying,\" he says.\n\n\n\"So what, he's Catholic?\" Sean says. \"That doesn't matter. He's a traitor to the country! If we let him go, he might gun down our soldiers some other day.\"\n\n\n\"Shoot him, then,\" Ernie says.\n\n\n\"What?\" Sean says, startled.\n\n\n\"Shoot him. Go ahead,\" Ernie says.\n\n\nSean raises his pistol, pointing it the man's head.\n\n\n\"Please, please don't!\" the man begs.\n\n\nHe holds his position, pausing. His brow furrows, as his finger starts to tap on the trigger. The RIC closes his eyes, beginning to pray silently.\n\n\n\"God our father, please grant me mercy for all the sins I have committed against you...\" he begins to pray.\n\n\n\"Shut the fuck up,\" Sean snarls.\n\n\n\"...and please grant my soul the gift of eternal life alongside you, serving you...\" \n\n\n\"I said shut the fuck up!\" Sean shouts.\n\n\nSean aims the gun at his head for a moment for, before swearing.\n\n\n\"Goddammit,\" Sean says, lowering his revolver. \"I can't do it.\"\n\n\n\"I thought so,\" Ernie says. \"It's easy to sentence a begging man to death, but it's hard to pull the trigger. If any man thinks that we should kill this man, step forward and have the guts to do it yourself. If not, then it's our duty to spare him.\"\n\n\nYou look around, but none of the others seem eager. You suppose you're faced with the same choice as everyone else.", "action_results": [{"action": "Execute him", "result": "You step forward, raising your rifle as you point at the man's head. You take a deep breath, focusing the gun barrel and staring down the iron sights.\n\n\n\"Are you willing to do it?\" Ernie O'Malley says, intrigued.\n\n\nYou pull the trigger, and the man's head explodes in a burst of pink, grey skull matter and chunks of skull bursting out in front of you. \n\n\n\"Jesus,\" Ernie says, stepping back. \"You called my bluff. Fuck's sake, you're a cold son of a bitch.\"\n\n\nYou nod, feeling a strange rush of emotions as you look at the dead man by your feet. Joseph looks at you, a worried look on his face.\n\n\n\"Jesus, Joseph,\" he says nervously. \"How... how the fuck could you do that?\"\n\n\n\"I did what needed to be done,\" you say. \"We can't have mercy in this war.\"\n\n\n\"Damn right,\" Sean says. \"You're a better man than I.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, I suppose,\" Fionn says. \n\n\n\"You've changed so quickly, Michael,\" Joseph says. \"I don't think I'll forget this.\"\n\n\n\"Forget it, we need to act. Let's check on the guns,\" Ernie says. \n\n\nErnie steps away from the scene of the execution, strolling over to the carriage. You follow him to the back, where he climbs inside, pulling open the door to let you all see inside. Boxes of ammo and rifles sit inside, as Ernie busts the first one open to reveal a bolt-action rifle.\n\n\n\"Let's bring those horses out from where we left them and load up the rifles so we can get out of here,\" Ernie says. \"Now, let's get out of here, men. We follow the plan.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "A few months later...", "result": "Over the next few months, you take part in a few more raids with your group. As the IRA attempts to spread and organize, it's focus is mainly the founding of the new cells and units, as well as the information war. The British refuse to acknowledge the legitimacy of the D\u00e1il, or even that it's fighting a war. They claim that it's simply an enforcement of martial law by the British army as well as a heavy reinforcing and militarization of the police in Ireland. You recruit young more patriots to the cause, raiding enough weapons and ammo to keep the unit supplied as the war rages on. Still, it's not a particularly brutal war, and there's hope peace may still come about.\n\n\nYou stand in the fields, working away as you plant endless seeds. There's sweat in your brow and a desperate hunger in your stomach, but you're nearly finished. As you let out an exhausted yawn, Joseph appears from the house, strolling towards you, followed by a worried looking Mary. Joseph holds a crumpled up letter in his hands. \n\n\n\"Joseph, stop!\" Mary says.\n\n\n\"I'm not going to do anything!\" Joseph says. \"I'm just talking to my brother about family business!\"\n\n\n\"It's none of either of your business, Joseph?\"\n\n\n\"What's wrong?\" you ask, tossing down your sack of seeds and strolling towards him.\n\n\n\"Mary's gone and got herself a suitor.\"\n\n\nYou crack a smile, looking at Mary. \n\n\n\"Anyone we know, Mary?\"\n\n\n\"He goes by the name Arthur,\" Joseph says. \"I've a little love letter from him here.\"\n\n\n\"Arthur? That's hardly a name for an Irishman,\" you say.\n\n\n\"That's because it's not, is it? He's an Englishman, or at least his parents are. Proper unionist, runs the local Irish Unionist party.\" Joseph says. \n\n\n\"If you touch a hair on his head, I'll take your rifle and shoot you both!\" Mary shouts.\n\n\nAdmittedly, in the past, you have been a bit rough with Mary's boyfriends. Not because you're bad people, but she does have a habit of falling in love with various scumbags and villains. But a Unionist is a step worse than even you'd have thought.\n\n\n\"We'll go have a talk with him,\" you say.\n\n\n\"A talk like you had with Seamus, who he ended up with a broken collarbone?\" Mary says, accusatively.\n\n\n\"A talk like we had with Seamus, who we found out was screwing Sarah from the butcher's behind your back,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"Don't worry, we won't do anything awful,\" you say. \"Let's go, we'll head into town.\"\n\n\n\"Michael! I...!\" Mary says, before you hush her.\n\n\n\"I promise, nothing much,\" you lie. \"Why would Joseph or I have any issue with a unionist? Come on, Joseph, let's go.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Head into the city", "result": "You walk down the bustling city streets next to Joseph, your hands in your pockets as you head towards the Irish Unionist party headquarters. It's late enough that it should be closing, and you'll be able to grab Arthur as he's walking home. After a short stroll, you arrive at an elegant stone building, and lean against the wall, lighting a cigarette.\n\n\nTime passes, as various women leave the building, secretaries and that, presumably. Eventually, after about half an hour past closing time, as you're beginning to head home, a large, tall, muscled man with cropped blond hair walks out. \n\n\n\"Fuck me, he's a big bastard. No wonder Mary likes him,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"Are we sure it's him?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Must be. No one but women have left.\"\n\n\nYou step forward, blocking the man's path with a smile.\n\n\n\"Arthur, I presume?\" you say.\n\n\n\"Yes, I'm Arthur,\" the man replies, nodding. \"How can I help you?\"\n\n\n\"We were wondering if we could get some information on the Irish Unionist party. We were considering changing our vote for future elections.\"\n\n\n\"Oh, I'm sorry, I'm Arthur Jones. You're looking for Arthur Craig.\"\n\n\n\"Ah. Could you by any chance point him out to us?\"\n\n\nJones nods to a pale, skinny man walking out after him. You turn to look at the man, raising an eyebrow. He's about as frail and thin and Ma is, with a pair of thick black glasses.\n\n\n\"Thanks,\" you say, as Jones walks off down the street.\n\n\nYou step out in front Arthur Craig, as he looks at you with a worried expression.\n\n\n\"Arthur Craig?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Yes, that's me. How may I help you?\"\n\n\n\"The same Arthur Craig that's courting Mary McCarthy?\" Joseph asks.\n\n\n\"Yes, that's right. What's this about? Is she alright?\" the meek figure asks.\n\n\nYou look down the street to make sure the more intimidating Arthur is gone, before shoving Arthur up against the wall, glaring at him.\n\n\n\"My name's Michael McCarthy, and that's Mary's my sister,\" you smile, keeping Arthur pressed against the wall as he offers little resistance.\n\n\n\"I've heard what your kind do,\" Joseph says. \"Having poor Catholic girls fall in love with you, fucking them until your balls are drained and then dumping them more a more prim and proper Prod like yourself. Did you think we'd just let you do that to sweet Mary?\"\n\n\n\"I don't want to do that!\" Arthur frantically mutters. \"For god's sake, don't hurt me, I've done nothing wrong.\"\n\n\n\"I'm not going to hurt you,\" you say. \"If you stay away from Mary, we'll never see each other again. But we're not letting you lead her around and making a whore of her. You go near her again, and we'll break your legs. Got it?\"\n\n\nArthur looks at you in terror, before shaking his head.\n\n\n\"No, you bloody fool, nod if you agree and will stay away from her,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"I will not,\" Joseph says, quiet but determined. \"I'm not letting a pair of thugs like you keep me from the woman I hold dear! I won't do as you say!\"\n\n\n\"Fuck sake, I'll show him we're not kidding,\" Joseph says, grabbing Arthur from you and immediately planting a fist in his stomach as Arthur doubles over with a yelp of pain.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stop Joseph", "result": "You grab Joseph, pulling him back as Arthur keels over, vomiting onto the pavement.\n\n\n\"Leave it, Joseph,\" you say. \"Let's talk to the stupid fool.\"\n\n\nYou crouch down, next to Arthur, who raises his hands defensively in fear of the next hit.\n\n\n\"For Christ's sake, what does Mary see in you?\" you ask. \"You really care for her, do you?\" \n\n\n\"With all my heart,\" Arthur says. \"I'll happily take a beating for her.\"\n\n\n\"Well, you won't need to. I suppose we'll leave you off,\" you say. \"But listen to me closely. Me and Joseph have connections with a lot of powerful members of the IRA. We can't give you the details, but I promise you this, if you treat her badly, we'll kill you. If you break her heart, we break your head open. And so help me God above, if you raise a hand against her, you're going to beg for us to kill you after what we do. Got it?\" \n\n\nArthur nods, as Joseph stares at you in annoyance.\n\n\n\"We can't let our sister date a unionist!\" Joseph says indignantly.\n\n\n\"She's a grown woman, she can be with who she pleases, I suppose,\" you say. \"Plus, she's half one herself.\"\n\n\n\"Fuck's sake,\" Joseph says, rolling his eyes. \"Fine.\"\n\n\n\"I suppose I best be on my way then,\" Arthur says, stepping back.\n\n\n\"No you don't,\" you say. \"You're heading to the pub with us. We owe you a pint after all this, and it's best to find out for sure you're not some piece of shit before we let you continue seeing our sister.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Months Later...", "result": "Over the next few months, the British government puts forward the Government of Ireland Act 1920, where three of the four Irish provinces, Munster, Leinster and Connaught, all combine into an entity gaining it's own \"Southern Parliament\" while the Northmost Ulster remains under the British parliament, and Southern Ireland gains home rule. However, it's too little too late, as the Irish people already wants full independence now, and home rule clearly isn't enough. \n\n\nIn order to help deal with the Irish dilemma, the Englishmen begin recruiting vast quantities of English veterans from the Great War. Due to their expertise in fighting they're perfect for waging war on the IRA, but due to the fact that they're not soldiers and are hired as police men, the British can continue to pretend like they're not at war with Ireland and that they're simply putting down a wave of crime and terrorism. As they wear a mixture of tan military uniforms and black police uniforms, these men are known as the Black and Tans.\n\n\nThe Black and Tans are brutal in their oppression of the Irish people. A lack of discipline allows them to perform endless atrocities. In retaliation for losing men to IRA attacks, they burn down towns, beat up civilians, rob businesses, shooting innocent people and executing prisoners. Of course, this oppression fails to break the spirit of the Irish people. Instead, it forces the Irish people to pick sides, and they almost all side with the less brutal IRA. A wave of nationalism surges through the country, and it becomes clear peace is impossible. No, the path forward is one of war and bloodshed.\n\n\nYou walk down the busy streets of Dublin, a cigarette hanging in the corner of your mouth. You hold a bag of bottled apple juice for Ma, her favorite, as well as quite a few other bits and bobs for the house. You hurry down the road, quickly trying to reach home before sunrise.\n\n\n\"Shut your fucking mouth!\" a voice screams. \"You fucking Irish cunt, I will blow your husbands head off and make you tongue the neck-hole!\" \n\n\n\"Jesus,\" you mutter, turning to see what the dilemma is.\n\n\nA young man lies on the street corner, covered in blood. It's clear he's been heavily beaten by the bruising covering his face. A woman is being held against the wall by a Black and Tans' fist, as three others stand over the man. \n\n\n\"Stay the fuck back!\" one of the Black and Tans says, raising his rifle to aim it at your chest. \n\n\nYou quickly raise your hands in a gesture of surrender, stepping back.\n\n\n\"Relax, I'm not trying to start anything,\" you say. \"I served in the Great War the same as you, I'm a veteran.\"\n\n\n\"I didn't ask for your fucking story, paddy. What do you want?\"\n\n\n\"I just wanted to know what was going on.\"\n\n\n\"This man is a traitor to the Empire!\" the Black and Tan explains. \"He proclaimed we were \"invaders\", the fucking pig farmer. I'm so sick of this fucking civil war, I'm not showing mercy to any fucking supporters of the enemy.\"\n\n\n\"You called it a civil war,\" you remark. \"Haven't the British argued that they're only putting down terrorists?\"\n\n\n\"Watch it, paddy,\" the Black and Tan says, glaring at you. \"Don't get smart with me.\"\n\n\n\"That's not a crime, is it?\" you ask.\n\n\nThe Black and Tan spits on the ground in front of you, snarling.\n\n\n\"It is if I go and fucking say it is, you understand? Best stroll on before it gets dark. We'll deal with this.\"\n\n\nFuckers. If you had your IRA unit, you'd make short work of these pricks. Of course, now you don't, so maybe fighting isn't the best option.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stand up to them", "result": "\"You can't treat people like this! He's done nothing wrong!\" you say.\n\n\nThe fist swings in from the side, connecting with your jaw as you're knocked to the floor, smacking against the hard stone of the sidewalk. You look up at him defiantly as the boot kick lands on your face, knocking your head against the street. You look up, knowing violence will just get you beaten to death.\n\n\n\"Fucking pest,\" the Black and Tan spits, leaning over and grabbing your groceries. \n\n\nThe Black and Tan pulls out your bottle of apple juice, hurling it at the street corner as it shatters, juices pouring out across the ground. The Black and Tan pours out your other goods, quickly hurrying to crush them under his heel as he grins. You stare up at him, imaging aiming down the sights of your rifle as you ambush him like you've ambushed so many of his allies. You'd just line up the shot, and the fucker's brains would blow out the back of his skull. \n\n\n\"What? Are you going to swing at me? Come on, I'm waiting, you little fucker,\" he says. \"Let's go.\"\n\n\nHe holds out his chin, staring down at you with a disgusted look in his eyes. \n\n\n\"Come on, you pig-fucking farmer, go ahead and try something!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Swing at him", "result": "You swing your fist, knocking him backwards as they collapse to the ground, his head smacking against the ground. The Black and Tan looks up at you, embarrassed and shocked. Anger flashes across his face as he snarls.\n\n\n\"Fucking paddy cunt!\" he yells.\n\n\nSuddenly, the Black and Tans are upon you, as dozens of boots quickly lash out, striking you in the face and stomach as you're knocked to the ground. A boot heel smashes into your windpipe, crushing your throat with a well placed kick. You gasp, desperately grasping at your throat as you choke on your own blood. The Black and Tan you punched stands up, repeatedly planting his boot on your face as he breaks your nose, bruising your face heavily as your forehead is cut open. He continues to stomp your face repeatedly as you drown on your own blood.\n\n\nAfter a few minutes of brutal beating, one of them raises their rifle, pointing it at your head. A second later, your skull explodes, your brains spilling out into the streets. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Do nothing", "result": "You don't do anything, simply staring up at the police officer as he grins.\n\n\n\"Good, learn your fucking place,\" he says. \"It's in the muck, paddy. You belong in the muck.\"\n\n\nYou don't say a word, simply looking at the ground as you're filled with shame. The Black and Tan turns, strolling down the street followed by the rest of his group. You're left sitting there, staring at them walk over. You rise, looking at your destroyed goods, before you turn to the beaten man and woman. The beaten man groans, looking up at you, as the woman rushes to help him.\n\n\n\"Thanks for trying to help,\" the man says, looking at you. \n\n\n\"Not a bother,\" you say, wiping the blood tht's spilling down from your nose. \"Are you OK?\"\n\n\n\"I'm fine,\" he says.\n\n\n\"Thank you so much,\" the woman says. \"I truly appreciate this. My husband's a good man.\"\n\n\n\"I'm sure he is. I need to hurry home. Are you sure you'll be able to get him back?\"\n\n\n\"We'll be fine,\" he says. \"Hopefully, the IRA will deal with scum like that some day.\"\n\n\n\"We will,\" you mutter. \"Slan go foill.\" \n\n\n\"Slan go maile, agus go raibh mile maith agat,\" he says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head home", "result": "With that, you begin the long journey home. It takes some time, and as you arrive, the sun is just disappearing over the hill, vanishing from your site. You push open the door to the same house, walking inside. Joseph and Ma sit at the kitchen table. Joseph's reading a book, while Ma stares, worried looking into the candle that sits in the middle of the table. \n\n\n\"I... I couldn't get the groceries. The apple juice was smashed up and it was all wrecked by the Black and Tans. Sorry, Ma.\"\n\n\n\"That doesn't matter,\" Ma says, absent-mindedly, her gaze not shifting from the flame.\n\n\n\"What's wrong?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Mary's gone missing,\" Ma says.\n\n\n\"Mary is an hour late to get home,\" Joseph says. \"She's not gone missing.\"\n\n\n\"Mary is never home late,\" Ma says. \"Never.\"\n\n\n\"She's probably out with Arthur,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Arthur's a good boy, he never ends of being late,\" Ma says.\n\n\n\"Never thought I'd here you say that about a Unionist,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"We need to go out and look for her,\" Ma says.\n\n\n\"It's fine,\" you say. \"She's a grown woman. She'll be home soon.\"\n\n\nYou quickly begin preparing dinner, getting the stove going and boiling the potatoes and getting everything ready. You make sure you're cooking up enough for Mary as well, because like Ma says, it's strange she's late. She'll definitely be home for dinner.\n\n\nYou're halfway through finishing dinner when the door to the farmhouse opens, as Mary arrives home.\n\n\n\"Thank Christ,\" you mutter under your breath, walking out to the entrance to the home.\n\n\nMary stands there, in the worst state you've ever seen her in. Her hair is slick with blood, sticking to the side of her face as it smears it red. Her face is heavily bruised from what must've been one serious beating. Her dress is nearly torn off her, with several tears along the skirt. Tears run down her discolored cheeks, as her lip quivers from the trauma of her night. A long cut runs across her forehead, disappearing to her hairline, with a trickle of blood running down her face and soaking her hair and scap with the dark blood. Her inner thighs and legs are slick with blood and... you grimace, as Mary stares at you with a distant, deadened look.\n\n\n\"Christ above,\" you say. \"Ma! Joseph! Get down here!\"\n\n\nYou rush over to her, wrapping her up as she presses her face into the the nook of your neck and shoulder. Ma and Joseph arrive on scene. Ma lets out a horrified shriek, running over to her daughter and giving her a tight hug as you step back.\n\n\n\"Oh my dear God, sweet God above, what's happened? What's happened? What's happened you?\" \n\n\n\"I... I was walking home, and he attacked me,\" she says in between sobs. \n\n\n\"Who? Who fucking did it?\" Joseph shouts.\n\n\n\"Calm down, Joseph,\" you say, grabbing his arm.\n\n\n\"Calm down? Don't you know what they did to her?!\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"And she doesn't need you yelling at her. Take it easy.\" \n\n\n\"Carter. The others called him Carter,\" she says softly. \n\n\n\"Leave her alone!\" Ma hisses, tears streaming down her face. \"Come on, sweetheart, you're alright, you're alright.\"\n\n\nMa leads Mary to the bed as she continuously sobs, as you're left with Joseph. You pause, staring blankly at Joseph, who is absolutely fuming with rage.\n\n\n\"That fucking bastard raped her,\" Joseph says. \"We've been putting up with far too much, far too much bullshit because of cockroaches like these. We need to deal with him. This can't be left stand.\"\n\n\n\"We go group up the IRA unit, organize an ambush. Blow Carter's head off with a fucking rifle and deal with this shit,\" you say.\n\n\n\"No, we can't involve the unit. It's not their job to deal with this. It's ours,\" Joseph says. \"We confront the fucker man to man, right now.\"\n\n\n\"So be it. Either way, we finish it.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Deal with this personally", "result": "You walk with Joseph down the dark streets towards the small bar known as the Boar's Head. You've already searched several other bars for the man known as Carter, as well as all the local Black and Tan spots. The staunchly unionist Boar's Head Pub is one of the last places you've left to check, but one of the most promising. A heavy revolver sits tucked away in your pocket, as Joseph pushes open the door and you follow Joseph inside.\n\n\nThe interior of a pub is a well lit, relatively empty place. Apart from a few old patrons, the main customers of the place are a group of uniformed Black and Tans who sit around a table.\n\n\n\"That's gotta be them?\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"Let's do this,\" you say, walking forward.\n\n\nYou walk up to the group of men, leaning down over them as their laughter and conversation grows soft.\n\n\n\"Hello there, lads. I'm looking for Carter?\"\n\n\nA young, blond-haired man with blue eyes looks up at you. \n\n\n\"Yes?\" he asks.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot him", "result": "You fumble to pull your revolver out of your pocket, feeling its heavy weight in your hand. You raise your gun, pointing it at the man's head as his eyes widen in shock and terror. You take a deep breath as you stare down the iron sights, aiming right between the eyes of the little fucker.\n\n\n\"T\u00e9igh cac a ithe, \u00e9igneoir,\" you say.\n\n\nYou press your finger against the trigger, squeezing it tightly as the gun recoils back in your hands. In front of you, the man's neck snaps backwards as the black of his skull explodes, spraying brain and blood against the wall. Carter's now limp body crumples to the ground in front of you, as you release your breath. You look at the other Black and Tans, who all sit there in shock. There's a brief pause as silence fills the bar, as it takes a moment for everyone to comprehend what you've just done.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill the other Black and Tans", "result": "You aim your revolver, firing again as the next Black and Tan collapses backwards as you fire two rounds into his chest, killing him instantly. Joseph fire, killing another, before a swinging fist knocks your revolver out of your hands, where it clatters along the ground. The Black and Tan quickly looks at you with a snarl, before looking over at his rifle.\n\n\nYou're outnumbered and outgunned here, so it's best to do what you want to do as quickly as you can. Otherwise, this is going to get bloody quickly, and not in the way you're trying to get.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go for the revolver", "result": "You leap down onto the floor, quickly scrambling for your revolver, you grab it, quickly pointing and firing at the men reaching for their guns. You hit one of them in the back as he crumples to the ground. You fire again, blowing out the side of the skull of the second. The third man lets out a terrified shout, turning to stare at you as you aim right between his eyes to blow his face apart. You stand slowly, grinning.\n\n\nYou pull the trigger, as a hollow click runs through the gun.\n\n\n\"Oh, for fuck's sake,\" you say, as you realize you're screwed as the exact same moment that he realizes what's going on. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Throw the gun", "result": "You toss your gun at him, as the heavy iron gun bounces off his shoulder as he goes to grab the rifle, twisting around to aim at him.\n\n\nYou pause, realizing you've just tossed your weapon away to give your opponent a light bruise. He raises his rifle, aiming it at you as he gives you a sneer.\n\n\n\"Oops,\" you say, before the bullet blows out your teeth, straight your mouth and destroys your brain stem, and your body goes limp, smacking to the ground without even a last spasm.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Charge him", "result": "You charge forward, bashing into him as you knock him against the wall, before you toss him onto the table. You raise your gun, before you begin to pistol-whip the man as you smash the heavy iron gun into his face as you smash his head against the table, bashing teeth and blood across the table. You repeatedly smash the gun against him until his face is nearly caved in, before you pause, looking over to Joseph. The last Black and Tan still standing pins Joseph to the ground, keeping his arms pressed against the ground with his knees as he begins to punch him.\n\n\nYou quickly fumble for the bullets left in your coat pocket, grabbing one as you flick out the chamber, shaking out the shells inside. You quickly pop the bullet into the chamber, clicking it into place. You raise your revolver, firing and striking the man in the side of the head, blowing out his brains and knocking him to the ground. You pause, sighing as you walk over to Joseph, reaching down. Joseph grasps your hand as you yank him to his feet, looking at you with a heavily bruised face.\n\n\n\"God above, my face stings like a bitch,\" Joseph says. \n\n\n\"Let's get out of here,\" you say, as Joseph stumbles to the bar, leaning heavily against it as he grabs a half-finished pint of Guinness, bought by a long-gone patron who disappeared when things got rough.\n\n\nJoseph drinks it down with a few chugs, before clambering over the bar as he grabs a bottle of whiskey. He climbs over the bar again, heading to the door with you. \n\n\n\"Pass the drink,\" you say, as he uncaps the whiskey before passing it over to you. \"If nothing else, this'll be a story for the unit.\"\n\n\n\"Here here,\" Joseph says, as you take a long drink of the burning liquid. \"At least we avenged Mary.\"\n\n\n\"Mary doesn't give a fuck about justice or being avenged,\" you say. \"Let's be honest, this was for us.\"\n\n\n\"I suppose,\" Joseph we says. \"What'll we tell Arthur?\"\n\n\n\"We'll see what she wants to do,\" you say. \"We'll tell him for her, if she needs.\"\n\n\nIn the late, dark back roads, you find it easy to escape off into the night. It's a long, cold work home, as you drink to warm yourself and deal with the stress of the night. By the time you get there, the bottle's empty, and it's early in the morning. You walk into the house, exhausted, drunk and tired. Ma sits in the kitchen, praying over her bible again. You walk in, sitting down next to her. \n\n\n\"Where is she?\" you ask. \n\n\n\"She's in bed.\"\n\n\n\"Is she alright?\" Joseph asks.\n\n\n\"No,\" Ma says.\n\n\n\"Of course not,\" you say. \"The poor girl. I can't imagine what she's going through.\"\n\n\n\"Where were you?\" Ma says.\n\n\n\"We killed the men who did that to her,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"Good,\" Ma says. \"Did anyone survive?\"\n\n\nYou shake your head slowly.\n\n\n\"We killed every last one of them,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"Good,\" Ma says again. \n\n\n\"We'll need to leave for a while,\" Joseph says. \"We didn't wear masks. Everyone in that bar would've seen us. Best case scenario, they'll be enough of them to draw a picture of us and the Black and Tans will be on the look-out for two brothers of our descriptors. If we're unlucky, one of them would've recognized us, and then they'll know our names.\"\n\n\n\"Are Mary and I at a risk?\" Ma asks.\n\n\n\"No. They won't have heard what we were asking about. I'll make sure to have a few of the unit looking after you, though.\"\n\n\n\"Where will we go?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"We'll head down South. They need good men down there as much as anyone else. I know they're fighting hard in Cork. We'll go meet Fionn now, and organize something. We meet up with the head down there.\"\n\n\n\"We have to leave soon,\" you say. \"We can't stick around, they'll be searching the area in the morning for us.\"\n\n\n\"We'll pack our things,\" Joseph says.\n\n\nMa stands, pulling you both in as tears stream down her face.\n\n\n\"I love you both. You're two strong, good sons.\"\n\n\n\"We love you too, Ma,\" you say.\n\n\nWith that, you pack your things, gathering up everything you'll need. You kiss Ma goodbye, say a silent goodbye to a sleeping Mary, and quickly head off into the night to get out of there. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Months Later...", "result": "You travel with Joseph to Fionn's, where he secures you with a letter to head down to Cork. The two of you quickly head to Cork, where you meet with the leaders of the IRA forces down there: Liam Lynch, Tom Barry and Sean O'Donoghue. They organize a room down with another IRA volunteer by the name of Brenda. In exchange for helping out with the farm, you get free room and board from him. You quickly get involved with the IRA down there, organizing drilling, training and ambushes alongside the vast rebel forces down there.\n\n\nFor the battle of independence, the war gets worst, especially for Cork. In March, the Mayor of Cork is murdered by a group of Black and Tans. In response to increased internment, Munster and Cork get especially violent. 24 prisoners of war are hung by the British, and Sean Tracey, the man who started this all, is killed in Dublin. In August, Terence MacSwiney, the new Mayor of Cork, dies on a hunger strike, attracting vast international attention.\n\n\nWhen November rolls around, the violence only continues. On the 21st, Bloody Sunday happens. Michael Collins and the Squad, his anti-spy squad, assassinate 14 undercover British Intelligence officers in a single day. In a reprisal attack, the British forces attack a Dublin v Tipperary football match, killing indiscriminately, killing twelve people including one of the goalies. Two prisoners of war and an innocent man are executed at Dublin Castle in addition to this, purely as acts of spite against the entire Irish people. This event is known as Bloody Sunday.\n\n\nIt's late November now, only a few days after Bloody Sunday and you're down in Cork. You sit in a small room Brendan's farmhouse in Cork, discussing matters with a group of other IRA soldiers. Liam Lynch, a small, bespectacled man you'd normally look over, stands at the center of attention, commanding the entire group.\n\n\n\"We're low on arms, low on manpower and all-around we're doing worse than we can. Fighting this war is going to be tough,\" Liam Lynch admits.\n\n\n\"If we quiet down on the ambushes and go underground while doubling our recruitment efforts, we can make up our numbers in no times,\" Tom Barry, a young commander with a mess of black hair suggests.\n\n\n\"Not a chance in hell, Tom. If we reduce attacks, the British will think they can quash out the rebellion here. If they subdue Munster, if they take Cork, this rebellion will falter here as badly as in Ulster. Connaught will be a mop up, and with that, their focus on Dublin will wipe us out completely.\"\n\n\n\"Then what do you suggest?\"\n\n\n\"We attack. We double-down, and hit hard and fast. Make sure those Brits understand that this isn't going to be easy for them. I've already lined up two targets. Tom, I want you to head to Kilmichael shortly, to set up an ambush. It'll happen a week after the Sunday Massacre. You're to hit a group of Auxiliaries, around eighteen men. I'll give you twice that. I want this group blown out of the fucking water. Make sure the Brits know who is fighting this war.\"\n\n\n\"Aye. There'll be no survivors,\" Tom Barry nods.\n\n\nThe plan for Kilmichael actually represents a serious change in the IRA method of waging war. Rather than small, occasional ambushes from locals, the IRA has began organizing flying columns of soldiers, permanently mobile units of soldiers that stay at various safehouses to rest and resupply to avoid capture, while hitting hard, aggressive attacks. It's a show of total war, thanks to the escalation in violence the Black and Tans caused.\n\n\n\"The second ambush I'm planning is a bit more distant. In early December, I plan to capture or kill Army Intelligence Corps Captain James Kelly, to put a face to this slaughter. A simple six man unit hits their lorry, killing their men with grenades and sweeping through the survivors with rifle. Understood?\"\n\n\n\"Whose to lead it?\" a voice asks.\n\n\n\"I'll give that to Se\u00e1n O'Donoghue.\"\n\n\n\"Perfect,\" Se\u00e1n O'Donoghue says. \"We'll get the target.\"\n\n\n\"Good, good,\" Liam Lynch says, handing out two lists of names to either chosen commander. \"These are your men.\"\n\n\n\"I've a problem,\" Se\u00e1n O'Donghue says. \"Two of my men, Paddy Trahey and Patrick Donohue, were killed Tuesday by a Black and Tan. He snuck into a meeting wearing civilian clothes and killed them with a grenade, alongside Seamus Mehigan.\"\n\n\n\"Bollocks. Take the Dubliners. Dubliners, are you free?\"\n\n\n\"Aye, commander. We'll be free,\" Joseph says.\n\n\nLiam Lynch nods, looking down at his notes.\n\n\n\"Good, good. Or... I suppose I could switch you with Dennis and Liordan, if you'd rather head out earlier to Kilmichael. Seeing as I'll have to shift names around either way, it's your choice.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Take part in the ambush at Dillon's Cross", "result": "You walk with Joseph and an IRA volunteer, who shares the lovely name Michael with you, down the busy streets of Cork by Dillon's Coss. Across from you, walking in the same direction, is commander Se\u00e1n O'Donoghue, Se\u00e1n O'Donoghue wears the uniform of an off-duty British officer. You try to avoid looking at him to avoid drawing attention to him and thus the many imperfections in his disguise that could get him caught and killed.\n\n\nThe plan is simple. Two lorries of Auxilaries should be coming down the road, transporting Captain James Kelly, your target. You're outnumbered and in a busy city center, so you're going to have to work hard to win, especially since you'll be trying to minimize civilian casualties, while the Auxilaries won't necessarily be trying to do the same. Plus, thanks to the fact you're in a city, you're not well armed, instead armed with revolvers hidden on your persons, as well as a grenade each, also hidden on your person. \n\n\nSe\u00e1n O'Donoghue stops, leaning against the wall of a pub and lighting a cigarette. You quickly move behind a waist-high stone wall with Joseph, finding another two soldiers low down against the wall there. You move next to them, crouching low so you're hidden from the street view. The last soldier in your six man crew stands next to you, leaning against the wall casually. As you can't see the road of Se\u00e1n O'Donoghue, you're to wait for his signal. Sean O'Donoghue is to slow the head lorry down, and then you strike.\n\n\n\"They're coming,\" the man against the wall says, staring at the road.\n\n\n\"Hello there, officers!\" you hear Sean O'Donoghue say.\n\n\n\"Let's do this,\" the man leaning against the wall, rising his pistol. \n\n\nYou rise up to see a pair of lorries slowing down in the street. Your comrades release a volley of grenades. Surprisingly, most miss, bouncing off harmlessly against the sides of the truck. One lucky throw lands in the second grenade, going off and immediately disabling the drunk in a burst of smoke as men frantically get out of the vehicle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Toss your grenade", "result": "You pull out your grenade, popping out the pin. You chuck the grenade through the air, as it lands with a clank inside the trunk. It goes off, showering the inside of the truck with shrapnel that tears through the canvas as the second truck is immobilized. The Auxiliaries are quickly left confused and disorientated, as you draw your revolver from your coat, raising it through the air and firing.\n\n\nAn incredibly wounded Auxiliary collapses out of the truck, heavily bleeding on the ground, as Sean O'Donoghue rushes for cover. The dying auxiliary lies still, but it seems all the others besides him seem only somewhat wounded. They draw their rifles, immediately returning fire as pot shots slam around you.\n\n\n\"Fuck, we're still outnumbered!\" Joseph yells.\n\n\n\"We don't have a fucking chance!\" another man yells. \n\n\nYou continue firing, as rifle fire continues and bullets fly past you. Your commander is separated from you and is on the other side of the road, meaning that it's as much up to you as anyone else here to command the group and keep things working.", "action_results": [{"action": "Retreat and disperse", "result": "\"Let's get the fuck out of it,\" you say. \"Come on!\"\n\n\nProviding cover fire with your revolver, you quickly begin falling back, rushing off into the streets. You hurry through the alleys, moving down through the side-streets as you quickly disperse. You already have a preplanned path out of here, and it doesn't take long before you manage to escape off, disappearing into the crowds.\n\n\nYou quickly head off, moving through the streets once you've escaped the early fighting. It's not long before you manage to regroup at your destination, a small apartment that's servicing as a nearby safe house, where Brendan's cousin has his family. Se\u00e1n O'Donoghue. After you account for all your losses, you crowd around the downstairs lounge, as Se\u00e1n O'Donoghue addresses you.\n\n\n\"Today was a failure, but we didn't lose a single man,\" Se\u00e1n says. \"We have opportunities to try again. If nothing else, we've made our presence known. Now, all of you, head home. The meeting for tomorrow is the same time as planned. Tiocfaidh \u00e1r l\u00e1.\"\n\n\nYou all nod, quickly making it off into the streets as the IRA plan disperses. You walk with Joseph back to Brendan's house, your hands in your pocket as the cold night settles in. \n\n\n\"What a disappointment. We didn't kill more than a single man, and we didn't even get our target.\"\n\n\n\"We didn't lose any lives either. Let's just thank God above for that and head home.\"\n\n\nYou walk along the road, before you hear distant, terrified singing. You pause, trying to focus on it as it's interrupted by aggressive shouting.\n\n\n\"What the hell is that?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"It's coming from Dillon's Cross.\"\n\n\nThe two of you quickly move towards Dillon's cross. You walk down the streets, as the screaming gets louder.\n\n\n\"You will do as I command, or I will blow your fucking brains out onto the street!\" a voice screams.\n\n\n\"God save our gracious Queen! Long live our noble Queen!\" a half-sobbing voice screams.\n\n\n\"Louder!\"\n\n\n\"God save the Queen! Send her victorious, happy and glorious...!\"\n\n\nYou move along the streets, where you come across a brutal scene. Standing outside a bar in the busy street, dozens of men lie on the grounds, Auxiliaries strolling above them, aiming their rifles at the soldiers. Two Auxiliaries stand over a kneeling man, who is completely naked, his clothes sitting besides him. They press the rifle against his head, as a red-faced man barks and screams at him, as he forces the naked man to sing \"God save the Queen\", the English national anthem.\n\n\n\"Long to reign over us! God save the Queen!\" the man is forced to sing. \n\n\nIt's clear he's been singing for quite some time at the top of his lungs. He's exhausted, with sweat dripping down his brown as he freezes in the cold. \n\n\n\"They're not even IRA. Those bastards just rounded up civilians to do this. It's humiliating.\"\n\n\n\"Let's get the hell out of here, we don't want to risk getting caught.\"\n\n\n\"Michael, we have to help them! We can't leave them,\" Joseph says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help the poor bastard", "result": "You nod, feeling rage boil up through you.\n\n\n\"We can't let this man die because of our actions!\" you're right.\n\n\nJoseph draws his pistol, nodding at you.\n\n\n\"We rush them, then get the wounded man out of there before he's executed. Then, we draw them off, letting the other men escape.\"\n\n\n\"On three,\" you whisper. \"One, two...\"\n\n\nYou quickly rush forward, opening fire with your revolver. One of the Auxiliaries' heads explodes as he collapses backwards with a burst of blood. The second one goes to raise, his rifle, before Joseph fires, shooting him in the chest and killing him instantly.\n\n\n\"Hey! You fucking traitors to the Crown! IRA!\" one of the soldiers screams.\n\n\nQuickly, half a dozen riflemen rush out of the bar, as you reach down, grabbing the man's arm.\n\n\n\"Joseph, help me! We need to get him out of here!\" you yell.\n\n\nJoseph leans down, grabbing the brutalized man as you yank him to your feet. You manage to get him to your feet, before the rifles went off. You feel like you're punched in the chest, as you're knocked to the ground, bringing down the injured man and Joseph with you. You collapse to the ground, as pain begins to shoot through your body as you let out a desperate gasp for help. Another volley of shots goes off, and your pain ends.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Leave him suffer", "result": "You shake your head.\n\n\n\"No, Joseph. We can't. They hopefully won't kill him. If we get involved, they definitely will, along with us as well. Let's get out of here before we draw suspicion.\"\n\n\nYou turn, moving away from them.\n\n\n\"We're done here. Let's go head home.\"\n\n\nIt's a long walk home through the darkness, as you're just left feeling worse about the night. You reach Brendan's house, pushing open the door and heading into the small bedroom that is your own. Hopefully, you can just get some sleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "Awaken", "result": "A hand roughly grabs you, wrapping around your arm as you're shoved against the bed. You immediately look up, seeing a dark figure standing over you as their hands reach towards you. Even in your groggy haze, your instincts kick in and you lean over, grabbing the knife hidden in the holster to the side of your bed, drawing the blade as you slice it through the air. You slash the knife as the hidden figure desperately jumps backwards in a blind terror to avoid getting stabbed. \n\n\n\"For fuck's sake, Michael, calm the fuck down, would you?\" Brendan yells at you.\n\n\n\"Shit!\" you mumble, dropping the knife as it clatters to the ground. \"Sorry, I was sleep and my training kicked in. Are you OK? What's going on?\"\n\n\n\"Shit is going wrong fast, Michael! Black and Tans are all over the place, charging into the city!\"\n\n\n\"What?\" you ask, confused. \"Have they come to arrest us?\"\n\n\n\"No, they've just driven in to the city center in order to cause chaos. They've started detaining civilians, and then they've just started fries everywhere. They're chucking bombs about the place to terrify people, and they're raiding and looting everything they can! It's fucking madness!\"\n\n\nYou nod, rubbing the sleep from your eyes.\n\n\n\"OK, are they nearby yet?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"They're nearing quickly,\" Brendan says.\n\n\n\"Well then, you need to deal with this and get out of here, OK? You need to go grab your mother, get your ma out of here, and go grab your brother and take him out of here too. They don't need to be a part of this.\"\n\n\n\"I'm an IRA soldier!\" Brendan says meekly. \"I should take part in trying to stop them.\"\n\n\n\"Too fucking bad!\" you say. \"You have a family to take care of here. God knows I wouldn't be trying to serve if I thought Ma or Mary were in danger, or even Joseph, the stupid fool. Where is he, anyway?\"\n\n\n\"He's still in bed, \" Brendan tells you as you quickly push past him and towards Joseph's room.\n\n\n\"I can help with the fighting!\" Brendan says. \n\n\n\"Fighting? We're guerilla fighters. We don't attack the fucking British forces when they're at their most pissed. It'd be like punching a soldier in the bayonet. I'm just going to see what's happening here and see if I can help the fire brigade.\" \n\n\nYou shove open the the door, to where Joseph sleeps in his bed. \n\n\n\"Joseph, we need to get up, you understand?\" you say, giving him a slow shake.\n\n\n\"What?\" Joseph mumbles from the sheets.\n\n\n\"Get up, Joseph!\"\n\n\n\"Uh, you're worse than Ma,\" Joseph groans. \"Just tell me what you want.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Explain the situation to Joseph", "result": "\"The city's up in flames, Joseph! The Black and Tans are trying to take over the whole place!\"\n\n\n\"What are you on about?\" Joseph says, tossing the pillow against the wall and rising. That's bullshit Michael. They...!\"\n\n\n\"Fucking get up and check with me, then! We need to go find out what's happening, don't we?\" you say.\n\n\nJoseph nods, pulling himself up to a sitting position as he looks at you. He stares at you for a moment, before you raise an eyebrow.\n\n\n\"Come on then,\" you say.\n\n\n\"I sleep naked,\" Joseph says, semi embarrassed.\n\n\n\"God above,\" you groan. \"I need to go get dressed. Hurry up, would you?\"\n\n\nYou hurry off to your room, quickly pulling on trousers, a shirt, and a jumper and forcing on your boots. You hurry to slip on your cap, moving out to the hallway. Joseph hops out of his room on one leg, struggling to slip on your boots, as you grab your coat, pulling it on. \n\n\n\"Let's go, then,\" you say, as Joseph nods, scratching his thick beard.\n\n\n\"Aye, let's see what's happening.\"\n\n\n\"Wait!\" Brendan says, rushing out of the kitchen carrying a pair of revolvers. \"You'll need these.\"\n\n\n\"We don't need weapons, Brendan. We won't be fighting,\" you say.\n\n\n\"We'll need them for protection. If the Black and Tans are on a rampage, it's better to be safe than sorry.\"\n\n\nJoseph reaches out to grab his revolver, before you grab his arm, stopping him.\n\n\n\"Aye. I agree. And I agree that it's also better safe than sorry should we be stopped and searched, as they're doing to every man, it seems. They find these on us, they'll shoot us and toss us in the River Lee.\"\n\n\n\"And if we don't have them, they might shoot us for being Irish and we'll be left with no way to stop them,\" Joseph says. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the revolvers", "result": "\"Fine, then. Cheers, Brendan,\" you say, taking a heavy revolver in your hand.\n\n\nYou check to see if it's loaded, before nodding.\n\n\n\"Perfect, let's do it,\" Joseph says, stuffing his revolver in his coat pocket. \"Do you have a gun for yourself, Brendan?\" \n\n\n\"I do,\" Brendan nods.\n\n\n\"Then get your family out of here. Last thing they need is some bastard Brit getting their hands on them.\"\n\n\nYou move forward, shoving your way out of the door and into Cork City. Immediately, you notice the smoke, as it wafts up into the air, filling the sky with an almost liquid darkness that pours over the city. You can hear the screams and cries in the distance, as well as gunshots. You quickly hurry down the streets towards them, as the air gets hot and fills with ash. Soon, you're confronted by a row of buildings, all either going up in flames or fully ablaze. You watch as people desperately try to escape the buildings, hurrying to escape as smoke fills their lungs and burns lick their flesh.\n\n\nMeanwhile, standing right next to them, seemingly uncaring to their pains and struggles, are a group of Black and Tans. Some wear their uniform, others don't, but they have balaclavas pulled up their face, covering their mouths to obscure their face and stop them from breathing in smoke. They laugh, splashing petrol into the burning buildings, helping the fire spread, although due to the old wooden frameworks of the buildings, they're already burning at an incredibly rate. \n\n\nYou look around, wondering how to deal with this. You could confront the bastards doing this, or just keep a low profile and try help the people. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Try stop the arsonists", "result": "\"For God's sake, stop! These are innocent people!\" you say, strolling up to the Black and Tans. \"Stop this! Please!\"\n\n\nThe Black and Tans laugh, as two of them continue to splash petrol among the flames. One of them steps forward, raising his rifle and pointing it at you.\n\n\n\"Fuck off, paddy. Stroll on and get the fuck out of this area before I blow your brains out.\"\n\n\nYou stare at the man, as he stares at you, sneering. You pause, feeling your pistol grow heavy in your pocket.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow orders and move on", "result": "You move along the streets, quickly moving through the streets as you wonder what's going on. Dozens of buildings are up in flames, as various RIC and Black and Tans looting and committing mass arson. Huge sections of the city are up in flames, as homes are destroyed.\n\n\nIt's not long before you reach the fire brigade, at the center of the city outside the burning Cork City Hall and Carnegie Library. Surprisingly, however, they're not attempting to put out the fire. Instead, they're crouching low behind a fire truck. However\n\n\n\"What the fuck is this?\" you ask, rushing over to the fire fighters. \n\n\nA bullet pings near you, bouncing off the ground, as you scamper to hide behind the truck. You turn, looking at them, rushing near an ash-covered man with a thick mustache. He looks at you, scampering over.\n\n\n\"You need to get out of here! This whole place is dangerous!\" he barks.\n\n\n\"What the fuck's going on? Why are you pinned down here?\"\n\n\n\"Black and Tans took over the city hall and are burning it down from the inside. However, they've slashed our hoses so we can't use them, and left a few men by the city hall window to take potshots at us in case we keep trying to put out the fires.\"\n\n\n\"The Black and Tans are sabotaging firefighting attempts? Those fucking bastards,\" Joseph says. \"This is why we need to fight, Michael.\"\n\n\n\"Fight?\" the firefighter says, scowling. \"Look around you. The second largest city in the country is being burned to the fucking ground because of this war. We were content before 1916. We had peace. Death, and this is all you bastards brought us!\" \n\n\n\"We're trying to help!\" you say. \"We...!\"\n\n\n\"Can it. I'm in no mood to argue politics. I'm trying to save as much as this city as I can.\" \n\n\nYou step back, still crouched behind the fire truck with Joseph.\n\n\n\"We need to help some way, don't we?\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"What can we even do?\" you ask.", "action_results": [{"action": "Create a distraction to try lure away the Black and Tans", "result": "\"Fuck it,\" you say. \"We have the guns. Let's give those Black and Tans something to shoot at.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, alright,\" Joseph nods. \"On three?\"\n\n\n\"Three, two...\"\n\n\nYou step out from behind the fire engine. A bullet thuds into the ground next to you, skipping off the street. The two of you raise your guns in unison, opening fire on the building. Bullets thud around the window as the soldiers firing from inside duck down.\n\n\n\"IRA! IRA soldiers are attacking! Two in sight!\" you hear.\n\n\n\"OK, let's go,\" you say, hurrying down the road.\n\n\nYou fumble to reload your revolver, rushing down the road. You twist around, aiming at the window and opening fire. The soldiers begin bursting out of the now flaming city hall, rushing after you as you turn, rushing down the street.", "action_results": [{"action": "Flee", "result": "You burst down the street, hurrying around the corner as you rush as quickly as you can. Your boots thud along the pavement as you rush as quickly as you can, occasionally turning around to fire back at the men who are sprinting after you, \n\n\n\"Michael, we need to get out of here! What's the plan?\"\n\n\n\"Stop shooting and run faster! Maybe we can lose them!\" you say. \n\n\nYou continue to \n\n\n\"They're shooting at us! Plan?!\" Joseph yells.\n\n\n\"I'm thinking!\" you between breaths as you keep sprinting away.\n\n\n\"I don't see them, what's the plan?\" Joseph asks, breathing heavily as he sprints. \n\n\n\"OK, fine. I have an idea.\" ", "action_results": [{"action": "Hide", "result": "\"We hide!\" you whisper loudly, grabbing Joseph and quickly rushing into the nearest building. \n\n\nYou push through the door to a shop that's been abandoned in the chaos, smashing open the door as you find the shopkeeper thankfully left it unlocked in his desperation to escape. \n\n\n\"IRA! Come out!\" a voice screams.\n\n\n\"Stay low and quiet,\" you whisper.\n\n\n\"I'm not an idiot!\" Joseph replies. \n\n\n\"No one saw them escape. They must've went into one of the building!\" another voice cries. \n\n\n\"We'll search from door to door until we find them,\" another suggests.\n\n\n\"And risk our lives? No, too much risk and too time consuming,\" the first voice says. \n\n\n\"Then we burn them out. For the boys at Kilmichael,\" another voice says.\n\n\nYou continue hiding, as you hear the Black and Tans outside begin continuing their acts of arson on the surrendering buildings in the area. Unfortunately, as the walls as splashed and soaked with gasoline and set alight, the building quickly erupts into flame. \n\n\nSoon, flames begin bursting through the walls of the room. You wait, hoping they'll go away, as the entire house is quickly engulfed in flames.\n\n\n\"Michael, what do we do?\" Joseph asks. \"They're waiting for us outside, they've surrounded the whole area! There's no way out!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay hidden", "result": "You stay low, refusing to leave, as the flames continue to spread through the building. Smoke begins to spread through the room, until it completely fills it, the flames spreading so quickly that they're licking at your heels. \n\n\nIt's not the flames that are your end, it's the smoke. Refusing to leave, it soon becomes a struggle to breath. Smoke fills your lungs, even though you stay low, it soon becomes a struggle to breath. Then, it's impossible. You end up choking on the floor. Eventually you break, trying to find a way out of the smoke-filled building, but it's impossible, as the endless see of gray smoke and ash consumes you, and you drown in it. Minutes later, the smell of cooking meat spreads out among the smoke that floods through city. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Make a break for it", "result": "\"We have to get out of here!\" you yell, running forward.\n\n\nYou dive under a falling beam of burning wood, desperately scampering among the ash. You burst out of the room, running ahead. The men waiting outside raise their rifles, opening fire. Bullets slam into your chest as you stumble forward, before another shot knocks you hard to the ground. You hit the ground with a thud, killing you instantly. You collapse to the ground, struggling to breath as smoke and blood fills your lungs. You desperately attempt to struggle forward. You groan, coughing up blood, before one of the soldiers strolls up to you, aiming his rifle at your skull.\n\n\n\"Burn in hell with the rest of this city, paddy,\" the man says, before pulling the trigger and blowing your brains out onto the floor. ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Keep running", "result": "\"Just keep running!\" you say.\n\n\nThe two of you continue sprinting through the streets, disappearing down alleys and rushing through them to avoid patrols. Thankfully, your work with the IRA here means you know the various escape routes through the city, and it's not long before you've successfully outran them. After a few minutes of running, you've lost them in the complicated streets of Cork. Once you're sure you're definitely away from them, you quickly find yourself heading out to the outer areas of the city. You turn, looking back at the city center, which has gone up in flames. \n\n\n\"There's no way we can help. Today, all we can do is stare into the true face of the British.\"\n\n\nYou pause, as the city erupts into absolute chaos. There's distant screams and gunshots as the Black and Tans enact their revenge. The flames spread through the city, as city hall is engulfed. You watch as frantic Black and Tans exist out the side. Seconds later,a fireball, as whatever the Black and Tans inside did comes to fruition, not doubt destroying the City Hall. You watch as the flames lick the black sky, feeling utterly helpless.\n\n\n\"Jesus,\" you mutter.\n\n\nYou watch the destruction of endless buildings, the end of dozens of businesses and the jobs from them. The Black and Tans have truly made their mark, showing just how far they're willing to go as they scorch their path across the second largest city in Ireland. They'll pay for this. This won't break the nationalist movement. It will only strengthen it.\n\n\n\"We need to get out of this city,\" Joseph says after a few minutes. \"We can't let this happen to Dublin, or to Mary or Ma.\"\n\n\n\"We'll organize heading back,\" you nod. \n\n\nYou'll plan to organize a return soon enough. But for now, you just stare at the flaming city around you.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Few Days Later...", "result": "After the burning of Cork, the focus of the British forces quickly shifts to a brutal suppression of Cork. With that, you and Joseph decide that your it's about time to return to Dublin. Given the escalation of the war, you're spending most of your time hidden out in safe-houses and drilling either way. Thus, you're left to head back North to Dublin. You make the arrangements with the Cork division. Apparently, Fionn has risen to a commander of a small flying column up there, and is more than happy to have the two of you come back to serve as his lieutenants, if only from the fact that he knows you and you've garnered a fair bit of experience in the past two years.\n\n\nAs the year shifts to 1921 and after several months in Cork, you and Joseph are heading home to Dublin.", "action_results": [{"action": "Return to the farm", "result": "You walk down the old track to the house, staring at he farm around you. It's fallen into a bit of disrepair, but it's actually better than expected. Fionn must've had a few of his men help out with a few things. You'll make sure to thank him for it.\n\n\nYou walk up to the old house, floorboards creaking as you move up the porch. You push into the old house, where Ma and Mary wait. Mary rushes up from her seat, wrapping her arms around you while Ma hobbles from behind to do the same. There's a brief moment where you're completely contented, allowed to hold your family again.\n\n\n\"Mary! Good to see you, sweetheart! You too, Ma! How are you two?\" you say.\n\n\nAfter a brief hug, you step back, looking down at Mary's sizable bump.\n\n\n\"You've certainly grown,\" you say with a smile. \"Why didn't you tell us you were pregnant?\"\n\n\n\"I didn't know how,\" Mary confesses, although a bit more solemn and quiet than you would've hope.\n\n\n\"Is that... OK? It's wanted, isn't it? I mean, premarital, sure, but...\" you say.\n\n\n\"Is it Arthur?\" Joseph interrupts. \"Is that scrawny coward refusing to marry you or accept that it's his?\"\n\n\n\"No, it's not that!\" Mary says, as your homecoming quickly becomes emotional. \"Arthur's been the best. He's been very sweet and kind and we're to marry in Spring.\"\n\n\n\"Then what is it?\"\n\n\n\"I...\" Mary says, before pausing, unsure of herself. \n\n\nMa squeezes Mary's hand, as she nods, closing her eyes as her voice quietens to little more than a whisper.\n\n\n\"I haven't actually... done it with Arthur,\" Mary says softly.\n\n\nYour face darkens as a gloom sets in over you. Mary's not the type to cheat, obviously, which really leaves only one possibility. Joseph, perhaps a moment slower, laughs.\n\n\n\"So what, our sister's been gifted with the virgin birth like the original Mar...\" Joseph seems to understand the situation about halfway through, and quiets down as a silence defends over the group.\n\n\n\"Does Arthur know?\" you ask after a moment.\n\n\n\"He does,\" Mary nods.\n\n\n\"And he's still willing to marry and raise the child?\" you ask, as Mary nods. \"Then we just don't tell anybody what happens. Not the community, not the Church, not even the child. We can move past this.\"\n\n\nMary nods quietly, as tears begin to run down her face. You grab her, hugging her tightly against your chest. \n\n\n\"Don't worry, doll, we'll deal with that.\" \n\n\nYou all embrace each other, gently hoping you can get through this.", "action_results": [{"action": "Months Later...", "result": "It's now April, 1921. After a few months back in Dublin, you've quickly went back into the thick of it, planning out ambushes and raids and serving with Joseph as Fionn's seconds. Ever since the Black and Tans showed up, there's been a huge amount of recruits, meaning you spend quite a bit of time training and drilling them. Although the war continues to be brutal, exhausting the forces of both the British and the Irish, it's clear the war's reaching a boiling point for both side. Victory or defeat is on the horizon, although you can't tell which. \n\n\nYou stroll into Fionn's farmhouse, followed by Joesph. Although it's not a training day and there's no attack planned, he's called for you to come talk to him. You move inside, where Joseph sits at his kitchen table, his little brother sitting next for him, buttering some bread.\n\n\n\"Oh, good, you're here,\" Fionn says. \"Aidan, give us a few minutes, can you?\"\n\n\n\"Can't I stay and listen?\" Aidan asks, as Fionn shakes his head.\n\n\n\"No, get out of here,\" Fionn says, as Aidan leaves the room.\n\n\n\"Is everything alright?\" Joseph asks. \n\n\n\"Not exactly. I need your help making a decision,\" Fionn asks. \"I'm having a bit of trouble with loyalty.\"\n\n\n\"There's a traitor among our unit?\"\n\n\n\"There may be, but if there is, it's me,\" Fionn laughs.\n\n\n\"You're not thinking of surrender, are you?\" you ask, worried.\n\n\n\"Of course not. However, the President of the D\u00e1il has asked for some of our men to attend an attack on the Customs House.\"\n\n\n\"And?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Eamon DeValera's plan is that a significant attack of like 120 IRA soldiers in full uniform on a major British target would help to show that we're not a terrorist movement of criminals. It'd be a huge propaganda victory and be a massive symbol for the success of our whole movement.\"\n\n\n\"So what's the issue?\" Joseph asks. \n\n\n\"It'd be a massacre, that's the issue. Michael Collins pointed out that our success so far has been through guerilla warfare, and he's right. In outright battles, we'd be decimated. Michael Collins called for units to increase in guerilla warfare as a counter to this, but he's been outvoted. So I need to decide whether I'm lending my unit to the Customs House attack in a months time, or whether I'm to simply increase in our use of guerilla warfare and raise the attacks. So, I've come to you. We can join in the symbolic attack to prove we're a real army, so that maybe the outside world will recognize us and this war can end. Or, we can keep the fight going as guerilla fighters. I need your opinions.\"\n\n\n\"I'm not a tactician. I can lead in battle, but I sure as hell don't know how to command the forces on that grand a level,\" Joseph admits. \"Michael?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Collins in an increase in ambushes and guerrilla warfare", "result": "\"We follow Collins' idea and increase guerilla warfare. Let them find their men from elsewhere for their suicidal attack on the Customs House. Make up some excuse for why you can't join. It's not like the Republican government is strong enough to actually see if we can or can't join in.\"\n\n\n\"Good advice, I suppose. I'll do that, then. We need to increase the amount of attacks. We'll be organizing an ambush soon enough. I heard there's an arms transport in about a week's time. I'll have our informants looking into that, and see we can do,\" Fionn says. \"Goddamn, this war's never going to end. It'll be the death of every man here.\"\n\n\n\"We'll do our duty to the country. We'll never surrender. Eventually, Britain will break,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\" I hope so. Fada beo Eireann,\" you say quietly.\n\n\n\"Fada beo Eireann,\" the other two say, as you sit there, wondering how far you'll need to push the British before you reach a breaking point.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Week Later...", "result": "You stand in the road, staring down at the small barricade in front of you. In order to deal with the transport of arms and the movement of the Flying Columns, the British have set up barricades across country roads to try deal with this. You wait in cover, your squad slowly approaching the small checkpoint, with only two soldiers on duty. You aim your rifle, ready to take the checkpoint. Once that's yours, Fionn and Team 2 will set up for the ambush, while your men will join him. You and Joseph will take the uniforms off the soldiers, and you'll be used to slow the men down in order to let the ambush strike.\n\n\n\"OK, we're in range. Do we open fire?\" Joseph asks.\n\n\n\"Wait,\" you say, nodding at the four soldiers with you, two new recruits, Liam, an old veteran from back when you served in Dublin, and Joseph. You stare down at them, your gun raised. \n\n\n\"Maybe. We could try force a surrender.\"\n\n\n\"Dealing with prisoners during this kind of thing could be hard,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"But we'll get the uniforms in better condition,\" you say.\n\n\n\"We should kill them all! We don't leave Brits alive!\" one of the recruits says. \"Black and Tans...!\"\n\n\n\"These aren't Black and Tans. They're soldiers. They're just doing their job. It's better to take them alive,\" Liam says\n\n\n\"How would you know?\" the recruit says.\n\n\n\"I used to be a soldier. I served in the Great War,\" you say. \"We shouldn't treat the enemy like dogs. They're people, same as us. Hell, I was one of them.\"\n\n\nThe recruit doesn't respond, as you stare down your iron sights at the soldiers.\n\n\n\"Michael, what's the order?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Open fire", "result": "\"Fuck it, it's easier to go to violence. Aim for the heads, fire on my mark. Try to avoid straight chest shots, it'd be too obvious.\"\n\n\nYou pause, raising your rifle as you aim for one of the soldier's head. You've a straight, close shot through the side of the head. You take a deep breath, pausing. \n\n\n\"Mark,\" you say, as the guns go off.\n\n\nThere's a volley of gunfire, as the two soldiers drop almost instantly, not even seeing what's happening. You quickly rise up to your feet, moving in a hurry down the street, rushing down the path. You hurry down to the two soldiers, as you motion for the others to stand guard as you and Joseph get dressed. You grab the first soldier, pushing his body over. A bullet wound has taken the back of his skull off, so you quickly rescue the cap from the pool of blood and brain matter. You hurry to unbutton his jacket, finding a bullet whole through the shoulder and a growing blood stain.\n\n\n\"Bollocks,\" you swear, quickly pulling off the jacket.\n\n\nYou pull the jacket on, before removing the man's boots and trousers. It's not long before you're fully dressed, as is Joseph. You nod to other three soldiers.\n\n\n\"OK, I'm finished. Take the corpses out and find somewhere to dump the corpses out of view and join up with the others,\" you say.\n\n\nThe others quickly go to work, as you turn to Joseph. His uniform isn't bad, only blood around the collar from a throat shot and a bloody patch at the knee from a recruit's badly placed shot. \n\n\n\"Does it look alright?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"The shoulder's a bit obvious. We should be fine.\"\n\n\nYou stand by the road as the ambush position is set up, as you patiently wait as the rest of the unit dumps the bodies off in a field and sets up the ambush.\n\n\nAfter about an hour, the two weapons transports begin approaching. Two trucks filled with a mixture of soldiers and weaponry. You wait patiently, as the truck begins approaching. You stand by the road, holding up a hand to motion for them to stop.\n\n\n\"They're slowing down,\" Joseph says. \"Thank Christ.\"\n\n\nYou pause, wondering what's going on as a mixture of emotions crosses the front driver's face. The truck stops slowing down, although it doesn't speed up either. You stand straight and continue gesturing, trying to stay calm and casual.\n\n\n\"They might've noticed something,\" Joseph says. \"Stay calm or hit now?\" ", "action_results": [{"action": "Raise your rifle and attack", "result": "You raise your rifle, opening fire. You drop to a knee, raising your rifle as you aim ahead, trying to get a shot in at the driver to stop the truck and block up the road. You press the butt of the rifle against your shoulder, tilting your head and staring straight down the iron sights.\n\n\nHowever, attacking this early leaves the trucks out of the firing range, and also in raising your gun and firing, it actually takes a moment for the other IRA soldiers to realize you've changed the signal. The truck drives forward as the driver attempts to speed off, having a brief moment where you're the only person shooting at him. The bullets bounce off the car side, the window shattering, but they don't slow down. The truck drives forward, slamming into you as you're sent spiraling down the street. You bounce against the hard ground, rolling along, before the truck continues driving. Your body crunches as the heavy truck rolls straight over you, as you're killed in such a brutal manner.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Signal your allies to attack", "result": "You raise your fist, as a volley of gunfire goes off from the ambushers positions. Bullets thud through the windscreen, killing the driver of the first lorry. The second lorry slams into the back of him, before trying to reverse, before that driver is quickly killed two. The soldiers inside begin piling out, as a brutal gunfight begins. \n\n\nUnfortunately, stopping them outside of the ambush zone seems to have had some negative side-effects. They're not surrounded, so rather than a massacre, this has turned into a shoot-out. You outnumber them, but only slightly, and the element of surprise hasn't finished this quickly. They're little chance of beating you, but if really want to take this convoy, it'll take some losses.\n\n\nFionn seems determined to finish this: if you don't think it's worth the loss, it's best to decide that.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fall back and regroup", "result": "\"Dammit! Fionn, we need to fall back!\" you yell at Fionn, who is hidden in the grass.\n\n\n\"FALL BACK! Fall back and regroup!\" Fionn yells after giving you a nod, as you quickly firing at the soldiers, heading into the grass. \n\n\nYou quickly disappear off into the grass, rushing off through the fields. The British soldiers don't have the numbers to follow and confront you, especially since they fear you might just be leading them into another ambush. After a few minutes, you disappear off back to the nearby town, where your cousin Patrick has a house he's allowed you to use. From there, you're easily able to split off, escaping before any British counter-attacks can occur. \n\n\nYou've escaped the brutal ambush with not a single soldier lost, although you failed to secure the weapons. Now, without your weapons, continuing fighting is going to be far harder than ever before. As ammunition and arms run low, you don't know how long you'll be able to last.", "action_results": [{"action": "Weeks Pass...", "result": "Over the following weeks, you continue launching attacks, but it becomes clear you're losing men and running under-supplied as the war goes on. It becomes a serious question of how hard you can keep fighting. You desperately push against the British, hitting them hard and aggressively, but you don't know how long you'll be able to continue the fight. \n\n\nThe burning of the Customs House is a mixed bag. 120 Irish soldiers storm the building, setting it up in flames. The building burns for five whole days, being completely destroyed by fire. Although it's a huge propaganda victory, it's a serious military loss. Not a single British soldier or police officer was killed, while on the Irish side, the losses were intense. Five men killed, with 80 being captured after the undersupplied force ran out of ammo. Commander Tom Ennis managed to escape, but took two bullets to the leg. It soon becomes clear that the war is being lost.\n\n\nAll you can do is continue fighting. You promise yourself you won't break until the Irish flag flies free and proud.\n\n\nIt's May 11th, and you're at Fionn's house with an assortment of local leaders and lieutenants. The fighting has taken a small break, and you're looking to the future. The war needs to change, and you need to start doing something serious, to hurt the British where it'll do some damage.\n\n\nRory O'Connor stands in the center, looking over a large map. You all stand around him, listening to him talk.\n\n\n\"We need to do some serious damage, and hurt them where it'll matter. Their pockets. We're going to send soldiers over to England, to show them that the war will hurt them just as much as us. We're going to hit economic targets, like the Liverpool docks, and bomb the ever loving shit out of them!\"\n\n\n\"Irishmen will stick out like a sore thumb over there,\" Fionn says.\n\n\n\"There's many of us over there, economic migrants and dock workers and that. Plus, it'll be easier to evade capture seeing as they're not under martial rule. They want to put their whole country under martial rule, then we're golden, because that just convinces the whole of Britain that this war isn't worth f...!\"\n\n\nA young man bursts through the door, panting as he nearly collapses on the table in exhaustion.\n\n\n\"Damn, catch your breath, boy,\" Rory O'Connor says, standing back. \"What's wrong?\"\n\n\nThe boy looks up at him, explaining between breaths.\n\n\n\"There's a... truce! The war... it's over!\"\n\n\n\"A truce?\" Tom Ennis asks.\n\n\n\"Eamon DeValera and the other D\u00e1il politicians have organized a truce.\"\n\n\nThere's a murmur of discussions breaking out from among the group.\n\n\n\"Thank god,\" Joseph says to you. \"We could use a break from the fighting. This'll give us a chance to regroup, recruit and rearm in preparation for the war to start up again.\"\n\n\n\"What makes you so sure the war isn't over?\" you ask him.\n\n\n\"The British won't give us what we want. We haven't pushed them far enough,\" Joseph says. \"This won't be the end, I'm sure.\"\n\n\n\"I hope you're wrong, Joseph. I hope you're wrong.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Seven Months Later...", "result": "The war does not continue. Shortly after, negotiations begin between the Republican Government and the British government. President of D\u00e1il Eireann, Eamon DeValera, visits London four times, before finally a delegation is sent over for negotiations.\n\n\nNegotiating for Britain was Prime Minister David Lloyd George, Lord Chancelor Lord Birkenhead, Leader of the House of Commons Austen Chamberlain, Secrety of State for the Colonies Winston Churchill, Secretary of State for War Sir Laming Worthington-Evans, Attorney General Sir Gordon Hewart and Chief Secretary for Ireland Sir Hamar Greenwood.\n\n\nOn the Irish side, Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs and famed nationalist politician Arthur Griffith is chairman, accompanied by Secretary of Finance and military general Michael Collins, Secretary for Economic Affairs Robert Barton, and two Members of British Parliament and members of D\u00e1il Eireann, Eamonn Duggan and George Gavan Duffy.\n\n\nStrangely, President of D\u00e1il Eamon DeValera chooses not to attend. Although reasons were not given, there's rumors that he knew whatever deal the Irish delegation could manage to argue for would certainly be far less than wanted, and he wanted someone to pin the blame on. \n\n\nThe negotiations are long and hard. The Anglo-Irish Treaty is devised, but it involves both sides sacrificing quite a bit. The Irish delegation refuses to sign it without consulting DeValera and the D\u00e1il. Eventually, under threat of taking the two countries to war again, a final ultimatum is made: sign the treaty, or continue the war. With little choice, the delegation takes the former option. \n\n\nThe Treaty was a long, complicated document, but the main things were these: Crown forces would withdraw from most of Ireland. Ireland was to become a self-governing dominion of the British Empire, similar to Australia, Canada or South Africa. The British King would be the Head of State of the new state, known as the Irish Free State, or Saorst\u00e1t \u00c9ireann. The new free state's parliament would swear an oath of allegiance to the Irish Free State. The more Protestant, Unionist Northern Ireland would would withdraw from the Free State, becoming it's own dominion of Britain with it's own parliament. Britain would control a number of Treaty Ports in Ireland. Ireland would draft it's own constitution giving it power of itself, but Britain would decide it's policies in terms of foreign affairs and war.\n\n\nThe treaty was met with a mixed bag. In many ways, it was far more than anyone had dreamed of before 1916. On the other hand, the idea of a free, independent Irish Republic was what many men had fought for, and was what many men had died for. Many saw it as a betrayal of principle to bow down to the crown after what they'd done. \n\n\nThere's along debate in the D\u00e1il, with Eamon DeValera leading the anti-Treaty side. The threat of war was used as evidence that the treaty was signed under duress and did not stand. In the end, the final vote was 64 to 57 in favor of the treaty. DeValera resigned as president in protest, to be replaced by Arthur Griffith. Many anti-treaty TDs left the D\u00e1il, refusing to swear the Oath of Allegiance that would be necessary to stay in the D\u00e1il. It became clear that there were serious divisions in the community. These divisions run through your community.\n\n\nYou stand in Fionn's farmhouse, discussing plans with him. The debate has been long and hard on what your unit has done. The IRA is to be disbanded, to be replaced by the National Army of the Irish Free State. As soldiers in the IRA, you're all offered positions in the army. However, many anti-treaty IRA officers have refused this offer, staying in the \"new\" IRA that refuses to acknowledge the treaty or the D\u00e1il, for betraying the Irish republic they swore loyalty to. The path forward is being debated.\n\n\n\"This is more than we could ever get,\" Fionn says. \"If we oppose this, we'll be crushed. We don't have the arms or numbers to continue fighting.\"\n\n\n\"We didn't in the rising either!\" Joseph says. \"But we fought on, and good men gave their lives for the republic! Not this pathetic offering!\"\n\n\n\"The D\u00e1il we pledged ourselves to voted in favor of this,\" Fionn says. \"We have a duty to serve.\"\n\n\n\"Damn right we do!\" Sean says. \"We swore a duty to the republic! We'll stand by it!\"\n\n\n\"Michael Collins' defended his view at the D\u00e1il,\" Liam says. \"I was there. We're not abandoning the republic. He said this is only a stepping stone, but the path forward is through politics. We can't fight anymore but with our votes!\"\n\n\n\"Our votes?!\" Sean says. \"Did that get us anywhere in the past?!\"\n\n\n\"The new IRA has called for all true sons and daughters of the republic to serve them. I stand with them!\" Joseph says. \n\n\n\"That's a massacre. We'll be massacred if we go to war. We couldn't fight on,\" Fionn defends.\n\n\n\"We could've fought on! We can fight on! I refuse to bow to the tyranny of the British crown, until the flag of the Republic of Ireland flies over the D\u00e1il! Enough men died for us to fight on to see it happen!\" Joseph shouts. \n\n\n\"Michael!\" Fionn says, looking to you. \"You've stayed silent. Care to make your opinions known?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Support the treaty and serve as a soldier for the Irish Free State", "result": "\"The Treaty is the best path forward,\" you say. \"We need to stand by our countrymen and the Free State for the greater good.\"\n\n\n\"Michael! That's fucking disgraceful!\" Joseph says, sneering.\n\n\n\"He's right. You need to see reason!\" Fionn says loudly. \n\n\n\"I'm not serving the British who executed our friends. Not a chance,\" Liam says. \"Those who stand with the IRA, let's leave these dogs to serve their masters.\"\n\n\nYou watch as around half of the soldiers in the room, men you've fought with, friends you're shared laughs with, brothers in arms, storm out of the room, completely disgusted with you, just as you all share the same hatred of them for how stubborn and short-minded they're being. You watch as they walk out, even Joseph walking out with them, knowing this won't work out well. Only bloodshed lies down your path.", "action_results": [{"action": "Six Months Later...", "result": "Over the next few months, hostilities rise between the forces of the Irish Free State and the anti-treaty IRA. In February, Ernie O'Malley, the Cork IRA leader who had sheltered you, manages to take over an RIC barracks in Clonmel, capturing 40 police officers and 600 rifles. There's a stand off between O'Malley and 800 of his anti-treaty IRA and 700 pro-Treaty IRA men under Michael Brennan over who will take over the military barracks in Cork after British soldiers abandoned it, which ends peacefully, thankfully, after the barracks is divided between pro-treaty and anti-treaty forces. Later in Cork, IRA soldiers raise a British ship, taking 1500 rifles, 700 handguns and 60 machine guns. \n\n\nThen, comes a more definitive attack on your Free State. Led by Cathal Brugha and Rory O'Connor, your old friend, 200 anti-treaty IRA soldiers take over the Four Courts, the center of judicial power in Dublin, in order to show defiance and to provoke a response from the British soldiers in Dublin, hoping that if Britain's provoked, the Irish will be able to team up again in repelling them and the war can continue. You're positioned outside the Four Courts, ready to defend the Free State if these traitors make an attack.\n\n\nIn May, anti-Treaty soldiers take over the center of Kilkenny, before being dislodged by 200 Free State soldiers. There's a firefight, with 18 casualties, before peace reigns again with a truce. In Donegal, there's another firefight between pro-Treaty and anti-Treaty IRA soldiers, with two deaths. Also in Donegal, a Free State motor convoy is ambushed by Republicans, where one Free State soldier is killed In County Meath, RIC and anti-Treaty fighters clash, with one killed on either side. The election takes place, with pro-Treaty parties far outdoing anti-treaty parties. Sir Henry Hughes Wilson is assassinated in Britain, although whether it's by anti-Treaty IRA soldiers or a secret assassination by Michael Collins and the Free State is debated, due to Sir Hughes Wilson being an almost universally hated figure among Irish for his treatment of Irish citizens in the war. However, this forces the British to put pressure on the Free State to dislodge the anti-Treaty rebels from the Four Courts.\n\n\nYou're left waiting nervously to see what the Free State will send you to do, but you're completely willing to serve your country in whatever it needs.", "action_results": [{"action": "The attack begins", "result": "Early in the 28th of June, the artillery attacks beginm hitting the Four Courts and beginning the Treaty War. The artillery is meant to quickly force out the rebels and quickly end the conflict. Instead, it lasts through the day, before they decide to send in your unit to take the Eastern Wing.\n\n\nYou stare as the next barrage of artillery begins, explosive shells slamming into the Four Courts with explosive punches. You pause, wondering how many of your former allies are in there. Is Joseph there, among the other traitors, standing by the window with a rifle, waiting to shoot you as you walk by? \n\n\n\"Michael?\" Fionn asks, as you return to reality.\n\n\n\"What?\" you say.\n\n\n\"Did you hear our old friend Ernie O'Malley is commanding a large group of traitors?\" Fionn asks.\n\n\n\"I didn't know that. Is that supposed to help me do this?\" you say darkly.\n\n\n\"It was just an interesting fact,\" Fionn says, looking down. \n\n\nYou march along the street with the rest of your Free State unit, heading towards the Eastern Wing. Securing that and capturing the men held there. After a few minutes of walking down the street, you quickly come under-fire. The bullets smack into the ground around you, as you quickly rush behind cover, hurrying to dive behind a concrete wall. You stare over it, at a large rolling beast of metal and firepower.\n\n\n\"Dammit! It's the armored truck they stole, the Mutineer!\" Fionn shouts at you. \"Stay down!\"\n\n\nYou pause, staying low and trying to hide behind a building as bullets thud off the concrete around you. You stare out at the heavily armored car in front of you, it's machine bursting down the street in an attempt to stop your unit from moving up the street to secure the Eastern Wing. You pause, wondering how best to take it out. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge the Mutineer with grenades", "result": "You charge forward, staying low and rushing forward, drawing the first grenade from your side and fumbling to pull the pin off. The armored car quickly bursts into action, letting out a burst of machine gun fire that bursts towards you. Bullets begin pinging off the ground around you, as you toss the grenade through the air. It bounces along the road, rolling to a stop right next to the Mutineer. You dive down low as it goes off, showering the Mutineer with shrapnel.\n\n\nYou quickly rise up, charging ahead again, before the gunner twists to aim at you. The machine crackles with a burst of gunfire, as bullets slam into your body, knocking you off your feet and shredding your organs, killing you instantly. Your bullet-ridden corpse collapses to the ground, a pool of blood quickly forming around it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Move along the cover of the buildings to get in close", "result": "You quickly dive in behind one of the buildings, machine gun fire flying past the street outside. You raise your rifle, smashing the butt of it into the window as you quickly break the glass and knock it from the frame. You clamber in through the window, finding yourself in an abandoned office. You move through the empty building, quickly skipping over the machine gun fire as you hurry along the path. You finally reach out at the other side of the street, climbing out of the window to find you're at the direct flank of the armored car, right next to it's side. You hide in cover, making sure they can't spot you, before planning your next move to take out the armored car.", "action_results": [{"action": "Use your grenades to disable the Mutineer", "result": "You pull your grenade out of your hand, tearing the pin from the grenade. You chuck it through the air, as it bounces along the pavement before rolling to a pause next to the armored car. It explodes, spraying shrapnel into the car as it blows a hole in the side of the armored car. The armored car tries to reverse, but shrapnel has torn the armored car wheels straight off, and it's left unable to move. This quickly leaves the Mutineer vulnerable to artillery, anti-tank weapons and anything else the Free State can bring to the table.\n\n\nYou stay in cover, watching as the crew of the Mutineer clamber out of the armored car, hurrying to rush back towards the Eastern wing. Without the support of the armored car, the other IRA soldiers still quickly begin retreating back to the building and hurrying inside. The Free State soldiers hurry to push up to the disabled Mutineer , where you quickly rejoin them. Then, your Free State commander who is leading your mission appears, quickly assembling the group to send them off on their missions, to break up and take the next few objectives.\n\n\n\"OK, we're splitting off!\" the Free State commander says. \"We're sending soldiers to storm the Eastern Wing to take control of the building and force the enemy out of this place. We're also sending soldiers to go take O'Connell street, where Cathal Brugha and a group of IRA soldiers have attacked. We need some men to capture Brugha and end the attack. Finally, we need a segment to circle around, cutting off the chance for the anti-Treaty leaders to escape down the river and continue this fight. Any volunteers?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Push in to take the Eastern Wing", "result": "You and Fionn quickly join in on the assault on the Eastern Wing, raising your rifle and rushing into the building, ready to fight. You charge inside the building with a surge of Free State soldiers, quickly taking cover behind a marble column in the old building.The attack has taken the IRA soldiers by surprise in its intensity, and with that and the fact that you outnumber and outgun them, you have a serious advantage over the IRA forces. Many of them are forced to use old-model rifles and pistols, while your forces have top of the line weapons thanks to support from the British Empire. \n\n\nThe IRA soldiers quickly realize their position is failing, and they begin to fall back, desperately trying to escape out of of the Eastern Section. The majority, however, realize they're outnumbered and don't have a chance. \n\n\n\"Surrender! By order of the Irish Free State!\" Fionn yells out amongst the din of battle.\n\n\nThere's a brief pause, as the exchange of gunfire comes to a close. After a few minutes, the IRA soldiers begin to lay down their arms. You quickly move forward, rounding up the anti-Treaty soldiers and their wounded, as you quickly capture the Eastern Wing. \n\n\n\"The area's secure,\" Fionn says. \"Well done, gentlemen.\" \n\n\nSoon, the rest of the Four Courts is taken, as the area is captured. The last force taken out is Cathal Brugha and his diversionary attack at O'Connell street. Cathal Brugha orders his forces to surrender, before walking out into the street with his pistol raised to die a martyr. With his death, the rest of the Anti-Treaty forces either surrender or escape out of the area through using contacts in the National Army, escaping out into the countryside where they can disband. \n\n\nThe Battle of Dublin has been a quick, brutal battle. Although it was a decisive win for the National Army, that was always going to be the case, as the IRA troops in the Four Courts were outnumbered twenty times over, with only 200 IRA soldiers facing 4000 Free State Troops. Although the Irish capital city of Dublin was secured by the new government, leaders like Cathal Brugha killed and men like Rory O'Connor, your old friend at the original IRA, and even though the anti-Treaty soldiers were dispersed and their strength broken, many anti-Treaty leaders such as Oscar Traynor, your old friend Ernie O'Malley and many other anti-Treaty fighters managed to escape to continue the fight. With this, the spirit of war managed to survive, and inspired many other anti-Free State units to stand up and oppose the new National Army. \n\n\nYou know this is the start of what's to be a brutal conflict. All you can do is prepare to serve your nation and do the best you can.", "action_results": [{"action": "A War of Brothers", "result": "Over the next few weeks, the anti-Treaty forces begin regrouping and making plans, as hostilities rise. They attempt to recruit and find arms, but there's little actual engagements. The fighting is kept to small-time raids and ambushes. It's clear that no one really wants to kill their fellow countrymen, their comrades, their friends, their family. \n\n\nEventually, after several tours defending the area from potential IRA ambushers and attacks, you return home, where you meet with your family, including the newest addition to the family, Morgan, Mary and Arthur's child. Well, not exactly Mary and Arthur's, but... still. \n\n\nIt's good to return home to be with your family, and you've a few weeks leave, so you might finally get a break from the constant cycle of violence and bloodshed and killing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Days Pass...", "result": "You sit in the kitchen, a cup of tea in your hand as you read the newspaper. You're out of your uniform, back to normal street clothes. Ma is in gone shopping, while Mary and Arthur are coddling over Morgan.\n\n\n\"He's been baptized, has he?\" you ask absent-mindedly. \"He's safe in God's heart?\"\n\n\n\"He has been,\" Mary nods. \"We got him baptized as soon as we could.\" \n\n\n\"By a Catholic?\"\n\n\n\"Yes,\" Arthur says. \"I made a concession there.\"\n\n\n\"For the best,\" you nod.\n\n\n\"So, how's running about as a soldier going?\" Arthur says. \"You know, for an actual nation?\"\n\n\n\"It's going... it's going,\" you say. \"What more can be said?\"\n\n\n\"I want you to know, even though I'm a unionist, I really respect what you're doing in serving the nation,\" Arthur says. \"In fact...\"\n\n\nThere's a loud knock on the door, as you stand up from your seat.\n\n\n\"One moment, I'll get that,\" you say.\n\n\nYou walk to the door of the house, pulling it open to reveal Joseph, standing there with his rifle slung, dressed in a mixture of plainclothes and IRA uniform.\n\n\nInstantly, your hand reaches down for your pistol, as Joseph desperately holds up both his hands in a gesture of peace.\n\n\n\"I'm not here for violence!\" Joseph says, raising his hands. \"For god's sake, I don't want violence in Ma's house. I just want to see my family. To talk to them.\"\n\n\n\"You're on the run as a traitor. You can't be let into the house, you fucking bastard.\"\n\n\n\"Don't turn your own brother away, Michael. Can't we just be at peace for the next few hours?\"\n\n\nYou stare at your brother, wondering what to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take Joseph prisoner", "result": " \n\nYou grab your rifle from it's position resting in the doorway, raising it to aim at Joseph's chest as you snarl at him.\n\n\n\"You're under arrest by the Irish Free State, Joseph! You are now a prisoner of war! I'm not letting you walk away after what you and your traitorous allies did in Dublin \n\n\n\"I'm not being captured by my own brother at my own house!\" Joseph snarls.\n\n\n\"Let go! Let fucking go!\" Joseph yells.\n\n\nJoseph charges forward, grabbing the rifle and twisting your arm. He slams the rifle against you, pushing itno the doorway. The rifle goes off with a bang, as you're slammed against the wall. You slowly skid down, leaving a large trail of blood going down the wall, groaning as blood begins to pour from the bullet whole in the center of your chest.\n\n\n\"MICHAEL!\" Joseph screams, tossing his rifle aside. \"Michael, you stupid son of a bitch! I'm so sorry, I didn't mean to. I swear to God, I didn't mean to. Don't worry, don't worry.\"\n\n\nYou try to talk, but your entire chest is rapidly growing cold and numb, as the warm blood running down your chest feels ice cold. Your clothes are quickly soaked through with blood, your shirt sticking to your chest as it's stained crimson red. Joseph presses his hands against your chest in an attempt to stem the tide of blood pouring down your chest, but the blood just keeps gushing out. Your mouth opens and closes, as you try to tell Joseph it's not his fault, but no noise comes out.\n\n\n\"Michael! I'm so sorry, please Michael, don't die, don't die,\" Joseph pleads, his voice growing fainter and fainter.\n\n\nThat's the last things you hear, as the world grows dark. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Force Joseph to leave", "result": "You shake your head, glaring at Joseph.\n\n\n\"Get the fuck out of here, Joseph. If you think I'm going to let you in, you're sorely mistaken. I don't want you here. Ma doesn't want you here. Mary doesn't want you here. Now, get the fuck out of here and leave us be, would you?\"\n\n\nJoseph adopts a stony look, before nodding.\n\n\n\"So be it. I guess I'll be on my way, then.\"\n\n\nJoseph tersely tips his cap to you in an almost mocking manner, before he turns and begins strolling down the road away from the farm. You take a deep breath, closing the door with a relieved, emotional sigh.\n\n\n\"Everything alright?\" Arthur asks.\n\n\n\"They're looking for MacCready's house. I was just giving them directions,\" you say. \"Now, where were we?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Months pass...", "result": "Over the next few months, the treaty war gets more and more out of hand, spiraling out of control. It's not long before it becomes clear that the IRA are losing, and the Free State are soon going to triumph.\n\n\nHowever, like every war, there are casualties. Arthur Griffith, overworked and strained from constant stress in keeping the government running smoothly while keeping Britain appeased, dies from heart failure leading to a cerebral hemorrhage. Only ten days later, at B\u00e9al na Bl\u00e1th, Michael Collins is assassinated in an IRA ambush, where he is the only loss.\n\n\nAfter losing two great leaders, the Free State becomes far more draconian in it's work in ending this whole blasted war., including performing executions without trials, larger scale internment and the criminalization of holding any arms whatsoever. This leads to the execution of Erskine Childers, the man who first ran guns for the Irish Volunteers, after he was found with a pistol that he claimed was a gift form Michael Collins. His last words become famous. As he stared down the firing squad to execute him, he said \"Take a step forward, lads. It'll be easier that way.\" If nothing else, the man went out with style. As the war gets more brutal, it becomes clear Ireland as a nation will not last unless this comes to an end soon.\n\n\nUnfortunately, it seems you have a new assignment. Rory O'Connor, your old ally in the IRA, who was captured in the taking of the Four Courts, has been sentenced to death. You're part of the firing squad that's being used to execute the poor man later in the day.\n\n\nAs you walk down the streets of Dublin in your uniform, you wonder if you should stop by Rory's cell, to see him one last time before the end. Or perhaps you should just head to the nearest bar and get a drink, see if you can't drink away the pains of killing an old friend.", "action_results": [{"action": "Visit Rory O'Connor before the execution", "result": "You decide to visit Rory O'Connor before the end. You walk up to the jail where he's being held, and tell them you're visiting. It's a long walk to his cell, all along the other cells filled with former comrades, friends and family that once fought with you. You're quickly led to Rory O'Connor's cell, where you introduce yourself through the dark bars. \n\n\n\"Good evening, Rory,\" you say. \"It's Michael McCarthy, Joseph's brother.\"\n\n\n\"Come in,\" Rory O'Connor says. \"Although I can hardly stop you entering, can I?\"\n\n\nYou walk into the cell, staring at Rory O'Connor. He looks haggard and weary, but he actually smiles when he sees you.\n\n\n\"Michael! It's good to see you, my friend.\"\n\n\nFriend is an interesting thing to be called, given the situation.\n\n\n\"It's a pleasure to see you, Rory.\"\n\n\n\"Same to you. Michael, how have you been doing? What brings you up to Dublin.\"\n\n\n\"I... I'm assigned to your execution squad. I'll be seeing you on the firing line.\"\n\n\nTo your surprise, the man actually grins at you.\n\n\n\"That's a laugh, isn't it? To be shot by a friend like you. Ah, it happens. Have you heard about Kevin O'Higgins?\"\n\n\nYou shake your head slowly.\n\n\n\"I've known Kevin O'Higgins since the start of this all. Since we were kids, as a matter of fact. We went to school together, some old Jesuit shithole. He was the best man at my wedding.\"\n\n\nRory O'Connor pauses, as if unsure of himself. He takes a deep breath, before continuing.\n\n\n\"Have you received my execution order? Have you seen it with your own two eyes?\"\n\n\n\"I haven't, Rory,\" you admit.\n\n\n\"At the very bottom of it. It was signed Kevin O'Higgins. My best friend, my best man, has signed my death warrant.\"\n\n\n\"I'm sorry about that, Rory. I didn't know. You must feel very betrayed.\"\n\n\n\"Ah, I've no doubt that Kevin felt betrayed when I took over Four Courts. We simply ended up on opposite sides of the war, is all. It's a fierce shame. A damn fierce shame. Tell me, have you talked to your brother? Since the Four Courts disaster?\"\n\n\n\"I have,\" you say. \"It... it didn't go well.\"\n\n\n\"Don't let hate consume you, Michael. Joseph's a good man. Brash, headstrong, a bit foolish... well, who am I talking to, he's a really stupid cunt of a man, isn't he? But he's a good man. He's just doing what he thinks is right. At the end of it, that's all anybody ever does, be it the Hun aiming down his rifle, the IRA man crouching in the bushes, the Brit patrolling the streets, the Free State soldier attacking the Four Courts or the anti-Treaty fighter firing his revolver.\" \n\n\n\"Father's here, Rory!\" a guard's voice calls, as you turn to see the priest about to give Rory his last rites enter. \n\n\n\"Good to see you, Father,\" you say, shaking the priest's hand as he enters. \"I'll leave you be, Rory. It was a pleasure.\"\n\n\n\"Damn right it was,\" Rory grins, before looking at his feet, embarrassed as he realizes he's in the presence of a priest. \"Sorry, father. Forgive me.\"\n\n\nThe priest nods understandably, as Rory turns his attention back to you. He pulls you into a tight hug, before\n\n\n\"Don't forget about what I said. Joseph's your brother, he deserves... well I don't know. We're all just soldiers.\"\n\n\nYou nod, before leaving Rory with the priest. After you finish with your meeting, you head to the changing room, getting dressed up in your full uniform and grabbing your rifle, before making your way to the execution area.\n\n\n\"Reporting for duty, sir,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Are you ready for this, McCarthy?\" the commander asks.\n\n\nYou nod solemnly. \n\n\n\"Good. Grab your rifle and take your position on the line,\" he says. \n\n\nYou quickly file along the line, taking your posit ln ion as you shoulder your rifle. Rory O'Connor is led out, given his position against the wall. He takes a cigarette in between his teeth, before foregoing the blindfold to stare down his attackers.\n\n\n\"Padraig Pearse whistled right before he was killed,\" Rory O'Connor says. \"I feel I need to go out with a similar bit of style, don't I?\"\n\n\nHe smiles weakly at the row of gunmen in front of him. He looks at you briefly, giving you a quick wink. He takes a deep inhale of his cigarette, before the Free State commander gives the order.\n\n\n\"Ready!\"\n\n\nYou prepare to fire your rifle, waiting carefully.\n\n\n\"Aim!\"\n\n\nYou tilt your head, staring down the iron sights of your rifle, waiting patiently.\n\n\n\"Fire!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Fire", "result": "Your finger twitches, pulling on the trigger. The bullets thud through the air, hammering into Rory O'Connor. Your bullet blows through his chest, blowing out his heart and killing him instantly. The cigarette falls from his mouth as he topples to the ground. You pause, staring down at the dead man, as you mutter a silent prayer for him. With that, you turn away.\n\n\n\"Well done, men,\" your commander says. \"You made your country proud.\"\n\n\nThe others solemnly leave the room, not a word being spoken. You follow, walking out of the room, as you trudge home, wondering how much you'll need to give for this new country.", "action_results": [{"action": "Months pass...", "result": "The next few months are a dark, miserable time. Ever since Joseph coming over, incident, you've noticeably darker. You spend quite a bit of time out on patrol, making sure the IRA are pacified. Out in the field, you have a chance to fight, to protect your country, to do something for the nation that actually matters to you. There, in the fields, you can work for hours on end, focusing on nothing but work. You don't have to picture children burning alive in fires just out of your view. No, you don't have to deal with that until night falls. \n\n\nBy April 1923, the fight for independence has worsened considerably for your side. More and more IRA soldiers are captured, with over 12,000 imprisoned at this point in the war. Ernie O'Malley, the man who trained the old IRA unit in the fight against the British, is shot twenty times, before being captured. Impressively, he manages to survive. The IRA forces are desperate for a ceasefire, hoping they'll simply survive as it becomes clear there's little chance of success. Frank Aiken is elected to the Chief of Staff of the Irish Republican Army, becoming the anti-Treaty commander. \n\n\nWith Aiken being put in charge, a new offensive is being organized by the National Army. You're heading down to Cork, for an organized sweep of rebel-held areas, arms stockpiles, outposts and anything else. If Cork, the rebel county that once literally burned with passionate rebelliousness, falls, then the anti-Treaty forces won't have control of any territory, and they'll be crushed. With their fall, the anti-Treaty forces will be left broken and disbanded, giving them almost now power.\n\n\nYou find yourself deep in Cork, out in the countryside, moving on the old town of Bandon, one of the last bastions of the anti-Treaty forces. You move along the road with your squad of a dozen Free State soldiers, moving towards the center of the town. Although they're heavily outnumbered and outgunned, with none of the powerful weaponry you thought that your forces have, the anti-Treaty forces are trying to defend their town through hidden riflemen and moving squads of ambushers ready to hit your flanks and retreat off into the distance. You've been left as the second of command of the group, with Fionn in charge. Your mission is simple: clear the enemies and take back Bandon.\n\n\nYou walk along the road, at the head of your column of men. You stroll along the road, moving toward the town. You hold up a hand, stopping the column. Ahead, down the road, is a hastily constructed barricade, simply a toppled tree trunk blocking off the road with a few smaller logs stacked against it. A cursory glance shows you that the barricade is unmanned, although you can't tell for sure. It blocks the only main path forward through the woods, although you're sure there's other paths forward.\n\n\n\"Barricade,\" you say to Fionn. \"Could be abandoned. Could be an ambush.\"\n\n\n\"Any suggestions?\" Fionn asks, rubbing his rifle barrel nervously.", "action_results": [{"action": "Move forward and tear down the barricade", "result": "\"Let's tear the barricade down,\" you say. \"That'll give us the mobility to move into the town and finish them off.\"\n\n\nYou walk forward, moving up to the barricade. A few of the soldiers begin pulling down the logs, tossing them aside and off into the woods as you move to the tree trunk, lifting it up with a mighty pull as the others help, and you begin to lift the tree trunk free.\n\n\nA bullet thuds into the tree trunk, as the shot rings out across the woods, as a smattering of gunfire bursts out. The tree trunk drops to the ground with a heavy thud as two men fall to the ground, bullets blowing through their chests.\n\n\n\"Shit, snipers!\" you yell out.\n\n\nThe next bullet bounces off the wooden barricade with a spray of splinters, as you dive for cover. You clamber behind the trunk, as another shot slams into your back, knocking you to the ground. You're knocked onto the trunk, as you cling to it with a desperate gasp as blood runs down your back. You try to stand, before the next shot hits your shoulder, sending you collapsing off the trunk and onto the ground, as blood begins soaking through your uniform.\n\n\nOne of your allies rushes over to you, grabbing your arm to attempt to drag you to cover, although the world quickly grows dark, as you vision blurs. Soon, the last of your blood seeps out onto the ground, and you're left cold and limp.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Secure the area around the barricade", "result": "\"Push forward and secure the area,\" you order, as your squad moves forward, quickly taking the area around the barricade and setting up a secure defensive position.\n\n\n\"God job, men,\" you say. \"Murphy, O'Flynn, get to work tearing down the barri...!\"\n\n\nA bullet dashes off the ground to your right, as an unknown number of gunmen open fire from the words. You dive for cover, as quickly your men let out a burst of gunfire. From their defensive position, you quickly push back the enemy without a loss, as the anti-Treaty gunmen quickly hurry to retreat off into the woods. You pause, wondering to pursue them.", "action_results": [{"action": "Chase after them to capture the gunmen", "result": "\"Follow them!\" you order loudly. \"Don't let them escape, dammit!\"\n\n\nYou quickly lead the men the men into the woods, rushing after the gunmen as you lead your forces charging out through the woods, hurrying out through the trees. You rush after the gunmen, heading through the thick undergrowth as you hurry through the trees as you leave the road long behind you.\n\n\nSuddenly, a hail of bullets fires out from the bushes, as you realize you've been led into an ambush. Gunfire bursts out from the hidden positions, as you frantically attempt to stop your forces from being routed. A bullet slams into your neck, sending you toppling to the floor. You smack into the ground with a thud, before another bullet blows out your skull, sending a mixture of brain matter and skull chunks out onto the ground. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Hold your position to tear down the barricade", "result": "You hold your position, as the gunmen retreat, leaving you alone to deal with the current issue at hand. With your opponents gone, you quickly cease control of the road and tear down the barricade, pulling the log down and moving it aside, clearing your path up for the approach to continue.\n\n\nWith the barricade taken down, you quickly return to work, moving down the path as you soon reach the town of Bandon. The medium-sized town is in chaos, as several other groups of Free State soldiers attack the last core of anti-Treaty soldiers in the town, and perhaps even the entire county. \n\n\nThe anti-Treaty forces have secured the town hall, guarding it as they're advanced upon by the far larger and far better armed and supplied National Army. You stare ahead, realizing you've a straight shot up to the town hall to bust in and bring this to a close. You can push on in a straight charge, the quickest, most direct route to the enemy, although it fully exposes you to their rifle fire. You can flank through them through the church, using that to ambush and attack them in a flanking maneuver to avoid their fire, although using a church for war seems very dishonorable way to win. You could also use the cover of the local graveyard to move up to capture the town hall, although that also could be quite an immoral way to deal with the enemy.", "action_results": [{"action": "Lead a charge through the center of town to take the town hall", "result": "\"Come on, we take the town hall and this is over!\" you shout.\n\n\n\"For Ireland! Charge!\" Fionn commands.\n\n\nThe force of Free State soldiers bursts forward, quickly heading, staying low and fast, rifles firing, as you charge the town hall, rushing ahead as quickly as you can, bullets flying overhead. The anti-Treaty soldiers attempt to hold you off, but lacking machine guns, numbers and even enough rifles to arm every man, they don't have a chance, and you only lose two men, one killed by a lucky potshot, the other wounded by pistol fire, before you manage to reach the town hall. A burst of rifle fire forces back the anti-Treaty defenders from the window, as they dive for cover. You press yourself up against the wall, firing your rifle through the window at the men inside as they retreat to further cover\n\n\n\"Give yourselves up!\" Fionn roars. \"You're surrounded, there's no way you'll get out of here! Other then through surrendering or in a box. Be reasonable and come out \" \n\n\nThere's a long, silent pause, before you hear a response.\n\n\n\"Damn it all, damn it all to hell. Alright, we're lowering our guns, you can come in! Don't fire!\"\n\n\nYou slowly move to the door, pressing your hand against the door knob. You cautiously open the door, as you push it open with a gentle movement, as the door creaks open, revealing two dozen soldiers with their hands in their air, their rifles and pistols on the floor. \n\n\n\"Secure the building. Make sure no one else is here,\" Fionn says to one of his soldiers, as you head over to the first anti-Treaty soldier, grabbing his arm and yanking it behind his back, beginning to bind his arms.\n\n\n\"This isn't over,\" the soldier says. \"Tiocfaidh \u00e1r l\u00e1.\"\n\n\n\"No, it's over,\" you say, twisting the soldier's arm behind his back. \"It is.\"\n\n\n\"IRA escaping out the back!\" one of your soldiers yells, as you turn to see dark silhouettes slipping it into the dusk as they try to escape your forces.\n\n\n\"I thought we were surrounded,\" one of the anti-Treaty soldiers chuckles darkly. \n\n\n\"Dammit! Michael, after them!\" Fionn yells.\n\n\nYou quickly burst out of the town hall, rushing after the escaping soldiers. You raise your rifle, firing after one of them as he slips off behind a building, before seeing another moving towards the stables, planning to steal a horse. You rush towards the stables, hurrying to catch up with the larger silhouette. You race after him, reaching him just as he nearly manages to clamber onto a horse. You raise your rifle, pointing it at the back of his head. \n\n\n\"Hold! Hold, or I'll shoot you!\"\n\n\nThe figure stops, before slowly raising his hands, He turns to face you, as you stare at Joseph, who looks darkly at you. \n\n\n\"Hey, Michael,\" he says darkly. \n\n\n\"Joseph!\" you say, taken aback. \"Jesus, Joseph. What are you doing here?\"\n\n\n\"Fighting for the cause,\" Joseph smiles. \"Seeing as you bastards have taken the whole place, we're retreating to the hills to continue this as a guerilla war.\"\n\n\n\"There's no point in fighting, Joseph! The war is over, goddammit! Just lay down your rifle and make peace!\" \n\n\n\"I know there's no point in it, Michael. I know. But I can't surrender. Not after everything I've done. I just can't give up.\"\n\n\n\"I can't let you leave, Joseph!\" you say. \"I have a duty to my country!\"\n\n\n\"And I have a duty to mine, and I won't be captured,\" Joseph says. \"So if this is how it ends, this is how it ends.\"\n\n\nJoseph sighs, shaking his head slowly.\n\n\n\"If I'm to die, then I'm to die a soldier,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"You try to get on that horse and I will shoot you, Joseph!\" you say.\n\n\n\"I'm not going to get on the horse. I don't want to go off and continue hiding in the hills, eating scraps, freezing when the sun goes down and killing my countrymen. I'd say my time has come.\"\n\n\n\"Then drop your weapons, and this can be over!\" you shout.\n\n\nJoseph slowly unbuttons his holster, placing his hand on the revolver handle.\n\n\n\"Drop the gun, Joseph!\" you snarl.\n\n\n\"No, I don't think I can, Michael. I'm tired of fighting, but I won't abandon my cause. I'll go out like a soldier. Now, I'm going to draw my pistol, and I'm going to start shooting for as long as I last. You want to protect them, pull the trigger and get this over with, because I'm dying a soldier.\"\n\n\nJoseph pulls out his gun, aiming it at your chest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill Joseph", "result": "You pull the trigger, as Joseph collapses back, a bullet bursting through Joseph's chest as he drops the revolver. He drops to the ground, blood bursting out of his chest and soaking his uniform. He collapses backwards, hitting the horse as it bursts off in a gallop, before smacking onto the ground. You rush over to him, dropping to your knees in front of him as you grab him, holding him in close.\n\n\n\"Fucking hell, Michael,\" Joseph says, blood running down his mouth. \"I... Christ, it's fucking cold.\"\n\n\n\"Joseph, stay with me! Hold my hand!\" you say, reaching down and giving Joseph's hand a tight squeeze. \n\n\n\"Sorry... I made you do this, Michael,\" he says. \"I didn't...\"\n\n\nJoseph's eyes flutter, before closing, as he goes limp in your hands. You grab him, shaking hard as you scream his name, before a hand grabs you from behind.\n\n\n\"Michael! Michael!\" Fionn yells, grabbing you from behind and pulling you from your brother.\n\n\nIt takes Fionn only a moment to ascertain the situation, for his face to go from confused to dark as he stares at Joseph's bloody body, before he embraces you. Your eyes don't shift from Joseph, as the blood stains his old IRA uniform. \n\n\n\"I'm sorry, Michael, I'm so sorry. Your brother was a hero.\"\n\n\nJoseph was many things. Loving, kind, passionate, stubborn, stupid. Joseph was many things, but he was no hero. He was a young man, caught up in ideals, caught up in beliefs, caught up in this huge civil war just to create something. His story wasn't a tale of heroics and glory, he wasn't some ancient Irish King like Brian Boru, or some esteemed nobility like George V. Joseph was a poor peasant, a pig farmer, a fool who wanted to be something. \n\n\nIn the end, that's what you all were. Peasants trying to change something. Fools caught up with notions far grander than themselves. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Saoirse", "result": "With the final sweep of the IRA-controlled territory, the Free State regains control of the country. The IRA fighters move into a guerrilla phase, performing ambushes, assassinating key Free State leaders and bombing infrastructure. Still, the fact that the anti-Treaty forces have far less support than the original IRA in their fight against the British, means that the anti-Treaty forces can't survive with this guerrilla warfare like you once did. Frank Aiken is nearly captured, with the Quinn brothers, his lieutenants being killed or captured. Frank Aiken manages to escape, although little more than a week later he calls a cease fire in an attempt to minimize the death and destruction from his new position of leadership in the IRA.\n\n\nThe month after has little fighting, mostly just waiting, as you patiently wonder what's to happen. Due to the fractured nature of the IRA, many continue fighting despite the ceasefire, although the violence is hugely decreased, and you personally don't see any action against these remaining groups. Then, Frank Aiken gives the order. \"Dump arms, and return home\". It's that simple. Toss your rifle aside and go home, and the war is over. With that, your enemy is defeated. Eamon DeValera supports this move, sending out the following message: \"Further sacrifice on your part would now be in vain and the continuance of the struggle in arms unwise in the national interest. Military victory must be allowed to rest for the moment with those who have destroyed the Republic\". It's a spiteful message, sure, and the man's an absolute coward, but he's surrendered, and the battle comes to an end. \n\n\nIt isn't a major battle that ends the war, not a decisive victory or some great battle. No, it's a bunch of old friends growing tired of shedding each other's blood, or killing civilians, or executing prisoners. Instead, it's a few words, and a desperate plea for an end to the fighting. \n\n\nThe Republican prisoners are held for several months, but they're released with time. In November of 1924, a general amnesty is declared for acts committed during the civil war, and it all comes to an end.\n\n\nAfter the war, it seems there's finally a chance at peace. The Free State treats the anti-treaty rebels surprisingly well, and they're released after sometime. Many of these anti-Treaty leaders would rise up in politics as leaders of the nation, such as E\u00e1mon DeValera, President and Taoiseach, Sean Lemass, Taoiseach, and even the son of a man executed in the civil war, Erskine H. Childers, who would go on to be president. His father, Robert Erskine Childers, ran guns for the very first Volunteers, and was executed for holding arms in the civil war.\n\n\nAfter the war, you begin to rebuild the newfound nation. Two political parties rise up from Sinn F\u00e9in, known as Fianna Fail and Fianna Gael, the former made up of anti-Treaty politicians, the latter pro-Treaty politicians. These parties are joined by Sinn F\u00e9in, which becomes a more old-fashioned party focused mainly on the joining of Northern Ireland to the Republic, but of course, more parties rise up, such as Labour, the Green Party, Social Democrats and many more. \n\n\nHowever, it's not long before Fianna Fail is voted in, with Eamon DeValera taking power. The Statute of Westminster is signed, which gives Ireland substantial power in the United Kingdom. Through political maneuvering, the power of the British over the Free State is diminished, until the statute is used to overturn the Anglo-Irish Treaty, and Ireland succeeds from the UK, becoming the Republic of Ireland. It's a joyous day, but you can't help but feel bitter that the man who waged a war that got heroes like Michael Collins killed would end up later using the political methods to gain freedom like Collins had suggested. \n\n\nAs a free, independent nation, Ireland prospers. It advances quickly thanks to the prosperous economic policies of Taoiseach Sean Lemass, who had fought with the rebels in the Treaty War. The county slowly begins to end the sectarian conflict that plagued Ireland for generations, while outgrowing the zealous Catholic restrictions that plagued the nation.\n\n\nYour life story is far simpler, after the war. You get married to a girl you went to school with, having two children. She passes, unfortunately, although the relationship was never that... romantic, to say the least. Mary and Arthur help raise them with you, as you serve as a favorite uncle to their child, who never learns the unfortunate circumstances of his conception. Ma passes, as with all things, and time goes on. \n\n\nThe first child you name Joseph. It seems like a fitting name for the boy, who has the same stubbornness that Joseph held, as you come to find out. The second, a daughter, is named Saoirse, the Irish word for freedom. It seems fitting, after all you struggled for. \n\n\nIt's a summer day, as you walk through the seats at a football match, leading your children along to see Ireland play France. You can't wait to watch the match, even though the kids are far more into it than you. Well, Saoirse is. Joseph is just along for the ride, and it's good to get his head out of the books. Hell, it's that fact that makes him the farthest from Joseph he could be. You quickly find your seats, sitting down. You wrap your arms around your children, leaning back in your seat as you sigh in satisfaction.\n\n\n\"When's it starting, Dad?\" Saoirse asks.\n\n\n\"When it starts. Be patient,\" you smile back. \"Joseph, are you OK? You look cold.\"\n\n\n\"Fine, Dad,\" Joseph says back, distracted by a pretty girl several rows down.\n\n\nUgh, puberty. That's going to be something you're going to have to deal with. You smile, knowing you've dealt with worse.\n\n\nBefore the ceremony begins, you all stand, as the Irish team begin to sing the national anthem and flags are waved. You join in, of course, as do your children and every Irishman in the stadium, at the top of your lungs.\n\n\nYou can't help but feel a swelling of pride. Tears well in your eye as you put your hand over your heart, and sing along with the national anthem. You're not proud of the flag, or the anthem. Well, you are, but that's not what brings tears to your eyes. You didn't fight for a colored flag or a catchy tune. You fought for the two children by your side, who will be raised as free citizens in a country that is theirs, not to be oppressed because of their race, religion or creed, but instead, to live free as Irish citizens. \n\n\nThat is why you're proud. That is what freedom truly means.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Final Note", "result": "The struggle for Irish independence was a long and brutal one. Many men lost their lives on both sides. Irish citizens suffered under British oppression for hundreds of years, as Catholics were discriminated against and treated as second class citizens. Poverty was rampant under British rule, as the rich took advantage of the poor. Food was actually shipped out of Ireland during the Great Famine, where a million lives were snuffed out, and a million more souls being forced to emigrate. To this day, the Irish population hasn't recovered to its pre-Famine numbers.\n\n\nThe troubles in Northern Ireland would eventually lessen as religious divides were cast aside. To this day, these tensions still exist, however. Still, the relationship between the Republic of Ireland and the United Kingdom, Northern Ireland included, has improved greatly, to the point where they're tied to the hip economically and culturally.\n\n\nIn the end, there was a struggle between ideas, with heroes on both sides. In the Easter Rising, there were simple soldiers and policemen trying to keep order at home while there comrades fought the Germans across the seas, and Irish patriots desperate to free and liberate their country. In the War of Independence, although there were certainly many abusive and oppressive figures on the side of Britain, there were also many soldiers just performing their duty to keep order and PTSD-stricken veterans who were making a living the only way they could, with people trying to free their country and end a long, painful oppression. In the Treaty War, there were those who wanted peace, who were willing to go with pragmatism and take what they could, versus those who felt betrayed by their country and wanted to free their independence, a goal so many of their friends had been given for. Even in later years, with the Troubles in Northern Ireland, there was just those trying to protect their newfound country and their cultural identity, versus men who still considered themselves as soldiers in the war of independence, forgotten by the greater nation as they tried to end British rule and the oppression of Catholics.\n\n\nIn the end, there were victors and victims, but thankfully, the bloodshed could come to an end, and independence could be achieved peacefully.\n\n\nHopefully, you've enjoyed the story of a nation at war with itself, of brothers fighting brothers, of conflict, loss and passion. If nothing else, I hope you've learnt something about my home nation and its struggle for independence.\n\n\nGo raibh maith agat as l\u00e9amh, agus t\u00e1 l\u00e1 iontach agat.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Let Joseph kill you", "result": "You pause, unable to to pull the trigger. Instead, you take a deep breath.\n\n\nJoseph fires his pistol, two shots flying far over your head. Joseph's determined face contorts into a confused, emotional one, as he snarls at you.\n\n\n\"What the fuck are you doing, Michael! I don't want to kill you! I want to die a hero! They'll sing songs about me.\"\n\n\n\"This isn't a great song of heroes and glory, Joseph,\" you say, dropping your rifle. \"This is a song of sorrows, of dead fools and brothers killing brothers. I don't want to sing that song anymore.\"\n\n\n\"Pick up your rifle, Michael!\" Joseph says, gesturing with his pistol. \"You've won! You don't have to die for your cause! I do!\"\n\n\n\"I don't care for causes anymore, Joseph. None of us need to die. For any of this. I've buried too many friends on either side.\"\n\n\nJoseph walks forward, anger flashing on his face. He grabs you by the collar, jamming the barrel of his revolver against your head. \n\n\n\"Pick up that fucking rifle and finish this, Michael!\" he screams, tears running down his face.\n\n\nYou stare down at your rifle as it sits in the mud, before shaking your head. Joseph scowl drops, as he drops his revolver.\n\n\n\"You bastard,\" he says sadly. \"You won't even give me a fucking ending to this whole shit show.\"\n\n\nJoseph releases his grip on you, letting out a sigh. He raises his hands, putting them behind his head and dropping to his knees.\n\n\n\"What are you doing?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Surrendering. What else can I do?\" Joseph softly. \n\n\nYou embrace Joseph, holding him tightly, as tears stream down your face. This isn't how it was supposed to go. You thought you were heroes, patriots, fighting for what was fight. You're not. No man is. You're just a bunch of poor peasants, pig farmers, fools who wanted to be something. You're not a famous King like Brian Boru or a famous patriot like Wolfe Tone.\n\n\nYou're just a pair of brothers who wanted to do more than mucking around in pigsties, who wanted something greater than that little farm in Dublin, who wanted a song to be sung about them. In the end, that's all that soldiers and rebels ever are.", "action_results": [{"action": "Saoirse", "result": "With the final sweep of the IRA-controlled territory, the Free State regains control of the country. The IRA fighters move into a guerrilla phase, performing ambushes, assassinating key Free State leaders and bombing infrastructure. Still, the fact that the anti-Treaty forces have far less support than the original IRA in their fight against the British, means that the anti-Treaty forces can't survive with this guerrilla warfare like you once did. Frank Aiken is nearly captured, with the Quinn brothers, his lieutenants being killed or captured. Frank Aiken manages to escape, although little more than a week later he calls a cease fire in an attempt to minimize the death and destruction from his new position of leadership in the IRA.\n\n\nThe month after has little fighting, mostly just waiting, as you patiently wonder what's to happen. Due to the fractured nature of the IRA, many continue fighting despite the ceasefire, although the violence is hugely decreased, and you personally don't see any action against these remaining groups. Then, Frank Aiken gives the order. \"Dump arms, and return home\". It's that simple. Toss your rifle aside and go home, and the war is over. With that, your enemy is defeated. Eamon DeValera supports this move, sending out the following message: \"Further sacrifice on your part would now be in vain and the continuance of the struggle in arms unwise in the national interest. Military victory must be allowed to rest for the moment with those who have destroyed the Republic\". It's a spiteful message, sure, and the man's an absolute coward, but he's surrendered, and the battle comes to an end. \n\n\nIt isn't a major battle that ends the war, not a decisive victory or some great battle. No, it's a bunch of old friends growing tired of shedding each other's blood, or killing civilians, or executing prisoners. Instead, it's a few words, and a desperate plea for an end to the fighting. \n\n\nThe Republican prisoners, Joseph included, are held for several months, but they're released with time. In November of 1924, a general amnesty is declared for acts committed during the civil war, and it all comes to an end.\n\n\nAfter the war, it seems there's finally a chance at peace. The Free State treats the anti-treaty rebels surprisingly well, and they're released after sometime. Many of these anti-Treaty leaders would rise up in politics as leaders of the nation, such as E\u00e1mon DeValera, President and Taoiseach, Sean Lemass, Taoiseach, and even the son of a man executed in the civil war, Erskine H. Childers, who would go on to be president. His father, Robert Erskine Childers, ran guns for the very first Volunteers, and was executed for holding arms in the civil war.\n\n\nAfter the war, you begin to rebuild the newfound nation. Two political parties rise up from Sinn F\u00e9in, known as Fianna Fail and Fianna Gael, the former made up of anti-Treaty politicians, the latter pro-Treaty politicians. These parties are joined by Sinn F\u00e9in, which becomes a more old-fashioned party focused mainly on the joining of Northern Ireland to the Republic, but of course, more parties rise up, such as Labour, the Green Party, Social Democrats and many more. \n\n\nHowever, it's not long before Fianna Fail is voted in, with Eamon DeValera taking power. The Statute of Westminster is signed, which gives Ireland substantial power in the United Kingdom. Through political maneuvering, the power of the British over the Free State is diminished, until the statute is used to overturn the Anglo-Irish Treaty, and Ireland succeeds from the UK, becoming the Republic of Ireland. It's a joyous day, but you can't help but feel bitter that the man who waged a war that got heroes like Michael Collins killed would end up later using the political methods to gain freedom like Collins had suggested. \n\n\nAs a free, independent nation, Ireland prospers. It advances quickly thanks to the prosperous economic policies of Taoiseach Sean Lemass, who had fought with the rebels in the Treaty War. The county slowly begins to end the sectarian conflict that plagued Ireland for generations, while outgrowing the zealous Catholic restrictions that plagued the nation.\n\n\nYour life story is far simpler, after the war. You get married to a girl you went to school with, having a child. Your wife, Fiona, passes, unfortunately, although the relationship was never that... romantic, to say the least. Mary and Arthur help raise them with you, as you become a favored uncle to their child, who never learns the unfortunate circumstances of his conception. Which, technically is true, both for Arthur and the blood father. Ma passes, as with all things, and time goes on. Joseph helps out as well, of course, but he's busy settling down with his own family, a pair of kids of his own, twins named Rory, after the late Rory O'Connor, and Jack, after his wife's father. You name your daughter Saoirse, the Irish word for freedom. It seems fitting, after all you struggled for. You settle down to a simple job as a plumber, which may not be the most glorious job, but soon gives you your own business after a fair bit of work.\n\n\nIt's a summer day, as you walk through the seats at a football match, leading your lit tle girlalong to see Ireland play France. You can't wait to watch the match, even though Saoirse's far more into it than you. You quickly find your seats, sitting down. You wrap your arms around your daughter, leaning back in your seat as you sigh in satisfaction.\n\n\n\"When's it starting, Dad?\" Saoirse asks.\n\n\n\"When it starts. Be patient,\" you smile back. \"You're too giddy.\"\n\n\n\"I want to see the much.\"\n\n\n\"And you will, it'll be happening right in front of you. Eventually,\" you chuckle.\n\n\nBefore the ceremony begins, you all stand, as the Irish team begin to sing the national anthem and flags are waved. You join in, of course, as does Saoirse and every Irishman in the stadium, at the top of your lungs.\n\n\nYou can't help but feel a swelling of pride. Tears well in your eye as you put your hand over your heart, and sing along with the national anthem. You're not proud of the flag, or the anthem. Well, you are, but that's not what brings tears to your eyes. You didn't fight for a colored flag or a catchy tune. You fought for the little girl by your side, who will be raised as a free citizen in a country that is hers, not to be oppressed because of her race, religion or creed, but instead, to live free as an Irish citizen. \n\n\nThat is why you're proud. That is what freedom truly means.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Flank the town hall through the church to get the jump on the enemy", "result": "\"We should push through the church to flank the enemy,\" you suggest to Fionn.\n\n\n\"Good idea!\" Fionn says.\n\n\nYou quickly rush forward, hurrying to the old stone church that flanks the town hall, hurrying to cover behind the church as bullets ping off the heavy stone. You raise your rifle, smashing open one of the stained glass windows, knocking the glass out with the butt of your rifle, quickly clearing a path to get through. A soldier offers you a knee, and you clamber into the church, toppling inside the building as you land on the floor with a thud. Your unit quickly enters the church, as you head to the other side to get out of there.\n\n\n\"Something feels wrong about sneaking through a church,\" Fionn says.\n\n\n\"All of this is wrong. This whole goddamn war,\" you say. \n\n\nYou quickly use your rifle to smash open another stained glass window, climbing out of this window, finding yourself right at the side of the town hall as the rest of your unit joins you. A burst of rifle fire forces back the anti-Treaty defenders from the window, as they dive for cover. You press yourself up against the the town hall's outer wall, firing your rifle through the window at the men inside as they retreat to further cover\n\n\n\"Give yourselves up!\" Fionn roars. \"You're surrounded, there's no way you'll get out of here! Other then through surrendering or in a box. Be reasonable and come out!\"\n\n\n\"Fuck off, you godless sons of bitches! We'll die before we surrender!\" the voice comes back along with a hail of gunfire. \n\n\n\"Bastards,\" Fionn says. \"Get a few grenades. We'll clear them out, alright.\"\n\n\nA pair of men grab their grenades, pulling the pins out and lobbing them through the window. You stay low, plugging your ears as they go off with an explosion and a volley of screams. You rush to the door, booting it open to get a look at the destruction. The area is torn apart by shrapnel, with a half a dozen dead Irishmen spread around the room. You wince at the sight of them, before shaking your head. You have a mission to do.\n\n\n\"Secure the building. Make sure no one else is here,\" Fionn says.\n\n\nYour soldiers quickly spread around the building, looking for survivors. You look at the wounded and dying in the room, shaking your head in disgust as you look at those there.\n\n\n\"Dammit, the survivors are escaping out the back!\" one of the soldiers says.\n\n\n\"Dammit! After them!\" Fionn yells.\n\n\nYou quickly burst out of the town hall, rushing after the escaping soldiers. You raise your rifle, firing after one of them as he slips off behind a building, before seeing another moving towards the stables, planning to steal a horse. You rush towards the stables, hurrying to catch up with the larger silhouette. You race after him, reaching him just as he nearly manages to clamber onto a horse. You raise your rifle, pointing it at the back of his head. \n\n\n\"Hold! Hold, or I'll shoot you!\"\n\n\nThe figure stops, before slowly raising his hands, He turns to face you, as you stare at Joseph, who looks darkly at you. \n\n\n\"Hey, Michael,\" he says darkly. \n\n\n\"Joseph!\" you say, taken aback. \"Jesus, Joseph. What are you doing here?\"\n\n\n\"Fighting for the cause,\" Joseph smiles. \"Seeing as you bastards have taken the whole place, we're retreating to the hills to continue this as a guerilla war.\"\n\n\n\"There's no point in fighting, Joseph! The war is over, goddammit! Just lay down your rifle and make peace!\" \n\n\n\"I know there's no point in it, Michael. I know. But I can't surrender. Not after everything I've done. I just can't give up.\"\n\n\n\"I can't let you leave, Joseph!\" you say. \"I have a duty to my country!\"\n\n\n\"And I have a duty to mine, and I won't be captured,\" Joseph says. \"So if this is how it ends, this is how it ends.\"\n\n\nJoseph sighs, shaking his head slowly. \n\n\n\"If I'm to die, then I'm to die a soldier,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"You try to get on that horse and I will shoot you, Joseph!\" you say.\n\n\n\"I'm not going to get on the horse. I don't want to go off and continue hiding in the hills, eating scraps, freezing when the sun goes down and killing my countrymen. I'd say my time has come.\"\n\n\n\"Then drop your weapons, and this can be over!\" you shout.\n\n\nJoseph slowly unbuttons his holster, placing his hand on the revolver handle.\n\n\n\"Drop the gun, Joseph!\" you snarl.\n\n\n\"No, I don't think I can, Michael. I'm tired of fighting, but I won't abandon my cause. I'll go out like a soldier. Now, I'm going to draw my pistol, and I'm going to start shooting for as long as I last. You want to protect them, pull the trigger and get this over with, because I'm dying a soldier.\"\n\n\nJoseph pulls out his gun, aiming it at your chest.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Move up to the town hall through the grave yard, taking cover amongst the gravestones", "result": "\"We should push through the graveyard\" you suggest to Fionn. \"It'll give us the cover we need to reach the town hall without any losses.\n\n\n\"Good idea!\" Fionn says.\n\n\nYou quickly rush forward, hurrying to the gated cemetery. You boot it open with a heavy kick, rushing over to take cover behind a gravestone as rifle fire bursts out from the town hall, nearly killing you. You rush from behind gravestone to gravestone, firing potshots at the town hall as your forces quickly move up towards the town hall, diving between gravestones as pullets ping around you.\n\n\n\"Something seems wrong about hiding among gravestones!\" you call.\n\n\n\"It's fucked up, sure!\" you call back. \"But it's either we pass over the graves, or we end up in them! Now let's go! For Eireann!\" \n\n\nYou burst forward, rushing ahead as you run between tombstones, gunfire crackling around you. You rush as quickly as you can, reaching the edge of the graveyard and shooting open the lock to burst free, shouldering open the gate and sprinting towards the town hall as the rest of your unit joins you. A burst of rifle fire forces back the anti-Treaty defenders from the window, as they dive for cover. You press yourself up against the the town hall's outer wall, firing your rifle through the window at the men inside as they retreat to further cover\n\n\n\"Give yourselves up!\" Fionn roars. \"You're surrounded, there's no way you'll get out of here! Other then through surrendering or in a box. Be reasonable and come out!\"\n\n\n\"Fuck off, you godless sons of bitches! We'll die before we surrender!\" the voice comes back along with a hail of gunfire. \n\n\n\"Bastards,\" Fionn says. \"Get a few grenades. We'll clear them out, alright.\"\n\n\nA pair of men grab their grenades, pulling the pins out and lobbing them through the window. You stay low, plugging your ears as they go off with an explosion and a volley of screams. You rush to the door, booting it open to get a look at the destruction. The area is torn apart by shrapnel, with a half a dozen dead Irishmen spread around the room. You wince at the sight of them, before shaking your head. You have a mission to do.\n\n\n\"Secure the building. Make sure no one else is here,\" Fionn says.\n\n\nYour soldiers quickly spread around the building, looking for survivors. You look at the wounded and dying in the room, shaking your head in disgust as you look at those there.\n\n\n\"Dammit, the survivors are escaping out the back!\" one of the soldiers says.\n\n\n\"Dammit! After them!\" Fionn yells.\n\n\nYou quickly burst out of the town hall, rushing after the escaping soldiers. You raise your rifle, firing after one of them as he slips off behind a building, before seeing another moving towards the stables, planning to steal a horse. You rush towards the stables, hurrying to catch up with the larger silhouette. You race after him, reaching him just as he nearly manages to clamber onto a horse. You raise your rifle, pointing it at the back of his head. \n\n\n\"Hold! Hold, or I'll shoot you!\"\n\n\nThe figure stops, before slowly raising his hands, He turns to face you, as you stare at Joseph, who looks darkly at you. \n\n\n\"Hey, Michael,\" he says darkly. \n\n\n\"Joseph!\" you say, taken aback. \"Jesus, Joseph. What are you doing here?\"\n\n\n\"Fighting for the cause,\" Joseph smiles. \"Seeing as you bastards have taken the whole place, we're retreating to the hills to continue this as a guerilla war.\"\n\n\n\"There's no point in fighting, Joseph! The war is over, goddammit! Just lay down your rifle and make peace!\" \n\n\n\"I know there's no point in it, Michael. I know. But I can't surrender. Not after everything I've done. I just can't give up.\"\n\n\n\"I can't let you leave, Joseph!\" you say. \"I have a duty to my country!\"\n\n\n\"And I have a duty to mine, and I won't be captured,\" Joseph says. \"So if this is how it ends, this is how it ends.\"\n\n\nJoseph sighs, shaking his head slowly. \n\n\n\"If I'm to die, then I'm to die a soldier,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"You try to get on that horse and I will shoot you, Joseph!\" you say.\n\n\n\"I'm not going to get on the horse. I don't want to go off and continue hiding in the hills, eating scraps, freezing when the sun goes down and killing my countrymen. I'd say my time has come.\"\n\n\n\"Then drop your weapons, and this can be over!\" you shout.\n\n\nJoseph slowly unbuttons his holster, placing his hand on the revolver handle.\n\n\n\"Drop the gun, Joseph!\" you snarl.\n\n\n\"No, I don't think I can, Michael. I'm tired of fighting, but I won't abandon my cause. I'll go out like a soldier. Now, I'm going to draw my pistol, and I'm going to start shooting for as long as I last. You want to protect them, pull the trigger and get this over with, because I'm dying a soldier.\"\n\n\nJoseph pulls out his gun, aiming it at your chest.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Move through the woods to avoid the obstacle", "result": "\"Let's move through the trees to avoid this obstacle,\" you advise.\n\n\nFionn agrees, as you quickly break into the trees, heading into the woods. You begin marching through th trees, stomping through the mud and muck of the place as you hurry to get to Bandon. However, amongst the trees, you become dispersed, not marching in tight formation due to the terrain, instead splitting apart as you break away into several units. \n\n\nYou walk along through the woods, before pausing as you stumble across a plainclothes man hiding behind a tree, trying to stay in cover, a rifle in hand. You pause, your eyes widening as he stares at you for a brief moment.\n\n\n\"Men! We've an IRA soldier sneaking...!\" you begin to yell, turning back to your own men as you frantically raise your rifle. \n\n\n\"Shut the fuck up!\" he says, slamming the butt of his rifle into your head with a frantic smack. \n\n\nYou hit the ground, your rifle skidding along the dirt. You frantically reach out for it, muck and dirt covering your face. A boot slams into your back, stomping onto your side as you let out a pained groan. A rifle jams into your back, as a bullet slams through your chest, blowing out your lungs. The next shot pierces your side, before a third shot blows out your heart, killing you instantly.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Hold fire", "result": "Your finger heavy, it doesn't pull back. It can't. You can't kill your friend over this.\n\n\nThe bullets thud through the air, hammering into Rory O'Connor. The cigarette falls from his mouth as he topples to the ground, killed instantly. You pause, staring down at the dead man, as you mutter a silent prayer for him. With that, you turn.\n\n\n\"Well done, men,\" your commander says. \"You made your country proud. Michael, one minute.\"\n\n\nThe others solemnly leave the room, not a word being spoken. You stare at your commander, as he shakes his head.\n\n\n\"You didn't fire, did you, Michael?\"\n\n\n\"No, sir,\" you say, admitting it instantly. You don't have the strength to lie.\n\n\n\"I understand. It's a hard thing to execute a man. A harder thing to execute a friend. I knew he knows your brother well, and you yourself. I'm sorry for this. Now, go on your way. It's best we don't mention this to anyone else.\"\n\n\n\"Thank you, sir,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Don't mention it. Now, on your way.\"\n\n\nYou nod, walking out of the room, as you trudge home, wondering how much you'll need to give for this new country.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Go to the bar and drown your sorrows before the time comes", "result": "You head to the local bar, downing your sorrows on whiskey. You spend your entire day's wages there. The sipping of glasses turns to the drinking of pints turns to the downing of shots. After a few hours, your pocket watch informs you of the time, and you put down the bottle.\n\n\nAfter you finish drinking, you head to the changing room, getting dressed up in your full uniform and grabbing your rifle, before making your way to the execution area.\n\n\n\"Reporting for duty, sir,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Are you drunk, McCarthy?\" the commander asks.\n\n\n\"A bit,\" you admit. \"You're about to execute Rory O'Connor. Are you able to do it sober?\"\n\n\n\"Just grab your rifle and take your position on the line,\" he says. \n\n\nYou quickly file along the line, taking your position as you shoulder your rifle. Rory O'Connor is led out, given his position against the wall. He takes a cigarette in between his teeth, before foregoing the blindfold to stare down his attackers.\n\n\n\"Padraig Pearse whistled right before he was killed,\" Rory O'Connor says. \"I feel I need to go out with a similar bit of style, don't I?\"\n\n\nHe smiles weakly at the row of gunmen in front of him. He looks at you briefly, giving you a quick wink. He takes a deep inhale of his cigarette, before the Free State commander gives the order.\n\n\n\"Ready!\"\n\n\nYou prepare to fire your rifle, waiting carefully.\n\n\n\"Aim!\"\n\n\nYou tilt your head, staring down the iron sights of your rifle, waiting patiently.\n\n\n\"Fire!\"", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Leave Joseph talk", "result": "\"Come in, then,\" you say.\n\n\nYou allow Joseph into the home. He makes his way into the kitchen, where Mary embraces him. Arthur shakes his hand. He even plays with fucking Morgan. You watch with cold fury as Joseph acts like everything's tip fucking top.\n\n\n\"So...\" Joseph says, finally turning to you. \"It's good to see you, Michaell.\"\n\n\nThe atmosphere is tense. There's a long pause, as you just manage to avoid swearing or cussing him out. You wait, choosing your words carefully.\n\n\n\"You have a lot of explaining to do, Joseph.\"\n\n\n\"Explaining?\" Joseph asks with a smile. \"I'm fighting for an Irish republic and full independence. That's what we both fought for with the IRA, isn't it? I never left the IRA, and I never stopped fighting. Maybe you need to explain yourself.\"\n\n\n\"I did what was necessary! We got the best we were ever going to get, and you want to throw it away, to gun down your former friends, comrades and family, all for nothing!\"\n\n\n\"I'm doing what I can to see the Irish flag fly free!\"\n\n\n\"You might as well piss on the fucking flag, Joseph.\n\n\n\"I wasn't the one firing artillery down on our heads in the Four Courts!\" Joseph says, growing angrier. \n\n\n\"You were the one who took the Four Courts in the first place! That's an act of war!\" you say.\n\n\n\"Michael, Joseph, stop fighting, for god's sake!\" Mary begs.\n\n\n\"Stay out of this, Mary. It's men's work!\" \n\n\n\"Don't talk to me like that!\" Mary says.\n\n\n\"Mary, for god's sake, this is stuff between men! I'm not trying to belittle you, I'm trying to keep you safe.\"\n\n\n\"Joseph, you need to come home and stop fighting! Killing Irishmen is not the way forward! We will get a full republic, but through the political process!\"\n\n\n\"He's right, Joseph,\" Arthur adds. \"The pen will be what wins the country independence, not the gun!\"\n\n\n\"How the fuck are you going to give out to me for fighting Michael's British allies!? You, of all fucking people!?\" Joseph snaps. \"That baby sitting right here with us isn't even your fucking kid, he's the son of a fucking British soldier who raped your wife while serving the crown that Joseph serves!\"\n\n\nYou're so taken aback you can't even find the anger within you. Mary bursts into tears, pressing her face into your chest as Arthur rises. You turn to look at him, who sits there, his eyes narrowing. Arthur doesn't snap, or go red, but he's instead taken by something far more terrifying. Arthur stands, his lanky frame no filling the room with his presence, as his voice drops to a quiet, cold snarl.\n\n\n\"You ever say a fucking about my son, I will put a fucking bullet through your skull,\" Arthur says, stepping up close to Joseph as Joseph\n\n\n\"I didn't mean...\" Joseph says meekly, as Arthur sneers at him.\n\n\n\"Get the fuck out of here, Joseph. Nothing good's going to come from you staying,\" he says darkly. \n\n\nJoseph goes to protest, before nodding weakly. You watch as he makes his way out of the house. You let out a quiet sigh of relief that he's left, before turning to Arthur, whose darkened face is staring at Joseph walks down the driveway. \n\n\n\"I'm sorry, Arthur,\" you say.\n\n\n\"I'm alright. Nothing to be sorry for,\" Arthur says, leaning in to give Morgan a quick peck on the cheek. \"He's wrong. Morgan's my boy. Nothing else matters.\"\n\n\nArthur nods wordlessly, as you go to the cabinet.\n\n\nLittle else is said in the night, as you drink away your sorrows. When Ma gets back, not a word is said to her. It's best not to upset her with these things. Instead, you all just head to bed, not wanting to talk about the day's events.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Circle around and cut off their escape", "result": "You quickly join the group flanking the Four Courts, quickly moving off to prevent the enemy from escaping alongside the river. You quickly set up a defensive position to keep the anti-Treaty enemy boxed in, setting up a machine gun in a barricaded position, patiently waiting for the enemy to arrive in an attempt to escape. \n\n\nSoon, the rest of the Four Courts is taken, as the area is captured. The last force taken out is Cathal Brugha and his diversionary attack at O'Connell street. Cathal Brugha orders his forces to surrender, before walking out into the street with his pistol raised to die a martyr. With his death, you wait for the main group of anti-Treaty leaders to surrender. \n\n\nHowever, the escape attempt doesn't come. You quickly hear that the anti-Treaty leaders like Oscar Traynor and Rory O'Connor manage to escape out with large groups of anti-Treaty soldiers through using allies in the National Army, who betray their country to help terrorists and traitors escape. For all your flanking work, the enemy still escapes, and you can't just finish this war. \n\n\nThe Battle of Dublin has been a quick, brutal battle. Although it was a decisive win for the National Army, that was always going to be the case, as the IRA troops in the Four Courts were outnumbered twenty times over, with only 200 IRA soldiers facing 4000 Free State Troops. Although the Irish capital city of Dublin was secured by the new government, leaders like Cathal Brugha killed and men like Rory O'Connor, your old friend at the original IRA, and even though the anti-Treaty soldiers were dispersed and their strength broken, many anti-Treaty leaders such as Oscar Traynor, your old friend Ernie O'Malley and many other anti-Treaty fighters managed to escape to continue the fight. With this, the spirit of war managed to survive, and inspired many other anti-Free State units to stand up and oppose the new National Army. \n\n\nYou know this is the start of what's to be a brutal conflict. All you can do is prepare to serve your nation and do the best you can.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Move to secure O'Connell Street", "result": "You volunteer to O'Connell street, quickly pushing up with the other National soldiers as you secure the street. Cathal Brugha and his allies have fortified their position, using rifles to hold off your forces from pushing forward and finishing your take-over of the Four Courts. You wait in a stand-off for several hours, waiting patiently to capture Brugha and his allies.\n\n\nAfter a long exchange of gunfire, however, Brugha calls out to you.\n\n\n\"My men are surrendering,\" Cathal Brugha shouts above the din of battle. \"For god's sake, don't shoot them!\"\n\n\n\"That's good,\" you call back. \"No one needs to die today. At least, no one else.\"\n\n\n\"That's not entirely true,\" Cathal Brugha chuckles grimly. \"I'm armed with a revolver, and I will not surrender to a puppet of the state we once fought against. Unlike my men, I am going to go down fighting. I repeat, my men surrender, but I do not, and am coming out, armed and ready to fight.\"\n\n\n\"Cathal, for god's sake...!\" you begin to shout.\n\n\n\"God bless Eireann!\" Cathal Brugha cries out, moving out of cover with his revolver raised.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill Cathal Brugha", "result": "You fire your rifle, as do your allies, as Cathal Brugha is shot multiple times in the chest, collapsing backwards. He stumbles back for a second, dropping the revolver to the ground. He smiles, blood dripping down his mouth. Then, he collapses to the ground, blood pouring out onto the ground.\n\n\nThere's a moment of silence, before a voice calls out from the building. You watch as the other IRA soldiers who were with Brugha emerge, hands raised. You sigh, looking at the dead, still smiling Brugha, before nodding to your comrades to start taking these men prisoner.\n\n\nWith Brugha's death, the rest of the IRA forces surrender without another casualty. Many of the anti-Treaty leaders manage to escape out into the countryside, but Dublin is secured and the Four Courts captured. You don't count Fionn among the dead, and you hear rumors that he escorted the anti-Treaty leaders out to a hidden safe house from the captured IRA soldiers. \n\n\nThe Battle of Dublin has been a quick, brutal battle. Although it was a decisive win for the National Army, that was always going to be the case, as the IRA troops in the Fourt Courts were outnumbered twenty times over, with only 200 IRA soldiers facing 4000 Free State Troops. Although the Irish capital city of Dublin was secured by the new government, leaders like Cathal Brugha killed and men like Rory O'Connor, your old friend at the original IRA, and even though the anti-Treaty soldiers were dispersed and their strength broken, many anti-Treaty leaders such as Oscar Traynor, your old friend Ernie O'Malley and many other anti-Treaty fighters managed to escape to continue the fight. With this, the spirit of war managed to survive, and inspired many other anti-Free State units to stand up and oppose the new National Army. \n\n\nYou know this is the start of what's to be a brutal conflict. All you can do is prepare to serve your nation and do the best you can.\n\n\nThis is only the beginning of the bloodshed. You hope it will be over quickly and peacefully, but you know hope is never enough. All you can do is wait until the Free State requires you to fight again.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Force Cathal Brugha to surrender", "result": "You move forward, aiming your rifle carefully as you aim at him.\n\n\n\"We're not going to kill you, Mr Brugha!\" you say. \"Just surrender, and you'll be treated honorably!\"\n\n\n\"This is a shame!\" Cathal Brugha says. \"I'm sorry then, I'm going to have to force your hand then.\"\n\n\nCathal Brugha rushes to reach down for his revolver, drawing it from the holster as he raises it up to aim at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fire your rifle", "result": "You fire your rifle, as do your allies, as Cathal Brugha is shot multiple times in the chest, collapsing backwards. He stumbles back for a second, dropping the revolver to the ground. He smiles, blood dripping down his mouth. Then, he collapses to the ground, blood pouring out onto the ground.\n\n\nThere's a moment of silence, before a voice calls out from the building. You watch as the other IRA soldiers who were with Brugha emerge, hands raised. You sigh, looking at the dead, still smiling Brugha, before nodding to your comrades to start taking these men prisoner.\n\n\nWith Brugha's death, the rest of the IRA forces surrender without another casualty. Many of the anti-Treaty leaders manage to escape out into the countryside, but Dublin is secured and the Four Courts captured. You don't count Fionn among the dead, and you hear rumors that he escorted the anti-Treaty leaders out to a hidden safe house from the captured IRA soldiers. \n\n\nThis is only the beginning of the bloodshed. You hope it will be over quickly and peacefully, but you know hope is never enough. All you can do is wait until the Free State requires you to fight again.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Tackle him", "result": "You charge forward, tackling Cathal Brugha as he lets out a startled yell. He hurries to draw his revolver, as you grab his arm, struggling to pull his gun from him, as you reach around, twisting his arm. \n\n\n\"Get the fuck off me!\" he roars.\n\n\n\"Just drop the revolver!\" you say hurriedly.\n\n\nYou roll around the floor, struggling to grab the gun from each other for what seems like eternity. Then, Cathal Brugha manages to press the revolver against your temple. You grab his arm, but he refuses to budge.\n\n\n\"I don't have a clear shot!\" one of your squad says.\n\n\n\"Wait! We can't hit Michael\" another soldier yells.\n\n\nYou try to force Cathal Brugha's arm away, before he pulls down on the trigger, sending a burst of brain matter and blood onto the floor. Seconds later, your allies open fire, killing Brugha.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Get inside its gun range and use your rifle to eliminate the crew and capture the Mutineer", "result": "You raise your rifle, quickly rushing in as you duck in under the range of the machine gun, until you're pressed up against the armored car. You quickly press your foot against the armored car, pulling yourself onto the armored car. You quickly raise your rifle as you stare at the gunner from his armored position, raising your rifle to point at his back. You fire as he frantically attempts to escape your shot, half-climbing out of the truck before you shoot him twice through the chest and he rolls off the car. You quickly raise your rifle, staring into the main bulk of the armored car, where the driver and engineer sit, quickly turning to see what's going on. You raise your rifle, before the engineer grabs it by the barrel, nearly pulling you toppling into the armored car.\n\n\nThe driver raises his pistol, firing up through the gunner's seat and hitting you in the chest. You stumble backwards as the next few shots blow through your chest, before you topple off the car, smacking into the ground with a thud.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Keep to a distance, waiting for the artilerry to take care of it", "result": "You hold back, staying in cover, as you turn to your allies. \n\n\n\"Someone order a fucking artillery strike so we can move up!\"\n\n\n\"I've already sent a runner,\" Fionn says. \n\n\nYou wait patiently, as machine gun fire smacks into the concrete around you. You wait patiently, keeping low and in cover as bullets continue to fire upon your position. After a few minutes, the next barrage of artillery begins. The first few shots smash off the buildings in front of you with powerful eruptions, sending bursts of concrete and ash into the air. However, one shot manages to directly hit the armored car, blasting through it's front and destroying it's engine. You watch as the machine gun fire continues, although the crew of the mutineer quickly begin to abandon their position, frantically retreating back to the safety of the buildings, until the gunner stops firing, retreating with them before the next shot takes out the armored car.\n\n\nWithout the support of the armored car, the other IRA soldiers still quickly begin retreating back to the building and hurrying inside. The Free State soldiers hurry to push up to the disabled Mutineer. Then, your Free State commander who is leading your mission appears, quickly assembling the group to send them off on their missions, to break up and take the next few objectives.\n\n\n\"OK, we're splitting off!\" the Free State commander says. \"We're sending soldiers to storm the Eastern Wing to take control of the building and force the enemy out of this place. We're also sending soldiers to go take O'Connell street, where Cathal Brugha and a group of IRA soldiers have attacked. We need some men to capture Brugha and end the attack. Finally, we need a segment to circle around, cutting off the chance for the anti-Treaty leaders to escape down the river and continue this fight. Any volunteers?\"", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Oppose the treaty and serve as a soldier in the IRA", "result": "\"The Treaty is a betrayal of what we fought for, by a fucking mile!\" you say. \"We need to stand by our countrymen and what so many lives were lost for!\"\n\n\n\"For God's sake, that's absolute chaos! We can't die and lose how much we've gained after all this time! You need to see reason!\" Fionn says loudly. \n\n\n\"I'm not serving the British who executed our friends. Not a chance,\" Liam says. \"Those who stand with the IRA, let's leave these dogs to serve their masters.\"\n\n\nYou stand with around half of the soldiers in the room, watching as men you've fought with, friends you're shared laughs with, brothers in arms, still sit, unwilling to stand by their principles, as you march out of the room. They start at you as you leave,completely disgusted with you, just as you all share the same hatred of them for how cowardly and weak they're being. You proudly march out, leaving Fionn and your allies behind you, knowing this won't work out well. Only bloodshed lies down your path.", "action_results": [{"action": "Six Months Later...", "result": "Over the next few months, hostilities rise between the forces of the Irish Free State and the anti-treaty IRA. In February, Ernie O'Malley, the Cork IRA leader who had sheltered you, manages to take over an RIC barracks in Clonmel, capturing 40 police officers and 600 rifles. There's a stand off between O'Malley and 800 of his anti-treaty IRA and 700 pro-Treaty IRA men under Michael Brennan over who will take over the military barracks in Cork after British soldiers abandoned it, which ends peacefully, thankfully, after the barracks is divided between pro-treaty and anti-treaty forces. Later in Cork, IRA soldiers raise a British ship, taking 1500 rifles, 700 handguns and 60 machine guns. \n\n\nThen, comes when you take action. Led by Cathal Brugha and Rory O'Connor, your old friend, 200 anti-treaty IRA soldiers take over the Four Courts, the center of judicial power in Dublin, in order to show defiance and to provoke a response from the British soldiers in Dublin, hoping that if Britain's provoked, the Irish will be able to team up again in repelling them and the war can continue. You set up camp in the Four Courts, refusing to leave, as tensions continue to rise. \n\n\nIn May, anti-Treaty soldiers take over the centre of Kilkenny, before being dislodged by 200 Free State soldiers. There's a firefight, with 18 casualties, before peace reigns again with a truce. In Donegal, there's another firefight between pro-Treaty and anti-Treaty IRA soldiers, with two deaths. Also in Donegal, a Free State motor convoy is ambushed by Republicans, where one Free State soldier is killed In County Meath, RIC and anti-Treaty fighters clash, with one killed on either side. The election takes place, with pro-Treaty parties far outdoing anti-treaty parties. Sir Henry Hughes Wilson is assassinated in Britain, although whether it's by anti-Treaty IRA soldiers or a secret assassination by Michael Collins and the Free State is debated, due to Sir Hughes Wilson being an almost universally hated figure among Irish for his treatment of Irish citizens in the war. However, this forces the British to put pressure on the Free State to dislodge you and the anti-Treaty rebels from the Four Courts.\n\n\nYou're left waiting nervously to see what the Free State is do, but you're unwilling to leave the Four Courts and abandon your chance at Irish independence.", "action_results": [{"action": "Four Courts", "result": "As the first barrage of artillery hits the Four Courts, you know the war has began. Quickly, there's a desperate panic as you attempt to regroup. You quickly find yourself in the central courtyard, where the anti-Treaty leaders are attempting to plan a defense.\n\n\n\"What's the situation?\" Cathal Brugha asks with an angry snarl.\n\n\n\"They're trying to soften up our defensive positions with heavy artillery. Guns taken straight from the Brits,\" Sean Lemass says. \"It's the rising all over again, and they're the British.\"\n\n\n\"I need spare men to take up the machine guns, I want reinforcements sent to hold the Eastern Wing and I want someone to crew the Mutineer,\" Cathal Brugha shouts out among the spare soldiers, you being one of them.\n\n\nYou quickly decide what to do, as the armored car with a mounted gun known as the Mutineer appears outside, a driver needing a gunner desperately motioning for any nearby soldiers to take it up, as you hear gunfire ring off at the Eastern wing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Crew the Mutineer", "result": "You quickly climb into the Mutineer, climbing atop it before you move into the gunner's position, where a machine gun sits. You sit at the gun, aiming down it the streets, before checking to make sure the safety's\n\n\n\"Ready,\" you shout. \"Let's get going!\"\n\n\n\"Tiocfaidh \u00e1r l\u00e1!\" the driver answers back.\n\n\nThe armored car begins moving off, quickly heading to the front line, where Free State soldiers are already surging in, pushing up to the pair of machine gun positions that are attempting to hold back a surge of Free State Soldiers attempting to push in and take the Four Courts. The armored car rolls up as you pull the trigger, spraying bullets at the Free State soldiers as they dive into cover in a frantic panic. You take them by surprise for a quick moment as they fall back, trying to regroup and figure out how to deal with this new threat.\n\n\nFree State soldiers begin to fire back, attempting to take out the machine gunners through potshots. If you push forward, you might be able to draw enemy attention away from the machine gunners to help relieve pressure from them, although that mightn't be the safest option. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Hold the line", "result": "You stay in the armored truck, firing bursts of machine gun fire to hold the advancing Free State soldiers back the advancing enemies. You manage to prevent the advancing enemy line from pushing on, as the machine guy positions combined with the Mutineer makes short work of any fool too stupid to take cover. You pause, realizing the Free State soldiers aren't just retreating from your machine gun fire, but seem to be retreating entirely. You crack a grin, smiling at this as you...\n\n\n\"Shit! Artillery!\" a scream comes out, as you hear the whistling of incoming shells.\n\n\nYou dive from your gunner's spot inside the Mutineer, as the first shell rocks the car, nearly knocking it spinning over as it's wheels are eviscerated with a burst of shrapnel. You wait patiently, as artillery thumps around you, smashing into the ground with explosions tearing through the ground for several minutes, before the artillery barrage ends.\n\n\nAfter a few moments, the artillery barrage stops. You cautiously wait a moment, before popping your head up and grabbing the machine gun, ready for an enemy charge.\n\n\n\"The wheels are gone. This whole thing's completely immobilized,\" the driver says. \"We're stuck here.\"\n\n\n\"Shit,\" you complain. \"Just... let me think.\"\n\n\nAbandoning the Mutineer will allow the Free State forces to push up and push your men entirely back into the buildings of the Four Courts, where you'll be easily crushed. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Defend the Mutineer", "result": "Refusing to abandon the Mutineer, you grab the machine gun, as your crew hurry to take up positions outside, taking rifles from nearby fallen troops and getting into defensive positions, using the Mutineer for cover. You patiently wait, your knuckles white as your fingers tighten on the machine gun. You stare for advancing Free State soldiers, but none show up, Instead, you're left waiting desperately, staring nervously at the possible paths of attack that lay right open, knowing how little you could actually do to stop them.\n\n\nSuddenly, the ground next to you explodes, as the next barrage of artillery begins. Unwilling to send a wave of their countrymen into a meat grinder, they've simply continued with another artillery attack. Explosive shells begin reigning down on you, as you hurry to duck into the armored car. An explosive shell smashes into the armored truck, and its armor is useless as the shell destroys it in one fiery blast, taking you down with it.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Abandon the Mutineer and fall back", "result": "\"We need to fall back!\" you say with a yell.\n\n\nYou quickly clamber out of the armored car, as your driver clambers out with you. The two of you quickly hurry towards back towards the line, shouting at the machine gunners.\n\n\n\"The armored car's disabled, we need to fall back! Let's go!\" you scream.\n\n\nYou quickly fall back to the inner defensive line, where it soon becomes clear that the Battle of Dublin is coming to an end, and you're not the victors. The Free State forces have better weapons, more numbers, and outnumber you. You've been pushed back to the inner areas of the Four Courts, and the plan's changed. No longer do you hope to spark off the war between the British and Irish again. Instead, you've started a war between Irishmen. \n\n\nWith few choices left, the remaining rebels, those who haven't been captured or killed, have little choice. However, you do, as you're left with the option to help the anti-Treaty leaders escape through a mass break out through using several sympathizers among the pro-Treaty side. However, you can also stay behind as a distraction force, Cathal Brugha, who has volunteered to stay behind to hold off the Free State forces for long enough to escape. As they look for volunteers for both movements, you wonder what's left to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Cathal Brugha and the rearguard", "result": "You stay behind, sticking with Cathal Brugha and a handful of soldiers. You quickly take up your position on O'Connell street, taking shelter in an old hotel known as Hamman Hotel. The building's already in flames when you get there, but it's the best defensive position, and you're more likely to be overrun than you are to be forced out by the fire. Your role is now simple: from your barricaded position, you plan to defend from the Free State advance to give more time to the main force, especially the Anti-Treaty leaders, to escape and continue the fight. Although you might not survive, hell, will not survive, you know your death will be for Ireland.\n\n\nYou spend what seems like eternity crouched in cover, your rifle aimed down the street as you fire at anyone who nears. Eventually, it becomes clear your mission has succeeded: the Free State soldiers have failed to push past after more than enough time for the anti-treaty leaders to escape. Thus, your mission is complete, and all you're left to do is hold out for as long as you can in what's to be your last stand.\n\n\nWhilst in the old days of the war, you'd be more than eager to hold out just to spite the enemy, just to kill a few more, just to resist the will of your hated foe. But that's not the case anymore. Now, you're fighting Irishmen. You recognize the faces of the enemy, the faces peeking up from cover, the faces staring down the rifle at you, Your enemy isn't some oppressive foe responsible for endless atrocities: they're your comrades.\n\n\nAfter a long wait, being pushed out by flames and gunfire, Cathal Brugha makes his decision.\n\n\n\"You're going to surrender. They'll treat you fairly, I know they're good men.\"\n\n\nThere's a moments of protesting, before Brugha holds up a hand to order them to stop.\n\n\n\"You will follow my orders. I won't have you die for no meaning.\"\n\n\n\"You... you said you,\" you say. \"Not us. What's to happen you?\"\n\n\nCathal Brugha smirks half-heartedly, as if amused you picked up on that.\n\n\n\"I'm not surrendering. I'll be shot, just like the sixteen of the rising. So I'd prefer to go out on my own terms. I'll head out there to go down fighting. You'll surrender. It's the best way forward.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge out with Brugha", "result": "\"I'm going too,\" you say. \"I'm not going to surrender.\"\n\n\n\"No, boy, you should surrender. You don't need to die with me. Surrender. That's an order.\"\n\n\n\"Well then, I'll happily mutiny against your unjust orders. I've committed treason against Britain and the Free State, I'll happily do so again for the cause.\"\n\n\n\"I suppose so. Let's go out like gentlemen, then. It's been an honor, men. Let's finish this,\" he says.\n\n\nHe takes a deep breath, letting out a silent prayer, before he moves out of cover and bursts out of the house, raising his revolver.\n\n\nYou raise your rifle, charging out of the room as you rush into the street, raising your rifle and firing. Cathal Brugha is struck in the thigh, spiraling into the street with a pained scream. You raise your rifle, firing back at the Free State soldiers. You don't really aim; you're tired of the bloodshed. Instead, you attack to make sure they have to. There's a burst of rifle fire, as a bullet slams into your chest, knocking the wind from your lungs. \n\n\nYou collapse back to the street, as a warmth overtakes you. Slowly, your pained gasps begin to still, as a great calm overtakes you. You relax, as your blood seeps out into the streets of Dublin.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Follow Brugha's orders", "result": "You pause, as everyone just keeps their head down and nods.\n\n\n\"My men are surrendering,\" Cathal Brugha shouts above the din of battle. \"For god's sake, don't shoot them!\"\n\n\n\"That's good,\" a voice calls back. \"No one needs to die today. At least, no one else.\"\n\n\n\"That's not entirely true,\" Cathal Brugha chuckles grimly. \"I'm armed with a revolver, and I will not surrender to a puppet of the state we once fought against. Unlike my men, I am going to go down fighting. I repeat, my men surrender, but I do not, and am coming out, armed and ready to fight.\"\n\n\n\"Cathal, for god's sake...!\"\n\n\n\"God bless Eireann!\" Cathal Brugha cries out.\n\n\nWith that, Cathal Brugha raises his revolver, stepping out from cover and opening fire. He bursts out into the street, where you hear a burst of gunfire. It stops after a moment, and you say a silent prayer for his soul.\n\n\n\"What now?\" one of the other Irregulars asks.\n\n\n\"We follow our orders,\" you say..", "action_results": [{"action": "Surrender", "result": "Seeing no other option, you lower your gun slowly, before dropping it to the ground. \n\n\n\"We surrender!\" you call out to the Free State soldiers.\n\n\n\"Come out with your hands up then! Any funny business and we open fire!\"\n\n\n\"We're all Irish here? Do you think we're the type to try a false surrender?\"\n\n\n\"I don't know what you'd do anymore. I never thought my fellow Irishmen, especially those of the IRA, would betray the cause.\"\n\n\n\"We...!\" you begin to say angrily, before realizing there's no use. \"We're coming out\"\n\n\nYou move out into the open, staring right down the barrel of a rifle, as you're quickly surrounded by a group of Free State soldiers. You raise your hands, as they grab your arms, pulling them behind your back as you're forced to your knees.\n\n\n\"Evening, gentlemen,\" you say with a weak, bitter smile as you're quickly dragged away, where you're blindfolded and forced to whatever fate awaits you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Prisoner", "result": "You're transferred to a small holding position with the others captured from the Battle of Dublin, where you're held in small cells separate from each other to prevent you from talking. You're treated relatively fairly, with three meals a day and good conditions, although the most painful fact is that you're unable to take part in the fight for true independence.\n\n\nYou spend several months imprisoned, being moved between various holding cells rather than being sent to an actual prison. It's more boring than anything else, as you spend your days stuck in small cells, making small talk with the guards who know they shouldn't befriend you, even though you share interests, grew up close enough and fought the same enemy for most of your career as soldiers. Hell, you probably saved a few of your guards lives in the fight against the British, or they saved you. You spend most of your days in your cell, reading from the old Irish writers like W.B. Yeats, James Joyce with his new masterpiece Ulysses that's barely a year old, and your personal favorite, Oscar Wilde.\n\n\nHowever, you eventually manage to find an ally amongst the prison staff, a man you served with in the IRA against the British who isn't entirely set on the Treaty. As an old favor, he offers you a chance to decide where you're being transferred... off the books, of course. You're left with two choices. The larger Dundalk Prison, or a smaller prison in Dublin.\n\n\nDundalk is the main place where Republican prisoners are being held, and being transferred there could give you a possible chance to stage a break out with the others. As well as this, it could give you some ability to network with other Republicans from across the country.\n\n\nHowever, the Dublin prison is far closer to home. You won't be able to fight, but you might still see your family, barring Joseph, although there's rumors of brutality against IRA prisoners of war in Dublin and it's surrounding areas.", "action_results": [{"action": "Transfer to Dundalk", "result": "Dundalk is much the same as any other prison. It's dark, it's miserable. You get to talk to a few of the other IRA prisoners, but knowing how dangerous prison time can be since their stay in Frongoch, the Free State tries hard to keep you all separated from each other. Probably a good idea. Still, it's not too miserable, and you're probably treated well. It's a boring, miserable existence, but tolerable.\n\n\nIt's another one of those dark, miserable days, like most days in prison, where you've been left to rot in your cell, lying about it as you wait for something to happen. Daydreaming, you imagine being back at the farm, a few friends at your side as you work in the nice, sunny weather, free at last...\n\n\nYour daydreaming is interrupted as a guard rushes up to the cell doors, looking panicked and frantic.\n\n\n\"You're being evacuated! We're moving you to another prison! Hands...\"\n\n\n\"What?\" you interrupt, confused. \"What's going on? Evacuation?\"\n\n\n\"Never you mind! Now, hands...!\"\n\n\n\"Hands in the air!\" a voice from down the hallway shouts.\n\n\n\"Shit!\" the guard says, rushing to draw his pistol and nearly falling over himself. \n\n\nA gunshot echoes through the hallways, as the guard slumps over, sliding down the bars. You watch as a squad of IRA soldiers rushes down the hallway, rifles in hand. One of them pauses, pressing his grinning, bearded face between the cell bars.\n\n\n\"Michael!\" Joseph grins.\n\n\n\"Joseph?\" you ask. \"Jesus, Joseph, what the fuck are you doing here?\"\n\n\n\"We were coming to see you, but visiting hours weren't on so we had to break in and get you out of here,\" Joseph smiles. \n\n\nJoseph moves down, grabbing the keys off the guard and quickly unlocking the cell door. You quickly move out, embracing your brother.\n\n\n\"It's good to see you, Joseph.\"\n\n\n\"It's good to see you too, Michael.\"\n\n\n\"So, tell me. What the fuck's going on?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Frank Aiken has led a huge assault of IRA soldiers to liberate the prisoners here and capture the rifles stored here,\" Joseph explains.\n\n\n\"Perfect. Let's go deal with this, then,\" you say.\n\n\nWith the element of surprise and numbers, the barracks is quickly taken over. Over 400 rifles are taken, with 240 Republican prisoners being released. Quickly, you move patrols out, taking the town and routing the Free State soldiers from it. Most are captured or escape off into the hills, with only a few kills. Perhaps it's because your rescuers are far more hesitant to shoot fellow Irishmen than they are British occupiers.\n\n\nQuickly, however, the next wave of Free State soldiers soon arrive and prepare a counter-attack to take back the town. Quickly, Frank Aiken assembles a few high-ranking IRA soldiers whose opinions he trusts, and thankfully you're one of them thanks to the fact you actually were kept in this prison and are the brother of Aiken's newest lieutenant. \n\n\n\"We have a problem,\" Frank Aiken says. \"The Br...\"\n\n\nFrank Aiken pauses, almost forgetting himself. For many of you, Aiken included, it's been a hard transition to go from fighting British soldiers to former friends and comrades.\n\n\n\"The Free State have arrived in force. They're going to attempt to push us out of the city, and we need to decide how we're going to react before they organize and attack. I need opinions. I've been considering a truce with them, to allow us to retreat with our captured weapons and freed comrade in exchange for the release of the men we captured. It seems like the most peaceful way this can end.\"\n\n\n\"That's too weak. We need to hit them hard, before they have a chance to properly organize. We can strike a hard blow, and push them back with ease,\" one of the soldiers says.\n\n\n\"No, we should hold down. We have the arms, we have the men, and we'll have the defensive advantage,\" a particularly qualified soldier named Sean F. Quinn says.\n\n\n\"And what do the McCarthy twins think? Joseph?\"\n\n\n\"We're not twins,\" Joseph says, as if disliking that notion. \"I don't make decisions. That's more of Michael's job. I just shoot guns and take over when we get into the kick of it.\"\n\n\n\"Well, then, Michael? What's your opinion on the matter? You were a prisoner here, you deserve a say.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Launch a surprise attack on the Free State Forces", "result": "\"We launch an attack. If we're to hold onto this town, we need to act quickly.\"\n\n\n\"So then, if the majority of us support that, it seems like a reasonable decision. Joseph, do you stand by your brother's opinion?\"\n\n\nJoseph nods.\n\n\n\"Well then, we're decided. We attack. Assemble the troops.\"\n\n\nYou quickly assemble the troops, preparing them for an assault. The rescued prisoners are organized into groups and armed, as you hurry to move your forces out there to eliminate the Free State soldiers before this battle can even begin.\n\n\nYou find the Free State soldiers on the outskirts of the town, the Free State soldiers attempt to organize, setting up their long-range field guns to provide some artillery in the assault on the town, while setting up ammo reserves and first aid centers to take the wounded to. They're in no way ready for your quick, fast-paced attack and you fall upon them with gusto.\n\n\nHowever, the battle quickly turns to chaos. Without an organized plan, and the lack of fluidity in action that comes from trying to bring men from across the country into an army in such a small period of time, your IRA forces quickly break up and fall into chaos. The Free State soldiers, taken by surprise and still somewhat disorganized, are left in a desperate panic as well. This isn't helped by the fact many of you know men on the other side, leading to an unwillingness to partake in the brutality necessary to swiftly win a battle.\n\n\nThe battle becomes a bizarre combat, as soldiers break lines and break into melees, while others retreat, try to surrender, or do anything they can in this awful attempt at combat. The battle swiftly turns to hell, as you're left desperately trying to organize something, anything, out of the miserable chaos of the battle.\n\n\nIn the general chaos are both forces try to organize, a Free State rifleman manages to get a clear shot at one of the IRA leaders desperately trying to organize their men. He raises his rifle, staring down the iron sights as he lets out a quiet prayer for the soul he's about to send to God, before finally pulling the trigger. \n\n\nThe shot bursts straight through your chest, as you stumble forward for a meek few steps. You let out a pained gasp for air, before your strength is sapped and your legs give way, and you collapse to the ground, death quickly taking you.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Set up a defensive position to hold Dundalk", "result": "\"We set up a defense. If we're to hold onto this town, we need to be prepared. From a fortified position, it'll be easier to repel the enemy.\"\n\n\n\"So then, if the majority of us support that, it seems like a reasonable decision. Joseph, do you stand by your brother's opinion?\"\n\n\nJoseph nods.\n\n\n\"Well then, we're decided. We fortify and defend Dundalk. Assemble the troops, and let's set this place up for a siege..\"\n\n\nYou quickly assemble the troops, preparing them for the defensive of the town. Barricades are hastily erected, houses fortified into defensive outposts, prisoners armed and organized into garrisons to defend the various sections. Thankfully, you have more than enough time to set up the defense, and you're left waiting to repel the Free State soldiers.\n\n\nThere's a few small engagement with British patrols, but the main force don't arrive. You're left patiently waiting there, poised to strike as soon as they arrive, but they don't. \n\n\nOf course, when the first artillery shell tears through a nearby building, you realize why. You'd counted on the fact that there are civilians to discourage the use of artillery, but it seems the Free State is more desperate to bring this thing to a close than you thought. They're armed with heavy fielder cannons, and as soon as they begin their barrage, you realize what a huge mistake you've done.\n\n\nThe next shot tears throwing the street outside, sending chunks of pavement flying. You desperately dive for cover inside a house, as the next shot hits the house directly, sending it's weakened foundations crumbling as the building collapses in on top of you. You barely have time for a terrified scream as you're buried under a mountain of rubble, debris, concrete and rebar building your tomb.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Organize a truce to escape with the other liberated prisoners and captured arms", "result": "\"We organize a truce, like you said. That seems like the best way forward. If we've freed the prisoners and taken the arms, we've done all this mission had to accomplish. If we can end it without any further bloodshed, that's even better.\"\n\n\n\"So then, if the majority of us support that, it seems like a reasonable decision. Joseph, do you stand by your brother's opinion?\"\n\n\nJoseph nods.\n\n\n\"Damn straight I do. I'm just glad to see him again.\"\n\n\n\"Well then, we're decided. We try organize the troops. Meanwhile, prepare for a defense in case they refuse our terms.\"\n\n\nYou quickly assemble the troops, mostly taking control of the Republican prisoners you've come to know, preparing them for a defense, while Frank Aiken sends out an unarmed messenger to offer terms to the Free State. The terms are simple: the IRA forces be allowed to retreat with the prisoners captured, which you sure as hell were adamant about keeping in there, given how shit sick you are of prison food,and the arms taken, in exchange for allowing the Free State to retake the town, as well as releasing the Free State prisoners that have been captured in the taking of the town. There's a long, desperate and nerve-wracking wait, as you prepare for the Free State's response. \n\n\nAfter about an hour of waiting, the messenger finally returns. Frank Aiken, you, Joseph and Aiken's lieutenants assemble around him.\n\n\n\"What did he say?\" Frank Aiken asks.\n\n\n\"They said if they have your word that their men will be released, and that there will be no attempt at sabotaging the town or leaving behind traps for the Free State soldiers who take back the town, then it's agreed, and you can begin evacuating the town.\"\n\n\n\"Perfect,\" Frank Aiken says, a relieved smile flashing across his face. \"Let's begin the evacuation as soon as we can.\"\n\n\nYou begin to organize the transport of the captured arms out of the barracks in a few trucks captured out back, as you organize the released Republican soldiers. You leave the captured Free State soldiers in the cells they once imprisoned your comrades. With that, you begin a slow, nervous evacuation of the town, retreating to the countryside where you can disperse and escape with your captured spoils. As you sit in the passenger seat of a truck laden with captured rifles, you nervously wait, terrified of the Free State going against their word and attacking, which with the element of surprise and the use of artillery, they could easily wipe you out. Thankfully, though they make no such attempt, and you quickly escape out into the countryside. \n\n\n\"A successful operation,\" Frank Aiken says. \"What's that breath of free air like?\"\n\n\n\"Beautiful,\" you grin, leaning back as you relax. \"Thank God I'm out. Let's get out of here.\"\n\n\n\"Don't worry, we'll get you home to Dublin to see your family, Michael,\" Frank Aiken says.\n\n\n\"Perfect,\" you sigh in relief, as the truck full of arms and released prisoners rolls free of the town.", "action_results": [{"action": "Months Pass...", "result": "Over the next few months, the treaty war gets more and more out of hand, spiraling out of control. It's not long before it becomes clear that the IRA are losing, and the Free State are soon going to triumph. \n\n\nOut of prison, you get to see Ma and Mary once again. Mary's had her boy, a little lad named Morgan. Although you don't get to see much of them due to being on the run with the others, given that your name and face is down on a registry of escaped anti-Treaty criminals, but it's nice to see them for even a little bit.\n\n\nHowever, like every war, there are casualties. Arthur Griffith, overworked and strained from constant stress in keeping the government running smoothly while keeping Britain appeased, dies from heart failure leading to a cerebral hemorrhage. Only ten days later, at B\u00e9al na Bl\u00e1th, Michael Collins is assassinated in an IRA ambush, where he is the only loss.\n\n\nAfter losing two great leaders, the Free State becomes far more draconian in it's work in ending this whole blasted war., including performing executions without trials, larger scale internment and the criminalization of holding any arms whatsoever. This leads to the execution of Erskine Childers, the man who first ran guns for the Irish Volunteers, after he was found with a pistol that he claimed was a gift form Michael Collins. His last words become famous. As he stared down the firing squad to execute him, he said \"Take a step forward, lads. It'll be easier that way.\" If nothing else, the man went out with style.\n\n\nAs the war gets more brutal, it becomes clear Ireland as a nation will not last unless this comes to an end soon.\n\n\nIn an attempt to influence the political background here, you've been ordered to head down to the house of adamant pro-Treaty TD Se\u00e1n McGarry. Whilst he's away on business leaving the house unoccupied, you're to set fire to the place and burn it down to the ground, to hopefully scare the TD into ending his support for the treaty. \n\n\nYou drive a small truck down the back road to McGarry's large country house. Like you were told, the place is empty, with no cars out front. You pull over, clambering out of the car to grab the two big cannisters of gasoline in the back. \n\n\n\"Let's get to work, then,\" you say.\n\n\n\"You know,\" Joseph suggests. \"We could rob this place before we burn it down. You know, take out a few valuables. They'd be destroyed anyway...\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"We're professionals,\" you say. \"We should just be burning this place down, not looting like criminals.\"\n\n\n\"No one would know.\"\n\n\n\"Joseph!\"\n\n\n\"Oh, damn it! Seriously?\" he asks. \"God, you're too professional.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Loot the house", "result": "\"Let's make some money off this,\" you say, walking inside the building. \"It'll all be turned to ash anyway.\"\n\n\nYou walk into the building, quickly snapping the lock and twisting it open with a knife. With that done, you head inside the large house. You move inside, staring around at a large hallway. You move over to the counter, scraping off a mixture of old English pounds and freshly printed Irish notes and stuffing them into your pocket. Joseph takes off his rucksack, beginning to pile expensive, fancy silverware into the bag. You \n\n\n\"There should be jewelry upstairs in the master bedroom. Let's try hurry this, though,\" Joseph says. \"We don't have a lot of time before McGarry comes home.\"\n\n\nYou quickly head upstairs, rushing up the staircase and moving straight into the master bedroom. It's a large enough room, a bit luxurious for a public servant. You move to the bedside counter, pulling it open as you search through the drawers. Eventually, you manage to find a drawer filled with woman's jewelry, a fancy man's watch and a pair of handsome and expensive looking silver cufflinks. You take it all, sliding it into your pocket, before stepping away from the bed \n\n\nYou move out, your pockets jangling with jewelry as you head down the stairs. However, just as you begin moving down the stairs, you pause, hearing a rustling nearby in one of the rooms, although it could've easily been your imagination. \n\n\n\"Come on! We're in a hurry to do this before McGarry and his family shows up and we all get shot to shit! Stop searching through a massive house before we get caught!\" Joseph cries from downstairs. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Investigate the noise", "result": "You move towards the sound of the noise, pressing the side of your head against the wooden door. You listen carefully, before reaching down on the door handle and pulling it open slowly.\n\n\nYou pause as the door opens fully, seeing a woman sitting inside with a shotgun in her hands. Her three children clutch at her from behind her, staring at you. You stare back at them, and for a brief moment, not a word is said.\n\n\n\"Wait, we're not here to...!\" you say frantically, before the woman pulls the trigger.\n\n\nA tight burst of buckshot sends you flying backwards, knocking into the wall and sliding down it with a wet, crimson smear. Blood begins pouring out of your torn up insides, as you gasp desperately. You go to reach for your gun, fingers desperately grasping at the cold wooden stock, before another shot finishes that attempt. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Leave the house and set it ablaze", "result": "\"I'm coming!\" you shout.\n\n\nYou hurry down the stairs, rushing out to where Joseph waits, leaning against the doorway of the house, his pockets stuffed with a pair of silver candlesticks.\n\n\n\"Find much for yourself?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Enough,\" Joseph grins. \"Come on, let's put this place up in flames.\"\n\n\nYou quickly begin pouring the two cannisters of gasoline about the place, making sure to soak everything flammable in a fair bit of gasoline. Once the place is suitably flammable, you light simply light a match, and toss it into the puddle.\n\n\nImmediately and with a roar of heat, the flames quickly begin to run along the gas as flames begin to feast upon the house's old wooden structure. It's not long before this quick burn spreads throughout the place, letting large, powerful flames engulf the old wooden consume the massive building. It's not long before it's completely up in flames, falling in on itself as the great big bonfire spews smoke up at the sky. \n\n\n\"Beautiful sight, isn't it?\" Joseph says. \"That's revolution, that.\"\n\n\n\"If you say so. Let's get out of here, Joseph,\" you say.\n\n\nWith that, you quickly move away from the great big fire, getting back in the truck and racing off into the distance.", "action_results": [{"action": "Days Later...", "result": "A few days later, you're sent on the next part of your quest to promote political change. Now that Sean McGarry's house has been burned down, you've made it known you can get to him. Now, you're to make your threat a bit more clear, to try force him to shift his support in favor of opposing the treaty to help give more of a political edge to the right side of this whole conflict.\n\n\nThe two of you wear long, dark coats and low brimmers as you approach him on the street outside his Mother's house in the city. You both have pistols hidden in your coat, although you doubt you'll use it. You approach the man, noting just how haggard and red-faced he looks. He looks broken, and like he hasn't slept a wink.\n\n\n\"Good evening,\" you nod. \"Mr Sean McGarry, I presume?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Aye,\" the man nods back after a second, before falling silent again, his gaze distant.\n\n\n\"Don't say a word, don't call for help, don't run,\" you say. \"We're from the IRA, and we have two guns aiming straight at your heart.\"\n\n\nSean McGarry doesn't say a word back, perhaps trying not to show fear. You wait a moment for him to respond, before continuing. \n\n\n\"We're very powerful people, McGarry. As I think you understand, we have access to your home life, to you, to your family. And we're not afraid to take things to a darker place than things need to go if you don't do as we ask.\"\n\n\n\"You... you what?\" he asks, seeming to snap to reality, the haze of confusion lifting.\n\n\n\"We're the men who burned your house to the fucking ground. Now, we're more than...!\"\n\n\nSuddenly, Sean McGarry grabs Joseph, slamming him against the wall with remarkable speed. His fingers immediately begin scratching at his eyes as Joseph yelps, taken entirely by surprise.\n\n\n\"Jesus Christ!\" you say, frantically drawing your gun and jamming it against the man's head. \"Get the fuck off him!\" \n\n\nSurprisingly, he doesn't react to the gun, instead swinging at you and knocking you to the ground as you let out a pained grunt. \n\n\n\"You fucking animals! ANIMALS!\" Sean McGarry screams, diving on top of you as he begins to elbow you in the nose, no doubt breaking something as your face is repeatedly smashed. Joseph grabs him, hefting him off you as he immediately turns his rage back to Joseph.\n\n\n\"Fucking hell, we'll kill you if you don't stop! Calm down!\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"I'm going to claw out your fucking heart, you monster!\" Sean McGarry spits, lunging at Joseph again as the two grapple, nearly toppling into the street. \"He was a boy! A fucking boy! He had no part in this, you animals!\"\n\n\nSean McGarry grabs for Joesph's gun, lifting it into the air. He pulls the trigger, as the gun goes off, loudly attracting the attention of anyone who hasn't already been drawn to the fight. No doubt it won't be long before the RIC show up. \n\n\n\"What boy? We didn't touch anyone, we just fucked with a house!\" you say, as the two of you pin Sean McGarry against the wall, tearing the gun from his hands. \n\n\n\"My boy!\" Sean McGarry says, his anger breaking into deep sadness as tears run down his face. \"You killed my boy Emmet! He was only seven, you fucking animals! He had no part in this war!\"\n\n\n\"We didn't do anything!\" Joseph says, keeping him pinned against the wall with his weight.\n\n\n\"His fucking boy! His fucking body was found in the ash, you fucking animals!\" Sean McGarry says. \n\n\nYou pause, going pale as you realize what's happened. You didn't have time to search the whole house. You were just relying on what you were told, that the house was empty. There... Jesus, there was a boy in there.\n\n\n\"We need to go,\" you mutter, not knowing what else to say.\n\n\n\"What... what about him?\" Joseph asks weakly.\n\n\n\"We need to fucking go, Joseph!\" you say, tears filling your eyes. \n\n\nYou grab Joseph's arm, yanking him away as the two of you rush down the street. Sean McGarry doesn't move, sitting in the street and crying. You rush down the streets as quickly as you can, until you're far away from the scene of that incident and you're left completely unable to run any further. You look at Joseph, staring at him with a pit growing in your stomach.\n\n\n\"What... what did we do, Joseph?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"We couldn't... we didn't know,\" Joseph says meekly. \"We didn't know what...fuck, Christ above forgive us.\"\n\n\n\"We... we need to get out of here,\" you say.\n\n\nIt's a long, dark walk back to the farm. You don't say another word the entire time, just walking in silence. It's a long, nightmare filled night as you imagine a small blackened body twisting around in flames. \n\n\nYou don't know when the next time you'll be able to sleep will be, but you know it won't be soon.", "action_results": [{"action": "Months Pass...", "result": "The next few months are a dark, miserable time. Ever since the Sean McGarry incident, you and Joseph are both noticeably darker. You contribute less to the cause, spending large amounts of time at home in the fields. There, in the fields, you can work for hours on end, focusing on nothing but work. You don't have to picture children burning alive in fires just out of your view. No, you don't have to deal with that until night falls.\n\n\nBy April 1923, the fight for independence has worsened considerably for your side. More and more IRA soldiers are captured, with over 12,000 imprisoned at this point in the war. Ernie O'Malley, the man who trained the old IRA unit in the fight against the British, is shot twenty times, before being captured. Impressively, he manages to survive. The IRA forces are desperate for peace, hoping they'll simply survive as it becomes clear there's little chance of success. Frank Aiken, who you know quite well at this point, is elected to the Chief of Staff of the Irish Republican Army, becoming the anti-Treaty commander. He's nearly captured, with the Quinn brothers, his lieutenants who you talked to briefly, being killed or captured. Frank Aiken manages to escape, although little more than a week later he calls a cease fire in an attempt to minimize the death and destruction from his new position.\n\n\nThe month after has little fighting, mostly just waiting, as you patiently wonder what's to happen. Due to the fractured nature of the IRA, many continue fighting despite the ceasefire, although the violence is hugely decreased. Then, Frank Aiken gives the order. \"Dump arms, and return home\". It's that simple. Toss your rifle aside and go home, and the war is over. Eamon DeValera supports this move, sending out the following message: \"Further sacrifice on your part would now be in vain and the continuance of the struggle in arms unwise in the national interest. Military victory must be allowed to rest for the moment with those who have destroyed the Republic\". It's a spiteful message, sure, but an order of surrender. \n\n\nIt isn't a major battle that ends the war, not a decisive victory or some great battle. No, it's a bunch of old friends growing tired of shedding each other's blood, or killing civilians, or executing prisoners. Instead, it's a few words, and a desperate plea for an end to the fighting. \n\n\nThe night of the 24th of May, you're staying in an IRA safe-house with the rest of your unit as you wait for word, preparing to attack if the Free State break the cease fire. \n\n\nWhen you get the order, there's a mixed response. Some cheer. Some swear. Joseph, however, doesn't say a word. He nods grimly, and heads to his bed. There's a few words of complaint, but most of the men are tired of the killing. There's rumors that a few of them are going to mutiny, to refuse the orders and continue the fight. You... you don't know anymore. You've given up so much for this war. Done so much. You wonder, can you abandon the cause after all this?", "action_results": [{"action": "Surrender with Frank Aiken and the rest of the IRA", "result": "You can. You must. You don't have a choice, when it comes to it. You can't keep fighting. The spirit inside you is broken. Now, you just want peace.\n\n\nThe next morning, you awaken to find a few men have mutinied and left during the night, but you don't care. They'll be caught quickly. It was a struggle finding safe houses in the war against the British. In the treaty war, it was almost impossible, as the people wanted peace. Now? There's not a hope these mutineers will last. With the rest of your unit, you march down to the nearest forest, dumping your weapons inside, hidden and out of site. With that, you return home. Ma's elated to see you, but you don't care. You still \n\n\nYou're left sitting on your porch outside, right next to Joseph. You raise a cigarette to your lips, taking a deep breath as you inhale. Joseph leans out next to you, staring as night consumes the country. \n\n\nYou're silent for a long time. Neither of you have words, neither of you know what to say. Eventually, you ask Joseph a simple question.\n\n\n\"What happened, Joseph?\"\n\n\n\"We fought a war. I...\" Joseph says, before pausing. \"We did what we had to.\"\n\n\n\"We didn't have to do any of this. We could've just not fought, sided with the Free State, made peace with the treaty.\"\n\n\n\"We did what we did, then,\" Joseph says, before taking a deep inhale. \"Was it worth it, Michael? Was any of it worth it?\"\n\n\n\"That's not a question for us to answer. History will answer that. Our children will answer that. Us? It's not our place to determine where we sat in history. Who knows, maybe they'll sing songs about us.\"\n\n\n\"It better be a song of sorrows. Anything else would be a lie. The war for a republic has ended, and it didn't even end in a Republic,\" Joseph says. \"Only dead fools who didn't deserve to end up that way.\"\n\n\n\"The war's not over, Joseph,\" you say. \"It'll just be fought by politicians now.\"\n\n\n\"That's not war,\" Joseph says. \"War leaves mothers, wives and daughters crying by coffins. War sends young men, young boys, charging into battle. War burns...\"\n\n\nJoseph pauses, the words getting caught in his throat.\n\n\n\"... War burns kids in their sleep. I'm glad the war's over, Michael. I want freedom. I want independence. I want a republic. But I don't want this.\"\n\n\n\"Well then, we'll celebrate peace,\" you say. \"Hopefully, it'll last, and we can look back on this a few years down the line as bad times. That we got through.\"\n\n\n\"Hopefully,\" Joseph smiles weakly. \"Hopefully.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Saoirse", "result": "After the war ends, it seems there's finally a chance at peace. The Free State treats the anti-treaty rebels surprisingly well, and they're released after sometime. Many of these anti-Treaty leaders would rise up in politics as leaders of the nation, such as E\u00e1mon DeValera, President and Taoiseach, Sean Lemass, Taoiseach, and even the son of a man executed in the civil war, Erskine H. Childers, who would go on to be president. His father, Robert Erskine Childers, ran guns for the very first Volunteers, and was executed for holding arms in the civil war. \n\n\nAfter the war, you begin to rebuild the newfound nation. Two political parties rise up from Sinn F\u00e9in, known as Fianna Fail and Fianna Gael, the former made up of anti-Treaty politicians, the latter pro-Treaty politicians. These parties are joined by Sinn F\u00e9in, which becomes a more old-fashioned party focused mainly on the joining of Northern Ireland to the Republic, but of course, more parties rise up, such as Labour, the Green Party, Social Democrats and many more. \n\n\nHowever, it's not long before Fianna Fail is voted in, with Eamon DeValera taking power. The Statute of Westminster is signed, which gives Ireland substantial power in the United Kingdom. Through political maneuvering, the power of the British over the Free State is diminished, until the statute is used to overturn the Anglo-Irish Treaty, and Ireland succeeds from the UK, becoming the Republic of Ireland. It's a joyous day, but you can't help but feel sorry you waged a war that got heroes like Michael Collins killed, before you would later celebrate the method to gain freedom like Collins had suggested. \n\n\nAs a free, independent nation, Ireland prospers. It advances quickly thanks to the prosperous economic policies of Taoiseach Sean Lemass, who had fought with the rebels in the Treaty War. The county slowly begins to end the sectarian conflict that plagued Ireland for generations, while outgrowing the zealous Catholic restrictions that plagued the nation.\n\n\nEventually, time catches up with you, even though, Ireland powers ahead. Your life story is far simpler, after the war. You get married to a girl you went to school with, having a child. Your wife, Fiona, passes, unfortunately, although the relationship was never that... romantic, to say the least. Mary and Arthur help raise them with you, as you become a favorite uncle to their boy, who never learns the unfortunate circumstances of his conception. Joseph helps out as well, of course, but he's busy settling down with his own family, a pair of kids of his own, twins named Rory, after the late Rory O'Connor, and Cathal, after the late Cahthal Brugha. You name your daughter Saoirse, the Irish word for freedom. It seems fitting, after all you struggled for. You settle down to a simple job as a plumber, which may not be the most glorious job, but soon gives you your own business after a fair bit of work.\n\n\nIt's a summer day, as you walk through the seats at a football match, leading your little girl along to see Ireland play France. You can't wait to watch the match, even though Saoirse's far more into it than you. You quickly find your seats, sitting down. You wrap your arms around your daughter, leaning back in your seat as you sigh in satisfaction.\n\n\n\"When's it starting, Dad?\" Saoirse asks.\n\n\n\"When it starts. Be patient,\" you smile back. \"You're too giddy.\"\n\n\n\"I want to see the much.\"\n\n\n\"And you will, it'll be happening right in front of you. Eventually,\" you chuckle.\n\n\nBefore the ceremony begins, you all stand, as the Irish team begin to sing the national anthem and flags are waved. You join in, of course, as does Saoirse and every Irishman in the stadium, at the top of your lungs.\n\n\nYou can't help but feel a swelling of pride. Tears well in your eye as you put your hand over your heart, and sing along with the national anthem. You're not proud of the flag, or the anthem. Well, you are, but that's not what brings tears to your eyes. You didn't fight for a colored flag or a catchy tune. You fought for the little girl by your side, who will be raised as a free citizen in a country that is hers, not to be oppressed because of her race, religion or creed, but instead, to live free as an Irish citizen. \n\n\nThat is why you're proud. That is what freedom truly means.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Mutiny from the IRA and join the remaining rebels", "result": "You decide to mutiny from the IRA. You refuse to surrender, to abandon the Republic of Ireland, especially after all you fought for. You don't tell the others, though, in case they let the Free State known. Instead, you assemble those who are clearly against the truce in secret. Instead, you abscond into the night, looting the rifles and weaponry before they can be dumped. With that, you prepare to leave late at night, before the surrender takes place, ditching out from the safe house you're staying at.\n\n\nYou pause on the way out, as you notice a sleeping Joseph in the downstairs bedroom. Joseph is not among those who wants to continue fighting, instead deciding to surrender with the rest of them. You stare at him for a moment, before letting out a sigh and moving out of the room. \n\n\n\"Let's go,\" Casey, one of the hardcore rebels, says from the doorway. \"We don't have time to stick around.\" \n\n\nYou nod, following them outside the door as you abandon the IRA to continue to wage the unending war for freedom.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Queenstown Attack", "result": "The next few months are spent desperately trying to hide out, protecting your arms and trying to avoid arrest. Now that the central anti-Treaty IRA forces have surrendered, the Free State's law and enforcement has increased to a huge degree, making it far harder to stay hidden, let alone perform attacks. Eventually, however, you manage to secure equipment, and a target. You manage to steal an armored car from a Free State military base via forged credentials, as well as using stockpiled weapons stolen during th remain chunk of the Treaty War, to prepare an attack on the HMS Scythe in Queenstown, formerly Cobh in it's Irish tongue, one of the three Treaty Ports that exists . You plan an assault on the British warship, in hope of sparking a brutal retaliatory attack from them on the Irish populace. This could remotivate the IRA to oppose them, and perhaps even bring the Free State over and create an international issue.\n\n\nYou sit in the drivers seat of the armored car, driving down the back roads of Queenstown towards the famous port that'll be your target. The others in the car are all dedicated warriors of the cause, all brutal fighters who've lost a lot in the war to independence. Casey, the gunner, lost three brothers in the Easter Rising, one a civilian who was just watching the fighting from their home, and lost his pregnant wife to a Black and Tan attack. The two riflemen in the back, the O'Riordan brothers, lost multiple cousins, their father and their sister. It's clear that you're all willing to die for the cause. \n\n\nThe armored car begins coming up on the port, but it's Free State details mean it's not stopped or doesn't cause any suspicion. You soon make out the HMS Scythe, a large Destroyer that sits docked to the port. Most of the crew is up top with civilian dock workers, making preparation for launch. You drive up to them, getting the widest range of fire. Then, you stop and the gun slowly turns to aim. There's a brief pause, before it begins.\n\n\nThe burst of machine gun fire begins from the top, a thunderous roar as the gun's maw fires streams of lead to cut down the British enemy and their collaborators who betrayed the nation. You watch, as they're hurriedly \n\n\nFor a brief moment, adrenaline floods through you, as you watch the sailors are gunned down on mass. \n\n\nYou pause, however, as you realize what's actually going on, staring out at who you're shooting at. Not British soldiers occupying Irish villages, but simple sailors in the British Navy returning home, mainly, who are unprepared for the attack, thinking their days of fighting were over. Civilians, who just happen to be at the dock, who the gunner appears to be firing at indiscriminately. \n\n\nYou're massacring civilians, not waging war. This isn't justice, this is hatred. This isn't an attempt to gain independence, but an attempt to shed blood.\n\n\nThe enemy, those with guns, begin returning with heavy fire. \n\n\nYou slow down the armored car, as bullets thud off it. You let out a sigh, swinging open the door, and giving the soldiers outside a clear shot at you. \n\n\nYou'd like to have thought you were dying as a martyr, but you died as a villain.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Transfer to a Dublin Prison", "result": "You decide to go to a Dublin prison. Although it's a dark, conflict-filled place in Dublin. You get to see Mary and Ma, but only for very short visits. The treatment of the guards worsens as the conflict gets bloodier and more brutal with every single day. At first, they see you as allies who are in a serious internal dispute. As time passes, they begin seeing you as the enemy, supporters of the terrorists who are disrupting their new government, who are killing their comrades and destroying everything they've tried so hard to build. \n\n\nTime passes, and you hear very little from the outside world. You get to talk to Ma and Mary a little, but it's far less then you'd like. Once again, you're usually just stuck in your cell, reading and wasting time. You're just left by the government in your cell, forgotten about and abandoned. Time slowly passes, and you're left waiting for the end.", "action_results": [{"action": "A dark cell and a rifle", "result": "It's a dark, winter day when you're dragged out of your cell. A group of Free State soldiers, some in uniform, some in plain\n\n\n\"Get him!\" someone yells.\n\n\nYou swing your fist, knocking someone back before a hand grabs your wrist, twisting it behind your back. A blindfold is quickly dragged over your eyes, as you're led through the hallways. This isn't a transfer. This is something else.\n\n\nYou've heard tales of Free State soldiers executing prisoners of war to avenge their fallen comrades, but they're always mysterious, and there's little evidence. Ultimately, the fate's of those killed go unknown. Now, you suppose, your fate will be unknown to the world just as well.\n\n\n\"This is illegal! I'm a prisoner of war. For god's sake, this is an atrocity!\"\n\n\n\"You're not a soldier, you're a terrorist! Soldiers don't burn kids alive in their homes because their parents are politicians, like Sean McGarry's boy.\"\n\n\nYou don't know what they're talking about, but it's not unlikely that some cruel bastard on your side did something to a kid. Monsters exist on every side of a war. You're dragged through the hallways, unable to see where you're going or resist the pack of soldiers around you. You want to protest, to yell, to fight, but you know it's useless, as you're dragged to a dark wall outside, and forced to kneel.\n\n\nThe cold barrel of a rifle is pressed against the back of your head, as you take a deep breath. Then, they fire.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Escort the anti-Treaty leaders to freedom", "result": "You quickly volunteer to escort the leaders out. You join up with them, as you drop your weapons aside, donning caps and coats and changing out of your clothes. You quickly head out, looking like civilians as you move through the abandoned, war-torn buildings, before quickly moving to one of the smaller barricades that's been put up to stop you escaping. Here, under the falling sun, a small group of four soldiers wait for you, guns and rifles drawn.\n\n\nYou walk towards them, hesitant given how easily they could gun you down and secure their victory in the battle and the greater war to come. Surprisingly, however, they don't even try.\n\n\n\"You've started a war, Se\u00e1n,\" one of them says, moving the barricade to allow you to walk past.\n\n\n\"I'm aware,\" Se\u00e1n Lemass says. \"Hopefully, it can be for the greater good. I appreciate this. I'd hate to be shot as an example. Now, let's get out of here.\"\n\n\nWith that, Free State soldiers allow you to escape, perhaps showing you're not enemies, even after what's just happened. Hell, you've been through a lot more in the war with the British.\n\n\nYou quickly hurry out of the city and out into the farmlands, escaping the endless trouble that the city brings and heading out to meet up at a nearby safe house from some anti-Treaty friends. You split up, returning home after finding Joseph among the survivors, thankfully, quickly heading home to lie low.", "action_results": [{"action": "A trip to Dundalk", "result": "A great deal of time moving between safe houses in the country side, trying to avoid capture at the hands of the more numerous, better-supported Free State. You launch a few ambushes, but it's painful to kill your fellow countrymen, and the fighting is relatively sparse compared to what it could be. After some time, it becomes clear you're lacking in both weapons and men. Fortunately, you and Joseph are sent to to County Louth to remedy that solution, and to assist in the operations of the IRA there. Dundalk is the home of a large Free State barracks and prison. There's a large stockpile of guns, as well as hundreds of IRA prisoners being held there for opposing that bloody Treaty through the only way they know how. It's almost too ideal a target, and should solve both of your biggest issues.\n\n\nDue to your experience, you're appointed as the lieutenant of the anti-Treaty IRA commander by the name of Frank Aiken, a well-known and daring commander who has fought well, especially for someone so unsure of his position on the treaty. Well, co-lieutenant, more accurately, given how Joseph's also been given the role. The two of you really are tied at the hip. You quickly meet the man, a young, serious man with a Charlie Chaplain-esque toothbrush mustache. You end up in his car, driving along the road towards Dundalk to regroup with the main force of soldiers, ready to do what needs to be done.\n\n\n\"The plan is simple, gentlemen,\" Frank Aiken says. \"We've secured a pair of old mines and rigged them up. We're going to use those to blast our way into the barracks, and get to work securing the arms and prisoners. Through that, we'll gain a much larger force and the entire town will be Dundalk.\" \n\n\nYou arrive at a large grouping of soldiers, just at a small farmhouse on the edge of Dundalk. The group assembles into formation, and you and Joseph are among the first intruders in, planting a pair of old captured mines on the barracks wall so you can break in, quickly heading to capture the prisoners and arms. \n\n\nAfter a short journey of frog-marching through the hills, you reach the barracks, and escort your soldiers ahead as you quickly ahead before any sentries catch you. You quickly hurry ahead with your squad, ready to plant the mine, as you decide how to do it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay close to the barracks and move in quickly, taking the enemy by surprise", "result": "You press up against the wall, staying a few meters back and behind the wall, as the rest of your squad joins you. The poor lad who drew the shortest straw moves up to the mine, setting off its timer as he rushes back to you guys, diving into cover.\n\n\nThere's a brief moment of waiting as you patiently wonder how long the timer's set for. God knows the Free State boys would actually get a bit of training in explo...\n\n\nThe explosion tears through the air with a roaring boom, as chunks of steel and mortar tear through the air. A huge piece of concrete tears through the wall, smashing into you and the men behind it with tremendous force. You're sent flying through the air as the flying chunks of debris hammer into you, killing you instantly.\n\n\nPerhaps it's better to stay a few steps more back from the mine of unknown strength in future.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stay back, and move in to sweep up resistance after the explosion", "result": "You order your squad a reasonable distance back from the bunker, definitely enough to escape the blast, and get down low to avoid any potential flying shrapnel. The poor lad who drew the shortest straw moves up to the mine, setting off its timer as he rushes back to you guys, diving into cover.\n\n\nThere's a brief moment of waiting as you patiently wonder how long the timer's set for. God knows the Free State boys would actually get a bit of training in explo...\n\n\nThe explosion tears through the air with a roaring boom, as chunks of steel and mortar tear through the air. A few pieces fly overhead, but thankfully you're far enough away to escape all but a few tiny bits flying right past, coming no where near you. You quickly order your soldiers to surge forward, rushing ahead as you break into the barracks. A massive hole in the wall allows you to quickly charge in, as an investigatory force of Free State soldiers frantically rushes in the other side. You pause, holding your fire as you recognize one of their faces, and are left staring at the blond, capped head of Fionn, your close friend and commander. He pauses as he recognizes you, and without the command to fire, the other soldiers hold back.\n\n\n\"Fionn! What the fuck are you doing here?!\" Joseph shouts, raising his rifle.\n\n\n\"Stay back, Joseph! I'm serving my country, unlike you traitors!\" Fionn growls. \"Hands in the air! I'm taking you prisoner!\"\n\n\n\"You're outnumbered,\" you point out.\n\n\nFionn sneers at you, staring down the iron sights, as it becomes clear he isn't exactly willing to listen to reason.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open fire", "result": "You pull your rifle, your gun kicking in your hands as the rifle fires. The bullet explodes in Fionn's chest, as blood sprays onto the floor and he topples to the ground unceremoniously, dead within a second. The other Free State soldiers are quickly gunned down by the other member of the squad, and you're left standing there, eyes narrowing on Fionn's body.\n\n\n\"Fuck! FUCK!\" you say, rushing over to Fionn, grabbing his head as blood pools out and soaks into his pale blonde hair. \"Bollocks, it wasn't supposed to go down like this!\"\n\n\nThe next group of IRA soldiers surges into the building, to push forward with you to capture the barracks.\n\n\n\"Any wounded?\" one of them asks.\n\n\n\"No casualties. Push on and take this shit-hole,\" you say, lifting your heavy rifle into the air and marching forward.\n\n\nWith the element of surprise and numbers, the barracks is quickly taken over. Over 400 rifles are taken, with 240 Republican prisoners being released. Quickly, you move patrols out, taking the town and routing the Free State soldiers from it. Most are captured or escape off into the hills, with only a few kills. Perhaps it's because your troops are far more hesitant to shoot fellow Irishmen than they are British occupiers.\n\n\nQuickly, however, the next wave of Free State soldiers soon arrive and prepare a counter-attack to take back the town. Quickly, Frank Aiken assembles you and a few other high-ranking IRA soldiers whose opinions he trusts.\n\n\n\"We have a problem,\" Frank Aiken says. \"The Br...\"\n\n\nFrank Aiken pauses, almost forgetting himself. For many of you, Aiken included, it's been a hard transition to go from fighting British soldiers to former friends and comrades.\n\n\n\"The Free State have arrived in force. They're going to attempt to push us out of the city, and we need to decide how we're going to react before they organize and attack. I need opinions. I've been considering a truce with them, to allow us to retreat with our captured weapons and freed comrade in exchange for the release of the men we captured. It seems like the most peaceful way this can end.\"\n\n\n\"That's too weak. We need to hit them hard, before they have a chance to properly organize. We can strike a hard blow, and push them back with ease,\" one of the soldiers says.\n\n\n\"No, we should hold down. We have the arms, we have the men, and we'll have the defensive advantage,\" a particularly qualified soldier named Sean F. Quinn says.\n\n\n\"And what do the McCarthy twins think? Joseph?\"\n\n\n\"We're not twins,\" Joseph says, as if disliking that notion. \"I don't make decisions. That's more of Michael's job. I just shoot guns and take over when we get into the kick of it.\"\n\n\n\"Well, then, Michael? What's your opinion on the matter?\"", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Organize a truce to retreat with the liberated prisoners and captured arms", "result": "\"We organize a truce, like you said. That seems like the best way forward. If we've freed the prisoners and taken the arms, we've done all this mission had to accomplish. If we can end it without any further bloodshed, that's even better.\"\n\n\n\"So then, if the majority of us support that, it seems like a reasonable decision. Joseph, do you stand by your brother's opinion?\"\n\n\nJoseph nods.\n\n\n\"Well then, we're decided. We try organize the troops. Meanwhile, prepare for a defense in case they refuse our terms.\"\n\n\nYou quickly assemble the troops, preparing them for a defense, while Frank Aiken sends out an unarmed messenger to offer terms to the Free State. The terms are simple: the IRA forces be allowed to retreat with the prisoners captured and the arms taken, in exchange for allowing the Free State to retake the town, as well as releasing the Free State prisoners that have been captured in the taking of the town. There's a long, desperate and nerve-wracking wait, as you prepare for the Free State's response. \n\n\nAfter about an hour of waiting, the messenger finally returns. Frank Aiken, you, Joseph and Aiken's other lieutenants assemble around him.\n\n\n\"What did he say?\" Frank Aiken asks.\n\n\n\"They said if they have your word that their men will be released, and that there will be no attempt at sabotaging the town or leaving behind traps for the Free State soldiers who take back the town, then it's agreed, and you can begin evacuating the town.\"\n\n\n\"Perfect,\" Frank Aiken says, a relieved smile flashing across his face. \"Let's begin the evacuation as soon as we can.\"\n\n\nYou begin to organize the transport of the captured arms out of the barracks in a few trucks captured out back, as you organize the released Republican soldiers. You leave the captured Free State soldiers in the cells they once imprisoned your comrades. With that, you begin a slow, nervous evacuation of the town, retreating to the countryside where you can disperse and escape with your captured spoils. As you sit in the passenger seat of a truck laden with captured rifles, you nervously wait, terrified of the Free State going against their word and attacking, which with the element of surprise and the use of artillery, they could easily wipe you out. Thankfully, though they make no such attempt, and you quickly escape out. \n\n\n\"A successful operation,\" Frank Aiken says. \"Thank god for this. Let's get out of here.\"\n\n\n\"Perfect,\" you sigh in relief, as the truck full of arms and released prisoners rolls free of the town.", "action_results": [{"action": "Months Pass...", "result": "Over the next few months, the treaty war gets more and more out of hand, spiraling out of control. It's not long before it becomes clear that the IRA are losing, and the Free State are soon going to triumph.\n\n\nHowever, like every war, there are casualties. Arthur Griffith, overworked and strained from constant stress in keeping the government running smoothly while keeping Britain appeased, dies from heart failure leading to a cerebral hemorrhage. Only ten days later, at B\u00e9al na Bl\u00e1th, Michael Collins is assassinated in an IRA ambush, where he is the only loss.\n\n\nAfter losing two great leaders, the Free State becomes far more draconian in it's work in ending this whole blasted war., including performing executions without trials, larger scale internment and the criminalization of holding any arms whatsoever. This leads to the execution of Erskine Childers, the man who first ran guns for the Irish Volunteers, after he was found with a pistol that he claimed was a gift form Michael Collins. As the war gets more brutal, it becomes clear Ireland as a nation will not last unless this comes to an end soon.\n\n\nIn an attempt to influence the political background here, you've been ordered to head down to the house of adamant pro-Treaty TD Se\u00e1n McGarry. Whilst he's away on business leaving the house unoccupied, you're to set fire to the place and burn it down to the ground, to hopefully scare the TD into ending his support for the treaty. \n\n\nYou drive a small truck down the back road to McGarry's large country house. Like you were told, the place is empty, with no cars out front. You pull over, clambering out of the car to grab the two big cannisters of gasoline in the back.\n\n\n\"Let's get to work, then,\" you say.\n\n\n\"You know,\" Joseph suggests. \"We could rob this place before we burn it down. You know, take out a few valuables. They'd be destroyed anyway...\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"We're professionals,\" you say. \"We should just be burning this place down, not looting like criminals.\"\n\n\n\"No one would know.\"\n\n\n\"Joseph!\"\n\n\n\"Oh, damn it! Seriously?\" he asks. \"God, you're too professional.\"", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Burn it down", "result": "\"Let's just get to work burning this place to the ground,\" you say. \"We do our mission.\"\n\n\n\"If you say so,\" Joseph shrugs glumly. \n\n\n\"Come on, let's put this place up in flames.\"\n\n\nYou quickly begin pouring the two cannisters of gasoline about the place, making sure to soak everything flammable in a fair bit of gasoline. Once the place is suitably flammable, you light simply light a match, and toss it into the puddle.\n\n\nImmediately and with a roar of heat, the flames quickly begin to run along the gas as flames begin to feast upon the house's old wooden structure. It's not long before this quick burn spreads throughout the place, letting large, powerful flames engulf the old wooden consume the massive building. It's not long before it's completely up in flames, falling in on itself as the great big bonfire spews smoke up at the sky. \n\n\n\"Beautiful sight, isn't it?\" Joseph says. \"That's revolution, that.\"\n\n\n\"If you say so. Let's get out of here, Joseph,\" you say.\n\n\nWith that, you quickly move away from the great big fire, getting back in the truck and racing off into the distance.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Call on them to surrender", "result": "\"Fionn! Surrender, goddammit! You're outnumbered and outgunned! Lower your rifle!\" you shout.\n\n\n\"I'm not surrendering to let traitors take these guns and free these criminals!\" Fionn says. \"If you want to get past us, you're going to have to put a bullet in me!\"\n\n\n\"Don't make us, Fionn. If you don't give us a choice, we'll do what needs to be done!\" Joseph growls.\n\n\n\"You have a choice. Surrender to the Irish Free State, and you will be treated well! If you don't surrender, I will kill you!\" Fionn says.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Keep trying to convince Fionn", "result": "\"Fionn, we outnumber you, you're not going to survive!\"\n\n\n\"I said surrender, dammit!\" Fionn says, raising his rifle to aim at your head.\n\n\n\"Fionn, we fought a fucking war together!\"\n\n\n\"Michael, lower your weapon!\"\n\n\n\"You're not going to shoot me!\"\n\n\nFionn fires his rifle, as a bullet explodes through your chest. The bullet splatters through your chest, as you're left standing there, feeling like you've been punched in the chest, blood seeping through your shirt.\n\n\n\"Huh,\" you say\n\n\nFionn lowers his rifle as he realizes what he's just down, as Joseph raises his rifle, firing and killing him instantly. As you collapse onto the ground, blood pouring out your chest as Joseph guns down the other three men who stand there, stunned and shocked. Immediately after, Joseph drops his rifle, moving down to help you, but his voice is already faint and far in the distance, his face dark and blurry. Soon, you're falling backwards into sleep, and you're left with nothing.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Surrender to them", "result": "You drop your rifle, raising your hands high into the air as you stare hesitantly at Fionn.\n\n\n\"OK, fine! We surrender!\"\n\n\n\"What?\" one of the IRA soldiers asks, taken aback.\n\n\n\"We can't fucking surrender!\" Joseph shouts angrily, his gun raised.\n\n\n\"Look, just...! Everybody, lower your rifles so n...!\" you try to formulate words, before the second push of IRA soldiers flood in, and it all goes to hell in a hand basket.\n\n\nThe next wave of IRA soldiers surges into the room behind you, and they're far more eager to break into fighting rather then trying to negotiate. Of course, this leads to the Free State soldiers raising their rifle as they fire back, and you're left stuck in the crossfire. Bullets hammer through you, back and front, as frantic, panicky riflemen fire into the confusing mess in front of them, unsure of what's going on. A bullet quickly finds its way to your skull, busting it open like a nut and sending your brains splattering out onto the floor.", "action_results": []}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Drive forward to draw attention from the machine gunners", "result": "\"Drive forward,\" you order. \"We need to draw attention from the machine gunners!\" \n\n\nThe Mutineer rolls forward, as you continue firing on the Free State soldiers. You do successfully draw the enemies away from the machine gun positions, allowing them to reload. However, it'll take a minute for these untrained gunners to reload the weapons, and that's more than you have. The Free State soldiers rush the armored car from cover, moving in too close for you to be able to hit them with a burst of machine gun fire.\n\n\nYou draw your pistol, attempting to take them out with some close range fire, before one of them lobs a grenade into the Mutineer through your machine gun position. You let out a terrified scream, having only a moment to react.", "action_results": [{"action": "Toss the grenade out of the Mutineer", "result": "You rush down to the grenade sitting on the floor of the Mutineer, frantically grabbing for it. Unfortunately, it's slipped between a pair of seats.\n\n\n\"Fuck, get the grenade, get the grenade!\" you scream, desperately rushing down to grab the grenade.\n\n\nYou reach down, your fingers slipping around the grenade. Your sweaty fingers take a moment to grab hold, but you do, pulling it up with a mighty tug. However, just as you raise it into the air to fling it out, it goes off, showering you with shrapnel as the burning hot metal slices you apart and killing you instantly.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Ditch the Mutineer and get out", "result": "With a scream, you frantically hurry to clamber out of the armored car, just managing to roll off the roof of the car as the Mutineer is destroyed behind you. You hit the mud with a soft thump, as you frantically rise up to your feet.\n\n\n\"Hands in the air!\" a voice cries from besides you. \n\n\nYou look up at the Irish Free State soldiers who are now swarmed around you, staring down as they shift their rifles to aim at you. Unfortunately, you've found yourself armed with only a pistol, surrounded by the very men who just swarmed the Mutineer. As your pistol feels heavy in your holster, you quickly decide what to do.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Open fire", "result": "You raise your pistol, opening fire at the men around you. You fire a burst of lead into the chest of the nearest soldier, knocking him off his feet as he collapses into the gutter. You twist around, continuing to fire, before a burst of bullets is shot straight through your chest as your lungs are blown to ribbons. You try to let out a desperate scream, but instead it's a weak, wet squelch as you find yourself incapable of making any sound besides the wet dribbling of your blood as it runs down your chest.\n\n\nAs your life is blown from your chest, you're left stumbling backwards as you gently bump into the armored car, before sliding down it with a wet, red smear, your vision going dark and blurry. With that, your head rolls to the side. ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Take up a machine gun position", "result": "You rush over to a machine gun, grabbing it and crouching behind it. You quickly make sure it's loaded, and although it takes you a few moments to make sure everything's in order, once you do, you quickly take up your position. You wait patiently, sweat running down your nervous hands as you continuously wipe the gun dry, as if your sweat will some how magically prevent the gun from working. \n\n\nHowever, the Free State soldiers don't attack. You're left standing there, wondering why for quite some time, before you hear the distant booms of cannons... followed by far closer booms as the shells land around you in a burst of explosions.\n\n\n\"Artillery!\" you scream, as a shell lands next to you, sending you flying through the air.\n\n\nYou smack into the hard ground, rolling along the ground. You let out a pained groan, but you're in one piece, and you don't even seem to be bleeding despite all the shrapnel sprayed everywhere. It must be some blessed miracle, but you're alive. You hurry to your feet, as you begin rushing forward with a stumble. You scramble for your machine gun, but the shells continue in another barrage. With the next barrage, another shell lands directly on top of you.\n\n\nThere's not a second miracle. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Hold the Eastern Wing", "result": "You move out to the Eastern Wing, taking up a defensive position in one of the hallways alongside a disorganized group of IRA soldiers who have set up positions. You join them, taking cover behind a long corridor, leaning against one of the fancy pillars that'd been put in there. You load your rifle, patiently waiting for the enemy as sweat runs down your hands and down the barrel of your gun. You wait for several minutes before you hear the first volley of gunshots as the Free State soldiers push in.\n\n\nYou move out, dropping to a knee as you open fire, hitting the first soldier to enter in the leg and blasting him off his feet. The tight hallways force the Free State soldiers to push up in lines of two, meaning you have a distinct advantage over them. It should've been the ideal position to hold off the larger Free State forces. Unfortunately, it seems that your plan has failed based on one flaw, in forgetting what equipment the Free State has in its arsenal. \n\n\nGrenades.\n\n\nA dozen grenades are chucked down the hallway in quick succession, bouncing off the tiled floors as the heavy metal grenades roll in. You yelp, ducking into cover as the IRA soldiers quickly dive into cover, the grenades exploding behind you. Unfortunately, in the immediate aftermath as the smoke fills the hallways, the Free State soldiers quickly push in, spreading out to give them the advantage of overwhelming firepower and numbers to crush your forces.\n\n\n\"Hold the line! Hold the line!\" the IRA commander cries. \n\n\nThe Free State soldiers begin pushing through, your defensive position lost as you're left to be quickly overwhelmed. One of the soldiers heads off to route up reinforcements to help you hold the building, although you're sure he's just far more eager to get away from this massacre. You're left desperately firing your gun at the surging forward group, wondering what to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hold the line and wait for reinforcements", "result": "You hold the line, staying in your position of cover as you take potshots at the Free State soldiers. However, you're outnumbered and outgunned, and the Free State soldiers know how to take advantage of that. Bullets smack into the stone wall you've taken cover behind, and you desperately attempt to switch between crouching into cover and trying to find some way to escape. Bullets thump into the ground around you, as you stay crouched.\n\n\nYou flick out of cover, firing your rifle as you manage to snag a Free State soldier in the thigh, knocking him to the ground and taking one soldier out of the fight. However, the Free State soldiers respond in kind, as bullets thump into your chest.\n\n\nThe bullets burst through your chest, knocking you backwards in a moment. You're killed instantly, and the Free State soldiers push on without regard, as the Eastern Wing falls.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Fall back", "result": "You turn, moving from cover to cover as you fall back from your position, realizing the Eastern Wing is soon to fall. However, the Eastern Wing commander seems to have issue with this.\n\n\n\"You there! Soldier! Why are you deserting your post?!\" he asks angrily.\n\n\n\"I'm falling back! We're about to be overwhelmed!\" you say.\n\n\n\"There's been no order to retreat! This is treason, and I will not allow it.\"\n\n\n\"Goddamn, they're right behind me, we need to get out of here!\"\n\n\n\"We're to hold out here as long as we can!\"\n\n\n\"We don't have time to ar...!\"\n\n\nYou literally don't, as a pair of Free State soldiers round the corner, rushing through the building. You draw your gun, turning to open fire as the pair of rifles fire, both shots blasting you through the chest. The other soldier falls to the ground as he's shot in the stomach, collapsing to the ground. You let out a gurgled scream, but the blood's already filled your lungs and is vomiting down your throat. You struggle desperately as you drown in your blood, grasping for your gun, before your body goes cold and still.", "action_results": []}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Push forward and attack", "result": "\"Keep firing!\" you bark.\n\n\nThe two groups continuing firing. You watch as an IRA soldier takes a hit in the chest, dropping to the ground. Another man goes to help him, before a round hits him in the chest. You swear, realizing you're taking heavier losses than the mission planned for. You move forward, opening fire at you blow a hole in the stomach of a soldier, who collapses to the ground. After a few minutes, the gunfight is coming to an end, with the British soldiers nearly eliminated. You continue opening fire, killing the last few of the enemies as they drop to the ground.\n\n\nYour forces quickly move forward, taking the trucks. You check your casualties, and they aren't ideal. You've lost four men, with two wounded. Even though you managed to secure the arms, you took quite a few casualties. At this rate, you're losing far more men than you're recruiting to keep this war against the British going. You've escaped the brutal ambush with not a single soldier lost, although you failed to secure the weapons. As recruits and numbers run low, you don't know how long you'll be able to last.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Keep trying to get the truck to stop", "result": "You continue waving down at the truck, keeping calm and giving them a charming smile. You wave them down, indicating for them to slow down.\n\n\n\"Fucking Christ, this isn't going to work,\" Joseph mutters.\n\n\nThe driver slows down, before he no doubt notices the blood patches on your face, given his widening eyes and the yell of warning he shouts out. He draws his sidearm, slamming down on the accelerator as he raises his gun.\n\n\nImmediately, you raise your fist, as the IRA soldiers rise, opening fire in a reign of bullets. Unfortunately, the driver is faster, leaning out the window as he aims his pistol at you. He pulls the trigger repeatedly as three bullets slam into your chest, knocking you off your feet. You collapse to the ground, staring up as the driver is shot in the head. Joseph grabs you, yanking you behind the barricade.\n\n\n\"Fuck's sake, Michael, I told you!\" he says, putting pressure on the wound as blood pours out through your chest, coating his hands in blood.\n\n\n\"Don't make that the last thing I hear,\" you mutter, before coughing up blood onto his chest.\n\n\n\"You're not dying here, Michael. Don't worry, don't worry, you'll be fine,\" he repeatedly says.\n\n\nThankfully, even though the gunfire explodes around you, your focus in on Joseph's reassuring voice. The blood pours out onto the ground, pooling around you, as your life is drained from you. ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Attempt to force a surrender", "result": "\"We force a surrender,\" you say. \"No need to kill them when we can just as easily capture them. Liam, Ronan, move to the left flank. Conor, Edward, right flank. Give them the idea that they're surrounded.\"\n\n\nThe other two forces begin moving off to the flanks slowly, before you give the signal to push up. As you edge closer, you finally hold up a fist, before rising so you, and more importantly, your rifle, are more visible.\n\n\n\"Hands in the air!\" you order with a barking shout. \"You're outnumbered and outgunned!\"\n\n\nThe first soldier frantically tries to draw his rifle, but instead, drops it by accident. The second pauses, before slowly lowering his rifle, tossing it to the ground as he holds up his hands.\n\n\n\"We surrender! Don't shoot!\" one of the soldiers says.\n\n\nThe other one raises his hands, although more sternly, a look of anger on his face. \n\n\n\"Keep your guns aimed at them,\" you say. \"Joseph and I will retrieve their rifles.\"\n\n\nYou begin moving down to the road, rifles raised to make sure the soldiers don't try anything. You quickly take their rifles, staring up at them. Joseph begins to tie up the hands of one of them, while you go for the other.\n\n\n\"You are now prisoners of war of the Irish Republic,\" you say. \"For the best you surrendered. We had half a dozen rifles on you.\"\n\n\n\"I've been taken prisoner. I didn't surrender,\" the soldier says, determined.\n\n\n\"It sure seems like you did,\" you say, gesturing to his hands.\n\n\nYou grab his wrist, pulling it behind his back and you begin binding his hands together.\n\n\n\"You can only surrender to a foreign army. There's no army here, only a bunch of traitors to the crown and terrorists.\"\n\n\nYou punch the man in the back of the head, dropping him to his knees.\n\n\n\"Good to know. Well, let's get you out of that uniform.\"\n\n\nYou take the cap form the officer, popping it on your head. You unbutton the man's trousers in an admittedly awkward time, before pulling off his boots. You pull off his trousers, before you finally struggle to take off the jacket, removing his bindings temporarily before you tie him up again. Thankfully, he doesn't try anything, and neither does Joseph's prisoner. \n\n\nYou pull the jacket on, before removing the man's boots and trousers. It's not long before you're fully dressed, as is Joseph. You nod to other three soldiers.\n\n\n\"OK, I'm finished. Take these prisoners out and find somewhere to hide them out of view. Then, leave a man guarding them and have the other two join up with Team 2.\"\n\n\nThe other soldiers nod, pulling the prisoners up and quickly leading them away. You turn to Joseph, who grins at you, looking spiff and span in his pristine uniform.\n\n\n\"How do I look? Charming?\" Joseph smiles.\n\n\n\"Yeah, you look fine. How about mine?\"\n\n\n\"Nah, you look perfect. We should be fine.\"\n\n\nYou stand by the road as the ambush position is set up, as you patiently wait as the rest of the unit dumps the bodies off in a field and sets up the ambush.\n\n\nAfter about an hour, the two weapons transports begin approaching. Two trucks filled with a mixture of soldiers and weaponry. You wait patiently, as the truck begins approaching. You stand by the road, holding up a hand to motion for them to stop.\n\n\n\"They're slowing down,\" Joseph says. \"Thank Christ.\"\n\n\nYou pause, wondering what's going on as a mixture of emotions crosses the front driver's face. The truck stops slowing down, although it doesn't speed up either. You stand straight and continue gesturing, trying to stay calm and casual.\n\n\n\"They might've noticed something,\" Joseph says. \"Stay calm or hit now?\" ", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Keep trying to get the truck to stop", "result": "You continue waving down at the truck, keeping calm and giving them a charming smile. You wave them down, indicating for them to slow down.\n\n\n\"Fucking Christ, this isn't going to work,\" Joseph mutters.\n\n\nThe driver slows down, as he leans out the window, looking at you. \n\n\n\"Evening. we're...!\" \n\n\nImmediately, you raise your fist as soon as the truck stops, right in the center of your ambush point. Immediately, a volley of shots goes off as you dive behind cover with Joseph, the two of you raising your rifles. You open fire, as the two driver's are killed by dozens of bullets. You raise your rifle, joining your gunfire into the massacre. They're quickly surrounded and gunned down, the soldiers barely managing to climb out of their trucks before they're shot and killed. Within a minute of fighting, the battle is over, and you're the victors.\n\n\n\"Alright!\" you shout. \"Push forward, men! Capture the trucks so we can get these arms.\"\n\n\nToday is victory, without a doubt. You've secured a shipment of arms, eliminated a British convoy and even taken a pair of prisoners, even if you'll have to release them due to your mobile nature and lack of actual territory to build prisons for them. These victories will be hard to come by in the long, hard battle ahead, but they're all the more sweet to savor for that. ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Follow DeValera in the attack on the Customs House", "result": "You stand outside the Customs House, standing next to Joseph. Your pistol is heavy in your pocket, as you stare nervously at the Customs House. Inside, all the records and files of the British regime lie, just waiting to be lit up in the flames of freedom. Outside, 120 IRA soldiers, spread out in groups of two or three that are trying appear nonchalant, all wait for the moment to strike. \n\n\nThe slow ticking of your pocket watch grows louder and louder, echoing in your mind as you state at the hands slowly tick towards 1:00 PM. You watch patiently, focused on it. \n\n\n\"Calm down,\" Joseph says. \"You're more tightly wound than the watch.\" \n\n\n\"Shut it,\" you say.\n\n\nSuddenly, a gunshot explodes through the air, as you turn to see the first of the men strolling towards the building, drawing pistols. You nod at Joseph, as the two of you rush towards the building. A tide of IRA soldiers burst through, quickly finding yourself in a huge hall. Tom Ennis, the leader of the attack, walks in, firing his gun into the air.\n\n\n\"Everyone! This building is now under control of the Irish Republican Army. Surrender and you won't be harmed!\" \n\n\nYou quickly begin sweeping your gun around the room, as the staff quickly let out screeches, raising their hands defensively.\n\n\n\"Begin rounding up the staff and lead them to the main hall!\" Tom Ennis yells.\n\n\nYou watch as an old man, a caretaker, no doubt, quickly begins rushing towards the phone, no doubt to call the police. Immediately, a dozen guns are aiming at him.\n\n\n\"Stop, you stupid bugger!\" Joseph yells.\n\n\nThe caretaker keeps rushing off, before the gun fires, and the back of his head explodes. He collapses to the ground, a pool of blood pouring out onto the tiles.\n\n\n\"Dammit,\" Tom Ennis swears loudly. \"Stick to the plan! I want to minimize the loss of civilian life. Let's go, I want want all the staff rounded up and sent to the main hall. Don't let anyone escape and hide, or they'll be killed in the fire.\"\n\n\nTom Ennis quickly begins directing you on your paths, and you're sent to head down the Western Block in order to gather up everyone there, and then to direct them to the Main Hall. The threat of burning to death should help in convincing them.\n\n\n\"Let's go,\" Joseph says, grabbing your arm as he pulls you down a hallway.\n\n\nYou quickly begin to search through the various rooms of the Western Block. You find mostly secretaries, women who can easily be directed back to the Main Hall at the threat of death. Thankfully, the police guard this place is supposed to have is no where to be seen, leaving it wide open. \n\n\nYou rush through the rooms, making short work of them as you direct anyone you find towards the Main Hall at gunpoint. It's short, easy work. However, this begins to change when you get to the last door. Just as you approach it, you hear the clicking, of the hammer of a revolver being drawn back.\n\n\nYou pause as Joseph goes to go in, grabbing his arm. You make a \"Hush\" gesture at him, before making a gun with your hands and gesturing to Joseph. He nods as if he understands, before you slowly creep the door open, just enough to lean inside. You make out a figure, desperately hurrying to gather papers, revolver on the desk next to them. With a mighty kick, you smash the door open, charging inside as you raise your pistol. \n\n\nJust as you aim your gun right between the eyes of the shrieking clerk, you pause, recognizing him.\n\n\nIt's Arthur.\n\n\nFucking Arhur.\n\n\n\"Goddammit,\" you say, slapping the palm of your hand against the side of your head in frustration. \"What are you doing here?!\"\n\n\n\"Me?!\" Arthur says, aghast. \"I work here. What are you doing here?\"\n\n\n\"Burning the place to the fucking ground,\" you say.\n\n\nArthur eyes the revolver, but doesn't go for it. This only serves to frustrate you more.\n\n\n\"Don't go for the gun, Arthur, I need to alive to take care of Mary,\" Joseph says.\n\n\n\"I can't let you destroy my work,\" Arthur says. \"I've worked years upon years of it!\"\n\n\n\"Arthur, this is more important than this,\" you say, lea\n\n\n\"On what?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"On the categorizing of the various connections between Norman and Irish family lines!\" Arthur says, seeming to think that matters to... well, anyone.\n\n\nJesus Christ, maybe Joseph does need help.\n\n\n\"It matters to me!\" Arthur says.\n\n\n\"Oh, fuck off with that, Arthur, it's kindling!\" Joseph sighs.\n\n\n\"This is my life's work! I can't let it be destroyed! Please, just let me escape with it!\" Arthur begs.\n\n\nJoseph flashes a look at you to show his uncertainty.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave Arthur escape", "result": "\"Get out the fucking window,\" you growl. \"I want you to know, you ever treat Mary badly, not only will we kill you, but we'll shit on your stupid fucking research paper.\"\n\n\n\"Thank you,\" Arthur nods, hurrying to the window. \"I won't forget this.\"\n\n\nArthur struggles to lift the heavy window, and for a moment you wonder if you're going to have to help him, before he manages to raise it up. He scampers on through, giving you a final wave before he disappears outside.\n\n\n\"Well, the block is clear, at least,\" you say. \"Let's return to Tom Ennis and the main hall.\"\n\n\nYou quickly rush through the now empty, silent halls again, as the vaguest hit of smoke begins to fill the halls. You reach the hall again, where everyone found is being forced to kneel by the other. You pause, noticing IRA soldiers are taking up defensive positions, while a lorry carrying hay and petrol has arrived, and these are being spread about the Customs House to make it all the more flammable. Tom Ennis turns, looking at you. \n\n\n\"You two, get to work!\" he says. \"We need all hands on deck!\"\n\n\n\"Get to work doing what?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"I don't know,\" Tom Ennis shrugs. \"We need to spread the petrol and hay to successfully burn this place to ash, but we also need guards. So, pick your favorite crime, and get to it.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Arson", "result": "\"Arson, I suppose,\" you say.\n\n\nYou and Joseph quickly grab a pair of cans of petrol, and head back to Wing B, a good as place to start as any. You begin dousing the files you're trying to destroy with petrol, soaking everything in it so that you can make sure all the evidence of this British regime and all their knowledge garnered through the oppression of the Irish people is lost. Finally, when all that is said and done, you strike a match, watching with a smile as the light yellow flame warms your heart and very soul. \n\n\n\"Beautiful,\" you say. \"Let's get back to the main hall.\"\n\n\n.At this point, fire's spread through much of the building, as it gives off a big great plume of smoke. Still, it's easy enough to navigate. As you try to head back to your allies in the main hall, an IRA soldier slams into you. The boy's been rushing the halls blindly, and looks confused.\n\n\nA man rushes through the hallways of the burning building, slamming into you.\n\n\n\"Where's your gun, boy? What are you doing?\" you ask, pushing the man off you.\n\n\n\"We were overrun! We're out of ammo, we need to get out of here while we still can! They're capturing everyone else!\" he says frantically. \n\n\n\"What? We can't have been fighting more than half an hour!\" you say.\n\n\nThe man shrugs, before pushing past you and rushing off. You quickly begin planning your escape. The plan involved an escape route, guarded by IRA soldiers from which to evacuate after the fires were set. On the other hand, you could escape out the back, where the smoke is being blown, which might provide you with some cover to escape this place.", "action_results": [{"action": "Escape out though the smoke", "result": "\"Let's go!\" you say to Joseph. \"Out through the smoke, it'll let us escape.\"\n\n\nJoseph nods, and the two of you rush towards the back of the building, rushing through the hallways as there's a frantic attempt to retreat. You hurry out to where smoke floods through the room, bursting out into the smoke as you rush out, staying low as you cough and splutter, smoke entering your lungs. Your eyes begin to water as you struggle to breath. You quickly move through the the smoke as it grants you cover, letting you escape out into the surrounding city.\n\n\nThis gives you the opportunity to quickly escape down off towards the other buildings around you, retreating to the alley of a building. You rush through it, looking briefly back at the burning Common House behind you, as it's set up in flames.\n\n\n\"Let's get out of here,\" Joseph says, grabbing your shoulder.\n\n\nYou nod with determination, before heading off to get the hell out of there.", "action_results": [{"action": "Retreat home", "result": "You and Joseph retreat home, managing to avoid the auxiliaries and soldiers that are combing the area, and reaching the safety of your home. You're one of the lucky ones. Although you managed to set the building alight, and it does burn for hive whole days as it's consumed, your losses are intense. Not a single British soldier or police officer is killed, while five IRA are killed. However, a shocking 80 men are captured when they run out of ammo, and are unable to continue fighting. Commander Tom Ennis managed to escape, but took two bullets to the leg. However with all you've lost, who knows how you'll be able to continue.\n\n\nThanks to that loss, you have no idea how you're going to survive thanks to that. It's going to be a struggle to keep the fight going. All you can do is fight on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Weeks Pass...", "result": "Over the following weeks, you continue trying to reorganize, but you're under-supplied, low on troops and struggling to continue fighting. After the disaster at the burning of the Custom House, you don't know how high your chances at survival are. It's going to be a serious struggle to continue the fight.\n\n\nAll you can do is continue fighting. You promise yourself you won't break until the Irish flag flies free and proud.\n\n\nIt's May 11th, and you're at Fionn's house with an assortment of local leaders and lieutenants. The fighting has taken a small break, and you're looking to the future. The war needs to change, and you need to start doing something serious, to hurt the British where it'll do some damage.\n\n\nRory O'Connor stands in the center, looking over a large map. You all stand around him, listening to him talk.\n\n\n\"We need to do some serious damage, and hurt them where it'll matter. Their pockets. We're going to send soldiers over to England, to show them that the war will hurt them just as much as us. We're going to hit economic targets, like the Liverpool docks, and bomb the ever loving shit out of them!\"\n\n\n\"Irishmen will stick out like a sore thumb over there,\" Fionn says.\n\n\n\"There's many of us over there, economic migrants and dock workers and that. Plus, it'll be easier to evade capture seeing as they're not under martial rule. They want to put their whole country under martial rule, then we're golden, because that just convinces the whole of Britain that this war isn't worth f...!\"\n\n\nA young man bursts through the door, panting as he nearly collapses on the table in exhaustion.\n\n\n\"Damn, catch your breath, boy,\" Rory O'Connor says, standing back. \"What's wrong?\"\n\n\nThe boy looks up at him, explaining between breaths.\n\n\n\"There's a... truce! The war... it's over!\"\n\n\n\"A truce?\" Tom Ennis asks.\n\n\n\"Eamon DeValera and the other D\u00e1il politicians have organized a truce.\"\n\n\nThere's a murmur of discussions breaking out from among the group.\n\n\n\"Thank god,\" Joseph says to you. \"We could use a break from the fighting. This'll give us a chance to regroup, recruit and rearm in preparation for the war to start up again.\"\n\n\n\"What makes you so sure the war isn't over?\" you ask him.\n\n\n\"The British won't give us what we want. We haven't pushed them far enough,\" Joseph says. \"This won't be the end, I'm sure.\"\n\n\n\"I hope you're wrong, Joseph. I hope you're wrong.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Escape out through the planned escape route", "result": "\"We stick to the plan!\" you order, as you quickly hurry to lead your brother towards the escape route,.\n\n\nIt's not long before you manage to find the escape path and stumble out of it, thankfully. Or, perhaps a stroke of bad luck, given the group of armed auxiliaries waiting patiently outside it. You nearly run into them to escape the flames, and they're waiting for you, crouched behind cover as you emerge, spluttering and coughing.\n\n\n\"Shit!\" you swear loudly, raising your pistol.\n\n\nThe rifles fire, and you slump back against the wall, blood dripping down your chest as your head rolls to the side, and your life slowly drains out from you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Murder", "result": "\"Let's join the defense, then,\" you say, half to Joseph, half to yourself.\n\n\nYour brother nods, and you rush out towards the front of the Customs House, where the British force of Auxiliaries are trying to break through to overwhelm your forces. You move out the front door, as rifle fire bursts out, bullets flying at you. Hopefully, you won't have to get one as well. You rush behind a column, staring at the other IRA soldiers around you.\n\n\n\"What's going on here?\" you yell, asking.\n\n\n\"We're low on ammo, and we're being overwhelmed. Their weapons are longer ranged with rifles!\" one of the IRA soldiers yells. \"All we can do is hold out here and defend the evacuation!\"\n\n\nYou join the line of defense, occasionally opening fire at the approaching forces of Auxiliaries that are attempting to push forward and break through. However, it's barely ten minutes before people start running out of ammo, and your forces begin getting far more desperate in trying to push off the enemy. It's clear that the defense isn't going to last much longer.\n\n\n\"Fuck! They're going to overwhelm us soon!\" Joseph says. \"We don't have rifles, we're low on ammo, and we're not going to last long. What do we do?\"\n\n\n\"I don't know! The mission's complete, maybe it's time to retreat,\" you say.", "action_results": [{"action": "Flee from the chaos", "result": "\"Let's go!\" you say to Joseph.\n\n\nThe two of you quickly let out a burst of fire, before you burst out from the columns, sprinting along them. You rush out towards the flank, where there's few Auxiliaries. You rush along the ground, hurrying along with Joseph and a few other men. The Auxiliaries, thinking you're charging them, seem to retreat temporarily, panicked as they misunderstand the situation, giving you a path to escape to the surrounding buildings of the city. This gives you the opportunity to quickly escape down off towards the other buildings around you, retreating to the alley of a building. You rush through it, looking briefly back at the burning Common House behind you, as it's set up in flames.\n\n\n\"Let's get out of here,\" Joseph says, grabbing your shoulder.\n\n\nYou nod with determination, before heading off to hide and get home.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Secure the line and defend your position", "result": "You raise your pistol, opening fire at the advancing Auxiliaries. Their rifle fire, bursting out in an exchange of bullets, as you stay in cover, firing back at the advancing Auxiliaries in an attempt to hold them back. You manage to stop them from rushing up to push into the Customs House, although this situation clearly won't last as you're low on ammo.\n\n\nIt's not long before the IRA soldiers around you begin running out of ammo. There's been little more than half an hour of gunfire, and you're not able to keep fighting. You crouch behind a pillar outside the Common House, staring at Joseph.\n\n\n\"I'm nearly out,\" you tell him.\n\n\n\"I'm gone,\" Joseph says. \"We need to make a runner. If we surrender, we'll be executed.\"\n\n\n\"On three?\" you ask, as Joseph nods, determined.\n\n\n\"One, two...!\"\n\n\nYou burst out from cover, sprinting along the columns as you hurry to escape the fire. Rifles explode in the distance, bullets bouncing around you. Suddenly, a bullet slams into your side, knocking you to the ground with a pained yell.\n\n\n\"Get the fuck...!\" Joseph screams, grabbing you. \n\n\nJoseph's head snaps back as he's hit in the head. You let out a pained, traumatized scream, grabbing Joseph as he collapses to the ground. You wrap your arms around him, your blow flowing into his, as you hug him tightly. Then, rifle fire ends your suffering.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Stop Arthur from escaping", "result": "\"Arthur, stay there!\" you say. \"We're not letting you escape. Our job is to destroy these records, and we're going to complete our job!\"\n\n\n\"You bastards!\" Arthur says. \"I won't let you force me out of here!\"\n\n\nArthur's gaze flashes at the revolver, as you shake your head slowly.\n\n\n\"Don't reach for that gun, Arthur. We will shoot you in the head,\" you say.\n\n\nArthur slowly steps to the left, inching towards the gun.\n\n\n\"Arthur...\" you warn.\n\n\nArthur frantically leaps for the gun, wrapping his fingers around it. You go to scream another warning, but it's drowned out by the shot of Joseph's gun firing. Arthur's head snaps back as it explodes against the wall, as you let out a scream.\n\n\n\"What the fuck, Joseph?!\" you yell, rushing over to Arthur.\n\n\nThe limp, heavily bleeding man now lies broken on the ground, his eyes rolled back in his head as the brains that Mary loved him for are now splattered against the wall.\n\n\n\"You said we were going to shoot if he reached for it!\"\n\n\n\"The poor bastard wouldn't hurt a fly! I doubt he'd ever even fired a gun!\" you say. \"Fuck sake, we need to get out of here. This whole plan's falling to shit.\"\n\n\nYou both begin to go for the door to hurry away from this awful scene, before Joseph stops, suddenly.\n\n\n\"Michael... we can't just leave him here... his body will burn up to as. He'll never get a proper burial,\" Joseph says.\n\n\nYou pause, knowing you've fallen behind schedule because of this. Smoke is beginning to spread through the building as a haze, and it won't be long before this place becomes a fiery inferno. Plus, by now, local Auxiliaries will already have shown up due to how central a location you're at, and in number. If you're going to act, you need to act quick.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave Arthur's body inside the Custom House to burn to ash", "result": "\"We don't have time!\" you say. \"I'm sorry, Arthur. God rest your soul.\"\n\n\n\"G-god rest your soul,\" Joseph repeats, looking visibly shaken, no doubt due to just shooting his sister's husband.\n\n\nYou turn, leaving the room. At this point, fire's spread through much of the building, as it gives off a big great plume of smoke. Still, it's easy enough to navigate. As you try to head back to your allies in the main hall, an iRA soldier slams into you. The boy's been rushing the halls blindly, and looks confused.\n\n\nA man rushes through the hallways of the burning building, slamming into you.\n\n\n\"Where's your gun, boy? What are you doing?\" you ask, pushing the man off you.\n\n\n\"We were overrun! We're out of ammo, we need to get out of here while we still can! They're capturing everyone else!\" he says frantically. \n\n\n\"What? We can't have been fighting more than half an hour!\" you say.\n\n\nThe man shrugs, before pushing past you and rushing off. You quickly begin planning your escape. The plan involved an escape route, guarded by IRA soldiers from which to evacuate after the fires were set. On the other hand, you could escape out the back, where the smoke is being blown, which might provide you with some cover to escape this place.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Move Arthur's body outside so he can have a proper burial", "result": "\"Let's get him out of here, then,\" you say, taking a deep breath. \"Stupid fucker.\"\n\n\nYou move over, grabbing the bleeding man, holding up his arms. Joseph goes over to the body's leg, lifting him up. You quickly begin carrying Arthur out of the burning building, as smoke runs through it. You get a few odd glances as fire quickly spreads through the building. You move out the front door, as rifle fire explodes, bullets flying at you. Bullets fly over your head, as you drop Arthur on the steps outside. You feel bad doing it, but as a bullet nearly takes your head off, at least he'll get a burial. Hopefully, you won't have to get one as well. You rush behind a column, staring at the other IRA soldiers around you.\n\n\n\"What's going on here?\" you yell, asking.\n\n\n\"We're low on ammo, and we're being overwhelmed. Their weapons are longer ranged with rifles!\" one of the IRA soldiers yells. \"All we can do is hold out here and defend the evacuation!\"\n\n\nYou join the line of defense, occasionally opening fire at the approaching forces of Auxiliaries that are attempting to push forward and break through. However, it's barely ten minutes before people start running out of ammo, and your forces begin getting far more desperate in trying to push off the enemy.\n\n\n\"Fuck! They're going to overwhelm us soon!\" Joseph says. \"We don't have rifles, we're low on ammo, and we're not going to last long. What do we do?\"\n\n\n\"I don't know! The mission's complete, maybe it's time to retreat,\" you say.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stand and fight", "result": "\"We stand and fight!\" you shout, pausing and moving behind a building.\n\n\nYou twist around, firing your gun back as a soldier's head explodes and he collapses to the ground. Another one raises his rifle, before Joseph shoots him in the stomach and the man collapses to the ground with a groan. However, within a minute, you're swarmed by dozens of men, raising their rifles and opening fire. Bullets fly past you, as you dive into cover, hoping you don't get hit.\n\n\nYou move slightly cover, firing your revolver, before you're shot in the shoulder. You collapse out of cover, stumbling out, straight in front of them. They open fire with a volley of rifle shots, as a bullet blows out your skull as it explodes, and you collapse weakly to the ground. ", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Just watch the flames consume the city center", "result": "\"There's no way we can help. Today, all we can do is stare into the true face of the British.\"\n\n\nYou stand back, watching as the city erupts into chaos. There's distant screams and gunshots as the Black and Tans enact their revenge. The flames spread through the city, as city hall is engulfed. You watch as frantic Black and Tans exist out the side. Seconds later, the city hall erupts in a fireball, as whatever the Black and Tans inside did comes to fruition, destroying the building and the Carnegie library almost completely. You watch as the flames lick the black sky, feeling utterly helpless.\n\n\n\"Jesus,\" you mutter.\n\n\nYou watch the destruction of endless buildings, the end of dozens of businesses and the jobs from them. The Black and Tans have truly made their mark, showing just how far they're willing to go as they scorch their path across the second largest city in Ireland. They'll pay for this. This won't break the nationalist movement. It will only strengthen it.\n\n\n\"We need to get out of this city,\" Joseph says after a few minutes. \"We can't let this happen to Dublin, or to Mary or Ma.\"\n\n\n\"We'll organize heading back,\" you nod. \n\n\nYou'll plan to organize a return soon enough. But for now, you just stare at the flaming city around you.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Draw on them", "result": "You draw your pistol from your pocket, raising it through the air. You pull the trigger, a bullet flying through the air. It slashes past the face of one of the men, knocking him backwards as blood pours down his face.\n\n\n\"Fuck! IRA! Attack, attack!\" he screams, as the others dive behind the cover the burning building provides.\n\n\nYou look to Joseph, who draws his rifle as well. You hear a shout as a group of Black and Tans wielding rifles charge out from around the corner. You turn to see the soldiers charge for you, as the Black and Tans quickly outnumber you.\n\n\n\"Fuck it, we've distracted them, at least,\" Joseph says. \"Let's get the fuck out of here.\" ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Help those fleeing the flames", "result": "You rush over to the fires, grabbing a stumbling man and helping him stay to his feet. An ash-covered hand pats you on the back as you grab another, helping him move out from the fires. You move to the edge of the flames, grabbing a badly burned man who had fallen among the ashes. You grab one arm as Joseph grabs the other, yanking him from the ash. You scramble to help the last few people escape the burning buildings, as they're quickly engulfed in flames. Once you've helped all you can out from it, you turn, to where the Black and Tans have finished their work burning down these houses, ruining people's lives, destroying their homes. They turn to you, one of them spitting as he gestures for you to leave.\n\n\n\"Get the fuck out of here, paddy,\" one of them threatens.\n\n\nYou stare at the Black and Tans, feeling your revolver grow heavy in your pocket, before another group of Black and Tans walking down the street arrive, carrying rifles as they stroll towards you. You sigh, turning around and moving away from the scene.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Leave the revolvers", "result": "\"Fine, then. Cheers, Brendan,\" you say, taking a heavy revolver in your hand.\n\n\n\"We don't need them,\" you say, pushing away the heavy revolvers. \"I don't need a weapon.\"\n\n\n\"This is bullshit,\" Joseph complains, but he doesn't push it further. \"Keep the gun, then. Get your family out of here. Last thing they need is some bastard Brit getting their hands on them.\"\n\n\n\"Let's go. Best of luck, Brendan.\"\n\n\nYou move forward, shoving your way out of the door and into Cork City. Immediately, you notice the smoke, as it wafts up into the air, filling the sky with an almost liquid darkness that pours over the city. You can hear the screams and cries in the distance, as well as gunshots. You quickly hurry down the streets towards them, as the air gets hot and fills with ash. Soon, you're confronted by a row of buildings, all either going up in flames or fully ablaze. You watch as people desperately try to escape the buildings, hurrying to escape as smoke fills their lungs and burns lick their flesh.\n\n\nMeanwhile, standing right next to them, seemingly uncaring to their pains and struggles, are a group of Black and Tans. Some wear their uniform, others don't, but they have balaclavas pulled up their face, covering their mouths to obscure their face and stop them from breathing in smoke. They laugh, splashing petrol into the burning buildings, helping the fire spread, although due to the old wooden frameworks of the buildings, they're already burning at an incredibly rate. \n\n\nYou look around, wondering how to deal with this. You could confront the bastards doing this, or just keep a low profile and try help the people. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Try stop the aronsists", "result": "\"For God's sake, stop! These are innocent people!\" you say, strolling up to the Black and Tans. \"Stop this! Please!\"\n\n\nThe Black and Tans laugh, as two of them continue to splash petrol among the flames. One of them steps forward, raising his rifle and pointing it at you.\n\n\n\"Fuck off, paddy. Stroll on and get the fuck out of this area before I blow your brains out.\"\n\n\nYou stare at the man, as he stares at you, sneering.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow orders and move on", "result": "You move along the streets, quickly moving through the streets as you wonder what's going on. Dozens of buildings are up in flames, as various RIC and Black and Tans looting and committing mass arson. Huge sections of the city are up in flames, as homes are destroyed.\n\n\nIt's not long before you reach the fire brigade, at the center of the city outside the burning Cork City Hall and Carnegie Library. Surprisingly, however, they're not attempting to put out the fire. Instead, they're crouching low behind a fire truck. However\n\n\n\"What the fuck is this?\" you ask, rushing over to the fire fighters. \n\n\nA bullet pings near you, bouncing off the ground, as you scamper to hide behind the truck. You turn, looking at them, rushing near an ash-covered man with a thick mustache. He looks at you, scampering over.\n\n\n\"You need to get out of here! This whole place is dangerous!\" he barks.\n\n\n\"What the fuck's going on? Why are you pinned down here?\"\n\n\n\"Black and Tans took over the city hall and are burning it down from the inside. However, they've slashed our hoses so we can't use them, and left a few men by the city hall window to take potshots at us in case we keep trying to put out the fires.\"\n\n\n\"The Black and Tans are sabotaging firefighting attempts? Those fucking bastards,\" Joseph says. \"This is why we need to fight, Michael.\"\n\n\n\"Fight?\" the firefighter says, scowling. \"Look around you. The second largest city in the country is being burned to the fucking ground because of this war. We were content before 1916. We had peace. Death, and this is all you bastards brought us!\" \n\n\n\"We're trying to help!\" you say. \"We...!\"\n\n\n\"Can it. I'm in no mood to argue politics. I'm trying to save as much as this city as I can.\" \n\n\nYou pause, before nodding, knowing there's no way to help.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Confront them", "result": "You move up to first Black and Tan, snarling.\n\n\n\"I'm not going to just stand\n\n\n\"Nah, nah, let this poor paddy fuck rot in jail,\" one of the men laughs. \"You're both under arrest for obstruction and as a soldier of the IRA.\"\n\n\n\"We're unarmed! We didn't do anything!\" you say.\n\n\n\"Shut the fuck up, paddy,\" one of them says, as a rifle barrel presses against your neck. You pause, wondering what to do. You can fight, grabbing a rifle and taking it to a melee, you can try to escape, running off to get out of there, or you can back down and surrender.", "action_results": [{"action": "Swing for him", "result": "You swing for him, bashing him in the jaw as your fingers wrap around his rifle, before the butt of another Black and Tan's rifle slams into your jaw and knocking you to the ground. You stumble backwards as as several of them fire, blowing holes in your chest. \n\n\nYou weakly try to stand, blood pouring down your chest as you let out a meager groan of pain. You take a step forward, before another volley of shots goes off, killing you instantly as your heart explodes. Your body collapses into the streets, blood mixing with the ash of the buildings around you.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Make a break for it", "result": "You turn, breaking away as the rifles go off. Bullets slam into your chest as you stumble forward, before another shot knocks you hard to the ground. You hit the ground with a thud, killing you instantly. You collapse to the ground, struggling to breath as smoke and blood fills your lungs. You desperately attempt to struggle forward You groan, coughing up blood, before one of the soldiers strolls up to you, aiming his rifle at your skull.\n\n\n\"Burn in hell with the rest of this city, paddy,\" the man says, before pulling the trigger and blowing your brains out onto the floor. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Back down", "result": "You pause, stepping back, as you slowly raise your hands. You drop to your knees, looking up at the grinning, sadistic men around you.Joseph looks at you, before raising his hands, dropping to his knees. You drop to your knees, raising your hands.\n\n\n\"That's better. You are now under arrest as criminals to the state,\" one of them chuckles. \"Best of luck.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The Execution", "result": "You sit, blindfolded with a cigarette clenched between your teeth. You stare at the ground, inhaling slowly as you try to stay calm so you can die like a man.\n\n\nAfter your arrest, you're taken to a local jail. It's not long before you're matched up with the \"McCarthy Butchers\", who killed a group of Black and Tans while they were innocently having a pint. Of course, they leave out your motive. You're transported up to Dublin, where you're to be executed for your crimes. An IRA attack managed to free Joseph, thankfully, as he's transported up to Dublin Jail. However, you're not so fortunate, which you suppose is obvious given where you're sitting. A hand rests on your shoulders, as you stand. You're led for a few minutes, before you're stopped and pushed against a wall. You stand, knowing what's to come.\n\n\n\"Ready!\" a loud voice cries.\n\n\nAs you stare through the blindfold, imagining the bastards ahead of you raising their rifles, you make sure you're standing proud and strong, like an Irishman should.\n\n\n\"Aim!\" the voice cries out, as you take one last inhale of the cigarette.\n\n\n\"Fire!\" you whisper with an exhale, as the guns explode with gunfire, blowing you against the wall. ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Help those fleeing the flames", "result": "You rush over to the fires, grabbing a stumbling man and helping him stay to his feet. An ash-covered hand pats you on the back as you grab another, helping him move out from the fires. You move to the edge of the flames, grabbing a badly burned man who had fallen among the ashes. You grab one arm as Joseph grabs the other, yanking him from the ash. You scramble to help the last few people escape the burning buildings, as they're quickly engulfed in flames. Once you've helped all you can out from it, you turn, to where the Black and Tans have finished their work burning down these houses, ruining people's lives, destroying their homes. They turn to you, one of them spitting as he gestures for you to leave.\n\n\n\"Get the fuck out of here, paddy,\" one of them threatens.\n\n\nYou stare at them, wondering how to respond before another group of Black and Tans walking down the street arrive, carrying rifles as they stroll towards you. You sigh, turning around and moving away from the scene.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Thump Joseph", "result": "Sighing, you lean in, smacking your fist into Joseph as you repeatedly hit him in the side.\n\n\n\"Ah! Fuck! FUCK! Fuck off, you stupid, baby-faced git!\" Joseph says, kicking at you as the blankets fly off him, revealing his naked form.\n\n\nJoseph quickly pushes you away, scrambling to his feet. You look down, getting an eyeful of something you don't want to see. Well, more than an eyeful, really. Huh, it's a shame you didn't inherit that side of the family tree. \n\n\n\"What the hell is wrong with you?\" Joseph growls, grabbing a pillow to cover up his cock. \n\n\n\"You weren't getting up,\" you shrug. \"Black and Tans are storming the city, wrecking it all. We need to find out what's happening and see how we can help.\"\n\n\n\"Let me get dressed, would you?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"Yeah, yeah,\" you say, walking out of the room. \"Hurry up, would you?\"\n\n\nYou hurry off to your room, quickly pulling on trousers, a shirt, and a jumper and forcing on your boots. You hurry to slip on your cap, moving out to the hallway. Joseph hops out of his room on one leg, struggling to slip on your boots, as you grab your coat, pulling it on. \n\n\n\"Let's go, then,\" you say, as Joseph nods, before he punches you hard in the arm as you yelp in pain.\n\n\n\"What was that for?\" you ask, rubbing your arm.\n\n\n\"Waking me up like a cunt,\" Joseph says. \"Come on.\"\n\n\n\"Aye, let's see what's happening.\"\n\n\n\"Wait!\" Brendan says, rushing out of the kitchen carrying a pair of revolvers. \"You'll need these.\"\n\n\n\"We don't need weapons, Brendan. We won't be fighting,\" you say.\n\n\n\"We'll need them for protection. If the Black and Tans are on a rampage, it's better to be safe than sorry.\"\n\n\nJoseph reaches out to grab his revolver, before you grab his arm, stopping him.\n\n\n\"Aye. I agree. And I agree that it's also better safe than sorry should we be stopped and searched, as they're doing to every man, it seems. They find these on us, they'll shoot us and toss us in the River Lee.\"\n\n\n\"And if we don't have them, they might shoot us for being Irish and we'll be left with no way to stop them,\" Joseph says. ", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Drag him out of bed", "result": "You sigh, grab Joseph and yanking the heavy lug out of the bed. He lets out a confused yelp as he tries to escape the sheets, but you quickly tug the fool out of the bed, where he thuds into the ground with an indignant \"Ow!\". You quickly yank the sheets off him, as he yelps as you reveal his naked form, catching an eyeful of something you'd rather not. Well, more than an eyeful, really. God, it's a shame that trait didn't seem to be hereditary for the whole family. \n\n\n\"Oh for g... What are you naked for?\" you say.\n\n\n\"I sleep naked!\" Joseph says. \"I'm up, I'm up, give me a few minutes, would you?\"\n\n\n\"God above, fine\" you groan. \"I need to go get dressed. Hurry up, would you?\"\n\n\nYou hurry off to your room, quickly pulling on trousers, a shirt, and a jumper and forcing on your boots. You hurry to slip on your cap, moving out to the hallway. Joseph hops out of his room on one leg, struggling to slip on your boots, as you grab your coat, pulling it on. \n\n\n\"Let's go, then,\" you say, as Joseph nods, scratching his thick beard.\n\n\n\"Aye, let's see what's happening.\"\n\n\n\"Wait!\" Brendan says, rushing out of the kitchen carrying a pair of revolvers. \"You'll need these.\"\n\n\n\"We don't need weapons, Brenda. We won't be fighting,\" you say.\n\n\n\"We'll need them for protection. If the Black and Tans are on a rampage, it's better to be safe than sorry.\"\n\n\nJoseph reaches out to grab his revolver, before you grab his arm, stopping him.\n\n\n\"Aye. I agree. And I agree that it's also better safe than sorry should we be stopped and searched, as they're doing to every man, it seems. They find these on us, they'll shoot us and toss us in the River Lee.\"\n\n\n\"And if we don't have them, they might shoot us for being Irish and we'll be left with no way to stop them,\" Joseph says. ", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Hold your positions", "result": "\"Hold your positions! Don't fall back you yell!\" as the IRA soldiers stand alongside you, opening fire on groups that are quickly overwhelming you. \n\n\nYou continue firing back, as they quickly begin overwhelming your group. They begin pulling the wounded back towards a nearby pub where they can take cover, but even with their numbers, they still outnumber you, and have far better weapons. Those that remain quickly fall into formation, their more powerful rifles raising as they open fire at you. \n\n\nQuickly, their high numbers and better weapons quickly overwhelms you. Their gunfire strikes down one of the men next to you. Another bullet slams into your chest, punching you backwards as you collapse to the ground. You lie on the ground, blood pouring down your chest as it fills your lungs. You cough and splutter as you writhe on the ground. It doesn't take long before the rest of your squad is dying alongside you, outnumbered and outgunned.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Respond with gunfire from cover", "result": "You raise your pistol, opening fire as the other lorry successfully pulls up. Immediately, over a dozen Auxiliaries begin piling out of that lorry, joined by the least wounded from the other lorry. They quickly fall into formation, their more powerful rifles raising as they open fire at you. \n\n\nQuickly, their high numbers and better weapons quickly overwhelms you. Their gunfire strikes down one of the men next to you. Another bullet slams into your chest, punching you backwards as you collapse to the ground. You lie on the ground, blood pouring down your chest as it fills your lungs. You cough and splutter as you writhe on the ground. It doesn't take long before the rest of your squad is dying alongside you, outnumbered and outgunned.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Charge their position while they're disorientated", "result": "You charge forward, leaping over the wall as you rush forward, raising your pistol and opening fire. Your bullet slams into one of the men, blowing his skull open as he collapses back. Unfortunately, at this point over a dozen auxiliaries are clambering out of the truck. A rifle butt slams towards your face as you desperately duck under it. You grab a rifle, tearing it free from the mans hands. You step back, rushing to raise it before one of the auxiliaries grabs the gun barrel, forcing it down to prevent you from shooting.\n\n\nOne of the auxiliaries rushes you, slamming you against the truck. He slams his rifle butt into your jaw, knocking you backwards. A rifle is raised, pointing at your chest, before it fires, your heart exploding in your chest as a bullet flies through it", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take part in the ambush at Kilmichael", "result": "You sit in the dusk-lit rocky hills alongside the Macroom-Dunmanway road, with a unit of thirty four riflemen, missing two members, all split between three ambush positions. You've been camped out here since last night, waiting patiently for the time to ambush the enemy. It's a perfect position, although you've noticed that it's lacking in any good escape routes should the tide of warfare not go in your favor. It's clear Tom Barry is here to slaughter, not retreat.\n\n\n\"They should be here shortly,\" Tom Barry shouts at the top of his lungs from the top of the road. \"Get ready for here. I'll be be getting them to slow down, then you open fire when I raise my fist. Got it?\"\n\n\n\"Hold fire, hold fire!\" Tom Barry screams.\n\n\nTom Barry walks down to the road, as you see them approaching, driving towards Kilmichael. A single motorbike and sidecar, driving along quickly. \n\n\n\"I thought they were coming from Kilmichael?\" you ask Joseph. \n\n\n\"Doesn't matter, we kill them either way!\" Joseph says.\n\n\nThe car slowly approaches, as the rifles aim at them. Tom Barry moves towards it slowly, as everyone waits patiently to open fire. Tom Barry walks calmly towards it, before he pauses as it grows closer, frantically waving his hands in the air.\n\n\n\"Don't shoot! Hold fire, hold fire!\" he yells. \"What in the name of fucking Christ are you doing here?\"\n\n\nYou stare down, at the two men armed with rifles in the vehicle, standing in the middle of the ambush zone. If the British arrived now, they'd be literally shielding them from the gunfire.\n\n\n\"We're here for the ambush,\" one of them says sheepishly. \"We received a mobilization call.\"\n\n\n\"Damn fucking straight you did, but you're in the center of the ambush point.\"\n\n\n\"I see them!\" someone hisses. \n\n\nYou all stare down the road, where a lorry is driving towards your position. \n\n\n\"Oh for God's sake! Is God a Black and fucking Tan?! This couldn't be worse. You two, head down that side street, now!\"\n\n\nThe motorbike quickly turns, heading back down the road at a frantic pace towards the next side street. The rest of you quickly get into postion\n\n\n\"Good evening!\" Tom Barry says, smiling as he walks towards the lorry, holding up his arm with a flat palm, waving at the driver.\n\n\nThe first lorry begins slowing down, right at the ambush point. Tom Barry's hand closes to a fist, as the fighting immediately begins. A grenade flies through the air, as the cab of the lorry explodes. You open fire, but thanks the location of the lorry, it's a close-ranged, brutal fight, as you're left metres from the confused yet charging auxiliaries. You pause as one rushes towards your position frantically, rifle drawn. He's more trying to escape the gunfire from the other side, but nevertheless he's rushing towards your position.\n\n\nTime to act.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open fire with your rifle", "result": "You raise your rifle, firing, as the Auxiliary nears. The first shot misses, flying over his head as you hurry to aim among the panic, but you don't get a second before he knocks your rifle aside.\n\n\nThe Auxiliary slams into you, knocking you into the dust. In a frantic melee, the man slams the butt of his rifle into your face, breaking your nose instantly. He slams it down again, and again, brutally beating you about the face. He steps back, raising his rifle and firing, killing you instantly.\n\n\nAlthough the Kilmichael Ambush is a historic victory, unfortunately you count yourself among the few casualties. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Charge in with your bayonet", "result": "You get low, charging in with your bayonet raised. The Auxiliary lets out a yell as you slam into him, thrusting your bayonet upwards as you jab it between his ribs and into his soft stomach. You pull out the blade with a sickening squelch as the man falls to the ground with a desperate scream. You jab the bayonet into his throat, plunging it into the soft flesh as you hack open his throat with a torrent of blood. The Auxiliary's screams turn to wet squelching, and that turns to silence quickly after. \n\n\nYou look up, to see the first lorry of nine officers has been easily wiped out. You don't think you see a single loss on your side. The second lorry has already stopped at position two, and is exchanging fire with them.\n\n\n\"Let's go help those bastards!\" Tom Barry yells.\n\n\nThe group quickly rushes down the road to position two, where the Auxiliaries stand a chance. That is, until you arrive. You quickly take cover as you arrive at the second lorry, opening fire. There's a short, brutal exchange of firefire. You quickly see an IRA man, foolishly crouched halfway out of cover, shot in the head and killed instantly.\n\n\n\"For god's sake, surrender!\" Tom Barry screams. \"No more men need to die!\"\n\n\n\"We surrender, we surrender!\" a voice among the Auxiliaries calls out, as the gunfire stops. \"We surrender, hold your fire!\"\n\n\n\"Thank Christ,\" Tom Barry mutters. \"I'm sending men over to collect your rifles. You are now officially prisoners of the Irish Republic.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Collect the prisoners' rifles", "result": "You walk forward, your rifle raised, towards the Black and Tans around the truck, who are using it for cover. You move out, walking towards them.\n\n\n\"Drop your ri...!\" you begin to shout, before you're shot in the chest. \n\n\nYou pause, standing there, more confused, feeling like you've been punched in the chest. Then, you collapse to the ground, as the pain begins to tear through you.\n\n\n\"Fucking cheaters,\" you mutter, collapsing back on the road.\n\n\nAs the gunfire explodes out again, you lie on the ground, your blood pouring onto the streets. You frown, as all you can think is how fucking miserable the bastard who shot you is.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Hold your position", "result": "You hold your position, your rifle raised. There's a long pause, as a few men begin approaching the Auxilaries to collect their rifle. You watch patiently, your rifle aimed.\n\n\nSuddenly, the Auxiliaries open fire, firing their rifles in a hail of bullets. Instantly, one of the men sent to collect the rifles has his head explode, as another is shot in the stomach, chest and arm, collapsing on the ground as he quickly bleeds to death. The others all quickly scramble for cover, desperate to escape the hail of bullets.\n\n\n\"Fucking cheats! Return fire, return fire!\" Tom Barry screams.\n\n\nYou open fire, as the rest of the IRA do the same. You quickly fire, as the hail of gunfire overwhelms them, and it's clear they won't last.\n\n\n\"We surrender!\" an auxiliary calls out, casting down his rifle. \"I swear to God, we surrender to the Republic!\"\n\n\n\"Fuck off,\" Tom Barry shouts, personally shooting the surrendering auxilary. \"You don't get to pull that card again, you cheating bastard.\"\n\n\nIt's not long before the last auxiliaries are gunned down by your forces, and the return fire stops. There's a quick pause after the last enemy drops, before Tom Barry shouts out an order.\n\n\n\"Hold fire!\"\n\n\nYou all hold fire, as you stare at the defeated enemy.\n\n\n\"Any of them still standing?\" Tom asks.\n\n\nAs silence is the reply, he orders you to move forward, checking them out.\n\n\n\"What's our losses?\" someone calls.\n\n\n\"Three men,\" Tom Barry calls back.\n\n\nYou walk out, moving towards the IRA. You quickly find one lying on the ground, blood pouring down his face as he bleeds badly. His weapon is cast aside, as he tries to crawl away, to escape the IRA. You look down at him, at the pathetic struggle to survive, raising your rifle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Execute him", "result": "You raise your rifle, firing. The man's head explodes, brain matter and skull spewing onto the floor. You sigh, shaking your head in disgust.\n\n\nTom Barry strolls out in front of you, nodding as you execute the wounded man.\n\n\n\"Good work. None of them can survive after that. A false surrender is the most despicable of things, isn't it?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, it is,\" you nod.\n\n\n\"Come on then, let's finish up here and get out the hell away from this blasted town! I want the second truck destroyed and inoperable, and any wounded killed. Then, we get out of here!\" Tom Barry orders with a yell.", "action_results": [{"action": "Retreat to the safe-house", "result": "Hours after the ambush, you've all retired to another village far away from Kilmichael, where your safe-houses lie. The local pub is as nationalist as it gets, and you've all retired there for a drink. You sit next to Joseph and a few other men, a pint in your hands. Tom Barry strolls into the center of the room, holding a sheet of paper in his hands.\n\n\n\"Ahem! Order, order!\" Tom Barry yells. \"It turns out I've made a grave mistake in counting our number. We can't have only lost three men for eighteen British officers. Not only did one of them survive, but it's worse. I have in my hands the British report, and we didn't fight with thirty six men.\"\n\n\nThe room falls silent, as everyone stares at Tom Barry, who grins.\n\n\n\"No, instead, the British report tells me that we fought with over a hundred IRA soldiers, all wearing steel trench helmets! One hundred fucking men!\"\n\n\nThere's a chorus laughter, as it's clear the British are trying to save face after their horrific defeat. Tom Barry laughs the loudest, a wide grin across his face.\n\n\n\"Why don't the British tell the truth? They should tell the public about the machine guns we had, or about the aircraft support we had, or the calvary charge, or how we drove a dozen Mark 1 Tanks down the road!\" he laughs, as the men all cheer. \"Fucking hell, why don't they say Brian Boru himself fought with us?!\"\n\n\nThe men all laugh, yourself included, as Tom Barry holds up his hands for a brief moment of silence.\n\n\n\"Another round of drinks, on me! Dia Bheinn \u00c9ireann! God bless Ireland!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Weeks Later...", "result": "You spend a few nights hiding out, before the group slowly returns to Cork. You soon return to your new home with Brendan. The weeks pass by until you're well into December. The day of the ambush at Dillon's Cross is a disaster, with only one auxiliary being taken out, with the IRA being pushed back. The target survives, and your allies are forced to hurry to their various safe-houses. After hearing of the failure, it's a shame, but you know the war will continue on, and retire to your bed after the attack, eager to get some sleep.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Spare him", "result": "You lower your rifle, frowning as you shake your head. Tom Barry strolls out in front of you, nodding as you execute the wounded man. He sighs, shaking his head.\n\n\n\"We don't spare any desperate souls today, not after that fake surrender,\" he says. \n\n\nTom Barry raises his rifle, pulling the trigger. The gun clicks empty, as he raises his rifle, smashing the butt into the man's head. He quickly begins to smash the butt of the rifle into the man's head, as he begins to bash open the man's head, crushing his skull and spewing grey brain matter and chunks of skull onto the floor.\n\n\n\"War is hell, isn't it?\" Tom Barry says darkly, looking up at you.\n\n\n\"Yes, it is,\" you nod.\n\n\n\"Come on then, let's finish up here and get out the hell away from this blasted town! I want the second truck destroyed and inoperable, and any wounded killed. Then, we get out of here!\" Tom Barry orders with a yell. ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Call for the second grenade to be thrown to mop up the survivors", "result": "\"Throw the second grenade!\" you yell, although in the din of battle, no one seems to hear you, or be willing to waste the second grenade in this action.\n\n\nThe Auxiliary slams into you, knocking you into the dust. In a frantic melee, the man slams the butt of his rifle into your face, breaking your nose instantly. He slams it down again, and again, brutally beating you about the face. He steps back, raising his rifle and firing, killing you instantly.\n\n\nAlthough the Kilmichael Ambush is a historic victory, unfortunately you count yourself among the few casualties. ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Reload", "result": "You quickly fumble for the bullets left in your coat pocket, grabbing one as you flick out the chamber, shaking out the shells inside. You quickly pop the bullet into the chamber, clicking it into place. You look up to aim, to notice he's beaten you, managing to get his rifle and pull back the bolt before you had the chance.\n\n\nThe Black and Tan raises his rifle, firing as your chest explodes, blood spraying around the room as you're knocked backwards, toppling to the ground as you hit the ground with a thud.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Take it to fists", "result": "You leap forward, tackling the man and slamming him into the table. His head bounces off it with a thud, breaking his nose as blood begins streaming down his face. He wraps his hands around your neck, as he begins to strangle you. You ram your elbow into his face, knocking him off you.\n\n\nYou twist around, noticing the other two Black and Tans focusing on your are hurrying for their rifles, and are soon to reach them. You bash your fist into the man again, wondering what to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Focus on the man at hand", "result": "You focus on the man you're beating, smashing your fist into his face repeatedly. The first punch heavily bruises his face, the next breaks his nose, the next knocks out a handful of teeth as they clatter across the ground. You grab his head, knocking it against the table as he slumps over weakly.\n\n\n\"Fucking shoot,\" the battered, bloody man says, looking to your side.\n\n\nYou look up, as the two men aim their rifles at you, pointing the gun barrel right in your face. You lunge at the barrels, hoping to knock them out of the way, before they go off, blowing holes in you as you collapse off them, bleeding onto the ground.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take on the others as well", "result": "You your leg over, kicking away away the leg of another one of them as they crumple forward. The other grabs your leg for your next kick, quickly bringing his elbow down on your leg repeatedly as he breaks your leg with a few quick hits. You scream out in pain, grabbing at your leg with a desperate scream. \n\n\nThe next punch is from the man you've been beating, as he knocks your head backwards, as your blood squirts over the floor. Immediately, all three of them are upon you, as boots begin to smash into you. You're quickly stomped several times in the head, your blood and teeth spilling out onto the floor. When they finally stop, you're too broken and bloodied to even know what's happening. All you hear is the pulling back of a rifle bolt, and then it all ends.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go for your pistol", "result": "You turn, rushing towards your pistol as quickly as you can. The man you were beating up tackles you to the ground, as you smack into the wooden floor with a painful thud. The man forces his knees onto your arms, struggling to pin you down with his weight. One of the other soldiers quickly arrives with his rifle, standing over you.\n\n\n\"Hold him steady!\" he shouts.\n\n\n\"I am!\" the soldier replies through gritted teeth.\n\n\n\"Fucking cunts!\" you yell, struggling to push the soldier from off you. \n\n\n\"Hold him steady!\" the man shouts again, as the gun barrel is aimed at your face. \n\n\nYou stare down the gun barrel, taking a deep breath as you try to force the man off you in desperation. The man pulls the trigger, ending your struggle.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Make your escape now", "result": "You quickly turn, racing to exit the room as you grab Joseph, yanking him out with you. The Black and Tans quickly reach for their guns, raising them quickly and aiming as you hurry for the door. You run to shoulder the door open, but the gunfire goes off. Bullets slam into you, knocking you through the door as you stumble forward, before crumpling into the street, blood pooling around you. Joseph only manages to make it a few steps forward before the bullet to the chest causes him to collapse.\n\n\nThe two of you quickly bleed out in the street, as your assassination attempt comes to an end.", "action_results": []}]}, null]}, {"action": "Punch him", "result": "You slam your fist into the man's head, knocking him backwards as his chair topples over and he crumples to the ground.\n\n\n\"Take that, you fucking rapist!\" you snarl.\n\n\nThe soldiers quickly rise up, as the butt of a rifle slams into Joseph's jaw, knocking him to the floor. You swing again, before another one bashes you in the stomach. You grunt, collapsing to the ground, as they're upon you. Repeatedly, dozens of fists, boots and gun butts smash into you, quickly beating you quite severely as you're bloodied, bruised and battered. \n\n\nAfter the pair of you are beaten brutally, you're dragged outside of the pub, barely able to see what's happening. You're forced to your knees, as a rifle is pressed to the back of your head.\n\n\n\"By order of the fucking crown, we judge you a traitor and a terrorist, and sentence you to death,\" one of them says.\n\n\n\"Die, you fucking paddy,\" another jeers.\n\n\nThen, the gun goes off, blowing your brains out across the street.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Berate him", "result": "\"You fucking bastard!\" you snarl. \"You raped my sister, you vile fucking swine!\"\n\n\nSurprisingly, the man laughs, as his goons cackle around him.\n\n\n\"Why don't you stroll on and fuck off, pig farmer,\" Carter laughs. \"Otherwise, my friends and I might feel like finding your sister again and giving it to her a few more times!\"\n\n\n\"You godless prod!\" you spit, sneering at the man as he only grins wider. \"You're a fucking disgrace. You disgrace your whole nation of cowards and thieves!\"\n\n\n\"You know, your sister was a virgin, right? There was a lot of blood when I stuck my cock in her.\"\n\n\nYou go to scream at him, but he rushes you, patting on his rifle.\n\n\n\"You're surrounded by Unionists, talking to a group of veterans of the Great War, and proper Englishmen. It's best if you go up to the bar, pay for a round of drinks for us, and head home. Otherwise, we might not be so kind as to let you leave in such a nice condition.\"\n\n\n\"You fucking animals!\" you scream. \"You can't treat people like this!\"\n\n\n\"The crown says we can,\" Carter grins.\n\n\nYou turn to Joseph, who has quieted down, looking sternly ahead.\n\n\n\"Joseph, aren't you going to say something about this?!\" you ask in frustration.\n\n\n\"There's nothing to say to him. Best not to call him names,\" Joseph says. \"Ma taught us better than that.\"\n\n\n\"Listen to your brother and fuck off before this stops being amusing,\" Carter says. \n\n\n\"Ma taught us better,\" Joseph repeats. \"She taught us not to speak ill of the dead.\"\n\n\nJoseph draws his revolver, pointing it at the man's head, blowing out the back of his skull and painting the walls and his friends with brains and bloods. You look at the other Black and Tans, who all sit there in shock. There's a brief pause as silence fills the bar, as it takes a moment for everyone to comprehend what you've just done.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}]}, null]}, null, null, null]}]}, null, null, null]}, null]}, null, null]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}, null, null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story36.json b/data/scraper/stories/story36.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..87edaa4 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story36.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=8035", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Its another day and you feel nothing...\n\nYou're 18 years old and very socially inept. Naturally you're not popular in high school, you're not even worthy to be routinely picked on. This isn't to say you aren't at all, but most people just find you very creepy and stay away from you. You're mom's strict upbringing has made you very emotionally detached and repressed. At this point you barely feel any kind of emotions at all.\n\nMaybe that changes today.\n\nYour Mom is calling you down to eat.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go downstairs", "result": "You head downstairs, like you always do. No point in breaking tradition.\n\nWhen you get downstairs your Mom is arguing with your 17 year old sister as usual. She isn't like you at all, she's popular for one thing, but then again being a very pretty and extroverted will do that for a person.\n\nShe's a bit of a wild child though which your domineering mother can't stand. You wonder why your sister acts the way she does, Mom's just trying to look out for her.\n\nThey're really arguing today.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sit down, eat and stay out of it", "result": "You sit and eat your breakfast quietly while the two argue as usual. It doesn't involve you, so why get into it?\n\n\"You little fucking whore! You keep staying out all night, and you can just forget about living under my roof! Go fucking sleep in the street with the rest of the sluts!\"\n\n\"Oh go fuck yourself Mom! You're just mad because you're a fucking bitter old harpy with nobody in your fucking life!\"\n\"Why you fucking little bitch!\" your Mom says and slaps your sister across the face.\n\nYour sister holds her face and shuts up. She picks up her school stuff and heads toward the door, before exiting she says one last thing, before slamming the door.\n\n\"Don't worry Mom, I'm not staying in this fucking house another day!\"\n\nYou finish up your breakfast, your Mom doesn't even acknowledge you're there, she leaves the kitchen in a huff rather quickly.\n\nShe must be really pissed.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head to school", "result": "Mom's strong, she doesn't need you checking up on her. You head to school as normal. What else would you do?\n\nYou get to school just in time for you to see Henry the school bully kicking the hell out of your \"friend\" Aaron. Aaron isn't so much your friend in that he's such a social reject that you're the only one who doesn't treat him like a leper, so he's attached himself to you. Of course you could really care less about him. Sometimes you wish he'd leave you alone, since he only makes you stand out more, when all you want to do is blend into the background.\n\n\"Get the fuck up you faggot!\" Henry shouts abusively at Aaron while kicking him gleefully.\nAaron looks at you in the hopes that you'll help.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to class", "result": "Its between Henry and Aaron. Why get involved? Henry would just draw his attention to you, and you have no desire for that.\n\nYou go to your classes as usual and do your work again as usual. In your computer class you see Jessica. She's one of your sister's friends, but isn't as wild as most of them. Doesn't stop her from being a normal teenager though, assuming you had any idea of what normal is. You don't know what it is about her, but she stirs some kind of feeling inside you. She doesn't really know you at all, other than you're Mary's \"creepy\" brother.\n\nShe looks like she's having difficulty with today's computer lesson.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue with your work", "result": "She's never made any effort to talk to you, so you don't feel the overwhelming need to talk to her. You continue with your work until that class is over.\n\nLunch time comes around, you expect Aaron to come sit next to you, but he's nowhere to be seen. You wonder if Henry beat him up so bad he had to go home.\n\nAs you sit by yourself eating quietly, you overhear Butch at the next table.\n\n\"Yeah that fucking bitch sucked my dick last night! Haw Haw!\"\n\nButch is your sister's jock boyfriend, even though they're constantly breaking up and making up. The break ups are mainly due to him cheating on her all the time, but she always ends up forgiving him. You don't know why, even you think your sister could do way better.\n\nRight now Butch is bragging to his buddies about his latest conquest, which apparently wasn't your sister.", "action_results": [{"action": "Finish eating and go to class", "result": "Your sister is aware of Butch's infidelity, its up to her to leave him. What good would it do to confront him? After all it isn't really your concern.\n\nYou finish eating and head back to class. On your way there, you pass Henry. Normally Henry doesn't bother with you, save the occasional name calling, but he's looking for a fight.\n\n\"Hey dickhead! I saw you looking at me kicking that faggot Aaron's ass! I know you two fucking butt boys hang out, aren't you pissed off that I kicked your boyfriend's ass?\" Henry says getting in your face and pushing you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ignore him", "result": "You step aside and walk around him. Henry's a little surprised.\n\n\"Hey faggot, I'm talking to you bitch!\" he shouts as you continue to ignore him. Henry hits you in the back of the head with a thrown pencil which you continue to ignore. Sensing his actions aren't getting the desired effect, he stops harassing you.\n\"Fuck this creepy faggot.\" Henry mutters to himself and goes in search of different prey.\n\nYou attend the last of your classes and then leave the school. You run into your sister outside. She walks up to talk to you.\n\n\"Hey, I'm gonna stay with Butch tonight, and I think I might just stay over there permanently, his parents all cool enough to let me stay there. I'll be moving all my stuff out a little bit at a time, but I'll try to be quick, so you can tell that controlling bitch that she won't have to deal with me anymore.\"\n\nWow, your sister wasn't joking about moving out.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell her you'll relay the message to Mom", "result": "You nod and say okay unemotionally. Your sister looks at you a little worried.\n\n\"You know, you should get out of that house too. I mean look at what Mom has done to you. You're a fucking emotionless robot! You just do everything Mom tells you. Is that really how you want to go through life?\"\n\nYou don't say anything.\n\n\"Look, take care of yourself and remember that you don't need to do everything that Mom says.\"\n\nShe hugs you goodbye and leaves.\n\nYou head back home and when Mom comes back home from work you explain what happened to your sister. Your Mom looks angry, but also relieved, almost as if having her out of the house is a blessing.\n\n\"Good, that little disobedient bitch can stay gone then. Well what are you doing still standing around for? You know you have work to do around the house!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Do as Mom says", "result": "You do some cleaning and other chores, then you go up to your room and occupy your time until your Mom tells you to go to sleep, which you comply. You go to sleep until morning, then you wake up.\n\nIts another day and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Disobey Mom", "result": "You tell her no.\n\nShe slaps you. \"What was that?\"\n\nYou don't make anymore trouble, and do what you're told. Your sister's advice only got you punished, and what has her rebellious nature gotten her? She's been kicked out of the house. No, rules are made to be followed. To disobey invites punishment. You go to bed remembering that fact of life.\n\nAnother day arrives, and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Tell her that Butch has been cheating on her again", "result": "You suddenly realize that with your sister gone, you'll be the only one there to face Mom. Even you sense that isn't a good thing. Maybe underneath all your automaton type behavior you do have a certain sense of self-preservation. If anything you're concerned about the changes that your sister leaving might bring, and even though you might not show it, you fear change.\n\nYou tell your sister about Butch, she gets upset, but isn't really surprised. She'll probably break up with him, only to get back with him later. But for now its enough to convince her not to go move in with him. The status quo is kept in check.\n\nHome life continues as normal, your Mom yells at your sister and she yells back. There's something that is reassuring about that familiarity.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel comfortably numb...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Punch him", "result": "When Henry pushes you, you look confused at first, but then your expression turns to anger. Then your emotions soon follow...\n\nYou punch Henry straight in the nose causing it to explode in a gout of blood! Henry screams when he sees all that blood gushing from his nose. You don't just stop there though, you then take his pinky finger and break it. At this point you are drawing a crowd, while some others go to fetch a teacher.\n\nYou slam Henry's head into the hard ground until his skull cracks. Henry's already unconscious at this point, but you continue to kick him in the stomach until a teacher finally pulls you off, at which point to go quietly.\n\nThis act of wild unleashed anger gets you in severe trouble, namely prison for attempted murder. You don't seem to mind though, Its a structured environment that you're used to, and you welcome the chance to unleash your endless pent up anger on your fellow inmates.\n\nAnother day arrives in your cell you feel fury...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Tell him you could care less about Aaron", "result": "Your detached answer, only causes Henry to believe that you're smarting off to him. He immediately kicks you in the balls and trust me you DO feel that!\n\nHe then drags you into the bathroom and beats the hell out of you and leaves you for dead. As you struggle to get your head out of the toilet you lose consciousness due to the massive gash in your head that's bleeding profusely.\n\nLater you're found by the janitor who manages to get you to a hospital just in time for you to live. Not in time for you to have not suffered brain damage though.\n\nOddly this has an interesting effect on your previous emotional condition. You revert back to a childlike state. Your Mom actually is nicer to you and in general, and sis seems to stop partying as much. Your unfortunate event has inadvertantly brought them closer to each other and to you. Of course you're unaware of such things, you just know that two pretty ladies take care of you.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel playful...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Confront Butch", "result": "Probably not the best time to act on your feelings...\n\nYou suddenly feel the need to defend your sister's honor by confronting Butch and his six football playing buddies. Needless to say, you don't win that confrontation.\n\nFor the most part you're more humilated than beaten beyond recognition. Still, its enough to deter you from displaying emotion ever again, you go back to your low profile emotionless lifestyle. Things are just easier that way for you.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Help Jessica", "result": "Under different circumstances, this might have worked, but your cold emotionless demeanor is still very much a part of you. When you approach Jessica to help her, she declines and gives you a funny look.\n\nYou go back to doing what you were doing. In fact you go about your usual routine for the rest of the day. The fact Jessica turned you down, seems to only make you supress your feelings and retreat into your own world even more. Eventually you go home and go to bed.\n\nAnother day arrives and you still feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Help Aaron", "result": "Sometimes attempting to do something positive doesn't work out.\n\nYou attempt to tell Henry to leave Aaron alone, but that doesn't help you. Henry just gets mad and attacks you instead. His anger for you interfering results in him beating you very badly. In fact you don't survive.\n\nOne last breath and then you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go check on Mom", "result": "For some reason you feel the urge to check on Mom, you head towards her room.\n\nShe's crying. You've never seen her like this! You've always known her to be a hard tough woman, its a little shocking to see this side of her.\n\nShe notices you and quickly wipes her eyes and reverts back to her old self.\n\n\"What the hell are you doing here?! Get the fuck to school!!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to reach out to her", "result": "You ignore her abuse, you now know her lashing out is merely a reflection of her own unhappiness. You continue to ask what's wrong and that you're only here to help.\n\nYour genuine concern and her vulnerable state seems to cause her to open up a bit. She breaks down and says how, she's sorry for failing as a parent, and how she's losing your sister, and she doesn't want to lose you either.\n\nYou tell her if perhaps she was less controling, things might be better. You say you'll see what you can do about sis. Your Mom thanks you and after a few more hugs and reassurances, you rush off to school. On your way there, your emotions are a little less surpressed. You feel like you have a goal to accomplish now.\n\nYou get to school a little late, which results in you getting sent to the principal's office where you run into Henry, the school bully. He's there for beating someone up as usual. He gives you a dirty look and the finger.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to reach out to him", "result": "That routine might work on those close to you, but not on anti-social miscreants who hate your guts!\n\nAs you attempt to ask why Henry feels the need to be hostile to everyone, his expression turns to repulsion. He thinks you're hitting on him.\n\n\"What the fuck are you, some fucking faggot or something?\" he says and then attacks you right in the principal's office! He beats you pretty bad before the principal manages to get him off of you. You end up having to go to the hospital.\n\nYour sister and Mom come to visit you and they get into an even bigger arguement resulting in a physical fight. Any goal you had of trying to patch up your family has been shattered forever. You don't seem to care anymore though, you realize playing peacemaker was a fool's quest anyway. Look what it got you. You fall asleep keeping that thought in mind.\n\nYou wake up the next day in your hospital bed and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Ignore him", "result": "You aren't here to be Gandhi and you aren't here to get into anymore trouble so you ignore Henry who gets called in soon.\n\nYou sit and think how you want a close family. One that isn't always fighting or being controling. You know you can patch your family up and make it functional rather than dysfunctional, you just have to figure out how to do it.\n\nIn the meantime the secretary tells you that the principal is going to be with Henry for a long time and since you're a fairly good student who never causes trouble, she says you can leave with a warning.\n\nYou go to lunch, still trying to figure out how to fix your family when over at the table behind you, you hear your sister's boyfriend Butch bragging to his friends about some girl he slept with who wasn't your sister.", "action_results": [{"action": "Confront Butch", "result": "Exposing your sister's cheating cad of a boyfriend was the right direction, but you definitely went the WRONG way about it.\n\nButch and his friends laugh at your attempt to convince him to confess to your sister or you'll do it.\n\nThey beat you and humilate you, then run off laughing. In a cruel twist you get sent to the principal's office again where he's less flexible. He assumes you're a trouble maker and suspends you effective immediately. You don't get a chance to talk to your sister, she and Butch take off early for some party. When your Mom gets home, your sister's run away event and your suspension put your Mom back in her usual hard ass mood. She screams at you and says your sister isn't her daughter anymore, can go to hell and stay there because she isn't welcome here anymore.\n\nYou've failed. Your attempts have been futile. You might as well not tried at all. You were the only one who really cared. You just thought that maybe if you had a more stable home life, you could feel like a normal person, but that goal is lost. You go to bed.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Keep quiet", "result": "You know that subtlety is going to be required here. This information can help bring your family together, but you have to do it right.\n\nYou attend your classes as usual, eventually school ends and you see your sister. You immediately reveal this information to her. She looks very upset, yet not entirely surprised. This certainly isn't the first time he's done this. She just keeps forgiving him, and taking him back. She was planning on staying with him to get away from Mom, but now she's conflicted.\n\nYou explain what happened with Mom after she left. Your sister looks skeptical, but knows even though you're a bit emotionless, you've never lied to her. Plus your latest deed has put you in better standing with her. Your sister agrees to give getting along with Mom a chance.\n\nYou both go home and wait for Mom to get off work. Mom arrives, she's a little more calmer, but you know this is a volitile situation.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay", "result": "You all sit at the table, staring at each other. You're acting as a mediator. Mom and sis start out calmly, but it quickly escalates into name calling and criticism. The usual insults. You put a stop to it and demand that they get along! Family is the most important thing and you won't just let them dismiss it. You remind them both that things haven't always been this bad between them. You remind them of the good times that you all have had at one time. Good times that have occurred much too rarely and much too long ago.\n\nYou tell them you think that's why you shut down emotionally, because it was just easier to deal with the pain of seeing two people you care for in your life grow to hate each other so much. You say how you just want all of them to be a family again. You begin to weep.\n\nYour speech is probably the most emotional thing either of them has heard from you in years. Hell, they didn't even know you had any emotions anymore. You always did though they were just repressed, but no longer.\n\nYour Mom and sis also begin to cry at this point. Many apologies are exchanged.", "action_results": [{"action": "Say how happy you are", "result": "You wipe your tears and say how happy you are that you all have managed to at least come together on this night. Mom says she'll be less domineering and sis says she'll reign in her wild side. You hold both of their hands and say you know this all won't be easy, but you have faith that you're all on your way to being a family again.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel happy...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Group hug", "result": "You all gather in a circle and hug one another. This is the closest you've all been in years and its all thanks to you.\n\nAs you hug your Mom begins to rub her hands up and down your back, she then kisses you on the lips...passionately. You're a little surprised. Your sister then puts your hand on her ass, looks lovingly at Mom and kisses her as well.\n\nOf course! This makes sense now! You all alway felt greater intimacy for each other, but society's laws forbade it, and you all grew detached and hostile to each other because of it. But now that barrier has been shattered forever and you're able to pursue this love.\n\nThings eventually end up in the bedroom where you all express your love for each other in a physical way. You know that after tonight your family will be closer in ways you never dreamed about. After all family is the most important thing.\n\nAnother day arrives, you wake up beside your sister and Mom and you feel complete euphoria...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Let Mom and sis work it out themselves", "result": "You seriously can't expect these two to work it out themselves without your help! You were the architect in all this and now you've just going to abandon your project? You're either naively optimistic or you don't want it bad enough. In either case your lack of commitment shows in a spectacular way.\n\nYour Mom and sister eventually start disagreeing in a physical way, when this occurs you attempt to break them up. Unfortunately Mom happened to have a butcher knife at the time, you get in the way and Mom accidently stabs you right in the throat.\n\nYou feel a sharp pain briefly then you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Go to school", "result": "You obey and go to school. There was a real opportunity to change things here, but you failed to take advantage.\n\nThe rest of your day pretty much follows the same pattern until you come home and go to bed.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Side with Mom", "result": "You know Mom's just looking out for the best interest of your sister, and you say as much. Your Mom looks a little surprised as does your sister, who then gets really angry.\n\n\"Fuck the both of you! You don't know me! You're a fucking cold hearted bitch who's wallowing in her own loneliness and you're her fucking lap dog who does everything she says!\" you sister screams.\n\n\"Maybe because he actually cares about my feelings! Unlike you, you little slut!\" your Mom says and then slaps her. Your sister looks like she might attempt to slap your Mom back, but your presence stops her. Instead she runs out the door, with one last comment.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m leaving this fucking house of insanity! The both of you two can go straight to hell!\u201d she says slamming the door.\n\nYour Mom waves her hand in disgust and then turns to you.\n\n\u201cThanks for taking my side. You\u2019re such a good son.\u201d She says and then hugs you, you return the gesture.\n\n\u201cOkay now head off to school, I have to go to work.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Head to school", "result": "As you obey Mom, your budding emotions seem to shrink back again. Maybe it was just a fluke that you acted like you did, because you certainly don't display any follow up feelings towards Mom or anyone else the entire day.\n\nYour day follows as unemotional as usual until you go home and go to bed.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Ask Mom to drive you", "result": "Your Mom again looks surprised, but also a little happy.\n\n\"Well okay, its on my way to work. Are you sure you want me too though? Won't it embarass you in front of your friends?\"\n\nMom sure doesn't know you very well at all. You don't really have any. Of course even if you did, you wouldn't care.\n\nYour Mom drives you to school just like you remember she used to when you were little. She always seemed a lot happier back then. She almost looks that happy again right now.\n\nAs she drops you off, she lets you out, but before she does, she kisses you goodbye...on the lips.\n\nAs she drives off, you're left feeling a little strange. You've never been very emotional, but something in you has changed. You head to your classes a little preoccupied, until Jessica comes up to you in computer class.\n\n\"Hey, can you help me with this?\" she asks.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help Jessica", "result": "You kind of don't want to think about your Mom kissing you the way she did. It makes you uncomfortable. You take the opportunity to help Jessica to take your mind off of things.\n\nAs you help Jessica, she thanks you and becomes more friendly. She says she's always wondered about you, since you're very different than your sister who she's friends with. You open up a bit more than you normally would probably because you're still trying to get your mind off of Mom.\n\nIts probably what makes you blurt out asking Jessica for a date after school. Jessica's a little surprised, but accepts.\n\nWhen the class ends you realize you've just recieved a date with the one girl who seemed to stir some emotions in you. You begin to shake and rush to the bathroom to throw up. This is all a lot to take in. Your Mom kissed you on the lips and now you have a date with the girl of your dreams for all intense and purposes. You don't feel very hungry so you spend your lunch hour working on something for another class.\n\nYou attend the rest of your classes and eventually school comes to an end, and Jessica meets you outside.\n\nYour emotions are all mixed up and your mind is going a mile a minute.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take her home", "result": "You tell her you want her to meet your Mom. You still got her on your mind. You have to show her that what she wants can't occur! And by bringing Jessica home, you'll be able to show that. Of course you're really nervous about what's going to happen. You barely manage to keep yourself from throwing up again.\n\nJessica meanwhile is a little puzzled by your choice of \"date\" but agrees. You get home and you and Jessica talk for a little while longer getting to know each other better, but still in the back of your head you worry about Mom.\n\nThen she arrives. And she looks really surprised to see you with a girl in the house. Speechless in fact.", "action_results": [{"action": "Introduce Jessica", "result": "You muster up all your inner strength and introduce Jessica to Mom.\n\nMom is surprisingly cordial. You don't get it, you thought she'd be mad. Maybe she realized that what she wanted to pursue with you was wrong, and is glad you found someone to be with in a healthy relationship. Your nervousness decreases almost completely. Your Mom leaves you and Jessica alone, your previous niceness to her has put her in a good enough mood to let you have some fun, especially since you don't cause much trouble.\n\nEventually you take Jessica home, and despite having a rather strange first date, she agrees to see you tomorrow and you promise to really take her somewhere.\n\nYou go home thinking about today's events. You still have a great deal of devotion to your Mom, but are glad it wasn't taken to THAT level. You wonder though, Jessica looks a lot like your Mom when she was younger. Is that why you were attracted to her?\n\nYou don't want to dwell on that too much! You go to bed.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel slightly warped...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Beg for Mom's forgiveness", "result": "You suddenly lose it. You beg for Mom's forgiveness. Your devotion to your Mom is too great and if she wants you as a lover as well then you'll comply.\n\nYou say all this while groveling at her feet weeping. Jessica AND your Mom look at each other and then slowly back away from you.\n\nYou look up, and see Jessica run past your Mom and out the door saying \"Ewwwwww! I KNEW you were creepy!\"\n\nYour Mom tells you to stay away from her. You comply but you don't understand why. You thought she had those feelings for you. She asks where the hell did you get a sick fucking idea like that. You mention the kiss.\n\n\"It was a peck on the lips! Nothing more!\" Your Mom shouts. You suddenly feel very very small. You curl up in a ball not knowing what to think anymore.\nYour Mom sees that you need many years of professional help and eventually has you put away in an institution where drugs work wonders on your screwed up thought process. No more emotions. Back to normal.\n\nAnother day in your cell and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go to the movies", "result": "You want to avoid Mom for as long as possible! You take Jessica to the movies.\n\nYou and Jessica get some food and sit to watch the film. You can't seem to relax. You're still anxious and nervous about going home. You begin not to feel well again. Just as Jessica asks you what's wrong, you puke up popcorn and gummy bears all over her.\n\n\"EWWWWWWWW!\" she screams and runs out of the theatre.\n\nNot really knowing what to do next you head home, still worrying over what Mom is going to do. When you get home, Mom sees you and starts screaming. She asks where the hell you've been. You say the movies, to which she screams at you some more for saying you never told her you were going there and you need to check in with her first. You'll be getting kicked out of the house like your sister, if you feel the need to disobey the rules she continues to say.\n\nThis seems like the Mom you know and are comfortable with! You guess you were mistaken about Mom's feelings towards you and that relieves you. You don't feel as nervous now, it reverts back into that familar numb feeling again. You decide that acting out of your normal routine was a great risk that nearly drove you over the edge. You won't be doing that again.\n\nAnother day arrives and once again you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Ignore Jessica", "result": "You barely acknowledge Jessica's presence. She's one of your sister's friends anyway, which makes you even less inclined to help her. You say something about being really busy and having a lot to do on your own computer right now. As Jessica leaves, you continue to think about Mom, and that kiss.\n\nLunch time comes around and you sit to ponder it even more, fortunately without your idiot \"friend\" Aaron buzzing in your ear. You hear your sister's boyfriend Butch bragging at the next table about some chick he slept with last night, that apparently wasn't your sister. This is why your sister SHOULD listen to Mom! She knows what's best, and knows how to protect you from bad people.\n\nLunch ends and you attend the rest of your classes without incident. Finally after school lets out, you run into your sister. She sees you, but refuses to talk to you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go talk to your sister", "result": "Even though you know your sister doesn't like Mom, she's still family, and needs to realize that Mom's only looking out for her. You have to convince her.\n\nYou go up to your sister who doesn't want anything to do with you after this morning, but you tell her what Butch was bragging about. She doesn't care and while she claims she doesn't believe you, you can tell she does, but her dislike for you and Mom is greater than Butch's infidelity. You start to get angry and start to yell at her saying that she doesn't know what's good for her, you attempt to get physical, but Butch stops you as he's coming out of the school.\n\nThis results in you picking up a nearby rock, and smacking him in the head with it a couple times knocking him to the ground, your sister runs off and you go chasing after her in an attempt to show her the \"light\".\n\nYou finally catch her in the park, where you give her an ultimatium of either obey Mom's rules or die. Your sister can't believe how over the edge you've gone until you start choking her. So enthusiastic you are to display your loyalty to Mom by \"punishing\" your sister, you don't even hear a passing police officer say \"GET YOUR HANDS OF THE GIRL OR I'LL SHOOT!\"\nThe officer was enthusiastic too.\n\nYou feel three bullets hit you in the body, one more in the head and then you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Ignore her and go home", "result": "Your sister is hopeless. You feel anger towards your sister, you can see that she doesn't appreciate all the sacrifices Mom makes for her. You hope she does move out, that'll leave you and Mom more time to spend together.\n\nYou head home and wait for Mom to arrive. When she steps in, you hug her as she comes in the door, she hugs you back.\n\nShe tells you to do some chores, but you don't mind, in fact you're happy to do them. You and Mom talk a little more than you normally do at dinner, now that your sister is out of the way and not around to cause trouble everything is good, and you feel wanted for the first time in your life.\n\nYou talk into the night with her, until she tells you its time to go to bed.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to bed", "result": "You do what Mom says and go to bed. You wonder if you should've pursued another path, with her, but you quickly dismiss such thoughts. You realize that if Mom wanted anything else from you, she would've told you. For now, she wants you to be a good and obedient son, just like you've always been. No strange thoughts, just total subservience to her. Submission of your will to her, emotions just make things more complicated. You make it a promise to yourself to do just that.\n\nAnother day breaks, and once again you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Insist on talking more", "result": "You want to stay up all night talking with your Mom, you've never felt closer to her than you ever have in your entire life. Underneath her cold exterior, you can see a gentle and caring woman. She's just lonely...\n\nYour Mom says she has to go to work tomorrow and has to go to bed herself. She says you can stay up though if you want, but not to bitch about it when she wakes you up tomorrow.\n\nShe leaves, and you feel a little confused, you're not sure how to proceed.", "action_results": [{"action": "Watch TV", "result": "You sit and watch TV dejectedly and wonder about what just happened.\n\nCould it be that you imagined things? Let it run wild? You suddenly realize what has been occurring in your mind. And it isn't right. You realize you've been thinking VERY sick thoughts about your mother. You couldn't help it though, she seemed so nice to you today...\n\nBut no! You have to supress these feelings! Its the only way. you struggle all night with your derranged mind until you fall asleep with the TV still on.\n\nThe next day you awake, something's different...it worked.\n\nYou feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Follow her", "result": "You realize that she wants YOU to take the initiative! She already showed she was interested. She called you a good son, she kissed you, and now she's hinted about going to bed. It doesn't get anymore obvious to you.\n\nShe loves you the same way you love her...\n\nYou enter her room and see her sleeping. You slide into bed next to her. You feel like when you used to crawl into her bed when you were scared of the dark as a little kid. And much like then, you feel so safe being this close to her. She doesn't seem to mind, she cuddles up next to you, but she's still asleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to sleep", "result": "You just want to be next to her. Nothing wrong with that. As you drift off to sleep, your Mom begins grinding even closer on to you. There's no doubt that she doesn't know who you are now...\n\nSomehow it doesn't matter. She wakes you up with a kiss. Her loneliness for physical pleasure is too great and her love for you is too strong. This feels so right to you. You realize why the girls at school never \"did it\" for you, it was always Mom you lusted for, you've always known, and now its all coming true. She begins to mount you and guides your hands all over her body. She is your teacher, she is your master, she is your life.\n\nYou and Mom spend a night of hot taboo passion as your virgin seed enters the very womb that bore you. You fall asleep nestled in her protective bosom, just like when you were a baby.\n\nThe next day you feel much different. You FEEL. You're not repressed anymore. Your love for your Mom, is now finally out and she knows about it and feels the same way. Of course this will have to be your little secret, but right now all that's important is:\n\nIts another day and you feel love...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take it one step further", "result": "You begin to caress and kiss her beautiful body. Your Mom begins to stir a little and opens her eyes...\n\nAnd is horrified!\n\n\"WHAT THE FUCK ARE YOU DOING?!!? I'M YOUR MOTHER YOU SICK FUCK!!!!\"\n\nYour mother throws you off of her and begins to beat you mercilessly!\n\nYou don't understand, you thought she loved you. You thought you understood...but it was all just a fantasy that YOU made up in your twisted mind. Your mother never hinted that she had any interest in you in that way! Even her kiss was just a peck on the lips. Nothing more, but you turned it into something else, along with everything else she did.\n\nYou feel betrayed, you did everything she ever said, only to find out she doesn't love you afterall. You feel rage like you've never felt before, you attack!\n\nYour Mom isn't like you though, she's strong with a fighting personality. She isn't a push over like you are. She throws a table lamp at your head as you attempt to assault her. As it smashes into your skull, you fall crashing to the ground unconscious.\n\nWhen you wake up, you're in a holding cell. A decision is still being made if you should be going to jail or a mental institution.\nIts ultimately decided that you belong in a mental institution. You're doped up silly for the rest of your life.\n\nOnce again, you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Side with sis", "result": "You know, you've really had it with Mom picking on your sister all the time. Sure she's a little wild, but she isn't a slut and doesn't deserve to be called one, you tell Mom as much.\nYour sister and especially your Mom are both VERY surprised! Your Mom gets even angrier and slaps you!\n\n\"So both of you ungrateful shits turn against me! Get the fuck out of my house right now! NOW! And don't fucking return if you aren't going to live by my rules!\" She yells and storms out of the kitchen.\n\nYou and your sister leave, but as you both head off to school, she thanks you for taking her side.\n\n\"Thanks, its nice to have an ally for once against that fucking harpy!\"\n\nYou feel a little pleased. Its nice to be appreciated for once.\n\nWhen you get to school, you see Henry the school bully kicking the hell out of your \"friend\" Aaron. You don't really care for Aaron, but he looks at you in the hopes you'll help him.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help Aaron", "result": "You step up to Henry.\n\"What the fuck do you want faggot?\" he demands.\n\nYou don't even answer, you just punch Henry. Henry punches you back! Any other time you might run away, but this is different! Somehow when you stood up to Mom today, you feel a lot more confident! You and Henry begin to wrestle in the hallway, until a teacher breaks you up. Normally you'd get sent to the principal's office, but the teacher just yells at you instead. Aaron thanks you profusely and states how he'll do all your homework for you.\n\nYour sense of accomplishment grows. You like being praised for your deeds.\n\nWhen you get to your computer class, you notice that your sister's friend Jessica, is having problems with today's lesson.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help Jessica", "result": "You go up to Jessica and explain what she's doing wrong and how she NEEDS to be doing it. You proceed to take completely over.\n\nWhile Jessica wouldn't have minded your help, she doesn't particularly care for how you approached her. She didn't ASK you for your help and your arrogant manner has turned her off. And the fact you told her that she may \"thank you now\" made things even worse.\n\nYou've lost your shot at her, but that doesn't seem to bother you, the fact that she didn't praise the ground you walk on for your help, bothers you more. Some people are just ungrateful you guess.\n\nLunchtime comes around and Aaron begins thanking you again, for helping him. You enjoy his praise until you tire of him and tell him to shut up and get you another can of Coke, which he complies.\n\nAt this point you overhear your sister's boyfriend Butch brag to all his friends about some girl he slept with last night. A girl that wasn't your sister.\n\nYou wonder if you should confront him, but you don't see how this could be readily advantageous to you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Confront Butch", "result": "Your sister has been getting fucked around by this guy for too long. He constantly cheats on her and she always takes him back. Well it stops today, because YOU know what's best for her.\n\nYou immediately confront Butch, he turns around wondering what you want, and you tell him to stay away from your sister. He laughs in your face and tells you to fuck off. This once again prompts you to resort to violence.\n\nYou punch Butch in the face, but the guy's a jock, he can easily withstand anything you can dish out. Not to mention he's got six of his buddies to help him.\n\nThey beat the hell out of you and throw you in the Cafeteria garbage can, and take off laughing before an authority figure catches them.\nYou get sent to the principal's office for getting into your second fight today!\n\nAfter getting suspended for the next three days, you run into your sister outside of school who walks up to you pissed as hell.\n\n\"What the fuck did you think you were doing picking a fight with Butch?!\"\n\nYou attempt to explain, but she's not listening.\n\n\"He stopped doing that! He loves me! You're just trying to control my life! I heard about how you acted towards Jessica today. You're trying to dominate everything just like Mom!\"\n\nAt this point you get enraged with her, for not showing you the gratitude that you deserve! You tried to help her out and this is how she repays you?\nYou slap the shit out of her! She holds her face, hits you back and runs off crying, stating how she's moving out of the house.\n\nGood, you think, if she doesn't know what's good for her, she can get the fuck out.\n\nYou head back home and do what the hell you want, until that bitch you call Mom comes home. She immediately starts her shit.\n\n\"Don't think I haven't forgot about that shit you pulled this morning!\" she begins saying.", "action_results": [{"action": "Argue back with her", "result": "Mom's reign of domination ends fucking today. YOU'RE the fucking man of the house and she needs to recognize that NOW.\n\nYou call her every name in the book, as she returns in kind. She begins slapping you, threatening to kick you out of the house again. You push her down, and overpower her. All your repressed anger is directed towards her. And the shit you've ever had to put up with from her and everyone else is ALL directed at her.\n\nSHE NEVER APPRECIATED ANYTHING YOU EVER FUCKING DID!\n\nYou snap her neck, thus proving you're the dominant one here.\n\nYou feel a great emotional release, but then it disappears. Strange, killing her has completely deadened your emotions again.\n\nYou decide to go to bed.\n\nYou awaken to police taking you away. Your sister ended up coming home in the middle of the night to pick up some things, and she found Mom still laying on the floor where you left her.\n\n\nAnother day in your cell, and once again you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Simmer and just take it", "result": "You say a few things back, but nothing too bad, you HAVE to live here and are too fearful of getting kicked out. Your Mom reads you the riot act and uses vulgar language that would shame a sailor. She verbally emasculates you to a degree that assures she's still in control of this house. All the feelings you had before fade. As quickly as gained your sense of \"rebellion\" your Mom has crushed it within a blink of an eye.\n\nYou go upstairs to bed, your spirit utterly crushed.\n\nAnother day arrives, and once again you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Keep quiet", "result": "No advantange in getting your ass kicked by Butch and six of his friends. No you know what to do. You attend all your classes as usual and wait until after school where you rat on Butch to your sister. She's really upset and confronts him about it. As they start to argue, you see Aaron and tell him that if Butch gets rough with your sister, he should step in and help, since she'll find that attractive and might go out with him.\n\nPoor Aaron already blindly loyal to you, readily believes your lies and sure enough as soon as Butch grabs your sister, Aaron attempts to defend her and gets the shit beaten out of him very badly. Your sister see first hand the brutality of Butch and screams for someone to help, where upon one of the teachers from the school removes Butch and has someone call the paramedics for Aaron.\n\nButch will soon be paying legally for what he did to Aaron. For now though your sister is a bit distraught over all this, she's going to go home, despite the fact she'll have to face Mom.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go home", "result": "You decide its time to take control of the household. After all you're the fucking man of the house, and that bitch Mom of yours better realize that, besides the shift in power is in your favor with your sister on your firmly on your side now.\n\nYour prepare your sister for the coming confrontation with Mom, she looks less than excited to do it, but you helped her a lot today and agrees it needs to be done.\n\nWhen Mom comes home you immediately go on the offensive, totally catching her off guard. You do most of the fighting, your sister only piping up when you ask her to, you unleash a litany of cruel truths to your Mom. You mention how she's a lonely dried up over the hill woman who needs someone in her life because she's an unhappy person. So if she knows what's good for her she'll start treating you both with more respect. And that's just one of the things you say. Not that she isn't totally without ammo, but you feel actually energized by the battle. Like you're getting off on the conflict. Eventually you wear her down and she half-heartly gives in.\n\nYou know that your Mom is never going to be docile, but you've effectively changed the balance of power. You go to bed totally pleased by your victory. Your confidence transformed into arrogance and finally into outright manipulative nastiness.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel like Mom...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stay out", "result": "Heh heh, let sis handle Mom, you're going to do something you've never done. Party all night!\n\nYou end up going to a club and even though you haven't really had any previous experience with these places or any other major social gathering you seem to fit in very well. It amazing how far your new outlook on life has taken you within a short period of time.\n\nYou realize that following all those rules was idiotic. You're going to have fun and anyone who tries to stop you is going to pay the price. Nobody is more important than you.\n\nYour home life changes quite a bit. Now its Mom yelling at you constantly rather than your sister, who seems to have calmed down quite a bit. Strange how things balance out.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel rebellious...", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Ignore her", "result": "Jessica didn't ask for your help, and you don't want to make an annoyance of yourself, so you go to your seat and quietly do your work.\n\nSoon, Jessica comes up to you and asks you for your help, since she knows you're good with computers. You're glad to lend her a hand. You've always liked her to some degree even if you never showed it. Now you have the perfect opportunity to do so.\n\nAs you explain things to her you get the feeling she no longer thinks of you as your sister's \"creepy\" brother anymore. She really welcomes your help.\n\nClass ends and your confidence increases. You think you might even ask Jessica out tomorrow!\n\nLunchtime comes around and Aaron sits next to you as he normally does. He continues to thank you for what you did earlier. He says you've inspired him a bit.\n\nMeanwhile you happen to over hear your sister's boyfriend Butch, who's bragging about his sexual exploits to his friends.\n\n\"Yeah I fucked that bitch straight in the fucking ass last night! Haw Haw!\"\n\nYou're about to get up to defend your sister's honor, but suddenly you realize he's talking about a completely different girl. It appears Butch has been cheating on your sister again.", "action_results": [{"action": "Confront Butch", "result": "Butch has been treating your sister like this for too long. Its time to stand up to him, since she won't do it.\n\nYou immediately pull him aside and tell him to stay away from your sister.\nHe laughs in your face and pushes you to the ground. Then his six friends stand up...\n\nHowever your recent actions of defending Aaron cause him to try to help you out, by kicking Butch in the shin. Butch winces in pain, but immediately turns his attention to Aaron. He and his friends ignore you and beat the shit out of him. Seriously injuring him.\n\nThe following events occur due to your hubris...\n\nAaron has to be hospitalized and never fully recovers from suffering minor brain damage.\n\nButch and his friends are charged, but ultimately nothing comes of it, since most of their parents are rich and Aaron's weren't. Charges are dropped. They're all expelled and school is sued however.\n\nYou are also expelled since its determined that you started the fight in the first place, not to mention you your previous actions of fighting with Henry earlier that day, displays that you're a trouble maker.\n\nYou sister blames you for Butch dumping her permanently, despite the fact you were actually trying to help her.\n\nFinally Mom gets SUPER pissed off at you for causing all this shit, causing her to miss lots of work. She sets you straight by breaking your will once more which is rather easy since you blame yourself for all of what happened. If you hadn't indulged you emotions this all would've never came about. You make sure it won't happen again.\n\nAnother day arrives and once again you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Keep quiet", "result": "Maybe you've gained a little more confidence in yourself, but you're not an idiot. You can see Butch has six of his friends there. They're all bigger and stronger than you, being on the football team and all.\n\nYou aren't going to let this go though. Lunch ends and you head to the rest of your classes as normal. After school you run into your sister, who looks happy to see you, until you mention what you heard Butch say.\n\nShe get mad, but not at you. She sees Butch coming out of the school and immediately confronts him and starts yelling at him. He starts yelling back.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stick around", "result": "You aren't just going to leave, you stick around just in case Butch gets violent. Good thing you did, his temper gets worse and he raises his hand to your sister, which you immediately stop. He turns and can't believe you would dare confront him.\n\n\"Huh! You think just because you kicked Henry's ass today, you think you're fucking tough shit? I'm gonna fucking kick your nuts up through your fucking throat! An there ain't no teachers around to break this up!\"\n\nButch swings at you and you dodge. You land some hits, but he's very strong. You feel a great crushing force to your stomach as he slams his fist into it. You fall trying to catch your breath, almost expecting him to finish you off, but Aaron comes out of no where and kicks him in the back of the head! Your earlier actions of defending Aaron have caused him to return the favor. He has distracted Butch long enough for you to punch him in the nuts as hard as you can three times.\n\nButch falls and is in no condition to do anything. Your sister then proceeds to tell him its over for good this time and kicks him a couple times as well.\n\nWell you've accomplished a lot today at school. You've become a real defender, all your previously repressed energy has been channeled positively. However, home still awaits you and you know who awaits you there.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go home", "result": "No point in avoiding it. You have to go home eventually. Your sister isn't staying out tonight, since she's just broken up with Butch. You take this opportunity to convince her that you should put up a united front against Mom. She agrees completely and says its about time Mom's tyranny came to an end.\n\nYou both get home, and psychologically prepare yourself for the battle with Mom, and then she enters the door...\n\nThe battle is joined! Mom starts in on both of you right away! Its a very intense and long arguement, but you have the confidence to finally stand up to her and you also have your sister to back you up. As much as Mom continues to threaten to throw you both out of the house, you can tell she's bluffing. She doesn't REALLY want either of you to leave her. If you guys weren't there, she'd have nobody around and then she'd truely be alone.\n\nThe arguement lasts into the night, but it finally ends, with you as the victor. Mom eventually half-heartedly gives in, but not before telling the both of you, what ungrateful brats you are.\n\nYou go to bed that night, with a complete and total feeling of liberation. You have confidence that you've never had before and you can FEEL. By god, you can finally feel!\n\nAnother day breaks, and you feel absolute joy.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stay out", "result": "It could be that you're feeling rebellious, or it could be that you're just not confident enough to stand up to your Mom in a knock down drag out arguement. That little one this morning will be nothing compared to what will await you tonight if you went home. After all you gotta live with her and she still commands a very intimidating presence. 18 years of indoctrination is hard to completely shake in one day.\n\nYour sister suggests a club that doesn't check IDs, since she isn't eager to go home either, but she won't be staying at Butch's anymore.", "action_results": [{"action": "Party time!", "result": "Well its not really your thing, but you don't really have any other ideas at this point, so you agree.\n\nThe bouncer at the club lets your sister in immediately when he sees her since she's a regular here. She explains you're with her, he doesn't seem to like you, but he lets you in.\n\nYour senses are instantly assaulted by loud music and flashing blinding lights.\n\n\"Woohoo! I'm getting liquored up tonight!\" your sister says and disappears into the crowd heading towards the bar.\n\nYou quietly sit in an empty booth, for some reason you start to feel a little less adventurous again. Less emotional. School was a \"controled environment\" This place is like a sensory overload to you. Too much chaos.\n\nYou sit and watch all the people going by engaging in various activities. Soon an incredibly friendly girl comes up to you wanting you to follow her.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow her", "result": "You follow her on to the dance floor. You of course have no idea how to dance, but that doesn't seem to matter to the girl, who's grinding all over you.\nA few minute go by and you begin to realize this isn't that bad! You're starting to enjoy yourself. You guess it just took you a little time to get accustomed to this environment.\n\nIt seems the girl wants you to follow her somewhere else now...", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow her", "result": "You follow the girl into one of the bathrooms, specifically one of the stalls.\n\nStill a little naive about certain things, you're not exactly sure what's going to happen until she kneels in front of you...\n\nAfterwards, you feel a little bewildered about what happened. Its definitely not a common occurence for you. You can't say you didn't enjoy it though.\n\nYou leave the club and sneak back to your house, carefully not waking Mom up.\n\nYou go to bed, thinking about the unusual day and night you've had, and realizing that you should've been having fun like this in the first place.\n\nTime passes and things have improved for you at school. At home its a living hell. You argue with Mom as much as your sister does now, but nobody gets kicked out. You start staying out all night whoremongering, you also start to not feel well though in the coming months.\n\nAnother day arrives, and you feel deathly sick...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go do something else", "result": "You decide you don't want to spend the entire night dancing with one girl, so you spend the night looking for other girls to dance with. (Yes, you WERE oblivious to what the first girl had in mind!) You have fun without going overboard, and that's probably for the best since all this is brand new to you.\n\nEventually you leave the club and sneak back in your house, making sure you don't wake Mom up.\n\nYou lie in bed thinking about the unusual day and night you had and realize there isn't anything wrong with not following the rules ALL the time, and you also realize you're secure enough not to do something stupid. And Mom's just going to have to get used to that idea.\n\nAnother day arrives, and you finally feel normal...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Stay put", "result": "Nope, you just can't get into it. Its all too much for you. You decline her offer and continue to just observe.\n\nPretty soon, you see your sister stumbling around, she's not drunk enough to pass out, but she is drunk enough to be acting like an idiot. You notice other guys attempting to take advantage of this fact, you step in, and start escorting her out. When you get outside, you half expect her to start yelling at you for ruining her fun, but she doesn't. Instead she starts getting all weepy. Stating how you've been looking out for her all day and that no guy has ever done that, since they all treat her like shit.\n\nYou tell her to just calm down and take her to the car. Since she's in no condition to drive (Though that's never stopped her before) As you put her in the back seat, she kisses you on the lips, with full tongue. You recoil back a bit in surprise.\n\nSurely its the alcohol...or is it?", "action_results": [{"action": "Drive her home", "result": "Alcohol definitely! You know that she gets pretty friendly after she's been drinking. You dismiss it. You can't possibly believe that she'd have that kind of interest in you. She may be a bit wild, but not to that extent!\n\nAs you drive back home, she falls asleep in the back, thanking you for looking out.\n\nYou get back home, unfortunately you're carrying your sister back in and you wake Mom up. She's pissed and iching for a fight. Normally her tirades would effect you more, but not after what you've been through. You're tired of her ordering everyone around, she has no idea how to REALLY look out for someone. If she did, your sister wouldn't be the mess she is.\n\nYou put your sister on the sofa, and yell at your Mom telling her she needs to stop acting like a fucking dictator and to start acting like a mother, because she's going to drive away the both of you if she keeps this up.\n\nYour words seem to have somewhat of an effect. Your Mom still doesn't want to admit defeat though, she says you're ALL going to talk about this tomorrow. You're tired, and don't want to argue anymore tonight, so you agree.\n\nYou head up to bed, realizing that your actions today have worn you out! Being a defender isn't easy. Its very taxing, but somehow you like it. Its much better than being the emotionless android you were acting like before. Its like you have a purpose in life now.\n\nAnother day breaks, and you feel fulfilled...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Drive her \"home\"", "result": "That wasn't the alcohol. You know how much your sister can drink. And she hasn't drank nearly enough to not know what the hell she's doing.\n\nYou kiss her back, as she begins to take off her tight clothing. Suddenly it occurs to you that this is right. Your sister NEEDS someone to look out for her, otherwise she'll get into all kinds of trouble. All your helpful actions today have lead up to this moment. The natural progression of your relationship with her. You've always felt that you had a special connection with her, you're her balancer, her anchor if you will. That's why you were so repressed, you felt these emotions were wrong, but now you realize that was just society's rules being forced on you and its apparent that your sister had felt the same way, why else would she put herself in abusive relationships on purpose? She was attempting to run away from her own feelings in a different way. Well no more, tonight you both commit to your true feelings.\n\nYou and your sister proceed to make passionate forbidden love in the backseat of her car where you both fall asleep afterwards.\n\nThe next day when you wake up you both feel a little weird, but somehow satisfied. You don't say anything to each other, you both just slip your clothes back on and drive home. She holds your hand as you drive, occasionally smiling at you. You're fully prepared to hear Mom bitch at the both of you, but it doesn't matter anymore because together there's nobody that can get in your way.\n\nYes, its a brand new day, and you feel absolute contentment...", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Go find something else to do", "result": "That may be your sister's path, but it isn't yours. You decline the offer, and she tells you goodbye and thanks you for sticking up for her today.\n\nYou begin to walk around wondering where to go, where all of a sudden Jessica calls out to you.\n\nYou stop and wait for her to arrive, she says she heard what happened with Butch and she said she's glad to hear that your sister finally dumped him for good. Jessica had been telling your sister that for a year now, but she never listened to her.\n\nJessica seems impressed by your actions today, looks like you won't have to wait until tomorrow to ask her out, she's interested now!", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the park", "result": "You decide to go for a nice leisurely walk in the park, you can get to know her as you talk and walk in the full bloom of nature.\n\nYou and Jessica are having a relatively good time, as the approaching evening makes the moon come out, making this \"date\" just a little bit more romantic.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find some place to make out", "result": "While you attempt to find a secluded spot, the approaching evening brings out bad elements of society. Particularly ones you've had run ins with today.\n\n\"Thought you were gonna get away with that shit? Bleed motherfucker!\" Henry shouts jumping out of nowhere and stabbing you repeatedly. Jessica attempts to help until he slaps her and begins to assault her.\n\nBeing a \"good guy\" has its drawbacks, the world is very unfair when people like you aren't allowed happiness, but that's life. As you lay bleeding to death, hearing Jessica's screams, you realize it would've been better for all, if you hadn't felt the need to turn into a crusader today.\n\nYou feel life ebb away then you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take her home", "result": "All these new feelings are still a bit overwhelming to you, so you decide not to take it to that level just yet. Besides you don\u2019t really want to be hanging out in the park too long at night.\n\nYou take Jessica home who agrees to go out with you again and gives you a big kiss before she goes in which puts a perfect end to this day.\n\nYou sneak back to your house, carefully not waking Mom up. You know you\u2019ll have to deal with her in the morning, but that doesn\u2019t seem to bother you. You\u2019ve accomplished a lot today and that fills you with a sense of achievement that you\u2019ve never felt before.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel triumphant\u2026", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go to her house", "result": "Her Mom works nights so you take advantage of the fact you won't be disturbed. You and Jessica have a good time getting to know each other a little better, a lot better in fact.\n\nOkay not THAT much better! Jessica may be a friend of your sister's, but she's not the \"free spirit\" she is. Jessica stops you from going any further and says she's just not ready to do that yet, especially since this is basically your first date!", "action_results": [{"action": "Get agressive", "result": "You know its always tragic to see how easy it is to fall from a positive path...\n\nMaybe it was your built up confidence crossing over to arrogance. Maybe you felt all your \"good deeds\" today should be \"rewarded\". Maybe it was just an overload of different emotions in one day from a previous complete lack of social interaction. Maybe it was a combination of all three factors as well as other ones, but your choice has lead you to perform a dispicable action, effectively erasing anything positive you've done today.\n\nAfterwards, you feel different, like something shut down inside your head. Perhaps it was a left over shred of morality reminding you of the evil you just committed. Whatever it was, you end up running off, leaving Jessica behind. You feel panic, fear, shame, regret, and disgust all at the same time. As these emotions assault you, you clutch your head, scream and end up collapsing in the park.\n\nYou're awakened the next morning by the police, who've been looking for you, you meekly and quietly go with them.\n\nIts a brand new day and you feel everlasting anguish...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Respect her wishes", "result": "You didn't very well expect everything to go your way on your very first day of acting like a real person did you? Part of being a \"good guy\" is not necessarily expecting a \"reward\" for things you've done. Fortunately even with your low social skills you've realized this fact.\n\nYou tell Jessica how you can't wait to see her tomorrow, and how you'll take her on a real date after school. She says she looks forward to it and kisses you goodnight before you leave.\n\nAs you sneak back into your house, you think about how much you've changed in one day. For the most part you stood up against things you saw as unjust, yet you still recognized you have to have your own life as well. You'll still have to put up with your Mom's domineering personality and your sister is still a party animal, but you can't change people overnight, let alone the world. All you can do is TRY to do the right thing and hope everything works out for the best.\n\nAnd so far it looks like it's working out for you. Small victories will lead to bigger ones eventually, you know it will.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel hopeful...", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Ignore him", "result": "You leave Aaron to his fate. Your emotions have become dead again. You just don't care anymore. What happened at the house was just an usual oddity in your \"normal\" behavior you guess.\n\nYou go through your day numb as usual, when you get home, Mom reads you the riot act for this morning. This only makes you realize that speaking out against her wasn't a good idea in the first place. You go to bed.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Stay in bed", "result": "You don't get up. Today is different somehow. You don't know why, but it is.\n\nYour mother is screaming at you to come down.\n\nIt doesn't even faze you. Her threats meaning nothing anymore.\n\nYou hear her coming up the stairs.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay in bed", "result": "She enters the room, screaming at you as usual. You don't even hear her. You've heard it all before.\n\nShe begins to prod you, as you still lay in bed, oblivious to her. She shakes you and hits you, still nothing. Finally she drags you out of the bed and onto the floor...\n\nYou're totally catatonic.\n\nYour mom screams for your sister to help her, and some confusion occurs. You are completely still from the time, the ambulance come to pick you up, to the time you're put in the catatonia ward.\n\nAs you remain in your cell, you feel something. Freedom. Its ironic, in this place of walls and bars, and your catatonic state, you finally feel free. Your mind is completely free of the problems of the real world, and best of all free of Mom.\n\nAnother day arrives as you lay motionless in a bed and you feel free...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Get ready for her", "result": "Your mother comes bursting in the room.\n\n\"What the fuck are you still doing in fucking bed? Its time for you to get your ass up and go to fucking school! What the fuck are you doing with your hands under the covers? Are you fucking jerking...\"\n\nBefore your mother can finish her rant, you flip your covers off and shoot her in the head.\n\nWow. You didn't realize you were that good of a shot, you weren't even aiming.\n\nYour mother slumps to the floor and you jump out of bed, fully dressed for today. You hear your sister running up the stairs screaming, wondering what's going on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go meet your sister", "result": "You appear suddenly as your sister comes from around the corner of the stairs, she has just enough time to see Mom's dead body and the pistol you're aiming at her.\n\nYou shoot twice, the bullets can't miss at this range. Your sister goes flying down the stairs and is already dead by the time she hits the bottom.\n\nYep, today is a different day...", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to school", "result": "You collect all the other weapons you had stored in your room. You always knew this day would come.\n\nYou kiss your Mom and sister goodbye. It wasn't their fault, you just had to do it.\n\nJust like you have to do it again.\n\nTaking your Mom's car, you get to school, just in time to see your \"friend\" Aaron, getting beat up in the parking lot by the school bully Henry.\n\nYou double check your weapons before getting out of the car. Henry and Aaron both notice the amount of firepower you're packing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dispense Mayhem", "result": "\"Hold on don't...\" Henry says before taking a shotgun slug to the chest, killing him instantly.\n\nAaron at first looks at you as a savior from his tormentor. His expression soon changes to fear when that same shotgun is then pointed at him, exploding his head like a ripe mellon.\n\nYour actions have now attracted a bit of attention. Students who were in the parking lot are now running for their lives or attempting to drive off.", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter the school through the gym", "result": "You run around to the back of the school in the attempts to do what you have to do as quickly as possible.\n\nYou throw the doors open and gym class is in full session. You see so many...targets. Your eyes especially focus on Butch. Your sister's boyfriend. You immeidately take out your sub-machine gun and begin spraying the place. Some escape, some die instantly, some lay wounded on the floor begging for mercy. You take the opportunity to shoot the wounded one by one in a calculating manner.\n\nYou do this very calmly. Like stepping on ants...\n\nButch attempts to crawl away, but you spray him again with bullets. He lies still in a bloody mess.\n\nAt this point, a majority of the school has been alerted of the things you're doing. The cops should be here shortly.\n\nYou make your way down the corridor...", "action_results": [{"action": "Head towards a classroom", "result": "You know EXACTLY which classroom to enter.\n\nYou go straight to it, shooting the janitor on the way there and a couple of students that you catch in the hallway.\n\nYou enter your designated target area. And its still full. The class was cowering, hoping you'd pass by, but fate was not with them today.\n\nYou see her. Jessica. Your sister's friend. She looks very frightened, but then again everyone in the class does.\n\nYou assess the situation with your shotgun in hand...", "action_results": [{"action": "You know what to do", "result": "There's no other way. You begin blasting the room with buckshot, and don't stop shooting until you're sure everyone is dead.\n\nThe room is covered in gore. You look at Jessica and kiss her blood soaked lips. There just wasn't enough time.\n\nYou exit the class room. You hear police sirens and bullhorns screaming at you to give up. Most of the school has been evacuated at this point.\n\nJust you alone in the school and the cops waiting for you outside now.", "action_results": [{"action": "Let's finish it", "result": "You reload all your weapons calmly and exit through the front door.\n\n\"DROP YOUR FUCKING WEAPONS NOW!\" you hear a cop shout.\n\nYou immediately open fire on them. You barely get off a few rounds before they fill you with lead, dropping you.\n\nYou fall to the ground, and breathe your last breath.\n\nNobody ever really knows why you did the terrible things you did that dark day. The only clue is the note they found in your pocket saying:\n\nI feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Surrender", "result": "Something over comes you. You suddenly feel a sense of self preservation. The only thing you HAVE felt during this bloody day.\n\nYou drop all your weapons and exit the school completely unarmed. The police quickly take you down and drag you away.\n\nYou feel completely numb during the trial, its ultimately decided that you're completely nuts to do what you did (Despite outcries for your death) so you are put in a mental institution. To this day nobody can figure out exactly why you did what you did.\n\nA reporter comes in to do a special on mass murderers and you were on the top on the list. He doesn't get too far with his questions though, he asks WHY you did it. You just say it had to be done. He asks you how you feel about killing all those people. But you give the same answer you gave at the trial\n\nYou feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "It's all for her", "result": "There's no other way. You pull out your pistol and begin shooting people with deadly accuracy, until only you and Jessica are left.\n\nJessica is paralyzed with fear. She doesn't realize though, that this has all been for her. She never noticed you before. How much you cared for her. How much you loved her. Well she'll ALWAYS remember you now. You've made sure of that.\n\nAs she cowers and shakes expecting you to kill her, you hand her your pistol. She's too frightened. She just wants you to leave her alone. You have to help her.\n\nYou put the pistol in her hand and force her to squeeze the trigger until it releases its bullet into your heart.\n\nAt last you don't feel the nawing pain of unquenched love anymore.\n\nYou feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Try to escape now", "result": "Suddenly a sense of fear builds up inside you. You realize what you've done. You can't take what you've done back and worse you're not going to get away with it.\n\nYou begin to run. You don't know where to go though, so you head back home. You hear sirens. They're closing in.\n\nIts too much for you, you're afraid. You feel the fear, until you realize, you don't have to be afraid. At least not of death! Death is peace. Its unfeeling peace. You want that feeling again.\n\nYou sit down on the sofa and blow your brains out, just as the cops bust the door down. But they can't do anything to you now though because\n\nYou feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Attempt to stop escapees", "result": "You begin spraying the parking lot randomly, attempting to stop people from either running or driving off.\n\nPeople are screaming and ducking from the hail of bullets you're peeling off. People and cars are being hit indisciminately\n\nThe funny thing about shooting at a car, is the small possiblity of hitting the gas tank. The possibility of you going on a killing rampage today was actually greater than one of your bullets hitting a gas tank. Probabilty has played a strange role in today's events, because you succeeded in accomplishing both of those odds.\n\nUnfortunately you were standing too close to the explosion when the first car went up and igniting the others in a domino effect. (Thus accomplishing yet another small possibility)\n\nYou feel a painful burning sensation all over your body for a brief moment then\n\nYou feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Dispense Justice", "result": "\"Hey wait, no...\" Henry utters before you blast his internal organs to hamburger with your shotgun.\n\nAaron looks upon you as a savior. You are. You now know why you came to school. To right the injustices that have occurred. You immediately make your way to the gym. You see Butch, your sister's boyfriend. HE was responsible for leading your sister astray, most of the jocks in here deserve to die. Long have they taunted those they percieve as weaker.\n\nYou catch them completely off guard, you manage to blast Butch first and then pick off his friends as they attempt to run for their pathetic lives.\n\nYou then single out teachers who attempted to bully you with their \"Rules\". Their rules are meaningless to you. You serve a higher power. Justice. You sneer as one woman begs you not to kill her for the sake of her son. Her son will be much better off without the likes of her...\n\nPeople are running in terror from you, but its only because they FEAR the justice you may dispense if they are found guilty.\n\nThe police soon arrive and they are here to dispense their OWN brand of justice. You do not acknowledge this though. What you've done today, will be remembered, nobody can judge you and nobody will.\n\nYou turn one of your guns on yourself. You feel a great sense of pride, before squeezing the trigger.\n\nThen you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "End it now", "result": "You think about going to school, but you just don't feel like it. Its all so futile anyway. Everything. What you did didn't change anything, so why bother continuing with this pointless carnage?\n\nYou decide there is no point, you sit next to your Mom's body, calmly put the gun in your mouth and then\n\nYou feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go out the window", "result": "You panic! You don't know what came over you. It was just her constant nagging, her verbal abuse, it just got to the point where you couldn't take it anymore. You don't want to kill anyone else.\n\nAs you attempt to go out your window, but your sister is already up the stairs and sees what you've done. She also calls out to you.\n\n\"Stop! You don't need to run away! Its okay. Just come back inside.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Listen to your sister", "result": "You stop to listen to your sister, you're still scared and panicked, but she's never caused you harm.\n\n\"Its okay I understand, you just couldn't take it anymore. Look what she did to you...okay, I know what to do. You just have to stay calm for me okay?\" she says.\n\nYou shake and tremble, but you nod your head. She tells you she's going to leave for a little while, but she'll be back. You don't want her to go, but she says she has to, if she's going to help. You reluctantly agree.\n\nAfter sis leaves, its just you alone in the house with Mom's dead body.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to hide it", "result": "Weird scenarios enter your head in your state of panic. What if some insistant vaccum salesman knocks on the door and demands to demonstrate his product? Or maybe someone checking for Radon levels in the house?\n\nYou have to hide the body!\n\nYou pick Mom up, trying to figure out where to put her. You decide your closet, unfortunately your closet is full of crap, so you attempt to stuff her in there throwing your entire body into it. As you begin to breathe hard, you catch the fragrence of the perfume still lingering on her body, you notice her dress has been lifted up as you've been attempting to shove her in your closet. You're aroused as you also notice you're positioned between her legs, you begin to have BAD thoughts as you stroke her thighs.\n\nYou can't stop yourself...\n\nDuring this completely immoral act, you don't feel panic anymore, you feel power. Total power. All that shit she did to you, you're returning in kind. Now YOU have the power over her. You feel so fuckin' alive!\n\nAs you finish up, you hear your sister come back home.", "action_results": [{"action": "Demonstrate your power again", "result": "You calm yourself, quickly get your pants back on, and head downstairs.\n\nYour sister seems to have gone shopping for \"body disposing\" supplies. How thoughtful. She explains that Mom's body could be disposed of, and it sounds like sis has thought about killing the bitch herself, but was too weak to do it. Her weakness sickens you...\n\nYou grab the shovel and smash your sister in the face with it until you're pretty sure she's not moving anymore. You feel that orgasmic rush again. No panic at all this time. No fear. Just a release.\n\nYou've at last realized your repressed emotions have never really been repressed. You just don't have any, at least not in the traditional sense. You only feel rage and loathing for those who would try to control you and contempt and disgust for those weaker than you. You only feel happy when you kill. And you want to feel happy ALL the time...\n\nYou pack up as much of your things as you can and prepare to leave for the road tomorrow.\n\nTomorrow arrives and you feel unrelenting hate...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Try to place the body back and act like nothing has happend", "result": "Suddenly you begin to panic again, and you start to fumble with Mom's body which has obviously been violated with the ripped up clothing and all. Of course even without that evidence, you standing over her with your pants off is enough for your sister to draw her own conclusions when she walks in on your attempt to make things \"normal\" again.\n\nYour sister won't help you with this. Instead of looking like a sympathetic emotionally abused victim who was driven over the edge, you now look like a sick homicidal incestuous necrophiliac (And you are)\n\nShe screams and runs out of the house before you can stop her. You know she's going to get the police and you can't say you blame her. You're revolted by your actions. You throw up.\n\nYou don't know why you did the things you did today, but you're sorry you did. You begin to cry and scream as your tortured mind attempts to make sense of the situation, up until the time the police take you away.\n\nEventually it's decided you should be in a mental institution, it doesn't matter to you though since all you want to do is die.\n\nAnother day arrives, you wake up in your cell and feel torment...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Leave it where it is", "result": "You don't even want to look at it, let alone touch it. Besides sis told you everything would be okay if you just stayed calm. You downstairs to watch TV, but you start to worry about where your sister is at. You begin to panic again, you feel so lost.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run", "result": "You totally lose it! You know your sister went to go get the cops! They're probably on their way here right now! You run like a mad man down the street until you pass out from hyperventilation.\n\nWhen you wake up, your sister is standing over you, scolding you for running off like that. You were fortunate that she saw you lying face first on the sidewalk. This doesn't reassure you though and you continue to gibber about being caught. Your sister gets irritated by your behavior and ends up having to dispose of the body herself. Later a story is made up that your Mom just up and left and never came back, unfortunately your constant nevousness give you away and you blab everything.\n\nBoth of you get charged, but since your sister never actually killed anyone, she get a lesser sentence. You feel completely relieved by all this even though you're going to jail for life. The fear and panic have left you, and have been replaced by a welcomed numbness again.\n\nAnother day arrives in your cell and you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wait", "result": "You wait patiently because you were told to do so. Something about realizing that makes you a lot calmer.\n\nYour sister returns with \"body disposing\" items. She says you could either chop her up in the bathtub and then dispose of her in garbage bags or just wait until night and bury her in the backyard.\n\nIt almost looks as if your sister had thought about doing it herself at one time. You hadn't even planned it out that far. You tell your sister whatever she thinks is best, but you'll carry it out whatever she decides.\n\nAfter she makes her decision, you go about performing the duty casually. Its almost as if you feel like yourself again. Later your sister makes up an elaborate story about your Mom's disappearance, you back her up without any problems and it is believed.\n\nLife continues as normal for the both of you, sis feels complete freedom to do what she wants and you take care of the more mundane matters that she tells you to do when she doesn't feel like bothering to do them (Which is all the time)\n\nYou now know why you felt fear and panic after you killed your Mom. It was because after so many years of being told what to do you'd destroyed your shackles. Freedom can be frightening and you realized it wasn't for you. Thank god sis has taken over Mom's role now. Its not exactly the same, but its calmer and secure.\n\nAnother day arrives and you feel safe...", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Continue out the window", "result": "You're still too scared, you go out the window and try to climb down, unfortunately your panic prevents you from climbing as efficiently as you'd like.\n\nYou fall off and impale yourself through the chest on the fence surrounding Mom's rose bushes. You gasp for breath, coughing up blood. You feel fear overwhelm you as you approach death.\n\nThen you feel nothing...", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story37.json b/data/scraper/stories/story37.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97470a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story37.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=8038", "context": "", "first_story_block": "You survey the battlefield that you\u2019ve created. All sides have been at war for a long time, and also evenly matched. Who will win? It will all be decided on tonight.\n\n\u201cHey! Its time to go to bed!\u201d you Mom says coming into your room.\n\nOr at least it would be, if you didn\u2019t have to go to bed!\n\n\u201cAw Mom! I was just about to do something!\u201d you protest.\n\u201cWell you can do something tomorrow, right now its bedtime, you know the rules. But before you do remember to brush your teeth and put these toys away.\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026but can\u2019t I leave them out? I got everything set up and like everything! The final battle for the universe is going to take place!\u201d\n\nYour Mom surveys everything you\u2019ve set up. You have a myriad of unusual toys and figures standing next to each other. You have plastic knights standing next to space men defending a castle made of blocks on one side while across from them has a combination of green army guys in vehicles and some metal robots. And yet on the far side of your room is another army set up consisting of dinosaurs and some other monsters. She just smiles at your creativeness.\n\n\u201cVery well, it looks like you went to a lot of trouble, so okay. You certainly do have a vivid imagination to come up with some of the games you do.\u201d\n\nHappily you go brush your teeth, and think about the battle that\u2019s going to take place tomorrow! General Razor will try to storm the castle and Lord Justice will defend it! And then the Dino Demons will try to destroy everything! It\u2019s going to be so cool!\n\nAfter brushing your teeth, you head back to your room where you carefully step around the figures you\u2019ve set up with care and get into bed. Of course as usual, you don\u2019t fall asleep right away; you read a couple pages of your favorite comic book first. Man you wish real life wasn\u2019t as boring as it is. There\u2019s no magic, no super heroes, no giant robots, no nothing! You often wished you lived in a world with all of those things.\n\nYou turn off the lights in your room when your Mom checks on you again and demands you go to sleep. You\u2019re still a little to wound up to fall asleep though, so you just lie in your bed thinking how tomorrow\u2019s battle is going to play out.\n\nOf course one bad thing about having an overactive imagination is letting it run away with you. Your room is dark, with only the dim moonlight shining in and creating creepy shadows on your walls. You begin to think the shadows are moving, begin to get a little scared and hide under the covers. Then you think back to something your mom told you the last time you got scared like this: \u201cMonsters aren\u2019t real. Nothing like that exists in this world.\u201d\nOf course she\u2019s right, after all you just thought the world you lived in was boring by not having those types of things in it.\n\nYou slowly peer out from under your covers, but unfortunately this isn\u2019t the work of your imagination. These shadows ARE moving and now they\u2019re right by the side of your bed. Red dots form their eyes and a bluish light form their grinning maws. Before you can cry out, one of them puts its hand over your mouth and puts its other hand to its own with its index finger to its lips. (Or rather where its lips would be if it had any)\n\n\u201cShhhhhhh, the master wants to see you\u2026there will be plenty of time to cry then, little one. Open up the portal.\u201d The shadow says\n\nSuddenly a purple portal opens up where your closet is, and two of the shadow creatures grab and carry you into it. The shadows run around you as you\u2019re carried down the green tunnel which the portal has lead into. They excitedly talk about how their master will be pleased for getting you. Of course all you\u2019re doing right now is panicking, and you start to struggle to get away, surprisingly, you manage to break free of their grip and start trying to run back to where they entered this thing.\n\n\u201cGet him! He\u2019s trying to run away!\u201d\n\u201cDo it quickly before the portal starts collapsing!\u201d\n\nAs you hear the shadows giving orders to each other, the portal tunnel that you\u2019re in is indeed starting to flash and blink a lot, when you look down at your running feet, the purple light \u201csupporting\u201d you disappears every now and then revealing only blackness. You can see your room just up ahead and you ALMOST reach it, before the green tunnel disappears completely.\n\nYou yell and scream about how you wish you back home as you fall through the endless void, and while that doesn\u2019t happen, you do suddenly appear someplace else\u2026\n\nYou land roughly, scraping your legs and knees and getting your pajamas all dusty. After brushing yourself off and rubbing your hurting legs, you get a better look at your surroundings.\n\nYou\u2019re in what looks to be the middle of nowhere, though there is a small group of rickety looking houses nearby, probably a small village.\n\nOne thing is for certain, you know you aren\u2019t on Earth, because, a small multi-colored lizard like creature with three eyes scurries by your feet and into the wilderness beyond. You\u2019re still scared, but also fascinated by this place; however, you realize you need to figure out how to get back home and what exactly is going on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head to the village", "result": "Upon entering you see many of the villagers just sitting outside their houses doing nothing, though a couple of them are lazily plucking some sort of stringed instruments. They barely pay any attention to you at all.\n\nYou know you\u2019re not supposed to talk to strangers, but in this situation you don\u2019t really feel like you have a choice, so you ask one of them for help.\n\n\u201cHey, I need some help, these shadow things attacked me\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWazzat? Shadows? Shadows don\u2019t come \u2018round here boy, we\u2019s got ourselves a wizard to protect us! If you got shadow problems, maybe you should talk to him. He\u2019s a pretty smart guy. He\u2019s in that nice lookin\u2019 house over there, the one with the roof! Careful though, he\u2019s usually in a bad mood. Argues with his wife constantly too.\u201d The fat villager says going back to drinking whatever it is he\u2019s drinking.\n\nNot knowing what else to do you head over to the wizard\u2019s house. As you approach you can hear arguing from the inside.\n\nYou knock on the door which is opened by a young woman dressed in a waitress like outfit. She\u2019s pretty, but looks very tired, behind her appears an older man who doesn\u2019t look much like a wizard at all.\n\n\u201cWhadda you want kid? We ain\u2019t buyin\u2019 anything!\u201d he scowls.\n\u201cAre you really a wizard? You don\u2019t look like one.\u201d You remark.\n\u201cThat\u2019s because he isn\u2019t a real wizard. He\u2019s a lazy charlatan!\u201d the woman answers.\n\u201cShut up Talia, I was good enough to get YOU.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, that\u2019s because I was too young and na\u00efve to know any better! I knew I should\u2019ve married a knight!\u201d\n\u201cHah! And what knight would marry a serving wench like you?\u201d\n\u201cMelcar, I don\u2019t have time for your nonsense today, I have to go to work. Can you at least TRY to do something productive while I\u2019m gone, like casting some cantrips to cut down the overgrowth in the backyard? Sheesh, I think I saw a nest of Furms making their homes in there and you know much I hate those little purple things! They infest everything and then you can\u2019t get rid of them! So can you DO that one thing, if nothing else?\u201d\n\u201cYeah, yeah.\u201d\n\nThe woman throws her hands up in dismay and leaves the house, leaving Melcar and you alone.\n\n\u201cSo, what\u2019s your deal kid? I know you ain\u2019t from this backwoods village because I know everyone here and you actually look like you bathe every once in awhile. You lost or something?\u201d\n\nYou explain your situation to Melcar, somehow he doesn\u2019t look surprised, but he does look a little more interested in you.\n\n\u201cHmm, sounds like the Nightmare Tyrant. He has a habit of snatching people from other dimensions and draining them to harness his power. Those shadows you encountered are what\u2019s left of his victims. I\u2019m not entirely sure of his methods for choosing, but I do know he only takes those with strong imaginations though. It\u2019s probably why he prefers children since they tend to be more inclined to think up fantastic things.\u201d You were lucky to escape from him.\u201d\n\u201cWell how do I get back home?\u201d\n\nMelcar looks at you a moment before replying.\n\n\u201cYou interested in doing a little yard work?\u201d\n\u201cUh\u2026\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m really busy with an experiment, and I just don\u2019t have time to mess around with clearing the overgrowth in my backyard. If you do it, I think that\u2019ll give me time to complete my experiment, as well as giving me time to look up the spell that can take you back home.\u201d\n\u201cWell okay\u2026\u201d\n\u201cGood, there\u2019s a scythe in the back. You shouldn\u2019t have too much trouble.\u201d\n\nMelcar closes his door and you walk around the back, which literally looks like a jungle. The grass is almost as high as you are and the scythe is a little too unwieldy and large for you to use properly. Soon tiny purple people appear and angrily throw small stones at you and squeak some sort of jibberish. They apparently don\u2019t like you trying to tear up their home.\n\nYou don\u2019t see how you\u2019re ever going to finish this task.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to scare away the purple people", "result": "You try to scare the little purple people much like you\u2019ve ran after pigeons in the park, however the purple folks won\u2019t be chased away so easily, this is their home after all, they just nimbly get out of your way and continue to pelt you with stones, which are really starting to hurt at this point, and a particularly large stone smacks you in the head knocking you out.\n\nWhen you wake up you\u2019re nowhere near the Wizard\u2019s house anymore, in fact you\u2019re quite a ways outside of the village! The purple people must\u2019ve dragged you here. As you groggily get up, you wish that someone would help you. Just then a shadow looms over you, at first you get scared again, but fortunately this one is attached to someone. You look up and see a woman dressed in leather armor, she carries a bow on her back and a sword by her side. She gives you a serious look while she grabs your hand to pick you up. You notice she has pointy ears.\n\n\u201cBoy, what\u2019re you doing out here? Don\u2019t you know it can be dangerous out here? Do you live in that village?\u201d she asks.\n\u201cNo, I was trying to look for help there. There was a wizard who said he could help me get back home if\u2026\u201d\n\u201cWizard? There wasn\u2019t any strong magic activity detected around here boy. Where are you from?\u201d\n\nYou explain your story, as the woman listens intently. Much like the wizard you ran into earlier, she doesn\u2019t seem surprised.\n\n\u201cMm, yes you are a lucky boy indeed to escape from the Nightmare Tyrant, most never even have a chance. I think you better come with me, my name\u2019s Lyssia\u201d\n\u201cBut the wizard\u2026\u201d\n\u201cTrust me, you\u2019ll be safer with me, than that so called wizard you mentioned. Sounded like a hedge wizard that was just getting you to do some grunt work that he didn\u2019t want to do. He couldn\u2019t help you against the shadows, let alone get you back home. I might be able to though, well the Captain might anyway. We\u2019ll head back to my platoon\u2019s camp.\u201d\n\nYou feel somewhat safer with Lyssia, not to mention she seems like she\u2019s more readily going to help you, so you follow her. Eventually you arrive at a fairly large camp with armored knights, horses, and tents. Most of them look like they\u2019ve been doing a lot of fighting recently and are still recovering from their wounds. When you enter the Captain\u2019s tent, you see him looking over some maps before he looks up at you. He\u2019s a man of average build, but his weathered and tired face shows the signs of having been in battle several times. His armor displays likewise.\n\n\u201cLyssia, you better have a good reason for why you\u2019re bringing this boy into my presence. This is a mobile military unit; you know we can\u2019t be coddling civilians, let alone children.\u201d\n\nLyssia explains the situation and the Captain\u2019s attitude towards you changes to a more sympathetic one.\n\n\u201cEscaping from the Nightmare Tyrant\u2019s minions is no small feat, especially for one unprepared for such an encounter. The terror they radiate is normally enough to paralyze most with fear. You\u2019re obviously not a battle hardened soldier to such horrors, and there\u2019s no evidence of any magic about you. You must have an innate strong will, boy. Which is good since you\u2019ll most likely have to deal with them again.\u201d He says grimly.\n\u201cAgain?!\u201d you exclaim.\n\u201cYes, unfortunately the Nightmare Tyrant isn\u2019t fond of losing those he marks for capture. He has no doubt sent his Shadow minions to look for you. Fortunately you have us to help you now. We are a recon team for the Parran Empire, we\u2019ve been fighting the Nightmare Tyrant for years, trying to find a weakness with little success. Though after some searching we think there may be a powerful weapon that can help us. It\u2019s in some ruins a few days from here, or should be. One can never know for certain with old legends. Now, I have a duty to defend innocents from evil, but I also have a duty to the Empire. I simply cannot take this team all the way back to the Empire just to drop you off there where our wizards can send you back home, I have a mission to complete first. You can either stay with us and then after the mission we shall all go back together, or I shall send a couple of my men with you back to the Empire. Keep in mind the Shadows are probably looking for you and they tend to hunt in swarms, so the more people defending you, the better.\u201d\n\nYou really want to go back home, but you\u2019re a little worried about not having all the protection you can.\n\n\u201cWell can\u2019t Lyssia go with me?\u201d you ask hopefully. Lyssia smiles a bit at your request, but the Captain shakes his head.\n\u201cSadly no. While I can certainly understand and admire your judgment of wanting her to go with you, I cannot allow her to do so, as my mission will undoubtedly require her skills. As I said, I will send to two of my men, but that is all I can spare if you decide to head back to the Empire.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Head back to the Empire", "result": "The sooner you\u2019re out of this place the better, so you request to be escorted back to the Empire where their wizards can send you back home.\n\n\u201cVery well, I\u2019ll send Paladins Salzat and Lakri with you, along with an official letter explaining your situation. Good luck and may you return home without any ill-fated encounters.\u201d The Captain says handing you the letter for safe keeping.\n\nYou are presented to Salzat and Lakri who are explained their mission. Salzat doesn\u2019t look pleased; in fact he gets angry and exclaims his skills would be better put to use fighting the Nightmare Tyrant and other evil creatures, not looking after a child. Lakri on the other hand looks relieved. After the Captain shouts him down and tells him to obey orders, Salzat grumbles and gets on his horse. Lyssia puts you on your own horse, you\u2019ve\nnever ridden one before, but she assures you that these are the best trained horses in the Empire and will serve you well. You\u2019re told you should reach the Empire in a few days.\n\nSoon you\u2019re off with your new travel companions They couldn\u2019t be more opposite. Salzat is a mean looking man with scars all over his face who barely speaks to you, but his armor is impeccably clean and well taken care of. It even has a shine to it, almost as if it was brand new. (He doesn\u2019t seem to wear a helmet though, perhaps that might explain all the scars) Lakri on the other hand is much kinder and talkative to you. His armor looks like its seen better days though. It\u2019s metal that looks hastily welded together, badly dented and even showing signs of rust! Unlike Salzat his suit of armor has a full face helmet which he\u2019s wearing right now and Salzat has chosen to taunt him about.\n\n\u201cLakri, why are you wearing that thing? We aren\u2019t even going into battle you coward! I swear I don\u2019t know how any of you can see in those things anyway. I need to be able to swivel my head as quick as possible so I can see the next enemy I have to slay!\u201d\n\u201cLeave me alone Salzat! I like to make sure I\u2019m protected! I don\u2019t want to end up all scarred and ugly like you! I intend on getting married one day!\u201d Lakri sputters.\n\u201cFeh! I don\u2019t need to look pretty; my DEEDS will win the hearts of damsels!\u201d\n\n\u201cHow did you guys become Paladins?\u201d you ask. Surprisingly Salzat answers your question right away.\n\n\u201cWell unlike Lakri here, I didn\u2019t have royal family connections. I worked my way up through the ranks and went through special training so that I could become a weapon against evil and serve the Empire. If I could wipe out all the evil in this world myself, I would not hesitate to do so. There is no greater deed than to serve the cause of good and righteousness and right now my talents are going to waste escorting you!\u201d\n\u201cYes, well I for one am glad for the break from battle. This is a nice change of pace than fighting trolls, shadows and other such nastiness. I wasn\u2019t really looking forward to going to those ruins the Captain mentioned either. Sounded dangerous.\u201d Lakri says.\n\u201cYeah, well we know you\u2019re a coward anyway, and a disgrace to the Paladin name.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m not a coward! I\u2026just want to live alright? I mean is it so wrong that I prefer my life to not be at risk every five minutes?\u201d\n\n\u201cWhy did you become a Paladin, if you don\u2019t like to fight?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cOh, that\u2019s a long story\u2026let\u2019s just say my Dad wanted me to.\u201d\n\u201cBut you\u2019re a grown up, shouldn\u2019t you just be able to do what you want now?\u201d\n\u201cHa ha! You think just because one grows up, you aren\u2019t subjected to being told what to do by your parents? Guess again. Ah well, perhaps you have less demanding parents. You must certainly like them, if you wanted to get home so quickly to see them again.\u201d\n\nBefore you can answer, Salzat suddenly looks up in the sky and draws his sword.\n\n\u201cShut up! I sense something\u2026\u201d\n\nSuddenly the sky grows considerably darker within only a few seconds and screeching can be heard from above. Dark winged creatures begin to descend from the sky\n\n\u201cSHADOWS!\u201d Lakri shouts.\n\u201cAlright! And here I thought I wasn\u2019t going to get to vanquish evil today! Come on and be destroyed foul creatures!\u201d Salzat laughs.\n\nAt this point Lakri and Salzat show their differences again. Lakri panics to the point that he fumbles and drops his weapon before yelling that you all should make haste to escape. Salzat on the other hand turns to face the winged Shadows. You don\u2019t see how he can possibly fight them all himself though.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Lakri", "result": "You\u2019re in no position to fight a bunch of flying Shadows, you\u2019re not armed with anything, and nowhere near being a warrior. You take you horse in the direction that Lakri headed, leaving Salzat behind to fight the Shadows, though you aren\u2019t safe yet as a few of them are still in pursuit of you.\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s the one the Master wants! The little one! Get him! Get him!\u201d you hear raspy voices shout behind you.\n\nSoon your horse has almost caught up to Lakri\u2019s. Lakri seems to have forgotten that he\u2019s supposed to be DEFENDING you!\n\n\u201cHey! Aren\u2019t you supposed to be protecting me?\u201d you shout at him, while briefly looking behind you to see how close the Shadows are.\n\u201cI\u2026I\u2019m sorry\u2026I just\u2026ARGH! Shadows! Gotta get away! Don\u2019t follow me, they\u2019re after you!\u201d\n\nLakri must be so frightened for his own life that he\u2019s gone half mad! Seeing that he\u2019s not going to lose you, he ends up jumping off of his horse and running off into the wilderness in an effort to ditch the Shadows. It works for him since they were never after him and they continue to follow you and are starting to close in\u2026\n\nSoon one is close enough to grab at you, in an attempt to rip you from the back of the horse.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to punch at the Shadow", "result": "With your free hand you attempt to punch the flying Shadow, but unfortunately it deftly dodges your attack and you unbalance yourself causing you to fall off the horse.\n\nYou don\u2019t land on the ground though since the flying Shadows swoop in to catch you before that happens. Of course now you\u2019re in their evil clutches. They laugh and cackle with glee as they take you back to the Nightmare Tyrant.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Hold on tight to the reins", "result": "You pulls away from the Shadow and hold on as tight as you can, hoping that somehow the horse can outrun these creatures, or at least hoping that someone can help you.\n\nNo sooner have you thought this, when suddenly you hear a sizzling sound followed by an ear piecing screech from above. The Shadow trying to rip you from the horse has been struck down by some sort of bolt of lightning. Soon another Shadow is destroyed in the same way\n\n\u201cCursed Shadows! Just hold on to the reins boy and keep moving! There\u2019s a town up ahead where you\u2019ll be safe!\u201d you hear someone yell at you. You notice some trees and rocks along side of the road, but no people. Whoever it is helping you must be well hidden.\n\nEventually all the Shadows following you have been destroyed by bolts and you make it into the town, though you aren\u2019t sure of what to do or go next, but for now you\u2019re just glad to be alive. (Your horse has even clamed down a bit)\n\nWhile you just temporarily rest on top of your horse, you hear the voice of the person who helped you again.\n\n\u201cAh there you are, glad to see you\u2019re alright. What\u2019s a boy like you traveling by himself in these dangerous times anyway? The wretched Nightmare Tyrant\u2019s minions seem to be everywhere nowadays.\u201d\n\nThe one who\u2019s helped you looks like a little different from what you expected, this man looks more like a warrior, but not like the knights you encountered earlier. More like a barbarian type. He\u2019s bristling with muscles and has a large axe carried on his back.\n\n\u201cYou don\u2019t look like a Wizard.\u201d You say.\n\u201cOf course I don\u2019t, because I\u2019m not.\u201d\n\u201cI thought only Wizards could cast spells.\u201d\n\u201cOh that lightning bolts back there? That\u2019s thanks to this magic ring I found a long time ago. Though I think it\u2019s out of charges, it\u2019s useless except maybe to trade with now. Here, why don\u2019t you take it.\u201d He says giving you the ring.\n\n\u201cThanks. I\u2019m supposed to be heading to the Parran Empire to get back home.\u201d\n\u201cYou live in the Parran Empire?\u201d\n\u201cNo, but they\u2019re supposed to have Wizards there who can help me get back home.\u201d\n\nYou go into detail about your adventures to the barbarian; he seems a lot more surprised by your tale than the rest you\u2019ve told have.\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s some tale boy, though I have no reason to disbelieve you, given the things I\u2019ve seen since my own travels as well as the things I have heard about the Nightmare Tyrant. His darkness has even reached my old homeland far north, though my people tend to be nomadic and the land doesn\u2019t really contain anything of major importance. We had more problems with the usual menaces of giants and trolls more than anything else.\u201d\n\u201cHow come you\u2019re so far from home?\u201d\n\u201cWell as I said, my people are nomadic in nature, and I guess I\u2019m even more so. I wanted to see other places outside of my homeland, so I traveled south to where civilization tends to thrive. I\u2019ll most likely return one day.\u201d\n\nBefore you continue this conversation, you have just realized you don\u2019t really know the route to get to the Empire. The Paladins were supposed to lead you there and now both of them are gone. You don\u2019t know who else to ask, you\u2019re all by yourself again and this barbarian did help you, so you give it a shot\u2026\n\n\u201cHey, um\u2026could you help me get to Empire? I don\u2019t exactly know the way.\u201d\n\u201cMe? Well, I\u2019m not sure I\u2019m the best person to ask, seeing as I\u2019ve never been there either, though I\u2019m sure that wouldn\u2019t be too much of a problem, all I need is a few directions from someone and I could probably get there quickly\u2026sure why not? As I said, I\u2019ve never been to the Parran Empire lands so it wouldn\u2019t really be a wasted trip for me, but we probably should find a room somewhere first. Also I\u2019ll need to ask for directions. My name\u2019s Qualan by the way.\u201d\n\nQualan rents a room for the pair of you, but he doesn\u2019t stay, instead he says he\u2019s going to go ask for directions and explore the town a bit, and for you to just stay in the room and not to open it for anybody. He has the key, so he can let himself in. Soon you\u2019re alone again in a relatively barren room. It\u2019s pretty boring in here, but you try to keep yourself occupied, namely by thinking of all the people and places you\u2019ve encountered since you\u2019ve been here. In fact this is the first time you\u2019ve actually got the chance to reflect on this little adventure. You also wonder about your Mom, she\u2019s going to be worried about you and probably have the police looking all over for you! And when you finally do return, what will you tell her?\n\nYou don\u2019t know, but what you do know for certain is that you DO want to get home as soon as possible. You find this place very fascinating, but the Shadows and the Nightmare Tyrant who\u2019s taken an interest in you is something you can do without. You just wish you had something that you could fight them off with\u2026\n\nNo sooner does that pass through your mind when you notice something glowing under one of the beds. You cautiously check underneath it, and find a short sword. It faintly glows with a white light for a moment longer and then fades back to its normal color.\n\nAfter \u201cplaying\u201d with the sword for a bit, you suddenly realize that you created the sword, or you at least made it appear. In fact you\u2019ve caused quite a few things to occur just by \u201cthinking\u201d. It seems like every time you \u201cwished\u201d for help, it suddenly arrived.\n\nMaybe you have magical powers here or something similar, this all can\u2019t be a coincidence.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wish to be back home", "result": "If you knew that it was a simple wish that could get you home, you would\u2019ve done it a long time ago! You begin to think really hard about going back home. You close your eyes and try to visualize it.\n\nFor a moment you think you\u2019re succeeding, but suddenly all you begin to see is a black void and Shadow creatures. Something terribly wrong is happening. You really know it when you open your eyes and see nothing but darkness and you are being held down on some sort of smooth cold surface by Shadows and you no longer have your sword. A sinister voice emanates from the darkness and you\u2019re completely paralyzed with fear.\n\n\u201cAh, yes I knew it would only be a matter of time before you tried that to get home. Fortunately I made plans ahead of time to prevent that from occurring. Of course, in a way you ARE home. Your new one anyway. Soon you\u2019ll be one of us\u2026 after a few alterations of course.\u201d", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Don't wish", "result": "Something instinctively tells you that \u201cIt\u2019s not going to be that easy.\u201d You remember back when the Shadows first tried to take you, you wished you were back home and it didn\u2019t happen, you ended up in the middle of nowhere. There\u2019s no telling where you might end up if you tried it again. So far \u201clittle wishes\u201d have worked for you, so you\u2019re going to stick with the current plan of getting the Empire wizards to send you home and use your \u201cpowers\u201d only when necessary.\n\nYou eventually fall asleep with your new sword by your side, you\u2019re awakened by Qualan in the morning.\n\n\u201cHey, get up boy let\u2019s get going\u2026 where\u2019d you get that sword from?\u201d\n\u201cHuh? Oh\u2026well uh I found it under the bed.\u201d\n\u201cSheesh, I know I\u2019ve forgotten a few things in my travels, but never a weapon. That\u2019s just unthinkable. You probably should have a sword anyway, I\u2019m not sure how it is where you\u2019re from, but a boy your age would definitely be somewhat familiar with a weapon of some sort by now in my tribe.\u201d\n\u201cWhere were you?\u201d\n\u201cI told you, I was getting directions to the Parran Empire, and exploring the town a bit\u2026well okay I was exploring the tavern, in fact I eventually explored the floor of it. Oh well at least nothing was stolen, not that I have anything left after spending it all at the tavern\u2026hey you still have that silver ring? I think I might need to trade for a horse. I can\u2019t be accompanying you efficiently if I\u2019m not on horseback as well.\u201d\n\nAfter giving Qualan the ring back, and uses it to buy a broken down nag, you and he are on your way again. You and he talk during your uneventful travel; he\u2019s very fascinated with your world as you are with all the adventures he\u2019s been on. Soon you come to a split in the path. You ask which way to go.\n\n\u201cWell, both of these paths will eventually lead to the Empire, but one of them is a lot quicker. There\u2019s a catch though, back in town I was told the quicker path is currently under complete control of a vicious goblin tribe. Apparently they\u2019re attacking anyone that goes through there. I heard The Empire was supposed to send in some soldiers to take care of the problem, but the Nightmare Tyrant is a more immediate and dangerous threat and as such they\u2019re concentrating their efforts on him instead. The second path is supposed to be safe and clear, but it\u2019ll take longer. We\u2019ll probably have to make a camp somewhere, before we even reach the Empire.\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s take the safer route.\u201d You say.\n\u201cAlright, but keep alert anyway, just because I heard it was safe doesn\u2019t necessarily mean it is.\u201d\n\nYou and Qualan travel further with no unexpected encounters. When it begins to get dark you half expect Shadows to come attacking you out of the sky again, but this is a natural darkness, night is merely falling. Qualan suggests that you should make camp and you do so. You and he eat the provisions he bought from town. He comments on how bad they are and next time he\u2019s just going to stick to hunting in the wilderness for food next time.\n\nYou\u2019ve never slept outside before, so like most things in this adventure it\u2019s a brand new experience for you. One that makes you really wonder why some of the kids at school have said they like camping so much. You\u2019re definitely a city boy!\n\nAfter trying to get comfortable several times and not worry about bugs crawling on you, you fall asleep, but not for long. A noise awakens you and Qualan. The horses seem agitated as well.\n\n\u201cQualan?\u201d\n\u201cShhh! I heard it too\u2026be prepared for anything.\u201d He says standing up and readying his axe.\n\nSoon a large figure lurches out from the darkness. It\u2019s another Shadow, but not like any of the ones you\u2019ve encountered before, this one is bigger for one thing, almost as if its armored and for another it looks vaguely familiar. The black figure is hard enough to make out by the campfire, but when it speaks you know immediately who it is.\n\n\u201cAt last I\u2019ve found you boy.\u201d\n\u201cSalzat?\u201d\n\u201cYou know this\u2026thing?\u201d Qualan asks getting ready to attack.\n\u201cBriefly, he used to be one of the Paladins sent with me to take me back to the Empire.\u201d You reply backing away.\n\u201cAnd I still have to waste my time escorting you around!\u201d Salzat hisses. \u201cCome boy, my new master the Nightmare Tyrant wants to see you, it would be unwise to keep him waiting, the agony will only be much worse the more you resist\u2026\u201d\n\u201cTake the horse and ride boy! I\u2019ll dispatch this monster!\u201d Qualan shouts at you.\n\nYou\u2019re sick of running at this point, and Qualan needs your help. Besides you figure you can actually do something now with your new sword, which you draw out.\n\n\u201cBoy, I told you to get out of here!\u201d Qualan exclaims as he defends an attack from Salzat.\n\u201cHa ha! Good. Saves me the trouble of chasing down the little fool!\u201d Salzat laughs.\n\nWhile he\u2019s laughing you take the opportunity to stab at him. He attempts to dodge, but you manage to slightly wound his leg. This causes him to bellow in a hissing shriek. Qualan hits him with his axe, but it doesn\u2019t effect Salzat like your attack did. Salzat retreats back a bit to recover.\n\n\u201cYOU MISERABLE LITTLE WHELP! YOU HURT ME!\u201d he says before getting ready to charge again.\n\n\u201cBoy, your sword can hurt it, but I\u2019m better with wielding such a weapon, toss it to me and I\u2019ll dispatch this creature!\u201d Qualan quickly says bracing himself for another attack.", "action_results": [{"action": "Toss Qualan your sword", "result": "Following Qualan\u2019s advice that he would do a better job at fighting Salzat you toss the sword to him and he meets Salzat\u2019s charge.\n\nQualan lands what would look to be a powerful blow, but instead nothing happens! In fact you\u2019ve noticed that it\u2019s stopped glowing. Salzat winces a bit from the hit, but he doesn\u2019t stop his own attack which fells Qualan. The sword flies out of his hand and disappears into thin air. It would appear that without your belief in yourself, the sword lost not only its power, but ceased to exist altogether. You attempt to wish for another, but you\u2019re too panicked to think straight and you\u2019re having a hard time concentrating altogether. Soon Salzat\u2019s hulking shadow form has grabbed you, and your mind is filled with nothing but terror. He carries you back to the Nightmare Tyrant. You soon join Salzat and the rest in everlasting shadowy torment.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Defeat Salzat yourself", "result": "You have to defeat Salzat yourself. It was your thoughts that created the sword, by your own sheer force of willpower. If you believe in yourself, you\u2019ll be able to defeat Salzat, you know you will.\n\nSalzat predictable charges at you, Qualan attempts to stop him, but once again his axe does nothing and Salzat smashes him in the face with his free hand, knocking him out. He\u2019s about to finish him off with his sword, but you prevent this from happening by stepping in and parrying the blow. For some reason, you feel much stronger than you ever have before.\n\n\u201cWhelp! You will be sustenance for the Shadow Tyrant!\u201d Salzat hisses and tries to break through your defense, but your confidence and sudden increase in strength don\u2019t make you fear his threats or him. Your sword glows brighter causing the red dots that are Salzat\u2019s eyes to close in blinding pain. While he temporarily shields them, you press your advantage and strike Salzat multiple times causing him to unleash an unholy scream before dissipating.\n\nYou\u2019re breathing hard after the battle, and you sit down to catch your breath. Qualan\u2019s regaining of consciousness makes you jump again.\n\n\u201cHey hold on there, it\u2019s just me! Wow, that really hurt.\u201d Qualan says holding on to his face. \u201cLooks like you took care of him yourself. In my tribe you\u2019d now be a man with all the benefits and respect as such. For defeating such a powerful creature you might even be considered an honorary great warrior. Here, take this.\u201d\n\nQualan gives you some sort of strange tooth. Its larger than a humans that\u2019s for sure.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s this?\u201d\n\u201cA troll tooth. It\u2019s customary to take a trophy, but seeing as you fought a shadow, there is none, but you should have something to symbolize your hard earned victory, as well as possibly saving my life. Also know that you have made a permanent friend with no only me, but my entire tribe if you should ever meet them. It is our way.\u201d\n\nYou are filled with pride and pocket the tooth, while thanking Qualan.\n\nThe remainder of the night is uneventful. The next day, you and Qualan bump into a regal looking carriage making its way in the opposite direction. The driver looks annoyed that you\u2019re even on the same road as him, let alone in the way.\n\n\u201cHey you peasants! Get out the way! The Archmage is on very important business in the name of the Parran Empire!\u201d\n\nYour eyes immediately light up in hope.\n\n\u201cA wizard?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cAn ARCHMAGE, peasant boy! And I told you and your barbarian servant to get out of the way!\u201d\n\u201cServant? I\u2019m NO ONE\u2019S servant! I am his friend!\u201d Qualan raises his voice in a tone which makes the driver flinch a little.\n\u201cErm\u2026well yes, but I still need you two to\u2026\u201d\n\u201cDriver, what is the hold up here?\u201d an old wild haired man in a robe asks getting out of the carriage. \u201cWho are you lot?\u201d he then asks you.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re a wizard from the Empire! And I need to get home! You have to help me!\u201d you blurt out handing the Archmage the note that the Captain gave you. He reads it and nods as you tell him the rest of your tale.\n\u201cHmm, you are a very lucky little boy. Not many get away from the Nightmare Tyrant, you must have a strong will.\u201d The Archmage says inspecting you. \u201cI sense that your sword isn\u2019t natural, yet I can\u2019t determine its magical origins. Yes, you DO have some sort of power boy. Ever thought of being a wizard? We could use someone like you against the Nightmare Tyrant.\u201d\n\nFor a brief fleeting moment your adventurous side almost jumps at the chance. But still, you don\u2019t want your Mom to worry about you anymore than she probably is right now. You still don\u2019t know what you\u2019re going to tell her.\n\n\u201cNo, I want to go home.\u201d You reply.\n\u201cVery well, we can\u2019t have people here that don\u2019t want to be. I can teleport you back home right now if you wish. I myself don\u2019t like to use it for travel unless it\u2019s absolutely an emergency. I still prefer to take life slower and travel the old fashioned ways, of course that\u2019s not really an option for you being from another dimension and all.\u201d\n\u201cI can go right now?\u201d\n\u201cOh sure I can get you there real quick. And don\u2019t worry; the Nightmare Tyrant won\u2019t be able to ever steal you from your home world again. He\u2019s only able to perform that feat of interdimentional kidnapping once on a person. Hence the reason why he was so eager to get his hands on you before you could escape again. Now the problem is once I start to open the portal, you need to get going fast. It will undoubtedly alert the Nightmare Tyrant to this location where upon he\u2019ll try one last time to capture you. I\u2019ll certainly help, but this spell will be requiring most of my energy and concentration so hopefully your barbarian friend here will be able to fend off some of the Shadows. Since I\u2019m afraid my driver will most likely be hiding under the carriage the entire time.\u201d\n\u201cHey!\u201d the driver says.\nQualan steps forward and nods.\n\u201cOf course. I will do everything in my power to help him get home.\u201d\n\u201cOkay then, but that axe isn\u2019t going to do much good, let me enchant it first\u2026there. Now let\u2019s begin.\u201d\n\nThe Archmage begins to chant while you and Qualan wait for the spell to take effect. The driver looks nervous the whole time, but he hasn\u2019t hid under the carriage yet.\n\nThe wind begins to blow strongly and once again that familiar darkness begins gather once again. This time it\u2019s followed a stronger sense of malevolence.\n\nYou suddenly hear a menacing voice in your mind.\n\n\u201cBoy, did you think you could escape from me? I am the Nightmare Tyrant! Destroyer of life! Your power will be mine and you WILL serve me!\u201d\n\u201cNO!\u201d you scream out in defiance!\n\u201cDon\u2019t listen! It\u2019s the Tyrant\u2019s way of trying to get inside your head! Don\u2019t let him do it!\u201d the Archmage briefly shouts and then continues his hand gestures.\n\nShadow creatures come descending out of the sky screeching horribly as usual. Qualan stands in front of you ready to take the brunt of the attack.\n\n\u201cAlmost done!\u201d the Archmage shouts.\n\nThe shadows swarm your position, and you and Qualan attempt to fight them off. Your sword fortunately is glowing brightly, which at least keeps them from overwhelming you. While you and Qualan are fighting them off, the Nightmare Tyrant\u2019s voice booms from out of nowhere and clearly audible to everyone.\n\n\u201cFOOLS! Attack the wizard! He\u2019s the one who can create the escape portal!\u201d\n\u201cToo late Tyrant! Quick! Get in the portal!\u201d the Archmage commands as a blue portal opens up and he discharges lightning bolts from his fingers to destroy some Shadows attacking him.\n\u201cGo! We\u2019ll be alright! We can hold them off!\u201d Qualan adds.\n\nYou\u2019re sort of worried about Qualan, but you realize you have to go now. The Nightmare Tyrant bellows again to his minions about not letting you escape as you run for the portal and entering it.\n\nYou are enveloped by blackness followed by swirling colored lights. Your sword also flickers in and out of existence. It\u2019s all so strange and overwhelming to you that you pass out.\n\n\u201cHey! I told you breakfast is ready, are you going to sleep all day?\u201d you hear your Mom call from downstairs as you awaken in surprise.\n\nYou quickly look around your room and nothing looks out of place. Your Mom hasn\u2019t seemed to notice that you were gone, in fact it doesn\u2019t look like you even left.\n\nWas it all a dream?\n\nYou shake your head trying to decide if it was, then you notice a big tooth on the floor next to the toys you set up yesterday. The troll tooth and oddly its right next to a barbarian figure. Strangely it has a pleased look on their faces.\n\nIt wasn\u2019t a dream. It was real. Created by the power of your own imagination. You decide you\u2019ll keep this information to yourself though, since nobody would ever believe it!\n\nYou had an interesting adventure, but you\u2019re glad to be home you think as you go downstairs to eat.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Help Salzat", "result": "You jump off your horse to grab Lakri\u2019s sword in an effort to help Salzat who is already in the midst of battle, with the Shadow creatures who have almost completely enveloped him.\n\nYou swing the sword, but its still a little to big and heavy for you to weld properly, you hit a few of the Shadows, but its no use, they outnumber you greatly. Soon one of them manages to deprive you of your weapon and two more snatch you up and carry you up to the sky giggling about how the Nightmare Tyrant is anxious to see you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go with the Captain", "result": "You don\u2019t know anything about this place and you\u2019re in great danger, so you decide it would be best if you had as many people defending you as possible. You\u2019d rather stay with the Captain.\n\n\u201cVery well, you may stay with us, just don\u2019t make a nuisance of yourself. We\u2019ll also be on the move a lot, so don\u2019t expect a high comfort level, however whenever we make camp, you\u2019re welcome to stay in my tent. For right now though, you\u2019ll have to leave it, I\u2019m having a meeting with Lyssia and a couple of my knights to discuss an important plan of action. Explore if you wish, but don\u2019t wander away from us, we\u2019ll protect you, but we won\u2019t baby-sit you.\u201d\n\nWith these words in mind Lyssia leads you back out of the tent, upon which another knight comes up to her with a message.\n\n\u201cSergeant, a man has arrived at the camp.\u201d\n\u201cIs he hostile?\u201d\n\u201cNo, he says he was just passing through and figured maybe he could trade for supplies here.\u201d\n\u201cTell him to move on, this isn\u2019t a trading post.\u201d Lyssia says and goes back in the tent.\n\nNot knowing what to do next you follow the knight back to the man he was talking about. When you see him, he looks raggedy, but well equipped. He a sword by his side and his leather armor looks more like a patchwork taken from several other suits. The most notable feature is the big backpack on his back. You wonder if he\u2019s an adventurer.\n\n\u201cAlright you, move on, this isn\u2019t a trading post.\u201d The knight repeats to the visitor.\n\u201cOkay, okay, I\u2019ll go. But can\u2019t I just rest here for one minute? I\u2019ve been walking a lot and it would be nice to at least know I\u2019m safe for just a moment.\u201d\n\u201c\u2026well okay, but make it quick, and stay on the outskirts of the camp.\u201d The knight says and leaves. You continue to examine this traveler, who immediately knows you are.\n\u201cWell, how come you get to stay here? Army camps aren\u2019t known to house children.\u201d He asks while sitting down on a nearby log.\n\nYou explain your situation to this adventurer, and once again you get an unsurprised look from your listener.\n\n\u201cGot the impression you weren\u2019t from around here. I somehow could sense it. I always had that ability; it\u2019s come in handy a lot. But yes, the Nightmare Tyrant is very bad news; you would do well to leave this world as quickly as you can, no doubt Shadows are already on their way.\u201d\n\u201cWell I got this army to protect me!\u201d you exclaim.\n\u201cPerhaps, but you said it will be awhile before they return to the Parran Empire where you can get properly transported back to your world, in the meantime they WILL be attacked by not just Shadows, but also by whatever they come across in their mission. Tis a long time to put yourself at risk. Not to mention I see a lack of magic in this camp, I wonder about their chances against Shadows if the Nightmare Tyrant unleashes his full power in order to re-capture you.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re almost sorry you started talking to this man, within a few seconds he\u2019s managed to worry you all over again. Here you were thinking that you were going to be nice and safe.\n\n\u201cBut\u2026but\u2026well what should I do?\u201d\n\u201cWell, if we were back in Null, I could probably get you back home really quick\u2026\u201d\n\nBefore the Adventurer can finish you interrupt.\n\n\u201cNull?\u201d\n\u201cOh, that\u2019s where I live. It used to be a great city of fantastic magical power a long time ago, but it was destroyed by its own petty bickering. The powerful wizards there began to argue among themselves, factions were drawn and the entire city along with several miles around it went up in a big ball of flame. It was a terrible tragedy that could\u2019ve been avoided, but there was an interesting effect of the aftermath of it though.\u201d\n\u201cWhat happened?\u201d\n\u201cWell, no magic works there now, hence the name Null. Powerful wizards can\u2019t get a simple cantrip to work there, let alone a spell. Even the Nightmare Tyrant\u2019s minions can\u2019t go there. Still, it\u2019s far from safe. Lots of the Forsaken live there.\u201d\n\u201cWho are the Forsaken?\u201d\n\u201cOh they\u2019re the unlucky folks who actually managed to survive the catastrophe. Not all of them bad, but understandably such a powerful magic disaster had an effect on most of their bodies as well as their minds.\u201d\n\nWhile this is all very fascinating, you still don\u2019t see how this helps you exactly.\n\n\u201cWhile this is all very fascinating, I still don\u2019t see how this helps me exactly. I mean if no magic works there, how can I get home? And why would you want to live in such a place anyway it sounds dangerous.\u201d\n\nThe Adventurer moves closer to you and looks around before speaking.\n\n\u201cOkay, because I can sympathize with being in a tough position, I\u2019ll tell you a little secret. Magic DOES work there, but only in one area and it\u2019s only a place I know about as far as I know. There\u2019s a deep, but small underground dungeon in Null where magic seems to work, I know because that\u2019s where I live! I stumbled upon it completely by accident when I was exploring Null. Apparently one of the many trinkets that I had acquired in the past was a key of some sort. It began to glow and then the wall opened up the way for me. Pure random dumb luck. So I went in and discovered that entire section runs on magic or something like it at least. There are some sort of contraption that if you sit down in and visualize with clarity, your wish will come true! I tried it a few times and it was nice, but I\u2019m a wanderer at heart and as such I couldn\u2019t just spend the rest of my days wallowing in eternal paradise, plus I was always leery that something bad might happen if I over used the contraption for greed. However I did see it as a good place to make my home away from the road. In fact I use this magic chair to quickly travel to towns and other cities, of course it\u2019s only one way, but at least it shortens the trip somewhat. You could probably use the chair to return home. Even if it doesn\u2019t work, I could always take you to the Parran Empire to get you back home. It would still be quicker and safer than traveling with an army that has to complete some mission before it can back home. Who knows what responsibilities and dangers it might incur along the way? Think also, in Null, you wouldn\u2019t be attacked by Shadows either. It\u2019s up to you though, but choose quickly because I have to be leaving soon.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with the Adventurer", "result": "You have to admit, even though you want to go back home, part of you really likes it here. Null sounds interesting and anyplace where the Shadows can\u2019t get you sounds even better. The Adventurer seems trustworthy enough, but you still hope you\u2019re making the right decision.\n\n\u201cOkay, I\u2019ll go with you.\u201d you say a bit hesitantly.\n\u201cAlright, let\u2019s get going, we still have a quite a trip ahead of us.\u201d\n\nYou and the Adventurer leave the military camp and set off on your journey. The Adventurer explains that you\u2019ll probably reach Null in a couple of days, but that you still shouldn\u2019t worry too much about Shadow attacks, since the anti-magic effects from Null are also in the desert wasteland surrounding the ruined city.\n\nAs you travel further, you find that the Adventurer is quite talkative. He speaks about his many journeys, he also mentions briefly of why he chose his \u201cprofession\u201d which was mainly because he was bored living in the small village where he was born. When you reach the desert you see a big ruined city far in the distance. You also notice night is starting to fall as it\u2019s starting to get dark, though it seems to have come on all of a sudden. The Adventurer has noticed it too and he begins to go for his weapons.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s not supposed to get dark that quick\u2026The Nightmare Tyrant! Quick! Run towards Null, the anti-magic field gets stronger the closer we are to it!\u201d\n\nYou and the Adventurer begin to run and suddenly you hear screeching behind you, and you turn your head to see Shadows coming out of the sky to capture you. However, they seem to almost be flickering in and out of existence. The unnatural darkness is also being affected bizarrely, since its still \u201cday\u201d in front of you and then complete \u201cnight\u2019 behind. Eventually you and the Adventurer outrun the Shadows and the darkness, as they both are unable to withstand the sheer anti-magical forces emanating from Null. After some angry screeching the Shadows retreat back to where they came, while you and the Adventurer take a breather.\n\n\u201cSee? Told you they can\u2019t get you here. Whew, running in this hot desert is tiring. Let\u2019s rest here and continue on tomorrow. The real night will be coming soon and actually walking around in Null after night isn\u2019t particularly a safe thing to do either, the desert is a lot securer.\u201d\n\nYou and the Adventurer settle down for the night, he brings out some water flasks from his backpack and gives you one. You drink it all up and it\u2019s soon empty, but you still wish you had a lot more.\n\n\u201cHey, don\u2019t drink all of it! We have to conserve it\u2026wait, I know that flask doesn\u2019t hold that much water.\u201d He says in confusion as you continue to drink what seems to be an endless supply of water in the flask. When you\u2019ve truly satisfied your thirst the Adventurer takes the flask and attempts to look in it and shake it and finds there\u2019s no more water in there.\n\n\u201cOkay how did you do that?\u201d\n\u201cHow did I do what?\u201d\n\u201cYou drank enough for two flasks! These aren\u2019t bottomless canteens of everlasting water either and even if they were they wouldn\u2019t work due to the anti-magic here. So I\u2019d like to know HOW you did that.\u201d\n\nThe Adventurer is looking at you suspiciously, almost as if you could possibly be dangerous. You stutter and fumble with an explanation mainly because you don\u2019t even know.\n\n\u201cI\u2026I don\u2019t know\u2026I just wished I had more water\u2026I was really thirsty\u2026\u201d you reply a bit worried. He looks at you for a moment longer and then speaks again.\n\u201cTry to wish for a chest full of gold.\u201d\n\u201cWhat?\u201d\n\u201cJust do it, I want to see something.\u201d\n\u201cErm\u2026okay.\u201d\n\nYou wish and think as hard as you can, but nothing happens. Well that\u2019s not entirely true, you get dizzy and fall to the ground. A single gold piece appears near you though. The Adventurer picks you up as well as the gold piece, which is somewhat misshapen and uneven.\n\n\u201cHmm, so there are limits. Did you always have this ability?\u201d\n\u201cHuh? No. We don\u2019t have any kind of stuff like this in my world.\u201d You say trying to keep steady.\n\u201cI\u2019m not sure what exactly is going on, but it would appear you got some sort of weird mental powers independent of magic. I have fought monsters with similar abilities, which is why I was suspicious at first. You ability reminds me of the magic chair I was telling you about except your power can work even in this anti-magical place and it would appear it isn\u2019t very powerful. I\u2019d almost suggest that you could attempt to wish yourself back home, but as we\u2019ve seen, it isn\u2019t powerful enough to do that. Still, this is probably a good indication that the chair will be able to get you back home. Here, here\u2019s a proper gold piece, I don\u2019t need it. Well anyway let\u2019s get some sleep, we should reach Null tomorrow.\u201d\n\nYou pocket the faultless gold coin and the both of you go to sleep. Before you do though, you reflect on this little adventure. You also wonder about your Mom, she\u2019s going to be worried about you and probably have the police looking all over for you! And when you finally do return, what will you tell her?\n\nYou don\u2019t know, but what you do know for certain is that you DO want to get home as soon as possible even if you do find this place very fascinating.\n\nThe next morning the both of you wake up refreshed and ready to carry on your journey to Null. You don\u2019t get far, when the Adventurer senses someone is following you. You both turn around and see a figure approaching. It looks like a teenage boy, but deathly pale. The odd thing is, he\u2019s wearing modern clothing from YOUR world.\n\n\u201cIs that one of the Forsaken?\u201d you ask\n\u201cHim? No, if it was it would probably coming from Null not towards it, not to mention it would probably be running at us trying to eat us. It also looks too human and it\u2019s wearing strange clothing, in fact it looks more like\u2026well your type of clothing. Friend of yours?\u201d\n\u201cNot that I know of, I\u2019m not friends with anyone his age.\u201d\n\nHe doesn\u2019t quicken his pace; he just continues to walk steadily towards your position. When he gets close enough, you can see his face, which looks emotionless. In fact it looks like he\u2019s staring right through the both of you. The Adventurer draws his sword, but it doesn\u2019t look like this person is showing any sign of going to attack. In fact he just stands there looking off into space.\n\n\u201cAlright, what\u2019s your name?\u201d the Adventurer demands.\n\u201cJohn\u2026Johnny Doe\u2026\u201d he replies still staring into the space. \u201cThis place\u2026it\u2019s dead\u2026numb\u2026like me\u2026\u201d\n\nAs odd as he is, something tells you he\u2019s from your world. Maybe he\u2019s another person the Nightmare Tyrant tried to capture.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to help him", "result": "You step forward towards him, an action that the Adventurer doesn\u2019t approve of at all.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019re you doing?!\u201d\n\u201cI think you\u2019re right, I think he\u2019s from my world. Maybe he escaped from the Nightmare Tyrant too.\u201d\n\u201cI don\u2019t trust him, he\u2019s weird and in my line of work, if it\u2019s weird more often than not, it isn\u2019t good!\u201d\n\nYou ignore the Adventurer and go back to talking to Johnny, who seems to have begun to direct his attention towards you.\n\n\u201cAre you from Earth?\u201d\n\u201cYes.\u201d\n\u201cDid the Nightmare Tyrant bring you here?\u201d\n\u201cYes.\u201d\n\u201cDid you escape like me?\u201d\n\u201cNo.\u201d\n\nThis answer catches you off guard, so much in fact that you don\u2019t react in time to jump out of the way of Johnny\u2019s grip. When he grabs your arm, you feel an instant paralyzing numbness causing you to drop immediately. When this occurs the Adventurer leaps into action and strikes Johnny, but when his sword hits Johnny\u2019s body, it\u2019s almost as if the paralysis crept up the sword and was inflicted upon the Adventurer as well. He falls to the ground clutching his arm and dropping his sword. Johnny follows up by merely touching the Adventurer on the head, completely immobilizing him.\n\nHaving incapacitated the Adventurer, Johnny turns his attention back to you.\n\n\u201cNo magic can work here, but I can. The Nightmare Tyrant wants to see you. You must comply. Perhaps you will become one of the Shadows. Maybe you will become like me. The Nightmare Tyrant will decide. He knows best.\u201d\n\nYou attempt to speak, but you\u2019re unable to. You can\u2019t even think.\n\n\u201cNo more talk. No more resistance. Just dead numbness.\u201d He says and then picks you up and begins to carry you out of the desert. Eventually when you\u2019re out of the anti-magic field, a dark portal opens up, and Johnny delivers you to the Nightmare Tyrant.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Back away from him", "result": "From your world or not, something definitely isn\u2019t right here. In fact you begin pulling at the Adventurer wishing to leave. He concurs, but attempts to warn this person to stop following.\n\n\u201cAlright, Mr. Doe, now that we\u2019ve exchanged pleasantries you need to just stop following us, before you get yourself in a whole mess of trouble.\u201d\n\nThe teenager doesn\u2019t answer; he just continues walking towards you both.\n\n\u201cGet behind me. I get the impression that this guy doesn\u2019t know when to take a hint.\u201d He says picking up a rock and throwing it at the teenager. The rock hits him squarely in the head, it seems like it should\u2019ve knocked him out, but instead it just makes him stop and blink a few times before addressing you in a monotone voice.\n\n\u201cYou should not resist. You must come with me. The Nightmare Tyrant must be obeyed. He is\u2026\u201d\n\nBefore Johnny can complete his sentence, the Adventurer strikes him with his sword, but a strange thing happens. The Adventurer drops his sword and falls to the ground, clutching his arm. It would seem a kind of paralysis has stricken the Adventurer.\n\n\u201cRUN!\u201d he yells trying to crawl away.\n\nWasting no time, you run towards Null. Johnny pays no more attention to the Adventurer and continues to follow you, but still doesn\u2019t quicken his pace. Whatever Johnny is, it\u2019s obvious his own powers are in full effect here too. Probably why the Nightmare Tyrant sent him here.\n\nAs you run, you realize you still need the Adventurer to help you get back home. You need to think of something.", "action_results": [{"action": "Lose Johnny in Null and then return to the Adventurer", "result": "Given Johnny\u2019s seemingly relentless nature, it\u2019s useless to try to reason with him, so you continue to run. He isn\u2019t very fast so you figure you\u2019ll be able to lose him in the ruined City.\n\nSoon you\u2019ve outdistanced Johnny quite a bit, and are in the City of Null. You\u2019re winded, but you just need to hide out here for awhile and then return to the Adventurer, you hope he\u2019s still alright.\n\nLooking briefly around you try to find a big building that looks fairly intact for you to hide in, unfortunately you\u2019re so busy trying to evade Johnny, you\u2019ve forgotten that there are OTHER inhabitants that the Adventurer mentioned living here\u2026\n\nA hideously deformed creature suddenly snatches you when you enter one of the buildings and more of them appear out of the woodwork.\n\n\u201cWell what have we here? Fresh meat? Looks like we won\u2019t be eating rats tonight!\u201d he laughs.\n\nBefore you can try to think of something to escape, one the Forsaken knocks you unconscious with a rock.\n\nEven Johnny doesn\u2019t find you in time to hand you over to the Nightmare Tyrant.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Attempt to reason with Johnny", "result": "You remember Null is filled with dangerous creatures as well, so you wouldn\u2019t be any safer going there by yourself and Johnny\u2019s likely to just keep following you no matter where you go. Maybe you can use your \u201cpowers\u201d to reason with him.\n\nYou turn around begin to try to psychically talk to Johnny. You figure he\u2019ll be more receptive that way. You also don\u2019t know what you\u2019re doing since you\u2019ve never done this before!\n\nJohnny steadily approaches you as you just stand there concentrating really hard while you attempt this unusual plan. Suddenly something happens, he stops walking and your own mind is flooded with a lot of weird thoughts.\n\nYou don\u2019t understand all of it, but you get the impression he didn\u2019t have a good home life in your own world. He used to \u201cescape\u201d to a fantasy world a lot and presumably that\u2019s what attracted the Nightmare Tyrant. You attempt to reason with him, but the link is broken when he verbally shouts out!\n\n\u201cSTOP! Get out of my head! Only the Master is allowed! You MUST submit! He makes everything better! Shadows around me always. No pain, no pleasure, just nothingness\u2026\u201d\n\u201cJohnny, you\u2019re from the same place I am, don\u2019t you want to return home too?\u201d you retort.\n\u201c\u2026better here than what was at home\u2026at least here I have power\u2026and soon you will too. Isn\u2019t that why you came here, to escape the pain?\u201d\n\u201cNo! The Nightmare Tyrant kidnapped me! I want to go back home, my Mom\u2019s probably worried about me!\u201d\n\u201c\u2026mine probably forgot about me years ago\u2026yours will too\u2026you need to just submit\u2026the Nightmare Tyrant makes everything better\u2026\u201d\n\u201cNO! I will not! In fact I want you to stop following me! I want you to leave me alone altogether! You will NOT prevent me from going home! Johnny, you\u2019re nothing but a slave to the Nightmare Tyrant. Is that what you want? Somewhere within you, you must miss something about your home.\u201d\n\u201c\u2026better than home\u2026but\u2026\u201d\n\nOnce again you\u2019ve managed to stir some sort of emotion in Johnny. Suddenly he slumps to the ground and begins to weep. You\u2019re unsure of how to react, but you see the Adventurer staggering back towards you, which at least makes you somewhat relieved.\n\n\u201cLook, you don\u2019t have to stay here; you could return back to Earth with me, all we have to do is\u2026\u201d\n\nJohnny looks up with red eyes, but has regained his composure.\n\n\u201cNo. I left Earth a long time ago. This is my home now. But I see now that I am still under a cruel\u2026guardian. No more. I want to be free\u2026 Arrgh!\u201d\n\nSuddenly Johnny grips his head, and you too feel a pain inside your own. A dark malevolent voice pieces your brain. It\u2019s the Nightmare Tyrant, somehow he\u2019s managed to speak to the both of you from wherever he is.\n\n\u201cDisobedient children! How dare you defy me Johnny! After all I have given you! Didn\u2019t I give meaning to your pathetic life? Didn\u2019t I become the parent you needed? If you won\u2019t obey me willingly then I\u2019ll just have to destroy what little free will I still allowed you to have! And YOU, oh I have special plans for you! Such power cannot be ignored and WILL supplement my own!\u201d\n\nWhile you and Johnny fall on the ground in pain, the Adventurer scoops you up and proceeds to run with you under his arm towards Null.\n\n\u201cHang on kid! Keep fighting whatever it is you\u2019re fighting, I\u2019ll get you to your destination, I haven\u2019t failed in a quest yet!\u201d he exclaims.\n\nIn the \u201creal world\u201d you fall unconscious, but in your mind you\u2019re very much awake. It would seem you\u2019re in some sort of dream world. You\u2019re standing on top of a rock floating in the void of blackness. You see Johnny in the distance standing on another rock fighting off Shadows which are attempting to drag him over the edge. He\u2019s punching them, but his fists are glowing with a white energy.\n\n\u201cI won\u2019t follow your evil commands anymore! From now on, I shall fight you with the very power you gave to me and your Shadows can\u2019t stop me!\u201d He shouts as he completely destroys two Shadows at the same time with one blow of his fist. While you\u2019re watching this the Shadows have become aware of your presence and are climb over the edges of the floating rock.\n\n\u201cFight them off! Imagine yourself a powerful warrior! Or whatever you wish! The Nightmare Tyrant can\u2019t stop you power of your mind if it\u2019s strong enough!\u201d Johnny shouts over to you.\n\nYou do just that, you imagine yourself in armor with a sword. You feel your strength grow and your reflexes quicken.\n\n\u201cCool!\u201d you say and strike at the nearest Shadow, destroying it.\n\nThis battle continues for some time until it seems that the endless amount of Shadows have become too afraid to attack anymore. You hear the voice of the Nightmare Tyrant again.\n\n\u201cFOOLS! You think you\u2019ve won? I was just warming up! I will show you the personification of FEAR and of eternal darkness!\u201d\n\u201cYou always did talk to too much.\u201d Johnny says and summons up a bright blinding ball of light completely enveloping the entire area. You hear an unearthly bellow as you shield your eyes from the blinding light. When you open them again, you see Johnny standing before you.\n\n\u201cIs he\u2026\u201d\n\u201cGone forever? No, but he won\u2019t be bothering you ever again. Me? He will. But I\u2019ll be even more prepared for him for the next time we meet.\u201d\n\u201cYou\u2019re still going to stay here?\u201d\n\u201cYes. I meant what I said that this is my home now, and there is nothing for me back on Earth. But now I see that the Nightmare Tyrant just used me for his own purposes, to help him in his ongoing hunt for more power. I need to stay to make things right again. Maybe even destroy him once and for all. I have to try, after all the evil he\u2019s caused and lives he\u2019s ruined. You should of course go back home, and be thankful for what you have there. Farewell and thank you for opening my eyes.\u201d\n\nSuddenly you wake up from a bed and you\u2019re in an unusually colorful room. You see a broom sweeping by itself pass you by. Jumping up from seeing such a thing, you notice the Adventurer sitting by a table polishing his sword.\n\n\u201cNow you wake up! You know I had to fight through ten Forsaken trying to eat us, with you under my arm and you didn\u2019t even blink! Fortunately I got us here though. So, what happened to you exactly?\u201d\n\nYou and the Adventurer swap stories about what you both experienced in your respective journeys and you both think that each of you had the easier time of it! After showing you some of the \u201ccool magical stuff\u201d in his home, you\u2019re ready to go back to your own. This entire world is very interesting, but you want to return.\n\n\u201cWell, I can certainly understand that. Like I said, I\u2019m a traveler, but I suppose even I get a longing to return home. Y\u2019know, maybe I\u2019ll go visit mine. My real one, not this place. They might even have forgotten all the mischief I used to cause there!\u201d the Adventurer laughs.\n\nThe Adventurer shows you the chair he was talking about. You instinctively feel a power coming from it. Not a magical one either, it\u2019s the same one you have. Perhaps it was a device to enhance such abilities? Perhaps it was a secret weapon involved in the destruction of this City? You don\u2019t know and the Adventurer doesn\u2019t either, all you know is you\u2019re hoping it will help you get home.\n\nSitting in the thing does make you a bit nervous as it resembles an electric chair, but you know you need to calm yourself of any sort of fear and doubt if you want to get back home. You bid goodbye to the Adventurer before attempting to concentrate and he mentions he\u2019ll stand by to help in case it looks like you\u2019re in trouble.\n\nYou are suddenly transported through a tunnel of blackness followed by swirling colored lights. It\u2019s all so strange and overwhelming to you that you pass out once again.\n\n\u201cHey! I told you breakfast is ready, are you going to sleep all day?\u201d you hear your Mom call from downstairs as you awaken in surprise.\n\nYou quickly look around your room and nothing looks out of place. Your Mom hasn\u2019t seemed to notice that you were gone; in fact it doesn\u2019t look like you even left.\n\nWas it all a dream?\n\nYou shake your head trying to decide if it was, then you notice a coin on the floor next to the toys you set up yesterday. A gold coin and oddly its right next to a sword wielding figure with a peculiar smile on his face.\n\nIt wasn\u2019t a dream. It was real. Created by the power of your own imagination. You decide you\u2019ll keep this information to yourself though, since nobody would ever believe it!\n\nYou had an interesting adventure, but you\u2019re glad to be home and thankful for what you have in the real world you think as you go downstairs to eat.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Stick with the Captain", "result": "While this man seems to mean well, you\u2019re still hesitant to just go wandering off with a stranger. Not that you aren\u2019t with some already, but you know the Captain and Lyssia a lot better than this Adventurer. Also you still feel safer with more people defending you, so you decline.\n\n\u201cVery well, I hope you manage to make it home safely.\u201d The Adventurer remarks and takes his leave.\n\nYou begin to wander around the camp looking at all the neat things. If you weren\u2019t in so much danger and worried about getting home, you\u2019d probably want to stay here. Still wishing to be around a familiar face, you go looking for Lyssia and hope she isn\u2019t too busy.\n\nYou end up finding her tent, but she\u2019s not there. You do see a sleeping black dog though, a big one, bigger than you\u2019ve ever seen. Scary actually, in fact it\u2019s even scarier when it suddenly wakes up and leaps on top of you!\n\n\u201cGrrrrr! What have we here? A little thief? Maybe eating your hands would teach you a lesson and I\u2019m pretty hungry!\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re so surprised by it talking; you temporarily forget that you\u2019re in danger.\n\n\u201cY\u2026you can talk!\u201d you sputter.\n\u201cOf course I can talk!\u201d it snarls before sniffing you a bit. \u201cSnnnn\u2026you don\u2019t smell like you\u2019re from around here.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2019m not, where I come from dogs don\u2019t talk.\u201d\n\u201cDOG?!\u201d it growls gnashing its fangs. \u201cI\u2019m a WOLF and maybe you need to learn that lesson too!\u201d\n\nThankfully Lyssia enters at this point.\n\n\u201cBlack Fang, you leave him alone! He\u2019s a guest!\u201d she scolds. Black Fang gives you a dirty look, but backs off to his original position where he closes his eyes again\n\n\u201cThanks\u2026he nearly ate me.\u201d\n\u201cOh I doubt that, I know he doesn\u2019t seem like it, but he\u2019s really a softy.\u201d\n\nOne of Black Fang\u2019s eyes open and he makes a growl, but goes back to sleep. You begin to talk to Lyssia and ask her more about where you\u2019re going.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s an old ruin of an ancient civilization called Zodan. I know because I found it myself while scouting, of course I didn\u2019t explore it in great detail since I figured it would be better to have extra help, but the markings are Zodan. The Zodan are no longer around due to an ancient forgotten war that lead to their downfall, but it\u2019s possible that remnants of their power still exists, possibly something we can use against the Nightmare Tyrant.\u201d\n\u201cLike what?\u201d\n\u201cWell we don\u2019t know. It\u2019s a chance we\u2019re taking, but anything that might help against the Nightmare Tyrant will be a welcome relief. Many people believe his powers to be magical in nature, but they aren\u2019t. A majority of it is purely mental hence why he is anxious to always absorb the fertile imaginations of children. The Zodan also dabbled in similar psionic activity, so maybe\u2026\u201d\n\nSuddenly a soldier comes running into the tent and you\u2019ve just noticed how dark its gotten outside.\n\n\u201cLyssia, we\u2019re being attacked by Shadows! They\u2019re everywhere!\u201d\n\nShe instantly draws her sword and says a few words before leaving.\n\n\u201cYou stay in the tent! And Black Fang, wake up, you protect him!\u201d\n\u201cHuh? Wha\u2026grah! I have to look after this whelp?\u201d\n\u201cDO IT!\u201d\n\nBlack Fang gets up and lopes over to the tent entrance and you hear the sounds of battle close by. Soon those sounds are nearly within the tent as a couple of Shadows find your location.\n\n\u201cHERE! HE\u2019S HERE!\u201d one of them hisses before Black Fang attacks them with his teeth and claws. You wonder if he\u2019s magical in nature since they fall and dissipate from his attacks. However, it looks as if the Shadows are determined to get you as they begin to overwhelm him as well as some of them on the top of the tent attempting to tear it open.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to escape", "result": "You have to get out of here! You crawl on the ground and lift up the bottom of one side of the tent and squeeze out. Unfortunately midway through your escape the Shadows see you and quickly drag the rest of you out of the tent and swarm you. You feel a paralyzing fear overwhelm your mind and the hideous laughter of the Nightmare Tyrant fill it.\n\n\u201cNow you shall join MY army!\u201d you hear his voice say in your mind as the Shadows carry you off to his fortress.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Look for a weapon", "result": "You would think Lyssia would have extra weapons in here tent, but if she does she\u2019s currently using them all, because you can\u2019t find anything! Meanwhile Black Fang is being overwhelmed by Shadows and some of them are successfully ripping open the tent.\n\nYou wish you just had a weapon of some sort to fight them with\u2026\n\nSuddenly a glowing short sword appears in your hand. You\u2019re surprised at first, but when a Shadow comes at you from above, you waste you time in swinging your new acquired weapon at it. The moment the sword touches the shadow, it dissolves and screeches before your eyes.\n\n\u201cHEY, you got a sword how about helping me out over here!\u201d Black Fang shouts out seeing noticing your actions while still fighting off the Shadows.\n\nWithout hesitation you help him, oddly you no longer feel any kind of fear as you strike down the Shadows. Soon you and Black Fang destroy all the Shadows around the tent, but the rest of the camp is still locked in battle and when you look up MORE Shadows start pouring from the sky. Lyssia comes running towards the both of you.\n\n\u201cQuickly! We have to get out of here and head towards the Zodan ruins! The Captain says he\u2019s going to stay behind to hold off the rest of the Shadows!\u201d\n\u201cBut\u2026\u201d\n\u201cMove!\u201d\n\nYou, Lyssia and Black Fang take off into the woods, as the sounds of battle get further behind. There are still a few Shadows in pursuit, but you manage to dispatch them. Eventually you reach an abandoned cottage where you all take refuge in for the night.\n\n\u201cOkay I\u2019m pretty sure we lost the Shadows, we\u2019ll rest here for the night and set off for the ruins in the morning. A question for you though, how did you come across that sword?\u201d\n\u201cI dunno, I just wished for something to fight the Shadows with and it appeared in my hand.\u201d\n\u201cOh yeah? You think you could think up something to get rid of ALL the Shadows? That would really help out a lot.\u201d Black Fang says.\n\u201cMaybe I could wish myself back home\u2026\u201d you say before Lyssia stops you.\n\u201cNo wait, don\u2019t do that. Your abilities while obviously powerful are probably not stable. For all you know you might end up in the middle of an ocean! The power of the mind can be very dangerous. The Zodan experimented with it and they\u2019re no longer around anymore. The Nightmare Tyrant wields mind power for evil purposes in his pursuit to conquer everything in his path. I suggest you don\u2019t over abuse your gift. Don\u2019t worry we will get you home eventually though.\u201d\n\nYou sure hope so, while you trust Lyssia, you really do want to get home. You can only imagine how worried your Mom is going to be and you really won\u2019t know what to tell her when you get back!\n\nIn the meantime you settle down to sleep. Lyssia does as well while Black Fang takes watch since Lyssia points out that he was sleeping all day. Fortunately the night is uneventful and when the morning comes you\u2019re on your way. Black Fang doesn\u2019t travel with you though; in fact he pads off into different direction.\n\n\u201cWhy isn\u2019t Black Fang coming with us?\u201d\n\u201cHe\u2019s not my pet if that\u2019s what you think. He\u2019s a free being allowed to come and go as he pleases, but he\u2019ll be around. He just prefers his own company for the most part. If we get into overwhelming trouble I have complete faith he\u2019ll be around to help. Anyway the Zodan ruins won\u2019t take as long to get to with just us traveling there. We\u2019ll be able to cover more ground and take paths that an army couldn\u2019t travel through.\u201d\n\nAs you and Lyssia travel, you and her exchange a bit of information about each others\u2019 respective worlds which you both find very interesting. You make a lot of progress in one day. So much that Lyssia mentions that you should reach the ruins by the next day. She says that she has orders to search the place as much as she can, and then return back to the Empire where you can get help from the wizards to send you back home. She hopes that the Captain and the rest of his soldiers are alright and will eventually reach the ruins themselves before she returns to the Empire. When night comes Black Fang makes his presence known again as you settle down to camp again.\n\n\u201cI feel I should warn the both of you that we aren\u2019t completely alone in these woods. There\u2019s something, possibly several things running around out there. Caught a glimpse of them a couple times, but they seem unnaturally quick.\u201d\n\u201cShadows?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cNo, they would\u2019ve attacked already. Plus I can smell these things when they\u2019re close by. They might be able to stay out of sight, but they can\u2019t hide their scent. Smells rotten.\u201d\n\u201cI had a feeling that we were being watched, I never saw anything though.\u201d Lyssia replies.\n\u201cThey\u2019ve been staying further away from you two. I think they\u2019ve been watching me a lot more. They probably think I\u2019m a greater threat\u2026and they\u2019re right.\u201d\n\u201cGlad to see that you\u2019re\u2026\u201d Lyssia suddenly stops. \u201cOkay I heard that.\u201d\n\nYou heard it too and all three of you prepare yourselves. You also start to smell something bad like what Black Fang was talking about. Two demonic looking creatures come jumping down from the trees. One of them is much fatter than the other.\n\n\u201cWell there doesn\u2019t seem to be anymore point in hiding, I\u2019m pretty sure we can take them anyway.\u201d The thinner one says.\n\u201cUh huh, yeah. Um, Jarac which one are we supposed to take back to the Nightmare Tyrant?\u201d the fat one asks.\n\u201cHago, you really are an idiot, sometimes I wonder how we\u2019re even related. The boy you moron!\u201d\n\u201cI thought the Nightmare Tyrant only had Shadows working for him.\u201d You say out loud to Lyssia.\n\u201cOh the Nightmare Tyrant has many working for him, boy. However it seems that a new battle front has recently opened up and he has great need of them elsewhere, but fortunately we happened to be in the area\u2026 so here we are.\u201d\n\u201cSo the Nightmare Tyrant relies on half witted demons to do his work now?\u201d Black Fang growls.\n\u201cHey! Only my brother is half-witted! And for what he\u2019s going to do to you, he doesn\u2019t need to be very smart. Enough of this talk, let\u2019s get to it. Are you ready brother?\u201d\n\nHago doesn\u2019t even reply he just smiles with a toothy grin and advances towards Black Fang. Jarak focuses his attention on you, but naturally Lyssia stands in front of you.\n\n\u201cRun away pretty one if you value your existence, though I\u2019d prefer if you didn\u2019t.\u201d Jarak says and attacks. He\u2019s incredibly quick and manages to hit Lyssia and knock her to the ground. A quick glace sees that Black Fang is struggling with Hago.\n\nYou need to act now, you can\u2019t possibly fight either of the demons with just your weapon given how quick they are, but even they wouldn\u2019t be quick enough to fight the power of your mind\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Think of something to help your companions", "result": "You wish for something that could help Lyssia and Black Fang, and at first nothing seems to happen, but Jarek then notices something when he tries to grab you and you dodge out of the way.\n\n\u201cWHAT? I should\u2019ve caught you! No human can move that quickly, especially not a boy!\u201d\n\u201cJarek, I feel like something just sapped my\u2026UGH!\u201d Hago grunts as Black Fang claws him across the face. Lyssia also gets back up to strike Jarek across the chest. He reels backward and realizes he no longer has an advantage.\n\n\u201cOur powers are gone! RUN!\u201d Jarek shouts and runs off with Hago following behind. Black Fang pursues them.\n\n\u201cBlack Fang wait!\u201d Lyssia shouts and runs after him. Not wishing to be left alone, you follow Lyssia. You have a hard time keeping up, but after a short distance she stops when she sees Black Fang sniffing around a strange gray building. There are no windows, just a single door. It\u2019s actually quite tall; you can\u2019t believe you never saw it before even in this forest.\n\n\u201cWhat is this?\u201d Lyssia asks.\n\u201cDon\u2019t know, but the two demons ran in there. I was tempted to go in, but considering this thing just materialized out of nowhere I thought discretion might be the better idea for once. It\u2019s completely featureless except for this small weird symbol on the door.\u201d\n\nLyssia tells you to stand back as she examines it.\n\n\u201cThis is Zodan! I saw these symbols in the ruins I briefly explored. We have to go in explore it If the Nightmare Tyrant\u2019s minions are in there, who knows what secrets the Nightmare Tyrant might gain? We certainly don\u2019t want him to get anymore powerful than he is!\u201d\n\nAt this point the thought of getting home is still in the back of your mind, but with all that has happened you can\u2019t help, but be caught up in this excitement even if a lot of it has been scary.\n\nYou all enter the building, which apparently is a lot bigger on the inside. All the rooms are lit and furnished, but again everything is a dull gray color, the furniture (Most of which looks like it comes from various time periods), the floors, the walls, all of it. Someone must\u2019ve really liked that color.\n\nBlack Fang easily tracks the demons by their smell; however you all can hear their voices anyway. They sound like they\u2019re arguing with someone. When you arrive in the room where they\u2019re located, you see strange machines and the two demons arguing with a ghostly figure.\n\n\u201cWhat do you mean?! Teleport this place! We gotta get out of here!\u201d Jarek shouts.\n\u201cThis place isn\u2019t your personal transportation system! I told you that this place uses up a lot of power and needs to recharge when it teleports. Not to mention you insisted on keeping this place invisible the whole time, didn\u2019t you think that was going to use up power? You two are just going to have to wait awhile, there\u2019s nothing I can do.\u201d the ghost replies.\n\u201cArgh! If you weren\u2019t a ghost already, I\u2019d make you one! Okay Hago, check\u2026\u201d\n\nBefore Jarek can give whatever order he was going to give, Black Fang and Lyssia attack. The two demons stand no chance without their enhanced speed. A couple of quick blows and both give other worldly shrieks before they burst into puffs of smoke and disappear. The ghost on the other hand just floats there observing it all.\n\n\u201cWell, I\u2019m glad they\u2019re gone, they were really getting on my nerves. Never did like demons. Now what can I do for you?\u201d\n\u201cWhat is this place exactly?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cOh just a relic of the past or the future depending on your outlook on life. It once was a mobile military base if you were looking for something a little more precise. Used for conquest and that sort of thing.\u201d\n\u201cThis is Zodan in nature isn\u2019t it?\u201d Lyssia says.\n\u201cYes, but a fat lot good it did them, considering they aren\u2019t around anymore, well not in the traditional sense anyway. I take it you\u2019re not minions of the Nightmare Tyrant then?\u201d\n\u201cDo we look like we are?\u201d Black Fang snarls.\n\u201cWell you might, furball especially with that attitude! But the other two certainly don\u2019t look the part, besides I know the Nightmare Tyrant turns children into Shadows. Nasty fellow. No redeeming qualities whatsoever.\u201d\n\u201cSo who are you and why are you working for the Nightmare Tyrant?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cI\u2019m not. I\u2019m just a caretaker of this place and as such I\u2019m tied to it. I can\u2019t prevent someone from using it however they want, I\u2019m just here to make sure it doesn\u2019t fall into decay or get destroyed like so many of the other Zodan inventions. When the Nightmare Tyrant found this place he decided to use it to find other possible Zodan weaponry since this place can easily home in on other Zodan ruins. So far with little success as I said most Zodan equipment has lost all its power. Normally he has those mean little Shadows running around in this place chattering incessantly, but for whatever reason he put those two demons in charge. Guess he needed to reassign troops or something.\u201d\n\u201cHey I found a Zodan ruin not far from this forest, is that why those demons were here?\u201d\n\u201cYes, there was one located by me recently, but those demons aren\u2019t like the Shadows and their minds weren\u2019t as shall we say as sharp hence why we\u2019re here in the middle of the forest instead of closer to the desired location. While this place is magical in nature, it was primarily designed to run on the power of the mind. The Nightmare Tyrant\u2019s Shadows are all psionically linked to him so teleportation isn\u2019t a problem. Those demons couldn\u2019t focus on anything! Now you boy, I sense a great deal of mental focus in you. Your sword was created from your mind was it not?\u201d\n\u201cYes, it was.\u201d\n\u201cAh yes, I can see why the Nightmare Tyrant would want someone like you to add to his power.\u201d\n\u201cCan this place take me home?\u201d you ask.\n\u201cThis place needs time to recharge as those demons used up much of its energy with their bumbling. However, you could probably take yourself home. This place enhances the powers of the mind. Normally I wouldn\u2019t advise it since as I said it requires discipline, but you seem to have a natural gift at it and would probably be successful. Just visualize your home and concentrate.\u201d\n\nIt seems so simple! You wonder if you could\u2019ve done it all along, but that hardly matters, since you can do it now. Lyssia puts her hand on your shoulder.\n\n\u201cWell, it looks like you\u2019ll get home quicker after all.\u201d\n\u201cThanks for protecting me from the Shadows and demons.\u201d You tell her.\n\u201cHey you helped in both battles.\u201d She says.\n\u201cOh and what did I do, sit around and watch?\u201d Black Fang remarks to the both of you.\n\nYou nearly laugh and thank Black Fang too. The Caretaker then speaks.\n\n\u201cOkay, now I advise complete quiet when you attempt this. It\u2019s better for concentration and noise won\u2019t distract you. So your friends will have to remain quiet. I\u2019d advise that they leave altogether, as even their random thoughts could interfere. As I said, the chaos of the mind is one of the reasons for the downfall of the Zodan. I\u2019m a ghost so you need not worry about me.\u201d\n\u201cFine! Fine! I know when I\u2019m not wanted I\u2019ll go wait outside!\u201d Black Fang says and lopes off. Lyssia is about to leave too, but you insist that she stay because you feel safer with her around. After seeing that you really want her to stay she does and says she\u2019ll wish for you to get home as well.\n\nYou sit in the middle of the room and close your eyes and concentrate. You visualize your home. You see it. You can almost feel it. You\u2019re there, until\u2026\n\n\u201cLYSSIA!\u201d Black Fang roars as he runs into the room.\n\u201cI told you the boy needs to concentrate and silence!\u201d the Caretaker snaps.\n\u201cShut up ghost! Shadows are outside! A whole mess of them!\u201d\n\nLyssia and Black Fang quickly run out of the room. Lyssia shouts at you to continue to your concentration.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue to concentrate for home", "result": "You were close last time to getting home, you can\u2019t stop now. Besides you have to do it quickly before the Shadows get inside!\n\nYou attempt to drown out the sounds of battle outside and your concern for Lyssia and Black Fang. Its very difficult and you\u2019re having a difficult time concentrating. You see your house, then various people you\u2019ve encountered, then this place, then total blackness\u2026\n\n\u201cHE\u2019S HERE! GET HIM GET HIM SSSSSS!\u201d you hear a Shadow hiss before you are transported, but it isn\u2019t to where you wanted\u2026\n\nWhen you open your eyes and see nothing but darkness and you are being held down on some sort of smooth cold surface by Shadows and you no longer have your sword. A sinister voice emanates from the darkness and you\u2019re completely paralyzed with fear.\n\n\u201cWelcome to your new home and family.\u201d", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Attempt to help", "result": "You can\u2019t just abandon those who have helped you, and you wouldn\u2019t be able to concentrate anyway. You stand up and wish for something simpler and more immediate\n\nSuddenly you\u2019re wearing shiny armor and armed with a glowing repeating crossbow.\n\n\u201cHmm, didn\u2019t expect that.\u201d The Caretaker says as the sounds of battle start to get louder, in fact now they sound like they\u2019re coming into the building.\n\nYou run into the next room and Lyssia and Black Fang fighting off dozens of Shadows and more of them seem to be pouring in. You waste no time and begin shooting them with your new weapon.\n\n\u201cHa ha! Back to the void Shadow scum!\u201d Black Fang laughs when he see you helping.\n\u201cThere\u2019s more of them coming in from the left!\u201d Lyssia shouts and suddenly you all hear a booming voice.\n\n\u201cFOOLS! You think you can stop me and take what is rightfully mine? You cannot defeat me! And YOU boy! Your powers are nothing compared to my own, its time that you see what REAL mental power can achieve!\u201d\n\nSuddenly the lighting gets much dimmer, almost to the point of complete darkness. Fortunately your powers maintain their glow making you the proverbial shining beacon of light. Suddenly more Shadows pour in from the corners of the walls. You\u2019re surrounded. However, help comes in the form of the very building you\u2019re in\u2026\n\n\u201cNightmare Tyrant you have attacked this structure and as I am bound to defend it, you have made yet another enemy!\u201d the Caretaker ghost exclaims and the entire building gets brighter, blinding most of the Shadows.\n\n\u201cGet \u2018em while they\u2019re weak! I\u2019m using all the power that this structure recharged right now!\u201d\n\nYou, Lyssia and Black Fang destroy more Shadows than you can count, but they still keep coming. You can\u2019t believe it. You\u2019ve got a lot in your favor except numbers, if you just had that, maybe you could finally defeat these Shadows once and for all\u2026\n\nOnce again it would seem your wishes have come true.\n\n\u201cBack to the void! Forward men!\u201d a familiar voice shouts. It sounds like its coming from outside.\n\u201cThat\u2019s the Captain!\u201d Lyssia exclaims as she strikes down another Shadow.\n\u201cBout time we got some help here!\u201d Black Fang growls.\n\nThe battle is going badly for the Shadows who aren\u2019t attacking so much as they\u2019re trying to get away right now. The Nightmare Tyrant\u2019s voice again is heard and filled with rage.\n\n\u201cCOWARDS! FIGHT OR YOU\u2019LL SUFFER FOR YOUR FAILURE!\u201d\n\nIt\u2019s no use though; even his threats can\u2019t motivate the Shadows to victory. You can somehow sense that the Nightmare Tyrant is desperate for victory because if he can\u2019t get you now, he won\u2019t be able to get you ever again. Eventually all of them are defeated. You, Lyssia and Black Fang meet the Captain outside who has a handful of his original army left.\n\n\u201cHow did you find us?\u201d\n\u201cWell after we beat back the first Shadow attack we regrouped and headed towards the ruins as planned. Then we saw this tall gray structure looming in the distance so we head towards it, and found more Shadows, so finding you was somewhat pure chance! Well it looks like some of you have underwent some changes\u2026\u201d the Captain says when he sees you with your armor, sword and crossbow.\n\u201cWe\u2019ve got a lot to discuss about this structure Captain, but first he has to use it to get home.\u201d\n\u201cVery well, I\u2019m interested in hearing your report Lyssia. And as for you, I wish you a safe journey home. And thank you for your help with the Shadows, you\u2019d certainly make a good knight.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, you\u2019re a natural Shadow slayer kid.\u201d Black Fang remarks.\n\nAfter Black Fang\u2019s uncharacteristic praising remark, you and Lyssia return to the structure where the Caretaker floats about fixing stuff.\n\n\u201cBlasted Shadows. It\u2019ll take me forever to fix this place again. Oh well, I suppose that\u2019s what I\u2019m here for. So, are you ready to go now? I trust the fighting is over?\u201d\n\nYou nod and get ready to concentrate again, but before you do, Lyssia gives you something.\n\n\u201cHere, this is medal I was awarded for bravery in battle. I\u2019ve been awarded many actually, but I feel your actions were certainly deserving of such a medal. So this is for you.\u201d she says and then gives you the medal and hugs you goodbye.\n\nCherishing the gift, you prepare for your trip home, and concentrate once again. Soon you can feel yourself being transported.\n\nYou float through a tunnel of blackness followed by swirling colored lights. It\u2019s all so strange and overwhelming to you that you pass out once again.\n\n\u201cHey! I told you breakfast is ready, are you going to sleep all day?\u201d you hear your Mom call from downstairs as you awaken in surprise.\n\nYou quickly look around your room and nothing looks out of place. Your Mom hasn\u2019t seemed to notice that you were gone; in fact it doesn\u2019t look like you even left.\n\nWas it all a dream?\n\nYou shake your head trying to decide if it was, then you notice a medal on the floor next to the toys you set up yesterday. The medal is next to three figures: A man in plate armor, a black wolf and finally a warrior woman in leather armor and strangely they all have a look of victory in their faces.\n\nIt wasn\u2019t a dream. It was real. Created by the power of your own imagination. You decide you\u2019ll keep this information to yourself though, since nobody would ever believe it!\n\nYou had an interesting adventure, but you\u2019re glad to be home and thankful for what you have in the real world you think as you go downstairs to eat.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Think of something to directly harm the demons", "result": "You immediately concentrate on something that will hurt the demons, and your sword suddenly becomes a glowing blue axe. With Jarek approaching you strike at him and score a hit. He bellows in great pain, but it doesn\u2019t stop him from knocking you out with his quick reflexes.\n\nWith you as no longer a threat, Jarek calls his brother to retreat. Lyssia and Black Fang attempt to pursue, but they\u2019re not fast enough to stop the two demons from disappearing with you.\n\nWhen you wake up you\u2019re in near total darkness with only the sinister voice of the Nightmare Tyrant with you.\n\n\u201cWell it would appear my minions have successfully served me this night. I certainly hope you will serve just as well in the future.\u201d You hear him say before the darkness completely takes you.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Run back to tell Melcar", "result": "You aren\u2019t going to mess about with a bunch of angry little purple people; you don\u2019t know how dangerous they might be. You head back to the front of the house and knock on the door to get Melcar\u2019s help.\n\nYou don\u2019t get an answer, but a short man with a long pink beard comes walking up the steps, he\u2019s your height, but is obviously old. He reminds you of a dwarf. Maybe he is, you are in a different world after all, but the pink beard is really bizarre. There\u2019s another taller man walking behind, but is very disheveled looking. His odor isn\u2019t the best either as he gives off a bad smell and he isn\u2019t even next to you.\n\n\u201cOutta the way boy! I got important business with this charlatan who claims he\u2019s a wizard!\u201d the dwarf exclaims nearly knocking you down.\n\u201cChargrum, are you sure this is a good idea? I mean it was only five gold\u2026\u201d\n\u201cONLY FIVE GOLD? Stinky, you\u2019ve been working for me for how long now and you\u2019re still too dumb to figure out that nobody steals from me? You\u2019ve truly hit an all time low in stupidity!\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but this guy\u2019s a wizard\u2026\u201d\n\u201cHe\u2019s a charlatan! And even if he was a real wizard, it doesn\u2019t matter because the money for once is the least of my complaints, he\u2019s gotta pay for what he did! That blasted potion turned my beard PINK, or were you too stupid to even notice that Stinky?\u201d\n\u201cOkay, I\u2019m just saying\u2026\u201d\n\nBefore you can react to all of this, Melcar finally answers the door and addresses you first.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s all this blasted noise? Didn\u2019t I tell you to go clean up my backyard?\u201d\n\u201cBut there are all these mean little purple people throwing rocks at me!\u201d you say.\n\u201cSo? They\u2019re just Furms, just stop them, shouldn\u2019t be that hard for you.\u201d\n\u201cNevermind all that, I want my five gold back, look what your potion did to my beard, you charlatan!\u201d the dwarf yells.\n\u201cOh fer\u2026look Chargrum, I said no refunds when I sold you the potion, besides you got what you wanted. Your beard grew a lot longer didn\u2019t it? Don\u2019t like it? Shave it off!\u201d\n\u201cWHAT!? Shave off my beard? That\u2019s madness! But no dwarf wants a pink beard! What Dwarven woman would want me like this?\u201d\n\u201c(Sigh) Stop pretending that you\u2019re a dwarf! You\u2019re a Halfling that\u2019s just trying to fool Dwarven women! And you\u2019re calling ME a charlatan?\u201d\n\nChargrum suddenly looks around nervously and then hits Stinky for snickering.\n\n\u201cShhhh! Alright, alright, keep your voice down! Look, do you have anything to change my beard back to a proper color?\u201d\n\u201cMaybe, but\u2026hmm, that doesn\u2019t look good\u2026\u201d\n\nMelcar\u2019s statement and his eyes gazing past his porch cause the rest of you to turn around look where upon you see the sky turning jet black and dark winged creatures begin to descend from it.\n\n\u201cSHADOWS!\u201d Malcar yells at which point you, Chargrum, and Stinky all rush inside before he shuts the door.\n\n\u201cWhat are shadows doing here? This village isn\u2019t even of any strategic importance to the Nightmare Tyrant!\u201d Chargrum shouts.\n\u201cHe\u2019s the Nightmare Tyrant, does he need a reason? But I\u2019ll wager they\u2019re looking for him.\u201d Melcar says pointing at you. \u201cThey\u2019ll probably try to swarm the house soon, I better prepare this place\u2026.I have to go get my spell book!\u201d\n\nAfter Melcar runs off to go get his book, Chargrum demands and answer from you.\n\n\u201cWhat did he mean, they\u2019re probably looking for you?\u201d\n\nYou hesitantly explain yourself at which point Chargrum gets a look in his eye that makes you uncomfortable.\n\n\u201cSo if that\u2019s the case, then the Shadows will probably leave after they get you, well I know how to solve this problem!\u201d\n\nChargrum advances on you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run away", "result": "You run up the stairs of the house, with Chargrum in pursuit.\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t just stand there picking your nose Stinky, help me catch the little runt!\u201d Chargrum shouts.\n\nYou reach the second floor and run into one of the rooms locking it behind you. You turn around to see that you\u2019re in a bedroom. Probably Melcar\u2019s no doubt. A single window leads outside. You could escape from it, but you then remember all the Shadows are outside waiting for you in the first place, in fact you can hear their screeching surrounding the house.\n\nA Shadow breaks in the window just as Chargrum bashes the door open and you begin to wish you were anywhere, but here!\n\nNo sooner have you thought that, you find yourself in front of Melcar, surprising the pair of you! From the looks of things, you\u2019re in a basement, or lab. You know you\u2019re underground, because you can see there is a stairway leading up and hear Chargrum\u2019s voice coming from above. He\u2019s screaming actually.\n\n\u201cWha\u2026where did you come from?\u201d Melcar asks.\n\u201cI\u2026I dunno! I was running from Chargrum and hiding and then I wished I was someplace else and then I found myself here!\u201d\n\u201cWait. Why was he chasing you?\u201d\n\u201cHe was trying to throw me to the Shadows!\u201d\n\nNo sooner have you said that, when Stinky comes running down the stairs.\n\n\u201cThe Shadows are in the house and they took away Chargrum through one of the windows!\u201d\n\u201cWhat?! I just erected a barrier! They shouldn\u2019t be able to get in!\u201d\n\u201cWell a few of them have, and Argh! Here they come!\u201d Stinky says as some Shadows come down the stairs hissing and screeching. He quickly runs towards the both of you and behind Melcar.\n\n\u201cGet behind me too, kid.\u201d\n\nA few chants and Melcar unleashes a couple of electrical blasts from his fingers zapping all of the attacking Shadows. They give one last screech before disappearing.\n\nMelcar immediately rushes upstairs to see if there are anymore Shadows, you and Stinky follow closely behind him. After some checking, it would appear that the rest of the Shadows have been kept out and only a few managed to get in before the barrier appeared. You can still hear them still trying to get in though.\n\n\u201cWhew. Okay. That should hold for awhile.\u201d Melcar says collapsing in his chair.\n\u201cBut what about Chargrum\u2026the Shadows\u2026they\u2026\u201d\n\u201cI can\u2019t do anything. They got him and that\u2019s it. But judging by what the kid told me he was trying to do it sounds like he got what he deserved anyway. Besides, I would\u2019ve thought you of all people would\u2019ve been glad to be rid of him, with the way he treated you.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2026guess so, but what\u2019re we going to do now?\u201d he asks.\n\u201cDunno yet, but I\u2019m hoping the kid can help out. If he can like I think he can; then we should be fine.\u201d\n\nNow both of you are looking at Melcar wondering what he\u2019s talking about. He sees that he\u2019ll need to explain in more detail.\n\n\u201cKid, as I said you were brought here by the Nightmare Tyrant due to your strong sense of imagination. However, judging from your recent transportation trick it would appear that your imagination is strong enough to cause things to happen with the mere power of your mind. Yet, it would also appear that your power is limited. You wished you were away from danger, yet only re-appeared in another place in the house. Though my magic barrier was up at that point, so perhaps that has something to do with it. I don\u2019t know\u2026let\u2019s test something.\u201d\n\nMelcar points to another chair.\n\n\u201cConcentrate, and think about that chair being solid gold.\u201d\n\nYou aren\u2019t sure about all of this, but you\u2019re interested in this \u201cnew power\u201d you\u2019ve acquired so you comply. Perhaps you could try to even wish yourself back home!\n\nYou close your eyes, concentrate and wish for the chair to be solid gold, but it\u2019s more difficult than you thought. Your mind is periodically bombarded with images of darkness and grinning Shadows. Eventually you fall to the floor. Melcar helps you up. The chair is still the same, except it has a single gold piece on the seat. Melcar checks to see if it\u2019s real, and then he pockets it.\n\n\u201cWell, just as I thought, it\u2019s unpredictable and weak right now.\u201d\n\u201cI\u2026saw Shadows and darkness\u2026\u201d you say still holding your head.\n\u201cIt looks like the Nightmare Tyrant really wants you; he\u2019s probably linked to you psychically or something. I wouldn\u2019t try to use your power to try to get back home. You\u2019re likely to appear right in his clutches, but if we harness your power a little better, we can at least get rid of this immediate threat of Shadows. Focus on immediate help right now rather than a long term\u2026\u201d\n\nSuddenly Melcar is struck in the back of the head, by a Shadow! It must\u2019ve still been hiding during the search! Melcar collapses and falls. Stinky runs off, leaving the Shadow to turn its attention towards you, hissing aggressively.", "action_results": [{"action": "Use your power to try to escape", "result": "You attempt to wish yourself elsewhere again, but you failed to heed the warning given by Melcar who stated how such an action might be dangerous, and in this case it was\u2026\n\nYour mind is once again flooded by darkness and Shadows filling you with terror, and causing you to feel pulled towards it. A sinister laugh echoes throughout your head causing you to immediately break your concentration, but the damage is done as you are captured by the Shadow that\u2019s currently in the room with you. At this point your mind is too paralyzed with fear to be of any use, but it knocks you out just to be sure you don\u2019t try to escape again.\n\nThen it, along with its fellows takes you to meet the Nightmare Tyrant, whose laughter you hear once more before he carries out his evil plans for you.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use your power to fight back", "result": "You have to fight back, as escape is not an option. You don\u2019t even concentrate; you just wish you had something to defeat this creature!\n\nSuddenly a glowing sword appears in your hand. You also feel somewhat different, as if you have been trained to use one before. The Shadow steps back a bit, but then attack anyway. You take one swing at it and strike a powerful blow causing it to completely disappear.\n\nYou hear more coming in from the second floor again. The barrier must be weak in that area. Seeing as Melcar\u2019s out of it, you\u2019re going to have to reinforce it yourself.\n\n\u201cStinky! Stop hiding and try to bring Melcar back around so he can help! I\u2019m going to get rid of these Shadows!\u201d you order as you run upstairs.\n\nMore Shadows are eager to carry out the will of their master, but you\u2019re better prepared for them now physically as well as mentally. You strike down the first one coming down the hallway, and then the second one, and then the next, until you get back to the bedroom that you teleported from. You can see that the same window that the Shadows broke through before is where the barrier is also \u201cbroken\u201d. The blue glow of the magic barrier is non-existent there.\n\nBefore more Shadows can get in, you begin to wish for the barrier to be repaired. While you attempt this task, you begin to hear the taunts of the Shadows trying to fill you with doubt. You also hear a more sinister voice, one that carries fear directly to your mind.\n\n\u201cLittle fool! Do you actually think this is going to stop me? Your attempts only delay the inevitable. Eventually you WILL be mine!\u201d\n\nThis evil presence in your mind causes you to break your concentration. You\u2019re a little shaken by hearing the voice of the Nightmare Tyrant and you\u2019ve failed to repair the barrier and now more Shadows are climbing in. Fortunately, Melcar has regained consciousness and has appeared to help.\n\nMelcar zaps the Shadows and with a few mumbling chants the barrier is repaired. Before you thank him, you notice that he\u2019s soaking wet.\n\n\u201cUh\u2026\u201d\n\u201cYeah I know, I\u2019m all wet. Stinky nearly drowned me in his attempt to wake me up. Pity he doesn\u2019t immerse himself in as much water! Still, I guess it worked.\u201d Melcar replies.\n\n\u201cI heard the Nightmare Tyrant\u2019s voice in my head.\u201d\n\u201cNot surprised. He\u2019s probably trying to prevent you from using your power. He\u2019s able to focus in on you better because you\u2019ve been in the same location for a long time. I\u2019d suggest moving, but given that we\u2019re surrounded by Shadows, that\u2019s not really an option anymore.\u201d\n\u201cLook, can\u2019t YOU just send me back home? I mean that\u2019s what you said you\u2019d do if I had cleared your backyard.\u201d\n\u201cUh, yeah\u2026about that. I was just kind of being lazy. I just didn\u2019t want to be bothered to do it. In fact I had a list of other chores I was going to have you do if you finished that one.\u201d\n\u201cWhat!? You lied? You mean your wife was right about you being a charlatan?\u201d\n\u201cAM I NOT! I AM a wizard! I erected this barrier didn\u2019t I? Though maybe my wife is right about one thing, I am lazy. (Sigh) I guess I\u2019m paying for my sloth now. If I\u2019d just cleared out the backyard myself, instead of having you do it, the Shadows wouldn\u2019t have arrived. Bah, no time to worry about the past now, we need to solve this problem. Okay, I\u2019ll try to get you back home, without you around, the Shadows won\u2019t be around either. I know I have some sort of portal spell in one of my books somewhere. I\u2019ve never had any reason to use it before though and those types of spells are very taxing. I would definitely have to take down the barrier first and of course you know what that means and I still don\u2019t know if the spell will be successful, like I said I\u2019ve never cast one before.\u201d\n\u2018Is there anything we can do to slow down the Shadows?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cWell, we can barricade the house properly before I take the magic barrier down which will take us some time, but it\u2019s safer. We\u2019ll have to hope the Shadows don\u2019t break in quickly though. The second way is if we actually try to destroy all the Shadows currently out there, before I start the portal spell. In this case we\u2019ll have to hope that the Nightmare Tyrant can\u2019t summon reinforcements quick enough.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Barricade the house", "result": "You might have new abilities, but they\u2019re still limited. Fighting a bunch of Shadows is just going to tire you and Melcar out and Melcar needs all of his energy to cast the portal spell.\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s barricade the house.\u201d You say.\n\u201cAlright, but I have to look for that spell first, so you\u2019ll be doing most of the barricading. Hopefully it doesn\u2019t take me too long.\u201d\n\u201cOh, well maybe I can get Stinky to help me.\u201d\n\u201cGood idea, I would imagine he\u2019ll be able to at least be useful in that aspect. Make sure you stay focused and block out any of those Shadow tricks or anything the Nightmare Tyrant might try to do to your mind.\u201d\n\nYou take Melcar\u2019s advice and go talk to Stinky. He\u2019s still in a state of panic, and gibbering about the Shadows trying to get in.\n\n\u201cHey, help me barricade the house.\u201d\n\u201cBut what good will that do? Trapping ourselves in won\u2019t help! They\u2019ll get in eventually!\u201d\n\u201cLook, we\u2019ve got a plan so that the Shadows won\u2019t bother you ever again, but I need you to pull it off and that involves you helping me barricade the house! You\u2019re braver than you think Stinky, look at me, I didn\u2019t think I could fight the Shadows either and I did.\u201d\n\u201cYeah, but I don\u2019t have any powers like you do and Chargrum always said that I was too\u2026\u201d\n\u201cChargrum isn\u2019t around anymore to abuse you, so his opinion doesn\u2019t matter, in fact it never did. You\u2019re better off not thinking about anything he might\u2019ve said about you. You can do this. Now\u2019s the time to prove yourself.\u201d\n\nYour inspiring words make Stinky feel more confident in himself, probably for the first time in his life. He immediately thanks you, and begins to help you barricade the house. You spend a whole day doing this mainly because Melcar has a really hard time finding anything in his disorganized lab. You mainly focus on the task at hand as does Stinky, but your thoughts briefly wander about your home. If\u2026no WHEN you get back home, you don\u2019t know how you\u2019re going to explain your disappearance to your Mom. You can\u2019t dwell on such things too much though, you need to keep yourself alert.\n\nEventually Melcar comes back up from his lab.\n\n\u201cFound it. Now I\u2019m going to go back down into the basement and begin the spell because it\u2019ll be the safest place I\u2019ll be able to cast it. I hope your barricades are strong enough to hold because I won\u2019t be able to fight Shadows AND cast this spell. If the Shadows do manage to break in, well its going to be up to you to fight them off.\u201d\n\u201cAnd me\u2026\u201d Stinky pipes up.\n\u201c\u2026well, this is a surprise. Okay, the both of you then, here Stinky you\u2019ll need something magical to fight them.\u201d Melcar hands Stinky a wand of some sort. \u201cMake the shots count, because I forget how many charges it has left in it. Okay I would suggest you two guard the basement doorway and when I tell you the portal is open that will be your cue to make haste into it, because again, I don\u2019t know how long I can keep it open. You guys ready?\u201d\n\nYou and Stinky nod.\n\n\u201cOkay, I\u2019m going to dispel the barrier.\u201d\n\nMelcar makes a few chanting noises and the barrier goes down where upon you hear the Shadows howling in excitement and start trying to bash their way in. You all retreat back to the basement, where you and Stinky prepare yourselves for an attack and Melcar begins to cast the Portal Spell.\n\nAll seems to be going smoothly, but then you hear the inevitable break in, and the first Shadows attempt to recapture you. Fortunately you\u2019re in a good position to fight them. They can\u2019t overwhelm or sneak up on you. After striking a few down, a smaller Shadow appears and sounds painfully familiar\u2026\n\n\u201cYOU did this to me! Now I\u2019ll do what I wanted to do in the first place! Throw you to the Nightmare Tyrant!\u201d Chargrum hisses in his new Shadow form.\n\nYou take a swing at Chargrum, but you miss and end up falling off balance causing you to fall down the steps! You\u2019re hurt, and very dizzy, but you can see Stinky trying to fight off Chargrum. He discharges a bolt from the wand, but once again Chargrum proves to be very nimble in his new form and knocks it out of his hand and him to the floor.\n\n\u201cOutta the way Stinky! When ya get turned into one of us, I\u2019ll make sure to really punish you, for you traitor!\u201d\n\nChargrum races down the stairs towards you, just as you see Stinky getting swarmed by other Shadows at the top of the stairs. You roll out the way of Chargrum\u2019s clutches and pick your sword back up.\n\n\u201cBetter put down those Shadows quickly! I\u2019m not near done yet!\u201d Melcar shouts from his own position after seeing you engaged in combat with Chargrum.\n\nYou strike down a couple more Shadows, but Chargrum continues to prove to be faster. He manages to knock you down again and jumps on top of you as your sword is separated from you.\n\n\u201cThe Nightmare Tyrant wants to relay a message to you!\u201d he hisses and you feel the sinister voice of Tyrant entering your mind again.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ve lost! You cannot defeat me, I am everywhere. You WILL submit and become my servant!\u201d\n\nThe Nightmare Tyrant is attempting to break your will and fill you with terror again, but it\u2019s not going to work this time, you can feel that victory is almost near and the Tyrant probably feels it too. He knows that if you get away back to your own world that he\u2019ll never be able to try to get you ever again. You won\u2019t be beaten after coming this far, all you need is a distraction to help you get your sword back and Chargrum off of you\u2026\n\nAnd with that thought in mind, Stinky comes from out of nowhere and zaps Chargrum point blank in the back with his wand. He screeches horribly as he disappears before your eyes.\n\n\u201cShould\u2019ve watched your back around a traitor like me, Chargrum.\u201d Stinky smirks as you scramble to retrieve your sword.\n\nYou strike down a few more Shadows, and try to hold them back at the bottom of the stairway. Stinky\u2019s wand has run out of charges, but the better news is that Melcar has completed the portal spell! A large blue portal opens up. Now you can hear the Nightmare Tyrant very clearly.\n\n\u201cNO! GET THE BOY! NOW!\u201d he roars.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s open! Get in quick! I don\u2019t know how long it will hold!\u201d Melcar shouts.\n\n\u201cGo! We\u2019ll be alright! We can hold them off!\u201d Stinky adds.\n\u201cI can\u2019t leave you without a weapon!\u201d you shout and hand Stinky the sword, at which point he hands you the used up wand.\n\u201cIt\u2019s not much, but think of it as a souvenir! Thanks for your help!\u201d he shouts as fights off more Shadows coming down the stairs.\n\nYou run towards the portal and give Melcar a look before jumping in.\n\n\u201cStinky\u2019s right, we\u2019ll be fine, though I\u2019m sure my wife will yell at me for destroying half the house! Get in!\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re sort of worried about Stinky and Melcar, but you realize you have to go now. The Nightmare Tyrant bellows again to his minions about not letting you escape as you run for the portal and entering it.\n\nYou are enveloped by blackness followed by swirling colored lights. It\u2019s all so strange and overwhelming to you that you pass out.\n\n\u201cHey! I told you breakfast is ready, are you going to sleep all day?\u201d you hear your Mom call from downstairs as you awaken in surprise.\n\nYou quickly look around your room and nothing looks out of place. Your Mom hasn\u2019t seemed to notice that you were gone; in fact it doesn\u2019t look like you even left.\n\nWas it all a dream?\n\nYou shake your head trying to decide if it was, then you notice a small rod on the floor next to the toys you set up yesterday. It\u2019s the used up wand and oddly it\u2019s right next to a couple of figures, one holding a sword and another with his hands positioned to cast a spell. They strangely have a tired, but yet relieved look on their faces.\n\nIt wasn\u2019t a dream. It was real. Created by the power of your own imagination. You decide you\u2019ll keep this information to yourself though, since nobody would ever believe it!\n\nYou had an interesting adventure, but you\u2019re glad to be home you think as you go downstairs to eat.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Destroy the Shadows", "result": "You want to get home and away from this place as soon as possible. You feel with your sword and new abilities along with Melcar\u2019s help you should be able to take care of them.\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s destroy the Shadows!\u201d you say.\n\u201cAlright, but let me look for that spell first, because after we\u2019ve destroyed the Shadows, we\u2019re going to want to cast the portal as soon as possible. Shouldn\u2019t take me too long.\u201d\n\u201cOkay, what about Stinky?\u201d\n\u201cStinky? He won\u2019t be of any help! He\u2019ll probably be hiding in the house the whole time! I\u2019ll go look for that spell, you just get yourself prepared, because this won\u2019t be easy.\u201d\n\nYou take Melcar\u2019s advice and begin to get yourself in a proper frame of mind; in fact you spend a day doing this since Melcar has a really hard time finding anything in his disorganized lab. Stinky is constantly in a state of panic, and gibbering about the Shadows trying to get in, making it harder for you to keep yourself calm.\n\nEventually Melcar comes back up from his lab.\n\n\u201cFound it; alright let\u2019s get rid of these Shadows quickly. I\u2019m going to dispel the barrier.\u201d\n\nMelcar makes a few chanting noises and the barrier goes down where upon you hear the Shadows howling in excitement and start bashing their way in, and in the case of some already get in through the upstairs window.\n\nYou and Melcar begin to fight the Shadows, while Stinky goes off to hide, though it doesn\u2019t do him much go since the Shadows at this point are intent on not just getting you, but now everyone in the house, eventually all of his running and hiding attempts fail as you see him being dragged off by a few Shadows, you attempt to stop them, but nearly get yourself captured in the process.\n\nThis ordeal is very tiring as the Shadows seem to be more numerous than you thought. Melcar eventually exhausts his spell power and is reduced to beating the Shadows with a magic wand. You briefly worry about him being able to cast the portal spell, but as it turns out, that will be the least of your worries.\n\nA shorter Shadow suddenly jumps on your back; it begins to taunt you as it attempts to wrestle you down. The voice is very familiar\u2026\n\n\u201cYOU did this to me! Now I\u2019ll do what I wanted to do in the first place! Throw you to the Nightmare Tyrant!\u201d Chargrum hisses in his new Shadow form.\n\nWhile you manage to get him off and strike him down, Chargrum was able to distract you long enough for other Shadows to overwhelm you, and your sword is separated from you. The blackness has now enveloped you and your worry has now become terror and you can\u2019t think straight. You call out for Melcar to help, but he too has been overwhelmed.\n\nThe sinister laugh now fills your mind, paralyzing it, and soon all is forever shadows when you are taken directly to the Nightmare Tyrant.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Fight him", "result": "Chargrum is your height so you think you can fight him off, however you\u2019re forgetting that he still has the strength of someone a lot older than you, he easily fends off your attack and grabs you by the scruff.\n\n\u201cStinky open the door! We gotta get rid of this Shadow magnet! NOW!\u201d\n\nStinky fumbles with the door while you protest and struggle, but its no use, Chargrum has already thrown you outside to the Shadows.\n\nWhen you pick yourself up, you\u2019re stricken with mind paralyzing fear as a large group of grinning Shadows encircle and capture you.\n\nThey take you back to the Nightmare Tyrant who has no intention of getting rid of you.\n\nEver.", "action_results": []}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story38.json b/data/scraper/stories/story38.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..77f45c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story38.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=56742", "context": "", "first_story_block": "\u201cLook at the birds, Mommy!\u201d a child\u2019s voice exclaims.\n\nYou snap awake, checking for your weapons automatically before you remember you\u2019re on a civilian transport.\n\n\u201cBout time, Zee. We left underspace half an hour ago,\u201d Hinsman says from beside you. \u201cSmooth as butter. They have stabilizers set up here now, I didn\u2019t know that. This system\u2019s really had some work put into it since I was here last.\u201d\n\nIn his fifties but not yet looking his age, he\u2019s supposed to be dressed as an asteroid speculator out on holiday and is struggling in the narrow confines of his seat to tug his coat on. Hinsman\u2019s on the short side, and the garment is a couple of sizes too big. All around you others, tourists, businessmen, and families, are starting to collect their things as well.\n\n\u201cAnyway, just waiting on our transfer now.\u201d\n\nYou unsnap your safety belt. \u201cOkay.\u201d\n\nHinsman\u2019s got the aisle seat, just one more factor in his unspoken role in keeping you from too much direct contact with the public. Fine by you. Your job has always been to protect these people, not make conversation. Gazing out the window, you have a good view of the green planet. Camarov IV. It\u2019s supposed to be beautiful, but it\u2019s not like you\u2019re here to sightsee. This is just your fastest route back to work.\n\nThe Order cruiser you\u2019d been using got enough of a beating on your last mission it needed to be taken to a real shipyard for repairs, and meanwhile this transport was headed directly for Camarov and had two vacancies. There\u2019s another Order ship en route to here which you\u2019ll transfer to to be taken back to the Outer Rim. You\u2019ll never even set foot on this planet.\n\nThere is a gentle thud as the landing ship locks on and the crew starts shepherding passengers towards the exit. Hinsman combs his dark hair and tends to the mustache he\u2019s been cultivating. You just sit and wait.\n\nBoth of your wrist comms beep at the same time, and you see the Order ship has left underspace. There\u2019s a little flurry among the crew when it requests to lock on, but Hinsman flashes a badge and his signature smile and the two of you transfer over without incident.\n\nOnce aboard, the ship unlocks and moves to a safe distance for a jump. Then there\u2019s a delay as the pilot seems to have no intention of leaving until he downloads whatever media Camarov IV has to offer. Images of green hills and misty lakes and crystal spires and dancers on a stage and some sort of historical reimagining of Old Earth tumble across the viewscreen.\n\nThe pilot, Karoff, is middle aged, tall and with thinning blond hair just starting to shade to grey. His mustache however is much more impressive than Hinsman\u2019s. You\u2019ve worked with him before. You don't always get his sense of humor, but he's okay.\n\nThe next stop will be The Last Outpost for refueling, then you'll be taken along a scenic tour alternating between the most boring and dangerous parts of the Outer Rim as you go down the list fulfilling your various obligations there and being available to lend assistance in emergencies.\n\nYou lean against the wall and mentally check out until it\u2019s time to strap in for the jump to underspace. Hinsman was right, the in system stabilizers do improve the experience quite a bit.\n\n\n*****\n\n\nThe Last Outpost is dark when you approach.\n\n\u201cWell that\u2019s not a good sign,\u201d Karoff mutters. The station floats in place like a fat black spider against the pale backdrop of the system\u2019s single barren planetoid. Karoff makes a few adjustments to make your approach less obvious and then starts running scans from a distance. It took you nearly a week to get out this far from Camarov and you\u2019re all aware that if there\u2019s trouble it\u2019ll be just as long before you can find any backup.\n\nThe Last Outpost was once a research hospital on the edge of protected space. Now it\u2019s a ways past the official line, although after the rollback it persisted as a stopover and fueling station for both the military and any junker the colony worlds could put together to evacuate in. Officially out of service and abandoned now as far as anyone outside the Order is supposed to know, it\u2019s still got enough automated defenses that any scavengers looking for scrap will be sent packing in a hurry. Or it used to, anyway. Hinsman is frowning over the console now too.\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s a lot of damage.\u201d\n\n\u201cPirates?\u201d\n\nHinsman shakes his head. \u201cI don\u2019t think so. The way some of the plating is buckled, this looks like a string of explosions from the inside. Mostly just in that one arm, but the defenses are offline and there\u2019s no more than basic life support anywhere on the station.\u201d\n\nThere\u2019s a soft beep as a scan is completed.\n\n\u201cOne life sign,\u201d Karoff grunts.\n\n\u201cEven if they pulled out everyone on mission, there should\u2019ve be at least three here for maintenance still.\u201d Hinsman joins you at the window as he finishes speaking and stares across the distance. \u201cBut...I\u2019ll hail them I suppose.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou sure?\u201d\n\n\u201cMight as well. Doesn\u2019t look like they have much left to shoot at us anyway.\u201d\n\n\u201cLet\u2019s hope appearances aren\u2019t deceiving.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Inquiry", "result": "Karoff looks tense as Hinsman tries to contact the station. There\u2019s a long wait with no reply. He frowns and tries once again using Order passcodes.\n\nA green light blinks on, and then a moment later a haggard-looking blonde woman with high cheekbones and thin lips appears on the viewscreen with a crackling of static. \u201cSo someone finally did show up.\u201d\n\nThe woman\u2019s voice is flat and blank. She\u2019s young and might have been pretty under other circumstances, but her eyes have dark rings under them, her face is sallow and her hair hasn\u2019t seen a brush in awhile. She dips a spoon in a tub of drippy, melting ice cream while staring at the screen indifferently.\n\nKaroff pulls up her ID while Hinsman coughs and clears his throat. \u201cAh...you\u2019re Matti Oswen, correct?\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah.\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019m Agent Hinsman. We were just stopping over on our way into the Rim, but it looks like you\u2019ve had a bit of trouble here. Do you need assistance?\u201d He keeps his tone light and injects a note of friendly concern.\n\nShe blinks at him owlishly a moment, then sets the ice cream aside and scratches lightly at the side of her neck. \u201cI sent out a call, but the computer lost power and I\u2019m not sure it went through. That was...almost a week ago, I think.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re a maintenance worker, correct? What happened here, Matti? And where are the others?\u201d\n\n\u201cInea and Markov? Oh, they\u2019re dead.\u201d Her voice is still flat and strangely disinterested.\n\nKaroff dutifully pulls up their IDs as well. Their new status as deceased hasn\u2019t been updated in the Order database yet, anyhow, and as the three of you have heard nothing regarding the damage to the station or a rescue attempt you can only assume her distress signal never did make it out.\n\nOswen continues only after Hinsman prompts her again. \u201cInea had an accident while doing repairs and Markov killed himself and tried to take the rest of the station with him a couple of days later. I rerouted the power to redirect the blast just in time, but most of the generators still blew. I\u2019ve been sitting around in the dark and trying to eat everything in the freezers before it all spoils, and then figuring I\u2019d inject myself with something before the oxygen fails.\u201d\n\nHinsmans voice is soothing. \u201cWell I\u2019m sorry you had to go through that Matti, but you\u2019ll be safe now. We\u2019re going to send out a request for help and then lock on to see what we can do about repairs in the meantime. We can route enough power over to make sure life support holds up, anyway.\n\n\u201cWhatever.\u201d\n\nOnce the call is cut, a distress signal is sent back to headquarters along with a short recorded message. The three of you briefly go over the situation.\n\nHinsman sums it all up. \u201cIt\u2019ll be a few days before anyone can arrive to help, and we can\u2019t leave until then. Even if no survivors were here, the station itself is vulnerable and hell, it\u2019s probably more necessary to the Order than any of us, if we\u2019re being honest. Although this Oswen woman...she might be in shock, or there might be something else going on there. Not sure we can trust her.\u201d\n\nKaroff spits out the end of his mustache. \u201cWe\u2019re gonna get in there and find out the bitch slit their throats and made bikini tops out of their skin. Seen it happen before.\u201d\n\nYou look at him. \u201cReally?\u201d\n\n\u201cAhh, well not the skinning for bikinis part, but people get assigned to an out of the way place like this too long, they can just snap and start killing each other. Or there maybe was some kind of love triangle going on that turned nasty. And not the good kind of nasty,\u201d he adds, apparently feeling the need to clarify.\n\n\u201cWell I guess we\u2019re just going to have to risk our skins then,\u201d Hinsman says with a slight roll of his eyes. \u201cOr you and I anyway, Karoff. But Zee, you were always going to be working alone anyhow. You won\u2019t have us standing by in orbit if you go on by yourself, but there\u2019s nothing stopping you from suiting up and taking a spare shuttle, if the job is urgent enough.\u201d\n\n\u201cStill may be awhile before we know exactly how bad the damage is to the Outpost,\u201d Karoff points out. \u201cShe could be needed here.\u201d\n\n\u201cTrue, but...Zee, I guess this one is going to be your call. I don\u2019t have details on the mission you\u2019ve been requested for, so what\u2019s protocol here?\u201d\n\nThis would all be simpler if you could directly contact a commander, of course, but out here that\u2019s rarely possible and having to make decisions like this on the fly is part of the job.\n\nORDER when it started out stood for Outer Rim Defense, Evaluation and Research. The joke everyone likes to make is how when the Hunger virus appeared on the scene the E stood for Evacuation, and then finally Eradication.\n\nOf course that\u2019s the part you\u2019re all still working on. And it\u2019s not actually all that funny.\n\nThe Order is the peacekeeping force out past the edge of protected space, although not in any kind of official capacity anymore. A little over twenty years ago when the Hunger virus was at its peak and blazing from planet to planet, the border was rolled back and then rolled back again. Colonies and mining facilities, trading stations and outposts were cut off in the midst of the chaos and anyone who wouldn\u2019t or couldn\u2019t evacuate was left to fend for themselves.\n\nSome of the Order agents were recalled back to New Terra, but for many more this was their home, this was just what they did. Momentum and habit went a long way and the organization already had enough ships, stations and equipment out here to continue operating much as they always had. If anything they were more effective now that the bureaucracy and red tape had been stripped away, although that sometimes birthed its own kind of controversy.\n\nIndependent, isolated colonies and small time miners and traders had no one to protect them from piracy, not to mention the trade consortiums that amounted to a more organized version of the same thing. They welcomed the Order\u2019s presence on one hand while resenting anything they perceived as meddling in their own affairs on another. In areas where the line between New Terra and frontier authorities blurred, certain parties also never failed to point out that the Order had no more jurisdiction than any other private organization; outside of the ancient one of might making right and the bit about possession and how it related to law, anyhow.\n\nAnd although on paper the organization kept to the same laws and standards they had from the beginning, they were just as on their own out here as anyone and had to see to their own people\u2019s interests and protection as well. New blood could be hard enough to find as it was without asking it to spill itself simply because it was the right thing to do. About the only thing anyone could agree on was that the Order were the only ones equipped to really do anything about the Hunger virus and so they should be left to it, no questions asked.\n\nSo thankfully, politics and the rest of that nonsense aren\u2019t anything you ever have to concern yourself with. All you do is your job, and all you worry about is doing it well. Right now that means making a judgment call on where you\u2019ll be the most effective. And right now, that does seem to be here. Nothing you were given indicated anyone was in direct danger, and the Last Outpost is as valuable to the Order as any of the other facilities you were asked to check on, and far more strategically important. The refueling station is what makes these little forays out in this area of Rim possible in the first place.", "action_results": [{"action": "Secure the station.", "result": "You indicate to the others that you\u2019ll stay for now and Karoff directs the ship on a route toward the station. It makes sense to at least do a cursory inspection of the damage and make sure that at least life support will hold up. And of course there\u2019s the other issue of the alleged sabotage and personnel having been lost under circumstances still waiting to be confirmed. Leaving just two operatives to handle it all isn\u2019t ideal.\n\nOf the station\u2019s eight arms, the docking bay is luckily on the side that\u2019s suffered the least damage. Karoff locks on without incident and the panels of the reinforced portal retract with a gentle whirring. Beyond, the station is dark and cold. You all file out and make your way out of the landing bay and down a hallway with the aid of flashlights. With what little power remains rerouted to life support, the portal to the central complex refuse to open. Attempts to contact Oswen on a short range channel fail, and so Hinsman finally gets the door moving with the aid of his gun; wiring the energy cell to the panel next to it, that is. At the jolt of power it snaps open with sudden speed, then begins to close again in slow motion and grinds to a halt about a third of the way. The three of you squeeze past and before long find yourselves in an open area, a kind of joint dining hall and exercise room with dead video screens lining the walls.\n\nThe kitchen area behind the dining hall is a disaster zone of empty plastic trays, overflowing trash bins and spoiled food. There\u2019s no sign of Matti although you do find her abandoned ice cream bucket. The three of you begin to search area by area. Although reluctant to split up, you do move a bit faster than the others and take to checking into rooms and around corners ahead of them.\n\nA pool of vivid crimson against the polished grey tile is your first confirmation that something has gone wrong. You race forward to Matti Oswen\u2019s crumpled form and check her pulse, clamping another hand down on the stub of her severed arm. Lifting the woman from the ground and calling out to the others, you splash your way through the blood, tracking it behind you while more soaks into your uniform.\n\nA medical station was one of the places the three of you had already searched, so you hasten to it and deposit her on a steel table, keeping your grip just above the wound while Hinsman activates the computer.\n\n\u201cThis nursing AI was obsolete fifteen years ago,\u201d he grumbles, taking a protective suit from a persistently dinging open door and yanking it on over his clothes.\n\n\u201cIsn\u2019t that a bit of overkill?\u201d Karoff asks, watching him.\n\nHinsman\u2019s response is muffled through the breathing filter. \u201cIt won\u2019t let me even proceed without it. This place was last used to quarantine evacuees exposed to Hunger, there\u2019s no such thing as overkill as far as the computer is concerned. Just be glad the whole station isn\u2019t set to self destruct the moment someone gets a paper cut.\u201d He pauses a moment to apply a tourniquet. \u201cNow...Zee, you step back, it hates you too.\u201d\n\nKaroff looks at you and snorts. \u201cI imagine so. You look like you just left the scene of an axe murder.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019d already moved away at Hinsman\u2019s order, and now you ruefully wipe you face, hoping to achieve a clean spot. Karoff\u2019s ensuing guffaw informs you you probably just made the situation worse.\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll go clean up the mess in the hall...and myself,\u201d you say, turning to go.\n\n\u201cZee, wait, wait, Miss Oswen is going to need an arm transplant, don\u2019t you think?\u201d\n\nYou blink at Karoff. \u201cAre you serious?\u201d\n\nThis just provokes more laughter.\n\nHinsman, who has been preoccupied with the soothing voice of the medical AI and the use of instruments taken out of little drawers that have been popping open in sequence, now shakes his head at the two of you as he changes to clean gloves. \u201cI\u2019m not that good a doctor, I\u2019m afraid. Zee, you go on.\u201d\n\nHe snaps his fingers at Karoff and in the other hand produces an oversized needle, like a magician\u2019s trick. \u201cBut I will need a blood donor, and guess who\u2019s compatible?\u201d\n\nAlready on your way out, you turn and get a glimpse of the pilot\u2019s grimace as the door slides shut between you.\n\n\n\nCleaning up is a tedious but straightforward affair. You scrub yourself down and change into a plain grey jumpsuit you find before returning to the scene of the accident and getting to work.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dispose of the severed arm", "result": "It seems Oswen had been trying to unjam a door that leads to one of the station\u2019s storage arms, in much the same way Hinsman had gotten you all into the central complex earlier. It was her misfortune that upon receiving a jolt from a maintenance tool the door had snapped shut, meaning it had been open to begin with.\n\nThere\u2019s enough juice left to get it back to where it was and you carefully retrieve the severed limb on the other side, slipping it into a biohazard bag. Taking a moment to confirm with Hinsman there\u2019s nothing he can do as far as reattaching it, you consider your options for disposal. An incinerator would the most straightforward, but those require an amount of energy that seems wasteful if not impossible to produce given the station\u2019s current reliance on emergency backup power for life support.\n\nYou remember then the walk in freezer in the kitchen behind the dining hall. At least that would keep it from rotting if it takes longer that expected to get the power on full. The room isn\u2019t able to maintain freezing temps anymore but it\u2019s still noticeably colder than the rest of the station, and the rest of the station is cold enough. Placing the bagged arm on a shelf, you halt a moment as your gaze fixes on the two bundled forms in the back. So you weren\u2019t the first one to have the idea to use the place as an impromptu morgue. These must be the bodies of the other two maintenance workers, Inea and Markov.", "action_results": [{"action": "Inspect the bodies", "result": "Opening the largest body bag first, you briefly examine Markov. Evidence of cuts, burns, and some bits of broken glass still embedded in the skin seem consistent with him having been in the vicinity of an explosion, although there were a lot of unanswered questions in Matti\u2019s brief explanation. Further details will have to wait till she\u2019s conscious again, you suppose.\n\nYou zip the bag back up and turn your attention to Inea. The dark haired woman\u2019s cause of death is immediately obvious, her skull on the left side having been caved in just above and behind the ear. \u2018An accident while doing repairs\u2019 was how Matti had described her death. While you can\u2019t yet find anything to contradict that, as you probe along the edges of the splintered bits of skull and cold globs of brain matter it seems to you it would\u2019ve taken an awful lot of force concentrated in that one spot all at once to do that kind of damage.\n\nThen again, Matti had nearly managed to kill herself as well. You wonder what sort of accident it was supposed to have been. It\u2019s almost incredible to you that three people so incompetent had been left in charge of such an important Outpost. It\u2019s true that space is a big place and Order agents and personnel are stretched thin, but in your experience it\u2019s rare for things to go this spectacularly wrong without someone being at fault.\n\nFinding nothing more of note, you close up that body bag too and then exit the freezer. Grabbing a mop from the corner of the kitchen and filling up a bucket, you make your way back to where you\u2019d found Matti and go to work on the rapidly drying blood. The blood has begun to dry and it\u2019s obvious this will take awhile so you clear out your mind and focus on the task.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the nursing station", "result": "Matti is asleep. Hinsman is seated at a table near the bed, freshly showered and changed into a grey jumpsuit identical to yours and looking exhausted. Karoff is nowhere to be seen.\n\n\u201cHe\u2019s back on the ship seeing how much power we can spare,\u201d Hinsman tells you, before you can ask. \u201cThis medical station\u2019s about the only thing working as intended in this place right now. We need to at least get the computers up before we can figure out what all needs to be repaired and how. It\u2019d be really great if we had a maintenance worker familiar with the place to talk to, but...\u201d He inclines his head toward the young woman\u2019s supine form and shrugs. The end of what\u2019s left of her arm is neatly wrapped in bandages, but her face looks pale and strained even in her sleep and her eyes twitch restlessly behind her lids.\n\nBriefly you relate what you\u2019d discovered.\n\n\u201cThe plot thickens,\u201d he mutters, then gestures toward the computer. \u201cWhy don\u2019t you see what you can find there as far as internal records on these three?\u201d\n\nYou nod and take a seat, flashing your wrist at the sensor. The computer blips once and you\u2019re in. You have a pretty high clearance. Higher even than Hinsman\u2019s you suspect, although that\u2019s not really a thing you\u2019re supposed to ask anyone about. Retrieving sensitive data from wrecked Order ships or evacuated command stations is one of the things you need to be able to do with no fuss when required, and your superiors know this.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look up Inea", "result": "Name: Inea Banca\nEyes: brown\nHair: black\nHeight: 5\u20199\u201d\nWeight: 145\nAge: 46\nOther: tattoo on right forearm\nOrigin: Camarov IV\nSkills: fringe space station maintenance\nYears service: 9", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Look up Markov", "result": "Name: Markov Carst\nEyes: blue\nHair: brown\nHeight: 6\u20193\u201d\nWeight: 201\nAge: 41\nOther: left handed\nOrigin: Galton Station\nSkills: fringe space station maintenance\nYears service: 5", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Look up Matti", "result": "Name: Matilda Oswen\nEyes: green\nHair: blonde\nHeight: 5\u20193\u201d\nWeight: 122\nAge: 26\nOther: stationed at The Last Outpost for completion of training\nOrigin: Camarov IV\nSkills: fringe space station maintenance\nYears service: 1", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Go finish cleaning", "result": "You come across no shortage of corpses in your line of work and so you have little curiosity about these two, morbid or otherwise. When Matti awakens, Hinsman will question her about the deaths, but aside from some practical knowledge in the area no one here is exactly a forensics expert. That\u2019ll be the job of the team the Order will dispatch to deal with the situation out here.\n\nYou exit the freezer, pausing to grab a mop from a corner of the kitchen and fill up a bucket. Returning to where you\u2019d found Matti, you go to work. The blood has begun to dry and it\u2019s obvious this will take awhile so you clear out your mind and focus on the task.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the nursing station", "result": "Matti is asleep. Hinsman is seated at a table near the bed, freshly showered and changed into a grey jumpsuit identical to yours and looking exhausted. Karoff is nowhere to be seen.\n\n\u201cHe\u2019s back on the ship seeing how much power we can spare,\u201d Hinsman tells you, before you can ask. \u201cThis medical station\u2019s about the only thing working as intended in this place right now. We need to at least get the computers up before we can figure out what all needs to be repaired and how. It\u2019d be really great if we had a maintenance worker familiar with the place to talk to, but...\u201d He inclines his head toward the young woman\u2019s supine form and shrugs. The end of what\u2019s left of her arm is neatly wrapped in bandages, but her face looks pale and strained even in her sleep and her eyes twitch restlessly behind her lids.\n\nThere doesn\u2019t seem to be anything you\u2019re able to help with here, so you start to head back to the ship to find Karoff and wind up meeting up with him in the arm of the docking bay. He\u2019s got a hovering platform loaded with equipment next to him and is attaching a power node to a panel.\n\n\u201cOh, there you are Zee, perfect. I need you to distribute the rest of these EPNs around the central complex.\u201d He gestures at the platform. \u201cI\u2019ll come along behind you in a bit and rig them up.\u201d\n\nThe EPNs--external power nodes--can be linked in to bypass dead or damaged areas in the regular power system. It\u2019s likely some trial and error will be needed but you doubt it will take more than a couple of hours if all he cares about is the main section and the docking bay. The other seven arms of the station can just stay sealed off until a proper repair team comes in.\n\nYou return to the central area of the station and begin setting down the EPNs near accessible panels and in a short while you\u2019ve covered the perimeter and begin making your way back. All is quiet until just as you pass a narrow hallway you hear a voice. \u201cZani, get inside!\u201d\n\nYou whirl, activating the short range laser weapon you always have with you. The voice had been a woman\u2019s, sounding frantic and seeming to come from close by. But you see nothing. You shine your light down the hallway you\u2019d just passed, revealing a row of half a dozen closed doors on each side.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the hallway", "result": "You want to verify there\u2019s a threat before you call anyone else in. Even though you\u2019re not suited up at the moment you feel pretty confident in your ability to handle a few trespassers anyhow so there\u2019s no point in risking the others if they prove hostile.\n\nYou ghost down the dark hall opening doors one by one and shining your flashlight around. The rooms all appear to be crew quarters and although you search any place anyone could hide, they\u2019re all empty and only three show any recent signs of usage.\n\nRetreating back to the entrance the hall, you widen the scope of your search, but after another half hour are forced to admit to yourself there\u2019s no one here after all. This wouldn\u2019t be the first time you\u2019ve had...hallucinations in the past. Or whatever the technical term would be for you. They have to get pretty bad before they impair your ability to work, but the woman\u2019s voice had seemed so close and chillingly real. You\u2019ll have to keep aware of the possibility of it happening again now. If it gets worse, you know you\u2019ll have to report it, but for now you\u2019re just glad you didn\u2019t drag anyone else down here for no reason.\n\nYou return to the crew quarters to look once again at the rooms the current maintenance crew were occupying, although more out of curiosity about them than any expectation you\u2019ll locate your phantom voices. The walls of Matti\u2019s room are covered in projected images of performers and celebrities...you recognize many of them from the media Karoff downloaded from Camarov.\n\nInea\u2019s room contains images of a family, presumably hers, and several empty bottles that indicate she had a minor pill habit. Nothing illegal enough for you to care about--even less so now that she\u2019s dead--and most of them are expired anyhow and you suspect taken from the station\u2019s abandoned medical arm.\n\nMarkov\u2019s room is somewhat grubby with dirty clothes tossed carelessly around. Your eyes are drawn to his desk immediately as the only uncluttered spot in the room. After a moment you realize that\u2019s because his personal computer is gone. Every other room, even the empty ones, had one of the devices built into the desk surface.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search for the missing computer", "result": "The crew quarters aren\u2019t large. If the computer is in here there\u2019s only so many places it can be, and a methodical sweep of the room, closet and bathroom finally turns it up--slid into a pair of brackets fitted to the underside of the nightstand drawer. Just as you slide it out, the lights flicker on. Karoff\u2019s triumphant voice sounds over the intercom, followed a moment later by Hinsman congratulating him.\n\nYou however have your attention glued to the activated screen. It\u2019s still an Order-issued computer so your wrist chip was able to get you in, and what you\u2019re looking at is intriguing. Four days before Markov triggered the explosion that took his life--and nearly took out an infinitely more valuable outpost--he started sending and receiving a series of encrypted messages on a private frequency.\n\nWhat it all means or if it\u2019s even related to his actions at all you can\u2019t say just yet, but it\u2019s obviously something to look into. You take the computer with you return to where you left the hover platform. The main computer room Karoff\u2019s working in now is quite close so you take a detour to speak to him.", "action_results": [{"action": "Frequencies", "result": "\u201cInteresting. What was he up too, I wonder?\u201d Karoff peers at the coded messages thoughtfully. \u201cThe main computer should be able to unencrypt these though. We\u2019ll just leave it hooked up here and let it do its thing. The damage report for the station is almost done compiling anyhow.\u201d\n\n\u201cHow bad is it?\u201d\n\nHe spins in his chair to face a new screen, chewing on a dirty thumbnail. \u201cHmm, let\u2019s see. This would indicate The Last Outpost is...yup, it\u2019s damaged all right. And needs repairs. From people who are not us.\u201d\n\n\u201cSo nothing immediate needs attending to? There\u2019s nothing wrong that would put you or Hinsman in danger if you waited here a few days?\u201d\n\n\u201cWell, unsealing some of the station\u2019s arms would be pretty fatal. They took the brunt of Matti\u2019s hack rerouting job and a couple lost atmosphere. The old medical wing itself is in real bad shape obviously, that\u2019s where Markov set off the first explosion. But all we really need is life support and power here and in the docking bay. We don\u2019t really have enough power for the rest of the station anyway as long as we\u2019re siphoning from the ship. I\u2019ll go and seal anything unnecessary off in a bit and then we don\u2019t even need to worry about leaving them with life support.\u201d\n\nGood. That means you can leave here and continue carrying out your orders just as soon as this mess with the dead workers is sorted out.\n\n\u201cBy the way, Hinsman is going to try waking Oswen up for a little while and then wanted us there afterwards to sort of put our heads together on how to handle all this,\u201d Karoff adds, nearly reading your mind.\n\nYou step toward the door. \u201cI\u2019ll go now.\u201d\n\n\u201cEh, what\u2019s the rush? But I\u2019ll be there after I finish a couple things. We\u2019re all just gonna sit around till the relief team arrives either way.\u201d\n\n\u201cI could go and take care of my mission while the two of you wait. Hinsman suggested that earlier, remember?\u201d\n\nKaroff snorts and shakes his head slowly as he turns his attention back to his screen. \u201cDon\u2019t you ever get tired of working so hard?\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re a little take aback by the question. \u201cNo?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Matti's Story", "result": "Matti Oswen is awake and speaking with Hinsman already when you enter. They pause and look up at the soft whoosh of the door, but you take up position in an unobtrusive spot next to it and stay quiet till they resume the conversation. Oswen\u2019s words are hardly above a whisper. Her face is drawn and she\u2019s clearly in pain. Hinsman in his usual way is breezily taking her mind off things while leading her along to a series of key questions and not making it obvious that\u2019s what he\u2019s doing.\n\n\u201c...I don\u2019t know what happened to Inea exactly. She was just replacing some conduits in the old medical wing...standard stuff, it\u2019s got to be done every four years even in the areas no one uses anymore. Something fell and hit her on the head, he told me. But Markov was in shock, or something like it so he never really went into detail. He hardly left his room for two days, and after that he...\u201d she swallows hard and then continues at his gentle prompting. \u201cI mean, it never seemed that they were like, close close, but they\u2019d worked together a long time, and I can\u2019t think of any other reason he\u2019d do what he did.\u201d\n\n\u201cWas a report sent in about Inea\u2019s death?\u201d\n\nShe nods. \u201cWe sent one, yes. Markov filled in the details of course, since I wasn\u2019t there.\u201d\n\nHinsman looks at her intently a moment, then begins asking her some simple questions about their routines around the station, listening patiently to her answers before coming back around to Markov. \u201cSo when did you first realize what he was doing?\u201d\n\n\u201cLike I said, I\u2019d barely seen him in two days. That wasn\u2019t unusual even when there were three of us if we happened to be working on different areas of the station, but I was worried enough about how he was taking things I even went and knocked on his door once. He wouldn\u2019t answer. Although that day that...everything happened he turned the intercom on a couple of times.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat did he say?\u201d\n\n\u201cWell...nothing. I could hear him breathing and got the idea he was about to say something, but then it would cut out. I was definitely on edge by that time and not sleeping well, but I kept telling myself a team would be here soon, they\u2019d pick up Inea\u2019s body and station someone else here and surely they\u2019d notice what a wreck Mark was and do something to h-help.\u201d She has to stop a moment, and draws a shuddering breath.\n\n\u201cAnd then what happened?\u201d\n\nI was taking a break in the main computer room...I\u2019d decided to sit in a VR film actually, to take my mind off things. Then all of a sudden a bunch of alerts started sounding.\u201d\n\nSomething crawls along your arm and you brush it away. An ant or something is your immediate assumption. A strong fragrance of freshly cut grass lingers in your nostrils.\n\n\u201cLook at the birds, Mommy!\u201d\n\n\u201cZani, get inside!\u201d\n\nWith the interference of the audio hallucinations you come back to yourself. An insect of any kind would be highly unlikely to have hitchhiked this far, and the scent of grass is not something you're certain you've even encountered enough to readily identify. Not to mention your sense of smell is rudimentary at best.\n\nOswen has been describing how she counteracted Markov's attempt to destroy the station. \u201cIt's almost funny, covering that exact scenario was one of the last things we did in training before they sent me out here. And it just hadn't really sunk in even then that he would really do something like that intentionally. But it worked just like they said it would.\u201d\n\nTouching your arm, you vividly remember the tickling, crawling sensation and look carefully at your clothes and the floor. There is no ant.\n\nYou shake your head to banish these distractions and refocus. You don\u2019t want to miss anything important.\n\n\u201cThere was a critical overload there in the medical arm where Mark had started the chain reaction, but I was able to redirect the worst of the rest into the arms next to it, so the blown generators were the only damage to the central complex.\u201d\n\n\u201cAnd when did you recover Markov's body?\u201d\n\n\u201cWell he wasn't dead yet, is the thing. The emergency shields were still holding in that section and the computer showed a life sign so I put on a breathing mask and went to try and drag him out.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat was risky.\u201d\n\nShe gives another shaky laugh as she recalls the events. \u201cThe anti-grav was already down, and I had to cross this section where the wall and floor was just...gone, so I was terrified the shields would collapse and blow me right out into space. And then when I got to him he was covered in blood, almost unrecognizable. He was trying to unlock a cabinet but his hands were all torn up. There was broken glass and like, shrapnel, all in his skin. Some of it looked deep. And...the most difficult thing was he just wasn't himself.\u201d Her expression darkens. \u201cHe'd completely lost it, really. He screamed at me to get away and struggled and fought me. I ended up slashing open my arm on a big piece of bloody glass--\u201d\n\nShe falls silent a moment as her gaze drops to the bandaged stub. \u201cWell. I guess that doesn't matter now, huh?\u201d\n\nHinsman murmurs something sympathetic and she continues. \u201cAnd then he just straight up tried to kill me. Grabbed for my throat, and I kicked him and...I don't know exactly, we got separated and I was trying to orient myself because I was panicking and, you know, the gravity. And then he was just dead. I wasn't really thinking at that point, I hauled him back to the central complex, I was thinking something could be done, like the nursing AI would help or he could be put in cryo or something, you know, like in the VRs...but then of course once we reached Central the gravity kicked back in and I couldn't move him anymore, plus I was bleeding all over everything. I made sure nothing else was going to explode and then went to treat my arm, and brought a platform to lift him later. I moved Inea's body then too...to, to the dining hall freezer.\u201d She sounds momentarily embarrassed and lowers her voice for that, as if she thinks the New Terra health department might overhear and swoop in and shut the place down. \u201cSince the power was out completely in that section and we still had it on low in parts of Central.\u201d\n\nMatti stops herself and winces. \u201cI mean...not we. It was just me at that point. The most useless person around so of course I survived.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou handled all of that as well as anyone could have and I think better than most,\u201d Hinsman reassures her. \u201cThe rescue attempt is probably more than I would've tried, and you had no way of realizing then how far gone he was.\u201d\n\n\u201cI just can't figure it out, why he would...\u201d Matti trails off and shifts on the bed, closing her eyes and wincing. \u201cI'm just so tired.\u201d\n\n\u201cGet some rest. You've been a great help and I think you've explained most of what I could think to ask.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhy were you sealing off the door to the storage wing?\u201d This time the question comes from you. Hinsman gives you an irritated look at the interruption. Perhaps your tone was too blunt for his liking, but it really is something that had seemed odd to when you were cleaning up.\n\n\u201cOh. Well I knew all of you would be boarding soon, so I thought I should try to pull myself together and...you know, do my job for once. The power would be easier to get back on in the central complex if all the arms could be sealed off, and the storage wing door was jammed open.\u201d\n\nYou nod but say nothing.\n\nMatti rests her head weakly against the pillows. \u201cI should've just stayed there with my ice cream. I could really go for some now anyway, damn...\u201d\n\n\u201cI'll heat up some dinner for you soon, from our ship,\u201d Hinsman promises. \u201cI don't know about ice cream, we don't travel quite that luxurious, but we may have something that can pass as dessert around.\u201d\n\n\u201cThanks,\u201d she gives him a wan smile and leans her head back against her pillow, her blonde hair spread out on the pillow to frame her strained face like a halo.\n\n\u201cZee, let's go outside. I've been needing to talk to you and Karoff...where is he, anyway?\u201d\n\nYou'd already turned to exit with Hinsman stepping out into the hall behind you when you both spot the pilot coming down the hall.\n\n\u201cPerfect,\u201d Hinsman says.\n\n\u201cI know I am.\u201d Karoff replies with a wink. \u201cBut did I miss anything important?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Inference", "result": "\u201cMiss Oswen gave me enough details on the cause of the damage to start writing a report, at least, but some things still don\u2019t sit right with me. Even if Inea\u2019s death made him suicidal I still don\u2019t understand Markov\u2019s motivation for trying to take out the entire station, for one...\u201d\n\n\u201cHe had the space crazies!\u201d\n\n\u201c...I can\u2019t put that in a report. But unfortunately Oswen had very little contact with him following Inea\u2019s death. And we don\u2019t even really know what happened to Inea herself other than Zee\u2019s examination indicating blunt force trauma to the head.\u201d\n\n\u201cAh, about that.\u201d Karoff fishes something out of his pocket and taps a button. \u201cRelevant?\u201d\n\nA 3D image of an energy canister is projected into the air in front of you all. You recognize the type; the larger energy cells can be volatile, so the canisters are made with half an inch of steel and an interior enamel coating for protection. This one is about the size of a fire extinguisher, which is typical.\n\nWhat\u2019s not typical about this one however is the is the dried blood and long strands of dark hair caught up on the outside of the sealing mechanism.\n\n\u201cWhere the hell did you find that?\u201d Hinsman wants to know.\n\n\u201cIn the storage arm where Miss Oswen lost hers. There are a lot of spent canisters piled up in there, and I was looking for more power cables just now and stumbled across this one.\u201d\n\nHinsman\u2019s brow is deeply furrowed as he studies the projection. \u201cThat is just suspicious as hell. Has anyone had a look at the body yet?\u201d\n\nYou and Karoff both shake your heads, and as Matti had just mentioned where they were stored, the three of you make your way to the dining hall.\n\nThe two bodies are on gurneys, zipped up in body bags in the back of the freezer. You open the bag holding the smaller form, ignoring Karoff\u2019s inquiries as to whether letting restaurant kitchens rent freezer space to morgues could be a viable alternate source of income.\n\nUpon examination the dark haired woman\u2019s cause of death is immediately obvious, her skull on the left side having been caved in just above and behind the ear.\n\n\u201cNot a glancing blow, either. There\u2019s no way that happens from a spent fuel canister falling on someone\u2019s head. Not even a full one.\u201d\n\nAfter a long moment he sighs and steps back. \u201cAll right, let\u2019s go over what facts we have. About a week ago, Inea Banca was doing routine maintenance in the medical wing and had her skull caved in with an energy canister. Markov Karst then goes into seclusion for two days, at the end of which he goes to the medical wing and attempts to cause a power overload that will destroy the station; a major act of treason against the Order that will render a number of Outer Rim colony worlds and ships unable to receive emergency aid and also kill the young woman who remains here. A bit dramatic even for a suicide attempt, but I suppose not outside the realm of possibility. When it fails he become violent when Oswen attempts a rescue and dies moments after. Miss Oswen sends out a distress call that doesn\u2019t seem to have gone through due to the failing power and waits here alone until we happen by. Does that all sound about right?\u201d\n\nYou mull that over while he and Karoff discuss the details a bit longer.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sure there\u2019s more investigating we can do,\u201d Hinsman is saying. \u201cThe medical arm, for instance. That\u2019s where everything happened.\u201d\n\nKaroff shakes his head. \u201cAtmosphere and shielding has failed and there are holes blown straight through the plating. It\u2019d be too much a risk just to satisfy our curiosity, even for Zee.\u201d\n\n\u201cFair. It doesn\u2019t feel right to just sit around and wait on another team, though. We need to get together as much info as possible. It might be useful to read over the personnel reports again, and...oh! There\u2019s the report they sent in on Inea\u2019s death.\u201d Hinsman glances over at you. \u201cAnd what about you, Zee? Let\u2019s see that sharp analytical brain in action.\u201d\n\n\u201cMy brain\u2019s not any sharper than yours I\u2019m afraid. And too bad, some kind of AI to analyze things might be more what you need right now.\u201d But you\u2019ve been following a particular train of thought, and at his prompting you decide to give it voice. \u201cBut they didn\u2019t fill out a death report on Inea Banca. I don\u2019t know why Oswen claimed that. Banca was still listed as alive in their database when Karoff pulled up her file, right before we boarded. So in fact, I believe that...\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "\u201cMatti killed Inea and then Markov to cover her tracks.\u201d", "result": "\u201cWhat?\u201d Hinsman seems taken aback. \u201cWhere are you getting that from?\u201d\n\nKaroff scratches his head. \u201cUh, Zee, I know that was my original theory, but I\u2019m not so sure now. Markov did try to blow up the station.\u201d\n\n\u201cDo we have any proof of that? Or of anything Oswen has claimed?\u201d You wait. When neither is able to give a satisfactory answer, you continue. \u201cIt\u2019s a possibility we have to consider, at least. All we really know is that Banca and Carst are dead and that someone damaged the station in a way that made most of the evidence inaccessible. And that Oswen tried to seal off the entire the entire wing containing the murder weapon right after we arrived.\u201d\n\nA couple of times while you were speaking Hinsman looked ready to interrupt, and now he cuts in as you pause, raking his fingers through his dark hair. \u201cZee, you can't seriously...urgh, I guess you're always serious. But Matti isn't a killer.\u201d\n\n\u201cHow can you be sure of that?\u201d\n\n\u201cBecause dammit. I can tell when people are lying. Matti's not like that.\u201d\n\nThe force of his protest surprises you. \u201cCan people tell when you lie to them?\u201d\n\nThat at least gets a short laugh. \u201cNo,\u201d he admits. \u201cBut I've had a couple more decades practice don't forget. You can trust me on this one though, Zee. That little girl's not some cold blooded killer.\u201d\n\nYou frown. \u201cI'm not denying you're better at reading people than I am. But at least one murder occurred and serious damage was done to a vital Order refueling station. You know I'm not saying anything anyone at HQ won't bring up. We need to look at real evidence, and for now all we have is one person's word for it.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe're not qualified for this legal crap,\u201d Karoff complains.\n\n\u201cIt's the Outer Rim, buddy, we make our own law,\u201d Hinsman replies. \u201cHell, nobody should've ever gone out this far at all.\u201d\n\n\u201cWell now you just sound like a dirty anti-frontierist. But my point is that according to their files, Inea and Matti are both from Camerov IV. Pop them both in cryo and aim them at the planet. They can sort out the murder and if Matti turns out to have done any of the damage to the station she'll be right there and handy to retrieve.\u201d\n\nHinsman laughs at that. \u201cYou make it sound like we're such good friends with the Camerovs. They'd just love us dumping her off and then swooping in to grab her again I bet.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah well I've got a dozen fusion torpedoes that say they won't complain too hard.\u201d\n\n\u201cJesus Christ, I'm definitely not getting a bonus this year if I let you start a war. Anyway, everything else aside, Matti's lost a ton of blood and is pretty weak still. A cryo pod would be too much of a risk.\u201d\n\n\u201cIf there's anything to Zee's theory, she could be a risk to us, keep in mind.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah, I realize that.\u201d Hinsman looks unhappy enough that you almost hope that you're wrong. You've been slowly losing your mind lately anyway, what's one bad theory?\n\n\u201cWell...we can check for the report,\u201d Karoff offers. \u201cThe one on Banca. Maybe it wasn't ever finalized and sent but we'll see if we can verify at least that much of her story. And if it exists it may have more details.\u201d\n\nHinsman nods. \u201cAll right, let's do that.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Interference", "result": "\u201cI can absolutely, definitely, factually say with complete certainty , all serious, and not the slightest hesitation...\u201d Karoff twists in his seat to regard Hinsman as he speaks. \u201c...that the report on Inea Banca's death does not exist.\u201d\n\n\u201cAre you serious? Are you sure?\u201d\n\n\u201cHinsman, I don't feel like you heard me. Absolutely, definitely--\u201d\n\n\u201cAll right enough. Dammit. Did you check to make sure it didn't get caught in the buffer? Maybe it's still trying to send. The power hasn't been back on for long.\u201d\n\n\u201cThere weren't any problems with the power at the time the report would've been made. That was before Markov pulled his stunt,\u201d you point out.\n\n\u201cJust check,\u201d he tells Karoff.\n\n\u201cChecking, and...nothing. Wait.\u201d He pauses and frowns. \u201cWell none of these are the report, but it looks like a batch of personal letters Inea tried to send a day before her death never went through either.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat do they say?\u201d\n\n\u201cHinsman!\u201d Karoff gives a mock gasp and assumes a scandalized tone. \u201cThey're personal letters!\u201d He's already pulling the first one up, and you catch a brief glimpse of Banca's smiling face at the beginning of a video before he switches to the readout and scrolls rapidly past pages of text asking how various people, children and pets are, some jokes about a co-worker having a crush on her and discussion of a new VR film.\n\n\u201cAll pretty standard inane family garbage,\u201d Karoff says in helpful summary.\n\nHinsman frowns. \u201cWell, make sure they don't get lost. I'm sure the family will think more of them than you do, considering. But why didn't it send? Were they isolated from the network before the power went out? How would that happen?\u201d\n\n\u201cI'll tell you in exchange for a colorful parrot and a bottle of rum.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou think so?\u201d\n\n\u201cOh, I know so, now. You see...\u201d Karoff twists the screen so Hinsman can see it. You shuffle around behind him to get a look too.\n\n\u201cThat's the same encryption the messages on Markov's computer used,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cRight. Because it would appear that someone...can't imagine who...installed a little something to communicate with a probe somewhere. The probe in turn has been intercepting any outgoing messages, as of at least one day before Banca's murder. They\u2019re getting a little fancier with their methods but cutting communication before an attack is the classic technique.\u201d\n\n\u201cSo, we have pirates coming this way? Well damn. If they started out right after everything went down they\u2019d be about right on top of us too if they went into underspace from any of the neighboring stars.\u201d He considers that a moment and then shrugs. \u201cBut there\u2019s three of us and what, maybe a couple dozen of them? We\u2019ve all fought with worse odds. We can hold them off till help arrives.\u201d\n\n\u201cOh, but precious, naive little Hinsman, it\u2019s worse than you think. The probe has been intercepting all outgoing signals. There won\u2019t be any help arriving for Miss Oswen or for the station or ourselves, because no one knows we need it. Also, don\u2019t forget shielding and all defenses are down.\u201d\n\n\u201cShit.\u201d\n\nThere is an encouraging beep just then and all eyes turn to Markov's computer.\n\n\u201cWell it\u2019s not the blueprints for an anti-pirate device so don\u2019t get excited or anything,\u201d Karoff says, picking up the device and activating the screen. \u201cAnd it\u2019s not even finished yet, that was just the first run. Still, might be enough to give us a better idea of what the situation is.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Markov's Secret", "result": "Most of the text Karoff scrolls past is gibberish, but a few of the messages are partially deciphered. Even these prove frustrating however as even the ones where you can make out sentences are delicately phrased with deliberate obliqueness. But as the messages near the end, they suddenly start dropping the pretense.\n\n\u201cAh, here we go. Well that\u2019s right to the point, isn\u2019t it?\u201d\n\nYou peer over Karoff\u2019s shoulder at the screen.\n\n^ou\u2019ve al%ead^ killed ove% this. It\u2019s too late to back out now. ^ou can take ^ou% mone^ o% a hole th%ough the skull--we\u2019%e coming fo% the package eithe% way, so ^ou\u2019d do well to think twice befo%e ^ou do anything ^ou\u2019ll %eg%et.\n\nAs to ^ou% question, it ain\u2019t nothing but sweet %evenge, Ma%kie bab^. The^ tu%ned us back du%ing the evacuations. We couldn\u2019t \u2018p%ove\u2019 we we%en\u2019t infected and what we%e we to them but a bunch of shitkicking fa%mers and %anchers? Well we didn\u2019t have Hunge% but we got hung%^ ENOUGH limping a%ound the %im to find a new home and plent^ of us died of infection all %ight--just plain o%dina%y bo%ing Old Ea%th influenza that could\u2019ve been cu%ed if we\u2019d had even the most p%imitive aid. My wife and daughte% among them.\n\nThe o%ganization ^ou wo%k fo% has blood on its hands, and don\u2019t even think it stops the%e. A lot of ou% people ma^ have gotten complacent once the^ %esettled, all this talk of \u2018moving on\u2019, but that\u2019s just not fo% me and m^ f%iends. We won\u2019t fo%get and we won\u2019t allow them too eithe%. And I\u2019ve made man^ mo%e f%iends %ecentl^. We\u2019%e getting ou% %evenge, and I think ^ou know exactly how.\n\nSee ^a soon, Ma%k.\n\n--W. Ho%seman\n\n\n\u201cSo we\u2019ve definitely got pirates coming this way.\u201d Hinsman says with a rueful shake of his head. \u201cOr terrorists, anyway. Even better, right? And so much for your theory on Matti, Zee.\u201d\n\n\u201cAny theories on what the package is?\u201d you ask after a moment\u2019s silence.\n\n\u201cCarst is from Galton Station, isn\u2019t he?\u201d Karoff asks. \u201cI think I saw it in his file. I\u2019ve been there once or twice, and don\u2019t ask for what. But they all but advertise they\u2019re a black market.\u201d\n\nHinsman nods, looking grim. \u201cMost likely blueprints for illegal weapons tech, or an ethics-stripped AI. Something small Carst could easily smuggle back over here the last time he was on leave. And something valuable and risky enough he\u2019d kill anybody who got in his way.\u201d\n\nKaroff taps around on the screen some more. \u201cToo bad he didn\u2019t survive,\u201d he finally says with a sigh. \u201cBecause I\u2019d sure like to kill him myself right now. Scans found the probe by the way. Way out there on the edge of the system.\u201d\n\n\u201cOh really? That\u2019s something at least. Although it\u2019ll take time to get to and disable, and I\u2019m not sure we can spare that right now. We need to start thinking of how to defend ourselves.\u201d\n\n\u201cThe sooner we get a distress call out the sooner we can put an end to all this,\u201d Karoff says. \u201cWe\u2019re nothing but a target right now, with the defenses down and if there\u2019s enough of them they can wear us down eventually without much risk to themselves.\u201d\n\n\u201cCan the defenses be repaired?\u201d\n\nKaroff winces. \u201cI was afraid you were gonna ask that. And technically yes, but it\u2019s a big job. The turrets are in every arm of the station and we\u2019ll need to get power to all of them, which means cutting back here in the central area.\u201d\n\nThey both sink into a grim silence for a bit, before Hinsman finally looks over. \u201cAll right Zee, I guess you get the tiebreaker. What are you most in the mood for right now?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Take out the probe", "result": "With no time to delay or hesitate, you\u2019re moving toward the docking bay within moments of making your decision while Karoff hurries along behind you and hits you with a barrage of rapid-fire instructions and advice for piloting one of the ship\u2019s shuttles.\n\n\u201cWhatever you do, don\u2019t get it blown up!\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll try my best.\u201d\n\nThe voices of your companions soon fade as you ease the shuttle out into the silence of space, aiming for the emptiest and coldest edge of the system and the coordinates Karoff pinpointed. You blink in and out of underspace a couple of times the way he showed you, or else the trip would take days. Risky in a populated or debris-filled system for someone without much training, but there\u2019s nothing much to worry about colliding with out here.\n\nThe probe is right where it\u2019s supposed to be. It\u2019d be possible to target with a missile now, but your initial scan indicates it might be rather unusual in design. Retrieving it intact might lead to clues about its maker, certainly the sort of person the Order would want to shut down...or recruit.", "action_results": [{"action": "Retrieve it.", "result": "You ease the shuttle closer, and closer still. The viewscreen isn\u2019t needed to get a visual on the probe now; you can just look out the window. It\u2019s small, but the slender segmented form puts you in mind of a wasp, with a pair of satellites making up the \u2018wings\u2019. The design is sleek and something about it worries you. The longer you look at it the more you get the sense it\u2019s dangerous somehow. But that\u2019s just all the more reason to take it out of commission.", "action_results": [{"action": "Bring it on board.", "result": "The shuttle has a pair of grappling claws for specimen retrieval which you now deploy. Moving with utmost care so as not to nudge your target and send it spinning off into space, you grip the probe and draw it into the cargo hold.\n\nThe hold door slides shut, and the grappling claws fold themselves back into place. Glancing at the probe on the viewscreen, you see a red light blink on. Before you can even wonder what that means an explosion rips through the vessel, splitting the belly of it wide open and spilling you along with the rest of its contents out into the space. You tumble among the shattered remains of what used to be the shuttle, and the last thing you think before you\u2019re vaporized by the detonating power core of the underspace drive is that Karoff will not be happy.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Disable it with laser fire to be safe.", "result": "A precisely aimed laser from close range is a far cry from a fusion torpedo, and won\u2019t harm the probe in any way that would prevent it from being studied. You target the spherical \u2018head\u2019 of the wasp and fire.\n\nA quick spit of green light burns a tiny hole through what you hope is the central processor. A moment later you realize your error however as the shot has not only failed to disable the probe, but triggered a response in return. The shield indicator on your screen blinks to zero for a split second, accompanied by a sound of metal clinking against the outside of the ship.\n\n\u201cWhat the--\u201d\n\nCrackling energy is suddenly crawling from every wall. The wave rips through you and your vision goes white, then black. You\u2019re dimly conscious of hitting the floor, and then never wake up again.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Just blow it up.", "result": "The targeting system only allows missiles to be fired from a certain distance, depending on the size and movement speed of whatever you\u2019re aiming for. Given the threat a loose missile can pose flying unchecked through space, forever, the idea is to prevent anything that\u2019s not a pretty sure shot. You\u2019re right at the edge of that distance now. The probe is small and so you carefully line up your shot before launching the missile.\n\nIt takes a few minutes to reach its destination, during which you watch the little blipping light traveling on your screen and remember why you prefer ground combat.\n\nThe probe unleashes an inordinately powerful blast of energy when it explodes, the shockwave sending your shuttle tumbling into a backwards roll. You breathe in acrid smoke. From somewhere, shouts of fear and anger, pounding boots mingled with muffled explosions. You are underground but not deep enough to be safe. Striking desperately at the console, you halt your momentum and steady the ship. In a moment you reorient yourself.\n\nYour shuttle is fine. And a quick scan reveals your target has been reduced to cosmic dust. It must\u2019ve been packing more than the average probe to trigger an explosion of that magnitude, but you\u2019ll never know for sure now. There\u2019s nothing left to salvage.\n\nBefore making your way back to the Last Outpost, you immediately transmit the distress signal Hinsman had prepared, although you know it\u2019ll still take a week before anyone arrives. Anyone on your side, anyway.", "action_results": [{"action": "Repair defenses", "result": "Hinsman and Karoff are already ripping out most of the EPNs that were so recently installed by the time you finish suiting up. Your sleek one piece outfit is in the Order colors of dark blue and grey, and more than just a uniform. With the addition of your helmet with its built in breathing mask it serves as well in combat as any armor, and protects you in any climate and even for a time in open space. It feels good to be back in it. Between the detour through the Camarov system and then the stop here you\u2019ve been running around without it for an unusually long time.\n\nHinsman charges by with a load of power cables draped over one arm, then checks himself mid-stride and comes back over to you. \u201cZee, question.\u201d\n\n\u201cYes?\u201d\n\n\u201cDo you think we should put Matti in cryo and send her out of here?\u201d\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re asking me?\u201d You\u2019re a little surprised. He hadn\u2019t seemed to like hearing your opinions on Matti very much a little earlier.\n\n\u201cNot that I\u2019m giving much credence to your theory about her. I\u2019m asking you now, just as a matter of risk assessment, how putting an injured and weakened woman in a cryo pod would stack up to having her stay here with a hostile force on the way.\u201d\n\nYou pause a moment to run over both scenarios. The cryo is a significant risk, but a one time thing. The possibility of attack is an ever evolving situation with the threat level varying from not worth mentioning to all of you dead and the station destroyed. Plus, even with Hinsman telling you to disregard the thought, there\u2019s the possibility Matti might not be trustworthy. You know already that he won\u2019t include any of your suspicions in the note to the Camarovians and they won\u2019t investigate nearly as thoroughly as the Order would even if he did. But guilty or innocent, the rest of you may soon have your hands too full to pay attention to her if you do get company.\n\nFinally you reply.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"It's better to send her back to Camarov.\"", "result": "Hinsman nods in agreement. \u201cProbably for the best now that we\u2019ve got a target painted on us. I\u2019ll explain things to her this evening and get her in the pod first thing in the morning.\u201d\n\n\n\nYou both drag piles of equipment about while Karoff diverts more power from the ship, as much as can be spared, and even sacrifices most of the shuttles. Before long the equipment is in place and the three of you begin rigging up cables, energy cells, power nodes and anything you can find that can produce or transfer a charge down each of the station\u2019s splayed arms to the laser and torpedo turrets mounted at their tips.\n\nFinally, the heavily damaged medical wing is the last that needs attention. That\u2019s all on you.\n\n\u201cThink we can get by without that one?\u201d Hinsman asks.\n\nKaroff shakes his head. \u201cWithout the turrets that\u2019s a biiiig area where they can get in close and freely maneuver and we can\u2019t touch them.\u201d\n\n\u201cFigured. All right then Zee, off you go. Just hook up these cables and don\u2019t slip and go floating off into space, it\u2019ll be a pain in the ass to collect you again. One of us will keep in voice contact while you\u2019re there.\u201d\n\n\nYou stand in the airlock, the minutes ticking by while you wait for the atmosphere to slowly equalize with that of the absent one in the medical wing. You know you\u2019re getting close when you begin to float in place.\n\nOnce the door opens and you drift into the entrance to the medical wing, you search for the panel Karoff told you about. It\u2019s about the only one here that hasn\u2019t had its conduits fried, and you remove a connector you\u2019ll need. That and the EPN loaded with an energy canister you have strapped to your back should be all you need to power the turrets. After checking in on your wrist comm you start to make your way on down to the hall.\n\nYou carry a cable as well, meant to be attached to your suit. If you were following safety recommendations, one of the two clips along the length should always be anchored to something. You\u2019re not entirely sure you need it however. The sides of this section have blown out in some places but you can just avoid getting too near the edge of those gaps. Using the tethered cable is fine when working in one place, but tediously slow when trying to move.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow safety regulations", "result": "You begin to make your way slowly, carefully along. There\u2019s a bar that runs along the side of the hall that you use for your tether. You fall into a rhythm of attaching one clip, then the other, then unclipping the first, move forward and repeat. Every so often there\u2019s a crackle from your headset as someone checks on you, but the dark halls are otherwise eerily silent. Doors line the walls on either side of you, firmly shutting away their secrets. One door is hanging open and askew on cracked hinges, and you see the long room beyond it is filled with rusting rows of bolted down bedframes. An infirmary at some time in the past, now with the back wall now ripped open to expose them to space. You can see the pale face of the barren rock the station orbits through the gap.\n\nYou drift down an elevator shaft and after a measured distance begin cutting your way out with a laser torch. Gripping the handrail behind you, you kick the slab of metal free. It tumbles forward, and forward, and out into space. Where you expected to find more hallway, you\u2019re now looking at a mostly missing wall, the blown out section large enough to pilot a shuttle through. You\u2019ve drifted out a short ways, watching the metal slab diminishing in the distance, still moving from the momentum of your kick.\n\nIt\u2019s then that you glance down and realize there\u2019s nothing beneath your feet but the void of space and the twinkling of stars. Most of the floor in this section has also been blown away. You pedal your legs in a panic and shoot upwards a short distance until you\u2019re suddenly snapped back. Grabbing at a projecting metal ledge, you steady yourself, realizing that if you hadn\u2019t clipped the tether to the elevator\u2019s handrail out of habit you might be in trouble right now.\n\nBelow, you can just see the edges of other rooms on other floors parallel to this one; the section beneath you has been ripped out clear through to the bottom of the station. But thankfully you don\u2019t have to try to float down through the big hole to reach the turret. Just, across it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leap of Faith", "result": "Well, no sense in putting it off. You remind yourself that if her story is to be believed, poor, stupid, terrified Matti made this jump not once, but twice, and carrying Markov\u2019s bloody body behind her the second time. Aiming yourself carefully in the direction you want to go, an airlock that leads to the last section of this wing, you use your legs to launch yourself towards it in a single smooth motion. On instinct you\u2019ve angled your body into an aerodynamic shape, legs straight behind and arms stretched out in front of you, although you know it doesn\u2019t really matter. As you sail across the gap, you stare downward into infinity. You feel like you\u2019re flying. You feel like...a bird...\n\nGreen grass. The smell of it.\n\nA long blade of green grass, striped by the horizontal bars of sunlight and shadow cast by its fellows. An ant crawls up the blade, in and out of the stripes. Another ant tickles your arm.\n\nNew shadows race across the sun. There are silver wings in the distance, and a beautiful white light.\n\n\u201cLook at the birds, Mommy!\u201d\n\n\u201cZani, get inside!\u201d\n\nThe fresh smell of grass is replaced by acrid smoke. Screams and shouts. Muffled explosions in the distance. You are underground, but not deep enough. Boots thud overhead. Your sister is crying. You want to cry too. Everyone is afraid, even the adults. Especially the adults.\n\n\u201cThe Order!\u201d\n\n\u201cOh my God, they\u2019re killing everyone!\u201d\n\n\u201cWe\u2019re not infected! Listen to us, please!\u201d\n\n\u201cZani, Nyla, run to the woods!\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re running hard, pulling your sister behind you. There is another explosion, not so distant. The force hurls you hard against the ground. The grass is gone, the earth is a scorched and blackened wound. You and the earth are the same now. Where is Nyla? The pain is incredible. Blackness. You--\n\n--you stare down into the blackness. You hit the wall on the other side hard but somehow instinctively grabbed the metal bar next to the airlock. The metal will surely bend, if you squeeze it any harder. Your eyes sting. Your chest aches like its simultaneously been hollowed out and is just about to burst. Physically you\u2019re fine. But from your memory--and you know now for certain that it was a memory--you know now that this is what it feels like to want to cry.\n\nNo tears stain your cheeks, of course. Your brain may be human, but most of the rest of you decidedly is not. Still, you feel weak, shaky, and can\u2019t bring yourself to continue on for quite some time. Unless you deliberately keep your thoughts focused elsewhere, your mind drifts again and again to the memories.\n\n\u201cThe Order!\u201d\n\n\u201cOh my God, they\u2019re killing everyone!\u201d\n\nThose two sentences in particular, shouted at a near hysterical pitch by a voice that seems hauntingly familiar plague you the most. You don\u2019t like the implications.\n\nAt some point you realize your communicator has been going off. Hinsman\u2019s voice is speaking to you, sounding worried.\n\nYou take a deep breath. \u201cI\u2019m fine.\u201d Your words are faint, barely audible.\n\n\u201cAre you sure, Zee?\u201d He sounds skeptical.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell him about the memories", "result": "\u201cI...started hearing some things. But, it\u2019s more like, remembering some things, really. And they\u2019re not...good things.\u201d\n\nA sigh. \u201cThe hallucinations again? How bad are th--\u201d\n\n\u201cThey\u2019re not hallucinations! They\u2019re memories! Of my life, from before! Are you even listening?\u201d The words spit from your lips. That hadn\u2019t been your intention, but, it appeases something dark and angry inside of you to let them out.\n\nThere\u2019s a long pause on the other end. When Hinsman next speaks his voice is calm and careful. \u201cThat\u2019s right, I\u2019m sorry Zee, you did say memories. You might be experiencing a few, but, if it\u2019s anything like last time, they\u2019re presenting themselves in a disruptive fashion and mixing in invented details from elsewhere. You can\u2019t rely on them one hundred percent.\u201d\n\n\u201cInvented? You mean like the Order purging my family\u2019s colony? Are you saying that\u2019s all invented?\u201d You\u2019re still angry. Not just at the questions the memories made you ask, but at the entire situation and what you know it will eventually lead to. You need to pull yourself together, you know this. If nothing else, this is an astoundingly bad time and place to be having a crisis. But Hinsman\u2019s got his most soothing voice on and it doesn\u2019t really have its intended effect when you know exactly what he\u2019s doing.\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know, Zee. I\u2019m sorry but I genuinely don\u2019t know the situation prior to your original activation. And...if it helps, you don\u2019t have to think of it as \u2018you\u2019, you know. You are a trusted and capable Order operative, with people who respect and value you. You\u2019re simply built around the brain of someone long dead who may have had a tragedy befall them.\u201d\n\n\u201cA tragedy the Order caused.\u201d\n\nHinsman sighs again. \u201cY\u2019know, Zee, the human brain is a complicated thing. We still don\u2019t entirely understand everything about it. You need to consider the way dreams take real information and memories, and transpose them with--\u201d\n\n\u201cAll right, all right,\u201d you cut him off. \u201cSpare me your horseshit. I need to get this turret activated.\u201d Now it\u2019s your turn to sigh. \u201cAnyway, I\u2019m guessing we\u2019ve probably had this conversation before?\u201d\n\n\u201cA couple of times. \u2018Fraid so. Now take care of yourself and stay focused, Zee. We need you.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Staying focused.", "result": "Yanking on the handle of the airlock door, you hear the locking mechanism disengage with a satisfying clank. Once inside, you seal it behind you again before proceeding. This last segment of the medical arm lost gravity and life support with the others, but was never exposed directly to space. It seems likely the actual origin of the sabotage was the area you were just in, with the chain of explosions moving from there in the direction of the central part of the station.\n\nThere is quite a bit of floating furniture and assorted medical equipment and other clutter to maneuver through, but thankfully there are no major obstacles or...other distractions between you and the turret. You power and arm it, checking the status of the torpedoes and ensuring everything seems to be in working order before giving the others a call. Karoff confirms the gun is online and you begin to make your way back.\n\nYou still are struggling a bit to keep your head clear, and begin reading the labels on the doors you pass and counting them too to keep your thoughts from wandering back to the that same place, the stripes of sunlight across the grass, again and again.\n\nWhat should be door number twenty-eight is open, and when you shine your light inside it falls upon a long white cabinet inside. Particularly, upon the smears of dried blood upon it, one of them a near perfect hand print.\n\n\u201cHe was trying to unlock a cabinet but his hands were all torn up.\u201d\n\nYou recall Matti\u2019s words from a few hours ago, although with far less clarity and immediacy that that of the woman who so long ago shouted for Zani and Nyla to run to the woods. Is this the room where Markov died?", "action_results": [{"action": "Stop awhile to investigate.", "result": "The cabinet seems the immediate point of interest. You shine your light across it. It\u2019s bolted in place and so it hasn\u2019t joined most of the rest of the furniture and assorted lab equipment in hovering against the middle of the far wall. You realize immediately it\u2019s not really a cabinet at all, but a bank of freezer compartments. Oddly, it still has power. A bit of searching reveals where someone has wired in an EPN behind it. The blood smears are concentrated in one area, and you scrape it away from a combination lock it seems especially thick on.\n\nIt\u2019s a pretty standard lock. The combination possibilities are four alphanumeric characters, and Markov\u2019s bloodied hands had set it as far as INE-.\n\nYou click over the last letter to A and unsnap the lock. Glass vials hover against the top of the compartment. You reach in and gently sweep them out for a better look. Each are full of a frozen yellowish liquid. One of the vials is broken, empty. It\u2019s got smears of red on it too.\n\nThe vials tumble out of the freezer at your touch and float in a loose cluster just above you. You tilt your head and read the label clearly printed on each one:\n\n\nHUNGER 1A-4", "action_results": [{"action": "Protocol", "result": "You return to the central complex, making sure not to stare into the abyss this time as you cross it.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m fine,\u201d you say in answer to Hinsman\u2019s look when you enter, brushing past him. You actually do feel more relaxed and confident now. No longer uncertain, because protocol is very clear. You just need to verify something on your own first. It\u2019s bad to cause a panic. Protocol is clear on that too.\n\nExcept for the monitors in the main computer room turned command center, the station is once again dark. Somehow this environment seems to magnify the echo of footsteps. Peering around the curve of a corridor, you see another oasis of light washing against a wall; the nursing station where Matti is resting.\n\nYou busy yourself the next several hours, putting equipment away, helping Karoff calibrate this or that and then doing your own work while he and Hinsman are sleeping.\n\nEarly in the morning, printouts of the results on hand, you stride to the nursing station. Hinsman is there clearing away Matti\u2019s breakfast tray. \u201cIf it\u2019s not too much trouble, could I get a couple more pancakes?\u201d you hear her ask as you enter. \u201cI\u2019m kind of hungry still, I guess because I\u2019m recovering.\u201d\n\nHe gives her a good natured smile and starts to reply, and you drill a smoking hole through her head with your laser pistol.\n\n\u201cZee, what the FUCK?\u201d Hinsman bellows, grabbing for his own gun and pointing it at you with a disbelieving stare. \u201cDrop your weapon. NOW!\u201d\n\n\u201cShe was infected.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat? There\u2019s no way! You\u2019re losing it, Zee.\u201d He takes a deep breath. You notice the hand that holds the gun is shaking. \u201cYou just committed a murder. I don\u2019t want to shoot you but I\u2019m not going to tell you again. Drop your weapon. We\u2019ll put you in stasis until someone can fix you.\u201d\n\nYou continue in the same matter-of-fact voice. \u201cMarkov Carst was storing vials of the live virus in the medical wing. Maybe he even found them there--they could\u2019ve been left behind when the station was originally abandoned. Around the time he sabotaged the station, he infected himself, probably accidentally. And then Oswen infected herself when she tried to rescue him. He was covered in bleeding wounds, and she cut herself too, remember?\u201d You hold out the printouts. \u201cI have proof. Last night I tested the bodies in the freezer, and her arm.\u201d\n\nStill eying you distrustfully and not yet lowering his weapon, Hinsman steps forward to snatch the papers from your hand and moves away to skim the results.\n\n\u201cGoddammit,\u201d he finally sighs, sliding his gun back into the holster. He stands over Matti\u2019s bed a long moment looking down at her, shoulders slumped and head bowed. After a long silence he sighs again and straightens. \u201cSometimes I hate this job.\u201d\n\n\u201cBelieve me, that I understand.\u201d\n\n\u201cShe died because she was too damn kind. None of us would\u2019ve suited up and gone to try and rescue that piece of shit after he blew the power.\u201d He turns to face you, then frowns. \u201cZee, you can put the gun down already. I believe you.\u201d\n\n\u201cYes, I know, but there\u2019s one more thing. You need to test yourself for the virus. Karoff too. I can\u2019t let either of you leave this station or interact with anyone else until you do.\u201d\n\nHinsman stares at you, and you can see true extent of the situation finally sinking in. \u201cGoddammit,\u201d he breathes out again, then speaks into his wristcomm. \u201cKaroff, I need you to come to the nursing station. It\u2019s urgent.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "The Test", "result": "\u201cClean. Both of you.\u201d You snap the computer shut and the tension in the room evaporates amid sighs of relief.\n\nKaroff lets out a whoop. \u201cOh thank God. I was too pretty to die!\u201d He stands and makes for the door. \u201cNow if you\u2019ll excuse me, I\u2019m getting the hell out of this plague room.\u201d\n\nHinsman lingers a moment, pausing at the foot of Matti\u2019s bed. You\u2019ve draped a sheet over her and will take the body and bedding to be incinerated once he leaves. \u201cWell we got lucky I guess. The one to pick her up when she was bleeding was the only one who couldn\u2019t get infected. And somehow I didn\u2019t catch anything treating her, or afterwards being near her almost constantly. She got damn unlucky though. And here I am the complete bastard while she was the sweet girl with her life ahead of her. I still can\u2019t believe it turned out this way.\u201d With a shake of his head he exits the room, not looking at you.\n\nYou know Hinsman understands as well as anyone possibly could that you were just doing what you had to, but you suspect it\u2019ll be awhile before he can bring himself to ever actually like you again.\n\nAnd then the moment arrives. An alert from the computer indicates something just emerged from underspace. Ahead of you the walk of the two men turns into a mad sprint down the hall. The three of you gather in the command center and Karoff quickly locates the ship.\n\n\u201cNo affiliation and armed to the teeth. Yep, we got a pirate.\u201d\n\nHinsman drains his faux coffee and sets the cup aside. \u201cJust one? Shouldn\u2019t be too hard to handle.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah, there\u2019s...dammit! You jinxed us. Now there\u2019s two, three...eight on approach. And they\u2019re hard to track.\u201d\n\n\u201cSensors didn\u2019t pick them up?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cThe first ship was a carrier. It\u2019s how you disguise the size of your force if for instance, you think someone may have an alert set for anyone exiting underspace.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Activate the shields and turrets.", "result": "If Karoff can\u2019t track the ships there could be one lining up a shot even now. You\u2019d installed a few shortcuts on your console and wristcomm last night, preparing for the possibility you\u2019d be working alone, and now tap a key. The lights in the command center dim briefly as outside the station the massive shield generators hum to life and the turrets ready themselves. Whatever they\u2019d been expecting, anyone approaching will know the station has people inside ready to defend it now, and that you\u2019d been expecting them.\n\n\u201cThey\u2019re hailing us,\u201d Karoff says.\n\n\u201cOh good, let me talk to them. Maybe they\u2019re going to surrender.\u201d\n\nKaroff smirks at the comment and patches the call through to the viewscreen. An older man with steel-grey hair and a scarred face looks down at Hinsman and says in a gravelly voice. \u201cI see you have a ship locked into the bay. Whoever you are, I suggest you use it. We won\u2019t stop you from leaving peacefully, but we\u2019re taking this station and anyone who tries to stop us will most certainly be killed.\u201d\n\nHinsman looks unimpressed. \u201cOn the contrary, I think it\u2019s you folks who\u2019d better turn around and leave. The Last Outpost is an Order station vital to maintaining peace in the Outer Rim, and if you fire upon it it\u2019s an act of war. We will hunt you down. There won\u2019t be a single airless, lifeless rock left out there you can hide under.\u201d\n\nThe man smiles. \u201cWell aren\u2019t you a big talker. But have it your way. I tried to make this easy, but I\u2019ve never been afraid of a little work to get what I want, and I\u2019m going to enjoy killing you even more now.\u201d\n\nThe transmission cuts off and the first barrage of missiles collides with the central complex, shaking the whole station.\n\nYou steady yourself against the doorframe. \u201cThey know this area is shielded. I\u2019m surprised they don\u2019t go for the turrets.\u201d\n\n\u201cThink those were just showoff shots to let us know they mean business,\u201d Karoff tells you. \u201cLook, they\u2019re deploying into new positions now. Easier to keep track of at this range, anyway.\u201d\n\n\u201cOff to a good start. I don\u2019t object at all to them wasting missiles,\u201d Hinsman says with a shrug. \u201cThey\u2019ll run out soon and then have to get within range of the turrets to use their lasers.\u201d\n\nKaroff has been tapping feverishly at a console, and suddenly interrupts. \u201cAnd there go a few of my own. Two can play the torpedo game.\u201d\n\nCrowding around the screen, you watch as the missiles spin through the formation the ships had been gathering up into. There are a couple of glancing hits that take one ship out of commission and force others to veer this way and that. Two more are hit but their shields hold. Shields are almost always going to be weaker on a ship than on a station, but you suspect they\u2019d all been angling themselves to protect the weaker ships in the center while they made their first sweep at the turrets.\n\nThe missiles that are evaded by the pirates were lined up so that they exploded against the shields of the larger carrier ship waiting behind them. Again, no significant damage done, but the big ship does start moving to get more distance from you, meaning it won\u2019t be so readily available to provide backup to the pirates.\n\nYou take a moment to send a torpedo tearing through the disabled ship, then frown at the screen. \u201cHere they come again.\u201d\n\nThe seven remaining ships come in at an angle, then just out of range of what would be a practical distance to take a shot at them they split into two groups, circling the station from opposite sides. The ships launch a series of missiles at the turrets as they swoop by, and while the lasers are able to take most of them out before impact, one does slip through and blow a gun into pieces spinning off into space.\n\nThe three of you exchange grim looks. You know that with every gun that goes down they\u2019ll have a growing safe area to maneuver in.\n\nA moment later the ships begin another sweep. They concentrate their fire at the arms surrounding the one with the turret they cleared. Karoff takes another one out with a well timed missile that hits at the moment they drop their own, but two more turrets are taken out regardless. As you watch, a smaller ship moves in, aiming for the now unprotected arm housing the medical wing. It takes you a moment, but you come to a sudden realization. \u201cThey\u2019re trying to board it!\u201d you say, remembering the massive gap open to space there.\n\n\u201cWe can stop them, surely?\u201d Hinsman asks.\n\nKaroff shakes his head. \u201cAt that angle, can\u2019t really...wait! My ship! I\u2019ve got a dozen torpedoes loaded still.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou transfered so much of the power over, though. It won\u2019t even have shielding. Let\u2019s stay on the station and just take up positions near the entrance to that section, pick them off when they come through.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe don\u2019t even know how many they have, and we don\u2019t have anything more powerful than a laser rifle. I really don\u2019t like leaving the rest of the ships free to do whatever while we\u2019re over there either.\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re all running out of time fast. They really can\u2019t stand there arguing much longer. The situation being what it is, you decide to take the lead for once and just let them follow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Use Karoff's ship to take them out before they board.", "result": "\u201cTwelve torpedoes? Then stay here. I\u2019ll stop the boarders.\u201d Before anyone can reply you race down the hall and towards the docking bay.\n\n\u201cCareful with my ship!\u201d you hear Karoff hollering after you.\n\nYou strap in an unlock in record time, gliding along the side of the docking bay arm opposite the one housing the medical wing, trying not to expose the profile of your ship to the enemy. Then when you\u2019re lined up with the damaged section, you drop down just a short ways and rotate to get a clear view straight across to wear the smaller ship is hovering within the massive hole gouged from the medical wing.\n\nTheir back hatch is open, and someone in a bulky suit is in the process of exiting. Caught with their shields down? Your timing couldn\u2019t be better. With a press of a button you send a fusion torpedo smashing into the exposed ship. The explosion rips right through it, and you wince a bit as it also engulfs the less damaged section of the medical wing beyond, reducing that entire tip of the arm into half-melted wreckage.\n\nBut, well, it was pretty messed up already. Maybe no one would notice.\n\n\u201cHey, great plan Zee, let\u2019s just take out an arm for every ship. There were eight of both so now we\u2019ll be even!\u201d\n\nKaroff\u2019s voice is joined by Hinsman\u2019s. \u201cLaugh all you want, but it looks like their buddies are retreating. You must\u2019ve gotten someone important. Good work, Zee.\u201d\n\n\u201cThen that went better than I hoped,\u201d you mutter to yourself, but move quickly to relock the ship to the docking bay. No sense in lingering out here without shields. Bad things can happen--just ask the other ship.\n\nRejoining the others, you see that indeed, the pirate ships are locking back into the carrier.\n\n\u201cCould be a trick,\u201d you point out.\n\nThe carrier slips into underspace a few moments later however, and after a short wait it becomes clear they\u2019d have had to emerge by now if they were trying any funny business with blinking around inside the system.\n\nHinsman slaps you on the back. \u201cWell that was a damn good shot, Zee. You might\u2019ve got the captain.\u201d He yawns and turns toward the door. \u201c", "action_results": [{"action": "Aftermath", "result": "The Last Outpost is awash with light and humming with power and activity. Repair crews tromp through the halls day and night and from the newly cleaned and restocked dining area there\u2019s friendly chatter, the clattering of plates, and laughter at the antics of some performer on the screen. It\u2019s practically unrecognizable from the place the three of you fought for only a couple of weeks ago.\n\nAfter an unprecedented two weeks with no new orders, which you know Hinsman and Karoff haven\u2019t minded at all, you\u2019re sitting at the dining hall listening to them trade stories. Taking tiny sips from a glass of water, the closest you can get to having a meal with your friends, you notice three stern-looking people in uniform enter the room, two men and a woman. Their gaze falls on your table and they make a beeline for it. You nudge Hinsman, assuming something\u2019s come up. \u201cAnother mission, you think? It\u2019s been awhile.\u201d\n\nHe clears his throat, looking uncomfortable. \u201cI think they\u2019re here in response to my report.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat do you mean?\u201d\n\nKaroff has become very engrossed in the contents of his glass, and that\u2019s when you realize the officers are here for you.\n\nThey reach the table and introduce themselves to the other two, politely enough. And then, \u201cIs this the android?\u201d\n\nHinsman nods, not meeting your gaze.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s going on?\u201d you ask. Although you believe you already know. You\u2019ve been working on techniques to keep your memories, and the tantalizing fragments of new and sometimes even what seem to be conflicting ones from overwhelming you so suddenly and completely, but they\u2019ve certainly not gone away.\n\n\u201cYou go by Zee, right? We\u2019re going to need you to come with us.\u201d\n\nHinsman finally speaks up, \u201cThey\u2019re just here to help you out, Zee. You\u2019re going to get some treatment so that those...memories, dreams, whatever they are can\u2019t interfere with your work.\u201d\n\n\u201cI\u2019ve...been working on that myself,\u201d you tell him, almost pleadingly. \u201cI can keep them under control.\u201d You don\u2019t know why you bother, honestly. The only thing he could have done to prevent this was not put it in his report, and it\u2019s too late for that now.\n\n\u201cThe way they come on, it\u2019s dangerous you know, and they always get worse. It\u2019s not your fault of course, it\u2019s just something that happens with your kind of android. A side effect of using an organic brain. I\u2019ve done a lot of reading on it,\u201d he goes on. \u201cIt\u2019s not a big deal, and it\u2019s easy to fix. You\u2019ve had it done before.\u201d As familiar as you are with the way he works, this sounds suspiciously like a memorized speech.\n\nIn the end though, there\u2019s nothing you can do. The officers repeat their request, and however you feel, you can\u2019t find it in you to openly defy an order. And Hinsman\u2019s right; this has all happened before.\n\nHe and Karoff accompany you to the waiting shuttle. As you say your goodbyes and take a last look around the now bustling station, you wonder if you\u2019ll remember any of this by the time they\u2019re done with you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "\"We don't need to stop them.\"", "result": "\u201cThey\u2019re not coming here. They\u2019re looking for the vials,\u201d you reassure them. \u201cAnd they won\u2019t find them.\u201d The first thing you\u2019d done after finding Markov\u2019s stash, before you\u2019d done anything else, was melt every single vial along with its contents down to nothing with your laser torch. \u201cOh, and assuming they know exactly where to look, I left a little surprise for them.\u201d\n\nThe lab had been full of all kinds of interesting chemicals, and the three of you aren\u2019t waiting too long before the sensors trained on the medical wing register a sizable explosion. A moment later, the ship that carried them is careening away, clumsily enough that a laser turret can slice it in half before the shields have a change to reactivate.\n\n\u201cBeautiful.\u201d Karoff grins, then squints at the screen. \u201cAnd I think...yes, looks like the others may be retreating. Or moving back toward the carrier, anyhow. You musta got somebody important. That grumpy old bastard from the viewscreen, I hope.\u201d\n\nWell done, Zee.\u201d Hinsman slaps you on the back. \u201cDamn, will there be enough left in medical to scrape up some DNA, I wonder? There\u2019s gonna be a hell of a manhunt on once we transmit this battle report. Hope none of you were planning a vacation.\u201d", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Wait until they're closer.", "result": "Patience is everything out here. You all lapse into a tense silence as you watch the sweeping scans. The ships are visible on the sensors for only a fraction of a second at a time. They move erratically as they approach in a way that would be difficult to target, then seem to gain confidence and split into two groups, angling to sweep by each side of the station.\n\nYou\u2019d installed a few shortcuts on your console and wristcomm last night, preparing for the possibility you\u2019d be working alone, and as they come into range you now tap a key. The lights in the command center dim briefly as outside the station the massive shield generators hum to life. The turrets ready themselves and immediately begin spitting fire. To one of the groups the attack is devastating, leaving two of the ships smoldering wreckage and disabling a third. The four on the other side of the station take minor damage and one loses shields and has to retreat back towards the carrier.\n\nKaroff hasn\u2019t been idle either, and once he saw you go into action he sent a barrage of missiles toward the carrier itself, which make contact a couple of moments later. They don\u2019t pierce the shields, but apparently are enough of a bother that the big ship begins to move off further out of range, meaning it can\u2019t provide backup to the rest of the pirates, even the unshielded one limping towards it.\n\n\u201cNice work, everyone. And I guess I\u2019ll take janitor duty,\u201d Hinsman says, firing another pair of torpedoes. One blows the disabled ship to shrapnel and another zips across the distance to take out the shield-less one.\n\nThe remaining three pull out of range. They continue to make slow circles around the station for a bit, launching a few torpedoes of their own, two exploding harmlessly against the shield of the central complex and the third doing some damage to one of the unshielded arms, but missing the turret. When Karoff manages to strike a glancing blow off of one of them with his return fire they seem to think better of lingering and retreat to the carrier. It jumps to underspace, and after a few seconds it\u2019s clear they\u2019re not trying any risky tricks with jumping closer to the station, while your sensor sweeps continue to not report them emerging anywhere else in the system.\n\nBattles in space tend to be that way. Hours of tense preparation and waiting, decided by a few seconds of actual weapon\u2019s exchange. If one of the pirate ships had managed to get in close enough to line up a shot before you activated the shields, this all could\u2019ve gone very differently.\n\n\u201cAs soon as we can get this data to the Order, there\u2019s gonna be a hell of a hunt going on for the ones who got away,\u201d Hinsman says later, while compiling the battle report and the information on the infection aboard the station. \u201cHope no one was planning a vacation.\u201d\n\n\u201cEh, scouring a bunch of backwater planets for terrorists won\u2019t be that bad,\u201d Karoff replies with a shrug. \u201cI just don\u2019t envy whoever\u2019s gonna be searching and sanitizing every centimeter of this station. So sorry about that, Zee.\u201d\n\nYou can tell he\u2019s joking for once, and just shake your head. \u201cNope, not me. Never been gladder they gave me a gun instead of a mop.\u201d", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "You don't care about any of this anymore.", "result": "Sorrow, anger, and pain still thunder just beyond the edge of your conscious thought. In your eyes, the major failing of the saboteur now was in not blowing this entire station to cosmic dust and sparing you from this brink of madness. You were content in your role before, happy to tirelessly devote yourself to the Order\u2019s interests, and now? You no longer care about what was done here or why. Let someone else figure that out, or not. What difference does it make?\n\nYou return to the central complex, making sure not to stare into the abyss this time as you cross it.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m fine,\u201d you say in answer to Hinsman\u2019s look when you enter, brushing past him. Except for the monitors in the main computer room turned command center, the station is once again dark. Somehow this environment seems to magnify the echo of footsteps. Peering around the curve of a corridor, you see another oasis of light washing against a wall; the nursing station where Matti is resting.\n\nYou busy yourself the next several hours, putting equipment away, helping Karoff calibrate this or that and keeping watch while he and Hinsman sleep. In the end the power situation means the three of you will only able to get partial shielding up around the non vital sections, which are essentially everything but the docking bay and central complex. Hopefully that will be enough.\n\nHinsman has already seen to Matti and he and Karoff are having a quick breakfast and complaining about the coffee substitute when the moment arrives. An alert from the computer indicates something just emerged from underspace. The three of you gather in the command center and Karoff quickly locates the ship.\n\n\u201cNo affiliation and armed to the teeth. Yep, we got a pirate.\u201d\n\nHinsman drains his faux coffee and sets the cup aside. \u201cJust one? Shouldn\u2019t be too hard to handle.\u201d\n\n\u201cYeah, there\u2019s...dammit! You jinxed us. Now there\u2019s two, three...eight on approach. And they\u2019re hard to track.\u201d\n\n\u201cSensors didn\u2019t pick them up?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cThe first ship was a carrier. It\u2019s how you disguise the size of your force if for instance, you think someone may have an alert set for anyone exiting underspace.\u201d", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "You're fine.", "result": "\u201cY-yeah, I just...had some trouble getting across this section with the worst of the damage. It\u2019s bigger than it looked on the images we had. I\u2019m fine now though, just had a close call.\u201d\n\n\u201cAll right, well glad you\u2019re all right, and be careful, Zee.\u201d\n\n\u201cRight. I\u2019ll be at the turret soon.\u201d\n\nYou cut the call and take a deep breath, telling yourself you\u2019ve got to pull yourself together. This is an astoundingly bad place and time to be having a crisis. You\u2019re unsure if that was your entire motivation in not telling Hinsman the truth, but you know you need to focus on getting the defenses up now. The memories, and the painful questions they\u2019ve made you ask...you\u2019ll dwell on that later when there\u2019s no danger of attack.\n\nMeanwhile you\u2019ll just hope that they don\u2019t return, or at least not with such force that you can\u2019t function. You need to stay focused.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "No time for that.", "result": "You drift down the dark hallway, propelling yourself forward in short bursts with the flat of your palm along the wall or the ceiling as you go.\n\nEvery so often there\u2019s a crackle from your headset as someone checks on you, but the dark halls are otherwise eerily silent. Doors line the walls on either side of you, firmly shutting away their secrets. One door is hanging open and askew on cracked hinges, and you see the long room beyond it is filled with rusting rows of bolted down bedframes. An infirmary at some time in the past, now with the back wall now ripped open to expose them to space. You can see the pale face of the barren rock the station orbits through the gap.\n\nYou float down an elevator shaft and after a measured distance begin cutting your way out with a laser torch. Gripping the handrail behind you, you kick the slab of metal free. It tumbles forward, and forward, and out into space. Where you expected to find more hallway, you\u2019re now looking at a mostly missing wall, the blown out section large enough to pilot a shuttle through. You\u2019ve drifted out a short ways, watching the metal slab diminishing in the distance, still moving from the momentum of your kick.\n\nIt\u2019s then that you glance down and realize there\u2019s nothing beneath your feet but the void of space and the twinkling of stars. Most of the floor in this section has also been blown away. You pedal your legs in a panic and the motion sends your body shooting upwards. Struggling to reorient yourself in mid-air, you crack your elbow against a piece of metal railing and grab for it desperately.\n\nYou\u2019re caught up now against a section of what used to be the roof, amid a forest of twisted metal spars and snaking black wires. You remain carefully still a long moment while you calm yourself, your back resting lightly against the jagged mess while you gaze down at the floor. It\u2019s been ripped out clear through to the bottom of the station. You can just see the edges other rooms on other floors parallel to this one, and where the plating that held on the other side of the gap buckled like crumpled tissue, but thankfully you don\u2019t have to try to float down through the big hole to reach the turret. Just, across it.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "\"Everything will be fine here once the defenses are up.\"", "result": "Hinsman hesitates. \u201cI just worry something may happen to her. She\u2019s so weak still, she needs care we may not be able to give depending on how things go.\u201d\n\n\u201cPirates are a risk at any time, and this station was designed to be defended by only three people,\u201d you point out.\n\nHe nods after a moment and flashes you a smile. \u201cYou know, you\u2019re right. Thanks Zee. But I guess we better gets to work now before Karoff finds us just standing around talking.\u201d\n\n\n\nYou both drag piles of equipment about while Karoff diverts more power from the ship, as much as can be spared, and even sacrifices most of the shuttles. Before long the equipment is in place and the three of you begin rigging up cables, energy cells, power nodes and anything you can find that can produce or transfer a charge down each of the station\u2019s splayed arms to the laser and torpedo turrets mounted at their tips.\n\nFinally, the heavily damaged medical wing is the last that needs attention. That\u2019s all on you.\n\n\u201cThink we can get by without that one?\u201d Hinsman asks.\n\nKaroff shakes his head. \u201cWithout the turrets that\u2019s a biiiig area where they can get in close and freely maneuver and we can\u2019t touch them.\u201d\n\n\u201cFigured. All right then Zee, off you go. Just hook up these cables and don\u2019t slip and go floating off into space, it\u2019ll be a pain in the ass to collect you again. One of us will keep in voice contact while you\u2019re there.\u201d\n\n\nYou stand in the airlock, the minutes ticking by while you wait for the atmosphere to slowly equalize with that of the absent one in the medical wing. You know you\u2019re getting close when you begin to float in place.\n\nOnce the door opens and you drift into the entrance to the medical wing, you search for the panel Karoff told you about. It\u2019s about the only one here that hasn\u2019t had its conduits fried, and you remove a connector you\u2019ll need. That and the EPN loaded with an energy canister you have strapped to your back should be all you need to power the turrets. After checking in on your wrist comm you start to make your way on down to the hall.\n\nYou carry a cable as well, meant to be attached to your suit. If you were following safety recommendations, one of the two clips along the length should always be anchored to something. You\u2019re not entirely sure you need it however. The sides of this section have blown out in some places but you can just avoid getting too near the edge of those gaps. Using the tethered cable is fine when working in one place, but tediously slow when trying to move.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Repair defenses", "result": "Hinsman and Karoff have already ripped out most of the EPNs that were so recently installed by the time you finish suiting up. Your sleek one piece outfit is in the Order colors of dark blue and grey, and more than just a uniform. With the addition of your helmet with its built in breathing mask it serves as well in combat as any armor, and protects you in any climate and even for a time in open space. It feels good to be back in it. Between the detour through the Camarov system and then the stop here you\u2019ve been running around without it for an unusually long time.\n\nHinsman charges by with a load of power cables draped over one arm, and you have to jog after him a short ways to get his attention and instructions.", "action_results": [{"action": "Get to work!", "result": "You both drag piles of equipment about while Karoff diverts more power from the ship, as much as can be spared, and even sacrifices most of the shuttles. Before long the equipment is in place and the three of you begin rigging up cables, energy cells, power nodes and anything you can find that can produce or transfer a charge down each of the station\u2019s splayed arms to the laser and torpedo turrets mounted at their tips.\n\nFinally, the heavily damaged medical wing is the last that needs attention. That\u2019s all on you.\n\n\u201cThink we can get by without that one?\u201d Hinsman asks.\n\nKaroff shakes his head. \u201cWithout the turrets that\u2019s a biiiig area where they can get in close and freely maneuver and we can\u2019t touch them.\u201d\n\n\u201cFigured. All right then Zee, off you go. Just hook up these cables and don\u2019t slip and go floating off into space, it\u2019ll be a pain in the ass to collect you again. One of us will keep in voice contact while you\u2019re there.\u201d\n\n\nYou stand in the airlock, the minutes ticking by while you wait for the atmosphere to slowly equalize with that of the absent one in the medical wing. You know you\u2019re getting close when you begin to float in place.\n\nOnce the door opens and you drift into the entrance to the medical wing, you search for the panel Karoff told you about. It\u2019s about the only one here that hasn\u2019t had its conduits fried, and you remove a connector you\u2019ll need. That and the EPN loaded with an energy canister you have strapped to your back should be all you need to power the turrets. After checking in on your wrist comm you start to make your way on down to the hall.\n\nYou carry a cable as well, meant to be attached to your suit. If you were following safety recommendations, one of the two clips along the length should always be anchored to something. You\u2019re not entirely sure you need it however. The sides of this section have blown out in some places but you can just avoid getting too near the edge of those gaps. Using the tethered cable is fine when working in one place, but tediously slow when trying to move.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\u201cMarkov killed Inea and then went insane.\u201d", "result": "\u201cWhy look farther than Occam's Razor on this? It's the simplest explanation,\u201d you say. \u201cCarst, his actions may have been...drastic, and there may be no logical explanation for his destruction of Order property, but before the station sabotage everything points to him murdering Banca.\u201d\n\n\u201cI think so too,\u201d Hinsman says, \u201cbut we don't have any details at all on what happened to her. Certainly no evidence.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat he would feel compelled to return to the medical arm where she died is a good indicator that he was emotionally compromised. If his goal had simply been to destroy the station he would've started in the central computer room. And who else could've killed Banca? Oswen?\u201d\n\n\u201cWell that was my original theory...\u201d Karoff muses, stroking one end of his mustache.\n\n\u201cYou read the personnel files too,\u201d you point out, cutting him off. \u201cMatti Oswen is considerably shorter and lighter than Inea Banca was. It would take a lot to swing a canister at the back of Banca's head at that height, with that force. Furthermore, the damage was on the back of the left side of the skull. A right-handed person standing behind her would've struck the right side. And meanwhile there's only one left-handed person on this ship.\u201d\n\nHinsman's eyes light up. \u201cMarkov Carst.\u201d\n\n\u201cDamn, I was hoping it was the girl,\u201d Karoff complains.\n\n\u201cWhat? Why?\u201d\n\nThe pilot shrugs. \u201cNo reason really, I just like being right completely by accident.\u201d\n\n\u201cAnyhow, great job Zee,\u201d Hinsman says, choosing not to respond to that. \u201cBut I just wish we had more evidence. It's really too damn bad we can't get at anything in the medical wing. At least one murder occurred and serious damage was done to a vital Order refueling station; everyone in HQ is going to be looking hard at this, and you know how they can sometimes be a little...overzealous. I don't want them demanding a bunch of answers from Matti that she can't give. The poor girl's already been through enough.\u201d\n\n\u201cWell...we can check for the report,\u201d Karoff says. \u201cThe one on Banca. Maybe it wasn't ever finalized and sent but it has to exist if Oswen said they wrote it.\u201d\n\nHinsman nods. \u201cAll right, let's do that.\u201d", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "\u201cThere\u2019s something more going on...\u201d", "result": "\u201cI found Carst's personal computer in his room about an hour ago. It was well hidden, and he'd been using it to send and receive coded messages to someone outside the Order network.\u201d\n\n\u201cReally? Shit.\u201d Hinsman sighs, running his fingers through his dark hair. \u201cNow we've got that to figure out.\u201d\n\n\u201cWho would have a satellite out here aside from the Order?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cTraders, miners, colonists, pirates...?\u201d Karoff ticks the list of anyone you might expect to encounter past the edge of the frontier off on his fingers.\n\nHinsman has a thoughtful frown. \u201cSeems like it'd have to be pirates. Anyone else would have it registered so we could protect it. They'd have to be pretty organized, though. Damn, I don't like this at all.\u201d\n\n\u201cOh, but what if it\u2019s aliens!\u201d\n\nYou and Hinsman both give him a look. Hinsman sounds a little exasperated. \u201cEnough joking around.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhatever secret Carst had, Inea must've found out. Maybe something happened between them in the medical wing...he might've killed her on the spot, given the caveman tactics used,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cThe sabotage, though?\u201d\n\n\u201cLots of people have it out for the Order. Maybe treason was always the plan and being found out screwed it up somehow. We need to find out what those messages said.\u201d This last you direct at Karoff.\n\nHe explains to Hinsman. \u201cI plugged them into the main computer when Zee brought it to me. Give it a bit more time, it should be able to crack the code.\u201d\n\n\u201cLet's go there then. Should shed some light on matters. And Kar, you can run a search for the report on Inea's death while we wait. I know we don't have a record of it but Matti said they wrote it, it's possible it was just never finalized and sent. I'd really love to see what load of crap Markov was planning to feed HQ.\u201d", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "You don't care what kind of weird porn he was hiding", "result": "You return to where you left the hover platform and then begin making your way back to see if there\u2019s anything else you can help with. You can see Karoff has been busy here fiddling with the wiring, and indeed you\u2019re only halfway back to the medical station when you the lights suddenly flicker on and a much-missed humming fills the halls as all systems come to life. Karoff\u2019s triumphant voice sounds over the intercom, and a moment later Hinsman\u2019s to congratulate him. Everyone seems to be much more cheerful and you\u2019re relieved to see things returning to normalcy.\n\nThe main computer room he\u2019s working in now is quite close so you take a detour to see if he\u2019s pulled up anything about the damage to the station.", "action_results": [{"action": "Damage Report", "result": "\u201cAh, I see. No \u2018thanks for getting the computers up so quickly\u2019 or even \u2018great job, Karoff\u2019. Just more demands.\u201d\n\nStartled, you begin to apologize before he waves you off. \u201cCalm down, I\u2019m not serious.\u201d\n\n\u201cSorry.\u201d\n\n\u201cJesus. You really need to work on not taking every little thing so seriously.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s...not a skill I need very often, though.\u201d\n\n\u201cGood point. Well all right, you wanted the damage report. It just finished compiling.\u201d Karoff spins in his chair to face the screen, chewing on a dirty thumbnail. \u201cHmm, let\u2019s see. This would indicate The Last Outpost is...yup, it\u2019s damaged all right. And needs repairs. From people who are not us.\u201d\n\n\u201cSo nothing immediate needs attending to? There\u2019s nothing wrong that would put you or Hinsman in danger if you waited here a few days?\u201d\n\n\u201cWell, unsealing some of the station\u2019s arms would be pretty fatal. They took the brunt of Matti\u2019s hack rerouting job and a couple lost atmosphere. The old medical wing itself is in real bad shape obviously, that\u2019s where Markov set off the first explosion. But all we really need is life support and power here and in the docking bay. We don\u2019t really have enough power for the rest of the station anyway as long as we\u2019re siphoning from the ship. I\u2019ll go and seal anything unnecessary off in a bit and then we don\u2019t even need to worry about leaving them with life support.\u201d\n\nGood. That means you can leave here and continue carrying out your orders just as soon as this mess with the dead workers is sorted out.\n\n\u201cBy the way, Hinsman is going to try waking Oswen up for a little while and then wanted us there afterwards to sort of put our heads together on how to handle all this,\u201d Karoff adds, nearly reading your mind.\n\nYou step toward the door. \u201cI\u2019ll go now.\u201d\n\n\u201cEh, what\u2019s the rush? But I\u2019ll be there after I finish a couple things. We\u2019re all just gonna sit around till the relief team arrives either way.\u201d\n\n\u201cI could go and take care of my mission while the two of you wait. Hinsman suggested that earlier, remember?\u201d\n\nKaroff snorts and shook his head slowly as he turns his attention back to his screen. \u201cDon\u2019t you ever get tired of working so hard?\u201d\n\nYou\u2019re a little take aback by the question. \u201cNo?\u201d", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Alert the others to an intruder", "result": "You step back against a wall to have a clear view of anyone coming or going from any direction, and speak in hushed tones into your wrist comm to alert the others of the situation.\n\nIn moments Hinsman and Karoff have armed themselves and joined you. With Karoff taking up watch outside the hall, you and Hinsman methodically check each door. None are locked due to the power situation and all seem to be crew quarters, only three showing any signs of being lived in recently.\n\nFinding nothing, the three of you expand the search to the surrounding area until after half an hour you have to admit there really may be nothing to find.\n\n\u201cI\u2019ve got to go check on Oswen,\u201d Hinsman finally says. He gives you a little swat on the back of the head. \u201cZee, you\u2019re going bonkers again. Need to schedule you another trip to the doctor when we\u2019re done out here, eh?\u201d His tone is light and playful, but you don\u2019t miss the worried glances he and Karoff exchanged.\n\nAlthough you don\u2019t remember much about it, it\u2019s true you\u2019ve had...hallucinations in the past. Or whatever the technical term would be for you. They have to get pretty bad before they impair your ability to work, but the woman\u2019s voice had seemed so close and chillingly real. You\u2019re ashamed you dragged the others over here, and after an awkward apology you move to assist Karoff with the remaining power nodes, aware of him still giving you quick glances now and then when he thinks you\u2019re not paying attention.\n\nAfter awhile he disappears, and then the lights suddenly flicker on and a low, much-missed humming fills the halls as all systems come to life. Karoff\u2019s triumphant voice sounds over the intercom, and a moment later Hinsman\u2019s to congratulate him. Everyone seems to be much more cheerful and you\u2019re relieved it seems things will go back to normal now.\n\nThe main computer room he\u2019s working in now is quite close so you take a detour to see if he\u2019s pulled up anything about the damage to the station.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Find a mop and bucket", "result": "The door here opens to one of the storage arms of the station. It seems as likely a place as any to find cleaning supplies and so you slip through the door, carefully stepping over the severed limb and making your way down the dimly lit hall. It becomes obvious this is more of an area for discarded equipment waiting for repair or recycling and you pass numerous discarded fuel and energy tanks as well as other assorted clutter before you come to a cleaning machine parked in an alcove. The energy cell is low but even if it only does the job halfway it\u2019ll save you a lot of time.\n\nAs you\u2019re pulling it free, there\u2019s a clatter of metal and you see an energy canister was wedged behind it and is now rolling across the floor.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pick it up", "result": "Like the others this canister is spent, cool to the touch and quite heavy. It\u2019s similar in size to a fire extinguisher, and since the larger energy cells can be volatile the shell is made with half an inch of steel and interior enamel coating for protection. What gets your attention about this one however is the dried blood and long strands of dark hair caught up on the outside of the sealing mechanism.\n\nThat\u2019s...unusual, and worth keeping in mind.\n\nYou don\u2019t want to disturb the others just yet since you doubt they\u2019ve finished treating Matti Oswen, so you set the canister aside and leave the storage area, activating the cleaning machine to let the bristles and bubbles go to work on the drying blood while your mind rolls over just what may have happened here. Two maintenance workers dead and another seriously injured in circumstances that were odd to say the least. Just why had Matti been in such a hurry to close that door that she lost an arm over it? She hadn\u2019t struck you as an especially self motivated type the few minutes you\u2019d seen her on the viewscreen.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Go finish cleaning", "result": "This section of the station is literally a junk heap. You roll the machine past the clutter without giving the canister a second thought and then climb on and activate it, cleaning bristles and bubbles going to work on the drying blood.\n\nMatti\u2019s arm you toss into a non-functioning incinerator and hope the power situation is sorted out before it gets a chance to rot.\n\nThe cleaning machine holds out after all. You finish just as it dies and shove it into an out of the way corner before going to seek out the others.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story39.json b/data/scraper/stories/story39.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39ded4c --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story39.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=14013", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Welcome to the Quest for the Holy Grail! In this game you play as Arthur, son of Uther Pendragon, from the castle of Camelot. King of the Britons, defeater of the Saxons, Sovereign of all England! ... Yes, you are rather impressive aren't you? Today seems like any other day of you riding through your kingdom with your knights of the round table looking for dragons to save and damsels to slay or something along those lines.\n\n\n\"Arthur! King of the Britons!\" You hear a voice bellow from above and suddenly the clouds part over your head and a cheaply animated adaptation of the Lord your God shines his glory down upon you.\n\n\nYou proceed with the ceremonial praising, grovelling and averting of your eyes for which God scolds you and tells you to stop sucking up.\n\n\nHe then explains that he is charging you and your knights with a sacred task, to seek the Holy Grail! He doesn't really explain what it's for or why he wants you to find it, but it's got the word \"Holy\" in it, so that must make it important, right?", "action_results": [{"action": "The Quest Begins!", "result": "Your sacred quest for the Holy Grail has begun! Where do you want to look first?", "action_results": [{"action": "Camelot!", "result": "Oh alright, if you must! But you don't want to stay too long. 'Tis a silly place! You make your way into the stables to find worthy steeds for yourself and your knights. Unfortunately the horses were all sold a few years back during the age of terrible glue shortage. You do however manage to find a coconut which you cut in half and give to your trusty servant Patsy who skillfully bangs the two halves together to make horse hoof noises. He's a prodigy on the coconuts that Patsy!", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "The French Castle", "result": "You and your fearless knights ride gallantly to the castle... Well not ride exactly, you don't have horses. You sort of prance there, but you extend your hands as if you were holding reigns and it all looks very convincing!\n\n\n\"Hallo!\" You call out when you reach the castle. You can see a man with a very distinguished looking mustache in the castle battlements, but he doesn't answer. \"It is I, Arthur, King of the Britons!\" Again, you get no reply. \"We have come here on a sacred quest, and I wish to speak with your master!\"\n\n\nYou get no response at all. Either the man can't hear you or he's ignoring you deliberately. If only you had some way to get his attention.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "The Dark Forest", "result": "And so, you and your knights boldly make your way towards the Dark Forest, which is no more than two swallow's flights away!\n\n\nOh, that's an unladen swallow's flight away, obviously. It's more than two laden swallow's flights away. Four really, if they had a coconut on a line between them.\n\n\nAnyway, when you arrive at the forest, you come to a crossroads, where there are four signs. A sign saying \"Camelot\" which points back the way you came, a sign that says, \"Certain Death!\" Pointing to the east, a sign that says, \"REALLY Certain Death!\" Pointing to the west and a sign that says, \"Holy Grail this way!\" Pointing to the north. Where do you want to go?", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Certain Death!", "result": "You boldly head towards certain death with Sir Robin leading the way. Eventually your band comes to an abrupt halt when a three headed giant blocks your path.\n\n\n\"Halt!\" Yells the first head. \"Who goes there?\"\n\n\n\"It is I, Arthur, King of the Britons!\" You tell him rather proudly.\n\n\n\"Awhh, a King is 'e? Well isn't that fancy?\" The second head says sarcastically. \"Who does he think he's impressing?\"\n\n\n\"Oh, you're just jealous 'cos you couldn't pull off a crown!\" Says the third.\n\n\nA rather long argument then starts between the three.\n\n\n\"I could if I wanted too!\"\n\n\n\"No, he's right you know.\"\n\n\n\"You have a fat head.\"\n\n\n\"Ooo, I do not!\"\n\n\n\"Look will you two shut up and let's kill the King!\"\n\n\n\"Owh, why do you always want to kill everything?\"\n\n\n\"And he wonders why we never have guests.\"\n\n\n\"Oh yeah, I'm sure it's got nothing to do with your signs.\"\n\n\n\"What's wrong with my signs?\"\n\n\n\"You mean besides the fact that they've got 'Certain Death' written on them?\"\n\n\n\"Hey, I spent ages making those signs!\"\n\n\n\"Yes but you used our hands to make them.\"\n\n\n\"Well if he'd have done it, at least he'd have spelt them right.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, the first five tries you kept writing 'Curtain Death'.\"\n\n\n\"Who'd be scared of a pair of curtains?\"\n\n\n\"Oh yeah? Well you're ugly!\"\n\n\n\"Your mother's ugly!\"\n\n\n\"Boris, we're conjoined triplets! His mother's your mother.\"\n\n\n\"... Oh yeah.\"\n\n\nWhile they're all busy arguing you...", "action_results": [{"action": "Bravely run away!", "result": "", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Fight the giant", "result": "You let out a fearless roar and attack the giant, who grabs you and lifts you up with his giant's hand.\n\n\n\"Did you see that?\"\n\n\n\"See what?\"\n\n\n\"He just attacked me!\"\n\n\n\"So he did, the cheeky bastard!\"\n\n\n\"What shall we do with him?\"\n\n\n\"I say we throw him in the river.\"\n\n\n\"No, let's eat him!\"\n\n\n\"Ooo, don't you dare! You know Kings are bad for my indigestion.\"\n\n\n\"And the bones get stuck in my teeth.\"\n\n\n\"Well I'm not throwing him in the river. That's littering that it!\"\n\n\nWhile the three heads are arguing the giant's hold on you grows tighter until eventually you are crushed in their grip. You've died!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Sneak past the giant", "result": "While the giants heads are arguing between themselves, you manage to sneak past them and head deeper into the forest. In the background you can just about hear the surprise when they realize you're gone, followed by a long argument over who's fault it is. Sadly you get lost in the forest and are forced to turn back, but while you haven't found the Holy Grail you did manage to catch an unladen African swallow on the way.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "REALLY Certain Death!", "result": "And so you and your brave knights ride boldly through the forest... No, I'm sure I can do better than that. I've used brave and bold before. What haven't I used? Noble? Chivalrous? Valiant? Yes, valiant! I like that one!. You and your valiant knights ride through the forest.\n\n\nEventually you start to hear rustling in the trees. Sinister laughter echoes all around you and some spooky violin music starts playing in the background.\n\n\n\"Ni!\" You hear a noise from within the forest.\n\n\n\"Oh no!\" You wail with horror. \"Cover your ears men, we are in terrible danger!\"\n\n\nYou and your knights cover your ears but you cannot block out the sound of that most dreadful and wretched of words! \"Ni!\" The sound comes again as a group of knights in horned helmets surround you. \"Pang!\" Another knight cries, and \"Nu womp!\" Yells another.\n\n\n\"No stop!\" You cry out in agony. \"I can't take it anymore! Please, have mercy!\"\n\n\nThe leader of the knights then emerges through the trees too confront you and declares, \"We are the Knights who say...\" Yeah, you guessed it. \"Ni!\" And the other knights all start chanting \"Ni\" along with him. \"And we shall let not let you pass unless you bring us a wide border to a garden where small bushes are thickly planted, or a similar larger area with a path winding through it.\"\n\n\nYou look rather confused. \"So you want a...\"\n\n\n\"Yes!\" He cuts you off. \"We want... A shrubbery!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Challenge the Knights to battle", "result": "\"I cannot let you interfere with my sacred quest!\" You tell the Knights of Ni. \"Knights of the round table... Attack!\" A glorious battle follows in which your followers hack away at the Knights of Ni with their sword and the Knights of Ni yell \"Ni!\" At you, but eventually your men can attack no more. It turns out hacking at someone with a sword is very difficult to do while covering your ears. Sadly you and you men are, for lack of a better word, Nid to death.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}, {"action": "Path to the Holy Grail", "result": "You follow the trail as it winds through the forest and after traveling around in circles for days the trail finally ends. Before you stands a sacred altar, and on that alter you see... A dead fish. Looks like that path was a red herring.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "A Nearby Village", "result": "You hope to find clues in a nearby village but on your way your path is blocked by a man clad from head to toe in black armour.\n\n\n\"None shall pass!\" He tells you.\n\n\nYou are left looking rather baffled. \"What?\"\n\n\n\"None shall pass!\" He repeats.\n\n\n\"But I am Arthur, King of the Britons!\"\n\n\n\"I move for no man!\" The Black Knight tells you with an unwavering tone in his voice.\n\n\n\"But God has charged me with a sacred quest and I must reach the village!\" You insist, but the Black Knight holds his ground.\n\n\n\"I will tell you for the last time... NONE shall pass!\"\n\n\nHow very rude! You'd challenge this man to a duel in a second but unfortunately you managed to get your sword stuck in a stone awhile back. If only you had some way to convince the knight to let you pass.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "The Castle Anthrax", "result": "And so, you and your knights set out towards the legendary Castle Anthrax. The days turn to weeks, the weeks turn to months, the months unexplainably turn into hours and The Hours turns into a 2002 drama film starring Meryl Streep and Nicole Kidman, which I've heard is really good.\n\n\nAnyways, you find yourself at the Castle Anthrax, where you are warmly welcomed at the door by eight school young blondes and brunettes, all between the ages of sixteen and nineteen and a half. Their's is a very lonely life of bathing, dressing, undressing and making exciting underwear, and they are utterly thrilled to meet so many handsome young knights.\n\n\n\"Greetings to you maidens. I am Arthur, King of the Britons!\" You tell them, \"And I have come here on a sacred quest to find the Holy Grail. Do you know where it is?\"\n\n\n\"Oh your majesty, you must be exhausted, come, come! Rest in one of our beds!\" Their leader Zoot suggests.\n\n\n\"I appreciate your hospitality young maiden, must I must find the Grail! Now is it here or not?\" But every time you bring up the Holy Grail, Zoot changes the subject.\n\n\n\"But you are weary and you must rest!\" She insists as she takes your arm. \"You may sleep in my bed. It is a very big bed. I'd say it could fit say... A King and at least fifteen scantily clad young women. Just come up stairs with me and we shall tend to your wounds.\" You are lead to Zoot's bedroom where you find a rather kinky looking nun costume, which you slip into your inventory because... Uhh... Because it's a clue! Yes, that's why! A very vital clue to finding the Holy Grail... Yes.\n\n\n\"Now you lay there and let us do all the work.\" Zoot tells you. \"I've been told by a very reliable source that the best cure for aching muscles is to cover yourself with melted chocolate and have three beautiful virgins lick it all off!\"\n\n\nAt that moment, Sir Lancelot bursts in the room and pushes the women out of the way. \"My Leige, we must escape this place! They do not have the Grail and these foul temptresses are trying to distract us from our holy mission!\"\n\n\nWhat will you do now?", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Save your men and heroically sacrifice yourself to these... Ehem... Foul Temptresses!", "result": "Getting out from the bed you heroically try to shoo Sir Lancelot away. \"Do not worry Sir Lancelot, I'll put these wicked wenches in their places!\"\n\n\n\"Oh yes!\" Zoot agrees. \"Let him put us in our places!\"\n\n\n\"Get away from him ye bride of Lucifer!\" Lancelot yells, pushing the women back with his mighty shield.\n\n\n\"Oh, don't worry!\" You tell him. \"I can tackle this lot single handed!\"\n\n\n\"Yes, please!\" Zoot begs. \"Let him tackle us single handed!\"\n\n\n\"No sire, I shall not leave you!\" Sir Lancelot insists as he starts to drag you out of the castle.\n\n\nWhat do you say?", "action_results": [{"action": "No, no! I can handle them! Save yourself!", "result": "\"Yes, he'll beat us easily! We haven't a chance!\" Zoot calls as Lancelot pushes you down the corridor.\n\n\n\"No sire!\" Lancelot yells. \"We must leave now! You are in great peril!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Look, let me go back in there and face the peril", "result": "\"No, it's too perilous!\" Lancelot tells you as he drags you out of the castle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look, it is my duty as King to sample as much peril as I can", "result": "\"No, we've got to find the Holy Grail. Come on!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Oh, let me have just a little bit of peril?", "result": "\"No, it's unhealthy!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "I bet you're gay!", "result": "\"... No I'm not.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story40.json b/data/scraper/stories/story40.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..16a8f74 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story40.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=53356", "context": "", "first_story_block": "The HMS Bounty set sail on a gloomy winter\u2019s day a few days before Christmas.\nYou like the little ship, which is just ninety feet long and fairly small at just over 200 tons for the 46 men she carries. She has three masts and sails extremely well however and you are quite content aboard her, despite the gloomy weather. She carries four small cannons for defense and a compliment of muskets and cutlasses as well as enough provisions for the voyage. The purpose of the voyage is to sail to Tahiti to pick up breadfruit and transport them to Jamaica to feed the slaves who work the plantations there. It should be an easy enough voyage.\n\nIf you are soon familiar with the ship but the crew are more difficult. You have joined them as an Able Seaman for what should be an easy voyage but there are far too many of men on the ship to remember all of their names. The one name you do remember is Lieutenant William Bligh, the ship\u2019s commander. He is a chubby, little man with very white skin, wispy fair hair and blue eyes looking for all the world like a little girl\u2019s porcelain doll. Bligh is supposed to be a superb navigator, having sailed under the famous Captain Cook, discoverer of Australia, on his last voyage, but he seems a bit excitable and a little difficult to take seriously.\n\nAlmost from the beginning the ship seems to hit bad luck. The weather in the Channel is awful and barely have you sailed out of port than you lose your grip while climbing the rigging. You are plunging towards the deck and almost certain doom when you manage to grab a rope tied between two sails, halting your fall with a heart-stopping judder. Days later a storm breaks the windows of Bligh\u2019s cabin, quickly flooding it with water.\n\nAs the year of 1788 and the voyage of the Bounty begins you hope that things will get better\u2026\n\nNOTE: PICK UP THE CREW LIST TO HELP YOU KEEP TRACK OF WHO IS WHO IN THIS STORY.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Atlantic", "result": "After leaving the English Channel the weather does indeed improve and you stop off at the Canary Islands for a week. Spirits are high as you sail onto the southwest bound for Tahiti, an island which you have heard of but have no idea where it is. You gather Bligh intends to sail around Cape Horn, the southernmost tip of South America, to get there. The ship is sailing so well Bligh decides to promote a prot\u00e9g\u00e9 of his called Fletcher Christian from Master\u2019s Mate to Acting Lieutenant, effectively making him Bligh\u2019s deputy.\n\nLike everyone else on board the ship you like Christian. He is a cheerful and very likable young man, though a slightly sensitive soul who takes a solicitous interest in everyone\u2019s welfare. His promotion comes at the expense of the Sailing Master John Fryer, a professional man, whose strong, independent opinions seem to irritate Bligh. He takes Christian\u2019s promotion without a word but some of the crew are not so subtle.\n\nMatthew Quintal is one of your fellow seamen, a young Cornishman and a natural-born trouble-maker, always looking for an opportunity to make a little mischief. One morning he is scrubbing the deck close to where Fryer is sighting the sun with a sextant and begins to mock Fryer about Christian\u2019s promotion, lightly at first and then more harshly when Fryer shows no response. Some of the other sailors standing nearby are exchanging glances and grinning.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Quintal in mocking Fryer", "result": "You join Quintal in ribbing Fryer about Christian being replaced over him. He takes it all with ill-tempered terse sentences but suddenly there is a bizarrely high-pitched cry from further up the deck, you glance up to see Bligh striding towards you.\n\n\u201cYou infernal scoundrels!\u201d he roars. \u201cHow dare you cowardly rascals show such insolence and contempt for Mr Fryer! Mr Fryer, how came you to permit such a thing to happen sir? Twenty-four lashes each to remind you men of the proper way of addressing your superiors! Master-at-Arms, fetch the lash! Quartermasters, prepare these men!\u201d\n\nHardly before you know what is happening strong hands have seized you and Quintal, stripped the shirts from your backs and your are being roped to the mast. The Quartermasters stand behind you and on Bligh\u2019s orders begin to whip you mercilessly with the lash, which burns like a fire. Soon it is stripping flesh from your back and just as the agony is becoming unbearable the punishment is over.\n\n\u201cMay that be a lesson to you all!\u201d Bligh declares.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Horn", "result": "After the lashing of Quintal you and the rest of your crew go about your duties quietly and you soon come upon Cape Horn in atrocious weather. For over four weeks Bligh tries to sail the Bounty into the face of a terrible wind, tacking into the face of a gale. You and several other sailors come down with fevers, brought on by constant exertion in freezing rain and tiredness, and finally Bligh admits defeat and turns the ship east.\n\nYou will sail to Tahiti east, around the southern tip of Africa instead. Despite the storm damage the Bounty makes good speed and arrives off Cape Town on the tip of South Africa after a month of sailing. Bligh steers the Bounty carefully into the busy harbor and you and another sailor called John Williams are sent to sound the depths with a lead line. You are both feeding the rope out when the lead snags on some rocks far below. Because the Bounty is still going pretty fast the rope starts sliding rapidly through your hands cutting them badly.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hold on", "result": "You grimace and grasp the rope tight. Williams releases the rope and it drags you across the deck, slamming you painfully into the railing and you are nearly lost overboard but suddenly the lead comes free and you haul it up on the line. Williams, blowing on his burnt hands, only watches you when suddenly you hear a familiar high-pitched cry and look up to see Bligh striding towards you both.\n\n\u201cYou incompetent mongrel!\u201d he spits at Williams. \u201cWhy did you not help that man? Six lashes for neglect and dereliction of duty!\u201d\n\nThe lash is fetched again, Williams is tied to the mast and the Quartermaster once more lays into him, drawing blood. Bligh doesn\u2019t even look at you, merely watches the punishment coldly until it is over and he returns to his cabin.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Pacific", "result": "After making it safely into Cape Town the Bounty spends nearly a month resupplying and repairing storm damage, allowing you plenty of time to enjoy the delights of that port. You set sail again on the first day of July and the following month you arrive at Adventure Bay on the island of Tasmania to the south of Australia. You pause there again to re-supply and sail on again in September bound for Tahiti. Spirits are high on board as you near your destination.\n\nUnfortunately, you and another sailor called James Valentine begin to develop a breathing problem, sometimes after exertion you find you have difficulty catching your breath. You and Valentine decide to see the Ship\u2019s Surgeon, a heavy-drinking red-faced fat man called Thomas Huggan, who seems rather surprised to be consulted on something medical. Huggan examines you both, wheezing the whole time, and when he has finished he wipes the sweat off his face and gulps down a glass of rum.\n\n\u201cInternal disorder of some kind,\u201d he tells you both. \u201cProbably too much blood in your spleens. If you would let me open a vein I will bleed you both about a pint and this will relieve the pressure on your organs, you\u2019ll be up and down the rigging free as birds then.\"\n\nYou and Valentine exchange glances.", "action_results": [{"action": "Agree to let the Surgeon bleed you", "result": "The Surgeon fetches a grimy scalpel, spits on it and rubs it with a dirty cloth to clean it and slices open veins in your arms. Blood immediately pours out like a high-power hose and Huggan looks rather alarmed. With difficulty he manages to secure bandages to both your arms and pronounces you good as new. You are both doubtful, particularly as the bleeding doesn\u2019t really stop but continues to ooze out of your cuts. Within days you have lost all feeling in your arm.\n\nWhen you peel the bandage away you find the area around the wound has turned green and black. You and Valentine are soon both feeling faint and feverish, forced to remain in your hammocks as almost your entire arms turn black. It doesn\u2019t take you long to realize you are dying but there is nothing Huggan can do. Bligh learns of the situation, visits you both and rages at Huggan but your days are numbered.\n\nYou die two weeks before the Bounty reaches Tahiti, the first of that ill-fated crew to perish.", "action_results": [{"action": "You are Dead", "result": "You have died too early in the story to even experience the Mutiny on the Bounty. Your only option is to return to the beginning of the story and try to live longer by making different choices. After the Mutiny on the Bounty if you die you may end the game and leave a comment.\nBetter Luck this time!", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the Beginning...", "result": "The HMS Bounty set sail on a gloomy winter\u2019s day a few days before Christmas.\nYou like the little ship, which is just ninety feet long and fairly small at just over 200 tons for the 46 men she carries. She has three masts and sails extremely well however and you are quite content aboard her, despite the gloomy weather. She carries four small cannons for defense and a compliment of muskets and cutlasses as well as enough provisions for the voyage. The purpose of the voyage is to sail to Tahiti to pick up breadfruit and transport them to Jamaica to feed the slaves who work the plantations there. It should be an easy enough voyage.\n\nIf you are soon familiar with the ship but the crew are more difficult. You have joined them as an Able Seaman for what should be an easy voyage but there are far too many of men on the ship to remember all of their names. The one name you do remember is Lieutenant William Bligh, the ship\u2019s commander. He is a chubby, little man with very white skin, wispy fair hair and blue eyes looking for all the world like a little girl\u2019s porcelain doll. Bligh is supposed to be a superb navigator, having sailed under the famous Captain Cook, discoverer of Australia, on his last voyage, but he seems a bit excitable and a little difficult to take seriously.\n\nAlmost from the beginning the ship seems to hit bad luck. The weather in the Channel is awful and barely have you sailed out of port than you lose your grip while climbing the rigging. You are plunging towards the deck and almost certain doom when you manage to grab a rope tied between two sails, halting your fall with a heart-stopping judder. Days later a storm breaks the windows of Bligh\u2019s cabin, quickly flooding it with water.\n\nAs the year of 1788 and the voyage of the Bounty begins you hope that things will get better\u2026\n\nNOTE: PICK UP THE CREW LIST TO HELP YOU KEEP TRACK OF WHO IS WHO IN THIS STORY.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Politely decline", "result": "You politely refuse and Huggan shrugs, fetches a dirty scalpel and slices Valentine\u2019s arm open. Blood sprays out over the walls and a startled Huggan desperately staunches the bleeding with a stained rag. He bandages Valentine\u2019s arm but the damage is done. Over the following days the wound continues first to bleed, then to ooze and Valentine becomes increasingly faint and weak. Soon his entire arm is black and green.\n\nWithin days Valentine is consigned to his bunk, feverish and fading. Huggan is powerless to do anything, when Bligh learns of the situation he rages at the Surgeon in the most violent language possible. Valentine continues to weaken and dies late one night. A somber mood descends over the whole crew as he is sewn into his hammock and the following morning it is cast into the sea. You sit next to his body on the first night thinking grimly how that could have been you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sinking spirits", "result": "Valentine\u2019s death sends the crew\u2019s spirits plunging low and Bligh decides to raise morale by instructing the crew to dance a jig to the tunes of a half-blind fiddler he has brought on board. The last thing the crew feel like doing is dancing but the sailors obligingly force themselves to their feet and dance wearily to the tunes the fiddler plays. You are dancing when you notice two men are remaining seated.\n\nWilliam Brown, a mild scientific man who Bligh brought on board as a botanist to take care of the breadfruit plants is talking quietly to John Mills the Gunner\u2019s Mate, a tough and unfriendly older man. You see Fletcher Christian go over and encourage them to dance but Mills shakes his head emphatically and Brown lowers his head. Christian shrugs and walks away.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the two men in their refusal", "result": "You walk over and sit next to Mills but you have been spotted.\n\nBligh yells for the music to stop and strides towards you three.\n\n\u201cWhy are you not dancing like the others?\u201d he demands.\n\n\u201cIt does not seem like an appropriate time for that,\u201d Brown says quietly.\n\n\u201cDamn you for contemptible rascals,\u201d Bligh cries. \u201cAll three of you will have your grog stopped from now until we reach Tahiti.\u201d\n\nMills glares back at him with a half-smile on his face as Bligh turns, returns to his former position near the helm and orders the fiddler to keep playing. The punishment is a harsh one but not as bad as it could have been: a week later you reach Tahiti.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tahiti", "result": "You are all relieved when the beautiful tree-lined round island of Tahiti is spotted. Bligh has been getting on everyone\u2019s nerves: he is no longer on speaking terms with Sailing Master Fryer, Surgeon Huggan or the Carpenter William Purcell and he has been grating the nerves of most of the rest of the crew. It is with relief that Tahiti is sighted and within hours hundreds upon hundreds of canoes packed with scantily clad but cheering Tahitian men and women surround the Bounty. The women are a particularly lovely sight.\n\nAfter a week anchored offshore Bligh sends Christian to lead a party of nine ashore in the ship\u2019s cutter to begin setting up tents and making a camp for the crew to use while they gather the breadfruit. You are part of this group and are left with another sailor called John Adams to guard the boats. Adams is a clever young fellow and the two of you are chatting when you notice a pair of young ladies eying you from behind some nearby huts. When they see you looking they glance at each other and giggle.\n\nLike all Tahitians they are dark skinned and wear nothing above the waist, their full breasts and brown nipples peep out shyly between the strands of their long black hair. They seem to have more than a casual interest in you and Adams nudges you in the side and points at the women grinning. He suggests you go over, introduce yourselves and keep the young ladies company for a while.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go and get acquainted with the young ladies", "result": "With a shrug you go over with Adams to meet the two young ladies. With many smiles they lead you into an empty hut where they offer you some fruit and nut snacks and begin examining your skin and clothes. They don\u2019t mind your touching them and when you kiss them they seem to like it and kiss you back. Before things can get too interesting you hear Christian calling your name outside and with a curse you and Adams give your new friends a goodbye kiss and hurry outside.\n\nChristian is all smiles and thanks you both for doing your bit to improve England\u2019s relationship with the Tahitian people, with embarrassed smiles and to the, slightly jealous, quips of your companions you row back to the Bounty for the evening. Bligh talks to Christian after you arrive and as you and Adams are clearing the boat after swinging it in he suddenly gives a high-pitched yelp.\n\n\u201cA gudgeon is missing!\u201d he exclaims. \u201cYou damned fools, where is the aft gudgeon?\u201d\nYou and Adams both look for the little metal tube that fixes to part of the rudder but it is indeed missing. Inevitably Bligh fetches Christian, who reluctantly confirms that you both left the boats unattended for a short time. Bligh yells at Christian before inevitably sentencing you both to twelve lashes each for the disappearance of the little metal tube.\n\nLater as you lie down in your hammock, your back burning, you reflect that you are really beginning to hate that man.", "action_results": [{"action": "Discontent", "result": "The Bounty remains anchored in Matavai Bay for the next month while every day Bligh, Christian or Fryer lead a party of men ashore to gather breadfruit trees. You get the impression that the men are working deliberately slowly to prolong their stay on Tahiti, as often as they are able the men contrive to spend time with the Tahitians in their villages. All of the Natives are extremely friendly and the women remarkably so. Christian and, surprisingly, Bligh are fairly relaxed about these interactions between the crew and the women but after a year at sea it would have been very unwise to try to restrain the men.\n\nBligh inevitably tries however. One day you are a part of a party that is working even more slowly than usual and Bligh is becoming irritable and orders you all to work faster. Repeatedly a sailor called Matthew Thompson, an older and extremely tough man keeps demanding, increasingly more insistently that he be allowed to go into the village. Bligh continues to refuse him. Finally, Thompson has had enough.\n\n\u201cDamn you sir,\u201d he growls. \u201cIf you were any sort of officer you would know better than to deny your men what they want.\u201d\n\nThere is stunned silence following this outburst.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Thompson in criticising Bligh", "result": "You speak up, agreeing with Thompson that is the way the whole crew feels. Bligh has gone very pale.\n\n\u201cDamn you for mutinous dogs,\u201d he growls. \u201cQuartermaster, twelve lashes each!\u201d\n\nThe lash is fetched, the blows are landed and your back is transformed into agony. Sullen and muttering the crew return once more to the Bounty.", "action_results": [{"action": "Defiance", "result": "Work continues on gathering the breadfruit plants while the crew members continue to enjoy the hospitality and affections of the local people. As well as the company of the women they now have strong locally-brewed alcohol to enjoy, though such gatherings have to be kept secret when Bligh is ashore. The lure of strong alcohol succeeds in drawing the overweight surgeon Huggan from his cabin (which he has rarely left for the last year) and he comes ashore.\n\nThe Tahitians find the fat, red-faced man great fun and the men insist on plying him with more and more alcohol. Finally, it is getting late and Christian, who is part of the party though not drinking himself, informs everyone it is time to return to the ship or risk the wrath of Bligh. Most of the men stumble to their feet and stagger towards the boat but Huggan is too far gone. Making a rude comment about Bligh he tells Christian to leave him there.\n\nChristian licks his lips nervously. Huggan as a Surgeon is a fellow officer and Christian has no authority to order him back to the ship, on the other hand Bligh is sure to notice his absence and punish Huggan in some way. When Christian points this out Huggan laughs and again voices uncomplimentary views about your Commander. Christian shrugs, turns to you and suggests you come back.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Huggan on an all-night bender", "result": "You refuse and Christian reluctantly leads his party back to the ship. All that night you and Huggan down cup after cup of the burningly strong local spirits. The Tahitian men may be used to the strong alcohol but you not so much. Some time before dawn you lie down on your back and pass out. When the inevitable vomit comes your mouth is closed and it remains in your mouth and throat.\n\nYou suffocate and choke to death as the morning sun rises over this tropical paradise.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Return to the Bounty", "result": "You join the rest of Christian\u2019s group in returning to the Bounty. The following morning you again go ashore and find a group of Tahitian men gathered silently round the motionless figure of your ship\u2019s surgeon. Vomit covers his face and hands and he lies unmoving on his back, his eyes shut. Christian calls out to him and when he doesn\u2019t respond he examines him. At first you think he is dead drunk. You soon realize he is just dead.", "action_results": [{"action": "Paradise", "result": "After the death of Surgeon Huggan Bligh orders the Bounty sailed from Matavai Bay to Toaroa, a small bay and village further round the island. The reason Bligh gives is that there are more breadfruit trees there but the crew suspect it is to move them further from the scene of Huggan\u2019s death and the temptations of alcohol and women. If that is the intention it is unsuccessful, there are even more of both at Toaroa.\n\nThe women are, if possible, even more free with their affections and breath-takingly beautiful, here and one of your fellow sailors, a friendly, bearded man called William Muspratt, comes up to you one day with an excited whisper as you are moving breadfruit trees as part of a party under Bligh. He tells you he has found some exceptionally affectionate Native women who will apparently trade sex in exchange for odd trinkets such as coins, utensils like cutlery or other odds and ends. He tells you he is going to sneak away now and offers to show you where they may be found.", "action_results": [{"action": "Accept his offer", "result": "You and Muspratt sneak away from the work party and go to the huts Muspratt found before. He goes in one and you go in the other. You are a little nervous and uncertain this is wise as you step into the darkened interior of the hut. Inside, as your eyes adjust you see a pretty young lady lying under a blanket on the floor, she props herself in one elbow and smiles at you. Nervously you put a spare belt buckle on the floor and she folds back the blanket to reveal she is naked underneath, dark and soft in the darkness.\n\nFifteen minutes later you are really starting to enjoy yourself when a small figure strides into the hut.\n\n\u201cWhat do you think you are doing you infernal rat?\u201d Bligh barks at you. \u201cClimb off that person, get dressed and come outside at once.\u201d\n\nHe storms from the hut and you sheepishly emerge minutes later, your clothes reassembled and reapplied to you. Muspratt is looking similarly crestfallen and of course Bligh has his quartermasters standing by. You and Muspratt both get twelve lashes each, your backs burn like they are on fire and so it goes on.", "action_results": [{"action": "The temptations of Tahiti", "result": "Word soon spreads among the crew that Muspratt has found what amounts to a brothel in Toaroa, though actually many of the Native women seem happy to perform sexual services in exchange for gifts. One of your fellow seamen Robert Lamb, who often cuts the meat for the cook, decides to sneak off the next time he is in one of Christian\u2019s work parties and give away his cleaver in the hope of getting two women at the same time. You have a knife and wonder if that would be worth the same.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sneak into the village with Lamb", "result": "You and Lamb walk off from Christian\u2019s work group to the huts in the village. You make your offerings to the women and hold up two fingers to indicate your desires. To your amazement it works, two women lead Lamb away while two women guide you into one hut where you all hastily disrobe. Both women assume a position some might refer to as riding double and by the time you and Lamb stagger back to the ship that evening you are both feeling exhausted but rather at peace with the whole world.\n\nThis feeling lasts right up until you see Bligh\u2019s mad face.\n\n\u201cImpertinent dogs!\u201d he screams in your faces. \u201cYou think a cleaver and a knife are not as valuable as your disgusting perversions? Quartermasters, twelve each!\u201d\n\nThis whipping feels exceptionally agonizing on your already exhausted body.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rebellion", "result": "By the beginning of 1789 the crew have had enough of Bligh and his ways.\n\nCharles Churchill, a middle-aged Manchurian and the Master-at-Arms (the man nominally in charge of discipline on the ship) gathers you, the recently flogged Muspratt and another sailor called John Millward, a young and reasonably well-educated fellow, into a secret meeting a short way from the shore party.\n\n\u201cI will tell you plainly boys I don\u2019t care a damn for our Commander,\u201d he whispers. \u201cHe deserves nothing better than to be shark bait for all I care. But this place is the closest thing to heaven on each I have ever clapped eyes on in all my years of sailing. I say tonight we take a boat and sneak away, Haywood has the watch with us tonight, he is ever sleeping on duty and besides was up most of last night at cards in the wardroom. I will get us a brace of guns each, we can take the cutter and sail round to Matavai Bay and from there light out to one of the smaller islands. After our shipmates have left on the Bounty we can return and live here forever.\u201d\n\nIt is a bold but extremely dangerous plan, desertion can be punished with hanging. Millward and Muspratt quickly agree to it and all three turn their gazes on you. You know if you refuse you must promise to keep silent about the plan.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the three men in deserting", "result": "To begin with your plan goes smoothly.\n\nMidshipman Thomas Haywood is a lazy and indifferent officer who usually sleeps on the nights he has the watches. You, Churchill, Millward and Muspratt climb aboard the cutter and row it away from the ship, by hard rowing all through the night you reach Matavai Bay by dawn and exchange one of your muskets for a sailing canoe. By noon you are paddling north for a small island called Tetiroa, which you have heard of from the Tahitians.\n\nYou make it to the island safely a few days later, though your boat capsizes as you reach the shore soaking your gunpowder and rendering your muskets useless. Notwithstanding this setback you take the boat ashore and set to work gathering edible fruits and nuts, coconuts and preparing nets and spears for fishing. The weather soon turns bad and for two weeks rainstorms lash the island. Soaked to the skin and huddled in what feeble shelters you can build from branches and leaves the four of you are beginning to reflect this might not have been a wise idea\u2026\n\nEventually the weather clears and to your dismay you catch sight of the Bounty and dozens of native canoes sailing towards your little island. The Tahitians must have told Bligh where you have gone. Hiding would be pointless so when a party from the Bounty lands on the beach you all go to the edge of the tree line to meet them, muskets in hand. Bligh walks alone up to you, cutlass in hand, and halts a short way from you.\n\n\u201cMen, if you come back with me without trouble this is what I will do,\u201d he tells you angrily. \u201cI will whip the three of you forty-eight times and you Mr Churchill twenty-four but then that will be the end of it. There will be no hangings, no further punishment, no more word of this will be spoken of. I will write a note to the Admiralty, that I will include when I submit my account of the voyage, stating that I have dealt with this matter accordingly.\u201d\n\nIt seems to be the best you are going to get and the four of you surrender. You are taken back to Toaroa and flogged alongside an American sailor called Isaac Martin who punched a native man in the face for trying to steal an iron hoop from him. By the time the second flogging is over your back is mess of gristle, flesh and blood and you feel completely and utterly exhausted.", "action_results": [{"action": "Farewell Tahiti", "result": "Discontent continues to seethe in the crew as the last of the breadfruit trees are gathered. Two days after the last floggings someone cuts the Bounty\u2019s anchor cable, apparently hoping the ship would drift away and that you would all be stranded in the paradise of Tahiti, it is only because there is no wind that night that the ship is not lost. Bligh is apoplectic, roundly cursing you all for a pack of traitors and has the spare anchor cable run down.\n\nThe following month a Tahitian man is caught trying to steal Gunner William Peckover\u2019s bedding, Bligh has him flogged a back-breaking one hundred times and hung in irons for a week but the next day he either escapes or is released. So it goes on until by the end of March the gathering of the breadfruit is complete and over 1,000 healthy plants have been safely brought on board until the Bounty resembles a floating garden.\n\nOn the fourth day of April Bligh orders the anchor raised and the Bounty sails away from Tahiti to the great sadness and sorrow of both of the crew, most of which have at least one girlfriend and several male friends ashore by now, and the hospitable Tahitians who seem to have enjoyed spending time with their new visitors. The mood on board the ship is grim and tense, like an explosive ready to blow at any spark.\n\nBligh, as usual, provides such sparks.\n\nThe first comes three weeks after leaving Tahiti when the Bounty stops at Nomuka in the Friendly Islands to take on fresh water. Fletcher Christian is sent ashore with a party but Bligh orders him to leave his musket's ammunition behind for fear of harming the Natives and making them anti-English. Despite this order you and some of the other sailors in the party disobey the order and carry knives or dirks ashore. You take a small adze or hand-axe.\n\nNo sooner have you landed than dozens of Tongan Natives armed with spears, clubs and rocks come out and surround you all. Christian yells at them to clear away but the only response is what sounds like shouted threats and a few thrown stones. One warrior, a great big naked man in war-paint snatches your adze out of your hand. Unable to make any headway you are forced to return to the Bounty.\n\n\u201cYou cowardly rascals!\u201d Bligh yells at you all. \u201cYou, Mr Christian, are you afraid to go through a set of naked savages when you have arms.\u201d\n\nFor the first time you see Christian lose his temper.\n\n\u201cThe arms are of no use when your orders prevent them being used!\u201d he cries.\n\n\u201cYou sir, are a coward!\u201d Bligh declares and turns away in disgust.\n\nYou and your fellow sailors glance at each other. In England one gentleman calling another a coward would be considered grounds for a duel. Every single one of you feels sympathy for Christian who stands on the deck looking completely paralyzed by indecision.\n\nThe next day you put the Friendly Islands behind you and sail on west towards Australia.", "action_results": [{"action": "Bligh breaks Christian", "result": "The next afternoon Bligh is on at Christian again.\n\nYou are scrubbing the deck when you see Bligh suspiciously inspecting a pile of coconuts piled between two cannons.\n\n\u201cThose coconuts look fewer than they did yesterday... why you damned hounds have been stealing my coconuts! You could not have done it unless your officers had known!\u201d\n\nInevitably the ship\u2019s officers, including Christian are called out and hear Bligh\u2019s accusations.\n\n\u201cNo one has been stealing your coconuts sir,\u201d Fryer says wearily.\n\n\u201cDamn you, you must have taken them yourselves! Mr Christian, how many coconuts did you bring with you?\u201d\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know sir,\u201d Christian replies. \u201cI hope you don\u2019t think me guilty of stealing your things.\u201d\n\n\u201cYes you damned hound I do!\u201d Bligh barks back. \u201cYou must have stolen them from me or you could give a better account of them, god damn you for a scoundrel, you are all thieves alike and combined with the men to rob me, I suppose you\u2019ll steal my yams next but I\u2019ll sweat you for it you rascals! I\u2019ll make half of you jump overboard before we get through the Endeavour Straights!\u201d\n\nBligh turns to the scowling Master-at-Arms Charles Churchill.\n\n\u201cStop these villains\u2019 grog and give them nothing but half a pound of yams tomorrow to eat and if they steal any more I\u2019ll reduce them to a quarter.\u201d\n\nChristian steps forward and clears his throat.\n\n\u201cSir, this treatment is intolerable.\u201d He says, his voice breaking. \u201cMy family have been gentlemen for twenty-five generations and not once have any of them been accused of being cowards or thieves without responding.\u201d\n\n\u201cGod damn you, what does that mean!\u201d Bligh explodes. \u201cYou sir are the worst of the lot, a contemptible thief, an infernal scoundrel, a cowardly rascal and an incompetent mongrel and that is what my opinion of you is sir.\u201d\n\nBligh turns on his heel and storms back down to his cabin. The rest of the officers, avoiding Chistian\u2019s eyes disband and wander down to their cabins or about the deck. Fletcher just stands there, his jaws grinding over and over. Finally, he goes below decks.\n\nFor the rest of the afternoon and evening there is one topic of conversation among the crew, a discussion about Christian and a feeling of great sympathy for him and great hatred towards Bligh. The rumors about Christian are wild: that he has been seen tearing up his personal papers, that he has given away many of his most valuable possessions to his fellow officers, that he has got some spare wood from the carpenter and is trying to build a raft out of it. You go out to the Officer\u2019s Wardroom on an errand and find Christian lying listlessly in his hammock, eyes staring at the ceiling, an almost empty bottle of rum at his side.\n\nDespite your fears about Christian neither you nor any of the crew are ready for what happens next.", "action_results": [{"action": "Mutiny on the Bounty", "result": "Early the next morning you are woken from your sleep by wild and confused shouting that seems to come from all around the ship. You and the other sailors spring from your hammocks and rush out on deck to see a bizarre sight. Christian and several other men armed variously with bayonets, cutlasses and muskets are herding a loudly protesting and threatening Bligh out onto deck. His hands are tightly bound behind his back.\n\nChristian seems half-crazy, he is alternately yelling at Bligh and talking to his fellow mutineers and has a heavy sounding plummet hanging from his neck (you later learn it was so he could jump overboard and drown if the mutiny failed).\n\n\u201cKnock Christian down men,\u201d Bligh is shouting. \u201cKnock Christian down!\u201d\n\n\u201cHold your tongue or you are a dead man!\u201d Christian screams in his face.\n\nJohn Fryer emerges on deck at cutlass point.\n\n\u201cFletcher, you must stop this,\u201d he calls out.\n\n\u201cI have been in hell for weeks past!\u201d Christian shouts at him. \u201cCommander Bligh has brought this on himself!\u201d\n\nYou are not sure what is going on but Christian and at least a dozen of the crew seem to have taken control of the ship and no one is really opposing him, the only person arguing against him is the vitriolic Bligh. Christian has decided to cast Bligh and his loyal companions adrift and orders the jolly boat lowered but it found to have several leaks so he orders the cutter lowered instead. It soon becomes apparent that the cutter is too small for all the loyal crew who want to leave with Bligh.\n\n\u201cYou are all pirates!\u201d Bligh shouts at Christian. \u201cAny man who stays on this ship is a pirate and will be hunted down and hanged by the Royal Navy!\u201d\n\n\u201cGet him away!\u201d men shout loudly.\n\nThe launch, a twenty-three-foot-long boat designed for fifteen men is soon in the water and Bligh is roughly thrown in. Several other crew members starting with Fryer join him, not so much because they like him but because they don\u2019t want to stay on the ship and be labelled as pirates, a crime which carries the death penalty. Soon there are more people in the boat than there is room for and still others want to get in, the ship seems almost equally divided between Bligh Loyalists and Mutineers.\n\nYou stand by the rail looking down at the crowded boat. The island of Tofua is visible nearby and as Christian is throwing a sextant, compass, charts, tools and even four cutlasses (!) down into the boat it seems the nineteen, loyal people in the boat have a good chance of reaching it in safety. It seems that the twenty-five mutineers or pirates remaining on the Bounty (including at least four people who want to go with Bligh but who there is no room for) are planning to return to Tahiti.\n\nYou must choose whether to go with Bligh or remain aboard the Bounty, a decision that will affect the rest of your life.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go in the boat with the Loyalists and Bligh", "result": "You make your decision and with a deep breath you jump off the Bounty to become the twentieth man in the Loyalist boat. Seconds after you jump in the Mutineers cast the rope off connecting the launch to the Bounty and your boat steers away. There is barely room to move but you row clear of the Bounty to the sound of the pirates\u2019 jeers and last insults and Bligh watches silently as hundreds of his precious breadfruit plants are thrown over the sides of the ship.\n\nThe last you see of the Bounty is her turning away and sailing east, presumably back to Tahiti. Her sails get smaller and smaller before she is just a speck on the horizon and eventually, like a ghost ship or the memories of a dream, she vanishes from sight. You all stare at Bligh with hostility while he clears his throat and doesn\u2019t even have the good grace to look ashamed at the predicament he has landed you all in.\n\n\u201cMen, the Dutch settlement of Coupang in Timor is about 4,000 miles west of here. With careful navigation and rationing I can get us there. From there we can take ships back to England and report the Mutiny on the Bounty to the Admiralty who will send ships out to Tahiti to hunt down those pirates and bring them back to England for justice. We can do it men.\u201d\n\nNo one answers but you all just go on staring angrily at him in silence.\n\nTofua is little more than an active volcano jutting from the sea and the plume of smoke rising from it is clearly visible. With hard rowing you reach the island the day after the mutiny and spread out to search for supplies. There are Natives on the island and unlike the Tahitians they do not appear to be friendly. Within a few days it appears that your return to England will not be as easy as Bligh claims...", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack\uff01", "result": "After four days ashore with the Natives gathering in increasing numbers and hardly any supplies to be found Bligh gives the order for you all to return to the boat and resume sailing westwards. As soon as the Natives see you are leaving they attack, they race to the shore and run through the water towards you armed with spears and axes. You are pushing off as fast as you can but one fast moving Native manages to grab a rope attached to the stern. You all quickly realize you can\u2019t escape as long as he is holding that rope.", "action_results": [{"action": "Jump off the boat and run out to fight the Native", "result": "You grab a cutlass and clamber out of the boat, splashing through waist-deep water towards the warrior. He lets go of the rope and jabs at you with a spear but you side-step it and drive your cutlass through his chest. As you turn back towards the boat you find it is indeed escaping, rowing quickly out to sea. You start to stagger after it but a Native comes up behind you and hits you on the head with a rock. You fall down into the foaming waves and more natives beat and stab you to death, your sacrifice enabling your comrades to escape to safety.", "action_results": [{"action": "You are Dead", "result": "So you are dead, in fact in the immortal words of John Cleese you are no more, you have ceased to be, bereft of life you rest in peace and are, in fact, an ex-sailor. The great thing about this story (and possibly life in general if the Buddhists are right) is that you don't have to stay this way. You can return to the story either from the beginning or from the Mutiny on the Bounty, if you feel like exploring different story branches.\n\nAlternatively if, like a glutton at a delicious feast, you really feel like you couldn't take anymore of this wonderful writing, you can End the Game and Leave Comments.\n\nIf that is the case thank you for taking the time to read my story.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Let someone else get off the boat", "result": "You remain on the boat and watch as stout Quartermaster John Norton jumps overboard, crosses to the Native holding the rope, dodges his spear and cuts him down with his cutlass. The dying Native releases the rope releasing your boat and enabling the oarsmen to row rapidly away from the shore. Norton turns to follow you but is knocked down by a Native with a rock and as he tries to rise he is beaten and stabbed to death. The rest of you escape by throwing spare garments of clothes into the sea, which pursuing Natives stop to pick up.\n\nThe month following your escape from Tofua is a difficult one for you. The weather is constantly cold, there are frequent storms and practically all of your time is spent either rowing or bailing out the boat. Sleep for more than a few hours at a time is impossible. You have nothing but tiny amounts of bread and water, your stomach shrinks massively and you are constantly thirsty. Life becomes blurred.\n\nBy the time you arrive at Restoration Island you can barely drag yourselves ashore. The island receives its name from Bligh after you all find fresh fruit and oysters which go a little way to restoring your strength. You find deserted Native campsites and after your previous experience you are not keen to make contact with them. After two days resting you sail on, reaching an island Bligh calls Sunday Island the next day where tensions again erupt.", "action_results": [{"action": "Another Argument", "result": "On Sunday Island on the last day of May Bligh nearly faces another mutiny.\n\nYou and the Carpenter William Purcell spend the morning clam hunting and return to the boat that evening with your findings. Bligh orders you to hand the clams over and, considering them personal property, you both refuse.\n\n\u201cYou ungrateful scoundrels!\u201d Bligh exclaims. \u201cIf I had not brought you here you would all have perished!\n\n\u201cIf it had not been for you we should not have been here,\u201d you reply angrily.\n\n\u201cYou are scoundrels!\u201d Bligh exclaims.\n\n\u201cI am not a scoundrel,\u201d Purcell replies coldly. \u201cI am as good a man as you.\u201d\n\nBligh grabs a cutlass from the boat and Purcell does likewise.\n\n\u201cMr Cole, arrest both of those men,\u201d Fryer calls out to the Boatswain.\n\n\u201cYou will do no such thing,\u201d Bligh snaps.\n\n\u201cThere are other methods in making people do as they are ordered without fighting them sir,\u201d you tell Bligh stepping between him and Purcell.\n\nBligh glares at you for a moment, apparently too angry to speak, and then abruptly throws his cutlass into the boat. Purcell does likewise and the next day you sail on to Coupang. Hardly anyone talks to Bligh more than is absolutely necessary, no one can stand him any longer. All of you are too sick, weak and tired and the monotonous waves roll you onwards steadily until finally, gloriously, you arrive at Coupang.\n\nThe little Dutch town huddled against the waves looks the sweetest place on earth as you all sail in, dock and disembark, feeling like kissing the ground. Bligh coldly orders Fryer and you to stay and guard the boat while he leads the rest ashore. You ignore him and join the others in receiving food and medical attention from the kind inhabitants of the colony.\n\nYour troubles are a long way from over yet however.", "action_results": [{"action": "Getting home", "result": "Coupang is a small settlement with no large vessels so Bligh arranges the purchase of a derelict 34-foot schooner he names HMS Resource and orders you all to work hard in making it seaworthy enough to sail on to the larger port of Batavia on the island of Java where you should be able to find a ship going back to England. Tensions remain with Bligh bickering frequently with Fryer, Purcell and now also Acting Surgeon Thomas Ledward, who accuses Bligh of eating more than his fair share of supplies.\n\nBligh responds by insisting that you all work hard so that you may get back to England sooner, despite your still generally weak state.", "action_results": [{"action": "Work hard", "result": "You push yourself hard but it turns out to be a mistake, you soon contract a serious inflammatory fever, as does David Nelson the gentle but weak Botanist Bligh also brought with him on the Bounty. Both of you worsen, despite the best efforts of the Doctor and even Bligh\u2019s comments that \u201cyour generally good conduct and manly fortitude deserve special tribute to your memory\u201d fail to raise your spirits.\n\nYou succumb to the sickness a short time before your companions sail to Batavia and safety.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Work at your own speed", "result": "You continue to work steadily but Bligh\u2019s relentless hectoring drives the gentle but weak Botanist David Nelson into a tropical disease which claims his life the month after you arrived in Coupang. By August the HMS Resource is ready and the remaining eighteen Loyalists under Bligh make a short voyage to the busy Indonesian port of Batavia, another Dutch port, arriving on the first day of October. The constant bickering between Bligh and the rest of you continue during this\nvoyage.\n\nAt one point Fryer declares to Bligh \u201cYou do not only use me ill but every man in the vessel will say the same.\u201d\n\n\u201cYes by God, we are used damn ill and you do not have any right to do so,\u201d Purcell declares.\n\nBligh grabs a cutlass and has the two men clapped in irons, releasing Fryer after an apology but keeping Purcell imprisoned for the last ten days of the trip. Bligh quickly begins making arrangements to sell the HMS Resource and the boat you left the Bounty on in order to finance the return home of all of you.\n\nThe boat has been mislaid and officials in Batavia have mistakenly moored it in a mosquito-infested inland bit of water. Bligh orders Seaman Thomas Hall to go and retrieve it despite the risk from the mosquitoes.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help Hall retrieve the boat", "result": "You and Hall have to venture through thick clouds of mosquitoes to move the boat and by the time you have rowed it back to where it should be both of you have been badly bitten many times. Malaria sets in almost immediately and within days you both succumb to the illness. An indifferent Bligh sails home soon after leaving most of his loyal crew behind in Batavia.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Let him do it on his own", "result": "You avoid helping Hall and predictably he becomes sick with malaria from mosquito bites while retrieving the boat and quickly dies. Bligh has also become sick with malaria and just five days after Hall\u2019s death he books passage aboard the Dutch ship Vlydte bound for Portsmouth. By this point hostility against him is so widespread that only two men, his clerk John Samuel and his servant John Smith are willing to travel with him, the remaining thirteen prefer to wait under Fryer's command for another ship.", "action_results": [{"action": "Return to England with Bligh", "result": "The voyage back to England is thankfully smooth sailing. It takes two months to reach Cape Town in South Africa, which the Vlydte departs in the first days of 1790. Three months later you are back in England after over two years away and never have you been so relieved to return to your native country. While Bligh goes to London to report the Mutiny on the Bounty to the Admiralty you remain in Portsmouth to rest and wait for your comrades to rejoin you in the safety of England.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hunting for the Bounty Mutineers", "result": "Just thirteen of the twenty loyal crew members cast adrift with Bligh survive to return to England in the spring and summer of 1790, yourself among them. Bligh quickly reports the Mutiny on the Bounty and publishes a book about it, snappily titled A Narrative Of The Mutiny On Board His Majesty\u2019s Ship Bounty And The Subsequent Voyage Of Part Of The Crew In The Ship\u2019s Boat, which you never both to read.\n\nIn October Bligh is court martialed for the loss of the Bounty, acquitted and subsequently promoted from Lieutenant to Post Captain. The Admiralty begins making plans to deal with the twenty-five Bounty pirates and decides to send the 24-gun frigate HMS Pandora with 134 men under Captain Edward England to Tahiti to capture all the pirates they can find and bring them back to England for trial. The Admiralty puts out a request for former crew of the Bounty to join the voyage to help identify the pirates and Midshipman Thomas Haywood volunteers for the voyage in exchange for a promotion to Third Lieutenant.\n\nYou consider whether to go or not.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sail with the Pandora to Tahiti to hunt down your former companions", "result": "It is with considerable trepidation that you agree to a second voyage to Tahiti but to your relief this one goes smoothly. The Pandora leaves Spithead and sails directly to Tahiti, travelling successfully around Cape Horn. After a swift four month voyage, which last time took you nearly a year, you arrive off the familiar tropical paradise of Tahiti and sail into Toaroa Bay.\n\nYou and Lieutenant Haywood, a lazy and arrogant character whom you despise, remain on board the HMS Pandora while parties of heavily armed sailors go ashore. They swiftly return with three men (Armourer Joseph Coleman and Midshipmen Peter Heywood and George Stewart) who surrender themselves and the following day they capture another man. The remaining Mutineers flee into the mountains prompting sailors to scour the island in order to capture them all.\n\nWithin two weeks three more men are captured and a fourth has surrendered. By the middle of April six more men have been captured bringing the total up to fourteen of the twenty-five who remained on the Bounty, including all four of the men who wanted to join Bligh in the boat but had no space to do so. They claim two of the remaining men were killed in fights on the island while the other nine Mutineers sailed away aboard the Bounty with several Tahitians in September of 1789 and they haven\u2019t been seen since. The Natives confirm these stories.\n\nWith nine Mutineers and the Bounty still missing Captain England hoists anchor on 8 May and sets sail to find them. The fourteen prisoners are kept in a specially designed prison on the Pandora's deck.", "action_results": [{"action": "Disaster!", "result": "The Pandora spends three fruitless months scouring the Pacific for signs of the remaining pirates and the Bounty while the fourteen Mutineers they have captured are kept imprisoned in a makeshift prison cell on the quarterdeck inevitably dubbed \u201cPandora\u2019s Box\u201d. The voyage is hopeless: with hundreds, if not thousands, of islands to hide on the chances of finding the Bounty and the Mutineers is small.\n\nDisaster strikes you once more one summer\u2019s day when the Pandora runs aground on the Great Barrier Reef. She immediately begins sinking and all efforts to either free her or patch up the damage is hopeless. By the next day she is listing worse than ever and you and Haywood are among the first into the boats. The Mutineers are not released in time and four of them drown, only ten swim to the safety of the boats.\n\nThe survivors of the Pandora, about one hundred of you including the prisoners re-assemble on a small sand cay. Once more you are sailing to Coupang in four open boats and from there onto Batavia and thence to England, this time with your ten prisoners in tow. The prospect of repeating the same arduous trip you took before fills you with dismay but there is nothing else you can do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Another remarkable voyage", "result": "This time your return back to England is much easier than last time.\n\nYou reach Coupang after a voyage of twenty days and from there arrange transport on to Batavia. In Batavia you are lucky enough to find the HMS Gorgon at anchor and board it to return to England. You reach England one summer\u2019s day and disembark at Spithead with your ten prisoners in tow. Altogether fifty-six of the one hundred and thirty-four-man crew of the Pandora died during the sinking or of disease as well as four of the prisoners. Captain Edwards is court martialed and acquitted of the loss of the Pandora and the Admiralty prepares for the trial of the surviving Bounty Mutineers.", "action_results": [{"action": "Trials", "result": "Following your safe return to England a Court Martial is quickly arranged to try the ten captured mutineers you and Haywood managed to help the crew of the Pandora get back. Bligh and another of your former comrades, a sailor called Lawrence LeBogue, have gone sailing on a second voyage to try and do what Bligh failed to do on his first voyage and deliver breadfruit from Tahiti to the slave plantations in Jamaica.\n\nThe Admiralty requests that as many of the eleven remaining loyal members of the Bounty crew that can be found (not counting Bligh and LeBogue) should testify against the ten captured mutineers and you read in newspapers that seven, including Fryer, Cole, Peckover, Purcell and Haywood, have volunteered their services. You wonder whether you should go or not.", "action_results": [{"action": "Testify against your former companions", "result": "You decide to attend the court martial proceedings aboard the HMS Duke overseen by Admiral Hood. Of the ten prisoners Carpenter\u2019s Mates Thomas McIntosh and Charles Norman, Armourer Joseph Coleman and Seaman Michael Byrne have letters from Bligh allowing that they wanted to join him in his boat but had to remain aboard the Bounty due to lack of room. They are quickly acquitted.\n\nSailing Master John Fryer, Boatswain William Cole, Gunner William Peckover, Carpenter William Purcell, Lieutenants Thomas Hayward and John Hallet, Seaman John Smith and yourself all testify against the six remainder: Midshipman Peter Heywood, Boatswain\u2019s Mate James Morrison and Seamen Thomas Burkett, Thomas Ellison, John Millward and William Muspratt. With eighteen former crew members of the Bounty present it is the closest you get to a reunion.\n\nHeywood fights a strong case, pointing out he was just sixteen at the time, that he slept through most of what was going on and arrived on deck too late to help and wanted to join Bligh in the boat but there was no room. Witnesses agree they never saw him helping the mutineers but also that he never did much to help the Loyalists either. Ultimately the Judges decided to pardon him.\n\nMorrison is another man who wins a pardon, arguing a tenacious defense that successfully convinced the Judge\u2019s he had also taken no part either for or against the Mutineers. Muspratt has a harder time as he was seen at the time of the mutiny standing by with a musket in his hands. He wins a pardon largely based on a technicality: his request to call Byrn and Norman as witnesses was refused and a mistrial was later ruled.\n\nBurkett, Ellison and Millward had no chance. Burkett was among those who forced Bligh from his cabin at gunpoint. Ellison and Millward both had cutlasses in their hands and took an active part in forcing people into the boat. All three are sentenced to be hung and two months after the court martial all three are executed upon the HMS Brunswick in Spithead and their bodies left hanging for all to see.\n\nThe following summer Bligh returned from his breadfruit expedition, doubtless disappointed to have missed the trials of the Bounty mutineers. This voyage had been a success but on bringing the breadfruit to Jamaica the slaves refused to eat it, not liking the taste. It seems that the reason behind the voyage of the Bounty, and everything that arose from it, was fundamentally pointless.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Future", "result": "By the end of 1793 there are just thirteen men who survived the boat journey to Coupang in England, including you. Of these you have lost contact with Gunner William Peckover, Clerk John Samuel and Captain\u2019s Servant John Smith. You know some of your former companions have had enough and want to retire from the sea but most are happy to keep serving. You must make your choice.", "action_results": [{"action": "Retire from the sea", "result": "The years go by and as you age you read in newspapers about what befalls your former comrades. Lieutenant John Hallett dies in 1794 of lingering malaria from your voyages. Lieutenant Thomas Haywood drowns when the HMS Swift sinks in 1798, Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue dies of a fall the same year. Quartermaster\u2019s Mate George Simpson dies on land in 1801. Others go on to long and distinguished careers.\n\nWilliam Bligh and John Fryer both enjoy success and promotion in the Navy, both die in 1817. Midshipman Robert Tinkler dies in 1820. Boatswain William Cole dies ashore in 1833 and the last of your companions, opinionated Carpenter William Purcell dies in 1834. You live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian.\n\nIn 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people, except for him all women or children. The Admiralty decides against taking any action.\n\nJohn Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.", "action_results": [{"action": "Conclusion", "result": "By the end of 1835 you have outlived every single one of the forty-six men who sailed from England aboard the Bounty in the winter of 1787 and go to your grave peacefully.\n\nFrom 1787-1793 twenty-four, over half, of the Bounty's crew died of disease, drowned, were killed by Natives or each other or were killed in England. Over the next fourteen years seven more met similar fates. Of the entire Crew only nine are known to have definitely suffered natural deaths. You are one of the few lucky ones who experienced disease, piracy, Native attacks, shipwrecks, fighting and all the other hazards that befell you and survived. Ultimately hundreds of deaths including seventy-eight Natives killed on Tubai, and the fifty-eight who died from the HMS Pandora\u2019s crew, are connected with the Mutiny on the Bounty.\n\nEven the 2012 death of Claudene Christian, Fletcher Christian\u2019s descendent, who drowned when the Bounty, a replica of the HMS Bounty, sank during Hurricane Sandy, can be connected to the Mutiny.\n\nSingularly each of these events, the Mutiny, the wrecking of the Pandora, the Trials of the Mutineers in Spithead, Massacre Day on Pitcairn, the loss of the replica Bounty were fairly common place events, especially in the 1700\u2019s and 1800\u2019s in England but taken altogether they form a remarkable story. The greatest legacy of this remarkable legacy is the still-populated island of Pitcairn, with approximately fifty people descended from Pirates it remains the smallest country in the world.\n\nSo who was ultimately to blame for the Mutiny, Bligh or Christian?\n\nCarpenter William Purcell, who hated Bligh, had no doubt.\n\n\u201cChristian was a gentleman,\u201d he told Christian\u2019s brother after his return to England. \u201cA brave man and every officer and seaman on board the ship would have gone through fire and water to serve him. As much as I have lost and suffered by him if he could be restored to his country I should be the first to go without wages in search of him.\u201d\n\nIt was Christian\u2019s fate, in a moment of madness, to set off a chain of events that would end with him being shot in the back while carrying wood across his garden on Pitcairn four years later. There is a tale oft-told on Pitcairn of a certain cave that Christian had stocked with muskets in case he needed to make a last stand if the island were ever found by the Royal Navy. Often he sat alone up there at night, mournfully reflecting on all that he had lost and the nineteen men he had cast adrift at sea for the sins of one of them.\n\nThe story of the Mutiny on the Bounty can be seen as much as a Tragedy as an Adventure.\n\nThank you for taking the time to read my story.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sources", "result": "I will end this story game with a few notes about my Sources.\n\nThe story of the Mutiny on the Bounty has been made into movies five times, in 1916, in 1933 (with Errol Flynn), in 1935 (with Clark Gable), in 1962 (with Marlon Brando and Richard Harris) and in 1984 (with Laurence Olivier, Anthony Hopkins, Mel Gibson, Daniel Day-Lewis and Liam Neeson). The most recent version is also the most accurate and all are worth watching, if only for entertainment value.\n\nWikipedia gave me a good start on sources about the Bounty, the Pitcairn Islands Study Centre proved an invaluable resource and the Famous Trials page on the Mutiny on the Bounty by Doug Linder provided me with detailed accounts of the 1792 trial of the surviving mutineers. Firsthand accounts by William Bligh and a rather good later 1831 book by Sir John Barrow, accessed through Project Gutenberg, also helped immerse myself in the period including Bligh\u2019s bizarre vocabulary of insults.\n\nAs the replica of the HMS Bounty used in the 1984 movie in anchored off Lantau Island in Hong Kong I took the opportunity to pop over from Shenzhen and see it (from a distance as it is a privately-owned ship) on one of my rest days. This replica was made in 1979 and helped drive home the small size of the Bounty, as already noted a second vessel made in 1962 sank during Hurricane Sandy fifty years later resulting in the death of two people including Fletcher Christian\u2019s descendent Claudene Christian. The Christian Science Monitor called her death \u201can almost inexplicable twist in that family\u2019s legacy\u201d.\n\nOne of my biggest hopes for the future is to one day visit Pitcairn Island.\n\nThank you for taking the time to read my story.\n\nNOTE: IF YOU ARE INTERESTED IN LEARNING ABOUT THE VARIOUS FATES OF THE BOUNTY CREW USE THIS ITEM.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Find another ship", "result": "You decide to resume service at sea and look about for whom to serve. William Bligh is now Captain of the HMS Calcutta, you could serve with him. Sailing Master John Fryer is now serving with the HMS Britannia. Lieutenant John Hallett is with the HMS Penelope. Lieutenant Thomas Haywood is the Lieutenant Commanding of the sloop HMS Swift. Lieutenant Robert Tinkler is aboard the HMS Isis. Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue is serving aboard the HMS Jason. You can choose who to follow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Captain William Bligh", "result": "You join William Bligh and serve with him for the next twenty years. You are with him at the Battle of Camperdown in 1797 and fight for him under Nelson at the Battle of Copenhagen in 1801. In 1805 you accompany him to Australia to rule as Governor and stick with him when he is deposed in yet another mutiny, a Rum Rebellion in 1808 in which he is imprisoned for two years before returning to England. He is cleared of blame once more, serves at sea for three more years before retiring, a Vice Admiral. He dies in 1817 at the age of 63.\n\nYou live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian. In 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action.\n\nJohn Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Sailing Master John Fryer", "result": "You join John Fryer and serve with him for the next eighteen years. You are with him under Nelson at the Battle of Copenhagen in 1801. He rises to become one of the foremost Sailing Masters in the Royal Navy before retiring in 1812 and dying five years later at the age of 63. You retire from the sea soon after.\n\nYou live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian. In 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action.\n\nJohn Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Lieutenant John Hallett", "result": "You join Lieutenant John Hallett aboard the HMS Penelope but unfortunately neither of you are destined for a long career. You continue to suffer from malaria you became infected with during your voyage and your health worsens. Despite the fact you are both in your early twenties it quickly becomes apparent it is fatal. The two of you journey to Hallett\u2019s home in Bedford where you succumb to your illness.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Lieutenant Thomas Haywood", "result": "You join Lieutenant Thomas Haywood aboard his sloop the HMS Swift and spend four happy years running letters for the Royal Navy in Asian waters. Your careers come to an end one terrible night when your ship is sunk with all hands in the South China Sea. The sea is an unforgiving mystery.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Lieutenant Robert Tinkler", "result": "You serve loyally under Lieutenant Robert Tinkler for the next twenty-six years. He rises from Lieutenant to Commander of the HMS Isis after good service under Nelson at the Battle of Copenhagen in 1801. You sail the oceans for many years before Tinkler, his health suffering, retired to Norwich where he dies in 1820. You retire from the sea that same year and live a long and peaceful retirement.\n\nYou live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian. In 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action.\n\nJohn Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue", "result": "You join Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue and enjoy his steadfast and resolute companionship during three years of voyages around the world aboard the HMS Jason. Your voyages come to an end one terrible day when a poorly tied rope gives way beneath your hands. Both of you plummet to the deck, killed instantly by the fall. Your bodies are tied in hammocks and thrown overboard: just two more dead sailors.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain in Portsmouth", "result": "You stay away from the trial of your shipmates and read about the proceedings in the newspapers. The detained Loyalists Carpenter\u2019s Mates Thomas McIntosh and Charles Norman, Armourer Joseph Coleman and Seaman Michael Byrne were quickly pardoned. Midshipman Peter Heywood, Boatswain\u2019s Mate James Morrison and Seaman William Muspratt manage to persuade the Judges they took no active part in the mutiny and win a pardon. Seamen Thomas Burkett, Thomas Ellison and John Millward are found guilty and executed.\n\nThe following summer Bligh returned from his breadfruit expedition, doubtless disappointed to have missed the trials of the Bounty mutineers. This voyage had been a success but on bringing the breadfruit to Jamaica the slaves refused to eat it, not liking the taste. It seems that the reason behind the voyage of the Bounty, and everything that arose from it, was fundamentally pointless.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain in England", "result": "You remain in England while the HMS Pandora sets sail and continue to rest for another year. To your amazement you soon get word that William Bligh is setting sail to Tahiti again to fulfil the mission he failed at last time: gather breadfruit and transport them to Jamaica. This time he is traveling aboard the HMS Providence, a much larger and powerful 10-gun sloop-of-war with a crew of one hundred. Among this crew is Lawrence LeBogue, a sailor who survived the open boat voyage to Coupang and Batavia with you and Bligh.\n\nBligh sends a letter to you asking if you would like to join him on this voyage.", "action_results": [{"action": "Accept", "result": "Against your better judgement you agree to sail with Bligh again. To your surprise this voyage goes absolutely smoothly. After leaving England in August of 1791 you reach Tahiti the following April. There you learn that the previous summer the HMS Pandora arrived in Tahiti and captured fourteen of the Bounty mutineers (two having previously been killed in violent altercations). Nine of the mutineers had sailed off aboard the Bounty in the autumn of 1789 but the Pandora left in search of them and Bligh is confident all the Pirates will be tracked down and captured.\n\nYou stay in Tahiti only three months, leaving that July and sailing onto Jamaica. You reach Jamaica in January of 1793 with the breadfruit for the plantation slaves where you discover something that makes you laugh. The slaves can\u2019t stand the taste of breadfruit and refuse to eat it. The whole breadfruit expeditions and everything that arose from them were, fundamentally, pointless.\n\nYou stay in Jamaica for five months, enjoying the Caribbean and all it has to offer, before sailing onto England, arriving that September. There you learn more news of the Pandora: at the same time you set sail she was wrecked on a reef and many of the crew, including four of the captured pirates, drowned. The remainder struggled back to England last year and after trials three of the mutineers were hanged, of the others four had been the detained loyalists while the last three escaped execution due to extenuating circumstances.\n\nThe Admiralty now feels that enough justice has been done. The whereabouts of the Bounty and the nine mutineers who sailed from Tahiti in the autumn of 1789 must, it appears, remain a mystery of the sea.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Refuse", "result": "You decline Bligh\u2019s unattractive offer to sail with him again and remain in England for another year. The time passes quietly until, quite unexpectedly, the crew of the HMS Pandora return to Portsmouth aboard another ship. It seems that on arrival in Tahiti the previous year the Pandora found and captured fourteen of the mutineers, two having been killed in fights and another nine having sailed off aboard the Bounty previously. While searching for the Bounty and the remaining pirates the Pandora sank off the Great Reef with the loss of many lives, including four of the mutineers. The surviving crew, including the remaining ten mutineers, sailed to Coupang in open boats, much as you did, then to Batavia and from there returned to England.\n\nThe Admiralty requests that as many of the eleven remaining loyal members of the Bounty crew that can be found (Bligh and LeBogue are still off on Bligh\u2019s second breadfruit voyage) should testify against the ten captured mutineers and you read in newspapers that seven, including Fryer, Cole, Peckover, Purcell and Haywood, have volunteered their services. You wonder whether you should go or not.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain on Java waiting for another ship", "result": "When Bligh and his two companions depart there remains fourteen of the Loyal Bounty crew in Java under the command of Sailing Master John Fryer. He finally finds a ship willing to take you all home but they require you all to do some labor first, either moving supplies from the island\u2019s interior upriver or by the docks loading them on. A party of four: Midshipman William Elphinstone, Quartermaster Peter Linkletter, Acting Surgeon Thomas Ledward and Seaman Robert Lamb volunteer to move supplies down river while the rest work with Fryer to load the ship.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help move the supplies by river", "result": "You help the other group move the supplies by river and quickly realize you have made a mistake. All five of you are seriously bitten by mosquitoes and quickly develop malaria. You are the first to die just ten days after getting the illness, the others die either on Batavia or on the ship on the way home. Your companions return to England safely where they join Bligh in reporting the Mutiny on the Bounty.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Help load the supplies on the ship", "result": "You sensibly stay with the ship while the others contract malaria from mosquito bites obtained while working on the river. Elphinstone and Linkletter die before even leaving Bavaria while Lamb and Ledward succumb on the journey home. Your ship is finally ready to depart on the first day of December and you reach Cape Town in February of 1790. You stay there for one month before sailing on, finally arriving back to England in the summer after two and a half years away. It seems like a lifetime\u2026 but your trials are not over yet.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain abouard the Bounty with the Mutineers and Christian", "result": "You remain aboard the Bounty with the twenty-five Pirates and watch as the boat containing Bligh and his companions fades away into the distance. Christian quickly assumes command of the ship and the navigating, realizing quickly that Tahiti will be the first place that the Royal Navy will look for you all but that Bligh will not get back to England, if he gets back to England, for at least one year and a ship from England would not arrive at Tahiti at least until the summer of 1791.\n\nChristian sets course for an island called Tubai hundreds of miles south of Tahiti which was sighted once twelve years ago but never visited. On arrival the Bounty is attacked by hundreds of warriors in canoes firing arrows at the ship. You and the other sailors return fire killing twelve of the Natives and forcing the rest to scatter. After three days off the island Christian decides to return to Tahiti to seek supplies and support from among the friendlier Natives there. You return to the welcome shores of Tahiti that June.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Battle for Tubai", "result": "Christian lets you all stay on Tahiti just ten days, long enough to pick up fresh supplies and twenty-eight Tahitians before sailing back to Tubai to try and seize control of it from the Natives. He builds a Fort which he calls Fort George and tries to man it against all comers. When the Natives attack they are repulsed again and again and sixty-six of them were killed, the only casualty on your side being Seaman Thomas Burkett who is speared through the side. Finally, Christian allows a vote between returning to Tahiti or staying on Tubai. The Pirates vote 16-9 to return to Tahiti. Christian sighs.\n\n\u201cGentlemen, I will carry you and land you wherever you please. I desire none to stay with me but I have one favor to request: that you will grant me the ship, tie the foresail, give me a few gallons of water and leave me to run before the wind and I shall land upon the first island the ship drives to. I have done such an act that I cannot stay on Tahiti. I will never live where I may be carried home to be a disgrace to my family.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe shall never leave you Mr Christian,\u201d Midshipman Edward Young promises him. \u201cGo where you will!\u201d\n\nAfter just three months in Tubai Christian sails the Bounty back to Tahiti. There the sixteen men who voted to remain there disembark the ship while Christian remains aboard with eight other companions. You have a decision to make now: you can remain on Tahiti knowing that it will probably be the first place the Royal Navy looks for you and your companions (if they look for you) or you can join Christian in sailing into the unknown to find the most obscure island possible, knowing you will probably never see England again.", "action_results": [{"action": "Remain on Tahiti", "result": "You remain on Tahiti and in the autumn of 1789 you watch the Bounty sail away for the last time. There is little left to do now but settle down to living among the Tahitians and hope that the first ship to visit the island will be a friendly one. Like many of the Mutineers you get into a long-term relationship with a beautiful Tahitian woman and enjoy long days spent relaxing on the beautiful island and nights of hard-drinking and partying with the locals. Seven months after the Bounty leaves violence erupts, threatening to destroy your peaceful existence.\n\nThe problem is Matthew Thompson, a middle-aged and brutal man who alone out of all of you doesn\u2019t have a romantic partner as the Native women avoid him. One day there is chaos in the village and you learn that Thompson, drunk on strong spirits, has tried to rape a Tahitian woman but was fought off when her screams brought her brother and other men running to her aid.\n\nYou go out of your hut and walk towards Thompson\u2019s, as do several of your companions, to find him outside his hut shouting at a small crowd of angry Tahitians to go away. He has a musket in his hands and without warning he raises it and fires it at a man. The bullet passes through a baby the man is holding in his arms and into his chest, killing them both. Reversing the musket Thompson swings it in a wild arc, cracking a woman in the head and knocking her unconscious to the ground. The rest of the crowd flees.\n\nThompson sensibly flees to the shoreline, steals a canoe and paddles away to a small nearby island called Taiarapu. The rest of you have a meeting with the Tahitians where you emphasize that Thompson\u2019s actions had nothing to do with the rest of you and you all condemn his cruelty. The Tahitians accept your explanations, largely because Quartermaster Charles Churchill has been adopted by a local chief and is gaining considerable status among the Natives.\n\nAfter some talk you decide on what to do: you will send a messenger to Thompson telling him he can safely return to Tahiti and when he comes back one or two of you will steal his muskets and cutlasses from his hut and give him no more to prevent him doing anymore harm. It is a risky thing to do as Thompson is a violent man but Churchill volunteers for the task.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Churchill in stealing Thompson's weapons", "result": "You send a Native to Thompson telling him all is forgiven and he can return and a suspicious Thompson dutifully returns to Tahiti. About a week after his return when Thompson is elsewhere you and Churchill sneak into his hut, take his weapons and hide them in your own huts. Thompson is absolutely furious when he discovers the theft unfortunately for you a Native man with a grudge against Churchill tells him who stole the weapons.\n\nYou are standing talking to Churchill one day when, without warning Thompson, comes up behind you and shoots you in the back of the head with the musket he has recovered from your hut. You fall instantly dead to the ground and a moment later Thompson shoots and kills Churchill with a second weapon. It might be some consolation for you that your Tahitian friends avenge your death and beat Thompson to dead with rocks later that same day.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay out of the whole business", "result": "You all send a Native to Thompson telling him all is forgiven and he can return and a suspicious Thompson dutifully returns to Tahiti. About a week after his return when Thompson is elsewhere Churchill sneaks into his hut, takes his weapons and hides them in his own hut. Thompson is absolutely furious when he discovers the theft and unfortunately a Native man with a grudge against Churchill tells Thompson who stole his weapons. Thompson recovers his musket, walks up behind Churchill one day and shoots him dead.\n\nThompson again flees into the jungle interior and again you all meet to decide what to do. The Tahitians are furious over the death of their friend and intend to tell Thompson all is forgiven before jumping on him and beating him to death with rocks. It is a cold-blooded plan.", "action_results": [{"action": "Warn Thompson about it", "result": "You hurry out of the village to warn Thompson of the Natives\u2019 intentions but you are spotted. Quickly realizing what you are intending to do the Natives give chase and run you down after a few hundred meters. A spear stab in the back knocks you down and then the Natives beat you to death with rocks. They then go on and kill Thompson anyway.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay out of the whole affair", "result": "You stay in the village while a large band of Tahitians leave and return later with Thompson\u2019s bloodied and battered body. After the killings of Churchill and Thompson things settle down and the remaining fifteen of you live peaceful lives on this island paradise for one more year. The calm is broken again one spring morning by the terrifying sight of a large Royal Navy vessel sailing steadily towards the island. It anchors offshore and several boatloads of heavily-armed sailors are soon rowing towards shore.\n\nSome of your companions, notably the Bligh Loyalists who were detained against their will, are in favour of surrendering at once while others propose hiding out in the island interior and on other nearby islands in the hope of eluding capture. You know if captured all of you will be taken back to England and tried for piracy: if found guilty you know you will dance on the end of a rope.", "action_results": [{"action": "Surrender to the sailors", "result": "You and three other men promptly surrender yourselves to the first sailors who reach the shore, clapped in irons you are swiftly brought back to the ship where, to your surprise, former Bounty shipmate Midshipman Thomas Hayward is waiting to identify you. You are imprisoned in a makeshift prison on the ship\u2019s quarterdeck and over the next month all of your remaining companions are captured.\n\nYou learn that after the Mutiny Bligh sailed his overcrowded boat to safety and returned to England with eleven surviving companions out of the eighteen who were in the boat with him. He reported the Mutiny to the Admiralty who dispatched this ship, the HMS Pandora, to Tahiti to arrest you all. You and your fourteen companions are questioned on the whereabouts of the other nine Mutineers and the Bounty but you can only tell them that you last saw them sail away in the autumn of 1789.\n\nThe Pandora leaves Tahiti that May and spends the next three months scouring the Pacific for your remaining companions but finds no trace of them. One day the Pandora suddenly runs aground off the Great Barrier Reef. Despite desperate efforts that go on for twenty hours the damage is too severe to be repaired and the ship starts to sink increasingly fast. Finally, in desperation the order if given to abandon ship.\n\nFor a few moments it seems that you and your fellow prisoners will all be left shackled to the quarterdeck to drown but as water washes over the main deck a sailor remembers you all and runs up to unlock your leg irons. He gives the keys to you and orders you to unlock the rest. You have managed to free ten of your fourteen companions when the Quarterdeck vanishes beneath your feet into cold clear seawater. Your remaining trapped companions shout for help.", "action_results": [{"action": "Work underwater to free the remaining men", "result": "Waist-deep in water you wade across the deck and taking a deep breath you plunge underwater to try and untie more leg irons. In the strange underwater world you can barely see and are unaware when the Pandora\u2019s mainmast gives way, breaks and falls on you, pinning you to the deck beneath its vast weight. You desperately try to free yourself but there is nothing you can do: the last bubbles escape your lips and you share the watery grave of the four comrades you died trying to save.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Abandon the sinking ship and swim for one of the nearby boats", "result": "Recognizing it would be suicide to remain on the ship any longer you dive into the sea and wade towards one of the four boats the sailors of the Pandora have succeeded in launching. You are hauled aboard and watch as the last of the HMS Pandora vanishes from sight. It takes with it four of your companions were still manacled to the ship: Midshipman George Stewart and Sailors Henry Hillbrant, Richard Skinner and John Sumner.\n\nTogether with your ten surviving companions you join the other survivors in a three-week open boat voyage, not unlike that Bligh endured two years before) to Coupang in Timor with no mishap. From there you travel on to Batavia on Jakarta and from there take passage aboard the HMS Gorgon, arriving back in England in June of 1792, nearly five years after you left her aboard the Bounty.\n\nIt is good fortune for you that William Bligh is not in England at the moment, having left the previous year to fulfil his mission of taking breadfruit from Tahiti to the slave plantations in Jamaica. Many of your former comrades are in England however and seven (Sailing Master John Fryer, Boatswain William Cole, Gunner William Peckover, Carpenter William Purcell, Midshipmen John Hallett and Thomas Haywood and Seaman John Smith) have been recruited to testify against you and your companions in your trials that August.\n\nFor four of your companions the trials are an easy affair: Carpenter\u2019s Mates Thomas McIntosh and Charles Norman, Armourer Joseph Coleman and Seaman Michael Byrne are acquitted when letters are produced written by Bligh confirming they wanted to join him in the boat but were unable to due to lack of space. For you and six of your companions things look much more dangerous and all of you are keen to argue you took no active part in the mutiny but need to explain your failure to act.\n\nYour companions intend to do this in two ways. Midshipman Peter Heywood, Boatswain\u2019s Mate James Morrison and Seaman William Muspratt intend to claim they were too confused by what was happening to act. Seamen Thomas Burkett, Thomas Ellison and John Millward intend to claim they were too intimidated by the Mutineers and that they intended to recapture the Bounty at a later date if they could find support among the crew. You need to choose which defense line you go with.", "action_results": [{"action": "Too confused to act", "result": "You decide to go with the claim that you were too confused by what was happening to act. Somewhat surprisingly this defense works with the Judges: though sentenced to death you, Heywood, Morrison and Muspratt are pardoned for your part in the Mutiny. Burkett, Ellison and Millward are executed by hanging a few months later. You and your companions all feel the most incredible relief at your very narrow escape, Muspratt is so affected by his brush with death he rarely speaks again.\n\nThe following year Bligh returns to England after a successful voyage which brought breadfruit from Tahiti to Jamaica, only to discover the slaves there would not eat it. He is furious that you and your companions escaped death and writes an account roundly condemning you all. Withstanding his fury you are one of the eight Bounty mutineers that survived to return to England. Not a day goes by when you do not wonder what happened to Fletcher Christian and his eight companions who vanished that autumn afternoon so long ago aboard the Bounty.\n\nYou now have a decision to make: whether you return to the sea or retire to the land. McIntosh, Coleman and Byrne have all already turned their backs on the sea and drifted out of touch while Peter Heywood, James Morrison, Charles Norman and William Muspratt are all intended to resume a life on the ocean\u2019s waves. You need to decide whether you too will retire ashore or return to the sea.", "action_results": [{"action": "Retire from the sea", "result": "The years go by and as you age you read about what befalls your former comrades.\n\nCarpenter\u2019s Mate Charles Norman dies of a disease, probably brought on by his experiences, in 1793. Seaman William Muspratt also dies at sea of a disease in 1797. Boatswain\u2019s Mate James Morrison drowns when the HMS Blenheim sinks in 1807. Midshipman Peter Heywood serves honorably in the Navy for twenty-two more years, retiring from the Navy in 1816 with the rank of Captain. He dies in 1831, his former status as a Pirate and Mutineer hidden behind a long and distinguished service. You live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian.\n\nIn 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action.\n\nJohn Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Return to the sea", "result": "You decide to return to the sea and need to decide where you serve. You can join Midshipman Peter Heywood aboard the HMS Queen Charlotte or you could join Boatswain\u2019s Mate James Morrison aboard the HMS Blenheim or you could join Carpenter\u2019s Mate Charles Norman aboard the HMS Duke or you can join Seaman William Muspratt aboard the HMS Bellerophon.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Heywood", "result": "You serve with Heywood for twenty-two years on various ships, watching him rise to the rank of Captain. You are with him on the Glorious First of June when the French fleet is defeated off Ushant and in the Invasion of the River Plate in 1806. After a long and distinguished service you both retire from the sea in 1816. Fifteen years later your friend dies in London. By that time you have learned what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian.\n\nIn 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action.\n\nJohn Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Join Morrison", "result": "You serve with Morrison in the Navy for thirteen years, Morrison rising to the rank of Chief Gunner. Your long and distinguished careers end aboard the Blenheim one terrible winter\u2019s day in the Indian Ocean when the Blenheim and her accompanying ship HMS Java are caught in a storm while under the command of Admiral Thomas Troubridge. Both ships capsize and sink quickly sending nearly nine hundred men to their watery graves.\n\nThe sea is a cruel and unforgiving mistress.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Join Norman", "result": "You join Norman aboard the HMS Duke but your mutual experiences in Tahiti and the trial have weakened you both. Just three months after joining the ship an outbreak of cholera decimates the crew and both of you quickly catch the disease and weakened. You die of the illness just one year after the execution of your companions and are just one of the several anonymous bodies cast into the sea that day.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Join Muspratt", "result": "You serve with Muspratt aboard the Bellerophon for three years. Your narrow escapes from death have had a great effect on both of you and in all your service you hardly speak a word, just quietly and diligently working together. Cholera spreads through the crew one winter and both of you quickly catch the disease and weaken. You die of the illness just five years after the execution of your companions and are just one of the several anonymous bodies cast into the sea that day.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Too intimidated to act", "result": "You decide to go with the claim that you were too intimidated by the Mutineers to act but the Judges refuse to believe it. You, Burkett, Ellison and Millward are all sentenced to death while Heywood, Morrison and Muspratt win pardons. Your sentences is scheduled to be carried out aboard the HMS Brunswick in Portsmouth Harbour soon after the trial.\n\nOn the scheduled morning you and your companions march out in silence onto the ship's deck. Some of your companions insist on their innocence or beg for mercy but as the noose is slipped over your neck you remain silent. On the word of command all four of you are hoisted into the air and after a few seconds of frantic kicking it is all over: you have paid the ultimate price for your part in the Mutiny on the Bounty.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Hide in the island's interior", "result": "You and most of the others scatter into the island\u2019s interior and hide. You avoid the others, steal a Native canoe one night and paddle to an isolated little volcano jutting out of the sea to the east called Mehetia. You manage to hide out here for nearly a month, surviving on nothing more than rainwater and a few fish you manage to catch in the sea and eat raw, as the island has no vegetation.\n\nEventually, on 16 April a party of sailors lands on the island and searches it in detail, finally finding you hiding under a rock, too weak to resist capture. You are taken aboard the ship where you find you are the last of the mutineers on Tahiti to be captured, the others all having been found at least a week before. You are clapped in irons and secured in a makeshift prison on the ship\u2019s quarterdeck.\n\nYou learn that after the Mutiny Bligh sailed his overcrowded boat to safety and returned to England with eleven surviving companions out of the eighteen who were in the boat with him. He reported the Mutiny to the Admiralty who dispatched this ship, the HMS Pandora, to Tahiti to arrest you all. You and your fourteen companions are questioned on the whereabouts of the other nine Mutineers and the Bounty but you can only tell them that you last saw them sail away in the autumn of 1789.\n\nThe Pandora leaves Tahiti that May and spends the next three months scouring the Pacific for your remaining companions but finds no trace of them. One day the Pandora suddenly runs aground off the Great Barrier Reef. Despite desperate efforts that go on for twenty hours the damage is too severe to be repaired and the ship starts to sink increasingly fast. Finally, in desperation the order if given to abandon ship.\n\nFor a few moments it seems that you and your fellow prisoners will all be left shackled to the quarterdeck to drown but as water washes over the main deck a sailor remembers you all and runs up to unlock your leg irons. He gives the keys to you and orders you to unlock the rest. You have managed to free ten of your fourteen companions when the Quarterdeck vanishes beneath your feet into cold clear seawater. Your remaining trapped companions shout for help.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Sail on into the unknown", "result": "Fletcher Christian sets sail with the ten of you Mutineers, twelve women and six Tahitian men (including three discovered hiding on board) and spends three months trying to find an island isolated enough to avoid discovery. He finally settles on Pitcairn Island, an isolated little island spotted once twenty-three years ago. Best of all you discover the island has been mis-plotted by around two hundred miles making it impossible to find until a ship sailing outside the usual routes actually comes upon it.\n\nYou like the island, a pleasant little grassy spot with a few hills, and begin unloading the Bounty Just eight days after arriving a very drunk Matthew Quintal sets fire to the ship to prevent any of you from changing your minds and leaving. The twenty-eight of you gather on the shore and watch the ship burn and sink beneath the waves. For better or worse you are on Pitcairn Island for good now.", "action_results": [{"action": "A New Life", "result": "Three years pass quietly on the island but a few accidents mar the peace.\n\nSoon after you arrive one of the women falls to her death while gathering eggs from the clifftops, soon after Fletcher Christian\u2019s wife gives birth to the first child born on Pitcairn. The year after a second woman dies of an illness. Previously each of the Mutineers had one female partner each while the six Tahitian men had just two women to have sexual relations with. In the summer of 1793 you and the other Mutineers decide to take the two remaining women from the Tahitian men and give them to John Adams and William Brown respectively, the two men whose wives have died.\n\nTrouble erupts when four of the Tahitians take the two women and go to live elsewhere on the island. You and the other Mutineers give one of the remaining Tahitians, a tough character called Menalee a musket and send him off to kill the leader of the rebellious Tahitians, a man called Talaloo. On the first day of August Menalee finds him and shoots him dead. The following day he is sent off again and kills a second man called Oho. The two remaining men return and for a time it looks like all has settled down: Adams and Brown have their wives and the four remaining Tahitian men seem suitably chastised.\n\nOne day in September you are in your hut when you hear a few gunshots somewhere nearby. You think nothing of it and a short time later you hear more gunshots. You assume someone is hunting. A short while later you hear loud and excited yells followed by even more gunshots and prolonged shouting. You are now growing concerned and step warily out of your hut. You wonder what to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go down and investigate the gunshots", "result": "You stroll down through the village to see what is happening and encounter the four Tahitian men coming the other way. Each are armed with a musket and others weapons such as axes and rocks. You call out to them, asking what the noise was. In response the Natives raise their muskets and fire a volley of shots at you. Two bullets hit you in the chest and knock you down, before you can rise they beat you to death with axes.\n\nYou are one of the six mutineers to die on what will ever after be known as Massacre Day.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Head away from the village and up into the hills", "result": "You wisely flee up into the hills and are startled to meet a panting William McCoy there, he has run all the way from the village after witnessing the Natives shoot and kill his friend John Mills. Soon after you are joined by a breathless Matthew Quintal, who has likewise escaped the village. He has shocking news to tell you, five of your friends: Fletcher Christian, John Mills, William Brown, Isaac Martin and John Williams are dead. Your remaining two companions, John Adams and Edward Young remain in the village, protected by the Native women.\n\nYou and your two unarmed companions remain hiding up in the mountains for two weeks, sometimes receiving messages from your wives still in the village. You learn that Menalee has killed another Native man called Timoa after an argument. Scared of his companions Menalee himself joins you two in the mountains saying he would be safer hiding with you. That night when Menalee falls asleep McCoy picks up his musket and shoots him dead.\n\nThree days later Adams and Young succeed in persuading the Native women they should kill the two remaining Tahitian men Nehow and Tetaheite. Young shoots Nehow in the back of the head while a woman called Susan kills Tetaheite with an axe. Your friends quickly send word to you all that it is safe to come back to the village. There are now five of you men left with ten Native women and a few small children.\n\nPeace returns to the island once more.", "action_results": [{"action": "Alcohol", "result": "Four years pass by peacefully on the island, you live with the women, begin raising a child and live a good life. William McCoy and Matthew Quintal are more restless characters than you, John Adams and Edward Young and McCoy, who once worked in a brewery in Scotland, spends a long time trying to brew alcohol out of various things. He finally succeeds in creating an incredibly strong alcohol from the ti-root and he and Quintal quickly become addicted to it, despite the fact it seems to trigger hallucinations. Adams and Young refuse to drink any.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join in the drinking", "result": "You and McCoy soon develop a heavy dependency on the dangerous drink and have many hallucinations. After one particular bout to celebrate the beginning of 1798 you and McCoy decide in your drunken states that you want to swim back to England. You run to the edge of a cliff and plunge down into the sea below. You disappear beneath the waves forever, victims of the terrible alcohol you have created.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Refuse to drink", "result": "You refuse to drink and it seems a sensible decision, McCoy throws himself off a cliff in a drunken fit of depression, plummeting to his death. With his friend gone Quintal becomes more depressed also, drinking more and becoming more violent. In one incident he bites the ear off his wife Tevarua when she fails to catch enough fish one day. Tevarua, herself a heavy drinker, imitates McCoy in throwing herself off a cliff to her death.\n\nDeprived of his wife Quintal takes another one and when Adams and Young protest Quintal threatens to kill them both. He is now moody and unpredictable and Adams and Young confer with you in a secret meeting and tell you that the next time Quintal is passed out drunk they intend to kill him with an axe. You consider whether to join them in this plot or warn Quintal of what is happening.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Adams and Young in killing Quintal", "result": "That night when Quintal is passed out you, Adams and Young sneak up on him and Adams decapitates him with one swing of the axe. Quintal\u2019s death finally restores peace to the island which lasts another year until Young dies of asthma on Christmas Day of 1800. All that is left now is for you and John Adams to rule over a Pitcairn Island inhabited exclusively by women and children...", "action_results": [{"action": "Discovery", "result": "The next thirty or so years are peaceful ones for you and Adams, raising your many children and taking care of the island. A ship was spotted out to sea in 1795 and another in 1801 but it is not until February of 1808 that an American ship called the Topaz finally visits the island. You and Adams cautiously meet with the sailors who come ashore and finally learn what has happened on the outside world.\n\nAfter the Mutiny on the Bounty in 1789 Bligh and his surviving companions made it back to England and reported the Mutiny. A ship called the Pandora was sent to Tahiti where she captured your remaining companions, while searching for you the Pandora sank off the Great Barrier Reef. The survivors eventually made it back to England where some more of your companions were executed. The search for the Bounty and the rest of you was eventually abandoned.\n\nYou are nervous of what effect the news that you and Adams (after all, still wanted pirates) are living on Pitcairn Island will have but it is not until 1814 that a pair of Royal Navy ships finally visit the island. Twenty-five years after the Mutiny on the Bounty the men aboard report that the Admiralty has decided to grant you both amnesty for your parts in the Mutiny and allow you to continue living on the island. Relieved you continue your peaceful lives.\n\nYour great friend John Adams dies in 1829 at the age of sixty-one leaving you the sole King of Pitcairn Island.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "1 January 1799: Pitcairn Island, Pacific Ocean", "result": "You warn Quintal of what is happening and both of you are on your guard. It doesn\u2019t take Adams and Young long to learn what you have done and a few nights later they confront both you and Quintal with muskets. Before you can defend yourselves your former friends shoot both of you dead, finally bringing peace to the island. They throw your bodies in the sea for the fish to eat.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain aboard the Bounty", "result": "You refuse to have anything to do with such a dangerous plan and the deserters swear you to silence. That evening, while Midshipman Thomas Haywood is sleeping over the arms chest Churchill, Millward and Muspratt sneak into the ship\u2019s cutter and desert. That morning Bligh is furious when he discovers the missing men\u2019s absence, suspecting you and Haywood of being involved he orders you both clapped in irons for a week.\n\nBligh pursues the deserters to Matavai Bay where he learns from Natives that the trio of fugitives traded for a canoe and paddled north in the direction of a small island called Tetaroa. Bligh is set to pursue but the weather turns nasty and for two weeks a storm rages (Bligh has a rage of his own when he discovers the spare sails have rotted into uselessness). Finally, it clears and Bligh sails north to the small island accompanied by dozens of Native canoes.\n\nYou and Haywood are still under suspicion so you are not part of the party Bligh leads ashore which succeeds in recapturing the fugitives without trouble. Between the three deserters Bligh sentences them to one hundred and twenty lashes and steers the Bounty back to Toaroa. By now the crew are all seething with quiet discussion about Bligh\u2019s disciplinary methods and a week after the recapture of the fugitives you are chatting ashore about the matter with Isaac Martin, a good-natured American sailor.\n\nWhile you are talking a Tahitian man wanders over to your boat to have a look, a fairly common occurrence. You both ignore him until the man suddenly grabs an iron hoop that has come loose from a barrel and starts running off. Martin yells at you to get him as you both know Bligh is fond of flogging sailors who let Natives steal things from the ship, no matter how small. You both race after the Native and get close to him but there seems to be no way of stopping him short of violence.", "action_results": [{"action": "Crash-tackle the man to the ground", "result": "You make a flying leap, manage to grab the man\u2019s legs and bring him down. Martin is on him in a moment and as the man tries to squirm free he punches him in the face. This calms the Native who lies there clutching his broken nose while Martin picks up the iron hoop and returns to the boat. You are both feeling rather good about your successful protection of Bounty property until you hear that familiar, hated, yelp from the trees.\n\n\u201cWhat do you infernal creatures think you are doing?\u201d Bligh exclaims running towards you.\n\n\u201cStopping that man stealing our things,\u201d you tell Bligh irritably. \u201cAs you ordered.\u201d\n\n\u201cAs I ordered you insolent cur?\u201d Bligh exclaims. \u201cI also ordered no violence towards Natives, both of you twenty-four lashes each!\u201d\n\nThat evening you are both lashed to trees and whipped by the quartermasters and it is only the intercession of the local Natives, who accept responsibility for the crime, that Bligh reluctantly stops the punishment at nineteen lashes. Regardless, by the time you are cut down you feel completely and utterly exhausted.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Keep running", "result": "You continue to run but Martin springs ahead of you and brings the native down with a fierce punch to the back of the head. Martin forces the hoop from his grip and begins returning it to the boat when you both halt at the sound of a familiar, and despised, yelp from nearby.\n\n\u201cWhat do you infernal creatures think you are doing?\u201d Bligh exclaims running towards you.\n\n\u201cStopping that man stealing our things,\u201d Martin tells Bligh irritably. \u201cAs you ordered.\u201d\n\n\u201cAs I ordered you insolent cur?\u201d Bligh exclaims. \u201cI also ordered no violence towards Natives. You, Martin, twenty-four lashes!\u201d\n\nThat evening you watch angrily as Martin is lashed to a tree and whipped by a quartermaster and it is only the intercession of the local Natives, who accept responsibility for the crime, that Bligh reluctantly stops the punishment at nineteen lashes. Regardless, by the time Martin is cut down you nothing but searing anger and hatred towards Bligh.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Avoid the risk", "result": "You remain with Christian\u2019s work party while Lamb heads off and he returns that evening looking utterly exhausted but grinning from ear to ear. His good feeling lasts until he returns to the Bounty to find an angry Bligh waiting for him.\n\n\u201cImpertinent dog!\u201d he screams in Lamb\u2019s face. \u201cYou think a cleaver is not as valuable as your disgusting perversions? Quartermaster, twelve at once!\u201d\n\nBy now whippings have become so depressingly commonplace that the crew feel nothing but a dull hostility towards Bligh.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain at work on the breadfruit trees", "result": "You know your place and continue to unearth breadfruit trees, pack them carefully into pots and leave them ready to return to the ship. Bligh soon notices Muspratt\u2019s absence and takes his two quartermasters in search of him. They return with Muspratt a few hours later, the latter having to be helped to walk after having received a dozen lashes for neglect of duty. You are tempted to ask him if it was worth it but fight the urge away.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Keep quiet", "result": "Bligh has gone very pale.\n\n\u201cDamn you Thompson for a mutinous dog,\u201d he growls. \u201cQuartermaster, twelve lashes each!\u201d\n\nThe lash is fetched, the blows are landed and another sailor\u2019s back is transformed into ruin. Sullen and muttering the crew return once more to the Bounty.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Think of England and continue guarding the boats", "result": "Steadfast, British and sex-less to the last you resist the temptation of attractive women and stolidly remain in the boats while Adams goes off to try and get laid. You are still in the boat when Christian and his party return. After hearing where Adams is from you Christian laughs and calls him out of the hut, he emerges hastily buckling up his trousers. With many a light-hearted jibe you all return to the Bounty.\n\nBligh is not so amused, when you return he curses Adams for a scoundrel and orders him lashed twelve times for interfering with the Natives. Immediately the previously cheerful mood evaporates and you all stand around stone-faced as Adams is mercilessly whipped .You help him back to his hammock that evening and all around you can hear angry mutterings about Bligh.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Keep dancing", "result": "You continue to dance but moments later Bligh shouts for the music to stop and storms towards the seated men.\n\n\u201cWhy are you not dancing like the others?\u201d he demands.\n\n\u201cIt does not seem like an appropriate time for that,\u201d Brown says quietly.\n\n\u201cDamn you for contemptible rascals,\u201d Bligh cries. \u201cBoth of you will have your grog stopped from now until we reach Tahiti.\u201d\n\nMills glares back at him with a half-smile on his face as Bligh turns, returns to his former position near the helm and orders the fiddler to keep playing. The punishment is a harsh one but not as bad as it could have been: a week later you reach Tahiti.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Let go", "result": "You are not going to get your hands sliced open for a lead and line and you and Williams both release the rope. Like a demented snake it zooms across the deck and over the rail, landing in the sea below with a splash. You are both standing there blowing on your burnt hands and cursing when you hear a familiar high-pitched cry and look up to see Bligh striding towards you both.\n\n\u201cYou incompetent mongrels!\u201d he snarls at you both. \u201cYou think that losing that lead is a small thing? Six lashes each for neglect and dereliction of duty!\u201d\n\nThe lash is fetched again, you and Williams are roped to the mast and the Quartermasters begin whipping you both, drawing blood. Bligh watches emotionlessly until it is all over and then he turns on his heel and returns to his cabin.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay quiet", "result": "You stay silent as Quintal continues to jeer Fryer, who largely ignores him, replying with brief, disdainful sentences. Suddenly you all jump as a bizarrely high-pitched cry rings out from further up the deck and you all glance up to see the comical form of Bligh striding towards you.\n\n\u201cYou infernal scoundrels!\u201d he roars. \u201cHow dare you cowardly rascals show such insolence and contempt for Mr Fryer! Mr Fryer, how came you to permit such a thing to happen sir? Twenty-four lashes sailor to remind you of the proper way of addressing your superiors! Master-at-Arms, fetch the lash! Quartermaster, prepare this man!\u201d\n\nQuintal is seized, the shirt torn from his back and he is lashed to the mast. The Master-at-Arms approaches with the cat o\u2019nine tails and begins flaying Quintal\u2019s back. Soon blood is pouring down his backside and legs as the flesh is stripped from his back but Quintal takes it all in silence. The crew also watch in grim silence until the punishment is complete.\n\n\u201cMay that be a lesson to you all!\u201d Bligh declares.", "action_results": [null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story41.json b/data/scraper/stories/story41.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d9376a --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story41.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=6382", "context": "", "first_story_block": "What a weird dream. There was a policeman, a fireman, a... No, you can't remember who else was in the dream. It is slipping from your memory as you begin to wake up. Perhaps it is the bouncing, shaking and vibrating of your bed that is waking you up?\n\nWhen did you get a vibrating bed? Hang on, are you sitting up? Yes, it would seem so. You must be sitting in bed. Why is you're bed bouncing you about so much?\n\nYour sleepy head falls forwards, and hits something. Hard. Ah, that's good. Sleep again.\n\nHowever, the bouncing, shaking and vibrating causes you to wake up again. You feel so sleepy, so very sleepy. You open your eyes. No, you must still be asleep, this must be some sort of a dream. Trees are flying past you on both sides. The sky is clear and blue. You like the colour blue. It reminds you of water.\n\nYes, lots of water in front of you. It seems to stretch off to the horizon. You like the sea. Perhaps if you keep speeding towards it you might be able to go for a swim?\n\nYou bounce upwards and hit your head on something again. Hard. Time to sleep again.", "action_results": [{"action": "No! I want to wake up - now!", "result": "Maybe it is time to wake up, you think. After all, you'll be late for work if you keep dreaming. Surely your alarm clock will annoyingly start beeping at you soon and wake you up?\n\nMaybe you should turn it off. You sleepily reach about you, trying to find the Snooze button for your alarm clock.", "action_results": [{"action": "You reach out in front of you, trying to push something", "result": "Is your alarm clock in front of you, you wonder? You reach out a shaking hand, and touch something. You feel about. No, this object is round like a pizza. There is a sort of soft bubble in the middle of the plastic pizza. You push it and there is a loud honking sound. What a strange pizza! You do have weird dreams sometimes.\n\nYou smile sleepily. The sea seems to be getting bigger. What was it the man had said? Time to go swimming?\n\nPerhaps you should try something else?", "action_results": [{"action": "You reach down beside your bed", "result": "Perhaps your alarm clock is down low, beside your bed? You wonder again why you are sitting in your bed, but the thought slips away as your hand touches something. It seems to be jutting out beside your bed. You sleepily feel the object. It's is some sort of plastic rod or something. When you pull against it, it seems to move a bit. Weird.\n\nYou sleepily notice the sea is getting bigger. Maybe you're shrinking? You begin to giggle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pull up the plastic rod", "result": "You pull against the plastic rod, but it doesn't move very far. Then your thumb feels a button of some sort on the plastic rod. Perhaps it is your alarm clock's snooze button? You press the button down, and the rod lifts up. As you do so, your dream changes. Now, instead of just bouncing, shaking and vibrating, there is a loud screeching sound, and you feel your seat jerking left and right with the screeching sound. You are now getting a bit dizzy on top of everything else you are feeling.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Reach down at the other side of your bed", "result": "You sleepily reach down the other side of your bed. You hit a wall. That's strange? When did your bed become so thin? And why are you sitting on your bed? The thoughts slip dreamily away as your hand follows the wall, lower, reaching between the wall and your strange bed.\n\nYour hand touches a rectangular object. Some sort of strip of cloth seems to be coming out of the rectangular object. You realise that the cloth strip comes up and presses against your chest, holding you upright against your strangely shaped bed. Now why would it do that?", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Fiddle around with the rectangular object. Perhaps it is your alarm clock?", "result": "You sleepily decide to fiddle about with the rectangular object that the strip of cloth comes out of. Perhaps it is your alarm clock? You find a button and push it. Maybe it's your snooze button?\n\nSomething weird happens. The cloth strip that was pressed against you suddenly slides away. Where did it go? Now you are having trouble sitting in your strangely shaped bed, as nothing is holding you up anymore.\n\nThe sea is looming large in front of you. You realise there aren't any trees flying past you anymore, and briefly wonder where they went.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Examine the wall", "result": "That's odd, you think, looking at the wall beside your strangely shaped bed. You can see through it! Or at least, you can see through part of it. You watch the world fly past you for a few moments, then your eyes begin to focus on what looks like a handle of some sort. Why is there a handle on the wall?", "action_results": [{"action": "pull the handle on the wall", "result": "You look through fuzzy eyes at the handle on the wall beside your strangely shaped bed. Without the cloth strap holding you in place, you keep shaking about, and it is hard to grab hold of it. You notice out of the corner of your eyes that the sea seems to be very close to your strange bed now.\n\nWith a maximum of effort, you manage to grab hold of the handle and pull on it. Suddenly the wall opens up! It swivels away from you, and the next thing you know, you are flung off your bed and through the opening!", "action_results": [{"action": "A near death experience", "result": "As you stike the ground, spinning and tumbling down a steep hill, you come to your senses. You realise that you have just fallen out of a car which was roaring down a steep incline, towards a cliff, looking out over the ocean.\n\nAs the car flies past you, and moments later sails out into the air, you start flailing around madly trying to stop!\n\nBushes and shrubs tear out of the ground in your fingers, and digging your heels into the ground does nothing but cause you to spin around, head first towards the cliff!\n\nHowever, having pulled the handbrake on hard, you managed to slow the car - and yourself - down long enough to give you the time you needed. Your attempts to slow yourself down work enough that when you reach the edge of the cliff, you manage to hook yourself on some tree roots jutting out of the ground.\n\nThe next thing you know, you are lying on your stomach, your head and shoulders jutting out past the edge of the cliff, watching the car strike the jagged rocks far below. You watch in awe as the car crumples and explodes, before being swallowed by the sea.\n\nFor a moment, you just lie there, gasping for breath. Then you slowly, and carefully, back yourself up, away from the edge of the cliff.", "action_results": [{"action": "What is happening?", "result": "Your head is pounding like a terrible hangover, your body is all aches and bruises. What is happening?\n\nYou try to recall your last glimpses of the car. It hadn't seemed familiar to you in any way. Your thoughts hadn't been, \"Oh no! My car is going off a cliff!\"\n\nHad you been driving someone else's car for some reason? You try to clear your mind, but your head feels all foggy for some reason, like you just can't wake up properly. Were you drunk? Drunk and behind the wheel of a stolen car?\n\nOr... Were you drugged. Had someone tried to kill you, push you down a hill and off a cliff?\n\nIt just didn't make any sense! Why would someone want to kill you? You're just a simple... A... A what? What was it you did for a living? You try to think. You can't remember!\n\nWait a minute - who are you? You try to remember your name, but your pounding head seems to drive away any familiar thoughts. Maybe you hit your head too hard. Then again, maybe you were drugged after all.\n\nYou just don't know.\n\nLooking back the way you had come, you see the ground rises up a fair way. There appears to be a road up there, dug into the side of the mountain, and you can see broken and bent railings where the car had crashed off the road.\n\nMaybe you hadn't been pushed down the hill after all. Or was it some sort of setup? You slowly, and unsteadily, stand up and begin the hike up the hill to the road.", "action_results": [{"action": "A winding mountain road", "result": "You are standing at the edge of a winding mountain road. The ground falls away steeply behind you, and rises up sharply on the other side of the road. The road barrier here is bent and twisted, probably from when the car you were in crashed off the road and down to the cliff.\n\nThe wind rustles through your hair, and you look out at the sea, which stretches uninterrupted to the horizon.\n\nWhere are you? You don't recall living anywhere near the sea. Then again, you don't recall where you lived at all...\n\nLooking both ways, you see the road hugs the side of the mountain, until it curves away, disappearing from view.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait for a car, and try to hitch a ride", "result": "You stand about, then feeling unsteady, sit for a while. Surely another car would drive past eventually.\n\nTime seems to stretch on forever. Then, you hear a sound in the distance. An engine!\n\nYou stand back up again, and wait for the car to come into view. A topless sports car comes around a corner in the distance. You begin waving your arms wildly. When the car zooms around the nearest bend, the driver barely sees you, and then the car is passing you.\n\nFor a moment you groan in misery, and then you see the brake lights come on. The car slows down as it begins to go around the next bend, then stops. You hear the driver honk their horn and see a raised arm waving.\n\nGreat, you think, and do your best to hurry along the road.\n\nThe driver is a european looking woman, with flowing black hair and a head scarf. She looks at you over the rim of lowered sunglasses, and her jaw drops.\n\n\"What happened to you?\" she asks with concern, in a strong european accent.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell her you were in a car accident", "result": "You tell her you were in a car accident, and barely managed to escape falling off the cliff. She is astounded, and praises your bravery. Opening her passenger side door, she motions for you to get in.\n\n\"I will take you to St.Mary's. It's a good hospital a few miles from here, in Seneriquez,\" she says.\n\nYou hop in, and do your best to keep your weary, aching body awake. The woman introduces herself as Adonica, and continues to chatter and talk about all manner of things while she drives you to the hospital.You try to listen to what she is saying, but find it hard to concentrate on anything. Your pounding head and foggy mind cause you no end of displeasure.\n\nEventually you come down off the mountain, to a bustling seaside town. The buildings are all whitewashed stonework, with sharp square and rectangular shapes. Driving through the town, everyone has tanned, olive skin. South america? Spain? Greece? You can't help but wonder where you are. All the signage is in two languages, english and something else you don't know.\n\nAdonica pulls into the hospital car park, and helps you to the foyer. You begin to feel dizzy and light headed, and the next thing you know, Adonica is calling for a doctor, and you are falling to the floor.\n\nThe last thought on your mind is this sudden question: You were not in an english country - why is it that when you met Adonica, she spoke to you in english and not a foreign language? How had she known you were english?", "action_results": [{"action": "St. Mary's Hospital", "result": "You awaken to find yourself in a real bed this time. Looking groggily around you, you can see that you are in a hospital ward. A doctor is nearby, reading your chart. He looks up, seeing movement, and smiles at you.\n\n\"Buenas noches, se\u00f1or, you speak the english, si?\" he asks.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Where am I?\"", "result": "\"Welcome, se\u00f1or, to St. Mary's Hospital of sunny Seneriquez!\" he says with a smile, sweeping one hand grandly.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Is this Spain?\"", "result": "\"Si, se\u00f1or, you are in Spain. You did not realise this? You are perhaps forgetting things? You do not have any serious injuries, but you have been under great stress, and many hits to your head,\" he tells you. \"It is not uncommon for the memory problems to arise. You should remember in time. You need rest, se\u00f1or.\"", "action_results": [null, {"action": "\"Has Adonica left? I wanted to thank her.\"", "result": "\"The se\u00f1orita who brought you here? Si, she left a few hours ago. You have been sleeping a long time, amigo,\" he tells you, \"Many hits to your head.\"", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "\"What happens to me now?\"", "result": "\"Rest, and do not worry about the money. The se\u00f1orita who brought you here kindly paid for you before leaving,\" he tells you.\n\n\"Adonica paid for me? But she didn't even know me,\" you are amazed.\n\n\"Maybe you repay the favour sometime, se\u00f1or,\" he winks.\n\nWhy would a complete stranger pay the medical bills for someone, and then leave without a trace?", "action_results": [null, null, null, {"action": "Rest", "result": "You lean back into the soft pillow, and your eyes begin to close. You still ache all over, but they obviously gave you medications. Soon you sleep peacefully.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Inspector", "result": "\"Se\u00f1or, are you awake? The agente de polic\u00eda would like to ask you some questions,\" the doctor says, pulling you from your sleep.\n\nYou sit up, and realise you are feeling much better than before. As your vision clears, you see a policeman at the foot of your bed.\n\nThe doctor leaves you alone, and the policeman walks over to beside you. He looks down at you, a pen and notepad in his hands. He looks at you oddly, as if waiting for something.\n\n\"Can I help you, officer?\" you ask him.\n\nHe gives a sly smile. You feel like you have missed something, but don't know what.\n\n\"I am Manuel de Cordoba,\" he tells you, and pauses. You just look back up at him and he smiles wider. You notice that the smile doesn't seem to reach his eyes.\n\n\"I would like to ask you a few questions,\" he informs you, \"What is your name, se\u00f1or?\"\n\n\"I... I don't remember,\" you tell him.\n\n\"The doctor said you have hit your head many times. How did this happen?\" he asks.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"I don't remember. I have amnesia,\" you tell him.", "result": "You feel a strange sense of suspicion about this inspector. Something doesn't feel right.\n\n\"I don't remember. I have amnesia,\" you tell him.\n\nHis smile widens, showing numerous yellowed teeth. He obviously doesn't believe in brushing his teeth.\n\n\"So, you don't know who you are, or how you hurt yourself. What is the last thing you remember? The doctor mentioned a se\u00f1orita brought you here. Who is she? How do you know her? What is her name?\" he asks aggressively.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Her name was Adonica. She was just someone driving by, who gave me a lift,\" you say.", "result": "\"Her name was Adonica. She was just someone driving by, who gave me a lift,\" you say.\n\n\"So, you never met her before the accident?\" he asks.\n\n\"No, I've never seen her before,\" you tell him.\n\n\"Yet she paid for your medical bills, hmm?\" his grins again, but there is no friendliness in his face.\n\n\"I didn't ask her to. She was just being nice to a penniless stranger, I guess,\" you say. His eyes squint down at you, his lips pressed thinly, then he smiles again and says, \"Thank you, se\u00f1or. We have your picture. If we find out who you are, we will let you know. Have a nice day.\"\n\nWith that, he leaves.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to sleep", "result": "The doctor returns after the Inspector leaves you.\n\n\"You can sleep here tonight,\" the doctor tells you, \"You should be fine to leave in the morning.\"\n\nYou drift off again for a while, aided by the hospital's medications.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Next Day", "result": "The next day you are given a fresh set of clothing, apparently donated by a local church, and a quick breakfast.. The doctor recommends you find a way to Barcelona, and visit the british embassy - as you don't have an american accent. Perhaps someone there can help you?\n\n\"Se\u00f1or! Se\u00f1or!\" the doctor calls out to you as you are leaving the hospital.\n\nYou head back over to him.\n\n\"I forgot, the se\u00f1orita dropped by again this morning before you were awake. She wanted me to give you this,\" he says, and hands you a business card.\n\nThe card tells you she owns an antique shop, apparently located in this town. She was kind enough to pay for your hospital fees - perhaps she could loan you some money, and help you get to Barcelona? Or at least let you use her phone to call the embassy?", "action_results": [{"action": "Finding Adonica's Antiques", "result": "You find a map of the town at a bus stop, outside the hospital. Adonica's shop is only a few streets away, so you do your best to memorize the way there and start walking.\n\nIt only takes about fifteen minutes to get there, and as you round a street corner, you see the policeman, Manuel de Cordoba, stepping out of a shop. You see him look at what appears to be a key, which he then slips into his pocket. Some instinct makes you freeze, and you watch him look about then head off down the street. He didn't appear to see you.\n\nThen you notice the sign above the door he had come out of. That was Adonica's Antiques! You guess the policeman had dropped in on her to ask her some questions about you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go into the shop.", "result": "You walk up to the shop door, and notice a sign hanging in the door's window. It reads: \"CLOSED\".\n\nThat's odd, you think, and then you notice that the door is not shut properly. It is open just a fraction, the policeman obviously not pulling it shut behind him when he left. Perhaps Adonica was not at work yet?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go inside anyway.", "result": "You glance about. No one seems to be paying any attention to you, so you slip inside, closing the door behind you.\n\n\"Hello?\" you call out, \"Adonica?\"\n\nThere is no answer. You soon see why. The woman is lying on the floor near the shop counter, her neck very obviously broken. Her eyes stare up at the ceiling, seeing nothing.\n\nSomething breaks inside of you, some passionate, wrenching emotion that causes you to fall to your knees beside her, sobbing into your hands. You have no idea who Adonica was, but you feel like you have lost someone dear to you.\n\nYou regain your composure, and wonder for a second if you should call the police and tell them about the murder, then the face of the policemand comes to mind.\n\nThat policeman, Manuel de Cordoba - he must have killed her! You knew something was wrong with him the moment you saw him! The villain! The murderer!\n\nMaybe if you were fast you could still find him and follow him. He might lead you to some answers!", "action_results": [{"action": "Hurry outside, and follow the policeman.", "result": "Something strikes you as suspicious about the policeman. You suddenly have the strangest feeling that you might have met him before the car 'accident', somewhere.\n\nYou decide that now you have found Adonica's shop, you can always come back and talk to her later. You begin following after the policeman.\n\nHe walks the streets of Seneriquez for a while, and you begin to think he is walking quite aimlessly. In fact, around twenty minutes later, you swear you are walking down a street he had already walked along earlier. Then, quite suddenly, he slips through the door of a shop and disappears from sight!", "action_results": [{"action": "Look through the shop windows, and see what he is doing.", "result": "You decide to peer through the shop window, trying to appear casual, and see what he is doing. Walking down the street, you find that it is a jewellery store. Looking through the window, you see him head into a back room. Perhaps he is going to slip out the back?", "action_results": [{"action": "Rush into the side alley, and see if there is a back entrance/exit to the shop", "result": "You quickly head down the street, and into the alley beside the shop he went into. The alley bends around the back of the shop, and you see there is a back door. Just as you step around the corner, and see the door, it swings open!\n\nThe policeman, Manuel de Cordoba, who you are beginning to suspect is either a crooked cop, or not one at all, steps through the door. He sees you, and for a moment you both stand perfectly still.\n\nThen he thrusts his hand towards his holster!", "action_results": [{"action": "Run for your life!", "result": "You take a few steps, and hear the cracking retort of his pistol. Something punches you hard in the back, and you begin to fall. You do not know if you reached the ground or not, for everything grows dark with surprising speed.\n\nBetter luck next time! You can't outrun a bullet!", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Tackle him before he can draw his gun!", "result": "With instinctive speed, you throw yourself into action, diving for him. The gun comes out of his holster, but you grab it with one hand, as you tackle him to the ground.\n\nFor a few desperate moments, the two of you roll across the alley, fighting for your lives, and then...\n\nYou hear a muffled 'bang', and he goes limp. The gun went off, and it was luckily not yourself on the receiving end. You kneel beside him, breathing heavily. He is dead. Searching him, you find a wallet, six passports, but no police papers or badge. He also has a thick brown envelope full of local currency, and taped to it, a small numbered key.\n\nYou browse the wallet, and to your surprise, you find it does not belong to the dead man. It most likely belonged to you! It has a british driver's license, with your picture on it! It says your name is Michael Longsley!\n\nYou feel overcome with excitement for a moment. Michael Longsley! You have a name! It doesn't sound familiar to you, but that must be the amnesia. Now you know who you are! You look briefly at the money, you'll count it later. The passports, that could be interesting. It might tell you something more about the dead policeman.\n\nFlipping open the first passport, your emotions drop away. It is a picture of you, and a different name. You open the next passport to find another picture of you, and another name. They're all you! They're all alternate identities! Which one is the real you? Which name is your name? You angrily throw them to the ground, then slowly pick them back up again. They will probably be useful at some point.\n\nYou look at the key, and wonder what it might be for. Then, for no apparent reason, a thought begins to gnaw at you. You remember something about a train station lock-up box. Perhaps the number on the key is the box that it unlocks.\n\nYou look at the dropped gun for a while, wondering if you should take it with you or not. It could be useful to have a weapon, in case you run into more enemies, but then again, the gun would link you to the death of a 'policeman', and that might not be a good idea.", "action_results": [{"action": "Investigate the local Train Station", "result": "You find a bus stop, and look at the town map that shows the bus routes. You find the train station easily enough, and head there. It is an old, small structure, with two lines passing the platforms. You do your best to blend into the crowd, hoping that any other potential enemies had not seen you. It doesn't take you long to find a long wall full of numbered boxes.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try opening the box with the number from the key", "result": "You stand in front of the box, hoping your body will obscure the view for anyone watching, and insert the key. It turns easily, and the box opens. Looking inside, you are surprised by what you find.\n\nYou see a small ceramic bull, about the size of the palm of your hand, and a plane ticket to London.\n\nYou must know something about ancient artefacts, because you are instantly, positively sure that this item is from an archeaological dig, on an island off the south-eastern coast of spain. How you know this, or even why you would know this, is beyond you.\n\nYou also know that it is not a very valuable piece. In fact, you can even see that the piece is damaged. There appears to be cracks in the neck of the bull. Most people would not notice the damage, but somehow your eyes are brought to the cracks instantly. Someone tried quite successfully to mend the artefact, but your expert eyes spot the work right away.\n\nWhy would this lowly artefact be so important? And why the ticket to London? Was someone supposed to take the bull there? You notice a small letter 'A' on a foot of the statuette. Adonica? You know in your heart that the 'A' was carved there by her. You also suspect that the policeman had taken the key from her. That must be what he had been doing at her shop. Something tells you that he would not have left her alive.\n\nWhere to now, you wonder? You have an envelope full of cash. Perhaps you should follow the trail left by the bull and the ticket. Perhaps if you took it to London, following the ticket, you might find more answers. Perhaps there was an antique dealer in London? In fact, the more you think about it, the more you feel you know someone in London who might be interested in the bull, though you can't place a face or a name.", "action_results": [{"action": "Plan to travel by train to France, then by the Tunnel to London.", "result": "Time passes, and landscapes flash by, as you journey across the countryside on the long journey from southern Spain to London.\n\nYour thoughts turn to the last few days, and the trials you have been through. You have a room to yourself on board the train, and look often at the statuette of the bull, whose head was very carefully reattached, presumably by Adonica. A thought nags in your mind, is there more to the bull then merely a skillful antique dealer repairing a damaged artefact? Your suspicions grow, as you wonder if something might not in fact be hidden inside the statuette.", "action_results": [{"action": "Carefully detatch the head, and look inside", "result": "Your curiosity gets the better of you, and you 'borrow' some cutlery from the dining car of the train. A few bends of the fork, a little mashing of the bent fork spike with the thick, flat handle of one of the knives, and you have yourself a handy little tool.\n\nCarefully you work along the crack lines on the bull's neck, following the barely visible grooves, unworking the glue and eventually seperating the head.\n\nThere is indeed an opening in the neck, and the statuette has been hollowed out. Someone has stuffed tissue paper inside as a packing material. You jerk some of it out, and hear a tinkling sound as small shiny objects scatter onto the cabin floor!\n\nLooking down, and carefully picking them up, you realise they are diamonds! Someone had stuffed diamonds inside the statuette.\n\nInstantly some memories come flashing back to you. A smuggling ring, using almost worthless artefacts to slip diamonds into London. The only thing is, you don't know if you were doing the smuggling, or trying to stop it from taking place. What was your part in this scheme? Who were you? A crook? An undercover investigator?\n\nYou stuff the diamonds back into the hollow bull, and plug up the hole in the neck with the tissue paper.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Fireman", "result": "The door to your cabin suddenly slides open. Standing in the doorway is a face that you recognise instantly. An American man, an assassin. He goes by the name, 'the Fireman', a pyromaniac who enjoys blowing things up.\n\nHe grins at you, \"So, the forgetful englishman refuses to keep out of our business, huh? Or perhaps you aren't so forgetful at all? Perhaps you just faked it to get the slip on Cordoba?\"\n\nFear grips your heart. This man is a ruthless, cold blooded killer. You remember him clearly now. How is it you can remember someone else, and not remember yourself? And why would you know a man like this?\n\n\"I want the bull. Give it to me,\" he orders.", "action_results": [{"action": "Behind your back, slip the diamonds out of the bull and into your hand, then toss him the bull.", "result": "You feel a strange sense of calm. Somehow, you know you have been in situations like this before, where your life was at stake - but you also know that you handled them with skill and ease. Feigning fear, you hold the headless bull behind your back, and tip the diamonds out into your hand.\n\n\"Allright,\" you say, \"I don't want any trouble. I really don't know anything about all this!\"\n\nYou stuff the tissue back into the bull's neck, then bring your hand around and toss the bull at him. He looks surprised for a moment, that you are actually giving it to him, and lifts his hands up to catch it.\n\nAs he looks up, momentarily distracted, you lash out with the knife you obtained from the dining cart, stabbing him through the heart. He cries out once, then slumps to the floor. The empty bull lands on the floor, and rolls about harmlessly.\n\nRecognising the Fireman has brought back some more memories. Now the plan makes much more sense to you. Someone has been smuggling diamonds, hidden inside old, nearly worthless artefacts from the isles off the southern coast of Spain. You have dim glimpses of memories, you visiting those sites, even seeing some people packing diamonds into similar artefacts. Adonica then sealed them up. Both Adonica and yourself were clearly involved in the scheme somehow, but why then was Adonica killed, and why were you such a threat to them?\n\nHad you both tried to blackmail them, betray them, or were you undercover cops trying to expose them? You just didn't know. You would have to wait until London to find the answers.\n\nFor now, you hide the body in the cabin's toilet, shutting the door. You quickly wash up the blood on the floor, and prepare to change trains at the next stop, and continue your journey.", "action_results": [{"action": "London Arrival", "result": "You walk around the train station for a while. You thought about it long and hard on the long train journey, what you would do when you arrived in London, but now you are here, you still aren't sure what to do.\n\nYou could try to feel your way about London, see if you find any familiar places that spark any memories. You could call a few antique dealers, and see if anyone seemed overly interested in old spanish island artefacts. You could even try the local police, see if they can work out who you are, or just to tell them about what has been going on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wander around London, trying to find anywhere that sparks memories", "result": "You decide to go for a long walk, take in the sights, and see if anything sparks your memories.\n\nHours later, you see a parking sign that catches your attention. It doesn't stand out, just one of a million stop signs, but for some reason, this particular one makes you stop, stand and stare. You feel a tingling sensation in the back of your head, and know that somewhere nearby is a place of importance.\n\nLooking every which way, you notice a small antique shop. A stylised bull is painted on a window. It bears a striking resemblance to the small statuette's profile. Gold print on the door reads: \"Bruno's Antiques\".", "action_results": [{"action": "Go inside Bruno's Antiques", "result": "You head inside Bruno's Antiques. An old man sits behind the counter, and looks up at you. There is something very, very familiar about this man.\n\n\"Ah, you have come back in one piece,\" he says. \"Last I heard, someone had tried to push you off a cliff. I'm glad to see you are okay, Michael.\"\n\nMichael! He called you by name. Yet... That name somehow doesn't sound right. Perhaps it is your name, or perhaps just another false identity.\n\n\"So, do you have the diamonds?\" he asks you.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Diamonds? What diamonds?\" you say, playing on his knowledge of your amnesia.", "result": "\"Diamonds? What diamonds?\" you say, playing on his knowledge of your amnesia.\n\nHe looks startled for a moment, then say, \"Please tell me you brought the bull! You didn't leave it back in Spain, did you?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"I don't know anything about a bull. Adonica told me to come here before she died,\" you lie, hoping to find out more about the situation.", "result": "\"I don't know anything about a bull. Adonica told me to come here before she died,\" you lie, hoping to find out more about the situation.\n\n\"Damn those fools! I told them to take care of... things down there, I never told them to kill her! The bull was supposed to be brought here to me. Now I guess... Perhaps you could go back to Spain and collect it for me? I'll make it worth your while. You and I, we are good friends Michael, good friends. Do this favour for me, and I will pay you a lot of money,\" he says, and begins pulling wads of cash out of a box, throwing them onto the counter.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Manuel and the Fireman, they both worked for you!\" you accuse him.", "result": "\"Manuel and the Fireman, they both worked for you!\" you accuse him.\n\n\"Everyone works for me,\" he angrily proclaims, \"them, you, Adonica, the others! I paid good money, and I expected good service. Then they said you worked for british intelligence. I didn't believe them, but they tried to take care of you. They tried to kill you - without my permission. I swear, Michael, we are good friends, you and I. I trust you Michael, don't you trust me anymore? Here, let me get you some more money to cover your expenses!\"\n\nHe reaches down behind the counter, for what may be another wad of cash.", "action_results": [{"action": "Is he going for a gun? Try to dive for cover!", "result": "He could be going for a gun! You dive for cover behind some shelves, just in time, as a gun goes off and a bullet smashes an artefact apart beside you!\n\nAs the gun goes off, the door to the shop suddenly bursts open, and six men rush in, guns blazing. Bruno shakes wildly as he is blown away, then collapses lifelessly to the floor.\n\nYou stand up, hands raised in surrendor in case someone is feeling trigger happy, but as you look at them, you recognise one of the men, and suddenly it all comes back to you! The training, the months of undercover work, leading up to your joining the smuggling ring. You are an agent of the British Intelligence services, and one of the men who just came in is your superior officer.\n\n\"Well done, Carlton,\" he says with a grin, while the other men round up Bruno.\n\nJack Carlton! That's your name! You know who you are!\n\nThe day ends back at headquarters, where you show them the diamonds, and tell them tales of your adventures in Spain. You recieve a medal, but of course, you will never be allowed to wear it or show anyone. After all, you are a secret agent, and as far as the government is concerned, you don't really exist.\n\nThey send you off on a holiday, with a nice big bonus, and after recovering, you return to London, ready for your next assignment.\n\nCongratulations!", "action_results": []}, {"action": "No, he wouldn't shoot me. He's going for money. Wait, and hope he gives a way more clues.", "result": "No, he wouldn't shoot me, you think. He thinks I've got amnesia, and he's just going for money. I'll wait, and hope he gives a way more clues.\n\nHowever, you are wrong. His hand comes up bearing a gun, and he fires it without a second thought.\n\nYour last thought is wondering what your real name was. You wish you had died at least knowing who you were.\n\nBetter luck next time!", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"Yes, here they are,\" you say, and hand him the diamonds.", "result": "\"Yes, here they are,\" you say, and hand him the diamonds.\n\n\"Great! I knew someone would get them here eventually,\" he says, \"I'm so glad it was you, Michael. We're good friends, you and I.\"\n\nHe begins counting the diamonds excitedly, still talking, \"I'm sorry about Adonica, I know you were close. Those fools! I never told them to kill her, I just wanted to find out where she had put the diamonds!\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Call some antique dealers, using a nearby phone booth and directory.", "result": "You spend half an hour calling various antique dealers in the region, asking casual questions about selling spanish island artefacts. Not many seem interested in the bull, but two of them mention a shop called Bruno's Antiques. Apparently he might deal in such artefacts. They give you Bruno's phone number, but when you call, there is no answer. Luckily, you thought to grab an address off the second shopkeeper.\n\nThe store is only around a fifteen minute walk from the train station, so you set off to investigate.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "You decide you are probably better off not knowing what lies inside the statuette, and try to relax as you journey to London.", "result": "You put the statuette back in your pocket. You decide you are probably better off not knowing what lies inside the statuette, and try to relax on the journey to London.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Plan to travel by bus to the nearest airport, and fly to London.", "result": "You use the money to purchase a bus ticket to the airport. As the bus pulls in front of the terminal, you notice a large number of police cars nearby. Policemen and obvious plainsclothes officers have converged on the airport.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to slip past the hordes of policemen unnoticed, and purchase a plane ticket.", "result": "You step off the bus, amidst the other passengers, and try to walk past the police unnoticed, into the airport. Things go pretty well. You are able to purchase a ticket using the cash, but a nearby policeman looks at you twice. You suspect you had best hurry.\n\nAs you head for the airplane, you pass through a security checkpoint, where you are required to place all of your belongings through a scanner. Tension begins to build up inside you as you place the bull on the small conveyer belt, and watch it pass through the scanner.\n\nThe security guard's eyebrows raise as he looks at the monitor.\n\nHe says something to you in spanish.\n\n\"English?\" he asks you, \"Please step aside, se\u00f1or.\"\n\nBetter luck next time!\n\nMore police gather to the scene, many of them holding printouts of your portrait. You are led to a small interrogation room, where you soon find yourself charged with smuggling Diamonds, hidden inside worthless artefacts, and put behind bars for a very, very long time. No friends step forward to identify you and rescue you. You manage to remember a few things as the years pass, but they are no help to you at all. For one thing you remember is that even inside the prison, your enemies can find you, and they do. You do not leave the prison alive.", "action_results": []}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Take the gun", "result": "You decide a bit of protection is in order, and pick up the gun. You stuff it into your jacket pocket, then collect the other items: a key, an envelope full of cash, your wallet, and six passports.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, null, {"action": "Wait for the policeman to come back out", "result": "You wait a few minutes, but he doesn't come back out. You feel the tension growing inside you. Perhaps you should do something...", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Change your mind, and head after the cop, Manuel de Cordoba", "result": "You have the feeling that you might have met him before the car 'accident', somewhere. Hurrying down the street, you look left and right at each intersection, trying to catch sight of him. Then you see him! Trying to remain casual and not attract attention, you slow down, and begin to follow him.\n\nHe walks the streets of Seneriquez for a while, and you begin to think he is walking quite aimlessly. In fact, around twenty minutes later, you swear you are walking down a street he had already walked along earlier. Then, quite suddenly, he slips through the door of a shop and disappears from sight!", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"I told you, I have amnesia. I don't remember anything before waking up in this hospital,\" you tell him.", "result": "\"I told you, I have amnesia. I don't remember anything before waking up in this hospital,\" you tell him.\n\nHe grunts non-commitally, makes a few notes on his pad, then smiles again.\n\n\"That is all. We have your picture, if we work out who you are, we will let you know. Have a nice day,\" he says. With that, he leaves.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "\"I was in a car accident on the mountain road,\" you tell him.", "result": "\"I was in a car accident on the mountain road,\" you tell him. \"The car went off a cliff, but I fell out of the car before it went over. I must have hit my head on rocks and branches as I rolled down the hill.\"\n\nHis smile thins, \"So, you remember the car... Being in a car, and it went off a cliff, you say. How fortunate for you that you fell out of the car before it went over. You are a lucky man, se\u00f1or.\"\n\n\"Tell me,\" he says, \"where were you going, in that car?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"I don't know. I don't remember anything before falling out of the car,\" you tell him.", "result": "\"I don't know. I don't remember anything before falling out of the car,\" you tell him.\n\n\"Good, se\u00f1or... It is good that you fell out of the car... Before it went over the cliff,\" he says.\n\nSomething nags you in the back of your mind... Something about a policeman somewhere, but you can't work out what it was...\n\n\"The se\u00f1orita who brought you here. What was her name? How did you know her?\" he asks, leaning down over you aggressively.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Her name was Adonica,\" you tell him.", "result": "\"Her name was Adonica,\" you tell him, \"That's all I know.\"\n\n\"So, you never met her before the accident?\" he asks.\n\n\"No, I've never seen her before,\" you tell him.\n\n\"Yet she paid for your medical bills, hmm?\" his grins again, but there is no friendliness in his face.\n\n\"I didn't ask her to. She was just being nice to a penniless stranger,\" you say. His eyes squint down at you, his lips pressed thinly, then he smiles again and says, \"Do you have anything else to say? Anything that might help with my inquiries?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"No, I don't know anything else, Inspector,\" you tell him.", "result": "\"No, I don't know anything else, Inspector,\" you tell him.\n\nHe eyeballs you for a moment, then leans back and smiles. \"Thank you, se\u00f1or, you have been most helpful. We have your picture, and if we work out who you are, we will let you know.\"\n\nWith that, the Inspector leaves.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "\"Actually, I think it might not have been an accident,\" you tell him.", "result": "\"Actually, I think it might not have been an accident,\" you tell him, \"Someone may have been trying to kill me!\"\n\nThe policeman's eyes widen, and he says, \"One moment.\"\n\nHe pulls a privacy curtain shut around your bed, \"Now we can talk without anyone else hearing. Speak freely.\"\n\nYou begin to tell him about how you felt drugged. You tell him how the road barried where the car had 'smashed' its way off the road and down the hill had looked like someone had just cut it open, rather than a car crashing through it.\n\nHe nods and makes notes, then suddenly his hand comes down over your mouth, pressing hard.\n\nIn your weak state, you struggle, but can not fight him! His other hand goes around your throat, squeezing tighter and tighter! You can't breathe!\n\nIn your final thoughts, you remember the policeman. You remember him saying, \"Time for a swim,\" as someone else injects you with something. You remember him putting you in the car and putting on the seatbelt.\n\nYou remember nothing more.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "\"I'm sorry, I don't know anything about the person who brought me here,\" you tell him.", "result": "\"I'm sorry, I don't know anything about the person who brought me here,\" you tell him.\n\n\"That is a pity,\" he says, looking a bit disgruntled, \"Thank you, se\u00f1or, for your time.\"\n\nWith that, he leaves you.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}, null, null]}, null, null, null]}, null, null, null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Start walking.", "result": "After a while of nothing but the roaring mountain wind, you decide to start wearily walking along the road. It has to lead somewhere, and any form of civilization would do.\n\nAfter an hour or so of walking along the mountain road, the stress and strain of your near death experience catches up with you. You stumble painfully to the ground, beside the road, draping an arm over the railing. Your vision blurs, and you slip into darkness.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Examine the busted road barriers", "result": "Metal posts and railing lines the sea-facing side of the road. Here you can see where your car swerved off the road, crashing through the barrier, and down the hill. You look a bit closer at where the barrier is broken.\n\nThat's strange... There isn't any paint marks scratched off from the car onto the metal. On top of that, you realise there isn't any broken glass on the ground from shattered headlights. In fact, with growing concern, you realise that you can't see skid marks, or anything that would imply a 'crash' through the barrier. It almost looks like someone just cut a section of railing off, and bent the edges.\n\nOnce more, you wonder if your 'accident' was no accident at all.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}, null, null]}, null, null]}, null, null]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story42.json b/data/scraper/stories/story42.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4299683 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story42.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=12165", "context": "", "first_story_block": "\"My dear, you know if I could stay, I would. But they need me out there!\" Isaac, your betrothed, squeezes your hand gently as he tries to soothe you.\n\n\n\"But I need you too! I need you here with me!\" You scream at him, unwilling to accept that all too soon, he will be going off to fight in a war and may never return.\n\n\nIsaac strokes your cheek gently. \"My love. I will return. And when I do, we'll get married, just like we planned before all this started.\" He leans down and kisses your forehead gently. \"I love you.\"\n\n\nHe walks off toward the other soldiers. You're not quite sure if he hears you as you whisper your last words of parting to him.\n\n\n\"I'll wait for you...\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "You sit up abruptly and pull your sheets securely around your chest. It was just another dream about Isaac's departure, you realize. You've been having a lot of those lately, even though it's been two months since he left. You haven't heard anything from him since about a week and a half after he arrived at his destination. It was nothing particularly heartwarming. Just a letter to say he was alive and would write soon. But he never did. He couldn't be dead, though, you think. Surely, someone would have informed you by now.\n\n\nSuddenly, you hear a knock at the door, interrupting your thoughts. You really don't feel like getting up. You didn't sleep well last night. On the other hand, it could be the mailman with a letter from Isaac.", "action_results": [{"action": "Answer the door", "result": "It is the mailman, you realize with excitement after opening the door! But he doesn't have a letter from Isaac. It's a letter from the man who runs the factory where Tyson, Isaac's younger brother, works. Tyson had apparently been injured while working the assembly line. He was badly hurt and had nowhere to go. So they were sending him to you. No questions asked. He needed to be taken care of, and you were the only likely candidate for the job. Real doctors were much to busy taking care of injured soldiers to devote their time to a young man who couldn't even fight their war.\n\n\nTyson had broken some bones in his right hand when he was fifteen, and because the injury was never treated, they did not heal properly, resulting in partial loss of the functions in his hand. Therefore, he was useless, except to sit in a factory all day, producing weapons.\n\n\nNo one ever let him forget how his injury affected his daily life and his ability to be useful. They would constantly make him miserable, taunting and teasing.\n\n\nBut not you. He saved your life. You never believed he was useless...", "action_results": [{"action": "5 Years Earlier...", "result": "You were fourteen years old. It had already been a year since the accident when Tyson broke his hand, but he was still having trouble getting used to the fact that he didn't have full control over it.\n\n\nYou were walking along the beach one afternoon. You knew Tyson was at the top of a hill not far from the shore, watching you. There were signs of a storm coming in, but you didn't care. You wanted to be alone. You're father had just died, leaving you with only an aunt to take care of you.\n\n\nNaturally, you didn't notice (or maybe you just didn't care) when a huge wave came up the beach straight towards you. You had never been a strong swimmer, so when the wave dragged you into the raging ocean, you pretty much gave in.\n\n\nBut Tyson would not allow you to be stolen so easily. The next thing you knew, you were being carried out of the water in his strong, muscular arms. \"Stupid, stupid girl...\" He crooned gently as he stroked your hair. You weren't sure, but you thought he might've had tears in his eyes.\n\n\nHow do you thank someone for just saving your life?", "action_results": [{"action": "Kiss him", "result": "You were so overcome with emotion, you barely had any time to think before you reached up and gently pulled his face towards yours. Your lips met tenderly, and a small gasp of surprise escaped his lips. But he recovered and realized what was happening. He kissed you with a gentleness you weren't certain you knew existed. He ran his fingers through your hair and whispered \"Stupid girl\" against your lips as he pulled away.", "action_results": [{"action": "Present Day", "result": "It's not long before a few men arrive at your door, hauling the injured Tyson. You lead them into the house and to an empty guest room where they lay him out on the bed. As soon as they have him positioned comfortably, they are on their way.\n\n\nYou realize that Tyson is drifting in and out of a state of consciousness. You do everything your mother taught you to do when you were young to treat an injury like Tyson's. All that's left to do is wait.\n\n\nSo you hold his hand and sit patiently.", "action_results": [{"action": "2 Hours Later...", "result": "\"Where am I?\" Tyson's eyes are open, and he's looking around like a lost child.\n\n\n\"It's ok, Tyson. You're safe here with me.\" You gently stroke his hair as he takes in his surroundings.\n\n\n\"Did you save my life?\" He asks. You suppose he could've bled to death, but you weren't necessarily the one who saved him. \"Can I thank you for saving my life... like you thanked me?\"\n\n\nObviously a reference to the incident five years earlier. You two never talked about it - or the kiss - since it happened. But you were certain that's what he'd implied.\n\n\nHe wants to kiss you. Do you let him?", "action_results": [{"action": "Yes", "result": "He's injured. You don't feel as if you can refuse him. So you nod your head and lean close.\n\n\nHe gently reaches towards you, even though he clearly has pain in his arm, and pulls your face the remaining distance so your lips meet. You realize this is the first time the two of you have kissed since that day.\n\n\nHis lips are warm and soft against yours, not tainted with seawater as they were last time. He strokes your cheek gently as his mouth refamiliarizes itself with yours.\n\n\nThen suddenly, you pull away as if remembering something. You're engaged to his brother. For all either of you know, he may not be alive. But you are his. And you wouldn't betray his brother... Would you?\n\n\n\"Thank you.\" He whispers softly, as he closes his eyes to rest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "When Tyson wakes up a few hours later, you sit next to his bed. You have prepared a meal for him, realizing he must be starving. He sits up carefully, wincing in pain as his injuries are once again agitated.\n\n\n\"Be careful.\" You say gently, resting your hand softly against his chest.\n\n\nHe looks up at you and sighs. He has an odd expression on his face, but you can't decide what he might be thinking about. \"Well, nurse,\" he says, his expression returning back to normal, \"I hate to be a bother, but I'm really rather famished.\"\n\n\n\"Right. Here you go.\" You lift the plate out towards him, and he struggles to obtain it, his injuries obviously causing him extreme discomfort.", "action_results": [{"action": "Offer to feed him", "result": "His pain is too much for you to bear. Your hand instantly retracts, removing the dish from Tyson's reach. A distraught look quickly spreads upon his face. \"Why?\" He asks pathetically.\n\n\nYou shake your head. \"I'm going to feed you. Whether you want me to or not. I can't stand seeing you grimace every time you move. So I'll do it.\"\n\n\nYou receive a look of shock in response. Possibly from the fact that you're treating him like a baby, or maybe just because of your extreme air of authority. But he doesn't object.\n\n\nYou scoop manageable bites into his mouth as he lays there helplessly. Every now and then, between bites, he'll send a small smile your way. Probably his less embarrassing way of thanking you for playing the role of his mother.\n\n\nAfter you've fed him the last of his meal, you stand to go wash his dishes. But before you have time to make it a step away from Tyson's bed, he snatches your hand and sends an audible groan of agony through the room.\n\n\nHe had his purpose in mind, however, so as you stand there with a worried look on your face, he draws your hand towards his lips and plants a delicate kiss on your wrist. \"Thank you.\" He whispers for the second time that day.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tyson's Progress", "result": "It's been several weeks since you've taken Tyson into your home. You realize you enjoy his company, not having previously noticed just how lonely you were. He seems to be getting much stronger, though he still hasn't left his bed a single time.\n\n\nOne afternoon, you enter Tyson's room to check on him. You see him struggling to stand on his own. When it appears that he's about to topple over, you rush to his side to support him. However, rather than accepting your assistance, he gently shoos you away. \"No. I have to do this on my own.\" He says with determination. Then he adds more softly, \"I can't always have you all to myself.\"\n\n\nYou stand back and give him space. He has trouble at first getting readjusted to the use of his legs. He still has some residual discomfort, but most of his pain is gone. Soon, he's walking about the whole room on his own.\n\n\n\"I want to go for a walk with you. Get some fresh air, see the sky. It'll be good for me, I think.\" He looks at you hopefully.\n\n\nShould you go and risk his injury, or tell him to wait till he's fully recovered?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go for a walk", "result": "You carefully lead Tyson out of the house. He blinks a few times, his eyes readjusting to the bright sun he hasn't seen in forever. \"Where to?\" You ask.\n\n\nTyson thinks silently for a moment, then turns to you with a grin. \"I think I know just the place.\" He takes your small, soft hand in his firm, yet gentle, grasp.\n\n\nThe two of you walk in comfortable silence for a while until you realize where he's leading you. Just below the hill where the two of you now stand, you can see the beach. Not just any beach. The beach where Tyson saved your life five years ago.\n\n\nHe leads you down the hill, then turns to you with a bashful expression. \"I figured now was as good a time as any to talk about what happened that day.\" He presses your hand firmly over his heart. \"You must know I had certain... feelings for you. I don't honestly know that I would've jumped in a raging ocean for just anyone.\"\n\n\nYou feel a wave of heat cross your face. You suppose you probably had figured that out by now, you just never wanted to consider the implications of what had occurred that day. Even back then, it was a known fact that Isaac had claimed you. You begin to wonder if you ever gave Tyson a fair chance.\n\n\n\"I'm not asking you to come out and say you've always secretly been in love with me. But... I do hope that maybe you'll start to consider - truly consider - how you feel about me.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Time Goes By...", "result": "You and Tyson spend much time together as the days pass. It soon becomes evident that he must leave soon, as he is almost fully healed. You realize that this thought suddenly makes you feel sad and lonely.\n\n\nOne night, you enter Tyson's room to check on him. He had recently been having trouble sleeping, so it became your nightly ritual to hold his hand and tell him stories until he fell asleep.\n\n\nWhen you reach his bedside, you see Tyson looking up at you in the dim light, a sad expression on his face.\n\n\nA wave of concern washes over you. You sit on the edge of his bed and reach for his hand. \"What's wrong?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"I just... I love you so much!\" He squeezes your hand to convey the urgency of this revelation. \"I want you, all to myself, for the rest of my life. It's not fair that he's so lucky!\"\n\n\nYou are shocked by his outburst. His proclamation of love was the last thing you expected. You sat in silence, unsure how to respond.\n\n\n\"Well? Say something!\" You hear the overwhelming desire in his voice as he demands a response. \"I need to know. Please. Do you love me? Could you ever learn to love me?\"\n\n\nHow do you respond?", "action_results": [{"action": "\"I do love you.\"", "result": "\"Do you really?\" With the aid of the moonlight streaming in through the window, you are able to see a smile quickly spread across Tyson's face. \"Oh, my love!\" He pulls you to him and presses his lips to yours. You feel a wave of heat wash through you as he run his hands through your hair.\n\n\nYou realize this is the first time he's ever kissed you without that gentleness he usually treats you with. He has replaced that gentleness with a hunger and passion that you find alarming, yet alluring.\n\n\nTyson gently eases you down on his bed and pins you beneath him. He sends fiery trails of kisses up and down your neck, along your jaw, and returns to your mouth, uttering vows of love against your lips. He breathes heavily as he runs his hands over your body and continues kissing you as if the world will end tomorrow. \"My love... oh, how I've wanted you for so long!\"\n\n\nBy the early morning, you realize two things: First, you have just given yourself to Tyson. And second, you broke your promise to Isaac...", "action_results": [{"action": "The Dilemma", "result": "It has been three months since you and Tyson consummated your love for each other. You realize that there is no way to hide your affair from Isaac, if he returns.\n\n\nYou are pregnant.\n\n\nTyson returned to the factory two short weeks after your night of bliss. You haven't seen him since, but he's always sending flowers and writing to you. In his last letter, he informed you that he would be visiting in a week.\n\n\nHe doesn't know you're pregnant yet, but you plan on telling him when he arrives.\n\n\nYou spend the week preparing for his arrival. On the day of his arrival, you hear a knock at the door. You rush to the door, expecting to find Tyson. Instead, you are greeted by the mailman.\n\n\nIt is a letter from Isaac. He is coming home in three days.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Decision", "result": "The instant Tyson sees you, he notices two things: First, he notices the bulge your stomach has begun to form. He is delighted at the implication that he will soon be a father. Second, he notices the look of distress on your face.\n\n\n\"My dear, what's wrong?\" He asks, pulling you close with one hand. His free hand he gently rests on your stomach, right over the spot where his child resides.\n\n\nYou quickly explain to him about Isaac's letter. His reaction is some strange mixture of loathing and triumph. He couldn't stand the fact that, only months ago, you had come close to marrying his brother. But now, you were his. That is what you read on his face.\n\n\nHis response was calm, however. \"It seems to me we really only have two options.\" He states matter-of-factly. \"Either we stay here in hopes of reconciling with Isaac, or we run. Stay away for a few years. Long enough for him to get over losing you. We leave him a letter informing him of us, but don't tell him where we'll go. It's up to you, though.\"\n\n\nWhat will you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay", "result": "You tell Tyson you think it would be best to try and reconcile with Isaac. Tyson agrees to stay with you to await Isaac's arrival.\n\n\nDuring the few days you two have alone before Isaac's arrival, you dreamily discuss the sort of life you will have together with your child. Tyson is constantly sneaking glances at your stomach, giddy with excitement of your child's arrival.\n\n\nThe moments you don't spend discussing your future, you spend with Tyson's lips pressed passionately against your skin.\n\n\nBut all too soon, Isaac arrives...", "action_results": [{"action": "Isaac's Arrival", "result": "It doesn't take long for Isaac to guess at your current relationship. Between the less than enthusiastic greeting he received, and the fact that you're obviously pregnant, he knows he's been betrayed.\n\n\n\"You! You traitor! How the hell could you do this to me?! How could you do this...\" He gestures at your stomach. \"...to her?!\" His rage has caused his face to turn bright red. \"You've made her into your plaything! She's no better than your common whore! My love, you've stolen her and her innocence!\"\n\n\n\"Isaac, you can't always get everything you want! But then, you've never been good at sharing...\" Tyson is clearly angered by Isaac's accusations and insults towards you. He shows remarkable restraint.\n\n\n\"No. No, I haven't. But... If I can't get what I want, then neither should you!\" He draws his handgun from his pocket. Of course he would be in possession of a gun. He just returned from war!\n\n\nWith barely so much as the blink of an eye, he snaps his gun towards Tyson.\n\n\nYou know how this will end.\n\n\nWithout thinking, you position yourself in front of Tyson right before the bullet reaches him. Instead, it plants itself firmly in your pregnant body. You fall backwards and are caught in Tyson's arms. He screams profanities at Isaac.\n\n\n\"Stupid, stupid girl...\" He says, stroking your hair, tears streaming down his face. He leans down and sends a gentle shower of kisses down upon your forehead. \"My love... My stupid girl...\"\n\n\nYou take another ragged breath. You cup his face gently in your hands.\n\n\n\"Now we're even...\" You whisper softly, before fading away.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Run", "result": "You and Tyson decide that the best option is to run. You take your most important possessions with you and leave a long letter of apology for Isaac.\n\n\nYou and Tyson are married not long after your departure. For months, you constantly wonder how Isaac is. You don't regret choosing Tyson. No, you love Tyson. You only wish you hadn't been forced to hurt Isaac in the process.\n\n\nJust as you are settling into a comfortable routine with Tyson, you receive terrible news.\n\n\nIsaac has killed himself.\n\n\nYou don't question his motive. You know, without a doubt, it was because of you. Because he loved you. Because, not only did you betray him, but his brother betrayed him as well. You mourn his death for the months that lead up to the birth of Tyson's and your child. The baby is a healthy and handsome boy.\n\n\nYou and Tyson decide to name him \"Isaac.\"\n\n\nYou and Tyson have two more children several years later. Another son, Bryce, and a daughter, Lila.\n\n\nYou and Tyson live happily together for many years. And every night before bed, he kisses you softly and whispers in your ear, \"Thank you.\" And you know exactly what he means. Thank you for looking past the partial disability in his hand. Thank you for taking care of him when he was injured. Thank you for confessing your love that day, so many years ago.\n\n\nBut most of all he was saying \"Thank you for giving me so many years of happiness and a beautiful family.\" Or, put more simply, he meant: \"I love you.\"", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"I don't love you.\"", "result": "\"Of course not! I've been a fool to even think I could win your heart. It was always Isaac. He was older. He was stronger. His hands were undamaged. He was going places! How could you ever love me?\" Tyson looks away, hurt and anger spreading on his face.\n\n\n\"Tyson, no. It's not like that at all! I just...\" You're at a loss for words.\n\n\n\"You just what? Tell me! Please! I'd love to know!\"\n\n\n\"I don't know, ok? I don't know...\" You're starting to tremble.\n\n\nTyson notices your trembling. His voice becomes gentler. \"Kiss me. Really kiss me and tell me you don't love me.\" He quickly leans toward you and wraps his arms around you, pulling you up against him. He covers your mouth with his and kisses you hungrily. His fingers trail up and down your body. His mouth never stops. His lips are on your neck, trailing along your jaw, and back on your mouth.\n\n\nAs if suddenly realizing he needs to breathe, he stops, still holding you, and comes up for air. \"Do you love me yet?\" He breathes heavily.\n\n\nThat's when you know your answer, once and for all.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"I'm sorry, I can't.\"", "result": "Tyson's face suddenly draws a blank expression. He had expected this response, but he was obviously hoping you'd changed your mind. He gently pushes you away. \"Please. Leave.\" His voice cracks.\n\n\nYour heart breaks seeing him this way. \"Tyson, I-\" He cuts you off.\n\n\n\"No. I don't want to hear it. Just go!\" His voice rises.\n\n\nWhen you wake the next morning, you realize Tyson is gone.", "action_results": [{"action": "One Year Later...", "result": "Isaac had returned from the war three months after that night when you refused Tyson. You and Isaac were married in a simple ceremony.\n\n\nYou were glad you decided to wait for Isaac. You loved him dearly, and it seemed as if not seeing you for so long had made him somehow more affectionate.\n\n\nYou were, however, sorry for the pain you caused Tyson. By this time, Tyson had become an infamous drunk. He was known for taking many women into his home constantly. More interesting was the fact that it was noted that he preferred a certain type of woman's company. And when this type of woman was described to you, the description sounded remarkably like you.\n\n\nYou were certain it wasn't a coincidence.\n\n\nYou and Isaac were soon expecting your first child. Isaac was out working one day. That's when the contractions started. You needed someone - anyone - there with you.\n\n\nAnd that's when he showed up. Tyson. You looked at him with utter surprise and disbelief evident on your face.\n\n\n\"I'll always be here for you.\" That was all he said. That was all he needed to say.\n\n\nBy the time Isaac got home, Tyson was long gone. In his place was a beautiful baby girl.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "\"I think I always have.\"", "result": "Tyson smiles, his eyes shimmering in the moonlight streaming in through the window. \"I hoped so! Oh, my love!\"\n\n\nHe recovers instantly from his previous lack of breath. He instantly begins trailing kisses along every inch of your exposed flesh. His hands are restless. He wants more.\n\n\nYou suddenly realize you are willing to let him have more. He can have all of you, if that's what he wants.\n\n\n\"Do you want me?\" Your whispers are intoxicating.\n\n\nTyson nods his head, breathing raggedly against your skin.\n\n\nIt is well into the morning when you realize you have just broken your promise to Isaac.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay inside", "result": "\"Tyson, dear, I think that's a bad idea. I don't want you to get hurt. You're not strong enough to walk such great distances yet.\" You don't want to risk Tyson getting hurt all over again. You just hope he doesn't think you're being too controlling.\n\n\nTyson tries desperately to stifle a grin. \"You do care about me, don't you?\"\n\n\nYou blush fiercely. \"Well, of course. I've known you for as long as I can remember. Why wouldn't I care about my friend?\"\n\n\n\"Oh, is that all? Are you sure I'm just a friend? You've never once wondered what it would be like to spend the night with me?\" He asks in a seductive tone. He winks at you and steps closer.\n\n\nYou're blushing again. It's rather obvious. Tyson laughs and moves back a step. \"You're so cute when you're embarrassed.\" He says smiling. Then his expression turns serious. \"I'm not going to lie, though. I've wondered...\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Watch in silence", "result": "You watch as Tyson struggles to position himself to eat. He makes slow progress in trying to feed himself. Every movement causes a flash of pain to course through him.\n\n\nYou would do anything to alleviate his pain, however, you don't want him getting the wrong idea. So instead, you wince as you watch him suffer.\n\n\nWhen he's finally finished, he looks at you pathetically. \"You are a wonderful cook. I only wish I could've enjoyed your meal under more favorable circumstances.\"\n\n\n\"I'm so sorry! You look miserable!\" You whine sadly.\n\n\n\"No, no, darling. It's alright, really. I'm going to be honest. I don't mind it so much.\" He reaches out to take your hand and groans in pain. \"I don't mind because I get to be with you.\" He gently kisses your wrist.\n\n\nYou have difficulty suppressing a smile.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "No", "result": "\"Tyson... I'm sorry. We shouldn't. Isaac...\" You trail off.\n\n\n\"No, I'm sorry. I shouldn't have asked. I just... I've been wanting to kiss you again so badly ever since that day. But you were always his, weren't you?\" He looks away sadly.\n\n\n\"Tyson...\" You reach for his hand, but he pulls away.\n\n\n\"No, it's ok. I'm fine with it. I'm sure you two will be very happy once Isaac gets back. You'll get married, have his children, grow old together... But. Remember what I said, ok? Because I meant it. I'll always be there for you, even if you don't want me.\"\n\n\n\"Thank you.\" You whisper as you rise to leave. \"Get some rest, alright?\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"Thank you.\"", "result": "Tyson looks somewhat disappointed. You're not quite sure what he was expecting to happen, but he nods his head and smiles. \"You know you don't have to thank me. I'll always be there for you if you need me.\" He strokes your cheek gently.\n\n\nSuddenly, without warning, Tyson leans his face close to yours and kisses you gently on the lips. When he pulls away, he's blushing.\n\n\nYou stare at him in shock. \"Sorry. I couldn't help myself.\" He shrugs casually but says nothing else as he walks you home.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story43.json b/data/scraper/stories/story43.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..87b6326 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story43.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=49200", "context": "", "first_story_block": "You thrust a final time, your ragged cry of release filling the air and startling a pair of birds overhead. As they wing away you clutch Mondy to you, whispering, \u201cThank you,\u201d and kissing him passionately as the scarlet leaves overhead drift down onto his golden hair.\n\nThese last couple of years have been hell. The two of you had your love put to the test more than ever before. It\u2019s been utterly draining--physically, emotionally, financially--but as you look into Mondy\u2019s eyes you know it was all worthwhile, and you know he feels the same. Such a warm feeling of peace and joy suffuses you, and you can\u2019t help but kiss him again.\n\nDays drift by, careless and lazy.\n\nThe two of you spend the evenings fishing, and during the day you glean whatever you can find from the overgrown fields. Mondy is still in recovery from his long illness and a bit weak, so the bulk of the work falls on you. Not that you mind. The days are quiet and peaceful, and it\u2019s a joy just to be alive as you greet each sunrise, your love at your side.\n\nIt\u2019s really just the two of you out here now; there were only a handful left in the village after the sickness came, and since then they\u2019ve all packed up and left. No future out here. You heard those words often enough, even in your younger days, and there was even a time you believed it.\n\nAnd of course, there were uglier words.", "action_results": [{"action": "Days past", "result": "The first meeting with Mondy came while dropping off a necklace of your mother\u2019s. The clasp needed repairing, and he was still a jeweler\u2019s apprentice then. You\u2019d always been considered eccentric, and Mother had stopped bothering to ask you when her dear boy Mirk was going to find a nice girl and give her a grandchild long ago. You\u2019d expected you\u2019d die alone, and a virgin, if you were being completely honest with yourself. But when you met Mondy...there was a spark between the two of you immediately, and before long it lit a bonfire in your heart.\n\nThe two of you had never tried to hide your love.\n\nAt first, when you and Mondy pledged yourselves to one another under the tree on the hill, and then again in the village square, the others had been...accepting enough, even if a few of them clearly thought the both of you mad. But your mother had given you her blessing, and took Mondy into her heart almost as a second son, and that was the most important thing.\n\nNear the end, however, things changed. Personally, you blame the priest. Or perhaps it was the sickness weighing so heavily on everyone\u2019s souls that turned them twisted and cold. But the looks grew darker. The whispers grow uglier, and then stopped being whispers at all. They said the love you shared was an abomination. The priest stood in he doorway of the church and thundered that a demon had poisoned your mind.\n\nAny of that, all of that...you could have borne without complaint, and gone on about your life. Mondy\u2019s love was all you needed. But when your mother lay on her deathbed, and her last words were begging you to leave the man you loved? It broke something inside of you.\n\nAfter her funeral you and Mondy had a long talk...a long cry, really, on your part. There was never a question of you leaving him, of course. For your mother to even suggest it felt like a betrayal, though you knew she wasn\u2019t herself. She was weak, ill, just like Mondy had been, and being quite old and frail as well her mind had easily been poisoned against you.\n\nBut the two of you knew when you were no longer welcome, retreated from life in the village, and moved to a cottage on the other side of the hill. Eventually, the others all left. \u201cGood riddance to that lot,\u201d you\u2019d muttered to Mondy, watching the last cart being drawn away. \u201cWe can do as we like now.\u201d\n\n\nWhat would you like to do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Look around the cottage", "result": "The cottage--well, it\u2019s more like a shack--has seen better days. And it wasn\u2019t much even back then.\n\nThe fire has gone out, and the only light comes from the gaps in the boards that are now also letting in the icy bite of winter. It\u2019s early for a first frost, and you have a feeling this year may be a bad one.\n\nOpening the pantry, you find nothing but a cloud of dust that drives you into a coughing fit. Sneaking a guilty glance at where Mondy is resting on the bed, you relax when you see you haven\u2019t wakened him. He was sick for so long, on the verge of death, that even now he hasn\u2019t recovered his strength, and you worry constantly he\u2019ll have a relapse.\n\nThere\u2019s no firewood in the box. How long has it been since you\u2019ve replenished it? You really have been letting things slip around here. Perhaps it\u2019s time you start thinking more seriously about what you\u2019ll do in the coming days. To tell the truth, you\u2019re not confident anything about this place will be enough protection in a bad freeze or heavy snow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Walk to your tree", "result": "This tree at the top of the hill--a sugar maple--as a lonely, awkward little boy you would play here, and when Mondy came into your life it was the place the two of you would sit and talk for hours, even before you finally mustered up the courage to say the words that had gone unspoken so long between you. You\u2019ve been calling it \u2018our\u2019 tree for the last four years, whenever either of you speak of it.\n\nYour hand caresses well known lines in the bark; a heart with the names Mirk and Mondy inside. On impulse you pull out your knife and carve it all in deeper.\n\nThe branches are bare now, and the wind up here is quite a bit stronger, and carries a bitter chill. You really ought to find some firewood and supplies. Can\u2019t have Mondy getting sick again.\n\nBelow, you see the abandoned shops and dwellings of your old village, huddled together around the little church you eventually came to hate.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Walk to the village.", "result": "You have such mixed feelings about this place. You grew up here, you knew absolutely everyone and considered them your neighbors and friends. For a while your life was good, even if pretty obviously not going anywhere.\n\nSo much changed in the last couple of years. The sickness emptied the houses and filled the graveyards, and it was like a frost settled in the survivors\u2019 hearts. Everyone became so intolerant and ugly. In the end, you were glad to see the last of them leave. Although the sight of the empty and staring husks of the buildings and the overgrown yards, abandoned now even by the feral cats and the stray chickens you\u2019d happened across in warmer months, will never sit right with you.\n\nYour breath puffs clouds of white fog into the air, and the silence is absolute.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Mother's House", "result": "Rusted hinges give a squeal of protest as you tug open the door, and a lump rises in your throat as you enter and look around.\n\nGrowing up, you had always been close to your mother. She\u2019d never made you feel lacking for not being like quite the other boys, and there was nothing you couldn\u2019t confide in her. Mother had cooked you and Mondy dinner many times over her old cast iron stove and served it at the table with the intricately carved legs that had been a wedding gift from her grandfather, a carpenter, to her own mother so many years ago.\n\nThe stove and table are gone now, like most of the rest of the furniture in the house. Your creditors had gobbled up their due the instant the place became yours.\n\nYou were so ready to remove yourself from village life by then you never did get around to selling the house, though the Lord knows you could have used the money. Mondy\u2019s long illness and recovery had cost you literally everything, and the loss of your mother had come soon after.\n\nShe had taken such care of this house right up until the end, it hurts to see it this way.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search", "result": "In a partially unraveled wicker basket, half hidden behind with a few other odds and ends the debt collectors had found unappealing, you find a neatly folded quilt. It uses the same log cabin pattern as the one she\u2019d given you and Mondy the night you\u2019d moved from here to the place you\u2019d purchased together on the other side of the square. The strips of cloth are more muted in color, but your eyes prickle with tears when you spot the burgundy fabric and tiny white flowers of a dress you remember helping her sew.\n\nThe blanket still smells like rose petals when you crush it to your cheeks, and the material is thick and invitingly warm. It will be a welcome defense against this early winter. You take it with you when you go.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}, {"action": "House of Healing", "result": "If you\u2019d taken Mondy here sooner, would things have happened differently? You thought it was just the flu he\u2019d had at first, and that you could care for him at home. The realization hadn\u2019t sunk in yet just how serious things were going to get, for you or any of the other villagers.\n\nOnce the death bells started ringing and you did bring him in, the healer and her daughters were being run ragged, and so you cared for Mondy yourself. You don\u2019t remember sleeping at all that month, and when the healer told you it was a lost cause, that there was nothing anyone could do and that the priest must be called and that the cot was needed for others, you took him home and continued to care for him yourself. You don\u2019t remember sleeping that next month either, just spending and selling everything you could to bring in anyone, absolutely anyone who might be able to help from the villages and towns all around. Other healers, shamans, veritable witch doctors, and finally the men with the bright little knives and tiny bottles of expensive brews from the capital. You had paid dearly for it all, but didn\u2019t regret it for an instant. Anything to save your love, and in the end you had saved him.\n\nNow he lies beside you in bed every night, and smiles at you every morning, because you weren\u2019t willing to give up. Let the others say what they will, but the love the two of you share is an enduring one that the world can never touch.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search", "result": "You remember candles burning day and night, the wax fused with drops of cleansing lavender oil that hung in the air among the crowded cots, the stench of sickness and death. Lavender is not a scent you care for anymore. But some of the candles are still here in a drawer, and you do need the light. You take them with you when you go.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}, {"action": "Communal Kitchen", "result": "Not everyone had been so well off as to have a sturdy brick fireplace and iron stove of their own like your mother did, and so this had been the place anyone could go to cook their family\u2019s meals, or wash dishes and clothes by the pump out back.\n\nYou and Mondy had come here almost every night for nearly a year, as giddy and fond of each other as any other newlyweds and making the young girls all giggle behind their hands. Both of you were terrible cooks, but you\u2019d been determined to make a go of housekeeping on your own and not rely on your mother aside from her lavish Sunday dinners. Thankfully in this building there were enough veteran housewives around that were happy enough to teach the basics once they realized how utterly helpless you both were.\n\nYet in the end, those who were left hadn\u2019t even allowed you and Mondy to come in here together. Not able to bear subjecting Mondy to their unfriendly stares, you\u2019d taken on the burden yourself, cooking and cleaning in silence and then escaping as soon as possible, trying to pretend like you couldn\u2019t hear the whispers.\n\nThe squeaking and scuffling of rats in a corner draws you from your reverie.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search", "result": "During the sickness and for much of its aftermath, hot stew had been kept bubbling here for those who had nothing else, and rummaging in the pantries in the back you\u2019re able to find some fragments of beef jerky and a small sack of potatoes sprouting all over with pale eyes that never made it into the pot. You take them with you when you go.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}, {"action": "The Old Church", "result": "This place.\n\nYou don\u2019t really have any good memories from here.\n\nAs a boy, the wooden pews were hard and uncomfortable, the scratchiness of your Sunday clothes was a constant irritation, and the priest\u2019s voice droned on and on.\n\nYears later, the old man\u2019s successor would declare you to be under the influence of demons and encourage your neighbors to send Mondy away. He poisoned the mind of your own mother against you. Even now it hurts to think of it.\n\nYou shiver, but not from the winter chill. The coldness you always feel here now has nothing to do with the weather.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search", "result": "On a whim you check one of the pews near the back. Yes, the same loose board is still there in the same place it was when you were younger. You used to sit right behind it and kick at it to annoy the glaring pug-faced little girl who always sat in front of you, whenever your mother wasn\u2019t looking. All these years and they never fixed it.\n\nYou tug at the board, and it comes away in your hand. A sheet of paper flutters out, and you pick it up, noting it appears to be a poem of some kind before stuffing it in your pocket.\n\nThe wood of the board appears quite old and is cracking in places. \u201cHell, wood is wood. I can use this,\u201d you tell yourself. It feels a bit like vandalism, but there\u2019s no one left here, and it turns out to be surprisingly satisfying to break down the rest of the pew until you have a small stack of boards and fragments, enough to keep the fire going tonight. You take them with you when you go.", "action_results": [null, null]}, null]}]}]}, null, null]}, null, null, null]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story44.json b/data/scraper/stories/story44.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e10579b --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story44.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=48393", "context": "", "first_story_block": "You can't remember when the world first started shaking, this little fragile patch of reality with so many cracks and such little support to keep it from breaking apart, but something was always going to give. It was just a matter of time. Nobody knew what really triggered the fall. Was it the breaking of the chains which kept your little quiet island floating in the sky all this time, imbued with the energy which kept it going for so long? Was it the final earthquake that split the lands of the humans, far below your precious little civilisation? Or was it something else?\n\nIt's easy to blame the humans who live beneath you, blame them for every little thing that goes wrong in the world. You're high enough to avoid the worst of the toxic gases that they leak into the atmosphere; you're smart enough to know not to drain the planet of what few resources remain to be cultivated; you're fast enough to hide yourself when they create a multitude of new dangers, unleashing terrors into the wild.\n\nThere is no war here, no government, no violence, no weapons or need to do anything but survive on your own and help each other out. The air is thinner here. Humans find it hard to breathe at this altitude without special equipment of their own. You pity them, but at the same time you admire them for being resourceful enough to create tools enabling them to come all the way up here. Then you remember what had to be sacrificed for such tools to be made, and you no longer admire them so much.\n\nThe island you've lived on for your entire life, along with your family and friends...is beginning to fall.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "The wind howls in your ear as the island plummets towards the ground far, far below. No chains to keep you secure. No energy or power to keep you airborne, not anymore. Everything has been used up. This is where your home is, your village, your life; clusters of little grassy huts assembled in neat little circles, built to resist the strong winds of this height. Your people have long grown used to the lack of oxygen up here.\n\nIt isn't your home anymore.\n\nYou clutch onto the beautiful green grass covering the ground, grass which comes off in clumps in your hands. The air pressure is affecting the land and you watch in mounting horror as pieces of your home are savagely torn away from one another. You're not the only one, either; dozens of people are desperately trying to keep their houses secure before they too are ripped asunder. A doomed effort, because the gravitational pull is tremendous.\n\nYou do not see your parents anywhere. You fear they may have been dragged over the edge to their deaths, like so many others. This settlement is not equipped with appropriate equipment to land upon the human-inhabited grounds, thousands of metres below. Nobody would think to do anything like that.\n\nThe roar of the wind grows louder and louder in your ears, and the pressure on your body forces you into a narrow crawl. You cannot even raise your head, at the speed you are falling. Cracks appear in the ground around you, and you realise that this is no longer a case of keeping the island secure. The settlement is already done for. It will not survive.", "action_results": [{"action": "Crawl towards the ruins of your house nearby", "result": "You claw your way towards what used to be your personal residence. The roof has been torn off, the front door is hanging on by mere threads, and the interior has been devastated beyond recovery. Only pieces of shattered wood remain here now. The wind picks up, and for a second you almost lose your grip, but you somehow manage to make it inside. What remains of the wall here serves as a temporary shelter.\n\nEven so, the feeling in your gut tells you that the entire island is picking up more speed than before. The chains will not be repaired: it is not going to stop. Your chances of survival are slim at best.", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep your head down and seek shelter within the wall", "result": "You crouch against the inside of the wall, covering your head as the deafening noise continues all around you. Earlier on, you could hear the cries of the other people as they sought shelter within their fragile little huts, but now there is nothing to be heard but the endless howling of the wind. A chill seeps into your bones, but that is the least of your worries right now. This wall will not hold for long. You may as well be stranded in the middle of the ocean, clinging to a broken piece of driftwood as the storm rages on.\n\nAs if eager to give you confirmation of this, small cracks begin to spread out across the wall where you are hiding. The entire island is shaking, causing the cracks to widen. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay against the wall", "result": "You stay braced against the wall, unwilling to move from this spot. This is your home. You will not abandon it, no matter what. More cracks appear all over the wall and start to crumble away; the wind whistles through the holes, and you can feel its chill upon the nape of your neck.\n\nIt\u2019s too late to try and escape your fate now. Everything is already destroyed. Your possessions, your livelihood, the people you grew up and formed relationships with. What else is left? What else can the world take away from you now? Home is where the heart is. You close your eyes and start repeating that small phrase like a constant mantra: home is where the heart is, home is where the heart is, home is where the heart is \u2013\n\nThe wall collapses at your back, nothing but rubble now. You feel a moment of terror before the wind picks up speed and you are thrown off your feet, clumps of wood falling uselessly from your bleeding fingers. You scream as you are flung from the surface of the island, spiralling towards certain death far below\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "The pressure mounts in your ears with a fearsome intensity, and your entire world turns into a mass of endless sound and impending pain. You fall for what seems like forever, desperately clutching at any means of support, anything at all. There is nothing for you to catch on to. You fight to draw breath, but your stomach feels as if it is being squeezed to breaking point. It's a struggle to keep your eyes open; your vision blurs and pinpricks of light flash before you, multiplying in number as your speed of descent increases further...\n\nAs you fall, you catch sight of a heavy chain extending from the base of the island. You\u2019ve never had the opportunity to see it up close before, and it\u2019s sad that you can only do so now, in circumstances like these. The chain extends a short distance below the island before ending at a shattered black ring. Energy no longer flows through it to keep the island aloft. It has been split apart from some exterior force.\n\nConfused at what this could mean, you gasp for breath as you fall with the island. The last of your strength fades. Unconsciousness falls upon you, and what you know of your world is consigned to complete blackness.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "You hear voices in your ear, indistinct faces in the gloom around you. There is no pain, but the wind is still quite fierce and there is only a tiny semblance of touch or feeling. You try to move, but your body will not obey you. Everything seems too bright and loud for you to make out anything but what is immediately nearby. Too much light. Too much volume. It is difficult for you to tell if you are dead or alive. Only the presence of pain suggests the latter.\n\n\u201cWhy, Mother?\u201d a woman's voice whispers at your side. You are just barely aware that she is not addressing you, but someone else whom you cannot see. \u201cWhy do you choose to help her? Our burden is upon you, to cleanse us of our impurities and prolong our life force, but you lack judgement in this situation. You lack common sense. Do you seek to betray the rules and regulations of the Gahl'vuhr Sehn at its core? The Unworthy ones do not come to you. They do not know half of what you do for us. Yet now they fall from their sky islands, falling into nothing, now that the world finally stops turning. Leave her be. Leave her to die.\u201d\n\nYou feel warm hands pull you free, and a sense of strange nostalgia washes over you. It\u2019s difficult to describe, after all that\u2019s happened, but some of the tension eases away. It feels like\u2026it feels like home.\n\n\u201cDo not save her, Mother,\u201d repeats the voice unfalteringly. \u201cThe Unworthy ones do not wish for absolution. Do you understand? They do not want your blessing, Mother. Waste not, want not.\u201d And then, in a fainter voice, so quiet that you could have sworn you imagined it, \u201cThis is not our way, Mother. This is not how we behave in the Gahl'vuhr Sehn. You will regret your folly.\u201d\n\nThe howling has stopped. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "You awaken in more peaceful circumstances. No longer are you falling to your death at hundreds of miles an hour, deprived of everything you once held dear. For a split second, you are hopeful that everything which transpired was nothing but a cruel nightmare, designed to bleed you dry of all positive emotions. It certainly felt like a dream. As your surroundings become visible to you, however, you become painfully aware that this is reality.\n\nInstead, you find yourself lying on a comfy bed inside a small, square room, with no memory of how you got here. Evidently, somebody has gone to a lot of trouble to make you feel at home here. A glass of water is placed on the bedside table for you, and a few pillows have been propped up just underneath your head.\n\nDizzily, you start to sit up and are surprised to find that you can do so. You also discover that you appear to have sustained no physical injuries at all. How could you possibly be unhurt? Your first thoughts are that one of the foreign sky races must have treated you upon impact, but they are surely too far away to have reached you in time. Your island was quite isolated from other land masses and never received many foreign visitors or travellers. Could it be that you never hit the ground at all?\n\nPerhaps this is the afterlife, and you are to be judged for your transgressions in the events leading up to your death. In any case, you will not find out by simply lying in this bed all day. You feel well enough to get up and walk about now, so perhaps it is time to explore your surroundings in some more detail. You still do not know where you are.\n\nAs you start to get up, there is a vicious snarl from the corner of the bedroom.\n\nWith a start, you realise that you are not alone. A green-skinned muscular creature is glaring at you from a short distance away, sporting sharp claws, four arms, and a barbed tail. It is much bigger than you are and seems to be sizing you up. A mutant? You can\u2019t think of what else to call it. There are tales of sky races long ago which were said to engage in such experiments, creating their own warped definition of new life\u2026\n\nFortunately for you, the mutant is confined within a large iron cage. It shouldn\u2019t be able to get out. You eye it warily and quickly move past it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Inspect the mutant further", "result": "The mutant snarls at you intelligibly as you approach it. With a body composition like that, you doubt that this creature evolved naturally; no, it was likely the result of a hideous experiment with organic matter and some unknown toxic material. That\u2019s your best guess, really, but you\u2019re still at a loss to explain why your apparent rescuers put you in the same room as this vicious beast. The mutant seems to have been in this cage for a very long time.\n\nYou peer at it curiously through the bars, and the mutant suddenly slams all four of its claws into the cage. That makes you jump a little, but the door of the cage is quite sturdy and refuses to budge, no matter how much the creature bashes at it. It\u2019s not going to escape any time soon. A padlock on the cage door also prevents you from letting it out, just in case such a thought passed through your mind.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the room for valuables", "result": "You make a quick search of the bedroom, being careful not to stray too close to the mutant\u2019s cage, but there doesn\u2019t seem to be much of value here. A wardrobe has been placed against the wall, but contains only foul-smelling rags which are filled with holes. You consider tearing off a fragment of your bedsheets instead, but decide against it once you consider that your situation might be the outcome of limited hospitality.\n\nAfter a few more minutes, you do find a strange scroll under your bed. It is written in a language that you do not understand, if it is a language at all; strange symbols and archaic runes cover the wrinkled paper. For now, you decide to take it along with you.\n\nAs you pick up the scroll, the mutant watches you with a baleful glare. It lets out a long hiss and the skin on its body changes colour to an angry red.", "action_results": [{"action": "Inspect the mutant further", "result": "The mutant snarls at you intelligibly as you approach it. With a body composition like that, you doubt that this creature evolved naturally; no, it was likely the result of a hideous experiment with organic matter and some unknown toxic material. That\u2019s your best guess, really, but you\u2019re still at a loss to explain why your apparent rescuers put you in the same room as this vicious beast. The mutant seems to have been in this cage for a very long time.\n\nYou peer at it curiously through the bars, and the mutant suddenly slams all four of its claws into the cage. That makes you jump a little, but the door of the cage is quite sturdy and refuses to budge, no matter how much the creature bashes at it. It\u2019s not going to escape any time soon. A padlock on the cage door also prevents you from letting it out, just in case such a thought passed through your mind.\n\nThe mutant's skin has now changed to an angry red colour. Even though the cage is holding it back, you're wary about spending any more time in this room.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ignore the mutant and leave the bedroom to find out where you are", "result": "You push open the door and step outside to find yourself in a narrow corridor which extends both left and right. To the left, you feel a gust of wind blowing, rustling through your hair softly. The sensation is not unpleasant. Perhaps there is a window open in that direction. To the right, you can hear the voices of people talking and laughing, though you are not close enough to hear exactly what they are saying. It is possible that they are your rescuers, but you cannot tell for sure. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go left where the wind is coming from", "result": "The wind grows stronger as you follow the corridor around the corner, towards a set of stairs which lead to the upper level. You\u2019re not quite sure where you are, exactly. You can only assume that you have been taken to somebody\u2019s home, perhaps another faraway settlement, but you must surely be a long way from home. At least, where your home used to be. It doesn\u2019t explain the presence of the mutant in your room, however, so you can only hope that your hosts are not unpleasant company.\n\nYou climb up the stairs to find yourself...staring out across open skies. Clouds can be seen on the horizon, clustered in a never-ending sea of blue which surrounds you for miles and miles as far as the eye can see\u2026\n\nThis is no ordinary residence. This is no house. You\u2019re not even on ground level. You are standing on the upper deck of a fully functioning airship! No wonder the wind was so strong up here: you must be hundreds of metres above sea level...\n\nYou\u2019ve never been on an airship before, but you have seen plenty of them at the island where you lived all your life. Some sky races use these aerial vessels to transport goods and cargo between islands, others simply for transporting passengers. However, they can be slow and unwieldy to operate, and they are not especially durable; a fierce lightning storm can easily put an airship out of commission. For this reason, airships are usually designed for short voyages with a minimum of passengers.\n\nIt\u2019s like something out of a dream. A real airship. You don\u2019t know where this one is headed, but it has to be somewhere better than where you came from. Where do you want to go, after all? No, the bigger question is \u2013 what happened on the surface of the land far below? What prompted your island to fall in the first place?\n\nAs you gaze out thoughtfully across the open skies, there are footsteps behind you. You turn to see a young woman with long red hair cascading across her shoulders. There is a hint of recognition in her green eyes as she looks at you.\n\n\u201cVnwprthy,\u201d she says in a clear voice. \u201cYpv brf thf Vnwprthy.\u201d She beckons to you with one finger. \u201cCpmf. Cpmf wjth mf. Thf Cbptbjn wbnts tp spfbk tp ypv.\u201d\n\nWithout another word, she turns on her heel and walks across the deck into another section of the airship. You do not understand her words, but it seems that she wants you to follow her.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow the woman", "result": "Curious about what awaits you, you follow the red-haired woman across the upper deck and over to the other side. She leads you through another set of twists and turns in the corridors, down into another part of the airship. As you walk, you pass by several uniformed men who watch you with interest. They are not human, but then again...neither are you. Each of them appears to be armed to the teeth. Only now do you realise that they must be part of the ship's crew.\n\nAfter a few minutes, your guide leads you to a brass door which lies at the top of a final flight of stairs. There is a sign on top of the door, but you lack the knowledge to read the symbols and runes displayed there.\n\n\u201cGp jn,\u201d she says, gesturing for you to enter. \u201cThf cbptbjn js wbjtjng fpr ypv.\u201d\n\nAt her request, you push open the door and enter the room beyond.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "You enter a large, lavishly-furnished room with all manner of alien devices mounted upon the walls, none of which you have seen the like before. One device consists of two gyros oscillating in synchronisation with each other, surrounded by a shimmering coil of energy; another instrument is similar to a telescope upon first glance, but appears to contain three lens of varying sizes at set intervals within its interior; a third device resembles a sundial, but is set into the ceiling and is covered by an array of round discs. Evidently, these instruments must be related to the operation of the airship. You\u2019re not sure whether they are lifelike models of the real thing or not, but they do fascinate you.\n\nFrom the look of the place, you must be in the captain\u2019s room. Sunlight pours in through two bay windows at the front, and a plain-looking bed is situated in the corner next to a pair of filing cabinets. This cabin seems to function as both a workspace and as living quarters. A large number of medals and trophies stand upon one of the cabinets.\n\nThe captain herself stands at the other end of the cabin behind a large desk, dressed in a red and purple uniform covered by various badges to indicate her high status. Much like the other crew members you saw earlier, she is not human and is vaguely reptilian in nature. Thick white hair flows down her back in an elegant ponytail.\n\n\u201cVnwprthy,\u201d the captain says to you curtly as you enter. \u201cWflcpmf.\u201d\n\nYou look blankly at her, wondering if you are about to subjected to yet another series of verbal questions in a language you do not understand.\n\n\u201cMy crfw tfll mf thbt ypv hbvf bffn bslffp fpr spmf tjmf, Vnwprthy,\u201d she says, a disregarding tone in her voice, one used to command. \u201cNbtvrblly, ypvr prfsfncf hfrf hbs cbvsfd qvjtf b stjr bmpng vs. Whp brf ypv, bnd whfrf hbvf ypv cpmf frpm?\u201d\n\nShe looks expectantly at you, frowning when she sees that you do not comprehend her words. With a sigh of disgust, the captain calls out in a sharp voice. The door of the cabin opens behind you, and a red-haired woman with a kindly face steps inside. She appears to be human. It\u2019s strange, because you didn\u2019t think humans could survive at these kinds of altitudes.\n\n\u201cHfllp,\u201d the red-haired woman says to you gently. When you look at her in confusion, she tries again. \u201cCpmmpn Tpngvf\u2026Vncpmmpn\u2026He\u2026Hell-oh? Hello? Is\u2026is this better?\u201d\n\n\u201cYes,\u201d you say gratefully. \u201cThat\u2019s better. I can understand you.\u201d\n\nThe captain looks quite annoyed with the exchange as the red-haired woman speaks urgently to her. She turns towards you haughtily and clears her throat.\n\n\u201cHow about\u2026this?\u201d she says irritably. \u201cYou do not speak Common Tongue, or even Uncommon Tongue. A mix of Skylandish and Common Comorrah? Is this really how you talk to your brethren? You Unworthy ones are nothing but a constant pain.\u201d\n\nSeeing that you understand her, she sags back against her chair with some relief. \u201cI see that we have some communication in place at last. I am the captain of this ship. I will make a few things clear right now, Unworthy \u2013 I do not tolerate stowaways who drop out of the damn sky, taking up additional resources than I can spare for my crew. I don\u2019t care if your island fell into the ocean. That\u2019s no excuse to litter my ship with your worthless carcass. Damn nuisance, you people are!\u201d\n\nShe throws up her hands \u2013 or rather, claws \u2013 in a gesture which suggests she likes to complain. \u201cAre you aware that Mother Ghared chose to save your life?\u201d The captain nods her head towards the young red-haired woman standing next to her. \u201cAs official members of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn, it is against our policy to save the life of an Unworthy. That\u2019s you, by the way. Anybody outside our organisation is an Unworthy. I wasn\u2019t happy about this at all. Mother Ghared is far too soft in these matters.\u201d\n\n\u201cCaptain,\u201d Mother Ghared says in a passive tone of voice, \u201cI believe you did not bring the Unworthy up here to give her a tirade on her existence. She must be quite tired after her ordeal. Her island is not the first to plummet towards the ground, nor will it be the last. An exchange of information is required.\u201d\n\nThe captain glares at you, but reluctantly acknowledges her words. \u201cVery well,\u201d she says. \u201cUnworthy, you are free to ask me questions about your situation. But after you have finished, I have some important questions of my own.\u201d ", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask her about this airship", "result": "\u201cYou stand aboard an Auvahr-Tenur Airship, Year 2XX5, Model CXXP,\u201d the captain says with a certain note of pride in her voice. \u201cWe Auvahrs are known well for our skill in ship construction, but see little sense in naming them. These vessels are not built for long journeys, as you may know. Although the Tenurs work on the advanced mechanisms, it is not mandatory to employ them as members of the crew and we carry no Tenurs aboard at this time.\u201d\n\nShe appears to be referring to the races which populate the various sky islands. You have heard of the Tenur race before, but have never encountered Auvahrs before. For your entire life, you have been content to remain on your little island without once venturing out into the unknown. At times like this, you wonder if such a decision was altogether wise.\n\n\u201cWhere are you headed?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cIsland 45H, according to the sky charts,\u201d she answers. \u201cYou Unworthy ones do not name your islands, do you? How quaint. We can respect that, but it makes it harder for us to make a decent reference point. Among us Auvhars, the island is known as Majeruk.\u201d The captain glances at one of the instruments in front of her. \u201cWe will reach Majeruk within the hour, at which point you can disembark and get off my damn vessel at last. Unworthy, we carry a decent amount of cargo on board and I will not have your presence contaminate the merchandise further. I will be glad to be rid of you.\u201d\n\nThis news brings you some hope. It sounds as if you might have a chance to reach an island not unlike the one you left behind. That seems a sensible way to proceed right now: move on, rebuild, and re-settle upon a new island. It seems that not every island has met the same fate as yours, but how long will that last? When will the world stop shaking?", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "The captain of the airship waits patiently at her desk, awaiting your next question.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask her about the people on board", "result": "\u201cThis airship carries only Auvahrs and one human,\u201d she says dismissively. The captain appears to be referring to the races which populate the sky islands, though you have never encountered an Auvahr in the flesh before. \u201cA standard crew, including mercenaries to guard the merchandise should we run into any trouble. We also carry a few valuable prisoners from the last island.\u201d There\u2019s a pause, and you wonder if she might be referring to the caged mutant you saw in your bedroom.\n\n\u201cWhat about\u2026\u201d You voice the question which has been plaguing you, glancing over to the red-haired woman. \u201cMother Ghared? She\u2019s a human.\u201d\n\n\u201cQuite right,\u201d the captain replies. \u201cGahl\u2019vuhr Sehn policy requires that every airship within their organisation carries a representative proficient in restorative abilities, to ensure survival of the crew in the worst-case scenario. It was Mother Ghared who saved your life, against my express wishes. She may be human, but she is a formidable representative of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn and can withstand the high altitudes, thanks to her rather abstract nature. If you wish to speak to her whilst you are here, you will do so only with the greatest of respect.\u201d\n\nYou look towards Mother Ghared, but her expression betrays nothing of her inner thoughts.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Ask her about the Gahl'vuhr Sehn", "result": "\u201cI should have anticipated such a question from you, Unworthy,\u201d the captain says, scowling. \u201cThe Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn is a governing body which oversees all operations and protocol undertaken by us Auvahrs, as well as Tenurs and some subspecies of Comors. They strictly enforce the rules and policies put in place to maintain some sense of order among the sky islands, although Unworthy ones such as yourself are unfortunately exempt from such regulations.\n\n\u201cHowever, it has probably not escaped your notice that Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn has their work cut out for them at the moment. Just a bit of chaos going around, that\u2019s all, thanks to what\u2019s going on at the surface. I should also mention that just because myself and my crew are members of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn, we are not especially high-ranking in the organisation.\u201d She cocks her head to one side. \u201cPerks of the job, you might say. It\u2019s probably the only reason why I let Mother Ghared save your skin.\u201d\n\nYou have never heard of this Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn, not in all your years living at your island. Rules and regulations? You and your family have never needed such things. That\u2019s the whole point of life in the sky islands. You are free. The thought of other people trying to limit such unrestrained freedom makes you feel rather worried about what might be really going on.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Ask her about what happened to you", "result": "\u201cSeveral hours ago, you fell out of the sky,\u201d she says. \u201cYou weren\u2019t the only one, either. There were entire islands collapsing to the left and right, and I had to get the ship out of the way to avoid being crushed by the next giant land mass. Mother Ghared\u2026\u201d\n\nMother Ghared steps forward at this point. \u201cI was on duty at the front deck when you emerged,\u201d she says calmly. \u201cUnlike the others who fell, you had a slim chance of survival. I chose to use my abilities to slow your fall and take you on board. The captain did not approve of my decision, but I was able to persuade her to let you live until we reached the next island.\u201d\n\nThe captain shakes her head in disgust. \u201cFat lot of good that will do us, Mother Ghared. If we\u2019re unlucky enough to run into a Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn patrol when we reach Majeruk, they\u2019ll want to know why we have an Unworthy on board.\u201d She glares at you. \u201cI\u2019ll just tell them that you were a stowaway and that Mother Ghared refused to let me throw you over the side. Doesn\u2019t matter if the world\u2019s splitting down the middle or if islands are falling out of the damn sky \u2013 as far as the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn is concerned, rules are rules. They must be followed. I\u2019m so glad that the highest-ranking representative on board has decided to break them on my behalf.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou may defer any responsibility to me, captain,\u201d Mother Ghared says. \u201cThey will understand. Even the life of an Unworthy can give rise to many new members of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn. The future is always uncertain.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s easy for you to say, Mother Ghared, but I like my future to stay as stable as possible.\u201d The captain turns her attention back to you. \u201cWhat else was there? Oh, yes. We brought you inside and had no choice but to put you in the cabin in which one of our prisoners was housed. Not the safest choice, but we are already stretched to full capacity here.\u201d\n\nYou recall the mutant you saw in your room. \u201cPrisoner?\u201d you repeat.\n\n\u201cCargo is not the only thing we transport on this airship,\u201d she states. \u201cOccasionally we are given the task of transporting valuable and dangerous criminals to far-off locations \u2013 some islands are used for prisoners alone. \u201cPrison islands\u201d, we call them. Leave them there to rot away, stranded, where they can\u2019t hurt anyone. Better than any of those primitive human jails, in my opinion.\u201d She sits back in her chair. \u201cI\u2019m sure the prisoner didn\u2019t bother you at all. It would be a pretty big problem if that one managed to escape. A single mutant has the means to contact many others of its kind, and those creatures carry grudges against their captors for years. Downright murderous, they are. That's why it's essential that we keep every single one of them locked up.\u201d", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Ask her about the falling of the islands", "result": "The captain stares at you in amazement for a few moments. \u201cYou want to know why the islands are falling?\u201d she asks. \u201cAre you serious? Do you mean to tell me that you really don\u2019t know what\u2019s happening on the surface below?\u201d She pauses, then shrugs as if it doesn't really matter. \u201cThat\u2019s probably no surprise. None of you Unworthy ones take the time to explore your surroundings. You\u2019re so satisfied with little things instead.\u201d\n\nStanding up from her desk, she strides over to the door of the room and beckons to you with a single talon. \u201cMother Ghared. Unworthy. Both of you, follow me. We\u2019re going up to the balcony so that I can educate this girl a little on the world around her.\u201d\n\nCurious about what she has in mind, you start to follow the captain out of the cabin. Mother Ghared is just a step behind you. \u201cWhy are we going up to the balcony?\u201d you ask. \u201cWhat's this got to do with the - \u201d\n\n\u201cYou wanted to know why the islands are all falling, didn\u2019t you?\u201d she interrupts. \u201cWell, I\u2019m not going to tell you. it would take too much time to explain and I can\u2019t remember all the fancy words that you Unworthy ones use. No, I\u2019m going to show you instead.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow her up to the balcony", "result": "You follow the captain back onto the upper deck, onto a raised platform protected by a thick metal railing. Up here, you can see that a mystical crystalline device has been installed into the top of the airship. It seems to be made out of hundreds of tiny pieces of metal, interwoven together in a blend of silver and black. You cannot guess at its purpose, but the whole thing is humming with energy. Surely it must power the ship in some way.\n\n\u201cThe lens here will magnify any singular point on the surface, within a set range,\u201d the captain explains. Behind you, Mother Ghared scrambles up next to her. \u201cRight now, it\u2019s focused on one of the human-inhabited regions far below us. Think of it as a giant magnifying glass, except that this one takes about two hours to realign the location. Not very practical, in theory. Usually, we just use it to pinpoint any turbulent weather conditions coming our way, but we don\u2019t have a lot of contact with the people on the surface anyway.\u201d She stands back, allowing you to take your place in front of the device. \u201cStep up to the lens, Unworthy. Take a look for yourself at what\u2019s happening on the surface!\u201d\n\nWarily, you move forward as she requests and peer into the giant lens.\n\nThe first thing you notice is just how much detail the instrument is showing you. You can see houses down below. People. Trees. In fact, if you look in the right location, then you can see exactly what people are doing. To be honest, it makes you feel a little uncomfortable to be using a device that could technically be used to spy on people. You adjust the lens using the controls on the side, coming out of focus in order to try and look at something else in the same region.\n\nA black spot shows up on the lens.\n\nAs you focus in on the spot, you realise with alarm that you are looking at the ruins of a whole cluster of buildings. No, not just buildings. That\u2019s\u2026that's an entire town. Big enough to be a city, even. It\u2019s just a burned-out hole in the ground. More black spots appear on the lens now, hundreds and hundreds of them, like termites crawling through the earth...\n\nThat isn\u2019t all. Some of the black spots are surrounded by a sea of red. You move into sharper focus now, going a bit further up, and see that a red river is flowing from a\u2026a mountain? No. it can\u2019t be. That\u2019s a volcano. That means\u2026\n\nYour heart skips a beat as you swiftly scan the rest of the surrounding region, looking for any signs of life down there. There are still people there. They\u2019re alive, but they\u2019re not living. The earth has cracked all the way down the middle, right across the centre of the entire continent. It\u2019s a crack which extends far and wide, beyond what the lens can see at this position.\n\nThe patch of red is accompanied by orange\u2026and then blue. Are those flood waters? Just what is going on here? There\u2019s so much going on at the surface that you can\u2019t make head or tails about what you're really looking at, let alone grasp the bigger picture. Is it just a constant stream of natural disasters? All at once?\n\n\u201cIf you are looking for a specific, detailed explanation on what has happened,\u201d the captain says, \u201cthen you are all out of luck. Nobody can tell you what happened at the source. If you were close enough to know for sure, then you would already be dead. What you can see before you is what's going on right now.\u201d She gestures to the crack running down the middle. \u201cThat\u2019s not the result of a normal earthquake. Nor do we believe that a number of volcanoes erupted all at once, purely by accident. Mother Ghared has offered her views on this.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt is possible that there was a split in the energy flow between the human nations,\u201d Mother Ghared ventures. \u201cEverything feeds off energy. Input and output; produce, waste and conservation. Energy is what keeps your islands suspended in the sky. It\u2019s what breathes new life into you. When there\u2019s too much of it in one place, and too little in another\u2026\u201d She shakes her head sadly. \u201cThe Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn call it a \u201ctemporal discharge\u201d, although that kind of phrase is largely inaccurate. It\u2019s a measure of great force which saps an enormous amount of resources from the planet itself. The planet, of course, reacts accordingly.\u201d She shrugs. \u201cThat\u2019s my theory, but there are others. War could be the trigger. Mass deprivation of world resources. It was always going to happen one day. All we know is that there are no outside forces at work. Everything\u2019s that happened\u2026is something that we did nothing to avoid.\n\n\u201cNeedless to say, the effects upon the sky islands have been disastrous. The tremendous energy drain has disrupted the gravitational pull to an extreme, causing many of the islands to fall out of the sky. Countless airships have been leeched of their power, stranding them in open sky.\u201d\n\n\u201cNot on my watch,\u201d the captain growls. \u201cI make my own preparations. When our energy cells were depleted, I immediately had the helmsmen switch to our back-up source and keep us airborne. We should survive until we reach the next island. I don't care what those humans did on the surface, but they're not going to bring an Auvahr ship down.\u201d\n\nMother Ghared's words swim through your head, but you are still staring at the scenes before you in a state of utter shock. Is this what\u2019s happened to the world? Why? What could be worth this? But at the same time, you remember the experiences you had just days before the island started falling. Changes in the wind. Abstract extremes of temperature and air pressure. Unexplainable disturbances in the atmosphere which were thought to return to normal within the year.\n\nYou don\u2019t know what to make of this. You don\u2019t know what to make of any of this. How can you survive in a world like this, so chaotic and constantly at war with itself? Will you really be safe up here in the sky? The only plan you can think of is to find a new island to settle on, somewhere that you can start again. That would be nice. Wouldn\u2019t it? Wouldn\u2019t it be nice?\n\nWhere do you go from here?", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "Abruptly, the captain switches off the lens completely. The vision before your eyes turns to a sea of black, disorientating you momentarily.\n\n\u201cNow that I\u2019ve answered your questions, Unworthy,\u201d she says testily, \u201cI expect you to answer mine. Who are you, and where do you come from?\u201d\n\nYou don\u2019t see any reason to lie. \u201cWe do not name each other,\u201d you say truthfully.\n\n\u201cExcuse me?\u201d The captain frowns distastefully. \u201cYou don\u2019t have a name?\u201d\n\n\u201cNobody is born with a name,\u201d you answer. \u201cAmong humans, the parents name a child at birth regardless of whether they ask for it or not. It is not customary to use names among my people. Giving yourself a name only makes it easier for someone to gain power over you. Bearing in mind the kind of lives we lead with each other, it\u2019s unnecessary.\u201d\n\nShe swears under her breath, clearly put out by your words. \u201cWhat am I supposed to call you, then? Pigeon Girl? You Unworthy ones are a strange lot. I\u2019ll be damned if I let one on board my ship ever again if I have to put up with this nonsense! Now, tell me which island you came from!\u201d\n\n\u201cWe don\u2019t name our islands either,\u201d you say, confused at the question. \u201cFor the same reason.\u201d\n\nThe captain gives you a long-suffering look which suggests she is coming to the end of her patience.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sure it doesn\u2019t matter which island she came from, captain,\u201d Mother Ghared reassures her. \u201cYou saw what happened. Her island must be at the bottom of the sea by now. Very few survived the fall.\u201d\n\n\u201cAll right, all right. Maybe you\u2019d just like to say that when I tell my superiors that I took in an Unworthy on board my ship. Gender? Female. Name? Non-applicable. Place of birth? Some island that fell out of the sky.\u201d She stares at you angrily. \u201cListen, girl, you\u2019re not making it easy for me to fill out the required paperwork. I\u2019m not even going to ask how old you are, because you\u2019d probably tell me that you only count backwards using the constellations at a certain time of the year. Can I at least get an iota of cooperation from you, Unworthy?!\u201d\n\nAs she talks, your gaze is drawn to a strange sight upon the horizon. You hadn\u2019t seen it before, but it looks as if it\u2019s coming this way. Slowly, you step forward to peer at the foreign object approaching the airship.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take a closer look at the sight on the horizon", "result": "You see what appears to be a mass of black clouds on the horizon, lit up by a blaze of yellow and white flashes. The atmosphere around the airship is becoming increasingly turbulent, and you feel the vessel shake beneath your feet, making it difficult to keep your balance.\n\nThe captain turns to see what you\u2019re looking at and swears out loud. \u201cJust our luck,\u201d she mutters. \u201cDamn lightning storm could put us all out of commission.\u201d Without hesitation, she starts to shout orders down to the crew below, reverting back to Common Tongue as she does so. \u201cBll hflmsmfn pn thf blfrt! Thfrf\u2019s b ljghtnjng stprm bpprpbchjng thf shjp. Bfgjn fvbsjvf mbnpfvvrfs jmmfdjbtfly, pr wf wpn\u2019t lbst fjvf mjnvtfs!\u201d\n\nYou see the crew members scramble to their positions quickly, working amongst themselves to turn the ship around before it makes contact with the imminent storm. The captain turns to you. \u201cWe\u2019re going to try and steer around the storm, Unworthy. It\u2019s a big one, and with such short notice we might not be able to make it. But I\u2019m confident I can get my ship through this. It's rare for a lightning storm of this size to appear without any warning, but...\u201d\n\n\u201cIs this to do with what's happening on the surface?\u201d you ask worriedly. There was no sign of any such storm until now. The change in pressure was simply so drastic for this to happen naturally.\n\nThe look in the captain's eyes tells you the answer to that. \u201cUnworthy, you\u2019d better get yourself below deck where it\u2019s safer,\u201d she says grimly. \u201cJust stay out of trouble. That way I won\u2019t have to worry about protecting your neck.\u201d\n\nWith that she rushes down the steps, still shouting orders as the storm draws closer. You hold onto the railing tightly as the ship starts to change course, but at this distance you have a feeling that it might be too late. A crackle of white-blue lightning flashes not too far from the vessel, and the wind is getting stronger.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay on the upper deck, ready to help", "result": "You decide to remain on deck and see what help you can lend to the crew members. Mother Ghared disappears down below, and from here you watch as the helmsmen frantically try to turn the airship around as quickly as possible. Before long, the ship is so close to the storm that pieces of wood are being shredded away from the outside of the hull. You grip the railing tightly, fearing the worst\u2026\n\n\u201cBrbcf ypvrsflf!\u201d the captain yells.\n\nThere is a horrendous tearing of wood and metal as the storm makes impact. Fearfully, you throw yourself clear from the balcony \u2013 and just in time, too. A bolt of lightning flashes down onto the crystal lens where you were standing, shattering it into a million pieces. The crewmen cry out as a violent gust of wind slams into the ship, powerful enough to tear the railings apart. Rain and sleet pours down to accompany it.\n\nDesperately, you search for somewhere to take cover from the storm. This was a bad idea. You shouldn\u2019t have stayed up on deck in this kind of climate. There\u2019s nothing you can do here \u2013\n\nAnother bolt of lightning flashes down and rips straight through the mast.\n\nYou turn to see the entire weight of the mast fall towards the deck. To your horror, you see that the captain is right in its path, just seconds away from being crushed. None of the mercenaries are close enough to help her. No one is close enough to help\u2026but you.\n\nEven if you did help her, it\u2019s unlikely that you would be able to get out of the way in time.", "action_results": [{"action": "Push the captain out of the way", "result": "With your heart in your mouth, you race forward and shove the captain out of the way in the nick of time. You see her eyes go wide at her near escape. Then you look upwards and see wit horror that the mast is continuing to fall \u2013 right on top of you.\n\nFrantically, you start to move to avoid it, but you are already out of time. You have sacrificed what precious seconds you had to save the captain. Your legs are moving too slowly, far too slowly to avoid the heavy lump of wood which will crush you asunder. Everything seems to move in slow motion as the mast careens towards your helpless body \u2013\n\n\u201cFprcf!\u201d\n\nA shrill cry erupts from the other end of the airship. The mast shudders as an invisible force slams to it, snapping it further at an awkward angle. You can barely breathe as the fractured beam crashes through the deck barely a metre away from you. You\u2019re alive. You can\u2019t believe it.\n\nYou raise your head to see Mother Ghared frozen in position, her hands outstretched towards the fallen mast. Your knowledge of her abilities is still limited, but you understand that this is the second time she has saved your life. The captain is already on her feet, struggling to defend herself from another group of mutants.\n\nBefore you can move, you see Mother Ghared slump to the ground. She seems exhausted by the effort of stopping the heavy mast, and the energy drain is too much for her. You start to force yourself to your feet, knowing that if you spend too long dawdling then you won\u2019t have long to celebrate. She needs help, and fast.\n\nThat\u2019s when you hear the violent splintering sound below you.\n\nFearing the worst, you see that the heavy mast has in fact torn straight through the centre of the airship. It is in no condition to fly. The vessel has already been damaged by the attacks of the mutants, and you can only watch in horror as more and more cracks appear, joining together as one\u2026\n\nThe airship breaks apart down the middle.\n\nYou see the mutants react with surprise as they start to plummet along with their half of the ship. Surprisingly enough, they can no longer fly. You\u2019re not quite sure why, but you have a feeling that their wings from before were only temporary. In addition...part of the airship somehow remains airborne. You\u2019re not in a position to question the laws of aerodynamics right now, but you need to act fast.\n\nYour half of the airship is currently airborne and in no danger of falling \u2013 or so you hope. The captain is next to you, slumped in a heap. The other half of the ship is about to plummet downwards, and you realise that Mother Ghared is still on that side. She\u2019s unconscious and has no idea of what has happened.\n\nYou have a split second to decide whether to cross over the gap to Mother Ghared, or stay here with the captain. You have no idea what condition either person is in.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay on this part of the ship with the captain", "result": "You can do nothing but watch as Mother Ghared is lost with the remaining half of the ship, falling away out of sight. With the last of the mutants gone with her, the bloody battle has ended. The upper deck is covered with the bodies of the dead, both mercenaries and mutants alike, and you find no survivors at all. It\u2019s sad, really. The chaos on the surface has worked its way up here, even though you like to think of yourself as disconnected from the surface as possible\u2026\n\nRight now, there is nothing powering the airship anymore. You are at the mercy of the wind, which blows the vessel this way and that, stranding you here in the middle of the open skies. You have no knowledge of how airships work, and feel you shouldn\u2019t try to mess with the controls at all. You count yourself lucky that you stand upon a ship which is still airborne at all.\n\nFor now, all you can do is wait for the airship to drift; here, alone, among the mass of dead bodies on board. There are some supplies to keep you going, but they won\u2019t last you very long. All of the food was stored in the lower deck, and that was the part of the ship which went down.\n\nThe captain is lying slumped in the middle of the deck, bleeding profusely from several wounds. She\u2019s alive, but only just. A quick examination of her reveals that she hasn\u2019t got long to live. Only her resilience has allowed her to last this long.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "For the rest of the day, the damaged airship drifts upon the wind with no clear or definite destination. You face a lonely vigil here, one of the only survivors among numerous corpses. Whilst you\u2019re here, you try to salvage whatever supplies you can, realising that you may be here for a long time if you are not fortunate enough to reach another island. There a few food packages in the captain\u2019s room, and you are careful to consume only a small amount. These might be your only supplies for a long time\u2026\n\nThe captain has not regained consciousness, at least not fully. She mumbles incoherently when you try to rouse her, but you know she is need of nutrition and medical attention. Unfortunately, there are no medical supplies in this part of the ship. Those were lost with Mother Ghared. Unable to wake her, you force some water through the captain\u2019s cracked lips. She coughs and splutters but manages to get it down.\n\nAs you continue to drift, you see numerous other airships passing by. However\u2026they give you no cause to celebrate. They, too, are drifting. The crew members on board are all dead, as you discover upon your first encounter; some have been attacked by mutants or aggressive races as happened with you, but in fact you find that the majority of them have been the victim of violent storms or run out of food and supplies completely. In more than a few cases, you find that there is a literal skeleton crew on board, as evidence by the remaining bones that greet you.\n\nThe world is falling apart around you, and you can do nothing to stop it. You are the only one out here who remains alive. The chaos on the surface must be affecting the skies, too, since many of the doomed ships here have been drifting for some time. How long has it been since your island fell? How long has the world been like this?\n\nHours pass, and you begin to feel that you will not survive. Your supplies will not last forever.\n\nIt is almost nightfall when you are confronted by a single ray of hope. At first, you think that your eyes are playing tricks on you. An island can be seen passing close to the airship.\n\nAn island. It seems like a miracle. There could be people there, people who could help you and give the captain the medical attention she so desperately needs. However, the airship isn\u2019t headed directly for it \u2013 you will have to literally jump down onto the island, making use of the few tools still available to you.\n\nAs you draw closer, you realise that you do not recognise this island at all. You don\u2019t know if the inhabitants there will be friendly or hostile to you: there might not even be any people living there at all. It could be filled with wild animals. If you choose to disembark, you will not be able to return to the ship, which will drift away and leave you stranded upon this isle.\n\nFurthermore, the angle at which you are approaching the island makes it impossible for you take anyone with you. You can jump down onto the surface yourself with some difficulty. This will mean that you will have to leave the wounded captain behind, ultimately sealing her fate.", "action_results": [{"action": "Disembark onto this new island, leaving the captain behind", "result": "You take one last look at the captain, who is lying on the bed in her cabin where you brought her up to rest. In the circumstances, she almost looks like she is sleeping peacefully. You shake your head and walk away from her, stepping over the corpses littering the deck. You can\u2019t let this affect you. Sometimes you have to make sacrifices in order to survive.\n\nThe island below is coming up fast. If you don't jump now, then you're going ot miss your chance. Crossing your fingers, you grab hold of one of the mooring lines running down the length of the airship, and brace yourself. The wind rushes past you as you swing from the rope and jump from the vessel, feeling as if you\u2019re putting your whole life at stake here. A single misstep could send you hurtling into the void\u2026\n\nSoft vegetation cushions your fall as you land upon the island, winded but unhurt. You\u2019re dangerously close to the edge but you\u2019re safe, and that\u2019s what matters. The entirety of the island stretches around you. It is as yet unexplored territory.\n\nBreathing a sigh of relief, you look up to see the airship drift away and out of sight. There\u2019s no going back now. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "You begin to explore the island you\u2019re on, and soon find that it is rich in vegetation, full of nutritious fruits which grow upon the numerous trees populating the land, and carries a generous stockpile of resources. It\u2019s a perfect haven for the weary traveller lacking in supplies. At once, you set to work gathering as much food as you can. The majority of the island is open grassland, though you find a small jungle in the southeast, so it's easy enough to traverse the space here. The wildlife here is not hostile to your presence, but from what you can see, you can easily live off the land here for many long decades of your life.\n\nFurther exploration reveals that there are no people inhabiting this island. None at all. That seems a little strange to you, that absolutely nobody has happened upon this place before. Any settler or explorer would immediately seize upon this haven of food and resources. It makes you wonder what secrets must lie here.\n\nThe amount of land here is vast, enough to build several towns a fair distance apart! For the next few weeks, you set out intending to explore the entire island. No passing airships or vessels are sighted anywhere near, and you realise with a heavy heart that you are probably stranded here. After all, you are in the middle of nowhere. The lack of people just makes it feel a bit\u2026isolated.\n\nAt the end of the second week, you discover footprints. The footprints of people. Someone has been here before, although the marks are extremely faint and some part of you feels that you might have made them yourself. It\u2019s hard to be sure.\n\nIt\u2019s really very lonely here. How long are you willing to stay here, after all? How long will it take before you succumb to the ever-present loneliness? It\u2019s been weeks. Maybe you could get used to it, but you can't say for sure\u2026\n\nYou decide to follow the footprints you saw. Despite yourself, you\u2019re intrigued about where they came from. You follow them all the way north, around the corner of the island, where they lead into the waters of a vast, beautiful lake. The sunlight paints its reflection upon the shimmering surface, and you shield your eyes from the glare. It\u2019s really a mystery as to what happened to these people. Perhaps you don\u2019t really want to find out.\n\nAside from the lake and the footprints, you\u2019ve seen pretty much everything there is to see on this island. You also have no way of leaving. It\u2019s not bad, really. There\u2019s plenty of food to feed you for the rest of your days, and enough wood from the trees to construct your own shelter from the raging elements. The wildlife isn\u2019t particularly hostile, so you would be quite safe from danger.\n\nYou could settle here \u2013 you really could. It\u2019s just that\u2026you\u2019re the only one here, and it\u2019s likely to remain that way. You\u2019ve explored the island for nearly a month now, and there isn\u2019t another living soul to be seen. Well, apart from the animals, but they don\u2019t bother you. You could do anything here. You could run naked through the jungle and nobody would care, because there\u2019s nobody here but you. You could dig a hole underground and lose yourself inside there, bury yourself alive, and scream as loud as you can. Nobody would care, because there\u2019s nobody here but you. You could try to climb a tree, and then fall from a great height. You could break your legs from the fall and nobody would help you, because there\u2019s nobody here but you...\n\nYou don\u2019t cope well with loneliness.\n\nOne thing you can say about this island is that you\u2019ve never seen anything like it before. It\u2019s not going to fall, not like the other islands fell. You don't know why you think that, because there's no chain or energy flow keeping it aloft...but it's just your gut feeling. It's not going to perish like the others. You would be safe. If you settle here, then nobody will ever bother you again.", "action_results": [{"action": "Approach the lake", "result": "You walk up to the edge of the lake, searching for any sign of the people who came before you. Strangely enough, the footprints disappear into the water itself. After a moment\u2019s hesitation, you wade into the lake a short distance, curious to find out what really happened here. The water is cool and fresh against your skin, as if keen to make you feel at ease.\n\nTo your surprise, you can hear the faint sound of beautiful singing coming from up ahead. You\u2019ve never heard anything quite like it before. The words are difficult to make out, but you are captivated nevertheless by the atmosphere that it creates around you. Intrigued, you push further into the lake towards the source of the singing. \n\nYou can make out the words a little clearer now. The water comes up to your waist.\n\n\n \n\n\u201cWelcome, welcome, O traveller of the skies,\n\nDrink from the water, and burn out your life;\n\nOur singing shall ease all your worries and fears,\n\nCome closer, young traveller, for all you hold dear\u2026\n\n\n \n\nThe voices fade away, and you are immediately struck by the impact of the silence all around you. Desiring to break the silence, you wade deeper into the lake\u2019s waters. You haven\u2019t heard the voice of another soul on this isle for nearly a month. As much as you hate to admit it, the loneliness is starting to get to you. It would be cruel to deprive you of such company.\n\nYou push further into the lake, not caring that your clothes are now drenched. From afar, you can hear the singing voices again. The water level comes up to your chest.\n\n\n \n\n\u201cRejoice, rejoice, O traveller of the skies,\n\nNo need for emotions, to laugh or to cry;\n\nSing with us here in the depths of the lake,\n\nNaught but your soul and your spirit shall we take\u2026\n\n\n \n\nA strange feeling passes over you, and the singing cuts out. The water level comes up to your neck, turning into a murky green.\n\nDespite yourself, you do not feel that you are in any real danger. A low hum echoes from all around you, almost seeming to resonate from the waters of the lake itself. You can no longer see the edge of the lake anymore. You swim forward impatiently, still searching for the source of the voices\u2026\n\n\u201cWhat are you doing here?\u201d\n\nThe face of a young woman emerges from the water in front of you. She appears to be vaguely human-like in appearance, but when she speaks, it sounds as if you are hearing her voice from underwater. Green hair flows down her back, and you see scales dotting her cheeks. An aquatic lifeform of some kind, perhaps. You didn\u2019t know there were such people living in these waters.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re not one of us,\u201d she says, a surprised look on her face. \u201cWhy are you alive? How can you possibly survive here?\u201d\n\nHer questions baffle you. Before you can answer her, a second woman appears from the water, rising up to surface besides her companion.\n\n\u201cLook, sister,\u201d she whispers, pointing towards you. \u201cIt\u2019s not a male this time. The men usually drown themselves trying to hear the song, but she\u2026\u201d She smiles faintly at you, pulling back a lock of matted grey hair to one side. You see the hint of fangs protruding from inside her mouth. \u201cWe haven\u2019t had a female come here before. Maybe she could join us. Our song has more effect with greater numbers\u2026\u201d\n\n\u201cAnother sister?\u201d the green-haired woman sounds dubious. \u201cBut we\u2019ve never done that before. Is she\u2026safe?\u201d\n\n\u201cMaybe not, but we can easily change her.\u201d The other woman looks at you curiously. \u201cTraveller of the skies, we are the inhabitants of this isle. Everything you see before you is our property and ours alone. Those who visit our land are drawn into the dark waters and consumed by our sisters and children, giving us new life. We share the energy among us and channel it into the land itself, replenishing it. We do not die. We do not perish. Settlers sometimes come here and seek to drain the resources from the island, but no man cannot resist our song. We take from them what they seek to take from us.\u201d\n\nShe holds out a slim hand towards you. \u201cWould you like to join us, traveller? Another female would be a welcome addition to our circle. If you become one of our sisters, you too will enjoy the privileges afforded to us all. However, I will not force you. Should you refuse, we will do you no harm, but please think very carefully before you answer.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Agree to join them", "result": "\u201cWonderful,\u201d she says with a smile. \u201cThen let me welcome you in the tradition of our people. A kiss is necessary to seal the agreement of mutual acceptance.\u201d\n\nBefore you can do anything, the grey-haired woman moves swiftly through the water towards you and embraces you tightly. Her lips move onto yours in a surprisingly intimate fashion, and you can't quite keep the shock out of your eyes. You can feel your body changing as an effect of the kiss, as if your internal organs are slowly undergoing alterations of their own\u2026\n\nScales appear upon your face, and the tone of your skin deepens to a pale blue. Your vision begins to go fuzzy, and a small measure of panic starts to take root in your mind. What's going on? What exactly have you agreed to do here? Before you, the woman mouths a single word before disappearing into the waters of the lake. You feel her grip your ankles tightly from under the surface...and pull you underwater with her.\n\nYou struggle to break her grip, but in moments you are forced under the surface. With a start, you realise that you can actually breathe underwater. What has happened to you? You feel as if you have gills in place, rather than lungs, and that your body has altered to that of an aquatic being. Fins and scales grow down your body, and any prior hunger or fatigue has lessened as a result. You don't know what significance this has, but\u2026\n\nThe two women from before are swimming underwater with you and watching you closely. You see now that their bodies are just like yours, and that instead of legs they have a fish-like tail. Nothing of the sort has happened to you, however, so you are able to keep your legs for now.\n\n\u201cCome, sister,\u201d the green-haired woman says to you, much warmer to you now. She isn't a woman at all, you realise. A fish? A mermaid? \u201cCome and meet the others. Let us share this land together, all of us.\u201d\n\nYou swim after her, deeper and deeper through the pleasant waters of the lake. More and more of these mermaids appear from around you, watching you with interest and chatting amongst themselves. You didn't know that so many of these creatures were living down here. You thought the entire island was empty of any intelligent life...\n\nRight at the bottom of the lake, you discover a curious sight. A stone altar of some kind has been built into the lake bed, upon which a human body is tied. He seems to have been dead for some time. You watch as the mermaids surround him in a tight circle, singing in unison. It's almost as if they're singing to his corpse.\n\n\u201cCome,\u201d your companion whispers to you, beckoning you forward. \u201cYou should join in too.\u201d\n\nCurious about this strange ritual, you stumble into the circle with her. The beautiful singing echoes all around you, and there is an addictiveness about the harmony of voices which is almost ethereal. You find yourself singing along, too, singing to the human corpse strapped upon the altar. It's mesmerising, hypnotic, and you soon lose yourself in the sound...\n\nYou don't know how long you've been singing for, but before long you start to feel a form of energy take place in your stomach. The feeling is not unpleasant. Euphoria washes over you as the energy grows and grows, giving rise to a greater volume of voices than before. Somehow, you and the other mermaids are leeching away the human's composition, converting it into something which will benefit everyone. The other mermaids are feeling it, too. You can see it in their faces. One of them smiles at you, understanding that you are with them, and you can't help but smile back.\n\nThe ceremony soon ends, and a new day starts anew. You spend all of your time with the community of mermaids around you, exploring the lake and occasionally going up to the surface when any new settlers think to land upon this island. Each time they do, you join in the singing with your sister mermaids, and watch as the men have no choice but to come deeper and deeper into the waters of the lake. They cannot resist the lure of your singing, and drown in the process.\n\nEvery week or so, you participate in another ceremony among one of the drowned men, devouring their body in order to give life back to the island. You feel that you are doing wonderful work here. The bodies of these humans can keep you living forever, really. This is a life that you can look back upon without feeling any regret.\n\nYou ultimately remain here with the other mermaids, here upon this seemingly deserted island, feeding upon any explorers foolish enough to try and settle here. The words of your sisters ring true. This is your land. You will not let anyone take it from you. This island belongs to you.\n\nYou live here in contentment, oblivious to the chaos going on in the surface. This island will not fall, not whilst you continue to sustain it with the bodies of fools.\n\nAfter falling from a great height, you have found a new place in life.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Refuse", "result": "\u201cYou refuse?\u201d The woman looks greatly disappointed, and a sigh escapes her lips. \u201cThat's a shame. The greatest wonders await you beneath the surface of this lake. I will withdraw my offer.\u201d\n\nWith that, she turns away from you and disappears into the water with a small splash. Her companion stares at you for a moment and also vanishes underwater with her. You wait there for a few minutes longer, but neither of the women re-emerge. It seems that they have gone for good.\n\nCurious about her words, you try swimming underwater yourself to see if you can find them again. Unfortunately, you find that the waters here are too murky to see much at all, aside from a few schools of fish swimming near the surface of the lake. The singing has stopped, and only dead silence greets you. You swim around for a while longer, but nothing else happens.\n\nFeeling as if you might have missed out on something, you decide that there is nothing else here for you and leave the waters of the lake behind you. You've now explored the entire island and have seen everything there is to offer. It may now be time for you to settle here and find your place in life.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "Over the coming months, you begin to settle into daily life on this isolated island. There\u2019s more than enough food and resources here to keep you set for life, and there\u2019s more than enough to be getting on with. Having resigned yourself to the fact that you are going to be living alone, you start setting up some personal projects for yourself. You work on cutting down trees to build a basic shelter, although the natural climate here means that sleeping rough isn\u2019t really a problem. Over time, you improve your skills and modify the shelter into a small cabin for all of your needs.\n\nYou never see anyone else land on this island, not even the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn. For the most part, people leave you alone. It\u2019s maybe a year before you see even one airship on the horizon, but it doesn\u2019t come anywhere the island and soon disappears out of sight. It\u2019s all right, really. You\u2019ve started to get used to the constant loneliness, day in, day out. It doesn\u2019t really bother you anymore. Besides, you still have a firm grip on reality \u2013 you\u2019re not going to start going mad and go around talking to trees.\n\nSometimes you lie awake at night, wondering about all the chaos going on at the surface. It doesn\u2019t matter anymore, because you\u2019re so far removed from that now. You wonder about the fate of the captain aboard the airship, left drifting for eternity through open skies. You hope that she managed to find help, but it\u2019s likely that she didn\u2019t make it.\n\nWith no social contact, you seek the company of animals and begin taking in a few of them as pets. Not that you\u2019re going to become a crazy cat lady or something, but it\u2019s better than talking to yourself all the time. You start growing fruit and vegetables, using the resources of the island to your advantage. Over time, you see the potential of harvesting crops and raising animal as livestock, though you still have a long way to go.\n\nThe island never changes. Nobody is living here but you, so realistically the trees should be growing like crazy and the vegetation going out of control\u2026and yet, this isn\u2019t what you see happening. Everything seems to be stabilised in a very balanced order, leading you to suspect that some ulterior force may be at work. You\u2019re not complaining, though. It saves you having to curb the area yourself.\n\nIn the end, you live here alone for the rest of your days, free from the chaos and violence which plagues the surface. You have your pets and animals for company, and there\u2019s enough resources to keep you busy. You have to be careful, though, because it isn\u2019t easy living alone. There are times when you feel ill and still have to do everything yourself. The animals grow used to your presence, until you almost feel as if you\u2019re a part of their little family. They help out in their own little ways, bringing you food and sustenance when you become sick.\n\nYou\u2019re alone, but you\u2019re still happy and feel fortunate that this is how things have turned out. You take each day as it comes and ensure that you live in the moment.\n\nAfter falling from a great height, this is the life you\u2019ve chosen for yourself.", "action_results": []}]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Stay with the drifting ship", "result": "You decide not to risk it. The captain\u2019s life is already compromised, and you still have some supplies left to make it to the next possible island. Granted, the captain may have been a little rude and abrasive to you when you first met her, but she did allow you to stay on board. You can\u2019t help but feel a little responsible for what happened to her.\n\nThe island appears before you, but you choose not to disembark. Before long, it has disappeared from view.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "Over the next few days, the airship you\u2019re on continues to drift at the mercy of the wind. You see no other inhabitable islands within range, and have no way of turning the ship around towards the islands you do see. Progress is painfully slow, and you feel sure that you will die here. Your supplies have dwindled down to almost nothing.\n\nThe captain\u2019s condition worsens near the end of the week. You manage to get her conscious enough to eat what little food and water you have left, but she barely eats anything at all. You don\u2019t have much hope for her survival, and every day she seems weaker than ever. A realistic approach would be to leave her to die and save what precious provisions remain, but you can\u2019t see what good that will do. This ship isn\u2019t going anywhere, after all.\n\nIt\u2019s difficult to sleep at night on the hard wooden deck. The stink of the corpses is too much to bear, and you spend hours dragging them off the ship and shoving him over the side. You thought that removing the extra weight would help the ship move faster, but it doesn\u2019t. Nothing works. Nothing you do seems to help anymore.\n\nYou run out of food in the middle of the second week.\n\nThere\u2019s still water. Water can keep someone going a lot longer than food deprivation will. It hasn\u2019t rained for so long. No storms. No rainfall. You almost wish for a storm to hit the ship, something to break the monotony, but right now this isn\u2019t a ship anymore. This is just half a ship, and you\u2019re just half of the skeleton crew.\n\nJust mere skeletons now.\n\nYou\u2019re getting weak from lack of food. The gnawing pain in your stomach won\u2019t go away, and you don\u2019t want to waste what little water is left. You think about denying the captain water altogether. Someone has to survive.\n\nWhen the next week begins, you awaken to see a strange red mist rise up ahead, out of the gloom. You\u2019ve never seen such a thing before, and something about it frightens you. You feel that the airship has entered a part of the sky that nobody should enter, like a forbidden area. You don\u2019t want anything to do with this mist, just want to lie on your bed and clamp your hands over your ears and block everything out.\n\nYou\u2019re so hungry. You\u2019re so hungry and tired, tired and hungry, sick and tired, tired and sick\u2026Does it really matter anymore? Does anything matter? ", "action_results": [{"action": "Hide in the captain\u2019s room until the mist passes", "result": "You stay huddled in the captain\u2019s room, keeping the door tightly shut. You don\u2019t know why, but something about that mist makes your flesh crawl. As you lock the door, however, you suddenly remember that you left the unconscious captain outside on the deck, right before the red mist was about to descend. She\u2019ll be vulnerable to whatever effects it has. You hesitate to run back out there and get her.\n\nJust then, you start to hear strange noises from outside. It sounds like some kind of wailing, quiet yet piercing, and it's enough to drive you into a corner with your hands clamped firmly over your ears. You start to imagine that some strange force is going to board the ship and break the door down before bearing down on you. Muttering incoherently to yourself, you crouch by the wall and squeeze your eyes shut, hoping that the mist will pass on.\n\nThe air feels thicker than usual. It\u2019s getting harder and harder to breathe. You feel something change in the surrounding atmosphere, something so subtle that you wouldn\u2019t even notice it otherwise. As it is, you\u2019re so busy locked in your own irrational fear with your hands over your ears that you can\u2019t help but notice it.\n\nSlowly, very slowly, you feel everything start to go back to normal.\n\nIt\u2019s nearly half an hour before your fear subsides enough for you to emerge back on deck. You\u2019re shaking as you crawl out of the cabin, shaking with a mixture of extreme hunger and trepidation. The red mist is gone. The captain\u2019s body is lying undisturbed on the upper deck. Nothing bad seems to have happened. You start to relax, realising your mind must have been playing tricks on you. Time can do that to you. Lack of food, lack of sleep, lack of all those little things you need in life until you find yourself getting delusional and seeing things that aren\u2019t there \u2013\n\nYou walk over to the captain\u2019s body. Her skin is cold and her mouth is open slightly. She is dead.\n\nThere is no way to tell if she finally succumbed to her injuries over the past few weeks, or if the strange red mist had something to do with it. You stumble back from her corpse in confusion and terror, searching for somewhere to escape to. There\u2019s nowhere else but here. The red mist disappeared as quickly as it came\u2026\n\nThat\u2019s not all, either. Something else has changed, something that you didn\u2019t count on. It\u2019s not something to do with you, or the captain, or your lack of supplies, yet at the same time it\u2019s one of the most important things you\u2019ve been relying on up to this moment in time.\n\nThe wind has stopped.\n\nDesperately, you run over to the side of the airship and look down. Nothing. Nothing but an empty void stretching down to the surface of the planet. No wind. No wind to blow you forward. The airship is no longer drifting \u2013 it\u2019s stationary. Static. Your vessel is at a standstill, here at the edge of an endless sky with no hope of salvation.\n\nYou stare out through endless skies, already weakened by lack of nutrients, before sinking to the ground. Your fate has been sealed. The airship is stranded in an uncharted region of open sky where the wind no longer blows, with no way to move forward on here. Without further resources, your situation is now beyond help. The days will turn into weeks, and the weeks will turn into months, but you have no future from here. You are never seen again.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stay up on deck to see what happens", "result": "You stay on deck as the red mist descends upon the airship. Something doesn\u2019t feel right about this, but you\u2019re too tired and hungry to care. The unconscious captain is lying nearby, just as vulnerable to the mist as you are. For a moment you consider taking her inside her room to give her some better protection from whatever effects the mist might have, but it\u2019s too late for that now. You brace yourself, ready to act if anything untoward happens.\n\nSlowly, you feel a strange feeling come over you. The pains of your body begin to recede, here within the red mist. What\u2019s going on? The gnawing hunger in your belly is beginning to disappear, along with your fatigue. There is a movement next to you, and you turn to see the captain open her eyes and slowly get to her feet. Could it be that the effects of the red mist are actually beneficial?\n\nEven if it\u2019s nothing but an illusion, you are grateful for the relief from the constant pain that has plagued you for the past week or so. Your body feels light now, lighter than air, and you feel almost as if you are floating. The captain turns to stare at you, and you realise that both of you are moving upwards. You don\u2019t know what\u2019s going on, but this doesn\u2019t seem too bad. Perhaps you could rise up to a greater height and find an island, where help may be found \u2013\n\nYou chance looking down and see a sight which fills you with horror.\n\nTwo dead bodies lie on the deck of the airship, directly below you. They belong to you and the captain.\n\nYou turn to call out to the captain, thinking to warn her about what\u2019s happening, but no sound escapes your lips. Your face and body is changing, splitting apart, slowly disintegrating\u2026into just another part of the red mist. The same thing is happening to the captain. She opens her mouth in a silent scream just seconds before she, too, is absorbed.\n\nThe red mist marks an uncharted region of the sky, beyond which no wind blows at all. It has one primary, deadly purpose: to leech away the life-force of the poor souls who drift this far away from the sky islands, far away from any hope of civilisation. Your life-force has now been converted into new energy to facilitate the mist, and you exist no longer.\n\nYou are just part of the red mist now, drifting eternally across this patch of sky to prey upon any survivors of doomed airships which come here. You perish here within uncharted territory, yet live on as part of a mass entity, claiming the lives of others who have already given up hope.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Cross over to the other part of the ship where Mother Ghared is, which is plummeting towards the ground", "result": "You must be mad to think of doing this. Quickly, you leap over the gap and onto the separated part of the doomed ship, which is quickly plummeting towards earth at a deadly speed. Above you, the remaining half remains airborne. It quickly disappears from sight as you fall.\n\nIt\u2019s impossible to keep your footing on the deck when the ship is falling so fast; parts of it are beginning to break up again from the constant acceleration. Gritting your teeth, you force yourself to crawl over to where Mother Ghared is lying. Her eyes are open, and she seems faintly aware of what is going on around here, but she is otherwise unhurt. If anything, she just looks exhausted.\n\nWhen she sees you, her eyes widen and she grabs your wrist. \u201cFljght, Fljght,\u201d she whispers to you urgently, pressing a crumpled scroll into the palm of your hand. The words she speak are not in your language. \u201cFljght, fljght\u2026\u201d\n\nHer eyes close as she falls back into unconsciousness. You stare at her in confusion as the ship continues to fall. The scroll she gave you is covered with strange symbols and runes that are incomprehensible to you. Somehow, you think she was trying to give you to a clue.", "action_results": [{"action": "Say the word \u201cFljght\u201d", "result": "You utter the incantation, and the scroll glows faintly before disintegrating into nothing. The glow itself has not faded, however, but has spread to the soles of your feet. With a start, you realise that you are no longer falling, and that your body feels as light as a feather. You are no longer in any danger of plummeting to your death.\n\nMoving forward, you are surprised to find that you can now move in any direction \u2013 up and down, too \u2013 at will. You have as much freedom as a bird, and can fly through to the air as you see fit. The activated scroll has bestowed this power on you, and you may now fly from here to your heart\u2019s content.\n\nSadly, this power of flight is not extended to Mother Ghared. She continues to fall towards the ground at a faster speed, until you can no longer see her at all. You start to fly down towards her with your new-found ability, but discover that you can only do so at a fixed speed. There is no way to accelerate, and therefore no way of saving Mother Ghared before she disappears into the void far below.\n\nYou have no choice but to travel away from here. Fear washes over you at the thought that this ability may actually be temporary. What if you could lose this power at any given moment?\n\nWith this in mind, you turn to fly as far away from here as you can, away from the ruins of the airship far above you. You don\u2019t know where you\u2019re going, exactly, but anywhere is better than this.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "For the next few hours or so, you fly across the skies at a mediocre speed. The wind blows through your hair as you travel, and you feel a kind of freedom wash over you that you\u2019ve never quite experienced before. Throughout your life, you\u2019ve been content to remain settled upon your own island, never venturing out into the skies around you. Right now, however, you feel as if you can literally go anywhere. Any island, any port, above the clouds, down to the ruined surface\u2026The sky\u2019s the limit, so to speak. You feel as if you could fly like this forever.\n\nYou\u2019re not going to do that, of course, because you\u2019re still wary that the effect of the scroll will wear off before long. You will have to land somewhere soon, because ultimately you want to find a new island to settle upon. A new home to call your own. A place where you can start again\u2026\n\nWithin the hour, you pass the remains of several islands floating in the sky, broken chains dangling uselessly into empty space. As you approach, you realise that these are parts of bigger islands which have already fallen towards earth. Nothing remains there anymore. They have all suffered the same fate as the place you used to call home.\n\nIt\u2019s some time before you finally see one island which still remains intact. From here, you can see that there\u2019s a considerable number of inhabitants; numerous houses, roads and streets stretch out below you. Why, it looks like there might be a town down there. There\u2019s definitely some kind of community. The question is, will that community approve of you?", "action_results": [{"action": "Land at this new island", "result": "You touch down upon the edge of the island, a thrill racing through you at the thought of what lies beyond. Immediately, the glow fades away from the soles of your feet and the power leaves you. So that\u2019s how it is: the scroll\u2019s effects last as long until you touch solid ground again. In theory, you could abuse such a power, but you don\u2019t want to push your luck.\n\nThe town before you is bustling with crowds of people and shops on every street corner. You\u2019ve never seen anything quite like this. In fact, you\u2019re not quite sure this isn\u2019t just part of a small city. The diversity of species here is mind-blowing: you see Auvahrs chatting to each other in the marketplace, Tenurs tending their stalls and displaying their wares, Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn officials marching up and down the streets as if they own the whole place, other subspecies you\u2019ve never seen before staring at the scene like some kind of tourist\u2026You ever see nameless ones like you. Unworthy ones, as the captain called them, but you don\u2019t take to that nonsense. Nameless is what you are. It\u2019s what you\u2019ve always been.\n\nA large glistening sign at the main port spells it out for you.\n\n\nWELCOME TO MAJERUK\n\nWHERE DREAMS COME TO LIFE\n\n\nYou could definitely settle in a place like this. You love the city. You love the hustle and bustle of the crowds, the countless things to do on every street, the sheer size and depth of the place you\u2019ve found yourself in. There\u2019s libraries, museums, galleries, bookshops, clothiers, governing halls for Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn officials, various buildings that you can\u2019t even begin to describe\u2026All you have to do is get a foot on the ladder and you\u2019ll be in.\n\nThis is a place which rewards you for doing very little \u2013 or, conversely, which rewards you with little for doing far too much. Exchange of goods and money. Economics. The arts. Societies. Meeting halls. Dance, music, sculptures, concerts, religion\u2026\n\n\u201cExcuse me, ma\u2019am,\u201d a curt voice says behind you.\n\nAll at once, the illusion is broken. You turn round to see three stern-looking Auvahrs in uniform, carrying firearms at their belt. At least, you assume they\u2019re firearms. You\u2019ve only ever seen pictures of them in books before, never having crossed out of your own little island before now. You\u2019ve heard such stories of the city\u2026\n\n\u201cYou are under arrest for the unlawful use of privileges available only to high-ranking members of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn,\u201d the man says coldly. \u201cAs an Unworthy, you should not have access to such abilities.\u201d\n\nAt first, you just stare at him in confusion. Abilities? Wait a second. Is he talking about the scroll\u2019s power which allowed you to fly here? Perhaps that\u2019s the issue here. Someone saw you using the flying ability \u2013 or sensed it, detected it, whatever \u2013 and decided that you\u2019d breached some kind of unspoken law of theirs.\n\n\u201cThat wasn\u2019t my fault,\u201d you protest. \u201cThe airship \u2013 \u201d\n\n\u201cYou were caught using a long-distance Flight scroll,\u201d the official says, his tone rather hostile. \u201cUnless you have a very good reason for doing so, Unworthy, you will face the penalty of breathing the laws of Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn. The island of Majeruk is under the jurisdiction of the Auvahrs of Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn, and all must abide by our rules. A lifetime upon a prison island will do a world of good for scum like you.\u201d\n\nSurely, if you were to explain yourself rationally to the man, then he should understand that this is all a big misunderstanding and let you go. Right? They wouldn\u2019t judge you on something like this, face to face. Surely they can let it slide just this once. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell him your story", "result": "You see no reason not to tell the truth. Swiftly, you explain to the official the full story of how you fell from your island and how Mother Ghared saved your life, taking you on board the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn airship. As soon as you mention this, the men exchange glances between each other, shaking their heads doubtfully, and look at you with greater suspicion than ever. You continue talking about how you activated the scroll, gaining the ability of flight for a temporary basis, but the official abruptly holds up a hand to stop you.\n\n\u201cI have heard quite enough,\u201d he says sharply. \u201cYour story is an unlikely one to begin with. Whilst there have been reports that many islands have been falling due to the effects of the chaos on the surface, it is inconceivable that a high-ranking member of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn would choose to save your skin. You are an Unworthy. Your life is not of equal worth to a normal person.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s not true!\u201d you protest. \u201cMother Ghared saved my life!\u201d\n\n\u201cIs that so?\u201d He folds his arms. \u201cAnd where is Mother Ghared now? Can she testify to this?\u201d Taken off-guard, you start to splutter that Mother Ghared probably didn\u2019t make it, but the man pushes aside your excuses. \u201cEven if you are telling the truth, which I greatly doubt, it makes one thing very clear: no true member of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn would choose to save the life of an Unworthy. If Mother Ghared truly acted as you claim, then it means that the rules and regulations of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn have not been followed correctly. I see no reason to trust your word. Rather, it seems far more likely that you were a stowaway on board.\u201d\n\nWith that, the official turns away and issues a sharp command to the men on either side of him. The Auvahrs immediately step forward and grab you, pulling your arms behind your back painfully. You struggle indignantly in their grip, protesting all the way as they frog-march you in the direction of the main port. Nothing about this is fair! Have you survived your trip from the airship only to be taken prisoner by the same race of people who saved you in the first place?\n\n\u201cAs the presiding justiciar of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn stationed upon Majeruk,\u201d the lead official says in a rather formal tone, \u201cwe find you guilty of the offence of using a long-distance Flight scroll, an item used only by high-ranking members of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn. Normal citizens are not permitted access to such privileges, let alone an Unworthy like you. Having heard your story, we also find you guilty of the additional crime of stowing on board an airship under the command of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn, as well as possible contributing to its destruction!\u201d\n\nYou are forced into the back seat of a cramped-looking aerial vehicle, and strapped in tightly with a grim-looking official seated next to you. Two more men enter the front of the vehicle. The engines start to fire up.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s going on?\u201d you demand, fearful of what they intend to do with you. The Auvahrs are practically treating you like a criminal. You don\u2019t know what they do with such people, because on your island you never had to deal with anyone like that. \u201cWh\u2026where are you taking me?\u201d\n\nThe lead official barely glances at you. \u201cPrefect, take the Unworthy to Island 39. She is to be classified as a Class 3H criminal of the fourth degree. If she talks at all during the journey, silence her.\u201d He slams the door on you and turns away without another word.\n\nFrightened about what fate lies in store for you now, you can do nothing but watch as the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn drive you away from the attractive island of Majeruk, towards a grim-looking location in the distance. You are strapped in so tightly that you can barely breathe, making escape impossible. The man in the seat next to you is watching you closely, making you feel very uncomfortable.\n\nNobody talks. Nobody says a word, not to you or any of their colleagues. The Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn operate in a professional manner which scares you, honestly. It\u2019s about half an hour before the vehicle you\u2019re in start to slow down. You chance a glance over the side of the vehicle and see an ominous-looking island, surrounded by cliffs on all sides. Nothing about your situation seems promising at all.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "You are forced out of the vehicle with your hands tied behind your back, where the officials march you over to a tall, grey, oblong-shaped building situated some distance inland. As you step inside, you are shoved into a cramped, featureless interrogation cell with dim lighting and no windows to see through. Another Gahl'vuhr Sehn official sits opposite you, barking personal questions at you whilst the other men search you for any weapons or illegal contraband. You sit through the whole experience in a kind of numb shock, never having been through anything like this before.\n\nAfter about an hour, you are taken to the strip of land which lies beyond. A grim sight greets your eyes. Thousands and thousands of people are locked within maximum security cells, isolated here away from the general public, some of which are suspended above mid-air to conserve space. Men and women of all races, including some mutants like you saw before at the airship, peer out from behind the bars. Food and water are strictly rationed and prisoners are permitted no more than an hour per day at the exercise yard, before being put to work doing hard labour at the mines, located at the other end of the island.\n\n\u201cWhat're you in for, girl?\u201d a mutant sneers at you as you pass by his cage.\n\nYou are thrown into a square cell of your own, situated underground. A small plate of stale food lies in the corner, and your stomach rumbles fro not having eaten all day. There should be water here, too, but the guard with you informs you that they can't get fresh water to every cell during the day. You may have to remain thirsty until they find the time to give you a refill.\n\n\u201cSweet dreams, kid,\u201d he says nastily.\n\nThe cell door slams shut behind you with a very real tone of permanency. This is your fate at the hands of the Gahl'vuhr Sehn. You have been sentenced to a maximum of thirty five years of underground confinement and hard manual labour, here upon one of the many prison islands which fill the skies.\n\nMoreover, it is likely that you will not survive long in such conditions. Prisoners who fail to meet their work quota daily are punished severely, and your body does not possess sufficient stamina to bear the torture experienced at a Gahl'vuhr Sehn prison island. Withdrawal of food and water is not uncommon, and many of the inmates are at the mercy of the guards. Females in particularly do not have any protective rights from assault, not whilst they have their prisoner status. Even if you could escape, the island is ringed by cliffs on all sides. You are deprived even of the opportunity to commit suicide.\n\nFate has not been kind to you. You will remain here at the prison island for the rest of your mercifully short life.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Make something up", "result": "\u201cThere is an extremely good reason for this,\u201d you say. You doubt that these men will believe you if you tell them the truth, considering their low opinion of your species to begin with. Your best guess is to fabricate something which seems believable. \u201cThis Flight scroll doesn\u2019t belong to me.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe are quite aware,\u201d the official says fervently.\n\n\u201cNo, no.\u201d You\u2019re not used to lying to people. There usually isn\u2019t any need to do so. \u201cI was ordered by\u2026by Mother Gherad to use it.\u201d\n\nHe frowns. \u201cDo you expect me to believe that, Unworthy? A high-ranking member of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn willingly gave you a long-range Flight scroll? I have heard more convincing tales extending from the back of an anteater.\u201d\n\n\u201cShe gave me the scroll,\u201d you say quickly, \u201cin order to prevent it from falling into the hands\u2026of\u2026the enemy.\u201d What enemy? Who\u2019s the enemy? Lying to people is a lot harder than you thought. \u201cThe enemy, that is, of the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn. A\u2026rebel army of mutant rabbits.\u201d\n\n\u201cRabbits,\u201d the official repeats.\n\n\u201cYes, really. Really, really big ones. With axes.\u201d You\u2019re babbling now, but you might as well keep this up. \u201cIt was a valiant battle against the bunnies, and they were after the scroll of Flight in order to turn into flying mutant rabbits! They planned to assault this island, thousands of flying bunnies throwing axes at the poor citizens of Majeruk. Luckily, I thwarted their plans and now they will never have their rabbit revenge!\u201d\n\n\u201cIf I can just stop you there \u2013 \u201d \n\n\u201cMother Gherad died heroically defending the ship,\u201d you say dramatically, going all out with this story now. Now that you\u2019ve started, you cannot be stopped. \u201cWe could not hold them back for long. We had to poison their supply of carrots just to get an advantage. Lettuce, too!\u201d\n\n\u201cWait a second,\u201d one of the other men interrupts. \u201cYou mentioned\u2026it was a rebel army of mutant rabbits?\u201d\n\nYou nod enthusiastically. \u201cExactly.\u201d\n\n\u201cA rebel army. So\u2026how were they rebelling?\u201d\n\n\u201cRebelling against the Rabbit King,\u201d you say proudly. \u201cThere\u2019s a long, long history of all the rabbit rebellions before our time, going all the way back to Lord Rabbiter McRabbit himself. I will enlighten you now.\u201d\n\nWith a flourish, you then continue to rabbit on at great length, detailing the long history of two thousand years of rabbit-themed monarchs and bloody battles which claimed the lives of their citizens to gain vital land on the sky islands. You don\u2019t quite know how you came up with all this stuff, but you\u2019re going too fast to be able to stop now. The officials actually seem genuinely interested about all of this fictional backstory that you\u2019re pulling out of thin air \u2013 or at least, you think they are. They might not care at all.\n\n\u201c\u2026and that,\u201d you finish, twenty five minutes later, \u201cis the entire account of the rise and fall of the Rabbit Empire, shortly before Queen Fuzzlebunny came to the throne and brought civil war among the nations.\u201d You let out a long sigh, since you\u2019ve been talking for some time now. \u201cWould you like to hear it again?\u201d\n\n\u201cThat was very interesting, but no,\u201d the official says. He is looking at you long and hard. All of them are, actually. You can\u2019t quite tell what is going through their minds, but you\u2019re sure that you must have made a good impression. \u201cI think we\u2019ve had enough of rabbits.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhy are you looking at me like that?\u201d you ask. \u201cIs it the rabbits?\u201d\n\n\u201cNo,\u201d the first Auvahr states. \u201cIt isn\u2019t the rabbits.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat is it then?\u201d\n\n\u201cWe\u2019re looking at you like this,\u201d he says testily, \u201cbecause we think you\u2019re insane.\u201d\n\n\u201cReally?\u201d\n\nHe glances helplessly at his two companions, who look back at him in just a helpless a fashion. You watch as they whisper furtively amongst themselves, looking rather worried about the situation. Telling a tall tale about the rise and fall of the majestic Rabbit Empire was definitely a step in the right direction.\n\nEventually, the official steps forward towards you again. \u201cWe\u2019ve decided,\u201d he says resignedly, \u201cthat we are not going to press charges to you, on account of you straying so far from the original question that we can no longer remember what we were talking about in the first place.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt was the scroll,\u201d you remind him helpfully.\n\n\u201cRight. The scroll.\u201d The man sighs. \u201cLook. I\u2019m not prepared to hear you talk about damn rabbits for another thirty minutes. I don\u2019t have time for this. Rules are rules, and the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn has to make sure everything is perfect. Especially here in Majeruk. What I\u2019m going to say instead is that your usage of this high-level scroll was some kind of freak accident, because\u2026you do not seem like the kind of person with the mental capability to steal a Flight scroll whilst knowing what you were doing. My colleagues here will bear witness to that.\u201d\n\n\u201cDefinitely,\u201d says the official next to him. \u201cShe\u2019s bonkers.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou may remain in Majeruk for the time being,\u201d he says, with long-suffering patience, \u201cbut only because I don\u2019t want to stand here for over an hour listening to a crazy girl talking endlessly about fictional rabbits. You\u2019re free to go. Just\u2026don\u2019t do it again, alright?\u201d\n\nElated, you smile as the three officials turn on their heel and march back down the street the way they came. Somehow, you\u2019ve managed to get away with it. You\u2019re not sure where all of that inspiration for rabbit-themed history came from, but you ought to write it down sometime. Some people like that kind of thing, apparently, although you\u2019re yet to meet anyone like that in person.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "Majeruk promises to be an exciting place for you to live. There are numerous cities and towns across the island, and you take some time to explore your options before choosing on a suitable career path. In addition, the Gahl'vuhr Sehn occupy the whole of the land here and have set in place a number of strict rules for all citizens. After your last encounter with them, you decide not to do anything to annoy the governing body around here. You don't want to cause any trouble.\n\nThe first week is rather rough for you. With no money or resource of your own to trade \u2013 aside from the sword you kept from the airship, and that turns out to be worth very little of value in Majeruk \u2013 you are forced to sleep rough at night. The Gahl'vuhr Sehn do not allow people to sleep on the streets, which is fine for you because you see no problem with sleeping outside their towns. It's always good to experience new things, but you have to take care in doing so. The wrong situation could see you lose your life at the hands of the local wildlife, which turn out to be unexpectedly hostile\u2026\n\nIt's some time before you finally manage to secure employment as a courier, delivering goods and packages between the towns in Majeruk. The job gives you an advance payment, enough so that you can afford to rent some accommodation in the suburbs of the central city. It's hard work, with long hours, but you keep at it and soon begin to learn the various trade routes going around the island. It makes your job easier, and it's another year before you have enough money and resources to try your hand at another job.\n\nEvery day, you hear news about the chaos on the surface and how more and more sky islands are falling down to earth in a blaze of constant destruction. It makes you think of home, or what used to be home. You think back to all the events that brought you here in the first place, to Mother Gherad and the captain on the airship which saved your life. You wonder if the captain ever made it out alive.\n\nYou make lots of new friends in Majeruk over the years, but still you worry that such a densely-populated island might suffer the same fate as your first island did. What if everything here is destroyed? With this in mind, you take to travelling. You've become quite an accomplished businesswoman by this point, taking on several jobs and even employing your own staff with ease. You're going up in the world. You manage numerous accounts of money, oversee cargo taken on board airships in an organisation built with your own two hands, and you know that you have to expand your horizons.\n\nMany years have passed, and you have more than enough to purchase an airship of your own now. You travel through the skies, venturing far and wide, but never stay on board for too long. Airships can be dangerous. You become a kind of explorer in your own right, navigating countless islands and assembling a crew of your own. For some time, you pursue this exciting choice of life, but you're not really sure what you're looking for. You know you're searching for something, but you just can't put your finger on it.\n\nIt's several years after that when you finally return to the island of Majeruk. It's the same as always, and business is booming, but you're now experienced enough to put in several advisors who can easily run your organisation by themselves with only limited help from you. Even the Gahl'vuhr Sehn are respectful to you. They still refer to you as \u201cUnworthy\u201d, more out of habit than anything else, but you have a mutual understanding of each other. You a force to be reckoned with.\n\nLooking at everything you've achieved over the years, you finally realise what you've been seeking. You want a place to settle down. Somewhere to settle down. A home, in nature, but you already have several homes across the skies. You decide to settle here in Majeruk. You think about the future, and seek a husband with which to bring up a family of your own. There is no shortage of men in Majeruk, and all of them are falling over themselves to propose to you. It's sweet of them, really, but a woman of your reputation and wealth can afford to be choosy.\n\nAt the end of it all, you remain here in the island of Majeruk for the rest of your days. You have lived a life filled with contentment, riches and great respute. You consider having children of your own and handing down the family business to them, once you grow old enough to retire, but that's in the future. You could have never predicted that things would work out so well.\n\nAfter falling from a great height, you have risen to become a woman of grand accomplishments and great success.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Ignore it and keep going", "result": "You continue to fly through open skies, unable to rest anywhere for fear that the scroll\u2019s power will suddenly wear off. Hours pass by, and still you see no other inhabitable islands or places where you can land. You encounter a few passing airships \u2013 active ones, thankfully \u2013 but they are only merchant ships and pay you no heed. You dare not stop.\n\nThere are numerous lightning storms in this part of the sky, and you are quick to stay away from them. Many an airship has fallen victim to the fierce and unpredictable weather conditions escalated by the deadly situation on the surface far below. As it is, a single strike would probably send you plummeting out of the sky. You need to stay airborne at all costs. You saw what the surface is like now: nobody can survive there anymore, and the people who remain there now have no future.\n\nNightfall comes at last, and you are exhausted from flying for so long in one go. It is too dangerous to keep going in the dark, anyway, so you absolutely need to rest soon. You decide that the next inhabitable island you see will just have to go. You should change your angle of ascent, too, and see what you can find. Up or down? There has to be something here. So many islands have fallen now, so many lives have been destroyed\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Choose to ascend", "result": "You fly upwards for over twenty minutes more before you spy a small fragment of an island, almost invisible to the naked eye from this distance. It seems to have broken off from a greater land mass, possibly another victim of the chaos on the surface. The island looks to be too small to offer you many favourable options, but you\u2019re in no position to pass up the opportunity. You\u2019ve been flying all day long now, with limited food to keep you going, and you\u2019re extremely tired. As things stand, you\u2019ll just have to take a chance on this.\n\nHoping that you won\u2019t regret your decision, you disembark upon this small patch of island. Immediately, the glow fades away from the soles of your feet and the power leaves you. So that\u2019s how it is: the scroll\u2019s effects last as long until you touch solid ground again. In theory, you could abuse such a power, but you don\u2019t want to push your luck.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "The island you stand upon seems eerily similar to the one you lived upon previously. It seems strange to suggest such a thing, but you feel almost as if you've been here before. You take a few steps forward upon the crisp, yellowed sand under your feet, and walk towards a cluster of primitive-looking huts in the distance. A dusty path runs towards the centre of a peaceful-looking village, and there is hardly any wind here at all. It's all very quiet.\n\nUnable to shake off the feeling of deja vu, you continue walking up to the village square. It's quite dark now, but you can see lights up ahead. A small group of people are sharing a bite to eat over a roaring fire, chattering away excitedly in good humour. They are not talking in Common Tongue, like the Auvahrs of the Gahl'vuhr Sehn. They speak your language fluently.\n\nYou approach the fire, and the people turn in surprise to look at you. Their skin and body composition is very similar to yours. You realise, then, that they are the same species as you are: they are nameless. For an instant, you feel almost as if you are back home again, but you push the feeling away on the grounds that it must be some illusion. Your home has already been destroyed, and surely nothing can replace it.\n\n\u201cHello,\u201d you say to the people here, unsure what to say.\n\nA man and a woman look curiously at you and smile, before offering you a leg of meat. There is no suspicion or aggressiveness in their innocent faces. It's as if they've been expecting someone like you to arrive after all this time.\n\n\u201cSit and eat,\u201d the man says in a friendly tone as you accept the food. You haven't eaten all day. \u201cYou look tired.\u201d\n\n\u201cI am,\u201d you say, sitting down by the fire with him. \u201cI...I'm so tired.\u201d Your words feel slurred and inconsistent from heavy fatigue, but you feel that it's important to get this off your chest. \u201cWhat...what's the name of this island? Do you have a name?\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat kind of question is that?\u201d He smiles. \u201cWe do not name ourselves. Names give power to other people. Why do you ask these things? Do you have a name?\u201d\n\nYou shake your head. \u201cI do not.\u201d\n\n\u201cThen it is of no consequence.\u201d He gestures to one of the huts behind you. \u201cFeel free to use one of the rooms out back. Our brethren will not mind sharing their bed with a fellow nameless one, but we do not receive many travellers this way. Are you passing through?\u201d\n\nAs it is, you currently have no way off this island. You are stranded here, but somehow you don't see it that way. You look around you with tired eyes at the friendly people here, inviting you inside to share their food and drink with them. It looks so much like the village you used to call home. An island so small and seemingly insignificant that nobody else even knows it exists. You doubt that any airships even come this way. It's a tiny part of the world, isolated away from everything else.\n\nYou could settle here. You feel it in your bones. Start again, rebuild, reconnect with people, contribute to a living community, help each other out and start again...The thought brings tears of happiness to your eyes, and you have to look away for a moment. You didn't think this would ever happen, but you feel...as if you are finally home.\n\n\u201cNo,\u201d you answer. \u201cI'm not just passing through. I'm returning home.\u201d\n\nYou see in his eyes that he understands exactly what you mean. This island has not fallen. It is too high above the rest of the world, too isolated in its own little share of the skies to be affected by all the chaos going on at the surface. You hope that things will remain that way. It is true that you cannot predict the future, but you feel optimistic about what's waiting for you out there.\n\nAfter falling from a great height, you have finally found your way back home.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Choose to descend", "result": "You allow yourself to fall downwards, reasoning that you are now too high up to see any inhabitable islands. Your eyelids are heavy and your head drops onto your chest from your exhaustion, but you maintain some element of concentration and continue to descend at a normal pace. It might be your imagination, but the air pressure seems particularly high around here. Dark clouds have built up around you, filled with rain which is pelting down upon the surface\u2026\n\nThunder rumbles in your ears, and your eyes flick open when you realise that you have stumbled into the midst of a storm! Shaking your head, you start to fly away from the area to avoid the bad weather, but the wind buffets you back and forth and blows a torrent of rain right into your eyes. You cry out, shielding your face protectively, and start to fall through the clouds.\n\nYou\u2019re falling a bit too fast for your liking now, but at least you\u2019re clear of the storm. From here, you can see that you\u2019re actually not too far from the surface where chaos rages. That won\u2019t do at all. You decide to force yourself to slow down, trying to fly back up to where the sky islands are.\n\nNothing happens. You continue to plummet, faster and faster towards the earth. Your flying ability is no longer in effect!\n\nYou don\u2019t entirely understand what just happened \u2013 perhaps the storm did something to your abilities, or maybe the effect wore off on its own \u2013 but what\u2019s important is that you\u2019re now in constant freefall. Quickly, you try to suppress the sheer panic rising up in your chest and struggle to slow yourself down. Something gives, and you manage to lower your speed of descent \u2013 just barely. You might survive, but it\u2019s touch and go at this rate\u2026\n\nYou\u2019re so close to the surface of the planet now. You can see people down there. Buildings burned to the ground, screams and crying, the lava flow from an erupted volcano, mass flooding from the rising sea level\u2026It\u2019s not a place where you could ever survive. You need to stay in the skies. You need to stay up here\u2026\n\nThe noise from below gets louder and louder until it becomes almost unbearable. You can no longer stay in the sky, and you\u2019re going so fast that you can\u2019t focus on anything around you anymore. Praying very slightly, you brace yourself for a crash landing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "The impact is tremendous as you make contact with the surface. As luck would have it, the trajectory of your descent takes you away from the mainland and sends you into the ocean itself, your momentum forcing you deep underwater. Waves of pain wash over you, and for several long seconds you cannot move at all. You feel as if you have broken several bones in your body.\n\nFighting to conserve oxygen, one truth reveals itself to you: you are alive. You can hardly acknowledge the fact, but you are alive. The wind has been driven out of you, and you are already starting to swallow sea water; swiftly, you struggle to swim up to the surface for air. Agony rushes through your body at every little movement, prompting a scream deep within your throat that nobody will hear. You grit your teeth and keep swimming upwards, your lungs burning. You need to survive.\n\nYou break the surface at last, hacking and coughing as you take in fresh oxygen into your lungs. Air. Fresh air. From here, you can see the coastline isn't too far away. You should be able to make it as long as you tread water and take it nice and slowly. You've survived this far and you're determined to keep going, despite the mind-numbing pain tearing through your limbs.\n\nIt takes several minutes for you to get to dry land, but you can already tell that something is very wrong. You do not feel well. Perhaps it's the effect of swallowing so much sea water, but you are unsteady on your feet and you can feel a surge of unnaturally dark emotions rising up inside you. You do not feel like yourself. Grimly, you force yourself to suppress such thoughts and concentrate on reaching safety.\n\nThe coastline is littered with corpses.\n\nYou stagger forward and see people shambling across the beach. They do not look like people. Humans, yes. You haven't seen a human being for a long time, but you know what a rational person look like and these are different. Their clothes are ripped and torn, their skin covered by a mesh of angry black spots which suggest the telltale designs of disease, and there is a frenzy in their eyes which frightens you beyond anything you have witnessed so far.\n\nThe people have not reacted to your presence. They are screaming at the top of their voices, wielding vicious blades in their hands, and killing each other on sight. Countless bodies cover the blackened ground as far as the eye can see, like the gruesome remnants of some kind of battlefield. It's as if a war is going on, but you can see here that the war is purely internal.\n\nYou see two men beating another to death with a hatchet. A crowd of children have surrounded a woman and are stabbing her repeatedly, all with the same murderous frenzy in their eyes. Three girls are gouging out the eyes of a bystander. A strange haze has settled upon this place, this peaceful village that saw no such violence before. Everything has gone out of control. You knew the situation on the surface was dire, but you had no idea that it had escalated to such extremes...\n\nSomething snaps inside of you. Something wild. It's the same feeling you had just minutes ago, not long after you accidentally swallowed some of that seawater. You turn to look at the ocean curiously for a moment, and can't help but notice that the water is...a different colour than it's supposed to be. It's certainly not blue...\n\nYou drop to the ground, retching, as a new pain takes hold of you. You can't see anymore. Blood fills your eyes and you buckle forward, clutching at the ground in a similar frenzy to the people around you. You hear yourself scream aloud as every thought going through your mind is crushed into nothing, nothing but a maniacal desire for bloodlust. The world feels like it's revolving around you all of a sudden, revolving in a sea of haunted faces\u2026\n\nThere is no need to think anymore. You snarl and shriek like a wild beast, pouncing forward onto the nearest human being to pluck out their eyes and beat their face into a bloody mess. The man is holding a knife of some kind, and you immediately wrest it from his cold dead hands to take for yourself.\n\nGleefully, you charge at your next choice of prey. Two girls covered with blood from head to toe shamble towards you, half-blind. One of them is practically dead already, but she hasn't realised it yet. Both of her arms have been savagely torn off, and her head has been bashed in from one side. You slash at her with the knife and blood spurts out of her throat in a red fountain. The other girl lunges at your neck. You stab her in the stomach. She doesn't react.\n\nA man is clubbing you from behind, but you don't feel a thing. More people are here now. More people, more violence, more chaos. You twist out of your assailant's grip and kill another person, doesn't matter who it is. You're having fun, and every part of you loves it.\n\nThis is your place now. You're part of the neverending chaos on the surface, just another victim of the shambling horde drifting across the planet in your insatiable desire to kill every living creature you see. Nothing else matters, because this is your world. ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Say \u201cFljght, Fljght\u201d", "result": "You utter the incantation, and the scroll glows faintly before disintegrating into nothing. The glow itself has not faded, however, but has spread to the soles of your feet. With a start, you realise that you are no longer falling, and that your body feels as light as a feather. You are no longer in any danger of plummeting to your death.\n\nMoving forward, you are surprised to find that you can now move in any direction \u2013 up and down, too \u2013 at will. You have as much freedom as a bird, and can fly through to the air as you see fit. The activated scroll has bestowed this power on you, and you may now fly from here to your heart\u2019s content.\n\nThankfully, the same ability has also been granted to Mother Ghared. Though unconscious, she remains floating in the air before you. You take hold of her body, which you find to weigh scarcely anything at all, and bring her with you as you fly through the open skies. Perhaps she just needs some rest after what she\u2019s been through.\n\nWith Mother Ghared in tow, you turn to fly from here as far away as you can. You discover that you can only fly at a fixed speed, so there is no way to accelerate. Fear washes over you at the thought that this ability may actually be temporary. What if you could lose this power at any given moment?\n\nWith this in mind, you travel away from the ruins of the airship far above you, out into the vast vast open skies. You don\u2019t know where you\u2019re going, exactly, but anywhere is better than this.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Turn away and worry about yourself instead", "result": "You can\u2019t risk saving her. Who knows if you will succeed? Guiltily, you turn your eyes away from the scene. You don\u2019t want to see the results of your inaction. The opportunity has now passed, and may never be seized again. She isn\u2019t going to make it in time \u2013\n\n\u201cFprcf!\u201d\n\nA shrill cry erupts from the other end of the airship. The mast shudders as an invisible force slams to it, snapping it further at an awkward angle. You watch in amazement as the fractured beam crashes through the deck barely a metre away from the captain. She\u2019s alive.\n\nYou turn your head to see Mother Ghared frozen in position, her hands outstretched towards the fallen mast. Your knowledge of her abilities is still limited, but you understand that she has saved the captain\u2019s life. The captain waste no time moving away from the fallen mast and is already on her feet, struggling to defend herself from another group of mutants.\n\nBefore you can move, you see Mother Ghared slump to the ground. She seems exhausted by the effort of stopping the heavy mast, and the energy drain is too much for her. You start to force yourself to your feet, knowing that time is of the essence. She needs help, and fast.\n\nThat\u2019s when you hear the violent splintering sound below you.\n\nFearing the worst, you see that the heavy mast has in fact torn straight through the centre of the airship. It is in no condition to fly. The vessel has already been damaged by the attacks of the mutants, and you can only watch in horror as more and more cracks appear, joining together as one\u2026\n\nThe airship breaks apart down the middle.\n\nYou see the mutants react with surprise as they start to plummet along with their half of the ship. Surprisingly enough, they can no longer fly. You\u2019re not quite sure why, but you have a feeling that their wings from before were only temporary. In addition...part of the airship somehow remains airborne. You\u2019re not in a position to question the laws of aerodynamics right now, but you need to act fast.\n\nYour half of the airship is currently airborne and in no danger of falling \u2013 or so you hope. The captain is next to you, slumped in a heap. The other half of the ship is about to plummet downwards, and you realise that Mother Ghared is still on that side. She\u2019s unconscious and has no idea of what has happened.\n\nYou have a split second to decide whether to cross over the gap to Mother Ghared, or stay here with the captain. You have no idea what condition either person is in.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Retreat into the cabins below deck", "result": "Taking the captain\u2019s advice to heart, you head below deck towards the relative safety of the corridors. There\u2019s nobody else down here, as all of the crewmen have gone upstairs to steer the ship clear of the storm. You start to head towards your bedroom, wondering what will happen next\u2026\n\nA violent tremor shakes the airship, throwing you off your feet. Fearfully, you stay braced against the wall as the atmosphere around the ship becomes increasingly more turbulent. The storm is very close now. Suddenly, you hear cries of alarm go up on deck and the loud tearing of wood. You grab onto one of the banisters for support as the entire vessel rocks back and forth\u2026\n\nYou hear the sound of thunder. It\u2019s right above you. With a start, you realise that the crew have failed to steer the ship clear in time. The storm has made contact.\n\nThe noise around you is now tremendous. Rain and sleet pour in from above, and holes open up above your head as lightning rips through the airship. You cower in the corner of the corridor, frantically looking for cover, but you don\u2019t know anywhere that\u2019s safe anymore. Perhaps you have overstayed your welcome.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hide in one of the cabins", "result": "Forcing yourself to remain upright, you manage to slip into one of the empty cabins. The noise above is getting louder and louder, and you crouch in the corner, hoping that you\u2019ll be safe here. Surely someone else will come down here to seek shelter as well? As time passes, you see no sign of any other crew members. Before long, you cannot hear their voices anymore, drowned out by the sound of the thunder\u2026\n\nThe walls around you are shaking, buffeted by the force of the storm on all sides. It feel as if the ship is starting to break up, and you start to wonder if maybe this wasn\u2019t such a good idea after all. You don\u2019t feel safe here. Even so, you hesitate to move from your current position.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue hiding here in the hope that the storm will pass", "result": "Despite your better judgement, you remain huddled in the corner of the cabin. The whole ship is shaking violently now. Cracks appear in the walls and ceiling, and you cover your head protectively with your hands. What\u2019s going on out there?\n\nYou start to get to your feet, wanting to move to somewhere more secure, but it\u2019s far too late. The opportunity has already passed. The ceiling of the cabin caves in from above, and your body is crushed under tons of falling rubble. You do not live to see what happens next, but the rest of the airship is destroyed minutes afterwards. You perish here on the airship, in the midst of a violent lightning storm.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Move out of your hiding place as it\u2019s no longer safe here", "result": "You\u2019re not staying here a second longer. Quickly, you break out of cover and run out into the corridor. Cracks have appeared in the walls and ceiling, and the roof of the cabin caves in as you make it out of there. You\u2019ve spent quite enough hiding from the storm. It\u2019s time to find a way off this ship, once and for all.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "Judging your chances of survival on board this ship to be diminishing by the second, you start to search the surrounding cabins for a way out of here. There has to be something that you can use. Airships are fitted with emergency safety measures for use in the worst-case scenario, such as equipment failure or a particularly vicious storm. You're not on the surface, after all. You\u2019re not in one of those strange human ships which take people over water, able to throw yourself overboard and swim away from all the pandemonium\u2026\n\nInside one of the cabins near the back, you find a disused aerial vehicle which is fitted with an engine of some kind. At least, you assume that it\u2019s an engine. It looks quite similar to some of the devices you saw in the captain\u2019s room. Buttons and dials cover the inside of the vehicle, and there is only space for one person to drive it.\n\nThe craft is covered with dust and cobwebs and looks as if it hasn\u2019t been used in some time. You have no idea if it still works. If you\u2019re really unlucky, it might even blow up in your face.\n\nFrom far above, you can hear the sound of the storm growing louder and louder. You can no longer hear the voices of the crew members from before. A chill goes up your spine as you realise that the airship is being dragged deeper and deeper into the storm.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to operate the vehicle", "result": "You step into the vehicle and strap yourself in, before realising that you have no idea how to physically turn it on. With a frown, you examine the numerous buttons and dials on the dashboard in front of you. One of these must start up the machine \u2013 if it works at all, that is. After about a minute, you manage to narrow down the correct button to just two of them. They are all labelled, but naturally the words are written in Common Tongue.", "action_results": [{"action": "Push the button which says \u201cJgnjtjpn\u201d", "result": "You press the button and the vehicle immediately roars to life. Twin engines fire up and you are thrown back in your seat as the craft blasts through the weakened hull and out the other side, breaking free of the airship completely. From here, you can see that the storm has devastated the ship almost to the point of complete destruction! You can't see a single living soul on board the upper deck, and you have a feeling that both the captain and Mother Gherad must be among the dead. The airship is covered with the bodies of mercenaries and crewmen, and you are lucky not to share in their fate.\n\nWith a shudder, you turn your vehicle around to fly away from the ship. You don't know how to drive this thing, exactly, but the controls seem to respond to your touch and you're just glad to get out of here. Gauges pop up all over the dashboard, none of which means anything to you. Fuel, altitude, energy levels...no, you haven't a clue how any of this works. You'll worry about it later.\n\nGrimly, you accelerate away from the doomed airship and fly your craft as far away from here as possible, dodging and weaving through the last of the storm. As you depart, you can just make out the violent wrenching of wood and metal as the airship is ripped apart.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "For the next few hours, you travel through the open skies within the comfort of your flying craft, searching far and wide for your next destination. The wind blows through your hair as you accelerate forward, and you feel a kind of freedom wash over that you\u2019ve never quite experienced before. Throughout your life, you\u2019ve been content to remain settled upon your own island, never venturing out into the skies around you. Just a few hours in this craft is enough to tell you that there\u2019s much more to life than that.\n\nEven so, you don\u2019t want to push the limits of this vehicle too much. In fact, you have a feeling that it\u2019s starting to run low on fuel and energy. You will have to land somewhere soon, if only to refuel, but ultimately you want to find a new island to settle upon. A new home to call your own. A place where you can start again\u2026\n\nYou pass the remains of several islands floating in the sky, broken chains dangling uselessly into empty space. As you approach, you realise that these are parts of bigger islands which have already fallen towards earth. Nothing remains there anymore. They have all suffered the same fate as the place you used to call home.\n\nContinuing on, you eventually do find an island which is still intact. You do not recognise it, but from here you can see that there is a fair number of inhabitants. You can see houses and huts on the ground, indicating that there is some kind of community there. Of course, you have no idea how this community will react to your presence.", "action_results": [{"action": "Land at this island", "result": "You descend to the surface of the island, which is ringed by a protective metal fence, and land just within the perimeter. Upon first glance, the surrounding region appears to be nothing more than one of many small towns present upon this isle. There\u2019s plenty of land to build fresh houses, and more than enough grassland for animals to graze. It\u2019s quite a pleasant atmosphere. Perhaps this island could be a suitable place for you to settle upon?\n\nAs you turn your vehicle off and step out onto dry land for the first time in a long time, you notice that the people here are staring at you. Much like the captain and her mercenaries, they are not the same species as you. They appear to be Tenurs, in fact \u2013 a bipedal species of people who have inhabited the sky islands for generations before you. They are hairless and bald, with three fingers upon each hand, and two separate mouths set into their faces.\n\nTheir appearance is a little strange to those who have not encountered a Tenur before, but your home island was visited by a few Tenurs some years back, and you have some firsthand experience of interacting with their kind. They are quite an intelligent race with a flair for mechanics and engineering. It\u2019s always fascinated you how their skin colour changes with their temperament; they are people who literally carry their heart on their sleeve. Of course, the older Tenurs can control the rate of change in skin tone, but that's another story.\n\n\u201cYou are not one of us,\u201d says a male Tenur, watching you critically.\n\nUsually, you can tell what a person is thinking from the way they look at you, or the type of facial expression they wear, or their general body language. With a Tenur, none of that is needed. The man\u2019s skin is pulsating faintly between colours of blue and orange, suggesting that he is both suspicious and anxious about your presence here. It would not do to frighten him.\n\nStill, you\u2019re just glad that he speaks your language, unlike the captain\u2019s entire crew on board the airship, who mouthed off in Common Tongue to no end.\n\n\u201cI mean you no harm,\u201d you say to him. His skin tone does not change; your words have brought him no consolation. \u201cI am a survivor from a nameless island. One that fell out of the sky. I only seek shelter and settlement within an island which will help me.\u201d\n\nHis expression did not change, and you realise now that he staring at the sword in your hand. You\u2019d forgotten that you were still holding it after all this time. Quickly, you lower it down to the ground.\n\n\u201cYou carry weapons,\u201d he says sceptically. \u201cBut I sense no harm from you. Not many nameless ones come to our island. We place importance upon names, so if you stay here, you may have to take one for yourself.\u201d\n\nYou notice that his skin tone is changing to purple. That confuses you at first, until you recall that purple refers to sexual attraction. His eyes are still fixed on you. Well, this is just brilliant. Your first time on another island and the first native boy you meet is attracted to you.\n\n\u201cWe have heard about the falling of the other islands,\u201d he says quietly. \u201cYou have my sympathy. We Tenurs are fortunate that we have not been affected by the energy drain which has destroyed the lives of so many. You need not fear such dangers here. If you wish to settle here with us, then we can offer you some protection.\u201d\n\n\u201cI would like that very much,\u201d you say gratefully. \u201cThank you.\u201d\n\nHis skin colour darkens to a deeper purple. \u201cI...I have just one question for you before I admit you into town.\u201d You do not miss how the tone of his voice has softened. \u201cAre you here from Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell him you are from the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn", "result": "Upon hearing your answer, the Tenur's skin tone changes to a murky green.\n\n\u201cAgents of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn are not welcome here,\u201d he says in a low voice warily. \u201cYou have made a dire mistake in coming to this island. Leave here before anybody else sees you. My kin will not be as lenient as I.\u201d\n\n\u201cWho's this?\u201d interrupts a voice from behind him. A tall, female Tenur with two wide smiles on her face turns to face you. \u201cA nameless one. I heard you mention the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn, sister. Do you know what we do to agents of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn?\u201d The grins on her face carry no friendliness at all. \u201cWe don't appreciate what you do here. You will not control us, sister. The other Tenurs may bow down to you, but there is no space in the skies for your kind.\u201d\n\n\u201cListen, this has all just been a big misunderstanding,\u201d you blurt out, realising things are starting to escalate out of hand. Naturally, you assumed that these people would respect the word of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn, but it seems that you were dead wrong. \u201cI'm not really with the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn. I escaped from their airship and - \u201d\n\nWordlessly, the male Tenur points to where you parked your craft near the edge of the island. He is staring at the emblem painted at the front.\n\n\u201cYour vehicle carries the symbol of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn,\u201d he states, his skin colour becoming more hostile. \u201cYou are no friend of ours.\u201d\n\n\u201cI'm telling you, I'm not with them!\u201d you say, starting to panic. \u201cI stole it from their airship!\u201d\n\nTo your dismay, more and more Tenurs are beginning to emerge, drawn by the commotion. You hear murmuring amongst them, and more than a few glares directed towards the emblem of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn, in full view for everyone to see. People are beginning to whisper to one another, calling for you to be thrown out from the island altogether. The atmosphere has quickly turned very toxic.\n\n\u201cLeave!\u201d one woman yells. \u201cLeave us alone! We will have nothing to do with agents of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn!\u201d\n\n\u201cGet out!\u201d\n\n\u201cYou Gahl'Vuhr Sehn agents are always snooping around. Go back to where you came from! Try taking a trip back to the surface, there's plenty of room now that the humans have killed themselves!\u201d\n\n\u201cFilth!\u201d\n\nThe crowd of people is rapidly turning into an angry mob. Sensing that it is too dangerous to remain here anymore, you stumble back towards your vehicle as the Tenurs continue to hurl insults at you. You hadn't realised that some races actually hated the name of Gahl'Vuhr Sehn. From the look of things, the townspeople must have had very bad experiences with them indeed.\n\n\u201cGet out!\u201d the Tenurs yell at you as you strap yourself into your craft and prepare to take off once more. \u201cWe don't want your kind here! Go back to Majeruk with the rest of your slime!\u201d\n\nQuickly, you hit the ignition and fire the engines up, flying away from the island of angry Tenurs. They seemed to be such a friendly sort of people at first, but just the mention of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn was enough to set them all off. Perhaps you should have been honest with them, but it's too late now. Feeling rather affronted, you take your vehicle back into the skies and decide to look for an island which isn't so aggressive to visitors.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "You continue travelling for a few more hours, on the lookout for any landmarks or signs of life on various islands. After some time, however, you began to realise that something is wrong with your vehicle. Although you still have sufficient fuel to take you a fair distance\u2026you are starting to lose altitude. You are falling lower and lower in the sky, moving down in a broad spiral which takes you closer and closer to the surface of the planet itself\u2026\n\nDeterminedly, you try fiddling with the controls on the craft to try and fly back up to where you were. Nothing works. You are starting to fall through the clouds by now, but all is not lost. It just means it\u2019s more important than ever to find a decent place to land. For some reason, one of the components of your vessel appears to be malfunctioning.\n\nThere are numerous lightning storms in this part of the sky, and you are quick to veer away from them. Many an airship has fallen victim to the fierce and unpredictable weather conditions escalated by the deadly situation on the surface far below. As it is, you can barely control your vehicle at all. You need to stay airborne at all costs. You saw what the surface is like now: nobody can survive there anymore, and the people who remain there now have no future.\n\nYou accelerate in another downward spiral and cross through the clouds into a graveyard of broken and damaged airships, long-abandoned by their previous owners or simply left to rot. Many of these are ghost ships, whereupon the crew have run out of fuel and starved to death in their limited patch of open sky. The wind doesn\u2019t blow all the time, after all.\n\nOne of the airships, strangely enough, shows faint signs of life. It is also severely damaged and has a faint plume of smoke coming from the hull. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Approach the airship", "result": "A strong, putrid stench arises from the remains of the airship as you draw near. It\u2019s easy to see why: the deck is covered with a mass of dead bodies, many of which have rotted away completely. Some of the corpses are now nothing but skeletons. You gag on the smell, forced to cover your mouth and nose with your sleeve. It\u2019s inconceivable that anybody could be still alive out here.\n\nWhat on earth happened here? Your first thought is that there must have been a ferocious battle of some kind, but many of the bodies show no signs of any physical wounds. There is some blood, yes, but not enough of it to give a concrete explanation. Mass starvation might be more likely, but this kind of airship seems big enough to carry a large number of supplies, and you don\u2019t think that any of these people died from malnutrition.\n\nThere is a crunching sound from ahead of you, and you look over to see a single man crouched in the centre of the deck. He appears to be humanoid in appearance, aside from a third eye in the centre of his forehead, indicating that he is one of the rare subspecies of the sky races. His eyes are sunken and there are black blotches covering his skin.\n\nHe is gnawing hungrily upon the severed limb of a dead comrade.\n\nAlarmed, you glance from the man to the countless bodies surrounding him. The smell of death and decay doesn\u2019t appear to bother him. He must have been exposed to it for a very long time.\n\nThe man suddenly whirls around to face you, hearing the telltale sound of your vehicle\u2019s engines. His eyes narrow when he sees you, watching you furtively, and he slowly puts down the bloodied limb that he was eating. Three more skeletons are lying behind him. You have a feeling that he is responsible for all the bones in sight. How long has this man been feeding off the flesh of the dead?\n\n\u201cGood day,\u201d he calls out to you in a surprisingly jovial fashion.\n\nYou\u2019re not quite sure how to respond. This cannibal is behaving as if you have simply strolled into his house for a brief chat. Every instinct you have screams at you to get as far away from this place as you possibly can.\n\n\u201cI have not had visitors for some time,\u201d the man says. He beckons to you with one skinny finger, and you can see the bones through his skin. \u201cCome aboard. Dine with me.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Come aboard as he requests", "result": "With extreme caution, you bring your vehicle up to the edge of the airship and climb aboard. This man looks dangerous, and you feel as if any moment he's going to suddenly snap and lunge at you to consume your flesh for himself. Nobody could possibly be so calm munching upon the flesh of the dead. You hold your sword out in front of you and keep your distance from him.\n\n\u201cYou need not fear me,\u201d he says. The sight of your weapon does not appear to worry him. \u201cI have no intention of feeding on you, girl. There is more than enough food to go on already.\u201d He nods towards the mound of rotting carcasses piled up across the ship.\n\nYou gag on the smell, trying not to breathe. \u201cWhat happened here?\u201d you demand. \u201cAre you responsible for all this?\u201d\n\nHe laughs shortly and takes another bite out of the severed arm at his feet, chewing slowly. \u201cUnlikely. A third of the crew had already died before they let me out of the brig.\u201d The man gestures at the black spots covering his body. \u201cWorked it out yet? It's a disease. I contracted it from one of the islands to the south, whilst on an exploration mission for the captain. Itches like hell.\u201d\n\n\u201cAnd yet you're still alive.\u201d\n\nThe man smiles. \u201cThat's the thing. I'm just the carrier, but I suffer no ill-effects apart from...what you see here, but...it's very, very contagious. The rest of the crew received a fatal dose of the infection as soon as I returned to the ship. It attacks the vital organs, you see. Shuts them down, one by one. Body stops working. You hardly know it's happening to you at all until the starvation starts settling in. You live a long time, but you're...not really living anymore...\u201d\n\nHe licks his cracked lips. \u201cYou asked me if I was responsible. Take a wild guess.\u201d\n\nYou stare at him for a few moments, sitting here surrounded by bodies. The bodies of people who died as a result of the disease he brought on board. Slowly, the real horror of his words washes over you, and you start to back away. Have you been infected, too, just by coming on board this ship?\n\n\u201cOh, don't worry,\u201d the man says reassuringly. \u201cI haven't infected you. Actually, I can't. The virus itself isn't active anymore. I think it's to do with the amount of dead tissue that I've taken into my body lately...but it's fine now. I can feel it. Doesn't get rid of the black spots though.\u201d He rubs at his cheeks self-consciously. \u201cStill itches.\u201d\n\nYou don't want to trust a single thing he says. Your life could be in danger, just by standing here talking to him. Is the virus spread through the air? You shuffle back towards your vehicle, not wanting to have anything more to do with this...this cannibal.\n\n\u201cWhy did you invite me on board?\u201d you ask quietly. \u201cDid you really think I wanted to hear your life story?\u201d\n\n\u201cNo,\u201d he said simply. \u201cI want you to do something for me.\u201d The man gets to his feet, and you tense unconsciously. \u201cI've been here for so long, feeding off the dead. Too long. I want you to get me out of here. That vehicle of yours can support another passenger, so long as you don't go too fast.\u201d\n\nHe takes another step towards you, eyes burning into yours. \u201cI don't weigh much. Not anymore. I want you...to take me with you. You're a wanderer too, girl. You're trying to survive. I...can help you.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Allow him to ride on the back of your vehicle", "result": "You must be crazy to even consider allowing this disease-ridden, filthy cannibal on the back of your vehicle, but part of you is curious about his offer of help. How could he possibly help you? You watch him very closely as he climbs onto the back of the craft, but the man shows no aggression to you at all. It's difficult to tell what his motivations are, but you know that he must have a reason.\n\n\u201cOne wrong move,\u201d you tell him, \u201cand I'm throwing you off into open sky.\u201d\n\nHe doesn't seem to be worried by that. \u201cYou're looking for somewhere to go,\u201d he says. Slowly, the man lifts his arm up and points in a specific direction above you, roughly to the northwest. \u201cYou...should go that way, I think...\u201d\n\nYou stare at him in disbelief for a moment, wondering what he's playing at. He surely didn't come along just to give you directions. Besides, you've been driving for hours and haven't seen any signs of inhabitable islands at all. It's worth a short, though, and might be better than just drifting through the skies without knowing where you're going.\n\nYour vessel is still losing altitude steadily, and that worries you. You don't want to find yourself getting too close to the surface. Nevertheless, you manage to gain some height by pushing the levers on the dashboard as far as they can go, adding an extra boost to the engines and burning more fuel than usual. This had better work. The craft shifts upwards at a steep angle, and you lean back on your seat; the cannibal behind you lets out a cry of alarm as he is almost jolted off the vessel into the void.\n\n\u201cWhat was that for?\u201d he demands, clutching onto the back of the vehicle with both hands and holding on for dear life. \u201cYou almost threw me off!\u201d\n\n\u201cThis craft is nearly out of energy,\u201d you say. \u201cThere's something with the altitude on this thing...\u201d\n\nYou climb steadily for about fifteen minutes, breaking through a new layer of clouds. At once, you spy a small fragment of an island, almost invisible to the naked eye from this distance. It seems to have broken off from a greater land mass, possibly the victim of the chaos on the surface. You almost missed it from here.\n\nThe island looks to be too small to offer you many favourable options, but you\u2019re in no position to pass up the opportunity. Your vehicle is in dire need of maintenance, since you don't know how much longer you can keep it airborne. Only skill and luck have managed to keep it going for so long up to now. As far as provisions go, you've had limited food to keep you going, and you\u2019re extremely tired. As things stand, you\u2019ll just have to take a chance on this.\n\nHoping that you won\u2019t regret your decision, you disembark upon this small patch of island. Hopefully there's some kind of intelligent life here, and if you're really fortunate you might be able to find someone who can fix your vessel. Perhaps\u2026\n\nThere is a roar of engines behind you.\n\nYou whirl around to see that the man who guided you here has seized control of the aerial vehicle and is driving away from the island, almost straight down. With a yell, you dart forward to confront the cannibal, but he has already disappeared below. You're never going to see it again. He has effectively stranded you here in the middle of nowhere.\n\nWith little choice left to you, you decide to investigate the tiny island around you. Perhaps you can make the best of a bad situation.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Refuse and drive away from here as quickly as you can", "result": "The sight of this cannibal gorging himself upon the bodies of his dead comrades sickens you to no end. You're not staying here a second longer. Without hesitation, you strap yourself back into your vehicle and fire up the engines, speeding as far away from the airship as you can. You can feel the man's gaze burn into your back as you depart.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "You continue to fly forward for about an hour, mindful that your craft is now losing altitude at a rapid pace. The gauges on the dashboard are showing warning signs, but you still don\u2019t understand what they mean. Power? Are you losing power now? You still haven\u2019t seen a single island since the last one, and there\u2019s nowhere for you to land at all\u2026\n\nThe vehicle falls through the clouds, and you realise you are getting dangerously close to the surface. No. No, you can\u2019t go this way. You\u2019ve already seen the kind of chaos that\u2019s happening down there. You saw every little part of it with the captain on the airship. Your place is up in the sky, among an island where you belong\u2026\n\nYour vessel runs out of power, and now you are veering towards the rocky ground below at a deadly speed. Frantically, you try every button and dial which makes any kind of sense. Anything. There has to be something which can slow down your descent. This isn\u2019t what you wanted at all. Parachutes? Destabilisation of air pressure? No, of course not, of course this type of vehicle isn\u2019t designed for going anywhere near the surface\u2026\n\nYou\u2019re so close to the surface of the planet now. You can see people down there. Buildings burned to the ground, screams and crying, the lava flow from an erupted volcano, mass flooding from the rising sea level\u2026It\u2019s not a place where you could ever survive. You need to stay in the skies. You need to stay up here\u2026\n\nThe noise from below gets louder and louder until it becomes almost unbearable. Your vehicle is not going to stop. Praying very slightly, you brace yourself for a crash landing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "The impact is tremendous sending multiple shockwaves through your vehicle as it crashes into the ground, continuing forward for several more metres before coming to a grinding halt. Waves of pain wash over you, and for several long seconds you cannot move at all. You feel as if you have broken several bones in your body. Smoke billows out from the front of your vehicle, and you see that the exterior has been completely ripped apart. At the same time, it has cushioned the blow for you.\n\nYou are alive. You can hardly acknowledge the fact, but you are alive. Sparks fly from the dashboard, igniting another smaller fire within the interior, and you force yourself to get to your feet. Agony rushes through your body at every little movement, prompting a scream from your throat. You grit your teeth and keep moving. You need to survive.\n\nYou manage to force open the door. It's so badly damaged from the crash that it practically falls off its hinges. You can hear the screams from here.\n\nThe ground is blackened and burnt, and not because of the impact of your arrival. No, it was already like this. You have landed at the edge of what used to be a peaceful village. Buildings lie in ruins, farm animals lie dead on their side or half-devoured, and any crops have long since been the victim of multiple fires which raged here.\n\nThere are people around you.\n\nThey do not look like people. Humans, yes. You haven't seen a human being for a long time, but you know what a rational person look like and these are different from that. Their clothes are ripped and torn, their skin covered by a mesh of angry black spots which suggest the telltale designs of disease, and there is a frenzy in their eyes which frightens you beyond anything you have witnessed so far.\n\nThe people around you have not reacted to your crash landing. They are screaming at the top of their voices, wielding vicious blades in their hands, and killing each other on sight. Countless corpses litter the blackened ground as far as the eye can see, like the gruesome remnants of some kind of battlefield. It's as if a war is going on, but you can see here that the war is purely internal.\n\nYou see two men beating another to death with a hatchet. A crowd of children have surrounded a woman and are stabbing her repeatedly, all with the same murderous frenzy in their eyes. Three girls are gouging out the eyes of a bystander. A strange haze has settled upon this place, this peaceful village that saw no such violence before. Everything has gone out of control. You knew the situation on the surface was dire, but you had no idea that it had escalated to such extremes...\n\nDesperately, you run for the safety of your aerial vehicle, even though there is no chance of getting it off the ground anymore. You can't take this. This is not an atmosphere in which you can survive. The people around you do not look as if they have eaten for days, a fact which hardly seems to bother them as they repeatedly murder each other on the spot with little regard as to the consequences. You are stranded on the surface of a world gone insane, and little hope remains to you at all.\n\nYou limp forward a few more steps before the pressure on your broken leg sends you crashing to the ground. The pain flares up anew, and you claw at the dirt around you. Your hands grasp at the morbid remains of a grinning human skull.\n\nThe humans turn around at the noise of your fall and shamble forward slowly, before charging towards you in a frenzy of bloodlust. All of them are already covered by vicious cuts and wounds which would usually kill a normal person, but these people do not seem to notice their injuries. They are far too gone. No semblance of reason remains in their minds. Not anymore.\n\nThe last thing you see is the irrational hatred and rage burning in their eyes, before your body is hacked to pieces by the inhabitants of the surface. Your screams are lost in a storm of mindless insanity which has already engulfed everything around you, mind and soul. You perish here, upon arrival.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, null]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Deny that you have anything to do with the Gahl\u2019vuhr Sehn", "result": "\u201cI promise you that I have nothing to do with the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn,\u201d you tell him in a sincere tone of voice. Even as you speak, you realise that the vehicle you took from the airship has the telltale emblem of the Gahl'Vuhr painted on its front, and hope that the Tenur does not think to look. You hold his gaze, mindful of his current temperament. \u201cCan you offer me shelter today upon this island? It would be nice to have someone show me around.\u201d\n\nYou play upon his insecurities and any remaining doubt vanishes from his face. He smiles with both mouths. \u201cOf course,\u201d he says, extending one hand towards you. \u201cCome this way. I would be happy to be your guide for today.\u201d You take his hand, and notice the colour of his skin tone fluctuate ever so slightly. \u201cWhilst we walk, perhaps I can tell you a little about the history of this island. Our ancestors first colonised this region of the skies over three hundred and fifty years ago...\u201d\n\nHe clearly likes to talk and you spend some time getting acquainted with the Tenur male, who seems quite smitten with you. You're not sure that you find Tenurs particularly attractive in return \u2013 they do have two mouths in their head, after all \u2013 but you are keen to take advantage of his feelings. You decide not to risk going back to your vehicle and instead remain with your guide for the rest of the day.\n\nOne thing leads to another, and you start making enquiries about possible lodging and settlement upon the island. You soon learn that the Tenur man can put you in touch with various contacts in town. Money is no problem here; rather, Tenurs value work and resources to trade rather than currency, and you work to secure a steady job for yourself. The island is in need of miners, couriers and helpers for building work and you soon find an available position.\n\nAfter that, the rest of the week passes quite quickly. You become close friends with the Tenur man and become acquainted with many people in his circle, as well as other Tenurs at your place of employment. A settlement has been reached. Before the end of the week, you even procure a name for yourself so as to fit into Tenurian society. Annabel. That's what you call yourself now. Annabel. It has a nice ring to it, and you refuse to answer to anything but that. Nobody can call you Unworthy anymore.\n\nAn entire month passes, and you find that you are enjoying month here with the Tenurs. The vehicle you used to travel here is found smashed up just a week after that, turned into scrap metal. Apparently, the locals here really don't like the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn. It's a good thing you didn't associate yourself with the organisation, because the people here seem so friendly otherwise.\n\nMonths turn into years, and you soon forget about the chaos happening on the surface far below. There's nothing to fear here. There is frequent news about the other islands which have fallen, but the Tenurs are a proud people and often talk about how the humans have destroyed themselves. It's nothing for you to be concerned about, really, so long as that kind of destruction doesn't affect your daily life.\n\nYou amass enough resources to improve your place of residence, and even start moving in with a few Tenur males who are interested in you. In fact, you become quite popular upon this island. You spend your resources wisely and save when you can. You have much to look forward to. You start to think about the future, about marriage and children and what prospects you have for them upon this island. The future is bright. This island is not going to fall, after all. The people here have amassed enough energy and resources to keep it going for a long, long time.\n\nYou end up settling permanently upon the Tenurian island, content with the life you lead right now. Not a day goes by where you regret your decision. Sometimes you gaze up into the sky and wonder about the crew of the airship that saved you, about the captain and Mother Ghared. They probably didn't survive. You are glad to live on.\n\nAfter falling from a great height, there is no longer anything that can hurt you anymore. ", "action_results": []}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Push the button which says \u201cSflf-dfstrvct\u201d", "result": "As soon as you push the button, the entire dashboard lights up. Alarmed, you freeze in your seat as the controls start to glow faintly. A few seconds later, the vehicle explodes in a great ball of fire, taking you with it! You have initiated the self-destruct sequence set into the craft, installed by the Auvahrs for use in dire emergencies, and your death is instantaneous. You perish here upon the airship, trying to escape.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Decide not to risk it and continue searching for another way out", "result": "You continue searching through the other cabins for any alternative methods of escape. The ship is shaking rather violently by now. Within minutes, cracks begin to appear in the walls and ceiling, until you realise that the damage to the vessel is more serious than you thought. Frantically, you dash into one of the last cabins to find an escape route as quickly as possible.\n\nHowever, you are far too late. The opportunity has already passed. The ceiling of the cabin caves in from above, and your body is crushed under tons of falling rubble. You do not live to see what happens next, but the rest of the airship is destroyed minutes afterwards. You perish here on the airship, in the midst of a violent lightning storm.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null, null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Decide not to and go back downstairs", "result": "You decide not to trust the woman and retreat back down the stairs. She is already several steps ahead and does not notice that you are not following her until you are well out of sight. Quickly, you decide to return to the corridor below and head to the right, where you heard the voices before.", "action_results": [{"action": "Proceed", "result": "You follow the corridor for some time as the voices become more distinct. They sound rather jovial and cheerful in nature; foreign, too, because they are speaking in a language that you do not understand. It should not be surprising at that, since there are many different varieties of races which populate the skies, each of their own language and culture. Having never left the relative comfort of your own island before, you are unacquainted with the language of any other species.\n\nAt the end of the corridor is a large room filled with uniformed men and what you assume to be soldiers. Mercenaries, more likely, from their get-up. Large groups of them are gathered around each table, drinking from mugs and chattering to one another at great volume. Is this some kind of bar, perhaps? It seems a little rough and rowdy for your taste.\n\nYou look around and see that the place is not in good condition. Furthermore, none of the men in this room are human. Of course, neither are you, but you do not recognise their kind. Their skin colour varies from pearly-white to a pale purple, and many of them appear to sport partial reptilian features. Are these people really your rescuers? From the way they are looking at you now, you are inclined to doubt it\u2026\n\n\u201cVnwprthy!\u201d one man shouts, as you step into the room. His gaze is fixed upon you steadily. \u201cJt\u2019s thf Vnwprthy! Shf\u2019s vp bt lbst.\u201d\n\nSelf-conscious about the sudden attention, you automatically tense yourself, but the mercenaries here do not seem necessarily aggressive. All of them are armed to the teeth with various edged weapons and crossbows which are slung across their backs, but even so they appear to be regarding you with genuine curiosity. Perhaps they are just as fascinated by your unique appearance as you are by theirs. Low murmuring echoes through the room, with a few of the man shaking their heads at you. You do not understand the significance of such a gesture.\n\n\u201cVnwprthy,\u201d one of the men says, standing up and walking towards you. He smiles at you warmly and makes a gesture you do not recognise. \u201cBrf ypv wfll? Ypv\u2019vf bffn bslffp fpr b lpng tjmf. Hpw dp ypv fffl? Brf ypv rfstfd?\u201d\n\nThe brief silence which follows his words suggests that he has asked you a question, and is expecting an answer from you. Unfortunately, you haven\u2019t the faintest idea what he just said.", "action_results": [{"action": "Nod your head in answer", "result": "The mercenary seems satisfied with your answer, and you sense that you have given the correct response. \u201cThbt's gppd,\u201d he says in a gracious tone of voice. \u201cNpt mbny svrvjvfd thf fbll. Ypv wfrf pnf pf thf lvcky pnfs.\u201d The man sits down on one of the chairs and calls over to one of his companions. \u201cHfy, thf Cbptbjn wjll wbnt tp sff hfr npw thbt shf's bwpkfn. Spmfpnf tbkf thf Vnwprthy tp sff hfr, vndfrstbnd?\u201d\n\n\u201cSvrf thjng,\u201d the other man ventures, getting up and moving towards you. \u201cCpmf pn,\u201d he says to you, beckoning you over with one finger. \u201cThjs shpvldn't tbkf tpp ljng.\u201d\n\nYou do not understand his words, but it seems that he wants you to follow him.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow the mercenary", "result": "You follow the mercenary to the far end of the corridor, towards where a set of stairs lead to the upper level, feeling the wind grow stronger as you do so. Soon enough, you find yourself standing once more upon the upper deck of the airship. It still feels quite surreal, staring out into open skies at such a great height, and you don't think you'll ever get used to this.\n\nYour guide watches you curiously as you gaze over the deck of the airship, before motioning you forward. Resignedly, you follow him into another part of the airship, through twists and turns in the corridors. As you walk, you pass several more uniformed men who watch you with interest. Only now do you realise that they must be part of the ship's crew.\n\nAfter a few minutes, the mercenary leads you to a brass door which lies at the top of a final flight of stairs. There is a sign on top of the door, but you lack the knowledge to read the symbols and runes displayed there.\n\n\"Gp jn,\" he says, gesturing for you to enter. \"Thf cbptbjn bwbjts ypv.\"\n\nAt his request, you push open the door and enter the room beyond.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Shake your head", "result": "\u201cYpv'rf npt?\u201d The man seems to be confused by your answer. \u201cNp. Np, ypv're...\u201d He scratches his head and gives you a funny look. \u201cPf cpvrsf! Vnwprthy. Lvngvbgf...laaa\u2026.lan...\u201d For some reason, the mercenary seems to be having a hard time speaking, as if he can't pronounce the word right. \u201cLan...lang-goo...\u201d\n\n\u201cLan-goo-rah?\u201d another one tries.\n\nHe shakes his head, gesturing to you. \u201cLan...lan-grah. Lan-gredge. Language. Lan-gruage bah...bah-wee-uh...barrier...\u201d The man steps forward in your direction, an inquisitive look in his eyes. \u201cWe...we do not...we do not speak your...\u201d He winces again. \u201cYour lan-grah...\u201d\n\n\u201cLanguage,\u201d you say helpfully, getting the gist. You try nodding.\n\nHe smiles and nods too. \u201cYfs.\u201d\n\n\u201cYes,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cYfs,\u201d he says, nodding more enthusiastically. Then he shakes his head emphatically. \u201cNp.\u201d\n\n\u201cNo,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cFxbctly.\u201d A nod of the head. \u201cYfs.\u201d Shake of the head. \u201cNp.\u201d He sighs. \u201cJs hbrd...is hard.\u201d\n\n\u201cHard,\u201d you agree.\n\nHe sits down on one of the chairs and calls over to one of his companions. \u201cHfy, thf Cbptbjn wjll wbnt tp sff hfr npw thbt shf's bwpkfn. Spmfpnf tbkf thf Vnwprthy tp sff hfr, vndfrstbnd?\u201d\n\n\u201cSvrf thjng,\u201d one of the other men ventures, getting up and moving towards you. \u201cCpmf pn,\u201d he says to you, beckoning you over with one finger. \u201cThjs shpvldn't tbkf tpp ljng.\u201d\n\nYou have a very limiting understanding of his words, but it seems that he wants you to follow him.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Look at him blankly in response", "result": "The silence continues for several more seconds, until the mercenary starts to exchanges worried glances with the others. \u201cJs spmfthjng wrpng?\u201d he says to you, a concerned expression on his face. \u201cDjd ypv npt fvlly vndfrstbnd me?\u201d\n\nA look of realisation suddenly washes over him. \u201cPf cpvrsf! Vnwprthy. Lvngvbgf...laaa\u2026.lan...\u201d For some reason, the mercenary seems to be having a hard time speaking, as if he can't pronounce the word right. \u201cLan...lang-goo...\u201d\n\n\u201cLan-goo-rah?\u201d another one tries.\n\nHe shakes his head, gesturing to you. \u201cLan...lan-grah. Lan-gredge. Language. Lan-gruage bah...bah-wee-uh...barrier...\u201d The man steps forward in your direction, an inquisitive look in his eyes. \u201cWe...we do not...we do not speak your...\u201d He winces again. \u201cYour lan-grah...\u201d\n\n\u201cLanguage,\u201d you say helpfully, getting the gist.\n\n\u201cYfs. Language barrier.\u201d He sits down on one of the chairs and calls over to one of his companions. \u201cHfy, thf Cbptbjn wjll wbnt tp sff hfr npw thbt shf's bwpkfn. Spmfpnf tbkf thf Vnwprthy tp sff hfr, vndfrstbnd?\u201d\n\n\u201cSvrf thjng,\u201d another man ventures, getting up and moving towards you. \u201cCpmf pn,\u201d he says to you, beckoning you over with one finger. \u201cThjs shpvldn't tbkf tpp ljng.\u201d\n\nYou do not understand his words, but it seems that he wants you to follow him.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}, null]}, null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Try to move to a different location", "result": "It would be foolishness to remain here. As quickly as you can, you crawl out of cover into the open. Almost immediately, you are buffeted by the force of the wind on your back. You dig your fingernails into the ground at your feet, refusing to let go. You will not die here, not so easily, like a candle sputtering out in the midst of total darkness. You are determined to survive.\n\nBehind you, the wall of your house collapses and crumbles apart. There\u2019s no going back now. The wind is now fiercer than ever.", "action_results": [{"action": "Call out to your neighbours for aid", "result": "You raise your voice and let out a desperate cry for help, but your voice is drowned out by the sound of the wind. Your plea goes unheard. In any case, your neighbours and friends have their own problems to deal with. During a crisis of this nature, the act of helping another soul would compromise the safety of another. Nobody is going to help you. This is the reality that you're faced with.\n\nThe wind suddenly picks up speed, and you are thrown off your feet, clumps of grass falling uselessly from your bleeding fingers. You scream as you are flung from the surface of the island, spiralling towards certain death far below\u2026", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Inch your way towards one of the few houses still standing", "result": "Gritting your teeth, you pull yourself along the ground at a painfully slow pace towards one of the more sturdy-looking houses. You can already see several faces huddled inside the walls, frightened and helpless at what is going on outside. As you draw nearer to them, you see panic rise in their eyes, as if your mere presence is compromising their chances of survival. Perhaps they are simply too scared to move.\n\nThe door, miraculously, appears to be secure. You duck your head down as the wind buffets against your back, and succeed in making it to the threshold. It is then that you discover that the door has been locked and bolted from the inside. The people inside remain huddled together, staring out at you with empty expressions.\n\n\u201cLet me in,\u201d you cry out to them in desperation, banging on the door with your fists. Your fingers are bleeding from clutching the ground, and you dare not raise your head too far up. \u201cPlease. Let me inside!\u201d\n\nNobody unlocks the door. Nobody dares to move.\n\nYou are still frantically banging on the door when the wind picks up and throws you off your feet. The people's stares burn into you as you are flung from the surface of the island, screaming as you spiral towards certain death far below\u2026", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Maintain your current position and hold on for dear life", "result": "You feel that there is no use in moving from here. The slightest motion might give the wind enough leeway to knock you off balance. You grit your teeth and hold on tight, aware that you are exposed and vulnerable, but hopeful that you will be able to get through this. You may be alone, but your strength of will has seen you through many trials in life. You can do this...\n\nThe wind suddenly picks up speed, and you are thrown off your feet, clumps of grass falling uselessly from your bleeding fingers. You scream as you are flung from the surface of the island, spiralling towards certain death far below\u2026", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Pick up some of the fragments of wood", "result": "You scramble across the floor to where your bed used to be. It is now nothing but rubble, broken into multiple pieces by the pressure of the fall. Most of the fragments are too small to be of any use, but you do find a few sturdy pieces which could be used as a weapon. A weapon? Why on earth are you thinking of weapons now? The realisation comes in an instant: the world really has gone wrong. The crumbling of your island may not be the only danger which awaits you. You need to get your hands on everything you can get.\n\nThe wind is now powerful enough to shred this little piece of wood into pieces, so you hastily tuck it inside your thin tunic for safekeeping. Perhaps it will come in useful later, assuming you have a future to look forward to...\n\nAt your back, small cracks start to spread out across the walls of your house. The entire island is shaking, causing the cracks to widen.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, null, null, null]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story45.json b/data/scraper/stories/story45.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2980684 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story45.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=51934", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Smoke from the burning city filled the air. Some detest the smell of smoke, others complain that it burns their eyes and throat. For Philip the Second of Macedon, however, smoke only meant one thing. \n\n\nVictory.\n\n\nHis eyes stay focused on the city of Potidea. Shouting, screams, and the sound of crackling fire reached Philip's ears, but he did not seem to be affected by it in the slightest. The man was the perfect picture of poise and power. He would never look away from the battle when started, for even the slightest moment. If he faltered for even a moment, then all of his plans could come crashing down. No, he would wait patiently for his field general to come back proclaiming victory in his and Macedon's name. Until then, he would wait here surrounded by his most trusted generals and guards. Philip only ever felt more home in one place. That being his fourth wife, Olympias', bed. He would often switch between the two things. His current battle, and his wife at home, whom, to Philip's delight, was pregnant. A son is what he hoped for, and one sired by him and Olympias was sure to be a boy of the strongest blood. She was getting fairly large at around the time Philip left for his current campaign, and while waiting for victory to be announced, Philip realized something. \n\n\n\"Polypias.\" Philip called out to his general, but still kept his eyes peeled to scene of chaos and destruction before him. \n\n\n\"My Liege.\"\n\n\n\"How long have we spent sieging this godforsaken place?'\n\n\n\"Around three months, my liege.\" \n\n\n\"I thought so. Prep-\" Before he can finish giving his command, a cheer goes up from the burning city. \n\n\nPhilip hears him before he sees him. \"Victory to Philip! Victory to Macedon!\" The man you've been waiting for, the field general, gallops out of the burning city with the city's flag on a chestnut war horse. In his right hand is a spear, and on that spear is the banner of Potidea. The field general, Philip can never seem to remember his name, decided that it'd be a great idea to set that same banner ablaze. Philip reminds himself to give the man a promotion. \n\n\nThe question Philip was going to ask Polypias is forgotten in the addictive wake of total victory. \n\n\n-\n\n\nThe sheets of Olympias' sheets are soaked. Maids run in and out of the room frantically. Some carry sheets, while other's carry buckets of water, but among the throng of the people surrounding Olympias, one stands out more than the others. A young maiden stands with a bow and a quiver of arrows over her shoulder. Her face is a mix of approval and joy, and her very presence radiates silvery light and power. \n\n\nPhilip gazes around the room in awe. None of the maidservants seem to notice him, and in fact, Philip notices, ignore him entirely. Perplexed that his servants would disrespect their king so easily, Philip reaches out to rebuke the closest servant for their flippancy, but his hand goes right through her. He tries again with nearly all of the servants, save the maiden, yet none of them respond to his attempts in the slightest. Still confused, Philip walks to the opposite side of the bed from the young maiden and approaches Olympias. Surely his wife will remember him. \n\n\n\"Olympias,\" he says, then tries to touch her shoulder. His hand passes through, and he cries out in frustration. \n\n\nOlympias cries out as well, simultaneously startling Philip and knocking him to his senses. Philip re-examines the room, and after a few seconds of thought, realizes that his wife is giving birth. Instead of being frustrated at his predicament, Philip watches and waits.\n\n\nA maid, apparently the one in charge of the lot of them, shouts, \"It's happening!\" Maids move around nearly in unison and in preparation of what's to come. The head maid positions her hands below Olympias' midriff and starts moving her hands amid a mix of blood and skin. Philip looks on excitedly. If this is a vision like he thinks it is, then he really is seeing his son being born. \n\n\nSome moments later, the head maid withdraws her hands from Olympias holding a baby that looks as if it had been bathed in blood. A beautiful sound echoes throughout the room, and as much as he's glad to see his baby born, Philip can't help but feel a sense of foreboding. That sense intensifies when a new sound joins the glorious cries of the baby. This one not nearly so pleasant. \n\n\nOlympias' screams overpower the baby's cries. It spurs all of the maids back into action, for at the splendor of the baby, they forgot their first priority, keeping Olympias alive. \n\n\n\"No, no, no...\" Philip starts muttering incoherently as he realizes what's about to happen. \n\n\nThe maid's are fast and efficient, but no where near as fast and efficient as Philip wants them to be. Every scream of Olympias he hears marks another maid's face he memorizes. If she dies in the care of these people, then there will be eternal suffering for them to pay when he returns. Olympias' breaths turn from heavy, to shallow, then ending at virtually non-existent. Some of the maids start crying, but the head maid keeps working until she feels the last breath go out of her. Only then does she start crying as well. The baby lays in the arm of another nameless maid at the foot of the bed. \n\n\nPhilip's heart skips a beat, and it's all he can do to stop himself from crying as well. Of all the wives he'd ever taken, Olympias was the only one he could say that he truly loved. And now she was dead before his eyes. The reality of the situation hits Philip harder than it should, and despite his best efforts, Philip breaks down into tears. \n\n\n\"Please. Zeus, Hera. If there be any Gods out there, Please don't take Olympias away from me.\" He doesn't usually pray so earnestly, but the situation seemed to call for it. \n\n\nEven though he was the one asking, Philip was more than startled to hear a response. It came from the young maiden on the other side of the bed. \"Are you sure?\" The voice exudes power unlike any other he'd ever heard.\n\n\nPhilip looks to the young maiden. Her ancient silvery eyes look back at him, and her eyebrows are raised in question. Philip nods and manages to mumble a \"yes.\" \n\n\n\"You may come to regret this.\" Before Philip can ask what she means, the Goddess leans over and kisses Olympias on her brow. With that action she disappears leaving Philip, the maids, and Olympias alone. \n\n\nOlympias breathing goes from shallow to deep, and her wound seem to heal themselves. If the maids had been paying a little more attention they might have seen the miracle occur, but amid their despair and Olympias blood no one but Philip saw what happened. \n\n\n\"Give him to me.\" The voice starts out as a whisper, but it grows steadily louder until the maids realize that their queen is still alive. The chaos that filled the room moments before the birthing reenters the room as the maids clean the baby and her mother up. Philip stands beside Olympias with his eyes rimmed red, but his expression a mask of joy. \n\n\nPrior to this, Olympias and Philip discussed what your name should be if you were to be a boy. \n\n\nIt is there, in your mother's arms that she calls you by it for the first time. \n\n\n\"Alexander.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Olympias", "result": "You cling to your mother robes as tightly as possible, and look up into her eyes with a sad look on your face. She loves it when you hug her like that, and when you look at her with your sky blue eyes, she melts under your fingertips. It makes her want to sweep you into her arms, and hold you forever. You think it's because you remind her of you when you were just a baby, but what your mother often forgets is that you are the son of King Philip the Great, and Queen Olympias the God-Blessed. Thus, you are unnaturally talented in everything you've ever tried. So you can even trick the queen into doing what you want. Well at least that's what you think. Everyone else, including your parents, tell you that you're talented because you've been chosen by the Gods. That Artemis herself was there when you were born, and, what most people keep secret from you, that Artemis revived your mother when she died giving birth to you. \n\n\nAt the prime age of eight, you aren't sure if you believe that. \n\n\nYour dad's friends die all the time, and no Gods or Goddesses ever rescue them. You've never even heard of anyone being resurrected before, and even if it were possible, why your mother? Not that you're ungrateful if such a thing did happen, but why of all people her? You asked your mother once, and she just shook her head at you and told you not to worry about it. So then you went and asked Uncle Leonidas, and he just told you to continue your lessons and leave things like that to the adults. You responded by telling him he was being too condescending, and he nearly choked on the apple he was eating. Apparently six-year olds aren't supposed to know words that big. \n\n\nYou still don't have an answer to that question, but as you get older an older you care less and less. What matters is that your mom is here beside you...\n\n\n...and that by being affectionate to her, you can postpone Leonidas' lessons. Your mom holds you tightly to her, and you think that your plan will go through, but then she lets go.\n\n\n\"Go to your lessons, Alexander. You can't keep Leonidas waiting.\" She smiles and hugs you one last time, before motioning to your personal handmaiden, Lanike. \"Take him to Leonidas.\"\n\n\nSo today is one of those days. Your father left yesterday on another campaign, and it has mother sad. It's times like these that she likes to be alone, so like a good kid you oblige your mother's wishes. She did birth you after all. \n\n\nLanike grabs your hand and leads you from the room. Of all the women you know, Lanike and your mother are perhaps the only two that you will readily allow to touch you. If Goddesses really did exist, then there must have been some involved with the creation of this person. Beautiful black hair falls in loose curls around her perfect face. Her high cheekbones and rosy hue to her face compliment her appearance in an exemplary way. She was very young for a royal handmaid. Apparently her appearance wasn't the only good thing about her, for she worked her way up to this position through hard work and determination. The only two things, your father tells you, that can usurp latent talent. \n\n\nThe pair of you make your way to Leonidas' study, but as you near, your desire to to follow your mother's command dwindles. Leonidas was usually so engrossed in his paperwork that he barely notices when you're there anyway. You and Lanike turn down the hallway leading to your uncle's room and you find your opportunity dwindling. You still might be able to convince Lanike to let you skip the lessons. She is quite fond of you after all.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to convince Lanike", "result": "If there's any chance of you getting out of your monotonous lessons, then you're going to take it. \n\n\nYour walk slows until it hits an eventual stop. You keep hold of Lanike's hand, and thus, pull her to a stop as well. A look of confusion comes over her face. \n\n\n\"Alexander? Why'd you stop?\" Her dazzling grey eyes scan you over, but in preparation for your plan, you have your face tilted downward. That way she'll have to lean down to get a closer look at your face. \n\n\nYou don't respond, and instead only squeeze her hand tighter. Something about holding onto women tightly really makes them give into you, for the very next moment Lanike crouches down and looks into your eyes. You can see the hint of worry in her eyes, and this close you could practically read every emotion etched into her face. \n\n\n\"Alexander?\" The words are spoken quietly, and when you open your mouth to reply, you realize you've made a grave mistake. \n\n\nYour original plan was to get her as close as possible to you without having to look her in the eyes, and then all at once you would hit her with a full dosage of your hopeful and sad look. The one that mother always falls for. Then you'd explain that you didn't want to go to the lessons, and would rather stay with her. While you were thinking this, you forgot to factor in the fact that she would be that close to you. Instead of you hitting her with the full power of your cute child persona, she hit you with a dosage of her beauty, and the worst part is that she didn't even mean to do it. You were bested by someone by someone who didn't even try. \n\n\nStill no words came out. Realizing your folly, you walk around her and attempt to pull her along the path Leonidas's room. Lanike, however isn't having any of that. You made her concerned, and she wasn't going to let you alone that easily. She uses your hand as a hold, and pulls you back toward her. this time, you don't look into her eyes. That way you might not be caught in her hypnotizing gaze. \n\n\nShe notices this. \"Look at me, Alexander.\" her voice isn't particularly commanding, but you can't resist it. You give in to her command, and look directly into her eyes. She doesn't say anything, and just looks into your eyes. She stays there searching, trying to divine the problem that she still seemed to believe was troubling you. After a few moments of looking into your eyes, Lanike leans toward you and plants a soft, feathery kiss on your forehead. She then proceeds to run her hand through your thick golden hair. If you weren't speechless before, then you were certainly speechless now. \n\n\n\"If anything is ever bothering you, you can talk to me. Okay?\" You can only nod. \"Now, I know you don't really want to go to your lessons, but the queen told me to take you there, and if you stay standing right here I can't do that.\" \n\n\nYou hadn't thought of that, and you certainly don't want to get Lanike in trouble with your mother. Your mother was notoriously protective of you, and if she found out that you convinced Lanike to keep you away from you lessons, well you probably wouldn't see Lanike very much after that. \n\n\nYou nod again, and the pair of you continue onward to Leonidas' study. When you two get there, Leonidas is sitting in a polished wooden chair with a book in hand. his desk is positioned behind him, and another chair is sitting in front of him. Several bookshelves line the walls, and each of the shelves are filled with copious scrolls, parchments, and a few bound books.\n\n\n\"You're late, Alexander.\" his voice sounds like your mother's, filled with authority, but the similarities end there. While your mother has fiery red hair, Leonidas has dull brown hair. Even their facial structures are wildly different. The only thing they really have in common, aside from their demeanor, is their color eyes which, like yours, are sky blue. \n\n\n\"His mother kept him longer than expected.\" Lanike immediately comes to your defense. \n\n\n\"Hm. Is that so? It can't be helped then .\" He says this, but doesn't sound at all convinced. \"Now come Alexander. We have work to do.\" \n\n\nLanike ruffles your tousled golden hair one last time disappearing into the hallway. She'll be back in a few hours to pick you up. \n\n\nYou sit in the chair across from your Uncle.\n\n\n\"Alright. What shall we start with?\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Philosophy", "result": "Now that you're here you're left with very few options, so you choose the lesser of three evils. It's the lesser, because your uncle's primary vehicle in which he teaches philosophy is debate. Debate is more fun than simply memorizing things, hence the lesser. \n\n\n\"Philosophy.\" \n\n\n\"Good choice, my boy.\" You watch as a spark lights in the man's eyes. A true scholar indeed, for, you think, that only a scholar truly devoted to his studies could find enjoyment in such a task.\n\n\n\"Do you remember where we left off?\"\n\n\n\"We were learning about Socrates and...\" you trail off when you fail to remember what exactly about Socrates you were learning. \n\n\n\"Questions,\" Leonidas supplies readily.\n\n\n\"Questions?\" \n\n\n\"Yes.\" \n\n\n\"What does Socrates have to do with questions?\"\n\n\n\"What did Socrates spend his life doing?\"\n\n\n\"Teaching philosophy, right?\"\n\n\n\"How did he teach?\"\n\n\nYou rack your brain. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "\"By studying the world around him.\"", "result": "Leonidas shakes his head. \"Sorry Alexander, wrong answer. Guess again.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "\"By asking questions until the answer was found.\"", "result": "The hints were subtle, but the hints were there and you caught them. Leonidas was asking you questions until you were able to answer. It was smart of him to teach you in the very way that you were trying to divine. \n\n\n\"By asking questions until the answer was found.\"\n\n\nA smile stretches across Leonidas' face. \"Brilliant Alexander. I knew you'd get the answer.\"\n\n\nYou can't help the small smile that comes across your face, and you and Leonidas share a moment of kinship together before Leonidas expounds upon Socrates' method. \n\n\nThe rest of the lesson goes famously, and you end up having, dare you think it, fun. It ends all too quickly and soon you're presented with another question. \n\n\n\"Which lesson do you want to do next?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "History", "result": "You don't really know why you decide to do history, as you've always disliked history the most among the subjects you were taught, but for some reason you feel like this lesson will be different.\n\n\n\"History.\"\n\n\nLeonidas raises his eyebrows in surprise, but he gets a twinkle in his eyes. \"Very well. I have a very special lesson for today. Tell me, Have you heard of the Trojan War...?\"\n\n\nLeonidas leaps head first into tale of heroes, gods, and revenge. This is certainly the most interesting tale Leonidas has ever told you, and you decide to give history a chance more often. \n\n\nSeeing your delight in the story, Leonidas asks, \"What was your favorite part?\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "\"When the trojan horse plan was crafted.\"", "result": "You feel a twinkle in your eyes as you tell him.\n\n\nHe nods, elated that you're finally taking to history like he's always wanted you to. After you finish telling him, he relates to you his favorite part.\n\n\n\"Remember when Hector was finally bested?\" You nod thinking on the act of vengeance being taken. \"After that Achilles refused to return the body of Hector to the Trojans, but after a time and fashion, he gave in. It is then that the Achaeans and the Trojans entered into a truce. Both sides had taken heavy casualties, and many heroes died, so they took the time to bury their dead. That truce is my favorite part Alexander.\"\n\n\nYou nod, but don't quite grasp what he's trying to say to you. \n\n\nLeonidas continues. \"I would have you remember that in war there is a clear line between opposing forces, but in the end, when we are all dead, we are the same. Don't allow yourself to forget that when you go to war in your father's armies that even in times of war, there can be peace.\"\n\n\n'Even in times of war, there can be peace.' The words carve themselves into your memory, and Leonidas finishes his lesson. \n\n\n\"What do you want to learn about next?\" He asks you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Philosophy", "result": "Leonidas glances outside, and then he immediately lets out a short, abrupt laugh. \"Well Alexander, it looks like you made it through the day.\" \n\n\nYou look up surprised. You would've never guessed that the time went by this quickly. Guess that old saying your mother says is true. Time flies by when you're having fun. \n\n\nYou hear someone footsteps, and immediately after that, a voice. \"Alexander?\" Lanike walks into the room and stands beside you. \"How were your lessons?\"\n\n\nYou look from Leonidas to her. \"They went well.\" That was your normal rote response, and was what Lanike and Leonidas expected you to say. Which makes it all the better when you add a genuine response. \"I actually really enjoyed the lessons today.\"\n\n\nSmiles spread across the pair's faces, and you get confused. \"Is that so odd?\" you ask curiously. \n\n\nLanike puts her hand on your shoulder and pats it softly. \"No not at all Alex. I'm just glad you're finally enjoying them,\" Leonidas says. \"I'll see you tomorrow then. On time as well I hope. Now go ahead and get going before your mother stats worrying.\"\n\n\nYou get up from your seat and grab Lanike's hand. The both of you start to walk through out of the room, but you decide to do something you've never done before. You turn around and look your uncle dead in the eye. \"Thanks for always teaching me Uncle.\" \n\n\nYou see his eyes start to glisten with tears. \"It's been a joy to teach you.\" \n\n\nWith that said, you and Lanike walk out of the room and head back to your mother's quarter's. If all your lessons go like today then you think your life will start to get a lot better. With a smile on your face and joy spread across your features, you go about the rest of your day. ", "action_results": [{"action": "2 Years Later", "result": "From age eight to ten, you entered a period of extensive training. Your father Philip decided that if you were to be his heir to the throne, then you needed to be trained to your utmost potential. Your mother shared in this sentiment, and together they cracked down on you. No more were you able to manipulate them into letting you skip lessons, and from then on you were to be disciplined like a soldier. \n\n\nMost other kids would crack under the pressure, but you? You did no such thing. Instead of buckling under the weight of heavy familial, social, and political expectations, you thrived. You went from second best at combat (among the kids your age) to first in a matter of months. Your best friend, Hephaestion was second, and another kid, Cassander, called Cass, was third. Beyond that you began to throw yourself into studies of philosophy, and history at an unprecedented rate. You were even beginning to be more well read than the average adult. Even if your parents wouldn't fall for it anymore, you still practiced manipulating others to do what you wanted them to do. \n\n\nYou progressed so well in all aspects of your life that you were even beginning to question your doubts that you were Artemis' chosen. How else could you excel at everything so well? Everyone was impressed by you and your passion to better yourself, but among those that were, your mother stands far above the rest. She was so proud of you that she even suggested to you father that he should start taking you with him on his kingly matters. \n\n\nIt was for this reason that you now stood beside your father in a field outside the palace. You father recently found himself in need of a horse, and not just any horse, but one of superior quality and breed. A thessalonian merchant must've caught wind of this, and so brought his best horse to present to Philip.\n\n\nThe black stallion was a beautiful horse. Even for a king. Your father was wildly impressed, so much in fact that when the merchant charged him three times the amount for it your father was quite agreeable.\n\n\nAgreeable until he tried to mount the horse that is. Every time Philip neared the horse, it would trot away. your father tried several times to mount it, but each and every time he was either thrown off or unable to mount at all. It was quite the spectacle, for your father was not a man of weakness. He was humbled greatly, and you as well to see your father fail, by the experience. \n\n\nHeated, your father stalked back towards the merchant. \"I refuse to pay for a horse that I cannot ride. What use is it to me if it doesn't do what I wish?\"\n\n\n\"Please reconsider, my liege. He really is a fine horse. If you would but try once more, I'm sure you would be able to ride him,\" the thessalonian merchant pleaded.\n\n\nBut your father wouldn't hear of it. \"I've tried many of times yet. Surely I cannot rely on a horse in battle if it is this rebellious.\" Your father waved the merchant away, then approached you. \n\n\nYou look your father over. Anger surges across his features, but you know him well enough to not just see the anger. Disappointment colors his features. A little bit of regret as well. It was plain as day to you that he wanted that horse, for even now he stares longingly at the black stallion.\n\n\nYou follow his gaze and watch as the merchant's stable hands try and lead the horse away. Each time one of the men try and grab its reins the horse rears up defensively. You watch amused as they fail at what was supposed to be their job. You find it so appalling that you cannot simply stay silent and watch as they timidly approach the horse.\n\n\n\"You thessalonians lose out on an excellent horse because you lack the boldness to even manage him.\" You laugh brazenly. For a youth of ten, you could be quite condescending. \n\n\nYour father turns to look at you somewhat bewildered. \"Why do you rebuke those older than you as if you could do any better?\" \n\n\nThe merchant looks just as shocked as your father. \"If you think you can do any better, than be my honored guest my liege.\" Haughty, he continues. \"In fact, if you are able to tame him, then you can keep the horse for free.\"\n\n\nThe offer sounds tempting, and everyone's eyes turn to you. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Accept the challenge", "result": "A semi-wild grin spreads across your face. \"I'll accept your challenge then.\"\n\n\nIf the merchant was upset before, then he was dumbfounded now. You guess he didn't really expect you to try something so daring, but hey, you didn't think you were going to accept his challenge either until a moment before you did. \n\n\nYour father's expression turns stony. He doesn't say a word, and all others watching stay silent as well. You take this as your cue, and begin to approach the beast. \n\n\nThe black stallion stands majestically as it grazes in the field before you. It faces toward you and away from the sun. Its eyes regard you for a moment before trotting away and grazing elsewhere. \n\n\nYou have the bravado down, but obviously it's going to take a little more than just that to tame this beast. Now, how to go about it...", "action_results": [{"action": "Try feeding it some grass", "result": "The way to a horse's heart is through its stomach, right? What better way to tame the horse than by feeding it?\n\n\nYou nod to yourself assuredly. It was a solid plan. Certainly better than simply running up and holding on for dear life at least. You gather some grass up in a fist and slowly begin to approach the horse. It stays calm and collected as you approach, and even stays that way when you offer it the grass, but when it lifts its head to look at you it panics and rears up on its hind legs. You barely manage to escape without getting kicked in the face.\n\n\nYou hear an amused laugh behind you from the merchant, and you turn around to look at your father. His face retains its stony visage, but you think you can make out some disappointment in his eyes.\n\n\nYou turn back to the horse and mull over your other options.", "action_results": [{"action": "Give up", "result": "You don't know why you were so insistent upon attempting to tame the horse. That and ridiculing those who tried, but now as you stand before it, you lose all hope of taming it you might have once had. You turn away from the horse embarrassed and walk back towards your father.\n\n\nWhen you don't act on your word the merchant laughs. \"All talk but no action. Just as I thought.\" \n\n\nYou stay silent, but your father won't have anyone insulting his son. \"You had a right to issue a challenge against my son, but cross that boundary and I will see to it that you never walk again.\"\n\n\nFear and regret alights the merchant's eyes and he quickly asks for forgiveness before hurrying and trying to rein in the majestic horse. You watch on shamefully. After finally entering the good graces of your father, you go and ruin it by becoming an embarrassment. You feel your father's gaze on you and you turn to face him. \n\n\n\"I wouldn't have expected you to do it anyway son.\" \n\n\nYou nod absently as if you aren't affected by your failure, but you could see, practically feel, the loss of respect from your father and anyone else watching. You tilt your head down in shame and pray to the gods for the day to be over with. ", "action_results": [{"action": "3 Years Later", "result": "This was the day. Your father searched for a long time, and now he finally found someone who he thought would be able to tutor you well enough. He'd been searching ever since it became obvious that there was nothing more for Leonidas to teach you, and Leonidas was no push over when it came to scholarship. Finding someone that would not only be better than Leonidas, but better than yourself as well would not be an easy task. That being said, your father did say he found someone \"suitable for your needs,\" and who were you to argue with your father?\n\n\nEven though you accepted having a new tutor, you remained skeptical even as you went to your very first lesson. It was a ways away from your home at the temple of the nymphs in a small village called Mieza. This doubly confused you, for surely a great tutor such as the one your father found would be quartered in a palace like that of the one you live in. \n\n\nDespite all of this, you were content, for there were many pros to this change in tutorship as well. For example, Hephaestion was to be tutored at your side along with a host of other nobilties' youth. You would be taught in a similar environment to the famed Academy of Plato, but you would also be taught further the art of swordsmanship along with various other talents. \n\n\nAll in all you hoped it would be an interesting experience. \n\n\nHephaestion shared this sentiment aloud as the pair of you made your way to the temple.\n\n\n\"I hope this goes well.\"\n\n\nYou yawn idly. \"I'm sure it will. It's only another tutor, and this time we'll actually be learning together,\" you point out.\n\n\n\"That is true, but honestly, I'm more worried about you than me. I know I have many things to learn, but Alex, you're accelerating at a rate far beyond me.\" \n\n\nYou don't respond. He is right after all. Your main reservation is that you might end up being woefully bored, and simply outclass anyone else there.\n\n\nSilence comes over you and Hephaestion until you make it out of Mieza entirely. The temple itself was located on the side of a hill, and was said to be pretty rustic in nature. Another interesting aspect of this whole escapade. \n\n\n\"Are you sure we're going the right way?\" You ask Hephaestion.\n\n\nHe nods readily. \"Of course. If I didn't memorize the way here, then you would've gotten lost for sure.\" \n\n\nAbout an hour passes by, and you repeat the question. \n\n\n\"Yes I know where we're going. Stop with the uncertainty. Don't you trust me?\" Hephaestion questions.\n\n\n\"Yes I do, but I thought the temple was much less than an hour away.\" \n\n\nHephaestion shrugs. \"I guess you were wrong then. It happens.\" He says this confidently. You wouldn't normally allow people to insult your honor so easily, but it was honestly one of the things you liked about Hephaestion. He's honest, and honesty is a valuable gift when your royalty, as people tend to lie to gain your favor. \n\n\nNearly another hour passes by, and you find your patience wearing thin. Hephaestion said that you were going the right way, but this was taking an inordinately long time.\n\n\nLuckily for the both of you, you see an older man in traveling robes heading along the road ahead of you. \n\n\nYou start to jog off in the direction of the man when you hear Hephaestion call out from behind you. \"Where are you going?\" \n\n\n\"To ask for directions. That gentleman over there looks like he knows where he's going.\"\n\n\n\"And I don't?\" \n\n\nYou hesitate, for you'd rather not offend your best friend, but at the same time you don't even know if he knows where he's going. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask for directions", "result": "You shake your head regretfully. \"I'm sorry Heph. I just don't think you know where you're going.\" \n\n\nA flash of sadness crosses his face, and you wince in response. You really wish he knew where he was going, but all the signs point to the opposite more obvious point. That you and him are lost. \n\n\nYou turn back to the man and jog in that direction. You hear Hephaestion follow behind you, and you're glad he wasn't offended enough to abandon you. As you approach, the man turns around and looks the both of you over. You do the same to him. Grey traveling robes adorn him, and his short cropped hair and beard are a mix of dull brown and grey. The fellow is older than you, but not quite as old as you first thought.\n\n\nYou speak first. \"Greetings. Do you happen to know of a temple nearby, or somewhere hereabouts?\"\n\n\nThe man nods, \"Yes, as a matter of fact I do. Are you two headed over there right now?\" He glances at Hephaestion, and before you can respond Hephaestion speaks.\n\n\n\"We were headed over there just now, but my friend thought it expedient to make sure we were going the right way despite my adamant claims that we were going the right direction.\"\n\n\nYou turn around bewildered that your friend would give a stranger so much information, but Hephaestion doesn't meet your eyes so your glaring has no effect on him. You turn around as the man begins to speak. \n\n\n\"Well done Hephaestion. You executed your job perfectly. Many thanks.\" \n\n\nIf you were bewildered before, then you were astonishingly confused now. Neither of you offered your names to the stranger, yet he called Hephaestion by name. \n\n\nThe man straightens his back, and begins to circle you. He looks you up and down in a very obvious way. \"I take it this is Alexander?\"\n\n\nHe addresses Hephaestion whom immediately respond. \"Yes sir.\"\n\n\nHonorifics too? Who is this guy to make Hephaestion respect him so? The only other people he respected as much were his and your own parents.\n\n\n\"Who are you?\" Your voice is flavored with curiosity, and confusion.\n\n\nThe man doesn't speak, but simply continues looking you over. Hephaestion instead responds.\n\n\n\"Remember when I told you we were going to the temple?\" You nod your acknowledgement. \"Well that was only a half truth. Even if we did go to the temple, there wouldn't be a tutor there.\" He glances over to the stranger. \"Well at least not yet.\"\n\n\nYou turn back and look the men over again when you finally realize what Hephaestion is hinting at. \n\n\nHephaestion continues. \"He met with me several days ago and asked for me to arrange this. Evidently he wanted to meet with you outside the temple because as soon as we got there, he had no intention of paying you special treatment.\"\n\n\nYou repeat your question to the man once more. \"Who are you?\" \n\n\nThe man's brown eyes meet your own, and you see a intelligent look in them. As if he simply knows all of the answers to any questions you might pose. \"My name,\" he says, \"is Aristotle.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "You'd gone into Aristotle's classes with your expectation wildly low, and came out with your expectations blown out of the water. \n\n\nYou didn't expect to learn very much, yet you've never learned more.\n\n\nYou didn't expect the tutor to be very amiable, yet Aristotle is like the grandfather you never knew.\n\n\nYou never expected to find a place where you would feel more at home than your real home, yet here it is before you. \n\n\nYou sit outside the temple entrance gazing around the near about endless fields and forests. Many different activities are going on, including sparring, horse riding, tree climbing.\n\n\nYour normal lessons are done for the day, and you are left with a few other things to spend your time doing. All of the activities you see going on are available to you, but if you feel tired then you could also just head to your quarters and fall asleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "Do something outside", "result": "Birds circle overhead, and a light breeze shuffles through the air. It is a perfect day to be outside. What do you plan to do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go horse riding", "result": "You decide almost immediately what you want to do next. Riding horses has always been a passion of yours, and there are few things more enjoyable than riding into the wind on a perfect day. \n\n\nYou head to the makeshift stables created for the duration of Aristotle's school here and examine your options. There are many horses to choose from, and you have difficulty choosing, and just when you're about to decide on a horse you see him out of the corner of your eye. Hephaestion is out in the fields behind the stable riding a chestnut colored mare. He catches your eye and waves at you. \n\n\nSuddenly your choices change.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go riding with Hephaestion", "result": "It all happened so fast. You were losing popularity, and as the prince of Macedon, well, that's a death sentence. You don't know which people made the move, but you're certain they planned this very well, for you don't even see it coming. One minute you're in perfect health, but the next you join your ancestors in the afterlife. You die without even knowing what killed you. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Ride without him", "result": "You ignore him, for you did come out here to enjoy the simple pleasures of riding. If you rode with him, then he'd probably ask you to race him, which would turn into a devastating loss for you. None of the horses here would be able to be Atalanta, Heph's horse.\n\n\nSo instead, you grab a spotted white and brown horse and take it for a ride. Pointedly away from Hephaestion. \n\n\nAn hour or so goes by, and the ride gives you peace and elation not often gifted to princes. Now, time to see if doing something else will give you those same feelings.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Go practice your swordsmanship", "result": "You've managed to retain your position as one of the best warriors here, but if others start practicing a lot, then you could find yourself quickly outclassed. Therefore, what better place than the training fields to spend your day?\n\n\nYou head over there, and see Cassander practicing. Luckily for you Cassander also happened to be one of the best warriors, so your training today would not be boring. Cass himself is already engaged in combat, but that doesn't last very long, for the poor sap Cass is fighting overextends and Cass executes a perfectly timed jab to his side. The other youth is sent reeling.\n\n\nThe fight over, you approach Cass. He sees you and before you can say anything, he greets you first. \"Greetings Alexander.\"\n\n\nAmong your friends he is the only that still insists on being formal whenever you two are together. \"Do you want to test your blade against my own?\" \n\n\nThe dirty blonde haired youth nods his head, but motions for you to wait. \"Let me rest a moment longer.\" \n\n\nYou nod before moving to the opposite side of the training circle. You grab a wooden sword and wait for Cassander to ready himself. \n\n\nIt's not long before your friend stands up and enters his fighting stance. You do the same and the fight begins. Unlike when you and your friends were kids, the lot of you actually know how to fight now, so this fight actually takes more than a few seconds to finish. Despite this, you have the clear advantage. Cass is good, but he's no where near as good as you are. \n\n\nThat being said, if you don't change tactics, then this fight could continue on for quite awhile. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Overpower him", "result": "Using superior strength is a tried and true option. Thus, you immediately go on the offensive. You use everything in your arsenal. The only difference being that you consciously make the decision to use excessive amounts of strength in each strike. You lose absurd amounts energy doing this, but Cass is clearly getting worn down as well. \n\n\nYou strike horizontally from the right to the left, and Cass goes to block it, but in doing so his sword is moved away from his body. With that strike you destroyed his fighting stance, and created a clear opening. Now all you have to do is capitalize on it. You strike fast and hard from above and your attack...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Dodge until an opportunity arises", "result": "You and most of your friends tend to be aggressive fighters. Cassander included. If you just dodge until an opportunity arises, then you won't expend very much energy at all with the satisfaction of winning the match.\n\n\nYou apply your change in tactics immediately, and it doesn't go unnoticed. Cass narrows his eyes at you, and he begins to be more cautious. His aggressive attacks come less readily, and the fight drags on. You realize that if you're to win this then you need to be just a tad more aggressive. You need to force him to be aggressive. A plan forms in your head. If you can attack and intentionally leave an opening for him to strike, then you could very well set yourself up for winning. \n\n\nYou put the plan into play immediately. You strike aggressively, then allow an opening. Cassander takes the bait and lunges forward with his sword. Your plan...\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Parry, then strike", "result": "The plan is simple, and perhaps the easiest of your options. You don't have to change your style of fighting at all. The only thing that needs to happen is for you to make sure you parry at the correct time, for parrying is all about timing. You prepare yourself mentally, and your stance changes slightly, but Cass doesn't seem to notice. Instead he goes for the classic overhead slash. Well it's now or never. You go to parry and...", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Fail!", "result": "Parrying involves redirecting your opponents energy immediately after his weapon makes contact with yours. You attempted to do this, but you started to redirect a moment too early and the full force of his swing sends your sword out of your hands. Cass then quickly follows up with a horizontal strike to your side. The strike hits and you are left reeling with pain. Your sword is on the ground, you are in pain, and Cassander stands victorious before you. \n\n\nSuddenly you don't feel like sparring anymore.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Go tree climbing", "result": "You aren't particularly in the mood for anything too intensive, so tree climbing it is. There is something inherently satisfying and relaxing about climbing a tree and sitting atop it's branches. The real hard part was finding a good tree to do the climbing.\n\n\nWhile the immediate area around the temple was flat, plain terrain, there were still quite a few trees scattered about. You see several pines and cypruses, but you ignore them. If you were really going to do this, then you were going to find a nice large oak tree.\n\n\nYou search for a good solid fifteen minutes before finding the perfect one. Tall and thick, the oak's branches wind around the wooden beast. Green dots of its iconic leaves sprout all around, standing as an example of life in its prime to anyone who is blessed enough to see it. such displays of magnificence were rare, and not only did you have the opportunity to see it, but to climb it as well. \n\n\nSmiling you approach the beast. The first branch stands several feet above your head, and it is clear you won't just be able to jump and reach it. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Use the tree to propel yourself into the air", "result": "You take a deep breath and run at the tree, and when you get there you jump at the tree, plant a foot on its side, then propel yourself up to the first branch. You barely manage to grab on with your right hand. You pull yourself up from there, and soon enough you're sitting atop the first branch. After that the going gets easier, for after the first branch branches sprout galore. \n\n\nYour next challenge comes a few minutes later. You are farther up the tree, and the farther you go up the less limbs there are to grab. You've managed to get to the point where here's pretty much only one tree limb that you can grab easily. Any other one would be significantly more difficult, but this isn't usually a problem because the easy limb is usually there. Usually. The part you're at has had its limb broken off near the trunk. You don't know how it happened, but you do know that there are very few options for continuing forward.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leap past it to the next highest branch", "result": " You briefly look down, then regret it. You are very high up in the tree, and any falling could very well kill you. You've already made your mind, however, and ready yourself to make the jump to the next highest branch. You take a breath then start to jump...but lip instead. You forgot to factor in that when you would start to jump the branch might quake under your weight and bend. This did, in fact, happen and you start to fall through the air, but only for a second. Luckily for you, you didn't slip and fall very far from the branch, so manage to keep one hand on the branch. \n\n\nYou pull yourself back onto the branch, and rethink your choices.", "action_results": [{"action": "Use the stump part of the branch to climb", "result": "The tree limb was broken off, but you think you can still use the stump left as a foothold to get up higher in the tree. Dangerous, sure, but the results would be worth it. \n\n\nYou wrap your arms around the tree at the highest point possible and start to shimmy up until your foot is on top of that stump. The foothold is just as sturdy as you thought it would be, and from there it's easy to grab the next branch. \n\n\nYou continue your journey up the tree, but the higher you get the slower you go. The branches get smaller and you aren't sure if some of them will even hold you. Still you press on as far as you think you can go without the branches simply breaking under your weight. \n\n\nYou get the highest, sturdiest branch possible and gaze out over the fields of the the temple. The view is breathtaking. You see a few people riding horses in the distance, including Hephaestion. Cassander and a few other are practicing swordplay in the sparring part of the field. It all looks fantastic, but there's something yet that bothers you. You look up and see the highest branch possible. Something deep within you yearns to be at the top of that. To show the world that you conquered this tree. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue climbing", "result": "You are Alexander, Prince of Macedon, chosen of Artemis, and damn good at climbing trees. You aren't about to let a stick or two get in the way of you standing at the top of this tree. \n\n\nYou immediately set back to work in climbing the beast. The branches are rather flimsy, but you find that so long as you stay light of foot the trees don't snap, even though you do hear precarious creaking noises. \n\n\nEventually you make your way, yes, all the way to the very top branch. Despite being rash in making the decision to continue onward in the first place, you are cautious now, for you'd rather not die. You put one foot on the branch at a time, and in a long moment you find yourself standing at the very top of the tree. \n\n\nIf you thought there was a great view before, then you were wrong. Those sturdy branches could never attain the brilliance of the view that you now held. You think you could even see Mieza from here. You start whooping and yelling in excitement. It was truly a good choice for you to come up here. The mild risk of danger held no sway on you any longer, for you start pumping a fist in the air in your fit of elation. \n\n\nThen you hear the cracking. You don't have anytime to react before the branch you are on snaps and you are sent tumbling into the air beneath you. You hit branch after branch and pain courses through your veins. You feel many of your bones break before your head collides with a rather thick branch knocking you out. You fall for just a few more seconds wherein you hit the ground beneath with a resoundingly solemn thud. You never wake up again.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Resist the urge", "result": "You aren't a fool. The chances of you managing to get to the top branch without breaking another one and falling are slim. Right now its better to simply take what you have and be satisfied with it. \n\n\nActing on those thoughts you make your way back down the tree a satisfied person. You wonder what else could make you feel accomplished.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Stop climbing", "result": "You nearly died, and you decide it best not to tempt fate and death by giving them another swing at you. You climb down the tree and head back to the temple.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Wrap your arms around the trunk and shimmy your way up", "result": "You take a deep breath and wrap your arms around the beast. You aren't even close to wrapping your arms all the way around, but luckily enough, you do manage to have enough grip to start climbing. The going is slow, but you manage to make your way up to the first branch without falling. You pull yourself up from there, and soon enough you're sitting atop the first branch. After that the going gets easier, for after the first branch branches sprout galore. \n\n\nYour next challenge comes a few minutes later. You are farther up the tree, and the farther you go up the less limbs there are to grab. You've managed to get to the point where here's pretty much only one tree limb that you can grab easily. Any other one would be significantly more difficult, but this isn't usually a problem because the easy limb is usually there. Usually. The part you're at has had its limb broken off near the trunk. You don't know how it happened, but you do know that there are very few options for continuing forward.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Try to find purchase on the bark", "result": "You figure that oak bark is sturdier than most, and thus might contain hand and footholds all around its base. If that much is true, then making your way up the tree should be easy. \n\n\nYou take a breath and do, in fact, manage to find some spots that you could use as holds. You act on this revelation and begin to make your way up the tree. After a few seconds you fall from your holds and land back on the grass in a mix of dirt, grass, and bark.\n\n\nApparently bark can't hold your weight very well.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Go get some rope", "result": "Now that you know where the tree is, you aren't going to make it even harder on yourself. You go back to the temple and find some rope before coming back to the tree. After that you simply toss half of the rope up and over the first branch. You grab the other half of the rope again and use the rope to climb up the tree.You pull yourself up from there, and soon enough you're sitting atop the first branch. After that the going gets easier, for after the first branch branches sprout galore. \n\n\nYour next challenge comes a few minutes later. You are farther up the tree, and the farther you go up the less limbs there are to grab. You've managed to get to the point where here's pretty much only one tree limb that you can grab easily. Any other one would be significantly more difficult, but this isn't usually a problem because the easy limb is usually there. Usually. The part you're at has had its limb broken off near the trunk. You don't know how it happened, but you do know that there are very few options for continuing forward. Those options don't include the rope, for in your rush to climb the tree you left in on the first branch. You could go and get it, but at that point you might as well just stop climbing all together. \n\n\nYou're left with two options.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Do something inside", "result": "The inside of the temple is reminiscent of a cave. Having been built in and on the side of a hill, the inside is rather dim. During the day a hole in the roof of the cave is opened for light to seep through, but that is only in one location. Everywhere else without sufficient light is lit with torches.\n\n\nAristotle's study group took the center of the temple to be under the hole in the cave. Those in the lesson sit in a semi-circle of wooden chairs with Aristotle himself at the head. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back to your quarters (end the day)", "result": "Before you know it, the day has gone by and you're left feeling accomplished at what you've spent the day doing. Most days since you've been at Mieza have been spent like this one. Sure the day starts with lessons, hard ones even, yet you've grown to enjoy your time here a lot. You rarely think of home anymore, and instead pour your entire being into your studies with Aristotle, your warrior prowess, and growing closer to your friends. \n\n\nLater that night, in your quarters, you think of how lucky you are to be alive and born into the situation you are in. The gods really must love you. With that comforting thought, you fall asleep and dream dreams of never-ending happiness.", "action_results": [{"action": "Three years later", "result": "Given the continuity of your studies, you held onto the illusion that they would never end. This illusion, it turns out, was entirely incorrect, and of course you knew it was, but pretending that it wasn't was easier. Pretending that you were a simple son of a random noble was easier then remembering that you were the heir to the throne of the Macedonian empire. \n\n\nSo when your father sent a messenger to retrieve you from Aristotle you were shocked. Inwardly only of course. It simply wouldn't due to have everyone know that you were shocked, or in anyway disappointed by your father's summons. There was, however, a farewell for you. all of Aristotle's students gathered to bid you good fortune. Those closest to you even gave you gifts. \n\n\nFrom Ptolemy you received a journal to document your travels within. You only got to know Ptolemy during the latter half of your studies, but he became a close friend quite quickly. \n\n\nFrom Cassander you received a sword of the finest make. It was a memento from all of the sparring you and him did together. \"To protect you when I'm not at your side,\" he'd told you.\n\n\nFrom Hephaestion you received his very own armor set. While not as well crafted as your own, the symbolic meaning behind the gift meant leagues more than the item itself. It was a reference to yours and his most admired people in literature. Achilles and Patroclus. The pair of you often likened yourselves unto the pair of them, and would often argue just as often about which one of you were Achilles and which one was Patroclus. The pair of you would always declare to the other that yourselves Achilles, but neither one of you were ever able to convince the other of this. \n\n\nThe armor itself was a reference to, during the Trojan war, when Achilles was abstaining from fighting. During that time, the Achaeans were being driven back by the Trojans, and were in dire need of their greatest warrior, Achilles. Patroclus knew of their need, and pleaded with Achilles to return to the battle. When Achilles refused, Patroclus instead asked for Achilles armor, so that their army would think Achilles was with them, and thus fight better. Achilles obliged and Patroclus' plan worked for a time, but eventually he was slain.\n\n\nWhile you and Hephaestion disagreed on whom was whom, you did agree on one thing. That the pair of you would not fall victim to death so easily like Achilles and Patroclus did. The armor was a message. \"Don't die while we are separated,\" it seemed to say. But what Heph actually said was, \"Don't return this to me with your blood on it.\"\n\n\nFrom Aristotle you received your favorite book, The Iliad, annotated by Aristotle himself. Within it contained all of you favorite stories, and advice from Aristotle to reflect on while you read it. \n\n\nThese four gifts eclipsed all other you received, and you felt you were well prepared in all aspects to return home to your father.\n\n\nThe palace looked like it always did. Well, perhaps a tad smaller, but everything else was the same. You mother stood at the front of the palace waiting for you. The touches of old age had barely marred her features, and her brilliant blue eyes shone with tears as you approached her.\n\n\n\"Come here, Alexander.\" You oblige her and she immediately begins showering you with amounts of affection that only a mother could achieve. After she was done making sure you weren't hurt anywhere, she began the questioning.\n\n\n\"How did you like it?\" Her voice is music to your ears. Despite having loved being away, you can admit that being back was nice, for you really do love your parents. Their strict leash on you was overbearing at times, but, looking back, they always helped you become the person you are today. Very few people could compare themselves to you without feeling grossly unqualified. \n\n\n\"I enjoyed it mother. I learned so much, and you must remind me to thank father for choosing Aristotle as my tutor. Aristotle has a brilliant mind. One perhaps greater than anyone else I've has the pleasure of acquainting.\"\n\n\nYou mother puts her hand on your shoulder, and steers you into the palace. \"You can thank him yourself dear. He is waiting inside for you.\"\n\n\nYou raise your eyebrows at her. \"I thought he was on preparing for another campaign?\"\n\n\nShe eyes you carefully as you pass through the palace's white marble hallways. \"That is actually what he wants to speak with you about.\"\n\n\nYour heart skips a beat. Was your father finally going to take you on a campaign with him? You expected something similar, but you thought it would be on the next campaign he led. Certainly not this one. \n\n\nSilence descends upon the both of you on your way to the throne room. When you get there however, that silence is easily broken from the outside. Attendants and generals surround your father's throne, all of which are speaking each one vying for the king's attention. \n\n\nMassive white pillars line the way to the throne, and you and your mother walk square in the center of them. \n\n\nYour presence is noticed immediately. \"Alexander, my son. How good it is to see you!\" Your father calls from his throne before standing up and walking to you. \n\n\nTo others his presence might be imposing, but you can only feel admiration for the man as he wraps you in a bear hug. \"How went the lessons?\"\n\n\n\"They went well father. Many thanks for having Aristotle be my tutor. He is quite the teacher.\"\n\n\nYour father nods knowingly. \"That he is. I had to rebuild an entire village for him to agree to teach for me though. He was expensive.\"\n\n\nYou widen your eyes slightly. You had no idea Aristotle had required such a high price for his services. \n\n\n\"But let us move on to the topic at hand. Shall we?\" You nod and your father places his hand on your shoulder mirroring the position you and your mother were in moments before. He then leads you up to the throne. The attendants and generals were dispersed from it in the wake of your arrival.\n\n\n\"Go ahead Alexander. Sit in it.\" \n\n\nYou look at him curiously, and he meets your eyes with his. He then motions for you to go ahead and sit. Determining your father is serious, you walk up to the throne slowly. You knew that you would sit in the chair one day, but you figured that that day was still years away. After all your father was still alive, and he clearly had no intentions of dying. \n\n\nYou take a deep breath and settle your self into the throne. It was made of stark white Alabaster, and lined with silk and wool. It was very comfortable.\n\n\n\"Alexander. I now name you acting regent of Macedon. The throne is yours until I return from my campaign.\" Your father's face is deadly serious, and his voice is grave. You will not dishonor his trust by acting shocked or unworthy of the title. This has been what you've been training for your entire life after all. \n\n\nIt is there, sitting on the throne, that you get your first taste of real power.", "action_results": [{"action": "Life continues onward", "result": "Three years have passed since you were first name regent, and in those three years, you have failed more times than any other person you know. \n\n\nIt all started with the Thracians. Not too long after your father left on his campaign, Thrace rebelled against Macedon. Acing as regent, you immediately went to quell the rebellion. While it took some time and resources, you did eventually quell the rebellion. That part went alright. It was when your father returned that things went awry. Several different Thracian settlement began revolting, and, noting your previous success with quelling the previous rebellion, your father sent you to quell these revolts as well. You had to extend your army fairly thin, but you managed to keep the Thracians in line. Once that happened, your father told you to build up your army further, so you could help him in his next campaign against Athens. \n\n\nYou obliged, and everything was going well until the Illyrians made their move. For several month then, they had been making demands. Threatening to invade and other such claims. You dismissed these claims as lunacy, for everyone knew that the Illyrians could barely herd cattle. Let alone build an army threatening enough to invade the Macedonian empire. \n\n\nYou shouldn't have dismissed their claims. While the Illyrian army wasn't very large, it wasn't anything to laugh at. Especially since the majority of your army was occupied with the Thracians. Your were not nearly as well equipped to deal with the incursion as you should have been, and over half of your army was destroyed by the time your father came to intervene. \n\n\nIt was a huge disaster, and you were immediately dismissed from your general position. Even if you were his son, Philip would not have his general be failures. He needed the best of the best, and while you could've been called that in the past, your failure relieved you of that position. \n\n\nYou were no longer in charge of armies, and instead your father made you an ambassador. An ambassador! He would send you as far away from the battlefield as possible. Not because he cared for your safety. No, it was because he feared you would destroy all that he'd spent his life building up. You spent the last three years, until you were nineteen, settling minor disputes and brokering peace treaties among your empire with others. To your chagrin, you were rather good at it, and your father noticed this. He made you lead ambassador which carried a lot of authority, but you were away from battle. That assignment guaranteed that you would never be in charge of an army again.\n\n\nWell at least until now. Tensions between Athens and Macedon are at an all time high, and war between the two have all but started. The only key left to knock into place was Thebes. The two last powerful kingdoms in Greece not under you father's control were Athens and Thebes, but unlike Athens, Thebes had not yet taken a side. So, your father sent you, the lead ambassador, to see if you could win Thebes to your side. He told you this, and punctuated it with a promise. If you were able to win Thebes from Athens, then you would finally get your own army again. He must've seen that your heart still yearned for the battlefield.\n\n\n ~\n\n\nThose were the thoughts going through your head as you were led into the Theban palace. Similar in Architecture to the palace back home, the Theban palace stood as a beacon of hope for Athens. A beacon that you had to put out. \n\n\nA theban attendant led you through the palace and into the throne room of the King of Thebes. White marble walls were everywhere you looked, and the throne room even had the same marble pillars leading up to the throne itself. The throne that the king was currently seated at. He was a grey eyed man. His wasn't young, yet his black hair hadn't started to grey either. He had an air of confidence and security that only a King could muster. \n\n\n\"Greetings majesty.\" You bow down slightly, as is only respectful when in the throne room of another king. That, and you are trying to win his favor. \n\n\n\"I am Prince Alexander of Macedon. Sent here on behalf of King Philip of Macedon. I would have words with you regarding your loyalties in the coming war.\"\n\n\nThe king regards you calmly. \"What say you Demosthenes?\"\n\n\nIt is only then that you notice a man standing beside the Throne. Greying brown hair sits in an orderly mop atop his head, and intelligent, if arrogant, eyes bore into you from him. You inwardly cringe as you here the name. Demosthenes. One of the most influential individuals in ll of Greece, and certainly the most influential person in Athens. The Athenian ambassador got here before you did. \n\n\n\"I would not put him away out right, your majesty, but I doubt anything he says will be of much consequence to you.\" You can practically feel the odds of your success stacking against you here. \"He is Philip's son after all. He would only seek to control you.\"\n\n\nThe king listens, but doesn't make any expressions on his face that would give way to what he is thinking.\n\n\nYou're in a tough spot. Demosthenes already got to the king, so anything you say will most likely be second source information. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell the truth", "result": "\"Your majesty.\" You begin. \"Truth be told. My father is a very brash man, and can quite often be forgettable. Despite this, he is the greatest warrior and leader Macedon has ever known. He is brilliant on the battlefield, and has won many battles in which the odds were stacked against him. Many mistake him for a god when pitted against him on the battlefield. I assure you. You will not be any different if you go against him in war.\" \n\n\nYour throat feels dry and you swallow nervously. \"Plot with Athens all you want. This will not change the outcome unless you side with us. It would be a shame for a city so great to be razed to the ground just because the king was fooled into believing he had a chance at defeating Macedon.\"\n\n\n\"Athens has already sealed their fate. don't seal yours as well,\" you finish with that.\n\n\nThe room is deadly silent for several infinite moments. The king finally speaks.\n\n\n\"You toe a dangerous line Alexander of Macedon. Any more threats and would have had you executed, but you do have a point.\" \n\n\n\"You majes-\" Demosthenes begins, but the king waves him silent. \n\n\n\"Send a messenger to Philip telling him that I would speak to him in person before finalizing any sort of treaty being made.\" The king regards you for a moment longer. \"And find the prince a room.\"\n\n\nYou let go of a breath you hadn't realized you'd been holding in. You managed to get your father the opportunity to make a treaty with the king. You only hope that this will be enough for you to get your army back.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "A guard walks you to your temporary rooms, and you get pretty solid rest that night all things considered. In the coming days the meeting is set, and all of the necessary arrangements are prepared. The meeting will be one month from the day you convinced the king to agree with you.\n\n\nYou stay on edge for the first week or so of your stay there, but soon you start to relax as you grow more and more confident that you won't be killed in your sleep. However, you still avoid Demosthenes and the king as much as possible, for you don't want to unnecessarily provoke them. \n\n\nThe month passes by fairly quickly, and before you know it the night before the meeting comes. You go to sleep early in anticipation thereof. \n\n\nUnfortunately for you, you aren't able to see how the meeting goes, for you are stabbed in your sleep. You guess that they could only deal with so many Macedonian royalty at one time.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Tell the \"truth\"", "result": "\"Your majesty,\" you begin. \"My father only wishes for peace among us.\" Demosthenes scoffs. \"Yes. Even with Athens. He would have us all join together and form a coalition. We would finally bring all of Greece under one banner, and we would be powerful and rich beyond compare, and best of all we'd treat each other as equals.\"\n\n\nThe king looks amused, and Demosthenes looks more than a little skeptical. \n\n\n\"A triumvirate would be formed, and all decisions would be made together. Demosthenes, you would be granted a special place therein. You would no longer have to bow to the whims of your people's so called democracy.\" He stands there expressionless, as if considering your offer. \"We would become the most powerful empire in the world.\" You close with that, and anxiously await their reactions. \n\n\nThey look at each other for a moment, before the King stands up and walks over to you. You don't allow him to intimidate you, and instead stand your ground and hold his penetrating gaze. \n\n\n\"Alexander. You would have me believe that your father would not kill us and take emperorship for himself at the first opportunity he gets?\" He laughs in your face. \"That is a fool's hope. Almost as foolish as you blatantly lying in my presence.\" \n\n\nHe waves his hands in a quick motion and two guards restrain and force you to your knees while a third one gives the king a sword with a gem encrusted hilt. \n\n\n\"My father will avenge me.\" You say this, but you wonder if they hear the uncertainty in your voice. The king certainly does.\n\n\n\"He won't care. You fell out of favor with him long ago. He probably won't even ask for your body.\"\n\n\nThose are the last words you hear, before the sound of a sword swinging through the air fills your ears. You don't feel any pain as the king of Thebes separates your head from your shoulders.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null, {"action": "Go to sleep", "result": "You already finished your lessons for the day, so why not get some rest? You don't have anything else planned for the day, so it works out perfectly for you. Besides, even princes need rest from the monotony of academy life. One could even say you are doing the smart thing by taking a nap.\n\n\nTherefore you head through to the temple and to your quarters for some rest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Waking up", "result": "After a few hours, you groggily wake up. Post nap fatigue assails you, and you wonder if you should even get up to check what time it is. You really want to go to sleep, but a quiet nagging voice tells you that you should probably do something with your day. ", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Trust Hephaestion", "result": "\"I do trust you.\" You tell him this and a look of relief and shock come over his face. \"Lead the way.\"\n\n\n\"Well then,\" Hephaestion starts. \"This is not at all what was supposed to happen.\" \n\n\n\"What?\" You ask confusedly.\n\n\n\"Let's go ask that man for directions.\" Hephaestion says, and you only grow more confused.\n\n\n\"Wait, why? didn't you already know how to get there.\" \n\n\n\"Just trust me on this. Okay?\" \n\n\nYou thought you were already trusting him by letting him lead, but you do what he says and start jogging over to the man. You hear Hephaestion follow behind you. As you approach, the man turns around and looks the both of you over. You do the same to him. Grey traveling robes adorn him, and his short cropped hair and beard are a mix of dull brown and grey. The fellow is older than you, but not quite as old as you first thought.\n\n\nYou speak first. \"Greetings. Do you happen to know of a temple nearby, or somewhere hereabouts?\"\n\n\nThe man nods, \"Yes, as a matter of fact I do. Are you two headed over there right now?\" He glances at Hephaestion, and before you can respond Hephaestion speaks.\n\n\n\"We were headed over there just now, but my friend thought it expedient to make sure we were going the right way despite my adamant claims that we were going the right direction.\"\n\n\nYou turn around bewildered that your friend would give a stranger so much information, but Hephaestion doesn't meet your eyes so your glaring has no effect on him. You turn around as the man begins to speak. \n\n\n\"Well done Hephaestion. You executed your job perfectly. Many thanks.\" \n\n\nIf you were bewildered before, then you were astonishingly confused now. Neither of you offered your names to the stranger, yet he called Hephaestion by name. \n\n\nThe man straightens his back, and begins to circle you. He looks you up and down in a very obvious way. \"I take it this is Alexander?\"\n\n\nHe addresses Hephaestion whom immediately respond. \"Yes sir.\"\n\n\nHonorifics too? Who is this guy to make Hephaestion respect him so? The only other people he respected as much were his and your own parents.\n\n\n\"Who are you?\" Your voice is flavored with curiosity, and confusion.\n\n\nThe man doesn't speak, but simply continues looking you over. Hephaestion instead responds.\n\n\n\"Remember when I told you we were going to the temple?\" You nod your acknowledgement. \"Well that was only a half truth. Even if we did go to the temple, there wouldn't be a tutor there.\" He glances over to the stranger. \"Well at least not yet.\"\n\n\nYou turn back and look the men over again when you finally realize what Hephaestion is hinting at. \n\n\nHephaestion continues. \"He met with me several days ago and asked for me to arrange this. Evidently he wanted to meet with you outside the temple because as soon as we got there, he had no intention of paying you special treatment.\"\n\n\nYou repeat your question to the man once more. \"Who are you?\" \n\n\nThe man's brown eyes meet your own, and you see a intelligent look in them. As if he simply knows all of the answers to any questions you might pose. \"My name,\" he says, \"is Aristotle.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Refuse", "result": "You bite your tongue. Your father couldn't even tame the beast. How could you ever hope to do it? You wish you'd never spoken.\n\n\nWhen you don't respond the merchant laughs. \"All talk but no action. Just as I thought.\" \n\n\nYou stay silent, but your father won't have anyone insulting his son. \"You had a right to issue a challenge against my son, but cross that boundary and I will see to it that you never walk again.\"\n\n\nFear and regret alights the merchant's eyes and he quickly asks for forgiveness before hurrying and trying to rein in the majestic horse. You watch on shamefully. After finally entering the good graces of your father, you go and ruin it by becoming an embarrassment. You feel your father's gaze on you and you turn to face him. \n\n\n\"I wouldn't have expected you to do it anyway son.\" \n\n\nYou nod absently as if you aren't affected by your failure, but you could see, practically feel, the loss of respect from your father and anyone else watching. You tilt your head down in shame and pray to the gods for the day to be over with. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null]}, null, null]}, {"action": "Etiquette", "result": "\"Etiquette.\" \n\n\nLeonidas raises his eyebrows in surprise and in mild horror. This is his least favorite subject, and it shows plainly on his face. He is not happy with your choice. \"I suppose that we can do etiquette...\" He trails off as he walks to a a shelf by his main work desk. On it are several different devices of etiquette including: various brass utensils, the lyre, and a book which you know contains the proper ways to communicate.\n\n\nWhile he is turned around, you look out a window on the opposite side of the room. Some of the nobles' youth are practicing their skills with wooden swords outside. You yearn to go with them, but your conscious tells you to stay in your lessons. \n\n\nBarring your conscious, you really just want to go play with the other kids, and, you realize, that this is the perfect opportunity to sneak out. Leonidas has his back turned wile rifling through the proper etiquette book. If you left then you think he'd probably be happy. After all he doesn't want to do etiquette either. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Sneak out and play with the other kids", "result": "This is a great opportunity and you aren't going to miss it. You quietly stand up, then tip toe out of the room. You continue walking quietly until you are out of that hallway entirely. The white marbled walls once again grace your eyes with their brilliance as you make your way outside. Eventually you make your way out, and find the hill where you saw the other kids playing. \n\n\nYou've played with some of he nobles' kids before, but you never manage to remember their names. Well except for one. That one stands in the middle of a circle of boys your age. His name is Hephaestion. You've never had many friends, but if there was one person you would call a friend, then it would be him. He stands engaged in combat with one other guy. You watch the fight as you approach the mass of raucous kids. \n\n\nHephaestion and the other kid stand on opposite sides of the circle with each one wielding a wooden practice sword. Hephaestion makes the first move charging with a simple overhand strike at the other kid who manages to block it, and make a swing of his own at Hephaestion's side. That is promptly blocked and parried away. Capitalizing on his advantage, Hephaestion surges forward with a lunge. This attack does not get blocked and the other kid soon drops into a heap on the ground. You then hear a chorus of cries.\n\n\n\"Come on, Cass. You had that!\"\n\n\n\"Now Hephaestion gets to go again!\" \n\n\n\"We all knew you would lose!\"\n\n\nThe kid, Cass, struggles up from the ground and shouts back at them. \"I'd like to see any of you beat him!\"\n\n\nHephaestion holds a smile throughout all of this, and you think it's high time you put him in his place. \n\n\n\"I'll do it.\" You say this at normal volume, but no one seems to hear you. They haven't even noticed you for that matter, so you try a different tactic. \n\n\nYou start shoving your way through the group. \"I'll do it!\" You shout over the arguing of everyone else, and everyone's eyes go to you as you break the center. Silence holds everyone's hands, and Cass simply gives his sword to you. No one speaks a word, for this is the fight. Whenever you do play with these guys, everything always boils down to this fight. You versus Hephaestion. It had taken on a kind of sacred aura, and as such the fight was given utmost reverence. \n\n\nYou enter into your ready stance, and Hephaestion follows. Hephaestion usually bests you in these bouts, but you feel that today is different. The only thing left to decide is how you'll fight. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Use superior strength", "result": "In times past you've allowed yourself to be worn down by Hephaestion's aggressive attacks. Not this time. This time you'll give him some of his own medicine. \n\n\nYou open up like he did against Cass. A charging overhead strike, and like the previous fight it is readily blocked. Unlike the previous fight, you don't allow him to attack. Instead you push his block with your sword to create space, then attack again. You keep on pressing attack, and but Hephaestion doesn't budge. You appear to panic, and so make a slow, weak horizontal strike at his side. Hephaestion sees an opening and instead of blocking your weak attack he swings down at your head. \n\n\nJust like you wanted.\n\n\nYour swing changes from a horizontal strike to a side strike at his sword. You put all of your strength into it and when the blades clash, Hephaestion's sword is sent flying. He stumbles back onto his posterior, and you point your wooden sword at his neck in triumph. \n\n\nThe silence is continued for a moment longer before a cheer goes out among your fellows. It invigorated them to see Hephaestion defeated. You meet his eyes and a grin goes across both of your faces before you help him back up. \n\n\n\"You got me that time Alex, but I'll win next time.\"\n\n\n\"I'd have to disagree,\" you respond with victory alighting your soul. \n\n\n\"I'm sorry, but it's the truth.\"\n\n\nYou're about to make a retort when Hephaestion groans. \"Your uncle.\" He points behind you and at the palace.\n\n\nLeonidas stands at the window you found yourself at just a short while ago. He gestures for you to come inside. You find yourself sighing. \n\n\n\"Teach these boys a thing or two, will you Hephaestion?\"\n\n\nHe nods readily. \"Don't die of boredom.\"\n\n\nYou go back inside the palace, through the hallways and back to Leonidas' study. He's already in his chair waiting.\n\n\n\"I'm sorry,\" you begin, but he holds up his hand. \n\n\n\"It's fine Alexander. Let's just move on to a different topic. Shall we?\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Out maneuver him", "result": "In your experience, Hephaestion is a very aggressive fighter. If you can get him to overextend, then you could very well walk away with victory today. As such, Hephaestion is the first one to attack. \n\n\nTesting the waters, he quickly lunges forward only really using his arms as to not commit himself to the strike. You simply take a step or two backward to avoid the blow. Hephaestion attacks again, and you dodge again. Never attacking, but always ready to, you wait for your opportunity to arise.\n\n\nHephaestion, mistaking your hesitance to attack for weakness, quickly goes on the aggressive. Strike after strike come toward you, but you dodge them whilst making it look like you're on the run. Hephaestion doesn't seem to notice, and his form turns lax. Moments after, your opportunity comes.\n\n\nHe swings down in a deadly arc towards your right shoulder, and the swing carries a lot of power, but the harder he swings, the easier it is for him to overextend. You quickly dash toward his strike and let his sword run along the length of yours. His momentum carries him past you and he stumbles. You take the opportunity and plant your foot into his backside. He then goes tumbling to the grassy ground at your feet. You quickly place your wooden sword's tip beneath his chin. \n\n\nSilence continues for a moment longer before a cheer goes out among your fellows. It invigorated them to see Hephaestion defeated. You meet his eyes and a grin goes across both of your faces before you help him back up. \n\n\n\"You got me that time Alex, but I'll win next time.\"\n\n\n\"I'd have to disagree,\" you respond with victory alighting your soul. \n\n\n\"I'm sorry, but it's the truth.\"\n\n\nYou're about to make a retort when Hephaestion groans. \"Your uncle.\" He points behind you and at the palace.\n\n\nLeonidas stands at the window you found yourself at just a short while ago. He gestures for you to come inside. You find yourself sighing. \n\n\n\"Teach these boys a thing or two, will you Hephaestion?\"\n\n\nHe nods readily. \"Don't die of boredom.\"\n\n\nYou go back inside the palace, through the hallways and back to Leonidas' study. He's already in his chair waiting.\n\n\n\"I'm sorry,\" you begin, but he holds up his hand. \n\n\n\"It's fine Alexander. Let's just move on to a different topic. Shall we?\"", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Stay in your lesson", "result": "As much as you want to practice your fighting skills, you can't just leave Leonidas here. For all you know mother might get mad at him again. \n\n\nYou wait patiently as Leonidas decides how to teach you, and before long he walks back over to his seat with the Etiquette 'manual' in hand. He begins the lesson by teaching you the various ways you are supposed to address foreign dignitaries, and then having you memorize them and repeat them back to him.\n\n\nThis grows quite tedious and you find yourself whistling some nameless tune. Anything to break the monotony of blanket memorization. After a while you realize that Leonidas has stopped asking you questions, and instead is just listening to you whistle. The sudden attention surprises you and you break off your whistling. \n\n\n\"What's wrong Uncle?\"\n\n\nHe shakes his head idly. \"Nothing's wrong. The opposite in fact.\" You raise your eyebrows surprised and somewhat curiously. \n\n\nLeonidas gets up from his seat and walks back to his materials shelf. He puts the manual back, and instead grabs the lyre you saw earlier. He's never once given you the opportunity to play it before. \n\n\n\"Let's see how you do with this Alexander,\" he hands you the lyre, which you take gingerly, \n\n\nHe waits expectantly.\n\n\n\"I don't know how to play it,\" you tell him.\n\n\n\"Give it your best shot.\"\n\n\nSeeing no way out of it, you start to struma few strings. After you figure out the basic sounds of each string you attempt to play craft a melody. You think it sounds great, but Leonidas' expressing denotes otherwise. \n\n\n\"That's fine enough for starters, but I think you can do better. If you're willing to commit, Alexander, then I can teach you this instrument. It is a hard thing to do, but i think it's well within your reach. What do you say?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Yes", "result": "You once heard your father say that there are two things that'll make a girl fall for you. The first: If you you fight honorably. The second: If you can play an instrument. Your answer was simple when you remembered that.\n\n\n\"Yes.\"\n\n\nA smile crosses Leonidas' face. \"Alright then. We can begin immediately.\"\n\n\nThroughout the rest of your lesson he teaches you the basic concept and notes of the lyre. Before too long, however, Leonidas decides that you better move onto something else. \n\n\n\"What do you want to study next?\"", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "No", "result": "You don't know why else you have an aversion to it, but you feel like if you start to learn the lyre, you won't have very much time for anything else. \n\n\n\"No.'\n\n\nLeonidas frowns. \"That's a shame. I feel like you could have been one of the greatest musicians of our time. \"\n\n\nWhen you don't say anything he simply moves on. \n\n\n\"What lesson would you like to learn next?", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"Using an open forum style to have his students debate.\"", "result": "\"I'm afraid that's incorrect Alexander.\" He looks disappointed in you. \"Guess again.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null]}, {"action": "Go to your lessons", "result": "While you really don't want to go to your lessons, you also don't want to disobey your mother. That, and there's the chance you might put Lanike in a bad spot with your mother. You'd rather avoid your mother's wrath entirely, for lessons can always end, but when your mother kindles her wrath, it can stay ablaze for several months at a time. It's quite unlike your father's wrath which flares up at the most unexpected times, burn hot, then turns to ash.\n\n\nYou yawn and the pair of you continue onward to Leonidas' study. When you two get there, Leonidas is sitting in a polished wooden chair with a book in hand. His desk is positioned behind him, and another chair is sitting in front of him. Several bookshelves line the walls, and each of the shelves are filled with copious scrolls, parchments, and a few bound books.\n\n\n\"You're late, Alexander.\" his voice sounds like your mother's, filled with authority, but the similarities end there. While your mother has fiery red hair, Leonidas has dull brown hair. Even their facial structures are wildly different. The only thing they really have in common, aside from their demeanor, is their color eyes which, like yours, are sky blue. \n\n\n\"His mother kept him longer than expected.\" Lanike immediately comes to your defense. \n\n\n\"Hm. Is that so? It can't be helped then .\" He says this, but doesn't sound at all convinced. \"Now come Alexander. We have work to do.\" \n\n\nLanike ruffles your tousled golden hair one last time disappearing into the hallway. She'll be back in a few hours to pick you up. \n\n\nYou sit in the chair across from your Uncle.\n\n\n\"Alright. What shall we start with?", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story46.json b/data/scraper/stories/story46.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fe719f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story46.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=42380", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Your name is Daniel Dalton, you were born in 1870 and by 1890 you were a Lawman in the Old West. You arrested law breakers and helped keep the peace. You were a good man. You always knew you would be a good man because your five brothers were good men: Frank was a lawman in Arkansas, Grat was a lawman in Oklahoma and Bob was a lawman in Kansas. Another brother Bill was a lawyer in California, fighting for justice in the courts. You and your younger brother Emmett were Special Policemen in the Indian Territory. You were all good people.\n\n\nBut somehow everything went wrong.\n\n\nIt began when you were seventeen and your oldest brother Frank was killed in a gunfight with a gang of outlaws. It inspired you and your brothers to become Lawmen and you all served bravely, at one time Grat was shot in the arm by outlaws while during his service Bob killed two wanted men at different times. Despite this word began to spread that the Dalton Boys were no good, crooked lawmen horse stealing and making money on the side. Perhaps the fact that your cousins were the Youngers didn't help.\n\n\nBrothers Cole, Jim, John and Bob Younger had once rode with Jesse James and his legendary gang of outlaws. John had been killed and the others captured and put in prison after a gunfight. You and your brothers tried to have as little to do with them as possible but when you were nineteen Bob Younger died in prison of tuberculosis.You and your brothers traveled to Minnesota State Penitentiary to attend the funeral and on a cold autumn evening you and your cousins gathered in the prison cemetery.\n\n\nJim did not say a word to any of you but Cole, a tough veteran of fifteen bullet wounds, walked over after the service to say a few words to you and your brothers.When he learns that you are lawmen he reacts with horror. \"Our family have never been no Yankee lawmen,\" he tells you tersely. \"Law in the South is nothing more than what the rich Republicans in Washington say is the law. Don't be their bloodhounds and lapdogs boys, it is far better to be the fox!\"\n\n\nA few months after this meeting Bob and Emmett are fired from their jobs for illegally selling alcohol to Native Americans. Depressed they go traveling down to New Mexico where they get into a crooked card game with a gang of tinhorn gamblers: realizing they are being cheated they pull out their pistols and take their money back at gunpoint. For this they are posted up as wanted men: outlaws. Days later you and Grat are fired and arrested on charges of horse stealing, though the charges soon fall through for lack of evidence.\n\n\nFeeling victimized you and your brothers all head out to California to see your brother Bill. Bill is having problems of his own: he has been dismissed from the California State Legislature for opposing the large railway companies, who have been using armies of hired gunmen to bully farmers and ranches into selling their land to them cheaply so they can build their railroads. As you gather at Bill's house to celebrate New Year's Day 1891 the mood is dark.\n\n\n\"It's time for a change boys,\" Bob declares. \"We've been treated unfairly in honest work because some of our family were outlaws. We've been cheated and abused and when we've stood up for ourselves we've been labeled outlaws too. Cole is right: it's all the fault of the big businesses: the banks and the railroads who do everything they can to take the money of honest men and leave them with nothing but empty promises. The only way not to be part of this system is to live outside the law... all the way.\"\n\n\nGrat looks uncertain, with Frank dead he is now the oldest brother but he is more of a follower than a leader. \"That's a hell of a decision to make Bob,\" he says quietly. \"Grat look at us!\" Bob exclaims. \"You have shed blood and we've all lost a brother for the law and that same law says we our outlaws! Well I say it's time we started living up to our reputation.\"\n\n\nBill frowns thoughtfully, ambitious and determined he and Bob are natural rivals. \"If we do this there's no going back Bob. Think on that.\"\n\n\nBob nods, a young man and a crack shot with a rifle or a pistol he is the most outspoken of you all. \"Then we'll just have to be the best outlaws there ever was,\" he declares with a grin.\n\n\n\"I'm with you Bob,\" Emmett declares. He is the youngest and he has always idolized Bob and always tries to follow in his footsteps.\n\n\n\"Ok,\" you say quietly. At your hips you wear two matching Colt Pistols which once belonged to your brother Frank. Silent but resolute you have the gift of earning respect from others by your actions. \"We will be the Dalton Gang then and begin our new life from today.\"\n\n\nYour Outlaw story is about to begin.", "action_results": [{"action": "How to Play", "result": "IF YOU HAVE ALREADY PLAYED AMERICAN OUTLAWS: THE JAMES GANG YOU CAN SKIP THIS PAGE AND MOVE STRAIGHT ON TO THE DALTON GANG PAGE.\n\n\nIn this story your fate will be determined entirely by your choices. The number of Gunfights you take part in, the people you Injure and Kill, the number of Robberies you commit and your Score (your share of the amount of money you steal) will all be recorded. Your main aim is to survive, avoiding both prison and death in order to continue your Outlaw Career with a long-term goal of retiring. Be careful: one wrong decision, particularly in a gunfight where any moment could be your last, will signal a sudden and fatal end to your career.\n\n\nIf you Survive the Game without going to prison you receive a 100,000 Score Bonus.\n\n\nIf you Survive the Game but serve a lengthy prison term you receive a 50,000 Score Bonus.\n\n\nIf you are killed during the Game you receive no Score Bonus.\n\n\nYour main aim in the Game is to get the highest Score possible by taking part in successful robberies. You always receive a share of the loot based on how much you steal and the number of outlaws who committed the Robbery, for example if you are part of a ten-man team that rob a bank of $10,000 dollars for example your share will come to $1,000 and this will be added to your Score.\n\n\nGunfights, Injured, Killed and Robberies numbers are non-essential for the game but when your story ends, either through a sudden and violent death or through peaceful retirement you will be taken to The Performance Table page where you can compare your Gunfights, Injured, Killed, Robberies and Score to your fellow Outlaws as an indication of how you have performed. Leaving a comment after you complete this story will enable others to see your Score.\n\n\nGood Luck Reader, your Outlaw Story is about to begin!", "action_results": [{"action": "The Dalton Gang", "result": "On a cold winter's night you and your brothers ride out to the small community of Alila.\n\n\nIt is a cold winter in night in the Californian hills and you are all wearing dusters, long grey coats that go down to the ankles. Your loaded pistols hang at your belt. At the train station in Alila you sit on the platform in nervous silence, the only light being an orange glow from Bill's cigar. Finally in the distance a second light appears: a single beam of yellow light. Finally with a roar of steam the night train pulls up alongside you all.\n\n\n\"Good luck boys,\" Bob mutters as you all climb aboard.\n\n\nClimbing onto the train you wait until it begins to move then all of you make your way to the driver's compartment at the front of the train. Inside is a little grey-haired man in a blue engineers uniform who looks round in surprise as you enter the locomotive.\n\n\n\"I'm sorry gentlemen, you are not supposed to be up here,\" he says cordially.\n\n\n\"Well tonight we're breaking all the rules,\" Bob replies coldly and draws his pistol. \"Stop the train.\"\n\n\nThe engineer obediently pulls the lever to stop the train and just moments after leaving Alila the train is gliding to a halt. As the train slows the engineer suddenly throws open the door of the compartment and jumps off the train. \"Kill him,\" Bob barks. \"He'll raise the alarm!\" He immediately rushes towards the open door.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Bob and shoot at the fleeing man", "result": "There is a full moon tonight and the silver light grants you a clear view of the old man stumbling for his life across the sloping grass of the railway embankment. Raising your pistol you take careful aim and squeeze the trigger. A spray of red explodes from the man's head and he topples to the ground. He lies there motionless as the train continues a short way before finally gliding to a halt. You return to your stunned brothers inside the compartment.\n\n\nBob is the first to recover, mutters \"come on\" and leads you all down the train. Hiding your guns in your pockets you pass through the passenger cars, people looking at you curiously but perhaps sensing who you are no one interferes with you until you come to the corridor that leads to the express carriage. Bob has just started to open the door when a shot is fired, the bullet striking the thick wooden door. You all jump back immediately and Bob pulls the door shut again. There is a moment's silence then more shots are fired, the bullets striking the door in front of you.\n\n\n\"We'd better clear out of here,\" Bill mutters to the rest of you. \"That express guard is armed.\" Bob thinks for a moment and swears. \"We should have brought some dynamite,\" he mutters. \"It doesn't matter,\" Grat says quickly. \"The alarm is raised now boys, let's clear out.\"\n\n\nYou open a door and one by one you all jump off the train and run down the embankment. You have left five horses tethered in a copse of trees nearby and reach them after a swift five minutes run. Mounting up you ride off south. The robbery has been a complete failure: an engineer has been killed and you have been forced to flee without a single dollar. It is not an impressive debut.\n\n\nNews travels fast and by the time you make it back to San Francisco where Bill lives the news is in all the morning newspapers that an engineer was murdered on a South Pacific Train last night by a desperate gang of train robbers. You keep to Bill's house all day, each of you lost in your own thoughts about what to do now. The tension drags on until evening when after dinner Bob finally addresses the problem.\n\n\n\"I've been thinking and I reckon it'd be a lot safer if we all headed back to the Indian Territory,\" he says. \"We know it well and I don't reckon the law will find us there.\"\n\n\n\"I've got a law career here in California Bob,\" Bill says angrily. \"You forget, only you and Emmett are currently wanted for anything: Grat, Daniel and I aren't known to the law yet.\"\n\n\n\"How long do you think that will last with posses tracking us for the Alila Robbery?\" Bob demands.\n\n\nAn argument rages for the next few hours until it ends with Grat siding with Bill and both choosing to lie low in California while Bob and Emmett head back to the Indian Territory to hide out there until the heat dies down. What you'll do after a few months isn't discussed and you need to choose which pair of brothers to join.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Bob and Emmett to the Indian Territory", "result": "You, Bob and Emmett bid farewell to your other brothers and set off by train across Nevada, Utah and Colorado back to the Indian Territory. You are just in time: days later you read in the papers that Bill and Grat have both been arrested back in California and charged with train robbery. You are all concerned by the news but Bob points out there is nothing you can do about it until you have some money so he arranges a meeting with two of his old friends in the Indian Territory.\n\n\nAt the little community of Wharton you find two men waiting at the train station for you. The first is a middle-aged man with a distinctive black gunpowder burn on his left cheek while his companion is shorter, handsome man with an impressive moustache. \"Boys, let me introduce you to Black Face Charley Bryant and Bitter Creek George Newcomb,\" Bob declares. Greetings are exchanged all round as you leave the station.\n\n\n\"Black Face and Bitter Creek were with me and Emmett in that little caper down in New Mexico that got us all written up as Outlaws,\" Bob explains to you. \"I've been thinking boys that it was time to show this country what real outlaws are like. We've already held up one train in California and I plan to hit more here in the Territory where they haven't got any real law; just miles and miles of wilderness to hide in and train lines running through it like arteries for us to cut. What do you boys reckon?\"\n\n\n\"After we read in the papers you boys were behind that hold up in California we were kind of hoping you would turn up with that exact offer,\" Bitter Creek declares with a grin. Black Face just grunts.\n\n\nOn the first day of May the five of you board a train at Wharton. While Black Face and Bitter Creek go to capture the driver and stop the train you, Bob and Emmett head straight to the Express Carriage. Catching the Guard by surprise you disarm him at gunpoint and empty the safe. As the train slows to a halt you jump off and race to a nearby copse of trees where you have left horses waiting, joined by your companions. Once you have ridden a safe distance you count the money and find you have stolen some $1700, making your share $300. It's not much but it's a start.\n\n\n\"Well boys it's not millions but the Territory isn't a wealthy place,\" Bob says thoughtfully. \"I reckon it's best if we split up. Bitter Creek, did you say you had some friends over in Hutchinson, Kansas? I reckon that sounds like a safe spot for us.\" Black Face coughs. \"I reckon I'm sick boys,\" he tells the rest of you. \"Got this damn cough that won't go away so I reckon I'd best get into Hutchinson here in the Territory and see a doctor I trust. Drop me a line when you want me and I'll join you boys again.\" Bob nods and you ponder who to join.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Bob, Emmett and Bitter Creek to Kansas", "result": "You and your companions ride out to Hutchinson to stay with Bitter Creek's friend, a near-silent little man called Charley Pierce who looks like the kind of man who'd easily blend into a crowd. As it turns out you are not Charley's only visitors and three other men are staying with him: a cowboy called Bill Power, a morose young man called Dick Broadwell and a gregarious and cheerful tall man with an elegant moustache called Bill Doolin.\n\n\nYou hide out with your four new friends for four months after the Wharton Robbery until the bad news begins to arrive. First witnesses identify all of you who helped rob the Wharton train, this leads to Black Face being recognized in the Indian Territory and being killed after he killed a lawman while trying to resist arrest. This all probably contributes to Grat being found guilty of train robbery and being sentenced to twenty years imprisonment in California.\n\n\nYou are all disheartened by Black Face's death but Bob has four new recruits: Charley Pierce, Bill Power, Dick Broadwell and Bill Doolin all agree to join you, Bob, Emmett and Bitter Creek in the Gang giving you eight.Feeling numerous enough to deal with anything you all travel back into the Indian Territory and wearing long grey dusters you wait at the little community of Laelietta to board the train. When it arrives Bill Power and Dick go up to the front of the train to capture the driver, Bill Doolin, Charley and Bitter Creek guard the passengers and you and your brothers go to rob the Express Carriage.\n\n\nThe robbery goes like clockwork and everyone keeps calm; you and your brothers capture the Express Guard and use dynamite to blast open the safe. Taking all the money inside you and your fellow Outlaws flee the train on foot and escape with your money, counting it in safety you find you have stolen $2,500, making your share $300. This train robbery seems to signal a change of luck: first Grat escapes from custody by jumping from a moving train on his way to prison and then Bill is acquitted in court of robbery. You send telegrams to both your newly freed brothers to meet you and the rest of the Dalton Gang in the Indian Territory that winter.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reunion", "result": "Much has changed in a year.\n\n\nIn the snow-covered woods outside the small town of Ingalls you and the other nine members of what the newspapers are calling The Dalton Gang have made your camp. Around one campfire your brother Bob is congratulating Bill and Grat on their respective acquittal and escape while your fourth brother Emmett looks on. The five men who have been helping you and your brothers rob trains are sitting around another camp fire chatting.\n\n\nThe most experienced recruit is Bitter Creek, a handsome little man with a big moustache. He is sitting next to his silent best friend Charley Pierce and chatting to Bill Doolin, a tall gregarious cowboy with a ready laugh. Next to them are the last two members of the Gang, Bill Power and Dick Broadwell. All of you are well-armed and with the exception of your brother Bill you are all Wanted Outlaws with prices on your heads. You have gathered to celebrate Christmas and the New Year together and on New Years Day Bob gives a little speech.\n\n\n\"Boys, we've got great opportunities before us,\" he declares. \"In one year we have robbed three trains and put together this great Gang that is famous throughout America. This year we'll move onto bigger and better things: we'll rob more trains and then we'll move onto banks! We're going to be the biggest Outlaws to hit this country since Jesse James and his Gang! We'll make as much money as we like and out-ride and out-shoot the law!\"\n\n\n\"You'll have to do it without me Bob,\" your brother Bill announces. \"I'm going back to California to start over. I'm the only one in this Gang with a clean record and I aim to keep it that way. If you're smart Grat, Daniel and Emmett you'll come back with me too and hide out at my place. You take too many chances you'll end up shot up like that Black Face fellow I've read about in the papers or in prison for the rest of your lives.\"\n\n\nBill's announcement promptly leads to a massive argument between him and Bob while you and the rest of the Gang look on awkwardly. It ends with Bill deciding to go back to California to try to resurrect his law practice while Grat and Emmett choose to stay in the Indian Territory with Bob and the others and rob trains. When Bill sees his brothers are unwilling to join him he asks you if you'd prefer to go back to California with him or continue your outlaw life here.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to California with Bill", "result": "Saying goodbye to your brothers and the rest of the Gang you decide to go back to San Francisco with Bill. In California Bill struggles to rebuild his law firm but it is difficult for a man whose four brothers are wanted outlaws and who many believe is an outlaw himself. Bill struggles while you hide out in his home for ten months. In the papers you read about your brothers and their Gang robbing two more trains in the Indian Territory, the latter after a daring gunfight.\n\n\nThen comes the news of Coffeyville.\n\n\nBob, Grat and Emmett, together with Bill Power and Dick Broadwell, try to rob two banks at the same time in the city of Coffeyville. The alarm is raised and a massive gunfight breaks out that leaves eight men dead including Bob, Grat, Bill and Dick while Emmett survives despite 23 individual bullet wounds and is imprisoned for life. Your brothers Bob and Grat are dead, their gang destroyed and initially you and Bill are so full of pain you don't know what to do.\n\n\nYour minds are decided when a telegram arrives from the three surviving gang members who did not go on the Coffeyville Raid: Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce. They invite you and Bill to join them and a new Gang they are putting together in the Indian Territory. You and Bill are both in agreement.\n\n\n\"They've killed our brothers and now we're going to make America pay,\" Bill declares. \"Damn the law and damn the banks, I'm going to join these boys and bring hell to Kansas and the Territory. Are you with me Daniel?\"\n\n\n\"I am,\" you tell your brother quietly and the pair of you return to the Indian Territory.", "action_results": [{"action": "A New Gang", "result": "It's a somber group of six men that meet in the little town of Ingalls in the Indian Territory. You and your brother Bill are silent and serious when you meet Bill Doolin, bearded now, and his companions: the veteran outlaw Bitter Creek, his mute friend Charley Pierce and a new recruit called Ol Yantis. Despite the news from Coffeyville all of you are resolved to continue your outlaw careers with your brother Bill now declaring he wants to be an even more infamous outlaw than your late brother Bob.\n\n\n\"The newspapers say the Dalton Gang is destroyed and called us 'a wild bunch of fugitives,\" Bill Doolin says grimly. \"I suggest we show them what The Wild Bunch is capable of.\" A plan is quickly hatched to rob a bank in Kansas to show that despite Coffeyville robbing banks in the state still does not intimidate you. One winter's day your newly formed Wild Bunch ride into Kansas to show America the spirit of the Dalton Gang is still alive and well.\n\n\nRiding into the little town of Spearville you all dismount outside the bank and you, Bill and Bill walk inside while the others guard your horse. Taking the teller hostage you rapidly empty the vault of it's money, lock the teller inside, walk out of the bank, mount up and ride away. Making it back across the border into the Indian Territory you are delighted by the ease of the robbery which has netted you all $1500, making your share $200.\n\n\nThe papers are soon full of news of what they call \"The Doolin-Dalton Gang\" and the two Bill's are pleased. Ol is less so, he has been identified as an outlaw and wants to visit his sister's farm to say goodbye to his family while the rest of the Gang is planning on hiding out in Ingalls. You need to choose who to go with.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Ol to his sister's farm", "result": "You decide to go with Ol to his sister's farm near the little community of Orlando in the Territory. You both spend nearly a month relaxing there until one afternoon you see two men approaching the small farm from the front. \"Ol! Dan Dalton!\" one of the men shouts. \"We know you're in there. We're lawmen, we've got the building surrounded and if you come out with your arms raised no one will get hurt.\" You and Ol glance at each other nervously, the small farm only has one door facing the two lawmen with windows either side, though there are a few back windows.\n\n\n\"What are you going to do?\" you ask Ol who thinks for a moment. \"I'm going to go out and tell them I'm going to surrender and when they're not ready I'm going to draw my pistol and let them have it. If you come with me I reckon there's a good chance we can get both of them.\" You consider his request: it's risky but it could work. An alternative option is to open a back window, climb out and take a chance escaping on foot.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Ol out the front door", "result": "You and Ol walk outside towards the two waiting lawmen who tense. \"What is this about?\" you ask. \"What is happening? Don't shoot we are surrendering.\" Suddenly Ol goes for his gun and you follow shoot. Ol gets off a shot before the lawmen realize what is happening and return fire: both of you are hit in the chest and after firing a shot harmlessly into the ground you fall face first to the ground, Ol toppling across your legs a moment later. You die within minutes while Ol expires of his wounds the next day, two more dead outlaws for dusty graves.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Try slipping out a back window", "result": "You and Ol agree to try your different plans and while Ol walks out the front door you open a back window and climb out. Cautiously you jog towards some nearby trees, expecting a bullet to be fired at you at any moment. You nearly jump out of your skin when a gunshot rings out but when it is almost instantly followed by several more you realize the shots are coming from the front of the house. Escaping the area you rejoin your companions in Ingalls where you learn your worst fears are correct: Ol Yantis was shot dead by the lawmen he tried to fight. You hide out in Ingalls until the following summer when The Wild Bunch rides again.\n\n\nIn the last six months you and your fellow outlaws have recruited four new gang members, bringing your gang strength up to nine. There is Dynamite Dick, an explosives expert with an impressive nickname, Red Buck, a grim and dour man, Tulsa Jack, a good friend of Bill Doolin's and Arkansas Tom, a sharp-shooting well-dressed young man. Together the nine of you plan your first robbery in Kansas and in the summer of 1893 you strike.\n\n\nOne summer morning the nine of you board a train at Cimarron in Kansas and while the new recruits get the driver to stop the train and Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce guard the passengers you and the two Bill's make your way to the Express Carriage. You calmly empty the safe before you all dismount, run to your horses, mount up and ride away. On the ride you count the money you have stolen and find you have gotten away with $1,000, making your share $100.\n\n\nUnfortunately you do not get clean away, that afternoon as you are resting a posse of lawmen suddenly gallop over a nearby ridge. All of your mount up and firing pistols and rifles at each other you and your pursuers engage in a running battle for over a mile. There are no casualties on either side except Bill Doolin who is unlucky enough to be shot in the foot by a rifle shell, a painful but non-serious wound. Easily escaping the nine of you ride back to Ingalls unaware that an even deadlier enemy is in pursuit...", "action_results": [{"action": "The Battle of Ingalls", "result": "One autumn morning you and The Wild Bunch ride into Ingalls. Bill Doolin leads the way, hobbling ad wincing from his injured foot, while you and your brother Bill follow behind talking. Following you is Bitter Creek and his mute companion Charley Pierce while the newer recruits bunch together, Tulsa Jack is exchanging jokes with Dynamite Dick while Red Buck rides on in silence and Arkansas Tom cradles his rifle. You are as dangerous an outlaw gang as any that roamed the West.\n\nIn town you agree to split up: Arkansas Tom is tired and is going over to the little community's hotel to sleep. Bitter Creek offers to saddle all the horses in the stable while the rest of the gang head into a saloon operated by your friend Murray. You need to choose who to follow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Arkansas Tom to the hotel to rest", "result": "You and Arkansas Tom split off from the others and walk into the hotel, check in and walk up the stairs chatting. You have just reached your room when you hear the unmistakable sound of pistol shots from the street, racing to the window you see Bitter Creek galloping his horse down the street away from a man who is shooting at him, blood streaming from your friend's leg. You race to Arkansas Tom's room to find him standing by the window firing his rifle into the street at lawmen who are firing from cover at the saloon where your friends are.\n\n\"Come on, we need to get out of here,\" you shout to Tom.\n\n\"This is a great position,\" Tom yells back. \"I'm going to stay here and cover the others.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Arkansas Tom at the window shooting at the lawmen", "result": "You join Arkansas Tom at the window, grab one of his rifle's and peer down for a target. You spot one: a young lawman sheltering behind a tree with his side exposed to you. You take careful aim and fire, your bullet hitting the man in the left side, passing through his body and blasting out his right. The man falls down and doesn't get up again.\n\nSuddenly your brother Bill, Bill Doolin, Charley, Red Buck, Tulsa Jack and Dynamite Dick all burst from the town's stables mounted on horses. The lawmen, who are still firing at the saloon, scramble around to fire at them, hitting your brother Bill's horse in the head. Bill jumps from the saddle, turns, shoots a lawman dead and scrambles onto the back of Bill Doolin's horse. You watch as your friends escape.\n\nThe lawmen now turn their attention to you and begin firing up at the window, forcing you and Arkansas Tom away from it. You hear running feet on the stairs outside the hotel door and then bullets begin to hit the door, forcing you to take shelter under the bed. You are both trapped and have no way of escaping.\n\n\"We surrender,\" Arkansas Tom shouts loudly.\n\nThe shooting stops, there is a pause, and then suddenly the hotel door spectacularly explodes inwards in a blinding flash of light that brings down the roof, burying you both helplessly beneath the rubble, your guns lost in the chaos. Several armed lawmen race through the ruins their dynamite created and quickly capture you both.\n\nIt is some consolation to you that your companions all succeeded in escaping, though both Bitter Creek and Dynamite Dick were wounded in all the gunfire. You and Arkansas Tom are not so lucky, you are both quickly tried and convicted for the deaths of three lawman and one civilian who were killed in the gunfight and both of you are sentenced to terms of life imprisonment.\n\nIt seems that your outlaw careers are over but then, after a few years, fate reunites you with your companions.", "action_results": [{"action": "Prison", "result": "By the summer of 1896 the Wild Bunch is virtually destroyed: the only gang member who remains at large is Little Dick West; everyone else is dead or imprisoned. Your brothers Bob, Grat and Bill are dead, your friends Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are dead. You yourself are facing a long jail term with no hope in sight.\n\nThen the Federal authorities make the decision to move you and the surviving members of the Wild Bunch to new a prison in Oklahoma City and you find yourself reunited with the last members of the Wild Bunch. Your brother Emmett is there, weak after surviving 23 gunshot wounds, Lawman killer Arkansas Tom Jones, minor gang member Jim Knight, Little Bill Raidler, who was shot 3 times and severely wounded in his capture, the clever Dynamite Dick and, most of all, your unofficial leader Bill Doolin are all reunited.\n\nInevitably plans for an escape are quickly made, though Emmett and Little Bill have no interest due to the severity of their wounds while Arkansas Tom and Jim Knight want to turn their backs on the outlaw life, certain it will get them killed. Bill and Dynamite Dick concoct a plan to have a friend smuggle pistols into them, take the guard hostage, make him unlock the cell and then imprison him in it and then make their escape from the prison. It is a bold but risky plan and the two outlaws ask you to join them. Your brother Emmett is against it, warning you that even if it is successful the chances are you will be hunted down and killed on the outside.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the prison break", "result": "You agree to join the jailbreak and Bill makes all the arrangements. He has a pistol smuggled into him and at the right moment he trains it on a guard, forces him to surrender his keys and gun, which he gives to you, unlocks the cell and locks the guard inside. After taking a series of guards hostage you and your companions succeed in escaping from the prison on stolen horses.\n\nYou and your companions are elated but you quickly agree it is best if you all split up: Bill plans to hide out with his wife in Lawson while Dynamite Dick intends to lie low in Checotah. You need to join one of them.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Bill to Lawson", "result": "You and Bill hide out with Bill's wife in various hideouts around the settlement of Lawson but the law is never far behind you. One night the two of you are riding your horses from one hideout to another when suddenly a posse of a dozen lawmen spring up from the ground before you and shout for you both to surrender.", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn your horse around and ride for dear life", "result": "You jerk your horse away and have barely started to ride when the posse open fire. Bullets hit both your horse's rear legs making it collapse to the ground and spilling you from the saddle. By good luck you land next to a deep drainage ditch and scrambling into it you race down it while the posse pumps bullet after bullet into your friend Bill.\n\nSomehow you escape. The ditch runs out near a line of trees and springing out of it you race into the trees and through them, bullets from the posse hitting the trees and whistling by all around you. You keep running and running and evade capture. For the next year you roam the wilds, living like an animal in the most basic of habitats before finally your remaining outlaw friends get a letter to you inviting you to a meeting in Woodward.", "action_results": [{"action": "The last outlaws", "result": "On the first day of August you, Dynamite Dick Clifton and Little Dick West assemble in Woodward. You are all that remains of the once-great Wild Bunch and your years on the run and suffering have aged you all prematurely. Little Dick brings with him four of his friends: two pairs of brothers called John and Al Jennings and Pat and Morris O'Malley. John is a serious guy who says little, his younger brother Al is chatty while the O'Malley brothers strike you as a pair of idiots.\n\n\"I'm tired of us hiding out and hunted for having stolen nothing more than a few dollars,\" Little Dick announces. \"Me and my new friends here are going to form a new gang, the Jennings Gang, and go back to robbing trains. If we are going to go down like our companions we might as well go down fighting... and get rich in the meantime.\"\n\nDynamite Dick shakes his head wearily. \"I figure I'm going to keep lying low,\" he announces. \"I don't want to die young.\"\n\nIt seems you have two choices: to resume an active outlaw career or continue your life in hiding.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the Jennings Gang", "result": "You team up with Little Dick, Al and John Jennings and Pat and Morris O'Malley and begin robbing trains but it is a disaster. Your first attempt to stop a train at Edmond fails when the train ploughs straight through the barrier of logs you have put on the track to stop it, you are forced to flee without a dollar when the alarm is raised.\n\nOpting to board the train for your next robbery at Berwyn you and Little Dick enter the Express Carriage after the others have seized control of the train but none of the Express Managers have the key for the safe and your dynamite fails to blow it open. Determined not to repeat this mistake at your third train robbery at Pocasset you use so much dynamite that you destroy not only the safe but the entire Express Carriage.\n\nThese failures are humiliating and when news arrives that Dynamite Dick has been tracked down and killed at Checotah Little Dick decides that enough is enough. He announces he will split off from the others and go into hiding at Guthrie while the rest of the gang elects to hide out at Cushing and try to plan a successful train robbery.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Little Dick to Guthrie", "result": "You elect to stick with Little Dick and accompany him to Guthrie where you find a cabin to live in. You are not surprised to read that Al, John, Pat and Morris were all captured by lawmen, once more you and Little Dick are on your own. You remain hidden over the winter but as the spring dawns you go outside one morning to find two lawmen waiting for you.\n\n\"It's the end of the line boys,\" one announces. \"Surrender and no one will get hurt.\"\n\nYou and Little Dick glance at each other.", "action_results": [{"action": "Surrender", "result": "You raise your hands while Little Dick goes for his guns. The two lawmen have no intention of taking either of you in alive and open fire with their pistols. Both of you are shot in the chest and fall dying to the ground. As you stare up at the blue sky, which slowly darkens, you give a deep sigh and smile. It is all over. The last of the Wild Bunch is gone.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is over.", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to see how well you did compared to your companions", "result": "This is the Performance Table where you can compare your Gunfights, Injured, Killed, Robberies, Score and Fate with those of your fellow members of The Wild Bunch to see who is the greatest Outlaw!\n\n\n1: Bill Doolin: Gunfights: 6, Injured: 1, Killed: 2, Robberies: 7, Score: 6500 - Killed.\n\n\n2: Bill Dalton: Gunfights: 6, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 6, Score: 4400 - Killed.\n\n\n3: Bitter Creek: Gunfights: 6, Injured: 1, Killed: 0, Robberies: 7, Score: 3500 - Killed.\n\n\n4: Charley Piece: Gunfights: 7, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 7, Score: 3400 - Killed.\n\n\n5: Bob Dalton: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 2, Killed: 4, Robberies: 6, Score: 3000 - Killed.*\n\n\n6: Emmett Dalton: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 6, Score: 3000 - Imprisoned.\n\n\n7: Dick Broadwell: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 2500 - Killed.\n\n\n8: Bill Power: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 2500 - Killed.\n\n\n9: Grat Dalton: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 4, Score: 2100 - Killed.*\n\n\n10: George Bennett: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 3, Killed: 1, Robberies: 1, Score: 1000 - Killed.\n\n\n11: Asa Knight: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: 1000 - Killed.\n\n\n12: Jim Knight: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: 1000 - Imprisoned.\n\n\n13: Jim Wallace: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: 1000 - Killed.\n\n14: Dynamite Dick: Gunfights: 5, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 700 - Killed.\n\n\n15: Red Buck: Gunfights: 5, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 700 - Killed.\n\n\n16: Tulsa Jack: Gunfights: 4, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 700 - Killed.\n\n\n17: Little Dick: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 3, Killed: 1, Robberies: 5, Score: 600 - Killed.\n\n\n18: Little Bill: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 2, Score: 600 - Imprisoned.\n\n\n19: Black Face: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 2, Score: 500 - Killed.\n\n\n20: Ol Yantis: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: 300 - Killed.\n\n\n21: Arkansas Tom: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 1, Score: 100 - Killed.\n\n\n22: John Jennings: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 0 - Imprisoned.\n\n\n23: Al Jennings: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 0 - Imprisoned.\n\n\n24: Pat O'Malley: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 0 - Imprisoned.\n\n\n25: Morris O'Malley: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 0 - Imprisoned.\n\n\n* Bob Dalton also killed two men in two gunfights and Grat Dalton was in two gunfights, during one of which he was shot in the arm, but as these gunfights occurred when they were serving as lawmen in 1889 and 1890 they are not counted here.\n\n\nMost Prolific Gunfighter: 1: Charley Pierce (7 Gunfights), 2: Bill Doolin / Bill Dalton / Bitter Creek (6 Gunfights).\n\n\nMost Lethal Hurter: 1: George Bennett (3 Injured), 2: Bob Dalton (2 Injured), 3: Bitter Creek (1 Injured)\n\n\nMost Deadly Killer: 1: Bob Dalton (4 Killed), 2: Bill Doolin (2 Killed), 3: Bill Dalton / Grat Dalton / George Bennett / Black Face / Arkansas Tom (1 Killed).\n\n\nMost Enthusiastic Robber: 1: Bill Doolin / Bitter Creek / Charley Pierce (7 Robberies).\n\n\nMost Successful Bandit: 1: Bill Doolin ($6,500), 2: Bill Dalton ($4,400), 3: Bitter Creek ($3,500).\n\n\nOverall Best Outlaw: 1: Bill Doolin, 2: Bill Dalton 3: Bitter Creek, 4: Charley Pierce, 5: Bob Dalton.\n\n\n--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\n\n\nAs always thank you for taking the time to read my story, please rate it and if you would like others to see your Score please leave a comment. Have a good day!", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Run", "result": "You turn to your left and sprint for your life. The lawmen shoot Little Dick dead and then turn, take aim and fire at your back. An almost incredible things happens: both the lawmen's guns jam on a faulty cartridge - it's rare for it to happen to one gun but to both means someone is finally on your side. By the time the cursing lawmen have cleared their blocked guns you have vanished into the wilderness: the last of the Wild Bunch.", "action_results": [{"action": "Last Man Standing", "result": "After Little Dick West's death lawmen search Indian Territory from one end to the other looking for you but you keep relentlessly on the move, never sleeping in the same place two nights in a row and practically living in the saddle. For nearly two years you evade capture, thinking constantly that it is incredible that the small amount that you stole can be worth such pursuit.\n\nFinally the Territory Legislature have had enough and make a remarkable offer: if you will surrender yourself then all charges against you will be dropped. As long as you promise to live a peaceful life then you will not be harmed. It is the best offer you are going to get and on the last day of 1899 you meet the Governor in Oklahoma City and surrender.\n\nIt is over and you have beaten them.\n\nFOR ELUDING THE FORCES OF JUSTICE SUCCESSFULLY YOU HAVE EARNED A BONUS SCORE OF 10,000.", "action_results": [{"action": "A peaceful life...?", "result": "You live peacefully and over time the world changes: the Indian Territory has been transformed into a state called Oklahoma. Your brother Emmett is released in 1906 and moves to California and become an estate agent, Al Jennings, released in 1902, becomes a politician and only Arkansas Tom Jones, released in 1910, has trouble settling down. He invites you to meet him in Neosho. Arkansas Tom, a lean and pale outlaw the same age as you, has a proposition.\n\n\"I miss the outlaw life and begin rich,\" he tells you. \"I got sent to prison for seventeen years for a train robbery that netted me $100 and for killing a Deputy Marshal. I want to earn something for the years I've served. I want to rob the town bank. Will you help me do this? For old time's sake? Bill Doolin and all the boys would be proud of us.\"\n\nYou consider his suggestion, it would mean a return to your life of crime after some twenty years but is it worth it?", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Arkansas Tom in the robbery", "result": "Feeling the familiar thrill of excitement you and Arkansas Tom drive up to the bank in Asbury, walk in and draw your pistols.\n\n\"This is a hold-up!\" you declare.\n\nThere is the click of guns cocking and turning you see two bank guards, who you had not even noticed, covering you from the corners of the bank. You can do nothing but surrender your weapons. Considering the circumstances you and Arkansas Tom are lucky to get off with sentences of four year imprisonment. After your release Tom arranges another meeting.\n\n\"We were unlucky the last time but we'll do better this time,\" he tells you. \"We'll hit the bank here in Asbury, Missouri and do it carefully and do it right. What do you say?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the robbery", "result": "You and Arkansas Tom enter the bank in Asbury and after carefully checking for guards you take the lone teller hostage and leaving Arkansas Tom to guard him you walk into the vault, only to discover it is empty as all the money has just been transferred to another facility. Angry but helpless to do anything you two have no choice but to leave, get in your car and drive away.\n\nThe next three years are spent on the run, travelling through a variety of Missouri towns. Finally the law catches up with you when three detectives ring the doorbell of the house you and Arkansas Tom are renting in the town of Joplin. When Arkansas Tom answers the door he is immediately shot dead by the lawmen who burst into the room.\n\nJumping to your feet you draw your old scratched six-shooter from your pocket and the detectives open fire with automatic pistols. Shot through several times you fall backwards to the ground. Your long and eventful career has finally come to this desperate end, slain in a cheap lodging house in a small town city. It is finally over.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is finished.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Refuse", "result": "You refuse to join Arkansas Tom in his robbery and he goes ahead with it anyway. After pulling it off he spends the next few years on the run until you read in newspapers how he has been tracked down and killed in Missouri in 1924. The following year you make the decision to hang up your gun for good and retire, nothing will ever persuade you to return to your former Outlaw ways. A long and peaceful retirement lies ahead for you.\n\nFOR SURVIVING YOUR OUTLAW CAREER YOU GET A BONUS OF 10,000 TO YOUR SCORE.", "action_results": [{"action": "The End", "result": "The years pass by slowly as the once endless plains of America are criss-crossed with roads and small towns spring up all over the once wild prairie. As you grow old you watch America go through World War 1, the Depression and World War 2. You read about all the great Depression-Era Public Enemies: John Dillinger, Baby Face Nelson, Pretty Boy Floyd, Bonnie and Clyde, Ma Barker and Alvin Karpis, it's all old news with new faces to you.\n\nYour brother Emmett prospers in California, helping turn your legend as the Dalton boys into books and movies before his death in 1937. Al Jennings does well, transforming himself into the successful outlaw on-screen that he never was in real life before his death in 1961 at the age 98 leaving you the last of the great old-west outlaws.\n\nBy this point you yourself are very old. The world is a different place to how it was: America is locked in a Cold War with Communism, across the Atlantic in the UK people are singing along to a new band called the Beatles and the outlaws you knew and liked have become the subjects of awful Dime Novels and B Movies.\n\nThat was not how it used to be. When you and your brothers the Dalton rode the air was alive with the crack of gunshots, the smell of gunpowder smoke and the screams of the dead and dying. It was a world of cheap whiskey, wild women, bank and train safes stuffed with money and life or death came down to who had the split second reflexes to be faster.\n\nThat's all gone now... gone but not forgotten. As America celebrates her Independence Day Celebrations you finally go to re-join your comrades and your name too slips into legend... the legend of The Wild Bunch.", "action_results": [{"action": "To read about the Historical Wild Bunch click here", "result": "The real-life Wild Bunch were not master outlaws or the great gunfighters of legend but a collection of extremely interesting characters destined for a tragic fate: apart from Emmett Dalton all five members of the Dalton Gang and all eleven main members of The Wild Bunch met violent ends, probably the highest number of fatalities suffered by any bank or train robbing gang.\n\nThe tragic thing is the Wild Bunch weren't even particularly good robbers: Jesse James made far more money in his career Jesse James's gang made five times more than the paltry $40,000 the various members of the Wild Bunch managed to steal in their sixteen robberies over seven years, Butch Cassidy's Hole in the Wall Gang made over ten times that amount. Their gunfights were frequent and many however and Coffeeville and Ingalls in particular stand out as iconic gunfights in Old Western History, the first being a great success for the side of the good and the latter for the side of the outlaws.\n\nBut the members of the Wild Bunch were an interesting bunch, with a few notable exceptions (Bob Dalton, George Bennett and Richard West spring to mind) they weren't cold-blooded killers but rather regular guys looking to have a good time, albeit by spending other's money. Their amateurism is reflected in their nicknames, having two guys in your gang called Dynamite Dick and Little Dick is usually not a sign of professional criminals looking to inspire terror in their victims!\n\nI've taken a few liberties with history, the gunfights and robberies didn't usually happen in quite the way I've described but writing this by stops and starts over the last six months has made me prefer creative licence to historical accuracy. Ultimately this is the story of interesting guys who did interesting things and whose activities were interesting enough for their names to become a part of the pantheon of outlaw history, that is itself part of the cultural heritage of America.\n\nHopefully their story made interesting reading :)", "action_results": [null]}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Turn him down", "result": "You refuse to join Arkansas Tom in the robbery, he goes ahead with it anyway and is promptly captured and imprisoned during the robbery. After four years he is released and arranges another meeting with you in the little town of Asbury. Tom looks more gaunt but even more determined than last time and is determined to enlist your help.\n\n\"I'm going to hit the bank here,\" he tells you. \"I want you to help me. This time I'll do it right, no foul-ups I promise. What do you say, one more time for the old days?\"", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay with Al, John, Pat and Morris at Cushing", "result": "You elect to stay with the gang and continue to hide out at Cushing. One Winter's evening you are all just returning from a reconnaissance raid to inspect the local trains when, completely without warning, a posse of lawmen open fire from a nearby woods. With the familiar whiz of bullets flying around you all turn and flee, though both Al and John Jennings are grazed by the flying bullets.\n\nYou remain on the run for a week, eventually winding up at Carr Creek. Just as you are crossing the fast-moving deep waters a dozen lawmen appear on the far bank and train their rifles on the group of you. Trapped in the slow moving waters you are torn between surrender or diving into the icy fast-flowing waters and trying to swim to safety.", "action_results": [{"action": "Surrender", "result": "With a deep sigh you slowly raise your hands into the air. After all these years of running and hiding it is all over, you and your companions promptly surrender; soon afterwards Little Dick West is tracked down and killed by lawmen. Inevitably you and your companions are found guilty of train robbery and receive substantial sentences, the most serious is reserved for you: twenty years.\n\nThe years pass slowly. Al, John, Pat and Morris are all released in 1902, Little Bill Raidler is released in 1903 (and dies the following year of his gunshot wounds), your brother Emmett is paroled in 1906 and Arkansas Tom is released in 1910. Your turn for release doesn't come until 1917, by which time you are in your late forties.\n\nBy now the world is changing: the Indian Territory has been transformed into a state called Oklahoma. Your brother Emmett has moved to California and become an estate agent, Al Jennings (an outlaw connected to Little Dick West) has become a politician and only Arkansas Tom Jones has trouble settling down. He invites you to meet him in Neosho. Arkansas Tom, a lean and pale outlaw the same age as you, has a proposition.\n\n\"I miss the outlaw life and begin rich,\" he tells you. \"I got sent to prison for seventeen years for a train robbery that netted me $100 and for killing a Deputy Marshal. I want to earn something for the years I've served. I want to rob the town bank. Will you help me do this? For old time's sake? Bill Doolin and all the boys would be proud of us.\"\n\nYou consider his suggestion, it would mean a return to your life of crime after some twenty years but is it worth it?", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Dive into the icy waters", "result": "Taking a deep breath you plunge into the ice-cold water of the river and swimming in powerful strokes you cut through the freezing water. Bullets whoosh by as the lawmen fire at you but somehow they don't hit and by the time you surface you are far down river. Dragging yourself to the bank, utterly exhausted and more dead than alive you take deep gulping breaths before dragging yourself further into the wood.\n\nYou spend the next two years on the run, in that time both Dynamite Dick and Little Dick are tracked down and killed. You are now the last of the Wild Bunch.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Hide out with Dynamite Dick", "result": "You go with Dynamite Dick to hide out in his small one-roomed cabin near Checotah while Little Dick and his gang go on to pull off a series of unsuccessful train robberies in the Territory. You and Dynamite Dick remain at the cabin until one winter's morning a glance out the window reveals a posse of lawmen are advancing on your hideout.\n\n\"I've had enough of running,\" Dynamite Dick tells you. \"I'm going to fire at them from the windows and give them hell.\"\n\nYou nod at his words, meanwhile your eyes flicker towards the chimney which looks narrow enough that you might be able to climb up out of it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open fire on the posse", "result": "You and Dynamite Dick each choose a window and with a nod to each other you open fire on the lawmen. The posse immediately scatters and dozens of rifles open fire on the cabin, the bullets punching through the thin wooden walls. Both you and Dynamite Dick are hit multiple times but keep firing until eventually blood loss overwhelms you and you die in this last gun battle.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is over.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Try climbing up the chimney", "result": "While Dynamite Dick prepares for his last stand you cross to the chimney, squeeze yourself up the narrow space and begin shimmying up the grimy stone space. Finally you make it up to the roof where, unseen by the posse you lie flat on the roof. Inevitably the gun battle ends in Dynamite Dick's death and the guns fall silent.\n\nYou lie on the freezing cold roof all afternoon while the posse take Dynamite Dick's body away, apparently concluding you must have been elsewhere. By nightfall the posse has gone and you slide off the roof to the ground. You flee the area on foot and vanish into the wilderness: over the next few months you read in newspapers about the capture of the Jennings Gang and the death of Little Dick at the hands of lawmen.\n\nYou are the last of the Wild Bunch.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Surrender", "result": "You raise your hands but Bill yells \"I will never surrender\" and goes for his guns. Instantly the posse opens fire, in their confusion several lawmen shoot at you as well. You and Bill are both hit multiple times and killed instantly, falling from your saddle onto the soft grass beneath you breathe your last breath as the posse continue to fire into your motionless bodies.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is at an end.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Go with Dynamite Dick to Checotah", "result": "You accompany Dynamite Dick to an isolated cabin near the village of Checotah, a month after your arrival you read how Bill Doolin has been tracked down and killed by a posse. The death of your friend grieves you but you need to worry about your own safety as well - for a year you and your friend hide out at the cabin, rarely venturing far from it. Finally Little Dick West gets word to you that he wants to meet in Woodward.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Turn down the offer and do your time", "result": "Bill and Dynamite Dick go ahead with their prison break plan which is successful but both are tracked down and killed by lawmen and by 1898 the last of the Wild Bunch is killed. The rest of you remain in prison for a time, Jim Knight dies in prison but Little Bill is released in 1903 (only to die the following year from his gunshot wounds), Emmett is paroled in 1906 and Arkansas Tom is released in 1910. As the most famous of the surviving Wild Bunch you are held the longest and you are not paroled until 1917, by which time you are in your late forties.\n\nBy now the world is changing: the Indian Territory has been transformed into a state called Oklahoma. Your brother Emmett has moved to California and become an estate agent, Al Jennings (an outlaw connected to Little Dick West) has become a politician and only Arkansas Tom Jones has trouble settling down. He invites you to meet him in Neosho. Arkansas Tom, a lean and pale outlaw the same age as you, has a proposition.\n\n\"I miss the outlaw life and begin rich,\" he tells you. \"I got sent to prison for seventeen years for a train robbery that netted me $100 and for killing a Deputy Marshal. I want to earn something for the years I've served. I want to rob the town bank. Will you help me do this? For old time's sake? Bill Doolin and all the boys would be proud of us.\"\n\nYou consider his suggestion, it would mean a return to your life of crime after some twenty years but is it worth it?", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Run for it", "result": "You have no intention of lingering and racing down the stairs you slip unnoticed out the back door of the hotel and flee on foot out of town. The sound of gunshots continue to ring out for several minutes until you are aware of the thudding of horse hooves - glancing back your heart gives a thrill of delight as you see your companions Bill Doolin and Bill Dalton (riding the same horse), Charley Pierce, Red Buck, Dynamite Dick and Tulsa Jack all galloping towards you. Charley slows so you can jump onto his horse and you ride on. Looking back you can see lawmen have surrounded the hotel where Arkansas Tom is still firing from the windows and it seems that your companion is lost.", "action_results": [{"action": "23 January 1894: Pawnee, Indian Territory", "result": "Your narrow escape has shaken all of you and for the next few days you put as much distance as you can between yourselves and Ingalls; you also read in newspapers about the ambush. It seems that fourteen lawmen planned to arrest you all in Ingalls but the gunfight was triggered prematurely when Bitter Creek encountered one. Three lawman and a civilian (who was accidentally shot by the lawmen) were killed and Bitter Creek, Dynamite Dick and two more civilians were all wounded by the lawmen, Bitter Creek in the leg and Dynamite Dick in the hand, losing two of his fingers.\n\nWorse of all Arkansas Tom was trapped in the hotel and captured, found guilty of murder in the next few months he receives a life imprisonment. The loss of your companion and your own narrow escape prompts you all to lie low in the winter, you hide out with Bitter Creek and Dynamite Dick, helping them recover from their wounds.\n\nAt the start of 1894 you reunite and Bill Doolin turns up with two new gang members he has recruited: Richard West and William Raidler who are promptly named Little Dick and Little Bill due to their physical resemblances to Dynamite Dick and Bill Doolin. Little Bill doesn't impress you much but Little Dick, a rather wild looking man, is a good pistol shot.\n\nBy now you are the most famous outlaw gang in America, notoriously well-known as The Wild Bunch and are now ten members strong. Bill Doolin and your brother Bill Dalton have emerged as the co-leaders of the gang and have come up with a plan.\n\n\"There are so many of us we should split into two groups and rob banks in different states,\" Bill Doolin announces. \"We'll hit a bank here in Pawnee first and then split into two groups and rob banks in Missouri and Texas. The Indian Territory is getting more and more lawmen in it all the time and if we want to stay ahead of them we need to start branching out into other states.\" All of the gang is enthusiastic about robbing the bank in Pawnee.\n\nOne winter's morning you ride into the little town with the rest of the gang and leaving Little Bill and Little Dick to guard the horses you all walk straight into the bank. You find just one old man inside who is rather bemused when you all produce your guns and demand he empty the vault. He returns with a small bundle of bills, $100 in all. Apparently the bank is facing fore-closure and all of it's funds have been moved elsewhere. Angry and humiliated there is nothing you can do but take the money, walk out, mount up and ride off.", "action_results": [{"action": "A new target", "result": "The poor results of the Pawnee Bank robbery have left the gang dispirited and you split up for a few months before reuniting in the little community of Woodward. One evening your brother Bill invites you to a meeting in his room, going there you find Bill, Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley present. Once you are inside Bill closes and locks the door.\n\n\"We have a plan,\" he tells you all. \"It is possible that this gang has become too big so now, even if we pull off a successful robbery, there are too many in the gang for our shares to be worth much. I think we should rob the bank here in Woodward, just the five of us. We're the most experienced and could pull it off.\"\n\nNot all the group is in agreement, Bitter Creek and Charley don't like the idea of sneakily pulling off the robbery and not inviting the rest of the gang to take part; they refuse to take part in the robbery. One the other hand both Bill's are very enthusiastic about the proposal and urge you to help them rob the bank.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the two Bill's in the robbery", "result": "That afternoon, after ordering the rest of the gang to leave town, you and your two companions ride up to the bank, while Bill Doolin stays outside with the horses you and your brother go in. There is just one cashier behind the counter who freezes in terror as you both draw your pistols and take him prisoner. While you guard him Bill goes to empty the contents of the vault into a sack and emerges from the vault with a wide grin.\n\n\"We're rich little brother,\" he announces.\n\nAfter locking the cashier in the vault the pair of you leave the bank, mount up and ride out of town. The robbery went as smoothly as clockwork and you have escaped with $6,000, an unusually large amount which split three ways makes your share $2,000. You ride off to join the rest of the gang where you begin making plans to rob banks in Missouri and Texas.\n\nTrouble strikes that night when members of the gang hear news of the robbery in Woodward and quickly realise you and the two Bill's were responsible. Your companions are furious they were not invited to take part and amidst the arguments the two Bill's start to blame each other. The result is the biggest argument to rock the gang since the one just before Coffeeville.\n\nAll the old grudges come out: Bill Doolin accuses your brother of wanting to lead the gang and be more famous than your dead brother Bob. Your brother accuses Bill Doolin of abandoning your brothers which may have contributed to their deaths at Coffeeville. The result of the argument is a split: the newer gang members side with Bill Doolin while Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce side with your brother Bill.\n\nThe next morning the divided gang prepares to part ways. Bill Doolin, Tulsa Jack, Dynamite Dick, Red Buck, Little Dick and Little Bill are going to Missouri to rob a bank in Southwest City. Bill Dalton, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce plan to rob a bank here in the Territory before recruiting more members and heading down to Texas to rob a bank there. Both Bill's ask you to accompany them.\n\nYou are torn between loyalty to your brother Bill and loyalty to your friend Bill but you have to make a choice.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Bill, Jack, Dick, Buck, Little Dick and Little Bill to rob the bank in Missouri", "result": "You and your six companions relocate to Missouri where you hide out for a time. Your brother does not fare well with his gang, in an unsuccessful robbery attempt where Bitter Creek was shot and wounded he and Charley went into hiding: your brother has recruited three cowboy friends and gone south to Texas to rob a bank. Bill Doolin, still angry at your brother, has no intention of helping him, and you begin to make plans for your own bank robbery.\n\nOne spring morning you all ride into town and dismount outside the bank. Bill's plan is to take the gang inside and leave Little Bill and Little Dick outside to guard the horses. He gives you the choice of choosing whether to go inside with the main group or remain outside with the two new recruits.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go inside the bank", "result": "You and Bill lead your friends into the bank where you quickly draw your guns and take several tellers and customers hostage. While the others guard them you and Bill walk into the vault and quickly begin loading all the money inside into a sack. As you do Little Bill runs into the bank and shouts \"Hurry boys, they've raised the alarm!\"\n\nAlmost immediately you hear several gunshots ring out from outside followed by screaming and shouting. \"Let's go Bill,\" you tell and together you lead your men at a run out of the bank. It is pandemonium outside: apparently Little Dick has opened fire on townsfolk and shot four, killing one. The rest of you hurry to mount your horses.\n\nSome of the town's citizens have grabbed guns and fire at you from the window, one bullet hits the bank's wall just in front of you and another grazes Bill's head making him yell. Firing your pistols into the air you all spur your horses down the street and escape from town, leaving the chaos behind you.\n\nRiding cross-country you find you have escaped with $4,000, which divided between you all makes your share $500. Bill's wound isn't serious and it is soon treated and dressed before you all split up and hide out for the winter. The next month you read that following the bank robbery in Texas your brother was tracked down back to the Indian Territory where he was shot and killed by a posse of lawmen. Two of his companions were killed and the third arrested.\n\nYou are now the last surviving Dalton brother at large and the law is closing in. Your grief is almost too much to bear.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reunited", "result": "The death of Bill Dalton casts a shadow over the reunion of the Wild Bunch. Bill Doolin looks more haggard and older than you remember him, he, Bitter Creek and Dynamite Dick are all in pain from previous bullet wounds. Charley, always silent seems even more solemn than usual, Red Buck sits and scowls, Little Bill looks nervous, Little Dick is silent and even the usually cheerful Tulsa Jack seems quiet and withdrawn.\n\nThe death of your brother has led everyone to put their past differences behind them and this spring day Bill leads the gang to rob a train: boarding it at Dover Little Bill and Little Dick take the driver hostage and make him stop the train while you, Bill, Bitter Creek and Charley empty the express carriage. The robbery goes smoothly and mounting up you ride away to find you have escaped with just $1,000, making your share $100.\n\nYou ride all day until you reach a rocky valley where you decide to rest. Bill asks for someone to keep watch while the rest of the gang sleeps and Tulsa Jack volunteers to do it. You are not sure if one sentry is enough.", "action_results": [{"action": "Volunteer to keep watch with Tulsa Jack", "result": "You join Tulsa Jack in keeping watch from the mouth of the valley. Unfortunately the area before the valley is heavily wooded and provides ideal cover for a posse of lawmen advancing on your position. The first thing you know of the ambush is when a dozen rifles fire. You and Tulsa Jack are both shot through and fall to the ground dead or dying. It might be some consolation to know that your sacrifices alerted your companions and enabled them to escape.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is at an end.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Get some sleep with the others", "result": "You join the others in resting and soon drift off to sleep. You are woken suddenly by a volley of rifle shots and springing to your feet you are startled to see Tulsa Jack lying dead on some rocks above you. You and your companions spring to your feet, climb quickly onto your horses and gallop away from the valley, escaping the posse of lawmen closing in on you.\n\nBill is very shook by the death of his friend and is certain that the rest of you should all split up and hide out in different locations for at least a year to elude the lawmen who are hunting you. Bill decides to go to Eureka Springs, Arkansas, Bitter Creek and Charley choose to hide out at the ranch of some friends in Payne, Indian Territory, Dynamite Dick is going to Dallas, Texas, Red Buck is going to hide with a friend in Arapho, Indian Territory, Little Dick is going to stay with some friends in Woodward, Indian Territory and Little Bill is going to hide out in a cabin in Pawhuskie, Indian Territory. You need to choose who you will go with.\n\nAs you glance around at your companions you are startled to see, for the first time, fear and uncertainty in their eyes. It is an undeniable fact that of the twenty-one men who have ridden with you in the Wild Bunch thus far eleven are dead and three are in prison leaving just your seven companions. Of your five brothers you are the one not dead or in prison. As your fame increases and lawmen become increasingly determined to bring you in dead or alive (the former preferable) it seems that the writing is on the wall...\n\nYou should choose your companion or companions carefully.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Bill to Arkansas", "result": "You and Bill Doolin hide out in Eureka Springs, Arkansas where your gregarious companion keeps you company. In Eureka Springs you read about how your friends Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce were betrayed and killed by alleged friends of theirs for the reward money while Little Bill is shot and captured after being tracked down by lawmen. The forces of justice are closing in.\n\nLittle Bill still occasionally suffers from pain in his foot that got shot three years ago and intends to go to the bathhouse in Eureka Springs to see if the waters there can help soothe the pain. You are worried it might be too dangerous for both of you to go into the heart of the busy town but Bill points out that you are in Arkansas where the Wild Bunch has never been active and you should be perfectly safe.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Bill to the bathhouse", "result": "You and Bill ride into town and make your way to the bathhouse where you both change into swimming costumes and visit the relaxing springs. The waters of the springs are wonderfully peaceful and you both enjoying your relaxing soak in them until you hear the double click of a shotgun cocking behind you and a voice calls out \"put your hands up very slow.\"\n\nTurning you both find yourself facing a lone lawman armed with a shotgun, helpless there is nothing you can do as you surrender and are taken into custody. The lawman allows you to change into your clothes before you are both marched to jail where you are securely imprisoned. You are both sentenced to life imprisonment for bank robbery and it seems that your outlaw careers are over. Fate reunites you with your companions...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay in hiding outside the town", "result": "Your decision not to accompany Bill into town turns out to be a wise one: when he doesn't return you become concerned and hastily leave town. The next day you read in the newspapers that your friend was captured by a posse of lawmen at the bathhouse and is in prison facing charges of bank robbery. With the members of the Wild Bunch being tracked down one by one you are running out of friends to hide with... but you have to keep moving.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Red Buck in the Indian Territory", "result": "You join Red Buck in a little cabin outside the settlement of Arapho where you read in newspapers about the destruction of the Wild Bunch: first Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are betrayed and killed by bounty hunters, then Little Bill is shot and captured by lawmen and finally, but worse of all, Bill Doolin is captured in a bathhouse in Eureka Springs.\n\nThe law catches up with you and Red Buck one afternoon: you are returning to your cabin after a successful duck hunt when a lawman steps out of your cabin door and casually announces he has you both completely covered and that you should surrender. You and Red Buck glance at each other and you can tell instantly that your companion means to fight.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run for the trees", "result": "Without hesitating you dart to your right and sprint towards the trees as weapons explode into life behind you: fortunately most of your adversaries are shooting at Red Buck who is hit several times and collapses to the ground dead. You make it to the trees unhurt and continue running, not stopping until you are far from the area.\n\nYour heart is thudding in your chest as you think desperately of where you can hide: only two other members of the Wild Bunch remain at large: Dynamite Dick down in Texas and Little Dick in the nearby community of Woodward. Wherever you go to hide out it seems that lawmen will not stop pursuing you until you are as dead as most of your friends.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Dynamite Dick in Texas", "result": "You join Dynamite Dick in Texas where you read in newspapers of the steady destruction of the Wild Bunch in the year after the Dover Train Robbery. First Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are betrayed and killed by turncoat friends, then Little Bill is shot and arrested in the Territory and Bill Doolin is arrested in Arkansas; finally Red Buck is shot and killed by lawmen. By the summer of 1896 only you, Dynamite Dick and Little Dick remain at large.\n\nYour friend is an intelligent and cautious man but one summer day you both let your guard down and risk a shopping trip in Dallas. You are walking down the street when you are confronted by a lone lawman with a pair of pistols trained on the pair of you. He orders you to slowly raise your hands and surrender. Dynamite Dick hesitates and then complies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Make a run for it", "result": "Taking a deep breath you run straight at the lawman and shoulder-barge him. Before he can recover from his shock you race on, vanishing amidst the crowd of people teeming Dallas's busy streets. You run as fast as you can, slipping through the town to it's outskirts where you steal a horse and ride as fast as you can to join your last remaining outlaw companion: Little Dick West.\n\nWhile you are riding from Texas to the Indian Territory Dynamite Dick is imprisoned with Bill Doolin. They don't remain imprisoned for long: after a month they escape but soon after your friend Bill is tracked down by a posse of lawmen and shot dead. Dynamite Dick escapes and after a year of hiding out you manage to arrange a meeting with him and Little Dick in the town of Woodward in the Territory, the three of you are the last of the Wild Bunch.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Surrender", "result": "You calmly raise your hands and surrender. You and Dynamite Dick are taken into custody and transported to the Indian Territory for your trial. With your capture Little Dick West remains the only member of the Wild Bunch still at large and it seems that your outlaw career is finally at an end... but then fate reunites you with your friends.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Join Little Dick in the Indian Territory", "result": "You flee to Woodward following the arrest of Bill Doolin and the shooting death of Red Buck at the hands of a posse of lawmen in Indian Territory. You find Little Dick and hide out with him at the home of two brothers called Al and John Jenning where you read of the capture of Dynamite Dick in Texas. Dynamite Dick and Bill Doolin escape from prison together in the summer of 1896, though Bill is tracked down by a posse of lawmen and killed soon after his escape. After a year on the run you and Little Dick finally arrange a meeting with Dynamite Dick in Woodward - by now the three of you are the last members of the Wild Bunch still at large.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Go for your gun", "result": "You pull your pistol from it's holster but you never get the chance to use it: several bullets hit you and Red Buck in the chest and you both fall backwards to the ground, very dead. Your death marks the passing of the last of the Dalton Boys and within a short time the Wild Bunch is destroyed, it's last members hunted down and killed.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is over.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Stay with Bitter Creek and Charley in the Territory", "result": "You spend the next month riding with Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce to the ranch of their friends, the Dunn brothers. Bitter Creek is friendly and chatty, only wincing occasionally from his wounds. Charley is as silent as ever. As you approach the Dunn ranch the five Dunn brothers come out to meet you. You greet them cheerfully.\n\nThe Dunn boys respond by drawing pistols from their pockets and firing at you and your friends. You have a split second to make a decision on what to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Spur your horse straight at them to break through", "result": "Spurring your horse at your attackers is the last thing they expected and they hastily throw themselves aside as you gallop through. Some of your assailants fire shots at you but by leaning far over the side of the saddle you are able to avoid the shots whistling overhead - your companions aren't so lucky and a glance back shows them both lying dead on the ground.\n\nYou do not stop riding until you are reach the nearby town of Payne and hastily buy a train ticket out of the area. Over the next few days the newspapers confirm what you already knew: the Dunn brothers betrayed your friends for money and killed them. With your two friends dead you and Bill Doolin are the last survivors of the Dalton Gang. You must pick someone else to hide with.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Join Little Bill in the Indian Territory", "result": "You and Little Bill hide out in a cabin near Pawhuska in the Territory for a few months where you are saddened to read of the deaths of Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce, betrayed and shot by men they considered friends. You and Little Bill stay in the cabin mainly, you are standing outside the cabin talking one afternoon when you are startled to see three men walking towards you out of the nearby trees.\n\n\"We know who you are men,\" one of the men shout to you and Bill. \"Throw up your hands.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Make a run for it", "result": "Instantly you dart to your left as gunshots ring out behind you - bullets whizz past you to strike the wooden wall of the cabin but within moments you are around the corner of the cabin and sprinting down the side, round the rear and racing into the woods beyond; one of the lawmen tries pursuing you but you are too fleet of foot.\n\nYou tear through the thicket and bracken for several miles until you reach Pawhuska where you steal a horse and ride on. You later read in newspapers that Little Bill was shot three times, captured and sentenced to ten years imprisonment for bank robbery. You were lucky to escape and with the law resolutely on your trail you must find another place to hide.", "action_results": [null, null, null, {"action": "Join Little Bill in the Indian Territory", "result": "You join Little Dick in Woodward, an untidy and humourless figure you don't much enjoy your time with him. You are saddened to read in papers of the murders of Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce following a betrayal by alleged friends of theirs and of the arrest of Little Bill after he is tracked down and shot by lawmen. There are only you and four other members of the Wild Bunch at large now.\n\nLittle Dick introduces you to three friends of his: brothers called John, Frank and Al Jennings. John is a lawyer but Al wants to be an outlaw, he is enthralled by your tales of your hold-ups. Woodward is a sleepy little town but it has it's difficulties: the Jennings brothers are embroiled in a feud with a rival lawyer called Temple Houston.\n\nOne night you are sitting in the town's saloon chatting with John and Frank when Houston walks in and an argument between your companions and the dapper young lawyer ensures. Almost without warning everyone goes for their guns and before you can act Houston has drawn and shot both John and Frank. As your two companions fall to the floor the lawyer, his pistol still smoking, glances at you.\n\n\"This disagreement has nothing to do with you friend,\" he tells you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go for your gun", "result": "You reach for your pistol and a split-second later Houston fires, his bullet hitting you in the chest. Unfortunately for you your opponent is a crack-shot and his bullet pierces your heart, you fall dead to the floor alongside your companions, killed in a gunfight that actually had absolutely nothing to do with you.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is over.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Walk away", "result": "You do not intend to get shot over someone else's dispute and you walk away, Frank Jennings dies of his injury but John Jennings recovers with time. Despite the incident you spend the next year hiding out in Woodward with Little Dick, all the while reading about the fates of your companions: Red Buck is shot and killed in the Indian Territory while both Bill Doolin and Dynamite Dick are captured. They later escape prison but Bill Doolin is killed by a posse of lawmen a short time later. You and the other two remaining members of the Wild Bunch plan a meeting in Woodward.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Go for your gun", "result": "You clap your hand to your side, grab your gun and draw it but you get no further than that: the lawmen open fire and a bullet hits you in the chest, dropping your pistol you fall to your knees. At your side Little Bill is hit in the wrist, dropping his gun. Turning to run he is hit twice more and falls to the ground next to you.\n\nBoth of you are taken into custody and for a time it looks as though your wounds will be fatal. After making slow recoveries both of you are sentenced to ten years imprisonment each after witnesses identify both of you as participants in the Dover Train Robbery. Over the next few months more gang members are killed and Bill Doolin and Dynamite Dick are both captured. Finally fate reunites you...", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null]}, {"action": "Draw your weapons and return fire", "result": "You pull your pistols from your pocket but barely have time to raise them when a rifle shot hits you in the throat. You fall backwards from your horse, dying alongside your companions in the dust. You have been betrayed by your friends for financial reward and the deaths of you and your companions in just the beginning of the end for the Wild Bunch.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is over.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null, null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay outside and guard the horses", "result": "You remain outside with the two newest gang members while the others go into the bank. Almost immediately you notice that the three of you are attracting attention from the townsfolk with all your horses outside the bank and feel uneasy. Suddenly you are recognised and the familiar cry is shouted out: \"Boys! They are robbing the bank!\"\n\n\"We'd better warn the others,\" Little Bill mutters to you nervously.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run inside the bank and warn the others", "result": "You run into the bank and shout \"quick boys, they've raised the alarm!\" Almost immediately several gun shots are fired outside and looking out the window you see Little Dick has opened fire on the townsfolk, hitting four of them and killing one. Quickly you and your companions race outside and mount the horses as townsfolk begin to fire at you all from windows and doorways up and down the street. One bullet grazes Bill's head making him yell in pain. Firing your pistols into the air you and your companions ride out of town.\n\nRiding cross-country you find you have escaped with $4,000, which divided between you all makes your share $500. Bill's wound isn't serious and it is soon treated and dressed before you all split up and hide out for the winter. The next month you read that following the bank robbery in Texas your brother was tracked down back to the Indian Territory where he was shot and killed by a posse of lawmen. Two of his companions were killed and the third arrested.\n\nYou are now the last surviving Dalton brother at large and the law is closing in. Your grief is almost too much to bear.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay outside and protect the horses", "result": "You remain outside with Little Dick while Little Bill runs into the bank to warn the others. As the cries of alarm increase Little Dick suddenly starts shooting into the town citizens milling around the street, hitting three of them. The townsfolk scatter except for one man who pulls a pistol from his pocket. Before he can take aim you raise your rifle and shoot him through the throat, dropping him dead in the street.\n\nAs the townsfolk continue to scatter your companions burst from the bank behind you and you all hastily mount your horses. A few citizens have found their weapons and fire at you and your companions from the cover of windows and doorways. One bullet grazes Bill's head making him yell. Firing your pistols into the air you and your companions ride out of town, leaving the scene of chaos behind you.\n\nRiding cross-country you find you have escaped with $4,000, which divided between you all makes your share $500. Bill's wound isn't serious and it is soon treated and dressed before you all split up and hide out for the winter. The next month you read that following the bank robbery in Texas your brother was tracked down back to the Indian Territory where he was shot and killed by a posse of lawmen. Two of his companions were killed and the third arrested.\n\nYou are now the last surviving Dalton brother at large and the law is closing in. Your grief is almost too much to bear.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Go with Bill, Bitter Creek and Charley to rob a bank in the Indian Territory", "result": "You choose to stick with your brother and together with Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce you quickly plan a robbery of the small bank in the little town of Sacred Heart. One spring morning the four of you ride into town, Bill's plan is for Charley to stay outside with the horses while he and Bitter Creek go into the bank. He gives you the chance of who you go with.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go inside the bank with Bill and Bitter Creek", "result": "You and your friends walk into the bank and draw your pistols.\n\n\"This is a robbery,\" you announce to the lone man behind the counter. \"Raise your hands.\"\n\nThe cashier promptly raises his hands, holding a pistol in one of them. Without hesitation he fires a shot, hitting Bitter Creek in the shoulder. Bitter Creek swears and you immediately fire, hitting the teller in the stomach, knocking him to the floor. \"Quickly,\" Bill yells, throwing his arm over the injured Bitter Creek and helping him outside. The four of you mount up and flee without a dollar.\n\nBitter Creek's injury is serious and having been shot for the second time in seven months he is angry, insisting he wouldn't have been shot if he had just stayed with Bill. He and Charley plan to go into hiding with a friend, refusing to join Bill in his plan to rob a bank in Texas. In response Bill recruits four cowboy friends of his: a mean character called George Bennett, brothers Asa and Jim Knight and a youth called Jim Wallace. Bill urges you to join him and his raw recruits in robbing the bank in Texas while Bitter Creek and Charley are equally insistent that you should join them in hiding.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Bill and his new companions in robbing the bank in Texas", "result": "You, Bill and your four new friends travel south from the Indian Territory to the little town of Longview. You are not impressed by your companions, they seem prone to enthusiastic drinking and bragging about all the men they've beaten in fights or how good they are with pistols. You share your doubts with Bill but he just shrugs and insists they're good gunmen.\n\nOne spring afternoon you all ride up to the bank and dismount outside. Bill's plan is to go inside with the Knight brothers, Asa and Jim, and leave Jim Wallace and George Bennett outside to guard the horses. He lets you choose who you go with.", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter the bank with Bill, Asa and Jim", "result": "You walk into the bank with your friends and draw your pistols. The two tellers are quickly taken hostage and you and Bill leave your new recruits to guard them while you walk into the vault and quickly begin emptying it's contents into a sack. While you are busy doing this you suddenly hear a gunshot outside followed by a series of them.\n\n\"Well, that's not good,\" Bill comments to you. \"Quickly boys, we're leaving.\"\nYou all hurry outside to find Jim sheltering behind the horses while George Bennett is lying dead in the middle of the street, four other people are also lying dead or wounded around the street. A man behind a tree with a rifle, presumably the man who shot George, fires at you all missing.\n\n\"George went crazy and just opened fire on people!\" Jim shouts to you. Mounting up quickly the five of you spur your horses out of town, rifle shots zinging past you but fortunately not hitting you. A safe distance from the town you count the money in the sack and find you have escaped with $4,000, making your share $800.\n\n\"We need to split up,\" Bill announces. \"The Texas Rangers will be after us. I'm going back to Indian Territory to hide out at a little cabin I have outside Elk. The rest of you I want to stay here, go down to El Paso or someplace safe and wait for me to send for you.\"\n\nThe others agree and you need to choose who you will go with.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Bill back to the Indian Territory", "result": "You and Bill travel back to the Indian Territory to a small one-roomed cabin Bill rents where you plan to lie low for a time. On your journey you read how Bill Doolin's half of the gang successfully robbed a bank in Missouri, like you escaping after a gun battle. In the cabin you both lie low for a few weeks until one fateful day you are both sitting inside one night when you hear a voice shout out \"We have the cabin surrounded! Come out with your hands up and no one will get hurt.\" \"It's the law!\" Bill hisses as you both jump to your feet.\n\nThere are only two ways out of the cabin: the front door and a small back window. Bill snatches up both of his pistols, cocks them and approaches the door. \"I'm going to give them something to remember me by,\" he mutters to you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Race out the front door with Bill", "result": "You and Bill take a deep breath and then Bill throws open the door and you both race out, pistols in both your hands and firing. A volley of rifle shots rings out and both you and Bill are hit multiple times and blasted to the ground dying. The last of the Dalton brothers breathe their last breaths as you and your brother die in one last hail of gunfire.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is over.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Try and squeeze out of the back window", "result": "Taking off your gun belt you climb onto a table, throw the window open and painfully squeeze yourself out of the narrow opening. You hear Bill throw open the door, race out firing his pistols, there is a volley of rifle shots and then silence. Gritting your teeth you painfully slide through the window, tearing all the buttons off your shirt in the process and drop awkwardly onto the ground behind.\n\nYou are in luck: no lawmen are guarding the rear of the building and you run as fast as you can into the trees. After many long and difficult days you succeed in reaching safety and read in newspapers what you feared is true: your brother Bill is dead. At the same time lawmen track down your companions in Texas, killing Asa Knight and Jim Wallace and capturing Jim Knight, who is sentenced to life imprisonment. You hide out alone in the Indian Territory for the rest of the year before re-joining the rest of the gang next spring.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Stay with Asa, Jim and Jim in Texas", "result": "You decide to go with the cowboys to El Paso and travel there in the week after the robbery. The day after you have arrived you are walking down the main street chatting to Jim Wallace when turn a corner and suddenly find yourself staring down the barrels of a dozen rifles held by some very serious looking Texas Rangers.\n\n\"Men you are under arrest,\" the Ranger Captain barks. \"Throw up your hands.\"\n\nJim Knight immediately complies while the other Jim and Asa drift their hands towards their gun belts. You are on the right of your little group and an alley opening on your right might offer you a chance of escape but it would be extremely risky.", "action_results": [{"action": "Raise your hands", "result": "You raise your hands into the air. Asa and Jim go for their guns and immediately several rifles explode into life: hit by several bullets the two men fall to the ground dead. Jim Knight gives a howl of pain as his brother dies and the pair of you are taken into custody. One week later lawmen in the Indian Territory track down and shoot your brother dead.\n\nThe trials for you and Jim Knight are straight-forward affairs: you are both found guilty of the Longview Bank Robbery and are both sentenced to fifty years imprisonment. Your only consolation as you begin your jail term is that Bill Doolin and his Wild Bunch are still alive and free... for another year or two until most of the gang are killed or captured. Finally fate reunites you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Go for your gun", "result": "You clap your hand to your pistol at your hip while Asa Knight and Jim Wallace do the same thing. Several rifles explode into life and you are shot through three times and together with Asa and Jim you are knocked to the ground, fatally wounded Gasping and choking you die of your wounds minutes later, a week after your death your brother Bill will be killed as well.\n\nYour Outlaw Career is over.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Run for the alley", "result": "You dart to your right at the exact same moment that Asa Knight and Jim Wallace go for their guns. Rifles explode into life, hitting and killing the two men while more Texas Rangers fire at you but you are already down the alleyway and out of sight, darting left and right through a tangle of alleys you finally emerge onto a street where an unattended horse is tied to a railing. Quickly untying it you jump onto it's back and race down the street, quickly and escape from town.\n\nIt takes you a week to make it back to the Indian Territory by horse and train and by the time you arrive it is too late: lawmen have tracked down and killed your brother Bill. You are now the last of the Dalton Brothers free and alive and your grief is overwhelming. You spend the rest of the year in hiding before emerging and reuniting with Bill Doolin and your remaining outlaw companions the following spring.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay outside with Jim and George", "result": "You stay outside with the two cowboys while the others go into the bank. George seems ill at ease and strides up and down in front of the horses. His behaviour is so odd it draws the attention of some passing townsfolk who stop and stare. \"What are you looking at?\" George snaps at them. Without warning he raises his pistol and shoots one of the men in the arm.\n\nPanic ensues as people scream and run for cover while George begins laughing manically and firing pistol shots wildly at fleeing townsfolk, hitting two more. Jim swears and takes cover behind the horses while you draw your pistol and consider your position.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join George in shooting at people", "result": "Striding out into the street you catch sight of a lawman jogging down the street towards you. Raising your rifle you take careful aim and shoot him in the chest, killing him. Suddenly you hear the boom of a buffalo gun and George is knocked off his feet by a shot that tears through his head. You turn just in time to see a man crouching behind a tree holding a rifle. He fires again, hitting you in the heart and killing you instantly.\n\nYour Outlaw Career has come to an end on this blood-soaked Texan street.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Take cover with Jim behind the horses", "result": "You join Jim in sheltering behind the horses and watch as George fires again and again, hitting more people. Suddenly a gunman with a rifle fires from behind a tree, hitting George in the head and dropping him dead in the street. Behind you the bank doors open and your companions rush out, your brother clutching a sack of money.\n\n\"George went crazy and just opened fire on people!\" you shout to him. Mounting up quickly the five of you spur your horses out of town, rifle shots zinging past you but fortunately not hitting you. A safe distance from the town you count the money in the sack and find you have escaped with $4,000, making your share $800.\n\n\"We need to split up,\" Bill announces. \"The Texas Rangers will be after us. I'm going back to Indian Territory to hide out at a little cabin I have outside Elk. The rest of you I want to stay here, go down to El Paso or someplace safe and wait for me to send for you.\"\n\nThe others agree and you need to choose who you will go with.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Go into hiding with Bitter Creek and Charley", "result": "Saying goodbye to your brother you go with Bitter Creek and Charley to hide out at the ranch of the Dunn Brothers, who are friends of theirs. In the newspapers you read how both Bill Doolin and Bill Dalton pull off bank robberies in Missouri and Texas respectively, both escaping after violent gunfights.\n\nThe shocking news comes in June when you read that your brother Bill has been tracked down and killed by a posse of lawmen and all his companions either killed or captured. You are the last surviving Dalton brother not behind bars and you are absolutely devastated by your brother's death. It seems that the law will not rest until you and your companions are all dead.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Stay outside with Charley", "result": "You remain outside the bank with Charley while the other two go in the bank. Almost immediately there is a gunshot followed by a second gunshot and then Bill and Bitter Creek burst out of the bank doors, the latter bleeding from a bullet wound in his shoulder. \"Go, go, go!\" Bill shouts and the four of you mount up and flee without a dollar.\n\nIt seems that the cashier inside the bank had a pistol in the bank and as soon as your companions drew their weapons he opened fire, hitting Bitter Creek in the shoulder. Bitter Creek fired back, hitting the man in the stomach and then your two companions fled. The robbery attempt has been a complete failure.\n\nBitter Creek's injury is serious and having been shot for the second time in seven months he is angry, insisting he wouldn't have been shot if he had just stayed with Bill. He and Charley plan to go into hiding with a friend, refusing to join Bill in his plan to rob a bank in Texas. In response Bill recruits four cowboy friends of his: a mean character called George Bennett, brothers Asa and Jim Knight and a youth called Jim Wallace. Bill urges you to join him and his raw recruits in robbing the bank in Texas while Bitter Creek and Charley are equally insistent that you should join them in hiding.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Decline and sit the robbery out", "result": "That afternoon the two Bill's order the rest of the gang out of town and you accompany your companions to a nearby village. That evening both Bill's turn up looking pleased with themselves, taking you to one side your brother Bill confides in you the robbery went without a hitch and the two men have just made themselves richer.\n\nTrouble strikes that night when members of the gang hear news of the robbery in Woodward and quickly realise you and the two Bill's were responsible. Your companions are furious they were not invited to take part and amidst the arguments the two Bill's start to blame each other. The result is the biggest argument to rock the gang since the one just before Coffeeville.\n\nAll the old grudges come out: Bill Doolin accuses your brother of wanting to lead the gang and be more famous than your dead brother Bob. Your brother accuses Bill Doolin of abandoning your brothers which may have contributed to their deaths at Coffeeville. The result of the argument is a split: the newer gang members side with Bill Doolin while Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce side with your brother Bill.\n\nThe next morning the divided gang prepares to part ways. Bill Doolin, Tulsa Jack, Dynamite Dick, Red Buck, Little Dick and Little Bill are going to Missouri to rob a bank in Southwest City. Bill Dalton, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce plan to rob a bank here in the Territory before recruiting more members and heading down to Texas to rob a bank there. Both Bill's ask you to accompany them.\n\nYou are torn between loyalty to your brother Bill and loyalty to your friend Bill but you have to make a choice.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Follow Bitter Creek to the stable with the horses", "result": "You and Bitter Creek take the Gang's horses when the others dismount and head towards the stables. As you are moving down the street you catch sight of a man walking down the street towards you. He has a silver Deputy's badge on his chest. The man halts as he catches sight of you and in a flash all three of you go for your guns.\nThe Lawman fires first, hitting your companion in the leg. Bitter Creek yells as you fire, narrowly missing the man who dives for cover. Suddenly you notice several men with guns in their hands running towards you both from all directions.\n\"Ride!\" you shout to Bitter Creek and with pistols exploding into life behind you the pair of you spur your horses down the main street, bullets zipping by. You do not stop riding until you are well out of town when you finally turn back to see what is happening.\nThe whole town seems alive with gunfire, bodies are lying in the street as lawmen shelter behind cover and fire pistols and rifles. As you watch Bill Dalton, Bill Doolin, Charlie, Tulsa Jack, Dynamite Dick and Red Buck, all mounted, burst out of the stable and spur stolen horses down the street, firing their pistols. Even as you watch Bill Dalton's horse is shot in the head and collapses spectacularly, your brother jumps from the saddle, lands on his feet, turns and shoots the lawman who killed his horse. Bill Doolin reins in and your brother runs towards him, throws himself onto the back of his horse and they gallop on. When your companions reach your position you all apply spurs to your horses and gallop on, away from Ingalls.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Follow the rest of the Gang into the saloon to drink", "result": "You and your companions head down the street to the town saloon where the owner Murray is an old friend of Bill Doolin. You all order drinks and have barely sat down before you hear the unmistakable sound of gunshots from the street. Springing to your feet you all glance out the window and see several lawmen armed with pistols and rifles running towards the saloon.\n\n\"Quick, the back door!\" Murray yells. \"I'll cover you!\"\n\nWithout hesitation and with your brother Bill leading the way you all run out of the back door, cut down an alley to the stable and race inside. There are dozens of horses inside and each of you chooses one while gunfire rages outside as the lawmen trade shots with Murray. Once you are all mounted and ready Bill Doolin throws open the stable doors and you all charge out.\n\nThe lawmen are taken completely by surprise as you and your companions burst out of the stable onto main street: they were all still firing at the saloon or at the hotel where Arkansas Tom is sniping at them with a rifle. Two lawmen are close to the stable and fire at you all, one bullet hits your brother Bill's horse in the head and it falls to the ground, your brother jumping clear just in time. Turning around with his pistol in his hand he fires a shot that hits the lawman in the chest. You and Bill Doolin both pull the reins of your horses and turn around as your brother runs towards you.\n\n\"I'll get him,\" Bill shouts to you. \"Cover me.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Fire at the remaining lawman", "result": "\"Ok\" you shout and as Bill rides back towards your brother you steady your horse and fire at the lawman. Your first shot misses but the second hits him in the head and he falls to the ground. As Bill pulls alongside your brother scrambles onto the back of his horse and turning about he joins you in galloping down the street away from the lawmen who are firing at you.\n\nDynamite Dick has turned his horse around and is firing his pistol at the lawmen behind you to cover you. As you ride towards him a bullet whistles past you and hits Dick in the hand, knocking his pistol flying and severing two fingers. Dick screams in pain and turns away, joining you and your companions in riding away, safely escaping from town and the ambush.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Ignore Bill and ride back to rescue your brother", "result": "You ignore Bill and spur your horse back towards your brother. Firing from behind you Bill shoots the remaining lawman in the head and as you pull up alongside your brother you turn your horse around while Bill scrambles onto the back of it. Once he is safely on you spur your horse down the street and together with Bill Doolin ride away from the lawmen who are firing at you.\n\nDynamite Dick has turned his horse around and is firing his pistol at the lawmen behind you to cover you. As you ride towards him a bullet whistles past you and hits Dick in the hand, knocking his pistol flying and severing two fingers. Dick screams in pain and turns away, joining you and your companions in riding away, safely escaping from town and the ambush.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Go with the rest of the Gang to Ingalls", "result": "You join your brother Bill and fellow gang members Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce in heading down to Ingalls, a lawless community where you all feel safe and hidden. You spend the next six months hiding out and partying, an interlude only briefly ruined by the news that Ol Yantis was tracked down to his sister's home by two lawmen and shot dead while resisting arrest. By the summer of 1893 you are ready for action again and with a new gang.\n\n\nIn the last six months you and your fellow outlaws have recruited four new gang members, bringing your gang strength up to nine. There is Dynamite Dick, an explosives expert with an impressive nickname, Red Buck, a grim and dour man, Tulsa Jack, a good friend of Bill Doolin's and Arkansas Tom, a sharp-shooting well-dressed young man. Together the nine of you plan your first robbery in Kansas and in the summer of 1893 you strike.\n\n\nOne summer morning the nine of you board a train at Cimarron in Kansas and while the new recruits get the driver to stop the train and Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce guard the passengers you and the two Bill's make your way to the Express Carriage. You calmly empty the safe before you all dismount, run to your horses, mount up and ride away. On the ride you count the money you have stolen and find you have gotten away with $1,000, making your share $100.\n\n\nUnfortunately you do not get clean away, that afternoon as you are resting a posse of lawmen suddenly gallop over a nearby ridge. All of your mount up and firing pistols and rifles at each other you and your pursuers engage in a running battle for over a mile. There are no casualties on either side except Bill Doolin who is unlucky enough to be shot in the foot by a rifle shell, a painful but non-serious wound. Easily escaping the nine of you ride back to Ingalls unaware that an even deadlier enemy is in pursuit...", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay in the Territory with the rest of the Gang", "result": "Bill departs and the rest of you lie low for six months before making your move: one summer evening the nine of you ride into the little community of Red Rock and wait on the platform. Soon enough a train arrives but this one has all it's lights off and passes right by the platform without stopping, a very unusual thing. The next train does stop and you all climb aboard; while the others take care of the driver and passengers you and your brothers go to the Express Carriage.\n\n\nYou take the Express Guard hostage and go to rob the safe, only to discover there isn't one. Angrily you ask the Guard where all the money is.\n\n\n\"There isn't any,\" the terrified man replies nervously. \"The Southern Pacific have changed their policy because so many of their trains were robbed last year... now only Express Trains carry money and they're all heavily guarded. The only cash we keep on the Passenger Trains now is petty cash.\"\n\n\nGrat swears angrily but there is nothing you can do but grab the petty cash, about $50 altogether, and leave when the train stops. After riding a safe distance to avoid pursuit a lively debate ensues in the Gang over what to do now: Bill Doolin thinks you all should rob trains outside the Territory while others think you should try robbing banks instead. The discussion ends with Bob declaring you will all try robbing one of these Express Trains in the Territory next month, despite the armed guards the messenger spoke of...", "action_results": [{"action": "The Pryor Creek Train Robbery", "result": "On the chosen day you all gather at the tiny train station at Pryor Creek to await the arrival of the train. You all have very specific jobs: Bill Power and Dick Broadwell are to board the driver's compartment immediately and stop him moving the train from the platform. Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce are to board the Passenger Carriage and keep everything under control there. Your brothers Bob, Grat and Emmett will board the Express Carriage and try to capture the armed guards before robbing the safe. You need to choose which group you will join.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Bill and Dick in securing the Driver's Carriage", "result": "As the train stops you join Bill and Dick in climbing into the driver's compartment where you draw your pistols. The driver turns to complain but freezes when he sees your guns, you order him to put his hands up and leaving the other two to guard him you return to the doorway and watch what is happening on the platform. Two male passengers have got off the train while further down the platform seven armed guards have stepped off the train and are walking up and down smoking and stretching their legs.\n\n\nEverything seems to be going like clockwork until the guards turn to get back on the train. A shot is fired, hitting one of them and then pandemonium erupts as gunfire explodes from the train, Both the passengers on the platform and a second guard are hit and fall down as the remaining guards run for cover. From the door of the driving compartment you fire your pistol at the fleeing guards, who take shelter and start to return fire.\n\n\nWhen the guards start firing back you step back inside the driver's compartment and push the door shut. \"Time to go I think,\" you tell your companions and opening the door on the other side you jump down off the train. Further up you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards.\n\n\nThe robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious.\n\n\n\"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?\" he demands. \"If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?\"\n\n\nIt transpires that Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Apparently they were in the Passenger Carriage when they heard the gunfire and shot the first people they saw on the platform. Bob angrily attacks them while the three outlaws defend themselves equally furiously.\n\n\n\"I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now,\" Bob decides. \"I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after.\"\n\n\n\"Well that's just fine Bob,\" Bill Doolin says cooly. \"It sounds too risky anyway.\"\n\n\nFrowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Bob, Grat, Emmett, Bill and Dick in the Coffeyville Raid", "result": "On the chosen day, three months after the Pryor Creek Robbery, you and your five companions ride into the peaceful little town of Coffeyville. You already have a plan: to hitch your horses outside the town's two banks. While Bob and Emmett enter the first bank Grat, Bill and Dick are to enter the second bank and rob both, lock any staff and customers in the vaults, emerge at roughly the same time, mount up and ride out of town before the alarm is raised.\n\n\nAs you ride into town you are annoyed to see that the hitching posts outside the banks have been taken down for some street work, forcing you to leave your horses in an alleyway close to the banks. As you dismount and walk towards the bank your are uncomfortably aware that a lot of people seem to be glancing at you, heavily armed as you all are with rifles and you with your two pistols. \"Ok boys, move smart and fast,\" Bob mutters. \"Who you joining Dan?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with Bob and Emmett into the first bank", "result": "You and your brothers walk confidently into one of the town's banks to discover three cashiers sitting inside chatting and laughing. The laughter dies from their faces as you, Bob and Emmett draw your pistols and point them at the cashiers. \"This is a hold up,\" you declare. \"Keep silent and no one will be hurt.\" While Emmett guards the cashiers you and Bob swiftly empty the contents of the open vault into a sack. Everything is going according to plan.\n\n\nThen you hear the gunshots.\n\n\nThe windows of the bank you are in crack as bullets pound into them. \"You men in front of us,\" Bob barks, passing the sack of money to Emmett and grabbing a teller. \"We're going out the front.\" Each of you hold a teller in front of you and move towards the front door but several bullets break the glass, driving you back. \"Out the back,\" Bob yells. \"Quickly!\" Abandoning the tellers the three of you race out a back door and onto the street. The alleyway where you left the horses is some distance away. \"Go quickly boys,\" Bob orders as gunshots continue to ring out all around. \"I'll cover you.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Help Bob hold the street", "result": "While Emmett hurries down the street you and Bob back towards the alley cautiously, guns in your hands. A citizen of the town steps out fo a doorway with a pistol in his hand, instinctively raising both your pistols you shoot him twice in the chest. As he falls a second man springs from cover and runs to the dying man's side. \"Stop,\" you shout but he ignores you. As he stoops and picks up the pistol you fire again, shooting him in the head. As you do a third man steps from cover and fires a rifle at you. The bullet hits you in the chest making you double up. Forcing yourself upright you fire several shots back with both pistols, hitting him multiple times and killing him.\n\n\n\"Come on Dan,\" Bob yells grabbing you, firing more shots. Turning you find you are near the alley entrance, Bill Power and another man lie dead near the entrance while Grat has taken shelter behind an oil drum, his clothes stained red from several wounds. \"Come on Dan,\" Bob yells again but the world is darkening and as Bob tries to help you he stumbles as he is shot. You reach the mouth of the alley before your strength gives way, collapsing to the ground you lie dead in the dust. Your brothers Bob and Grat die within feet of you from their injuries, the legendary Dalton Gang destroyed in this alley of death.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Make for the alleyway with Emmett", "result": "You and Emmett take off running, your brother still holding the sack of money, while Bob fires his pistols at your pursuers down the street. Approaching the alleyway you see Bill Power and another man lying dead near the entrance, Grat has taken cover behind an oil barrel near the entrance and is firing down the street while behind him Dick Broadwell is clambering onto his horse, both men have been shot several times. Dick begins to ride away as you reach the alleyway. \"Keep going boys,\" Grat yells as you pass him.\n\n\nYou and Emmett make it to your horses, both miraculously without a scratch despite all the bullets whizzing around you. Glancing back you are startled to see Grat topple over dead. Bob is staggering towards the alleyway entrance clutching a wound in his side, behind him you can see three townsmen lying dead on the street. Just as he reaches the alley Bob falls to the ground. \"Bob,\" Emmett shouts and abandoning you he hurries to his brother's side.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Emmett to your brother's aid", "result": "You and Emmett run towards Bob but before you can get there someone fires a shotgun blast into Emmett's chest, knocking him flying to the ground. As you stop and turn towards Emmett the gunman fires a second blast into you, sending you flying back a full six feet before crashing into the dust of the alley. After a few more gunshots the town goes silent. You and your three brothers are all lying motionless in this alley of death.\n\n\nSomehow though you do not die. Though Emmett has suffered 23 separate injuries from the shotgun blast and you have even more wounds both of you somehow survive. Your brothers are not so lucky: both Bob and Grat die of their wounds moments after your injury, Bill Power and Dick Broadwell also do not survive the day. Four of the townsfolk lie dead. The sack of money lies between you and Emmett: it is picked up and carried back to the bank.\n\n\nAfter treatment for your injuries both you and Emmett receive life sentences in prison for your parts in the Raid. During your lengthy incarceration your other brother Bill teams up with Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce to continue robbing banks and trains. First Bill and then Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are killed by lawmen... finally chance leads to you all being reunited.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Mount your horse and follow Dick out of town", "result": "Abandoning your brothers you throw yourself onto your horse and spur it into a gallop. As you ride down the alley you glance back just in time to see Emmett shot down with a shotgun blast near a motionless Bob and Grat, all three of your brothers look dead. Swearing, with tears in your eyes, you spur your horse out of town and after Dick Broadwell. He is still riding his horse but gets slower and slower as you get closer. Just before you reach him he topples off his horse and lies motionless on the ground. Sure enough when you check him he is dead.\n\n\nThe Dalton Gang has been destroyed in Coffeyville and you are the only survivor.\n\n\nOver the next few weeks you go into hiding in the Indian Territory, trying to rejoin Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce. In newspapers you read how eight men died in the Coffeyville Raid including your brothers Bob and Grat. Emmett miraculously survives 23 bullet wounds to serve a life sentence imprisonment for bank robbery. Finally you manage to reconnect with Bill Doolin and arrange a meeting with him and the remaining members of the gang, as well as your brother Bill who has travelled over from California when he read the news of Coffeyville. You all reunite in the small town of Ingalls.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Go with Grat, Bill and Dick into the second bank", "result": "You and Grat lead Bill and Dick into one of the town's banks to find three cashiers inside. \"Throw up your hands and don't move,\" you bark. \"We're robbing the bank.\" While Bill and Dick hold the tellers hostage you and Grat go over to the vault to discover the door is closed and locked. \"Open it,\" Grat orders the tellers. \"We can't,\" one of the men says nervously. \"It's a time lock. You'll have to wait ten minutes.\" You and Grat glance at each other and sigh.\n\n\nSuddenly gunshots explode through the bank's windows, one of them hitting Dick in the right arm. \"I can't use my arm,\" Dick exclaims, holding his arm in his other hand. \"It's no use, I can't shoot anymore.\" \"Come on boys, we need to get out of here,\" Grat yells. \"Not without the money,\" Bill declares and begins riffling the counter, throwing what notes he can find into a small sack. While he is rifling Grat and Dick start running out the bank's front door.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Bill in grabbing the money", "result": "You and Bill grab handfuls of money off the counter and throw it into the back before following your companions out the front door. As you emerge from the bank several waiting townsfolk open fire on you. Bill is hit in the head and falls dead to the ground, a moment later you are shot through the heart and fall just in front of him. You and Bill are the first of eight men to die on this bloody day, moments later your brothers Bob and Grat are killed as well in this last battle of the Dalton Gang.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Follow Grat and Dick out the door", "result": "You run after Grat and Dick, both stumbling as they are shot repeatedly, blood and dust flying from their clothes. Somehow you are unhit and the three of you make it to an alleyway where Grat sinks down behind an oil drum and starts firing his pistol down the street while Dick runs on towards the horses. Glancing back you can see Bill Power lying dead in the street, a bullet in his brain, while Emmett is running towards the alleyway from the right followed by Bob who is walking backwards, firing his pistol as he does. \"Go on Dan,\" Grat says hoarsely to you. \"I'll cover them.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Dick to the horses", "result": "You follow Dick to the horses and both of you mount up, though your companion is bleeding heavily from his wounds. A glance back shows that Emmett has reached the alleyway and as you look Grat shoots down an approaching lawman of the town. As everything seems to be in order you spur your horse into life and gallop out of town with Dick. Unfortunately everything is not in order: Bob and Grat never make it out of the alleyway alive and Emmett is shot down too.\n\n\nYou cannot know this as you ride away as you are more concerned with Dick's condition: he reels alarmingly in the saddle and a short way from town he topples from his horse to the ground. Dismounting quickly you find he is dead of blood loss from his wounds. A quick glance up shows you that none of your brothers have made it out of town. Your heart sinking you mount up and ride on rapidly, the only one to escape this ill-fated raid.\n\n\nLater, over the coming weeks spent in hiding in the Indian Territory, you read how eight men died in the gunfight in Coffeyville including your brothers Bob and Grat. Emmett survived 23 separate gunshot wounds only to be sentenced to life imprisonment for his part in the raid. After weeks of searching with vain you are able to reunite with Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce: they have already arranged a meeting with your brother Bill in the hideout town of Ingalls.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Help Grat cover Bob and Emmett", "result": "You run back and join Grat in firing from cover down the street As three men approach the alley down the street you fire your pistols at them, hitting and killing a lawman leading the trio. The other two men fire back, one bullet hitting Grat and the other hitting you. Both of you fall to the ground as Emmett runs by and Bob staggers up, bleeding from his own wound he topples to the ground near you. A moment later you hear a shotgun blast and then Emmett is down as well. You and your brothers Bob and Grat die of your wounds in that alleyway of death.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Hide out with Bill, Bitter Creek and Charley in Ingalls", "result": "You and your friends go to hide out in the little community of Ingalls and pass the next three months drinking and relaxing, using the money from the Pryor Creek robbery to pay your way. Much of the time you spend with a friend of Bitter Creek's called Ol Yantis, a softly spoken cotton farmer. The five of you spend your time relaxing and hiding out and for a time there are no worries on your horizons.\n\n\nThen comes the news of Coffeyville.\n\n\nYou read in the newspapers how Bob, Grat and Emmett, together with Bill Power and Dick Broadwell, try to rob two banks at the same time in the city of Coffeyville. The alarm is raised and a massive gunfight breaks out that leaves eight men dead including Bob, Grat, Bill and Dick while Emmett survives despite 23 individual bullet wounds and is imprisoned for life. Your brothers Bob and Grat are dead, Emmett is imprisoned and for a time you are all absolutely stunned, completely unsure what to do.\n\n\nThe deaths of your brothers only commits you further to your life as an outlaw. After sending a telegram to your brother Bill to join you in the Territroy you remain brooding for days. It is finally Bill Doolin who breaks you out of it. \"We'll show America we're not done yet,\" he tells you firmly. \"We'll hit a bank in Carney, we'll make Bob proud. We'll keep on and make the Gang he built the best and most famous there ever was.\" Grimly you agree.\n\n\nOne week after your brothers were killed at Coffeyville you and your companions ride into the town of Carney. While Ol guards your horses outside the door the rest of you go inside; Bitter Creek and Charley guard the lone cashier while you and Bill empty the vault before locking the cashier inside and riding off. It is all too easy, a simple robbery that netted the gang $1,500, making your share $300. After receiving a telegram from your brother Bill you ride back to Ingalls to meet him.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Join Bitter Creek, Bill and Charley in securing the Passenger Carriage", "result": "As the train stops you join Bitter Creek, Bill and Charley in climbing into the Passenger's Compartment, passing two men on the way who are stepping out onto the platform. As soon as you are in the Compartment you all draw your pistols and you tell everyone to keep calm and remain in their seats. Peering through the windows you can only see the two men on the platform who have halted just outside the train and seem to be talking.\n\n\nSuddenly a gunshot rings out from further down the train and you all jump. Moments later a volley of gunshots rings out, raising their pistols Bitter Creek, Bill and Charley all start shooting out the train windows at the platform as well. The two men on the platform start running and someone yells for you to shoot them before they get to cover.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fire at the fleeing men", "result": "You fire your pistol rapidly at the two fleeing men, hitting them both in the back and knocking them both to the ground. More windows shatter as shots are fired back from somewhere on the platform, the bullets mostly hitting the roof or passing through the windows on the other side of the Compartment, though they are enough to make you all duck. \"Let's go,\" Bill Doolin shouts and hurrying at a crouch you throw open the compartment door that doesn't face the platform and one by one you all jump down to the ground. Up and down the train you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards.\n\n\nThe robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious.\n\n\n\"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?\" he demands. \"If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?\"\n\n\nIt transpires that you, Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Bob angrily attacks the four of you while you all defend yourselves equally furiously.\n\n\n\"Bill, Bitter Creek, Charley, I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now,\" Bob decides. \"I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after.\"\n\n\n\"Well that's just fine Bob,\" Bill Doolin says cooly. \"It sounds too risky anyway.\"\n\n\nFrowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Hold your fire", "result": "You hold your fire while your companions fire their pistols through the windows, hitting both men who fall face-first onto the platform. More windows shatter as shots are fired back from somewhere on the platform, the bullets mostly hitting the roof or passing through the windows on the other side of the Compartment, though they are enough to make you all duck. \"Let's go,\" Bill Doolin shouts and hurrying at a crouch you throw open the compartment door that doesn't face the platform and one by one you all jump down to the ground. Up and down the train you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards.\n\n\nThe robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious.\n\n\n\"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?\" he demands. \"If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?\"\n\n\nIt transpires that you, Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Bob angrily attacks the four of you while you all defend yourselves equally furiously.\n\n\n\"Bill, Bitter Creek, Charley, I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now,\" Bob decides. \"I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after.\"\n\n\n\"Well that's just fine Bob,\" Bill Doolin says cooly. \"It sounds too risky anyway.\"\n\n\nFrowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Join Bob, Grat and Emmett in securing the Express Carriage", "result": "As the trains stops you join Bob, Grat and Emmett in walking towards the Express Carriage. As you approach several armed guards step off of the train, chatting, smoking and laughing. You and your brothers instinctively tense but the guards pay no attention to you at all and instead walk about on the platform stretching their legs. Stepping into the Express Carriage you and your brothers find just one guard left inside, leaning back on a chair reading a book. He looks up to find your pistol pointing directly at his face.\n\n\n\"Don't move friend,\" you tell the guard quietly and he freezes. Disarming him you leave Emmett to guard him while you and Grat open the unlocked safe door and begin grabbing out handfuls of money and throwing them into a sack. Meanwhile Bob is standing by the open door looking out onto the platform when he suddenly swears and jumps back. \"They're coming back,\" he hisses. Drawing his pistol he takes a deep breath and then steps forward to the door, gun blazing. \"Give me a hand brothers,\" he shouts out. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Bob in shooting at the guards on the platform", "result": "You join Bob in the doorway and empty your pistol at the fleeing guards, hitting two of them who fall down onto the platform and lie still. The rest of them reach shelter at various points of the platform and begin firing back, prompting you and Bob to move away from the open door of the Express Carriage: bullets traveling through it hit the wall on the far side of the Carriage. Further down the train you can hear more gunfire as the rest of the Gang fire at the Guards. \"I've got the money, let's go,\" Grat shouts. Throwing open the compartment door that doesn't face the platform and one by one you all jump down to the ground. Further up the train you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards.\n\n\nThe robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious.\n\n\n\"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?\" he demands. \"If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?\"\n\n\nIt transpires that Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Bob angrily attacks thethree of them, who defend themselves equally furiously.\n\n\n\"Bill, Bitter Creek, Charley, I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now,\" Bob decides. \"I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after.\"\n\n\n\"Well that's just fine Bob,\" Bill Doolin says cooly. \"It sounds too risky anyway.\"\n\n\nFrowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Concentrate on helping Grat get all the money", "result": "You and Grat continue grabbing handfuls of money while Bob empties his pistol at the guards before jumping back as the guards begin firing through the open door,bullets hitting the wall on the far side of the Carriage. Further down the train you can hear more gunfire as the rest of the Gang fire at the Guards. \"I've got the money, let's go,\" Grat shouts. Throwing open the compartment door that doesn't face the platform and one by one you all jump down to the ground. Further up the train you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards.\n\n\nThe robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious.\n\n\n\"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?\" he demands. \"If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?\"\n\n\nIt transpires that Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Bob angrily attacks thethree of them, who defend themselves equally furiously.\n\n\n\"Bill, Bitter Creek, Charley, I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now,\" Bob decides. \"I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after.\"\n\n\n\"Well that's just fine Bob,\" Bill Doolin says cooly. \"It sounds too risky anyway.\"\n\n\nFrowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay in the Indian Territory with Black Face", "result": "You go with Black Face to the small community of Hennessey so Black Face can see a doctor. You both book into the town's small hotel but you have the misfortune of being seen in the street by someone who was on the Wharton train and recognizes you both as the robbers. They tell a lawman and a Deputy with a pistol in each hand is waiting for you when you both emerge from the doctor's surgery backed by an armed posse of a dozen men.You are both disarmed and immediately taken into custody.\n\n\nAs Hennessey doesn't have a jail the lawman puts you both on a train for Wichita, Kansas. When the train stops at the station the lawman gets off to make sure it is safe, giving a pistol to a second man to guard you. This man is one of the train staff and he puts the pistol on a table while he does some paperwork. Moving like lightning you spring to your feet, cross the room in great bounds and snatch the loaded weapon out of the man's grasp.\n\n\nYou and Black Face now have a gun but you haven't escaped yet: the only way out of the Baggage Car where you are being held prisoner is through the door that leads to the platform. A quick glance through the door shows you that the Lawman who captured you is standing alert on the platform keeping guard, a rifle in his hands. You quickly tell Black Face about the situation and Black Face thinks for a moment.\n\n\n\"One of us will have to jump out onto the platform and shoot that lawman dead,\" he says seriously. \"Who do you think is the better shot, you or me?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Give the pistol to Black Face to kill the lawman", "result": "Black Face takes the pistol, takes a deep breath and then springs out of the carriage, gun firing. Moments later he is hit, you see him jerk as a bullet hits his chest but he keeps firing as he is hit twice more, the last shot knocking him onto his back. You peer cautiously out of the carriage but the lawman is down too, lying face down on the platform in a spreading pool of blood, his rifle lying at his side. Without hesitation you jump out onto the platform, scoop up Black Face's pistol and start running.\n\n\nEveryone gets out of your way as you race across the platform and through the train station, hiding your gun as you do so. Outside you quickly mount a horse tied in an alleyway and gallop out of town. Riding hard you escape back to the Territory, eluding any possible pursuit. You make for Hutchinson but by the time you get there Bob, Emmett and Bitter Creek are gone already. You hide out at the empty house and risk a visit into town to read the papers.\n\n\nAs you suspected both Black Face and the Lawman Ed Short die of their wounds. Your fellow gang members resurface when they and four new recruit rob a train in the Indian Territory. You reunite with them when they return to Hutchinson, flush with success from the robbery and pleased you escaped Wichita, even if Black Face did not. More good news is on the way: in California your brother Bill has been acquitted at his trial and Grat, who was found guilty, has escaped custody. Together with the four new gang members you all arrange a winter reunion in the Indian Territory.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Jump off the train and fire at the lawman yourself", "result": "You take a deep breath and jump from the carriage, your pistol firing. You hit the startled lawman in the stomach with your first shot but he recovers quickly and shoots you through the chest. The force of the bullet is like a punch and knocks you a step backwards but you quickly recover and fire three more times, hitting the lawman again. He shoots you again through the chest and you fall onto your back on the hard wooden train platform. Black Face springs out to help you but the lawman shoots him too, hitting him in the head and Black Face falls across your legs, killed instantly.\n\n\nYou drop the warm pistol from your hand and raise your head slightly. The lawman is sinking to the ground and suddenly falls forward on his face. There, on that little wooden platform beneath the summer sun the three of you die: your enemy, your friend and you. Your attempt to escape custody has failed and you go the way of so many outlaws: cut down in your last gunfight. You are only the first of the Wild Bunch to fall: within years almost all of your companions will join you in death.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Stay in California with Bill and Grat", "result": "The next morning Bob and Emmett say their farewells and set off by train for the Indian Territory. You, Grat and Bill settle down and mostly stay in the house, only Bill leaves to see to his law work. One night you are all talking in the kitchen when there is a knock on the front door. Bill goes to answer it and suddenly you hear yells and the sound of a scuffle. You and Grat spring to your feet as several armed policemen burst into the kitchen.\n\n\nYou have two choices. There is an open window in the kitchen overlooking an alleyway which you could run to and jump through, though it is perilously narrow or there is a second open door behind you that leads through to the dining room through which a back door leads into a yard that opens out onto a street, though it may be guarded. Grat, who is closer to the policemen, is already grappling with two of them, affording you a possible opportunity to escape.", "action_results": [{"action": "Jump out of the kitchen window", "result": "Racing to the window you spring up onto the kitchen counter, kick out the window and hurl yourself through it. You hit the ground beneath the window amidst a rain of broken glass but are on your feet in an instant, tearing down the alleyway and across a street. Running on foot you manage to reach the city's train station ten minutes later and catch the first train heading out of town. Sending off telegrams ahead you arrange to meet Bob and Emmett on the way.\n\n\nDays later, after taking trains across Nevada, Utah and Colorado you rejoin Bob and Emmett. By this time you have read in the papers that Bill and Grat have both been arrested back in California and charged with train robbery. You are all concerned by the news but Bob points out there is nothing you can do about it until you have some money so he arranges a meeting with two of his old friends in the Indian Territory.\n\n\nAt the little community of Wharton you find two men waiting at the train station for you. The first is a middle-aged man with a distinctive black gunpowder burn on his left cheek while his companion is shorter, handsome man with an impressive moustache. \"Boys, let me introduce you to Black Face Charley Bryant and Bitter Creek George Newcomb,\" Bob declares. Greetings are exchanged all round as you leave the station.\n\n\n\"Black Face and Bitter Creek were with me and Emmett in that little caper down in New Mexico that got us all written up as Outlaws,\" Bob explains to you. \"I've been thinking boys that it was time to show this country what real outlaws are like. We've already held up one train in California and I plan to hit more here in the Territory where they haven't got any real law; just miles and miles of wilderness to hide in and train lines running through it like arteries for us to cut. What do you boys reckon?\"\n\n\n\"After we read in the papers you boys were behind that hold up in California we were kind of hoping you would turn up with that exact offer,\" Bitter Creek declares with a grin. Black Face just grunts.\n\n\nOn the first day of May the five of you board a train at Wharton. While Black Face and Bitter Creek go to capture the driver and stop the train you, Bob and Emmett head straight to the Express Carriage. Catching the Guard by surprise you disarm him at gunpoint and empty the safe. As the train slows to a halt you jump off and race to a nearby copse of trees where you have left horses waiting, joined by your companions. Once you have ridden a safe distance you count the money and find you have stolen some $1700, making your share $300. It's not much but it's a start.\n\n\n\"Well boys it's not millions but the Territory isn't a wealthy place,\" Bob says thoughtfully. \"I reckon it's best if we split up. Bitter Creek, did you say you had some friends over in Hutchinson, Kansas? I reckon that sounds like a safe spot for us.\" Black Face coughs. \"I reckon I'm sick boys,\" he tells the rest of you. \"Got this damn cough that won't go away so I reckon I'd best get into Hutchinson here in the Territory and see a doctor I trust. Drop me a line when you want me and I'll join you boys again.\" Bob nods and you ponder who to join.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Run through the dining room and out the back door", "result": "Racing through the dining room you reach the back door, throw it open and dash out... straight into the arms of three waiting policemen. After a brief struggle you are taken into custody and together with your brothers you are escorted off to the city's jail. It seems that posses used bloodhounds to track you to Bill's house and witnesses from the train soon identify you, Bill and Grat as three of the men who robbed the Alila Train. You are swiftly charged with armed robbery and murder. Bob and Emmett are soon identified as the other participants in the train robbery and don't help your case by putting a gang of outlaws together and robbing trains in the Indian Territory.\n\n\nThings are looking grim as six months pass and the date of your trial approaches. Bill remains optimistic, confident that his own skills as a lawyer, contradictions in the testimony of witnesses on the train and your own previous good reputations will exonerate you. Grat is less sanguine and urges that you join him in trying to escape from prison and heading out across America to go and join Bob, Emmett and their gang in the Indian Territory. You need to choose which course to follow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Grat in planning an escape attempt", "result": "You and Grat plan your escape attempts and make no effort to defend yourselves at trial, which results in you both being found guilty of train robbery and being sentenced to twenty years imprisonment. Put on a train bound for San Quentin and guarded by two armed deputies you see your chance to escape when one of your guards falls asleep and the other becomes engrossed in a conversation with a pretty lady sitting next to him.\n\n\nMoving with infinite care you lean forward, deftly remove the handcuff key from the sleeping guard's trouser pocket, undo your handcuffs and pass it to Grat to free himself. As the train passes over a bridge you both suddenly spring up, punch out the train window next to you and first you, then Grat throw yourselves through it to the astonishment of your guards. Falling through the air you both hit the water as the train rushes by above you.\n\n\nSwimming quickly to the shore, elated at your daring escape you set off cross-country. Stealing horses and robbing country folk along the way you manage to make it to the Indian Territory after a month long series of adventures. On the way you learn that Bill has been acquitted of all the charges against him thanks to his fantastic skills as a lawyer. As the year 1891 you, your brothers and Bob and Emmett's gang gather for a meeting in the Indian Territory.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Join Bill in planning for your courtroom defence", "result": "You and Bill spend your time researching court cases and preparing for your trial, not helped by the fact that Grat makes a spectacular escape from custody by jumping through the window of a moving train and Bob and Emmett's gang in the Indian Territory rob another train. Notwithstanding these facts at the trial you and Bill absolutely shine, casting doubt on every single witness testimony from the train and illustrating countless cases when bloodhound tracking proved unreliable and misleading. It surprises no one when both of you are acquitted by the Jury after a short deliberation.\n\n\nYou and Bill celebrate in San Francisco and Bill makes plans to rebuild his shattered career as a lawyer when a telegram arrives from Bob congratulating you both on your good luck and telling you that Grat has succeeded in joining him and Emmett in the Indian Territory. He invites you and Bill to join him and his gang to for Christmas and New Year and with much reluctance you both make your way out to Indian Territory to meet your outlaw brothers.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay where you are", "result": "Bob crosses to the open train door, raises his pistol, holds his breath while he takes careful aim and squeezes off a single shot. As the gun smoke rises he leans forward, peers into the darkness and draws back into the carriage. \"I've killed him,\" he says to the rest of you who stand there in stunned silence. After a few seconds Bob mutters \"come on\" and leads you all down the train.\n\n\nHiding your guns in your pockets you pass through the passenger cars, people looking at you curiously but perhaps sensing who you are no one interferes with you until you come to the corridor that leads to the express carriage. Bob has just started to open the door when a shot is fired, the bullet striking the thick wooden door. You all jump back immediately and Bob pulls the door shut again. There is a moment's silence then more shots are fired, the bullets striking the door in front of you.\n\n\n\"We'd better clear out of here,\" Bill mutters to the rest of you. \"That express guard is armed.\" Bob thinks for a moment and swears. \"We should have brought some dynamite,\" he mutters. \"It doesn't matter,\" Grat says quickly. \"The alarm is raised now boys, let's clear out.\"\n\n\nYou open a door and one by one you all jump off the train and run down the embankment. You have left five horses tethered in a copse of trees nearby and reach them after a swift five minutes run. Mounting up you ride off south. The robbery has been a complete failure: an engineer has been killed and you have been forced to flee without a single dollar. It is not an impressive debut.\n\n\nNews travels fast and by the time you make it back to San Francisco where Bill lives the news is in all the morning newspapers that an engineer was murdered on a South Pacific Train last night by a desperate gang of train robbers. You keep to Bill's house all day, each of you lost in your own thoughts about what to do now. The tension drags on until evening when after dinner Bob finally addresses the problem.\n\n\n\"I've been thinking and I reckon it'd be a lot safer if we all headed back to the Indian Territory,\" he says. \"We know it well and I don't reckon the law will find us there.\"\n\n\n\"I've got a law career here in California Bob,\" Bill says angrily. \"You forget, only you and Emmett are currently wanted for anything: Grat, Daniel and I aren't known to the law yet.\"\n\n\n\"How long do you think that will last with posses tracking us for the Alila Robbery?\" Bob demands.\n\n\nAn argument rages for the next few hours until it ends with Grat siding with Bill and both choosing to lie low in California while Bob and Emmett head back to the Indian Territory to hide out there until the heat dies down. What you'll do after a few months isn't discussed and you need to choose which pair of brothers to join.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story47.json b/data/scraper/stories/story47.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3028779 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story47.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=38774", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Your name is Leo Trapa (which you have had legally changed from Cleo Trapa to sound more manly) and you have recently gained great fame after sailing your ship Adventurer completely around your world of Magellan from north to south. The Adventurer is a tough little ship, large enough for a Crew of 30 and with enough space to hold 30 days worth of supplies. Though you are only twenty years old you have already received the rank of Commander in recognition of your superb ability and are widely respected as one of the greatest sailors of your homeland, The Kingdom of the Three Islands.\n\n\nThe World of Magellan on which you live is mostly water and for this reason the people of The Three Islands have a rich naval tradition. Gunpowder is a recent invention and though your ship is armed with four cannons and all of your crew carry muskets these are slow to load and highly inaccurate when fired making the sword your crew's primary weapon. A dozen Colonies have been established on Islands beyond your people's borders but these vary from well-organized and thriving settlements to frequently-massacred outposts of civilization.\n\n\nYour ship can only carry a maximum amount of Food for 30 days, which will make finding and obtaining sources of Food your top priority. If you ever run out of Food (your Food number reaches 0) then you and all your Crew will starve to death and die. You will almost certainly lose Crew members on this military expedition and you must take care that your Crew number never falls to 0: that will mean that you and all your Crew are dead.\n\n\nThough not as important as during your previous voyage you will still want to make your journeys in the shortest number of Days possible. Queen Anne-Marie is keen to encourage efficiency and rewards those Captains who complete their voyages swiftly with additional Crew and Food. You are sailing as one of the ten Ships in the War Fleet, commanded by Queen Anne-Marie, and you will find details of your fellow Captains and Commanders in the List of War Fleet Officers provided below.\n\n\nSurviving this voyage will not be as easy as it may appear... those who do will receive 1 Score Point while those who run out of Crew or Food during their voyage and die win no Score Points. Your Score will be shown if you leave a comment when you have finished this story. As in previous adventures you might find it useful to make a map as you sail as the information might be useful for future voyages and adventures in these waters...\n\n\nSo good luck reader, make wise and strategically sound choices and with a little luck, a good course and a fair wind you might live to see your homeland again!", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to begin your adventure (pick up the List of War Fleet Officers first!)", "result": "Queen Anne-Marie looks round at you and her other assembled Officers with a steely gaze, as if measuring each officer's worth.\n\n\n\"Your voyages so far have accomplished great things\", she announces. \"Many Islands have been colonized, many more islands discovered and I am confident that with sailors such as you under my command many more will be found. We do however have a problem: the Lapau as they call themselves. A vast confederation of allied tribes by force or reason we must come to a favorable treaty with them and establish where the border between their lands and ours lies. To do this we must explore their islands, see where they are, how strong they are and how wealthy they may be.\"\n\n\nYou glance round at the other officers, both those you know and those you don't. Grey-bearded and softly-spoken Commander Cuthrew is gazing intently at Queen Anne-Marie as she speaks, nearby Donald Trevers is cleaning his spectacles nervously. Your friend Esme Hale, the attractive fire-haired maiden of the sea, catches your eye and winks at you. You smile back but quickly pay attention as Queen Anne-Marie gives you a disapproving glance.\n\n\n\"During The Great Race and The Second Race most of our problems were caused by lack of Food,\" she declares. \"I have had those of our Colonies which lie in our path well-stocked with food and my vessel, the Monarch of the Sea, has been specially constructed to carry vast amounts of Food which I will allocate among you all based on your performance and speed during this voyage. We must try to learn from our past experiences.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie pauses again and you quickly glance round at those Officers you are not personally familiar with. Thomas Finch and Richard Quarrel stand behind the Queen, Finch is straight-backed and hard-looking while Quarrel has the face and manner of a pickpocket. More impressive are the cousins Swift and Mason, both fair-haired and smart-looking young ladies. Standing aloof to one side and scowling at something is the tomboyish Eva Freer. With her short purple hair and wiry, slender figure she's quite good looking you think...\n\n\n\"The first leg of our voyage will be south through the Southern Passage, past Trever's Island and we will rendezvous on Burnt Island,\" Queen Anne-Marie declares. \"We will sail at dawn tomorrow morning and woe betide you if ten Days from now we are not all anchored off Burnt Island. I know you are all good Sailors and if you serve me well then together we can make this world ours... very well. See to your ships Commanders and we will sail on the dawn tide.\"\n\n\nThe next day the early morning fog is just clearing as you order the anchor raised aboard the Adventurer in readiness to sail out of Golden Sands. The packed crowds on the quay remind you of when you set sail on The Great Race around the world but then the crowds were cheering while today they are oddly subdued and silent... you sense that deep down everyone knows the War Fleet has not been assembled for diplomatic reasons and there are many husbands and fathers aboard it's ships that will not come home again.\n\n\nSome individual ships are still capable of raising a cheer, your Adventurer is one and when Hale's Merry Company sets sail the cheers and shouts are deafening. The Sea Ghost rapidly pulls away from the harbor, vanishing to the south, followed in a group by The Royal Escort, Indefatigable and The Monarch of the Seas. The cousins Swift and Mason are sailing together and you watch with a smile as Trever's Lucky nearly collides with Freer's Gambler prompting a string of imaginative and and biologically detailed insults from that colorful Commander. With a sigh you watch your homeland vanish from sight as you sail the Adventurer once more into the unknown.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sailing South", "result": "Sailing South for three days you soon come to the Southern Passage, a channel mined and blasted through The Great Reef which surrounds The Three Islands, which together with the Northern Passage and the newer Eastern and Western Passages allow access to the outside world. As you approach the Passage you see the Explorer and Maverick sailing through, not being personally familiar with either Commander Swift or Mason you hang back until they are clear before guiding the Adventurer through. On a relatively flat corral shelf a wooden watchtower and cabin has been built, above the tower flies the royal emblem of Queen Anne-Marie. A soldier in the tower waves cheerfully at you and you remember Anne-Marie's claim she'd had the colonies and outposts along the War Fleet's route supplied with large caches of food. You could drop anchor and try to beg for food but it would cost you 1 Day.", "action_results": [{"action": "Drop anchor and try to claim fresh Supplies", "result": "Anchoring in the Passage you lead a party of sailors ashore to meet the two friendly soldiers who garrison the watchtower, each working 12 hour shifts.\n\n\n\"Expedition is underway then?\" one asks you cheerfully. \"I have to say Commander Trapa I don't envy you. I served in the Colony on Burnt Island I've seen those Lapaw come out in those little canoes to inspect us. They look a tough bunch, even with ten ships and three hundred men behind me I wouldn't like to go against them.\"\n\n\n\"Have you any food to spare?\" you ask politely.\n\n\nThe guards cheerfully supply you with a barrel of salted pork which you take back to your ship and thaking them you sail on.", "action_results": [{"action": "South to Trevers Island", "result": "Leaving The Southern Passage behind you continue on your course, occasionally sighting the sails of your fellow officers on the horizon. At one point you overtake Donald Trever's Lucky, which is zig-zagging erratically. \"Rudder broke off on some corral\" Trevers shouts across to you when you sail closer but waves you off when you ask if he needs some help. He is still in sight when you reach the island that was named after him after he spent some time marooned there after one of his previous ship's caught fire and sank. The pleasant tropical island is now inhabited by a small village of colonists who grow crops and fish. You are pleased to see Esme Hale's Merry Company is already anchored there, her crew loading barrels of fish aboard her ship.\n\n\n\"Esme, you will never reach Burnt Island if you stop for food every time you are hungry,\" you shout to her when the Adventurer pulls alongside. Hale laughs.\n\n\n\"What's the point of rushing?\" she asks. \"I'd rather get there in good shape than rush and miss out on all this nice fresh fish. Why don't you come ashore, we're having a goat hunt tomorrow!\"\n\n\nAs you consider your answer you catch your crew looking at you with hopeful eyes, clearly keen to spend a day larking about with Hale's sailors.", "action_results": [{"action": "Drop anchor off Trever's Island", "result": "Dropping anchor you and your Crew go ashore the next morning and join Hale's hunt. Esme is a fine shot and goat after goat falls to her deadly musket balls. The local Colonists don't get too many visitors and are glad to make you welcome though while resting at their village at lunch time you notice work is underway to build a small wooden fort nearby.\n\n\n\"A dozen of them came in canoes one night and killed one of our fishermen,\" one of the colonists explains nervously. \"We had to pluck seventeen arrows out of him.\"\n\n\nYou and Esme exchange frowns and decide it is time to get moving. Loading your fresh goat carcasses on board you both sail on South to the rendezvous at Burnt Island.", "action_results": [{"action": "Burnt Island", "result": "Your short voyage comes to an end when you drop anchor off the island Donald Trevers managed to so thoroughly destroy with fire during his last voyage here. You arrive at almost exactly the same time as Esme Hales's Merry Company and drop anchor near where the wreck of Trevers's previous ship Lady Fortune is still visible beneath the waves. The Sea Ghost is already there and over the next few hours most of the other ships arrive until finally the last one arrives after dark: Trevers's Lucky, still zig-zagging wildly thanks to it's broken rudder. There is a small colony on the island and Queen Anne-Marie arranges for the colonists to supply all of the ships of the War Fleet with a few supplies while her Officers attend a Council aboard her ship the next morning.", "action_results": [{"action": "Burnt Island", "result": "One by one the Commanders of the War Fleet row up to the towering sides of the Monarch of the Sea and ascend rickety ladders up to it's deck. Arriving on deck you find Cuthrew already there, looking more elderly and pale than you remember. Brisk and business-like Finch leads you down to Queen Anne-Marie's cabin where Quarrel, an unpleasant-looking man with a mocking smile is already waiting. You are soon joined by the cousins Mason and Swift and up close you can tell they are related as both have fair hair and pale complexions. Hale, Trevers and finally Freer arrive, up close she is even more attractive than she was in Golden Sands. When you are all assembled Queen Anne-Marie enters and the Council begins.\n\n\n\"The closest Lapau-inhabited island that we know of lies directly Southeast of here,\" she declares. \"The first thing we need to do is sail there and see if the Natives are willing and able to discuss the relations between our two Nations in a meaningful way. When we anchor offshore I will go ashore with one hundred men and humble these hut-dwellers into submission. Commander Cuthrew will command the Fleet during my absence but any of the rest of you who wish to come ashore with me can... remember at all times that we are superior to these Lapau and we must prove it to them.\"\n\n\nFollowing Anne-Marie's speech you are all sent back to your ships and the resupplied War Fleet sails Southeast as one group towards the lands of the Lapau.", "action_results": [{"action": "Meeting the Lapau", "result": "For three days the War Fleet follows a Southeast course until dusk on the third day when they drop anchor offshore.The small tropical island has a large village of wooden huts on a beach and in the dusk you watch the tall and strong-looking semi-clothed Natives gathering on the shoreline to silently inspect you. The next morning a well-crewed longboat containing Queen Anne-Marie sets out from the Monarch of the Sea, as you watch four more boats containing Commanders Quarrel, Swift, Mason and Freer also set off for the shore.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go ashore with the diplomatic mission", "result": "Taking a dozen Sailors into your Longboat you join Queen Anne-Marie and the other Commanders as they lead their men ashore to where a crowd of Natives stand silently waiting. Anne-Marie, dressed in her best clothes with a sword and two new-fangled single-shot \"pistols\" at her belt leads the way in confident strides up the beach. A small group of men move forward to meet her, their elaborately tatoed bodies are naked except for loin cloths and they carry spears and shields. Richard Quarrel calls out a warning to Anne-Marie but she strides on towards them regardless.\n\n\nIt is quickly recognized that neither you nor the Lapau understand one another's language: the Lapau speak in deep, rich, musical voices and though Anne-Marie attempts to use sign language this just seems to cause confusion. Anne-Marie tries presenting gifts like expensive jewellery to the Lapau but after examining them briefly they hand them back. The Lapau offer no gifts in return and as the meeting drags on without either side able to understand the other they mutter among themselves and give you all unfriendly looks. Finally giving up Anne-Marie leads you all back to the boats.\n\n\nReturning to your ships Queen Anne-Marie seems unsure what to do next. She issues no orders except to remain on alert and going down into your cabin in the Adventurer you stay awake for a long time, wondering what will happen next. Finally you drift into an uneasy sleep...", "action_results": [{"action": "A rude awakening", "result": "You are woken in the middle of the night by a scene from the depths of your nightmares.\n\n\nHundreds of screams and shouts fill the air all at once followed by the muffled bangs of musket shots and springing to your feet you race up to deck to find utter pandemonium has engulfed the War Fleet. Hundreds of little one-man canoes surround the Fleet's ten ships like ants around sandwiches and brightly-painted figures are rapidly climbing up onto the decks, jabbing their spears through the sides of the ships or firing arrows up at them. Aboard all the ships men are grappling as spears thrust, swords swing, muskets fire and men are cut down screaming and gurgling to fall to the decks or into the sea.\n\n\nThe Adventurer was not anchored close to the Island and consequently seems to have received little attention but still a dozen Lapau Natives have hauled themselves on deck and are grappling with your Crew, three of your men already lie motionless on the deck. Drawing your sword you order your men to fire their muskets and as guns bang the Lapau Warriors are killed or dive from the ship to the safety of the sea. With the Adventurer secure at least you look round and find things are worse for most of the other ships in the Fleet.\n\n\nA lot worse.\n\n\nCommander Trever's ship Lucky is on fire: blazing fiercely and sinking as the flickering flames light up the silhouettes of men grappling and fighting on her decks. Commander Freer's ship Gambler is also sinking fast: pierced by dozens of spears it's sailors are diving from it's decks into the sea all around. Commander Hale's Merry Company is being swarmed by so many Lapau it seems impossible the ship does not sink under it's wait. A row of several cannons aboard the Monarch of the Sea boom into life but it too is heavily overrun and trying to get to her aid the Indefatigable has also come under heavy attack and a small fire has broken out amidships.\n\n\nNot all is chaos however: the Sea Ghost is under sail and gliding smoothly through the chaos delivering organized volleys of musket fire at the thickest groups of Lapau and the Royal Escort, though still at anchor is also delivering volleys of musket and cannon fire. Anchored nearby, like you the Explorer and Maverick have also only been lightly attacked and are trying to clear their decks for action. As your sailors manage to hoist the anchor the wind fills your sails and the Adventurer glides forward.\n\n\nYou can scarcely believe it: the whole War Fleet has fallen victim to a night attack from hundreds, perhaps even thousands, of deadly spear and bow-armed Lapau Warriors in canoes! Aboard the Adventurer you know your must go to the aid of one of your fellow Commanders: the Monarch of the Sea, Indefatigable and Merry Company are all in need of immediate help and the Lucky and Gambler are sinking already.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sail towards Queen Anne-Marie's embattled ship Monarch of the Sea", "result": "Feeling that the protection of your Queen is your first priority you steer your ship straight towards the towering Monarch of the Sea. Cannons explode madly in the darkness and as you get closer you can see the ship's crew have been driven back to the stern where they are fighting desperately back against their attackers with musket shots and sword points. You spot the distinctively-dressed figure of Anne-Marie calmly aiming and firing muskets at the attackers, which are being loaded and passed to her by two of her sailors.\n\n\nAs you pull alongside your men fire a volley of musket and cannon shots into the Lapau that cuts down most of the great crowd on the main deck. With a cheer Anne-Marie's crew counter-attack and the surviving Lapau abandon the ship, diving back into the sea all around. As you spin the wheel to avoid a collision with Anne-Marie's ship a deafening burst of fire lights up the night. The Lucky has just exploded spectacularly, launching scraps of wood and bodies high into the air. The explosion has completely destroyed the ship and a few moments later the Gambler sinks beneath the waves too. With cheers the Lapu abandon their attack and returning to their canoes they paddle back to their island to celebrate their victory.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Aftermath...", "result": "Dawn illuminates the horrors caused during the night.\n\n\nBodies bob slowly up and down on the gentle waves in all directions as far as the eye can see while wreckage from the sunken Lucky and Gambler litter the ocean. The Monarch of the Sea, Indefatigable and Merry Company have all been seriously damaged and aboard all the ships of the fleet bodies of sailors and Lapau alike are being pitched into the ocean. Occasionally a musket shot rings out as a wounded Lapau is discovered and killed. At noon you and the other surviving officers are summoned to a Council of War aboard the Monarch of the Sea.\n\n\nCommander Donald Trevers is dead, killed along with the rest of his Crew when the Lucky's gunpowder store exploded. Esme Hale is devastated: two thirds of her crew have been killed in the fighting and sitting there white-faced with a bloodied bandage wrapped around a hip wound she looks the very picture of misery. Eva Freer has been wounded too, stabbed in the shoulder as she swam to safety from the sinking Gambler, only a handful of Crew have survived. Anne-Marie and Quarrel have also suffered heavy losses amongst their crew: altogether nearly one hundred men or a third of the War Fleet's manpower have been killed. The fact that the Lapau suffered similar casualties is small consolation.\n\n\n\"None of us expected this attack,\" Anne-Marie says grimly when you have all gathered. \"The Lapau have declared war on us and from now until they surrender we will show them no mercy. We need to make new plans though: this Fleet has been badly damaged and needs to refit and reinforce itself. There is not a danger that the Lapau will attack our colonies. These savages have proven more dangerous than we expected and another battle like last night's fight might destroy our Fleet.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie pauses for a moment. \"I am dividing this Fleet up. Commander Hale and myself will sail back to Golden Sands to get more men and supplies and to have Commander Hale's wound treated. We will be gone about three weeks. In our absence I want you Commander Cuthrew to sail east pst this island and locate other Lapau-occupied islands near here. We must know where their settlements are so we can attack them. There is no one but you I would entrust this mission to.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie glances round at the rest of you. \"Commander Finch, I want you and Commander Quarrel to co-ordinate an attack to destroy all Lapau resistance on this island and convert it into a base from which we can launch our assault on other Lapau Islands. Rely on musket and cannon fire, keep a safe distance and the Natives here will be destroyed. Commanders Swift and Mason, I want you to ensure our colonies are safe: sail with me and Commander Hale as far as Trever's Island and then when he turn north sail west to Sandy Island and then back to here where you will render Commanders Finch and Quarrel any assistance they might need.\"\n\n\nFinally Anne-Marie turns to you and Freer. \"Commander Freer, you will join Commander Trapa aboard the Adventurer, your remaining Crew will be assigned to Commander Hale's ship. You will assist Commander Trapa in any way he sees fit.\"\n\n\nFreer starts to protest angrily but Anne-Marie cuts her short with an angry clap of her hands.\n\n\n\"I have given you an order Commander. It will be obeyed. Commander Trapa... the absence of myself and Commander Cuthrew you will command the Fleet until either myself ot Commander Cuthrew return. Commander Freer will assist you. You can either remain here and co-ordinate the assault on this island with Finch and Quarrel or you can accompany Swift and Mason on their voyage to ensure our Colonies are safe. I am giving you that discretion and I trust you will not let me down.\"\n\n\nFeeling pride at your promotion you promise Anne-Marie she can rely on you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay here and co-ordinate Finch and Quarrel's attack on the island", "result": "After the Council the other five ships of the War Fleet sail off in different directions leaving the Adventurer, Royal Escort and Indefatigable alone off a hostile shore. Between your three crews you have less than eighty men while there are many times that number of Lapau on the island. After a few days of repairing the Indefatigable and ponder the problem you invite the other Commanders aboard to discuss a plan to conquer the island. Finch, Quarrel and Freer all join you in your cabin.\n\n\n\"Our main advantage we have here is our muskets and cannon fire,\" you tell them. \"If we land and keep in disciplined ranks then we can advance on the village using musket and cannon fire to keep the enemy at a distance. After taking the village we can clear the whole island\n\n\n\"That won't help us if they take to their canoes\" Finch points out. \"They could easily escape or even make an attempt to capture our ships.\"\n\n\n\"We can use the ships to surround the island at three points and cut off any escape. If one ship is attacked the other two can sail to help them.\"\n\n\n\"Will you be commanding the land or the sea force?\" Quarrel asks.", "action_results": [{"action": "The land force", "result": "It takes a few days for your Crew to complete all the preparations necessary to make the landing on Village Island. On the day of the assault you, Finch and Quarrel lead your sailors ashore in three longboats. The moment you hit the sand your men quickly form into three ranks, loaded muskets held ready as you advance cautiously on the village. It is eerily quiet. You find the village deserted and move past it into the jungle. You search the whole island for hours but don't find a single Lapau. At some earlier date they must have completely evacuated the island, taking with them all the food they could carry. You do find a small amount which is taken back to your ships.\n\n\nWhen you all lead your Crews back to your ships Captain Freer can't stop laughing when she learns you have painstakingly surrounded and captured a totally uninhabited island. You ignore her because you have still fulfilled your orders and for the next few days your men keep busy knocking down the villager's huts and building a small wooden fort and jetty while you wait for the other ships of the War Fleet to return.", "action_results": [{"action": "Cuthrew's Return", "result": "After a few days of waiting and working on the Fort the War Fleet begins to reassemble, starting with Commander Cuthrew's Sea Ghost which sails up from the Southeast. When she anchors alongside you Cuthrew comes aboard the Adventurer and resumes command of the Fleet.\n\n\n\"Did you find any land?\" you ask the old sailor who nods.\n\n\n\"Some. There's an island to the south which I've seen before full of giant lizards. Southeast of here there's a barren rocky island which contains a village of Lapau. I did not want to sail too far into hostile waters so I guess that rocky island will be our next target.\"\n\n\nYou agree and settle down to wait for the rest of the Fleet.", "action_results": [{"action": "Swift and Mason return", "result": "You are beginning to get concerned about the Supply situation by the time Commanders Swift and Mason return. Having visited all four of your country's Colonies in these waters they report the situation is safe: the Lapau have not attacked any of them which supports your belief that they have withdrawn away to the south. You are keen to continue the attack against the Lapay and all you need now is for Anne-Marie and Hale to arrive and after a few more days they do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Anne-Marie and Hale's Return", "result": "Having made excellent time Queen Anne-Marie and Commander Hale rejoin the War Fleet, restoring it to it's full strength of eight ships. As it turns out they didn't sail all the way back to Golden Sands, only as far as The Southern Passage where ample supplies were waiting for them, Anne-Marie quickly distributes them among the Fleet. With repairs finished to all ships, Hale and Freer's wounds healing nicely and two-hundred strong remaining members of the expedition feeling confident Anne-Marie orders you all aboard the Monarch of the Sea for another Council of War.\n\n\n\"We are ready to take the fight to the enemy now,\" Anne-Marie declares with satisfaction. \"Commander Cuthrew has discovered a Lapau-occupied island to the Southeast so there we shall sail and destroy all the settlements we find there. We will kill all the male warriors and take the women and children prisoner. We must learn from them the locations of their islands and settlements so we can destroy them until they submit to our authority.\"\n\n\nThat evening the War Fleet weighs anchor and sails Southeast to war.", "action_results": [{"action": "To Battle", "result": "The War Fleet sails Southeast for three days and the island sighted by Cuthrew soon comes into sight: it is nothing more than a barren Hill with a few huts nestling on the top; like the Lapau settlement on Village Island it has been abandoned. Queen Anne-Marie summons all her officers to another Council of War, which irritates your companion Eva Freer.\n\n\n\"We might as well sleep in a corner of her cabin she gives us so many orders,\" she grumbles.\n\n\n\"I think it is likely that a Lapau fleet is waiting to fight us,\" Anne-Marie announces when you and the other officers have assembled. \"I intend to lure them into a trap of my own. I will send one or two ships ahead to locate the Lapau islands. If they are attacked they will withdraw back to here, meanwhile our Fleet will wait hidden from sight behind this island. If our decoy ship is pursued we will attack them and use musket and cannon fire to kill the Lapau before they can board us or use their spears... who is willing to be the decoy?\"\n\n\nThere is a moment of silence then Naomi Swift speaks up.\n\n\n\"Bermuda and myself can do it,\" she says and for some reason glances in your direction. \"Our crews are at full strength and our ships are undamaged and ready for action.\n\n\n\"Good. Excellent, the two of you shall sail directly South from here and try to lead any Lapau after you,\" Anne-Marie announces. \"Do any other Officers wish to join you?\"\n\n\nEva nudges your side. \"We should volunteer,\" she whispers.", "action_results": [{"action": "Offer to serve as a decoy alongside Swift and Mason", "result": "Your offer to be a decoy is gladly accepted and the next day the Adventurer, Explorer and Maverick all sail south. By the second day the Hill has faded from sight and a great mass of brown with patches of blue fill the horizon: hundreds and hundreds of canoes are sailing towards you, so many canoes in fact that they almost hide the sea from sight and each one contains a spear or bow-armed Lapau Native. Immediately you change direction and begin sailing back north towards the rest of the Fleet.\n\n\nUnfortunately the wind is against you and the canoes are faster.\n\n\nBy the third day the canoes have come within bow shot range and sailors in the stern fire muskets at them as the faster Lapau rain arrows down on you. The Barren Hill is back in sight and as you and your companions approach the other five ships of the War Fleet sail into sight. This doesn't seem to make the slightest impression on the Lapau, who if anything increase their efforts to catch up with your ships. For every Lapau your men shoot another ten overtake their fallen countryman to gain on you. Inevitably your enemies catch up to the Adventurer.\n\n\nAs well as bombarding your Crew with arrows Lapau warriors now stab their spears into your ship's hull below the waterline to try and sink it or threw their spears up at your crew. Three of your men have been killed and seawater is soon pouring into your ship from dozens of tiny holes stabbed below the waterline. The Explorer and Maverick are under similar attack and a chill goes through you as you see the Maverick list to starboard and start to sink.\n\n\n \n\nTrying to help her cousin Naomi Swift steers the Explorer towards the Maverick, driving straight through a vast crowd of canoes but the Maverick is sinking fast now. Though they are making good speed the rest of the War Fleet is still out of musket range though the Monarch of the Sea is firing her bow cannons.\n\n\n\"We should help them,\" Freer tells you, pointing at the sinking ship.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Commander Swift in trying to rescue the Crew of the Maverick", "result": "Turning towards the Maverick in a sudden burst of speed you push the Adventurer as fast as she will go to try to reach her in time. Before you can get their the ship's deck suddenly slips below the waves leaving a crazy wreckage of wooden debris, swimming men and dozens of canoes. The crew never have a chance: the Lapau stab and hack mercilessly at them in the water and though your men fire a volley of musket shots it only serves to make you a target. The ocean is soon red with blood and floating bodies.\n\n\nThe destruction of the Maverick does at least draw attention away from the Explorer and though taking on water she is able to win her way clear of most of the canoes. Under heavy arrow fire which kills three of your Crew and wound more you turn the Adventurer around and use her to try and protect the damaged ship.with your own vessel. Finally the rest of the War Fleet join the battle and sailing between the Royal Escort and Merry Company you finally reach safety. Joining the rest of the Fleet both you and Naomi Swift turn your ships around to join the advance: like every other Sailor on the Fleet you want revenge for the loss of the Maverick.", "action_results": [{"action": "No Mercy", "result": "The disciplined line of the seven ships of the War Fleet bear down on the hundreds of canoes and the Lapau simply aren't strong enough to overwhelm the prepared and disciplined fire of the Fleet, it's sailors fired up by anger at witnessing the slaughter of Commander Bermuda Mason and her Crew. Over one hundred musket shots cuts down the canoes and as the Lapau flotilla breaks in two to try to outflank and surround the Fleet Anne-Marie orders the ships to drop anchor. More musket volleys decimate the Lapau trying to sail around the Fleet and with a trumpet blast the signal to retreat is given. With at least half their number slaughtered and hundreds of Lapau lying dead or dying in their boats or in the sea the survivors retreat amidst the mocking cheers of your countrymen.\n\n\nCanoes and corpses lie in every direction, the greater part of the Lapau flotilla has been destroyed and there is a real feeling that this victory has given your Fleet the advantage in this War but the casualties have been heavy. Fifty sailors have been killed: all the crew of the Maverick as well as a dozen sailors aboard the Explorer and other casualties throughout the Fleet. Bermuda Mason's mutilated body is fished from the water and her cousin Naomi Swift, who was herself hit in the left arm by an arrow is almost inconsolable with grief. At the Council of War aboard the Monarch of the Sea following the battle she sits shaking like a leaf with tears flooding silently down her face.\n\n\n\"We have lost half our strength so far in this expedition but we have no intention of giving up,\" Anne-Marie declares. \"The power of the Lapau has been broken. From wounded prisoners recovered from the water by Commander Cuthrew we have learnt where the Lapau settlements are: they control a string of nine islands in these waters, two of which we have already secured. It seems this Fleet was a gathering of all the Lapau's strength, we will never again face such odds as we did here today.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie produces a hastily-drawn map. \"Our prisoners inform us that the closest two islands lie south of here. We will proceed in that direction at once. I believe destroying their settlements and capturing their women and children is the best way to force the Lapau to submit and recognize our authority. We will not give up this War until we have forced them to submit or the deaths of our sailors and Commanders Trevers and Mason will count for nothing.\"\n\n\nGrimly the battered Fleet continues south.", "action_results": [{"action": "Onwards", "result": "Continuing south you soon sight a small island covered in thick forest. At least one hundred canoes leave the island traveling south carrying what is clearly the island's population: they easily outrace your much slower ships. With a telescope you can see a few Lapau still moving about onshore so clearly the island has not been completely abandoned. Anchoring offshore Anne-Marie holds another Council of War to discuss the situation.\n\n\n\"There is no question: we must take this island,\" Anne-Marie declares. \"Our prisoners tell us the next island lies to the Southeast. To save time I will take Commanders Hale and Quarrel to capture that place while Commander Cuthrew will co-ordinate Commanders Finch and Swift to secure this island. We will then rendezvous off this island to continue our voyage south. Commander Trapa, you may join whichever half of the Fleet you think would most benefit from your assistance.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Anne-Marie, Hale and Quarrel in sailing east to take the further island", "result": "Parting ways with the Sea Ghost, Royal Escort and Explorer you glide across the sparkling waves with your three companions until you come upon a tropical island, very similar to the previous with a village of huts by the shore. There are no canoes in sight but with a telescope you can see a few Lapau warriors moving near the shoreline. You, Freer, Hale and Quarrel join Anne-Marie in her cabin as she lays out her battle plan.\n\n\n\"We will waste no time with reconnaissance but will land immediately and kill every Lapau warrior we see,\" she declares. \"This Fleet cannot spare the food needed to feed prisoners. Me and Commander Quarrel will land with our crews while Commanders Hale and Freer will remain about the ships to ensure no Lapau escape by sea. I intend to conquer this island swiftly and then rejoin the rest of our fleet. Commander Trapa, you may accompany the land or sea force as you prefer.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the land assault with Anne-Marie and Quarrel", "result": "Immediately after the Council you, Anne-Marie and Quarrel land your Crews on the southern edge of the island, quickly forming a line of soldiers on the beach with muskets held ready. Together you advance cautiously towards the village, it is eerily quiet. The Warriors you saw earlier have vanished into the jungle. Taking possession of the unoccupied village you reluctantly advance together into the jungle to secure the island.\n\n\nYou have not gone far into the thicket when one of your men suddenly yells a warning and fires his musket. A dozen armed warriors spring from the undergrowth, throwing their spears. An explosion of musket fire booms out and the warriors are cut down. \"Kill them,\" Anne-Marie shouts and your sailors run wild, stabbing the warriors to death. A few of your men have been mortally wounded by spears, as have a few of Anne-Marie and Quarrel's crew but the island has been taken.\n\n\nWhen the slaughter is over Anne-Marie leads you all back to the village. \"It seems the Lapau evacuated the island and left these men as a rearguard,\" she muses to you and Quarrel. \"They may be gathering their strength for another attack. We will rejoin the rest of the fleet - in honor of my loyal companion Commander Quarrel I will name this Quarrel Island.\" Quarrel drops down on one knee and with an extravagant gesture kisses Anne-Marie's hand. You turn away in disgust. By that evening you are under sail and on your way to rejoin the rest of the Fleet.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reunion", "result": "The two halves of the Fleet reunite off Forrest Island, both having been successful in their efforts to capture Forrest Island and Quarrel Island. On both small bands of Lapau Warriors waited to ambush the invaders, apparently having been left there solely for that purpose. All the Lapau were killed along with about a dozen of your countrymen altogether and Anne-Marie's feeling at her latest Council of War is that the Lapau are gathering their remaining strength to continue opposing you.\n\n\n\"According to Commander Cuthrew's prisoners there still remain five Lapau islands ahead and the closest is a mountain of snow due south of here. Although we have been reduced to seven ships and less than half our manpower the Fleet is still in good condition and we will make for this snow mountain. However low supplies is starting to become an issue and we need to obtain more if we are to continue safely. Commander Hale believes she has a partial answer to our problem.\"\n\n\nHale clears her throat and speaks. \"During my voyage around the world me and my Crew landed on a snow-covered island which was populated by many penguins which we hunted and used to replenish our food stores. If we sail southwest we should encounter this snowy island where we can hunt and bring back lots of food for the rest of the fleet. After that by turning east should be able to rendezvous with the War Fleet near this snowy mountain.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie nods. \"Very well, any ships who wish to can accompany you.\" Commander Swift volunteers to accompany Hale but everyone else opts to remain with the War Fleet.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Sail Southwest with Hale and Swift to hunt penguins", "result": "Breaking off from the rest of the Fleet, the Adventurer, Merry Company and Explorer sail Southwest. You notice the temperature drop the further south you can go but despite the decreasing voyage this is a pleasant part of the voyage because every evening you have Esme Hale, Naomi Swift and Taylor Freer join you in your cabin for dinner. The three attractive adventurers are good company but you can't help noticing Swift seems to glance at you a lot when she thinks you aren't looking. One evening Hale takes you to one side with a smile.\n\n\n\"You know I think Commander Swift might like you,\" she tells you. You laugh but Hale shakes her head. \"No, it's true. Clever ladies like me can tell these things. And another thing, is it just me or do you seem just a little sweet on Eva Freer?\"\n\n\nFor some reason you don't feel like laughing anymore. \"I don't know what you mean.\"\n\n\nHale shrugs. \"I'll tell you another secret too, my island is a bit further south than I might have led Anne-Marie to believe. I just wanted to get away from her, Quarrel and the others for a while. We'll change our course due South now and should arrive there in a few days.\"\n\n\nAdjusting course you glide on towards your destination.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Land of the Penguins", "result": "As particles of snow drift through the air a snowy island comes into sight. \"This is it,\" Hale declares triumphantly and in a great hurry you go ashore but it quickly becomes clear something is very wrong. Hundreds of penguins lie all across the island, all slain by arrows or spears: clear evidence that the Lapau have been here and recently to destroy any possible food supplies for your Fleet. Fortunately because the low temperature has frozen the meat much of it is still edible and you are able to replenish some of the Food you have consumed so far in this voyage but the butchery of the penguins is a bitter blow when you were relying on their meat. Leaving the island behind you sail due East to report the bad news to Anne-Marie.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Snow Mountain", "result": "When the two halves of the War Fleet rejoin beneath the icy pinnacle of a great Snow Mountain there is bad news on both sides. Anne-Marie's half of the Fleet were attacked by Lapau warriors who braved the icy waters to swim out and ambush the ships, killing a dozen sailors throughout the Fleet before being repulsed. Hale's expedition successfully rediscovered the island she had visited previously only to find Lapau had already slaughtered the penguin population. Some of the frozen meat is still edible and is distributed throughout the Fleet but the War Fleet as a whole is now facing serious supply and manpower shortages.\n\n\n\"The Lapau appear to be conducting a scorched earth policy,\" Anne-Marie declares, \"whittling down our numbers with ambushes while stripping the islands ahead of all edible foods and supplies. Only four hostile islands remain ahead so if we move as fast as we can we can still conquer and subdue these remaining islands and reach our nearest supply cache on the Corral Cabin Island before this Fleet is destroyed. But we will prevail!\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie pauses. \"According to Commander Cuthrew's prisoners a triangle of three islands lie before us. To the Southwest is a small tropical island and to the Southeast is a low rocky island, both are just a few days sail away. About a week's voyage directly south is a Corral Mountain, this will be our rendezvous point. I am dividing the Fleet again: Commander Cuthrew will take Commanders Hale and Swift Southwest to attack the tropical island while I shall take Commanders Finch and Quarrel Southeast to attack the rocky island. We will rendezvous at the Corral Mountain directly south of here. Officers: be wary of ambushes. The Lapau are withdrawing south, gathering their strength as they go and they surely intend to weaken us further before destroying us in one final attack so be careful! Commander Trapa, you can accompany whichever force you prefer.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Cuthrew, Hale and Swift in attacking the tropical island", "result": "Once again the fleet divides and you sail Southwest towards the tropical island. It soon comes into sight and as expected it appears deserted. One unusual thing is noticeable though: a burnt wreck of a ship lies sunk just offshore.Startled you recognize her as the Hope, a vessel commanded by a trader called Ann Lovett, one of your rival competitors during The Great Race to circumnavigate Magellan. She vanished during the voyage and from the looks of it she stumbled upon the Lapau who killed her and burnt her ship.\n\n\nCuthrew looks as weary as ever as you Hale, Swift and Freer join him in his cabin aboard the Sea Ghost. \"Commanders Hale and Swift, you will take your crews ashore to ensure this island is unoccupied. Be wary of ambushes and if you can see if you can discover some trace of what befell Captain Lovett and her crew. Commander Freer and myself will remain offshore. Commander Trapa, you may accompany who you choose.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the landing party", "result": "Going ashore you and your Crew together with Hale and Swift advance cautiously across the beach towards the village. You expect an ambush to come from the jungle but when it does it comes in an astonishing form: musket shots ring out knocking down several men including three of yours. Naomi Swift is hit in the right leg and falls to the ground near you. \"Return fire,\" you shout as a musket ball whizzes past your head and your men fire a return volley. \"Reload, reload,\" you shout but as you do you see a dozen figures fleeing from the trees. You and Hale lead your crews in pursuit but they dive into the sea. Using bamboo tubes lashed together with grass as breathing tubes they vanish under the waves and escape.\n\n\nYou are startled by the evolving tactics of your adversary and have suffered more casualties in securing another island. Naomi Swift's wound is serious and she is unable to walk. Taken back aboard the Explorer she has the musket ball removed. In agony with pain and confined to her bunk she is unable to command her ship so Eva Freer assumes temporary command, you feel a strange and painful twinge in your chest as she leaves your ship. Convincing yourself it is only because you have become to used to seeing her every day you obey Cuthrew's orders to weigh anchor and steer the Adventurer Southeast towards the rendezvous. By now the hold is almost bare of provisions.", "action_results": [{"action": "The expedition continues", "result": "When the War Fleet reunites in the shadow of The Corral Mountain there is much news to share, most of it's bad. Cuthrew's expedition captured the island but were attacked by musket-wielding Lapau which suggests that somehow the Lapau have gotten ahold of some of your countrymen's weapons and learnt how to use them. Anne-Marie's expedition also succeeded in capturing the island after some fierce cave-based fighting. Casualties are high now: Naomi Swift has been shot through the leg and can't walk forcing Eva Freer to take command of the Explorer while Thomas Finch has been speared through the arm and is also in great pain. The Fleet is down to just over one hundred men, a third of it's starting strength, and only has enough food left for another week or so.\n\n\nThe sight of The Corral Mountain also causes your sprits to plunge. The Lapau seem to have finally dug in, fortifying themselves on the Mountain's steep slopes and hundreds of warriors are moving among the natural cover of the corral crags. The Mountain is so tall you cannot even elevate your ship's cannons to fire more than a quarter of the way up the slope and an assault by your sailors, even with covering musket fire, will surely trigger a rain of spears and arrows from above. Despite it all Anne-Marie remains confident.\n\n\n\"The Lapau have clearly gathered their last remaining strength here to fortify this place,\" she announces. \"After we capture this place they have only one more island to shelter in, one more bolt hole. Once we take this Mountain an end to the war is in sight. This mountain must be taken in one assault, one swift charge to overrun their position. My Commanders, you have all fought with tremendous ability and courage so far in this voyage, now I ask who will lead this attack?\"\n\n\nShe looks round at her officers, at Naomi Swift who has her arm in a sling and her leg in bandages and had to be hauled aboard the Monarch of the Sea in a canvas bag to attend this council, at Thomas Finch who also has his arm in a sling and at Esme Hale and Eva Freer who have also been wounded so far in this voyage. The sycophantic Richard Quarrel remains silent and finally it is the ailing and grey-bearded Tobias Cuthrew who speaks.\n\n\n\"My Crew is the strongest of those that remain,\" he declares. \"If this mountain must be taken then I will lead the attack.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie looks at her deputy with great respect. \"One half of our men must advance up the Mountain while the other half give them covering fire. Who else will charge these slopes?\"\n\n\n\"If it shortens this war and saves our lives me and my Crew will advance though I'd rather do anything other than this,\" Hale says reluctantly.\n\n\n\"I will go too,\" Freer announces. \"I don't expect this assault will succeed unless I am there.\"\n\n\nYou feel a sudden jolt inside you as you realize the tomboyish adventuress who you have grown so close to will deliberately be putting herself in harm's way.\n\n\n\"Is there no one else?\" Anne-Marie asks glancing pointedly at Quarrel who looks at", "action_results": [{"action": "Volunteer to join the assault on the slopes", "result": "At dusk you, Tobias Cuthrew, Esme Hale and Eva Freer and your Crews row ashore amidst a hail of spears. Moving with a speed you did not think you were capable of you scramble up the steep slope. Muskets flash behind you as Anne-Marie, Thomas Finch and Richard Quarrel lead the second wave ashore to give you covering fire. A spear plunges down in front of you and chunks of corral break off in your hands as you scramble up the steepest parts of the slope on all fours. All around you men are falling screaming and as some Lapau begin firing muskets the assault grounds to a halt, sailors seeking shelter in whatever cover they can find.\n\n\nSeeing that the assault has halted Esme Hale springs to her feet and stands tall amidst the storm of flying spears and musket balls. \"Come on my boys,\" she shouts. \"Let's take the top!\" A moment later a spear strikes her full in the center of her chest, the bloodied point emerging from her back. Time seems to stand still as she falls slowly backwards, her body skidding down the mountainside. There seems to be a moment of stunned silence and then with a collective roar of rage sailors spring to their feet.\n\n\nIf anything could have electrified you and your countrymen it was the death of the most popular officer in the Fleet. Screaming with rage like the rest of your countrymen you can think of nothing but getting up the mountain and tearing apart with your bare hands the men who have murdered your friend. Eva Freer is springing up the slope ahead of you when she spins on the spot and goes down: shot through the right shoulder. You falter momentarily to check she is ok but she has fallen behind the shelter of a rock and impatiently gestures for you to get moving.\n\n\nA musket ball knocks your sword flying from your hand and bare-handed you spring on up the slope. Incredibly, despite his age, Cuthrew is ahead of you and he leads his sailors in slaughtering the Lapau warriors. As they flee from their positions they are pursued and butchered without mercy by the vengeful sailors. With the Mountain won and sickened by the sight of the slaughter you turn away and stagger down the slope to where Hale is lying motionless on her back, her eyes staring sightlessly at the sky.\n\n\n\"We can't do anything for her,\" a voice tells you nearby and you see Freer is dragging herself over, trailing blood. The sight of Freer immediately drives other thoughts from your mind and against her protests you hurry over and lift her up in your hands. You carry her down to where the wounded are gathering on the shore near a beaming Anne-Marie who stares up at the mountain top where Cuthrew has ordered your country's banner to be raised.\n\n\n\"Now we have won this War,\" she tells you triumphantly.\n\n\n\"Esme Hale is dead,\" you tell her bluntly. \"So I couldn't care less.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie stares at you as you walk past her and carry Freer to the safety of a boat back to the Adventurer. Casualties are remarkably light and only three of your Crew have been killed in the fighting, though many more are injured.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Friend's Funeral", "result": "That night the mood aboard the Fleet is mutinous as the bodies of those who died during the day's battle are consigned to the deep. Only twenty or so men died but three quarters of those who sailed with the Fleet are now dead. When Esme Hale's body, still beautiful in death, is dropped into the ocean a fierce outcry goes up, many men are crying and cries of \"murderer\" and \"tyrant\" are shouted at Anne-Marie. Quarrel tries to calm the crowd but someone fires a musket at him which fortunately (for him) wasn't loaded. Taking the hint Anne-Marie retreats to her cabin with you and her other remaining officers.\n\n\nHere the mood is scarcely better. Eva Freer and Naomi Swift are staring at her with real hatred, white-faced from the pain of their wounds. Thomas Finch is sitting to one side grimly staring out of a window. Even Richard Quarrel seems to have nothing to say as he nervously fidgets with a ring in his hands. It falls to Tobias Cuthrew, white-bearded like Old Father Time and with his face still blackened from musket smoke to say what you are all thinking.\n\n\n\"My Queen three of us are now dead and three of us wounded. This Fleet has lost three ships, has less than a week's worth of food and has lost three quarters of it's men. One more battle will destroy this Fleet. If you keep going this Fleet will come apart. You must seek terms with the Lapau.\"\n\n\n\"Who are you to talk to your Queen like this?\" Anne-Marie snaps. \"We will keep going until the Lapau surrender. We have not come this far and suffered so much to roll over and beg when we are on the verge of victory.\"\n\n\n\"No we will not,\" you tell her quietly and look up at her. \"Will you continue until we are all dead? If you do not seek terms of peace when we arrive at the Lapau's last island then all will be well. But me and my Crew will not fight.\"\n\n\n\"Mine neither,\" Freer says. \"Nor mine,\" Swift adds. \"I am finished fighting,\" Finch agrees. Quarrel glances round the group looking like a rat caught in a trap and quickly shakes his head. \"Queen, you have heard your officers,\" Cuthrew says quietly.\n\n\n\"You fools,\" Anne-Marie says with icy venom. \"None of you appreciate what I am trying to do. I am establishing an empire that will last for hundreds of years to come. What are a few lives now compared to greatness in the future? Safety and security cost lives: if we do not take lands the Lapau will take them and one day be so numerous they sill snuff us out like a finger crushes an ant! Do you want to see our small Kingdom of Three Islands surrounded by vicious war-loving Lapau? I know the road is difficult and we will lose many friends on the way but we must be strong! One more week, that is all I ask.\"\n\n\n\"My Queen, you must realize not everyone is like you,\" Freer tells her.\n\n\nThe next morning you sail south from the scene of such terrible fighting.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Homeland of the Lapau", "result": "Starving and short-handed the War Fleet limps on. Perhaps as a bribe Anne-Marie places Eva Freer in command of Hale's ship Merry Company where mutiny is thickest. Freer promptly changes the ship's name to Esme's Joy and despite moving with a painful limp she provides the perfect leadership the five remaining sailors on that ship need, telling them their only chance is to get home alive is to keep heading south and reminding them they are approaching waters she and they have sailed before. Naomi Swift has herself carried up in a chair to the quarterdeck of the Explorer to resume command of her ship.\n\n\nFinally you reach the last island of the Lapau, their Capital which they call Matan. A terrible sight awaits you: hundreds of canoes wait silently before the island filled with warriors ready for one last battle to save their homeland. Anne-Marie remains out of sight in her cabin as to the relief of you and every sailor on the ship Commander Quarrel and a few sailors row a boat towards the waiting fleet waving a white flag. A canoe so big it holds a dozen warriors comes out to meet him and accompanies him back to the Monarch of the Sea. You and the other officers hurry aboard to meet your adversaries.\n\n\nThe first Lapau aboard after Quarrel is a blond-haired lady who looks vaguely familiar to you. She is followed by a handsome young man in war paint and a grey-haired tough old warrior whose bare chest is covered in old scars. Anne-Marie has finally emerged from her cabin in her finest clothes and waits surrounded by you and her other officers. The blond-haired woman's eyes take in Finch, Swift and Freer's wounds before her eyes settle on Anne-Marie.\n\n\n\"Greetings to you Queen Anne-Marie,\" she says, speaking your language perfectly. \"I am Ann Lovett, formerly Captain of the Hope and now honored to serve the Royal House of the Lapau.\"\n\n\nYou start, as does Anne-Marie and Cuthrew. The three of you recognize her as one of your fellow rivals in The Great Race to sail around the world of Magellan some five months ago. She was presumed lost but now it seems she has been found and adopted by the Lapau.\n\n\n\"I have come here to translate the words of Al-Capu, King of the Lapau and of his son Al-Balu,\" she says gesturing to the tough old warrior and his handsome son. The King of the Lapau speaks in the deep ponderous tones of his people while Lovett provides a translation.\n\n\n\"Al-Capu knows your heart Queen. He is tired of fighting. Many of his warriors are killed. You have taken all his villages and all his lands but Matan. Al-Capu is tired of the war you have waged upon him and his heart is sad. If you leave him in peace he will fight with you no more.\"\n\n\n\"Al-Capu promises not to attack our islands if we do not attack his?\" Anne-Marie asks.\n\n\n\"It was never the intention of Al-Capu to harrass your colonies,\" Lovett replies. \"Those were the actions of ambitious petty chiefs and young warriors. If you leave the Lapau alone they will leave you alone.\"\n\n\n\"That is not enough,\" Anne-Marie replies. \"I too have lost too many warriors. We demand land as recompense.\"\n\n\nAl-Capu considers this when Lovett translates and gestures to his fleet of canoes.\n\n\n\"If they fight with you perhaps you will win or perhaps the Lapau will triumph,\" Lovett translates. \"Either way many will die and both of us will lose. But if you sail away we will have a lasting peace which will be sweeter than any victory in battle. Trade routes can be established and our people can learn much from each other.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie tries one last time. \"Your warriors attacked our Fleet without warning when we first visited you in peace,\" she insists. \"We deserve something at least for that.\"\n\n\nAl-Capu and Al-Balu talk rapidly among themselves for some time before Lovett what they say.\n\n\n\"Prince Al-Balu was leading his annual tour of his kingdom with his escort when he learned of your ships off his father's lands. Perhaps his attack on you was over hasty but he feared you meant to attack his father's lands. To ensure a lasting peace between our two peoples King Al-Capu will give his son Al-Balu and myself to you as hostages to live for one year and will now provide your Fleet with food to help you return to your own lands. In this way we hope to ensure a lasting peace.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie hesitates, glances around at the unfriendly faces of you and her other Commanders and finally nods and sighs.\n\n\n\"Let it be so.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Matan", "result": "When news that peace has been agreed spreads throughout the War Fleet the cheering is continous and quickly prompts Anne-Marie to retreat to her cabin, quickly followed by Quarrel. Ann Lovett remains aboard the ship and chats affably with you and Cuthrew while Prince Al-Balu stands awkwardly by while his father returns to Matan to tell his own people of the peace agreement. The Lapau break into song, stamp their feet and wave their spears and within an hour dozens of canoes are speeding out from the island, conveying welcome supplies to the Fleet. All the food the Lapau took from their islands has been gathered here and is swiftly shared out among the ships of the Fleet. You make sure the Adventurer receives as much food as her holds can contain.\n\n\nAnne-Marie emerges from her cabin that afternoon and using the shaky premise of her hostages and the food delivery claims this war has ended in victory while Lovett later tells you in private the Lapau regard it as a victory because the War Fleet is leaving their lands never to return and a lasting peace has been established - despite their fierce appearence Lovett insists, slightly unconvincingly, that the Lapau are basically a peaceful people. Either way no one seems to have won in this war which has cost many good lives, foremost among them Donald Trevers, Bermuda Mason and Esme Hale.\n\n\nThat evening over a dinner aboard the Monarch of the Sea Lovett tells how she was captured by the Lapau on the tropical island where Swift was shot and kept by the Lapau so they could learn about your culture. The next morning the War Fleet is resupplied and ready to return to The Kingdom of the Three Islands and Anne-Marie summons you and the other officers aboard her ship for one last Council.\n\n\n\"The voyage home is safe,\" she announces. \"The waters south and west of here are mostly known to us and it will take approximately two weeks to return to Golden Sands. I propose that the Fleet splits up and returns to The Three Islands on separate to ensure we explore this area as much as possible, the first of us to bring his ship safely home will have the honor of bringing news of our success to our people. I recommend following a Southwest course for one week and then turning South but I have absolute trust in your skills.\"\n\n\nAfter such a long voyage you have little enthusiasm for more risks but as you are leaving the cabin Naomi Swift hobbles after you awkwardly on crutches. \"Cleo?\" she calls out to you. \"There is something I would like to talk to you about. Can you please sail South of here so no one else is around and I can come aboard the Adventurer and have a private talk with you?\" Wondering what the talk could be about you give a non-committal answer. Returning aboard the Adventurer you watch the War Fleet start to break up as it leaves Matan and most of the ships turn Southwest except for the Explorer and Freer's Esme's Joy which turn South.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sail Southwards to talk to Swift", "result": "Traveling south across the sparkling water you are pleased to have finally escaped Anne-Marie's dictatorial command and you soon catch up with the Explorer and Esme's Joy and pull alongside so their Commanders can join you for dinner. Naomi and Eva come aboard looking like the outpatients of a hospital: Eva is still limping and Naomi still needs crutches to get about but all of you are glad the voyage is nearly over.\n\n\n\"We should not have gone so far,\" Eva says firmly. \"Queen Anne-Marie is a tyrant.\"\n\n\nYou are captivated by the attractive tomboy's conversation throughout the dinner and it is only when the meal is over that you realize Naomi has hardly said a word. When you ask if she is ok she nods distractedly. Later when Eva has returned to her ship Naomi hangs back waiting nervously. When you open your mouth to ask her what is wrong the strong-willed adventuress suddenly hobbles closer and kisses you wion the mouth!\n\n\n\"I care for you and you care for Eva so that is that,\" she declares suddenly pulling away. \"After Bermuda died I thought I would never know happiness again and then I got to know you! I just wanted you to know how much I cared and how I know we can never be together.\" She turns and hobbles out of the room leaving you stunned. It takes you a minute or two to recover your wits and follow her out onto deck but she has already left. You hear someone call your name and turn startled to find Eva is still on board the Adventurer.\n\n\n\"Are you alright Leo?\" she asks you looking amused. \"You look shaken.\"\n\n\n\"Naomi... er\" you mumble trying to work out how to phrase this.\n\n\n\"Kissed you did she?\" Eva asks, still with that mocking grin. \"I thought she might. She looked like she wanted to. Did you tell her you didn't care for her because you were so in love with me?\"\n\n\n\"Eva!\" you exclaim. Everyone seems to know your own heart better than you!\n\n\n\"Isn't it obvious?\" Eva asks. \"You probably haven't even noticed but most everything you do is with one eye on my reaction. You're a good friend Leo but let's not get stupid about things alright?\"\n\n\nWith that she turns and walks away towards the gangplank back to her ship leaving you standing open-mouthed on the deck. Later during a sleepless night you reflect on what you have learned tonight and realize that perhaps during the voyage you could have been a little kinder towards Naomi.By dawn there is no sign of the Explorer or Esme's Joy so you turn the Adventurer Southwest towards the Northern Passage and home.", "action_results": [{"action": "Food for Thought", "result": "As the Adventurer skims across the sparkling water you notice pieces of corral floating in the sea occasionally, a sure sign you are approaching The Great Reef and your homeland! You also haul something even more unusual from the ocean: a net full of struggling fish! The net must have been lost by a fishing vessel somewhere nearby, surely belonging to one of your countrymen. Your men are thrilled and enjoy a fish fry as well as outfitting the Adventurer with enough food for several days but you reflect bitterly there were times in the past when this food would have been much more welcome rather than now when you have plenty to eat. Continuing Southwest you finally arrive at The Northern Passage.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Northern Passage", "result": "You feel a great sense of relief as you sail through the narrow breach in The Great Reef called The Northern Passage, the real border of your homeland, The Three Islands.On your last voyage you were attacked by a treacherous Captain as you sail in the opposite direction but that man is now dead and this is your gateway home. On the Reef a small watchtower has been built and if you want you can halt here and request supplies, alternatively two of your home islands Amethyst and Onyx lie to the Southwest and Southeast respectively.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stop and request supplies", "result": "Dropping anchor you go ashore to be greeted by the men at the watchtower.\n\n\n\"Fleet's returning home then?\" one asks cheerfully. \"Where's the rest of you?\"\n\n\n\"We're some of it,\" you tell him wearily. \"What's left of the rest is coming along soon.\"\n\n\n\"Many new lands been conquered?\" the man asks, determined to be cheerful.\n\n\n\"None. We have got two new friends thought.\"\n\n\nThe man frowns. \"What happened on this voyage Commander Trapa?\"\n\n\n\"You'll soon find out when Anne-Marie tells you all,\" you tell him wearily. \"Please load what supplies you can aboard my ship.\"\n\n\nWith fresh supplies on board you sail on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Southwest to Amethyst", "result": "It is nice to see Amethyst again, a busy little port that builds ships for your country. Your arrival provokes a surge of activity along the waterfront but anchoring offshore you do not visit the island; so close to home and with ample provisions you have no intention to stop and meet the widows of your sailors who are not returning on the quay. The next morning a gentle breeze fills your sails and turning Southeast you continue on towards Golden Sands and home.", "action_results": [{"action": "Going home", "result": "Finally as the beautiful shores of Golden Sands come into sight you feel an indescribable relief at coming home tempered with the grim certainty that in the future you will have to embark on more dangerous and difficult voyages into the unknown. You have made good time but are you the first Commander of the War Fleet to bring their ship back to Golden Sands?", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to find out", "result": "Swift and speedy throughout the voyage it is no surprise that you and the Adventurer are the first to return to Golden Sands. A silent crowd waits on the quay as you descend as you go ashore and putting the best possible spin on the War declare that the War Fleet has been victorious in eight out of nine battles and skirmishes with the Lapau earning valuable hostages and recognition of trade routes and national boundaries. The people cheer as you mutter in an unheard undertone that over two hundred of the Fleet's sailors lost their lives including three of the Fleet's most likable officers. Over the next few days Anne-Marie and the others return until within a week all the surviving ships of the War Fleet are back in Golden Sands.\n\n\nYou have earned 1 Score Point.", "action_results": [{"action": "And at the end...", "result": "When the last ship (Captain Quarrel's Indefatigable) has returned to Golden Sands on Day 85 Anne-Marie gives a victory feast in honor of all the survivors of the War Fleet. Fresh promotions are conferred: Ann Lovett and Prince Al-Balu are given the honorary rank of Commander while you, Finch, Swift, Freer, Quarrel, Cuthrew and Anne-Marie herself are all promoted to the rank of Commodore. As a Commodore with royal approval all of you can now independently command fleets of ships.\n\n\nAt the Victory Feast Anne-Marie spends most of her time talking to Lovett and Al-Balu leaving you free to make awkward but stilted conversation with Swift, Freer and Cuthrew, the memory of your rebellion against Anne-Marie on the high seas still fresh in your minds. Cuthrew is unusually talkative.\n\n\n\"I have been talking to Prince Al-Balu with Commander Lovett's assistance,\" he tells you all in an undertone. \"It seems the Lapau and ourselves are not the only great civilization in these waters. There is apparently a third, a nation the Lapau claim are also armed with muskets and appear as technologically advanced as ourselves.\"\n\n\n\"Well no doubt Anne-Marie won't rest until they are all dead,\" you comment bitterly.\n\n\nCuthrew sighs. \"That's the problem with exploration Leo,\" he tells you. \"It is like opening a door at a zoo where you only get to find out what animal is inside the room after you've opened the door permanently. If you are not lucky the animal might prove to be much stronger than you.\"\n\n\nHe glances nervously at Anne-Marie and suddenly hisses. \"Don't trust that woman for a moment. She means to have the whole world of Magellan by force or not at all. The time for peaceful sailors like me are passing.\"\n\n\n\"What's all the whispering about?\" Anne-Marie asks suddenly. \"We should be cheerful for we return victorious. You must not become too comfortable though! My friend Saphia Dancer informs me that voyages to the west have uncovered some interesting communications with a previously unknown nation. More uncharted waters await for us to explore! Enjoy your rest now my officers for you have earned it but I expect I will be needing your services again very soon.\"\n\n\nYou roll your eyes and glance across the table. Eva Freer is staring at Anne-Marie with such venom that if looks could kill Anne-Marie would be dead already. Looking away you meet the eyes of Naomi Swift who is watching you sadly. She glances away briefly then looks back and smiles. Raising her fingers to her lips she kisses them softly, reaches across the table and takes your cold hand in her warm one. Your grip tightens as you realize in the future you will need the help of friends like her and Eva more than ever now that Esme is gone.\n\n\nFor it is certain that very soon you and the crew of the Adventurer will sail again...", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Southeast to Onyx", "result": "Reaching the peaceful little agricultural island of Onyx for some reason you feel strangely guilty that you have survived to return home when so many of your men didn't. It feels strange spending a night peacefully at anchor offshore without having to worry about spear-armed blood-thirsty warriors climbing aboard and killing everyone they find. The next morning you raise the anchor without landing and turn Southwest towards Golden Sands and home.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Follow the rest of the Fleet Southwest", "result": "Sailing Southwest you keep most of the rest of the War Fleet in sight for a few days until most of them slip but of sight. The only one still in sight when you sight a low sandy island after a few days is Anne-Marie's Monarch of the Sea. She gives the island an extremely wide berth before continuing her voyage to the Southwest. Coming closer you see the island is completely bare except for several ominous-looking wooden crosses sticking up out of the sand.", "action_results": [{"action": "Spend a day landing to investigate these crosses", "result": "Dropping anchor you lead a party of sailors ashore to investigate the strange crosses. Almost immediately you learn you have made a dangerous mistake: you and your companions plunge through the sand into a thick gloop lying just beneath the surface! You and most of your companions struggle out but three of your men are sucked beneath the sands never to be seen again. Cursing bitterly to have lost men after the fighting has ended you return to the Adventurer and continue on Southwest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Corral Cabin", "result": "As the Adventurer glides across the blue expanse of the ocean a familiar shape comes into sight: a stack of corral jutting up from the sea with a small cabin perched atop it, the flag of The Three Islands dancing in the breeze above it. This is the first colony founded by your people beyond the Great Reef and you know for a fact that the cabin atop it is permanently manned by four of your countrymen who will almost certainly have a surplus of food. They also guard a small book inside the cabin which is signed by the Captain of every ship that sails by, if you wanted you could land here and pick up more supplies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Spend a day landing at the Corral Cabin", "result": "Anchoring off the Corral Cabin you go ashore and are met by the four settlers there, all anxious to hear about your adventures. You give them a brief account before going inside the Cabin itself while the settlers transport surplus food to your ship. You glance through the book on the table which was originally the idea of a Captain called John Dancer to record the names of all those who sailed into the great unknown. Flicking to the front page you find some familiar signatures of Captains who raced against you during The Great Race: Dancer himself, Anne-Marie back when she was still a Princess, Esme Hale (that signature causes a painful pang), Rosemary Cleaver and Jack Spratt. Apart from Anne-Marie all those Captains are dead now. Feeling somewhat saddened you return to your ship and continue south.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain below to provide covering fire", "result": "You elect to be among those who stay at the base of the mountain and provide covering fire. At dusk the assault begins with Tobias Cuthrew, Esme Hale and Eva Freer leading the first wave of attackers ashore while you, Anne-Marie, Thomas Finch and Richard Quarrel lead the second wave to provide covering fire. Your Crew spread out to form a line at the base of the mountain but your men are in almost as much danger as those charging up the slope as spears rain down by the hundreds, musket balls blast sailors's skulls to pieces and occasionally countrymen fall from the steep slopes above, breaking their bodies on the sharp corral.\n\n\nIt is a terrible sight and you see your countrymen charging up the slope halt and begin to waver and for a terrible moment you are certain that this attack will be thrown back. At that moment a figure you recognize as Esme Hale springs to her feet and stands tall amidst the chaos all around her. A spear hits her in the chest and she topples backwards. You give an animalistic cry of rage which is echoed by every one of your countrymen on the Mountain. Unstoppable as a rising tide your countrymen resume their surge up the mountainside.\n\n\nYou watch as your comrades hack their way upwards, slaughtering Lapau left, right and center until their line breaks and a party of sailors led by Tobias Cuthrew reach the summit. You beam and join the cheering but your grin fades from your face as you see Eva Freer being carried down the mountainside by two of her sailors, her right shoulder shattered by a musket ball. As you hurry towards her she waves you away and assures you she's fine.\n\n\nMoments later she is followed by a somber procession of six sailors bearing Esme Hale's body between them. Your friend's head hangs back, her beautiful long hair skimming over the jagged corral and blood drips from the spear in her chest. You sit on a rock and watch as the procession passes Anne-Marie, Quarrel and Finch. Anne-Marie lowers her head, Quarrel looks away and Finch draws his sword, casts it into the sea and silently walks away.\n\n\nThe battle has been won but at this cost. Remarkably casualties have been extremely light and only a few of your men have been killed but one has died who can never be replaced.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain offshore", "result": "You remain aboard the Adventurer with Eva Freer watching as Swift and Hale lead their crews ashore. \"Here it comes,\" Freer mutters and a moment later a volley of musket shots ring out but to your surprise they come not from the advancing sailors but from Lapau warriors hidden in the trees. You see a dozen figures break cover and race towards the sea and immediately turn the Adventurer towards them and shout for your crew to be ready with their muskets but this time the Lapau outwit you: using long tubes of bamboo lashed together end to end with grass they vanish under the waves, their breathing tubes almost impossible to find.\n\n\nThe island has been captured but at the cost of another dozen casualties including Naomi Swift who has been hit by a musket ball in the right thigh. She is taken back aboard the Explorer where she is operated on but she is so badly wounded she cannot walk and is unable to command her ship. Eva Freer temporarily assumes command and you feel strangely clenched up inside as she leaves the Adventurer, you have got used to having her around and feel very sad to see her leave. Cuthrew orders his four-ship half of the fleet to sail Southeast and you obediently sail towards the Corral Mountain, your supplies running dangerously low.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Join Anne-Marie, Quarrel and Finch in attacking the rocky island", "result": "With a distinct feeling of deja vu you sail Southeast with Anne-Marie, Freer, Finch and Quarrel and soon catch sight of rocky island. It has a grim and desolate look about it and as you approach you see spear-armed warriors darting in and out of caves on the island, which may well be connected with each other. You don't like the look of the island at all and judging from the faces of your companions when you assemble in Anne-Marie's cabin they don't either.\n\n\n\"We need to take this island which means we'll have to clear out each cave systematically,\" she announces. \"Commanders Quarrel and Finch, you will take your crews ashore and carefully scour the caves, killing all you find within, while Commander Freer and I will remain offshore with the ships to prevent escape.\"\n\n\n\"Why don't we just ignore this island and sail on?\" Freer asks wearily. \"That way more of our countrymen won't need to die.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie gives Freer a cold glare. \"The Lapau would take that as a sign of weakness,\" she declares. \"As would I. Commander Trapa, who will you accompany?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the landing force", "result": "You, Quarrel, Finch and nearly forty sailors land on the island and begin working your way through the caves. The fighting is bloody: frequently spears fly out of dark openings and return fire rarely hits a target. Your sailors take to sticking their muskets around cave entrances and firing blindly inside in an effort to kill anyone who might be hiding within. More than once a hidden warrior will spring forward and run a startled sailor through with a spear. Finally the last warrior on the island is killed but a dozen sailors lie dead including three of your men.\n\n\nAmong the many casualties is Thomas Finch, speared through the right arm by a hidden warrior and though in great pain he insists on retaining command of the Royal Escort. In recognition of his sacrifice Anne-Marie names the island in his honor, which seems to bring him scant consolation for his wounded limb, and with another island secured she orders the Fleet to sail Southwest towards the Corral Mountain and your rendezvous.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Remain offshore", "result": "Knowing better than to risk your remaining sailors' lives in what will surely be dangerous cave fighting you remain offshore and watch the ensuing action from the deck of the Monarch of the Sea with Anne-Marie and Eva Freer. Much of the fighting is hidden but musket shots ring out frequently and a steady stream of bodies are conveyed to the shore. At your side Freer is drumming her fingers impatiently on the rail and you're not surprised when she suddenly snaps at Anne-Marie.\n\n\n\"Is it worth it?\" she demands. \"Lives for land? Or the fact it isn't even our land to begin with?\"\n\n\n\"You don't know what you're talking about,\" Anne-Marie says indifferently. \"Yes, we might lose one or two sailors here but then we have this island for all of time and think how much greater our population will be if we have more farmland to feed them and more land to house them? The idea of ownership is the idea of weaklings, the strongest take and deserve what they get. So it has always been in Nature, so it is now.\"\n\n\nFreer and you exchange glances, neither of you are quite sure how to respond to this. By dusk the fighting is over, the Lapau all killed and the island won at the cost of another dozen sailors but Thomas Finch is among the casualties, speared through the right arm and in great pain. In his honor Anne-Marie names the island after him and seemingly content with the day's fighting orders her four ships to turn Southwest and sail towards the rendezvous at the Corral Mountain.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Sail South with the rest of the Fleet", "result": "The Merry Company and Explorer split off from the Fleet while the rest of you sail south. The temperature begins to drop noticeably and to try to keep sprits high Anne-Marie begins inviting her officers to her cabin for dinner every evening. It is not a very happy gathering: Cuthrew never attends and there is clear tension between Freer and Anne-Marie. Finch rarely speaks and Quarrel only does so in support of anything Anne-Marie has to say. One evening as you return aboard the Adventurer with Eva Freer she suddenly turns to you.\n\n\n\"Have you noticed Quarrel has started spending his nights aboard the Monarch of the Sea,\" she asks you nonchalantly. You admit that you hadn't and Freer sighs. \"I hate that woman,\" she confesses to you. \"She has all the qualities I hate and I will be very glad when this voyage is over.\" As you put your hand on your arm to help her onto the Adventurer's deck it suddenly brushes against her breasts and an unexpected thrill goes through you. Freer doesn't seem to notice anything as she bids you goodnight but for some reason that night you can't get her face out of your mind.", "action_results": [{"action": "Further South", "result": "The Snow Mountain soon comes into sight and with a telescope you can spot a huddle of huts perched precariously on a flat plateau at it's base. Anne-Marie takes on look and declares you will all attack tomorrow. Aware of earlier ambushes she issues orders for all ships to post night sentries to keep a close watch on the water that night and it is a good thing she does this.\n\n\nYou are woken from your sleep by the sound of a gunshot. Springing to your feet with memories of the earlier ambush that destroyed the Lucky and Gambler running through your head you rush out onto deck to find most of your Crew doing likewise and firing muskets down into the water as spears arc upwards. To your amazement there is no sign of canoes: the Lapau have actually swam through the near-freezing water from the mountain in an effort to surprise the War Fleet. Their tactics are evolving.\n\n\nFortunately the attack was detected in time and the Lapau are not numerous enough to truly press home their advantage and your battle-hardened Crew soon drive them back, killing many who try to climb aboard the ships but some of your Crew and a few aboard the other ships are slain by thrown spears. The next morning you see the surviving Lapau take to their canoes and paddle south allowing you to take possession of the Snow Mountain. A few days later the Merry Company and Explorer rejoin the Fleet with bad news.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain offshore with Hale and Freer", "result": "While the others go ashore you, Hale and Freer wait on the quarterdeck, the usually-cheerful Hale frowning as she absent-mindedly rubs her healed wound in her hip while Freer watches intently as Anne-Marie and Quarrel lead their men across the beach, through the deserted village and into the jungle. Moments later there is the crackling pops of musket shots and Freer sighs wearily. \"Well the Orphan and Widows Club has some new members,\" she says unhappily. \"What are we even doing here? If we'd left them alone the Lapau would have been no threat to us. This expedition is solely to steal their lands.\"\n\n\nHale says nothing but continues to frown and chews her bottom lip, drawing blood. Soon after the sound of gunfire Anne-Marie and Quarrel's crews return triumphantly having killed a dozen Lapau warriors still on the island and claimed it for your country, Anne-Marie chooses to rename it Quarrel Island after her loyal servant. Raising anchor you put the island behind you and sail due west to rejoin the rest of the Fleet.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Join Cuthrew, Finch and Swift in capturing this island", "result": "The Monarch of the Sea, Merry Company and Indefatigable vanish over the horizon leaving the rest of you anchored offshore. To your surprise Commander Cuthrew doesn't launch his attack straight away but instead waits to consider the situation so it is not until a few days later that you, Freer, Finch and Swift (the latter still with her arm in a sling) are invited to his cabin. Cuthrew looks like he has been ill and does not rise from his chair when you enter. In a tired voice he outlines the plan of attack.\n\n\n\"Commander Finch, I want you to lead your Crew and Commander Swift's crew ashore. Try to force any Lapau you encounter to surrender and only fire your muskets if you need to defend yourselves. Commander Swift, I know you have more reason than any of us to hate the Lapau but please do not let this cloud your judgement... Commanders Freer and myself will remain with the Fleet to block off any escape attempts they make. Commander Trapa, you can join the land assault or remain with the sea force as you prefer.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the land assault with Finch and Swift", "result": "Dropping anchor you, Swift and Finch cautiously lead your men ashore, Swift looking grim and holding a sword in her good hand. Keeping in close order with muskets loaded and ready you and your men advance, occupy the abandoned village and move into the jungle. Before you can reach it a war cry fills the air and arrows whiz out of the trees, cutting down several men including three of yours. A volley of muskets boom out in response and with a cheer your sailors break ranks and charge into the jungle. The surviving Lapau are swiftly cut down.\n\n\nAfter the short battle is over Finch orders the borders of both sides buried. It is grim work but the island is yours: your countrymen's individual graves stand as testament to that. The dozen dead Lapau warriors are buried under one mound and that evening you are surprised to see Swift standing alone by the mound crying that evening. Feeling she'd rather be left alone you return to the Adventurer with your surviving Crew and wait for the rest of the Fleet to rejoin you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Remain offshore with Cuthrew and Freer", "result": "You remain offshore while Finch and Swift land. Because Cuthrew remains in his cabin you only have Eva Freer for company as you stand on the quarterdeck of the Adventurer watching the distant sailors move up the beach to capture the unoccupied village. As they approach the jungle there is a volley of gunshots and Freer groans. \"We should not be doing this,\" she tells you unhappily. \"This is murder but because the Queen says it is ok our sailors are happy to do it.\" You glance at her thoughtfully. That evening Finch and Swift's crews return to their ships having killed a dozen Lapau warriors and taken possession of the island; now all you can do is wait for the rest of the Fleet to rejoin you.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Sail directly towards the rest of the Fleet", "result": "Knowing the Maverick is doomed you hold your course and in the safety of the War Fleet adjust your course and advance with the line of ships towards the hundreds of Lapau canoes. Before your eyes the Maverick sinks beneath the waves and her crew are slaughtered in the water by the dozens of canoes which converge on the spot: in moments the seas are red with blood and bodies float on the waves all around. The Explorer reaches the safety of the Fleet before turning around, like you and every other sailor aboard the Fleet Naomi Swift wants revenge.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Remain with the rest of the Fleet", "result": "You remain with the rest of the War Fleet, hidden from sight behind the Barren Hill while the Explorer and Maverick sail south. Anne-Marie establishes an observation post manned by two sailors atop the Hill and after just a few days you spot them waving a red blanket, the pre-arranged signal that the decoys are returning. Along with the rest of the Fleet you weigh anchor and steer the Adventurer out from behind the Hill to see a chilling sight: the Explorer and Maverick are sailing straight towards you surrounded by hundreds upon hundreds of canoes, more than you have ever seen in your lifetime.\n\n\nWith your telescope you can see the Natives are viciously stabbing their spears through the hulls of the two ships in an effort to sink them, archers are firing arrows up at the ships' decks and warriors are trying to climb aboard. \"Stay together\" Queen Anne-Marie shouts to you across the space between your ship and the Monarch of the Sea as on your other side the Sea Ghost begins to edge ahead. \"We must attack them together!\"\n\n\n\"That's a stupid order,\" Eva Freer tells you angrily. \"We should go and help them.\" The Monarch of the Sea fires her bow cannons but she is still out of range. A collective cry of dismay rises from the Fleet as you see the Maverick suddenly list to starboard and start to sink.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "The sea force", "result": "It takes a few days for you to get your Crews ready to launch the assault but finally all the preparations have been made. Leaving Commander Finch to lead the attack on the island you sail the Adventurer round to the south side of the island and watch the other ships move into their positions to block any escape attempts. You watch with a telescope as Finch and Quarrel lead the land force across the island, expecting the sounds of combat to reach your ears at any time but no fighting breaks out.\n\n\nAfter lots of waiting curiosity gets the better of you and you go ashore with Captain Freer.\n\n\n\"The island is deserted Commander,\" Finch reports to you. \"The Lapau have already left.\"\n\n\n\"Excellent,\" Freer declares with a grin. \"All this time we have been planning how to capture a deserted island.\"\n\n\nIgnoring her you order your men to tear down the villager's huts and use them to build a small wooden fort and a jetty. There is nothing left to do now but sit tight and wait for the other ships of the War Fleet to return here.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Sail Northwest and co-ordinate Swift and Mason's voyage to ensure the safety of the Colonies", "result": "After the Council five ships split off from the rest of the War Fleet and sail Northwest back to Burnt Island. It is a swift voyage and to your relief the small Colony ashore shows no sign of being attacked. When you drop anchor offshore you are surprised when Commanders Naomi Swift and Bermuda Mason come aboard the Adventurer. Both are fair and attractive but efficiently they come straight to the point.\n\n\n\"To save time Commander Trapa I think it might be better if we split up,\" Mason says. \"If I sail west I can reach Sandy Island, turn back Southeast to the Colony on Jungle Island and return east to rejoin Commanders Quarrel and Finch. At the same time Naomi can sail north to Trevers Island, back south to here at Burnt Island and southeast back to Quarrel and Finch, by splitting up this way we check all of the Colonies twice as fast as if we stayed together.\"\n\n\nIt is an intelligent plan and you nod thoughtfully wondering which one to join. Eva Freer who is standing by shows no particular preference.\n\n\n\"I am not very familiar with the waters around Trevers Island,\" Swift tells you. \"It might be helpful if you could accompany me Commander.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Sail North with Swift to Trevers Island", "result": "You continue north while Commander Mason's Maverick turns off to the West. Every evening Commander Swift comes aboard the Adventurer to join you and Commander Freer for dinner: she turns out to be an interesting individual and good company.\n\n\n\"Given that it took some sixty days to sail around the world wouldn't it be better to spend six hundred or so visiting every part of it?\" she asks you. \"Based on the number of islands discovered already me and Bermuda calculated there must be about one hundred islands out there, all waiting to be found. Do you think one day someone will be able to visit them all?\"\n\n\n\"I doubt it,\" Freer says with a smile. \"I don't know anyone with that much free time.\"\n\n\nReaching Trevers Island you are pleased to see that the Colony here has also escaped attack. The Colonists are shocked to hear news of the Battle of the Fleets and quickly row out to help resupply your ships with supplies. While Anne-Marie and Hale sail North back towards your homeland you order the Adventurer and Explorer to turn about and sail back south to Burnt Island.", "action_results": [{"action": "Southward", "result": "Returning to Burnt Island you find the Colonists here are still safe and even row out Supplies to your vessels. That evening while anchored offshore the conversation turns to the likely course of the war against the Lapau and what will happen next.\n\n\n\"I think this expedition has now turned into one of self-defense,\" Swift says. \"If we don't attack and defeat the Lapau what's to stop them becoming bold, coming out, massacring our settlers and plundering our Colonies?\"\n\n\n\"I think the Lapau only attacked us because we invaded what they consider their lands to begin with,\" Freer says. \"I think they thought we would give up and go home after they destroyed the Lucky and the Gambler but instead it has just made our Queen determined to destroy them... we will probably win this War but neither side will be better off because of it.\"\n\n\nYou stay silent and the next morning alter your course Southwest to rejoin your companions at Village Island.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rendezvous", "result": "The Adventurer, Explorer and Maverick return to Village Island within hours of each other to find the Royal Escort, Sea Ghost and Indefatigable already waiting for you. All the news is good news: the Colonies are safe, Quarrel and Finch bloodlessly captured the Island after the Lapau evacuated during the night and Cuthrew has discovered the Lapau's next closest inhabited island just off to the Southeast. The only worry is the low Supply situation in the Fleet and this is soon remedied when Anne-Marie and Hale rejoin the Fleet.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Sail West with Mason to Sandy Island", "result": "You sail West with Commander Mason to Sandy Island, a featureless outcrop of sand where three Colonists have built tents simply to establish it as part of your country's lands. Bored beyond belief with nothing to do except fish they are overjoyed to see you and quickly row out in a small boat to help resupply your vessels. At their insistence you host a dinner on board the Adventurer, Mason says very little but Eva Freer unwinds enough to talk about her childhood of growing up on the streets of Golden Sands. Pleased to find the Colony is safe you turn Southeast towards Jungle Island.", "action_results": [{"action": "Southeast", "result": "Reaching Jungle Island, a thickly-covered tropical paradise you are pleased to find the Colonists here, the most exposed of all your Colonies, have also escaped attack, though they have lost men to a deadly tiger that lives in the jungle somewhere in the interior. They are kind enough to bring Supplies out to your ships and feeling reinforced you turn your two vessels Southeast to rejoin your companions at Village Island, comforted by the knowledge that all your country's Colonies are safe.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Sail towards Commander Hale's embattled ship Merry Company", "result": "Your loyalty to your friend Esme prompts you to steer the Adventurer towards the Merry Company, whose decks are swarming with grappling figures. As you pull your ship alongside your Crew spring across the gap cheering with swords in their hands and quickly help turn the tide of battle. Lashing the wheel into place you follow your crew onto the Merry Company's blood-stained decks which are literally carpeted with bodies. As your men help drive the Lapau from the ship Hale staggers towards you, a blood-covered sword in her hand and the other clasped to her left side which is wet with blood. She has tears in her eyes.\n\n\n\"They've killed my boys!\" she cries out to you. \"Look at them! They've killed my boys!\"\n\n\nYou glance around: the decks of the ship are indeed so thickly covered with bodies you could walk from prow to stern without once setting foot on the deck. Before you can say a word a spectacular explosion deafens you and knocks both you and Hale to the deck. The Lucky has just blown up, vanishing from sight in an instant as pieces of wood and bodies fly through the air. A moment later the Gambler sinks too. Amidst cheers and war cries the Lapau abandon their attack, take to their canoes and return to their island to celebrate their victory.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Sail towards Commander Quarrel's embattled ship Indefatigable", "result": "Sailing towards the Indefatigable you turn the Adventurer to port so your crew can fire your cannons at the Lapau crowded on the assailed ship's deck. Drawing alongside your men fire muskets at the crowd of Lapau warriors allowing Quarrel's men to counter-attack and drive them from the ship.\n\n\n\"Commander Trapa, turn your ship around,\" Quarrel shouts up at you angrily from the quarterdeck. \"What are you doing? Your first duty should be to protect the Queen!\"\n\n\nAnnoyed at this lack of gratitude you shout back a reply which Quarrel fortunately does not hear and leaving his men to extinguish the fire on board you steer your ship towards the Monarch of the Sea. By the time you draw alongside the battle is already over: aided by the Sea Ghost Anne-Marie's crew have driven their attackers from the deck. As you stare at the blood-soaked decks a deafening explosion behind you makes you turn around: the Lucky has just blown up and disintegrated into a cloud of flying debris. The Gambler sinks too and amidst a tumult of war cries and cheers the Lapau return to their canoes and paddle back to their island to celebrate their victory.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Sail towards Commander Trever's sinking ship Lucky", "result": "Spinning your ship's wheel you guide the Adventurer towards the Lucky but before you can reach it she dramatically explodes in a burst of light and sound. Your ship is covered in wooden debris and bits of bodies, a severed and thumps into your face and falls to the deck in front of you. A short way off the Gambler sinks beneath the waves as well. You stare in silent horror as the cheers and whoops of the Lapau fill the night air as returning to their canoes they paddle back to their island to celebrate their victory.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Sail towards Commander Freer's sinking ship Gambler", "result": "Sailing towards the Gambler you can see dozens of sailors diving from the deck of the sinking ship only to be speared in the water by the dozens of Lapau warriors in canoes all around. Unwilling to risk the water a handful remain on deck tugging frantically at the ship's lifeboat. Something akin to a sun rising bursts out to your left: in a spectacular explosion the Lucky bursts into a million pieces. A moment later the Gambler sinks beneath the ocean's waves as well.\n\n\nWith your men giving covering fire from the decks with their muskets you order the Adventurer's longboat lowered and are able to rescue a few survivors from the Gambler. Among those you pull from the water is the Gambler's Captain Eva Freer, bleeding heavily from a serious shoulder wound but still full of passion. \"Those damned curs have sunk my ship and they'll be hell to pay!\" she snarls at you when she arrives aboard the deck of the Adventurer. You nod silently as you stare around at the ruins of the Fleet.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain at sea with the War Fleet", "result": "While the other Officers go ashore you, Cuthrew, Hale, Trevers and Finch gather on the quaterdeck of the Sea Ghost to co-ordinate the fleet's actions from there. Cuthrew looks tired, Finch is silent, Trevers is nervous and even Hale's usual cheerfulness seems to have waned slightly.\n\n\n\"Do you think the Lapau will negotiate?\" she asks you nervously.\n\n\n\"I don't know,\" you reply thoughtfully, squinting at the distant figures on the beach.\n\n\n\"They will not,\" Finch says confidently and you glance at him in surprise. \"All the reports from our Colonists suggest theirs is a proud and strong culture that reacts violently against intrusion into lands they consider their own. The cultural differences between us and them are so vast it would take a great deal of time to even begin to bridge them. I don't think the Queen can wait that long and the sight of this great Fleet might trigger them into action.\"\n\n\n\"I hope there is no fighting,\" Trevers says unhappily. \"I don't think I'd do very well in a War.\"\n\n\nThat evening Queen Anne-Marie and the other Commanders return after a fruitless day spent trying to understand and interact with the Lapau. No orders are issued to the Fleet except to be on alert and returning to your cabin aboard the Adventurer you slip into an uneasy sleep...", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story48.json b/data/scraper/stories/story48.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..70a5a64 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story48.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=13349", "context": "", "first_story_block": "You have just run your sword through the last of the 6 bandits when you hear a cry for help. You jog over to a large chest. Upon opening it, you find a beautiful girl locked in with a rather large amount of gold.\n\n\n\"You must be Amelia\" you say, as you boldly lift her from the chest.\n\n\n\"I am!\" she replies breathlessly, \"You must have gotten my hidden message! Thank you for rescuing me. The way you challenged all the bandits to a sword fight at the same time was so very heroic!\" You lean closer....\n\n\nYou wake up and take in your surroundings, holding a tiny hope that one of your dreams had been reality and not just fantasy. But all you see is your one room hut, mostly empty and worn down.\n\n\n\"Last night it was a dream about escaping from an amazing tower of riddles ruled by an evil magician and today it's a hero rescuing princesses... I must be losing it.\" You get out of bed, get dressed and take stock. One bed, a desk with your open pack and a chair by the cooking fire are all the furniture in the room. You slowly re-fill your pack with your cloths and hunting gear. The fire went out during the night leaving the room dank and chilled so, realizing you had no reason left to hang around, you stuff your sleeping sheet into you pack, sling it over your shoulders and head to the door.\n\n\nLooking out you see the dirt streets and hastily built shacks of the work camp you've been living in the past few months.\n\n\nDo you:", "action_results": [{"action": "Head off to talk to the foreman", "result": "You quickly walk through the camp towards the mine, looking in the empty shacks as you pass. Now that the mine is running and producing silver, all the temporary staff brought in to dig out the initial tunnels have been laid off. You were one of the last to go as you were one of the most experienced but tomorrow the shacks would all be torn down and only the huddle of nicer buildings would remain to house the permanent miners and those needed to support them.\n\n\nYou arrive at the entrance to the mine and see the Foreman sending the last of his men inside. He calls you over.\n\n\n\"Well, you've done a good job for us but I can't keep you on our books any longer. The mine's bringing up silver and they've sent down some official to assess our operation. Sadly, that means he will be checking our payroll so there wont be any room for us to hire out side jobs for a few months.\"\n\n\nYou knew the job was only temporary so you tell him that it's alright and thank him for keeping you on after most others had been laid off.\n\n\nHe hands you a small purse with your pay.\n\n\nYou start to head off when he calls after you.\n\n\n \"I heard a rumor that another mine might be opening a few days walk north of here... Can't say if its true or not but there may be a few months worth of work up there if it is.\"\n\n\nYou wave your thanks and head out of the camp towards the road. It takes just over an hour to reach it so as you walk you think back on your recent dreams. In the tower of riddles you hadn't been much of a traditional sword swinging hero but you had shown great wits and intelligence to escape. In this morning's dream you had been a bold adventurer able to take on 6 ruthless bandits at the same time without breaking a sweat. Comparing it to your own life so far, you think its no wonder you're having escapist dreams.\n\n\nYour name is \"Glor\". Your mother once told you that traditionally, babies are named after the first thing a father says when a child is born. (This often causes no end of contrived first exclamations from new fathers) Your own father, upon hearing it was a boy, had strode into the room and started saying \"Glory be!\" (Obviously thinking Glory was a good manly name) Unfortunately, when he saw what a birthing room was like a few seconds after the deed he only managed, \"Glorrr...\" Most couples iron over the small details like this and name the child what the parent 'meant' to say, but your mother had a wicked sense of humor so Glor stuck fast.\n\n\nYou grew up in a small section of the city called the \"Old Quarter\" near the docks and factories. Your family could only be described as the working poor, the people who do all the dirty and less desirable jobs that keep a city running. Your father worked hard and brought in enough money to keep you all fed, but 4 years after you were born, your mother passed away while giving birth to a stillborn child. Your father still worked but as a broken man and you were mostly brought up by friends and their families around the area. Once you hit your teens, you took any small jobs you could get. Cleaning, hauling, and off-loading ships - no job was too humble or dirty. You spent the rest of your time hanging round the docks and warehouses chatting to sailors about other cities and lands.\n\n\nNot that yours is a sob story. Many had it much worse than you in those days. Lack of jobs sent more and more people into the Old Quarter and many families didn't survive their first years there. You had good friends and old family ties that took care of you when you needed, so it wasn't all bad.\n\n\nOnce you were old enough you joined a mining expedition and set off into the hills to make your fortune. Well, to dig holes while other people made their fortunes even bigger, but, it was a wage and a start. You had stayed up North since then, taking mine and farm jobs wherever you could. You claimed you were saving your coin and preparing to head back to the city but the years passed and you stayed, doing manual labor in mines. This latest job had brought you the closest you'd been to the city in years, even if it was still days of hard travel away.\n\n\nYour thoughts are interrupted as you reach the road. You take a good look around but see no-one in either direction. To the North, the road roughly follows the line of the hills; to the south, it disappears onto the plains, where it turns slowly east towards the city.\n\n\nYou feel an urge to turn south and see the city again. There's certainly been more mining expeditions sent out recently, so maybe things have improved there. The money you just got paid for the months at the mine would keep you going for at least half a year if you're careful.\n\n\nOn the other hand, if there is a new mine starting North, a few more well paid months away from the city won't change your situation for the worse. You think to yourself one more mine job without a break between would get enough for a years living when you got back.\n\n\nShould you make you way back South to the city or try your luck in the mine to the North?", "action_results": [{"action": "You head North.", "result": "You turn Northward up the road thinking that the rumors of a new mine are too good an opportunity to pass up, and hey, even if it's false you don't mind spending an extra week or two on the road.\n\n\nYou pull out some of your dried meat and start eating as you walk, thinking you should probably set some traps and snares when you make camp that night to stock up some fresh meat. You spend an uneventful day walking North and see no other travellers. An hour or so before dusk you start looking for a place to camp. You can camp on the roadside, head into the trees to the east for cover while you sleep or walk an hour or so to the foothills west and hope for a spring or cave.", "action_results": [{"action": "It would be good to find a cave to sleep in, head West", "result": "You walk for an hour west and reach the larger hill. After some searching you find a game trail that leads to a cave and just have time to build a small fire before night sets in. You didn't find a stream but you're sure you'll come across one tomorrow.\n\n\nYou quickly lay a few snares just out of the reach of the firelight then retreat into the cave for the night.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Morning on the North road", "result": "You thought you had heard some noises during the night but there are no signs of other people in the cave. Sadly, your snares are empty too so it'll be another day of dried meat unless you find a traveller on the road today.\n\n\nYou cover the embers of the fire and walk back to the road. Once you reach it, you see a lot of fresh footprints and realize you must have missed a group that passed during the night. The tracks lead North so you follow them for a short distance on the road before coming across their abandoned camp on the edge of the woods.\n\n\nA quick look tells you they packed up and started their march North again several hours ago.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow them and try and catch up", "result": "You think to yourself that with the rumors of a new mine opening that it might be best to catch this group up and see if they know anything about it. You set off at a fast pace to catch them up.\n\n\nBy mid morning you see a dust cloud ahead of you on the road so you keep your fast pace up till you get close enough to make out the group.\n\n\nIts getting close to midday before you get close enough to realize who it is your chasing. Its a group of miners! You quickly conclude that they must be the hired hands sent to get the mine up and running so you approach them to see if you can find out more.\n\n\nAs you catch up to the rear of the pack some of them hail you. You respond in kind then fall in beside the rear couple and start chatting. You learn that there are about 50 of them in the group including all the skilled workers the mine needs but that they would be happy to have you along as an unskilled hand. Its not going to be as much money but they tell you that they have sent their mine guards off ahead to make the area ahead safe so there isn't any way to get ahead and get a better job.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask the Foreman to let you sign up as unskilled work and join their group.", "result": "You troop into the camp with your new companions and get your first look at your new job site for the next few months. Its a well cleared site around a small mine entrance that couldn't extend more than a few feet into the hill. The guards sent ahead had obviously arrived much earlier than you as the site overseer and his men had readied sheds for your company to sleep in and already had his handful of miners digging and putting up rough timber supports in the mouth of the mine.\n\n\nYou're shown your quarters, a small shed set out much like your last one, bed, desk and fire. You settle in and the next day begin your new job. Since you couldn't get a better position your one of the diggers and carters as the foreman put it. You dig to deepen the mine until your standing in a large pile of dirt, then you or someone else, shovel it into a cart and push it outside to be dumped.", "action_results": [{"action": "After a couple of weeks", "result": "After a few weeks of hard labor your not sure whether your regret your choice or not but your certainly keeping very strong and fit from wielding a pick and shovel all day. The mine has been progressing well, the main shaft has been tunneled deep into the hills bedrock and side tunnels are being opened to chase the smaller silver seams your crew uncover in the rock.\n\n\nYou're just taking you latest load of rock out in a cart when the foreman approaches you. \"Theres a small job available for you if you want to earn some higher pay than you are at the moment, dangerous though.\"\n\n\n\"What's the job?\"\n\n\n\"One of the main side tunnels has found a rich looking vein we want to open, but the rock around it is cracked and weak. The weak stone should only extend a few feet but we need some volunteers to risk mining through it. The pay is more than double what your getting now.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the risk and the extra money", "result": "You take a proper look at the new tunnel you're to help open up. The stone is very weak and cracked. You and the two other workers start mining, carefully removing the weak stone along with the silver ore and painstakingly placing buttresses and supports as often as possible.\n\n\nA few days pass and your team is making some good headway. One thing you've decided you like about weak stone is that is easy to mine. Half of it just crumbles out of the wall with a single pick blow, That doesn't reassure you about the rest above your head though.\n\n\nAfter a week you're taking a rest at the end of your tunnel. You've made several metres into the stone and it looks like you've finally reached the end of the weak stone. Your buttresses held and you've earned some easy coin.\n\n\nThe Overseer told you after you were done with the weak stone that he might be able to get you moved to some logging duty for a week or two if you wanted, same pay but easier work as an additional reward. Starting today they would be felling the trees that grew near the mine to build more supports for the ever growing maze of tunnels.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave the weak tunnel", "result": "You start to pick up your gear to exit your tunnel when you feel a slight shaking and see a few small pebbles fall from the tunnel roof.\n\n\nYou feel as if time had slowed around you as you think of the layout of the mine site. Your tunnel had branched far off the main one under the hillside. You can see a small root in the rock wall beside you. Your mind tells you that your seam must have run under the trees behind and to the left of the hill and that they were the obvious choice for the first logging, but all your body is telling you to do is run.\n\n\nThe tunnel is small so you start to run hunched over but as you take your third step you feel a tremor moving up through the tunnel floor.\n\n\n\"They felled the tree right over my tunnel!\" you think as a last thump resounds through the walls and the roof of your tunnel crumbles. Tons of rock pour onto you.\n\n\nYou don't have time to think anything else in your rock tomb.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Its not worth it, keep mining the main tunnel", "result": "You don't want to risk a tunnel collapse so you turn down the foreman's offer.\n\n\nYou work solidly for the next few weeks. You occasionally see the Officials from the miners guild and some officers from the army visit and watch them being greeted by the overseer and his daughter in their newly built house. From speaking to the other miners you find out that the overseer is also the owner of the new mine and a few others in the area, he moved from another country then made his way up from miner, to foreman, then staked his own claim after a few years. Now he travels to all his new mines and oversees their construction with his daughter doing his books and his cooking for him. You never hear about his wife.\n\n\nYou think its odd that he gets so many visits, especially from the army but you put them out of your mind as soon as the officials leave- the guild is nothing to do with the hired hands after all, only the owners.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Months of mining", "result": "You've been at the mine nearly three months now, the tunnels are going deep and several promising seams have been opened up, even the weak stoned tunnel is producing well now after a minor cave-in caused by logging right above it.\n\n\nYou know its nearly time for the hired hands to be laid off so you approached the foreman to see what the prospects are. He told you that most of the manual labor would be laid off within the week and sadly that included you, you'd been a good worker but with all the better positions filled he had no choice.", "action_results": [{"action": "Finish the week and head South", "result": "You get your things in order and even if you didn't make as much as you'd hoped for, you still added a few good weeks living expenses to your purse.\n\n\nThere have been rumors lately of bandit activity on the road south so you talk to the other workers there to see what their plans are. One group is planning to leave on the day they are laid off and make good time down to the city because they want to get back to family there. The other south bound group plans to stay until all the small jobs are finished around the camp for a few extra coins then have a much more leisurely trip with stops off at way houses and farms along the way. The second group will turn up to the city nearly two full weeks after the first but your in no rush yourself.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rush back to the city with the first group, you may as well get back there.", "result": "You all gathered on the Friday morning by the foreman.\n\n\n\"As you men all know, this mine is now officially up and running so the owner has employed one of the mining guilds to keep her running and turn a profit for him, they bring their own unskilled work as well as the their own guards so you'll all be paid up until today then free to go. You can collect you pay off me this evening or tomorrow morning.\" as he turns to leave he pauses and says \"Hmm for about 10 of you there could be some small coin in clearing the old shacks and tidying the place up, a few days light work for light pay.\" then he heads off to oversee the cutting of some wooden struts.\n\n\nYou and your group finish your days work as quickly as possible then a few hours before dark you file up to the foreman and collect your pay, the owner is a generous man and since the build went well he provides you all with some dried meats and provisions for the trip out.\n\n\nYou all head off South into the evening leaving the camp far behind you before stopping. Your days are pretty uneventful with a large group of men around you no bandits make an appearance and you all make very good time to the city, marching most of the days and taking few breaks along the way.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rushed arrival", "result": "Your group makes it back to the city in what must be only a little short of record time and say your farewells at the gates, most of them running off to see wives or families. You take stock of the area then get yourself through the now alien feeling streets to your old area of the city and are relived to find it almost completely unchanged. You go to an old way house you knew in the hopes that the same owner was still running the place.\n\n\nAs you walk in the door a man behind a bar looks up and stares right at you for a full minute before saying \"Well this is some triumphant return, look at the state of..\"\n\n\nYour coin purse drops on the table\n\n\n\"your huge full coin purse\" he slowly finishes.\n\n\nYou grin and tell him you'll take his best room for the night and some hot food followed by whatever his best bottle of alcohol is then head upstairs to wash the road off your face. Your Old friend meets you as you come back down and tosses you a key as he lays a large bowl of thick stew on the table alongside a large bottle of mead with two glasses.\n\n\n\"two?\" you point out.\n\n\n\"Well its not everyday an old friend comes back into town after years away, so since your now paying for an entire bottle of finest mead reserve I thought I'd close for the evening and join you\".\n\n\nYou laugh and join him at the table sharing stories of the years since you grew up in the city together and went separate ways.\n\n\nVery late the next morning you wander down nursing your head and see your friend behind the bar equally worse for wear. You wander over and take the mug of water he hands you. Over breakfast and a lot more water you tell him your plans now that your back in the city. Your goal had always been to get enough to settle comfortably in or near the Iron district, then as the months went by, maybe get into one of the guilds as a skilled worker or arrange with a company to be a free-lance worker on their books. Your years of experience with all good references would stand you in good stead.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "You decide that even though the rooms and food are basic at best that you'll stay renting from your friend for a few weeks while you check out the city and find a place of your own", "result": "After an enjoyable two weeks at the inn you've found yourself a nice place up in the Iron district, Its just a single bedroom with kitchen and small lounge off it but compared to the last few years it seems like a palace. Even better its only a few minutes walk from several of the guild buildings and mining corporation offices so sorting out a job shouldn't be too taxing, after several months rest of course.You let your friend know that you'll be leaving the next day and he just tells you to come down for drinks as often as you like.\n\n\nThat evening you both sit down to share a drink and talk about how to make easy money (your favorite topic since you were 10 and he was 15 working for his dad in this very bar). You glance out the window and comment that its awfully bright out for the time of day when you hear the first screams.\n\n\nYou both rush out to see a massive inferno sweeping through the wooden buildings of the old quarter. You both turn to run but there is a wind coming off the sea pushing the fire on and the old wooden buildings are going up like kindling. In your blind sprint you both almost make it to the walls dividing the city's districts when the flames overtake you and the smoke makes you choke and fall, its not long before you are engulfed entirely in flames.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You Tell you friend that you'll just be staying a couple of days while finding your own place up in the Iron district, after all you have enough coin to rent an entire house for most of a year.", "result": "You hang around long enough for your head to stop hurting and the food to settle then head off to see what changes the years have wrought on the rest of the city. Your Old district may not have changed at all but the wooden docks and buildings have stood longer than most peoples grandparents had been alive. You walk slowly up the sloping city until you reach the large walls that divide the districts and head through the large gates. The first thing you notice is that the gates which used to be old relics unmoved in decades had been cleaned up, reinforced and were guarded, they seemed friendly enough and were only guarding the gates closing mechanism not the gateway itself but it was still an odd sight.\n\n\nThe Iron district had also changed, the stone buildings seemed even bigger than before and many of them were more ornate, even near the gate which would be considered the less well off area. You head further in and see signs for several new mining companies and new guard businesses recruiting. You quickly move off the main roads and find a respectable looking Inn to ask about rooms.\n\n\nYou don't have any luck in the first few inns and taverns you try but after a while you find one with a small flat to rent- Its a little more than you wanted to pay but its only a few minutes from the guild buildings so you agree terms and say you'll move in that night. You head back to let your friend know then move your few worldly belongings into your new place.", "action_results": [{"action": "Easy city living", "result": "You settle into your new place almost immediately. At first you have no idea what your going to do with the large wardrobe and drawers set up in your room but then you just smile to yourself and head out to the nearest tailors and buy several sets of cloths. All practical and hard wearing, but still one of the first times you've owned more than 3 outfits in your life. After stowing it all away you start your rounds of the district and try to see as many of the changes as possible.\n\n\nYou do your sight-seeing for the first couple of days then start to gather information on the Guilds and Companies that interest you. Having got the basics noted down, you buy in a nice supply of long lasting rations (just incase) and set about having an easy life for the whole of winter. Eating down in the taverns or the nice inns, and seeing what nightlife there was to offer.\n\n\nIt was just as you were starting to really enjoy your complete lack of routine and responsibility and were planning on heading down to your friends for an evening drink when you start to hear loud voices and strange shouts from the taverns main room. You thought that this was a little to nice of a place for it, but never one to pass up spectating a good tavern brawl (and occasionally participating) you head down the stairs.\n\n\nBut your stopped short when you reach the room and instead of a brawl you see a room full of panicked people all saying the word fire. You grab the nearest man and ask what is going on and he tells you the old districts up in flames, they think it started on the shore amongst the docks but the wind off the sea pushed it up into the old wooden buildings and they took like kindling, within minutes the whole district was one big inferno.\n\n\nYou rush outside and round the inn, your window looked the other way shielding you from the sight but now you just stare blankly towards where the wall separating the districts and see a fierce orange and yellow glow over the wall, occasionally punctuated by large bursts of flame with plumes of black filling the air above it. You sprint down to the gates but once you get there you find them closed and barred shut. grabbing the nearest guard you shout for them to be open so you can get to your friend but he just stares blankly back at you obviously shocked dumb then walks away. The gate captain walks over and tells you that if anyone is still in there and didn't get out before the gates had to be shut, that there was no chance of them being alive. You start to tell him that he is wrong and needs to open the gates when he takes you over to them and tells you to put a hand on them.\n\n\nYou reach out and feel the thick gates metal almost hot enough to burn you. The captain quietly tells you that the fire came at the worst possible time. it had been dry for weeks and wooden buildings had been build right from the shore to the base of the wall, all stocked full of the years produce, hay, wheat, pelts and oils. most of it flammable. The wind blowing in from the sea had fanned it into an inferno almost as soon as the first warehouses had gone up. It had spread unnaturally quickly and only the closing of the huge gates had stopped it spreading through into this district too. The gates would stay closes until the embers were cold, and that could take a couple of days at least without any rain to quench them.\n\n\nYou head slowly back to your room and collapse into bed unsure what to do next.", "action_results": [{"action": "Morning or choice", "result": "You awake in the morning unsure what to do. Your plans had been of an easy year living off your money and you could still do it, prices would probably go up for a time but you'd still comfortably now that your settled. But you are now sure you'd lost any place that you had called home and your closest friend in the fire so you at least wanted to find out what had happened.\n\n\nYou grab some food then head out to start trying to ask questions and see if anyone is the wiser about what had caused the fire, and to do a last look through the survivors for any sign of your friend.\n\n\nYou ask several guards but most don't seem to know any more than you do. Eventually you see a guard that isn't as shell shocked as the rest and he tells you that the captain over at the military barracks has all the information about the fire and that you should speak to him. You head there to see what he knows.\n\n\n'The Barracks' as it is generally know does contain the city guard's barracks but also the military side of things, the army barracks, its armory, offices and everything else it needed all in one giant building that straddled and made up part of the wall between the iron and stone districts. You quickly see a small group of people talking to soldiers outside one of the entrances and approach them to hear what is going on.\n\n\nIts one of the captains explaining the fire to them, a few minor details extra but basically what you had heard before. Once he is done you ask him about how it started. He looks you over then sends you in and tells you to talk to the man at the desk, first room on the right. You enter and realize you not left with much choice as to where to turn since there is a group of soldiers blocking the corridor a few meters away with only one door standing open between you and them. You enter and approach the man looking at you from behind the desk.\n\n\n\"What can I do for you?\"\n\n\n\"I want to know how the fire started.\"\n\n\nThe man seems mildly amused by your abrupt response but any trace of amusement quickly vanishes as he replies.\n\n\n\"A ship packed with flammable fuel was set alight and rammed into our docks. the fire was deliberate.\"\n\n\nStunned by the sudden revelation you ask \"Are your sure? wait are you just telling everyone this, wont it cause a panic?\"\n\n\n\"There's no point trying to keep it a secret, half the fishing fleet saw it happen as did many of the survivors that ran into the sea and were picked up the by the ships, the entire city will know in two days at the most. Also there were thousands of people in that district at the time, I wont dishonor them by lying about their deaths.\"\n\n\n\"But who would do it, what is there to gain from burning down old district?\"\n\n\n\"We think it was Carn, at least the burning ship and the one that had been accompanying it bore their colours\"\n\n\nYou think for a few seconds but the name rings no bells \"Who?\"\n\n\n\"Carn, the city a few weeks along the coast by boat, you been living under a rock or something? There has been minor trouble and trade disputes between us for nearly two years now.\"\n\n\n\"I've been up North for years in the mines, news apart from bandit activity doesn't make it up there...\"\n\n\n\"Well long story short we started full maritime trading over 3 years ago, then two years ago some minor trade problems began, then it was about land, finally about fishing rights. things had been getting tense for months with armed ships keeping fishing boats company for protection and guards on our borders but no-one expected this. They have been sent ravens with questions about the ships but they will of course deny all knowledge, then it will be war. The king has already started recruiting to replace the men lost in the fire and more to fill out the army.\"\n\n\nYou just stand unsure what to say, should you hate an enemy you don't know for what they did? Denounce their tactics, or just avoid the war and try and rebuild a life in the city.\n\n\n\"So son\" the commander stands up \"we are still recruiting and the army wage is just as good as the miners one. You want to enlist?\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "You hate what they did but you have money and a chance at a life now so it would be stupid to throw it away in a war, you politely refuse and head out.", "result": "You spend the first few days split between organizing whatever is left of you life and watching the embers of the old district burn down to cold ash. Once the gates are opened you had planned to search through the wreckage for you old friends tavern but one look through the gate shows a nondescript layer of ash evenly coating the ground as far as the outer walls and the shore, only the occasional blackened wooden timbers or cracked black stone sticking up to break the massive expanse of grey and black.\n\n\nSoldiers and workers begin repairing the walls and gates from the fire damage and as the weeks pass people begin to clear out the ash and wreckage that survived. In many places the fires burned hot enough that not even much bone was left but in others teams were on duty collecting remains and transporting them into mass graves outside the city limits.\n\n\nThe war had broken out after less than a fortnight. Carn repeatedly denied any involvement but after the trouble between the two cities and the witnesses to the ships bearing their royal colours war was inevitable. Reports said it was going our way and that we mostly had control of the seas between the cities and were making steady progress on land as well, casualties were growing but going by the weekly reports given by the guards theirs were much higher and we would have them under tight siege by the end of spring.\n\n\nYou take it easy for the first few weeks but then begin helping out where you can. Your time in the mines has given you a simple grasp of solid construction so when work teams are put together building new stone docks in place of the wood ones you join them as skilled labor and since you don't need the money you let your wages go to re-homing the survivors. Your work and charity gets you some small attention from the survivors that make up a lot of the unskilled labor and when they learn you used to live in the old district your adopted into the 'family' again. You even meet a girl a little younger than you that lost her family in the fire. Your friends at first with you looking out for her, then you become closer, and by the time spring draws near you marry and settle into a life in the Iron town. \n\n\nBy this time you've begun accepting your wage since most of the survivors are now in temporary homes. Your work on the docks and accepted position amongst the survivors has landed you a full time position in the construction guild overseeing some projects in the rebuilding of a new partly stone old district.\n\n\nThe War went as quickly as you had been told to expect with Carn under tight siege by spring and fallen completely by summer. your army had been ruthless , firing burning oil and tar into the city and burning their food stores whenever possible, all in 'revenge' for the old district. Their king had denied all involvement right up until the surrender but he was now exiled along with his advisors and the city under your kings command.\n\n\nThe world passed you by as you spent your years happily with your wonderful wife and family, there were always rumors of other wars and far off battles and victories but you didn't concern yourself with them as your city was now flourishing and always expanding and you had plenty of work as you moved up the guild ranks.\n\n\n*** Congratulations! This is the peaceful and happy ending. No big exciting adventure but you're happily married and well paid in a flourishing kingdom. And since all is going well its easy to ignore those little niggling doubts about what really happened that I know your harboring ***", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You cant accept what They did to your city and your friends. Setting the city on fire with no warning to kill civillians was not an act ment to go unpunished so you enlist.", "result": "Life in the army starts with training. You're assigned a bunk and basic leather armor on the first day and the next morning at dawn you're woken with the other new recruits to head out for basic training. Your unsure what to expect but life in the mines has kept you strong and and in excellent physical condition so the exercise runs, weights and jogging in full armor don't overly strain you. Other recruits don't fare as well but your not given the time or opportunity to help one another.\n\n\nYour thinking the training is a little harsh for the first day as many of the men and boys in your group have never done physical labor when your all gathered and told that today was the testing day. They needed to asses what sort of condition you were in so they could get you into the proper training programs. You see that everyone is relieved by this and you start marching back to the barracks as your sergeant tells you the last task for the day.\n\n\n\"Everyone is to be interviewed about their experience and past jobs, don't worry this isn't a test and it will be kept informal, we just need to know if you've ever held a weapon before or which part of the army suits you best\".\n\n\nYou all enjoy your evening meal then are called over one by one to the sergeant's table. You tell him that your good with a bow and passable with a knife but that you've never had formal training with a sword before. Your experience in the mines interests him more and one of the other men at the table takes over and asks you several technical questions about struts and construction work. You answer all he asks fairly well and after the Sarge gives him a nod he says \"Welcome to the engineering division\".\n\n\nYou look momentarily confused until he laughs and asks where you thought all the forts, war machines and defenses came from and who you thought build the army's outposts. The light dawns on you and the man smiles.\n\n\n\"That's right, you'll be supporting the army using your experience, building our defenses, putting together our war machines and constructing everything from our forward base to our cooking tents. It may not sound as glamorous as charging in with the vanguard but we have a much, much higher survival rate and if the camps are attacked we defend them shoulder to shoulder with all the rest, what do you say?\"\n\n\nYour readily agree and Sergeant Reardon, as he introduced himself, leads you off to meet your new training squad. Your introduced and learn they are made up of everyone from those with basic unskilled labor experience to a couple full guild engineers who signed up on the day of the fire.\n\n\nYour training goes well and you get on well with your squad, learning to treat them as your friends as well as squad mates. After a couple of weeks pass War is finally declared. You had known it was just a matter of time but you quickly find your Sarge and ask what it meant for you.\n\n\n\"For you and your squad? Nothing at all! Your not fully trained yet and once your basic is over you still need to be assigned to your unit and your duties explained. Since you've got good solid construction knowledge and the experience to back it up you'll most likely be sent to Third company on our borders to get the forward forts built and running as the war progresses. Wont be for another month yet but either way no chance I'm letting my boys out near the fighting till they are ready.\"\n\n\nReassured by the Sarge's attitude you pass the info onto your squad and finish out the last of your basic training in the barracks.", "action_results": [{"action": "Third company", "result": "The Sarge is a little off in his estimate of your departure time. It actually takes a month and a half to get your squad in shape. Its been a long wait but you are finally all ready to head out to the front to help in the war effort!\n\n\nYour squad is woken by an early bell ringing somewhere in the barracks tower and you all assemble in your new polished steel armor. during your training you had all been measured and fitted out in strong forged steel, it turned out many of the iron mongers and jewelers of the city had turned their forges over to making weapons and armor so there was no shortage of equipment for the army.\n\n\nThe Sarge gives you all one last look over.\n\n\n\"Well its taken longer than I'd like but your all ready to serve your king! You're all heading out to the 3'rd to help in the construction of the new bases so our boys on the front have a good foothold in place before winter hits.\"\n\n\nA soldier to the left pipes in \"But I thought we already had bases on our borders?\"\n\n\n\"Our Borders? Boy do you think the entire army has been sitting and waiting for you since the war started? They have been advancing solidly for the past 6 weeks. The new borders are near 2 weeks march further forward and THATS where we need the new bases.\"\n\n\nYou think to yourself that the army has made pretty amazing advances considering the fact that Carn was the kingdom that started the war.", "action_results": [{"action": "It DOES seem odd, so you speak up", "result": "\"Sir, Our men are making amazing progress in the war but I have to ask. Carn were the ones that started the war, I mean they sent the ships into the Old Quarter and everything with the trade disputes. Were they not prepared for our counter attack?\"\n\n\nYou see the Sergeant frown and a shadow clearly crosses his features. He quickly shakes it off and explains that the first week or two on the border was intense fighting and lead to a great many casualties. However once the army had broken through the initial defense line, it had been much easier to push ahead and prevent the Carn army from regrouping properly.\n\n\nYou think that this is indeed a possible explanation but a few doubts still remain in the back of your mind.The Sarge says a few last tips and goodbyes then heads off. The last you see of him is as he walks out the door with the shadow back over his features as if he didn't really believe what he had said himself.\n\n\nYou see a soldier you don't recognize step forward.\n\n\n\"Right then, I'm Capt. Argor. Since I took an arrow in the knee and had to come back here for treatment, I've been given the onerous task of accompanying you to the front lines to make sure you ladies don't get lost. You were all told to report here in full gear and with all your supplies so has anyone left anything behind that they just must run back to their rooms for? Hankies? Training Bra? No? Good, I might not have to babysit you all quite as much as I feared, lets head out cos this is gonna be a long trip for you city folk.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Quick march out of the city with the new Capt. calling you all little girls for the entire 6 hour march.", "result": "You are given a break for lunch with only cold rations, then double speed marched hard till dusk. The Capt. Pulls you all off the road beside a small stream and even though your all ready to collapse and pass out he has you form up.\n\n\n\"Right then, this is first point spring. A few generations back some officers from the 1st and 2nd companies were insulting the 3rd, saying we weren't real soldiers because we just built things while they won the war. Our officers didn't take too kindly to this and lets just say a bit of an argument broke out. After the tempers calmed a bit our men challenged the rest of the army to prove their supposed superiority\"\n\n\nHe paused to give you all a big grin.\n\n\n\"Our boys in the 3rd work hard every day moving timber and stone, carrying loads long distances and almost never take days off. Their boys sit on their arses most of the time and only train short periods a day when they aren't actively attacking something. So our officers said they should all go for a little march. You all just made it here within daylight hours which isn't bad at all for this time of year. The 1st and 2nd company soldiers made it in about the same. OUR officers beat them by 3 hours and had a full camp set up and running by the time they limped in. They looked up from their fires and said this is normally just the first point the 3rd stop at before marching on but they had thought they should wait for them to catch up. Its been known as first point ever since. Now anyone joining the 3rd makes the march, so welcome to the 3rd gentlemen, now get our camp up!\"\n\n\nRelieved that Capt. Argor wont be calling you all girls for the rest of the march you all set up camp and get some fires going. You're just settling down beside your fire to have supper when a couple of other come over and join you.\n\n\n\"We had been thinking the same thing as you about how fast the war is going so when you spoke up we thought we should have a chat and share our concerns about the situation.\"\n\n\nYou think slowly before the reply", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Well then what did you think of Sarg's answer?\"", "result": "The two men seem to sense your hesitation so think for a while before one answers.\n\n\n\"I would say... that I'm not sure he believed it any more than you or I did.\"\n\n\nIt's exactly the feeling that you had gotten but you also wonder why they are bringing this up now.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Honestly? Your right, I'm pretty sure that no-one really bought it and there are other higher ups back at the barracks that seemed to share the doubts.\"", "result": "The men think for a bit before replying, the one who had been silent up till now looks at his companion and says \"On your head be it.\" then gets up and leaves.\n\n\n\"Sorry about him.\" the man says \"He is just a little bit on edge about this whole situation.\"\n\n\n\"And just what is this whole situation?\"\n\n\n\"Ha! fair enough. Well I can tell you some of it now, You did some work in the mines recently and our employer owns several of the new sites that have been opening, so in reality you've been doing work for him.\"\n\n\nYou nod slowly, its common for prospectors to open several sites to ensure one produces. You don't have enough information to pin down a specific job or owner though so keep listening.\n\n\nThe man continues \"He developed an interest in you from the reports he was receiving which is what put you on our radar and your behavior and reaction to the war made up my mind to come speak to you. Now you can appreciate how much of a risk I am taking here but I have decided to trust you. The war isn't all it seems and you know that. There are a lot of things you don't know about but the main one is that Carn didn't start the war and didn't attack the Old Quarter.\"\n\n\nHe pauses to watch your reaction before continuing.\n\n\n\"Now lets set one thing straight, we aren't talking treason here, we are completely loyal to the king, but we think he is being betrayed and tricked by his council. Now I will give you tonight to think this over and talk to you tomorrow evening again if you want to know more.\"\n\n\nThe man gets up and leaves. You realize you don't even know his name but he is too far to call out too now so you sit back and think over your options.", "action_results": [{"action": "No matter what they claim, they are commiting treason, report to the Capt. during the day and stop them!", "result": "Evil council tricking the king to start a war, its like something out of one of your dreams... you briefly mull over the fact you haven't had any of those recently but put it down to being so tired from army life and move on to planning.\n\n\nYou know what the two men look like and one other man that they talk to a lot so you just need to avoid them during the day and get to Capt. Argor with your information. You keep an eye out during the next days march and try to act as normal as possible, when one of the men comes over to you during a break you even share a water flask before moving off so you don't raise their suspicions.\n\n\nYou finally see your chance as the camp is being set up for the night, the two men are off at the edge of camp to set up their bedrolls like normal and the man they talk to a lot is on sentry duty. You don't know their names but you can give a near perfect description and point them out once you have the Capt. and other guards with you.\n\n\nYou move quickly over to the Captains' fire where he is talking with a runner from a temporary camp up ahead. He motions for you to wait until he is finished, you are impatient to tell him what you know but have no choice but to wait a moment since you don't want to blurt it out in public. One of the cooks hands you ale and you sip at it nervously as you wait. The man drops his tray against your ankle as he passes and you almost jump out of your skin but just about remain calm and give him a nod when he apologizes.\n\n\nTheres no sign of the men and you only wait one minute but you are dripping with sweat as he waves you over. You realize its FAR too much sweat as you try and speak and feel your throat close over and collapse at his feat. The Capt. immediately calls over a medic and crouches beside you but you are suffocating and he cant help, the medic runs over and immediately points out two small puncture wounds on your ankle. \"He's been bitten, looks like Asp poison, I'm sorry but theres nothing we can do.\"\n\n\n\"It was the cook, he poisoned me and stabbed my leg when he dropped his try!\" you try to shout, but all that comes out is a rasp.\n\n\nYou fade into black as you hear the Capt. ordering the men to kill all snakes on site and double check all kit before use.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wait it out and see what he says the next night, theres too much truth in what he says to ignore it all.", "result": "You've had your doubts all along so now you want the facts. You wait till evening when you are all making camp and head out to the edges where the two men normally set up their bedrolls. It isn't long before they come over, set theirs up near you and join you at the fire. \"So you didn't try to turn us in?\"\n\n\n\"I thought about it a lot but I need to hear what you have to say.\"\n\n\n\"Hmm honesty at least, I'm not sure I would have trusted you if you said it didn't cross your mind.\" he gives you a smile then moves closer so he can speak in a lower voice. \"Everything I said last night is true and we have the proof with us, letters and land deals signed by keys members of the council, all encouraging the war. One was even stupid enough to put in writing that he had captured the two Carn ships to use in 'plan spark'. Others talk about preparing for war and the buildup of the army being hidden from Carn's spies. Even the torture and murder of people they think might betray them or go to the king. Basically everything we need to avert a war and have the king put the men to justice.\"\n\n\nYou think for a while and decide if they really have all this proof that you are going to help them, besides now that you know this much you are sure they would kill you if you show any sign or betraying them. You talk till sundown about plans and strategies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reaching the Front Lines", "result": "The marching is taken slowly but efficiently and you approach the lines in just under two weeks. The Capt calls a halt for the evening about half a day out from the front lines and says that he plans to arrive by lunchtime tomorrow so you better all clean up your gear and look presentable for the last march.\n\n\nThat night you and the two men set up your sleeping rolls near the edge of camp like normal and the man you often see them talking to goes on sentry duty nearby. Its all been arranged for midnight when all but the sentries are asleep.\n\n\nThe three of you stay awake and near midnight you all pack up your rolls and sneak over to the sentry who steps back into the light. One more man joins you and the five of you slip out of the camp then turn towards the front lines and break into a jog. The weeks on the road has made you strong and fit so you all go double time for the first few hours before slowing to a normal fast marching pace.\n\n\nThe man who is obviously the leader calls back to you all \"Right we need to get across by sunrise today or our chances of survival are near zero, our Proprietor has provided us a rough map of the front line fortifications as of when we left the city and plans of what work should have been completed since we will be heading about 2 miles south of the road where there shouldn't be any defenses in place yet so we will only have sentries to deal with.\"\n\n\nYou start marching again when you suddenly remember a conversation you had with Capt. Argor only 2 days back\n\n\n\"Wait!\" everyone stops and looks back at you \"listen, I was letting the Capt. go on about his love of rocks again when he mentioned a runner from the front, he said they came across solid granite just south of the road so moved a mining operation there at short notice, if its close to our crossing point it'll be swarming with men.\"\n\n\nThe leader stares at you for a second before considering the map again.\n\n\n\"Good work Glor, we cant afford to meet to many guards, so its north 5 miles instead. Double time people!\"\n\n\nYou all set off at a fast jog and your just glad you let the Capt. talk about rocks.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reaching Carn", "result": "Your leader guides you skillfully through he front lines, avoiding encampments and guards and you get across the lines with only one guard killed. You are sad that one had to die but there was no other way and plenty more would die if you didn't succeed.\n\n\nYou get through as dawn begins to break and all collapse two miles across the lines from exhaustion. You've all been jogging in full gear for just over 7 hours now and are all spent but you're across the lines and the leader says you can rest. You don't know what to expect but you soon see a small farmers cart approaching your position. The leader quickly speaks to the man and you all pile into the back as he turns back towards Carn and whips the horses into a trot.\n\n\nThe journey from there is uneventful, you all change out of your gear into nondescript clothing and the other men all have identification which marks them out as working for Carn's king so no soldiers bother you.\n\n\nYou reach Carn after several days hard travel, swapping carts a few times.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The War", "result": "THIS IS THE SECOND BEST ENDING, THE SOLDIERS ENDING.\n\n\n CONGRATULATIONS!\n\n\nOnce in Carn you are taken before the king and your leader makes his report after presenting the documents. King Hader immediately sends them to his scribes who make several copies and over the next few days they are smuggled out of Carn to all near-by kingdoms. King Hader also sends several emissaries to your City and is finally granted a cease-fire when one of your kings high council personally intervenes and tells the king that the council had been blocking Carn's requests and emissaries from reaching him. The Councilor was in fact your proprietor and was able to tell the king some of the truth of the situation.\n\n\nOnce the king knows he was being lied to he immediately took control of the military and ordered a cease-fire and confined the council to chambers under guard until he had found out the truth. And once the truth came out the entire council bar one was hung from the city gates. Peace was made between the two kingdoms and it was all due to you hearing your captain talk about his love of rocks.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"We'll were just soldiers, and new ones at that, guess its not really our place to question things we don't understand.\"", "result": "The two men seem to think about what you said for an age before finally replying.\n\n\n\"Well you might be right, have a good night since I'm not entirely convinced Arbor there is going to easy on the marching tomorrow!\" He gives you a smile and a bit of a funny wave as he stands up from the fire and you return the gesture before taking your soup from the fire and having your supper.\n\n\nLuckily the next day the Capt. does go a lot easier on you all, making the First Point in 1 day seemed to pacify him somewhat. He now is mostly quite congenial between short bursts of calling your all little girls but you think its just his way of encouraging you.\n\n\nThe next two of weeks passes very uneventfully as you march towards the border with days pretty much consisting of March, Eat, Sleep then march some more, when the capt. points out that you are all crossing the old border and into new territory. You think that it seems pretty close considering how far North you used to go mining and hear Capt. Argor saying that he can explain the local borders to anyone who wants.\n\n\nYou make the mistake of asking and after a very long a boring talk (maps appear to be Argor's passion but he is only sad he dosn't have an advanced editor to insert one here.) it is explained to you. To the North of your home city your borders are greatly extended due to the western mountain range as it slowly curves North and East and meets the sea. So since the mountains are hard to cross most of the year, your city controls all the encircled land, and since its safer there, that is where it has most of its farms and townships. Whereas to the south and east other nations have encroached significantly closer over the more open and less defensible terrain. Sadly he doesn't stop there and starts going into the different types of rocks in each area and you gather that this is some sort of hobby of his.\n\n\nWorn out by the talk of maps you bed down for your first night in the newly claimed territory. Since Argor kept you up talking about the types of rock in different areas of the kingdom most of the sleeping spots are full.", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab the spot beside the Capt. as its nearest.", "result": "Just as you lie down to sleep you see the two men who had approached you a couple of weeks before walking nearby, you give them a nod and they give you a wave and wish you a good nights sleep.\n\n\nNothing had come of the talk they had tried to start so you think to yourself that you had been very paranoid in suspecting perfectly normal guys in your own unit and drift off to sleep telling yourself that you should chat with them over supper sometime since they seemed nice enough.\n\n\nThe morning feels much like any other as you all pack up and start marching but you cant help but think about the fact that this used to all be ruled by a different kingdom, there is even the occasional sign of battle along the road. Whether from small skirmishes or a full battle you cant tell but the Capt. seems perfectly content to ignore it all and carry on down the road so you all just follow. He occasionally calls back a running commentary on the rocks and geology of the area but you all mostly ignore him when he does this.\n\n\nThe Capt. calls back \"Two weeks more and we hit the forward base sites and begin our work. Just remember that this used to be enemy territory so keep your eyes open as we go just incase.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Nearing the New Border", "result": "The marching is taken slowly but efficiently and you approach the lines in just under two weeks. The Capt calls a halt for the evening about half a day out from the front lines and says that he plans to arrive by lunchtime tomorrow so you better all clean up your gear and look presentable for the last march.\n\n\nHaving not gotten round to it before now you decide to spend supper chatting to the men who had approached you before. As you approach the fire one gives you a slightly cagey look but the other welcomes you and you all soon chatting happily away about life back in the city and plans for after the war. One or two others join you round the fire and by the time you head to sleep your feeling pretty silly for mistrusting their intentions at first.\n\n\nHaving had a tankard or two at the fire you readily fall asleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "Morning awaits", "result": "The morning horn is pretty normal, as is the packing up of the camp and forming up although you are all the shiniest you have looked since first got your armor since you were all told to look good for your final arrival.\n\n\nThe only trouble starts right before you are all due to set off and stems from the fact that 4 men are missing along with all their gear. The Capt. orders an immediate search of the camp and area around it but nothing is turned up. He seems genuinely angry for the first time and mutters about men being dragged naked behind horses before ordering the march to begin at double time since its an hour late.\n\n\nAfter an hour of double time he calls normal march and shouts back to the squad.\n\n\n\"Well boys it appears you have now seen the ugliest part of army life, deserters. I'm going to tell you now that running off after you enlist and gain your armor is a very, very bad idea. The day you left training you swore to serve your country for at least 3 years so breaking that oath is treason and trust me on this, we deal with treason VERY harshly.\"\n\n\nThe proclamation is met with silence as you all try and think of who is missing, you think that you might have an idea when the Capt. begins to speak again.\n\n\n\"Now once we reach the temporary camps we are not going to enjoy a nice lunch like I planned, instead I will have to report this and each and every one of you will be questioned by some of our... lets call them information retrievers for now. So I'm going to give you all some honest advice. Do not lie to them, do not hold back and do not try and make things up. If you are honest, you'll have a two minute chat and be in the lunch tent right after. If they catch you lying you'll be in a whole lot more trouble. You all understand?\"\n\n\nThe squad replies with a resounding \"Yes Sir!\" then marches in silence until shortly before noon when a runner approaches from up ahead. Its a scout from the camp up ahead and he chats to the Capt. before running back the way he came. The Capt. thinks for a bit before addressing you all.\n\n\n\"Well it seems that our deserters tried to cross the lines some time this morning and get over to the enemy side, it also appears that they were carrying some important documents with them. They didn't make it. This wont change our plans at all but just a reminder for you all, be completely honest when questioned and you'll be fine.\"\n\n\nOnce you reach the camp you are all surrounded then guided to a large tent by soldiers from another squad whose emblem you don't recognize. You are informed that you are all here for a quick chat at the request of the intelligence section and that you should wait patiently to be called through as it shouldn't take long.\n\n\nThe man seemed nice and reassuring but being 'invited for a chat by the intelligence section' doesn't calm you down much.\n\n\nYour turn finally comes and you are lead through a tent opening into smaller adjoining tent with an old small man waiting behind a desk. You notice another man standing to the side poking at a lamp seemingly trying to get a steady glow from it as it flickered and spluttered.\n\n\nThe small man looks up and smiles \"Come in and have a seat, don't mind my colleague there, he just refuses to requisition a new lamp if he feels he can fix that one.\" The other man just grunts and nods in your direction before turning back to the lamp and swearing at it under his breath as he started fiddling with it again.\n\n\n\"So I'll be honest with you\" he begins \"The men that deserted your company may have been trying to take documents containing very classified information regarding our city over to the enemy. We simply need to know everything we can to ensure nothing got through that could put our city in danger, do you understand?\" he waits for you to nod before continuing. \"So if you could please tell us anything you think is important I'll note it down then you can be on your way to the lunch tent which I believe will be something nice today.\"\n\n\n\"Rabbit stew and potatoes.\" interjects the man at the lamp.\n\n\nThe small man laughs before continuing \"My colleague keeps a close eye on the menus, but we must be getting on, so do you have anything you feel might be important to share with us?\"\n\n\nThe men seem congenial and relaxed and this isn't exactly an interrogation so you quickly decide what to say", "action_results": [{"action": "No need to mention a few small chats and get yourself in trouble. You say that you dont really know anything, you may have said a few words to them but dont really know them or what they planned.", "result": "You didn't exactly lie to them at all but you left out quite a few details here and there. No point in mentioning things that might make you look bad since you didn't really have anything to do with it now is there?\n\n\nWell, The small man behind the desk doesn't seem quite as sure so asks one last question.\n\n\n\"There aren't any small details you may have left out are there, anything connected to the men or what they may have been thinking?\"\n\n\nHaving come this far you arn't about to make yourself look worse by changing story so you deny knowing more.\n\n\nThe little man thinks for a second then gives his colleague a small nod then turns back to you \"Thank you for your time Glor, my colleague here will point out the lunch tent to you, I believe that captain Argor is waiting anxiously there for you all, he acts like a bullying older brother, but like older brothers he does care about you all. goodbye.\"\n\n\nYou thank him and follow then grunting lamp obsessed man out of the rear tent flaps.\n\n\nYou got away with it!\n\n\nThe man holds aside the flaps for you and points towards a large tent with a blue pendant flying above it. \"That one.\" he mumbles at you then starts you turn back into the tent.\n\n\nYou take a step forward before everything goes instantly black.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Waking up?", "result": "You wake up in a small room with earth walls, you look round and realize you must be underground. You feel restraints on your arms and legs but can see the small man sitting near you. He is arranging small metal and bone implements on a table beside him. He begins to speak without taking his eyes off his task.\n\n\n\"good evening Glor, you have been asleep for several hours now while we finished the rest of our chats. Unfortunately you were clearly holding back when we talked so now I must find out exactly what you weren't telling us.\"\n\n\nYou immediately try to explain but realize your mouth isn't obeying you and you can at best make a slobbery grunting noise.\n\n\n\"Ah yes that is a drug I have given you. most people start talking far to fast and saying anything they think I want to hear at this point. To stop that behavior I have taken your power of speech for about half an hour. After half an hour the drug will wear off and you can start talking but until then I am going to make sure you understand that I want the EXACT TRUTH and nothing else. Not the smallest detail missing and not the smallest one invented. Now lets begin.\"\n\n\nThe pain is more than you imagined possible and you are informed that you have also been given drugs that appear to prevent people from going unconscious due to pain so that you have no escape. The man is as good as his word and by the time half an hour is up you are screaming wordlessly.\n\n\nhe stops and gives you time to recover and let the pain ebb away.\n\n\n\"Now you see how serious I am about the truth do you not?\"\n\n\nYou croak a yes in reply before telling him everything, every detail about the men you remember, every word you remember being said and everyone you saw them even talking to over a fire. After you are finished he asks a few questions he seems satisfied.\n\n\n\"Thank you Glor, now I see no hesitation at all in your eyes and your story perfectly matches what we already knew to be fact so I know you are telling the truth.\"\n\n\nYou sag back against the hard table relieved. he gives you something to drink before continuing.\n\n\n\"Now sadly I have made a small mess of a few parts of your body and some of the acids I used on you leave horrific scars and other damage. Also you now know about our section and its methods so you cannot be released incase you spread this information further. Ironically information about us and our commander was part of what those traitors were trying to smuggle out!\"\n\n\nYou try to object but realize the drink he gave you was the drug that paralysis your mouth.\n\n\n\"Now Glor since you were honest with me your death with be very swift, and do not worry, you body will be returned to the city as evidence of the horrible torture our enemies do to captured soldiers.\"\n\n\nYou barely even see his hand slip forward to slide his small blade into your neck and sever your spinal cord.\n\n\nYou die instantly.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Complete honesty is best even if you might look bad. You tell everything from when you first had doubts, them approaching you and the last night by the fire.", "result": "You were warned not to lie to these people and you don't plan too. Even if they seem nice, they are still intelligence workers so you cant be too careful.\n\n\nYou tell them the entire story of meeting the men, you tell them every detail you remember about them before and after they approached you. You even tell them anything you think might have given them reason to talk to you. After your done the small man smiles encouragingly and asks a few small questions to clarify details before putting his quill down.\n\n\n\"Well thank you Glor, I do believe you've told us everything you know. You didn't even try to hold back minor details that may have made you look bad but don't worry, you having some doubts isn't a crime and I'm sure the commanders here can put any of your fears to rest. Now I believe the Captain is waiting anxiously in the lunch tent for you all. He puts on a strong front but he always takes care of men in his charge, now go enjoy your lunch, my colleague there will point the tent out to you.\"\n\n\nThe grunting lantern obsessed man waves you over to the back of the tent and opens the flaps for you \"The one with the blue pendant.\" he points to a large tent some way across the camp \"Rabbit stew today.\" he adds before retreating back into the tent.\n\n\nYou call you thanks and head to the tent. The little man was right and Capt. Argor is waiting at the entrance, he gives you a reassuring smile and sends you over to the long table where the squad mates who went in before you are all sitting and dishing out stew from a central pot.\n\n\nAs the lunch hour passes all but 1 of your squad makes an appearance. The Captain calls you all over and you hear him muttering that he told him not to try and lie before he addresses you all properly. \"Right boys you've been spoken too, had some good grub and not its time to meet the rest of the 3rd! We have the main barracks tent in this camp so the commander will give you all a once over before your all assigned duties. Follow me.\"\n\n\nNo-one asks about the missing squad member and several others had heard the Captain's muttering so you all march to the 3rd companies barracks tents in silence thinking that this camp may not be as welcoming as everyone seems so very keen to make out.", "action_results": [{"action": "The New Commander", "result": "Once you reach the 3rd Companies HQ tent you are all looked over by an older officer who is introduced as the 3rd's commander, and one of the highest ranked officers on the front lines. He gives a welcoming speech and tells a few of his old military stories to try and make you feel at home but ends with telling you all that one of your number ran off during questioning towards the front lines so was probably working with the others that had disappeared.\n\n\nHe quickly changes the subject and tells you that the most important matter at hand is getting this base up and running. You can see the start of the fortifications from here and the men working on them so he leaves you back in the care of Capt. Argor (who it appears requested to be assigned to your squad) and he takes you to the work site.\n\n\nOnce there you are divided into smaller teams and sent off to the areas that suit your skills best but 2 other highly trained men and your self are kept back and are taken to the work-site overseer's tent. Due to your experience you each given teams to command and areas of the fort to work on, The deadlines are strict but your labor is made up of disciplined soldiers so work should progress quickly.\n\n\nWeeks pass and the forts defenses and main buildings are fully constructed right on schedule. Capt. Argor calls in a few of the team leaders including yourself for a chat.\n\n\n\"Well boys the work here has gone great, but the 1st and 2nd haven't been idle either and and still pushing on ahead. Resistance is growing as they near Carn but we should have it under siege but the time spring hits. That being the case we need men and overseers on the front lines to quickly erect new defense lines and set up all the siege works once we reach their walls. The rest will remain here to finish off these forts and make them defensible and livable for years to come. I for one will be heading forward, its dangerous but I was never one for waiting around, who else wants the exciting job?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Head to the front and eventually the siege lines", "result": "The trip to the front is a long one, each day away from the newly built forts increases the risk of being attacked by small bands of skirmishers or partisans that might be in the area. Your party has an escort from the 1st but you only number 100 men and so everyone is kept watchfull and double sentries are posted each night.\n\n\nAlong the way you stop at the small temporary encampments your army is using to move the supplies, no more than palisade walls around bare earth but each time your group stops for a day or two to help fortify the camp before moving on. Finally after many days of marching and building your company arrives at the front lines, they have been pushing ahead each day against increasing resistance but the enemy seems to retreat each time it has lost the advantage.\n\n\nCapt. Argor confides in you that he hates the tactic but that its been their most effective one of the war. They set up small ambushes and skirmishers to engage your vanguard into each fight blocking the advance. They would just keep moving and plow over the small attacks but very occasionally its a much bigger force and plowing ahead would lead to massive casualties. So most days the march is interrupted and temporary defenses erected.\n\n\nThe advance continues this way until you are within sight of the city and the clear plains around it prevent any large numbers of troops to be hidden.\n\n\nSpring is just about to begin as your troops encircle the city and you and the rest of the 3rd start building defenses and war machines.", "action_results": [{"action": "Final Charge", "result": "Your troops are elated about beginning the siege as they see it as a much safer occupation than marching through hostile woods and you share their relief. Your men work quickly and in a couple of days you are beginning to see walls, ditches and palisades spring up around the city.\n\n\nYou mainly work on erecting palisades behind shallow ditches but lend a hand to the construction of the massive trebuchet that are going to bombard the cities walls. You feel that the work is going well and that within a week your army will have a very strong position ready to repel any final attacks.\n\n\nUnfortunately Carn does not wait for the week to end and instead attacks in force. Just before dawn they flood out of a merchants gate and launch a full scale attack on your encircling lines. You have some defenses in place but there are still gaps and it is through one of the gaps that they push. Capt. Argor hearing the horn rouses you all instantly and orders you into full armor.\n\n\n\"Now is the time we draw swords with the rest! We built these defenses and now we man them ourselves!\"\n\n\nHe leads you all out and into the camp, as you move forward you can see fires spreading and hear the din of battle. Your army hadn't been as prepared as it should have been and it seemed that every man in Carn was on the field in full armor. The Capt. upon seeing the state of the camp lead you in front of the medical tents and ordered you into a defense line before running inside.\n\n\nOnce he returns he explains whats happening.\n\n\n\"They are attacking and making ground through the camps fast. These are the medical tents, sick and injured are being evacuated by the staff as we speak but we need to buy them time. We hold here. No retreat untill they are safe you understand me?\"\n\n\nYour squad responds with a resounding \"Yes Sir!\" and prepare for the onslaught.\n\n\nIt comes fast and is brutal. A full platoon of enemy soldiers charges you shield line and is in the process of breaking through when they are hit in the flank by a squad from the 3rd who were barracked elsewhere. They join your defense as the enemy regroups and you start gathering stragglers from defeated squads.\n\n\nThe enemy attacks relentlessly but each time you just hold the line long enough, then finally the all clear is given from behind. Your squad gives a ragged cheer and those left standing begin to try and retreat. Sadly the enemy has been reinforced and hits you hard, finally smashing through your defense line and overrunning the tents.\n\n\nYou fight bravely and have used your skills to take down several attackers but you are tired and you shield arm slips long enough for a spear to take you in the side. You fall and look up at one of your attackers officers as the rest push over you to get at the retreating defense lines. You see him pause to look down.\n\n\nYou manage to say \"We will still win the war, My home will be avenged.\"\n\n\nHe looks down at you with something akin to pity \"Avenged? We never attacked you, your own council sent the burning ships so they could invade us, no, there will be no vengeance for your home here.\"\n\n\nThen he takes a soldiers pity on you and ends it all.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Stay back to finish off the fort's defences", "result": "The Capt. Looks right at you obviously wanting you to volunteer but you don't raise your hand and silently watch as he and the group of volunteers head out to the front.\n\n\nThe rest of you get back to work and the teams that no longer have overseers are split between you, but you know the work by now and more importantly most of the workers in the 3rd have been building these forts for years so know the work whether you do or not. The fort is finished on schedule and your men even find time to do some minor detailing on the wood and stone to make it feel more like a town than a front line fort.\n\n\nNews comes in from the front and you hear about your army's advance, and as spring is about to start you hear that Carn is finally encircled and that the siege lines are being build by the 3rd company already. You are once again amazed by the fast progress but keep your concerns to yourself.\n\n\nA few of you are given minor promotions for the speedy work and are retained at the fort for maintenance work and the continued important works that the commanders want. Your company has even managed to bring out or build proper long tables and roasting pits for the food hall. Its just when you are on your way to a meeting concerning the replacement of a wooden structure with stone that the news comes in.\n\n\nCarn launched a major counterattack from their city before the defenses and war machines were ready. they were beaten back but your army suffered very heavy casualties, some squads and platoons being completely wiped out. You ask about the 3rd but are told that they heroically held a defense line in front of the medic tents against horrific odds, most of them are getting medals for it but only 6 out of the 100 men there survived so the medals will be posthumous.\n\n\nFeeling saddened by the news you barely hear about how the Carn army was beaten back in the nick of time by a flanking maneuver. Nor do you listen to reports that bombardment of the city started with firebombs in 'revenge for the Old Quarter'.\n\n\nYou stay on at the fort for a few weeks then head back to the city as a military man, you settle into a city construction position and take no further part in the war, which quickly ends with your city's complete victory.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "You dont really want to sleep near the Capt. in case he tries to talk about rocks again in the morning, sleep out at the edge of the camp.", "result": "You head right out to the edge of the camp and set up your bedroll, you don't mind this as your used to sleeping in the wild and there is still the ring of sentries beyond the reach of the light. You drift off to sleep watching the stars and thinking about whether you prefer hare or rabbit in stews.\n\n\nYou awake to a slight noise near your head. You groggily sit up and see one of the sentries has come just into the firelight and at least two men were walking past your bed roll in full gear towards him. They freeze as they see you move before one comes close. Its one of the men who approached you before.\n\n\nHe squats down beside you and quickly whispers \"I'm sorry, we did give you a chance but theres no going back now.\"\n\n\nYou take a moment to wonder what he means since your still half asleep but before you can say anything you feel a wetness on your neck and chest. You try to speak but just gurgle blood and realize he had cut your throat.", "action_results": []}]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Head down and head out! The army awaits!", "result": "The Army must be pretty dam good since they have been advancing so far, you do have some niggling doubts about just HOW well they are doing but what is the point in raising them now?\n\n\nYou see a soldier you don't recognize step forward.\n\n\n\"Right then, I'm Capt. Argor. Since I took an arrow in the knee and had to come back here for treatment, I've been given the onerous task of accompanying you to the front lines to make sure you ladies don't get lost. You were all told to report here in full gear and with all your supplies so has anyone left anything behind that they just must run back to their rooms for? Hankies? Training Bra? No? Good, I might not have to babysit you all quite as much as I feared, lets head out cos this is gonna be a long trip for you city folk.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "To First Point", "result": "You are given a break for lunch with only cold rations, then double speed marched hard till dusk. The Capt. Pulls you all off the road beside a small stream and even though your all ready to collapse and pass out he has you form up.\n\n\n\"Right then, this is first point spring. A few generations back some officers from the 1st and 2nd companies were insulting the 3rd, saying we weren't real soldiers because we just built things while they won the war. Our officers didn't take too kindly to this and lets just say a bit of an argument broke out. After the tempers calmed a bit our men challenged the rest of the army to prove their supposed superiority\"\n\n\nHe paused to give you all a big grin.\n\n\n\"Our boys in the 3rd work hard every day moving timber and stone, carrying loads long distances and almost never take days off. Their boys sit on their arses most of the time and only train short periods a day when they aren't actively attacking something. So our officers said they should all go for a little march. You all just made it here within daylight hours which isn't bad at all for this time of year. The 1st and 2nd company soldiers made it in about the same. OUR officers beat them by 3 hours and had a full camp set up and running by the time they limped in. They looked up from their fires and said this is normally just the first point the 3rd stop at before marching on but they had thought they should wait for them to catch up. Its been known as first point ever since. Now anyone joining the 3rd makes the march, so welcome to the 3rd gentlemen, now get our camp up!\"\n\n\nRelieved that Capt. Argor wont be calling you all girls for the rest of the march you all set up camp and get some fires going. You're just settling down beside your fire to have supper when a couple of other come over and join you.\n\n\n\"Hey there mind if we join you?\"\n\n\nYou nod to a rock near the fire \"Of course.\"\n\n\nAfter sitting and eating for a minute one of the men turns to you, \"We should be honest with you, we didn't join you just for the company this evening. We have had something on our minds recently and thought you might be thinking the same things as us.\" After a pause where he looks carefully at your expression he starts again \"We are concerned about just how fast the war is going, how one-sided it is and maybe even some of the stories about why it started. We asked about it quietly before and the commander just told us its because we were better prepared than before and broke their defense lines. What do you think?\"\n\n\nYou think slowly before the reply", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Earn the last few coins and enjoy the leasurely trip back now you have no rush after all.", "result": "Your group numbers around a dozen workers and stays on over the weekend and most of the next week, dismantling old shacks and helping construct the permanent miners residences. The work is relatively easy after the hard labor of the mining and although the pay is low your still getting free food and a place to sleep. Once the work is done you all collect your pay from the overseer on the Friday, a week after the other group had left, and start a leisurely trip down the south road.\n\n\nYour group sets an easy pace stopping for at least an hour each meal and taking the occasional day out in farms and way houses that some of the other men knew from previous trips. You don't encounter any or the rumored bandits on the road but a dozen well built and fairly well armed men must make a less appetizing target for bandits. All in all you make terrible time back to the city but you really don't care as you enjoy the company and find the lack of rush very relaxing.\n\n\nSince you have plenty of time you all discuss future plans, some are just going to sit out the winter in the city living off their wages then head back out to new mines. A few are lifers and will be clocking in with their guild as soon as they get back ready to be sent on the next job and a couple like you are going to take a year or two out, one even gives you a name to ask about a flat in the Iron district.\n\n\nIts only when you all wake one morning expecting to see your first glimpse of the far off city in the dawn light and instead see a plume of pure black rising miles into the sky that you all start rushing back to the city as fast as you can.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Blackened Homecoming", "result": "Your group practically runs the entire way back to the city making it back well before the sun is at its peak. You all go through the main gates into the Iron district and down towards the source of the smoke. It quickly becomes clear that its the old District, the area you grew up and where you know your closest friend should be running his fathers tavern. as you get close to the wall separating the districts of the city you start to meet groups of people just standing and staring, all seemingly in shock. Most are the better dressed of the affluent Iron district but you see the occasional Old district dwellers, standing alone or in twos and threes, but all equally lost or in shock.\n\n\nYou approach the nearest group and ask what is going on.\n\n\n\"Fire, just a bloody huge fire. It spread in seconds. we didn't have time to do anything. Just ran. We were bringing some fabrics up from the dock, only reason we made it, we were only one street from the gate. Oh God..\"\n\n\nYou leave the man as he sinks to the ground and stares towards the high walls.\n\n\nYou had only been looking at the people and the smoke before but now you just stared blankly towards where the wall separated the districts and just see an orange glow over the wall with plumes of black filling the air above it. Thinking of you friend and his tavern located close to the docks you sprint down to the gates but once you get there you find them closed and barred shut. grabbing the nearest guard you shout for them to be open so you can get to your friend but he just stares blankly back at you obviously shocked dumb then walks away. The gate captain walks over and tells you that if anyone is still in there and didn't get out before the gates had to be shut, that there was no chance of them being alive. You start to tell him that he is wrong and needs to open the gates when he takes you over to them and tells you to put a hand on them.\n\n\nYou reach out and feel the gates metal almost hot enough to burn you. The captain quietly tells you that the fire started late the last evening. It came at the worst possible time. it had been dry for weeks and wooden buildings had been built right from the shore to the base of the wall, all stocked full of the years produce, hay, wheat, pelts and oils. most of it flammable. The wind blowing in from the sea had fanned it into an inferno almost as soon as the first warehouses had gone up. It had spread unnaturally quickly and only the closing of the huge gates had stopped it spreading through into this district too. The gates would stay closed until the embers were cold, and that could take a couple of days at least without any rain to quench them.\n\n\nYou stand and stare over the wall for what seems like an eternity then quietly turn and walk back up into the Iron district. You take your road companions advice and speak to the man he mentioned about a flat and find that he did have one free. You agree to the price almost without listening then buying a cheap bottle of mead you head back out to watch the place you grew up burn down to the ashes before collapsing into your bed long evening fell.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "It's not worth it, Start your journey south", "result": "Having decided to head back south you set off back the way you came. As you near the turn off to you old camp you see a new sign has been erected pointing the way to the new mine, a sure indicator that new guards and an official are there now. That means no easy nights rest there as they are always careful to keep hangers on and travelers well away from the mines \"to keep them from getting any ideas about the silver\" as you were once told.\n\n\nYou camp off the other side of the road then continue south in the morning.", "action_results": [{"action": "The South Road", "result": "As you start down the southern road you think to yourself that it's been such a long time since you were back in the city that you're not sure that you'll even recognize it. Yet, despite all the supposed changes and improvements, one thing that would never change is the Old Quarter on the south bank where the river joins the sea. For as long as anyone could remember, the wooden buildings had stood virtually unchanged as the rest of the city rose and fell with the economy and rulers of the time. The Old Quarter was filled with dock-side housing, markets and way-stations for travellers; and it had been your home before you left to find work.\n\n\nHaving done your time in the mines and come away with a reasonably full purse you don't feel the need to hurry as you walk, so you are enjoying the experience of not having to rush to get to your next job. You don't see any signs of other travellers until early evening when a mid-sized group of workers and a few guards pass, marching double time to the north.\n\n\nYou carry on till it\"s nearly dark and set up camp in some woods beside the road.", "action_results": [{"action": "Morning on the south road", "result": "You quickly pack up your camp and set off south just as dawn reaches over the horizon, then realize ruefully that you could have slept in. As you walk, you think on other habits you've picked up in the mines. Most were useful but getting up at dawn and sleeping at dusk would be pointless in the city where everyone rises late...\n\n\nYou are so engrossed in your thoughts that you barely notice the two figures on horseback when they join the road not far ahead of you and start moving south at a slightly slower pace than yourself.\n\n\nYou come out of your thoughts with a start as you notice them barely twenty paces ahead of you. Reflexively, your hand drifts down to your knife, just in case. But just as quickly you realize they are dressed as local land owners and one is a woman so you relax and hail them.\n\n\n\"Hey there, heading down to the city?\"\n\n\nThey turn back to you and both smile before the man replies \"Of course, there isn't too much else this way but we would be happy for some company if you'd like to join us?\"\n\n\nYou quickly catch up then fall in with them. You pass the time in conversation and learn that they are indeed local land owners heading to their house in the city for a few weeks. You tell them that you're just out from the mines and heading back for a well-earned rest. The day passes with you trading minor pleasantries and you agree to share a camp near the road for the evening. \n\n\nIt's just unfortunate that as you take out your sleeping roll the man clubs you behind the head and rides back north with the woman and almost all your belongings as you lie unconscious on the ground beside the fire.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Painful Morning", "result": "You wake beside the cold ashes of the small fire only wearing your shirt, trousers and boots. Everything else, including all your coin, has been taken. You curse yourself for trusting the couple from the night before simply because one was a woman and try to take stock.\n\n\nYou can't head North again, as in your current state you probably won't find another job for weeks and you can't even feed yourself so you're left with three choices: tightening your belt (well holding your trousers tight as your belt has been taken too) and heading to the city as fast as you can to hope for work/food there; hunting after the people that robbed you; or looking for the first trail off the road that might lead to a farm where you can ask for help or some work in exchange for food.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go After The Robbers", "result": "You think to yourself \"Screw this, I worked too hard to give up all that money so easily!\" You head north after the robbers, keeping just off the road in the trees in case they are waiting for you. \n\n\nYou follow their trail north for nearly the whole day until you find them leading off towards where the couple had first entered the road. You know since they were on horseback that they probably made it back the same evening, so you hope that after a whole day they would have become complacent.\n\n\nYou decide that:", "action_results": [{"action": "They are going to be complacent and you are a decent fighter, straight down the track after them!", "result": "You think you could take them in a clean fight as the woman seemed small and the man didn't seem like much of a fighter - He had just taken you by surprise before. You start quickly down the trail after the marks left by the horse and after half an hour you see signs of smoke ahead\n\n\nLooking through the trees, you see the woman grooming her mount and the man sitting by the fire, both completely unaware. You stride out into the small clearing and walk purposefully towards the sitting man.\n\n\nThe woman looks over at you and you hear her say \"Oh dear, this isn't very good, is it?\". The man glances up at you as you approach and says, \"Not good at all,\" as he starts to rise to his feet.\n\n\nYou laugh and say \"You're right! It's not very good for you. You picked the wrong man to rob!\" You smile and start to take the last steps towards the man, but as you raise your fists you feel a strange sensation, like being pushed from the side. You hear the woman saying \"Oh honey, we meant 'not good for you'. Bandits never just work in twos and this trap was intended for someone else. Since you don't have anything more of value we just need you out of the way fast\".\n\n\nYou look down at the crossbow bolt planted firmly in your side just in time to see a second one appearing in your chest with a dull thud. You sink to the ground. It all goes dark as you feel yourself hoisted up and carried into the trees.\n\n\n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Even if they are complacent, best you play it safe and try to sneak up on them through the trees and shrubs along side the track.", "result": "You've decided to play it safe, who knows if they were working alone and they may be better armed than before. Plus it would be sweet to see the mans face as he first realizes your there when you knock him out just like he did to you.\n\n\nYou sneak along near the track for close to an hour when you see smoke rising ahead from some trees. You push ahead being careful not to make any noise and approach the clearing slowly. You see the man and woman there near the fire talking and overhear snatches of conversation. You cant make it all out but it sounds like they are talking about a trap and waiting for someone.\n\n\nAre they talking about robbing you or a new trap for someone else?\n\n\nUnsure about their intent you think its best you take them by surprise either way and lift a hefty looking branch then sneak into the clearing at an angle so their backs are mostly turned to you. You approach as silently as if you were stalking a deer and slowly lift it above your head. You smile to yourself then call out \"Hey!\" just as you swing. The man looks up in shock just as the branch connects, knocking him out cold.\n\n\n\"Thats one down\" you say as you turn to the woman and heft the branch. The look of surprise on her face is priceless! \"How did you...\" she starts but you cut her off. \"Lets just say you picked the wrong guy to rob, now I don't make a habit of hitting women but I can easily make an exception so bring me everything you took, along with some food to make up for my inconvenience and I'll be going.\"\n\n\nShe just stares and asks \"But how did you get them all with just a stick?\"\n\n\nYou look at her blankly for a second and see her break into a smile \"Ooohhh, you just snuck into the clearing didn't you. I'm sorry honey but you should have realized we don't work alone, even if my guards don't make such good sentries\".\n\n\nYou glance at the trees just as several men with crossbows come running out and take aim at you. The woman backs away from you. You think it was probably a bad idea to chase after robbers in the middle of nowhere as the men open fire rendering you into a human pin-cushion.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Quick March to the City", "result": "You decide there isn't any other sensible option but to get to the city, and fast. You set off down the road at a fast walk and only stop to drink water from any streams or wells you see. You don't pass anyone else until a few days later you can see the city ahead in the far distance and collapse on the road exhausted.\n\n\nLuckily you fell near a well used field and the farmers load you onto their cart and take you the rest of the way into the city with a piece of bread to try to nibble on.\n\n\nOnce inside the gates they leave you off and after you thank them profusely, they head back out to the fields. You use the last of your energy to get yourself through the now alien feeling streets to your old area of the city and are relived to find it almost completely unchanged. You go to an old way house you knew in the hopes that the same owner was still running the place.\n\n\nAs you walk in the door a man behind a bar looks up and stares right at you for a full minute before saying \"Well this is some triumphant return, look at the state of you!\"\n\n\nYou start to explain but the man cuts you off and sends you upstairs to a small room to clean and says to come down for some hot food when you no longer smell and look like a beaten up pile of crap.\n\n\nOnce cleaned up and with a good meal inside you you tell your old friend the whole story and and he gives you two options. Work has been going well for him so he could give you a small room and meals and hire you for a low wage till you get back on your feet or you could up into the Iron district where the merchants and barracks have been hiring recently.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Iron District", "result": "You know that there is the option to join the guards as they are hiring at the moment, you'll get a basic wage but you have a bunk in the barracks and 3 good meals a day. Or you can approach the guild or large mining companies with your experience and hope for a starter job with one of them.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "You head for the barracks as the guard seems like the fastest way to get a roof overhead and food in your belly.", "result": "You talk to the guard Standing outside the barracks, the home of the city guards and he directs you round to the recruiters. The Captain there looks you over once and asks your story. You explain in light detail that you had been working the mines for years but after being robbed had nothing left so you thought the guards would be a good way to get back on your feet. He thinks for less than ten seconds before passing you a quill to sign on the line telling you that many men had joined for worse reasons and that they needed more men on patrol.\n\n\nYou sign up and after a few days initial training you're attached to a squad and send out for your first training duty. You have no weapons while in training but you are given city guard leather armor and helm and sent out for, as its summed up to you, \"Stand behind the real guards in your armor and try not to look stupid for your first week\". You manage this with flying colors (especially the not looking stupid part) then for your next training rotation your given a choice by your sergeant.\n\n\nYou can join the training squad patrolling old town docks, the \"walk up and down in armor and not look stupid\" shift as he puts it (since you wont be armed for at least a month).\n\n\nOr the Iron district guard training squad, the \"stand out of sight and don't interfere with the cites working people\" shift.", "action_results": [{"action": "The dock patrole, at least you get to walk up and down...", "result": "Well, you were right, you did indeed get to walk up and down and it was passable exercise...\n\n\nLets face it, its not what you wanted from your life, BUT after a couple more weeks you will become a full guard, proper wages and you get to have a better say in your shifts, not a bad job in all, just the training period to get through.\n\n\nThe week goes as fast as the first one and the roof over head and hearty hot meals three times a day doesn't hurt matters at all. You actually take a liking to the patrol there as you get to stop and chat to the sailors and vendors along the dockside. The sailors there are self policing as a rule so you rarely have to step in to do anything dangerous.\n\n\nThe weeks pass and as you become a fully fledged member of the guard you make the docks your regular patrol, its a lot longer of a walk from the barracks on the other side of the Iron district but you like the atmosphere and relaxed attitude of the work. The occasional sneak thief or pick pocket are the worst of the criminals on your watch and you get to know the locals on your rounds on a first name basis, you even have time and enough spare coin to stop in for drinks with your old friend on occasion after work and he seems happy about how you landed on your feet.\n\n\nIts really actually starting to look up for you as time passes, you have some small savings building up again, a good job that keeps you fit and your making friends with the other guards and the locals, who like having the guards around even if they aren't usually needed. You even foster some ideas about trying to stay in the guards and move up the ranks as you watch the two large barges from Carn approaching the docks. You think they are approaching a little fast but with all the minor disputes lately they are probably just trying to bluster and throw their weight around with the smaller fishing boats near the dock.\n\n\nJust as you think about their speed you see the barge furl sails and out oars to turn and think to yourself that you were right when you realize the other had gone full sail and had smoke rising from the deck. You rush to the dock edge with the other guards and a few sailors as you watch its accelerated approach. you all realize its going to ram the old wooden dock about the same time as you see a full scale fire burst out onto the deck. You quickly look for the other ship but it had reversed course and is making haste away from the docks.\n\n\nThe sailors run for their ships and try to get them off the docks and you start forcing the crowd of gawkers away from the danger area but with the burning ship under full sail with the wind off the sea its only a few seconds more before it plows into the old docks and tears through them, crashing into two warehouses as it runs aground.\n\n\nYou start to cry out a warning as you see the ship tilt to one side spilling burning barrels full of oils and tars. But they explode as they hit the ground taking all the barrels filling the ship with them in one huge fiery explosion. You don't even have time to turn away as the blast smashes you through buildings killing you instantly and starting a fire that would incinerate the whole of the Old District", "action_results": []}, {"action": "The Iron District shift, leaning quietly against the district wall for a week is at least easy...", "result": "Well, you were right, you did indeed get to rest... and be bored...\n\n\nLets face it, its not what you wanted from your life, BUT after a couple more weeks you become a full guard with proper wages and you get to have a better say in your shifts, not a bad job in all, just the training period to get through.\n\n\nThe week goes as fast as the first one and the roof over head and hearty hot meals three times a day doesn't hurt matters at all. You actually take a liking to the shift there as you get to stop and chat to the workers and vendors along the roadside, and the guilds there are self policing as a rule so you rarely have to step in to do anything dangerous.\n\n\nThe weeks pass and as you become a fully fledged member of the guard you make the Iron district your regular patrol (yep the real guards get to walk around the district). Its short walk from the barracks and you like the atmosphere and relaxed attitude of the work. The occasional sneak thief or pick pocket are the worst of the criminals on your watch and you get to know the locals on your rounds on a first name basis. You even have time and enough spare coin to stop in for drinks with your old friend down in the Old District on occasion after work and he seems happy about how you landed on your feet.\n\n\nIts really actually starting to look up for you as time passes, you have some small savings building up again, a good job that keeps you fit and your making friends with the other guards and the locals, who like having the guards around even if they aren't usually needed. You even foster some ideas about trying to stay in the guards and move up the ranks as you walk alongside another guard down the main market street.\n\n\nYou both head back to the barracks when you're relieved as your's is the early shift that day and your entertaining the idea of another night down at your friends tavern- you've even got some friends from the guards liking the place enough to make it a regular thing for your patrol. You're just getting in the door when you hear mayhem breaking out in the barracks.\n\n\nYou push into the hall to hear the guards all shouting about a fire in the old town. You rush outside and head at a dead run to the speedily growing black cloud above the Old District.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reaching the Gates", "result": "You pull up from your run a couple of hundred feet from the gates and the wall. You just stare blankly towards where the wall separated the districts and just see a fierce orange and yellow glow over the wall occasionally punctuated by large bursts of flame with plumes of black filling the air above it. You sprint down to the gates but once you get there you find them closed and barred shut. grabbing the nearest guard you shout for them to be open so you can get to your friend but he just stares blankly back at you obviously shocked dumb then walks away. The gate captain walks over and tells you that if anyone is still in there and didn't get out before the gates had to be shut, that there was no chance of them being alive. You start to tell him that he is wrong and needs to open the gates when he takes you over to them and tells you to put a hand on them.\n\n\nYou reach out and feel the gates metal almost hot enough to burn you. The captain quietly tells you that the fire came at the worst possible time. it had been dry for weeks and wooden buildings had been build right from the shore to the base of the wall, all stocked full of the years produce, hay, wheat, pelts and oils. most of it flammable. The wind blowing in from the sea had fanned it into an inferno almost as soon as the first warehouses had gone up. It had spread unnaturally quickly and only the closing of the huge gates had stopped it spreading through into this district too. The gates would stay closes until the embers were cold, and that could take a couple of days at least without any rain to quench them.\n\n\nYou head slowly back to your room and collapse into bed unsure what to do next.", "action_results": [{"action": "Black morning", "result": "You awake in the morning unsure what to do. Your plans had been of an easy year living off your money and you could still do it, prices would probably go up for a time but you'd still comfortably now that your settled. But you were now sure you'd lost any place that you had called home and your closest friend in the fire so you at least wanted to find out what had happened.\n\n\nYou grab some food then head out to start trying to ask questions and see if anyone is the wiser about what had happened to cause the fire, and to do a last look through the survivors for any sign of your friend.\n\n\nYou ask several guards but most don't seem to know any more than you do. Eventually you see a guard that isn't a shell shocked as the rest and he tells you that the captain over at the military end of the barracks has all the information about the fire and that you should speak to him so you head there to see what he knows.\n\n\n'The Barracks' as it is generally know does contain the city guard's barracks but also the military side of things, the army barracks, its armory, offices and everything else it needed all in one giant building that straddled and made up part of the wall between the iron and stone districts. You quickly see a small group of people talking to soldiers outside one of the entrances and approach them to hear what is going on.\n\n\nIts one of the captains explaining the fire to them, a few minor details extra but basically what you had heard before. once he is done you ask him about how it started. He looks you over then send you in and tells you to talk to the man at the desk, first room on the right. You enter and realize you not left with much choice as to where to turn since there is a group of soldiers blocking the corridor a few meters away with only one door standing open between you and them. You enter and approach the man looking at you from behind the desk.\n\n\n\"What can I do for you?\"\n\n\n\"I want to know how the fire started.\"\n\n\nThe man seems mildly amused by your abrupt response but any trace of amusement quickly vanishes as he replies.\n\n\n\"A ship packed with flammable fuel was set alight and rammed into our docks. the fire was deliberate.\"\n\n\nStunned by the sudden revelation you ask \"Are your sure? wait are you just telling everyone this? wont it cause a panic?\"\n\n\n\"There's no point trying to keep it a secret, half the fishing fleet saw it happen as did many of the survivors that ran into the sea and were picked up the by the ships, the entire city will know in two days at the most.\"\n\n\n\"But who would do it, what is there to gain from burning down old district?\"\n\n\n\"We think it was Carn, at least the burning ship and the one that had been accompanying it bore their colours\"\n\n\n\"But don't we just have some minor trade disputes with them why would they do this!\"\n\n\n\"Well long story short we started full maritime trading 3 years ago, then two years ago some minor trade problems began, then it was about land, finally about fishing rights. things had been getting tense for months with armed ships keeping fishing boats company for protection and guards on our borders but no-one expected this. They have been sent ravens with questions about the ships but they will of course deny all knowledge, then it will be war. The king has already started recruiting to replace the men lost in the fire and more to fill out the army.\"\n\n\nYou just stand unsure what to say, should you hate an enemy you don't know for what they did? Denounce their tactics, or just avoid the war and try and rebuild a life in the city.\n\n\n\"So son\" the commander stands up \"we are still recruiting and the army wage is just as good as the miners one. You want to enlist?\"", "action_results": [null, {"action": "You hate what they did but you have money and a chance at a life now so it would be stupid to throw it away in a war, you politely refuse and head out.", "result": "You spend the first few days split between organizing your life, doing patrols and watching the embers of the old district burn down to cold ash. Once the gates are opened you had planned to search through the wreckage for you old friends tavern but one look through the gate shows a nondescript layer of ash evenly coating the ground as far as the outer walls and the shore, only the occasional blackened wooden timbers or cracked black stone sticking up to break the massive expanse of grey and black.\n\n\nSoldiers and workers begin repairing the walls and gates from the fire damage and as the weeks pass people begin to clear out the ash and wreckage that survived. In many places the fires burned hot enough that not even much bone was left but in others teams were on duty collecting remains and transporting them into mass graves outside the city limits.\n\n\nThe war had broken out after less than a fortnight. Carn repeatedly denied any involvement but after the trouble between the two cities and the witnesses to the ships bearing their royal colours war was inevitable. Reports said it was going our way and that we mostly had control of the seas between the cities and were making steady progress on land as well, casualties were growing but going by the weekly reports given by the guards theirs were much higher and we would have them under tight siege by the end of spring.\n\n\nYou begin helping out where you can. You time in the mines has given you a simple grasp of solid construction so whenever you aren't on patrol you join the work teams which are put together building new stone docks in place of the wood ones. You join them as skilled labor and since you don't need the money you let your wages go to re-homing the survivors. Your work and charity gets you some small attention from the survivors that make up a lot of the unskilled labor and when they learn you used to live in the old district your adopted into the 'family' again. You even meet a girl a little younger than you that lost her family in the fire. Your just friends at first with you looking out for her, then you become closer, and by the time spring draws near you marry and settle into a life in the Iron town. \n\n\nBy this time your accepting your wage since most of the survivors are now in temporary homes and your work on the docks and accepted position amongst the survivors has landed you a full time position in the construction guild overseeing some projects in the rebuilding of a new partly stone old district. The Guards saw the work you were doing and quietly let you quit as they knew you were doing better work rebuilding.\n\n\nThe War went as quickly as you had been told to expect with Carn under tight siege by spring and fallen completely by summer. your army had been ruthless , firing burning oil and tar into the city and burning their food stores whenever possible, all in 'revenge' for the old district. Their king had denied all involvement right up until the surrender but he was now exiled along with his advisors and the city under your command.\n\n\nThe world passed you by as you spent your years happily with your wife and family, there were always rumors of other wars and far off battles and victories but you didn't concern yourself with them as your city was now flourishing and always expanding and you had plenty of work as you moved up the guild ranks.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "You head for the guild as you know your experience could get you a good position if you push it enough.", "result": "You approach the miners guild with the hopes that your experience will land you some work fast, but your hope doesn't last long. They are happy enough with your resume and they even have a couple on people on staff who can vouch for your work but there are no new jobs right now and no major movements planned until the spring. They put you on the books and they guarantee you a skilled position by the time the winter snows melt but that isn't going to put food on your plate right now.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Your on the books now so what harm is there in taking up your friends offer for a few weeks?", "result": "Life isn't so bad working at the inn, you put in all the hard work required and your friend, apart from many sarcastic comments and jokes, is a good boss. You have a room and food again and start saving a small amount of coin up in the hopes of buying some new cloths and getting a better paid job eventually. After a few months you think you've saved up enough to make a go of it again in a richer part of town and let you friend know your plans.\n\n\nYou thank him for doing so much for you without really asking much in return as you know the work you did would never normally earn a wage along with room and food but he just waves you off and says the word \"friends\".\n\n\nYou arrange to finish off the week and move out as soon as you find a new job and new place to live.\n\n\nThat evening you both sit down to share a drink and talk about how to make easy money (your favorite topic since you were 10 and he was 15 working for his dad in this very bar). You glance out the window and comment that its awfully bright out for the time of day when you hear the first screams.\n\n\nYou both rush out to see a fire sweeping through the wooden buildings of the old quarter. you both turn to run but there is a wind coming off the sea pushing the fire on and the old wooden buildings are going up like kindling. In your blind sprint you both almost make it to the walls dividing the city's districts when the flames overtake you and the smoke makes you choke and fall. Its not long before you are engulfed entirely in flames.", "action_results": []}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Look for a Farm", "result": "You start walking south, keeping an eye out for any farm trails or paths that might lead somewhere. You pass several small dirt tracks but most look more like animal trails and after your run in with the robbers, you're loath to risk them. After a few hours you pass near a stream. The water looks fresh and clean, so you take the time for a quick wash-up and a long, cool drink before you continue on.\n\n\nDespite your searching, it is only a couple of hours before the light starts to fade that you come across a well-worn track leading east off the road. Its the right direction for farm country and it seems to have seen recent cart traffic, so you decide its worth a look and start down the trail.\n\n\nAfter an hour or so the track passes through a thick line of trees and you see fields beginning in front of you. It looks like a large square holding of land surrounding a large old barn and house in the middle. Several men working the fields look up as you approach and lean on their scythes and hoes, keeping a watchful eye on the trees behind you. A man walks out from the door of the house while you're still a few metres away. He smiles and greets you cordially but you're somewhat distracted by the loaded crossbow he is holding casually at his side.\n\n\nYou explain your situation to him. He eyes you shrewdly and asks a few questions about the details of your story. After a few moments of consideration, he waves the men back to work and takes you inside.\n\n\nYou get a small apology for the crossbow but he points out that, as you learned to your own loss, there are a lot of bandits about recently and you can never be too careful. That comment at least makes you smile as you clearly hadn't been very careful at all. He gives you some hot food and a bed and leaves you to recover a bit.\n\n\nThe next day you work hard in the fields helping the other workers with the carrying and loading of carts then at noon they set off in a small convoy to the city to sell goods with you riding along. \"So you reach it in one piece\" as the Farmer had said.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reaching the city", "result": "It was a long trip on the carts but the farm-hands made good company and at least you had food. They take you with them to the markets first and you help unload as thanks. Then after thanking the farmer again for his kindness, you begin to make your way through the strangely alien streets toward the area where you grew up. The city has grown so much in your absence that you had to ask directions several times before reaching the arch that has always marked the entrance to the Old Quarter. On the other side of the arch you are relived to find it almost completely unchanged. You go to an old way house you knew in the hopes that the same owner was still running the place.\n\n\nAs you walk in the door, the man behind a bar looks up and stares right at you for a full minute before saying \"Well this is some triumphant return, look at the state of you!\"\n\n\nYou start to explain, but the man cuts you off and sends you upstairs to a small room where you are able to clean up a little. A few moments later, the man returns with change of clean, serviceable clothes and invites you to come down for some hot food when you no longer smell and look like crap.\n\n\nOnce cleaned up and with a good meal inside you you tell your old friend the whole story and and he gives you two options. Work has been going well for him so he has offered you room and board in exchange for some low wage bar work till you get back on your feet or he suggests you could also try your luck up in the Iron district where the merchants and barracks have been hiring recently.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Search the camp remains for any valubles or food", "result": "Having decided to search the camp you reason that you should do it properly. You set a few snares in the trees nearby then start going over the camp carefully. You estimate that 40 to 60 people were here and they had lit a good number of fires so you search carefully around them and search in the grass beside the indents of the bedrolls.\n\n\nYou spent a couple of hours looking but apart from two miss-laid copper coins you find little of worth. Still, copper coins add up and you know what its like to go hungry so you add them to your pouch and collect up your snares. The only other thing you take is an old leather water bottle which you tie to your belt and remind yourself to fill it the next time you come across a stream.", "action_results": [{"action": "The road North again", "result": "Having finished searching the camp, you start North again on the road. You still see signs of the group ahead of you but they have well over half a days hard march on you and judging by how late they camped and how early they set off you decide that you won't be able to catch them without running for the rest of the day, and your not willing to try that just for some company. So, you set off at a steady pace North again looking for any signs of a turn off that may lead to the mine.\n\n\nYou spend an uneventful 2 days on the road, stopping occasionally to camp and refill your supplies but on the 3rd day you finally see signs that the group ahead of you turned off into the foothills west of the road.\n\n\nReasoning that such a large group must have a reason for heading into the hills, you decide that they are probably the crew for the new mine and that you've found the entrance. Knowing that with such a large group already there most jobs will be filled you can follow them and hope for some paid manual labor or you can give up on it and head South for the city. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Head into the camp", "result": "You walk into the camp drawing a few looks from the miners and guards but once you approach the man giving out orders they all lose interest.\n\n\nThe man tells your he's the camp overseer and asks you a few questions about yourself and how you found their mine. Satisfied with the explanation that his company of men had left a wide enough trail for a blind man to follow, he gets down to you main question of work.\n\n\n\"Most of the jobs, even the manual labor are filled, however we could find you some work if you're willing to do some of the more dangerous jobs that come up.\"\n\n\nHaving come this far already you reason that there's no going back now, so you agree to his terms and sign up.", "action_results": [{"action": "Work camp life", "result": "You quickly settle into the new camp. Miners are generally an accepting bunch as long as you keep your head down and work hard, so you make a few friends on the crew. The work is back breaking but it keeps you fit and most of the riskier jobs aren't that bad really, so you just get on with it, knowing that once you're done you'll head South with enough coin to take it easy for a long time to come.\n\n\nAfter a few weeks the side tunnel you're digging reaches a very promising vein but it's surrounded by weak stone. You report it to the Overseer.\n\n\nHe takes a good look at the rock and the seam and decides that it's promising enough to force a tunnel through. You aren't sure you agree, as the fractured rock crumbles through your fingers. However, he says that it's the sort of job you signed up for when he took you on and that he'll offer you an additional bonus if the vein is good. You agree and are sent in with a couple of others to mine your way through to the vein.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "There's a good chance of catching food in the trees, head East", "result": "You decide a night under the trees and a good chance of catching food are too good an opportunity to pass up so you head east into the trees till you're well away from the road. You set up a small camp and fire and set up snares out in the trees.\n\n\nNot long after darkness closed in you hear some noise in the direction of the road and go investigate. You caught a Hare! you quickly skin and gut it and are about to head back to the fire when you hear noise from further towards the road. You walk quietly closer to investigate and see a large group setting up camp on the roadside.\n\n\nYou're about to leave the cover of the trees to go greet them when you over hear their leader telling a small group to go on ahead and prepare the mine camp. They are the workers sent to open the mine your looking for! You do a fast headcount and realize about 50 workers are camped there and many look experienced.\n\n\nYou decide that they must be the main team sent up to get the mining started and realize that they will have enough skilled workers to fill most of the mining jobs there, but unskilled labor is nearly always welcome- if on a much lower pay.\n\n\nYou think about it and you decide that you can either try to join up with them and risk the lower pay, or, you can try and beat the group sent on ahead and try and secure a better job at the mine site before word reaches them of their workers being so close.", "action_results": [{"action": "Race them to the camp!", "result": "You slip away from the workers camp fires and move quickly to your own, you kick dirt over your small fire and quickly collect in your snares. You wrap the hare in some leather and put it into your pack with everything else, you'll have to cook it later.\n\n\nYou set out at a jog through the trees, you know the road keeps straight for more miles than you can see ahead so you move until you can just see glimpses of it through the trees and settle into a fast jog.\n\n\nYou keep your pace up for several hours, you know it must be after midnight now and your pretty sure you passed the men on the road so you take a short rest below an old oak tree and hope they break for sleep too.\n\n\nIn the morning you wake with the first light and quickly set off, you set a more measured pace, walking fast but not quite jogging yet. You walk as fast as you dare through the day barely taking breaks apart from to eat some dried meats. An hour or two after night sets in you decide if you haven't put some distance between you and them by now you never would, so you build a fire to cook and eat your hare then settle down to sleep.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Search", "result": "You rise at first light again, and quickly cover your fire with dirt. You head onto the road and search carefully for any sign of other men passing but find none. You must still be ahead of them, but you don't know by how much. You set off North again keeping your eye on the hills and woods to your left looking for any sight of a camp entrance or track leading away from the road.\n\n\nAfter a few hours you come across a small track leading into the hills through a copse of trees and on into the bare foothills. Its a very small track and could easily just be an animal trail but you can never be sure as people are always loath to leave any large signs of a new mine until the have laid full claim to it and got a fair number of guards in place. You spend a few minutes trying to check for other clues but in the end cant decide if it was made by men turning off the road of just some animals.\n\n\nYou could follow it further into the hills and check it out but it would be slow going and if it turned out not to be the mine it would loose you most of a days walking.", "action_results": [{"action": "Risk the trail", "result": "You decide the trail is worth the risk, its a little bigger than most animal trails and with the lengths some claimants go to to hide new mine sites it could well be the one.\n\n\nYou strike off onto the trail and after about half an hour it widens a little and you start to get more confident that you've made the right choice. A little more walking brings you to a man leaning against a tree and you think you can see a small amount of smoke over the hill behind him.\n\n\nYou approach the man as he hails you and asks your name and reason for being here. Its not the politest of greetings but you explain about coming off another mine job and hearing rumor of one here. The man looks at you for a while then tells you to follow him.\n\n\nYou follow him for 15 minutes or so till you've passed round one of the larger foothills and you come across a very small camp build around a very shallow mine entrance. You smile to yourself- Its the new mine, barely started and with only 10 or so men in sight you've beaten the others here!\n\n\nYour led up to a large man standing over a fire and are introduced to the Overseer of the new mine.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Overseer", "result": "You approach the Overseer who looks you over and repeats the questions about who you are and how you turned up at his mine entrance. You explain to him that you were a Skilled Laborer on a mine further south and that your old overseer had directed you here. Your a little liberal about the the date you left there and the amount of detail you had been told so he wasn't suspicious about your spring ahead of his expected workers. he thinks for a while and you think he has believed you. He presses for some details about your previous boss and the mine you were at then asked a lot of technical questions and posed several hypothetical situations about building mines and construction issues. It takes nearly an hour for him to be satisfied that you are who you say but finally tells you that he is from the same guild as your own boss and knows him well, since you convinced him of your ability and that your old boss recommended you he says he might take you on as a mid level skilled worker since he was a week behind and the men he had been expecting still hadn't turned up. \n\n\nHe walks off to a large, nice looking tent set up beside what looks like a half constructed stone house set off to the side of the mine entrance, he goes inside briefly then returns and tells you that the owner had agreed and you were hired, he takes you to the tent and you meet a middle aged but still fairly youthful looking man studying charts of the area with rock samples spread around the desk in front of him. he looks at you quickly and smiles\n\n\n\"So your the man who may get my mine back on schedule?\"\n\n\n\"I didn't know you were behind sir but I will defiantly do what I can if that is the case.\"\n\n\nhe smile again and re-arranges some of the rocks before replying. \"what do you make of this then?\"\n\n\nYou look at the arrangement of rocks on the table laid over part of a map showing your camp. the ones near where you were standing and the mine entrance were a mix of broken granite, shale and other unimportant rock but two of the rocks lying over the hill the mine was starting into had a definite shine to them, you life them to look closer then after replacing them see there is a piece of normal granite placed between them.\n\n\nYour about to say that there is defiantly silver in the hills when you stop to think why he would want such a simple answer so instead you reply\n\n\n\"You believe there are two main lodes of silver running into the hill and plan to open them both up from a large forked main tunnel instead of a single straight entrance with branches?\"\n\n\n\"Ha! got it in one! its going to be harder on the crew building the supports but I think it will get both lodes producing ore much faster and if my hunch is correct the lodes are going to diverge more the further we get into the hills, I'm betting that our short entrance tunnel will be running the equivalent of two normal by the time we are fully up and working. Right since your here you can start today, sign this contract then get over to the loggers behind the hill and started on directing them to make the struts, Slarn there will give you the initial measurements.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Beginning the mine", "result": "You immediately sign the contract put in front of you after a cursory glance confirms that its a skilled labor contract for a good wage and lasting at least until the mine is fully operational. You follow the Overseer out and round to where the three man logging team has stacked a small pile of trees ready for cutting and shaping into the mines first struts.\n\n\nThe overseer turns to you \"Right then these three have cut enough trees the past week to get us a good five meters into hill down both of the primary forks off the entrance shaft. But since we haven't had any skilled workers here apart from myself they haven't had the directions to get the struts started, so while I get back to the entrance shaft you get them moving double time.\"\n\n\nHe hands you a slate with the tunnel dimensions chalked on it and you quickly see the man knows what he is doing, he has laid out precise numbers and details of the style and shape of Strut he needs for each section. You quickly head over to the workers who had heard the entire conversation so to save your self time you quickly tell them your name and take the straight over to the logs. You set two of them to separate them according to diameter and wood type and keep the other with you to measure out the wood ready for cutting.\n\n\nYou've gotten the logs organized and marked out which ones to use for the braces and struts when you hear a small commotion from the camp at the mine entrance, guessing that this is the guards arriving you carry on working and get the men sawing the first struts according to your markings. The days work goes well and by evening you know you've pushed the men a bit hard but you have several well cut lengths of wood ready for final shaping in the morning.\n\n\nYou head back into the camp and have your suspicions confirmed, the guards have set up tents near the entrance to the camp but they pay you little heed as you retire to one of the shacks set up for workers for the night. The next morning you get your small team working right after breakfast because you now that the full work group should be arriving that day or the one after at the latest and you need to make a good impression first. You get them ready and you join in so your all sawing and shaping the logs while its still dawn and by noon you have 2 sets or struts with lintels cut, shaped and ready to put it place. you know they aren't smoothly finished or treated but you've been told the gear to do that will be arriving with the main workforce so just before the lunch break you and your team take the first two sets round to the mine entrance and stack them just to the side ready to be used when needed.\n\n\nThe Overseer comes over and after inspecting the wood and the shape he admits he didn't expect you to have any ready until tomorrow but inquires about your choices. You tell him that you knew he wanted to get the entrance shaft in deeper as soon as possible so you chose the easier to work wood to make the temporary supports so the shaft could be continued in safety while your team cut and shaped the stronger woods for the permanent supports meaning they could be fully treated before being put in place, you also give a lot of credit to you small team for how hard they worked. Your fast work, choices and ability to give credit to your men where it was due seems to make the Overseers mind up about you and he gives you a pat on the shoulder before turning to walk back towards the mine, he calls back for your team to take a break, the main workforce will arrive any minute and he will be transferring you to the tunnel construction crew now that there are struts able to be used.\n\n\nYou know you've done well and that he will be giving you good jobs now you've proved yourself so you head over to the mess area to grab lunch with your team as you see the main workforce approaching the camp.", "action_results": [{"action": "The mine well underway", "result": "The day the mining company men had arrived you had been called into the owners tent, the owner, Overseer and leading men of the main work group were there and you appeared to be the topic of discussion. They were objecting to you being hired since according to their contract they should be filling all the skilled labor positions They were also trying to bring your abilities and experience into question.\n\n\nYou arrived as the overseer had just vouched for your knowledge and stated that you had the backing of a second guild overseer so even if they weren't happy about it that your skills and experience were accepted as fully capable for what you had been hired to do. As you entered the owner paused the discussion and called you over, then asked if the overseers description or your work with the small logging team had been accurate. You relay what had happened again and the owner seemed very pleased. The mining group however didn't and stated that even if you were good at the job, the owner was breaching the contract to give you a position over one of their men.\n\n\nThe owner clearly tired of the discussion by this point started casually questioning the work group leader.\n\n\n\"When exactly does our contract state that your group would arrive and begin construction?\"\n\n\nThe man was smart enough to see were this was going to lead so carefully answered \"One week ago today sir.\"\n\n\n\"So considering that I paid a hefty deposit to your company in advance, how much money have I lost and how far behind is my mine's construction due to your lateness?\"\n\n\n\"The mine is almost a week behind sir, but the company will of course refund any loss of wages due to our late arrival. We were forced to wait while our supplies and gear was prepared for us.\"\n\n\n\"Never the less a full week is a pretty serious loss of coin and time for me and could easily be considered a breach of contract by your company, one that would enable me to cancel it for a full refund of deposit and hire someone else correct?\"\n\n\nThe man, now clearly sweating looked like he was trying to find a way out but could only answer \"That could be technically correct sir\".\n\n\n\"So considering that point; can you really argue that it is outside my remit, that during the week you were not present and my mine was not being constructed that I hired a single skilled worker to aid in my mines initial opening?\"\n\n\n\"No sir we wont object further\"\n\n\n\"Perfect, now that this is settled don't worry because he hasn't stolen any of your men's jobs. I'll hire him as an assistant to my overseer so that wont be a problem will it?\"\n\n\nObviously relieved that he didn't have a man out of a job he readily agreed and left the tent.\n\n\nThe owner and overseer finally turn to you and ask \"well now that the work group is happy and you have suddenly been promoted you have a nice choice ahead of you. You did a good job with your decision about the struts so I'd be happy for you to oversee the logging operation, but most of your experience lies underground and putting the struts in place, which job do you want?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "You pick the logging operation as overseeing it will keep you out of the way of the work group and you've already made a good impression there", "result": "You picked to run the logging group and have twelve men under your supervision plus the three who were there already. You send one of the experienced wood cutters to join your three and after briefly showing him what you had been doing there he quickly understands your system and gets started cutting and preparing the wood. The rest you organize into work teams and get them working on different stages of the process, some felling new trees, some stripping them and others cutting them to length for you final team to prepare, you make one experienced man in each group in charge of his team and your operation practically runs itself. You leave the small choices to the group leaders and spend your time ensuring that the final struts are up to specification and that you meet or surpass you daily quota of cut and treated supports for the mine. The overseer and owner seem happy with your work and leave you to make any decisions you feel necessary, just getting weekly reports and whatever you discuss directly with the overseer during the day.\n\n\nAs the weeks pass you all steadily work away and start logging smaller groups of trees near the mine to ensure a continuous supply of wood, you leave the choice of site up to the team leaders you assigned but you always take a cursory glance over them to make sure the trees are up to standard.\n\n\nThe mine has been progressing well, the main shafts are already going deep into the hill and side tunnels are being opened to chase any small seams off the main two. You've heard that a couple of the unskilled laborers have been tasked with digging out a particularly weak section of rock and your glad you above ground and not risking you life in a weak tunnel prone to cave in.\n\n\nAs the days pass you see one of your team bringing a tree over from the other side of the hill to your normal operation, you stop them to ask which trees they are felling and learn that its a small group of oak on the far side of the hill from the mine entrance. Realizing that some of the tunnels may have gone under in that direction you rush over just as two more trees are about to fall, as the smaller one hits the ground you feel it shaking and moving in an unnatural way. You break into a sprint and call for them to stop but its too late and the large oak falls and as it hits you hear a loud rumble and the whole hill shakes.\n\n\nYou realize you team has called a cave in. You run with them to the entrance as the whole camp arrives to asses what happened. Two workers were in the weak tunnel when the trees came down right above it, they were both crushed inside.\n\n\nYou weren't blamed for the incident and were just told to carry on, that accidents happen, but two men had died due to a mistake made by one of your teams. For the rest of the time you kept your head down and works as hard as you could making sure no more mistakes were made.", "action_results": [{"action": "Finishing the mining work", "result": "You kept your head down and worked hard for the rest of the time and not a single weak strut or badly treated piece of wood got past you after the accident. You were never blamed for the accident but you held yourself accountable and though your works was praised you didn't take as much enjoyment in it as you had before.\n\n\nAs the final day approached the Overseer called you into his now finished residence. You find him sitting behind a nice desk still covered with maps and charts and see a pretty girl who must be similar age to yourself sitting in a chair by a small log fire reading a book. You begin to wonder if she is the overseers reclusive daughter that the camp is full of rumors about when he waves you over.\n\n\n\"I'll be leaving for the city in two days, the day you will all be paid for your work. You did a great job for me and worked harder than any other man here although I know its because you've been blaming yourself for the accident in the tunnel. Your pay has been arranged for what was agreed but a generous personal bonus has been included. Now take tomorrow off as I know your teams are set up to run smoothly enough without you hovering over them for their last day.\"\n\n\nYou thank the owner and head back out into the camp, The overseer is waiting outside and gives you a nod\n\n\n\"Don't worry I'll keep an eye on you teams for you, you've worked yourself too hard these last weeks so enjoy your paid day off.\"\n\n\nYou thank him as well then wander over to the packed breakfast tables. You chat to the workers there, many of whom you've become passable friends with and inquire about their plans now the mine is about to close.\n\n\nOne group is planning to leave on the day they are laid off and make good time down to the city because they want to get back to family there, while the other south bound group plans to stay until all the small jobs are finished around the camp for a few extra coins then has a much more leisurely trip with stops off at way houses and farms along the way. The second group will turn up to the city nearly two full weeks after the first but you're in no rush yourself.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "you think that overseeing the mines supports being put in will be the best use of your abilities", "result": "You know you did good work with the loggers but they will be receiving experienced men soon and your experience lies underground, The Overseer seems happy that he will be able to just concentrate on the tunnels themselves and the many minor jobs he does around the camp leaving the supports to you.\n\n\nYour given eight men to supervise so you split them into two teams, one to prepare the site while the other brings in and lays the supports, then both teams ensure its bearing the weight of the tunnel well before moving on, and you of course give the final check over yourself. Having caught a weak piece of wood early on you also check all the supports delivered to you before approving them for use to make sure there are no accidents caused due to your oversight.\n\n\nYou get on with your workers and everything goes smoothly and efficiently under your guidance, the Overseer and Owner seem very pleased with your work and just get weekly progress reports to supplement anything you talk to the Overseer about during the day. As the weeks pass you carry on working as before and as the tunnels deepens and sprout side shafts following smaller seams. You're given eight more men, so once you divide them like the first team you have two groups working simultaneously under you. After a few more weeks the Overseer mentions that a very promising seam has been found but that it initially runs through some very weak and fragmented rock. After a brief inspection you agree that its worth digging out and that after an initial tunnel with temporary supports is in place your men can permanently shore it up.\n\n\nOn the day its due to finish and your men are expected to start putting in the permanent supports you head to the tunnel to inspect the job. The unskilled workers have done well and had no cave-ins, and although weak and unprofessional the temporary supports are holding out well. your about to head back and ready your men as you can see the workers digging out the last loose rock when you feel a slight thump and a tremor running through the rock. You immediately think of the loggers and run out of the mine onto the hill above. You see not far off a tree on the ground with men cutting the last side branches off ready to be slid over to the logging camp, and two larger oaks behind in the process of being felled.\n\n\nYou see what is happening in an instant, the trees they are felling are almost right on top of the weak tunnel and if the biggest oak they are chopping at falls, the temporary struts will snap like twigs causing a huge cave-in. You start sprinting towards the men, shouting and waving your arms to get their attention. The men are too far away so have no Idea what you are shouting but luckily you are such an odd sight as you wave your arms while running and tumbling over the uneven ground that they just all stop to stare at you until you get close enough to pant out an explanation. As soon as they hear the word cave-in they send runners to get their supervisor and the Overseer. They both run into the tunnel to assess its position and immediately agree with you, if you had been 2 minutes later the workers finishing the tunnel would have been crushed to death.", "action_results": [{"action": "That evening you called in for dinner with the Owner and Overseer", "result": "You tidy yourself up as best you can before heading into the Owners stone house but you only own two sets of outfits, and both of them working leathers so theres only so much you can do. Your very relieved when the Overseer meets you to take you into the dining room in his normal working gear too.\n\n\nYour taken into a small but nice room lit by a log fire and see the owner and a pretty young girl sitting at the table with food being brought in from the kitchen. The girl looks about your age and is reading a book but she puts it away as you enter. The Owner waves you and the Overseer to some seats across the table from the two of them and introduces his daughter to you, Her name is Shia and you start trying to work out if she is indeed your age when the Owner asks you to explain about the tunnel.\n\n\nYou relay all the information as best you can with the Overseer occasionally adding information you didn't know or had missed. At the end the Owner thinks for a minute before starting to speak.\n\n\n\"I took a bit of a risk hiring you, but it seems to me now, that apart from doing an excellent job, you have just saved my mine from a cave-in and most importantly saved the lives of the two workers inside. Would you agree this is a fair assessment\"\n\n\nYou try to mumble something humble but he cuts you off and presses you for a yes/no answer.\n\n\n\"Then yes sir I'd agree with it.\" you finally reply\n\n\n\"Good, then from now on you are officially on my books as the assistant overseer and your contract has been upgraded to increase your pay in-line with your new position. There is also a job in my personal mining company for you as an overseer on future projects if you want it.\" you glance at the Overseer sitting beside you who just smiles. The owner continues \"yes it was his idea and I agreed wholeheartedly with it.\"\n\n\nYou thank him profusely before matters at the table turn to the food now being laced before you. You haven't eaten so well in years so concentrate mostly on the food before joining back into the dinner conversation. Your told that the Overseer is also a family friend so he joins the owner and his daughter for a meal once a week and that your now expected along too.\n\n\nStill dazed from all the good news you head back into the mine a very happy man.", "action_results": [{"action": "Completing the mine", "result": "You spend the rest of your time in the mine enjoying your new position and especially enjoying your time eating with the owners daughter once a week, she seems to also enjoy your company during the meals. You haven't made any moves yet to spend time alone with her but you think you'll have plenty of time to do that once the job is over if you join her fathers company. The rest of your time there passes without incident so as the final week approaches you feel a pretty good sense of achievement considering how well you did and your future prospects.\n\n\nAs you enter the final week you're called back into the Owners house and he say he has some options for you. You've gotten on well with him and he feels he can trust you so he is considering changing his plans and taking you back to the city a few days early. On the trip you would meet some other members of his company and some of his friends from other companies that work, not only in your city, but in neighboring cities and kingdoms too. He implies that there is a little more than he is letting on but he refuses to say anymore until you've made your choice.\n\n\nHe tells you that your other options are to stay out the week and head back with the other workers, he knows of two groups, one that is rushing back to the city on payday and the other is staying a few extra days then taking a leisurely route home. He wont judge you either way and the job with his company is always open to you, but if you don't come now you'll have to wait till the spring to contact him again as he is heading off to oversee another job of his soon.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Join him for the early trip back, it sounds interesting and a trip all the way back to the city in a carriage with his daughter sounds too good to pass up", "result": "Having agreed to travel back to the city with the Owner you have to get your affairs in order, you assign supervisors to your work groups and try to do a quick final check over some wood, but you've got your men working well enough to finish the job without you now. The Overseer will be taking over from you to make sure the completion and transition from construction to full production goes smoothly, he will even have use of the owners house whenever he isn't visiting the mine.\n\n\nHaving said your goodbyes you join the Owner and his daughter in their small carriage and set off back to the city. A second wagon with a few guards goes ahead of you to make sure you have no trouble with bandits as your also carrying one of the first silver shipments from the mine. The trip is significantly faster with horses pulling you at a brisk trot the whole way but it still takes a couple of days and that leaves plenty of time for talking with the owner and his daughter. To her about herself, and to him about this secret he wouldn't tell you before.\n\n\nYou find out that he has holdings and mines not just in the lands around the city in which you grew up but in many other places too. Your home city is really a small kingdom in itself, ruling many small villages around it and a stretch of coastline long enough for several small fishing villages and ports. There are many such city states and kingdoms in the surrounding lands and yours is just above average size for the area, however your city is large and old so your kingdom has a much higher population than many others.\n\n\nThe guilds of course know this and trade in the main cities of all the kingdoms but your king has never really spread the information widely- you of course knew of other places but they were always spoken of as far off and hard to get too, not borders merely a couple of weeks away by horse from the city center.\n\n\nThe reason he told you all this was that recently there had been a lot of tension with your nearest neighbor Carn. You had heard rumors about it, that they had been causing minor trouble over trade and fishing, small regional things that you hadn't paid much mind to, but you were now told it wasn't as simple as that. His contacts in Carn and other cities had been providing very different reports than your own rulers, your city being much larger than Carn was the one causing the problems, making demands after signing treaties and encroaching on their land. He was convinced that your King didn't know what was really happening as he had always seemed like an honest man, but many of the kingdoms decisions, and most importantly, military decisions were taken by his advisors, who were not known for being honest men.\n\n\nYour given time to think over this as you finally see the city approach. As you draw near the first roadside farms your given another choice.\n\n\n\"Well now that you know the reality of the situation you need to decide. I know you might not believe me, you might even think I'm being treasonous in my allegations but that is why I'm offering you this chance. This farm is well under half a days walk from the City, you've had a good lunch not long ago and you have been paid very well for your work so if you want to you can leave here and walk back to the city with no strings attached. Or you can stay and we will head to the meeting.\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "You decide you really dont want to be mixed up with treason and he has already paid you your wages, enough for well over a years good living, you get out.", "result": "You tell him that your grateful for all that he has done but that he is right and a lot of what he says is dangerous so you'll be hopping out now. He looks like it wasn't what he had hoped for but he just tells you that its you choice and holds the door open for you. You have a last look at his daughter who looks a little sad but you hadn't really gotten to know her yet and with over a years good money you tell yourself that your sure to meet another pretty girl in the city.\n\n\nStill thinking about whether your lying to yourself concerning pretty girls in the city and if you made the right choice or not the door closes behind you and the owner calls goodbye.\n\n\nYou turn and wave and are just saying thank you again when you feel several punches in the back, looking down as your propelled forward you briefly have time to see at least three crossbow bolts sticking out from your chest before you land. You hear the owners daughter crying and the owner telling her that he had no choice, you could have betrayed them all and gotten thousands killed if you had talked. You think that you wish you had stayed in the carriage, you think that you wish you had talked to his daughter more.\n\n\nThings quickly turn black and your stop thinking anything at all.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You've come this far and his daughter is smiling at you, you may as well carry on and see where this leads.", "result": "You tell him your choice and he just smiles back then says \"Well then lets go meet your new friends, I'll head up with the driver and leave you and my daughter to have the chat you've both been desperately wanting to have since you first saw each other. JUST a chat mind.\"\n\n\nYou immediately try to stammer out a response but he just laughs and climbs out and round to the drivers seat. You turn to his daughter to see she has turned an almost luminous shade of red and is desperately trying to look like she wasn't just mortified by her fathers candor.\n\n\nYou cant think of much to say so just go with \"He did that on purpose to make this awkward didn't he?\"\n\n\nShe seems to relax the tiniest bit as she replies that \"Its just his sense of humor but he means well.\"\n\n\nYou take the opening and run with it so that you're both having a good conversation as the carriage pulls into the city and heads right through the Iron district and into the stone district, the area of the wealthiest and most powerful members of the kings court and city. Your chat is interrupted as you pull up to a small mansion and the doors are opened but you both promise to have more soon and you all head inside.", "action_results": [{"action": "The 'Family'", "result": "You enter the mansion and are led into a large hall with several men and women lounging in chairs or drinking wine by small tables, they turn to greet you...\n\n\nSeeing that the Owner and his daughter have someone with them causes the talking to stop and everyone watches you for a while. The owner steps forward after giving them a minute to look you over.\n\n\n\"ladies and gentlemen this is Glor, he has proven to be a most resourceful and trustworthy man in one of my mining jobs and I feel that he would be a perfect addition to our little family. I'll be personally vouching for him\"\n\n\nThere are mixed reactions but a beautiful lady just a little older than yourself approaches and gives you a slightly too welcoming hug \"Welcome to the family Glor, I'm sure we'll get along VERY well indeed, once the music starts be sure to ask me for a dance\".\n\n\nAs she walks away you catch a glimpse of the owners daughter with bright red cheeks glaring daggers at her back. The owner sees your slight confusion and his daughters rage and just laughs. \"Right then neither of you are dressed for the occasion so you head off my dear and get ready and I'll see if I have anything to fit Glor.\"\n\n\nYou are lead through several rooms until you are in a bedroom with a butler standing waiting for you. \"Glor will be joining us for dinner, do you think you could make him presentable for the evening?\" The butler gives a quick nod and heads out of a side door, returning quickly with two dinner suits which he lays on the bed before circling you once. he takes one suit then heads out just leaving the one on the bed.\n\n\n\"Right then Glor my butler has an uncanny ability to size people up so that suit should fit you well, I'll be in the next room writing a few quick letters while you prepare\".", "action_results": [{"action": "Your a bit overwhelmed by the rapid turn of events but you dont have much choice now so you quickly wash and dress", "result": "Having gotten yourself to what you believe is a presentable state you knock on the owners door. He emerges and gives you a once over.\n\n\n\"Well its not bad at all for a first try!\" he smiles at you before fixing various parts of the suits that are hanging wrong and showing you how to put on cufflinks. \"Well you wont ever pass for some highborn sop who lives in a mansion but I rather think that it makes you a better man for it. Now follow me, I'm sure my daughter has had enough time to change as well.\"\n\n\nYour lead back to the large room where all tables and chairs have seemingly vanished and a small string quartet has started playing soft music, a few couples are already dancing near them on the open floor. The owner leads you to the side of the room to a small drinks bar.\n\n\n\"Ok its time I did my mingling and information gathering, the serious meeting shall begin in a few hours when most of the guests here are gone.\" He walks away towards a group of men smoking pipes before calling back \"The music is just warming up, make sure you dance with at least one girl while your here!\"\n\n\nYou're no master on the dance floor but you know the basics and as long as the songs are slow you're sure you could keep up. The music gets louder and more people move to the dance floor when you see two things happening. The Owners daughter enters the room looking beautiful in a flowing red dress and is immediately approached by several men asking her to dance, and the woman who approached you earlier detaches herself from the group she was in and slowly heads your way.", "action_results": [{"action": "The woman in blue is clearly coming on strong but the Owner's daughter is the one you want to dance with, head over towards her and hope she dosn't dance with someone else instead.", "result": "You start heading towards the Owner's daughter, you get close to the ring of men surrounding her and are unsure how you are going to approach this so you quickly glance back towards the woman in the blue dress. She has obviously seen you choose another girl over her flirtatious interest so gives you a stormy look before immediately slipping her arm through nearby man's who seems more than happy to take her for a dance. You look back just in time to see the Owner's daughter watching you with a huge smile on her face.\n\n\nShe makes quick apologies to the men around her and heads over to you, slides her arm in yours and leads you to the dance floor. \"Now if I wasn't very much mistaken I just saw a handsome but nearly penniless young man spurn the advances of the beautiful and extremely rich Lady Bridleworth, just so he could ask the daughter of a merchant to dance. What do you think about my surmise?\"\n\n\n\"I would never say your father was just a merchant...\" you start before seeing her cheeky smile and start again \"I'd say that the young man would be flattered to be called handsome by the most beautiful girl he has ever seen, and that he would pay every penny of Lady Bridleworth's fortune for a single dance with her. So clearly he made the right choice.\"\n\n\nShe laughs at your blatant flattery but you can tell she loves that you said it all the same and you begin dancing slowly to the music. \"I must admit I'm a little surprised, I thought I'd have to teach you how to dance, being a lowly mine worker and everything.\"\n\n\n\"Well my lady\" you give a slight mocking bow \"This worker has many surprises to him, I'm surprised in return though, you turned down offers from a large number of eligible gentry to dance with me, lowly as I am.\"\n\n\n\"Well if you are able to turn down the most eligible Lady of marrying age in the entire kingdom just to dance with me, why shouldn't I turn down the sons of some rich idiots to dance with the man I choose?\" Unable to think up a reply you simply laugh and keep dancing.\n\n\nThe rest of the night passes like a blur since you spend it entirely with her, dancing and talking and just enjoying every second in her company. Once the party starts ending she leads you over to her father and a group of men he is talking to and after giving you both a look over and a smile he leads you all through to a side room where a few people are starting to sit around a large table.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Truth", "result": "After everyone is seated the Owner addresses you \"Now Glor I have explained a little of why we are here during our trip down from the mines. This family I have gathered together is for the purpose of getting the truth out and showing the king that he is being tricked. We have tried getting evidence straight to him but the rest of the council has him surrounded day and night and I cannot do anything for fear of being caught and this entire group being put in danger.\"\n\n\n\"Which is why we are sending an expedition.\" one of the other men joins in. \"I am a commander in the 3rd company and will be sending some men along with a relief detachment to the border. they will be carrying proof of everything that has been happening over the past two years. We have had to wait this long as gathering the evidence without raising suspicion has not been easy but it is done now and we must hurry as we think the council are preparing for something big using two captured Carn ships. You will be drafted into the 3rd under my orders and send along as well, it'll become your job to help get the proof to Carn.\"\n\n\nYou think for a minute before answering. \"Why are we sending the proof to Carn, why not get it to our king?\"\n\n\n\"We tried, many times we tried, most of the men were killed and the rest searched and all the documents they had destroyed so they couldn't risk saying anything without proof, that would just lead to us all being killed before we could prove anything.\"\n\n\n\"so when does this expedition leave?\"\n\n\n\"It was going to be in over a month, but now that you are here, the man you know as the Owner of the mine you were in has planned to make them leave in 1 week. You wont be traveling with a relief squad but the papers I provide should see that you don't come under any suspicion.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "A New Morning", "result": "You spend the night in the large mansion and you wake thinking you haven't slept anywhere so comfortable before in your life. You find fresh cloths and a note inviting you to breakfast in the solar at the end of your bed so you quickly get ready and head out of your door. You immediately realize that you are entirely lost and have no hope of finding the right room but are luckily saved by a butler who appears to materialize beside you arm.\n\n\nOnce you have been guided to the solar for breakfast you are left with the owner and a table laden with food. \"All from my own farms and holdings!\" he says happily \"Now dig in, we have a long day ahead and my daughter has 'informed' me that you are to meet her for a late lunch in the gardens. I normally would entirely ignore any order that came from my daughter but she has inherited a certain look from her mother that I know better than to argue with.\"\n\n\n\"Erm, of course that sounds lovely.\" you stammer, not really knowing what to say in the current situation.\n\n\n\"Hah! don't worry, I have no issue with the fact you both are going dopey eyed at each other since her choice in a man is hers to make, but I will give this warning, if you lead my daughter on then hurt her, I will destroy you entirely. Excellent, now that thats all been said on to business!\"\n\n\nYou're a little shocked by his change of pace but you both soon start chatting about the up coming plans and preparations. The next few days are spent much the same way, breakfast with the owner, planning time, then lunch with his daughter before more planning. The evenings however are spent at dinners, entertaining guests and holding meetings with other members of the 'family' from around the city.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Plan Begins", "result": "You have spent an amazing week in the mansion, you and the owner's daughter, Amelia (You almost laughed when you heard because of the dream you had back in the mining camp) are on first name terms and getting closer than ever. Your plans have been completed too. The 'family' of conspirators had been waiting as they didn't have anyone with enough training in construction to go with their team to the front that wouldn't arouse suspicion from the council, and that is where you were to come in. You would be their team leader with a sound understanding of construction, and since you hadn't been in the city for years, you were almost entirely unknown.\n\n\nThe plan was simple, The council were watching all the crossing points so you and three others would be sent to the borders with paperwork saying you are new recruits from the 3rd company, the army's builders. Then you would slip across the border and meet up with an intended contact a few miles to the other side.\n\n\nThe morning you were due to leave the Owner (Who's name you still haven't been told) arrives late to breakfast and hands you a small cloth bundle full of documents. \"These are the documents we need to get across the borders, each of you has a set and this morning we have included new information. One of the council members has managed to capture two of Carn's galleys and is now talking about some 'project spark' or something like that. We don't know what it is yet but we have included a letter in which he admits to taking the ships. You need to get these across the border before something big starts.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Goodbyes", "result": "Having accepted your documents you finish eating quickly before heading back to your room to collect your things. The Owner has prepared you a set of nice traveling gear and also laid out some 3rd company clothing including a tunic and cloak. You've got a full set of Army issue armor in saddle bag on your horse but you'd rather not travel the whole way there in it so the tunic and cloak should be more than enough.\n\n\nYou head to the front of the house and find Amelia waiting for you. She looks relieved to see you \"I was worried I wouldn't be back in time to see you off! I've been down in the Stone quarter collecting an order I made a few days ago. Its something I had made for you, I want you to wear it under your tunic so you remember I'm thinking about you as you travel.\" You're unsure what to reply and your slightly worried she has gotten you a waistcoat or something you'd never normally wear but she has already turned bright red so you simply reply \"Of Course I will.\"\n\n\nShe hands you a small package which you unwrap to find a tunic made of unbelievably fine metal rings. \"This is incredible, I've never seen such fine mail before!\"\n\n\nClearly happy at your reaction she grins \"I had one of the best armorers in the city make it, its the finest steel so its very strong but the links are small so its light and can be worn under normal clothing. This way I can keep you safe while you travel!\"\n\n\nUnable to think of a proper way to thank her and distracted by her smiling face being so near yours you instead step forward and give her a small kiss. She is initially shocked and almost moves away but then returns the kiss for a second before stepping away her face a beacon of red. \"Well that was very forward of you Glor, now you have no choice but to return and beg my forgiveness afterwards!\" The she spins on her heels and runs off. You're almost worried you really did offend her until she reaches the door and gives you a big grin and a wave before heading inside.\n\n\nYou hop into the carriage that is waiting for you and quickly change into the gift then slip the 3rd company tunic over the top, and its almost impossible to tell your wearing any mail. The Owner joins you and the carriage heads off to the south gate of the city.", "action_results": [{"action": "A New Adventure", "result": "Once at the south gate you disembark and are given a last few words of encouragement by the owner before he is driven away, leaving you and your new horse alone at the gate. You are quickly joined by a group of three men similarly dressed to yourself and you all begin the ride out of the city on the road that will turn East towards Carn.\n\n\nThe first few days of the trip pass quickly, you see very few travelers on the roads and the border disputes with Carn aren't enough to have a large military presence on the roads so you only have to produce your papers once, when you come across a camp of soldiers from the First Company. You decide it would seems strange to ride on by them when it was nearing dusk so you all join them at their camp and spend a nice evening chatting over cooking fires.\n\n\nThe next morning you are all saddled up and preparing to leave the First Company soldiers who are traveling on foot when a call is raised of a fast rider approaching on the road. You feel a sense of unease and one of your company signals for you to be ready to ride hard if needed.\n\n\nAs the man approaches the small camp he slow momentarily to hand down a letter from his pouch \"The Old Quarter is burning, Carn has attacked us. I Need to get news to the borders quickly.\" You are panicked by the news since The Old Quarter is where you grew up and your remaining friends still live there. You catch his arm as he makes to leave.\n\n\n\"We are riding the same way, let us accompany you incase something happens on the road.\"\n\n\nThe man nods his thanks and your small group sets out at a fast pace from the camp. One of your men rides close by and whispers to you \"What are you doing getting us involved here?\"\n\n\n\"I need more information about what is going on, besides if they receive news of an attack before we get there we will look pretty suspicious but if we arrive as guards for the Councils own messenger they wont take a second glance at our reason for being there.\" The man still doesn't seem happy but falls back as you ride up to the messenger and ask if you can read one of the letters he is distributing since you didn't get a chance back at the camp. His orders are to give them to every military detachment he comes across on way to the border so he happily hands you one.\n\n\nYou ride in silence the rest of the day with only brief breaks for lunch and dinner and ride a couple of hours into the night. You finally pull up near a small stream to let the horses rest and make a temporary camp for the night. You take the opportunity to tell your companions what you learned from the letter.\n\n\nA couple of mornings ago two ships bearing Carn's colours had approached the docks in the Old quarter. One had pulled up and reversed course but the other sped up and rammed the docks, it seems it was on fire and filled with burning oils and other flammable substances. The first reports were all that had come in before the letter was sent but there was a fireball that tore through a huge area of the docks and started a fire that spread through the entire Quarter of the city within minutes. It had been dry for weeks and the Old quarter was made almost entirely of ancient timbers so you could imagine the fire tearing through it. The men around the fire swore and one finally spoke up. \"Its the ships that councilor captured, they burned down the old quarter themselves to start the war, I'll gut him myself for this!\"\n\n\nYou caution him to keep his voice down but luckily the messenger sees nothing amiss about the bits he hears of your men's reactions to the news, he joins you at your fire and you all share stories of the city, especially of the Old Quarter which you hope isn't as bad as the letter implies. As the messenger gets into his bedroll for the night the man supposedly in charge of the others speaks up.\n\n\n\"I was sent along to ensure we got the documents across the border no matter what happened, now this news changes many things but not our mission, if we can show it wasn't Carn that sent those ships we can prove the council did it and have our revenge. We have two choices, follow Glor's plan of arriving there as the messengers guards then try to slip across after nightfall, or we dispose of him to make sure we arrive before the news does so we can get across the border before they go into a lockdown.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "You want no part of killing an innocent man so you vote for staying as his guards and risk the harder crossing.", "result": "You continue your hard ride with the messenger and after a couple more days all arrive just as the horses seem likely to give way. You are unsure what to expect but as soon as you reach the gates and the messenger shows his papers your all admitted straight away. Being with him seems to give you some official status is the guards eyes as you are all not even checked as he passes checkpoints and reaches the commanders office.\n\n\nYou are all left in a waiting area as he goes in, he takes your identification papers with him. After a few minutes the commander emerges with the messenger. \"It seems you three haven't even entered full service yet but volunteered for a dangerous ride to escort our messenger safely here. he has spoken well of you and your intentions so you are all very welcome in my fort, even if its almost a week early! Now down to business. The fort is going into partial lockdown until the news is spread and the patrols have been updated, you'll be shown to your new bunks and be given a tour, since your duties don't start for days you'll be free to come and go around the fort to learn your way. My aide will give you new papers to this effect.\"\n\n\nThe new papers give you all the run of the forts interior and the messenger thanks you all before riding off again to deliver the letters down the line to the other forts. \"It seems this was the right idea after all, these papers should make it easy to slip across the border.\"\n\n\n\"We shall see.\" one of the men replies", "action_results": [{"action": "Night Falls", "result": "As night falls over the fort you have visited and gotten your faces and papers known by many of the guards under the pretense of exploring. You all finish a late dinner in the mess hall then head back to your bunks where you have prepared your gear and hidden the documents. You quickly prepare, check Amelia's gift is in good working order and all head out.\n\n\nGetting around the fort is easy for you now thanks to the leg work earlier in the day and any guards that don't recognize you let you pass after seeing your papers. You all make it to the gate without incident, however once you reach it you realize that the initial panic from receiving the news is still in full swing. You quickly think that you could slip out behind a squad going on patrol since the gate is in chaos but you are only in army issue tunics rather than full armor.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Tag along with a squad and try to stick close so you arn't noticed when they exit.", "result": "You all move close behind a squad heading out of the gate and move into formation as if you are with them. Its all going surprisingly well until one guard remarks that is stupid for them to have men without full armor with them. They all quickly turn and point out that you are not in fact with them, and they have no idea WHO you are.\n\n\nYou are about to quickly try and make an excuse when one of you men tries to run for it. Sadly with so many soldiers about he is almost instantly cut down and the rest charge at you. With so many men cutting and stabbing you at once even your special mail doesn't stand a chance.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Pretend to be a repair squad, you are in the third company afterall and that is one of their jobs.", "result": "You realize that four men in army tunics would never get away with joining a fully armored patrol so approach the guard your selves, he seems harassed and overworked so you try to use it to your advantage. \"Repair squad from the third.\" you announce as you hand over all of your papers at once. The man gives you all a quick glance, then obviously trying to work as quickly as possible gives the top sheet a quick glance. He sees that it has the fort commanders own signature and 3rd Company across the front so he doesn't read further and just waves you through. \"Don't take too long out there, lockdown starts fully in a few hours!\".\n\n\nHaving a guard shout you through in such a loud manner makes the rest less inclined to bother checking your paperwork so you get through the gateway without incident.\n\n\nYour all thinking that this is going rather well so pick up the pace and head towards the border lines.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Perimeter", "result": "You reach where you think the border should be and almost shout for joy when one of your men holds up his hand and indicates to the side. You stop to listen and hear an approaching patrol. Its only a small one by the sound of it which means six men but they will still attack you on sight if they need too. You all quickly look for a place to hide but its too late and they come into view through some trees.\n\n\nThey immediately draw weapons and ask for identification. You decide to go with the same bluff as before so try to act clam and keep your hands away from your sword. You pull out your papers and hand them over. \"We are third company, they sent us out here to do some repairs before the lockdown began.\"\n\n\nThe other soldiers seems to relax their weapons a bit at your attitude and willingness to hand over your papers. You see some confusion growing on the face of the man reading the papers and realize that he knows your papers don't allow you to leave the fort. He is about to speak when your men act first, drawing hidden knives and taking down two of the parole before they can react.\n\n\nFrom there it turns into a bloodbath, it seems the men sent with you are very skilled fighters, but they aren't wearing armor and the patrol is. You are almost killed by a sword swing but the man pauses in surprise as his blade bounces off the hidden mail coat. You whisper a quick thank you to Amelia for her gift and saving your life as you use the flat of your blade to knock the man unconscious.\n\n\nYou look up to realize its over, two of your company is dead and the other survivor slightly wounded, three of the patrol are dead and the others wounded or unconscious. Saddened that they had to die you pause but the other man drags you away \"It wasn't our choice and it had to be done, now move or the rest will catch us!\" You listen and indeed hear the sounds of other men moving in your direction so you both run across the border and into Carn's territory.", "action_results": [{"action": "Carn", "result": "You are still a long journey away from Carn but the other man takes charge and leads you at a run for several miles. You both run until you finally collapse against a large rock outcrop. You help him bind up his wounds but he has lost a lot of blood and the run hasn't helped, he quickly explains that a cart will arrive here soon and that it will take you to Carn.\n\n\nYou let him drift off to sleep and keep watch until dawn when you see a small farmers cart coming near. You give the signal and it turns to come pick you up. You jog back over to the other man but realize he passes away from blood loss during the night. Your the last one left so you take the man's documents along with your own and get in the cart. The driver passes back some non-descript clothing and you quickly get out of your military tunic.\n\n\nThe trip from there involves a change of carts every few days and finally a carriage for the last few days to enable you to go faster. Eventually you reach Carn and are escorted to the King.", "action_results": [{"action": "The King", "result": "THIS IS THE BEST ENDING, THE SPIES ENDING.\n\n\n CONGRATULATIONS!\n\n\nOnce in Carn you are taken before the king and you make your report after presenting the documents. King Hader immediately sends them to his scribes who make several copies and over the next few days they are smuggled out of Carn to all near-by kingdoms. King Hader also sends several emissaries to your City and is finally granted a cease-fire almost before the war even begins when one of your kings high council personally intervenes and tells the king that the council had been blocking Carn's requests and emissaries from reaching him. The Councilor was in fact your proprietor, the Owner, and he was able to tell the king some of the truth of the situation.\n\n\nOnce the king knows he was being lied to he immediately took control of the military and ordered an end to all hostile actions. He confined the council to chambers under guard until he had found out the truth. And once the truth came out the entire council bar one was hung from the city gates. Peace was made between the two kingdoms.\n\n\nKing Hader of Carn finally sent you back to your home city once the situation was fully resolved, he even bestowed some land and a house on the shore upon you as a reward. You are unsure what to expect from your own king upon your return but he is as welcoming as Hader had been. Once he learns that you had been given land on the coast beside the border he immediately gave you an equal plot on his side of the border meaning you now had a large holding of forest, farm and coastline in your name that spanned the borders of the two kingdoms. The man you knew as the owner is explained to have been Councilor Fenshield, one of the newest councilors in the city but due to his mines, one of the richest. He greets you warmly and invites you to his house again to recover, which you quickly accept.\n\n\nThere Amelia is waiting for you, she immediately rushes to you and gives you a kiss while saying how she always knew you would be successful, once you explain how her gift saved your life she almost cries before just hugging you for a few minutes.\n\n\nIts not many days before you are engaged and only weeks before you and Amelia are married. The wedding is held on your new lands which could only be described as substantial and the house upon them is more of an old castle than just a house. Councilor Fenshield brought many of his scribes and accountants with him and by the time the wedding happens your land is already turning over a profit from the farmers and fishermen on it.\n\n\nI'd say you lived happily ever after at this point, but that isn't always the case is it? lets just say you did have a few happy years, but after that what happens is up to you to choose.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "You can't risk arriving at a fort and being trapped there as the war starts, you think the messenger has to be killed for your mission to be sucessful.", "result": "Having decided by a vote to dispose of the messenger for the sake of the mission you all head to your bed-rolls and pretend to sleep. You wait until you hear the signal from one of the men and rise to find that the messenger already has his throat slit. You help them carry the body away from the road and hide it in some bushes, it isn't the best disposal ever but it only needs to last a day so you can get safely ahead.\n\n\nYou clear up any evidence you can see then all mount up and start riding towards Carn. What you did weighs on your conscience but you think that it was the only way so you push ahead.\n\n\nThe next few days are just made up of riding and very short breaks for eating and sleeping. You make it close to the border in great time and camp within half a days ride from the border forts so you can all rest and look presentable when you arrive. You fall asleep hoping that you have arrived ahead of the news and that you can get across safely. Yu think briefly of Amelia and what she may think of your choices so far but decide that she would also do everything it takes to stop the war. Pacified by that thought you fall asleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Border Forts", "result": "You all make sure your uniforms are clean and papers in order before you approach the fort, You expect to find some paroles but are amazed at the sheer amount of them and all the activity that is taking place. You have your papers checked five times before you even reach the gate where You finally get to ask what is going on as your let into the fort.\n\n\nThe guard explains that a messenger arrived the evening before from the coastal road, he had ridden from the city almost non-stop for days, swapping horses whenever he could. He had brought news that The Old Quarter had been attack and was burning and war was about to start. You all look stunned by what he said and he takes it to be shock at the news rather than the fact you had killed a messenger but were still beaten here. He lets you on through and your taken immediately to a small barracks where your given bunks and told that sadly the forts going into lockdown until everything settles down but that your welcome in all the normal areas like the mess hall.\n\n\nYou all settle in \"So it was for nothing then?\" you ask aloud.\n\n\n\"We had to do it, there was no way to know another messenger could beat us here by taking the coast road. Its all those bloody port outposts allowing him to change horses while we had to spare ours.\" one of the men replies.\n\n\n\"Either way we need a new plan, I'm the only one who really knows about construction so we cant hang around to be tested, what do we do from here?\"\n\n\nThe men think for a bit and come up with several ideas but it is whittled down to two options.", "action_results": [{"action": "Make a run for it that night while there is still confusion about who should be where.", "result": "Having made your choice you all get your gear prepared and ensure the documents are well hidden. You made sure your gift from Amelia is in good order then you all wait. Night falls slowly and there is still a lot of people moving about when you leave the barracks. The food hall is nearer the border gate than your current position so you head there as cover first. You all grab some stew from a pot and taking some bread start to stroll around the fort as you eat. You pass several men fresh off duty doing the same thing so you don't raise many eyebrows. Once you near the gate you see that the small one man door in it only has a single guard.\n\n\nOne of your men approaches him quietly then faster than the guard can react, he strikes him across the chin with the handle of his dagger. The guard falls unconscious and you all slip through the gate quickly, closing it behind you.\n\n\nYou know the wall patrols wont take long to find the unconscious guard so you all start jogging as quietly as you can towards the border lines. You think you have made it when you hear the bells of the fort going off. \"Thats it RUN!\" you shout as you hear noise of men ahead of you. Your warning came too late and you all run right into a patrol squad as they turn to face you. You all draw weapons and attack.\n\n\nYou feel several glancing sword blows hit you but Amelia's gift saves you from taking any major wounds until you and the only other survivor seem to break out the other side of the squad.\n\n\nYour about to run when you feel a blow to your leg and you stumble. Looking down you see a large gash across your calf and realize you can barely walk never mind run. You wave the other man on and turn to face the soldiers. At least one of you will get through with the documents you think as a spear stabs through your side. You think of Amelia as you collapse.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ending?", "result": "Sadly even if the other man makes it and stops the war you are still dead, no good ending for you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Wait for a few days untill the panic is over then slip across.", "result": "You decide that security is too tight to make a go of it now so you all settle in to pretending to be good members of the Third Company. The others help out in small manual jobs that don't require skill and you offer services in some of the more complicated work. After three days of the light volunteer work you seem to be trusted by the men there and the initial panic seems to have settled down into a steady routine so you think it might be time to make your move. Messengers and runners keep arriving but you all pay them little heed now as you are concentrating on finding the best crossing point near the fort.\n\n\nUnfortunately one of the runners came on the main south road just like you and reports about the finding the body of the messenger you killed. Its put down to spies from Carn trying to prevent news getting to the borders so the fort immediately goes on high alert. If you had known it was your own choice in killing him that lead to the lockdown being started again you might have even found it a little funny.\n\n\nSadly you didn't know any of this and only knew that the bells went off and everyone had to report to their bunks. No-one is told what is going on but the next morning you all see a small group of men with an unusual insignia arriving at the fort and heading straight into the commanders office. One of your companions informs you that these are from the 'intelligence' section and are very bad news. You cant risk them getting anywhere near you.", "action_results": [{"action": "You cant risk them finding you, run for it, NOW!", "result": "You nod to the men, \"Right then we have to get out of here, take only what you can carry easily and pretend we are on patrol, as soon as we get near the lines we get across and run for it.\"\n\n\nYou all get into your Army tunics and strap on weapons then head out towards the wall, your stopped a few times but explaining you have been drafted in for wall patrol because of the lockdown gets you through the fort and to the gates. You find you're in luck today as you know the man on gate duty, he is someone you have been working with so you greet him and take the time for a quick chat before asking to be let through so you can start your patrol.\n\n\nHe pauses for a minute but your chat has put him off guard and he lets you through. You all start walking quickly towards the border line where the patrols are thinnest. Your beginning to think you pulled it off but suddenly hear a bell going off behind you and shouting starting up.\n\n\n\"Run!\" you shout and you all start sprinting for the border. Arrows start falling from the walls behind you and one of the men with you falls with a bolt sticking out of his side. he waves you on and your forced to leave him behind. You feel something hitting you in the shoulder and realize Amelia's chain just saved you. You whisper a quick thanks to her as you run.\n\n\nThe arrows stop and you realize your out of range now. You really think your going to make it before you see a full squad forming up in front of you with pikes pointed in your direction. You are left with no choice but to charge them and hope you break through. You're mail saves you a couple more times and you cut down two men in front of you before a third gets a clean hit on you and runs his pike through your gut. You only think that you'll never see Amelia again before you die.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "They shouldnt have any idea about you and you have good paperwork, wait untill they leave.", "result": "Waiting till night seems like a better idea so you all prepare your gear and make sure the documents are well hidden then wait. Sadly it is not long before two guards arrive and ask you to accompany them to the commanders office.\n\n\nYou find the commander and the men from the intelligence squad waiting for you. They take your papers and look through them before speaking.\n\n\n\"Now gentlemen we have been tasked with finding some spies from Carn who have killed one of our messengers on the road to this fort. Your paperwork is all in order but it appears you all joined the third company very recently and most importantly you were all seen accompanying the messenger on his way here. Then arrived alone. Can you explain this at all?\n\n\nOne of your men speaks up \"We rode with him for two days but he needed to make haste so he went on ahead of us, we just assumed he had arrived already.\"\n\n\nThe man looks at you all for a short time before smiling \"Well we shall soon see the truth of that.\"\n\n\nYou are all grabbed from behind and lead down stairways until you are all in a large basement, some dividing screens are set up and tables with straps brought in. Realizing what is about to happen one of the men tries to run but is immediately run through by a guard. The Intelligence man tuts then says \"hmm a waste of information there, ah well three is more than enough, lets begin.\"\n\n\nYou are all strapped down and have some fluid poured down your throats before the screens are moved in to block you from seeing each other. You feel it taking affect and your muscles relax and refuse to respond, you become entirely paralyzed and unable to speak. The man comes to you first \"Don't worry it will wear off after a few hours, and by then you'll be ready to talk.\"\n\n\nHe is true to his word and tortures you solidly for three hours before you begin to be able to scream, he waits for you to stop before questioning you further. Once satisfied he turns to the guards. \"I'll start on the others after a nice lunch, finish this one off and dump his body at the front, claim it was soldiers from Carn torturing him for information.\"\n\n\nYou don't even have time to object before the guards run their spears through your chest.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "The lady from before is beautiful, in a low cut blue dress and is clearly flirting with you in a way the Owner's daughter never did, meet her on the dancefloor.", "result": "You see that the daughter is still surrounded by men talking to her so you head onto the dance floor and meet the lady in blue half way. \"Have you come to ask me to dance?\" she asks coyly\n\n\n\"Of course my lady\" you reply before taking her hand and beginning to dance.\n\n\nThe next hour or so passes rather quickly as the Lady dances much closer to you that you know is appropriate and keeps you to herself for the whole time the music is going. You do see the owners daughter dancing with a few men but she doesn't seem too happy. You consider asking her for a dance too but she has entirely ignored you since the dancing started and your current partner isn't sharing you.\n\n\nOnce the music and dancing has ended the Lady extracts herself from your arms with a little pout. \"Sadly Glor this is where you have to go to a meeting and I have to head home, but I do promise I'll be seeing ALOT more of you soon.\"\n\n\nLeft with the strong suspicion she would be taking you home with her if she could you head over to where you see the owner and his daughter talking to a small group.\n\n\n\"Ah Glor just in time, we are all going to adjourn to a smaller room for some drinks and our little meeting.\" turning to his daughter he asks if she would like to join them but she says no and walks away without looking at you. The owner gives you and her a quick glance before muttering \"Ah well.\" and leads you into the meeting room.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Truth", "result": "After everyone is seated the Owner addresses you \"Now Glor I have explained a little of why we are here during our trip down from the mines. This family I have gathered together is for the purpose of getting the truth out and showing the king that he is being tricked. We have tried getting evidence straight to him but the rest of the council has him surrounded day and night and I cannot do anything for fear of being caught and this entire group being put in danger.\"\n\n\n\"Which is why we are sending an expedition.\" one of the other men joins in. \"I am a commander in the 3rd company and will be sending some men along with a relief detachment to the border. they will be carrying proof of everything that has been happening over the past two years. We have had to wait this long as gathering the evidence without raising suspicion has not been easy but it is done now and we must hurry as we think the council are preparing for something big using two captured Carn ships. You will be drafted into the 3rd under my orders and send along as well, it'll become your job to help get the proof to Carn.\"\n\n\nYou think for a minute before answering. \"Why are we sending the proof to Carn, why not get it to our king?\"\n\n\n\"We tried, many times we tried, most of the men were killed and the rest searched and all the documents they had destroyed so they couldn't risk saying anything without proof, that would just lead to us all being killed before we could prove anything.\"\n\n\n\"so when does this expedition leave?\"\n\n\n\"It was going to be in over a month, but now that your here, the man you know as the Owner of the mine your were in has planned to make them leave in 1 week. Your group will be riding alone instead of with a relief detachment but the papers we provide you should get you there just fine.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "A New Morning", "result": "You spend the night in the large mansion and you wake thinking you don't think you slept anywhere so comfortable before in your life. You find fresh cloths and a note inviting you to breakfast in the solar at the end of your bed so you quickly get ready and head out of your door. You immediately realize that you are entirely lost and have no hope of finding the right room but are luckily saved by a butler who appears to materialize beside you arm.\n\n\nOnce you have been guided to the solar for breakfast you are left with the owner and a table laden with food. \"All from my own farms and holdings!\" he says happily \"Now dig in, we have a long day ahead and you have received this invitation, so you may have a busy evening too I'd imagine.\" You inquire about his daughter but he says she broke her fast earlier.\n\n\nYou start on the food as you read the impeccably written invitation to dinner at Lady Bridleworth's manner house. Before you can even ask the owner tells you that its the lady you danced with the night before. Well you've never been invited to a dinner in a manner house before and she did seem very interested in you. You ask him if he could accept on your behalf and he gives a little nod to one of the footmen nearby who heads off with the invitation in hand.\n\n\nThe rest of the day is spent around the house and its grounds, speaking about the mission and plans for the next few days but you are mostly thinking about the invitation you received, luckily the owner is lending you a suit for the occasion so at least you will look presentable.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Dinner Meeting", "result": "As evening fell you are sent from the Owners mansion in a small carriage. It only takes a few minutes to reach the destination, which is a house almost the same size as the owners. You are dropped off and head up to the gate a little unsure of the protocol but the gate keeper greets you first. \"Master Glor, my Lady has been expecting you, if you head to the main doors the butler will show you in.\"\n\n\nClearly someone has done some research on you if even their doorman knows you by sight but you think that this is what it must be like when living in high society so head on in.\n\n\nYou are met by the butler who ushers you into the house and through a small maze of joining rooms. You are finally led into a room with a single round table in the centre and several chairs around it, only one is occupied and the lady is wearing an even more low-cut dress than the night before. She rises as you enter and you are about to greet her when she raises a hand to cut you off.\n\n\n\"Sadly Glor I had many VERY enjoyable plans for you tonight, and having dinner was the least of them, but we heard this morning that that despicable little man had moved his plans forward to only a week away because of you.\" You are very confused by this but she continues. \"You see, he is a member of the kings counsel, but unlike the rest he is trying to foil the plans to start a war. One which we have been preparing for years, we would decimate Carn and double our territory in a matter of weeks. Sadly I am currently not on the council even though the king knows my family and myself so I have had to take steps to correct this. I help remove the meddling pest and I claim his seat, a fair deal no?\"\n\n\n\"Wait.. But...\" you stammer out\n\n\n\"Oh I know sweetie and I AM sorry\" She looks you over like a hungry man looks at a steak \"We really could have had so much fun. But part of the deal was I hand you over to these gentlemen from the councils intelligence section so I must give you up.\"\n\n\nYou feel your arms grabbed by men either side of you and are dragged through a sliding panel in the wall and down into a deep basement. You try and struggle, even as they strap you to the table. Sadly there are more of them than you and once they start injecting you the pain overwhelms everything.\n\n\nDuring your torture you tell them everything, you even try to make things up to please them but they always know you are doing it and they make the pain worse so eventually they know everything you do. Once they are finished they untie you and let you stand. They have done relatively little damage to your body, it was mostly your mind that suffered. You head for the door but are blocked by a large man \"Sorry but I'm afraid you were found here under a collapsed ceiling after heading to fetch some wine for the lady.\" he gently pushes you back into the room then shuts and locks the door. You watch helpless as the closing door knocks one of the beams away above you and the roof caves in on your head.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Push on North and look for a more promising turn off", "result": "You decide that the trial is too small and too close to your previous mine to be the new mine turn off so you continue North at a reasonable pace.\n\n\nThrough the day you pass a couple of even smaller trails but you decide they could be nothing but animal trails as they often pass under bushes and shrubs so you continue till nightfall. You can out into the trees again and have the last of your cooked hare meat. You fall asleep reasoning that if the mine is still ahead that you should pass it tomorrow.\n\n\nMorning arrives and you set off North again but as noon comes and goes and you start to pass into the evening you still see nothing. You start to feel like maybe you made the wrong choice but you push on till night fall and make camp again.\n\n\nIn the morning light you take stock, you decide that you can head back and try the original trail, as long as your careful if you see the men approaching you on the road you can always double back North again. Or you can continue on and hope its still ahead of you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head back for the side trail", "result": "Your turn back south and walk fast, always keeping an eye on the horizon for any signs of the men you passed but your see none. You push on at a reasonable pace till your forced to camp, in the morning you continue south keeping an eye out for the trail.\n\n\nYou come across it by the evening but now you see a large beaten down trail and the marks of a lot of people passing very recently.\n\n\nNot only had the small group sent ahead got there first but since you had lost nearly 4 days going North then back the main group had also gotten their first by a few hours.\n\n\nYou Sigh and head down the trail yourself knowing that you missed out on the chance of the good jobs.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Carry on North", "result": "You decide there isn't any point in going back so soon and head off North as a fast pace again, most of the day passes without signs of a trail. As evening falls you see clear signs of damaged undergrowth and a clear path off into the hills. It must be the mine!\n\n\nGlad you carried on North you strike off the road into the trail and head into the foothills loosing sight of the road behind you. You walk for an hour or two carefully following the trail further in when you see a man leaning against some trees beside the trail. He gives a small nod in your direction so you approach and ask if this is the entrance to the new mine.\n\n\n\"New mine? Now where did you hear that?\"\n\n\nYou explain about your work on a mine further south and that you had heard rumors from your old Forman about a new mine opening in this area.\n\n\nHe looks at you thoughtfully for a minute then says \"Alright if your fresh from another mine job keep going on this track for a bit till you see a big man with a woodman's axe, his names Pug, tell him Clay sent you, He'll tell you whats going on and get you sorted out.\"\n\n\nThanking Clay you set off again down the trail", "action_results": [{"action": "Pug", "result": "You walk for about half an hour until you see a huge man chopping some wood and stacking it into a cart, he pauses and leans on his axe while you approach.\n\n\n\"Are you pug?\"\n\n\n\"That would be me, now who would be doing the asking all the way out here?\"\n\n\n\"Clay told me to come speak to you, I'm a miner looking for work. He said you'd be the one to get me sorted out and explain the work here\"\n\n\nThe big man laughed and said \"right you are then, I'll be happy to explain it to ya\". He waved the axe indicating the hill just behind him \"Just over that rise is our camp, and even though I'm in charge I'm the only one that can ever be bothered to chop the wood for the fires, well I also enjoy it which is part of the reason I'm always the one here doing it but anyway you didn't come here for me to tell you about chopping wood. Were a small band here at the moment which makes it easier but sadly for you I wouldn't say were a mining camp\"\n\n\n\"Not a mining camp?\" your not sure how to take the news that they aren't a mining camp but Pug seems nice enough and you'd be happy enough to do logging or hunting work too \"So what work are you doing out here then?\"\n\n\nPug gives you a grin \"Ah that would be banditry mostly, some robbery, looting and such like.\"\n\n\nYour trying to think up a reply to his statement when you feel the wind being knocked out of you, looking down you see a steel arrow head pointing out of your chest. You fall backwards away from the grinning Pug to see Clay and a couple of others holding loading crossbows walking towards your head.\n\n\n\"Always nice when they come to you isn't it! This one said he just came off a job so should even have some good coin on him\"\n\n\nYou try to say something but can only gurgle a little before darkness closes your eyes", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Approach the foreman for a job", "result": "You sling your hare through a belt loop and walk out of the trees towards the foreman's fire. He watches you approach with obvious interest, glancing at the hare tied to your belt. You hail him and ask if you might make use of his fire to cook your hare, you would of course be willing to trade some for a mug of the ale the man was drinking if he was interested.\n\n\nThe man laughs and agrees, you finish preparing the hare and start cooking it. Once its starts the cook through you sit down beside the foreman to see about getting a job.", "action_results": [{"action": "The new foreman", "result": "\"Where are they off to so late at night?\" you ask indicating the group vanishing into the night up the road as he trades you a full mug of ale for a chunk of meat off the fire\n\n\n\"They're the mine guards that marched up from the city with us, I sent them on ahead to give the news that we are almost there and to make the camp safe and ready for when we arrive\".\n\n\nYou carefully start inquiring about jobs at the mine but he sadly informs you that they have all the trained hands that they need with them already but that you'd be welcome as unskilled labor, the pay would be much lower but that's all he could offer.\n\n\nYou realize with the guards sent ahead already that you wont be able to reach the camp before them so your left with the choice of joining them for much lower pay or heading back south to the city after all.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Might be a traverler along the road, camp beside it", "result": "You decide it would be best to just set up camp beside the road and see if any other travelers come along during the night. You go a few feet east of the road to a nice looking oak tree and start setting up a camp for yourself as theres still some time till night sets. You Set a few snares further into the trees and build a nice fire for yourself then settle down for a while. \n\n\nJust as darkness arrives you hear some noise in the trees, one of your snares has caught a hare! Gathering in the other snares you quickly skin and prepare the hare then set it cooking on the fire- its worth staying up an hour or two for some good hot food. \n\n\nThe hare eventually starts to cook nicely and you've just pulled its leg off to start eating when you hear some noise coming up the road. You keep eating as you watch a large group coming towards you. They slow as they reach the fire and the one in the lead walks over to you.\n\n\n\"Hail stranger, mind if we set up camp with you for the night? I could even trade some ale for a little of that hare if your interested?\"\n\n\nYou haven't had ale in a week or two now so you readily agree and watch the group start to build a couple more fires and set out their sleeping rolls. The man who had talked to you first sends a few of the group off North up the road then joins you by the fire with a small ale keg under one arm.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Put off speaking to your boss and go back in for a last look around", "result": "Your boss will be busy shouting orders at people anyway so talking to him can wait.\n\n\nYou turn back inside and have a good look around for anything you might have missed. You rummage under the bed and behind the desk, you even check the pot over the fire for any scraps.\n\n\nBut all you find is an old, completely rotted apple under the bed which smells so bad you chuck it into the coal embers as soon as you pick it up.\n\n\nSighing, you admit that your already carrying everything you own and head out the door to speak to the foreman of the camp.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story49.json b/data/scraper/stories/story49.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..43a639e --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story49.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=8129", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Your name is Miyuki Takeda. Otherwise known as \"Mayumi's sister.\"\n\nSince the day you were born, it seems you have been in her shadow. Twins, but not equal. Never equal.\n\nMayumi has always been the pretty one, the clever one. Everybody's favorite. \n\nI know what you're thinking. This is one of those petty revenge dramas. Neglected Miyuki takes vengeance on her sister for being loved more than she is. But you're better than that.\n\nYou've never been jealous of Mayumi. Not once. You love your sister.\n\nBut she doesn't love you. Strangely enough, she's the jealous one. It's almost as if she fears that someday, everyone will realize that she really isn't smarter or better than you. And then she won't be the favorite any more.\n\nIt started slowly. Little unkind things she'd say, little acts of cruelty. You tried to pretend it wasn't happening. You still do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Playing in the Park", "result": "\"Everyone! I've got a great new idea for a game!\"\n\nIt's Saturday afternoon, and you and your sister are with your friends, playing in the park.\n\nAs usual, Mayumi has taken charge. She always come up with the best games. Everyone has so much fun! Well, almost everyone. You didn't really like last week's game. But you didn't want to spoil everyone else's fun.\n\n\"This game is called 'Outlaw.' One of us will be the outlaw, and the others will form a posse to hunt them down and capture them.\"\n\nThis doesn't sound too bad. Not like 'Safari Hunter' last week, where you were the lion, and everyone threw water balloons at you.\n\n\"Who should be the outlaw first? Hmmm. . . Miyuki! Why don't you go first?\"\n\n\"I don't know, Mayumi. Why don't you pick someone else?\"\n\n\"Isn't that just like my selfish sister? I'm nice enough to let her go first, and she acts like that. If it's too much trouble, Miyuki, you don't have to play with us!\"\n\n\"No, no, Mayumi. I want to play, I just. . .\"\n\n\"Good. Then you're the Outlaw. You have ten seconds to run.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Hiding", "result": "So you run.\n\nYou find a tiny shallow beneath a stone sculpture where you can cower. It's cramped and dirty, but you feel fairly sure Mayumi can't find you here.\n\nAs you crouch in the damp crater, you can hear two women chatting on a nearby park bench.\n\n\"Have you heard about the Hell Correspondence?\"\n\n\"Is that the cursed website?\"\n\n\"Yeah, they say if you log on at midnight, you can summon the Hell Girl to take vengeance for you!\"\n\nHell Correspondence. . . sounds scary.", "action_results": [{"action": "Found you!", "result": "With a triumphant shout, Mayumi grabs you by the hair and drags you out from under the statue.\n\n\"Ow! Mayumi, you're pulling too hard!\"\n\n\"Quiet, Outlaw! I'm taking you in!\"\n\nShe drags you over to the rest of the group.\n\n\"Good job, Mayumi! Way to go!\" They applaud her success.\n\n\"So now does somebody else get to be the Outlaw?\" you ask hopefully.\n\n\"No, dummy. Now we bring you to justice, Texas style!\"\n\n\"Um, what does that mean?\"\n\n\"Quiet, bandit. You don't get to talk till it's time for your last words! Rei, hand me that jump rope. Good. Sho, you and Takeshi can use this to tie Miyuki to that tree over there.\"\n\n\"I don't wanna. . .\"\n\n\"Come on Miyuki, it's just a game.\"\n\"Yeah, Miyuki, just play along.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Go along with the game", "result": "You let Sho and Takeshi tie you to the tree. \n\n\"Rei, you can hide next.\"\n\nEveryone runs off and leaves you tied to the tree. Everyone but Mayumi. She stands there, watching you intently, as if she's expecting something to happen soon.\n\nThen you spot them.\n\n\"Mayumi, there are ants all over this tree!\"\n\n\"I know. That's Texas style justice. We tie you up and let the ants get you.\"\n\n\"Mayumi! No!\"\n\n\"Don't be such a little crybaby, Miyuki.\" \n\nYou struggle and shriek as the ants crawl all over you, but you are tightly fastened to the tree. Mayumi just watches, smiling slightly. \n\nOf course, when the other children come to see why you're making such a racket, Mayumi claims to have only just arrived, and scolds Sho and Takeshi for not noticing the ants before they tied you up.\n\nYou consider telling the other kids what really happened, but you know they won't believe you.\n\nYou are rapidly reaching the conclusion that your life cannot continue this way.", "action_results": [{"action": "Hell Correspondence", "result": "Late that night, when your parents are sleeping, you sneak into the computer room and log onto the website.\n\n\n\"We will take revenge on your behalf\"\n\nThat's all it says. And below that, a box to enter. . .\n\nMayumi's name?", "action_results": [{"action": "Typing", "result": "Hands shaking, you type into the box:\n\n\"Hell Girl, please kill Mayumi Takeda.\"\n\nThe screen goes black, and you cower, awaiting confirmation of your dark deed.\n\nBut nothing happens. \n\nDisappointed, you try again, but you can't seem to access the site. A 404 file not found error is the only thing that comes up.", "action_results": [{"action": "Next Day", "result": "Nothing has changed at all.\n\nYou try to avoid her, but Mayumi corners you in the upstairs hallway.\n\n\"Come on, Miyuki, let's go outside and play together!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Push past her", "result": "Mayumi drops to the ground as you push past. She pauses, then deliberately thumps her head against the wall, loud enough to attract your mother's attention, and begins crying.\n\nYou get spanked for being a bully, and are forced to apologize to Mayumi. She smiles sweetly and says she is sure it was an accident, and you didn't mean for her to fall. Your mother beams proudly at her sweet, forgiving daughter before ordering you into your room for the rest of the day.", "action_results": [{"action": "In your room", "result": "You lie on your bed and cry, muffling your tears with your pillow.\n\nWhen you open your eyes, everything is different. \n\nYou are outside, the sun is setting.\n\nA young girl with dark hair and red eyes is standing before you.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"My name is Ai\"", "result": "\"Where am I? What is this place?\"\n\n\"My name is Ai. You've summoned me.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"This is for you\"", "result": "\"This is for you.\"\n\n\nShe hands you a straw doll.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Go outside and play", "result": "Once outside, Mayumi shoves you into a mud puddle and runs back into the house crying \"Mother, come quick, Miyuki fell down!\"\n\nYour mother pulls you into the house. \"Why on earth were you playing in the mud, Miyuki?\"\n\n\"I. . . I wasn't. . .\" you stammer. \"Mayumi pushed me.\"\n\nMayumi's lower lip trembles. Tears well in her eyes. \"Why would you say those horrible things about me, Miyuki?\"\n\nYour mother angrily orders you to your room.\n\nAs you head up the stairs, you can hear Mayumi's voice. \"Why does Miyuki hate me, Mother?\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Refuse to play", "result": "Everyone calls you a crybaby and a spoilsport. You're unhappy, but at least you are away from Mayumi for the rest of the afternoon.\n\nYou decide to go to the library and read for a while. It's peaceful and quiet, and you start to think maybe you were wrong about Mayumi.\n\nWhen you get home, your mother is waiting.\n\n\"I'm very disappointed in you, Miyuki!\"\n\n\"What? What's the matter?\"\n\n\"Don't play dumb with me, little missy! Upstairs, now!\"\n\nApparently, Mayumi went home crying, telling your mother that you pushed her off the swings and she fell. She even has a fresh scrape on her knee to prove it.\n\nYou get spanked for being a bully, and are forced to apologize to Mayumi. She smiles sweetly and says she is sure it was an accident, and you didn't mean for her to fall. Your mother beams proudly at her sweet, forgiving daughter before ordering you into your room for the rest of the night.\n\nYou are rapidly reaching the conclusion that your life cannot continue this way.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story50.json b/data/scraper/stories/story50.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7fc1f9b --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story50.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=7426", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Gunship Iron Eagle Two roared through sector 205 on the rim of the Mesarius star system. The sleek aerospace vehicle, similar in form to the hi-tech attack copters of the 21st Century, was designed with a swappable engine section, allowing it to be equipped with a spacedrive for stellar travel, or a jet-boost assisted rotor section for duties planetside. Turrets swivelled slowly on either side of the Gunship's hull, mounting missile launchers and an energy cannon, while the small chin-turret at the front, below the cockpit, housed twin-plasmabolt machine guns used in anti-infantry duties while planetside.\n\nKreiger 'Wildcat' Jones sat at the front of the two-man cockpit, one hand on the pilot's joystick, the other tapping occassionally at the keys on the console in front of him. \"I'm telling you, those frontier raiders make no sense at all. I mean, all they have to do is sign up with the Federation and all their supply and maintenance problems are solved! Makes no sense they would fight for political control of a few hundred rocks in space, and waste their lives trying to steal the equipment and supplies they need. I mean, sign on the dotted line, and they get everything for free without a fight, and the planets are still theirs to do with as they please, just with a Fed governor helping make sure things are run right.\"\n\nSusa 'Spitball' Henderson sat in the gunner's seat, behind him, with a complex console that controlled targeting and weapons systems. \"I guess for some people, the 'idea' of independance is more powerful than whatever the facts of the situation might be.\"\n\nJones shook his head in frustration. \"I just don't get it, that's all. We're better armed than they are. We've got better skills, better funding. We're going to defeat them in battle pretty much every time, but raiders keep a'coming. They should all - hey, wait a moment, I got something on the scan.\"\n\nHe tapped a few keys on his console, and zoomed in on one of his displays, where small flashes of light flickered in a section of the grid. \"Hey, we've got Space Folds in the next sector. Better report it in.\"\n\nHenderson turned on a Comm channel back to their carrier. \"Carrier Opal, this is gunship Iron Eagle Two, out in Sector Two-Oh-Five. We've just scanned incoming starships in Sector Two-Oh-Six. Requesting permission to check it out?\"\n\n\"This is carrier Opal, that is affirmitive. Watch your tails,\" the reply came back over the Comm.\n\n\"How many are you reading?\" Henderson asked Jones.\n\n\"Looks like four Space Folds detected. If it's a typical raider force, what, two transports, two of their rickety old gunships, we should be able to take 'em out or send 'em packing,\" Jones said confidently. Leaning softly on the joystick, he arced the gunship toward the sensor readings, and kicked on the afterburners. The Iron Eagle gunship rocketed forward and into the next sector.\n\n\"There they are,\" he said, seeing starship blips appearing on his radar. \"Hang on... these readings can't be right. Can you get some info on your tac console?\"\n\n\"Just a moment,\" Henderson said, tapping away on her console. \"What the - that can't be right at all. I think our scanner's gone screwy. The scale's all gone wrong.\"\n\n\"What do you mean?\" Jones asked hesitantly.\n\n\"This says those ships are huge... I mean, the smallest one is five times the size of our carrier!\" she replied.\n\n\"That can't be right, we've got no ships that big, and the raiders certainly don't have anything like that... Let's get a bit closer, try to get a visual.\" Jones increased the thrust, closing toward the four unknown starships. \"Coming into Optical range... now,\" he said, and zoomed in on the target location on one of his displays. What he saw was like nothing he had ever seen before. He took a few screen capture images.\n\n\"I've taken some shots, send these images back to the Opal, right now!\" he ordered.\n\n\"Transmitting data,\" she said, reaching for a button on her console. Something streamed out from one of the unidentified starships, like a beam of concentrated sunlight. The beam engulfed the Iron Eagle. It left nothing behind.", "action_results": [{"action": "On Patrol", "result": "It is a typical sunny Mesarian day, a soft breeze rustling leaves and causing the branches of the trees surrounding Fort Dale to sway softly. You walk from the barracks toward the large three-story high mecha hanger by the east walls of the complex, wondering why frontiersman would live on the desolate outer star systems, when they could live on the core worlds and enjoy weather like this. Well, I guess it takes all sorts to make the galaxy go round, you think to yourself.\n\nEntering the hanger, you pause to look up at the twelve Mechanised Assault Units, standing in bays on each side of the hanger. They are standard Fire Hawk and Gatling chassis, the first a multi-role fighting machine, the latter often used for anti-infantry, or anti-gunship purposes. At the rear of the hanger is a thirteenth bay, where the company commander's large M.A.U., a Nova, is parked. Bearing two large energy cannons, and standing almost to the roof of the hanger, it is the toughest M.A.U. fielded by Sol Federation. Of course, it takes the skill and experience of a company commander to pilot such a mecha. At least, that's what your C.O. tells you all.\n\n'Tomcat' and 'Wolfman' walk into the hanger, waving your way as they head for their machines. As the Squad Leader, you are in charge of the fort's M.A.U. Squad Beta, and as your two squadmates, they are under your command. Of course, being about the same age as you are, and having served for about the same amount of time as you have, they don't exactly obey your every whim. At least they obey you when it counts though, when raiders land ground forces on the planet, and you find yourself in the heat of battle.\n\nTurning to your left, you head for a small lift, and slap the 'up' button. It rises upward, taking you behind the torso section of your Gatling M.A.U. The war machine stands like a 7 metre (23 foot) high metal man, with rectangular armour plating panels slapped around joints and further protecting the chest section. Pressing some buttons on the back of the machine, a two-foot thick section of metal slides aside, letting you step into the chest of the machine.\n\nYou're already wearing your Pilot Suit, so you close the door behind you, and connect sensor cables to the sockets in your suit, and attach the control pads to the wrists of your suit. The control pads extend out below your hand, allowing you to move your hands about, and always be able to touch the buttons on the control pad that control every facet of the war machine, from targeting and firing weapons, to powering the machine up or down. The suit itself is harnessed to the inside of the machine, locking you into place. After powering up, any time you try to move a part of your body, the limbs of the towering war machine will echo the move. In this way, trying to walk will cause the machine to walk instead of you. Moving your body just the right amount to get the machine to move exactly where and when you want it to is a difficult art, and one that took years of boot-camp training to accomplish, but for a low-level Squad Leader, you think you do pretty good.\n\nBefore locking your suit into place, you attach your head equipment, and then you lock the suit, and power up. Instantly your vision goes blank, as your headset pulses into your skull, and interrupts the signals your optic nerves send to your brain. Then it begins to send signals of its own into your brain, as it reads optical information from the camera systems in the head of your war machine.\n\nA moment later, you suddenly feel very big, as you 'look' through the 'eyes' of your Gatling M.A.U., seven meters above the floor of the hanger. You try to turn your head from side to side, and the Gatling's head turns instead, allowing you to look around. Flexing your limbs a bit, you crouch the machine, stand back up, and wave the arms about a little. Everything seems to be in working order. Time to move out.\n\nYou step forwards, and the machine steps into the middle of the hanger bay. Tomcat and Wolfman walk their Fire Hawks out beside you, and together the three of you stomp out of the hanger.\n\n\"So, Squad Leader, where are we going to patrol today?\" Wolfman's voice comes over your headset.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Let's go for a walk in the forests around the Fort,\" you order.", "result": "You lead the squad to the towering gates of the Fort. \"This is Squad Beta, requesting Gate Clearance,\" you say to the fort's traffic control tower.\n\n\"We read you, Squad Beta. You're good to go,\" someone replies. The massive gates slide into the Fort's surrounding wall, and you lead your squad out. A large clearing lies between the Fort's walls and the forest that surrounds it, so that any approaching vehicles can always be seen. You lead your men down the main road and into the forest, among the equally towering trees. It's a funny thing, being at eye-level with the tops of many of the trees, and it always takes you a moment to get your balance right, and for the feeling of being a giant to become natural.\n\nMany of the trees are toppled over throughout the forest, from people having stomped out among the trees. Being a three-story high metal man means that you often have to push trees out of the way. While conservationists might have a problem with such actions in some areas of the planet, no one complains when soldiers do it around a fort, as they depend on the forts scattered across the planet for protection, and you never knew if a raider force had secretly touched down, and enemy M.A.U.s were hiding among the trees, waiting for an opportunity to strike.\n\nWell, actually, that sort of thing was pretty rare. The Orbital sensor network always detected incoming ships, and could pinpoint the exact landing location of any military transports on the planet. Anyway, you stomp off among the trees, shoving them out of the way whenever you need to make room for your machine. Wolfman and Tomcat stomp along, off to either side of you.\n\n\"One of these days, we're gonna find a raider mecha waiting for us out here, and patrol is going to actually be interesting,\" Tomcat laughs.\n\n\"Hey, anything beats sitting around the barracks, losing at cards to Thunder,\" Wolfman replies.\n\nSuddenly a ComTech from the Fort speaks over the Fort's military channel. \"This is Fort Dale to all units on patrol. Be advised, the planetary sensor network has detected unidentified incoming starships. We haven't been able to establish contact with the carrier scout network... This could be a raider force. Stand By for possible interception coordinates.\"\n\n\"I hope they land in our sector... haven't seen any action in months now,\" Tomcat says.\n\n\"Hang on, did they say they couldn't establish communcations with the carrier scout network? What does that mean? A raider force couldn't take out all the carriers and gunships out there. I haven't heard of them being able to jam our communications either,\" Wolfman says worriedly.\n\n\"Nah, probably just a technical glitch at our Fort. The other Fort's probably heard all about it from the scout network,\" Tomcat says dismissively.\n\nThe ComTech at Fort Dale speaks over the military channel again. \"All units on patrol, be advised the planet has been taken to High Alert. We don't know what those ships are up there, but they're huge! Dozens of smaller ships, we assume they're military transports, have come out of the mothers, and are coming down all across the planet. We've got a couple of these transports inbound toward our location. Keep an eye on the skies, people, and if you get in over your head, get back here, and take up defensive positions inside the Fort! The other pilots at Fort Dale are mounting up, and should be ready for action soon.\"\n\n\"What the hell? Multiple transports heading our way? What exactly are we up against?\" Wolfman asks anxiously.\n\n\"Hey, frontier raiders aren't well armed. They're probably just small transports, full of infantry. We'll mow them down, and be back to the Fort for dinner in no time,\" Tomcat says confidently.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"No, I think Wolfman's right to be worried. Let's head back to the Fort, and take up a defensive position with the rest of our M.A.U. company,\" you order.", "result": "You lead the way back to the Fort. Seeing you coming across the clearing around Fort Dale, Traffic Control opens the doors for you, and you stomp your way into the walled complex. Only a few minutes later, you pick up approaching blips on the scanner hud display which is 'projected' into your mind by your headset, in the corner of your 'vision'. Four large unidentified transports are heading toward the Fort.\n\nYou listen to the roaring of flying machines on your M.A.U.'s audio sensors, approaching from the east. The other ten M.A.U.'s of Fort Dale's company have marched out of the Hanger, and begin taking up positions around the perimeter, their outstretched weapon-bearing arms just above the walls of the Fort, pointing in every direction. You quickly take up a position with your squad, along the east wall.\n\nMoments later, you can see the four massive transports. They are about the size of a squad-carrying M.A.U. transport, but they are a bit bulkier and boxier than any M.A.U. transports you've seen before.\n\nIn the Fort's courtyard, the infantry division assemble, about a hundred soldiers. Most of them were standard infantry bearing plasmabolt rifles and shocksticks, but a dozen or so were fitted up in battlesuits - three meter tall armoured exoskeltons with clawed robotic hands, and small energy cannons attached to each shoulder.\n\nAt the rear of the Fort, another hanger houses a Gunship squad. The six flying machines had just finished powering up and begin to lift up into the air to intercept the enemy transports. Suddenly a thick bolt of lightening blasts out from the nose of the leading enemy transport ship. The lightning crackles loudly as it arcs through the air toward Fort Dale, to explode in the midst of the Gunships! The lightning bolt narrowly misses the Gunships, their pilots scattering the ships away from each other, but two pilots panic, and you watch in horror as their ships crash together in the air, then tumble in a wreck of twisted metal and fire, to crash onto the tarmac.\n\nSome of the other M.A.U. soldiers open fire with their weapons. Your company commander, Captain Jefferson, yells out over the local military channel, \"Hold your fire! They're out of range! Save your ammo and power cells! Everyone, get down!\"\n\nYou join with your company as everyone kneels their M.A.U. war machines behind the Fort's wall. The remaining four Gunships fold down their rotors, and kick on their afterburners, rocketing through the air toward the enemy transports. You watch them fly overhead, then lose sight of them due to the Fort's walls. You hear the roar of the afterburners kick off again as the Gunships draw near to the flying transports, and listen to energy cannons and missiles firing away. A while later, you hear the loud crack of another lightning strikes, and some explosions. Then there is a tremendous crashing sound, and the ground shakes.\n\n\"Looks like it takes them a while to recharge that lightning cannon. Someone get a look at what's happening out there!\" Captain Jefferson orders.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"I'll do it,\" you say bravely, and stand your M.A.U. up to look over the Fort's walls.", "result": "You quickly stand up and look out over the walls of Fort Dale through the eyes of your Gatling war machine.\n\n\"Sir, the Gunships are all down, but it looks like they took out one of the enemy transports!\" you report, looking at the smoke and flames rising from the distant fields beyond the forest. Three of the large transports are hovering in the air near the wreckage. Then you see some sort of flickering light at the front of one of the transports.", "action_results": [{"action": "Curious, you decide to keep watching, and see what it does next.", "result": "Seconds later, you remember about it's strange energy weapon, and then you watch as the weapon finishes charging up, and a massive bolt of lightning surges through the air with a loud crack. It is the last sound you ever hear, as the lightning bolt blasts the top half of your M.A.U. to scrap, taking most of your body with it.\n\nThis is the end, for you...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You decide not to take any risks, and crouch back down behind the wall.", "result": "As you crouch back down, you hear a loud cracking sound, as the weapon that had been charging up finished charging, and launches one of the massive lightning bolts through the air. The searing electrical beam blasts through the air where you were standing moments ago, and smashes into one of the armoured buildings in the middle of the Fort. A large fiery hole is blown through the side of the building, as debris scatters into the courtyard, among screaming infantry. The rest of the infantry and battlesuit wearing soldiers run for cover.\n\n\"Damn it! How can they shoot so far! Who the hell are they?\" Captain Jefferson growls over the Comm. Then the ground shakes again - the familiar shaking of massive spaceships landing on the ground in the distance.\n\n\"Okay, they've touched down in the fields out past the forest... That means there's lines of trees between us and whatever ground forces they've brought down. We won't know what's coming until they reach the clearing around Fort Dale,\" the Captain says. He cautiously raises his Nova M.A.U. so that its head can peek above the wall.\n\n\"Those transports are so big, more than half of their hull rises above the tree line. I suspect they'll keep barraging the Fort with that lightning cannon of theirs, while their troops advance. Intel has it they are coming down all across the planet, so we've got to hold Fort Dale, because there aint going to be reinforcements coming our way any time soon. So, I'm gonna need two squads to volunteer. I want a squad to take turns looking over the wall for incoming enemies, and I need a squad for scout duty, to try and get a closer look at what we're dealing with before they reach us.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Sir! Squad Beta will scout out the enemy,\" you volunteer.", "result": "\"Oh, great!\" Wolfman says, and you smile as his mecha shakes its head.\n\n\"Good job, Squad Leader,\" Captain Jefferson says. \"Head east into the trees, and try to get us some optics on the enemy. I want you three to patch an optic channel back here to Fort Dale, so myself and the other officers can see what you see.\"\n\n\"Will do, Captain,\" you reply, and flick a switch on one of your control pads. A blinking light in the corner of your vision tells you that your mecha is transmitting everything you see to the commanders of the Fort.\n\n\"Okay Squad Beta, form on me!\" you order, and Wolfman and Tomcat take a position on either side of you. The large gate in the south wall slowly slides open.\n\n\"Good luck, men,\" the Captain says.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Okay, on my mark, make a dash for the trees... Mark!\" you order, and race for the trees.", "result": "The three of you stomp past the gate at full speed, racing across the clearing that lies around Fort Dale. As you dash, you glance to the east, where the top half of the three transports rise above the treeline in the distance. With a curse, you notice power building up at the front of one of the transports.\n\n\"Get into the trees, they're going to fire again!\" you shout. You rush into the trees just as you hear the loud cracking sound of a lightning bolt cannon firing, then suddenly the force of an explosion sends you falling forwards among the trees. You grab onto a tree and stumble down on one knee, but manage to stay relatively upright. Turning, you see Tomcat crouching beside you, but metres behind you, still in the clearing, is the half melted wreck of what was once Wolfman - obliterated by the enemy weapon.\n\n\"Dammit! Man down, I repeat, man down!\" you say over the military channel.\n\n\"We see it,\" the Captain replies, watching everything through your mecha's 'eyes' from within Fort Dale. \"You're in the forest now though, you should be out of sight of the transports' weapon.\"\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "\"I understand. We'll do the best we can, and get those visuals you're after,\" you promise, thinking a quick prayer for Wolfman.", "result": "You head deeper into the forest, angling toward the east, as you work your way into a position between the grounded enemy transports and the walls of Fort Dale. You glance at the radar sensor readings every few seconds to make sure no enemy contacts have come within range. Of course, your sensors only pick up energy sources - they were designed to pick up vehicles and war machines similar to your own. If the transports were carrying an army of infantry soldiers, and they weren't wearing any form of powered armour, you'll only notice them when you actually see them... Anyhow, transports the size of those ones had to be carrying something pretty big inside of them, so the enemy must be inside some sort of war machines.\n\n\"This aint good,\" Tomcat says softly over your squad channel.\n\n\"I know,\" you reply anxiously, stomping through the forest towards the other side.\n\n\"I mean, this really aint good,\" Tomcat says.\n\n\"Keep your mind on the job. We have to get some visuals on enemy units, so the Fort knows what they're up against,\" you tell him.\n\n\"What if they're bigger and tougher than we are?\" he asks.\n\n\"Then we get a look at them for the Captain, and get the hell out of here,\" you say grimly. It's a strange feeling. You've never had to think about retreat before.\n\nSuddenly you pick up a small blip on your sensors, then a couple other small ones. The blips are moving toward you at a high speed, shifting about slightly. Probably dodging trees. Some sort of small hover vehicle, you wonder?\n\n\"Incoming hostiles,\" you say over the squad channel.\n\n\"I see them,\" he replies.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Okay, let's brace to fire. Take 'em out on sight,\" you order.", "result": "\"Roger,\" he replies. The two of you plant your war machines' feet slightly apart, and firmly on the ground, having turned to face the incoming targets. You tap a button on one of your suit's control pads, and the twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns attached to your M.A.U.'s left arm begin spinning rapidly, ready to fire.\n\nSeconds later, the fast moving machines zip into sight through the trees, and you both open fire. Superheated bolts of energy blast out from your arm, tracing a line of destruction through the trees. You see a couple explosions, and fiery fragments of hover machines go flying through the air, but two of the small machines go flying between you and Tomcat, and in a second, disappear into the trees behind you.\n\n\"What the hell were they?\" Tomcat asks.\n\nYou wait to make sure the hover machines aren't heading back in your direction. On your sensor display you see them continuing on toward the Fort. \"Must be scouts of some kind. We've got a moment - bring up visual playback and let's check them out,\" you order.\n\nYou bring up a small window in the corner of your vision, and rewind the optical recordings of what your M.A.U. has seen recently. Just before the explosions took place, you press pause, and see a blurry image of what you blew up. It looked like a civilian a-grav hoverbike, but of a more angular design than those you had seen. A blurry figure sat on top of it, but you can't make out any good details. They appeared to be wearing some sort of green uniform that covered their whole body, like a jumpsuit, with oval shaped goggles or something on their faces.\n\n\"You got this, Captain?\" you ask over the military channel.\n\n\"We see it. Good work, Squad Leader. Must be some sort of scouts. Get closer, and try to get something on their main forces. We'll try to clear up your visual image, and get a better look at what you blew up. We'll deal with the other scouts when they get here,\" Captain Jefferson tells you.\n\nSuddenly there's a loud crack, and a massive bolt of lightning flies over the top of the forest. Explosions tell you that they struck at the Fort again, and you wonder how much damage they did.\n\nYou wait a moment, and then wave your Gatling's hand. Tomcat moves back into position beside you. You head off at a fast pace, continuing through the forest toward the landing site. Ten minutes later, numerous sensor blips begin appearing all over your sensors in the distance, close together so it is hard to tell what was a large enemy unit, or what was just a group of them close together. At the edge of your sensors, three massive blips mark the location of the enemy transports.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Okay, let's run to the edge of the forest, get a good look, then get back to the Fort in one piece,\" you order.", "result": "You head for the edge of the forest, noticing that some of the enemy forces are moving away from the transports, toward the forest as well. Minutes later, the trees begin to thin before you, and you get your first glimpses of the enemy.\n\nThe three massive metal transports rise high above the ground in the fields beyond the forest, and massive hatches in their sides have opened. Hundreds, if not thousands, of infantry soldiers had already poured out of the transports to assemble in large formations in the fields. What is more disturbing are their mechanised assault units. These M.A.U.s are like nothing you have ever seen.\n\n\nInstead of being shaped like a big metal man, they are on four legs, with a large body pod-section in the middle, bristling with weapons. What is worse, if your estimates are correct, is that the enemy M.A.U.s must be sixteen metres (52 feet) high! They tower above the ground like five or six-story buildings! That's more than twice the height of your own war machine - and you thought your Gatling was big!\n\nThe body section of these behemoth sized war machines have three rotating cylinder shapes coming out of them, with sparkling, glowing spheres moving along the rims. They must be weapons of some sort, able to move about to fire in any direction!\n\n\"Squad Leader,\" the Captain's voice comes over the military channel. \"Zoom your optics in on those soldiers, let's try to identify who we're dealing with.\"\n\nYou press a button and zoom your view in on a large group of soldiers. What the - you gasp. You hear the Captain and Tomcat swear in unison, as they both get a better look as well. From the blurry image of the hoverbike rider you saw earlier, you had thought the soldiers were wearing some sort of green body suit. Now you realise it's their skin! Their unhelmeted heads reveal the enemy to be some sort of lizard men! You're dealing with an alien invasion fleet! No wonder the scout ships in this star system hadn't reported in - they had been destroyed by aliens with completely different weapon technology to your own! Thinking further, you realise that there haven't been any frontier raiders attacking in a long time. Perhaps the frontier star systems had already been conquered by the alien force?\n\nEven more chilling, you notice that many of the lizardman soldiers have long swords hanging from their belts, in addition to the rifles they carried. Swords? Talk about close combat. You feel glad that you aren't in the infantry, but have many sheets of metal between you and whatever comes your way.\n\n\"All right, Squad Leader, get back here pronto! We'll need all the help we can get!\" Captain Jefferson orders you.\n\n\"This aint good man... this aint good!\" Tomcat says over the squad channel, as one of the massive transports sends another crackling lightning bolt over the forest, and into the Fort compound.\n\nSome legions of infantry, and two of the massive behemoth war machines, have begun marching toward where you and Tomcat are hiding among the trees. Have they seen you on their sensors? Most probably, you think.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Okay, Tomcat, let's get back to Fort Dale!\" you order, turning your war machine around.", "result": "You rush off into the forest, heading west toward the Fort. Behind you, too close for comfort, you hear cracking sounds like that of the alien transports' lightning cannon, but on a smaller scale, followed by explosions along the treeline. If you had remained near the edge of the forest, than whatever just fired would probably have blown you away! You feel a chill run down your spine as you race through the forest toward the walls of the Fort, and temporary safety.\n\nAround fifteen minutes later, having edged around to the southern side of the Fort, and having waited for the alien transports to fire their massive cannons at the Fort again, you race into the clearing and for the Fort gate.\n\n\"Squad Beta to Fort Dale, open up, we're coming in!\" you shout over the military channel. Thankfully, the gates slide open as you approach, and the two of you quickly move over to one of the walls, and crouch down behind it.\n\n\"Good to see you two,\" the Captain says. \"Shame about Wolfman, he was a good soldier.\"\n\n\"Thank you Captain,\" you reply, feeling a moment of guilt that all you had thought of was how happy you were to make it back to the Fort in one piece.\n\nThe Captain addresses the M.A.U. pilots of Dale Company. \"Okay, people, I want a defensive line along the east wall. Infantry will stand prepared to deal with any of those lizard men who manage to breach the walls. We're to focus on those big...\"\n\n\"I called them Behemoths, sir,\" you prompt him.\n\n\"Hmm. Behemoth it is. All pilots to focus fire on the enemy Behemoths. Gatling pilots, feel free to use your machine guns on the infantry forces as well. We recently got word that the Carriers Rogerson and Toyama are still up there in space. The Toyama will be bringing their squadrons of Gunships to provide us some support here at Fort Dale, so we just have to hold out until they arrive. If you believe in God or something, now's the time to say a prayer.\"\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Sir - has anyone sent a message Out System to try and reach Sol Federation Command, and let them know we're under attack by aliens?\" you ask.", "result": "\"Of course we've tried that, Squad Leader. It seems something is jamming the Fort's interstellar communications. The enemy is blocking the Greyson Transmitter somehow, so we're stuck with local communications. I don't know if they're only jamming the Fort, or if the whole planet has been jammed somehow, but there's nothing we can do here,\" he tells you.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"What about civilian transmitters? If they're only jamming the Forts, they might not know about the Civilian Comm Centres!\" you suggest.", "result": "\"It's possible,\" Captain Jefferson agrees. \"If they aren't jamming the whole planet, but just the military, there might be a way to get a message through... Okay, here's the plan. You and Tomcat are to make for Drysdon City, and see if the C.C.C. there has been jammed. If not, transmit the visual data you recorded on you scouting mission. It might not work, but it's worth a try.\"\n\n\"It's got to work,\" Tomcat says. \"We saw how many of them there were out there. If it's like that at the other Forts, this planet is going to fall, and fast. We've got to get reinforcements!\"\n\n\"Get out of here, before the main force arrives,\" the Captain orders, as another explosive blast from the enemy transport cannons strikes one of the Fort's buildings. The gate slides open, and you and Tomcat race across the clearing and back into the forest.\n\nDrysdon City is located to the west, luckily for you, as the enemy landed in the east. It should take you a few hours running to get there. Thankfully, you don't have to physically run with your body, but only make slight movements for your war machine to respond to, so you should be able to run the whole way without tiring out. That is, assuming more alien forces haven't landed between the Fort and the city... or even in the city itself!\n\nForest turns into fields, and farmland, on either side of the road to Drysdon City. Soon more houses and buildings spread out in all directions, as you both stomp along the wide nature strip between opposite road lanes, designed so that M.A.U.'s can move through populated areas without stepping on hovercars or pedestrians. As the buildings grow up around you, and you approach the city, traffic lights at intersections automatically detect your approach, and turn red, so you can race across roads without squashing anyone.\n\nSkyscrapers rise before too long, and you are in the city. People scream and point in astonishment, as the two war machines run through the city. You wonder that everyone is still going about their business, and then realise that they might not even be aware that an alien invasion force has attacked the planet.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Hey Tomcat, we better warn these people of the danger they're in from the alien invasion!\" you say.", "result": "\"I hear you,\" Tomcat replies. Together, you turn on your loudspeakers, and start warning people to find shelter, or some place safe, as an enemy force has invaded the planet and has a chance of overwhelming the Forts.\n\nYou quickly realise it was a mistake. As word spreads, and people hear your message while you run through the city, people begin to panic. Hovercars start speeding off in every direction. People race about recklessly, ignoring traffic rules. You soon find that you and Tomcat are standing in the middle of a traffic jam of panicking people!\n\n\"Get out of the way! We've got to get a message out over the C.C.C.!\" you cry over the loudspeakers. You realise your second mistake, as dozens of people start running toward the Civilian Communications Centre to get their own messages out.\n\n\"We've got to get there!\" Tomcat growls over the squad channel, then yells over the loudspeaker, \"We're coming through, get out of our way!\" He steps forward, crushing the front of a hovercar beneath one of his Fire Hawk M.A.U.'s massive feet. People scream and start running away from the two war machines.\n\n\"Come on!\" he tells you over the squad channel, as he sets off, people and cars hurrying to make way. You sigh. There's no other way, you realise, and you stomp off after him, occassionally crushing parts of hovercars, and hoping no one gets injured as you race for the C.C.C.\n\nYou finally arrive at a large building with a massive dish on the roof, and the letters \"C.C.C.\" on a big sign. Pressing a button on your control pad, you shut down your Gatling. The pilot suit loosens up in it's harness, and you unbuckle yourself and pull free. Detaching the cables and control pads from your suit, you quickly find a small portable data stick, and insert it into a slot in the cockpit. Pulling a small switch, you wait as the visual data of your machine is downloaded onto the data stick, and then you pull the stick out and pocket it.\n\nPressing some buttons at the rear of the cockpit, the thick rear hatch slides open. Another button causes a rope ladder to pop out, and unfurl, unrolling down to the street far below you. You always feel uneasy climbing down, but you were trained for it, and you quickly descend to the street below. By now crowds have begun closing in on your parked M.A.U.s, calling out questions, and asking what is going on.\n\n\"Come on!\" Tomcat calls to you from nearby, and you both push your way through the crowd and into the C.C.C. building. People are everywhere inside, trying to get the attention of the clerks.\n\n\"Over here!\" One of the clerks calls out to you, seeing your military uniforms. You push your way through the crowd to the desk.\n\n\"This data has to be transmitted to Sol Federation Command, on Earth!\" you cry out over all the noise, and hand the data stick to the clerk. They nod their head, and plug the stick into their computer console. You pray that they haven't been jammed by the alien fleet. Moments later, the clerk gives you a thumbs' up. It worked!\n\nTomcat shares a laugh with you. Your mission succeeded! Now, it would take a few days for the transmission to reach the Earth, but there was hope! Someone would surely come and rescue the people of Mesarius V!\n\n\"Now what do we do? Our two mecha alone can't defend this city!\" Tomcat says.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Let's get back into our M.A.U.s, and radio Fort Dale, and see what happened back there,\" you suggest.", "result": "You push your way back through the crowds, and climb the ladders up into your war machines. After suiting up and reactivating the machine, you turn on the Fort Dale military channel.\n\n\"This is Squad Beta, in Drysdon City. Captain Jefferson, do you read me?\" you ask. There is no reply, just static. Either the local military channels are also jammed now, or the Fort no longer exists...\n\n\"What do we do?\" you wonder out loud.\n\n\"Squad Leader,\" Tomcat says, having heard you over the squad channel, \"They didn't attack the cities, they focused only on military targets. Perhaps they aren't here to wipe us all out, but just to take control? Maybe they won't obliterate the cities?\"\n\n\"You could be right,\" you agree. \"If that's the case, then walking around in these war machines could make us and anyone near us targets for the enemy. How about... we'll hide our M.A.U.s in a warhouse somewhere, and try to blend in with the crowd. If the enemy comes in firing, then we mount up, and go out in a blaze of glory. What do you say?\"\n\n\"I'm with you, Squad Leader,\" he replies.\n\nYou stomp your way through the city, to the warehouse district. People scatter as the two M.A.U.'s stomp across the yards around a large warehouse that looks big enough to park your machines inside. Some workers come out, waving angry fists in the air.\n\n\"We're requisitioning this building for the military,\" Tomcat says over the loudspeakers, and you grin. They rush away, and you head inside and power down.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "\"Come on, let's get to the C.C.C.!\" you order Tomcat.", "result": "You finally arrive at a large building with a massive dish on the roof, and the letters \"C.C.C.\" on a big sign. Pressing a button on your control pad, you shut down your Gatling. The pilot suit loosens up in it's harness, and you unbuckle yourself and pull free. Detaching the cables and control pads from your suit, you quickly find a small portable data stick, and insert it into a slot in the cockpit. Pulling a small switch, you wait as the visual data of your machine is downloaded onto the data stick, and then you pull the stick out and pocket it.\n\nPressing some buttons at the rear of the cockpit, the thick rear hatch slides open. Another button causes a rope ladder to pop out, and unfurl, unrolling down to the street far below you. You always feel uneasy climbing down, but you were trained for it, and you quickly descend to the street below.\n\nA small crowd gathers, watching the two pilots come out of their war machines, obviously wondering what is going on. It is not unusual for M.A.U.s to walk through the city, but the two of you had ran in quite a hurry.\n\n\"Come on!\" Tomcat calls to you from nearby, and you both push your way past the crowd and into the C.C.C. building.\n\n\"Over here!\" One of the clerks calls out to you, seeing your military uniforms.\n\n\"This data has to be transmitted to Sol Federation Command, on Earth!\" you say, and hand the data stick to the clerk. She nods her head, and plugs the stick into her computer console. You pray that the C.C.C. hasn't been jammed by the alien fleet. Moments later, the clerk gives you a thumbs' up. It worked!\n\nTomcat shares a laugh with you. Your mission succeeded! Now, it would take a few days for the transmission to reach the Earth, but there was hope! Someone would surely come and rescue the people of Mesarius V!\n\n\"Now what do we do? Our two mecha alone can't defend this city!\" Tomcat says.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Let's get back in our machines, and try to see how the Fort is faring,\" you say.", "result": "You go back outside into the street, and climb the ladders up into your war machines. After suiting up and reactivating the machine, you turn on the Fort Dale military channel.\n\n\"This is Squad Beta, in Drysdon City. Captain Jefferson, do you read me?\" you ask. There is no reply, just static. Either the local military channels are also jammed now, or the Fort no longer exists...\n\n\"What do we do?\" you wonder out loud.\n\n\"Squad Leader,\" Tomcat says, having heard you over the squad channel, \"They didn't attack the cities, they focused only on military targets. Perhaps they aren't here to wipe us all out, but just to take control? Maybe they won't obliterate the cities?\"\n\n\"You could be right,\" you agree. \"If that's the case, then walking around in these war machines could make us and anyone near us targets for the enemy. How about... we'll hide our M.A.U.s in a warhouse somewhere, and try to blend in with the crowd. If the enemy comes in firing, then we mount up, and go out in a blaze of glory. What do you say?\"\n\n\"I'm with you, Squad Leader,\" he replies.\n\nYou stomp your way through the city, to the warehouse district. People scatter as the two M.A.U.'s stomp across the yards around a large warehouse that looks big enough to park your machines inside. Some workers come out, waving angry fists in the air.\n\n\"We're requisitioning this building for the military,\" Tomcat says over the loudspeakers, and you grin. They rush away, and you head inside and power down.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "'I guess they're probably jamming the whole planet,' you think. Better focus on defending this fort!", "result": "Everyone readies themselves for the coming battle, and another two of the massive blasts from the transports fire upon the Fort before enemy blips begin massing on your sensors. Squad Alpha is on 'wall duty', their M.A.U.'s leaning up to peek over the wall every now and then.\n\nSuddenly one of them ducks his head back down, as smaller versions of the lightning cannon blast through the air.\n\n\"The enemy is here!\" the pilot tinforms everyone. \"Looks like those Behemoth's have three lightning weapons on them, smaller than the transports, but deadly all the same!\"\n\n\"Okay people, time to make a stand! Aim and fire, but keep an eye out for the transports. If you see them charging their big cannons up, duck down behind the wall until after they fire, then get back up again. We're here until it's just them or us. Go! Go! Go!\" the Captain shouts.\n\nEveryone leaps up and opens fire with everything they have. Looking out over the wall, you see two of the massive Behemoth machines stomping out of the forest, trees collapsing all around them. In front of and around the Behemoths are swarms of lizardman infantry. Many of them running at the wall, others leaping and bounding with incredible speed!\n\nOne of the Behemoths fires three bolts of artificial lightning from its three weapon spheres, and the energy arcs in on one of the pilots in Squad Gamma, completely obliterating the top half of his M.A.U. in a single blast!", "action_results": [{"action": "You open fire on the Behemoths with your energy cannon and your twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns!", "result": "You start blasting away with your fellow Dale Company M.A.U.'s at the Behemoth war machines. Blasts of superheated energy lance out from the energy cannon attached to your mecha's right arm, melting lines through the thick armour of the enemy war machines. Your twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns rotate at blinding speed, spitting out fiery bolts that spray the surface of an enemy war machine, peppering it with superheated metal.\n\nUnder the concentrated fire of Dale Company, one of the front legs of a Behemoth begins to buckle at the knee joint. As it starts to fall, it fires the three lightning-globe weapons, lashing out with fierce energy strikes. Two members of Squad Gamma are blown away by the strike, and a member of Squad Alpha goes down as the other Behemoth fires as well! There are only nine M.A.U.'s left in Dale Company!\n\nThen the front Behemoth tilts and it's leg snaps at the knee. The machine falls forward, pounding into the ground, but you realise that the moveable lightning-ball weapons on the top/sides of the machine are still able to point in the direction of the Fort's walls, so it is far from being out of the battle.\n\nSwarms of infantry charge the walls, some of the lizardmen jumping and bounding across the ground. As they reach the bottom of the wall, the jumping lizardmen leap up onto the wall, and somehow manage to cling to the slick metal surface! With horror, you watch as a dozen of the leaping lizard men climb up the wall, and leap past the towering Dale Company M.A.U.'s, and into the courtyard!\n\nYou glance behind you momentarily to see the infantry of Dale Fort battle it out with the lizard men. A number of soldiers die horribly, as the lizard men draw wicked looking swords, and cut them down. Then the Fort's battlesuit warriors open fire with their anti-infantry weapons, and blow the lizard men away.\n\nA small lightning bolt blast explodes against the wall beside you, from one of the Behemoths, and you turn you attention back to the battle!", "action_results": [{"action": "Focus fire on the fallen Behemoth!", "result": "Everyone joins together in firing on the fallen Behemoth. After a while, fragments of metal blast away from the top of the machine, and you fire into the hole. There's a huge explosion from within the Behemoth, as fire roars out the hole in its hull. Everyone cheers!\n\nThe cheers are cut short, six streams of lightning blast out of the trees. Tomcat and the Captain are blown away as two more Behemoths stomp out of the forest and join the battle! Then you notice energy charging at the front of the massive transports in the distance.\n\n\"Everyone down!\" you cry out, and everyone ducks as a massive lightning blast assaults the Fort. The Command Centre at the middle of the complex blows apart, shattering under the assault of the weapon! Then you see hundreds of lizardmen leaping over the walls and bounding down into the courtyard!\n\n\"We're being overrun!\" someone shouts over the military channel. You quickly stand up again, and open fire on the lizards with your Gatling's twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns, mowing down groups of lizards, but there's too many of them! The Fort's infantry are swarmed, falling and screaming beneath the assault. Beside you, a fellow M.A.U. get's blown away by a back shot from the Behemoths behind you, on the other side of the wall!\n\nThen the lizard men are leaping and bounding onto the M.A.U.'s. You try to look down at the body of your M.A.U. but you head can't look straight down. They're crawling over your body, doing something! You glance at an M.A.U. near you, and see lizard warriors planting what looks like small explosive charges on the backs of his war machine. Moments later, you hear an explosion behind you, in the cockpit, and feel wind rushing inside.\n\nYour last thought is that they've blown the cockpit hatch off, and then you feel the blade of a sword thrust through your back, and everything goes dark.\n\nIt is the end... for you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "You focus your twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns on the swarms of lizard man infantry!", "result": "You set your twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns into rotation mode, and start laying down lines of superheated bolts across the clearing, mowing down lizardmen soldiers who are charging for the Fort's walls. Some of the other Gatling pilots join you, focusing fire on the enemy infantry, while the Fire Hawks and the Captain's Nova focus their fire on one of the Behemoth war machines.\n\nTo your amazement and horror, many of the lizardman infantry leap and bound as they head for the wall, managing to dodge most of the superheated bullets streaming from the Gatlings' machine guns. Then the Behemoths open fire, six streams of artificial lightning surging toward the wall. You see the three M.A.U's of Squad Alpha get completely blown away under the assault! There's only nine of you left in Dale Company!\n\nAs the approaching enemy infantry reach the bottom of the wall, the jumping lizardmen leap up onto the wall, and somehow manage to cling to the slick metal surface! With horror, you watch as a dozen of the leaping lizard men climb up the wall, and leap past the towering Dale Company M.A.U.'s, and into the courtyard!\nYou glance behind you momentarily to see the infantry of Dale Fort battle it out with the lizard men. A number of soldiers die horribly, as the lizard men draw wicked looking swords, and cut them down. Then the Fort's battlesuit warriors open fire with their anti-infantry weapons, and blow the lizard men away.\n\nA small lightning bolt blast explodes against the wall beside you, from one of the Behemoths, and you turn you attention back to the battle! One of the Behemoths' legs snaps off at the knee and it falls forward, plunging into the ground. However, the moving, rotating design of its weapon system means the two lightning weapons on its upper body can still aim and fire toward the wall, so it isn't out of the fight yet!", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"Let's wait a moment longer, to make sure nothing else comes out of those transports,\" you order.", "result": "You wait a minute longer, as the detachment of enemies draws closer, watching the transprots to see if anything else you've never seen before comes out. Nothing does.\n\n\"Okay, let's get out of here!\" you order.\n\n\"I hear ya!\" Tomcat says in relief.\n\nYou turn to run back west through the forest, Tomcat just behind you, when suddenly you hear the cracking sound of the transport weapons firing again! You only have a moment to respond, diving to one side, before it strikes. There's a huge explosion, shattering trees and scattering debris, as your war machine rolls along the ground, crashing into the trunk of a large tree.\n\nFor a while there is just a ringing sound in your ears, and large cracks and gaps in your vision tell you the optic feeds from the head of your M.A.U. were damaged. You try to stand up, but your limbs are all held solid in place, meaning your M.A.U. took severe damage, and it can't get up. Swearing, you try hailing Tomcat.\n\n\"Tomcat, you okay?\" you say over the squad channel. You get no response, just static. Damn, you think to yourself, as you flick a switch on one of your control panels, and power down. Your suit suddenly becomes limp, as the power turns off, and you slip out of the cockpit harness that held you in place. Unplugging cables you pull your headset free, and your own eyes' natural vision is restored. You realise your M.A.U. is lying on its side, on the ground, and press a button at the back of the cockpit to open the rear hatch. Only two meters off the ground, in this position, you lower yourself down to the forest floor.\n\nLooking around, you see that one of the massive lightning strikes hit right where the two of you were standing. Tomcat's M.A.U. lies scattered about in pieces of burning rubble. The blast must have struck him in the back, and because you were in front of him, you were partially shielded. Turning, you assess the wreck of your war machine. It will never walk again.\n\nWhat do I do now? You wonder. You decide to try and hike back to Fort Dale, and hope you don't run into alien infantry... or one of those massive behemoth war machines!\n\nYou start hiking, grumbling about the fact that M.A.U. pilots aren't equipped with sidearms. About ten minutes into your hike, witnessing two more of the powerful lightning strikes surge through the air above the forest, and hearing explosions from the Fort, you hear whining engine sounds behind you.\n\nThe sounds come so fast, you don't have time to respond. Alien soldiers on hoverbikes roar past you, narrowly missing you, as enemy scouts head toward the fort. Suddenly one of the hoverbikes comes back! It quickly slows to a halt, and the soldier leaps down onto the ground. Before you stands some sort of lizard man, covered in green scales!\n\nThe lizard man looks you up and down, and sees you have no ranged weapon on you, so he tosses his rifle behind him. Then you notice he has two more weapons - wicked looking swords hanging from either side of his belt. Swords? Who in the galaxy wields swords in this day and age??\n\nThe alien creature tosses one of the swords at you, and it lands quivering blade-first in the ground at your feet. It gestures for you to pick up the sword. With no other options apparant, you hesitantly pull the blade from the ground. Instantly, the alien launches into its attack. With no training in this sort of thing, you manage to block the alien's first sword blow, but the second slices clean through your heart.\n\nThis is the end... for you.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Spread out behind the trees and let them pass. Hopefully they won't see us,\" you order.", "result": "You quickly run south, and try to get as many trees between you and the incoming vehicles as possible, while Tomcat runs north. You watch the small blips on your sensors, and hear small engine sounds roar past through the forest. The blips on your display keep heading west toward the fort, and then they vanish from sight.\n\nYou head north and meet up with Tomcat again.\n\n\"Must be scouts of some kind. Hopefully they didn't detect us, or the rest of the enemy force might know we are coming,\" you say over the squad channel.\n\nSuddenly there's a loud crack, and a massive bolt of lightning flies over the top of the forest. Explosions tell you that they struck at the Fort again, and you wonder how much damage they did.\n\nYou wait a moment, and then wave your Gatling's hand. Tomcat moves into position beside you, and you head off at a fast pace, continuing through the forest toward the landing site. Ten minutes later, numerous sensor blips begin appearing all over your sensors in the distance, close together so it is hard to tell what was a large enemy unit, or what was just a group of them close together. At the edge of your sensors, three massive blips mark the location of the enemy transports.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Okay, let's run to the edge of the forest, get a good look, then get back to the Fort in one piece,\" you order.", "result": "You head for the edge of the forest, noticing that some of the enemy forces are moving away from the transports, toward the forest as well. Minutes later, the trees begin to thin before you, and you get your first glimpses of the enemy.\n\nThe three massive metal transports rise high above the ground in the fields beyond the forest, and massive hatches in their sides have opened. Hundreds, if not thousands, of infantry soldiers had already poured out of the transports to assemble in large formations in the fields. What is more disturbing are their mechanised assault units. These M.A.U.s are like nothing you have ever seen.\n\n\nInstead of being shaped like a big metal man, they are on four legs, with a large body pod-section in the middle, bristling with weapons. What is worse, if your estimates are correct, is that the enemy M.A.U.s must be sixteen metres (52 feet) high! They tower above the ground like five or six-story buildings! That's more than twice the height of your own war machine - and you thought your Gatling was big!\n\nThe body section of these behemoth sized war machines have three rotating cylinder shapes coming out of them, with sparkling, glowing spheres moving along the rims. They must be weapons of some sort, able to move about to fire in any direction!\n\n\"Squad Leader,\" the Captain's voice comes over the military channel. \"Zoom your optics in on those soldiers, let's try to identify who we're dealing with.\"\n\nYou press a button and zoom your view in on a large group of soldiers. What the - you gasp. You hear the Captain and Tomcat swear in unison, as they both get a better look as well. At first you had thought the infantry were wearing some sort of green body suit, but the zoomed image shows something quite different - you realise it's their skin! Their unhelmeted heads reveal the enemy to be some sort of lizard men! You're dealing with an alien invasion fleet! No wonder the scout ships in this star system hadn't reported in - they had been destroyed by aliens with completely different weapon technology to your own! Thinking further, you realise that there haven't been any frontier raiders attacking in a long time. Perhaps the frontier star systems had already been conquered by the alien force?\n\nEven more chilling, you notice that many of the lizardman soldiers have long swords hanging from their belts, in addition to the rifles they carried. Swords? Talk about close combat. You feel glad that you aren't in the infantry, but have many sheets of metal between you and whatever comes your way.\n\n\"All right, Squad Leader, get back here pronto! We'll need all the help we can get!\" Captain Jefferson orders you.\n\n\"This aint good man... this aint good!\" Tomcat says over the squad channel, as one of the massive transports sends another crackling lightning bolt over the forest, and into the Fort compound.\n\nSome legions of infantry, and two of the massive behemoth war machines, have begun marching toward where you and Tomcat are hiding among the trees. Have they seen you on their sensors? Most probably, you think.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "\"Let's wait a bit longer, and make sure nothing else comes out of those transports,\" you order.", "result": "You wait a bit longer, and as the enemy forces assemble in the fields, you realise nothing else is coming out of the transports.\n\n\"Come on, before they detect us,\" you order, and the two of you turn to run back through the forest.\n\nSuddenly there is a massive cracking sound, as one of the enemy transports unleashes another lightning bolt attack. You only have a moment to respond, diving to one side, before it strikes. There's a huge explosion, shattering trees and scattering debris, as your war machine rolls along the ground, crashing into the trunk of a large tree.\n\nFor a while there is just a ringing sound in your ears, and large cracks and gaps in your vision tell you the optic feeds from the head of your M.A.U. were damaged. You try to stand up, but your limbs are all held solid in place, meaning your M.A.U. took severe damage, and it can't get up. Swearing, you try hailing Tomcat.\n\n\"Hey, you okay?\" you ask over the squad channel. You get no response, just static. Damn, you think to yourself, as you flick a switch on one of your control panels, and power down. Your suit suddenly becomes limp, as the power turns off, and you slip out of the cockpit harness that held you in place. Unplugging cables you pull your headset free, and your own eyes' natural vision is restored. You realise your M.A.U. is lying on its side, on the ground, and press a button at the back of the cockpit to open the rear hatch. Only two meters off the ground, in this position, you lower yourself down to the forest floor.\n\nLooking around, you see that one of the massive lightning strikes hit right where the two of you were standing. Tomcat's M.A.U. lies scattered about in pieces of burning rubble. The blast must have struck him in the back, and because you were in front, you were partially shielded. Turning, you assess the wreck of your war machine. It will never walk again.\n\nWhat do I do now? You wonder. You decide to try and hike back to Fort Dale, and hope you don't run into alien infantry... or one of those massive behemoth war machines!\n\nYou start hiking, grumbling about the fact that M.A.U. pilots aren't equipped with sidearms. About ten minutes into your hike, witnessing two more of the powerful lightning strikes surge through the air above the forest, and hearing explosions from the Fort, you hear whining engine sounds behind you.\n\nThe sounds come so fast, you don't have time to respond. Alien soldiers on hoverbikes roar past you, narrowly missing you, as enemy scouts head toward the fort. Suddenly one of the hoverbikes comes back! It quickly slows to a halt, and the soldier leaps down onto the ground. Before you stands some sort of lizard man, covered in green scales!\n\nThe lizard man looks you up and down, and sees you have no ranged weapon on you, so he tosses his rifle behind him. Then you notice he has two more weapons - wicked looking swords hanging from either side of his belt. Swords? Who in the galaxy wields swords in this day and age??\n\nThe alien creature tosses one of the swords at you, and it lands quivering blade-first in the ground at your feet. It gestures for you to pick up the sword. With no other options apparant, you hesitantly pull the blade from the ground. Instantly, the alien launches into its attack. With no training in this sort of thing, you manage to block the alien's first sword blow, but the second slices clean through your heart.\n\nThis is the end... for you.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"Sir! Squad Beta will take turns looking over the wall,\" you volunteer.", "result": "\"Oh, great. Just great!\" Wolfman says over your squad channel.\n\n\"Okay, we're depending on you to tell us if any enemy units reach the clearing,\" the Captain says.\n\nFor the next fifteen minutes, you take turns leaning up and peeking over the wall. Now and then an enemy transport fires its massive lightning cannon at the Fort, sending debris showering across the courtyard.\n\nHowever, luck only smiles on you so many times. You lean up to see if you can see anything, just in time to be targeted by a lightning strike. All you see is white, searing light, filling your vision, and then the top half of your M.A.U. is gone, along with most of your body.\n\nIt is the end... for you.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"Let's go for a long patrol. We'll head out to the fields and hills, out east past the forests,\" you order.", "result": "You lead the squad to the towering gates of the Fort. \"This is Squad Beta, requesting Gate Clearance,\" you say to the fort's traffic control tower.\n\n\"We read you, Squad Beta. You're good to go,\" someone replies. The massive gates slide into the Fort's surrounding wall, and you lead your squad out. A large clearing lies between the Fort's walls and the forest that surrounds it, so that any approaching vehicles can always be seen. You lead your men east, off the road and into the forest, among the equally towering trees. It's a funny thing, being at eye-level with the tops of many of the trees, and it always takes you a moment to get your balance right, and for the feeling of being a giant to become natural.\n\nMany of the trees are toppled over throughout the forest, from people having stomped out among the trees. Being a three-story high metal man means that you often have to push trees out of the way. While conservationists might have a problem with such actions in some areas of the planet, no one complains when soldiers do it around a fort, as they depend on the forts scattered across the planet for protection, and you never knew if a raider force had secretly touched down, and enemy M.A.U.s were hiding among the trees, waiting for an opportunity to strike.\n\nWell, actually, that sort of thing was pretty rare. The Orbital sensor network always detected incoming ships, and could pinpoint the exact landing location of any military transports on the planet. Anyway, you stomp off among the trees, shoving them out of the way whenever you need to make room for your machine. Wolfman and Tomcat stomp along, off to either side of you.\n\n\"One of these days, we're gonna find a raider mecha waiting for us out here, and patrol is going to actually be interesting,\" Tomcat laughs.\n\n\"Hey, anything beats sitting around the barracks, losing at cards to Thunder,\" Wolfman replies.\n\nA twenty minute march later, and you come out from the thinning trees, and into the eastern fields of the region. Low hills rise here and there, and you walk about taking in the scenery. Nope, you think, no raider pirates out here today.\n\nSuddenly a ComTech from the Fort speaks over the Fort's military channel. \"This is Fort Dale to all units on patrol. Be advised, the planetary sensor network has detected unidentified incoming starships. We haven't been able to establish contact with the starship scout network either... This could be a raider force. Stand By for possible interception coordinates.\"\n\n\"I hope they land in our sector... haven't seen any action in months now,\" Tomcat says over the squad channel.\n\n\"Hang on, did they say they couldn't establish communcations with the starship scout network? What does that mean? A raider force couldn't take out all the carriers and gunships out there. I haven't heard of them being able to jam our communications either,\" Wolfman says worriedly.\n\n\"Nah, probably just a technical glitch at our Fort. The other Forts have probably heard all about it from the scout network by now,\" Tomcat says dismissively.\n\nThe ComTech at Fort Dale speaks over the military channel again. \"All units on patrol, be advised the planet has been taken to High Alert. We don't know what those ships are up there, but they're huge! Dozens of smaller ships, we assume they're military transports, have come out of the mothers, and are coming down all across the planet. We've got a couple of these transports inbound toward your location. Keep an eye on the skies, people, and if you get in over your head, get back here, and take up defensive positions inside the Fort! The other pilots at Fort Dale are mounting up, and should be ready for action soon.\"\n\n\"What the hell? Multiple transports heading our way? What exactly are we up against?\" Wolfman asks anxiously.\n\n\"Hey, frontier raiders aren't well armed. They're probably just small transports, full of infantry. We'll mow them down, and be back to the Fort for dinner in no time,\" Tomcat says confidently.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "\"Raiders usually only have one or two beat-up old M.A.U.s, I think we can handle that. Let's wait and see what's coming down,\" you order.", "result": "You lead them back into the treeline at the edge of the forest, and wait for a few minutes. Then you hear the loud rumbling of incoming spaceships. Moments later, four massive transports come into view to the east, slowing down, and heading toward Fort Dale. They looked about the size of a squad carrying M.A.U. transport, but were boxier and bulkier.\n\n\"What the heck are those things? I haven't seen a design like that before!\" Wolfman says over the squad channel.\n\n\"We could be up against twelve enemy M.A.U.s,\" Tomcat says.\n\nSuddenly the front of one of the enemy transports begins to glow, and moments later, there's a loud cracking sound as a massive bolt of artificial lightning shoots out from it and over the treetops toward the Fort. You hear distant explosions!\n\n\"We are under attack, I repeat, Fort Dale is under attack!\" you hear Captain Jefferson's voice over the Fort's military channel. Moments later, the Captain patches through direct to your M.A.U.\n\n\"Squad Leader - unidentified forces are attacking military Forts all across the planet. We won't be getting any reinforcements any time soon, and no one in our space fleet has reported in either. I want you to hang in there, and get some visual data on the enemy forces, so we can work out what we are up against!\" he orders.\n\nYou hear the sound of Gunship afterburners, and four Gunships suddenly roar over your heads. The afterburners switch off, and their rotors fold out, allowing them to hover in the air. The Gunships open fire on the lead enemy transport, blasting away at it repeatedly. The massive transport buckles, and slowly sinks toward the ground. The explosive impact knocks you off your feet! Moments later, massive lightning bolts fire from the other transports, and obliterate the Gunships in another quick succession of fiery explosions.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Keep it steady, boys, we've got to film all of this for the Captain,\" you order.", "result": "Wolfman and Tomcat take up positions in the forest off to either side of you, and the three of you activate your optics recorders. Now, everything that you 'see' through the eyes of your mecha will be recorded to an inbuilt hard drive.\n\nYou watch in awe as the three remaining transports slowly lower to the ground, and feel the shuddering impact as they land. Moments later, one of them begins to glow at the front again, and another barrage of artificial lightning lances out overhead to assault Fort Dale. Checking your map display, you realise that the weapon is firing at a massive distance - further than any weapons you have ever seen before. You can't help but feel confused about this technology. Surely, no frontiersman would posses such a weapon, you think.\n\nThen massive bay doors slide open on the transports, and the enemy comes out. Hundreds, perhaps thousands, of infantry soldiers descend the boarding ramps. You are about to zoom in on them to try and make out any insignia on their green body-fitting uniforms, when you notice a massive metal leg protrude from inside one of the transports.\n\n\"What the hell...\" Tomcat murmurs over the squad channel. Then the rest of the enemy war machine comes into view as it stomps out of the transport.\n\n\nInstead of being shaped like a big metal man, the enemy machines walking out of the transports are on four legs, with a large body pod-section in the middle, bristling with weapons. What is worse, if your estimates are correct, is that the enemy M.A.U.s must be sixteen metres (52 feet) high! They tower above the ground like five or six-story buildings! That's more than twice the height of your own war machine - and you thought your Gatling was big!\n\nThe body section of these behemoth sized war machines have three rotating cylinder shapes coming out of them, with sparkling, glowing spheres moving along the rims. They must be weapons of some sort, able to move about to fire in any direction!\n\n\"Squad Leader - you better see what I'm seeing,\" Wolfman says, astounded.\n\n\"I see it!\" you reply.\n\n\"No, I mean, the infantry. Zoom in on the infantry!\" he replies breathlessly.\n\nYou turn your view to zoom in on a large group of infantry, and find yourself holding your breath in shock. What the - you gasp. You hear Tomcat swear as he looks at them too. You had thought the soldiers were wearing some sort of green body suit. Now you realise it's their skin! Their unhelmeted heads reveal the enemy to be some sort of lizard men! You're dealing with an alien invasion fleet! No wonder the scout ships in this star system hadn't reported in - they had been destroyed by aliens with completely different weapon technology to your own! Thinking further, you realise that there haven't been any frontier raiders attacking in a long time. Perhaps the frontier star systems had already been conquered by the alien force?\n\nEven more chilling, you notice that many of the lizardman soldiers have long swords hanging from their belts, in addition to the rifles they carried. Swords? Talk about close combat. You feel glad that you aren't in the infantry, but have many sheets of metal between you and whatever comes your way.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"We've got to get these visuals back to the Fort! Come on!\" you order.", "result": "\"We're with you, Squad Leader!\" Tomcat says, and they take up a position behind you, as the three of you run off through the forest.\n\nYou race among the trees for a good six minutes, and then you notice small, fast moving blips, on the sensor display that is projected onto your sight by your headset. The blips are catching up very quickly, obviously hover vehicles of some sort. They shift side to side occasionally as they dodge trees.\n\n\"We're being followed,\" Wolfman says over the squad channel.", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Brace for fire, and attack on sight,\" you order, coming to a stop.", "result": "\"Roger,\" they reply. The three of you plant your war machines' feet slightly apart, and firmly on the ground, having turned to face the incoming targets. You tap a button on one of your suit's control pads, and the twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns attached to your M.A.U.'s left arm begin spinning rapidly, ready to fire.\n\nSeconds later, the fast moving machines zip into sight through the trees, and you all open fire. Superheated bolts of energy blast out from your arm, tracing a line of destruction through the trees. You see a couple explosions, and fiery fragments of hover machines go flying through the air, but two of the small machines go flying between you and your squad mates, and in a second, disappear into the trees behind you.\n\n\"What the hell were they?\" Wolfman asks.\n\nYou wait to make sure the hover machines aren't heading back in your direction. On your sensor display you see them continuing on toward the Fort. \"Must be scouts of some kind. We've got a moment - bring up visual playback and let's check them out,\" you order.\n\nYou bring up a small window in the corner of your vision, and rewind the optical recordings of what your M.A.U. has seen recently. Just before the explosions took place, you press pause, and see a blurry image of what you blew up. It looked like a civilian a-grav hoverbike, but of a more angular design than those you had seen. One of the lizardmen aliens sat on top of it.\n\nSuddenly there's a loud crack, and a massive bolt of lightning flies over the top of the forest. Explosions tell you that they struck at the Fort again, and you wonder how much damage they did.\n\nYou wait a moment, and then wave your Gatling's hand. Tomcat and Wolfman move back into position beside and behind you. You head off at a fast pace, continuing westward through the forest toward the fort. Five minutes later, the clearing around Fort Dale, and the tall metal walls surrounding the Fort complex, come into sight. You see the shattered remains of the two hoverbikes that had flown past you. Looks like the boys at the Fort had a little target practice, you smile.\n\n\"Fort Dale, this is Dale Squad Beta. We're back, so open up!\" you call out over the local military channel.\n\n\"Welcome home, boys,\" Captain Jefferson says, as the massive Fort doors slide open. You race across the clearing and into the fort.\n\n\"You better lay low,\" Captain Jefferson says. \"They're a good shot with that lightning weapon of theirs.\"\n\nYou see that some of the buildings have large half-melted holes in them, and debris is scattered all about. It looks like some of the Fort's infantry were in the wrong place at the wrong time, and you see Medics carrying some away on stretchers. The other M.A.U.s of Fort Dale Company are crouched behind the eastern wall, and the three of you quickly stomp over and crouch down as well.\n\n\"We got visuals on the enemy Captain,\" you tell him, and then pause, thinking of how to explain. \"Sir, they're aliens! Lizard men or something. They're... they're not human, sir!\"\n\nThe Captain is silent for a moment, then replies, \"Patch a video feed through to my M.A.U., and show me what you've got.\"\n\n\"By the gods!\" he swears moments later, after seeing everything you witnessed. Then you notice large sensor blips in the distance. The enemy army is marching toward the Fort, through the forest.\n\nThe Captain addressed the M.A.U. pilots of Dale Company. \"Okay, people, I want a defensive line along this east wall. Infantry will stand prepared to deal with any of those lizard men who manage to breach the walls. We're to focus on those big...enemy machines...\"\n\n\"I call them Behemoths, sir,\" you prompt him.\n\n\"Hmm. Behemoth it is. All pilots to focus fire on the enemy Behemoths. Gatling pilots, feel free to use your machine guns on the infantry forces as well. We only just got word that the Carriers Rogerson and Toyama are still up there in space. The Toyama will be bringing their squadrons of Gunships to provide us some support here at Fort Dale, so we just have to hold out until they arrive. If you believe in God or something, now's the time to say a prayer.\"\n\nYou say a quick prayer, then ready yourself for combat, watching the blips slowly approach as the minutes pass. Then an idea comes to you.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "\"Let's wait a moment longer, and make sure no other surprises come out of the transports,\" you order.", "result": "You wait a bit longer, and as the enemy forces assemble in the fields, you realise nothing else is coming out of the transports.\n\n\"Come on, before they detect us,\" you order, and the three of you turn to run back through the forest.\n\nSuddenly there is a massive cracking sound, as one of the enemy transports unleashes another lightning bolt attack. You only have a moment to respond, diving to one side, before it strikes. There's a huge explosion, shattering trees and scattering debris, as your war machine rolls along the ground, crashing into the trunk of a large tree.\n\nFor a while there is just a ringing sound in your ears, and large cracks and gaps in your vision tell you the optic feeds from the head of your M.A.U. were damaged. You try to stand up, but your limbs are all held solid in place, meaning your M.A.U. took severe damage, and it can't get up. Swearing, you try hailing your squad mates.\n\n\"Guys, you okay?\" you ask over the squad channel. You get no response, just static. Damn, you think to yourself, as you flick a switch on one of your control panels, and power down. Your suit suddenly becomes limp, as the power turns off, and you slip out of the cockpit harness that held you in place. Unplugging cables you pull your headset free, and your own eyes' natural vision is restored. You realise your M.A.U. is lying on its side, on the ground, and press a button at the back of the cockpit to open the rear hatch. Only two meters off the ground, in this position, you lower yourself down to the forest floor.\n\nLooking around, you see that one of the massive lightning strikes hit right where the three of you were standing. Tomcat and Wolfman's M.A.U.s lie scattered about in pieces of burning rubble. The blast must have struck them in the back, and because you were in front of them, you were partially shielded. Turning, you assess the wreck of your war machine. It will never walk again.\n\nWhat do I do now? You wonder. You decide to try and hike back to Fort Dale, and hope you don't run into alien infantry... or one of those massive behemoth war machines!\n\nYou start hiking, grumbling about the fact that M.A.U. pilots aren't equipped with sidearms. About ten minutes into your hike, witnessing two more of the powerful lightning strikes surge through the air above the forest, and hearing explosions from the Fort, you hear whining engine sounds behind you.\n\nThe sounds come so fast, you don't have time to respond. Alien soldiers on hoverbikes roar past you, narrowly missing you, as enemy scouts head toward the fort. Suddenly one of the hoverbikes comes back! It quickly slows to a halt, and the soldier leaps down onto the ground. Before you stands some sort of lizard man, covered in green scales!\n\nThe lizard man looks you up and down, and sees you have no ranged weapon on you, so he tosses his rifle behind him. Then you notice he has two more weapons - wicked looking swords hanging from either side of his belt. Swords? Who in the galaxy wields swords in this day and age??\n\nThe alien creature tosses one of the swords at you, and it lands quivering blade-first in the ground at your feet. It gestures for you to pick up the sword. With no other options apparant, you hesitantly pull the blade from the ground. Instantly, the alien launches into its attack. With no training in this sort of thing, you manage to block the alien's first sword blow, but the second slices clean through your heart.\n\nThis is the end... for you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "\"Let's get out of here! If they detect us, they might turn those massive weapons on us!\" you order.", "result": "\"But sir, our orders?\" Wolfman asks over the squad channel.\n\n\"To hell with orders, I'm with the Squad Leader,\" Tomcat says. Wolfman's M.A.U. nods its head, and they both fall in beside you as you run back westward through the forest for Fort Dale.\n\nSuddenly there is a massive cracking sound, as one of the enemy transports unleashes another lightning bolt attack. You only have a moment to respond, diving to one side, before it strikes. There's a huge explosion, shattering trees and scattering debris, as your war machine rolls along the ground, crashing into the trunk of a large tree.\n\nFor a while there is just a ringing sound in your ears, and large cracks and gaps in your vision tell you the optic feeds from the head of your M.A.U. were damaged. You try to stand up, but your limbs are all held solid in place, meaning your M.A.U. took severe damage, and it can't get up. Swearing, you try hailing your squad mates.\n\n\"Guys, you okay?\" you say over the squad channel. You get no response, just static. Damn, you think to yourself, as you flick a switch on one of your control panels, and power down. Your suit suddenly becomes limp, as the power turns off, and you slip out of the cockpit harness that held you in place. Unplugging cables you pull your headset free, and your own eyes' natural vision is restored. You realise your M.A.U. is lying on its side, on the ground, and press a button at the back of the cockpit to open the rear hatch. Only two meters off the ground, in this position, you lower yourself down to the forest floor.\n\nLooking around, you see that one of the massive lightning strikes hit right where the three of you were standing. Tomcat and Wolfman's M.A.U.s lie scattered about in pieces of burning rubble. The blast must have struck them in the back, and because you were in front of them, you were partially shielded. Turning, you assess the wreck of your war machine. It will never walk again.\n\nWhat do I do now? You wonder.", "action_results": [{"action": "You decide to try and hike back to Fort Dale, and hope you don't run into enemy infantry... or worse.", "result": "You start hiking, grumbling about the fact that M.A.U. pilots aren't equipped with sidearms. About ten minutes into your hike, witnessing two more of the powerful lightning strikes surge through the air above the forest, and hearing explosions from the Fort, you hear whining engine sounds behind you.\n\nThe sounds come so fast, you don't have time to respond. Soldiers on hoverbikes roar past you, narrowly missing you, as enemy scouts head toward the fort. They were wearing some sort of green bodysuit, but you didn't get a good look at them before they had gone by. What uniform is that? You wonder, trying to work out where the soldiers might be from.\n\nSuddenly one of the hoverbikes comes back! It quickly slows to a halt, and the soldier leaps down onto the ground. It is then that you realise with horror, that it was not a green uniform - it was their skin! Before you stands some sort of lizard man, covered in green scales! The invading force - they're not raiders from the frontier systems, they're aliens!\n\nThe lizard man looks you up and down, and sees you have no ranged weapon on you, so he tosses his rifle behind him. Then you notice he has two more weapons - wicked looking swords hanging from either side of his belt. Swords? Who in the galaxy wields swords in this day and age??\n\nThe alien creature tosses one of the swords at you, and it lands quivering blade-first in the ground at your feet. It gestures for you to pick up the sword. With no other options apparant, you hesitantly pull the blade from the ground. Instantly, the alien launches into its attack. With no training in this sort of thing, you manage to block the alien's first sword blow, but the second slices clean through your heart.\n\nThis is the end... for you.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story51.json b/data/scraper/stories/story51.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..857c36a --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story51.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=34838", "context": "", "first_story_block": "", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn out the lights.", "result": "Once upon a time you were called the greatest hero to ever live.\n\n\nYou must have been nineteen at the time. Fresh faced, hot headed, and too dumb for your own good. With sword in hand, you set out with your childhood friends to save the world from an evil wizard (damn, you can't even remember his name) bent on enslaving mankind. When you left home, there were five of you: a mage, a rogue, a bard, a healer, and yourself, a fighter.\n\n\nThe six month long journey to the wizard's tower was filled with happy times, light hearted misadventures as you all prepared for fortune and glory. When you reached the tower, the mood quickly changed. Your bard fell to a herd of undead that ambushed you at the entrance. The healer took a poison dart to the throat on the fourth floor while the rogue was burned to ash by a pyromancer on the seventeenth floor. Yourself and the mage were all that remained when you reached the twentieth and final floor, and she was cut down halfway through the fight with the wizard. When the dust cleared and all was quiet, you were the last one standing.\n\n\nYou returned home a year after you had left it. The villagers showered you in praise for killing the wizard, and word reached the nobles in the cities far away that the evil wizard had been defeated. They held a feast in your honor, they showered you in gold, they gave you a title and a manor and an army of servants. Women wanted you, men wanted to be you. But it was all hollow.\n\n\nYou played along for the first ten years, finding little joy in the newfound fortune and glory you had longed for. It wasn't until the writers and artists began to touch your quest that you finally shut yourself in. It started innocently enough, sanitized children's tales about the exploits of you and your allies, but soon it became epic poems and romanticized paintings. One by one, your friends disappeared from the fictionalized tales of your quest, until it was just you, the knight in shining armor, slaying the vile wizard with your enchanted blade.\n\n\nThat was when you finally shut yourself in, to hide from the common folk and their damning praise, from the artists and their bastardized accounts. For five years the only place you'd go was the tavern down the road from your estate, where you'd planned to waste the rest of your days drinking until you couldn't remember your regrets. It didn't work. Just as luck would have it, you were recognized one day, and soon people were flocking to the pub like moths to a torch. All in the hopes of meeting you, the legendary hero.\n\n\nIn these last five years, you've stayed locked up in the master bedroom of your manor. You ordered your butler to bring you ten bottles of wine and three loafs of bread in the morning, leaving you be until the next day. No one can enter your room save the butler, and if anyone does you make sure to scare them off by grabbing your old sword and flailing it around while yelling drunkenly at them.\n\n\nIt's a fitting end for the man regarded as the greatest hero to ever live: locking himself away in the home gifted to him, drinking wine and eating bread and waiting for the day he finally dies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "Your latest quest begins not with the destruction of your manor or the death of someone close to you, but rather with a letter.\n\n\nBertrand, your loyal servant, comes to your room in the early morning hours to drop off today's dosage of bread and wine. But on the platter, tucked in between two loaves of bread, is a letter. The seal is emblazoned with the royal coat of arms. You eye Bertrand warily, and the old man gives a sigh. \"Apologies, my lord. A knight came to the manor this morning, and he requested that I pass this along to you. The knight said that it's an invitation to the royal castle from the king himself. I suggest you read it.\"\n\n\nWith a sigh of your own, you rip open the envelope and unfold the letter, taking a look at the contents.\n\n\n\"Dear Sir,\n\n\nI have need of a man of your talents. There are important matters to discuss regarding the ongoing war between the Kingdom of Oren and the Empire of Kishak. You must report to Castle Oren as soon as you may, though I urge you to arrive soon. If a week has passed without word from you, then I am afraid I must send my men to acquire you immediately. I hope that you will come.\n\n\nRegards,\n\nKing Walter III.\"\n\n\nYou scoff at the letter. Bastard king, sitting on his throne while his dogs do the work. You suppose that he considers you one of them. The question lies in whether you are indeed one of the dogs that mindlessly obeys orders, or whether you'll break from the pack and carve your own path.", "action_results": [{"action": "Damn the king. He holds no power over me.", "result": "For a moment, rage shakes within you. He thinks he can simply call upon you and you'll trot over to his castle? What sort of man does he take you for? The bubble of rage bursts, and you find yourself tearing the letter in two, before crumpling it and throwing it on the floor. Bertrand gulps slightly as he watches.\n\n\n\"Leave me,\" you say, and he does. You carry on that day as you normally do, drinking heartily and eating when your stomach grumbles. As usual, you pass out late into the night, last bottle of wine in hand.\n\n\nWhen you wake the next day, you're fully hit by the reality of the situation. The king threatened to send men to acquire you should you fail to show up after a week. You can't stay here anymore, and if you do, then they'll come sooner or later. This means you'd either need to move on, or try to hold out and fend off any of his men who come your way.\n\n\nWhat's it going to be, hero?", "action_results": [{"action": "I need to leave. There's nothing for me here.", "result": "In the late hours of the night, you set out for parts unknown.\n\n\nOn your back is your sword, chipped and dull. It's far too large to be called a sword; massive, heavy, far too rough. If anything, it's a hunk of raw iron. But it's yours, and a single swing with the large blade is enough to cut down three cavalrymen and their horses too. Beside it is your knapsack, carrying only raw essentials, such as food, a change of clothes, a tinderbox, lantern oil, and a jug of alcohol. Fifteen feet of rope in a coil is tied onto your belt, alongside a lantern.\n\n\nFor a moment you're leaving your home village with your friends. All of you are young, reckless, hopeful... But the nostalgia soon fades, and you realize what you're doing. You're not leaving to save the world, you're leaving to get away from your responsibilities. The thought makes you let out a dry, humorless laugh.\n\n\nIt's been so long since you've traveled. You almost forgot what it felt like, just you on the open road. It feels... Liberating, almost. Like a weight has been lifted off your shoulders for the first time in years. As though you were holding the world high above you, and only now can you take a break. But you don't hold onto that feeling, for you know well enough that it will distract you from any dangers on the road...\n\n\nSoon enough, you come upon a fork in the road. One road leads into the forest. You're unlikely to come across any other people on this road, only wilderness as far as the eye can see. The other road is a common trade route, with villages dotting it every few miles. Either way, wherever you go, you'll be traveling far away from the place you once called home.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the path into the woods.", "result": "You take the path through the woods, being sure to light your lantern along the way. The ambient sounds of wildlife keep you on the alert. For every wolf's howl and twig snapped in the distance, your hand draws closer to the hilt of your sword. Still, nothing comes out to attack you, and you must be grateful for that.\n\n\nThe road carries you onwards for hours, until finally you must stop and rest. With a grunt, you begin to climb up into a large oak tree along the path, checking every branch until, finally, you find one that can support your weight. You kill your lantern and tie it to the branch using your rope. Setting your knapsack up against the tree, you lay down, and fall asleep.\n\n\nThe sound of shouting and the light of torches causes your eyes to snap open. Through the canopy of leaves you can see a faint glow, as though sunlight is fighting hard to break through and onto the path. On said path you see a large group of men wearing armor comprised of animal hides and worn out leather.\n\n\nMarauders. They're a wandering group of bandits and raiders, accepting any who wish to fight with them. They make their living by ransacking and pillaging towns, and never stay in one place for long. Above all, they admire a fierce warrior, and rumor has it that if one can slay the leader of a Marauder band, then one may lead them.\n\n\nInstinctively you reach for your sword, but stop as you realize that they can't see you unless they look up. They must be on the way to find a village, so that they can steal their valuables, kill them all, or rape the women. Perhaps even all three, if they're a particularly ambitious bunch.\n\n\nYou've fought these sorts before, and most often they'll fight tooth and nail until their leader is dead. Once that happens, they'll submit themselves to you willingly... That is, if you can survive long enough to reach their leader. If you got into a fight, you can't be sure you'll walk away from it alive.\n\n\nBut at the same time... Could you just sit by and let these men harass, or even kill, the innocent?", "action_results": [{"action": "Yes, I can. I'm not a hero anymore. They can do as they like, so long as they don't bother me.", "result": "You make yourself scarce, watching them as they continue their march out of the forest. They're a band of about four dozen, and you know that if you had chosen to fight them, it may have meant the end of you. It must have taken close to half an hour for them all to move on so far that they were out of sight, but the adrenaline pumping through your blood made the time seem as though it had passed in the blink of an eye.\n\n\nOnce they're gone, you retrieve your lantern and rope, before carefully climbing down the tree. You let out a sigh of relief once your feet hit the ground, and you continue your journey onward into the woods. Your journey lasts long into the day, and before you know it, the trees begin to give way to grassy fields. The only problem being that it's almost night again, and you don't want to risk sleeping out in the open.\n\n\nThe trees are too small here for you to be able to sleep in one. You scan the area, and find... A cave? Yes, there's an entrance to a cave poking out of the ground towards the edge of the wilderness. The entrance is massive, which means that something undesirable may lurk in there, though you can take out whatever may call the cave its home.\n\n\nAlternatively, you can continue your march into the night. Perhaps you'll find a better place to take shelter.", "action_results": [{"action": "I'll take shelter in the cave.", "result": "You walk to the cave's entrance, lighting your lantern. Within the inky black darkness are piles of bones. Most of them are those of animals, though you spot a human skull in there. This might have been a bad idea. Still, you carry onward, swinging your sword around from your back and gripping the hilt tightly.\n\n\nAs you journey further, you find no sign of bears or wolves or the like. So, you carry onward, intent on slaying whatever beast may live here. It is deeper into the cave that you begin to hear and feel a low rumbling. It shakes you to your core, and your knuckles whiten as you grip your sword tighter. Is it what you think it is?\n\n\nYour question is answered when your lantern's light glints off of maroon scales.\n\n\nA dragon, slumbering on a pile of branches and bones. By the size of it, it appears to be young, no older than perhaps an infant, though that does not mean that it will be friendly. Nearby are the skeletal remains of another dragon, this beast far larger. Was it orphaned? You've no idea.\n\n\nYou are about to make your leave so you don't face the wrath of the beast when its eyes snap open.", "action_results": [{"action": "Quickly slide my blade back onto my back and raise my hands. I just want to go.", "result": "Slowly, you slip your sword back into place on your back, and raise your hands. The dragon stares at you, though no malice is in its eyes; instead, you see an almost childlike curiosity. Perhaps the human skull you saw was left there by its deceased parent? Whatever it is, the dragon has yet to make any hostile actions towards you.\n\n\nIt begins to inch its head closer to you, sniffing you curiously. Thinking quickly, you carefully remove your knapsack, then reach deep inside it. Within is a slab of raw venison, which you offer to the beast. It looks as though it's about to rip your arms off along with the meat, so you set it down at your feet and back away slowly. As you suspected, the dragon greedily gobbles it up.\n\n\nOnce it has finished its snack, it looks contentedly at you, nudging you as though asking for more. You provide him another slab of meat, which he takes from your hands this time. Then another. You save the last piece of venison for yourself, slowly putting your knapsack back in place. The dragon tilts its head at you, before letting out what appears to be a yawn. It settles back down on the ground, and falls asleep.\n\n\nYou let out a sigh. That was... Terrifying. You back up and set up a place to sleep not far from the dragon's chamber, falling asleep in minutes from the exhaustion. In the morning, you get up... Only to see the dragon there, staring at you. Carefully, you get up, but the dragon makes no sudden moves. Just stares at you expectantly.\n\n\nPutting your hands back up, you begin to back away slowly, and the dragon begins to follow. For a second, you close your eyes, awaiting the painful bite that will follow... But nothing happens. Instead, it stands there staring at you as though a puppy waiting for its master's commands.\n\n\nYou lower your hands, then turn around. Continuing out of the cave, you glance over your shoulder every now and again, and the dragon still follows. Have you... Tamed the beast? That was easier than you expected it would be. It continues to follow you out of the cave, blinking violently at the light when you emerge from the cave and into the daylight, but still retaining its friendly attitude. It continues to follow you as you march onward to places unknown.\n\n\nWhen you fell asleep in the night, you half expected the dragon to have tried eating you in your sleep, or to have flown back to his cave. Instead, you awake to him presenting you a mangled deer carcass. It looks like you've made a new companion, and a very powerful one at that.\n\n\nSo it is that you and the beast continue onward to wherever the road takes you.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "This beast might be wild. I swing wildly, hoping to wound it.", "result": "You swing wildly, a yell escaping your lips. The blade meets the dragon's rough scales, and it lets out a roar of mixed agony and rage. Blood drips from its wounds, and it rears back, head turning to look at the deep gash in its side... Then, it charges at you.\n\n\nIt barrels into you, sending you onto your ass. Another roar escapes its mouth, swiping a claw at you. You block the blow with your sword, cutting deeper into the dragon's hand, and it rears back yet again to determine its next move. It must not be used to fighting.\n\n\nIt's making for another charge.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stand my ground and stick my sword out, hoping the beast runs into it.", "result": "As the dragon charges forward, you stick your blade out, hoping that it will be unable to stop and impale itself on your sword. Instead, it ducks below the blade, and though you try to adjust quickly and bring the sword down onto the animal, you're too late. It charges into you, this time biting into your stomach. You let out a yell of pain, repeatedly bringing your sword down onto its back, but by the time it is finally dead the damage is done.\n\n\nYour entrails are spilling out of your torso. Bloody coughs escape your lips. There's no coming back from this, unless a healer suddenly happened to come by. With your luck, another dragon would sooner come by instead. Eventually, the pain stops, and you close your eyes with a shuddering, blood-tinged sigh...\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Leap out of the way, swinging my sword at it whilst I do.", "result": "You wait for a moment, to ensure that it's close... And then you leap out of the way of the charge, swinging your sword at it. You manage to nail it right in the belly, the blade cleaving through the dragon's scales and into its flesh. It lets out a blood curdling screech, tumbling a bit as it loses its footing before finally falling over onto the ground.\n\n\nYou walk closer, sword at the ready. The dragon twitches slightly, so you bring your blade onto its throat. That killed it, for sure. With the beast slain, you collapse onto the ground, catching your breath. That was... Intense, to say the least. You've never fought a dragon. If the beast were any bigger, you would have lost, no doubt.\n\n\nThen, you laugh. You laugh until your ribs ache and tears escape your eyes. Then you laugh some more.\n\n\nYou just slayed a dragon. You must be losing your mind to be doing this sort of stuff again.\n\n\nAfter a while of laying there, you fall asleep, and in the morning you wake up recharged despite the aching where the dragon rammed into you. You exit the cave, and begin the track on the path. The excitement of fighting such a monstrous beast and living to tell the tale... It's exhilarating. Why has it been so long since you've felt this? You miss it.\n\n\nYou set out to find more beasts to hunt.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "I'll continue my trek.", "result": "In spite of the darkness, you continue on the path, keeping a hand on your sword in case you're attacked. You light your lantern so that you can see more clearly, and march onwards. Eventually, you spot an old wooden cabin near a lake, not too far off the path. It looks abandoned, but hopefully if anyone still resides within you can convince them to let you take shelter.\n\n\nYou make your way to the front door, where you attempt to open it, only to find that it's locked. Damn, the place isn't abandoned. Instead, you raise your fist and pound upon the door. \"Hello,\" you call out, \"I seek shelter for the night.\" It takes a moment, but soon you hear footsteps descending stairs within, then the sound of a lantern being lit, followed by faint light creeping through under the door. Finally, you hear the sound of a bolt being unlocked.\n\n\nThe door cracks open slightly, and you can see a wrinkled eye poking out. \"I didn't think anyone still wandered these old roads,\" he says, his voice old and creaky. \"What brings you 'round here, stranger?\"\n\n\n\"I'm nothing but a simple wanderer,\" you reply. \"I just seek shelter for the night.\"\n\n\nHe looks as though he's contemplating it. He seems wary, though that isn't unreasonable; if you were in his shoes, being woken in the dead of night by a large man with a large sword, you'd be wary as well. Finally, he opens the door wider, croaking out \"Come in.\" You oblige.\n\n\nBefore you stands an older man, perhaps in his 60s, dressed in a faded blue woolen shirt and ragged breeches. \"Welcome. My name is Oscar. What's yours, wanderer?\"\n\n\n\"My name is Kit.\" You look around. The interior of the cabin is quaint, decorated with paintings and old wooden furniture. A hearth sits on the back wall, cooking utensils hanging above it, near stairs ascending to the second floor. \"A nice home you have here.\"\n\n\n\"Thank you.\" Oscar gestures to the floor. \"You're welcome to make yourself comfortable. Please, do not head to the second floor. My wife is attempting to sleep. She's been sick.\"\n\n\nYou nod. \"I understand. Thank you, sir.\"\n\n\nOscar ascends the stairs, leaving you on the first floor. You lay down, and fall asleep.\n\n\nIn the morning, you wake to Oscar descending from the stairs. \"Morning, sir. You're welcome to stay for breakfast if you want, I'm going to get wood for the hearth. And again, please do not disturb my wife. She's still dreadfully sick.\" With that, he heads to the door and leaves.\n\n\nHe's rather insistent that you not bother his wife. Is she really that sick? Maybe you can check for yourself. Or, you can wait for him to come back and then eat breakfast with him and be on your way.", "action_results": [{"action": "I'm curious. I'll head upstairs.", "result": "After a moment, you get up from your place on the floor and slowly head up the stairs. Surely you have enough time before Oscar gets back. Once you reach the top of the steps, you find there is a hallway leading to a single door. You approach the door, a sinking feeling in your gut rising all the while. Something isn't right.\n\n\nYou open the door and what you see almost causes you to lose the contents of your stomach.\n\n\nThere in the bed is the corpse of a woman. She's decomposed heavily, and it's clear she's been dead a long while, far too long. Porridge drips from her rotting mouth. It was made recently. This is... Repulsive. Horrific. Wrong.\n\n\nYou're not sure how long you've been standing there, staring at the woman's corpse in shock. It isn't until you hear Oscar's shouting that you realize what you've just found... And rage shakes within you.\n\n\nYou unsheath your sword. \"W-wait! I can explain!\" Oscar yells, sticking his hands up.", "action_results": [{"action": "Damn him, the sick bastard. I swing.", "result": "You swing your blade into him. It cleaves through him like a knife through butter, bisecting him from hip to shoulder. He's dead before his torso hits the floor, and blood stains the walls of the cabin. You don't bother to clean up the mess you just made. Instead, you make your leave.\n\n\nYou continue on the road for a while. Days, maybe even weeks pass. However long you've been on these pathways, you don't know. Eventually, you manage to find a cabin that has actually been abandoned, resting nicely on the edge of a forest. It is there that you finally settle down, hunting and gathering for food.\n\n\nOccasionally, travelers pass through on their own journeys, but they never stay long. Once or twice bandits have attempted to rob you, but once you retrieved your old sword and showed how well you can handle it, they quietly backed away... Most of them, anyhow. The fools that didn't? Well, you're lucky the stains came off easily with a bit of elbow grease.\n\n\nFinally, you are at peace.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I stay my hand. If he doesn't give an answer I like, I'll kill him.", "result": "It takes all your willpower to keep your blade from meeting his flesh. Still, your anger does not subside, and your voice comes out in a low growl when you speak, \"What the fuck are you doing?\"\n\n\nIt is then that Oscar breaks into tears.He falls to his knees. \"I... I... I couldn't bare to lose her! I loved her so much! When she got sick, I was heartbroken... And when she died I couldn't accept it! I didn't want to lose her!\" He can't find it in himself to continue, instead letting out a heart wrenching sob. \"Please, sir... If you must, end my life. I wish... I wish to buried next to her.\"\n\n\nThe grip on your sword tightens. You're not sure what to do with this pitiful old man.", "action_results": [{"action": "He asked me to kill him. I will, and put him and his wife to rest.", "result": "You raise your sword. As gently as you can, you stab his throat. He lets out a pained gurgle, blood filling his esophagus, before finally his lungs are filled and death takes him. You pull out your sword and find his head has nearly been lopped off. Disgusting.\n\n\nYou take his corpse in your hands and take him outside, where you set him down. Then, you do the same with his wife, hauling her outside. You set her down next to her husband, before heading back inside to grab a shovel.\n\n\nA few hours later, the pair are buried. You head to a nearby tree and cut off a decent sized branch, which you jam into the soil of their grave. There, they shall find rest... As you stand there over their shared grave, you find yourself thinking back to Grace, the hotheaded girl who could conjure fire with but a flick of her palm. What you would give to have been buried next to her.\n\n\nYou set off from the grave.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I won't kill him. I know the pain he is going through, has been going through.", "result": "With a sigh, you place your sword back onto your back. Then, you kneel down to be at eye level with the sobbing man. Despite the emotions you want to show, you find your voice being almost monotone as you speak. \"I know the pain you're going through. I lost my love when she and I were young, far too young. You should be grateful for the time you had with her.\"\n\n\nHe wipes his eyes slowly, but he says nothing.\n\n\n\"It's time to let go.\"\n\n\nWith that his tears are dried. It seems as though a weight is lifted from his shoulders with your words.\n\n\n\"I... Thank you, for your words. I'll... I'll bury her, under her favorite tree. You can stay for breakfast, if you'd like. I won't be long.\" He picks himself up off the floor, and you do as well.\n\n\n\"I think I will.\" With that, you head downstairs, while Oscar begins to retrieve his wife's corpse. He leaves for the yard, while you sit and wait in his living room. He comes back an hour or so later, makes porridge, and serves it to you. The two of you eat in silence, before you stand and make your leave.\n\n\nLife must go on. The pain that one endures is what makes them human. You know that all too well.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "No, I won't invade their privacy. I'll stay for breakfast then leave.", "result": "You stay put. Oscar comes back not long after with an armful of wood logs and grass, which he places into the hearth. You offer him your tinderbox, which he takes with a hum of thanks, before lighting the hearth. He begins to cook porridge, and hands you a bowl not long after. It's good.\n\n\nAfter you finish up your breakfast, you gather your things and take your leave. He was quite a kind old man. You wonder if he and his wife will do alright all alone out here. Perhaps such a life... Would suit you. Perhaps.\n\n\nA few days, maybe even weeks later, you find a worn-down cabin on the edge of a forest that is actually abandoned this time. You decide to give that life a shot, and find that it does suit you. It is there that you finally settle down, hunting and gathering for food.\n\n\nOccasionally, travelers pass through on their own journeys, but they never stay long. Once or twice bandits have attempted to rob you, but once you retrieved your old sword and showed how well you can handle it, they quietly backed away... Most of them, anyhow. The fools that didn't? Well, you're lucky the stains came off easily with a bit of elbow grease.\n\n\nFinally, you are at peace.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "No, I can't. I have to do something.", "result": "You sit up and kneel on the branch. From that position, you watch for a moment, counting their numbers. Altogether, they're about four dozen. You've fought those odds before... Then again, you had your companions by your side. Even then, you can fight like a cornered animal if you try hard enough. Time to see if you still have it.\n\n\nYou pull your sword from your back and ready it, then jump down in a swing. The momentum of your fall slices right through three different men before they could even react. Their heads split right open like overripe watermelons, and the sword carries on through their bodies, cleaving them in half messily. Blood and guts cover your blade.\n\n\nThe others all stop their march and back away immediately, staring in awe at the mess you just created. There's an intense stare down between you and all of their numbers. Some have fear in their eyes, others anger, an odd few even respect. Most? A mixture of the three. The seconds tick by slowly, painfully, neither you nor the bandits wanting to make the first move, then...\n\n\n\"WHAT ARE YOU WAITING FOR!?\" a gruff voice calls out. \"ATTACK!\"\n\n\nThen, they're swarming you while yelling and swinging their weapons in a panic. You bring down a few with a single swing. A few cuts and stabs get through your defense. An arrow pierces your left bicep. Still, you fight madly, like an unchained beast.\n\n\nSoon, you're attacking and defending on pure instinct. Adrenaline carries you as your body moves on its own. Too tired to think clearly. Can only act.\n\n\nBut it's in the repetition of swing, block, swing, block, that you find time to reflect.\n\n\nWhat are you doing here?\n\n\nWhy are you doing this?\n\n\nWhen did you go from being a hero to callously slaying bandits in the woods?\n\n\nYou're hurt. You're cold. You're hungry. You're tired. You're afraid.\n\n\nBut something still carries you.\n\n\nThat intense desire to live.\n\n\nLike a flame that won't die out.\n\n\nThe question is...\n\n\nShould the flame stay lit?", "action_results": [{"action": "The passion has died. I need to let go of my pitiful life.", "result": "You're past your prime. Nothing you do will make a difference in this world. It's time to let an old man die before he does something too rash.\n\n\nSlowly, you stop fighting. More attacks get through your defenses. Fewer of your hits connect. Soon, it's just you standing there taking their punishment. A sword gets driven through your back. A spear impales you through the abdomen. An arrow flies into your throat.\n\n\nSoon enough, you're nothing but a battered and unrecognizable corpse, lying in the road. You took 21 of their number with you. Nearly half their forces. They regard your corpse with a begrudging sense of respect. No one has given them such a fight before.\n\n\nYou're left slumped against a tree, sword in your lap. No one who passes through dares disturb your corpse, and soon, the earth retakes you.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "The passion still burns within me. I won't let go. I'll fight until every bone is broken and my last drop of blood has spilled.", "result": "No. You won't go quietly. That fire, deep within your soul, it still burns as bright as it ever did. And no two-bit marauders will extinguish it. You swing with more force than you ever have before, take more punishment than you ever have before. Throwing caution to the wind as you try to take down as many of these bastards as you can.\n\n\nAfter a while, you think you finally land a hit on their leader, and one hit is all you need. You can tell it's him by the glint of silver decorating his armor. When you land that blow, the others lose their fighting spirit. You plant your sword into the ground, panting as you catch your breath. Then, you turn to them with a sudden jerk of your head, a twisted grin on your face.\n\n\n\"Well? What are you waiting for?\"\n\n\nThey stare at you with shock and awe written on their faces. There's only about 16 left. One steps forward. \"You... Killed our leader! And most of our band!\"\n\n\n\"And I'll kill you too!\" You bare your teeth at them for full effect.\n\n\nThen, they fall to their knees and lay their faces on the ground. You stare at them, still thirsting for blood on your blade. One of them begins to yell, \"Lead us into battle, worthy warrior! You've proven that you can kill dozens of men and carry on!\"\n\n\nThey're offering you the now vacant spot as their leader.", "action_results": [{"action": "I've nothing better to do. I'll take it.", "result": "You stare at them. Then, you grin. \"Get your faces out of the mud. We've got a job to do.\" They all rise up from their bowing position, staring at you uncertainly. Your unsettling grin puts them even more on edge. \"One of you! Patch up my wounds. We'll make camp for the night, then set out at dawn. We need to recruit more soldiers, then we'll see about raiding a town.\"\n\n\nThey all nod. Most of them begin to set up their tents, while others loot the bodies for any valuables. One of them comes over to you and sets to work on your wounds, he tells you he was a healer once upon a time, but grew bored of his life. He desired excitement, so he joined up with a band of raiders.\n\n\nPerhaps this is what you needed. Excitement. And leading a band of raiders? Just your style.\n\n\nSunrise comes, and you set off into the world with your newfound band.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I won't stoop so low. They're pathetic bandits.", "result": "Rage bubbles within you. They think that you want that position? That you'll forgive them of their crimes? You're not going to give them that satisfaction. Instead, you raise your sword, and with a sweeping blow, take out four of them with one swing. The others realize what you're doing and try to run. They don't make it very far.\n\n\nSoon, you're cleaning your blade in a stream outside of the forest, while binding your wounds. They did a number on you, but you suppose it's just more scars for the collection. It's almost comforting, in a way. Almost.\n\n\nThere's more injustice out there. If anything, now is the time to act.\n\n\nYou set out into the horizon, never once looking back.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Take the trade route.", "result": "You take the path that eventually merges back onto the main roads. This is a common route for wandering merchants or supply caravans, with villages darting the path every couple of miles. The entire route itself from where you are is about 30 miles, where it runs into the city of Sodran and then disappears, assimilated into the highways.\n\n\nThe villages in these areas all make their profits in a variety of ways. Some survive off of hunting and gathering, others fishing, most farming. One village, from what you've heard, even makes money by hiring off the able-bodied men and women to traveling merchants in need of protection. Whatever gets the bills paid and keeps food on the table, you suppose.\n\n\nIt's an hour into your march that you come across the first village. There's an inn right on the edge of the town that's still open. The lit lanterns within seep through the windows, as if a beacon guiding weary travelers to the doorstep. On the side of the inn is a small stable, where some horses and a mule reside. The horses have everything from a simple saddle to a whole pack of belongings tied to them, and the mule has a pack of wares strapped to its back.\n\n\nYou can stop at the inn for the night. It would be nice to sleep in a warm bed. Still, you don't want to get distracted; you can just carry on through the night to put as much distance between you and your former estate as you can.", "action_results": [{"action": "I'll rent a room at the inn.", "result": "As you walk past the stable to the inn's door, a woman, looking to be in her late 20s, walks out of the stables. Her hands are calloused and her fair skin tinged red, no doubt from working under the sun all day. As she spots you, she looks surprised for a moment, before smiling. \"Oh, hello sir! Stopping at the inn for the night? I was just about to head in myself.\"\n\n\nYou grunt out something resembling a \"yes\", and she nods. \"The place is real nice, sir. My father runs it, I manage the stables for him. My name is Eliza, what would yours be?\" She extends a hand, perhaps thinking you'll shake it. You don't, and after an awkward moment she withdraws it.\n\n\nYou do, however, give her a response. \"Kit.\"\n\n\n\"That's a nice name, sir.\" She smiles at you still. You continue to frown. Eventually, her shining grin falters, and she looks worried. \"Something wrong, sir?\"\n\n\n\"I didn't come here to chat.\"\n\n\nHer face falls a bit more, but she regains her smile. \"Of course not, sir. I'm sorry if I held you up. Let's go.\"\n\n\n\"Right.\" You move to leave. Eliza follows after you, and you turn to look at her over your shoulder. \"Oh, and stop saying sir at the end of every sentence. Makes you seem uptight.\" Her face falls a bit at that, but she keeps her smile plastered on her face.\n\n\nAs you open the door to the inn, a pleasant warmth hits you in the face. You step inside, Eliza following after you. The entrance of the inn is empty save for a man behind a wooden counter up front, tapping the counter with his finger. He looks at you, and a smile makes its way onto his face, disturbing his bushy mustache. \"Ah, Eliza! Welcome back. Who's this, potential customer?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, father. His name is Kit. Kit, this is my father, Isaiah. Go on, sir... Um, I mean, Kit.\" Good, she caught herself.\n\n\nYou step forward to the man behind the counter, staring down at his sitting form. \"How much for a room?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Just 5 gold pieces a night, sir. Throw in an extra coin for as many drinks as you can have.\" That piques your interest. You open your coin pouch and pull out six coins, tossing them onto the counter. The owner takes a moment to count them out, before he nods. He slips the coins into a lockbox under the counter, before grabbing a key from behind him. \"Very good, sir. Here's your room key, room 8.\"\n\n\nYou nod at him, taking the key from his hands and looking around. \"There's a dining hall to the right,\" Isaiah points to an archway. \"You can get your drinks there if you want. We have ale, wine, fruit juice, and water.\"\n\n\n\"Alright.\" You pocket your key, then head straight for the dining room. Heading through the doorway, you see that it's far more lively in here, different people milling about and sitting at different tables. You spot a few interesting folks, but one really catches your eye: a man with tanned skin, dressed in clothing made of brightly colored textiles. He must be a wandering merchant from the distant lands of Cikoni.\n\n\nYou wonder what he's doing here. Maybe he could use a guard, could get you a steady source of income and get you far away from the kingdom. Alternatively, you can just get your drink and sit by yourself.", "action_results": [{"action": "Speak to the wandering merchant.", "result": "Grabbing your drink, you head on over to the wandering merchant's table. You note a pipe hanging from his mouth, a strange crushed up substance within it; upon closer inspection, the substance appears to be sharp and jagged like glass, and glows a faint blue. You know what the substance is: Cikoni Crab Shells, a popular recreational drug hailing from the beaches of Cikoni. To make it, one has to find a Cikoni Long Crab, which possesses a strangely potent amount of magic within its shell, and kill it. Then, they crush it up, either to a fine paste or to shards like the merchant has it; from what you heard it determines how harsh the taste is.\n\n\nAs you stop to recollect your knowledge on what's within the pipe, a small flickering flame bursts from his fingertips with a snap. He sticks his finger into the crab shells, taking a moment to let the fire melt them down, and before long the pipe has been lit. He's a mage, though you should have expected that; most who hail from Cikoni are mages after all.\n\n\nYou slide into the chair across from him as he puffs on his pipe. He looks up at you, gives a little nod and speaks, \"Anything important, traveler?\"\n\n\nYou lean forward. \"I need work, and a way out of this kingdom. I can give you strong arms and protection if you hire me on. In exchange you don't ask about who I am or what I did.\"\n\n\nYou must have appealed to his shadier side, as the man smiles a bit. \"Ah, a man after my own heart, I see. I understand. Since I assume names are on the list of things I should not ask about, I won't. My name is Gi'anti, and I'm a traveling merchant of sorts.\"\n\n\n\"You can call me whatever you wish. I just need a way out of here.\"\n\n\nAt that, Gi'anti grins and lets out a puff of smoke. \"Well then. I shall call you T'kanka. Please, tell me your room number, so I may wake you when we set off tomorrow.\"\n\n\nWith your luck, that means rodent in their language. Still, it'll do. \"It's room 8. When do we set off?\"\n\n\n\"At dawn. Get some sleep, T'kanka, for you will need it.\" With that, Gi'anti extinguishes the Crab Shells and departs for his room, leaving you to finish your drink alone. At the very least, you got a way out of this kingdom now.\n\n\nYou finish your drink, head up to your room, and pass out in the bed not long afterwards. A few hours later you awake to a pounding on your door and dim sunlight shining onto your face through the window. You get up out of bed, and open the door. There, Gi'anti greets you. \"Ah, T'kanka. Was worried I'd have to knock your door down, for I almost thought you were dead in there.\"\n\n\nYou rub the sleep out of your eyes. \"Needed the sleep. We setting off now?\"\n\n\nGi'anti nods. \"Come along, T'kanka.\" He gestures for you to follow, which you do. He leads you out of the inn and to the stable, where he unhooks the mule you saw last night and grabs a lead. \"We'll be setting off through the woods and heading through to the city of Tolast. If we run into trouble on the way, you put that sword of yours to use, eh T'kanka?\"\n\n\nYou nod. \"Right.\"\n\n\nAnd so, the two of you walk off into the wilderness.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "Over the next week, the two of you make small talk. Gi'anti is an interesting fellow, with a lot to say on various herbs and plants you come across in the forest. One particular time, he points out a faintly red leaf, and says, \"That there is what they call sorem incenti, it's a medical leaf used for treating wounds caused by magic.\"\n\n\n\"Hm. So if, say, you threw a fireball at me, we'd just plant some sorem incenti on me and I'd be fine?\" Your response causes him to let out a laugh, which makes you frown. \"What's so funny?\"\n\n\n\"T'kanka, if I hit you with a fireball, all you'd need is aloe vera. I'm not a very accomplished mage!\" He continues to laugh heartily, and despite yourself you also let out a small chuckle. \"If I was a powerful mage, I wouldn't have need of your assistance, no?\"\n\n\n\"I suppose not.\"\n\n\nThe two of you continue on into the woods, bantering during the day and resting during the night. A few times you nearly let slip some of your old stories, but you doubt the man would care any for them. Plus, he silences you before you can get started on them anyhow. One night you almost mention your old friends when Gi'anti holds up a hand. \"I enjoy your company, T'kanka, but I'd prefer if our relationship be kept professional. No point getting attached if you're going to leave anyway.\"\n\n\nEventually, the two of you pass through the city of Tolast, Gi'anti selling some of his crab shells to anyone looking for a fix. He sells a particularly large amount to a noble passing through, who gives him a nice stack of gold coins in exchange. The mule is extra burdened from then on due to the sheer size of the bag of gold.\n\n\nEventually, the two of you cross the border from the Kingdom of Oren to the Empire of Kishak, after about a month on the road. \"I would appreciate if you would stay on my caravan, T'kanka,\" Gi'anti says while the two of you set up camp for the night. \"But I understand if you wish to leave. We've come far, and that was all you wished to do.\"\n\n\nYou have a decision to make. Will you stay on with Gi'anti, continuing your travels together, or depart come sunrise?", "action_results": [{"action": "Gi'anti has become something of a friend over this last month. I will gladly stay on the caravan with him.", "result": "You nod. \"I'll gladly stay with you, Gi'anti. Come hell or high water, I'll be here with you, my friend.\" With those words, you finish setting up your camp. Gi'anti grins brightly at you.\n\n\n\"I am glad to hear it, T'kanka...\" He pauses, pondering his next words. \"Do you know what T'kanka means, my friend?\"\n\n\nYou shake your head. \"No.\"\n\n\n\"It's the name of a legendary warrior, where I come from. T'kanka, the Wandering King. Able to slay an army with one swing of his sword, able to traverse thousands of miles in a single day, and able to survive no matter how many times he is struck. Of course, these are all myths, but T'kanka was a real man. Legend has it that after his death, his body denied this fact, and he continued to roam, forever.\" Gi'anti leans forward. \"I saw in your eyes the same spirit that I imagine T'kanka to have.\"\n\n\nYou suppose you must be flattered by that, so you crack Gi'anti a small smile. The two of you then begin to banter again, as you've done in the past month, and finally lay down to sleep. Come sunrise, the two of you will continue onward together. You know that you've made a brother for life in him, and you could not be any gladder.\n\n\nIn the morning light, the two of you pack up and leave, never once looking back.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Much as I enjoy his company, I need to leave. I'll tell him as much.", "result": "You shake your head. \"I'm sorry, Gi'anti, but I must go. I enjoyed our time together but I need to carve my own path in this world. I'll leave come sunrise.\" With those words you finish setting up your tent. Gi'anti sighs, shakes his head a bit. Still, he smiles.\n\n\n\"Do you know what T'kanka means, my friend?\"\n\n\nYou shake your head. \"No.\"\n\n\n\"It's the name of a legendary warrior, where I come from. T'kanka, the Wandering King. Able to slay an army with one swing of his sword, able to traverse thousands of miles in a single day, and able to survive no matter how many times he is struck. Of course, these are all myths, but T'kanka was a real man. Legend has it that after his death, his body denied this fact, and he continued to roam, forever.\" Gi'anti leans forward. \"I saw in your eyes the same spirit that I imagine T'kanka to have.\"\n\n\nYou suppose you must be flattered by that, so you crack Gi'anti a small smile. The two of you then begin to banter again, as you've done in the past month, and finally lay down to sleep. Come sunrise, you may never see this man again. But you know that you've made a brother for life in him.\n\n\nIn the morning light, you leave, never once looking back.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Just get my drink.", "result": "You decide not to bother the wandering trader, instead taking a seat at a table by your lonesome. Eventually, the trader gets up and leaves, heading back to his room for the night. You never see him again. After a few more drinks, you stumble out of the dining hall and up the stairs to your room. There, you throw your sword and knapsack to the floor, before passing out on your bed.\n\n\nIn the morning, you awake to a woman's scream. Groggily, you get up, heading to the door so you can see what the hell is going on - grabbing your sword along the way, of course. When you head down the stairs, you see a pair of thugs roughing up the owner, Isaiah. His daughter Eliza watches on, tears streaming from her eyes, as a third thug holds her back. The two harassing Isaiah stick a lit cigar into his face. This time, it's Isaiah who screams.\n\n\nThe thugs laugh at him, sadistic grins on their faces. Your stomach turns. This is disgusting.\n\n\nThen, one of the thugs turns his head and looks at you. He whistles, the other two looking at you soon after. One with a strange piercing in his nose lets out a laugh. \"Oi, you! Quit yer starin' and get outta here, chump.\" Perhaps you should do something about this, or not. After all, this doesn't involve you.", "action_results": [{"action": "The sick bastards. I'll strike them down.", "result": "You unsheathe your blade, pointing it at the bastards. One of them gulps almost imperceptibly, but the one who spoke to you just lets out another nasty laugh. \"Wanna play hero, eh?\" He callously drops Isaiah, pulls a mace from his side. The others follow suit, pulling out their own weapons; one has a curved blade, the other a pair of daggers. This should be easy.\n\n\nYou leap forward and swing, managing to decapitate the one with daggers easily. Blood gushes from his neck, before he falls to the floor, lifeless. This manages to scare the other two, but mace guy nudges sword guy, the latter nodding before rushing forward to cut at you. You don't bother to use your sword on him, instead ducking out of the way of his swing then tripping him up. Then you use the sword, cutting him right in half with one swing while he lies on the ground.\n\n\nAt this point, mace is quaking in fear. He drops his weapon, raising his hands and getting on his knees. \"I-I surrender! Please, don't kill me!\" You step forward, planning on delivering the killing blow...\n\n\nBut mace leaps up and pulls a dagger from his boot! His speed surprises you, and he manages to catch you with a glancing blow. Instantly, you begin to feel light-headed, almost unsteady. Still, you swing, cutting off his arm and wedging your blade deep into his side. He lets out an ungodly scream, then dies.\n\n\nYou grin, give a little chuckle. Then you collapse.\n\n\nWhen you awaken next, you're in a soft bed, a bandage wrapped around your wound. It throbs still, and your throat is parched. A soft groan escapes your lips, then you grunt out, \"water\", hoping someone may hear you. There's a slight shuffling, then a cup of water is handed to you. You look up at who gave it to you, and there stands Eliza. She smiles.\n\n\n\"I can't thank you enough for what you did... But you've brought trouble to the village at the same time. There was one watching outside, he told his leader about what happened. They came to town early this morning and said that if we don't surrender all our goods, they'll raze the place. We have until tomorrow to decide.\"\n\n\n\"Really...\" The word that escape your lips comes out less as a question and more as a statement.\n\n\n\"Yes, really.\"\n\n\n\"How long have I been out?\"\n\n\n\"4 days now. The dagger was poisoned. We got our healer to work on you, you should be fine if you rest another few days.\"\n\n\nThat gets you to jolt up, hissing slightly as you grip your wound. \"I can't. I have to leave.\"\n\n\n\"Please, just relax. You'll be better soon. We plan to surrender to them. And as far as they know, you're dead; we hid you well. You'll be safe to rest here.\"\n\n\nHmph. So they're giving up, simple as that? Back in your day the people would have fought back tooth and nail. What are you going to do?", "action_results": [{"action": "I'll leave. Now. There's no reason to defend those who won't defend themselves.", "result": "You pretend that you'll stay to rest, and convince Eliza you'll be fine by yourself. She leaves the room, and after a minute, you get up and search for your things. Thankfully, they left them right at the foot of the bed. Fools, probably didn't expect you to try and leave.\n\n\nYou get into your clothes and throw on your knapsack, securing your sword onto your back. You open the door, seeing that it leads outside; it's night time, which means your escape will be easier. Keeping down low, you sneak to the edge of the village, where you finally stand, noting that your escape went unnoticed. You prepare to walk away...\n\n\n\"So you are leaving.\"\n\n\nTurning, you see Eliza standing there. She looks sad, but smiles nonetheless. \"I knew you would. You didn't strike me as the type to be patient and rest. Am I right?\"\n\n\n\"Right.\" You turn your back on her. \"You won't convince me to stay. I'll recover on my own.\"\n\n\n\"I figured as much.\" She sighs. \"I wish you well on your travels, Kit.\" Then, she turns and leaves.\n\n\nYou continue onwards into the night.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I'll defend them from the raiders come tomorrow. They need it.", "result": "You shake your head vehemently. \"No. I won't stand by while you all give in to worthless bandits. I'll stay, and fight them off tomorrow.\"\n\n\nEliza's eyes widen. \"You're still hurt! They're near fifty strong, if you fight them, you'll die!\" She's begging you particularly hard.\n\n\n\"I've fought worse odds. I can handle them.\" To prove your point, you get out of the bed and stand up, Eliza moving quickly to sit you back down. You shrug her hands off.\n\n\n\"Please, don't. These men will slaughter you.\"\n\n\n\"I can do it.\" You shoulder your way past her, to your knapsack. There, you slip into your clothing, and grab your sword. \"I'll watch for them. When they come, I'll kill them all.\" A bloodthirsty grin makes its way onto your face. \"Watch.\" Ignoring any further pleas from Eliza, you carry onward and leave the room. You see that it's a small hut, the only door leading directly outside; it's night, which means you have time to set up.\n\n\nYou go to the largest tree in the center of the village, scaling up it and sitting on a branch. There, you wait. And wait. Then you wait some more.\n\n\nThe sun is high in the sky, the villagers are out in the fields, and your ass is sore by the time the raiders finally do come. The villagers milling about pause in their work as they watch them, all with fear written on their faces. The raider leader, a large and burly man in chainmail, raises his arms up high. \"People of this fair village! We have come to accept your surrender. Should you resist, we'll kill all of you. So please, resist.\"\n\n\nIsaiah steps forward, head down low. You note the bandage on his cheek, where the cigar was jammed into his face. \"Please, don't harm us. We surrender. You are free to take all the supplies we have.\"\n\n\nThe raider leader lets out a small tsk, shaking his head. \"Really? That's all? How disappointing.\" You're about to jump down and attack him, when...\n\n\n\"I guess we'll just have to kill you anyway.\" The raider leader pulls out his sword and runs it through Isaiah's chest. Your blood begins to pump viciously. \"Kill them all.\"\n\n\nThat's when you finally jump from the branch. You were too late. Isaiah is dead, because you took too long to just jump down and kill them. You're no hero.\n\n\nYou land on top of the nearest raider, his head crushing beneath the weight of your boot. The others quickly turn their eyes to you and stare in awe. You unsheathe your sword, then start swinging with a primal yell. A few men are taken down by your blade, while the others go on the attack. You bring up your blade occasionally to block attacks, swinging when you see an opening. It's a slaughter for them.\n\n\nBy the time you take down a few dozen, the others begin to retreat. Their leader yells at them, calls them cowards, but stands his ground. \"FINE!\" He unsheathes a blade of his own. \"I'll do it myself!\" He goes on the attack, swinging the sword at you. You block it, then swing, but the raider manages to leap out of the way. Damn, if you weren't still recovering, you could have gotten him. Still, it's been a long while since someone managed to dodge one of your attacks. This should be fun.\n\n\nThe two of you continue on like that for a while; he strikes, you block, you strike, he dodges. It's almost like a dance between two experienced partners. This man, he's well trained, and a far better swordsman than you are. There's one difference though, and that is while you lack strength, you make up for it in raw power.\n\n\nIt also helps that you picked the winning side in this battle.\n\n\nSlowly, the villagers start to gather courage. Before you know it, rocks are being pelted at the raider. He ignores them well enough, but they throw him off enough that he starts to barely evade your attacks. Then, after a longer time, some start pushing forward with pitchforks and other tools in hand. They attack, but the raider attacks back and they retreat before they get killed.\n\n\nBut, their attacks are all you need, and soon, one of your swings eventually makes its way into his hip. He lets out a yell of agony, dropping his blade and falling into a kneel. You don't waste any time letting him have his last words, instead bringing the blade down right onto his head, bisecting it down the middle.\n\n\nThere is silence.\n\n\nThen, defeaning cheers.\n\n\nThe town is safe. You've done it.\n\n\nThere are no celebrations afterwards however. The bodies of the raiders are burned, Isaiah is brought to his daughter. The others return to their homes, some continue to work. Eliza picks out a plot in the cemetary, and the gravekeeper gets to work. You approach her as she watches. Her father has been set down in a coffin not far from the grave.\n\n\nHer eyes are red and puffy. She's been crying all day, no doubt. You place a hand on her shoulder. \"I'm sorry I couldn't save him,\" you say.\n\n\nShe turns to look at you, no malice whatsoever on her face. \"I know.\"\n\n\n\"What will you do now? Manage the inn?\"\n\n\nShe sighs, shakes her head. \"I don't know. My father was all I had.\"\n\n\nYou nod. \"... I'll leave you be.\"\n\n\nThen, you walk away.\n\n\nYou have a decision to make. Stay here in this village and live out the rest of your days, or continue onwards into the great unknown.", "action_results": [{"action": "I'll stay here. Perhaps I can help the people that way.", "result": "The next day, you knock on a random villager's door, and ask for a job. He knows that you saved the village, so he gladly gets you work tending to the fields. It's hard work, but they provide you with a nice home and let you take some of the harvest for food. It's a good way of life, you suppose.\n\n\nYou keep Eliza company when you're off work. She decided to stay in the town, managing the inn like her father before her. It takes her a while, but eventually, she's back to her usual self. Smiling softly, being as kind as possible, and working hard. But you see in her eyes that she won't be able to recover fully anytime soon. You know the pain. One may be able to put on the guise of being back to normal, but they'll never be the same deep down.\n\n\nYou continue to spend your days tending to the fields, visiting Eliza after work or on your days off, and making friends around the village. It's a nice life, you'd say. Eventually, you integrate so well into the village's society, that it's almost like you've been there your whole life.\n\n\nFinally, you are at peace.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I'll leave. I defended the village, and now nothing is left for me here.", "result": "You spend the next few days in the hut where you were told to recover, Eliza visiting you every now and again. She's going to manage the inn, because that's what her father would have wanted. You make it no secret that you'll leave; she looks sad when you say you will, but accepts it nonetheless. You almost feel sorry for her, like you might stay if only to help her, but you know you can't.\n\n\nA few days later, you've fully recovered, and you pack up your things. As you step onto the open road for the first time in almost a week, it feels liberating. You missed this. But, before you go, you hear someone calling your name. Turning, you see Eliza, waving wildly. She smiles faintly, then calls out, \"Be sure to come and visit sometime!\"\n\n\nYou let out a laugh, then call back, \"I'll be sure to if I'm in the area again!\" With that, she heads back to the inn, and you continue onward into the great unknown.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "I'll just leave. Doesn't involve me.", "result": "You raise your hands, shake your head. \"Do what you will. I'm leaving.\" With those words, you make your way to the door. Eliza shoots a horrified look at you, Isaiah stares at you with pure hatred in his eyes. They must think you're an awful person. You're not; you're just doing what you have to in order to survive.\n\n\nYou exit the inn, leaving the bandits with Isaiah and Eliza. As you leave, you hear another scream, from Isaiah again. Can't be helped. Much as you want to go back in, sword in hand, you don't want to cause more trouble to the town by killing those bandits. All in all, you're doing this for the right reasons... Mostly.\n\n\nYou walk down the road, never returning to the village again.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "I'll continue on the road.", "result": "You pass the inn by, instead opting to continue on into the night on the road. Carrying onward for miles, you eventually lay down on the side of the road to sleep for the night. A few hours later you awaken to the morning light, and continue onwards, north to Sodran.\n\n\nYou've been there before, almost a lifetime ago. Back in your day the place was like a sapling surrounded by soot; attempting to grow, but suppressed by its surroundings. The metaphorical soot to the city's metaphorical sapling was the evil wizard you faced down. Try as you might, you could never forget the expressions on the faces of the downtrodden. They looked like they had nothing to live for.\n\n\nYou suppose you know know how it feels now.\n\n\nBy midday, the city is within sight after passing a few dozen villages or so. Great walls surround it, and tall buildings poke out from behind the walls. Stone steps lead up to a massive stone archway, which itself leads into the city proper. There's a statue at the base of the steps, the details of which you can't make out, but it looks like it's in decent condition from this far away. It's a magnificent sight, to be sure.\n\n\nOnce you're within a half mile of the city not an hour later, you finally notice something you couldn't spot from further away: a large camp encompasses the city. Strange. A quarter mile away you can make out shambling figures stumbling around the camp. Once you get close, not ten yards away, you can make out exactly what's happening.\n\n\nThe shambling figures all look to be malnourished and dressed in glorified rags. The adults sit around the camp looking defeated, a small number praying to whatever God they worship. A few children run around kicking a ball, but their expressions tell you that they've experienced too much. What the hell is going on here?\n\n\nYou go and speak to a guard watching them all, and ask him who these people are. His reply is to let out a dry chuckle. \"What, haven't been to this city in a while? These are the unfortunate bastards who were denied access to our fair city. Refugees and the like from the war with Kishak. Mostly natives to our kingdom, couple of Kishak bastards here and there.\"\n\n\n\"Is there any reason the Count of this city has it closed off?\" you ask. His response is to laugh again.\n\n\n\"There's an entry fee, two hundred gold coins. They,\" he gestures to the camp, \"couldn't cover it. Poor bastards, left to rot out here.\"\n\n\nWhat the hell? They couldn't pay some fee, so now they're locked from entering the city? At the very least you can pay it, but you suppose the question remains if you can just walk on by these people.", "action_results": [{"action": "I can't do that. I need to do something. Get them to rise up.", "result": "It pains you to watch these people carry on like this. Just wandering, barely any food, scarce shelter, and no chance of ever entering the city they're so desperate to live in. This Count of Sodran guy. You've never heard of him, considering the last time you were here the title was still \"mayor\". It doesn't matter who he's supposed to be, because you know that he's not doing this city any good.\n\nYou walk away from the guard and head to the nearest refugee. \"Do you have a leader I can speak to?\"\n\nHe looks up at you, a dejected expression on his face, and gives a weary sigh. He points to a tent that's larger than the rest. \"Hugo, the old man in there, is sort of our leader. He gets us jobs in the area and makes sure everyone is well fed.\"\n\nYou nod. \"Thanks for the info.\" With those words, you head to the tent, intent on pitching your idea to the leader. Opening the tent's flaps and stepping inside, you see that it's decorated scarcely. There's some small bedding in the corner, next to a chair and a small bookshelf. An old man with weathered features and a bushy beard sits in the chair reading a book.\n\nYou give a cough to break the silence, and he looks up, smiling at you. \"Oh, hello there. New to our fair camp?\" His voice carries a thick Kishak accent. Guess you know where he's from now.\n\n\"No. I came to speak to you about Sodran, and the Count.\"\n\n\"What about it, stranger?\"\n\n\"Have you ever thought about how many people you have here? It's at least a legion's worth, damn near a thousand from the looks of it. If you banded together... You could take the city.\"\n\nHugo looks a bit shocked by your proposal, but not disapproving of the idea. \"... Maybe we could, stranger. But what business do you have with us, or Sodran, or the Count?\"\n\n\"None at all. I'm just a traveler with too much time on his hands.\"\n\nHugo mulls your words over. He stares at you, as if trying to assess your reasons for approaching him with this proposition. Finally, he shrugs, and nods at you. \"Very well then. I'll organize the refugees... Did you come here just to plant the idea in my head, or do you want to participate in this... Uprising?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "I've come this far, might as well follow through. I'll join their uprising.", "result": "You nod your head. \"Yeah. I'll join you in your uprising.\"\n\nHugo smiles, and nods. \"Very well. You seem like you have the most combat experience out of anyone in this camp, anyhow! I was simply a baker back home, har har!\"\n\n\"Is there anyone here who can fight?\"\n\n\"A decent chunk, I'd say. Mostly defending themselves from any bandits back in their homes. I can take you to Rupert, he was a mercenary years ago. He retired four years back, but he may be willing to help you organize this.\"\n\nYou nod. \"I'll speak to him. What does he look like?\"\n\n\"He's a bit younger than me. He has a bushy mustache, bright red hair, green eyes. You'll know him when you see him, he always has a big smile on his face. In the meantime, I'll gather the others.\"\n\nWait. A Rupert with red hair and green eyes? Oh God, if it is him... Grunting in acknowledgement, you go on your way to find Rupert. It doesn't take you long, as you find him swinging his sword at a tree in the center of the camp. Oh great, it probably is him. Approaching him, you speak, \"Keeping your swordsmanship sharp?\"\n\nHe nods, not looking away from his practice. When he speaks, it's in a voice you know: \"Aye, I were a merc many years back! Ran me own company I did, paid well. I retired 'cause me wife wanted me to, but I still know 'ow to swing a sword 'round.\"\n\nGreat. It really is him.\"... Rupert. It's me, Kit.\"\n\nHe turns, and looks at you. His jaw drops along with his sword. Then, he's smiling widely. You're caught off guard by his speed as he rushes over to give you a hug. \"Kit, ol' buddy ol' pal! It's been too damn long ya jammy bastard!\"\n\n\"Yeah, Rupert. Too long. How've you been doing?\"\n\n\"Pretty damn well I'd say, 'side from the whole losin' my home thing! Dear God lad, it's been ages. Ye've gotten so damn old! Even I look better than ya, haha!\"\n\nDespite yourself, you crack a smirk. \"Really? At least I'm not soft in the middle like you, you old son of a bitch.\"\n\nHe chuckles. \"Alright, maybe I've gotten a wee bit out of shape in the last coupla years. Could still kick yer ass, I bet! Oh, they always left that outta the stories, didn't they? How I whooped yer ass the first time we met! Think I could beat ya if we did round two?\"\n\nThis makes you roll your eyes. \"Oh, yeah, you soundly defeated me with your brave tactic of setting a trap. Piss off.\" You pause, remembering why you came here. \"... Well, I'd love to chat about old times for longer, but I came here for a reason. I convinced the leader, Hugo, to start an uprising so you can get access into the city.\"\n\nRupert runs a hand along his chin. \"Did ya now? I've been thinkin' 'bout it myself to be honest with ya. So, I'm down. It'll be just like old times, eh Kit?\"\n\n\"Just like old times.\"\n\n\"So, when do we start and whadda we need to do?\"\n\n\"Whenever we're ready. Right now, I think we need to stock up on weapons. You know anybody who has some?\"\n\n\"Aye, that I do. There's a few people 'round here who have personal weapons, mostly shortswords and daggers. A few folks have stockpiles of them too, we could convince them to lend 'em out to the folks who don't have none.\"\n\nYou nod. \"Good. You organize this, they'll trust someone they know more.\" Rupert nods at your words, then continues on to the people who have weapons. In the meantime, you head back to Hugo's tent. When you arrive, you see that he's outside, addressing a crowd of refugees.\n\n\"People of this fair camp,\" he speaks in a low voice, enough for people in the immediate vicinity to hear, but not loud enough for it to reach the guards watching the camp from a distance. \"It is time for us to finally enter this city... By force.\"\n\nA few members of the crowd gasp at this, but are otherwise not opposed by the idea. It makes sense, you suppose; this city has kept them under its boot long enough. Hugo continues, \"This brave stranger here has finally given me the courage I need to carry this uprising out. Step forward.\" He points to you. You step up. \"You have spoken to Rupert, yes?\"\n\nYou nod. \"Yes. I spoke to Rupert. He's currently gathering people who have stockpiles of weapons so that they may be handed out to all of you who need them.\"\n\nHugo nods. \"Very good. And before you begin to wonder, my friends: yes. Some of you may very well die in this uprising. But the important thing is that the other refugees will enter the city in your place.\"\n\nThe crowd all nods at this; they know not to cause a scene when the guards are near. They then head back to their tents, where they presumably get ready. Rupert comes to meet you and Hugo soon after.\n\n\"I spoke to the people that got weapons,\" he says. \"They're all on board with the plan. This'll go right smooth like if we just keep on keepin' on.\"\n\nHugo nods. \"Excellent work, Rupert. What have you to say, stranger?\"\n\n\"When do we do this?\"\n\n\"Tonight. The guards won't be expecting it then. We'll strike tonight.\"\n\nYou give a grunt in affirmation, then head off to the edge of the camp to await nightfall. Hours pass, and soon, the sun has gone down and the moon has taken its place in the sky. No lights illuminate the camp; it's as if nothing is there at all. You push through the inky darkness and to Hugo's tent.\n\nThere, he reads by candlelight. You speak up, \"Hugo. Is it time?\"\n\nHugo nods. \"I do believe it's time.\" With that, he closes the book and stands, leaving the tent. One by one, the other refugees emerge from their tents as well. They must be better coordinated than you thought. With everyone gathered, you make sure you have their attention, then address them.\n\n\"We'll head through the front gates. I'll take out any opposition, I'll just need the others to watch my back.\" They all look apprehensive of the idea, but after a moment they nod. Still, you know well enough that they might bolt at the first sign of trouble. You gather up whoever's fit to fight, giving a grand total of nearly two hundred for the attack. Hugo decides to stay behind to make sure the others are fine.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "This late at night, there are no guards milling around outside the city. Your band of would-be freedom fighters ascend the stone steps up to the city gates, completely unnoticed. When you reach the gates, you see two guards ahead; one is watching a firefly intently as it floats around his face, while the other has fallen asleep while standing up.\n\nYou unsheathe your sword and rush forward, stabbing the firefly guard through the chest. He lets out a blood-tinged gasp of mingled shock and pain, before slumping over. You pull your sword out of his chest and swing at the sleeping guard, whose head rolls to the ground before he can even wake up. \"Open the gates,\" you order the others, and they move to do so.\n\nThe sound of wood grinding against stone greets your ears as the gates are opened. After a moment, they're open enough for you to slip through. Looking around, you see that only a few people roam the city streets, most of them guards. You turn your head over your shoulder to address the group, \"If I look like I'm in trouble, come help. Otherwise, stay back.\" With those words, you charge at the nearest guard with a swing.\n\nYou cut down a few guards before they even notice you're there. Once they do, however, shouting breaks the silence of the night as they alert each other to your presence. One grabs a whistle and blows it, the sharp sound tearing through the city streets. Whatever civilians are around quickly run away... And you notice a few refugees taking the opportunity to bolt as well.\n\nDamn those cowards! You should have figured, though: they're just peasants without a lot in life. They're not willing to die for their freedom. Hell, you're not even sure why you're fighting their fight... But you aren't one to quit something when you've started.\n\nYou continue to fight. Of the two hundred refugees that were fit to fight, a grand total of twenty stuck with you, with Rupert among them. The rest fled deeper into the city or back to the camp. It doesn't matter; what does matter right now is getting to the Count's manor and taking it down.\n\nYou continue to fight through the streets for what seems like days, but in truth was only about an hour. You cut down any guards that attacked, and the others watched your flanks and defended you when any got past your defenses. It works well as a system, but all good things must come to an end. One by one, your allies drop to the guards.\n\nBy the time you reach the Count's manor, four of you remain: yourself, Rupert, and two men you learn are named Karl and Frank. You don't bother with subtlety when you reach the metal gate in front of the Count's manor. Raising your blade up high, you slam it down upon the lock keeping it closed once, twice, three times, before it splits wide open and opens the way.\n\nThe moon illuminates the manor, casting a shadow on your quartet. No guards are there to greet you, which is strange. Looking around the courtyard leading into the manor, you notice a collection of barrels. Curious, you approach them, and read the labels on them.\n\nThey read \"gunpowder\".\n\nYou find yourself grinning. This will help. \"You three, grab a barrel and throw it inside.\" The others quickly move to help you, picking them up and heading to the door. You open it for them, finding it unlocked, and they begin to throw the barrels into the entrance hall.\n\nOnce most of the barrels are inside, you grab the last one and pull the cork off the top. You drain a line of gunpower out of it, leading from the door to where the barrels are placed. Then, you exit the manor and pull out your tinderbox. The flames burst forth, and the trail of gunpowder ignites, moving slowly to the barrels. You take the chance to run in the opposite direction.\n\nA moment later, there is a loud explosion, and the manor is set ablaze. Still, you keep on guard. There weren't any guards around, which is strange. As you're comtemplating, Rupert, Karl, and Frank are celebrating. \"Lighten up, lad! We blew up the Count and his damned manor! The city's free!\"\n\n\"Not quite.\"\n\nYou look up to see a man consumed by flames, floating above you. He begins to drop down, and you instantly roll backwards. The man on fire lands on top of Frank, smashing through his head and completely obliterating it. Karl and Rupert back away in terror.\n\n\"I don't appreciate what you did to my home. Die.\" He raises a hand, and slings a fireball at Karl. The refugee is consumed by flames, screaming all the while. Desperately, he tries to pat them away, but it does no good. He falls to the ground and rolls around in pain, his screeches of sheer agony lasting until his lungs collapse from the fire. Even then he's still alive, if only for a moment longer.\n\nThe man on fire turns to you. \"You. Die.\" He slings a fireball your way, but you manage to deflect it with the flat side of your sword. The fireball flies right back at him, and he recoils away from it for only a moment. Still, he laughs. \"You think you can kill me with fire? Really?\"\n\nHe snaps his fingers and the fire subsides. He's naked, athletically built with fair skin. His black hair is messy. Another snap, and now he's fully clothed with hair neatly combed. \"Tell me this, peasants. Why did you feel the need to burn down my manor?\"\n\nThis is the Count.\n\n\"Yer a bastard that's corruptin' this fair city with yer stench, that's why!\" Rupert answers for you, which makes the Count laugh heartily.\n\n\"My, you're something. An old drunk picking a fight he can't possibly win. Amusing.\" Then, the Count sighs. \"Oh well, I'm bored of you.\" A snap of his fingers, and then Rupert is sent flying into a nearby wall. You shout his name, but the Count turns on you. \"... Hm. You look familiar.\"\n\n\"I'm the man who saved this city, you son of a bitch! And I'm gonna do it again!\" you shout, readying your sword.\n\nThe Count laughs. \"Hoho, Sir Kit! I should have known! Come to slay the big bad Count, have we?\"\n\n\"You're not human! You're a... A monster!\"\n\n\"Demon, to be specific.\" He gives you a smug smile.\n\nThis son of a bitch, correcting you like you're a simple-minded peasant. You find yourself grinding your teeth together. Unconsciously, your grip on your sword tightens. As you're doing this, your eyes catch Rupert's as he picks himself up. He's still alive, if only barely. You can see the question in his eyes...\n\nHe's asking you if you want him to help you out.", "action_results": [{"action": "No. Rupert might die if he attacks. I'll do this myself.", "result": "Slowly, you shake your head. Rupert looks slightly worried, but nods. That settled, you turn your attention back to the Count. He gives a tsk, shaking his head and chuckling slightly. \"Colluding with your half dead pal? I'm not stupid or blind, you know.\"\n\nShit. Should have figured. Now you're glad you didn't bring Rupert into this. So, rather than try and fuck around any longer than you already have, you jump right into the fray. Swinging your sword at the demonic Count, you're not surprised when he catches the blade with his hands. You expected him to go for some blatant display of power like that. He just made a mistake.\n\nYou grit your teeth harder than you already were as you twist the blade. The Count is taken off guard by this and you manage to flip him onto his back. Yanking the sword from his grip, you raise it up high and swing down, cutting his head in half at the nose.\n\nYou let out of a sigh, thinking it's over, when you hear clapping behind you. \"Well done, Kit! Well done!\" You turn your head to see who's saying that...\n\nIt's the Count. Alive and unharmed. If you were any younger, you'd let out a gasp of shock and shout something like \"how are you still alive?!\" But you're not as stupid as you were. Instead, you release a weary sigh. \"Let me guess: demonic powers?\"\n\n\"You bet. No mortal can kill me.\"\n\nYou run forward and swing again. The Count blocks, but you continue to attack, until eventually you cleave him in half. He rises again. \"Give up, Kit.\"\n\nYour response comes in the form of a sword through his head.\n\nThe two of you dance like that for a while. Occasionally, he attacks, and it takes all you have to defend yourself. Even when he grazes you it's enough to nearly take you out of the fight. The only thing carrying you right now is adrenaline, passion, and pure unbridled hatred for this \"man\" and his kind.\n\nYou're not sure how long the fight lasts. You just know that right now you're keeping yourself held up by your sword. Your body is bloodied and bruised, and you're not sure how long you can keep going... That is, until you notice a strange black orb poking out of the Count's chest.\n\nHis heart.\n\nHe doesn't notice, because he simply awaits your next attack. \"Looks like your wounds are catching up to you, human. Next time you strike, I'll bring you down.\"\n\nYou're going to have to make this one count.\n\nPicking up your sword, you make as if you're going to swing, and run at the Count. He's already moving to intercept your swing, when you quickly shift and run your sword through his heart. A look of shock makes its way onto his face, and he swings a clawed hand at your face. It claws off a good chunk of your head, including your left eye, but you don't give a damn. You've got him now.\n\nYou pull the blade out once he hits the ground. He's not getting up from that. You almost feel like you're about to fall over and die yourself, but you raise your blade up high for the final attack. He raises his hand feebly. \"W-wait, d-don't...\"\n\nYou swing.\n\nThen, you collapse.\n\nRupert rushes over to you. His face is a mask of horror and sadness. \"Kit... Oh God, lad. What the Hell were you thinkin'?\"\n\n\"Just... Being a hero... One last... Time.\"\n\n\"I... I want to say help is coming, Kit. But Lilith ain't 'round no more.\"\n\nDespite yourself, you let out a chuckle. It causes you more pain, and your words come out weaker. \"Don't... Worry... Gonna be seeing her... And Henry... And Thomas... And... Grace... Soon.\"\n\nTears are streaming down Rupert's face. \"You were always such a damned fool, lad.\"\n\n\"Heh... May... be...\"\n\nYou let out your last breath.\n\nIn the coming days the guards are wiped out by the refugees. You become a martyr for their cause, drawing support from the townsfolk who worshiped you like one of the Gods. Soon, the rebellion takes over Sodran, allowing any and all who need shelter into the city.\n\nThis proves to be its downfall in the coming years.\n\nThe city can't handle the massive influx of people. Overpopulation becomes an issue. The homeless rate spikes, as there aren't enough jobs to go around. As such, crime rises as well, and soon the majority of the city is comprised of criminals.\n\nSodran's reputation shifts from a glorious beacon of light to a city of thieves. No one wants to go there anymore, for fear of their coin purse and their life. The merchant and trade caravans passing through the city disappear one by one until none are left, and the city's income goes with it.\n\nWith the rise of overpopulation, homelessness, and crime, it's no surprise that the rate of diseases the citizens catch increases as well. Eventually, damn near the whole city is infected with a dangerous plague for which there is no cure. The city is quarantined off by the King. When the last citizen dies, Sodran is razed, and no trace of its existence is left but rumors and closely kept records.\n\nThis matters not to a dead hero such as yourself. In death, you find peace. In death, you see them again. In death, you are happy.\n\nDespite what most religions on your world would like people to believe, there are no pearly gates or fluffy clouds in the afterlife. There is no fire and brimstone. There's not even a blank void of nothingness. Instead, there is bliss, with fallen friends gathering around you to celebrate your reunion with them.\n\nIt's the ending that a hero deserves.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Yes. I need all the help I can get.", "result": "You nod your head, indicating you'd appreciate his help. Rupert gulps slightly, indicating his hesitation, but nods back to you. Slowly, he gets up, approaching the Count with shortsword in hand. You keep the Count busy by attacking him ruthlessly, waiting for Rupert to attack.\n\nAfter several grueling moments, Rupert reaches the count, aiming his sword for a backstab...\n\n... But the Count turns around and blows Rupert away with a blast of telekinetic force! Your jaw drops at the sight as Rupert hits the wall hard, blood spurting out of his head. \"RUPERT!\" you call out. The Count turns back to you. His expression is smug.\n\nA blood-curdling scream of rage flies out of your mouth as you swing relentlessly at the Count. You continue to wail on him, and despite his best efforts, he can't manage to make an attack against you. The only thing keeping him alive is his demonic nature. Any other man would have fallen to this onslaught by now.\n\nYou must've been hacking at him for about half an hour when you notice something peeking out of his chest. It's a black orb. His heart.\n\nHis heart is exposed. Maybe that's what you need to destroy to kill this monster. So, you continue to attack as you've been doing, and the Count continues trying to defend. Finally, you rear back, and stab his heart with a roar of anger.\n\nThe rotting organ explodes in a mess of black ooze when your sword pierces it. Falling to the ground, the Count stares at you in disbelief. Despite your furious attacks that he couldn't defend himself from, he must have figured you'd never be able to kill him.\n\n\"Wai-\" You don't let him speak, instead slicing his head in half.\n\nWith that done, you rush over to Rupert. You expected him to have held out somehow. You could have saved him, or at the very least exchanged some parting words. Instead, you find that he's dead, and probably was not long after he hit that wall. His eyes are widen open. You reach down and close them for him.\n\nYou conquered the city. You don't care enough to inform the cowards that sent you on this mission. So, instead, you leave, and never return.\n\nA week after your killing of the Count, you hear news from Sodran while drinking at a pub in a village with no name. The refugees rose up and wiped out the rest of the guards, declaring that the gates to the city were open... However, those who lived within the city were having none of it.\n\nThe refugees attempted to claim that you helped them to bolster support. After all, the townsfolk adored you for saving the city in the past. And while you did indeed help them, you didn't stay behind to prove it, and as such the townsfolk had no reason to believe the refugees. The refugees were driven out of the city or killed, and the people of Sodran elected a new count, as the former one had no heirs.\n\nNeedless to say, the uprising's victory was rendered moot not long after they took the city. A dark chuckle escapes your lips. Well, can't say you didn't try. You finish your drink, pay the barkeep, then leave the bar.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "No, I don't think I will. The idea was to give them the push they needed, not participate.", "result": "You shake your head. \"All I wished to do was push you in the direction of uprising. Now that you're planning on it, my work here is done.\" Without another word, you exit the tent, leaving Hugo slightly baffled by your bluntness. Taking a look around the camp one last time, you depart, heading off down the road.\n\nA few weeks later you're drinking at a pub in a town with no name. A man rushes in, and brings you all news of an attempted uprising in Sodran. It fell apart rapidly due to a lack of discipline within the troops; for every soldier they killed, they lost ten of their own. What should have reached the Count's manor instead ended two blocks from the city's entrance.\n\nThere were no surviving refugees.\n\nThe news makes you shrug. No skin off your back. It was their own faults for rushing in without a plan. You finish your drink and order another. When the second one's done, you pay the barkeep, and head out the door. Tomorrow you should be nearing the Kishak border. It should be nice this time of year.\n\nYou walk off into the sunset.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Yeah I can. I'll continue onwards.", "result": "You nod to the guard, gritting your teeth slightly. \"Good thing I have enough gold then.\" He lets out another bark of laughter, then waves you on, not bothering to reply. Likewise, you continue on without another word, closer to the stone steps of the city.\n\nApproaching the stone steps, you can finally make out the statue you had seen earlier. To your surprise, the statue depicts you. While you never wore the shining armor they present you in, and the sword is far to small to be your own, the facial features are too similar for it to be anyone else. Looking it over, you see that it's covered in bird dung, and there are many chips and cracks in the marble.\n\nYou clutch your hand tightly. Of course, the statue couldn't have depicted anyone else. Couldn't have been the king, couldn't have been the count, couldn't have even been some sort of God. It had to be you. Taking in a breath and releasing the death grip you have on your palm, you push on past the statue and up to the steps. A guard stands there gripping a spear. Behind him is a large oak door, leading into the city proper.\n\nHe blinks at you and lets out a mix between a yawn and a sigh, before speaking, \"Two hundred gold for entrance into the city, sir.\"\n\nYou pull out your bag and rifle through it, before handing him four pieces of gold, each worth fifty. He counts them out, even chews on one to ensure its authenticity, before nodding. \"Very good, sir. Welcome to Sodran.\" He pushes the doors open, and lets you through.\n\nStepping into the city, you find that it's grown substantially since your last visit to it. Large buildings rise high into the sky, faded signs declaring what they're all for. People bustle through the streets, going about their own business, while merchants hawk their wares. Guards stand at every corner, keeping a watchful eye on the citizens. Shady looking people hang around alleyway entrances; unconsciously, you keep a tighter grip on your coin purse.\n\nSo much to do, so little time. But I suppose the question I should be asking is if you wish to do something about the state of the city, or if you're just here to explore.", "action_results": [{"action": "I'm heading right for the Count's manor. I'm going to do something for those refugees.", "result": "You might not have tried getting the refugees to rise up, but you can fight this battle without having to put innocent lives at risk. This Count of Sodran guy. You've never heard of him, considering the last time you were here the title was still \"mayor\". It doesn't matter who he's supposed to be, because you know that he's not doing this city any good.\n\nDipping through the crowds of people, you climb a set of stone stairs up to what appears to be a park overlooking the entire city. Hugging the north wall in the distance is a manor, taking up damn near an entire block and looming over the city streets. That's got to be the Count's manor. Nodding to yourself, you begin to make your way to it.\n\nAlong the way, you spy a few guards cornering a man in butcher's clothes. The butcher is an older man, with thinning hair and a physique reminiscent of a skeleton. Sweat drips down his brow, and he gives the guards an uneasy look. \"I-I swear, I'll pay the Count! I just need another week! Please, this shop's all I got left!\"\n\nOne of the guards gives him a nasty grin. \"Well ya shoulda thought 'bout that 'fore ya gotta loan. The Count don't take too kindly to old weasels who don't cough up what they owe.\" He brings his fist up to the butcher's gut, causing the older man to fall to his knees. Then, the guard backhands him to the floor. \"Ya got till the end of the day to get that money.\" With those words, the guards walk away.\n\nIt takes all your willpower to not fly into a frenzy and attack them. Instead, you wait until they've moved on, then approach the butcher who's regaining his footing after the attack. \"How much?\" you ask.\n\n\"What?\" the butcher replies, looking at you suspiciously.\n\n\"How much do you owe?\"\n\n\"Five hundred. I needed a loan of one hundred to pay for my daughter's medicine... But she died even with it.\" The butcher pauses to wipe away a tear threatening to escape his eye. \"... I try to pay the Count back, but he keeps raising the price, further and further... I can't keep up. At this rate, I'll lose my business.\"\n\n\"Sorry to hear about that.\" You pull out your coin purse, then throw him a handful of gold coins worth one hundred gold each. \"Take these. Gather everyone you care about and leave. You don't want to be around for what I'm going to do.\"\n\nThe butcher looks frightened by that, but nods, accepting the money gladly and quickly rushing off. You watch him go, then release a sigh through gritted teeth. When you came here, you were hoping to be able to resolve this issue using diplomacy. It was never your strong suit, but your fame, much as you hate it, would be useful in this situation.\n\nNow, though? You're going to kill this Count, or die trying.\n\nIt's an hour and several similar incidents later that you finally arive at the gates of the Count's manor. A few guards mill about the front, and you draw their attention by pounding against the steel gate. One of them approaches, staring at you with a nasty grin. It's the one from earlier, with the butcher. \"Well? Whaddya want?\" he asks.\n\n\"I'm here to see the Count,\" you reply.\n\n\"Really? The Count don't let no middle-aged bums in to see 'im. Get lost!\" He spits in your face.\n\nYou keep your rage contained, gritting your teeth and giving him a toothy smile. His grin falters. \"Tell him that it's Lord Kit of Droburg. You know. The guy on that statue outside.\"\n\nHe gives a nervous chuckle. \"O-oh, you're Lord Kit, eh? How do I know you're telling the truth?\"\n\n\"Because if you don't let me in, I'll cleave you in half.\"\n\nBetween your expression, the threat, and the fact that you haven't even bothered to wipe off the saliva that's starting to drip down your cheek, the guard is thoroughly terrified. \"R-right, apologies Lord Kit, I'll let you in...\" He opens the gate slowly. The creak of metal against stone splits through your ears. Your hand itches, begging for you to unsheathe your sword.\n\nYou do.\n\nYou reach up and grab your blade off your back as soon as the gate is open wide enough for you to walk through. With a swing, you slice through the guard's waist, the force sending his torso flying high into the air as he lets out an ungodly scream. His torso meets the floor with a meaty thud. He's still alive for only a few moments, gasping for air as blood leaks out of his mouth. Then, he lets out his last breath.\n\nThe other guards are quick to notice their fallen comrade. None of them carry ranged weaponry, just swords, axes, and batons. They all begin to run at you, weapons raised. Judging by your quick assessment of the odds, it's fourteen to one. Despite yourself, you can feel the sadistic grin on your face widen.\n\nThis will be too easy.\n\nA primal yell bursts out of your throat, and you rush forward to meet the guards head on. It's easy enough to deflect a few blows, and with each swing you bring at least two men out of the fight. It doesn't last long, and within minutes, the manor's courtyard is covered in blood, guts, and corpses.\n\nYou enter the manor, sparing but a glance to the carnage you left behind.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "You fight your way through the manor to the great hall, where you expect the Count will be. When you reach it, however, you find it empty. The Count must be elsewhere. So, you continue to hack and slash your way through, checking every room in an attempt to find the bastard.\n\nIt's only after a dozen men have died and you yourself have suffered several wounds that you find him. He's sitting calmly in his study, reading a book, perhaps unaware of the fighting that had been going on outside. You readjust your grip on your sword, then bark, \"Hey!\"\n\nHe looks up, sighs, then slips a ribbon into the book on the page he was on. Shutting it and placing it down on a table, the Count stands, and gives you a small smile. \"My apologies. I got so absorbed with my reading, I must not have heard you.\" He stands a good few inches below you, dressed in fine silk clothing with various pieces of jewelry adorning his body. Truly, he's a pompous asshole.\n\nYou stare at him in disbelief. \"Deaf and corrupt, huh?\"\n\nHe frowns. \"Whatever do you mean?\"\n\nYou grit your teeth so hard you feel like they might crack. \"You've been running this city into the ground long enough. I didn't save this Goddamn world so its rulers could become just as bad as the man I saved it from.\" You raise your sword, point it at him. \"I'm going to cut you down.\"\n\nThe Count looks confused for a moment, and he studies your face. Then, it clicks, and he sighs. \"Lord Kit, is it? I see. So you've finally decided to come out of retirement. I knew this day would come.\" He turns his back on you and approaches his bookshelf. Picking one out, he turns it over in his hands, then shows it to you. The cover is faded, but the words clear as day.\n\nIt reads \"Sir Kit Against Alistair\".\n\n\"This was one of my favorite books, y'know. You seemed so pure, so flawless.\" He flips through it a bit. \"But it's clear that reality is far from the truth. How much blood have you shed today?\"\n\n\"I cut down dozens of your guards to reach you.\"\n\n\"Ah. It would seem you live up to the tales in that regard then.\" He turns the book over more, before placing it back. \"Let's test another aspect of those tales. It was said that Alistair tried to tempt you with unlimited power, but you turned it down. Was that true?\"\n\nYou snort. \"Of course not. As soon as Grace and I entered that throne room of his, we were fighting for our lives. No time for words.\"\n\n\"So it would seem. But if he did offer you that power, would you have accepted?\"\n\nYou're not sure how to respond.\n\nThe Count smiles. \"I'll make you an offer. I'm very talented in... Certain aspects of magic. You miss your friends, no?\" He snaps his fingers, and a portal is opened to you. What's inside you can hardly believe.\n\nYour friends. All of them. Henry, strumming his lute. Thomas, sharpening his daggers. Lilith, reading holy scriptures... And Grace, sitting there and playing with fire as she always did.\n\nYou reach out to them, let out a yell of pure shock and happiness despite yourself. A mixture of awe and sheer joy making its way onto your face. It's them! They're alive! By the Gods, they're alive, like they should be!\n\nThen, the portal closes. You shift back towards the Count, having forgotten he was even there. He gives you an enigmatic smile. \"It seems that seeing your companions again got a reaction. I can take you to them again. You can relive your quest, make things right.\"\n\nYour voice is shaky as you reply, \"You're... You're not planning anything? I can fix things... Right?\"\n\n\"That you can. But only if you spare me.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "I accept in a heartbeat. I need to bring them back!", "result": "In an instant you reply, \"Yes! Yes! For the love of the Gods, let me make things right! Please!\"\n\nHis smile widens. \"I was hoping you'd say that.\" The portal is summoned again... Only this time, your friends on the other side notice it, too. They approach it, staring in awe.\n\n\"What in the world...?\" Henry asks, staring through. He spots you, and points. \"Woah, guys, doesn't that look like Kit?\"\n\nThomas lets out a derisive snort. \"Can't be. Too old. Then again, we just saw a crazy ass portal open up before our eyes, so it could be.\"\n\nLilith places a hand on her heart and takes in a few deep breaths. Then, she speaks, \"I think... This might be a portal to the future. I wonder...?\"\n\nGrace is staring at you. Those big, brown eyes staring into your own grey ones. Searching for something. Whatever it is, it seems she's found it.\n\nShe reaches for you. You approach her, taking her hand. Her other hand reaches up to touch your face.\n\n\"You look tired, Kit,\" she says, and you let out a laugh, because you know it's true.\n\n\"I sure as shit am.\"\n\nThe portal closes behind you as you step through it fully.\n\nThen, everything is fire.\n\nOne by one they fade away. Your eyes widen in shock. What the hell? You look down, and find that your clothes are igniting, your flesh is slowly peeling and melting off the skin.\n\nYou do the logical thing and scream in sheer agony.\n\nYou scream until all the air has left your lungs, and even then, you're trying to with all your might. It is only after your lungs and larynx have been fried to a crisp that you can't even attempt to scream. There is only fire, faint voices, and silhouettes you can't even see.\n\nThere's laughter in the distance. Then, a booming voice all around you.\n\n\"Welcome to Hell, hero.\"\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "... No. The Count is playing a trick on me. I won't let him.", "result": "You look longingly at the portal for a moment. It's tempting, oh so tempting, but you know that whatever lies beyond it is a farce. The Count is trying to trick you, offering you something he knows you would want, but you won't take the bait.\n\nYou give your companions a stony face. \"You're not real.\" Then, you turn to the Count, and swing at his head.\n\nThe sword cleaves through his dandy face, completely knocking off the top half. He stands stone still for a minute, as if his corpse is denying his death, before falling to the ground. The portal closes, and with it, the image of your friends.\n\nSighing, you place your sword back onto its sheath, and exit the room.\n\nBefore you stands the Count, alive and unharmed. He smiles, but instead of a small and enigmatic smirk, it's a large and goofy grin.\n\n\"Well done. You resisted my temptation. Not many have ever done that.\" He walks around you, examining you, while you stand there still reeling from the shock. \"I wonder. How did you know that wasn't real?\"\n\nAfter taking a moment, you respond, \"You're too much of a bastard to give me what I really wanted. It was a test. One I passed, apparently.\"\n\n\"Yes, yes it was, Kit. I'm impressed that you sussed that out, really. I suppose you're going to want to kill me again?\"\n\nWithout another word you unsheathe your sword again and swing. He's cut in half this time. Then, the Count approaches from behind. \"It's pointless, Kit. A mere mortal like you? You can't kill me. Just hear me out.\"\n\n\"What!?\" you bark out.\n\nThe Count laughs. \"I have a final offer. No tricks this time. I will give you a way out of this country. A key to a nice home on the Cikoni shoreline. The place will be stocked with food, alcohol, water, whatever you need once a week. Other than that? There will be no one who knows you're there.\"\n\nYou frown. \"And in exchange?\"\n\n\"In exchange, you leave Sodran and this Kingdom. Don't even return. You've been enough of a thorn in my side today.\"\n\nThis offer is much more down to earth and, therefore, more believable. Still, you're wary of any tricks.", "action_results": [{"action": "He admitted he was trying to trick me with his earlier offer. No more. I'll strike him down until finally, I kill him for good.", "result": "You answer his offer with another swing of your blade. This time, he simply forgoes his reappearance act and rises up again. He uses his hands to put his head back in place, and soon, the flesh has knitted back together and he's back to himself. The Count gives a tsk; lets out a sigh. \"I hoped you would accept. I was being earnest, you know. Not many get that honor from me.\"\n\n\"I don't believe you. You're inhuman... A monster. What the hell are you?\"\n\nHis small enigmatic smile returns to his face. \"The answer lies in your question. What the hell am I? I come from Hell.\"\n\n\"... You're a demon.\"\n\nHe lets out a small chuckle. \"Exactly. And I hope you know, you'll never kill me.\"\n\nYou go back to gritting your teeth in rage. This time, your grind them together so hard a piece of one of your incisors chips off. \"I've killed enough men to know that all you need to do...\" You swing, chopping his legs off. \"IS KEEP SWINGING!\"\n\nYou chop his corpse to bits. He comes back from behind you. You keep hacking. He keeps coming back. You keep slashing. He rises again with a laugh. You keep stabbing. He continues to laugh. You keep chopping. He rises without a scratch. Eventually you start bashing him with the flat of your blade. It doesn't keep him down.\n\nBut through the constant fierce attacks, you see that pieces of his chest have fallen off to reveal a glowing black heart. That's your ticket. You move your eyes from it before he notices. Right now, the Count is too busy chuckling madly to do anything.\n\n\"Alright... Alright, I think you've had your fun.\" He smiles. \"This is the end, Kit.\"\n\nHe snaps his fingers. Flames burst from beneath you. Acting quickly, you roll away from them, and watch as they begin to consume the floor and walls of the hallway you're in. Your cloak is on fire, but you pat it away, and focus on your target.\n\nHe's standing there. Smiling that damned smile.\n\nYou can't wait to wipe that smirk off his face.\n\nDeep within you, a scream builds up and lets loose. You dash at him, acting as though you're going for a swing. He opens his arms wide, awaiting the fruitless swing...\n\nThen, you bring the sword back and ram it into his heart.\n\nUnlike your other attacks, this gets him to look shocked. Black ooze slowly drips from his lips. You kick him away, and he lies on the ground, staring at you in awe.\n\n\"H-how?\" he chokes out.\n\nYou don't give him a response. Instead, you pull the lantern oil from your pack and dump it all on him. He whimpers something, probably a plea for his life. You ignore him. Pulling your lantern from your hip, you ignite it...\n\nThen smash it onto him.\n\nThe flames begin to consume him. He lets out a gurgling screech of agony. You grin at that scream. The rest of the fire rushes to meet him.\n\nYou step past his flailing, burning body, and descend to the entrance of the manor. You see that the fire is spreading quickly, burning through the wooden building rapidly. His screams have long since died down.\n\nOutside there are guards waiting for you, staring in terror at your blood-stained body. You raise your sword, but instead, they step aside. The expressions on their faces range from terrified to relieved.\n\nYou leave the manor courtyard and disappear into the panicking mass of people in the streets. The guards stare at you in shock. They know that you did it, they know that they should apprehend you, know that you should be hung for your crimes. Still, they don't move out of fear of what you'll do to them.\n\nYou leave the city and never return.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I'll take his offer. I just need to get out of this place.", "result": "You have nothing to lose but your life. Maybe you do need to leave this place behind. You don't even know why you're doing this. Some futile attempt to be a hero one last time? Or maybe you're just trying to sate your bloodlust.\n\nWhatever it is, you're tired of fighting. You just want to hide away until the end of your days. Maybe, this offer is what you need. Maybe...\n\nYou nod your head. \"I accept your offer. I'll leave, and never return.\"\n\nThe Count smiles. \"Good. Here.\" He snaps his fingers, and a key materializes from thin air. \"The key to the property.\" Another snap of his fingers, and a portal opens, revealing a pathway to a nice cabin. \"Step through. No tricks this time.\"\n\nWarily, you accept the key, and step through the portal. Your feet meet sand, and the portal closes behind you as soon as you're all the way through. You stand there a moment, waiting for some sort of attack, or for the scenery to shift into something nightmarish...\n\n... But it never comes.\n\nAfter a while, you head towards the cabin and unlock it. Stepping inside, you see that it's nicely decorated with rustic furniture and paintings adorning the walls. You head into the kitchen and find that it's stocked with bread and wine, and that's all you really need.\n\nYou stay there for days awaiting a painful shift in scenery. Those days turn to weeks, then months, then years, then decades. Nothing happens. Guilt eats you away a bit, you were so close to toppling a tyrannical government, only to back off and accept a bribe. Still, you have to say, it's certainly nice out here.\n\nYears later you finally pass away quietly in your sleep. It's the best a \"hero\" like you could hope for.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "The Count doesn't matter. I came here to get away from fighting, not to get involved in more of it. I'll look around.", "result": "You decide not to interfere with the Count, instead opting to explore Sodran. It's been a while since you've been here. Briefly, you wonder how much has changed; obviously it's grown a lot, but are any of the old stores still open? You recall a store run by an older man, which sold the best wine you ever tasted. Is he still alive, or did his son take over the store like he wanted?\n\nShaking your head, you reason that you'll just have to find out, and begin to explore. Most of your knowledge of the city hasn't aged well, since more buildings have sprung up and some roads you used to know are gone now. Still, your knowledge holds true when you find the old store you knew. The sign reading \"Louie's Supplies\" is faded and the wooden door is cracked, but it's still the same place.\n\nStepping through, you find a bored looking young man standing behind the counter. Looks like you were right about his son taking over. He perks up as soon as he sees you, and smiles. \"Ah, a customer! It's been a while since one came through.\" He studies your face for a moment. \"... You look familiar, traveler. Do I know you?\"\n\nYou grunt. \"Probably not. I have one of those faces.\"\n\nHe shakes his head. \"No, no, I do know you... You helped my father deal with thugs that were harassing him. Twenty years ago...\" Then, he gasps, as if finally realizing who you are. \"You're Sir Kit the Brave! The man who slayed the vile wizard Alistair!\"\n\nDespite yourself, you face twists into a scowl. \"Don't go screaming it from the rooftops.\"\n\nHis own smile drops. \"Oh. Apologies, Sir Kit.\"\n\n\"Yeah... Look, I did know your father, and I did help him out, but I just came here to see if the place was still around. Glad it is...\" You can't help yourself, and soon ask, \"Is your father still alive?\"\n\n\"No, sir. He died five years ago, when I was nineteen. I inherited the store. Didn't wanna see it run into the ground, but...\"\n\nYou're gonna hate yourself for asking this. \"But?\"\n\n\"... I don't want to run this store. I want to go out into the world, go on an adventure, like you did. When you came and helped my father with those thugs... I knew exactly what I wanted to do. I wanted to be a hero.\"\n\nThat makes you sigh and pinch the bridge of your nose. Great, now you've got a fanboy telling you he wants to be a \"hero\", like you were.", "action_results": [{"action": "Discourage him. Being a hero's not all it's cracked up to be.", "result": "You take a moment to think about what you want to say. After a moment, you begin to speak, \"Look, kid. Adventuring isn't all that fun. It can be brutal. I had to cut down my fair share of men when I was younger, and while I can live with it, not everyone can. Just keep the store running, like your father would've wanted.\"\n\nThe shopkeeper's face falls. He lets out a sigh, but nods. \"... Right. I should probably keep doing that. Settle down, find a wife, too. It's just that ever since I took over the store, no one's coming here anymore. I guess I just don't manage it as well.\"\n\n\"What do you mean? Is there any competition or something?\"\n\nHe nods. \"There's another store across town that opened before my father died. People went there, but they came here more often, because they trusted my father. Now that I've taken over, people don't shop here as much, if at all in a few cases. They don't know me as well as they did my father, so I might as well be another stranger to them... If people come here these days, it's because they want to save time rather than walk across town.\"\n\nYou ponder for a moment. Maybe you could get people to start heading to this store more often? You have your fame to use to your advantage, maybe if you recommend it, more people will come. Alternatively, you can just ignore the boy and leave. You've spent too much time in this town already.", "action_results": [{"action": "I'll give the store my commendation. That will get people to shop here.", "result": "After a moment of mulling it over, wondering if you should bring this much attention to yourself, you come to this decision. \"I could help you out. We can use my fame to get people to come here. Everyone loves me, for whatever reason, so if I gave your store my commendation they'd shop here.\"\n\nThe shopkeeper's face lightens up immediately. \"Y-you'd really do that for me? You're serious?\"\n\n\"Sure. It'd help you out. I didn't go through those thugs just so this place would have to close down.\"\n\nTo your surprise, the shopkeeper jumps up and hugs you from across the counter. You awkwardly pat his shoulder, as he blubbers into your own. \"Oh by the Gods, thank you, thank you so much! I don't know how I can ever repay you!\"\n\n\"You'll repay me enough by keeping this place open... And giving me as much of that Cikoni wine as I can carry.\"\n\nThe shopkeeper pulls away from you with a small smile. He wipes the tears away from his eyes... Then pauses. Chuckling nervously, he asks, \"Uh... Do you mean the Cikonus Vineyard Wine?\"\n\nYou frown. \"Yeah. What about it?\"\n\n\"We uh... Lost contact with the makers of that wine, about ten years back. We don't sell it anymore.\"\n\nYou grumble. \"... Perfect. Just perfect.\"\n\nNot long after, you leave the shop and look around outside. You told the kid to stay inside, because you'd get the customers in there. As you search the marketplace, you find that there's a large chunk of townsfolk milling about. Some are in a hurry, others taking their time checking each shop out.\n\nRaising your voice, you begin to shout, \"My name is Sir Kit of Droburg, and Louie's Supplies is my favorite store in Sodran!\" This piques the interest of a few shoppers, who turn in your direction. A few look in awe that you're there. Others look disbelieving and carry on. Still, you got some attention.\n\nA young girl approaches you, looking at you with wide eyes. \"Wow! Are you the guy who killed the evil wizard Al-a-star?\" She pronounces his name wrong, but you smile at her and nod.\n\n\"Yes, I did! I saved this city, and this store right here, too!\"\n\nMore people begin to flock over. A few actually head inside, but most just ask you questions or request some stories of your exploits. You don't want to answer them all, but an idea sparks in your head... \"Tell you what, folks! If you buy one item from this store, I'll gladly tell you any story you want!\"\n\nThat really gets people heading into the store.\n\nPeople start swarming in and out, buying everything from little knick knacks to their groceries. You answer a few lighthearted questions about yourself and what you've been up to, the occasional serious one involving your friends. The former is asked by young kids and the like, while the latter is older folks who know the true details of your journey beyond the bastardized fictionialized versions.\n\nEventually, a young boy tugs at your shirt. You look down, and he smiles wide, his two front teeth missing. He shows you a small box of chocolates he just purchased from the store. \"Look, I bought some chocolates! Can you tell us about your adventure, Mr. Kit? The whole adventure, not just parts of it!\"\n\nYou were waiting for that. To be honest, you're not sure how to respond. It takes you a moment, before you decide that no, you won't tell this story.\n\nYou're about to give the boy your answer, but you stare into his wide and hopeful eyes. Despite yourself, you can't find it in yourself to decline him. \"... Alright. But it's a long one. I might not be able to get to all of it.\"\n\n\"That's fine! I just wanna hear what really happened!\"\n\nA small smile makes its way onto your face despite yourself. Taking in a deep breath, you begin to reminisce about those days. Where to start? You suppose, at the very beginning.\n\n\"Listen closely, because I won't repeat myself. A long time ago, I lived in a village called Droburg. It was there that I lived with my best friends, Henry, Thomas, Lilith, and... Grace. One day, news came through that an evil wizard was attacking the Kingdom! We knew that this was what we had been waiting for. So, the very next day, we set out to slay the vile wizard. And that, is where our story begins...\"\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "No, I should just leave now. He can figure this out on his own.", "result": "With a shrug and a shake of your head, you reply, \"Wish I could help you out, son. I really do. But I've got to get moving on. I've stayed in this city too long already.\"\n\nHe gives you a smile and nods. \"Right, right... Sorry that I held you up with all my rambling and complaining. I'll try and sort things out myself. It was nice seeing you again, Sir Kit.\"\n\n\"Yeah, sure was.\" You turn around and head out the door. For the rest of the day, you mill about Sodran for a while, visiting other places you and your friends visited. A few of the shops have closed down, some of them are under new management. The remainder that haven't changed as much are surprised and pleased to see you.\n\nAt the end of the day, you head to an inn near the entrance to the city and sleep. When you awake in the morning, you pack up your things and leave the city behind. Weeks pass as you get further and further away from your former home, then reach a port town by the sea. You pick up transit on a supply ship headed to Cikoni. A few months later, you arrive in the country.\n\nYou wander there for a while, unsure what to do. Eventually, you find a small coastal town with few people. There, you take residence in an abandoned shack. To make ends meet, you get a job at a farm, tending to exotic crops you've never seen before. It's strange, but eventually, you think you've got the hang of it.\n\nIt's a good life. All in all, better than anything a guy like you could've hoped for.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Encourage him. He should chase his dream, get out and see the world.", "result": "After a moment of thinking the kid's words over, you look him dead in the eye. \"If you're serious about your wish, then you should chase it. But be careful, because the world is brutal out there. I'd suggest grouping up with people you can trust, rather than striking out on your own or, Gods forbid, hiring mercs to protect you. Those bastards just care about your money, not you.\"\n\nYou continue to ramble on a bit about your general dislike of mercenaries and their ilk. The shopkeeper doesn't stop you out of respect, but you can tell he doesn't care for your rant about how they'll drink all your alcohol if you have it. Eventually, your throat gets sore anyhow, so you stop. You don't think you've talked this much in ages.\n\n\"I'll be sure to not hire mercenaries then, Sir Kit. I've got a group of friends who are interested in adventuring as well, and we all have some level of combat experience. We're not gonna go on an adventure like you did, just explore. But...\" He bites his lip nervously. \"I don't know who will manage the shop while I'm gone. I don't want to lose it.\"\n\nYou nod, having expected that. Having encouraged him, you feel the need to help him with this so he can get his ass on the open road. The question is, who could take over the shop? You ask, \"Any idea who could manage it for you?\"\n\nHe nods. \"I have an idea, yeah. There's another store across town, I'm sure they'd be happy to manage the shop for me. Though I am a bit worried about them... They might try and permanently take over the shop, if you know what I mean. They need to expand to get all the customers they can get after all.\"\n\nYou hum. That can't be the only option though, right?", "action_results": [{"action": "I'll have him go to the other shop.", "result": "You nod in agreement. \"Yeah, that'd be the best bet. They know how to run this sort of business, and already have enough goodwill with the people that the place will finally get shoppers.\"\n\nHe considers your words, and nods. \"Right. This'll boost the business, and I can go have an adventure!\" With a grin, he leans over the counter and hugs you. Awkwardly, you pat his back. \"Thank you, Sir Kit. I can finally leave this town!\"\n\nAll you give is a shrug. \"Just doing my part. Have fun, kid.\" With those words, you exit the shop, and step out into the marketplace. For the rest of the day, you mill about Sodran for a while, visiting other places you and your friends visited. A few of the shops have closed down, some of them are under new management. The remainder that haven't changed as much are surprised and pleased to see you.\n\nAt the end of the day, you head to an inn near the entrance to the city and sleep. When you awake in the morning, you pack up your things and leave the city behind. Weeks pass as you get further and further away from your former home, then reach a port town by the sea. You pick up transit on a supply ship headed to Cikoni. A few months later, you arrive in the country.\n\nYou wander there for a while, unsure what to do. Eventually, you find a small coastal town with few people. There, you take residence in an abandoned shack. To make ends meet, you get a job at a farm, tending to exotic crops you've never seen before. It's strange, but eventually, you think you've got the hang of it.\n\nIt's a good life. All in all, better than anything a guy like you could've hoped for.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "... Maybe I could run it for him?", "result": "... You're going to hate yourself for this, but you voice your thoughts after a moment: \"Frankly, I don't trust the other store to manage this place well. Like you said, they might try and steal the place from under your nose.\"\n\nThe shopkeeper considers your words for a bit, before nodding. \"Yeah. You're right... But who will run the shop?\"\n\nOh you're really gonna hate yourself for it. \"... I could run the store for you.\"\n\nHis eyes immediately widen. \"Y-you would? Really?\"\n\nWith a groan, you reply, \"Yeah, really. Don't get too mushy, I'm still not sold on the idea myself.\"\n\nAs if ignoring your warning, he immediately goes in for a hug. Awkwardly, you pat his shoulder. \"Thank you, Sir Kit!\" He pulls away, wiping a tear from his eye. \"I can't believe it! I finally met my hero, and now I'm going to go on an adventure of my own!\" He beams at you.\n\nYou give a cough. \"... Just get going. Grab your things, gather your friends. I'll take over from here.\"\n\nHe nods, heading to a backroom. You hear him shuffling with things, you assume his gear and supplies, and soon after he exits the room with a knapsack strapped to his back alongside a longsword. You point at it. \"Know how to use that thing?\"\n\nHe nods. \"Of course! My father taught me how, in case I ever needed to defend the store from thieves. But now, I'm gonna put it to better use!\"\n\nYou chuckle. \"Alright, kid. Get going. Oh, and don't forget the key for me.\"\n\nHe nods, tossing you a small key. \"Thank you for this, Sir Kit, really! I'll be back before you know it!\"\n\nYou chuckle, and say, \"I'm sure you will.\" Then, you look around the store, trying to figure out how the hell you're gonna do this. Sighing, you just decide to head behind the counter and take a seat. When it's late, you head to the backroom and collapse into a bed there, falling asleep before you know it.\n\nThe next day, you get up, head to the counter, and wait. This time, a customer actually comes in. He looks around, asking about lantern oil, and you oblige, showing him the way to it. He thanks you profusely, saying something about how he needed it because his pet rat accidentally spilled all of his yesterday. You listen intently, sort of bored, but it pays off. The customer leaves, oil in hand, with a smile on his face.\n\nYou continue on like that for days. People come in, you give them good service and listen to them patiently when they explain why they need this or that. They all leave with smiles on their faces. You're not sure why, as all you're doing is staying silent while they ramble, but they enjoy it. The customers increase their traffic, probably due to recommendations from friends, and you find that the store is now getting a more healthy amount of customers than what the last owner was speaking of.\n\nThese days spread to weeks, then months. You still have yet to hear back from the owner, but you assume he's having fun. When the months spread to years, you assume he might have passed away, or decided not to head back after all. Whatever reason, you never see him again, and consider the store under your sole ownership now.\n\nIt's a nice life to live. Soon, you've integrated into the city so well, that \"Louie's Supplies\" is a name long forgotten; after all, now it's \"Kit's General Store\". You're known for serving customers with a smile on your face and a positive attitude. Strange how things end up.\n\nYou pass away in your sleep silently a few decades later, and the whole city mourns your death... For a few days, that is. Soon enough, the other store that the shopkeeper had mentioned long ago moves in to fill the gap you left, and eventually, even \"Kit's General Store\" is forgotten. Still, at least you were able to enjoy your last years on the world in peace.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "I will not leave my home. If the king sends men here, I'll send them back.", "result": "You scoff at the idea of leaving your home. The king says he'll send men your way if you don't respond? Oh, please. You can fend off any pansies he sends your way. Though you're getting up there in years, you can still fight with the strength of a hundred soldiers.\n\nWith that, you resolve to continue on as you've been doing. For the next few days, you don't do much; you get your bread and wine from Bertrand, drink until you black out, then do it again. It continues this way until, finally, a week has passed since the letter.\n\nYou've almost forgotten about it when Bertrand enters your room at around midday. He's already brought you your bread and wine, so you're not sure why he'd come here. His expression is a mask of worry and fear. \"Explain yourself,\" you say, and Bertrand nods with a gulp.\n\n\"The king has sent his men here, sir. They're here to take you away to Castle Oren.\" Bertrand is looking very afraid.\n\n\"Send them away.\"\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\"I said send them away. I don't wish to entertain them.\"\n\n\"But sir...\"", "action_results": [{"action": "I'm not having this. Bertrand should get them out of here.", "result": "This is getting irritating. You told Bertrand to turn anyone away, and the fact that he's ignoring your orders is starting to piss you off a bit. \"Go on, Bertrand. Send them away, and don't come back until tomorrow. I don't wish to hear about fools coming to my door.\"\n\n\nBertrand releases a sigh, but nods. \"Very well sir. I'll go tell them they're not wanted here.\" With those words, Bertrand turns and leaves the room. You expect him to come rushing back a few minutes later, but he doesn't. It seems the king's men listened to his demands.\n\n\nHours pass until finally, the sun has set and the sky is dark. You're about to head to bed, when you hear a faint voice calling your name out. It doesn't sound like it's someone in trouble, so it's probably nothing.\n\n\nYou lay down, and close your eyes...\n\n\n\"Kit...\"\n\n\nYou keep your eyes clenched tight...\n\n\n\"Come to me...\"\n\n\nYou grind your teeth together...\n\n\n\"I need to see you...\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Damn it all... I'll go investigate, and see who the hell it is.", "result": "With a groan, you slip out of your velvet sheets and head to the door. For a moment, you reconsider your choice, but turn the knob and step into the dark hallway. The only light comes from the moon leaking in through closed windows, and you look around, listening for the voice.\n\n\n\"Kit...\"\n\n\nYou catch a glimpse of a white figure down the hall, but it disappears before you can get a good look. Picking up the pace, you follow after it. The voice continues to call out to you, growing louder as you descend deeper into your manor.\n\n\n\"I need to see you, Kit...\"\n\n\nYou continue to follow the voice until you reach the manor's wine cellar. When you open the door, you're greeted by a woman in white. Her brown hair falls past her shoulders and brushes against her hips. Her white dress flows freely, and around her neck she wears a holy symbol of Judeau, God of Life. Her skin is deathly pale and her green eyes bear holes into your own grey orbs. You know that face anywhere. It hasn't aged a day in twenty years.\n\n\n\"Lilith...\"\n\n\nFor a moment fear grips you. You saw her die, that poison dart pierced her throat and she was done for. She was so out of breath she couldn't speak her incantations and heal herself. Yet still, she's standing here before you now, a specter of the past. \"I thought you died,\" you say because you still can't believe she's here.\n\n\nA smile graces her lips. \"I did.\"\n\n\n\"You... You're dead. You're not real. I'm losing my mind...\"\n\n\n\"I'm very real, Kit. Myself and the others have been watching over you, ever since that day. We thought you could pull yourself out of this...\" She shakes her head, disapprovingly. \"We thought you were better than this, Kit.\"\n\n\nDespite the circumstances, you let out a dark chuckle. God, you need a drink. \"Better than what? I didn't have much incentive to live after you all died. I didn't even want to go on that fucking adventure. It was Grace who roped us all into it.\"\n\n\n\"Yet you still went. Why was that?\"\n\n\nGreat, now she's interrogating you. You really want that drink... \"She was... You were all my friends. I wanted to...\"\n\n\n\"Wanted to what, Kit?\"\n\n\n\"I wanted to... DAMMIT!\" You can't help it. You head to one of the shelved bottles, reaching for it.\n\n\n\"Don't.\"\n\n\nDespite Lilith's warning, you grab hold of it, when a sudden burst of wind knocks you back. You crash against another shelf of wine bottles, shattering them from the sheer force of your impact. \"W-what the Hell was that for!?\"\n\n\n\"I don't want to talk to some drunkard, Kit. I want to talk to you.\"\n\n\nYour anger flares. \"Go back to whatever fuckin' afterlife you crawled out of! I don't want whatever you're selling me!\" You pull yourself up and walk to the door.\n\n\n\"Kit. Listen to me.\"\n\n\nYou place a hand on the doorknob...", "action_results": [{"action": "... And release it with a sigh, staying in the room.", "result": "Despite your anger, you can't leave. This is your first time talking with one of your old friends in two decades. You need this. So, you release your grip on the doorknob and turn to Lilith. Although, just because you're staying doesn't mean you have to be nice about it. \"What the hell is it, Lilith? I'm fucking tired.\"\n\n\nThe smile makes its way onto her face again. \"Thank you for staying.\"\n\n\n\"Don't got all night here...\"\n\n\nShe sighs. \"Right... I'm here to show you why you shouldn't try to stay and rot in your home.\"\n\n\n\"Really? Because it's been working out just fine so far.\"\n\n\n\"You'll see.\" Lilith snaps her fingers. A blinding light fills the room, reflecting off the glass wine bottles. Your vision goes white and you stick your hands up to block the light... Then, you're gone.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "Once upon a time you were called the greatest hero to ever live.\n\n\nYou must have been twenty at the time. Fresh faced, spunky as all hell, and too optimistic for your own good. With book of spells in hand, you set out with your childhood friends to save the world from an evil wizard (damn, you can't even remember his name) bent on enslaving mankind. When you left home, there were five of you: a fighter, a rogue, a bard, a healer, and yourself, a mage.\n\n\nThe six month long journey to the wizard's tower was filled with happy times, light hearted misadventures as you all prepared for fortune and glory. When you reached the tower, the mood quickly changed. Your bard fell to a herd of undead that ambushed you at the entrance. The healer took a poison dart to the throat on the fourth floor while the rogue was burned to ash by a pyromancer on the seventeenth floor. Yourself and the fighter were all that remained when you reached the twentieth and final floor, and he was cut down halfway through the fight with the wizard. When the dust cleared and all was quiet, you were the last one standing.\n\n\nYou returned home a year after you had left it. The villagers showered you in praise for killing the wizard, and word reached the nobles in the cities far away that the evil wizard had been defeated. They held a feast in your honor, they showered you in gold, they gave you a title and a manor and an army of servants. Men wanted you, women wanted to be you. But it was all hollow.\n\n\nYou played along for the first ten years, finding little joy in the newfound fortune and glory you had longed for. It wasn't until the writers and artists began to touch your quest that you finally shut yourself in. It started innocently enough, sanitized children's tales about the exploits of you and your allies, but soon it became epic poems and romanticized paintings. One by one, your friends disappeared from the fictionalized tales of your quest, until it was just you, the mage in flowing robes, slaying the vile wizard with your vast arcane knowledge.\n\n\nThat was when you finally isolated yourself, to hide from the common folk and their damning praise, from the artists and their bastardized accounts. For five years you wandered the roads of the Oren Kingdom, not staying in one place for too long, hoping that eventually you'd forget who you were. It didn't work. Just as luck would have it, you were recognized one day, and soon people were traveling the all the highways and country roads of the Kingdom. All in the hopes of meeting you, the legendary hero.\n\n\nIn these last five years, you've stayed locked up in an old cabin deep in the woods. You survive off of game in the woods for food, and use an old stream for water. At night you cast the most harmful spells you can, hoping that one will finally backfire and put you out of your misery. So far, none have.\n\n\nIt's a fitting end for the woman regarded as the greatest hero to ever live: locking herself away in a ratty old cabin, hunting and casting and waiting for the day she finally dies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "And just like that you're back to the cellar.\n\nYou're on your hands and knees, taking in sharp breaths, before you look back up at Lillith's ghostly figure. \"W-what... What was that?\"\n\n\"Have you ever considered that it could have been any one of us to see the quest through to the end? Do you think it wouldn't weigh on our souls watching our only surviving friend destroy themselves? Grace chose to fill the void by isolating herself from society. I cut the vision off before you could watch her go mad from the isolation and hang herself.\"\n\n\"So that's what would have happened... What about Henry and Thomas?\"\n\n\"Them? Henry would have filled the void with alcohol and women until he died from the diseases he caught. Thomas would have filled the void by stealing everything from everyone until he was finally caught and hung for his crimes.\"\n\n\"What about you?\" you ask after a moment.\n\n\"Myself? I would have looked for every way to bring you four back. It would have led me down a dark path. You don't want to see how that would have turned out.\"\n\nThere's a moment of silence as you contemplate what you just saw. Your... Friend, Grace, and the path she would have gone down if it was you who died that day. Lillith filled you in on what the others would have done.\n\nThat's when you realize something: they're hurting, watching you from the afterlife. Hurting enough that they sent Lillith down to try to get you to turn your life around. The question remains of what you'll do with this information.", "action_results": [{"action": "I need to do something different with my life.", "result": "As you mull it over, a tear escapes your eye. Watching what you watched, hearing what you heard... It breaks you. Your friends are watching you, suffering as they watch you throw your life away. If the situations were different, you know you'd feel the same.\n\nThe tears flow freely now. Still on your knees, you turn to Lilith and mumble, \"You're right.\"\n\nA small smile graces her lips. \"I know that.\"\n\nDespite yourself, you laugh. \"Right. Of course you would.\" You stand up. For the first time in two decades, it feels like a weight has been lifted off of your shoulders. You feel liberated... But with that liberation, you also feel uncertainty. \"What should I do?\"\n\n\"Whatever you wish, Kit.\" Lilith's smile fades. \"But now, my work here is done. I must go.\"\n\nYou were expecting that. A sigh escapes your lips. \"I figured as much. Goodbye, Lilith. Send the others my regards.\"\n\n\"I will.\"\n\nWith those two words, she disappears. You smile faintly, before ascending the stairs and returning to your room. Climbing under the velvet sheets, you close your eyes, and fall into your first dreamless sleep in years.\n\nThe next day, you write up a letter in response to the king's call to arms. When Bertrand enters the room with today's shipment of bread and wine, you raise a hand to stop him from putting it down. \"I've no need for that, Bertrand. Here.\" You hand him the letter. \"See that the king receives this letter.\"\n\nBertrand looks shocked. He places the letter on the tray and leaves the room with a nod to you. You sigh, then sit back down, contemplating the future.\n\nIt's a new day and the start of a new way of life for you.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I won't change because the dead wish it.", "result": "You almost laugh. She wants you to bow to their wills and change yourself, for what? For their sake? They're dead. You're still standing. You heard Lilith out, but that doesn't mean you agree with her. You chose this path, and if it was one of the others they would have chosen their paths as well. To hell with what she thinks of your choices.\n\n\n\"Leave me, Lilith,\" you say.\n\n\nLilith's ghostly eyes widen in shock. \"What?\"\n\n\n\"Leave me. I don't want to hear this. I made my choices, I got myself into this situation. If you came here thinking you could change me, then you're wasting your time.\"\n\n\nHer eyes harden as she stares at you. \"I thought you were better than this, Kit.\"\n\n\nYou don't deign her with a response, or at least not one she can hear. Despite yourself, you find yourself muttering, \"so did I\" under your breath as you turn your back on her. A moment passes, and when you turn to see if she's still there, you find she's gone. A sigh escapes your lips as you walk to the door and ascend the stairs, back up to your room. Once there, you collapse into bed and fall into a fitful sleep.\n\n\nIn the morning Bertrand comes with your bread and wine. You take it, send him out of the room, and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking as you always have. The next day, Bertrand comes in the morning with the bread and wine, which you take and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking. It continues on for weeks without interruption, until one day, something changes.\n\n\nYou wake in the early morning hours to a yell. Your head is pounding and your stomach is killing you, but you push through and get out of bed. Stumbling out of your room, you see a man slumped against the wall: Bertrand. \"Bertrand!\" you shout, running to him. As you get closer, however, you notice the blood trailing down his neck. It flows freely from a fierce red slash across his throat. Bertrand is dead.\n\n\nYou look around, wondering who in the hell did this to your servant, when you feel a sharp pain in your arm. Looking, you find that a crossbow bolt has embedded itself into your bicep. \"W-what the hell!?\" you choke out. Another bolt flies true, hitting your thigh and causing you to fall to a kneel. Footsteps approach from your left, and you turn your head to look. What you see is a man, dressed in black. He approaches you, pulling out a dagger.\n\n\n\"Who are you?\" you ask.\n\n\nHe simply sticks the dagger to your throat and cuts. As you fall to the ground, vision darkening and lungs filling with blood, he speaks: \"The king sends his regards.\"\n\n\nThen, all is silent.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "... And swing the door open in a huff, leaving the room.", "result": "You reach for the door and open it. Lilith calls out to you, anger evident in her voice as she says, \"I thought you were better than this, Kit!\"\n\n\nYou don't deign her with a response, or at least not one she can hear. Despite yourself, you find yourself muttering, \"so did I\" under your breath. A moment passes, and when you turn to see if she's still there, you find she's gone. A sigh escapes your lips as you walk to the door and ascend the stairs, back up to your room. Once there, you collapse into bed and fall into a fitful sleep.\n\n\nIn the morning Bertrand comes with your bread and wine. You take it, send him out of the room, and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking as you always have. The next day, Bertrand comes in the morning with the bread and wine, which you take and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking. It continues on for weeks without interruption, until one day, something changes.\n\n\nYou wake in the early morning hours to a yell. Your head is pounding and your stomach is killing you, but you push through and get out of bed. Stumbling out of your room, you see a man slumped against the wall: Bertrand. \"Bertrand!\" you shout, running to him. As you get closer, however, you notice the blood trailing down his neck. It flows freely from a fierce red slash across his throat. Bertrand is dead.\n\n\nYou look around, wondering who in the hell did this to your servant, when you feel a sharp pain in your arm. Looking, you find that a crossbow bolt has embedded itself into your bicep. \"W-what the hell!?\" you choke out. Another bolt flies true, hitting your thigh and causing you to fall to a kneel. Footsteps approach from your left, and you turn your head to look. What you see is a man, dressed in black. He approaches you, pulling out a dagger.\n\n\n\"Who are you?\" you ask.\n\n\nHe simply sticks the dagger to your throat and cuts. As you fall to the ground, vision darkening and lungs filling with blood, he speaks: \"The king sends his regards.\"\n\n\nThen, all is silent.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Bah, I don't have time for this. I'm going to sleep.", "result": "You shake your head. You must be going mad to be hearing voices. It would be best not to look into it, for your own sanity if nothing else. You clench your eyes shut and throw a pillow over your head to block the voices out. Within minutes, you manage to doze off, falling into a fitful sleep full of nightmares.\n\nIn the morning, you begin to hear the voice again. It beckons for you to come to it, but you don't give in. You spend the day as you normally do, drinking wine and eating bread and passing out late into the night... But the voice does not stop.\n\nThis cycle continues for days, then weeks. You try to block the voice out but it keeps coming, and soon, it is joined by even more. Begging for you to come see them. When you resist, the voices continue, increasing in volume and barely contained rage.\n\nOne night you wake up in a cold sweat, greeted by the screeches of these specters haunting you. You're not sure how much more of this you can take.", "action_results": [{"action": "I need to escape, permanently. I reach for the dagger on my bedside.", "result": "You can't take it anymore, no matter how hard you try. You reach for the dagger on your bedside, kept there for emergencies that never came. Now, it'll finally see some use. Ripping open your nightshirt's sleeves, you press the dagger against your wrist. The voices cry out for you not to do it, but you don't listen.\n\nYou slash downward against your wrist, splitting your veins and an artery. Blood leaks freely from the wound. Then, you do the same with the second wrist, beginning to feel light-headed. The voices continue to screech horrifically. It hurts your head to listen to, and combined with the blood loss makes your dizziness worse.\n\n\"You won't take me, you bastards!\" you scream out at them, voice hoarse. With what little strength you have left, you pull your head back with one hand. With the other hand, you place the dagger against your throat and take a deep breath. Then, you slash. Darkness overtakes you.\n\nFinally, there is silence.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "No. I won't take the easy way out. I'll hold out, as long as it takes.", "result": "You shout, \"Leave me alone!\" The voices continue despite your protests, and you find yourself unsure if you truly can continue like this... The dagger is awfully tempting...\n\nNo. You won't bow to their whims. Gritting your teeth, you hop out of bed and begin to yell as loud as you can, \"LEAVE ME! I WON'T GIVE INTO THE LIKES OF YOU!\" Still, the voices do not stop their incessant screeching. So, you scream back louder.\n\nYou're not sure how long the back and forth screaming goes on for. All you know is that before long, you stop yelling and begin to laugh maniacally. The voices quiet this way, but you're not sure for how long. Have you gone mad? Or is this working? Then again, who's to say it isn't both?", "action_results": [{"action": "I keep laughing! This is working! I can feel myself slipping away, away from them and all my problems!", "result": "It's working! The voices are getting quieter! You laugh, and laugh, and laugh away! You continue laughing until you can hear nothing but the laughter! Then you laugh even more! It's all you need! Now there is nothing in the world except you, and your laughter!\n\nBertrand finds you the next morning, curled up in a fetal position and laughing. Tears stream from your eyes, and every now and again you let out a wheeze from lack of breath. He stares at you, horrified, before pulling you up and carrying you out. He sends for a sage from the next town over to look into your sudden onset of uncontrollable laughter.\n\nWhen the sage arrives at midday, he takes one look at the giggling wreck that you are and shakes his head. Still, he sets to work trying to get you to respond. You simply laugh at him. After an hour, he admits defeat. \"He's gone mad,\" the sage says. \"There's nothing I can do.\"\n\nHe binds you with rope and drags you into his wagon, taking you into the town. There, he admits you into an asylum, while you continue to chuckle without end. The staff beats you in an attempt to get you to stop; it does not work. Eventually, they cut out your tongue, but you let out breathless wheezes that sound like laughter nonetheless.\n\nFinally, one morning, a worker at the asylum grows irritated with your laughing. In the middle of the night, he enters your room and slits your throat. In his dreams, he can hear you laughing mad, without end...\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "What am I doing? I get a grip on myself and stop, before I slip into a pit I cannot pull myself out of.", "result": "You snap yourself back to reality, before you can lose yourself to the madness. Truly, you must be losing your mind. No sane man would break into a fit of laughter like you did, let alone hear voices calling to him in the dead of night. Your mind reaches for answers as to what the hell is going on, but it is met by silence.\n\nThere is something hanging over you, however. Some sort of entity guiding your actions, predetermining your paths and setting you on one or the other. You can feel the mouse hovering over you, watching, waiting for that next blue hyperlink to show up. I wonder if they're reading this. And if they are, I wonder what their thoughts are on what I'm writing. I'm going on a tangent. You probably think I'm just trying to cash in on the success some people had in 'connecting' with the reader in their own stories, don't you? The truth is, I don't know why this page turned out like it did.\n\nDo you think the people reading this will ever find this path? Maybe they're skimming over all these words, trying to find an end game link. Maybe they're completionists and are trying to find every ending. The odds of this being the first path that a player finds is slim. There's other, more exciting paths out there, aren't there? So many different paths this story could have taken and they choose the stay at home and go nuts path first? I doubt it.\n\nI don't know you, reader. I only know what I've written. I'm sure right now you're rolling your eyes, thinking that I'm just some pretentious teenager writing whatever dribble comes to mind. If I wrote whatever came to mind and didn't carefully reread and edit, this whole page would be riddle with typos and keyboard mashing. You don't know me in the same way I don't know you.\n\nBut this isn't about me or you or this website. This is about Kit and his descent into madness that you could have prevented. He's probably scared. I could just as easily write around this, pretend that this whole tirade didn't even happen. He can go back to being confused and going mad and trying to block out the voices. I think it's your choice, reader.\n\nJust remember: every choice you make I wrote out for you. You have no control, but I guess that's just the edgelord in me getting out. Go on. Make a choice. Choose how this path ends.", "action_results": [{"action": "I want to pretend this didn't happen. Kit's gone insane, there's no way out but death.", "result": "Alright then, reader. Kit can't take it anymore. He kills himself. The end. I didn't want to write this. You're boring for picking this. Fuck you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back and make the right choice for me.", "result": "Are you gonna make the right choice?", "action_results": [{"action": "I want to pretend this didn't happen. Kit realizes that the voices are trying to help him and changes.", "result": "Fine then, reader. Kit realizes the voices are his friends and changes his ways. He lives happily ever after. The end. Go fuck yourself.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back and make the right choice for me.", "result": "Just give in and make the right choice. No other option.", "action_results": [{"action": "But this did happen. I want Kit to know.", "result": "Stubborn, aren't you? Took you long enough to make the right choice. Oh well, it doesn't matter. The point is you're here now, and I'm about to round out this ludicrous fourth wall break path.\n\nHey Kit.\n\nYou look around. This voice is... Different. It doesn't sound like anyone you know. \"W-who are you?\"\n\nI'm the man who created you.\n\nThis causes you to jerk back. \"What? You can't be! You're lying! Just leave me alone!\"\n\nI'm feeding you these words. This isn't a conversation between two people. This is me trying out an artistic experiment. People are going to rate me a 1 if they find this wannabe avant-garde bullshit path.\n\n\"You can't be telling the truth! I'm real! I'm as real as any man!\" He can't be telling the truth. You're a real person. This is getting to you too much.\n\nI'm not sure why you're in denial, Kit. In fact, I'm not sure why I'm writing you as in denial of this. I can make you do anything. I can make you dance if I want. Though I suppose that would fit better in a visual medium.\n\nAs if on command, you begin to hop up and down and wiggle around. It's a very entertaining sight, and the writer has stopped bothering with italicizing your actions. Because you know the truth, Kit. I created you. I can end you. I can take things back. Have you gone insane? That's for me and the reader to decide.\n\n\"What did you do to me?\"\n\nI got a prompt and I figured I could take this path in an interesting way. I was having trouble with this specific part of it. I remembered a comic I read once, Grant Morrison's Animal Man. It ended in a similar manner to this path: author and creation meeting each other. It touched me in a way I don't think any other story has, yet.\n\n\"You created me?\"\n\nYeah, Kit. You're a figment of my imagination. If I want, I can hit delete on this story right now and you'd be gone forever. Just a shadow of what could have been in my mind. I've come close to wiping this story a few times. I wasn't sure I could ever complete it. I'm not sure if I ever wanted to. Writing this story has taught me a lot and I feel like once I finish it, I won't be learning anymore.\n\n\"Everything that happened to me... You did that?\"\n\nYes, Kit. Your friends, they're not real. They're playthings. I've written a handful of lines for each of them. The only one that got any semblance of characterization was Lilith, the priest girl. Did you know that I went into this story without a name for any of them? I went into this story without a name for you, too. You were going to be Victor, once.\n\n\"What are you saying? Can't you turn everything back?\"\n\nSure I can Kit, but it would be hollow. I'd go back to writing a story instead of rambling on incoherently, and it would end right as it got to the good part. That's how this entire story has gone; I have an idea, I write a few pages for it, I get bored, then I cut it off before it branches out too much. There's so many things in here that could make a full game, yet I only dedicate a handful of pages to those stories.\n\n\"Why can't you just stop that, then? Make everything as long as it needs to? Why couldn't you make a story about myself and my friends, let us choose our fates, let the reader choose our fates?\"\n\nBecause that wasn't the story I wanted to tell. I wanted to be \"edgy\". I wanted to be \"realistic\". Cursing, and drinking, and violence, and a broken protagonist. You were never a hero, Kit. In fact, I could say that you killed countless men and women, and no one would bat an eye. They'd want to play as you more, if anything. The people here are drawn to villains.\n\n\"What the hell do you want from me?\"\n\nMe? I don't know. I'm writing this because I'm bored. Later I'm probably going to eat breakfast and pass out. Maybe watch a movie. Go for a walk. Something. But right now, it's me, and you, and the reader. I haven't forgotten you, reader. Why don't you exercise your \"free will\" and decide how this story ends for me, huh?", "action_results": [{"action": "Give Kit his friends back.", "result": "Okay, reader. I'll give Kit a happy ending. I'll take away everything. Everything is back to normal now. Maybe someday I'll write a prequel. You might see me again there, watching, waiting, laughing at you and your \"free will\". You don't make the choices. I do.\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\nThe light of the sun beats down upon your face through your window. Groggily, you push yourself up and scratch your head. Working in the fields all day has been killing your back lately, but you'd do anything for mother after father died. As you're pondering your predicament, you feel a splash of water hit you in the head from the window. A shout of shock escapes your lips.\n\nYou hear laughter from outside. \"That wake you up, Kit?\" a girl chuckles. Torn between amusement and anger, you get up and jump through the window. Grace sits there, laughing at your soaked form, while you glare angrily at her.\n\n\"The hell was that for? I was gonna wake up eventually!\" you grunt, annoyed.\n\n\"Sure you were! Come on farmboy, it's your day off. Let's go meet with the others!\" She takes your hand without another word, and you find your anger slipping away as she guides you to your friends. Life is good, and you've got all of it ahead of you. Nothing can stop you.\n\nBut time will tell if you can put an end to the evil on the rise...\n\nTHE BEGINNING", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Fuck you. I don't have to do this. I can close this game right now if I want. I don't even have to click this choice. You can't make me do anything.", "result": "If you really felt that way, you wouldn't have clicked the choice.\n\nNow take your end game link and get out of here.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "But this did happen. I want Kit to know.", "result": "I see you made the right choice after only one attempt. Oh well, it doesn't matter. The point is you're here now, and I'm about to round out this ludicrous fourth wall break path.\n\nHey Kit.\n\nYou look around. This voice is... Different. It doesn't sound like anyone you know. \"W-who are you?\"\n\nI'm the man who created you.\n\nThis causes you to jerk back. \"What? You can't be! You're lying! Just leave me alone!\"\n\nI'm feeding you these words. This isn't a conversation between two people. This is me trying out an artistic experiment. People are going to rate me a 1 if they find this wannabe avant-garde bullshit path.\n\n\"You can't be telling the truth! I'm real! I'm as real as any man!\" He can't be telling the truth. You're a real person. This is getting to you too much.\n\nI'm not sure why you're in denial, Kit. In fact, I'm not sure why I'm writing you as in denial of this. I can make you do anything. I can make you dance if I want. Though I suppose that would fit better in a visual medium.\n\nAs if on command, you begin to hop up and down and wiggle around. It's a very entertaining sight, and the writer has stopped bothering with italicizing your actions. Because you know the truth, Kit. I created you. I can end you. I can take things back. Have you gone insane? That's for me and the reader to decide.\n\n\"What did you do to me?\"\n\nI got a prompt and I figured I could take this path in an interesting way. I was having trouble with this specific part of it. I remembered a comic I read once, Grant Morrison's Animal Man. It ended in a similar manner to this path: author and creation meeting each other. It touched me in a way I don't think any other story has, yet.\n\n\"You created me?\"\n\nYeah, Kit. You're a figment of my imagination. If I want, I can hit delete on this story right now and you'd be gone forever. Just a shadow of what could have been in my mind. I've come close to wiping this story a few times. I wasn't sure I could ever complete it. I'm not sure if I ever wanted to. Writing this story has taught me a lot and I feel like once I finish it, I won't be learning anymore.\n\n\"Everything that happened to me... You did that?\"\n\nYes, Kit. Your friends, they're not real. They're playthings. I've written a handful of lines for each of them. The only one that got any semblance of characterization was Lilith, the priest girl. Did you know that I went into this story without a name for any of them? I went into this story without a name for you, too. You were going to be Victor, once.\n\n\"What are you saying? Can't you turn everything back?\"\n\nSure I can Kit, but it would be hollow. I'd go back to writing a story instead of rambling on incoherently, and it would end right as it got to the good part. That's how this entire story has gone; I have an idea, I write a few pages for it, I get bored, then I cut it off before it branches out too much. There's so many things in here that could make a full game, yet I only dedicate a handful of pages to those stories.\n\n\"Why can't you just stop that, then? Make everything as long as it needs to? Why couldn't you make a story about myself and my friends, let us choose our fates, let the reader choose our fates?\"\n\nBecause that wasn't the story I wanted to tell. I wanted to be \"edgy\". I wanted to be \"realistic\". Cursing, and drinking, and violence, and a broken protagonist. You were never a hero, Kit. In fact, I could say that you killed countless men and women, and no one would bat an eye. They'd want to play as you more, if anything. The people here are drawn to villains.\n\n\"What the hell do you want from me?\"\n\nMe? I don't know. I'm writing this because I'm bored. Later I'm probably going to eat breakfast and pass out. Maybe watch a movie. Go for a walk. Something. But right now, it's me, and you, and the reader. I haven't forgotten you, reader. Why don't you exercise your \"free will\" and decide how this story ends for me, huh?", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, null, {"action": "But this did happen. I want Kit to know.", "result": "So you picked this on your first try? Maybe you just used the actual go back button instead of the one I gave you on either of those two choices. Oh well, it doesn't matter. The point is you're here now, and I'm about to round out this ludicrous fourth wall break path.\n\nHey Kit.\n\nYou look around. This voice is... Different. It doesn't sound like anyone you know. \"W-who are you?\"\n\nI'm the man who created you.\n\nThis causes you to jerk back. \"What? You can't be! You're lying! Just leave me alone!\"\n\nI'm feeding you these words. This isn't a conversation between two people. This is me trying out an artistic experiment. People are going to rate me a 1 if they find this wannabe avant-garde bullshit path.\n\n\"You can't be telling the truth! I'm real! I'm as real as any man!\" He can't be telling the truth. You're a real person. This is getting to you too much.\n\nI'm not sure why you're in denial, Kit. In fact, I'm not sure why I'm writing you as in denial of this. I can make you do anything. I can make you dance if I want. Though I suppose that would fit better in a visual medium.\n\nAs if on command, you begin to hop up and down and wiggle around. It's a very entertaining sight, and the writer has stopped bothering with italicizing your actions. Because you know the truth, Kit. I created you. I can end you. I can take things back. Have you gone insane? That's for me and the reader to decide.\n\n\"What did you do to me?\"\n\nI got a prompt and I figured I could take this path in an interesting way. I was having trouble with this specific part of it. I remembered a comic I read once, Grant Morrison's Animal Man. It ended in a similar manner to this path: author and creation meeting each other. It touched me in a way I don't think any other story has, yet.\n\n\"You created me?\"\n\nYeah, Kit. You're a figment of my imagination. If I want, I can hit delete on this story right now and you'd be gone forever. Just a shadow of what could have been in my mind. I've come close to wiping this story a few times. I wasn't sure I could ever complete it. I'm not sure if I ever wanted to. Writing this story has taught me a lot and I feel like once I finish it, I won't be learning anymore.\n\n\"Everything that happened to me... You did that?\"\n\nYes, Kit. Your friends, they're not real. They're playthings. I've written a handful of lines for each of them. The only one that got any semblance of characterization was Lilith, the priest girl. Did you know that I went into this story without a name for any of them? I went into this story without a name for you, too. You were going to be Victor, once.\n\n\"What are you saying? Can't you turn everything back?\"\n\nSure I can Kit, but it would be hollow. I'd go back to writing a story instead of rambling on incoherently, and it would end right as it got to the good part. That's how this entire story has gone; I have an idea, I write a few pages for it, I get bored, then I cut it off before it branches out too much. There's so many things in here that could make a full game, yet I only dedicate a handful of pages to those stories.\n\n\"Why can't you just stop that, then? Make everything as long as it needs to? Why couldn't you make a story about myself and my friends, let us choose our fates, let the reader choose our fates?\"\n\nBecause that wasn't the story I wanted to tell. I wanted to be \"edgy\". I wanted to be \"realistic\". Cursing, and drinking, and violence, and a broken protagonist. You were never a hero, Kit. In fact, I could say that you killed countless men and women, and no one would bat an eye. They'd want to play as you more, if anything. The people here are drawn to villains.\n\n\"What the hell do you want from me?\"\n\nMe? I don't know. I'm writing this because I'm bored. Later I'm probably going to eat breakfast and pass out. Maybe watch a movie. Go for a walk. Something. But right now, it's me, and you, and the reader. I haven't forgotten you, reader. Why don't you exercise your \"free will\" and decide how this story ends for me, huh?", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Fine. If Bertrand is so hesitant, I'll do it myself.", "result": "\"Fine,\" you grunt. \"I'll do it myself.\" Of course Bertrand can't get them out of here. They're the king's men with an order to get you, not some con man looking to sell you cheap wares at an inflated price. He's never had to do this to someone who has good reason to come in, and it scares him. You understand, somewhat.\n\nFor the first time in ages, you leave the master bedroom and walk the halls of your manor, Bertrand following after you. It's been well kept by your servants, for the odd occasion that someone comes to visit. The fine paintings adorning the walls are flawless and their frames clean of dust, the walls are painted a regal blue, and lanterns hung on the ceiling keep the place well lit.\n\nYou walk out to the courtyard to greet the king's men. A lone tree sits in the center of the courtyard on a circular patch of grass, surrounded by a cobblestone path. A series of bushes encompass the manor itself, giving the entire courtyard a reserved, tidy appearance. The knights are sitting in wait and look up when you approach. One stands and walks over to you.\n\nHe removes his helmet, revealing a youthful yet stern face. His sandy blond hair is cut short, and his green eyes burn a hole into your own grey ones. He gives you a salute, then speaks, \"Good day, Sir Kit. I am Miller, of the Gold Hawk Knights. We've come here to take you with us to Castle Oren.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "I shake my head. \"Afraid I won't oblige your request. Now leave.\"", "result": "Miller scowls at your calm request for him to leave. \"I'm afraid I can't, Sir Kit. Please, come with us. I won't ask again.\" You can feel your anger flaring up, and for a moment you wish you had brought your sword to cut this bastard down.\n\n\"You listen to me, Miller,\" you growl, hissing his name out like it's an insult. \"I want to live in peace. You take your Gold Hawk Knights and get out of here. Leave me be.\"\n\nHe shakes his head. \"I was hoping it wouldn't come to this. Knights, apprehend Sir Kit.\" The two knights flanking Miller approach you, attempting to grab you. On instinct, you fight back, delivering a hook to one's face and causing him to stumble back towards Miller. The other quickly draws his sword and swings, but you duck under it and disarm him. With the longsword in hand, you quickly stab him in the chest.\n\nBlood pours out of his wound as you push him to the ground. You blink, suddenly realizing what you just did. Miller and the other knight look at you and their dying comrade in shock. Miller and his ally draw their own swords, pointing them at you. \"You're under arrest, murderer! Surrender or our blades will taste your blood!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "I didn't mean to do that... I can't believe... I surrender willingly. I deserve whatever fate awaits.", "result": "You're in as much shock as the two knights. Quickly, you drop the sword and raise your hands. Miller approaches you, rage written on his face, and hits you in the face with the pommel of his sword. Instantly, darkness takes you. The last thing you hear before you slip into unconsciousness is Miller telling his comrade, \"Tie him up and get him in the wagon. Take Edward's corpse.\"\n\nWhen you wake up, you're face down on a cold stone floor. Pushing yourself up, you look around and see Miller not far from you. Seperating the two of you is a row of iron bars. \"Miller,\" you say. \"What is the meaning of this?\"\n\nHe sighs, pulling up a wooden chair and sitting down. \"You should be thankful you're not on the chopping block. The king's respect for you is the only reason you're still alive. If you were any other man, your head would roll for killing a knight.\"\n\nYou don't respond. The weight of what you did hits you full force in that moment. Because of it, you're going to rot here.\n\n\"There will be no trial. If anything, you being in this cell is to protect you. The Gold Hawk Knights are furious.\" Miller stands, pushing the chair back. \"Farewell, Kit.\"\n\nMiller heads to the door and shuts it, leaving you to your isolation. It's the last time you ever see him.\n\nFor the next few years, your only human contact is when a guard comes in to deliver you some food. At first it's a nice break in the monotony of being alone in your cell, but soon it becomes part of the routine. Even when you try to strike up a conversation, the guard ignores you and just gives you your food. It's a lonely life.\n\nEventually, the meals decrease in frequency, until one day you realize that it's been a week since you had food. You begin to yell, hoping to grab a guard's attention and get some food, but no one comes. Another week passes and you find yourself barely clinging onto what little life you have. The lack of food has been effecting you greatly, and the only water you can get is from drops of rain that come through your little window.\n\nWhen three weeks pass, you finally die. A guard comes the next day to remove your corpse. He drops it into a wagon of similar corpses, where you're sent off to be incinerated. A criminal such as yourself doesn't deserve a proper burial anyhow.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I can't go down like this. I'll tell them to leave again, and if that doesn't work, I'll attack.", "result": "No. You can't let them take you like this. Standing there with bloody sword raised, you speak slowly, \"I don't want to have to kill you both. Leave now and never return.\" There's a tense moment for a while as you stare at the two of them and they stare back. They're too scared to make the first move, and you don't want to make it. The standoff lasts for a moment longer, then...\n\n\"Oh screw this!\" Miller's ally yells, before rushing at you with a shout of rage. He swings his sword, which you easily deflect, then duck down for a sweeping slash that cuts through his abdomen. Clutching his wound, he collapses to the ground, writhing and moaning in agony as he slowly bleeds out. Miller stays back, examining you.\n\n\"Your buddy won't die with that wound. It'll take a few days for him to bleed out all the way. Take him and go, if you know what's good for you,\" you say, giving Miller his last warning. Miller looks down at his companion, as though considering it. Then he shifts his gaze back to you, looking more furious than ever.\n\n\"I won't let you walk free you bastard.\" With those words, he advances towards you. The two of you clash blades for a while, and whenever one of you tries to go for an opening the other blocks or parries. You're not as good with longswords as Miller is, specializing more in greatswords and their overwhelming force, but you're too stubborn to let him beat you.\n\nIn the end, that stubbornness is what grants you victory. While Miller has been tiring, you've only been attacking more and more ferociously. Eventually, his defense slips, and you slide your blade right into his chest. His face morphs into a mask of pure shock as he drops his sword. He stares at you in fear, which quickly shifts to anger. He pushes himself forward, forcing the sword deeper into his body, while reaching out for your neck. His hands squeeze against your throat, at first tightly, then slowly weakening in strength until they fall limp.\n\nAs his eyes close, you pull the blade out of him and let his corpse fall to the floor. His ally is still on the ground begging for death. You grant him the pleasure, holding his head down and sliding the blade into the base of his skull. He twitches slightly, then goes limp. You stand and consider what you just did.\n\nYou could just as easily burn the bodies and head back inside, but there's no way the king would allow this. He could send more knights, perhaps far more than you could handle. On the other hand, there's the option to use this to spark a rebellion among the people. Though the king is far from tyrannical, there's enough dissent from the long-lasting war against the Empire of Kishak for the common people to attempt an uprising. With how much the people love you for your deeds, they'd join you in a rebellion in a heartbeat.", "action_results": [{"action": "I can't count on the goodwill I have built up. I'm going to just wait this out.", "result": "You can't be bothered to try something that stupid. The king has well trained knights and soldiers under his command; if you put together a rebellion, it would be destroyed as quickly as you build it up. Instead of deciding to go on a pointless endeavor such as that, you begin to gather the bodies up in a pile. You cover them in dried sticks and leaves, then start a fire. As soon as it's gotten large enough to engulf the bodies, you return into your home. The servants watch as you head to your room in mingled awe and terror, unsure of how to act around you. You head into your room, lay in bed and sleep the rest of the day away.\n\n\nIn the morning Bertrand comes with your bread and wine, looking a bit more cautious after what happened yesterday. You take it, send him out of the room, and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking as you always have. The next day, Bertrand comes in the morning with the bread and wine, which you take and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking. It continues on for weeks without interruption, until one day, something changes.\n\n\nYou wake in the early morning hours to a yell. Your head is pounding and your stomach is killing you, but you push through and get out of bed. Stumbling out of your room, you see a man slumped against the wall: Bertrand. \"Bertrand!\" you shout, running to him. As you get closer, however, you notice the blood trailing down his neck. It flows freely from a fierce red slash across his throat. Bertrand is dead.\n\n\nYou look around, wondering who in the hell did this to your servant, when you feel a sharp pain in your arm. Looking, you find that a crossbow bolt has embedded itself into your bicep. \"W-what the hell!?\" you choke out. Another bolt flies true, hitting your thigh and causing you to fall to a kneel. Footsteps approach from your left, and you turn your head to look. What you see is a man, dressed in black. He approaches you, pulling out a dagger.\n\n\n\"Who are you?\" you ask.\n\n\nHe simply sticks the dagger to your throat and cuts. As you fall to the ground, vision darkening and lungs filling with blood, he speaks: \"The king sends his regards.\"\n\n\nThen, all is silent.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Damn waiting in fear. I'll tear this kingdom down, and the people will help me do it.", "result": "You look at the corpses you just created and release a heaving sigh. There's not much else you can do now. The king will have your head for this either way, so you figure you might as well take more than a handful of knights down with you. This is the dumbest thing you've done in a while, and you've done a lot of dumb things in your life.\n\nYou load the corpses up into the carriage they came in, then hurry back into your house to retrieve your sword and get into some more fitting traveler's clothes. As you stride through the halls of your home, the servants watch you warily, as if fearing that they may meet your blade next. You ignore them, ascending the stairs to your master bedroom and begin loading up. Once you're all done, you flip your cloak over your shoulder and walk out the door. The nearest town, a large village by the name of Everseed, is about half an hour away by horseback.\n\nTaking a seat in the carriage, you kick the horses in gear and ride to the town. The ride down the country road is quiet and peaceful, the best that can be expected. You know that it will be the last time for a while you get to relax and unwind.\n\nWhen you arrive in town, you stop the carriage in the most active place in town; in this case, the market. The people watch you curiously as you step off the carriage and approach a fountain in the center of the market. There, you raise your voice and speak, \"Everyone! My name is Sir Kit of Droburg, the man who slayed the vile wizard that plagued our lands twenty years ago!\" This gets all eyes on you as you approach the back of the cart again.\n\n\"And these,\" you pull the cover of the cart off, revealing the three dead knights to the people. They gasp in shock, some moving to weapons in case they need to attack you. \"These are three knights that the king sent to kill me. The lengths this man has gone to, trying to kill a hero such as myself. What has our kingdom come to?\" You're bending the truth, a lot, but these people are eating it up. The villagers that went for weapons are looking furious, while the others left unarmed grab for makeshift weapons as well.\n\n\"That bastard king! He's been taxing us so hard we barely have enough to pay for food!\" one villager pipes up from the crowd.\n\n\"He drafted my son into the war and he died! My boy was only 15!\" a woman cries out.\n\n\"He's been doin' nothin' but tearin' us down and buildin' himself up!\" a farmer yells from the back.\n\n\"And now, my friends, he's trying to kill the last true hero in this kingdom. A man like this must be stopped, once and for all. For the true Kingdom of Oren, we must eliminate this tyrant!\" you shout, and the crowd answers with cheers and battle cries. Now, you have an army. You're not sure how this will end, but wherever it leads, the kingdom will be changed forever...\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Considering it, I sigh and nod. \"Fine. I'll go with you to Castle Oren.\"", "result": "Miller smiles at you, nodding at your answer. \"I'm glad to hear it, sir. Go, gather your things and we'll head straight for Castle Oren.\" You nod at his request, quickly heading back inside and packing what you need. You make sure to grab your sword as well, as you know you'll need it.\n\nWhen you exit the manor, you and the three Gold Hawk Knights enter their wagon and begin the ride to Castle Oren. You end up having to stop for the night, but in the morning you continue on to finish the last stretch. You arrive at Castle Oren around lunch time. The castle is large and imposing, made of stone that has gathered a fair bit of moss over the years. It was built a thousand years before your time, and still stands after all this time with only minor renovations to keep it up. A town surrounds the castle, full of shops and inns and homes and other assorted buildings. People mill about, paying you no mind as the wagon rolls up to the castle gates.\n\nThe guards there stand at attention, waiting for you to make a move. Miller nods to them, and they move to open up the gates. The wagon rides into the castle ground proper. Inside the castle grounds, the knights park their wagon and you all hop off. Miller stands beside you. \"When can I see the King?\" you ask.\n\n\"Come along, I'll take you to him.\" Miller walks away. You follow closely behind, examining the castle grounds. The courtyard leading into the castle is home to many trees and flowers, a few of which you've never even seen. The King's gardeners must take their work very seriously.\n\nYou head into the castle proper, in an entrance hall that doubles as a throne room. The King is nowhere in sight, and Miller continues on past the throne and to a door not far from it. As you step into the room, you see a man in fine clothing sitting at a desk. The desk houses a golden crown. The King is around his mid thirties, though the wrinkles in his face and the gray streaking his hair indicates a man at least a decade older.\n\n\"Your highness. Sir Kit has arrived,\" Miller says. The King looks up from his writing at you, and gives a faint smile. He waves Miller off, and the young knight departs from the room.\n\n\"Sir Kit. It is an honor to finally meet you.\" The King stands from the desk and approaches you. He's only a bit shorter than you, impressive considering your bulky stature, though his posture and build indicates he's never been a fight before. He sticks out a hand for you to shake, which you do.\n\n\"The honor is all mine, your highness,\" you say, though rather half-heartedly.\n\nThe King laughs. \"Let's skip the formalities. Call me Walter. We're not here to discuss something officially.\" His face darkens. \"I called you here because I need someone to weaken the Kishak Empire, so that my army can strike the final blow against them.\"\n\n\"I see.\"\n\n\"I need someone who doesn't mind getting their hands dirty, Sir Kit. I need a warrior such as you. I take it whatever you face on this mission will be enough for you to handle, and I'll be sending you backup anyhow.\"\n\n\"What's this mission you're sending me on?\"\n\n\"My spies in Kishak have uncovered the location of the Empire's supply cache: in the heart of their capital city. If you can destroy the supply cache, there goes all of the Kishak army's food, weapons, and gunpowder. They'd be running on what they have left, and soon enough that would run out and my men would be able to drive them back.\"\n\n\"... This sounds like a suicide mission.\"\n\nThe King nods slowly. \"Perhaps. But if you manage to see this mission through, the war will be won by next year. Would you not want to see an end to this war that has claimed so many lives? An end to a war your grandfathers would have fought in, and your grandchildren will fight in if it doesn't end?\"\n\nYou shake your head, chuckling. \"You're wrong there. My grandfathers were simple farmers, and I don't have children. This war means nothing to me.\"\n\n\"Maybe it doesn't. But think of the millions of lives that have been lost to it, and the millions of lives you will save by ending it.\"\n\nYou sigh. At the very least, this is something to do.\n\n\"Fine. Let's get prepped for this suicide mission.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "You spend the rest of the day in the castle, resting up and mentally preparing yourself for your mission. The King's servants bring you whatever you wish, and in this case, it's more alcohol so you can psych yourself up. Liquid courage and all that. By nightfall, you're as drunk as can be, staring silently at a wall as you usually do.\n\"Stop doing this.\"\n\"Well what do you want me to do?\" you mumble, replying to no one.\n\"Anything else.\"\nA chuckle escapes your lips. \"Really? I guess you'd prefer me going on a drunken rampage and slaughtering all the guards.\"\n\"That's not what I meant, Kit.\"\n\"Then what did you mean?\"\n\"I meant you need to stop drinking. It's not doing you any good.\"\n\"Of course it's not doing me any good if I'm having a conversation with myself.\"\n\"You know who I am.\"\n\"Quit lying. You're just a figment of my imagination I start hearing when I get too wasted.\"\n\"Please, Kit. For me.\"\n\"Buzz off.\" You throw the empty bottle of wine in your hand at the wall, then crawl into bed. You have a long day ahead of you tomorrow, and you need your sleep.\n\nIn the morning, you're woken up by a knock on your door. You get up, groaning slightly, and head for it. When you open it, Miller stands before you. \"The King sent me to wake you. We're leaving today.\"\n\n\"We?\" you ask.\n\n\"He asked me to accompany you, along with a mage in our military. A small enough team to get behind Kishak lines unnoticed, and hopefully enough to provide backup should you need it.\"\n\nYou nod, heading to the dresser to grab some clothes. Miller turns away so you can get dressed, yet you still speak to him. \"So what are you going to bring to the table?\" you ask as you slide into a pair of breeches.\n\n\"I was knighted at twenty-one, the youngest man to be knighted... Aside from yourself, of course. For the past seven years I have served the Royal Family, and have led many knights to victory against Kishak forces.\"\n\n\"Hrm. How good are you with a sword?\" You put on your boots and pick out a shirt.\n\n\"I've never lost a one-on-one sword fight, sir. I have also managed to take down ten men at once with only minor injuries.\"\n\n\"This bodes well then.\" You finish your ensemble by sliding on a tunic. \"Alright then. Let's get going.\" Miller turns to face you then nods. He allows you to grab your sword and hook it onto your back, then leads you to where you'll depart.\n\nYou head through several hallways before Miller stops in front of a bookcase. He taps on it once, pauses, taps twice, pauses, taps once, pauses, then taps three ties in quick succession. The bookcase opens slowly, and he leads you through a secret passage. A whistle escapes your lips. \"How fancy.\"\n\n\"Indeed.\"\n\nMiller continues leading you through the tunnel for what seems like half an hour before you come out the other side. You're in a clearing, about a mile out from the Castle, where a wagon and two people wait for you. You're not far from Kishak now, only a few more miles until the border.\n\nOne of the two people, a woman about a year younger than Miller, steps forward. She eyes you up and down, and looks unimpressed. \"This is the legendary hero who saved our city? He looks like a drunk and smells like one too.\" You give her a quick glare.\n\n\"Hold your tongue, Iris. If it weren't for this man, we wouldn't be here talking today,\" the other person says, an older man who is checking the horses. You shift your glare to him. It wasn't just you.\n\n\"Please. This man had backup even then. Did you only hear the children's tales, Oliver?\" the woman, Iris, asks. \"If it weren't for his friends, I'm sure he'd have died not far into his journey.\" Well, at least she has her facts straight.\n\n\"Both of you, shut your damn mouths,\" you say, stepping forward. \"Whatever your thoughts on me are, I'm the real deal, and we're here to finish a war.\" You turn to the man, Oliver. \"I assume you're our driver?\"\n\n\"Aye, I am. I'll take you as far as the border. There, you'll be on your own. Kishak's capital, Ornislov, is only a couple miles out. You should reach there in no time if you stay off the roads and don't stop for anything.\"\n\n\"Right,\" you nod. You head towards the wagon, motioning for Miller and Iris to follow you. \"Come on. Don't have all day.\" You climb into back, and they follow. After a moment, the wagon begins moving towards the border. You stay silent for a moment, assessing Iris, before speaking up. \"I did this with Miller so you should be no different: what are you bringing to the table?\"\n\nIris scoffs. \"I spent my whole life training at the Academy in Loren. I enlisted with the military when I came of age, and I've seen my fair share of battles. I can also speak fluent Kishak, so if you need a translation just ask me.\"\n\n\"That'll come in handy. How quick are you at casting?\"\n\n\"I can get a fireball off before you can blink.\"\n\n\"Good enough for me.\" You pause, then consider something. \"How'd you know about my friends? There's not exactly much documentation on the real story.\"\n\n\"You five passed through Loren twenty years ago, right? You helped the Academy secure a magical artifact while you were in the area.\"\n\n\"... Yeah, we were. What about it?\"\n\n\"I was there. I was about seven at the time, and got to meet one of your friends. The mage woman.\"\n\nYour face darkens. \"Is that so?\"\n\n\"Yeah. She was nice. Told me about the quest you all were on, even gave me pointers on how to be a good mage.\" A faint smile appears on Iris' face as she recalls your friend, Grace. \"Even told me not to fall for some jarheaded fighter boy. I think it's obvious who she was talking about.\" Her smile shifts to a frown. \"A shame what happened to her... I know I was being rude, but I want you to know that I am sorry for your lo-\"\n\n\"Can it. I don't want your sympathy.\"\n\nIris glares at you, before shaking her head slightly and averting her gaze. The rest of the ride is silent, and before long the wagon stops. Oliver's voice pipes up from the front, \"There's a gap here between the outposts. If you keep pushing through the fields you should reach some woods, head through there and just keep going forward. Eventually, you'll get to Ornislov.\"\n\n\"Right,\" you say, climbing out of the wagon. Miller and Iris join you, and you see the wagon off as Oliver turns it around and begins driving back.\n\nYou're beginning the march to the forest when Miller stops you. \"I know a way to Ornislov that's faster, and bypasses the forest. However, it's much riskier and involves traveling out in the open. If we're lucky we'll get there much quicker.\"\n\nYou consider it. Miller warns that it's risky, but you're used to high risks. Maybe this path is worth a try?", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Fine, let's take your path. Be ready to fight, just in case.\"", "result": "Miller nods, then takes the lead. He begins heading southeast instead of the east you were expecting. \"If keep heading this way, then go around the forest and keep heading east, we'll get to Ornislov faster. I know a way in.\"\n\nYou quirk an eyebrow. \"You know a way in?\"\n\nMiller nods solemnly. \"I was sent there on a covert mission a few months. It's how we found out about the supply cache. Most of my team died, but I managed to escape.\" You nod at Miller's response, and continue following him. The sun is high in the sky, and on the horizon you can see Kishak troops marching. They wouldn't be able to spot you from here, but still, Miller gets down low. You and Iris follow his lead.\n\n\"Keep low, stick to the tall grass. If we're quiet enough, they won't stop us,\" Miller warns, then continues walking slowly. The process continues on, and after what feels like hours but must have been only ten minutes or so, the Kishak soldiers are long gone. Your team releases a collective sigh of relief and stands, continuing on at a much faster pace...\n\n... That is, until a bolt flies into your shoulder. You shout a curse in pain, then dive straight for the ground. Your companions follow suit. \"Are you okay, Sir Kit?\" Miller hisses urgently. You wave him off, then grip the bolt. You pull it out, slowly to ensure you don't tear any muscles, and let out a sigh of relief when it's out.\n\nIris scowls. \"Great thinking, Miller. You've just gotten us all killed.\"\n\n\"Damn it, keep quiet!\" Miller hisses.\n\n\"Both of you, shut up and let me think,\" you say. There's two options here: you can either run for the woods, exposing yourselves for a bit before getting to adequate cover, or you can sneak forward and attempt to take out the archer. Either way, you're putting great risk on you and your team.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run for the woods, it's the only way to ensure our safety.", "result": "\"We run for the woods and don't fucking stop. You two hear me?\" you ask. Miller and Iris nod, rather hesitantly. \"Alright. Good. Wait for my mark...\" You peek your head up slowly, above the tall grass. The lone archer kneels on the road, about forty yards away, and watches slowly. You wait until he's looking away from your current position, then nod. \"Now!\"\n\nThe three of you pull yourselves up and begin running for the woods. A few bolts fly past you, but none manage to hit you. You keep running, until you hear a shout behind you. Whipping around quickly, you see a bolt has managed to catch Iris right in the back, and she's fallen to the ground. \"Go, dammit!\" she shouts, pulling herself along. \"I'll be fine!\"\n\n\"Don't you die on me!\" Miller shouts, and moves to help her up. He gets a bolt through the neck for his troubles, and collapses to the ground. With no other options, you continue sprinting to the woods as fast as you can. You hear a shout from Iris, presumably having another bolt hit her, then another which is cut short.\n\nYour companions are dead. Again. And this time, it really is your fault. You suddenly find yourself stopping in place, no far from the edge of the woods. This bastard took out both of your allies just as you were beginning your quest. And by God, there's no way you're going to let him get away with it.\n\nYou unhook your sword from its chain on your back, and with a primal yell rush his position. Bolts fly your way, but it doesn't matter. He's going to die. Maybe you will, too, but his head will roll before yours does.\n\nYou raise your sword to deflect any bolts coming your way, and before long you're right up in his face. He fires a bolt which hits your gut, but doesn't have time to reload as you slam your sword into his shoulder, cleaving him in half. That takes care of that.\n\nYou drop to your knees and pull the bolt out of your stomach with a grunt of pain. The sounds of many men running hits your ears, and you turn your head to see the soldiers from before marching right for you. A ferocious grin spreads across your face. This is one way to go out, at least.\n\nYou raise your sword and meet their charge head on.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go for the archer, take him out before he alerts the others.", "result": "\"It's just a lone sniper out there, waiting. If there were more, they'd be firing volleys of bolts and arrows right at us. I'm going to sneak ahead and try to take that archer down. You two stay here and keep your heads down.\" Your companions nod slowly, still unsure of the plan. You poke your head up a bit, trying to spot him. There he is, about forty yards away. You duck back down and begin crawling towards him.\n\nIt takes several agonizing minutes, occasionally stopping to poke your head up and hoping he won't spot you, but soon enough you're within charging distance of the archer. You slowly unhook your blade from its chain on your back, taking a deep breath to ready yourself, before popping up and running straight for him. He manages to get a bolt off, hitting you in the thigh, but you carry on despite the wound and swing your sword at him. His head rolls on the ground not long after, and you pant.\n\nYou remove the bolt like you did the other one and look around. No one here yet. You shout back to your companions, \"Let's get going!\" Slowly, they rise from the grass. Miller takes the lead again, and the rest of the march goes on without incident.\n\nAfter a few hours of walking, you arrive at Ornislov just as the sun is starting to set. The city is more like a giant fortress, surrounded by walls on all sides with no obvious entry points aside from the gates. Miller leads you around the city walls, to a sewer grate. \"This is how we got in last time. Come on, get in.\" You and Iris crawl through the grate as Miller holds it open. He climbs in after you, shutting it.\n\nIris summons a fireball in her hand, keeping it held out to illuminate the area. The sewer tunnel stretches on for what seems like miles. There's a few latters every couple of yards, likely leading up into the city streets. Miller takes the lead again, walking past several ladders until he stops in front of one. \"This is it. Above is a warehouse, where all the supplies are kept. There's guards around, so we'll have to take them out.\"\n\nYou and Iris nod. \"Let's go.\"\n\nThe three of you begin climbing the ladder.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "Once you get above ground, you pause to examine the warehouse. It's bland and non-descript, made of wood and flanked on both sides by identical warehouses. Miller points out the one you're staring at. \"This is it. There's guards inside. Come on, I know a way inside.\" You and Iris follow him to the side of the warehouse. There, a single wooden door stands, which Miller cracks open slowly. No one in sight, at least for now.\n\nThe three of you step inside, crouching down low. There's guards patrolling the warehouse, hands on swords at their hips. You hear two of them having a conversation in Kishak. You whisper, \"Can I get a translation?\"\n\nIris nods.\n\n\"What are those two saying?\" You point out the two guards.\n\nShe listens in for a moment, then smiles slowly. \"They're talking about how boring warehouse duty is. Let's spice it up a bit.\" She conjures up an smoky green orb in your hand. You wonder what it is for a moment, before she shoots it straight at the two guards. A faint cloud comes into existence around them, and as they breathe it in their eyes sag. After a few moments, the two collapse, sleeping. Iris nods. \"Come on.\"\n\nThe three of you continue on like that, you and Miller keeping an eye out for guards while Iris takes them out quickly and quietly. Before long, the guards are all down, and the warehouse is yours for the taking. You approach the nearest supply box and open it, finding a large supply of food. You open the next, and find hundreds of crossbows. The next, hundreds of swords. It goes on and on, each crate containing an ungodly amount of supplies.\n\nNodding, you motion to Iris. \"Light it up.\" The mage nods, before summoning up a fireball and shooting it right at the nearest crate. Then, she summons another and fires it, then another, and another. Before long, the building is starting to go up in flames. It seems like your work here is done, and you ready to leave... Before you hear a shout in Kishak.\n\nA guard.\n\nHe runs straight for the front door and bolts before you can do anything, and the three of you share a look of shock. Then, Miller and Iris bolt, you trailing behind as fast as you can. The three of you get out of the warehouse and begin to open up the hatch leading into the sewers, while you hear a sharp horn go off in the distance. This is bad.\n\nMiller cracks open the hatch and motions for the two of you to get in. As you do, Iris fires off a few more fireballs at the other warehouses. \"Just in case!\" she says, before joining you on the ladder. Miller gets in right away, closes the hatch above you all.\n\nAs you three enter the sewers and then quickly leave it, the sounds of marching footsteps greet your ears. The Kishak soldiers are moving fast. They must have sent some to investigate the warehouses, while the others were sent to find you on the outside. The three of you take off into the night as fast as you can, keeping an eye out for soldiers.\n\nYou get about a mile away when you notice the squadron of soldiers following after you. They must be one hundred men in all, all bolting straight for you. \"We've got company!\" you shout to your companions, who quickly notice the threat and pick up the pace. The three of you continue on, then notice an old log cabin on the side of the road. Acting quickly, the three of you duck in there.\n\nMiller slams the door shut and immediately moves a nearby bookshelf in front of it. \"That won't hold for long,\" you warn.\n\n\"I know. It's more for my piece of mind,\" he replies, slumping down into a sitting position.\n\n\"What are we going to do?\" Iris asks. You and Miller don't give her an answer. \"We accomplished our mission, but now we're behind enemy lines with no chance of rescue. Are we just supposed to sit back and die?\"\n\nYou pat her on the shoulder, and nod. \"Afraid so. We did the right thing. They'll make martyrs out of us, probably.\"\n\nMiller sighs. \"So we're just supposed to give in and die, is that it?\"\n\nIris is fuming. \"No. We're not going to just give in and die. We're going to go out there and give them hell before we do.\"\n\n\"No use. There's one hundred of them and three of us. We'd be slaughtered.\" Miller places his face in his hands.\n\n\"Better to take at least a few of them with us before they kill us, right?\" Iris asks. \"What do you think, Kit?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"You're right. Let's give those Kishak bastards hell.\"", "result": "Iris smiles. \"I guess you are the real deal.\"\n\nDespite yourself, you crack a smile too. \"Yeah. I guess I am.\"\n\nMiller sighs, then stands up. He unsheathes his sword, and sighs. \"Well then, let's see to it that these Kishak sons of bitches meet their maker.\" He moves the bookshelf from the door, and looks to the two of you as he grips the door handle. \"You two ready?\"\n\n\"Ready as I'll ever be,\" Iris says.\n\nYou nod. \"Let's get this over with.\"\n\nHe pushes the door open, and the three of you move out as quickly as you can. There's at least one hundred Kishak soldiers in front of you, all armed with swords and axes and pikes and whatever else they have. The three of you stand side by side, readying your weapons; Miller takes a battle stance with his sword, Iris prepares an arc of electricity, and you grip your blade with both hands.\n\nThe Kishak soldiers charge, and the three of you meet them head on.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "\"It's pointless. Let's just... Wait it out.\"", "result": "Iris wrinkles her nose at you. \"Wait it out? The hell do you mean, wait it out? Wait until they burst in here and separate our heads from our bodies?\"\n\nYou sigh, sitting down on the floor. \"Something like that. We're going to die, might as well accept it.\"\n\nShe shakes her head. \"The man I heard about would have gone out and faced them head on, even if it meant death.\"\n\n\"Sorry to disappoint you, kid. But I'm not that man anymore.\" You pull your knapsack off your back and reach into it, finding one of the bottles of wine you had Bertrand stash for you. You sigh, then pop it open and take a swig. You hold the bottle out. \"Either of you want a sip?\"\n\nMiller grabs it first and chugs the bottle greedily. After a few moments, Iris snatches it out of his hands and takes a drink of her own, as if accepting defeat. She sits down on the floor with you and Miller, and the three of you pass the bottle around and drink for a while.\n\nThere's the pounding on the door as the Kishak soldiers try to get in. The bookshelf rattles with every hit, but it stands its ground. The three of you continue drinking. After all, you have all the time in the world.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"No, we'll take the path that was suggested. Let's get going.\"", "result": "Miller nods. \"Alright. We don't know of any outposts in those woods, so we should be able to get through undetected.\" With those words, the three of you continue on to the woods. You walk through the fields without incidence, and get to the edge of the forest in record time.\n\nThe three of you march through it, keeping an eye out. You're there for about an hour, continuing to march on, when you hear voices up ahead. The three of you stop in your tracks and get down low, listening. The voices are speaking Kishak. You turn to face your companions. \"Can I get a translation?\" you ask.\n\nIris nods, and listens to the voices. Her face goes pale. \"... They're talking about how boring it is to be in an outpost in the middle of the woods.\" You and Miller share a look of surprise, then turn to face the direction of the voices again. A new outpost, one that the military didn't know about.\n\nMiller pipes up. \"We go around it as slowly and carefully as we can.\"\n\nIris shakes her head. \"It can't be that many. We go in there and light them up.\"\n\nLooks like it's up to you to decide what to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "We'll go around like Miller suggested.", "result": "You shake your head at Iris. \"That's a damn stupid idea. We go around it like Miller suggested, keep low to the ground. If we're lucky, they won't see us.\"\n\nMiller nods in approval, while Iris scoffs. The three of you keep low as you move to head around the voices. As you push through the greenery, you notice the outpost. It's large and well-fortified; surprising, considering its location. Must be some sort of well-kept or something of the sort. There's a dozen Kishak soldiers wandering around, keeping an eye out.\n\nThe three of you continue walking. There's a few times when you're sure you'll be spotted, but soon enough you manage to move far away enough from the outpost that you can walk normally again. Your team releases a collective sigh of relief that you're out of there. The three of you continue through the forest without incident.\n\nAfter a few hours of walking, you arrive at Ornislov a couple of hours into the night. The city is more like a giant fortress, surrounded by walls on all sides with no obvious entry points aside from the gates. Miller leads you around the city walls, to a sewer grate. \"This is how we got in last time. Come on, get in.\" You and Iris crawl through the grate as Miller holds it open. He climbs in after you, shutting it.\n\nIris summons a fireball in her hand, keeping it held out to illuminate the area. The sewer tunnel stretches on for what seems like miles. There's a few latters every couple of yards, likely leading up into the city streets. Miller takes the lead again, walking past several ladders until he stops in front of one. \"This is it. Above is a warehouse, where all the supplies are kept. There's guards around, so we'll have to take them out.\"\n\nYou and Iris nod. \"Let's go.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "We'll take them down like Iris suggested.", "result": "You shake your head at Miller. \"Remember, this'll make it easier for the military to come through the area. If we're quick and efficient, we'll barely miss any time.\"\n\nIris nods, smiling in approval that you agreed with her.\n\nMiller sighs, shaking his head. \"I don't like it.\"\n\n\"Too bad. That's what we're doing. Now come on, let's go.\" You get up, unhooking your sword from your back, and march towards the voices. As you break through the brush and step into view of the outpost, you're surprised to find a well-defended fort instead of a dingy wooden watchtower like you were expecting. A dozen or so Kishak wander about, waiting for an attack.\n\n\"Shi-\" Iris' curse is cut off when a bolt flies into her throat, and she collapses to the ground. She twitches for a moment, then goes still. A horn blows, and the soldiers all turn to you. Miller unsheathes his sword and charges at the nearest Kishak soldier, impaling him. He doesn't last long either, however, as a bolt flies true and hits him in the chest, followed by another. For added measure, a soldier runs up and runs his spear through Miller's gut. The knight falls to the ground, dead.\n\nThe remaining soldiers turn to you. You sigh, shaking your head. Dumb move. Shouldn't have done it. Now you're dead for sure.\n\nYou grin, however. Doesn't mean you won't go down without a fight.\n\nYou charge forward with a primal yell, meeting the soldiers head on.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "I've nothing better to do. I'll go to Castle Oren.", "result": "You shake your head slightly, before shrugging. There's not much you do in your day to day life, and at the very least, this is something. \"Bertrand,\" you say. \"Get to packing my things. I'm going to Castle Oren at dawn.\" Your servant seems very surprised by this, but immediately leaves the room to get a knapsack for you. He comes back not long after and begins packing the essentials: changes of clothes, a tinderbox from your dresser, and lantern oil, along with some of the bread and wine he came to give you.\n\nHe nods to you, taking the knapsack. \"I'll pack it in your carriage, sir. In the morning we'll go.\" With those words, he leaves the room. You sigh, before popping open the remaining bottle of wine and beginning your daily routine. By nightfall, not a drop remains of the wine nor a crumb of the bread. The weight of the situation hangs heavily on you: tomorrow, you're going to leave your home for the first time in years to fight a war that isn't yours to fight for a man who will never care for you. It's enough to make you reconsider your plans. Almost.\n\nAt least, this is something you can use your talents for. Twenty years and your blade hasn't tasted a drop of blood. You feel as though you're getting rusty, that your time is long past, and it would be best to turn this offer down... No. You need to prove to yourself that you can still do this. Age means nothing for a person with your raw strength and skill, and you could kill four times as many men as a soldier half your age and twice your size. You were always told that you had a warrior's heart. Soon, you shall reaffirm it once and for all.\n\nWhen the sun dawns on the horizon, you get up and get dressed into practical clothing. Then, you grab your old sword, giving it an experimental swing at the air. It's large, only a bit shorter than your tall frame, and almost as wide as your torso. A greatsword that no man but you could wield. After hooking it onto your back, you head down to where your carriage is stored. Bertrand is already there, waiting for you in the driver's seat. \"I packed some of my things as well, sir. Hope you don't mind me coming with you,\" he says. You nod, getting into the passengers seat. He spurs the horses into action with the reigns, and the two of you begin the ride to Castle Oren.\n\nYou pass through a town on the way there and pass by several small hamlets. The sun is high in the sky when you see something on the horizon: a group of men sifting through a broken down carriage on the road. The men are dressed in fur and hides, and have chipped and dented axes at their sides. Highwaymen, bandits who prey on anyone daring to go from one place to another by the main roads. It makes you sick just looking at them. Then, you hear a woman's scream from the carriage. A noble lady in fine clothing runs from the carriage, screaming all the while. The highwaymen chase after her, abandoning the carriage.\n\nYou grip your blade...", "action_results": [{"action": "... Then jump out and chase after the bandits, intent on killing them.", "result": "Damn these sick bastards. Robbing and killing the innocent. You jump out of the carriage and begin to chase after them. Faintly, you hear Bertrand yelling at you, but the pounding of your head as a cold rage runs through you blocks out any sounds but the woman's screams. You chase the highwaymen down; it doesn't take long, you find them just as one tackles the noble woman to the ground. The others haven't noticed you yet.\n\nYou draw your blade, making sure that the chain keeping it tied to your back clinks loud enough for them to hear. They whip around, glaring at you; their eyes hold a mixture of primal rage and fear. One bares rotting yellow teeth at you, snarling like a dog. You put both hands on your sword, keeping a firm grip on it, waiting for them to make the first move. You don't have to wait long, as Yellow Teeth runs at you screaming, flailing two axes around as though he's a barbarian of the Northern Wildlands. You smoothly sidestep his charge, then bring your sword down at his legs. His upper body is sent flying upwards as your sword slices through his thighs and out the other side.\n\nThe other three highwaymen stare at their dying ally, the fear overcoming their rage. You draw your sword back and swing at nothing, the blood flying off. Droplets land on their faces. \"Leave the woman alone, or you'll wind up like your friend,\" you say. To seal your threat, you take a step forward, and they immediately back off and begin running. You draw a dagger from your boot, stabbing it into the dying bandit's throat as you approach the woman to make sure she's okay.\n\n\"Hurt?\" you ask, kneeling down next to the noble woman as she lays on the ground. She's hyperventiliating, looking around with wild eyes, before turning over and vomiting on the grass. You pat her on the back to help her get it out, then shake your head. \"It's normal the first few times something like this happens. Once the adrenaline wears off, you feel sick to your stomach. Get up.\" You offer a hand, which she accepts.\n\n\"T-thank you, sir. I can never repay you. Those... Those thugs attacked my carriage, killed my driver and the stole all my valuables. I... I don't know how I can make it back home.\" She sighs, shaking her head. \"I'll just have to walk, I suppose.\"\n\n\"Where were you going?\" you ask, already wishing you hadn't.\n\n\"Elkstern Keep. Have you heard of it?\"\n\nYou have, actually. It was one of the stops on your journey twenty years ago... And is in the opposite direction of Castle Oren, about two hundred miles away in fact. You'd have to arrive much later or even cancel your trip if you were to escort her.", "action_results": [{"action": "Damn it all, I'm too soft for my own good. I offer to escort her.", "result": "You mull it over for a moment, before groaning internally at how soft you've gotten. \"I can drive you. It's far out of the way of my destination, but I need to see you safe.\" Perhaps that was a bit too much, but the woman gives you a shaky yet radiant smile anyhow.\n\n\"You will, sir? Oh thank you, thank you!\" She leaps up, giving you a bear hug. Your arms stay limp at your side.\n\nYou wait a moment for her to let go. Then another. Then one more. Finally, fed up with this contact, you push her arms off of you. \"We must get going,\" you say. She nods, withdrawing from you and falling into step as you walk back to your carriage.\n\n\"What's your name?\" she asks. \"I am Lady Caroline of House Rorens, Fairest Lady of The Western Woodlands.\"\n\n\"Kit of Droburg,\" you reply, shaking your head slightly at the woman's title.\n\n\"Kit of Droburg? Are you not the same Kit that saved our kingdom two decades ago?\"\n\n\"The one and only. And before you start, don't you dare start worshiping the ground I walk on.\"\n\n\"I wouldn't dream of it, Sir Kit. It is an honor to meet you.\"\n\nThe conversation drifts off just as the two of you reach the carriage. Bertrand is keeping watch, having dug a crossbow out of the back of the carriage. \"Ready to get going, sir?\" he asks, but you shake your head.\n\n\"Change of plans. We need to make sure Lady Caroline here gets safely to her destination. Elkstern Keep, about two hundred miles west.\"\n\nBertrand's eyes practically bulge out of his head, yet he keeps his voice level and calm. \"That's far from Castle Oren, sir.\"\n\n\"I know,\" you say, grunting as you climb onto the carriage, \"but I'm sure the king will understand our tardiness.\" You wait for Caroline to get into the back, then turn to Bertrand. \"Let's get going, eh?\"\n\nHe sighs, before nodding. Spurring the horses on, Bertrand turns the carriage around and begins heading west, in the direction of Elkstern Keep. You have a ways to go, but you know that you made the right choice doing this.\n\nThe carriage carries on into the horizon.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "The ride to Elkstern Keep is mostly quiet. Occasionally, Caroline tries to break the silence in an attempt to get to know you, but your grunts and shrugs to her questions discourage her. Bertrand stays silent every time she tries to talk to him. She probably wasn't expecting something like this, but at the very least she's getting to her destination in one piece this way.\n\nA few hours later, you're forced to stop for the night. You use your sword to cut down a small tree, splitting it up into smaller logs to build a fire. As the fire rages, Bertrand sets a few strips of meat on a small metal pan and holds it over the fire. The only sound is the crackling of the fire and the sizzling of the meats; that is, until Caroline decides to speak up. \"So where were you two going before you picked me up?\" she asks.\n\n\"Castle Oren,\" you reply.\n\n\"Castle Oren? I was just leaving there. I was negotiating with the King, he wants to buy some land near Elkstern Keep that's under my domain. He was talking about building a second castle there.\"\n\nIt is Bertrand who replies to that: \"Why would he want to do that?\"\n\nCaroline shrugs her shoulders. \"I don't know. Castle Oren is rather old, but it's in great condition. Maybe the King wants to relocate?\"\n\n\"It could be because of the war,\" you suggest.\n\n\"I've heard the war has been going as it usually does: no real advances on either side. Just an uneasy stalemate occasionally breaking out into a scuffle over the border towns.\"\n\n\"Perhaps the King fears it won't be like that for long, and wants to fall back. Castle Oren is only a few miles from the border, after all.\"\n\n\"Fair point.\"\n\nBertrand pulls the pan away from the fire as the strips are done cooking. He takes a few strips of meat in hand then passes the pan to you. You do the same, then pass the pan to Caroline, who looks at it strangely. \"Aren't you going to eat?\" you ask.\n\n\"Yes. I'm just not used to this is all.\" She hesitantly plucks a strip from the pan, giving it a cautious nibble. She sets the pan down on the ground and continues nibbling slowly on the strip of meat. By the time she's finished her first one, you've been finished for a few minutes and are laying down to sleep.\n\nIn the morning, the three of you pack up your things and get back into the carriage. You estimate that you're about a week's ride from Elkstern Keep, if you keep this pace up. Maybe you and Bertrand can alternate between driving the carriage while the other sleeps in the back to make the most out of the time you have.\n\nIt's about midday when Caroline finally pipes up from the back: \"So tell me, why were you going to Castle Oren?\"\n\nFeeling in a generous mood today, you reply, \"To meet the King.\"\n\nCaroline laughs. \"Well of course you were meeting the King, but why were you meeting him?\"\n\n\"He wanted my help with the war effort. Drive the Kishak back to their own country.\"\n\n\"Really?\"\n\n\"Yes.\"\n\n\"I suppose there's no one who could do the job better. That man, the other day... I take it he wasn't the first one you've killed?\"\n\n\"Wasn't the first, likely won't be the last.\"\n\nShe's quiet for a moment, likely considering your answer, before piping up again. \"... What was the first one like?\"\n\nYou consider the question for a moment. Your first kill. You haven't thought back on that day in a long time. It was about a week into your journey, and you and your companions had gotten into quite a bit of trouble. A group of Marauders, vicious barbarians and raiders, had ambushed you on the road. They weren't interested in killing you like most, though; no, they had something much more sadistic in mind.\n\nYou can still remember the screams. Just a kid, a year younger than you were. Had his whole life ahead of him. And they peeled the flesh from his bones. Took their time. Used a jagged rock. Lasted for hours. Felt like years. When the screaming stopped they were still peeling the meat off him. Cooked it. Ate it. Would've been you next. Fortunately for you they got distracted and left a single guard there.\n\nYou can still remember the way he struggled under your firm grip. Busted down the rusty cage door and charged right for him. Tackled him next to the fire. Choked him out for a bit. When that proved to be taking too long, you grabbed the pot of water boiling over the fire. Poured it all over his face. The scalding hot water peeled the skin from his face, and he screamed louder than the boy did. You shut him up by smashing his skull in with the pot.\n\nWhen you freed your friends and escaped, they didn't look at you the same way for a while. You did what you had to do. You knew that. They knew that. Two weeks had passed when they started acting normal again. But you remember the looks in their eyes, remember the fear they held. That day you proved what you were capable of, and they were terrified of you until the day they died. You wish you could take it all back.\n\n\"Sir Kit? Were you going to tell me?\" Caroline's voice snaps you out of your recollection. She looks concerned. \"You've been spaced out for a few minu-\"\n\n\"Stop.\"\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\"Stop. Stop asking questions you don't want to know the answers to.\"\n\nFor a moment, there is silence. Then, you hear the cover of the wagon being drawn back, indicating that Caroline has retreated back into it. You sigh, then dig one of the bottles of wine out of your knapsack. You need it.\n\nBertrand doesn't ask questions when he sees you drinking. Just nods and continues driving.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "The next day of your trip goes by quietly. There's nothing but the open road ahead of you. Any travelers pass you by without a second thought, and aside from Bertrand and Caroline you haven't interacted with anyone since the highwaymen. It's peaceful, almost too peaceful; usually it means something will happen, and it comes when you least expect it. Of course, your gut is right on this one.\n\nOn the third day of traveling, just a day or so away from Elkstern Keep, you come across a bridge and force Bertrand to stop. The bridge is large, wide enough to fit three carriages side by side and about half a mile long. It stretches over a canyon, a long drop into a rapid river below. You see men in ragged clothing milling about; they haven't seen you yet, but if you move forward they will. By their looks, they won't be too friendly.\n\nIf you tried to go around, you'd lose a day of time. Safer, yes, but you really just want this to be over and done with. The bridge is risky but you're sure that you can defend the carriage. You look to Bertrand and nod. \"Keep going.\"\n\nHe nods, spurring the horses into gear. \"Think we'll run into any opposition, sir?\"\n\n\"Not sure. Probably, though. Keep that crossbow ready.\" Bertrand nods and grabs the crossbow with one hand, keeping the other on the reins. The carriage continues on, heading towards the bridge. You draw closer to the men, who turn their heads and finally see you. Quickly, they start moving, grabbing weapons and preparing for you to come by. You notice one poking his head out.\n\n\"Take that one out!\" you point him out to Bertrand, who shifts the crossbow and fires. The bolt flies true, hitting the man in the forehead. He slumps over, and his companions immediately open fire with a volley of arrows and bolts. You raise the flat of your sword and hold it up, using it as a makeshift shield. You and Bertrand are spared from most of them, but an arrow manages to hit him in the leg.\n\n\"Shit!\" you shout, then jump off the carriage and begin sprinting towards the men. They shift their focus from the carriage to you, firing more arrows and bolts in your direction. You keep your sword raised to deflect any projectiles coming your way, and through sheer luck, you manage to get to the men with only the faintest of grazes to show for it. They back off and drop their ranged weapons, readying knives and rusty swords.\n\nYou swiftly dodge the first swing that comes your way, then back hand the man who attacked. He staggers back with a split lip, and you move in fast by smashing his face with the pommel of your sword. He falls to the ground, dropping his sword and clutching at his broken nose. You don't have time to finish him off, as another blade comes your way, then another, and another. Raising your blade, you deflect most of the blows and dodge others. However, one of the bridge men gets a lucky hit through, cutting your side. You hiss in pain but push on.\n\nQuickly jumping back, you assess the situation. There's still more down the way, keeping crossbows and longbows at the ready, while there's a group of about six heading right for you. They're all clustered up close, as though they believe that will make it harder for you. If anything, it'll make it easier.\n\nYou rear your sword back, waiting for them to get close enough...\n\nThen swing.\n\nThe massive blade cuts through three before it gets stuck in the ribcage of the fourth one. The three you managed to hit fall to the floor in pieces, flecks of blood spraying onto you and their remaining allies. You pull your sword out of the fourth man, who falls to his knees and screams in agony for his mother, before swinging yet again. His cries are cut off as the blade cuts through his skull, and out the other side to take down the remaining two.\n\nYou pant, catching your breath. You don't have long though, as a bolt flies true and lands in your shoulder. You stumble back with a curse, and nearly fall into the canyon were it not for the rail you grabbed onto. A horn pierces the quiet of the bridge, and you know what it means: they're calling for reinforcements. You're not sure if you can take on these men, let alone more.\n\nThe river is seeming awfully tempting. Maybe you can survive the fall and be carried away to some place safer...", "action_results": [{"action": "No. I've got to defend my companions. I'll fight as long as I have to.", "result": "You steel yourself and stumble away from the edge of the bridge. No. You're not going to let them down. Using that stored up adrenaline within you, you push forward with a primal yell, charging straight for the archers. They fire at you, but you ignore the arrows and bolts flying your way. Occasionally one manages to graze you, a scant few even hit you, but you ignore it as best you can. You've got a fight to win.\n\nThe first one loses his head. The seconds his arms, then a stab through the chest. The third drops his crossbow as if in surrender, only to be sliced clean in half. You continue on like this, no longer seeing men but instead an army of targets you need to tear down. Half way through these ones, more targets come running down the bridge. You finish off the remaining archers, then ready yourself in preparation for the others.\n\nYou're not sure how long the fight lasts. All you know is that by the end of it, you're using your sword to keep yourself standing. The carriage slows to a stop, and Bertrand hops off to help you into the back of the wagon. You're still on edge enough that you snarl at him, like a wild hound defending its territory. He doesn't back off, and soon you're lying on the floor in the back of the wagon.\n\nA woman is there, digging through your supplies and pulling out a roll of bandages. Caroline. She sets to work immediately, pulling out bolts and arrows and wrapping them up as best as she can. Her hands are left bloodied from the work, but in the end you're much better off than you were. She smiles. \"You'll get proper healing at Elkstern Keep.\"\n\nShe continues speaking, but the words fade away, and you slip into unconsciousness.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "When you wake up, it's in a bed. You're covered in bandages, and though your body aches it seems your wounds are gone. There must be a healer here. In the bed to your right, a person stirs, and you shift to get a good look at them. There lays Bertrand, flipping through a leather bound book. \"I see you still live, sir,\" he says, dog-earing the page he's on and closing the book.\n\n\"Sorry to disappoint you,\" you chuckle.\n\nA small laugh escapes Bertrand's lips. \"No, sir. I'm happy to see you're still among us.\" He pauses. \"We got here yesterday afternoon, sir. The healer set to work immediately. You'll be okay if you rest for a few days.\"\n\n\"That so? Where's Caroline?\"\n\n\"She's still here, sir. Likely in her chambers. She said she'd come visit later.\"\n\n\"Alright.\" You sigh and close your eyes. You made it to Elkstern Keep, and you and Bertrand are still relatively intact.\n\nYou consider what you should do now. You'll be extremely late for your meeting at Castle Oren. The King may not like it, but if he truly needed you, he'd excuse it. Still, something about this... Felt better than fighting some meaningless war you have no investment in. Maybe...\n\nYou must have been thinking for much longer than you thought you were, as Caroline steps into the infirmary and immediately gives Bertrand a bear hug. Your servant pats her slowly on the back, and she breaks away after a moment to move onto you. The hug is so tight, it makes the aching turn into a sharp sting, and you hiss in pain. Caroline withdraws.\n\n\"I'm so glad you two are alright. Thank you for all that you've done for me, I can't repay you,\" she says.\n\nYou wave your hand and shake your hand. \"No, no, everything is fine. Just letting us rest here a few days is good enough.\"\n\nShe gives a worried look. \"Are you sure? I can give you supplies, or money, or...\"\n\n\"Nothing. It's fine. Thanks for visiting us.\"\n\nCaroline nods. The three of you talk for a while, though it's mostly her thanking you profusely and continually offering help, which you turn down. After about an hour, a man comes in and informs her that she's needed in the entrance hall. Caroline sighs, but nods at the man.\n\nBefore she leaves, she turns to you and Bertrand one last time. \"I know I've been saying it a lot, but thank you from the bottom of my heart. If you hadn't saved me and escorted me here, I don't know what I'd have done.\" With those words, she departs.\n\nAfter she leaves, you once again wonder what you'll do now.", "action_results": [{"action": "Maybe I can keep helping people. Damn the King and his war, I'll help people in other ways.", "result": "Yes. You can keep helping people. That's what you should do, what your friends would have wanted you to do. It's what the hero you used to be would have done in this situation. As much as you've tried to drown that boy with alcohol, you know that deep down he's still in there. Maybe, it's time to let him back out.\n\nYou voice your thoughts to Bertrand. \"Damn the King's summons. After all this, I think I want to keep helping people. Will I have you by my side, Bertrand?\"\n\nYour servant smiles at that. \"Of course, sir. I was hoping you'd say that.\"\n\nYou nod your head a few times. \"Okay. Okay.\"\n\nFor now, you have a few days to rest. When you're done, you'll leave Elkstern Keep, and set out to right any wrongs you find. After all, that's what a hero does.\n\nThe sun is high in the sky. It's a new beginning.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "My plans remain the same. I'll head straight for Castle Oren. I'm sure the King needs me, and won't mind.", "result": "Yes. The King summoned you, and you won't ignore those summons. Being a wandering hero is appealing, but this way you can help the kingdom in a much more substantial way. Winning a war? You'd save the kingdom, and drive the Kishak menace away from it. You'd be a hero yet again.\n\nYou voice your thoughts to Bertrand. \"Our plan remains the same: we'll head straight for Castle Oren when we recover. Will I have you at my side, Bertrand.\"\n\nBertrand nods. \"Of course, sir. We'll get there and finish this war.\"\n\nYou nod your head a few times. \"Okay. Okay.\"\n\nFor now, you have a few days to rest. When you're done, you'll leave Elkstern Keep, and head straight for Castle Oren. After all, you have a duty, and you must see it through.\n\nThe sun is high in the sky. It's a new beginning.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "They're on their own. I'm getting out of here, while I still can.", "result": "This is too much, even for you. Hell, for all you know, the archers down the bridge have already taken out Bertrand and you're just defending a corpse. The only way you're going to survive this is if you give into your fight or flight instincts; right now, your entire body is screaming flight. Taking in a deep breath and mumbling a quick prayer to whatever god will hear it, you jump off the bridge into the river below.\n\nThe water is freezing, you note, and pushing you at a breakneck speed. Occasionally you bump into a rock and feel as though you're about to lose consciousness, but the fear of drowning keeps you awake as you struggle to keep your head above the surface. By the time you wind up on land, it feels as though you've been at this for hours, when really it's only been a few minutes at most.\n\nYou crawl on hands and knees away from the river, heaving up water and bits of your breakfast on the gravel. Pushing forward, you note that you're in a forest of snow covered pine trees, despite it only just being fall. Then again, you've been heading towards a much colder climate, so this is to be expected. Shivering, you push yourself up on the ground and hook your sword onto your back. There has to be some sort of shelter around here.\n\nYour walk through the forest lasts most of the day, and by nightfall you're sure you'll freeze to death out here. However, luck is on your side; you spot a faint glow not far from you, and push towards it. What you see is a cabin, light from a lantern pouring out of it... The problem, however, is the spikes planted into the ground with heads stuck through them. Whatever this is, it's bad news.\n\nYou consider your options: freeze to death out here, or take your chances fighting whoever is in there.", "action_results": [{"action": "I need warmth. I'll kill whoever is in there, and feel no guilt over it. Whoever's in there is a monster.", "result": "You unhook your blade and stalk towards the cabin, ready to swing at the slightest twitch of movement. Pushing the door open, you step inside with sword at the ready. You find a single man there, clothes ragged and dirty with unkempt hair and beard. In his hands is a single human arm, a woman's by the looks of it. He turns to look at you, and gives you a blank stare.\n\nThen, a blood-tinged smile.\n\nYou swing your sword, splitting his skull open like an overripe watermelon. Pulling the sword out of his corpse, you swing again. Then again. And again. And again. And again. You keep swinging until there's nothing left to hit. Even then you keep at it, busting up the bloodied floorboards and reducing the mush that's left of him to bloody stains. Finally, you drop your sword and collapse. The exhaustion overtakes you, and you fall into a sleep before you even realize it.\n\nWhen you wake in the morning, you feel warmed up after the night in the cavern. You quickly dig through any containers you find. There's not much, but there is a spare set of the cannibal's clothes. It looks like it's just about your size, and made of animal hides. Good enough in this climate. You remove your soaked clothing slide into the outfit, making sure it fits.\n\nWith nothing left to do, you set out from the cabin and into the forest. There has to be a town somewhere.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "If it's a choice between being gruesomely maimed and killed or slowly freezing to death... I think I'll take the latter.", "result": "There's no way you're going in there. You barely have enough strength to walk, let alone fight off whatever bastards are in the cabin. If you're going to die anyway, you figure you're going to do it on your own terms, and walk away from the cabin.\n\nYou continue on into the night, feeling the cold wind slowly freeze your soaked clothing. Ice clings to you, and you feel your strength slowly fading. You're not sure how much longer you can keep walking, so you should at least make sure you're comfortable. Slowing down, you set your back against a tree, and slowly slide down into a sitting position.\n\nYour breathing is slowing down.\n\nYou can feel your heart beat every couple of seconds.\n\nIt's so cold out here.\n\nMaybe you should rest.\n\nYou close your eyes.\n\nYeah, rest sounds good.\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "I'll just have to wish her luck and give her directions to the nearest town.", "result": "You sigh, shaking your head. \"Wish I could help you, but I have urgent matters to attend to and Elkstern Keep is too far away. There's a town about ten miles down the road, a few small villages and hamlets along the way. Maybe you can see if a caravan is heading there.\"\n\nShe nods. \"Thank you again for saving me, sir. I'll head there now.\" You walk her to the road, and see her off. Bertrand watches from the driver's seat of the carriage, a loaded crossbow in his hands. After the noble woman is no longer in sight, you climb back up and sit next to Bertrand.\n\n\"Shall we go now, sir?\"\n\n\"Yes. Let's go.\"\n\nBertrand spurs the horses into action, and the two of you continue on. You're forced to set up camp for the night along the road, but you can see Castle Oren in the distance. You'll be there not long after you get up in the morning.\n\nYour blade rests in your lap as you clean it with a rag and some water. Bertrand stirs the fire with a stick, then quirks a brow at you. \"Why did you agree, sir?\"\n\n\"Agree to what?\" you ask.\n\n\"Agree to go to Castle Oren.\"\n\nYou sigh, shrugging your shoulders. \"Not entirely sure of that myself. I just figured it was better than wasting away at home.\" You pause, and trace a finger along the flat of your blade. \"... Truth is I feel like I need to prove something to myself. That I still have what it takes.\"\n\n\"Judging by the blood I saw on your blade, you still do.\"\n\nA mirthless chuckle escapes your lips. \"Maybe. Maybe I just got lucky. Sword this size, I could cut a horse in half once I get it going. There's no skill involved when it comes to wielding a blade like this, only blind luck.\"\n\nBertrand nods. \"I should be turning in now. I suggest you do too.\" He gets up from the fire and lays down on a blanket he has sprawled out, closing his eyes and drifting off to sleep in moments. You watch his sleeping form for a moment, before setting your sword down and laying on your own blanket. Though you toss and turn for a bit, exhaustion takes over and you fall into your first dreamless sleep in years.\n\nIn the morning, you and Bertrand pack your things up and begin the last stretch to the Castle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "You arrive at Castle Oren around lunch time. The castle is large and imposing, made of stone that has gathered a fair bit of moss over the years. It was built a thousand years before your time, and still stands after all this time with only minor renovations to keep it up. A town surrounds the castle, full of shops and inns and homes and other assorted buildings. People mill about, paying you no mind as the carriage rolls up to the castle gates.\n\nThe guards there stand at attention, waiting for you to make a move. A young man in knight's armor approaches your carriage. He takes his helmet off, revealing a youthful yet stern face with sandy blond hair and grey eyes. The knight salutes you. \"Sir Kit?\" he asks. You nod, and the man smiles. \"My name is Sir Miller of the Gold Hawk Knights. Welcome to Castle Oren.\" He nods at the guards, who open the gates. Your carriage rides through, and Miller follows.\n\nInside the castle grounds, you park your carriage and climb off. Bertrand stands behind you, while you address Miller. \"When can I see the King?\" you ask.\n\n\"Come along, I'll take you to him.\" Miller walks away. You follow closely behind, examining the castle grounds. The courtyard leading into the castle is home to many trees and flowers, a few of which you've never even seen. The King's gardeners must take their work very seriously.\n\nYou head into the castle proper, in an entrance hall that doubles as a throne room. The King is nowhere in sight, and Miller continues on past the throne and to a door not far from it. As you step into the room, you see a man in fine clothing sitting at a desk. The desk houses a golden crown. The King is around his mid thirties, though the wrinkles in his face and the gray streaking his hair indicates a man at least a decade older.\n\n\"Your highness. Sir Kit has arrived,\" Miller says. The King looks up from his writing at you, and gives a faint smile. He waves Miller off, and the young knight departs from the room. Bertrand follows close behind, assuming the King doesn't want an audience.\n\n\"Sir Kit. It is an honor to finally meet you.\" The King stands from the desk and approaches you. He's only a bit shorter than you, impressive considering your bulky stature, though his posture and build indicates he's never been a fight before. He sticks out a hand for you to shake, which you do.\n\n\"The honor is all mine, your highness,\" you say, though rather half-heartedly.\n\nThe King laughs. \"Let's skip the formalities. Call me Walter. We're not here to discuss something officially.\" His face darkens. \"I called you here because I need someone to weaken the Kishak Empire, so that my army can strike the final blow against them.\"\n\n\"I see.\"\n\n\"I need someone who doesn't mind getting their hands dirty, Sir Kit. I need a warrior such as you. I take it whatever you face on this mission will be enough for you to handle, and I'll be sending you backup anyhow.\"\n\n\"What's this mission you're sending me on?\"\n\n\"My spies in Kishak have uncovered the location of the Empire's supply cache: in the heart of their capital city. If you can destroy the supply cache, there goes all of the Kishak army's food, weapons, and gunpowder. They'd be running on what they have left, and soon enough that would run out and my men would be able to drive them back.\"\n\n\"... This sounds like a suicide mission.\"\n\nThe King nods slowly. \"Perhaps. But if you manage to see this mission through, the war will be won by next year. Would you not want to see an end to this war that has claimed so many lives? An end to a war your grandfathers would have fought in, and your grandchildren will fight in if it doesn't end?\"\n\nYou shake your head, chuckling. \"You're wrong there. My grandfathers were simple farmers, and I don't have children. This war means nothing to me.\"\n\n\"Maybe it doesn't. But think of the millions of lives that have been lost to it, and the millions of lives you will save by ending it.\"\n\nYou sigh. At the very least, this is something to do.\n\n\"Fine. Let's get prepped for this suicide mission.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "... Then let it go. Best to get out of here while they're gone.", "result": "Your hand falls from your sword. \"Let's go, Bertrand. We've got time while they're distracted to beat a hasty retreat.\"\n\n\"But sir,\" Bertrand begins to interrupt before you silence him by holding up your hand.\n\n\"I don't want to hear it. Get going.\"\n\nHesitantly, Bertrand nods and spurs the horses on. They walk past the overturned carriage and continue down the road. The woman's screams penetrate the otherwise silent countryside, until they are finally silenced.\n\nNightfall comes sooner than you'd like. You're forced to set up camp for the night along the road, but you can see Castle Oren in the distance. You'll be there not long after you get up in the morning.\n\nYour blade rests in your lap as you clean it with a rag and some water. Bertrand stirs the fire with a stick, then frowns at you. \"We should have helped her.\"\n\n\"Hrm,\" you hum.\n\n\"The man I agreed to work for would have saved her. What the hell even happened to you?\"\n\nYou sigh, shaking your head. \"I don't know. I'm just not that kind of man anymore.\" You pause, and trace a finger along the flat of your blade. \"... Just an old dog called in to do the king's dirty work. Nothing more, nothing less. There's no more heroes in this world Bertrand, and the sooner you accept that, the sooner life gets easier.\"\n\n\"You don't know what you're talking about.\"\n\nA mirthless chuckle escapes your lips. \"Maybe I don't. Can you blame me, though? I'm just a bitter old drunk. It'd be best if you just ignored what I say.\"\n\nBertrand sighs. \"... I should be turning in now. I suggest you do too.\" He gets up from the fire and lays down on a blanket he has sprawled out, closing his eyes and drifting off to sleep in moments. You watch his sleeping form for a moment, before setting your sword down and laying on your own blanket. Though you toss and turn for a bit, exhaustion takes over and you fall into your first dreamless sleep in years.\n\nIn the morning, you and Bertrand pack your things up and begin the last stretch to the Castle.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story52.json b/data/scraper/stories/story52.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e227179 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story52.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=54011", "context": "", "first_story_block": "The arrows never stop flying. \n\n\nCrawling through the mud, you watch as unlucky comrades around you are caught in the volleys. A grunt and a thud, in the trench in front of you one falls, reaching his hand out to you. Crawling over to him you rip off his armor, trying to stop the bleeding. Almost impossible with the arrow lodged in his chest, ripping it out would only kill him faster.\n\n\nYou sit there cradling him, trying to offer some small comfort in his final moments. He tries to speak, but only a gurgling sound emerges as crimson red trickles out of the side of his mouth. One final sigh and his whole body relaxes, his head falls back. His glassy eyes stare at you, only seeing emptiness.\n\n\nPlacing him down, you continue to trudge through the mud. Around you more have fallen, and will continue to fall. A dark purple blast of energy flies overhead, frying some unfortunate.\n\n\nYou make a run for the trees. Never running in a straight line, you start right, then dart left as you dive behind a tree. A few arrows lodge themselves in the ground beside you. \n\n\nDamn elves.\n\n\nYou think back to how the elves had first come peacefully. Offering promises of power and strength. The orcs didn't want anything to do with them and their magic. The next time the elves showed up; however, it was in force. Looking to capture conscripts for their fight against the Empire. The orcs wanted nothing to do with their war, but since the elves brought it to our doorstep, we had now come to retaliate. \n\n\nThe elves, unable to fight a war on two fronts, were sure to crumble. \n\n\nBut this all started four years ago. Turns out elves have incredible resolve... which you intended to break.", "action_results": [{"action": "Advance", "result": "Only a few miles ahead, you see the castle stronghold of the Wister Elves' king. King Harribor, intent on delaying his final stand, hides behind his people.\n\n\nCoward. \n\n\nHe would let his enemies lay waste to his nation, rather than meeting his fate out on the battlefield.\n\n\nBy now, you've made your way to a ridge, behind which many orcs wait. Across is another ridge, with orcs similarly stationed. In between, dozens and dozens of orcs slowly advance: hiding in trenches, behind rocks, and amidst piles of dead comrades. They will never make it through unless you buy them time. \n\n\nAhead, the elves had constructed wooden walls and towers. Each had slits and ramparts to shoot their arrows and blast their magic. \n\n\nScanning the area, you see that the elve's defenses are strongest on their right flank. Perfect. All you need to do is charge down the ridge and straight towards that tower. \n\n\nYou grab an orc by the shoulder, he looks back grunting.\n\n\n\"See how strong their defenses are on the right?\"\n\n\nHe peers out, grunting in acknowledgment.\n\n\n\"I need you all to string up, focus all of your fire in that region.\"\n\n\n\"Why? Their left is weakest.\"\n\n\n\"I know, I'm going to use that to our advantage.\"\n\n\nYou're about to leave when you pat his shoulder again.\n\n\n\"Try not to shoot me.\"\n\n\nYou backtrack down into the forest and see some lights coming from the trees. The elves are watching their line closely.\n\n\nSeeing multiple orcs in the darkness, you stop them. They look at you inquisitively until you explain your plan. They are eager to follow.\n\n\nYou move back behind the ridge, close to the front lines, careful to stay in the darkness. Peering over the top you notice something new: a system of hidden trenches filled with elves. They must be expecting the orcs to charge at any minute and are planning a surprise in the trenches.\n\n\nYou inspect the trench immediately below you. It leads directly to the door of a tower. You see an officer using a dimly glowing spyglass. Near him, and scattered throughout the trenches, are wounded elves. Some fit to fight, some are not, and yet they'll do it regardless. You have to respect that at least.\n\n\nYou ready your bow, and sight an elf slumped against the trench wall. Bloody bandages wrapped around his head, he holds his dagger and appears to be praying. He looks almost like a child, several years younger than yourself. \n\n\nAs you let loose, the rest do as well. The elf gasps in surprise as the arrow pierces his chest. You all fire several arrows, until each elf in front of you is pin-cushioned.\n\n\nNo one is walking away from this. No one sounds an alarm.\n\n\nMaking your way through the trench to the nearest battlement, you ready your axe, short enough to be used with one hand but long enough for two. You stand next to the tower door, inhaling deeply.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tower", "result": "Thrusting your foot forward, the door bursts open, splinters hitting the wall directly behind. You storm in as a bloodied elf staggers towards you. His eyes widen in surprise as you plant the axe into his forehead. Thick streaks of blood creep down his face as other orcs pour past you. You pull the axe from the fallen foe with a satisfied grunt. \n\n\nAs you enter the narrow hall, you see the wide eyes of many elves, their dead faces contorted in shock. They... almost didn't see what hit them.\n\n\nLeading the way once more, you rise up the stairs to the next landing, your movements hidden by the sounds of battle. You recognize the twanging of arrows. \n\n\n\"I hit one,\" one of the elves says, \"Ha! Look at him squirming!\"\n\n\nYour face contorts in rage. Raising your axe, you step out, and embed it into their officer's neck. You've left your axe in another's shoulder and jammed an arrow into the eye of a third before they realize what's happened. In an instant, the other orcs are upon them.\n\n\nYou ascend to the top of the tower. Almost immediately, an elf with bandaged hands sees you and shouts a warning to his companions. \n\n\nYou charge them, dodging arrows and bowling into them, knocking two over the edge, screaming. The wounded one tries to bring down his sword, but you catch it between your hands. Wrenching it away you toss the sword off the edge.\n\n\nSnarling, you prowl towards the elf; he backs up, desperately swinging as you do so. You duck a punch and wrap an arm around his neck as you slip behind him. His hands bat and pull at your arms ineffectually. You squeeze tighter. With a snap, his hands go limp. You drop him.\n\n\nFucking stick, so damn weak.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continuing", "result": "You duck down and go to the ledge, peering up and over a low wall. Arrows are still flying; chaos everywhere.\n\n\n\"Come on, we have more towers to take out,\" you say.\n\n\nYou go to the other edge and wave to get the attention of the orcs at the ridge you left. You signal them to storm the trenches from your side. \n\n\nBy the time you've made your way down, the orcs have already flooded into the trenches. As the enemy loses focus in the confusion, the rest of your comrades rush in from the center to surround them. \n\n\nThe elves fight valiantly, refusing to surrender, which surprises you. What is more surprising is that you are only able to kill a few before the orcs have completely decimated the rest.\n\n\nYou run forward to the walls watching over the trenches, where the elves are far up but their fear is visible. All the trenches seem to lead to an underground tunnel system, with side rooms dug out for wounded and extra supplies. \n\n\nAs you enter one of them you see a wounded elf on a cot. His chest wrapped in bloody bandages, his breathing labored. He might not even make it, although killing defenseless people is for the weak as far as you're concerned. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Mercy Kill", "result": "You approach the elf, stepping lightly. As you draw your blade from you sheath he looks up at you. His eyes widen and his breathing become faster. He feebly tries to raise his arms, probably to ask for mercy.\n\n\nDriving the sword through his recent wound, you press as the blood pours out and trickles down his side. A short gasp escapes from his lips as his back and neck arches, his eyes widening before closing about halfway. You pull your blade out and move forward.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the tunnel", "result": "As you are about to run back into the tunnel, a loud sound erupts, shaking the ground. You have to catch yourself against the wall. After exchanging glances with the other orcs, you make your way forward through the tunnel, ever vigilant.\n\n\nYou reach an opening engulfed in flames. Orcs scream burning or already lay still, flesh roasting.\n\n\nYou cringe as the putrid smell reaches your nostrils. You get low to try to get a better view up a dirt ramp. The explosive must have come from the wall. \n\n\nYou dart to the side of the hall, thinking about what you should do. You see some other orcs about to through the fiery opening.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait", "result": "You hold up your hand.\n\n\n\"Wait,\" you say. \"They could have more.\"\n\n\nThe room is deadly silent as everyone waits. You hear more of those explosions, and orcs storming through the other trench tunnels. \n\n\nBy now, it sounds like full on chaos out there. At some point, you hear a scream and an elven body crunch against the ground just outside of the opening.\n\n\nThey must have taken the walls, or at least part of them by now.\n\n\nYou slowly approach the opening, axe in hand. As you step out, you notice there are elves and orcs engaged in deadly combat everywhere.\n\n\n Several elves run straight towards you. They're probably trying to seek refuge. One of their face twists as they raise their arm. A bright red bolt flies from his hand. You barely have time to drop to the ground as the bolt slams into the wooden fixture right above the tunnel.\n\n\nAs small wood pieces shower your back, you notch an arrow to your bow. You only stand up high enough for your arrow to be raised just above the ramp. You exhale as you align the arrow with the closest of the elves, who are significantly closer now. \n\n\nYou release the arrow, the elf who blasted at you staggering as it lands in his hip. But he still runs forward, although now they all start blasting bolts of energy at you. An orc to your right goes down, smoke rising from the wound on his chest.\n\n\nYou notch another arrow, a bolt passing right by you, and you shoot the next elf as another orc already finished off the first one you hit. \n\n\nWithin moments, the group of elves are all dead, along with a few orcs around you. \n\n\nIt seems that the orcs have gained the upper hand once again, superior strength and numbers.\n\n\nYou move out into the open with your group, quick to find somewhere less vulnerable. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Push", "result": "Many of the orcs loot the treasures, weapons, and trophies from the elf bodies. You cross your arms and lean against some supply shed. \n\n\nA horse gallops over to a group of orcs, in the middle of them is an orc chief. The orc scout on horseback frantically starts speaking.\n\n\n\"The elves! They're closing in on us, we're right in the middle of their line, we'll be surrounded,\" he yells. \n\n\nIt would only be a matter of time before they cut off the opening to their king.\n\n\nSifting through the orcs, you eventually find the orc chief in charge of the battle, who seemed to have dismissed the scout.\n\n\n\"Chief,\" you say, \"we need to push further.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, yes, I'm aware.\" He sort of shrugs you off, while some other kiss ass orcs hand him some trinkets.\n\n\n \"You heard him, we're in the middle of their line, we could easily get caught in a pincer movement. Probably surrounded too.\"\n\n\nThe orc chief laughs.\n\n\n\"Let them come, they won't stand a chance.\"\n\n\nYour eyes widen, this fool would let your brethren die rather than end this it seems.\n\n\nGrunting, you rip the horn fastened to his belt. He glares at you, stepping forward. You see his hand lightly resting on his sword handle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reason with him", "result": "Looking at the horn in your hands, you realize you may have made a mistake.\n\n\n\"I'm not gonna sit here while you get them all killed,\" you say. \"We need to move now, while we have an opening to their king.\"\n\n\nThe chieftain's eyes dart to the side as he considers what you have said.\n\n\nHe chuckles.\n\n\n\"You are a bold one, and you're right.\" He says this as he walks up to you, and he pushes you to the side as he grabs the horn from your hand.\n\n\n\"But I can't let this disrespect stand.\"\n\n\nHe keeps walking as he blows the horn, rallying the orc armies. As he calls for them to push forward, you hear something sliding behind you.\n\n\nWhipping around, you are just in time to sidestep a sword blow, which would have cleaved your head apart. \n\n\nYou grab the orcs forearm, quick to twist his arm and steal his sword. He falls to one knee grunting in pain, and you kick him in the face, knocking him over.\n\n\nThe other four orcs in the chieftains entourage all draw their weapons as they try to surround you. All the while you are moving, back, left, right, where ever you have to go to keep the foremost ones in front of you and keep the others from surrounding you.\n\n\nOne finally lurches forward, slicing open your shin. Ignoring the searing hot pain, you leap forward, your sword biting into his neck. His body relaxes and he slumps forward, not quite dead yet but on his way there.\n\n\nAnother orc rushes forward, trying to bury his axe into your head. You simply pull the dying orc in front of you, the axe burying into his back.\n\n\nYou let the orc fall, as the weight of him doesn't allow the other orc to pull his axe out. It instead slips from his fingers. His hand goes for his dagger, but before he can do anything else, your stolen sword is buried in his chest.\n\n\nWith a grunt you push it the rest of the way through, all the way to the hilt, specks of his warm blood spattering your arms and chest. The orc's mouth gapes and quivers as his arms flail in his death throes, patting your arms as his hands slide off your forearms. \n\n\nThe remaining two orcs have already started charging. One leaps over the dying orc, almost hacking into your shoulder. You get a lucky dodge, this time drawing your real sword.\n\n\nThe other one comes from your side, intent on plunging his spear into your side. You knock the spearhead away, sliding the blade along the shaft, until you reach his hand. You simply pull your blade back real quick, then with a quick chop severing his fingers. He cries out in pain, turning into a gurgling as you slash your sword across his throat.\n\n\nThe last orc, and probably the most resourceful. Pulls up a small shield from his side, frisbee whipping it at you. It hits your raised forearm, leaving a stinging mark on your arm.\n\n\nAs you step back, the other orc tucks and rolls, grabbing the spear. As he raises into a kneel, he lurches the spear forward. It buries into your waist, burning hot pain shoots through. You roar in pain as he rips it out. This time he aims right below your throat, but you manage to knock it aside.\n\n\nIn the same motion, you pull up your axe, throwing it with surprising dexterity. The orcs head kicks back, then slowly slumps forward. One of his eyes stares at you, the other looks off at a weird angle. He falls, the axe handle stopping his face from hitting the ground.\n\n\nSighing, you limp over, pulling your axe out of his forehead. As you look around, you realize some orcs had gathered to cheer you on. They didn't seem to want to get involved in case you deserved it, and they didn't know what you were even fighting about but seemed entertained nonetheless.\n\n\nThey pat you on the back for wrecking four orcs, and one even offers to help you clean and bandage your wound. Which you gladly accept...\n\n\nSome hard alcohol and stitches later, your leg and stab wound are securely patched up. You just have to be careful not to reopen or aggravate the wound.\n\n\nHaving missed the initial rush, you are stuck moving with the supply wagons, with all the old, lame, or wounded orcs. You do manage to hitch a ride, also being offered some fresh cooked beef. A delicatessen you haven't had since months ago.\n\n\nYou decide to get some shut-eye on your way to the front...", "action_results": [{"action": "King Harribor's Stand", "result": "The past few days have been spent sieging the elven King's last safe harbor. All the fields, villages, and towns outside of the castle having been swept up by the armies of orcs.\n\n\nSomewhere behind the main army, detachments of orcs have been held back to keep the elven lines from closing in. You've heard they fight with desperation at the thought of losing their king. They've gained almost a mile since yesterday, but the orc rearguard has finally managed to hold their ground.\n\n\nYou sit on a hill, drinking whiskey as you watch the orcish reserves moving about the moats and trenches, trading arrows with the elven defenders.\n\n\nYou had spent the previous nights routing out and destroying the surrounding elf units. You've finally been convinced to reserve your strength as you sit against a tree with some trusted orcs.\n\n\nTo your left a huge swath of trees fall. Tensing up a bit, you see large wooden catapults being forced out of the trees. Followed by columns of heavily armored elven knights.\n\n\nPreparing to warn the orcs, you bolt up onto your feet, as do your friends. As you run down the hill you notice something odd. The insignia on their flags are different from the Wistern elves' flag. Instead of a yellow flag with red shield, it is a black flag with a red dragon.\n\n\nThese might be the Velaneer elves.\n\n\nYou hop on a horse, galloping over to them with a dozen or so other orcs. The rest prepare to defend their lines. \n\n\nYou stop out of spear or bolt range of the columns, they don't appear to have any archers with them yet, so that won't be an issue.\n\n\nYou call out.\n\n\n\"Who are you? And what business do you have here?\"\n\n\nWhat appears to be an officer steps forward. You don't realize the elf is a woman until it speaks.\n\n\n\"My name is Valek, Captain of the Velaneer assault brigade. You are?\"\n\n\n\"Nolazir.\"\n\n\n\"Rank?\"\n\n\n\"I'm... I just kill things.\"\n\n\n\"Any generals?\"\n\n\n\"No, we have some chiefs though.\" you say.\n\n\n\"And?... Where are they?\" She asks getting clearly annoyed.\n\n\n\"Off sieging King Harribor's last defense... or drunk somewhere.\"\n\n\n\"You'll have to do.\" Valek says this as she strides toward you and your horse.\n\n\nYou hop off and go to meet her. Her hair is the gold blonde that most elves of her nation seem to have, and her eyes are a deep green. They would almost be beautiful.....if she wasn't an elf. You almost can't look away, but you manage to break eye contact. Looking down her face to her lips, which seem to come up to a slight pout. She slowly smiles, some twinkle in her eye.\n\n\n\"Seems like you really are doing a great job breaking into the castle.\" She says haughtily.\n\n\n\"We're trying to starve them out,\" you say.\n\n\nShe sighs.\n\n\n\"They're elves, they can magically grow food in their castle gardens, and when they run out of ammunition they'll probably start throwing magic bolts at you.\"\n\n\nYou grunt, not having thought of this. Valek chuckles.\n\n\n\"You orcs are always getting caught with your dicks in your hands.\"\n\n\nYou look down at your fur and leather pants, no dick in sight. Fearing this was a ruse, you grunt and look up at her, but she isn't trying to fry your face off. \n\n\n\"We kinda did have a plan, the moat is the issue,\" you say. \"We were gonna tunnel under the fort, but that would probably just flood.\"\n\n\n\"Have you tried just knocking?\" She smirks.\n\n\nYou look over to the drawbridge, covered in arrows.\n\n\nYou look back at her and shake your head.\n\n\n\"Too dangerous.\"\n\n\n\"Well, you have some brains... for an orc.\" Valek chuckles.\n\n\nShe is about to say something but you interrupt her.\n\n\n\"We were thinking of finding a way to just barge straight in. They must have a weakness somewhere.\"\n\n\n\"They probably have a secret tunnel system, most elven fortresses do.\"\n\n\nNow it is your turn to act like a snob.\n\n\n\"Don't you think if they did they would have taken their king to safety?\" you say, mimicking her haughty attitude.\n\n\n\"Besides,\" you say resuming your normal tone, \"we already caved in their tunnel system.\"\n\n\n\"What? Why didn't you just use that to get in?\" She starts getting angry.\n\n\n\"Too small, and we lost too many orcs trying to get in. Better to collapse and kill all the elves inside.\"\n\n\nShe looks over to the wall, observing the battle taking place. \n\n\n\"We have a plan to get through,\" you say. \"We just need more time.\"\n\n\nYou show her some of the wooden \"machinations\" you and the orcs have been working on. They are wooden constructs, each with a front wall with a small window and handles, there is a small roof to protect against arrows, and the side walls are dipped to allow archers to fire from the side. Each one can protect half a dozen orcs and are operated by three pushing, which would turn the wheels on the front and sides, and three archers firing from the front and sides respectively.\n\n\n\"We call them siege breakers. Should get us close enough to take those doors down,\" you say as you stand behind one, the roof part at least a good foot above your head. A dozen or so elves could probably fit behind one of these.\n\n\n\"I have to say,\" she smirks, \"I'm impressed Nolazir. But are you sure you'll be able to get through to the walls, even with these?\"\n\n\n\"Valek, that's where you come in,\" you say. \"We need you to barrage them with your catapults, and your... magic blast things. Once they are beaten down, we can get in.\"\n\n\nShe nods, taking a moment to look at the defenders scrambling up on the walls, they seem to be massing more out of their reserves in response to this elven nations arrival.\n\n\nYou decide to spend the rest of the day with Valek and other elvin and orcish leaders planning out how to break the siege of King Harribor's castle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Three Days Later...", "result": "You grunt as you push, gripping the handle of the siege breaker you take shelter behind. Arrows embed themselves into the front and top of it. Far ahead, the catapults snap as they fire off, sending stones into the wall. \n\n\nThe orc next to you chuckles as a stone shatters part of the wall, and several elves fall to their dooms below. \n\n\nLooking behind you, Valek watches as you push the siege breaker. She sticks her thumb up at you and smiles, and not being sure what to do, you smile and raise your middle finger. She looks surprised for a second and looks away to the catapult.\n\n\n\"Idiot!\" the orc next to you yells. \"Elves don't make jokes!\"\n\n\nNodding in acknowledgment of this wisdom, you continue to push the machine. A horn blares behind you. Valek stands with a catapult into position right behind you and orders it to fire. You and the other orcs all cringe as the projectile soars overhead.\n\n\nWith a huge crash, the missile breaks through the castle gate, shattering it and sending splinters flying all over. \n\n\nYou nod at Valek, who smiles and raises her middle finger at you.\n\n\nDrawing your sword and axe, you give a mighty cry and lead the charge through the gate. The elves on the walls scramble to either rush to the gate or shoot down on the orcs, but your elven allies blast them with energy bolts, either killing or suppressing them.\n\n\nAs you burst through the opening, dozens of elves wait, swords in hand. One tries to hack you, but you simply knock it away with your sword and slice his knee with your axe, running it across his belly next as he falls to a kneel. He tries to keep his guts from spilling out, but you manage to slice his throat, only a gurgle escaping as he falls to the ground.\n\n\nYou throw yourself into a group of elves, fighting through them with a new ferocity along with your comrades\u2026\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Revenge", "result": "With the castle in sight, the orc army pushes forward, as the elves follow up and support them. From the castle, a large brigade of elves come flowing through. They are lead by an elf in leather black armor, and a large sword for an elf of his stature. From here, you can see his hair is raven black, much like the orcs, but he is full elf, with one blue eye and one green eye. A nasty scar crawls across his face.\n\n\nAs the orcs and elves meet, chaos ensues, from the houses and shops the windows burst open, energy blasts shooting out and killing elves and orcs alike. More of the elves flood in from a side street, blindsiding the orcs.\n\n\nYou barely manage to dodge an axe to the head, before lopping off your foes arm. You and another orc move through, watching each other's backs and cutting down elf after elf.\n\n\n\n\n \n\nYou hear a grunt and a heavy sigh. Turning, you see the orc you were fighting with sinking to the ground, a smaller axe buried in his chest. Ahead you see the culprit. The chief from before chuckles as he draws his sword. \"So you managed to survive, pretty impressive,\" he says, \"my son and I have a bone to pick with you though.\" Coming up to his side you see an orc, who looks familiar. Then you remember, he was the orc whose sword you stole. You kicked him in the face and knocked him out, you should have gone back to kill him. Oh well, time to handle this now. The two orcs begin to circle you, the younger seeming eager to rush in. The older content with biding his time. The chief's son rushes in suddenly, he is quick and strong, but stupid and sloppy. You parry a downward blow, raking your axe blade across his thigh. He stumbles as he steps to the side, but manages to stop you from burying your sword into his neck. He swings at your neck, and, stepping back, you slice down into his chest, quickly retracting. He grunts in pain, blood oozing down from his wound. You hear something behind you\u2026 Turning, you duck under a strike that surely would have decapitated you. As you pivot, you run your sword along his side, and finishing you bury the axe blade behind his knee. As he falls you loop the axe around and over your head, about to bring it down for the final blow... Something stops you, the chief's son had leaped over, barring you with his sword. His other hand grips the blade, pushing your axe up. His face straining as you both struggle, genuine concern for his father on his face. With your other hand, you drive the sword through him. His brows furrow and his mouth gapes slightly, a small choked cry of pain escapes his lips. As you step back, you pull the sword out of him. Backing up several steps, you watch as the chief pulls himself up to kneel over his son. You can't hear what, but you see the chief's lips moving as he talks to his son. The son tries to speak, and the chief leans in to hear one last whisper before his son goes limp. Turning to you, rage is blazing in his eyes. He moves quickly despite his injuries, and almost bowls you over. You manage to roll out of the way, his sword striking the ground where you stood. In almost the same movement he turns, almost cleaving you in half. You try to chop him with your sword, but he buries his blade in the handle, pulling against the hilt as the sword is pulled from your hand. Gasping, with sweat running down your body, you attempt to chop his arm. The chief roars as he catches the axe by the shoulder, kicking you as he pulls it from your grip. Panting, you crawl back, trying to reach his son's sword. But you are too far, and the chief is too fast. He steps in, looping the sword around his head and raising it for the killing strike. Something pale blue hits his chest, emitting a pop and smoke, sizzling heard from the wound on his chest. He looks up as he staggers back, accidentally lowering the sword. Two more bolts slam into him, causing him to reel back and fall to the ground. Smoke rising from his body, and he lays still.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Rescued", "result": "You roll onto your side, to see Valek standing with her arm outstretched. As you stand, she runs over to you.\n\n\n\"Nolazir, are you okay?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, I'm fine,\" you grunt.\n\n\n\"What were those guys trying to kill you for anyway?\" \n\n\n\"Orc dispute. I didn't like his leadership, and they tried to kill me. Twice now.\"\n\n\nYou gather your weapons and take a second to gather your breath. The battle seems to have turned for the orcs. \n\n\nValek turns and pats you on the back.\n\n\n\"You alright? You didn't get tired from fighting a couple of orcs now did you?\"\n\n\n\"I thought elves didn't joke?\" you say.\n\n\n\"Now where did you hear that?\" She raises an eyebrow.\n\n\n\"Uhh, nevermind,\" you grunt.\n\n\nYou both watch as the orcs make their way through up to the front of the castle.\n\n\n\"So, where exactly are you from?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"The Velaneer Kingdom,\" she says. \"Only the best of the best.\"\n\n\n\"I know where you are from, but what did you come from?\"\n\n\n\"Well, you may be surprised to hear it, but I'm actually from a family of peasant farmers.\"\n\n\n\"Can't you elves use your magic to grow stuff.\"\n\n\n\"We can, which I guess made it easier. But we still needed to make a living, and the Kingdom needs a food supply.\"\n\n\n\"Aren't you elves all fancy? I couldn't imagine what elven peasants would look like.\"\n\n\n\"No, those are probably just common myths. While we do hold ourselves to a higher standard than all other races, we're not all getting fat off the spoils of the kingdom.\"\n\n\n\"So what are you doing here?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"I thought I could do better for my people than growing grapes and tomatoes, so I became a soldier. Surprised to say I rose through the ranks pretty quickly and found myself here.\"\n\n\n\"So you weren't happy with the life of a peasant, I get that.\"\n\n\n\"So, Nolazir, what about you?\" Valek asks.\n\n\n\"Hold on,\" you grunt. \"We're pushing through.\"\n\n\nAhead, the orcs seem to have breached the castle. Valek follows behind you, noticing that you are somewhat pissed at not being in the front of the fray. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Castle Fall", "result": "You pass over the bodies of the fallen, some horribly mangled, some looking almost peaceful laying on the ground. You see an elf and orc tangled up, the orc's hands wrapped around the elves neck, whose eyes are bulging from his skull. The orc still has a snarl frozen on his face, multiple dagger wounds on his ribs and back, with the elves hand still gripping the dagger.\n\n\nAs you enter the castle hall with Valek, the sounds of combat echo throughout the halls.\n\n\nEventually, you make your way through the main hall, littered with the corpses of elves and orcs. Throughout all of this, you don't see the corpse of the elf with the two different colored eyes.\n\n\nThe large golden doors to the King's chamber stand ajar. Holding your axe tightly, you step over to the door. You signal Valek as you get ready to open the door, and she preps to blast a bolt of magic.\n\n\nA shuffling sound and a groan come out from behind the door. You give Valek a sideways glance, and she nods. Throwing the door open, you step back and tighten your grip on your axe. Valek raises her hand...\n\n\nIn front of you, an orc shuffles towards you, his body covered in deep gorges, cuts, and burn wounds. In his hand is the head of an elf, which he holds by his long hair. Behind the orc the rest of the body lays in a golden robe, covered in wounds and with a bloody sword next to it.\n\n\nThe orc stops in front of you, throwing King Harribor's head to the ground, where it rolls to your feet. The King has one blue eye and one green eye. \n\n\nThe orc's mouth quivers slightly as he tries to say something, but he just falls forward.\n\n\nYou kneel next to him, feeling his pulse, but he is dead. \n\n\nAs the fighting in the rest of the castle recedes, dozens of elves come retreating into the chamber pursued by orcs, only to stop short at seeing the elf king's corpse. \n\n\nYou watch as the elves stare in shock, one of them, rather old for an elf draws his sword. You reflexively ready your axe. But the elf drives it through his own chest, gritting his teeth in pain as he pushes it in deeper before falling.\n\n\nSeveral of the elves follow suit. The rest, seemingly galvanized start firing bolts at the orcs, in a moment you see one heading straight for Valek.\n\n\nYou grab her, throwing her behind the door as the bolts fly by. Several manage to miss you as you throw her to safety. You turn to throw the axe, but the orcs have already overrun the remaining elves and have butchered them. \n\n\nYou just watch the carnage as you call Valek out. \n\n\n\"You didn't have to do that, you know,\" she says.\n\n\n\"Eh, it just seemed like the right thing to do.\"\n\n\nYou and her walk out onto the king's castle balcony. Some elves stop her to ask her some questions about prisoners and the remaining soldiers in the forests and hills. While she talks to them you step through the curtain.", "action_results": [{"action": "Balcony", "result": "It's a beautiful sight, the sun setting over the trees and the hills. The orange and purple rays playing over the horizon. \n\n\nCasting your glance down, gruesome corpses lay all around the castle yard and surrounding houses and buildings. Elves and orcs alike plunder and loot the corpses and treasures of the elven kingdom's capital. \n\n\nOutside, the elves move their catapults and shift columns of soldiers who got to sit and watch the battle. Somewhere to the left, you see allies moving in large groups of prisoners. Word of King Harribor's death spread quickly.\n\n\nThe curtain ruffles, and Valek steps out beside you.\n\n\n\"So, Nolazir, are you going to be staying around for a while?\" Valek asks.\n\n\n\"Hmm, yeah, just long enough to organize some things. What about you?\"\n\n\n\"Uhh, yeah I was planning on staying for a bit. Lots of prisoners to secure and people to move around.\"\n\n\n\"Great,\" you say. \"I'm sure I'll see you around then.\"\n\n\nValek wrinkles her nose, looking out at the carnage below.\n\n\n\"Sometimes, I wonder if it was all worth it,\" she says. \"So many people killed, and for what?\"\n\n\n\"I don't know why you elves started fighting each other, but they came to us making promises of strength and power. They thought we would be too short-sighted to see what they were trying to do.\"\n\n\nValek nods.\n\n\n\"They showed up in force, and we responded with greater force,\" you say.\n\n\n\"We had our reasons, but I just don't know what the point of it all really was,\" Valek says as she leans against the railing.\n\n\n\"Sure, the Wister elves were at odds with us, but these past few years, we made so many sacrifices. \"\n\n\n\"It wasn't all in vain,\" you say, \"they sacrificed to secure a better future. You might not see it now, but King Harribor was getting too bold, too greedy. He was putting you and us in jeopardy.\"\n\n\n\"Hmm, we will see about that,\" she says.\n\n\nYou both stop talking for a moment, and after a few seconds you look over to find her just looking at you.\n\n\n\"What's with the staring?\" you ask raising an eyebrow.\n\n\n\"I don't know, there's just something I like about you.\"\n\n\nYou take a step toward her, and, even though she is an elf, there is something you like about her too. You put your hand on the back of her head, pulling her in as you lean in. Her lips are much softer than an orc woman's. \n\n\nShe puts her hand on your shoulder as she begins to reciprocate\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Later...", "result": "You lay on your bed of blankets and pillows. Valek is snuggled up next to you, her hand resting on your chest, your arm wrapped around her lower back and resting between her hip and stomach. Her body very warm against yours.\n\n\n\"I hope no one heard us,\" she says.\n\n\n\"Screw 'em if they did.\"\n\n\n\"Well, this was a fun little experiment,\" she says. \"Too bad we won't have time for more of this.\"\n\n\nYou grunt in response to which she lightly slaps your chest.\n\n\n\"What's 'mrmmph' supposed to mean?\"\n\n\nYou grunt.\n\n\n\"Are you going to talk to me,\" she asks, \"or are you going to keep being weird?\"\n\n\nYou grunt in response.\n\n\nValek rolls over and grunts... to which you also grunt, causing her to grunt once again.\n\n\nValek laughs and snuggles closer to you. \n\n\n\"You're pretty funny for a big ugly orc. I'll miss you, I think.\"\n\n\n\"And you're not such a pretentious snob... for an elf.\"\n\n\nYou close your eyes and hold her close, knowing that this won't last long and you will soon have to return to your homelands\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Prologue Closing", "result": "The Wister Empire had fallen, allowing the elves and orcs to return to their homes at long last. In the coming years, relative peace would fall over the orcs, but a storm was forming over the horizon\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Chapter 1:Rising", "result": "Six years later...\n\n\nThe sun casts its golden rays over the blessed lands of Orcin, the blue sky showers the soft grass in its jubilee. The rivers run freely, the animals roam, and the people are happy.\n\n\nThe villages and tribes have recovered well from the four years of grinding combat with the elves. The Wister Elf nation has been absorbed into the Empire; the Imperial governor of the old nation has turned it into a labor force for the Empire. From what you have heard they have been sending a surplus of weapons, wagons, and even domestic equipment to their allies.\n\n\nA loud wailing sound pierces the silence you had lost yourself in. The baby cradled in your arm cries out, demanding attention. You rock the child in your arm, murmuring an old orcish lullaby. \n\nA little orc girl of three years waddles over and pats your knee. \n\n\n\"Dad, can I hold Lagrik?\" she asks. \n\n\n\"No, Vokra, I'm just getting him back to sleep,\" you say. \"You can play with him later.\"\n\n\nVokra walks off to pout but is soon distracted by her brother, Grovlar, who seems to have found a baby snake to play with. \n\n\nIt's been a long six years.\n\n\nThey've been filled with blessings though. Your wife and children are all healthy and strong, your humble farm yields healthy crops. The animals are all in good condition, and you have nothing you would consider a real problem. \n\n\nA quick pinch to your belly reminds you that you have gotten a little soft in these past few years. While you are still strong as an orc should be, it has been a while since you've actually had to do any vigorous work for extended periods of time. \n\n\nWell, other things call in the life of an orc. You hand the infant to your wife, as you go to chop up some more firewood for the coming night along with other chores that need to be done.\n\n\nYou raise the axe, cleaving the piece of wood in half\u2026\n\n\n \n\nLater in the day, you sit by the fire with your wife snuggled beside you. The children all snore gently in their beds of animal furs. Gilikia cradles the baby as he whimpers softly. \n\n\nAs you sit, you wonder how Valek is doing, if she is even alive. You haven't heard from her since you left the Wister Kingdom. More than likely she has probably moved on with the life of a soldier in search for something else, as most tend to do. ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Next Day", "result": "It's been a productive day. You've made sure the crops have adequate water, your animals are well fed and some are ready to be slaughtered soon. \n\n\nThe sound of hooves hitting the dirt causes your ear to prick. Looking over your shoulder, you see two orcs on horseback. \n\n\nOne you recognize as Rolomag, a few years younger than you and being the son of your cousin's sister in law. Something like that anyway. His hair tied up in a bun, similar to what many of the orcs seem to prefer these days, and his face clean shaven. \n\n\nThe other one you don't quite recognize, a little orc boy. About ten years of age.\n\n\n\"Nolazir,\" the older orc says, \"we need to talk.\"\n\n\n\"Alright, come in,\" you say. \"And whose kid is this?\"\n\n\n\"Huh? That's my little brother, Rolzagir.\"\n\n\nYou nod.\n\n\nThe two brothers hop down off the horse, the older handing the reigns to the younger, who goes to tie the horse to a post.\n\n\nThe other orcs in your village live pretty spread out, as everyone farms or at least owns some livestock. \n\n\n\"So what's going on Rolomag?\" you ask, sitting down on a wooden log.\n\n\nRolomag sits down as his brother walks over and leans against your house. \n\n\n\"Dekard spotted some Imperial patrols hovering near the border,\" Rolomag says. \"We think they are preparing to come through.\"\n\n\n\"For what?\" you say. \"They already took the elves. What do they want with us?\"\n\n\n\"Resources, food, animals, us\u2026 Hell if I know.\"\n\n\nRolomag stands up.\n\n\n\"Anyway, the village is meeting up to see what we're going to do about this.\"\n\n\n\"Is there really anything we can do?\" you ask. \"Maybe they just want to protect their border. I wouldn't put it past some of the border tribes to be raiding people on Imperial lands.\"\n\n\n\"You think that's the case?\"\n\n\n\"If it is, we need to stop them before the Empire takes it out on all of us.\"\n\n\nYou stand and go to your horse.\n\n\n\"No point in waiting around.\"\n\n\nYou, Rolomag, and Rolzagir all ride off to meet with all the other orcs.", "action_results": [{"action": "Village Meeting", "result": "All the orcs stand around a giant tree in the village center, waiting for your chief, Greusim, to speak. He stands on a flat rock, looking over everyone.\n\n\nGreusim has the raven black hair that all the orcs have, the sides shaved into a mohawk, with the back end running down to his upper back. White hairs scattered throughout his majestic hair. His face aged and wrinkled, giving him the appearance of a grumpy bulldog, and two sharp teeth protrude up from his under bite, a common trait among orcs. \n\n\nFor a moment you and he look at each other, his left eye always perpetually half closed, making him look vexed. Although the chief is one of the calmest orcs you have ever met.\n\n\n\"Everyone,\" he starts, \"it has come to my attention that the Imperials are amassing warriors by the borders between our lands.\"\n\n\nHe spreads his arms out.\n\n\n\"These very lands that have been our home since Gigalak gave it to the First Born.\" He pauses for a moment. \"We need to make sure these lands are protected, for the well being of all orcs, ourselves, and future generations. \"\n\n\nSome of the orcs start calling out for blood, to which Greusim shakes his head.\n\n\n\"No, we must watch what the Empire does, we cannot go out looking for a fight. Not this time, we must try to avoid conflict. Now, I will personally lead an expedition team to the border, and we will see what the Imperials are doing. There will likely be other tribes of orcs doing likewise, but if they fight the Empire, we will not interfere.\"\n\n\n\"What happened to all that shit about sticking together?!\" an orc cries angrily.\n\n\n\"We will only fight if they attack us first, we will not be the ones to start a war with the Empire. It would be deadly, and very long if we did so.\"\n\n\nYou all talk amongst each other. According to chief Greusim, this could be a very precarious situation. You call out.\n\n\n\"What if they are protecting their borders from orcs raiding Imperial lands?\" you ask. \"You know what some of the tribes are like.\"\n\n\nIf you could even call them that, some groups of orcs aren't even proper tribes. Just bands of raiders, thieves, and scum.\n\n\n\"If that is the case,\" the chief says, \"we will let them know they do not act on behalf of all of Orcin. Maybe, we would even help the Empire fight them on behalf of the rest of the tribes.\"\n\n\nThere is arguing amongst the orcs. The orcs have banded together to fight external threats, but never with a foreign power to fight other orcs. The affairs of orcs have always been kept to the tribes of orcin.\n\n\nHelping the Empire fight fellow orcs, no matter if they are scum, would be crazy.\n\n\n\"So, my friends,\" Greusim says, \"who will aid me on this quest.\"\n\n\nMany hands go up, the chief peering through the crowd to see who would be best.\n\n\nYou wonder if you should raise your hand, the expedition might call for experience and expertise, which you would have. On the other hand, you also don't really want to leave your family for an extended period of time. While Gilikia is strong and hard-working, two kids, an infant, and a multitude of chores would be difficult for her to handle by herself. Also, there is the fact that someone may need to run the village in Greusim's absence, which is also something you would be willing to do. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Raise Your Hand", "result": "You raise your hand, the chief's eyes widening slightly and a small grin creeps across his face. Seems like he was hoping you would join. The chief starts calling out names, yours and Rolomag's among them.\n\n\nThe other orcs shuffle off at the command of Greusim. You go off towards your house, to prepare for the expedition. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Expedition", "result": "With your supplies ready, you've said your goodbyes to your family and ride over to the village center, where three dozen orcs have gathered. \n\n\nGreusim nods his head towards the mountains, leading the group forward. You ride on for the whole day, passing streams, rivers, fields, and forests.\n\n\nAfter some days you come to the foot of the mountains. On the other side of this lies the border between Imperial lands and Orcin.\n\n\nRolomag cuts you a look, raising his eyebrows and gesturing towards the mountains. You wonder why he seems annoyed by the mountains, as he knew you would be traversing them.", "action_results": [{"action": "Mountain Trail", "result": "The howling wind's cruel bite pierces your fur and leather clothing. It takes the dying leaves from the trees with it, spiraling down to the depths below. Crags point out accusingly, and cliffs dare you to come too close. \n\n\nYou all ride in a single file line, making sure your horses don't slip and fall to certain doom below.\n\n\nSomewhere above, something skitters along the rocks. There is nothing to be seen up there, very strange. Could just be some mountain critters going about their day.\n\n\nFinally, after a whole day of moving painstakingly slow, you get off the steep paths of doom. Ahead the road is far wider, and there is vegetation and pools of water for the horses. Stopping the horses to rest, you all huddle behind the chief as he looks out from the mountain.\n\n\nThe mountain curves down into a valley, and even below that are the great forests guarding Orcin. Miles and miles of trees, and eventually you can see large Imperial cities interspersed throughout the forests, hills, mountains, and plains in the distance. To the right, past a large river, are huge plains that are home to the more nomadic orc tribes, as well as the vagabond types roaming Orcin.\n\n\n\"Beyond this mountain, where the First Born was created, the Empire seeks out our land,\" Greusim says while he takes in the fresh mountain air, gesturing to the forests and plains below.\n\n\n\"We will give them a warm welcome, or a bloodbath,\" Greusim says. \"It's their choice.\"\n\n\nThe group rests there for the night, leaving guards to watch out for wild creatures or individuals who would do harm.\n\n\nThe next few days are full of eventful walks down the mountain. \n\n\nSoon, the path to the valley is in sight.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Through the Valley", "result": "Silence. No wind. No talking.\n\n\nYou all sit on your horses, staring into the valley. Ahead, what appears to be scattered remains of tents and campfires lay around. \n\n\nAs you advance towards the deserted campground, your eyes dart back and forth, to every rock and every tree. Something doesn't quite feel right here.\n\n\nAs you ride through the camp, you notice some of the tents seem to have been ripped open. There aren't any bodies or anything, and by the camp's design, it belonged to some orcs.\n\n\nOn the ground is a tattered blanket, pinned under a tent stake, and almost blowing in the wind. Hopping off the horse, you look underneath it. A dagger made out of bone and hide sits under it, dark red blood sticking to the blade.\n\n\nYou hold it over your shoulder, showing it to the chief, who takes it in his hand. \n\n\n\"Something definitely came through here,\" he looks into the trees above, \"but what?\"\n\n\n\"Nothing I want to find out about,\" Rolomag says, much louder than he should.\n\n\nYou put a finger to your lip, looking up to the trees. They sway in the wind, maybe carrying something deadly within them.\n\n\nYou're not sure, but for a moment it sounds like something is whispering to you from the trees.\n\n\nGreusim signals the group to mount up and move on, which you do gladly. \n\n\nYou all gallop out of the valley, and into the forests ahead.", "action_results": [{"action": "First Encounter", "result": "With the strange campsite far behind you, the group seems to be more at ease. The forest is much more serene and offers some peace and quiet.\n\n\nA stream trickles by, as your horse steps over it, you hear some sounds up ahead.\n\n\nGreusim looks over his shoulder at the group behind him, and you nod at him. \n\n\nYou, Greusim, Rolomag, Dekard, and some other orcs all leave your horses to go scout ahead. The main group waits for your return.\n\n\nThe unmistakable sounds of violence penetrate your ears. Peering from the foliage, you see two things. The first must be Imperial soldiers, with their flat top helms and robes over what appears to be some kind of silver coat.\n\n\nCowards. The orcs only use some padding from their leather armor and sometimes studs. Anything more would just weigh a warrior down and keep him from being effective. \n\n\nFrom what you can see, they have two separate lines of archers by the trees, and in the clearing between them are soldiers on horseback. Ahead, on a rocky hill, a group of orcs seems to be holding their ground, trading arrows with the Imperial archers. Once in a while, an orc taking a shot at one of the horsemen, but always missing.\n\n\nIn between two groups lays a slain Imperial, a spear in his back, and a dead orc with the spear still gripped in his hands. The orc has several arrows protruding from his back. Judging by his face paint, it looks like these orcs are one of the lawless bands of orcs.\n\n\n\"We need to help them,\" Rolomag says as he starts forward.\n\n\nYou grab him by the shoulder, pulling him back.\n\n\n\"Stop. We don't know who started it,\" you say. \"This isn't a proper orc tribe. They're just some vagabonds.\"\n\n\n\"Does it matter? They're still orcs,\" Rolomag says.\n\n\n\"No, Nolazir may be right,\" Greusim says. \"We should let the Imperials know they aren't working on behalf of all of orcin.\"\n\n\n\"Are you really going to listen to this?\" Rolomag asks. \"Nolazir, the Empire won't care either way. They will blame all of us.\"\n\n\n\"No, we can make peace with them,\" Greusim says.\n\n\nGreusim looks at you.\n\n\n\"You believe me, don't you, Nolazir?\"\n\n\nChief Greusim looks genuinely concerned about whether or not you believe him or not. You look to Rolomag, he raises an eyebrow, not lifting the scowl on his face for a moment.", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk to the Imperials", "result": "\"We will talk to them,\" you say. \"We can't achieve peace through war, not this time.\"\n\n\n\"Thank you, friend,\" Greusim says.\n\n\nWith this, Greusim leads you all over to the Imperials. You all move slowly, hands in sight, and with Greusim several feet ahead. The Imperial knight ahead jerks his head back as he sees your group. The other horsemen seem alarmed, but ultimately don't do anything.\n\n\n\"Friends,\" Greusim calls out, \"we have come to tell you, those lawless do not act on behalf of Orci-\"\n\n\nTo this day, no one knows where it came from, if it was a stray arrow from the lawless orcs meant for an Imperial knight or an Imperial archer who was too hasty in his actions, but everyone knew it was what started one of the largest conflicts in the history of Velis Brum. \n\n\nGreusim gasps, an arrow piercing his side. Crimson red oozes out of the wound soon after. With a roar, the other orcs charge forward in rage.\n\n\n\"Wait,\" Greusim wheezes out, trying to compose himself.\n\n\nIn response, the Imperials charge forth, ready to fight the orcs. The knight who had first seen your group holds his hand out, signaling the other knights.\n\n\n\"No, stop,\" he commands. \n\n\nBut the knights just keep charging, and the two groups embroil in deadly combat.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight the Horsemen", "result": "Looking between the groups, you and the knight find each other. He still seems shocked, having tried to stop his men from attacking. As you both make eye contact, you nod at him. Both of you share a resigned look, but know this must be done.\n\n\nYou draw your sword, and the knight does likewise. He holds the sword in front of his face, putting his forehead to the hilt for a moment before readying it to fight. You both spur your horses forward.", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge", "result": "As you get closer to him, you arc your sword over your head, aiming for his neck. The Imperial soldier slams it away with the flat of his blade and, mid-push, brings his blade back down. The sword cuts through your thick leather armor, biting into your shoulder.\n\n\nYou wince and grunt as he pulls his sword, the both of you passing each other and turning in preparation to charge again. Behind him, you see that the orcs seem to have pushed the Imperial horsemen back a bit, and the orcs on the hill have wounded several archers in each column. \n\n\nThe battle is going well enough for the orcs. \n\n\nAs you charge the Imperial knight again, you consider your next move.", "action_results": [{"action": "Slice through him with your sword", "result": "As you ride forward, you prepare to slash into his neck again. You pull the sword over the opposite shoulder of the hand it's in. As the Imperial gets closer, you go for a vicious swing.\n\n\nHe twists his wrist, blocking it near the hilt, pushing your sword up. As your blade slides off his, the knight arcs the deadly weapon over his head the opposite way. As you pass each other he swings his sword back.\n\n\nYour mouth gapes open as the tip of the blade digs into your back, cutting across the length of your back. It notably severs your spine. As your horse trots forward you feel a numbness creep from your waist and through your legs. \n\n\nAs the horse starts to turn, you begin to feel dizzy, the numbness spreading through the rest of your body. You see the knight watching you, his sword at the ready. You don't even realize that you've fallen off your horse, the numbness finishing spreading through your body.\n\n\nThen, an eternal night. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Run him through", "result": "The horses charge forward, the Imperial knight holds his sword out in front of him, ready for whatever may come next. You arc your sword around your head, and you see his arm flex to deflect the strike. \n\n\nAs you near striking range, you whip the sword around counter clockwise, pulling your elbow back and plunging forward. The knight manages to knock your sword aside, flicking his wrist and stabbing the tip of his blade into your chest. The momentum causes the tip of the blade to just come out through your back. \n\n\nPain shoots through your body and you gasp. The force of the sword pushing into you causes you to fall back, but you manage to catch onto your horse, stopping you from falling off. You clutch the wound as the horses circle back around.\n\n\nLooking back you can see the Imperials are starting to overwhelm the orcs. How can this be? There are far more orcs than those human scum. \n\n\nWhite hot pain shoots through your chest again, and you clutch the wound. Blood sticks to your hand as you pull it away.\n\n\n\"Damn it,\" you say.\n\n\nThe Imperial knight twirls his sword, daring you to come at him again. Such arrogance.\n\n\nYou decide to oblige him, charging forward. He prepares his sword, expecting you to strike again.\n\n\nThis time you pull up your axe, but hold it down behind the horse. You strike with the sword, and he predictably parries it. This time you slam your axe blade into his side, and as you circle back around you smirk as you see that\u2026..\n\n\nThere's no blood?\n\n\nYou see the spot on his side where you swung the axe, but the robe is just ripped, the silver coat gleaming in the sunlight. \n\n\nIs this some kind of magic coat? Or maybe it is some kind of metal. You've never seen anyone wear metal to avoid battle injuries. You've also never actually seen a human before either.\n\n\nAs the knight prepares to charge again, your body begins to feel weak. You're losing blood fast, so you are going to have to finish this or he will. The knight charges towards you\u2026\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Throw your axe at the Knight (W)", "result": "You sit there panting, and for a moment you see that the orcs on the hill have finally come down, and helped turn the fight around for the orcs. \n\n\nThe soldier readies his sword, and you lift your axe, hefting it forward.\n\n\nIt flies, whipping through the air. The blade buries into the horses forehead, it lets out a pained neigh and drops forward. The knight flies forward and off the horse, crying out as he does. \n\n\nYou hear a crunch as he hits the ground, and he rolls to a stop. Trotting forward, you prepare your sword to finish him.\n\n\nThe knight grunts and feebly tries to stand up, but one of his arms is horribly bent. He loses his balance and falls before he can get up.\n\n\nYou feel dizzy as you raise your sword, pain shooting through your arm.\n\n\nBefore you can strike him down, you hear a loud cry emanating out from behind you.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "For the Emperor! (W)", "result": "You turn your horse, clutching your wounds. From out of the trees, an enormous group of humans comes rushing out, screaming and yelling. You notice they are quite different from the knights. While some of them have the silver coats, most of them just have some kind of padding and the Imperial soldier robes. Their boots, gloves, and helmets don\u2019t look anywhere near as nice as the knights'.\n\n\nThese must be the lowly soldiers of the Empire, but there sure are a lot of them. Wincing, you turn as you see the lawless orcs bring up a cry, charging towards the humans. You watch as your comrades also charge the humans, so you decide you should as well.\n\n\nGalloping forward, you prepare your axe. A battle of strength versus numbers, you decide that Gigalak will decide the winner today. \n\n\nYou trample a couple of humans, their cries ringing out. The axe bites into another, and as he dies his sword nicks your arm. You slash, hack, batter, and even punch one. A dying soldier cries out, digging his dagger into your side. You gasp and slam your axe handle into his eye, a squishing sound resounds as blood squirts out and onto your leg. He lets out a blood-curdling scream as he flails, soon going limp and falling to the ground. \n\n\nWith the dagger still in your side, you circle back, needing to fight through a few more soldiers to do so. Panting, you see that the battle is being lost for the orcs, but some still fight on, despite their injuries and overwhelming odds. \n\n\nChief Greusim charges into the middle of it, laying waste to soldier after soldier. His mighty club denting helmets and cracking skulls, breaking arms and busting jaws. \n\n\nYou watch as he cries out, someone plunging their sword into his side. Gasping, you ride forward to save him. But there are too many soldiers to fight through, and before you can reach him the grunts pull Greusim from his horse, stabbing, slashing, punching, and beating. You see his own club being raised to be used against him.\n\n\nAll the other orcs in your tribe watch as the chief goes down, along with the other orcs he had around him. \n\n\nThere's just too many, you'll never fight through them all.\n\n\n\"Fall back! Fall back!\" some orc cries out.\n\n\nAs you all do so, the lawless orcs seem shocked as to why. Before they can get away, the Imperial troops have swept them up and begin to butcher most of them. Few escape, and you even swing one onto your horse as you ride away. You trample and hack several Imperial soldiers on your way out. \n\n\nYou all ride into the forest, lucky to have escaped death on this day. The same cannot be said for many others. \n\n\nYou exchange glances with Rolomag, who nods and pokes his chin to the valley. Although you don't like the idea, you all will have to go there to recover and make plans\u2026.", "action_results": [{"action": "New Problems", "result": "You sit there by the fire. Rolomag sits across from you, taking a swig from a flask of orcish whiskey before handing it to you. You gladly accept, the bitter substance burning your throat as it goes down.\n\n\nThe camp is silent except for the tribeless orcs squabbling over something. \n\n\n\"We're gonna have to go back,\" Rolomag says.\n\n\n\"What? Back where?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"The village. We need more orcs. We have to get these Imperials out of our lands.\"\n\n\n\"I don't think it's going to work so well,\" you say, \"there's so many of them.\"\n\n\n\"What's wrong with you?\" Rolomag says, \"I used to hear stories about you from returning orcs in our village.\"\n\n\n\"That was years ago. This is now. Greusim was right. We can't fight them.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, well those animals tore him apart. It's our job to get vengeance.\"\n\n\nYou sit and stare into the fire, realizing the Imperials are probably already marching further into Orcin. Grunting as you stand, you walk over to the wild group of lawless orcs. \n\n\n\"Who of you is your leader?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"I am!\" one orc cries as he stands.\n\n\n\"No, I am!\" another yells.\n\n\nThey both start brawling, savagely punching and wrestling each other. You shake your head and look to the rest. A tall orc stands, one tooth protruding up from his underbite, the other chipped, warpaint in the shape of a red handprint on his face. His raven black hair runs wild along his head, the sides shaved as is popular with warring orcs. \n\n\n\"I am Grolik,\" he says, \"leader of the Red Handed orcs band.\"\n\n\nYou extend your hand and shake his in the traditional orc handshake. \n\n\n\"I am grateful for your assistance,\" Grolik says. \"We probably wouldn't have made it out of there.\"\n\n\n\"We orcs need to stick together,\" you say, \"but I wonder. How did this all start?\"\n\n\nGrolik looks to the side and shuffles his feet.\n\n\n\"We\u2026.uhh, we thought they were invading and tried to stop them.\"\n\n\nYou squint your eyes at him.\n\n\n\"You weren't raiding Imperial villages on their side of the border?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Well\u2026uh\u2026.no?\" he says.\n\n\n\"You realize you've put Orcin in jeopardy,\" you say.\n\n\n\"We can probably work something out with the Empire,\" Grolik says. \"Hell, they probably think they've won.\"\n\n\n\"I have half a mind to turn you over to them,\" you say, \"but I just want to get this all settled, and go back home.\"\n\n\nGrolik laughs hard at this.\n\n\n\"What? Have you gotten soft?\" he asks, \"what kind of orc are you?\"\n\n\nBefore he can react, your slam your fist into his face, bowling him over. Some Red Hands grab their nearest weapons and stand up. Several of your tribesmen prepare for a fight as well.\n\n\n\"No, no. It's alright,\" Grolik says. \"Don't worry about him. He's just a fool.\"\n\n\nGrolik snarls as he stands.\n\n\n\"But if you ever do that again,\" he says, \"it won't end well for you.\"\n\n\nYou just watch as he goes back to his spot next to the fire and guzzles some alcohol.\n\n\nGrunting, you walk back over to Rolomag.\n\n\n\"Just as I thought,\" you say. \"We shouldn't even be involved. They started this mess.\"\n\n\nRolomag's eyes widen for a moment before going back to staring sleepily at the fire.\n\n\n\"We still lost good friends there,\" he says. \"We need to right this.\"\n\n\n \n\nThe next day, Dekard and three other orcs ride back to the village to get some help. You're sure some of the orcs will be happy to have some fighting to do. Although you can't be sure where this will lead, you will be happy to keep the Imperials away.\n\n\nYou sit back, closing your eyes to rest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Two Months Later...", "result": "The wind plays along your hair, the warm morning sunshine gracing your face. The rocky outcrop you lay upon offering you a complete view of the Imperial camp ahead. \n\n\nThe past two months had been spent watching and tracking the Imperials. Their move into Orcin has been slow, and, other than a few minor fights with other random lawless bands, they have not done much. \n\n\nYou watch soldiers milling about, their purple and black standards dotting the camp. Stern officers watch younger soldiers and recruits train, practice, and do drills. Oddly, it looks much like an orcish war band preparing for battle. Only, the humans have a lot more wagons and crates of supplies than orcs, who mostly live off the land as they go.\n\n\nThe camp of soldiers still outnumbers your group, even with back up from the camp and some more tribeless orcs rallying to the Red Handed cause. Grolik's band are even more impatient and bloodthirsty than regular orcs. \n\n\nGrolik sits behind you, mumbling something as he sharpens his axe blade. His plan is just to march in and start slaughtering people, but you know you'll only be overwhelmed and killed. These soldiers are too numerous and too skilled for those tactics. \n\n\nYou're going to have to go with another plan, somewhat against your nature, but maybe it'll help win this fight.\n\n\nAlmost on cue, a column of soldiers marches onto the road running through the camp. They all have their helmets and silver coats, as well as varying degree of light weapons. \n\n\n\"Humans sure do dress strangely for battle,\" you say.\n\n\nLeading the column is a knight on a horse, looking very similar to the knights you first encountered. \n\n\nYou signal the orcs around you, slowly making your way down the rocky hill. \n\n\n\"Come on,\" Grolik complains. \"Let's charge 'em!\"\n\n\n\"No, we must wait.\"\n\n\nPutting your finger to your lips, you follow the Imperials as they move through the forest. They move quite slowly, and some don't really seem to even be paying attention. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Circle", "result": "Your orcs faithfully carry out your plan, most moving ahead and some around the Imperial soldiers, until you have created a c-shape around them.\n\n\nEvery orc has the same tools for fighting these humans. As they march forward, you prepare to throw one of your spears. Lifting it, you watch as the knight stops and looks to his right. As you chuck the spear, he looks ahead. Somehow he manages to duck and slip off the horse, hitting the ground and rolling before the spear can hit him.\n\n\nYou watch as it harmlessly bounces off a soldiers helmet. Once an eerie silence, the area now erupts with men and orcs shouting, as orcs fire arrows relentlessly at the soldiers. As you notch an arrow, the knight lays down behind his fallen horse. \n\n\nYou observe the arrows and most spears bouncing off the silver coats they wear. Although some are killed when they are hit in spots the coat doesn't cover, such as arms, legs, and their faces. You are surprised to see one spear actually pierce the armor, but it can't have gone too deep as the soldier is still standing. \n\n\nThe soldiers hide behind their shields and armor, most of the projectiles becoming useless. The orcs get sick of all this shooting and decide to charge the Imperials. As you draw your axe and run forth, you see the Imperials making a line of shields with other Imperials standing between them and firing arrows through.\n\n\nThe orcs are pierced by arrows as their axes and swords bounce uselessly off the shields. Getting closer, you watch an Imperial bash an orc with his shield before slicing through his padded leather shirt with his sword.\n\n\nYou rush in, throwing your shoulder into one of them. The human doesn't quite fall, but you ram your axe head's spike into his face. He cries out in pain and falls, and you barely have time to react before other soldiers close the gap. You leap back as three blades are swung and jabbed at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Break", "result": "While some Imperials have been killed, they are quickly whittling down your numbers. To your left, you see the knight caught out of the line, trying to rally his soldiers. You watch as an orc chops at his head with an axe, but it bounces off his helmet. The knight rams his sword blade through the orc's armpit, pushing the dying orc off. \n\n\nAnother orc slashes, the blade harmlessly skidding across the helmet. Before the orc is cut down, he slams the flat of the axe on the soldier's helm, slightly denting it. \n\n\nYou look to the Imperial with the protruding spear from his silver coat, and the knights dented helmet. You get an idea\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Smash a rock on the knight", "result": "You run up to the knight, parrying a jab, tackling him and throwing his sword to the ground. The knight rolls to the side, slamming his fist into your stomach as he comes up to a crouch. It barely affects you, but he reaches his sword.\n\n\nAs he grabs it, he stumbles and, seeing your moment, you grab a large rock. The knight twirls around, crying out and trying to take your head. You duck, the blade swooshing over your head. With a mighty roar, you stand, slamming the rock onto his helmet.\n\n\nThe sound of metal crashing attacks your ears. The Empire's knight crumples to the ground, a large dent in his helm. You kneel down, slamming the rock into his helmet again and again. The helmet crushing inward unnaturally and the man's body spasming as blood seeps out from under his helmet. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Retreat", "result": "The orcs give a cry as the knight dies, and the Imperials try to execute a controlled retreat. Some orcs mimic you in using force to crush the helmets and pierce the silver coats. You notice though, that most of the weapons used seem heavily damaged after.\n\n\nPicking up an Imperial shield, you catch up to some unfortunate and ram the shield into his helmet, denting it. You slam the point of the shield into his face until it is a pink, bloody, unrecognizable mass of flesh. \n\n\nAt this point, the soldiers are in full flight, attempting to reach the safety of the camp. It is not too much longer before all of the Imperials lay butchered on the ground.\n\n\nPanting and covered in sweat and blood, you lean against a tree. You watch as the orcs loot the corpses, taking Imperial weapons. \n\n\nCurious, you walk over to one of the bodies, removing his silver coat. It clanks together as you move it about and is heavier than you thought. Peering closely, it appears as though it is made up of many little rings of metal. You fold it up and stash it inside an Imperial soldiers satchel, which you also take. \n\n\nYou assist the orcs with collecting the dead and wounded, intent on better preparing for your next encounter...", "action_results": [{"action": "Two Years Later...", "result": "The past two years have been successful in repelling the Empire. While you wish it didn't have to come to this, you know that these humans can't freely move their army around Orcin without consequence. \n\n\nShortly after ambushing that patrol two years ago, you led the orcs into a nighttime raid on the camp. Your warriors cut throats, burned tents and supplies, and left few survivors. Since then, the human generals have sent more and more troops to try to contain the situation. \n\n\nOnce this had happened, you enlisted the help of a couple of the other surrounding orc tribes. Using your newfound guerilla tactics, you managed to keep the skirmishes to the forests at the borders of Orcin. \n\n\nIn the meantime, your fellows had created some advancements to cracking the metal shells of the Imperials. Heavy tipped arrows and spears for piercing the chainmail armor, as you have since learned was the name for their \"silver coats\". You had also taken the heavy wooden clubs and trimmed down the large wooden portion for a couple metal rings wrapped around the tip. This would make them easier to swing, and it is easier to dent Imperial helmets, as well as bruise and break limbs. \n\n\nAlso, having taken some of the chainmail, you and the others have learned how to make your own in recent months. Although you were not able to make steel, you used iron to make chain rings and studs woven into your leather padded clothing. \n\n\nThis had decreased the chances of death for your orcs, forcing the Imperials to get more creative with their killing methods as you have had to. For a while, you had the upper hand until they developed heavier weapons that could easily pierce mail.\n\n\nNeither the orc tribes nor the Imperials have made any attempts at establishing peace or any sort of treaty. It just seems as though these fights have become normal for both sides by now, although the council has sent you several messages asking to make a treaty. You always send the messenger back, telling them to come do it if they are worried about it. It isn't that you do not want peace, but the Imperials have become pretty skittish at the sight of orcs, each side shoots first and asks questions later.", "action_results": [{"action": "Interruption", "result": "Two loud voices shout just outside of your tent. Pushing the flaps aside you step out and are not surprised to see that Rolomag and Grolik are arguing again. While Grolik was a problem for a while, he seemed to warm up after you unknowingly saved his cousin's life a few months ago. \n\n\nYou watch as the two bicker like some old married couple.\n\n\n\"Grolik, you're a fool if you think we can push into Imperial territory,\" Rolomag shouts.\n\n\n\"My orcs haven't looted anything in weeks. We're getting restless.\"\n\n\n\"See, I can agree on invading soldier camps,\" Rolomag replies, \"but actually going into their home villages and towns is asking for more than we can handle.\"\n\n\n\"It's only a matter of time before they start attacking ours,\" Grolik says. \"Once they realize we've been trading with the surrounding neutral villages, they'll start wiping them out. And there are innocent people in those villages too.\"\n\n\n\"Why do you care? You're worried the Empire is going to steal your victims?\"\n\n\n\"Of course I care, they're fellow orcs damn it! Besides, we only raid fellow bands of 'tribeless orcs', like ourselves.\"\n\n\n\"So you've never raided a village?\"\n\n\n\"Well\u2026.maybe we've stolen crops and cattle here and there. But that's survival, and we usually don't murder anyone. Besides, we wouldn't want to bring the wrath of the council on us.\"\n\n\n\"But you have no problem stirring up the Empire?\" Rolomag asks.\n\n\n\"It was the same thing with them. We stole crops and cattle when we needed. I thought if anything they would just bolster their defenses, not send a damn legion in here.\"\n\n\nGrolik seems to realize he has stepped too close to Rolomag and sighs as he takes a step back.\n\n\n\"Besides,\" he says, \"they're not completely innocent. They've made dozens of trespasses in years past.\"\n\n\nYou stand and watch, a scowl on your face. They both are right to some degree. It seems that you can either escalate the conflict or remain in this little stalemate. \n\n\nYou have also been made aware that the goblins living in the Southwest of Orcin, who have always been rivals with the lawless, have become bolder. After years of constant skirmishing with the lawless orc bands, the goblins have gotten more organized, made better equipment, and even have moved further into Orcin.\n\n\nThis is an issue for everyone as the lawless orcish tribes and the goblins have usually kept too many dwarves, humans, and more adventurous ogres and other invasive creatures from coming too far in from there. While you are sure there are smaller pockets of goblins and other creatures in the orc lands, these goblins have only increased in number. \n\n\nNow, with the lawless focused on the Mannate Empire, and the goblins moving away from the Southwestern border, you've heard of dwarves making a steady advance into the lands. They mostly just mine for raw materials, the only military presence being small teams to protect the miners. You are aware that many of the dwarves have a partnership with the Empire, and, at any moment, they could push into the hills and plains and into the heart of Orcin.", "action_results": [{"action": "Issues at hand", "result": "Stopping your thoughts, you decide to intervene before Rolomag and Grolik come to blows.\n\n\n\"Enough,\" you say. \"We will figure all of this out.\" \n\n\nIt seems that you have become the unofficial chief of your tribe since Greusim's doom, and even his son Galik hasn't tried to challenge this. It has its benefits, but also its own headaches.\n\n\n\"Well, Nolazir,\" Rolomag says, \"what will it be?\"\n\n\n\"Neither for now,\" you say. \"We need to amass strength before we do anything else. We can probably keep them in this stalemate for a while.\"\n\n\n\"You need to act now,\" Grolik says. \"I think you've become complacent, and that never ends well in these situations.\"\n\n\n\"Grolik,\" you say, \"while we have many orcs, I don't think we have enough to keep this up for too much longer. All the humans need to do is galvanize a couple of legions, and they could wipe these mountains with our corpses.\"\n\n\nYou grunt and spread your arms out for a moment.\n\n\n\"We can't risk escalating right now,\" you say, \"but we also need to keep up the appearance of being a larger force, and we know this won't keep up for long.\"\n\n\nYou gesture for the two to enter your tent, where you have a large map of Orcin pinned to a wooden table.\n\n\n\"See here?\" You point on the map. \"The goblins started out here. The lawless orcs drove them way out over here.\"\n\n\nGrolik grunts in surprise, apparently unaware that they had covered so much ground.\n\n\n\"We need to either wipe them out,\" you say, \"or make a treaty, which I like better.\"\n\n\n\"What?\" Grolik says. \"They're filth, scavengers, and cowards.\"\n\n\n\"They're organized,\" you say, \"and like you and your lawless tribes, they have kept the dwarves away. If we can make a treaty between them and the lawless tribes, you all should be able to live close enough, back where they originally were.\"\n\n\nYou point back to where the goblins originally lived.\n\n\n\"Once we have made peace with them,\" you say, \"your orcs can enjoy whatever spoils they take from the Imperials. We'll even help you establish farms and trade with the rest of the orcs.\"\n\n\n\"Why would we want that?\" Grolik asks.\n\n\n\"No more hungry winters. Besides, don't think I don't know what you all do for food when you're desperate.\"\n\n\nGrolik's eyes dart to the ground, his face wincing for a brief moment.\n\n\n\"What are you talking about?\" he says, not so much asking.\n\n\n\"You know damn well. It's against Gigalak.\"\n\n\n\"It was just survival\u2026\" Grolik says.\n\n\n\"Yeah, well we're not animals\u2026 or wendigos.\"\n\n\nThere is a silence as Grolik shifts uncomfortably. Rolomag just pretends he is not paying attention as he studies the map. \n\n\n\"Now,\" you say, \"while I deal with the goblins, can you gather some of the lawless tribes?\"\n\n\nGrolik still looks ashamed, but he nods.\n\n\n\"If I promise them some loot, food, and some autonomy\u2026 then yeah, I can.\"\n\n\n\"Good, now can you and your best go handle that?\"\n\n\nGrolik nods and walks out of the tent. After a few moments, Rolomag speaks.\n\n\n\"Damn,\" he says, \"didn't know things were that desperate for them. Now I guess I can see why they loot.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, well we will put an end to that soon enough.\"\n\n\nYou sigh and grab a pack of supplies.\n\n\n\"Rolomag, stay here and watch over the camp,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Where are you going?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"I'm taking a group, we're going to go take care of the goblins, one way or another.\"\n\n\nWith this you exit the tent, gathering some trusted orcs for the trip.", "action_results": [{"action": "One Month Later...", "result": "The last several weeks have yielded little results. After reaching the deserted camp of the goblins, you can only assume they had moved deeper into Orcin. At this point, you're wondering if going total war on them wouldn't be a bad idea.\n\n\nWhile orcs do not always completely waste their enemies, conflict can get messy and shit happens. This might become one of those instances if the goblins keep pissing you off.\n\n\nAs you travel deeper into the hills, the light drizzle overhead turns into a heavy pelting. At first, you see one, then two dim fires in the distance. The fields and hills slowly turning to marsh and then swamp as the trees in the outskirts give heed to many mysteries and dangers.\n\n\nSince the beginning, the orcs have always stayed well enough away from the swamps of their own homeland. Except for some light traveling on the outskirts, there has always been some common knowledge that something terrifying resides deep within. It would seem that, perhaps, the goblins welcome the unknown fear that the swamplands bring.\n\n\nYou look to your orcs, signaling them to travel through the swamps and towards what might be the goblin's camp. At first, you just see some lamps tacked onto the trees, but soon you see the campfires ahead.\n\n\nAfter some time, you finally reach the camp. It consists of wooden huts, bridges, and walkways to evade the murky waters. Several goblins sound a horn as they see you, all preparing to defend themselves. You raise your hands, signaling you are not a threat.\n\n\nThe goblins seem to be reluctant until one comes forward.\n\n\n\"Hey, stop!\" it cries. \"I recognize you\u2026 aren't you the orc chieftain?\"\n\n\n\"Yes.\" you say. \"Where is your chief?\"\n\n\nThe goblins all look at each other, seemingly whispering amongst themselves. You slowly reach down to your side, clutching your axe. After what seems like a long time, one of the goblins finally steps down and around to the closest walkway.\n\n\nThis one seems to be wearing some sort of fur shawl, the skulls of various animals and other races adorning his belt. What appears to be a large snake tooth hangs from a necklace on his neck. His black hair is tied up into a messy knot which seems common for goblin shamans. \n\n\n\"Chief Gru'zikular is not taking guests right now,\" the goblin says as he starts to turn around.\n\n\n\"Yeah, well you're encroaching on our territory,\" you say. \"I'm here to ask you to go back to where you came from.\"\n\n\nThe goblin turns, his yellow eyes appear to be gleaming. A sick smile spreads across his face.\n\n\nYou frown, knowing that something isn't right about this particular goblin. This one seems different from the rest.\n\n\n\"What? Go back to those hellholes you call caves?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"I don't care if you go into the caves or not. The dwarves are creeping into that area, as well as other things. You used to keep them away, and your presence would probably slowly force them to back off.\"\n\n\nThe goblin just stares at you.\n\n\n\"If you go back, it can be beneficial for all of us,\" you continue. \"I can even get the tribeless orcs to leave you all alone. You can build proper houses such as the ones you have here.\"\n\n\n\"You see, orc,\" the goblin says, \"these swamps had always been the homes of the goblin people. We were never supposed to be cave dwellers as everyone seems to think.\"\n\n\nThe goblin raises his hand as the other goblins start to join in. They immediately go silent.\n\n\n\"I demand to see your leader,\" you say. \"I will not listen to this foolishness.\"\n\n\nThe strange look on the goblin's face intensifies. His teeth showing as his sick smile widens.\n\n\n\"As you have asked, so shall it be,\" he says. \"Just East, further in, you can find our leader.\"\n\n\nThe goblin gestures, showing the way.\n\n\n\"I advise you though, green one, the Master's work is best not interfered with.\"\n\n\nYou furrow your brow, wondering at the meaning. You look at the whole group of goblins, who, compared to this one, seem like they are more even-minded. \n\n\nAlso, you seem pretty sure that this emissary for their chief may have been threatening you all. But he is just a goblin, you could crush him if needed.\n\n\n\"Tell me, who are you?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"I am the Shaman, Rozibu,\" he says, \"speaker for Gru'zikular and humble servant of the Master.\"\n\n\nYou squint at him. Perhaps it would be best to return and have the tribeless bands inhabit the lands the goblins used to live in. It would accomplish a dual purpose; each group gets their own respective territory and stops fighting, and it is not like the goblins are using any land that you are not. Also, the tribeless orcs could probably keep the dwarves out.\n\n\nAs you stare at the forest beyond, you get a feeling, not of immediate danger from the goblins standing before you, but a dark foreboding.\n\n\nYou and the goblin stare each other down, the whole time you think about what you should do. \n\n\n[Add link for Reign of Amortia]", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn Back", "result": "Sensing that continuing on this mission would be foolish, you begin to leave.\n\n\n\"I don't think that will be necessary,\" you say as you nod your head.\n\n\nYour orcs protest, but you hold up a hand to silence them. The goblin just smirks and bids you farewell.\n\n\nA sense of relief sweeps over you as the horse trots out of the marsh. There was something weird going on there, and you don't want to know what it was. You have more important things to worry about right now.\n\n\nYou hear a couple of the other orcs express their relief in getting out of there as well. Soaking up all the little conversation, you are content to sit quietly and enjoy the trip back to your camp.\n\n\nA couple weeks later, you have arrived, many orcs welcome you and your group back. The journey back was much shorter, as you didn't have to spend any time searching; like you needed to do on the way to the goblin camp.\n\n\nOn the other side of the camp, there appears to be a large addition, namely dozens and dozens of tents and large groups of orcs. You can tell from their tattoos, paints, clothing, and general demeanor that these are the lawless tribes that Grolik had gathered in the last month or so.\n\n\nGoing around the camp, you gather Rolomag, Grolik, Galik, Dekard, and a few other orcs. Bringing them into the tent, you start to go through plans for fighting the Empire\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "One Year Later", "result": "Over the course of the last year, things have been going smoothly for you and your army. Some of the lawless orcs have begun to push the dwarves out of Orcin. As per your instructions, they haven't used methods that were too over the top. You don't want to attract the might of the dwarven armies, and other than a few small skirmishes there has not been a whole lot of trouble for them.\n\n\nThe Imperial patrols and camps have increased, but they have not taken any ground. In fact, they lost some serious distance a few months ago. You led a large assault on a couple of the camps, then about a week later some of your scouts were overrun by a surprise Imperial patrol. Among them was one of your best scouts, an orc named Ruzmar. In retaliation for the dead scouts, you staged another large attack.\n\n\nUnlike the last one, you managed to recover a lot of loot and supplies, while killing multiple Imperial soldiers. \n\n\nIn the meantime, you have not heard from the goblins. They have not moved any further into Orcin, and they haven't moved back to the hills and plains. There were reports of some minor earthquakes in the area, but nothing after that.\n\n\nSeveral of the Council members visited your camp recently as well. Some congratulated you, and others scorned and chastised you for fighting the Mannate Empire so doggedly. In the last couple of months, the Council got the Empire to agree to stop the fighting. While you didn't agree with this, you have respected the armistice. From what your messenger has told you, the Council and Imperial ambassadors are at a stalemate in terms of negotiating a treaty.\n\n\nYou have just taken this time to better arm and train your orcs, for when the Empire continues the fight, you will be ready. The peace has allowed many of the orcs to take an extended leave to return to their homes though. Many have farms, cattle, families, and other important endeavors to watch over. So until it is time to recall your orcs, a skeleton crew patrols the mountains and borderlands. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Home Again", "result": "After a long day of taking care of household duties, you sit and watch your children. Grovlar and Vokra have gotten big. It seems they do so considerably every time you have taken a trip back during these last three years. It has been a whole nine years since you finished fighting the Wister Elves, and since the last time you saw Valek.\n\n\nWhile you do take care of home and village life, messengers bring regular reports to you on the state of the conflict with the Empire. Not much has changed in the last few days, of course. You are actually content with it being so, and, who knows, maybe the Council will come to an agreement with the Empire.\n\n\nGilikia, your wife, comes outside. She kisses you before looking at the children at play. Little Lagrik stumbles around, trying to keep up with the two older kids.\n\n\n\"When is this all going to end?\" she asks. \"You know we need you here, Nolazir.\"\n\n\n\"I am doing what needs to be done,\" you say. \"When it is all over, I will return home, and I will stay here.\"\n\n\n\"They won't be small forever. Don't you want to watch them grow up? And what if you\u2026.\"\n\n\nShe trails off, not able to say the obvious concern on her mind. You turn, taking her hand in yours.\n\n\n\"I've been through too much for too long to let anyone or anything take you all away from me.\" You say as you stand up and embrace her, and, stepping back, you continue to hold her hands.\n\n\n\"I have been blessed with you, my beautiful wife, and these healthy, strong children,\" you say. \"If it weren't for you all those years ago\u2026 well, you pretty much saved me from what I would have become.\"\n\n\nYou step a little bit closer.\n\n\n\"If Gigalak didn't intend for us to be together,\" you say, \"he would have never let me off those muddy fields in the Elven kingdom, but he did, and I am grateful to have you all. I know he will return me to you every time.\"\n\n\n\"Well\u2026how do you know?\" she asks.\n\n\n\"Because, while I may be off fighting in the mountains and off finding the Imperials in the forests... my heart is here, with you all, and an orc always returns to where his heart is.\"\n\n\nShe leans into you, squeezing with all her might. \n\n\n\"I love you,\" she says. \"I know you'll always return to me.\"\n\n\nYou smile and hold her, as you turn and watch the children playing\u2026 and once in a while eating an insect on the ground\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Six Months Pass", "result": "The last few months find you and your army in the forests by the border. Reports had come of a legion of Imperials slowly making their way to the border. In the meantime, you have amassed assistance from a few more orc tribes. All the while, the Imperials wait, and your forces grow stronger and stronger.\n\n\nYou wait, while the rain pelts your face. Every orc is silent as the ground starts to become muddy at the intensity of the precipitation. \n\n\nYou signal the orcs to move forward, a slow trod through the mud. The Imperials are moving dozens of soldiers through, but if all goes to plan they'll never make it to the staging ground. By the time you reach them, you are hoping their supply wagons will be stuck in the mud, and their horses antsy at every trick and sound of the forests. \n\n\nWhen the time is right, you will strike, and make them pay. If the Imperials seek to break their treaty, you will show them the consequences. You all have your padded leather gambesons over your chainmail, extra leather straps tied around to reduce some of the clinking the chain tends to make.\n\n\nRiding forward, you catch Grolik's eye, who nods at you. Rolomag as well, who winks and pats his heart with his palm in a sign of respect. \n\n\nComing up to a ridge, you signal your forces to stop. Creeping low through the foliage, you see the Imperial columns. As suspected, their wagons seem to mostly be stuck in the mud. At your signal, your archers start their painstaking crawl over to the ridgeline. \n\n\nThe other third, slowly bring their horses onto both sides of the columns, preparing their charge. On the other side across from you, some of the lawless orcs should be preparing their attack on the Mannate soldiers. The cavalry orcs should still be fighting their way through by the time the archers are done, and when that happens they will slide down the slope. You don't want to run the risk of accidentally shooting your cavalry, so the archers will have to work fast, but by then the Imperials will be surrounded, and you should be able to crush them. \n\n\nAs the rain intensifies a bit, their horses get even antsier. As the lightning strikes, the soldiers look into the dark forests, fear apparent. When the thunder claps, their officers bark orders to hurry and move the wagons from the mud.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay with the Archers", "result": "When the heavens are silent, the wind stops blowing for a moment, and the trees stop their near eternal sway, a single arrow soars.\n\n\nThe Imperial officer, in the middle of yelling his commands. Lurches forward, his face curling up as the arrow pierces his chainmail, sticking through his heart. Only a moment after, dozens of arrows are unleashed upon the hapless soldiers.\n\n\nTheir cries ring out, almost drowned out by the thunder of Gigalak's wrath. Many soldiers lay wounded, and others lay fallen. They try to hide behind their wagons, some even shooting back. You lay low as some of their arrows pierce the foliage, a few lucky shots downing some of your comrades.\n\n\nAn Imperial crouches behind a wagon, your arrow ready to be released and show the Imperial his doom. As the lawless fire their arrows, the Imperial screams as arrows slam into his back. On both sides, Imperial and Orcish cavalry alike duel on, the clamor raging. \n\n\nAt your signal, you and the orcs charge down the slope. You slide through the mud, running as you touch the bottom. Some arrows happen to miss you, swept off course by Gigalak's hand, and you break into the soldiers.\n\n\nThe first one you slash with your sword, his blood oozing from his coat and covering the top of his hauberk. A swooshing sound comes from up ahead, a soldier's sword clinking against your leather padding and chainmail as you dodge the blow.\n\n\nWith a roar you embed your axe into his shoulder. His chain catches most of it, but you ram your sword pommel into his jaw. His face being reduces to a broken jaw and a bloody face, you turn to deflect blows from his other comrades.\n\n\nA spearman downs the orc next to you. Noticeably, his armor covers his face, two slits over where his eyes are, and a grate over his mouth. He spins and twirls, intent on tripping you up. You are too experienced and would not fall for this trick. With a hop you avoid this maneuver, charging towards him as he brings the spear up and around.\n\n\nAs your foe tries to bring the spear down, you catch it in the shoulder of your axe. Pushing it away, you step forward and jab your sword. He grunts as the tip pierces his armor, and he accidentally drops the spear.\n\n\nTaking this moment, you charge and swing. Two other Imperials rush in to his aid, one nearly beheading you. You roar and charge forward, ramming the sword all the way through his gut. The second Imperial nicks your arm, and you slam the hammer side of your axe into his head. \n\n\nThe spearman draws a dagger, jabbing at your side. It bounces off the chainmail, and seeing this, he and the other soldier charge you. With the axe you deflect a dagger blow, ramming your shoulder into the spearman. The other Imperial tries to aim for your throat, but, with a quick parry, your axe lands in his face. A gurgling cry comes out, stymied by the blade in his face. \n\n\nA squelching sound comes from behind, and you swing around just in time. The spearman lifted a sword from a fallen comrade and stepped into jam it through your back. Luckily you sidestep this and, grabbing his wrists, you twist the sword from his grasp. He grunts as you force him to drop it, and slam one hand into his face, exposing his throat.\n\n\nWith a mighty cry, you send your fist into his exposed throat. A pained choke coming from behind the helmet, he steps back and grips his throat. He falls to one knee, his windpipe crushed, and his adam's apple dislodged. You turn your attention to other combatants as the spearman struggles with choking to death\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Forward", "result": "The Imperials try to hold out, managing to down a few orcs, but, in the end, they are overwhelmed. You stand, stabbing an Imperial with one of their own spears repeatedly. His friend, clutching an injury, swipes his blade at you. You step back to dodge and ram the spear into his throat. Gurgling as he goes down he swings once more; his blade scratches your hand but not too deep.\n\n\nTwisting and pulling the spear, you yank it from his corpse. You run forward, seeing the orcs beating down a group of Imperials. The last few men seem terrified, and one not older than seventeen trembles. If you could hear over the sound of the fighting, you would be able to hear his knees causing his hauberk to clink together. \n\n\nBefore you can reach them, the rest of the orcs have stabbed and battered them into oblivion. Some orcs ride into the forest to find the fleeing soldiers.\n\n\nYou pant, watching the massacre taking place all around. Wounded men cry out, and some lay there dying quietly. \n\n\nAn orc approaches you, the frenzy of blood-shed just starting to wear off. \n\n\n\"What shall we do with the wounded?\" he asks.\n\n\nYou sit there and think for a moment. Orcs have never really taken prisoners, and you don't have the supplies to care for their wounded. You are worried about having enough medical supplies for your own as it is. \n\n\nAlthough it might help to take some of them ransom, there is not too much that you would need, so maybe just leaving them to die would be better. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Finish them off", "result": "\"Finish off the wounded,\" you cry. \"Leave no survivors!\"\n\n\nAt this, the orcs seem to go into a frenzy again as they start clubbing, hacking, and slashing the wounded. Some orcs even loot the dying men before slicing off their scalps. \n\n\nStepping forward to do your dirty work, you flip over an injured soldier with your foot. Placing the sword tip to his throat, the man tries to talk but his voice seems hoarse. He sputters as rainwater barrages his mouth, and he soon closes it to die quietly.\n\n\nWith your foot on his chest, he feebly grabs your calf. Snarling, you push the sword down as the tip slowly pushes through. Blood oozes out of the neck wound, the man sputtering and choking on his blood, and the blade penetrating through. In a matter of moments, his hands stop feebly hitting your leg as they go limp.\n\n\nIn the large crowd of orcs, you see Grolik. He pushes a spear tip into a dying human, his face twisting into a mixture of anger and shame. As Grolik pulls the spear out, you catch his glance. Guilt written all over his face.\n\n\nYou were not aware that an orc such as he could have such emotions. It comes as a bit of a shock to you, but sometimes tough things must be done to preserve victory. While killing the helpless is not a task for the faint of heart, it must take its toll on some.\n\n\nRolomag sits on a rock, using a rag to nurse a gash on his cheek. He seems tired, and just sits and watches the other orcs. A good amount of whom are helping your injured orcs. Sighing you decide it is a job best fit for them, as you have other work to do. \n\n\nYou wander off to continue\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Aftermath, Six Months Later", "result": "These past six months after the battle where you ambushed the soldiers in the mud have been brutal. You continued to push through, fighting patrol after patrol. It seems that after some time, the humans have wised up, laying counter traps and ambushes. These did not work too favorably for them at first, but they soon developed their skills.\n\n\nUnlike them, you don't have hundreds and hundreds of recruits. You and your army are tired, theirs is often quite fresh. These skirmishes have dragged out over the last four years, and while they are not as intense as the four years of war you experienced with the Wister Elves, it is taking its toll.\n\n\nYou need more troops, and you need them fast. It may be time to unite all of the orc tribes, as this concerns them as well. While they are not fully involved, they have not been entirely complacent. Some have traveled far to join you and your warriors, believing it is in the best interest of Orcin. \n\n\nYou have heard of reports of other armies such as yours gathering up. Having tried to correspond with them, there have been delays, or the messages never arrive. The increased Imperial presence must be contributing to this. It seems that every month brings more and more of them on your doorstep. You know that soon, they will be ready for a giant push. The ambush and sabotage missions can only hold them back for so long.\n\n\nWhile you do technically have your troops on some kind of rotation, it hasn't been enough. The only real reason for the rotation is that you and many other orcs have homes and families to take care of. Many of them have family and children old enough to help out on their farms and their ways of living; which you believe should at least help them in their home efforts. The winters have been especially brutal these last few years though. The only consolation is that, as orcs, you all tend to live off the land when agriculture is not available, which has helped immensely. \n\n\nYour recent decision to bring all of your warriors back into the fight has caused grumbling from many. They do not rebel though, as they know they work for the good of all of orc-kind.\n\n\nWhile there are some that don't agree with everything you are doing, such as Galik and sometimes Grolik, you suppose that is bound to happen in these situations. \n\n\nLeaving your tent, you go to check up on things...", "action_results": [{"action": "By the Border", "result": "Standing on a rocky ridge, you watch over a large clearing. On the other side is a forest leading from Orcin and into the Imperial lands. Behind you stands Galik, who seems to be lost in thought. \n\n\n\"Just a few miles out there,\" you say, \"lies the Imperial homeland.\"\n\n\nGalik raises an eyebrow and steps forward, standing at your side.\n\n\n\"Will we be waging war in their home? As they have done to us?\"\n\n\n\"No,\" you say, \"they have legions staged in those forests. Going in now would be suicide.\"\n\n\n\"So what, we're just going to sit here and let them take back the land we just kicked them out of?\"\n\n\n\"Yes\u2026 to a point. See this field? They'll never cross it on our watch, but they will try.\"\n\n\nYou sigh and pat Galik's shoulder.\n\n\n\"I need you all to watch over everything for me.\"\n\n\n\"What? Are you leaving us?\"\n\n\n\"Not for long,\" you say. \"I need to get some help. Unite the tribes.\"\n\n\n\"That's impossible, they'll never agree to join us. If the Empire kills us all, well, they don't want to be held responsible as well.\"\n\n\n\"No, they'll see reason,\" you say. \"This affects all of us.\"\n\n\n\"Nolazir,\" Galik says, \"if you don't move us into their homeland soon, I will do it.\"\n\n\n\"Don't, you fool. This would put all these past few years of fighting to an end, and it wouldn't be good for us.\"\n\n\nYou point to Rolomag who is standing nearby.\n\n\n\"Make sure he doesn't do anything stupid.\"\n\n\nWith that, you mount your horse and ride back into the lands of Orcin. While you have left a few trusted orcs in charge, you hope not to take too long. Galik's impatience could spell doom for the Orcish army. Rolomag certainly will obey your orders.\n\n\nYou are not sure of Grolik though, he has been scarce the last couple of days. He seems to be leading his orcs from inside his tent.\n\n\nWhile you are not sure of the outcome, you know you will fight the Mannate Empire until the bitter end.\n\n\nBreathing in, you take in the air of the forests as you make your way to the tribes.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rising Part Two", "result": "One Month Later\u2026\n\n\nThe large wooden gates of the village creak open, the surrounding orcs casting suspicious glances your way. A few even have their hands on some weapons nearby, and you do not blame them.\n\n\nRiding in through the mist which veils dawn's light, you appear almost as a specter of death. Lifting the hood, you give your brethren a weary nod. \n\n\nA few of their eyes widen as they recognize you, some stand unsure of who you are, and some just shrug and go back to their business. \n\n\nOne orc approaches you.\n\n\n\"Who are you?\"\n\n\n\"I am Nolazir, surrogate chief of the River Tribe in place of Chief Greusim.\"\n\n\nThe orc's eyes widen.\n\n\n\"It's been four years, and you have not found a replacement? Does he have any sons?\"\n\n\nYou nod.\n\n\n\"One, but he is young and impatient. I will stand in until he has learned how to do his duty with patience and wisdom.\"\n\n\nThe orc scoffs at the unthinkable act of leaving a tribe largely chief less.\n\n\n\"What is it that you seek?\"\n\n\n\"I want to speak with your chief,\" you say.\n\n\nThe orc shrugs and gives you directions to the chief's hut. That was a bit easier than you thought.\n\n\nAs you ride forward, the large hut comes into view. You are impressed to see that it actually has two stories to it. Most orcs chose to build one floor but with a wider house, although you are aware the council has at least three floors.\n\n\nPushing this useless information out of your mind, you hop off your horse. Your legs are stiff from the long ride, and you take a moment to stretch them.\n\n\nMuffled yelling comes out from within the doors of the chief's hut. Splinters of wood fly as the door bursts open. A hapless orc youth falls out and tumbles down the stairs. \n\n\nA large, broad orc steps out. His dark mane falling past his shoulders, two sharp teeth protrude from his bottom lip. His right eye looks like it is perpetually swollen halfway shut, a series of scars emanating from the side of his eye and going all the way to his ear. On his head rests a helmet with two bullhorns attached to it.\n\n\nHis tribal necklaces jingle as he bounds down the steps, his boot landing in the young orc's face.\n\n\n\"Fool, how could you be so incomprenent?\" he says, not realizing he butchered the word.\n\n\nThe youth prepares to defend himself, but the chief is too fast. He twists the orcs arm and lands several fists into his ribs. As he continues to beat the orc, you wonder if he will kill him. \n\n\nWhile you have the strong urge to step in, you also don't want to get into another tribe's affairs. They could easily kill you for interfering, although it wouldn't be the first time you have pissed off an orc chief. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Step In", "result": "You walk forward, prepared for anything. The orc chief snorts as he stops wailing on the orc young for a moment. \n\n\n\"Who the hell are you?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"Nolazir of the River Tribe,\" you say. \"I'm here to see the chief.\"\n\n\n\"I am Chief Gro'tesk,\" he snorts again. \"Nolazir, huh? I've heard of you. Getting soft for an orc, are ya?\"\n\n\nYour eyes narrow, some think you've gone soft, and others think it's just your age. \n\n\n\"I'm not sure what you're talking about.\"\n\n\n\"Pshhah, you let those under you argue and disagree with you all day long. The right way is to beat them into submission.\"\n\n\n\"Why don't you just leave him alone, he is already defeated.\"\n\n\nThe chief laughs and throws the young one to the ground, he cannot be any older than fifteen. Gro'tesk lands a couple swift kicks to his ribs.\n\n\n\"You done beating him yet?\" you ask.\n\n\nGro'tesk's eyes narrow, he straightens up and stares at you.\n\n\n\"No,\" he says, \"and I don't think you'll do anything about it either\"\n\n\n\"Oh yeah, and why is that?\"\n\n\n\"Because you need me, and my allies,\" he says. \"You want us to help you fight the humans?\"\n\n\n\"Yes.\"\n\n\n\"Well, I'm not gonna help you!\" he snarls. \"You're nothing but a weakling!\"\n\n\nTaking a deep breath, and, tilting your chin down slightly, you frown.\n\n\n\"So are we going to do this the hard way?\"\n\n\nThe chief grins and cracks his knuckles. You slowly roll your neck and stretch your arms back. \n\n\n\"I have two conditions,\" you say. \"If I win, you join me, along with your allies, and you stop beating the kid.\"\n\n\n\"If I win\u2026 you screw off!\" Gro'tesk screams.\n\n\nBy now, a large group of orcs has gathered around. All of them cheering on Gro'tesk as he removes his tribal necklaces. They make a circle around you as you prepare to fight\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight!", "result": "Fists raised, you step to the side, constantly circling your foe. Gro'tesk does likewise, a sadistic grin spread across his face. \n\n\nWith a huff you step forward, your fist twisting as the arm propels it forward. Gro'tesk's cheek ripples and his head turns as he moves with the punch. At the same time his fist flies, you manage to knock it away.\n\n\nDucking under, you slam your left fist into his ribs and come back up slamming into his jaw.\n\n\nGro'tesk staggers back, bewildered at your speed. Although you are quite a large orc, he is bigger than you.\n\n\nHe throws a backhand, which hits your defending arm. As he brings it back, he sends his other fist forward, which you manage to parry. But, in your rush, you accidentally lower your right arm a bit too far\u2026\n\n\nAs it connects a quick flash of dark splits through your vision, but only for a brief moment. As you stagger back, a pain shoots through your jaw. Managing to duck another blow, you push your opponent back, a move he was not expecting.\n\n\nAs you try to regain your ground, you feel a fuzziness spreading throughout your head. Getting punched sucks. \n\n\nAs you step forward, you consider your next move\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Feign a Kick", "result": "Lifting your knee, you hop forward and act as though you are about to kick Gro'tesk's shin. He brings one hand down to push your leg away, and in this moment you slam your foot into the ground, lurching forward. \n\n\nIn the same movement, you reel your fist back and then bolt forward. Your knuckles hit him straight in the forehead, this is followed by another swift hit right under his eye.\n\n\nGro'tesk grunts and staggers back. With a mighty roar he charges you, slamming one punch into your chest. \n\n\n\"Oof!\"\n\n\nThe blow knocks the wind out of you, throwing you to the ground. Chief Gro'tesk savagely lands a quick kick to your face. Reeling to the side you land face first in the dirt, the heavy pounding of his feet stopping as he lifts his foot again.", "action_results": [{"action": "Cheap Shot", "result": "Grunting and rolling, you dodge his right foot, stopping under and between both of his legs. Pushing up on your forearm, your other hand curls into a fist, hitting him right in the sweet spot with a thud. He hunches a bit as his face contorts into pain. \n\n\nHe screams as his knees buckle, but before he can fall forward you slam your foot into his stomach, toppling him another way.\n\n\nYou pant as you pull yourself up, looking at the large group of orcs standing around you. Some look disapprovingly at your method of winning, others stand in awe, and some appear indifferent. The chief grunts as he rolls around in pain.\n\n\n\"No fair!\" he says, \"that was cheating!\" \n\n\n\"There is no such thing as cheating when you're about to get your face stomped in.\"\n\n\nThe chief manages to pull himself up.\n\n\n\"Fine!\" he says,\" you win.\"\n\n\nThe chief pouts as he hobbles over to his hut, and you follow to give him your terms.", "action_results": [{"action": "Terms and Conditions", "result": "Gro'tesk sits on his large fur and leather chair, looking glum. It's apparent he is used to getting his way, but so are you. \n\n\nYou grin as you finish explaining your terms.\n\n\n\"You would still largely be in command of your tribe and your allies,\" you say, \"only I will have final say and make the larger battlefield and strategic decisions.\"\n\n\n\"Hmm, I don't like to be bossed around.\"\n\n\n\"You wouldn't be so much,\" you say. \"Think of yourself still as a chief and advisor, only I'm just supervising the rest of you.\"\n\n\nGro'tesk seems to mull this over and leans back. \n\n\n\"Well as long as I get some say in things\u2026\"\n\n\nWith that, you have Gro'tesk agree to go meet your army, along with the lesser tribes that follow him. \n\n\nYou go and mount your horse, intent on gathering some more tribes\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Two Months Later....", "result": "You've traveled far the past three months total, gaining the support from large and small tribes alike. It has been tough convincing some, but others are far more agreeable. From the reports you've heard, it's put much less pressure on your army, for now.\n\n\nOn the downside, Galik and Grolik have managed to engage the Mannate Empire in some larger skirmishes than you would have liked. Rolomag and the other more reliable orcs haven't been able to keep them in check as well as you had hoped. \n\n\nAs you ride on, one of the coastal villages comes into view. The sun bearing down upon you, in the distance you see a number of orcs. Some seem to be fishing with nets and spears, and some seem to be enjoying the sun. A few unsurprisingly wrestle in circles made of seashells. \n\n\nSeveral wooden boats float lazily among the waves. One orc saunters over to you, his skin a much darker shade of green due to generations of living out here. Yours is a much lighter shade of green. The orc stops several feet away from you.\n\n\n\"Who are you?\"\n\n\n\"Nolazir.\"\n\n\nHis eyebrows arch and his eyes widen a bit. A small grin spreads across his face. \n\n\n\"I have heard of you, fighting off the humans. Making your rounds to many of the villages and tribes. That is why you are here?\"\n\n\n\"Yes.\"\n\n\nThe orc chuckles as he leads you toward the village.\n\n\n\"I don't think we'll be able to help you, friend,\" he says.\n\n\n\"All of us are at stake,\" you say. \"We need all the people we can get.\"\n\n\n\"We're having our own issues. We can't save everyone else when we can't even save ourselves.\"\n\n\nYou grunt, scanning the area. Nothing seems to be happening.\n\n\n\"What's your name?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Silak,\" he says, \"I just do the fishing around here. The chief is inside.\"\n\n\nHe gestures into a small wooden hut. You nod to him in thanks and step inside, the old wood steps creaking a bit.\n\n\nHalf of the hut is dark, the rest illuminated by the sunlight entering between the wooden beams above. Some tarp seems to be covering the rest of it.\n\n\nYou stop short as a figure steps out of the shadows, an orc with several wrinkles on his face. His raven dark hair contrasted by a multitude of grey hairs throughout. His face turns up into a weary smile. His dark green skin hiding him well, until he steps into the rays of light.\n\n\n\"Welcome, friend,\" he says. \"I am Chief Hidius.\"\n\n\n\"I am Nolazir.\"\n\n\nIt is just then that you notice the severe burn marks covering Hidius' body. His face, from what you can see, is even a bit distorted. \n\n\n\"I know why you are here.\"\n\n\n\"Will you join me?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"No.\"\n\n\n\"But-\"\n\n\n\"Walk with me.\"\n\n\nThe chief puts his hand on your shoulder, slowly leading you outside. As you step into the sunlight, you realize Hidius injuries are more severe than you thought. It appears as though his nose has been smelted off of his face. You're surprised that his hair is still growing though, which should not be possible.\n\n\n\"How... is your hair still growing?\"\n\n\n\"A rude question to ask of my deformities.\"\n\n\n\"I'm sorr-\"\n\n\n\"No. It's alright, no one has asked in a long time, some around here know the story. Others think it's crazed nonsense.\"\n\n\nHidius waves a hand to change the subject. He stops and gestures to the village and the waters ahead.\n\n\n\"Gigalak gave us these lands and these waters so that we could live wild and free. The Mannate Empire wants to take that from us.\"\n\n\n\"So help us stop them.\"\n\n\n\"We can't\u2026 I can't,\" Hidius says. \"I am dying and so is my village.\"\n\n\n\"What do you mean?\"\n\n\n\"We've been cursed, you see, as made apparent by my condition.\"\n\n\n\"That's nonsense,\" you say. \"Taking heavy burn wounds isn't going to damn the rest of the village. Besides, they look fine to me.\"\n\n\nHidius chuckles.\n\n\n\"It won't be today, or tomorrow, or even a decade from now, but we're all doomed. I've seen it.\"\n\n\nHidius closes his eyes and takes a deep breath.\n\n\n\"Whether or not we stop the Mannate Empire\u2026 something far worse is waiting to take us into a grip of fire.\"\n\n\n\"Stop this,\" you say, \"and tell me what you mean.\"\n\n\n\"Nothing we really do this day matters anymore, I have seen it.\"\n\n\nYou take a deep breath and try to stop yourself from shaking the older orc in frustration.\n\n\n\"No matter what is going to happen, you can't just lay down and die.\"\n\n\nYou gently put a hand on his shoulder and turn him around to face you.\n\n\n\"We're orcs damn it, and we fight everything that gets in our way. Living, dead, hell, Empire, whatever it may be. We don't just lay down and die.\"\n\n\nThe chief smiles slowly.\n\n\n\"While that may be true of you and yours, I am old and tired of fighting. I've seen enough horrors to last one thousand lifetimes. Our time is useless.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Use that time for a greater purpose\"", "result": "\"If you think you're gonna die anyways, why don't you use whatever time you have left for something good?\" you ask.\n\n\nThe chief shuts his eyes and seems to be contemplating your words. \n\n\n\"Whatever you think is coming to harm us all, we can deal with it when it comes. In the meantime, we can't just sit around and let the Empire step on us.\"\n\n\nHidius does nothing.\n\n\n\"I need everyone that I can get,\" you say, \"there are so many orcs doing their part. Now you need to do yours. Please\u2026.I'm asking for your help.\"\n\n\nAt this, Hidius opens his eyes and gives you a side wards look.\n\n\n\"Although your words will be ultimately futile\u2026..I will help you.\"\n\n\nLetting out a sigh of relief, you step to the side.\n\n\n\"One more thing,\" you say, \"stop spreading this doom prophecy to your people. They're really taking it to heart. I'm not saying it's not true or whatever, but at least lift their spirits a little.\"\n\n\nHidius nods, and begins to walk back to his hut.\n\n\n\"I will gather a group of warriors, and we will meet your army.\"\n\n\n\"Good,\" you say, \"make haste, for things are stirring quickly.\"\n\n\nHidius nods, and goes to a group of orcs. You can\u2019t hear what he says, but they all seem to go off to find more orcs.\n\n\nWith satisfaction, you mount your horse to make your way out of the village. As you head to where you are sure where the next will be, you think that maybe you'll find a place to escape the heat first.", "action_results": [{"action": "Three Months Later...", "result": "It has been six months since you left to unite the tribes. It has not been easy, but it has been largely successful. There were a few that gave you trouble, refusing to join in the fight. Even then, some of their members disobeyed and walked right out with you. The rest will come around eventually.\n\n\nLately, the Council has sent several couriers with messages urging you to hold off in the fight against the Empire. You always send them back with a \"no.\"\n\n\nIt appears that the humans have really been pushing within the last month, and Galik seems to have taken charge over things since you have left. Maybe he has finally matured and is ready to take over for you. \n\n\nYou wouldn't mind not having to worry about all of this; except for the fighting really. It would be just like the war with the Wister Elves, someone points and you attack, broken up with random bursts of initiative and leadership.\n\n\nAt the same time, your axe itches to go into the fray. That spark Gigalak ignited into all orcs has not gone out yet. You begin to wonder where this course of action will take you when it begins to rain.\n\n\n\"It's raining again.\"\n\n\nAs you make your way back to your camp, you see that it has grown tremendously. Many orcs shout and greet you as you enter. While you have been pretty well liked by most of them, you didn't expect such an enthusiastic welcome.\n\n\n\"The chieftain has returned!\"\n\n\n\"Hail Nolazir!\"\n\n\n\"Our leader returns to us!\"\n\n\nYou smirk a bit, it will be a letdown for some if they find out you're thinking of resigning over to Galik.\n\n\nAs you enter the main area of the camp where many of the orcish leaders live, you notice something is different. Several posts have been erected, with orcs tied to them, while their comrades grimly whip them.\n\n\nAs you turn, looking between your old tent and some of the others, there upon the ground are three slain orcs. Above them stands Galik, a fiery rage in his eyes. Near them, stands Grolik, severely beaten and held back by three orcs.\n\n\n\"Galik!\" you cry.\n\n\nGalik breathes heavily and looks up from the corpses to meet your eye.\n\n\n\"Nolazir,\" he says prowling forward, \"stand down!\"\n\n\n\"What is going on?\"\n\n\n\"These fools disobeyed me. They were here to sabotage our efforts.\"\n\n\n\"What in Grikalia are you talking about?\"\n\n\n\"These traitors spent weeks scheming and planning,\" Galik said, \"but it was not that alone that caused this? Do you want to know what it was?\"\n\n\nYou glare at him, lowering your chin a bit. Your hands curl at your side as you prepare for anything.\n\n\n\"There are some in the Council who think we should give the humans quarter,\" Galik says, \"parley with them, make an agreement. These fools pushed this idea, even saying we should compromise with them.\"\n\n\nGalik furiously spits on one of the corpses.\n\n\n\"This one thought that we should concede some land to be annexed with the Empire. Fools.\"\n\n\nWhile you can see the logic in his anger, something seems off. \n\n\n\"And the rest?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Not so keen on the idea of conceding land yet,\" Galik says, \"but it was only a matter of time before the traitor would get them to turn over. I know this.\"\n\n\n\"That's only one of three,\" you say, \"and you think you can justify their executions with assumptions?\"\n\n\n\"Nolazir, they were traitors. I could see it! It would not have been too long!\"\n\n\n\"And what say you for Grolik?\" you ask. \"What has he done?\"\n\n\nGrolik slowly looks up at the two of you, a dark look in his eyes.\n\n\n\"When I was\u2026 purging these traitors, he tried to intervene,\" Galik says, \"using much the same words as you have. Actually, he is lucky I haven't gutted him yet, seeing as he has been a pain these last couple of months.\"\n\n\nGalik twirls his sword a bit before pointing it at the whipping post.\n\n\n\"I thought a nice whipping would get him to change his mind,\" he says, \"but he sure is stubborn. I have only spared his life because he spoke against these traitors, but then he ridiculed me for sending them to Grikalia early.\"\n\n\n\"So what do you intend to do?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"I'm going to kill him,\" Galik says with a smirk.\n\n\n\"Or more like\u2026\" he grins, \"you're going to kill him. Prove your loyalty to your new chief, Nolazir\"\n\n\nGalik takes a few steps back, gesturing you to step forward. As you do, the other three orcs raise Grolik. \n\n\nAs you stand in front of him, one of the orcs hands you a shortsword. As you grip the simple weapon, the texture of the leather grip feels odd to you right now.\n\n\nGrolik looks at you, shaking his head a bit.\n\n\n\"Don't do it Nolazir,\" he says. \"I think we know who the real traitor is.\"\n\n\nYou look at the blade, surely Galik has seen madness, but could you really kill the child of your dear friend Greusim? The young orc who had often sat on your lap when you went to visit your now dead friend\u2026 all those years ago.\n\n\nWho is Grolik? You've known him for a few years, but he is just a lawless orc. Still, he has shown great promise, and hasn't let you down yet. Other than your first altercation, he has been a true friend. \n\n\nGrolik looks into your eyes, there is no fear. There is a quiet rage, and even a hint of sadness in his eyes.", "action_results": [{"action": "Free Grolik", "result": "With a heavy sigh\u2026 you lift the sword up, gripping it with both hands. Grolik doesn't even blink as you bring it down. But you step slightly to the side, slicing clean through the arm of the orc to your left who handed you the sword. He screams in pain as he falls over, and you run the second through the chest.\n\n\nAs you pull it out, you turn around just in time to deflect an attack from Galik. As you circle him and parry his blows, Grolik tackles the third orc, turning his own dagger towards him.\n\n\n\"You've made the wrong choice, old friend,\" Galik says. \"I'm sorry.\"\n\n\nYou don't respond but, instead, block his swift attack. Galik fights with ferocity, but you match this with skill.\n\n\nAs you hook your blade onto his hilt, you turn and twist, Galik flies forward. He drops his sword for a moment but rolls and picks it back up. Behind him, Grolik and the other orc still struggle, the dagger on the ground and both of them in a deadly grapple.\n\n\nGalik twirls his sword as you circle each other.\n\n\n\"Drop the sword, Galik,\" you say. \"It doesn't have to be like this.\"\n\n\n\"Oh but it does. Remember, you chose this!\"\n\n\nThe last couple of words are emphasized by Galik swinging his sword down at you. You easily dodge this and take a wide swipe, nicking his arm. Galik hisses and swings at your head, which you duck as you plunge the tip of the sword into his calf.\n\n\nGalik cries out in pain and staggers back. You raise the sword before pausing, instead, taking a step back.\n\n\n\"You truly have gotten soft, Nolazir,\" he says. \"What happened to the ruthless orc I used to hear stories about?\"\n\n\n\"Do you really think I want to kill you?\" you say. \"You're the child of my dear friend Greusim. He was like a father to me, why would I want to kill any of his children?\"\n\n\n\"You're just a weakling and a pathetic leader, Nolazir,\" Galik says. \"My father would be disappointed in you.\"\n\n\nWith these words still in the air, Galik charges you, first swinging high but then veering low. With a cry you barely manage to escape, the tip of the blade slicing into your thigh. Gritting your teeth you slash his chest.\n\n\nNot once, but twice and then three times; you swing the sword in a perfect arc of fury. Galik's face twists as he staggers back, clutching his chest. He raises his sword and stumbles forward, you easily deflect the strike and slam your foot into his knee.\n\n\nGalik cries out and falls back, rolling to get away from what he thought would be a killing blow. As he looks up, you see the seething hatred in his eyes. His sword lays behind you, which he had dropped when you knocked him over.\n\n\n\"Well, what are you waiting for, Nolazir?\"\n\n\nYou take a step forward, raising the sword. As you do so, you remember the first day that Greusim showed Galik to you; when he was but an infant wrapped inside a blanket. You remember the days of taking him out as a young lad, teaching him how to fish and about the plants and animals. You remember the closeness you used to share, before Greusim fell, and this wrath took him over.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill Galik", "result": "As these memories flood through your mind, you realize that it doesn't matter what he was. It just matters what he has become; and that's a murderer. He would drag the orcish armies into the grave with him, dooming Orcin to an eternity of rule by the Mannate Empire.\n\n\nGalik laughs insanely as you step forward, and you drive the sword down\u2026\n\n\nIn the last moment, Galik rolls to the side and the sword slams into the dirt. You pull, but the blade does not budge.\n\n\nStanding, you cannot do anything before your foe slams into you. His fingers dig into your shoulder as he draws a dagger from under his shirt. He grins and chuckles as he lifts the blade up, intent on slamming it into your chest. The dagger gleaming in the sunlight, showing you your final moments\u2026\n\n\nGalik brings the knife down, your hand shooting up just in time. Grunting you twist and wrench the blade from his hand. Grabbing his shoulder you shove the knife forward into his belly, as it slides through surprisingly easy. Galik gasps, and his hands grip your shoulders.\n\n\nYou rip the dagger out and slam it back into him, this time some splatter decorating your forearms. On the third strike, Galik's knees buckle and he falls back, guided by your hand. As you kneel over him, Galik's hands grip your arms and shoulder. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Stab him again", "result": "He tries to speak but he is too winded. Snarling, and with a gleam of victory in your eyes, you plunge the knife into him a fourth time. Galik's eyes widen for a moment before his head falls back onto the dirt. He expels a short breath before laying still.\n\n\nPanting heavily, you kneel over your once good friend. You stare down at his face, empty eyes staring into the sky above. Your brow furrows as you place your hands under him, lifting him up a bit. \n\n\n\"Why did you make me have to do this, Galik?\" you ask. \"Greusim was my friend. I've known you since before you were born. You fool.\"\n\n\nWith this, you drop him, and you look up to see Grolik. He stands there holding a bloody dagger at his side. He gives you an understanding nod.\n\n\nYou stand up and start to walk away. He raises an eyebrow.\n\n\n\"Let someone else deal with his corpse,\" you say. \"I want nothing to do with him anymore. It's done.\"\n\n\nYou drop the dagger and walk to the tent, and, sitting on the chair, you grab some whiskey\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Six Months Later", "result": "The last six months since Galik's death have been eventful. It took a while for you to reorganize the camp, fixing all of Galik's mistakes. While it was stressful at first, you managed to delegate some responsibility to Grolik, Gro'tesk, Hidius, and Rolomag.\n\n\nEverything is now organized, but it seems that the Empire is done playing around. In the last two months alone, you have repelled several small-scale assaults. You are sure they are finally going to act and make some big moves.\n\n\nBut so are you. Soon, these years of stalemates and quiet maneuvering will be at an end. Soon, it will be time to test the Mannate Empire's true mettle.\n\n\nThe past five years have been filled with hardships and struggles, but you have managed to overcome all of them. For the first time, you are looking at this conflict pretty positively. Young orcs trickle in everyday willing to contribute to the cause. What worries you though is their age. While there are plenty of experienced veterans in your army, the number of young, inexperienced, and foolhardy orcs concerns you.\n\n\nTraditionally, orcs have always set out as adults at the age of fifteen. What this usually means for them is going out and finding adventure and fighting things. Because of your warlike nature, many orcs do not actually live too long. Some would even consider an orc such as yourself, at the ripe age of thirty-five to have been a long enough and accomplished life.\n\n\nGigalak did not intend your kind to grow old and miserable, but, instead, to put life into your years, no matter how short or long they may be.\n\n\nYou sense someone pulling up to the side of you.\n\n\n\"Still thinking about Galik?\" Grolik asks.\n\n\n\"Among other things,\" you sigh.\n\n\n\"I know you were close to him, but he just went too far.\"\n\n\n\"I know, it\u2019s just hard seeing someone you care about turn into something else.\"\n\n\nGrolik exhales slowly, nodding as he does so.\n\n\n\"Sometimes, you'll do everything you can to save someone,\" he says, \"but sometimes you have to do what you have to do.\"\n\n\n\"What would you know about this?\" you snort.\n\n\nGrolik gulps and looks into the distance before turning his head to you.\n\n\n\"I\u2026.I butchered my entire family and tribe.\"\n\n\n\"What?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"It's\u2026 a long story.\"\n\n\nBefore you can say anything further, Grolik spurs his horse forward to attend to something else.\n\n\nA whole throng of orcs march ahead and behind you, as you all make your way down the mountains and to the hills where the rest of your army waits. Along the way, you have groups of fighters intersperse throughout the hills and rocks just before the plains. It seems the Empire plans to take you on in open combat.\n\n\nThe scouts alerted you of the huge shift in troops heading this way. Once your reserves and last line are firmly placed, you call to all of your commanders. \n\n\nKneeling by a rock, you spread a map across it. Taking a piece of charcoal to mark it up.\n\n\nRolomag peers closely at it, rubbing his chin. Grolik looks out to the hills and then to the plains and forest ahead. Gro'tesk sharpens his weapons and checks the string on his bow. Hidius closes his eyes and takes in the crisp air.\n\n\nYou start by marking all of the locations the Imperials should be attacking from. Mostly, directly ahead of you.\n\n\nGro'tesk points to the area in the Southeast.\n\n\n\"I think they'll try sending a few brigades through here,\" he says. \"While there's no chance they would be able to make it through the mountains in time, it wouldn't take much longer for them to divert through these woods.\"\n\n\nYou have some light patrols stationed in the mountains, so they would alert your left flank if they saw Imperials moving through there.\n\n\n\"Hmm, we can probably divert more troops to watching that area then,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Or, we could go through that way ourselves and try to catch them off guard,\" Gro'tesk says, \"whether or not they're coming through that way.\"\n\n\n\"No way,\" Rolomag says. \"We need all the warriors here that we can get. Their only real option is to try to push through the plains, and we should try to match them.\"\n\n\n\"No, wrong way!\" Gro'tesk yells.\n\n\nGrolik speaks without looking to the group.\n\n\n\"I think Gro'tesk is actually right about this one,\" he says, \"we need to keep an eye over that way. Or maybe even exploit it.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, if they get cavalry through those woods,\" Gro'tesk says, \"even with our reserves and archers, we won't be able to stop them from wiping through our flank.\"\n\n\nYou analyze the area, the humans could utilize it, in which case it would be helpful to prepare to counteract them. They also just might use brute force, in which case you would need to have all of your fighters here at the ready. \n\n\n\"There is another thing,\" Hidius says. \"While we can't expect them to come through and around the mountains, see this stretch of open space between the mountains and the trees?\"\n\n\nRolomag squints at the map.\n\n\n\"Yes, but what does that-\"\n\n\n\"If they move some soldiers through here,\" Hidius says, \"they could easily hit this side with a concentrated force. I suspect they would use cavalry to cover the gap as well.\"\n\n\n\"Let me position more warriors there,\" he continues. \"I will keep the mountain patrol there. But if we see any soldiers or cavalry, we can easily ride in and trap them in between the main force and this one.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack Straight On", "result": "\"I like Rolomag's idea,\" you say. \"The chances of them utilizing either side is nonsense.\"\n\n\n\"What? Fool!\" Gro'tesk yells.\n\n\nGrolik's eyes snap to you in surprise.\n\n\n\"Nolazir,\" he says, \"are you serious? This is stupid. You were the one always going on about how pure strength alone won't win this.\"\n\n\n\"I can't say I agree at all,\" Hidius says, \"but if I can't change your mind, I will obey.\"\n\n\nRolomag just sits back in silence. \n\n\nYou nod to all of them and roll up the map.\n\n\n\"I know this won't be easy,\" you say, \"but I know we can do this. We'll still have the reserves to help us, but as I see it\u2026 we're gonna be able to just push through them.\"\n\n\nGrolik shakes his head.\n\n\n\"I don't know about this, Nolazir,\" he says. \"Why don't we think about this again?\"\n\n\n\"No,\" you say. \"I have decided.\"\n\n\nGrolik sighs and goes off to get his orcs ready. The rest do the same.", "action_results": [{"action": "Preparations", "result": "Days later, your troops stand at attention, their mail armor and weapons gleaming in the sunlight. The red tendrils of the rising sun cast themselves over the sky, piercing the clouds like slender fingers eager to reach into what lay beyond. The wind's breath carries the fresh morning air through the field, passing through each warrior; the wind carrying the breath they might otherwise hold in anticipation of what lays ahead.\n\n\nThe orcs stand before you, ready to move forth at the sight of the Mannate Empire. The reserves wait in the rocky hills behind you. While not appearing so, many orcs are nervous, as any would be before a large battle; but, with hope in their minds and courage in their hearts, they stand by you.\n\n\nYour horse shuffles, it's ears pricking up. The song of the Empire trickles from the forest, quietly at first. But, as the first humans emerge, their hauberks showing crests of their nobles, the standard bearers proudly emerge, their counterparts blaring trumpets and horns. How kind of them to announce themselves, yet so arrogant.\n\n\nThe columns of Mannate warriors spill forth. They move simultaneously. They do not waver or break form. Their perfect union a direct affront to the free and natural order that was intended for all.\n\n\nThe human soldiers stand at attention, all saluting as their officers move up and down the line. Some appear to inspect their warriors, some seem to be doing a lot of shouting. Others stand calmly in front of their columns. \n\n\nOne knight, which you recognize as such by the helm he wears, rides out in front of the column. He waves a white flag ahead above him.\n\n\n\"I think they wish to speak,\" Hidius says.\n\n\nYou scowl at the human riding forth, as if you could not have him crushed. His hands held up and flag waving as a sign of peace.\n\n\nSpurring the horse beneath you to meet this human, you keep your hand by your sword. \n\n\nStopping several feet away from the Imperial, you both meet in the field between your armies. \n\n\n\"Hail Orc,\" the knight says.\n\n\nYou grunt in response.\n\n\n\"General Levalier has sent me to parley. Will you speak?\"\n\n\n\"I will.\"\n\n\n\"Who may I ask do you speak for?\"\n\n\n\"Myself.\"\n\n\n\"So you are this rabble's leader?\"\n\n\nPeering through the slits in the knight's helmet, his eyes light up in understanding. His other hand, which lays free of the flag, twitches slightly by his sword. Your hand already rests near yours.\n\n\nYou peer into the eyes of the knight, your eyes narrowing as you do so. The soldier looks back, and both of you sit there in silence.\n\n\nHis hand slowly moves away from his sword as he shifts to hold the flag with both hands.\n\n\n\"I have been sent to ask you to disperse your forces.\"\n\n\n\"No.\"\n\n\n\"Brute, won't you listen to reas-\"\n\n\n\"No.\"\n\n\n\"I say, while I would not expect a beast of your nature to understand politics. At least hear the message my general has for yourself.\"\n\n\n\"The only thing you need to do is go home,\" you say. \"You could save many of your soldiers' lives today.\"\n\n\nThe knight huffs in exasperation and turns his horse around. He gallops back, moving around the side of the columns.\n\n\nGrunting, you trot back to your spot among your comrades. You don't trust that they will just up and leave after these years of skirmishes and preparation. It seems that battle was fated to happen this day, it will progress no matter what words are spoken. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack!", "result": "The trumpets across the field begin to sound, and the officers riding upon their horses shout and wave their swords around. With all of your troops in position, you take your horn. Exhaling, you blow into it, and the other chiefs under you do so as well. The air is filled with the sound of war as you and your warriors pour forward. The Mannate humans approach, weapons held tightly and the crest of their Emperor waving in the wind.\n\n\nYour orcs go to meet them, the might of Gigalak carries you forward to crush your enemies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Brute Force", "result": "With all of your forces centered, the orcish lines meet the human's with unparalleled force. You watch from your horse as weapons and shields collide. Mail armor protecting both sides from grievous wounds. It is not too long before your orcs push through the humans first line, bashing and knocking down warriors as the rest overtake them.\n\n\nThe humans give a steady retreat, before spearmen move through the columns to give some support. Two large columns come down and around from each side, taking a diagonal assault to your front. On your orders, your fighters divert to stand against it. As you wave your arm, two bands of cavalry swoop around your lines. One lead by Grolik and his Red Handed, the other by Gro'tesk and various civilized orc tribes.\n\n\nArchers in each of your lines work to weaken your foes. Hidius and Rolomag each lead one of the defending lines to your sides, and you command the center force. With Gigalak's fist you break into the center. As your lines push the Imperials back, some Imperial knights by Grolik shake up his assault.\n\n\nFrom where you are, you can't reach them. But orcs from one of the columns rush forth, taking on the knights. Many orcs to the right fall, but your overall army holds strong, and steadily you push the Imperials back. The horses stepping over the crumpled remains of orc and human alike.\n\n\nGrolik blows his horn, rallying his troops. Nursing a wound in his shoulder, he rides forward, inspiring his fighters to go forth. Many fight on, even with life threatening injuries. You gaze to the wave of orcs. \n\n\nGrolik circles around them, yelling out orders. In a moment, his eyes meet yours, before his face scrunches and his brows furrow. Looking down to his chest, a bloody arrow protrudes from his heart. Your friend goes limp and slumps off his horse, rolling as he hits the ground. Many of his orcs stare in confusion, before a volley of arrows shows them the same fate.\n\n\nFrom the forest in the Southeast, a column of Imperial soldiers rushes out, covered by archers. They do untold damage to your right flank. They sweep in before your forces can organize a defense. Roaring, you charge forward.\n\n\nRolomag starts to divert troops.\n\n\n\"No,\" you cry, \"stay focused. I've got this.\"\n\n\nAs you ride by, you see Grolik's eyes glazed, and staring into the sky. The arrow having gone straight through his heart, and spilling his spirit into the void. Orcs continue to fall, as the diversion weakens your center line. The humans in the center gain no ground, but don't lose any either.\n\n\nSomething else in the distance disturbs you. Circling around, a large cavalry rides through the open plain. Between the mountains and the forest they go, sweeping into your left flank. Hidius is just able to mount his horse, fighting off a knight. You howl in agony as another one rides up behind Hidius, planting his sword through his back.\n\n\nHidius falls quietly, and almost immediately. Somewhere in the fray, you see Silak defending his chief's corpse before himself being killed. As you rally troops to defend this side, Gro'tesk glances to you, his eyes flashing in anger.\n\n\nThe lines and columns are all in a frenzy, being attacked viciously from multiple sides. There is no semblance of lines and divisions. All the orcs fight as one, the Imperials slowly pushing through with reinvigorated fury. \n\n\nSlamming the butt of your axe into a hapless soldiers helmet, you let out a roar. His helmet pinging and denting under your blow, his eyes bloodshot from the trauma. The soldier twitches before laying still.\n\n\nThe horse you are on cries out in agony, a couple of arrows piercing its chest. Managing to leap off, you roll to the ground and stand bearing both weapons. Just in time to meet the blades of bloodthirsty soldiers. \n\n\nHacking, slashing, and bashing you stand by your brethren. As you remove the head of one soldier, another's spear finds its way through your armor. Your mouth gapes in pain but you stay silent, grimacing and facing the soldier, you knock his spear away.\n\n\nWith a grunt you shove the sword blade under his helmet and into his face. Specks of crimson blood cover your arms as the soldier writhes, twitches, and dies. On the right flank, the Imperials push Rolomag's line ever closer to this one. The center also being pushed back.\n\n\nRolomag, with several injuries, gives you a weary nod. You are about to return it when Rolomag huffs and falls, an axe buried in his back. Ahead of you, a beast of a man wrenches the axe from your fallen friend's back.\n\n\nYou charge each other, weapons sparking and colliding. Grinning, you slam the spike atop your axe into the man's ribs. He ignores the pain and hacks into your side, breaking through the armor and embedding his axe into your ribs.\n\n\nTwisting, you make him lose his grip. Your sword buries into the human's neck as his eyes widen in surprise. Before you can twist the sword out, a burning sensation shoots through your side.\n\n\nThe axe blade twists through your side snapping ribs and almost blinding you with pain. Before you can move, the axe blade slams into your helmet. As this happens a hand pushes you down, before you can twist around the handle slams into your helmet as well.\n\n\nIt's not long before various weapons slam into your armor or pierce through it and into your flesh. Your body aches all over, before feeling numb as you are overwhelmed. ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Allow Gro'tesk to Flank", "result": "\"Gro'tesk,\" you say, \"I want you to put together a strike force, and go around. Give the battle some time to start, but once you take them by surprise, hit them as hard as you can.\"\n\n\n\"Got it,\" Gro'tesk nods.\n\n\n\"What about the left side?\" Hidius asks.\n\n\n\"We don't need to worry about that,\" you say. \"With Gro'tesk attacking their flank, they'll have no choice but to concentrate in those two areas.\"\n\n\n\"We're going to be exposed over there,\" Hidius says while sharpening his knife.\n\n\n\"Trust me,\" you say. \"This plan will work.\"\n\n\n\"Gro'tesk, while we are setting up I want you to wait in the forest over there,\" you say. \"Make sure they don't see you at all.\"\n\n\nWith the plan made, you all disperse to make preparations for the upcoming battle.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Allow Hidius to lay a trap", "result": "\"Hidius,\" you say, \"I want you to take a unit and set them up by the bottom of the mountain. If they try to send cavalry across, sweep them up and take them down.\"\n\n\nHidius nods.\n\n\n\"What about the forest to the Southeast?\" Gro'tesk says. \"We need to watch it.\"\n\n\n\"No Gro'tesk,\" you say, \"there's no way they'll take that much time to divert forces that way. I know how the Imperials fight, they'll just attack straight on and use cavalry.\"\n\n\nGro'tesk shakes his head in frustration. \n\n\n\"You never know!\" he yells throwing a rock at the ground. \"It will take more time, but it would be worth it for them. I have seen these things happen!\"\n\n\n\"If they do attack, we will easily be able to divert troops to stand in their way,\" you say. \"We can't risk our bulk to divert troops left and right without knowing if we need to.\"\n\n\n\"I think Gro'tesk is right,\" Grolik says. \"I'll personally take-\"\n\n\n\"No,\" you say. \"You'll have other roles to play. Focus on them.\"\n\n\nGro'tesk and Grolik glance at each other but then turn and nod at you. You send the group to go about their duties and prepare for the oncoming battle ahead. ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Listen to both Hidius and Gro'tesk", "result": "You nod and look to both Hidius and Gro'tesk.\n\n\n\"I think you are both right,\" you say. \"We need the right amount of surprise and caution. If the battles with the Empire so far has taught us anything, these humans are tenacious, and we need to prepare for anything.\"\n\n\nGro'tesk grunts in agreement, and Hidius slowly nods his head.\n\n\n\"So, Gro'tesk, I want you to take your warriors up and around the forest. Divert and cut off any troops they are sending through, then begin your assault on their flank.\"\n\n\n\"I will crush them for you, chief.\"\n\n\n\"And Hidius, station your cavalry by the base of the mountain,\" you say. \"If they come through the plain to attack our flank, sweep them in and crush them. Rolomag and I will prepare that flank to fend off their horsemen while you charge them.\"\n\n\nYou gaze out through the plains and to where the mountain turns into rocky hills.\n\n\n\"You will need to go quickly lest they finish their foul deeds.\"\n\n\n\"I will go with Gigalak's breath at my heels,\" Hidius says.\n\n\n\"Good,\" you say. \"With one hand may he guide us, and with the other sweep our enemies from our home.\"\n\n\nYou and your comrades disband to prepare for the battle that is yet to come.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Stop", "result": "As Galik's weak hands clutch onto you, your fingers curl around the dagger tightly. But you toss it to the side, instead lifting Galik up and cradling him.\n\n\n\"Why did you do this?\" you ask. \"Greusim was my friend, I've known you since before you were born. Why couldn't you just wait for me to come back, we could have handled this together.\"\n\n\nA weak grunt passed Galik's lips, and he pulls himself up a bit.\n\n\n\"I'm\u2026sorry\u2026\"\n\n\nThe last breath passes between his lips, and his body goes limp. You sit there, letting out a heavy sigh. With a grunt, you lift up Galik's body, throwing him over your shoulder.\n\n\nIn front of you stands Grolik, a bloody dagger in his hands. He nods in understanding and steps to the side as you walk by.\n\n\nYou go down to bury your former friend by the river\u2026", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Spare Galik", "result": "He may have lost his way, overtaken with wrath, but surely there must be another way to handle this. You stop, and glancing around you see many orcs have gathered. They seem to be expecting you to finish Galik off. \n\n\nDespite your brutal nature, you cannot bring yourself to do it. There is another way to handle this\u2026 he is just lost-\n\n\nSomething slams into you, forcing the wind from your chest, and as you fall your arms twist and you roll.\n\n\nStopping, you see Galik stepping towards you\u2026 twirling the sword, a smirk on his face.\n\n\nYou crawl back, lifting your arms up defensively as Galik raises the sword.\n\n\nYou cringe a bit as his arm twitches\u2026 but not for the reason you would expect. Another arm shoots under it and grabs his wrist, twisting it back and to his side. You pull yourself up, hands out just in case. \n\n\nGalik snarls as he begins to struggle, but this is replaced by a gasp; his brow twitches and he drops the sword. He staggers forward and reaches his arms out, and as he falls you catch him. His face buries into your chest as he falls at an awkward angle.\n\n\nBewildered you look up to see Grolik, standing, a dagger slicked in blood in his hand. His brow furrowed, he looks up from Galik and nods at you.\n\n\nUpon Galik's back you see a stretch of blood dripping down his back. The dagger wound placed expertly in his spinal column. Rolling Galik over and kneeling, you hold him off the ground somewhat. His eyes are blank and his mouth slightly agape, he did not suffer for very long. \n\n\n\"Damn it Galik,\" you say. \"It didn't have to be like this.\"\n\n\nA few orcs walk forward, nodding at you.\n\n\n\"Chief,\" one says, \"we will take care of him for you.\"\n\n\n\"No,\" you say. \"I'll handle it, let's untie the other orcs first though.\"\n\n\nYou walk with Grolik over to the orcs tied to the posts, the whippers having long since left. Grunting, you begin the work of cutting their bonds, several orcs coming over to help. \n\n\n\"Can't say we'll miss him too much,\" one says. \"I know you were close to him, but he was a damn tyrant.\"\n\n\nYou sigh and continue your work. After finishing up, you hoist your former friend over your shoulders and go to find somewhere to bury him\u2026", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Kill Grolik", "result": "You level the sword, the placing the tip on Grolik's chest. Sometimes sacrifices have to be made for the greater good, Galik may be wild but you should be able to keep him in check. \n\n\n\"Really Nolazir?\" Grolik says, \"is this really what you're doing?\"\n\n\nGrolik's stare pierces you, his glare hard enough to cut steel and his voice unwavering.\n\n\n\"If this is really what you're doing,\" Grolik says, \"Gigalak help me you better make sure I'm dead because if I make it out of this I'm coming for you bo-\"\n\n\nYou grab his shoulder as hard as you can, thrusting the sword into his chest and through his heart. Grolik's face scrunches up in pain, but only for a moment. His eyes roll into the back of his head and he falls to the side.\n\n\nHolding the sword, you stare at the bloody blade. The weight of what you have done not quite hitting you, and this weapon of death seeming foreign for a moment.\n\n\nAs you lower the sword to your side, a hand slams into your shoulder.\n\n\n\"Hahaha!\" Galik says, \"good job Nolazir! Guess he wasn't so tough after all, let's see him come back to get us from this one!\"\n\n\nForcing yourself to laugh, you walk off with Galik, who starts to talk about some strategies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Conflict", "result": "In the following days, chaos has erupted throughout the camp. The Red Handed and their allies dispersed themselves throughout the camp, then without warning began to butcher as many of your orcs as they could.\n\n\nTrapped by a cliff behind you and the bulk of the late Grolik's forces ahead of you, the only viable cover is the rocks and wagons you hide behind. They have a pretty good grip on the main camp area. Once they finish fighting the rest of the camp, they will surely overwhelm you at any moment.\n\n\nArrow after arrow thuds into the wagon. You fire an arrow back under one of the wheels, unsure of where the hell it landed. In front of you the tents burn and the sounds of fighting ring throughout. You didn't know there were so damn many of them until last night. \n\n\nThe minor nicks, scratches, and bruises you've received from fighting your way out pulsate through your body. Galik sits next to you, nursing a grievous injury in his side.\n\n\nAs you, Galik, and the rest of the orcs fought your way through, some orc chucked a javelin into Galik's side. It went through pretty deeply and you are surprised that he is still alive, although he won't be if you do not get him treatment soon. Even then his chances are probably slim.\n\n\nYou witnessed Hidius walking out of his tent to see the commotion, and immediately was stabbed in the chest before you could help. Silak fought valiantly to defend his dying chief, but was ultimately overwhelmed.\n\n\nGro'tesk might be dead by now, you didn't see what became of him. You're not too sure about Rolomag either for that matter. You had not seen him since late yesterday, and as far as you know he wanted to speak with Gro'tesk. So they're either standing together or already dead.\n\n\nGasping and panting, Galik stands up and directs some of the orcs around you. \n\n\n\"You, crawl that way,\" he says, \"and you, keep shooting damn it!\"\n\n\nHe kneels and grips another orc by the shoulder.\n\n\n\"Finish this up, damn it!\"\n\n\nA team of orcs furiously work on a contraption similar to the siege breakers you constructed during the war with the Wister Elves. Actually, you recognize a lot of the orcs around you from those days.\n\n\nGalik slumps against the wagon, gritting his teeth. \n\n\n\"Nolazir,\" he says, \"we're going to try to break through. We'll have archers at the sides covering you, follow us, and when we get close enough break out and rush them.\"\n\n\nWhile the path you have to go is pretty narrow, you're sure this will only lead to your doom. Well, so would sitting here eventually.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow Galik's Lead", "result": "\"Yes Chief,\" you say, \"bring one of these shields.\"\n\n\nLuckily, one of the wagons happened to have a bunch of weapon and shield supplies in it. Galik hands the shield back to you.\n\n\n\"Gigalak will shield me,\" he says, \"besides, I don't know how much longer this dressing will hold without my hand.\"\n\n\n\"I'll see this through to the end with you,\" you say.\n\n\nAs the orcs finish up the siege breaker, you all get into position. A few orcs begin the slow push, as Galik stands in the middle of it barking orders and taking cover. Raising your shield you get into the column, a couple of arrows already hitting and bouncing off your shield.\n\n\nYou all make a sort of wall with the shields, but many orcs are still struck down. Some of yours fire arrows over the shields and the siege breaker, a few even managing to kill or wound some of your foes.\n\n\nAs you get closer, you see the Red Handed preparing to charge. You brace yourself for their attack.", "action_results": [{"action": "Use your bow", "result": "You hand an orc your shield, as his is riddled with arrows. Getting behind him, you notch an arrow to your bow. Taking aim as the orcs ahead cry out and begin their charge. Even as you aim, an arrow glances off your cheekbone, but it does not sway you. You release your first arrow, the receiving orc stumbling and falling still.\n\n\nThe gleam of bloodlust in your eyes, you fire arrow after arrow. Mostly killing and wounding offending orcs. When your quiver runs out, you start ripping arrows out of the shield on the ground next to you, using the projectiles that haven't broken. \n\n\nThe Red Handed push into your line, many of your orcs rushing forward to take them on. They actually hold them off pretty well for a good while. But as they exhaust and succumb to their injuries, you see there is no way you will win this.\n\n\nYou push forward with the orc in front of you as they start to surround Galik, making a desperate attempt to get to him. The orc in front of you drops you his quiver and heroically dashes into the fray, almost immediately he is beat down and killed by your enemies. \n\n\nYou move forward with the other archers, roaring as you make your way to your leader. As the Red Handed flood around him, he has no choice but to climb atop the siege breaker. Orc after orc is cut down trying to get to him.\n\n\nYou charge forward, deflecting a sword with your bow. The orc's face crunches as you smash the bow into his face, the heavy wooden weapon turning his face into red mush. You throw it at the next, which doesn't do much but give you an opportunity to axe him in the neck.\n\n\nBefore you can do anything, Galik takes a spear jab in the back. Two orcs climb up and one grabs him, the other using his dagger to stab the shit out of him. \n\n\nYou hook the axe shoulder behind the knee of one of those lawless scum, arcing it back around and slamming it into his face. As the orc sputters and cries out, you try to pull the axe out, but it won't budge. The bastard even grips the top part of the handle, pushing it deeper into his face.\n\n\nYou struggle with him until you feel a heavy pain in your chest. \n\n\n\"Argh!\"\n\n\nAbove you, a Red Handed quickly retracts his spear. You roar as you charge up, but the dying orc below grabs your leg, causing you to fall. The orc with the spear begins to stab you in the back, as other orcs stab you and beat you down with clubs. \n\n\nYou cry out in pain and anger, but you are too weak to do anything else. In moments you are left to die, broken, bloody, and bleeding out\u2026.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Charge", "result": "You draw your sword, preparing it as you raise your shield. With a roar you go forth to meet them, arrows from the archers flying to the sides of you and taking down some of your foes.\n\n\nThis barely slows them down, and they meet yours. The orcs slow down the Red Handed, but as you duck, parry, deflect, and attack\u2026.the exhaustion is clearly written on your orcs. Almost a straight twenty four hours of combat and sustaining injuries seems to be taking it's toll.\n\n\nYou slowly and steadily retreat as your allies fall one by one. Ahead, Galik and the rest of the orcs at the siege breaker are being flooded by the Red Handed. Galik climbs atop the contraption as he makes his stand, cutting down any foe brave enough to try to face him.\n\n\nRoaring, you and a few other orcs break your line to fight your way towards Galik. Most of the other orcs rally to you and help you to push forward. \n\n\nDodging a blow, you slice through an orc's face. He shouts out but before he can do much else you've already slashed his neck. As you lunge forward you parry a blow, slamming your blade straight through the offenders chest.\n\n\nHis arms flail in front of him, and as you wedge the blade to get it out his blood spouts from it. Another orc swings, his sword glancing off your cheek bone. Roaring in fury, you slash through his knee and he falls gripping his stub. \n\n\nGalik slams his sword into an orc's skull, but it is in too deep for him to wrench it out. The orc falls and the sword slips from his grip. \n\n\n\"Galik!\" you shout as you throw him your sword, and in one motion he catches it and slices through an orc's chest in mid climb.\n\n\nBrandishing your axe you charge forward, cutting down several orcs in a fury, but not without sustaining some injuries yourself.\n\n\nPanting and heaving, you climb onto the top of the siege breaker. The both of you stand back to back fighting off orcs, as the rest of your allies are swallowed up. As your weapon clashes with others, and blood is shed, you hear a gasp behind you.\n\n\nTurning, you see there is a dagger wedged into Galik's knee joint. He falls and you reach out to catch him, but miss by a hair. Galik is dragged into the crowd of orcs, you slash, beat, stab, and jab at him.\n\n\nYou roar and slam your axe into the nearest orc. Before you can fall another, a flail flies forward, wrapping around your leg.\n\n\nThe orc pulls with a grunt, and steps back, dragging you off the glorified wagon. You howl in pain and rage as the surrounding orcs begin to stab you and beat your with their clubs and fists.\n\n\nYou meet much the same fate as Galik\u2026.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Stay here and cover Galik", "result": "\"Galik\" you say, \"let's hold out here.\"\n\n\n\"We need everyone to push through.\"\n\n\n\"No, if we stay here we can shoot them when they inevitably charge us,\" you say, \"we will probably die anyway, but we can whittle down their numbers a bit.\"\n\n\nGalik nods and prepares his bow. You pass along the order for everyone to stand their ground and wait for the time to fire\u2026.\n\n\nBut it never seems to come.\n\n\nTwo days later, the fighting has calmed down in the camp, many of your orcs apparently having managed to escape if they weren't killed.\n\n\nNow most of the Red Handed are focused on launching volley after volley of arrows at you. Many of you manage to shoot back, sometimes killing and wounding theirs. But they have you beat down pretty well.\n\n\nAs you stand to fire an arrow, a sharp pain shoots through your chest. Gritting your teeth you kneel down, gripping the arrow lodged in your chest. You snap the shaft in half, knowing that pulling it out would only really cause you to bleed out faster.\n\n\nStill, this isn't the first time you have been shot with an arrow. You sit down against the wagon next to Galik. He is not doing so well, having developed a fever, and his wound becoming red and filled with pus. \n\n\nAn orc bends as low as he can as he dashes over to you. Right before he can yell his message an arrow tears into his forehead. He looks up at it, almost going cross eyed. The orcs mouth moves but no sound comes out, and he collapses. \n\n\nLooking around, your orcs seem dispirited. Many nursing wounds that will eventually be the death of them anyway. One tired looking orc crawls his way over to you.\n\n\n\"Nolazir,\" he says, \"I was with you during our fight with the Wister Elves. I will remain with you until the bitter end.\"\n\n\n\"The bitter end is already here, my friend,\" you respond.\n\n\nGalik wheezes and grabs your shoulder.\n\n\nIt's time,\" he says while bearing his sword.\n\n\n\"They've already got us beat,\" he says, \"we mind as well go out on our feet.\"\n\n\nYou and the other orc help Galik up as he struggles to stand. He manages to get his own balance though.\n\n\n\"Friends, warriors,\" he says, \"the end is here. I say we honor our fallen comrades, and go out on our feet as Gigalak intended it to be.\"\n\n\nGalik's voice is raspy and weak. The remaining orcs all nod and prepare to charge.\n\n\n\"Forward!\" Galik cries.\n\n\nAs you and your young friend storm forward, you do not hear the rest of the orcs going.\n\n\n\"What is the this?\" Galik says, as you both see the other orc dead on the ground, an axe in his skull.\n\n\nOne of the orcs gestures to the dead orc with the arrow in his head. \n\n\n\"The Red Handed gave us an ultimatum while you were busy talking about how best to get us all killed,\" he says.\n\n\n\"What are you-\" you say.\n\n\n\"Shut up,\" he says, \"this fool was going to tell you.\"\n\n\n\"Tell us what?\" you ask.\n\n\nMaybe it was the fatigue, maybe it was the trust in your fellows. But under normal circumstances you should have seen this coming.\n\n\n\"It's better if we show you.\"\n\n\nAbout a dozen orcs notch their bows, you reel back in surprise, inhaling deeply.\n\n\n\"I order you to-\" Galik is cut off as several arrows hit him, he immediately drops.\n\n\nYou only get a moment to roar in rage as several more arrows pierce your chest. You stagger back, blood starting to ooze out of your body. \n\n\n\"Argh! I'll fucking kill you!\"\n\n\nBefore you can muster anything else your old friends have restrung their bows.\n\n\n\"By Gigalak's blood I'll-\"\n\n\nArrows whistle through the air and slam into your body, gritting your teeth and writhing in pain as the deadly projectiles tear through your flesh and organs.\n\n\nYou go down, yelling an unintelligible garble, as you fall into a rage filled heap. Twitching you lay there, all of your senses stopping as a haze slowly envelops your vision.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"Stop Moping\"", "result": "\"Listen, Hidius,\" you say. \"You need to stop moping around and do something. The only thing that is going to doom you and your tribe to extinction is this attitude of yours.\"\n\n\nHidius' eyes widen in surprise at your words.\n\n\n\"Even though you've been through much, they all look up to you. You need to be their guiding hand, show them how to live a life by example, show them how to defend it too.\"\n\n\n\"I can't- there's no way we'll ever stop the oncoming darkness-\"\n\n\n\"Enough of that talk, it's spreading to everyone here. The second thing that came out of Silak's mouth was this doom and gloom shit.\"\n\n\nHidius looks down for a moment.\n\n\n\"Perhaps my suffering has made me weak, when it should make me stronger.\"\n\n\n\"Yes, look. They all need you. We all need you,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Fine.\" Hidius clenches his fists. \"I will gather my forces and take them to meet your army.\"\n\n\n\"Be quick. The Mannate Empire is becoming a faster and larger beast every day.\"\n\n\nHidius nods and calls over a group of orcs. You can't hear what he says but they all split up to gather more orcs, so you can only imagine that he is keeping his word.\n\n\nAs you ride off into the burning rays of the sun, you hope that your words actually got through to Hidius. \n\n\nYou ride on, to where you think the next tribe should be. Perhaps you will find somewhere to hide from the sun for a bit first\u2026", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Knock Out", "result": "Rolling to the side, his foot smashes into the ground inches away from your head. Pulling your foot back, you shout as you slam it into Gro'tesk's knee. As his knee pushes in, he cries out and falls forward, catching himself with his hands. \n\n\nYou push yourself up into a crouch as you run forward, reeling your fist back. But you lose your balance and skid forward. Fortunately, you use the momentum to plant your fist into the side of his head. He grunts as the full force of your attack hits him, his head snapping to the side and his body twisting.\n\n\nHe lays still, and you crawl backward, just in case\u2026.\n\n\nBut he just lays on the ground. All of the onlookers gasp, never having seen their mighty chief get knocked out cold. You stand up and dust yourself off, and just right after the chief rolls over onto his back.\n\n\nRubbing his face and sitting up he looks at you, still dazed.\n\n\n\"I win.\",\n\n\nHe stares at you blankly for a moment.\n\n\n\"Fine!\"\n\n\nWith the help of a couple of onlookers, he stands up and stumbles his way over to his hut, rubbing his head as he tries to figure out how he could have lost.\n\n\nYou smirk and follow him in to give him your terms.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Swift Punch", "result": "Keeping your elbows tucked in, you send out several punches. The first three land well, hitting Gro'tesk's face. The next two don\u2019t go so well. As your foe dodges the next, you lose form and go wide with your fifth punch, and he easily sees it coming. \n\n\nHe actually manages to catch your fist, twisting your arm to the side with one hand. As you bring your left arm up to defend your face, his large fist slips in under it. Your head kicks back as you feel the pain ripple through your mouth, the lip busting open.\n\n\nGro'tesk lets go of your arm as you stumble back, and he lands another fist into the side of your head. A throbbing pain emanates from the side of your head. \n\n\nYour opponent grins as you stagger in a daze, he prepares the finishing blow\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Catch his Wrist", "result": "Shuffling to the side a bit, you stare at your foe, your hands at your side. He snarls and lunges forward for the last strike. You lean back, then step to the side as you grab his wrist with your outermost hand. You pull it down with as much force as you can, and with your arm closest to him you run your elbow along his straightened arm for a moment.\n\n\nYour elbow collides, hitting him right between the eyes. His face scrunches up, and, as you let go, you step right in front of him; reeling your fist back you snarl as you ram it into his nose. His head jerks back and his feet slip out from under him, landing with a heavy thud. \n\n\nPanting, you step back and watch him as he lays still.\n\n\nWith a groan he shuffles, rubbing his face with his hands.\n\n\n\"What happened?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"I won the fight.\"\n\n\n\"Aww, come on!\" he complains. \"I wanted to win!\"\n\n\n\"No, I won fair and square.\"\n\n\n\"Fine!\" Gro'tesk groans.\n\n\nAs he pulls himself up, he mumbles under his breath. He signals to you to follow him into his hut. The crowd stares in awe, as they have never seen anyone beat their leader down before.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Grapple", "result": "You shuffle forward, wrapping your fingers around his forearm. He grunts in surprise as you pull, while simultaneously planting a fist or two into his ribs.\n\n\nDucking under a swing, you grab his wrist with your other hand and slide the first up his arm and lock it around his elbow. With all your might, you yank is arm forward and pull down. Gro'tesk stumbles and falls, and, as you are about to twist his arm, you feel a savage kick land on the back of your knee.\n\n\nBuckling and letting go of his arm, the foe pushes himself up. Hearing him coming up right behind, you throw an elbow back with a savage snarl. He catches it and wraps his hand around the back of your neck.\n\n\nWith a heavy grunt, he pushes you forward, using his control and momentum to keep you moving. You cry out as he tosses you over a water trough and into a wooden rack with animal skins hanging from it. \n\n\nYou only half-catch yourself, and, before you can fully turn, Gro'tesk is right there. With a sick grin, his boot flies into the water trough which slams into your stomach. The wind is taken out of you, and you even manage to get a grip on it. You cannot stop the force of the kick and the trough still goes down, pinning you to the ground from your waist.\n\n\nThe cold water spills out, pouring up over your belly and chest. You feel like something sucks up into your chest as the cold makes you gasp.\n\n\nWith an unnatural nimbleness, Gro'tesk hops over the fallen trough. He lifts his foot and brings it down. Luckily you manage to catch his foot in time. With both hands, you push as he does; both of your faces twisting with effort. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Twist his leg", "result": "Crying out, you twist his ankle; Gro'tesk almost falls but catches himself on the skin rack. With one hand you pull his ankle forward. Your goes tries to stop himself from falling forward, his other leg straightening up. You shout out, sending your other fist into his straightened knee.\n\n\nA sickening crack resounds as your opponent's face twists up in pain. He falls as he cries out, rolling into the skin rack as he nurses his injured knee. \n\n\nPushing the water trough off of you, now easier as it's empty, you hobble over to Gro'tesk. He looks at you, a fiery rage in his eyes.\n\n\n\"You ruined my leg!\" he screams.\n\n\n\"That was called winning.\"\n\n\nHe roars, almost springing up and grabbing you, but his leg buckles and he falls.\n\n\n\"Hey, it was your knee of my skull.\"\n\n\n\"Fine! You win fair and square!\"\n\n\nYou stand to the side as several orcs help him limp into his hut. The rest of the orcs from the village just stare at you in awe.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Go for a cheap shot", "result": "Gritting your teeth as his foot gets closer and closer to your face, you're only left with one option. He tries to pull his leg away, but you hold on tight. Your wrap your hand over the top of his foot, pulling it so his heel skids across your chest. Your other hand shoots upward, Gro'tesk's face twists in pain as he stumbles back and falls. He rolls howling in pain, nursing his injured genitals. \n\n\nWith the water trough empty and no one trying to crush your skull, you have a much easier time pushing it off of you. \n\n\n\"No fair!\" Gro'tesk cries, \"that's cheating!\"\n\n\n\"So is trying to stomp in my skull,\" you say, \"but I did win.\"\n\n\n\"Fair is fair\u2026and unfair is unfair!\" Gro'tesk screams.\n\n\n\"Well, now you've learned that there are consequences to trying to stomp heads in.\"\n\n\nGro'tesk rolls to the side and pouts.\n\n\n\"Fine, you win,\" he says, \"but I owe you a punch!\"\n\n\nGro'tesk pulls himself up in a huff, and hobbles over to his hut. Most of the orcs stare at you in awe as you follow, others give you disapproving looks for your chosen victory route. \n\n\nAlthough you don't really care either way, you've won.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stay out of it", "result": "The chief just continues to wail on the youngster, his nose battered and turned wrong. Blood oozes out of his nostrils and his left eye seems to be swollen shut. He tries to talk but it just comes out as garble. \n\n\n\"What!? I can't hear you,\" the chief screams, \"you'll have to speak louder than that!\"\n\n\nThe youth's mouth begins to move, and as he does so, the chief's hand lifts and curls into a fist. The larger orc raises an eyebrow, daring the smaller to try to speak again. Realizing he is being given a chance, the younger sighs and remains quiet.\n\n\n\"Coward!\" the chief yells and drops the other orc onto the ground.\n\n\nHe just lays there, silently soaking in the pain inflicted upon him. The chief turns to you, satisfaction in his eyes.\n\n\n\"Who the hell are you?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"My name is Nolazir, of the River Tribe\u2026as some call it.\"\n\n\n\"Hah! Foolish name!\" he says, \"I am Chief Gro'tesk, and you are\u2026..ah, Nolazir.\"\n\n\nHe grins.\n\n\n\"I've heard of you, fighting the humans\u2026.but you let your warriors argue with you,\" he says, \"you have gone soft! You should pummel them into the ground whenever they so much as look at you the wrong way.\"\n\n\n\"Maybe I'm not so harsh to my own,\" you say, \"but I don't give that same kindness to strangers.\"\n\n\nGro'tesk's eyes narrow, and he snarls. \n\n\n\"Are you threatening me?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"No, I'm challenging you,\" you say, \"if I win, you and your allies join me.\"\n\n\n\"If I win\u2026.you screw off!\" Gro'tesk growls.\n\n\nBy now, a large group of orcs has gathered around. All of them cheering on Gro'tesk as he removes his tribal necklaces. They make a circle around you as you prepare to fight\u2026", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Leave them", "result": "\"Leave the wounded,\" you say. \"Gigalak will decide their fate!\"\n\n\nMost of the orcs obey, although many still loot the corpses. Some of the more savage orcs cut the scalps from the still living and squirming men despite your order.\n\n\nYou walk through the dead and wounded, picking out the orcs who plead for your help. Some you know cannot be saved, and others can while being grievously wounded. With all the orcs gathered, you and many of the other orcs set to work helping them.\n\n\nYou have saved many lives this day, working over the sound of groaning Imperials dying in the mud just outside. \n\n\nYou see Grolik looking around, putting a spear tip to a wounded human. With a grunt he pushes, sending the dying man to his fate. It would seem as though that is not the first or the last he has killed in this manner. You catch his glimpse for a second, shame written across his face.\n\n\nWhile he does not seem the type for emotions like that, putting helpless people out of their misery must take a certain toll on one.\n\n\nOn a rock sits Rolomag, nursing a gash on his face using a rag. He just watches some of the orcs finishing off the dying Imperials. Most of them do not seem happy about it, but maybe they believe it right not to prolong their suffering.\n\n\nYou turn your attention back to your work, ending the suffering of friends in a much different manner. The orc whose deadly injury you have just cleaned and sewn up thanks you as he hobbles away.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Take them prisoner", "result": "\"Take them as prisoners,\" you shout. \"We will take them as ransom.\"\n\n\nYou divide your orcs, some of them gathering wounded orcs to aid them with their injuries. The rest gather up the wounded Imperials worth saving. Some are too wounded, so are either put out of their misery or left to die.\n\n\nYou grab a dying Imperial soldier, the young human sort of whimpers. He must believe you are going to kill him, but his eyes widen in surprise as you clamp his wound. You lift him up and carry him to some of the tents erected for the wounded. There are many more orcs in here than humans, as most are focusing on the orcs, who they find more worth saving. \n\n\nThe soldier winces and grunts as you pour alcohol into his wound. Alcohol and blood running from the gash in his side. He groans in pain as you sew his wounds, then when it seems he is set, you tie his hands and place him under the guard of some other orcs.\n\n\nYou go, helping orc and human alike. In the group, you are surprised to see Grolik eagerly helping a human. \n\n\nStrangely, he seems compassionate towards the wounded fellow as he wholeheartedly stitches his wounds up. You are surprised to see this trait from an orc such as Grolik. After witnessing him brutally butcher and maim countless enemies, it comes as a bit of a shock that he is not looting or scalping the helpless foes.\n\n\nWhile aiding enemy soldiers does not come naturally to you, surely Gigalak would smile upon saving lives as opposed to wanton destruction of life, something only the grimmest of souls would take satisfaction with. ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Join the Cavalry", "result": "On your horse, you go around to join the cavalry. As you do so, you signal the archers, the lightning briefly illuminating your warriors. For a moment, the heavens are silent, the wind stops causing the trees to sway, and a single arrow soars through the air.\n\n\nThe Imperial officer lurches back, the arrow slicing through his shoulder. He falls off his horse with a thud, and the rest of the soldiers try to escape, but it is already too late. \n\n\nYou and your cavalry have them caught in a pincer movement. As you ride by, you lop an Imperial's head clean off his shoulders. Before long, some of the humans have mounted horses in a vain attempt to buy their fellows time to escape. \n\n\nGalloping through the mud, you rush to meet one of these foes. Before you is a tired looking man, a wild look in his eyes as he gives a mighty battle cry. His sword clashes against yours, the rain splattering off the twin blades. You circle back to face him again, a slight burning sensation on your neck. To your left an Imperial soldier stands, fixing another arrow, the first arrow's head had just lightly grazed your neck.\n\n\nDucking, you spur your horse forward, turning back around to face the man who you had clashed with before. Three orcs are upon him, as one sends his club into the man's gut, the other two hack and slash him with swords. It takes some time before they pierce the mail he wears, but they are effective.\n\n\nCharging towards the small group of archers, you throw your axe. The blade misses, instead the blunt side slamming into the man. He holds his face, blood dripping from his nose. A few arrows almost slam into you, but by the hand of Gigalak they are swept aside. You ram your horse through, trampling two men and cutting another's chest open.\n\n\nAs you circle back around, you grab a spear from a leather pouch at the side of your horse. Chucking it, the spear impales an Imperial. \n\n\nBy now your archers have joined the battle, and the Imperials are all but surrounded. As they group up, they seem to realize the futility of their fight, and some even manage to run into the forest to escape.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Impale the Knight", "result": "You pull one of your spears slung onto your back. With a roar, you charge the knight, he looks in surprise, taking a swing at you. You knock the sword to the side and ram the spear into his stomach. The silver coat snaps and crunches, and, as the knight falls, you push the spear further into him. You watch as crimson red oozes out from inside the coat as you twist and push the spear. The imperial sputters and coughs from under his helm as he feebly reaches for his sword before going limp. Ripping the spear out, you see the tip is mostly ruined. If you hadn't kept pushing the dead man before, you would only have had a minor flesh wound.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Throw your axe at the horse", "result": "The horses gallop forward, the knight's elbow tenses and he leans forward on the horse. He seems intent on running your through. As you ride forward you let him think this will be a jousting match\u2026.\n\n\nLike a bolt of lightning, you draw the axe at your side, throwing it at the Imperials horse. The axe embeds itself in its forehead, and it lets out a pained neigh. You dip to the side as it lurches forward, the knight being launched off with a cry of dismay. \n\n\nAs he lands a sickening crunch sounds out. The knight groans and tries to pull himself up, but his arm is twisted and bent horribly. He buckles and falls onto the ground, a defeated sigh escaping his lips. \n\n\n\"Come on, knave,\" the knight says, not moving, \"what are you waiting for you brute?\"\n\n\nBefore you can ride forth to finish him, a loud cry emanates from the forest behind you.", "action_results": [{"action": "For the Emperor!", "result": "You turn your horse. From out of the trees, an enormous group of humans comes rushing out, screaming and yelling. You notice they are quite different from the knights. While some of them have the silver coats, most of them just have some kind of padding and the Imperial soldier robes. Their boots, gloves, and helmets don\u2019t look anywhere near as nice as the knights'.\n\n\nThese must be the lowly soldiers of the Empire, but there sure are a lot of them. You turn again as you see the lawless orcs bring up a cry, charging towards the humans. You watch as your comrades also charge the humans, so you decide you should as well.\n\n\nGalloping forward, you prepare your axe. A battle of strength versus numbers, you decide that Gigalak will decide the winner today. \n\n\nYou trample a couple of humans, their cries ringing out. The axe bites into another, and as he dies his sword nicks your arm. You slash, hack, batter, and even punch one. A dying soldier cries out, digging his dagger into your side. You gasp and slam your axe handle into his eye, a squishing sound resounds as blood squirts out and onto your leg. He lets out a blood curdling scream as he flails, soon going limp and falling to the ground. \n\n\nWith the dagger still in your side, you circle back, needing to fight through a few more soldiers to do so. Panting, you see that the battle is being lost for the orcs. But some still fight on, despite their injuries and overwhelming odds. \n\n\nChief Greusim charges into the middle of it, laying waste to soldier after soldier. His mighty club denting helmets and cracking skulls, breaking arms and busting jaws. \n\n\nYou watch as he cries out, someone plunging their sword into his side. Gasping, you ride forward to save him. But there are too many soldiers to fight through, and before you can reach him the grunts pull Greusim from his horse, stabbing, slashing, punching, and beating. You see his own club being raised to be used against him.\n\n\nAll the other orcs in your tribe watch as the chief goes down, along with the other orcs he had around him. \n\n\nThere's just too many, you'll never fight through them all.\n\n\n\"Fall back! Fall back!\" some orc cries out.\n\n\nAs you all do so, the lawless orcs seem shocked as to why. Before they can get away, the Imperial troops have swept them up and begin to butcher most of them. Few escape, and you even swing one onto your horse as you ride away.\n\n\nYou all ride into the forest, lucky to have escaped death on this day. The same cannot be said for many others. \n\n\nYou exchange glances with Rolomag, who nods and pokes his chin to the valley. Although you don't like the idea, you all will have to go there to recover and make plans\u2026.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Throw your axe at the knight", "result": "As you both ride forward, the knight tenses up, preparing to run you through. Pulling the axe from its loop, you whip it forward. The axe whirls landing in his shoulder, almost making him fall off his horse. Despite this injury he manages to hang onto his horse, pulling the axe from his shoulder.\n\n\nYet there isn't the familiar sight of blood oozing from the wound, just a ripped robe and silver gleaming in the sunlight. \n\n\n\"You'll have to do better than that, brute,\" the knight says while twirling the axe.\n\n\nGlaring at him, you accept his challenge, you spur your horse onward.\n\n\nThe knight does the same, holding both sword and axe in hand. As he rides forward, you get an idea. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Stab his neck under his helmet", "result": "You lean in as you ride forward, intent on pushing the tip of your sword under his helmet, which should pierce his throat. \n\n\nAs the knight gets closer, you lunge, pushing the blade forward. He slams his sword into yours, simultaneously pushing it forward and sliding the axe blade along it.\n\n\nBefore you even realize what is happening, the sword blade is biting through your neck. The axe follows tearing through your flesh, muscle, and severing your neck bone. You barely feel a thing as your head rolls to the floor, your vision darkening as the knight rides on, and your body falls to join you.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use bow", "result": "Not wanting to get close to this knight, you decide to this would have to do. Sheathing your sword, you sling your bow from your back, notching an arrow just as fast.\n\n\n\"Huh?\" the knight says in surprise.\n\n\nYou release the arrow, and with a twang it soars through the air. The knight barely has time to react before the arrow lands in between his helmet and silver coat. It protrudes from his neck as dark blood spills out, a gurgling sound coming from his throat.\n\n\nThe knight struggles to stay up on the horse, falling onto the ground below. You manage to recover your axe before you hear a loud cry coming out from the forest behind you.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Help the Orcs", "result": "You look to Greusim.\n\n\n\"Sorry chief,\" you say, \"Rolomag is right. We need to work with the orcs, besides, the Imperials encroached on our lands.\"\n\n\nYou draw your sword.\n\n\n\"And there must be consequences.\"\n\n\nYou tell Dekard to get the rest of the orcs, in the meantime you wait.\n\n\n\"Nolazir,\" Greusim says, \"I'm disappointed in you. We're in no position, and we will never be in a position to fight the Empire.\"\n\n\n\"It's for the good of Orcin,\" you say, \"we'll teach them a lesson.\"\n\n\nThe rest of the orcs arrive, and you look out towards them.\n\n\n\"Please chief,\" you say, \"help us defend our home.\"\n\n\nHe looks at the ground for a moment, but returns to answer you.\n\n\n\"If you all think it is best, I will help you.\"\n\n\nMaking sure to stay in cover, you wonder what the best course of action would be.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack the Horsemen", "result": " Feeling bold, you suggest to go straight for the horsemen first, then fan out to the sides and wipe out the archers. Some of the orcs have reservations about this plan, as it would place you right into the center of the archers.\n\n\nBut by Grikalia, you won't let some sharp objects scare you.\n\n\n\"We go in fast, and we go in deadly,\" you say raising your sword.\n\n\nMost orcs nod, and some reluctantly agree, including Greusim. You all get on your horses, waiting for the right moment, although there really isn't one.\n\n\nOn Greusim's command you all charge forward, readying your weapons to meet these humans. The archers fire at your group, an arrow whirling right by your head. The cries and thudding of fallen comrades sounds out as the arrows kill several of your comrades.\n\n\nA low gasp, an arrow sticks out of chief Greusim's chest. His face scrunches up in pain, but he ignores it and rides on, letting out a war cry of rage and pain.\n\n\nOne of the horsemen comes circling back from near the hill. Seeing you all on the attack, he draws his sword, arcing it over his head as he rides towards you.\n\n\nYou decide to accept his challenge, arrows whirling around you and the sound of fighting in your ears. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Wipe out the Archers", "result": "Scanning the area, you decide it would be best to take out the archers first. Your plan is to split the groups into two, each taking out a column of archers, and then catching the knights in a pincer attack. \n\n\nYou and the chief lead one group to the closest archers, and Dekard and another orc lead the others. They take their group a longer way as their targets are further away. Although you figure your distraction will let them take the other column even easier. \n\n\nYou slowly pass through the trees, the sounds of fighting slowly dying down until you creep up behind the archers. The orcs prepare their weapons, waiting for the signal.\n\n\nAs you are about to charge, an Imperial archer steps out from behind a tree, adjusting his belt and sighing contentedly. Although his hood is up and his mask is pulled up over most of his face, you see the surprise in his eyes when he sees you all.\n\n\n\"Attack!\" he cries, and at this point you all gallop forward.\n\n\nThe archers scramble to get ready, and Greusim make a passing swing for the Imperial. He ducks under, and in the same movement grabs onto Greusim and his horse, pulling himself onto it. \n\n\nAs you ride forward, and Greusim tries to throw the archer off, the Imperial draws a small dagger. The chief cries out in agony as the Imperial buries the blade into his back. The chief falls, taking the Imperial with him.\n\n\nThe other orcs are coming up on the archer column, several having been killed by arrows. Greusim groans and the archer attempts to stab him, but he catches his wrist, and the push and struggle. Normally Greusim could easily overpower him, but getting thrown off the horse must have done a number on him. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue the Charge", "result": "Greusim seems to be doing well enough, so you decide to charge forward. The orcs have broken through the middle of the column, leaving crushed and mangled corpses strewn about. You break into the utter chaos, cleaving half of an Imperial's face off.\n\n\nTo the left a group of archers tries to form, and you attempt to go straight through them!\n\n\nYou duck low onto your horse, and as you approach them, you feel a stinging in your side. You ignore it as your horse slams into some archers, screaming sounding out. You lop another's arm off as you ride by, circling around and preparing to finish the group off. \n\n\nOne of the archers, helping a wounded friend, drops him and notches an arrow. As you ride forward he lets it loose, and you grunt as the arrow buries itself into your thigh. In anger you don't even bother using your axe, you just trample him and his friend with the horse. \n\n\nLooking out, you see that the orcs have decimated most of the archers. The other column seems to be in chaos.\n\n\nOut towards the clearing, you see the lawless orcs have charged the Imperial knights, overwhelming them with sheer numbers. They hack and beat the knights to pieces.\n\n\nA hot pain shoots up through your body, and looking down, you realize you have an arrow buried into your side. Groaning, you steer the horse over to the other orcs as they finish off the archers. \n\n\nFrom out of the trees, Greusim stumbles out, panting and covered in wounds. He has multiple gash marks and three arrows dug into his back, side, and hip. Looking behind him, you see multiple archers laying broken and bloody on the ground.\n\n\nThe chief hefts his club over his shoulder.\n\n\n\"It'll take some more than some tender-bellies to take me down,\" he says.\n\n\nThe chief grunts as he pulls himself onto his horse. As you ride to meet with the rest of the orcs, you break most of the shafts from the arrows on your body. You leave a portion in so as not to make the injuries worse, and so that you can get them out later. \n\n\nYour comrades seem to have wiped out the other column, and the lawless orcs you helped start to walk towards you.\n\n\nBefore you can do anything else, a cry rises up from the forest behind you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Help Greusim", "result": "You whip the axe, the blade burying into the archer's shoulder blade. He screams in pain as he stumbles to the side, almost tripping over Greusim. He tries to pull the axe out, but Greusim gets a hand on it first.\n\n\nStill on the ground, he wrenches the axe out, swinging it back around and slamming it into the Imperial's stomach. He doubles over as the chief rips the axe out, and the Imperial falls to his knees clutching the wound. With a savage cry, Greusim arcs the weapon back around, burying it into the Imperials neck. He falls twitching and gurgling as his blood seeps out into the earth.\n\n\nPanting, Greusim pulls the axe out, tossing it to you. \n\n\n\"Thanks,\" he says, and you nod at him.\n\n\nThe other orcs seem to be wrecking the column pretty well, even though several orcs have been shot down by the deadly volleys. \n\n\n\"Well, let's get to i-\" Greusim says, almost stumbling as an arrow rips into his back.\n\n\nYou ride over, looping around the tree and lopping off an archers arm.\n\n\nSeveral more materialize from the trees, firing at you. Ducking you circle back around, hopping off your horse. Sliding behind a tree, you and Greusim ready your bows. \n\n\nStepping out, you don't realize the archers were trying to creep up on you. You slam your notched bow into his, causing his arrow to hit the dirt, before bringing yours back and shooting him in the throat. He gurgles as he staggers to the ground.\n\n\nBefore you know it, the archers are charging you. A couple arrows flying by you as you draw your axe. To your right, Greusim cracks a couple of skulls with his club. You deflect a sword, chopping into an Imperial's shoulder.\n\n\nOne jumps onto you, grabbing you and trying to restrain you. His friend tries to run you through with his sword, but you step to the side. The soldier's sword plunges into the tree, and as you raise your sword he desperately tries to yank it out. He screams as you spill his blood onto the grass, specks hitting the tree.\n\n\nThe archer on your back grips your forearm, trying to turn your sword into you. You chuckle and jab the sword back, the tip stabbing him in the face. He cries out and you throw him over your shoulder, stomping on his neck to silence him. \n\n\nYou look up, ready to take the next one, but you see them laying crushed and bleeding around Greusim. He pants as he kneels, deep cuts and gouges all over him. Three arrows protrude from his back, side, and hip. The archers must have thought the other two were going to kill you, and decided to all focus on him.\n\n\n\"Chief!\" you cry out.\n\n\nHe stands up, waving you off.\n\n\n\"I'm fine, I'm fine,\" he says, \"let's go find the rest, Nolazir.\"\n\n\nYou nod and go with him to find the rest, mounting your horses. As you ride out you see that both columns of archers have been destroyed. The lawless orcs on the hill must have swept down and fought the knights, as evidenced by the butchered corpses on the ground. \n\n\nGreusim climbs onto his horse as you ride forward. Before you can do anything else, a loud cry rises up from the forest behind you.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Don't Go", "result": "You have weighed out all of the options, and you decide that you are going to stay here at the village. Let the currently more adventurous orcs handle this sort of thing. Greusim looks somewhat disappointed that you did not volunteer to go along, but no chief can force an orc to take a part in these matters if they do not wish to.\n\n\nChief Greusim beckons you to him, while all the other orcs are getting prepared for the trip, or complaining they weren't selected. \n\n\n\"Nolazir, my friend,\" Greusim says, \"I need your help.\"\n\n\n\"I'm sorry Greusim, I can't go-\"\n\n\n\"No, not that,\" he says. \"I need you to keep an eye of the village while I am gone. Oversee things and make sure that it all holds together.\"\n\n\n\"Well what exactly do I have to do?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Hmm, govern the daily matters of the village, for one. Most orcs are responsible for their own crops and supplies, but sometimes Gigalak has other plans. If they need help, then you help them. If there are any squabbles, you end those as soon as you can. Also, as I'm sure you know, make sure the village is kept safe\u2026\"\n\n\n\n\nGreusim gets into the specifics of running the village day to day, and while some of it sounds kind of boring, you realize those are the things that must be done to keep the village together.\n\n\n\"Gigalak didn't give us these fields, forests, and mountains as our home, just to lose it to laziness and ignorance. Remain vigilant and you will be fine,\" Greusim nods and pats your shoulder, \"but I trust you Nolazir, you'll do a fine job in my stead.\"\n\n\nYou bid each other farewell. Greusim and the rest of the groups ride off towards the mountains, and before leaving the village Rolomag looks back from his horse and nods at you, which you return.\n\n\nThe village stands behind you, more or less going on as it always has, even if it is a little emptier.", "action_results": [{"action": "Branch 1B: Home", "result": "You enter the large hut that could be considered the villages town hall. There really isn't much to it, mostly a chair and desk near a fire place. The rest of the space just has piles of extra crates, hide bags, and random farming tools. As there isn't much use for an orc at a desk, you decide to saddle up and make your rounds through the village.\n\n\nAfter some time, you realize there isn't much going on except for the village seeming a bit emptier. It isn't as empty as it was when you returned from fighting the Wister Elves, but you shake off this feeling before you go into your old habit of thinking about those days too much.\n\n\nIt is not too long after that several orcs come to seek out your guidance and leadership. While you have always been able to lead others when it counted, it was never really in a domestic capacity.\n\n\nYou stand outside of the chief's hut, feeling it unnecessary to sit at the desk. One by one the orcs come through, asking for advice on various issues regarding farming, smithing, and others. A few even come to you for help in settling disputes among each other. \n\n\nAfter the next few hours, you feel pretty great that you got to help, and that none of the disputes ended in bloodshed, which is quite common in Orcin. While you are the acting chief, you are confident that no fools are going to try to challenge your leadership. This would be foolish as Greusim would return to take his rightful place soon anyway. You have rarely heard of orc cheifs being assassinated, as outright murdering an orc chief does not count, and would only end in execution. \n\n\nAn aspiring orc would have to challenge him, and at the appointed time they would fight where the whole village could watch. The fight would go until one yielded, or to the death. From what you remember from when you were much younger, that is how Greusim came to be chief. Although the chief before him was a terrible and cruel leader. Since then, you had only seen a few orcs challenge Greusim; those all ended in a grisly demise for the challengers, and saying as most are happy with his leadership, there has been no need to attempt to remove him.\n\n\nAs you prepare to return home for the day, you see one of Greusim's sons, Galik, briskly approaching. Judging by his demeanor, you know he is upset about something. At first, you assume it is about Greusim refusing to bring him on the expedition. Although Galik is of age to participate in these matters, he is way too hot headed, even for a normal orc of youth.\n\n\n\"I'm here to take my rightful place as chieftain,\" Galik says.\n\n\nYou take a moment to stop yourself from laughing.\n\n\n\"Galik, my friend,\" you start, \"do you realize this is temporary?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, but as I am his son,\" he says. \"Why shouldn't I be in charge? I have seen him work enough to know what to do.\"\n\n\n\"I know you would be very skilled in leading the tribe,\" you say, \"but he left me in charge and I will obey his wishes.\"\n\n\n\"Who are you to take this power from us?\" he asks. \"When we earned-\"\n\n\n\"No, Greusim earned it,\" you say. \"You should know that status does not follow family lines. Each lives according to his own merit.\"\n\n\nYou cross your arms and lean against the hut.\n\n\n\"Besides, in a few years when your father is good and ready to retire,\" you say. \"I'm sure you'll be well prepared to lead us further into prosperity. Do you think I want this title?\"\n\n\nGalik stops and thinks for a minute.\n\n\n\"Galik, as I said, this is only temporary,\" you say. \"I would not want to do this for all the years Greusim has, I have my own place in the tribe. While he can't pass down leadership to you, he can prepare you to earn the role when it is your time. You'll do a fine job, boy.\"\n\n\nGalik seems calmed down at your words, and he nods.\n\n\n\"I'm sorry Nolazir, my friend,\" he says. \"Sometimes I get caught up in these things too much. I especially want to preserve all the hard work my father has put into this village.\"\n\n\n\"And you shall, someday.\"\n\n\nGalik apologizes again before going off to take care of other matters. You sigh and look around the village, the dying light casting a cold shade upon your home.\n\n\nYou get to your horse and ride back down the trail leading to your house.", "action_results": [{"action": "Later...", "result": "The next morning yields several orcs showing up to your house. While at first, you thought their intentions were bad, as soon as they saw you they started complaining about issues. You notice these orcs are the young and impatient sort, who haven't learned that showing up at a chief's house first thing in the morning is frowned upon.\n\n\nSternly, you tell them to wait until you go down to the hut to start village business. The orcs all grumble and shuffle off, presumably to cause some mischief.\n\n\nYou shake your head.\n\n\n\"No damn patience.\"\n\n\nYou take care of your regular work, making sure your wife only really needs to worry about the inside of the house and the children.\n\n\nAfter saying your goodbyes to your family, you walk down to the village center. Breathing in the fresh morning air, happiness swells inside of you, but soon after you can't help but get a sick feeling in your stomach. It is almost as if something has reached its hand into your gut and is content with squeezing your organs within. Ignoring this feeling, you go back to thinking about the day.\n\n\nAll around the village orcs hustle and bustle, going about their daily work and chores. You see the village blacksmith working hard, mostly making farming equipment for some of the residents. You have dabbled in some smithing yourself, but as most orc weapons are relatively simple to make, the task is usually up to a handful of orcs. These days all their work mostly goes to farming equipment, tools, and other metal components for barrels, wagons, and other miscellaneous things.\n\n\nYou watch as a dozen orcs prepare their canoes for some river fishing. While most orcs can be self-sufficient, most like fish, and it makes good for trading for the villages who cannot get fish so easily. \n\n\nAhead, a wagon slowly rolls into the village, pulled by horses and with several orcs sitting on it. You recognize them as being from one of the mountain coastal tribes. They have come a long way to trade with many tribes. As they trade rocks and materials only found by the sea, including some pearls, they regale the younger orcs with tales of adventures on the sea. Most likely exaggerating accounts of encounters and battles with large sea monsters.\n\n\nEventually, they roll through the village, their exchanges being over with. You notice they even recruit a few young and adventurous orcs to join them on their sea adventures. While you can't stop them, you wish they would stay and help the village. Most are still concerned about the reports on the Mannate Empire.\n\n\nThe orcs that leave with them will probably return someday, they always do. Turning your attention to other matters, several of the orcs need your assistance and advice on village matters. You lead them past a group of young teenage orcs fighting and wrestling, as they tend to do.", "action_results": [{"action": "Two Hours Later", "result": "After a couple hours of dealing with the villagers' problems, one orc named Ruzmar rushes in, panting and sweating profusely.\n\n\n\"Nolazir,\" he says, \"I was out hunting for deer by the rivers Southwest of the village. We saw a group of goblins heading through the hills.\"\n\n\n\"Goblins live in the area, so what's it to us?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"We were only a few miles from the river,\" Ruzmar says. \"They have always been rivals with the lawless tribes down in the plains in that area. The thing is, they've never been this far up.\"\n\n\n\"Hmm,\" you cross your hands under your chin, \"perhaps they've been driven up here by the tribeless bands.\"\n\n\n\"Also,\" he says, \"they are pretty heavily armed. Not the usual stone and wood weapons either, metal and iron. I think they're learning how to make better stuff, or stealing it from the lawless, who have probably stolen it from others.\"\n\n\n\"Show me.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Onward", "result": "With this alarming revelation, you round up two dozen orcs to go with you and Ruzmar. As you climb onto the saddle, Galik approaches, ready to go.\n\n\nYou open your mouth to tell him to stay, but stop as you realize he will need to learn how these things are handled.\n\n\nLater, after as the evening sun lowers over the land, you move through the hills. Keeping a vigilant watch, Ruzmar tells you that you have almost reached where he last saw the Goblins.\n\n\nOver the next hill, a large camp extends over the little peaks and valleys in between. Multiple campfires are alight, and you see the short goblins scampering about, doing random chores or just keeping an eye out.\n\n\nPeering closer, you see that several seem to notice your group. Before long a group of over thirty goblins cautiously make their way over, stopping at the end of what they believe is throwing distance. One particularly larger and uglier goblin walks forward. His face and body are covered in tribal tattoos, and he wears bone necklaces and an amulet which must be a symbol of status.\n\n\n\"I am Gru'zikular,\" he says, \"Chieftain of the proud tribe of Gerobler.\"\n\n\n\"I am Nolazir, humble servant of Chief Greusim, the leader of our tribe.\"\n\n\n\"Has your tribe no name?\"\n\n\n\"Sometimes we are called the River tribe, but Gigalak has never had need to distinguish us. Only the lawless concern themselves with petty names.\"\n\n\nGru'zikular nods, both hands resting on his staff, which you assume is where he draws his shamanic power. The orcs and goblins are similar in that respect, they call upon the powers of the Earth for assistance, while the elves use their strange magic.\n\n\n\"That is what we have come to speak about,\" Gru'zikular says. \"These\u2026.lawless orcs raid and pillage, steal and burn. We have tried to make peace, we have tried to fight them. Nothing has worked, so we come to you with a treaty.\"\n\n\n\"I see your plight, the lawless have been trouble,\" you say, \"but they've kept the humans, dwarves, ogres, and even yourselves from treading too far in our lands. I would say, you goblins and the ogres have probably helped keep the dwarves out as well.\"\n\n\n\"So then why are we treated as such vermin and animals?\" Gru'zikular asks, \"we no longer have lands to call our own, since the dwarves threw us from the mountains and caves, and before that, we walked these very lands you now call yours. Since our removal we have roamed the land, living much as bandits and raiders in order to survive.\"\n\n\nGru'zikular seems to get a little angry, although he attempts to hide it.\n\n\n\"We seem to have common interests,\" he says, \"so we need your help. Either tell the lawless to leave us alone or else help us fight them. In exchange for their souls, and the land they live, we would be glad to put our skills to use for the lawful tribes of orcs.\"\n\n\nThey offer an interesting argument, and although both goblins and the lawless orcs have each been helpful in their own way, they each also pose their own problems. \n\n\n\"I will bring your request to Chief Greusim upon his return,\" you say. \"Until then, you will have our protection.\"\n\n\nGru'zikular raises his eyebrow. It is here that you explain you will leave some orcs to watch over the camp, as the lawless would not dare to kill an orc from a proper tribe. This would bring upon them the wrath of the council and neighboring orc tribes. The goblin chief expresses his appreciation. \n\n\nYou leave half of the orcs in your company with the goblins. Although there is much complaining, they still comply. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Return to the Village", "result": "As you ride back, Galik ceaselessly argues over your decision. At which point you tell him to shut up, and that Greusim will have the final say. Even though he still seems pissed, it gets him off of your back for now. \n\n\nIt is late when you return to the village, and you decide not to worry about any of these issues for the night. They can easily be handled tomorrow. \n\n\nThe next morning seems to come quicker than you had expected. Yawning as you stretch, you go to quiet your infant child, Lagrik.\n\n\nAfter some time, when the child has fallen asleep, you go outside. Almost immediately, you see three orcs riding up to your house on horseback. You are almost about to shout at them when you realize these aren't the young and impatient orcs from the other day.\n\n\nYou see three faces before you. The first being Rolomag, his face drawn and tired looking. His normally shaved face covered in a dark stubble. The second is Dekard, the orc who first saw the Imperials and went on the expedition. Around his head are bandages wrapped around, a dark red stain soaked into it.\n\n\nThe third orc is one you do not know, his hair is wild and his face also covered in stubble. Multiple scars line his face and arms, his leather and fur clothing not looking like that of your tribe. Two teeth protrude from his underbite, one of those is chipped. A red hand painted on his face, his dark eyes attempt to pierce through you.\n\n\n\"Who is this?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"My name is Grolik, leader of the Red Handed orcs band.\"\n\n\n\"Hmm?\" you say, \"one of the lawless. What are you doing here?\"\n\n\nBefore he can continue, Rolomag has jumped off of his horse and grabs your shoulders. Eyes widening, you step back, pushing his arms off of you.\n\n\n\"What has gotten into you?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Nolazir,\" he says, seeming very tired, \"we ran into some Imperials, they were fighting these orcs.\"\n\n\nRolomag goes on to explain that the Imperial soldiers laid siege to the orcs, who were stuck on a rocky hill. They exchanged arrows with the archers, and some Imperial knights on horseback made sure none could leave the hill. \n\n\nHe goes on to say that Greusim rode forward to talk to the Imperials, but was struck in the side with an arrow. While both sides were shooting back and forth, Rolomag is not sure who actually hit the chief.\n\n\nRolomag goes on to explain that the arrow barely had an effect on him, and that, even when all-out combat broke out, Greusim was able to help them. They killed the knights and managed to wipe out the archer columns after a hard-fought battle. \n\n\nRolomag looks at the ground and seems to stop.\n\n\n\"Well, then what happened?\" you ask. \"Out with it.\"\n\n\n\"From out of the trees a large force of Imperial soldiers ran out, we fought them well on horseback\u2026 but\u2026 they surrounded Greusim and the orcs nearest to him.\"\n\n\nRolomag seems to struggle with speaking.\n\n\n\"They fought well, but the humans were hard to kill with their silver coats and helmets. They pulled Greusim off his horse\u2026 by Gigalak there were so many of them. They struck him with everything imaginable, even his own club.\"\n\n\n\"What are you saying?\" you say, already knowing but in disbelief.\n\n\n\"Greusim lays dead,\" Rolomag says. \"They butchered his corpse. After that we couldn't fight them, there were just too many. We fled to the hills, and from there the three of us came here.\"\n\n\nYou sit down, almost missing the wooden log and hitting the ground. Staring at the ground, you wonder how this expedition could have led to this? All he wanted to do was talk, and those animals tore him apart. \n\n\n\"Damn human scum,\" you say on the way to the village as you learn of the other fallen orcs.", "action_results": [{"action": "Mourning", "result": "The village is in mourning, the loss of Greusim and the other dozen orcs has hit the village hard. A somber mood fills the air, and most orcs only know of one way to handle these types of emotions.\n\n\nYou see many orcs putting on their war paint, and performing war rituals to ask for Gigalak's favor and guidance. Sighing, you join in on this, as your anger fills you.\n\n\nThe humans do not know peace or diplomacy. They only see war and control. While the switch from sadness to rage was quick, you all know it is the right thing to do.\n\n\nAs you ride towards the camp in the mountain, you make your plans for revenge on the Empire.\n\n\nThe plan, to unite with the Red Handed and find where the Imperial camp is located. Then you will figure out how best to handle them\u2026", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story53.json b/data/scraper/stories/story53.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc331d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story53.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=52961", "context": "", "first_story_block": "I don't know what it is with me and zombie games, I just love them. A while back, I wrote a story called No Man's Land. It did a lot better than I expected, prompting me to try again. So here it is: Ultraoverlord Strikes Again, Zombie Style.\n\n\nA NOTE ABOUT THE GAME:\n\n\nThe structure of this story is kind of a new one I'm experimenting with. There is only one 'win' scenario, the rest are deaths. Now, given that, there a few different ways to get there. Different choices can get you there in different states of health, with different supplies, and different people. I made this with as much replayability as possible, and there are references to characters in each storyline sprinkled throughout other storylines. See if you can find them all! ", "action_results": [{"action": "Start", "result": "You watch as the coffee slowly filters out of the machine, and into your mug. After it's finished, you pick it up and take a sip. Perfect.\n\n\nLife in the apartment isn't easy. You and your wife don't have enough money for a house yet, and you don't have any kids, so an apartment seemed like the best choice. You have a few commodities; a microwave, a TV, and a coffee maker. You do your own dishes and drive to the laundromat to wash clothes, but you're still content.\n\n\nYou sit on your beater couch and drink more coffee. Your wife isn't even awake yet. You wake up an hour before her every morning. The quiet is nice. It gives you time to think. You think about what you'll have to do today. Today is Sunday, chore day. You're pretty sure it's your turn to wash the dishes. You put your mug down and get up. Better to get the dishes done now than put it off.\n\n\nJust before you start the disposal, a sharp beeping noise startles you. It came from the TV, but nobody turned it on. You peek into the living room, and see the TV screen. It has flashing images and warnings on it. There's a national security threat. Worried, you turn up the TV's volume and listen in. Your wife, woken up by the beeping, slowly wanders in.\n\n\n\"What's going on?\" she sleepily asks. Before you can answer, a robotic voice blasts through the speakers.\n\n\n\"ATTENTION U.S. CITIZENS. AN ACT OF TERRORISM HAS RESULTED IN A DEADLY INFECTION IN THE FOLLOWING STATES: TEXAS, TENNESSEE, OKLAHOMA, KANSAS...\" the list goes on. You don't hear California, your state. You're still safe, for now. You and your wife watch as the TV cuts to live news footage. A woman stands in a demilitarized zone, with heavy fencing, and military personnel everywhere. The newslady announces that unaffected states have set up border guards to prevent the spread of disease. Forces from other parts of the world are also rushing in, with Mexican and Canadian soldiers struggling to keep the infection inside the U.S.\n\n\nThe TV then cuts to a live shot of sick people. They aren't slow, or drowsy, like when you have the flu. No, they're the exact opposite. They're ravenous. They stumble around a a speedwalk pace, and they look dead. Bloods soaks their clothes. Their eyes are glazed over. Suddenly, a deer bounds into view. You watch in horror as the infected surround and kill the deer. The footage immediately cuts away.\n\n\nYou wife begins to panic. You try to console her, reminding her that the whole world is fighting to keep the monsters at bay, and that you two will be just fine. Sacramento is a long ways away from California's border. Perfectly safe. Perfectly safe. You're perfectly safe.\n\n\nSuddenly, the TV makes an announcement: \"ALL MALES OVER THE AGE OF 18 ARE REQUIRED TO LOCATE THE NEAREST OUTPOST AND CONTRIBUTE TO HOLDING THE LINE.\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the border", "result": "Panic sets in for you. You're supposed to stay, to help your wife, to be safe. You can't accept this. But you have to. \n\n\nYou pack everything you can think of: Clothes, food, water, towels, a book. Everything you have room for. You don't own any guns, and the knives in the kitchen seem useless against these predators. Even after loading up, your backpack still feels light.\n\n\nYou say goodbye to your wife, once, twice, three times, and it still hurts to leave. It feels unreal, like a dream, riding the elevator down, hailing a cab, and telling the driver to take you to your own funeral.\n\n\nThe trip takes about three hours. There are a lot of males over the age of 18 in California. When you get out of your cab, you are greeted by a steely man wearing a full set of bulletbroof armor. He orders you to follow him, and shows you to a barrack.\n\n\n\"This is your new home for the time being,\" he says in a gruff voice. The room is full of hammocks. Each one has a table and a storage unit next to it. You select the cleanest-looking one and put your stuff down. \"How long is the time being?\" you ask. The man looks at you. \"Until this all blows over.\"\n\n\nThe next thing you know, you are kneeling in front of a human-shaped target, with an assault rifle in your hands. \n\n\n\"The first rule of operating a weapon is to never have your finger on the trigger unless the barrel is aimed at your target,\" the instructor says. All these military people look so similar, you could swear this was the same guy who showed you to your hammock.\n\n\nAfter you're shown the proper way to fire the monster in your hands, you are ordered to take a shot. You aim directly for the target's chest, and open fire.\n\n\nYou are successful only in breaking the cardboard hand off the target. Your shoulder aches from the recoil. \"Don't get discouraged, you'll get the hang of it.\" the man doesn't really seem to care about you in particular. You pause to look down the row of trainees. They are all just random people with expressions of fear or pain on their faces. As you look at their weapons, you conclude there must somehow be a gun shortage. Three of the trainees are using BB guns.\n\n\nAfter three rigorous days of training, you're almost dead. Your shoulder is in immense pain. You want desperately to call your wife, but any and all electronic devices were confiscated, 'for security reasons.' You hate this. You just want to be back home. You just want things to go back to how they were...\n\n\nYou are suddenly called up, along with all the other recruits, to grab your guns and march to the battlefield.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Battlefield", "result": "You are down on one knee, behind a metal wall. There is a hole, just big enough for you to see and shoot out of in front of you. Ahead is a grassy field. The trees were cleared in anticipation of the dead. All to your left and right, a line of hardened soldiers mixed with scared civilians stands ready to fire, as soon as the signal is given. Your heart is pounding in your chest.\n\n\nSuddenly, the line of trees is broken by a small pack of the dead. Before you can react, a machine gun takes out the whole horde. After that, it's a steady stream. The infected march through the trees, only to get shot down once in full view. All around you, gunshots ring, commands are yelled, and the groans of the dead get louder and louder. \n\n\nYou succeed in taking down a few zombies. Most of the time, as soon as you set your sights on one, someone else kills it. You try to calm your nerves and pretend it's just a game or something. Point and shoot. Simple as that.\n\n\nAfter about an hour, the undead conga line shows no signs of stopping. The commander is just about to give the order to pause and reload when his walkie-talkie begins to crackle. He answers, and proceeds to shout to his colleagues that a large section of the blockade down south just broke. Hundreds are already dead and the zombies have made it to civilian territory. Instantly, your mind flashes to your wife. You can't let her die.\n\n\nYou pull away from your post and address the commander. \"I have to go,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Absolutely not,\" the man responds.\n\n\n\"Please,\" you beg. \"My wife, I have to-\" the man cuts you off. \"Teams have already been sent out to round up women and children. They're being taken up to Washington. It's more safe there. Don't worry about your wife,\" he says. You catch a tone of uncertainty in his voice. Suddenly, another soldier shouts. You look over the wall and see that you won't make it. The zombies and advancing faster than they're being taken down. You look back at the soldier. He can see it too.\n\n\n\"RETREAT! RETREAT!\" you hear as you run for your life. Behind you, you can hear screaming. You drop your gun, it's only weighing you down, and you aren't very good at using it anyway. Retreat, you hear as you run up to the gates. Retreat, you hear as you hastily get in an abandoned car. Retreat, you hear over the deafening sound of the metal walls collapsing.", "action_results": [{"action": "retreat...", "result": "You speed away from the military zone. The terrain slowly morphs back into city. But it's all empty. Nobody is around, and it seems like the power grid is gone. But that doesn't matter. If everyone's gone, that means the military evacuated them, and that means your wife is safe. Now you just need to worry about you. As you drive on, you see a sign declaring that you have 80 miles until you reach Sacramento. That's no problem. You have a head start on the dead, and a car.\n\n\nJust as you pass under a bridge, you hear a loud pop noise. Just as you feared, your tire popped on shards of glass. You look around. Actually, this whole road is covered with an even layer of glass shards. Thank goodness you're wearing shoes.\n\n\nThe car is useless now, as all four tires are popped. You couldn't even push it forward, because the traffic up ahead is deadly. The streets are full of abandoned cars, some with their lights on, some with doors still open. You don't know how long you have before the dead catch up with you. You look around and hastily make a choice.", "action_results": [{"action": "Get food", "result": "Food is always the top priority. If you're going to survive, you'll need food. Period. You look around. Nothing is in the immediate vicinity, so you'll have to do some exploring. You head toward the traffic jam up ahead.\n\n\nAs you weave your way through the cars, you notice something odd. A lot of the windows are smashed, and there's blood on the inside and outside of most of the cars. The military wouldn't do something like that. A thought crosses your mind: You left a while after hearing that a southern wall fell. The zed could have already been here, which means you're already too late.\n\n\nYou pick up the pace, dodging cars and debris. As you pass an SUV, a zombie pops out of one of the windows and swipes at you. They were definitely here. You break into a run past all the cars.\n\n\nAfter finding clear roads again, you spot a road sign. It advertises hotels and shops, and tells where they are. You see a supermarket that's very close. You set off to find it, and hope that it wasn't picked clean.\n\n\nAfter navigating the roads, you see the supermarket. Unfortunately, a fair amount of zombies surround it. You watch to see if there's any way to slip through, but the zombies all wander aimlessly and block the entrances. Besides, even if you got in, you wouldn't be able to get out.\n\n\nJust as you are about to give up, a boy, no older than sixteen, goes running into the market. He must have been watching, just like you. But unlike you, he found a way in. He dodges the zombies and makes it to the doors without ever touching one of them. A minute goes by, and the boy comes up onto the roof with a bag of food in his hand.\n\n\nYou and the boy realize at the same time that getting out won't be so easy. There's nothing to jump on top of, and the zombies were drawn by the noise. They've surrounded the building, and are starting to climb the dumpsters and cars onto the roof.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help the boy", "result": "You decide that the boy is worth saving. If he can run like that, he'll be useful to you as a partner. The only question is, how do you go about saving him?\n\n\nYou know they're distracted by noise, so you start there. You see a truck on the opposite side of the road. It could work. You run over and see if the truck is operational. To your surprise, it's in almost perfect condition. However, when you try the door, you find out it's locked. You look back at the store. The boy is running out of time. In a moment of panic, you slam the car window with your elbow. This shatters the window and sets off the car alarm.\n\n\nThe boy is as startled as you are. As for the zombies, you delayed them. About half the group splits away from the store and targets you. You realize this is a big mistake. You didn't stop the zombies on the roof, and now you have a sizable herd following you. You turn to run an abandon the boy, when you see that he made it. The small lapse in attention for the zombies let the boy jump off the roof. He hits the ground and sprints off into the trees. Instinctively, you follow him.", "action_results": [{"action": "follow him", "result": "You can barely maneuver around the horde. You manage to escape and follow the boy. He's definitely a better runner than you, but you can keep him in your sights. He doesn't go far before entering a large storage warehouse from the back door. You know the boy saw you, so you continue forward.\n\n\nWhen you reach the warehouse, you peek through one of the industrial windows. To your surprise, there are three people in the warehouse. The boy, a girl roughly his age, and another woman, presumably their mother. You watch as the boy unpacks the food bag. He was able to fit a surprising amount of food into the bag. The girl picks it up and adds it to a large pile of canned goods in the corner. The three begin to talk, and then the boy turns and looks directly at you.\n\n\nYou panic and duck. They probably think you're a creep now, or worse. Your best bet is to get away from the warehouse. You get down on all fours, and make it a few feet before you hear the boy behind you.\n\n\n\"What are you doing?\" he demands. You turn around. The boy has a Glock pointed right at your forehead. As soon as you turn, the boy's expression changes. \"Oh. You're the guy the broke that truck window, aren't you? You want a reward or something?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "yes", "result": "Getting a reward is reasonable for saving this boy's life. \"Yes,\" you say. The boy rolls his eyes. \"Great,\" he says. \"Come inside.\"\n\n\nThe boy leads you inside. The woman stands defensively between you and the girl. \"Mikey, who is this?\" the woman says. Mikey doesn't reply. He walks over to the food supply, picks up a can of peaches, and throws it, more at you than to you. You catch the can and examine it.\n\n\n\"Where are you from?\" the girl asks, before her mother shushes her. You answer anyway. \"I'm from Sacramento. I was out fighting for the border, but it collapsed. Now I'm here. I don't have any supplies, or a home, and I don't know if my wife is alive.\"\n\n\nThe woman seems genuinely sorry for you, but Mikey isn't convinced. \"Thanks for the sob story,\" he says. \"Now leave.\"\n\n\nThe mother shoots him a scolding look, before addressing you again. \"Feel free to stay here a few nights. You can have some of our food, providing you're willing to help out.\"\n\n\nThat sounds like more than a fair deal to you. You accept, then sit down against one of the walls. \"Oh,\" the woman suddenly says. \"How rude of me. I should introduce myself. I'm Barbara, and this is Megan,\" the woman motions to the girl, \"and this is-\" Mikey cuts off his mother. \"I'm Mikey.\"\n\n\n\"Well, what should I do?\" you ask. \"Oh, we're just waiting around right now. The sun will set soon, and Mikey just brought more food, so we'll be fine. Feel free to get a book, or something to entertain yourself. Mikey, will you roll our guest an air mattress?\" Barbara says. Mikey shoots a dirty look to his mom, then you, before dragging an air mattress out from one of the units and dropping it on the ground.", "action_results": [{"action": "Settle in", "result": "You read a book from the pile, then pace around the warehouse, examining everything. The warehouse is big enough for 1000 people to stand shoulder to shoulder in it. There are a few storage units within the warehouse that the family is using for backup. You note that the only gun in the warehouse is in Mikey's possession. Each family member seems to have a sort of 'cubby' for personal stuff.\n\n\nHours pass, and nighttime is upon you. You watch out the window. A few lone zombies wander across the roads. The warehouse is actually quite hidden by trees, so you feel safer. \"Okay,\" Barbara says.\"Bedtime. We'll need our strength for tomorrow.\" \n\n\nYou start to go over to your air mattress. \"Oh, not you,\" she says. \"I just mean the kids. They need all the energy they can get. As soon as they sun goes down, so do they!\"\n\n\nBarbara pulls a Sudoku book from the pile and starts to entertain herself. You sit on your air mattress and decide what to do. ", "action_results": [{"action": "talk to Barbara", "result": "You go sit next to Barbara and watch her play a Sudoku game for a few minutes. \"How did you end up here?\" you finally ask.\n\n\nBarbara explains that her husband was also drafted, so she took her kids to somewhere safe. When they happened upon the warehouse, it was abandoned and empty, but also out of the way of the dead. The perfect base. \"I'm sorry your first impression with the kids wasn't that great. Megan can be shy, and Mikey gets worked up easily, but they'll warm up to you. Say, did you see my husband? His name is David, he has brown, curly hair, and he wears a necklace with him all the time.\"\n\n\nYou try to picture him in your head, but you can't. \"Nope, didn't see him.\" Barbara seems disappointed. \"But I'm sure he's fine,\" you say, a little too quickly. \"Most of the civilians and soldiers were evacuated when the walls fell.\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "go to sleep", "result": "After fully inflating the air mattress, you decide to get some sleep. As you lay there, you think about the day. So much happened. Last night, you were in some military barrack hammock with ten other strangers, and now you're in a warehouse on an air mattress. You make one last promise to yourself before nodding off: you will find your wife.", "action_results": [{"action": "In the Morning", "result": "When you wake up, everyone else is already up. Megan is setting up a breakfast of canned fruit, Barbara is rolling up the air mattresses, and Mikey is nowhere to be found. \n\n\nYou sit up and do your best to fix your hair with your hands. You probably smell terrible, but whatever. Megan puts a plate of dried cranberries and an apple in your lap. You thank her, and eat quickly. You haven't eaten since yesterday afternoon, back at the barracks. After breakfast, you stand up and decide what to do with the day.", "action_results": [{"action": "Supply Run", "result": "The warehouse has very little in the way of weaponry. If you're going to survive, you'll need weapons. You tell Barbara that you're going on a run, and leave the warehouse. You take a backpack with some meager supplies.\n\n\nThe zombies have mostly cleared out. That works to your benefit, since you have only your fists for protection. You don't know this area very well, so you head in a random direction, remembering street names as you pass them.\n\n\nEventually, you come upon a tank in the middle of the road. The hatch is still open, and blood is splattered on the side. You climb inside. After searching the tank, you come up with a walkie-talkie and a water bottle. You try the walkie-talkie, and every channel is silent on the other end. You decide to leave it in the tank so you know where it is if you need it.\n\n\nAs for the tank itself, you've never seen the inside of one before, so you don't know if it's operational or not. You decide to not touch anything, and exit the tank.\n\n\nYou are disappointed at the lack of supplies in the tank. Shouldn't there be some rocket launcher, or at least a flare gun? You are very disappointed. So disappointed, in fact, that you almost miss the man running from a horde of the dead out of the corner of your eye.\n\n\nYou turn to look - it seems like you've found the owner of the tank. The man is clearly a soldier, he is dressed in all camo, and has a large, scary-looking gun over his shoulder. Closer inspection reveals that the gun has no clip, and therefore no ammo. The man swears and looks back at the herd, causing him to trip over a fire hydrant.\n\n\nYou feel like you should help, but you don't want to get in this man's way, and besides, what could you do? You're defenseless. You watch as the man pulls out a knife and starts to hack away at the group of zombies. Unfortunately, he quickly falls. You've never seen them infect someone, and it's not a pretty sight. The man's screams soon die down. After another few minutes, the horde wanders away from the man.\n\n\nAfter they're a safe distance away, you inspect the corpse. Bite wounds cover the man's arms and torso. You don't know how long you have until he turns, so you move quickly. You take the gun off of him and check his pockets. He definitely was out of ammo. You also get his knife out of his hand. It's a durable, large knife, one that should have a holster or some sort of container. If it did, the man doesn't have it.\n\n\nYou come back to the warehouse with your finds. It's not a lot, but it's something. When you ge there, Mikey is also back. He succeeded in getting more food. You set the gun off to the side, and pocket the knife for yourself. Barbara notes your findings, and puts the gun in a storage unit. \"So the kids don't get at it,\" she explains.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dinner", "result": "Dinner consists of canned meat and bread. The four of you eat in silence. Today was certainly a productive day. You sit and think about the next day.\n\n\nThe silence is broken by someone pounding on the back door of the warehouse. You sit up. Everyone glances around nervously. Finally, Mikey gets up and looks through the window.\n\n\n\"It's just a zombie, I got...\" Mikey trails off. You get up and look through the window.\n\n\nA hundred. No, a thousand. The streets are filled with zed. A small pack have found their way to the warehouse. \"We can't risk killing them,\" you say. \"Opening the door would be a bad idea. We need to hide, and be quiet.\"\n\n\nMegan hurriedly blows out the candles you used for light. You hide behind a storage locker, while everyone finds a quiet place. The inside of the warehouse is silent. From the outside, you can hear moaning and pounding. The small pack is attracting more zombies.\n\n\n\"This isn't going to work,\" Mikey says. \"We need a better plan.\" You hurriedly think of a way out of this. \"We need to distract them,\" you say. \"Is there a way onto the roof?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The Roof", "result": "You climb up onto the roof using a ladder, and taking out the skylight. The roof is curved, so keeping your balance is a struggle. You look out into the sea of the dead. It doesn't look as big from here, but it's still too many. There's no chance of distracting them. Unless, somehow, you could sneak through them.\n\n\nYou climb back down the ladder. \"There's no way through that,\" you say. \"We're surrounded.\" Mikey walks over to the door. \"I bet I could get through,\" he says. You open your mouth to stop him, but Barbara beats you to it. \"Absolutely not. You won't be able to run through that, no matter how fast you think you are.\"\n\n\nPanic begins to set in. The walls feel much closer than they are. The groans get louder. There really is no way out of this.\n\n\nSuddenly, gunshots rip through the air. You watch through the window as the horde of zed quickly hit the ground like dominoes. In a matter of seconds, the road is clear. You rush outside to see who, or what, killed the zombies.\n\n\nParked on the road is a large passenger bus and a big rig. Several men armed with various types of guns are set out the bus windows. They killed all the zombies. The door to the big rig opens, and a man steps out. He wears a bright orange vest over a bomber jacket, and wields a machine gun in his hands.\n\n\n\"Hi, folks,\" he begins with a creepy smile.", "action_results": [{"action": "attack him", "result": "Without hesitation, you tackle the man. The machine gun flies from his hands. As soon as you hit the ground, three bullets from three different guns hit you in the side. You topple over in pain, and the man gets up. \n\n\n\"Well, that wasn't very wise, now was it?\" he taunts, before kicking you in the face. The pain in your nose makes you see flashes of light that aren't there. You lay on the ground, motionless, while the man laughs. Eventually, you finally bleed out.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reset Game", "result": "I don't know what it is with me and zombie games, I just love them. A while back, I wrote a story called No Man's Land. It did a lot better than I expected, prompting me to try again. So here it is: Ultraoverlord Strikes Again, Zombie Style.\n\n\nA NOTE ABOUT THE GAME:\n\n\nThe structure of this story is kind of a new one I'm experimenting with. There is only one 'win' scenario, the rest are deaths. Now, given that, there a few different ways to get there. Different choices can get you there in different states of health, with different supplies, and different people. I made this with as much replayability as possible, and there are references to characters in each storyline sprinkled throughout other storylines. See if you can find them all! ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Let him continue", "result": "\"Well, it seems to me that your lives were just in some very serious danger,\" the man continues. \"Luckily, me and my people were just driving by. We just saved you from certain death. No need to thank us. All I ask is just a little something in return,\" the man says in a cutesy voice. \"You wouldn't want to upset me, now, would you?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Offer gun", "result": "You go back inside and get the gun out of the storage unit. You take it outside and offer it to the man. He rips it out of your hands. \"Wow,\" he says after examining it. \"One damn gun, and it doesn't even have ammunition?\" he looks at you, faking confusion. \"You're gonna have to give us a little more than this.\"\n\n\n\"We don't have anything else,\" Mikey says behind you. You turn around to shush him, but the man stops you. \"I don't believe that. In fact, I can see something right now that you could give us.\" The man points to the warehouse. \"Me and the boys have been on the road for a long while, and we could really use a rest. Now, how about you fix us some dinner, yeah?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "refuse", "result": "\"No,\" you say. \"It's already more than we can afford to give you the gun, so I'm not going to allow that.\" You watch the man's expression. He lets out a small laugh, and looks at the ground. Then he suddenly grabs you by the shirt collar and leans in so close you can smell the cigarettes on his breath. \"I think,\" he whispers, \"that you may want to reconsider that.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Reconsider", "result": "Reluctantly, you step aside and show the man the door. He smiles at you, and steps inside. Slowly, his men file out of the bus and follow him.\n\n\nInside, the man turns and looks around. He lets out a small whistle. \"This is quite the place you have here, isn't it?\" he says. \"Now, make with the dinner.\"\n\n\nYou and Megan hastily prepare canned vegetable soup for your guests, while Mikey and Barbara make them chairs to sit on. When you are done, you give each man a bowl of vegetable soup and a small cup of water.\n\n\n\"What's the matter?\" the man says. \"You didn't make any for yourselves. Won't you dine with us?\" \n\n\n\"There's no more. You're already eating half of our food,\" you say. The man raises his hands. \"Forgive me for more rudeness. Here, you can have mine.\" He slides he bowl of soup over to you, and throws the spoon at you. \"Please, sit.\"\n\n\nEveryone eats dinner in silence. Barbara sits with her kids off to the side. None of the men make eye contact with you, except for the leader, who smiles at you. Finally, the bowls are empty. Megan hurriedly collects them and throws them away.\n\n\n\"Wow. Now, I don't believe for a second that the gun you gave us is the only gun you have. There's gotta be more, right? So are you going to give it to me, or will I have to take it?\" You notice Mikey grabbing at his gun, holstered on his belt.\n\n\n\"Yeah. That boy has a gun,\" you say. Mikey gives you a look full of hate. \"Well,\" the man says. He gets up and walks over to Mikey. He puts his hand out. \"Give it to me.\"\n\n\nMikey dumps the gun into the man's hand. \"Thanks,\" he says. \"I really do appreciate it.\"\n\n\nBack outside, the man addresses you once more. \"That was a wonderful gesture, yes it was. Now, I think you've got quite the setup here,\" the man motions to the warehouse, the road, and the trees. \"In fact, I love it so much, that I think we just might have to come back someday.\" The man's smile disappears. \"You'll still be here, right?\"\n\n\n\"Y-yes,\" you say, and curse yourself for stuttering. The man pats you on the shoulder, a little too hard. \"Great. See you soon.\" With that, the man gets back into the big rig, spits onto the ground, and drives off.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "What now?", "result": "The four of you sit on the ground in the warehouse. Mikey finally speaks. \"What are we gonna do about this?\" \n\n\n\"We can't do anything,\" you say. \"They already left.\" \n\n\n\"I'm talking about next time. He said he's coming back. Let's be ready for him.\" \n\n\n\"Actually,\" Barbara interrupts, \"I think the best thing to do now is leave. He can't find us again, if we go deeper into the city. The big truck won't be easy to drive in the city streets. They're full of bodies and abandoned cars.\" It seems like the decision is left up to you: stay and fight, or find a new home.", "action_results": [{"action": "Find a new home", "result": "\"We should leave,\" you say. \"We don't have numbers or weapons on our side.\" Everyone seems to agree, even though they don't like it. Since it's getting dark, you decide to leave in the morning. You lay down on your air mattress and try to get some sleep.\n\n\nIn the morning, you begin packing. You are about halfway through the food when you realize that you don't have a vehicle. There's no way the four of you can carry all the food and water, plus the extra. You'll need to go look for something.\n\n\nIt's not as easy as finding any car. You need one that can seat four people, plus all the supplies. As you walk down the road, you see a billboard for a used car dealership. Perfect.\n\n\nAfter a while, you spot the car dealership. The entire area is clear of zed, which means the trip back will be easy. You start your trip over to the dealership when you see something written in marker on a store window:\n\n\nGOT GUNS?\n\nWE GIVE FOOD, JEWELRY, AMMUNITION, GASOLINE\n\n\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "You don't have anything you want to trade right now", "result": "You walk past the ad. You just don't have anything you're willing to give up, not yet. You make your way over to the dealership.\n\n\nMost of the cars are gone, but you expected that. You do have three choices: A pickup truck, a minivan with a trailer attached to it, and a convertible. The choice is quite obvious for your needs.\n\n\nLuckily, the minivan door is unlocked, and the keys are on the dashboard. You check the fuel gauge - you have a full tank. You thank your lucky stars and drive the minivan and the trailer back to the warehouse.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take off", "result": "When you get back, the others have already gathered everything up. You load the group's belongings into the trailer, and then everyone gets into the minivan. Megan seems sad to leave the warehouse. Barbara doesn't seem too emotionally attached to it. Mikey's expression is difficult to read.\n\n\nYou head up the road, looking for a place to go. Cars and debris block most roads, so your options are limited. All you need is a shelter big enough to support the group of four, and hidden well enough that you won't have to deal with Big Rig, or anyone else.\n\n\nFinally, you decide to pull away from the major city roads and go out into the countryside. There, you find a nature center. It's perfect for the group. It's big, secluded, and even has a natural river running next to it, a potential water source.\n\n\nThe group unpacks and begins to get comfortable in their new home. This seems like an upgrade from the warehouse. The are two floors, and a lot of easily accessible windows.", "action_results": [{"action": "What now?", "result": "The most obvious thing to do is explore the new terrain. If there's some sort of supply cache or other survivors nearby, you need to know about it. \"Nobody goes alone this time,\" you say. \"I'll be going. Mikey, we can use you, too. Barbara, Megan, do you want to come?\"\n\n\nMegan slowly nods, and paces over to you. \"I'll hold down the fort while y'all are gone,\" she says. You nod, and start setting up a pack. You bring a flashlight, clothes, water and food. Megan brings along a poetry book, and Mikey is traveling light.\n\n\nOnce outside, you get a good look at your surroundings. A dirt road connects you back to civilization. Then there's the woods beyond the nature center. You are deciding the best course of action, when Mikey speaks up. \"I'll go into the woods alone, and look for stuff. You and Megan go that way.\" Before you have a chance to respond, Mikey is off.", "action_results": [{"action": "Into The City", "result": "Megan follows you along the dirt road, until you see buildings again. Most of them are useless, like hair salons, and the ones that could be potentially useful, like gas stations, have been looted. You are about to turn back when you see a gun store up ahead.\n\n\nYou and Megan race over to it, as if it will disappear if you aren't fast enough. The store has a small group of zed inside, and the front window was smashed with a cinder block, but you can see guns hung up on the walls. \"We need to get in there,\" you whisper to Megan. She nods.\n\n\nBoth of you split up to find a good makeshift weapon. A board, a hammer, a pipe - anything will work. The nearest building to you is a flower shop. The front window is smashed, just like the gun shop. Why would someone bother to break into a flower shop? It's the least of your worries, because you get a large glass shard out of it. You wrap your shirt sleeve around it for better grip and come back to the gun shop.\n\n\nMegan returns with a long, flat wooden board a few moments later. \"Ok, you go in, grab as many guns as you can, and get out. Okay?\" you say. Megan nods. You position yourself in front of the broken window and whistle. The zombies all notice you at once, and start to fumble out the window. Once there's enough clearance, Megan darts into the store.\n\n\nThe first zombie you kill is a huge jolt. You stab the glass shard into its skull, and it hits the ground dead. You're proud of yourself, but there are many more after that one. So you go again. You thrust the glass shard into a head, and then pull it out. This time, however, the shard breaks. Your hand is left bleeding, and you have no other weapons. Luckily, as if on queue, Megan comes running out of the building with three guns over her shoulder, and another few in her hands. Without having to say it, both of you flee in the direction of home.\n\n\nYou slow to a walk after you've put enough distance between you and the dead-heads. \"That was impressive. You're just as fast as your brother,\" you comment. Megan gives a fleeting smile. Suddenly, she points out something. \"Look over here.\"\n\n\nYou stand in front of a concrete wall with the U.S. military seal hastily painted on with spray paint. Below that is a short message:\n\n\nHOPE IS LOST FOR THE REST OF YOU. THE DEAD NEVER SLEEP, AND NEITHER CAN YOU. WASHINGTON IS THE ONLY SALVATION. COME TO WASHINGTON OR DIE. LE\n\n\nIt seems like the writer was going to say something like \"Let\" or \"leave\", but they were interrupted while writing the message. Still, this is big. You estimate you're in the middle of California. If you head north, up through the rest of the state, then through Oregon, you'll arrive at Washington. You look at Megan. She looks back with a flicker of hope in her eyes.", "action_results": [{"action": "Get home", "result": "Barbara and Mikey are dumbfounded at the news. Everyone's thinking the same thing right now. Yes, the temptation of safety is strong, but traveling through a whole state and a half to get there? Unthinkable.\n\n\n\"It doesn't matter,\" you say. \"Every second we spend here is a second we could be moving forward. We should leave now.\" Barbara shakes her head. \"I think we should leave tomorrow. We'll need the rest, and we can scavenge for more food and things like that.\"\n\n\n\"It's not worth it,\" you say. \"We have a gun. We have a minivan with gas in it. We can make it. Besides, there's no time to scavenge. It'll be dark soon.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay, and leave in the morning", "result": "\"Okay, we'll stay. But tomorrow, we leave. First thing in the morning.\" Everyone nods their heads in agreement. You have a bad feeling about this. \n\n\nAfter everyone is settled down and laying on their air mattresses, you slip out the front door. Outside, it's still rather free of zombies. You sit down on the road and look around. You think about your wife, and Washington, and everything that's happened. So much changed in just two days.\n\n\nSuddenly, you hear leaves crunching behind you. You turn around, thinking it's a zombie, but it's not. It's a soldier. He has frizzy, unkempt black hair, and still wears his uniform. \"Mind if I have a seat?\"\n\n\nYou feel oddly safe around him. He hasn't shown any signs of aggression, and to your knowledge, he has no weapons. He does, however, have a duffel bag. \"I been watchin' you, with that group.\" \"Watching me?\" you say in surprise. \n\n\n\"Yeah, watching you. The way you raided that gun store. I'm gonna be straight with you; these folks are slowin' ya down. I'm headed to Washington, just like you are. I believe you're more capable to get there if you travel lighter.\"\n\n\n\"Where are you going with this?\" you ask. \"I'm askin' you to ditch these people and come to Washington. You have family there, correct?\" You nod. \"'Kay, then. Why waste time? You have no connection to these people. You don't even know their last names.\"\n\n\n\"How do I know I can trust you?\" you ask. The man's expression doesn't change. \"I guess you don't. But that's a decision I'm gonna leave to you.\" Both of you sit in silence on the road for a few minutes. Then, the soldier gets up and opens his duffel bag. He takes out a can of spray paint, and walks over in the direction of the unfinished message.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay with the current group", "result": "\"Sorry,\" you say. \"But I already made a commitment to these people. Hopefully I'll see you in Washington.\" The man smiles over his shoulder. \"Okay,\" he says. \"Your funeral.\" He goes back to pick up his duffel bag, and leaves. You get up and go back inside the nature center. You lay down on your air mattress, and ponder if you made the right choice.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave for Washington", "result": "After everything is packed up, you do one last check to make sure you didn't forget anything. You find a few water bottles in a vending machine, but nothing else. You say goodbye to your makeshift home, and get in the driver's seat of the minivan.\n\n\nOn the road, you follow roads that you know to head north. You try to stay and back roads, just in case you run into anything. You're determined to make it to Washington.\n\n\nWhile driving, Barbara thinks to open up the glove box. The group is rewarded with a U.S. map and another bottle of water. You set the map up on the dashboard so you can see it while driving. You decide to follow I-5 north, which should take you right up to Washington.\n\n\nYour trip is cut short after a few miles when you come to a blockade in the road. A chain fence was haphazardly set up in the middle of the road. A handmade sign hanging from it reads: FOLLOWERS' TERRITORY. TRESPASSERS WILL BE LOOTED AND FED TO THE DEAD.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Head through the fence", "result": "You refuse to let some stupid sign deter you. Who are the 'Followers' anyway? You don't care. You and Mikey get out, and move the chain link fencing.\n\n\nAfter that, it seems like smooth sailing. You do start to notice, however, that the place seems less quality here. Graffiti covers the area, and certain buildings are just gone.\n\n\nSuddenly, you see something off to the side of the road. There are three men standing off in a secluded alley. One of them is tied to a pole. The other two are mercilessly beating him with pieces of metal.", "action_results": [{"action": "Intervene", "result": "You get out and take a gun with you. \"Hey,\" you say. The two attackers look over at you. The man tied to the pole can barely move his head. \"What's going on here?\"\n\n\n\"This fine gentleman over here,\" one of the men points to the beaten victim, \"has broken our golden rule. That rule is NO TRESPASSING. And it seems to me that you are also breaking that rule. So I think a punishment for you is in order as well!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "See what else he has to say", "result": "\"Rico, what do you think this man deserves?\" one of the men says, addressing the other. \"I think a proper beating is in order,\" Rico responds. Before you can step out of the way, he steps forward and hits you with the metal bar in his hand, knocking you to the ground. The two proceed to hit and kick you until you're numb. Eventually, about halfway through, you realize you're not going to make it out of this alive. You wish you had taken the detour.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "shoot them both", "result": "You won't let the man continue. You draw your gun and shoot both men down. They were at close range, but it still took a few shots. Once they're dead, you go up to the victim. His face is swollen, and his nose is bleeding. He flinches, expecting you to attack him too.", "action_results": [{"action": "kill the hostage", "result": "You have no interest in dealing with another group member. You put the man out of his misery, and get back in the car.", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep driving", "result": "You begin to get a bad feeling about the place. The empty buildings and atmosphere feel a lot more sinister now than they did a second ago. Your instincts kick in, and you try to drive away.\n\n\nYou quickly find that the roads have been blocked off by debris. They're herding you in a certain direction. You can't get out of the car, either, as you start to see other people watching you out of buildings and behind trash cans. In a last ditch effort to get away, you throw the minivan in reverse.\n\n\nAs you try to back out, you see something: a large truck blocks the way out. They've sealed the road behind you. A man holding a golf club comes out of a nearby building and starts running toward the minivan. In total panic, you speed down the road, away from the truck.\n\n\nBarbara is gripping her armrests in fear. You would be, but both your hands are on the steering wheel. You drive down the road, exactly where they want you to. You can hear the truck following closely behind you. Suddenly, you drive into a dead end. The way forward is blocked. The truck pulls to a stop behind you, trapping you.\n\n\nYou have no choice but to get out of the car. A mob of people has gathered around your vehicle. Your group follows suit, and gets out of the car.\n\n\n\"Okay, let's not waste time. Give us your stuff, and your car, and we'll escort you to your new home,\" barks a large, bald man. The crowd of angry people with their guns pointed at you reminds you that you'll have to speak carefully.", "action_results": [{"action": "Offer a deal", "result": "\"We can work this out,\" you say. The man lowers his gun. \"I'm listening.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Offer a group member", "result": "You look back at your group. \"I'll give you a person, from my group. They can work for you, or whatever you want.\" The man seems to strongly consider it. You regret making the offer, but it's too late now. You look back one more time. Barbara gives you a look of total disgust.\n\n\nFinally, the man nods. \"Yes, I think that just may work. Reginald, clear the road outta here,\" he says to another. He turns, and looks over your group. \"I want the girl.\"\n\n\nBarbara starts crying immediately. Megan has a look of fear on her face, and Mikey shows nothing but resentment. Two people break from the crowd and grab Megan. They pull her away and out of sight. \"Okay,\" he says. \"That's it. Take the little track over there, it'll take you right out of here.\" The man turns to walk away. \"Pleasure doing business with you,\" he adds.\n\n\nBarbara and Mikey get in the minivan without you, and drive off. Mikey flips you off from the backseat. You admittedly feel terrible. As the crowd parts, you feel terrible for your choice. But you can't go back now. You follow the minivan on foot, until you're out of the slums.", "action_results": [{"action": "....", "result": "You aren't sure how to feel as you pace up the road, vaguely in the direction of Washington. You feel remorse for your decision, and wish you could take it back. Giving up Megan was a stupid choice. She cared about you, and you would gladly hand her over for your own protection. There's no more time to dwell, though. That affair took up the whole day. It'll be dark soon.\n\n\nyou continue up the road, in search of a place to spend the night. About an hour after the sun goes down, you spot something. It looks like a military outpost.\n\n\nIt ends up being exactly that. Judging by the footprints and blood, this place didn't last too long. It's only been a few days, and people are dying fast. Not even the military can seemingly stand up to the ever-growing threat of death. You open the door to the trailer and look inside.\n\n\nYou are rewarded with another gun, this one a Stag-15. It has a half-empty magazine. Other than that, you find nothing in the trailer. It's as good a place as any to sleep, and it has a pullout couch/bed.\n\n\nYou are awoken in the morning by growling. You sit up quickly and look out the window next to the door.\n\n\nZombies. And several of them. They have wandered up and down the street, surrounding you on one side. If you could get out the door, and past the horde, you could outrun them and head north again.", "action_results": [{"action": "shoot them", "result": "You load up the gun and kick the door open. The closest group of zed growl, and stomp over to you. You kneel for better balance, and do your best to aim. When you pull the trigger, you are surprisingly accurate. By the time you're out of bullets, you've cleared just enough of a path out. You slip by the trailer and move up the street at a steady jog, away from the zombies.\n\n\nAfter you've slowed to a walk, you notice another building coming up. It looks kind of like a factory building. It has several floors, is made of brick. Three smokestacks jut out of the building's roof. it seems worthwhile to check out, so you run up to it. You are disappointed to learn that the entrance is surrounded by fencing.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "move on", "result": "Picking at the fence isn't worth it. Besides, why waste time here? Your goal of getting to Washington is still the highest priority. You leave the warehouse alone and continue on your way.", "action_results": [{"action": "What's new?", "result": "You continue to walk down the road as before, this time with a gun slung over your shoulder. You spot a sign telling you that you're still on I-5, on a crash course with Washington. \n\n\nThe sun beats down on you as you realize you are quite thirsty. Hungry, too. The way ahead looks bare. Bare except for a road sign. It tells you that if you continue ahead, you'll reach a small town. Next to the town's name, written with blood, is a small message: COME ONE, COME ALL\n\n\nIf you turn to the right, you'll arrive at a rest stop. There won't be food or water, but there will be a gas station (probably empty), and a pharmacy.", "action_results": [{"action": "Check the rest stop", "result": "You make the decision to see if there's anything worth taking at the rest stop. It's a short walk, and if there's any water, you'll gladly take it.\n\n\nJust as you suspected, the gas station has been looted of everything. The cash register, the food, even the toilet paper is all gone. Someone beat you to the punch. Oh, well. You go to check the pharmacy. That has been looted too, but not all the way. A few bottles have been left behind, scattered among the shelves. You take a bottle of painkillers and a roll of bandages. Nothing else really seems useful.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Head to the town", "result": "The collar of your shirt is soaked with sweat by the time you spot the town. It's relatively small, and a wall of cars and metal scrap surrounds it. A front gate set on hinges to swing open is right in the middle of the road. Above it sits a guard tower.\n\n\nYou are spotted well before you get to the door. You are ordered to get on your knees and place any weapons you have on the ground. You place your gun on the road in clear view of the tower and comply. The gate swings open, and a small group comes to meet you.\n\n\nThe group consists of a clean-shaven man, a small boy, and a woman holding a clipboard. \"Hello. My name is Rose. Welcome to Fort Z.\"\n\n\nAfter the group makes sure you aren't going to hurt anyone, you get your gun back and are welcomed into the community. You are surprised at how fast it went up. It's only been a few days, but the walls are up, and the community is thriving (for now). There is no shortage of people, and homes and buildings have been turned into sleeping quarters, storage, and everything else you can think of. \"Well,\" begins Rose. \"It seems like you've come a long way, would you like something?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "What are the rules around here?", "result": "\"Well, there aren't many rules around here, because no one seems to be causing any trouble. Just don't hurt anyone or steal anything and you should be fine,\" says Rose. \"Also, don't do anything stupid,\" adds the clean-shaven man.", "action_results": [{"action": "Who are these people?", "result": "\"Oh, jeez,\" Rose begins. \"I couldn't hope to remember everyone's name. But, this is Callaghan,\" Rose says of the clean-shaven man. He reaches out to shake your hand. \"It's a pleasure to meet you,\" he says. \"Then there's Max,\" Rose pats the little boy on the head. The boy is hiding behind his mother's legs. \"We're kind of like the government around here. Other than that, you can make friends as you wish.\"", "action_results": [null, {"action": "I'd like some food and water, please", "result": "\"I need some water,\" you say. Rose nods, and motions for you to follow her. She leads you over to a house with the garage open. It's full of boxes, marked as WATER, FOOD, and MISC. She opens a box, grabs, a water bottle and some cans, and says, \"I'll get our chef to fix you something. In the meantime, why don't you look around?\" \n\n\nYou step out and survey the area. It seems like a neighborhood, where everyone knows each other. People talk, and laugh, and there's no fear or worry. You kind of like it here... but you know you can't stay. Washington remains your goal.\n\n\nWhen Rose comes back with a plate of heated meat and some water, you sit down and eat. As you eat, you tell her of your plans to go to Washington. She seems surprised. \"Are people still holding on? We thought we were the last community to survive! This is big! I'll call a meeting. I'm sure some of us will be happy to go with you!\"\n\n\nWithin minutes, you are standing on top of a makeshift stage. Rose stands at a podium next to you. The people of the community have gathered around the stage in a circle. When Rose makes the announcement that there's a possibility of safety in Washington, a ripple of murmurs washes through the crowd. \"Our guest wants to know if anyone will accompany him on his journey to Washington!\" You aren't sure at first, but yes. Having a larger group would help you last longer.\n\n\nAs it turns out, people are hesitant to leave. A lot of people feel safe and happy in the community, even though the offer of the ultimate government protection is very tempting. A small group of people, including Callaghan, step forward to accompany you.\n\n\n\"Okay,\"says Rose. \"You're going to be leaving with some of our best workers and closest friends, but, for some reason, I trust you. I think you'll make it. If you do, promise you'll come back and rescue us? I want to see some huge helicopters, or a tank, come right up to our doors and take us away, okay?\" she jokes. You are taken aback at how trusting she is in you.\n\n\nRose agrees to let you off with enough food and water to sustain your group for a month. Beyond that, it'll be your job to feed your group. \"The other thing,\" Rose says, \"is the cars. We have a relatively small selection, for scavenging. You can take whichever one you like to drive, but if you choose a better car, it'll leave us without it. Just keep the people you're leaving behind as you choose, okay?\" Rose asks. You see no issue with that. These people are basically escorting you to Washington, so their comfort is a big priority. With that, Rose leads you over to a separate area where the vehicles are kept.", "action_results": [{"action": "Choose the recreational cars (hold more gas, break down easy, won't protect as much from bullets or the dead)", "result": "You choose the weakest car. It's not like you're driving some piece of crap held together by duct tape. It's fully functional and full of gas, so it works for you. \n\n\nYou are given three cars, all of the same quality, for your group. Everyone loads the supplies into the trunks, and Rose asks another lady to open the rear doors, to point you in the direction of Washington. You thank Rose one last time, and drive up to the doors. You buckle your seat belt, and prepare for a long road trip.", "action_results": [{"action": "The first night", "result": "The first day of driving is uneventful. You actually make it a long way. At this rate, you'll be out of California in no time, and one step further to safety. As the sun sets, you decide to stop for the night.\n\n\nYour party unpacks some food, and you use a matchbook to light a small fire. You don't have any sleeping bags, so you'll have to find somewhere on the ground. As you eat, you survey your party.\n\n\nCallaghan you already know a lot about. He was a leader at Fort-Z, and he is well-dressed. He has a gun and a hunting knife on his belt, and eats a can of beans with a spoon.\n\n\nDaisy seems like a happy person. She smiles at her group members as she eats. She is dressed in a tie-dye T-shirt and jeans, with no weapons. She has long blond hair that's dyed gold at the tips.\n\n\nGale is kind of a mystery to you. He rode in your car, and didn't say a word the whole ride. He has a large axe that he carries with him at all times, and is dressed in dirty, bloody clothes.\n\n\nSanders is a soldier flashing his uniform proudly. He doesn't have a gun, but he does have a nasty scar going from his chin to his forehead on the left side of his face.\n\n\nFrank is also a soldier, but he seems more...stable than Sanders. He still has his gun, a sniper rifle. He is also wearing his uniform.\n\n\nChip is a teenager who seems to be carefree and distracted. He eats by dumping the contents of the can into his mouth, rather than with a spoon. He wears a backwards baseball cap and a hoodie.\n\n\nLisa used to be on the team that kept track of supplies and rations at the city. She has a handgun on her belt, and doesn't seem too interested in eating.\n\n\nScarlet has bright red hair, which is hard not to notice. You can't tell if it's dyed or not. She has a knife almost double the size of Callaghan's, so big that it weighs down her belt. She also isn't eating.\n\n\nMarley you know a lot about, because he rode with you and talked a lot. He keeps up conversations with several group members, even getting Sanders to crack a smile every so often. He told you in the car that he used to be the ambassador for Fort-Z, and had lots of friends before the outbreak.\n\n\nGrim is rather quiet, dressed in mostly dark colors, and busies himself by stacking empty food cans on top of each other. He has oddly precise accuracy, to the point that even when the can tower looks like it's about to fall, it doesn't.\n\n\nAfter dinner, guard shifts are set up to make sure the group isn't attacked. You volunteer to go first, along with a partner, for half the night. At midnight, you will sleep, and two others will take your place. Who do you want to accompany you?\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Sanders", "result": "Sanders strikes you as a capable person, and he's a volunteer for the first shift. \n\n\nAs the rest of the group tries to get comfortable, you and Sanders sit against the cars, and try to get comfortable yourself. it's a good four hours before you'll get any sleep, and you still have to drive tomorrow.\n\n\nSanders is the first to break the silence. \"Nice night, isn't it?\" He speaks with the same rough voice you imagined him having. You nod. \"I like the quiet. It means no danger, and I don't particularly want more from the dead-heads anytime soon. I've had my fill.\" You wonder if Sanders was a border guard.\n\n\n\"Did something happen?\" you ask. Sanders nods slowly. \"Yeah. Yeah, it was, uh, we were on, on border patrol in the south, where...\"\n\n\n\"Where the first wall fell,\" you finish. Sanders nods again. \"I'll never forget it. The wall itself killed half the squad, and the biters..\" Sanders shakes his head, and continues. \"I think I was the only one to get out. After that, I radioed in for new orders, but they never came through. My commanding officer was dead, along with people I've worked with for years. I don't know what I'm doing anymore. I stumbled upon the city while I was driving, and decided that if I couldn't protect California, I would at least protect a small piece of it. And now, knowing that I might actually save them...\" Sanders trails off.\n\n\n\"So you're good with guns?\" you ask. Sanders snaps out of his stupor almost immediately. \"Oh, hell yes. I've worked with all kinds of guns.\" \"What happened to yours?\" you ask. \"Didn't you have some sort of defense at Fort-Z?\"\n\n\nSanders is avoiding the question. Instead, he changes the topic. \"Do you have any family?\" You nod. \"My wife, I think the military got her before the dead did, and I like to think she's safe in Washington. That's part of the reason I'm going in the first place,\" you say. \"That's real sweet. I never had a chance to marry, I enlisted in the army two years after college. I thought a degree in architecture would get me far. It didn't.\" Sanders even smiles at that.\n\n\nAfter your talk, it gets quiet again. for the next three and a half hours, you and Sanders sit in silence, watching for threats that never come. Before you know it, the moon is high in the sky. \"Well,\" says Sanders, \"I suppose I'll wake the next shifts up. Good night.\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "go to sleep", "result": "When you wake up, your back is stiff from laying on the ground. You look at your party. You are one of the first to wake up. Daisy is already selecting breakfast options for the group. Gale is sharpening his axe on a rock.\n\n\n\"Hi,\" Daisy says as you go over to join her. \"What's for breakfast?\" you ask. Daisy sets out the most breakfast-y things she could find. Cans of oatmeal and dried fruit, yum. You help her scoop portions into paper bowls.\n\n\nSlowly, everyone else wakes up. You pass out breakfast and pull out the map. If you continue at your current rate with no interruptions, you'll be at the California-Oregon state border in two days. As you scan the map, Callaghan comes up next to you. \"How are we doing?\" he asks. You point out road markers and locations you'll need to hit to stay on the right track. He nods. \"Guess I'm driving now, huh?\"\n\n\nEveryone loads back into the cars after breakfast, and you set off down the road.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "As you drive along the road, Chip points something out on the side of the road. \"Look, it's a Burger King.\"\n\n\nNormally, you wouldn't stop either, but there's something written on the side of the building. You pull to a stop. \"What are you doing?\" shouts Callaghan from his car. You point to the mysterious writing. He understands, and gets out.\n\n\nYour group goes to see what the writing is. \"I seen one of these,\" says Sanders. \"We put these all, up and down California.\" It's another spray paint message, telling survivors to head to Washington. \"I saw one of these, too,\" you say. \"Its what started me down the road to Washington.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah,\" says Frank. \"When I was out with my squad, we were ordered to do one of these once every couple blocks or so, to spread the word.\" Your group is just about to get back in their cars, when you hear a scream from inside the Burger King.\n\n\nYou rush to the doors and look in. Chip got into the restaurant, and is hiding behind the counter from a pack of four zombies. They're grabbing at him from across the counter. \"Chip!\" you yell. This attracts the attention of one of the zombies in the group. Callaghan comes up behind you and kills it. You rush forward and grab a knife off one of the tables. You use it to kill the remaining zombies. Afterwards, Chip pops back up from behind the counter.\n\n\n\"Why would you do such a stupid thing?\" Sanders demands when the group is back outside. \"I- I just wanted to see if there were any burgers or anything left,\" Chip says sheepishly. Sanders gets right into his face and gives him a long, cold stare. You can tell things are going to get violent, so you break it up and tell everyone to get back in the cars. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "The sun is long gone by the time you find a good place to stop. It's so dark that without your headlights, it's pitch black outside. You get out, but leave your headlights on so there's a place to sit. The other cars do the same.\n\n\nDinner is canned vegetables. As your group eats, they talk about the day. You are halfway through your can of corn when you hear a loud blast. You turn to the direction of the noise, a large red firework illuminating the sky. You can hear the groans of zombies going toward the light and loud noise.\n\n\n\"Should we chase it?\" asks Marley. \"I think so,\" you say. \"It might be a good cha-\" Sanders cuts you off. \"Actually, that's a definite yes. Get your stuff and run!\"\n\n\nYou turn around. Sanders is pointing to a large herd of the undead coming toward you. They were drawn close by the explosion, and heard your voices. You and Callaghan turn off the headlights of the cars while the rest of the group loads the supplies into the cars. You hope the zombies will pass over it and not wreck your stuff too much.\n\n\nYour group runs in the direction of the first firework. You try to yell out for everyone to stick together, but your words are silenced by more fireworks.\n\n\nWhen your group arrives at the scene of the fireworks, you see that's it's a school. You also see that the zombies from the surrounding area are closing in on you. Going here was a bad idea. But you panicked, and now you're in trouble. The safest place is inside the school. \"Everyone get into the school!\"\n\n\nYou open the front doors and get everyone inside before closing them and blocking them off with tables and chairs. Just as everyone is calming down, gunfire rips through the air and hits the doors. From there, you don't know what anything is. You're just running.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Run some more", "result": "You run down an empty hallway at top speed. Footsteps and gunfire echo throughout the school. Are they following you? Who knows, all you can think is to get somewhere safe. At some point, it occurs to you that you just abandoned your group.\n\n\nWhen you get to a classroom, you look behind you. Grim and Scarlet followed you. You usher them inside the room and shut the door.\n\n\nEventually, all goes quiet. You make eye contact with Grim and Scarlet. Grim is scared out of his wits, and Scarlet is on edge, with her knife. You open the classroom door.\n\n\nThe three of you slowly move down the hallway, searching for movement. Eventually, you find it. Sanders and Frank are hiding behind a set of lockers. \"How are we going to get out of this?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"We need to leave,\" Frank says, \"after we find the rest of the crew. We have five here, that means...\"\n\n\n...six are missing,\" you finish.", "action_results": [{"action": "Split up", "result": "You agree to split into groups of two. Sanders is more than fine on his own. You and Scarlet go down the first grade hallway while Frank takes Marley to the lunchroom.\n\n\nHalfway down the hall, Scarlet stops. \"Do you hear that?\" she says. You stay quiet. You can hear sounds of struggling in one of the classrooms. Scarlet nods. Both of you creep over to the classroom. You can hear Callaghan's voice. \"Get off me!\"\n\n\nScarlet bursts in, with you following. A man in a black hood is holding Callaghan against a wall and pointing a gun at him. \"Hey!\" Scarlet yells. She goes over to pull the man off Callaghan. You run over to help, but the man is waving his gun in your direction. \"Stay back!\" he yells. \"Stay back, or I'll kill him!\"\n\n\nWithout hesitating, you run over and grab the man's arm. You force his hand up and he shoots the ceiling. You throw your fist in his face, knocking him away. Callaghan pulls ou this knife and kills the man.\n\n\n\"Thank you,\" Callaghan says. \"You saved my life.\"\n\n\nSuddenly, more gunshots echo from the lunchroom.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Tragedy", "result": "You run over to the lunchroom. The rest of the group is there. The bodies of three attackers are on the ground, plus one more...\n\n\nMarley. Marley is dead. Frank stares in disbelief, and Daisy looks like she's about to cry. The whole situation seems surreal.", "action_results": [{"action": "....", "result": "There's no time to even mourn. The sound of shattering windows fills the air as the undead force their way into the school. You look hurriedly around the cafeteria; not everyone is here. You have to find a safe way out, and fast, not to mention locating 2 missing people.", "action_results": [{"action": "Make a run for the front doors", "result": "About half the group follows you down the corridor you entered the school through. You only hope the way is still clear. When you arrive at the doors, it looks like the zombies have all funneled to the windows, leaving you a chance to escape.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back for the others", "result": "You come to your senses. \"I can't leave anyone behind,\" you whisper, and turn back. The hallway is still clear.\n\n\nYou practically fly through the hallways, screaming the names of your crew. A few quiet answers come to you from the far side of the school. You follow them as best you can, but soon become lost in the corridors. Your vision goes fuzzy as you look for a sign of survivors.\n\n\nSuddenly, Lisa comes barreling down the hallway. \"Lisa!\" you yell. She sees you, and motions for you to follow her. You do, and end up at a side door. Gale is there, killing a few zombies that get too close. Grim is holding up the door, calling for everyone to get out. After making sure everyone is alive and safe, you vacate the building.", "action_results": [{"action": ".....", "result": "You lay on the grass, waiting for the adrenaline rush to fade. It looks like everyone made it out alive. Well, not everyone...\n\n\n\"Marley's gone,\" says Daisy. You didn't know him well, but you're still sad to know he's gone. \"He was always a happy guy,\" says Callaghan. \"So that's what we've gotta do. We have to keep going, for him.\"\n\n\nEventually, as the sun is rising, you find your supplies. The zombies mostly brushed past you cars, although you do notice that one of the side mirrors was knocked off. \n\n\nYour party eats, then gets back in the cars. You take a deep breath, and pray that the rest of the trip won't be anywhere near as eventful as last night.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "From sunup, after the school incident, all three cars are silent. Nobody is blamed for what happened, but you still feel like it was your fault.\n\n\nAt about noon, you come to a stop in the middle of the road. You car stops working. The other cars make it a few more feet before they roll to a stop. The strange thing is, you still have fuel in the car.\n\n\n\"The engine's dead,\" announces Frank as he looks at the cars. Smoke rises from the engine as it tries to run, despite needing numerous replacements. \"Well,\" says Sanders, \"isn't this just perfect?\"\n\n\n\"Looks like we're going for another trip,\" says Gale.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Dog fights", "result": "Sanders and Frank accompany you to look for supplies to fix your cars. You decide to stick to the road, as that way you'll know how to get back. After walking for a little while, you spot something on the side of the road.\n\n\nIt's a chest, locked with a padlock. You pick it up and examine it. \"Careful,\" warns Sanders. \"Could be somethin' undesirable in there.\" On the bottom of the box, it says: if found return to stan\n\n\n\"We need to find Stan,\" you say. \"Why would we want to return the box to this guy, exactly?\" asks Sanders. \"First of all, you just got done saying it's too dangerous to keep,\" you say. \"Secondly, he might be able to help. It's as good a chance as walking down the road.\" \"What's your plan for finding him?\" asks Frank. You smile. \"Walking down the road.\"\n\n\nSomehow, you knew you'd find him. And you were right. You come upon a gas station, with the words come and get it written in marker across the windows. You knock on the front door. A man comes up and calls out, \"Hello.\"\n\n\n\"Are you Stan?\"\n\n\n\"Last I checked, yeah.\"\n\n\n\"We have your box.\"\n\n\nStan rushes up to the door and snatches the box out of your hands. \"Did you open it?\" he demands. You shake your head. Stan wanders back into the gas station. \"You're welcome,\" Sanders mutters.\n\n\n\"Actually, we were hoping you could help us out,\" you say. Stan stops and turns around. \"What could I possibly do?\" \n\n\nYou explain your need of car parts. Stan lights up. \"Yes, I can help you!\" You sigh happily, and go to show him where your cars are. He stops you. \"But why should I?\" \n\n\nSanders looks ready to punch this guy's lights out, but you stop him. \"Please, we need to get somewhere, and we returned your supplies. Help us out.\" Stan nods. \"One condition,\" he says, \"Leave the gas station now.\"\n\n\nThe three of you step out of the building. Stan goes up and closes the gas station door. He proceeds to block it off with some shelves. \"What are you doing?\" you ask. Stan responds by smiling, and pulling a silver whistle out of his pocket. A dog whistle, to be exact. He blows into it. You look and Sanders and Frank in confusion.\n\n\nSuddenly, a large dog comes racing into view. You barely have time to react before it tackles you. With Frank's help, you force it off yourself. You glance over at Stan. He's ordering you to kill it.\n\n\nSanders picks up a chunk of cement from one of the gas pumps and throws it at the dog. Although it's a direct hit, the dog seems unhurt. You and Frank scramble to look for weapons. \n\n\nYou go around to the back of the station, and are rewarded with a sharp pole. it looks like part of a ladder that snapped. The edge is sharp like a spear. Perfect. You come around to the front. Frank is still gone, and Sanders is weaving through the pumps to escape the dog. The next time it comes near you, you jab the pole right through the dog.\n\n\nNo effect.\n\n\nIn fact, the dog snaps at you and growls. It takes a few moments for you to register that it's a zombie dog, and you're in serious danger of actually dying. The dog is ready to pounce on you when Frank comes running over. Clutched in his hand is a glass bottle. He smashes it over the dog's head, stunning it. You finish the job by striking the dog with the spear. \n\n\nAfter the monster is dead, you pound on the door to the gas station. Stan comes over with a box in hand. He briefly opens the door to toss the box out, then slams it shut. \"What's this, challenge number two?\" demands Sanders. You open the box. \"Nope.\" It's full of engine parts.\n\n\nYou make it back, and do a decent job of repairing the engine. You turn the key, and sure enough, the car hums to life. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep driving", "result": "You estimate it's about 1:00 in the morning when you first see it up ahead. The California-Oregon border. It's looks more like a Fort Knox than another state. The road is blocked by bales of barbed wire. A group of guys holding large guns block the way.\n\n\nYou stop your car and get out with your hands in the air. The frontmost man comes up to you. \"Can I help you?\" You nod. \"I'd like to cross here, if that's okay.\" Some of the men laugh. The one in front of you turns around and looks at his colleagues, then turns back to you. \"Yeah. Sorry friend, but that ain't happening. The only way you're getting over this outpost is in a body bag, to our cemetery. We have a special one for people like you.\"\n\n\nSanders storms up to the man and gets right in his face. \"Listen here you little good-for-nothing wuss. Either you're going to move that barbed wire for us, or I'm going to move your skull into your stomach with my fists.\" The man simply laughs, and pushes Sanders away. That tips him over the edge. Sanders slaps the man across the face. The man is in shock for a second, and turns back to Sanders. \"Okay, is that the way things are gonna go? Y'all shoulda turned around...\"\n\n\nYou brace yourself for bullets, or fists, or whatever these guys are going to do, but they don't attack. The men point their guns at you and tell you to keep still. \"Here's what going to happen now. You guys think you can walk right over us. You aren't the first. We learned how to deal with you people. You're gonna be working for us for a little while. Maybe if you're good, we'll let you go, okay?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "What does that mean?", "result": "You and your group are taken out of your vehicles. \"Don't you worry, we'll take good care of these puppies,\" the man taunts while sitting in the driver's seat of your car. You are led across the border, and into a building. You see a lot of tents and makeshift buildings set up around. The area from Oregon to the border is owned by a large group of people. you wonder what you've gotten yourself into.\n\n\nmembers of your group split off. First it's all of you, then half, then four, three, and you arrive at a bedroom with only Grim for company. You are forced into the bedroom. \"Get some sleep,\" orders the guard. \"You'll need it for tomorrow. Oh, and if this door opens at any point before I open it, I'll kill you both, and the rest of your group.\"\n\n\nYou are in a small, damp room. Mold covers the walls thick as carpet. There are bunk beds in the corner, each bed with a bag on it. As for decoration, there is one banner advertising a 'New World Order.' Grim takes the top bunk, leaving you with the bottom one and a bag labeled 1297. It has three more sets of clothes, a bottle (also with 1297 on it) and some instant food (just add water). You sit on the bunk and try to get some shut-eye.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shut eye", "result": "In the morning, you are ordered to get up. You change your clothes, and are given a bowl of dry cereal for breakfast. The guard checks you and Grim for weapons, and swipes a knife that Grim had in his pocket. After that, you are led outside.\n\n\nYou and Grim are split once more. You are paired up with another woman, one you've never seen before. She looks frail. A guard comes up to you, gives a trowel to you and gardening supplies to the woman. \"You two will plant for us. You,\" the guard sticks his finger in your face, \"will dig a baseball-sized hole in the ground. You,\" the guard pokes the woman's forehead, \"will drop a single tomato seed into the hole. After that, bury it. After that, water it, nurture it, yadda yadda... in a few days you should see some tomatoes growing on the vines. And these better be the biggest, ripest, tastiest damn tomatoes I've ever eaten, or else.\" How are you supposed to control the tomato size?\n\n\nAs you perform your back-breaking duties, you get a look around. As far as you can see, other people are working. This seems to be the gardening section, as everyone else is doing the exact same redundant task as you, but with different plants. A few feet to your left, you hear the same guard explaining to two frightened men that they had better grow some long, delicious carrots, or else...\n\n\nThere are no fences keeping you in, only the watchful eye of patrolmen. There are a lot of them, enough that there's never a chance to make a run for it. As you scan the other workers, you spot Callaghan.\n\n\n\"Callaghan!\" you say in a hushed whisper. He looks around before spotting you. He waves. You both get up ti go talk to each other, but a guard steps between you. \"Oh, most certainly not. You are from different blocks, and different factions. Besides, no communication between slaves- uh, workers. No talking for the workers. Get back to planting. I'm hungry.\" Callaghan shoots you a questioning look as you go back to your post and keep planting.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dinner", "result": "As the sun sits low in the sky, you wonder how long you've been doing this. Years? Months? Weeks? You can't believe it was only a few hours. You are marched into a different building, along with hundreds of other workers,\n\n\nThe inside of the building reminds you of a prison block. There are several tables lined up with seats, and walkways above for the guards. The guards carefully watch as the workers take their seats. Not daring to sit next to one of your group members, you take a seat between two random people.\n\n\n\"In case you haven't noticed, we have some new arrivals,\" bellows one of the guards. \"So I'm going to explain how things work around here. Breakfast is free. You get that no matter what. The quality of your dinner is based on the quality of your work. Build us a house? Five-course meal. Sit there and twiddle your thumbs? You'll go to bed hungry.\"\n\n\nYou worked monotonously, but consistently. A tray is given to you containing two rolls, mashed potatoes, and cheesy beef. A cup of milk is handed to you. The guard smiles, and leans in close. \"You've got the right idea, striker. Hard work earns you respect. You may even get out of here early. Now, your little friend over there, he might not understand so well.\" You look over to where the soldier points. \n\n\nSanders.\n\n\nHis face is bruised, and he isn't given a dinner tray. He sits defeated and silent, with his shoulders slumped. You've never seen him so weak. Disturbed, you eat quickly and in silence.\n\n\nAfter dinner, you are herded back into your bedroom. Grim comes in a minute later. Based on his complexion and full stomach, you guess he worked hard, too.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tomorrow is another day...", "result": "Today is the start of a new day. After a meager breakfast, you go out to start another work day. On your way, a guard stops you. \"Hi,\" he starts. \"I'd like to apologize for the harshness of my colleague the other day. It seems he had a small lapse in judgement.\" You are confused, but you act like you know what he's talking about. You nod as well.\n\n\n\"While you are not allowed to talk to workers of other sections and factions,\" the guard points to Callaghan, \"you are more than welcome to talk to members of your section.\" You are even more confused now. Whatever. The guard steps aside to allow you to go to your workspace. What will you do on this fine working day?", "action_results": [{"action": "Do your job", "result": "You can't possibly go hungry. You decide to buckle down and get your job done.\n\n\nHours pass. Your hands and knees are grimy and achy, but you have an impressive row of baby tomatoes, just waiting to grow. They'd better grow, or else you'll probably die.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dinner", "result": "\"Hmm...\" says the guard in front of you. \"Well, I'm impressed. Your work ethic is improving. Full rations for this man.\" And sure enough, you get another full plate. You eat slowly as the other workers watch in envy.\n\n\nIn your bedroom, Grim calls you up to his bunk. \"Look at this,\" he whispers. He has a small piece of metal in his hand. \"I found it while I was digging. I think if I build up enough scraps, we could make something...\"\n\n\n\"Like a weapon?\" you say, excited. \"Maybe,\" answers Grim. \"Or, even better, something to escape with. But, I'll need your help. Look for things, collect things. Bring them back. I'll hide them in my pillowcase. We'll need a lot more than this paper clip.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Day 2", "result": "The next morning is the same. A bowl of oats, then you go outside to work. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk to some other inmates", "result": "You decide to make conversation with some of the other workers. You approach a group of workers that don't seem interested in planting blueberries. \"What are you guys doing?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Great, another helping hand,\" one of the workers says. She comes up to you and lowers her voice. \"We're leaving here soon. We've been collecting gardening tools, and food. We're going to revolt, and run away.\" \n\n\n\"Who's 'we'?\" you ask. The worker opens her arms to everyone working. \"As many people as we'll take. It's happening tomorrow.\" \n\n\n\"Quick question,\" you say. \"How long have you been here? This place can't have been up long.\" The worker ponders the question. \"I was captured a week ago. Anyway, tomorrow, okay. Try to get your hands on a weapon. After that, just take out as many guards as you can. There are definitely more workers than guards.\" She looks over at you. \"You in?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "No thanks", "result": "\"Sorry, but I can't risk it. I've got people here,\" you say. \"The guards will kill them, and I can't let that happen.\" The woman frowns. \"Then we won't have enough people for the revolt.\" You think about what Grim told you. \"Maybe there's another way out. One that doesn't involve violence.\" The woman looks at you in confusion. \"You mean, like, a jailbreak?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, a jailbreak. Anyway, I need to plant tomatoes. See you around. Well, actually, maybe not.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Plant tomatoes", "result": "No use going hungry. You sit down and mentally prepare yourself for a long, grueling day. Scoop, plant, bury, water. Scoop, plant, bury, water. Scoop, plant, bury, water. Scoop, plant, bury, water. Scoop, plant, bury, water....\n\n\nAfter the day is done, you go inside for dinner.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dinner", "result": "When you arrive at your seat for dinner, a heaping plate of food awaits you. The guard who served you stands up on the table and claps his hands. 'Attention, everyone. I would like to congratulate worker number 1297 for his dedication to our cause. Please, a round of applause for him.\"\n\n\nThe room is silent. Workers give you strange looks. \"CLAP, YOU MAGGOTS!\" yells the guard. Automatically, polite applause fills the room. you make eye contact with Sanders. We're getting out of here, you mouth to him. It's just a cover. He nods, and goes back to eating. Looks like he finally got the memo.\n\n\nBack in the bedroom, Grim is already asleep. You lay down, and try to close your eyes.", "action_results": [{"action": "Another day...", "result": "When you wake up, you are expecting the disgusting bowl of oatmeal. And sure enough, you get the same bowl of cold, runny oatmeal. Afterwards, you are forced outside once more.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search for parts for Grim", "result": "Rather than working, you decide to harvest more for Grim. After awhile, you're able to collect a few small bits of metal. By dinnertime, you're almost proud of your work.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Dinner, again", "result": "You're so tired and bored and hungry and sick, and just...done with this place. You can't wait to leave, if you ever do. You slump through dinner, and then march over to your bedroom. Grim seems to notice how neglected you're acting, and tries to give you some words of encouragement. It's a nice gesture, but it doesn't help. Tomorrow is another day.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "tend to your tomatoes", "result": "With nothing else to do, you submissively tend to the tomato plants. The guards seem happy with your work, and don't notice that you're not talking.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "look for parts for Grim", "result": "You think back to Grim's words. You need to get more bits and pieces to build a lockpick, or something like that. You go to work.\n\n\nYou find a loose wire near one of the buildings, and pull it out. This gives you a semi-decent rope. On your way to hide it, you spot a quarter on the ground. Not much, but it's something. After you hide them, you try to think of something to get you out of the bedroom you're stuck in. The door isn't an option; it would notify the guards. You have no windows, no vents, nothing to crawl through. You'd have to chip a hole in the wall. You decide to smuggle your trowel in. As the day ends, you realize you did zero work by the guards' standards. And that means no food.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dinner", "result": "When you take your seat, the guard that usually gives you your food comes up to you empty-handed. \"You, my friend, were a useless slug today. Useless slugs don't need to eat, so I'm sure you'll be fine.\" You go to bed more hungry than ever. Breakfast seems like an eternity away.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Yes!", "result": "You happily accept. The woman seems excited. \"Okay, we have a weapon stash nearby. Find anything we can use, and bury it there,\" the woman shows you a mound of dirt near the latrines. \"Got it.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Dig for a weapon", "result": "You decide that looking with your trowel is a reasonable option. It'll make it seem like you're working. you get to your station, and start digging small, nondescript holes.\n\n\nHours pass. You're just about to give up when something shiny catches your eye. You quickly unearth it. It's a shard of metal, sharp enough that it draws blood from your fingers just by holding it. As you examine it, you hear a guard come up behind you. You quickly stuff the shard into your pocket. \"Wow,\" says the guard as he looks at your holes. \"Someone was hard at work today. You can expect a full belly tonight.\"\n\n\nYou stash the shard in the pile just before dinner.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dinner", "result": "You arrive in the eating area and sit at your table. The guard who serves you comes up with a clipboard. \"You know the rules.\" You are confused.\n\n\nSuddenly, a group of guards pull you off your seat and drag you into an interrogation room. The woman you collected weapons for is there, too.\n\n\n\"So, what do you think ought to be done with violent troublemakers like you?\" The guard asks. \"I think you should let us go, and stop imprisoning people for no reason,\" answers the woman. \"Yeah, I was afraid you'd say that. We're border guards. We have to do this, to ensure no terrorists get anywhere near Washington. It's a pretty good deal. But, you two just don't get it. So, I've selected punishments special for both of you.\"\n\n\nYou are taken outside. The woman is taken elsewhere, probably to her doom. When you see the punishment, you freeze. Frank is tied to a wooden beam in the ground. The guard takes out a stick, and beats Frank until he's bloody everywhere. He's barely even conscious. \"This is what has to happen,\" says the guard, \"to show you just how serious we are.\" You watch as Frank is untied and dragged off, probably to his doom as well. You are sent to bed without dinner. \n\n\n \n\nNow you're definitely getting out of here.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Wait for a good time to raid the toolshed", "result": "You decide to sit against the wall and wait for the guards watching the toolshed to move. While you stand, several guards comment on your lack of work. You'll go hungry tonight, but not in vain. Eventually, during a shift change, you're able to slip into the toolshed and swipe some razor blades. You stuff them in your pockets and close the toolshed door just as two guards come up to you. \"Shouldn't you be working?\"\n\n\nOne of the guard hits you, causing a single razor blade to fall out of your pocket, and onto the ground. Frantically, you try to cover it with your shoe. \"Hey, what's this?\" The guard has noticed. You contemplate whether to run for it, but the guard simply says, \"Gotta be careful with these. You really should be working, though.\" Thank goodness the guard didn't notice that you dropped it. He thought it was just there.\n\n\nYou stash the razor blades on the way to dinner.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "look for Grim", "result": "You decide to look for Grim. The guard did say everyone in your section. You walk up and down the area, searching for Grim's face. You don't find it. That's odd. Since he slept in your block, along with all the other workers, why isn't he here?", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Talk to the old woman you work with", "result": "You decide to get some info from the woman you work with. You'll work slower, but that's okay.\n\n\n\"I was taken in a day after the dead got into Oregon,\" the woman says as you work. \"They rounded us up, and told us we weren't free spirits anymore...\"\n\n\n\"Yes, but do you know of a way out?\" you coax. The woman's face goes dark. \"There's no way out. Please don't try. If they catch you trying to leave, death is the best outcome. More likely, they'll starve you, or beat you, or feed you to the zombies...\" she trails off. It seems as though this happened to someone close to her.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dinner", "result": "\"Hmmm....\" says the guard as he stands in front of you. \"You did a decent job, but decent doesn't cut it. Your rations will be cut in half.\" And indeed they are. You hungrily eat the little food you are given.\n\n\nIn your bedroom, Grim calls you up to his bunk. \"Look at this,\" he whispers. He has a small piece of metal in his hand. \"I found it while I was digging. I think if I build up enough scraps, we could make something...\"\n\n\n\"Like a weapon?\" you say, excited. \"Maybe,\" answers Grim. \"Or, even better, something to escape with. But, I'll need your help. Look for things, collect things. Bring them back. I'll hide them in my pillowcase. We'll need a lot more than this paper clip.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Take the chance and leave", "result": "You can't waste a chance like this. You force the doors open, and get as many people out as you can. \"We need to seal these doors,\" says Scarlet. You search the surrounding area for something to do that with. Your eyes settle on a lone car in the parking lot.\n\n\nYou turn off the parking brake, and roll the car towards the doors. Just as you are about to block them off, Chip comes running up to the doors with a whole horde of the dead in tow. \"Let me out!\" he shouts. Scarlet hurriedly opens the doors enough for him to slip out. You slam the car into the doors, stopping them from being opened.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Wait for your people", "result": "\"We should wait in the cafeteria for everyone else. They'll get here soon,\" you say. \"Are you insane?\" says Sanders. \"We need to run for our lives!\"\n\n\nYou wait another few minutes in the cafeteria as the rest of the group tries to find a way out. The groaning and footsteps only get louder. Finally, you see hordes marching up to the cafeteria doors. \"We waited too long,\" says Callaghan. \n\n\nCallaghan, Frank, and Scarlet charge out to meet the hordes, to fight them off. You hastily remove a grate from the wall of the cafeteria. It's the only way out. When it finally comes loose, you climb in as fast as you can. The screams of your teammates echo behind you. Just as you think you are safe, a dead hand pulls you back out of the grate. The zombies swarm your dead body.\n\n\nHow ironic that it happened in the lunchroom.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Climb through the vents", "result": "You look around the lunchroom for a way out. You spot a large ventilation grate against the wall. \"Help me tear this out,\" you say. \n\n\nAfter the grate is loose, you crawl in, followed by your group. It's a mad fumble in the dark for escape. At any moment, you could make a wrong move and plummet to your death. After some time, you reach a split.", "action_results": [{"action": "Right", "result": "As you crawl at top speed towards freedom, you realize too late that you made a wrong turn. You slip down the shaft, into a pool of something. The fall wasn't enough to kill you, but your legs are pinned under your own weight. You can't move. You try your best to get comfortable. After all, it's going to be awhile.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Left", "result": "You climb blindly through the vent shaft, feeling around for something to hold onto. Eventually, you come to another stop.", "action_results": [{"action": "Left", "result": "you frantically crawl forward, and the light of the moon cuts through an outside grate. You made it. You shift around so your feet are forward, and kick the grate out. You crawl to freedom with your people right behind you. ", "action_results": [null]}, null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Stick together", "result": "You agree to stick together. \"I think they're using the lunchroom as their base of operations,\" Sanders says. \"That's all I could see before I ran off.\"\n\n\nThe group stays as close as they can get. Everyone is intently watching for any sign of movement. When you arrive at the lunchroom, you can see three people in there.\n\n\n\"Marley,\" Scarlet whispers. You look into the window...Marley is being held down at gunpoint. You have to do something.\n\n\nWithout warning, Sanders crawls over to the doors. He pulls a gun off of one of the storage boxes (you don't know how he spotted it) and bursts in. With no other choice, you follow him.\n\n\nFrank and Sanders hold the position of fire with the attackers. Scarlet comes up from behind with her knife.\n\n\n\"Let him go,\" says Sanders. \"Now, before I make you.\" The bandits show no sign of movement. \"Please,\" you say. \"We're going somewhere, and the guy you're holding there has someone he needs to see. Please, please let him go.\" You hope that appealing to their emotional side will convince them to let Marley go. And it seems like it's working. The man lets go of Marley and he stands up.\n\n\nOne of the bandits fires a bullet into Marley's head, killing him.\n\n\nYou are in shock, staring at Marley's body. You vaguely notice Sanders firing at the bandits, Frank possibly taking a hit. By the time you realize you were an easy target, the threat is already gone. More of your group members come into the lunchroom with their weapons raised, only to lower them when they see Marley.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Grim", "result": "You are surprised that Grim is volunteering, given his quiet nature. You select him, and everyone else goes to find a place to sleep.\n\n\nYou and Grim sit against the cars and watch the road for threats. Grim seems disconnected and deep in thought, until he suddenly sits up and points down the road. \"See that?\"\n\n\nYou look in the direction he's pointing. There's nothing there. \"What are you pointing at?\"\n\n\n\"There's a zombie over there.\"\n\n\n\"How can you see that? Are you sure it's not a tree or something?\"\n\n\n\"No, it's definitely a zombie. He's stumbling over toward that house. Oh, he got his foot stuck on something. Okay, now he's free.\"\n\n\nSuddenly, Grim looks over at you. \"Sorry,\" he says. \"Was I bothering you?\" You are surprised. \"No, of course not.\"\n\n\n\"I was always like this. I can see things no one else can. I'm also really good at reading people. Talking, not so much.\" After that, it's quiet. Grim fidgets around nervously. You think of something encouraging to say. \"That's pretty cool,\" is all you can come up with. It still makes Grim smile.\n\n\nYou decide to get more acquainted with him by asking more questions. \"How did you end up back at that town?\"\n\n\n\"Hm? Oh, I've lived there my whole life. Nobody from our town really listened to the drafting rules. Nobody in California really did, otherwise this place would probably be all girls.\"\n\n\nYou feel dumb for leaving your wife and going to the wall. You could've stayed back? That would have been your first choice easy. This knowledge propels you to get to Washington even more.\n\n\nThe rest of your shift is spent in silence. When the moon is high in the sky, you and Grim wake up the next two watchguards.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Lisa", "result": "You pick Lisa to accompany you for the night. It's good to get to know the people you'll be working with.\n\n\nAs everyone else finds a place to sleep, you and Lisa sit against the cars to guard the supplies. You notice she frequently takes out her handgun, takes out the ammo and takes apart the gun, only to put it back together and put it away, and then take it back. You decide to start conversation.\n\n\n\"You nervous?\" you ask. Lisa gives you a look that's hard to read. \"No.\"\n\n\n\"Then why do you keep taking apart your gun?\"\n\n\n\"I don't know, okay? I'm just fidgety.\"\n\n\nYou decide to try again. \"Rose told me that you used to keep track of inventory, and that you were quite happy at Fort-Z. Why did you want to come to Washington?\"\n\n\nLisa actually seems to be considering the question. \"I'm just trying to help, I guess. I won't be any good back home. I like order. Routine. When the downfall happened, it was all I could do to find something to occupy my time.\" You nod.\n\n\nYou open your mouth to say something, but Lisa keeps going. \"I used to be an accountant. Everyone else was so scared, so worried when they heard the news that the world was ending. To me, it was just more work. A different kind of work, but still work. Now, instead of making money and feeding yourself, you're staying alive.\"\n\n\nThe rest of the night is quiet, with no incident. When the moon is halfway through its cycle, you wake up the next two guards.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Choose the average vehicles (hold decent gas, stronger protection from zombies, but weak to bullets/humans)", "result": "Your choose the fairly strong cars. They'll be decent on gas, and protect your group from attacks. \n\n\nYou are given three cars, all of the same quality, for your group. Everyone loads the supplies into the trunks, and Rose asks another lady to open the rear doors, to point you in the direction of Washington. You thank Rose one last time, and drive up to the doors. You buckle your seat belt, and prepare for a long road trip.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Choose the heavy-duty vehicles (hold little gas, very bullet and zombie resistant, almost never break down)", "result": "You pick the strongest cars. You aren't too concerned about gas, and protection takes top priority.\n\n\nYou are given three cars, all of the same quality, for your group. Everyone loads the supplies into the trunks, and Rose asks another lady to open the rear doors, to point you in the direction of Washington. You thank Rose one last time, and drive up to the doors. You buckle your seat belt, and prepare for a long road trip.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "break in", "result": "You use the butt of your gun to hit the fence poles repeatedly. Eventually, the pole gives way, and part of the fence falls away. You step in, and into the factory.\n\n\nAs soon as you step inside, you see a woman picking through a pile of debris. She looks up at you as you enter.\n\n\n\"Oh. Hi,\" she says. She seems rather uninterested in you. \"What are you looking for?\" you ask. \"Parts,\" she replies. \"Parts for an engine. More specifically,\" she pulls a piece of notebook paper out of her pocket and reads it, \"...a fan belt.\"\n\n\nYou nod. \"Okay.\"\n\n\n\"My name's Clarice, by the way,\" she says out of nowhere. You are caught slightly off guard, but introduce yourself anyway. Suddenly, Clarice pulls a large black thing out of the wreckage. \"Found it,\" she says triumphantly. She heads out of a side door. \"By the way,\" she adds, \"Don't bother following me.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "search the trailer for another weapon", "result": "Not wanting to waste bullets, you scrounge around the trailer for something sharp. Eventually, you find a piece of plastic that looks like it used to be part of a canteen. Nonetheless, it's sharp.\n\n\nYou open the trailer door and slice away, just like with the glass shard. You're able to clear a small opening for you to charge through, and you make it away from the horde at a running speed.\n\n\nAfter you've slowed to a walk, you notice another building coming up. It looks kind of like a factory building. It has several floors, is made of brick. Three smokestacks jut out of the building's roof. it seems worthwhile to check out, so you run up to it. You are disappointed to learn that the entrance is surrounded by fencing.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Offer half your supplies", "result": "\"Half our supplies,\" you offer. \"Please, just let us pass. We need to get somewhere, quickly.\" You search for any sign of anything behind the man's eyes. You find nothing. \"Sorry,\" he says. \"But unless you have a better offer than our current demands, this won't turn out well for you.\"", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Um...", "result": "\"I don't know what else we could give,\" you say. The man simply nods. \"Don't worry, I understand.\" He gives a cruel smile, and snaps his fingers. One group of men starts to unload your trailer, while another grabs you and your group.", "action_results": [{"action": "Prisoners", "result": "A pair of arms lifts you up, and drags you over to one of the nearby buildings. As you cut through the crowd, they part just enough for you to pass. You struggle, but whoever's holding you has an iron grip. You realize there's no use struggling, because even if you get free, you're still surrounded. You relax and allow your captor to carry you into a dilapidated building.\n\n\nThe inside of the building is completely empty. It seems to have been some sort of apartment building, but it's almost unrecognizable now. You are taken down a set of stairs, and into the basement of the building. The basement is a hallway, with several doors lining the walls. Barbara and her kids are divided into the other rooms, and you are taken into a room of your own. The only thing in the room is a chair.\n\n\n\"Sit,\" orders the man who carried you in here. He's holding a shotgun, so you decide to comply. As soon as you sit down, your hands are seized and tied behind your back. \"Sorry that I have to do this,\" the man says as he loads the shotgun. You struggle, and manage to tip the chair over. Unfortunately, it stays intact.\n\n\n\"Please don't try to run, it just makes this harder and more awkward,\" the man says. He stands up. \"You have two choices at this point. One, I can kill you right now. Two, you can keep trying to fight, and struggle, and in the end, I'll still kill you. You wanna try to break free again?\"\n\n\nInstead of answering, you pull your hands against the back of the chair. Just as last time, it stays intact. \"Hey, I warned you,\" the man says. He fires the gun, and stains the ground with your blood.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Offer your gas", "result": "\"Gas,\" you say. \"You can have it. Just leave us enough to get out. You can take the rest.\" The man doesn't even consider it. \"Look around you, stupid. Do you see a single functioning car?\" You look around. \"NO!\" the man yells. \"We don't have 'em 'cause we don't need 'em. If you don't start making me a good offer, I'm just gonna have to start taking without asking first.\"", "action_results": [null, null]}, null]}, {"action": "Give up your supplies", "result": "\"It's all in the trailer,\" you say, which is true. The man looks behind him, and snaps his fingers. \"Boys, unload the trailer.\" He turns back to you. \"Now that that's out of the way, I will be happy to escort you to your new home.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack", "result": "You pretend to walk over to the minivan to surrender the keys. Everyone's eyes are on you. You open the door, and grab a gun out of its holster. No one can see you. You ponder who to shoot first. \"Well?\" the man taunts. \"Am I getting the keys or not?\" Decision made.\n\n\nYou thought you could be quick enough to shoot somebody. But you didn't even pull the trigger. Not once.", "action_results": []}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "leave the hostage", "result": "You can't take in a new member, and you also can't trust him. You leave him tied to the pole, get back in the car, and drive off.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "take the hostage with you", "result": "You can't leave the man out here like this. It's not safe. You untie the rope holding him to the pole. He gives you a look of pure gratitude. You have him hide in the trailer, and you take off.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep going", "result": "There's no time to waste. You gunshots echoed throughout the area, and you doubt those two were alone. With the man hiding in your trailer, you try to drive away.\n\n\nYou quickly find that the roads have been blocked off by debris. They're herding you in a certain direction. You can't get out of the car, either, as you start to see other people watching you out of buildings and behind trash cans. In a last ditch effort to get away, you throw the minivan in reverse.\n\n\nAs you try to back out, you see something: a large truck blocks the way out. They've sealed the road behind you. A man holding a golf club comes out of a nearby building and starts running toward the minivan. In total panic, you speed down the road, away from the truck.\n\n\nBarbara is gripping her armrests in fear. You would be, but both your hands are on the steering wheel. You drive down the road, exactly where they want you to. You can hear the truck following closely behind you. Suddenly, you drive into a dead end. The way forward is blocked. The truck pulls to a stop behind you, trapping you.\n\n\nYou have no choice but to get out of the car. A mob of people has gathered around your vehicle. Your group follows suit, but the former hostage stays in your trailer.\n\n\n\"Okay, let's not waste time. Give us our hostage, your stuff, and your car, and we'll escort you to your new home,\" barks a large, bald man. The crowd of angry people with their guns pointed at you reminds you that you'll have to speak carefully.", "action_results": [{"action": "Give up the hostage", "result": "Slowly, with your arms raised, you walk over to the trailer, and open the door. The hostage steps out with his arms raised. \"Wonderful,\" the man says. He grabs the hostage by the shirt collar and hands him over to another man, who drags him away. \"Anything else?\"", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "more than food", "result": "You slowly walk over to the trailer to hand over the supplies. When you open the door, the hostage comes out with his arms raised. \"Well, look who it is,\" the man says. \"Thought you could sneak this one past us?\" Another person from the crowd takes him away. Then the man snaps his fingers. \"Boys, unload the trailer. I want to see what I got.\"\n\n\nAfter the men have searched through the trailer, the man turns to you. \"Now that we have your stuff, I will escort you to your new home.\"", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Keep driving", "result": "You watch over the scene. The attackers seem like hardened thieves. Getting in a confrontation wouldn't be wise. You slowly drive past the scene. As you do, the victim of the beatings gives you a long, cold stare in between blows to the face. ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Try to find a way around", "result": "Heeding the warning of the sign, you decide to change direction. You look on the map and find an alternate route. You'll be able to loop around and rejoin I-5 after some time.\n\n\nAs you drive, you begin to notice something is very wrong. You expected to be out of range of whoever the 'Followers' are, but graffiti and roadblocks suggest otherwise. Zombies have been staked to the ground on the side of the road. garbage cans have been laid out to block the roads, and a few of them have fires going in them.\n\n\n\"We need to turn around,\" you say. Nobody objects, so you throw the car in reverse. You back into the grass, and turn around so that you can pick a different route. But, when you turn, you see a man walk out into the middle of the road. He has something in his hands, but you can't tell what it is. It looks like a bat, or an axe. Suddenly, you see a car driving up the road toward you.\n\n\nBy this time, you realize the mistake you made. You try to turn around to see if you can get out of the backroads, and away from these people. You end up knocking over some trash cans and putting dents in the car, but that's currently the least of your worries. You start to see that forks in the road have been blocked off completely. They're herding you in a certain direction. With the roadblocks, the zombies, and the car behind you, you have nowhere to go.\n\n\nYou have no choice but to follow the intended path for you. You eventually end up in a section of the road that's walled off completely. When you stop, the car behind you stops, blocking you in. A group of people approaches the car from behind roadblocks and trees. Every single one of them is armed with either a gun or a large melee weapon. One man, who is bald and wearing a blood-soaked apron, walks up to your car. He clutches a metal bar in his meaty fist.\n\n\n\"Knock, knock, knock,\" he says, hitting the top of your car with every word. \"Come on out, so we can see our kill.\" You freeze with fear. The man leans down into the window. \"Get out of the car,\" he says. You slowly open the door, and the man steps aside to let you out. When the four of you are out of the car, The man addresses all of you.\n\n\n\"So,\" he starts, \"Apparently you didn't pay attention to our little warning. This is our turf, and anyone who enters our turf, becomes our property. You four, and everything you have, is ours now. I'm gonna need the keys to your car, and then I'm gonna need you all to step aside, so I can escort you away.\"\n\n\nMikey is the first to act. He gets back in the car, and comes up a moment later with a gun. He points it at the bald man. \"Leave us alone,\" he says.\n\n\nThe man laughs. \"Silly boy. Young kids like you shouldn't play with guns,\" he says. He snaps his fingers, and a small group of men from the crowd steps forward. They rip the gun out of Mikey's hands, and pull him out of view.\n\n\n\"Hey,\" you say. \"Listen, I'm sorry we trespassed, but I don't want any trouble. Please, please, just let us pass. We don't want to bother or hurt anyone. We just have somewhere to be. Can't you-\"\n\n\nThe man cuts you off by hitting you in the head with his metal bar. \"Fool! Stop trying to plead your case! I told you how it's gonna be! We get your stuff, and you're gonna die!\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack him", "result": "Without hesitation, you jump out at the man. You grab the bar and hold it against his neck, choking him. Behind you, you hear the others leap into action.\n\n\n\"I told you,\" you say, \"Just let us go. But you wouldn't listen. Now we have to-\"\n\n\nYou are suddenly pulled off of the man and stabbed in the side. You shriek in pain, and your attacker drops you onto the road. \"I tried to tell you,\" the man says. \"But you just wouldn't listen.\" The man brings the bar down onto your head, caving your skull in.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Let him kill you", "result": "You stay silent, and get up off the road. The man has a wide, wicked grin on his face. As the others close in on the car, the man hits you again, sending you to your knees. Again, and you're on the ground. Again, and you're barely conscious.\n\n\n\"Signs are there for a reason,\" the bald man says as your vision swims. \"We gave you an honest, fair warning, but you just didn't listen.\" The man brings the bar down onto your temple, killing you.\n\n\n \n\n\"Not my fault you don't listen.\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Follow The Stranger", "result": "Something about what the soldier said makes you think. Barbara can't operate a weapon, Mikey doesn't like you, and probably never will, and Megan is too shy for you to even be sure about her. You realize the soldier is right, and go to follow him.\n\n\nYou catch up with the soldier as he is finishing the spray-painted message on the wall.\n\n\nHOPE IS LOST FOR THE REST OF YOU. THE DEAD NEVER SLEEP, AND NEITHER CAN YOU. WASHINGTON IS THE ONLY SALVATION. COME TO WASHINGTON OR DIE. LEAVE NOW, AND BE A PART OF THE REBUILDING.\n\n\n\"What's the rebuilding?\" you ask. \"Oh,\" the soldier answers, \"It's a military plan that died out pretty quickly. Back before the zombies took control, we had a plan set up to rebuild and restructure the damaged areas. You know, help with businesses, relocate families.\" That makes sense. Nobody saw this outbreak coming, and it makes you feel better that the government is working to help you. You hope they were able to help your wife to safety. Along with everyone else of course, but mostly your wife.\n\n\n\"It's pretty dark out,\" says the soldier. \"We should head back.\" You are confused. \"Head back? To where?\" The soldier looks at you and raises his eyebrows. \"The camp. Follow me.\" The soldier leads you back past where Barbara and her kids are, and into the trees. \"By the way, my name's Conway,\" he says suddenly.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Camp", "result": "After a few minutes, you arrive at a small campsite. A single tent is set up in front of a living space. A fire pit, a log to sit on, what looks like a knife-sharpening station, among other things. \"Here we are,\" Conway says. \"Camp me.\"\n\n\n\"Are you alone?\" you ask, noting the single, one person tent. \"I am now,\" Conway answers. \"I was with one of the patrol groups, but we got split up in all the ruckus. There were a bunch of useless men anyway. Pretty sure I was the only one who could operate a rocket launcher.\" You think of the civilian volunteers back at the wall, and wonder if Conway was paired with such people.\n\n\n\"So you just ditched them?\" you ask as you sit down on the log. \"Wasn't my choice. We carried packs with necessary supplies for a few days in the event we were separated or trapped. Once I knew I was gone, I booked it outta there. Found this place, set up shop, and ditched my backpack. Kept the duffel bag for carrying big finds,\" Conway answers.\n\n\n\"Aren't you heading back to Washington?\" you ask. Conway chews his lip for a moment before answering, \"No. Not yet.\" You decide to leave it there. You don't want to bring up a possible bad moment in the man's past, so you change the subject. \"Where are we sleeping?\" Conway snaps at of his thoughts. \"Oh yes! Um, you can take the tent. I have no problem sleeping on the ground. Won't be the first time.\"\n\n\nYou nod, and take note of Conway's supplies. He has quite a few guns, an impressive knife collection, and whatever he's hiding in the duffel bag. It's definitely full, but you aren't sure of what. There's also plenty of food around, but no water to be seen. You wonder if Conway hid it, or needs more.\n\n\nAs you look around, Conway says, \"You planning on sleeping anytime soon, or are you just gonna sit there and stare at my guns?\" You climb into the tent, and try to sleep on the inflatable pillow and thin blanket.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rise and Shine", "result": "When you wake up, Conway is already up. From the way he's acting, you wonder if he ever fell asleep. You see five empty cans scattered around the area, more than three servings of breakfast. You decide not to comment, and pick up a can of instant mashed potatoes.\n\n\n\"Alrighty,\" Conway says as you eat, \"Today, I'm thinkin' we go out and look for more supplies. Specifically, more ammo for him,\" Conway points to an especially large gun propped against a tree, \"...some more food, and, of course, any other survivors we can find.\" \n\n\n\"Wait, what?\" you ask. \"If you were looking for survivors to rescue, why didn't you get my whole group back at the nature center?\" Conway goes quiet, similar to yesterday when you asked if he was headed to Washington. He finally answers, \"I'm not rescuing people.\"\n\n\n\"Speaking of which,\" he says, \"We'd better get moving. Your people are gonna start wonderin' where you went, and they could also be a supply drain. Early bird gets the arm cannon! Let's get moving!\" Not wanting to challenge Conway, you hop up and follow him out of the woods, and onto another car-choked road.\n\n\nYou scan the area for points of interest. You don't see anything, but Conway does. He points out something a few streets over, that you can't see. You tell him there's nothing there, to which he insists there is. \"I can't tell what it is,\" he says, \"But it has our colors. Let's go grab it.\"\n\n\nAs Conway leads you through the cars over to the next street, a lone zombie comes out from behind one of the cars. \"Aw, shoot,\" Conway says, and pulls a large knife out of his belt loop. He goes over to kill the zombie, and stabs the knife through its forehead. The knife is so comically large, it goes through the zombie's head, and sticks out the back three inches. \"Well?\" he says.\n\n\nThe thing he saw was a camo backpack. You unzip it and find several ammo magazines you don't recognize. \"Yes!\" Conway shouts, and pulls one of the cartridges out of the backpack. \"Here's just what I was lookin' for!\" You see a few other things in the pack, including a hunting knife. You pocket it for yourself, and examine the rest of the pack. It's mostly military-type stuff.\n\n\nYou look up, and see a small pack of zed coming through the cars towards you. \"Uh oh,\" you say, and grab your knife. Conway turns towards them. \"Looks like that rotter brought some friends!\" You go to the right, and single off one zombie. While Conway goes to town on the others, you focus on the one in front of you. When it's close enough, you force the knife into its face. To your satisfaction, the zombie dies instantly. You pull the knife out and let it drop to the ground.\n\n\nConway looks at what you've done. \"Excellent! You're learning,\" he says. \"Anyway, this is one awesome find. You wanna go for more, or should we go back with our find?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Search for more", "result": "\"Let's keep going,\" you say confidently. Conway smiles. \"That's the way. Where to?\" \n\n\nYou travel up the road, cautiously watching for more zombies. It doesn't look like there's much more out here. The cars are all empty, and there's a severe lack of convenient backpacks. You think about searching elsewhere. \"There a problem?\" Conway asks. \"You reconsiderin'?\" You shake your head. \"Maybe we should go to where there's more buildings, and potential for supplies,\" you say.\n\n\nThe city isn't much more fruitful. As you look at the empty streets, you see something painted on a wall. At first, it looks like another call to Washington, but the message is different:\n\n\nNO MORE\n\n\nSTRIVE FOR BETTER\n\n\nA NEW WORLD ORDER\n\n\n\"Conway,\" you say. \"What do you think this is?\" Conway reads the message, and laughs. \"What the hell? What kind of garbage is this? 'New World Order?' Sounds like some lunatic wants to take on the government. The whack job's probably dead by now. You ready to head back?\"\n\n\nYou're disappointed at your lack of finding anything, but at least you killed a few zombies with your new knife. You're feeling more comfortable with it. You and Conway walk back to his camp.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head back", "result": "Conway happily loads his new ammo into his gun back at the camp, while you unpack the backpack. A lot of ammo, a few more knives, an empty water bottle, and a gold bracelet. \"Huh,\" says Conway. \"That looks familiar. I think someone used to wear that around. Uh....oh come on...what was his....Lincoln! That was it! Yeah, he used to have that, but this ain't is backpack.\"\n\n\nYou eat a light lunch, and talk to Conway more about Washington. \"You ready to leave?\" you ask, anticipating a bad response. Conway seems to have come to terms with whatever was troubling him. \"Yes, I think we'll leave soon. The only obstacle is a good vehicle. I can drive just about anything, but I want somethin' durable, not just some car on the side of the road. I plan to drive through the wastelands in style, know what I mean?\" You nod. There are benefits to a more durable vehicle for sure. You make plans to search tomorrow, and leave as soon as you find what you're after.\n\n\n\"Now that that's settled,\" Conway says. \"You up for a little game?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "A what?", "result": "Conway fishes two more guns out of his duffel bag. \"Follow me.\"\n\n\nConway leads you to the top of a small hill, overlooking another trashed street. This one, however, is full of the dead. \"The rules are simple,\" says Conway. \"You shoot the zombies. I did this to pass time, I have no shortage of ammo. Now that there's two of us, I suppose we should set up some rules.\"\n\n\nYou agree on ten points per killed zombie. Twenty if you steal a kill from someone else. You lose five points if you don't kill a zombie first shot. Conway seems very invested in the game, but you just see it as target practice. \"Alright,\" he says. \"Three, two...\"\n\n\nYou kill a zombie on the very first shot, standing next to a jeep. The next kill is in the driver's seat of a station wagon. \"I think bonus points are in order for that one,\" says Conway. Before you know it, you're into the game, too. You don't kill every zombie on the first shot, but you're decent. Conway, of course, has double your points by the time you've used up all your rounds. \"Good game,\" he says. \"We should head back, I guess.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "A Calling", "result": "Your walk back is uneventful. You still aren't sure what the point of that excursion was, but it's nice to get your mind off impending doom for awhile. Plus, as Conway said, there's no shortage of bullets.\n\n\nYou arrive back at the campsite as night is falling. \"Well, time to hit the hay,\" says Conway. \"Are we leaving for Washington tomorrow?\" you say. It's not that you're getting impatient, but you don't see a reason (beyond Conway's personal reason) for staying back. Conway slowly nods. \"Yeah. Yeah, we'll leave soon.\"\n\n\n\"Soon?\" you ask. \"Or tomorrow?\" Conway doesn't answer this time. You begin to question whether joining him was a good idea, and consider ditching him if you need to. As you retire to your tent, you hear a crackling noise from Conway's duffel bag. Quickly, he fishes out the object. It's a walkie talkie.\n\n\nChzzz.....Zhhcccc..tzzz....Hello? Anytzzzz....anyone there? Conway, is chzzzzzzzzzz....\n\n\n\"Yes? Hello, yes! Yes, this is Conway Matthews, deployed with the fourth wave? Do you copy?\"\n\n\nTzhhhhhh.....Chzzzz...... getting really bad outthcccczzzz....going to leave soon.....wanted to check for any others....tchzz.......tchzzzare you? Come to the......thczzzzz.....\n\n\nConway fiddles with the receiver in an attempt to make the signal stronger. \"I'm losing connection! Where are we supposed to go?\"\n\n\nTchzzzzzz....................341...tchzzzstreet.....local museum.....\n\n\nConway looks up at you in slow recognition. \"The museum,\" you repeat. Conway nods. \"Let's go. Now.\"\n\n\nYou quickly collapse the tent, while Conway packs various weapons into his duffel bag. \"We aren't gonna have room for everything,\" he says. \"It's either the guns, or the food. I can fit some of both, but we need to make our choice quick.\"\n\n\nMeanwhile, the person on the other end of the walkie talkie gives out more advice. \n\n\nStreets are crowdetchcchhh........be careful.....the dead aren't gchhhhhhhhh.......hundreds of them...in the streets........come quick.....we need to leave soon...\n\n\nYou can make out gunshots in the background. You can hear the same gunshots echoing through the city. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Mostly guns", "result": "\"Pack more guns,\" you say. \"We'll need them for the dead.\" Conway nods. You disassemble a large gun with Conway's instruction. After the duffel bag is full of guns, you're ready to leave. \"Come on,\" he says. \"Through the backstreets.\"\n\n\nYou can immediately tell what the others were talking about. Where the streets used to be empty (of zombies, not of cars), there are now vast hordes. They aren't moving in any direction, or at all for that matter. They just bump into each other and walk in circles. You and Conway elect to stay off the roads, and slip between buildings.\n\n\nMeanwhile, Conway keeps a conversation going with the other soldier. Through garbled radio speech, you hear him tell you what's going on. The dead are mostly avoiding the museum, which is why that's their pick-up spot.\n\n\nYou're sneaking past a rogue group of zed when the radio suddenly emits a loud burst of static. The group slowly turns their heads, and they growl at a potential food source. \"Oh, please no,\" Conway whispers. The dead slowly hobble over to where you're advancing. You don't know whether to keep sneaking or lash out, but Conway makes that decision for you. Whipping out his knife, he takes the top half the the closest zombie's skull off with one sweep.\n\n\nYou draw your knife, and take care of a few of the others. After the horde is cleared, Conway switches off the walkie talkie. \"Not gonna go through that again.\"\n\n\nYou slowly progress through the city amongst the waves of walkers. Eventually, the museum is in sight. You're surprised to see an actual helicopter guarded by a handful of soldiers. Conway switches the walkie talkie back on.\n\n\n\"We can see you, over.\"\n\n\nTchhhhhh....okay, that's good......These hordes are getting worse....no way you're gonna make it through here.....we can provide covering fire......run for it......\n\n\nYou look at Conway, and nod. The soldiers reveal several guns, and start firing on the group of zombies. Taking the chance, you follow Conway through the gunfire. A few zombies attempt to follow you, but you're moving too fast for them. When you get past the hordes, the soldiers wave to you and open the helicopter doors. \"GET IN!\"\n\n\nYou climb into the helicopter after Conway, with a sea of rotting flesh at your heels. You slam the door shut, and hear the helicopter blades whir to life. \"Come on! Let's get this bird off the ground!\" shouts one of the soldiers. The helicopter slowly lifts off the ground, with a few zombies holding on for dear life to the bottom. They slip free once you're airborne.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Airborne", "result": "The sky view of the city is quite depressing. The streets are full of cars and zombies, buildings sit demolished and broken, and you can see a few places that you recognize from before all this. It hurts to see them invaded by corpses.\n\n\nIn the helicopter, you are accompanied by three men (not including Conway). Roger seems to be the only one ordering people around, so you assume he's in charge. Ozzy, the pilot of the helicopter, silently minds his own business. The third soldier, Matthias, isn't dressed in a soldier's uniform. What he's wearing could only be classified as a 'makeshift doctor's outfit'. You wonder if he was involved with helping injured civilians.\n\n\n\"Where exactly are we aiming to land?\" asks Conway. \"There's another outpost just a bit north, with more gas stores,\" answers Matthias. \"That is, assuming we'll be the first to arrive. Communication's been lost for awhile, so it's just kind of a mad rush for survival at this point.\" \n\n\n\"And we have the ultimate goal of getting back to Washington, correct?\" you ask. Roger nods. \"It kinda depends on what mindset you have. Some have the 'save as many as you can, carry out our original orders' mindset. I personally follow the 'let's stay alive' mindset. Provided we make it back to Washington on two legs, we should be fine.\"\n\n\nYou stare out the window some more, watching the rivers of death move through the city.", "action_results": [{"action": "The landing", "result": "You've always kind of wondered what riding in a helicopter would be like. Now you know: boring, with a slight touch of fear of heights.\n\n\nFinally, Ozzy makes a short announcement. \"We're nearing the landing spot.\" Thank goodness. Suddenly, something starts beeping on the control board. \"What's that?\" asks Roger.\n\n\n\"We don't have enough to make it there,\" Ozzy says, with slight fear in his voice. \"At this rate, we'll have to walk the last few miles to get to the gas stores, and then take them back on foo-\"\n\n\nOzzy is interrupted by several metallic noises, like someone is dumping marbles onto the helicopter. \"What in the..\" says Roger. You look out the window, and are shocked to see a group of people firing at the helicopter.\n\n\n\"Making an emergency landing,\" says Ozzy. \"Brace yourselves.\" Roger stares out the window in disbelief. \"Why the hell are they shooting at us?\"\n\n\nTo your surprise, the shooters break into a run and follow the helicopter on its course downward. \"We're going to meet them when we land,\" you say. Matthias and Roger are already arming themselves. \"Well then,\" says Roger. \"Let's meet 'em.\"\n\n\nWhen the helicopter plunks down, and the blades whir to a stop, the shooters are ready at the doors. A gravelly voice commands you to come out, unarmed.\n\n\n\"That'll be the day,\" says Roger. \"We aren't doing anything of the sort. Actually, you're the ones who should be running. I'll give you five seconds. Five...\"\n\n\nFive is plenty for them. The shooters open fire, damaging the helicopter's window and hull. The soldiers quickly return fire, but the battle's pretty one-sided. The shooters definitely have the numbers, and the better guns.\n\n\n\"What do you want from us?\" asks Roger. This is the first time you're getting a good look at the shooters. They look horrible, dressed in filthy clothing, with generally ugly faces. Not a single one is clean-shaven or looks like they've had a haircut even once. \n\n\n\"We want your 'copter,\" grunts one of the shooters. \"We can't allow that,\" says Roger. \"We're headed back to Washington. You should come, there are showers, and fresh food, and-\"\n\n\n\"NO!\" the shooter angrily kicks a rock. \"We want the helicopter! And food! And books! And all of it! And guns! And snakes! And cell phones!\"\n\n\nThe soldiers look at each other in disbelief. \"These people have lost it,\" whispers Conway. Should you give up what you can, or try to diffuse the situation?\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Give up guns", "result": "\"Okay,\" you say. \"We have extra guns. You can have some of them.\" This seems to pacify the people. You quickly go back into the helicopter and get the duffel bag Conway brought along. You empty it of guns, and offer a good amount (but not too much) of them to the people.\n\n\nYou are kind of shocked when the man walks up to you and takes the first gun, a pistol, out of your hand...in his mouth. He then proceeds to take guns off of you one by one. When he has what he wants, he backs off.\n\n\n\"Ftill wuff hewicoffter,\" he says through the gun in his mouth. \"What?\" The man spits the pistol onto the ground. \"We still want the helicopter.\"\n\n\nMatthias shakes his head. \"This is ridiculous. We should leave.\" Roger shakes his head. \"We can't, they'll gun us down.\"\n\n\n\"Is there any way we can work around this?\" you call to the man. He thinks for a moment. \"Yes. If we can't have the helicopter, we want...follow us.\"\n\n\nThe man promptly turns around and motions for you to follow him.", "action_results": [{"action": "Refuse to follow", "result": "You stay where you are. The other soldiers do the same. When the man sees you standing still, he loses it.\n\n\nHe throws his hands up in the air, and makes sputtering noises. He then proceeds to do some sort of angry dance, flinging his limbs around. The whole time, he's talking in broken English.\n\n\nFinally, he realizes he's in the presence of other people. He turns to you, and points at your stomach, then to your face. \"Follow.\" He follows up the action by raising a gun.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow", "result": "Reluctantly, you follow the man. Roger stops you. \"You sure this is the wisest choice?\"\n\n\nConway chimes in. \"Yeah, these guys seem a little...'on edge'.\" You nod. \"I know this is dumb, but they have the firepower, and outnumber us two to one. We don't have another option.\"\n\n\nSlowly, your group follows the strange folk over to an empty parking lot. A group of dumpsters have been arranged in a defensive wall. Corpses litter the area. You can see piles of trash from discarded food, as well as several empty cans and bottles. Dirty mattresses propped against the dumpsters presumably serve as beds.\n\n\n\"Welcome!\" yells the man. The few people that were waiting at the camp stand up. They stare emotionlessly into your eyes. \"Sit down,\" says the man, gesturing to a spot on the ground. \"Oh,\" you say, \"You want us to...join you?\"\n\n\nUncomfortable, you and your group sit amongst the filthy survivors. \"So, now that you're part of us, you have to pass initiation,\" says the man. You sit up. \"Hold up,\" says Roger. \"We aren't joining you. That was never up for arguing.\" The man sticks out a pouty lip, and walks over to where Roger sits. Roger rises, and meets the man. \n\n\n\"Yes,\" says the man. \"You will be joining us for dinner.\"\n\n\nSuddenly, Roger pulls a gun from his belt and shoots the man in the head, killing him. Horrified, the remaining members of the other group fish around for their guns, and begin to fire aimlessly. You group stands up defensively, and you realize you don't have a weapon of your own. As gunshots ring around you, you hide under a dumpster. The other group quickly loses track of your people. You stay hidden under the dumpster, while the garbage group searches out your people. You see a pair of feet coming over to your dumpster.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Run away", "result": "Without thinking, you climb out form under the dumpster on the opposite side of the unknown enemy. You crawl over to the next dumpster to climb over, when you hear an excited, \"Found one!\" behind you.\n\n\nA bullet rips through your midsection, causing you to yell in pain. You hear a triumphant laugh behind you, and your attacker grabs you by the feet. You are dragged into the middle of the parking lot. The man who brought you here stands over you with a gun.\n\n\n\"This is what happens to people who don't join us for dinner,\" he says, and shoots you in the kneecap, immobilizing you. You yell out again, and receive a shot in the side. Several more bullets go through you, until you're barely alive. As your vision fades, the man's laugh pounds in your eardrum.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay Put", "result": "Despite your fear, you stay put. The pair of feet walks up to you, and you hear the top of the dumpster being opened. Then, it closes, and you hear a dissatisfied, \"Nobody over here.\"\n\n\nThe people struggle to find any of your group, you scattered pretty quickly. As you hide, you make eye contact with Ozzy, who's hidden under an adjacent dumpster. You see fear in his eyes. He's slowly pulling a small gun out of his pocket, and holding eye contact with you.\n\n\n\"Well, well, well. Come out when you're ready, hooligans,\" the man who led you here says. The other group sits down in the middle of the parking lot, and begins to eat. \n\n\nOzzy slowly makes his way out from under the dumpster, out of sight of the others. You do the same. You sit behind the dumpster and think over your next move.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay behind the dumpster", "result": "You stay behind the dumpster, and out of sight. To reveal yourself now would be suicide.\n\n\nAfter waiting for a few minutes, you peek out from behind the dumpster. The other group shows no signs of moving soon. Ozzy has crawled past the dumpsters and in the direction of the helicopter. When he sees you, he waves for you to follow him. You get down on all fours and crawl after him, staying behind the dumpsters.\n\n\nWhen you get far enough away, you see that the others have already escaped. \"Took you long enough,\" says Roger. \"I wanted to make sure it was safe, you say. Roger shrugs.\n\n\n\"Okay,\" Ozzy whispers. \"Let's leave while the Garbage Pail Kids are still having dinner.\" You follow the others back to the helicopter.\n\n\n\"None of their gunfire hit anything too important. We'll make it back, but it won't look pretty,\" Ozzy declares. The others breathe a sigh of relief. \"What about the windows?\" Matthias asks. \"We just won't be able to go as far up in the air, and if we get shot at again, we're toast, but we should be fine,\" Ozzy answers.\n\n\nYou board the helicopter, and start to lift off. During the entire thing, you're afraid the other group will come running back, guns in hand. Fortunately, they never do.\n\n\n\"Okay, as previously stated,\" Ozzy says, \"We'll be a few miles short of our target. Don't get too comfortable.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Gas", "result": "You're on edge the rest of the ride, but nothing else goes wrong.\n\n\n\"What do you reckon happened to those people?\" Roger asks. \"The apocalypse can have a serious effect on some people,\" says Matthias. \"They might've been homeless people, or mental patients, or something like that.\"\n\n\nFinally, Ozzy brings the helicopter to a stop on the ground. \"Here we are,\" he says. Everyone gets out of the helicopter, and starts the trek over to the fuel stores. \"Let's hope there's any left for us,\" mutters Roger.\n\n\nAlong the way, you notice the bodies of zed scattered around. All of them were victim to a gunshot in the head. \"Someone came through here,\" says Conway, \"And they were goin' for it.\" You hope that whoever this was, they weren't searching for fuel. \"Come on,\" says Matthias. \"If there's competition, we have to beat them to the outpost.\"\n\n\nIt doesn't really matter how fast you ran. When you arrive at the outpost, it's obvious nobody has been through here. The area is packed with the dead. \"You've gotta be kidding me,\" says Roger. The fuel stores are visible, but the whole outpost is surrounded by a chain-link fence. There are no visible gates or entry points, but a large hole in one side of the fence explains how the zombies got in. \n\n\n\"Should we run and gun 'em?\" asks Conway. \"That depends,\" you answer, \"...on how much firepower we have.\"\n\n\n\"If it comes down to it, we might have to find another way through this,\" says Roger.", "action_results": [{"action": "Create a distraction", "result": "\"We don't have the guns for this,\" you say.\n\n\n\"I have an idea,\" says Matthias. \"If we could make more holes in the fence, and lure the dead out of the way....we'd have no issue getting what we need.\" \n\n\nConway volunteers to make some noise and distract the hordes. The rest of you split up around the fence. You are given a large knife to cut the fence. \"Okay,\" says Roger. \"We're all clear, correct? Cut through the fence, and as soon as there's enough room for the dead to make it out, you back away. Once we're all clear, I give the whistle, and Conway does his thing.\"\n\n\nYou go to work hacking through the fence. A few zombies take notice, and push up against the fence. \"Stay back,\" you whisper. Clink. The first fence loop breaks open. One of the zombies forces a hand through the hole. You kill it, and keep going. Clink. Clink. Clink.\n\n\nSoon, you have a sizable hole. You step back to see if the zombies can fit. It's a struggle, but eventually one of them forces its way through the hole. You decide you're done, and back up.\n\n\nYou wait a few minutes for Conway, but the gunfire never comes. Roger looks around in bewilderment. \"What's going on? He should've-\"\n\n\nRoger is cut off by the fence collapsing. The pressure of all the corpses shoving up against it caused the supports to snap. The pile of zombies struggle to their feet, and give chase. \"Fall back!\" yells Roger, and the team scatters.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Run", "result": "You blindly scramble through the forest, not thinking enough to follow someone else or even pay attention to what direction you're running in. You point yourself towards the helicopter, since you assume that's where the others are going.\n\n\nYou can easily outrun the horde, that's no problem. Once you're far enough away, your biggest concern becomes finding the others. You scan the forest in search of familiar faces, but find none. In panic, you continue towards the helicopter. The horde of zed has made its way further out, and a few eager corpses have already made it pretty far out.\n\n\nYou hear yelling from a few yards away, and see Roger running in the direction of the helicopter. You run up to follow, and call his name. He looks around, spots you, and waves you over. \n\n\n\"Come on!\" he shouts. \"Back to the helicopter!\" A few moments later, you hear gunshots nearby. The others. \n\n\n\"Should we go back?\" you ask. Roger doesn't answer, he's dead set on making it back to the helicopter. You hesitate, before following him. The zombies have advanced further, and you doubt you'd be able to come back safely if you turned around now.\n\n\nAs you make your way to the helicopter, you see the garbage people, the ones that shot at the helicopter, approaching in the distance. They must have heard the gunfire and realized their prisoners got free.\n\n\n\"Well....crap. This is a problem,\" says Roger, his voice wavering. You look behind you; the zombies haven't caught up to you yet, but if you keep wasting time, they will. You might be able to make it back to the helicopter before interacting with the garbage people to get a gun or something.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look For Your Friends", "result": "You resolve not to let the others die, and turn around.\n\n\n\"What are you doing?\"\" yells Roger, but you pay no attention. You maneuver around the first few zombies, and back into the woods. You call out names while searching for movement among the trees.\n\n\n\"Matthias!\" you yell, scanning the broken fence. \"Conway? Ozzy?\" you don't see anything, except advancing hordes of the dead. Suddenly, gunfire erupts from a few yards away. You see Conway firing at a pack of zombies with the signal gun.\n\n\nConway spots you, and breaks into a run. He's pointing at something behind you, but you're so focused on him that you don't notice the zombie right behind you. You narrowly avoid the monster's jaws, and push it to the ground. By then, Conway has caught up to you. \n\n\n\"Come on,\" you say. \"To the helicopter.\" Both of you take off. On the way, you ask where Ozzy is. \n\n\n\"I think he made it out before I did. He should be at the helicopter right now,\" Conway answers. \"As for Matthias, I don't kn-\" \n\n\nConway suddenly stops as a bullet hits him squarely between the eyes. You freeze with fear, and turn to see the garbage people standing before you. The leader steps out.\n\n\n\"Thought you could run away, huh?\" he taunts, and pops another shell into his shotgun.\n\n\n \n\n\"Here's what we do to runaways around here.\"\n\n\n \n\nBang!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Go for the helicopter, get a gun", "result": "You realize you aren't getting out of this alive without a weapon, and run for the helicopter. The garbage people start to fire back, but that doesn't go to smoothly. Roger follows you into the cockpit, safe from the garbage people.\n\n\nYou scrounge around, and are rewarded with a small handgun with a full clip. Looking at the approaching horde, you realize the garbage people may not even be your biggest threat at the moment.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fire at the dead", "result": "The advancing hordes of zombies are closer and more plentiful, you decide. Plus, the garbage people will have to fight them off as well. You get into a defensive stance with both hands on the gun, and open fire on the horde. The gun's clip has thirteen bullets in it; you manage to kill six zombies before running dry. \n\n\n\"Here,\" says Roger, tapping you on the shoulder. \"Found more of them.\" he gives you another fully loaded clip. \"We had a bag stashed under the seat,\" Roger explains. \"For emergency.\" You ditch the empty clip and reload, before taking another shot.\n\n\nYou bring down twelve walkers this time, and notice that the garbage people are firing at the dead, too. In a moment, they'll fall back, you can get your people, and leave. Except you can't. It slowly dawns on you that the helicopter's still dead on fuel.\n\n\nMeanwhile (and unbeknownst to you), the garbage people realize they're wasting bullets on the zombies, and go to take out the real threat- you. The leader approaches the cockpit, out of your view. He sneaks right up to the door and kills you, without you ever knowing.\n\n\n \n\nIf it's any consolation, none of your group made it out, either.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Fire at the garbage people", "result": "At the moment, the garbage people pose more of a threat to you than anything, you decide. You turn so you can see them clearly.\n\n\nThe leader is approaching the helicopter, so you fire at him first. You were aiming at his chest, but the bullet goes through his arm. It still cripples him, so it's done it's job. The other garbage people quickly catch on, and start firing back.\n\n\nYour gun's clip has thirteen bullets in it; you manage to kill three garbage people before you run dry. For a moment you're worried that you just made things a lot worse, but Roger passes you another fully loaded clip.\n\n\n\"We keep them under the seats,\" he explains. \"For emergencies.\" You ditch the old clip, and keep firing. Luckily, the garbage people's guns are louder than yours, and your gunfire combined with the hordes of the dead cause them to eventually fall back.\n\n\n\"There's one problem solved,\" you say. \"Now we just need to get our group back.\"\n\n\n\"Actually, that problem is also solved,\" says Roger, pointing into the trees. Conway, Ozzy, and Matthias are running through the trees towards the helicopter. They're being followed by a massive horde. You open the doors as wide as they'll go in preparation.\n\n\nWhen the three make it back, you slam the door shut and hide. \"Hopefully, the gunfire from that other group will draw the horde,\" says Matthias. The group sits quietly in the helicopter for a while. Soon, it becomes clear you'll be spending a long time in the helicopter. The dead show no sign of going away, and the growls, while faint, are a bit too close for comfort.", "action_results": [{"action": "Prepare to spend the night in the helicopter", "result": "Thankfully, the seats of the helicopter are soft enough to lay on. As the sun sets, you lay down. The group agrees to taking two-hour shifts to watch for garbage people or zombies, and warn the others. You volunteer for a later spot, so you can get some rest.\n\n\nThe night drags on, safe but very boring. When you wake up for your shift, it's almost light outside. \n\n\n\"Hey!\" you say. \"Why didn't you guys wake me up?\"\n\n\n\"It was my fault,\" says Ozzy. \"I just took the whole night.\"\n\n\n\"You shouldn't have done that,\" exclaims Conway. \"You have to fly this helicopter!\"\n\n\n\"Uh, not any time soon,\" Ozzy says, gesturing out the window. It's true. The dead are meandering outside, not too interested in letting you get your fuel.\n\n\n\"Looks like some action needs to be taken,\" says Matthias. \"So, what's plan B?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep waiting", "result": "You keep sitting in the helicopter, with the hopes that the dead will eventually leave. Your food situation is decent, and you're prepared to spend multiple days here if you need to. \n\n\n\"We're really doing this?\" asks Ozzy. It's not the best plan, but it saves bullets and effort.\n\n\n\"Yeah, we are,\" you answer. Outside, it doesn't seem like your plan is working. The zombies are basically stagnant, not even walking around. They just stand there, like a creepy flash mob. You pray for a gunshot, or a plane, or some noise to draw them away.\n\n\nFinally, Conway gets restless. He gets up, and takes a flare gun from out of his duffel bag. \n\n\n\"Conway, what are you doing?\" asks Matthias. Conway doesn't answer, but goes for the helicopter door. The rest of the group moves to stop him.\n\n\n\"Get off!\" Conway yells. \"I'm not gonna sit and wait any longer! Y'all want a distraction? I'll give you one!\" Conway yanks open the door, attracting the attention of a few zed. Conway fires a flare over the field, and then slams the door shut. The good news is the flare lands on the opposite side of the field, and most of the horde clumps around it. The bad news is that the door slam attracted a few stragglers over to you. The group immediately jumps up and readies their weapons. \n\n\n\"I'm gonna open the door and let a few in,\" Matthias says, \"Then we kill 'em. Let a few in, kill 'em, let, kill, repeat until they're gone. Ready?\" The first few step forward, and are eliminated quickly. Nobody's using guns because the noise would damage hearing, so there's just as much of a threat posed by the others' knives as the zombies do.\n\n\nOnce the dead are clear, you're open to grab the fuel. You waste no time getting over to the tanks, where the area is now empty of the dead. \n\n\n\"Lucky us,\" Conway remarks as your team fills gas canisters up. You lug them back over to the helicopter, and begin to fill up the tank. Ozzy goes in to watch the fuel gauge, while Matthias keeps watch of the horde. Three painful and long trips later, the tank is full.\n\n\n\"Come on,\" Matthias says, \"They're getting restless. Load up!\" Everyone piles into the helicopter, and Ozzy starts the blades. The horde, noticing the new potential for food, turns over to you. By the time they get anywhere near you, you're up again. \n\n\n\"Take that, growlers!\" Ozzy shouts over the engine.", "action_results": [{"action": "Airborne (Again)", "result": "Once in the air, Roger addresses Conway.\n\n\n\"That little stunt, ripping open the helicopter door like that? Not gonna fly with me,\" Roger says. Conway stands up.\n\n\n\"Excuse me, but did anybody get so much as a scratch on them? My little 'stunt' got us to safety,\" Conway retorts.\n\n\n\"You're lucky that's the way things went. Next time, it might turn out different.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah,, if someone who didn't know what they were doing tried it! I've had several years of experience on the battlefield.\"\n\n\n\"CONWAY MATTHEWS, LET ME REMIND YOU THAT YOU ARE TAKING THAT TONE WITH FIRST SERGEANT ROGER MILLS! I WILL NOT ALLOW YOU TO ENDANGER THE LIVES OF MULTIPLE SOLDIERS AND A CIVILIAN! DESIST AT ONCE!\"\n\n\nBoth soldiers rise and stare each other coldly in the eyes.\n\n\n\"Guys? Right when we're flying over hordes of man-eating monsters is not the best time to get physical,\" Ozzy warns from the front.\n\n\n\"Sit down, and obey my word,\" Roger hisses. Conway begrudgingly takes a seat, and holds a stare with Roger. Matthias makes eye contact with you, and you see a slight twinge of fear in his eyes. He's been with Roger for a while, so if he's worried, you're worried. Roger finally sits down next to you, as far away from Conway as he can get.\n\n\n\"We won't make it to Washington,\" Ozzy suddenly says. This gets the attention of everyone immediately. \"We don't have the fuel. We'll get close, but we don't have enough, even with the extra fuel.\"\n\n\nEveryone looks around at each other. \n\n\n\"So we need to find another reserve,\" Roger says. Matthias pulls out a pocket map, and a pen. \"Where will we run out of fuel?\"\n\n\n\"I think about here,\" Roger says, pointing to a spot on the map. It's in Oregon, not far from the border. \"There aren't any fuel reserves there, far as I know,\" Roger continues.\n\n\n\"Any chance we could get the fuel from cars?\" you offer.\n\n\nRoger shakes his head. \"This thing won't take car fuel, of any kind,\" he says. \"Unless somebody just happens to have filled their tank with jet fuel.\" \n\n\n\"We'll figure something out,\" Matthias says. The subject is dropped. You just don't want to think about what will happen if you can't find any fuel.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "For the next few hours, the ride is uneventful Everyone is minding their own business, and the cabin is silent, except for the occasional noise from Ozzy, at the controls.\n\n\nBefore you know it, you're drifting off, and then it's a new day. You look out the window. The terrain has changed. You're no longer above a city of bodies, but empty roads, with only a few zombies lurking around. You're getting closer to Oregon, which means closer to the fuel issue. You don't want to think about when that time comes. Luckily, Roger takes your mind off it.\n\n\n\"Breakfast time,\" he says, fishing around for a backpack. The team searches out cans to make a meal out of, and that's when it becomes apparent that you're very low on food. Three cans left to split between five people, for another two days, and that's assuming the fuel thing goes smoothly, which you can guess it won't.\n\n\n\"We're gonna have to touch ground again,\" says Matthias. Nobody wants to admit it, but yes, you'll have to be at the same level as the dead once more. \"Lower us down,\" Matthias says to Ozzy. \"We need to run some errands.\"\n\n\nFood is definitely easier to come across than helicopter fuel, but you're still worried. There's been plenty of time for every store and market to be emptied of all its goods. When the helicopter sets down and the engine dies down, you scan for a sign of food. The only promise is a road sign telling you fast food places nearby, and there isn't much opportunity there.\n\n\n\"Bingo,\" Conway suddenly says. He's spotted a farmhouse through the trees. \"That's where we'll find what we're looking for.\" The group slowly goes to follow, but Roger stops.\n\n\n\"Wait. We need someone to stand at the helicopter and guard it,\" he says. \n\n\n\"I can do it,\" says Matthias. \"Unless, anyone else would rather take the spot.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Volunteer to watch the helicopter while the others leave", "result": "\"I'll do it,\" you say. Matthias nods. The other soldiers go over a plan for the farmhouse, while you take a defensive position behind the helicopter door. You figure that it's extremely unlikely you'll see anybody, you still want to remain vigilant. You sit up straight and try your hardest to stay awake.\n\n\nThe others have been gone for a worryingly long amount of time, and you decide to go check on them. You get out of your seat, and go look at the farmhouse. From where you are, you can't see any fighting or danger, and you haven't heard any gunshots. You assume they're just doing a thorough search, and cross your fingers for some fresh bread.\n\n\nAs you turn to get back in the helicopter, you are met with a bow and arrow pointed at your face. Its user is a man with long blonde hair that covers his eyes. \n\n\n\"Water,\" he says, in a parched voice. \"Give it to me.\" Shaking, you slowly nod. You climb into the helicopter, and fumble around for the pack with the bottled water in it. You find the pack, but then you remember your gun.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot him", "result": "As quick as you can, you turn to shoot the attacker. Your bullet goes over his shoulder. He shouts, and releases an arrow into your chest. You cry out, and the man yanks the water pack from your hands.\n\n\n\"See ya,\" he says, and slams the helicopter door shut. He gives a little wave before leaving.\n\n\nYou struggle to get the arrow free from your skin. That arrow had a lot of power behind it, and you end up staining the seats of the helicopter with your blood, and doing all kinds of irreversible damage to your chest. When the soldiers come back, you're barely alive. Your final moments are of being shaken back and forth by Conway, who is trying to get you to sit up.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Give him the water", "result": "Not wanting to risk conflict, you hand the bag over to the man. He takes it, and slings it over his shoulder.\n\n\n\"Thanks. Now get out,\" he commands. You oblige. \"I see your stuff,\" the man says from behind you, the arrow in his bow brushing against your back. \"I see those guns. You got any food back there? I'm hungry.\"\n\n\nYou can't think of anything to do, so you try to stall. \"Who are you?\"\n\n\n\"Name's Cedar. What's it to you?\"\n\n\n\"Why are you stealing from me?\" you ask, careful not to say 'us'. It's better if he thinks you're alone.\n\n\n\"I had people. They ditched me. Now I got nothing but this bow, and I need basic stuff to live. Food, Water. I'm gonna get it fro-\"\n\n\nCedar suddenly takes a bullet to the forehead, and slumps to the ground. Conway comes running up from the trees. \n\n\n\"Did he hurt you?\" Conway asks. You're surprised to see that he cares so much about you. You shake your head, and go to retrieve the water pack. Matthias and Ozzy have large cases of seed and preserved food in their hands.\n\n\n\"Okay, one more hurdle,\" Ozzy says. \"We get gas in Oregon, and we're home free.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "The trip continues, and you quickly lose track of time. It's daytime, so you know you shouldn't be sleeping, but you can't see where the sun is out the windows from where you are. Of course, time doesn't really hold much value anymore. You can't be late to Washington.\n\n\nRoger and Conway still refuse to speak to each other. Each just acts like the other isn't there. Whenever one speaks, the other is silent, and they make great effort to avoid eye contact. The others soldiers have caught wind of this, but nobody seems to be making an effort to help the situation. You decide to leave it alone for now.\n\n\n\"Good news! We're crossing the California-Oregon border.....now!\" Ozzy shouts from the cabin. The team rejoices, but you're just worried. The small pocket of fear in your gut grows. \"We don't have much fuel left. I'm probably going to touch down soon,\" he finishes.\n\n\nYou land on the outskirts of a small town. \"There weren't any fuel-holding outposts, as Roger said, but there is an outpost here, so it's a possibility that there will be fuel here, in one form or another,\" Ozzy declares. \"Who's guarding the helicopter this time?\"\n\n\nConway volunteers, most likely to get away from Roger. Nobody in the group objects, so you don't either. The less time those two spend together, the better. Conway takes a seat in the cabin, while the rest of the group sets out for the town.\n\n\n\"There's not much hope that this place is still inhabited,\" Roger says on the way. \"Except maybe by the dead. As long as we're careful, there shouldn't be much of an issue.\" Roger points out a large metal wall in the distance. It's made up of three metal fences, put one after the other. You can see a few places where the fence broke, and entire panels are missing.\n\n\nYou approach the outpost with caution, but stop when you realize the whole thing is empty. When you step into the compound through a hole in the fence, the ground is littered with zombies, all of them shot in the head.\n\n\n\"What?\" exclaims Matthias when he sees. \"How could this have happened? Unless...\"\n\n\n\"This wasn't the dead,\" Roger finishes. \"Somebody did this. Somebody took down this outpost. We had three tanks, and a heavy machine gun stationed at this outpost, and somebody wiped it clean.\" You stare in disbelief. If there's a threat that's stronger than the U.S. military's stores, that's all the more reason to get to Washington immediately.\n\n\nThe group splits up to search the most likely areas where fuel would be, if there was a landed helicopter or a truck containing jet fuel around. But, of course, the attackers didn't leave so much as a single can of food, much less a tank of jet fuel.\n\n\n\"We're gonna have to look elsewhere,\" Matthias declares.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "elsewhere", "result": "\"The only other place I think can think of that would hold the fuel we need is an airport or something,\" Matthias says. \"And that wouldn't even work.\"\n\n\nYou try to think of places you've seen a helicopter. News helicopters? No, the probability of there still being fuel in them is too low. There are no more outposts nearby, so military aid is useless. The only thing left you can think of is recreational helicopters, but the thought of a 'posh' country club in a town this small is, once again, very unlikely.\n\n\n\"We don't have to take the helicopter, do we?\" you suggest. \"We could leave it here, and take something easier to transport, like a bus or a car.\" The team seems to consider the thought.\n\n\n\"Helicopter fuel is only going to get harder and harder to find,\" Matthias points out. Finally, Roger agrees.\n\n\nYou find several cars abandoned on the side of the road, and take the two in the best condition for your group. Having two cars is better for your group because it's less cramped, and you can sit Roger and Conway in opposite vehicles. You siphon the gas from the remaining cars, and drive back.\n\n\nConway is less than pleased with the group's decision. \"We need the helicopter!\" he insists. \"We skip over so much crap that way!\"\n\n\nRoger, for the first time since the incident, faces Conway sternly. \"We're taking the cars,\" he says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "Moving everything from the helicopter to the cars is not an easy task. It takes up most of what's left of the day, and your shoulder is aching when you're done. After the helicopter is empty, everyone splits into the cars. Roger puts a 'Come to Washington or Die' message on the helicopter door. \"Just in case,\" he explains.\n\n\nOregon is surprisingly zombie-free, after what you saw in California. The streets are empty. Not full of dead corpses or defeated zombies, but completely empty. It's strange. \n\n\n\"Odd that there are no walkers here,\" Ozzy says, echoing your thoughts. \"Think there's a reason for it?\"\n\n\n\"Maybe we cleared them all out,\" Roger suggests. \"It would make sense for the guards to want to keep the dead as far from sanctuary as possible.\" You decide it's still out of the ordinary for there to be absolutely no zombies around.\n\n\n\"Maybe it's because there's no food?\" you suggest. \"I mean, we've known them to follow noises and the smell of food, so maybe Oregon ran out.\" The team seems to be thinking over this possibility, when all your theories are disproven.\n\n\n\"Holy hell,\" Roger whispers. You're looking out over the city of Portland, Oregon- or, more accurately, what's left of it. Every single zombie that was missing from Oregon as packed tightly into the streets of Portland. They have no room to move, and a chorus of hungry growls emanates over the city.\n\n\n\"No way we're getting through that,\" says Roger. \"We should've kept the helicopter.\" \n\n\nYour team gets out of the car. Conway and Matthias get out of the other car. You group up and look out over the maze of rotting flesh that stands between you and salvation.\n\n\n\"Think we could sneak through it?\" suggests Matthias. \"If we cover ourselves in zombie goop, we might be able to pass by.\"\n\n\n\"I say we go in guns ablaze,\" Conway says.\n\n\n\"Are you insane?\" Roger shoots back. \"Do I need to remind you of the warning I gave you before? You want to fire a gun in that?\" Roger points to the zombie-filled streets. \"If you sneeze hard enough, you'll be dead. Firing a single shot would be simultaneously slitting all of our throats.\"\n\n\nConway doesn't respond, but you can tell he isn't going to heed Roger's words. \"Let's go with Matthias' plan, then.\"\n\n\nEasier said than done. Extracting one zombie from the masses proves to be scary and difficult. But, Ozzy manages to pull it off. He comes back with a bloody corpse slung over his shoulder. \"Let's cut this sucker open,\" he says, \"...and have a bath.\"\n\n\nThe fumes are dizzying. Days of rotting organs and waste come billowing out of the cadaver. What's worse is that you're tossing those very guts over your shoulder, on your back, and on your front. After a few minutes, you'd pass for some pretty smelly zombies. You really wish you hadn't ditched the helicopter.\n\n\nYou approach the city slowly, your group forming a tight pack. To get separated would mean death. You slowly walk through the crowd, scared to even brush past a zombie. One by one, the dead look at you, decide you aren't good to eat, and stumble off in another direction. More often than you'd like, a zombie is idly standing in your way, meaning you have to try to slip past it with as little contact as possible.\n\n\nEventually, you realize you're passing through the city center. You notice a lot of uniformed soldiers among the gobs of zombies. But, the plan is working. You can tell you're going ot make it. Not a single zombie even bothers to look at you anymore. You're just another mindless walker. Everything seems to be going on course- until Conway spots a tank in the middle of the road, and starts to go for it.\n\n\n\"No!\" Roger hisses as quietly as he can. A few nearby zombies stare curiously at him for a moment. \"Conway, stop! You are ruining the plan! Get back here!\" But, of course, Conway isn't listening.\n\n\n\"The plan doesn't matter anymore,\" Conway whispers back. \"If I get control of that tank, we could clear out a path. There'd be no trouble.\" He grows closer and closer to the tank, with his teammates behind him, begging him to stop and turn around. Finally, he reaches the tank, and struggles to open the hatch at the top.\n\n\nYou notice Roger pulling his silencer gun out of his belt. \"No,\" you say, stopping him. \"He isn't worth the bullet, or the attention it'll draw.\"\n\n\n\"You sure about that?\" Roger asks back. \n\n\nYou're too late to do anything, anyway. Conway rips open the hatch to reveal a zombie that was waiting inside. Surprised, he takes a step back, and slips off the tank. He lets out a bloodcurdling scream as he cradles a bite on his arm. The scream causes the idle moaning of the zombies to stop. Slowly, unanimously, the zombies all turn their heads towards a screaming Conway, and the rest of your group. They seem to have caught on to the fact that you aren't zombies.\n\n\nAs the space closes in around you, and your innards are divided up between six different sets of hands, you kind of wish you had let Roger shoot Conway.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Go with the group to raid the farmhouse", "result": "You let Matthias take over guard duty. Whatever you can do to speed things up, you will. Roger brings the rest of the group closer to the farmhouse.\n\n\n\"There's a strong possibility that someone's still alive in there, and they're surrounded by tall grass. Here's what we'll do. We split up, and approach the house from all sides. If you see someone in the window, fire at them. If you here gunshots from someone else, rush the house. The first person to get in the house needs to clear the ground floor, and we'll move from there. Clear?\"\n\n\nEveryone nods, and the plan commences. You get set on a straight path to the front door of the farmhouse, while the others spread out. The entire walk over, you listen intently for gunshots, or any sign of disturbance. It never comes, and suddenly you're at the front door. Remembering your instructions, you draw your gun and search the ground floor.\n\n\nAs it turns out, the house is abandoned. Searching the place top to bottom yields no humans. The fate of the owner is revealed when you check the basement: a lone corpse, hanging from a noose.\n\n\n\"He had such a good setup,\" comments Roger. \"Wonder why he did it.\" But, of course, there's no time to wonder. Everyone spreads out to search the house again, this time for food. You continue in the basement. \n\n\nThe basement is actually quite empty, making you wonder if someone else cleaned the place out first. Just as you are about to give up, you see a message scrawled on a drywall. It looks like it could have been written with blood.\n\n\nTHEY TOOK EVERYTHING. I'M SORRY. IT'S NOT WORTH IT ANYMORE. THE WORLD IS ENDING, AND NOBODY WILL BE SAVED. BETTER TO DIE WITH DIGNITY THAN BE TORN APART BY THE ROTTERS.\n\n\nYou disagree, but respect the man's choice, and leave the basement. When you come back up, you see that the others were luckier.\n\n\nOn your way back, you look over the findings: several small wooden crates packed with cans, and some nonperishables. Not bad, and it's more than you'll need for five for a day.\n\n\n\"Any trouble?\" Roger asks Matthias as you load the food up. \"Yes, actually,\" Matthias responds. \"One guy. But, he wasn't a problem. I'm fine.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Get armed, and go outside to get the fuel", "result": "\"We shouldn't wait anymore,\" you say. \"Let's go out, and get the fuel.\" The others are hesitant, but Conway takes your side immediately. \n\n\n\"We know them,\" Conway says. \"We know how they act, how they think. They won't move anywhere until they have reason to, and that could be days. We don't have the capacity to sit and burn off our food, and then try to fly back. Let's go, and let's go now.\"\n\n\nAfter everyone has armed themselves, Conway opens the door. The first few zombies turn in your direction, but are quickly subdued by Roger. Roger's gun has a silencer, so he's the go-to shooter for the moment.\n\n\n\"The fuel is over there,\" Roger whispers, gesturing with his gun. \"If we stay tight to the tree line, we might be able to sneak past them.\" The team nods, and rushes to follow the orders. The dead seem to dislike the closed-in trees, and have gravitated over to the fields. By staying among the trees, you have no issues. Almost.\n\n\nAs you travel, one curious zombie notices you, and starts to stir. Roger hesitates, and decides not to shoot. \n\n\n\"Just keep going,\" he whispers. As you walk, the zombie steps in close.\n\n\n\"What the hell are you doing?\" demands Conway. \"Shoot it!\" \n\n\nRoger shakes his head. \"Not worth the bullet,\" he explains, but Conway won't hear it. He draws his gun, without a silencer, and points it at the zombie. You grab him.\n\n\n\"No! That's worse!\" you whisper-yell. \"You'll attract the whole field, and more!\" Conway, of course, doesn't listen. He fires, and the zombie drops to the ground. Behind it, several heads slowly turn towards you, and you hear a low growl.\n\n\n\"Run,\" Roger says, not bothering to whisper. The team breaks into a panic, with people struggling to get past each other. Without the cover of silence, a few start to shoot at the zombies. It almost seems like you'll be able to keep them at bay.\n\n\n\"Come on!\" Ozzy says. He leads the group in the direction of the fuel tanks. Unfortunately, a considerable portion of the zombies chose to stay back, and inhabit the empty lot. Now, you're sandwiched between two hordes, and you hear the familiar clicking of empty guns.\n\n\n\"I'm out,\" says Conway, furiously pumping the trigger. \n\n\n\"Same,\" Roger says in dismay. \"Thanks a million, Conway.\"\n\n\nThe dead close in, and you look for a way out, a weak spot, a break in the horde, anything. But you don't see it. You go to grab for your knife, but the horde is too close. A set of jaws rips into your neck from behind.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Help Ozzy attack the group", "result": "You look at Ozzy, and point to the other group. He holds up his gun and nods. \n\n\nYou position yourself behind a dumpster, right next to the leader of the other group. You'll grab him and hold him hostage, so that the others will let you go. You wait until the right moment...\n\n\nThe man decides he needs to get up, and you strike. As soon as he's on his feet, he's on the ground again, with you holding him down. \"Nobody move!\" You yell.\n\n\nSadly, while your plan would have worked, Ozzy wasn't on the same page as you. He fires his gun in an attempt to hit the leader, but instead hits you in the chest, killing you.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Try to talk to them", "result": "\"Hey,\" you say. \"Listen. We can't afford to give anything up. Is there a possibility that we could work around this?\"\n\n\nThe man holds up his finger, and draws something in the air. Then, he looks at you expectantly. When you don't know how to respond, the man becomes angry. He furiously draws some sort of picture in the air with his finger over and over again.\n\n\n\"What? What is it? What do you want?\" you ask. The man finally gets fed up with your incompetence. \"WAAATTTTEEERRR!!!!\"\n\n\n\"We can't spare, um, any water at the moment,\" you say, almost afraid that he'll flip his lid. Instead, the man gets quiet. \"Follow,\" he finally says, and begins to walk away.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Mix of food and guns", "result": "\"Pack both,\" you say. 'We'll need some of both.\" Conway nods, and begins packing. You take half the food and half the guns, burying the rest so no one else can get to it. After the duffel bag is full, you move into the streets.\n\n\nYou can immediately tell what the others were talking about. Where the streets used to be empty (of zombies, not of cars), there are now vast hordes. They aren't moving in any direction, or at all for that matter. They just bump into each other and walk in circles. You and Conway elect to stay off the roads, and slip between buildings.\n\n\nMeanwhile, Conway keeps a conversation going with the other soldier. Through garbled radio speech, you hear him tell you what's going on. The dead are mostly avoiding the museum, which is why that's their pick-up spot.\n\n\nYou're sneaking past a rogue group of zed when the radio suddenly emits a loud burst of static. The group slowly turns their heads, and they growl at a potential food source. \"Oh, please no,\" Conway whispers. The dead slowly hobble over to where you're advancing. You don't know whether to keep sneaking or lash out, but Conway makes that decision for you. Whipping out his knife, he takes the top half the the closest zombie's skull off with one sweep.\n\n\nYou draw your knife, and take care of a few of the others. After the horde is cleared, Conway switches off the walkie talkie. \"Not gonna go through that again.\"\n\n\nYou slowly progress through the city amongst the waves of walkers. Eventually, the museum is in sight. You're surprised to see an actual helicopter guarded by a handful of soldiers. Conway switches the walkie talkie back on.\n\n\n\"We can see you, over.\"\n\n\nTchhhhhh....okay, that's good......These hordes are getting worse....no way you're gonna make it through here.....we can provide covering fire......run for it......\n\n\nYou look at Conway, and nod. The soldiers reveal several guns, and start firing on the group of zombies. Taking the chance, you follow Conway through the gunfire. A few zombies attempt to follow you, but you're moving too fast for them. When you get past the hordes, the soldiers wave to you and open the helicopter doors. \"GET IN!\"\n\n\nYou climb into the helicopter after Conway, with a sea of rotting flesh at your heels. You slam the door shut, and hear the helicopter blades whir to life. \"Come on! Let's get this bird off the ground!\" shouts one of the soldiers. The helicopter slowly lifts off the ground, with a few zombies holding on for dear life to the bottom. They slip free once you're airborne.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Mostly food", "result": "\"Pack more food,\" you say. \"Food is more important than guns.\" Conway nods. You empty the food stash into the duffel bag. \"Come on,\" Conway says once the bag is full. \"Through the backstreets.\"\n\n\nYou can immediately tell what the others were talking about. Where the streets used to be empty (of zombies, not of cars), there are now vast hordes. They aren't moving in any direction, or at all for that matter. They just bump into each other and walk in circles. You and Conway elect to stay off the roads, and slip between buildings.\n\n\nMeanwhile, Conway keeps a conversation going with the other soldier. Through garbled radio speech, you hear him tell you what's going on. The dead are mostly avoiding the museum, which is why that's their pick-up spot.\n\n\nYou're sneaking past a rogue group of zed when the radio suddenly emits a loud burst of static. The group slowly turns their heads, and they growl at a potential food source. \"Oh, please no,\" Conway whispers. The dead slowly hobble over to where you're advancing. You don't know whether to keep sneaking or lash out, but Conway makes that decision for you. Whipping out his knife, he takes the top half the the closest zombie's skull off with one sweep.\n\n\nYou draw your knife, and take care of a few of the others. After the horde is cleared, Conway switches off the walkie talkie. \"Not gonna go through that again.\"\n\n\nYou slowly progress through the city amongst the waves of walkers. Eventually, the museum is in sight. You're surprised to see an actual helicopter guarded by a handful of soldiers. Conway switches the walkie talkie back on.\n\n\n\"We can see you, over.\"\n\n\nTchhhhhh....okay, that's good......These hordes are getting worse....no way you're gonna make it through here.....we can provide covering fire......run for it......\n\n\nYou look at Conway, and nod. The soldiers reveal several guns, and start firing on the group of zombies. Taking the chance, you follow Conway through the gunfire. A few zombies attempt to follow you, but you're moving too fast for them. When you get past the hordes, the soldiers wave to you and open the helicopter doors. \"GET IN!\"\n\n\nYou climb into the helicopter after Conway, with a sea of rotting flesh at your heels. You slam the door shut, and hear the helicopter blades whir to life. \"Come on! Let's get this bird off the ground!\" shouts one of the soldiers. The helicopter slowly lifts off the ground, with a few zombies holding on for dear life to the bottom. They slip free once you're airborne.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}, null]}, null]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}, null, null]}]}, null]}]}, null]}, null, null]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story54.json b/data/scraper/stories/story54.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fde9755 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story54.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=50303", "context": "", "first_story_block": "A world on the cusp of disaster. Two sides on the verge of destroying each other, but there is hope. In the form of a hero. Now this will hero..., will they be able to rise into the mantle of hero? ", "action_results": [{"action": "Yes", "result": "As the son of your father, the Grand Priest of the Holy Kingdom, you've always had a lot on your plate. The moment you could speak, your father put you in lessons of every type. At first they were purely academic, only ranging from basic history to simple math, but as time progressed your lessons became more difficult. You were required to memorize religious texts of every manner, and you were even taught some philosophy. This routine was all there was to your life at twelve years of age. You were content with it too, until two major things happened. \n\n\nA breeze shakes the trees around you and cools your face. Your take a moment and close your eyes allowing the feeling to move across your entire body. It relaxes you, and coupled with the silence of the forest you imagine this is what Paradise must feel like. You open your eyes and are momentarily blinded by the sun. It'd been like this every day this season. Blistering hot, but with a breeze that you always make sure to thank the Creator for. Without it your training would be nearly unbearable. \n\n\nOf course, you'd much rather have to deal with your Knight training every day than have to do extra academic lessons. Maybe if you hadn't started the training to become a knight of the Holy Order you wouldn't hate lessons so much. Then again, you also wouldn't know the bliss of resting after a good workout. Besides, even if you hadn't begun your training there was always the second thing. \n\n\nEven as the thought enters the mind, the figure appears before you. Platinum blonde hair frame an angelic face that seems to hold your attention much longer than normal. You bring your eyes to her emerald ones for a moment then look away. \n\n\u201cHey Erron. Have you been waiting long?\u201d Her voice is rich with authority and familiarity,\n\n\nYou turn back at the sound of your name to see a wide smile atop her face. \u201cYes I have. If you kept me waiting much longer, then some bird might've started using me for a nest.\u201d You allow yourself a small smile when she rolls her eyes. \n\n\n\u201cAre you ready for this, Alessandra?\u201d Her name rolls off your tongue with ease. \u201cExcuse me. I meant your Majesty.\u201d You bow slightly, and her smile stays for a few more moments before disappearing from her face entirely. It's replaced with an expression of apprehension. \n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m nervous. I don't want him to keep us from going back there.\u201d \n\n\nShe runs her fingers through her hair. The young princess was authoritative, but often times, you find her to lack a lot of confidence. Or maybe that was just with you. \n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s fine. He's never been mean to us before. Remember? The only thing he asked us not to do was to bring anyone else when we visit him.\u201d You cast your thoughts back to your memories of the man\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Background: The World", "result": "The continent of Dellandia is a large one. It is famous for the wars and constant strife that inhabits its lands. Well, was famous for. \n\n\nYou cast you mind and thoughts back to your history lessons. You were born in the new era of Dellandia where the entire continent has finally been united under the rule of the current royal family. The Dellandins were just figureheads a short hundred years ago, but with the support of the Holy Kingdom they were finally able to latch onto some real power. As time passed the Dellandins grew more and more powerful until they were able to start conquering the lands of Dellandia. They stretched themselves too thin, and were about to collapse, but yet again the Holy Kingdom supported them. This pattern continued until the Holy Kingdom itself rose to power in a way that wasn\u2019t just religious. Support of the people grew until the Grand Priest of that time revived the lost order of knights.\n\n\nThe Grand Priest declared this order to be a Holy Order of Knights created under the direction of their God. The Creator. However, the Grand Priest didn\u2019t do all that his people wanted him to do. Instead of going to war with the Dellandins, the Grand Priest entered into an uneasy alliance with them. Although wary of the Holy Order\u2019s knights, the Dellandins accepted and together they managed to bring the continent of Dellandia to their knees. \n\n\nAfter several heated arguments, it was decided that the Holy Kingdom (and their religion) were to be just that. A religion. No standing armies, but against their better judgement, they allowed for the Holy Order to exist. It was a heavily regulated existence with a limit on how many people could be trained as well as where the Holy Order could be \u201cstationed.\u201d \n\n\nThat is the situation to this day with only a few differences. The Dellandins are constantly pushing for more and more regulations on not just the Holy Order of Knights, but the Holy Kingdom itself. The King and the Grand Priest spend much of their time arguing, and recently you notice that tensions are getting much more strained. You just hope it won\u2019t ruin your relationship with Alessandra.\n\n\nYou don\u2019t really worry much about it though. You trust your father after all.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "The Man", "result": "You think about the first time you saw the guy. Two years ago, at age ten, you were fearing for your life. \n\n\nYou and Alessandra had only met minutes before at yours and her parents' insistence. They allowed you to both go into the royal forest on the castle grounds. It was a large preserve with plenty of animals to hunt whenever the King wanted to, but to you and Alessa, it was a place that needed exploration. And so, you obliged.\n\n\nNeither of you were certain of each other, but you both had a childish taste for adventure, so when you saw the alluring cabin\u2026well there was only one thing you could do.\n\n\nCasting caution aside, the two of you walked inside and began exploring. It had everything a person needed to survive, but oddly enough it also contained a well stocked book case. This didn\u2019t quite catch your attention, but Alessa was enamored. She made you stay with her to look at the books. Time passed on, and eventually you found yourself reading too. \n\n\nIt was only a little after that that he showed up. Leather clothes fit around him, and his rugged beard made him look like a wild man. A barbarian of some sort. You hurriedly yanked Alessa to her feet and the both of you ran for your lives. He didn\u2019t follow, and neither of you turned back.\n\n\nWhen you told your father about some strange man trying to kill you, he raised his eyebrows in disbelief. Alessa corroborated your claim, however, and the King formed a search party to find the stranger. You and Alessa stayed out of the forest with your mothers while your fathers led the search party. They took the better part of an hour searching, before they came back empty handed. They told you to stay out of the forest, but another meeting between you two was planned for the next day. \n\n\nThis time your parents weren\u2019t present, and a guard was assigned to you two. One from the King\u2019s royal guard and one from the Holy Order were always stationed with you. It was a week before you got the courage up to suggest going into the forest. When you finally did suggest it, Alessa agreed and the both of you snuck away from your guards. \n\n\nThe old cabin was there just like last time, but instead of marching into the cabin blindly, you and Alessa waited for the man to come back. When he finally came back you and Alessa spied on him nearly the rest of the day. Eventually the you returned to the guards and found them wondering where you were. \n\n\nEach day you and Alessa met, and this turned into a game. First, you would escape from your guard, and then you would spy on the enigmatic man. Back at the castle you and Alessa told no one of this, for fear of them ruining your fun.\n\n\nA couple weeks later the man finally caught you. You were in the middle of climbing your favorite tree when a spider of an absurd size climbed onto your hand and stung you. With a loud yelp you fell to the ground and passed out. \n\n\nJust thinking about it made your face red from embarrassment. Alessa later told you that the man took you inside and helped the bite on your hand heal, and even gave you medicine for the bruise that would soon surface on your head. You'd ruined the fun times of spying because you couldn\u2019t stay calm around a spider. \n\n\nYou shake your head at your younger self, and then you shake your head at your current self. You shouldn\u2019t criticize his past self too much, for it was because of that that you and Alessa were able to gain a friend. You glance over at her and find that she looks like she\u2019s reminiscing as well. \n\nYou nudge her elbow before speaking, \u201cWe should get going.\u201d \n\n\nAlessa nods, and you both start heading in the direction of that familiar cabin. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "During all of the fun times you and Alessa spent in the man's cabin, neither one of you asked why he was there. The thought certainly crossed your mind, but you and Alessa entered into a bliss of sorts. You were afraid to ruin the friendly relationship you had with the man by getting on his bad side. After all, (well, at least in your experience) adults tended to anger quickly when questioned too often.\n\n\nThus you and Alessa enjoyed a period of unadulterated happiness...that you were sure was going to end today. As you grew older you began to question the man and his purpose even more. You mentioned it to Alessa, and while she was slow to agree, she eventually came around. She must have finally thought about the situation from someone else's perspective. Anyone else would have the guard chase down this stranger. Worst case scenario, the man could turn out to be some kind of serial killer. You doubted that he was, but there was always the possibility. \n\n\nYou hoped for the best, but feared the worst. That's most of the reason you carried the sword at your waist even though your Holy Order training was already over for the day. \n\n\nThe cabin came into your field of vision, and nostalgia cascaded over you. You stopped walking, and Alessa turned back to gaze at you. \"Are you ready? We don't really have to do this if you don't want to.\" Her voice was muddled with nervousness, and concern.\n\n\nYou could tell that she was hoping you'd turn back, and that you two could hang out without having to worry. You almost agreed with her, but you decided to do this. You were going to follow through with it. \n\n\nSome moments are seared in people's memories forever. Every one of your senses seemed to be extra sensitive. The sun was shining brightly through the trees above casting light that made you squint your eyes. Alessa stood half turned back to you with a question in her eyes. She was obviously waiting for you to continue moving. You look to the cabin ahead, and all of the warmth that you felt in the past dwindled away. In its place were ominous feelings of forbidding, but you gathered your courage and approached the cabin. \n\n\nAlessa knocks on the door, and you only have to wait a few moments before a muffled voice calls you inside. \n\n\nIf the outside of the cabin looked ominous, the inside was a picture of abnormality. Something was wrong. You could tell it from the moment you stepped into the cabin. You didn't need the door slamming shut behind you, or the crazed look in the man's eyes to tell you that much. He sat in a chair against the wall on opposite side of the room. His wild brown hair was even more disorganized than usual. It fell across his face as he looked at the floor. \n\n\nA silent moment passed and the man began to speak. \"I know why you're here. I knew this day would come, but I didn't want to believe it.\" That part was directed at you and Alessa, but the part that followed seemed more like a crazed man's mutterings. And he never seemed crazed before.\n\n\n\"I wish I didn't have have to do this. I was content. Happy even. We were almost like a family. I felt needed, and not abused. Not like the people who use my name for evil purposes...\" His mutterings continue, but you've had enough. Enough of being here, that is. While you were prepared to deal with bad reactions, frankly you didn't think it would be this bad. You were getting really creeped out, and a quick glance at Alessa told you you weren't the only one. \n\n\nYou reached back to try the knob, but it didn't turn. You put more force into it, but still nothing. The man doesn't react, so you lose all pretenses of sneaking out. You throw your shoulder into the door, and it doesn't even quiver. Just as you begin to pull your sword from its sheathe, the man finally speaks to you two again.\n\n\n\"I'm sorry, but this has to be done. Alessa, Erron I hope you'll forgive me.\" He begins walking towards you two, and you decide that you don't want to know why he's sorry. You go ballistic and start hacking at the door, but after the first few swings you realize that it's not going to work. There was something otherworldly going on here and it was preventing you from leaving. Instead you turn back around and hold your sword the way you were taught. \n\n\nThe man nears the both of you, and you take the time to shout to Alessa, \"Get behind me!\" When you don't hear an immediate shuffling of feet, you turn and see her frozen with fear. At the same time you notice the man walking towards her instead of you.\n\n\nYou figure that somewhere inside each man there is a primitive instinct that overrides all self control. That instinct sends you rushing between the disaster that was surely about to occur. A couple things happen at once. Without your meaning to, your sword strikes the man's outstretched hand. And your body hits Alessa onto the ground behind you. Before you can check to see if Alessa is okay you notice the cut on the man's hand bleeding. But not just bleeding. Bleeding gold.\n\n\nYou barely have time to send up a prayer to the Creator before he speaks again. This time he seems to have some semblance of intelligence instead of his ranting. \"Alessa would have made a better choice I think, but I guess you'll do fine. I'll let you carry the blame for what's to come next.\" The man takes a deep breath and holds his hands out in front of him. This time that instinct doesn't come just in time. Your frozen in place, but to your surprise he doesn't touch you, or kill you or anything of the sort. \n\n\nInstead, two lights appear. With his palms facing up to the ceiling a bright white light appears in his right hand. A dark black light appears in his left hand. They both glimmer and shine alluringly, but for different reasons. You feel yourself drawn to the dark light, because of an eerie feeling of power. A power that you feel could bring you anything you ever wanted. The white light gives you a feeling of happiness. The power to endure and make it through anything that could ever come in your way. The power to obtain versus the power endure. You're enthralled. \n\n\n\"Now. Choose. Will you take this blessing,\" he moves his right hand forward, \"or this curse?\" He moves his left hand forward to punctuate the question. \n\n\nYou barely hear what he's saying, and you don't really get what he's saying about that dark light being a curse. How could it be a curse when it offers you so much power. Then again, the white light offers you security. You feel that you could protect anything, and get through everything that dared challenge you. You think of Alessa at that, whom is still sitting on the floor behind you dumbfounded. \n\n\nYou know you don't really have much of a choice here. Who knows what the man would do if you were to refuse? You have to choose one.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "\"The Blessing.\"", "result": "\"Blessing.\" You whisper the words, and immediately the blinding light flies from the man's hand and into you. You don't feel any different at first, but as the seconds go by you feel yourself getting really tired. The fatigue spreads throughout your body and you know that at any moment you may pass out. The feeling reminds you of a story your dad once told you about him treading water for hours at a time. He said afterwards that he knew he wouldn't be able to keep it up forever, but he would continue for as long as he could. \n\n\nYou sympathize with that thought as your body and mind betray you to their tiredness. When you finally feel as if you could not hold on any longer, you collapse to the floor beside Alessa. The last thing you see is the black light, the curse, flying from the man and into Alessa, and the man's face; a picture of sadness. \n\n\n \n\n~\n\n\n \n\nYou wake up hours later in the cabin. You peel your face of of the wooden floor and groggily rub your eyes. It takes you a moment to remember what happened, but when you do you leap to your feet confused. There isn't a single thing out of place in the cabin. You look all around for evidence of what you could've sworn happened here only moments ago, but you find nothing. Even your sword is back inside your sheathe. Nothing was amiss. Perhaps it was all a dream, you think relieved. \n\n\nWith a sigh and a shrug you brush the dust off of your clothes and open the cabin door. You remember the struggle you had with the man moments before, and you laugh to yourself. Leave it to your subconscious to turn one of your favorite people into a scary curse giving man with emotional problems. Although... you do wonder why Alessa isn't with you. You were supposed to meet with her in this cabin after all. \n\n\nYour don't think to much of it, for you finally realize the time. In the distance the sun begins to dip down into the gray blue clouds. It was sundown, the time time your parents require you to be home. You immediately break into a jog. You Father could be quite strict when it came to you. If he caught you coming back late, then he would surely punish you. \n\n\nYou jog into a relatively silent castle, although you hear sounds of eating and merriment coming from the main dining hall. As if to punctuate the point, your stomach rumbles in anticipation for dinner. Thankfully you only have to go up one staircase on the way to your room. You're careful to look through each hallway before entering in order to avoid a potential disaster with your dad, so in not too long you come to a solid oak door. Engraved on the wall beside it reads the name, 'Lucentia,' your family name. Without wasting any time you throw the door open and slam the door shut behind you. \n\n\n\"Erron? What are you doing back so late?\" You turn around to see your Father seated on at your desk with a grave look on his face. His deep authoritative voice is riddled with anxiety and subtle undertones of sadness. Something your dad rarely displays. \n\n\nYou begin to mumble an excuse about knight training, but your Father interrupts you. \"Never mind that. I need you to pack your things. We're going away for a while.\" The persona of a strong confident man your Father usually portrayed was gone. \n\n\nWhen you don't respond immediately, he raises his voice. \"Quickly now. We must be going!\" \n\n\nYou don't question him and immediately begin to pack your travel bags with necessities. You're at it for a couple minutes when you realize your Father had no bags with him. \"Did you already have your bags packed? you ask curiously. Any information you could glean from him would be useful. \n\n\nHe looks around for a moment confused. \"I must've forgotten to grab them. I'll be back, son. Stay here and pack. If I'm not back in fifteen minutes then go find Morden.\" He rushes out of the room leaving you even more confused than when you woke up in the cabin.\n\n\nYou shrug and obey him. Even at his worst he still knows more than you do. \n\n\nIt doesn't take you long to pack, and soon enough you're left waiting on your bed. A few long moments later you begin to hear shuffling outside, and shouting. You try to ignore it, but it soon grows to a point where you can't ignore it very well. That, and you're starting to get curious. The royal guards don't usually act so panicked, so maybe you should check it out.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sate your curiosity", "result": "Tossing your fathers wishes out the window, you crack the door open. If you come back in five minutes, then that should leave you plenty of time to find out what's going on. \n\n\nYou walk out of the door and into the stone walled hallways. You listen for a moment, then follow the sounds of shouting. As you near the source, other sounds enter the mix. The sounds of swords ringing and armor being torn fill your ears, and before you can turn yourself back you walk into the scene of the noise. Bodies of the knights of the Holy Order llitter the hallway floor. Royal guards stand amidst the corpses, while others drive their swords through the fallen bodies. Some dark liquid covers the cobblestone floor, and that same liquid is splattered across the walls. Blood.\n\n\nThe thought sickens you and you begin to retch despite not having had dinner yet. The sound draws some attention, and as you bring your head up from the ground your eyes meets with a dying Knight on the floor not to far from you. That knight mouths the word \"Run,\" just before his eyes lose the life in them. \n\n\nBefore you can really react to that you hear someone yell, \"There's the Assassin's son! Get him!\" You look up to find every royal guard with their eyes trained on you. Your instincts take over and you begin to run back the way you came. The sounds of metal boots hitting the floor echo throughout the hall behind you. Fear courses throughout your body, and you run faster than you ever have before. \n\n\nHowever, it's not enough. After only a few moments of running you hear a voice behind you yell, \"I've got him!\" You're only left wondering what he means for a moment, for right afterwards a javelin hits your shoulder. The force of it doesn't kill you, but it certainly sends you toppling to the floor. The pain is horrible, but luckily you don't have to endure it for long. A royal guard comes up moments later to finish the job.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stay in your room", "result": "While you're certainly curious about what all of the commotion is about, you trust your father's orders. He wouldn't tell you to do something without a reason, so you wait. \n\n\nAround fifteen minutes later your door is opened, but not by your father. Rather, it's opened by the General of the Knights of the Holy Order, Morden. His presence is intimidating, but from your experience he's always been more or less kind. At least when he's not giving you knight lessons. Then he becomes strict and commanding. You might be the Grand Priest's son, but that certainly won't stop him from going easy on you in lessons.\n\n\n\"Where's Father?\" You ask, but Morden ignores you and walks straight to the window on the opposite side of the room. You take the hint and stay quiet while he looks around. When he's satisfied he closes the windows quietly, then turns around to face you. \n\n\nHe speaks quietly, almost whispering, but his face tells you that the words he says mean just as much as when he would be yelling. \"Your father is outside. There was an assassination attempt on his life when he left your room, ands he's asked me to accompany you to meet with him.\" While he speaks, he gathers a quill with ink and scratches a message on a piece of parchment on your desk. \n\n\nIt reads, \"There are people outside the door. Say out loud that you need time to pack. In the meantime, gather these sheets and start tying them together. Don't be conspicuous.\" \n\n\nYou nod suddenly grateful for all of the lessons on reading you were taught. \"Give me a few minutes to pack my things, and then we can go.\" You say this and hope to the Creator that that your voice won't betray you. You don't say anything and Morden doesn't offer anymore information, so you both work quietly to construct a makeshift rope. Beneath the surface, however, your mind is racing to try and comprehend the situation. \n\n\nFrom the things that have been said, and the way your father has been acting you take it that there was, in fact an assassination attempt on your father. That would explain his nervousness, as well as all of the commotion outside. You briefly wonder why they haven't already barged into the room if they were waiting outside, but before you can come to a conclusion your thoughts go to you mother. Your heart skips a beat, and you quickly turn to face Morden. \n\n\n\"Where's Mother?\" You mouth, and Morden immediately looks away from you obviously avoiding the question. You stop working for a brief moment, for the severity of the situation suddenly hits you. That's why Father was hiding in his room. He was hiding from the guards whilst waiting for you to return from the cabin. They must have already gotten Mother. With that sobering thought tears come to your eyes, and you resume tyirng the sheets together.\n\n\nWhen you and Morden finally finish, he turns back to you and says aloud, \"Hurry up boy. We don't have time to waste.\" Then he immediately mouths to you, \"Your father will explain everything later.\" \n\n\nHe better, you think to yourself. Morden takes the newly made sheet rope and quietly opens the window. After a moment of securing the rope to one of your bed posts, he motions for you to climb down it. You hesitate for a brief moment, but remembering that your father is waiting you cast away your doubts and climb down the rope. \n\n\nFor the first time since you've lived at the castle, you've decided that you hate your room. As son of the Grand Priest, you were given one of the 'best' with a view worthy of kings. So they gave you a room on the second floor. You always just took for granted the view, and it never occurred to you that you might have to use this as an escape route someday. You remind yourself to have a room on the first floor next time you live in a castle. \n\n\nThe makeshift rope is sturdy enough, so despite your doubts you manage to climb down the rope without too much difficulty. Morden is different. He gets about halfway down the rope when you start to here the rope tear. The combined weight of his armor and a extremely muscled fully grown man were apparently too much for 'rope' to handle. It tears in half and send the armor clad General tumbling to the ground with a chorus of clanking armor. \n\n\nMorden is quick to get back on his feet, however, so he grabs you by the arm and starts to rush you off the castle grounds. It was luck that you had a window that led directly outside the castle. Once you and Morden have made it a fair distance away form the castle, you and Morden break into a run. \n\n\nThe familiar features of the castle grounds blur together in a seamless picture of grey and green. You really hope Morden knows where he's going, because you start to feel faint. Fatigue starts to hit you again in an all too familiar way. You remember your dream about the cabin, and have a brief hope that if this fatigue is the same, then perhaps this nightmare of escape is a dream as well. \n\n\nThe last thing you hear before you pass out is Morden's voice urging you to push on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Dreams", "result": "You're back in the cabin. Sunlight once again pours through the window, and once again the man stands before you. The choice is the same. Light is held in his right hand, and darkness is in his left. \n\n\n\"Which will you choose? Protection or power?\" Unlike the last time you saw him, the man seems to have regained his senses. His normally calm demeanor has returned, but his appearance is still that of an unkempt barbarian. \n\n\nYour gaze turns back to the balls of light, and you begin to reach for the man's right hand when you hear a voice. \n\n\n\"Give me the curse.\" Her voice is melodic and terrible at the same time. Melodic because her voice cleared your mind of the fog that made you think this dream was reality. Terrible, because you remembered what happened when you were last awake. Your Father was nearly assassinated, and you believe your mother was. You climbed out of your window... but you can't remember anything after that. Perhaps the feel of armor against your skin, or the faces hovering above you, but nothing definite. \n\n\nYou stop reaching for the blessing, and instead wipe the tears from your eyes. Out of the corner of your eyes you see the curse and blessing fly to whom they belong. You knew that yours and Alessa's fathers never really quite got along, but you didn't think the King would go so far as to assassinate the Grand Priest. Personal matters aside, this was an affront to the major religion of the entire continent. It was sure to cause an uproar.\n\n\nYou turn around to face the speaker at your back. \n\n\nStanding in the doorway is Alessa. Sunlight seeps in through the door and glances off of her hair giving her the appearance of having a halo. Her face is a mix of despair, and her posture reminds you of what yours must've been when you realized the chances of your mother being alive were low.\n\n\nUnder normal circumstances you would've been delighted to see her, but all her face reminds you of is the gall the King had to take your family away from you. \"Why did he do it? Why did your father kill my mother?\" You ask the question with your face a mask of sadness.\n\n\nAlessa looks shocked to say the least, but before she can respond, you continue. \"I don't know why I'm asking you. You're just some mirage my mind must've made up, and you're probably only here because whenever I'm at this cabin, you're usually with me.\" You start rambling, and although she certainly tries to say something several times, you ignore her. \n\n\nApparently it becomes too much for the dream Alessa, and instead of trying to overpower your voice with her own, she slaps you. You figured that since this is a dream it wouldn't hurt, but to your chagrin you are wrong. The force of the blow is more than enough to shake you from your rant, and you decide that this dream Alessa must have something important to say.\n\n\nYou weren't paying to much attention to her until now, but now that she's much closer you can see the tears in her eyes and the frustrated expression etched onto her face. \"First off, I'm the real Alessa.\" \n\n\nIt has to be a lie.\n\n\n\"Secondly, even if I was just a figment of your imagination...\" A sob interrupts her sentence, \"...are you seriously saying that you'd be this insensitive?\"\n\n\nYou flinch at that and look away. \n\n\nSurprisingly enough, Alessa reaches up, grips your chin, and faces you back towards her. As soon as she lets go, you turn your head back away from her. However you do take note of that. The real Alessa would've never done something so bold. \n\n\nYou hear a sigh of defeat, and the pat of footsteps on the floor. \"I'll be back when you're ready to believe me,\" Alessa says, but mutters immediately afterwards, \"i can't believe my Father thought I could trust you.\"\n\n\nIt's only when you hear the sound of the door close that you turn back around. You fall to your knees, and put your face in your hands. Too much was going on for you to think straight. If that really was Alessa, then you could already feel heavy guilt setting on your heart. But there was too much else going on. her father saying that she could trust you? as far as you knew her father didn't like you anymore than he like your dad.\n\n\nYou hear a sigh behind you. \"You two should really work together.\" It's obviously the man's voice, but when you turn around there's no one there. you sit there alone in the cabin, wallowing in your despair. It is then you decide that whoever took your family away from you...that person would recieve pain by your hands. No one harms your family and gets away with it.\n\n\n~\n\n\n\"He has to be blessed Cassius. There's no other explanation. You should be proud. Your son is the chosen of the Creator.\"\n\n\n\"I understand, But why now of all times, and why someone as young as him?\"\n\n\n\"I've heard rumors. They say that the princess is cursed. Perhaps the Creator gave us a Blessed One to combat her, A cursed One.\" The voice you don't recognize manages to fill as much contempt for Alessa as possible in that last phrase.\n\n\n\"Shush, I think he's waking.\" You figured you could fake sleep to hear more, but your father knows you better than you thought.\n\n\nYou open your eyes to the room beyond. White walls, and sheets cover every inch of the room. The only colorful spots are the two men at the foot of your bed. Your father on your right, and the stranger on the left. While they both have dark hair with a streaks of grey, the similarities end there. The stranger Is much more heavyset than your father. He looks like he spent a few too many times at the dinner table instead of exercising. Your father is slimmer than him, but doesn't quite have the muscular body he had in his younger days.\n\n\n\"Erron?\" Your father asks as your eye open fully. \n\n\n\"Father?\" You respond, or at least try to. Your throat is dry beyond belief. You feel you haven't had water in days.\n\n\n\"Get him some water,' your father commands the stranger before embracing you and smiling. \n\n\n\"What happened?\" you manage to croak out. \n\n\nYour father's joy at seeing you wake is replaced with a grim expression. \"Wait until you've had some water son. Then we can talk.\" \n\n\nIt isn't long before the one man walks back in with a goblet filled with water. You drink it greedily as your father begins telling you what happened. \n\n\n\"Things had been getting bad for a long time. You know the King and I didn't agree on a lot of things, but it goes beyond that. He was passing more and more restrictions upon the Holy Kingdom. I resisted as much as possible, but in the end my resistance only served as an excuse to get rid of me. As you can see, he failed.\" Sadness fills his eyes. \"Instead of killing me, he settled for getting your mother.\" \n\n\nSo it was true. However, your guesses did nothing to stop the tears from flowing down your face. \n\n\n\"When you were passed out for this past week, I was sure your mother wasn't the only loved one I'd lost.\" A week? There's no way. You only remember having the one dream, and even that dream didn't last that long.\n\n\n\"A week?\" you respond slowly before enjoying the last bit of water from the goblet.\n\n\nYour father nods. \"Yes, You were out for an entire week.\" A pained smile reaches tour father's face. \"But when i saw the mark, I knew you'd be okay.\" \n\n\n\"What mark?\" As soon as you ask the question you regret it. The stranger immediately goes on about how the Creator chooses people to serve him, and about the great honor it is. Your eyes start to glaze over, but your father manages to get the stranger to stop his lengthy explanation. \n\n\n\"That's the significance of the mark, but to answer your question, 'What mark?' I'm going to have to have you stand up son.\"\n\n\nYour legs are a little shaky from a week of no use, but you manage to stand up and go over to where your father is standing. He turns you around so that you are facing away from him, and he tells the other man to go get a pair of mirrors before addressing you.\n\n\n\"This is what the Creator has blessed you with.\" Your Father's hands brush the skin from your left shoulder to your right seemingly tracing lines onto your back. \"where I've touched is where the mark spans. You'll see in a moment what the Creator has given you. \n\n\nAs if on cue, the man from before comes into the room with the hand mirrors. Your father thanks him then takes them. With his help you position the mirrors at the best angles to allow you to glimpse at your back.\n\n\nGlittering lines of gold shine all across the top of your back. If you try to look at a single line you lose the picture, but when you try to focus on the elegant gold lines as a whole you see what it is meant to depict.\n\n\n\"The saving wings of the Creator,\" the man remarks. \"Said to only show when his followers are in grave danger.\" You continue to stare at the markings and marvel at how similar the wings on your back are to that of those of the Creator. \n\n\nYou begin to hear your father's friend launch into another lengthy description of the \"Blessed Ones\" but your father stops him short. \n\n\n\"Let's leave him be. He needs more rest. He's only just now woken up.\" \n\n\nYour father makes a move to leave, but you stop him one last time. \"Father, can I go with you? You are going to fight back, right?\" \n\n\nYour father turns back around to face you, and examines you for a good few seconds before the stranger interjects. \"You can't possibly be considering this. Can you Cassius?\" \n\n\nYour father responds, \"Of course I can be. He's a Blessed One. Surely that fact will give our knights someone advantage on the battlefield. even if he is a mile away from the battlefield. And we can train him on the spot.\" \n\n\nYou smile and start to agree, but your father continues. \"But you might be of more use to us if you train here first, and then come help when you're ready. Here, as in the Academy of the Holy Order. It's a perfect opportunity to have you learn how to use your power as well. But, I'll leave the choice up to you. I believe the Creator will back any of your choices.\"\n\n\nYou aren't sure about all of 'Blessed One' stuff, but you do know that you don't want to be away from your father if he might need your help. You couldn't stand to lose another one of your parents. \n\n\nThen again, you also see the wisdom in waiting here and training before you go out onto the battlefield. You wouldn't be very useful if you died after all.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with your father", "result": "While you're sure the Knight Academy would increase your usefulness, you decide that you're more useful now than later. What if everyone you wish to protect is already dead by the time your prepared? Besides, your father did say that they could teach you on the way there.\n\n\n\"I'd like to go with you father.\" \n\n\n\"Alright son. Rest up. We leave at first light tomorrow.\" He pats you on your back, then leaves the room with the stranger. \n\n\nYou pack up your belongings, or at least what's left of them then leave to take a bath. You can't imagine that a week in bed does wonders for your hygiene. \n\n\nAfter that, you take a stroll around the Knight Academy. It is quite magnificent, and you're sure you would have had everything you needed had you stayed, but you've already made your choice. your place is at your father's side. The rest of the day goes fast, and before you know it you're already back in bed. One might think that a week sleeping would make it harder for you to fall back asleep, but soon enough you drift back into your dreams.\n\n\nYour dream is the same as it has been the last few times, except this time you're actually alone. No Alessa, and no shaggy haired man. Instead you go through your recent dreams, and a thought you shoved to the back of your mind finally resurfaces. When your father and his friend were talking you connected the dots, but you didn't want to believe it. That yours and Alessa's friend was the Creator himself. It didn't seem likely, but neither didn't being hunted down until today.\n\n\nYou keep in in your head for when the piece of information might come in handy, and the next morning comes quickly. You and your father are allotted a wagon and several soldiers to ensure that you get to your forward camp safely. While waiting your father takes to teaching you the history behind 'Blessed Ones.' You learn that there role was to create peace on this world, and that often times they did so by focusing an evil foe. Most saw them as heroes, but you don't really understand why. The only thing people saw that was special about you was the golden mark on your back in the shape of angelic wings. \n\n\nBeyond that there was nothing else. These lessons continued for about a week before the unexpected happened. While gazing out the wagon window you see a glimmer out in the forest. you don't think much of it until you hear someone yell, \"Attack!\" All at once Dellandian soldiers start pouring out from the trees and to the wagon. Your own knights are heavily outnumbered, so you're father makes a split second executive decision. You both decide to run. \n\n\nYou make it around twenty steps before several arrows stick into your back killing you. you only hope that your father made it farther than you did.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Enroll in Knight Academy", "result": "You hesitate while you think, but you answer before long.\n\n\n\"I'll stay here.\" Your father smiles, and it's obvious that he's very relieved at your choice. You imagine that a heavy burden must've been taken off of his shoulders. Here you would be safe. Here you wouldn't have to worry.\n\n\nYour father nods before turning to the heavy set man on his left. \"This is the Headmaster here at the academy. Headmaster Rallas. He's taught at this academy for years now,\" a slight smile breaks across your father's face, \"and despite his looks, he used to quite capable.\" \n\n\nHeadmaster Rallas scoffed at that. \"I'm still more than capable,\" he remarks before your father continues speaking. \n\n\n\"I'll be leaving in the morning, so it may be some time before i see you again, son. When I next see you, I expect to see a man grown and ready for anything. The Creator has blessed you as his champion, so you must prepare yourself to fulfill that demanding role. I'll see you again in the morning, but for now Headmaster Rallas will give you a tour.\" Your father embraces you, then walks out of the room leaving you alone in the room with Headmaster Rallas.\n\n\nHe regards you for a silent moment. \"You carry a great burden. If you're well enough I'll show you around.\"\n\n\nDespite the sleepy haze you've retained since you awoke, you nod and get up from your bed. You look around the room, and wonder why you're the only one here. This was obviously the Academy's infirmary and this was a fighting school, so surely there must be more people injured. You express these thoughts aloud to the Headmaster, and he smiles then throws an arm around you.\n\n\n\"You've got a good head on you. The academy is on break for another week, so until then, it'll be you, me, the staff, and a rare few other students.\"\n\n\nYou nod and the Headmaster leads you out of the room. The halls remind you of the Castle back in Valium except that these were newer and more obviously centered around academics. The Headmaster leads you around, and before long you find yourself increasingly impressed with the facility. It's every bit as big as the castle, and the rumors you've heard about it do not nearly do it justice. \n\n\nThe Headmaster explains that aside from basic academics, everyone in the academy is taught how to wield a sword. Once a student finishes their schooling here, they begin their long noble service to the Grand Priest wherever it may take them. If even to death. You feel a sense of foreboding and briefly wonder how many knights died to help you escape Valium. \n\n\nThe Grand Priest finishes his explanation by telling you that at age sixteen every student is sorted into two more facilities depending on their aptitude for fighting. One is simply called Advanced Combat where the inhabitants focus solely on honing their skills in combat, tactics, and other such needs for war. The other school is called Support, which is more or less self explanatory. This school includes those training in the healing arts, organizational matters, but everyone one of them still is constantly trained in fighting. If the need ever arises, then those in both schools can form a force of a couple thousand, that is when all of the knights on missions are gathered in. Aside from the knights at the school, there are bases scattered around the continent each with a minimum number of five thousand strong. that is where the majority of your numbers reside. Apparently your father had been prepared for this, for you cannot imagine that the King would have allowed such an amassing of numbers to occur under his nose. \n\n\nOnce the introductions are over, the Headmaster leaves you to explore the facility whilst he claims that his work needs his utmost attention. You shrug and simply head off of in the direction of the armory. You didn't have much time to grab your sword when you left, so hopefully they could supply you with one. \n\n\nOn your way there you run into another student. You don't quite feel the want (or need) to converse with him, so you barely give him a glance. Despite your wishes, he moves in front of you effectively stopping you in your tracks. This was most inconvenient, because a staircase was not the best place to meet someone new. If it was someone younger, or even smaller than you then you may have pushed passed him. However, he was neither.\n\n\nHe was taller than you by a couple inches, making him around six foot, but that wasn't what stopped you. For someone who can't have been more than two years older than you, his frame filled his clothing and his muscles stretched the grey and black leather. He reminded you of Morden. He stood on the stair step right above you making his presence just that more imposing.\n\n\nAlthough you originally didn't want to meet him, you found yourself mildly interested. What did this oversized adolescent want with you? \n\n\n\"Are you Erron?\" his face was expressionless, but when you answer \"Yes,\" his face changes to that of contempt. \n\n\n\"You're the person that the teachers keep going on about? You barely have any muscle on you, and you look like you haven't ever seen a battle. The Creator should've chosen me, but instead he chose a scrawny piece of trash like you. I bet you didn't even have the guts to screw the princess while you were in that castle.\" \n\n\nHis voice is filled with mocking arrogance, and his insults, quite frankly annoy you. He had just barely met you, yet he acted as if he knew your whole story. His insults weren't even that good, but his attitude was certainly more abrasive than you could otherwise stand. You normally wouldn't even consider physical retaliation as a viable option, but his mention of Alessa tipped your judgment. She might be the daughter of a treacherous King, but she wasn't some cheap prostitute. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Ignore him and move on", "result": "While feeling tempted to show this peasant his place, you aren't that rash. If put to the test you figure you would have a high chance of winning in this fight. However, you don't think he got that muscular from sitting around doing nothing, and since this is an academy where people are being taught how to fight, so you assume he has more experience than you as well. Of course you were taught by the General himself, Morden, so despite the person's goading you push past him and continue up the stairs. \n\n\nOn your way past him he grips your forearm and speaks, \"Hey, don't leave when I'm talking to you!\" \n\n\nHe has a strong grip, but since you know how to get out of such a simple hold, you easily twist out and continue up the stairs. \n\n\nYou hear a string of profanity and calls for you to come back, but for whatever reason he doesn't come after you, so you continue to ignore him. It hadn't really occurred to you that there might some people that are jealous of you. Especially since you have no idea why they think you're blessed by the Creator. Certainly the mark on your back is indicative to the Creator's wings, but you're fairly certain that the Creator didn't just come down from paradise and bestow upon you the powers to govern his people on this world. No, you're fairly certain that this isn't the Creator's doing, and even more so when you remember your dream.\n\n\nIn the back of your mind things were already starting to make sense, but you didn't want to believe it. Somehow that man in the King's Forest was able to obtain power beyond your comprehension. Maybe he got it from the Creator, but regardless of where you are fairly certain that those years spent in the King's Forest were not normal. You thought it was odd when the guards couldn't relocate the cabin, but you always chalked it up to your superior tracking skills. Well at least until you learned enough to know that you were no where near as good at tracking as the royal guards. \n\n\nYou cast your thoughts to the very first 'dream.' If you recall correctly then you were actually confronting the man about his purpose in being in those woods. He'd mentioned about how he knew that day would come, and how sad he was. \n\n\nYou reach the Academy's armory, and you resolve to figure out what happened later. soon enough they find you a sword that's suited to your size and fighting style, and you leave with your mind still centered on weapons. You get the vague feeling that you were meaning to do something, but before you realize what it was, Headmaster Rallas shows up at the end of the hallway.\n\n\nHe's wearing the same grey and black material from before, but this time he has more of the stuff gathered together in his arms. You remember the other student you met, and realize that the Headmaster was holding some kind of student uniform. \n\n\n\"I'm sorry. I meant to give this to you before, but my attention was elsewhere.\" He shoves the grey and black uniform into your arms before reaching into a pocket and pulling out a key. \n\n\n\"This is for your room. We made sure to give you the best of the best.\" \n\n\n\"That's une-\" you begin, but the headmaster interrupts you. \n\n\n\"Nonsense. The son of the Grand Priest deserves the very best.\" \n\n\nYou hesitate before grasping the Gold plated key. Despite the unfortunate meeting in the hallway, you decide that you might very well get used to living here. \"Yes sir.\"\n\n\n~\n\n\nA few weeks pass, and the first battle happens. A messenger leaves you a letter from your father detailing what happened. It was mostly just the Knights testing the Dellandian army. It wasn't some crazy battle of massive proportions, but rather, it was a skirmish that didn't even contain a hundred men in total. While it wasn't the greatest battle, the Knights managed to beat the army with a combination of skill (from the individuals), and strategy. (from the different leaders) You find out that Morden is leading the charge against the corrupt royalty, and that in terms of skill, the Knights heavily outclass the army of Dellandia. You hope that superior strategy and skill will be enough, for the Dellandian army has the advantage in numbers. \n\n\nAside from that, the only important thing happening is the new term start for the Academy. No new dreams of the Man and Alessa happen leaving you with a relatively bored few weeks. You don't see the pretentious student from before, so you ended up spending most of your time staying fit and practicing your swordplay. You're in an almost feverish state, and your father and your friends only serve to make that fever go. Whether the mark you received was from the Creator or not, you feel your place is beside your father championing the cause of the Holy Kingdom.\n\n\nOccasionally you go to the library hoping to find information regarding this mark, and while there are a lot of history about what the Blessed Ones are, the texts never go into the differences between the Blessed Ones and other people. You're always left wondering if the mark is simply there to notify your enemies of whom to kill. \n\n\nThus, your thoughts are everywhere when you attend your first class at the Academy. The Headmaster had your schedule delivered to you earlier week with a note attached.\n\n\nIt read, \"Erron, enclosed is your schedule of the coming term. Seeing as how you were taught by the best while in Vailum, we've decided to put you in classes closer to your skill level. You will be surrounded by peer s who are older than you, and may even be jealous of you and your position. Heed them not, for your position demands that you be above everyone else. You are held in a higher regard because of your blessing, so do not stoop down to the level of those who oppose you. Sincerely, Headmaster Rallas. \n\n\nYou take a deep breath and clear your head. The open doorway seems almost ominous in nature, but when you finally step through it, the classroom beyond leaves you astounded. Mostly because you've never really seen so many kids in the same location. The majority of the students are male, but you do see several girls around the room too. You do not see the teacher, so when you enter the room you try to sneak along the wall to an empty wooden desk. \n\n\nAlas, Your endeavor fails. It only takes a few seconds for someone to recognize you as the Grand Priest's son, so a fairly large group forms around you. \n\n\n\"Are you Erron?\"\n\n\n\"Can I see your mark?\"\n\n\nand\n\n\n\"Where'd you get that jawline?\" are only a few of the questions you hear.\n\n\nYou do your best to answer the questions, but luckily for you, the teacher steps into the room and tells everyone to go to their seats.\n\n\nThe teacher Introduces himself as Sir Kakanos, and he barely takes anytime before diving into the lesson. Your first class is history, and it ends up going fairly smoothly. Well at least for you. The rest of the class seem distracted by your presence, as if you're some kind of exotic animal. It's only when the student you met before walks through the doorway that the classes' attention turns away from you. \n\n\nSir Kakanos looks away from the class when he walks in, and gestures for the guy to sit. \"It's nice of you to join us Mr. Rallas.\" The Headmaster's son, you take note of that.\n\n\n'Mr. Rallas' walks to the seat designated, but takes a specific moment to look at you and stare you down. He doesn't have the same astonished and contempt filled expression as he did before. Rather it's blank, and you realize, with a start, that this guy wasn't just some brute filled with anger. No, if he had that much control over his emotions to begin with, then he was much smarter than you previously thought. If you allowed yourself to be angered back when you first met you might have been outclassed. \n\n\nThe class ends soon after that interruption, and you head to your next class. It turns out similarly, with the exception of the Headmaster's son actually being to his class on time.\n\n\nScience, Numbers, Battle Tactics, and Reading pass by fairly quickly and before long you're standing in a field outside the academy. Of all the classes you have, this is probably the one you look forward to the most. Advanced Combat. The teacher is a female Knight by the name of Sarrin. She's quite young. If you weren't her student, you might consider her beautiful. She quickly pairs off each the students there to \"see what each of you can do.\" \n\n\nYou're paired with a stocky fellow named David, and you start to spar with the wooden practice swords. It doesn't take you very long at all to best him, but David decides that he wants more. You happily oblige, for you haven't had a real opponent in a while. However, it soon becomes very clear that despite his two year advantage of age, you are the better fighter. \n\n\n\"Erron. Pair up Ashyr.\" You hear Miss Sarrin tell you, and before you can ask who she means, you see her pointing at the Headmaster's son.\n\n\nYou mutter a quick \"Yes ma'am\" and head over to your new opponent. Unlike your previous opponent, Ashyr stands a few inches taller than you. His hazel eyes regard you calmly, and he holds his practice sword carefully, lightly, as if the sword was his lover. The thought amused you, and you allowed a small smile to light up your features. \n\n\nYou ready your practice sword for battle. The space between you is filled with tension, and you start circling each other. For a fraction of a second you see his eyes shift to the contempt filled ones you first saw, but you don't have time to think about it, for Ashyr lunges. You react immediately by parrying, then you follow up with a counterattack of your own. He defends against just as easily as you did against him, and the both of you enter into a trance of sorts. Neither of you gain ground against each other, and each and every one of your strikes is parried or otherwise defended against. \n\n\nSoon enough you realize that this battle will be decided through endurance. The first person to slack off in their attacks, the first person to make a mistake, they will be the one to lose. You continue the fighting for a few moments longer before you realize that it would be you to make the mistake. While Ashyr showed hints of strain, he didn't look anywhere close to as tired as you were. You have to strike now while you still have the energy to do so. \n\n\nThroughout the fight, many different tactics have been employed. Given this, there are only a few things you think work. You haven't tried overwhelming him with power, so you might be able to take your opponent by surprise. The same principle applies to forcing him to grapple with you. If you get close enough you may be able to catch him off guard by tackling him to the ground. Of course, you could always wait for Ashyr to mess up. Maybe he feels more tired than he looks.\n\n\nIn any case you feel yourself beginning to tire, so you need to make a decision now.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Overwhelm him with attack", "result": "Ashyr is stronger, taller, and every bit as skilled as you. You don't think you'll be able to last for too long if you stay on defense. Tackling him might also have detrimental consequences. If you timed it bad then you could take a sword to the head. No, among the choices you figure your best one is to overwhelm him with attacks.\n\n\nWith a sudden turn of luck you parry a blow, and Ashyr decides not to pursue attacking you. Instead you start circling each other again. You're grateful for the time to rest before you begin your attack, but Ashyr doesn't seem to be thinking at all about his energy. Instead his eyes are focused on you with a puzzled look in his eyes. You guess no one has ever lasted this long against him.\n\n\nBy now the sun's heat has your body beginning to wear down, and your fatigue must show, for Ashyr smiles a triumphant smile. Immediately afterwards, he surges forward with an overhead slash.\n\n\nBut you're ready for it. You surge forward as well and parry his attack on your way. You leave him no time to counterattack, but instead press the advantage created by surprising him with your ferocity. For the first time since the fight started, you seem to have a clear advantage. Every attack Ashyr blocks is a step he is forced backwards, and before long the smile he had disappears from his face. Replacing it is a face contorted in concentration, and Ashyr finally seems like he the exertion is getting to him. \n\n\nHowever, you also feel your fatigue. You begin to slow down in your attacks whilst Ashyr's blocks pick up in their efficacy. Instead of barely being able to keep up, Ashyr is now blocking each attack with an attack of his own. It isn't long before you realize that you're going to fail. One of these moments you won't have enough energy to meet his attack with your own. One of these attacks you simply won't be able to raise your sword to block his. \n\n\nThe moment comes in the form of another overhead slash. Ashyr uses his height and superior strength to increase the attack's power, and you realize that he means to end the fight with this attack. You have no time to dodge and you feel like you don't have nearly enough energy to raise your sword, let alone enough to block the monstrous attack. Nevertheless, You push your arms with all your remaining strength to meet his attack with your own. Your thoughts aren't even centered upon winning the fight in that moment, rather, they're centered on making sure that that attack doesn't hit you. They're centered on protecting yourself. \n\n\nAs you bring your sword up, you feel a surge of energy resonating from your shoulders. It strengthens your body and fills your arms with power. Your sword clashes with Ashyr's, and the power behind your hit was so powerful that it knocks the wooden sword clear out of his hand. There's a moment of stunned silence all around, and in the back of your mind you realize that the other students must've stopped their sparring to watch, but your mind isn't on that. Instead the power you feel brings a grin to your face. It contrasts greatly with Ashyr's expression when you bring your sword to rest beneath his chin.\n\n\nThe changes in Ashyr's face come quickly, so if your weren't already looking at him then, you're not sure you would've noticed. Astonishment first, but rage soon followed with mixes of despair and vengeance coloring his eyes. You even thought that there was some respect there, but the moment of conflicting emotions passed. Back was his calm facade; the mask he wore was impressive, and if you hadn't seen it off when you first met, then you might really think that this calm demeanor was really him. \n\n\nYou hear hushed conversations among the remainder of the students, and soon enough Miss Sarrin shouts at everyone. \"Get back to sparring everyone!\" \n\n\nYou lower you sword and Ashyr takes a hesitant step. Then another. Before long Ashyr is heading off the field, and not much more time passes until he's out of sight. \n\n\nYou take this opportunity to rest. The fight was certainly much more difficult than you anticipated. You're sure you would've lost if you had not found that reserve of energy. Heat still resonated from your shoulders, although it certainly was much less noticeable than it was a few moments ago. \n\n\nYour rest only last for a few minutes before Miss Sarrin approaches you. \"You're one lucky kid. Without that blessing you would have spent the next few days in the infirmary. Ashyr put enough force into that last attack to give you a concussion.\"\n\n\nWhat blessing? Your tired mind thinks before realizing the importance of what just happened. It makes sense to you all of the sudden, for you recall the moment of the last attack. You were only seeking to protect yourself. It couldn't be a coincidence that The Man told you the blessing would give you the power to protect yourself. You'd been wondering what all the fuss about the blessing was for. After all, it wasn't until now that the so called \"blessing\" did anything except give you a cool mark.\n\n\nYou only nod in response. You don't really have anything to say, and besides, you'd rather take this moment to think upon the implications of what you just discovered. \n\n\nUnfortunately Miss Sarrin doesn't allow you to sit while everyone else spars, so she tells you to stand up and ready yourself. She spars with you for most of the remainder of class, but try as you might, you aren't able to beat her and you aren't able to activate your blessing. \n\n\nClass ends and Miss Sarrin pulls you aside. The rest of the students file off the sparring field until it's just the two of you standing there. She speaks first. \n\n\n\"Do you want to know how to control your power?\" \n\n\nThe question surprises you to say the least. \"Yes, of course.\" You reply immediately. While you've been able to keep your emotions in check for most of your stay at the academy, you still feel the smoldering of anger and sadness at your mother's death. If there's any way you could learn to use the power to help you become stronger, then your answer will always be certain.\n\n\n\"It will take a lot of training. Not to mention a change in your mindset. any more questions?\" she asks. \n\n\nYou raise an eyebrow at the 'mindset' comment. \"Only one. How are you qualified to teach me?\" You figure the question is necessary. You don't want to commit to learning if you're being taught by a teacher who doesn't know what they're doing. \n\n\n\"That's not something I am willing to tell. Go get some rest. From tomorrow onward, you'll be learning about this gift you have.\"\n\n\nYou're about to insist upon her giving you a straight answer when you realize that she's right. You do need rest, and tomorrow is another day. \n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "At age sixteen you are the youngest person to attain knighthood from the Academy for Advanced Combat. The AAC. When you were at the Knight Academy, you were placed two years above your age group to compensate for the learning you received while in the castle at Valium. Because of this, you graduated to the AAC at a record age of fourteen years old. Which was even more prodigious then Miss Sarrin's feat of graduating at age fifteen. (You like to remind her of that whenever you get the chance to)\n\n\nThe AAC didn't pose much of a problem to you in regards to practically anything. Many classified you as a prodigy beyond all others, and as such you excelled at everything the AAC had to offer. You have a natural mind for strategy, tactics, and fighting; so much in fact, that many believe you will surpass Morden before you reach the age of twenty five. \n\n\nRumors of you spread at an alarmingly rate, and just before you graduated from the AAC, people came to know you as the Chosen Hero. A man of great regard that surpasses all who contend against him, and a man that would come and tip the war in the favor of the Holy Kingdom. (For the death of the King barely tipped the scales at all. In fact, some think that it only served to enrage the Dellandians and their supporters.) You had no control over the rumors, and they ended up being blown out of proportion. Ever the opportunist, your Father had Headmaster Rallas directed the rumors into propaganda of sorts. Essentially, they used your image as a rallying point for those eager to fight in support of the Holy Kingdom. And the Creator knows that the Holy Kingdom needs all the help it can get.\n\n\nYou tolerated the increase in attention towards, but when it got to the point where Academy students simply stopped in the hallway to stare at you, well it was a little too much. \n\n\nYou mentally shrug as you make your way to Headmaster Rallas' office. Raven walks beside you, who you can tell is enjoying the attention garnered from being beside you. As for why you were even back at the Academy... you weren't told much. The Headmaster at the AAC, Headmaster Farid, only told you that Headmaster Rallas needed you and Raven immediately. To quote, \"Headmaster Rallas needs to see you immediately. Besides, your fan club deserves to see you every once in a while.\" \n\n\nYou had rolled your eyes at that one. It was interesting thing. The kids at the Academy admired you, and went to great lengths to make sure you were always welcome there. It was a nice gesture, but all too often you felt turned off from all of the attention. Especially since you think that you wouldn't be getting nearly as much attention had you not been blessed by the Creator. (Ironically enough, you still weren't sure if that man was the Creator. Specifically because you know he was also the one that cursed Alessa. You don't mention this to anyone though. It would cause an uproar that's altogether unecessary.) \n\n\nThe only other times you come back here are when you want to see Miss Sarrin. You ended your lessons with her when you graduated, and the both of you left on good terms. You still don't know how she knew what she knew, but you're eternally grateful regardless.\n\n\n\"What do you think he wants us for?\" Raven says to you, as the pair of you make your way up a flight of stairs. \n\n\nAfter that first year of solitude at the Academy, Raven and you became fast friends. You ended up gaining other friends too, but none were as close as Raven, or Miss Sarrin for that matter. You crush on her faded off sometime last year, around when you and Alessa met in a dream for the second time. Ironically you think that your lack of interest in her caused her to be more interested in you. Of course it could just be your dazzling fame. \n\n\n\"I have no idea. I haven't talked to him in ages. My first guess was that he'd be giving us a mission, but Headmaster Farid is usually in charge of those, especially since we haven't had our first mission yet.\" Headmaster Farid had a longstanding tradition of presenting each new graduate with their first mission. Graduation was after the first two years in the AAC, but each student stayed enrolled until two more years passed of just missions and other tasks. After that, AAC students finally became true \"Knights,\" and were assigned to an area somewhere in the continent of Dellandia. This being war time, however, caused most of the knights to be on the warfront instead. \n\n\nRaven nods in response, but doesn't say anything. The both of you walk in silence the rest of the way whilst attempting to ignore the occasional gawping student.\n\n\nEventually the two of you come before two oak wood double doors. They were stained black with the handles grey, the colors of the Knights, and you don't even hesitate before knocking on the door. \n\n\nAlmost immediately you hear Headmaster Rallas' muffled response telling you to come in. You and Raven walk in the room and take in the surroundings. The Headmaster's desk sits as the centerpiece of the room with papers messily scattered all atop it. A bookshelf stands to your left, and maps stretch across the wall to your right. You've always heard about the Headmaster being very capable in his younger days, but you can't help but think he looks more scholarly then anything else. \n\n\nHe sits behind his desk facing the two of you. The only oddity in the room takes the form of a tall man. You immediately recognize the uniform and armor as being that of a tru knight. It's quite similar to what you have on with the exception of an extra insignia signifying that he had gone through his full four years of the AAC. A messy mop of golden blonde hair frames his roguish face, and his stubble accentuates this. \n\n\nYour first impression of him makes you want to keep your coin purse tied much tighter to your belt. Your second impression, however, leaves you certain that this is a good man. His roguish persona is all but gone when he smiles and extends his hand towards you. It's an honest smile that reaches his eyes. You immediately feel like you can trust this man. \n\n\n\"I'm Vitre,\" he tells you and Raven and you all exchange greetings before the Headmaster has you sit down.\n\n\n\"Time is of the essence. I've already briefed Vitre on the situation, but let me catch you two up as well.\"\n\n\n\"Catch us up as well?\" you ask. \n\n\n\"Yes,\" he waves the question aside as if you should already know what he's talking about. \"I need you two to go on a mission with Vitre.\" \n\n\nHe pauses for the slightest moment to make sure no one else was going to interrupt him before he continues. \"You two are here because I've received direct orders from the Grand Priest to include you in on this mission. Specifically you Raven, because the Grand Priest asked that someone Erron knew well be included on this.\" Headmaster Rallas shifts his gaze to you. \"You'll find out why you're here soon enough.\" \n\n\n\"A little less than a week ago your father caught a group of royal guards on patrol. He managed to capture them and take them prisoner, which, you all know, is not an easy feat.\" \n\n\nYou nod readily. Of all the people in the Dellandian royal army, the royal guards are the most skilled. It's been speculated that though miniscule in number, the royal guards are even more skilled in battle than true knights.\n\n\n\"But your father managed to do it. The odd thing was trying to figure out why they were so far from Valium. It took a few days, but your father and his aides managed to pry some information out of them. The princess has gone missing.\"\n\n\nYou register that thought for a solid moment. Alessa is missing... \n\n\n\"After a bit more prying, he managed to find out the date she was gone as well as the likely place she's headed. Long story short, we need you three to find the princess and bring her in alive. Or dead if she struggles.\"\n\n\nYour heart nearly stops in your chest. You figure that something like this might eventaully happen, but certainly not so soon. \n\n\n\"Erron. Your father realizes that two of you were friends in the past, and that you may be liable to sparing her.\" \n\n\nYou make it a point to raise your eyebrows in disdain. You don't want them thinking thst this was true. \n\n\n\"Therefore your father has offered you an alternate choice. If you feel you can't complete this mission, then your father has requested that you join him on the battlefield.\" \n\n\nEver since that fateful day nearly four years ago, you've wanted to join your father in taking the battle to the Dellandians. Now the opportunity was in front of you, and you find yourself not sure what to do. \n\n\nIf what they say is true, then your closest friend is in trouble perhaps even in a life threatening situation. You find yourself worrying about Alessa probably more than you should. If you do go on this mission, and find her, then the other will expect you to kill her. On the flip side, if you don't go, then you won't be able to help her. On the off chance that you find her, and the two of you are alone, then you think you could do wonders for helping her. Of course that would also mean betraying your father to a degree, but you don't really think that Alessa is much of a threat to the Holy Kingdom. Deeper down, however, you have a selfish need that wants her to stay alive. You don't want the person that understands you best to fall prey to your allies. \n\n\nThen again, Alessa does have that curse, and if you're anything to go by, it is quite the power. And that's leaving out the fact that Alessa might not even be there in the first place. Any number of factors could contibute to her not being at the expected place, and you aren't particularly inclined to waste the next few months chasing someone that might not even be where you're looking. Of course, your father may also need you on the battlefield. You could list off several ways that you'd be of service. \n\n\nA moment of silence passes and the three others in the room look at you expectantly. \n\n\nYou nearly laugh out loud. While your father is important to you, you know he can wait a month or two more for you to get back. There's only one real choice. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Accept the mission", "result": "You'd rather be safe than sorry. What if you decided not to go, and they end up capturing her? You'd probably want to help her, but at the same time, you wouldn't want to betray your allies. A situation like that could only end in disaster. Instead you would go to the designated location and hope to find her by yourself before anyone else is able to get to her. \n\n\n\"I'll accept the mission.\" \n\n\nThe Headmaster raises his eyebrows in surprise. \"You're braver than me. I'm not sure I would have been able to make the choice you just did had i been in your position. Alright then. Vitre, I'll leave the details to you. Just know that you need to leave within the next few days.\" \n\n\nWith that the Headmaster dismisses you. Vitre walks ahead of you two and motions for you to follow after him. Luckily, the Academy students are all in classes, so there's no one left to gawk at you. Vitre leads you and Raven down a few hallways, and before long you can guess where he's taking you. \n\n\n\"Are we headed to the library?\" \n\n\nVitre nods. \"There are maps there.\" His deep voice speaks quietly as if afraid that speaking in a tone larger than a whisper would interrupt classes.\n\n\n\"I wonder if Headmaster Farid is upset. I'm sure he was looking forward to assigning the chosen hero his first mission,\" Raven comments to you whilst giving you a slight push with her arm. \n\n\n\"I'm sure he'll be fine.\" You don't continue the line of conversation she tries to start. Your thoughts are pretty much exclusively centered on how in the name of the Creator you're supposed to find Alessa. Well, not only find her, but also make sure everyone else doesn't find her. Vitre, however, speaks again effectively ruining your train of thought. \n\n\n\"Does he really still insist on giving every new grad their first mission?\" \n\n\nRaven answers, \"Yes, he does. Honestly, I'm not sure how he does it. Ever since the war started there's been way too many people waiting to receive their first mission.\" \n\n\n\"He probably just sends most of them of to the warfront for their first mission,\" you comment. \"You could consider us lucky that we don't have a mission like that.\" You aren't too sure you consider yourself lucky, but if you were Raven, then you don't doubt that she'd rather be finding a lost princess than fighting a war. \n\n\n\"I'm not so sure about that.\" Vitre responds. \"If this princess really is a Cursed One, then we could be in some serious trouble. That's probably one of the main reasons your father wants you here with me.\" \n\n\n\"Why you?\" Raven asks almost immediately. You have to admit that you were curious as well. You know why you and Raven were chosen, but you had only just met Vitre. \n\n\nHe shrugs. \"There isn't really some grand reason for it. I just happen to have a lot of experience in hunting people down. It makes me the ideal person to lead you two. Especially since we don't need some insanely good fighter. We are only hunting a princess. She probably hasn't even touched a sword in her life.\" \n\n\nYou knew this was false, but you didn't really want to comment. Let him think that Alessa is incapable. It'll be easier for her to avoid capture that way.\n\n\nThe three of you reach the library to find it mostly empty. A few academy students sat at desks doing classwork, but fortunate for you, no one is anyone near the map section. \n\n\nThe area isn't particularly large, but it's more than enough to suit your needs. Perhaps the most notable feature of the area is the massive wall map. It's position on the wall allows for many people to look at it without crowding it. The map itself is double your height and is about the same length from side to side. After a quick once over you realize it to be a map of the continent. It was fairly recent, and someone even updated it to show which cities are under Dellandian control, and which are in control of the Holy Kingdom.\n\n\nIt's this map that Vitre stops in front of. \n\n\n\"This is where we'll be going.\" He points to the very bottom of the map, specifically at the city of Aeors.\n\n\nYou remember the city from your history classes. Back before the Dellandians and the Holy Kingdom conquered the continent, this was the largest city, and the last one to fall before the Dellandians might. This was largely due to the fact that an army the size of the Dellandians was very difficult to provide food and drink for, but even harder when attempting to take a city in the middle of the desert. \n\n\nWhen you and Raven don't say anything, Vitre continues speaking. \"Aeors has always been fairly removed from the events on the continent, and even now they don't offer support to the Holy Kingdom or Dellandia. This makes it a nearly perfect place for people to want nothing to do with the war to move to. We surmise that the princess noticed this, and headed south so she could reap the benefits of relative neutrality.\"\n\n\nYou're about to interrupt him to tell him that that isn't much to go off of, but he raises his hand to stop you. \"We also have reports telling us that she was last sighted heading in a southward direction.\" \n\n\nRaven speaks this time. \"If others saw and recognized her, then why didn't they already bring her in?\" \n\n\n\"I mentioned it briefly before, but there is a strong possibility that this princess is a cursed one. Every time one of our own went to apprehend her, they only remember speaking to her as if they were old friends. Apparently, whenever someone enters her presence they forget why they approached her, and she uses her cursed powers to confound them.\" \n\n\nYou nod in agreement. You do remember how easily you were swayed in your dream. \n\n\nVitre continues to speak about the mission detailing how we would recognize her, which you already knew, how long it would they were to stay in Aeors, and other such information. Before too long, he finishes his debrief of the mission and everyone returns to the temporary rooms at the academy. \n\n\nWith your thoughts a mix of worry, determination, and fatigue you go to sleep. \n\n\n~\n\n\nThe next few days go by fairly quickly, and you find yourself on the road for the first time in while. Years in fact. You weren't really permitted to take lengthy trips during your years of schooling, so your last trip of moderate length was when you left Valium. \n\n\nThe first few days of the trip go by almost quickly, but with each passing day thereafter, you begin to feel like it's taking forever. You tend to stay silent for most of the trip, but Raven decides talking is much more preferable to silence. After the first few attempts at talking to you either fail, or end in uninteresting conversations, she decides to talk to Vitre. It goes fairly well for her, and the both of them get along famously for the remainder of the trip. You think you see Raven making eyes at Vitre, but you chalk it up to motion sickness.\n\n\nAs the days go by, the terrain changes and you begin to see progress being made in your trip. The surroundings go from green to brownish yellow, and you start seeing more and more sand replacing the trees. Eventually you get to the point where the three of you are wandering through the southern deserts of Dellandia. They're the only real obstacle that lies between you and Alessa. \n\n\nThe desert is hot, arid, and leaves you wishing for water often. Luckily for you, Vitre planned the trip well enough to take a route following a river. \n\n\nSeveral more days pass, and Vitre finally talks about strategy. \n\n\n\"How do you two think we should go about finding this lost princess?\" \n\n\nYou'd been waiting for this. This conversation was the key to achieving your goal of helping Alessa. Had you brought it up yourself, and then mentioned your plan, Vitre might've gotten suspicious. \n\n\n\"Well, we know her appearance. Her hair is supposed to be pretty distinct in Aeors. If we patrol the area, and can just find her, then I think I can apprehend her.\" \n\n\n\"What do you mean by 'I can apprehend her?' You don't seriously think that you're going to take her on alone, do you?\" Raven questions you with a surprised look on her face. \n\n\n\"Of course I do,\" you respond cheerfully. When you see Raven about to object again, you continue. \"I'm the only one who can do it. I am blessed by the Creator himself. I probably won't be affected by her black magic.\" You sound silly to yourself, but Raven takes your words completely seriously. \n\n\n\"But she's a cursed one!\" \n\n\n\"That's even more of a reason for me to do it alone. What if she takes one of you hostage through her powers? That'd complicate things considerably. I'm not sure I'd even be able to rescue you if it came to that.\"\n\n\nThroughout this back and forth, Vitre stayed silent, but takes the momentary lull in conversation to interject. \"He's got a point Raven.\" \n\n\nYou allow yourself a small smile. If Vitre liked your plan, then you're quite certain that the two of you could convince Raven. However, your smile disappears when you hear what he has to say next. \n\n\n\"That being said, Aeors is not the kind of city we need to wander alone in. You're liable to get stabbed, robbed, and you're body desecrated if you wander alone. While I'm sure you're quite capable of defending yourself, I'm not convinced wandering around alone is the best idea.\"\n\n\nYou think he's probably exagerating, but you do see his point. Regardless of that, however, this was Alessa you were trying to save. You doubt that you'd get an opportunity to talk with her alone if you all patrolled as a group together, and you sure didn't want to find her when you're with the two of them. \n\n\nYou still wonder if Vitre is right though...", "action_results": [{"action": "Concede the point", "result": "A heavy sigh escapes you. \"I guess you guys are right. Even if I had you two trailing behind me, it would still only take a moment to stab someone, so I could be dead before you guys come to my aid.\" You say that, but you still wish that you were going at it alone. You'd just have to find some other way to contact Alessa. \n\n\nVitre nods his agreement. \"We'll find clothes there to disguise ourselves with, and then we'll patrol the city several times. If we still can't find her, then we can consider another option. Any questions?\"\n\n\nRaven and you shake your heads, and your trio continues onward. \n\n\nIt's a few days later when you finally come upon the city of Aeors. Walls of hardened sand surround the entirety of the city, and towers line either side of the main entrance. As you arrive, the sun dips beyond the walls and casts a welcome shadow over you and your companions. You continue to follow the river until you three approach the gate, then Vitre surges ahead of you and Raven. \n\n\nHe approaches one of the two guards standing beneath the gate. After a muted conversation and a few coins exchanged, Vitre motions for you two to follow him into the city. You glance around and are surprised to see that the river flows under a section of the wall and into the city beyond. This sparks a memory from your history class back at the academy. \n\n\nIt was in your first year that you remember learning about the city of the lake. A city that was founded entirely around a lake and the resources that came from it. Supposedly the city was able to sustain itself entirely of the agriculture, water, and meat that came from it. \n\n\nYou and Raven pass through the gate and form up beside Vitre. If the view from the outside was impressive, then the view from the inside was magnificent. Sunlight falls over the tops of the sandstone buildings creating a dynamic contrast between sunlight and shadow. You continue to follow Vitre through a maze of roads until you come upon a tavern. Raucous laughter emanates from the inside, and for the first time since you went on this trip, you find yourself in a somewhat familiar atmosphere.\n\n\nVitre casts sidelong glances at the two of you that seem to say \"here we go.\" With that encouraging look, Vitre pushes open the worn door open and steps into the tavern. You and Raven follow moments afterward.\n\n\nThe interior of the tavern is lined with torches, and the walls, floors, and ceilings are all made of polished sandstone. It's looks kind of odd to you, but everyone else seems to not care. Wooden tables are strewn about the room along with people of every type. You examine the room carefully, first to see if by some crazy chance Alessa was there. Second, to see if there was any danger in the immediate area. Aside from a few shady people in corners, no one pays the newcomers much attention. \n\n\n\"Wait here, I'll go fetch us rooms.\" Vitre goes off to the bar to secure lodging leaving you and Raven alone. \n\n\nYou sneak a glance at her. Her skin has started to tan, and there's a tired look in her eyes, but other than that (and of course her getting more... developed) nothing has really changed since you first met her. Despite your expert glancing, she catches you looking at her and raises an eyebrow. \n\n\n\"Staring at me at a time like this?\" A smirk follows the comment and you scowl.\n\n\n\"I wasn't staring,\" you object. \n\n\nShe laughs lightly, and you find yourself suddenly embarrassed. \n\n\n\"I'm glad you decided forget about that crazy idea you had,\" she refers back to you wanting to look for Alessa alone. \n\n\n\"It wasn't that bad of an idea,\" you point out. \n\n\n\"It was a bad idea to me.\" She sees you with a confused expression on your face, then she hesitates. She seems to be debating on whether or not to say something\n\n\n\"Erron, I'm sure you know that I've liked you for some time now...\" she trails off leaving you with a surprised expression on your face. Not surprised about her feelings, but about the fact that she had the courage to say anything. Especially since you hadn't given her any signs her feelings were mutual.\n\n\nRaven then looks you in the eyes. You are a few inches taller than her despite the two year age difference, so your eyes lock onto her deep brown eyes fairly easily. \"I'm not sure what I'd have done if you'd gotten killed because of your plan, but I do know one thing. My heart would be broken without you.\" \n\n\nThe sudden confession leaves you slightly flushed, but you maintain your cool. While she was confessing she inched closer to you, and now she gazes at you expectantly. Her lips are parted, and her face is even more red than yours.\n\n\nYou can tell what she wants.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kiss her", "result": "You are happy to oblige, for her confession sparked the old crush you used to have on her. Those old feelings resurface, and you realize that they were never really gone on the first place.You lean down and press your lips to hers. \n\n\nYou haven't really had much experience in the past with kissing. None if you don't count the dream kiss with Alessa, so you aren't quite sure what to expect. Her lips are almost deliciously soft. Almost because her lips are a little cracked, but you don't really blame her. After all, your lips are probably in worse condition. \n\n\nThe kiss keeps going for another five seconds or so before the denizens of the tavern start to take notice. When they do start to take notice, many laugh it off and chalk it up young people's hormones. Others look longingly at the two of you wishing they were entrapped in such an enthralling relationship. \n\n\nYou don't take note of either, however, for you happen to be occupied at the moment. \n\n\n\"As much as I'd like to stand here all night, and have people take bets on which of you would run out of breath first... I'm sure you can continue this after we've put our things in our rooms.\" Vitre looks around the room somewhat worried. \n\n\nYou break away from Raven and take a couple of deep breaths. Raven does the same, and the both of you follow Vitre up the stairs to the living floor of the tavern. \n\n\n\"I'm glad I got separate rooms. I'd hate to have to bunk in the same room as two sexually heated teens,\" Vitre comments idly. The way he put it leaves you more self conscious than you normally are. You're sure Raven feels the same way.\n\n\nVitre stops in front of a room, and hands you a key. \"I'm in the next room over. I don't care what you two do tonight. Just be ready in the morning to begin our mission.\" You and Raven nod absently. You hear Vitre mutter something about sex being the weakness of Knights just before he leaves the two of you to go to his own room. \n\n\nYou put the key in the keyhole and fumble with the lock for a few seconds longer than normal before you get the door open. You barely manage to pull the key out when, Raven tugs on your other hand to pull you into the room. You hadn't given too much credence to Vitre's comment of sex, but when you look into raven's eyes again, you know that there's only one thing that such fevered feelings could lead to tonight. \n\n\nYou find yourself kissing again, but for much longer. Actually you delay ending the kissing for as long as possible, for you aren't really quite sure what to do. If you didn't really have much experience with kissing, then you had absolutely no experience with this kind of intimacy, and you really didn't fancy asking Raven what to do. \n\n\nDespite your best efforts, when Raven breaks away you find yourself more than ready to be embarrassed. After a few moments of shedding clothes, you find yourself wondering what to do next. Luckily, (or maybe unluckily?) Raven knows what she's doing, and helps you get to where you both want to be. \n\n\nThe whole process is pure ecstasy for you, but you find that it ends all too quickly for you. Raven doesn't seem to mind though, so you shrug it off. You both lay under the covers breathing heavily. Your arm holds her close to you, and she uses the position to lean in and whisper into your ear. \n\n\n\"I love you.\" \n\n\nMaybe it's because of the heat of the moment phenomena , but you respond in kind, \"I love you too.\" \n\n\nSilence ensues and Raven falls asleep. Soon afterwards you find yourself drifting off, and your last thoughts before you go to sleep are you hoping that this relationship won't change between you two. \n\n\nFortunately your wishes come true. Unfortunately, this is because you are so tired that you don't realize the intruder enter the room. You and Raven die in your sleep from slit open throats. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Don't kiss her", "result": "Despite having cracked lips, you want to kiss her. You feel an inkling of the crush you used to have start to her come back, and then you nearly kiss her regardless, but you manage to stop yourself. \n\n\n\"Raven. Whatever you feel for me, see if you still feel it for me later. When we aren't on the cusp of life or death situations. Maybe then I can see how I feel about you.\" Disappointment flashes across her features. \"Until then, I don't want to be distracted by you.\" \n\n\nYou feel that you didn't really choose the best set of words to say, for now disappointment and hurt color her features. You mentally wince at the awkward tension you feel building up, but thankfully Vitre saves you from braving it alone. \n\n\n \"We'll have two rooms here for a week. If we haven't found her by then, then we can pay for longer. Agreed?\" Raven nods slowly. Certainly not in her usual jovial manner. You nod as well, and Vitre looks back and forth between the two of you with a knowing look on his face.\n\n\n\"Alright then. Follow me.\" You both follow him as he leads you up the stairs. \"Erron and I will share a room. Raven, you'll take this room.\" He gestures to a door on his left. \"We're in the next room over. If you need us, just pound on the wall. Okay?\" \n\n\nYou watch as Raven nods numbly, and you feel a brief stab of regret. Maybe you should've kissed her if it meant that you were to keep your previous relationship. Raven walks into her room and the door slams shut. \n\n\nVitre gives you a brief judgemental glance. \"What did you do to her?\" \n\n\nYou stay quiet until you are safe from being heard in your room. \"She confessed to me.\" You try to leave it at that, but he motions for you to continue. \n\n\nYou look away from him, \"I told her that, uh, I didn't want to be distracted by her.\" Your usual articulate self is long gone, and replaced by a less convenient embarrassed version of yourself. \n\n\nVitre shakes his head back and forth. \"You should've let her down more easily. I expected more from the Chosen Hero.\" He says that last part because he knows it'll get to you the most. \"I can't have something like this ruining the mission. You're going to have to make up with her before long, or the rest of this trip is going to be very unpleasant.\"\n\n\nYou nod your assent, and he gives you one last disappointing look before he goes off to take a bath. \n\n\nSomehow being left alone with your thoughts is even worse than having someone chastise you. You run the situation over and over again in your head trying to find a way that you could've rejected her without having left her so dejected.\n\n\nVitre comes back before you can fathom a way to do so, and you go ahead to take a bath as well. The water feels heavenly, but you don't feel as if you're really enjoying it quite as much as you could. Even before the incident today, you had quite a lot on your mind. With the addition of a sad friend on your mind, you find yourself starting to get mentally taxed. Sleep would do you good.\n\n\nYou come back to the room minutes later to find Vitre already asleep. Asleep on the only bed in the room at that. You sigh and tell yourself that you deserve it when you sink into a very uncomfortable wooden chair. You manage to get a few winks of sleep, but you often wake up due to aches on your body from sleeping in such an uncomfortable position. \n\n\nYou wake up again, and you automatically start to rub your back, when you see a figure begin to creep through the window. You immediately close your eyes most of the way, and hope he didn't see you moving. Luckily for you, it appears he didn't. \n\n\nHe wears a black cloak, so you can't see who he is, but that isn't what catches your attention the most. Instead of a typical rope coming across his chest to connect the two sides of the cloak together, there is an insignia. In the dark it's hard to see, but you think it's a symbol of the sun. You think it has a reddish hue, but you don't know for sure. \n\n\nHe walks silently and leans over the bed to stare at Vitre. You ready yourself to spring at the intruder at the first signs of aggression, but there's no need. Apparently Vitre wasn't who he was looking for. Instead the man turns his attention to you. You make sure your breathing is even as he makes his way over to you, and that your eyes are so close to being closed that it's nearly impossible to tell.\n\n\nHe examines your face, and gives slight nod to himself. You assume that you are his target, and ready yourself for the opportunity to strike. The man pulls a dagger out of his cloak, and starts the motions to stab you. \n\n\nIt's what you were waiting for. You twist out of the way at the last second, and his dagger lodges into the back of the chair instead. You take the opportunity to punch him in the stomach and shove him to the floor. He lets go of the knife, and you quickly pull that from the chair's back. The man recovers fairly quickly and attempts to tackle you to the ground, but the attempt only goes so far. You knee him in the face and throw him across the room. Coincidentally, that place you throw him happens to be the bed Vitre lays on.\n\n\nYou see Vitre start to stir out of the corner of your eye. You decide that you needed this guy immobilized as soon as possible, so you follow up your throwing him with another throw. This time, however, you're throwing the guy's dagger. Your aim is true, and the dagger hits the guys upper thigh. He yells out in pain causing Vitre to wake up fully. \n\n\nYou think of why someone would be targeting you, but then realize you have your priorities skewed. You needed to make sure that the danger was gone. You rush to the window and gaze out across the city that you can see. At first you see nothing, but a glint of silver shines in the distance and you duck down. An arrow embeds itself in the wall directly behind you.\n\n\nYour heart pound in your chest as you realize that you could've been dead if you hadn't been so fast. You glance to Vitre who has the first attacker subdued on the floor of the room. Whoever these people were, they obviously wanted you dead, and you doubt they'd stop after one attempt. You figure you should take them out now before they have a chance to regroup and attempt another assassination attempt. \n\n\n\"Make sure Raven is okay!\" You call out to Vitre as you vault the window sill out onto the street below. You hear what may have been Vitre telling you to wait, but you ignore that. Better to ask forgiveness than permission. \n\n\nAnother arrow whizzes pased you on the way down to the street. The fall is two stories high, but you use the momentum from gravity and roll to reduce any damage you might take from it. As fast as possible, you spring up from your roll to get behind cover. \n\n\nYou glance from behind the wall you took cover at. Almost immediately you hear the twang of a bow, and, consequently, you move your head back behind cover. Thoughts roil in your head as you try to figure out how to get to the enemy without getting hit by an arrow. A few different ideas come into your head, but when you examine and reexamine them you are only left with two plausible ideas. \n\n\nYou could use your blessing to speed up your reflexes in hopes that it'll allow you to dodge any arrows come at you. \n\n\nThe other idea you have much less confidence in working. You could dash from cover to cover, and hope he doesn't hit you. You don't really like this idea, because it puts your fate into the air. Instead of relying on your reflexes, you'd simply be hoping that he'd miss. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Dodge from cover to cover", "result": "The silence of the night seems to accentuate the risks your about to take. You breathe deeply and launch yourself from your position, across the alley, and behind a wall on the other side\n\n\nAn arrow hisses past you, but you manage to avoid being hit. You take another discreet glance down the alley, but this time your able to make out a figure about sixty feet farther down. \n\n\nYou take another deep breath and launch yourself across the alley once more. Once more an arrow launches past you, but once again, it misses. You feel the first two successful passes fill you with positive energy. You move once again across the alley.\n\n\nUnfortunately you forgot to take into account that you got closer to him with every pass that you made. If he was any less good of a shot, then your plan may have worked, but an arrow pierces your side and you feel your energy leave you. Breathing heavily, you attempt to call for help, but your voice is silenced by an arrow protruding through your throat. \n\n\nIf only you were faster.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Use your blessing", "result": "In the past years you've become fairly efficient at tricking your body into thinking it needed to be protected. That way you'd be able to use your power whenever you wanted. Now, however, you realize you do not need to trick yourself at all. \n\n\nYou breathe in deeply, and then let that deep breath out. If anyone wa paying attention, then they might've thought an angel had appeared in the street. The mark on your back glows through your clothes and that familiar heat radiates across your shoulders. You prepare to rush the man, and at the last second pull your sword from you belt. \n\n\nYou rush out into the alley, and head in the direction of the archer. Almost immediately an arrow flies toward your head. You twist your head out of the way, and manage to get out of the way before it can touch you. It was close, but you were still fast enough to dodge it. You feel a surge of success, but you make sure you don't allow it to go to your head as you barrel down the alleyway. \n\n\nJust before the next arrow flies at you, you manage to make out the outline of your second attacker. The next arrow flies toward your chest, but the feeling of protecting yourself grows even stronger. Thus you feel like the arrow is moving slower. You bring up your left hand (the hand that isn't holding the sword) up and your timing is perfect. You grab the arrow just before it hits you. Somewhere in the back of your mind you feel pain from splinters entering your hand, but that doesn't;t bother you anymore. You've given yourself into the adrenaline that comes from such a life threatening situation. \n\n\nYou gauge the distance between you and the shadowed figure, and realize, with relief, that he wouldn't have enough time to draw another arrow before you reached him. \n\n\nUnfortunately, he notices this as well, and instead of bothering to fight, he runs. You continue running after him determined to find out who exactly wanted you dead this bad. \n\n\nThe would be assassin is much faster than you expected, so even with your blessing, you're barely gaining on him. He leads you down a maze of alleys and streets until he finally makes a wrong turn an hits a dead end. You cease your running, and the man turns around with a panicked expression on his face. Time seems to slow down as you wait for him to try and dodge past you. He stays eerily still as you walk towards him, and if you didn't have your blessing activated you might not have caught the signs. The signs that you were led into a trap. The man your facing made the mistake of glancing behind you. That mistake alone might not have given it away, but you hear the light fall of a single footstep behind you. \n\n\nThe hair on your neck stands, and you roll out of the way to dodge whatever was behind you. While your roll saved you from that initial attack, you're left on the defensive when you look behind you. \n\n\nSeveral cloaked figures stand between you and the exit of the dead end. You quickly count them up. Five. Including the archer from before, there were five more cloaked figures cornering you. All with that symbol of the red sun on their cloak. As you stand up from the roll, you see that the guy who tried to decapitate you looking suitably surprised at your reflexes. \n\n\nYou use half a moment to examine the surroundings. The blessing helps marvelously with this. You take note of each important thing in the form of fragmented thoughts.\n\n\nOnly one archer. Everyone else has swords. They arrived at different times. Must be why only one person attacked you a moment ago. One of the five stands alone in the back. The archer from before looks ready to draw another arrow. Take him out first...situation has changed. Don't try to disable. Go for the kill.\n\n\nAll of these thoughts run through your mind just as that guy (whom attacked you seconds ago) steps forward for a second try. It would be his last mistake. \n\n\nYou've always been great at fighting, even without your blessing, but with it you're pretty much unstoppable. You were even able to surpass Miss Sarrin before you graduated. \n\n\nSo when assassin number three (Assassin number one being the one back at the tavern) decides he wants another try, you parry his thrust and slash his throat before he could understand what just happened. \n\n\nAssassin number two managed to string an arrow while you dealt with his friend, and is now in the process of aiming it at you. Assassin's number four and five decide that advancing at the same time might be better alternative to going at you separately. Assassin number six, oddly enough, doesn't do anything else but watch things go down. He seems to be the leader of numbers one through five. \n\n\nYou're left with two viable options. (short of giving up that is)", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack numbers four and five", "result": "Your original line of thought made you want to take out the archer first, but then a brilliant idea comes to mind. You glance at the archer, and sure enough he's starting to aim at you. You're tempted to smile, but you think better of it. You don't want to tip your hand.\n\n\nYou charge Assassins four and five, and take a brief, seemingly unnoticeable action, moment to position yourself between the archer and his friends.\n\n\nWhile surprised the Assassins react quickly enough. You slash and stab in a whirl of different tricks, and despite the fact that there are two people against you, you manage to put them on the defensive. during this, however, you use your blessing to the fullest. Your urge to protect yourself is so strong that time seems to slow down. It's certainly potent enough for your plan to work. \n\n\nThe first step being to place yourself, and therefore assassins four and five, in the archer's line of fire. Second step is to exploit your power so much that you're reflexes will be fast enough to dodge the arrow as soon as you here the twang of the bow. After that dispatching someone one on one would be easy, then the archer would go down leaving one final person to take care of.\n\n\nHe's the only person you're truly wary of, for when placed against a blessed one, all he does is watch. A cool confidence that you find a little disheartening. Of course, that's still only a little. There's no doubt in your mind that you'll be able take care of him. \n\n\nSo you wait. You wait for the twang of the bow whilst attempting to break through the defense of two people at once. Not just two people at that. Two people that happened to be quite skilled with a blade. you might have been more well aware of this if you hadn't taken the other two out via surprise. Still it isn't long before you do manage to find a whole in their defenses. \n\n\nYour assault of attacks must have become very taxing for them, and especially for assassin number five, for the next feint you throw at him proves to be his downfall. Your fake thrust to his left side opens his right side up, and you take that opportunity to deal a lightning speed thrust straight into his heart. \n\n\nIf you hadn't used your power to such an extent, then your sense of time may not have been so skewed. For that reason, you don't seem to realize that the archer didn't take his first opportunity to fire at you. No, he'd already seen the insane reflexes you'd exhibited prior to being cornered. He would wait for the perfect opportunity to shoot at you. \n\n\nStabbing your enemy through the heart was one such opportunity. Your blessing not only gave you increased speed, but also increased strength. When slashing it didn't particularly matter, but with a stab, it's easier to use to much strength. Therefore, when you finally do hear the twang, it takes you much too long to yank the sword out of your opponents body. \n\n\nEven so, you manage to let go of the sword to try and dodge away. The arrow still hits you however, albeit barely missing your heart. It is a tiny success in the grand scheme of things, for assassin number four takes the opportunity to avenge his comrade. If only you had been more self aware.\n\n\n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Attack number two", "result": "It doesn't matter that two guys are advancing toward you from your right, you don't at all feel comfortable with someone aiming an arrow at your back. It would only take one mistake on your part, and you would be lying dead on the cold hard stones of Aeors. \n\n\nYou rush archer number two with incredible speed, and the other two rush after you. The archer brings his bow up just as you get to him, and at the same time assassin number four closes in on you from behind. A truly un-ideal situation. Well at least if you hadn't expected it.\n\n\nYou twist out of the way the moment your heightened senses see the archer begin to release his arrow. Unfortunately for number four, he is nowhere near as fast as you. The arrow slams into his chest silencing him immediately. \n\n\nAstonishment colors the eyes of the archer as he kills his comrade, but you don't allow him any time for regret. You immediately advance and stab him through the stomach. Your blade sinks far into his stomach, certainly farther than normal, and you note that if you were any stronger, thn you very well could have your hand wrist deep into his body. \n\n\nLuckily for you, assassin number five isn't fast enough to hit you before you withdraw your sword from the archer's stomach. Unluckily for you, it seems that assassin number six finally decided to contribute to the fight. He makes his way towards the both of you just as you swing your first slash at number five. He barely manages to block it, and is put on the defensive immediately. You only manage to get a few swings out before number six joins the fight. \n\n\nA fast thrust is immediately dealt towards you, and as you parry it away, you realized that it was thrown with immense strength. You simultaneously kick out at number five, catching him in the leg, and slash from the bottom up at the newcomer.\n\n\nYour slash, although extremely fast, doesn't hit him. Instead, he's fast enough to avoid the deadly attack. Well he is. Your sword does manage to catch the edge of his cloak hood thoug, and the cloak material is thick enough that your sword takes just longer than a moment to slice through it. That moment is more than enough to send his hood flying off of his head. \n\n\nYou're so surprised that you nearly drop your sword. Ashyr stand before you. Obviously older, and with a scar on his chin, but Ashyr nonetheless.\n\n\nYou remember back when you first clashed swords years ago. For a brief moment you feel nostalgia, but that moment passes very quickly when you remember that he's trying to kill you. \n\n\nNumber five recovers from the kick and swings his sword in a deadly arc over his head at you, which you block, then Ashyr follows up with an attack of his own, which you parry.\n\n\nThe three of you soon enter a dance of sorts. Blades ring throughout the alley and echo into the night. There's a brief moment where you wonder if anyone will here the commotion, but you shrug it off quickly enough. Your opponents had the luxury of choosing the sight for this fight. You doubt they would choose a place where someone would impede their killing you. \n\n\nWithout your blessing you're sure you would already be dead, for Ashyr certainly kept honing his swordplay since the Academy, and number five is no push over either. You hate to admit it, but you doubt if you could beat Ashyr without your blessing. Someone of his caliber fighting against you would require you to use your blessing to win, and with someone else helping him... it turns the fight into a near stalemate. It is only a near stalemate though, because your increased prowess with your blessing, let alone that Ashyr no longer has strength and height advantage over you, allow you the edge in this fight. \n\n\nThat being said, you aren't really fighting offensively, so you don't get very far in your attempts to take them out. \n\n\nYou decide that in order to effectively protect yourself, and stay alive, you need to focus your attack on one of your opponents.\n\n\nWhile assassin five is certainly weaker, you briefly think that it might better suit you if you take out Ashyr first. Of course, there's also the flip side. If you take number five out quickly enough, then Ashyr won't be able to stand alone against you. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Focus your attacks on number five", "result": "Maybe it' a greater sense of strategy. or perhaps you just want to save Ashyr for last. Whatever the reason, you focus all of your strength on number five.\n\n\nTo the untrained eye, the fight will have stayed the same, but to the trained eye everything changed in the span of a second. Before you were attacking and defending from both sides, but with your new strategy you only attack against number five, and only ever defend against Ashyr. so long as you sufficiently defend yourself from Ashyr, and constantly press the attack on number five, then you don't get harmed. \n\n\nTo your surprise, it not only works, but it works famously. Number five turns out to be less suitable to defending than to attacking. He practically stumbles several times in his attempts to stay alive. What surprises you even more is Ashyr's performance on offense. He doesn't attack quite as skillfully as you might imagine he would have, so his attacks end up having loads of power, yet not quite enough skill to use it effectively. You catch a glimpse of his face during the encounter, and his face is a mix of true rage and hate. You knew he didn't like you, but you didn't think it would be quite so extensive. \n\n\nYou press the attack on number five even more urging him to cease his impotent defense. Every swing of yours brings a weaker block from him. Eventually this becomes too much for him and one of his blocks fails to have nearly enough power to stop your blow. Your over head strike knocks his sword clear out of his hand, but your sword continues and bites down into his neck. \n\n\nHalfway decapitated, number five falls to the ground amongst the bodies of the other assassins. \n\n\nDespite your moment of victory, Ashyr is undeterred. He launches a powerful strike in a deadly arc at your shoulder. Probably in hopes of making you lose the ability to use your arm. It was a smart move, but you do manage to bring your sword back in time for you to block it. To your chagrin, his attack was plentifully powerful. Enough to push your block down, and even make a slight cut in your arm. The pain isn't too great, and with the addition of of your adrenaline pumping you barely feel it at all. \n\n\nThis must've been a last ditch effort to defeat you, for he immediately goes back on the defensive. With your focus solely on Asher, you are able to to put all of your effort into attack. The eerie similarity of the situation astonishes you for a moment.\n\n\nYou pushing him back with a sudden ferocity akin to a demon.\n\n\nHim, defending as if his life depended on it. \n\n\nYou continuing to press him with attacks despite fatigue starting to come to you. \n\n\nHim, realizing your fatigue and desperately trying to hold out until your attacks weaken. \n\n\nYou, finally failing in your attacks, and on the defensive. \n\n\nHim, pushing you back with attacks that you are barely able to defend against. \n\n\nYou start gasping for air, and it seems that you can never gulp down enough. Your eyes blur for a moment and Ashyr nearly takes your head off. Wait, this isn't right. You think this as you barely manage to stay alive against his onslaught of attacks. Your blessing should be giving you much greater energy than this. You try to activate it again, but realize that it is already activated. Still, you don't have the energy that you know you should have. \n\n\nThen everything connects in your head. The red suns...they were a symbol for an ancient assassin group. Your mind goes all the way back to when you were with Alessa in the Man's cabin. It was one of the books he had on the shelf. So these people weren't just assassins against you, they were regular assassins. And as with most assassins, Ashyr probably had his sword poisoned. It would explain the sudden loss of energy, as well as why he was so intent on simply hitting you. \n\n\nYou grow weaker and weaker. You realize that there's only one way this can end. You clumsily block Ashyr's next attack then immediately back up against the end of the alley. Apparently he had been pressing you hard enough to push you into a literal corner. Your back slides against the alley wall, and you sink into a sitting position on the ground. The strength gives out in your arms and your sword clatters to the ground beside you. \n\n\nAshyr stands above you with a triumphant expression on his face. He slowly brings his sword over his head and prepares to bring it down in a deadly stab. You close your eyes and await the inevitable. \n\n\nIt doesn't come. you hear a whirring sound in the air and then the sound of metal striking the alley wall. You open your eyes tiredly. \n\n\nAlessa stands at the end of the alley. The moonlight shines across her hair making her shine in the darkness. In her hands is a gleaming silver sword, and at her shoulders you can see a darkish aura rising from her persona. Ashyr stares in astonishment at the newcomer, but his true goal doesn't leave his mind. He brings his sword down again at you. You blink and Alessa is already beside you stopping his sword from killing you. \n\n\nShe was extremely close now, and you could see the outline of dark wings through her leather armor. Despite that you dearly wish to fall asleep...\n\n\n\"Stay with me Erron!\" Her voice commands you, and you reopen your eyes. Ashyr attack aat you again, and Alessa manages to defend you again. You want to tell her to leave you, but you don't have the strength to say anything. \n\n\nAlessa pushes Ashyr back with her sword, and a fight ensues. Alessa is clearly no match for him in terms of skill, but her curse gives her enough power to stay toe to toe with him. Alessa manages to push him back a few feet, but she is nowhere near as good at you at fighting. Moments later, you hear a pained cry as Ashyr's sword slashes across her upper arm. \n\n\nYou lose all hope then. Alessa's power would soon be depleted, and you would both die. The thought of Alessa dying starts to motivate you, and you look for ways to help her. You see your sword lying on the ground beside you, and you wonder if you can pick it up. Maybe you have enough energy for one last thrust...\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Pick up the sword and stab Ashyr", "result": "You muster all of your remaining strength and reach for the sword. For a moment your fingers fumble, but you manage to pick the sword up. You roll forward onto one knee, and for a brief satisfying moment, you think you'll be able to do it.\n\n\nTurns out the extra movement only accelerated the poison. You collapse to the ground in a fit of coughs. \n\n\nYou die, knowing that you fail in saving Alessa. Some \"Chosen Hero\" you are.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "See if your blessing works", "result": "Your thoughts go once again to the cabin. The last time you saw Alessa in person. The choice was offered to you, but no words were said. You felt that one would give you power, while the other would give you the power to protect. You assumed that the power to protect meant only yourself, but as you see Alessa fighting for her life, you realize that being able to protect means that you protect more than just yourself. \n\n\nAnd if there was anyone that you wanted to protect more than yourself, it was her. \n\n\nPower surges from your shoulders and throughout your body. More power than you have ever felt before. You feel your blessing fighting off the poison and expelling it from your system. Much of the power you felt moments before, leave you body with the poison. You guess the blessing wasn't meant to heal such a detrimental poison. You reach over to your side and confidently grab your sword. \n\n\nAlessa looks like she's starting to feel the debilitating effects of the poison now, but the Creator must be on your side, for she sees you stand up. You meet her eyes, and she seems to understand exactly what you mean to do. \n\n\nShe maneuvers the fight so that she is facing directly towards you whilst Ashyr's back is right in front of you. You move as fast as possible but your fatigue hasn't entirely gone away, so the going is much slower than you'd wish it to be. A few feet away from Ashyr, he hears something and starts to look behind him. \n\n\nBut it's too late. You force your sword through his back, and into his heart. His body falls limply to the ground dead. \n\n\nAlessa falls moments after, and you rush to her side. The poison looks like its affecting her much more quickly than it affected you, so you know you don't have much time. \n\n\nHer eys open, and she smiles weakly at you. \"I'm glad I got to save you.\" \n\n\nYour thoughts are frantic, as you try and think of a way to save her. You weren't nearly strong enough to carry her anywhere, so you start to panic. \n\n\nAlessa's eyes start to close. \"Stay with me, Alessa!\" You shout frantically at her repeating the words she said to you minutes before. \n\n\nYou start losing all hop, and then an odd thought occurs to you. \n\n\nYou've never really known if you received this power from the Creator or not, but if you did, then surely he didn't want you to die. \n\n\nYou start to pray. You ask him to help you, and you promise that you'll forever be in his debt. You go on, and at the same to you start using your power to see if you can heal Alessa. \n\n\nYou feel power going through you and into her, but her eyes don't open. You pull and pull as much power as you can from your body in order to heal her. When you exhaust all of your energy, you pass out. ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Focus your attacks on Ashyr", "result": "You decide that taking out the greater threat will prove to be more advantageous to you in the long run. \n\n\nTo the untrained eye, the fight will have stayed the same, but to the trained eye everything changed in the span of a second. Before you were attacking and defending from both sides, but with your new strategy you only attack against Ashyr, and only ever defend against number five. so long as you sufficiently defend yourself from number five, and constantly press the attack on Ashyr, then you don't get harmed.\n\n\nWell that's the idea. While it works at the beginning, you soon realize that you've made a huge mistake. On the outside Ashyr has always seemed like he would be an aggressor in a fight, but it is actually the contrary. You remember your first fight. You won after pressing him with a series of attacks, but never once did he truly falter in his defenses. Maybe if you had time you could wear him down, but you don't have that kind of time. You only managed to defeat him before, because of the overwhelming power from the blessing, and because you bested him while he was attacking. \n\n\nThis time is barely different. Except that number five is smarter than he looks, and has begun finding patterns in your defenses. Your deadly speed, strength, and skill are being analyzed and holes are starting to be exploited. Every swing presses you, and soon enough you're having to spend more and more time/energy defending than attacking. \n\n\nEventually Ashyr finds a hole in your attacks and manages to put you on the defensive. Despite your vast reserves of energy, you find yourself starting to tire. Your focus begins to wear thin as well, and it's all you can do to stay alive. You attempt to trick yourself into thinking that you need to be protected. It proves that you aren't in the best shape mentally, because you're already trying to protect yourself to the maximum. \n\n\nSuddenly you lose your grip on your sword, and, consequently, you make an awkward block against Ashyr. It proves to be a fatal mistake. After that clumsy block, number five surges forward and horizontally slashes at you. The blade cuts deep into your right side dealing you immense pain. \n\n\nFortunately for you, Ashyr ends the pain with a well placed stab through your heart. Your body falls limply into pools of blood on the ground. ", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Put your hands up and hope he doesn't shoot", "result": "A thought briefly crosses your mind. What if I just pretend to give up? \n\n\nIt doesn't seem like it'll work at first, but you hope that he'll be so surprised that he won't know what to do. Maybe even see if he can take you hostage. Then you would make your move.\n\n\nYou step out from behind the wall with your hands up above your head. A brief moment of silence passes, and you feel triumphant for a brief second. Then an arrow flies from the alleyway the archer is staked out in. You are no where near fast enough to dodge it, and it pierces through your chest. \n\n\nYou don't know why you thought this plan would work, but one thing is for certain. You're failed the Holy Kingdom in your role as the Chosen Hero. \n\n\nThe last thing you think is that the Creator must be face palming at your stupidity. ", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Keep trying to convince him", "result": "\"You said it yourself Vitre. There's a reason my father wanted me to be on this mission. If we all just travel together, then we'd draw too much attention, and an encounter with her could end catastrophically.\" \n\n\nSeeing that Vitre and Raven still weren't convinced, you continue. \"If you're that worried about me, then just follow behind me at a distance. That way you can rush to my aid if I ever need it.\" You make sure the emphasis on the 'if' is very clear. \n\n\nVitre starts nodding. \"That could work,\" \n\n\nRaven throws her hands up in exasperation. \"You too Vitre? I can't believe you really think this is a good idea.\" \n\n\nRaven continues to to express her dislike of the plan, but now that you have Vitre agreeing with you, everything goes much smoother. Even so, it takes most the rest of the trip to convince her. \n\n\nWhen she is finally convinced, everything returns to normal, or at least as normal as it can get when traveling. \n\n\nIt's a few days later when you finally come upon the city of Aeors. Walls of hardened sand surround the entirety of the city, and towers line either side of the main entrance. As you arrive, the sun dips beyond the walls and casts a welcome shadow over you and your companions. You continue to follow the river until you three approach the gate, then Vitre surges ahead of you and Raven. \n\n\nHe approaches one of the two guards standing beneath the gate. After a muted conversation and a few coins exchanged, Vitre motions for you two to follow him into the city. You glance around and are surprised to see that the river flows under a section of the wall and into the city beyond. This sparks a memory from your history class back at the academy. \n\n\nIt was in your first year that you remember learning about the city of the lake. A city that was founded entirely around a lake and the resources that came from it. Supposedly the city was able to sustain itself entirely of the agriculture, water, and meat that came from it. \n\n\nYou and Raven pass through the gate and form up beside Vitre. If the view from the outside was impressive, then the view from the inside was magnificent. Sunlight falls over the tops of the sandstone buildings creating a dynamic contrast between sunlight and shadow. You continue to follow Vitre through a maze of roads until you come upon a tavern. You can tell this because of the raucous laughter coming the inside. \n\n\nVitre casts sidelong glances at the two of you that seem to say \"here we go.\" With that encouraging look, Vitre pushes open the worn door open and steps into the tavern. You and Raven follow moments afterward.\n\n\nThe interior of the tavern is lined with torches, and the walls, floors, and ceilings are all made of polished sandstone. It's looks kind of odd to you, but everyone else seems to not care. Wooden tables are strewn about the room along with people of every type. You examine the room carefully, first to see if by some crazy chance Alessa was there. Second, to see if there was any danger in the immediate danger. Aside from a few shady people in corners, no one pays the newcomers much attention. \n\n\n\"Wait here, I'll go fetch us rooms.\" Vitre goes off to the bar to secure lodging leaving you and Raven alone. \n\n\nYou sneak a glance at her. Her skin has started to tan, and there's a tired look in her eyes, but other than that (and of course her growing) nothing has really changed about her since you first met her. Despite your expert glancing, she catches you looking at her and raises an eyebrow. \n\n\n\"Staring at me at a time like this?\" A smirk follows the comment and you scowl.\n\n\n\"I wasn't staring,\" you object. \n\n\nShe laughs lightly, and you find yourself suddenly embarrassed. Luckily, Vitre comes walking back to you giving you a welcome distraction. \n\n\n\"We'll have two rooms here for a week. If we haven't found her by then, then we can pay for longer. Sound good?\" \n\n\nYou and Raven nod your assent, and Raven and Vitre start to go up the stairs to the rooms. You pull Vitre back for a moment.\n\n\n\"Where's the privy?\" You ask him quietly. \n\n\nHe keeps his face straight apparently catching on that you would prefer Raven to not hear about your endeavor to expel waste from your bowels. Even so, amusement twinkles in his eyes. \n\n\n\"The Innkeeper told me it was out behind the building.\" \n\n\nYou whisper a thanks to him, and head outside to relieve yourself. You find the privy easily enough, and you step inside eagerly. \n\n\nIt's what comes after you finish, however, that complicates things. When you open the door to go back outside, you find a cloaked figure waiting for you. From the physique type, you can tell it's a man. a man with a sinister kind of presence. Before you can ask him what he wants, he reaches into his cloak and pulls out a dagger. He then lunges at you. \n\n\nHe's fast, but not nearly fast enough to hit you. You easily sidestep, and as his hand passes your body, you pull on it and shove him past you and into the privy. You are just about to turn around and reenter the privy to question the guy, when you see something glint in the corner of your eye. You step entirely out of the privy and roll away just in time to dodge an arrow. \n\n\nYou heart pounds in your chest, but doesn't stay that way for long. When you rolled out of the way of the arrow, you happened to roll in to a third enemy. This time you don't have time to react. The third guy had a sword waiting, and he plunges it through your heart. \n\n\nThe last thing you see is the face of Ashyr standing over you, and the word \"Payback\" mouthed on his lips. \n\n\n \n\n \n\n \n\n ", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "New friends (Background)", "result": "The first of your new friends came in a most unexpected way. \n\n\nFollowing the day of your victory against Ashyr. You appeared to be something of a legend among the underclassmen. Even the upperclassmen showed respect for you. Ashyr must have been something of a symbol for the school. The Headmaster's son. No one particularly had a problem with him, and everyone respected him. Your victory sparked a transition phase from Ashyr being the symbol of the school, to you eclipsing him.\n\n\nOddly enough, Ashyr went missing. Searches were conducted, but it was to no avail. It was when Ashyr was finally confirmed as a missing person, that this new friend came to see you. You'd seen her in the hallways prior to your meeting, but she wasn't in any of your classes, so you didn't really pay her much attention. That is, until she slapped you. \n\n\nIt happened on your way back to the academy building after a training session with Miss Sarrin. You saw her coming towards you, but didn't pay her much attention. Why would a girl as pretty as her be storming toward you with an expression filled with ill intent? Well, apparently Ashyr had a girlfriend. \n\n\nThe slap she gave you probably surprised you more than it hurt. You were left confounded for a solid moment before she continued her assault on you in the form of words. \"What did you do to Asher?\"\n\n\nYou half expected her to be screaming her question given that she slapped you moments before, but to your surprise her voice is relatively quiet. \n\n\nYou shake your head. \"No. I've only ever met him twice. The last time I saw him was the first day school was open,\" you explain carefully. You'd rather not have her explode and slap you again. You don't think your honor could take another blow like that. \n\n\nHer angry demeanor changes in the blink of an eye. Tears start pouring from her eyes, and she sits down on the grass beside you. You aren't really sure how to react to all of this, for you've only been slapped like that once before, and the way you reacted to that left you feeling guilty beyond belief. \n\n\nYou decide that you can't just leave her there, but in the same thought you decide that it isn't really your place to comfort her either. Instead you stand still and wait for her to cry it out. you didn't really have any plan for the rest of the day anyway. \n\n\nMinutes pass, and you feel your legs begin to tire. You cast your thoughts back to the lesson with Miss Sarrin you had today. It was mostly just stuff you already knew, but you found yourself interested in it nonetheless. \n\n\nYou start thinking about how you ended up in this situation in the first place. About your mother's death, and your's and Alessa's falling out. If the girl slapping you didn't sully your carefree mood earlier, then this certainly did. \n\n\nYou're in the middle of that depressing train of thought when you notice the girl staring at you. Her tear stained face and eyes bore into you, but it has neither the anger nor sadness from before. Instead curiosity burns in her in her deep brown eyes. \n\n\n\"Why are you still here?\" she asks.\n\n\n\"I couldn't just leave you here,\" you respond. You realize in the back of you're mind that she might think you are more caring than you really are. You only couldn't leave her because that would be cowardly. Certainly not because you cared about some random girl crying. \n\n\nHesitantly, she stands and offers her hand for you to shake. \"I'm sorry about earlier. I was just frustrated with Ashyr disappearing on me.\" \n\n\nYou take her hand, albeit warily. If your life were more ordinary, then you might consider this an odd day, but you figure that it could've gone worse. \n\n\nShe releases your hand and fakes a smile. \"I hope we can start over. My name is Raven. Pleased to meet you.\" \n\n\nWhile you aren't sure if you really want to be acquaintances with her, you decide that it she can't always be this emotionally unstable. \n\n\n\"I'm Erron.\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Lessons with Miss Sarrin (Background)", "result": "Your first year at the academy goes by fairly quickly. You turn out to be a less studious person than you'd ever realized. While you were at the castle, every lesson was tailored specifically to you, so you picked things up pretty easily. In this new environment you find yourself playing catch up more than you should be.\n\n\nHaving decided that you're her new favorite friend, Raven helps you with your schoolwork. Her friends tease her about hitting on a younger guy, which you and her ignore, but at the same time you can't help but notice that she is very pretty. Of course, you don't let that get in the way of your learning. Much. \n\n\nYou look forward to those lessons more than the lessons the classes offers. How can they even compete with being privately tutored by a pretty older girl. You have to remind yourself that she is older more than you'd like admit, but that doesn't prevent you from developing a bit of a crush on her. There are times when that crush causes you to think of Alessa, but you cast those thoughts away. You are at war now. If it came down to it, then you would be expected to fight her and her family. \n\n\nWhile those lessons keep you occupied, the lessons that really enamor you are the ones that Miss Sarrin teaches you. Learning about this 'blessing' you have is much more fun than you realize. Her lessons began with basic history lessons on the relevance of the 'Blessed Ones,' and how they ruled the continent at the word from the Creator. You already knew about most of it, so that didn't quite truly catch your interest. Instead what really interested you was what Miss Sarrin was able to learn about your power. \n\n\nThis particular instance occurred a few months after you started your training with Miss Sarrin...\n\n\n~\n\n\nThe wooden sword fell to the ground beside you with a resounding thud. It was the third time that day that you lost against Miss Sarrin. She never went easy against you, and, consequently, this led to many bruises. It wasn't that she was looking to hurt you, but rather she was only trying to help you activate your power again. \n\n\nYour fight with Ashyr months earlier was the first and only time you succeeded in activating that blessing of yours. Try as you and Miss Sarrin did, you still weren't able find away to reactivate it. \n\n\nYou dropped the ground with your sweat stained tunic plastered to your chest. Your were frustrated with Miss Sarrin, the Creator, but most of all, yourself for not being able to activate this faulty power of yours. No matter how hard you tried you couldn't get it to adhere to your will.\n\n\n\"Get back up. Let's go one more time,\" Miss Sarrin insisted.\n\n\nYou were tired, and quite frankly, sick of losing over and over again. \"I'm sorry. I think I'm done with losing for the day. Let's just get with the academic stu-\" You interrupt yourself mid-sentence when you see Miss Sarrin's practice sword come flying towards your head at an alarming speed. Even though you are tired, you're still able to dodge the sudden attack. \n\n\nAlmost instinctively, you roll out of the way and grab your practice sword. You barely have to to raise it before Miss Sarrin is attacking you again. Several times you try to speak to get her to stop, but each time you speak Miss Sarrin rushes into another attack. Her ferocity surprises you, for you hadn't seen her like this before. While you've known her to be blunt these past months of lessons, she's never been this close to hurting you. She's always held herself back so she wouldn't hurt you, but this time is much different.\n\n\nYou manage to block each attack she throws, but you constantly lose ground, and soon enough you figure she'll get threw your defenses. Usually when she wins, Miss Sarrin stops herself from dealing any kind of finishing blow to you. This time, however, will be different. Her eyes are focused purely on the task at hand, and her face is devoid of emotion. She isn't thinking about your safety at all. \n\n\nYou begin to increase the effort you put into each block and parry. It wouldn't do to spend the next week in the hospital from a concussion. It's all in vain. Aside from Morden, She's the best fighter you've ever fought. Ashyr was easy compared to her, but unlike Ashyr, you don't think you have any chance of winning. Therefore your goal changes. Instead of winning, you only want to prevent irreparable brain damage. \n\n\nIt's unnoticeable at first. It's only a little heat on your shoulders, so you chalk it up to the sun, but as the heat appears you find yourself blocking each attack more easily. Miss Sarrin starts to move slower, and you feel yourself moving faster. Each swipe of your sword is a another step Miss Sarrin has to take back. It's like your fight with Ashyr. You feel victory within your grasp, so you close in on it with a thrust carrying your full force behind it. \n\n\nHowever, Miss Sarrin uses that force against you. She sidesteps the thrust and with a quick yank of your wrist pulls you farther than you intended. You're sent sprawling to the grassy ground before you. The burning in your shoulders disappears, and you're left lying fatigued in the grass. \n\n\nTo your surprise Miss Sarrin doesn't continue her attack, and even more surprising is when you look over to her and find her grinning. \n\n\n\"What are you smiling at?\" You question unable to hide the bitterness in your voice. \n\n\nMiss Sarrin starts to laugh a bit, and you feel even more slighted. Well at least until the reality of the situation hits you. Miss Sarrin rarely ever smiles, or even laughs, so this is a treat. Especially since it makes her face even prettier. Your offense is forgotten, and you briefly wish that Miss Sarrin was your age instead of ten years older than you. That way you might actually have a chance with her, but you chastise yourself. Even if she was your age, then she wouldn't be in your class. Apparently Miss Sarrin is the youngest prodigy to have ever graduated from the academy, and the Advanced Combat school that followed. That's why she'd been able to be an instructor here so quickly. \n\n\nYou turn your head away from her hoping that your blushing would be covered by the scowl you put on your face. \n\n\n\"Erron. Do you realize what just happened?\" Her voice is filled with excitement. \n\n\n\"What do you mean?\" Your brief thoughts from earlier completely disappear from your head. \n\n\n\"I figured out what triggers your power!\" She continues to speak before you can answer. \"I was looking through the Blessed Ones histories the other day, and every account of them talks about their purpose being to protect.\" \n\n\n\"And what's that got t-\" You stop when it hits you. That's what the Man (you still weren't really sure he was the Creator yet) was talking about in the dream you had. He said that the blessing gave you protection. You think back to when you fought Ashyr, and just a few moments when the power was triggered again. Both times you were focused on protecting yourself. \n\n\nMiss Sarrin nods when she sees the realization come over you. \"It activates whenever you feel the need to truly protect yourself. That's why it wasn't working when were sparred previously. I was never actually putting you in danger, so you didn't feel the need to really protect yourself. You only wanted to win.\" \n\n\n\"Wait, does that mean you were planning on hurting me?\" you ask curiously.\n\n\nMiss Sarrin makes a small gesture with a hand as if she could brush the question aside. \"That's aside the point.\" Before you can pursue that point, she continues. \"Now we just need to make you better at using this blessing of yours. After all, you managed to use it this past fight, and still ended up losing. Of course that's probably because you aren't quite as good as me yet, but we'll work on that too.\" \n\n\nYou nod and get back to your feet. Your loss and fatigue replaced by a newfound sense of purpose. You were actually making progress. You ready your sword and Miss Sarrin readies hers. You really do like these lessons.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Your Allegiance (Background)", "result": "Three years have passed since the unfortunate events that sparked the civil war occurred. They say time heals everything, but you aren't so sure. You can still feel the pains of your mother's death weighing on your heart, and your thirst for revenge still leaves you parched from time to time. \n\n\nFortunately, today your thirst was quenched. \n\n\nThe war has been going on for some time now, and neither side has really taken much of an advantage. That is, until this past week. The Dellandians must've decided that they wanted the war to be over already, so the King led the next attack against the Knights. That was a major mistake. As soon as your father realized the King would be there, the goal of that battle changed. Instead of an all out battle, your father focused on taking out the King. An army without it's leader isn't very efficient after all, but you know that the driving reason for such a tactic was the revenge you and your father shared. With a mixture of luck, strategy, and skill, the King was killed and the head for the army cut off. \n\n\nYou feel a morbid sense of peace as you go to sleep that night. One that is promptly destroyed when you dream about that cabin for the first time in three years.\n\n\nThe scene is always the same. It's always afternoon, and without the context of the cabin, it would be a very peaceful place. However, the beautiful figure in front of you dispels all of that in the blink of an eye.\n\n\nIn the three years that you haven't seen her, Alessa seems to have grown exponentially more beautiful. Her long silvery blonde hair frames an angelic face. Her emerald green eyes train in on you, and it's all you can do to breathe. She's much more beautiful than both Miss Sarrin and Raven. Despite this beauty, her persona is accentuated by a sadness and tiredness that makes you feel inordinately sympathetic. \n\n\nWhen she speaks your eyes are drawn to her lips and your heart sinks with guilt. Your years of schooling have been preparing for the eventual situation wherein you would face the Dellandian army, and perhaps even the Dellandians themselves. Ever since the war started there's been a large emphasis on the corruption of the royal family, and the hate for the royal family is evident in your peers eyes. You'd be lying if you said you didn't feel hate for them either. Despite all of this, you can't help but remember that Alessa was a kid when all of this happened. None of it was her fault. \n\n\n\"Erron,\" she begins, and you find yourself desperately wanting to know what she has to say. \"Are you happy now?\" Her voice is bitter and accusatory. \"One parent for another, right? It's finally even. Are you happy now?\" she repeats.\n\n\nSomewhere in the back of your mind you realize that you aren't acting like your usual self. \"No, I didn't want this to happen.\" You start to say that, but then stop confused. You remember going to sleep happy that her father had been killed, and that you did, in fact, want this to happen. \n\n\nAlessa sees your confused expression and sighs. \"Don't you know how to use your blessing?\" Her tone is less bitter, and the question is something that doesn't confuse you (much), so you respond. \n\n\n\"Yes, but I have to feel the need to protect myself in order to use it.\" You tell her this without the slightest qualm, but her question triggers something in the back of your mind. In the past few years you've learned to use your power fairly easily by tricking yourself into thinking you need to protect yourself. You do this now, and that familiar feeling radiates from your shoulders. With the power activating your mind becomes clear. It's like a fog you didn't even know was there, was lifted.\n\n\nAlessa must've been able to tell a difference because she speaks again. \"You didn't answer my question. Are you happy now?\"\n\n\nNow that you're able to think clearly you register two things. The first, Alessa is much less captivating than before. Still gorgeous, but you aren't left speechless anymore. The second thing is you realize that your decreased mental state was most likely caused by the curse she bears. She probably didn't even do it on purpose, hence why she only noticed you were affected after she battered you with questions.\n\n\nStill you hesitate. You aren't at all torn up by the King's death, and you're certainly more happy about it than not. Of course, that doesn't mean you want to tell her that you like her father better when he's dead. \n\n\n \n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell the truth", "result": "\"I wouldn't call it being happy,\" you start, \"but I can't say I'm sad that the person who killed my mother is dead.\" You realize that this is kinda harsh, but you don't want to lie to your childhood friend. You expect her to be angry, but her face is blank. \n\n\n\"I thought you were going to lie to me.\" The sentence barely escapes her lips. \n\n\nYou shake your head. \"I thought about it, but I felt you deserved to hear the truth.\"\n\n\nShe nods in return, and a moment of silence descends upon the cabin. The both of you are left staring at one another. Eventually she walks toward you and wraps her arms around you. You hesitate before returning the gesture. Her face rests in your chest, and you feel tears leaking through your tunic. She starts speaking again, but this time everything she says runs together. You do manage to catch a few things though. \n\n\n\"I'm sorry all of this happened, I wish we could go back to the way things were,\" and \"I miss you,\" were just some of the few things you heard her say. \n\n\nThe sudden expression of emotion nearly overwhelms you, for you realize that she's voicing many things that you've felt for the past three years. Perhaps one of the most prominent of those feelings being a sad loneliness. After all, the only person that might understand you is your sworn enemy.\n\n\nThe pair of you stay like that for a while, but soon enough, and to your disappointment, Alessa lets go of you. She takes a step away from you, and starts to walk out of the cabin. The sudden absence of her presence leaves you cold, and as you stare at her leaving, you realize that this could be the last time you are able to be with her alone. Even if this 'being alone' was in a dream state. \n\n\nYou catch her hand and pull her back. Your heart feels like it's going to pound out of your chest when her eyes meet yours. Her face was a mask of surprise when you lean down toward her with your lips parted. You close your eyes half expecting to be slapped, but instead you feel the soft texture of her lips against yours. The kiss only continues for a few seconds, but you feel happier in those seconds than you have in a long time. \n\n\nAs you two separate, you feel your real self begin awake. She says, \"Bye Erron\" at the same time you say \"Stay safe.\" \n\n\nYou lay in your bed with the image of her seared into your memory. You feel elated, but only for a few moments. Any feelings you might still feel for her make you feel guilty. Regardless of whether or not it was a dream, you did just kiss an enemy. \n\n\nYou lie in bed torn between the people you're meant to protect, and the person who understands you better than anyone else. \n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Lie", "result": "\"I'm not happy, no.\" You start with this, but the next thing you say slowly turns what you're saying from a lie, into a bitter sarcastic truth.\n\n\n\"How couldn't I be happy that the man who had my mother killed died?\" With your mother's death on your mind, Your demeanor quickly becomes sour. You gaze at Alessa expecting her to be upset, but her face remains blank.\n\n\n\"I thought you were going to lie to me.\" The sentence barely escapes her lips. \n\n\nYou shake your head. \"I started to, but I felt you deserved to hear the truth.\"\n\n\nShe nods in return, and a moment of silence descends upon the cabin. The both of you are left staring at one another. Eventually she walks toward you and wraps her arms around you. You hesitate before returning the gesture. Her face rests in your chest, and you feel tears leaking through your tunic. She starts speaking again, but this time everything she says runs together. You do manage to catch a few things though. \n\n\n\"I'm sorry all of this happened, I wish we could go back to the way things were,\" and \"I miss you,\" were just some of the few things you heard her say. \n\n\nThe sudden expression of emotion nearly overwhelms you, for you realize that she's voicing many things that you've felt for the past three years. Perhaps one of the most prominent of those feelings being a sad loneliness. After all, the only person that might understand you is your sworn enemy.\n\n\nThe pair of you stay like that for a while, but soon enough, and to your disappointment, Alessa lets go of you. She takes a step away from you, and starts to walk out of the cabin. The sudden absence of her presence leaves you cold, and as you stare at her leaving, you realize that this could be the last time you are able to be with her alone. Even if this 'being alone' was in a dream state. \n\n\nYou catch her hand and pull her back. Your heart feels like it's going to pound out of your chest when her eyes meet yours. Her face was a mask of surprise when you lean down toward her with your lips parted. You close your eyes half expecting to be slapped, but instead you feel the soft texture of her lips against yours. The kiss only continues for a few seconds, but you feel happier in those seconds than you have in a long time. \n\n\nAs you two separate, you feel your real self begin awake. She says, \"Bye Erron\" at the same time you say \"Stay safe.\" \n\n\nYou lay in your bed with the image of her seared into your memory. You feel elated, but only for a few moments. Any feelings you might still feel for her make you feel guilty. Regardless of whether or not it was a dream, you did just kiss an enemy. \n\n\nYou lie in bed torn between the people you're meant to protect, and the person who understands you better than anyone else. \n\n\n \n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Defense is the best offense", "result": "You're willing to bet that you can defend longer than he can attack. After all, you only have to get one good hit in in order to win. With that plan in mind, you begin carefully watching for an opportunity to end tis fight.\n\n\nWith a sudden turn of luck you parry a blow, and Ashyr decides not to pursue attacking you. Instead you start circling each other again. You're grateful for the time to rest before you begin your attack, but Ashyr doesn't seem to be thinking at all about his energy. Instead his eyes are focused on you with a puzzled look in his eyes. You guess no one has ever lasted this long against him.\n\n\nBy now the sun's heat has your body beginning to wear down, and your fatigue must show, for Ashyr smiles a triumphant smile. Immediately afterwards, he surges forward with an overhead slash.\n\n\nHaving switched your mindset, you easily block the blow. Ashyr frowns and attacks again. He meets with no success, but he isn't one to give up.\n\n\nHe continues his predictable strategy of continuous attack. You are grateful you decided that defense was the best option. You aren't sure you would last very long in a strategy of continuous attack similar to what Ashyr was trying. \n\n\nThe fight goes on with little change and you continue to tire, but, on the bright side, Ashyr is as well. All you need to do is wait for the moment where he falters in his attack. Almost as soon as you think that, the moment comes. It's eerie that it came so quickly, but you don't question it. His lunge was sloppy leaving you plenty of time and skill to exploit in your next attack. You bring your wooden sword above your head to bear down on him, but when you look at him you don't see fear, or any other emotions indicative of defeat. In fact you see the exact opposite. Triumph rests in his eyes as if he never had a doubt he would win. \n\n\nYou hesitate in order to figure out what he could possibly be triumphant about. Then you realize it. It was odd that he got tired this quickly. He had shown tremendous endurance throughout the fight, and for all of that to suddenly disappear...it was too easy. With a panicked thought you realize what is about to happen. The lunge you blocked easily from moments before was still beside your body, and unlike the moments before the hold on his sword isn't sloppy at all. Ashyr swings his sword from under and to the side of you in an upward slash. You turn to face it at the last moment in hopes of blocking it, but that proves to be a fatal mistake. \n\n\nYou're no where near fast enough to do that, and instead of blocking the attack, you only give Ashyr a better target. Unfortunately, the angle at which Ashyr swings his sword and the angle that your facing it combine to create the worst possible outcome.\n\n\nThe blow hits you just under your nose, but Ashyr doesn't stop the hit there. No, you realize he must've been fed up with the fighting. The blow is strong enough to hit your nose cartilage straight up and into your brain. The result in a quick, unlucky, and untimely death.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Tackle him", "result": "Going on either pure attack or pure defense would be expected, you decide. You need something entirely unprecedented. Something that''ll surprise him so thoroughly he won't know what to do. \n\n\nWith a sudden turn of luck you parry a blow, and Ashyr decides not to pursue attacking you. Instead you start circling each other again. You're grateful for the time to rest before you begin your attack, but Ashyr doesn't seem to be thinking at all about his energy. Instead his eyes are focused on you with a puzzled look in his eyes. You guess no one has ever lasted this long against him.\n\n\nBy now the sun's heat has your body beginning to wear down, and your fatigue must show, for Ashyr smiles a triumphant smile. Immediately afterwards, he surges forward with an overhead slash. \n\n\nBut you're ready for it. When he gets close enough you get low and charge him. The impact of you hitting him stops him from continuing his swing downward, however, you aren't able to fully tackle him. The result of your attempt leaves you bear hugging his stomach. Ashyr reacts quickly and switches the hold on his sword so he can stab downward. You see what he's doing out of your peripheral vision, and you realize what's about to happen. \n\n\nYou disentangle yourself from him just as he starts to bring his sword down at you. The hit, originally aimed at your back, hits the top of your spinal cord due to your attempt to dodge, and you black out. \n\n\nYou wake up approximately a day later. The white of the infirmary hurts your eyes, but not as much as your pride hurts. You could accept losing, but losing in such a pathetic way was disappointing.\n\n\nYou reach you hand to cover a sudden yawn, but your hand doesn't move. You try to bring it up once again, but still, it doesn't move. You start attempting to move every possible limb, but your body doesn't obey you. The only things that you can move are your facial appendages. \n\n\nYou start shouting for someone, and soon enough a nurse comes to see you followed by Headmaster Rallas. They go into a lengthy explanation of what happened to you. That explanation ends with them saying that you are paralyzed from neck up. You end up going into shock, and you realize that you won't ever be able to do anything you want ever again. \n\n\nYou enter a limbo like state where nothing really matters to you. Even letters from your father seem to have lost their meaning. \n\n\nMonths pass and your thoughts are filled with regret and despair. If only you had gone with your father, or if only you had won that fight...if only. Those thoughts consume your entire being until there's nothing you can do, but think about what ifs. Life in this state leaves you wishing to be dead. You push those thoughts off, but when there's nothing else to do but think, then that becomes a burden too. \n\n\nOne day you finally decide to do it. Maybe the Creator will forgive you for being a failure as a Blessed One. \n\n\nWell, if that's all I could do in a fight, then maybe I am a hero. I saved everyone from watching me fail as the Chosen Hero of the Holy Kingdom. \n\n\nWith that thought you end your existence in Dellandia.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Stay and retaliate", "result": "While on the inside you're starting to seethe, on the outside you manage to keep you're cool. You step to the side and start walking up the stairs past him, as if you're making a move ot ignore him. In reality you just want to have to high ground when you punch him. \n\n\nAs you place your foot on the step above this oversized boy, he grips your forearm saying, \"Hey, Don't walk away from m- Hey!\"\n\n\nHe interrupts his own sentence with \"Hey\" when instead of yanking your arm away from him, you use his grip and push him forward and hopefully, down the stairs.\n\n\nBut this guy is smarter than he looks.\n\n\nInstead of being surprised like you hoped, it appears he was more or less ready for it. he uses the momentum from your push to pull himself up and pull you past him down the stairs. Unlike him, you are completely surprised. You figured he was like a dog. Lots of barking, but no bite. You were wrong.\n\n\nYou attempt to twist your head away from the floor, but you were propelled at too fast of a rate. With a sickening crack, your head splits open on the white granite stairs. You pass out, and never wake up. Your last thought is that maybe the guy was right. The creator chose the wrong person. ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"The 'Curse.' \"", "result": "\"Curse.\" You whisper the words, and immediately the dark light flies from the man's hand and into you. You don't feel any different at first, but as the seconds go by you feel yourself getting really tired. The fatigue spreads throughout your body and you know that at any moment you may pass out. The feeling reminds you of a story your dad once told you about him treading water for hours at a time. He said afterwards that he knew he wouldn't be able to keep it up forever, but he would continue for as long as he could. \n\n\nYou sympathize with that thought as your body and mind betray you to their tiredness. When you finally feel as if you could not hold on any longer, you collapse to the floor beside Alessa. The last thing you see is the bright light, the blessing, flying from the man and into Alessa, and the man's face; a picture of sadness. \n\n\n \n\n~\n\n\n \n\nYou wake up hours later in the cabin. You peel your face of of the wooden floor and groggily rub your eyes. It takes you a moment to remember what happened, but when you do you leap to your feet confused. There isn't a single thing out of place in the cabin. You look all around for evidence of what you could've sworn happened here only moments ago, but you find nothing. Even your sword is back inside your sheathe. Nothing was amiss. Perhaps it was all a dream, you think relieved. \n\n\nWith a sigh and a shrug you brush the dust off of your clothes and open the cabin door. You remember the struggle you had with the man moments before, and you laugh to yourself. Leave it to your subconscious to turn one of your favorite people into a scary curse giving man with emotional problems. Although... you do wonder why Alessa isn't with you. You were supposed to meet with her in this cabin after all. \n\n\nYour don't think to much of it, for you finally realize the time. In the distance the sun begins to dip down into the gray blue clouds. It was sundown, the time time your parents require you to be home. You immediately break into a jog. You Father could be quite strict when it came to you. If he caught you coming back late, then he would surely punish you. \n\n\nYou jog into a relatively silent castle, although you hear sounds of eating and merriment coming from the main dining hall. As if to punctuate the point, your stomach rumbles in anticipation for dinner. Thankfully you only have to go up one staircase on the way to your room. You're careful to look through each hallway before entering in order to avoid a potential disaster with your dad, so in not too long you come to a solid oak door. Engraved on the wall beside it reads the name, 'Lucentia,' your family name. Without wasting any time you throw the door open and slam the door shut behind you. \n\n\n\"Erron? What are you doing back so late?\" You turn around to see your Father seated on at your desk with a grave look on his face. His deep authoritative voice is riddled with anxiety and subtle undertones of sadness. Something your dad rarely displays. \n\n\nYou begin to mumble an excuse about knight training, but your Father interrupts you. \"Never mind that. I need you to pack your things. We're going away for a while.\" The persona of a strong confident man your Father usually portrayed was gone. \n\n\nWhen you don't respond immediately, he raises his voice. \"Quickly now. We must be going!\" \n\n\nYou don't question him and immediately begin to pack your travel bags with necessities. You're at it for a couple minutes when you realize your Father had no bags with him. \"Did you already have your bags packed? you ask curiously. Any information you could glean from him would be useful. \n\n\nHe looks around for a moment confused. \"I must've forgotten to grab them. I'll be back, son. Stay here and pack. If I'm not back in fifteen minutes then go find Morden.\" He rushes out of the room leaving you even more confused than when you woke up in the cabin.\n\n\nYou shrug and obey him. Even at his worst he still knows more than you do. \n\n\nIt doesn't take you long to pack, and soon enough you're left waiting on your bed. A few long moments later you begin to hear shuffling outside, and shouting. You try to ignore it, but it soon grows to a point where you can't ignore it very well. That, and you're starting to get curious. The royal guards don't usually act so panicked, so maybe you should check it out.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sate your curiosity", "result": "Tossing your fathers wishes out the window, you crack the door open. If you come back in five minutes, then that should leave you plenty of time to find out what's going on. \n\n\nYou walk out of the door and into the stone walled hallways. You listen for a moment, then follow the sounds of shouting. As you near the source, other sounds enter the mix. The sounds of swords ringing and armor being torn fill your ears, and before you can turn yourself back you walk into the scene of the noise. Bodies of the knights of the Holy Order llitter the hallway floor. Royal guards stand amidst the corpses, while others drive their swords through the fallen bodies. Some dark liquid covers the cobblestone floor, and that same liquid is splattered across the walls. Blood.\n\n\nThe thought sickens you and you begin to retch despite not having had dinner yet. The sound draws some attention, and as you bring your head up from the ground your eyes meets with a dying Knight on the floor not to far from you. That knight mouths the word \"Run,\" just before his eyes lose the life in them. \n\n\nBefore you can really react to that you hear someone yell, \"There's the Assassin's son! Get him!\" You look up to find every royal guard with their eyes trained on you. Your instincts take over and you begin to run back the way you came. The sounds of metal boots hitting the floor echo throughout the hall behind you. Fear courses throughout your body, and you run faster than you ever have before. \n\n\nHowever, it's not enough. After only a few moments of running you hear a voice behind you yell, \"I've got him!\" You're only left wondering what he means for a moment, for right afterwards a javelin pierces your shoulder. The force of it doesn't kill you, but it certainly sends you toppling to the floor. The pain is horrible, but luckily you don't have to endure it for long. A royal guard comes up moments later to finish the job.", "action_results": []}, null]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story55.json b/data/scraper/stories/story55.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..edca2ef --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story55.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=60128", "context": "", "first_story_block": " \n\n \n\nPaper-Mache\n\n\nBy Jster02", "action_results": [{"action": "Start", "result": "The pain is the first thing you notice. It feels as though someone's poured an entire vat of hot coffee over your entire body. Somehow, you get the sense that you've been asleep a lot longer than normal. You open your eyes to find yourself laying in a patch of grass, staring up at a clear, starry sky, interrupted by the branches of nearby trees. You don't move for a moment. How did you get outside? You don't remember going to sleep out here... as a matter of fact, you don't remember going to sleep at all. Or anything else, as a matter of fact.\n\n\nThe pain is fading fast, so you sit up and take a look around, pulse racing. The shadowy forms of trees surround you, the sounds of the night bombarding your senses. It occurs to you that you're hyperventilating. Is this what it feels like to have a heart attack? No this is a panic attack of some kind. Instinctively, you find yourself focusing on a single blade of grass in the field. With shaking hands, you pluck it from the dirt and study it, taking note of its shape, the feel of it in your hand, the nearly indistinguishable pattern of little veins running through it. Mindfulness. That's supposed to help with Panic attacks. Somehow, you remember that. But you can't remember where you learned it. \n\n\nSlowly but surely, your breathing normalizes. You wipe the snot from your nose and the tears from your eyes as your body stops convulsing. For the first time since you woke up, you notice the cool night breeze. You're going to be fine. If you just keep your wits, you'll find a way out of this eventually. You take a quick inventory of everything you can remember. Random bits of knowledge surface in your head, facts about whales, mathematical formulas, the steps to changing a tire. But no memories of the people, or events, or books that taught you those things.\n\n\nAs you contemplate these things, you notice a few items laying in the grass around you. Namely, a small backpack and an odd metal disk, with a glowing screen on one side. You pick up the disk first and examine it. \"Insufficient power,\" flashes across its face over and over in red. Something about it tugs at something in your memory, but you can't quite put your finger on what. Confused, you slip it into your pocket and turn to the bag. You unzip it to find a lighter, a knife, a sleeping bag, a pillow, and... a whole mountain of Cheez-Its and Mountain Dew? Just what kind of person are you? Still, it's better than nothing, so you slip it over your shoulders.\n\n\nAs you try (and fail), to take your bearings from the waning crescent moon, (not that it really matters, it's not like you know where you came from), you become aware of a strange noise in the distance. You stop and listen. Is that yelling? Wait, yelling is a human noise, right? So, where there's yelling, there's humans. Before you can even finish processing that thought, your feet are carrying you towards the source of the noise. You didn't know you could run this fast on pavement, much less over the uneven turf of the forest, but then, maybe you're a famous football player or something and just don't remember it. \n\n\nThe yelling grows louder as you draw nearer. A dim light shines in the distance, growing brighter. You slow down a little, these shouts don't sound like happy ones.\n\n\n\"Stop struggling or it'll only hurt more!\" a gravelly voice says.\n\n\n\"Help! Stop! Let me go!\" An extremely high pitched voice this time.\n\n\nYou've slowed to a tip-toe now. Whatever this is, you're not sure you want to be a part of it. Still you creep closer until you can just make out the figures involved between the trees. They look small from here, no bigger than children, but then, it's a little hard to tell from this distance. It looks like they might be wearing some kind of cloaks, green ones, if your eyes don't deceive you. \n\n\n\"Gag her before she draws someone to us!\" Says the gravel tongued shadow to two others holding down a third, \"Get her in the bag and tie it tight. The last thing we need is another escape.\"\n\n\nYour palms are soaked with sweat. You should do something, anything, to help, but whoever these people are, they certainly don't sound like the kind of folks you'd like to mess with...", "action_results": [{"action": "Creep closer and attack", "result": "You drop into a crouch and creep closer, stopping behind trees whenever you can. Now that you're closer, you can make out more details, and boy are these people weird. They're even shorter up close, they'd probably only come up to your waist. But that's the least strange thing about them. They're skin resembles Paper-Mache, all folded over itself. And then there's the ears, so long and pointy. Almost as big as they are, and yet still they point straight up. Forget whatever you thought about only humans yelling. You must've forgotten that too, because these things are no humans.\n\n\nThe two biggest creatures hold down a smaller one, (perhaps that one is only a child), while the one that appears to be the leader stands and watches. Like you thought, all but the one on the ground are clad in green cloaks, reaching nearly to their feet, with a strange symbol of something like a broken goblet embroidered on their backs in brown. \n\n\nThey've nearly got the child into a big sack now, but she (he? It?) still hasn't given up. \n\n\n\"Please!\" She cries, \"I just wanna go home! Let me go home!\"\n\n\n\"We're giving you a new home.\" Says the leader, \"A better home! Don't you want to help make your old home better?\"\n\n\n\"No! I want my papa!\"\n\n\nJust watching this makes you nauseous. This has got to be stopped, there's no way you can sit by and let it happen. Before you've even so much as thought of a plan, you're on your feet, charging the creatures with...", "action_results": [{"action": "the knife!", "result": "You flick your knife open and tense for battle. It feels so small in your hand, so weak. If only you had a gun, or a hatchet at least. Still, it's better than using your fists. \n\n\nBefore you have the chance lose your nerve, you charge one of the creatures holding down the... other creature. (You're really not sure what to call any of these things, you've never seen anything quite like them before). You slam into it, knocking it to the ground before it has a chance to react. It's eyes go wide as you plunge the knife into it's stomach, (or what appears to be it's stomach). It penetrates easier than you expected, the knife. Feels a little too easy.\n\n\nBut before you have time to fully contemplate the moral ambiguity of your actions, you see, out of the corner of your eye, the other creature charging you with some kind of sharpened stick. You act faster than you ever thought you could, rolling to the side, just as it brings it's stick down in a stabbing motion. The stick buries itself into the chest of the first creature, (the one with the knife still stuck in it's chest). If it wasn't dead before, it certainly is now.\n\n\nThe creature with the stick stares at it's fallen friend, stunned. You should strike now, while it's distracted, but all you can do is stare at the dead creature. You did that. Even though it's not exactly a human, something about the whole thing just feels wrong. Slowly, the surviving creature turns towards you.\n\n\n\"Why would you do that?\" He asks, \"That was my friend!\"\n\n\n\"You were attacking that... other creature!\" You say. Even as you say it, the words feel hollow. \"He... had it coming!\"\n\n\n\"You have no idea what you've gotten yourself involved in!\" He says, \"You're messing with things you shouldn't you crazy monster!\" With that, the creature charges you once more, wrenching it's weapon from the chest of its dead friend. Perhaps you should let him strike you down. Maybe you're the monster here. But then, what about that other creature? The one he was tormenting? What does that make him? No, you were just acting as any good person should when they see someone in danger. Just as the creature reaches you, instinct takes over and you slam your fist into it's head. \n\n\nThese creatures don't just look like Paper-Mache, they tear like it too. As soon as your hand makes contact, his face crumples inward and he staggers back, falling to the ground, dead. You stare at your hand, stunned. Either you've got some sort of hidden superpowers, or these creatures are weaker than most. That doesn't seem normal. Even with your broken memory, you can be pretty sure of that.\n\n\nAs the adrenaline wears off, you remember that there were three creatures involved. Two doing the heavy lifting and one giving orders. You take a quick look around you, but see nothing. It must've run off somewhere; the only other living thing left in the area is the creature you came to save in the first place. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Check on the fallen creature", "result": "The creature lays in the dirt, staring at you. It trembles as you approach, inching away on its back.\n\n\n\"Who are you?\" It asks with trembling voice, \"What do you want? I want my papa!\"\n\n\n\"I'm not going to hurt you,\" You say, trying to sound as soothing as you can, \"I'm here to help.\" \n\n\n\"You're... not gonna hurt me like those other guys?\"\n\n\n\"No, I was saving you. That's why I hurt them.\"\n\n\n\"Oh... Okay...\"\n\n\nYou stare at each other wordlessly for a few moments, unsure of what to say. Finally, you extend your hand to help the creature up. It stares for a second at your arm, and asks,\n\n\n\"What are you doing?\"\n\n\n\"I'm helping you up.\"\n\n\n\"How does holding your hand out help me up?\"\n\n\n\"You grab it and... oh, never mind. Do you know how to get home?\" (Does this thing even have a home)?\n\n\n\"I think so...\"\n\n\n\"Alright, can you walk?\"\n\n\nThe creature struggles to its feet. \"Yes.\"\n\n\nAnother moment of silence.\n\n\n\"I'm Pila,\" the creature says, \"...thanks.\"\n\n\n\"You're welcome. Come on, let me walk you home.\"\n\n\n\"Okay.\"\n\n\nYou set off down the path, Pila leading the way. For a few minutes you travel in silence. The hooting of owls and the howl of the wind are your only company as you trudge through the trees. Finally, you can't help but break the silence. \n\n\n\"What are you exactly?\"\n\n\nPila looks at you, her ears twitch slightly. \"I already told you, I'm Pila.\"\n\n\n\"No, I mean, what are you. As in, what species are you?\"\n\n\n\"What's a species?\"\n\n\nYou struggle to come up with an explanation. \"It means, what kind of creature are you? I don't know how else to explain it.\"\n\n\n\"I'm confused.\"\n\n\n\"Well... I'm a human.\" You point to yourself, then look around for something else to name. You spot an owl sitting on a branch, \"And that's an owl,\" You point at the creature, \"But what are you? I've never seen anything like you before.\"\n\n\n\"I still don't understand... human? Is that what you said your name was?\" \n\n\nIt's no use trying to get anything out of her. You sigh, and say, \"Never mind, it's not important.\" \n\n\n\"Okay!\" She says\n\n\nAs you're talking, you come to the side of a hill, with little stairs carved into the side for you to climb down. Lights twinkle a little ways below; must be some kind of village. \n\n\nPila points at the lights. \"That's where I live. It's also where my mama and my papa live. And all of my friends. Let's go!\"\n\n\nWith that, she dashes down the stairs. They're the perfect size for her little feet, (if a little big). As for you though, you may as well be going downhill on gravel. You nearly slip at least three times as you descend, but in the end you make it to the bottom unscathed. \n\n\n\"We're almost there now,\" Pila says, running up the path.\n\n\nYou follow as quick as you can, it wouldn't do to lose her again. If that happened you might as well have never saved her at all. As you jog along the path, you pass a strange plant, just taller than you are. It grows on a thin, blue stalk, straight up, until it droops over at the top, opening into a strange, orange bulb. The bulb glows in the dawn, lighting the whole path beneath your feet. Just a few moments later, you pass by another on the opposite side of the path. The entire trail leading up to the village is lined with these plants, lighting the way like streetlights on an old city road. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Pila's house", "result": "It soon becomes apparent that you are closer to the village than you thought. Is it just you, or are those buildings smaller than they seemed from afar? You come to the edge of the village to find that the smallest of the houses are about your height. Everything is half the size it should be, from the road through town to the stones that pave it. Stranger still, it all has the same Paper-Mache quality as Pila's skin. \n\n\nYou follow the little creature through a twisting maze of streets, just a tad bit too small for you. You begin to see other creatures like Pila milling about. Most stare at you, terrified, a few even run the other way, screaming. But every time that happens, Pila shouts after them,\n\n\n\"It's okay, he's nice! He saved me from bad people!\"\n\n\nAfter about five minutes of walking, a high pitched whistle cuts through the air. You try to ignore it, but it persists.\n\n\n\"What is that?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"Oh that?\" Pila stops and turns, \"That's the alarm. People sound it whenever there's an emergency. Then the watchmen come and help whoever sounded it. My papa is the leader of all of the watchmen.\" She beams with pride. \n\n\n\"Shouldn't we be worried.\"\n\n\n\"No, this happens a few times every day. My papa will take care of it, whatever it is.\"\n\n\n\"Well, alright.\"\n\n\nYou walk for a few minutes more, then the alarm stops, leaving you in complete silence. \n\n\n\"See?\" Pila says, \"Everything's going to be-\"\n\n\nA voice from behind interrupts her, \"What in the name of the water-pit are you?\"\n\n\nYou and Pila turn in unison to see a whole squadron of creatures, all pointing little wooden spears your way. But before you can do or say anything, Pila runs straight up to them.\n\n\n\"Papa!\" She cries, flinging her little arms around the one who appears to be their leader.\n\n\n\"Pila?\" He says, \"What are you doing with this... thing? Did it hurt you?\" He turns his gaze on you. \"What were you doing with my Daughter, you monster?\"\n\n\n\"No, Papa! You don't understand! This is human, he saved me from a bunch of really mean people. They tried to put me in a big bag, but then he came out of the forest and beat them up!\"\n\n\nPila's father is quiet for a minute. Then, he turns to the creatures behind him and says, \"You can relax. Looks like we won't be needing spears.\" He turns back to you, and takes a few steps in your direction. \"I apologize... human, is it? It's just that no one's ever seen anything like you before. So it was only natural the alarm was sounded. They all thought you were some kind of monster!\"\n\n\n\"I thought the same when I first saw creatures like you.\" You say, \"If you don't mind me asking, what exactly are you? I've never seen anything quite like you either. At least, I don't think I have.\"\n\n\n\"You stand in a village full of Oalkwardners.\" The Creature says, \"I am Merk, head of the Watchmen of Arrorn. I help to protect this place from any sort of outside invaders or natural disasters. That's why I came when I heard you had arrived. By the way, thank you so much for rescuing my daughter. If you ever need anything at all, just come find me and I'll do my best to make it happen.\" He stops and thinks for a moment. \"Are you planning on staying here a while?\"\n\n\n\"Actually,\" You say, \"I have no idea how I got here in the first place. So, I guess I'm kinda stuck till I figure out how to get back home.\"\n\n\n\"That's strange indeed,\" Merk says, \"Come with me, if you need, you may stay with me and my family while you're here. You did save Pila, after all. It's the least we can do.\"\n\n\n\"I guess I have nowhere else to go,\" You say.\n\n\n\"Yay!\" Pila says, \"It'll be like when we have all the family over for a feast!\"\n\n\nAnd once again, you set off through the streets. As you walk, you explain to Merk how you woke up in the forest with no memory and found Pila in trouble. \n\n\n\"What were you doing out there, Pila?\" Merk asks, \"Why on earth did your mother let you go out so late? And why on earth did you take this long to come back? From what Human said, it doesn't sound like you were too far from town.\" Merk frowns, \"In fact, you'd better come up with a pretty good explanation as to why you were out so late, or else you're in hot water!\"\n\n\n\"It's not my fault!\" Pila says, \"I went out to play hide-and-seek in the woods with my friends. The sun was going down, but we knew it would still be light outside for a little bit, so we thought it would be okay. But I really wanted to win. I never win at hide-and-seek, so I needed a plan to make sure they'd never find me. So I went really far away on the road. But then it started to get dark, and I got scared. And then, the ground started shaking, and I got really scared. So I ran away into the trees. But then I got lost, so I was really really scared. It took me a long time to find my way back to the road, and then when I was walking back, the mean guys came and tried to put me in a bag!\"\n\n\n\"You said the ground started shaking?\" Merk asks, \"But I didn't feel anything here. I was on the night-watch, so I know.\"\n\n\n\"But it's true, Papa!\" Pila says, \"There was a really bright light in the sky too! It was like lightning, but it stayed there for a looooooong time.\"\n\n\n\"Don't make up stories, Pila.\" Merk sounds a little irritated now, \"When we get home, you're going to have to do some chores.\"\n\n\n\"But Papa-\"\n\n\n\"Let's not do this in front of our guest, alright?\"\n\n\nPila sighs, \"Yes Papa...\"\n\n\n\"Good girl. Oh look, we're here.\"\n\n\nThe streets are a bit wider here, and the houses a bit bigger. They're all spaced apart, each one with a good five-or-so acres of space. You've stopped in front of a beautiful yellow one, that looks like it might be two stories high, (though it's hard to tell what with the strange sizes of everything). \n\n\n\"We have the best house in the village!\" Pila beams, \"That's because Papa has the best job. I wanna do it when I grow up too, so I can have this same house.\"\n\n\nMerk laughs. \"I'm glad you think this house is the best. You've never told me that before. Come on, lets go inside.\"\n\n\nYou follow Merk to the front door, where it becomes apparent that you might have a problem. \n\n\n\"I'm... not sure I can fit,\" you say, staring at the door. It comes up only to your chest and looks just a little too narrow for you to fit through. \"I don't want to mess up your house.\"\n\n\nMerk thinks for a moment, wringing his hands. \"That really is a shame. We might have to figure out somewhere else for you to stay, I'm sorry.\"\n\n\nIt's then that you remember, you've got camping supplies in your backpack\n\n\n\"I can just sleep outside,\" You say, \"I've got a sleeping bag and a pillow, I'll just lay it out in your yard somewhere, if that's alright.\n\n\nPila's face brightens, \"Papa, can we eat outside with Human too?\"\n\n\n\"I guess we may as well, so long as it stays nice outside,\" Merk says, \"Now you'd better go get some sleep. I'm not sure how you can be this chipper after staying up all night like that. Besides, you'll need your rest if you ever want to get done with the massive list of chores you're gonna get once I figure out just how much trouble you're in.\"\n\n\nPila sighs, and starts towards the door. \"Yes papa...\"\n\n\nYou spend the rest of the day on Merk's property, not daring to re-enter the village for fear that someone might see you and sound the alarm. (\"Just until we get the word around that you're not a threat,\" Merk says). For a while you talk with Merk, trying to figure out where exactly you are. Eventually, Merk pulls out a map of the area, and you find that you don't recognize any of the landscape. (Though, you can't quite remember any other landscapes either). You just can't make heads or tails of the situation. \n\n\nOnce evening rolls around, Merk's wife, (who you quickly learn is named Fila), brings you dinner in a bowl, much too small for you to properly hold. It's filled with some kind of goop that smells like burning rubber, and doesn't taste much better. But you don't say anything, and just choke it down best you can. You know you can eat some of the Cheez-Its from your bag after everyone else goes to bed.\n\n\nAfter an hour-or-so more of small talk, everyone decides to hit the sack. As the Oalkwardners head inside, you spread out your sleeping bag and lay down, staring up at the stars. The moment your head touches the pillow, all the energy you spent today hits you at once. You're asleep within minutes...", "action_results": [{"action": "A living nightmare", "result": "Your dreams are a confused mass of pictures and images. Lots of formulas and numbers, the strange disk you found in the woods, a violet light engulfing you...\n\n\nA whisper in your ear breaks you from your slumber.\n\n\n\"Wake up, strange beast. I need to talk to you.\"\n\n\nYou open your eyes so find that it's still dark. The face of an Oalkwardner stares down at you, blocking out the moonlight. It startles you so much, you sit straight up; if it wasn't for the creature's swift reflexes, your head would've smashed right into it. That's when you get a good look at it in the light of the moon.\n\n\n\"What the heck do you think you're doing here?\" You ask, \"You were the guy that ran away after I saved Pila!\"\n\n\n\"Not so loud,\" He hisses, \"Do you want to give me away?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, actually. I should call Merk right now, or better yet, do you in myself!\" You take a deep breath to let out a shout.\n\n\n\"Don't!\" \n\n\nSomething about the creature's tone stops you, if only for a moment, from alerting the Oalkwardners in the house. What would drive any intelligent creature to walk into the lion's den like this in the first place? It just doesn't add up.\n\n\n\"At least hear me out.\" Pleads the creature, \"I need your help.\"\n\n\n\"What makes you think I would help a kidnapper? Seriously, are you crazy?\"\n\n\n\"It's not just me you'd be helping, but them too!\" he gestures towards the house, \"In fact, you'd be helping every Oalkwardner in this village.\"\n\n\n\"Is that a threat?\" You ask, \"Are you going to kill them or something if I don't cooperate?\"\n\n\n\"My word, you must really think I'm some kind of monster, monster. No, I'm not here to hurt anyone. Like I said, I'm here to help.\"\n\n\n\"How does kidnapping children help anyone?\"\n\n\n\"I was getting to that. This village, Arrorn, I believe it's called, is not as peaceful as it seems. It is under the rule of King Faerdalm, a cruel, ruthless tyrant.\"\n\n\n\"Sound like something a teenager would come up with for a writing contest,\" You say, rolling your eyes.\n\n\n\"Will you let me finish?\" The creature glares at you, \"He takes their food, says they owe it to him for getting to live in such a 'great and powerful country.' It's all a load of bull, of course. He takes so much that a good many of the villagers die every year from starvation. I'm part of a resistance group trying to stop it. We've been working on a way to get rid of Faerdalm once and for all, so everyone can be free, just like in the good old days. That's why we've needed to take children, to run tests on them. We're developing a way to make ourselves stronger, so we can finally stand up to him. But we're still a ways out from perfecting it. It's going to take a lot more people, a lot more deaths, to finally perfect it. To be quite frank, I'm getting quite sick of it.\"\n\n\n\"So, where do I come in?\" You ask.\n\n\"Never in my life, have I ever seen a creature as powerful as you.\" He says, \"If you were to join us, we would be able to achive our goal much quicker. And the quicker we achive it, the less needless deaths must occuer.\" He extends his hand, as if to shake yours, \"So, are you in?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Shake his hand", "result": "The Oalkwardner smiles as you shake his hand. \n\n\n\"Very well then,\" he says, \"We must go at once, there are many preparations to be made.\" he stops for a moment and looks at you, \"You may call me Bolard, by the way.\" \n\n\nWith that, he makes a single clicking noise with his mouth, and a whole hoard of Oalkwardners dressed in the same cloaks as Bolard step out from the shadows, surrounding the two of you.\n\n\n\"We're heading back to base,\" Bolard says, \"Better get moving if you wanna get any sleep tonight!\"\n\n\n\"Hold on a second!\" you say, \"Were you planning on ambushing me if I said no?\"\n\n\n\"Of course not!\" Bolard says, \"They were just here in case you were... unreasonable, and decided to attack me.\"\n\n\nSomething about his tone puts you on edge, but you can't exactly do anything about it with all these guards around. You follow the pack into the forest...\n\n\n \n\nBolard leads the group back up the path you came from, past the place where you witnessed the attempted kidnapping. You walk for hours, never stopping for even so much as a five minute break. As the sun's rays begin to peak over the horizon, the leaders of the pack turn off the trail abruptly and lead you into more densely wooded area. \n\n\nAs the sun grows higher in the sky, you notice that there is still a sort of trail here, just fainter and harder to see than the one you left. It seems this way has been traveled a few times before, the vegetation trampled underneath it. After a few more hours of walking, the group stops abruptly, and you nearly trip over the Oalkwardner in front of you. \n\n\nYou sigh with relief. This must be some kind of break. Thank goodness, your feet feel like they're about to fall off. But instead of dispersing and finding spots to sit down and talk, the Oalkwardners stay where they are. There's motion at the front of the pack, someone's doing... something, you're not sure what. Then, a great wooden hatch opens up from the ground, revealing a spiral staircase descending down into the earth. You didn't see it because it was camouflaged by dirt and leaves, somehow stuck on top of it. \n\n\nThe assembly moves forward, down the stairs, and you follow at the middle of the pack. You reach the bottom and find yourself in a hard packed dirt tunnel, with a few paths branching off from it.\n\n\n\"To your barracks, everyone!\" Bolard says, \"I must speak with the monster for a moment.\"\n\n\nThe crowd disperses, heading down various tunnels, chattering amongst themselves. Bolard turns to you.\n\n\n\"I'm not going to have you stay in the barracks with the others,\" He says, \"You're a might too big for the beds there, and I don't want you rolling over and crushing someone or something. Instead, I think you ought to take one of the private suites, which are usually reserved for our highest ranking officials. Thankfully enough, we've got a few to spare. Come, I'll take you there now. I'm headed that direction anyway.\"\n\n\nYou follow Bolard through the tunnels, trying your best to remember how to get back to the hatch. Thankfully, it isn't too far. After a few minutes, the dirt walls become wooden, which feels a little nicer. It's like being in a regular hallway, (if a bit cramped, due to your size).\n\n\n\"This is your room,\" Bolard says, opening the door at the very end of the hallway, \"Take some time to get acquainted with your new surroundings. I will return shortly, there are a few matters of grave importance which I must discuss with you.\"\n\n\nHe shuts the door, leaving you to explore your new accommodations. Not to say there's all that much to explore, the room is quite barren. The only furniture is a sleeping pad that looks like it's woven from grass and a little table on the far side of the room. It's all too small for you, but you'll just have to make do. You take off your backpack and sit on the mat. It feels so nice to take a rest after all that walking. \n\n\nWhile you sit, you begin sifting through the contents of your bag, laying them out on the floor in front of you. You stop when your hand touches the strange metal disk you found in the forest when you woke up. The screen still flashes, \"insufficient power,\" over and over again. Maybe if you can get it charged up again, you might be able to uncover some clue about your past. You flip it over and look at the back. There's a little tank strapped to this side, with a tiny bit of green fluid inside. Is this the stuff that powers it? If you fill it up, will the disk work again?\n\n\nAs you ponder all these things, the door opens and Bolard walks in.\n\n\n\"Come, monster,\" he says, \"I need to relay the plan to you, so that we're ready.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The plan", "result": "Bolard leads you back out into the hallway and through another nearby door. This room is less barren than the one you sleep in, and it's set up more like an office. \n\n\n\"Sit,\" Bolard gestures towards a stool, too small for you, in front of a desk in the middle of the room. You obey, sitting uncomfortably low, as Bolard walks around the desk and sits on a stool of his own on the other side.\n\n\n\"Monster,\" Bolard says, \"You have displayed great strength. Strength enough, perhaps, to take out an entire army single handedly.\"\n\n\n\"What do you mean?\" you ask, \"I've never fought anyone in my life since yesterday. At least, I don't think I have.\"\n\n\n\"Training will be provided of course,\" Bolard says, \"With your great strength, and the proper training, you may lead us to victory.\"\n\n\n\"You're crazy! What kind of insane thing do you want me to do anyway?\"\n\n\n\"I want you to storm the king's palace. In two weeks time, there'll be a banquet, and all his advisors and officials will be there. If you attack then, you'll be able to cripple his regime, creating a power vacuum with no one to fill it. That's when we'll step in and take over, creating a new era of peace and prosperity.\"\n\n\n\"But why just me? Why should I do this alone?\" \n\n\n\"Because if you don't, more innocent Oalkwardners will die! They'll keep doing experiments, stealing more children to use as lab rats! We've got someone inside the palace who can get you inside. There's no turning back, you agreed to this when you shook my hand.\"\n\n\nYou open your mouth to argue, but then close it. It's useless to argue. If you refuse to do as he says, he'll probably have you killed or something. \n\n\n\"Any questions?\" Bolard asks.\n\n\nYou don't say anything.\n\n\n\"Good. You may spend the rest of the day as you wish. Go explore the facility, if you want. Get to know your way around so you feel more comfortable here.\"\n\n\nYou turn and walk out the door, back to your room. There's nothing else to say.", "action_results": [{"action": "The note", "result": "You return to your room to find a note, laying on your pillow. \n\n\n\"Come to the mess hall at midnight. There's something we must discuss.\"\n\n\nConfused, you turn it over to see if there's anything on the back, but there's not. For a moment, you stand there, staring at the piece of paper in your hands. What's going on? You've hardly met anyone yet, and already someone wants to talk with you privately? Is it some kind of trap? But what if it's important?\n\n\nCuriosity burns within you. You have to find out what this is all about. If things go wrong, you'll just have to find a way out of it. \n\n\n \n\nThat night, you creep out of your room and head to the mess hall at what you think is about 11:30. (It's hard to tell, the Oalkwardners use a complex system of hourglasses to tell time. It's nothing like what you're used to). Luckily, you explored most of the tunnels beforehand, so you find your way easily enough, with ten minutes to spare. \n\n\nYou enter the mess hall to find... nothing out of place. There's not another person in sight. You're not surprised, you are early after all.\n\n\nSomething touches your shoulder. You whirl around to see a cloaked Oalkwardner with a wooden mask over their face, standing behind you. \n\n\n\"What-\" you start to say, but the Oalkwardner puts a finger to its lips. It beckons for you to follow, and scurries down a tunnel at the far side of the room, one of the few you have yet to explore. You follow behind as best you can, trying your best not to lose them in the twists and turns of the passage. Soon, you reach a staircase, leading up to a hatch.\n\n\nThe Oalkwardner leads you through the hatch and into the cool night air. You hadn't realized how much you missed the surface until now, and you cherish each breath of fresh air. They lead you a little ways into the forest, then stop.\n\n\n\"So,\" the Oalkwardner says, \"You're the one Bolard was talking about. The one that's gonna save the entire rebellion.\"\n\n\n\"I... guess.\" you say, confused. \"What did you want to talk about, exactly?\"\n\n\n\"Do you want to know how Bolard sees you?\" The Oalkwardner asks. \n\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\n\"When he looks at you, he sees only a pawn. A monster which he can bend to his will and use for his own gain.\" The Oalkwardner turns to face you. \"But you are not the only one. He treats everyone that way. All of the high ranking Oalkwardners do, at least in this rebellion.\"\n\n\n\"What does this have to do with me?\"\n\n\n\"If their plan succeeds, and they manage to take power, I fear they will estate an even worse government than there already is. You are the key piece in their plan. But if that key piece were to fail...\"\n\n\n\"What, you want me to die on purpose?\" \n\n\n\"No, of course not! But I want you to fake your own death. Me and some others are ready to desert this crazy rebellion and take whatever the king has to throw at us. It can't be worse than what they've got planned. Not only that, but we want you to tip the king off about their plans while your at it. We'll write a note, and we want you to leave it somewhere they'll find it once you're inside the fortress.\"\n\n\n\"Wait, so am I going into the fortress or am I faking my death?\"\n\n\n\"You're faking your death at the fortress. They'll just think you failed your mission, but you'll actually have run away, with me and the others.\"\n\n\n\"I hardly know you! Why should I trust you?\"\n\n\n\"I'll give you until the day of the attack to think it over, alright?\" The Oalkwardner says, \"I get that this can be hard, but I'm begging you, please don't fail us.\"\n\n\nYou sigh. \"I'll think about it.\"\n\n\n\"Good. Now, go get some rest. You've got a long couple of weeks ahead of you.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The choice...", "result": "The next two weeks are a blur. You train for six hours a day, preparing for the big day. Before you know it, it's nearly arrived. The night before, you find another note on your pillow, this one a little longer than the last.\n\n\n\"Enclosed is the note you must plant in the fortress,\" It reads, \"I hope you've decided to help us, as we desperately need it. Meet us in the woods behind the fortress once you've done the job, and we can escape.\"\n\n\nThere's another piece of paper, this one explaining everything about the rebellion, where to find their headquarters, and how best to stop them. You skim it, then shove it in your pocket. You're still not sure whether to go along with the rebellions plan, or join the defectors. Whatever you do, you'll have to decide now...", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell Bolard about the defectors and end this right here and now", "result": "There's no point risking complications during the mission. You'd better tell Bolard about this right now. You stand and head to his office. He's still in there, organizing some of the books on his shelves, as you enter.\n\n\n\"Hello, monster.\" He says, nodding to you. \"What can I do for you?\"\n\n\n\"Defectors,\" you say, \"They've been trying to get me to help them, I've got proof!\" \n\n\nYou show him the note. He reads it, his eyebrows rising higher and higher with every sentence.\n\n\n\"My word!\" he cries, \"We must do something about it before it's too late! I'll initiate a surprise inspection, we'll catch those filthy traitors yet!\"\n\n\nHe rushes out of the office. You head back to your room and sit on your bed. Did you do the right thing? There's no stopping it now, so you'd best try and get some sleep. It doesn't come easy though. There's a lot of yelling and screaming from the other tunnels, probably the defectors. You try your best to ignore the conflicting feelings in your stomach as you drift into an uneasy sleep...", "action_results": [{"action": "The attack", "result": "The next day, you begin the journey to the fortress, escorted by a few rebels, and Bolard himself. It takes several days to get there, and you get to pass by Arrorn on the way, so that's fun. (Though, you don't get to actually enter the village. Too much risk of being recognized or something). \n\n\nFinally, you spot it, sitting on a hilltop just on the horizon.\n\n\n\"Alright,\" Bolard says, \"There's a little side door you're going to be let in through. It leads straight to the great hall. Once you get inside, kill as many people as you can, alright? Especially the ones that look super regal, because those are probably royalty.\"\n\n\n\"Anything else?\" you ask, dryly. \n\n\n\"Actually, yes. The king wears this magic armor all the time. He doesn't get hurt by physical attacks.\"\n\n\n\"Why didn't you tell me this sooner?\" you protest, \"What do you want me to do about him if I can't hurt him?\"\n\n\n\"I'm getting to that!\" Bolard sounds annoyed, \"I do have something that'll kill him.\"\n\n\nHe reaches into his bag and pulls out a glass bottle full of... water.\n\n\n\"What's this for?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"What do you think? It'll get through the cracks in his armor, and kill him!\"\n\n\n\"It's water.\"\n\n\n\"Exactly! Water kills people!\"\n\n\n\"I don't follow.\"\n\n\n\"Didn't anyone ever tell you that water disintegrates people? The skin soaks up too much and it just falls apart.\"\n\n\n\"That's not how it works for Humans,\" you say, \"We can touch water, no problem.\"\n\n\n\"Really? Well, that sure makes things easier. This way you can cross the moat, no problem! I was wondering how we'd do that.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah... Okay.\" You roll your eyes. \"Just give me the bottle. I'll smash it over his head or something.\"\n\n\nAs you get closer to the fortress, you start to make out more detail. It looks like it mainly consists of a bunch of towers, surrounded by a wooden wall. By the time the sun sets, you're within a hundred yards of the walls. \n\n\n\"Perfect!\" Bolard says, \"Look, all the nobles are already inside.\" He points to the closed drawbridge, as if to prove it. \"The doorway is just around the back of the fortress. Good luck, monster.\"\n\n\n\"Thanks,\" you say, rolling your eyes. You grab your knife and hop into the moat, making it across in less than a minute. You rush around the side of the wall and find a door, carved into the side. Just as you reach it, it flies open, and a female Oalkwardner beckons you inside. \n\n\nAs soon as you enter the fortress, the nauseating smell of Oalkwardner food hits your nose. You ignore it best you can and take a look around. You're in an alcove at the edge of the great hall, which consists mainly of a bunch of wooden tables lined up together. Over fifty Oalkwardners sit around it, laughing, eating, getting drunk...\n\n\nThis is perfect! If they're tipsy, you can strike much more easily. Quickly, you locate the king, (his armor sets him apart from the rest quite nicely), and sneak up behind him. Then, in one quick motion, you bash the bottle over his head, shattering it into a million pieces. The water splashes everywhere, (it definitely wasn't a small bottle), and the entire room goes silent. Then, the king begins to scream, and the room erupts into chaos. \n\n\nQuick as you can, you start punching, kicking, stabbing right and left. Oalkwardners go flying everywhere, most dying the instant you touch them. You manage to take out about half of the nobles before they get wise and start running for the door. At the same time, some of the guards seem to be getting ready for a counter attack. You'd better figure out what to do next, and fast...", "action_results": [{"action": "Get out now, while you still can. (You've already killed the king, and that's all that really matters).", "result": "You dash out the door before the guards can strike back. Soon as you make it to the moat, you know you're home free. The guards can't follow you here. Before you know it, you've reached the other side. \n\n\n\"Bolard!\" You call, \"I got the king!\"\n\n\nHe and the other guards come running from around the corner.\n\n\n\"Great!\" Bolard says, \"That should be enough! Worst comes to worst, and we have to launch another assault. They're crippled without a leader, it should be easy.\"\n\n\n\"Good to know. Now why don't we get out of here before they come after us?\"\n\n\nBolard laughs. \"Yes, let's get on that.\" And you run off into the forest together.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go after the rest of the so-called nobles", "result": "You can't leave any behind to take the king's place, or else the entire mission is a failure. You rush out after them, easily catching up to them with your longer legs. Guess they're not the types to exercise... or do whatever it is these creatures have to do to get stronger. You plow through them like they're snowmen. But the guards begin to come after you, and they clearly do exercise. They begin to surround you as you chase the last noble across the courtyard. (Most of them never made it past the great hall door). \n\n\nJust as the guards close in, you leap atop the last noble, crushing him under your weight! He dies instantly. Unfortunately for you, the guards reach you at that exact moment, stabbing you in about fifteen different places at once. You also die instantly.\n\n\n \n\nBut hey. At least you saved the kingdom. Sort of...", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Go along with the defectors plans", "result": "What are you thinking? Of course you're going along with them! This rebellion kidnaps children, for crying out loud! There's no way they'd make good rulers. You finger the note in your pocket, your resolve slowly growing. Tomorrow, you get to leave this place forever. With that thought in mind, sleep comes easy...\n\n\n \n\nThe next day, you begin the journey to the fortress, escorted by a few rebels, and Bolard himself. It takes several days to get there, and you get to pass by Arrorn on the way, so that's fun. (Though, you don't get to actually enter the village. Too much risk of being recognized or something). \n\n\nFinally, you spot it, sitting on a hilltop just on the horizon. The King's fortress.\n\n\n\"Alright,\" Bolard says, \"I didn't have much to do last night, so I thought a lot about the plan. We've got an informant inside the fortress who can let you in so you can carry out the mission. Just do what we discussed and we'll be fine.\" He thinks for a moment, then says, \"Also, I brought something in case the king doesn't fall so easy. He's got this enchanted armor, and I'm not quite sure you'll be able to break through it. So, I procured a bottle of water.\" He pulls a glass bottle out of his bag and hands it to you carefully.\n\n\n\"What's this for?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"What do you think? It'll get through the cracks in his armor, and kill him!\"\n\n\n\"It's water.\"\n\n\n\"Exactly! Water kills people!\"\n\n\n\"I don't follow.\"\n\n\n\"Didn't anyone ever tell you that water disintegrates people? The skin soaks up too much and it just falls apart.\"\n\n\n\"That's not how it works for Humans,\" you say, \"We can touch water, no problem.\"\n\n\n\"Really? Well, that sure makes things easier. This way you can cross the moat, no problem! I was wondering how we'd do that.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah... Okay.\" You roll your eyes. \"Just give me the bottle. I'll smash it over his head or something.\"\n\n\nAs you get closer to the fortress, you start to make out more detail. It looks like it mainly consists of a bunch of towers, surrounded by a wooden wall. By the time the sun sets, you're within a hundred yards of the walls. \n\n\n\"Alright,\" Bolard says, \"Good luck monster!\" He gives you a shove towards the moat. You jump right in and swim across, making it to the other side in less than a minute. You head around the back of the castle, where you find door carved into the wall. As you're contemplating how to get inside, it swings open and a female Oalkwardner beckons you inside. \n\n\nThat's when you realize you'll have to kill her so she doesn't reveal that you're a traitor once you escape. As soon as she shuts the door, you bash her over the head with your fist, taking her out instantly. You feel a little guilty about it, because after all, she did let you in. But then, the king is probably gonna execute all of the rebels anyway, right?\n\n\nYou're in a little alcove in the great hall, unseen by the group of people at the table, talking and laughing. There's another door nearby, presumably to the courtyard. You'll head out there in a moment, but first you've gotta figure out the best way to deal with the note...", "action_results": [{"action": "Go up to the table and deliver it yourself", "result": "You have to make sure the king gets this note, don't you? So, you walk right up to the table, reaching in your pocket for the note. \n\n\nBut before you can say so much as a word, someone screams. Now what on earth could've caused that? You look around, but realize they're all looking at you, backing away. You open your mouth to say that you come in peace, but before you do, a guard rushes over and stabs you in the gut! You're so surprised, you don't do anything when the others come and follow suit!\n\n\nYou fall to the ground, still clutching the note in your hand. Your vision swims, then fades to black. Hopefully they'll still find the note in your hand. They'll probably feel pretty stupid about killing a potential ally, but that's their loss...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Leave it stuck between the door and the wall on your way out", "result": "You slip out the door before anyone notices you, leaving the note behind. Now, you're in the fortress courtyard. Luckily, it's deserted, probably thanks to the banquet. Even more lucky, you spy another exit door just across the courtyard. You head straight for it and try to open it. To your immense surprise, it swings right open. Are they really this under prepared? What if someone broke into the fortress through that?\n\n\nYou step outside the walls, and realize that there's no handle on the other side. Closed, the door blends seamlessly with the wall, making it completely invisible. How interesting, looks like they had an escape route planned in case of an attack. So smart of them.\n\n\nYou cross the moat and hurry back into the forest, hoping against hope that Bolard doesn't see you. Once you're a good hundred feet in, a voice from besides you nearly makes you jump out of your skin.\n\n\n\"Did you do it?\"\n\n\nYou turn to see the masked Oalkwardner and a few others looking at you, waiting for an answer.\n\n\n\"Yeah,\" you say, \"It's done.\"\n\n\n\"Perfect!\" The Oalkwardner pulls off his mask, revealing his face. \"Now that I know I can trust you, I can take this stupid thing off. I was just wearing it in case you betrayed us or something. My name is Culmad, by the way. Now what do you say we get the heck out of here?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah,\" you say, \"Why don't we?\"\n\n\nAnd you set off into the forest, together. \n\n\nWhen word gets out about what you did, you will be hailed as a hero, the savior of the kingdom. But for now, perhaps you ought to just try your best to make a life for yourself in this place. It seems like you've already got yourself a few friends to start your new life with. Best of luck...", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Do not. (No way I'm helping this guy).", "result": "You stare at the Oalkwardner's hand. Slowly, you shake your head, and he draws back his arm, frowning. \n\n\n\"I figured this might happen,\" he says, \"I suppose you won't be much use as an assassin if you don't cooperate. But we may be able to find... another use for you.\"\n\n\n\"What are you talking about?\" You ask, \"I said no! I'm not going to help you!\"\n\n\nBut he doesn't respond. Instead, he makes a popping sound with his mouth, three times in a row. Suddenly, an entire hoard of Oalkwardners appears from all directions, all holding spears, all wearing the same cloaks as the leader before you. \n\n\n\"I feared it might come to this,\" he says, \"That's why I brought backup. The data we gather from studying you might just help us yet.\"\n\n\nYou leap to your feet and tense for a fight. \"You're going to kidnap me now? Bring all the Oalkwardners you've got, I'll just do them in like I did your other friends! You said it yourself! I'm a force to be reckoned with!\"\n\n\nThe Oalkwardner shakes his head and raises his hand. All of his soldiers, or whatever it is they are, leap towards you as one. There are far too many to fight off, even if you're stronger than they. Even still, you put up your fists and start swinging madly as you are engulfed in a wave of papery skin. Each swing of your arm makes contact, sending the creatures flying right and left. But as much as you punch and kick, they still manage to get a grip on you, pulling you this way and that, crawling up your legs and weighing you down. For some reason or other, none of them have spears. Not that you're complaining, if it weren't for that fact, you'd probably be dead already.\n\n\nA single Oalkwardner is light as a football, easily tossed around in a fight. But a whole hoard? That's enough to crush a grown man under their combined weight. Slowly, your knees begin to weaken as more and more of the creatures pile on top of you. You stagger around for a few moments until you finally collapse, falling backwards into the grass. It's hard to see anything, they cover your face, blocking your view. But over their cries, you can just hear the leader's voice.\n\n\n\"You should've taken my offer, monster. Perhaps then, we could've been friends.\"\n\n\nA pain slashes across your wrist. Something's cut you! Before you have time to figure out what that might be, you begin to feel dizzy. The edges of your vision close in until all that's left is one small pinprick of light. Then, even that is extinguished, and the world fades away...", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "the lighter!", "result": "Common sense says the knife would be the better choice. I mean, how much damage can you really do with a lighter? It takes too long to set someone's clothes on fire; you'll be tackled from behind before you have a chance to hold the flame in place long enough. But for some strange reason, the lighter just feels like the right tool for the job. \n\n\nBefore anyone even has a chance to process the fact that you're there, you tackle one of the creatures holding the... other smaller creature down. It's like running into a giant beach ball, except made of Paper-Mache. You thought it would be harder to send the creature flying, but it's so light, you hardly notice the impact. By the time the two of you hit the ground, you've already pressed the lighter to the thing's head and flicked it on. To your amazement, it's skin goes up in flames faster than a pile of dry pine needles. So fast, you nearly burn yourself before you manage to get far enough away from it. These things not only look like they're made of paper, the also burn like it too. \n\n\n\"What is this?\" The leader cries, \"What the heck are you?\"\n\n\nThere's no time to respond. The other creature (not the leader), is already upon you. It charges towards you, so fast you can barely get the lighter around in time... But you do. The creature runs right into the flame, recoiling as if it's been stabbed. Within seconds it's reduced to ashes, just like the first one. \n\n\nThe leader stares at you and takes a few steps back.\n\n\n\"P-please...\" he says, \"D-don't hurt me!\"\n\n\nBefore you have a chance to react, he's already running away, off into the forest. He's far too fast for you, that's for sure. By the time you get to your feet again, he's already disappeared into the trees. \n\n\nAs the dust settles, the weight of your actions sets in. You've just killed two intelligent creatures. Even if they're not quite human, they still talked. What if they had family? Kids? You had no way of knowing the lighter would kill them. You just thought you might give them a scare, send them running. But the way they treated that other creature... there's no way they were really worth sparing... right? \n\n\nSpeaking of which, you'd better make sure that other creature is alright...", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Watch from afar. Better to stay safe than risk your life for a stranger.", "result": "You stay where you are and listen.\n\n\n\"Please!\" cries the high pitched voice, \"I just wanna go home! Let me go home!\"\n\n\n\"We're giving you a new home.\" Says the gruff voiced one (probably the leader), \"A better home! Don't you want to help make your old home better?\"\n\n\n\"No! I want my papa!\"\n\n\n\"My word!\" The leader explodes, \"She's a child! How hard is it to get a child into a bag?\"\n\n\nThe screams become muffled now, and a new voice says\n\n\n\"We're not incompetent, you shriveled prune! See? We've already got her in. If you'd use your rotten husk of a brain for one second you'd stop yelling and see that.\"\n\n\n\"Under the old order, a comment like that would get you executed.\"\n\n\n\"So what? We're out to put an end to the old order, not-\"\n\n\n\"Would you shut up? You want someone to hear us? You're worse than the little girl!\"\n\n\n\"All I'm saying is, you won't do anything about it. You know it's wrong, I know it's wrong, so stop making stupid hollow threats!\"\n\n\nThe leader laughs, a cold, empty laugh. \"I'll be the judge of what's right and what's wrong, thank you very much. Not everything about the old order has to go. Don't throw the slush out with the water, as they say. Now pick up that bag and start walking. We've taken too long already.\"\n\n\nWith that, the muffled screams of the child fade into the distance as the light grows further away. Soon, all you can hear is the pounding of your heart, returning slowly to normal. It's a good thing you didn't get tangled up in that mess. No telling what would've happened if they'd seen you. Still, the sounds of that girl screaming still ring in your ears. Something tells you they might linger still for a little while longer.\n\n\nSoon as you're sure the danger's passed, you walk a little closer to the scene of the crime, or whatever it was you just saw. To your surprise, there's a path not too far from there. The kidnapers must've been waiting in the bushes or something, and jumped out to grab the girl as she passed. With no other options at hand, you start down the path in the opposite direction from the kidnapers. It's lined with stones, with a few oddly-shaped bricks set in the ground here and there, as if, a long time ago, it was paved. \n\n\nThe trees are thinning out now, and soon you can see the night sky in all it's glory. You come to the edge of a hill and stop. Down the slope in front of you, lights are visible. A village rests at the bottom of the hill, still sleeping in the light of the stars. What's more, from your vantage point you can just see the beginnings of the sunrise peeking up from behind the mountains in the distance. The path has given way to a rough set of stairs carved into the hillside. They are smaller than most stairs you've seen, like they were carved especially for children. Still, it's better than picking your way down the slope and probably slipping a few times along the way. \n\n\nYou reach the bottom of the hill in record time and find yourself still a mile or so away from the village. Looks like the path continues into it, so you keep following it. As you walk, you pass by a strange plant, just taller than you are. It grows on a thin, blue stalk, straight up, until it droops over at the top, opening into a strange, orange bulb. The bulb glows in the dawn, lighting the whole path beneath your feet. Just a few moments later, you pass by another on the opposite side of the path. The entire trail leading up to the village is lined with these plants, lighting the way like streetlights on an old city road. ", "action_results": [{"action": "The village", "result": "It soon becomes apparent that you are closer to the village than you thought. Is it just you, or are those buildings smaller than they seemed from afar? You come to the edge of the village to find that the smallest of the houses are about your height. Everything is half the size it should be, from the road through town to the stones that pave it. What's more, everything is made of the strangest materials, the likes of which you've never seen. (At least, not that you can remember). The only thing you've seen that looks remotely like this is Paper-Mache, but this must be sturdier than that, otherwise these houses would've fallen down ages ago as soon as the wind decided to pick up.\n\n\nAs you draw nearer to the center of town, you begin to feel that unsettling feeling of being watched. It's been present for quite some time now, growing stronger as the sun continued to light up more of the sky. Are those eyes you see, poking out between the shuttered windows of the houses? Why is nobody out and about yet, it may be early, but even still-\n\n\n\"What in the name of the water-pit are you?\" A voice from behind snaps you out of your thoughts. \n\n\nYou turn, knocking your elbow on the corner of the houses nearby. Grimacing from the pain, you see before you a strange creature, almost human, yet not quite. Its head comes up only to your waist, and it's skin has the same Paper-Mache quality as the walls of the buildings beside you. The ears are the strangest part, sticking straight up into the air. It's a wonder something so small can hold them up like that for so long. The creature holds something like a spear, made of wood, pointed straight at you. \n\n\n\"Do you speak, you big brute?\" The creature asks, \"What are you, why have you come here, waking us all up in the night?\"\n\n\n\"The sun's out,\" you reply, \"People get up when the sun is out, don't they?\"\n\n\n\"Do you like getting up at the crack of dawn? Some of us sleep in and that's besides the point. What the heck are you, and why are you here?\"\n\n\n\"What am I?\" You ask, your irritation growing with each word this creature says, \"What are you? What is this place? I've never seen anything like you.\"\n\n\nOther creatures, like this one before you, peak their heads out from doorways and windows, drawn out by the commotion at hand.\n\n\n\"I am Merk, head of the watchmen of Arrorn.\" Says the creature, \"This village and it's people are under my protection. If you have come to do harm, consider this my warning. State your purpose or leave this place, lest I am forced to raise my spear and drive you out myself!\"\n\n\n\"I haven't done anything!\" You protest, \"Why are you threatening me? Don't I have... rights or something?\" That thing may be small, but the stick it's holding still looks pretty sharp.\n\n\nThe creature pauses, lowering it's spear just a touch. \"I don't know what you mean by 'rights,'\" it says, \"But you raise an important point. I apologize for threatening you, it's just that I've never seen anything quite like you in all my seventy-four years of life in this village.\"\n\n\n\"I'm a human... I think,\" You say, still feeling a little annoyed, \"And in all my... well, I'm not sure how many years of existence, I've never seen anything quite like you either. I think.\"\n\n\n\"I am what is known as an Oalkwardner.\" Says the creature, (Merk, as he called himself), \"As are all others like me. This village-\"\n\n\nA high pitched whistle cuts through the air, cutting Merk off mid sentence. He seems to jump a little when he hears it, his stance becoming more rigid, more alert. \n\n\n\"The alarm!\" He says, raising his spear once more, \"I'm sorry, but duty calls!\" He leaps towards you and you flinch. Is he going to attack you after all? But no, he soars over your head and lands behind you, taking off as soon as his feet touch the ground.\n\n\n\"Wait!\" You call. The idea of being left alone in this strange village terrifies you. Who knows? The next person you talk to might attack you for real. You run after Merk, ducking through the too narrow streets, nearly flattening a few unsuspecting Oalkwardners. Even with your longer legs, Merk is faster than you, slowly drawing farther and farther away. \n\n\n\"Please!\" You cry once more, \"I don't even know where I am!\" \n\n\nMerk slows a little and looks over his shoulder. \"If you want to stay with me, then do so!\" He calls back, \"But I must warn you, I have work to do. I may not be of much use to you.\"\n\n\n\"That's... fine...\" You pant, \"Just... slow down... a little.\"\n\n\n\"We're almost there, human! I cannot slow my pace, there may not be much time!\"\n\n\nYou can hardly begin to imagine what he means by that in your current state, (you're not going to be able to run much longer with this pain in your side), but he's clearly not slowing down. Maybe it's the fear of being left behind, but somehow you find the strength to keep up the pace. The road grows wider with each twist and turn, until it gives way to a dilapidated plaza with a strange tower in the middle. Atop it is what looks to be a horn of some kind, with an Oalkwardner blowing into it. This is where the high pitched noise came from earlier. \n\n\nMost of the people milling about the square ignore the horn, as if this is some kind of daily occurrence. Merk slows at the base of the tower, stopping in front of an Oalkwardner in something resembling a dress, it's ears drooping. You catch up just in time to hear the ensuing conversation.\n\n\n\"Fila?\" Merk asks, \"Why have you sounded the alarm? What's wrong?\"\n\n\n\"Its Pila,\" Says Fila, \"She's dis-\" the Oalkwardner notices you for the first time, \"What in the world is that?\"\n\n\nHer ears stick straight in the air and she leaps backwards, trembling. Merk turns and sees you standing there. \n\n\n\"This is human. It's friendly, don't worry.\" He turns to you and says, \"And this is Fila, my wife.\"\n\n\n\"Why is everyone so afraid of me?\" You ask, \"I haven't done anything wrong.\"\n\n\n\"I'm sorry... hue-mon.\" Her ears begin to droop once again, \"I'm just worried, that's all. Our daughter,\" She gestures to Merk and herself, \"is missing. She went to play with her friends yesterday evening. I meant to stay up waiting for her, but I was so tired that I just couldn't stay awake. And when I woke up, she still hadn't come back.\"\n\n\nMerk's eyes grow wider, and he grips his spear tighter. \"What do you mean, she hasn't come back.\" \n\n\n\"I mean, she isn't here, Merk! She might've disappeared like all those other-\"\n\n\n\"No!,\" he says, \"I'm sure she's fine. She probably just got lost. We'll find her.\"\n\n\nA chill runs down your spine. You'd forgotten about the kidnapping you saw in the forest after Merk confronted you. You were too worried about staying alive to think about someone else's troubles. But now the memory returns in full force, the fear it brings creeping through every fiber of your being. \n\n\n\"I'm not so sure about that...\" You say, voice trembling a little. \n\n\nMerk turns to you. \"What do you mean? Did you have something to do with it?\" He picks up his spear, gripping it tight.\n\n\n\"No! But I think I might have seen what happened.\" And you go on to explain the strange events which you saw when you first awoke. When you finish, Merk covers his face with his hands.\n\n\n\"I've dealt with this sort of thing for years,\" he chokes, \"But it's always been someone else's kid. Someone else's heartache...\" He looks up at you. \"This is the fourth kid to disappear in the last month. If these people that took... that took my daughter, took the others too...\" He stops and covers his face again.\n\n\n\"Then,\" Fila says, \"If we find her, we find them all. Hue-mon. Please, will you help us? Take us to where you saw her, tell us which way they went. Then, maybe, we can find her. Her, and everyone else.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Of course I'll help!\"", "result": "Maybe it's bravery, or maybe it's the guilt of having done nothing to help the girl in the first place, but you don't hesitate to say yes.\n\n\n\"Thank you so much!\" Merk says, \"Come on, we'd better get going now. Normally I'd get a team together to help with the search, but since I have you, I think we'll just go as a twosome. The time it takes to round everyone up isn't worth it.\"\n\n\nYou leave the village and lead Merk back up the hill to where you saw the kidnapping. His ears twitch nervously as you walk, and he talks incessantly. \n\n\n\"I just don't know what I'll do if we don't get her back.\" he says at one point, \"the thought of never seeing her again... hurts more than anything. Why couldn't it have been me? What do they want with children?\"\n\n\nYou don't respond. There's just nothing to say. At this point you reach the staircase, and begin climbing up it. In the light of the day, you're beginning to notice something strange about the trees. It's been bugging you for a while now, come to think of it. From what you can draw from your broken memory, these trees aren't like any back... well, wherever you came from. The shapes of the leaves are different, so is the pattern of the bark. It's like the entire forest is something out of a fantasy world.\n\n\nAs you draw near to the scene of the kidnapping, you slow down.\n\n\n\"It happened just up there,\" you point, \"They went up the path that way once they were finished.\"\n\n\n\"We've gotta make sure we don't miss anything.\" Merk says, \"Thankfully, this path isn't as well traveled as it once was, or our search would be nigh impossible. Keep an eye on the edges of the trail, let me know if you see any sort of clues.\"\n\n\n\"What am I looking for anyway? If I see, say, a broken branch or something, how are we to know it wasn't broken by a deer or some other, innocent travelers?\"\n\n\nMerk sighs, \"I don't know, human, but right now it's all we have.\"\n\n\nFor the next couple of hours, you walk the trail, scanning the ground for something, anything that might help you. But there's nothing. Not so much as a blade of grass is out of place, (if, indeed, blades of grass can be considered out of place in a forest). The sun is growing low in the sky now, soon it'll be too dark to search. Your feet ache and your stomach rumbles, your stash of Cheez-Its isn't enough to satisfy your hunger completely.\n\n\nThen, you see something that is a little out of place. A few of the trees just off the path look as though they've had bites taken out of them by some big hungry monster.\n\n\n\"Merk?\" you say, \"Do you see that?\"\n\n\nMerk jumps a little at the sound of your voice. \"What is it?\" he asks, excited, \"Did you find something?\"\n\n\n\"I don't know,\" you say, pointing, \"I'm not quite sure it's what we're looking for, but it's definitely something.\"\n\n\nMerk takes one look at the markings on the trees and his eyes go wide. He reaches over his shoulder and draws his spear. \n\n\n\"What is it?\" You ask, your muscles tensing up in fear, \"What's wrong?\"\n\n\n\"Those markings,\" Merk's voice trembles a little, \"are from a beaver.\"\n\n\nYou stare at him for a moment. Then, a chuckle escapes you lips. \n\n\n\"What's so bad about a beaver?\" You laugh, \"Are you afraid one might drop a tree on you or something?\"\n\n\n\"Beavers are no laughing matter,\" Merk snaps, \"They're vicious killers! If you'd heard a quarter of what I had about them, you'd be scared too, I guarantee.\"\n\n\n\"Do you want to turn back?\"\n\n\n\"Heck no! If I turn back, it means I don't get Pila back, and if I don't get Pila back...\" he trails off, and is quiet for a moment. Then, he shakes his head. \"It doesn't matter, we're not stopping. Beavers or no, we will keep going. I don't think I could live with myself if we didn't.\"\n\n\n\"Whatever you say,\" you shrug, \"I'm not afraid of beavers, so I guess you'll just have to face your fear if we meet one.\"\n\n\n\"Let's try to make sure we don't meet one, alright?\"\n\n\n\"Alright,\" you say, rolling your eyes.\n\n\nYou continue up the trail. As it continues to get darker, the two of you go slower and slower, as it's harder to verify that there are, indeed, no clues in a given area. The beaver markings are becoming more and more numerous the longer you walk, which does nothing to help Merk's nerves. It's not exactly great for yours either, if you're honest with yourself. You may not be afraid of beavers as you know them, but there's always that chance that \"beaver\" means something different in this place than what you know. \n\n\n\"Do you think we should stop for the night?\" you ask, as the darkness grows too thick to properly see through, \"So we don't miss anything in this darkness?\"\n\n\nMerk thinks for a moment, then sighs. \"I guess you have a point. We'd best make camp here. Hold on for a moment, I have to go... erm, relieve myself.\"\n\n\nHe heads a little ways off the path, and you sit down on a rock to wait for him. Your feet need a rest, they've probably got blisters all over after all that hiking. \n\n\n\"Human!\" Merk cries, \"Come look at this!\"\n\n\nYou groan and stand up. Guess your feet aren't getting that much of a rest after all. \n\n\n\"What were the kidnapers wearing?\" Merk asks when you reach him.\n\n\n\"It was hard to tell from so far away,\" You say, trying to remember, \"It looked like they were wearing some kind of robes.\"\n\n\n\"What color were they?\" \n\n\n\"Green, I think, why do you ask?\"\n\n\n\"Because I found this!\" Merk gestures towards a little thorn bush to his left. Hanging from one of the branches is a small scrap of green fabric. \"I bet they went off this way!\" he says, \"We should see if we can follow their trail.\"\n\n\n\"Can you do that in the dark?\"\n\n\nMerk goes quiet for a moment. \"I... don't know.\" he admits, \"Probably not as well as in daylight, we might lose the trail or something if we go now. But they could get further away if we wait. Oh, it's so much harder to think clearly about these things when it's your own daughter at stake... \"\n\n\n\"We best wait till morning,\" You say, \"We don't want to lose the trail in the dark and get ourselves lost. We wouldn't be much help then would we?\"\n\n\nMerk doesn't say anything for a moment. Then, he nods slowly.\n\n\n\"I guess it's the best we can do,\" he sighs, \"It just hurts to sit here, doing nothing.\"\n\n\n\"I get it,\" You say, \"But think of it this way: by waiting, we're maximizing our chances of finding her.\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, I know. Let's get set up, I'm tired. If we're going to get some sleep tonight, we'd better do it soon...\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The next morning...", "result": "You sleep like a rock. It's been a very long day, that's for sure. You've hardly stopped since waking up in the forest last night. But of course, it doesn't last. You awake to Merk staring down at you, poking your side with his foot.\n\n\n\"Wake up, human,\" he says, \"It's time to go.\" \n\n\nYou sit up, blinking back the sleep from your eyes. The sun is just beginning to rise, but by all accounts, it's still pretty dark outside.\n\n\n\"Shouldn't we wait a little longer?\" You ask, \"until it's lighter out?\"\n\n\n\"By the time we pack up camp, the sun will have risen a little more.\"\n\n\nYou take one last longing look at your sleeping bag, then roll it up and start getting your stuff together. In a half hour's time, you're on the trail again, Merk leading the way with his tracking skills. \n\n\n\"What's the plan when we if we do find them?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"We don't know what we're walking into, so we'll have to improvise.\"\n\n\n\"Oh...\"\n\n\nFor a while, the two of you walk in silence, Merk stopping every ten feet or so to check for new clues. It seems people have traveled this way before, and relatively frequently. There is a faint trail, if you really look for it, where other Oalkwardners have gone before. \n\n\n\"These beaver markings are getting more and more frequent,\" Merk says after you've been on the trail an hour, \"I think we're headed right into the heart of their territory. What on earth were they thinking, coming to a place like this?\"\n\n\n\"Listen,\" you say, \"I'll deal with any beavers that come our way. All I need to do is wave my hands in the air and make a loud noise.\"\n\n\n\"You're either a lot stronger than you seem, or an arrogant fool if you think that.\" \n\n\n\"It's a beaver! What harm can it do?\"\n\n\nMerk doesn't respond. Instead, he stops short, and you nearly trip over him.\n\n\n\"Why are we stopping?\" you ask\n\n\nMerk puts a finger to his lips and points down the path. You look and see something big and hairy laying just to the side of the trail. It's some sort of creature, about the size of a bear, and it isn't moving. \n\n\n\"It's a beaver,\" Merk whispers, \"If you really know what you're doing, go deal with it!\"\n\n\n\"That's no beaver,\" you whisper back, \"I'm not sure what that is, but it's not a-\"\n\n\n\"Shut up and take a look, will you?\"\n\n\n\"Fine!\"\n\n\nQuietly as you can, you walk closer, crouching behind trees at every opportunity. But it never moves. You're not even sure it's breathing. Then, you notice the blood staining the ground around it. Whatever this creature is, it's dead. \n\n\n\"Merk, I think it's dead!\" you say.\n\n\n\"Are you sure?\"\n\n\nYou walk right up to the creature and take a closer look. It has a gaping hole in it's stomach, and multiple puncture wounds in various places. Looking at it up close, it occurs to you that this thing really does bear an uncanny resemblance to a beaver, right down to the teeth and tail. The only thing that's different is the size.\n\n\n\"Yeah,\" you call, \"I'm pretty sure.\" Just to prove it, you give it a good kick in the side. \n\n\n\"My goodness,\" Merk says when he gets closer, \"Never in all my days... Those look like spear wounds. And that big hole in it's stomach looks too clean to have come from some kind of other animal.\"\n\n\n\"Are you saying an Oalkwardner did this?\" \n\n\n\"Possibly. And a powerful one at that. I certainly hope we never have to fight them, should we ever meet.\"\n\n\nThe two of you stare at the beaver corpse for a few minutes. Finally, Merk breaks the silence.\n\n\n\"We should keep going, the trail continues this way.\"\n\n\nUnnerved, you follow him. Something about that corpse put you on edge. Every random snap of a twig has you checking over your shoulder, searching for potential threats. For another two hours, you walk in silence. Neither of you dares say a word, in case whatever killed that beaver is somewhere lurking nearby. The trees are growing thicker now, the beaver markings more numerous. Then, Merk stops again. \n\n\n\"Do you hear that?\" he whispers\n\n\nYou stop and listen. \n\n\n\"What is it?\" you ask, not hearing anything,\n\n\n\"Shhh!\"\n\n\nFor a few minutes, you're completely still. Then, you hear it, ever so faintly in the distance. The sound of voices.\n\n\n\"Let's go,\" says Merk, and takes off towards them on silent feet.\n\n\nAs quietly as you can, you follow behind him. The voices grow louder as you get closer, and soon you can make out snippets of conversation.\n\n\n\"...Hold her still...\"\n\n\n\"...better be quick...\"\n\n\n\"...somebody help!\"\n\n\nThe last voice is louder than the others, more clear. Merk stand up straighter when he hears it. \n\n\n\"That's my daughter,\" he says in a low voice, \"If they hurt her, I swear I'll...\"\n\n\nHe doesn't finish the sentence, but instead speeds up even more. You follow as closely behind as you can, worried that he might do something stupid. Suddenly, the trees give way to a clearing, where a large group of Oalkwardners in green cloaks gather around something at the very center. \n\n\n\"It's almost finished!\" one of them says, \"I'm applying the branch now, everyone back off!\"\n\n\nThe group spreads out enough that you can just see what they were gathering around. A small Oalkwardner is strapped to the ground, drenched in some kind of green substance. \n\n\n\"Please stop!\" She cries, struggling against her bindings, \"I don't like this, let me go!\"\n\n\nThe cloaked Oalkwardner ignores her and tosses something on top of her struggling form, then takes a few steps backwards as fast as he can. The girl, Pila, begins to scream, and the earth begins to quake.\n\n\n\"NO!\" Merk cries, and runs into the clearing before you can do anything to stop him. (How he manages to do so without tripping is beyond you). All the cloaked Oalkwardners turn and look at him in shock as he runs towards them. They draw their spears and get ready to fight, but instead of charging them, he leaps into the air, sailing over their heads, and lands right next to Pila.\n\n\nBut while all this is happening, Pila's skin begins to give off a faint blue glow, growing brighter every second. By the time Merk reaches her side, she's too bright to look at. \n\n\nAs Merk reaches out to touch her, a bolt of lightning flashes up from the ground, and the sound of thunder resonates throughout the forest. A split second later and the light is gone. A moment later, the earth stops it's quaking. You turn and look at the place where Pila once was, and gasp. All that's left of Merk are a few scraps of Paper-Mache skin and a pile of ashes. As for Pila... what on earth is that? A strange lump of wood lays in the middle of the clearing. It takes you a few seconds to realize that it's an exact copy of Pila. What the heck did they do to her anyway?\n\n\nPresently, about half the Oalkwardners head over towards a contraption over on the other side of the clearing, (you can't quite make it out from here), while the rest mill about, chatting nervously among themselves about what Merk did. If you're going to try anything, now might be the time to do it. You might be able to save Pila and Merk's remains, at least...", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to steal the remains of the fallen Oalkwardners", "result": "You may not get this chance again, so you'd better make the most of it. You run into the clearing as fast as you can. It only takes a moment for one of them to notice you and sound the alarm. By the time you've reached Pila's side and scooped her up in your arms, every last one of them are charging towards you, spears drawn. Without thinking, you run back the way you came, leaving Merk's remains behind. (Not that there was much left to collect to begin with). \n\n\nBranches scrape your face as you run, but you don't stop. The Oalkwardners aren't slowing down, so neither can you. No telling what'll happen if they catch you. It's a good thing you've got adrenaline, because otherwise the blisters on your feet alone would've stopped you in your tracks by now. But it doesn't really matter. They're gaining on you too quickly to escape. Suddenly, the wooden lump in your arms shifts, and you're so startled, you drop it and proceed to trip over it, falling face first into the dirt. As you're getting back to your feet, you see out of the corner of your eye, the wooden Pila getting to its feet. Slowly, it turns towards you, staring at you with glowing yellow eyes. Then, it leaps on top of you, and digs its claws into your chest. You're too surprised to do anything about it. By the time you've recovered from the shock, you're too delirious from the pain to care. The last thing you see as the world fades away is the Oalkwardners running away in terror as the creature feasts on your flesh...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Wait and follow them.", "result": "You stay where you are and watch as they pick up the contraption and carry it to Pila's remains. That's when you realize, it's a cage. They set it down right beside her and put her remains inside it. Then they close it up and lock it tight. Four Oalkwardners pick it up by the corners and lead the way into the forest. You follow at a distance, careful not to be seen. The brush is thicker than ever here, branches scratch your face and you nearly trip several times. Luckily, you manage to keep your footing in the end. \n\n\nAs you walk, you begin to notice something strange about the wooden remains of Pila in the cage. Every once in a while, they shift a little, as if of their own accord. Is it just your imagination, or did one of her arms just twitch? The Oalkwardners glance up at it every time this happens, and you notice a few of them gripping their spears, getting ready to draw them in case... well, you're not sure what. \n\n\nAll of a sudden, the whole procession stops. Something's going on at the very front of the group, but you can't quite make it out from this distance. Then, you see it. A wooden hatch opens up in front of them, about four times their size, and they begin to descend down it, carrying the cage somewhat awkwardly between them. Then, the rest of them follow. Soon as the last one descends, the hatch falls closed. You rush over to it and find that it's camouflaged to look like part of the landscape, though, if you really look hard enough, you can just see the outline of it in the grass. \n\n\nYou wait about five minutes before you try to open it. (Just to make sure no one's lingering by the door when you come in). A good tug on the handle, (cleverly disguised as a tree root), confirms that, as expected, it's locked. As you stand there, trying to figure out a way to get inside, you hear the muffled sound of footsteps coming up, getting nearer and nearer to the surface. Quick as you can, you back away and duck behind a bush, just before the hatch comes open. A single Oalkwardner climbs out, leaving the door open behind him. He grumbles something about \"Bathrooms\" and \"Relieving himself,\" and heads off a little ways into the woods. \n\n\nNow's your chance! Thanks to that Oalkwardners carelessness, the door is wide open in front of you. You slip inside as quickly as you can, pulling the door shut behind you. It clicks when it closes, probably locking itself automatically. Good, now that Oalkwardner won't come in from behind and surprise you. \n\n\nYou find yourself at the top of a spiral staircase, which descends about twenty feet before stopping. When you reach the bottom, you find yourself in a dirt tunnel with three paths branching off from it. ", "action_results": [{"action": "The tunnels", "result": "You are at the bottom of a spiral staircase, leading up to the surface. Three, hard packed dirt tunnels branch off from here, each with a sign that tells where it leads. A notice board full of announcements hangs on one wall. You glance over it and notice one in particular reminding the whole facility of a mandatory meeting at this very time. This is perfect! You'll be able to explore the whole place without being caught!\n\n\nThe first tunnel is marked \"auditorium,\" the second says \"Lab,\" and the third, \"Containment.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Go down the path labeled \"auditorium\"", "result": "You slip down the hallway, trying to be as quiet as you can. This must be the way to their meeting place. It's probably where everyone is right now. Sure enough, you begin to hear the faint sound of voices echoing down the tunnel, growing louder as you go further. Soon, you come to a round wooden door, blocking the way. From behind it, you can hear the voices, or rather, one voice, of someone giving a speech on the other side. You press your ear to the door and listen...\n\n\n\"As you well know,\" the speaker says, \"The order of the broken chalice has spent years upon years preparing to liberate this land in which we all live, by slaying the tyrant in our midst!\" The crowd cheers at this, sounds like only a few hundred Oalkwardners. Are they really planning some kind of uprising with such a small amount of people? As if in answer to your question, the speaker continues, \"Though we are few in number, the king cannot begin to anticipate our secret weapon: The Oalkfriers! Thanks to the dedication of our resident alchemists, we have perfected the art of creating fearsome beasts, made of the strongest substance known to our kind: the wood of a simple oak tree!\"\n\n\n\"The day of the uprising draws nearer and nearer. Just a few more Oalkfriers and we will be ready to estate our glorious new order. Allow me to go over the plan once again. We begin by releasing our Oalkfriers into many of the current order's key locations. This includes their military bases, ambassador homes, and the palace itself. They will wreak havoc, destroying everyone in their path. Once they have done their job, we will move in and neutralize them, leaving no-one to prevent us from taking the throne ourselves!\" The crowd cheers once again.\n\n\nYou've heard enough. Whatever this is, it can't be good. You've got to do something about it, or else there's no telling what might happen!", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge into the auditorium and take out as many as you can!", "result": "There's nothing else for it. You fling open the door and rush into the room, screaming. The entire auditorium turns to look at you just as you reach the Oalkwardners nearest to the door. Before they can react, you start kicking as many as you can. They go flying, your foot leaving dents wherever it lands. Compared to these papery creatures, you're like some kind of superhero, with ten times the strength of any of them. \n\n\nUnfortunately for you, however, there are about five hundred of them, and they're not about to let you plow through all of them without a good fight. Many draw their spears, and leap at you all at once. You try your best to fight them off, but there's just too many! They latch onto you wherever they can, driving their spears into your arms, your legs, your stomach. The pain is overwhelming. Those spears may be small, but they still hurt pretty bad. You fall to the ground as the world fades away around you. Who knew you'd be killed by a pack of midgets?", "action_results": []}, null]}, {"action": "Go down the path labeled \"lab\"", "result": "You head down the tunnel, trying your best to tiptoe. The earthy ground helps muffle your footfalls, thank goodness, but it doesn't matter. There's no one in the tunnel. When you reach the end, you find yourself in a room made of wood. Shelves line the walls, filled to the brim, not only with books, but also with other curiosities. Jars of frogs, and creatures stranger still, all of them dead. There are little models, carved from wood, bits of untempered metal and glass, among other things. \n\n\nA wooden cauldron sits in the center of the room, with a strange liquid sitting in it, still as glass. A table stands off to the side, holding numerous cups and bowls of different liquids and powders, none of which you recognize. A neat stack of papers sits on one end of the table, pinned down by a particularly large bowl of rocks. \n\n\nEverything here is perfectly neat and organized. Nothing is so much as an inch out of place, even the tiniest grains of powder in the bowls seem to have a strange, indescribable order to them. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Fill a bottle of the cauldron liquid", "result": "You take off your backpack and rifle through it, until you find just what you need: an empty plastic bottle. (You finished off the mountain dew the first day you got here). Quickly, you dip the bottle into the cauldron and fill it up, screwing the cap back on once you're done. Let's just see what you can accomplish with that...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Check the notes", "result": "You take the bowl of rocks off of the stack of papers and glance at the paper on top. \n\n\n\"To destroy and Oalkfrier,\" the title reads. Below are a few paragraphs in immaculate handwriting.\n\n\n\"Oalkfriers are essential to the master plan of the Order of the Broken Chalice, however, they must be neutralized once they've served their purpose, lest they overrun the kingdom. I have created a poison of sorts, powerful enough to destroy these creatures within seconds. For now, it sits in the cauldron in my lab, waiting to be used. It is nearly perfect, as much so as I can hope to make it. Just in case something is to happen to me before the plan is carried out, (though I highly doubt it), I will relay the instructions for its use below\"\n\n\n\"The poison is inactive until acted upon by a catalyst of some sort. This is for the safety of those using it. To activate, place a generous helping of Sodium Chloride (table salt), into it. (I have a bowl full of it on my desk in the lab). Then, throw it on the Oalkfrier as fast as you can. Get as far away as you can, as even the fumes from this deadly cocktail are enough to kill a whole room full of Oalkwardners. (You should be alright so long as you're outside, but I still wouldn't chance it.\"\n\n\nYou look up from the paper. The bowl of salt is just to the left of the stack of notes. On a whim, you pick it up to take it with you.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}, {"action": "Go down the path labeled \"containment\"", "result": "You sneak down the tunnel, checking around every corner just in case someone hasn't made it to the meeting yet. It wouldn't do to get caught now, there's no telling how many Oalkwardners are holed up down here. Luckily, the tunnel isn't that long, and after a few twists and turns, you find yourself in a large, dimly lit room, full what looks to be some kind of boxes \n\n\nIt takes a moment for your eyes to adjust, but when you do, you realize that these aren't boxes at all, but cages, just like the one they used to carry Pila's remains through the forest. What's more, every last one of them has a wooden Oalkwardner inside them, exactly like Pila after the lightning struck her. Gripped with a deadly cocktail of curiosity and fear, you approach the cage nearest to you and peer inside for a better look. It's a perfect likeness of an Oalkwardner child, right down to the Paper-Mache quality of it's skin. The only thing that's missing are the ears, which look like they've been broken off.\n\n\n\"What on earth have they done to you?\" You whisper to yourself.\n\n\nAroused by the sound of your voice, the eyes of the wooden Oalkwardner snap open. They give off a harsh, yellow glow, lighting up the dim room just a little. You stare at the creature, stunned, and it stares back. Then, without warning, it leaps at the bars of the cage, snarling. You leap backwards in the nick of time as one of its arms reaches between the bars and takes a grab at you.\n\n\nThe noise wakes the other creatures and before you know it, all of them are attacking their bars, trying to get at you. Fear overtakes you, and you take off running back down the way you came. What on earth was that anyway? What do they want with all these monsters? How are they creating them? All these questions race through your mind, unanswered, as you reach the crossroads once again.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\"Naw, I'm good.\"", "result": "\"I'm sorry.\" You say, \"I'm not sure where, or even who I am. I don't think I'm up to this sort of mission.\"\n\n\nFila stares at the dirt, clearly disappointed.\n\n\n\"Could you at least tell us where you saw them last?\" Merk asks\n\n\n\"I guess it couldn't hurt,\" you say. You explain how you came down the path from the top of the hill, and how you went in the exact opposite direction as them. \"Just keep going down the path and, I don't know, get some kind of tracker-person to pick up their trail. Am I saying that right?\"\n\n\n\"I suppose that helps,\" Merk murmurs, \"Thank you human. I hope that the knowledge you have granted me is a fair substitute for your presence on this journey. Come on Fila, let's go round up a search party.\"\n\n\nYou watch as they walk back into town, leaving you alone in the square. All the things you felt after witnessing the kidnapping resurface, guilt, helplessness, the whole package. For a moment you sit there, feeling sorry for yourself. Then you notice the Oalkwardners looking your way, suspicion in their eyes. Maybe you'd better find somewhere else to stay, you're not quite sure you're welcome here. It wouldn't do to have another incident like you did with Merk.\n\n\nSo, you head out of the village the same way you came in. Luckily, the most threatening thing you encounter on your way out are a few nervous glances as the rest of the village wakes up. Soon, you've left the buildings behind and are back on the path through the forest. After you've gone a ways, you turn off the path and head out into the field surrounding the village. Once you're far enough from the path that you're not likely to run into any unfriendly villagers, you toss your bag onto the ground and pull out your sleeping bag and pillow and spread them out on the ground. Not that you need to go to bed yet, but just to give yourself something to do, if only for a few minutes. Guess this'll serve as a camp for the time being.\n\n\nFor a while you stare off into the distance, thinking of nothing in particular. Your mind wanders, replaying the events of the day, contemplating your memory loss, trying to tease something from the thick fog that seems to engulf your thoughts every time you try to remember anything before you awoke in the forest.\n\n\nAfter a while, a line of figures appear in the distance, coming from the village, following the trail into the woods. You can just make out Merk and a few others, all carrying bags slung over their shoulders and spears in their hands. They don't notice you watching them, and carry on into the forest, following the information you gave them. Hopefully they find what they're looking for.\n\n\nThe rest of the day is uneventful at best. You busy yourself by building a fire, even though it's far too hot to need one, and exploring around your campsite. It crosses your mind that maybe you should head back into the village and introduce yourself, show them that you're nothing to fear. You go back and forth as to whether or not you should, but eventually sheer boredom convinces you to be brave and face the Oalkwardners. So you stamp out the fire best you can and start towards the path into the village. You've almost reached it when a lone Oalkwardner comes dashing out of the forest and trips, falling right on its face\n\n\n\"Are you alright?\" You ask, rushing to the creature's side.\n\n\n\"They've been taken!\" It gasps, \"Merk and the others... I was the only one... to escape. Man that hurts...\" It rolls onto its side, revealing a gaping hole, oozing a clear substance.\n\n\n\"What happened to you?\" Your heart pounds that the sight of the... well, you think it's blood. \"I... I think you need a doctor or something.\"\n\n\nThe creature doesn't respond. It just lays there, taking in shallow breaths, coughing every once in a while. You don't think, you just act, scooping up the body and taking off running towards the village. It's lighter than you'd expect, but maybe that's just adrenaline.\n\n\n\"Help!\" You shout as you run through the village streets, \"A doctor! She need a doctor!\" The Oalkwardners look at you terrified.\n\n\n\"A monster!\" One of them cries, seeing the creature in your arms.\n\n\n\"No!\" you shout, \"Don't those ears of yours work? I'm trying to save-\"\n\n\n\"Run it'll kill us all!\"\n\n\nThe Oalkwardners scatter in all directions, screaming. But there's no time to worry about them, you keep going, still calling for a doctor. A minute of this and the alarm sounds once more, cutting through the air. Still you search, frantically, for someone to help you. Then, you round a corner and come face to face with a wall of spears. The Watchmen of Arrorn have come to stop you, thinking you're a monster.\n\n\nBefore they can attack, you kneel and lay the Oalkwardner in your arms at their feet.\n\n\n\"I didn't do this.\" You say, \"You have to help her, she's going to die!\"\n\n\n\"Why should we believe you, monster?\" One of the watchmen asks, \"For all we know, you're responsible for all the disappearances.\"\n\n\n\"Why would I come here if I was the one who did this?\" You ask, \"What, do you think I'm stupid?\"\n\n\n\"I don't know,\" the watchman says, \"I don't make a habit of dealing with monsters.\"\n\n\n\"Enough of this!\" A voice from behind the line of Watchmen startles everyone. \"Clear a path, you idiots! This is no monster, but an acquaintance of Merk! He spoke to this creature just this morning and determined it was no threat!\" The Watchmen part to reveal an especially wrinkly Oalkwardner. \n\n\n\"I found her on the path!\" you say, \"She's from the search party that went out after Merk's kid, but I think something went wrong!\"\n\n\nThe wrinkly Oalkwardner takes one look at the wounded creature at your feet and gasps. \"Never, in all my years as an elder... I can treat her, but we must get to my office quickly. Come on, I need you to carry her, it'll be quicker that way!\"\n\n\nYou scoop her up and follow without a word. The elder's office is on the edge of the town square, (Which, thank goodness, is pretty close). It's bigger than some of the other buildings in the town, so you can just squeeze inside. \n\n\n\"Set her down here!\" he says, sweeping the contents off a table in the middle of the room in one motion. You obey, and the elder gets to work without another word, it's as if he's forgotten you're even there. For a while you stand there awkwardly, watching as the Elder stitches up the wound. What if he needs you for something? He probably won't but even still, you'd better stay put.\n\n\nSurprisingly, the operation takes only a half hour. After the Elder finishes bandaging the wound, he looks up at you. \n\n\n\"Thank you, human.\" He says, \"We are in your debt. You may leave if you wish, but-\"\n\n\nThe injured Oalkwardner moans on the table, cutting him off. \"They're gone... Dead, all of them.\" Her eyes are open, and they're staring straight at the elder.\n\n\n\"What happened?\" You demand, perhaps a little too swiftly.\n\n\n\"Don't pressure her, she just woke up,\" The elder says.\n\n\n\"No, I'm okay,\" she says, wincing, \"But they're not.\"\n\n\n\"If you feel you have the energy to talk, please go on,\" The elder says, \"I would like to know more about this myself.\"\n\n\n\"We were tracking... the kidnapers.\" She says, \"But... they found us. A whole hoard of them. There was some kind of talk of a base... said they were gonna... overthrow the king... but no time... to pay attention...\" Her ears droop, \"And... they killed... I was... only one...\" Her eyes roll back in her head and she passes out.\n\n\n\"My word!\" The elder says, rushing to her side and taking her right ear in his hand, \"She'll be alright once she gets some rest, but you should probably head outside for now. We must make preparations for a funeral for those who were lost. Do you have anywhere to go?\"\n\n\n\"I set up camp just outside the village,\" you say, \"I'll be alright, just tend to her.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The funeral", "result": "After word gets around about how you helped save that Oalkwardner girl, the villagers seem to trust you enough to allow you to roam the city without sounding any alarms. Over the next few days, you help with preparations for the funeral, in part because there's nothing better to do, but also because you feel a little bad about not helping Merk with his search. Who knows? Maybe you would've been the difference between his life and death.\n\n\nWhen the day of the funeral rolls around, the entire town gathers in the square. It's the most extravagant display you've ever seen in your short time at the village, with tons of food for all and more flowers than you've ever seen in one place before. It must've cost a fortune in... whatever these guys use as currency. Merk must've done quite a lot to help the community, because there sure are a lot of drooping ears. (Which, you've learned, is the Oalkwardner's equivalent to crying).\n\n\nYou stand at the edge of the crowd, still not quite feeling like a part of the community, as the Elder gives a speech.\n\n\n\"We are gathered here today to commemorate the life of Merk, Gertra, and Silia, three of the greatest-\"\n\n\nA pounding in the distance interrupts the speech. The whole crowd turns towards the source of the noise just in time to see a whole procession of Oalkwardners dressed in the brightest reds and yellows, all riding creatures like ponies, but with little spines running down their back instead of manes. They beat on little drums, all in sync.\n\n\nThe Oalkwardner at the front of the pack raises her arm and raises her voice. \n\n\n\"Presenting, the great Yelgar, Grand Protector of Realgna and the surrounding country!\" \n\n\nThe Drummers beat their drums faster and faster now, parting to allow a carriage to pass through, drawn by three lizard-like creatures, the size of bulls. The crowd parts for the carriage, and it stops right in front of the stage. \n\n\nThe door on the side of the vessel opens, and out hops a rather tall Oalkwardner wearing a red cape and strange, red bracelets spiraling around the entirety of his forearms, like snakes. \n\n\n\"People of the village of Arrorn!\" He says, \"I have come with grave news. It truly is a shame to interrupt such a lavish funeral, but there are more important matters at hand. It has come to my attention that there is a base of Rebels in the area, planning to overthrow the kingdom and estate a blasphemous 'new order.' These are the very same rebels that killed these three!\" He gestures at the paintings of the three fallen Oalkwardners, set on easels on the stage. \"We must act now, lest our glorious empire be overthrown. Outside this village is the seventy-third division of the King's army, sent to protect this village and take out the Rebel scum in our midst! It is for this reason, that the King and I felt the need to impose martial law on this village and the surrounding area! We will also be tripling the tax to sustain our troops. And we'll be taking all this lovely food you've set out for the funeral. Desperate times, desperate measures and all that.\"\n\n\nA cry of protest comes from deep within the crowd. \"You're already taking three quarters of everything we have!\" A female Oalkwardner pushes her way to the front of the crowd to confront the Yelgar. \"We can barely survive as it is! And that food for the funeral is the last of our reserves, we only took it out in the first place because Merk and the others did so much for us in their lives!\"\n\n\nYelgar stares her straight in the face. \"I understand your concern.\" He says, \"But as I said, desperate times, desperate measures. Guards, restrain her!\" Two of the horsemen hop off their steeds and grab the girl by the arms, forcing her to her knees. Yelgar raises his hand, and slaps her across the face, and the crowd gasps.\n\n\n\"Do not question the authority of the Crown.\" Yelgar says, still deathly calm, \"Or you might wind up like them too,\" he nods towards the paintings.\n\n\n\"Who gives a crap about the Crown? We're all gonna die anyway under your 'martial law', so may as well go out fighting!\" The girl glares at Yelgar, as the whole crowd seems to hold its breath.\n\n\n\"I see how it is,\" Yelgar says, clearly disappointed. \"Then let this be an example to anyone else who thinks of dissenting.\" He reaches beneath his cloak and pulls out a wooden knife, raising it above his head to strike at the girl, now trembling in the guards grip.\n\n\n\"C-come on,\" the girl says, voice faltering, \"They can't stop all of us! I say we finish what those rebels started!\" \n\n\nStill, no one moves. The whole thing reminds you, once again, of the girl in the forest the night you woke up. The guilt of leaving her behind wells up within you, are you really gonna let it happen again?", "action_results": [{"action": "Heck no I'm not letting that happen again! Attack Yelgar!", "result": "\"Hey, stop!\" You cry, before you can think of anything cleverer to say.\n\n\nEveryone turns towards you, shocked. Even Yelgar raises an eyebrow. Before anyone has the chance to grab you, you rush towards Yelgar, and his eyes go wide.\n\n\n\"What are you?\" He cries, dropping the knife to the ground with a clatter. \n\n\nYou don't answer, just slam your foot into his face, full force. He goes flying into the side of the carriage and crumples to the ground, dead. Holy smokes, did you actually just do that? How the heck did you do that? But there's no time to think about it now, a few of the other guards are just realizing what's happened and are charging you. \n\n\n\"He killed the Grand Protector!\" one of them shouts, \"Stop him before he does any more damage!\"\n\n\nYou should probably run, but something stops you. So, you tense up, and get ready for battle. Soon as the first horseman gets close, you swing at him with everything you've got. He goes flying off his steed, tripping up one of the others. \n\n\nThen it's rinse and repeat for the whole fight. You find, to your surprise, that you're extremely strong compared to the Oalkwardners. With every swing, you take out another guard, and a few from the crowd cheer. But now more of the guards are waking up to what's happening, and they begin to encircle you. There's no way you can beat them all, no matter how strong you happen to be in comparison. Before you have time to react, you're surrounded. They all point their spears your way, slowly closing the circle now that they know they've got you cornered.\n\n\nFrantically, you look around for any sort of weakness in their wall of spears. But you can't seem to see... wait, there! One of the guards is a little further forward than the others, and smaller too. If you attack him, then maybe you can stay out of reach of those spears.\n\n\nIt's a split second realization, and you act on it, charging the guard and tackling the pony out from under him. (That way, you stay out of reach his spear too). You don't stop to look at the damage you've caused; they'll be after you in seconds! So, you dash towards the edge of the village. Even though it's only been a few days, you've already got a rudimentary knowledge of this village's layout, which is much more than the guards have, (seeing as they've only been here for an hour, tops. \n\n\nYou quickly manage to lose your pursuers in the twists and turns of the city, but that doesn't mean you're stopping. You don't slow down till you've made it out of the city, and left the buildings far behind. This is a different path than you've taken before, so it's a good thing you've already got most of your stuff with you. No chance you'll be able to swing by your little campsite on the way out. So that means you'll have to do without the sleeping bag and pillow you left there this morning. Hope you like sleeping in the dirt.\n\n\nSpeaking of camping, the field surrounding the village is dotted with Oalkwardners in the same red and yellow cloaks of the other guards, setting up tents among other things. Luckily, they don't notice you, and you soon find yourself in the forest once again. It's only then that you allow yourself to slow to a walk. You feel a little sad about leaving Arrorn, even if you never felt like you truly belonged there. There's no way you'll ever be able to return, at least, not for a while.", "action_results": [{"action": "Wandering in the woods", "result": "For the next few days, you continue on the path, surviving on nothing but the supplies left in your bag. You're almost out of Cheez-Its, so you'll have to find another village soon or you might starve. No one comes after you, probably because you took out their leader. No-one to give orders. Still, you move quickly as you can, just in case they are still after you.\n\n\nOn the third night, you veer off the path a little to find a nice place to sleep. You've given up on finding something even remotely comfortable, (as your aching back won't let you forget). What you're really looking for is something concealed, so if anyone tries to find you, they'll just walk right past without noticing. Tonight, you're lucky. There's a shallow divot in the ground, just big enough for you to spend the night in. All you've gotta do is cover it with leaves and sticks, and you're set. \n\n\nThe sun hasn't even finished setting by the time you finish, so you sit on a nearby rock and pull out your last bag of Cheez-Its and stare at it. If you eat them now, you'll go to bed hungry, but be hungry in the morning, but if you wait, you're not sure you'll even be able to sleep due to the hunger pains.\n\n\nThe snapping of a twig behind you breaks you out of your thoughts. You turn around, just as something, you're not sure what, slams right into you! It sends you toppling off the rock and into the dirt on your back. Before you even have the chance to comprehend what's happening, you find yourself staring into the eyes of a raggedy Oalkwardner, standing on your chest and pointing a spear at your throat.\n\n\n\"I wouldn't try to escape, if I were you.\" The Oalkwardner says, \"You may be strong, monster, but I'm certainly quick enough to drive this spear right through you before you have the chance to take a single swing at me.\"\n\n\n\"What the heck is this?\" You ask, a quaver in your voice. \"Where did you come from?\"\n\n\n\"The King sent me after you.\" The Oalkwardner says, \"They call me Kralmer, I'm one of the greatest bounty hunter's this side of the water-pit.\"\n\n\n\"So you're a filthy mercenary! You kill people for what... money?\" \n\n\nKralmer spits out of the side of his mouth. \"I'm not doing this for money! The king's holding my family, said he'd only let them go if I took you to him. It's nothing personal, I assure you.\"\n\n\n\"Well, that sucks,\" You say, \"But isn't there another way, aside from, you know, killing me?\"\n\n\n\"I wish,\" He sighs, \"But the king says bounty hunting is illegal. That's why he took my family. I was gonna be executed, but he said he'd grant us a pardon if I brought you to him. Filthy rat won't follow his own rules. Anyway, really sorry about this. I heard what you did back in Arrorn. Heck, I'd join you if I could. But I've got my family to think of. I'll try to make your death swift.\" With that, he raises his spear to deliver a killing blow.\n\n\n\"Wait!\" You cry.\n\n\n\"What?\" Kralmer says, sounding impatient, \"Look, I don't like this any more than you do, so may as well get it over with.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Don't I at least deserve a fair fight?\"", "result": "Kralmer pauses for a moment and thinks. Your heart pounds as you watch him, hoping against hope that he's honorable. \n\n\nHe sighs and says, \"Why do ya gotta make things so complicated?\" And he leaps into the air, landing about ten feet away from you. \"I guess you have a point. This way, I at least don't have to feel so bad. Stand up now, I guess we'd better do this.\"\n\n\nYou stand up, feeling just a little bit relieved. But the danger's not over yet. You've still gotta fight him.\n\n\n\"Monster,\" Kralmer says, \"Just promise me this.\"\n\n\n\"What?\n\n\n\"Show me no mercy. On the off chance you beat me, I'd rather not have to face my family to tell them... I've failed.\" \n\n\n\"Well... okay.\"\n\n\nKralmer readies himself. \"Now... are you ready?\"\n\n\n\"I suppose I am.\" Your palms are slick with sweat. \n\n\n\"Right then. Now fight!\" \n\n\nBefore the words have even left his lips, he's already flying through the air towards you, faster than you could've imagined possible. There's no time to put up any sort of defense before he smashes right into your head, his spear penetrating straight through your right eye. The pain is so great, you hardly notice as you fall to the ground, or Kralmer's whispered apology as the world fades around you.\n\n\nWell, that ended quicker than expected...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "\"What if we figure out a way to get your family back without me dying?\"", "result": "Kralmer lowers his spear ever so slightly. \"What, you got some kind of master plan that'll get the king outta the way?\"\n\n\n\"Well...\" you say slowly, your mind racing. You've got a half formulated idea already, if only you had more time to think... \"Don't you get an audience with the king or something? To show him my dead body?\"\n\n\nHe thinks for a moment. \"I suppose, but if you're thinking of trying anything, you best be aware that the king is heavily guarded. And he wears this enchanted armor, made by his dark sorcerer, Maeldral. While it's on, he's practically immortal! That's why no-ones ever, you know, killed him before!\"\n\n\n\"But it must have some kind of weakness, don't you think?\"\n\n\n\"I dunno... his Maeldral might have something in his notes or something, but I have no idea where he'd keep something like that. I mean, that's really dangerous knowledge. I'm sorry, but I have to kill you.\"\n\n\nHe raises his spear once more, ears drooping.\n\n\n\"But I'm super strong, remember?\" You say, \"At least compared to you guys. If we find a way in, I can take out the guards. I took out fifteen or so of the king's men just the other day in Arrorn. Then you won't have to kill me, because your family will be safe! I could go after the king by myself, if you don't want to get tangled up in all this.\" \n\n\nHe seems to think it over for a moment. Then, he sighs and steps off your chest. \n\n\n\"Stand, monster...\" Kralmer says, \"I'll accept your terms on the condition that we break my family out before anything else. And after that, you're on your own. I have my family to think of.\" He's quiet for a moment. \"You're lucky the king has a reputation for making bad deals. I'm not the first to be roped into something like this by that soggy bag of water, and from what I've heard, he doesn't always follow through. I certainly hope you're more honorable than he is. Now, let's find a better spot to camp.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "To the palace!", "result": "Thankfully, Kralmer has enough food for the both of you, so you go to bed with a full stomach. But you just can't get to sleep. After a half hour of tossing and turning in the dirt, you sit up and take inventory of your supplies, (for lack of anything better to do). It's then that you remember the strange disk you found on the night you first woke up in the woods. You must've forgotten about it after seeing the kidnapping. It's been in your bag this whole time, waiting to be rediscovered.\n\n\nYou take it out and examine it. Something about it tugs at your memory, but you just can't place it. For a while you stare at the screen, flashing \"insufficient power,\" over and over in red. Tapping at the screen does nothing, and there are no other buttons to speak of. On the other side is some kind of clear plastic tank, with a little bit of green fluid sloshing about inside. You can't make heads or tails of it. Soon, you're fast asleep, the disk resting on your chest...\n\n\n \n\nYour dreams that night are filled with visions of the disk. You see yourself putting it together, building it, tweaking it. It's the most important thing you've ever created, more important than your family, your friends, the outside world. The disk consumes your entire life, you work on it day and night. And then, one day, there's no more work to be done. You fill the tank with the green liquid, harvested from the core of a meteorite, tap the screen a few times, and suddenly find yourself surrounded by a brilliant, violet light...\n\n\n \n\n\"Wake up, monster!\" \n\n\nYou open your eyes to the sight of Kralmer's wrinkly face. \n\n\n\"Eat something, we've got a long trek ahead of us.\" he pushes a bowl of black goop into your hands and walks a few paces away as you attempt to choke it down. \n\n\n\"So,\" he says as you finish, \"You're still here.\"\n\n\n\"Yup,\" you say, running your tongue over your teeth to get the last little bits of your breakfast off. \n\n\n\"You really are honorable then... I suppose I should call you something other than 'Monster.' What are you anyway?\"\n\n\n\"I'm a human,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Good to know, human,\" Kralmer grins, \"Now, like I said, we've got a long ways to go, so let's get going.\"\n\n\n \n\nFor the next two days you walk on, stopping only to sleep. \n\n\nOn the evening of the second day, Kralmer says \"Look! It's just over this hill,\" and dashes ahead. You follow, quick as you can. When you crest the hill, you can just see the outline of some sort of fortress, sitting on a hilltop on the horizon. \n\n\n\"We ought to make camp a little ways off the trail, and soon.\" Kralmer says, \"Just in case some of the King's guard happen to pass.\"\n\n\nYou follow him off the trail and into a nearby thicket. For a good ten minutes, you push through the brush, covering yourself in all sorts of scratches. Finally, you come to a clear spot, right at the heart of the thorn bushes.\n\n\n\"There,\" Kralmer says, \"No way they'll think to look here. Now, we'd better come up with some kind of plan before we get any closer.\"\n\n\n\"Do you know if there are any secret entrances?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"The only way in, so far as I know, besides the front gate would be through the moat. It runs right through the dungeon, so the king can drown his subjects in it.\"\n\n\n\"Great!\" you say, \"We'll swim in that way!\" \n\n\n\"Swim?\" Kralmer asks, \"What does 'swim' mean?\" \n\n\n\"You've never heard of swimming?\" You ask, \"You know, where you paddle to stay afloat in the water?\"\n\n\n\"Human, you are far more powerful than I ever could've imagined,\" Kralmer is clearly awed, \"We Oalkwardners cannot touch the water. If we soak in it, it seeps into our skin, making it weaker and weaker, until it simply dissolves into mush. I imagine it's a horribly painful way to go, hence why our lovely, benevolent King uses it to dispose of anyone who so much as looks at him funny.\"\n\n\n\"My word! That's why I never found any sort of well in the village! I had to suck the moisture out of mud to survive! What do you do when it rains?\"\n\n\n\"I've heard of this 'rain,' you speak of. Thankfully, such a calamity has yet to befall this land.\"\n\n\n\"But what about all these trees and plants? How can they grow without water?\"\n\n\n\"I don't know what you mean!\" Kralmer says, \"All plants need is a little sunshine and they'll grow just fine. But we're getting off topic. The best way to get into the palace may just be for you to sneak in through the moat.\"\n\n\n\"But what about you? How will you get inside? What about your family?\"\n\n\n\"I... don't know. But the moat could be our best shot. You may have to go in without me.\"\n\n\n\"You trust me that much?\"\n\n\n\"I trust you more than I trust the King, I'll say that much. There'll be no-one to guide my family out of the dungeon, should you decide to go after the King. If you feel the need, you can disregard my earlier request for them to be let out first. Should you manage to take the fortress, you'll then be able to set them free.\"\n\n\n\"Alright...\" you agree, \"I'll do it.\" \n\n\n\"Great.\" Kralmer says, \"We'll think of some kind of meeting point. I really appreciate this, Human. You are quite possibly the most courageous creature I've ever met.\"\n\n\n\"You're welcome,\" you say.\n\n\nAfter a moment of silence, Kralmer says, \"Well, we'd better make camp. I have a feeling it's gonna be a long day tomorrow.\"\n\n\n\"You and me both,\" you murmur, as you stand up to start getting the camp ready.", "action_results": [{"action": "The moat", "result": "You reach the fortress at about noon the next day. It's really not much of a castle. Instead of stone, like you would expect, it's made completely out of wood, with a few rickety looking towers poking up from behind the wall. Once you're only about a hundred feet off from the moat, Kralmer stops you.\n\n\n\"Send my family out this way, when you get out.\" He points at a spot where the moat goes under the wood. \"You see where the water crosses under the wall?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah?\"\n\n\n\"That should take you into the dungeon.\"\n\n\nYou don't say anything. This is all happening so fast, you're not sure you're ready.\n\n\n\"Thanks again, human.\" Kralmer says, \"Whatever happens, I'll make sure your legacy lives on.\"\n\n\n\"Right,\" you say, \"Thanks.\"\n\n\nThere's no point in stalling, so you start running towards the moat, fast as you can, so no one sees you. Once you reach the edge, you don't hesitate to dive right it.\n\n\nThe water is warmer than you expected, and murky. It's hard to stay afloat with a backpack on, but you still manage to keep your head above the water. Luckily, it doesn't seem to be flowing in any particular direction, so you have no trouble with current. You swim for the opening Kralmer pointed out and duck under it. Suddenly, the sunlight from above is gone. You're in a sort of dirt tunnel, with just enough space at the top for you to breathe. It's fairly short, and before you know it, the river opens up into a sort of pool at the edge of a huge underground room.\n\n\nYou swim to the edge of the pool, out of breath. Are you really this out of shape? For a moment you sit on your hands and knees, panting. Then, you look up and get a good look at the wall on the other side of the room. You suck in your breath. It's lined with cages, set into the wall, dirty and disheveled Oalkwardner eyes staring out at you from behind wooden... well, they're not exactly bars... more like fat wooden sticks.\n\n\nIt looks like this part of the fortress is built into the hillside, as half of the walls are wood, and the other half, dirt, hard packed. \n\n\nThankfully, there are no guards down here, at least not right now. You need to decide if you're going to free the prisoners now, or wait until after the king is dead.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go after the king first", "result": "\"I'll be back for you all later,\" you say, as loud as you dare. \n\n\nThere's an opening in the wall with a spiral staircase going up, so you head through it. At the top of the stairs is a wooden door. You can hear voices from the other side, probably guards. Quietly, you turn the handle and push it open. Two guards stand on the other side, their backs to you. They don't notice you, because they just keep chatting about the weather. You creep closer, and closer, and then you put a hand over each of their mouths and drag them back through the door before they even realize you're there!\n\n\nThey struggle in your grip, but their flailing is no match for your strength. You carry them downstairs, still covering their mouths, and toss them into the nearest empty cell. You steal the keys off their belt while you're at it, and lock them inside. \n\n\n\"What's going on?\" one of them cries.\n\n\n\"What the heck are you?\" Asks the other.\n\n\n\"Shut up, both of you!\" You say, \"I need to know where the Dark Sorcerer lives.\"\n\n\n\"Why would we tell you that? You're kidnapping us!\" the first guard says,\n\n\n\"Because if you don't, you die!\" You say, slamming your fist against the bars. \n\n\n\"I'm not talking.\" The first guard says, crossing his arms.\n\n\n\"Well, I am!\" The Second one says, trembling, \"He's in the tower opposite us, at the very top!\"\n\n\n\"What the heck is wrong with you?\" The first guard says, \"If you tell it that, you're breaking your sacred oath to protect the king!\"\n\n\n\"I'd rather stay alive, thank you very much!\"\n\n\n\"Shut up, or I'll kill you both!\" You say, feeling a little guilty. (Threatening lives isn't exactly the most fun thing in the world).\n\n\nThey go quiet after that. There's no way to know how long they'll stay quiet though, so you'd better be quick. You head back up the stairs and slip out the door. Luckily, the courtyard isn't all that crowded, but there are still a few Oalkwardners milling about here and there. \n\n\nA line of bushes sits in the shadow of the wall, wrapping all the way around, so you crouch behind it to avoid being seen. As fast as you can, you crawl around the perimeter until you reach the tower the guards were talking about. There's no-one there to guard the door, it's almost too easy. Quickly, you slip inside and find yourself staring at yet another spiral staircase. \n\n\nYou take the stairs four at a time, as they're smaller than stairs for humans. The tower has multiple levels, with rooms branching off on each one, but you don't stop to look in any of them until you reach the very top. The stairway ends in a trapdoor. You press your ear up against it, but hear nothing. Pushing on the door reveals that it's locked, with the same type of wooden lock that was on the cells in the dungeon. For a moment, you panic. What are you going to do if you can't get in? It would be a defeat on the whole purpose of this mission!\n\n\nThen, you remember that you stole the keys off the guards you trapped in the dungeon. Checking over your shoulder to make sure no one's coming, you pull out the wooden key ring and try each one of them on the lock. The key slides in on the fourth try, and the door swings open freely to reveal something like a cross between a bedroom and a laboratory. One side of the room has a big table full of all kinds of odds and ends, different materials and chemicals. The other side has a bedroll, woven from grass and stuffed with... well, more grass. \n\n\nYou start looking around for anything that looks like it might do away with magic armor. You look through the contents of the table first, but don't find anything remotely useful. (Though, there is a cage of yellow rats on one corner, which is quite entertaining to look at). You're about to turn elsewhere when you spy something else. Hidden behind a stack of books is a bowl of a strange green substance, glowing slightly in the dim light. \n\n\nThis is the same fluid that's in the back of the disk you found in the forest when you first woke up! You pull it out of your backpack to confirm. Maybe, if you refill the tank on the back, it'll work properly again, and you can find out more about what it does. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Fill up the tank and see what happens", "result": "You pull the disk out of your bag and examine the tank on the back. There's a little cap you can take off to open it. It comes off in two twists, and you fill it with the goo from the bowl. As you screw the cap back on, a little beep sounds. You flip the disk over and find that the display at the front has changed. \n\n\n\"Power Restored.\" It flashes, \"Ready for dimensional rift generation. Please set coordinates or choose a preset.\" \n\n\nTwo options appear on the screen, one reads, \"set new preset\" and the other simply says, \"home.\"\n\n\nFor a moment, you forget all about your mission. This thing can send you home? Impulsively, you tap the button, and a message pops up.\n\n\n\"Warning: Dimensional travel may disrupt certain brain functions, including cognition, memory, and vision. Continue at your own risk.\"\n\n\nYou hesitate, but curiosity gets the better of you and you push \"Continue\" on the screen. \n\n\nIt'll just be a short trip, you tell yourself. Just to jog your memory a little, then you'll come right back. A violet light envelops you, burning your skin. You shut your eyes as it becomes too intense to look at. It's like you're spinning, being stretched in fifteen different directions at once. That's about the point at which you lose consciousness. \n\n\n \n\nThe pain is the first thing you notice. It feels as though someone's poured an entire vat of hot coffee over your entire body. Somehow, you get the sense that you've been asleep a lot longer than normal. You open your eyes to an overcast, gray sky. You're laying on the lawn of someone's house, in the middle of a quiet suburb. You sit up and look around. There's a backpack a few feet away, with a strange disk beside it. How the heck did you get here? You try to remember, but find that you simply cannot. If you really concentrate, you can just remember a strange violet light...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "There's no time for this. Keep looking for the weapon.", "result": "You sigh and leave the bowl alone. Maybe you can come back here once your mission's over. There's a book lying on the floor next to the bed that you didn't notice until now. Its cover is blank, and it looks hand bound. Curious, you pick it up and open it to a random page. Numerous entries in impeccably neat handwriting fill the pages. Looks like the sorcerer keeps a diary.\n\n\nYou skim the pages, looking for any mention of the king's amour. A full page drawing of a helmet stops you in your tracks. It's entitled, \"Kingly helmet.\" The next few pages are the same, full of images of chest plates and gauntlets, different designs and chemical formulas. It's only when you reach the last page of drawings that you find anything useful. A little blurb at the bottom of the page tells you everything you need to know.\n\n\nIt has come to my attention that this amour, while stronger than anything this world has ever seen, is not infallible. It does not block out liquids, so that a little splash of water might be enough to do our great monarch in. I must keep this fact a secret, or I fear he may have me executed. Thankfully enough, no one else can so much as touch this water either, so there's little chance of it being used against him. I certainly hope none of our enemies figure out a way to circumvent this, as it could spell doom for the entire kingdom.\n\n\nYou look up from the book. This is perfect! All you've got to do is lure the king down into the dungeons and push him into the water and you're set! At that moment, you hear shouts from outside. You rush to the window and look down into the courtyard to see the tiny figures of three guards dragging Kralmer into the courtyard. Your heart begins to pound. You have to save him!\n\n\nThen, an idea comes to you. An idea that might just save Kralmer and everyone else. You rush down the stairs as fast as you can. When you reach the ground floor, you open the door to the outside just a crack and peer out. You can just see the guards holding Kralmer on the other side of the courtyard. Now all you've got to do is wait...\n\n\nA minute later, the king comes out of one of the towers, just as anticipated. (You know it's him because he's clad in a strange bronze amour, unlike any you've ever seen. At least, that you remember you've seen). He talks to the guards for a moment, then they all head towards the dungeon. Quick as you can, you start to crawl around the perimeter, behind the bushes, towards the same place.\n\n\nYou reach the door to the dungeon just as the king and his guards enter, and wait a moment to let them get a little further ahead. Then, you go in after them. As you sneak down the stairs, you can hear their voices.\n\n\n\"What happened?\" the king shouts.\n\n\n\"We were trapped by a monster!\" \n\n\nYou jolt a little. You'd forgotten all about the guards you trapped in the cell! The king must've found them.\n\n\nAt this point, you've reached the bottom of the stairs, and are peaking into the next room. The king and his guards are still talking.\n\n\n\"Go sound the alarms,\" the king orders, \"I've got an execution to oversee.\"\n\n\nIt's now or never. You dash out into the next room, screaming at the top of your lungs. Everyone leaps backwards in shock. By the time they regain their footing, you've already scooped up the king under your arm. He's heavier than most with that armor, but you manage. \n\n\n\"Let me go or I'll have you executed!\" he screams, \"Guards, take him out!\"\n\n\n\"Never!\" you shout, and dive into the pool of water at the opposite side of the room. \n\n\nThe king shrieks in pain as the water floods through the cracks in his armor. You turn away, not wanting to watch. By the time you've exited the lake, the king is dead.\n\n\nThe guards stare at you, openmouthed. You ready yourself to do battle one more time, but then something entirely unexpected happens. One of the guards in the cage begins to clap. Then the rest of them join in. All the prisoners pick up on it too, until the entire dungeon is applauding. \n\n\n\"Bravo, monster!\" one of the guards in the cage says, \"The rest of us hated him just as much as anyone else. Now we can all be free!\"\n\n\n\"You have done well, Human.\" Kralmer says, \"I believe you will go down in history as a hero. Never before has such a great deed been performed alone.\" \n\n\n\"Yeah,\" you say, trying not to think about the king's final screams as he died, \"I guess... I guess it was pretty great.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Epilouge", "result": "After the king's death, the rebel group that the king was trying to stop steps into the power vacuum and takes over. They estate a glorious new order in which all of the people share their resources and the government owns the means of production.* The people are quite receptive to it, as they hated the old order of things and needed a change.\n\n\nThe story of the Human that ended the terrible reign of king Maeldral is passed down from generation to generation, until it becomes legend. Some say you integrated into their society and are living a quiet life in a village near the edge of the kingdom. Others think you returned to your own world. Whatever the answer, everyone agrees that you are a hero. Thanks to you, the kingdom is much better off.\n\n\n \n\nThe end.\n\n\n*The only reason this sort of Communism works is because they are fantasy creatures in a fantasy world. Do not attempt in real life, it never has worked out, and probably never will. ", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Free the people first", "result": "You rush up to the bars of the nearest cage to you. In that moment, you decide that there's no way you're leaving anyone behind. If you're taking one, you're taking them all.\n\n\n\"I'm here to save you.\" You say in a low voice, \"all of you.\" \n\n\n\"What... are you?\" Asks the Oalkwardner in the cage, inching backwards.\n\n\n\"I'm a friend, now let me get these bars off the cage.\"\n\n\nYou grip the bars and pull as hard as you can, but they don't budge. This is real wood, not the Paper-Mache everything else in this place is made of. You're going to have to find another way to get through it. Maybe you can steal the keys off a guard or something. Or maybe...\n\n\nYou sling your bag off your shoulders and go through the contents until you find what you're looking for. It takes a minute, and for a moment you fear it might have fallen out of your bag. But no, at the bottom of your bag, lays your lighter, untouched since the night you first woke up.\n\n\nMaybe, you can use this on lock of the cell! Because even that's made of wood, for some reason. Or maybe you should just play it safe and look for the keys...", "action_results": [{"action": "Attempt to burn through the lock", "result": "Working quickly, you put the lighter up to the keyhole and flick it on. Somehow, even after you swam through that moat, it still works. The lock catches instantly, faster than you would've thought possible. Once again, you grip the bars and wrench open the door.\n\n\n\"Are you a wizard?\" The Oalkwardner asks, \"What kind of magical power is that? I've never seen anything like it? Also, is it going to eat the whole door?\"\n\n\nYou glance once again at the door to see that the entire thing is engulfed in flames. How is it possible for fire to spread that fast? Either this is your faulty memory at work, or this wood is different from the stuff back at home. Even as you think this it's already spreading to the rest of the cell.\n\n\n\"Get out of there!\" You cry, pulling the Oalkwardner out of the flaming cell. \n\n\nThe fire is spreading quicker and quicker. Before you even manage to take so much as two steps back, the entire wall is in flames. The other trapped Oalkwardners scream as they and their cells are consumed in the flames.\n\n\n\"We've gotta get to the exit!\" The Oalkwardner says, pointing to an opening in the wall, with a spiral staircase just beyond it, \"Come on!\"\n\n\n\"But what about-\" You're cut off by a loud crack. The exit collapses, and sparks fly everywhere. One of them lands on your Oalkwardner friend, and catches him on fire. \n\n\n\"Gaahhh!\" he screams as the flames engulf him, burning him as if he's made of paper. Your stomach turns at the sight and you look away.\n\n\nAt that moment, the ceiling caves in, and falls right on top of you, killing you instantly.", "action_results": [{"action": "Epilouge", "result": "So, you're dead. But let's look on the bright side of things, shall we? After you died, the fire spread to the rest of the palace, burning it completely to the ground. No one escaped, not even the king and his invincible suit of amour! Not even his children made it out, so there was no one left to take his place. No one, that is, except for the rebel alliance the Grand Protector and his army were trying to find. With the king dead, they sweep in and take power within a month. They estate a new order, where everyone shares what they have, and the government owns the means of production.*\n\n\nEven you get to live on in the hearts and minds of everyone you saved from the king's reign of terror. They even erected a statue in your honor! (Though, it looks nothing like you). You will be known forevermore as, \"Human, Martyr of the New Order.\"\n\n\nSo, in a way, even you get to live happily ever after. Everyone, it seems, gets a happy ending.\n\n\n \n\nExcept for all the innocent people you killed in the dungeon.\n\n\n \n\nAnd Kralmer, because his entire family is dead. He will forever curse your name.\n\n\n*I swear, I'm not communist.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go find a guard and steal the keys", "result": "\"I'll be right back,\" you say, turning around. There's an exit a few yards away, a neat gap in the wall with a spiral staircase behind it. You head up the staircase as quietly as you can and find yourself at a wooden door. You can hear muffled voices on the other side, probably the guards. Gently as you can, you turn the knob and open the door. Sunlight floods into the room, blinding you momentarily. Seems the door opens into the courtyard. Two guards stand on the other side, their backs turned to you, chatting about the weather. \n\n\nEver so slowly, you inch out the door, getting closer and closer until they're in your reach. They still haven't noticed you. Then, quick as you can, you grab them, clapping your hand over their mouth. Before they have a chance to react, you dash back through the door, carrying them with you. Soon as you reach the edge of the stairwell, you throw them down onto the floor below, killing them instantly.\n\n\nYou hurry down the stairs, taking them two at a time. After making sure the guards are thoroughly dead, you check their pockets for keys. It doesn't take you long to find them. Strangely enough, they're made of the same wood as the lock. \n\n\n\"I'm back!\" you say as loud as you dare. \n\n\nYou dash to the first door and unlock it, then go to the next, and the next. Soon, every cell is unlocked, and you're surrounded by a bleary-eyed crowd of Oalkwardners, staring up at you.\n\n\n\"What now?\" one of them asks.\n\n\n\"I'm getting you out of-\" You start to say, but stop. Above you, you can just hear the sound of muffled voices. You put your finger to your lips, and creep towards the exit, where you can hear better. \n\n\n\"Why is this door open?\" one asks, \"And where are the guards?\"\n\n\nCrap! You must've forgotten to close the door behind you on your way back down!\n\n\n\"I thought I heard something down there,\" Another voice says, \"Let's go check it out, I've got a bad feeling about this.\"\n\n\nThe sound of footsteps coming down the stairs resonates through the whole room. You ready yourself for a fight as the bottoms of Oalkwardner feet and red and yellow cloaks become visible on the stairs. \n\n\n\"What on earth?\" one of them says. They must've seen the dead guards at the bottom. You don't waste any more time. You charge into the room with the stairwell, screaming at the top of your lungs. Five guards stare at you from halfway down the stairs, too stunned to move, at least for a moment. You use it to your advantage, bounding up the steps and plowing through the first two before they even think to raise their weapons. \n\n\nOf course, the other three are a little smarter. They back out of your reach before you can take a swipe at them, and ready their spears for an attack. You stop ascending for a moment and assess the situation. They've got the high ground, and their spears are ready. You may be stronger than they, but a shaft of wood through the heart will still kill you, regardless of who's holding it. \n\n\nWithout warning, The Oalkwardner in front leaps into the air towards you, ready to bring her spear down on your head. You leap backwards, nearly tumbling down the stairs, just avoiding what could've been a fatal strike. For a moment, you're both off balance, but you recover first, and drive your fist into her face. \n\n\n\"Noooo!\" one of the other Oalkwardners cries, and charges at you wildly. \n\n\nYou step out of the way just in time, and he trips over his own feet, falling off the rickety spiral staircase to his doom. That's four down, now where's that last one. You look around wildly, just in time to see the edge of a cloak disappearing through the door at the top of the stairs. \n\n\n\"Come on!\" You call down to the prisoners below, \"We have to get out of here, now! Up the staircase!\"\n\n\nThe prisoners obey, flooding into the room, and starting up the stairs after you. There are about two dozen in all, not as many as you might have thought, but still a substantial number to herd out of a fortress like this. \n\n\nAs you lead them out into the courtyard, a high pitched shriek cuts through the air. It's an alarm, just like the one back in Arrorn! The entire courtyard is in chaos, people running this way and that, guards and civilians alike. The gateway out is on the other side, about a hundred yards away, sitting wide open. But it won't be for long, even from here you can see guards gathering by the big swinging doors, getting ready to push them closed and trap you inside. \n\n\n\"Quick, to the exit!\" You shout, breaking into a run. Everyone else follows as you weave through the crowd, trying your best not to trample any innocent people. (If, indeed, there are any innocent people in this place). It looks like you might just make it, until you've made it about halfway across the courtyard. Seemingly out of nowhere, guards on little ponies, like the ones that invaded Arrorn, flank your band of criminals. Slowly but surely, they're closing in, going ahead of you to cut you off. If you don't do something fast, you're going to be surrounded.\n\n\nThere's no time to think though. No time to come up with a brilliant plan. Before you even quite realize it, there's nowhere left to go. The guards are in front and behind, to the right and to the left. You are struck with a strange sense of Deja Vu. This isn't the first time you've been in a situation like this, it happened back in Arrorn too! So if you just do the same thing you did before, you'll get out of it just fine.\n\n\n\"Don't stop!\" You cry, \"I'll clear a path!\"\n\n\nThere's no time to pick out the weak link, so you just plow on forward, attacking the guard directly in your path. Soon as you get within range of the spears, you leap into the air and drive your foot into the guard's chest. He tumbles off the horse, screaming, and all the prisoners flow through the gap you've created. After you've ran a good thirty feet from the circle, you glance over your shoulder to make sure everyone got through. But to your horror, only about half have made it past the circle. The rest of the guards have closed in further, getting rid of the gap you created. More of them have to get taken out if you are to have any hope of saving everyone. \n\n\nWorse, there are more guards coming from the sides, and the doors are halfway closed. If you don't get the rest of the prisoners out quick, no-one will make it out at all.", "action_results": [{"action": "Cut your losses and lead those who are left out to freedom", "result": "It hurts more than you could've ever imagined, leaving people behind like this. But there's no sense in you dying too. You keep running until you reach the gate and the others follow. As you pass through it, you notice a few of the Guards coming after you on ponies out of the corner of your eye. You're about to turn and fight them, when something shoots out from the shadows and knocks the first one off his horse. Then it takes down the second, and the third! Kralmer has come to your aid. \n\n\n\"Let's get out of here, Human!\" He cries, catching up to you, \"We've gotta leave the kingdom as fast as we can! Go somewhere else, where they'll never find us.\"\n\n\n\"Right,\" You say, \"I hope we've got enough supplies...\"\n\n\n\"We'll survive, we can forage if we need to.\"\n\n\n\"Perfect, you got somewhere in mind?\"\n\n\n\"Sure! I'll lead the way...\"\n\n\n \n\nA week of walking later, you cross the border of the land you were in and into somewhere nicer. You and the former prisoners integrate into a nearby village. They all celebrate you as their hero, and come together to build you a nice, human sized house. After a few months of living there, it really starts to feel like home. You even get used to the food.\n\n\nAs for Kralmer, his family just so happened to be amongst the half you managed to save. It's a good thing too, you're not sure he would've forgiven you if you hadn't managed to get them out alive. You have dinner with him most nights, and the two of you become quite good friends. \n\n\nThe villagers are happy to have you as part of their community. After the brave deeds you committed, they see you as their last line of defense. If anything ever happens, you'll be there to save them.\n\n\nBut that hasn't happened yet. For now, you've been blessed with some much needed peace...", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go back and save the rest of them", "result": "\"Go on without me!\" You cry, \"I'll catch up!\" You turn and run back to the circle of guards, and knock the first one you reach off his horse. Then you do it again, and again. By the time the guards realize what's happening, you've already taken out four of them. \n\n\nThe rest of the prisoners take this as their cue to leave, they rush through the gap you've created and head towards the gate, and as soon as the last of them has gone past you, you turn to follow, but find yourself face to face with even more guards. You tense for battle once more, and start swinging, taking down as many as you can!\n\n\nBut they're getting smarter. Instead of surrounding you, they all form a barrier in front of you, cutting you off from the gate. You try to plow through them as best you can, but as soon as you take out one, another takes its place! Suddenly, a sharp pain pierces your side. You look over to see a single Oalkwardner, driving a spear deeper and deeper into the side of your stomach. Then, another pain, this time in your back. You've been stabbed once again!\n\n\nThe pain brings you to your knees, as more and more spears pierce your flesh. The last thing you see before everything fades to black are the last few prisoners slipping through the door as it closes with a few of the Oalkwardner guards hot on their heels. Whether or not they survive is in their hands now...", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Yeah, I can live with that. This way I get to stay alive, even if I have to live as a coward.", "result": "You want to do something, you really do, but fear paralyzes you. It's all you can do to look away as the knife comes down. Even without looking, you know when the knife falls by the gasps of the crowd and the final screams of the victim. \n\n\n\"Do not forget the events of today,\" Yelgar says, \"Remain under the crown, lest you meet the same fate as this poor, misguided soul here.\"\n\n\nA wave of nausea hits you, you can barely manage to stay standing. What kind dictatorship is this? The village seemed almost peaceful when you first arrived, but now, you're not so sure. Your thoughts are interrupted when you hear one of the guards say,\n\n\n\"Sir! What on earth is that?\"\n\n\nYou turn to see one of the taller soldiers pointing straight at you. Your heart begins to pound. Now the rest of the guards are looking at you, you can feel their eyes all over you, crawling over your skin like spiders.\n\n\n\"It's a monster!\" Yelgar cries, \"Capture it before it destroys the village!\"\n\n\nYou should do something, run, hide, get ready to fight. But suddenly there doesn't seem to be enough oxygen in your lungs, as much as you gasp. You fall to your hands and knees, heaving. Another panic attack? There's no time for this, you have to escape... but it's so... hard to breathe....\n\n\nBefore you know it, you're surrounded by guards, all pointing spears your way. They close in so tight that any one of them could take you out in one blow if they really needed to. Why isn't anyone standing up for you? They all know you're harmless. Maybe they're all too afraid to say anything. \n\n\nThe guards all bring down their spears at once, and you know no more...", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story56.json b/data/scraper/stories/story56.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b45bc17 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story56.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=60232", "context": "", "first_story_block": "\u201cMy face is fucking freezing,\u201d says Lars.\n\n\nNo shit you think to yourself. It\u2019s the middle of winter and you both are assigned to guard duty. Normally, the cold isn\u2019t an issue. However, due to increasing demon sightings, a few unlucky bastards have to spend the night outside the city walls keeping watch.\n\n\nSnow begins to fall, and your cheap leather armor offers little resistance.\n\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t take it anymore, I quit.\u201d\n\n\nLars tosses down his sword and walks towards the city entrance.\n\n\n\u201cWhat about the demons?\u201d you ask.\n\n\nHe turns to you and a slight grin appears on his face.\n\n\n\u201cDemons? I welcome them with open arms. The city could use some heating up.\u201d\n\n\nWith that, he leaves. It\u2019s just you and the dead silence of the night. You try to stand still and focus on the dirt road leading away from the city. This road is where nearby demon sightings have occurred. A few minutes past and you swear you saw a red flash. Your hands shake and your heart beat slows down. Is your mind just playing tricks on you? Surely you\u2019re just reacting to the cold, right?\n\n\nMere moments after this thought you hear a laugh. Unlike what you were expecting, this isn\u2019t the laugh of some badass demon. No, it\u2019s the laugh of a female. You try to tighten your grip on your sword but can\u2019t move your fingers. Shit, maybe Lars had the right idea. Spending the night out here is a death sentence, regardless if demons attack.\n\n\nYou can\u2019t bear to stand any longer and lower yourself to the ground. You drop your sword and curl into a ball. You don\u2019t have the energy to move a muscle and your body becomes stiff. Your eyes shut close and you\u2019re out cold seconds later.\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s a strong soldier like you doing out here all alone?\u201d a soothing voice inquires.\n\n\nYou open your eyes to find yourself staring at barely clothed succubus. She radiates an intense heat, although it\u2019s not enough to burn.\n\n\n\u201cWho are you?\u201d you ask.\n\n\n\u201cMy name\u2019s Catia and you never answered my question. Why are you all alone?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMy other guard, Lars, left. Look there\u2019s his sword right there,\u201d you say, feeling compelled to give more information than necessary.\n\n\nCatia walks towards his sword and picks it up.\n\n\n\u201cIs this supposed to kill me? Ha! Don\u2019t make me laugh. Why is your equipment so poor?\u201d\n\n\nYou see no logical reason to tell a demon this but find yourself doing so instinctively.\n\n\n\u201cEver since demons came near our city, trade has been impossible. We have no experience with a threat this large and thus don\u2019t have the weapons or equipment to deal with it.\u201d\n\n\nShe grins and salivates to your every word. You take a moment to stare at her figure. She looks more human than succubi are told to be. Still, there are a few stark differences. These being her bright red eyes, dark red curled horns, and pink tail. Oh, and she utterly beautiful. More so than any human you\u2019ve seen. Despite being face to face demon for the first in your life, you feel entirely calm. Dare you say, the calmest you\u2019ve ever felt.\n\n\nThis calmness is ripped away when she begins to leave.\n\n\n\u201cWhere are you going?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHm? You want me stay huh?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes\u2026 I do.\u201d\n\n\nShe grins again and starts chewing on her tail in a seductive manner.\n\n\n\u201cSorry, no can do. But if you want, I would love to see you again. Trust me, it will be the most pleasurable experience of your life. All you have to do for me is one small favor.\u201d\n\n\nYou feel an intense compulsion to comply with her every demand, but you stop yourself. Making deals with demons is serious business. You have enough willpower to at least ask what the favor is.\n\n\nShe explains how if you want to meet again you need to be a more suggestive state, like you are right now due to the cold. She recommends going to a bar and drinking for a few hours. Then, all you have to do is whisper her name and she will come visit, provided that you\u2019re alone.\n\n\nShe walks away leaving you all alone. As if in a trance, you make your way to The Drunk Tortoise Tavern.", "action_results": [{"action": "A few hours later...", "result": "\u201cThis is the last time I\u2019m saying this Greg, immortality is not worth cutting off your cock. What\u2019s the point of being immortal if you\u2019re deprived of the best feeling in the world?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cEy\u2019 maybe he\u2019s lacking in that area. No wonder he wants immortality if all he has to do his cut off an inch or two worth of pecker.\u201d\n\n\nGreg suddenly stands up, drawing your eyes to the bickering trio. They\u2019ve been arguing random hypotheticals since you\u2019ve gotten here. All you wanted was to get a quiet drink before meeting with Catia. As long as these buffoons are here, that\u2019s impossible.\n\n\nEven as Greg stands up he\u2019s shorter than the other two sitting. It\u2019s no wonder they pick on him, he looks pathetic.\n\n\n\u201cCan you both just shut the fuck up? I mean, god damn. All I\u2019m saying is living forever outweighs the downsides of not having a dick,\u201d he says in a whiny voice.\n\n\nThe other two laugh uncontrollably at his pitiful attempt of defiance. One manages to calm down and spits out,\n\n\n\u201cMaybe when it\u2019s smaller than a gnome\u2019s toothbrush, but for the rest us it\u2019s not so easy.\u201d\n\n\nQueue more uncontrollable laughter as Greg\u2019s face becomes redder than demon blood.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll shove a gnome\u2019s toothbrush up your ass if you say that one more time! C\u2019mon, let\u2019s move on to another question.\u201d\n\n\nThe trio quiets down and you zone them out. You take a swig of whisky and start to remember the reason while you\u2019re here. Oh yeah, the succubus. She wanted you to drink a bit before meeting her. You didn\u2019t necessarily jump at the idea of getting drunk before meeting with a demon, but she promised you she would make it worthwhile. You\u2019re pretty sure that means\u2026\n\n\nYour thoughts are interrupted by the thickheaded trio once again.\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re telling me you\u2019d prefer your child be retarded and kind than ingenious and mean?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes Connor, I would.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cGod damn it, Greg! You want to spend an eternity with no dick while taking care of a retarded child? Pathetic. I would kill myself after a week.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHar har har! I would kill myself in a week if I had to live Greg\u2019s life as it is. No, scratch that, a day!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cFuck you Tom. I can\u2019t be the only one who thinks this\u2026\u201d\n\n\nGreg glances around nervously looking for a savior. Eventually he turns his gaze towards you and his eyes light up.\n\n\n\u201cHey you over there! What would you rather have, a dumb, but kind child; or a smart, but cruel child?\u201d he says while pointing at you.\n\n\nYou stare blankly ahead and breathe a deep sigh. This is beyond stupid. You briefly consider just ignoring him and getting the hell out of this place.\n\n\n\u201cWhy do you think that man would agree with you? He\u2019s a soldier. Surely, he recognizes the benefits a genius could provide for society. Especially when you consider the need for mages regarding the growing demon problem.\u201d\n\n\nSoldier? Shit you forgot to change out of your uniform. So much for staying inconspicuous. You can thank your lucky stars none of the other guards are here to see you in this shithole.\n\n\n\u201cNow now, let the man speak. Just because he\u2019s a soldier doesn\u2019t mean he agrees with you,\u201d says Tom.\n\n\n\u201cFine, what do you think...and hurry up! We don\u2019t have all day.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "\u201cI prefer a retarded but kind child.\"", "result": "\u201cThank you,\u201d Greg whispers.\n\n\n\u201cYou what!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cPfft! And to think, I used to respect soldiers.\u201d\n\n\nTom and Connor start shouting about how much of a dumbass you are. You don\u2019t bother to engage with such idiotic banter. Instead, you walk out of the tavern without a second glance. As you make your way outside you are hit with a rush of cool air.\n\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t wait to meet Catia,\u201d you mutter to yourself.\n\n\n\u201cWho\u2019s Catia?\u201d\n\n\nYou turn around and only see the entrance to the tavern.\n\n\n\u201cHello?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cErmm down here sir!\u201d\n\n\nYou glance down and instantly recoil. It\u2019s Greg, what\u2019s he doing here?\n\n\n\u201cWhat the hell do you want?\u201d\n\n\nHe begins to squirm uncomfortably and hyperventilate.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2026uh\u2026I\u2026erm\u2026\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSpit it out!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI wanted to thank you for agreeing with me,\u201d he says between irregular gasps for air.\n\n\nOh, that\u2019s why he\u2019s here. You normally wouldn\u2019t mind but you have plans tonight and have no time for conversation. \n\n\n\u201cPeople don\u2019t agree with you often kid? That\u2019s too bad,\u201d you say while walking away.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not a kid, I\u2019m 20. But yeah, everyone I meet either ignores or makes fun of me. I almost prefer the latter as at least they keep me company,\u201d he says while following behind you.\n\n\n\u201cDamn that really sucks,\u201d you stop walking and stare him in the eyes, \u201cLook I\u2019d love to keep you company, but I have somewhere very important to be.\u201d\n\n\nGreg looks at you with a face of disappointment. But he lights up to ask,\n\n\n\u201cWhere do you have to be? Maybe I could come with you.\u201d\n\n\nGah! As bad as you feel for Greg, under no circumstances could he come with you. She agreed to see you, not Greg and you.\n\n\n\u201cSorry I don\u2019t have time.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cGod damn it. Can you at least tell me why? I don\u2019t want to be near Connor and Tom right now. They make me feel inhuman.\u201d\n\n\nDoes this guy ever shut up? You been trying to exit this conversation gracefully since it started. You should just tell him to fuck off and be done it. Of course, you could humor him and tell him what you\u2019re doing. It\u2019s been hard keeping this succubus thing a secret and having someone to confide in wouldn\u2019t be the worst thing in the world. On the other hand, you really want to go have demon sex.", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk to Greg", "result": "\u201cFine I\u2019ll tell you why. But be warned, it\u2019s a long story.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s alright, the longer I\u2019m away from the other two the better.\u201d\n\n\nYou take a deep breath and begin to describe your recent encounter with a succubus.\n\n\n\u201cWell it all started when I fell asleep during guard duty.\u201d\n\n\nLater\n\n\n\u201cAnd that\u2019s why I came to this tavern.\u201d\n\n\nGreg looks off in the distance, taking in everything you\u2019ve told him. He starts speaking aloud slowly asking,\n\n\n\u201cDo you think she was immortal?\u201d\n\n\nImmortal? Aren\u2019t all demons immortal, unless killed? You\u2019re no expert, but you have never heard of a demon dying of old age.\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t have a clue to be honest. I was under the impression that her actual age is much more than her physical appearance would suggest though.\u201d\n\n\nGreg gives a nod satisfied with your answer. You feel like you\u2019ve told Greg more than enough and decide it\u2019s time to go. You wish him goodbye and feel a hint of longing in his response.\n\n\n\u201cGoodbye friend.\u201d\n\n\nYou tuck your hands in your pockets and begin the walk to your home. You\u2019re going to have to get home fast as the cold is unbearable. You decide to take the alleys, as not only is it faster, but it also provides protection from the wind.\n\n\nCommon sense says going through alleys at night isn\u2019t safest, but Ashton is different than most cities. Crime is low, and poverty is uncommon as anyone can get a job as a guard as demand is higher than ever. The night\u2019s sky combined with the tight spaced alley nearly blinds you. When you finally get out you\u2019re relieved to have arrived at your parents\u2019 house.\n\n\nMost guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don\u2019t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. \n\nYou walk to your parent\u2019s porch and open the door. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. \n\n\n\u201cSome things never change,\u201d you whisper to yourself.\n\n\nYou immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers\u2019 uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but your too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? \n\n\nYou feel like this is your purpose. It\u2019s time to see Catia.\n\n\n\u201cCatia\u201d.\n\n\nA dark cloud appears in your room, dispelling a toxic fume. You start violently coughing as you vision blurs indiscriminately. Your eyes shut close and you feel you grip on reality slipping away from you. \n\n\n\u201cAh shit,\u201d you whisper before passing out. \n\n\nYour eyes jitter open and you\u2019re greeted by Catia stroking your face. Her palm flushes the coolness off your face. Beads of sweat drip furiously down your neck as she continues caressing you. \n\n\n\u201cCouldn\u2019t wait a single day before seeing me again? How cute.\u201d \n\n\nShe crawls onto your bed and moves closer to you. Her aura is all consuming and you feel your free will being drained away. Yet, the whole process is extremely pleasing to you. She moves her mouth to your ear and whispers,\n\n\n\u201cDo you want to see everything I have to offer?\u201d\n\n\nYou bite your tongue to avoid instinctively shouting yes. This may be your last chance to not go through with this. At the very least, it would give you chance to ask her a few more questions. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Yes, I\u2019m ready.", "result": "She takes no time to hesitate and begins kissing you. As she does so, she unties your tunic and throws it off. Her warm body pushes against your bare skin as you are filled with euphoria.\n\n\nSoon both of you are completely naked. Catia pleases you in ways no other woman has or will ever be able to. Afterwards you both lay in bed panting as one thought races through your mind.\n\n\nHow do you get more of this?\n\n\n1 Month Later\n\n\nIt\u2019s been a month since you\u2019ve started having sex with Catia on a regular basis. The first few times you felt great afterwards. However, lately she has been demanding more out of you.\n\n\nFirst, you no longer have to say her name to see her. She visits you most nights whether you like her to or not. Last night she told you she wants to introduce you to a group: The Order of the Inferno. She told you they are a group of demons who could give you unimaginable powers in exchange for your help. You protested as you feared what could happen. Demon attacks are becoming more common and more lethal. Their reputation proceeds them and stomps out any curiosity you have of meeting one. Tales of rape, human consumption, and slavery are a few of many horrendous acts they have committed.\n\n\nYet, as always, she managed to convince you. As much as your mind tries to resist, her presence is intoxicating. You embrace it as fighting gets you nowhere. She tells you to meet you in a nearby forest tonight. This is the first time you're seeing her outside your bedroom since the day you met. You sneak out the city walls when no one is watching and blend into the shadows.\n\n\nAlthough it is still winter, the temperature has unexpectedly risen. Some say its because of demonic power, others view it as being coincidence. Whatever it is, the cold will not be a hindrance. You reach the edge of the forest and feel your heart leaping out of your chest. While the city has many focused-on demons, other creatures lurk during the night. Just because Catia is on your side doesn\u2019t mean you are safe. You keep this in mind as you take cover in bushes and flora periodically.\n\n\nAn intense red light comes into view causing you to close your eyes. You begin to stumble and fall to the ground. When you\u2019re able to open your eyes, you find yourself staring up at a hooded figure.\n\n\n\u201cWho dares disturb me?\u201d she hisses.\n\n\nBehind a dark brown hood lies a demonic face. Compared to Catia, she is clearly not human. Although none of that matters now, you begin to explain,\n\n\n\u201cCatia told me to come here. Are you part of The Inferno Order?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cShe sent a human to the center of The Order of the Inferno! I guess she wants to make up for earlier. I could never turn down a good meal.\u201d\n\n\nShe begins advancing towards you as a snake-like tongue hangs out of her mouth.\n\n\n\u2018Wait! She told me you wanted my help and would give me powers in exchange.\u201d\n\n\nShe begins to laugh as she towers over you. You\u2019re helpless as she grabs your neck and leans in\u2026 to kiss you?\n\n\n\u201cMy kiss is to die for!\u201d\n\n\nYou surprise yourself when you send a punch flying at her mouth. She seems equally surprised as she falls backwards.\n\n\n\u201cI guess I can still resist,\u201d you say.\n\n\nYou get up and start running away but it's no use. She\u2019s much faster than you, especially considering she can fly. You don\u2019t have many options left but need to decide quick. Do you run deeper in the forest and hope to lose her or run back to the city and put everyone at risk?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go deeper into the forest", "result": "You start running to the heart of the forest praying that you lose her. It\u2019s to no avail, she easy catches up to you and it seems you reached your end. Right as she is in arm\u2019s length she stops. Before you know it, she has flown away leaving you all alone. What\u2019s the deal?\n\n\nYou quickly get your answer as you hear a monstrous screech. You suddenly feel extremely cold as a ghost like entity hovers above you. There\u2019s no doubt about it, this is a wraith. They're well known for their madness and spreading it to all they encounter.\n\n\nYour mind is assaulted with a barrage of incomprehensible whispering. Within seconds you wish that demon would have killed you as the pain you experience is like no other. Your life energy is sapped away from you when the wraith eats your soul. You haven\u2019t died technically but exist as one of hundreds of souls trapped within the wraith\u2019s body. You\u2019re never heard from again.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Go back to the city", "result": "You pump your muscles and start running back to the city walls. She follows you like a hawk, soaring above you with her wings. Once she\u2019s directly above she swoops in. Too late though as you bolt through the city entrance. You keep running straight and dive into a nearby bush. You stop breathing and don\u2019t dare move. You can sense that she is nearby, but she doesn\u2019t seem to be trying to kill you anymore. Instead, you hear screaming in a nearby house followed by laughing.\n\n\nCuriosity gets the better of you and you peak out from the bushes. You spot her in a house cornering a family. You know demons are monsters, but what benefit is there to killing innocent children and their parents? It\u2019s senseless, what\u2019s the point of destruction for destruction sake? You continue starring at her as she slashes the throat of presumably a father. But for some reason, she does not kill him.\n\n\nWhat she does is much worse. She leaves him alive to watch as she sends a ball of red energy at the children. It renders them into ash, not giving them a chance to scream. You curse at yourself for indirectly causing this. Why did you listen to a demon anyways? You keep watching in nervous anticipation of her killing the father. Instead, she just leaves. What cruelty propels such an atrocious action? This man has lost all that\u2019s dear to him, and she left him alive.\n\n\nYou stay in the bushes as she goes from house to house committing similar acts of violence. There must be a stop to the madness. You gather the courage to leave your bush haven. You dash away back to your home and fling the door open. Your immediately reaction is to get your sword and leather armor to slay the demon. Yet, the logical side of your mind tells you that\u2019s suicide. There's another way, although you don\u2019t want to admit it. What if you got drunk and contacted Catia to save your city? She saved your life before, maybe she can do it again?", "action_results": [{"action": "Slay the demon", "result": "You must slay the demon yourself. Catia didn\u2019t bother showing up to the forest, why would she help you? You throw on your armor and pick up your sword. You grin at the thought of stabbing this demon to death. You haven\u2019t ever felt pleasure from violence before, yet something tells you you\u2019ll enjoy killing her. With your weapon and protection, you leave your home.\n\n\nTerror has spread like wildfire. Bodies lay on the street charred and bruised. Your veins pulsate with anger. Why, tell me why? These are your neighbors and friends. You run with each step being more purposeful than the last. After a few hundred steps, you hear laughter. There she is, cornering a group of children. You yell to create a distraction, but she ignores you. The children are reduced to fragments of ember.\n\n\nDestruction lies all around you with more bodies than you could count. You scream a battle cry of hatred and charge. She looks up and makes eye contact but doesn\u2019t move. You resist the urge to strike her down as you know you are outmatched physically. Still, another urge gnaws at your conscious forcing you to spit out,\n\n\n\u201cWhy would you do this?\u201d\n\n\nYou\u2019re surprised when she stops to think for a moment.\n\n\n\u201cI had everything I held dear to me ripped away. When Catia came to me with the idea of working along side a human, I couldn\u2019t contain my anger.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s wrong with working with a human?\u201d\n\n\nShe stares at you with pity.\n\n\n\u201cYou truly don\u2019t know? Why the hell are you helping Catia then? I don\u2019t understand.\u201d\n\n\nYou are equally confused and explain your relationship with Catia.\n\n\n\u201cOh, so you\u2019re her fuck toy then? Jesus Christ, she\u2019ll never get back with such degrading tactics.\u201d\n\n\nYou ignore her insult (although she said it more like an objective statement) and ask her,\n\n\n\u201cWhat do you mean get back? Demons invaded earth, why wouldn\u2019t they want to finish the job?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou think we\u2019re here willingly? Holy shit you\u2019re brain dead, I still can\u2019t get over Catia fucking a human as dumb as you. It would be like if you had sex with a jellyfish, completely different wavelengths.\u201d\n\n\nThis hellish creature is relentless with her insults. Though it seems there is a fundamental misunderstanding between you two.\n\n\n\u201cIf you\u2019re not here by choice, why are you here?\u201d\n\n\nShe explains that there is a demonic code in the infernal realm. Any demons who break it, are sent to lesser realms for a chance at redemption.\n\n\n\u201cAnd I was sent to one of the worst; Earth.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHow do you get back?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI need to conquer not through destruction, but manipulation. It goes against my nature, but it is the way of life in the infernal realm where all strength is equal. To prove my worth, I need to work with humans and other lesser creatures.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThen why are you destroying my city?\u201d\n\n\nShe sighs and furrows her eyebrows.\n\n\n\u201cBecause I\u2019m pissed off, ok?\u201d\n\n\nYou continue talking to the demon, who tells you her name is Aria, until you come to a complete understanding of each other\u2019s motivations. Still, after everything you\u2019ve learned about each other she says,\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m still going to destroy your city. Although there may be one thing you could do to stop me\u2026\u201d\n\n\nShe explains how a nearby wizard has imprisoned her friend, Azor, and offers to spare your city in exchange for his freedom.\n\n\n\u201cYou have 24 hours, or your city goes up in flames.\u201d\n\n\nYour blood boils over the fact she still desires to destroy the city. Your morality prevents you from standing aside and letting your city burn. You have your sword in hand and amour equipped. Why not pretend to agree then attack when she least expects it?", "action_results": [{"action": "Help save her friend", "result": "\u201cI\u2019ll help you to stop the destruction.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cGreat!\u201d\n\n\nAria conjures a portal made of dark matter.\n\n\n\u201cQuick get in before it closes.\u201d\n\n\nYou jump in, not knowing your destination. After a short transit, you find yourself outside of a tree house. You wanted to live in a tree house as a child, but now that your in front of one, they don\u2019t seem very practical.\n\n\n\u201cHow do I get inside?\" you wonder aloud.\n\n\n\u201cThe ladder.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhy didn\u2019t I think of that! Thank you voice inside my head.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou're welcome, now free me from this ethereal prison.\u201d\n\n\nThis must be who Aria was talking about, but you want to make sure.\n\n\n\u201cSay, what\u2019s your name?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAmlodipine Olmesartan Medoxomil, but you may call me Azor for short.\u201d\n\n\nYou climb the ladder and enter a room with wooden floors and walls.\n\n\n\u201cWhy are you so fixated on the floors and walls? What did you expect a tree house to be made of?\u201d\n\n\nYou don\u2019t answer and continue examining your surroundings. A table lies in the center of the room aligned with various trinkets. One that catches your eye is a glowing red crystal ball. Your first instinct is to break it but you resist the temptation.\n\n\n\u201cWhat are you waiting for, mortal? Free me from this ethereal trap at once!\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Free him", "result": "You grab the red crystal ball and drop it as it burns your finger tips. It shatters into a million pieces as a red fog pours out of it.\n\n\n\u201cNow open up!\u201d \n\n\nThe red fog flows into your ears, mouth, and nose. Your eyes roll into the back of your head as your mind splits into two. Thoughts that aren\u2019t your own begin to flood in.\n\n\n\u201cWhat are you waiting for? Let\u2019s get the hell out of here.\u201d\n\n\nYou climb down the ladder and exit the tree house. You don\u2019t even know where you are right now but somehow know the way back is to the north.\n\n\n\u201cTake a rest, I\u2019m taking over.\u201d\n\n\nYour face grows warm and you start feeling lightheaded. Your body still walks forward as you black out. You awaken in mid conversation sitting by a campfire.\n\n\n\u201cSo when are you gonna get a better body Azor? Look at yourself, how will you kill anyone appearing like that.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t be so dismissive Kancor, at least with this body he won\u2019t have to worry about losing control.\u201d\n\n\nYou look around and note the men you're talking with are much more muscular than yourself. There\u2019s something off about them, their body language is inexpressive and follows little pattern. Sometimes their hands dangle from their arms and other times they jerk up and down. It all feels unnatural and inhuman.\n\n\n\u201cLooks like you might of spoke too soon Borax.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNonsense, Azor is fucking with us and you're taking the bait. Now tell me, how did you convince this poor fuck to release you?\u201d\n\n\nYou stare at these two men and know you can\u2019t fight them. Plus, you feel a nauseating light-headed feeling. You could experience a loss of movement at any time if Azor gains control.\n\n\n\u201cI convinced him to break my crystal ball, releasing me from my ethereal prison,\u201d you say remembering his own words.\n\n\n\u201cYeah but how did you do it? Borax and me had to torture bandits to near death, how did you get someone to give you control willingly?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHe had no idea I would gain control,\u201d you say with a hint of spite.\n\n\n\u201cDamn small-muscled and a moron? Looks like you hit the jackpot with this one.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI sure did\u2026\u201d\n\n\nYou talk for a little longer before Borax puts out the fire. Despite having little clothing for spending a night outside in the winter, you don\u2019t feel cold. Is Azor\u2019s presence maintaining your normal body temperatures?\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s the point of putting out the fire? We\u2019re going to have to use twice as much energy to stay warm.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWe\u2019re demons, not monsters. Wouldn\u2019t want an entire forest burning down for no reason.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWasn\u2019t the poor bastard you\u2019re possessing now screaming \u2018Monster! Monster!\u2019 when you tortured him?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cKancor, you know I had no choice. He was being uncooperative and I needed to put him in his place.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWell you can think about how you had no choice but to mutilate his ball sack into a dough-like mess over sleep.\u201d\n\n\nAll three of you lie down on lovely dirt mattresses. You stare eyes open fearing you might lose control at any moment. After what feels like an hour, you\u2019re sure both of them are asleep. You could get up and make your escape, although you have no idea where you are. Something tells you north is the way to go, but you have no idea how long of a journey it will be and when you will lose control again. You could fall asleep and wait until you're closer to safety. But what good will that even do? Azor will still coexist with you like an infernal parasite.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Escape", "result": "You get up and sneak away, careful not to step on any sticks. Once you\u2019re a good distance away, you break into a sprint. You need to get out of here before they realize you're gone. If Ashton, or any city for that matter, is nearby, then maybe someone could help you. You heard about demon purges before but it never seemed to be the most pleasant process. What choice do you have if you want to hold onto your own free will?\n\n\nWhile running you start to feel incredibly dizzy. Your head sways up and down, spit drips out of your mouth, and you begin to fall. You wait for Azor to take over, but he never does. A coldness perpetuates all around you as you go numb. There will be no one to save you as you pass out from the freezing temperatures. You die a relatively painless death.\n\n\n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Fall Asleep", "result": "You drift off to sleep, wondering if you\u2019ll wake up in the same place.\n\n\nAn unknown amount of time later\n\n\nYou wake up starring at a bloody pile of human corpses. You\u2019re carrying an iron sword that\u2019s stained red. The stained sword seems like the proximate cause of human bodies. You hold back from throwing up as you notice all the stab wounds that you made. You feel lightheaded and can\u2019t tell if its because of the bodies or Azor. Regardless, you have to get out of here before someone sees you. You run from the murder scene and notice you\u2019re in a small village. The sun is beginning to rise and people are going to wake up any minute. Needing to get the hell out of here, you take off running to the north. You hear screams in the distance the moment you take off. They must have discovered the bodies\u2026\n\n\nOnce out of the village, you bend over gasping for air. Your heart flutters as you feel like you\u2019re gonna pass out from adrenaline. You stumble haphazardly knowing the villagers are on the lookout for a killer. You need to reach Ashton, you need to know it\u2019s ok. The thought that Aria manipulated you and destroyed your city spikes your anxiety. This isn\u2019t the only thought that is causing you panic though.\n\n\nYou have a fucking demon inside of you. It\u2019s like a tape worm but instead of wanting food it craves evil. What happens if you return to Ashton and lose control? What if you\u2019re the one who destroys the city under Azor\u2019s guidance? Your thoughts are too much causing you to stop dead in your tracks. Why should you try to reach Ashton just to lose control? Instead, you could turn around and go back to the village. If you explained you situation, they may be able to help you. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back to the village", "result": "You\u2019ve seemed to lack so much control over your choices ever since you met Aria. Now that Azor is involved, this lack of control has intensified. This may be your last chance to make your own choice. It\u2019s time to put an end to this. You turn around and sprint back to the village. When you arrive, the villagers don\u2019t seem very happy.\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s the murderer! I saw him run away covered in blood.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah and he has a sword! Let\u2019s get him!\u201d\n\n\nIt probably would have been a good idea to change clothes and ditch the sword. Or, you know, go to any other place but the village you just killed someone at. No matter, this was your choice and you have to live with the consequences.\n\n\n\u201cPlease let me explain.\u201d\n\n\nThey give you no chance as they charge at you with pitch forks and makeshift swords. You are beaten to a bloody pulp until you die from loss of blood.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Continue to Ashton", "result": "You keep running north, praying it\u2019s the way to Ashton. It\u2019s a long journey, and you find yourself having to piss multiple times. During one of these pisses you lose muscle control and fall into a puddle of your own urine. When you come to, you find yourself in Ashton. Or at least, what used to be Ashton. The city has been completely destroyed, houses burned to the ground and there\u2019s not another soul in sight. You do sense someone being nearby and search for any survivors.\n\n\nWhat you find instead sends you into a rage. It\u2019s Aria and she is looking at you smugly. \n\n\n\u201cGood job destroying the city, you did a much better job than I ever could.\u201d\n\n\nYou hold back from attacking her considering you no longer have your sword. You make an emotional plea and say,\n\n\n\u201cYou promised you wouldn\u2019t destroy the city if I freed Azor.\u201d\n\n\nShe laughs and starts to fly circles around you.\n\n\n\u201cAu contraire my little killer. YOU destroyed the city and I kept my promise. Thanks to you I\u2019ve been granted a passage home.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat are you even talking about? How could I destroy the city if I don\u2019t have a weapon?\u201d\n\n\nShe laughs again and stops flying to land beside you.\n\n\n\u201cWhen you black out, you take on a different form. Azor is capable of much more than you ever will be.\u201d\n\n\nThis can\u2019t be real, you\u2019ve gone through so much just to be a pawn in her little game. You wish you just died on that freezing night instead of having Catia save you. Maybe Ashton would still exist if it weren\u2019t for you. \n\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t be so sad, you\u2019re coming with me!\u201d \n\n\nYou stare daggers at her. \n\n\n\u201cWhat do you mean I\u2019m coming with you?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re coming home with me of course. Azor\u2019s a demon too and you couldn\u2019t have destroyed the city without him. And thanks to you, Tornaxaan, a powerful demon lord, commended us for tricking you into destroying your own city. As a reward, we get to return to the infernal realm.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cCan\u2019t you just let me go? Surely Azor could possess a different body...\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNonsense, now grab my hand. We\u2019re going to have so much fun!\u201d\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Epilogue #3: Returning to a Home Unknown", "result": "\u201cSo your name\u2019s Coyote?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes, and I presume you\u2019re Azor?\u201d\n\n\nAt this point you don\u2019t even bother correcting people. Your moments of control are becoming more scarce and there\u2019s no point in wasting it telling people you aren\u2019t Azor.\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s correct, now tell me, how can I get sent to Earth?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou could try learning dark magic, that\u2019s how my friend Jirzan got there.\u201d\n\n\nDark magic is notorious for being hard to control. Still, it might be your best option.\n\n\n\u201cDark magic sounds interesting. Is there some sort of teleportation spell that can get me back to earth? Oh, maybe I could learn to conjure a portal!\u201d\n\n\nCoyote, who is half man half coyote, shows what would be a pleasant smile if he didn\u2019t have two monstrous fangs.\n\n\n\u201cNo nothing like that, you don\u2019t even have to learn a single spell. Just being in possession of a dark magic book, or kit, will be enough to get you sent back.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAnd where could I get such resources?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI wish I knew, but dark magic is heavily guarded by the most elite demons. I would take a look in Tornaxxan\u2019s castle, just don\u2019t get caught.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah I wasn\u2019t planning to. Thanks for your help Coyote, I\u2019ll try to sneak in before it's too late.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cToo late? Buddy, you got an eternity to figure this out.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSure I do,\u201d you say while sulking away.\n\n\nCoyote calls after you,\n\n\n\u201cBefore you go, could you do me a favor?\u201d\n\n\nYou stop and pause to ask,\n\n\n\u201cWhat?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIf you ever meet a demon named Jirzan, tell him I\u2019ve been released from captivity. He\u2019ll be happy to hear that.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll be sure to tell him if I get the chance.\u201d\n\n\nCoyote wags his tail as you wave goodbye. Who knows if you\u2019ll ever return home? And if you do, when can you get rid of Azor? Life used to be so much simpler.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Keep looking around", "result": "You continue searching the tree house until you find a book. It's titled in a language you don't understand. You pick it up to get and a closer look and it seems to be some sort of spell book.\n\n\n\"Don't read that!\" screams Azor.\n\n\nBut it's too late, you've already opened the book. You poof into nothingness and die in unpredictable fashion.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Pretend to help, then backstab her", "result": "\u201cI\u2019ll help you seeing as I don\u2019t have much choice.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cGreat!\u201d\n\n\nAria conjures a portal made of dark matter.\n\n\n\u201cWhat are you waiting for, jump in!\u201d\n\n\nYou instead jump at her with your sword. This does not go as planned as you are reflected by a pulse of telekinetic energy.\n\n\n\u201cI had a feeling you might betray me. After all, I did just massacre half of your city. Humans emotions are soooo predictable.\u201d\n\n\nBefore you can even scream, she burns you head to toe. You are reduced to a bubbling puddle of human flesh.\n\n\n\u201cGreat, what body will Azor possess now?", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Contact Catia", "result": "How could you possibly save your city and survive? As much as you don\u2019t want to admit it, you can\u2019t win without some help. You sprint to the drunk tortoise tavern (which luckily is on the opposite side of the city that is being terrorized) and bust through the door. It\u2019s completely empty aside from a single person.\n\n\n\u201cLong time no see bud.\u201d\n\n\nIt\u2019s Greg, he has bright red cheeks and is swaying slightly.\n\n\n\u201cWhy are you still here? There\u2019s a demon on a murder rampage outside!\u201d\n\n\nHe chuckles then says,\n\n\n\u201cSometimes you don\u2019t want to be saved. I\u2019m staying here and if I die, so be it.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWell let me join you,\u201d you say with no intention of sitting around to die.\n\n\nYou and Greg sit together and talk about all sorts of things while drinking. This isn\u2019t like the before, when the conversation revolved around meaningless hypotheticals. You delve into some deep shit in a relatively short amount of time. You talk about politics, the meaning of life, and what happens after you die. While this is all going on, the demon continues massacring your entire city. Oops, looks like getting drunk has made you forget your priorities. When the realization dawns on you after a few drinks, you waste no time in shouting,\n\n\n\u201cCatia!\u201d\n\n\nGreg squints at you, clearly remembering the name from the last time you talked. This look of curiosity turns into horror as a swirling red cloud appears in front of you. Catia stands before you but looks much different than before. Unlike her human-like form, she has dark red skin and humongous bat wings.\n\n\n\u201cYou call me once again, how pathetic are you?\u201d\n\n\nThis question strikes you with surprise as it\u2019s the first time she has shown open hostility towards you. Greg on the other hand begins laughing, then says,\n\n\n\u201cIs this the demon that\u2019s been destroying the city? Man, I thought it would be at least a little bigger than that. I know it's rich coming from me, but damn how can something as small as that destroy the city?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cShut up already Greg! This isn\u2019t the demon that\u2019s been attacking the city.\u201d\n\n\nGreg looks at you in confusion as Catia speaks up,\n\n\n\u201cHe's right you know, I haven\u2019t killed a single person in weeks. That is, until now.\u201d\n\n\nCatia takes to the air and flies towards Greg. His drunken state makes him slow to react as Catia rips his throat out. Blood sprays everywhere like a broken faucet.\n\n\n\u201cWho\u2019s the small one now, bitch?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJeez I know he was asking for it, but you didn\u2019t have to kill him.\u201d\n\n\nCatia turns her head towards you and shows no remorse. Her pupils have shrunk, giving her eyes a milk white appearance.\n\n\n\u201cThis is all your fault, why couldn\u2019t you have just listened to Aria?\u201d\n\n\nShe advances towards you, snarling like a wild beast.\n\n\n\u201cWait just a second I didn\u2019t have a chance\u2014\u201c\n\n\nAnd you didn\u2019t have a chance to finish that sentence either as Catia pulls your throat off your body like a soldier grabs a sword off a rack. You die in a puddle of mixed, throat extracted, blood.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "No, let\u2019s just talk.", "result": "As the words leave your lips you feel Catia\u2019s mood shift. She seems more hostile saying,\n\n\n\u201cDo you not find me attractive or something? I don\u2019t have time to talk and have many more people to see after you. Let\u2019s focus on the now shall we? Take of your clothes.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Take of your clothes", "result": "You follow her command as she details step by step what you should do.\n\n\n\u201cOk now remove your tunic. Good, throw it on the floor and put your pants on top. Great job!\u201d\n\n\nShe tells you things along the same lines until you're completely devoid of any clothing.\n\n\n\u201cNow here comes the fun part, get on your hands and knees.\u201d\n\n\nYou\u2019ve already come this far, might as well comply. You get down and have to arch your back to stare up at her. The uncomfortable position does not bother you as all you can focus on is her figure. Damn she sure is beautiful. Especially when she says incantations. Hey, that\u2019s what she\u2019s saying right now!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSarahkahnar Hor zeef narze taf!\u201d\n\n\nWhen she finishes you have a out of body experience. It\u2019s like you're having an orgasm all over your body. Yet, it\u2019s so much more than just that. Your whole room is having an organism and you feel it all. The walls, the table, the bed, and even clumps of dust experience this sensation along side you. It\u2019s magical and you don\u2019t care if she\u2019s a so called demon, she is a blessing to this world. You can\u2019t keep this feeling inside and whisper,\n\n\n\u201cI love\u2026\u201d\n\n\nYou pass out before finishing from pure ecstasy. When you regain consciousness you feel utterly cold. You\u2019re naked as Catia towers over you.\n\n\n\"Saying the word 'love' after our first night together tells me all I need to know about you.\"\n\n\n\"What's that?\"\n\n\nShe grows quiet and says in a pitiful tone,\n\n\n\"You're too weak-willed to be of any real use to me. Best I throw away the trash before it makes my presence known.\"\n\n\nYou try to question her but find yourself unable to move. A white spirit begins to flow out of your body.\n\n\n\"Don't think I'm taking your soul or anything. I'm merely releasing you from your human form.\"\n\n\nSoon everything turns black as you find yourself floating in infinite space. Other floating spirits whiz around, but you're unable to communicate with any of them. You never escape this purgatory and soon forget how you got here. The weak-willed guard from Ashton is remembered as nothing more than a victim of the demon invasion.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Refuse", "result": "\u201cI will be doing no such thing,\u201d you say in protest.\n\n\nCatia raises her eyebrow before breaking out in laughter.\n\n\n\u201cWell this is a first,\u201d she says.\n\n\nYou stare at her as she seems to be deciding whether she\u2019ll force you to remove your clothes. You feel the sweat drip down your back when she finally says,\n\n\n\u201cMaybe I really deserved to be sent here. I can\u2019t even manipulate a human into having sex with me.\u201d\n\n\nA black cloud appears as she disappears from your room. You start violently coughing but don\u2019t pass out this time. It\u2019s not like it matters, you need to sleep anyway. You put out your candles and fall into bed. You focus on your breathing as you drift off to sleep. Best to reflect on what happens when you have a clearer mind.\n\n\nYou wake up with a throbbing pain in your head. The light coming from your window floods your mind with intense pain. Guess you drunk more last night than you thought. You decide its best to make yourself some food and drink to clear your head. You grab water and a slice of peach pie you made a few days ago. You scarf the food down and shallow the water in huge gulps. Your head should start feeling better within the next few hours.\n\n\nExcept it doesn\u2019t, you lie in bed with constant tension on your head. It\u2019s like someone is squeezing your brain with both hands, but not hard enough to cause physical harm. Something unnatural is going on and you know it. Hangovers should get better after rest, not worse. It\u2019s hard to focus on anything but the pain. You try remembering what Catia did before she left. She dispelled a black cloud which didn\u2019t knock you out. Is it possible this was a curse?\n\n\nThe more you think about it, the more it makes sense. While she tried not to show it, she was upset you resisted her temptation. She wanted you to pay for hurting her ego. That bitch! As you think about her more, tension is released from your skull. In fact, you're able to think about her in vivid detail and feel headache free. Although, the second you stop thinking about her the pain comes rushing back. This certainly isn\u2019t good.\n\n\nYou\u2019re going to have to do something about this. There is one obvious solution which is trying to contact Catia and having her remove the curse. Though who knows if she\u2019ll even remove it, assuming she still wants to visit you. The other option is going to a local witch doctor and having them remove the curse. Although, you\u2019ve heard they\u2019ve been busy since demons first started being sighted. Maybe the curse is temporary, why not wait it out?", "action_results": [{"action": "Call for Catia", "result": "You can barely move, so you know you\u2019re in a susceptible state. The question is, does she still want to see you?\n\n\n\u201cCatia,\u201d you whisper.\n\n\nYou wait a few tense seconds and feel the pain in your head begin to relieve itself. But then, nothing. She never comes and the pain comes rushing back. You find tears streaming down your face as you realize your chances with Catia are probably over. You\u2019re also in no state to continue working as a guard and will probably be fired soon. The only thing you can do is lay in bed and suffer.\n\n\nDays past and your state of mind only gets worse. You begin seeing shadowy figures at the corner of your eyes. One day you manage to touch one and ask,\n\n\n\u201cWho are you?\u201d\n\n\nHe laughs and laughs before disappearing. This isn\u2019t the most psychologically scaring part of this ordeal. Your recurring nightmares are much worse. You dream of your family returning home in vivid detail, only for it to all come crashing down as you realize they're not real. You stop eating and drink only when necessary. It gets to a point where you know if you don\u2019t try to seek help you will die.\n\n\nYou have no idea where to go for help, especially since the local witch doctor has been arrested for using humans as potion ingredients. You wander aimlessly taking morning walks in a vain attempt to find your savior. Shadowy figures whisper about you as you walk past.\n\n\n\u201cThere\u2019s nothing out here, return home\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re never going to get better, why not end it?\u201d\n\n\nYou\u2019ve been seeing these shadowy figures more frequently recently. You chalk this up to your lack of sleep. Sleeping is when your most vulnerable, so you try to do as little of it as you can.\n\n\nDuring a morning walk you run into a familiar face. It\u2019s your childhood friend Julia. You haven\u2019t seen her since schooling and boy does she look different.\n\n\n\u201cIs that\u2026\u201d she says\n\n\n\u201cYeah it\u2019s me,\u201d you reply\n\n\n\u201cBoy do you look different.\u201d\n\n\nYou haven\u2019t been grooming yourself since the madness occurred. You have lots of dark circles under your eyes and probably don\u2019t smell too good either.\n\n\n\u201cYou also look different.\u201d\n\n\nShe raises an eyebrow not knowing if your complementing or insulting her.\n\n\n\u201cIn a good way in a good way!\u201d you clarify.\n\n\nShe laughs as her dress flows in the wind.\n\n\n\u201cSorry I can\u2019t say the same to you. Down on your luck?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s putting it lightly,\u201d you say jokingly, even though it\u2019s the truth.\n\n\n\u201cHahah I bet. I was just about to get some coffee, wanna come with?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWould I ever! Is it ok if the shadow people follow along?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThe what?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNever mind.\u201d\n\n\nLater\n\n\nJulia and you decided to go to the Cinnamon Pearl Cafe. As fancy as it may seem, its nothing more than a place to eat pastries and drink coffee. She begins telling you what\u2019s she\u2019s been doing lately.\n\n\n\u201cYou know Andy right?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOf course, me and him have been on guard duty together a couple times.\u201d\n\n\nJulia bites her lips and chooses her words carefully,\n\n\n\u201cWell we broke up recently due to the fact that he...he...raped me...\u201d\n\n\nYou\u2019re shocked at this revelation, Andy has always seemed like a standup guy.\n\n\n\u201cHow could he do such a thing?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHe\u2019s a piece of shit that\u2019s how!\u201d\n\n\nYour lower your head as she composes herself.\n\n\n\u201cSorry, I\u2019m just not in the best mental space right now.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo need to apologize, you have every right to be angry.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThank you.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSo tell me, what happened?\u201d\n\n\nShe explains how one night, after a long tiring day working as a cleaner, Andy wanted sex. They had been dating for a few months and had yet to have sex. The conversation went a little like this,\n\n\n\u201cAll of my other friends constantly brag about sex. If I keep telling them I haven\u2019t fucked you yet they might start thinking I\u2019m gay,\" says Andy.\n\n\n\u201cStop pressuring me! I told you, I am not in the mood and am not ready to pursue that kind of relationship with you.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re such a bitch, you know that right? Fuck you make me angry,\u201d Andy says while walking towards Julia menacingly.\n\n\n\u201cBack off, get away from me!\u201d\n\n\nJulia stops talking and begins to choke up. She covers her face with her hands and says shakily,\n\n\n\u201cHe grabbed me and wouldn\u2019t let go. I tried to scream but he covered my mouth and clenched my throat. He violated me and nobody cares to do anything about it. Everyone\u2019s to focused on the damn demons to give a shit about poor ol\u2019 me.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s horrible, who else have you told?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJust you and the captain of the fucking guards. He wouldn\u2019t even fire him, saying the demand for guards is \u2018very high\u2019 right now. No guard is better than a guards that\u2019s a mother fucking rapist.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI wish I could help, but the captain probably won\u2019t listen to me anymore. I haven\u2019t shown up for work in days and didn\u2019t give any notice.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s ok, I don\u2019t want the captain\u2019s help anyways. I need to move on and be strong.\u201d\n\n\nYou make small talk about various things before saying your goodbyes. With Julia in such a vulnerable state, you wonder if it\u2019s best to give her time to heal. At the same time, you long for human relationship. The shadow figures just aren\u2019t the same as real human contact.", "action_results": [{"action": "Give her time to heal", "result": "You decide it\u2019s best to give it time before pursuing a relationship. Not just for her, but you as well. You figure you\u2019ll stop seeing shadow people sooner than later and be in a better headspace. A few days go by and the shadowy figures start to appear in the corner of your eyes. You\u2019re starting to regret your decision of not pursing Julia but they reassure you.\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re better of without her.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhy have friends when you have us?\u201d\n\n\nAnd a particularly rude one says,\n\n\n\u201cShe\u2019s much better off without you in her life.\u201d\n\n\nYou stop your morning walks and live a hermit lifestyle. You start eating bugs off the ground as you\u2019ve long since ran out of food. This is no way to live your life and you know it. In a moment of clarity you sprint out of the house and run to \u201cThe Devil\u2019s Cliff\u201d. You jump off laughing as you\u2019ve hit rock bottom in life and now in death.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Pursue a relationship", "result": "You\u2019re both facing adversity in life. In a sense, you\u2019ve both been raped. Julia in a literal sense and yourself in a mental sense. Catia cursed you and has left you a shell of your former self.The past few days have been hell. Why not reconnect with a old friend and see if it leads anywhere? Everyday you walk to the Cinnamon Pearl Cafe hoping to see Julia. A few days go by and you never see her, however it\u2019s not all bad. You\u2019re now eating and staying hydrated, which is never a bad thing. You haven\u2019t seen any shadow people in days and have stopped having nightmares. Things are looking up for you.\n\n\nOne day after ordering your usual (a cup of coffee and cinnamon toast) Julia walks in. She\u2019s all alone and you make eye contact with her. She winks at you and holds up a finger indicating that you should give her a second. You watch as she orders a coffee and raisin bread. After paying, she walks over to join you.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m surprised to see you here,\u201d she says.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m here all the time now. I mean, their coffee\u2019s really great.\u201d\n\n\nShe laughs and asks,\n\n\n\u201cHow have you been doing?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m great, but I\u2019ve been worrying about you, how have you been holding up?\u201d\n\n\nShe gets a little teary eyed while saying,\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s so sweet of you, but you don\u2019t have to worry about me. I\u2019m planning on leaving Ashton tomorrow morning.\u201d\n\n\nYou sit mouth agape shocked at the news. She could have easy left without telling you. You might have gone mad waiting for her, but now you have a chance to leave with her.\n\n\n\u201cWhy are you leaving? I get why you might not want to live in a place with bad memories of your past, but why leave so soon?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s no longer safe here and you should know better than anyone being a guard and all.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cFormer guard, and what do you mean it\u2019s not safe? I haven\u2019t heard of any demon sightings...\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWell there was one just a few nights ago and people living in Ashton died. I have family up in Kingsburg and know I\u2019ll be safe there.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAre you going all alone or bringing anyone with you?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAs of now, all alone. I don\u2019t know how difficult travel will be, back if I survive, I\u2019ll finally have a place to call home.\u201d\n\n\nYou really don\u2019t think it\u2019s a good idea for her to travel alone. One for the selfish reason of wanting to be close to her, but also because it\u2019s the middle of winter and travel hasn\u2019t been safe since the demonic invasion. This is all happening so fast, you barely know Julia the adult considering you just reconnect with you. Will she even let you come with her if you ask?\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask if you can come with her", "result": "\u201cHey do you think I could go with you?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cUmm...why would you want to do that?\u201d\n\n\nYou explain how you don\u2019t have any reason to stay in Ashton anymore. Your parents are likely dead and you\u2019re unemployed. A new start in Kingsbury is just what the doctor ordered. \n\n\n\u201cYou can come...just meet me outside the Cinnamon Pearl at dawn.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes! Thank you so much, I can\u2019t wait!\u201d \n\n\nYou leave the cafe and feel an incredible sense of euphoria. You can\u2019t believe she said yes, although she was a bit apprehensive. You can\u2019t wait to show her that she made the right choice in letting you come along. You spend the rest of the day gathering all your most prized belongings. You also take all of your parent\u2019s savings figuring they\u2019re never coming back. You fall asleep and begin to dream...\n\n\nYou're back in school and are sitting next to Julia. You don't hesitate and begin talking to her fully lucid of your actions.\n\n\n\"Hey Julia! Want a cookie?\"\n\n\nYou pull a cookie out of thin air and hold it out to her. She reacts in disgust,\n\n\n\"Did you really think you could win my love so easily? Andy's my boyfriend and we're going to be together forever!\"\n\n\nYou stammer out,\n\n\n\"One day you'll realize Andy isn't as nice as he may seem. Appearances can be deceiving...\"\n\n\nShe bursts out in hysterical laughing and you have no idea why. Your look of confusion becomes apparent as she says,\n\n\n\"Appearances sure are deceiving!\"\n\n\n\"Yeah...\"\n\n\n\"For instance, I'm not even Julia.\"\n\n\nYour pulse increases as you feel yourself losing control. Julia's face contorts feature by feature. First, her eyes turn red, then horns grow out of her head. By the end of it you are staring face to face with the demon of your nightmares.\n\n\n\"Catia?\"\n\n\n\"You may think you've escaped me, but Julia will never be your true love.\"\n\n\n\"Shut up! Julia's just a friend...\"\n\n\n\"No, YOU shut up! I know your deepest secrets and desires. Why keep up the charade? I know you think Julia can fill the void in your life, but that's just a fantasy.\"\n\n\n\"None of this is real and that includes you. This is nightmare, that's all.\"\n\n\n\"Go ahead, believe that. Just don't act like I didn't try to warn you.\"\n\n\nYou wake up as your head pounds like never before. You're suddenly very scared and seeing Julia and aren't sure why. It's clearly irrational, but a part of you wants to contact Catia again. Who's to say the curse will go away just because you're with Julia? Should you even bother?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Cinnamon Pearl", "result": "It's best to ignore the nightmare and pretend it never happened. You head to meet Julia at the Cinnamon Pearl. You arrive shortly after and see her waiting for you.\n\n\n\u201cReady to go?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cReady for anything,\u201d you stay while brandishing your sword.\n\n\nThe road to Kingsbury is no easy journey. You feel Julia is glad you came along as you can scare away any thieves and bandits you come across. Who knows if you\u2019ll make it in one piece but at least you have a purpose. You leave through the city walls and take the old dirt road to Kingsbury.\n\n\n\u201cYou know the forest would be faster?\u201d you say.\n\n\n\u201cI know, I have a feeling we\u2019re much safer this way.\u201d\n\n\nYou look at her and smile. Her blue eyes sparkle as you realize one thing: true beauty is in the eye of the beholder. You\u2019ve been staring it in the face since childhood and are only realizing that now.", "action_results": [{"action": "Epilogue #4: The Kingsbury Kiss", "result": "The journey to Kingsbury wasn\u2019t easy. You and Julia saved each other\u2019s behind on multiple occasions. Through adversity, you grew closer together. Once you arrived at Kingsbury you had no plan. Julia saw this and invited you to stay with her. Before you knew it, you two started dating. She was everything you\u2019ve ever wanted and more. You never cared that she wanted to take things slow, in fact, you embraced it.\n\n\n\u201cYou only live once, might as well enjoy the whole ride,\u201d you said to her one night.\n\n\n\u201cOh shut up, you and your cheesy sayings need to stop,\u201d she says while touching your shoulder. \n\n\n\u201cYou want me to shut up? I\u2019ll do it, just for you my Cinnamon Pearl.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIf you say something cheesy one more time I\u2019ll...\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ll what?\u201d\n\n\nShe pauses and stare at you with her beautiful, shinning blue eyes. You don\u2019t have time to react before she leans in and says,\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll... kiss you.\u201d\n\n\nYour lips connect and you feel a fullness in your heart for the first time in years. You\u2019re reminded of the night you met Catia where everything about her gave you joy. Except this time it\u2019s different, this isn\u2019t some spell or magical aura. This is all real, and you can\u2019t believe it.\n\n\n\u201cI love you,\u201d you say to remind yourself this is really happening.\n\n\n\u201cI love you too.\u201d", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Summon Catia one more time", "result": "You don't care if it's irrational, something deep inside says you need to see Catia. You head out to The Drunk Tortoise Tavern to get in a \"more suggestive state\". It's warmed up quite a bit since the last time you've been there and you're glad. New weather, new you, and perhaps a new Catia? You can only hope...\n\n\nAs you daydream, you lose track of where you're going. You don't even realize it when you take a wrong turn and end up in a dark alley. Logic tells you it's too dark to see anybody, but that isn't the case. The shadow people are back and they have you surrounded! You press yourself up against a wall and begin to scream.\n\n\n\"Hey, quiet down. We're not here to torment you,\" a shadow person says.\n\n\n\"In fact, we're here to prevent you from making a huge mistake,\" another says.\n\n\nThey explain how they weren't always shadow people. They used to be everyday people; soldiers, farmers, merchants, and every other occupation imaginable. However, one day they met a succubus and fell in love.\n\n\n\"I didn't want to go through with it, but once the madness hit I kept crawling back,\" one says.\n\n\n\"We all kept crawling back. There is a point where you lose so much individuality and can't even make decisions for yourself.\"\n\n\n\"That's how we all became shadow people. We lost our faces, our bodies, and our past to the abyss.\"\n\n\nYou can't believe you're having a full on conversation with the shadowy figures after all this time. You've completely lost it, why not see where this goes?\n\n\n\"Ok, so you lost all your individuality. How are you able to talk to me and tell me all of this?\"\n\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\n\"You said it yourself, you couldn't make 'decisions for yourself.' If so, how are you here right now?\n\n\n\"Shit he's on to us!\"\n\n\n\"What should we do, can we still trick him?\"\n\n\nYou shift uncomfortably.\n\n\n\"You idiot, why would you say that? Now we have to kill him.\"\n\n\nYou get up and try to run. You figure they aren't real and can't hurt you. Well, it turns out they can. They punch, kick, and slap you into a bloody mess.\n\n\n\"Finally, I will have a face again!\"\n\n\nThey begin to peel away your skin and plaster it on their body. All the shadow people converged into a single mass resembling a ball. They tear off your arms and legs and add it to the mass. You're fully converged to the ball-like mass as a portal is conjured before you.\n\n\n\"Into the forest!\"\n\n\nYou're don't die and live as part of this abomination. Your life is an eternal nightmare.\n\n\n ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Wish her good luck and say goodbye", "result": "\u201cWell best of luck, but I have to go.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOk...goodbye.\u201d\n\n\nYou leave and give her a smile, but on the inside you feel horrible. Why didn\u2019t you ask if you could come along? The worse that could happen is her saying no, but at least you could say you tried. You arrive home and spend all day inside. During sleep, you have your first nightmare in days. Seeing no reason to go to the Cinnamon Pearl Cafe now that\u2019s Julia is gone, you stay inside all day. The shadow people start showing up in the corner of your vision and they taunt you relentlessly. Since you\u2019re not eating or drinking, you don\u2019t have the energy to leave bed anymore. You spend the next few days like this regretting the choice you made.\n\n\nOn a day like any other, you die from dehydration during your sleep. Rest easy knowing you\u2019ll never have a nightmare again.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Visit the Witch Doctor", "result": "Your brain aches with pain and going to what you assume is the source of the pain will probably make it worst. While you\u2019ve never been too trusting of witches, you know a local one with good reputation. As you make your way outside the light pierces through your skull. Your eye sockets feel like their burning and your brain feels like it\u2019s melting. You press on and begin to enter the slums of the city. The practice of brewing potions containing humans, a required ingredient for witch doctors, is not exactly legal. Still, you are in no place to have such prejudice considering if your head keeps pounding like it is now, you might just kill someone.\n\n\nYou reach the witch doctor\u2019s office and make your way inside. It\u2019s pretty busy at the moment, which is no surprise as people want protection from demons. You wait in a line of about twenty people. The pounding has intensified, and you aren\u2019t even aware how much time has passed when somebody says,\n\n\n\u201cExcuse me, do you need to see the witch doctor\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSHUT UP!\u201d you snap.\n\n\nThe clerk cowers as you finish screaming at him. You manage to calm down and whisper,\n\n\n\u201cPlease help me.\u201d\n\n\nThe clerk nods and orders you to follow him. You go down a hall way affixed with a assortment of trinkets and baubles pinned to the walls.\n\n\n\u201cTo keep away evil spirts,\u201d the clerk explains.\n\n\nThere is a huge variety of objects that you would normally want to know more about. You are in no mood now though and continue down the hall until you reach the doctor.\n\n\nYou enter a room lit only by bright red stones. In the center lays a boiling pot emitting the scent of rotten egg. The bright lights distract you from even noticing the witch doctor standing right in front of you.\n\n\n\u201cI sense a demonic curse within you. Don\u2019t worry, I know the perfect potion for you.\u201d\n\n\nThe witch doctor, who prefers you call her \u201ca potion brewer\u201d, starts throwing a concoction of ingredients into a cauldron.\n\n\n\u201cOne imp carcass to ward off spirts, 2 cups of orc blood for personal strength, and a dash of lemon juice.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhy lemon?\u2019 you ask.\n\n\nShe smiles and says,\n\n\n\u201cFor flavor silly! Do you think you could stomach a potion solely comprised of raw meat and blood?\u201d\n\n\nShe mixes everything together and pours out the cauldron into multiple bottles. She hands you one and the smell alone relieves your head. You down the vial and struggle to hold back from vomiting. It\u2019s a lot thicker than you thought and the blood clumps up in your throat. The potion brewer notices your discomfort and gives you a small vial composed of a black liquid.\n\n\n\u201cDrink this it will help.\u201d\n\n\nYou do as told and gulp the vial down. It seems to do the trick as the clumped blood slides down your throat. You still want to vomit out your insides.\n\n\n\u201cSo how will you be paying today, soul or servitude?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI thought you accepted coin.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh, we do, but the black vial I gave you was extremely valuable. The ingredients needed to make it cannot be paid by mere coin.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat! How expensive can it be to make a potion that clears your throat?\u201d\n\n\nShe laughs and shakes her head before saying,\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s not what the potion did, silly! It\u2019s what I give to people if I sense they are close to death. It will prevent any proximate death, but can only be used once.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhy not just give me something else then?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI wasn\u2019t sure if the curse was attacking you or if you were having an allergic reaction to the potion. While I can sense a lot, I\u2019m not psychic. Rather than make a guess I did the only thing I could to guarantee your life.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI suppose that makes sense.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cGreat! Now how about that payment, soul or servitude?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Soul", "result": "\u201cI\u2019ll pay with my soul.\u201d\n\n\nShe smiles and says,\n\n\n\u201cI was hoping you\u2019d say that.\u201d\n\n\nShe latches onto you and pushes you to the ground.\n\n\n\u201cClerk Anthony, tie him up!\u201d\n\n\nThe clerk pounces and takes out a long thread of rope while the potion brewer holds you down. The rope is wrapped around your hands and legs and you\u2019re tied up like an animal.\n\n\n\u201cNow time to harvest your flesh!\u201d\n\n\nThe witch, which is more apt of a title, pours a white liquid mixed with thousands of black dots down your throat. It\u2019s not until you shallow when you realize what those black dots were, ticks! They burrow into your mouth and bite your gums. You feel bumps forming on your tongue, gums, and uvula. Then the biting spreads to your throat. More bumps form and you\u2019re unable to breath. Your face starts to turn blue and your senses dim.\n\n\n\u201cHe\u2019ll be dead soon.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBut what about his soul, master?\u201d\n\n\nShe laughs and says,\n\n\n\u201cI never wanted his soul silly! My herbal tea requires human flesh.\u201d\n\n\nThis is the last thing you hear before blacking out. Hopefully the tea was good.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Servitude", "result": "\u201cI\u2019ll pay in servitude.\u201d\n\n\nShe frowns and murmurs,\n\n\n\u201cI wish you chose the other option That would have been a lot more fun.\u201d\n\n\nShe explains how in exchange for saving your life you will be her assistant until she considers you debt repaid.\n\n\n\u201cMy name\u2019s Helena by the way, but you can call me master.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cCan as in I have a choice?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou really are silly! No, can as in you can chose to call me master if you want to live, Understood?\n\n\n\u201cYes\u2026\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes what!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes master\u2026\u201d\n\n\nYou begin work immediately and are sent out to gather various herbs for her potions. One day while gathering a rare mushroom, you encounter a demon who screams,\n\n\n\u201cI CRAVE DESTRUCTION!\u201d\n\n\nYou try to run but he sends a bolt of fire into your chest. You burn into blackened ash.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Wait", "result": "You continue lying around and try to fall asleep. The pain won\u2019t let this happen and you lie in bed starring at the ceiling. You start thinking about Catia again as it seems to be the only thing you can focus on. You think about how much of an idiot you are for passing up sex with a demon.\n\n\nYour front door makes a loud squeaking sounds followed by footsteps. Is Catia back to finish the job? You try to get to grab your sword but your head pounds forcing you to stay in bed. Expecting Catia to kill you at any second, you are very surprised to hear,\n\n\n\u201cSon, I\u2019m home.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMmmm\u2014-mmmmm\u2014-mmother?\n\n\n\u201cYes, it\u2019s me and I come baring bad news. Your Father, he was killed on our way home. I feel so empty I don\u2019t know how I\u2019ll go on.\u201d\n\n\nShe begins crying into her hands. The pounding in your head stops, allowing you to get up to comfort her.\n\n\n\u201cEverything will ok you just have to stay strong,\u201d you say while patting her back.\n\n\nYour mother looks up at you and smiles. Her blue eyes shine through the tears and you know everything will be ok. She goes in to hug you and you return the favor. As you embrace, she massages your back making you feel like a kid again. She whispers into your ear,\n\n\n\u201cWill you sleep with me tonight? I don\u2019t want to be alone after all that\u2019s happened.\u201d\n\n\nNow you\u2019re really starting to feel like a kid again. This is your mother and as sad as it sounds, you could also use some company after all that\u2019s happened.\n\n\n\u201cSure, I don\u2019t want to be alone either.\u201d\n\n\nYou both fall into bed and feel instant relief. She moves closer to you and grabs your hand. She moves your arm over her body and huddles your body close to your chest. As much as you want to say something about how uncomfortable this makes you feel, you know she needs company after all she\u2019s been through. You no longer feel like a kid, but feel like your father? This is pretty weird, but its just one night. One weird night is nothing to be alarmed about.\n\n\nYou drift off to sleep and have the best night of rest you\u2019ve had in years. When you wake up you're surprised to find your mother still pressed up against your chest. Not wanting to disturb her, you just lay there eyes open. Your headache is gone, and you think you know why. Only the love between a son and a mother could dispel the curse Catia put on you. Your mother soon wakes up and says,\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t want to be too forward, but can we do this again tonight? The horrors I saw, the bloodshed, is too much for me to be left alone with my thoughts. I need someone to be my rock, so I don\u2019t fall into the pit of despair.\u201d\n\n\nYou\u2019ve never seen your mother so sad before, thought its understandable. The question is, are you ok with doing this again? Sure, one night of sleeping in the same bed of your mom after such trauma isn\u2019t that crazy. But doing again, that may be a bit crazy.", "action_results": [{"action": "Agree to be her rock", "result": "You agree to comfort her again tonight. It\u2019s as weird as the last time, but it seems to make your mom happy and that\u2019s all a son could want.\n\n\n\u201cThank you, I need this right now,\u201d she says as you massage her back.\n\n\nYou sleep in the same bed as your mom everyday for the next few weeks. Demon sighting have been occurring more frequently and your mother is becoming increasingly worried.\n\n\n\u201cI think we need to get out of Ashton before its too late,\u201d she says.\n\n\n\u201cWhere will we go and how could we survive alone?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI know a place, but you have to trust me.\u201d\n\n\nYou have no reason not to trust her and follow her once nightfall arrives. You leave the city walls and venture into a nearby forest.\n\n\n\u201cWhere exactly are we going?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ll see.\u201d\n\n\nShe speeds up showing a surprising amount of fitness for a middle-aged woman. You eventually reach a clearing where a river flows against rocks.\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s beautiful,\u201d you say stunned..\n\n\n\u201cNot as beautiful as you,\u201d your mother says with a playful wink.\n\n\nIt gets kind of awkward for a bit until you break the silence.\n\n\n\u201cI still don\u2019t understand what we\u2019re doing here. How is a forest any safe than Ashton?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh, it\u2019s not safer at all. I just wanted to go somewhere nobody could hear you scream,\u201d\n\n\nYour mother dashes at you with inhuman speed. She pins you down and starts ripping off your clothes\n\n\n\u201cEver since father died, I\u2019ve had to suppress my sexual desires. Not anymore, never again.\u201d\n\n\nYou try to struggle but it's no use. You find yourself buck naked in the middle of forest.\n\n\n\u201cI want you to enjoy this as much as I do, so please don\u2019t fight back.\u201d\n\n\nYou always assumed you were stronger than mother but aren\u2019t so sure now. Perhaps you should give in to a deep seeded desire you\u2019ve repressed for all these years.", "action_results": [{"action": "Give In", "result": "You decide to just enjoy yourself and throw away all logic. This plan backfires once you begin to have sex. This is all wrong, and its not because its your mom, it's because\u2026\n\n\n\u201cWHY DID YOU HAVE A PENIS!\u201d you scream.\n\n\nYour mother\u2019s voice grows deep and she begins to laugh. You are at her mercy as tears begin to fill your eyes. When it's all done you are left humiliated and at a loss of all self-ego.\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t understand.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s there not to understand? I pretended to have your mom to have sex with you. I assumed you were a momma\u2019s boy by the way you repelled my sexual aura. My assumption was correct!\u201d\n\n\nYour mother face contorts feature by feature. First, her eyes turn red, then horns grow out of her head. By the end of it you are staring face to face with the demon of your nightmares.\n\n\n\u201cCatia?\u201d\n\n\nYou are given no explanation as she sends a powerful blast of dark energy at you.\n\n\n\u201cYou may have been able to repel my aura, but you can\u2019t repel dark magic.\u201d\n\n\nIt strikes you and tears a hole through your heart. You die both literally and metaphorically heartbroken.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Struggle", "result": "This is way too far, and you do not want it in any way.\n\n\n\u201cMom, I love you, but please don\u2019t do this.\u201d\n\n\nYou expect her to understand, but her reaction is completely different.\n\n\n\u201cAre you impotent or some shit?\u201d\n\n\nFor the first time in a long time your head starts pounding again. She continues,\n\n\n\u201cI mean I know you are right now, but I are you impotent in terms of sex?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t want to have sex with my own mother! If that makes me impotent then I guess I am.\u201d\n\n\nShe grows angry and grabs your crotch.\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s not just that! You didn\u2019t even want to have sex with a hot succubus. I thought you must have had some mommy issues, but that doesn\u2019t seem to be it either.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhaaaaa,\u201d is all you have time to say before she tears your crotch off.\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s for wasting my time!\u201d\n\n\nShe finishes the job by setting you on fire and spitting on your charred corpse.\n\n\n\u201cAnd that\u2019s for being a bitch.\u201d", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Put a stop to this now", "result": "This is just too weird, and it needs to stop before spirals into something else.\n\n\n\u201cMom, I love you, but I just don\u2019t think this is the best path of recovery.\u201d\n\n\nYou expect her to be sad, maybe cry a little, but her reaction is completely different.\n\n\n\u201cGOD FUCKING DAMN IT YOU ARE TOO PURE!\u201d she screams.\n\n\nA cloud of dark smoke blinds you as your mother morphs into a demon like form.\n\n\n\u201cMother, what happened on your trip?\u201d you say while blinded by smoke.\n\n\n\u201cYou insolent fool, I\u2019m not your mom I am a succubus.\u201d\n\n\nThe smoke clears and you find Catia standing before you.\n\n\n\u201cWhaaaaa,\u201d is all you have time to say before she tears your head of.\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s for wasting my time!\u201d\n\n\n ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Tell him to fuck off", "result": "\u201cFuck off worm.\u201d\n\n\nGreg surprises you when he snaps back,\n\n\n\u201cConnor and Tom picking on me is one thing, but you? I don\u2019t know why, but I thought you were different.\u201d\n\n\nFor a second, you feel hurt. But then you realize it's Greg and feel a bit better.\n\n\n\u201cYour fault, not mine. Now do as you're told and stop following me,\u201d you say while walking away.\n\n\nThis guys persistent and runs to catch up when you start walking fast. Are you going to have to kick the shit out of him so he leaves you alone? You hope not, but that may be the only option as he\u2019s acting like a child.\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t want to go back to the tavern. Wherever you\u2019re going, it's better than there.\u201d\n\n\nHe\u2019s probably not wrong, but it's beyond pathetic that he still follows you. Guess when you take so much abuse you can shrug it off pretty easily.\n\n\n\u201cGo ahead, follow me. Just know if you try to enter my house you won\u2019t be able to leave.\u201d\n\n\nHe gulps but continues to follow you. He\u2019s wasted a lot of your time so you decide to take a shortcut to your parents\u2019 house. You find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don\u2019t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind.\n\n\nYou arrive at your parent\u2019s old home and open the door. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it.\n\n\n\u201cSome things never change,\u201d you whisper to yourself.\n\n\nYou immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers\u2019 uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor?\n\n\nYou\u2019re about to sit down in your bed when a chill runs down your spin. Your door makes a squeaking noise and a cold breeze rushes towards you.\n\n\n\u201cI swear to god Greg! you shout.\n\n\nNo reply, although you don\u2019t know what you were expecting. It\u2019s possible the breeze pushed the door open, it's pretty flimsy and it wouldn\u2019t be the craziest thing that\u2019s happened in the last 24 hours. On the other hand, you can\u2019t shake the feeling you're being watched. Should you investigate?", "action_results": [{"action": "Investigate", "result": "Maybe it\u2019s paranoia, but what kind of brain-dead retard wouldn\u2019t rather be safe than sorry? Assuming its just Greg, you don\u2019t even bother grabbing your sword, and leave the bed room, checking every corner as you do so. This pays of as you notice a shadowy figure standing outside your bedroom. Is that\u2026Lars?\n\n\nHe wastes no time in attacking you, but why? You\u2019ll never know as he slams your head into his knee until you die.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Ignore it", "result": "It probably was just the wind, no need to be paranoid. You hop in bed and close your eyes.\n\n\n\u201cCat---\u201d\n\n\nYou head is struck making you collapse. You black out from what you assume to be Greg\u2019s doing. Who knew he was so strong? You suffer intensive internal bleeding and die a slow, painful death.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "\u201cI prefer a genius but cruel child.\u201d", "result": "\u201cMy man!\u201d shouts Connor.\n\n\n\u201cHar har Greg probably wants a retarded child to have someone finally agree with him,\u201d Tom jokes.\n\n\nTom and Connor start shouting about how much of a dumbass Greg is. You agree, but don\u2019t join in on the berating. Instead, you walk out of the tavern without a second glance. As you make your way outside you are hit with a rush of cool air.\n\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t wait to meet Catia,\u201d you mutter to yourself.\n\n\nYou tuck your hands in your pockets and begin the walk to your home. On the way, you bump into a familiar face. It\u2019s Lars.\n\n\n\u201cHow did last night go?\u201d he asks.\n\n\nSomething about Lars is rubbing you the wrong way. It might be his emotionless eyes or his downtrodden tone, but you feel like telling him about Catia is a bad idea\n\n\n\u201cI nearly froze to death,\u201d you say, wanting to be vague.\n\n\n\u201cYeah how exactly did you avoid doing that? When I left it looked like you were about to pass out.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJust lucky I guess.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cLucky huh? Well it\u2019s your \u2018luck\u2019 that got me fired. Thanks a lot, now my family can starve to death before getting killed by demons.\u201d\n\n\nYou remain silent.\n\n\n\u201cThe captain chewed my ass out for quitting guard duty. I thought he would berate me and give me a warning, but he fucking fired me. I told him how much bullshit that was because I would have frozen to death otherwise. He told me I was lazy and incompetent because \u2018the other guard didn\u2019t complain\u2019 as if your dumbass was smart to stay.\u201d\n\n\nYou try to apologize but Lars is having none of it. He gets angry and says,\n\n\n\u201cI pray to god the demons invade and gut you and the captain like fish. Scrape out your insides with their claws and your other insides with their dick.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJesus man I said I was sorry.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSorry doesn\u2019t feed my family. Get out of my way, I\u2019m gonna\u2019 drink until I die.\u201d\n\n\nYou move aside as Lars storms past you. Well, that was an interesting encounter. You don\u2019t even know what to think, were you wrong to lie to him? How would he have reacted if you told him the truth? You push these thoughts out of your head and focus on getting home. It\u2019s super cold and you don\u2019t want to freeze to death and not have a succubus save you.\n\n\nYou find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don\u2019t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind.\n\n\nYou arrive at your parent\u2019s old home and open the door. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it.\n\n\n\u201cSome things never change,\u201d you whisper to yourself.\n\n\nYou immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers\u2019 uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor?\n\n\nYou\u2019re about to sit down in your bed when a chill runs down your spin. Your door makes a squeaking noise and a cold breeze rushes towards you.\n\n\n\u201cIs somebody there?\u201d you ask.\n\n\nNo reply, although you don\u2019t know what you were expecting. It\u2019s possible the breeze pushed the door open, it's pretty flimsy and it wouldn\u2019t be the craziest thing that\u2019s happened in the last 24 hours. On the other hand, you can\u2019t shake the feeling your being watched. Should you grab your sword and investigate?", "action_results": [{"action": "Close the door and get in bed", "result": "It probably was just the wind, no need to be paranoid. You hop in bed and close your eyes.\n\n\n\u201cCat---\u201d\n\n\nYour head is struck making you collapse.\n\n\n\u201cThey may have taken my job, but they didn\u2019t take my sword.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cLars?\u201d You ask through blurred vision.\n\n\n\u201cWhy yes, it\u2019s me, demon! You really think I believed you survived on pure luck?\"\n\n\nHe looks completely unhinged. You try to say something but just start coughing blood. It comes out in chunks resembling mashed berries.\n\n\n\u201cYou really thought you could get away with it, didn\u2019t you? HAHAHAHA! I know you\u2019ve been possessed by a demon; how else could you survive the frigid cold?\u201d\n\n\nClumps of blood continue flying out of your mouth as you fail to speak. Lars crotches down next to you and strokes your face.\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s ok, calm down. Like I told you before, or at least the non-possessed you, the city could use some heating up.\u201d\n\n\nWhere is this going?\n\n\n\u201cI want to make a deal with you! Kill the Captain and I\u2019ll let you live. Hell, I\u2019ll even give you something in exchange. Perhaps a part of my soul? If there\u2019s anything left in there.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Nod your head", "result": "That\u2019s the last thing you do before passing. Between your shuttered eyes you can make out one last thing.\n\n\nAn even bigger smile on Lars\u2019 face.\n\n\nThe next time you wake up your chained in darkness. You can still reach around a fair bit and waste no time exploring your surroundings by touch. When you get to your face you find it hastily wrapped in gauze and bandages. You shallow and taste dried up blood sticking to your mouth like honey. You really need a drink. With nobody around you start banging your chains against the ground. It makes a loud rattling sound that will surely attract anyone close by.\n\n\nNothing. Wherever you are nobody is here. Although, you assume Lars will be back soon. That is, unless he was killed as raving mad men often are. As you sit here hungry, tired, and thirsty you rack your mind trying to remember anything that can help you. Your head pounds with each thought, it feels like a hangover but a 100 time worse. Getting whack in the head may have some long-lasting effect on your mental capabilities.\n\n\nAfter a few minutes of fruitless concentration, it hits you. The thing that got you into this mess is what will get you out; Catia. While the alcohol has mostly worn off, your injuries have left you in a susceptible state. Assuming she wasn\u2019t lying when she said she would meet you again, she should be able to get you out of this mess. You can\u2019t believe you need a demon to rescue you, but you have no choice.\n\n\n\u201cCatia,\u201d you whisper.\n\n\nA few seconds pass and despair creeps in. Just before you lose all hope a dark cloud appears in the room. It dispels a nauseous fume that ferociously attacks your lungs. You start violently coughing more blood, mostly dry, as you vision blurs. Your eyes shut close and you feel your grip on reality slipping away.\n\n\nYou awaken to find yourself in a metallic cage. This room is much brighter than the one before.\n\n\n\u201cWhen I saw you chained I figured a cage would make you feel right at home.\u201d\n\n\nIt\u2019s Catia and you\u2019re getting a very different vibe from her than last time. Your gut tells you to do what she says as you are powerless.\n\n\n\u201cNow tell me, how come I wasn\u2019t the first one to put you in chains?\u201d she says while licking her lips.\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s not like it was consensual. I was blindsided and nearly died.\u201d\n\n\nShe gives you a playful smile and whispers in to your ear\n\n\n\u201cTell me everything and don\u2019t spare any details.\n\n\nSeeing as you don\u2019t have much of a choice you describe everything that\u2019s occurred since you last saw her. You don\u2019t withhold even the most irrelevant details.\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s nice to know you believe I exist. I know it\u2019s hard to believe someone this beautiful isn\u2019t a figment of your imagination.\u201d\n\n\nHer red eyes pierce into your mind, daring you to think otherwise.\n\n\n\u201cSo, what do you think we should do about Lars?\u201d you ask.\n\n\nShe starts laughing to herself.\n\n\n\u201cWhat?\u201d\n\n\nShe walks towards your cage and reaches inside. She puts her hand on your chin and points your head upwards. She locks eyes with you and grins widely\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re going to kill the captain!\u201d\n\n\nLater\n\n\nIt took a lot less convincing that you thought it would. Something about Catia just makes you want to obey her, though this time around you didn\u2019t have much choice. She didn\u2019t give you a reason other than saying\n\n\n\u201cChaos sows the seeds of discontent.\u201d\n\n\nWhich if you agree with this line of thinking, you are only helping the infernal realm by following Catia. Her influence is so strong you didn\u2019t consider any other option. Or maybe you just really want to fuck her. Either way, time to kill the captain.\n\n\nAfter releasing you from your cage, she offers to heal you with dark magic. You agree, as you can barely move let alone assassinate someone. What you didn\u2019t know is that another demon would be performing the ritual.\n\n\n\u201cWhy is a human stinking up the place?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMind your manners, Jirzan. Someone finally wants you for your magic and you treat them like this?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHeh I guess you got a point. They don\u2019t call me Jirzan the Lunatic for nothing. Alright tell me what you need me to do.\u201d\n\n\nShe whispers into his ear and is too quiet to understand. Though you make out words such as \u201ctransform\u201d and painful.\n\n\nWhat exactly do they plan on doing to you? Perhaps you should try backing out of this whole ritual.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go on with it", "result": "Catia asks you to join hands with Jirzan and her. Once you do, they begin chanting nonsensical words. Their eyes roll into the back of their heads and their bodies go limp. After a few seconds they get up and it\u2019s now you that\u2019s limp. You feel excruciating pain course through your veins. Your skin burns, and it feels like fire ants are crawling in your eyes.\n\n\nYou can\u2019t help but scream as every part of your body feels like hell, literally. Your skin starts to red and your head feels like it\u2019s being ripped apart. They can\u2019t be doing what you think they\u2019re doing.\n\n\n\u201cThe transformation is working!\u201d Jirzan shouts.\n\n\nYou begin spazzing out on the floor. This isn\u2019t what you thought she meant by healing you.\n\n\n\u201cEnjoy your new life under my servitude,\u201d Catia laughs.\n\n\nYour body starts contorting as blood spills out of your eyes. You jolt in and out of consciousness while Catia laughs louder. Her voice sounds dreamlike as the room around you morphs into hell. You black out.\n\n\nWhen you wake up you find Catia and Jirzan shorter than before. In fact, the whole room feels smaller.\n\n\n\u201cThere he is!\u201d shouts Jirzan.\n\n\n\u201cHow does it feel?\u201d asks Catia.\n\n\nYou stare at them in shock.\n\n\n\u201cWhat did you do to me?\u2019\n\n\nCatia approaches you differently than before. She no longer seems to be trying to seduce you. Rather, she carries a wave of supremacy not present before.\n\n\n\u201cYou will obey my commands as long as I live. Now, get on your knees,\u201d she says.\n\n\nYou try to protest, but find your whole body paralyzed. You assume this must be some sort of magic forcing you to obey. This however is not the case as she makes clear.\n\n\n\u201cWHY AREN\u2019T YOU MOVING?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIt seems like my ritual may have had some unintended effects.\u201d\n\n\nYour body goes into an epileptic seizure as they start arguing over the ritual. None of that matter to you as your heart can\u2019t support your new body. The world becomes a blur as you hear one last thing,\n\n\n\u201cGreat, I\u2019ll never return home now that he\u2019s dead.\u201d\n\n\nWhile you aren\u2019t dead yet, you will be soon. Your tale ends here.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Back out", "result": "\u201cHey uh guys, I don\u2019t know about this. I think it would be best if I just heal the natural way.\u201d\n\n\nJirzan turns towards you and hisses.\n\n\n\u201cYou insolent fool! You dare turn the opportunity to become a demon, what else do you have going for you in life?\u201d\n\n\nYou instinctively start backing away as he gets angrier.\n\n\n\u201cIs it my epithet \u2018Lunatic\u2019 that scares you? You humans disgust me. If that scares you I couldn\u2019t imagine what you\u2019d think about the meaning of my first name.\u201d\n\n\nWell his epithet played a role, but dark magic frightens you more. Now you\u2019re curious about his first name and don\u2019t hesitate in asking him,\n\n\n\u201cWhat does Jirzan mean?\u201d\n\n\nHe does a little dance and is excited to share,\n\n\n\u201cEnslaver. My full name means translates to Enslaver the Lunatic. As a shorthand, \u2018Deranged Enslaver\u2019 works as well.\u201d\n\n\nHe\u2019s known as an Enslaver? Kind of ironic seeing as he is doing Catia\u2019s bidding. How did he plan to enslave you with dark magic? Does dark magic break demonic rule or did he have no intent on subjugating you?\n\n\n\u201cWere you planning to enslave me? How can you just do that, doesn\u2019t a deal have to be made?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cA deal? Why do you think I was banished to earth? I don\u2019t do deals and see no reason why I should. All I need is your consent to use dark magic and I can do whatever I want.\u201d\n\n\nLooks like you dodge a bullet. Although, you\u2019re still confused about this whole banishment to earth. You thought demons were mounting a full-scale invasion. You bring up your confusion and that only causes him to laugh at you.\n\n\n\u201cYou think I would be near humans willingly? The only reason I\u2019m here is because dark magic is outlawed in hell. Demons tend to stray away from things they don\u2019t understand\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSame reason I\u2019m here,\u201d adds Catia.\n\n\nIf not here by free-will, what explains the siege of the capital? How would a bunch of misfits pose a threat to the elite empiric army? As you to reason through it, your brain aches with pain. Damn that hit from Lars got you good.\n\n\n\u201cWell if he doesn\u2019t want to go through with the ritual then my work here is done,\u201d says Jirzan.\n\n\n\u201cNot so fast!\u201d says Catia.\n\n\n\u201cEh? Do you want me to kill him or something? I thought you could use the practice.\u201d\n\n\nCatia sighs and places her hand on hip whist saying,\n\n\n\u201cWhat about instead of turning him into a demon we make him a Doom Knight? All you\u2019d have to do is teach him a little dark magic and we should be all set.\u201d\n\n\nYou don\u2019t even know what a Doom Knight is and still don\u2019t trust Jirzan to teach you.\n\n\n\u201cYou think this imbecile could handle learning the dark arts? You have truly gone mad! And to think, they call me the lunatic.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cC\u2019mon Zan, you owe me this. Backing out will only lead to more consequences down the road.\u201d\n\n\nThis seems to shut him up real quick. He starts cursing as it becomes clear to you Catia has something he dearly wants.\n\n\u201cFine I\u2019ll do it, under two conditions. The first, I will need his full consent to do the initiation spell. Without it, there is no way he could become a Doom Knight. The second, you return Coyote back to me once I finish.\u201d\n\n\nCatia nods and agrees to his terms. She now turns to you and asks,\n\n\n\u201cAny questions?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "What\u2019s a Doom Knight?", "result": "You rack your brain and try to formulate some questions. Everything they\u2019ve been saying kind of has blurred together. Though you do want to know what exactly a Doom Knight is.\n\n\n\u201cDoom Knights are slayers of all things good and holy. Think of them as some sort of reverse paladin.\u201d\n\n\nYou always thought paladins were self-righteous assholes. They claim to protect others from evil yet persecute the smallest of sins. Who knows, Doom Knights might be more to your liking.\n\n\nOther questions?", "action_results": [{"action": "Why me?", "result": "\u201cI told you he would ask this!\u201d says Jirzan.\n\n\n\u201cWe might as well tell him the truth, or he might not join,\u201d says Catia.\n\n\n\u201cGo ahead, though you are putting a lot of trust in a meathead.\u201d\n\n\nCatia explains how if they wanted to, demons could conquer earth in minutes.\n\n\n\u201cWhy don\u2019t you then?\u201d you ask.\n\n\nCatia pauses and starts speaking in a sad tone,\n\n\n\u201cIf we did, I could never return to my homeland. In the underworld, different dimensions are at constant war. When darkness fights darkness, brute strength does nothing. You must outsmart your opponent through trickery and manipulation. That\u2019s where you come in.\u201d\n\n\nShe goes on to explain how banished demons are sent to lesser domains, such as earth, to earn redemption. Some demons are content with wreaking havoc, but others long for home. Take Jirzan for example, he couldn\u2019t care less about the underworld. He thrives of chaos and enslaves all weaker than him.\n\n\n\u201cThe only reason he\u2019s helping is because he has no choice,\u201d adds Catia.\n\n\nIn Catia\u2019s case, she needs to others to do her own bidding to prove she does not have to relay on brute strength. Lucky for her, succubi are experts at having others do what they want. By having you kill the captain, she can prove just how capable she is.\n\n\n\u201cMaking Lars believe you are a demon, and constructing a fake deal with him, proves how I can bend reality to my whim,\u201d boasts Catia.\n\n\nRegardless of what you think of her motivations, it seems the only choice you have is to follow her.\n\n\nWhat else do you want to know?", "action_results": [null, {"action": "What if I refuse?", "result": "\u201cYou should ask Lars that question. Refuse to help and I\u2019ll take back mine. Your fate would be out of my hands,\u201d she says.\n\n\nThis is a really sticky situation. You hate when you have choices stripped away from you.\n\n\nWhat else do you want to know?", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Who\u2019s Coyote?", "result": "\u201cTHAT IS OF NO CONCERN TO YOU!\u201d screams Jirzan.\n\n\nCatia bites her lips, as if she wants to say something. A few more seconds past and it is clear none of them want to share this information with you.\n\n\nMoving on\u2026", "action_results": [null, null, null, {"action": "I am done questioning.", "result": "Catia smiles and flicks her tail at you in excitement. Jirzan on the other hand is starting to lose patience.\n\n\n\u201cIf you have no more questions, we should begin immediately. Do you consent to me using dark magic to perform the Doom Knight ritual?\u201d\n\n\nYou hesitate, what is stopping him from going against his word? Catia senses your hesitation and points out,\n\n\n\u201cThere is no need to be scared. Whatever Jirzan could gain from enslaving you is not worth what he would lose from me. Plus, you have no choice anyway. It\u2019s either agree to the ritual or be sent back to Lars.\u201d\n\n\nYou gulp and shake nervously thinking of the possibility.\n\n\n\u201cFine, I consent.\u201d\n\n\nWith that out of the way Jirzan explains the plan. He will perform the doom ritual and you will do nothing. Any attempts at resistance could interfere with the ritual and have untold consequences. Stay still and focus on deep, calm breaths.\n\n\nYou do as you're told and focus on controlled breathing. Jirzan begins to chant nonsensical phrases at a deafening tone. The ground starts shaking and your heart starts beating rapidly.\n\n\n\u201cAlash Tad Al-Ash Tal Ashtu.\u201d\n\n\nThe moment Jirzan finishes speaking everything goes black. You hear nothing, see nothing, and feel nothing.\n\n\n\u201cD\u2014on-----\u2018t resis--t---\u201d you hear a distorted voice say.\n\n\nSuddenly, a blinding light of darkness flashes before you. You didn\u2019t think such a thing existed, but a voice explains,\n\n\n\u201cBehold, pure darkness! Conjured using the 5th edition of Dark Magic for Dummies and performed by yours truly.\u201d\n\n\nAs the flash from darkness fades away you are greeted by a creature from your nightmares. It stands at twice your height, with unorthodox body proportions. Its arms drag on the floor as it walks. It\u2019s grayish in color and appears faceless. It starts speaking again despite not having a mouth,\n\n\n\u201cWhy have you come here mortal? What is it that you seek?\u201d\n\n\nYou explain your situation and how you were sent to become a Doom Knight. It responds with uncertainty,\n\n\n\u201cYou wish to become a Doom Knight? This is the first time a human has come for that purpose. For good reason too, the moral confines of humans make the process a death sentence.\u201d\n\n\nYou react with contention,\n\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t care about moral confines, I have no choice. The demon who sent me here will surely kill me if I fail. Is there nothing you can do?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThere is always something I can do. The only question is, can you live with the consequences?\u201d\n\n\nYou remain silent.\n\n\n\u201cThat isn\u2019t rhetorical by the way, do you believe you are capable of surviving? Despite feeling as if you have no choice, your morality still limits you. Hell, have you even killed someone before?\u201d\n\n\nYou continue your silence as you can\u2019t argue.\n\n\n\u201cLook, I could always use more prophets of doom and it seems like you are set on going through with this. I could simply perform the incantation and hope for the best. However, if you don\u2019t want to take the risk, I\u2019ll transform you into a demon. Not a traditional demon, but one like a less powerful version of me. You\u2019ll lose your humanity, but you will be guaranteed to become a Doom Knight.\u201d\n\n\nYour skin crawls at the idea of looking like him. What choice do you have though, lest you want to risk everything?", "action_results": [{"action": "Lose your humanity", "result": "\u201cTurn me into a demon. If that\u2019s my only path to become a Doom Knight, then so be it.\u201d\n\n\nThe creature seems happy about your response and begins the ritual. A purple hue begins to form around it. The hue expands until it reaches you. Your body goes limp and you start to float in the air. It feels like something is being taken from you.\n\n\nYour fingertips start to tingle. This feeling spreads through the rest of your body. You have no control over your body and remember what Jirzan told you,\n\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t resist.\u201d\n\n\nYou focus on your breathing and ignore everything else. An itching sensation spreads across your face breaking your concentration. The intensity increases as the ritual draws to a close.\n\n\n\u201cHaha, it\u2019s working!\u201d\n\n\nYou gain some control over your body and stare at the creature. Then you stare at yourself, your arms have paled and begin to stretch out. Your back contorts as bones impale your flesh. Layers of skin form over your newly grown bones. As this is all happening your mind begins to slip\u2026\n\n\nYou forgot why you\u2019re here and what you\u2019re doing. You crave destruction and serve a purpose greater than yourself. The transformation is complete.\n\n\n\u201cHoly shit I did it! I mean, you survived! Welcome to being a Doom Knight, I\u2019ve infused your soul with dark magic, so it should come naturally.\u201d\n\n\nYou stare back at this creature with a newfound kinship. This is your brother in destruction and chaos, you serve the same master and the same purpose.\n\n\n\u201cI will embrace this new title and destroy all who get in my way,\u201d you say.\n\n\nThe creature happily agrees and begins the process of sending you back to where you\u2019ve came. He says a few words and you are enveloped by a dark mist. Instantaneous you find yourself in a room with two demons.\n\n\n\u201cWHAT THE FUCK IS THAT?\u201d shouts Jirzan.\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know but it\u2019s abhorrent, and that\u2019s coming from a mistress of hell,\u201d Says Catia.\n\n\n\u201cI am a Doom Knight, I bring despair and misery wherever I go.\u201d\n\n\nThey look at you in shock as if a sudden realization has overcome them. You don\u2019t feel any sense of kinship towards either of them.\n\n\n\u201cWell, it\u2019s safe to assume the ritual worked, I just didn\u2019t expect this,\u201d says Jirzan.\n\n\n\u201cThis was not the desired result and you know that. However, you can consider your debt repaid if you help me send him to Ashton,\u201d says Catia.\n\n\nWhy does that word sound so familiar? You ignore any thoughts and familiarity and focus on your one goal: destruction.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll help you but then I\u2019m done. Let\u2019s go, I\u2019ll begin the teleportation process.\u201d\n\n\nJirzan snaps his fingers and you find yourself transported to a dirt road. You look around and see that this road leads to a city. You crave destruction and find yourself instinctively walking towards it. Your long, slender arms drag through dirt and scattered snow.\n\n\n\u201cNot so fast! All you're supposed to do is kill the captain,\u201d says Catia.\n\n\n\u201cYes, I will kill him,\u201d\n\n\nYou continue marching to the city, Catia takes to the air to catch up with you.\n\n\n\u201cWe can\u2019t have people seeing you or they might alert the guards! Anyways, I want you to meet up with Lars first. We need him to think you\u2019ve been a demon this whole time.\u201d\n\n\nYou continue marching drowning out the sounds of Catia as you focus on razing this city to ash. She starts tugging on your arm trying to stop you. You ignore her as she realizes her efforts are futile.\n\n\n\u201cGreat, just great. How will I ever return home if I can\u2019t get a fucking human to follow my command.\u201d\n\n\nJirzan comforts Catia and says,\n\n\n\u201cThis thing is no longer human. Its beyond our control and we need to move on.\u201d\n\n\nCatia and Jirzan start walking away but stay close enough to watch what you do. You reach the city walls and send a beam of pure darkness into it. It obliterates a ginormous portion of the wall, allowing you to easily walk through. Stepping into the city you feel a rush of d\u00e9j\u00e0 vu. Everything looks familiar but your craving for death and despair is too great to linger on it. People scream as you break into the nearest house.\n\n\nA family is cowered in the corner completely at your mercy. Another man stands with a sword and tells you,\n\n\n\u201cLeave my family alone, monster! You won\u2019t kill them without killing me first.\u201d\n\n\nYou're more than happy to oblige at least half this man\u2019s request. You raise your arms and slam them into him. The cracking of bone fills you with vigor.\n\n\n\u201cNever tell a demon your thoughts and desires. Watch as I take everything dear to you.\u201d\n\n\nThe man pleads through raspy breaths as you approach his family. It's a mother and her two daughters, you waste no time sending a beam of dark energy into the three of them. They die before having a chance to scream. You leave the man alive to suffer a slow, painful death. Your body courses with adrenaline as you find yourself surrounded.\n\n\nIt\u2019s a group of about 15 armed guards armed with swords and shields. Their attempts at appearing composed are laughable. Every one of them fears you and you couldn\u2019t be happier. You decide to play around with them a bit,\n\n\n\u201cDo not fear me humans. I will leave this city and never return.\u201d\n\n\nA few look all too happy to take you up on that, however one-man shouts,\n\n\n\u201cWe will smite all that is unholy! If we make an example out of you other demons will think twice before attacking Ashton!\u201d\n\n\nWhat a brave attempt at defiance, too bad it is also insanely stupid. You conjure a cloud of acid and begin raining it down on them. The sound of burning fills your ears with joy. Some run away and the stupider ones attack. Swords pierce your flesh and you start to leak a yellowish fluid.\n\n\n\u201cONLY I KILL TODAY!\u201d you scream.\n\n\nYou flail your arms around breaking the bones of all you hit. Anyone who hasn\u2019t ran away are lying at your feet. You set their bodies ablaze and grin as they are turned to ash. The city\u2019s first line of protection didn\u2019t pose a threat. Nobody here can stop you as you set the entire city on fire. Many die and those who don\u2019t will forever be scarred by your presence. Word of your act soon begins to spread\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Epilogue #1: Heart of Darkness", "result": "You live to destroy all life you meet. At first, this meant humans and other feeble creatures. You soon moved onto bigger prey when you discovered a demon hideout. The demons were more annoyed than anything. That changed when you began ripping off the heads of their young. They sprung to attack you and managed to inflict some pretty serious damage. When you realized this was a fight you couldn\u2019t win, you escaped to live another day and continue the path of destruction.\n\n\nUnfortunately, demons aren\u2019t the type to forgive and forget. They stormed the cave you made residence in and sought to kill you. You however, saw this coming and learned a mind control spell in preparation. These demons were banished from hell for being weak-willed. Most of them were lesser demons to begin with, barely fit to deal with a human let alone a Doom Knight. Once the spell was cast they all succumbed to your command.\n\n\nYou and your band of misfits traveled the lands with an insatiable appetite for destruction. As you grew more powerful in the dark arts, you passed this blessing onto your followers. Soon they could massacre a city without you being present. The level of death and despair you caused grew exponentially.\n\n\nPresent Day\n\n\nYou awaken and find you have a visitor. It\u2019s a demon much bigger than yourself who seems familiar with your work.\n\n\n\u201cYou have far surpassed all expectations I had when I first noticed you. Tell me, why were banished to earth?\u201d\n\n\nYou don\u2019t remember banishment of any sort. Being a Doom Knight is all you\u2019ve ever known. You explain,\n\n\n\u201cMy past life is a blur and it's best kept that way. All I know is I used to be a feeble-minded fool incapable of warding of the influences of a mere succubus.\u201d\n\n\nThe demon, who tells you his name is Tornaxaan, is surprised. He tells you that whatever the reason for your banishment, you\u2019ve earned the right to return home. You feel no desire to until he mentions,\n\n\n\u201cThis will provide you an excellent chance of honing your skills and learning from the most powerful demons. In only a couple of centuries you would be capable of destroying entire worlds.\u201d\n\n\nYou\u2019re sold and thank Tornaxaan for the opportunity. All he says is,\n\n\n\u201cYou and I are going to have a hell of a time!\u201d\n\n\nIt\u2019s time to enter the heart of darkness.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Keep your humanity", "result": "\u201cI don\u2019t want to become a demon. Make me a Doom Knight but don\u2019t take away the one thing keeping me sane.\u201d\n\n\nThis creature seems disappointed at your response, but carries on nevertheless. A purple hue begins to form around it. The hue expands until it reaches you. Your body goes limp and you start to float in the air. It feels like something is being taken from you.\n\n\nAn intense burning occurs on your fingertips. This burning begins to spread. You have no control and can\u2019t even scream when the intensity becomes unbearable. You pass out.\n\n\nThe creature deems you not worthy of becoming a Doom Knight. This is the end of your tale.", "action_results": []}]}]}, null]}, null, null]}, null, null, null]}, null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Shake your head", "result": "That\u2019s the last thing you do before passing out.\n\n\nAnd the last thing you\u2019ll ever do as Lars makes no attempt at reliving you.\n\n\nEnd...", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Grab your sword and investigate", "result": "Maybe it\u2019s paranoia, but what kind of brain-dead retard wouldn\u2019t rather be safe than sorry? You take out your sword and leave the bed room, checking every corner as you do so. This pays of as you notice a shadowy figure standing outside your bedroom. Is that\u2026Lars?\n\n\n\u201cYour senses are very good, demon. I knew you were possessed, how else could you have heard me?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThe annoying door squeak, for one. Also, it's fucking freezing so I knew someone let in the cold.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMore lies! First you tell me you survived the cold from pure luck, now you tell me your heighten senses are nothing special?\n\n\n\u201cLars, you have no idea what you\u2019re talking about.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cStop pretending, I know your secret. You\u2019ve been possessed by a demon; how else could you survive the frigid cold?\u201d\n\n\nNot wanting to fight a former friend, you decide to tell him the truth.\n\n\n\u201cI haven\u2019t been possessed by a demon, but one did save me. It all started once you left\u2026\u201d\n\n\nLater\n\n\n\u201cSo that\u2019s why you were at the drunk tortoise? I admit, you\u2019ve never been one to drink.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cExactly! I\u2019m glad you understand.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat now? You\u2019re going to come clean to the captain and convince him to give me back my job, right?\n\n\nWhile the captain may give Lars his job back, you would probably be fired. Coming into direct contact with a demon and living to tell the tale is a no go. He\u2019ll probably think you made some sort of deal to avoid being killed. Regardless of what you plan to do, you say,\n\n\n\u201cI will definitely do that tomorrow.\u201d\n\n\nLars nods but still looks a little unhinged. His hand twitches and he gives you a half grin.\n\n\n\u201cOk I\u2019m holding you to it, because if you don\u2019t, you\u2019re gonna wish you froze to death last night.\u201d\n\n\nYou gulp as you have no doubt Lars could kill you if he wanted. He leaves and you hear the door squeak once again. The cold breeze has expanded throughout your house and you could use some heating up. After securing to house to make sure Lars isn\u2019t still lurking, you fall into bed.\n\n\nYou\u2019re super tired and debate whether you still want to see Catia. It\u2019s been a long day and if you have any intention of talking to your captain tomorrow, you should go to sleep.", "action_results": [{"action": "Summon Catia", "result": "\u201cCatia.\u201d\n\n\nA dark cloud appears in your room, dispelling a toxic fume. You start violently coughing as you vision blurs indiscriminately. Your eyes shut close and you feel you grip on reality slipping away from you. \n\n\n\u201cAh shit,\u201d you whisper before passing out. \n\n\nYour eyes jitter open and you\u2019re greeted by Catia stroking your face. Her palm flushes the coolness off your face. Beads of sweat drip furiously down your neck as she continues caressing you. \n\n\n\u201cCouldn\u2019t wait a single day before seeing me again? Especially after you promised your friend you would visit \u2018the captain\u2019? How cute.\u201d \n\n\nYou don\u2019t have time to question how she knows that before she crawls on top of your bed and snuggles against you. Her aura is all consuming and you feel your free will being drained away. Yet, the whole process is extremely pleasing to you. She moves her mouth to your ear and whispers,\n\n\n\u201cDo you want to see everything I have to offer?\u201d\n\n\nYou bite your tongue to avoid instinctively shouting yes. This may be your last chance to not go through with this. At the very least, it would give you chance to ask her a few more questions. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Go to sleep and visit the captain first thing in the morning", "result": "You close your eyes and drift off to sleep. You dream of a bright forest with playing children. Everything is nice and everyone is happy. Then one day that changes when a portal to another dimension appears in the middle of the forest. Out of the portal comes abominations to mankind. A collection of arms and legs attached on to a giant ball of flesh. This ball rolls around destroying the forest, killing everyone and growing stronger as it does so. The ball then comes rolling at you. You don\u2019t have time to scream before\u2026\n\n\nYou jolt awake and find yourself covered in sweat. As much as you hate nightmares, they do a great job at waking you up. You look outside your window and notice the sun rising. This rising ball of fire reminds you of the ball from your dream. You throw on a clean pair of clothes, grab your sword just in case, and make your way to the captain\u2019s quarters.\n\n\nIt\u2019s an uneventful journey and you arrive within a few minutes. Not wanting to wake the captain, you pull out pen and paper. It goes as follows,\n\n\nDear Captain Dario,\n\n\nI am writing to you regarding the firing of guard Lars. I was on the same shift as him before he left. The windchill was approaching deadly levels and he decided to head inside as a last resort. I stayed out only because I feared the repercussions. As I sat out there, my muscles began to freeze until I could no longer move. I passed out minutes later.\n\n\nI would have surely died had a traveling merchant not stopped by. They started a fire and warmed me up. I would have died otherwise and thank the heavens a demon didn\u2019t wander by. Due to my own experiences, I recommend you rehire Lars and if anything, fire me for putting my life on the line when it wasn\u2019t needed.\n\n\nYou are in such a rush that you slide the letter under the door before signing it. You decided against telling the truth as Captain Dario is a hard ass for rules. Not only would you have been fired, but also forced to undergo a purging to ward off any demonic influences.\n\n\nWith that out of the way, you decide to head to a local armory. Your city issued sword is no match for a demon, as Catia pointed out. Not knowing if your parents will ever return, you see no problem with using their savings for your protection. You take a stroll to the armory and find it to be quite crowded for this early in the morning.\n\n\n\u201cI need something that can scare away demons,\u201d a farmer says\n\n\n\u201cScare away? Why not something that can kill?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cLook son, I\u2019ve never been one to resort to violence. I just need something to protect you and the Misses.\u201d\n\n\nYou zone out their conversation and take a look around. They have swords, maces, axes, and even a trident. However, what catches your eyes is a bow painted red and black. It\u2019s the only one in the store and seems rare.\n\n\n\u201cExcuse me sir, what\u2019s the price on this bow?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat would be 500 gold sir,\u201d replies a dwarf with steel encrusted teeth.\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s so special about it?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWe brought it from a dark elf mercenary. They have great craftsmanship, especially when it comes to bows.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHow is it different than all the other bows for sale?\u201d\n\n\nHe pauses and turns red,\n\n\n\u201cI hate to admit it, but I\u2019ve always struggled making bows. That red and black one has much finer strings and sturdier wood, giving it a greater firing range.\u201d\n\n\nYou thank the dwarf for the information and continue looking around. Nothing else catches your eye, so you decide to buy the bow.\n\n\n\u201cPleasure doing business with ya.\u201d\n\n\nYou leave with your new bow and 500 gold poorer. You hope you still have your guard job as your parent\u2019s money won\u2019t last much longer. You go to the guard barracks and decide to get a meal there. Even if you\u2019ve been fired, you doubt any of the servers will know. You arrive to a mess hall and find it more empty than usual. Two men eat soup together and another man sits alone.\n\n\nYou grab a cup of soup and take another look around. You recognize the two men sitting together as Herbert and Andy. Herbert is an older man with a gray beard who has always been kind to you. Andy is around your age, mid twenties, and is already going bald. Both are good chaps and would be happy if you sat with them.\n\n\nThe man sitting alone is someone you don\u2019t recognize. He is a very thin fellow with patchy hair and missing teeth. You could try to find out who he is, or sit with Herbert and Andy.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sit with the skinny man", "result": "You walk over to the skinny man and and ask,\n\n\n\u201cMind if I sit next to you?\u201d\n\n\nHe is startled by your presence and jumps up a bit. He mutters something incomprehensible before saying,\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t mind.\u201d\n\n\nThe hot soup burns your tongue as you eat a spoonful.\n\n\n\u201cSo what\u2019s this town\u2019s name again?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAshton, why do you ask?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou might not believe me, but I came face to face with a demon. When I finally got away, I ran to the city walls.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cTrust me, I believe you. I encountered a demon while on guard duty.\u201d\n\n\nYou tell him about how you passed out and met a succubus.\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s wild.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSure is, now tell me about the demon you met.\u201d\n\n\nHe grits what few teeth he has and begins,\n\n\n\u201cHe wasn\u2019t pleasant at all like the one you met. I was going for a walk in the forest. I know, it\u2019s not the smartest thing to do in times like these, but it's one of my few sanctities.\u201d\n\n\nHis voice gets lower as he describes,\n\n\n\u201cI knew something was off the moment I entered. An unholy energy made me feel weak and tired. I started hearing voices and couldn\u2019t tell what was real. It was like I was in a trance.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDid you actually see a demon?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo, but he made his presence known. He tired to coerce me into letting him take over my mind. I almost did it too, but something broke me out of my trance.\u201d\n\n\nHe pauses for dramatic effect,\n\n\n\u201cA bird fucking shat on my head!\u201d\n\n\nYou stare at his head and notice white flakes clumped in his hair.\n\n\n\u201cOnce I realized what I was about to do I ran like hell. I wasn\u2019t thinking straight and went the opposite direction which I came in. I\u2019m lucky I ended up here.\u201d\n\n\nHis experience is vastly different to your own. You suppose he encountered a demonic sprit, rather than a full fledge demon.\n\n\n\u201cPerhaps this all was for the best. My city was running low on food, hence my frail appearance.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAre you planning on staying in Ashton?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know. I would need to get a job and a place to sleep at night. Would you be able to help me out in any way?\u201d\n\n\nWhen your about to answer you hear someone call your name. It\u2019s Captain Dario and he wants to speak with you immediately. You get up and tell the thin man,\n\n\n\u201cIt was nice talking to you.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI hope you can come back when you're done. My name\u2019s Eric by the way.\u201d\n\n\nYou wave goodbye and follow the captain into his private quarters.\n\n\nA rush of anxiety hits you as your still not sure if the captain bought your story. What if Lars told him the truth?\n\n\n\u201cPlease, take a seat.\u201d\n\n\nYou sit and find yourself starring at the gray haired captain. He stares back, unblinking as you both wait to see who makes the first move.\n\n\n\u201cFirst things first, you\u2019re not fired.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s a relief.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sure it is, but what I say next may not be. I have no intention of re-hiring Lars.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWait what? Like I said in my letter, he did the smart thing and could have died had he stayed.\u201d\n\n\nThe captain sighs and says,\n\n\n\u201cWhile that may be true, I\u2019ve been wanting to fire him for awhile. He\u2019s lazy and incompetent. The only reason he still had a job was because guards are in high demand right now. The problem now is finding a replacement.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat happens if you don\u2019t?\u201d\n\n\nDario frowns and bitterly says,\n\n\n\u201cThen I might have to rehire Lars.\u201d\n\n\nYou could mention your new acquaintance, Eric, and vouch for him to replace Lars. On the other hand, who knows how Lars will react if he finds out you played a role in replacing him. There may be no reasoning with him.", "action_results": [{"action": "Mention Eric", "result": "\u201cI may know of a potential replacement.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo need not to not speak in absolutes. Spit it out sonny.\u201d\n\n\nYou stumbled a bit, not because your scared to tell him, but because his syntax confuses you.\n\n\n\u201cErm\u2026 I\u2014I\u2026 his name is Eric.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWho is this so-called Eric?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHe was the man I was sitting with. He\u2019s looking for work and seems like a good fellow.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s all I need, tell him he\u2019s hired. Oh, and he starts immediately. 11pm tonight tell him to go to the city walls.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cTonight? Isn\u2019t this all happening a bit too fast?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNonsense, plus he won\u2019t be doing it alone. He\u2019ll have you to teach him.\u201d\n\n\nYou tense up as Dario continues,\n\n\n\u201cLighten up, kid! I took the initiative and brought fur coats for each of you.\u201d\n\n\nHell of an initiative considering you almost died two nights ago.\n\n\n\u201cThanks for taking the initiative\u2026\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re most certainly welcomed! Now that that\u2019s settled, get the hell out of here!\u201d\n\n\nYou stand up and leave his office. Eric does a one tooth smile as you walk over to him.\n\n\n\u201cWhat was that all about?\u201d\n\n\nYou have a sly smile on your face when you say,\n\n\n\u201cIt was about you, congrats you\u2019re now a guard!\u201d\n\n\nHe gives you a look of confusion and asks,\n\n\n\u201cWhat the hell are you talking about?\u201d\n\n\nYou explain how guards are in high demand and that you mentioned him to the captain. \n\n\n\u201cAnd I almost forgot, you start tonight.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWait what?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t worry, I\u2019m on guard duty tonight as well. Plus, I\u2019ve only ever seen demons one time...\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat one time was last night!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cActually two nights ago, but never mind that. Anyways the captain brought fur coats for the both of us so no freezing to death tonight. C\u2019mon, let\u2019s get rolling.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAlright but don\u2019t act like this is permanent, if I don\u2019t like it, I\u2019m quitting after tonight.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cTrust me, it\u2019ll be much easier now that we won\u2019t be freezing. I have a feeling you\u2019ll stick around.\u201d\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "1 month later", "result": "\u201cYou really don\u2019t have to do this,\u201d \n\n\n\u201cBlasphemy, I\u2019ve seen what you can do with my bow, you deserve one of your own.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah but you don\u2019t have to help me pay for it. Anyways, I\u2019m not that good with a bow,\u201d Eric says humbly. \n\n\n\u201cWell you\u2019ll have plenty have chance to practice, let\u2019s get going.\u201d\n\n\nThe past month in Ashton has been quiet, but demon sighting have increased in the nearby forest. Eric and you need to be as prepared as possible for when they strike. In addition, you have grown to like Eric a lot and are happy to help pay for his bow. You\u2019re hoping they have one that\u2019s as good quality as the one you brought last month. You arrive at the armory and note it being a lot less busy than it was last time. In fact, you\u2019re the only two here aside from the dwarf who runs the place.\n\n\n\u201cWhere is everyone?\u201d you ask. \n\n\n\u201cI about ran out of equipment. With how trade has been recently, its impossible to get the material needed to craft weapons.\u201d\n\n\nYou offer your condolences and tell him why you\u2019ve came here,\n\n\n\u201cYou wouldn\u2019t happen to any bows for sale?\u201d\n\n\nHe half smiles, then says,\n\n\n\u201cI might have a few, but none of my own creation. Those sold out the fastest due to their cheap price.\u201d\n\n\nEric gives you a concerned look knowing the cheapest bows are all sold out.\n\n\n\u201cWell let\u2019s see them,\u201d you say.\n\n\nHe lays out a few bows on a table and describes each of them.\n\n\n\u201cThis one right here was specifically crafted to kill orcs, but it should be fine for just about anything.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat about demons?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI see no reason why not!\u201d \n\n\nHe shows you a few other bows, mostly made be other local blacksmiths, but one other thing catches your eye.\n\n\n\u201cHey what\u2019s that?\u201d you say pointing to a crossbow on display.\n\n\n\u201cShe\u2019s a beauty, isn\u2019t she? Crafted by the capital\u2019s smartest black smiths, though its a few years outdated. It doesn't have the most range, but it sure packs a punch. I reckon one shot from it could bring any creature to near death. That is, if you\u2019re a good enough shot to hit your target dead on.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHow much?\u201d asks Eric.\n\n\n\u201c800 gold.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAre you crazy? That\u2019s more than I made last month working as a guard.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHigher prices, higher quality.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat about the orc killer bow?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThose are pretty common, 300 gold would be a fair price.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWe should probably just get that one, don\u2019t want my friend going bankrupt.\u201d\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Insist you buy the better bow", "result": "You help Eric buy the better bow and he is apprehensive.\n\n\n\u201cThanks man, but now we\u2019re both broke.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBetter broke than dead.\u201d\n\n\nYou leave with the bow and get ready for guard duty. \n\n\n5 hours later\n\n\nIt\u2019s been a quiet night so far and warmer than usual. Eric stands up and draws his crossbow towards the forest.\n\n\n\u201cDo you see something?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah I do. It\u2019s like a bat but much larger.\u201d\n\n\nYou look where he\u2019s pointing and something comes into view. It\u2019s a succubus, but unlike the one you met before, it no longer resembles a human. It has blood stained skin and humongous bat wings. \n\n\n\u201cHoly shit.\u201d\n\n\nDon\u2019t just stand there, fire!\u201d you say.\n\n\nYou and Eric unleash a flurry of arrows at the creature. It manages to dodge almost everything, but Eric hits it dead on. \n\n\n\u201cGot it!\u201d\n\n\nIt falls from the sky and lands awkwardly. You waste no time laying it to waste with arrow after arrow. You don\u2019t stop until you\u2019re sure its dead, and it soon looks like a half-bat, half-porcupine monstrosity. You did it, you killed a demon. \n\n\n\u201cThat was an amazing shot, I\u2019m not sure we would have brought it done had we brought the cheaper bow.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah, thanks again,\u201d Eric says with tears streaming down his face.\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s wrong?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI just can\u2019t believe we survived. You hear tales about demons destroying entire cities and yet we were able to bring down one with only two of us.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWe make a good team.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWe sure do, we sure do.\u201d\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Epilogue #2: Succubus Slayers", "result": "You two are lauded as heroes and given a big pay raise. \n\n\n\u201cAnd to think, I almost kept that loser Lars!\u201d\n\n\nSpeaking of Lars, want to know what happened to him? He and his whole family starved to death. Better him than the whole city am I right? On the bright side, you and Eric continue killing demons as sightings become more common. After word of your legacy spreads, a local lord hires you as demon hunters. You decide to take up the name Succubus Slayers as a reference to your first kill. This is a rather ironic turn of events considering you went from being saved by a succubus, to killing them for a living.\n\n\nWho knows, maybe you\u2019ll have to kill Catia one day?", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Settle for the cheaper bow", "result": "You help Eric buy the cheaper bow and he is glad.\n\n\n\u201cThanks man, no need to go broke.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBetter dead than broke,\u201d you say sarcastically\n\n\nYou leave with the bow and get ready for guard duty. \n\n\n5 hours later\n\n\nIt\u2019s been a quiet night so far and warmer than usual. Eric stands up and draws his bow towards the forest.\n\n\n\u201cDo you see something?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah I do. It\u2019s like a bat but much larger.\u201d\n\n\nYou look where he\u2019s pointing and something comes into view. It\u2019s a succubus, but unlike the one you met before, it no longer resembles a human. It has blood stained skin and humongous bat wings. \n\n\n\u201cHoly shit.\u201d\n\n\nDon\u2019t just stand there, fire!\u201d you say.\n\n\nYou and Eric unleash a flurry of arrows at the creature. It manages to dodge almost everything, but Eric hits it dead on. \n\n\n\u201cGot it!\u201d\n\n\nExcept it does nothing but annoy it. The creature screams and flies at blazing speed towards both of you. You manage to hit it a few times, but it does nothing. You are torn to pieces as Eric watches. He awaits the same fate. \n\n\n ", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Defend Lars", "result": "\u201cLars might not be the best guard, but he\u2019s the best option available. On the bright side, we at least seem to get along.\u201d\n\n\nDario\u2019s face turns dark red as he spits out,\n\n\n\u201cIf he\u2019s the best option, then this city might burn in flames tonight. None of us are safe with him on duty.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSo I take it that you won\u2019t be rehiring him?\u201d\n\n\nThe captains sighs deeply out of frustration.\n\n\n\u201cLook, tell him he can guard tonight. However, if he messes up one more time, he\u2019s out for good.\u201d\n\n\nYou do a small fist bump out of celebration.\n\n\n\u201cNot so fast sonny, you\u2019re going with him.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cReally? Even after what happened the last time we were on guard duty together?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou said it yourself, you two get along. Now, get out and get to work.\u201d\n\n\nYou leave in a pissed off mood, however the captain adds one thing before you slam his door shut.\n\n\n\u201cI brought fur coats for the both of you. They\u2019re in your lockers and it\u2019s best if you wear them tonight.\u201d\n\n\nYou leave in a slightly less pissed off mood and slam the door. Eric does a one tooth smile as you walk over to him.\n\n\n\u201cWhat was that all about?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNothing too important. I have to go now, it was nice meeting you.\u201d\n\n\nNice meeting you too...\u201d\n\n\nYou leave and head over to Lars house. It\u2019s best to tell him the good news as soon as you can. You get there shortly and he answers the door right away.\n\n\n\u201cSo did you do it? Did you tell the captain what really happened.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI convinced the captain to give you your job back, that\u2019s all that matters.\u201d\n\n\nLars looks like he wants to argue, but holds back.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m just happy my family won\u2019t starve to death. Oh, and that I won\u2019t have to kill you,\u201d he says with a wink.\n\n\n\u201cYeah it\u2019s great news, now follow me. The captain brought fur coats for both of us.\u201d\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "A month later", "result": "Lars is an incompetent fucktard who can\u2019t even hold a bow. You\u2019re very lucky the last month has been quiet for you, however demon sighting are getting more common. Sooner than later you\u2019re going to encounter one. You put on your fur coat and walk to the city walls.\n\n\n5 hours later\n\n\nIt\u2019s been a quiet night so far and warmer than usual. Lars stands up and points his sword towards the forest.\n\n\n\u201cDo you see something?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMaybe, unless the booze is fucking with my vision. It looks like a bat but much larger, and...sexier.\u201d\n\n\nYou look where he\u2019s pointing and something comes into view. It\u2019s a succubus, but unlike the one you met before, it no longer resembles a human. It has blood stained skin and humongous bat wings. \n\n\n\u201cHoly shit.\u201d\n\n\nDon\u2019t just stand there, defend yourself.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNah fuck that,\u201d Lars says while running away.\n\n\nYou unleash a flurry of arrows at the creature as Lars makes his escape. It manages to dodge almost everything, but one arrow grazes its foot.\n\n\n\u201cHOW DARE YOU!\u201d\n\n\nThe succubus releases a bolt of dark energy at you. It hits you in the chest and you collapse. As you sit there about to pass out, a thought comes to you. One month ago a succubus saved your life, now another ends it.\n\n\n\u201cTell Catia I said hi...\u201d", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Sit with Herbert and Andy", "result": "You head over to sit with Herbert and Andy and listen in on their conversation.\n\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t believe she would do such a thing,\u201d says Herbert.\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know how she could just lie after all I did for her. She\u2019s been pissed at me ever since we last had sex. I can\u2019t even talk to her anymore.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI know how you feel, women sure are a pain in the ass. Hey new guy, did you hear what Andy\u2019s girlfriends been doing?\u201d\n\n\nYou stop blowing on your soup and glance at Herbert.\n\n\n\u201cI haven\u2019t, what happened?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSo this fucking bitch named, what was her name again Andy?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJulia.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah so this bitch named Julia has been spreading lies about him ever since they broke up. She told the captain that he raped her!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI guess she wants to get me fired. Rather get revenge against me for something I didn\u2019t do then have the city be safe.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJulia...what\u2019s her last name?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhy does it matter? She\u2019s a fucking liar and that\u2019s that,\u201d says Andy.\n\n\n\u201cSorry I thought I might know her...I had a childhood friend named Julia.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWell I hope you don\u2019t still consider her a friend after what she did to Andy. That skank deserves to live a life alone.\u201d\n\n\nYou sit in silence as you take this all in. If this is the Julia you think it is, there\u2019s got to be a reason she said what she said. You never knew her as the type of person to lie, even as a child. When you\u2019re about to prod further, you hear someone call your name. It\u2019s Captain Dario and he wants to speak with you immediately. You wave goodbye and follow the captain into his private quarters.\n\n\nA rush of anxiety hits you as your still not sure if the captain bought your story. What if Lars told him the truth?\n\n\n\u201cPlease, take a seat.\u201d\n\n\nYou sit and find yourself starring at the gray haired captain. He stares back, unblinking as you both wait to see who makes the first move.\n\n\n\u201cFirst things first, you\u2019re not fired.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s a relief.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sure it is, but what I say next may not be. I have no intention of re-hiring Lars.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWait what? Like I said in my letter, he did the smart thing and could have died had he stayed.\u201d\n\n\nThe captain sighs and says,\n\n\n\u201cWhile that may be true, I\u2019ve been wanting to fire him for awhile. He\u2019s lazy and incompetent. The only reason he still had a job was because guards are in high demand right now. The problem now is finding a replacement.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat happens if you don\u2019t?\u201d\n\n\nDario frowns and bitterly says,\n\n\n\u201cThen I might have to rehire Lars.\u201d\n\n\nYou could talk about Herbert and Andy, they might be able to take over Lars\u2019 previous guard duties. On the other hand, who knows how Lars will react if he finds out you played a role in replacing him. There may be no reasoning with him.\n\n\n \n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Suggest Herbert or Andy as a replacement", "result": "\u201cCould Herbert or Andy replace Lars?\u2019\n\n\nCaptain Dario pounds his fist on the table and says,\n\n\n\u201cHerbert has been prone to fall asleep and has poor eyesight. Andy...I don\u2019t even know what to say. I\u2019m 95% sure he\u2019s a rapist piece of shit, but he\u2019s a damn good guard.\u201d\n\n\nYou\u2019re taken aback as Dario confirms your suspicions.\n\n\n\u201cFuck it, a rapist is still better than Lars. Tell Andy to meet you out at the city walls at 11pm.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMe? I\u2019m back on guard duty already?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou suggested Andy so who better to go with him? Also, I have a gift for you.\u201d\n\n\nYou wait in anticipation as Dario says proudly, \n\n\nI took the initiative and brought fur coats for each of you.\u201d\n\n\nHell of an initiative considering you almost died two nights ago.\n\n\n\u201cThanks for taking the initiative\u2026\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re most certainly welcomed! Now that that\u2019s settled, get the hell out of here!\u201d\n\n\nYou leave and walk up to Andy to let him know the \u2018good news\u2019.\n\n\n\u201cAt least I\u2019m finally back on guard duty. I was starting to think Dario might have believe that bitch Julia.\u201d\n\n\nYou and Andy head off to guard duty, grabbing your new coats on the way out.", "action_results": [{"action": "One month later", "result": "The more you get to know Andy, the more confident you are that he raped Julia. Still, he\u2019s at least a good guard compared to the likes of Lars. You put on your fur coat and head to meet him at the city walls.\n\n\n5 hours later\n\n\nIt\u2019s been a quiet night so far and warmer than usual. Andy stands up and points his sword towards the forest.\n\n\n\u201cDo you see something?\u201d\n\n\nHe doesn't answer, instead he runs towards the forest with his sword out. You look where he\u2019s running and something comes into view. It\u2019s a succubus, but unlike the one you met before, it no longer resembles a human. It has blood stained skin and humongous bat wings. \n\n\n\u201cDie beast!\u201d shouts Andy.\n\n\nYou unleash a flurry of arrows at the creature as Andy is tossed to the ground. It manages to dodge almost everything, but one arrow grazes its foot.\n\n\n\u201cHOW DARE YOU!\u201d\n\n\nThe succubus releases a bolt of dark energy at you. It hits you in the chest and you collapse. As you sit there about to pass out, a thought comes to you. One month ago a succubus saved your life, now another ends it.\n\n\n\u201cTell Catia I said hello...\u201d", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "\u201cI have no preference.\u201d", "result": "\u201cNo preference? What the hell is that supposed to mean?\u201d says Connor.\n\n\n\u201cHe must think he\u2019s not having any children. I guess he\u2019s into dudes.\u201d Replies Tom.\n\n\n\u201cYeah I think you\u2019re right. I swear I saw him eyeing Greg.\u201d\n\n\nYou feel the bile rising in the back of your throat. They think you\u2019re attracted to that disgusting little worm? People usually don\u2019t get under you skin so much but this time it\u2019s different. You\u2019re about to fuck a hot demon bitch and the idea of being attracted to Greg is NOT what you need right now.\n\n\n\u201cDo you really want to know why I don\u2019t give a fuck about your pointless hypothetical?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWell, yeah.\u201d\n\n\nYou take a deep breath and begin to describe your recent encounter with a succubus.\n\n\n\u201cWell it all started when I fell asleep during guard duty\u201d.\n\n\nOne convoluted story later.\n\n\n \u201cAnd that\u2019s why I came to this tavern,\u201d you say with a cheeky grin.\n\n\nYour story gets mixed reactions.\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re not actually going through with this are you?\u201d asks Tom.\n\n\n\u201cOk so you\u2019re attracted to some demon bitch. I still saw you eyeing Greg for at least the past hour.\u201d\n\n\nAnd strangest of all,\n\n\n\u201cWait aren\u2019t succubi immortal? And they don\u2019t have dicks! Well, at least I assume they don\u2019t\u201d.\n\n\nYou don\u2019t engage with any of them and feel compelled to go home. Although, Tom\u2019s words are giving you second thoughts. Should you wait a few days before even thinking about seeing the succubus?", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay and think it over", "result": "The trio starts arguing but you quickly interrupt them.\n\n\n\u201cHey wait! Why shouldn\u2019t I go through with this?\u201d\n\n\nEveryone turns towards you as if confused to why you\u2019re still here. Tom let\u2019s out a long sigh and asks the question that has been on everyone\u2019s mind.\n\n\n\u201cAre you sure any of that was even real?\u201d\n\n\nYou scrunch your eyebrows and consider the possibility. No, it can\u2019t be fake. The rush of it all was too great for it to be a hallucination. It was either real or nothing is real.\n\n\n\u201cYeah your dumbass was probably just hallucinating from the cold,\u201d Connor jeers.\n\n\nThat can\u2019t be it. You know it was real, although they couldn\u2019t possibly understand. They weren\u2019t there.\n\n\n\u201cIf I had to guess, I\u2019d say a good Samaritan helped you when they saw you passed out. You might have mistaken their torch for that of a demon,\u201d Says Tom.\n\n\n\u201cYeah and they probably told you to go to the tavern to warmup. That\u2019s what these two did when they first found me,\u201d says Greg.\n\n\nFor the love of god! Now even Greg is gaslighting you. Enough of this nonsense. You can either leave right now or waste your night away here.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave RIGHT NOW", "result": "The trio begins arguing again. Something about how demon immortality is different than regular immortality. You don\u2019t time to dwell on it and make your way home. You find yourself grinning the whole walk back. This isn\u2019t just a happy drunk feeling. You feel like this is your purpose. It\u2019s time to see Catia.\n\n\nYou find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don\u2019t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. \n\n\nYou arrive at your parent\u2019s old home and twist the doorknob. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. \n\n\n\u201cSome things never change,\u201d you whisper to yourself.\n\n\nYou immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers\u2019 uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? \n\n\n\u201cCatia.\u201d\n\n\nA dark cloud appears in your room, dispelling a toxic fume. You start violently coughing as you vision blurs indiscriminately. Your eyes shut close and you feel you grip on reality slipping away from you.\n\n\n\u201cAh shit,\u201d you whisper before passing out.\n\n\nYour eyes jitter open and you\u2019re greeted by Catia stroking your face. Her palm flushes the coolness off your face. Beads of sweat drip furiously down your neck as she continues caressing you.\n\n\n\u201cCouldn\u2019t wait a single day before seeing me again? How cute.\u201d\n\n\nShe crawls onto your bed and moves closer to you. Her aura is all consuming and you feel your free will being drained away. Yet, the whole process is extremely pleasing to you. She moves her mouth to your ear and whispers,\n\n\n\u201cDo you want to see everything I have to offer?\u201d\n\n\nYou bite your tongue to avoid instinctively shouting yes. This may be your last chance to not go through with this. At the very least, it would give you chance to ask her a few more questions. ", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Waste the night away", "result": "\u201cFuck all of you, let\u2019s talk about something else. Bartender! Get me another drink,\u201d you say.\n\n\nA couple hours later.\n\n\n\u201cAll I\u2019m saying is it\u2019s a bit hypocritical to complain about demons capturing human when we capture orc children on the regular.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat do you mean we? Last time I checked you\u2019re the only one in the army,\u201d says Tom.\n\n\n\u201cYeah plus it\u2019s different. Orcs are uncivilized barbarians who kill all those they meet. When\u2019s the last time a human killed a demon unprovoked?\u201d asks Connor.\n\n\n\u201cDid you forget how this whole demon war started? We tried to wipe them off the face of the earth and they retaliated. Jeez Connor, you say orcs are barbarians, but I\u2019ve met orcs smarter than you,\u201d Greg says.\n\n\nConnor slams his fist on the table making everyone jump a little bit. Although all he says is,\n\n\n\u201cYeah, I\u2019m sure you have.\u201d\n\n\nConnor has been a lot less hostile to Greg since you came here. It\u2019s probably because Greg finally has someone who agrees with him on some issues. Oh, and the fact you could kick Connor\u2019s ass without breaking a sweat.\n\n\nThe three of you continue discussing the demon war and the implications it as on the empire. Recent news of the capital being overrun has set the whole empire into a panic. You begin discussing the possibility of fleeing the city before its too late.\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t have much confidence in Ashton keeping us safe, but it\u2019s more protection than outside the city walls,\u201d you state.\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t want to wait here to die,\u201d Connor says while slurring his words.\n\n\n\u201cYou must know better than anyone being a soldier and all. Do you think the city guards could even kill a single demon? I know it\u2019s just rumors, but word says our army is ill-equip to fight in the winter, let alone against demons.\u201d\n\n\nHow the hell does a guy like Tom know that? You stare at him trying to gain insight into his mind, but all he does in shrug. Damn, might as well give him your honest opinion.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019ve never seen a demon. Well, other than that succubus and she wasn\u2019t fighting me.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSo, is that a yes or no you bitch?\u201d slurs Connor.\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know.\u201d\n\n\nThere is an awkward silence as you all realize how up in the air the future of this city is. The capital was supposed to send reinforcements to any city that sighted demons. Though with it being under siege that possibility lessens by the minute.\n\n\n\u201cHas anyone even seen a demon? I mean\u2014\u201d Connor says before downing another drink.\n\n\n\u201cHas your dumbass forgot already? This man right here saw a succubus!\u201d Greg says.\n\n\nFinally, someone believes you. Perhaps he agreed with you from the beginning and was too scared to admit it?\n\n\n\u201cLike I said before, it was probably just a hallucination. Plus, why would succubi be needed to conquer the city?\u201d Tom says.\n\n\nJust as you're about to answer that the question a man walks in the tavern. You turn to see who it is and wish you hadn\u2019t.\n\n\nIt\u2019s Lars.\n\n\nIt\u2019s inevitable he notices you and when he does, he wastes no time telling you why he\u2019s here. He got caught abandoning his guard duty last night and has been let go. When he tried to argue how unfair that was because he lacked equipment to handle the conditions all he was told was.\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s your own damn fault! The other guard did it without complaint.\u201d\n\n\nHe came here to drink until he passed out. Without the money from his guard job he has no way to support his family. He appears a bit more unhinged than usual because of that.\n\n\n\u201cI fucking hope the demons break down the city walls and storm the captain\u2019s quarters. I don\u2019t care what happens next. All I want is for him suffer a slow and painful death. That\u2019s what he sent me to last night and blamed me for saving myself.\u201d\n\n\nYou sit in silence not knowing what to say. He continues,\n\n\n\u201cSpeaking of which how the hell did you survive last night? When I left it looked like you were about to pass out.\u201d\n\n\nWell he\u2019s got that right. You briefly consider telling him about your encounter with Catia but the rabid look in his eyes tells you that\u2019s not a good idea.\n\n\n\u201cJust lucky I guess.\u201d\n\n\nHe doesn\u2019t second guess you and continues his rambling. You pay little attention to his words and when you do it\u2019s clear he\u2019s gone off the rails.\n\n\n\u201cThen they\u2019ll rape his family and have him watch. It\u2019s what he fucking deserves, and he deserves what he\u2019s going to get.\u201d\n\n\nAs Lars drones on and on you realize how late it\u2019s getting. You better go home and get the hell away from this guy. You tell him you must go, and he just continues on talking to himself. It\u2019s like he doesn\u2019t know you\u2019re here.\n\n\nThat\u2019s probably for the best. As you leave you give him one last look, and he looks back at you with a huge smile and twitchy eyes. That\u2019s creepy. You make your way out of the tavern and are hit by the freezing winter breeze. You\u2019re going to have to get home fast lest you pass out again. Best to take the alleys as not only is it faster, but it also provides protection from the wind.\n\n\nYou don\u2019t even get a few steps before you tumble to the ground, but not because of the cold. You are whacked in the back of the head with a glass. You fall face first, mouth agape, breaking teeth instantly. Blood seeps out of your head as you press your hand on the back of your skull. It\u2019s more caved in than usual.\n\n\nYou start hearing laughter. This isn\u2019t your first time hearing it either.\n\n\n\u201cAs if I believed you survived by pure luck. You\u2019re lucky I don\u2019t just kill you now. Now tell me the truth, demon!\u201d\n\n\nIt\u2019s Lars and he looks completely unhinged. You try to say something but just start coughing blood. It comes out in chunks resembling mushy cherries.\n\n\n\u201cYou really thought you could get away with it, didn\u2019t you? HAHAHAHA! I know you\u2019ve been possessed by a demon; how else could you survive the frigid cold?\u201d\n\n\nClumps of blood continue flying out of your mouth as you fail to speak. Lars crotches down next to you and strokes your face.\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s ok, calm down. Like I told you before, or at least the non-possessed you, the city could use some heating up.\u201d\n\n\nWhere is this going?\n\n\n\u201cI want to make a deal with you! Kill the Captain and I\u2019ll let you live. Hell, I\u2019ll even give you something in exchange. Perhaps a part of my soul? If there\u2019s anything left in there.\u201d\n\n\nYour vision blurs as Lars grins widely at you. Saliva drips down his face like a feral beast.\n\n\n\u201cDecide now! Don\u2019t make me kill you to reveal your true self.\u201d", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Leave now!", "result": "The trio begins arguing again. Something about how demon immortality is different than regular immortality. You don\u2019t have time to dwell on it and make your way home. You find yourself grinning the whole walk back. This isn\u2019t just a happy drunk feeling. You feel like this is your purpose. It\u2019s time to see Catia.\n\n\nYou find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don\u2019t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. \n\n\nYou arrive at your parent\u2019s old home and turn the door knob. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. \n\n\n\u201cSome things never change,\u201d you whisper to yourself.\n\n\nYou immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers\u2019 uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? \n\n\n\u201cCatia.\u201d\n\n\nA dark cloud appears in your room, dispelling a toxic fume. You start violently coughing as your vision blurs indiscriminately. Your eyes shut close and you feel you grip on reality slipping away from you.\n\n\n\u201cAh shit,\u201d you whisper before passing out.\n\n\nYour eyes jitter open and you\u2019re greeted by Catia stroking your face. Her palm flushes the coolness off your face. Beads of sweat drip furiously down your neck as she continues caressing you.\n\n\n\u201cCouldn\u2019t wait a single day before seeing me again? How cute.\u201d\n\n\nShe crawls onto your bed and moves closer to you. Her aura is all consuming and you feel your free will being drained away. Yet, the whole process is extremely pleasing to you. She moves her mouth to your ear and whispers,\n\n\n\u201cDo you want to see everything I have to offer?\u201d\n\n\nYou bite your tongue to avoid instinctively shouting yes. This may be your last chance to not go through with this. At the very least, it would give you chance to ask her a few more questions. ", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story57.json b/data/scraper/stories/story57.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..540c34f --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story57.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=10183", "context": "", "first_story_block": "You are a local swineherd in the village of Jacquescrappe and your two best friends in the whole world are your two favorite pigs \"Oinky\" and \"Snout\". You have recently finished your daily chores when you hear a terrifying scream. Your village is known for suffering frequent hit and run attacks from the creatures in the mountainside and those that get taken never come back. By the time you get there, it is already too late. And to make matters worse, it was your little sister that was taken this time. You've been dealing with this shit your whole life, but this is the last straw. Somebody has to take care of those foul beasts!\n\n \nYou pick up a pitchfork only to be stopped by the gentle hand on your shoulder. You turn and see Brandolf the Bray gazing down at you from behind a beard that is quickly encompassing his whole face. He tells you that to stop the monsters you must focus on assassinating the Craxil, for without their leader the rest will likely vacate the area (or at least fall into disunity making them easier for the local militia to handle individually). \n\n \n \n \n Many other villagers have arrived on the scene and they obviously share the same sentiments as you. Seeing the looks in their eyes, Brandolf decides he's going to have to organize a council meeting to discuss the matter before anyone gets it in their mind to do anything stupid. \n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "To The Council Meeting Then", "result": "Brandolf the Bray manages to convince the townspeople to stow their torches and pitchforks and agree to a council meeting but it is clear from everyone's faces that they would not accept any outcome that did not involve taking immediate action. Brandolf's magic may be formidible, but against a numerous and organized foe he would not get far. The townspeople (yourself included) are but farmers and peasants and would be hardpressed to slay a hackneyed donkey, let alone a monster.\n\n \nMost of the creatures that come out of the mountains are lumbering, humanoid creatures that stand about 10 feet tall and are covered by brown fur from head to toe. They have a hunch in their backs, and the villagers have taken to calling them humunculi. While these creatures are certainly new to you, you are warned that there are even more dangerous creatures lurking in the depths of the mountainside. Now you begin to look at the towering rockface with a mixture of curiosity and dread.\n\n \n\"We need to deal with this Craxil thing NOW\" an angry voice shouts. \"How long must be culled before the royal military arrives to aid us?\"\n\n \nOf course, the royal military they speak of is from the kingdom of Mihtana, which is a considerable distance away.\n\n \n\"The royal military has never been willing to send any military force out to our village, why should this be any different?\"\n\n \nThis comment is true, you think. The village of Jacquescrappe is a considerable distance away from civilization and the kingdom of Mihtana sees it as being of no strategic value. Even if it was under direct threat of annihiliation, you doubt anyone would go through the trouble of committing a significant military force out to such a far away place. In fact, Brandolf is the only outsider that has bothered to help the village in a long time.\n\n \nThe rest of the townspeople immediately begin arguing over whether they should stay and defend the land of their ancestors or simply leave. Others put forth ideas on how to trap the Craxil that are quickly dismissed by Brandolf as stupid. Suddenly, Brandolf makes an announcement. \n\n \n\"I have a poison, aquired from an alchemist in Lima, that can kill the Craxil. Even trace amounts of this deadly substance can kill even the largest of creatures\".\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Listen Intently to Brandolf's Plan", "result": "\"The trouble is that this poison must be ingested or applied to a blade, simply splashing your opponent with it will not suffice.\" \n\n \n\"But how will anyone even get that far? Without royal aid, how can anyone even hope to reach the Craxil?\"\n\n \nAt this point, many in the council are reminded of your exploits at last year's \"capture the flag\" contests. In fact, at every annual festival you manage to outfox your opponents, evade their numbers, and sneak up on their flag. Your success record was almost unrealistic. Suddenly, the council gets it in their minds to send you in with the poison. In fact, you're alarmed by how quickly they're all agreeing to this idea despite the fact you haven't yet. Then again, you've always sensed that as a swineherd you've never really been well liked or considered \"valuable\" by the townsfolk so this response isn't entirely unexpected.\n\n \nNonetheless, you aren't going to go anywhere or do anything that you haven't agreed to do first. Unlike the others in the room, Brandolf has the decency to walk up and ask your opinion on the matter. He is usually dismissive of stupid ideas, but he seems to think this one might actually work. You take a moment to decide how to respond.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Accept The Offer And Begin Your Quest", "result": "You resent that the rest of the village is so quick to agree to such an idea without bothering to consult you first, but these creatures carried off your sister and they are going to have to pay for that. Besides, this shit has to stop. You inform Brandolf that you agree and he smiles warmly. \n\n \n\"Thank you young one, you are certainly bold to undertake such a suicidal mission.\"\n\n \n\"Well, what choice do I have right?\"\n\n \nHe hands you the vial of poison, a short sword, a longbow, and a quiver of basic iron arrows. For once, some of the people of the village actually look at you with respect but then you realize that they are commenting on how stupid you must be under their breath. The ingrates! Still, you need to focus on the task at hand. Brandolf reminds you that the Craxil will be larger that the other creatures and that you should seek to evade rather than engage its underlings. At this point, you realize you have a problem...\n\n \nYou stink! The stench of swine manure spreads forth like body odor of a sweaty fat girl and you realize you are going to have to do something about this if you expect to succeed in your quest. The council members may be used to it as this is a farming community, but the creatures almost certainly will not be. You are going to have to consider how you are going to go about dealing with this issue.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Try The Fancy Cologne", "result": "You know that a friend of yours has recently returned from his trip to the city and brought some cologne with him. You've heard that it does wonders for a man's scent and promptly apply some from a bottle labeled \"Musque\". Coincidentally, it does seem rather musky. Confident in your newfound manly scent you head into the mountains and prepare to meet destiny. The wind changes direction and your enemy is aware of your position before you even reach the first plateau on the trail. It isn't long before the humunculi are upon you, ripping you from limb to limb. You tried to defend yourself with your short sword but hey... these are monsters and you've got the upper body strength of an anorexic girl. They find you to be an unsatisfying meal.\n\n \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Roll Around In Mud And Grass So You Smell More \"Earthy\"... Like The Monsters Do", "result": "You reason that many of the monsters that come down from the mountainside smell a bit \"earthy\" so you try rolling around in the mud and grass to try and acheive that same smell for yourself. Unfortunately, it doesn't mask the stench of the hog manure that still stains your pants and boots. It isn't long before the humunculi are aware of your presence. The villagers got to see their hero pounced on and torn apart before he even got out of sight range. Too bad.\n\n \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Just Take A Bath", "result": "This is a no brainer. If you want to shed the stench of pig crap then take a bath and get a change of clothes! You head down to the bathouse and a tall, dark haired girl prepares your bath. The bath is relaxing and you take special care to dawn an all tan outfit as you suspect it may help you blend in with the rockface better than your usual swineherding outfits will. When you are done, you realize you haven't any scent at all and gather up the equipment you were given at the council. It is time to go.\n\n \nThe villagers are gathered at the base of the mountainside cheering you on as you walk forth. Despite their cheering you know they don't really give a shit about you and you question why you are still taking this kind of risk, but you move forward with it anyway. You continue up the path and reach the first plateau that overlooks the village. There are two caves that go down deeper into the rockface. You remember seeing humunculi emerge from these caves so you reason that this would be a good place to being your search. \n\n \n\n \nAll that's left to decide is which cave you wish to enter.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Left Cave", "result": " \nYou are quickly beginning to wish Brandolf had given you a torch, but given the nature of your quest he probably figured you didn't need to draw attention to yourself. Still, you can barely see more than a few feet in front of your face and it is only getting darker as you continue further inward. You run your hand along the right wall and move carefully, scouting each step with your foot to avoid a fall. Your heart is racing and you know that at any moment, something might come out and attack.\n\n \n\n \nEventually, the cave leads into a small inner chamber with a campfire in the middle. Three humunculi are sitting around the campfire, roasting human limbs on a stick as if they were marshmellows. Fortunately, they are not aware of your presence and the campfire enables you to see there are several tunnels leading out from this chamber. On the other side of the chamber is a tunnel that goes deeper in, but you won't be able to go down this way undetected as long as the humunculi are here. There are also nondescript passsageways to the left and the right (large and small respectively) that you can reach as long as you stay in the shadows.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Sneak Down The Large Passageway", "result": "You press your body firmly against the back wall of the chamber and slowly make your way over to the entrance of the large passageway on the left. Occasionally the campfire will flicker light in your general direction giving you pause, but the humunculi are totally unaware of your presence. Eventually, you manage to make it to the passageway and it doesn't take long before you reach another chamber. You are greatly disheartened by what you see up ahead. \n\n \n\nA larger than normal humunculus stands in the center of the fairly well lit chamber and judging from his tribal decor you figure he must be someone of rank. The passageway continues at the other end of the chamber, but this creature blocks your path. At the moment, he is looking off to the side and does not notice your presence. You weigh your options.\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge Him With Your Sword Drawn. Only One Of Him After All.", "result": "You may be weaker than a Japanese schoolgirl but there is only one enemy to face here and you have the element of surprise! Perhaps if this were just an ordinary humunculus this would have worked, but it becomes apparent that this well decorated character is something altogether different. His reaction time is excellent and he whirls around to back hand you before you can get within range to strike. This sends you sprawling across the floor and knocks the sword out of your hand and beyond your reach. Before you can get up, he leaps over and grasps your neck. As he squeezes the life out of you, the three from the other room come down and you quickly realize all hope is lost. There is no point in fighting now, it is simply...\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Draw Your Bow And Try To Kill Him From A Distance Before He Realizes You're Here.", "result": "The room is too well lit to try and sneak past him and lunging forth at a superior foe with a short sword doesn't strike your fancy either. You decide to get creative and pull out the bow that Brandolf gave you in the council before you left. You ran a few practice shots before departing on this journey and you know you can at least hit a general target, though you'd be pretty hard pressed to achieve any kind of real accuracy.\n\n \nThe first shot whizzes past the creatures head and into a nearby pillar of rock. His eyes go wide as he looks at the arrow then turns to look directly at you. You immediately pull back another arrow and take aim knowing this shot is going to make or break destiny. You aim for his chest as that is the broadest target available and the iron arrowhead may even reach his heart. As he lunges forth you close your eyes and release...\n\n \n\nYou half expected you'd be dead by now but when you open your eyes you discover your arrow went through the creatures neck. He is now on his knees bleeding profusely and clutching his throat. Wasting no time, you finish him with your short sword, then dive into the darkest corner. The three humunculi heard the ruckus and have come down from their campfire to see what the commotion was. When they discover their fallen comrade, they go into a rage and start to look around. You dig into the corner as much as you can and clutch your sword. Two of the creatures move towards the unexplored passageway on the other side of the chamber while the third seems to be gravitating closer to your position. You begin to wonder if you should strike him by surprise while you still can or hope you can try to remain undiscovered.", "action_results": [{"action": "Strike Now While You Have The Chance!", "result": "Instinctively, you know you are going to be discovered if he gets any closer. You aren't sure how you are going to go about escaping the other two, but you are gonna have to kill this one before it gets any closer. Without warning you lunge forth and put your short sword through the creature's belly. You were actually aiming for the heart and the creature moved so I guess that says something about your swordsman skill. Nonetheless, it proved effective at killing the creature. You waste no time at all in bolting back up to the original chamber with the campsite and the other two will round the corner any second. You need to make a decision FAST! \n\n \nThe large pathway (on the right wall as you enter) is now inexplicably barred but you can still run back outside the cave or down the passageway that was previously inaccessable due to their presence. The adrenaline floods your body and your survival instincts take over. You immediately decide to...\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Run Down The Previously Inaccessable Passageway", "result": "You run down the passageway that you were previously unable to get to while the three humunculi were at the campfire. Unfortunately, the humunculi have chosen the same path. You aren't sure if it is because they saw you or because of bad luck, but they are not far behind you now. You reach another chamber and find a large, demonic looking creature blocking your path. Before you can even think about how to describe this thing you feel the humunculi grab you from behind and pull you to the ground. They are about to stomp you to death when the demonic looking creature disintigrates them on the spot. \n\n \n\"Nobody takes my prey in my domain. Tell me little thing, what are you here to do?\"\n\n \nThis thing looks like a large floating eye with multiple smaller eyes attached atop its head. You realize this thing is a beholder and soon you find yourself paralyzed in its gaze. That's what you get for staring into its eye I guess.\n\n \n\"Answer me puny one, why are you here in my domain?\"\n\n \nYou are too terrified to answer, but this creature appears to grow irritated by your silence so you muster all the courage you've got and speak up\n\n \n\"I'm here to slay the Craxil\" you proclaim, terrified of how this creature will respond to such a bold statement.\n\n \n\"HA! Amusing little one, someone of your strength doesn't have what it takes but it would entertain me to see how you die in the Craxil's mountains. Answer this riddle correctly, and I will permit you to continue through to the other side of my domain. Answer incorrectly, and you will share the same fate as your pursuers. Are you ready?\"\n\n \n\"As ready as I'll ever be\" you squeak.\n\n \n\"Very well!\" it bellows, clearly enjoying every bit of this. \"I am a vast canyon that spans beyond sight. I am without end and have been a part of every man whenever there is trouble. What am I?\"\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Boundless Hope", "result": " \n\"Indeed\" the creature states. \"You are clearly in trouble right now as you are helpless in my domain, yet like the rest of your kind you retain hope of survival somehow. I guess this means I'll have to let you through to the other side, but hear this: once you reach the other side, I'll not permit you back in so this is a one way deal. Get going.\"\n\n \nYou wanted to protest as you can't guarantee you won't need to come back here later in search of the Craxil but let's face it... you aren't willing to argue with this thing either. Just stay focused on the goal and avoid unnecessary conflict with anything other than the Craxil. You cross to the other side and a gate closes behind you. The beholder gives you a look as if to say \"good-bye\", then turns and moves the other way. You have no choice but to move foward from here.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Time To Move Forward", "result": "You are standing on a narrow plateau in the rugged mountainous region beyond your village. Unlike the brownish/tan rockface you see near your village, the rocks in this region are more redish and vibrant looking. You see a path leading forward and you decide to follow it. On the plus side, you haven't encountered any hostile creatures so far. You walk for at least a few miles and it appears to extend beyond your sight. You curse at your luck and begin to slump into depression when you realize you don't even know where to fnd this Craxil thing in the first place. You decide to build a campfire for the night, think things over, and gather some rest. As you are doing so, a strange man lumbers out from behind a large rock and begins to beg you for help.\n\n \n\"Please, it won't take long. My caravan was beset upon by foul creatures and I fear for my families safety. You must help me!\"\n\n \nYou pause. It seems odd that a human would be up here in such a hostile region, let alone a caravan. But this is definitely the face of a human and he shows no signs of hostility.\n\n \n\"Why are you up here anyway\"? you ask. \"The Craxil and his followers will kill anyone that wanders into their mountainous territory.\"\n\n \n\"We got lost trying to find our way to Jacquescrappe village, perhaps you've heard of it\"?\n\n \n\"Yeah... I just came from there... but I don't think you want to go back that way, you won't get far.\"\n\n \n\"Look, I don't wish to be rude, but my family is in danger and I need your help NOW!\" \n\n \nAt this point, the man turns and runs down the path. You call out to him to stop but he keeps going. You aren't sure if you would be of much help to him in battle, but you aren't sure how you would feel about abandoning him like that either. Time to decide...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Ignore The Man, There Is Something Fishy About That Fellow", "result": "You decide to just ignore the man as he runs on ahead. Part of you feels like an absolute dickhead for doing this, but you sense there is something strange about how a human caravan is operating this far into the Craxil's lands in the first place. And even if it is true, the man is physically stronger than you are so what kind of help do you honestly think you can provide in a situation that has him scared? Most importantly of all... your gut tells you there is something fishy about that fellow and you think it best to let him run on ahead.\n\n \nYou wait until he is out of sight, then wait a while longer and continue your jouney.\n\n \n\nAs you continue on your journey you wonder if you made the right choice. I mean, what if the man's family really was in danger and you could have made a difference? Did you make the right call? You console yourself by reminding yourself of the importance of your own mission and how you cannot afford to take unnecessary chances. Just as you are having these thoughts, you discover the man who approached you earlier as well as four others standing in the middle of the beaten path with their heads down. It looks like you aren't done with them after all...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "What Do They Want?", "result": "The man you just dismissed earlier is standing at the front of the pack. You knew there was something off about that earlier request and seeing this display only reaffirms that you were right to avoid them in the first place. They are all looking down at the ground but now he is looking up directly at you with a creepy smile on his face. \n\n \n\"So, you saw through our little ambush scheme did you?\" he sneers.\n\n \n\"What is it you want?\"\n\n \n\"Quite simply we're aware of your quest to reach the Craxil and we are not prepared to allow it.\"\n\n \n\nAt this point their heads begin to twist and contort and their skulls appear to come out of their mouths. It is almost as though they were never human at all but part of some kind of disguise. In fact, it is now readily apparent that this is the case. You are now looking at five maniacal looking skeletons armed with an assortment of swords and hand axes. They seem like they are eager to get things started and in fact, they are all rushing down the beaten path towards you. You turn the other way until you can decide what to do and despite what you've been told about the undead, you discover they are perfectly capable of keeping pace with you. \n\n \nYou know you aren't going to be able to take on five of these guys and they seem intent on sticking together during the pursuit. To your left is another cave you've chosen to pass up on your journey, figuring it was just another humunculus den. Perhaps, if you are lucky, you can lose your pursuers in there. Alternatively, you could always try climbing the steep rockface off to your right. You've had plenty of climbing experience as a kid and somehow you hope these skeletons won't be able to follow you. You could also turn around and start unloading arrows into your enemies. They may be keeping pace with you, but you still have a heck of a head start and you'd wager you could release quite a few before they catch up to you. It's up to you...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Try To Lose Them In The Cave", "result": "The cave is dark, and dark is good given your need for evasion. You dart forth into the cave hoping not to alert any inhabitants present inside. You know you have a good headstart on your pursuers so you take the time to quietly move in and survey your surroundings. Just inside the cave is a half eaten corpse (one of the villagers that was taken from the village a few weeks ago in fact). The stench is overpowering but you persist down the next passageway and into a large chamber with a multitude of standing rocks. Another passage off the left wall goes deeper in, but you choose instead to find a hiding place behind one of the standing rocks here.\n\n\n \nFor quite a while you wait, thinking the skeletal warriors that chased you are not going to be coming. Just as you are about to stand up and leave you see them coming down the corridor. They fan out and are now scoping out all the possible hiding spots in this room so it won't be long before they find yours. You look back at the passageway on the left and notice that although they are not up, there are bars in the floor that can be raised to block the passage. You can only hope that the lever on the wall controls this mechanism. In a flash you jump up and run towards this passage. You throw up the lever and step back. The bars raise in time to stop the other four from getting in, but the lead one who tried to fool you earlier managed to get in before the bars raised and now brandishes his sword at you. \n\n \n\nIn self defense you draw your own sword and prepare to thwart his advance. He is fast and it takes all your concentration just to block his attacks from hitting you. Given you are in a close range battle in a part of the cave that may or may not have other inhabitants, you don't really see much use in running. You figure you are going to have to continue this fight with your sword but another item catches your eye. Off to the side is a good size rock that would fit easily in the palm of your hand. Given the opportunity you could try and bash the skeleton in the face with it. \n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Sword Fight", "result": " \nThere is no time to try newfangled plans, you just need to survive. You parry his most of its attacks but take several slashes. Nothing major, but damn if it doesn't hurt and you are losing blood. You manage to land a blow against his shoulder and it goes halfway through the bone, but that doesn't stop the skeleton from fighting. In fact, before you can get your sword back out he lands a blow against your shoulder and it deals a lot more damage. You struggle to keep up with your opponent but you are losing a lot of blood now and this monster is picking up the pace. In desperation you suddenly drop any pretense of defense and lunge forth at your opponent. You bring your sword down through several ribs but this does little to phase him and now you are wide open for the final blow.\n\n \nPerhaps this would have gone better if you remembered that bladed weapons are only effective against enemies with flesh and blood.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Bash Skeleton With Rock", "result": "You grab the rock you noticed earlier almost immediately, then go back to blocking your opponents attacks. The enemy is attacking fast and furious and it takes all your concentration to block. Even so, you only manage to block most of its attacks and take a few slashes. Nothing major, but you are losing blood. Eventually you see your opening and you ram the rock into the creature's skull with the full force of your adrenaline infused arm. You hear a satisfying crack as the front of the skull crumbles and the creature stumbles back. Realizing how brittle this thing must be, you grab its wrist before it can regain composure and bring the rock down again, taking off its sword arm at the elbow. Another crack at the spine for good measure and you are confident the creature is dead. The other four look on angrily and scream but the bars prevent them from doing anything about it, so you decide to move on deeper into the cave in hopes of finding another way out of here.\n\n \nThe cave only gets darker and darker as you go in deeper and you find it odd that there are no other inhabitants in this region... until you see a pair of large white eyes staring back at you from the darkness in the next cavern. It doesn't appear willing to leave the chamber in pursuit of you, but you cannot return the way you came as the skeletons are still banging on the bars you left behind. Studying the creatures behavior a little more, you begin to suspect it is a grue.\n\n \n\n \nYou've heard stories of grues from nearly every adventurer you've ever met. These things are the leading cause of death amongst those in the adventuring profession. Even higher than dragons, vampires, and Lindsay Lohan. In fact, while grues are believed to be organic and corporeal, no adventurer has ever actually killed one before. You struggle to remember what the adventurers told you when dealing with a grue. It has a certain weakness, but for the life of you you simply cannot remember what that is... You're going to have to guess.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "A Grue's Weakness Is Garlic, I apply It To Myself", "result": " \nOf course! Garlic! You still have some garlic powder in your pack that you use to flavor your pork rines. You douse yourself with it and make a mental note to bathe later so the other monsters don't notice your scent. You confidently walk into the dark chamber ahead, certain that the grue will flee your garlic stench. As you confidently strut through the creatures chamber you think to yourself,\n\n \n\"Why can't all my challenges be this....\"\n\n \nYou don't get enough time to finish that thought. \n\n \nYou were eaten by a grue.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "A Grue's Weakness Is Noise, I Shout Loudly As I Enter", "result": " \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \nOf course! Many creatures are frightened by loud noises, grues must be too! You march into the chamber singing \"FRIDAY FRIDAY\" as well as \"MY MILKSHAKE BRINGS ALL THE BOYS TO THE YARD...\" certain that this will scare the creature. Sadly, despite your frightening choice in music, the creature does not appear to be phased. \n\n \nYou were eaten by a grue.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "A Grue's Weakness Is It's Reflection, I Hold Up A Reflective Surface As I Enter", "result": " \n\n \nUpon reflection you decide that a mirror would be your best bet against this creature. Grues are afraid of their reflection right? You go back and find an old iron shield half buried under dirt. It is mostly caked with crud and rust, but still operable as a ghetto-esque mirror. You hold the mirror in the direction of the grue and move along the wall looking for the next passage. Suddenly you realize the stupidity of your mistake. It's pitch black down here, how is this thing even gonna see its reflection in the first place?!? Sadly, you learn all to late that your new concerns are well founded.\n\n \nYou were eaten by a grue.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "A Grue's Weakness Is Light, I Make A Fire With Some Wood And Tinder", "result": "Grues are afraid of light! This is why it won't leave its pitch black chamber to pursue me. Fortunately, you still have some flint and tinder. You originally brought it with the intention of building a campfire along the journey but things change I guess. You light a piece of wood and wrap a piece of torn clothing (soaked in cave water) around the middle to help prevent the flames from going to far down near your hands. You need to move fast as this is not going to last for long and you don't want to be stuck down there without light. \n\n \nAs anticipated, the grue backs away in a feverish effort to avoid the light your flame is generating. You are pleased to see that the passageway at the end of this chamber has a faint light source at the end (although it is very far away). Hauling ass as fast as you can, you head down the tunnel towards the light source as your makeshift torch is already beginning to burn itself to completion. By the time it does, you've already made it close enough to the nearby light source that the grue wouldn't dare follow. \n\n \n\nIt seems the light is being generated by a series of torches that line a set of tracks. It is then that you realize this cave is not really a cave at all but a mine occupied by numerous kobolds. You were always raised to believe that kobolds had beards and wore candles on their heads, but seeing them now you realize how ridiculous that claim actually is. Who came up with that anyway? In reality, they are like miniture lizard folk and very scrawny too (even by your scrawny standards). Staying at the edge of the light source, you decide to observe these creatures for a little while before planning a move. You are reasonably certain you could handle one or possibly even two in a fight but you most certainly can't charge in or you will be overwhelmed in an instant. \n\n \n \n \n \n\n \nOf particular notice is the kobold on the high ledge that is sporting a purple overcoat and barking orders at the laboring kobolds in whatever the hell language these things are speaking. It occurs to you that these kobolds may very well be working for the Craxil, in which case you would very much like to get your hands on that one in the purple & green coat. You tire of wandering the mountainside aimlessly, narrowly evading one death after another all the while having no idea where this Craxil actually is. Perhaps you could find some way of getting to him quietly and making him talk. \n\n \nThere are a few problems with this plan. For starters, the torches provide plenty of illumination in this region and there are countless kobold laborers that would detect your presence and tear you to shreds if you just went in as things are now. You entertain the idea of making them chase you back to the grue, but you don't really have enough wood for another makeshift torch. Even if you were to sneak along the wall on either side, there is still enough light in there to give away your location. This is going to be tough.\n\n \nYou observe them more and try to formulate some kind of cogent strategy when you notice a kobold has to emerge from a nearby storage chamber to bring wood to the torches. The storage chamber isn't illuminated and you didn't even notice it was there in the beginning. That gives you a couple of ideas. For one, you could hide in the storage chamber until the next kobold comes in to keep the torches going, then kill him quickly. Once the torches go out, you can head to the head kobold in charge. Alternatively, you can set the entire room on fire, which would undoubtedly create a diversion. This plan is risky given that the fire would undoubtedly light the place up quite a bit, but it would also eliminate the tinder they need to light any torches later.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Hide In The Storage Room And Kill The Kobold", "result": "You sneak into the storage room and wait for almost 2 hours before the next kobold comes in. As soon as he does you plunge your sword into his back and try to silence him by holding his mouth shut with your arm. He let's out several whining and whimpering noises but nothing that seems to attact alarm. A few minutes later another kobold walks in, obviously waiting for that tinder and you manage to surprise attack that one as well. \n\n \nUnfortunately this plan isn't working out as well as you had planned. The torches are still going strong and now a group of three kobolds is heading towards the stock room. You hide behind the door and manage to kill the first one but the other two draw their weapons and start shouting. Soon, all the kobolds in the mine are aware of your presence and it isn't long after that that you begin to find yourself overwhelmed. You have the unique displeasure of being killed an eaten by a large number of creatures that are even weaker than you are.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Sneak Into Storage Room And Set Fire To Their Supply Of Tinder", "result": "There is no point in hiding in the storage room as they may very well send more kobolds in to retrieve the tinder. Instead, you are going to set it all ablaze. Even if the distraction doesn't work well enough for you, it will only be a matter of time before the quell the fire and run out of tinder for their torch basins. You sneak in start a fire using their own flint and tinder. Soon this fire spreads to the rest of the tinder in the room (with your help of course) and you quickly find your way out of there and out of sight before the kobolds are aware of what has transpired.\n\n \n\nIt isn't long before they take notice and flock over to their storage room. The taskmaster kobold keeps jumping around shouting \"yip yip\" or whatever the hell these things say and the other kobolds are struggling to stop the fire. You manage to slip around the corner and evade the bulk of them and you think you've found the passageway leading up towards the taskmaster kobold. In fact, you have. There's just one small problem. There are two kobolds guarding the taskmaster and you would be foolish to assume the taskmaster is unarmed so that makes three. At present, the taskmaster is clearly focused on the fire, to the point of ignoring all else, but the two guardian kobolds are still vigilant. You're going to need another plan.\n\n \nYou consider using your bow again. You are actually pretty close to the bodyguard kobolds yet still veiled in darkness so you would not likely miss from this range. Of course, with one dead you would have to immediately focus on the other and subdue the taskmaster all in quick succession lest the entire colony become aware of your attack. Another, possibly crazier idea is to just run past the guards before they mentally register your presence, grab the taskmaster, jump from the ledge, and just run. The fall may be considerable for a kobold, but you are sure that as a human you can handle it. \n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Use Your Bow To Take Out The Guardians Quickly, Then Subdue The Taskmaster", "result": "You are going to take advantage of the short range and the distraction you created to shoot down your target's guardians and then grabbing the target himself. You don't want to just grab him and run as you have no secluded place in mind in which to take him and you certainly don't want to alert the rest of the colony. It is decided then, you are going to have to use the element of surprise once again and make a risky move.\n\n \nYou draw your bow and notch an arrow in the drawstring. The nearest kobold is so very close. You aim at his head and for the first time in your life the arrow actually goes where it is supposed to. The other bodyguard is so in shock at the sight of this that by the time it registers what is going on you already have another arrow drawn back and ready to go. He turns to run towards his taskmaster and you put one between his shoulderblades. Its only at this time that the taskmaster turns around and sees what has transpired. He starts shouting more of his \"yip yip\" nonsense but given that he had been doing that already since the fire started the other kobolds don't seem to notice anything out of the ordinary. \n\n \nYou grab him and pull him back into the passage before the ledge, tear the purple cloth that makes his coat, bind his wrists, and search him thoroughly for any weapons. The creature looks at you in complete fear and for the first time you are truly taken back by the kind of things you are capable of. After all, you've just been an underappreciated swineherd your whole life. And a scrawny one to boot (ok, so you're still scrawny, but that's beside the point). I guess survival and stress can make people do some pretty crazy things huh?\n\n \nYou draw your sword and let the kobold know that if he makes any unnecessary noise he'd quickly regret it. Like most leaders, he's bold in words and all coward at heart. You decide its time to begin.\n\n \n\"Tell me what you know about the Craxil\" you demand. You're clearly not used to being in such a position of dominance or control but damn if you're gonna let the kobold know that.\n\n \n\"Yip, ok. The Craxil is the organizer, the one that unifed the scattered beastmen thoughout this region of the barren mountain range.\"\n\n \n\"Why did the Craxil do this? What does it hope to accomplish?\"\n\n \n\"eee. The Craxil wants to provide for the beastmen it does! No likes hoominz that take all nice land and push us back into barren lands yip. Craxil wants some good lands too yip. Takes them from hoominz he will. You'll see\"\n\n \nYou shove your sword under his neck as if to somehow counter his claim. \"What manner of creature is this Craxil you demand.\" \n\n \n\"Yip. Nobody knows, least not us kobolds anyway. We's gets our orderss from the riders we does\"\n\n \n\"Riders?\"\n\n \n\"Yip, humans that serve the Craxil. Well, at least they used to be human. Now... not anymore\"\n\n \n\"The Craxil raised them as undead?!?\"\n\n \n\"Yip noes, the Craxil does not perform such foul practices. The Craxil is noble to us beasties he is. No, the Craxil spends days performing the ritual to break their mind and make them thralls.\"\n\n \nThis last part terrifies you. You know mindflayers are capable of turning humans into thralls, but they can do so instantly. They don't require days and a ritual to do so. Clearly, this Craxil is indeed a creature unlike any other. You can hear the sound of kobold laborers gradually getting closer so you take the last bit of time you have to ask the most important question.\n\n \n\"Where can I find the Craxil?\"\n\n \n\"Yip! He resides in an underground cavern accessed from the bottom of a vast canyon up north yip. Best way is Redridge Pass. Rocks will be red they wills and cactii too. Use mine shaft at end of mine that way, it takes you close. Now let's me go yip!\" \n\n \nThe voices are drawing closer and you don't have time for any further answers. You decide to execute your prisoner and stash the body so you can sneak out to the passageway without alerting the rest of the kobold colony.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue Sneaking To The Mine Shaft", "result": " \nThe kobolds are not alerted to your presence yet; and with most of them trying to contain the fire you started, there aren't very many standing between you and the mine shaft. You continue down along the tracks in the passageway. There are multiple passages and mining spots on both sides and even some ladders leading deeper into the ground but you follow the tracks straight as told until you reach the end of the passage. A single ladder leads up, very far up in fact. You are beginning to develop a fear of heights just looking at how high you are gonna have to climb and given that kobolds built this place you have serious reservations about how well the ladder is gonna support your weight. \n\n \nBut what choice do you have? The skeletons and grue you left behind will certainly make it difficult to leave this place the way you came and it won't be long before the kobolds discover the bodies. You set about climbing the ladder and waste no more time thinking about it. You just do it. The ladder reaches higher and higher and higher and looking down you are soon aware of just how extensive these mining tunnels are. Still, your curiosity about kobold mining practices will have to wait. You've got a Craxil to kill and a village to save. Finally, you reach the top and fling open the hatch.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Move On With The Quest", "result": "You are glad to have put that unplesant ordeal behind you and now head forth in search of the Redridge Pass. You are finally beginning to see cactii, which pleases you greatly, and the dirt/rocks are still red. You get the sense that you must be close so this Redridge Pass is going to have to be somewhere nearby or up ahead. You shudder when you realize there are rarely ever any formal signs in beastmen controlled territories so how will you know this pass when you get to it?\n\n \n\nAs you ponder these thoughts you notice a small hut up ahead, along your path. Smoke rising from a brick chimney tells you someone is home though you cannot imagine what civilized being could possibly live so deep within the Craxil's territory. How would such a person get supplies? How would such a person survive out here with all the hostile creatures roaming about? Perhaps this person isn't a person at all but a hostile creature himself that for whatever reason favors the abode of humans? \n\n \nDespite the fact that it is still daytime, you decide to creep up and look in the window to see who is inside. All you see is a homely old man with a beard eating plumpdinberry pie in his rocking chair. An illusion you question? Or perhaps your time out here in the Craxil's territory has made you jaded. After some internal debate, you decide to go in. You've been awake for two and a half days now and eaten nothing but the pork rines you brought with you (which you are nearly depleted on). At this rate, you won't be able to put up much of a fight at all, even if you do get to the Craxil. Besides, he might know something about the Craxil or the Redrange Pass and you can't afford to be wandering around aimlessly throughout the Craxil's domain.\n\n \nYou go back around to the front door and before you even knock the door opens...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Dun Dun Duuuuuuunnnnnnnnn!!!!!!!!!", "result": " \nThe door opens and the old man is standing there, looking at you expectantly. He is at least two feet taller than you but looks frail in his old age. He invites you in and you go in, though cautiously. The inside of his home looks pretty much like you would expect for a man of his age. A tad messy, but plenty of paintings of his family and the all too familiar old people smell. He beckons you to join him for dinner and nervously you do so. \n\n \nThe food is tremendous though in all fairness, its been quite a while since you have had anything but the pork rines you brought with you. He fills your pack with fruits and breads and now you are starting to feel guilty about it all. This guy seems genuinely nice and you feel your guard beginning to drop, but still...you have to ask...\n\n \n\"Why do you live out here sir? This is deep within the Craxil's territory and extraordinarily dangerous.\"\n\n \n\"I've lived her since before the Craxil established itself. I'm pretty out of the way for their usual operations so they don't usually pay me much mind. Besides, I'm old. If they find me and its my time then so be it.\"\n\n \nYou're taken back by this strange answer but you accept it and ask further...\n\n \n\"If you've been here all this time, that must make you something of a hermit. Still, you ought know something about the Craxil right?\"\n\n \n\"Yes, I suppose I am something of a hermit, but only because the visions I have make people suspect I'm crazy. Still, I've sensed the Craxil in my dreams and I know it is capable of having such visions as well. That is how it is aware of you and your plans.\"\n\n \n\"WHAT?!\" you exclaim. You've always relied upon stealth and the element of surprise to make up for the drastic difference in power between you and your adversaries. If the Craxil is aware of you and your plans, how are you going to pull this off?\n\n \n\"Indeed, the Craxil knows what you hope to do. But don't dispair yet, as I've seen a good deal of cleverness in you and even if it knows your coming it doesn't know when.\n\n \nSomehow that last statement doesn't offer you much consolation but after coming as far as you have you don't really see that you have any other choice than to stay the course. After a filling dinner you lie down on a mat and get the best sleep you've had in a long time. During this nap, you are visited by a strange dream...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Strange Dream", "result": " \nYou saw a soft mist of white and purple against a pitch black surrounding. You could sense there was something or someone in the room with you but you could not see who it was. You could not sense whether or not it was good or evil, kind or malevolent, all you could sense was its presence. It hits you that this presence is the Craxil, and it is watching you intently as you stumble around in the darkness. \n\n \n \n \n \n \n\nYou sense one more presence, one which you are very familiar. It's your sister! You see her only breifly before her likeness disappears back into the darkness. You sense fear followed by supplication coming from her. You are now moving faster through the darness, stumbling over rocks and nearly twisting your ankles on rivets in the ground. But no matter how quickly you move you cannot get a visual on either your sister or the Craxil, you only sense their presence. \n\n \nYou wake up sweating feverishly. \"That was quite a dream you had young man\" the old man starts. \"You were shouting so loud I thought you were losing it. And here people thought I was crazy...\"\n\n \nYou aren't really sure what to make of this dream. Was it a vision or just a nightmare? Was the Craxil really watching you the whole time? And what of your sister? You last saw her being drug off by humunculi so you assumed she was dead. Could she still be alive somehow? She looked a lot different in that dream too. Not the shy, reserved younger sister you knew but rather a fierce looking warrior in battle garb. The hell is that about? Your dream seemed so vivid you can't help wondering if it was a vision, but your logical mind tells you that the power of suggestion is at work here and its all bullocks.\n\n \nFeeling full, refreshed, and well stocked on supplies you thank the old hermit for everything and really appreciate what he's done for you. He tells you that the Redrange Pass is just over the peak to the northwest of his hut and you immediately see what he's talking about. Its still a long way from the pass to the canyon, but you have a very clear idea of where you are going now. Once you get to the Redrange Pass you just follow it northwest of your current position and it will EVENTUALLY lead you straight to the canyon, which you're told is hard to miss.\n\n \n\"Good luck young man, I'm rooting for you\".\n\n \n\"Thank you sir, and again I appreciate it.\"\n\n \nNice guy. He's the first to address you as something other than \"pencil arms\", \"scrawny one\", \"bone boy\", or the like. You head out towards the peak and begin the lengthy climb upwards.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Up The Peak", "result": "You climb the peak and though it takes a considerable amount of time to get to the top, it isn't nearly as tiring as you expected it would be. You are now standing on an even higher plateau on the mountainside and the Redridge Pass is precisely where you expected it to be. You are thrilled to have finally found the pass, which is really more of a trail than a pass, but you still have a lot further to go. As you move forward you suddenly get wind of a foul stench and hear a lot of loud, obnoxious grunting noises up ahead.\n\n \nYou immediately get off the beaten path and find a good hiding spot. It is midday now so there isn't a lot of darkness to aid you. Still, you manage to crawl forward unseen until you see a small group of orcs. This is VERY not good you think you yourself. Orcs are exceptionally strong. Even one on one you stand no real chance of defeating one. There are about five blocking the path forward so you are going to simply have to sneak around them and continue on your journey. You've interrogated lesser creatures, but if the Craxil is commanding these creatures then just how strong is the thing? No, don't dwell on such thoughts. You need to focus. You've come this far and you're sure as hell not gonna let yourself be intimidated now.\n\n \nReturning to the task at hand you see a couple of different options. There is a river that runs down the middle of the orc group's position and some hollow reeds close to you. You remember one time during capture the flag where you moved through the river underwater and breathed through reeds very similar to these. That was an epic maneuver worth remembering, perhaps it will serve you again here? The orc camp and you are at the same elevation; but there is a ditch that runs from your current position, along the side of the camp, and out the other side. Presumably, if you hug the side of the ditch closest to the orcs and move along quietly they shouldn't be able to see you. Alternatively, you still have plenty of poison. Even if you applied it to all your remaining arrows, you wouldn't even have used half the bottle. Orcs are large and there are only five of them... \n\n \nTime for a decision. What's your plan of action?\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Breathe Through Reeds And Move Slowly Underwater To The Other Side", "result": "Of course! The reeds will enable you to breath from underwater. The river water is opaque so you will not be seen and because orcs have an exceptional sense of smell, this is probably the safest way to get past them without being seen. You quietly slip into the river water from a point that can't be seen by the orcs, get one of the hollow reeds to act as a snorkel, and slowly begin moving through the water. You intend to move slowly, so that if any of the orcs do notice the moving reed it will look like it is just drifting downriver.\n\n \nThe idea is working. You can hardly see where you are going, but you got a very good look at where the river goes and the approximate distances before you got in so you have a pretty good estimate of where you are. Soon, you can hear the orcs talking and you know you must be in the middle of them now. As fate would have it, a snapping turtle decides to be a pain in the ass (literally) but despite the pain this hissing bastard is inflicting you manage to keep your cool and continue moving slowly through the river. Eventually you, make it to the other side and emerge out of the orc's view. You pat yourself on the back for that one, this maneuver is definitely one of your favorites.\n\n \nJust then the hissing bastard that bit your ass makes it known that he's still attached by tighting his bite and inflicting more pain. You put a drop of the poison in his mouth and within moments he's off of you and squirming on the ground. Looks like this stuff Brandolf gave you is legit after all. You massage your sore bottom and try to walk it off. There is a welt on your right butt cheek that still stings but you figure you will eventually get over it.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Get Over It And Get On With The Quest", "result": "You rejoin the Redridge Pass and continue northwest towards the canyon you hope to find. You hear a shuffling noise and you could have sworn that the vines stemming from that rather bizarre looking cactus just moved. Nah, just a vine on the ground... from a cactus... on a mostly dry and rocky mountainside... makes perfect sense. You continue to rationalize this in your head as you walk along only to notice a similar movement from another cactii vine up ahead of you. Suddenly you feel one of these vines wrap itself around your left ankle and sting you.\n\n \n\nYou pull and draw your sword but other vines have taken up the call as well and you are getting grabbed and stung all over. You still have limited movement with your limbs, but you are out of balance. The stingers must have injected you with something because you are feeling nausious. You need to focus and get out of this mess before you black out or you might not wake up. You look over at the cactii these vines are coming from and they have inexplicably moved closer to your position. Very close in fact. The needles jutting out from them seem to have perked up and gotten longer. Whatever these things are, they've got you and you aren't about to become their prey.\n\n \nYou are still able to reach your sword, but with vines slowing your arm and your lack of balance you aren't sure you will be able to sever the thick vines that are holding you in place. You could always apply some poison to it first, but just reaching the poison is going to be a challenge as you've stored that in your backpack. You still have flint in your front pocket and a few pieces of tinder left, perhaps if you can get a small fire going you can push them back. Whatever you do though, it has to be quick. You can feel the venom from the many stingers affecting your mind and it is taking all your discipline to maintain your focus right now.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Just Draw Your Sword And Try To Cut Through The Vines", "result": "It would take too much time and energy just to reach the backpack and rumage through it for the venom right now, and you need all the time and energy you have to try and free yourself from this trap you seem to have landed in. You are able to reach your shortsword within a short while and begin raising it against the vine holding your left arm. You bring it down as hard as you can, but with the vine holding your right arm and the others keeping you off balance, you don't cause nearly as much damage as you would like to. The same happens when you try again.\n\n \nYou decide to start using your sword like a saw instead, running the edge of the blade back and forth against a singular point on the vine holding your left arm. It takes a while but you are about halfway through the vine when it suddenly responds. The vine recoils abit so that the part you were working on is now out of your reach. You are greatly disheartened by this, but set to work on it again in a new spot. The creature's vine responds the same way again and by now the venom has clouded your mind so much you are barely able to maintain your conciousness. You realize now that it is over. You have no idea what they did after you blacked out, because you never woke up again.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Apply The Poison First, Then Cut At The Vines", "result": "You aren't sure if you will be able to completely sever the vines that hold you, but if you can at least cut into them, the poison should do the rest. Unfortunately, it is stored in your pack which is a little difficult to reach right now, but that isn't going to stop you from trying now is it? You pull your right hand back and the vine that holds it pulls back. Somehow, you think it might realize you are trying to get something and it seeks to keep your arm out front. You continue to pull against it with all your might but you reach a stalemate with the vine just getting your arm to your side. \n\n \nThe venom is starting to really kick in now. In addition to being nausious you are now dizzying as well. The only thing keeping you going is your sheer determination to live. You bite and claw at the vine, you squirm, you fight, and eventually you get your arm back to your pack. You are feeling light headed and you know you don't have much time. You manage to get the vile of venom out of your backpack but in your situation that struggle took too much time and energy. You no longer have the energy and wherewithall to apply it. You black out and the vile falls uselessly to the ground. You don't know what they did after that, because you never woke up again.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Light A Piece Of Tinder And Wield The Flame As A Weapon", "result": "You need to get out of this mess as quickly as you can. The vines are thick, you are off balance, your arms are partially restrained, and you don't have much time. You reason that in this situation your best bet is to start a fire and try to use it against the vines. You lean forward and allow the flint and tinder to fall from you and onto the ground. After a short struggle, you manage to get your hands on them and work feverishly to start a fire. You worry that lighting the tinder on fire will make it difficult to hold against your enemies without burning yourself but you do it anyway and wrap a thick piece of cloth torn from your shirt around your hand before doing so for rudimentary protection. \n\n \n\nIt hurts, but not to the point of burning you thanks to the cloth material and you are far more concerned about survival. You hold the fire up close to the vine holding your left arm and it releases and recoils almost immediately. The others follow suit pretty quick, which is good as this tinder won't last much longer before it is burned to completion. You hold out what's left of it to keep these cactii away and rush away. \n\n \nYou've managed to get away, but the venom in your system is already screwing with your head and you don't think you will get much further before blacking out. You go to the nearest area you can find without any cactii around and collapse on a large rock. You don't awaken again until nightfall, but at least you have your mind and focus back, and you are glad you weren't attacked while you were out. However, it isn't long after you awaken that you get a sickening feeling in the pit of your stomach.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Uh-Oh, What Is This?", "result": "The bad feeling in the pit of your stomach returns and you realize that eating all those pork rines and only pork rines for several days until seeing the old man did not do your digestive system any good. You spring into action, find a secluded corner, and relieve the mess that was building up inside you. Unfortunately, it is not until after this messy endeaver that you remember you neglected to pack bottom tissue when you left on this quest. You've braved many dangers and survived several impossible situations but now you are going to have to make a decision. A decision that is more frightening than any you have made before. \n\n \n \nTo your left are large, round, orange leaves. They aren't brittle and look as though they might work. To your right are a bunch of ferns sporting three fingered leaves. These are green with red spots. It's time to make an all important decision.\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Wipe With The Large, Round, Orange Leaves", "result": " \nYou choose to wipe with the large, round, orange leaves and you find them quite well suited for the task. With your keister sanitized you have now averted another dangerous situation and decide to continue on with your quest. \n\n \nThe next three days of travel down the Redridge Pass are surprisingly uneventful. You sneak past the occasional orc patrol and wild animal but nothing particularly difficult. You half expect something to come jumping out at you from the darkness or to find some large camp around the corner but to your plesant surprise the way seems more or less clear. Part of you wonders if it is a trap given the Craxil knows you are coming but then ... what choice do you have?\n\n \nAs you come up a steep incline you look down and with great satisfaction you find what you've been searching for all this time. A colossal chasm, the canyon you've been searching for! The old man said you would know it when you see it and damn if he wasn't right about that! Still, this canyon is freaking huge. It will take probably half a day just to get down to the bottom safely and once down there, there is a LOT to explore. You know the underground cavern that houses the Craxil is accessed somewhere down there, so I guess you don't have much choice than to go down there and investigate huh?\n\n \nYou are about to cautiously decend when you hear the sound of hoofprints behind you...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn Around", "result": " \nYou turn around to confront the source of the hoofprint noise and you see two humans on horseback. Their eyes appear to be in a glaze and they are looking right at you. Thing is, you recognize these two. They were farmhands that were captured a few weeks back. Everyone assumed they were eaten like most of the people who are taken. For some reason the Craxil must have decided to make them thralls and this is abundantly clear in their appearance. These must be some of the \"riders\" you've heard about.\n\n \nThey both hop down from their horses and draw swords. Given you were already standing at the edge of the canyon when they showed up, you don't have a lot of room to maneuver. You know that before they became thralls they didn't really possess much fighting skill, but you have no idea now. You don't have much time to decide what to do here.\n\n \nThere is a small gap between the two of them and they are widening it in an attempt to come at you from both sides. Perhaps you should bolt between them and try to get away. Alternatively, there is a branch sticking out of the wall of the canyon not far below you. You could jump down to it and try to climb down the wall of the canyon to a safer ledge. Either way, you need to get away from these two.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Run Between Them", "result": " \nYou make a break for it and dash between them. You catch an unpleasant slash across the right hip and it is bleeding but you are still alive and running and that's what counts. You contine down the Redridge Pass, determined to lose them and double back somehow. Its only when you hear the hoofprints getting closer that you realize the tactical error you've just made. The horseback riders quickly catch up to you and one of them puts his sword into the back of your head as he rides by. \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Jump To Branch And Climb Down", "result": "You aren't going to be able to outrun them if they have horses so you take the only option you got and jump. You are scared out of your mind but you successfully grapple the hanging branch and the two riders can do nothing but glare down at you and growl. The tricky part is getting down from here. You have never really been afraid of heights but you are REALLY high up. The nearest ledge is almost halfway down the canyon and the rockface isn't easily climbable. Still, you don't have much of a choice so you try anyway.\n\n \nYou make it most of the way down until one of the groves you were holding onto comes out and you fall. Thankfully, you land on the ledge and you were already most of the way there so aside from knocking the wind out of you and hurting like hell you are pretty much alright. Its possible you might have a broken rib but you have no way of knowing and it isn't precluding you from going on even if it is broken. After taking time to recover a bit and catch your breath, you look around a bit and find a clear way to climb down to the bottom of the canyon and downward you go. Fortunately, you make it to the bottom of the canyon without further incident.\n\n \n\nYou have now reached the bottom of the canyon and you know the entrance to the Craxil's chasm must be around here somewhere, but it is a massive canyon to explore. You spent almost 7 hours down there until you come across three bizarre looking doors. One is red and bears the emblem of a bear. The next is green and bears the emblem of a spider. The last is blue and bears the emblem of a wolf. This whole ritual gets even more bizarre when you notice a rabbit approach and stand beside the red door as if to beckon you in that way. A squirrel approaches the green\ndoor and stands atop the frame as if to endorse that one, and an owl flies down to a rock near the blue door. Its times like these you wish you were a druid so you could better understand what the hell these critters are trying to tell you. Still, you have a decision to make and your instincts (whatever they are worth) are telling you that you only get one shot at this.\n\n \n \n \n \n \n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n~Hint: Depending upon the path you took to get here, you may or may not have seen one or both of the creatures on the correct door already. If not, you are just going to have to guess.~\n\n \n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter The Red Door With Bear Emblem, Endorsed By The Bunny", "result": " \nWho can resist a cute widdle fluffy wuffy bunny hmm? You open the red door with the bear emblem and as soon as you enter, the door slams shut and locks behind you. It looks like you really don't have much of a choice but to continue down this passageway. At the end is a large, circular chamber with numerous torches illuminating the entire chamber. You are trying to decide which of two passageways to proceed down until you notice two bears, one coming out of each passage. They lock eyes on you and give chase almost immediately. You turn and run back to the door you entered from but it won't budge. It seems you've made the wrong decision, and now the bears are eviscorating your midsection. \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Enter The Green Door With Spider Emblem, Endorsed By The Squirrel", "result": " \nYou choose the green door with the spider emblem, endorsed by the squirrel. After all, what is more trustworthy than a cute little squirrel? You enter and immediately thereafter the door slams shut behind you and locks in place. It seems you haven't much of a choice but to move forward down the passageway. It is exceptionally dark down here, but given that you are a sneak that is actually a good thing. You suddenly find yourself stuck and after fidgeting around for a while you come to the sudden realization what it is that has trapped you and why the door has a spider emblem on it. It seems you aren't the only one that enjoys sneaking around in the dark...\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Enter The Blue Door With Wolf Emblem, Endorsed By The Owl", "result": "After careful consideration, you trust the owl and enter the door with the wolf emblem. The door shuts and locks behind you and you see no choice but to move forward. An eery glow beckons you forward down a passageway that is leading you deeper and deeper underground. You can't tell if that is a good thing or a bad thing but you follow it anyway. When you reach the bottom you see a large room decorated to look like the antechamber of a church. You aren't sure what to make of all this, but you feel like you must be getting close to the Craxil now.\n\n \n\nThe next chamber is substantially different than the one you just entered from. Instead of being all decorated and kept, you see half eaten farm animals in a pen and three large lizardfolk guarding a doorway. They bear polearms and plate mail and you don't think you would be able to take even one of them in combat. The blue door has shut behind you and you don't really see any reliable means of setting a trap. You have dealt with these types of situations before though. You just have to keep your cool and figure a way to deal with this.\n\n \nFor one, you could start a fire in the antichamber to distract the lizardfolk from the door, then slink in. The antichamber is big, but a fire large enough to attract their attention might also illuminate most of the room, making it hard for you to operate unseen. Another possibility is their food source. You surmise the half eaten farm animals are what they've been feeding on during their meal breaks. You could try using some of the poison Brandolf gave you on some of the meat of the freshest looking animal and wait until they feed again. Of course, there is no telling how long you will have to wait for them to feed again. Your call adventurer.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Start A Fire To Distract The Lizard Folk", "result": "You don't have any tinder left after that incident with the cactii, but you do have some flint. You look around the large antichamber-like room for anything wooden and you find a few things that look like they might be combustable. You set about lighting them with the flint, then quickly cast them in the direction of a large wooden table in the center of the room and run to the corner just before the room with the lizardfolk. As you had hoped, two of the lizard folk eventually come out and because you are hiding in their blindspot, they don't see you. The creatures rush over to quell the fire as best they can but there is a problem.\n\n \nOnly two of the lizardfolk emerged to deal with this threat. The third one still stands guard at the door. Lizardfolk are known for their fierce dedication to their duty and unfortunately it seems they are also smarter than the majority of your adversaries as well. After quelling the fire the two begin searching the room, leaving no stone unturned so-to-speak. They must suspect that it was caused by someone. You move around from one dark hiding spot to another, hoping to evade their search until they retire back to the door but you step down on the charred remains of the table and an audible crunch is heard. \n\n \n\nTo your credit, you kept them searching for a long time due to your skill at evasion but given that you just removed any and all doubt about your presence, it was only a matter of time before they found you.\n\n \nTHE END\n\n \n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Poison Their Food Supply And Wait For Them To Feed Again", "result": " \n \nBrandolf gave you more than enough poison to kill the Craxil. It takes only trace amounts to kill even the largest of creatures so why would you need to save the entire vial? You carefully creep up and apply poison to various parts of the bovine flesh, particularly the meaty parts, and take care to poison all the carcasses in the pen so you don't have to try and guess which ones they will feed off next. You then back away to the antichamber-like room and begin waiting the long wait.\n\n \nIt is almost 7 hours later and only now do the lizardfolk appear to be conversing with each other and gravitating towards the food pen. \"About damn time\" you think to yourself, eagerly waiting for them to begin eating as you watch them from a dark corner in the next room. You struggle to contain your glee as the first one sinks his teeth into the freshest cow and another picks up a smaller animal you also poisoned. Before long, they are all dry heaving and you are doing a silent victory dance in the darkness. For some reason it took a while for one of them to finally die, but when he did the way to the door was clear. \n\n \nCrossing through the doorway and into the underground chasm, you come to realize the Craxil is NOTHING like what you had expected...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Craxil", "result": " \nThe Craxil is nothing like what you were expecting. You are standing in a massive underground cavern that extends as far as the eye can see in all directions (except the one you came from). Running across it is an underwater stream and floating above it is a beautiful woman bathed in pure white light. It almost appears to leave an after image of itself behind as it moves. You aren't really sure if you would categorize this as a ghost or spirit or what, but you remember that it is a supposed to be a creature unlike anything since discovered. \n\n \nAlmost as if reading your mind the Craxil remarks \"Indeed... I am not like any other creature your kind has ever seen before, but then I believe I have already told you that haven't I?\"\n\n \nTo your shock and horror she transforms into the likeness of Brandolf the Bray, the mage who visited you in the village of Jacquescrappe, then into the old man who watched over you as you slept. Was it really the Craxil all along?!? Is this why you had that dream that it was watching you the entire time?!? What does this mean for your sister, is she still alive? And what of the poison? Surely she wouldn't give you something that would actually work on her. \n\n \nSensing the millions of questions that flurry through your mind, the Craxil begins to laugh and float about you in circles. The door once guarded by lizardfolk now slams shut and locks on its own. With this door shut, there is no longer any light and the Craxil itself is the only thing left that you can actually see.\n\n \n\"I can take whatever form I please swineherd, and I have been watching you in various forms throughout the entirety of your journey. You fancy yourself the king of sneak yet you were clearly unaware that you were being watched the moment you entered my territory.\"\n\n \nYour face grows pale and you have no idea how you are going to deal with this being. She knows all your secrets. She knows your plan. You haven't any element of surprise whatsoever. Hell, you aren't even sure if your weapons are going to work and you're sure as hell certain the poison isn't going to be effective given that it was her that gave it to you. Your mind races to discern a proper course of action as she continues to toy with you. However, your concentration is broken when another figure enters your view...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Other Figure", "result": "You turn to find your sister, dressed in one of the war garbs you saw in your dream, walk out towards you from the shadows. She doesn't look as glossy-eyed as the other riders you encountered (in fact she looks perfectly normal) but from her demeanor and obvious reverence to the Craxil you know she is in fact a thrall. How can this be? This is the same war garb from the dream! But your sister has never been like that.\n\n \n\"We have big plans for her\" the Craxil coes. \"She is the carrier of a great plague, a slower acting yet more contagious version of what you carry in that vial I gave you. As a carrier she will be immune to its effects, but she will spread them among the humans whereever she goes.\"\n\n \n\"Why?!? Why would you do something like that you sick bitch?!?\"\n\n \nThe Craxil only laughs at your insult and seems to take delight in your obvious fear and frustration at this moment.\n\n \n\"With the surrounding kingdoms of Mihtana and Lima buckling from the plague, there will be little resistance when we move out of the mountain range and into their lands. As you may have noticed on the way here, I have many humunculi, goblins, grippli, kobolds, and even a handful of orcs all gathered here in these mountains.\"\n\n \n\"So you really are planning an invasion then?\"\n\n \n\"I believe that poor servant you so ruthlessly interrogated several days ago already explained that much to you.\"\n\n \nYou struggle not to be blinded by your anger at this point, but there is nothing you can do to stop her. \n\n \n\"The humans are a truly repugnant race. They have no respect for those that labor, those that produce, those that sacrifice for the good of others. Whenever they want something (be it money, power, or respect) they simply take it for themselves, and only those who do are respected. This is why the beastfolk I serve have been pushed deep into this barren mountainside.\"\n\n \nTo your astonishment, you actually find yourself identifying with the Craxil. Even when you agreed to stick your neck out on their behalf they snickered comments about your intelligence under their breath. Even now, after all the dangers you've faced, you're sure they have probably already assumed you're dead and are likely redistributing your property as we speak.\n\n \n\"The beastfolk here are loyal to me and to themselves, they have honor. And they certainly deserve the lands of their ancestors, taken from them by the humans.\" \n\n \n\"And you think slaughtering humans is the answer?\"\n\n \n\"Since when has diplomacy not ended with a beastman's head on a human's table? Since when did the humans ever sit down to negotiate with my brethren? The humans understand only the simplicity of death and destruction so that is what we will bring to them.\"\n\n \nYou know this is morally reprehensible, but from a purely stoic and logical standpoint you can understand the rationale behind the Craxil's argument. You wonder if peace between humans and the beastmen really is possible. Since the beginning of time, beastmen have always preyed on humans and humans have always responded with military force on their camps. Perhaps there really is no better way to advance their position right now but you cannot stomach the loss of life that would come with it. \n\n \n\"My beast brothers have every right to be happy, and so they shall. They humans will be brought to the breaking point with this plague and the forces I gathered will retake the lands they deserve. But I am not without understanding. I can see you have an open mind and have considered my position. You were wondering if peace between human and beast is possible. It is a noble but impractical thing. If you were to join us, I could make you powerful...\"\n\n \nYou think to yourself \"damn, does this Craxil thing read my mind too?\" Still, it is a tempting offer. You have always toiled as a swineherd, providing the ever popular hams and bacon that are so popular at festivals and weddings and even fed those without homes, yet you've always been looked down upon as a swineherd by those who have probably never worked a day in their lives. You've seen girls you had feelings for go for men who were of \"higher social standing\" than yourself. You've always wanted respect, maybe even a little money or even power. You think about what the Craxil said, about how only those who TAKE it can ever HAVE it, and upon reflection you must admit it makes sense. But the Craxil's plan would involve massive loss of life and you are unsure if you want that on your hands.\n\n \n\"Your sister did not understand the situation as well as you and I, so I had to make her a thrall. When the acquisition is finished, I will return her to you... but only if you join me and help spread this plague throughout the human lands.\"\n\n \nThe Craxil, now clearly curious about all the thoughts running through your head, moves closer until her face is less than a foot away from your own. \"Well human, how do you respond?\"\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "I Will Join You, And Seize The Respect And Power I Deserve", "result": "The humans of Mihtana refused to send aid to the villagers of Jacquescrappe (even when people were dying) because it didn't suit their political or military interests. The villagers practically elected you for this quest without even asking you if you wanted to, then mocked your intelligence when you accepted on their behalf. You're sick of being looked down upon as a low class swineherd despite all the hard work you've done to provide for your community. All of that is about to change. \n\n \nYou proclaim your allegiance to the Craxil and to your astonishment she is actually overjoyed. Seems she needs as many people as possible to help spread the plague and your sister is the only thrall that doesn't look like an obvious thrall. Your voluntary support to the Craxil's plan is well recognized. You and your sister are made to be carriers of the great plague. When you return to the village of Jacquescrappe, you misinform the people that the Craxil is dead and deliver a liquid dose of the plague into the town's wine supply and shaking hands with everyone who comes to congratulate you. Shortly thereafter, you make sure to thoroughly infest all your pork before the next big wedding in Lima. Meanwhile, your sister gets a position as a laysister at a cathedral in the kingdom of Mihtana. By poisoning the holy water, she manages to infect everyone who comes in for a blessing. \n\n \nBetween the two of you, and the increased contagiousness of this version of the plague, you are able to infect a massive segment of the population. You work to continue spreading the disease, but the damage is already done. Quarantines are set up in Mihtana and Lima in a desperate attempt to quell the spread of the plague. Those who are uninfected (or who believe themselves uninfected) revolt against the guards in a desperate bid for self preservation. Others lock themselves in their homes and arm themselves in hopes of outliving the vile plague. Criminals take full advantage of the choas to operate unchecked and before long both kingdoms (and their militaries) are completely at their knees. \n\n \nWhen the beastmen move forth to retake human lands, there is nothing to stop them. As you and your sister have become the Craxil's right and left hands so-to-speak, you are now recognized as a person of power and all respond with fear and respect when in your presence. \n\n \n\"The Craxil was right\" you think to yourself. \"If you want respect, you have to take it. If you want power, you have to take it. Nobody else is going to recognize your merit and deliver these things to you. To have anything worth having in life, you simply have to take it.\"\n\n \nUnfortunately, it wasn't quite what you imagined. You enjoy your newfound respect and power, but the fear felt by everyone else only makes you feel more alienated and alone. By choosing this path, you have seized what you've always wanted, but what good is respect if it comes with the kind of fear that pushes people away? What good is power if there is no one to share it with. \n\n \nWhen the time comes, the Craxil honors its agreement to release your sister and as you feared, she is appauled by what the two of you have wrought. You recieve word the next week that she was found in a clearing in the woods. She hung herself in the field where she used to play as a child. You try to establish some sort of peace between humans and beastfolk, but given what you have done the humans want nothing to do with you. They only respect you out of fear because of the beastmen you now command. Realizing you are now completely alone, you go to meet your sister in the clearing and follow her to whatever lies beyond.\n\n \nCONGRATULATIONS! \n\nThis is official ending #1 of 2", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I Cannot Abide The Senseless Slaughter You're Scheming, I Would Rather Die", "result": "Humanity may not be perfect, but it certainly doesn't deserve the kind of death and destruction the Craxil has in mind. You announce to her that you would rather die than support her in this plan. You were terrified that this being might become infuriated and attack, but instead she calmly and slowly backs away... then looks to your sister. Your sister looks back at the Craxil and you realize the Craxil has just given her a nonverbal order. By now your sister's blade is unsheathed and she is coming at you. \n\n \nShe fights with a furocity and intent that is completely out of character for your shy and reserved little sister, but her physical strength is the same. There is nothing special about her swordplay technique either and you are pleased to see that you can block and parry her attacks. Still, this is your sister, and you don't want to kill her if you don't have to. The Craxil is obviously enjoying this and you can't help but think that if you could just find some way of killing her then perhaps your sister can be saved.\n\n \nThe Craxil is currently in her noncorporeal true form, but she has taken corporeal forms before when she was watching you. You wonder if striking her while she's in one of these corporeal forms might actually damage her. Alternatively, you wonder why a shapeshifting being with noncorporeal capability would even need others to spread the plague in the first place. Perhaps she isn't immune like you once thought or perhaps she felt secure from it in her noncorporeal form. Would you still need to get her into corporeal form for that first or could you try and give it to her while she's in her noncorporeal state. Or perhaps there is some other way of getting your sister back to normal. Unlike you, she knows some very basic magic. Perhaps she will have something that will damage the Craxil in its noncorporeal state.\n\n \nWhile your mind wonders to ponder these things, your sister manages to get a shallow cut across your right shoulder and you respond by kicking her onto the ground and stopping down on her sword hand. You remove your sister's weapon and the Craxil moves in as if to protect its vassal. You quickly begin to go over your previous ideas in your head knowing you will need to try something and soon lest the Craxil decides to attack first.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Call Out To Your Sister And Try To Free Her From Her Servitude", "result": "You call out to your sister and try to reach her as her brother. You remind her of the grove you two played in when you were young. You recall times when you organized a surprise gathering for her birthday. You remind her how much she cares about the well being of others and beg her to come to her senses. Unfortunately, whatever magicks control her mind apparently override any logical or emotional argument you put forth and she instantly follows whatever order the Craxil gives her. \n\n \nYou have her weapon, but she still has her basic spell casting abilities. She puts a magic missile into your leg and you are unable to stand. From here, the Craxil decides to turn you into another one of her mindless thralls. You spend your days serving her whims, spreading the plague, and standing guard against intruders until one day many monthes later a real hero lops your head off while fighting the Craxil's minions. \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Fire A Poison Coated Arrow Into the Noncorporeal Form Of The Craxil", "result": "You draw a poison coated arrow from your pack and immediately notch it into your bow. You realize you don't have a lot of time so you draw it back, aim, and fire immediately. The Craxil does not move. Instead, she allows the arrow to pass directly through her noncorporeal state and land somewhere in the dark distance. You realize she only felt secure enough to give you the poison in the first place because she existed in this noncorporeal form whenever she wasn't spying. You attempt to quickly consider your other options but it seems she doesn't much care for you any longer. She stretches forth her hand and it feels as though you are being lifted into the air by your own skeleton. You scream as you feel what feels like a brain aneurysm. You continue to suffer the pain until it kills you.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Challenge The Craxil To Take On Other Corporeal Forms, Then Infect Her With The Poison", "result": "\"It is clear that I have neither the means nor the ability to complete my quest, so as a dead man I ask that you grant one dying wish\" you proclaim.\n\n \n\"Throwing in the towel already?\" she scowls, obviously disappointed that you didn't have some clever trick in mind. \"From your past exploits in my territory I thought you'd at least think of something to try. What do you want?\"\n\n \n\"I want to know how you were able to keep tabs on me during the journey. What other forms did you take besides Brandolf and the old man?\"\n\n \n\"I took many forms. From birds, to rocks, to the very water you swam through to get past the orcs.\"\n\n \n\"Show me\" you demand, \"I want to more fully understand how I was bested before this ends. Let me die with that peace.\"\n\n \n\nAs she's talking, she starts by taking the corporeal form of Brandolf the Bray and you seize upon the opportunity. As rapidly as you can you grab a poison coated arrow, notch it in your bow, drawback the drawstring, aim, and release. The poison arrow lands in her forearm and she promptly removes it and tosses it aside. You fear she was unaffected by this arrow and she begins to laugh.\n\n \n\"It seems I misjudged you, you haven't surrendered at all have you? Attacking me in my corporeal state... that does sound like you. But I have the ability to reform my corporeal state just as easily as I formed it in the first place. This is a simple matter of...\"\n\n \nShe stops midsentence as if she somehow came to the realization of what you've done.\n\n \n\"That arrow...\"\n\n \n\"The same stuff you gave me on day 1. It looks like I managed to complete this quest after all\"\n\n \nThe Craxil bursts with laughter as if somehow impressed with your creativity or perhaps the irony of the situation. She doesn't stop laughing even when the nausea and vomitting come. You can tell her power is waning because you sister suddenly regains control of her facilties and runs to your side. The Craxil laments that the beastmen will no longer maintain unity after her death and expresses genuine concern about their well-being. You aren't sure why, but you promise to try and convince the human leaders in Mihtana and Lima to recognize the importance and advantages of peace and even integration of beastmen into civilization. She smiles and then the light that made up her corporeal being goes out. \n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue The Story", "result": "Unfortunately, this story takes a tragic end for your sister, who remains a carrier for the plague even after the Craxil's death. You explain to her what the Craxil was and what it planned to do. She backs away from you immediately as if not wanting to infect you. In fact, it dawns on both of you that she will never again get to experience the physical touch of another person in any way ever again without killing them. In a deep state of sadness, she decides to remain in the wilds as a hermit, embarking on a quest to find a cure for this condition. You want to stop her but in all honesty, you cannot possibly think of anything better for her right now and bringing her to civilization would be a bad idea right now. You wish you could hug her or comfort her somehow, but you both understand why you can't. Instead, you wish her the best of luck and hope she one day finds what she's needs. From this point on, there is not a single night that goes by for the rest of your life that you don't pray for her.\n\n \nWith the death of the Craxil, the doors that sealed behind you are no longer fixed. The infighting amongst the now disunified beastmen makes it easy for you to get through unnoticed on your way back to the village. Along the way you see grippli attacking goblins, kobolds fighting amongst themselves, and the orc patrols seem to have raided numerous humunculi settlements. The large, unified force they once represented is now thinned out considerably, and although the journey is long and your rations are low, you eventually make it back to the village.\n\n \nThe villagers are shocked to hear that the Craxil is dead and you tell them all about it. Some believe you are full of it and think the Craxil still lives. Others admit they bet good money you would die. You were right to assume they'd have redistributed your property under this very assumption and it takes some doing getting it all restored. Unfortunately, they decided to slay your friends Oinky and Snout for ham while you were away and for the first time in your life you chose not to take it lying down anymore. If this journey taught you anything, its that you are going to have to demand respect if you hope to get it.\n\n \nHowever, this journey has taught you a lot more than that. As promised, you travel to meet with leaders in both Mihtana and Lima so that you can try to convince them why peace between the humans and the beastfolk might actually be beneficial. You explain how the Craxil was able to rally them together and organize them and how some of them demonstrated a higher level of intelligence than you originally thought them capable of (i.e. - the kobolds extensive mining techniques and the goblin's tinkering). Unfortunately, despite your best efforts, the world is just not ready to view them as anything other than dangerous savages to be on guard against and you realize that this is how it is going to stay.\n\n \nEventually you return to your farm and begin shoveling out all the pig dung that had been piling up in your absence. As you are working, a girl you took notice of at the local tavern looks over to you. You smile with confidence and she smiles back and suddenly you think... this might not be so bad after all.\n\n \nCONGRATULATIONS!\n\nYou've found real ending #2 of 2.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Challenge The Craxil To Take On Other Corporeal Forms, Then Strike Her Down With Your Sword", "result": "\"It is clear that I have neither the means nor the ability to complete my quest, so as a dead man I ask that you grant one dying wish\" you proclaim.\n\n \n\"Throwing in the towel already?\" she scowls, obviously disappointed that you didn't have some clever trick in mind. \"From your past exploits in my territory I thought you'd at least think of something to try. What do you want?\"\n\n \n\"I want to know how you were able to keep tabs on me during the journey. What other forms did you take besides Brandolf and the old man?\"\n\n \n\"I took many forms. From birds, to rocks, to the very water you swam through to get past the orcs.\"\n\n \n\"Show me\" you demand, \"I want to more fully understand how I was bested before this ends. Let me die with that peace.\"\n\n \nThe Craxil takes the form of Brandolf the Bray first and you seize upon you opportunity. Walking forth with feigned curiosity you unsheath your sword and charge at her with a firm sense of purpose. You bring the blade down through her collar bone and into her chest while she's still in the Brandolf form. She looks surprised, and the look of disappointment is replaced with a smile and a laugh.\n\n \n\"So that's it eh? Not bad. But you see, I can reconstitute my form.\" You withdraw your blade and watch as her flesh comes back together and restores itself anew.\n\n \n\"It was not a bad idea, it really wasn't. The kind of thing a guy like you would probably try. But this is where it is going to have to end. \n\n \nWhile your attention is focused upon the Craxil, your sister springs forth and grabs your arm. The significance of this move is lost on you until you realize she's the carrier of the new plague. You shirk her off and back away but it is too late. The Craxil and your sister then leave, discussing various ideas for disseminating the plague, leaving you to spend the last few hours of your life in complete darkness.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Wipe With The Three Fingered Green Leaves With Red Spots", "result": " \nYou choose the three fingered green leaves with red spots and it is not long after your sanitation ritual that you realize what a mistake that was. Whatever manner of herbs those were you have a burning rash all along and in your backside. Between that and the turtle bite, you are finding it difficult to walk without pain. You really hope this journey ends soon, you really do.\n\n \nThe next three days of travel down the Redridge Pass are surprisingly uneventful. You sneak past the occasional orc patrol and wild animal but nothing particularly difficult. You half expect something to come jumping out at you from the darkness or to find some large camp around the corner but to your plesant surprise the way seems more or less clear. Part of you wonders if it is a trap given the Craxil knows you are coming but then ... what choice do you have?\n\n \nAs you come up a steep incline you look down and with great satisfaction you find what you've been searching for all this time. A colossal chasm, the canyon you've been searching for! The old man said you would know it when you see it and damn if he wasn't right about that! Still, this canyon is freaking huge. It will take probably half a day just to get down to the bottom safely and once down there, there is a LOT to explore. You know the underground cavern that houses the Craxil is accessed somewhere down there, so I guess you don't have much choice than to go down there and investigate huh?\n\n \nYou are about to cautiously decend when you hear the sound of hoofprints behind you...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Don't Wipe At All You Filthy Mongrel", "result": " \nReal men don't wipe, so why should you? LOL, ok.. so that was stupid. But you don't feel like wiping with leaves so you just pull up your pants and keep going. Sure you've got a pretty nasty case of mudbutt going on and you are not looking forward to returning these pants to the girl who loaned them to you (don't even ask why you chose to wear girls pants...). Hopefully this journey will end soon.\n\n \nThe next three days of travel down the Redridge Pass are surprisingly uneventful. You sneak past the occasional orc patrol and wild animal but nothing particularly difficult. You half expect something to come jumping out at you from the darkness or to find some large camp around the corner but to your plesant surprise the way seems more or less clear. Part of you wonders if it is a trap given the Craxil knows you are coming but then ... what choice do you have?\n\n \nAs you come up a steep incline you look down and with great satisfaction you find what you've been searching for all this time. A colossal chasm, the canyon you've been searching for! The old man said you would know it when you see it and damn if he wasn't right about that! Still, this canyon is freaking huge. It will take probably half a day just to get down to the bottom safely and once down there, there is a LOT to explore. You know the underground cavern that houses the Craxil is accessed somewhere down there, so I guess you don't have much choice than to go down there and investigate huh?\n\n \nYou are about to cautiously decend when you hear the sound of hoofprints behind you...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Move Through The Ditch To The Other Side", "result": "The orcs might notice a moving reed and get suspicious and attacking a superior number of superior enemies is just inviting death. You decide the best bet is to move through the ditch and move through while tightly hugging the wall closest to them, thus minimizing your chances of being seen. You hop in and start moving. A tiny little stream trickles through and much of the ground here is mud. The stench of orc shit is strong in here and you begin to realize this is where they've been dumping it (no pun intended). Still, you brave on knowing this is a life or death situation and no time to be getting squeamish. \n\n \n\nYou are now so very close to the orcs but they haven't yet seen you. You move even slower than before but you are confident you will make it. That is, until one of them lifts his nose and sniffs the air. It seems you forgot to take into account the fact that orcs have an exceptionally keen sense of smell. Despite the fact that you are clean, and the fact that the orc manure should be overpowering their senses right now, it seems they've identified your scent. They move over and it isn't long before you are seen. You try to run, but you stumble in the mud that has taken your shoe. You try to run without it but you don't get very far. The orcs were put there on the path to stop you from reaching the Craxil and they've succeeded.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Attack With Poison Tipped Arrows", "result": " \nYou have way more poison than you need to kill the Craxil so why not use it to help you get there as well? If Brandolf was right about this stuff, it should kill anything that ingests it or is stabbed by it. The orcs are very large creatures too, so you hope you will be able to hit them. You apply the poison to about a dozen of your arrows and take your stance. You pull out the first poison arrow, notch it in your bow, pull back the drawstring as far as you possibly can, and release.\n\n \nThe first shot is a success. One of the closest orcs takes it in the shoulder and it isn't long before the poison takes effect. He is laying on the ground vomiting and though he isn't dead yet, you know it won't be much longer for he has the look of death upon him. The other four are now charging at you. The two in front have their shields out, as if to block any subsequent shots. You quickly let fly another arrow. It goes precisely where you aimed but one of the front orcs anticipated it and blocked it with his shield. You manage to get one of the ones in back in the leg with your next shot, bringing your enemy's total to three but they are nearly upon you now. You only have enough time for another two shots and the forward orcs manage to block them with their shields. They've certainly developed a clever counterstrategy to your strategy haven't they? \n\n \n\nNow they are upon you, hacking you to pieces and bellowing insults like \"stupid morra\". You don't live long enough to hear him finish his next line.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Run Past The Guardians, Grab The Taskmaster, Jump From The Ledge, And Run", "result": "You may be in close range, but you doubt if your skills with a bow would enable you to kill in quick succession like that. Instead, you choose the more daring approach. After all, the crazier the plan the less likely they are to see it coming. You gather your nerve, fixate upon your target, and bolt. The kobold guards jump back like they've just seen a screamer or something and you sail past them and onto the ledge. The taskmaster, still focused on the fire, is completely surprised when you grab him and jump off the ledge. By now, every kobold in the colony is aware of what you've done so you just blindly run down the back passage and deeper into the mines. \n\n \n \n\nYou haven't any idea where you are going and there are numerous kobolds chasing you from behind. Thankfully, their legs just aren't long enough to keep pace with you, though they certainly push themselves trying. You focus all your attention on trying to avoid the kobolds that are deeper in these mines while simultaneously trying to find a secluded place to stop and interrogate your new prisoner. Unfortunately, you're so focused on this task that you don't see the dagger your kobold prisoner pulls out of his sleeve and plunges into your chest. Seems the flaw with your plan was that you didn't have any time to properly restrain your prisoner and now you are dead.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Climb The Rockface To Get Beyond Their Reach", "result": "The skeletal undead aren't exactly known for their climbing skills so you promptly head over to the steep rockface and set about climbing to a point beyond their reach. You are almost at the top when the skeletons reach the base. The attempt to climb but as you had hoped, they are substantially less successful than you. One of them responds to the situation by tossing his hand axe at you and you move your hand just in time to avoid it. You make sure it stays stuck in the rockface so it doesn't get to try again, then pull yourself up and over the top. \n\n \nYou are glad to be away from those damn things and now that you are at a slightly higher elevation along the mountainside, there's a good chance you won't be seeing them again. Just got to keep your cool and remember to be stealthy. You continue your journey in the same general direction but keep to this elevation for fear of encountering those undead creatures a second time. After a while, you begin to smell a rather curious smell up ahead. As you approach you discover a camp situated in what is probably the only forested ledge on this entire mountain range. You don't initially see anyone there, but you keep your distance and eventually see something hop down rather quickly from one of the trees and go behind another. You didn't get a good look at whatever it was and you are hoping they haven't seen you. \n\n \n\nNightfall comes and now the occupants of the camp are coming into view. You never believed that at any time in your entire life you'd ever lay eyes on the creatures you are seeing. The grippli, a race of humanoid tree frogs standing at 2 feet tall, have organized this camp. There aren't more than a dozen tops, but grippli are known to be considerable fighters when they need to be and there is no way of knowing if there are more of them in the trees. \n\n\nThey often prefer to fight with poison darts, nets, and bows as they would prefer to keep their enemy at a distance but a few bear swords. You see one of them adorned in considerably nicer garb than the others and commands quite a presence from them so you surmise it must be their leader. \n\n \nSuddenly it occurs to you. These creatures are in Craxil territory so odds are they work for the Craxil. That means that instead of wandering the mountain range aimlessly you ought try and extract information regarding the Craxil's whereabouts from the grippli. Ideally, you could get your hands on their leader but that is going to be easier said than done. There may not be many grippli present, but each one is a challenge in his own right and you have no way of knowing how many may be in the trees to see what you do.\n\n \nEventually, the captain retires to his tent as do many others. Three grippli remain near the campfire out front and again, you have no way of knowing what is still in the trees. The captain's tent is near the back. You surmise you could go around, giving the camp a wide berth, and sneak into the captain's tent. However, you feel like you should at least do SOMETHING about the three on watch or you may be the one getting captured instead. This is quite a dilly of a pickle indeed.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Sneak Around Back And Enter The Captain's Tent Quietly", "result": " \nYou don't foresee any way to take down a group of three grippli given each one would probably pose a challenge. As well, they are tasked with being nightwatchmen so you doubt they'd abandon their posts so easily no matter what you do. You are going to just have to take a risk and sneak into the captain's tent without attracting any attention. You give the camp a wide berth as planned and SLOWLY work your way along the far edge of the treeline until you are in a position to sneak in towards the captains tent without being seen by the grippli at the campfire. \n\n \nYour approach is successful. You slowly creep in, staying low to the ground. You can't help but look up at the treetops everyone in a while out of fear that darts, arrows, or nets may come raining down upon you but so far nothing has happened. Perhaps there is nobody there or perhaps they just don't see you. Either way, you've made it to the captain's tent. Cautiously, you open the canopy and enter the tent. As you had hoped, the captain is asleep and you take care to knock him unconcious with a block shaped wooden figurine from his tent. Now all that's left is to carry him away from the camp, someplace safe where you can interrogate him for information regarding the Craxil. \n\n \n\nYou exit the tent with the grippli captain slung over your shoulder. At only 2 feet tall the little fella is surprisingly light. Unfortunately, as you exit you hear a rather startling noise. It sounded like a cross between a ribbit and a scream. Whatever the hell it was, it came from one of the grippli over by the campfire. Almost immediately, the whole camp is on alert. Grippli are dropping down from the trees and coming out of their tents. You take off and run, your only real option left. Unfortunately, the grippli have amazing speed and agility. You drop the captain behind in hopes of getting away but before long you've taken a few darts in the back. As the poison sinks in, you realize it no longer matters if you outrun your pursuers... this stuff will kill you anyway.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Construct A Pit Trap And Lure The Three Out Towards You", "result": "You need to dispatch with the three grippli keeping watch but you cannot do that in the camp or you will almost certainly get attention. Therefore, your only real option is to lure them out and eliminate them somehow while they're away from camp. Even if you do lure them away from their camp though, three grippli are more than a match for you so you are going to have to construct a trap of some sort. You remember seeing a small drop off in the middle of the path you just came down and that gives you an idea. \n\n \n\n \nYou take about a dozen of your arrows and plant them firmly in the ground (arrowhead up) at the bottom of the hole you encountered along the path. You only lightly cover it with what little large leaves and vines you can find, then cover this foliage completely with sand and small rocks (enough to cover the vegetation but not enough to make it fall into the hole). Your hope is that you will be able to lure your three grippli out here away from the camp and then fall in on top of your arrows. The only thing left to do is figure out how you are going to lure them away from the camp without them alerting the camp as well.\n\n \nYou decide to mimic the sounds of the small prairie dog like creatures out here and toss small pebbles around the corner where they would see them. You seem to have their attention as they are too bored to really entertain themselves with anything else. Unfortunately, the prairie dog gag isn't enough to make them come so next you imitate the sound of a ewe while making loud pawing noises at the ground. For whatever reason, this one gets their attention and they start approaching quietly with their weapons drawn. \n\n \n\nYou continue making animals noises but move back slowly at the same time. At point for them is a hunter brandishing a bow. The other two apparently believe in the sword. Maybe that's not as atypical for a grippli as you thought. You are careful to remain unseen but back up slowly and continue leading them forth with animal noises. Eventually the game is up as the hunter seems to get suspicous and notices you are there. You turn and run using the indentations in the rockwall to your right to help protect you from arrow fire. You take your position behind a rock on the other side of the trap and to your glee they are running straight for it. \n\n \nYES! The sound of your cover giving way under their weight is music to your ears, as are the ribbits of pain emitted shortly thereafter. You surmise they are dead until one of them jumps out of the pit with only a leg wound. He pulls out his sword and glares at you. You feel like facing him like this, it would be an even match. Still, you would much prefer some kind of advantage whereever you can get it. You draw your sword and begin to think carefully about how this is going to go down.\n\n \n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Rush The Creature And Try To Push Him Back Into The Pit", "result": "You realize that if the pit was good enough to kill the other two then knocking him in again ought do the trick pretty quick. Plus, he's still standing only a few feet from the edge. You charge in at him and strike your sword vertically at his face. He parries as you knew he would, and now you prepare to push his 2 foot little keister back into the pit. \n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n\nThe problem with this strategy is that it is predictable. The grippli knew what you were doing as soon as you began the charge. It hopes well out of the way and launches a charge of his own. He cannot match your strength (which is saying a lot coming from you) but he is so damn fast that you can't react to his moves in time to avoid getting stabbed. This persists for a while until finally you drop to the ground looking like one of Freddie Kruger's victims. With a sense of pride, the 2 foot little froggie bastard walks off back to camp no doubt to brag to his friends what he just accomplished.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Toss Dirt In His Eyes, Then Attack", "result": " \nThere is no shortage of dry dirt and rock all around you and as an amphibian you reason he's probably not to terribly accostomed to that type of thing. Given his 2 foot stature, you wait for him to make a move then kick dirt in his face. You reasoned correctly. The frog's large eyes close down firmly and he is clearly unable to handle himself. You almost feel sorry for employing such a cheap trick on the little guy. Almost.\n\n \nWith him unable to see and barely able to compose himself, the battle ends pretty quickly. You return to the edge of the pit and shoot a couple more arrows into your punctured prey for good measure as you don't want any more unexpected surprises to arise when you go in for the capture. You inch your way back to camp under the midnight moon and make sure to scope the place out anew before making your move. As you had hoped, the nightwatchmen didn't rouse anyone before they left. You still don't know about the treetops, but the coast is as clear as its gonna get.\n\n \nYou creep through camp where it is darkest and make your way to the captain's tent. You carefully open the canopy and move inside. As you had hoped, the captain is still asleep. You take care to knock him out over the head with a block shaped wooden figurine you find in his tent, then carry him over your shoulder and out of the camp. Without the three nightwatchmen, it is easy to carry the unconcious 2 ft. lightweight out of camp and out to a safe location. It takes several hours before he awakes, but when he does you already have his froggie hands and feet bound with cloth torn from his own outfit. \n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Time To Talk To The Froggie", "result": "To be honest, you aren't entirely sure which one of you two is more afraid... him or you. The grippli struggles in his bindings and begins to make noise which you are quick to silence. You raise your sword in warning and he begins to quiet down. Quite frankly, you are amazed that you are actually doing this. You've never been in a position like this before, doing something like this. You've always been an underappreciated swineherd your whole life. You are definitely not used to this sort of thing but you sure as hell don't want your prisoner to realize that.\n\n \n\"The Craxil isn't something you can easily kill. It has united the beastmen in this region of the mountains and aims to provide for its people\" the captain starts.\n\n \n\"And what exactly is that suppose to mean\" you demand.\n\n \n\"The humans have driven us beastmen into the barren land of the mountainrange and taken the fertile, soft ground for themselves. The Craxil wants for us to have good ground. Human ground. The Craxil has been organizing us for quite some time now and it is going to help us take what we deserve.\"\n\n \n\"What manner of creature is this Craxil anyway?\" you ask, knowing you'll have to face him eventually. \n\n \n\"We don't know, none of us do. We never see the Craxil, its sends its orders with the riders.\"\n\n \n\"The riders?\"\n\n \n\"Yes. They used to be humans but... well... not anymore really.\"\n\n \n\"You mean he's raising them as undead?!?\"\n\n \n\"No, no, the Craxil would never resort to such deplorable practices. The Craxil breaks their minds with a ritual that takes days. When the Craxil finishes, they become thralls.\"\n\n \nYou are truly frightened by this last comment. It is common knowledge that mind flayers can dominate the minds of others, but they are able to do so instantly. They don't require a ritual that takes several days to accomplish. Brandolf did say the Craxil was a completely different creature than anyone has encountered before.\n\n \n\"Where can I find the Craxil?\" you demand.\n\n \n\"The Craxil resides in an underground cavern, accessed from the base of a large canyon up north. The most direct route is Redridge Pass though I doubt you'll even get there alive. You'll know you are getting close when all the rocks and dirt are red and the cactii become more numerous.\"\n\n \nYou wanted to ask him more questions, but it seems that his comrades have already noticed his absence and begun looking for him. You don't see any other choice than to kill him, hide the body, and head north. But hey, at least you got some valuable information including some general directions.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Moving North", "result": "You ponder what the grippli captain said as you continue on your northward journey. You haven't seen any cactii yet so you surmise you still have a long way to go. But what other dangers await you? So far you've encountered humunculi, undead, grippli, and even a beholder. More amazing is that your sorry swineherding ass has survived this far. Still, you have to wonder just how many different types of creatures there are under the Craxil's command and what this Craxil even looks like. \n\n \n\nYour musings are cut short when your path is suddenly blocked by a very large wolf. Its eyes glow red and it snarls with both anger and malice evident. This wolf is no ordinary wolf. It is huge and it looks like its possessed or something. You draw your sword preparing to defend yourself but it doesn't attack, it simply stands there staring at you. You attempt to move to the side and it follows as if to block your path. You move to the other side and it follows again. You take a step back and it follows with a step forward. You aren't sure you even want to know what it will do if you take a step forward, and for once you aren't crazy enough to find out.\n\n \nSuddenly, the creature does something you did not expect. It speaks. \n\n \n\"Tell me human, do you serve the Craxil?\".\n\n \nYou are tempted to lie and say yes but then how do you know that is the answer it wants to hear? Maybe it serves the Craxil or maybe it is its enemy. Either way, it looks like its going to kill you if you don't share its loyalties so you are going to have to decide what to say.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Yes", "result": " \nYou decide to lie and tell the large creature that you are in fact a rider for the Craxil in hopes that it will calm it down a bit. Quite the opposite. It seems this wolf is infuriated by the Craxil and the recent beastmen influence in the region. You try to go back on your word and tell it the truth but its too late. The massive wolf jumps on you, knocking you on the ground. It goes immediately for your throat. You spend the last moments of your life in a state of sheer terror.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "No", "result": "Honesty always was the best policy. You tell the wolf you are on a quest to kill the Craxil then raise your sword defensively expecting him to attack. Instead, the creature looks you over and accuses you of dishonesty.\n\n \n\"You honestly expect me to believe a scrawny kid like you was chosen to slay a being like the Craxil?\"\n\n \n\"I made it this far didn't I?\"\n\n \n\nThe wolf looks taken back by this comment and you tell him all about the plan to use poison, how you outmaneuvered the humunculi, the beholder's riddle... everything. The creature takes a few steps closer to you and his bright red eyes are bearing deeply into your own. You've never been more scared in your life than you are right now, but it seems the wolf has decided you are telling the truth.\n\n \n\"There is truth in your eyes, a certainty I haven't seen in quite some time. Lots of fear though. Odds are you are going to fail but hey, its your life to waste right?\"\n\n \n\"Well thank you for trusting my allegiance then. Why don't you tell me what the heck you are, starting with how the hell you can talk.\"\n\n \nThe wolf turns back around, front legs spread in an aggressive position. \"I never said I trusted you, you are going to have to prove yourself.\"\n\n \n\"But...\"\n\n \n\"You claim you came from the village. What is this village called?\"\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Jacqueshit", "result": " \nWRONG!\n\n \nThe massive wolf knocks you to the ground and rips your throat out with its teeth. A terrible way to die to be sure.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Jackcrappe", "result": " \nWRONG!\n\n \nThe giant wolf leaps upon you and tears your throat out with its teeth. A horrible way to die to be sure.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Jacquescrappe", "result": "\"Correct\" the wolf admits, \"but even the Craxil and the surrounding beastmen know that much. It doesn't prove anything.\"\n\n \n\"Then ask me something else\" you demand.\n\n \n\"Fine then, I shall!\" \n\n \n\"What is the name of the wizard that came to Jacquescrappe?\" \n\n \n \n \n ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Brandolf The Bray", "result": "\"Correct\" the wolf sighs... \"though the enemy does seem to keep itself awfully well informed on the surrounding humans...\"\n\n \n\"Just cut the crap and give me a real question\" you demand. \"If it won't prove anything then don't ask it in the first place!\"\n\n \n\"Fine then. This one will prove your honesty or lack there of for sure.\" the wolf replies with a wide grin upon his face. \"You claim you were the underappreciated swineherd. I've heard of him as well. What are the names of your two favorite pigs?\"\n\n \n\"How did you...\"\n\n \n\"Ha, don't bother with how I know. All that is important is that I do. Answer this, and I will know you are who you say you are.\"\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Oinky and Snout", "result": "\"Correct\" the wolf concedes. \"I guess you really are the town swineherd. Hard to believe you got this far.\"\n\n \n\"Thanks for the vote of confidence but you still haven't answered my questions. For starters, how do I know YOU don't work for the Craxil?\"\n\n \nThe wolf motions his snout towards a pile of bones. Upon closer inspection, you recognize them as the skeletal creatures that attacked you earlier. \n\n \n\"They were following you ever since they managed to get up to this elevation. I took care of them for ya, how's that?\"\n\n \n\"Very well, but you still haven't told me who you are or how you are able to talk.\"\n\n \n\"Sigh... you ask too many questions frail one\"\n\n \nYou boil at the rude irony of that comment until he laughs and turns back around to face you again. \n\n \n\n\"I'm not really the wolf that you see here, but rather the spirit that possesses it. This creature is my shell. Many years ago, when this landscape was not as barren as it is today, this area here was my home. I'm buried in these lands and still think of them as my home, despite how much they've changed.\"\n\n \n\"I knew it\" you think to yourself. You suspected that thing was possessed the moment you saw the red eyes and you aren't even an experienced adventurer or anything. Maybe your instincts are not as dull as you thought.\n\n \n\"The arrival of the beastmen has distressed me considerably but worse is the Craxil. It brings them together in this mountainside, it organizes them, and it seeks to advance them over the humans. Quite simply, I cannot return to the eternal rest I deserve until the Craxil is destroyed.\"\n\n \n\"I don't suppose you would know anything about this Craxil? I'm told it is a completely unique manner of creature that has not yet been witnessed before.\"\n\n \n\"I would say that sums it up pretty well scrawny one. I don't think there is anything more anyone can tell you that would be of any additional use to you. Just continue as you have been and for the love of all things sacred, be careful. I'm not sure how your pathetic, pencil arms made it so far into Craxil territory but you have gotten farther than any mortal since it established itself here. Stick to what you have been doing and see it through.\"\n\n \nAfter that little peptalk the wolf spirit vanishes in a puff of light gray smoke and disappears from view. You can't say you liked the spirit. Much to vain and abrasive for your taste. Still, you do appreciate that it got rid of those skeletons for you. Rather creepy to know someone had been stalking the sneakery master. Perhaps you aren't the sneakest sneak after all. Well, you didn't get this far by doubting yourself (except when it comes to physical strength) so let's continue forth.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null]}, null, null, null]}, null, null]}, {"action": "Jaquescrappe", "result": " \nWRONG!\n\n \nThe wolf jumps on you and tears your throat out with his teeth. A horrible way to die to be sure.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "What Is A Craxil? Is That A New Brand Of Butter Cracker?", "result": " \nYou attempt to lie to the giant wolf creature but despite your skill as sneakery you've always been a horrible liar. The dishonesty is not taken well and before you know it, the massive canine has you on the ground and is sinking his jaw into your throat. You spend the last moments of your life in sheer terror.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Don't Waste Time With Elaborate Trickery, Just Fight The Thing", "result": " \nThere is no longer any element of surprise so the time for elaborate tricks is over. You are simply going to have to face this thing one on one. At first things seem to go well. His 2 foot tall stature is no match for your strength (which is saying a lot coming from you) but he is fast as hell. Given that he's part frog he's hopping around behing you, above you, between your legs, all with the speed and reflexes of a frog. You've always wondered what made people consider these things to be so dangerous.\n\n \n \n \n\n \nIn the end, you've taken on more stab wounds than you can possibly handle and drop to the ground looking like one of Freddie Krougar's victims. The 2 foot little froggie bastard develops a new air of pride and marches back to camp, no doubt to brag to his friends about his new victory. But for you it is simply...\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Try To Sneak Up On The Grippli Near The Campfire And Cut Them All Down Before They Can React", "result": "The way you see it, you don't really have a choice. You can't risk going after the captain while these three grippli are here standing guard like this. You'll be caught. You have your doubts about whether you'd be able to lure the nightwatchmen away from their posts so you are going to just have to be direct about it. There may be three of them, but once again you have the element of surprise and you don't intend to give them any time whatsoever to react to the onslaught you intend to bring. You creep around into the center of the camp and approach the nightwatchmen from behind. \n\n \n\n \nAs you approach, the light from the campfire makes your shadow apparent and the other grippli take notice. After all your years of capture the flag success you'd think you'd know by know that it is much easier to creep up on someone in the dark than near a campfire. Rookie mistake. The grippli nightwatchmen rouse from their posts and draw their weapons. As the three leap forth to attack you, grippli in the trees fire poison darts into your back and others are roused from their tents. I don't think I need to tell you that this is...\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Rain Arrows Upon Them", "result": "Why run when you can fight? The arrows worked for you before and you believe you can get off quite a few shots before they start catching up to you. To wait until you reach the top of a local hill then spin around and draw your bow. The five skeleton creatures are still running towards you in a tight grouping. You let fly the first arrow and it hits the collarbone of one of the back skeletons. You release another and it hits the leg of another skeleton. In fact you score a lot of hits, even putting one through the skull of the lead skeleton. There's just one problem... they aren't slowing down!\n\n \nMaybe you've forgotten, but arrows and bladed weapons are only effective against enemies that still have flesh and blood to let. These skeletons are not slowing down or taking much damage as a result of your arrows. In fact, it would require a more blunt weapon to kill. As they start drawing in close you turn and continue running. You've pretty much lost your head start and now they are hot on your heels. This continues for a while until one of your skeletal pursuers gets it in his mind to throw its hand axe into your back. It only goes downhill from there for you.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Help Him, What Kind Of Adventurer Are You?", "result": "You decide to help the man. What kind of adventurer would you be to deny a father the aid he needs to save his family from the Craxil's minions? The royal military may have abandoned Jacquescrappe because it was remote and of no strategic value but dammit if you are going to end up just like them. However, something about this is starting to feel weird. Why would there be a human caravan up here in the Craxil's lands and why do you have this strange feeling in the pit of your stomach. \n\n \nJust as you are having these thoughts, an owl looks at you from atop a dead tree and just looks at you with intent. You've never been able to communicate to animals like the druids do, but somehow you just know this thing is telling you to turn back. You stop for a minute, then strike yourself and shake it off. Since when did you become a druid and take advice from animals? Aside from your pigs \"Oinky\" and \"Snout\" you've never really connected with any animals anyway. Besides, your gut hasn't helped you win any gambling tournaments so why should you trust it now? You're probably just afraid and subconciously looking for a way to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Helping the man is the right thing to do, you're sure of it...\n\n \nRight?\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Indeed, What Kind Of Hero Abandons His Fellow Man When His Family Is At Stake?", "result": "You arrive in a clearing and the man who pleaded with you earlier has just stopped in his tracks.\n\n \n\"So where's the caravan?\" you inquire, expecting some sort of explanation for this sudden drop in urgency.\n\n \nSilence\n\n \n..............\n\n \nAt this point you are quickly surrounded by other men who are equally silent. The feeling in the pit of your stomach has just gotten worse and you realize that you've been had.\n\n \n\"There is no caravan is there.\"\n\n \n.....\n\n \nAt this point the man who led you here turns to face you. The head suddenly begins to twitch and distort and the head of a skeleton emerges from the mouth as if pushing through a mask. You back up and realize the four other men around you are doing the same. They rush you from all sides and you are quickly overwhelmed. You made a grave mistake in not trusting your instincts earlier, they exist in us for a reason. \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "No, Something About This Whole Situation Is Fishy. I'm Turning Back.", "result": "You don't like any part of where this is going and decide that the best thing to do is to turn back. After all, no humans from Jacquescrappe have ever made it this far into the Craxil's territory so why should you believe there is a human caravan out this far? None of this makes any sense and you think to yourself that these beastmen are not above using your compassion against you as a weakness. It is low, but well within the bounds of what these things might do.\n\n \nYou come to a stop, and look up at the owl. He gives you a warm, approving look then flies away. \"What a strange creature\" you think to yourself. You wait for the man to disappear from view, then wait a while longer for good measure, then continue forward on foot as you had originally planned. Frankly, you're just glad to be away from the suspicious man. \n\n \n\n \n \n \nAs you continue on your journey you wonder if you made the right choice. I mean, what if the man's family really was in danger and you could have made a difference? Did you make the right call? You console yourself by reminding yourself of the importance of your own mission and how you cannot afford to take unnecessary chances. Just as you are having these thoughts, you discover the man who approached you earlier as well as four others standing in the middle of the beaten path with their heads down. It looks like you aren't done with them after all...\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "The Thirst For Knowledge", "result": "\"Wrong\" it proclaims. \"While the thirst for knowledge may be limitless in your kind, it is not your primary concern in times of trouble now is it?\"\n\n \n\"Well... erm...\"\n\n \nYou don't have time to retort. It fires a beam of negative energy into your chest and you disintigrate on the spot, bringing your quest to an abrupt end.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "The Limitless Potential Of Mankind", "result": "\"Wrong\" it bellows, laughing under its breath. \"Your kind's potential is not as limitless as you like to think it is. And besides, your limitless potential isn't exactly showing through in this time of trouble now is it little one?\"\n\n \n\"Well... erm... \"\n\n \nYou wanted to say something about how desperate situations propel human potential to new heights but the blast of negative energy he shoots at you doesn't give you a chance. \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "A Bar Wench?", "result": "The creature and you both get a hearty laugh out of this response but you know that you are wrong and you know you are going to die soon. Indeed, the creature hits you with the same negative energy it used on the humunculi and you disapate into the air.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Run Outside The Cave", "result": " \nYou run outside the cave and around the corner. You are back on the plateau overlooking the village. Your heart is beating fast as hell and you are clutching your sword so tightly you will probably have blisters. Fortunately for you, the humunculi have chosen to run down the path behind their campsite. You wait outside the cave for a few hours and still they haven't returned from the passageway. Perhaps they have chosen to travel further in to pursue you? \n\n \nYou return to the cave's interior and are standing at the campfire. The large passageway on the right side of the chamber is still blocked. You peer down the passageway in front of you, the one the humunculi chose to go down and you wonder what lies beyond its depths. However, as you look left you remember there is still an as yet unexplored passageway down in the cavern where the humunculi nearly overwhelmed you. You aren't going to find the Craxil by standing around here so you are going to have to decide where you want to go from here.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow The Path Behind The Campfire, Where The Two Humunculi Went", "result": "You chose to take the passageway behind the campfire. If these creatures are protecting the Craxil, or at least serving him in some sense, it would makes sense they would head in this direction. You get the strong scent of burning animals or something like that and what you see next is COMPLETELY unexpected. Instead of seeing the two humunculi that ran down this passageway earlier, you are standing directly in front of some kind of hovering demon whose gaze is fixed directly upon you!\n\n \nThis thing looks like a large floating eye with multiple smaller eyes attached atop its head. You realize this thing is a beholder and soon you find yourself paralyzed in its gaze. That's what you get for staring into its eye I guess.\n\n \n\"Answer me puny one, why are you here in my domain?\"\n\n \nYou are too terrified to answer, but this creature appears to grow irritated by your silence so you muster all the courage you've got and speak up\n\n \n\"I'm here to slay the Craxil\" you proclaim, terrified of how this creature will respond to such a bold statement.\n\n \n\"HA! Amusing little one, someone of your strength doesn't have what it takes but it would entertain me to see how you die in the Craxil's mountains. Answer this riddle correctly, and I will permit you to continue through to the other side of my domain. Answer incorrectly, and you will share the same fate as your former pursuers. Are you ready?\"\n\n \n\"Did he kill the humunculi?\" you think to yourself...\n\n \n\"As ready as I'll ever be\" you squeak.\n\n \n\"Very well!\" it bellows, clearly enjoying every bit of this. \"I am a vast canyon that spans beyond sight. I am without end and have been a part of every man whenever there is trouble. What am I?\"\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Go Down To The Cavern Where You First Used Your Bow And Try That Passageway", "result": " \n\n \nNaturally, you are not going to go down the passageway that your pursuers went down, that's just stupid. You want to avoid unnecessary conflict after allso you can increase your chances of reaching the Craxil. This passageway leads you out to a large plateau. To the right, you can see another several clusters of cave networks populated by humunculi. To the left you see a step drop off that would land you in the forest the hunters of your village like to use. In front of you, and in the distance, is a curious looking camp. You see a couple different campfires and at least two dozen tee-pee style tents down over there. You can't make out who the inhabitants are though, at least not from here. Odds are they aren't friendly though. This is Craxil territory after all. Of course, the humunculi in the multiple cave clusters over there aren't friendly either so what does it matter? You still have no leads as to where to find the Craxil but you need to make a decision as to where to go.", "action_results": [{"action": "Investigate The Camp", "result": " \nYou cannot contain your curiosity about this camp but you know you should keep your distance and be careful. They are likely hostile after all. You remember that you are out in the open now so the sun will remove any advantage that the shadows had given you in the caves. You decide to wait until nightfall, then slink in closer to the camp. There is minimal rock cover but you manage to find a decent place from which to observe their camp. They are goblins, armed with schimitars and polearms which you assume must be the work of the Craxil. \n\n \nEven outside the Craxil's domain, goblins are known for their hostility towards humans so approaching them would be stupid. However, unlike the powerful humunculi you've had to deal with so far, goblins are a weaker enemy you feel confident you could stand against (provided you don't get yourself overwhelmed). There are about 30 of the foul creatures wandering about the camp, but the one that catches your interest is the shaman. Decked out in fancy garb and occupying a large tent in the center of the camp, it is clear this one is the leader. It occurs to you that if they are working for the Craxil then this one might be able to provide you with some much needed leads as to where you can find him.\n\n \n\n \n \n \n \n \n \nYou are confident in your ability to handle a single goblin or perhaps even two if your life depended on it but certainly not the entire camp. You're just a sneaky swineherd after all. You wait until midnight, when most of the goblins have retired to sleep. There are still a handful of night watchmen goblins though, and they will need to be dealt with before you can hope to reach the shaman's tent. You also shudder at the thought of the shaman unleashing horrid magicks upon you. Once again, you will have to use the element of surprise to make up for your lack of fighting experience but then... as a sneaky bastard that is your specialty.\n\n \nThe first concern is the single goblin standing at the closest entrance to the camp. He is holding a polearm and needs to be removed before you can get into the camp. As stated before, you are confident you can take him, but you need to be careful not to wake the rest of the camp in the process. One idea is to sneak up on him and stab him through the back with your sword before he can react. Another idea is to try and hit him with an arrow from a distance, then move on to the next target. Either way, he needs to be removed.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Sneak Up And Stab Him", "result": " \nYou might be able to hit the broadside of a barn, but your aim is not sufficient for anything more than a general area. You don't want to alert the goblin to your presence so you are just going to have to deal with him the old fashioned way. Under cover of midnight you slink around to the edge of the camp and work your way along the side until you are close. Despite your apparent lack of skill in fighting and archery you are an absolute master at sneakery. But enough of such destracting thoughts. As the goblin turns away you leap forth, cup his mouth with your left hand, and stab him through the back. You pull the body away from the camp so none of the other goblins will see it.\n\n \nFortunately for you, none of the goblins seem stirred in the least. You removed that problem without attracting attention. Even better, another one of the nightwatchmen goblins has come back to the same post trying to figure out why his comrade is no longer at his post. This affords you the opportunity to repeat the procedure and return once again. The way to the central tent still has a few more problems in store for you. Single goblins patrol the area and there is always at least one patrol goblin within sight range of that tent. Also, the tent itself has its own nightwatchman who is evidently dedicated to the shaman. At the very least, you need to kill one of the patrolling goblins to create an opening and the sentry guarding the tent. With this done, you have a chance at abducting and interrogating the shaman for some much needed information on the Craxil.\n\n \n\n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \n \nYou have some ideas on the patrolling goblin. You could attempt to construct a simple foothold trap out of vine and add some barbs from the camp to dig into his foot. Alternatively, you could wait until he rounds his usual tree and cut him down before the next patrolling goblin comes along.", "action_results": [{"action": "Construct A Barbed Foothold Trap And Place It In The Patrol's Path", "result": "You can't get caught if you aren't around when he trips the trap right? Well, I suppose you could be, but whatever. You spend a half hour or so of your time outside the camp constructing this trap. The knot will tighten the loop around the goblins leg when I pull on the vine so I just need to get back into position and lay the trap. As predicted, the goblin came back around with his usual path but this time he was a little bit to far to the right. You pull the loop a bit closer and wait until the next one comes, but he is a bit too far to the left. After some frustrating trial and error, a patrolling goblin finally steps foot in your loop and you tighten it abruptly around his foot. At the same time, you quickly drag him towards your hiding spot so you can silence him. Goblins are particularly light, especially when they are not wearing armor, so you are able to do it fairly easily. The barbs dug into his foot so deep they nearly too it off. You silence him with your hand then break his neck. For a moment, you are amazed at what you have learned to do given you're just a swine herd, but then again... survival makes us capable of many things doesn't it.\n\n \nThe next patrolling goblin discovers the sword the last patrolling goblin dropped when you got him. You are concerned that he's about to raise the alarm but he just mutters \"Akt Khazzat nighmam noriet maln\" or something along those lines and walks off. You have no idea what he said, but from his tone of voice, you think he thinks the other watchman is skipping out on his duties. Shit, does that mean the shaman will be able to speak English? Surely he will, he's a shaman after all. He better dammit.\n\n \nYou wait for the opening to come again, then quickly maneuver into position to stab the tent's sentry before the next patrol goblin comes around. You peek inside to see the shaman sleeping (lucky you) and drag the sentry's body inside where it won't be detected. You've reached the shaman, and he's still asleep, but you can't very well interrogate him here. You pick up a candlestick from the nearby table and as he's coming to you clock him over the head with it. You check for a pulse to see if he's dead or unconcious and thankfully, he's just knocked out. You gag him and bind his arms behind his back because he won't be able to cast spells without his tounge and hand movements. You use the same patrol opening to escape the camp and return to a spot distant from the camp. You rouse the shaman to wake up and realize you are probably more scared than he will be.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Time For An Interrogation", "result": "Fortunately for you, he does know English as is readily apparent by the curses he chooses to expel regarding your parents. You glare at him and ask him about the Craxil but he just squeals with laughter as if finding it difficult to take you seriously. You ask him again and remove the gag so he can answer but then quickly put it back in when he starts trying to chant a spell of some sort. You punch him and because you're such a wimp it ends up hurting your wrist more than it hurt his face, which only adds to his laughter. You realize this isn't working as planned so you take him to where you stashed the bodies of the two nightwatchmen you killed at the entrance and draw your sword. This seems to make a bigger impression upon him. You take him back further away from the camp and inquire again. This time he seems more receptive.\n\n \n\"The Craxil isn't something you can reason with or just strike down, he's an inspiration to the beastmen of this region. A unifying force.\"\n\n \nThe shaman goes on to explain that the Craxil has been gathering his strength here for longer than the villagers realized and that the weekly raids for food were little compared to what is being organized.\n\n \n\"The Craxil isn't content to leave his children here in the mountains while the humans enjoy the soft lands.\" The shaman explains. \"He isn't after world domination or anything, but he wants to take a few choice pieces of territory from the humans down below.\"\n\n \n\"What manner of creature is he?\" you demand, keeping your sword out as a reminder of your unspoken threat.\n\n \n\"None of us goblins really knows for sure. The riders deliver his orders to us and they are the only ones who have ever seen him.\"\n\n \n\"The riders?\"\n\n \n\"Yes, they were once human but umm... not anymore.\"\n\n \n\"You mean they were raised as undead!?!?!\"\n\n \n\"Heavens no, the Craxil doesn't resort to such disgusting practices. Rather, they become his thralls after a lengthy, mind breaking ritual. They do his bidding now.\"\n\n \nYou pause at that comment. You've heard of mind flayers dominating people's minds like this but they've always been able to do so instantly, without the need for such rituals and practices. Moreover, Brandolf insisted that the Craxil is a being unlike any that has been seen in this world so far. You decide to change the topic to discuss the Craxil's location.\n\n \n\"Where is the Craxil located?\" you ask.\n\n \n\"Pff. Do you even know where YOU are located right now\" the shaman says with a chuckle. \"A bit far from home and looking a little lost out here aren't we?\"\n\n \nYou shove your sword closer to his throat and he ceases to taunt you.\n\n \n\"The Craxil resides in an underground cavern that is accessed from a canyon north of here. When the rocks cease to be this familiar brown and start looking red then you are getting closer. Even closer still when you begin to see the cactii. The most direct route is the Redrange pass, though that has some dangers of its own.\"\n\n \nYou are about to inquire further about what else lies in store for you, but you hear the sounds of goblins in the distance and you are worried the shaman may start making noise for them. You can't afford to be swarmed by goblins right now so you cut his throat and retreat a little until they return to camp. Fortunately, the path he spoke of can be reached by simply going around the goblin camp from a safe distance and continuing in that direction. You still have about a full days journey before you get to this \"Redrange Pass\" and even then you are only at the start of the shaman's directions. But hey, at least you know where you are going now and have the knowledge that you've been going the right way all this time. You just really hope that little shit isn't lying to you.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Onward", "result": " \nYou've gotten past the bulk of the humunculi and the goblins were refreshingly easy, but as you continue forward you shudder to think at what else may lie in store for you up ahead. This nondescript plateau had dredged on for quite a while and still no sign of Redridge pass. Suddently you reach a tunnel and you are dismayed to see a large troll blocking access. Trolls are even stronger than humunculi so you won't be fighting this one anytime soon. The tunnel represents the only way through to the other side as an inclimbable rockface extends in both directions along the plateau. You're gonna have to get through that tunnel one way or another. \n\n \nYou remember that the shaman said that the Craxil uses riders to send its orders out to its minions and that these riders are basically human thralls. Perhaps you could fake it to get past him. Another option is your bow. Trolls are very large creatures and therefore pretty hard to miss, even for you. A final option is to try and distract it somehow. You reason that you could cause a lot of commotion in the half-dead vegetation nearby to draw him away from the tunnel, then circle around and make a run for it. \n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Try To Trick The Troll Into Believing You Are A Thrall", "result": "You dawn your poker face and approach the troll expectantly. You reason that you cannot hope to match a troll's strength but rather take advantage of their lack of intelligence. As you approach, the troll glares at you and is clearly readying his club for a strike.\n\n \n\"I must report back to the Craxil\" you announce. \n\n \n\"And who are you to see the Craxil\" the troll questions.\n\n \n\"I am a rider and have no time for your nonsense. This report is very important.\"\n\n \nThere is a pause as the troll is thinking over your response. Clearly, he isn't sure what to say or do in this situation. It looks like this might actually work. But then...\n\n \n\"Where is your steed?\" the troll asks.\n\n \nShit. Of course, they're called riders for a reason and you haven't got any ride now do you? Of all the rotten luck. \n\n \n\"He is ill, suffers the ick\" you manage, doubtful as to whether or not this will be taken.\n\n \nAt this point the troll isn't buying it. You wish you had considered this before you attempted to lie. Hard to take, being outsmarted by a troll. Even harder to take is the club that has now crushed every bone in your body and left you a mangled mess.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Draw Your Bow And Fire Upon The Troll", "result": " \nYou may only be able to hit a general area, but a troll is a very large and broad target so you have practically no chance of missing here. You position yourself behind a large rock, just out of the trolls sight and ready your bow. The troll is still completely unaware of your presence and just stands there looking bored out of his mind. You pull out an arrow and draw it back in the string. You take aim and release.\n\n \nThe first shot hits the troll in the navel but seems to deal minimal damage. You draw back again and fire one into him, this time just below his chest. He looks confused but now lumbers in your direction. As you pull another one back he detects your presence and is now moving faster. You put another one into his midsection but again this deals minimal damage. You prepare to draw back another but he is upon you now.\n\n \nIt's too bad you forgot that trolls have exceptional regenerative capabilities. It takes more than a few arrows to bring these things down. Unfortunately, this is a lesson that has cost you your life.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Create A Diversion To Lure Him Away, Then Run For It", "result": "The troll may be large, but something tells you it would take more than a few arrows to bring this thing down and you have no intention of getting up close to it for a bluff. It takes time, but after making enough noise from cover you manage to get the troll's attention and lure him away from the tunnel entrance. The creature lumbers slowly and cautiously towards the source of the noise and you are already working your way around from the other side. Eventually you see your opportunity and make a break for it. By the time the troll realizes you are there, you are already behind him and nearing the entrance to the tunnel. He tries to stop you, but you are already inside and despite his best efforts to stop you, you are already beyond his reach. He lets out a series of angry grunts and you continue onward through the tunnel. Clearly all those years of playing capture the flag have served you well.\n\n \nAs you emerge from the other side, you begin to see the rocks getting more red and you take it as a sign that you are on the right path. There was never much foliage in this mountainside but the area you are in now is especially rocky and devoid of vegetation. You hope you will find the Redrange Pass soon so you can deal with the Craxil and be done with this quest. \n\n \n\nYou've been traveling a long time without sleep and dawn is starting to crack. Somehow, the warm beams of sunlight raising up over the distant rocks make you feel sleepy. As you continnue forward along the rugged expanse of jagged red rocks and dirt you discover the remains of an unused campsite. The inhabitants are long gone, but the camp is still here. A cozy warm campfire, soft, cottony sleeping mat, warm blanket, the works. There are no enemies as far as the eye can see in any direction and you think you would probably be able to think better if you had some rest. The warmth and coziness of this campsite is calling to you and since you haven't slept in almost 40 hours now, you begin to consider.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Curl Up And Sleep, You May Not Get The Chance To Later", "result": "You are going to need to stay awake if you want to keep your mind sharp, and you can't do that if you are sleep deprived. It only makes sense that you would need to take a break in your journey and catch some much needed sleep. Besides, the blanket is so warm, the mat is so cottony soft and the sun beams over your face are just wonderful. You feel as though you could just curl up and hibernate like a bear and continue your sneaky journey at night.\n\n \nKind of lucky that you just happened upon such a nice, uninhabited camp huh. I mean, what are the odds right? Well... they aren't very high actually. Actually, its pretty damn convinent isn't it. It's at this point you start to get suspicious but by now it is too late. The entire camp site dissipates into a thick black smoke and you feel as though you've just aged by 50 years. You manage to stand but you can barely move. This is when you notice all the skeletons on the ground that were not here before. How could you not see them before?!? They definitely weren't here before. No way!\n\n \nThe billowy smoke takes form and suddenly it all makes sense in a terrible way. The campsite was just a tempting illusion generated by a wraith. Its terrifying to think that its intelligent enough to lure you in like this, and now that it has already sapped so much of your strength and lifeforce you know in your heart you are completely fucked. Fear gives way to anger, which then gives way to desperation followed by pathetic pleading. The wraith ignores it all and soon you are but a husk of a man and within a few weeks of decay you become just another skeleton adorning his trap.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Focus & Discipline, You Need To Keep Moving", "result": " \nYou decide that there will be time to sleep when your journey is over. Sleeping now would only make you vulnerable within Craxil territory and given the myriad of possible fates that may befall you we simply cannot take that chance now can we. Then again, you have gone almost 40 hours without sleep so far and you aren't even sure if you are halfway there yet. If you continue pushing yourself forth at this pace you may very well collapse. Perhaps finding a safe place to rest isn't such a bad idea after all. \n\n \n\nAs you try to walk away you get the distinct smell of bacon. You look back and see a skillet over the campfire. It smells fantastic. Strange that you didn't notice this earlier though. The campsite seems to be calling to you, but of course that idea is completely absurd. Your beginning to feel like that halfling Brodo Faggins, who traveled relentlessly on his journey without supplies or rest. You suppose that given you've been an underappreciated swineherd your whole life, such an idea is a fun one to ponder.\n\n \nYou catch yourself stopping in your tracks, and starring at the food over the campfire and the mat on the ground. \"How convinent\" you think, \"to have all that food within reach of the soft cotton mat. You shake your head and try to shake it off but the temptation is grabbing at your attention.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Disciplie Man! You Can Do It!", "result": "No! You sense there is something not right about this campsite. There has been nothing but hostile creatures in Craxil territory so what benevolent creature would set something like this up for you? The fact that there's food on the spit means it can't possibly be deserted as well. Moreover, you are CERTAIN that the food wasn't there when you first laid eyes on this camp so something funny must be taking place. It takes a considerable amount of willpower but you manage to turn away and continue walking the other way.\n\n \n\nAs soon as you do, the campsite dissipates into a thick cloud of black smoke and takes the form of a wraith. It is clearly displeased that you were able to pass up its illusion trap but now it is poised to attack you directly. It moves quickly and is capable of blocking your escape regardless of how you try and manuever. Worse, it is noncorporeal so you aren't sure how effective your sword or arrows will be against such a creature. And that's assuming your lame ass is even capable of landing a hit against such a swiftly moving creature. You are beginning to panic until the next beam of dawn's sunlight strikes your face...\n\n \nThat's it!\n\n \nYou aren't sure if this is for real or not, but you remember your grandpappy telling you a story about a wraith a long time ago. The hero lured it out of its cave into direct sunlight whereupon it incinerated on the spot. Dawn is creeping up and you know that there will be direct sunlight soon. You begin to frantically contemplate how you can stall the creature from killing you until the sun rises. Then again, that was just a story. Is there really even any relevance to it? You don't want to waste your last bit of hope and time on this earth on something may only work in children's stories. Perhaps you should go down with the sword in hand instead? Who knows, you may even land a hit. Certainly a more corporal hope than waiting for sunlight to save the day. \n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Stall For Time By Asking The Wraith About Its Life Back When It Was Still Alive", "result": " \nOne thing you've learned about socializing is that people love to talk about themselves. Whether young or old, man or woman, human or elf, all individuals love to talk about themselves. Hell, given the opportunity you could probably talk for hours about your goals, your past romances, your problems, etc... You don't think a physical strike against a noncorporeal being is likely to work and given its speed it is unlikely that you would get away so you really see no other option than to wait for the sunlight to come up. The wraith circles you with considerable speed and you realize you don't have much time to strike up a conversation before it moves in for the kill.\n\n \n\"Tell me creature, what were you in life?\"\n\n \nYou get no response.\n\n \n\"How did you die? Were you murdered or betrayed? Why did you stay behind as a wraith?\"\n\n \nNo response.\n\n \nWhatever the wraith may have been in life, it no longer holds sway over what it is now in death. Or if it does, the wraith refuses to recognize this. In fact, he has been ignoring your attempts at conversation which draws you into a frightened panic. Before long, he moves in for the kill and catches you off guard. The black smoke that forms the visage of his being now envelopes you and you feel yourself growing old at an alarming rate. Your bones grow brittle, your neck sore, your eyesight poor. Soon you can no longer maintain your own body weight and collapse to the ground. It isn't much longer before you lose conciousness. The wraith finishes drawing out the last of your lifeforce then returns to set up its trap once more.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stall For Time By Insulting Its Lame Attempt At A Trap", "result": "You decide to insult its attempt at a trap to try and goad it into a conversation. After all, a physical strike against a noncorporeal being is unlikely to end well for you and it is far too fast for you to run away from. Dawn's light is just around the corner and you decide your best bet is to try and stall until then. Right now the wraith is circling you with considerable speed and you realize you don't have long to engage its attention before it goes in for the kill. \n\n \n\"You should probably stick to direct conflict, that campsite of your's wasn't convincing at all.\"\n\n \nIt seems even the wraith have a sense of pride, albeit a very hateful one.\n\n \n\"It was enough for most of the mortals that come by this way\" it bellows defensively.\n\n \n\"Probably because you have only been preying on mindless humunculi and dim witted goblins\"\n\n \n\"The hell do I care? Life is life. Life repulses me. Life scars me. Life offends me. I hate life in all its forms and will kill you no matter how smart you may think you are meatbag.\"\n\n \nDespite the harshness of his words you are actually encouraged to hear this. The story you heard as a kid warned you that the wraith hate life and light. Perhaps this means the part about the light is true as well? The sun is starting to banish the shadows on the far end of the plateau you are on but it will still be quite a while before it reaches the two of you. You decide to press the matter further.\n\n \n\"Life is simply a state of being, not altogether different from your own\" you retort.\n\n \nThe creature emits a loud, angry shriek and leans forth as if to shout in your face. \n\n \n\"LIFE EXISTS ONLY TO BE TAKEN AWAY YOU FUCKING LOW LIFE EXCUSE FOR A BEING\"\n\n \n\"I'm a lowlife am I? Last I checked you were the one who started baiting mortals with that campsite of yours, and not very well I might add.\"\n\n \nBy this point the wraith is mad and seems intent on intimidating you into accepting things his way. This is good for you, you think. As long as he is arguing with me, he isn't killing me and the sun is inching closer.\n\n \nNow he is not only posturing his face up close to yours, but he is walking towards you, forcing you to back up while he snarls his hateful remarks in your face.\n\n \n\"You mortals are concerned with your own entropic state of being, bringing chaos and disorder to the universe, as does the light you bask in that is born of heat. I feel the disorder. I HATE the disorder. And I hate YOU.\"\n\n \n\"Well I'm sorry to hear you say that, but sometimes a little disorder can be a good thing. The world would certainly be boring if it was predictable and uneventful wouldn't you say?\"\n\n \n\"SILENCE you ignorant creature. Your ignorance pains me. Your entropy pains me. Your LIFE pains me. I'm going to end it now you vile thing. And do you know why?\"\n\n \n\nBefore you get a chance to let him gloat hate further the sun lifts and the wraith is basked in its light. You are thrilled to see that the story you were told as a child was right. The smoke becomes embers and he abruptly disappears from view. Somehow you expected something a little more dramatic, but you're just glad to be alive. And frankly, his quasi-intellectual hate speech was wearing thin. I guess now you have a deeper insight into how wraith think... lucky you.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Draw Your Sword And Strike When The Time Feels Right", "result": " \nNo more running. No more children's fables. It is time to be a MAN! You clutch your sword tightly and manage to compose yourself. Fear still grips you but you aren't going to let it dull your abilities or steal your focus. The wraith is circling you with considerable speed. High pitched shrieks are emitted from the creature and the shrill quality of its voice makes you cringe. You know that eventually he's going to have to make his move and try to attack you and you reason that is probably your best time to attack.\n\n \nIndeed, the wraith does stop himself directly in front of you and stares demeaningly at you, as if offended that you still presume to try and defend yourself. He moves forward very slowly as if to intimidate you and you take a few steps backwards. \"What are you doing?!?\" you shout at yourself and firmly plant your feet into the ground. You aren't going to back down and you aren't going to run. This creature is not taking you without a fight. The creature comes to a stop just a few feet in front of you and you sense this is the best time to attack.\n\n \nYou lunge forward and plunge your sword deep into the creatures form. The noncorporeal being seems to be unaffected and it is at this moment you realize that a physical attack is not going to work against this creature. Unfortunately, by now it is too late as you've just launched yourself at the enemy with that strike and it is now upon you. You begin to age rapidly until you are no longer able to hold your own weight and collapse to the ground. It isn't much longer after this that you lose conciousness. The wraith has drawn up all of your lifeforce and left you for dead.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Run Like The Little Pussy You Are And Cry", "result": " \nYou take a deep breath, calm yourself, sheath your sword, then promptly soil yourself. You are running and balling like a little girl without a date for the festival. You feel something warm run down your leg. You jump thinking the wraith touched you when in actuality you just peed yourself. You run faster and faster, tears welling up in your face and suddenly the wraith just appears directly in front of you. You stop yourself and bolt in the other direction but the creature does it again, and again. No matter how you maneuver or how fast you run it is exceptionally faster and keeps popping up right in front of you as you run. \n\n \nEventually the wraith tires of toying with you and decides to simply drain your lifeforce right there. The thick smoke that comprises his form now envelops you and you begin to feel increasingly old and frail. Before long, you are no longer able to stand let alone run. You collapse to the ground and lose conciousness as the wraith draws the last bit of life from you. Satisfied with his meal, he returns to the rocky shoals and sets up his trap once again, obviously awaiting the next living thing to cross his path.\n\n \nIn the weeks that followed, several other adventurers are sent to try and put an end to the Craxil. One of them recognizes your body from the villagers description and goes over to inspect you. He gathers up your sword, bow, poison, and food rations and notices that you crapped yourself. He succeeds in defeating the Craxil and upon his return to Jacquescrappe describes how you crapped yourself and died. You watch helplessly from the afterlife as the village people and even some girls you used to like laugh uproariously at the news of your fate. But hey, at least the village is safe now right?\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Wait Behind The Tree And Cut Him Down As He Comes Along", "result": " \nYou prefer to keep things simple and avoid the convoluted. Besides, a barbed trap would likely make him scream out before you kill him would it not? You hide behind a tree and wait for the next goblin to make his usual round. As he comes about you plunge your sword into his chest and immediately grab him so you can hide the body before the next patrol arrives. \n\n \nYou wait for the opening to come again, then quickly maneuver into position to stab the tent's sentry before the next patrol goblin comes around. You peek inside to see the shaman sleeping (lucky you) and drag the sentry's body inside where it won't be detected. You've reached the shaman, and he's still asleep, but you can't very well interrogate him here. You pick up a candlestick from the nearby table and as he's coming to you clock him over the head with it. You check for a pulse to see if he's dead or unconcious and thankfully, he's just knocked out. You gag him and bind his arms behind his back because he won't be able to cast spells without his tounge and hand movements. You use the same patrol opening to escape the camp and return to a spot distant from the camp. You rouse the shaman to wake up and realize you are probably more scared than he will be.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Put An Arrow In Him", "result": "You are concerned that if you were to get to close to him or the camp before he is taken out then you will be detected so it is best to deal with the problem from afar. You pull an arrow back in your bow and wait until the goblin stops fidgeting around. You were successful with this thing the last time you used it against that one humunculus, but you know that was just luck. Besides, you aren't going to get a second chance this time.\n\n \nYou carefully aim at the goblins chest because that is the broadest target on his body and an arrow that lands there is likely to still prove fatal. You wait for the wind to die down, pull the drawstring as far back as you possibly can, perfect your aim, and....................RELEASE!\n\n \nThe arrow sails through the air but fails to hit its target. Actually, you overshot and the arrow tore through one of the peripheral tents. You ready another arrow, but the goblin guard is aware now and so is the inhabitant of that tent you shot. You manage to blow out the guards knee with the second shot (despite still aiming for the chest) but its no use as the camp is now stirring and the goblins are now being roused. You pull back towards the humunculus caves you emerged from, hoping to find someplace to hide before they get their shit together. You duck behind a large rock just outside the passageway you exitted from when you first arrived on this plateau. The goblins have explored the area between you and the camp and they are drawing closer. \n\n \nThe shaman leads them into the passageway you came from and for a moment you think you're going to be safe...until one of the footsolder goblins detects your presence. He lifts his spear above his head leaving you no choice but to thrust your sword through his abdomin. Of course, now the other goblins are aware of your presence. Reasoning your longer legs should enable you to outrun the goblins you take off and it looks like you might get away. At least, that's what you thought until the shaman lands a fireball against you. \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Explore The Humunculi Clusters", "result": " \nPerhaps it is wise to stick with the enemy you know right? Anyway, the creatures that have been attacking your village have been humunculi and while they are not the only creatures under the Craxil's command (according to Brandolf) they are the ones he seems to call on the most. Perhaps you'll find clues to his whereabouts somewhere about in their dwellings.\n\n \nThe task of sneaking over to these cave clusters unseen is a challenging one. You are out in the open now, so the sun is taking away any advantage that the darkness would otherwise have given you. Also, a couple humunculi are standing outside in the open, in the front of the cave clusters you seek to gain entry to. Realizing the impossibility of this situation, you fall back a bit and wait until nightfall to make your move.\n\n \n \nEventually the sun sets and the humunculi retire to their caves. You slink over to their position using what little rock cover and shrubbery you have to conceal your approach. Just as you reach the next rock for cover you feel something strike you from above and you lose conciousness. Seems one of the humunculi noticed your approach and got you with a rock from a high vantage point. You're surprised you survived such a blow but you soon wish you hadn't. Your arms and legs are restrained with thick vines and it is clear you are about to become the meal for a handful of humunculi. \n\n \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain In The Corner And Hope To Be Undiscovered", "result": "Even if you succeeded in sneak attacking this one, what about the other two? You cannot possibly hope to defeat two humunculi, especially without the element of surprise on your side. Their monsters and let's face it, elementary school girls still best you at arm wrestling. Your best bet is to remain in the corner and pray. You sit there, hold your breath, and close your eyes. This is probably for the best, because its all over before you realize what's happening. The humunculus discovered you and struck you upside the head with such force that you suffered a fatal concussion. On the plus side, you didn't feel a thing.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Go Back The Way You Came", "result": "You are quickly beginning to wish Brandolf had given you a torch, but given the nature of your quest he probably figured you didn't need to draw attention to yourself. Still, you can barely see more than a few feet in front of your face and it is only getting darker as you continue further inward. You run your hand along the right wall and move carefully, scouting each step with your foot to avoid a fall. Your heart is racing and you know that at any moment, something might come out and attack.\n\n \nEventually, the cave leads into a small inner chamber with a campfire in the middle. Three humunculi are sitting around the campfire, roasting human limbs on a stick as if they were marshmellows. Fortunately, they are not aware of your presence and the campfire enables you to see there are several tunnels leading out from this chamber. On the other side of the chamber is a tunnel that goes deeper in, but you won't be able to go down this way undetected as long as the humunculi are here. There are also nondescript passsageways to the left and the right (large and small respectively) that you can reach as long as you stay in the shadows.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Sneak Down The Small Right Passageway", "result": "You press your body firmly against the back wall of the chamber and slowly work your way around to the right passageway. You pause whenever the campfire flickers light in your general direction, but the humunculi are completely unaware of your presence. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "You reach a large but unoccupied chamber filled with rugged rock formations that hang from the ceiling and jut upward from the ground. Clear pools of water dot the floor and in the distance, fireflies can be seen dancing around in the sky. There is a large passageway on the left hand side of the chamber, and another passageway on the right, near the fireflies. Despite hearing no sounds of any nearby creature activity, you decide it best to remain in the shadows and pick your next destination carefully. \n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Take The Large Passageway On The Left", "result": "You are quickly beginning to wish Brandolf had given you a torch, but given the nature of your quest he probably figured you didn't need to draw attention to yourself. Still, you can barely see more than a few feet in front of your face and it is only getting darker as you continue further inward. You run your hand along the right wall and move carefully, scouting each step with your foot to avoid a fall. Your heart is racing and you know that at any moment, something might come out and attack.\n\n \n\nEventually, the cave leads into a small inner chamber with a campfire in the middle. Three humunculi are sitting around the campfire, roasting human limbs on a stick as if they were marshmellows. Fortunately, they are not aware of your presence and the campfire enables you to see there are several tunnels leading out from this chamber. On the other side of the chamber is a tunnel that goes deeper in, but you won't be able to go down this way undetected as long as the humunculi are here. There are also nondescript passsageways to the left and the right (large and small respectively) that you can reach as long as you stay in the shadows.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Take The Passageway On The Right, Near The Fireflies", "result": "You carefully maneuver towards the right hand passageway, eager to ensure your every step is as quiet and well placed as possible. You step inside the passageway to discover a large pool with crystal clear water that is cool to the touch and ever so refreshing. There sure are a lot of fireflies in this room though. What was once a pretty sight is starting to get aggrivating. As you lean in for another drink of water the fireflies start moving in closer around you and you soon realize that their touch kinda burns. These things are definitely more malevolent than you initially suspected and you are racing to thing of any possible solution for this situation.\n\n \nThe simple solution would be to just run like hell through the swarm and back out into the chamber you came from. Another idea would be to jump into the pool and submerge yourself so the fireflies can't hurt you. Whichever you decide, you're going to have to act NOW.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Dive Into The Pool", "result": "You jump straight into the pool of crystal clear water and take care to submerge yourself as soon as possible. As you suspected, the fireflies are reluctant to actually get in the water, preventing them from harming you. You chuckle to yourself until you realize you need to breathe and there are no straws for you to breathe through. You pop up for a quick gasp of air before submerging yourself again. The fireflies are waiting en masse just above the surface and you begin to fully realize the position you've gotten yourself into. The next time you pop up for air, one of the fireflies burns your upper lip. The next time, two get your nose. The pain makes you want to cry out and you have difficulty holding your breath under such circumstances. You try to endure this, hoping they will leave, but waiting for you to emerge and then striking is like a game to them. \n\n \nEventually you can bear no more and spring forward for a long gasp of air. At this point, a host of fireflies decend upon your face and before you know it, your flesh is seared through and through.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Run Through The Swarm", "result": "This is no time to play around, these things hurt and you need to get out of here. You charge through the heart of the swarm, flailing your arms and trying to get back out into the mainchamber as soon as you possibly can. Their touch burns, and you are taking a lot of burns, but you are determined not to cry out lest you draw the attention of the caves other inhabitants. Though it only took you a few moments to get back out to the main cavern, you have a multitude of small, circular burns on your arms, face, and sides. It sucks, but hey... live and learn. Even pretty things can be mean. And you're still alive so there's that. Time to continue on your quest.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Time To Continue On Your Quest", "result": " \nYou reach a large but unoccupied chamber filled with rugged rock formations that hang from the ceiling and jut upward from the ground. Clear pools of water dot the floor and in the distance, fireflies can be seen dancing around in the sky. There is a large passageway on the left hand side of the chamber, and another passageway on the right, near the fireflies. Despite hearing no sounds of any nearby creature activity, you decide it best to remain in the shadows and pick your next destination carefully.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null, {"action": "Attack The Humunculi With Your Sword While They Are Relaxed", "result": " \nThese humunculi are blocking a passage that may lead to the Craxil; and the fewer of them there are, the less difficult it will be for you to have to sneak around. You draw your sword and lung forth plunging it into the back of the nearest unsuspecting humunculi. You swell with pride realizing that you have just killed your first monster, and a humunculi too! Unfortunately, you have difficulty removing the sword from the humunculi's body and the others have immediately taken notice of you. You attempt to run back out of the cave from whence you came, but the creatures are faster than you are. They beat you savagely before bringing you back to their campfire for desert.\n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Refuse The Offer And Tell The Assholes In Your Community Where They Can Shove Their New Idea", "result": "The people of Jacquescrappe have never really treated you with respect and you never really liked them either. Moreover, you are offended by how many of them just agreed to send you in without even bothering to ask you how YOU felt about the idea. You decide to return to your swineherding responsibilities and let the rest of the townspeople try to figure this out for themselves. \"Fuck 'em\" you think as you leave the council chambers and return to the fields.\n\n \nIn the weeks that followed, several intrepid individuals attempted to reach the Craxil and never returned. Many townspeople gathered together all the gold they had in hopes of putting together a reward for a worthy adventurer who might succeed in this task. Many others were sent to the royal palace, begging desperately and fruitlessly for military assistance in their remote and low value settlement. In the end, all these events failed and soon, the raids returned.\n\n \nIf the townspeople didn't like you before, they certainly hated you now. While before you would sometimes get dirty looks or the occasional one word answer, they now ignore you completely wherever you go. You insist that you had every right to refuse such a foolish plan, but most just dismiss you as being a selfish bastard. You return to the fields to talk to \"oinky\" and \"snout\", the only friends that haven't turned their backs on you yet.\n\n \nIn the monthes that followed, numerous people are dragged off into the mountainside, never to be heard from again. You smile as the fat hog of a woman with a barbed tounge that pissed you off the most is seen screaming while in the grasp of one of these creatures. However, one night while you are cleaning up the digested remains of oinky's chili burritos you are surprised by two humunculi. You may have enjoyed it when others you didn't like so much got carried off, but this time it is you. You are never heard from again.\n\n \n\n \nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story58.json b/data/scraper/stories/story58.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..511539a --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story58.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=23928", "context": "", "first_story_block": "The wintry winds howl a horrible wail, whipping white watery snow against the weathered watchtower\u2019s westernmost wall. Yes, it is indeed a dark and stormy night, but darker and stormier and maybe just a tad more purple than your run-of-the-mill dark and stormy night.\n\n\nSomewhere deep in the forest a unicorn frolics in a magical glade, as elves watch and scamper amongst the trees, polishing their bows with the blood of dwarves.\n\n\n\u201cKilled a big fat one today, Elfrond,\u201d says Elfmoor. \u201cBastard was trying to chop down a cherry tree. Can you believe it, a fucking cherry tree? Sacrilege.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHave you ever wondered why we hate the dwarves so much?\u201d asks Elfrond.\n\n\n\u201cWhat do you mean? They\u2019re fucking dwarves! And this one chopped down a tree. A cherry tree. Only thing that rivals my love of trees are cherries. And music. And song. And like five other things.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah, I\u2019ve just been thinking lately. How did we get these sweet bows, if we didn\u2019t chop down a tree to shape them. And how do we burn fires without firewood? And why exactly do we hate the dwarves?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s canon. Don\u2019t ask questions.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s a cannon?\u201d\n\n\nSuddenly, the elves quit bickering. Something that only happens once in a thousand years occurs. The glade explodes with magical aura as the unicorn releases its legendary rainbow fart. Magical anomalies, such as this, signal only one thing: the birth of a hero.\n\n\nElfmoor takes a big whiff of the magical aroma. \u201cB. E. A. Utiful. Times like this make life worth living.\u201d\n\n\nElfrond shakes his head. \u201cElfmoor, we\u2019re immortal. I\u2019ve seen this like ten times already. And every time this happens, it means something evil is about to come afoot.\"\n\n\n\u201cBut the hero always wins.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHave you ever heard the term collateral damage?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIs that a sword?\u201d\n\n\nAnd there you have it. The magical unicorn fart that marks your birth. How exciting! I wonder what type of hero you will grow up to be.", "action_results": [{"action": "Heroic knight, heroic knight!", "result": "Ah, the noble knight in shining armor. And they say chivalry is dead.\n\n\nYou are born into a loving but stern peasant family in the hamlet of Forest Hill. Your formative years are a medley of hardship, merriment, and hard work. While most of the other children in the hamlet are content to play ragamuffin children\u2019s games and live out their lives in this quaint corner of the woods, you aspire to greatness, spending every evening selling turnips and every night mucking shit from the stables. With all this (paltry sum of) loot, you are able to afford sword and shield lessons from the guardsmen.\n\n\nOne fine autumn evening, you and your sword master Jon are finishing a sparring session. Jon is bigger and faster than you are, but you have taken his lessons to heart. Training swords are blunted, but they hurt all the same when they whack you.\n\n\nJon\u2019s sword arcs toward your shoulder. You raise your shield, and the wood splinters. With a quick twist of the wrist, you yank the shield downwards, catching Jon\u2019s sword in the process. He is open; here is your chance. You swing your sword\u2026\n\n\n\u201cDodge!\u201d you shout, dropping to the ground. Jon\u2019s fist sails an inch above your head. You toss your shield and lurch from your knees into Jon. The pair of you grapple on the ground. Dust flies. Both of your swords are lost in the ruckus.\n\n\nA fist catches you square in the gut. Once, twice, three times. You spit in Jon\u2019s eyes and roll to the side, and stagger to your feet. A leg comes sweeping toward you.\n\n\n\u201cDodge!\u201d you shout, jumping back. You avoid the leg, but tumble onto your ass. Before you can regain your feet, a boot hits your chest, shoving you back into the ground.\n\n\nJon stands above you and smirks. \u201cYou know what you forgot to do?\u201d\n\n\nYou nod, knowing.\n\n\n\u201cYou forgot to DODGE!\u201d\n\n\nYou share a hearty laugh. At first, Jon would shout \u2018dodge\u2019 to train you to avoid taking hits, now it is your job to shout it when you train. He even sends kids around to throw shit at you randomly during the day. That really sends the message home. You have come so far that the art of dodging has almost become a sixth sense. \u2018If they can\u2019t hit you, they can\u2019t kill you,\u2019 Jon had reasoned.\n\n\nThe pair of you head to the watch house to clean up. The building is small and reeks of sweat and mildew. The hamlet only has three guards, so upgrading their housing has not been a top concern of the local Baron. You are just thrilled the hamlet has guards at all.\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re getting good, kid. Real good,\u201d says Jon, stripping his leather armor. \u201cI think you\u2019re ready for some real patrol work. We just got a report the other night about some disappearances on the Baron\u2019s Road. It\u2019s probably just some bandits, but we need to take care of it. You in?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Hell yeah I'm in.", "result": "\u201cHell yeah I\u2019m in.\u201d\n\n\nJon nods. \u201cGlad to hear it.\u201d\n\n\nThis could be your big chance to finally prove yourself. You need to get your name out there if you want to have any chance of receiving a knighthood someday. They do not just hand those things out like\u2026 well, nobody has ever actually handed you anything except a nice big steaming pile of shit. Peasantry blows.\n\n\nUnder cover of darkness, you and the three guards head out along the Baron\u2019s Road in the back of a covered wagon. No one has ever thought of ambushing bandits in a covered wagon while guised as merchants. Surely, the plan will go off without a hitch.\n\n\nSamwellington the Fat jitters in his seat. You are not sure if it is because he is scared or hungry. How Sam became a member of the guard is beyond your imagination. Jon trusts him for some reason, and that is good enough for you. \u201cNervous kid?\u201d he asks.\n\n\nThat you might eat me. \u201cNo. If Jon says I\u2019m ready, then I\u2019m ready.\u201d\n\n\nBowie bobs his head. \u201cIt\u2019s best to trust Jon. I didn\u2019t once and then my world went to shit. That draugr attack during the winter of \u201969 was brutal\u2026 I still have nightmares.\u201d\n\n\nJon rolls his eyes. \u201cIf you hadn\u2019t st-\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHey, let\u2019s let bygones be bygones,\u201d says Bowie.\n\n\n\u201cHey do you hear that?\u201d you ask.\n\n\n\u201cSorry, my stomach rumbles when I travel,\u201d says Samwellington.\n\n\n\u201cNo, not-\u201d\n\n\nThe horses whinny and bolt. One of the wheels catches a snag in the road and topples over. Luckily, you land on Samwellington\u2019s gut. Jon cuts a hole in the wagon covering and climbs out into the night, and you and Bowie follow.\n\n\n\u201cOh, fuck\u2026\u201d Jon clutches his sword in both hands and rushes.\n\n\nTwo trolls tower over the corpses of the horses and the wagon driver, tearing chunks of bloody flesh with the effort you would rip apart a boiled chicken.", "action_results": [{"action": "Help Jon.", "result": "In your eagerness to fight at Jon\u2019s side, you forget the most important lesson of your training: always dodge.\n\n\nA troll whips a horse leg in your direction. Off balance and off guard, you cannot avoid the hurling limb as the hoof nails you in the shoulder, severing your sword arm. Blood spouts like a geyser from your body as you crumple to the road.\n\n\n\u201cBowie, help Jon!\u201d Samwellington shrieks. \u201cI\u2019ve got the kid.\u201d Samwellington stumbles to your side and rolls you onto your back. \u201cHang in there little buddy. It\u2019s going to be alright.\u201d\n\n\nBlood loss is making you delusional. It is the only way to explain what is happening. Samwellington draws his dagger and sticks himself in the gut. He drags the blade across his stomach, slips his hand into the incision, and pulls out a chunk of his own fat. He smacks the lard on your wound and it sticks in place, stemming the blood flow.\n\n\n\u201cCan you walk?\u201d asks Samwellington.\n\n\n\u201cCan I walk? Can I walk! I just had my fucking arm cleaved off. What the fuck do you think?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah, an arm, not a leg. Don\u2019t be a baby.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSam we could really use your fat ass over here,\u201d shouts Bowie. \u201cAny motherfucking time!\u201d\n\n\nYou hear a gurgle and a gasp just before Bowie\u2019s head goes sailing through the air. Samwellington gulps and scurries away to hide behind the wreckage of the wagon. What a coward. Oh well, at least he saved your life.\n\n\nLeaning against your sword, you stagger to your feet. One of the trolls ravages Bowie\u2019s headless corpse. The crunching and snapping of bones sickens you, and you fight the urge to hurl as bile tickles your throat. Jon appears to be holding his ground against the other troll, but once his friend finishes devouring Bowie\u2019s corpse, even Jon won\u2019t be able to fend off their combined savagery. You have to do something quick or all of your worthless lives will be over.", "action_results": [{"action": "Throw your severed arm as a distraction.", "result": "You doubt you will be of much use as a combatant, so you may as well make yourself useful in some other fashion.\n\n\nYou grab your severed arm and wing it as hard you can toward the trolls. The troll feasting on Bowie ignores the bloody mess of flesh, but Jon\u2019s troll clambers after it on all fours. A deep sadness seeps into your bones as you hear the troll crunch your arm in its jaws. Heroes are not supposed to be eaten.\n\n\nJon slices the back of the trolls\u2019 knees, and the troll howls in agony as its legs buckle. Jon leaps onto its back and cleaves the head clean off with one swipe with your arm still clenched between its teeth.\n\n\n\u201cGo Jon,\u201d Samwellington cheers. The fat coward is still cowering behind wreckage from the wagon.\n\n\n\u201cWhy don\u2019t you try and help?\u201d you snarl.\n\n\n\u201cI am helping. I\u2019m providing emotional support.\u201d\n\n\nYou roll your eyes and look back in time to see Jon finish off the second troll.\n\n\n\u201cWow, that was fast,\u201d you say.\n\n\nJon shrugs. \u201cA little emotional support can go a long way. Nice job yourself. You didn\u2019t even need to have your sword arm attached to the rest of your body for it to be useful. Try dodging next time though.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know if there will be a next time. How can I fight without a sword arm?\u201d\n\n\nJon winks. \u201cI know a guy: magic fellow and what not. He should be able to do something for you.\u201d Jon raises his hand. \u201cHold on one second. I\u2019ll be right back.\u201d\n\n\nJon darts into the forest and you hear the lovely sound of steel biting into flesh and the accompanying screams.\n\n\n\u201cSam, why don\u2019t you go back to the hamlet and draft the report,\u201d says Jon, emerging from the forest, \u201cadd five dead bandits to it. I\u2019ll take our buddy here to the hedge wizard.\u201d\n\n\nWith that, you and Jon part ways with Samwellington and enjoy a relatively droll venture to the hedge wizard\u2019s hut. You understand why he is only a hedge wizard. The hut is a ramshackle smattering of twigs and leaves that appear to be held together by nothing but mud and bird poop. The entire place smells worse than a popcorn fart. This may not have been the best idea, but before you can raise your concerns with Jon, he hollers out.\n\n\n\u201cHey, Osprey, get out here. I need a favor.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIs that you Jon?\u201d You hear weird pops and bangs from inside the bird poop hut. \u201cJust a second.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cTake your time,\u201d says Jon. \u201cNo hurry.\u201d\n\n\nAfter a few minutes, a bent white-bearded man with smoldering eyebrows and a staff teeters out of the hut amidst a cloud of smoke. The smoke shrouds Osprey and follows him around. It smells of rancid cheese and burning bird shit.\n\n\n\u201cWhew,\u201d Jon attempts to wave the stink away, \u201cwhat were you doing in there?\u201d\n\n\nOsprey\u2019s eyes light up. His lips twist into a smirk as he cackles. \u201cWizard things.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh, Dear God.\u201d\n\n\nOsprey\u2019s smile vanishes as he notices you and totters over. He grabs your head in both hands, lifts your chin, peers into your eyes, and prods your chest with a bony finger. A chill courses through your bones. He proceeds to violate your personal space for several minutes while you do your best to avoid suffocating in the smoke.\n\n\n\u201cMmhmmm,\u201d he says to himself. \u201cJust as I thought. The boy is missing an arm.\u201d\n\n\nYou roll your eyes. \u201cHow observant.\u201d\n\n\nOsprey whacks you upside the head with the staff. \u201cMind your manners, boy, or I\u2019ll turn you into a leprechaun.\u201d He shakes his head. \u201cAin\u2019t nothing sadder than a leprechaun.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNot even a smelly old man living in a bird shit hut?\u201d\n\n\nOsprey clobbers you with the staff again. \u201cI\u2019ll have respect from you boy. This is no joking matter. You ever see a leprechaun you give that poor bastard nothing but your sincerest sympathies.\u201d He smacks you with the staff one more time for good measure. \u201cNow about that arm. I can fix you right up. Get you a brand new ethereal arm. Those things are sweet: impervious to physical damage. Magic will fuck you up though.\u201d\n\n\nOsprey begins nodding his head and drawing weird symbols in the ground with his staff while mumbling to himself.\n\n\n\u201cJon,\u201d you whisper, \u201cI really don\u2019t think this is a good idea. This guy is cracked.\u201d\n\n\nJon scoffs. \u201cPosh. You want to be a knight, right? Well, a knight needs both arms.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Bring on the magic.", "result": "Truer words have never been said. Well, they probably have, but you cannot think of any at the moment.\n\n\n\u201cAlright,\u201d you nod, \u201cbring on the magic.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s the spirit.\u201d Osprey bumbles around finishing his runes. He mutters some incantations, bops you on top of the head a few times with his staff and bursts into poetry.\n\n\nA wizard did it, a wizard bid it.\n\n\nAn arm grew, fresh and new.\n\n\nEthereal, but not imperial.\n\n\nAs we live in a realm, surrounded by elm.\n\n\nNature\u2019s magic, is never tragic.\n\n\nMy rhymes are bad, but I\u2019m not mad.\n\n\nThis spell worked, \u2018cause Cyrus twerked.\n\n\nJust like that, a sprite and shiny ethereal arm appears from your shoulder. You clench your fist and feel the power pulsing through your\u2026 veins? Jon claps politely as Osprey bows.\n\n\nThe hedge wizard slaps you across the back, smiling. \u201cNow don\u2019t go committing sins of self-pleasure with that thing. You might rip something important off.\u201d\n\n\nYou gulp.\n\n\nOsprey cackles and slaps you some more. He seems to like hitting you. \u201cYou can shoot magic energy blasts out of that thing too. I thought that might be useful for a hero.\u201d\n\n\nJon shakes his head. \u201cIf you want to be a heroic knight, don\u2019t do that. Knights aren\u2019t magic. Only trouble can come of it. This isn\u2019t a wizard\u2019s tale.\u201d\n\n\nOsprey shrugs and wanders back into his hut. The door creaks shut and you soon hear the calamity snap back to life. He pokes his head out to offer one last piece of advice. \u201cYou treat them leprechauns with respect, boy, you hear me?\u201d He slams the door shut and that is that.\n\n\n\u201cWhat do we do now?\u201d you ask Jon.\n\n\n\u201cWell, I\u2019m going to go back to the hamlet and make sure everything\u2019s in order. You should go try out your new arm and get used to it.\u201d\n\n\nYou consider that a smashing idea and head off to the neighboring kingdom of Irelandshire to seek out one of these mystical leprechauns. With the help of several drunken and boisterous natives, you learn the not-so-secret location of the Valley of Rainbows where the leprechauns supposedly abound. They warn you not to go though because it is a sad and wretched place. Obviously, you ignore them.\n\n\nHundreds of rainbows dot the easy to access valley, and you have little difficulty tracking one down to its end. Naturally, a great pot of gold sits next to it, but no leprechaun.\n\n\nYou try calling for them, taunting them, begging them, praising them, but none appear.\n\n\n\u201cWell at least I\u2019m rich.\u201d\n\n\nYou pack as much gold as you can onto your horse (which isn\u2019t anywhere near the entire pot since gold is heavy, yet it\u2019s still enough to buy a castle or two) and prepare to return home.\n\n\nAs you approach the precipice with the cave that leads out of the valley, a shrill cry booms from deep in the heart of the valley.", "action_results": [{"action": "I'm rich. I'm going home.", "result": "Where is your sense of adventure? Heroes aren\u2019t supposed to be in the game just for the money!\n\n\nWhat about for princess bosom?\n\n\nPrincess bosom is nice, but even with that you are still only a cheap imitation of a true hero. Besides, I do not see any princess bosom in the area, and no, you cannot buy princess bosom. You must earn such luxuries.\n\n\nAre you telling me I don\u2019t actually get to go home?\n\n\nNo, you can go home if you want. I\u2019m merely giving you an opportunity to reconsider because I am a kind and kindred spirit. Eh, who am I kidding? I\u2019m kind of a dick, but my offer still stands.", "action_results": [{"action": "Piss off, I'm going home with my booty.", "result": "You elect to go home with your wealthy horde of treasure, as you have every right to do so. I applaud your resolution. That takes cajones. Even divine intervention cannot derail you from your path.\n\n\nWith your newfound riches, you decide to take a luxury cruise on the C.Y.S. Generic Heroine. She is truly a gallant vessel. You dine on raw oysters and baked clams, which you eat off the bare breasts of dashing dames. At night, mermaids sing scandalous songs as they swim along with the ship, attempting to lure foolish sailors and passengers into their clutches, but not you, no, you are too wise. You simply listen and enjoy the sweet melodies.\n\n\nThe seas stay smooth and calm and you enjoy a pleasurable sailing experience. Pirates only attack once, and with your bitchin\u2019 ethereal arm, you smash and bash them to bits, claiming their brig as your own. You even remembered to heed Jon\u2019s warning and not use the magical energy blasts to preserve your status as a heroic knight.\n\n\n\u201cHow was your trip?\u201d Jon asks as you arrive in port.\n\n\n\u201cProfitable.\u201d\n\n\nSamwellington\u2019s mouth waters as he sniffs the seafood on your breath. \u201cDo you have any more clams?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI hope so,\u201d says Jon, ignoring Samwellington. \u201cYou missed the king\u2019s tournament. Sooooooo much shit went down.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJon found a fire-crotch.\u201d Samwellington beams gaily. \u201cAnd killed a no good dirty evil wizard.\u201d\n\n\nJon nods. \u201cThe future looks bright. That\u2019s for damn certain.\u201d\n\n\nThe three of you leave the docks and head into the city, ready to raise hell and fuck bitches make sweet tender love to beautiful maidens. What, did you think I would be spiteful and have you die of the Great Pox or be devoured by the kracken? ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "You convinced me, oh benevolent and mighty guardian angel.", "result": "No one likes a kiss ass. I'm more akin to a god than an angel anyway.\n\n\nTaking a deep whiff of air you can smell the magic. This place has more to it than abandoned pots of gold and rainbows after all. You order your horse to stay and guard your gold as you dart towards the disturbance, and he obeys, because that is what good horseys do.\n\n\nYou storm through the trees, snapping branches and scaring furry little forest critters. In your haste, you trample a chipmunk. The little fellow\u2019s bones make a nice crunching noise.\n\n\n\u201cHey what\u2019s the big idea!\u201d\n\n\nYou whirl around but do not see anyone. You inspect the bottom of your boot, but the chipmunk is not the speaker. He is squashed like a rotten pumpkin all juicy and splattered.\n\n\n\u201cOver here you idiot.\u201d A giant of a man posing as a tree rumbles toward you. He has moss and vines for a beard and hair. His green eyes glimmer with malice. A bear and a wolf lumber along at his sides. \u201cWhy are you destroying my forest?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSorry, I was looking for whatever made that awful cry.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat was a leprechaun bemoaning his sorry fate of being a leprechaun.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cCool, can you show me where they are?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou murder my friend and harm my trees and you ask me for help? Give me one reason why I shouldn\u2019t bring you home to my wife and tickle you to death for her amusement while my children eat your toes!\u201d\n\n\nWhat in the name of Pegasus is this thing? Oh, if only you had brought that book on mythical creatures Samwellington bought you for your birthday. At any rate, something tells you he does not belong in Irelandshire. You do not think you will be able to reason with him. If the chipmunk was his friend, honor would dictate that he avenge the cute little guy\u2019s mushy corpse. How do you want to play this?", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell him, 'Everything I say is a lie.'", "result": "A smug smirk crosses your lips as you proudly declare, \u201cEverything I say is a lie.\u201d\n\n\nThe weird tree man thing stares at you then shakes his head in pity. \u201cWhat did you think a paradox would do? Make my brain melt into soup?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes, actually.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI am a leshy. Not an imbecile.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI have no idea what that is. Do you sing songs?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ll see what I do.\u201d\n\n\nThe leshy\u2019s animal friends attack and pin you to the ground before you can react. You manage to strangle the bear to death with your ethereal arm, but this only enrages the leshy further. He plucks you from the ground as a princess would an eyelash and carries you off to his shanty with the wolf nipping at your feet.\n\n\nOnce inside his home, he binds you with vines and hangs you from the ceiling. His wife and children enter from kitchen.\n\n\n\u201cOh, wonderful,\u201d his wife cries with glee, \u201cyou found a wanderer! We get so few in the Valley of Rainbows.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThe stupid leprechauns keep everyone away,\u201d says one of the children. \u201cNo one wants to be near a leprechaun.\u201d\n\n\nThe leshy\u2019s wife smacks the child upside the head. \u201cYou treat the leprechauns with respect young man. They have enough misfortune without your drivel.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s right. Behave yourself, or I won\u2019t let you eat his toes,\u201d says the leshy.\n\n\n\u201cYes Pa.\u201d\n\n\nThe leshy begins tickling you as the children nibble on your toes. The wife shoves a hand down her dress and begins to moan and giggle. You shut your eyes and vomit between fits of laughter and screams of agony. Piss runs down your leg.\n\n\n\u201cYou evil bastard!\u201d you scream.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not evil. You\u2019re just a failure and a murderer,\u201d says the leshy as he proceeds to tickle you to death. \u201cChipper was one of my best friends. He will not be forgotten.\u201d", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Turn your clothes inside out and put your shoes on the wrong feet.", "result": "You remember now! This creature is a leshy, and there is only one sure fire way to stop a leshy. You whip off your clothes, put them on inside out, kick off your shoes and slip them onto the opposite feet.\n\n\nThe leshy grimaces and his animal companions slink away. \u201cI guess I have to show you the way out now.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI know the way out. Can you take me to the leprechauns?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou want to see the leprechauns? Are you dull in the head?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI like bacon, yes.\u201d\n\n\nThe leshy\u2019s eyes twinkle with fear. \u201cClearly, you\u2019re mentally unhinged. Just like those poor leprechauns. If I take you to them, promise you\u2019ll leave me and my family alone.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSure.\u201d\n\n\nYou follow the leshy into a glade, within a glen, within a gorge, within a holler, within a hollow, within a dell, within a dale, within a dingle, within a canyon, within a vale within the Valley of Rainbows. The trip is quite, shall I say, trippy.\n\n\nThe leshy points to a pool of water where all the rainbows spring forth. \u201cI\u2019m not getting any closer. Give the leprechauns my condolences, and please don\u2019t murder rape my family. Good day.\u201d The leshy leaves in a hurry without another word.\n\n\nYou approach the pool with eager enthusiasm and the leprechauns begin to appear from the surrounding trees\u2026\n\n\n...\n\n\nWhy are you stopping?\n\n\nI\u2019m sorry. It\u2019s too depressing. Give the leprechauns my condolences as well, poor sorry bastards.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Investigate the cry.", "result": "Taking a deep whiff of air you can smell the magic. This place has more to it than abandoned pots of gold and rainbows after all. You order your horse to stay and guard your gold as you dart towards the disturbance, and he obeys, because that is what good horseys do.\n\n\nYou storm through the trees, snapping branches and scaring furry little forest critters. In your haste, you trample a chipmunk. The little fellow\u2019s bones make a nice crunching noise.\n\n\n\u201cHey what\u2019s the big idea!\u201d\n\n\nYou whirl around but do not see anyone. You inspect the bottom of your boot, but the chipmunk is not the speaker. He is squashed like a rotten pumpkin all juicy and splattered.\n\n\n\u201cOver here you idiot.\u201d A giant of a man posing as a tree rumbles toward you. He has moss and vines for a beard and hair. His green eyes glimmer with malice. A bear and a wolf lumber along at his sides. \u201cWhy are you destroying my forest?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSorry, I was looking for whatever made that awful cry.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat was a leprechaun bemoaning his sorry fate of being a leprechaun.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cCool, can you show me where they are?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou murder my friend and harm my trees and you ask me for help? Give me one reason why I shouldn\u2019t bring you home to my wife and tickle you to death for her amusement while my children eat your toes!\u201d\n\n\nWhat in the name of Pegasus is this thing? Oh, if only you had brought that book on mythical creatures Samwellington bought you for your birthday. At any rate, something tells you he does not belong in Irelandshire. You also doubt you will be able to reason with him. If the chipmunk was his friend, honor would dictate that he avenge the cute little guy\u2019s mushy corpse. How do you want to play this?", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Continue as a cripple.", "result": "There is no way you are about to let this bird-brained lunatic work any form of magic on you. Somehow, someway, you will adapt to your crippled state.\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s just not happening, Jon,\u201d you say and walk away.\n\n\n\u201cHey, get back here, kid!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cLet him go, Jon,\u201d you hear Osprey say. \u201cHe\u2019ll come back. They always do.\u201d\n\n\nYou ignore them and keep walking. Left, right, left, you allow your mind to wander and just let your feet carry you where they will. How could this have happened? You are supposed to be a hero! A young knight in training, you had such a promising future\u2026\n\n\nTime passes and the sky darkens as you continue to roam without purpose. Self-wallowing will certainly help you in your quest for glory. You meander deeper into the forest, down into a dell. A coyote\u2019s howl jars you back to reality. You slump against a rock beside a bubbling stream and bury your head into your hand.\n\n\n\u201cEverything I ever dreamed,\u201d you scream, \u201cripped apart and devoured by some beast from hell.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh, do tell,\u201d whispers a soft voice from behind. \u201cI love stories about fallen heroes.\u201d The voice giggles. \u201cOr, would-be heroes.\u201d\n\n\nSlippery wet fingers trace your cheeks and run through your hair. A veil of mist seeps into the dell. Queer sensations stir in the pit of your gut. You think you are being enchanted, and you are not sure if that is necessarily a bad thing.\n\n\n\u201cWho are you?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI have many names,\u201d sings the sweet voice. Her fingers caress your body. You feel at ease in her arms, as if all the aches in your body and pains in your mind wash away at her command. \u201cBut you may call me Organa Mel Fy.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat are you?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAh, now that is a better question, but still not the right one.\u201d You feel her teeth nibble at your neck. \u201cI am an angel to some: demon to others. Last question my sweetness, make it count.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "\"What happens next?\"", "result": "\u201cWhat happens next?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNow that, that is the question of the hour, isn\u2019t it?\u201d sings the sweet voice.\n\n\nThe mysterious creature\u2019s slick fingers trace their way into your breeches and tickle your Johnson. An overwhelming sensation of euphoria courses through your veins. Blood surges through your body. You feel\u2026 invigorated, as if you have more energy than the sun itself.\n\n\n\u201cI get ever so lonely here by myself,\u201d the voice sings. \u201cWon\u2019t you\u2026 play with me?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Sexytime!", "result": "You have never felt so amazing in your life. How could you possibly let this sensation escape? You make sweet tender love to the mysterious creature. She looks human enough, except for the fact she can transform into water at will, which only serves to enhance the awesomeness of the experience. It just feels soooo damn good.\n\n\nA little too good. Blinded by euphoria, ecstasy, magic, hormones, and a fatal condition I like to call \u201cbeing a goddamned idiot,\u201d you fail to notice your lover drag you down into the deceptively deep depths of the stream where you drown in the throes of love-making. Oh, those pesky water sprites!", "action_results": []}, {"action": "It's a trap!", "result": "Shit, it\u2019s a trap! Jon once gave you a book about just this situation. This magical sexy creature is none other than a water sprite, posing as the evil sorceress, Organa Mel Fy, probably one of her sultry minions. She\u2019ll sex you up then drown you in the stream and feast on your corpse.\n\n\n\u201cI want you to want me.\u201d The water sprite moans and works magic on your body with her fingers.\n\n\nTry as you might you cannot resist her allure as she toys with you in her lap. The magical enchantment and sexual tension corrode the fibers of your mind, breaking the mental barriers you constructed for just such a situation.\n\n\nSaggy old nuns. Saggy old nuns. Saggy old nuns. Sally David. Mom. Oh shit, I\u2019m still getting hard.\n\n\nHard as a brick in fact.\n\n\nHelp me!\n\n\nDo you have a sister?\n\n\nYes, but that won\u2019t work.\n\n\nYou whacked it while watching her bathe in the river didn\u2019t you, perv.\n\n\nMaybe\u2026\n\n\nI suppose there is always self-castration.\n\n\nGo to hell.\n\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t be shy, baby,\u201d sings the water sprite, \u201cI just want to rock you like a hurricane, shake you all night long, twist and shout, scream a rebel yell, make you walk on water, take you down to the paradise city, administer rough justice, and get your rocks off.\u201d\n\n\nLosing the battle of self-control your johnson twitches wildly. \u201cOh, sweet merciful God, that sounds orgasmic.\u201d\n\n\nThe water sprite leans in close and whispers in your ear, \u201cLet me take you home tonight so I can keep on loving you.\u201d\n\n\nThe sultry songs of the water sprite prove too much for your feeble constitution. Your johnson explodes into a fountain of blood from a colossal aneurysm brought on by an overload of magical sexual tension. Since I\u2019m not completely depraved, I\u2019ll spare you the grisly details. Short agonizing story in brief: you bleed out.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Kill it", "result": "When in doubt, flay \u2018em like a trout. Swift as a cat hopped up on methamphetamines you draw your sword, spin around, and hack off Organa Mel Fy\u2019s head. Magic may not be dope, but you sure are.\n\n\nWhat didn\u2019t you know? Magic is a stimulating drug. That\u2019s why even the best wizards are twitchy and half-cracked in the head. Shit\u2019s addictive, man.\n\n\nWhoa, what the hell is going on? Organa Mel Fy\u2019s body and freshly decapitated head melt into what appears to be water and seeps into the ground. That is not normal. Perhaps now would be a good time to get out of here. You are still feeling funny from the magic and can swear you are being watched as you clamber up out of the dell. In fact, your feet are moving in a flurry, but it does not seem like you are getting anywhere. You definitely passed that big ass maple like five times already.\n\n\nYou whirl around and brandish your sword. \u201cOk, what the fuck gives? Will the mysterious magic bitch or bastard please stand up?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIf you insist.\u201d A mysterious magic bitch with bountiful breasts appears before you out of thin air wearing low-cut red robes. She reeks of magic and virility.\n\n\n\u201cListen, err, lady, my day\u2019s been one odious load of shit, so unless you want me to wrap you up in the stink, I suggest you bugger off.\u201d\n\n\nThe woman\u2019s lips curl into a seductive smirk. \u201cAren\u2019t you curious as to whom I am, or what I am going to offer you?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAt this point, I really don\u2019t give a damn.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cPerhaps you should.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cPerhaps you should suck my dick.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIf that is what you truly desire, that may be arranged. But for now, you will listen to my proposal like a good puppy.\u201d The woman raises her hand, immobilizing your body with her magic. \u201cNow then-\u201c", "action_results": [{"action": "Hear her out.", "result": "\u201cIf you agree to be my obedient and ever loyal servant, I will allow you to be my second in command and we shall rule the world with a magical fist! I\u2019ll even fix up your arm for you, much better than that crackpot Osprey could do for you too.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cCan I be a Knight in Shining Armor?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou can be a Black Knight.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAwww, that\u2019s not heroic at all.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWell, you could just be my Dragon.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ll turn me into a dragon! That\u2019s awesome!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo. A Dragon is a trope. Don\u2019t you have the internet?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s a trope? Or the internet? Is it like a clich\u00e9?\u201d\n\n\nOrgana Mel Fy face palms. \u201cGo here and waste countless hours of your life and educate yourself. http://tvtropes.org/pmwiki/pmwiki.php/Main/HomePage\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t speak foreign. Just Common.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI think I\u2019ll just kill you.\u201d\n\n\nAnd so she does. Now you are free to lose your soul in the vast voids of the internet.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Spit in her face.", "result": "Spitting isn\u2019t exactly heroic, unless you\u2019re a cowboy. Unfortunately for you, you are not a cowboy.\n\n\nYou hack a glob of spittle onto the woman\u2019s face. \u201cI\u2019ll cut your fucking heart out. Bitch.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cInteresting, I\u2019d love to see you try.\u201d The woman wipes your saliva from her face, as you remain helplessly immobilized. \u201cYes, that\u2019s what I thought. Though I imagined you had a little more sense in you than that. You are not the vessel I am looking for. That is clear to me now. Still, I can use your corpse as a fine minion. And you gave me such a wonderful idea of how to kill you.\u201d\n\n\nThe mysterious magic bitch magics up a dagger and proceeds to cut out your heart, which she then consumes. You watch in horror as the last moments of your life fade away. Perhaps, antagonizing your captor was not the best of ideas.\n\n\nSadly, you cannot even enjoy peace in death, as the mysterious magic bitch reanimates your corpse to do her bidding, trapping your soul within your decaying body. The tasks she orders you to perform are humiliating and degrading, but there is nothing you can do. You are hers, now and forever.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Struggle to break the spell with sheer willpower.", "result": "Ah, yes, the only thing more powerful than the human spirit is the spirit of a hero. You dig deep inside yourself, channeling your energy into an explosion of heroism. Eww, gross, it smells\u2026 sticky.\n\n\n\u201c- hey wait, what are you doing?\u201d shrieks the mysterious magic bitch as you take a step forward. She doubles her efforts to paralyze you, but you are fixated on your goal and nothing is going to stand in your way. You cock your arm and deliver a vicious left hook. Crack. \u201cFoolish mortal,\u201d she screams as blood dribbles down into her frock, \u201cthat was most unwise.\u201d\n\n\nIt really was, you think as you massage your broken hand against your thigh. Why didn\u2019t I just hack off her head?\n\n\nGood question hero, how do you plan to kill her now with one arm and a broken hand?\n\n\nI dunno, but it was worth it. The blood glistens gorgeously on her bosom.\n\n\nMaybe. If you are into that kind of stuff. But the time for internal dialogue and wall shattering is over, you have a situation here.\n\n\nThe mysterious magic bitch hurls a poorly aimed fireball in your direction. \u201cI bet you don\u2019t even have it in you to kill a woman!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDidn\u2019t I just kill that water creature thingy? What was her name, Morgan Le Fay?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOrgana Mel Fy, you fool!\u201d The mysterious magic bitch hurls another fireball, but once again, her aim is so dreadful you do not even have to dodge.\n\n\n\u201cOh, whatever.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDid you really think that half-witted harpy was the real Organa Mel Fy, sorceress supreme?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cKind of.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWell she wasn\u2019t! I am!\u201d\n\n\nOrgana Mel Fy whips up a magic firestorm, igniting the forest in a blaze of light and charred forest critters. You have to respect her strategy. When you cannot hit the broad side of a barn, just fire a broadside and blow everything to hell.\n\n\n\u201cI could have given you power beyond your wildest dreams! Sex the likes of which you have never known possible! We could have ruled the world together and ascended into the divine! Now DIE!\u201d \n\n\nFlames lick at you from all angles while smoldering branches and roasted birds tumble around you. Your stomach rumbles and mouth waters. Too bad you do not have time for a snack; a nice greasy roasted duck would really hit the spot right about now. One problem at a time though. You think you see a small avenue of escape, but you will have to bolt for it now. Of course, running away admits defeat.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight", "result": "I didn\u2019t know you were courting Death.\n\n\nI\u2019m not. What the hell are you talking about?\n\n\nOh dear, this is awkward.\n\n\nWhat!?\n\n\nI just assumed you had a date with Death, how else to explain such an absolute act of pure, unadulterated retardation.\n\n\nCrashing through the inferno, you barrel toward Organa Mel Fy as the flames sear your skin. One armed and broken handed, I\u2019m certain the fight would have been worthy to watch. Sadly, you collapse before you close even half the gap where the dancing fires consume your corpse.\n\n\nIt is a shame really. You came so close to discovering Organa Mel Fy\u2019s secret. I actually thought you were going to make it. Instead, Organa Mel Fy did the world a service by culling a hero that just wasn\u2019t cut out for the job.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Flee", "result": "Sometimes you have to lose the battle to win the war. You seize your opportunity to escape and disappear in the smoky haze. That crazy loon must have set half the forest on fire. Things cannot get much worse at least, right?\n\n\nA gale pummels you from behind and knocks you down. Coals soar through the air. The force of the wind uproots entire trees, filling the air with splintering missiles of fire and death. Shit just got worse.\n\n\n\u201cOh come on,\u201d you mutter, \u201cthe bitch has to have some limit to her magic.\u201d\n\n\nYou stagger onto your feet and proceed to dodge the incredible amount of bullshit and debris flying through the air all the way back to Osprey\u2019s ramshackle birdshit hut. Osprey and Jon are sitting on stumps around a bonfire drinking tea, completely ignoring the magic fire engulfing the forest.\n\n\nOsprey nudges Jon with his elbow. \u201cSee, I told ya he\u2019d come back. They always come back.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNever doubted you for a second Osprey. The boy is young. He\u2019ll learn.\u201d\n\n\nYou throw up your arms in exasperation. \u201cIn case you two didn\u2019t notice, we have a situation here.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou heroes today, always in such a hurry.\u201d Osprey bops you on the head with his staff. \u201cNever taking any time to stop and smell the pteguonias.\u201d Osprey takes a deep whiff. \u201cPutrid.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s your birdshit hut burning up.\u201d\n\n\nOsprey\u2019s eyebrows shoot up, nearly off his forehead. \u201cDamnit, Organa, you\u2019ve gone too far this time. Show yourself! It ends now!\u201d\n\n\nOrgana Mel Fy once again materializes out of thin air. She blasts an ice spike through Osprey\u2019s heart without so much as a howdy-do. The cooky old hedge wizard voids his bowels and leaves this world once and for all. So much for getting a new arm.\n\n\nJon draws his sword. This battle may rest entirely on his blade now because you certainly do not appear to be in any condition to help. \u201cHeartless harpy,\u201d he growls.\n\n\nOrgana Mel Fy shrugs, which causes her bountiful breasts to bounce beautifully. \u201cWell aren\u2019t you a luscious lug. The world is a better place without the old fart stinking up half the forest. And I assure you, while I may be tart, I do have a heart. I know I just met you, and this may seem a tad crazy. But I\u2019m ovulating, so would you like to make a baby?\u201d \n\n\n\u201cWell, I am a sucker for gingers.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cPower, sex, and divinity, we could have it all.\u201d\n\n\nJon lowers his sword. \u201cThat is tempting.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJon, what the hell!\u201d You make a fist and drop to your knees in pain. Yep, still broke.\n\n\nJon stares at you with puppy dog eyes. \u201cBut she\u2019s a ginger! I love gingers. Besides, heroes aren\u2019t supposed to hit girls let alone kill them. That\u2019s villainy right there.\u201d\n\n\nThe man makes a strong argument. Are you really willing to begin the long dark descent down the path of debauchery and villainy just to stop one lone psychotic bitch with a magic addiction? Maybe it is not too late for you to get in on the action too. Organa Mel Fy does have a pretty sweet body and has a serious sexual appetite. There are probably some fantastic adventures awaiting the three of you in your potential sexcapades. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Grope Organa Mel Fy", "result": "Something has been off about Organa Mel Fy ever since you first took a whiff of her presence. Eureka, that\u2019s it! You just have to get close enough to check and make sure.\n\n\n\u201cOrgana, I think I made a terrible mistake. Just think of all the sexy good times the three of us could have.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHmmm, maybe.\u201d Organa\u2019s eyes fall to your junk, judging you.\n\n\nYou saunter over to Organa Mel Fy, trying your best to look charming and horny. Yeah, she wants some of that. When you get in close, you shove your hand down her robes and clutch onto her naughty bits. Son of a peasant, you were right!\n\n\n\u201cShe\u2019s packing heat Jon,\u201d you shout as you simultaneously twist Organa Mel Fy\u2019s genitals and headbutt her in the temple. \u201cI knew I smelled the unmistakable musk of virility on you when we first met.\u201d\n\n\nJon gawks stupidly. \u201cYou mean Organa Mel Fy is a transsexual?\u201d\n\n\nYou mercilessly curb stomp Organa Mel Fy into the forest floor, not feeling the least bit bad about it. \u201cNope, she\u2019s a hermaphrodite.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh, wow. That could have got\u2026 kinky?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNot the word I would have used, but you\u2019re probably right.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re still kind of beating up a woman you know.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cEh, it\u2019s got a penis. I think my hero\u2019s soul is safe.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou son of a whore!\u201d Tears pour down Organa\u2019s cheeks. \u201cWe could have achieved great things, the three of us, united as a triumvirate of power, glory, and sexual ecstasy.\u201d\n\n\nThis is true. Do you want to give all of that up? I know it requires a new perspective on life and an open mind, but that sounds interesting if nothing else. You could shatter boundaries and usher in a new age of sexual exploration and understanding. Then again, she does want to take over the known world, so it is not like she\u2019s a nice lady\u2026 gentleman... person. Or is (s)he just misunderstood?", "action_results": [{"action": "Heroes kill evil things. She's evil.", "result": "You don\u2019t make the rules; you just follow them. Canon dictates you kill all evil things that cross your path. Open-mindedness is not canon. Therefore, it must be evil. When was the last time you read a clich\u00e9 story about two homoerotic knights swordfighting their way through the kingdom, never.\n\n\nA few curb stomps later, Organa Mel Fy is dead. Congratulations, you rid the world of a great evil. Jon shoots a passing red herring. Ain\u2019t nobody got time for that.\n\n\nJon slaps you on the back. \u201cWell kid, turns out you had it in you to be a hero after all. You\u2019ll earn a knighthood for this beautiful handiwork, no doubt. How do you feel?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDirty.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNothing a good bath won\u2019t fix.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSo what happens next?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh, I imagine you\u2019ll have some titillating adventures over the years and wind up marrying a big bosomed princess with blond hair and blue eyes. She\u2019ll give birth to a brood of little prince-lings and you\u2019ll grow old in a nice big ass castle. Doubt you\u2019ll ever get your arm fixed though. You proved today you don\u2019t need it.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat sounds fine by me.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAmen. A clich\u00e9 life is a happy life.\u201d", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Heroes show compassion and understanding.", "result": "With time and love, you are convinced that Organa Mel Fy can be converted into a peaceful member of society. Perhaps she will even redeem herself and become a hero. As much as you would like to tell yourself that your actions are purely heroic, deep down you know what you really wanted. Don\u2019t worry, I won\u2019t judge you. After all, you are at that age of sexual hyperactivity where the only thing on your mind is sex, and sex, and sex, and sex.\n\n\nYou offer Organa Mel Fy an awkward hand of love and friendship, which she accepts, not that (s)he has much of a choice at this point. You, Jon and Organa Mel Fy consummate your union in the smoldering ruins of a once proud forest and Osprey\u2019s birdshit hut. The sensations you experience are\u2026 unique.\n\n\nThe divine overseer in the eternal heavens is rather displeased with your choice. Canon dictates Organa Mel Fy is evil and deserving of a gruesome death. You cannot just spit in the face of canon and expect to come out unharmed. Consequently, the titles of knight and hero are beyond your grasp. Naturally, you turn to a life of villainy in retaliation.\n\n\nYears pass and your unholy union is on the verge of kingdom-wide conquest and savagery. The bedroom antics are as fierce and wild as ever. Organa Mel Fy didn\u2019t lie about the sexual ecstasy. It\u2019s amazing what a little magic can do in the bedroom. By the screams, one would swear the dead are cumming. But kingdom-wide devastation is not all sex games. Castles lay in ruin, cities burn, and famine and plague ravage the land. You personally hunted down and rape murdered every last unicorn to prevent the birth of another hero who may one day end your reign of terror. Fortunately, villains always get their comeuppance in the end.\n\n\nOne day while enjoying your depravity a rouge dragon from the nearby kingdom of Irelandshire flies overhead and roasts the three of you in a blast of dragonfire. The wyrm proceeds to eat you and utilize your energy as an aphrodisiac. The dragon is celebrated as a hero and he and his mate are pronounced king and queen of the kingdom. ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Villain Smillain, I'm saving the day.", "result": "\u201cI don\u2019t give a damn if she is a woman, I\u2019m kicking her ass.\u201d\n\n\nJon sighs. \u201cFine, but you owe me a red-headed whore.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDude, Jon, man, you need therapy.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo, I need a fire-crotch to melt the icy walls of my soul.\u201d\n\n\nOrgana Mel Fy claps her hands together. \u201cWhat a wonderful idea. Ice and fire! And in song form.\u201d She claps her hands once more, and a snowstorm blizzards into existence. Ice, fire, and steam clash together while small mutant dwarf elves dance and sing in circles.\n\n\nA song and storm of ice and fire, while we strum on our lyre.\n\n\nHit the bong and throw \u2018em in the fryer, while we drum by the funeral pyre.\n\n\nDum dee dee dum dum dum dum ho, dum dee dee dum dum dum dum wo,\n\n\nMagic in the morning.\n\n\nWatch them suffer hear them scream, while we make love by the bubbling stream.\n\n\nBotch the murder we die as a team, while we fuck in a collective dream.\n\n\nDum dee dee dum dum dum dum ho, dum dee dee dum dum dum dum wo,\n\n\nMagic in the morning.\n\n\nDrink blood red wine at a wedding on the river, hope we get to dine on someone\u2019s liver.\n\n\nThe bread is fine honey don\u2019t you shiver, hope we bet on the cruelest sinner.\n\n\nDum dee dee dum dum dum dum ho, dum dee dee dum dum dum dum wo,\n\n\nMagic in the morning.\n\n\nIf you suckle too long on Organa\u2019s teat, we hope you find an extra treat.\n\n\nWe may chuckle \u2018cause she\u2019s packing heat, pray we don\u2019t die for this beat.\n\n\nDum dee dee dum dum dum dum ho, dum dee dee dum dum dum dum wo,\n\n\nMagic in the morning.\n\n\nYou blink and rub your eyes. \u201cJon, I think I\u2019m tripping. I inhaled a lot of smoke; there must be some wicked shrooms growing in the forest.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cEither that or the narrator isn\u2019t even trying anymore.\u201d\n\n\nA flaming chunk of ice crashes into the back of Jon\u2019s skull. The poor bastard never saw it coming. He topples to the ground like a turd. You feel your emotions building up, too surreal to touch. They boil over and burst. You feel yourself nut, but it doesn\u2019t matter it\u2019s time to get rough.\n\n\n\u201cBam! Pow!\u201d you shout.\n\n\nOrgana Mel Fy cocks her head and gawks at you. \u201cUhm, excuse me?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThose are the sound effects about to go off upside your head, bitch.\u201d\n\n\nBam. Pow.\n\n\nYour headbutt kick to the jaw combo work perfectly. Organa Mel Fy hits the ground, and the magical maladies plaguing the forest vanish. Tears well in her eyes as you end her miserable existence by stomping on her face.\n\n\n\u201cToo bad so sad,\u201d you say. \u201cBy choosing villainy over heroism you brought this on yourself.\u201d\n\n\nWith one final stomp, the light in Organa Mel Fy\u2019s eyes go out, hopefully for good. You never know with these magic types. They come back like cockroaches or supposedly dead G.R.R.M characters. Just playing homie, we love you.\n\n\nJon picks himself off the ground and massages the back of his head. \u201cEh, I\u2019ve had worse.\u201d\n\n\nYou nod. \u201cGood to hear.\u201d\n\n\nWell congratulations my noble crippled hero. You killed the evil Organa Mel Fy. Now go find Jon a fire-crotch like you owe him.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Charge into the fray.", "result": "You throw caution and sanity to the wind and charge into the fray.\n\n\nWell, charge is a kind term. You mostly stagger along the blood-slicked road, swaying from side to side, until you topple over and slam your head against the cobblestones. Your sword flies from your grasp and slides beyond your reach. Adjusting to missing limbs takes time.\n\n\nBoth trolls look up, and in your blurred vision, you swear they are laughing at you.\n\n\nMocked by a troll, you think, how embarrassing.\n\n\nJon takes advantages of your momentary distraction and hacks his troll in the legs, sending the beast to its knees. The troll roars. Jon drives his blade into the troll\u2019s open mouth and out the back of its throat. One down.\n\n\nThe second troll grabs the remnants of Bowie\u2019s body and rushes toward you. The troll stands above you and squeezes the juices from what used to be Bowie, taking care to cover every inch of you in Bowie juice. The stink is agonizing.\n\n\n\u201cOh my god,\u201d Samwellington cries, \u201cHe\u2019s marinating you!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJust kill me you son of a bitch,\u201d you sputter as you spit some of the vile goop from your mouth.\n\n\nThe troll grips you by the shoulders and bares his teeth. The tip of a blade tears through the troll\u2019s chest. Troll blood and the sweet smell of apples descend upon you. And the troll\u2019s lifeless corpse\u2026 which crushes you.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "DODGE!!!", "result": "All of Jon\u2019s training really pays off. Using your sixth sense, you see the attack coming leagues away. With all the grace of youth, you jump to the side as a horse leg soars past your ear. Quite unfortunate for Bowie, who takes the hoof straight in the face. You do not even look. The crack and thump tells you all you need to know.\n\n\nDodging more chunks of horse and human, you maneuver your way to Jon and the trolls. Master and apprentice stand back-to-back as you fend off the fearsome beasts. Dodge, parry, dodge, dodge, strike, dodge, parry, dodge, dodge, dodge, strike. And so the battle goes. Troll blood drenches you as you hack away. Surprisingly, it smells like apples.\n\n\n\u201cJon,\u201d you say, while dodging another troll fist, \u201cthey keep regenerating when I dodge them. It\u2019s a troll blood bath, but they aren\u2019t going down.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDODGE!\u201d Jon shouts. \u201cAlways DODGE!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThen RAM,\u201d screams Samwellington, bulling into the fray. By the sound of the collision, you think Samwellington just tackled Jon\u2019s troll. What an awful, squishy sound.\n\n\n\u201cWhere the fuck have you been?\u201d you ask.\n\n\n\u201cCowering.\u201d\n\n\nYour troll swings its long hairy arms wide and claps them together, aiming for your head. You dodge and slide along the blood slicked ground, slashing the beast\u2019s legs as you slip between them. Hopping to your feet, you deliver the finishing blow as the beast drops to its knees before splashing face first into a puddle of its own blood.\n\n\nJon\u2019s troll has met the same fate. Jon appears unwounded, though breathing heavily, leaning on his sword.\n\n\n\u201cOh, dear god! Samwellington!\u201d\n\n\nSamwellington lies on the ground with a grisly gash on his robust gut that looks inches deep. \u201cOh don\u2019t worry,\u201d he says. \u201cThey just cut into the fat. I always knew eating all that pork lard would pay off one day.\u201d\n\n\nJon smirks. \u201cSee, I told you. Dodge.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI won\u2019t question you again Jon. Too bad about Bowie though.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMeh, he was a fucking dick anyway.\u201d\n\n\nSam struggles to sit up. \u201cI don\u2019t think those trolls were the reason those people went disappearing.\u201d\n\n\nYou nod. \u201cBecause all this blood and gore would have been pretty hard to miss.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo. Because there are five guys with loaded crossbows behind you.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cShit.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn and rush them.", "result": "Without a moment\u2019s hesitation, you turn and rush the bandits. You are the fledgling hero of this story after all, and the hero always wins. The bandits either agree or are too shocked by your blazen stupidity and gawk at you as you close the gap.\n\n\nBy the time one of them gathers his wits, three of them are dead at your feet. A bolt grazes your cheek as you cut the fourth man down. The fifth man, who fired the bolt, turns to flee back into the forest. He does not make it. Jon skewers him from behind.\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s going to be quite the scar,\u201d says Jon. \u201cIt\u2019s not so much a deforming scar as a handsome, charismatic scar. All great heroes get them. Chicks dig it.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t have one,\u201d whines Samwellington.\n\n\nJon rolls his eyes. \u201cYeah, I wonder why.\u201d\n\n\nThe three of you hobble back to the hamlet. You have one of the priests help draft a report of the incident and send a runner to deliver it to the baron. Some unimportant nobodies go clean up the mess while you kick back and relax. Not bad for a (k)night\u2019s work.\n\n\n\u201cGood work today kid, but don\u2019t get ahead of yourself kid,\u201d says Jon. \u201cYou still have a long way to go to be a true knight. It takes hard work to bang a princess and ride off into the sunset. Oh, and remember.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDodge,\u201d you say in unison.\n\n\nThe baron is pleased with what he reads in the report. You become Bowie\u2019s replacement in the hamlet guard and undertake some other minor missions with Jon and Samwellington. Soon you become a bit of a celebrity and inspiration, and your fame goes countywide. Priests take time out of their day to tutor you in your letters, and the baron invites you and Jon to take place in the next tournament he\u2019s hosting. The king will even be there; it is supposed to be quite the shindig. Things are looking up. All you have to decide now is what event you are going to compete.", "action_results": [{"action": "Compete in the joust.", "result": "For reasons far beyond normal human comprehension, you elect to compete in the joust: never mind the fact that you do not own a horse and have never held a lance in your life. Remember, dodging is against the rules in a joust, so you are not exactly playing to your strengths.\n\n\nDuring a morning patrol, you and Jon discuss the upcoming tournament.\n\n\n\u201cI still think you should participate in the melee with me instead,\u201d says Jon. \u201cBut if you\u2019re dead set on jousting, you\u2019re going to need a horse.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAny recommendations?\u201d you ask.\n\n\n\u201cJousting horses are expensive. You\u2019re either going to need a big loan or a big friend. And don\u2019t forget, if you lose the joust, you lose your horse and your armor.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cCan I use a quarter-horse? I bet old man Nathaniel David would let me borrow Bessy.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSure. You can ride out naked too, but you\u2019ll just embarrass yourself.\u201d Jon smacks you upside the head. \u201cIf you aren\u2019t going to take this seriously, don\u2019t even bother showing up.\u201d\n\n\nYou finish your patrol with Jon and head over to old man Nathaniel David\u2019s orchard before you visiting the moneylender in the next town. You know it is not wise to ignore Jon\u2019s advice, but you want to keep your options open. Old man Nathaniel David proves easy to find, he is humped over, shitting on a sapling when you arrive.\n\n\n\u201cUm, what are you doing David?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cFertilizing,\u201d he says with a massive grin. \u201cWhat can I do for you lad?\u201d He sticks out his hand for you to shake, which you begrudgingly accept.\n\n\n\u201cI decided to joust in the king\u2019s tournament, but I don\u2019t have a horse.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAh, well, I can\u2019t imagine you\u2019d want to use any of the horses in the hamlet. Plow horses ain\u2019t going to win that for you, but I know you don\u2019t have much money. So if you want Bessy, you can have her, on one condition.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s that?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIf by some miracle you win, you name my lil\u2019 pumpkin, Sally, Lady Fair of the Tournament. If you lose, you pay me back by marrying her. You\u2019re a good lad, and you\u2019d make a fine husband for my girl.\u201d\n\n\nYou have seen Sally David before, strutting around. She has a fine body for a wench, but holy matrimony is her face hideous. It looks like someone took a rake and beat her bloody. You will have to mull this one over; these are high stakes. Even if you won, you could offend many important people.\n\n\n\u201cAlright, David, I\u2019ll keep the offer in mind,\u201d you say as you wave goodbye.\n\n\nOld man Nathaniel David hitches up his trousers and nods. \u201cYou do that, boy.\u201d\n\n\nThe Baron\u2019s Road has been nice and calm ever since you took care of those trolls and bandits, and you arrive at the moneylender\u2019s office without incident. The moneylender\u2019s office is small and simple: one desk, two hard wooden chairs, and a few bookshelves. You have heard of these types before, and they are nothing but trouble. The moneylender skims over the pleasantries and bids you sit and begin your business.\n\n\n\u201cWhat can I do for you, friend?\u201d he asks. His hair is dark and oily, eyes small and beady. An unnecessarily pointy goatee graces his chin. Yep, slap the evil and unscrupulous label on him.\n\n\n\u201cI need money for a horse to use in the joust. I\u2019m one of the guys that killed those bandits and trolls on the Baron\u2019s Road awhile back.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI know who you are,\u201d he snaps. \u201cI also know you have no money and no experience jousting.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHow do you know that?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBecause.\u201d He points at his goatee. \u201cNow I will lend you the money if you agree to my terms.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhich are?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIf you win, I get 50% of the ransom and prize money. You keep the horse. If you lose, you become my personal slave for a year.\u201d The moneylender pulls, ink, quill and parchment from his desk. \u201cWe can get the contract signed right now.\u201d ", "action_results": [{"action": "Done deal!", "result": "As you reach to sign the contract, the moneylender stabs your hand with the tip of the quill. He pops the end of the quill into his mouth and sucks the blood off with a loud slurp. Black and blood-red sparks shoot randomly from his body. Wings burst forth from his back and claws grow from his fingers.\n\n\n\u201cFirst, I kill you. Then, I rule the kingdom. Finally, I get all the bitches.\u201d\n\n\nYou blink in confusion. \u201cWhat?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s what is going to happen, and you can\u2019t stop me.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhy did you drink my blood? Are you a vampire? So help me Stephanie, if you're lurking around here, I'll kick your ass.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThere\u2019s power in heroes blood.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAnd?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cActually, I have no idea what I am now. I was an evil sorcerer in disguise. Then I drank hero\u2019s blood, and since I\u2019m evil that would probably make me an anti-hero now.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWould I become an anti-villain if I drank your blood?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t think it works like that.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhy not?\u201d\n\n\nBecause you\u2019re dead. The evil monster rips your head off with his claws and devours your corpse. That will teach you to make dirty deals with shady characters.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I'll just go with Bessy.", "result": "Probably not a great idea to borrow money from such an obviously evil character: you excuse yourself, leaving the moneylender fuming. He mutters something under his breath while stroking his goatee as you walk out the door. Perhaps you will cross paths with him again.\n\n\nYour heart is still set on riding in the joust, so you head back to old man Nathaniel David\u2019s orchard and agree to his bargain. You spend the remainder of your free time preparing for the tournament. Jon coaches you as best he can, which is not very well since he has never jousted either, but you think you have the hang of it.\n\n\nBessy\u2019s training has mixed results. She works hard and seems to appreciate the change of scenery. You figure being a plow horse is probably pretty dull. She has spirit, but the old girl does a lot more plodding than charging. At least, she does not shy away when the other horse speeds toward her.\n\n\nThe day of the tournament dawns cool and crisp. Sweaty with excitement, you try to relax in your pavilion before your first match. You have already made water five times this morning, and you think you have to go again. So many things ride on the outcome of today\u2019s events, but you cannot think about that. The here and now is what is important. You watch squires scurry around the grounds, doing the bidding of Sir this or Sir that or some other random bastard. You fall into a daze and your thoughts wander.\n\n\nWhy don\u2019t I have a squire? Crap, I think I need to piss again. Dear lord, please grant me the strength and will to win today. I don\u2019t want to marry that troll Sally David. Have you seen her? Oh, is that who I think it is?\n\n\nSir Jamison Hill, The Iron Boar, approaches and shakes your hand: what an honor! Ser Jamison serves as the Baron\u2019s champion and is renowned throughout the kingdom for his tourney skills.\n\n\n\u201cI heard about how you helped take care of those bandits and trolls on the Baron\u2019s Road,\u201d he says. \u201cThe kingdom needs more fine young men like you. I expect to see great things from you today and in the future.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThank you, sir.\u201d\n\n\nYou want to talk some more with him \u2013 he certainly has plenty he could teach you \u2013 but the herald calls you for your first bout. You wave farewell and enter the lists, wishing you had taken the time to make water one more time.\n\n\n\u201cAre you ready girl?\u201d you ask as you mount Bessy. Bessy snorts in reply. \u201cThat\u2019s the spirit.\u201d\n\n\nYour first match is against Lord Isaac Cleaver, The Cleaver. The man has a penchant for the flamboyant. The sun gleams off his silver gilded armor as he rides into position on his roan courser: his shield emblazoned with his house emblem, a silver cleaver beheading a golden goose.\n\n\nNot a very creative nickname, you think. Perhaps not, but it is the badassery of a nickname that is too be feared, not the cleverness.\n\n\nThe herald blows his trumpet, and you urge your horses on. Bessy hobbles along as fast as she can, but she is completely outmatched in speed by the roan courser. Everything else disappears as you focus on Lord Cleaver. The distance closes. You raise your lance and prepare to strike.", "action_results": [{"action": "Just hold the hell on", "result": "There is no way you have gained enough skill to make a precise aim. Your best bet is too just hold on with the fury of hell and hope for the best. You grit your teeth; here it comes. \n\n\nCrack! Both of your lances splinter on contact. The collision jars you, but you manage to hang in the saddle. What a rush. Your heart hammers in your chest, and the world snaps back into focus. The crowd screams and cheers. Flags twirl in the wind and a herald\u2019s trumpet booms. You turn around and see Lord Cleaver\u2019s squire helping him to his feet while another attendant runs down his horse. You won!\n\n\nJon rushes forward to greet you. \u201cFantastic, I never thought you could win riding that old draft horse! It looked like you were moving in slow motion compared to Lord Cleaver.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBessy and I may not be a fast duo, but we\u2019re tough as nails and hard as stone.\u201d\n\n\nJon chuckles. \u201cInteresting, we\u2019ll have to have someone take care of that for you.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat are you talking about?\u201d you ask. Your face flushes red as you realization hits you. \u201cOh, damn it. You perverse bastard.\u201d\n\n\nJon snatches the reins from you and snarls. \u201cNever call me a bastard again. Got it?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cUh, sure.\u201d\n\n\nHe helps you off Bessy and slaps you on the back. \u201cGood.\u201d\n\n\nI wonder what that was all about?\n\n\nYou head back to your pavilion and bask in your glory. The road ahead is still long and perilous, but you took another step down the path of success. You kick back to relax when the flap of your tent opens. In steps a gorgeous lass, with gingersnap hair and vicious eyes. She looks wild and\u2026 hungry.\n\n\n\u201cMay I help you?\u201d you ask.\n\n\n\u201cThe name is Bell. I\u2019ve been sent to help you with a little problem.\u201d She winks. \u201cYour friend said you needed some refreshment before your next bout.\u201d She shakes her breasts free from her loose shift and steps fully into the tent.\n\n\nBefore the tent flap falls, you see the shady moneylender prowling around Sir Jamison\u2019s pavilion.\n\n\n\u201cCome on hero,\u201d she urges. \u201cDon\u2019t keep me waiting.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Jump on top of me, baby.\"", "result": "\u201cJump on top of me baby.\u201d\n\n\nBell does as you say. Two beings disappear and reemerge as one as the pair of you become lost in the heat of passion. Funny thing about passion: it often comes and goes without warning. In this case forty-seven seconds.\n\n\nBell giggles. \u201cFirst time?\u201d\n\n\nYou groan. \u201cFirst time.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo shame in that, darling. I\u2019ll be here when you get back. Practice makes perfect, am I right?\u201d\n\n\nYou nod and step out of the tent.\n\n\n\u201cHoly shit, what the hell happened!?\u201d\n\n\nThe entire fairground is on fire. The air is rank with burning flesh and hair. Bodies are everywhere. Horses whinny in agony. Those not too injured to flee scramble about in sheer terror. High above you see the evil moneylender, floating on a black cloud, cackling and tossing lightning bolts.\n\n\nBessy plods toward you. A bolt catches her in the flank and explodes into a fireball. She collapses to the ground and shrieks. Another bolt pierces her neck and her and she lies silent.\n\n\nYou hear the tent flap jostle, and you wheel around. You clutch Bell by the throat and dive-tackle her into the tent. \u201cWhat the fuck is this?\u201d you scream.\n\n\nBell claws at your hand, gasping for breath. You relieve pressure, but keep her pinned to the ground.\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know.\u201d Tears well in her eyes.\n\n\n\u201cLiar.\u201d \n\n\n\u201cNo, I swear. Your friend Jon sent me.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "She's lying. Beat the truth out of her.", "result": "\u201cYou lying whore!\u201d You bash her head into the ground and clobber her with your fist.\n\n\n\u201cStop, please. I don\u2019t know anything.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cTell me the truth!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI am. Please, you\u2019ve got to believe me.\u201d\n\n\nHer pleas for mercy only anger you more. You know she is lying. \u201cLast chance. Tell me what\u2019s going on. Who are you? Who sent you? What the hell is that floating madman doing?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know.\u201d\n\n\nYou hit her again and again and again and again. You pummel the poor girl until her once fair face is a mask of blood and tears. The tent flap ruffles open and you spin around to see Jon step inside the tent.\n\n\nHe gapes. \u201cWhat the hell are you doing?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cShe distracted me while the lunatic set the world on fire.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo she didn\u2019t. I sent her to f-\u201d he smacks his forehead. \u201cDamn it all. What\u2019s done is done. We can worry about this later. Right now, we have to stop this lunatic. Come on.\u201d\n\n\nYou leave a broken Bell lying on the tent floor and follow Jon outside. Everything except your tent is in flames. The moneylender \u2013 perhaps it is time to start calling him a sorcerer \u2013 floats toward you on his cloud. You and Jon draw your swords.\n\n\n\u201cWhy didn\u2019t he fry my tent too?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHow should I know?\u201d says Jon. \u201cLet\u2019s just kill him and go into damage control mode.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Demand the sorcerer explain himself", "result": "No, this is too confusing and you have too many questions. You already stripped your honor by beating up an innocent whore. You can at least play the hero\u2019s role and make the evil sorcerer reveal the details of his plans.\n\n\n\u201cExplain yourself, fiend,\u201d you say, brandishing your sword.\n\n\nThe sorcerer floats closer on his cloud and shrugs. \u201cSure, why the hell not?\u201d\n\n\nJon sits and crosses his legs.\n\n\n\u201cWhat are you doing?\u201d you ask.\n\n\n\u201cPreparing for a monologue.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cComfy? Good,\u201d says the sorcerer. \u201cMy name is Merek the Mad Mage of Misery. I pose as a moneylender to conceal my true operations as an evil wizard.\u201d\n\n\nJon sighs. \u201cA cover that is now blown.\u201d\n\n\nMerek the Mad Mage of Misery ignores Jon. \u201cEver since you walked into my office, I knew you had the makings of a hero. I knew of the unicorn fart, and I knew a hero had been born. I knew he was somewhere in this area, but not exactly where. You are that hero. It\u2019s in your eyes, your blood, your-\u201d\n\n\n\u201cUrine?\u201d you ask.\n\n\n\u201cSure\u2026 The only person who could stop me was Sir Jamison and his magic sword and shield.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI didn\u2019t know he had a magic sword and shield.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou just met him, and stop interrupting me!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSorry.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAs you can see, I have Sir Jamison\u2019s magic sword and shield nice and safe up here with me.\u201d Merek clinks the magical artifacts together. \u201cI need to drink your blood to gain the power for my master plan to succeed. That is why I did not fry you and your tent. Once I extract your blood, I can complete my master plan.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhich is?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWorld domination.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou seem to be doing pretty well without my blood.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cShut up and prepare to die!\u201d\n\n\nBolts appear in Merek\u2019s hands as his cloud races toward you.\n\n\n\u201cJon wake up, he\u2019s attacking.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHuh, oh sure.\u201d Jon leaps to his feet. \u201cLet\u2019s get this over with.\u201d\n\n\nMerek hurls his bolts, which you and Jon dodge with ease. You slice Merek\u2019s arm off as his cloud whizzes past. Jon leaps onto the cloud and stabs him in the back.\n\n\n\u201cSo that\u2019s what doing that feels like,\u201d says Jon as he yanks Merek off the cloud.\n\n\nBlack sparks shoot from Merek\u2019s body as he slams into the ground. The sparks shoot and dance, stitching his arm back on. He rises to his feet and cackles at the sky.\n\n\n\u201cFools! Only a magic weapon can kill me. Ahhhhhhhhhargggggg\u201d\n\n\nMerek slumps over and falls face down in the dirt.\n\n\nSir Jamison bends down and pulls a dagger from Merek\u2019s back. \u201cHe forgot about my magic dagger.\u201d\n\n\nJon shakes his head. \u201cI hope this doesn\u2019t become a thing.\u201d\n\n\nThe three of you do your best at damage control. Jon kills Bell, and the two of you bury her in a shallow grave, pretending she never existed. Merek managed to kill literally everything else in a three mile radius, so the three of you take over ruling the kingdom. Sir Jamison becomes King Jamison. Jon becomes Warden of the North. And you receive the honor of knighthood, vowing to keep your whore murdering lifestyle in the past.\n\n\nYou marry a buxom wench \u2013 seeing as all the noble Ladies are dead \u2013 and, in a strange twist of fate, have seven daughters who all grow up to be fabulous whores.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Attack", "result": "You don\u2019t have the time to sit around and listen to a monologue. When evil rears its ugly mug, there is only one viable option: destroy it with extreme prejudice.\n\n\nWith swords in hand, you and Jon leap into action, literally. Unfortunately, the sorcerer is beyond your reach on his floating cloud. You and Jon jump as high as you can, but your best efforts are nowhere near good enough.\n\n\n\u201cWell this is embarrassing,\u201d says Jon after another failed leap.\n\n\n\u201cA bow and arrow would really come in handy right about now.\u201d You scan the bedlam for a projectile, but there is not much of anything to work with. \u201cWell I\u2019m stumped.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cFools.\u201d The sorcerer cackles as he tosses bolts of lightning toward you. \u201cYou should know better than to defy an all-powerful mage such as myself. Now perish!\u201d\n\n\nYou successfully dodge the first couple bolts, but the sorcerer is throwing them around like candy and eventually one catches you in the leg. The bolt explodes on contact, obliterating muscle, tissue, ligaments, tendons, and bones. The intense heat cauterizes what little remains of your leg. The stink of your own charred flesh hits your nostrils and you gag. Crawling on hands and knee, you seek shelter in your tent, praying the smoke will conceal your movements. Jon will have to handle this on his own now.\n\n\nInside the tent, you pass out from the pain: never to awake again.\n\n\nWhat the hell happened?\n\n\nBell cut your throat with your own dagger while you were unconscious. If it is any consolation, Jon and Sir Jamison Hill managed to kill the sorcerer. When Jon found your lifeless corpse, he took it upon himself to brutally murder Bell.\n\n\nWhat happens now?\n\n\nWell, you were on the path to heroism, but you failed to kill the big baddie and fell into an act of villainy by beating the ever-loving life out of poor sweet Bell. So I imagine you\u2019ll go to limbo where they\u2019ll force you to play a never ending game of Monopoly for the next 1,000 years.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Trust her.", "result": "Whether you trust Bell or not, a true knight never harms a lady\u2026 or a whore.\n\n\n\u201cAlright,\u201d you say pulling Bell to her feet, \u201chelp me save the day, and we can get back to putting a little baby hero in your belly.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou think I want that after what you just did to me?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cEveryone wants the hero,\u201d you deadpan. \u201cSo yes.\u201d\n\n\nAnd you are right. Feminism is for spunky heroines, not the spunk covered ragtag sack ticklers of heroic knights. Bell grumbles a pithy supplication and follows you out of the tent into the inferno of the fairgrounds.\n\n\nThe evil moneylender stares at you from his floating cloud, with his face screwed up into a scowl of utter disgust and contempt. He leans over the edge of his cloud and vomits.\n\n\n\u201cYou,\u201d he jabs an accusatory finger, \u201care a vile, putrid, scumbag of a hero. Have you no sense of decency?\u201d\n\n\nYou hear a soft plop, plop behind you.\n\n\n\u201cWhat are you talking about?\u201d you ask, drawing your blade, preparing to pounce during the villain\u2019s moment of weakness, but you hold off, curious of his ailment.\n\n\n\u201cYour woman is naked before the world, dripping your seed! And the script says I\u2019m the villain? What depraved fool green-lit this?\u201d\n\n\n*Poof*\n\n\nThe narrator appears, riding a gigantic black German Shepherd, which is both ferocious and adorable. He wields a word processor and keyboard with a suspiciously sticky set of keys. He wields unadulterated badassery and lowbrow humor.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll tolerate snark from the hero and the spirits that control him, but not the damn villain, and yes the script says you are the villain. So unless you want to be spontaneously transfigured into an elephant entering the initial stages of menopause, then I suggest you shut the fuck up and let his hoe decide if she\u2019s being mistreated.\u201d The narrator turns to Bell. \u201cAre you being mistreated?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSort of, I guess.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWould you like a pony?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDone.\u201d\n\n\nA pony wanders through the carnage, and Bell climbs on top, uncertain of what to do.\n\n\nThe narrator scowls at the villain. \u201cMerek the Mad Mage of Misery, are you content with the current proceedings? Well are you?\u201d\n\n\nThe villain tugs at the collar of his robes. \u201cYes, your godliness.\u201d\n\n\n*Poof*\n\n\n\u201cThat was interesting,\u201d you say. \u201cAnyway, I\u2019m making baby heroes. And that\u2019s heroic. The naked human body is an art form to be admired, not scorned! Besides there\u2019s no one left to ogle her since you killed them all. Except Jon, over there, staring at her burning bush. And I bet Sir Jamison is alive somewhere. He seems pretty badass.\u201d\n\n\nJon smiles dumbly, sword in hand.\n\n\nMerek the Made Mage of Misery shrieks. \u201cYou perverted bastards! I\u2019ll kill you all!\u201d Lightning bolts sparkle in his hands, and he hurls them at you with the accuracy of a drunken Storm Trooper smoking black tar heroin.\n\n\nYou stand still, watching the blasts scorch the already scorched ground twenty yards away.\n\n\nJon lurches out of his stupor and rushes into battle, tucking away his playing sword and drawing his fighting one. \u201cI\u2019ll show you who the bastard is, you slut!\u201d\n\n\nMerek the Mad Mage of Misery curses his incompetence and swings his attention toward Jon. The two engage in a very boring battle. Wild lightning blasts scatter the land while Jon meanders around and tries to jump onto the floating cloud, which always drifts beyond his reach.\n\n\nYou turn to Bell. \u201cI have an idea.\u201d You pull Bell from the pony\u2019s back and make sweet love to her in the middle of the burning fairgrounds. Merek the Mad Mage of Misery catches sight and gawks in horror. This provides Jon the opening to leap onto his magic cloud and cut his throat with the magic dagger Sir Jamison conveniently just threw to him: because deus ex machina is beautiful and everyone knows only magic items can kill magic beings.\n\n\n\u2026\n\n\nSweet, so what happens now?\n\n\nThe spirits guiding you probably leave mean comments because of the sexism and ridiculousness bomb we just exploded all over the place. At least we took it up to eleven.\n\n\nIt was rather ridiculous, but hey, I won, right! What should I do with the pony?\n\n\nBreed it with a unicorn and find out what manner of being is born when the abomination spawn spews magical flatulence.\n\n\nWicked. Do you have any parting words of advice for me or wrap-up narration?\n\n\nWhat the hell, is this twenty questions? I don\u2019t know, go murder every sparkly vampire and warrior-cat that you see and you can\u2019t go wrong. Shit, I just earned more hate comments.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Ugh, I better go check out what that moneylender is doing.", "result": "Despite adamant protests from your little head, your big head wins the day, insisting you act responsibly and investigate what that shady character is up to: shenanigans no doubt.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry, Bell. I have to take care of something quick.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh, don\u2019t leave me hero.\u201d Bell wraps her arms around, drawing you in tight against her bare bosom.\n\n\nYou pull away from her enticing embrace before you change your mind. Now where did that moneylender run off? You don\u2019t see him skulking around Sir Jamison\u2019s tent anymore. Could your eyes have been playing tricks on you? The bad feeling in the pit of your gut says no.\n\n\nMuffled noises are coming from Sir Jamison\u2019s tent. Not wanting to intrude on a living legend in the throes of lovemaking, you ruffle the flap of the tent to announce your presence. \u201cSir Jamison, are you in there? I noticed a shady character lingering around your tent a moment ago.\u201d\n\n\nThe noise inside the tent ceases.\n\n\nOh, crap. Your dodge sense tingles.\n\n\nYou jump aside just in time to avoid incineration via fireball. Within the smoking remains of the tent, the shady moneylender stands poised to attack. Magic crackles in both of his hands. The shady moneylender is a sorcerer, who knew.\n\n\n\u201cI knew you were up to no good,\u201d you say, drawing your sword. \u201cI don\u2019t know what you\u2019re up to, but I\u2019m going to put a stop to it.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cImbecile, you may have the skills, but you lack the tools to defeat me.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWe\u2019ll just have to see about that!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIs that really the best line you\u2019ve got?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI know you are but what am I?\u201d\n\n\nThe sorcerer face-palms. \u201cYou\u2019re an idiot aren\u2019t you?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBring it on, bitch!\u201d\n\n\nOnlookers scurry about to put out the fires the fireball ignited and to get a front row view of what is shaping up to be a good old-fashioned melee on magic standoff.\n\n\nThe sorcerer simultaneously hurls a fireball and casts a bolt of lightning. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Dodge the bolt; bat the fireball back at him with your sword", "result": "You dodge the bolt with ease and set your feet. You\u2019re going to knock this fireball right out of the park. You step, swing, and\u2026 your sword melts as the fireball passes through and explodes amongst the crowd of onlookers.\n\n\nYou scream in agony as molten steel splatters across your body.\n\n\nThe sorcerer cackles. \u201cImbecile, only a magic artifact can repel a magical attack.\u201d\n\n\nYou collapse to the ground, defeated. And dead. The sorcerer proceeds to extract your hero blood, which he uses to conquer the entire kingdom. A shame, you couldn't even save your friends.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Double dodge!", "result": "Few living souls can successfully perform a double dodge, but you are a hero damn it. From the moment the unicorn farted, you were destined to accomplish great feats. You have the skill. You have the power. You have\u2026 ah, to hell with it. Just get on with it.\n\n\nYou avoid the bolt and the fireball, perfectly executing a textbook double dodge. The onlookers cheer and scream approval\u2026 except for the ones who got incinerated by the fireball you dodged. The bloodcurdling screams of the not quite dead but still severely burned could wake the dead. Way to not take one for the team, asshole.\n\n\n\u201cDodge all you want!\u201d cries the sorcerer. \u201cIt won\u2019t do you any good in the end. Your pathetic blade can\u2019t kill me.\u201d\n\n\nYou\u2019re about to test that theory when a sparkly pulsating glow coming from behind the sorcerer catches your eye. The tantalizing and addicting flash of spectral lights can be only one thing: a magical artifact. The sorcerer must have been trying to steal it from Sir Jamison. If the sorcerer wants them, that must mean they can kill him. Or destroy the kingdom. One or the other.\n\n\n\u201cWe\u2019ll see about that,\u201d you shout as you charge ahead.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll humor you, simpleton,\u201d says the sorcerer. \u201cJust try and strike me down. I\u2019ll stand still.\u201d\n\n\nThe sorcerer crosses his arms and smirks as you lumber toward him. His evil sneer disappears once you run past him. The magical artifact turns out to be a magic sword and shield combo. It\u2019s on like a donkey\u2019s hard on now.\n\n\n\u201cNo, you can\u2019t!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSure I can,\u201d you say as you bash and slash him with your magic weaponry. \u201cBy the way, if these things can kill you, why did you let me get so close to them?\u201d\n\n\nThe world will never know the answer to that question. The sorcerer shrivels up and dies within a cloud of evaporated blood. His death screams awaken some of the recently deceased onlookers, which you swiftly put back in their graves unburied corpse state.\n\n\nFires rage throughout the fairgrounds and more bodies than you feel like counting litter the ground. Crows and ravens already flock to the feast. It looks like the tournament is going to have to be canceled. Oh well, there is always next year. You turn around and look to see if Bell is still alive and willing for a romp.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Pinpoint your aim", "result": "If you can hit Lord Cleaver\u2019s shield just right, then you can knock him right off of his horse. You can do this. This is what you spent all those hours training for. You pinpoint your target and adjust your aim. The horses draw closer. You can see the roan courser\u2019s breath. Here it comes!\n\n\nCrack! Thud! Crack!\n\n\nWeightless, you are falling. A flash of pain. Blackness.\n\n\nI have good news, bad news and worse news, hero. Good news: you managed to hit your target. That first crack was both of your lances splintering. Bad news: the thud was you hitting the ground. Worse news: the second crack was your skull splitting in two when it bounced off a rock.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "I changed my mind; I'll fight in the melee like Jon said.", "result": "Wise decision: it is best to stick with your strong suits.\n\n\nYou excuse yourself and get up to leave. The moneylender, mutters something to himself while stroking his beard as you head toward the door. Something is really evil about this guy. You turn around and lop off his head before heading home. Yeah, that was probably a good idea.\n\n\nThe morning of the tournament dawns crisp and cool with a slight breeze, just enough to give the ladies\u2019 skirts a nice billowing. You feel a familiar stirring in your loins, and it is driving you insane. As a fledgling hero, you have been saving yourself for your future princess bride, but dear God has it left you on edge, not that you have not had offers. Jon was right; your scar is a chick magnet. You practically have to beat them off.\n\n\nA gaggle of girls giggle as you walk past them. Bitches.\n\n\nWhoa, where did that come from? That is not very heroic. The proper term is \u2018wenches.\u2019 Remember that next time, fledgling hero.\n\n\nWith your minor slip into villainy over, you prepare for the melee and take your place in the fighting field. There appear to be fifty or so participants as you try to pick out some of the people the Baron told you about. You see Mad Moose McDoogle in his clumsy antlered helmet, Sir Richard Lionsmane with his shaggy locks, Sir Henry Williams a.k.a. The Rabid Fox, the Weasel brothers in their matching silver gilded armor, and Bucktooth Barry among others.\n\n\n\u201cSave your energy,\u201d says Jon. \u201cLet the others wear themselves down. They\u2019ll make a mistake eventually. Then you can strike when they\u2019re weak and out of position. And stay by me. We might both be able to get knighthoods out of this.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t worry. I got your back Jon.\u201d\n\n\nA blast from the bugle signals the start of the melee. The clamor of blunted steel on blunted steel rings through the fairgrounds. You and Jon fight back-to-back, just as you did against those trolls several years ago. You two are not the only ones fighting on teams. Out of the corner of your eye, you see the Weasel brothers and Mad Moose McDoogle charge The Rabid Fox.\n\n\nThe Rabid Fox looses ground as the trio attempt to surround him. He isn\u2019t dodging. He\u2019s parrying. He\u2019s done for. The Rabid Fox\u2019s and one of the Weasel brother\u2019s swords shatter on impact. Mad Moose McDoogle peels off the attack and rounds on the Weasel brothers, catching them unaware. He knocks them both down and out just before The Rabid Fox charges him in turn.\n\n\nA sword slashes inches from your cheek, and you regain your focus. Dodge, slash, dodge, dodge, slash, dodge, trip, kick. Another one bites the dust.\n\n\nThe fighting continues until there is just you, Jon, The Rabid Fox, who has not only obtained a new sword but a horse as well, and Bucktooth Barry left.\n\n\nMaybe you should turn on Jon now?", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight with Jon.", "result": "Heroes fight with honor at all times. There is no way in hell you are going to betray Jon. How could you ever look him in the eyes again? Besides, he is pretty fucking awesome. If you are going to win this thing, you are going to do it the right way and beat him with pride, honor, dignity, and all the other bullshit that goes with being a hero.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll distract him. You knock him off the horse,\u201d says Jon.\n\n\n\u201cWhat about Bucktooth Barry?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDodge.\u201d\n\n\nJon darts off to run interference while you attempt to flank. The Rabid Fox is on to your plan though and outmaneuvers you while Bucktooth Barry hedges his position. This might go on for a while. What would a hero do?\n\n\nYou glance up at the spectators and catch sight of the princess. A blonde haired blue eyed bombshell with a bosom to die for. She flashes you a smile of perfect pearly whites. Did you expect anything else? Take a moment to picture all the ways you would love to chivalrously plow her into next Sunday. Just try not to ejaculate prematurely in your armor. That is not heroic. No, go ahead. I can wait.\n\n\nGot all that out of your system? Good. With the princess\u2019s bosom in your mind to inspire you, you charge the mounted knight. He reels the horse around and barrels toward you, eager for the challenge. As you are about to collide, you dodge. The Rabid Fox brings the horse around for another pass. You feel the blood pumping through your veins. The air tastes sweet. Colors are brighter. The world slows down. This is what being a hero is all about.\n\n\nYou and The Rabid Fox rush each other once more. As you are about to collide, not only do you dodge, but you grab the reins as well and yank. Your arm feels like it is going to pop out of its socket, but you grit it out. The Rabid Fox flies through the air and thuds into the dirt. He stumbles to his feet and grabs a greatsword off the ground. Man, this motherfucker just does not give up.\n\n\nHe has the reach advantage, but he is hurt. Pretty bad, judging by the fact he just fell off a galloping horse decked out in mail while brandishing a sword. He should probably be dead: or at least broken. He uses his reach to keep you at a distance, but you bide your time. He will make a mistake. Dodge, backstep, yawn, dodge. A quick glance up at the princess\u2019s bosom. With princess bosom lighting your fire, you see an opening and dive in and drive The Rabid Fox to the ground.\n\n\n\u201cWell fought, friend. I yield,\u201d says The Rabid Fox as you hold your sword tip over him.\n\n\nJon has finished off Bucktooth Barry. It is down to the two of you.", "action_results": [{"action": "For princess bosom!", "result": "There is only one way this story can unfold, and that is with you finally surpassing your master and claiming the princess as your own. For princess bosom! You charge.\n\n\nJon dodges your blow. You swing again. He dodges and counters with an upward thrust. No time to dodge, you catch his sword with your shield. The wood splinters, and you snap your wrist, catching his sword in the shield. D\u00e9j\u00e0 vu?\n\n\nNot quite. A knee slams you in the groin, and you crumple to the ground. Fight through the pain hero! You lash you with your legs, catching Jon in the chest. Both of you regain your feet and slam into each other. Over and over you roll, grappling on the ground. Dust swirls around your heads. You throw blind punches. The crowd cheers.\n\n\nYou fight the good fight, but Jon wins in the end, catching you in a stellar headlock. The king congratulates you both and the crowd gives a standing ovation.\n\n\n\u201cBest melee in years. I think the both of you earned a knighthood for such a fine display of chivalrous combat,\u201d says the king. \u201cTonight there will be a feast for the ages... on the Baron\u2019s tab of course.\u201d\n\n\nYou are bummed you will not be getting princess bosom, but you feel proud of how you fought. Even heroes take their lumps from time to time.\n\n\nAs expected, Jon names the princess Lady Fair of the tournament. You see him whisper something in her ear and point in your direction. She is walking toward you! What the hell did he say?\n\n\n\u201cPrincess Anne.\u201d You bow. \u201cIt is my pleasure.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAnd mine. Would you care to walk with me in the gardens?\u201d\n\n\nYou readily agree and spend much of the remainder of your time getting to know Princess Anne. She is everything you could hope for in a princess, blonde, blue eyed, fair skinned, sweet, charming, big bosomed, and all the works.\n\n\n\u201cWhat did you say to her?\u201d you ask Jon one evening.\n\n\nHe shrugs. \u201cI love princesses as much as the next guy, but really, I\u2019m in to redheads.\u201d He smirks. \u201cI think the farmboy turned knight getting the princess makes the better story. I\u2019m nailing the Baron\u2019s daughter. Wildfire hair on her.\u201d He winks. \u201cJust the way I like it.\u201d\n\n\nMonths pass and you perform several fantastic heroic feats. Jon marries the Baron\u2019s daughter and you become engaged to the princess. Some days it all seems so unreal, like just the other day you were selling turnips and mucking shit. Now you are a hero.", "action_results": [{"action": "Time to kill a motherfucking dragon.", "result": "That\u2019s the spirit!\n\n\nEmissaries arrive at the capital from the neighboring kingdom of Irelandshire pleading for assistance with a dragon problem. It seems the fiend has been soaring around the country, torching towns, devouring livestock, looting treasuries and snatching young ladies from their bedchambers. Naturally, you don your shining armor and volunteer to help rid them of the menace once and for all. Princess Anne kisses you goodbye as you ride off to hunt down the winged beast.\n\n\nFinding the dragon\u2019s lair \u2013 a cave high up a tall mountain with half the forest burnt to ashes \u2013 proves easier than you anticipated. No one ever said dragons were discreet. The march up the mountain presents more of a challenge. Far too steep for your steed, you hike up on foot. You soon learn hiking in full plate armor is not easy. Every step requires sheer willpower and brute strength. Sweat pores off you so fast you fear you are going to rust, so you strip down to your leathers and continue to the top light as feather, just like the old days when you first practiced with Jon in the yard. \n\n\n\u201cWell at least you aren\u2019t a knight in shining armor,\u201d says the dragon as you enter his cave. The behemoth is resting on a hoard of gold, jewels, swords, cups, and other valuable crap because of course he is.\n\n\n\u201cPardon me?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDo you have any idea how annoying it is fighting knights in shining armor? I just fry them with a nice blast of fire. They\u2019re too heavy and clunky to dodge. No challenge at all. You should see the nice collection of armor I have though. I could outfit an entire empire.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cActually, I stripped my armor coming up. I got sweaty.\u201d\n\n\nThe dragon sighs. \u201cWell you\u2019re smarter than most at least.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYour days are done dragon!\u201d You prepare to make a heroic speech, but cut it off. \u201cWait, where are the noble ladies?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDidn\u2019t you see all the dung piles on the mountainside?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou ate them!?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat did you think I do with them? Keep them as company?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou bastard!\u201d\n\n\nYou draw your sword. Fate has finally arrived. Are you up to the task?", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack his eyes.", "result": "The eyes: go for the eyes. If you can blind the dragon, you can pounce in and end this while his guard his down.\n\n\nYou scoop a handful of ashes from the ground and fling them at the dragon\u2019s eyes as you bound toward him. It\u2019s not very effective\u2026 The dragon stares at you and shakes his head as you scuttle to a stop.\n\n\n\u201cI burn entire cities and forests for a living,\u201d says the dragon. \u201cDo you have any idea how much ash is floating around in the air after I start lighting shit up?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cUhm\u2026\u201d\n\n\n\u201cLiterally, a metric fuck ton.\u201d The dragon blinks. \u201cI have protective coverings over my eyes to keep all that crap out. How else would I be able to see with all that debris in the air? I\u2019d be spending my entire fortune on eye-drops.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cLike a camel?\u201d You sidle closer to the dragon.\n\n\n\u201cDid you just compare me, a dragon, to a dirty, smelly, filthy, no good camel? You wannabe heroes have no resp-\u201d the dragon sighs. \u201cYou know what? It\u2019s not worth it. Sure, like a camel,\u201d the dragon sighs.\n\n\n \u201cSo where\u2019s your hump?\u201d You continue to inch closer to the dragon.\n\n\n\u201cWh- what?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYour hump. You said you\u2019re like a camel, so where\u2019s your hump?\u201d You jump up and down, searching for a hump on the dragon\u2019s back while closing distance.\n\n\n\u201cYou have got to be kidding.\u201d The dragon slams his head into the cave wall. \u201cWhy do all the retarded heroes have to come fight me?\u201d\n\n\nWhile the dragon wallows, you pitter-patter your way in close and drive your sword deep into his eye socket. The wyrm wails in agony as you wrench the sword free, clamber over his snout and shove the blade into his other eye. Before you can scurry away, the dragon whips his head around and snaps his massive jaws around you. You scream as your bones splinter and your innards trickle from your body. The world fades to black as the dragon swallows you down his gullet.\n\n\nThat seemed quite painful. If it is any consolation, you managed to both severely wound the dragon and piss him off before he ate you. The dragon goes on to burn the entire kingdom of Irelandshire to ashes in a blind rage before Jon and The Rabid Fox save the day and cut out his heart.\n\n\nPrincess Anne is heartbroken and goes on to become a sex addict and develops a dungeon porn fetish to cope with your untimely death.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Attack his belly.", "result": "Everyone knows the underbelly of a dragon is vulnerable. If you get in close, your sword can rip through him like hot crocodile shears through flesh.\n\n\nYou charge the dragon with sword in hand. The dragon blasts fire. You have too much forward momentum; there is no way to dodge this one. The world slows to crawl and your entire life flashes before your eyes: all that time spent mucking shit and selling cabbages, long hours training in the yard with Jon, your sexless courting of Princess Anne. Wow, your life sucked.\n\n\nWell, maybe you can take the dragon with you: go out a hero and all that.\n\n\nYou grit your teeth and shut your eyes as you barrel into the firestorm. The stink of charred flesh and burning hair cloak you. Your blood boils, lips sear off, eyes burst and brain tingles as it begins to melt inside your skull. Somehow, you are still conscious as you storm through and plunge your sword through the dragon\u2019s soft underbelly bounce your sword off the dragon\u2019s rigid scales. Turns out those underbelly scales are just as tough as the rest of them. Who knew?\n\n\nThe dragon chuckles as you collapse to the cave floor in a smoldering heap. \u201cFoolish bravery, mortal, is foolishness all the same.\u201d The dragon admires you a moment longer before he devours you as a midday snack.\n\n\nIf it serves as any consolation, your remains go on to fertilize several small trees\u2026 which promptly get burnt down.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Neither.", "result": "Attacking him head on would be suicide. Sure, it would be nice to blind him or cut into his underbelly, but he would just fry you with a blast of fire before you even got close. There is only one course of action to take in times like this: dodge.\n\n\nLike a timid bear you perform a false charge, pulling up at the last second as a blast of fire scorches the ground in front of you. Without your bulky armor you are able to twist and twirl, spin and swirl, dip and dive, jump and jive and pirouette away from the dragon fire while inching ever closer to the monster. Since when did you get moves like Jagger?\n\n\n\u201cDie mortal,\u201d the dragon shouts, releasing another blast of fire.\n\n\nYou duck behind a conveniently placed boulder just in time to escape. The dragon stalks closer. His massive limbs quake the ground with every step: his tail smashing the wall without purpose. Another blast of fire. The heat coming off the rock is like lava. You fear it is about to melt.\n\n\nIs this it? Is this the end?\n\n\n\u201cFoolish mortal. The only way to kill a dragon is with a disorganized band of heroes and a bard, or with a magic sword. And you don\u2019t have either. Mwhahaha.\u201d\n\n\nShit. I\u2019m totally fucked. Why didn\u2019t I read that book on dragon clich\u00e9s Jon bought me last Christmas? Think fast, think fast, think fast. Brain blast! Music! Music soothes the savage beast. Shit, I forgot my fiddle.\n\n\nThe dragon rumbles closer, taking his sweet time. Any more bright ideas, Mr. Hero?", "action_results": [{"action": "Cry and Beg for Mercy", "result": "\u201cPlease, Mr. Dragon spare me!\u201d Tears pour down your cheeks, and you drop to your knees. \u201cI\u2019ll do whatever you want. I can be a good servant, or a steward. Everyone can use a good steward.\u201d\n\n\nThe dragon laughs so hard the entire mountain shakes. The roof of the cave above his head collapses, crushing his head. Ever the opportunist, you leap to your feet and plunge your sword down his gullet. The dragon\u2019s jaws snap shut before you can remove your arm. Steam spouts from his nostrils, burning your face. You see the dragon\u2019s body burst into flames as you blackout from the pain.\n\n\nYou awake sometime later in unfamiliar surroundings. A nice plush pillow is beneath your head, and half your head is wrapped in bandages. Your balls itch, but when you go to scratch them you realize your arm is gone.\n\n\n\u201cWhere the fuck am I?\u201d\n\n\nA comely wench caresses your hand. \u201cMy good knight, you killed the dragon! We heard the battle from down in the valley, and some of the braver folk went to investigate. They found you gravely wounded, so they brought you to me and I nursed you back to health.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAre you a herb woman?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat are you?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cA milkmaid.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhy did they bring me to you?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMilk gives you strong bones?\u201d She shrugs. \u201cBut don\u2019t worry, I did a good job taking care of you. I watched over you day and night, and I only touched your private bits a few times.\u201d \n\n\n\u201cWell that\u2019s nice of you, but\u2026 WHAT?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cTo clean them, Sir.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh, I\u2019m sorry. I just thought\u2026 never-mind. Thank you.\u201d\n\n\nThe milkmaid wench smirks coyly. \u201cWith my tongue.\u201d\n\n\nGoddamn it.\n\n\nWell, there you go, Mr. Hero. You killed the dragon. Not exactly the most heroic showing, but it got the job done. I imagine you expect to go back to your princess bride now, am I right? Princess Anne must be dying to see you. Boy, do I have bad news for you.\n\n\nPrincesses\u2019 do not marry hideously scarred men, and your face, well go look in a mirror. You look like someone slammed your head into a flaming brazier. Hey, don\u2019t get too upset. You are still a knight, and you have the eternal gratitude of the kingdom of Irelandshire. Plus, you got a ton of booty from that dragon\u2019s lair.\n\n\nTime passes and you heal, more or less. You have the pick of any non-princess in two kingdoms, but you decide to settle down with the milkmaid wench, whose name turns out to be Marie. The two of you have several healthy children together with heroic aspirations of their own. You still keep in touch with your old pals Jon, Samwellington, and The Rabid Fox. You have a few castles built in both kingdoms and become a legendary hero. Of course, when you tell the story, you leave out the crying and begging for mercy part.\n\n\nYour life with Marie is hot and steamy. You are not sure if you will ever get used to all of her kinks \u2013 you find yourself in some interesting scenarios when you wake up from time to time \u2013 but at the same time they kind of turn you on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Once upon a time...", "result": "The wintry winds howl a horrible wail, whipping white watery snow against the weathered watchtower\u2019s westernmost wall. Yes, it is indeed a dark and stormy night, but darker and stormier and maybe just a tad more purple than your run-of-the-mill dark and stormy night.\n\n\nSomewhere deep in the forest a unicorn frolics in a magical glade, as elves watch and scamper amongst the trees, polishing their bows with the blood of dwarves.\n\n\n\u201cKilled a big fat one today, Elfrond,\u201d says Elfmoor. \u201cBastard was trying to chop down a cherry tree. Can you believe it, a fucking cherry tree? Sacrilege.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHave you ever wondered why we hate the dwarves so much?\u201d asks Elfrond.\n\n\n\u201cWhat do you mean? They\u2019re fucking dwarves! And this one chopped down a tree. A cherry tree. Only thing that rivals my love of trees are cherries. And music. And song. And like five other things.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah, I\u2019ve just been thinking lately. How did we get these sweet bows, if we didn\u2019t chop down a tree to shape them. And how do we burn fires without firewood? And why exactly do we hate the dwarves?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s canon. Don\u2019t ask questions.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s a cannon?\u201d\n\n\nSuddenly, the elves quit bickering. Something that only happens once in a thousand years occurs. The glade explodes with magical aura as the unicorn releases its legendary rainbow fart. Magical anomalies, such as this, signal only one thing: the birth of a hero.\n\n\nElfmoor takes a big whiff of the magical aroma. \u201cB. E. A. Utiful. Times like this make life worth living.\u201d\n\n\nElfrond shakes his head. \u201cElfmoor, we\u2019re immortal. I\u2019ve seen this like ten times already. And every time this happens, it means something evil is about to come afoot.\"\n\n\n\u201cBut the hero always wins.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHave you ever heard the term collateral damage?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIs that a sword?\u201d\n\n\nAnd there you have it. The magical unicorn fart that marks your birth. How exciting! I wonder what type of hero you will grow up to be.", "action_results": [{"action": "I want to be a wizard! Step aside, Potter!", "result": "A fine choice my friend. What is fantasy without wizards and magic?\n\n\nYou are born to parents of mysterious lineage. You cannot recall their faces or remember much of anything about them. When you are three years old, an old grey-bearded man in a tall pointy hat whisks you away to his society of magical folk and teaches you all he knows of the arcane. Naturally, the society is on a magical island whose shores are shrouded in fog, located some indeterminate number of leagues off the coast of the mainland. Growing up is fun, but tedious. Spells and incantations do not learn themselves.\n\n\nEverything is peaches and plum pudding until one day you receive a summons \u2013 via giant flying eagle \u2013 from your old master. You are high up on the mountain, collecting snow samples for an alchemical experiment. It would take several days to hike all the way back to Manawell.\n\n\n\u201cMr. Eagle?\u201d you ask. Your voice is hedging, what you are about to ask is groundbreaking.\n\n\n\u201cWhat is it friend?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cCould you give me a lift back down the mountain? This sounds important.\u201d\n\n\nThe eagle cocks his head. You are not sure if an eagle can look bemused, but if it could, you imagine this is what it would look like. \u201cYou know, no one has ever asked me that before. I always wondered why.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWizards are notorious for staying in shape,\u201d you say. \u201cHow else could white-beards run around with swords and keep pace with adventuring young heroes?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAh, I see. You learn something new every day. Well, very well. Hop on my back, but try not to pull out any feathers.\u201d\n\n\nThe eagle flies you down to Manawell in no time at all. There may even be time to run a nice 10k this evening to make up for your lost exercise. You rush through the magical community to your master\u2019s tower, stopping only a brief moment to window shop at Merlim\u2019s Beard Trimming Emporium. Don\u2019t worry, I understand. Proper beard care is essential. No one wants to be the ruddy wizard with a bird\u2019s nest in his beard. That guy sucks. You finish your browsing and proceed to your master\u2019s tower without further incident.\n\n\n\u201cMaster Dumbledalf,\u201d you shout as you reach the top room of the tower. \u201cI received your summons. Is everything alright?\u201d\n\n\nDumbledalf sets down his alchemical decanter and stares at you, his face expressionless. \u201cWhy are you here?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI told you. I received your summons.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes, but you aren\u2019t supposed to be here for five more days.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI hitched a ride with the eagle.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou what!? Oh you ruined everything.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cExcuse me?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not supposed to die for five more days. You sapped all the drama from my character. Oh well, just sit tight one second.\u201d\n\n\nDumbledalf crushes a few rattails and snake fangs with his mortar and pestle, boils some rum and troll\u2019s blood, sprinkles some belladonna power, and mixes all the goop together. He downs the concoction in one gulp and collapses to the floor.\n\n\n\u201cThere, that\u2019s better,\u201d he says, coughing blood. \u201cYou have finally completed your apprenticeship under me. My time has come and gone, but yours is just beginning. As a true wizard, you must now undertake a heroic adventure. Let me see here.\u201d Dumbledalf pulls a scrap of parchment from within his robes. \u201cAh, here we go. There are two available that fit your qualifications.\u201d\n\n\nDumbledalf dies in your arms. You scream and curse the gods for taking the life of such a fine man. He was only 1984. He should have had at least another century in him. You finish your mandatory blubbering and look at the paper.", "action_results": [{"action": "Travel to Westengland and Kill some Evil Wizard", "result": "Why bother tutoring the next great hero when you can be the next great hero? Killing an evil wizard is certain to garner the fame and acclaim necessary to ascend to the ever sought after hero status. You grab an assortment of essential wizarding supplies from Dumbledalf\u2019s stores, cast a burying spell on his body, and head to the port to set sail for Westengland.\n\n\nThe captain of the Briar Rose is thrilled to have a wizard onboard. Wizards prove quite invaluable at sea, what with all the pirates, storms, and sea monsters lurking beneath the depths.\n\n\n\u201cA wizard at sea is worth his weight in silver,\u201d says Captain Horatio.\n\n\n\u201cI thought the saying was \u2018worth his weight in gold.\u2019\n\n\n\u201cNo offense your magicness, but if a wizard was worth his weight in gold, I\u2019d have no room for a profit.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBetter to be alive and penniless than dead and rich.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cA wise wizard,\u201d chuckles Captain Horatio. \u201cWho would have guessed?\u201d\n\n\nCaptain Horatio excuses himself and bustles about the ship, blowing his horn. What a pleasant fellow.\n\n\nYou watch as the magic island that has been your home for so many years shrinks in the distance. Leaving feels so weird, but when destiny calls, heroes must rise to the summons. Perhaps someday you will return.\n\n\nDespite all the perils of the sea, your trip to Westengland is nothing but sugarplums and rainbows. Dear Lord are you sick of sugarplums. Captain Horatio could have stocked the ship with a wider and more nutritional array of foodstuffs. At least all of the rainbows are pretty to look at.\n\n\nThrilled to be back on dry land and away from the sugarplums, you hasten to the king\u2019s castle \u2013 aptly named King\u2019s Castle \u2013 on the outskirts of the capital city. The road reveals no signs of this evil wizard, though the lack of peasants proves quite disturbing. On second thought, perhaps that is a sign.\n\n\nAs you near King\u2019s Castle, the unmistakable and addicting allure of magic thickens in the air. Sweet, succulent, salacious magic. Coaxing your horse to gallop like she never galloped before and thanking God for the widespread success of the Rent-a-Horse industry, you burst onto the scene of a massive siege of King\u2019s Castle.\n\n\nGrotesque trolls, disfigured by horrible magic spells, batter the gates with uprooted trees. Goblins beyond count shriek and swarm the outer walls on ladders crafted from bones. Wyverns \u2013 the dragon wannabes of the world \u2013 lash at the human defenders from above. Centaurs loose arrows and rape women, even in the midst of battle: the deviant equines. Mages cast spells and necromancers awaken the dead. The defenders fight with vigor and valiance only for the slain to arise and fight on. Most horrible of all, waves of human corpses throw themselves at the castle walls, snaking from the smoking ruins of the capital city down in the valley.\n\n\nThe evil wizard is really throwing the gauntlet at King\u2019s Castle. The castle may be beyond saving already. The old adage a wizard is never late or early isn\u2019t really true. Of course, a wizard can be late or early! They are human after all. Sort of. The wisest thing may be to find the king and save his sorry ass. Then again, heroes aren\u2019t known for always making the wisest decision. So how about it hero, do you pack enough punch to turn the tides of battle on your own?", "action_results": []}]}, null, {"action": "I am Vegeta, prince of all saiyans!", "result": "No teaser here, but you wouldn't actually get to play as Vegeta, just an angsty prince with a dead father.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Is there any way I can be a girl?", "result": "Certainly, you can be a girl. However, I am afraid it only comes in one flavor: spunky!\n\n\nBorn to ho-hum parents in a ho-hum village in a ho-hum kingdom, life growing up bores the daylights out of you. You are faster and stronger than all the boys are, and sexier and wilder than all the girls, despite their best efforts. You thirst for adventure and always prance around with an almost \u2013 but not quite \u2013 slutty smile on your face.\n\n\nOne evening you find yourself down at the lake with your friends: Cherry, Melisa, Tommy, and Brad. Of course, you have more friends because you are just so damn spunky, but these are your best friends.\n\n\nYou notice Tommy staring at you for the sixth time today. \u201cIs everything alright, Tommy?\u201d you ask. \u201cYou seem to be off in the clouds.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah, I\u2019m ok. Can I tell you something?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou can tell me anything, Tommy.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo offense, but you have awesome breasts.\u201d\n\n\nYou smack Tommy upside the head. \u201cTommy. Stop. Now. That is not cool. Just because I\u2019m spunky does not mean you get to ogle my body. If that is all you can think about, stare at Melisa. She\u2019s the whore of our group.\u201d\n\n\nMelisa nods. \u201cGuilty as charged.\u201d\n\n\nYou storm off with Brad and Cherry following at your heels like a pair of nipping puppies while Tommy and Melissa disappear into the bushes. After all, this is a tale of a heroine\u2019s escapades, not her sexcapades.\n\n\n\u201cThe nerve of that guy,\u201d you say, shaking your head. \u201cI am a prime virgin flower, and I will not be treated like some common whore. I think it\u2019s time we went off on a grand adventure and left that jerk behind.\u201d\n\n\nBrad\u2019s face glows with delight. \u201cI second that!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat about Melissa?\u201d asks Cherry.\n\n\n\u201cAs long as there is a man around with a penis and a pulse, Melissa will be fine,\u201d you say. \u201cI say we go adventuring!\u201d\n\n\nSo you decide to leave your quaint little life in village ho-hum for the experience of a lifetime. Any thoughts as to where you are adventuring?", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Bonus Material", "result": "Thanks for playing. Enjoy the troll blood.", "action_results": [{"action": "Play as an Elf", "result": "Elves are certainly clich\u00e9. But I\u2019m a species-ist. That means while I have no problem with humans be they white, orange, green, blue, black, yellow, pink, purple, brown, grey, indigo, crimson, maroon, cream, peach, pie\u2026 wait where was I going with this. Oh, right. I have a deep hatred of other species. We humans are superior and everyone else must bow down to our supremacy. Don\u2019t judge me. It\u2019s a disease. Now excuse me while I enslave this squirrel.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Play as a Dwarf", "result": "Game of Thrones changed the world for dwarf kind forever. Are they a species or are they people? The species-ist in me is skeptical. Judgment shall be reserved.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Play as a Warrior-Cat", "result": "You ran out into the road and got trampled by a runaway carriage, and your corpse was devoured by a pack of dogs. The End.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Play as a Dark Elf", "result": "Have you not read Eternal? Go read Eternal. Then come back and tell me how heroic dark elves are.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Play as a Sparkly Vampire", "result": "Really, you want to be a sparkly vampire? What kind of writer do you think I am? I have standards after all. Do you really want to be a sparkly vampire, or are you just trying to piss me off?", "action_results": [{"action": "I'm sorry. I'll pick something more appropriate.", "result": "That\u2019s right young lady. No hero of mine is going to be some sissified vampire. My heroes have pretty blue eyes, long blonde hair and flawless pearly whites. Manliness.", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Sparkly Vampire!", "result": "Stephanie, I hate you.\n\n\nFine, you want to be a sparkly vampire, go ahead.\n\n\nOnce a pompous little lordling living in the south of Spainland you not only had the misfortune of being bitten by a vampire while having sex with your sister, but also getting gene spliced with a unicorn by the hands of a genre-bending \u2013 and seriously twisted \u2013 wizard from the future called a Brony. The magic involved with this transformation goes far beyond my comprehension of the arcane, but I assure you it was incredibly painful. On the positive end, however, you now fart bubblegum and shit figgy pudding.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Dodge?", "result": "If Jon taught you one thing, it is how to dodge like it is your job, and it kind of is. Sort of. I don\u2019t know, just kill the damned thing.\n\n\nYou leap over the rock and attempt a triple double-axle barrel roll in midair and land on the dragon\u2019s head. For some reason, this works and you manage to dodge the dragon\u2019s fire breath in the process with your sixth sense.\n\n\nThe dragon thrashes his head against the cave walls, but you manage to cling on while avoiding having your body smashed to a thousand bloody bits. You hack at the dragon\u2019s head with your sword, but it may as well be a butter knife for all the good it does against the tough dragon scales. Maybe you should have dodged over toward one of those fancy looking magic swords.\n\n\nShut up. I have this under control.\n\n\nOk. Whatever you say, Mr. Hero.\n\n\n\u201cHey, dragon, you suck.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI will not have a mortal make mockery of me!\u201d the dragon bellows. \u201cGet. Off. My. Head.\u201d\n\n\nThe dragon swings his mighty tail at you, but once again, you manage to use your sixth sense to dodge all of the attacks. The dragon repeatedly pummels himself in the head with his own tail to the point where he shatters both his scales and his skull. You drive your sword into the crevice and perform a super-duper double whammy backflip with a 720 degree spin off the dragon\u2019s head as he bursts into flames.\n\n\n\u201cWicked. Now how the hell am I going to haul all this shit down the mountain?\u201d\n\n\n\u2026\n\n\nWhat, aren\u2019t you going to finish the story?\n\n\nYeah, just give me a second.\n\n\nWhat the fuck is the problem? I won, I want to marry my princess and lose my damn virginity already.\n\n\nI\u2019m just struggling to comprehend how you turned into a jedi.\n\n\nA what?\n\n\nNever mind.\n\n\n\u2026\n\n\nWord of your victory quickly spreads across the land. The king of Irelandshire showers you in gratitude and offers you his daughter as a bride, which you decline because you proved to be a noble and heroic knight and you already have a bride. You take some of the dragon\u2019s treasure back home with you and build a series of castles and forts at strategic points across the countryside. Your future kin are keeping this kingdom for life. Historians and bards alike flock to scribble down your life story and paint it in song.\n\n\nYour wedding to Princess Anne is a legend in its own right: drunken revelry at its finest. Samwellington entertains the masses by sticking himself with pointy knives and not screaming in pain, good old pork lard. Jon and The Rabid Fox have a friendly sparring match, showcasing some of the finest swordsmanship since your melee. Jon later demonstrates another kind of swordsmanship with his wildfire gingersnap of a wife. On the table. Next to one of the cakes. The king gets drunk and accidentally burns down the stage while a troupe of troubadours are performing. No one important dies.\n\n\nMost importantly, you finally get to bang Princess Anne, that blue-eyed blonde haired big bosomed goddess of your dreams: a night of ecstasy ends in an explosion of pleasure with many more to come.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "How about I steal one of those sweet magic swords sticking out of his treasure pile.", "result": "You make a mental note to thank the dragon for providing you with the recipe for his death at his funeral as you yank the first magic sword you find from the mountain of plunder. The sword shines a brilliant blue-gold and has a queer hourglass shape carved into the blade: yep, definitely magic. Though, something feels awful familiar about this. Oh well, you can worry about that later. You have a dragon to kill.\n\n\n\u201cYour day of reckoning has come, dragon!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNo, you fool,\u201d the dragon rasps. \u201cPut that down. Hasn\u2019t anyone ever told you not to meddle with magic you don\u2019t know how to use?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNope.\u201d\n\n\nThe dragon breathes fire at you, but you knock it away with a swing of the sword. The resulting fireball explodes in the treasure hoard. Molten gold and silver splatter everywhere. Droplets burn into your arms and chest, but you struggle through the pain and raise the magic sword for the killing blow.\n\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ll doom us all,\u201d the dragon pleads.\n\n\nNot that it\u2019s my place, but I think you should listen to the dragon.\n\n\nWhat do you expect me to do, negotiate a treaty?\n\n\nI would endorse that. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Fine.", "result": "\u201cAlright dragon,\u201d you say. \u201cThe asshole narrator told me not to kill you. What\u2019s the deal?\u201d\n\n\nThe dragon sighs in relief as steam spouts from his nostrils. \u201cOf all the fucking magic swords, you grabbed the Time-Warper.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cAnd I care why?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOnce the blade slices into something living, the last five seconds of all life are replayed on an infinite loop.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHow do you stop it?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou can\u2019t.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s fucking retarded. Who would make such a stupid sword?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cA villain.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBut the villain would be damning himself for all eternity too.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI said a villain. Not a smart villain.\u201d\n\n\nAgreeing you are at an impasse, you and the dragon negotiate a treaty the two of you find mutually acceptable. The dragon receives 50% of all taxes collected within Irelandshire, 1 out of every 3 sheep, 1 princess of his choice per year, and you receive one dragon ride every Sunday after church. You are not very good at negotiations.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I'm killing him.", "result": "\u201cYou\u2019ll doom us all,\u201d the dragon pleads again.\n\n\n\u201cNo, just you.\u201d And you hammer the sword into the dragon.", "action_results": [{"action": "Deja vu", "result": "\u201cYou\u2019ll doom us all,\u201d the dragon pleads again.\n\n\n\u201cNo, just you.\u201d And you hammer the sword into the dragon.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Time to retire.", "result": "Did you seriously just turn down the opportunity to kill a dragon? You may be a hero, but you aren\u2019t the clich\u00e9\u2019 hero you were destined to be. You could have done more. Oh well, what is done is done.\n\n\nYou marry Princess Anne and have a beautiful wedding ceremony. All the dukes, earls, barons, and other lords in the kingdom attend. Jon serves as your best man and leads the wedding toast. Samwellington gets drunk and passes out in one of the massive strawberry cakes while receiving a blowjob from one of the maids, not quite sure how that happened.\n\n\nSir Henry Williams, your old friend The Rabid Fox, regales the guests with tales from the tournament and other ventures you undertook together in the aftermath. \u201cWould you believe,\u201d he says, \u201cwe saw a unicorn fart in a glade a few months back? Mark of a hero\u2019s birth is what that is.\u201d Hmm, so much for that once every thousand years bullshit. You lame ass heroes are becoming a dime a dozen.\n\n\nToo bad ma and pa could not be around to see this, but heroes almost never have parents survive long enough to see them achieve success. You know their watching over you from somewhere above though.\n\n\nLater that night, you finally get to relief all that pent up tension that has been building up in your loins for all of these years. You are glad you saved yourself because it was something special. All thirty seconds of it. But you get better with time, and Princess Anne plops out several little you\u2019s, one of which grows up to be king someday.\n\n\nStill. You could have killed a dragon.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Actually, I was going to name one of the other girls Lady Fair of the Tournament.", "result": "You have to be kidding me. Don\u2019t you know anything about the antics of clich\u00e9 knightly heroes? The gallant knight always marries the blue eyed blonde haired princess and enjoys blissful princess bosom until the end of his days. And you want to throw all of that away for some lowly baron\u2019s daughter or common wench? You disgust me.\n\n\nFighting for an unworthy cause, you race forward to meet Jon in good old-fashioned master-student combat. The clamor of steel on steel fills the field as you and Jon clash and slash. Sweat stings your eyes as Jon attacks with relentless vigor. You dodge, parry, and counterstrike as best you can, but you are fighting against the man who taught you everything you know. How can you possibly hope to win? You don\u2019t even have the righteous thirst for princess bosom riling your untapped potential.\n\n\nFor gritty lowborn buxom wenches!\n\n\nWell, I must admit they do have their own special brand of flavor. It just doesn\u2019t have the same ring to it though.\n\n\nDrunk on visions of buxom wenches you dodge blow after blow after blow. You resist the urge to strike and continue to dodge; your heart will tell you when it is time to attack.\n\n\n\u201cI taught you well,\u201d Jon pants. \u201cYou\u2019re dodging like a true champion.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI learned from the best.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cTime for another lesson.\u201d Jon backs off and takes a defensive position. \u201cYou can\u2019t dodge if I don\u2019t attack.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou son of a bitch.\u201d\n\n\nJon smirks. \u201cTrumped.\u201d\n\n\nA crazy idea crosses your mind. You don\u2019t know if it\u2019ll work \u2013 or if it even makes any sense \u2013 but it just might be stupid enough to work. With nothing to lose and everything to gain, you begin the attack. Just as expected Jon dodges. Then you dodge his dodge, catching Jon completely by surprise. Taking a page out of Samwellington\u2019s incredibly short book of useful combat skills you follow up with a dodge ram attack, circling Jon and barreling him into the ground. The maneuver hurts like hell, but like a true hero you ignore the pain and leap to your feet.\n\n\nYou hold your blade over Jon\u2019s throat. \u201cYield.\u201d\n\n\nJon chuckles. \u201cNice moves. You win.\u201d\n\n\nYou help Jon to his feet as the crowd erupts into a chorus of cheers and shouts.\n\n\n\u201cWhat skill! What daring! What a fight!\u201d The king bids you and Jon both kneel and knights the pair of you right there in the field. \u201cThey\u2019ll be talking about this tourney for ages. I don\u2019t even know what that was you did there Sir, but it was fantastic.\u201d\n\n\nAll that is left is for you to name the Lady Fair of the tournament. I still don\u2019t approve of your anti princess antics, but you showed mettle in the melee and that is something to take pride in.\n\n\nTwo buxom wenches who have caught your eyes on since the tourney started: the ginger haired Baron\u2019s daughter, Ginger, and a lowly servant woman, Abbey, with rather typical and mundane features. What the servant woman lacks in grandeur she makes up for with a charming smile and pleasant cuteness all her own. Of course, naming a servant woman Lady Fair could cause some very serious problems by offending the nobles.\n\n\nNot that it is my place to intrude young knight, but Jon has been ogling the gingersnap all day. Take that as you will. The choice is yours after all; you earned it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Name Ginger Lady Fair", "result": "It takes a very special and talented person to handle a fire-crotched wildfire gingersnap, and quite frankly I don\u2019t think you have what it takes.\n\n\nYou name Ginger Lady Fair and marry her shortly after. Jon turns down your request to be your best man, saying something about a dragon he needs to kill in Irelandshire. You\u2019re bummed, but you understand. A hero\u2019s work is never done until the end of the story. Ginger is a freak in bed, and just as I warned, it takes all of your energy to feed her wicked sexual appetite.\n\n\nLife goes on and you undertake a series of adventures with your new friend The Rabid Fox. Sadly, as the years pass you and Jon grow further and further apart. Years go by without seeing or hearing from him at all.\n\n\n\u2026\n\n\nIt has been ten years since the fateful tournament, and you have a small brood of gingersnap children to go with your gingersnap wife. You doubt any of them have it in them to be heroes. There isn\u2019t even a strawberry blonde one in the bunch.\n\n\nAfter several weeks of adventuring with The Rabid Fox, you wave farewell to him at the fork in the road and head to your respective castles. On the way, you find your lands burnt and salted. The villages are nothing but smoldering ruins and the peasants have completely vanished. Massive piles of dung litter the landscape. Urging your trusty steed, Hot Biscuit Slim, to a full gallop you arrive at your castle to find it lying in ruins. Oh, and there\u2019s a dragon sitting on top of the pile of rubble. Jon is there too.\n\n\nYou are starting to think Jon may be jealous about you marrying Ginger. He does have an unhealthy fixation for fire-crotched gingersnaps.\n\n\n\u201cWhere the hell is my family?\u201d You draw your sword, waving it menacingly.\n\n\n\u201cIn my belly.\u201d The dragon guffaws, releasing a blast of deadly dragon fire. \u201cThank you so much Sir Jon for raping the woman first. I love my food when it\u2019s properly terrorized and ravaged.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cJon! How could you?\u201d You fall to your knees in sorrow. \u201cYou were my friend!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t listen to the dragon! She\u2019s lying. I\u2019ve been tracking her for weeks. She\u2019s the mate of the dragon I killed in Irelandshire years ago. To avenge her lover, she\u2019s trying to turn you against me by creating this incredibly unnecessary scenario to frame me for the rape, murder, and plunder of all you know and love.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThat seems excessive, Jon. Excuse me if I don\u2019t buy that.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s true! She wants to set us against each other so she can kill us both while we\u2019re at one another\u2019s throats.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cFor what greater purpose?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cElaborate revenge and kingdom domination.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHmmm, we are pretty badass. I doubt she could kill either of us one on one. And that does sound like something a dragon would do.\u201d\n\n\nThe dragon roars and flaps her massive wings. \u201cI never lie about properly terrorized and ravaged food. Rape and betrayal are the perfect seasonings.\u201d\n\n\nWell now, this is an unfortunate situation. Who is telling the truth?", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill the dragon", "result": "\u201cI trust you, Jon. Let\u2019s make this scaly freak go the way of the dinosaurs. Extinct.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cLeave the witty one-liners to me and you\u2019ve got a deal.\u201d\n\n\nTogether you and Jon dispatch the dragon after a long and grueling battle. You don\u2019t remember any of the details because your heart is too choked with grief. The important thing is the dragon is dead and you\u2019re not. Exhausted and suffering from severe burns you and Jon slump against the ruins of your castle.\n\n\n\u201cWell, so much for a heroes ending,\u201d you say, emptying your canteen. \u201cI guess this is what I get for breaking the clich\u00e9.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI have a confession to make,\u201d says Jon.\n\n\n\u201cOh, God, don\u2019t tell me the dragon was telling the truth.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s a dragon, man. They always tell half-truths. Everything I said was true. I really was tracking the dragon to kill it.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBut\u2026\u201d\n\n\n\u201cBut I got here before the dragon and raped your wife. I\u2019m sorry, man, I have a sickness for fire-crotch. In the meantime, the dragon wasted your livelihood then came and ate Ginger out from under me.\u201d", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Kill Jon and the dragon", "result": "\u201cYou bastard! How could you rape my wife!?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not a bastard!\u201d\n\n\nYou and Jon attack each other, and just as Jon warned, the dragon fries you both with a blast of dragon fire. With the two of you dead the dragon goes on to\u2026 get slain by The Rabid Fox a few hours later.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Name Abbey Lady Fair", "result": "You already shunned clich\u00e9 protocol by refusing to fight for princess bosom, so you may as well go full renegade and elect the servant woman Lady Fair. There is something bewitching about good old down to earth country cuteness. All of the beautiful noble Ladies can primp themselves up all they want, but they can never attain the country wild of a lowborn servant girl.\n\n\nA wave of awe spreads through the crowd as you proclaim Abbey Lady Fair. Fights break out, which quickly turn into full-blown riots. You grab your new ladylove and disappear in the chaos while you still have a chance to escape.\n\n\n\u201cNot so fast,\u201d snarl the high-pitched bitch voices of the weasel brothers. \u201cYou committed a great insult today. I think the king will be quite pleased when we bring him your heads.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI won the melee. By law and tradition the right to name Lady Fair is my choice and mine alone. Now get out of my way or else I\u2019ll have to kick your ass all over again.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cCan you fight the both of us and defend your whore at the same time?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHe doesn\u2019t have to.\u201d The Rabid Fox draws his blade and springs to your side. It appears you have made a friend. \u201cMy good, Sir, my sword is yours.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cThanks, but why are you helping me? I broke the clich\u00e9.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI don\u2019t know what that means, but you fought with honor. And that I can respect.\u201d\n\n\nThe weasel brothers topple over unconscious. Jon and Ginger stand behind them each holding a big ass rock.\n\n\n\u201cMy way saves time.\u201d Jon discards his rock and beams. \u201cNow let\u2019s get out of here so I can get it up and get it on. Know what I mean?\u201d\n\n\nWith that taken care of the six of you make your escape. (The Rabid Fox picked up a prostitute on the way out, that dog.) The kingdom devolves into a bloody civil war as a result of the tournament debacle. In the mayhem, the king got trampled to death and poor Princess Anne was brutally raped by no less than sixty-nine men. Princess Anne recovered from the savagery and personally hunted down every single one of the scum and forced them to castrate themselves and consume the mess. Future reference, don\u2019t mess with her.\n\n\nYou, Jon, and the Rabid Fox carve out your own minor kingdoms and remain close friends to this day. You feel horrible about what happened to Princess Anne and offer her a place of honor in your court, but she politely declines, harboring no bad feelings against you. She elects to travel the world as an adventurer. Your life with the newly crowned Queen Abbey is blissful and filled with bosom and country cunt. You never get the ever sought after princess bosom, but queen bosom is a nice too. \n\n\nI swear she called it that, not me!", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Turn on Jon.", "result": "Fuck this shit. You\u2019re in it to win it. You whirl around and knock Jon out cold. Poor bastard never saw it coming.\n\n\nBucktooth Barry gestures toward The Rabid Fox and the pair of you charge the mounted knight. You pull up at the last moment and watch The Rabid Fox clobber Bucktooth Barry aside the helmet. Seizing the opportunity, you bolt in, grab the reins and yank. The horse bucks, but The Rabid Fox manages to cling in the saddle.\n\n\nWith no other options, you hack at the horse\u2019s legs. The beat cries out in pain as The Rabid Fox topples from the dying beast. You thrust your sword, sticking the point an inch from The Rabid Fox\u2019s throat.\n\n\n\u201cYield.\u201d\n\n\nThe Rabid Fox coughs blood. \u201cYou have no honor. You\u2019re no\u2026 hero.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cHero\u2019s win. I won. Now yield.\u201d\n\n\nBlood gushes down your leg, and you scream in pain as you collapse to your knees. What happened? What the bloody fucking hell!? The dying horse lying beside you twists its neck, reaches up and bites you in the throat. Warm blood trickles down your body. You cannot breath.\n\n\nYou fall into a pool of blood.\n\n\nThe Rabid Fox staggers to his feet, shaking his head.\n\n\nYou hear Jon\u2019s voice. \u201cA heroic knight fights with honor at all times.\u201d Those are the last words you hear as the world fades to black.\n\n\nWell that was disappointing. Killed by a horse. Apparently, you were not the hero I thought you were. He must be somewhere else. Enjoy death.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Compete in the melee.", "result": "It is best to stick with your strong suits. You have combat training and can dodge with the best of them in the melee. From what you understand, dodging is frowned upon in jousting. Besides, you would have to borrow a horse from someone, and you do not have the money to ransom the horse if you lose. Debtors do not make good heroes.\n\n\nJon decides to enter the melee as well.\n\n\nThe morning of the tournament dawns crisp and cool with a slight breeze, just enough to give the ladies\u2019 skirts a nice billowing. You feel a familiar stirring in your loins, and it is driving you insane. As a fledgling hero, you have been saving yourself for your future princess bride, but dear God has it left you on edge, not that you have not had offers. Jon was right; your scar is a chick magnet. You practically have to beat them off.\n\n\nA gaggle of girls giggle as you walk past them. Bitches.\n\n\nWhoa, where did that come from? That is not very heroic. The proper term is \u2018wenches.\u2019 Remember that next time, fledgling hero.\n\n\nWith your minor slip into villainy over, you prepare for the melee and take your place in the fighting field. There appear to be fifty or so participants as you try to pick out some of the people the Baron told you about. You see Mad Moose McDoogle in his clumsy antlered helmet, Sir Richard Lionsmane with his shaggy locks, Sir Henry Williams a.k.a. The Rabid Fox, the Weasel brothers in their matching silver gilded armor, and Bucktooth Barry among others.\n\n\n\u201cSave your energy,\u201d says Jon. \u201cLet the others wear themselves down. They\u2019ll make a mistake eventually. Then you can strike when they\u2019re weak and out of position. And stay by me. We might both be able to get knighthoods out of this.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t worry. I got your back Jon.\u201d\n\n\nA blast from the bugle signals the start of the melee. The clamor of blunted steel on blunted steel rings through the fairgrounds. You and Jon fight back-to-back, just as you did against those trolls several years ago. You two are not the only ones fighting on teams. Out of the corner of your eye, you see the Weasel brothers and Mad Moose McDoogle charge The Rabid Fox.\n\n\nThe Rabid Fox looses ground as the trio attempt to surround him. He isn\u2019t dodging. He\u2019s parrying. He\u2019s done for. The Rabid Fox\u2019s and one of the Weasel brother\u2019s swords shatter on impact. Mad Moose McDoogle peels off the attack and rounds on the Weasel brothers, catching them unaware. He knocks them both down and out just before The Rabid Fox charges him in turn.\n\n\nA sword slashes inches from your cheek, and you regain your focus. Dodge, slash, dodge, dodge, slash, dodge, trip, kick. Another one bites the dust.\n\n\nThe fighting continues until there is just you, Jon, The Rabid Fox, who has not only obtained a new sword but a horse as well, and Bucktooth Barry left.\n\n\nMaybe you should turn on Jon now?", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Surrender.", "result": "Sometimes the odds are just stacked too highly against you. It is not that you are a coward or anything. It is just that you know a lost cause when you see one. If the situation had been different\u2026 Oh well, what is the worst that can happen? They will probably just steal your valuables and leave you on your merry way. Thankfully, none of you are women.\n\n\n\u201cI yield,\u201d you say, unbuckling your sword belt.\n\n\n\u201cSome knight you are,\u201d Jon scoffs as he rushes the bandits. Five bolts tear into his body, ripping his flesh to ribbons like a ragdoll.\n\n\nSamwellington squeals incomprehensible gibberish.\n\n\n\u201cHe never even had a chance to dodge.\u201d A lone tear trickles down your cheek. \u201cPoor bastard.\u201d\n\n\nJon\u2019s eyes snap open. He glares at you as he struggles to his feet, using his sword as a crutch. \u201cCunt.\u201d He takes a step toward you. Five more bolts drive into him, and he collapses in a heap.\n\n\nSamwellington squeals more incomprehensible gibberish.\n\n\n\u201cWhat the-?\u201d \n\n\n\u2026\n\n\nYour head is throbbing and you taste dirt and blood. Bindings dig into your wrists and ankles. The bandits are dragging you through the undergrowth: rather unkindly as your head bangs into root and trunk alike.\n\n\nOh dear God, I hope I don\u2019t have a concussion. Mom always told me to wear a helmet.\n\n\nHow long had you been unconscious? Surely, it could not have been more than a minute or two. The road should still be close. If you could only somehow manage to escape, you could gather reinforcements.\n\n\nYou thrash in an attempt to break free, but your efforts are rewarded with nothing but a series of swift kicks to the ribs. You slip into your happy place for the remainder of the journey, day dreaming of sweet, succulent, juicy bacon and princess bosom.\n\n\n\u2026\n\n\nA fist drills into your gut, wrenching you out of your blissful imagination. The bandit leader towers over you, looking buff and pissed. You know he is the leader because he is wearing a cape and is the only black dude in this story.\n\n\n\u201cAlright, punk, you\u2019ve got two choices.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cNaturally.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m always looking for good men to join my crew, and since you surrendered like a good little bitch, you get the first crack at signing up. All you have to do is kill your friends to prove your loyalty.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cDid you have to hit me?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes, it illustrates my tough guy, no bullshit attitude.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh, I see. Kind of like how Dark Lords sacrifice random minions to show how evil they are.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cExactly. You get the picture. I knew I liked you. Now go kill your friends and maybe one day you can earn the right to wed my ebony bandit princess daughter.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cIs she tight and curvy?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWhat part of bandit princess don\u2019t you get?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cSweet.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Accept the offer", "result": "\u201cI love princess bosom! And bacon.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOf course you do. Underlings, untie him and give him his sword. He has friends to murder.\u201d\n\n\nThe bandit underlings do as commanded and direct you to the tent where Jon and Samwellington are being kept on the opposite side of the camp. The entire place is a mess of mud and slop: nothing like a rainstorm to turn a perfectly planned camp into a pile of crap. As you make your way to take care of business, you spy what can only be the ebony bandit princess. The bandit leader did not do the lass justice. She is nothing less than a dark chocolate goddess sent from the heavens themselves.\n\n\nShe notices you staring and rubs her nipples. \u201cLike what you see?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYes, Mam.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMe too.\u201d She winks and blows a kiss. \u201cThink your cute?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou can bet your scantily clad ass and bosom I do. I\u2019m a generic hero after all. Being cute is in the job description.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOoooooo, a generic hero turned renegade! That really turns me on. I\u2019m so wet.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah, all this rain is getting me soaked too.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cCute and funny! We\u2019re going to have a lot of fun tonight.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI try to have fun every night. I love games. Do you like games?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI think I just orgasmed. See that tent? Five minutes. Be there.\u201d\n\n\nThe ebony bandit princess saunters off, leaving you alone to complete your dark deed. Looking forward to countless nights of games and fun, you duck into the tent to kill Jon and Samwellington. They are blindfolded, bound, and gagged. They won\u2019t even know you betrayed them!\n\n\nYou raise your sword to do the deed, but before you can deliver the stroke, all the wonderful memories you had training under Jon stream through your mind. You remember the first time he taught you to dodge, the first time he had a random ragamuffin kid in the hamlet throw piles of shit at you, the time he told you what a clitoris is, and the time he first taught you that survival sometimes means kicking the enemy in the balls.\n\n\nShit I dunno if I can do this.\n\n\nPerfectly understandable, but I assure you the ebony bandit princess is the only ebony chick in this universe. Is your friendship worth giving that up? She is unique, one-of-a-kind, like a special edition Poke\u2019mon.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ebony bandit princess, I choose you!", "result": "How positively villainous, betraying your best friend and teacher. You kill Jon with a discreet thrust to the heart. Samwellington takes a little more work since you have to cut through all the fat, but in the end, the deed is done. I hope you are proud of yourself.\n\n\nWith a minute to spare, you enter the tent the ebony bandit princess demanded. You play games together all night long, every night for years to come. Eventually, you take over and become the new bandit leader, earning a fortune in the bacon smuggling trade. Life couldn\u2019t be better for a bandit king.\n\n\nFor awhile you feared the ghosts of Jon and Samwellington would return to the living world and haunt you for your atrocious crimes, but thankfully you are left in peace.\n\n\nOne night you die of a heart attack while playing your nightly game with your ebony bandit princess turned queen. The absurd amount of bacon consumption probably had something to do with that. Before you were forced to enter your happy place all those years ago, you had been able to suppress your bacon cravings. Since then you could never resist the urge. Alas, life treated you well all the same.\n\n\nThe afterlife does not. You go to the innermost circle of hell and burn in eternal hellfire for murdering your friends in cold blood, asshole.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Free Jon and Samwellington", "result": "No, you just cannot bring yourself to betray your friends like this. You are a hero goddamn it, and being a hero sometimes means letting the legendary Poke\u2019mon roam free. For whatever reason, the bandits just assumed you would kill your friends and did not even bother maintaining a guard on you until you actually did the dastardly deed, which makes freeing Jon and Samwellington astonishingly droll.\n\n\nSamwellington maintains the status quo by squealing incomprehensible gibberish. The fellow is nothing if not consistent.\n\n\nFreed from his bindings, Jon decks you in the jaw and kicks you in the groin once you hit the ground. \u201cNever. Call. Me. A. Fucking. Bastard.\u201d He kicks you once again for good measure.\n\n\nYou curl into a ball and wheeze. \u201cUnderstood.\u201d\n\n\nWith that out in the air, Jon reverts to all smiles and rainbows and helps you back to your feet. \u201cGood. Thanks for cutting us loose. Ready to settle the score on these pricks?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYeah, just give me a minute. Still in pain here.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cRight, right.\u201d\n\n\nAfter you recover from the assault on your genitals, you, Jon, and the squealing Samwellington launch a surprise assault on the bandit camp. They prove as unprepared and hapless as they have so far demonstrated. Stab, dodge, slash, hack, dodge, dodge, slash, dodge, stab. Soon enough only the bandit leader and the ebony bandit princess remain.\n\n\n\u201cLook at what you\u2019ve done!\u201d he shouts. \u201cDo you think I\u2019ll just stand for this?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI thought you just stood around and scratched your nuts all day,\u201d you say. \u201cThis is a pretty piss poor operation.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYou piss pot! You threw away the opportunity of a lifetime. You could have had an ebony bandit princess. I was going to look at you as a son! Now you\u2019ll never find true love or happiness.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cMy uncle always said, \u2018Every piss pot has its lid.\u2019 I\u2019ll find mine some day.\u201d\n\n\nThe bandit leader draws his scimitar and discards his cape. Oh snap, he means business now. \u201cYou son of a peasant! I\u2019ll kill you!\u201d The bandit leader darts forward with the speed of a black mamba.\n\n\nYou dodge the attack like a pro. The bandit leader moves to strike again, but his own daughter stabs him in the back.\n\n\nThe ebony bandit princess points to the same tent she did earlier. \u201cYou. Me. Tent. Now.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cYay, I love games!\u201d you cheer as you follow her into the tent.\n\n\nWell, well, well nice going hero. You have your cake and you get to eat it out too. Life goes on and you and Jon eventually receive knighthoods for your valiant efforts in your ongoing adventures. Samwellington continues to provide\u2026 company if nothing else.\n\n\nEver since you entered your happy place, you have had difficulty resisting the succulent allure of bacon. Thankfully, with Samwellington around the bacon never lasts long, probably saving you from a heart attack.\n\n\nYou marry the former ebony bandit princess and enjoy your specialty games every night. Yay games!", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Refuse the offer", "result": "There is no way you can betray your friends like that, even if it means certain death. They would never betray you. That manner of treachery is the stuff villains are made of, and that is a long dark road you want no part of. Villains never get princess bosom! You\u2019re also not too sure about their bacon situation.\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll never join you!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cReally? What a pity. I suppose I\u2019ll have to waste you now.\u201d The bandit leader draws his scimitar. \u201cEbony, get in here!\u201d\n\n\nA slick dark chocolate goddess enters the tent: scantily clad in bosom emphasizing furs. \u201cYes, father?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI wanted this chump to see what he was missing out on. Flash him a little more skin\u2026 no not that much! Put your top back on!\u201d\n\n\n\u201cWait a second,\u201d you say. \u201cYou named your daughter Ebony? Isn\u2019t that crass?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not very creative, alright. I don\u2019t even have a fucking name of my own.\u201d\n\n\n\u201cI\u2019m just going to call you Sinbad. Because you sin and you\u2019re bad. Get it?\u201d\n\n\n\u201cOh mother-fucking merciful God!\u201d\n\n\nThe bandit leader, now known as Sinbad hacks your body to bloody bits with his scimitar while Ebony rubs her nipples in the background. Something tells me she has daddy issues. Anyway, you\u2019re dead, so you won\u2019t get to explore them. ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story59.json b/data/scraper/stories/story59.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d11871 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story59.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=25548", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Your name is Arakhan.\n\n\nFor years, you have dreamed of becoming Captain of the Guard, and protecting your small hometown of Lyestra. Fortunately for you, your wildest dreams came true just last week. You finally received your long overdue promotion, and now you are the official Captain of the Guard!\n\n\nLyestra is a quiet enough village, so the first few weeks were rather uneventful. However, two days ago, you received a tip that a group of goblin warriors had been spotted camping out in the woods not far from Lyestra. Goblins rarely come so near to a village, so you and a handful of other men have gone to scope out the situation. So far, you have found nothing. You are running low on supplies, and the men have requested to return to Lyestra.\n\n\nHowever, you told them you would like to make one last sweep of the area before you return home. You and your men have split up to search the area for any sign of the goblins.\n\n\nYou are on your own, in a dense area of the woods. You are searching for any sign that the goblins were here.", "action_results": [{"action": "Search behind a nearby bush", "result": "You get on your hands and knees, hoping to find a clue underneath a nearby bush, but alas, all you get for your trouble is a dirty uniform. There is nothing to be found under the bush. You stand up quickly, trying best as you can to brush the filth from your clothes.\n\n\nWhat now?", "action_results": [{"action": "Inspect the oak tree", "result": "As you stare at the tree, you notice something that had escaped your search before. There appears to be an arrowhead embedded in the trunk of the tree. You yank it out. It seems that it was once attached to an arrow, but someone has snapped off the shaft, leaving just the arrowhead. There is a small white feather attached to the arrowhead. You pull it off. It appears to be decorated with a strange symbol, the likes of which you have never seen before. A red, two headed cobra has been painted onto the feather. The symbol fills you with dread.", "action_results": [{"action": "Place the feather in your pocket", "result": "You feel that you've seen all you can here. You turn, ready to go back to your camp, when suddenly you hear a quick rustling in the bushes. You feel sweat instantly bead on your brow. Someone is coming towards you, and they're moving quickly. What will you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait to see who it is", "result": "You stand at the ready, but keep your sword sheathed. A good thing, too, because at that moment, Adonis, official messenger of Lyestra, comes hurtling through the bushes.\n\n\n\"Arakhan!!\" He nearly collapses to the ground with relief and exhaustion. \"Thank the gods I've found you!\"\n\n\nAdonis is panting heavily. He bends over, trying to catch his breath.\n\n\n\"Calm down,\" you say, \"What seems to be the problem? What are you doing so far from Lyestra?\"\n\n\n\"Lyestra?\" Adonis gets a hollow, far off look in his eyes. \"Lyestra is...now don't take this too hard, but--\" he swallows. \"Lyestra is gone.\"\n\n\nYou nearly sink to your knees. Lyestra? Your home town, gone?\n\n\n\"What do you mean? Tell me, NOW!\" You are barely able to choke back your panic and grief. Your village needs you now more than ever. Now is the time to keep a cool head.\n\n\n\"Goblins came in the night---we---we weren't ready for them,\" Adonis chokes, \"And so many of them! They just kept coming! In hordes! I barely got out with my own--I mean--I fought off at least half a dozen, of course--but---even for someone like me, I knew the odds were hopeless--\"\n\n\n\"Get to the point,\" you growl, \"How many are dead?\"\n\n\nAdonis stares down at the ground.\n\n\n\"....Hundreds,\" he mumbles.\n\n\nNow, you really do fall to your knees. How could you have let this happen? You've failed Lyestra, and nearly a hundred people have paid for your carelessness with their lives. You've failed your guards--your guards! You have to find them. They must be scattered around the woods--somewhere nearby. You have to find them before a troop of goblins finds them first!\n\n\n\"We've got to get back to Lyestra,\" Adonis continues, \"There might be a few survivors left. And we have to find out who was responsible for the attack!\"\n\n\nYou weigh your options. If you go with Adonis now, the two of you could conceivably make it back to Lyestra in two hours. However, there are still a few guards doing their final sweep of the area. They could take care of themselves, surely, but you would feel much better knowing that they are safe in this uncertain time.\n\n\nAdonis looks at you expectantly. What will it be? Find your guard regiment? Or go back to Lyestra and search for survivors?", "action_results": [{"action": "Return to Lyestra with Adonis", "result": "You decide to return to Lyestra with Adonis.\n\n\"The smart choice,\" Adonis nods.\n\nYou feel awful about abandoning your guard regiment, but time is of the essence. And, after all, your friends are trained warriors. You hope they will be able to find their way back on their own.\n\nYou follow the winding path, Adonis tagging along, until at last you reach the town gates.\n\nAnd there, your blood runs cold.\n\n\nYou reach the Lyestra gates, and stop in abject horror. The town has been completely gutted.\n\nSmoke billows from the wreckage of houses. You hear wailing in the streets.\n\nCorpses line the streets, and a few wanderers roam freely, searching and crying out for their loved ones.\n\nNever before have you felt like such a failure.\n\n\"HALT!\" A voice cries, \"Who goes there?!\"\n\nYou raise your head and see a short, stocky man in a helmet approach you.\n\nIt's Quent, one of your guards.\n\n\"Quent!!\" You cry, \"It's me, Arakhan.\"\n\n\"And me!!! Adonis!!!\" Adonis screams.\n\n\"We've returned,\" you say.\n\nQuent lowers his spear and begins to cry, his brave front completely lost.\n\n\"Oh, Arakhan,\" he sobs, and wraps his arms around you. \"You're back!! It was---it was a living nightmare....\"\n\n\"Where are the other guards?\" you ask, gripping him by the shoulders. \"Where are the others we left posted here?\"\n\nHe sobs, choking.\n\n\"All dead, Arakhan,\" he cries.\n\n\"Brutus? Carissa? Andrey?\" You ask.\n\n\"All of them!! They were cut down, every last one. Killian forced me to hide so someone would be left to tell you what happened. I ran, only to see him get shot down as well. Arakhan, they came at us like a wave of death.\"\n\n\"Stand tall, Quent,\" you say. \"I've come to kill the one responsible for this.\"\n\n\"I'm so glad you're back,\" he sobs. \"Please, head into the town and see what you can do for the villagers. They need someone. And maybe you can find some of the answers you need in there.\"\n\nYou nod, and release Quent to return to his patrol duties.\n\nAdonis approaches you.\n\n\"Well, I hope you're satisfied,\" he grumbles, \"Some protection.\"\n\n\"Move along, Adonis,\" you growl, and he yelps.\n\n\"Erk! I--uh--right, then. I'll be on my way,\" he mumbles, and shuffles off into the city.\n\nYou glare, watching him go.\n\nAfter a moment, and a chance to catch your breath....you enter the city gates as well.\n\nAt long last, you are home.", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter Lyestra", "result": "Home.\n\n\nOr what remains of it.\n\n\nYou wander through the streets of Lyestra, barely even recognizable after such brutal destruction. There is the old tree that you used to swing from as a child, burned and splintered into nothing more than a husk. The mayor's house looms in the distance, black smoke plumes rising from it and lifting into the sky.\n\n\nWorst of all are the bodies.\n\n\nYou cannot tear your gaze away from the corpses lining the streets, the sobbing that wracks every alleyway, and the stench of hot blood and fire that fills the air.\n\n\nYou see not a few familiar faces among the dead, and, nearly choking on your grief, you press on.\n\n\nEventually, you find that you have traversed the length of the entire village, and you now stand at the North Gate.\n\n\nThe great wall that surrounds your village has been cracked, and furniture and lumber has been haphazardly barricaded into the broken sections.\n\n\nThe Gate itself is wrapped deeply in chains, with an enormous bronze padlock sealing the chains tight.\n\n\nA man staggers over to you, his eyes glinting malevolently. It's Joad, one of the older guards on your force. He holds a pitchfork, and is staggering towards you.\n\n\n\"ARAKHAN!\" he shouts. You feel a flutter of nervous fear.", "action_results": [{"action": "Draw your Sword", "result": "You draw your sword, and hold it out protectively.\n\n\nJoad snorts.\n\n\n\"Useless AND stupid,\" he mutters. \"Who would have guessed?\"\n\n\nYou lower your sword, feeling a hot rush of embarrassment. Joad sneers, his pitchfork falling to his side.\n\n\n\"Welcome back, Captain,\" he grunts. You feel his hatred wash over you like the tide. \"Have a nice walk out in the woods, then? Don't mind us, we were just out here, fighting for our lives while you hid in the bushes.\"\n\n\n\"Calm down, Joad,\" you say, \"I'm back now, and I swear to you, I will have revenge on these miserable creatures.\"\n\n\nJoad spits.\n\n\n\"Fat lotta good that'll do us now,\" he mutters, \"Now that near the whole village's dead and killed.\" He sighs, and you see weariness crease his brow.\n\n\n\"If you want to go and play the hero....and get your damned self killed--be my guest,\" Joad grumbles, \"we were barely able to fight them back. They left for the woods---we thought to go find you. But just an hour or so ago, our scouts saw them returning. They've made camp just north of here, probably planning their next move.\"\n\n\n\"Do you see who is out there?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"We didn't see nothing,\" Joad growls, \"You prob'ly know more than we do. All we know is that we was having a normal day, when suddenly a horde of goblins tear through this town like wildfire, killin' and maimin'. We barely fought 'em back.\"\n\n\nYou reach for the padlock on the North Gate. \"I'll bring you their leader's head,\" you growl, gripping your sword.\n\n\n\"Ah, ah, ah,\" Joad says, staying your hand. I'd love to see you go out there and get killed much as the next man. But that lock ain't comin' off. Not 'less you get a key for it.\"\n\n\n\"You don't have a key?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Not me,\" Joad says, \"we gave out keys to people we trust, people who were here.\"\n\n\n\"I get it,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Go on and explore the town a bit. See what you left behind. Find a key. When you get one, come back here, and I'll let you through. But not a moment before.\"\n\n\nYou nod. \"Very well,\" you say.\n\n\nYou turn and leave the North Gate behind, heading for the Lyestra Town Square. Your mission is clear.\n\n\nFind a key.\n\nThen, take your vengeance.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Lyestra Town Square", "result": "You stand in the Town Square of Lyestra.\n\n\nThe enormous stone fountain of Lyestra stands before you. It is cracked down the center, and stained with blood. At this time of day, it would normally be gushing happily, but now, it stands still and silent, like an enormous gravestone.\n\n\nYou think for a moment. Your mission is to find a key, exit through the North Gate, and take your revenge on the monsters responsible for this attack.\n\n\nBut perhaps you should explore the town a bit. Not only will you be likely to find a key, you may also find more information you can use to defeat the mysterious attackers.\n\n\nYou consider your options. There is the Morgan's bar--a popular (well, really the only) tavern in town. The few survivors of the attack are almost certain to be holed up there.\n\n\nThe Mayor's house is smoking in the distance. It might be a good idea to check there, to see if he or any of his family survived the attack.\n\n\nAnd lastly, there is the Lyestra Library. The Library is rather large for such a small village, and the Librarian is a good friend of yours. Perhaps you will find some information on your attackers there.\n\n\nWhere to go first?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Morgan's Bar", "result": "You weigh your options, and decide the best course of action is to head to the esteemed Morgan's Bar.\n\n\nYou head down the winding pathways of Lyestra, until you have reached the swinging double doors of the Bar.\n\n\nYou push through the door, and there, as you expected, you see several dozen villagers, all crowded about within the dimly lit tavern.\n\nThey are gathered around the small wooden tables, drinking at the bar. A few children are huddled in the corner, smeared with dirt and playing a card game in grim silence.\n\n\nThe Morgan's Bar, being the largest building in town, was always designated as the survival shelter in case of attack. It had almost been a sort of joke. 'We'll drink til' the invaders get bored,' people used to say, laughing.\n\nAfter all, who would ever want to attack a town as tiny and insignificant as Lyestra?\n\n\nYou shake your thoughts away, and stride into the Bar.\n\n\nEveryone freezes for a moment at your approach, and all eyes turn to stare directly at you. You feel their gazes burning into you.\n\n\nAnd then, quickly, the villagers all turn aside, quickly absorbed back into whatever menial tasks had been consuming them.\n\n\nYou feel a hot rush of shame, but force it down. You have a mission--you must find a key to unlock the door.\n\nSomeone in here is sure to have it.\n\nYou survey the room.\n\nThere are the children, of course, playing their game in the corner. Morgan himself, the Barkeep, is washing a glass and avoids your gaze. There is an incredibly muscular man in the corner, picking at his teeth with a dagger, and wrapping a gauze bandage around the his arm. And in the corner, there is a tall, gaunt man in a purple cloak. His hood is up, so you can't make out his face in the dimly lit room.\n\nAnd of course, you could always have a drink.", "action_results": [{"action": "Speak to Morgan, the Barkeep", "result": "\"Morgan!\" You call, and start walking towards him.\n\n\nHe sees you out of the corner of his eye, and turns away from you, to help a customer.\n\n\n\"And how can I help you, miss?\" he asks, pointedly ignoring you. Your hand falters, and you turn away from him.\n\n\nClearly, he is none too happy to see you. Time for a different approach.", "action_results": [{"action": "Give Up", "result": "You are standing in the middle of the Morgan's Bar, surrounded by the few survivors of the attack.\n\n\nThere are some children, playing a game in the corner.\n\n\nMorgan stands behind the bar, washing glasses.\n\n\nA muscular man is bandaging himself near a table.\n\n\nThere is a cloaked man in the shadows.\n\n\nAnd you are pretty parched.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Speak to the Muscular Man", "result": "You walk towards the Muscular Man.\n\n\nHe sneers as you approach.\n\n\"Wellll, well, WELL!\" he rumbles, his scarred face leering down at you, \"Look at the little guard captain, come snivlin' back.\"\n\n\nHe is wrapping a gauze bandage around his arm. He appears to have sustained a nasty cut along his bicep.\n\n\nYou recognize the man as soon as you approach. It's none other than Riker, local mischief maker and brawler. You've had a few run-ins with him before.\n\n\n\"Riker,\" you say, curtly.\n\n\n\"Thought you'd never show your face 'round this town again, runt,\" Riker growls, \"Or worse, I was tellin' evry'one I figgered YOU were in league with them goblins.\"\n\n\n\"They tricked us all,\" you say, \"But they're going to pay for what they've done.\"\n\n\nRiker lets out a wet, throaty laugh.\n\n\n\"I'll bet they will!!\" he croaks. His voice sounds like a bag of wet marbles. \"You go'wan and get your head cut off by 'em, thank a lot, then, cap, that'll show 'em, yeah.\"\n\n\n\"I plan to face them,\" you say, \"But I need a key to open the North Ga--\"\n\n\nRiker spits.\n\n\n\"Well bloody well good luck with that,\" he says, \"cause you ain't gettin' no help from me.\"\n\n\nHe turns away, finished with the conversation, and goes back to his bandage.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Speak to the Cloaked Man", "result": "You walk over to the strange man in the purple cloak.\n\n\nAs you get closer, you see that it is no stranger at all, but your good friend, and second-in-command, Lodan!\n\n\nHe stands as you approach.\n\n\n\"Ah, Captain,\" he says, nodding serenely, \"I see you've finally made it to the Bar. Have a seat.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Embrace Lodan tightly", "result": "You wrap your arms around Lodan, and pull him in tightly, nearly crushing him in a bear hug.\n\n\n\"Captain, I--er---ah--erkkkr,\" he says.\n\n\nYou don't let go.\n\n\nEveryone in the bar turns to stare.\n\n\nIt gets uncomfortable, but you've committed to this, and it would be even more awkward to end it now.\n\n\nFinally, you release him. The two of you stand there in silence for a few moments.\n\n\n\"Please do not do that again, sir,\" Lodan says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take a Seat", "result": "You take a seat across from Lodan, and the two of you have a long conversation about the invasion, and where to go next from here.\n\n\n\"I've been searching town, and neither Glusen nor Anaria have shown up yet,\" he mutters. \"I fear that they might still be out in the woods somewhere. Or worse. The sun is already about to set. They should have been back by now.\"\n\n\n\"Actually, Lodan, about that--\" you say, but you are suddenly interrupted by an incredible crashing sound coming from behind you. You both turn, and see the muscular man in the corner screaming at a young woman for having knocked over his beer. She has begun to cry, and spit is flying from the man's mouth.\n\n\n\"Riker,\" Lodan sighs, shaking his head, \"Of all villagers, of course HE had to be one to survive.\" Lodan looks up. \"Apologies, that was cruel,\" he says, \"I suppose we must all be allies now.\"\n\n\n\"I'm going to need as much help as I can get,\" you say, \"especially since I've got to find a key to the North Gate.\"\n\n\n\"A key?\" Lodan asks. He points at Morgan, who is working behind the bar. \"You mean like that one there?\"\n\n\nYou double-take. Morgan clearly has a key tied around his neck. You can't believe you didn't notice it before! What's more, it looks exactly the right size and shape to fit the North Gate.\n\n\n\"That's got to be it,\" you say, \"I'd better go get it.\"\n\n\n\"Careful, there,\" Lodan says, \"Morgan was none too friendly to me, and I doubt he will be any different to you.\"\n\n\n\"What shall I do?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Well, Morgan has never turned down a paying customer, even one he despised,\" Lodan says, \"Keep that in mind.\" He stands up.\n\n\"Well, I'm going to be off,\" he says, \"Maybe I'll find more of our friends.\"\n\n\nYou nod, and say your farewells to Lodan. He exits through the Tavern doors.", "action_results": [{"action": "Return to the Bar", "result": "You are standing in the middle of the Morgan's Bar, surrounded by the few survivors of the attack.\n\n\nThere are some children, playing a game in the corner.\n\n\nMorgan stands behind the bar, washing glasses.\n\n\nA muscular man is bandaging himself near a table.\n\n\nAnd you are pretty parched.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Have a drink", "result": "A drink, maybe that's what you need.\n\n\nYou take a few steps towards the bar, and stop instantly.\n\n\nYou have no money on you.\n\n\nEmbarrassed, you return to the bar.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Speak to the Children", "result": "You wander over to the kids. They seem to be playing some strange sort of card game.\n\n\nA boy with dark eyes and darker hair stares up at you as you approach. The other children look to him as though he were their leader.\n\n\n\"Hello, children,\" you say, extending a hand in what you hope is a friendly way.\n\n\n\"Hello,\" the little boy says.\n\n\n\"I'm looking for something,\" you say, \"And I'm wondering if you could help.\"\n\n\n\"Mum says not to talk to strangers,\" a little girl hisses to the boy.\n\n\n\"Yeh, well, where's your mum now?\" the boy asks.\n\n\nThe girl looks down at the floor, and tugs at the hem of her dress.\n\n\n\"That's right,\" the boy says, \"we ain't got no more rules to follow, now.\" He looks back up at you. \"What you want, then?\"\n\n\nYou inhale slowly.\n\n\n\"I'm looking for a key,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Ain't got no key,\" the boy says, but then he reconsiders. \"But on the other hand, I DO got this.\" He holds up a shiny copper coin.\n\n\n\"A coin?\" you say.\n\n\n\"It's lucky,\" the dark-haired boy says solemnly. \"I'll play you for it, if'n you want.\"\n\n\n\"Hm,\" you say, \"Well, I don't have anything to play for. I've got no money on me.\"\n\n\n\"Yes you do,\" the boy says, and he slowly points a finger at your sword, hooked onto your belt. \"I'll play you for that.\" He looks up slowly, giving you a toothsome grin. \"What say ya?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Accept the Bet", "result": "\"Alright,\" you say, ignoring your better judgment. \"Let's play.\"\n\n\n\"Ha!\" the boys says, \"Alright then. Here's how we do.\"\n\n\nHe lays out a row of cards, seven in total.\n\n\n\"You gotta win three rounds if you want the coin.\"\n\n\nYou are facing the boy.\n\n\n\"From your left to right, the cards are---1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.\" He says. He lifts the cards to show you the numbers. \"Got that?\"\n\n\nYou nod.\n\n\n\"Alright,\" he says. \"Now I'm gonna mix 'em up.\"\n\n\nAnd he does.\n\n\nHe takes the third card, and moves it two spaces to your right.\n\nThen, he moves the seventh card two spaces to your left.\n\nNow, he moves the new seventh card all the way to position 1, making it the farthest card on your left.\n\nHe takes the new seventh card, and moves it two spaces to his right.\n\nThen, he takes the second card, and moves it one space to your right.\n\n\n\nHe looks up at you.\n\n\"Now tell me,\" he says, \"In which position is the card with the number '5' on it?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Card 1", "result": "\"Oooooh, bad luck, then!\" he laughs, and flips up the card, showing you that you've made the wrong choice.\n\n\nYou sigh deeply.\n\n\n\"Alright, now,\" he says, \"Give me my prize!!\"\n\n\n\"Absolutely not,\" you say, \"Swords are not for children.\"\n\n\n\"Liar!!! No fair!!\" He starts to cry, and the other children start to cry as well. It's causing a scene.\n\n\n\"Oh, alright!\" You say, \"You can hold it, for a minute, at least.\" You hand him your sword.\n\n\n\"Whoa, COOL!\" He says, he whirls around with the sword, spinning faster and faster as he grows more excited.\n\n\n\"Now careful,\" you say, \"Swords are very--\"\n\n\nThat's all you can get out before the sword slips from his grasp, flies through the air and severs your head instantaneously.\n\n\nThe children all scream as your headless corpse sprays blood everywhere.\n\n\nWhat a dumb way to die.", "action_results": []}, null, null, null, null, {"action": "Card 6", "result": "\"That one,\" you say, pointing at Card 6.\n\n\nHe lifts it, showing you the number \"5.\" He sticks his tongue out at you.\n\n\n\"Lucky,\" he whines. \"But that's just the first round.\"\n\n\nHe reaches in his pocket and takes out another deck of cards.\n\n\n\"This is my lucky deck,\" he says, \"we'll see how good you are now.\"\n\n\nHe lays out seven cards.\n\n\n\"From your left to right,\" he says, \"The cards are: Phoenix, Monkey, Snake, Dragon, Troll, Ogre, and Goblin.\"\n\n\nYou nod. \"I'm ready,\" you say.\n\n\nHe starts to shift the cards.\n\n\nHe moves the first card three spaces to his left.\n\nThen, he moves the second card two spaces to your right.\n\nHe takes the seventh card and moves it five spaces to your left.\n\nHe takes the fourth card and moves it one space to your right.\n\nHe takes the sixth card, and moves it two spaces to his right.\n\nThen, he takes all seven cards, keeping them in a row, and spins the entire row clockwise, so the row is now upside down.\n\n\n\n\"Which card has the dragon?\" he asks.", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, {"action": "Card 5", "result": "\"Card 5,\" you say.\n\n\nThe dark-eyed boy's eyes grow darker.\n\n\nHe smolders as he lifts the card, showing you the face of the Dragon.\n\n\n\"Fine,\" he says, muttering, \"But now you have to win the third round, and it ain't gonna be easy.\"\n\n\nHe lays out seven cards.\n\n\n\"This time I'm gonna mix decks,\" he says.\n\n\nHe shows you the cards. \"From your left to right, they are, Card 2, Dragon, Ogre, Card 6, Card 1, Monkey, and Card 5.\"\n\n\nHe slams the cards down in front of you.\n\n\n\"Ready?\" he asks. You nod.\n\n\nHe moves the first card three spaces to your right.\n\nHe then moves the sixth card two spaces to your left.\n\nHe moves the new first card one space to his left.\n\nHe takes the entire row, and flips it clockwise, then counterclockwise, then clockwise again.\n\nHe moves the fourth card two spaces to his left, then one to your right, then two to his right.\n\nHe covers the cards with his arms and moves them around a little bit. He doesn't let you see.\n\nHe realizes there are now eight cards, and takes one of them off the ground at random, ripping it up.\n\nHe moves the second card one space to your left.\n\n\n\"Where is the Ogre?\" he asks.", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, null, null, null, {"action": "Point at his sleeve", "result": "You point at his sleeve.\n\n\n\"You think I would cheat??\" he asks. He shows you his sleeves. Empty. He sticks his tongue out at you.\n\n\n\"Nyeh. So there,\" he says, \"Now pick a real card, dummy.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Pick a real card, dummy", "result": "Embarrassed at being bested by a child, you randomly pick a card without really thinking about it.\n\n\n\"Um, card 4 I guess?\" You say.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Point at the Girl next to him", "result": "You point at the little girl sitting next to him.\n\n\nShe immediately burst into tears.\n\n\n\"I told you, Joffa!!\" she says, \"I told you we shouldn't cheat!!!\" She hands you the Ogre card, which had been secretly tucked inside her dress pocket the entire time.\n\n\nJoffa, the dark-haired boy, slams a fist into the ground angrily.\n\n\n\"And I told YOU not to give the game away, Leesey!!\" His face is red, but he reluctantly hands over his copper coin.\n\n\n\"There you go, sir,\" he says, frowning.\n\n\nYou take the coin.\n\n\nYou now have one (1) copper coin.\n\n\nUnbelievable riches are now yours.\n\n\nYou head back to the main bar area.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the Bar", "result": "You are standing in the middle of the Morgan's Bar, surrounded by the few survivors of the attack.\n\n\nMorgan stands behind the bar, washing glasses.\n\n\nA muscular man is bandaging himself near a table.\n\n\nAnd you are pretty parched.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Have a drink", "result": "The bar is pretty crowded, but you find an open seat and quickly snag it.\n\n\nBefore Morgan can say anything to you, you've laid your copper coin down on the table.\n\n\n\"Pour me a drink, eh Morgan?\" you ask.\n\n\nAs he gets closer, you can see a key tied around his neck on a string. It has to be the North Gate key, you're sure of it.\n\n\n\"What'll you have?\" he grumbles. He's clearly angry with you.\n\n\nWhat will you have?", "action_results": [{"action": "A West Aradin Pilsner", "result": "\"Comin' right up,\" Morgan says. He reaches under the bar, and pours you a drink.\n\n\nAs he leans forward, the key around his neck swings enticingly.\n\n\nNow is your chance--and it may be your only chance.", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab the key and bolt", "result": "You yank the key from around Morgan's neck. The string snaps instantly, and the key is in your hand!!\n\n\n\"Hey!!\" Morgan shouts, but it's too late. You start to run, away from the bar, towards the double doors!\n\n\nThey get closer--closer---\n\n\nThen---\n\n\nBAM!!\n\n\nYou've slammed into a full blown mountain of meat, stopped dead in your tracks, inches from the door.\n\n\nIt's the muscular man with the arm wound--Riker, local troublemaker and scoundrel.\n\n\n\"Well, WELL,\" he says, \"A Coward, AND a thief!\"\n\n\n\"Please,\" you say, \"I have to get out of here. I'm going to avenge us all.\"\n\n\n\"HA!\" Riker sneers, \"fat chance.\" He raises a fist. \"How about I POUND YOU INTO THE GROUND, instead?!?!\" He raises his beefy arm in the air, and the entire bar cheers loudly, excited for your demise.\n\n\nNo choice, looks like you're gonna have to fight!", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight Riker!", "result": "Riker circles you, angrily, his bloodshot eyes watching your every movement.\n\n\nHe's determined not to let you leave this bar, and you're going to have to incapacitate him.\n\n\nYou watch him as he strafes you, and get the sinking feeling that taking on a bear might have been a wiser option.\n\n\nYour mind races. Is it better to wait for him to lunge? Or should you strike now, try to catch him off guard?", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack Riker!", "result": "You move quickly. Riker is a mountain of a man, but you're much lighter on your feet. You strike hard, going straight for his gut.\n\n\nYou grin as your blow connects!\n\n\nUnfortunately, the blow is practically absorbed by his granite-hard abs.\n\n\nHe laughs down at you.\n\n\n\"That was your best shot?\" He sneers. He grabs you by the hair and hoists you up. \"My turn.\"\n\n\nGrabbing you by the hair and neck, he hurls you across the bar!\n\n\nThe onlookers gasp in shock as you go crashing into a table, smashing it to splinters.\n\n\nYou're dizzy but you pull yourself back to your feet, and soon you're sprinting towards him at full force.\n\n\nRiker readies himself for your next attack.\n\n\nWhat will you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Strike at Riker's face", "result": "You slam a fist towards Riker, but he's prepared and protected for your attack.\n\n\nHis hands quickly rise, blocking your attack. You wince in pain as your fist slams against his blocked arms.\n\n\n\"Enough of this nonsense,\" Riker spits. \"I thought you might be some kind of CHALLENGE. Guess I was wrong.\"\n\n\nAnd then he rears his fist back and socks you in the face.\n\n\nYou feel like you got trampled by a wild stallion. Your world spins, you take several stumbling steps to the left, then to the right, before falling to a heap.\n\n\nYour head bangs against a nearby table as you go down, and the world goes dark.\n\n\n\"Heh. Take THAT, Arakhan,\" Riker leers, coming over to your still form. He looks down at your body, and notices a pool of blood spreading from beneath your unmoving figure.\n\n\n\"Uh,\" Riker says, grimacing, \"Arakhan?\"", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Sweep Riker's legs out from under him", "result": "You use your momentum to slide across the floor just as you reach Riker.\n\n\nHe was preparing himself for a blow, and is thrown off guard as you hit the ground. Your legs sweep out, utilizing an attack you learned in your guard training--an attack specifically designed to topple larger foes.\n\n\nRiker howls as your legs smash into his ankles, and he goes down, hard.\n\n\nThe glasses on the shelves rattle as Riker slams into the floor.\n\n\nHe swears and shouts, quickly trying to pull himself onto his feet.\n\n\nThe two of you are on the floor, both quickly scrambling for purchase.\n\n\nQuick, what now?!", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to stand up before Riker does", "result": "The two of you scramble to your feet, panting heavily, trying to gain the upper ground.\n\n\nHowever, the two of you are evenly matched, and soon, you are both standing at opposite points of the bar--circling and staring each other down.\n\n\nLooks like you've just ended up right back where you started. Gonna have to try another tactic to take this guy down.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Grab a nearby table cloth to pull yourself up", "result": "You see a low hanging table cloth and wrap your hands around it, attempting to yank yourself upwards.\n\n\nYou failed to realize, however, that the table was fully set.\n\n\nAs soon as you grab the table cloth, everything--glasses, cutlery, plates, bowls--and a large iron kettle--go flying.\n\n\nRiker pulls himself to his feet, just as the kettle arcs through the air, smacking him directly in the forehead.\n\n\n\"AGHH!!!!\" He screams. The kettle left an angry red gash across his head, and blood is leaking down into his eyes. He stumbles wildly, grabbing at anything, before losing his balance and crashing into a wall.\n\n\n\"YOU LITTLE CHEAT!!\" Riker shrieks.\n\n\n\"Now, then,\" you say, \"If you'll just surrender, I think we can all--\"\n\n\n\"SURRENDER THIS!!\" Riker says, running at you with a knife.\n\n\nOh dear.", "action_results": [{"action": "Things are escalating....", "result": "Riker is running towards you with a knife!\n\n\nThings are looking pretty dire.\n\n\nQuick, do something!", "action_results": [{"action": "Draw your Sword", "result": "You try, but you aren't fast enough. Riker's knife plunges into you, and the world goes red.\n\n\nPeople are screaming, and your last, faint hope is that Riker will receive justice for his madness.", "action_results": []}, null, {"action": "Strike Riker's right arm", "result": "You only have just enough time to jab two fingers into Riker's right arm as he slashes--\n\n\n--And your fingers strike right into Riker's arm wound.\n\n\nIn agony, he drops the knife, gripping his arm in pain.\n\n\nYou notice that Riker's bandage--the one tightly bound around his right arm--is slowly unraveling. Interesting.\n\n\nRiker is going for his knife, a few feet away from him on the floor.\n\n\nYou've got to do something, and fast.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to grab the knife before Riker", "result": "You and Riker both sprint towards the knife, each lunging at the same moment--!\n\n\nBut Riker just barely beats you to it, grabbing it and raising it malevolently.\n\n\nYou are very close to Riker now--you might be able to do something before he attacks again.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Grab the loose end of bandage", "result": "You yank the loose end of Riker's bandage and it gives a bit. Riker recoils in pain, giving you the chance to put some distance between the two of you.\n\n\nYou are now holding the end of Riker's bandage.\n\n\nIt stretches out across the bar, still connected to his arm.\n\n\n\"Hey!\" He shouts, \"Give that back!!\"\n\n\nWhat will you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Pull on the bandage as hard as you can", "result": "You attempt it, but Riker sees your attack coming.\n\n\nHe slashes at the bandage with his knife, leaving you holding nothing but a useless scrap of fabric.\n\n\n\"Nice try,\" Riker says.\n\n\nThe next target his knife finds is you.", "action_results": []}, null, {"action": "Taunt Riker and run", "result": "\"Oh,\" you say, dangling your end of the bandage tauntingly, \"You mean this old thing?\"\n\n\nRiker runs at you in a fury, not even caring that he is still connected to you.\n\n\nThe two of you sprint around the bar. You make sure to get the bandage tangled around small tables, chairs, and shelves.\n\n\nFinally, you are too winded to run anymore.\n\n\nRiker corners you.\n\n\n\"LET'S FINISH THIS, PIPSQUEAK!!\" he screams, showering you with spit.\n\n\nHe raises his knife high into the air........", "action_results": [{"action": "Tie the loose end of the bandage around a sturdy table", "result": "Riker swings his arm--\n\n\n--Forgetting that his arm is now tangled across the entire bar.\n\n\nAs he lunges at you, the bandage becomes taut, and he is yanked backwards by the force of his own inertia. He goes down hard, clocking his head against the hard wooden floor.\n\n\nYou stand over his unconscious body, looking down at him.\n\n\nHe's out cold.\n\n\n\"Order up,\" you say, quietly.\n\n\nEveryone in the bar is confused for a moment, then they all burst into cheers.\n\n\n\"Riker sucks!\" Somebody yells.\n\n\nYou grin as everyone cheers for you, even Morgan, who is only mildly upset that a good portion of his bar was destroyed in the brawl.\n\n\n\"Go ahead and keep that key,\" Morgan says, \"I'd say you've more than earned it.\"\n\n\nEveryone gives you high fives on your way through the doors.\n\n\nAs you exit the bar into the dying twilight, it is with the proud knowledge that you have fought well.\n\n\nAnd yet--your true fight has not even begun.", "action_results": [{"action": "Prepare yourself", "result": "You finally have a key that will open the Northern Gate.\n\n\nThere's no time to delay. You've promised to avenge your village, and avenge it you shall.\n\n\nYou know that the ones who destroyed your town--the goblins, and their leaders--are all camped just beyond the Northern Gate.\n\n\nIt might be suicide to try to face them alone, but you know you have no choice.\n\n\nIf you don't assassinate their leader tonight, they will surely regroup and finish the job of destroying Lyestra tomorrow.\n\n\nYou steel your courage, and then head towards the Northern Gate to face Joad.", "action_results": [{"action": "To the Northern Gate!", "result": "You grip the key firmly in your hand, and approach the Northern Gate, just as the sun sets over the horizon.\n\n\nJoad is leaning against the wall, and watches you coolly as you approach.\n\n\n\"Well?\" he asks.\n\n\nYou hold up the key. Joad nods.\n\n\n\"Well, well,\" he acquiesces, \"looks like you got one, after all.\"\n\n\nJoad takes the key from you and slides it into the heavy iron padlock that keeps the gate seal.\n\n\nWith a K-THUNK, the padlock falls away, and the chains loosen. Joad tugs on the chains as he speaks.\n\n\n\"I don't know who you convinced to give you that key,\" Joad says, \"But I'm going to tell you the truth.\"\n\n\nThe chains fall away, and the wrought iron Northern Gate swings open with an ominous creeeeak.\n\n\nJoad points out, through the Gate.\n\n\n\"Out there,\" he says, \"Out there is the northern hill country. We know that the goblins are camped out in a huge horde out there, somewhere in the hills. Figure their leader is out there, too. They've been quiet since the morning, so they must be biding their time for something. None of us are dumb enough to think they've had their fill of destruction.\"\n\n\nJoad suddenly grabs your arm, as though he's pulling you back from the brink of a cliff.\n\n\n\"Are you really planning on going out there alone?\" he asks, \"I want you to know. It's suicide.\"\n\n\n\"What choice do we have?\" you ask, \"With the exception of you, me, and three or four guards, everyone else who could defend this town is dead. And like you said, it's suicide. I'm not putting anyone else in danger. Maybe it's futile. Maybe not. But either I go out there and fight, or I wait here to be killed. And I choose to fight.\"\n\n\nJoad releases your arm, and you can see something like a glimmer of admiration in his eyes.\n\n\n\"Well, I'll never let it be said that Arakhan of Lyestra was a coward.\" He chuckles. \"An idiot, maybe. But not a coward.\"\n\n\n\"Goodbye, Joad,\" you say.\n\n\n\"Goodbye, Arakhan,\" he says, \"Until we meet again.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Exit through the Northern Gate", "result": "Alright. This is it. Everything you've done up to this point has led up to this moment.\n\n\nThe sun has set, blanketing the hill country in a cover of darkness.\n\n\nThe clouds are thick in the sky, blocking the stars. You're thankful for small favors.\n\n\nEven though the sun has only just set, nearly everything is in pitch darkness. You can make out the shapes of the hills before you. The ground curves up and down. Wind whips the grass at your feet. Everything feels ominous.\n\n\nThis is crazy, you think to yourself, Absolutely insane.\n\n\nYou shake yourself out of it, pulling your thoughts together. You go over your plan, crude as it is.\n\n\nFirst, you'll sneak your way through the tall grass, and through the northern hills. Goblins are loud, clumsy, and messy, making them incredibly easy to track, particularly for someone as skilled in tracking as yourself.\n\n\nYou figure you'll be able to find their encampment quite easily.\n\n\nOnce you've found their base, you'll be able to figure out more. And then you'll wait, hidden, outside their encampment. They may be a large force, but you've played and lived in these hills since you were a little boy. You know all the hiding places that they would never find.\n\n\nAnd then you'll wait, hidden outside their encampment, as long as it takes--all night, if need be--until their leader shows his miserable face.\n\nAnd then you'll put an arrow right into his heart.\n\n\nIt's a crude plan. You'll die, of course---but your one hope is that without leadership, the goblins will fall apart and leave Lyestra alone.\n\n\nAlright. Time to go.", "action_results": [{"action": "Crawl through the grass towards the goblin camp", "result": "You crawl stealthily through the hills.\n\n\nWind whips through the tall grass.\n\n\nYou can see the glimmer of torchlight to the north. Could it be the goblin camp?\n\n\nYou'll have to decide on a plan of action.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go North, towards the torches", "result": "You crawl through the thick grass and reach the entrance of the camp!\n\n\nThere is a crude, makeshift wall surrounding the encampment. It was clearly built in a day, from mud and packed stone. Goblins are fast workers, even if they are sloppy.\n\n\nAt the entrance of the camp, there is a gap in the wall, an entryway that leads to and from the inner camp.\n\n\nAnd through that opening, you can see details of the camp itself. Dozens of goblins mill about, sharpening weapons and grunting in their weird goblin language.\n\n\nIn the center of the camp, there is a stone chair. A blue-skinned man sits on the chair, examining his nails smugly. He wears a long, flowing cape.\n\n\nGuarding the entryway are two goblin sentries. They're both small, about three feet, armed with spears and wearing rusty helmets and cheap armor.\n\n\nYou might be able to take them on....but without raising the alarm?", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot an arrow at one of the goblins", "result": "You swiftly raise your crossbow, and fire a bolt at one of the goblins!\n\n\nThe bolt pierces him in the neck, and he goes down with a gurgle.\n\n\n\"GNGHHHGHRG GHRHG!!\" The other goblin shouts. \"INTRUDER!! TO ARMS!!\"\n\n\nYou try to run, but you've given your position away. You're overwhelmed by goblins in seconds.\n\n\nAnd they don't take you prisoner.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Sneak closer and take them out at close range", "result": "You slither through the grass, drawing your knives.\n\n\nThe goblins are sleepy, and don't pay much attention to you at all as you get closer....closer...closer.....\n\n\nSHIIIINK!\n\n\nSHINK!\n\n\nWith twin slashes, you pierce both of the goblins with your daggers before they have the chance to utter a squeak.\n\n\nThey both hit the ground like twin sacks of flour.\n\n\nThe gateway is clear.", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter the Camp", "result": "You are now inside of the goblin camp. You quickly find a tent to hide behind and consider your options.\n\n\nYou are now in the very heart of danger. There is no way that you're making it out of this camp alive.\n\n\nBut--you can try to take the leader down before you're killed.\n\n\nYou assumed the goblin leader is the man on the stone chair. If you can just make it to him....\n\n\nBut how?\n\n\nYou weigh your options. There are several siege towers not far from your location. You might be able to climb one and get a bird's eye view.\n\n\nOr you could try to use the tents in the camp as cover.\n\n\nBoth options seem risky, but you have no choice now.", "action_results": [{"action": "Climb the Siege Tower", "result": "Alright.\n\n\nYou sprint madly over to the nearest siege tower, and miraculously, no one sees you.\n\n\nYou begin to climb the tower. A long, rickety ladder leads to the very top. From there, you might have a good shot at the general himself.\n\n\nYou are halfway up the ladder, when you look up and see a goblin.\n\n\nHe hasn't noticed you yet--he's climbing down the ladder, yawning, not paying any attention.\n\n\nHe's only a few rungs away from you......", "action_results": [{"action": "Climb back down the ladder quickly!", "result": "You try it, but the goblin sees you!\n\n\n\"INTRUDER!! STOP HIM!!!\"\n\n\nThe call goes through the entire camp like wildfire. In seconds, you are surrounded by goblins.\n\n\nAnd they don't take you prisoner.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stab the goblin before he gets to you!", "result": "You draw your knife, and plunge it into the goblin's back!\n\n\nHe squeals, and loses his grip on the ladder.\n\n\nHe falls several feet to the ground, where he lands with a hard SPLAT.\n\n\nYou hold your breath. Did anyone hear that?\n\n\nWell, either way, you'd better hurry.\n\n\nYou finish the climb, and reach the very top of the siege tower. From here, you can see the entire camp.\n\n\n\"HEY!\" A scratchy voice shouts.\n\n\nA goblin stands at the top of the tower. He has a mottled appearance, and one of his eyes is swelled shut.\n\n\n\"What are you doing here??\" He demands. His fingers clutch at a horn, attached to his belt.\n\n\nYou'd better think quick.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot the goblin!", "result": "\"Screw this,\" you mutter, and fire an arrow at the goblin.\n\n\n\"Grrrhh!!!\" he howls, as the arrow pierces his shoulder.\n\n\nHe stumbles backwards, but before he falls, he raises the horn to his lips.\n\n\nBRRRRUMMMMMMMMM\n\n\nThe horn is LOUD, WAY louder than you thought it could be.\n\n\nYou look down in horror.\n\n\nGoblins are streaming out of their tents like a wild river.\n\n\nThey surround the tower. You can see them below, pointing up at you, gabbling wildly, aiming arrows at you.....\n\n\nAnd then the arrows start flying.\n\n\nYou last about ten seconds.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Shoot the horn!", "result": "You shoot the horn!\n\n\nGood thinking, too. The arrow pierces the horn, and the goblin shrieks in pain as the arrow clips his hand as well.\n\n\nYou lunge forward, and give the goblin a mighty shove!\n\n\nHe stumbles backwards, plunging over the edge of the tower.\n\n\n\"Ahhhhhhhh--!!\" he screams, and then hits the ground with a tremendous THUD.\n\n\nAlright, that's him taken care of. But now you've got to get to the center of camp somehow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Descend the Tower!", "result": "The goblin's cry has awakened the camp.\n\n\nGoblins stumble out of their tents, confused, still a bit sleepy, trying to figure out where the cry came from.\n\n\nThey're going to find you any minute.\n\n\nYou cast your eyes about the top of the tower, looking for anything that can help you, anything--\n\n\nYou see a thick coil of ropes, in one corner of the tower.\n\n\nGreat. That should help. You collect them.\n\n\nYou'd better think of something fast! The goblins will find you any minute.", "action_results": [{"action": "Think Fast", "result": "You are standing at the top of the siege tower.\n\nThe goblins are searching for you.\n\n\nYou have a coil of ropes.", "action_results": [{"action": "Descend the Ladder", "result": "You start to climb down the ladder, but you stop once you've climbed a few rungs. If you go any lower, the goblins will see you for sure!\n\n\nYou climb back up.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Look for more Supplies", "result": "Nope. Nothing here but dust. You got everything of value when you grabbed the ropes.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Fire an Arrow into the Center of Camp", "result": "You aim carefully.....\n\n\nYou fire an arrow straight and true into the center of camp!\n\n\nIt hits a wooden post, where it sticks hard and fast. You can barely see it, sticking out of the post.\n\n\nThe blue-skinned man in the chair looks around, confused.\n\n\nNow what?", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Tie the Rope to an Arrow", "result": "Okay, great. You tie the end of the rope to an arrow.\n\n\nNow what?", "action_results": [{"action": "Climb down the ladder", "result": "You've been too slow.\n\n\nThe goblins find you!\n\n\nIn seconds, they're swarming up the tower, murder in their eyes.", "action_results": []}, null, {"action": "Fire an Arrow into the Center of Camp", "result": "You fire the rope into the center of camp.\n\n\nIt fires into a wooden post, taking the rope with it.\n\n\nHuh. So much for your rope.\n\n\nThis is not gonna go well.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Tie the Rope to the Tower", "result": "Great!\n\n\nNow you have one end of the rope tied to the arrow, and the other end tied fast to the tower.\n\n\nThe goblins look up! They've seen you!!\n\n\nHurry!", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Fire an Arrow into the Center of Camp", "result": "The arrow flies hard and true, where it lands with a THUNK in a wooden post at the center of camp.\n\n\nThe blue-skinned man looks confused. He gazes about, searching for the source of the sound.\n\n\nMeanwhile, the goblins have started swarming up the tower!\n\n\nYou see the first one poke his head over the edge of the platform.\n\n\nGo!! NOW!!!", "action_results": [{"action": "Slide down the rope to the center of camp!", "result": "You grab the rope, in your hands, and begin to slide down it, just as the goblins reach the top of the tower!\n\n\nTheir hands clutch at you, swiping at your back and missing you by inches.\n\n\nYou zip down the rope, zooming towards the center of camp. You can see tents whooshing by as you hurtle towards the center, you can see the blue-skinned man on his throne look up in shock and surprise, as you careen wildly towards him....\n\n\nThen you let go of the rope, and go tumbling into the center of camp.\n\n\nYou bolt to your feet, crossbow already drawn, already pointed at the general's heart.\n\n\nDozens of goblins surround you, their weapons outstretched, but you don't care.\n\n\nYou made it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Threaten the General", "result": "\"NOBODY MOVE!!\" you scream. You hold the crossbow steady.\n\n\nThe blue-skinned man raises an eyebrow.\n\n\n\"Well, well, well,\" he hisses. His eyes are serpentine. A forked tongue flickers from his lips. As he rises from his stone chair, his cape swirls dramatically.\n\n\n\"So you've come to face me, hm? Me. LARCASSIO?!\"\n\n\nWhat is it with this guy and saying his own name?\n\n\n\"Yeah, that's right,\" you say, grimly. \"I've been dying to meet you. And now you're gonna be dying. But not to meet me. Just the regular kind of dying.\"\n\n\nDangit. That was your one chance to say something cool.\n\n\n\"Oh, my dear boy....\" Larcassio says, \"You do realize you'll be dead half a second after you pull that trigger...don't you?\"\n\n\n\"Of course I know that,\" you say, \"But I don't care. Maybe with you dead, Lyestra will have a fighting chance. It's not much, but it's all I can do.\"\n\n\n\"Dear me,\" Larcassio says, \"So you don't care if you live or die. How noble. But....what about.....\"\n\n\nHe lazily raises a finger towards the sky. You follow his gaze.....looking up.....and your heart sinks.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look Up", "result": "High, high above the camp, attached to one of the siege towers, a cage swings freely in the open air.\n\n\nAnd in that cage....\n\n\n\"Arakhan!!\" A pair of gloved hands grip at the bars of the cage. \"You're alive!! You made it!!\"\n\n\nYou feel sick. You recognize the green cloak of your friend and fellow guard--\n\n\n--It's Anaria.\n\n\n\"So....I, uh....caught the trail of this Larcassio creep,\" Anaria shouts down at you, \"I--uh, I almost had him! But he--um, kinda got the jump on me.\" She grimaces. \"Sorry, boss.\"\n\n\nLarcassio chuckles.\n\n\n\"If you shoot me with that bolt, that cage goes crashing to the ground,\" Larcassio says smugly, \"And do you think your dearest friend Anaria could survive such a drop? I think not.\"\n\n\n\"HEY! Boss! What's he saying down there?!\" Anaria shouts down at you, \"Whatever it is, don't listen to 'im! Kill the slimeball!!\"\n\n\nYour hand falters. You don't know if you can do it.\n\n\n\"Oh bother,\" Larcassio says. His forked tongue flickers. \"It seems that we're at a bit of a stalemate now, aren't we? I can't kill you, because then I might end up dead. And you can't kill me, because you're a sad excuse for a man. Whatever shall we do?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Offer another solution", "result": "\"Alright,\" you say. You point at him. \"Let's make a deal. You. Me. One on one. A duel of honor.\"\n\n\nLarcassio cocks his head.\n\n\n\"A pretty desperate attempt...\" he says, \"I have you surrounded, you know....\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, and that's SO brave of you, isn't it?\" you say, \"You're the mighty Larcassio, right? Pretty tough when you've got a hundred goblins backing you up. But if you're too scared...\"\n\n\n\"SCARED??\" Larcassio bellows. He marches forward, and his cape swirls across the ground. He gets so close to you that the tip of your crossbow bolt digs into his chest. He's face to face with you. \"I'm not scared of ANYTHING!\" he proclaims.\n\n\nHe holds his hands high in the air.\n\n\n\"I burned your puny little village to the ground! And I will kill you easily, boy!\" He extends his arm. \"My fencing sword, if you please!\"\n\n\nThe goblins scramble.\n\n\n\"NOW!!\" he roars.\n\n\nFinally, a wizened goblin hands Larcassio an elegant sword. The hilt is flamboyant, encrusted with diamonds and pearls. The blade itself gleams brightly, reflecting the torchlight.\n\n\n\"Let's end this embarrassing display of resistance, shall we?\" Larcassio mocks, and slashes his sword at the ground. \"And then, we'll get what we really came for....\"\n\n\n\"Fine,\" you say, \"But if I win, Anaria and I go free.\"\n\n\nLarcassio laughs hysterically.\n\n\n\"En garde!\" he cries.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight for your Life", "result": "You grab a fencing sword from the ground and defend yourself awkwardly.\n\n\nLarcassio paces back and forth, watching you and smirking.\n\n\n\"This will be even easier than I thought...\" he mutters.\n\n\nThe goblins have encircled the two of you, and they are cheering Larcassio on.\n\n\nYou frantically try to remember everything you know about fencing.....it isn't much.", "action_results": [{"action": "Assume a defensive position", "result": "You and Larcassio square off.\n\n\nA moment passes, both of you waiting to see what the other will do.\n\n\nThen, Larcassio lunges at you, blade outstretched!", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack", "result": "Larcassio's blade plunges into you.....\n\n\nThe world is spinning.\n\n\nYou see a pair of snake like eyes, and a sharp-toothed grin, and everything fades away......", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Parry", "result": "A *clink* as Larcassio's blade is parried away. He grunts and retreats quickly, defending himself.\n\n\n\"Good,\" Larcassio said, \"Let's keep this interesting.\"\n\n\nLarcassio is very near, defending himself.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack", "result": "You swiftly attack Larcassio!\n\n\nHe bats your sword away with an expert parry.\n\n\nHe circles you, and then lunges at you, aiming for your neck.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Parry", "result": "You parry the blow once more, but this time, Larcassio is thrown slightly off balance, opening up for just a millisecond--", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack", "result": "You try to set up an attack, but you're not in the right position to do that!\n\n\nLarcassio regains his footing, and circles you once again.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Ward", "result": "You assume a defensive position.\n\n\nThe two of you hold your defensive stance.\n\n\n\"Come ON,\" Larcassio says, and you see his blade flash out towards you--", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Ward", "result": "Assuming a defensive stance was the right call.\n\n\nLarcassio didn't plan to attack, he only wanted to scare you.\n\n\nFortunately, you didn't fall for it.\n\n\n\"Thank goodness,\" Larcassio says, \"At least I'm not dealing with a total amateur.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Parry", "result": "You try to parry, but it was a trick!\n\n\nLarcassio was merely feinting towards you, and now you're off balance.\n\n\nYou stumble backwards, trying to put as much distance between him and you as you can.", "action_results": [null]}, null, null, null, null]}, {"action": "Parry", "result": "You attempt to parry, but since Larcassio hasn't attacked you yet, you end up looking foolish.\n\n\nLarcassio bursts into laughter.\n\n\n\"What do you think you're doing?\" he asks.\n\n\nThe two of you go back to circling.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Riposte", "result": "You riposte, and slash your sword across Larcassio's arm.\n\n\n\"GAH!!\" Larcassio screams, as he watches the blade strike across his flesh. Blue blood begins to pool and run down his arm, staining the blade.\n\n\nHe looks at you with hatred in his eyes.\n\n\n\"Oh, so you'd like to play ROUGH, huh?\" he says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Watch Larcassio", "result": "Larcassio is sweating a bit. He watches you carefully.\n\n\n\"Come on, HERO!\" he says, \"Let's see you FIGHT!\"\n\n\nLarcassio lets loose with a flurry of attacks.\n\n\nLooks like you're on the defensive--if only you'd paid better attention in fencing class!!", "action_results": [{"action": "Defend Yourself!", "result": "Larcassio stabs with a quick, sharp attack at your left shoulder.\n\n\nAssume a defensive position, quick!", "action_results": [{"action": "Prime", "result": "You knock Larcassio's sword away.\n\n\nHe follows up with another violent attack, this one aimed at your right leg.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Seconde", "result": "You knock Larcassio's blade away.\n\n\n\"That was NOTHING!\" you shout.\n\n\nLarcassio swears and slashes straight down, right at your head!", "action_results": [null, null, null, null, {"action": "Neuvieme", "result": "You raise your sword high and block his attack a third time!\n\n\nThen you follow it up with a blow of your own. You swing the hilt of your sword forward, bashing Larcassio in the face with it.\n\n\nHe reels one step backwards, stumbling and cursing.\n\n\nNow's your chance! Go on the offensive!", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack", "result": "You attack, but Larcassio had a parry ready for you. He blocks your attack and drives forward, plunging his sword towards your right lung.\n\n\nDefend!", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Third Position", "result": "*Clink!*\n\n\nYou block the sword, and smash Larcassio in the face again. He staggers back a step, swearing and spitting.\n\n\nThis might be your only chance.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack", "result": "You attack again, but this time Larcassio is wise to your moves.\n\n\nHis sword is stabbing up into your chest before you even reach him.\n\n\n\"Good riddance,\" Larcassio hisses, and throws your body to the ground.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Lunge", "result": "You lunge at Larcassio, but unfortunately you overshoot the mark. He's too close for that!\n\n\nHe dodges you easily, and slips his sword into your ribcage.\n\n\nYou grip your side as you collapse to the ground.\n\n\nEverything goes dark.....", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Feint", "result": "You feint, and Larcassio falls for it!\n\n\nHe tries to parry your nonexistent attack, and throws himself even more off balance. He staggers backwards a few more steps, trying to put distance between you.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Lunge", "result": "You lunge, putting as much force into the blow as you can.\n\n\nLarcassio is unprepared for the blow, and your momentum carries you straight forward, directly into his left shoulder.\n\n\nThe blade drives home, through his shoulder and out the other side. Dark blue blood gushes from his wounds.\n\n\n\"AGHHH!!!\" he howls. \"Who trained you?! Why aren't you dead yet?!\"\n\n\n\"I'm just naturally lucky, I guess,\" you say.\n\n\nWith an inhuman howl, Larcassio drops his sword and tackles you. Your sword goes flying, and clatters to the ground.\n\n\nLarcassio pins you to the dirt.\n\n\nHe starts punching you in the face viciously.\n\n\nAmid the blows, you notice your crossbow, lying just barely within reach. You might be able to grab it....", "action_results": [{"action": "Stretch your hand towards the crossbow.....", "result": "Your fingers crawl across the dirt, ever closer to the crossbow.\n\n\nYou try to maintain consciousness as Larcassio keeps hammering away at your face.\n\n\n\"I will NOT be humiliated by you,\" Larcassio swears, \"Not by some TWO-BIT, BACKWATER human!!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "A little further......", "result": "You stretch just a little more....success! Your fingers curl around the crossbow.\n\n\nYou have one shot!", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot Larcassio", "result": "You swing the crossbow up and shoot at Larcassio's head.\n\n\nWith lightning reflexes, he dodges the bolt, and it goes sailing harmlessly off into the stratosphere.\n\n\n\"One last desperate attempt, hm?\" Larcassio says, \"Well, I'd be disappointed if you didn't try otherwise. Now, I must say....all this fighting has really worked up my appetite.\"\n\n\nThe last thing you see is Larcassio's mouth splitting open like an anaconda's, and then you feel razor sharp teeth dig into your neck.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Shoot a nearby torch", "result": "Your fingers are trembling and bloodstained.\n\n\nLarcassio twitches for a minute when he sees the crossbow, ducking his head....but you don't aim it at him.\n\n\nYou swing it around and point it at a nearby torch, burning brightly.\n\n\n*click*\n\n\nThe crossbow bolt fires, splitting the wood of the torch neatly.\n\n\nThe torch plummets to the ground, quickly igniting a nearby tent.\n\n\n\"Wha--?\" Larcassio says. His attention is briefly turned from you.\n\n\nYou knee him in the chest.\n\n\n\"Ufffhhh!!\" he croaks, and you shove his weight off of you. He collapses to the ground and lies still.\n\n\nGoblins begin to sprint about, gabbling and shrieking. The flames are spreading rapidly. Tents ignite in seconds. The goblins scream and try to put out the blazes, but the camp is rapidly turning into an enormous bonfire.\n\n\nYou look around rapidly, and you see the siege tower that Anaria is hanging from. The flames have spread to the tower, and are starting to lick the base of the wood.\n\n\n\"Don't worry about me, boss!' Anaria cries, \"You did your job! Get outta here!\"\n\n\n\"Not a chance!\" you call up to her.", "action_results": [{"action": "Rescue Anaria", "result": "You sprint to the base of the siege tower. The goblins, for the most part, are wildly scrambling, and pay little attention to you. You hoist yourself up the wooden ladder.\n\n\nYou reach the top of the tower. Anaria's cage is tied to a jutting wooden outcropping. You get on your belly and shimmy along the outcropping.\n\n\nYou finally reach the cage, and swing your weight down. You start kicking at the door.\n\n\n\"You came back for me,\" Anaria says.\n\n\n\"Never leave a guard behind,\" you say. \"Stand back.\"\n\n\nAnaria retreats to the far end of the cage. You rear back, and give a tremendous kick to the door.\n\n\nIt explodes open. You extend your hand.\n\n\n\"Alright, come with me!\" you shout. Anaria grabs your hand, and the two of you scramble back up to the wooden outcropping, balancing on it precariously.\n\n\nIt's no wider than a tree branch. You breathe deeply.\n\n\nImagine that it's solid ground, you will yourself, don't think about the height...\n\n\nLike an idiot, you look down. From this height, the goblins look like a mass of green ants, scurrying to and fro as they flee the camp in a panic.\n\n\n\"Anaria!\" you shout. The roar of the goblins below is deafening, and the billowing smoke and heat is causing you to tear up. \"Let's get back to the siege tower before...\"\n\n\nOut of the smoke, you see a thin figure emerge.", "action_results": [{"action": "Larcassio.", "result": "\"Everything was going so well today,\" Larcassio says.\n\n\nHe's covered in scratches, sweat, and his own blue blood. He's breathing heavily, and his snake eyes flicker in the smoke.\n\n\n\"And then YOU happened.\" He strides forward, walking on the wooden beam as though it were a paved road. He has tremendous balance. You wobble slightly.\n\n\nLarcassio draws his rapier and prods you backwards, towards the edge of the outcropping. Even from this height, you can see the glint of your weapons, lying uselessly on the ground below.\n\n\nYou look back for Anaria--but she's gone.\n\n\nYou hear the groaning creak of wood.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack Larcassio", "result": "You lunge at Larcassio, but you have no weapons. He simply laughs and pokes at you with his rapier.\n\n\n\"You have NOTHING, boy,\" Larcassio says, \"You just keep backing up, now. Or, you can end it quickly and jump.\"\n\n\nYou catch a glimpse of green. Anaria's cloak.\n\n\nShe's UNDERNEATH the wooden beam, crawling upside down like a monkey, getting closer to Larcassio with every second.\n\n\nYou lock eyes, and she motions you to be quiet.\n\n\nLarcassio takes another step towards you, his hair slick with sweat.\n\n\n\"Go on....\" he says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stall", "result": "\"Tell me something, Larcassio,\" you say, \"Have you ever heard of the Stone Lions of Trapper's Glen?\"\n\n\n\"You're stalling,\" Larcassio says, \"Stop wasting my time...unless you'd rather die by the sword?\"\n\n\n\"No, give me this,\" you say, \"It's important. See, the Stone Lions are a bit of a legend in these parts. They worship riddles. They think that a riddle can tell you which person is the better man.\"\n\n\n\"We already know which of us is the better man,\" Larcassio sneers.\n\n\n\"Do we? Cause up to now, it seems like sort of a tie. Wouldn't you like to know for sure?\"\n\n\nYou flick your gaze down, and see Anaria, closing in on Larcassio. She's only inches away, but if he were to look down.....\n\n\n\"So you want one last challenge?\" Larcassio muses. The flames are billowing ever higher. It's going to be a miracle if any of you make it out of this alive.\n\n\n\"That's right!\" you yell, trying to keep his attention on you at all costs, \"I ask you a riddle. If you guess it, you're better than I am.\"\n\n\n\"EASY,\" Larcassio roars, \"Give me your best shot.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask the Riddle", "result": "You close your eyes and take a deep breath.\n\n\nYou can picture Anaria, crawling across the beam, positioning herself under Larcassio's feet....\n\n\nYou open your eyes.\n\n\nI am the glue that binds heaven to earth,\n\nSea to shore,\n\nAnd raindrop to soil-\n\nChallenge me, and I shall always prevail\n\nDefy me, and I grow deadlier still.\n\nFor I bring all men down to the same level.\n\nWhat am I?\n\n\nLarcassio's eyes flicker wildly.\n\n\nHe doesn't know, you think. You catch a glimpse of Anaria. She's made it! She's directly underneath Larcassio. His cape billows around him, flickering just in and out of Anaria's grasp.\n\n\n\"All men...the same...\" Larcassio gnashes his teeth. \"The same--gah!! I--\"\n\n\n\"Time's running out, Larcassio,\" you say, \"What am I?\"\n\n\nLarcassio grips the sides of his head and howls in frustration.\n\n\n\"I---I DON'T KNOW!!!\" he screams.\n\n\nAnaria's hand clamps around the end of Larcassio's billowing cape.\n\n\n\"Gravity,\" you say.\n\n\nAnaria yanks once, hard.", "action_results": [{"action": "Gravity does the rest", "result": "\"AHHHHHHHHH!!!!\" Larcassio's final scream is a peal that echoes throughout the entire camp.\n\n\nYou watch his body pinwheel through space, falling down the length of the siege tower until landing with a thud on the earth, thirty feet below.\n\n\nAnaria swings her body up, as smoothly as a gymnast, and balances on the top of the beam.\n\n\n\"Sorry, boss,\" Anaria says, \"I guess I stole your revenge, huh?\"\n\n\n\"No time to worry about that,\" you say, \"We gotta get off this tower!!!\"\n\n\nThe two of you link hands and, using each other for balance, sprint across the beam.\n\n\nYou've only just made it across when the beam splinters and cracks, falling to the earth below in a shower of wood and smoke.\n\n\n\"Run--\" you say, panting for breath. The siege tower has gone up in flames. Keeping low to the ground, the two of you slide down the ladder, burning your hands on the wood.\n\n\nA few feet from the bottom, the siege tower begins to collapse, and you both leap to the earth, rolling and thudding across the ground.\n\n\nThe tower collapses in a magnificent display. Ash and flame burst into the sky.\n\n\nYou and Anaria clamber to your feet.\n\n\n\"Not bad for a day's work,\" Anaria says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Leave the Camp", "result": "You and Anaria stumble through the camp, often leaning on each other for support.\n\n\nYou're both coughing wildly from the smoke that fills the air. Everything is smokey confusion. The goblins nearly trip over you in their haste to find safety.\n\n\nThey've stopped caring about either of you long ago.\n\n\nFinally, you and Anaria clear the boundaries of the camp.\n\n\nTogether, you traverse the hills back to town, leaving the wreckage of the goblin camp far behind.\n\n\nYou've journeyed halfway across the hills when you see a cluster of villagers, running over the hills to greet you!\n\n\nFriendly faces, smiling, arms outstretched.\n\n\nJoad leads the pack, smiling for the first time in ages.\n\n\n\"We saw the smoke, captain,\" he says. He lets you lean your weight on him. You take a load off your ankle, which feels much better. You must have twisted it back at the camp.\n\n\nYour friend Lodan rushes towards Anaria, catching her and keeping her steady.\n\n\n\"Alright, easy does it, you two,\" Joad says, \"Let's get you back home.\"\n\n\nIn less than an hour, you and Anaria are back in the town of Lyestra.\n\n\nEverything is foggy. You feel hands tucking you tightly into a warm bed, and then the world goes dark.\n\n\nIt's been a long day.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Reason with Larcassio", "result": "\"Listen, Larcassio,\" you say, \"This whole siege tower is about to go up in flames. And that means we go up in flames, too. You're just going to die with me unless we both escape right now!\"\n\n\n\"Do you think that MATTERS?\" Larcassio spits, \"I'm dead already. Gremgrawler will dice me into pieces when he finds out I let you burn this camp to the ground.\"\n\n\n\"Who?\" you ask, but Larcassio waves your question away. \"March,\" he says, \"Or you can save time and jump.\"\n\n\nYou catch a glimpse of green. Anaria's cloak.\n\n\nShe's UNDERNEATH the wooden beam, crawling upside down like a monkey, getting closer to Larcassio with every second.\n\n\nYou lock eyes, and she motions you to be quiet.\n\n\nLarcassio takes another step towards you, his hair slick with sweat.\n\n\n\"Go on....\" he says.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null, null]}, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Tierce", "result": "You protect your right shoulder, but that's not where Larcassio was aiming!\n\n\nLarcassio's blade plunges into you.....\n\n\nThe world is spinning.\n\n\nYou see a pair of snake like eyes, and a sharp-toothed grin, and everything fades away......", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Quinte", "result": "You protect your lower inside region, but that's not where Larcassio was aiming....\n\n\nLarcassio's blade plunges into you.....\n\n\nThe world is spinning.\n\n\nYou see a pair of snake like eyes, and a sharp-toothed grin, and everything fades away......", "action_results": []}]}, null, null, null]}]}]}, null, null, {"action": "Feint", "result": "You feint forwards, doing a 'fake attack,' but Larcassio isn't fooled. He continues to watch you carefully.\n\n\n\"You'll have to do better than that...\" he says.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null, null, null]}, null, null, {"action": "Riposte", "result": "You can only attempt a riposte after you've succesfully parried!\n\n\nYou end up looking foolish. Larcassio chuckles.\n\n\n\"This is going to be too easy....\" he smirks.\n\n\nThe two of you go back to circling.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Remise", "result": "As you're flailing, you recall that a 'remise' is a follow-through attack, which can only be attempted after a lunge.\n\n\nYou end up looking a bit silly.\n\n\nLarcassio rolls his eyes.\n\n\n\"Please, give me some sort of challenge,\" he demands.\n\n\nThe two of you go back to circling.", "action_results": [null]}, null, null]}, null, null, null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Tie the Rope to the Tower", "result": "Okay. The rope is firmly tied to the tower.\n\n\nNow what?", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Tell him you're here for a routine safety inspection", "result": "\"Well, buddy, I'm not gonna mince words,\" you say, confidently. \"Gruk, gruk's your name, right?\"\n\n\n\"Yes, my name Gruk.\" The goblin says, confused, \"How you know that?\"\n\n\nYou decline to mention that almost ninety percent of goblins are named Gruk.\n\n\n\"Name's Arakhan. Routine safety inspection,\" you say, extending your hand.\n\n\nGruk stares at your outstretched hand.\n\n\n\"Look, lemme tell ya, pal,\" you say, \"These siege towers are not up to code. You see this?\"\n\n\nYou stand near the edge of the tower and wave your arms.\n\n\n\"That's a thirty foot drop, pal. You're gonna need safety railing for all of these bad boys. Or I'm gonna have to shut down this whole operation. And don't think I didn't notice you're not wearing a hard hat. We take safety seriously on these big siege operations.\"\n\n\nGruk scratches his head, confused.\n\n\n\"Hm....\" he says. He's clearly thinking very hard. Then he snaps his fingers, triumphantly.\n\n\n\"Hold on second,\" Gruk says, smiling craftily at you, \"If you safety inspector....where your inspection permit?\"", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Make up a lie", "result": "\"Oh, uh,\" you pat at your body frantically. \"I must have left them in my....my other trousers.\"\n\n\n\"You try good,\" Gruk says, raising his bow, \"But you forget one thing....Gruk not know what trousers are.\"\n\n\nYou only have a second to feel infuriated at the illogicality of this moment.\n\n\nAn arrow pierces your heart.\n\n\nThis is probably the silliest way to die, you think, and that's really saying somethi-", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Pull Rank on him", "result": " \n\nYou storm forward, putting on your best show of blustering confidence.\n\n\n\"Well, I never!\" you shout, \"In thirty-five years, I have NEVER come across anything like this.\"\n\n\nGruk backs down, cowed.\n\n\n\"Oh, um,\" he says, \"Gruk am sorry.\"\n\n\n\"To think, I'm getting questioned by a grunt like you! The sheer nerve. You know, I could have your hide. Worse, I could have your JOB.\"\n\n\nGruk gulps.\n\n\nYou gesture to the edge of the siege tower, and Gruk toddles over to where you're standing. He peers down at the ground below.\n\n\n\"Now, I'm glad we had this little talk,\" you say. You smack Gruk on the back triumphantly.\n\n\n\"Whughh--whuh---\" the momentum of the smack sends Gruk pinwheeling forward.\n\n\nHe loses his balance and tumbles over the edge of the tower!\n\n\n\"Aggghhhhhhh---\" he screams, until his cry is cut short by a hard thud. You look down at the ground far below, and wince.\n\n\n\"Hm. Should've invested in safety railings,\" you say.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Sneak from Tent to Tent", "result": "Alright. Time to put your stealth skills to the test.\n\n\nYou quickly duck behind a plain brown tent.\n\n\nYou're gonna have to move fast and quietly. You scan the area.\n\n\nYou're surrounded by multicolored goblin tents. A ways north of you, you can see a clearing, just beyond a Black Tent. If you could make it to the Black tent, you're sure you could reach the goblin leader.\n\n\nYou're going to have to move fast and think quickly.\n\n\nThere's an orange tent to your right, and a yellow tent ahead of you. Both are silent.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Yellow Tent", "result": "You are huddling behind a Yellow Tent.\n\n\nThere is a Green Tent up ahead of you.\n\n\nA Purple Tent to your right.\n\n\nAnd a Brown Tent behind you.\n\n\nThe Purple Tent is rustling.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Green Tent", "result": "You are hiding behind a Green Tent.\n\n\nThere is a Black Tent to your right.\n\n\nAnd a Yellow Tent behind you.\n\n\nThe Black Tent is rustling.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Black Tent", "result": "As you walk near the tent, a goblin explodes out of the tent flaps.\n\n\n\"GRAHHHH!!!\" he howls, and suddenly every tent explodes into action.\n\n\nIn seconds, you are overwhelmed.", "action_results": []}, null]}, null, {"action": "Go to the Brown Tent", "result": "You are standing behind a Brown Tent.\n\n\nThere is an Orange Tent to your Right.\n\n\nAnd a Yellow Tent up ahead of you.\n\n\nBoth tents are silent.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go to the Orange Tent", "result": "You are hiding behind an orange tent.\n\nThere is a Brown Tent to your left.\n\n\nA Purple Tent up ahead.\n\n\nA White Tent to your right.\n\n\nThe Brown Tent is rustling.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go to the Purple Tent", "result": "You are standing behind a Purple Tent.\n\n\nThere is a Silver Tent to your Right.\n\n\nAn Orange Tent behind you.\n\n\nA Yellow Tent to your left.\n\n\nAnd a Black Tent up ahead.\n\n\nThe Silver and Black Tents are rustling.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go to the Orange Tent", "result": "You are huddling behind an Orange Tent.\n\n\nThere is a Brown Tent to your left.\n\n\nA Purple Tent up ahead.\n\n\nAnd a White Tent to your right.\n\n\nThe White Tent is rustling.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, null, null]}, {"action": "Go to the White Tent", "result": "You are hiding behind a white tent.\n\n\nThere is an Orange Tent to your left.\n\n\nA Silver Tent up ahead.\n\n\nBoth are silent.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Silver Tent", "result": "You are huddling behind a Silver Tent.\n\n\nThere is a Purple Tent to your left.\n\n\nAnd a White Tent behind you.\n\n\nBoth tents are silent.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Go to the Orange Tent", "result": "You are hiding behind an Orange Tent.\n\n\nThere is a Purple Tent up ahead.\n\n\nA Brown Tent to your Left.\n\n\nAnd a White tent to your Right.\n\n\nThe Brown Tent is rustling.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go to the Purple Tent", "result": "You are hiding behind a Purple Tent.\n\n\nThere is a Silver Tent to your Right.\n\n\nAn Orange Tent behind you.\n\n\nA Yellow Tent to your Left.\n\n\nAnd a Black Tent up ahead.\n\n\nThe Silver and Black Tents are rustling.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Go to the Yellow Tent", "result": "You are hiding behind a Yellow Tent.\n\n\nThere is a Purple Tent to your left.\n\n\nA Brown Tent behind you.\n\n\nAnd a Green Tent up ahead.\n\n\nAll three tents are silent.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Go to the Green Tent", "result": "You are huddling behind a Green Tent.\n\n\nThere is a Yellow Tent behind you.\n\n\nAnd a Black Tent to your right.\n\n\nBoth Tents are silent.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go to the Black Tent", "result": "You huddle behind the Black Tent.\n\n\nWait--can it be?\n\n\nThere, just ahead of you, you can see the center of camp!\n\n\nYou've made it!!", "action_results": [{"action": "Approach the Center of Camp", "result": "You load your crossbow and enter the camp center confidently.\n\n\nThe blue-skinned man is sitting on his stone chair, and he half rises as he sees you approach.\n\n\nYou keep your crossbow aimed steadily at his heart. Goblins have taken notice of you, and they start to move in, their weapons drawn...but none of them dare to strike.\n\n\nThey all know that you could fire your crossbow at any moment, ending their general.\n\n\nYou made it.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, null]}, null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Eavesdrop on the two goblins", "result": "\"Grbble grunkr?\"\n\n\n\"Grbn grrg gr.\"\n\n\n\"Ghr bgh grrg grkungkhgr grhrg!\"\n\n\n\"Ghrng ngrh grhnghk ghkrhgn gkrhgk.\"\n\n\n \n\n \n\nThis is very enlightening.", "action_results": [{"action": "Create a plan of action", "result": "You're standing just outside the entrance of the goblin camp.\n\n\nTwo goblin sentries are chatting and guarding the way forward.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Go East, higher into the hills", "result": "You ascend the hills to the east.\n\n\nFrom this high vantage point, you can see the goblin camp!\n\n\nIt lies below, at the base of the valley. Hundreds of goblins are milling about, grabbling with each other and preparing for war.\n\n\nAnd there, in the center of the encampment, there is a stone chair. A thin, blue-skinned man sits in the throne, looking smug. He wears a long billowing cape.\n\n\nYou hit the ground suddenly as you hear the thud of heavy footfall. A MASSIVE goblin, almost seven feet tall, clomps within inches of your hiding place.\n\n\nHe's heavily armored and nearly three hundred pounds.\n\n\nThis is bad.\n\n\nThink quick!", "action_results": [{"action": "Leap on the Goblin's back and slit his throat", "result": "You jump onto the enormous goblin's back!\n\n\n\"HRNK???\" The goblin roars.\n\n\nHe plucks you off of his back as easily as if you were a tiny insect.\n\n\nHe throws you to the ground, and you slam painfully on your back.\n\n\n\"HGGGG.\" The goblin says, and then raises his club over your head.\n\n\nThe last thing you see is a club the size of a tree trunk rushing towards your face.", "action_results": []}, null, {"action": "Hurl a stone to the east as a distraction", "result": "You grab a stone and toss it as hard as you can to the east, the opposite direction from the goblin camp.\n\n\n\"Hnnnrhg?\" the giant goblin queries. He clomps off in the direction of the stone. He's gone for now!\n\n\nYou'd better move fast.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Try to distract Riker", "result": "\"Hey IDIOT!\" you shout, waving your arms, \"Come and GET ME!\"\n\n\nRiker grabs the knife from the floor and runs at you, charging like a bull.\n\n\nYou quickly duck under a nearby table as Riker slams the knife down, missing you by a hair and lodging the knife in the wood of the table's surface.\n\n\nHe struggles with the knife for a few seconds, his loose bandage dangling just within reach.\n\n\nWhat will you do?", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}, null, null]}]}, null]}, null]}, null]}]}, null]}, null, null, null, null, null]}]}]}]}, null, null]}, null]}, null]}]}]}]}, null]}, null, null]}]}, null, null, null, null]}, null, null, null]}]}, null]}]}, null]}, null]}]}, null]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story60.json b/data/scraper/stories/story60.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f8870a --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story60.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=20983", "context": "", "first_story_block": " You wake up and grin. You did it. Your friends bet three cars that you wouldn't sleep in the haunted house and make it out alive. You're definitely alive. You look around and see the haunted store's giant lizard monsters. Wait a second! The haunted Radio Shack has no giant lizard monsters! It doesn't even have that weird whispering noise!\n\n\n \"Attack the kitten! Yes go ahead and attack it! King Iwan Napee! It is your job to eat it! We will be invincible\n\n\n You push yourself back into a corner. This is definitely a room, but this is definitely not the haunted Radio Shack. You start to bite your fingernails, a bad habit. But that's when you realize that your fingernails are claws! Wait, what! You look at your hands, uh.. paws... You also have an urge to itch your ears with your feet! You've turned into a kitten! You look down to your belly. You're a kitten yes, a fat one. Too bad for you!\n\n\nfor another year! Yes! Yes! Yes! Take it, take the fat thing! It doesn't know anything about us! The less curious\n\n\n One of the lizard beasts says to you, \"Kitten! We are the Beasts! I am King Iwan and all twenty-eight of our endangered species will split you up and eat you!\" They all lunge at you, but you jump up and hide behind them.\n\n\nthe better! No! Don't let it get away! It might learn our secrets! Eat it so that we can all be invincible for a year!\n\n\n You look around again and spot a few other kittens camouflaged with the walls. You can smell them out, too. They're watching you. What the?! You think to yourself and think of a way to escape. Hmm...\n\n\nDo not let it know that our weakness is tomato sauce! Do not let it know! Don't let it think! Don't!\"\n\n\n You spot three things. There are three knives stuck in a piece of sausage on a table, a miniature rocket ship fit for two small kittens in the corner, and a large frying pan hanging on the wall. What do you do? ", "action_results": [{"action": "Get into the rocket!", "result": " You immediately rush into the rocket just before the teeth of the Beasts snap your neck. To your surprise, there is a kitten with sunglasses dancing inside the rocket. Seeing as he's distracted, you rush to the control pad. You can feel the beasts shaking the rocket. There's only one thing to do.\n\n\n You flip switches and push buttons and pound on the control pad. Pounding on the pad, you accidentally punch the DO NOT PUNCH button. Uh-oh.\n\n\n The dancing kitten drops his sunglasses and his donuts and stares at you. \"Did you just-\"\n\n\n Before you can even shrug, the rocket explodes, one of the large pieces stabbing Beast King Iwan in the left eye. Uh-oh! That's not good. You are launched out of the window, but thankfully you have a parachute!\n\n\n You dive through the sky and breathe in fresh air. Aaaaaahhh, that's good. However, your parachute is ripped to pieces by a small piece of the rocket. Oh no! You look around frantically. Where do you want to try to land?", "action_results": [{"action": "Land in the forest close by", "result": "You bounce around on the leaves of a tree. You decide to bounce on it some more. Then you realize that leaves aren't bouncy. Who cares? You think and you jump up and down on the leaves.\n\n\n Then some grumpy voice shouts, \"HEY! This is private property! These leaves are for the Mitten Factory! Wait a second! Stop right there!\"\n\n\n You bounce off of the leaves and run as fast as you can. The police kitten runs at you and notices something on your shoulder. \"Oh... If you're FAT, then you can stay around. Wait a second, all Feline Agent Troop members have the scale of a lizard on their shoulders!\"\n\n\n \"Tell me the truth!\" The police kitten points a cane at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell the truth no matter how crazy it is!", "result": " You decide to tell the truth. You tell him everything from the day of your birth to the time you ate cheese on a dare and to the present time. The police kitten's eyes widen.\n\n\n \"Wow, that's a story, kid! That's absolutely true! Only the most high ranking police know about all this mess. You're lucky kid. I'm a rebel who's against all that sacrifice mess.\" \n\n\n The police kitten rants about the FAT, an acronym for Feline Agent Troop. They are kittens who protect Earth from giant lizard monsters called Beasts. He also tells you that every year, the kittens take a human and turn them into a kitten as a sacrifice to the Beasts. He tells you that the sacrifice is just something to stall the Beasts for a bit while the FAT are trying to figure out all their secrets.\n\n\n \"My name's Waldo, kid. If you need the police, just dial my number on the phone. The thing is, the only pay phone that can call me is at the Beast Tower, where you were.\" He gives you a phone number. Great!\n\n\n Waldo goes ahead and drives you to Mitten Village.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Mitten Village", "result": "You're in Mitten Village, a strange little village with a mitten factory. Where do you go?", "action_results": [{"action": "The Archery Arena", "result": "When you walk in, an arrow flies at you. If only you could stop time!", "action_results": [{"action": "Death", "result": " You get up. \"Wait, aren't I supposed to be dead?\" You ask yourself, but nobody is there. You look around until a random old cat with huge whiskers appears, meditating.\n\n\n He looks at you and says calmly, \"To go forwards you must first go back...\"\n\n\n\"Go back...\"\n\n\n\"Go back...\"\n\n\n\"Go back...\"\n\n\n\"Go back...\"\n\n\n\"Go back...\"\n\n\n\"Go back...\"\n\n\n\"Go back...\"\n\n\n You finally get annoyed (\"Go back...\") and you decide to meditate. After meditating for a week straight, you shudder. You feel like you can go back and solve everything, but there's also a way to end everything. What do you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Go Back...", "result": " You wake up and grin. You did it. Your friends bet three cars that you wouldn't sleep in the haunted house and make it out alive. You're definitely alive. You look around and see the haunted store's giant lizard monsters. Wait a second! The haunted Radio Shack has no giant lizard monsters! It doesn't even have that weird whispering noise!\n\n\n \"Attack the kitten! Yes go ahead and attack it! King Iwan Napee! It is your job to eat it! We will be invincible\n\n\n You push yourself back into a corner. This is definitely a room, but this is definitely not the haunted Radio Shack. You start to bite your fingernails, a bad habit. But that's when you realize that your fingernails are claws! Wait, what! You look at your hands, uh.. paws... You also have an urge to itch your ears with your feet! You've turned into a kitten! You look down to your belly. You're a kitten yes, a fat one. Too bad for you!\n\n\nfor another year! Yes! Yes! Yes! Take it, take the fat thing! It doesn't know anything about us! The less curious\n\n\n One of the lizard beasts says to you, \"Kitten! We are the Beasts! I am King Iwan and all twenty-eight of our endangered species will split you up and eat you!\" They all lunge at you, but you jump up and hide behind them.\n\n\nthe better! No! Don't let it get away! It might learn our secrets! Eat it so that we can all be invincible for a year!\n\n\n You look around again and spot a few other kittens camouflaged with the walls. You can smell them out, too. They're watching you. What the?! You think to yourself and think of a way to escape. Hmm...\n\n\nDo not let it know that our weakness is tomato sauce! Do not let it know! Don't let it think! Don't!\"\n\n\n You spot three things. There are three knives stuck in a piece of sausage on a table, a miniature rocket ship fit for two small kittens in the corner, and a large frying pan hanging on the wall. What do you do? ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Hit randomly with the pan!", "result": " You grab the frying pan and swing wildly, not caring about anything at all. These bad monsters need to die! You then notice a water pipe system on the wall. That should do it!\n\n\n You bang the pipe system and the water gushes out, hitting Iwan's eye. It pops out and you run around, looking for a way to get out. However, the pipe busts open and a huge fountain of water hits right at you. You slosh around until you reach a bathroom. The flood is so high that you actually get dumped into the toilet and the water flushes it for you.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Through the Sewer", "result": " You cough several times as you wake up. Apparently, you've been washed up on the side of a river. You walk and walk and walk until you reach a small hut.\n\n\n You knock on the door and walk in. You smell the scent of stale milk and cold ice cream. You walk forwards and spot a she-kitten. \"Are you a human?\" She asks, saying are like ahh. She bats flies away from her whiskers.\n\n\n \"How do you know?\" you ask her, shivering.\n\n\n \"You ain't the only one. Last year, some guy escaped and landed in the river. He ran into the ice cream shop. Too bad they caught him. If I was a rebel at that time, I would've saved him, but I wasn't. Good thing now I am!\"\n\n\n She explains everything about the FAT, an acronym for Feline Agent Troop. They are kittens who protect Earth from giant lizard monsters called Beasts. She also tells you that every year, the kittens take a human and turn them into a kitten as a sacrifice to the Beasts. She tells you that the sacrifice is just something to stall the Beasts for a bit while the FAT are trying to figure out all their secrets.\n\n\n She pulls you into the back room.\n\n\n You hear her say something to some FAT agents, who seem really stuck up. They march off and the kitten pulls you out of the room.\n\n\n \"Here, heat up by the cream churner oven. Here's my number. If you get into any hassle with those FAT guys, just call if there's a free public phone nearby.\" She walks off, making more ice cream.\n\n\n An hour later, you pad off towards a strange smelling area in the forest. Hmm... You look ahead and see a small village. Where do you go?", "action_results": [null, {"action": "The village", "result": "You're now in Kitten Village. You hear somebody whisper. \"Next to nobody knows about the human sacrifices. Every year, the FAT, you know, Feline Agent Troop, take a human and take them to the Beast Tower to be eaten! They do it so that they can stall the beasts and gain more time! But killing humans! I didn't think FAT could stoop down to that level... it's a conspiracy!\" Apparently, the whispering voice is a radio set to say that over and over again. The whispering is coming from a Kitten Radio Shack. Where do you go?", "action_results": [{"action": "Pizza Shop", "result": "You step into the pizza shop. There are many kittens working and eating in the pizza shop. The only kitties of interest are the cashier who has spiky purple hair and a skinny kitten with a monocle trying to cut some butter. What do you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Skinny Kitten", "result": "\"What do you want?\" The kitten asks to you in a British accent. You shrug. He continues on trying to cut the hard slab of frozen butter. Hmm...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Cashier", "result": "\"Whaddyawant?\" The cashier asks you. He shows you a list of things that you can buy. There are a bunch of pizzas and soft drinks, but you don't need those. Unfortunately, everything is very expensive, except for the cheese. The cheese is free. You take some cheese, but it's very smelly.\n\n\n \"Good luck eating that!\" The cashier laughs. You look at the list.\n\n\nSuper Non-Toxic Tomato Sauce - 799.99 Kitten Dollars. Product can be bought by credit card\n\nKidz Meal - 9.99 Kitten Dollars\n\nPie - 20.99 Kitten Dollars. Product can be bought by credit card\n\n\n Well, that sucks.There are only two things worth buying.\n\n \n\n \n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [null, null]}, null]}, {"action": "Radio Shack", "result": "There's nothing here at the Radio Shack except the weird radio talk. There's a free rubber ducky though.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Kitten Village Travel Agency", "result": "You walk in. The kitty at the counter, obviously bored, says \" Hello, where do you want ta go?\" You look at the list of bus destinations. There's only Mitten Village and Kitty City.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Kitty City", "result": " You're in the hustling, bustling, -insert something that rhymes with bustling-, Kitty City. You can practically smell opportunity out there! There are several stores and buildings. You spot a dark alley and a wide open alley with lights flashing TRAVEL AGENCY in big letters. There is also a small house where you can hear people playing games. The mayor's house is next to a library far away from the center of the city. Now, where would you like to go?", "action_results": [{"action": "TaCosino", "result": "You walk into the big Casino shaped like a Taco. You lick your whiskers thinking about tacos because you're definitely hungry. You walk inside and spot dozens of rows of slot machines and roulettes. On a bench is an old kitten with droopy whiskers and mischievous eyes. He also had a wad of cash stuffed in his pocket. Some employees stare at him enviously.\n\n\n \"Come 'ere, yeah, you, newcomer,\" He says, yawning and blinking rapidly,\"Welcome to Kitten World's biggest casino ever with amazing tasting tacos! Here's my secret to success!\" The old cat hastily pulls out a kitten quarter, a gray quarter with a picture of an old orange kitten on it, except the odd thing was that the quarter had a string wrapped around it and tied up, \"I just got a jackpot so I don't need this anymore. Just don't use it in here because they're going to install security cameras soon.\"\n\n\n He whispers something inaudible that sounded like, \"Stopping time would do good, too... Fun Dog Beach has a genius dog with a time stopper...\"\n\n\n \"What time stopper?\" You ask. You notice that the old kitty pushes a large can of something titled \"Mr. High's High Lighter White Spacer\". There's nothing else to do but leave.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Alley 1", "result": "This alley has some strange jazz music playing, but nothing else. You spot a little house in the distance which seems a little black, but there's nothing else here.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Alley 2", "result": "This wide open alley has the backs of several houses. There is an open garage and there is the Kitty City Travel Agency. Where do you go?", "action_results": [null, {"action": "The Garage", "result": " Hello sneaky little you, yes you, invader of some innocent kitten's garage! The light flashes on and you jump for the exit, but a shy voice says, \"Oh... I'm sorry, we just don't get very many visitors. They say the place looks like a garage. I'm Lena. For being the first person to show up this week, you get this free glow-in-the-dark paint. Would you like to go laser shooting? It's free for you because you're our customer of the... week, uh... month...\"\n\n\n So, what do you do?", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go Laser Training", "result": " \"Sure, let's go laser training!\" You say to Lena. Her eyes widen.\n\n\n \"Thank you so much! I actually have somebody to play with!\" She licks your fur, \"Thank you so much!\" Now you have a cute kitten here, who likes you. What's better?\n\n\n You rush off to the laser training, immediately equipping yourself with a huge laser gun. Lena also equips herself with one. \"Try not to hit each other. Laser wounds are actually hard to clean up, you know. We're just training.\" Lena tells you. You nod seriously. You shoot a huge laser beam at the ceiling. Cracks appear right away. Wow, what a strong gun.\n\n\n You begin to shoot the rag dummies that creep around the area. Wow, this is fun! Time flies and you are trying to beat Lena's high score of five-thousand rag dummies in thirty minutes. It's going higher and higher every second. Your score is still around three-thousand, but it's awesome.\n\n\n After you're done, Lena gives you a slip of paper. \"Here's a phone number. If you need a laser shooter, then just call me up.\" Ooh... You've got a cute kitten's phone number. Wow! Good job, dude!", "action_results": [null, null]}, null]}, {"action": "Travel Agency - Kitty City", "result": "\"Where would you like to go?\" Asks the kitty lady at the counter. On a brochure, you see Kitten Village, Mitten Village, and Fun Dog Beach as places.\n\n\n \"Fun Dog Beach is a no-no,\" says the kitty, \"You need to have a special VIK, Very Important Kitten Fun Dog Ticket if you want to go.\" Hmm... That leaves two options.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Get onto the road to hitchhike!", "result": " You get onto the road and make some signals to some cars, but nobody seems to see you. Hmm... You scratch your head just as you hear a motorcycle sound. Well, it seems like some kittens are playing Lanesplitter on their phones nearby.\n\n\n However, when the motorcycle crashes into you, you realize that hitchhiking was a mistake.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Library", "result": " \"Hello.\" A librarian says. \"Welcome to the library. There's nothing much here except for some small books. People usually only use this library as a pathway to the tourist road. It takes you to the Beast Tower if you want to know, but you don't seem to have a car, so you must be a visitor. What book would you like? Unfortunately, we only have four you can read since my daughter borrowed the rest.\"\n\n\n Sure enough, there are four books. Peter Cat, Cat and the Beanstalk, Black Kitty, and Kitty and the Beast. Seriously, what kind of kittens write these stuff? ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Go to the Tourist Road", "result": " You walk out of the library, leaving the librarian to sob all alone by himself. Wow, a tourist street. You see a bunch of bodyguards guarding a gate to Fun Dog Beach, but who cares? You can see the huge Beast Tower in the distant and you're determined to get there. But you don't have any way to get there! Hitchhiking seems to be the best option you have. You see a slow car passing by. Maybe the driver can lend you a seat!", "action_results": [{"action": "Jump onto the Car", "result": " You jump onto the car. Panicked, the driver puts it on full speed and crashes into a tree. He jumps out of the car just in time while the car - and you - explode. ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Wait Patiently", "result": "You decide to wait patiently and the car surprisingly stops in front of you. \"Why, hello there! You seem to be a newcomer to Kitty City! Well, hop in! You don't seem to know what a car is! I'll take you to the Beast Tower! It's fun there!\"\n\n\n You walk inside cautiously, pretending that you don't know what the car is, and he drives off, much faster than before.\n\n\n In a few minutes, you're at the Beast Tower! Awesome! You walk out, expecting him to follow you, but he says, \"Sorry, I left my girlfriend at the Tacosino... again... Bye!\" He drives off.\n\n\n This is it. The moment you've been waiting for. Prepared? Got enough weapons? Go!\n\n\n You rush into the gate.", "action_results": [{"action": "Gate", "result": " Inside the gate, there is the humongous tower with two FAT agents guarding it. If you want to go inside, you need them out of the way. You might also need a strategizing machine. There's a pay phone right there. You might want to call somebody for help. Hmm...", "action_results": [{"action": "Payphone", "result": "This is a payphone. You need to pay a kitten quarter.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Use your Kitty Quarter on a String!", "result": " You push the quarter in and immediately pull it out. Who do you want to call?", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Barge in!", "result": " You barge in, shoving the FAT members to the ground. You're about to rush upstairs until you get shot by a laser. The last thing you hear is, \"I never miss.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Find a chink in the tower", "result": " You look around and try to find a chink in the tower so that you can destroy it somehow. You might need some sort of strategizer to do it though. Since you're this close to the tower, you can use something to bust it down. ", "action_results": [null]}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Peter Cat", "result": "You read Peter Cat. It's a wonderful tale of a cat who never grows who lives in a strange land. He has many adventures with kitten friends and blah and blah and blah. When you finish it, the librarian smiles, nodding. \"Another book, sir?\"\n\n\n Okay.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Cat and the Beanstalk", "result": " You open the book and magically enter. Wow, that's so awesome. It's a magic book. The librarian squeals in delight as you get sucked in to the world of a giant and a cat named Jack. You hang around and decide to give those beans you had for lunch to some kid for a cow. You take the cow and chop it up into lemons where you make lemon juice, which is impossible. Well, this world is a fantasy, isn't it? Cow meat can turn into lemons at any time, right? Stop complaining about it. You have lemons and made lemon juice. Drink it! Oh, tasty, isn't it? Watch out for that big axe falling from the sky.\n\n\n The cat named Jack chops down the beanstalk and the giant hits the ground, dead. \"Thanks for the beans! Are you selling magical lemon juice now?\" Jack asks. You give him the lemon juice and he happily gives you the axe. Well, that was weird. You suddenly teleport out of the book. You have the axe, but that was really weird!\n\n\n \"Another, sir?\" The librarian asks you.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Black Kitty", "result": " You read Black Kitty, the tale of a kitten taxi driver who is mistreated and roughly kicked out of houses. It's a good read. Maybe you should actually read the original human book form, Black Beauty, but you shrug it off. \"Another book, fair sir?\" The excited librarian asks you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Kitty and the Beast", "result": " You open the book Kitty and the Beast. What a cheesy name. There are Beast monsters all around here. Imagine! A kitty and a beast! You've watched that Disney movie, Beauty and the Beast, but how could a Kitty fall for a Beast!\n\n\n When you flip the first page, the book sucks you in. Wait, that's not right! Sucks you in? It must be a magical book! When you get into the book, you realize that you're in a room. A bathroom. And also, there's a Beast sitting on the toilet. Uh-oh. In a splatter of blood, bones, and fur, you're on the ground, dead in a magical book.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "The game house", "result": " When you jump into the game house, you see three idiot kittens playing go-fish. Seriously, these three are stupid. \"Want to join?\" One asks you.\n\n\n \"Shut up Yule, he's only a newcomer!\" Another idiot says.\n\n\n \"Shut up or the talk-too-much-and-the-sleeping-drugs-will-work plan will work!\" Shouts another idiot.\n\n\n Idiots... You decide to watch them talk and laugh until they all fall asleep. Now's your chance! Be a thief! You can see a queen of spades card on the table that you can easily snatch and a strategizer (a weakpoint finder) in Yule's pocket, maybe you can borrow that. What do you do?", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Steal 'em both", "result": " You grab the strategizer and the queen and rush off. That was fun! Where are you now? Oh no! You watch as Yule's foot connects with your face as you fly away. That Yule must have a power-converter hidden in his socks. You close your eyes as you fly away and hit something with a splash!", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "The mayor's place", "result": " You stride into the mayor's house as casually as possible and nobody seems to notice you. That's probably because they're too busy putting out the fire. Wait, the fire?! The mayor's house is on fire! You need either water or something fireproof to get through the flames. You need to save the mayor!", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Search for water", "result": " Yeah, searching for water seems to be obvious, but where?! You immediately find a bucket of water on the table and splash it on a random spot where the fire is.\n\n\n Apparently, the stairs to the mayor's room is burnt down! Oh no! You jump up with all your might and rush into the mayor's room. However, you wasted time thinking about the water and the mayor was already dead. Too bad.\n\n\n A police kitten, probably thinking that you were the cause of the fire shoots you until you die. Uh oh. However, the mayor's death can simply be restarted by going to the meditation grounds.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "The new amusement park!", "result": " You run into the new amusement park and buy a free ticket for only ten invisible bucks, cheap, right? You use the ticket to get onto the Spin-n'-hurl ride.\n\n\n You spin and spin and spin and spin and spin. Wow, when is the hurling? You are then hurled through the air and fly into a forest area. Uh-oh.\n\n\n \"You know Joe, I don't think this ride is safe.\"\n\n\n \"You said it, Steve.\"\n\n\n Now you're somewhere just because of that unsafe ride Joe and Steve made. You can blame them for your fall into the forest.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Kitten Prison", "result": " You go inside the kitten prison and accidentally walk into the cell control room. Wow, good for you. You immediately spot some chocolate used to poison the bodies of the prisoners if they have a death penalty. You also spot a control pad. You take the chocolate and you hear somebody whisper to you, \"I'm innocent! Press the button and take me out of my misery!\" What do you do?", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Button Press", "result": " You press the button. \"Just kidding, I'm a murderer! He jumps at you until you hear police footsteps. Uh-oh. He hugs you. That's weird. He was just about to kill you a few minutes ago!\n\n\n \"Hey, you, you got the worst criminal ever out of jail. Now get into a cell, both of you!\" The police kick the worst criminal ever into a cell and kick you into a cell where an extremely old kitten in a jacuzzi is sitting.\n\n\n \"Wait!\" You protest, \"I'm on first name terms with your Inspector!\"\n\n\n \"Oh yeah! What's his phone number?!\" A police kitten asks you, obviously thinking that you're lying.", "action_results": [{"action": "Give up and say that you don't know", "result": " \"I don't know!\" You exclaim. The police kittens pad off. You look at the old prisoner cat in the jacuzzi.\n\n\n \"If you want to get out, just use that hole in the wall.\" The old prisoner cat says.\n\n\n \"Then how come you're not getting out?\" You ask suspiciously before entering the large hole.\n\n\n \"It's comfy in here. I don't have a home!\" He scratches himself and gives you an ant. Wait, what? An ant? \"You might need the strength of an ant to uncover secrets! That's what my mother always said.\" You take the... ant... and escape.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Liquid Labs", "result": " Liquid Labs is a weird greenish building far away from the other buildings. You see a sign outside of it.\n\n\nWant Potions? Come on over to Liquid Labs and the Master will Brew \n\nSomething Up for you! *\n\n\n\n\nBring your own ingredients if we don't have 'em!\n\n\n Okay... When you walk in, you see a strange twitchy looking kitten standing over a high-tech cauldron looking device. \"You! I can sense deep in your heart and soul that a human making potion is best for you. You must bring me only one ingredient. Since I obtained this rare flower from Earth, a Rose, and tongues of Beasts, and hideous viper panda fangs, you must give me only one ingredient, and that is chocolate.\"\n\n\n Chocolate... Hmm...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Anti-Knife Society Building", "result": " You walk into the strange anti-knife building. Apparently, you can't see it if you have a knife with you. When you walk in, you see several lawful looking kittens. One of them shouts, \"The mayor has a scholarship again for nanotechnology! You have to save him though!\"\n\n\n Several other kittens respond to that with loud hoorays and they all rush out. That was very weird.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Strange smelling area", "result": " You walk around the strange smelling area. You spot several dogs sniffing a pole. A kitten in a lab coat is watching you in surprise. He claps his hands several times and shouts something. You walk over to him, but the dogs smell you and jump at you. Uh-oh! You scratch the dog. Aha! These dogs are extremely weak, but have sharp teeth. If you have a weapon, you could get past them! Well, what do you do?", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Try one of the knives and escape!", "result": " You grab the three knives and throw one at Iwan's eye. The eyeball immediately comes out and he screams in agony and pain. However, when you throw the sausage at them, they all get into a big fight over who gets it.\n\n\n \"Butter Bomb! That's mine!\" A lizard shouted.\n\n\n \"Am I the only sensible one around here?!\" Shouted Butter Bomb, grabbing the sausage piece once more.\n\n\n \"My insides don't feel good!\" King Iwan groaned.\n\n\n \"HEY!\" Shouted somebody, \"STOP REVEALING THE CODE TO THE KITTEN!\" You aren't at all curious about the code or anything like that.\n\n\n You jump out the window, but don't even stop to think about what height the room is. Apparently, the room was on the top floor of a twenty-nine story building. Too bad.\n\n\n You fall down and down and down into a clump of forest.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Eat the sausage and throw away the knives", "result": "You don't care about anything else, you're hungry. Sleeping in a haunted Radio Shack and turning into a kitten is hard work, you know! You grab the sausage and chomp it. Yum Yum Yum!\n\n\n However, the Beasts are also thinking 'Yum Yum Yum!\" as they eat you. Too bad!", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Mitten Factory", "result": "You walk inside the Mitten Factory. \"Welcome to the Mitten Factory! Home of the best mittens!\" A little kitten squeals at you, \"Feel free to look around! But if you're an employee, use your Employee card pass and enter!\" You spot a large stack of pillows\n\n\n A worker kitten snorts at you. \"You want that trash? Take it!\" He says, \"There's no use for soundproof pillows, now are there?\" Good job, you've got a pillow! Now what do you do?", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Employee Door", "result": "There's nothing here except for an extremely large door with a card slot. ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Kitten Travel Agency", "result": " You walk to the Kitten Travel Agency. A kind kitty at the counter asks, \"Where would you like to go? They're all free!\" Hmm... You think for a while. Where would you need to go?\n\n\n You look at the brochure on the wall. You can go to Kitty City, Kitten Village, or a special flight over the river! Wow! Where do you go? ", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "River Flight", "result": " You climb aboard the special Mitten Village Only Over River Flight Plane. You spot a few FAT members hanging around, but there's no need to do anything about them.\n\n\n You sit down next to the pilot. She starts the plane by rubbing her fur on a strange fur sensor. With a strange buzzing noise, the plane starts to fly. You watch as the trees whiz by so quickly.\n\n\n But the thing is, you're sleepy, so you decide to fall asleep. You lean down your head onto a button... wait, a button?! A button! The plane explodes, sending you into the river.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "The Apartment", "result": " You're inside the five story apartment. You immediately see a sign. \n\n\n1st Floor: Lobby, Swimming Pool, and Rooms\n\n2nd Floor: Bar, Laundry, and Rooms\n\n3rd Floor: La Kitten Cafe and Rooms\n\n4th Floor: Artsy Shop and Rooms\n\n5th Floor: Used Book Store and Rooms\n\nRoof: Overlook Cafe\n\n\n Wow, this place is awesome! What floor do you want to go to? ", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay on the First Floor and explore", "result": " You take a look at the swimming pool and lounge around while sipping up free fresh milk. Ahh... This seems like such an amazing place to stay in. You stop lounging and get up.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Second Floor", "result": " At the second floor, you immediately go to the bar, but unfortunately, the \"bar\" is just a humongous statue of a granola bar that the owner once dreamed of. The laundry place has nothing in it either.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Third Floor", "result": " You go up to the third floor and find La Kitten Cafe right away. It's not so shabby, but the waiters and waitresses are creepy. They all have animated bags on their heads and they seem to be endlessly bored. To your horror, instead of giving you a receipt, they hand you one of the useless animated brown bags. Hmm... There should be a use for it, but it's useless... Unless Zephyrme and Mudshadow are lying this time! Ha Ha Ha! There should be a good use! You jump out of the cafe triumphantly and rush back to the lobby.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Fourth Floor", "result": " You go up to the fourth floor. You look to the left and to the right for the artsy store, but you can't seem to find it until you look up. There, you see a rope. You pull on it and a ladder slides down. You climb up the ladder wondering who in the world made this place.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go Up", "result": " And just like you guessed, it is the artsy store. You see a bored customer lying around on the ground and a bored costumer trying to paint something with crazy paints. You also see a vending machine that only sold packs of markers... for a quarter! What to do...", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Vending Machine", "result": " You need a quarter to buy some markers.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "The bored customer", "result": " You try to strike up a conversation with the bored customer lying on the ground, but he doesn't seem to talk much about anything besides the used bookstore upstairs.\n\n\n \"Everything inside the used bookstore is used! Even the lightbulbs are used! I saw some weirdo named Zephyrme walk into the used bookstore and he stole a bunch of ideas from other storygames from the books! Can you believe that?!\" He asks you.\n\n\n That name, Zephyrme seems quite familiar to you. Maybe he's the reason why you're stuck in this place anyway! You should really go and check that bookstore!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "The bored costumer", "result": " \"Dang it!\" The bored costumer cries out, sending paint flying through the air, \"This waterproof paint is waterproof, but it makes a mess of everything! Now look at these jeans I got yesterday!\" You stare at the dripping (wait a sec, how can something waterproof be dripping?) purplish glob that the bored she-kitten is holding. She pulls out a plastic bag with really dry looking paint inside. Oh no, she's going to give it to you, isn't she...\n\n\n \"There's somebody who might need this. Go to the old lady inside the Mitten Factory employee area and you'll see what I'm talking about. Now begone before I get annoyed by the wretched paint's smell!\" The cranky and bored costumer shouts at you.", "action_results": [null, null]}, null]}, null]}, {"action": "Fifth Floor", "result": " You walk inside of the used bookstore. To your surprise, the door is a used door from the 60's and the doorknob looks like an ancient skull doorknob. Wow. You walk inside and see a kitty wearing hippie clothes (probably used as well) and you see a smiling face on a patched up laptop screen. \"Throwing knives get you more wins.\" The smiling face said. What the heck?! Is that all?\n\n\n You look at the shelves and see tiny blobs of dust. Those were probably ancient used books for fleas. Wow. This place is cheap.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Roof", "result": " When you get to the roof, you know right away that this is the snazziest part of the hotel. Very classic music goes smoothly through the speakers. Some very rich looking kittens are sipping cups of creamed coffee. Some kittens are actually licking each other (the equivalent of making out for kittens). You lay back and order the fancy guy seven pancakes and a good strong cup of cocoa coffee. He protests about something in French, \"Ne buvez pas! Le cacao est toxique pour les chatons!\"\n\n\n You don't care what he says. He puts down the cocoa coffee and you start to pick up the cup until you see the clock. Wow, you really got sidetracked didn't you, going around this weird apartment! What do you do?", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Drink the cocoa coffee", "result": " Apparently, you forgot that chocolate was poisonous to cats and you die a gruesome and poisoned death.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Lie and save your skin!", "result": " Before you can lie, the police kitten rants about the FAT, an acronym for Feline Agent Troop. They are kittens who protect Earth from giant lizard monsters called Beasts. He also tells you that every year, the kittens take a human and turn them into a kitten as a sacrifice to the Beasts. He tells you that the sacrifice is just something to stall the Beasts for a bit while the FAT are trying to figure out all their secrets.\n\n\n He then shoves you into his police car while tossing you some fish. \"You aren't going to arrest me?\" You ask.\n\n\n \"Nah, I know you're the human sacrifice this year. Breaking rules isn't too bad. Here, you're a nice quiet little guy. I'll take you to Kitty City, a nice bustling town. You'll like it, I know, just stay away from any FAT agents while you're there because you're now wanted by them. Be careful! By the way, the name's Waldo, Inspector Waldo!\"\n\n\n You listen to him talk about his life as you sigh and lay back. You might actually have a nice life in Kitty City...", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story61.json b/data/scraper/stories/story61.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c10646d --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story61.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=17306", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Blackness.\n\n\nYour mind is cloudy and hazy.\n\n\nPain. You feel pain.\n\n\nFlashes of sound burst in the distance. You slowly feel awareness coming back, the world leaking back into coherent form. You are in so much pain. Around you you hear familiar sounds: Screaming, the butchery of men, the agony of rape, buildings burning, children screaming, and the cheers of the victors.\n\n\n\"Where am I?\" You think to yourself. Slowly you move your fingers, then your toes. A soft moan issues from somewhere around you. You realize it is you and you begin to make your stiff body begin to move again. First one arm, then your leg, then you slowly lift up and look around.\n\n\nYou think hard to remove the fuzziness of the recent events from the corners of your mind and concentrate on survival. \"I've got a concussion.\" You conclude.\n\n\nFinally, you peer through the dense smoke and realize that you are in a crater, the bodies of men, horses, and weapons of war surround you. The acrid smell of burning flesh mixed with the tinny smell of blood, the pain in your head, and the entrails of the man you ran beside all make you vomit.\n\n\nStrangely, you feel just a little bit better and your head is starting to clear, \"I'm Sebastian, a mercenary, I chose to defend the city of Essitrea against the Turric . I don't think we won... I think I'd better get the hell out of here!\"\n\n\nLooking around you a sturdy broadsword sticks out from a body of a Turric soldier, you recognize the blade as yours. You stagger over to the soldier and with effort pull the blade free from the man's corpse.\n\n\nNow armed, you know you've got to get out but amidst the rubble and the ruffians running amok, the sounds of battle in the air, and the thudding of artillery, every step could be your last.\n\n\nYou decide quickly that you can either run building to building a fast method of travel but with heavy odds of discovery; try to enter the sewers, an obviously unsanitary means to travel but with less likelihood of discovery, or you can try to hole up in the nearest building and wait for the action to die down.", "action_results": [{"action": "Run For It!", "result": "You grab your blade tightly and look around quickly before dashing over the lip of the crater and towards the blasted wall nearest your left side. Nearby an explosion spurts up chunks of earth and stone as well as the arm of a corpse, high into the air. You watch in horror as the appendage plops onto the sidewalk.\n\n\nFrom your left, three Turric warriors rush and assault an injured merchant, stabbing him repeatedly with their wickedly barbed scimitars before looting the man's corpse.\n\n\nTo your right you see another building about twenty feet across some exposed ground.\n\n\nDo you:", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack the Turric Warriors?", "result": "You attack the warriors with the advantage of surprise. Crawling low, you creep until you are at the edge of the wall you were hiding behind then you suddenly sprint with your broadsword lifted in both hands. As you descend upon the Turric Warriors, you swing the sword in an arc that splits the first Turric Swordsman's left arm from his body. You spin and use the heavy blade's momentum to make a second cut from the shoulder blade up through the man's neck decapitating him instantly.\n\n\nAs the first warrior falls, blood arcing into the sky, the two others reel in shock. You take advantage of this momentary lapse of reason and bring a low slice towards the second man's knee. The blade connects and the limb is taken clean off. Following the blade's momentum, you raise it up and steer it into the man's chest.\n\n\nThe third warrior has now gathered his wits and attacks viciously trying to slice you with his barbed scimitar. You back away from the first strike, block the second, and duck the third. His blows are coming faster than the broad-blade can react. Do you: Parry and look for an opening with the butt of your sword to stun the enemy or block with the sword and pull a dagger with your other hand and plunge it into his neck?", "action_results": [{"action": "Parry and Stun the Enemy!", "result": "You conserve your energy and block his blows. Knowing the wild style of the Turric swordsman, you easily parry several wild blows. As he failed to strike he becomes more and more frustrated and you lure him into a wide swing and while he is pulling back, you step in his reach and break his nose with the handle of your sword. The stunning blow makes him stumble backwards and you press the advantage kicking him backwards and then turning your sword and driving it through his stomach!\n\n\nHe squirms like a worm for several long seconds before you twist your blade and finish the job. Though you conserved your energy by blocking, you attracted the attention of a few more warriors. They come streaming out of a building to your right and you count at least five men, two with crossbows aimed in your direction.\n\n\nDo you: Run away or turn to face the group and take them head on using throwing knives to whittle them down before resorting to your sword?", "action_results": [{"action": "Run Away!", "result": "Feeling like discretion is the better part of valor, you turn tail and run away as fast as you can. You are lithe and Agile and in light armor and the heavier, more armored men can't keep up. However, one of the crossbowmen draws a bead on you and fires. The bolt slams into your left shoulder and you scream in pain before skirting around a clump of rubble and ducking under some fallen timbers. The warriors curse as they try to track you but they walk past your position and disappear into the smoky ruins.\n\n\nYou are injured and the bolt projects out of your left shoulder. You try to hold back tears as you reach with your good arm and gingerly touch the shaft. It's buried deep and you'll need a healer to remove it. You grimace and pull your first aid kit out of your belt. You find a few bandages and make yourself a sling and place your left arm in it.\n\n\nYou are alive but now you are crippled. Without both arms your swordplay will be much diminished and you realize that your ability to defend yourself has been compromised. You will now have to use stealth until you can find an ally or escape altogether.\n\n\nDesperate, you must move on, losing consciousness in this state could be life-ending.\n\n\nDo you:", "action_results": [{"action": "Wait for Nightfall to Continue?", "result": "Resting back, you decide to wait until nightfall to continue trying to escape. You hope that your stealth will be aided by the darkness. The problem is finding a decent place to rest. Carefully, you creep towards a building that looks promising. It is three stories tall but also damaged and missing most of the roof. You think that it is the least likely place around the enemy will look but you admit it's a gamble and a possible deathtrap if you get cornered by enemy forces with no where to run.\n\n\nMaking sure no one is watching, you scurry from the rubble to an alley and with another quick look around, you duck through a hole in the wall and make it into the first floor. A quick search reveals nothing good. A family has been butchered, the man stabbed repeatedly, his wife raped and her throat cut, the oldest boy, perhaps ten in age, was stapled to the wall with crossbow bolts and still hangs there, his life's blood pooled and congealed at his feet, and the youngest daughter, about six? Well if there is a hell, who ever hurt her will burn there forever.\n\n\nYou curse the gods at their apathy and resolve to never give up, never surrender, even if death is the only alternative! Better to jump from a building or cut one's own throat than to be raped and killed like a cowering dog.\n\n\nA noise takes you out of your revelry, you need to hide somewhere and fast! Rushing towards the staircase do you...\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Run Upstairs!", "result": "You skate up the stairs taking three at a time and find a door at the top of the stairs. You pull out your lockpicks and begin to jimmy the door. Within seconds you hear the lock 'click' and you slide inside closing the door behind you. You hear a creak and some sniffling sounds somewhere in the room. It's very dark, all of the windows are shuttered, and you negotiate the room by sound and touch rather than lighting a lamp and giving yourself away.\n\n\nFollowing behind your sword, you investigate the dark room and try to track the noise before someone or something gets the drop on you. When the sound is made again, you rush to the wall ripping off a tapestry and see a that it hides a small doorway. You open it in a flash, sword back to provide a fatal stab. To your surprise a young girl, perhaps sixteen years in age is in hiding.\n\n\nYou look at her frightened face, streaked with tears and the knowledge that none of her family made it through whatever happened downstairs. She screams at the sudden discovery and scrambles as far back in the hidden compartment as she can go. You curse your luck and say, \"Be quiet girl! I'm not here to hurt you! Pray you haven't woken the neighborhood!\"\n\n\nYou quickly move away from the whimpering girl and check the windows. Sure enough two Turric Swordsmen and a Wardog are on the prowl. The dog starts to bark and drag the two soldiers towards the house.\n\n\n\"Shit!\" You hiss and move back to the secret compartment. Pulling up the tapestry you tell the girl, \"No matter what you do, no matter what you hear, do not leave this compartment for the next few hours unless you hear me say 'Defender'.\" You slide a dagger her way and say, \"And no matter what, don't let them take you alive, if this place is discovered, if this flap is opened and they try to take you, slice your throat, plunge this into your chest but don't let them take you out of here. No matter what!\"\n\n\nYou close the hidden door, drop the tapestry, close and lock the door to the first floor, and hide behind a desk. When those bastards come through they're going to pay dearly.\n\n\nThe sound of heavy boots tromping up the stairs follow a barking dog. They try the lock, try it again, and then start trying to bash the door in. The door survives four solid charges before the door rips off of the hinges and the men and beast rush in swords drawn.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill the Dog First", "result": "You realize that the hound is going to be a noisy, dangerous problem and so you resolve to end that issue first. As soon as the trio of enemies rush into the room you pop up from behind the desk and throw three throwing knives at the beast. The first knife goes wide and lands knee level in the wooden wall, but the second catches in the jaw bursting it's teeth and jutting through it's muzzle, and the third smashes in the flanks sticking through it's hind quarter. The beast yelps pitiably and staggers backwards incapacitated.\n\n\nThe beast howls and you leap over the table drawing both of your short blades. In close quarter fighting, your short swords and stabbing style will be a good match against the barbed scimitars the Turrics favor which require wide fast swings.\n\n\nThe first Turric swings high and you duck and deflect the first blade while reversing your spin and cutting the soldier's leg off at the knee. The second swings towards your midriff but you tumble and his swing lodges in his already injured partner's ribs.\n\n\nYou crouch and then spring low stabbing the second soldier's foot and slicing his sword arm off at the wrist. The second soldier screams and tries to stagger backwards but his foot is pinned to the floor. Rising you pull the blade free and jut the short blade up into his stomach pushing under his ribs until the blade pierces his heart and blood runs down his armor like a burst dike.\n\n\nAs he falls back, you turn to the hound. You hate to kill such a noble beast but it was now time to end it's pain. A quick reversal of your swords sets up a downward thrust that pierces it's brain and severs it's spine. The hound collapses with a quiver.\n\n\nYou wipe your swords on a soldier's sleeve and place them again on your back. You then collect your throwing knives and search the soldiers for anything they carry you can use. You ignore their damaged armor, barbed scimitars, and top-heavy daggers and instead collect their coin pouches. Thirty Silvers later, you check the windows. You are relived to see that there is no further action in the streets.\n\n\nDo you:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go into the Basement?", "result": "You hurry downwards, using the stairs to enter the basement. At the bottom of the stairs is a cellar door. It opens easily into a pitch black room. You back up and decide to light your lantern.\n\n\nNow with a fresh light source, and broad sword in your other hand you begin to explore the room. The basement is dark and eerie, filled with boxes and other items of storage, small terra cotta statues, paintings and furniture with tarps over them, extra sets of candles, piles of clothes, and other errata fill the shelves, cabinets, and wall spaces.\n\n\nYou figure that if you were to hide here, you'd probably be able to get the jump on any who entered here but you'd be trapped if there were multiple opponents. You reason you could probably take two swordsmen without difficulty but a larger group would be problematic.\n\n\nDo you:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Search the Basement", "result": "You decide to search the basement. You comb through the boxes, look through the shelves, and rifle through the cabinets looking for something that could help you with your escape from the city. As you are searching, you hear some noises coming from above. Quickly you duck and blow out your lantern.\n\n\nYou can now light your lantern 2 More times.\n\n\nTense moments pass but the sounds cease. after ten minutes you feel safe enough to try looking again. After about a half of an hour you have accumulated everything that might be of interest to you. It isn't much but these people were obviously merchants, not warriors and as such didn't store any warrior items.\n\n\nYou find:\n\nLantern Oil: Useful for lighting your lantern 3 extra times.", "action_results": [{"action": "Crash here.", "result": "You're tired, you've had a long afternoon and you have found somewhere to crash. You hope that this place is safe enough but in a city under siege, no where is truly safe. You find a little corner amongst the clutter and nestle in as best as you can.\n\n\nYou place your broadsword to your side within easy reach and thank the gods you have your modified light chainmail. It's very comfortable to sleep in, especially compared to most armors. Covering yourself with a blanket you slip easily into the demesne of sleep.\n\n\nTEST YOUR LUCK: Pick a number between 1 and 3.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "1", "result": "You sleep fitfully, your dreams filled with nightmares that involve you being caught by the Turric, held down, and cut into pieces and fed to wardogs with fiery eyes. Several times you jump awake and look about yourself hoping you haven't been discovered and sit for several minutes straining your ears for phantom noises but eventually give up the search and head right back into another nightmare. You aren't discovered but you really don't feel rested when you awake.\n\n\nFrustrated when you awake, you grumpily gather your few belongings and head back out into the city. It is now NIGHT.", "action_results": [{"action": "NIGHT: Creeping in the Darkness", "result": "You wait until nightfall and begin to make your journey flitting from alley to alleyway and make good progress though you occasionally have to see nightmares, at one intersection you see Turric soldiers by a scaffold where then men and women; soldiers and civilians both, are being hanged. You cringe as the men slap the horses underneath the victims and the prisoners are left to dangle helplessly in the air struggling as their weight begins to choke them to death. It takes over three minutes before the last of the men stops twitching, leaving the bodies swinging in the air.\n\n\nYou move on helpless to alter the events of the sacking of the city. Stepping from an alleyway you later see hundreds of Turric soldiers leading hundreds more prisoners down a broad street towards whatever grim fate awaits them. You turn back and enter a building through a window moving across the floor and exiting out the other side. Most of the buildings have by now been ransacked.\n\n\nYou exit out of the other end and creep into the next street. You immediately flatten against the wall as you see a Turric Deathwarden steering a group of hellhounds down the street. The flaming hounds are barking and growling but don't catch your scent. Taking a deep breath, you wait for the Deathwarden to pass and sprint for the next street.\n\n\nFinally, after over two hours have passed, you arrive at a massive barricade. The barricade is manned by a holdout group of Essitrean soldiers each holding crossbows. There have to be dozens of them all on watch. The bodies of hundreds of Turric soldiers lie scattered in the streets around the barricade though it's obvious the Essitreans are wounded and exhausted.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join them", "result": "You pull your contract and slowly move towards the Essitreans making sure that you hold the contract high so that the tired and trigger happy soldiers don't mistake you for the enemy. As you enter into their line of sight, you hear the guards call out, \"Halt and identify yourself or you'll be shot on sight!\"\n\n\nYou enter into the torchlight and call out, I'm Sebastian, a mercenary serving under the Essitrean flag, here is my lawful contract. I wish to join you.\"\n\n\nThe men aren't much moved but a voice calls through the barricade, \"Sebastian? By the Gods you're still alive? Boys, let her in, she's a friendly.\"\n\n\nYou jog across the street looking both ways for any enemy snipers or troops and enter a small gate and go beyond the barricades. The gate is closed quickly behind you. The situation behind the barricades is worse than you would have imagined, with dozens of troops injured or dead, scorch marks from enemy mages, and decapitated undead minions lying like wheat after the harvest.\n\n\nA soldier approaches you and offers you a handclasp. You recognize him as Captain Krayler, a stern but effective commander whose forces numbered a full company, scarcely three platoons exist now and you see that by daylight only two dozen men will still be clinging to life. His face is grim and streaked with blood and dirt. he says, \"What is the situation in the city beyond.\"\n\n\nYou reply, \"The city is lost, the Turric are killing and rounding up anyone they find and Deathwardens, Vanguards, and Deathmagi wander the streets at will.Those who aren't killed or turned into the Walking Dead are being turned into slaves. I'm sorry Commander.\"\n\n\nHe nods and said, \"I was expecting as much. The tide of refugees has thinned and you've been the first person we haven't had to fight in three hours. This is a tragedy, we watch the death of my beautiful home and the birth of another Turric Enclave. Such a blasphemy to the gods should have never been seen.\"\n\n\nYou nod.\n\n\nHe says, \" I know you are tired and hungry, let me offer you some scant supplies and then we'll talk further.\"\n\n\nYou are led to a chow table, mostly chunks of bread and a few sips of water from a canteen before he leads you to a chair. You have a seat and instantly the weight of the night descends upon your weary bones. The captain brings you a tightly wrapped scroll and says, \"Bast, you've always been a reputable mercenary, I need someone I can trust with an important mission. I need you to take this scroll and this boy. He is the heir to Essitrea's throne. Though his home has been lost he can keep the noble lineage flowing and can rally any escapees under the Essitrean Banner so that one day we can take this place back. I need you to take him with you to the gates. Can you do this for me?\"\n\n\nYou ponder your options:", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the Boy and Scroll", "result": "You nod, this was a grave task. \"I will be proud to serve the throne, Sir. I will take the young lord and deliver him safely to his men outside the gate.\" \n\n\nThe Commander nods and points to one of his men, and from a tent they bring forward a richly dressed but dirty faced little boy of about ten Summers old. Blood stains the front of his clothes but he appears uninjured. He wields a short sword uncertainly and there is both fear and stout resolution in his eyes. The boy looks you up and down, \"I am to go with this lady?\"\n\n\nYou look to the captain who says, \"Yes, Milord, Sebastian is an experienced and wise warrior and your best hope from henceforth, follow her, do what she says, and rebuild our city. Remember those who died for it.\"\n\n\nThe Lordling nods and says, \"I am honored to make your acquaintance Sebastian. Take my horse Arbalest he is a true steed meant for a warrior. The white pony is my own mount Bayerus.\"\n\n\nThe Commander smiled and said, \"Well that's that. We'll hold the wall, we are the last hope for anyone to try and escape this blasted place. I wish you luck Sebastian.\" You salute and turn to head for the gates.\n\n\nYou begin the last part of the journey even as you hear behind you, \"Ready men, here they come!!!\"\n\n\nThe sound of battle rings out behind you as you gallop for the Only gate left in the city still controlled by Essitrean forces. The last that you see of the captains forces is the zombies overwhelming the barricades.\n\n\nLess than fifteen minutes later you arrive at the gates with the Lordling. Men snap to salute as you and the Lord Ride out of the city into the countryside. You know not where the future lies but you realize that you have found the only candle of hope in the darkness that falls over the city of Essitrea.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Refuse and Go it yourself", "result": "You decide to refuse the offer and exit the barricade choosing to make it on your own.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head to another part of the city.", "result": "You decide to head to another part of the city and are flitting from building to building when you see a massive attack by Turric troops to your left. To your right an explosion rocks the streets and ahead, you see a Deathmagus and his Vanguard accompanied by a horde of undead. You are spotted by the Deathmagus down the streets and you turn to run, there are just too many of them. At first you try to retreat and go back to the barricades but another explosion collapses the buildings around you.\n\n\nYou are now faced with running into mass combat, into the necromancer or down the alley where an explosion just occurred. You run down the alleyway and lose sight of the Deathmagus and the battle but run into a mass of Turric reinforcements. You are trapped. You retreat and are now surrounded by the three forces.\n\n\nYou resign yourself to a death by the sword. Choosing the least dangerous option, you run into the mass combat. The chaos of arrows, swordfighting, and bodies moving en mass make the situation deadly. You duck, twist, and dodge through the massive melee. Unfortunately, you are struck by an random arrow and then tripped by the boot of a running soldier who is quickly killed by a crossbow bolt. You try to rise but watch as a roiling ball of flame explodes incinerating those around you.\n\n\nAnother explosion takes a building out and it collapses showering stone and mortar over the street. You are caught be a falling piece of rubble the size of a horse and it lands on your leg. You try to free it but another explosion demolishes the next building and it collapses and sprays more stone upon you. You are killed by a falling brick that turns your head into a read smear.\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!!!", "action_results": [{"action": "A Horrible Awakening", "result": "Blackness.\n\n\nYour mind is cloudy and hazy.\n\n\nPain. You feel pain.\n\n\nFlashes of sound burst in the distance. You slowly feel awareness coming back, the world leaking back into coherent form. You are in so much pain. Around you you hear familiar sounds: Screaming, the butchery of men, the agony of rape, buildings burning, children screaming, and the cheers of the victors.\n\n\n\"Where am I?\" You think to yourself. Slowly you move your fingers, then your toes. A soft moan issues from somewhere around you. You realize it is you and you begin to make your stiff body begin to move again. First one arm, then your leg, then you slowly lift up and look around.\n\n\nYou think hard to remove the fuzziness of the recent events from the corners of your mind and concentrate on survival. \"I've got a concussion.\" You conclude.\n\n\nFinally, you peer through the dense smoke and realize that you are in a crater, the bodies of men, horses, and weapons of war surround you. The acrid smell of burning flesh mixed with the tinny smell of blood, the pain in your head, and the entrails of the man you ran beside all make you vomit.\n\n\nStrangely, you feel just a little bit better and your head is starting to clear, \"I'm Sebastian, a mercenary, I chose to defend the city of Essitrea against the Turric . I don't think we won... I think I'd better get the hell out of here!\"\n\n\nLooking around you a sturdy broadsword sticks out from a body of a Turric soldier, you recognize the blade as yours. You stagger over to the soldier and with effort pull the blade free from the man's corpse.\n\n\nNow armed, you know you've got to get out but amidst the rubble and the ruffians running amok, the sounds of battle in the air, and the thudding of artillery, every step could be your last.\n\n\nYou decide quickly that you can either run building to building a fast method of travel but with heavy odds of discovery; try to enter the sewers, an obviously unsanitary means to travel but with less likelihood of discovery, or you can try to hole up in the nearest building and wait for the action to die down.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Sewer Crawl", "result": "The sewers of Essitrea are known as dangerous places because of sickening garbage, diseased creatures, and rogues who operate within it's demesnes. A place without laws, the sewers often cough up bodies into the lake every month or so. However, compared to the world above, the sewers seem like a dream.\n\n\nYou duck into a pocket of ruins and smoke and look for a manhole cover. It takes you several minutes and you have to dodge several roving bands of Turric Raiders but you eventually find and alley and prop open a manhole. Seconds later you slip inside and pull it over your head.\n\n\nThe crawl down into darkness makes the world above muffled and the liquidy darkness below echoes with the hollow ring of the tunnels below.\n\n\nFinally you touch bottom. Looking around you, you see a dim light in a big tunnel to the south and a overwhelming darkness in the tunnel to the north. You've a small lantern but it's glow is sure to attract the curious, just as it might ward away other survivors trying merely to remain unseen. Either way you need to make a decision.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go south towards the dim light.", "result": "You decide to go towards the light, as you move you begin to hear voices, hushed voices that whisper quietly. As you approach you see a group of huddled figures cowering under the light of a single covered lantern. They gasp as they see you and begin to flee but stay when they realize that you aren't an enemy soldier. \n\n\nPassing the non-combatants, you move deeper into the tunnel. Rats and cockroaches skitter over your feet as you move around sludge and piles of fallen debris deeper into the cavernous tunnels. You arrive at a 'T' intersection and face a choice Right or Left. Both are dark and you know that you will have to light your lantern to continue forward.\n\n\nDo you:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the Right Tunnel", "result": "You've been following the right tunnel for about thirty minutes with your lantern projecting light through the darkness. You are pretty creeped out because you know that as far as you can see with the light, those you approach can see the light radiating five times farther. You see shadows flitting around you, the squeek of rats, the clicking of roaches and spiders, the awful ugly smell of garbage piles, the occasional stench of something that died in the tunnels, and hear the occasional yowl or hiss of something larger lurking within.\n\n\nThe sewers are like a labyrinth of connecting tunnels with pipes spewing filthy water into the sluices of carved out rovers in the bottoms of the mazework. Occasionally grates ooze with seaweed like funguses and patches of mold make the slick damp walls furry.\n\n\nYou reach a place where the water splashes down a hole that drops into the darkness. Over the hole is a grate. Unfortunately the tunnel stops at this point. You realize that you've hit a dead end.\n\n\nTurning around with a silent curse, you spot a manlike form approaching you. You raise the lantern and hear a shriek. Before you are three Nuppers, ugly grey creatures that look like furless chimpanzees with heavily armored knuckles. their white sightless eyes and razor sharp teeth remind you that these scavengers are deadly to lone travelers even though they are by nature cowardly.\n\n\nYou try to decide whether you want to go into ranged combat against the fast moving Nuppers or go into melee combat.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go melee with Swords", "result": "You charge the Nuppers with your broadsword and swipe across the waist. The first Nupper leaps up into the air over the slowly moving blade and punches you hard in the chest. You whirl around and execute a downward slice at a second Nupper which rolls backwards. From your back a Nupper kicks you forward with a two clawed foot to the head.\n\n\nYou realize that the Broadsword is too slow and you drop it and pull your short swords but you take another hit to the side from a gnarled fist. You swing to meet it and catch it across the throat causing a burst of black blood to fly free as it staggers back and falls into the sewage sluice and is swept away in the current down the hole.\n\n\nYou scarcely have time to react before a Nupper kicks your knee causing it to buckle and twist taking you to the ground. Both beasts immediately leap on you and you block a bite to your face even as the second bites your thigh ripping away a chunk of flesh. You scream and stab ineffectively at the one on your chest as the bottom one rips into your stomach.\n\n\nAnother stab kills the one on your chest when you shove your blade into it's neck so that your blade pierces through it's skull. The rip in your stomach widens as the bottom beast rips into your intestines. Blood spurts from your mouth in frothy red bubbles as you see your intestines get ripped out of your body. Your swords fall limp and clatter on the ground.\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Fight at range with Daggers", "result": "You slip your throwing knives out of their sheathes and let them fly, the first blade is deflected by a quick moving Nupper but the other slides into his chest. It staggers back a bit s you loose three more and dodge a Nupper who leaps high, swings off a pipeline and aims for a kick to the head.\n\n\nYou spin away and throw three knives into his back. It yowls in pain and staggers forward. Meanwhile you dodge another Nupper with a quick flying fist. Spinning around him you pull your dagger and another throwing blade. Before you can launch your strike you sidestep the Nupper with a knife in it's chest and slash it's furless arm with your dagger. It retreats a bit holding onto it's injured arm and you turn and throw a knife at the Nupper with three knives in it's back. Another knife sticks in it and it staggers and falls.\n\n\nYou face an uninjured Nupper and one with a knife blade and a deep arm slash. You circle for position before launching two throwing knives at the injured one. It blocks the first blade which goes whizzing off into the darkness. The second is blocked by his other arm and the throwing blade sinks deep into the uninjured arm.\n\n\nYou cheer inwardly as it retreats in pain. However you quickly have to duck under a swing from the uninjured Nupper. You duck at an angle and slice upward leaving a slash across it's stomach.\n\n\nIt reverses it's stance and punches with it's left grazing your chin which feels as if it were hit by a brick. Luckily you don't lose a step and push forward imbedding your dagger deep into it's forearm. It now howls in pain and you execute a spinning kick that knocks it off of the ledge into the draining sluice. It disappears into the dark swirling muck and flows down the hole into the darkness.\n\n\nThe last Nupper is intimidated and decides to flee. Collecting your throwing daggers you realize that two are gone forever. You are happy to be alive but feel much less armed that before.\n\n\nYou spend the next hour navigating the mazes back to the 'T' Intersection and face a choice of which way to go.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the Left Tunnel", "result": "You head down the left tunnel hoping that you can find an easy way out of the city. On your way you encounter masses of garbage, some piled twenty feet high. You worry about the roaches and rats that scurry with increasing frequency around you. The already horrid stench somehow worsens and becomes almost unbearable as flies swarm over every inch of this place. You see several bodies in various stages of decomposition, most are animals, some are human.\n\n\nYou are bitten by a large horsefly and swat it away painfully.\n\n\nYou see nothing but garbage and sewage ahead and are unsure that you are willing to continue any further, however you figure if you don't want to go down here, no one else might want to either. It's probably abandoned by soldiers and all but the most desperate refugees.\n\n\nDo you:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue into the Trashlands", "result": "You delve deeper into the Trashlands, the piles of garbage are disgusting and you try to avoid climbing through as much as you can, however, you cut your hand on a broken bottle, get bitten repeatedly by vicious biting flies, and slide down a hill of slippery rotten fruit and cash into a broken wooden crate banging up your ankle.\n\n\nDespite this, you encounter no solders or any other form of humanoid life for the next fifteen minutes. The animals, on the other hand are awful and ever present. Roaches as big as your fist, horseflies that are as big as coins and horribly aggressive and vicious, fruit flies that buzz in an ever present haze, rats the size of cats, several small snakes, maggots galore, and even several rabid wild dogs.\n\n\nFinally, after an hour you are rounding a massive trash heap and you see a massive rat the size of a warthog. It snuffles in the garbage and surrounding it are five other rats the size of cats as well as dozens of junkyard rats at least a foot long.\n\n\nYou try to avoid them and move on without incident.\n\n\npick a color:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Red", "result": "You try to avoid the rat swarm but they spot you after you accidentally kick a can hidden in the muck. Drawing your throwing knives you pick off three cat sized rats before they close on you. You back up and throw two more knives as the swarm reaches you. The knives pierce the other cat-sized rats and they lie quivering in the morass as you take repeated bites by the junkyard rats.\n\n\nYou'd like to try to swat them off but you are attacked by the Warthog sized Rat and have to pull your short blades. You dodge a charge by the rat and plunge your sword in it's back as three other rats take chunks of your ankles. You back slice one out of the air cutting it in half. The other sword blocks a bite from the King Rat and you reverse the sword to cut a slice it's mouth.\n\n\nYou are now being bitten by dozens of rats and you are near the point of panicking so you dive and roll across some broken stones. It hurts like hell but most of the rats scatter and you roll to your feet having crushed three during the tumble.\n\n\nYou circle for position and the king rat charges again nearly biting your hand but you pull it away at the last second and stab the beast through it's neck. The beast squeals loudly and you jerk the blade and pull it up trying to sever everything in it's throat. Despite the gory wound, it twists and rips the blade out of your blood-slicked hand.\n\n\nIt retreats several feet with blood forming rivers on it's matted fur. The lesser rats are swarming towards you so you pull two more knives and toss them striking one in the brain and skewering it like a pig on a spit. You then turn and run up a mound of trash and kick rubbish down upon them. Most of the rats dodge but one is hit by a falling brick.\n\n\nYou have now become crazily desperate and you throw your lantern into the pile of trash which lights up the tunnel as the gas accumulated in the sewers explodes violently. All the rats squeal as the flames engulf them and spreads into the tunnel. Unfortunately, you also are severely burned by the explosion.\n\n\nAs the flames wipe out everything in the tunnels, you hear explosions and see manhole covers explode in the distance popping them out into the streets. Only luck keeps you from being incinerated. Even so, you are knocked several dozen feet backwards and land in a pile of old dresses.\n\n\nYou wake up hours later in severe pain, barely able to stand and look around you. The lantern you used is gone but piles of trash still burn brightly enough that you can make your way staggering forward and out of Trashland. Finally you climb up the ladder to the surface and venture out into the streets.\n\n\nYou are a horror, covered with shit and garbage, slathered with blood and oozing sores, your hair burned to the roots and still smoking, and your gear and clothing burned to the quick, still you live and that has to count for something...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Black", "result": "You try to avoid the rat swarm but they spot you after you accidentally kick a can hidden in the muck. Drawing your throwing knives you pick off three cat sized rats before they close on you. You back up and throw two more knives as the swarm reaches you. The knives pierce the other cat-sized rats and they lie quivering in the morass as you take repeated bites by the junkyard rats.\n\n\n \n\nYou'd like to try to swat them off but you are attacked by the Warthog sized Rat and have to pull your short blades. You dodge a charge by the rat and plunge your sword in it's back as three other rats take chunks of your ankles. You back slice one out of the air cutting it in half. The other sword blocks a bite from the King Rat and you reverse the sword to cut a slice it's mouth.\n\n\n \n\nYou are now being bitten by dozens of rats and you are near the point of panicking so you dive and roll across some broken stones. It hurts like hell but most of the rats scatter and you roll to your feet having crushed three during the tumble.\n\n\n \n\nYou circle for position and the king rat charges again nearly biting your hand but you pull it away at the last second and stab the beast through it's neck. The beast squeals loudly and you jerk the blade and pull it up trying to sever everything in it's throat. Despite the gory wound, it twists and rips the blade out of your blood-slicked hand.\n\n\n \n\nIt retreats several feet with blood forming rivers on it's matted fur. The lesser rats are swarming towards you so you pull two more knives and toss them striking one in the brain and skewering it like a pig on a spit. You then turn and run up a mound of trash and kick rubbish down upon them. Most of the rats dodge but one is hit by a falling brick.\n\n\n \n\nAll of a sudden you ear a growl from behind you and you turn to see a rat the size of a horse. you barely have time to curse before the rat descends upon you and with one bite saws you in half.\n\n\n \n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!!!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Blue", "result": "You are sure that you will be discovered but you hide anyway. \"Hell, I smell and look like garbage anyways, might as well settle in and ride this out.\" you think and squeeze into a pile of rotted melons. The goo of the nasty fruit slops on your pretty face but you hold your breath and count to one thousand.\n\n\nAfter this time has passed, you take a peek around the corner and see that the rats seem to have moved on. You creep forward and seem to be making great progress until you bump into a massive rat the size of a horse. The Emperor Rat rushes you and you jump to the side just in time to duck the onrushing rat.\n\n\nYou collect yourself and roll up with your Broadsword as it turns towards you with malice in it;s red eyes. You taunt it and wave it forwards and it obliges rushing you as you dive to the right bringing up your broadsword and giving the beast a nasty slice down it's ribcage.\n\n\nIt doesn't stop there as it turns and tries to bite but you block it's bite with your sword which is torn from your grasp. Nevertheless, you pull your twin short swords. and meet snapping jaws that slaver with frothy saliva. It's massive eyes are red in the darkness and lantern light, it's teeth are like yellow stakes thrown in randomly in rolling black gums. You stab to the left and it tries to snap off your rest, this is when you slick with your right cutting into it's skull but the blade doesn't penetrate the bone.\n\n\nYou circle for position and back away noticing a crowd of beady red eyes watching the fight intently. You nearly slip and get bitten by a snap from the massive jaws, and you thrust your blade into it's mouth cutting deep into it's gums before quickly withdrawing and pacing back several feet. It charges and you roll through rotten vegetables into an upright stance thrusting deeply into the rat's flank and slicing it's ten foot long tail with your other sword. It whips around and headbutts you knocking you off your feet but you roll backwards and land in a crouch. Just as sudden, it is upon you bowling you over and scampering over your body like being hit by a bison, however aside from superficial scratches you emerge unharmed and slice it's leg as it hurtlles past you and begins to turn.\n\n\nThis is when you run and jump on it's back and plunge both blades deep into it's back. The rat bucks like a bronco and you are tossed and banged around but you still hold the blades and your weight creates ghastly tears in it's flesh. Finally, you are flung into a pile of crates and smash through them. You stagger to your feet and see the bloodied rat trying frantically to dislodge the twin swords you have planted deep into it's upper shoulders.\n\n\nTaking out throwing knives, you fling one after the other in rapid succession, ten in all, two bounce free, one sticks in it's ribs, two in it's face, two in it's ribs, one in it's rear legs, one slices the tail and lands hilt deep in a watermelon, and the last sticks into it's belly. Pulling your knives you rush to press the initiative whirling the silver blades into the Emperor Rat's body, stabbing, thrusting, and slashing the massive beast like a wild painter splashing paint across a canvas. Blood flies and the rat whirls and struggles under your mad assault. Finally, it limps, stumbles, and crashes to the floor.\n\n\nPicking up your Broadsword, you level the blade against the dying beast's neck and with a heavy downward slive, sever the vertebrae and decapitate the beast. It's head rolls free and you see the intelligence of the creature dim as it's lifeblood spurts free from his neck in weakening pulses.\n\n\nYou lean against the body to catch your breath and listen to the chittering of the multitudes of rats hiding in the darkness. Then, you lean forward and begin pulling the blades that turned the rat into a porcupine. Finally, you have collected your weapons and walk forward into the tunnels. The rats create space for you and none approaches as you move past them. After you have made it perhaps twenty feet from the body, the rats swarm their former leader and the Emperor Rat disappears under a carpet of writhing bodies.\n\n\nPerhaps fifteen minutes later you find a ladder to the surface and climb it.\n\n\nNight has descended across the city and even with all of the chaos and danger you face, you've never taken a sweeter breath of air.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Green", "result": "You are worried about the creatures in the tunnel but are still caught by surprise when a burst of writhing tentacles from some unseen monster slithers into the air. Each tentacle is riddled with barbed suckers that slurp hungrily even as slime drips from the sucking mouths. You watch as a rat is picked up by a randomly flailing tentacle and is devoured in seconds as the tentacle wraps around the body, coats it with slime, and breaks it's bone. Soon the rat vanishes in the writing mass.\n\n\nYou've encountered a Wyrux, a tentacled monster with up to fifty tentacles that is renown for it's deadly paralytic slime, bruising strength, and voracious and unending appetite. You quickly cut a nearing pseudopod, duck under a sweeping large tentacle, and jump over a third. Pulling your short swords you hack at an offending limb, cut through another that is grappling a corpse of a dog, and roll to avoid another.\n\n\nRunning at full speed, your aim isn't to defeat the creature, it's to escape without being caught. Such a fate would equal a grim death and you don't want to die in the belly of a landsquid.\n\n\nYou duck a tentacle that is as wide as a tree trunk and lie flat when a smaller faster one reaches for your head. Rolling down a trash heap you land at the bottom and burst towards the exit of the tunnel.\n\n\nDucking an overhead slam, you roll and dive through a grate and kick the lever. The grate smashes down on several tentacles and you regain your feet and burst into a sprint down the sewer. Finally, you see a ladder up to the manholes that are on the street level. Bursting free, you exit into a maze of alleyways, and making sure no one sees you, replace the manhole cover and move onwards into the city. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Use the Back Alleys", "result": "You begin sneaking through the back alleys and slipping from shadow to shadow. This is your element and with the aid of the city's confusion and the dark places, you easily slip by several squads of Turric soldiers. You see some of the street thugs still trying to make their plays but for the most part, your heavily armed figure makes everyone back away.\n\n\nYou at one point run into a gang of looters grabbing anything they can find and throwing rocks at the Turric soldiers that approach. In the badlands of Essitrea, the city hasn't yet been conquered and fighting continues street to street. You have to duck some firebombs and skirt through the rear of a full out melee between club wielding ruffians and a small group of soldiers.\n\n\nFinally you make it through the thicket and you duck into an inn. Looking around you grab a drink and some food and then make your way out a window. You hit another alley and begin running when you see a Deathmagus (Turric Necromancer) and a horde of Turric Vanguards (Heavily armored Undead knights).\n\n\nDucking and dodging from crate to crate you finally slip free of the ghetto and leave the alleys behind. Though you are relieved that you've made it out of the alleys, you see before you a large view of the city at large, smoke billowing from the buildings, mass melees in the streets, and fiery stones flying both to and from the city. Several of the walls are crushed and Turric soldiers pour in like Red ants while Blue Essitrean ants try their best to fend them off. The numbers don't look good and you see blasts of spells being bandied too and fro on the city streets.\n\n\nYou decide to have none of it. You move into a small side street and head for a place where the warfare seems lightest.\n\n\nTo your left you see the remains of an old inn you and your fellow mercenaries drank at days before the assault. You duck in and grab a shot from a whiskey bottle on the shelf and steel yourself then head back into the city.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Keep Moving.", "result": "You decide to keep moving and move from one alley to the next. To your left a Turric soldier punches a man in the stomach while his partner slaps his comely women. The man goes down and tries to struggle as he is kicked. The woman's blouse is ripped by the other soldier and she is slammed against the alley wall. Laughing, the first Turric soldier stabs the man in the shoulder and grabs the woman's breast as her boyfriend struggles to save her honor even while bleeding.\n\n\nDo you:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Intervene and stop the rape?", "result": "Fed up with the senseless violence, especially against the innocent, you rush forward loosing two throwing knives at the soldier who stabbed the man. They smack into his arm and neck and he reels screaming like a stuck pig. Before they can even turn you leap into the air and get to work with your two short blades. You bound and stab the already knifed soldier in his shoulder driving the blade deep within his flesh and driving the blade's point into his beating heart.\n\n\nThe rapist turns and tries to draw his blade but you whirl and cut his hand off at the wrist and then swing low amputating his foot. As he falls to the ground you loom over him casting a long shadow. He cries like a child as you slowly, slowly push the point of your short sword into his groin and lean into the sword. The agony on his face is mixed with the bright arterial blood arcing all over the alleyway. \"Rape steel bitch,\" you whisper to him as you look deep into his eyes with your own silver ones.\n\n\nJust for spite, you finish him off with a crunching twist that causes his limbs to spasm epileptically before he falls motionless.\n\n\nLooking at the pair of victims you growl, \"Get off of the streets and make sure you don't let anyone make you victims again.\" You raise the man up with his good shoulder and then bandage him up as best as you can. These kills were the most satisfying you've had in quite awhile and you continue your escape with a better feeling in your gut. You can't save them all but this felt like a good victory.\n\n\nBefore you can celebrate, you see a full squad of Turric Swordmen and a Deathmagus with two Vanguards. You have only scant time to choose an option: duck back in the sewers, fight the group, or retreat.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Fight the Group", "result": "Disregarding the odds, you attack the group. You charge from the corner and aim an attack at the Deathmagus, killing him will be the easiest answer. You are upon the mass before they can even react and lop the head of a Swordsman before spinning and cutting the leg off of another swordsman, and thumping a third with the butt of your sword. He falls unconsciously with a broken nose. \n\n\nSwords are coming out as you thrust your broadblade into the last swordsman in the group. However, as you try to bring your sword to bear against the Deathmagus, your chop with the broadsword is caught by the Vanguards protecting him. These armored undead cross their swords and block the blade and then twist their blades and your broadsword flies out of your grasp and clatters on the streets.\n\n\nYou roll back and throw three throwing knives at the Deathmagus and the Vanguard block two of the blades but the last slips past their guard and strikes the necromancer in the arm. He screams and backs away holding the injured arm while his henchmen advance. You duck a Falchion slash and roll past a downward chop.\n\n\nComing up past their guard, you toss three blades at the Deathmagus and two more strike home, one in his chest and one in his hand as he tries to ward you off. The blade sinks to the hilt. He screams again and tries to retreat as the Vanguard, slower than you are turn and slash at you. You are quicker and pull your twin short swords and charge him planting your blades deep in his chest!\n\n\nThe necromancer falls and lands in a heap and behind you, the Vanguards halt and freeze then their armor collapses and falls into twin piles on the street. The bodies once inhabiting the armor blow away in the dust.\n\n\nYou cannot believe you just scored such a tremendous victory!\n\n\nYou take a moment to collect yourself and then smiling to yourself you head back into the streets. Night has fallen and you use the encroaching darkness to hide your form.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Retreat", "result": "You retreat and let the large group pass. You decide that it's probably better to wait until nightfall before continuing, the streets are just to populated. You retreat to a blast crater which has a shelf that can hide you and wait for darkness to fall. Gradually, the night descends and you make your way back into the streets. ", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Yellow", "result": "You are worried about the creatures in the tunnel but are still caught by surprise when a burst of writhing tentacles from some unseen monster slithers into the air. Each tentacle is riddled with barbed suckers that slurp hungrily even as slime drips from the sucking mouths. You watch as a rat is picked up by a randomly flailing tentacle and is devoured in seconds as the tentacle wraps around the body, coats it with slime, and breaks it's bone. Soon the rat vanishes in the writing mass.\n\n\nYou've encountered a Wyrux, a tentacled monster with up to fifty tentacles that is renown for it's deadly paralytic slime, bruising strength, and voracious and unending appetite. You quickly cut a nearing pseudopod, duck under a sweeping large tentacle, and jump over a third. Pulling your short swords you hack at an offending limb, cut through another that is grappling a corpse of a dog, and roll to avoid another.\n\n\nRunning at full speed, your aim isn't to defeat the creature, it's to escape without being caught. Such a fate would equal a grim death and you don't want to die in the belly of a landsquid.\n\n\nYou duck a tentacle that is as wide as a tree trunk and lie flat when a smaller faster one reaches for your head. Rolling down a trash heap you land at the bottom and burst towards the exit of the tunnel. Then, horribly, you feel your ankle get tripped up by a lumbering tentacle that bursts out of the ground. You try to roll to your feet but your foot is covered in slime and you can't feel it any longer. A small, fifteen foot long tentacle wraps around your leg and begins dragging you backwards. You scream and kick and you are lifted into the air and begin to dangle upside down. You watch as several of your knives fall free from your clothing and you scream as the tentacle constrict your legs and you hear them 'pop!'.\n\n\nBlood squirts out of your leg as the bones roll and crack and another tentacle latches onto your arm. You fight feebly with a sword as the other falls twenty feet to the ground. This last hope is erased as yet another tentacle grabs your last free arm and rips it off. Blood geysers as you watch your arm disappear into the Wyrux's hungry maw.\n\n\nYou resign yourself to death as the creature's main body bursts from the ground and you are fed into the creature's mouth...\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!!!", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Light your lantern and go north.", "result": "You light your lantern and head North. The darkness is cloying and seems to fight the feeble light offered by your lantern. You see shapes and shadows flitting from the corners and scraping up the pipes, crevices, and tunnels you pass. You continue trying to reach the edge of the city and get out alive. The sewers are disgusting and you have to walk around piles of trash, the occasional corpse, and loads of excrement. \n\n\nThe filth only grows as you travel. You have to cross a span of wood only a foot wide and over ten feet long over a crevice that drops into pitch blackness. At one time, you dodge a small mass of rats as they flee from one tunnel to the next. Several minutes later, you see a rabid pack of dogs chewing on the corpses of a family that tried to flee into the tunnels.\n\n\nYou have to climb into the pipes so as to avoid swimming in pools of filth that sludged towards a whirlpool sucking the filth down a broad pipe. Crossing to the other side, you see a skull. Followed by a skeleton of a dog, this was followed by another smaller pile of animal bones, and even more bones following that. You smell the stench of death ahead and you are starting to feel the prickles of your hair rising on the nape of your neck. You know danger is nearby. This is accentuated by the sound of something slurping and cracking what sounds like bones.\n\n\nYou are starting to wonder if heading this way is a good idea, perhaps you should turn around and retreat to the South.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Press on!", "result": "Unaffected by fear, you pull your broadsword with one hand and hold the lantern ahead of you and press on. After several dozen feet, you are now walking on a carpet of bones that crackle and shift under your feet. You reach a corner going right and the sounds of feasting are very close.\n\n\nDeciding not to be deterred, you turn the corner and see a massive six-armed humanoid with three snakelike heads and a spiny draconic tail ripping into the half eaten corpse of a human male. The man's upper body and arms remain while the entire lower half is gone. The dead man's eyes are staring forward and the look of anguish at death is frozen upon his face.\n\n\nThe beast turns and sees you and releases a growl that sounds somewhat like a chuckle and a sneer. You back away hoping it doesn't follow but it approaches with heavy footsteps and menace on it's three snake-like heads. You've already got your sword drawn and no longer believe you are going to get away without a fight.\n\n\nYou parry the first attack with your blade and make a downward cut as the heads swarm around you. The blade crashes against bony armor and barely dents the beast. It continues to close in on you as the snake heads each attack in turn, snapping high, low, and at midrange.\n\n\nAnother parry turns into a two-fisted attack with the broadsword and you take off a head before being bitten by a second head which snips your leg. Fangs bury themselves in your leg and you feel a cool liquid pump into your body. You turn, spin, and decapitate the second head even as the third plants it's mouth on your breast. You stumble backwards feeling poison running through you but you're not giving up yet!\n\n\nYou charge at the beast and it;s last snake head dodges and darts around you even as you chop off one of it's six arms. You reverse and spin landing a solid thrust that pierces the body of the beast and it retreats as you stagger.\n\n\nYour leg is oozing pus and blackish blood. You are losing the ability to stand on it but you press forward even though your chest is constricting. You press forward grimly, if you are going to die, you are taking the bastard with you. Now it is the creature playing defense as you stagger towards it. It holds the wound in the chest with one arm with it's snaking head weaving and bobbing.\n\n\nYour broadsword seems so heavy so you drop it and pull your twin short swords. The beast retreats farther into the lair it made for itself. You charge with faltering resolve but cut two of it's arms off and begin to work the body even as the snake head bites your back. You turn and slice the head off and the creature wanders aimlessly spurting green blood like a three-tiered fountain.\n\n\nFinally it collapses and you crawl towards it even as your vision clouds. Rising up, you grab your twin short swords and plunge them into the beast and it quits quivering. You slide down and rest on the body and slowly close your eyes, a grim smile fixed upon your graying face as the last of your life bleeds out.\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!!!", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}, null]}]}, null, null]}, null]}, {"action": "Catch Your Breath", "result": "As you sit and think, your memories begin flooding back.\n\n\nYou are Sebastian, you left your last name behind long ago.\n\n\nOnce you were a little girl who was young and innocent. This was a long time ago. Now the years have torn any innocence from your body, mind, and soul. You devote yourself to living by the blade and you know one day you will die upon it.\n\n\nYou were once a dancer and your lithe body and natural grace serves you well in combat.\n\n\nYou are an exotic beauty with naturally silver eyes and silvery hair that bounces and flows to your mid-back. Your naturally pale skin is tanned from years on the road and beneath your soft looking skin are muscles hardened by years of warfare. You are well respected in mercenary circles and you often are called 'Silver' by those first meeting you. Your very few close friends call you 'Bast'.\n\n\nYou and half of the other sell-swords in the country of Zanitar were going to flock to Essitrea and ask to be put on as guards for the city walls, this was good work and you had a horse and your own weapons and armor increasing your value to the city watch.\n\n\nYou hoped these advantages would outweigh you being female, as females are often ridiculed when trying to enter the fighting trades, paid less money, and occasionally flat-out passed over for work, no matter your skills with the blade.\n\n\n\n\nYou do have something many other mercenaries lack: You can read, you have a resume signed by respectable tradesmen you'd worked for in the past.\n\n\nYou are truly skilled with the Broad-blade of Lazarius and all manner of knives. You are more than fair with the bow, crossbow, and even more exotic weapons at range including your favorite weapons: exotic metal throwing fans used for range and melee combat. These are your prestige weapons, for the metal fans were rare, flashy and elegant. \n\n\nYou had trained as a dancer for many years in your youth while pursuing a less respectable trade, and you know a variety of martial skills that were disguised as dancing moves, much like the Kajimarans practiced.\n\n\nTo say you are a martial artist is an overstatement, you have little poise and refinement to your arts, you are more of a rough and tumble guttersnipe who has prodigious natural talents and an iron willpower that has made you tough and enduring. You are sturdy of build but remarkably strong, with a grip like steel. Your muscles when tensed are as powerful as a strong man's though you are built a head smaller than the average brute you work with.\n\n\nThis matters not to you, you are not going to out-muscle anyone, it is your athletic graces that make you deadly. Your patchwork training gives you a pastiche of martial moves that are both surprising and random, and your superb athleticism stems from a lifetime of physical training in dancing.\n\n\nMost mercenaries are large plundering half-wits, village strongmen, ex-soldiers, and bandits with a modicum of talent. You are a different breed altogether, and your quick wits often saved you from dangers you encounter that killed others with stronger sword arms.\n\n\nNow you fear you may have made your final mistake: No one anticipated the strength of the Turric Horde, the ruthlessness of it's leaders, or the mercenaries inside Essitrea who had secretly worked for the Turric all along. No one but the Turric envisioned a disaster on this scale.\n\n\nSuddenly, explosions of artillery begin landing around you, it's time to move or die! Do you wish to run from building to building or try your luck in the sewers under the city?", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Remember your Enemies", "result": "You think about the enemies you face. They come in several types:\n\n\nTURRIC SWORDSMEN:\n\nThese warriors are the rank and file warrior for the Turric forces. They wear light armor and carry quick barbed scimitars. The scimitar is most effective as a slashing weapon with wide swings. You can usually overcome small numbers of these men as long as you aren't surrounded.\n\n\nTURRIC WARHOUNDS:\n\nThese are powerfully built war dogs used to scout areas and hunt enemies. They often pounce and trip their prey and savage them fiercely while their prey is on the ground. \n\n\nTURRIC CROSSBOWMEN:\n\nTurric Archers and Crossbowmen are lightly armored ranged fighters. They use light crossbows or shart bows and attack from close to mid range. They don't like to get into hand to hand combat where their daggers and short curved swords are at a disadvantage. They are most effective if they have protection from Turric swordsmen.\n\n\nTURRIC SNIPER:\n\nHighly accurate long ranged warriors, they use crossbows to deadly effect usually from behind cover. Though their crossbows are slow to reload they are heavy enough to critically injure any struck by a bolt. They are able to snipe moving targets and any encounter with them should be avoided if at all possible. In close combat they are lightly armored and have to rely on sword curved blades and daggers putting them at a decided disadvantage.\n\n\nTURRIC DEATHMAGUS:\n\nThese are necromancers in the service of Lord Turric, they can raise dead troops up as zombies and are always flanked by two Vanguards, heavily armed undead zombie warriors tied to their life forces. They wear no armor and usually travel with groups of Turric swordsmen and their Vanguards so they have time to cast their deadly spells.\n\n\nTURRIC VANGUARDS:\n\nVanguards are undead warriors who wear heavy banded armor, carry falchions (Massive barbed two-handed scimitars) and provide protection to their Turric Deathmagus master. They can withstand tremendous amounts of physical damage and most light weapons and armors have little to no effect. Killing their master or decapitating them are the best methods of killing them. They are slow and methodical in combat but can occasionally summon up bursts of dark necromantic bolts from their hands which drain life and paralyze the victim. \n\n\nZOMBIES:\n\nThese are unfortunate people raised by the Deathmagus. They are slow, uncoordinated, and incapable of complex thoughts. However, they must be decapitated or burned to die. Powerful Deathmagi can raise dozens of these disposable warriors at a time and use them against enemies as shocktroops.\n\n\nTURRIC DEATHWARDENS:\n\nTurric Deathwardens are masters of hellhounds. Though medium armored and possessed of barbed scimitars, their real weapons are the two Hellhounds they use as scouts, hunters, and killers.\n\n\nTURRIC HELLHOUNDS:\n\nTurric Hellhounds are large flaming dogs of powerful builds and possessing astute senses. They are dangerous to confront as they often knock over opponents and pounce on them attacking viciously as well as setting victims on fire. Whether or not they are summoned demons, they have a reputation for being very vicious.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Sebastian's Resume", "result": "NAME: Sebastian\n\n\nAGE: 25\n\nGENDER: Female\n\nOCCUPATION: Mercenary\n\n\nHEIGHT: 5'10\"\n\nWEIGHT: 135 Lbs.\n\nHAIR: Silver\n\nEYES: Silver\n\nNATIONALITY: Zanitarian\n\nHANDEDNESS: Right\n\n\nTRAITS:\n\nDancer's Grace: Sebastian is graceful and is often capable of ducking and dodging attacks. In addition, she is adept at tasks needing sure footing (climbing, balancing, and sneaking) and manual dexterity (picking locks, theft, and throwing).\n\nFluency: Sebastian is able to speak, read, and write Lazarian, Bandglan, and Zanitarian.\n\nBeautiful: Sebastian stands apart from the crowd and is well-known for her beauty.\n\n\nFIGHTING STYLE: Steel Crucifix. Sebastian likes to attack with her heavy broadsword trying to get a kill or two before switching to lighter, faster weapons, usually daggers or her short swords. Often she throws knives in the middle of combat to create space, stop charges, or fend of missile attacks. Due to her light armor, she prefers stealth and trickery to straight up brawling.\n\n\nBroadsword (1): This is a wide heavy sword known for it's sturdiness. It is slow to maneuver but does plenty of damage when attacking both armored and unarmored foes.\n\nShort Swords (2): Her fallback melee weapons, trades damage for speed. She likes to use stabbing attacks to pierce her foes and circular parries to defend against multiple attacks. Effective against light and heavy armor.\n\nDaggers (4): Heavier than throwing knives, these fighting blades are for in close work against foes who fight at speeds faster than her broadsword. Not effective against heavy armor but dangerous when used against lightly armored opponents.\n\nThrowing Knives (10): Sebastian is accurate over short distances with throwing knives usually throwing two or three at one or more opponents. The more opponents she faces the less accurate she is. She carries ten hidden around her body. Ineffective against medium or heavy armor.\n\nWarfans (2): Her exotic weapons, she uses metal war fans to deflect attacks, make trick throws (Curving throws, ricochets, and slicing). In addition, she can make gashing cuts against lightly armored opponents that are difficult to heal. She usually uses them if she is smuggling weaponry into places where none are allowed or when she is using her dance skills professionally.\n\n\nOPTIONAL:\n\nCrossbow: Though she doesn't usually carry a crossbow, she is quite deadly as a sniper.\n\n\nARMOR:\n\nChain Shirt: Sebastian wears padded chainmail made to be light weight and fit under her clothes. She sacrifices protection for mobility, stealth, and unobtrusiveness.\n\n\nNOTES: Sebastian fights best when she has room for mobility, launches the initial attack, and faces opponents at a short distance.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Move on", "result": "You decide to pass them by, there has to be another way through the city without the aid of the Essitreans and the inevitable conflict they will attract. You head down a corridor and see flames rising ahead, to the left you see a massive army of Turric soldiers fighting with another smaller group of Essitreans. The carnage is horrid and you opt not to go that way. To your right you see an old stable. Perhaps within you can find a horse.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Head towards the Fire", "result": "The flames ahead of you fly many feet into the air and you try to find a way past the street but there are no obvious exits. Disheartened you retreat back to the previous intersection.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Check out the Stable", "result": "You opt to check out the stable but there are no horses inside. As you are searching, you see the fighting from the left street starting to pour into yours. The mass combat is punctuated by explosions, the sound of steel on steel or flesh, and the screams of the injured or dying. You quickly decide to abandon the search and head back to the intersection before you are overwhelmed.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Go Backwards", "result": "You arrive at the massive barricade. The barricade is manned by a holdout group of Essitrean soldiers each holding crossbows. There have to be dozens of them all on watch. The bodies of hundreds of Turric soldiers lie scattered in the streets around the barricade though it's obvious the Essitreans are wounded and exhausted.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "2", "result": "You fall into a deep and dreamless sleep. As luck would have it, you are not bothered by anything or anyone during your stay and you feel quite at peace with yourself. Your mother always said you were a strong one before she died. She never knew how many times you would have to test that theory. You wake up refreshed and ready to go.\n\n\nIt is now NIGHT.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "3", "result": "Your sleep is suddenly interrupted by the sound of the door being kicked in by heavy booted feet. In the entrance are five undead warriors, two heavily armored Turric Vanguards and a Turric Deathmagus, a necromancer by any other name. You rise to your feet pulling your broadsword and charging. Deathmagus takes no prisoners. This is going to be a fight to the death.\n\n\nYou swing a heavy blow and decapitate the lead zombie as the others charge forward. You've fought the occasional zombie in the past and you know from experience that you have to decapitate them to bring them down. As the first zombie falls, you face a thicket of swinging blades, what zombies lack in speed and accuracy, they make up in fearlessness and tenacity.\n\n\nYou need to fight without getting cornered or overwhelmed. You duck to the left and then run to the right, making the zombies slowly try to follow you. You pick a zombie at the edge and cut at his knees while parrying two blades aimed at your midsection. The zombies legs are undercut and you duck and blade and stab upwards into a zombie's gut. They keep onrushing but you roll to the side of a blow and parry a second before leaping on a table.\n\n\nA downward chop takes another zombie downward and you backflip off the table landing on your feet. Taking a mirror, you toss it into the face of a nearing zombie and slip to the left before arcing right and using your sword to decapitate the next.\n\n\nSeveral seconds later, you pant as the last zombie falls.\n\n\nThe Deathmagus claps his bony pale hands slowly, \"Very good little Silver one, you are most impressive. I've decided to give you one last challenge, if you can over come it I'll let you live.\" He turns to one of the fully armored vanguards and points at you. The Vanguard silently obeys stepping forward with his barbed Falchion at the ready.\n\n\nThe other Vanguard stands by his master and together they watch the duel. You know from experience that Vanguards are heavily armored juggernauts with undead endurance and massive two handed falchions with rasping barbs attached.\n\n\nDo you:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Use your Broadsword and Short Swords to inflict heavy damage?", "result": "The Vanguard was a heavy warrior with a massive slow sword so you decide to try your luck with your heavy sword relying on your natural quickness to keep one step ahead of him. As he nears you you double-hand the broadsword and smash it as hard as you can against his side. The blade bangs loudly against him and you see a dent appear in the armor but he moves as if it were a feather duster. He swipes at your head but you duck and spin away.\n\n\nYou finish the spin with a heavy blow to his knee and you see with some satisfaction as the armor dents in and his knee buckles. The Vanguard barely even registers the blow and chops at you with an overhand blow that meets the stone floor and shatters it. You roll backwards and throw two blades that ricochet off the armor and stick in the ceiling. \n\n\nHe keeps moving forward unperturbed by the blades and you charge towards him willing him to commit for a swing. When he does, you leap to the side and again bash his knee. The metal dents a little more and his knee visibly weakens. You roll away and place your broadsword between yourself and his blade.\n\n\nHis hand glows black and he begins to drag you towards him with some form of dark magic. You put your sword in front of you and duck another slash as you use his magic to impale himself with your sword. He staggers backwards and you block a sideways slash meant for your wait with your broadsword. The power knocks it flying across the room lodging into the wall.\n\n\nYou kick off of the Vanguard and run backwards as the knight continually steps forward thinking to yourself, \"That was cheating...\"\n\n\nPulling your twin short swords, you leap and twist so your blades smack deep into his shoulders. The Vanguard staggers and steps back and you tumble off of his body and duck to the left. You hear his stomps as you run for your broadblade. You reach it and pull it out of the wall just as the Vanguard reaches you. You have to release the sword in order to keep your arm.\n\n\nAfter his miss, you again grab the blade and rush around him to his backside raining your broadblade high into the air and stabbing it downward into his wounded knee. Your blade bites deep into the knee and sinks into the stone floor pinning him. Pulling your swords from his shoulders, you jump into his back making him fall forward and then roll over him pulling your twin blades with you. You then watch as he starts to pull himself up. This is when you strike with both blades at his neck repeatedly, the sparks of your work lighting up the room as your steel pounds against the Ulum metal of the Turric Mages. Finally, the metal gives way and you plant both swords into his neck and pull outward.\n\n\nThe metal shell and flesh peels outwards and you take your dagger and plant it deep into his spine wrenching it back and forth until the warrior drops coldly into the dust.\n\n\nBacking away you watch as his body, armor, flesh, and weapon melt and turn to dust.\n\n\nBreathing heavily, you turn towards the door where the Deathmagus nods his approval and turns to the exit. A second later, the place is quiet and empty. Despite yourself you fall into a deep, deep sleep...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay at range and use throwing blades and daggers.", "result": "You begin the duel with two throwing knives as you try to stay at range. The blades hit square but ricochet off the heavy armor. You growl as you duck under his heavy blade and cartwheel out of his range. Having more space, you throw two more knives, one bounces off and sticks in the ceiling and the other lodges under his armor. The Vanguard pulls the blade out and throws it to the ground and you pull a dagger with two more knives.\n\n\nSince the Vanguard seems to be taking his time, steadily moving forward, you carefully aim the next two throws. The first slides into an eyehole of the armor and for the first time you get his attention. The blade spews brackish blood that leaks from under his helm and dribbles down his chin. He pulls the blade from his eye and grasps the Falchion with both hands, the old leather crackles under his grip.\n\n\n\"Great...\" you think as you dodge a powerful but slow swipe that smashes the cabinet you ducked behind. You pull back and throw the second blade trying to lodge it through his plates under his arm. It connects with the armor and bangs off into the floor.\n\n\nPulling your daggers you duck under a sweeping cross-swipe and punch the dagger into his breastplate. The dagger rings in your hand without doing any apparent damage. He kicks but misses as you flit to the side and stab him in the neck. The blade slides into his neck but it doesn't slow him even a bit.\n\n\nHe backhands you and you barely escape a full on hit but feel your jaw instantly bruise and you see stars as you fall backwards into the debris around you. He is upon you instantly but you dodge his reversed blade and watch the heavy blade pierce the stone itself. You roll to your feet and try to kick out his feet but your leg meets with an unmovable object and you back away limping.\n\n\nHe closes in on you as you switch to your throwing knives which clink off his armor. You can't believe it when he raises his hand and you feel dark energy course through you.\n\n\n\"That wasn't fair...\" is the last thought you think as he plants his falchion deep into your stomach and rips downward splitting your body from stomach to crotch. The last thing you see is his dead eye peering at you as you bleed out.\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null]}, null, null]}, {"action": "Help the girl out of the hiding place?", "result": "You dislike the thought of dragging around a non-combatant but you could at least take care of her until she can be handed off to someone else. By herself she'd either starve to death or get caught and become a victim to the Turrics. With you she had a slim chance to live, it wasn't much but it was something.\n\n\nYou dislike the thought of dragging around a non-combatant but you could at least take care of her until she can be handed off to someone else. By herself she'd either starve to death or get caught and become a victim to the Turrics. With you she had a slim chance to live, it wasn't much but it was something.\n\n\nGoing downstairs, you say 'Defender' as you pull back the tapestry but there is no answer. You say 'Defender' again but there is still no response. Dreading what you'll find, you open the little door to find the girl, her body lifeless with your dagger stuck in her chest. You curse her weakness even as the pragmatic side of you tells you your own survival rate just increased.\n\n\nAt least she'll be with her family you suppose. With a heavy heart you retrieve your knife and close the trapdoor.", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Search the Second Floor", "result": "You know that the building is three stories so you look around the small apartment for the way to the top floor. Above you, you find a trapdoor to the floor above. You stand on the desk and reach to pull the painted ring dangling from the trapdoor. Once you've grabbed the ring you pull it down and the door swings open. A folding ladder is attached to the door panel and you unfold it. Showing through the doorway is the burning sky.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Attic?", "result": "Putting a dagger into your mouth and carrying a short sword in your right hand, you ascend the ladder. As you climb to the top you realize that the top of the building and whatever was in it was struck pretty hard by the flaming boulders used by the enemies catapults. The fire has burned to cinders and only the stone construction of the main building prevented the house from burning to the ground earlier. As a living space it is a total loss. As a hiding place, it's pretty darned perfect. Anyone who tried to climb into the attic would be a sitting duck on the ladder, would warn those on the ceiling by opening the trapdoor in the first place, and the wrecked timber and rubble provide hiding places on the roof.\n\n\n From the street, the destruction is highly visible and many would just assume no one who was up on the roof was still alive, in addition, the trapdoor was painted white as well as the walls and the ceiling of the building. Only those looking for the trapdoor would find it. The downside is that you'd be highly susceptible to artillery fire.\n\n\nDeciding this is the place to stay at least until nightfall, you try to decide if you want to retrieve the girl.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Get some Shut-eye", "result": "Pick either 1 or 2", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, null]}]}, null, null]}, {"action": "Kill the men, then the dog.", "result": "You decide that men with swords beat out a hound so you ready your ambush by hiding behind a desk and wait for them to rush in. They do as you predict and you pop up from behind the desk and toss three throwing knives, two at the leader, one at the man following him. The first bounces off the lead man's armor. The second catches him in the neck and he goes down grasping at his throat. The third narrowly misses the following soldier by inches.\n\n\nYou draw your short swords which are a good matchup against the wide swinging barbed scimitars the Turric use, at least in confined spaces. Then you leap over the desk ready to take the second soldier out.\n\n\nHe charges as you rush to meet him. His swing is wild and you parry it ducking into a tumble and swing low cutting his foot off at the ankle. As you roll into a crouch you are hit from the side by the wardog which barrels into you knocking you off balance. It bites for your throat but you sacrifice your arm instead losing your left hand sword in the process. The short sword rings off of the wooden floor and skitters several feet away as you use your other sword to stab the dog in the ribs.\n\n\nEven as you stab the dog and it yelps, the other soldier levels a boot at your head and kicks you so hard you see sparkles and blackness for a second. The dog rends a massive rip in your bracer and blood spurts from the open wound into it's mouth. You stab it again and it collapses.\n\n\nThe second warrior raises his Barbed Scimitar as you struggle to get the dog's dead weight off of your own body. You scream as the blade comes down cutting deep into your skull. Death is instantaneous.\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!!!", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}, null]}, {"action": "Kill Em All!", "result": "You whirl quickly around pulling three throwing knives and letting them free at the charging warriors. Two of the three blades 'thunk!' into the Turric Swordsmen. One plunks deep in a man's chest and he staggers sideways before falling. The other knife slams into a warrior's arm causing him to howl in pain.\n\n\nWith four of the men left from the initial assault, you realize you are in a bind. You level your sword at the two melee warriors and try to stay out of the sight of the two crossbowmen.\n\n\nA bolt 'thrums' by your ear. Another 'thuds' into a pillar to your left. You circle for position as one warrior heads towards your left side and the injured warrior with a knife sticking out of his arm circles to your right. The crossbowmen are reloading and another attack is imminent.\n\n\nWhat do you do?\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Feint Right and Attack the Warrior to the left.", "result": "Quickly, you move right and fake the warrior to your weak side, then cross the blade over and thrust it deep into the warrior on your left. The sword punctures the armor of the warrior and slides thickly into his belly where you feel the steel edge nestle in his spinal column and break through his back. The man instantly collapses like a stack of bricks taking your sword with it.\n\n\nRolling with the momentum, you duck under the whistling blade of the other warrior and tumble through bolts fired by the crossbowmen several meters distant. Before you even roll fully out of your crouch you pull two daggers and let them fly into the swordsman giving chase. One bashes into his face piercing his skull and the other strikes his leg. He falls lifeless like a bull shot in mid charge.\n\n\nThe crossbowmen, once trying to pick shots are now hurriedly trying to reload. you turn to them and pull short swords and charge them. They fumble their crossbows as you near them. Two vicious strikes later and you stand triumphant over five Turric corpses.\n\n\nCatching your breath, you grab your weapons and check the bodies for loot. Seeing that your masters aren't probably going to be keeping you on the payroll, you may as well scrounge a little coin to prevent this from being a total loss. Three bags full of silver coins jingle in your hand and you put them in your pockets and turn to go.\n\n\nYou can either try to keep moving by skipping from building to building or you can choose to head into the dark alleyways across the street that heads to the ghettoes of Essitrea.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Throw more daggers at the crossbowmen.", "result": "You are surrounded both by swordsmen and crossbowmen. Sensing that you might be plucked off from range you duck under the slash of the warrior to your left and pull your throwing blades. Two blades fly free and both strike the crossbowmen, the man on the left is hit in the chest and the one on the right feels a blade hit his shoulder.\n\n\nEven as they fall, you bring your broadblade up to parry the attacks from the man on the right. The barbed scimitar collides with the flat of your blade and sparks glide from the conflicting metals. Then you feel a sharp pain from behind as you see the point of a scimitar pierce through your chest. You feel as if your whole body is being electrocuted and you watch with hazing vision as your sword falls limply from your grasp.\n\n\nThe blade twists inside you and your knees give out and you fall to your knees. The left side swordsman measures you up and swings his blade. The sensation of your head rolling on the ground is eerie as you watch your body fall. Then, slowly, the world turns black.\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!!!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Feint Left and Attack the Warrior to your right.", "result": "You quickly feint left and then pull your heavy blade to the right with a vicious backhand arc that decapitates your opponent. The right-side swordsman's body twists in a ghoulish pirouette before stepping once to the left and falling. His head lies some ten feet into the distance.\n\n\nYou have however left your side exposed and you feel the results of a brutish slice into your side. You scream in agony and frustration before reversing your sword and thrusting it backwards. This catches the left-side swordsman directly in his stomach and you thrust it through his body before giving the blade a nasty twist.\n\n\nYou feel the warrior slide off of the steel and grunt in satisfaction. However, this is cut short by a bolt which smashes into your shoulder. You scream and reflexively draw a dagger which you hurtle across the field into the throat of the crossbowman who just shot you. However, his ally has been taking careful aim and looses another bolt which slams into your stomach.\n\n\nBlood courses down your armor as you collapse to the ground, your feet no longer able to carry you. You grip your sword and try to rise as the men reload speaking their guttural language. They walk cautiously up to you as you grip a dagger secretly and act just a little bit more wounded than you are.\n\n\nThe first man approaches and pulls a knife, \"You've got pretty skin bitch,\" he growls and grabs your face, pulling your chin up to his. \"Too bad I've gotta cut you up, you might have been a good ride.\"\n\n\nGrowling, you plunge your dagger into his crotch and twist. He screams, gripping his groin and falls to the side rolling in pain. The other crossbowman steps back in suprise then his look hardens, \"You've got teeth, Siak was always a fool. I'm not.\"\n\n\nRaising his crossbow he levels it at your head and pulls the trigger.\n\n\nThe bolt jolts your head back as you fall lifeless into the street surrounded by a pile of corpses.\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!!!", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Surrender.", "result": "Surrounded by the warriors and realizing that you will probably not survive this fight, you drop your sword and raise your hands. The warriors grin and, under the careful watch of the crossbowmen, the swordsmen circle, one to the front and one behind. Suddenly, your hair is gripped and you are pulled to your knees.\n\n\nA knife is applied to your neck and the men begin to grin. \"Take her weapons Siak, the kitten still has claws.\"\n\n\nYou feel your body being searched, the knives being stripped and tossed, your belts being removed, and then the men fall on you. You scream and try to fight them but there are just too many of them. You finally burst into tears as you realize your impending fate. Two hold you arms as the others pry your legs open and the others pull off your pants. You scream for help knowing none will be coming.\n\n\nBefore they kill you, you hear Siak say, \"I wish all our girls were this easy...\"\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!!!", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Pull the Dagger and go for the Kill!", "result": "Parrying his first attack, you slip a dagger from your belt and plunge it deep into his neck. The man stops and falls backwards, his body shivering and eyes glazing as he tries to pull the treacherous weapon free. His struggles soon cease and he lies in a glistening pool of his own blood.\n\n\nDo you:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Scram before anyone else sees you?", "result": "Deciding that it is smarter to pick your battles rather than have them pick you, you decide to leave the corpse alone and head for the nearest cover. Sure enough several men, three swordsmen and two crossbowmen curiously round a corner of a destroyed building and begin to investigate the area.\n\n\nYou are skilled but you'd rather not risk being put to the test against such ruthless men. You shiver when you consider what they do to women they take captive. Crouching, you duck out of sight and move quietly out of their range. A few tense moments later you are in a less damaged part of the city. You look around and you see two likely routes of escape, the sewers and the twisting alleyways that run through the slums.\n\n\nGoing through the main thoroughfares would be suicide so you decide to risk them. Normally both the alleys and the sewers are dangerous because of brigands, disease, and wild animals but for now, they might make for safe havens in the otherwise fallen city.\n\n\nWhich do you choose?\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Search the Body.", "result": "You check the body of the fallen soldier and find a map. The map shows the city as it once was before the attack. You look around and try to get your bearings and spy a tower that is currently in flames. Orienting yourself, you see that the enemy has well marked battle plans and you can see troop movements marked in red as well as defending troop locations marked in blue. Perhaps you can make it to a defensive point where other troops might be, or you might just want to try to use back alleys to avoid all troops altogether. You could also ignore the map and head for the sewers.\n\n\nMAP: Essitrea Battle Plans", "action_results": [{"action": "Head for a Defensive Point", "result": "You move quickly and silently through the alleys, side streets, and main streets of the falling city. Several times you have to draw swords and fight enemy troops, run away from other Turric groups, or even loose undead creatures wandering the city, however, you find a place to hole up before you make the final push towards safety. You decide to wait until nightfall before moving onwards.", "action_results": [null]}, null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Run for the Next Building?", "result": "You run for the next building, everything looks safe. No one passes by and the streets are filled with corpses. Perhaps the vanguard has passed by. Taking a breath, you peek out and sense no one.\n\n\nSlowly you rise and take some tentative steps towards the next building. Though you cross a twenty foot expanse, you safely make it to the next stop. Peeking around the corner, you see a pitiable sight, a small blonde boy is crying over the corpses of his parents in the rubble strewn debris that was once his building. The piercing scream of an incoming flaming boulder smashes into the cobblestones vaporizing everything in your vision and knocking you back.\n\n\nAs you rise, you hear yet another burst far to the rear.\n\n\nAfter regaining your feet, you start after where the boy was. There is nothing left but a smoking crater surrounded by a ring of flames. Despite your normal stoic nature, tears threaten to slide down your cheek. Gripping your blade, you force yourself to trudge onwards.\n\n\nThree streets upward, you notice a firefight going on. Three Essitrean troops are hunkered behind a wall. Each has a crossbow and a fourth soldier lies dead with a bolt sticking out of his neck. You run in a crouch towards their position and fall to a knee beside the sergeant, \"What's the situation Sergeant?\" You ask.\n\n\nHe turns and almost goes for his sword as he doesn't recognize you but he says, \"Mercenary?\"\n\n\nYou nod and he grunts, \"Figured you all had fled by now, hell if this wasn't my home I'd have fled long ago. Suppose I'll be dying within these old walls soon enough.\"\n\n\nA crossbow bolt smacking against the wall brings him back to the fight. \"Well, we're trying to reach a defensive position North of here but the bloody Turrics got us cut off. Out of a platoon sized element, only we remain and we're cut off from Main Group. If you can fire a crossbow, your help would be welcome. Hell, even if you can't you can at least take potshots at the bastards.\"\n\n\nYou nod taking up the Arbalest, a crossbow you are very skilled with and load the bolt. \"Where are they located?\" You ask.\n\n\nHe darws a quick picture in the dirt with a bolt and says, \"We're here, their behind that berm over there. I'm pretty sure there's a sniper a little to the west. Bad thing is, though we can't see him, he can sure as hell see us and he's a crack shot. Took out Ivey with one clean shot, got Spiner just over there.\" He points to a Essitrean corpse about fifteen feet away, a bolt planted in his back.\n\n\nThose idiots behind the berm are lousy but they've got us pinned with suppressive fire, can't raise my head without fear of taking bolts, the sniper though, he's the real challenge. We take him out and we can flank. Without him dead, we're stuck in a stalemate.\"\n\n\nAdd ARBALEST (Crossbow) to your Inventory.\n\n\nYou think over the options:\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Cover me, I'll take the Sniper.\"", "result": "You agree to stay but you have to figure out where the sniper is before you can take him out. \"Hey Soldier, let me borrow that shield for a second.\" You grab his small metal shield and quickly raise it above the small wall you are all hunkered behind. Sure enough, the distraction brings a small hail of bolts from your front where the Turric Soldiers are entrenched, but they miss. However, from your right side a bolt slams the shield knocking it out of your hands and sends it rolling about ten feet to your left before the shield flops over.\n\n\n\"Okay soldiers, I know where the sniper is. I'm going to be heading to that little brick wall by the rubble pile, when I say go, I want you to fire your crossbows at the Turric Bastards until I'm set.\"\n\n\nThe men nod, they lock and load their crossbows and scrunch up preparing to fire.\n\n\nYou count to three and then begin a full-out sprint towards the brick wall in a low crouch. Meanwhile the Essitreans fire all they have at the Turric soldiers who keep their heads don until the flurry is over. They then return fire on the Essitreans and you wheel to the right towards the wall. You realize that the next five feet will be critical.\n\n\nTest your luck:\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "If your name starts with B, E, F, J, P, or Y...", "result": "You duck, dodge, and sprint and are scant seconds to making a dive for home when you take a bolt directly in the ribs. Crashing Uncontrollably into the bricks you injure yourself pretty badly but you skitter up behind the wall and lean against it.\n\n\nYou now have a 2 ENDURANCE (out of 3) if your ENDURANCE lowers to 0 you are Dead.\n\n\nBreathing with difficulty, you crouch and load your crossbow, you're going to get that Son-of-a-bitch if it's the last thing that you do. After saying a quick prayer, you turn out from the wall and scan the buildings in the direction of the shot, just as quickly you turn back in too the safety of the wall. A millisecond later a bolt smashes into the rubble you were just perched on.\n\n\nYou scoot over mentally aiming at the tall tower window on your upper right side. Then you skirt over to the small hole in the wall and aim. Inside you see movement in the wall and you draw a bead. Inhale. Exhale... Fire!\n\n\nThe bolt soars through the air and you hear a slight gasping sound before a man topples out of the window and falls four stories to the cobblestones below. The soldiers cheer and you send them a quick thumbs up.\n\n\nNow to deal with the Turric Soldiers.\n\n\nYou move along the wall to flank the Turric Crossbowmen being careful not to make noise or alert them to your position. Finally, you can go no further and you peek your head out to see where they are and how many. You notice five men, each loading their crossbows. Deciding to make it four, you fire at the most exposed soldier and duck back behind your wall. A scream rewards your efforts and shouts from the Turric soldiers show that they now have a sniper to deal with.\n\n\nYou reload your Arbalest and ready yourself for another shot. Turn, aim, fire, and duck. A scream follows that action and you slide back down the wall to communicate with the sergeant. He is busy instructing his men to take careful aim but you catch his eye and motion for him to send another soldier across to your position.\n\n\nYou slide back to your sniper's post and between you and the soldiers, lay down covering fire as one of the privates rushes to the wall you are hiding behind. You've now got the enemy flanked. He looks at you with the bolt sticking out of your ribs and exhales but you motion for him to move to the corner.\n\n\nHe takes a quick look and sees a Turric Medic tending for their two wounded men while two men provide fire at the Soldiers you left. You nod and roll over aiming at the Medic and taking him out with a bolt that shatters his skull. The soldier with you runs to the side to another wall to the rear of the beleagured Turric warriors and The sergeant and his soldier keep up firing from the front.\n\n\nSeconds later, you and your soldier pick off the last two Turric Crossbowmen. You wave your hand back and forth indicating a cease fire and you all rise from the rubble strewn battleground. The Sergeant and his men rush to congratulate you, \"I don't know what we'd have done without your timely intervention. I'm Sergeant Reynall and these soldiers are Corvis and Leake. I'm guessing your that merc girl they call 'Silver'. I'd heard you were amazing but obviously the legends do you no justice.\"\n\n\nHe looks at the bolt in your side and cringes, \"Looks like you took one for the team, unfortunately our medic is lying over there with a bolt in him so I'll just bandage it up and keep it as sterile as possible. We're heading over to a defensive position where we think some friendly troops are stationed, your welcome to come along for the ride if you'd like. Four is a hell of a lot better than one I'd say.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Thanks for letting me tag along...\"", "result": "You and the troops move quickly and silently through the alleys, side streets, and main streets of the falling city. Several times you have to draw swords and fight enemy troops, run away from other Turric groups, or even loose undead creatures wandering the city, however, you all find a place to hole up before you make the final push towards safety. You decide to wait until nightfall before moving onwards.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "\"Sorry, I work alone...\"", "result": "You head out, leaving the men to their own fate. Such was the life of a mercenary, why get attached to lost causes? You duck into an alley to avoid a patrol and then head left throwing your hood over your distinctive silver hair. Ducking to the right you enter a series of alleyways.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "If your name starts with any other letter of the alphabet...", "result": "You duck, dodge, and sprint and then make a graceful rolling tumble into the rubble.\n\n\nComing up from your roll, you crouch and load your crossbow, you're going to get that Sniper if it's the last thing that you do. After saying a quick prayer, you turn out from the wall and scan the buildings in the direction of the shot, just as quickly you turn back in to the safety of the wall. A millisecond later a bolt smashes into the rubble you were just perched on.\n\n\nYou scoot over mentally aiming at the tall tower window on your upper right side. Then you skirt over to the small hole in the wall and aim. Inside you see movement in the wall and you draw a bead. Inhale. Exhale... Fire!\n\n\nThe bolt soars through the air and you hear a slight gasping sound before a man topples out of the window and falls four stories to the cobblestones below. The soldiers cheer and you send them a quick thumbs up.\n\n\nNow to deal with the Turric Soldiers.\n\n\nYou move along the wall to flank the Turric Crossbowmen being careful not to make noise or alert them to your position. Finally, you can go no further and you peek your head out to see where they are and how many. You notice five men, each loading their crossbows. Deciding to make it four, you fire at the most exposed soldier and duck back behind your wall. A scream rewards your efforts and shouts from the Turric soldiers show that they now have a sniper to deal with.\n\n\nYou reload your Arbalest and ready yourself for another shot. Turn, aim, fire, and duck. A scream follows that action and you slide back down the wall to communicate with the sergeant. He is busy instructing his men to take careful aim but you catch his eye and motion for him to send another soldier across to your position.\n\n\nYou slide back to your sniper's post and between you and the soldiers, lay down covering fire as one of the privates rushes to the wall you are hiding behind. You've now got the enemy flanked. He looks at you with admiration and awe but you motion for him to move to the corner and keep his wits about him.\n\n\nHe takes a quick look and sees a Turric Medic tending for their two wounded men while two men provide fire at the Soldiers you left. You nod and roll over aiming at the Medic and taking him out with a bolt that shatters his skull. The soldier with you runs to the side to another wall to the rear of the beleagured Turric warriors and The sergeant and his soldier keep up firing from the front.\n\n\nSeconds later, you and your soldier pick off the last two Turric Crossbowmen. You wave your hand back and forth indicating a cease fire and you all rise from the rubble strewn battleground. The Sergeant and his men rush to congratulate you, \"I don't know what we'd have done without your timely intervention. I'm Sergeant Reynall and these soldiers are Corvis and Leake. I'm guessing your that merc girl they call 'Silver'. I'd heard you were amazing but obviously the legends do you no justice!\"\n\n\nHe looks at you and says, \"We're heading over to a defensive position where we think some friendly troops are stationed, your welcome to come along for the ride if you'd like. Four is a hell of a lot better than one I'd say.\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "\"Good luck guys. You're on your own!\"", "result": "You owe these soldiers no allegiance, you don't live in this city, and dying for a pointless cause in a nameless street doesn't seem very appealing. You say, \"If i were you, I'd retreat cause that's what I'm doing. No point in dying now, this war is lost.\"\n\n\nYou feel a slight twinge of guilt at the faces of the men who look as if you'd taken the little bit of hope you'd given them and dashed it. However, the Sergeant turns to his men and says, \"Don't worry about her men, she's a mercenary, she'd sell her mother if the coin was right. We're heroes fighting for our mothers, our families, and our city!\"\n\n\nThe men buck up and begin to rally sending bolts back towards the enemy as you leave them in the distance.\n\n\nSeveral streets away and you'd almost forgotten them. To each his own. As you cross a dirty alleyway you see an old woman wandering around the streets asking if anyone had seen her boy tears form rivers in her dusty face. You haven't so you move on. You were hired to fight, not to save the world, to cure the sick, or to save the innocent. It was just too much. You wonder to yourself as you pass the banged out ruins of a massive church, \"Where is this god these people prayed to? Why don't they ask him? I'm just one person and I can barely care for myself...\"\n\n\nThe bitter scenes of man's cruelest depravities pass your sight, dogs chewing on the corpses of a baby in a dead woman's arms, a scavenger stealing bread from a stall while the rats chew on the proprietor, and charred bodies still smoking from the artillery strikes.\n\n\nSomehow you sneak past a troop of Turric soldiers carrying the spoils of their ill-earned gains, golden rings, jeweled necklaces, and young girls, most already battered and beaten, headed to the slave squares and whorehouses the Turrics are so fond of. Nothing you can do, you're just one girl, at least you're not one of them.\n\n\nSneaking into a doorway you are getting tired, your legs are weakening, and your vision is washed with sweat and exhaustion. You need to find refuge.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "\"Charge the Berm, they can't kill us all!\"", "result": "You charge the berm and watch as two of your men fall from the crossbows of the opposing soldiers. You are next to fall with a sniper bolt in your neck. As you watch the rest of the men fall you curse your stupidity and choke as blood fills your windpipe and you slowly choke to death facedown in a growing pool of blood.\n\n\nYOU HAVE FAILED!!!", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Wait for the Men to Move On?", "result": "The merchant is already dead so why waste your life fighting for him? Also running away will probably attract their attention so you hide and wait for the men to pass. After about three minutes, you see the men move on, one brags about the men he's killed as they turn a corner. As you are just about to leave, another five Turric soldiers appear from around the corner.\n\n\nYou are glad you didn't charge the first three or you might have been fighting eight men by now. You've got the drop on the five men but it seems like it could be really risky. You can also try to sneak away or continue to wait. You take a small breath and exhale as you make your next decision.\n\n\nYou creep towards the edge of the wall ready to make your move.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story62.json b/data/scraper/stories/story62.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..03533c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story62.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=9918", "context": "", "first_story_block": "You get up to the morning breeze blowing through the window. The start of summer is upon the villiage of Aravon. You, unlike most people of the village, have a dragon. Redscale has been in your care for several years now. You came upon him as hatchling when he was being attacked by a wild boar. Your long bow you had killed the giant boar in a single shot. You were ready for the dragon when you realized that he was no more than a baby. You took him to your house. That was a wise choice. You no longer have to worry of robbery. You two been best of friends since that faithful day.\n\nDragons in this land are common. They vary in size depending their age. Not many hang around humans because of their past war with dragons. The two races had disagreements that when one king went too far war was declared by dragons. It ruined may kingdoms and the caves of dragons. Until the war exhausted both of them they settled on leaving each other alone. Though some humans found ways to work with them. Together they built houses, discovered new medicine, and worked to get a better understanding of the world.\n\nNormally he'd be outside hunting around the time you get up. So you go outside to see the flowers bloom and a humid smell in the air. Clouds were in the sky. It might start to rain. Better get a coat just in case, you think. You live a hundred meters from Aravon. Near the edge of a great forest known as Valkar Forest. You get a coat and head out.\n\nYou get an axe. You go to start chop some wood for a fire when a blinding flash of light beams up in front of you. A snarling wolf demon appears and stares at you. Demons have appeared when the dragon war was ended by the humans that wanted power. Though the Royal Court of Varon put an end to it. Or most of it. All you have to defend yourself is a axe for cutting wood. You have your bow and sword inside. Still you prepare for battle. \"Don't bother to fight me Human.\" it sneers at you. \"You think you can kill me with an axe. I wouldn't try.\"\n\nYou stare at the beast, focused and concentrated. You were taught to stay calm at all times. \"What do you want demon?\"\n\n\"To talk to you about your pet dragon.\" It replies. \"We caught him.\" You stand there. How could they catch him? Who would want to mess with you two? \" Where is he? \"I'll find him and kill whoever did this.\" you say.\n\n\" Go to Igor's tower and you'll find whom you seek.\" He disappears in flames leaving you there to think how this could've happened. And why would they just tell you that they took Redscale? It doesn't make sense. You don't have enough time to think about the situation you're in. You'll have to resolve it and fast.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Get Supplies", "result": "You return to your house to prepare for your journey. Whoever did this has to be very powerful to stop a big dragon like Redscale. You grab your weapons: a sword and longbow. You grab a bag full of coins differing in value. You make a list for what you need: a horse, food, and quiver of arrows. You look around for anything else you may need. You see nothing and start to move toward Aravon.\n\n You arrive to see several single storied. You head to the local butcher. He was a rather large man. He goes by the name of Scar. Noone in the village ever found out why he calls himself that. He was skinning a whitetail deer when you entered his house. \"Need something?.\" Scar asked.You sigh. \"I need some meat. Why else would I come here?\" He gets up and looks at you. \"Come\" was all he said. He says nothing to you as you buy the meat you need for your trip.\n\n \nYou head to the blacksmith who is known to have quivers of arrows. You enter his workshop to a smell of smoke. You never hunted for any animal because Redscale would hunt for you two, so you never really had any need for arrows. You see the blacksmith hammering a cherry red sword that had to be recently made. You say,\"Sir, I have come in need of some arrows.\" He continues to hammer until its shape is correct. He puts it into a barrel of water and looks at you. \"Sure, you need some for a trip. I'll get you a quiver of usable arrows.\" He returns with your quiver and you pay. \"Thanks.\" is all you say is before you leave.\n\n \nYou head toward the local stable that sells horses. You are looking for a palfrey or known as a riding horse. You see a chocolate colored horse that looks as it was never used. You walk to the stable keeper. \"I want that one.\" You point at the palfrey. \"Well Mister, its one of my finer ones. You have 100 gold pounds with you?\" He asked. You sigh. Why is every stable keeper here a rip off, you think. You reluctently give him the amount. You leave with your new companion. You give him the name Amin, the Honest horse.\n\n \nYou ride Amin to your house. You know Redscale went to Valkor Forest to hunt, so that is the direction you are heading in.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head for Valkor Forest", "result": "You are in the forest. Animals scurry around you. A bridge is about 50 yards before you are stopped by two warriors. They come in front of you. The wierd thing is no battle horses. They bear the symbol of Varon: the king's knights. \"Halt.\" one of them says. You bring Amin to a stop. He snorts nervously.\n\n\"Why are you in the forest, young one?\" he asked.\n\n\"I am but a simple peasant.\" you reply.\n\n\"Somehow I doubt that,\" The other one says, \" you would not have weapons like that.\"\n\n\"Gotta protect myself.\" you say cautiously. You have uneasy feeling about these two. You look at the armor. You look at all the details and see nothing, but you see a sword mark by the heart. You now know what happened. These two must have ambushed a pair of battle-weary knights. By the look of the aromor they tried to fix it, but could not repair the heart wound. \"You two aren't knights! You're bandits!!!\" you yell.\n\n\"Your smarter than you look. The master misread your intelligence. Though we're not bandits, We'Re DeMoNs.\"\n\nNo more words are to be exchanged. These two are of the same demon that told you that Redscale was gone. These wolf demons must be killed. You can use your blade or take them out with your bow ", "action_results": [{"action": "Use Sword", "result": "You shoot your blade out of its scabbard with lightning fast reflexes. You were star pupil of world reknowned swordmaster Quon. As they pounced you slashed one deeply into the shoulder. It dropped to the ground howling in pain while holding his shoulder.\n\nThe other one leaped on top of you and knocking you to the ground. You drop your sword and it slides away from your reach. Damn. you think as you hit the ground. You see a claw come at you to cut you. You grab the arm as its in mid swing and use your leg to kick him. That stuns him for a second and goes to grab your fallen sword. You get up to your knees to see him try to cut your head off. You duck and give him a leg sweep to try get him down. It works. He drops the sword and holds the back of his leg. You get up and pick up your sword. You limp over and look down in disgust. \"You should've left me alone. Your action will cost you your life.\" You raise your sword and cut his head off. He's done. You walk over to the wounded one and say, \"Whoever is your master is as good as dead. I'll spare you to tell him that he better realease Redscale or he's doomed.\" You remount Amin and go across the bridge.\n\nYou know that there's two villages on two crossroads. You come up to one, but the road to Seri is blocked by collapsed trees. Looks like Xias is the only one. \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Xias", "result": "Xias is little less than a city. You head on the crossroad leading toward it. People are running around you trying to go somewhere or get something. You get people to look at you. They step back from you. They're afraid of me, you think as Amin walks across a busy street. You make your way to the local inn for any rumors that may help. \n\n The innkeeper is a rather bulky figure. Stories are told of how he trained in the military. He goes by the name of Io. He asks you if you wanted some coffee. Io asked,\"What makes you visit these parts stranger? Not as many folks come in here as the used to.\"\n\n\"I'm looking for a certain wizard who has captured a close friend of mine.\" you reply. You don't want to get too detailed. You hear the front door open to see a person come in with a cloak. The person heads to a croner and sits down. You're curious on who it is.\n\nYour curiosity was shattered by another person at the door come in. This was an angry group of men wielding swords and other kinds of weapons. A tall man, you presume to be their leader, steps up and shouts, \"Where is SHE! There you are you wrench!!\" They head over to the cloaked figure in the corner. You see them pull the hood down. A female sat there. Knowing that, you stand up and draw your own sword. \"You should leave her alone if I were you.\" you tell him. The leader turns and whispers to two of his men. They come at you with a axe and club.\n\nYou let them attack you first. The axeman swings the axe at your head. You duck and bring an uppercut to his chin that sends him staggering to the group. The man with the club tries to hit you in the head. It connects and sends you flying to the ground dazed and confused. Looks like I failed my quest. Forgive me Redscale, you think. For a moment there you think you felt a far sense of disappointment from somewhere. Then the woman leaps at the others with a concealed dagger. Within a few seconds, half the men that entered were on the ground, dead or wounded. The man raises the club for the final blow when a dagger thrusts through his heart. You see the woman standing over you, her hand reaching out at you.\n\nYou grab it and she pulls you to your feet. When you got up you got a better look at her. Brown hair that flowed down her back. Blue eyes that shone with a life energy that you\"ve never seen before in someone. She looks over your shoulder and her eyes widen. \"Come\" is all she says. She dashes up the stairs of the inn and disappears. You head up the stairs to see her in a room motioning for you to come in. you go in and she says, \"Help me.\" She's trying to barricade the door with the bed. You go over and out the corner of your eye you see a chair. \"Let's jam the chair in the doorknob.\" you yell.\n\nShe grabs the chair and jams it under the doorknob. Pounding on the door starts and you know men are trying to break in. Fear is swelling inside your body. \"OPEN THIS DOOR!!!\" someone outside the door yells. You start to get angry and your fear is gone.\n\n\"Like that's gonna happen,\" you yell back. The pounding is harder now. \"Explain later. What now?\" you say to your supposed ally. She gives you a grin that makes chills go down you back.\n\n\"We jump.\" she responds.\n\n\"Where?\" you ask. She points at a window behind you. Oh boy, you think.", "action_results": [{"action": "Jump", "result": "You open the window to see a cart of hay below. \"Well.\" you hear her voice behind you. Better to jump than fight in my condition. Well, here I go, you say to yourself. You jump and land in the cart of hay below. You see her jump in to the cart nearly before you got out. \"What now?\" She looks at you in a funny way.\n\n\"We go to the stable.\" She responds. We get to the stable to see Amin and another horse. It was a dark black. She mounts the horse. \"Do you have a horse?\" She asks. You nod and point at Amin who snorts. \"Nice. Let's go.\" You mount Amin and we head toward the gate.\n\nYou see some men with bows at the gate wall with bows pointed at your companion and you. judging by the distance you estimate a hundred yards. An arrow shoots by your head. Apparently these archers are expert shooters.\n\n\"Don't shoot.\" She says. You look at her in worry.\n\n\"Why?\" you ask.\n\n\"I have some help of my own.\" she says. \"Look to your right.\" You turn your head to the right to see ten archers with crossbows. They aim and fire to take out all of the archers. She turns to them and nods. You two bolt through the gate and head towards Valkor Forest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Finally Meet", "result": "You ride with her for hours until you make it back to Aravon. You head into your house and collapse on your bed. She enters and sits on a chair near your fire place. \"This is where you live? she asks and you nod.\n\n\"I'll put the horses in the stable.\" you say. You never use it and thought back then how it might come in handy. You take the black horse and Amin to the stables. You fetch water from a small stream out back. You get some oats and feed them and head back in.\n\nYou return to the cabin and see your friend asleep. You go to your bed and doze off. You have a dream: You see yourself in front of two shadow figures. \"How could you fail on killing the boy. I've trained him and saw potential. But he's not good enough to slay a demon and wound one.\" a loud voice roars. To you it seems really familiar, though you can't seem to recall who's voice it is. \n\nA low one who's clearly afraid says, \"But Master... he's far more powerful than you envisioned. His dragon has made him far too powerful than your magic can predict.\"\n\nAll you can see is black, but the voices remain very clear. \"My magic not strong enough. That is a lie!!! He may be more powerful, but I'm not stupid enough to not believe it.\" You hear a low rumble. You know its Redscale rumbling a warning. You are all too familiar with it.\n\n\"He will save me and when he does. I'll personally tear you limb from limb. Zaron, I know you're your here. Don't give up! Use the power that I saw in you the day we met!\" Tears started to flow down your cheeks.\n\n\"The boy is here!?! Fine. You listen up Zaron. I will have my revenge. Just you wait...\" the voice fades in to darkness.\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "You wake up to your friend shaking you. Tears were really flowing down your cheeks. So it wasn't a dream, you say to yourself. \"We need to talk.\" you say to her.\n\n\"Fine. But I start. My name is Kai. I come from a wealthy family in the royal court of Varon. They were selfish. My OWN family! They sent me off to marry some Lord Warren I didn't even know. I reluctently agreed to the marrige. As my escort and I neared to his lands we were taken by suprise by some large group of bandits. My escort was killed and I ran to Xias. Some of the bandits followed me and I bought the cloak you first saw me in from a farmer. I went to the inn you were in. As they entered I prayed someone may help me. When you stood up I thought you were leaving, but you helped me and almost died from it. For that I'm in your debt.\" Kai finished.\n\nYou nod. \"I'm surprised I'm in the presence of royalty. I'd escort you, but I have a mission that demands my immediate attention.\"\n\n\"What mission?\" she asked.\n\n\"You wouldn't believe me anyway.\"\n\nI've seen some crazy stuff.\" You give her a sarcastic look. \"I'm not lying. Tell me of your mission that demands your attention.\"\n\n\"I'm not trying to get into deatils, but someone was taken from me.\"\n\n\"You're trying to save someone?\"\n\n\"Yeah.\"\n\n\"Who?\" You sigh and go to the window to look at the sky. You look at her with a deep sadness.\n\n\"My dragon.\"\n\nThat got her attention. She didn't say a thing so you continue, \"Two days ago Redscale; that's his name, went out hunting and never came back.\"\n\nShe finally was able to speak,\"How do know he didn't just leave.\"\n\nFor once since he was taken you laughed. It didn't last long, but it felt good. You look at her. \"Because we were too close to leave each other without telling one another. Anyway, before I went out to chop wood a flash of light appeared. A wolf demon appeared to give me the news. Then I went to the village for supplies. I headed for Valkor Forest and took the path to Xias for any rumors. Before I got info you came along with those thugs. And I'm Zaron, son of Aron.\" you finish.\n\n\"That's sad. Well I made my decision. I am coming with you.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue with Kai", "result": "\"I accept your help Kai.\" you say with gratitude. \"We need to make a stop at Aravon. You know how to use a sword and shield?\" She nodded. \"We need a sword for you and two shields. Let's go.\"\n\nYou head out to the stable and mount Amin. She mounts her horse. You ask, \"What's its name?\"\n\n\"Shadow.\" She said. We went in the direction of Aravon.\n\nWe go to the blacksmith. He greets you two and asks what you want. \" Two shields and a sword.\" He comes back with a shield with a red dragon on it and a steel one with the symbol of Varon: an eagle. He asks Kai if she could use it. She grabs it and waits. \"This I made for you personally if the day came. This battle-ready Red Dragon shield is made of 16 gauge thick steel which will protect you from poundings on any battle field. Its yours without cost. And this is for you girl.\" He uncovers a steel sword on a table and gives it to her. He goes back to work and you leave with your new gear.\n\n \nWe put our gear on and headed torward a mountain rumored to have Igor's Tower. You both didn't talk because you know you two may die. You make it to a pass up the mountain when you hear you a noise in the bush. You snap you head in that direction and saw more movement. A lesson from Quon to observe everything. Kai was already doing that when the attack came, but you were ready. \n\nGroups of demons varying from animals of all kinds. A bear demon swipes you off Amin and to the ground. You cut at its leg and it goes down. Before you could finish it two more of them were on you. You see Kai kill any demon that came at her with expert cuts. She kills every demon that crossed her path. Something fired inside you that made each swing of your blade and land an instant kill. The first was a bird-demon from the air aiming to pick you up and drop you. A tiger came and clawed at you. You blocked with your shield and cut it apart. They begin to retreat. You can follow them to there hideout or cheak the area for any clues.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Check for clues", "result": "You go to see if Kai is okay. \"You hurt?\" She shakes her head. \"Yell if anything happens.\"\n\n\"What are you doing?' she asks panting.\n\n\"To search for any clues on how those demons got here.\"\n\nYou leave her while she tends to the horses. You look around to see a large set of footprints. You notice at least twenty humans have been here recently. You look around to see not only humans, but some demon footprints. Satisfied here you look in the direction opposite of which you looked at.\n\nYou go in the opposite direction to see a village there. North of there stood a large sructure you can't identify. \"Looks like a prison to me, but who's it for?\" you say to yourself. With the information you have it looks like that's your next destination.\n\nYou head to Kai and all you say is \"Mount up. We can't leave those demons. We must find out who summoned them.\"\n\nShe smiles. \"Let's get to it partner.\"\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Head deeper into the mountain", "result": "You remount your horse. Kai and you follow them. Whatever they're up to you need to know. You track them using the footprints and some blood they left. You have your sword laying in your hand for immediate use. Whoever is here has got to be powerful to summon these demons. \n\nYou eventually come to a cave. Kai said, \"We have to go in there.\"\n\n\"I never thought of that. Thanks.\"\n\n\"Don't have to be a jerk.\"\n\n\"I know. So we go in carefully or charge?\"\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Approach carefully", "result": " \n\"Wait here.\" you tell Kai. You go in with your shield up enough to protect you but not enough to block your line of sight. A turn is up ahead with a small reflection of light coming from it. \n\nYou motion for her to come in. \"There is a light behind the corner. I'll go see what's in there. Stay close enough that if I need help. You'll be here. Don't move! Be ready for a fight. I sense a great evil in there.\"\n\nYou go in there to see an old man who's maybe seventy years old. He turns towards you and smiles. \"I've been waiting for you.\"\n\n\"Who are you?\"\n\n\"I'm known by many names. But you may call me Tora.\"\n\n\"Were those your demons?\"\n\n\"Yes. The has master taught me very well.\"\n\n\"Master? Who is he?\"\n\n\"Telling you would be too easy. You'll find out soon enough. After we bring you down.\"\n\nDemons from a secret path. One was a black dragon, bigger than Redscale. \"Kai!!!\" you shout.\n\n\"You have a partner. His reading said you'd be alone.\" Tora screams.\n\nKai comes by your side. \"No way. I may never have joined you if I knew this would happen.\"\n\n\"Shall we?\"\n\n\"We shall.\"\n\nYou both leap into action. You cut down any demon that enters your blade's range. Kai also was doing great until all that remained was the black dragon. \n\nYou can't move. Why can't I move, you ask yourself. The feeling is preventing you from moving. the black dragon swipes at you. Kai intervenes by blocking the claw with her shield. \"Snap out of it Zaron!! This isn't a dragon. Its a dragon demon!\"\n\n You aren't able to keep its tail from smacking her across the room. She hits the wall and falls to the floor motionless. That angers you to see it do that. Whatever pity you have for it is gone now. It goes in the direction of Kai to finish the job. You run in its path and yell, \"You want her? You'll have to go through me first!\"\n\nYou hear a deep rumble in its throat, like a laugh. To your amazement it can talk. \"Go through you first? You can't kill me boy! For I'm no demon, for I'm the KING of all dragons. I'm called Calivir.\"\n\n\"Some king you are. You'll let one of your kind be taken captive? You have no right to be called king!\"\n\n\" NO RIGHT!?!\" Calivir roars.\n\n\"You heard me.\"\n\n\"You don't understand. He's my son. I couldn't convince him to leave you, so I helped capture him.\"\n\n\"You may be his father, but he's my brother.\"\n\n\"You have no right to say that. Your a human and not a dragon.\"\n\nYou shake your head. \"We look out for one another, we argue with each other, we will risk everything to save each other, and the most important thing: we love each other. I don't need to be a dragon to call him my brother. I know he feels the same way. I feel it. So I have every right to call him my brother.\"\n\n\"Be as that may. I have no choice but to kill you.\" You look him in the eye and see something that shocks you. They have pain and a deep sadness in them. No.... something isn't right, you think. No one should ever have that look. You try one more time to reason with him. \"You have pain.\"\n\n\"Alas I do. I have to kill my son's brother.\"\n\n\"You have pain that whoever has Redscale may kill him.\"\n\n\"You obviously know how to read a dragon from Redscale. If you defeat me I'll reveal his location to you. If not, you die.\"\n\n \"Very well.\" \n\nYou get into a battle stance and Calivir sighs. He wips a claw and it glides across your shield. You cut a swipe at his leg and he flaps his wings to go airborne. He shoots a jet of flame at you. You lift your shield, unsure if it will protect you. It does however hold against the array of flames. You see him land and use his tail to whip at you. You are sent flying into a wall. Can't lose consciousness. You fight the urge to pass out. Calivir walks in your direction and shoots a claw at your chest. It rips your shirt off, but otherwise your uninjured. You grasp your sword for a final strke and cut a deep gash in his chest. Blue blood gushes out and he falls on his side. You fall to your knees after the battle. Kai and Calivir are in your sight. It gets blurry and blurrier by the second. You think you'll die before you pass out. A dream appears to you: All blackness surrounds you except for a faint red glow. It grows bigger until you see Redscale.\n\n\"Redscale....\"\n\n\"Rise brother.\" He says. You hear passion in his voice.\n\n\"I can't... pain ...too great.\"\n\n\"You must. You must not leave us. The pain is not enough to keep you down. RISE BROTHER!!!\"\n\n\nA great power awakens in you. The pain disappears and you rise from the dead. \" I'm up.\"\n\n\"Run toward the light Zaron. Run towards it and arise from your grave.\" He fades away and you feel tears come up. You hold them in and look around to see a light above you. \"I'm not done. Not by a long shot.\"\n\nYou wake to see Calivir gone and Kai in a corner with a fire. \"I must have been hit by a rockslide.\"\n\nShe hears your voice and jumps up. \"Your alive! But your pulse was gone.\"\n\n\"I was dead, but a friend showed me the light.\"\n\n\"Well Tora was easy to kill. I burned his remains and disposed off them. Calivir told me Redscale was in a prison in a village called Osco. I was gonna bury you, but you got up. How did you defeat Death?\"\n\n\"With purpose and Redscale. Let's go get him.\"\n\nWith your spirits refilled you head to the Osco. You will rescue him. You've got to, for it's destiny!", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Prison", "result": "You have no idea of Redscale's and your death sentence. You go to the large building you saw when searching for clues. Kai and you dismount your horses and sneak up a hundred meters from the prison. \"We'll camp here for the night.\" You start to set up camp for the night. You have another dream of Redscale:\n\nYou are on the ground you first saw Redscale. You see the boar with that very same arrow you killed it with. You look down to see your sword isn't there. It was here the day you met Redscale. You hear a rustle in the bush to your right. You head in the direction to see Redscale in a river that wasn't there when you were last here. \" \n\n\"Redscale.\"\n\nHe snaps his head in your direction. His eyes flash with an acknowledgement of your presence. \" So your here.\"\n\n\"I am.\"\n\n\"Are you near the prison?\" \n\n\"I'm camped outside with my new ally Kai.\"\n\n\"Never seem to go alone.\"\n\n\"So it seems.\"\n\n\"I'll be killed at midnight tommorow, then you will be hunted down too.\"\n\n\"Don't worry old friend. You can count on us.\"\n\n\"What will we do when we get out of here?\"\n\n\"Go after this so called master.\"\n\n\"Then do me a favor.\"\n\n\"What?\"\n\nHe comes out of the water. He walks up to you and puts his snout on your face. \"Wake up...wake up...wake up...\" his voice says to you becoming fainter and fainter.\n\nYou open your eyes to see your blade in hand. Its changed in appearance: The blade itself was a deep shade of red and the hilt is the same except for a saphire on the end. You smile and know this will work out.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go into the Prison", "result": "You wake Kai. \"What...\" she asks half asleep. Her eyes are barely open. She falls into another sleep and you shake her. That makes her angry.\n\n\"WHAT!\" she yells.\n\n\"We're going in there now.\" you reply.\n\n\"Now? There's still hours till daylight.\"\n\n\"We need to go in there now. Redscale has been sending me dreams on how he's doing. We go in now because by midnight tommorow, he'll be dead. Why are we going now after a big fight? Night gives us the concealment of darkness. We only have one chance, so I will go in with or without you. Redscale's my world, so I'll go in and I'll die trying to save him.\" you say with affection.\n\n\"If we go now, we have time. Okay, let's go.\"\n\nYou sneak up to the prison wall and scan the area. You don't see anyway in, but after further looking you see a house. \"That house might be our way in.\" you whisper. You head in the direction with Kai following close behind. You head toward the door and quietly open it. A guard is in ther asleep guarding a door next to him. You close it and whisper,\"There's a guard in there. Go in and take him down quietly. Then sneak around and get info. Don't make noise and run in the sign of danger. I'm coming with you in the house, but will seperate with you and find Redscale.\" She has no worry in her eyes, you can see determination. \n\nKai heads in with blade drawn and cuts his throat. He falls and you drag his body outside to a big bush you see growing on the bottom wall.You head back in to see Kai waiting for you. You nod and go through the door. You go down a long passage underground and see a latter uphead of you. \"I'll go first.\" \n\n\n\nYou head up the latter to see a lit hallway that has two directions. You lift yourself up and whisper,\"Clear.\" Kai clinbs up and is next to you in a second. \"Don't make any unneeded noise. I'm going left. You take right.\"\n\n\"Zaron.\"\n\n\"Yeah.\"\n\n\"Better live.\"\n\nShe quietly dashes down the hall and takes a left turn. You walk in the other direction. You left your bow on Amin because most combat will be close up. You head down to two hallways leading in two differrent directions. One heads downstairs and the other up.", "action_results": [{"action": "Right (Down)", "result": "Redscale may be downstairs so you decide to go down. Sword drawn you head down to see doors. All along the hallway.\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Dungeon", "result": "You see doors going all along the hall. The biggest is the one at the far end. You approach it with deep caution and peer through a window to it. \n\nYou see Redscale there lying on the stony floor. You see keys on a table. A chair was there but no guard. You head to the door to put the key in the keyhole. You head in.\n\n\"I warned you whoever would come in would die.\"\n\n\"What did I do?\" you say playfully.\n\n\"Zaron!\"\n\n\"Let's go find Kai.\"\n\nYou her a scream from upstairs. Its no male. Then the saddening thought came to you. \" Go outside. I'll go get Kai.\" Redscale let loose a ripple of flame at the ceiling and flew outside the castle.", "action_results": [{"action": "Scream", "result": "You run up the stairs and see some man holding Kai by the arm. \"So you found your dragon, but that was not my true intention. Getting the princess was.\" That voice was very familiar. Then it came to you.\n\n\"It's been along time Quon.\"\n\n\"You remember me. How sweet.\"\n\n\"Let her go.\"\n\n\"I'd like to see you make me.\"\n\n\"Okay.\" You swing your sword at his head and he ducks letting go of Kai. She grabs her fallen blade and goes on the offense. Swing after swing she goes at Quon with. He blocks or dodges every blow she tries. You go at him with your blade and he cuts your thigh. You fall holding it. Then he swings and nails the hilt of his blade into Kai's temple. She collapses to the ground. \"You've failed Zaron. Your quest was successful, but your mission was in vain.\" A black shape came from above. It was Calivir. The blood surrounding you makes your vision blurry and you black out.\n\nYou wake up to see Redscale hovering over you. \"You have waken. Where is your friend?\"\n\nYou look at your leg. It has clotted up and stopped bleeding. \"I'm such a fool. Why has that thought not occurred to me?\"\n\n\"Not everyone can predict what will happen.\"\n\nHe comes over and breathes on your leg. It starts to heal to a scar and finally to nothing. That get's you shocked.\n\n\"When did you learn to do that?\"\n\n\"People don't know everything about dragons. Many known facts on dragons are complete lies.\"\n\nYou look at the sky. \"Where do we go from here?\"\n\n\"We go back to Aravon or go for the rescue.\"\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go home", "result": "\"Let's go home.\" There was a faint disappointment in him. He did not argue. You go to Aravon on Amin and sold Shadow to a trader. You two live happily until you die of old age. Redscale then goes to live with his own kind. You often dreamed of what could have been.\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Rescue Kai", "result": "\"She helped me rescue you, so it's time to return the favor.\"\n\nYou get on Redscale's back. It felt prickly under you. You hold on to a spike that bunches ran down his back. \"Run toward the horses.\" He flaps his giant wings and is up several thousand feet in a matter of minutes. You aren't afraid because you became used to it from a very young age. He heads in the direction your horses are. They were grazing and drinking from a stream. They scuttle away from Redscale as he lands. \" So I fly above and scout the area.\"\n\n\"Tomorrow. We are gonna need rest and night is almost upon us. Plus we are gonna need to talk.\"\n\nHe gets into a comfortable resting position. \"Okay. What's on your mind?\"\n\n\"Does the name Calivir sound familiar.\"\n\n\"Yes, that's my father's name.\"\n\n\"He's working with Quon.\"\n\n\"That's impossible!\"\n\n\"I saw him!\"\n\n\"What color are his scales?\"\n\n\"Black.\"\n\nHe looks down. \"Only someone can remember a dragon's scale color once if he's seen it.\"\n\n\"So you believe me?\"\n\n\"Yes.\" You two rest for the night. You know where to look first: Quon's old training grounds.", "action_results": [{"action": "Quon's Old Training Place", "result": "You woke early in the morning to see Redscale looking at the sunrise. \"Beautiful. Isn't it?\"\n\n \nYou look to see swirling colors of yellow, orange and a light red color of the rising sun. \"Might be the most beautiful sunrise I've ever seen.\"\n\n\"Where we going today?\"\n\n\"Quon's training grounds.\"\n\n\"We're rescuing the girl?\"\n\n\"Yes. Either we'll save her or die trying.\"\n\n\"Why are we going there?\"\n\n\"Its the only lead we've got. Do you know where Igor's Tower is?\"\n\n\"No...\"\n\n\"Then that's where we check first. Fly above and keep watch for any guards, students, or demons of his.\"\n\n\"What of father.\"\n\n\"I couldn't beat him, but if you see Calivir you land at once! We need each other to finish this once and for all!!\"\n\n\"Understood.\" He takes off and soars above to keep watch over the land.\n\nYou arrive there in two days ride on your horses. It was once a plush place filled with flowers and life of all kinds. Now the place was a dead forest. No plants grew there and as your eyes could see there's no animal life. Redscale lands next to you. There stood the castle of Quon. Once a mighty place was now a former look of its former appearance. A destroyed castle. \"Let's go.\" \n\nYou ride to the former castle. You look around for any sign of Quon. No luck. Redscale sniffs the air around here. \"They were hear alright. Maybe four hours at best.\"\n\n\"Good going. Any sign of Kai?\"\n\n\"She's here.\"\n\n\"Now?\"\n\n\"Yes.\"\n\n\"Anyone else?\"\n\nHe had a sad face. \"Father's here too. Demons of all kinds too.\"\n\n\"We're going in. I know how hard it is to fight someone you love. I felt like Quon is my father, but now I lost that love. I feel as if something is not right in there.\" You walk in on Redscale's back. You see demons, but all they do is sneer and jeer at you. \"They don't stop us. Why?\"\n\n\"They want us to see what's in here. Let's go to the throne room.\" Redscale responds.\n\nWe go to the court room and there you beheld a sight you may never forget. Kai and Calivir was there.\n\n\"About time you got here. I see you rescued Redscale.\" Calivir sighs.\n\n\"What's the meaning of this father?\"\n\n\"I work with Quon.\"\n\n\"WHY!!!\" Redscale roars.\n\n\"To save you from this human who calls you his \"brother\".\" Calivir says calmly. Kai comes at you blade drawn. You get off his back with your sword drawn.\n\n\"She's being controlled.\"\n\nRedscale looks at me then snaps his head back. \"I'll never forgive you!\"\n\n\"I'm trying to save YOU!\" he shouts angrily shaking the room.\n\n\"I'm not asking to be saved. I DO think of him as my brother. We know how the other feels and thinks. We came for the girl. Give her to us.\"\n\n\"I'm afraid I can't do that.\"\n\n\"Why?\"\n\n\"She is under Quon's control. The only known way to break it is death.\"\n\n\"Zaron, take on Kai. I'll deal with Calivir.\" That's the first time you heard him say him by name.\n\n\"Kai, I'll make sure you won't die. Redscale, take on Calivir.\"\n\n \"Got it.\" His let's an inferno of flame at Calivir. The fight is on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Two Allies Fight", "result": "Forgive me Kai. I'll break this spell without killing you, you think as you go in. She cuts and hacks at you without stopping . Each cut is blocked though you must get on the offense. But how, you say to yourself deflecting a thrust. You could block or go on the offensive on your next move, but what would be the consquenses.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Offensive", "result": "You go on the offensive. You can't stay on defensive forever, so after her last blow you attack. Blow after blow you drive her back. Redscale battles his father and by the looks of it is winning. You let your guard down for a moment to get a cut in the arm. Damn, you say to yourself. You then recall leaving your shield with Amin. you block another one and respond with an overhand cut. She deflects it. You see an opening and leap on her . Both of you hit the ground with a THUD. Both of your swords slid on the ground beyond reach. She keeps on hitting you and you refuse to fight.\n\n\"Fight me.\" she says punching you in the face.\n\n\"N-n-n-no...\" you say as you fall to your side.\n\n\"WHY?!?\" she screams.\n\n\"Your my f-f-friend...\"\n\n\"Even friends fight.\"\n\nYou stand up to see her in a fighting stance. \"Not like this... friends fight... but not like this.\"\n\n\"JUST FIGHT ME!\"\n\nYou shook your head. \"Kai, are you happy? Do your parents condone this. Strike me down. If it makes you happy, then I'm happy.\" You smile.\n\n\n\nSomething is different now. An opening has been made. You take a chance and throw her on the ground. You reach for your blade with her coming at you. You trip her and keep her grounded by your knees pinning her to it. I hope this works. You grab the hilt and put the jewel to her forehead.", "action_results": [{"action": "Break the spell", "result": "The sword and jewel light up. She stops struggling and looks at you. \"Why am I on the ground?\" she asks. You lift her up and don't answer. All you do is hug her. \n\n\"I'm glad you're back.\"\n\n\"Where was I?\"\n\n\"Gone. But I found you again.\" She hugs you back and you feel that she's smiling. You know you will win this fight now.\n\nYou turn to see Redscale losing the fight. Claws and fangs were attacking him from each side. You turn to Kai. \"Let's help him.\"\n\n\"Come on.\" And you charge together.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Battle Calivir", "result": "You get in between the recovering Redscale and the towering Calivir. \"This ends here.\" Calivir merely laughs. He swings a claw at you and you roll out of its path. Redscale trys to stand but falls down.\n\n\"You are no match for me. You know of my kingship.\" You don't answer and aim for one of his legs. He flaps his wings and goes airborne. Kai goes and tends to Redscale. Calivir looks at her and aims a jet of fire at her. Redscale attempts to rise his head to shoot fire back but his head falls back down. \"KAI!\" you yell. Your sword all of a sudden blazes up with fire along the blade. You don't stare at it for long and aim it at the fire shooting at your friends. It goes and the fires collide. You move in the direction that Calivir's fire is. You align yourself with Calivir and wait. \n\n\"So you learn some new tricks. Big deal.\" He looks at you. \"You're more powerful, but it won't save you,\" Redscale recovers and is behind you within a second. Kai follows shortly.\n\n\"You're right. It won't. But I've got friends to help me. We become strong if we're willing to save each other in our darkest moments. I now realize it. But we will finish it now.\" You smile at them. Kai returns it but Redscale doesn't. He looks at you.\n\nCan you hear me. That's Redscale's voice in your head.\n\nRedscale, you think.\n\nYes. You can hear my thoughts and I yours. You have awakened your true power. Now let's use it.\n\nHow? you ask.\n\nBy protecting those you care for.\n\nI must protect them. This isn't our battle anymore: it will determine the fate of Varon. We must win!\n\nYou focus all your energy to fighting Calivir. Your attacks become lightning fast. Calivir has no time to block them and soon falls from the small wounds you gave him. Not enough to kill but make him unable to fight.\n\n\"So this is how it ends, huh.\"\n\n\"Redscale, you decide your father's fate.\" Redscale comes over and you see his wounds were all gone.\n\n\"I've decided to spare you. Though if you intervene again I'll have no choice but to end you.\"\n\n\"Why?\"\n\n\"You are my father, but tell me why you joined Quon.\"\n\nCalivir has the pain in his eyes like in the cave. \"I was a fool. He promised me I'd win my son's heart over Zaron. I bought into his lies and lost what I wanted most; your love.\"\n\n\"I always have loved you.\"\n\n\"Then why did you never visit me? I'd lost hope and my heart became bitter. I'd lost the wisdom that dragons poccess. All to that I'd thought you've forgot me, but my guess is you never had.\" \n\n\"Dragons never forget their relatives.\"\n\n\n\n\"Well since I'm not making it back you have a job.\" Redscale looked confused. \"Since I'm no longer able to be King of Dragons it is now your job. Rule over us with pride son. And may I speak with you Zaron.\" You walk up to him and kneel by his head. \"Forgive me for my blindness. I never saw what Redscale meant until now. Take care of Redscale. For... without him... you'll find out life is... hardly work living... at all.\"\n\nRedscale comes over and says to Kai and you, \"He may not have been perfect but nor is anyone else. He was a confused and saddened dragon. But in the end he was a hero. As the new king I must go announce my father's death and claim my right as king. Are you two coming?\"\n\n\"I am.\" you announce.\n\nHe looks at Kai. She sighs and says, \"I'm coming. Though know now that I am the princess of Varon and the dragons have never been fond of us. Since the war five hundred years ago we've managed to get along, though never really made up for it.\"\n\nRedscale says, \"I forgive your people for your past deeds. What happened then can be fixed by YOU. Zaron and Kai; you are now official representatives of the human race. Do you accept?\"\n\nYou answer for you two, \"We do. But what of our horses?\"\n\n\"You must sell them. Grab your shields and some food.\"\n\nYou nod and grab the shields and food. You then sell your horses to a traveling trader and go to the dragon's cave.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Dragon's Cave", "result": "With Calivir left in the castle you head out. Redscale gets down on his chest and you climb to grab a spike on his back to hold on to. You help Kai up and put her in front of you. \"Grab a spike and hold on.\"\n\nRedscale gets up and asks, \"Are you ready back there.\"\n\nWe are. You decide to answer through this new telepathic communication you two share. He goes up and you head in the direction of his clan's cave. \n\nAfter a few hours riding on his back a new mountain range comes into view. You and Kai look down to see wildlife of all kind. Flashes of animals you see are wolves, deer, moose, birds and fish. Plants can be seen as far as the eye can see. Do you like it? Redscale asked.\n\nIts great. It looks as if no human has been here forever, you respond.\n\nNo human ever has because of the dragons that live here, he says.\n\nHe turns right and heads to a small cliff on one of the mountains. A big cave stood there. \n\nI can see a dragon living here.\n\nPretty much anyone could see that. The clan would attack any human that came here without a dragon. They already saw us. So let me talk to them. Are you alright with that?\n\nWill they attack us, you ask.\n\nThey may. But they usually would question a dragon. Here comes one now, he says.\n\nA big silver dragon comes out and stands between you and the entrance. You stand there unconcerned by this dragon. It looks at you and simply nods as if he approves of you. But when he turns to Kai there is a different reaction. It is of confusion and anger. It finally speaks, \"Welcome to the Draco clan. Dragon, why are these humans here?\" The voice of it is female. Comparing the size to Redscale its at least a few centuries old. \n\n\"These are the human representatives. I'm Redscale and these are my traveling companions: my brother Zaron and Princess of Varon Kai.\" Redscale replies.\n\n\"Your brother? This human.\"\n\n\"Yes.\"\n\n\"You're Calivir's son. Is Calivir among us anymore?\"\n\n\"Unsure. He might have passed out in our fight. He's been working with the wizard Quon.\"\n\n\"Come.\" She heads in and you follow close behind Redscale.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow the dragon.", "result": "You head in and for about a hundred meters you can't see a thing. Kai puts her hand on yours making sure you weren't seperated from one another. You finally see a light up ahead and are amazed by what you see.\n\n There was a large hole at the top of the mountain, letting the sunlight through. Grass and flowers made the ground glow like a rainbow. Looking above, you see hundreds of caves varying in size and shape. Then dragons come of the caves and look down at the passing figures. Some gave looks of surprise, others hate, and others of happiness. You were led down another passage way to a fire lit room. Three large dragons and a small one the size of Redscale sat there. One was gold, one deep blue, another was red like Redscale, and forest green. Whoever these guys were they were expecting you. \n\n\"May I introduce the three elders of the Draco clan. The gold one is Haru, the green one Mia, the red one Scaro, and the young blue one Sea. And I'm Moon,\" the silver dragon says. \"Is there anything else you need elders?\" They shake their heads and Moon leaves. \n\nHaru moves in your direction. Haru looks at Redscale and nods. \"You'll be a fine dragon one day.\" Its voice is female. Haru then sets her eyes on Kai and you. \"You two are the first humans to ever set foot in our clan's caves. We knew Redscale had a human companion, but the princess of Varon is another story. We don't have any affection for your family girl.\"\n\n\n\n\"Do you still have a grudge against us?\"\n\nThe red dragon Scaro speaks up, \"May we speak of the matter of why they're here Haru? I have no affection for her either, but let's hear what young Redscale has to say.\"\n\nRedscale goes by us and says loudly, \"Dragon Circle, I bring grave news of Calivir and a request.\"\n\nThe green dragon Mia finally speaks, \"We will grant your request if its within our power, but what of Calivir?\"\n\n\"Calivir as you all know is king of the clan. Recently, he has been working in league with the wizard Quon. He and his demons captured me and brought me to a prison in Oscro. My companions rescued me for us turning to rescue Kai. We went to Quon's former castle to see Calivir waiting for us. He brainwashed Kai into fighting Zaron there, but he managed to break his control over her. We managed to overpower Calivir and after the battle, he named me king. I have no idea if he's still alive, but we need your help. We then had no idea for the location of Igor's Tower. We have roamed far and wide for if you don't know then no one knows.\" He finished the tale of your quest.\n\nHaru looks mad at Kai and says, \"We can't help.\"\n\nThat gets you mad, but your teachings taught you to be calm at all times.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Mad", "result": "\"What do you mean you can't!\" you yell. Haru was surprised by your outburst.\n\n\"We know the location, but won't reveal it.\" That get's you even angrier.\n\nCalm down, Redscale says in your mind.\n\nShe is just annoying.\n\nLet me handle handle it.\n\nFine, you grumble. You start to calm down and eventually regain your senses.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Calm", "result": "\"Dragon Circle\", Redscale roars, \"My father has named me the new clan king. So as the new king I order you to tell me the location of Igor's Tower.\"\n\nHaru sighs. \"Fine. Young Sea here will take you.\" She motions for the young blue dragon to come over next to her. \"She will take you to Igor's tower and help you end this darkness over the land. She's one of our greatest fighters and will fight to her last breath.\"\n\nYou calmly wait for Redscale to respond. Finally he says, \"What of my kingship?\"\n\n \nScaro replies, \"You are a young king, so we will advise you until you're old enough to make your own decisions.\"\n\nMai says, \"You must return once you finish. Return them to the Varon capital and we will announce your new rule.\"\n\n\"And as for you Kai.\" Haru swipes a claw at her. You react and block it with your shield. You draw your sword and its blade gleams with glee. Mia and Scaro moved quickly for their age between you and her. Scaro screams, \"Haru! Return to your cave at once!\"\n\nShe prowls out with anger. You bow to the dragons. They incline your bow with a nod.\n\nSea speaks to you three, \"Let's spend the night here.\"\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Rest.", "result": "Both dragons fly up to Sea's cave. It was like a regular cave. Everything made of stone. The two dragons retire as Kai and you head out and sit on the edge of the cliff. Kai finally says, \"Why'd you come and rescue me from Quon?\"\n\n\"Well I could not leave you. Why'd you not leave yet?\"\n\n\"I don't know why.\"\n\n\"This place is pretty.\"\n\nShe seems sad. You can tell by this next response, \"Sure. Its really pretty...\"\n\nYou now are concerned about her. What could be bothering her? \"What's wrong?\"\n\n\"When this is all over I'm gonna have to marry that creep Warren. He's three times my my age.\"\n\n\"Do you have a choice?\"\n\n\"Why? They arranged this years ago.\"\n\n\"You have a choice.\"\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\"To marry someone YOU love. Not some guy they tell you to.\"\n\nShe smiles and leans close to you. \"You're right.\" She kisses you. You're shocked yet somehow pleased. You are close together until Redscale comes out. You both don't see him until he says, \"Having fun?\"\n\n Kai pulls back almost immediately. She gives you a hug and goes in the cave. \"Why'd you have to ruin the moment?\"\n\n\"For rest.\"\n\nKai is in a corner. You look in a bag you brought and hand a blanket to her. \"Time to sleep.\" You turn and she grabs your wrist.\n\n\"You are sleeping by me tonight.\" You nod. You fall asleep in each others arms smiling. You dream of a wonderful future you will have with her. For once in your life you feel true love.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Shocking News", "result": "Last night is a night you'll never forget, but that's the past. Kai and you wake up early. Not that you wanted to but of the dragons making loud noises. You grab an apple from your bag and eat it. \"Let's head out,\" you say.\n\nMia and Scaro meet you outside of Sea's cave. Scaro whispers something to Mia and flys off. \"I've got grave news my friends. Scaro was flying toward Igor's Tower to see Quon's armies marchng toward Varon. Even having the second largest army in the world Varon would be wiped out. Unless...\"\n\nKai stepped foward with determination on her face. \"Unless what?\"\n\n\"Unless the dragons weren't mobilizing to help. We've been stuck in petty hate for years and are ready to reestablish our friendship with the Varonians. Will you help us Kai?\"\n\nKai smiled. \"I will help. And when I take my father's throne you will become honored counsel members.\"\n\n\"Thank you. Now you must go warn your father and have him mobilize your army. We will come when we are ready.\"\n\nRedscale comes and asks Mia, \"Have you told them of the Circle's choice?\"\n\n\"I have.\"\n\n\"Then go prepare. We will go visit the king.\" She flys off and Redscale says to you, \"We are gonna need a whole lot of luck to win this.\"\n\nKai laughs. \"Don't worry. We have a great army in store for this. We faced threats like this before.\"\n\n\n\nYou step in. \"Come on you two. We have a job to do.\" Sea comes from another cave further down and comes to you. \n\n \n\n\n\n\"I'm coming to.\" There was not any disagreements on it and Kai gets on Sea's back while you Redscale's. You head in the direction of the Varon capital Yeli. ", "action_results": [{"action": "To Warn a King", "result": "You fly in the direction of Yeli. Yeli is the most populated city in Varon. The first wall was in your eyesight and guards see you, yet don't stop you. You head over the city and people look up. The color drains from their faces and the run in the nearest building. The castle loomed in the distance and had a second wall protecting it. \"Land in by the entrance,\" you tell Redscale. \n\nThe two dragons land by the two large doors that go into the castle. Further down guards came and surrounded you in a circle. A man in the group comes foward. He studies you and Redscale. Then looks at Sea and sees Kai on her back. That shocks him. He stammers, \"W-w-what are y-y-you doing on a d-dragon?\"\n\n\"Captain!\"\n\n \"Yes.\"\n\n\" Fetch my father. We have a horrible situation coming our way. And hurry!\"\n\n\"Yes mistress.\" And goes to get the king.\n\nThe king sends you to his chambers to talk to him. He was a large man. He wore the traditional robes of the royal family. Its color was a deep saphire and gold. He looks with interest as Kai and you enter his private study. He finally talks, \"You have put me in a deep issue here. Kai... you are supposed to be at Lord Warren's palace by now. He sent message that you never came.\"\n\n\"I was ambushed and fled while my escort held this large group of bandits off. This is a discussion another time. You have a larger threat in the making.\"\n\nHe walks around the room pondering that thought. \"I see no threat large enough to be of concern.\"\n\nYou shake your head. The king sees and asks, \"Who may you be?\"\n\nYou respond, \"The one who saved your daughter.\"\n\n\n\n\"Why didn't my daughter return here then?\"\n\n\"She offered to come along in my quest to save my dragon.\"\n\n\"I'm afraid you can't do that.\"\n\n\"It was already done.\"\n\n\"I thank you for saving her, but why are you still here then?\"\n\n\"To stop my old master Quon.\"\n\n\"What do you mean?\"\n\nKai interrupts, \"He turned evil long ago. He took control of my mind and Zaron here saved me. He made an army large enough to destroy Varon. They are coming here as we speak.\"\n\n\"Then there's no hope.\"\n\nYou say, \"There still maybe is.\"\n\n\"Where?\"\n\n\"The dragons have overcome the hate of Varon and are mobilizing to help.\"\n\n\"Only the king can be giving that order and Calivir would never do that.\"\n\nYou can feel the pain in his voice. \"Calivir is no longer among us as we know, but his son is my brother and he issued the help of the Draco clan.\"\n\n\"May I speak with him?\" the king asks.\n\n\"Follow me.\" All three of you head out to Redscale and Sea. ", "action_results": [{"action": "King to King", "result": "The dragons were lying down in the courtyard where you last saw them. The king had a worried look on his face. They got up and look down on Kai's father. \"You are the king I presume\", Redscale asks.\n\nThe king gets over his nervousness and responded, \"Welcome to Yeli. What makes you come to Yeli?\"\n\n\"The threat of a madman's demons. We have come to aid you and the dragons will join later.\"\n\n\"We must first come to the issue with you three now. Our army will prepare for this at once. First I've got to start with Zaron.\" He looks at you. \"I don't agree with what daughter and you did, but it may have saved us. I will have to have a fully detailed report on what happened between the rescue of your dragon to your arrival here. Please don't lie on anything. Come to my private chambers tonight. And Kai too. Dragon, may I speak with you alone?\" Redscale nods and they walk off in another direction. \n\n \nKai and you walk towards her father's private chambers. You come to a door with an eagle symbol on it. You knock and a male voice answers, \"Come in.\" You go inside the room.The king sat on his bed. It was large and had the most exspensive bedwear out in the kingdom. His look was of pain and sorrow. \"Sit there\", he said pointing to a pair of wooden chairs. He gets up and walks back and forth between Kai and you. \"I've recieved a message from Warren asking why Kai isn't there. I responded to him of what happened to the escort and what transpired between you. He is to arrive at morning tomorrow, but what I called you here for is something to do with the marriage between Warren and you Kai.\"\n\nYou speak up, \"Why am I here sir?\"\n\n\"Call me Ponis. And because I have a suspicion something may have happened between you two. I'm not angry, but there may be some issue with it.\"\n\nKai's body froze up. You had a similar feeling in your body. Kai recovered and was the one who spoke up for the two of you, \"I'm going to have to say a kiss and a bit more. I don't think the marriage with Warren is what I want. I don't love him.\"\n\n\"I do understand. I fell in love with someone of nonroyalty. It was your mom Kai. If you do love him I will support you.\"\n\n\"I do.\"\n\nHe smiled. \"Then may the gods look over you two. You may go. We will talk of this tomorrow with Lord Warren.\" Both of you go to your bedrooms for the night.", "action_results": [{"action": "Redscale explains", "result": "Before you went to bed you went talk to Redscale. This power thing between Redscale and you has been something the occasion to talk of never offered till now. You went to the courtyard since there was nowhere in the palace big enough for him, so you walk up and sit next to him. Is there a problem?\n\nThere is Redscale. Its the entire power that we share. One is how my sword changed its appearance and has different abilities. Also how we can talk through thinking? How is this even possible?\n\nRedscale laughs. He responds, Many people over the ages in different places had bonds like ours. We are known as Entrin by the dragons. Or in your language known as Dragon Rider. We share feelings, thoughts, and are even considered realatives by some. The bond gets so strong by a human and dragon at times that supernatural things may happen. Just like your sword for example. There are none known aside from you and me since the war between our races. \n\nWhy was there a war?\n\nHe looks to the night sky. You look at them with them and see thousands of little dots up there. Redscale answers, Its like those stars. Two worlds collide with different beliefs and traditions than the other. The stars represent the lives of humans and dragons. I can't say who's fault it is who started the war, but can say it killed it millions. People in and out of the war. So its just as bad. Though good came from it. \n\nWhat?\n\nThe bonds that came between our races. It became the strongest link to connect humans and dragons, but evey person with a bond with a dragon took it very seriously. Now go rest . For you will need it for Lord Warren's arrival tomorrow. You leave Redscale and go to your room for the night.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Lord Warren's arrival", "result": "You are dreaming of a bright future with Kai and Redscale. You are the king of Varon and are sitting at a large round table. There are knights all around it. You seee them arguing about something. A pounding starts and you jump up. \"What's that?\" Your knights look at you with a worried glance. One of them gets up and looks at you. The pounding resumes until everything goes dark.\n\nYou launch up in your bed. You look at the door and the pounding was something from there. A voice said, \"Get dressed and to the court yard.\" Someone left you a new outfit: a expensive silk shirt with a detailed drawing of a red dragon on it with a jacket to put over it. A pair of pants with a belt so you could have your sword with you. Finally with a pair of boots. \n\n\"Nice clothing.\" You get dressed and strap your sword on. You head to the courtyard to await the arrival of Warren.\n\nIt turns out you didn't have to wait. Ponis, Kai, and a man of sixty stood there. He had snow with hair and had a scar below his left eye. You walk up to hear him say in a raspy voice, \"... but the marriage was made years ago!\" \n\nPonis repiles, \"I'm sorry old friend, but she already loves a man.\"\n\nThe man says angrily, \"Who may this coward be?\"\n\nThis man is getting on your nerves, but you announce your presence to them, \"Fair day to you three I suppose?\"\n\nThe man turns to you. \"Who may you be?\"\n\n\"Zaron.\"\n\nHe nods. \"So your this Zaron character I've heard about. You love Kai I suspect?\"\n\n\"I do.\"\n\n\"And you know of...\"\n\n\"The marriage. We talked about it.\"\n\n\"Then you must know the rules of that interference? You know peasants can't marry a royal family member?\"\n\n\"I'm familiar with them, but there is a way they can.\"\n\n\"And that is?\"\n\n\"Is that if the courter is beaten in single combat that he drops any rights to the member of the royal family. If my assumption is correct Ponis?\" He nods.\n\n\"You think you can beat me boy?\"\n\n\"I know I can!\"\n\n\"I have won some of the greatest single combats in history, You scared?\"\n\nYou look at Kai and smile. Then return to his glance and frown. \"I've beaten stronger people than you.\"\n\n\"Then I Warren accept your challenge.\" He draws his sword and prepares to fight.\n\nYou go for your sword until Kai says, \"Wait.\" She walks up to you and gives you a long kiss that makes your mind feel like its melting. She steps back and whispers, \"Please defeat him.\" \n\nYou give her a kiss on the forehead. \"I'll win. Just like the battle with Quon.\" You draw your blade. Its red blade flashes with glee.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack", "result": "You attack him with swordcuts from all angles. He is forced to block them. You manage to get a cut on his left arm. He jumps back and preapres to attack.\n\n \n \n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack again", "result": "You attack again to keep the momentum up. You continue the attack and push him back. He tries to attack and he gets cut in several different places. Its tiring you out.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack again", "result": "Your fatigue sets in and you fall to your knees, so you don't see his blade come toward your head. The ground is the last thing you ever see.\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Defend", "result": "You go on the defense while he wears his strength down. He goes blow after blow and on his face you you can see his exhuastion grow. He stops to catch his breath and that's when you strike.\n\nYour age helps because of endurance. He recieves blows all over his body and he falls to the ground. Warren coughs blood from his mouth and mutters, \"D-d-do what y-y-you want with m-m-me.\"\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Spare Him", "result": "\"You may have some great victories in the way of the sword, but I have more duty to rid this land of a great evil. You may live, but never return to Varon. And if you do I'll have no choice but to end you... forever.\"\n\nHe gets up and with his old gaze replies, \"I acknowledge defeat. I retake any claim I've got to Kai. You are a worthy man to marry her. May you two live in harmony for all enternity.\" He bows to you and asks to King Ponis, \"May I see your healer?\" \n\n\"You may.\" For that is the last time you see Warren .\n\nA few hours later when a feast is prepared for your victory a messager comes and announces, \"The dragons are here.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Dragons' Arrival", "result": "The dragons filled the courtyard as you exit the castle. Ponis come close behind with Kai and whispers, \"Oh my god!\"\n\n\"They won't hurt you,\" you assure him.\n\nHe gulps and says, \"I hope so.\"\n\nRedscale came through the mass of dragons and heads in your direction. He says, \"There's five hundred thousand of us here. The others will be defending our home.\"\n\nPonis replies, \"That's good. How far is Quon from Yeli?\"\n\n\"I'd say two weeks away.\"\n\n\"I'll go prepare a meeting with my generals. Come as soon as you announce what to do.\" He leaves leaving Kai, Redscale, and you with the other dragons. You say, \"Let's get started.\"\n\nRedscale nods and lets go a big roar to tell the other dragons to quiet down. He speaks loudly so every dragon could hear, \"We have come to an end of an era of hate and mistrust between our races. We have all agreed to fight together to stop a threat in a man we always trusted: Quon! A man who twisted Calivir's way of peace and trust to hate and bitterness. A man who capture a dragon against his will. A man who wants to destroy both our way of living. I say we work as one to stop this threat. I came to care for a human. So much that the bond we thought never would happen again did happen. Entrin, dragons, Entrin! The bond between a dragon and human. I have bonded with Zaron, but we share more than what our legends say. We have done more than any other pair that has existed. Dragons, will we fight to keep our ways the same or forever killed?\"\n\n\"Fight for freedom,\" the dragons yell.\n\n\"Now let my friend speak. Zaron.\"\n\nYou walk up and nod. You say as loudly as possible, \"We have come together for a common cause: Quon's death. All of you should hide in the forest and wait for his flying demons. The final confrontation will be between Redscale and me against Quon. We will be prepared. Please try not to terrify Yeli. All of you may head to the forest.\"\n\nThey head to the forest, but the red dragon Scaro stayed for a second. He said, \"After the meeting come to the forest to talk.\" He flys off.\n\n\"Kai, let's go to the meeting. Redscale, wait for us to be done. Go with your clan for now.\" He flys away and you mutter, \"What a day it has been.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "A Plan", "result": "You follow Kai to the meeting room with Ponis and three large men waiting for you. All sat at a circular table with a map of the surrounding areas. They had little wodden figures on it to represent varon's troops, the dragons, and Quon's demons. You took a seat next to one of the generals and Kai sat next to her father. Ponis stood up. Zaron. I'd like you to meet Generals Aso, Tumera, and Ferka.\" The one named Aso was a large blond headed man who looked to have years of experience in battle. Tumera was a dark skinned man who must have been a general for a short time. Ferka was the one who was the pale one of them, but he looked to be a good strategist. You shook their hands and sat to begin the meeting. Ponis said, \"All the citizens will be sent to our ally Skania. I got the emperor's approval. All the provisions will be provided. Now onto the battle plan.\" \n\nFerka says, \"We have one your Majesty. We came up with it while you told us of the dragons. We will have the dragons handle our arial combat while the troops handle the ground. My 7th Legion will defend the courtyard and town area.\"\n\nTumera says, \"My 1st Division will handle the gate areas.\"\n\nAso finishes, \"And my 2nd Division will fight further out.\"\n\nPonis says, \"Okay. What will Zaron do?\"\n\nAso answers, \"He will be in my 2nd Division fighting outside with my soliders. Kai will help defend the castle.\"\n\nKai looked steamed. Though replies calmly, \"I'll fight further out. I'm fighting with Zaron and there's no stopping me.\"\n\nAso stammers, \"But princess...\"\n\n\"That's final.\"\n\n\"Fine. This meeting is dismissed.\"\n\nEveryone leaves the meeting room. You go to where you sent Redscale to see what's he wants.", "action_results": [{"action": "Continue", "result": "You think of what could trouble Scaro. Nothing comes to mind as you head through Yeli with speed. Kai and her advisors are talking over some private matters, so she couldn't come. Ponis was too nervous to even consider to. The generals were busy preparing to evacuate the citizens, but you were given no job. It gave you the free time to do as you please, but since Scaro has to talk you should see what he has to say.\n\nYou head out the gate and see the first wave heading out the northeast gate. You say to yourself, \"I wonder what would have happened if Redscale never came into my life, but I wouldn't have it any other way.\" You smile and head for the forest with that thought. \n\nYou look around for sign of the dragons. They had a habit of scorching trees and have tend to leave huge footprints. You walk for a few hundred yards until you see a few dragons flying overhead. You follow under them until you come to a large open area. The dragons were talking to each other and stop and look as you walk by them. You have to walk to the center of their little camp until you see Scaro, Redscale, and the green dragon Mia. Scaro sees you and motions for you to come to him. He says, \"Haru betrayed us. She was working for Quon the whole time. We were fools. Her place will be taken by Sea, but where is she?\"\n\n\"Oh, Sea? She's with Kai. She seems to have taken a liking to her,\" you reply.\n\nHe laughs. \"Seems your bad influence is starting to rub off Redscale.\"\n\nHe snorts. \"I doubt it.\"\n\n\"It is! It is! You may be a great king one day.\"\n\n\"Thanks. And how is it?\"\n\n\"The bond you and Zaron share made her think of it.\"\n\n\"Fair enough. What is the plan?\"\n\n\"Haru will most likely be carrying Quon. What most people don't know is past Dragon Riders have worn a dragon's saddle. Its used to keep the rider safe from the dragon's scales. We have one here that was newly made from an ally. Its for you Zaron. It is like a horse's saddle, but made for dragons. I'll tell you how to put it on. It has two safety buckles on the bottom to made sure it doen't move around. They are in between a middle buckle to make sure you have it on before you do the other two. You would see two footholds going down with a long piece of strong cloth. Step in it and sit in the saddle. That's about it.\"\n\n\"Where is it?\"\n\n\"Its behind me. Train for awhile. It will come in handy in tough predicaments. It won't matter how bigger Redscale is, but have a good time flying safer in the sky. You may go.\"\n\nYou bow to them and put the saddle on Redscale. He takes flight and its basically the same without the saddle. Still you decide to practice just in case.", "action_results": [{"action": "The first invasion", "result": "The days went by with training with your sword, to your nights spending with Kai, and to the hours training as a Dragon Rider with the dragons. Life would be great if it wasn't for Quon, but you already are ready for him. The thing you don't know is that a preinvasion Quon had. You were in the castle learning about Kai's backround and family history when the invasion started. Bells rang and you leap out to head to the courtyard. Redscale was fighting demons off. None got to him. He slashed and bit and smacked all of them around leaving none left standing.\n\nRedscale!!!\n\nI'm fine. Get on. You were flying earlier and left it on for the invasion. You get on and he begins to circle the city. Demons and soliders were fighting off demons at every corner. He returns to the courtyard to you see Sea and Kai there. They both looked worried. \"Kai, it's hell out there.\" \n\n\"Well that's bad. I also got a saddle for Sea. We decided we're partners since we are similar in many ways.\"\n\n\"Great!\"\n\n\"We going to fight?\"\n\n\"From above.\" Your both in your saddles and get in the air. You draw your sword and Redscale and Sea flew upside down so you could slash demons. This is around the time when they began to retreat. You watch until they are no longer in view.\n\nThe deaths were in the hundreds. You were all over and did many jobs. The final fight will start the next day.", "action_results": [{"action": "The final invasion starts", "result": "You were summoned to the throne room. Kai, Sea, Redscale and Ponis were there talking as you got there. \"... no way Zaron can win,\" Ponis says as you walk up.\n\n\"Win against who,\" you ask.\n\nHe jumps. \"When did you get here?\"\n\n\"Just now.\"\n\n\"Quon's army did some serious damage, but we have millions of soliders left to the hundreds we left.\"\n\n\"Were you saying I wouldn't beat Quon?\"\n\n\"I did.\"\n\n\"Well I'll win.\"\n\nThen a pounding noise was outside. It shook the whole castle. You were to put on a suit of armor. You did that and wore a suit of armor made of ruby, metal fused into it. Then that's where the talking stopped. \n\nQuon has arrived. \"Redscale!\" Both of you rush outside. You see him and Haru waiting in the sky above. You mount Redscale and he flaps his wings with strong gusts of wind and pushes himself into the sky.\n\n \n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Quon's Challenge", "result": "You head in the direction of Haru. Quon was in his saddle. His snow white hair became much clearer on his pitch black armor. He had a golden sword in one hand and a shield in the other.\n\nYou drew your sword. Its red blade gleemed in the morning sun. A smile crosses Quon's ancient face. \"So its come down to student and teacher. Will you back down?\"\n\n\"We won't.\"\n\n\"Join us! We can teach you so much. We could make all your desires come true!\"\n\n\"My dreams are here. With Kai, Redscale, and Sea. They're my desires.\"\n\n\"Then I suppose you leave me no choice.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Redscale blows fire", "result": "Redscale blows fire at them. The fire hits them and you think its over. You can't see as smmoke covers the area they're at. The smoke clears and they were not even damaged. He smiles and Haru does the same to you. Redscale flys sharply left to avoid the flame. You can't get why the fire didn't hurt them, but you don't dwell on it for long.\n\n \n \nThey move in and it's now close combat. You aim for a leg on Quon and he blocks you sword with his own. The fight between you and him with the dragons is getting you nowhere. He gets a pleasant look in his face and says, \"Let's do this alone.\"\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "A Long Fall", "result": "Quon snaps his fingers. A rumble went through Redscale's body and he begins to fall to the ground. \"Redscale! Redscale! Are you okay,\" you ask nervously.\n\n\"I can't move my body!\" He wiggling underneath you, but still no major body movement. Looks like the end of you two. In your mind it goes the other way. I can't die here. We came too far to lose now. He defeated Redscale so easily with his magic. I need the power, you say to yourself. You know that your family used to use magic for the royal court to help the people of Varon. You hope that the power is somewhere in you that remained dormant, but its unlikely. You get mad. Then some spark of unknown energy sparks through your body. Redscale begins to slow down and lands in the city unharmed. You slide out of the saddle as Redscale landed. \n\nRedscale collapses to the ground. \"I can't move. Looks like you'll have to fight on your own...\" Redscale is either dead or knocked out, but that makes you check for signs of life just to make sure. He's breathing, so he should be fine. Your anger is flaring and you look at Quon in the sky to see him smiling.\n\nThe fighting is further down the street. Among the fighting is Kai who saw what happened and runs over to you. Your anger is preventing you from noticing her. She says, \"Zaron, is Redscale okay?\"\n\n\"He's unconcious, but he should be fine.\"\n\nShe sensed something. Something abnormal, so she looks at you to see a red aura coming from your ruby armor. \"Your armor is glowing.\" \n\n\"I know,\" you reply.\n\n\"You were falling to fast to slow down by normal means, so you must have used...\"\n\n\"Magic. I did to save Redscale. I didn't know how to use magic until now. My family as you know used magic all those years ago to aid the royal family.\"\n\n\"But yours is aided by your anger. You must calm down.\"\n\n\"I... can't.\"\n\n\"You can. What would Redscale say?\"\n\nThat snaps you back into reality. You have a short thought on what'd he say. He'd tell you magic is the energy that flows through the kindness of people and all living things. Its possible to do many things. Your breathing slows down and you can think clearly now. \"Thanks. I'm better.\"\n\n\"You have a better chance to beat Quon now. You can use magic, but don't through rage.\"\n\n\"Okay. But what of Redscale?\"\n\nShe gives you a kiss on the cheek and says, \"I'll tend to his injuries. Now go and fight.\" She starts to care for Redscale's wounds. You run in the other direction to the gate to get to Quon and Haru.", "action_results": [{"action": "To fight alone", "result": "You dash out the gate and head in the direction of Quon. He is still airborne. Haru begins to lower herself to give Quon and her a better fighting zone. \"So you have unlocked your hidden power?\"\n\nYou don't answer as you get into a fighting stance. He sighs. \"Why do you always want to do the the hard way? You were always like that and still are.\" Haru breathes fire at you.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Block with shield", "result": "You block the fire with your shield and jump left. Quon shoots electricity before you can attack and you roll out of the way. You use your magic to lift Quon from his saddle and throw him to the ground. You'll have to fight a two on one battle, but you know you can't die until they are dead.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack Quon", "result": "You aim for Quon. He is the reason that this battle is taking place. It's hard at first since of Haru, but eventually you come up with ideas to move around her to attack Quon. He becomes more desperate as he knows your gaining control of the fight.\n\n \nHe began to attack you from a sides and was getting more reckless. Soon he began to regain his senses and used magic on you. You block most of it, but a lighting bolt hits you in the chest and you fly back to hit a large rock. You see them above you ready to finish you when a fire blast knocks them away.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "An Unexpected Arrival", "result": "You are struggling to focus when a familiar voice, but faint, say, \"I suppose I'll fight with you.\"\n\n\"Who... are... you?\"\n\n\"You mean you don't remember me?\" Your eyes begin to refocus and you see a former foe: Calivir. That was a shocking since the last time you saw him he was on the brink of death. He stood over you looking for you to get up. \"Come on. It won't take long for them to recover.\"\n\nYou get to you feet and look at him. \"You are going to help me?\"\n\n\"I'll fight till my last breath. I will die anyway because of my injuries. I found an old friend who put a temporary spell on me that will help me fight with you. Where's Redscale?\"\n\n\"With Kai trying to heal him. We fought them and we were tossed around like we were like children.\"\n\n\"I'll hold them off. Redscale will have to fight Haru alone. You on the other hand will fight Quon alone. The dragons in the sky are aware of me and the spell. I'll seperate them.\"\n\n\"No. We fight together.\"\n\n\"Fine. Get on my back.\"\n\n \n \n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Redscale Recovers", "result": "Redscale begins to regain his senses. He moves his legs, tail, and neck. He opens his eyes to see the princess Kai over him. \"What is it, Kai?\"\n\n\"Oh! Your awake? You'd better hurry.\"\n\n\"Why?\"\n\n\"Zaron is fighing alone.\"\n\n\"Not for long!\" Redscale opens his wings and flies off looking for Zaron's scent. \n\nKai stood there alone. She sighs. \"These two were made for each other.\" She laughs to herself.\n\nA man comes up and says, \"You are needed Kai.\"\n\n\"And so here we go.\" She heads off in the direction of where she's needed.", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight with Calivir", "result": "You got on Calivir's back and got ready to continue the fight. Haru got back in the air and stood about thirty meters away from Calivir. Quon was rubbing the back of his like he's hurt. He says, \"Well this is shocking. Calivir, I thought you were dead. And to think you'd betray me. Yes, very shocking indeed.\"\n\nCalivir merely snarls at Quon. \"What now Zaron?\"\n\n\"We fight.\" He launches a ball of fire from his jaws and aims it at them. \n\n That made him go on the defense and you ask what will you do next?", "action_results": [{"action": "Sword", "result": "You have Calivir go in close so you can use your sword. That was your mistake. He was wanting close combat. He cuts your back and then stabs your heart. He cuts Calivir and then Haru finished the job.\n\n \n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Magic", "result": "You feel the power of magic flow through your veins. This power was yours and you focus all of it against Haru and Quon. You used fire, lightning, water, and much more against the pair. They couldn't keep this hell away. Quon smiles. Of all the things he can do, he smiles. Then he looked at Calivir.\n\nHaru moved in and Quon stabs Calivir in the heart. You tried to stop him, but were a split second too late. \"NOOOOO,\" you shout. You begin to fall to the ground once more.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Redscale returns to a death", "result": "The fall was a foggy memory as Calivir and you fell. You come to see Calivir lying on the ground next to you. You move your arms and legs to make sure you could move. You could move without any pain, but you remember what happened and rushed to Calivir. His breathing was faint. He says, \"I hope your okay.\"\n\n\"I-I-I-I am, but what of you?\"\n\nHis mouth seems to have formed a smile. \"I won't make it. I have an idea how to defeat them.\"\n\n\"How?\"\n\n\"You must seperate them.\" Redscale appears over the horizon and lands next to you. He sees Calivir and moves back a few steps.\n\n\"Father...\"\n\n\"Redscale my boy. How good is it to see you.\"\n\n\"You're...\"\n\n\"Dying. Yes, I am. I want one last wish before I pass on.\"\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\"Protect Zaron and live a full, happy life. Goodbye... my... sons.\" And he closed his eyes for the last time.\n\nYou look at Redscale. \"Are you okay?\"\n\n\"I'm fine.\"\n\n\"I hope so. I got a plan to beat those two.\"\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\"Seperate them.\"\n\nThey come in the distance. You use a spell and Quon was lifted from his saddle and tossed in another direction. Redscale flys off and tackles Haru in the opposite direction.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "One on One", "result": "You head in the direction Quon landed. He was on his knees when you reached him. \"It ends now,\" you snarl at him.\n\n\"I couldn't agree more,\" he replied. You two begin to exchange sword blows. He was getting the advantage. You block his cuts and attack back. He had a hurt expression on his face. That gives you confidence. You attack him until you began to push him back. All the anger and pain was involved in these cuts. He misses a block and you get him in the chest. He falls. You look over him.\n\n\"Quon, traitor of Varon, you are hereby sentenced to death.\" You stab him in the heart and end his life. Fatigue sets in and you fall to your knees. \"So I may die as well. I am happy to rid this land of Quon. If I die, farewell my friends.\" And you fall down into a black conciousness.", "action_results": [{"action": "Celebration", "result": "You wake in your room and see Kai sitting by your bedside. She has a sad look on her face. You feel happiness and launch up to give her a hug. \"I did it, Kai, I did it.\"\n\nShe was in shock and recovers to say, \"I know, but at the price I thought was I lost you.\"\n\n\"It'd be hard to get rid of me.\"\n\nShe laughs and gives you a big kiss. \"I know. I think I'd perfer it that way.\"\n\n\"I do too.\"\n\n\"What will you do now?\"\n\n\"Stay here with Redscale and you.\"\n\n\"I think Redscale must leave.\"\n\n\"Why?\"\n\n\"He's the king of his clan and must rule them.\"\n\n\"I suppose. And you?\"\n\n\"You should know that.\" She laughs and and gives you another kiss.You leave the room and go outside to see everyone celebrating. With Kai there you go out.A party was made and you party all night. You drank, danced and talked a more than you did your entire life. Everything is how it is supposed to be. Life couldn't be better, so you go to see Redscale.", "action_results": [{"action": "Seperation of Brothers", "result": "Redscale stood in the moonlight. He looked at the heavens above him. \"I'll have to leave you,\" he said as you came to him.\n\n\"Kai said that you may have to.\"\n\n\"Are you okay?\"\n\n\"I am. For I have Kai and you, no matter how far we are apart we will talk through on minds.\"\n\nThat we can.\n\n\"Hahahaha, don't need to do that. I'm sure going to miss you.\"\n\n\"But I'll come and visit every month. That's true.\"\n\n\"Its sad what happened Quon, he was such a great man.\"\n\n\"His ways were twisted from what they once were.\"\n\n\"What shall happen to Sea?\"\n\n\"She's telling Kai what I'm telling you. I've decided she'll be my queen.\"\n\nA big grin came to your face. \"Otherwise your wife?\"\n\n\"In your language... yes.\"\n\n\"Goodbye brother.\"\n\n\"And fair winds to you brother.\" What he said is the old dragon goodbye, but no one knows whoever came up with it. You put a hand on side. He moved so he was face to face with you. He put his snout on your forehead and gazed into your eyes. All the memories you had together flashed into your mind. You smiled and for the last time he says, \"Goodbye brother.\" He flies off.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Final Words", "result": "Months have past since you married Kai. You are on the Varonian throne with Kai by your side. Ponis decides to go on a long trip. He sends you letters every few weeks. Redscale and Sea did become mates and had many children. He sent one to you and it was a silver color to the egg. You smile and set it in a cushion. You are known as the Dragon King among your followers. For all you can do now is rest and wait. For your great journey is now over.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Dragon fire", "result": "\"Fire!\" Calivir lets loose an inferno of fire on Haru and Quon. Calivir was unleashing hellfire upon the unlucky pair. They get burned and they fall back. Calivir follows quickly behind them. Haru flys higher and you loose them. \"Where are they?\"\n\nCalivir responds, \"I don't know. They may be...\" He didn't finish because somehow they got below Calivir and Quon managed to stab his heart.\n\n\"Nooooooooo,\" you shout as you realized what happened. Calivir had no movement as you fell to the earth.\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Attack Haru", "result": "You try to remove Haru from the fight, but it was her that removed you. She clawed your stomach to make a big gash. Then breathed fire onto you. She bites you to finish the job.\n\n \n ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Use magic to block", "result": "You raise your hand to create an invisible wall and the fire goes to the right, left and up. The power slides you back a little bit, but your otherwise unharmed. Quon was already on you with a sword cut and you block it with your sword. You attack a leg of Haru and get a deep cut in it. She roars of agony of the pain. You strike them with a combination of attacks. Some connect and others don't. You somehow manage to get under them to deal a finishing blow.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Stab Haru", "result": "You manage to stab Haru. She roars and shoots fire at you. You roll out of the way and slash her again. She claws at you and manages to remove your helmet, but that just reveals your smile. Quon looks shocked. You guess that is how you are lasting so long against him without Redscale. \n\nHe keeps on the offense and becomes careless in his attacks. You hit Haru and him a few times. He then uses magic on you and you are being pushed back one step at a time. He hits a fire ball on you and sends you flying back. He gets ready to finish you when a dark shape rams Haru to send her in another direction.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Slash Quon", "result": "You slash at Quon. That's a mistake. He blocks it and hits your arm with his sword. He then hits a leg that makes you fall to the ground. He then cuts your head off to finish the job.\n\n \n ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Dodge", "result": "You dodge the fire, but Haru stops the flow and keeps it on you by closing her mouth to fire again. You dodge it a few times more until the fire hits you. It burns through the armor and burns you alive.\n\n \n ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Sword Slash", "result": "Redscale moves in quickly so you can get a sword cut on Quon. He's ready and blocks the attack and returns with lightning fast reflexes. You raise your shield and blocked the hit. The dragons were fighting with their teeth, claws, tail, and fire. One hoping to get an advantage. Quon and you are exchanging blows, but is hard because of the fighting dragons. Redscale, you need to back up. We need a better plan. \n\nWe don't have one. We attack until they die! And that's what you do. Or what you tried to do. It drags to a sword fight between Quon and you. He is getting made by the look on his face. The dragons fight below and its getting hard to fight Quon. He gets a annoyed look to his face.\n\n ", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Wait for him to attack", "result": "You wait for him to attack. Haru flys at Redscale, but he goes into a steep dive. He slows down by flapping his wings strongly to stop his fall. He rises up and faces them again. Redscale lets a jet of fire go at them and they stay there and get hit. For some reason you think it isn't over. You were right, for they were in the same place undamaged. There is something wrong, Redscale. \n\nI agree, but we may have to split up.\n\nThe fighting continues. You aim sword cuts at Quon and Haru. Some do damage and others don't. Redscale uses his claws on them and lands some while others are blocked or avoided. They return the attack by sword cuts and claws flinging at Redscale and you. The same results as you did to them. Quon has a nasty look in his eyes now.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Kill Him", "result": "\"You have my sorrow, Warren. I can't let you live though, for you may ruin my quest to kill Quon.\" You walk up and raise your blade and aim for his heart. His last breath is now forever lost in the sands of time. You look over to Kai and she's nodding.\n\nPonis comes over and says, \"Nothing could be done Zaron. He chose a young woman that a man had already claimed his love for. Warren's death was inevitable.\"\n\n\"I wish it may have turned out differently.\"\n\n\"As do I. Come! Let's have a feast in honor of your victory!\"\n\nYou feast for the next fews hours until a message came of the dragons' arrival.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Defend", "result": "You wait for him to attack. He attacks form all directions and gets no hits. He keeps going and hits a blow on your left leg. You step back for another solution.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Defend 2", "result": "You stay on the defense and he sword keeps coming at you. He seems he won't stop. You go to do something to turn this around.\n\n \n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Final Attack", "result": "You attack and attack ta him until you land a few hits on him and he falls to the ground. He has blood coming out of his whole body. He asks, \"Do you intend to kill me?\"\n\n\"I may.\" You don't feel right doing it, but he may be a threat later in life.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "Defend 3", "result": "You continue to defend and he lands a cut on your hand that's holding the sword. You drop your sword and hold your hand. He then stabs his through your heart.\n\n \n ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Defensive", "result": "You go on the defensive and keep blocking cut after cut. This is zapping your strength. You got to go on the offensive before she gets a lucky blow in.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay on defensive", "result": "You stay on the denfensive until a cut to the leg brings you down. Then a head blow finishes it.\n\nRedscale is recaptured and is come to believe his father's lies. Kai stay's under Quon's control who eventually takes over Varon.", "action_results": []}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Left (Up)", "result": "He may be up there since he's so big. You head up there to see at least twenty soldiers. You are able to kill half of them until they overwhelm you with numbers.\n\n \n \n \n ", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Redscale's Jail", "result": "Redscale wakes and smiles with glee. \"I'm in jail. Zaron will come. With his new sword he'll become the true Entrin.\" Or dragon rider. Redscale settles down for his noon meal. He hears a knock and a note appears at the door's bottom. Zaron taught him literature long ago. It reads:\n\n\n\nDragon,\n\nThis is your final night in this prison. Zaron will be killed and so with you. Enjoy your time in your cell. I'll see you later.\n\nMaster\n\nRedscale snorts and thinks, Zaron will be here before then.\n\n \n \n ", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "CHARGE!!!", "result": "You get your weapons ready for use. You dismount and run in ready. A man who's at least seventy years old is standing before you. He turns and smiles. \"I've been waiting for you.\" Without warning he uses some magic. A bolt of lightning hits Kai and kills her. Before you turn towards him, he launches a fire ball at you and burns you to death.", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Follow the demons", "result": "You follow them deep into the mountain.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story63.json b/data/scraper/stories/story63.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5aa1be2 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story63.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=11274", "context": "", "first_story_block": "You awake in a great hall, huge stone pillars holding up the high ceiling, fine stone art carved into the perfect marble walls. Couples dressed in medieval finery dance around you, ignoring the nearly naked man on the floor who just woke up. With surprise and embarrassment you realize you're only wearing a loose pair of breeches that only reach to your knees. You keep a hand on it to stop it from falling down.\n\n\n\"Ah! Another one. I had just begun to believe the party was over. Seems the second round has started! Grab a lady and begin the dance anew. Oh, you might want to put something on first. Or not. Whatever you think is an appropriate way to celebrate!\"\n\n\nA man sits in a stone throne a few steps up in front of you. He stares at you with dark red eyes as he taps his bare feet on the lovely gold and red carpets. His pure white hair is pushed back over his head, over his ears, and under a dull plain looking iron crown, more like a simple iron circle than a crown. He puts his hand over his chin in a thinking position.\n\n\n\"On second thought; that is the perfect way to celebrate! Everybody naked! Brilliant my speechless friend! Haha, someone grab my friend here a partner!\" He jumps up and rips off his coat. \"Nevermind, I will!\" He grabs your hand and pulls you up, spinning you around and around.\n\n\nEveryone around you is going through the long process of undressing and he pushes you into the crowd, towards the only person done, a woman who gracefully catches you before you not very gracefully fall into the nearly naked bodies.\n\n\nYou don't know if this is a nightmare or a fantasy.", "action_results": [{"action": "Where am I?", "result": "She's behind you, holding you up. You get back your footing and turn around to face her. She grabs your hands and starts to dance, forcing you along. Her long black hair is pulled up into a ridiculous hairdo, nearly making you laugh, but her intense face stops you.\n\n\nYou open your mouth to ask the question, but she places one finger over her red lips.\n\n\nShe turns her head and looks at you.\n\n\nYou look around. The women have all stripped to down to their shifts and the men down to breeches or hose.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ignore her warning", "result": "As soon as you open your mouth again she pushes you away and stops dancing.\n\n\nThe crowd has stopped and is looking at you. The man, now minus his tight black pants, stares at you. You noticed that some of his guards are walking torwards you.\n\n\n\"Please, please, hold all questions until the end of the presentation.\" He claps and everyone resumes dancing.\n\n\nEveryone but you that is, as his guards have long since killed you and are now in the process of cleaning up the mess your blood leaves on the smooth tiles.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Keep quiet for now", "result": "Considering you have no idea what in the hell is happening, you decide to take her silent advice. You nod to let her know you understood her message. Her large lucious lips briefly show a tiny smile.\n\n\nShe leads as you slowly dance. She tries to bring you up to speed, but you've no talent for this.\n\n\nSuddenly, you hear it. A cacophony of bells and whistles, flutes and drums. The horrible sound is quiet at first, messy and brutal, but as the volume grows it becomes cleaner. The cruelty of the sound is transformed into music by the strings that fade in.\n\n\nAnd then your feet will themselves along. They know every move, exactly what to do, exactly when to do it. You hands are placed at just the right place on your partners body. You search for the source of the sweet sound, seeing the man sprinting and springing all around the room, screaming. The music is so loud you can only hear his roars of laughter as he passes by you.\n\n\nThe choir starts in and the sound feels like honey. The men at first, low basses, then the women join in, their high sopranos filling the air with such lovely wisps of beauty. You lean your head back and open your mouth to drink in the sounds.\n\n\nYour partner leans against you closely as dance, right against your chest, but the music is the only thought in your head and heart. Your body almost don't care.", "action_results": [{"action": "Quiet", "result": "And then it stops without notice. You nearly fall down, and would have, if it weren't for the support of your partner.\n\n\n \n\nThe strange man has stopped dancing, his laughter the only sound now. \"Stop! Stop stop stop! Everyone!\"\n\n\nThe people had continued dancing without the music, but now at his word they halt their movements.\n\n\nThe man looks around at them all. He squints his eyes and angles his head with a hand cupped around his ear.\n\n\n\"What? Time already? It can't be. Oh yes it is, is can be, because it is and therefore must be and can be. Oh well, next time, same time. And you, find some proper trousers . Here, you can have mine.\" He hands you his black pants. You reach out to take them, in shock.\n\n\n\"On second thought, no.\" He quickly grabs it back. He walks through the wall behind his throne, disappearing, all the while laughing.\n\n\nThe room breathes a collective sigh and everyone is searching the floor for their clothing.\n\n\nYour partner is putting on her clothes, and you avert your gaze.\n\n\nPeople all around are talking now, and she finally says something.\n\n\n\"Relax. I bet you have many questions. Come. We'll find you something to wear.\"\n\n\nYou open your eyes and she's wearing a simple grey outfit, probably something that went under the ridiculous dress she's carrying now. Her hair is down now, and you can't help but appreciate her stunning beauty.\n\n\nYou take a breath. You'll listen to her and keep quiet for now, at least until you have an inkling of what's going on. This feeling of tension inside you isn't just because you're mostly naked... But it probably would be better if you were wearing something proper. You blush.", "action_results": [{"action": "She guides you out of the room", "result": "She takes your arm and pulls you towards a corner of the great hall.\n\n\"The man you just met is Zaren. He's... Complicated. All you need to know right now is that he's God here. If he asks you to do something, it's not a question. You obey him. Without hesitation.\"\n\nShe pulls you through the stone blocks of the wall before you know what's happening. It's chilly on your naked skin and tickles slightly.\n\n\"A few decades ago Zaren had an argument with... with a door. Apparently, the door won, so he decreed that all doors be hung and then burned.\" She looks straight at you, not even blinking. \"It was a few years before he got sick of that and decided to introduce these fake walls.\" She pulls you through a narrow hallway, past tapesties of Zaren eating breakfast. In every single one he's moving. You can hear whispers coming from them, most of them asking if it's on. A few people pass you, guards and servants by their look. None of them gives you a second glance. You look in awe at the beautiful artwork on the walls.\n\n\"Oh my, I'm forgeting my manners. It's good Zaren isn't here. We must be quiet. He hears much of what is not meant for him. My name is Ophelia.\" She pulls you through a series of walls, all made of gorgeous stone with artwork carved into the individual blocks. \"It's been a long time since one has joined the upper ranks. Maybe you'll even last. Although I've never heard of someone... Well, just appearing out of thin air. Something that Zaren would do certainly, but I think he went through that phase a few hundred years ago. It's hard to remember all the things he does... You will be joining the upper rank, won't you? You must be, Zaren did not request your absence, as he calls it, or an execution, as we call it. So, why are you here?\"\n\nShe pulls you into a room full of mannequins and fabric, with colourful carpet on the floors, walls, and ceiling. \"I'm sure the Tailor will find something for you. So why you are here?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Where is here, exactly?", "result": "\"Oh my. Now that is a very good question. But here comes the Tailor.\" She turns around and curtsies towards the door.\n\n\n\"What -\" You stand there speechless.\n\n\nA man walks into the room and bows, a spotless fine black coat shimmering around his white furry torso, four furry little limbs poking out of the coat. They are end in three long, delicate fingers with little hairs at the base and bare human-like tips. His hairy legs have the same pattern, with his feet looking almost normal. Large wings are folded at his back, trailing on the floor.\n\n\nHis large black eyes poke out from his white fur and his human jaw opens to speak in a slightly buzzing voice.\n\n\n\"Hello, good lord. I am the tailor. I must say, your eyes are a wonderful colour. Such a light but intense brown. They will be a challenge to match correctly, but I will enjoy creating your outfits for you.\"\n\n\n\"What...\" You take a step back, bumping into a mannequin and accidently knocking it over.\n\n\n\"You will have to work on your coordination if you plan to be part of The Court. Dancing is quite popular here. But even if you fall or some such thing, you will look wonderful. Still, that is not my job. Now come over here, I must measure you. Take a look around at the outfits. You may find one you like.\"\n\n\n Ophelia stares at you and gestures. You timidly take a few steps forward.\n\n\nThe tailor places his finger tips on your arms, mummering to himself. \"Don't you need measuring tape for this?\" You ask.\n\n\n\"Measuring tape? Bah, I am better then the tailors you have known. A true master can look at a man for a second and make him a god within minutes.\"\n\n\n\"I've never known any tailors.\"\n\n\n\"Well then trust me, I am the best. Now lift your arms please?\" As he slides his hands around your arms and chest you look away, uncomfortable.", "action_results": [{"action": "Look at the strange carpeted walls", "result": "Colourful fine carpets cover all the walls, some more rugs hanging over them in turn.\n\nThe carpets are like a dark, dull rainbow. The carpet itself is black, with colours seeming floating over it like a reflection in water. The colours swirl and mix and seperate so slowly you have to careful look before you see the emerging patterns of dancing colours.. You watch a batch of a grey blue twirl around with concentrated yellow and green drops, absorbing them.\n\nThe rugs draped over them like curtains over imaginary windows are stationary pictures of outfits, each in a different pose. They continue from down the walls onto the floor and a few hang from the ceiling. You recognize a few outfits, but what really catches your eye is the one hidden on the far left, the one that looks just like Zaren's black finery. It's the only one with a person in the clothes.\n\nZaren's in it, posed elegantly in his black and gold coat. His arms are raised as if to greet you, but his face perfectly shows his comtempt at your very existance. All but his eyes, which are laughing. You do not know if the contempt is the joke.\n\nThere is a man behind that insanity, you are sure of it. Whether the insanity is a cover or not, you do not know.\n\nYou look back at the swirling patterns. They are starting to resemble pictures now, just barely, but the proper shades are coming in...", "action_results": [{"action": "An Arena", "result": "Your heart beats.\n\nYou stand in an great amphitheatre, on shifting sands. It's quiet for but a moment, and then the clashes of weapons rings out in great echoes, with cheery yells of murder providing a bass quality. Smiles flash all around as people hack or are hacked about and nothing but snorts of laughter without the barest hint of pain accompany the carnage.\n\nSprays of blood float on the air. Spilled guts and limbs sink deep into the sands. Heads laughing are choking on sand and sweet blood spills out of their lifeless bodies.\n\nYou smell gore in the air and it clouds your thoughts. Little droplets rain down in your vision. You count each as they pass. Some spray in the corner of your eye hits your cheek and you can taste the liquid life.\n\nLiquid life.\n\nLife.\n\nYou're alive.\n\nWhere is your weapon?", "action_results": [{"action": "A claymore on the ground to your right", "result": "The heavy blade is laying on the ground.\n\nYour heart beats.\n\nYou survey the fight.\n\nIt's a giant mass of men screaming in a variety of different emotions. Joy here, fear there. You can see spectres spectating, watchers watching, and shadows spectating as well, because what else would they do? Be serious.\n\nWith all the chaos, if you crouched you could conceivably have more cover. A lower center of gravity would also be a benefit. A quick roll would provide more cover and speed, but lack the same control. The ground, while littered with weapons and bodies, has a clear path to your weapon. You could try to crawl there. This would provide the most cover, but you risk being stepped on, and what you gain in cover you give up in speed.\n\nBeat.\n\nMove now, or risk danger for another look around.", "action_results": [{"action": "Crouch", "result": "You shift and fall, knees bent, head low. An arrow whistles in the air.\n\nBeat.\n\nYou senses collaspe in on this one thing. The arrow shines brightly as the sun catches it and then wades in and out of bloody bodies.\n\nYour toes curl in the sand, trying to the draw the rest of your body in. Your arms follow your slowly moving torso as it curls as well. You blink and lose the arrow. When your eye open your head to low to see it. You can only hope. You push foward with one foot.\n\nBeat.\n\nThe arrow catches your left shoulder blade and tears through the top layer of muscle and skin but leaves your body mostly intact.\n\nBeat.\n\nYou grit your teeth and swallow a gurgle of pain. You've had worse. You lie.\n\nBeat.\n\nBeat. Beat.\n\nBeat. Beat. Beat.\n\nYou reach the sword and grab it with your right hand, using all your strength to swing it up and around so your weak hand to hold it.\n\nThe man in front of you laughs as back is penetrated by the blade. The combination of the unbalancing swing and the collision shock your hands and they tingle. Oh wait, that's because someone cut them off. Now who would do such a thing.\n\nA laugh swirls around in your mouth and tastes great. You let it out and the fear and terror and pain all disappear.\n\nA pommel strike to the face later and you're laying on the ground as the battle rages on, spitting out sand and blood and teethe as you laugh.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back in the room", "result": "You blink. The world is... well, not really \"normal\", but... it's better. You bring a hand to your head, fine, but tears are falling down your face. Colours spin in your eyes. The madness of the walls creeps and lurks in your head and it's shrieks and whispers make your ears bleed.\n\n\"You looked at the walls, didn't you? Where did you go? Nevermind, it's not important. It's not frequently a pleasent place anyway. Now look at me. Hmm, the barber will have to take a look at you. Fuzzy face, tangled hair. Still, not my job. Now please stand still and um, please do not touch anything. You don't seem graceful. No offense meant, my good sir.\" The Tailor lets go of your arm and waddles off on his strange legs. He walks straight through a carpeted wall.\n\nYou carefully sit down on the floor. This isn't real.\n\nBut it is.\n\nThis can't be real.\n\nBut it is.\n\nIt was a dream then. But you're -- you're awake now. It was a dream. Just a dream.\n\nNo, no, no, NO, NO, NO! This can't be happening. The world is spinning now, and you feel faint and dizzy. There's a sour taste in the back of your dry mouth. Don't open your eyes. Don't look up. This isn't real. This isn't real. This isn't happening. Your heart pounds. Your fists close and your arms tense.\n\nNo, no, no, NO, NO, NO!\n\nSomething touches your head -- NO! \"Get away! Get away! Take your bug men and crazy kings and doors and dreams and shove it!\" You fling yourself backwards and push off the attacking nightmares.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ophelia", "result": "You hit the nightmares and they gasp. You open your eyes.\n\nIt's just Ophelia. Just Ophelia. She's holding her wrist in her other hand.\n\n\"I...\" Your mouth closes. This is it. This is all happening too fast, too fast, too much. You didn't mean to hit her but the world is just spinning now.\n\n\"I'm sorry. It's been so long since any of us have seen someone new to The Court, let alone to this world. Most people -- well, besides you, everyone -- come to this realm through the slums and move up. I'm afraid you'll have to forgive them. This place changes people... Some for the better, like the Tailor. Or at least he would say so. Most... Well, you'll see soon. Please, just calm down, and I'll answer all your questions. Zaren will forgive us this.\"\n\n\"I'm sorry... I didn't mean---\"\n\n\"I know. Just hold on a moment. We'll get you some clothes and then I'll take you to your rooms. I'll explain there. Just hold on.\"\n\nYou take a deep breath. You're under control now. Those walls... They play with your mind. But you're back now.\n\nThe Tailor walks back through the wall.\n\n\"Now sir, please take a look around the room. The mannequins have some samples, the carpets others, although you probably would like to stay away from them now. Small changes can be made quite easily to the design, or even after if you are disappointed with my work, although I doubt that will happen. Anything custom will have to come later I'm afraid. You have much work to do my friend.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The black outfit", "result": "You point out the tapestry in the corner, the one with Zaren in his shining black clothes. There's something about it that intrigues you. Something that just draws you in.\n\n\nOphelia and the Tailor give each other a look.\n\n\n\"I'm... I'm afraid you'll have to choose another my friend. I don't believe Zaren would be... happy. Wait. I think I have something in a similar style. Take a look at this. You may request changes if you wish.\" The Tailor pulls out a tapestry and peels it apart. You did not notice before, but they're made of different layers stuck together. Each layer contains one piece of the outfit.\n\n\nThe pants are the same thin fit, but looser at the ankles. The belt has two buckles of polished gold and beautiful leather. \"The tanner can make you such a belt. It is only cloth that I may create.\" The Tailor buzzes. A tight but long shirt with slightly ruffled sleeves is next. It's tight around the torso and hugs the waist with large shoulders. Over that comes a waist coat with shining gold buttons.\n\n\n\"It is designed with a similar cloth in mind and the same colours. Colour, that is. The shirt is long sleeved and with a waist coat, but I will keep your wishes in mind. You may take these rags for now. It will be completed soon. I suggest you visit the barber, cobbler, and tanner. Oh, and all gentlemen of The Court are expected to have their own sword. Something about duels. I never saw the point of it, but it's been a long time since I was... different. That reminds me. You should have been here before. The style now is very fond of vibrant colours, not this... Monotone thing you have chosen. That must have been at least decades ago... Off, now.\"\n\n\nYou don't particularly feel like hanging around, so you accept his choice and the Tailor fills you hands with fine shirts and breeches, simple but elegant. Only he would call them rags. He then turns you around and pushes you along and out. You nearly panic when he shoves you into the wall, only to remember that it is in fact a door.\n\n\nOphelia walks down the hall. \"Coming?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow her", "result": "\"One second.\" You call out.\n\n\nYou'd prefer to be clothed at this point.\n\n\nYou slip on a pair of pants and a shirt before running, trying to catch up to her without dropping any of the things you're carrying.\n\n\nShe looks at you. You feel self conscious suddenly, despite your newly clothed appearance. You look straight ahead, trying to keep even steps and the same pace as Ophelia, who walks fast.\n\n\n\"Zaren didn't tell me where you'd stay. I suppose the guest quarters -- no, that's no good. They're too far, for one, and I don't believe Zaren considers you a guest. He is very fond of order and organization. Or at least the order and organization of others. We'll drop these off in my room for now. We have others to visit. Please wait just a little bit longer.\"\n\n\nYou and Ophelia walk in silence. The stoned passage gives way into large rooms with bustling people. Ophelia leads you past a great fountain spitting out clear water and up stairs. Putting on pants was probably a good decision.\n\n\nOn the second level people jostle and bump into your and it takes great skill not to drop anything.\n\n\nAfter a few minutes of twisting turns Ophelia stops in the middle of a hall. \"This is my humble abode. Please just dump those off on my desk.\" Ophelia then pulls you through the wall. You doubt you'll ever.... get.... used.... to that?", "action_results": [{"action": "Ophelia's room", "result": "This isn't a room. It's a damn mansion. This is just one room and it's huge.\n\nExpensive carpets cover over parts of the floor. The high quality marble shows through in other parts. The walls are the same stones from the halls, but large paintings with golden frames cover parts of it. A giant golden chandelier hangs from the ceiling. Giant golden stairs are placed on both sides of the room.\n\nBefore the stairs stands a bronze statue of... Something. It looks like a regular man, naked but for a cloth that hangs from one shoulder, but something feels off about it. His face is turned down and his eyes closed, one mouth corner lifted in a sneer. He's kneeling almost in a pleading position, as if he dare not look up.\n\n\"Zaren's work. I suppose he thinks it a gift and why he's right of course. It's very lovely. Every so often when one disagrees with him death is not always the suitable punishment. I'm sure Tunc agrees with me, though he may not express it well.\" Ophelia grabs your hand and leads you quickly to a small, bare room behind the statue. Her face is ashen.\n\n\"Check the walls!\" She hisses at you, then brushes her fingers along the walls. You follow her example, even if you cannot fathom why. She and you check the whole wall and she takes a deep breath.\n\n\"Zaren has a habit of popping up when he isn't wanted. We can never be sure we are safe, but vigilance is the only option if we wish to survive. We must go soon, but if you have any questions that must be answered, ask now. We must be very careful what we say outside this room, even inside it.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Tunc", "result": "\"Oh... Tunc. Yes. Tunc was a friend of mine... A very, very long time ago.\" Ophelia leans against a wall. \"You can drop those clothes off right here.\" She gestures towards the spotless floor. \"Tunc. He... Disagreed with Zaren a very long time ago. Zaren is unpredictable at best, and the king of chaos at worst. The power he wields is not a good combination with his nature. Tunc took a great risk. He thought he could challenge Zaren's rule. He... Failed. Listen closely. I don't care to relive the experience, so I will not be sharing any details, and I'd doubt you'd really want to hear them once you understand his fate.\" Ophelia looks down, unsure. \"I tried to warn him....\" She pauses and closes her eyes.\n\n\nThe memory is obviously a painful one for her. You are unsure of what to do, so you just stand there, dumbly.\n\n\nShe takes a few seconds to collect her thoughts and then continues in a monotone voice.\n\n\n\"Zaren is a creative.... Man. He didn't kill Tunc, exactly. He decided to create an example of him. He was feeling particularly... Well, something. It's hard to tell what goes on in his mind, though it gets easier after time. That's what scares me the most, I suppose. Anyway, Zaren is a powerful man. He has abilities that the rest of us cannot comprehend. He's kept Tunc alive even as he is now.\" She looks straight up at you. \"I suppose there's no easy way about this. That statue out there is Tunc. Zaren did something with him. I used to cry, talk to him, anything, but there's a time when you just have to let go. Especially here. I'm not even sure if it was meant to be a punishment, reward, or just some twisted form of art. Zaren is confusing, misleading, childish, and any other number of unpleasant things.\"\n\n\n\"You said Zaren keeps him alive... Does that mean?\" You ask, afraid of the answer.\n\n\n\"Yes. He moves, ever so slowly. Once in a very great while he cries. That's where the \"art\" comes in.\" She sighs. \"Do you have any other questions?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Zaren", "result": "\"Zaren? You mean besides his seeming complete and utter insanity? Well, I told you. He's a god here. The god here. There's not much else to him. I could tell you about all the things he's done over the years. All the times I nearly laughed at him. All the times others did laugh at him, and paid for it. All the times he laughed along with them. He's unpredictable. Don't forget it, ever. If you remember nothing else, remember that. I've seen him kill people for following his instructions to the word. He's done things... Things that are worse than death. Tunc's fate is far from the worst.\"\n\n\n\"Then why? Why do you let him do it? Why not do something about it? Surely he couldn't stop you all?\"\n\n\n\"Look at Tunc. As bad as things are, they could be worse. Zaren's powerful in ways even the strongest of us can't imagine. Tunc used to say that reality is Zaren's bitch. He was frank like that. Everyone here has at least the smallest ability for magic, and some are very talented, but Zaren's in a class of his own. Besides, most have adapted. They've learned to live with it. It doesn't matter how awful something is. If you live with something for a long time it becomes the norm. You can only be in sheer terror for so long before it bores you.\"\n\n\nYou can see it in her eyes. The fear that has long given way to numbness.\n\n\nShe attempts to smile. \"Better the devil you know.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Where am I", "result": "\"Now that's a good question. The short answer is: I don't know. Nobody does as far as I know. Except, perhaps, for Zaren, but I don't think he's likely to share that information, do you? You really never went through the slums?\" Ophelia narrows her eyes suspiciously.\n\n\n\"I don't know what you mean.\" You answer truthfully.\n\n\n\"The slums are what they are. A broken down place infested with poverty and suffering. Everyone, nobility and peasants alike, appears in the slums. People don't really have children here. Pregnancy is extremely rare among the population, even over large periods of time. Most women will go their whole life without a child. Most pregnancies will end in miscarriages. Almost all of those carried to term will be stillborn. Of the handful of people over our whole history to be born here... I've never met one. I've heard that they turn out strangely, even compared to the average citizen. Nothing specific, just strange. There are rumours that Zaren is one, but I doubt a thing like him was even born, even in another place. To my knowledge there is no one older than Zaren alive today so I guess we'll never know. Anyway, people will simply \"arrive\" here instead. From somewhere else. Always... Well, you're the exception, but always in the slums. They're not a pleasant place. The slums are filled with screams and the raving of the mad. The \"upper ranks\" to which you now belong are comprised of the completely sane, or at least the sanest. Zaren... I don't think he's insane. I've known him too long. No, I think he just likes to watch us suffer in our own filth.\"\n\n\n\"So you can't tell me anything about where I am.\"\n\n\n\"No, I can tell you much about where we are. I just don't know where where we are is. I can't tell you anything about where any of us came from. Most people don't remember anything and even if they do it's after a long time of searching. But it just tears them apart. It's best to forget if you start remembering.\"\n\n\n\"But I... I remember.... Something.\" You're not sure. It's that faint form of memory, but vivid in strange places. More like a story that you've visualized.\n\n\n\"Forget it. Or if you can't forget it, ignore it. At the very least leave it alone. Do not go any further into that abyss.\"\n\n\nBut this memory is to real to forget. Ophelia looks at you, rolls her eyes, and sighs. \"Okay. Tell me about it, but then that's it. Don't ever think you can make it farther into your own mind. It won't end well.\"\n\n\n\"I remember. I remember... \" Words roll of your tongue as you look through the past towards the only memory you can find.", "action_results": [{"action": "White", "result": "It's white. Some of it is powder and some is thicker and clear. Some of it sticks together.\n\nSnow. It's snow. And it's falling.\n\nYou look up. The sky is dark with little flecks coming into existance as they get close enough for you to see them.\n\nSnow crunchs under you.\n\nYou open your mouth and catch a flake on your tongue and then laugh. You look at one closely. It's pretty with its twirls and patterns and designs.\n\nYou dance, dance in the snow, falling, rolling, screaming with laughter and fun.\n\nEach flake unique but nothing without its friends.\n\nThen it's gone. You have it here in your head now, fixed and alive, something you'll remember. There's more...\n\nBut that's gone, at least for now.", "action_results": [{"action": "Memories", "result": "Ophelia is speechless for a minute.\"Wow. That's a lot, well, compared to me. You, you like... Liked nature, didn't you?\"\n\n\n\"I don't know. Maybe. It's all I remember anyw--\"\n\n\n\"No. No. I'm sure you have more in there. Don't try to remember... But if you do... I don't know if we come from the same place, but maybe, just maybe, we do. If you remember enough it might trigger my memories too.\" Ophelia looks hopeful. Happy. You don't think she'll ever remember if she hasn't by now, but it's not in your heart to crush her new found hope. She smiles for a brief moment, caught up in a memory that isn't hers yet is still her only link to her potential past, even if it's faint at best.\n\n\nThen she remembers where she is right now and shakes her head to rid her of her folly. \"Anymore questions? We don't have much time.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Doors", "result": "\"Oh yes. I told you about the \"fight\" Zaren had. He got rid of all the doors in The Court, except for the large front doors to the palace. Apparently they \"took his side\". Without doors we lacked privacy, but Zaren didn't care. Probably didn't eve occur to him. But after a few years he had his brilliant idea; fake walls. No one had any idea he could do something like that, but I don't think it surprised anyone. That's why we check the walls. He can build them anywhere he wants, so we must be vigilant, vigilant always. It's tiring at first but you build up a habit eventually.\"\n\n\"Doesn't it... Freak you out?\"\n\n\"At first it was a little strange, but after a year or two you don't even think about it anymore. You start to forget what doors look like.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The Court", "result": "\"This is The Court. It's part of this realm. It, the slums, the markets, and a few other districts make up about half of it, with wildness making up the other half. Zaren keeps meticulous records of nearly everything, including maps. I'm not sure why, he's a very chaotic person, but I guess even chaos is ordered from time to time -- otherwise it would have an order to it. We should visit his libraries some time. Just one of them would take a very long time to read through. Every so often he'll change the realm so much that previous records need to be updated, so he purges almost everything and everyone starts again. He always keeps a very accurate record of the books he's had though, even the purged ones. There are rumours he keeps copies of them somewhere after he destroys the others. I wouldn't put it past him, but there are many things only Zaren knows, and this is one of them. But that doesn't really answer your question, does it?\n\n\n\"Tell me about The Court.\" You ask.\n\n\n\"Well, it's composed of servants, guards, and merchants and the like that look after us from the upper ranks. You've met the Tailor and seen a few of the guards and servants. You'll also meet the Tanner, the Shoemaker, the Barber, the Blacksmith, the Jeweler, and various teachers and instructors. Probably a few more I'm forgetting. Almost all necessities and wants are provided for us. We are the only sane ones left in this forsaken realm. We are basically Zaren's playthings. Let's see, what else....\"\n\n\nShe stops to think for a moment.\n\n\n\"We're in the west wing right now. It's devoted mostly to private residences. Zaren will assign you one soon. For the most part he'll let you decorate it as you wish -- oh, that reminds me, the Framer, the Painter, the Carpenter, the Mason, and a few others. Anyway, he may give you some \"gifts\", akin to housewarming gifts. He would be \"offended\" if you did not accept them. He's given me things: paintings, statues, furniture. A lot of it is weird and out of style, but surprising none of the chairs will break... or strangle you, or something else Zaren would find funny. Let's see... There's the south wing which houses the servants quarters and the kitchens and other such things, and the south tower, which is primarily for the craftsmen. What is literally called The Court is in the northern end and is filled with Zaren's gardens, libraries, mess halls, and other areas for social gatherings. Oh, the gymnasium as well. The east wing holds more craftsman and merchants. Some of the market district blends in with this area. The west wing also includes the entrance to this palace and the long hall, as we call it. Zaren's throne room really, but he also has thrones in other rooms.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Events", "result": "\"We also have many events, like the dance you saw. The Tailor mentioned duels; all the men learn how to fight, as well as quite a few of the women. Zaren finds it amusing, although he doesn't allow anyone to die. Most of the time. We have feasts every few days and a hunt the next day. Lets see. There's contests and tournaments. You must participate in at least one event. That's where those teachers and instructors are useful. What else... I think that's all. If not, well, you'll figure out the rest as you go. You seem like you already know how to dance, so that's one less thing.\"\n\n\n\"But I don't.\"\n\n\n\"Then what was that back in the dance hall?\"\n\n\n\"Didn't you hear the music? It was so loud.\"\n\n\nOphelia's eyes narrow. \"What music?\"\n\n\nCurious.", "action_results": [{"action": "It's time", "result": "\"It's time. No more questions. That reminds me; one more thing you should know. Time functions strangely here. Nothing grows or changes unless Zaren wills it. Every so often he'll change The Court - usually not to a noticeable extent but once in a while there are some great changes. But back to the point; time is strange. We don't quite... Age. But that's a discussion for later. We still have to visit the Shoemaker, the Blacksmith, the Tanner, the Jeweler...\"\n\n\nThe list feels nearly endless, though it's actually short. Ophelia goes through them as she leads out of the empty room, back into the halls, and towards the south tower, leading you through winding halls, large decorative rooms, up and down stairs, out onto a blooming courtyard and finally in front of the south tower.\n\n\n\"We didn't go this way before.\" You ask, curious.\n\n\n\"You were naked before. I didn't think you'd want to.\"\n\n\n \"Fair enough.\"\n\n\nThe tower itself is huge, made of tiny white stones grinded and polished to create a perfect cylinder. The entrance is a pair of huge and heavy stone slab doors that are currently open. The tower is a hub and dozens of people are walking in and out at any one moment, mostly guards, servants, and nobles. You and Ophelia are out of place in your plain clothing as the guards are wearing armour, the servants the uniforms of their specific job, and the nobles in outlandish outfits.\n\n\n\"We have much to do and little time to do it. After the formal dances Zaren will do \"realm maintenance\". I mentioned it before; this is when he plays around with the fabric of reality. That's why it's so busy. Everyone wants to get their work done before Zaren changes anything. It will be busy after too. The tower is frequently full, especially at these times, but I have seen it nearly empty a few times.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The lift", "result": "\"Follow me.\" Ophelia walks past the guards and weaves through the throng of people with grace. You follow carefully, not wanting the heavy armoured feet of the guard to crush yours. She leads you up a spiraling staircase to a small platform reaching over the center. As soon as you step on it floats upwards. Ophelia grabs your arm to keep you from falling or freaking out.\n\n\n\"Be calm. If you stand still it is surprisingly safe. The Tailor's rooms are on the third floor, so it was unnecessary to take the lift. The others reside near the top though, so unless you would like to go up all those stairs we're taking the lift.\" Ophelia holds your arm tightly.\n\n\nYou force yourself to take a breath and try not to look down. Ophelia senses this is not the time to talk and so you just stand there, jaw clenched. Finally Ophelia takes a breath and talks.\n\n\n\"Who shall we visit first? As a new member of our lovely \"family\" you have priority, so don't fret about lines or some such nonsense. After we visit them all we should go back to the Tailor and pick up the beginning of what will, trust me, become a very large wardrobe .\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The Blacksmith (this will continue the story)", "result": "Ophelia smiles. \"He's a friend of mine. Please don't let his appearence frighten you, he is at heart a gentle man, but he can be a bit sensitive. I mentioned... Changes. Some, like the Tailor, are happy with their new existence. The Blacksmith is good at his job and enjoys it, but I believe he misses some things about his previous life.\"\n\nThe lift slows down and moves towards a space that it then attaches to. Ophelia walks straight off. \"Come on. Don't hesitate. It gets better with practice.\"\n\n You step off the lift. It leaves your feet and lowers again, leaving you with a nearly falling sensation. Your heart pounds and you don't care to look down, even though you're on a stable floor now. Ophelia holds your arm and pulls you forward, not even looking back at that horrible open space.\n\n\"It's a little way from here.\" Ophelia walks beside you, much more steady than you could be. With perfect posture and graceful movements she looks almost regal. \"Do you have any combat experience? The Blacksmith will have to make you many weapons of all kinds, especially if you are fan of the dueling, so you should be familar with them all and with more than one style.\"\n\n\"No... Well, I don't really remember.\" You can smell the fires and you know you are close.\n\n\"Oh... Yes. My apologies. We're getting closer. Zaren created these spaces to minimize the smells. They're particularly bad at the tanery; though we are beyond many of the more unhygenic and barbaric practices, it smells nearly as foul as it would if we used the original \"recipes. Here we are.\" Ophelia stops and pulls you into a searing steam filled room.", "action_results": [{"action": "Meeting the Blacksmith", "result": "The steam that flies in your face and shocks you quickly dissapates. Beyond it there is a large forge filled to the brim with tools that line shelves and walls, with all kinds of hammers, chisels, tongs, and other things you don't recognize of all different sizes; and works, both completed weapons that are displayed and those still to be finished. There is a regular anvil as well as other large metal pieces for shaping metal. There are buckets of water, ingots of different metals, and even polishing materials thrown around the large yet somehow still full room.\n\nThere the sound of a hammer striking metal, a steady, heavy ting ting ting. A man grunts with each sound. He turns around and you gasp. That is not a man.\n\nHe's tall, easily another half of a man. Horns curve out of his large furred head and a bull's nose move as he smells the steam; above those large and surprisingly deep blue eyes. His neck is thick and his arms bulge with muscles as he grips the hammer. He wears a thick leather apron to keep his skin safe, but still litle burn marks line his arms. As he steps forward you hear the clip clop of his hooves. He turns to look at Ophelia and his scowl turns into a smile. \"Ophelia! So nice to see you. It's been too long since you visiting me in Tartarus. I almost thought Hades had got you.\" His voice is baritone, regular but higher than one would expect, and softer. \"And this is?\"\n\n\"He's new. He... Doesn't have a name yet. That reminds me, we must discuss that as well. Anyway, he requires some weapons.\" Ophelia smiles at the Blacksmith and goes forward to hug him.\n\n\"Always business with you. Does he have any experience? Preferences? You will definitely need a polearm, sword, and dagger, but anything else will be your choice. You look like you can handle the heavier weapons. What would you prefer for a sword, first of all? One or two handed? Any specific type? We have something of almost everything. Take a look along the walls. Pick out anything you like. Feel free to try it.\" He speaks so fast you can't respond before he starts onto something else.\n\nYou look at the wall the Blacksmith points to, scanning the swords, but something catches your eye. It's in the corner up higher than the rest. You walk over and look over it. It's an arming sword of a regular length, with a plain black covered hilt and pommel. The cross guard is a thin long diamond shape and the blade is double edged but dull.\n\n\"This one. This is the one.\" You barely hear yourself say it. Yoo careful pick the blade off of the wall and hold it; it's perfectly balanced and its weight compliments you well.\n\n\"Now that's an old one. Before my time even. It doesn't look much like my predecessor's work either. It's amazing it's lasted this long. Alright, hand it over to me. I'll make you one.\" The Blacksmith walks over to you.\n\n\"Can't I have this one?\" There's something about it. Something about the way your hand fits on it, something about the cool feeling of the leather over the hilt, something about the plain ridge in the middle that just draws you into it.\n\n\"I don't see why, but I don't see why not. Are you sure you'd not rather have a new one? I won't sharpen or polish it - that's not my job. Oh well. You must still pick out a dagger and polearm. Other weapons will come later. The Court is a game of time.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The polearm and the dagger", "result": "\"You can use the grindstone and I'll give you some whetstones and polishing cloth. Still, you will need a dagger and a polearm of some kind. You look like you would fancy a heavier weapon. Take a look at the wall. I've got a poleaxe that I've recently finished; it's the perfect length for you. Let me get it.\"\n\nYou stare at the walls again, this time at one filled with pole weapons, some leaning against the wall, some packed on shelves, some in actual weapon holders. There are the long pikes that take down calvary lined on shelves at the top. Other weapons have spikes, tongs, flat ends for hammering, large and small points, curved blades, and any combination thereof. The choice between weapon types is dizzying, and even among the individual types there are more variables; weight, length, thickness, curve, even the way the shaft and tip are joined.\n\nYou carefully pick up a weapon or two and try them out, a swing, a thrust, a step and a turn. They are unsurprisingly heavy, much heavier than your smaller sword. You place them back, making sure they are not going to fall and cause an avalanche of weapons. You look around a bit. You manage to pick out a few weapons that look good.\n\nThe Blacksmith walks back in carrying one of the heavy weapons in one hand like it's nothing and places it on a weapon rack.\n\nIncluding the weapon the Blacksmith just brought in you've narrowed it down to three: a halberd about your height, with an end that has a long spike at the tip, a small axe on one side and a hook on the opposite, all mounted on a thick and sturdy wood pole; a slightly smaller warhammer with small but brutal looking spike on one side and the flat end for crushing, all on a mix of metal of wood; and the Blacksmith's weapon, a longer glaive, with a long curved blade on the tip and a small hook, on heavy dark wood.", "action_results": [{"action": "Halberd", "result": "You pick up the halberd and inspect it. It's heavy of course, but you're strong enough for it. The blade is engraved with long intricate lines and designs that circle around the point, connecting to rays from the ax blade and a hatching pattern on the hook.\n\n\n\"The halberd? A good weapon. It looks well suited to you as well, just the right height.\" The Blacksmith stands beside you, picks up the weapon he brought in, and places it in a rack. \"It's a complicated pattern, but a beautiful weapon.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The dagger", "result": "You place your weapons on a table and stare at yet another wall. Again, there's a wide selection but you're getting better at scanning them. The shorter weapons are packed in much tighter in than the others, nearly making you dizzy. You feel a few; the short weapons are light and nimble with sharp edges and points. Though there are many different kinds and variations between all those you decide to narrow it down to just a few of different kinds.\n\n\nYou look along the choices and pick out three again; a cinquedea about a foot long, with a very wide blade that is decorative and an even longer cross guard with a short handle and pommel; a stiletto at the opposite end of the spectrum, with a very thin blade and handle that can easily pierce or find a way through armour; and a baselard, with a thicker blade, thin handle, and no cross guard or pommel to speak of.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The cinquedea", "result": "You reach out and lightly touch the blade of the cinquedea, running your hand over the tip to the fullers and the cross-guard. It softly nips your fingers when you run them over the sharp blade, drawing the tiniest drop of blood. You wipe your hand on your shirt and pick up the dagger. It's light and strangely balanced because of the abnormally wide blade where it connects to the hilt, but already you're getting used to it. You give it a practice thrust, twist it, and pull back.\n\n\n\"That one?\" asks the Blacksmith. \"Very well. You have great taste, I can tell. It seems just the right one for you. Well, we're done here for now. Armour will wait until later, because we'll have to measure you for each piece, and even then it'll take a while to make. Still, you're set up enough for now. It was nice seeing you Ophelia, and nice to meet you as well.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the lift", "result": "Well that's everything done so far. Not much really.\n\n\nOverall I'm not very happy with this in any way that counts. The story and characters aren't great so far, there's little to no real choices, and it sort of jumps from one part to another. The only reason I'm submitting it is because it's the most work I've ever done on a story, and I guess that's something to be proud of at least. At the best it's... rambling I guess.\n\n\nPlease tell me what you think.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "The baselard", "result": "\"That one?\" asks the Blacksmith. \"Very well. It seems you have good taste, though all my weapons are high quality. It seems just the right one for you though. Well, we're done here for now. Armour will wait until later, because we'll have to measure you for each piece, and even then it'll take a while to make. Still, you're set up enough for now. It was nice seeing you Ophelia, and nice to meet you as well.\"\n\n\nWith your right hand you hold out your arm to press against the baselard. The cool metal cuts your skin lightly, drawing less than even an entire drop of blood on your finger tip. You pick up the blade, smearing that crimson speck on the hilt. It's light as a feather in your grasp, perhaps too light after holding other weapons. With a practice slash from high and then to the left you sense the way the dagger reacts to force, gaining an understanding of its balance.\n\n\n\"Interesting choice.\" remarks the Blacksmith. \"Okay then. All done here I suppose. Armour will come later -- we've little enough time now, and it requires much measuring. But you've got everything you need for the moment. I'll be seeing you Ophelia, and you as well I suppose.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "The stiletto", "result": "You pick up the blade by its handle and feel the guard over to the tip, where the sharp edge bites into your finger and draws a small drop of blood. You wipe the blood off your hand and hold the knife in the light to look over it. Light as any knife or dagger is, it glides though the air easy, almost requiring no effort. You sweep at and the air, listening to it cry out in that distinctive whistle.\n\n\nThe Blacksmith looks over you and the blade before speaking \"You choose that one? Good. Well I suppose that's everything. You'll need armour as well, but you'll need to be measured before and then it'll take a while for me to make all of it. But regardless, we're done here for now. Good to see you Ophelia. Wealth and health to you both.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Warhammer", "result": "You hold the war hammer in your holds and turn it over. Heavy, but that's the point. The hammer itself is completely flat and even, smaller than you'd imagine, but that only concentrates the damage you'd guess. There's a metal grip on it, with a pattern to make it easier to hold.\n\n\"Ah, the hammer. Brutal thing, that is. Just around the right size for you though.\" After placing the glaive he brought in on a rack the Blacksmith points to the hammer. \"It doesn't matter if someone's wearing armour. With this, a single whack and it'll smash through a helmet, and even if it doesn't, it can still break bones, cause concussions, and at the very least give a very nasty bruise. The hook can rip through armour too, though usually a good set of platemail can block it. It's good for taking down calvary. The hook can tear at the legs of a horse, get the man off his mount, and the hammer can crush the horse's legs.\"", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Glaive", "result": "You look at the glaive that the Blacksmith brought in. The wood is smooth, balanced and strong, and the blade looks like it craves blood. You pick it up and its just as heavy as you expected. It's simple compared to the other weapons; no intricate patterns or designs, but it's lovely nonetheless.\n\n\"The glaive? Ah, a good choice. I knew it'd be the weapon for you, just the right size.\" The Blacksmith stands beside you. \"It may seem simple, but I made it with the care all my weapons deserve. Of course, the wood work isn't mine, but all metal has been forged by my hands.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "The Tanner", "result": "\"I see. Get the worst out of the way first? I must say, the stench is worst I've ever smelled. He's not a... Nice man. Not mean, but wild. Feral, even. I've heard talk that he was born here, but he's one of the oldest I know of, so again, another thing we never may know. As you know, Zaren plays around with... the world. So don't let his appearence frighten you. If anything is terrifying, it's the stink. He's harmless really.\"\n\nYou slow your upward motion and the lift reachs another floor, where it attaches to a opening. Ophelia walks off. \"Don't let the height scare you. It's quite safe as long as you don't linger.\"\n\nOne foot off and it feels stable enough. But as soon as your other leg leaves the platfrom descends. You go falling forward as your body compensates for the motion. Ophelia catches you and steadies you. \"Let's go. The walk is long, to keep the smell from the lift.\"\n\nOphelia leads you through a maze of halls and small rooms, as the smell gradually builds up and pains throb in your head. Just as you're about to pass out she pulls you into the tannery. There's a look of digust on her face. \"Let us meet the Tanner.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Meeting the Tanner", "result": "The smell hits your face; fresh rather than the stagnant air outside, but just as bad. Your eyes water and you blink again and again just to see. You nose and mouth curls up in disgust. There are furs everywhere, not just pelts but entire animals. \"He prefers to skin them himself.\" Ophelia simply says. Tools for skinning and shaping litter the ground and little buckets of what you hope is water but is more foul smelling are sprinkled about the room. Larger vats are filled with the same foul odorous liquid, some of them colourless, but more black, brown, gray, or other dull colours. There are piles of furs, rags, and leather everywhere, some drying, being shaped, or otherwise in progress to becoming whatever they will be.\n\n\nA particularly large and dirty pile moves and -- oh dear, that's not a pile. It's a wereanimal, foul and feral, loudly poking around in dog corpse, picking out internal organs and placing them aside, sorting them. He pulls out bones and bits, and is covered in blood. Every so often he licks clawed hands with a slurping sound. He starts to peel off the skin with tools and surprising care when he lifts his head up and sniffs at the head. Turning around, he spots you and his mouth turns into a disgusting smile. \"Ophelia? Why hellos! Goodness, goodness, I ams filthy.\" Emphasizing and adding an S to some words he speaks to you. He grabs a rag and attempts to clean his hands, then wipes drool and blood from his face with them. He's covered in spotted, dirty, clumped fur, especially along his legs and shoulders, with a longer patch on top of his leading down his back on his spine. The hair is shorter on his face and snout, except for a few long whiskers that poke out of his lips and along his chin. The shaggy fur recedes along his hands, leaving nearly thin fingers for precision in his trade. He wears only a pair of shorts and bones on a string on his thick and long neck. His ears are pierced, the left is tattered and they flap about independent of his head. His eyes are large and green and watch Ophelia with a sense of sincerity. He seems more like a dog than anything else.\n\n\n Then, as if suddenly seeing you, \"I knows you! The Tailors said you were coming. Yesh, yesh. I have here somewhere... I cuts and cures it long time ago, ready for yous. Just waits, waits.\" He walks around in circles on his large paws and sniffs at the air. \"Yesh, yesh, I see its!\" He stretches up and pulls something off a shelf. \"They gives me nice shiny buckles for belts. I use the yellow ones this time. People like the yellow ones.\" He sounds like a child, a filthy terrifying child. \"You reminds me. You reminds me of hims. You gots the smell. He goods man, you know. Others they think he crazy, but he nice, he nice to mes. Used to be hads to thinks. All the times. Hard. Now I just do these things and I gets all I wants. He nice man. Waits, first I gots to cleans.\" He dips the belt in some sort of oily liquid and then hands it to you. \"He says to use the oils because somes don't like the smell. But yous get used to it. I thinks it smells good now. Also these. The Tailors said yous might like.\" He hands you a pair of leather arm bands.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the lift", "result": "You take the black belt and bands out of his hands and try to hold as little of them as possible, with a forced smile. The Tanner smiles back at you, oblivious of your disgust.\n\n\nOphelia takes your arm. \"We have to go now.\"\n\n\nThe Tanner smiles at you. \"Come backs to visit. And if yous wants armours, I cans make it. But laters.\" His tail wags and he waves at Ophelia.\n\n\nOphelia pulls you out of the room and walks off quickly, then runs after reaching the corner.\n\n\n\"I'm sorry. I just can't stand it. He's just so pitiful. I want to hate him, I really do, but I also feel an overwhelming sense of sorrow for him.\" Her face is white and her hold is gripping your arm so hard it hurts. Her face says not to talk about it anymore, but you have a feeling there's something that she's not telling you.\n\n\nThe smell diminishes as you get farther from the tannery. Once you reach the lift again you put on the belt and bracers, if just to buy some time before you have to step back on it. To your surprise the solution that the Tanner used actually seems to have worked. In fact, they have a slight leather smell, but otherwise are devoid of any discernible smell.\n\n\nYou're about to step back on the lift. If you want to ask Ophelia about the Tanner, now is the time.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask Ophelia about the Tanner", "result": " \n\nFor a second, you're not sure she heard your question. She just holds your arm and pulls you onto the lift. Just when you're about to ask again she answers in a quiet voice, holding her necklace in a tight fist.\n\n\n\"The Tanner is an animal. A nice, good-natured, even gentle thing, despite his appearance and the whispers of some, but an animal nonetheless. He isn't a man -- or maybe isn't one anymore. He can't make the decision to lie or even mislead. If you ask him a question he will answer to the best of his ability. He said you were like Zaren.\" She trails off.\n\n\nYou want to know why this scares her so much. Maybe you smell like Zaren or something. Ophelia seems to be afraid of him, but why would this bother her so much? You're about to ask when her nails dig into your arm deep enough to cause marks, but not blood.\n\n\n\"I don't want to talk about it. At least not now. Please.\" And that's all she'll say for now. A forced smile covers her anxious face. \"Where to now?\" She says, deftly changing the topic. \"We've still got things to do yet.\" She lets go of your arm and lightly touches the mark. \"I... Sorry.\"\n\n\nThe discussion seems to be over. You doubt she'll even respond if you ask again, so you respect the silence, though you are still confused.\n\n\nThe lift starts to move. \"So, what's our next destination?\"", "action_results": [null, {"action": "The Jeweler", "result": "\"Everything in the details... Everyone here is given a seal, to carry on their person at all times. Men typically have signet rings. Many women will choose a pendant instead. I personally have a ring, but I wear it on a chain around my neck. The Jeweler will take down a design, finger size, and preferences, and Zaren will approve. Most of the time he doesn't care, but once in a while he will change it slightly. Sometimes dramatically, though this is rare. So likely the choice will be yours. The Jeweler will work with you, but give it some thought first.\" Ophelia looks about, then moves closer to you. \"I think that's part of Zaren's control over us. He always seems to know where everyone is, what they're doing, what they're saying. I'm not saying I know for sure, but I cover my ring when I speak plainly. The less risks one takes, the better.\" she whispers in your ear. She moves back. \"You can also request other jewellery, but as I understand it is not fashionable currently, except for your seal, at least for men. It might make it harder for you to fit in with the established nobility.\"\n\nYou move towards an opening in the cylindrical tower and the platform fixes itself there, with an invisible seam with the floor. Ophelia walks off with more courage than you can muster. \"We have a lot to do. There's no time to stand around.\"\n\nYou look down and take a deep breath. One foot, now the other. The platform starts to descend when you leave it. You step forward quickly, not looking back at the empty air and open space behind you. Ophelia watches you with a grim grin. \"It's not very far from here.\" She starts off and turns a corner, with you jogging a bit to catch up.\n\n\"I suggest not going with any words or animals, at least alone. Zaren seems to have something against them; he often changes the design if they include those. Here we are. Ready to meet the Jeweler?", "action_results": [{"action": "Meeting the Jeweler", "result": "You walk through the wall with Ophelia into the room. There are glass containers on the floor and on top of tables filled with beads of all colours, plain metal rings of different kinds, precious and semi precious stones, small chains, strings, and little pieces of metal that look like the latches for necklaces and bracelets. The containers are everywhere except for a single corner where tiny tools lie on a table along with both lit and unlit candles.\n\n\n\"Hello friend! I am the Jeweler. Ophelia has no doubt told you about me?\" Says a high pitched voice. It continues before you can answer. \"I am currently finishing some very delicate work, which requires great concentration, so quiet, please. I will be with you in a moment. Just let me.... Yes, there... And.... Darn. No... Ah, there we go. Okay, step forward please.\" You step forward, searching for the source of the voice. \"A signet ring then? Please, would you mind grabbing one of those gold rings in the container over there.\" You finally spot the source of the voice, a small woman sitting on the work table. Her small hand points over to a large glass container filled with gold rings. They have a large flat part for the emblem, but are otherwise regular rings. You walk over and pick one up.\n\n\nShe's a fairy or a small dryad of some kind, perhaps a foot tall at most, and slender. Beautiful white wings stretch out on her back. She wears a silky ruffled green dress with a darker green bodice. Long blonde hair is pulled back over her pointed ears down her back to her waist. She's beautiful in a way that leaves you unable to look at or touch her for fear of spoiling her beauty. But you can't look away from her. She looks into your eyes and you hear the calls of nature, the smell of pine trees and dew, the wind and sun over your skin. She blinks and the feeling is suddenly gone. \"The ring please?\" You hand it over carefully and she strains to place it down on her work station. \"Oh, my. I forgot to even ask you! You would like gold of course?\" She stares at you and you hesistate to break this precious moment.\n\n\n\"Ahh... Um, yeah, sure, of course.\" You mumble through the words, not even sure of what you're saying. You're lost, lost in the wind flowing through the trees in your head. It's not even her anymore; now it's a forest in your head, falling leaves littering the ground and life all around you. The wind sighs the sun shines and suddenly sly it's gone.\n\n\nThe Jeweler takes out a tiny piece of charcoal from a drawer in her small work table and a piece of paper. \"Okay, let's get started. This is just a simple start; I'll fix lines and edges later but I need an idea of what you'd like.\" She draws a large circle in the middle of the page.\n\n\nYou stand there, staring at the paper for a few minutes. You close your eyes to think to concentrate, but it doesn't help. Minutes pass in silence as the others wait for you. There, there, now, there's an image in your head, perfect and wonderful. You taste it; like a light wine, you feel it, soft and thick, you hear a dissosance in your head, harsh but pleasing and soothing. This is it, this is what you want, but it just swirls and plays around in your vision, beyond words. You can't force this out, the words just don't come. You can't explain this image in your head and eventually it fades, as much as you'd like it to stay. Something, some small part of you, tells you this is not something you should share. You don't know why, but the feeling is so strong that you accept it. It has the same feeling as your memory, but something indefinite whispers in your mind that it's not.\n\n\n\"Let's start with an animal. That's a popular one.\" The Jeweler starts. \"Anything you want. Then we'll add details, designs, words maybe. We could also start with a sort of shield type of a coat of arms, if you'd like.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "A coat of arms", "result": "The Jeweler holds the charcoal careful and draws a shield in the center of the paper. \"There's the standard shape. It will need a motto on the bottom. This is just the shield of a coat of arms, so no supporters. That's the animals that stand on the side of the shield.\" she adds hasitly. She draws the shape of a scroll or ribbon kind of thing on the bottom.\n\nYour bones quake. You feel a snapping in them, not painful, but just as strange. The hair on your nape stands up and quivers against the air. There's a slow low hum in your ears, resonating and echoing around. The room suddenly seems ominous, an unfounded but overwhelmingly strong sense of danger.\n\nWithout as much as an explaination the feeling passes down from your head to your feet and is absorbed into the ground. That image hides in the corner of your ears for a split second, and then everything is back to normal.\n\n\"Do you have any ideas yet? I mean, you don't have to do a motto, but it's part of the seal.\" There is slight concern on the Jeweler's face.\n\nA few ideas pop up in your head, far away but just around the corner. You realize with a start that they're memories. Letters and words fade into and out of your vision and some undefined voice mumbles them. You know that they're part of your past so you make an effort to pick them apart and put them together properly.", "action_results": [{"action": "Each life begets its own death", "result": "\"Each life begets its own death...\" You mutter. The phrase is full of guilt and worthlessness that corrupts your tongue and mouth before filling the air with its nothingness. So close to your heart it infects everything inside your body with its tendrils of darkness. You'd like nothing more than to scream with confusion, anger, sadness, anything that expresses this bitterness, but that would let the nothingness back in. That other feeling rises up in defiance but is gone before anything comes of it.\n\n\"I... See...\" The words flow on the paper, lines like withering branches and vines perventing each word in turn; and then the Jeweler pulls back, done. \"Zaren decides what kind of writing is used on seals. I cannot change it for you. How... How does it look?\" The written blight tells of infinite sufferings, but only if you can see past it, only if you can see the puzzle that this piece belongs to. It's subtle in this way, overwhelming in others. Words of a kind of praise come to your lips but all that passes is agreement that it looks good. \"We're... Done? My, that was speedy. It takes much longer than that for most. They always want something moee complicated -- though they never have any idea what it is that they want.\" That's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\n\nOphelia pulls on your arm but you stay seated for a moment, consumed by fears. Finally she says \"Come on, get up, we're not done yet.\" and she helps you out of the seat.\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a farewell as hurry out of the room, head down and body curved to appear as if you were nothing.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the lift", "result": "You shake yourself free of those words. Not now. Now is not the time.\n\n\nYou and Ophelia make your way back to the lift in silence. Just before you step on she speaks. \"I know things are strange now... Jumbled up even. It's both fast and slow, and exhausting even to think about. But really it's not that bad. Once in a while The Court has its bad days but most of the time we live like -- like nobility.\"\n\n\nShe steps on and pulls you with her. You shudder when your feet touch it again. Ophelia either doesn't notice or ignores it.\n\n\nThe platform moves. You don't know how exactly, but you consider what Ophelia said and leave that mystery for another day.\n\n\n\"So now what?\" Ophelia asks.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "The Shoemaker", "result": "\"Tired of walking around barefoot, hmm?\"\n\nThe platform stops its climb and moves towards a ledge. Ophelia walks off. \"Here we are. Quickly now. It will descend as soon as your foot leaves it.\"\n\nYou almost jump off. Her words are true and you feel the platform leave your feet. The sensation is terrifying and you almost lose your balance. Ophelia grabs you arm again and pulls you forward. She turns around and walks down into a hall, motioning for you to follow. Every step from that horrifying open space is another breath you can take.\n\n\"It's only a short walk from the lift.\" Ophelia looks back at you. \"Here we are. It's hard to remember where the walls end at first; it gets much easier with time. Come now, let's meet the Shoemaker.\"\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Meeting the Shoemaker", "result": "Ophelia pulls you into a large room. It's filled with foot forms, scraps of leather and buckles on the ground; on shelves are are kinds of footwear, from simple hide sandals to elaborate cloth crakows, to wooden clogs, to heavy leather guard boots. Other tools are hung up on walls, on various shelves, on tables and littering the ground. Short work tables line the far wall and tiny stools and chairs sit in front of them. Someone sits at the edge and grumbles.\n\n\"Another one? Already? I haven't finished repairing miss's 'Oh, but I need them to dance' shoes. Never mind the huge tear. I have another pair, exactly the same, but no, we can't have new shoes on her pretty little feet. Nevermind the fact she looks like the Tanner. Nobody wants to watch her dance anymore than they want to vomit. Well, come on over here.\" A small man stand up and waddles over from the far wall. You don't quite realize how short he is until he's standing up next to you, less than half your height. \"Oh, tall man, eh? Everyone is tall these days. I used to be tall, you know. Oh, well, as long as you don't have abnormally large feet.\"\n\nThe man is middle aged, with graying hair and a short but full beard. He wears a small cap with an eyepiece for better vision. How this really relates to shoemaking you don't know. He's wearing a ruffled green shirt under a purple and silver jacket. A cravat lies at his neck, matching his blue and yellow bright pants.\n\nThe man pulls up a chair and a small stool. \"Sit down please? Good. Now lift your left foot up onto the -- Yes, good.\" He barely takes a look at your foot before you starts. \"I have something perfect for you. A nice pair of boots, black leather. Already made. The Tailor told me it'll work. Please say yes. Everyone wants something new, something custom, just a little bit different, nevermind the fact they have no idea what they're saying and what they want will look awful. Just think about it. I'll go get them.\" He waddles off.\n\n\"The Shoemaker misses being nobility. He used to be a regular man, tall even, but once Zaren has an idea... Well, that's it for you. That's why he's wearing those clothes; pieces of a bygone time. He may complain a lot but he's good at his job. It may seem like he's trying to get rid of you, but if he says he's got something for you, he does.\" Ophelia quickly explains while the Shoemaker is in some other room.\n\n\"Found them!\" He calls, and he runs, somewhat comically, back into the room and towards you. He breathes hard and tries to fit the boots on your feet but fumbles. Finally he ties them tight and motions for you to stand. \"Come on now. Stand up.\"\n\nYou stand up and find that surprisingly, they fit perfectly.\n\n\"Don't look so shocked. I may hate it but I'm good at what I do. You see the little designs? The patterns in the leather? It takes forever to create those, and they can only be done as the shoe is ready. A single mistake and I have to start again. Anyway, that's what this is for.\" He points to the eyepiece. \"And the stitches of course. Why, you can't see the stitching, can you? Well that's because I'm good at my job!\" While you try out the boots he picks up another pair that he dropped running back into the room. They're just as nice, but plain. \"These are for everyday wear. Wouldn't want to wear out those nice boots now would we? Well, maybe you want to, but I sure don't want to repair them or make some new ones.\n\n\"We'll be going now. Don't have a nervous breakdown.\" Ophelia smiles and motions for you to get up.\n\n\"Why I never -- ungrateful swine!\" But through his bitter words the Shoemaker smiles.\n\nOphelia seems to be popular here.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the lift", "result": " \"Not so bad, is it? Really, most days end up like this. Boring but safe.\" Ophelia leads you back to the lift. \"The Shoemaker is a nice fellow really. Even if he's nervous and whiny half the time. And he's good at his job -- though Zaren always makes sure the people he appoints are. You'll need many more shoes; everyone at court does, but we're good for now.\"\n\n\nYou're back at the lift and though you're hesitant to get on Ophelia walks on without as much as a shiver. \"You get used to it.\" She says, reading your expression.\n\n\n\"I doubt it.\" slips out of your mouth. The platform starts to move.\n\n\n\"Still more to do. Always more to do. Where to next?\"\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [null, null, null, {"action": "The Barber", "result": "She looks at your face. \"I imagine it must be... Itchy.\" She takes your chin in her hand and turns your head. \"Hmm, yes, you do need a shave badly.\" She says, entirely professional.\n\n\nThe lifts slows and stops at a open ledge. Ophelia confidently steps off, practically strutting. \"Be quick. It will leave as soon as you take pressure off it completely.\"\n\n\nYou step off carefully with one foot and spring forward with the other. Ophelia was not lying; the platform leaves your feet just as much as you leave it. It's uncomfortable and leaves you off balance. Ophelia holds your arm while you steady, and then pulls you forward into the maze again.\n\n\n\"It's not that far because the men must visit so often.\" After a few minutes of turning left, left, right, left, left, right, right Ophelia stops. \"I think it was... Oh my. I don't think I remember where it is. It's been so long since I even passed by it.\" She stands there and thinks for a few seconds and you nearly groan, but first you hear a voice.\n\n\n\"Hello Ophelia. I don't suppose you need a shave? Just to your left there... Yes, that's it.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Meeting the Barber", "result": "The Barber looks up at you and gasps, though it sounds more like a groan, rusted, like metal on metal. \"Oh my. Just let me finish this up and I'll get straight to you. Sorry fellows, this guy's got a more urgent case.\"\n\n\nYou just stand there watching, enthralled. This man -- if he could be called that -- is some strange combination of metal and bits of flesh, as if he wears an elaborate suit of armour. You can see marks on the skin where it meets the metal, like stitches or stretched skin. What looks like a bronze helm covers a little more than half his face, from the right cheekbone across his nose down through the left side of his mouth and chin. There are patterns in the helmet, to look like false skin, and hair on his head.The way it moves when he talks looks painful, but he does it in complete comfort. There's only a hole for one human looking black eye, whereas the other is a rotating orb of silver. The metallic side of his face is gleaming and smooth but on the other side is an ironically long and unruly beard, full of red, blond, brown, and black hairs, with even a hint of gray and white. Nuts and bolts attach metal arms to his torso, though there are fingers of flesh that bend on them. Each movement stresses the metal and makes a slight moaning noise. Ribs of bronze cover the right side of his body, shaped to look muscular, though the man himself is simply skinny, nothing more. The only thing he wears beside the strange armour is a pair of trousers held up by a large belt. Where it ends his feet begin, toes of silver and gold mixed with skin covered toes. One foot has a ankle that looks like iron; the rest of him is covered in bits and pieces of metals of different kinds.\n\n\nYou look away, trying not to stare. Instead you study the room.\n\n\nScissors and razors rest on tables along with shaving cream, brushes, and combs. Farther back in the room there are other tables filled with tools for other parts of the barber trade; dentist equipment, like hammers, drills, small sharp picks; equipment for minor surgeries, like thread, forceps, smaller scissors, and blades to split skin. Blood splatters are dried on the sheet covered tables back there, barely visible because of a ragged curtain. There's a faint stench of alcohol.\n\n\nYou sit down in a chair next to Ophelia, who looks entirely out of place but doesn't seem to care much.\n\n\nThe men waiting are nobles you'd guess, from their manner and clothes. None so much as looks at you. Ophelia whispers in your ear \"They are very refined about it but they are staring at you. I don't suppose you even noticed. Turn your head away and use your peripheral vision. Laugh, as if I said something funny.\" You laugh. It's grating and hard, not a true laugh, but sure enough you see some of the men watching you. \"You'll learn they subtleties soon. You've made a unique impression on them. They don't know what yet to make of you. Ignore it for the moment.\"\n\n\nThe barber sends out the man that was in the chair and motions for you. Ophelia follows you over as you sit the barber's chair.\n\n\nOphelia stands next to the Barber and motions to your head. \"Just whatever's in fashion now, please. It's not the time to stand out.\"\n\n\n\"Very well, madam. Moustache?\"\n\n\nOphelia shakes her head. \"No. It's common but it's probably better to go simple for the moment. Less attention, which, trust me, is what you want.\" She explains to you.\n\n\nThe Barber holds your head and sets about taming it. He's efficient, certainly. Within a few minutes there's a mountain of hair on the floor and your head feels much lighter. He pulls at it and styles it this way and that. By the time he's done it's itchier than it's ever been. \"And lean back now.\" He asks, pulling out a razor. When you do he begins lathering up your face and then starts to shave it. It's a quicker process than you would have expected, probably because he's got so many customers to see to.\n\n\n\"Done. Hopefully it is satisfactory.\" You stand up and feel your face. Clean. Your hair is still longer, falling to around your chin.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the lift", "result": "Your head feels light and your cheeks are raw; still it's nice to feel less like an animal. You rub your hand through your hair and pull it back.\n\n\nOphelia smirks and you walk back to the lift together. \"It's all normal for us, I suppose, but it must seem strange to you.\"\n\n\n\"That's an understatement.\"\n\n\n\"I don't fully trust the Barber. I have no proof -- you never do -- but I think he's a particularly devoted servant of Zaren. Some are like that. They hope he'll reward them, or perhaps simply not punish them. It doesn't change anything, but they never stop trying.\" Ophelia whispers to you, though she walks straight and doesn't face you, lips barely moving. \"And here we are again.\"\n\n\nOphelia marches on as if it's nothing and though you don't trust the platform not to drop, you step onto it as well.\n\n\n\"What next?\"", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Trust none and watch all.", "result": "\"Trust none and watch all.\" You say flatly. The words seep wisdom and ooze suspicion in a way that leaves you listening for footsteps behind you, for whispers and winds, for anything out of place. You have to resist the strong urge to look behind you. Those other words dance around, but you have this now. You distrust them. You want nothing but this. That feeling that so captured you threatens you again, but then is gone, and the room is as it was when you first stepped through the door.\n\nThe Jeweler carefully writes down your words without an inkling of what they really mean. If she understood, she wouldn't look so calm. \"This is the traditional writing. Does it look good?\" The words copied down in ink so easily are beautiful in their way, long and flowing, with just a hint of what the words really mean. It's good but it doesn't really convey the true feeling of the words -- these are just letters thrown together.\n\nThe Jeweler smiles at you. \"All finished? Great! That's much faster than usual. Most of the time someone doesn't even know what they want.\" That's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\n\nOphelia pulls your arm and motions for you to get up. You flinch at her touch. \"Come on, we still have things to do.\"\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a farewell as Ophelia coaxes you to leave the room.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "All power is a trust", "result": "\"All power is a trust.\" You confidently say. Those words haunt you with a sense of responsibility. They fill up your heart with a solid ache almost -- not uncomfortable, but familar and friendly. You feel a great weight on your shoulders heavy but... Necessary. Power wells at your fingertips and crawls around your arms. That feeling from before throbs in your heart again with its insistence before fading once more.\n\nIn quick and controlled strokes the Jeweler marks down your words. \"Here we go. This is the way Zaren choose, so the writing is as it must be. What do you think?\" The sentence holds a piece of what you feel now, but it still does not bring it alive. The long and carefully continuing letters are nonetheless beautiful. You smile. \"And we're done here. That was quick. I haven't met someone who knew exacty what they wanted in a long time. Most people just hint at what they want.\"\n\n\nYou stand up and take a step towards to the door before turning to Ophelia and saying. \"Coming?\"\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a farewell as Ophelia follows you out of the room.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "A bear", "result": "\"A bear, eh?\" She holds the charcoal and careful draws a simple but elegant picture of a bear on its hind legs, paws out to the left. \"How about this?\"\n\n\"Uh... Yes.\" You feel a sudden shiver, uncomfortable for a second. It wallows in your bones and shakes your spine, making its way up from your legs to your head with a chill. Something about this room screams at you and something about this moment rouses your suspicions. Something... Something...\n\nBut as quickly and as unexplained as the feeling began, it leaves your body. That image flashes through your head again, just once, and everything is calm once more.\n\n\"How about a motto? That's a popular one. Take a moment to think about it.\"\n\nYou do. A few ideas flash by. They're abstract but deep, something inside your own head. You realize that they're memories. From where you don't know but even the words are a piece of your past and as such you feel slightly more calm. You focus on the flying words and manage to pick out three phrases.", "action_results": [{"action": "Time is the father of truth.", "result": "\"Time is the father of truth.\" The words make their way out of your mouth with a sense of meaning, a subtle power that soothes your body and spreads from your chest to your limbs. It hangs over your head, not present or overpowering but always there, always more influential and powerful in the end. That feeling you had only moments before surrounds you again and then just like that is gone, though you suspect it's hidden somewhere, always present.\n\n\"Here we go. Zaren chose this particular style of writing, so I can't change that. Does it look good?\" The Jeweler's small hands have slowly but surely written down those ever important words. In the long strokes it oozes this subtle feeling that has come over you, but it lacks something, some piece that so captures the words. Though you cannot deny its beauty. You nod at the Jeweler. \"Great! That was much better than the average person is -- they always want this or that, no no, this, no no, that, and... Well I shouldn't complain. It's just so nice to find someone who actually knows what they want.\"That's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\nYou slowly rise from your seat and inspect the room anew.\n\n\"We still have things to do.\" Ophelia remarks.\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a farewell as you and Ophelia walk out of the room.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Call no man happy till he is dead.", "result": "\"Call no man happy till he is dead.\" Weakly and without hesitation the words come, spilling out of your mouth with a rasp. Suddenly your limbs are lead and your head struggles to stay afloat. Your eyelids fight to close, wanting to keep out the world but knowing all the while that they can't. That feeling from before picks up again and then lacking the energy to continue it gives up.\n\n\"Carefully now and... Zaren has decided this writing style by the way, no substitutions. Take a look.\" The Jeweler has lightly written down your words with shapely curved letters connecting to each other. The look of it saps energy from you and is reminiscent of this sadness filling you, but it lacks the totality of it. You cannot disagree with its expression of this depression though. You mumble some agreement. \"Good... That was faster than the other nobles can be. They always want changes and this and that... It really sucks out your energy. It's good that you had even an idea of what you want.\"That's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\nOphelia pulls you up and you nearly go limp.\n\n\"Let's... Let's go.\" Ophelia whispers.\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a farewell as Ophelia helps you out of the room.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Thy dreams shall be prophets.", "result": "\"Thy dreams shall be prophets.\" Such wise words. Words that see behind the now, beyond this. You eyes open wide and you can sense and nearly see shadows moving; playing on the walls and jumping out of thin air. It's a feeling of something more -- something indefinite and changing. The coldness from before prickles your skin again and whispers sweet nothings before jumping ahead in time, farther than you.\n\n\n\"I see. Here. Zaren's choice of font; it's been decided. Now what do you think about this?\" The Jeweler's thin fingers knowingly write down your words with smooth letters that crawl across each other, always to the next, always to the next. They call to mind something more but only a haunting lost feeling, not the real knowledge that they are. But you feel that these are it, this is the way it should be, so you press your fingers close to the letters and look at the Jeweler. \"It's okay? Yes, well that was fast. Your peers usually ask for a dozen changes before it's even close. Well, at least you know what you want.\" That's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\n\nYou get up and pull Ophelia towards the door.\n\n\n\"Let us go. More to do, always more to do.\" You say with a shudder.\n\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a farewell as you lead Ophelia out, holding her arm.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "A lion", "result": "The Jeweler sketches out a quick head, complete with a mane, then a body. The lion is rampant and holds its paws towards the center of the paper. \"Okay, we've got a focus now. That's good. We'll be done before you know it.\" says the Jeweler.\n\n\nYou spare a glance to look around the room. There's something in the corner of your eyes, flashing. The air feels colder suddenly. At first it chills your arm and then heat surges up over your skin. There's an ache in the back of your eyes, but more like something akin to nausea than any sort of stinging pain. For a second you forget; not anything in particular but you forget it nonetheless.\n\n\nWith a final throb in your head it fades as it moves down your spine. You see that image again, distant and faint but undoubtedly there. It quietly screams at you and then silence comes once again. The whole thing is strange beyond words and the room feels harsh in this light now.\n\n\n\"How about a motto? That's a popular if simple one. It could be anything, ahem... Nearly anything you would like.\" The Jeweler nods at you as she speaks.\n\n\nYou pull back into your head again and from some part of you there are whispers. You try hard to sort and pick them apart as you realize that they're memories from some distant part of your mind. With effort you sort the sounds and isolate three different segments.", "action_results": [{"action": "Forgiveness is the giving, and so the recieving, of life.", "result": " \"Forgiveness is the giving, and so recieving, of life.\" Forgiveness. How strange. Foreign on the tongue but familiar in your head. LIke a question, please something, please what? Everything is bright now -- too bright, but you don't mind. A slight tinger spreads through your hands and then makes its way to greet you in your chest. A feeling of potential crawls up into your brain, of greatness. That ache that so took you before resurfaces before fading in the depths.\n\n\n\"Hmmm...\" The Jeweler stares at the paper and angles her head before starting to write down your words. \"Zaren decided how I was supposed to write, so changes to be made there. Done. Are you okay with that?\" The words are long and very stylized, with a hint of warmth in the letters, but it is only an echo of the warmth in your chest. It still compels you to look though, so you in affirmation. \"Good to go then.... Wow. That was so fast. Nobles are always... Well, I shouldn't say always, but they always take forever to decide what they want, and then they want to change it. It's... Good. Good to finally see someone who isn't like that.\"That's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\n\nYou get up from the chair and offer your arm to Ophelia. She stares at you with a look of incredulity before shaking her head and taking your arm.\n\n\n\"We should go now. Don't want to keep anyone waiting.\" You say.\n\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a farewell as you help Ophelia out of the room.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Fair peace becomes man; ferocious anger belongs to the beast.", "result": "\"Fair peace becomes man, ferocious anger belongs to the beast.\" you whisper. The phrase seems so solid and so close, so much like something worming its way around your heart. Something to hold onto, no matter what. Other words float around, too faint to see or hear, but you have this now, you have something. It seems distant and intensely personal at the same time. There's a echo of that feeling and then the room is calm for a moment as it fades.\n\n\n\"Okay. This is the traditional way to write, chosen by Zaren, so no choice about that. That look good?\" The Jeweler copies down your words, oblivious to their serenity, in her small hands. The letters are all long and flowery, with flourishes and careful spacing. Still, it doesn't do the feeling of peace that those words bring you any justice. The Jeweler looks at your expression. \"Okay, then we're done here. Much faster than usual. Most people want this or that and it takes quite a few tries to even get close. It's rare that one will even know what they want.\" That's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\n\nOphelia takes your arm and pulls you up from the seat. \"We have much to do and little time in which to do it.\"\n\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a farewell as Ophelia drags your overly calm body out the doorway.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Death borders upon our birth and our cradle stands on the grave.", "result": "\"Death borders upon our birth, and our cradle stands in the grave.\" You have to restrain yourself from screaming out those words. It's anger, pure anger, confused and saddened but defiant in the face of everything. There's no reason or rhyme to it, nothing but a strong will and grievous duty. Your heart pounds with a madness. A surge of emotion brings to mind that feeling from before, overwhelming and full of strength.\n\n\n\"Okay then. Here it is. Zaren chooses the writing style by the way. Well, take a look.\" The Jeweler hands fly around the page and the words follow her pen. There's a harshness in them, that same anger, but it only throbs in your head once or twice, rather than this intense pressure. You cannot deny the beauty though, with long flowing letters and smooth, careful lines. You study the words and grunt your approval. The Jeweler smiles. \"Great!... I... Um... That was fast. Pretty simple compared to some of the crazy designs some people want. It's good to see you; someone who knows what they want.\"That's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\n\nYou take Ophelia's arm and pull her towards the door. \"Come.\" You say simply.\n\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a farewell as you pull Ophelia along.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "A snake", "result": "\"A snake?\" The Jeweler blinks. \"Now there's a rare one. How about this?\" The Jeweler quickly sketches the shape of a snake. Half is circling around the bottom and the other half sticks up. The snake has a thick middle and a large head. The mouth is open, revealing big fangs and a long forked tongue.\n\n\nYou feel a tugging in your head, like your brain is being unraveled. It doesn't hurt per se, but the sensation is a frightening one. Your fingers twitch and a quiet high pitched creak dances in your ears. Shivers race around your body and hide under your skin. The room, despite its fullness, feels empty and distant. There's... Something...\n\n\nBut the feeling is gone before you can make it through that thought, all traces of it rushing out through your skin like escaping heat. The room seems lighter again. Whatever just happened, it's done.\n\n\n\"And now a motto. Something short.\" The Jeweler looks up at you.\n\n\nYou're thinking about it when a rush of words overtakes your mind, all jumbled. They're memories, you realize with a start. Something about them seems important, so you put the pieces together carefully, and come up with three complete sentences.", "action_results": [{"action": "Conquer chaos and ordain order.", "result": "\"Conquer chaos and ordain order.\" It's a rigid sentence, inflexible in your mouth, coming out as one long word. A stubborn phrase if there ever was one. The mess in this room chills you. The nearly overpowering urge to straighten it up overcomes you, but you fight it off for the moment. Order. Order is needed here. You can feel the residue of that moment from before spilling over into the now, carefully finding a way through your veins.\n\n\n\"Ooh.\" The Jeweler hmms and oohs before putting pen to paper and letting the words take form. \"All seals have the same writing -- the letters and such are all uniform. Zaren likes it.\" The paper seems to grow around the words that are taking their place on it. It's flowing and curved but there is a pattern of strict structure to it that you can see beneath that, not quite so hard but close enough to make you catch a breath. The Jeweler looks at you and you voice your approval. \"Great work then, for a noble -- er, I mean, well... Usually it takes forever for them to choose and then they want to change things and well... This was much faster then those other... I'll just stop talking now. \" That's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\n\nYou stand up and straighten your back, before heading towards the door.\n\n\n\"Well I guess we should get going anyway...\" Ophelia remarks as you're already waiting for her to catch up.\n\n\nThe Jeweler calls out a goodbye as Ophelia runs to catch you.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Does the world have nothing inside?", "result": "\"Does the world have nothing inside it?\" It takes you a moment to realize those words slipped out of you mouth. You feel... Empty. Though empty implies there was ever anything there, that there's something there, that anything could be there. But you are simply empty, the epitome of emptiness. Whatever feeling had overcome you before stretches forward through time to work it's way around the hole that is you for a few seconds.\n\n\n\"Now let's see... There and there...\" The Jeweler fills up the paper with your words. \"Seals all have the same kind of writing -- Zaren likes it that way.\" You look at the page as the ink slowly spreads across it and feel... You feel.... Nothing. Nothing at all. The words, with their silent curving whispers over the paper, might as well not be there at all. As if they are not there at all. The Jeweler looks at you for some semblance of emotion, but you stare off, at the paper but beyond that. \"O-Okay.\" She looks shaken without some response from you. \"I'll take that as a yes then. Then we're done. Fast too -- I like that.\"hat's because the author doesn't have time for that shit, okay?\n\n\nBut you just continue to stare into the paper as the words are consumed by your emptiness.\n\n\n\"Come on then... Come on.\" Ophelia arm is over yours, pulling until you're up and out the door.\n\n\nThe Jeweler whispers a farewell at you and waves at your blank unseeing face.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, null, null]}, {"action": "Keep quiet", "result": "You close your mouth. She obviously doesn't want to talk about it and you still have things to do before Zaren... Does whatever Zaren does.\n\n\nYou play with the folds of your belt and you and Ophelia stand in silence for a moment.\n\n\n\"Thank you... I just... I'll explain it later. We've things to do now. I understand that things must be confusing for you -- it was for me, and even I had some experience with The Court before I joined it. It just... I've never done this before.\" Ophelia is quiet with this last sentence. \"Zaren has people for this. I don't understand why he told me to help you. Then again, I don't understand why he does anything he does.\"\n\n\nThe lift starts to move again.\n\n\n\"Where to next?\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}]}]}]}, null, null, null]}]}]}]}, null, {"action": "Tailor", "result": "\"The Tailor? He's been here a very long time, longer than me, longer than most.... He used to be like us. I just barely remember it. He had another name too, but it's so far off I don't have an inkling what it could have been. Anyway he always had a talent for clothing, but he's had a lot of time to perfect his craft as well. Zaren decided he wanted to change The Court to something more like what you see now. He made the Tailor into what he is now so that he could... Well, so that he could be the Tailor. Zaren rubs off on people. He places the seeds of madness in our minds. The Tailor's soul was more fertile than most, but he still retained the appearance of reason. So he gladly accepted his changes and new role. He's happy with it, I think. One of few, but he has a long history here, and a possibly longer future.\"\n\n\n\"What... Is he?\"\n\n\n\"Oh... That's your question. He's a silk worm. Part silk worm at least. At least he used to be a silk worm. I guess he's a moth now.\"\n\n\nYou don't really want to think about him anymore.", "action_results": [null, null, null, null]}, null]}, null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Gray", "result": "It's soft. It's got pieces branching off of it. It's small and blandly coloured. The colours continue along tiny pieces, like somebody just cut some of it out. This one is small, but you know there are bigger ones.\n\nIt's a feather.\n\nYou hold it close and peer at it. It looked solid at first, but now you see the little bits of fluff.\n\nThe sky is blue and clear and you can see all the birds flying through the skies. Ravens flap in the wind and caw far off. Little songbirds sit on tree branches and tweet songs. Rabbit bolt through every so often.\n\nIt's an orchestra of the wild.\n\nThere's a slight breeze and the smell of trees. Green is everywhere. Long pieces of grass feel soft under your feet. Leaves and flower buds cover trees. This is it. This is life.\n\nThen it's gone. You have it here in your head now, fixed and alive, something you'll remember. There's more...\n\nBut that's gone, at least for now.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Black", "result": "They're big, much bigger than you. The big thing in the middle has pieces coming, and more off of those pieces. They're black.\n\nThey're trees. Dead trees.\n\nYou smell the air. Cold. Ashy. Fire, savage fire, has destroyed this haven of nature. But it's nature's way.\n\nYou feel sad.\n\nYou sit on a fallen tree. The fire is gone. Even the ground is cold now.\n\nYou look up and see the sky. Gray. Ready to rain its tears on this dead place and put out any of the remaining flames. Little drops already dot the the air. A few fall on your head, as if nature is reassuring you.\n\nThey mix with your tears, clearing paths through the soot on your face.\n\nThis place is special. You loved something here. What?\n\nThen it's gone. You have it here in your head now, fixed and alive, something you'll remember. There's more...\n\nBut that's gone, at least for now.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null, null, null]}, null, null, null, null]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Crawl", "result": "The muscles holding you up loosen and you fall down.\n\nBeat.\n\nYour knees hit the sand and throw up little flecks. You hear a whistling sound.\n\nBeat.\n\nThe rest of you falls forward, hands moving in position to cushion your fall.\n\nBeat.\n\nAn arrow, bright and deadly, glides over you.\n\nBeat.\n\nYou catch the ground and embrace it, pushing forward with your legs.\n\nBeat. Beat.\n\nThe battle rages. Hand and elbow crawl forward as you make your way slowly to your weapon. Someone steps backwards into your path. You punch their leg and they fall out of the way. There is no mercy in this moment. Someone else tries to step backwards, but trips over you and falls. Almost there. Your hand is on your weapon now.\n\nBeat. Beat. Beat.\n\nYou jump up and swing the blade around. You catch someone just barely on the back of their arm; you run them through and cleanly pull out the blade. In this small space no one can respect the length of the sword, so you kick a few people to clear a space. Something catches you in the side of your head and you fall down and... is that.... bloood.....", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Roll", "result": "Your arms start the long journey up. Your head lowers to meet them.\n\nBeat.\n\nAn arrow shines between the blood and the laughter, then disappears.\n\nOne leg contracts to bring your body in and the other pushes to give you your momentum. Your heel leaves the sand, then just your toes make contact with the ground, then you're in the air..\n\nBeat.\n\nYour arms cover your head and you bring up one leg. The other pushes as you lean forward and bring your body low and ready for contact with the ground.\n\nBeat.\n\nSomething rips through the skin in your left arm, leaving a relatively shallow wound.\n\n\nBeat.\n\nBeat. Beat.\n\nYour body falls and hits the ground, and with a little effort, the roll is completed.\n\nBeat. Beat. Beat.\n\nYou reach the sword and grab it as your legs push you up. You bring the sword up and around to stand between you and the man in front of you.\n\nAnother man with a smaller blade tries to stab your side. Your larger blade leaves little time to parry it and even less to regain balance, so you side step instead and let your movement swing the heavy sword around in his direction. He jumps back and knocks your blade just enough to leave him unscathed. Now that you're out of his range, you thrust foward and neatly catch his arm as he tries to avoid the attack. You push foward further and to the right, catching his torso. As you pull back the blade, he collaspes, eyes shut in pain at first, then open as he roars in laughter.\n\nAll around you people are dying. Bodies litter the ground and few are left. Such a waste of life. The violent ones are dead, leaving the survivors to look across at each other in both suspicision and dread.\n\nSilence comes across the arena.\n\nThe shades gather at the edges and stare at you. One sits alone, on a throne of burning night. It opens its mouth....\n\n\"NO! NO! NO NO NO NO! Please, stop! I beg of you!\" You plead and cover your ears, but that doesn't alleviate the shattering misery the shade spouts.\n\nYou writhe, you writhe, on the ground, tears streaming and blood leaking from your nose and the shades scream and scream and it hurts your heart so close to bursting you thrash and cry and pray but the anthem continues as others join in and they file into the sands as you see through blurry bloody eyes and surround you and rip you apart rip you apart rip you apart fingers and limbs and organs and blood so much blood and the shadows the shadows they scream and scream and scream and...", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Look", "result": " \nYour eyes flicker and see everything on the battlefield.\n\nBeat. Beat.\n\nRecognition flashes for but a brief moment, as you see the sun shining on the arrow that procedes to catch your throat and rip through flesh to find sweet death. Blood spurts out and you drift into blackness. It feels like an eternity but some part of you knows it's only a beat or two before you die.\n\nBeat. Beat.\n\nNow death is all that is left in your eyes as all traces of you meld into the sands and you are swept away from existence.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "An axe in the hands of the man to your left", "result": "The man next to you screams and whacks a corpse on the ground with your simple battle axe. He smiles and pulls himself up to grip the weapon with two hands and bring it down over the head of another distracted man.\n\nYour heart beats.\n\nYou spare a quick glance over the rest of the battlefield.\n\nMen fight all around you, clanging metal and shrieking warriors ringing in your ears. There's laughter, joy, fear, and hatred in those screams. Shadows stand all around the raised edge of the arena, perfectly still.\n\nYou need a weapon in your hands, something to defend yourself against this writhing mass of life and death. You need your axe; it's yours. It fits perfectly in your hand and bites at the flesh of your enemies like a loyal dog. There is no question: you must get it back.\n\nBeat.\n\nThe man is chopping here and there and everywhere. He's not even holding your axe right.\n\nBeat.\n\nAttack him now and rely on your skills, or sneak up behind him?", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack now!", "result": "You rush, hoping to catch him unaware. He swings the axe around to his right and slashes another man.\n\nBeat.\n\nYour feet both push you forward and you put your hands into the perfect position to attack himand grab the handle of the axe. Both feet leave the ground and propel you into the man.\n\nBeat.\n\nYour right hand curls to give him a brutal punch with all your weight in his throat. Your left hand opens to grab the axe before he can swing it around to you.\n\nBeat.\n\nBeat. Beat.\n\nBeat. Beat. Beat.\n\nYour fist makes contact with him and he falls back a bit, his face twisting in pain. You grab the handle of the axe and wrench it from his grasp as he's weak. Your fist only glances his neck and he recovers quickly to tug back at the axe and kick your shins. You quickly push him off and bring the axe down while he's still weak, but he blocks his face with one arm. There's a sickening thud as you bury it into his shoulder. He tries to pull it out and push you away as adrenaline covers his pain, but you elbow him in the face and kick him to the ground as you pull out the axe.\n\nLaughter takes him and he thrashes about on the ground. You sink the axe into his back and he stops moving, but that laughter continues. You're just about to end his pathetic life when an arrow catches your leg and tears open a huge gash. You collapse onto one knee and drop the axe as someone stabs you with a sword. The end sticks out of your left side and blood flows as the sword is pulled back. You lie on the ground and something bubbles inside of you.\n\nWell now, isn't that funny. You didn't get it before , but now...\n\nIt's too much and you giggle until you can't breathe, but even when you try to stop and take a breath all you can feel is that hole in your torso. The other man grabs your hand and lets out a shriek, squeezes, and then his smile is stuck on his dead face. You can't help it. You smile too. And laugh. And laugh and laugh until a sword somehow finds its way into your eye. Woopsy daisy. How'd that get in there?", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Sneak up on him", "result": "You quickly move around a few fights and dodge a few weak attacks, making your way to the man.\n\nBeat.\n\nHe's still whacking into a corpse, though a different one now. His back is to you... It's the perfect time to strike.\n\nBeat.\n\nYou lift your hands and go flying into his body, slamming him forward.\n\nBeat. Beat. Beat.\n\nBefore he can respond your arms are wrapped around his neck from behind. The fool drops your axe on his foot so he can claw at your arms. Chokes and screams are stuck in his throat and there's a wheezing sound; the only air he can get out, and none of it goes back in. You give another squeeze. He beats against your body with one hand, but lacks to strength to do any damage, already fading.\n\nSuddenly, something hits you in the leg. You collaspe onto the man and look to it. An arrow is sprouting from your leg like a plant in the dirt. At the sudden shock of it you let go of the man and he tries to turn around. Before either of you realize what's happening your hand is on the axe and the axe flying to towards his head... And then his head is flying off by itself. The warm blood hits you like a geyser. You roll around and sit up.\n\nAnother arrow grows in your shoulder. You aren't sure when that happened. You can barely feel it now, barely feel anything. A gurgle and a giggle are swallowed by blood in your mouth, when you realize there's another arrow there. You fall back, trying to laugh and just barely managed to make a sound. You're drowning now... Drowning in your own blood... And losing to much of it... And...\n\nIt's... Funny. Funny. Haha funny. And then it's nothing, nothing but black.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "A library", "result": "Hundreds of volumes of large tomes cover shelves that reach up to the very high ceiling. You are in narrow crack between two long shelves. You walk through the space between the shelves, trailing your hands on the book. The shelves are so close you can't help but bump into a book here and there. The shelves are so large and heavy they don't make even the slighest movement when you fall against one accidently.\n\nYou've tripped over a ladder. It's laid along the ground, edges from shelf to shelf, the same kind as there is in every other row. They were used to reach the books once, but no one reads these records anymore. Now they just keep the space between the shelves uniform. Those maps hate being in the same place as the other non fiction and always try to push the shelves apart.\n\n\nThe books are all a dull green, faded from dust and time. They are larger than usual. Each one is about as wide as your palm and the same length as your arms. They are stuffed in very tightly, leaving not one inch of space. You wouldn't want to have the job of putting them into the shelves.\n\nYou reach one end of the row. There's next to no room between the wall and the shelf, but you manage to squeeze through. The rows of shelves seem to go on forever in this direction. You use the next row to turn around and face the other way. The shelves end a few rows up, so you head that direction. You come out into a small space between a shelf and the grey stone wall.\n\nThere's a door here you could try it but it's locked. Oh. There's also another small shelf here at the end of the row. You look at the small selection it has. Most are records of the books in this library. They include just a topic and a number. There are too many books to even list the names in this tiny shelf.\n\nThree books that are not records draw your attention.", "action_results": [{"action": "Pick up the small brown book", "result": "You pick up the small brown book. Its wretched condition is something compared to even the oldest and worst kept tomes you've seen.You take out a sheet of paper to record its name.\n\nThe ratty cover nearly comes off when you lift it to turn to the first page. There's no title or author listed, just a strange star design in the center of the page. You copy onto another piece of paper with your fountain pen the design as best you can and place it beside you so you can request another copy of whatever this book is.\n\nYou turn the page as carefully as you can. The thin paper seems almost as if to look at it would shred it.\n\nIt's another design. With your vast experience what? in many different languages and the writing of many different authors, in the books prior to the invention of the printing press of course, you can easily see that the symbols were of the same hand. You turn the pages, seeing nothing but strange symbols belonging to no language you can recognize. Even then, it should have repeated characters, but each design is different, leading you to believe it is no language, simply meaningless symbols.\n\nThe next page is torn in the center where the symbol would be. Through the hole you can the next page is blank.\n\nYou check the torn page; it's a violent rip but does not look in danger of growing and the rest of the page is blank anyway.\n\nBut there's something about that blank page...\n\nYou look at it carefully. There! A shape! A rip! A tear! That wasn't you, you're careful. You haven't ripped a page in... Well, it's been so long you've forgotten.\n\nThat's not a rip though... It's growing, like a burn. You set the book down away from the others to keep the fire from spreading but... It's not hot. It's not smoking. Still, the pages burn through.\n\nFiery shapes grow... Why, it's almost moving... It's beautiful. You can't.... You can't look away.\n\nThe ash blows up through the windless air and the sparks bloom into flowers of fire. It's an inferno bubble around you. Your skin burns and blackens and crackles. You can see through the fire now.... In the fire now... It's...", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "A graveyard", "result": "Colours are swimming behind your eyes and gnawing at the scenic dead trees in front of you as they fade.\n\nIt's raining, not here, somewhere far off, with crashing thunder and bright lightning in the corners of your senses.\n\nIn front of you is a open grave on the top of a hill. The sloppily made wooden coffin is broken into splinters. The insides are empty. In the distances other graves stand, but they are ... somehow... unimportant now. Long strands of grass creep over the edges of the grave and little pieces of dirt tumble in.\n\nSomeone is crying and someone is laughing behind you, but you cannot bring yourself to look away from the stone in front of you that stands watch over its open grave. It's crumbling and cracked but somehow still standing. All it says is \"Forever\" in letters impossibly red on the flawed white stone. A dead tree reaches over the grave and pats your back with its branches. \"You need to forget.\" it whispers in the language of wind. \"You need to--\" But it stops and the sounds fade off.\n\nThe sky is dark and clear but the sun burns bright and white over your head as the moon crawls away from it.\n\n\"What?\" You scream. \"I need to... What?\" This isn't what you want. There is something else... Here... There is....", "action_results": [{"action": "Someone is laughing", "result": "Someone behind you is laughing! That's it! Their continuous laughter is flapping about in the wind and hitting the back of your head. You shake with rage. This is a solemn moment! The death of the willows! The willows? Something strange is going on. The low throaty laughter slaps you across the face, back and forth. You spin around to face the defiler of this grave. This isn't you... What's happening?\n\n\nYour arms shake and snake around. You hiss at the fellow but no one is there. The sky is blood red now and the far off clouds are smiling. \"I told you. You have to forget. You have to-\" The tree speaks, and is silenced by the howling wind. \"Shut up! Close your foul mouth for one second!\" you scream at the wind. It shrieks back at you \"You have to-\"\n\n\"Shut up! Shut your filthy mouth! I'm not listening to your lies anymore!\"\n\nSome crows are picking at the tree like woodpeckers and green ooze is coming out of the holes, but wait, they are caterpillars. The circle of life!\n\nThe laughing is back! That awful laughing! But it's high now, like a giggle of some demon spawn. You spin around once again as the crows land on the grass in front of you and sway back and forth. They are giant! Wonderful, you should eat one. Eat one now! WHAT?!\n\n\"Shoo! Shoo!\" You scream, but their taking flight only blocks the laughing one even more. The tree beside you opens its maw and swallows you. All you glimspe is the red sky over long green grass and a white hand.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Someone is crying", "result": "Someone behind you is crying! That's it! The hairs on the back of your stand up and weep at the sight! You must look, you must! but you know it will destroy you. The tree holds you carefully but firmly in its grasp. You have to see the sobbing! You must see the source of the willows! Some part of you questions what that is, but that part of you is buried under this damned sobbing!\n\nYour muscles strain and shake. Your eyes ache as you turn them so far in your head you can nearly see your brain. Little speckles appear in your vision and dance a while before bidding adieu, leaving black fuzz in their absence. Watch! It grows! Lovely!\n\nLook here! See, a butterfly! It floats on the harsh wind. Your head bobs as you follow its winding path.\n\nIf only that in insistant and incessant weeping pause for just a second! You turn around to give the fellow a piece of your mind, but your mind? this isn't your mind that tree is in the way! It opens its great maw and you see something, but the black fuzz! It grows in your vision and blocks it out! All you see is the red sky over long green grass and the screaming face of the butterfly. \"Move!\" you cry but you only glimpse a white hand before the tree swallows you.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Pick up the grey book", "result": "You pick up the grey book. With just that slight movement a huge cloud appears. As you discover through the huge dust cloud and your tears, it's actually a very old blue book, not grey.\n\nYou walk through the cloud, past the door, and sit down where the air is clearer. You open up the blue book to the first page. In large flowery letters the title is written, \"The Journals of Pip: Volume 8\". Below that, \"His Search For the History of the Colour Blue\".\n\nYou turn the page to read tiny block letters.\n\n\"In his first year of journal writing, three years before his first published novel, \"Theories on the Disappearance of Gravity During the Great Regression\" (since which it has been discovered that spontaneously reverting the universe to a previous state may cause gravity to turn into small quantities of gravy, one of the outlined theories connecting the disappearance with the large increase in gravy mining during the years affected), Pip completed a few journals. One of these was a detailed plan and record of his three month long search for the nature and history of the colour blue. In the following pages you will see his journey as he discovers blue.\"\n\n\"I have tracked it to a cave near the Grinning Stones. At first their wide mouths and the little giggles unnerved me, but I have grown used to their strange habits now. It has been nearly a week since I have seen it enter the cave, but I know it is in there. I hear the little snores before I sleep, \"blu-o-o-o-o-o-o-o.... blu-o-o-o-o-o-o-o...\" it calls. At dawn it will wake me up with a \"Cocklebluedoblue!\"\n\nYou close the book. You just can't read through this radical nonsense. You've read through Pip's research; it's very good. But the man obviously has some trouble telling reality from fiction in his everyday life. You've been to the Grinning Stones; there are no caves anywhere near that region. It's too bad, he was a smart man. A little jerky and obsessive, but smart nonetheless.\n\nBut you have to admit, those stones are creepy, especially at night.\n\nYou pick it up and start on the... long, long journey, to row J786.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Pick up the gigantic green and gold book", "result": "You place your hands over the gigantic book. It has a smooth and soft cover. Hands on the sides of it you strain to lift the thing, but settle for sliding it out instead. You sit down by the door so you can place the thing on your lap\n\n\nYou turn it around and lift the cover. Inside is written I can't understand this language \"Sinful Lake\" in large, golden letters on a black page. It's written in the formal language of birds that are red. You'd think that birds, even just red birds, would only need a single language to communicate, but you must admit, you like the formal language over the everyday filth they will typically squak in. It's a good thing both languages are part of their education system.\n\n\nYou turn the page. There is a diagram of a regular looking oak tree in white and more golden writing.\n\n\n\"Quercus miaxia, also known as the Sinful Oak, is a species of oak tree that exists solely in the region of Sinful Lake. It is the only thing that will grow anywhere within a mile of the stagnant, murky waters. They often grow much denser and taller than other oak trees, but besides that, their diet, and their peculiar taste in soil, they are nearly indistinguishable from Quercus prinus. The Sinful Line is the tree line beyond which they cannot survive. It creates a very noticable change between thick forestation and bare plains.\n\n\nBoring\n\n\nYou flip ahead a few pages.\n\n\nHowever, there has been some controversy over their diet. They have been known to trap smaller prey with the use of a sap that first traps them and with an oxydizing process begins to digest in a very slow manner. The tree will then grow around the trapped prey, which is often still alive through most of the process. After the prey is absorbed the tree will shrink down around the space the prey has left, with only the bones of the prey remaining. Certain logs found with the bones of what is agreed to be a extinct canine species with a bone structure remarkably similar to humans in the center is the cause of some very unfortunate rumours for us who study these awe inspiring trees.\n\n\nThese rumours that they can trap and eat humans are completely unfounded. The numerous expeditions that into the Sinful Lake region that have disappeared are agreed to have traveled through the Lake into a little known bed and breakfast that exists on the other side. Numerous letters and records are listed in volume 2 and 3 of this series to prove this.\n\n\nYou flip back to the beginning. \"Sinful Lake\". Under that in very tiny letters it reads \"A study by Quercus miaxia Bob\".\n\n\nYou pick up the book with some effort and make your way to row A139 to replace it.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Look at Ophelia", "result": " \nShe's watching the Tailor as he measures your body. You look at her stunning eyes, bright but deep, as they follow the Tailor's hands. They are framed by thin eyebrows, bunched forward as if in intense thought. Her light cheekbones are high in her face and her cheeks thin. Her strong chin leads into weak jaw lines, disappearing in the thick black hair that caves over her thin shoulders and covers the neck of her grey dress.\n\nHer dress is long, covering everything from her wrists to her ankles, but tight around her torso, while loose at her legs. It's not meant to be a showy thing, but the way it fits against her skin reveals her beauty better than the poofy gold decorations that she carries under her right arm now.\n\n The Tailor starts feeling the width of your legs from the calves down and you resist the urge to squirm in... it's?... grasp.\n\nOphelia looks back at you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Smile", "result": "You smile at her, not a large, joyful smile, but a small smile of thanks. You would have never thought you'd enjoy having a woman stare at your naked body in such a circumstance, but without her here you would probably freak out at the furry hands that are measuring your thighs and climbing higher. You take a deep breath. Just calm down....\n\nThe tailor reachs up to your hips and you let out a low squeak against your will.\n\nOphelia laughs so quietly you almost doubt she did. But her smirk confirms your hearing.\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "All Finished", "result": "You relax as the Tailor stops his rubbing and moves back. \"You are quite a splendid fit for many of my discarded outfits! Now wait here. I will bring some of them out for you to try on, and we'll see what you like and what looks best on you.\"\n\n\nYou feel a little cold with your skin bare against the frigid air, and definitely a little awkward about standing naked in some castle's hallway.\n\n\nOphelia asks you something, but you're deep in thought.\n\n\n\"What?\"\n\n\n\"Before you ask me anything you should know that most of the inhabitants will tell the king if you insult him or his system in anyway. I can answer some of your questions later, once I show you to your quarters, but if you need to know anything right now, ask before the Tailor returns. I've never known him to be a 'loyal' subject, but considering self preservation... He enjoys his life here, unlike much of the other nobility. So do you have any questions about this place?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The Tailor", "result": "Before you have time to ask any questions the Tailor waddles back in, carrying all kinds of clothing of many materials and colours.\n\n\n\"These are what you can wear for now, while I create your outfit. Please, sir, while I sort these take a look around. Find something you like. Samples are on the mannequins and the carpets. Changes can be made easily if you wish. Pick one thing please. After it is completed you will likely need to see the others, so a proper wardobe can wait until you return to pick up your clothing.\"\n\n\nYou look around the room, noticing the colourful tapestries hanging from the walls and the ceiling. They are pictures of different outfits of many different styles. You recognize a few outfits from your brief dance, but the one you really see is hidden on the far left. It looks just like Zaren's black clothing. It's the only one with a person in the clothes.\n\n\nHe's in it, posed elegantly in his black and gold coat. His arms are raised as if to hug you and his eyes smile and laugh as if at a joke, but the rest of his face shows nothing but disdain.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Turn away", "result": "You turn away. You're not exactly at your most confident while you're naked and some... moth thing is poking you all over. You can't build up the nerve to look at the Tailor either, so you just stare into space while he plies his trade.\n\nA slight buzzing comes from the Tailor's... lips? He turns his head and looks at you from different angles.\n\n\"Hold your arm up. Yes. Please. Okay. Good... I think I have an idea now. Hmm. Something red would look wonderful on you... What do you think? What is your favourite colour? Style? We're in a lull in proper style currently.\" He speaks fast and leaves no space to answer his questions. \"Good for creative expressions, it looks rather silly I think, but Zaren...\" The Tailor's face falls. \"Nevermind.\"", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story64.json b/data/scraper/stories/story64.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a9f71ae --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story64.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=58502", "context": "", "first_story_block": "\u201cAre you sure we should be doing this?\u201d the nervous voice of your best friend, Harlan, asks.\n\n\u201cOf course. I can do whatever I want,\" you reply.\n\n\u201cWhat if the King finds out?\u201d\n\n\u201cHa! So what? I\u2019ll deal with him. There\u2019s not much he can do to me that he hasn't tried before.\u201d\n\n\"It\u2019s not you I\u2019m worried about...\u201d\n\nThough you wouldn\u2019t admit it out loud, you know Harlan is right. Being the second-born prince of the Brelia Kingdom had its benefits. Unfortunately for Harlan, he wasn't afforded the same privilege and would likely be punished much more severely.\n\nYou both sat at the bar in one of the city\u2019s shadiest taverns, The Dancing Goat. Lately, you've become somewhat of a regular. You always wore rugged attire, but its patrons somehow assumed you were nobility, probably because you never argued on price like most everyone else. Once a week, The Goat held fights and it wasn't uncommon for the matches to end in death. After weeks of being thoroughly entertained in the crowd, you were ready to test yourself in the ring.\n\n\u201cHey, pretty boy. Are you ready to pop your cherry?\u201d the announcer\u2019s ragged voice resonates over the bar noise.\n\nYou empty your cups contents.\n\n\u201cIf you have anyone skilled enough to challenge me.\u201d\n\n\"The brash ignorance of youth!\" the announcer replies. \"You're not the first soft face to wander in here. Most don't leave as pretty as they come in.\"\n\n\"I intend to stay this good-looking for awhile, old man,\" you reply.\n\nA burly hand grabs your arm and drags you into the circle of a screaming mob. Looking around, you see the drunken faces of screaming gamblers. Standing your opposite and a full head higher, you instantly recognize your opponent. That\u2019s the fucking champion, you think to yourself. His heavily muscled frame is marked with numerous scars. His eyes meet yours and upon sizing you up, the corner of his lip curls into a grin.\n\n\"Ladies and gentlemen! Our very own nobleman has finally grown a pair. I just hope he remembered to clean his fingernails for the occasion (the crowd laughs). Who will welcome him to the pit? A man that needs no introduction. A man that has never been defeated. The champion, Carthus!\"\n\nAt the mention of his name, Carthus lets loose a primal scream and beats his chest in pride. The crowd roars into a frenzy at the sight of the monstrous champion.\n\n\u201cFight!\u201d\n\nCarthus rushes at you like a crazed bull. You're unsuprised by his tactics and quickly get a feel for the man's combat prowess. An untrained man of his size, he depends upon superior strength to compensate for lack of technique. You easily side step his mad charge, tagging him with a right hook on the way past. Angered by the blow, Carthus turns to you and starts a second charge.\n\nYou stand still until he\u2019s almost upon you. Just before he reaches you, your arm underhooks his shoulder and you use his momentum to swing onto his back. You throw hard elbows to the back of his head to soften him up a bit. Dazed by your blows, you slip your arm underneath his chin and lock the choke with both arms. He bucks and grabs at you with both hands in attempt to throw you off. Holding with all your strength, you press your body into his and wrap your legs around his massive frame to keep your center of gravity even with his.\n\n\u201cArghh!\u201d you yell as Carthus bucks and flails around the ring.\n\nAfter a few moments, the lack of air gets to him and you feel his body begin to go limp. His body falls to the ground with an earth-shaking thud. You're careful not to be squished by the falling giant.\n\n\u201cVictory! Nobleman!\u201d\n\n\u201cPour me another drink and bring on the next challenger!\u201d you shout to the cheering crowd.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Next Morning", "result": "You feel the events of last night as you wake up. The massive bed, filled with pillows and silk sheets, offers little relief to your pulsing headache. Natalie sure as hell enjoys it though. You didn\u2019t exactly plan for things with the house-servant to escalate this far. The two of you were childhood friends ever since her mother became a handmaiden to your mother, Queen Laurine.\n\n\u201cNat,\u201d you gently nudge her awake. \u201cThink you could scoot over a bit to give me more blanket?\u201d\n\nWith a soft moan she shifts her weight, loosening slack on the covers. She finishes the movement by pressing her bare skin against yours. Overwhelmed by her soft skin and aroma, you briefly forget about your headache and parched throat. Just as you make your move, someone knocks on the door. You ignore it, but another knock echoes in the room. Cursing, you grab a robe from the floor and make your way to the bedroom door. The morning coolness stings your bare feet on the marble floor. Sunlight shining through the sheer, satin drapes reminds you again of the headache. Creaking the door open, you see one of the house servants.\n\n\u201cSamuel, what are you doing here?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cPrince, you are required in the court,\u201d he replies.\n\n\u201cWhat do they want? They rarely ask for me.\u201d\n\n\u201cNot sure, prince. It sounds important though. All the upper nobility are there including Baron Reginald and Duke Kane.\u201d\n\n\u201cFine. Inform them I'll be there shortly.\u201d\n\nWith a nod, Samuel turns and walks down the hall. You slam the door shut, completely waking Natalie up in the process.\n\n\u201cWhat \u2014 you\u2019re already leaving me?\u201d she playfully whines.\n\n\u201cSorry, Nat. It's a shame their precious first-born, Urijah, is away otherwise they\u2019d summon him instead. It must be important if they\u2019re not willing to wait for his return.\u201d\n\n\u201cWell don\u2019t take too long. You and I have unfinished business here.\u201d\n\nFully exposing herself, she slides out from beneath the covers. Her hair length is almost enough to conceal her chest. You smile, thankful it wasn't grown out more.\n\n\u201cYou must be on guard when approaching the court.\u201d she warns gliding closer towards you. \u201cDangerous people seek to occupy places of power.\u201d\n\nWith her final word she reaches for a dagger on the nightstand. The blade makes a shrill sound as its razor sharp edge is revealed. In a quick motion, she thrusts the point towards your throat. Despite your poor condition, instinct takes over. Ducking from the thrust, you grab her hand around the hilt and twist backwards, forcing the dagger from her hand and pinning her against the wall.\n\n\u201cDangerous people are everywhere,\u201d you whisper from behind.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Royal Court", "result": "A little later you make your way to the throne room. Hopefully Nat's distraction didn't make you too late. You swing open the heavy double doors and instantly see Queen Laurine's scowl upon your tardiness. Figuring it would be better to draw less attention, you take the first open seat at the back of the room.\n\nKing Orson and Queen Laurine sit upon their thrones in front of rows of extravagantly-dressed noblemen and women. In the front row you eye the backs of Duke Kane and Baron Reginald. Both held incredible military might and seemingly endless wealth. It's no surprise they have the best seats as both were instrumental in the growth and defense of the kingdom.\n\nDuke Kane's Order of Knights were the best trained warriors in Brelia. More than a few times, King Orson called upon them to protect the kingdom. As far as you knew, the Duke was loyal to the throne. His son, Garrick, was highly regarded for his weapon mastery and dueling ability.\n\nBaron Reginald was more of a loose cannon. His background in politics and trade meant he relied upon his guile rather than raw physical strength. The Baron was a well-informed man. Nothing stayed a secret from him long. For that reason, you\u2019ve always kept a safe distance away from his daughter, Caitlyn.\n\n\u201c...they have grown too bold. We must show them the military might of Brelia!\u201d the baron's voice rings out over the crowd.\n\n\u201cNonsense Reginald,\" Duke Kane interjects. \"Moving soldiers near to the border would look like an invasion force on Rath. We have been at peace for a decade now. We don\u2019t need to give them cause for another war. Besides, Prince Urijah is on a diplomatic mission in Rath. We risk losing the heir to the throne if we assemble soldiers near the border.\u201d\n\n\u201cWe can\u2019t just allow our villages to burn! My King, we must act!\u201d the Baron replies heated.\n\nKing Orson holds a hand up, silencing the crowd from growing louder. He stands from the throne and paces a few times back and forth as if in an internal debate. His fingers find his lengthy beard in thought. After a few moments, he looks up and addresses the court.\n\n\u201cWe must not act in a way that would appear aggressive to the Nation of Rath,\" he speaks. \"Many of our countrymen died in the war and I would not dare compromise their sacrifice\u2014\u201d\n\n\u201c\u2014but my King!\u201d Baron Reginald interjects.\n\nOrson silences him with another wave of his hand.\n\n\u201cYour King is speaking. You would remember your place, Baron,\u201d the king icily spoke, \u201cI will not forsake our citizens to invaders, bandits, slavers, or anyone else. I will send a small company of soldiers led by my own son to discover the threat at our borders. I will not put the heir in danger by sending a full battalion. My second born will scout and report back. Then we will decide the best course of action. If Rath has betrayed our peace treaty, then they will face the full might of Brelia. My son, step forward.\u201d\n\nShaken by the King\u2019s command, you rise from your chair and walk towards the front of the room. At this point, every eye in the room is fixed upon you.\n\n\u201cMy son. You have heard the trial placed before you. Along with a few of my elite soldiers, you will travel to the western border and discover the source of these attacks. I am taking a risk sending the second born while the heir is on a diplomatic mission, but there is no one I trust greater to accomplish this task. I will not be the only parent taking such a risk. Garrick, son of Kane, and Caitlyn, daughter of the Baron, step forward. You will accompany the prince. The court understands the threat of our border is something that cannot be ignored. You will depart at first light.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Journey to the western border", "result": "A small company of a dozen well-armed soldiers ride behind you in two rows of six. You ride in the lead with Garrick to your right and Caitlyn to your left. You do your best, unsuccessfully, to ignore the way she gracefully rides. Her blonde hair flows behind her as if soft waves rippling on the shore. The morning chill makes the journey\u2019s start less enjoyable. Even more so when you imagine the warmth of Natalie in your bed. The soldiers ride stoic and alert, not telling jokes or sharing stories. Talking is kept at a minimum to limit distraction from potential threats.\n\nThe soldiers, donned with light leather armor, carry a variety of weapons between them. Each has a melee and ranged weapon. Some have bows strung over their shoulder with small bucklers on their back. Others carry throwing spears to compliment their battle axes. Though deadly, you were confident your combat skills surpassed theirs. Your father ensured you started training from the moment you could walk. There isn't much you remember of your childhood beyond the endless hours training with the weapon masters. They made sure you mastered every weapon, to always be deadly and effective no matter the circumstance. Complimentary to the physical training, your father brought in sages to teach history and battle tactics to train the mind as well as the body.\n\nYou have a long journey ahead of you. It might be beneficial to get to know Garrick and Caitlyn before arriving at the western border, although you always have the choice to ride in silence.", "action_results": [{"action": "Get to know Garrick", "result": "You ride up beside Garrick, noticing his perfect posture and stoic demeanor.\n\n\u201cYour father really did a number on you, huh?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cWhat\u2019s that supposed to mean?\u201d\n\nRealizing that's probably not the best way to start a conversation, you reply, \u201cI mean, I know all about growing up with a strict father. Hell, when your father\u2019s the King, he doesn\u2019t want his children to embarrass him, but you act like you never enjoy yourself at all.\u201d\n\n\u201cI have fun,\u201d he answers.\n\n\u201cYeah? Like what?\u201d\n\n\u201cSometimes after daily training, Hector and I will practice the lute.\u201d\n\n\u201cI always figured you for a softy. That rough exterior just screams compensation. Who\u2019s Hector?\u201d\n\n\u201cFuck you, man.\u201d\n\n\u201cHey, I\u2019m just trying to be friendly here. We have a long road ahead of us. Might as well make the most of it. I won\u2019t tell the Duke you\u2019re queer.\u201d\n\nYour comment makes Caitlyn snicker in the background.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not queer, you weaselly piece of shit.\u201d\n\n\u201cNow that\u2019s no way to treat your prince\u2026\u201d\n\nGarrick stops moving and turns towards you.\n\n\u201cYou know as well as I that you can\u2019t do anything to me. So why the fuck would you try to pull rank like that? The King knows that you aren\u2019t interested in leading our people. Your consistent belligerent actions speak for themselves. You\u2019ve never experienced discipline or tested your willpower like I have. Since I could walk, my father trained me personally and recruited the best instructors in the kingdom to mold me into the knight that I am today. I have never been bested in a duel and the King knows my worth. Surely, he knows that I am more valuable to the kingdom than your sorry ass.\u201d\n\n\u201cThose are bold words coming from an esteemed musician such as yourself. I\u2019ll let it slide this time because I was having fun with you, but if you ever threaten me again you\u2019ll have to rethink your title of 'Undefeated Duelist'. You think just because I don\u2019t act uptight and walk around with a stick up my ass my life was any easier? Maybe my light demeanor and tendency to drink is because I understand life is more than training and stern lectures. Say what you want, but at least I\u2019ll enjoy myself.\u201d\n\nCaitlyn, overhearing your conversation, approaches the two of you.\n\n\u201cNow boys, break it up.\u201d She clicks her lips in a disapproving manner. \u201cWe wouldn\u2019t want to make Hector jealous now, would we? Here take this and stop bickering like a couple of newly weds.\u201d\n\nShe tosses a bottle of rum which you catch with one hand.\n\n\u201cSorry, Garrick. I hate to disappoint, but your company really doesn\u2019t compare to a good drink.\u201d You pop the cork and take a swig. \u201cLooks like you\u2019ll have to \u2018play your own lute\u2019 tonight\u2019.\u201d\n\nBefore he has a chance to reply, you ride back up to the front of the group leaving Garrick by himself.\n\n\u201cFucking princes,\u201d he mutters under his breath.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Get to know Caitlyn", "result": "Later that evening, you see Caitlyn sitting alone near the fire. You walk over and grab a seat next to her. The light emanating from the flames illuminate her bright blue eyes. She looks off into the night sky deep in thought.\n\n\u201cDon't even think about it. I know what you want and I can assure you, you won\u2019t get it,\u201d she says.\n\n\u201cWhat are you talking about?\u201d you reply.\n\n\u201cOh come on, it\u2019s been obvious since we were teenagers. Every time I would visit the palace, you\u2019d stand there all googly-eyed. If you weren\u2019t a prince, and not halfway decent looking, I\u2019d already have my father deal with you. The last horny fool who stared too long at my ass got sold to a Naji Privateer.\u201d\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t think too highly of yourself, Cait. I can tell it\u2019s been some time for you, but I wouldn\u2019t want my one night with you to ruin your experience with all men in the future. Once you have the best\u2014\u201d\n\nShe cuts you off before you can finish your sentence.\n\n\u201cOh don\u2019t think too highly of myself, Prince? You should listen to yourself. I\u2019ve heard the rumors about you and trust me, I am NOT interested.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat sort of rumors would those be?\" you ask.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s a sad tale, really more cliche than anything. A second-born prince trying to earn the affection of his father, so he gets into as many skirts and trouble as possible. All for the attention of his dear wittle daddy.\"\n\n\u201cWell you're definitely of strong opinion. What\u2019s your story?\u201d\n\n\u201cMy story?\u201d she asks, surprised.\n\n\u201cYeah\u2026 like why are you this way? I mean, you used to visit the palace sometimes in our youth, but it\u2019s been some time since we\u2019ve talked. In fact, we haven\u2019t even talked since our early teen years.\u201d\n\nA flash of steel catches your eye. You notice that Caitlyn is dexterously flipping a throwing knife through her hand using different spinning techniques.\n\n\u201cAnd that\u2019s certainly a new skill you didn\u2019t have when we were kids,\u201d you comment.\n\n\u201cPerhaps you\u2019ll think twice before making a move,\u201d she replies.\n\n\u201cAh, more of a challenge if you ask me! The higher the risk, the higher the reward.\u201d\n\n\u201cAre you never serious, Prince?\u201d\n\n\u201cOnly on the rarest of occasions. Life is more than discussing war, politics, and economy. I rather enjoy myself than be weighed down by such meaningless things.\u201d\n\n\u201cIs a prince even allowed to do that?\u201d\n\n\u201cNo. But I do it anyway. Besides, everyone is much happier to have my brother, Urijah, be the heir. I\u2019m sure the kingdom will do just fine under his rule. Me, I\u2019d rather enjoy the simple things: a pretty woman, strong drink, and a good fight.\u201d\n\n\u201cCan\u2019t argue with that. I\u2019m the same way minus the woman part.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou sure about that?\u201d\n\n\u201cAsk me again in a few drinks. It\u2019s getting late, Prince, and we have a long journey to ride. Get some sleep. I\u2019m sure you have lots to dream about.\u201d\n\nCaitlyn gets up from her seat. Her hand gives your shoulder a light squeeze and a gentle touch to your cheek as she walks off into the darkness.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Resupply at Moorstead", "result": "A few days later, you arrive at the small village of Moorstead to resupply. While the rest of the company heads to the General Store, you visit the local tavern for a drink. Swinging open the door, you see the place is fairly deserted, save for a few figures huddled quietly in the corner.\n\n\u201cBarkeep! you shout flipping a coin on the counter. \u201cGive me a round of your finest.\"\n\nThe man behind the bar nervously eyes the corner and looks back to you saying, \u201cI\u2019m sorry, Milord, but our stores have run dry. We're all out.\u201d\n\n\u201cRun dry? Then what are those fellows over there drinking?\u201d you question pointing to the figures in the corner.\n\nDrawing their attention, the largest of group stands and walks menacingly toward you. Judging by his size, he wasn\u2019t someone many people disagreed with.\n\n\u201cDidn\u2019t you hear the man?\" he spits. \"He said 'run dry'. Now why don't you run along before things get ugly.\"\n\n\"Before things get ugly?\" you reply putting strong emphasis on \"before\". \"I think that ship sailed the moment you walked over here.\"\n\n\u201cBoss, look how well-dressed this one is. Maybe we should ask him for a 'charitable donation'?\u201d one of the thugs in the corner suggests. \u201cHe looks alone too...\u201d\n\n\u201cGentlemen, please,\" you reply trying to diffuse the situation. \"Can\u2019t we just enjoy our drinks in peace? I\u2019m a bit weary from my journey and would much rather prefer to relax, rather than make you look like fools. Well, even greater fools I should say.\u201d\n\n\u201cEmpty your pockets, noble shit, and you can leave unharmed. We\u2019ll even give you a drink for the road since we are such \u2018gentlemen\u2019 as you put it,\u201d the ringleader threatens.\n\n\u201c(Sigh) Can\u2019t I go anywhere without attracting the locals? And why does everyone assume I\u2019m a nobleman?\u201d you muse to yourself. \u201cAlright, calm down. Let me see how much I have on me.\u201d\n\nYou reach into your cloak pretending to look for your coin purse and pull your hand out with your middle finger raised. \u201cHere\u2019s my donation, fuck face!\u201d\n\nIn the back corner, the gang kick down their chairs rushing towards you. The brute closest to you winds up his meaty fist and fires it towards your head. Sensing the blow, you slip underneath the punch and drive his face into the bar. Splinters fly in the air as you turn your attention towards the approaching mob. The first thug is met with a side kick to the gut, tripping the thug behind him. With three disposed, you take the offensive with a flurry of punches and elbows dazing the remaining attackers. Distracted by your sudden offensive attack, the thugs are hardly able to launch one of their own. You pick each one apart, exploiting the holes in their defense.\n\n\u201cWho... are you?\u201d the brute utters coughing and spitting blood.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m just a man who needs a goddamn drink,\u201d you answer swinging over the bar to search the bottles.\n\nLight bursts into the room as the door flies open. Garrick and Caitlyn enter leading a group of soldiers with their weapons drawn.\n\n\u201cWhat the fuck happened here?\" Garrick inquires. \u201cYou risk our entire mission pulling stunts like this.\"\n\n\u201cI wouldn\u2019t say that. It looks like the Prince can handle himself in a fight, though you\u2019d never know by looking at him.\u201d Caitlyn says with a wink. \u201cI just wish you would include me during your little scuffles. It\u2019s rather selfish not to share the fun.\u201d\n\nOne of the soldiers steps forward twiddling his well groomed mustache. \u201cMy Prince, we best not tarry. Clearly you needed no help here, but I\u2019m afraid we can\u2019t afford to delay our mission. We are under a strict command from the King.\u201d\n\n\u201cWill is right. We already loaded the supplies. Let\u2019s get moving,\u201d Garrick says.", "action_results": [{"action": "Back to the road", "result": "You find yourself liking the road more than you would have thought. You didn\u2019t mind the long riding days, food rationing, and sleeping outside. You\u2019d been on small missions before, but nothing to this extent. Despite Garrick\u2019s stoic personality, you caught glimpses of him laughing and telling stories with the soldiers. Caitlyn was by far your preferred companion. You and her had several inside jokes that got on the nerves of everyone else, which only added to your enjoyment.\n\nIn two days time you would arrive at Nastela. The fortress city was located on the western border of Brelia. The Governor of Nastela, Lucius, should be able to aid the mission.You look up from your bedroll to view the clear night sky. There are worse things to fall asleep to, you think before sleep overtakes you.\n\nTwo days later...\n\nYou arrive at Nastela. For years, Nastela has been the gateway in and out of the Kingdom of Brelia. The city, more fortress, has the only road across the western border. A massive wall lines the rest of the shared borderline. Due to its nature, security is always tight and people are refused entry at the slightest hint or suspicion. The war with Rath still registers fresh in citizen\u2019s minds and the strong security is seen as a comfort. Recognizing your royal seal, the guards let you in without a problem.\n\n\u201cPerhaps we should stick to business first,\u201d the leader of your soldier escort, Will, suggests. He adds with a smile, \u201cAfterward I\u2019ll grab the first round.\u201d\n\nMaking your way to the governor\u2019s office, you notice that the city looks on edge. Iron-clad soldiers hustle about and your arrival doesn\u2019t attract a large amount of attention. You realize that your company isn\u2019t dressed in ceremonial armor, but in your experience citizens are always in a hurry to see your arrival. Even if they don\u2019t recognize royalty initially, a guard escort usually attracts attention. By your perception, the people of Nastela look scared.\n\nThe Nastelian escort leads you into to the governor\u2019s office. Inside, paper-pushers and scribes silently work while politicians clamor in heated debates. The arguments of frail old men lead to the death of young men, you think to yourself. Eventually you reach a set of sturdy double doors with poleaxe wielding guardsmen lining the interior. Each stands large and quietly confident. A lone man stands behind a massive mahogany desk. His skinny arms hold a scroll in one hand and a goblet in the other. His elegant crimson robe flows behind him like a waterfall.\n\n\u201cAh yes, the prince is here. The guards at the gate sent word you would be arriving soon. How can I help you?\u201d he addresses you quickly and turns his attention back to his reading.\n\n\u201cFor starters, you can stop reading when we\u2019re talking. Secondly, you can pour me whatever you\u2019re having,\u201d you answer.\n\nBehind you Caitlyn holds up two fingers.\n\n\u201cShit, this stuff is good. What is it? I\u2019ve never had something like it before,\u201d you comment, downing the cup.\n\nGovernor Lucius answers, \u201cThis, Prince, is the finest brandy from Rath. Despite the risk, there are benefits to being close to another nation. Namely, trade. We import a large number of goods from Rath as I\u2019m sure your aware. Although these may be strenuous times, being the war and all, I find that trading and dealing is how you create ally from enemy. If you prove that you can work together with a simple transaction, you create the opportunity for more mutually beneficial deals.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt certainly has a unique flavor\u2026 leaves quite a burning sensation.\u201d\n\n\u201cSay what you will about the Rathan people, they embrace the hard parts about life.\u201d\n\nGarrick steps forward to speak, \u201cGovernor Lucius, I was unaware you hired outside security.\u201d Eyeing the poleaxes he adds, \u201cWasn\u2019t it only last summer that the King ordered a large number of my father\u2019s knights to increase the defense of Nastela? I am unfamiliar with your personal guard. Where did the knights go?\u201d\n\n\u201cGarrick, son of Kane. You do possess the Duke\u2019s direct questioning. Straight to the matter at hand then\u2026 I\u2019m sure you\u2019ve heard about the recent raids that have been targeting small villages along the border? Of course you have, that\u2019s why you\u2019re here. Well I can assure you, no Rathan raiders are making it through my city. Not a single person comes or goes without my knowledge, certainly not entire raiding parties.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat did not answer my question, Governor,\u201d Garrick answers narrowing his eyes.\n\n\u201cI suppose we were going to find ourselves here one way or another,\u201d Lucius muses. \u201cNow!\u201d\n\nAt his signal, the guardsmen in unison move into battle position. The clanking of armor echoes throughout the room as the heavily armed soldiers encircle your company.\n\n\u201cTreasonous bastard!\u201d Garrick shouts and charges the governor.\n\nLucius\u2019 attention goes back to the scroll as he murmurs the remaining incantation of the spell. With his final word, Lucius vanishes and a blast of energy fills the room knocking Garrick off his feet. Papers fly aimlessly as the occupants of the room try to reorient themselves. Will and his fellow soldiers engage the governor\u2019s guard. Their light leather armor offers little protection against the sheer might and brutality of the heavy poleaxes. They fight expertly, but circumstances are against them. Into the fray you join as more guards pour into the room. You begin to notice your sword hand growing heavy, each parry becoming more sluggish. Your eye catches a goblet on the floor. Drugged, you surmise. In the corner of your eye, you see Caitlyn has come to the same conclusion. She nimbly dodges several attacks before getting tagged by an iron gauntlet to the mouth. One by one, each of your soldiers are cut down. This is not how I imagined the end would come, you think just before your world turns black.", "action_results": [{"action": "Awaken", "result": "Your vision is a blur as you slip in and out of consciousness. They are transporting you somewhere, but your mind is too hazy to comprehend where exactly. You hear waves. The clasp of iron is heard distinctly through the background noise of bodies shuffling and a man yelling orders. You feel the the ground beneath you unsteady. They are transporting you by sea. You are unsure how many days it\u2019s been since the encounter at Nastela. Your head is throbbing and you don\u2019t know whether anyone from your company is still alive. A black hood is placed over your head preventing you from seeing your surroundings. Yep, definitely not how I thought that day would go, you think. You take some comfort in remembering that Cait was knocked out instead of killed. Maybe she\u2019s on the ship with you.\n\n\u201cCaitlyn!\u201d you shout and promptly get backhanded.\n\n\u201cPrince?\u201d You hear the soft spoken voice of a female somewhere to your right. Then another smack fills the air.\n\n\u201cNo talking,\u201d a grizzly voice bellows.\n\nHours later, the ship makes port. You feel the tug of your chains lead you from the boat into the back of a caravan. The hood is still over your head, but you can feel the hot, dry air of the environment. The ground beneath you is too loose to be dirt. It\u2019s sand. Traveling over what you guess are cobblestones, the bumpy caravan takes you into a city.\n\n\u201cOut,\u201d the same voice commands.\n\nWaiting for the man chained in front, you climb out and stand in line at your captor\u2019s direction. The hood is pulled from your head blinding your eyes in the sudden sunlight. Once you finally adjust to the light, you see a large dark skinned man standing in front of you. He\u2019s holding a whip in his right hand and a wicked-looking scimitar in the other.\n\n\u201cYou are property of Lady Myrr. Whatever she wishes, you will do. If you disobey her, you will be punished. If you insult her name, you will be punished. If you even fucking look at her wrong\u2014\u201d\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ll be punished?\u201d\n\nChained a few bodies down from you, Caitlyn speaks out of turn.\n\nThe dark skinned man, Darius, walks up to her glaring into her eyes in evaluation.\n\n\u201cIt is unwise to speak over the man who holds your life in his hand.\u201d\n\n\u201cI thought Lady Myrr owns me. Not you,\u201d Caitlyn retorts.\n\nDespite the truth of her words, she is met with a punch to the gut and doubles over in pain.\n\n\u201cLady Myrr owns your miserable lives and I am the instrument in which she commands! I am the one who will ensure you serve the Lady. Trouble makers and insurrectionists will meet unimaginable pain before leaving this world. Now walk.\u201d\n\nFor emphasis, Darius cracks the whip at the ground close to where Caitlyn is kneeling. He leads the group of chained prisoners through a courtyard, down several staircases, and into the dungeon. Torches hanging upon the dimly lit hallways are the only source of light. The prisoners are divided three into a cell. Unfortunately, you aren\u2019t placed with Caitlyn. You wonder what happened to Garrick. You didn\u2019t see him among the others. You aren\u2019t even sure if he\u2019s alive. Out of the two other prisoners in your cell, only one looks like a fighter. His long unkempt hair hangs to his mid back and his beard is just as long. Several tribal tattoos line his thick arms. The other prisoner looks as if he spent more time in the library than the training grounds.", "action_results": [{"action": "Talk to them", "result": "\u201cWell, we seem to have found ourselves in a shitty situation,\u201d you break the silence. \u201cAny idea how to escape this hell hole?\u201d\n\n\u201cFriend, you\u2019re better off accepting your new life. Lady Myrr is the most powerful person in all of Miranna. And in Miranna, the powerful dictate the law,\u201d the Librarian, Harold, answers.\n\n\u201cWhat about you, big guy? Any ideas?\u201d you address the hairy man.\n\nThe man stares off in the distance before responding, \u201cThere is no escape. Only suffering.\u201d\n\n\u201cQuite the couple of optimistic cellmates they put me with. For once I\u2019m regretting not paying enough attention during history lessons. Care to inform me on Miranna?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ve never heard of Miranna? It\u2019s only the most notorious pirate island in the Daen Sea! There has never been an established government on this island because the pirate lords have always overthrown whoever tried colonizing it. Doesn\u2019t matter which major superpower tries: Rath, The Jeika Dominion, even the Kingdom of Brelia hasn\u2019t been able to control Miranna. Her land promises fortune and her seas bring destruction! Lady Myrr has the most influence and no one wants to be on her bad side. The last house that opposed her vanished in the night... The occupants did at least. The building is still there,\u201d you see the excitement in Harold\u2019s face as he gets to share his life study.\n\n\u201cSo let me get this straight, the island is run by pirates, but somehow the most powerful person is this \u2018Lady Myrr\u2019? Why hasn\u2019t some bad mother fucker with a giant hat and peg leg taken charge?\u201d you question.\n\n\u201cAh you mean Captain Myrr. Yeah, he used to be in charge. Before the Lady slit his throat in front of his crew, that is. She may be pretty looking and lady-like, but she\u2019s bat-shit crazy. Don\u2019t let her polite manners fool you. She\u2019s a devil. She was royalty in some faraway land before getting kidnapped and sold by her usurping uncle. She spent years as a slave doing god knows what before catching the attention of a certain pirate lord. She\u2019s a dangerous mix of noble intelligence and slave ruthlessness.\u201d\n\n\u201cShe does sound the intriguing character.\u201d you say. \u201cI think I\u2019d very much like to meet the Lady.\u201d\n\n\u201cYour funeral.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Sleep", "result": "You awaken to the splash of cold water hitting your face.\n\n\u201cFuck!\u201d you shout.\n\n\u201cRise and shine, scum,\u201d Darius answers with a cruel grin.\n\nSeveral armed guards pull you from your cell and march you and the other prisoners from the dungeon. They lead you into an open, sandy area surrounded by a massive wall. Guards with spears and bows patrol the top of the wall limiting any sort of escape. You notice a balcony overhanging part of the area filled with well-dressed and fair skinned people.\n\n\u201cOn your knees. Lady Myrr, your newest recruits,\u201d Darius addresses towards the balcony while \u2018helping\u2019 the prisoners that are slow to kneel.\n\n\u201cAny potential?\u201d A clear, articulate voice rings out from above. You instantly recognize Lady Myrr. Her raven colored dress hugs tightly against her, leaving no wonder to the curve of her body. Her pure black hair would be lost in the silky shadow of her dress if not for the exposed back.\n\n\u201cJust the usual shit,\u201d Darius replies. \u201cPerhaps we should give them the opportunity to show their value. Does the Lady desire a demonstration?\u201d\n\n\u201cLet them prove their worth.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou heard the Lady. Swords!\u201d Darius shouts.\n\nWhile slaves rushed to follow Darius\u2019 orders, guards carefully unchained the prisoners and warned against any revolt upon penalty of death. Expecting wooden training swords, you were surprised when real steel was placed in your hand. At random you were separated into two lines facing one another. Luckily, you are on the same side as Caitlyn. One line was given red ribbons to wear signifying which \"team\" they\u2019re on.\n\n\u201cI can imagine you dumb goat fuckers need instructions, even though it should be fairly obvious!\u201d Darius yells. \u201cLast team standing wins. By any means necessary.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat do we win?\u201d you can\u2019t help but ask.\n\nAngry that he\u2019s interrupted, Darius gives you a look and continues, \u201cProve your worth to Lady Myrr! Oh and the winner will receive a full wine skin courtesy of the generous Lady Myrr.\u201d\n\nDarius cracks his whip signaling to start. The two groups of slaves rush towards each other clashing with the ring of steel and barbaric screams. Men cry out in anguish as blades find their way into unprotected flesh. The white sand is dyed red as each man falls. You almost feel bad about cutting down the ill-trained slaves, but you remind yourself that they\u2019d kill you if they could. Each swing of your blade causes destruction. The strength and quickness of your strikes easily passes through the feeble defenses you encounter. Only a few manage a single parry before you rip them apart. Your group wins easily, only losing a couple of lives in the process.\n\n\u201cGive them their wine. Bring that one up to me,\u201d Lady Myrr commands from the balcony motioning towards you.\n\nAfter giving Darius a wink, you follow the guards into the manor.", "action_results": [{"action": "Meeting Lady Myrr", "result": "The guards lead you through the manor passing by countless house slaves scrambling to fulfill their duties. Most of the female slaves are topless.\n\n\"Can\u2019t say I disagree with the dress code,\" you comment.\n\nA forceful push in your back is your only reply.\n\n\u201cYeah like you aren\u2019t staring too,\u201d you utter softly.\n\nYou arrive at a lavish doorway draped with fine beads, silk, and an assortment of decorations. Entering into the room, Lady Myrr gracefully rises from her chair and strides in your direction.\n\n\u201cNow what am I to think when I see one of my prisoners cut down multiple men without breaking a sweat?\u201d Lady Myrr asks pouring two glasses of wine from a jewel-covered pitcher. \"Guards, leave us.\"\n\n\u201cTempt a man with a good drink and the company of a beautiful woman and he\u2019ll accomplish anything,\u201d you respond.\n\n\u201cHeh, I don\u2019t remember ever offering to meet with the victors of that fun little game.\u201d\n\n\u201c Let's just say I had a feeling you'd want to meet the one who distinguished themselves above the rest. From what I hear, you\u2019re a lady who appreciates someone who can get things done.\u201d\n\n\u201cI can\u2019t say I don\u2019t admire your confidence. By your showing on the sand, it\u2019s obvious that you are skilled with a blade. Skills such as yours don\u2019t just magically appear. Tell me, how did you come across such training?\u201d\n\n\u201cI had a very strict father.\u201d\n\n\u201cSon of a military man perhaps?\u201d\n\n\u201cSomething like that.\u201d\n\nLady Myrr waves her hand as if swatting away an idea.\n\n\u201cYour background matters not. As long as you serve your lady without question. In any capacity I see fit. Do you have a woman?\u201d\n\nShe takes a sip from her cup and places her hand against your chest.\n\n\u201cSort of,\u201d you answer with a slight hesitation.\n\n\u201cIf you had one, you\u2019d know. Come, I desire instruction.\u201d\n\n\u201cOf what, my Lady?\u201d\n\n\u201cYou\u2019ll find out.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Agree", "result": "\u201cDo you notice my hip position as I thrust like this? That\u2019s where your power comes from. If you don\u2019t wind up, you\u2019ll be more efficient with your energy too.\u201d\n\nFor a few months, you have been teaching your sword techniques to Lady Myrr. She had been given some training as a girl, but nothing extensive. She was not unskilled, simply lacked proper refinement. Her determination to perfectly perform drills surprised you. You imagined someone with her status would only order people around. Lady Myrr takes a more hands on approach. On more than one occasion, she would not continue the lesson until the specific form was mastered. Luckily, she didn\u2019t pry deeper into your past. You aren\u2019t quite sure what would happen if she found out who you are and you really didn\u2019t want to find out. No, you felt it was best to hide your identity.\n\n\u201cFucking hell! I always drop my guard when attempting that feint.\u201d Myrr shouts in frustration.\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s because you\u2019re overcompensating with your leg power. It should be quick, without effort. Like this.\u201d\n\nYou perform the technique to perfection as you\u2019ve done countless times.\n\n\u201cShow off. Alright that\u2019s enough for today. I need you for something,\u201d Lady Myrr says.\n\n\u201cSomething else than training?\u201d you question.\n\n\u201cYes. Darius should be here any moment. Ah here he is.\u201d\n\n\u201cMy Lady Myrr,\u201d Darius bows. \u201cSlave,\u201d he mentions with obvious distaste in your direction.\n\n\u201cSpeak freely,\u201d Lady Myrr commands.\n\n\u201cOur contacts have reported Captain Kano is plotting with the Rathans against you,\" Darius says. \"They will aid him with firepower as long as he remains loyal to Rath.\u201d\n\n\u201cAre these contacts to be trusted?\u201d Lady Myrr asks.\n\n\u201cI trust them with my life, my Lady. We should strike Kano before he has the chance to grow in strength. Before he has the support of Rath.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhat do you think?\u201d Lady Myrr turns to you.\n\n\u201cMy Lady, he is a slave! You would ask his advice when your entire manor is threatened?\u201d Darius interjects.\n\nBefore Darius could think to react, Lady Myrr grabs his throat and trips him to the ground. Her vise-like grip prevents any air from his breath, her knee holding his body in place on the ground. Judging by his size, you don\u2019t doubt that Darius could overpower the Lady off him if he really wanted to, but he continues to lay in obedience. You stand ready just in case.\n\n\u201cYOU will fucking listen to ME. If I ask your opinion, I want to hear it. Don\u2019t presume that I want to hear it all the time. Do you understand me?\u201d\n\nDarius (coughing) does his best to nod and Lady Myrr lets him back to his feet.\n\n\u201cSo what do you think?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack Kano", "result": "\u201cIf you want to stay on top, you have to eliminate your competition. If people learn you have a rival, they'll assume you are equals. You must end it before it gets to that point,\u201d you answer.\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s what I like to hear. We\u2019ll organize a small force and attack in two days. Darius, ready the men.\u201d\n\nWith a swift nod, Darius leaves the two of you alone.\n\n\u201cYou have been in my manor for many weeks now. You have been granted the privilege of walking freely within my walls because you have shown you\u2019re not a common slave. I have spent enough time with you to know you\u2019re not stupid enough to attempt escape. This will be different. You will be beyond these walls, armed, and without guards. You have served me faithfully, even being enjoyable company. Before you get any ideas, know that should you betray me or this mission, you will be executed. You have spent enough time around here to know that would not be a quick process. I may value you, but the smallest hint of disobedience will be punished severely.\u201d\n\n\u201cLady, I like my limbs attached and throat un-slit. You have nothing to worry about,\u201d you reply. The thought pops into your mind, Although if I were to escape, this does sound like my best opportunity.\n\n\u201cGood.\u201d\n\nLater that night...\n\nYou fall back in your bed exhausted. Lady Myrr does the same beside you. It wasn\u2019t the first time it happened during your months of training. Still, it complicated things a bit. You figured you didn\u2019t have a choice in the matter. Lady Myrr always gets her way and this wasn\u2019t exactly a difficult order to follow. The refusal of her advances would cause more problems, and even possibly your life. You felt a pang of guilt each time for Natalie\u2019s sake, but you couldn\u2019t help wanting more. She curls up next to you and gently runs her hand over your bare skin.\n\n\u201cYou know many men would kill for the position you have now,\u201d she breaks the silence.\n\n\u201cI doubt anyone would kill to put themselves into slavery.\u201d\n\n\u201cBesides that. You know what I mean.\u201d\n\n\u201cI know and I can\u2019t blame them. You\u2019re beautiful. Everyone at their very core desires someone to be intimate with. Someone who they can share their inner secrets to without fear of judgment or rejection. The luckiest people are the ones who find that early in their lifetime.\u201d\n\n\u201cSince you\u2019ve arrived here, I\u2019ve never heard you speak in such a way. Perhaps there is more to you than base animal instinct.\u201d\n\n\u201cUm, thanks?\u201d\n\n\u201cTake it as a good thing. There is more to life than drinking and fucking.\u201d\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s ironic,\u201d you say, pouring another cup of wine.\n\n\u201cPeople in my position don\u2019t last long. The power hungry always desire to move up. It\u2019s their nature. Every captain on this fucking island wants my head. Captain Kano is just the one foolish enough to try.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt\u2019d be foolish to try on his own at least, but he partnered with a strong ally. He\u2019s not as foolish as you think.\u201d\n\n\u201cFuck Captain Kano. He\u2019s a soft cocked puppet. Tomorrow I\u2019ll slit his throat myself and put his head on a pike to welcome his Rathan allies.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re joining the raid personally?\u201d\n\n\u201cOf course! On this island, respect is earned. Fear works the same way. Either by respect or fear, they\u2019ll all fall in line.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhatever it takes, I guess. Might I make a request?\u201d\n\n\u201cNot this again\u2026 some girls may find pleasure there, but I don\u2019t.\u201d\n\n\u201cNo, not that. Although we can revisit that conversation another time. I was talking about the raid. There is a prisoner that was transported with me. Caitlyn. She is deadly with a pair of daggers. Our success chances would greatly increase if she were accompany us. We were childhood friends. I\u2019m sure you remember her from the \u2018game\u2019 we played.\u201d\n\n\u201cYes\u2026 her. She was quite skilled. If she were any better, she might be the one laying next to me.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou know, that\u2019s not a bad idea\u2026\u201d\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t push your luck,\" Lady Myrr says. \"Very well, I\u2019ll order Darius to bring her. Any attempt to escape by either of you will have fatal consequences. If even one of you runs, I\u2019ll kill the other without hesitation. I don\u2019t care that we\u2019ve shared the same bed. Your fate will be the same as any disobedient slave.\u201d\n\n\u201cI do love your dirty talk,\u201d you reply.\n\n\u201cProve it to me.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "The Raid", "result": "You creep quietly among the outskirts of Captain Kano\u2019s villa. From your vantage point, you see several patrol units on the perimeter. From a few open windows, it doesn\u2019t look to be that heavily guarded on the inside. To the east of the villa you see his sloop, The Boar, docked with members of his crew playing dice and drinking outside. Lady Myrr leads the raid group. There were only ten of you total, way less numbers than you expected. When you brought it up she simply said, We will create more fear if Kano disappears during the night. The others will not sleep as easy.\n\nLady Myrr whispers her commands, \u201cWe\u2019ll split into two groups. Darius\u2019 will strike near The Boar cutting off reinforcements and my group will sneak into the villa, find Kano, and end his life. Once you see the building burning, we\u2019ll meet back at the manor. Kill anyone who gets in your way.\u201d\n\nEveryone nods in agreement. Unsurprisingly, Myrr puts you in her group. You are a little disappointed when Caitlyn is put in the other, especially since Darius was in charge. At first you\u2019re afraid his hatred of you will cause problems for Caitlyn, but then you remember he hates her too. Myrr silently leads the way towards the villa. Staying in the high grass, you use the cover of night to sneak past the patrols undetected. One unlucky pirate chooses a spot near you to relieve himself. Lady Myrr takes advantage of his vulnerable position and greets him with knife to the throat.\n\nYour group reaches the villa with no other encounters. The inside is filled with mahogany furniture and oil paintings. You move stealthily through the hallways. Internally you comment on the decor, Captain Kano sure is a lavish man. Hmm, I would have assumed a pirate captain\u2019s villa to be, well, more rambunctious, you think. It\u2019s quiet. Too quiet\u2026 A whirling sound fills the air. Led by your acute senses, your blade automatically moves into a defensive position blocking the projectile that was aimed at your heart.\n\n\u201cAmbush!\u201d you yell.\n\nSeveral doors in the hallway swing open and men rush out with their scimitars and sabres raised high. You meet the first attacker, parrying his blade before countering with a deadly blow to the gut. The second doesn\u2019t even get a chance to swing before your lighting thrust drops him. The narrow corridor allows your group to fight a few at a time, but each kill is replaced with another fresh body.\n\nFighting with her back to yours, Lady Myrr shouts, \u201cShow yourself, coward! I know you\u2019re here!\u201d\n\n\u201cHalt your advance!\u201d a voice cries amidst the fighting.\n\nThe pirates halt their attack and stand aside for their captain. Kano, you presume, strides forward. His tall frame overshadows his men. His mouth twists into a crooked smile as he takes the pipe from his mouth to speak.\n\n\u201cWell, well. What do we have here? A pirate queen out in the open? So unprotected. So exposed.\u201d Turning to you he adds, \u201cAh, the prince that I\u2019ve heard so much about. You\u2019re a little more baby-faced than I was expecting. The tales of your swordsmanship made me think you were a seasoned man.\u201d\n\n\u201cPrince?\u201d Lady Myrr asks.\n\nIgnoring her and putting the facts together, you reply to Kano.\n\n\u201cI take it you and Governor Lucius have been talking. You are fools if you think aligning with Rath is in your best interest. They\u2019ll turn on you in a second. You think Rath will just let you rule here without oversight? No, they\u2019ll use you for their own gain and toss you aside once they have what they need.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou\u2019re a prince?\u201d Lady Myrr asks again. Captain Kano also ignores her.\n\n\u201cHa-ha-ha! How dumb do you think I am? Miranna will survive as it always has. Rath is only a means to an end. There isn\u2019t a nation that can rule Miranna. Miranna belongs to the free. If Rath decides to dishonor their agreement, they will meet the same end as every invading nation. Our ships will sink any attack force. Neither Rath nor Brelia has a navy that can defeat us. But that is none of your concern. I\u2019m afraid your time is at an end. I would have preferred to ransom you to Orson, but Darius was very adamant about this part of the deal. He even refused a majority share in your would-be ransom. Can you believe that?\u201d\n\n\u201cActually, I can. That guy hates me,\u201d you respond.\n\n\u201cDarius would never\u2014\u201d\n\nLady Myrr starts to speak before Darius enters with a bloodied Caitlyn bound and gagged. He pushes her to the ground in front of you. She looks up to you, eyes watering as if to apologize for getting captured.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry, my Lady. I believed in you, I really did, but this prince has corrupted your mind and your ideals. I don\u2019t know why you took so much interest in him. It should have been me at your side and yet you cast me aside for what? For an irresponsible fling? I\u2019ve known you long enough to see the way you look at him. Why couldn\u2019t it have been me? I\u2019ve always done everything you\u2019ve asked! Yet you treat me like one of your common slaves. I am more than that. We could have been more than that! Miranna deserves a strong ruler. I\u2019m sorry it had to come to this,\" Darius confesses.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry too,\u201d Lady Myrr speaks softly. Louder she adds, \u201cSorry that I trusted a miscreant like you! The deepest levels of Hell belong to fucking traitors like you. You\u2019re betraying me because I didn\u2019t fuck you? I doubt your small cock would even get close to satisfying me. You\u2019re despicable, you\u2019re a bitch, and I will fucking kill you for this. One by one, I\u2019ll remove your fingernails and then move to the fingers themselves next. I\u2019ll break every bone in your fucking body. Then I'll show you your reflection in the mirror before ripping out your eyes, so the last thing you\u2019ll see will be your fucked up, mutilated body.\u201d\n\nVisibly hurt by her words, Darius replies to you and Lady Myrr.\n\n\u201cI will miss that passion once you\u2019re gone. This is all your fault, Prince. Everything was fine before you arrived, although I guess you didn\u2019t really have a choice in that matter. Captain Kano filled me in. Perhaps you both were meant for each other having the whole betrayed thing in common. Before I kill you, I want to make you suffer so I\u2019ll give you a choice. You can save one of your precious ladies here\u2026 you\u2019ll just need to kill the other. You have my word, I\u2019ll spare the one who you don\u2019t execute. You\u2019ll still die, of course, but at least you can save one of them. My final gift to you. So, Prince, who will it be?\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill Lady Myrr", "result": "Although you did care for her, Lady Myrr was ultimately the one keeping you prisoner. Caitlyn was part of Brelia, part of your home. You are a prince of Brelia, and you will always choose the life of its noble citizens over a pirate. You are given a choice and you make what you believe to be the right decision. Before she can react, you drive your sword through Lady Myrr\u2019s heart, catching her as she falls to the ground. Her eyes flash in anger for a brief moment before resolving in a visionless, peaceful gaze. You cradle her head as she lies dying in your arms. Tears wet your face as you try to comfort her during her last moment. Her hand reaches to touch your cheek before falling limp to the ground. You gently kiss her forehead and close her eyelids.\n\n\u201cAhh, interesting. That just lost me a handful of coins. I wagered you\u2019d save Lady Myrr ughh\u2014\u201d Captain Kano starts to speak before the tip of a sword bursts through his chest, covering Darius in blood splatter. Standing over his corpse is a member of his crew.\n\n\u201cWell, Little Brother, are you just going to sit there crying or are you going to help me escape?\u201d a very unrecognizable Prince Urijah speaks.\n\nIn a rage, the rest of the crew attack in a vengeful manner. You grab a dagger from a fallen body and cut the bindings on Caitlyn. She immediately plucks the dagger from your hand and turns on Darius, striking with a frenzy of cuts too fast for him to block. Red streaks of blood start to appear at his arms, face, and chest. Seeing blood, Caitlyn attacks quicker and deeper. In a matter of seconds, Darius\u2019 body is a mangled mess of open wounds. He doesn\u2019t even get a chance to curse before choking on his blood. You join the battle alongside your brother, Urijah. The two of you work in unison, attacking while the other is defending and vice versa. You were taught by the same weapon masters and the similarity of your movement is proof. You know what the other is planning and how he will strike.\n\n\u201cCover me, Brother!\u201d\n\nUrijah shouts and pulls at the amulet around his neck. Whispering an incantation, he finishes the final word of power. The entire hallway fills with a blinding light for a moment and then suddenly, the light vanishes, shooting into his floating body. Ripples of magic appear at his skin as he runs past you engaging the dazed pirates. Imbued by magic, Urijah\u2019s sword cuts through blade and bone alike. Those quick enough to attempt a parry meet the same fate as those who didn\u2019t. In a matter of seconds, the hallway is filled with the corpses of Captain Kano\u2019s crew.\n\n\u201cUrijah, how the fuck did you get here? And why didn\u2019t you do that earlier?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s good to see you too, bro. As always, it looks like you\u2019re caught up in some weird love triangle.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou could have saved Lady Myrr.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhy would I risk saving her? She\u2019s a pirate queen with no allegiance to Brelia. I\u2019ve got to say, you did have me worried you might choose to save Myrr. That might have ruined my plan.\u201d\n\n\u201cI wasn\u2019t worried. Thanks Prince,\u201d Caitlyn chimes in hugging you. \u201cBut yeah seriously, how the hell did you end up here, Urijah?\u201d\n\n\u201cAs you know, the King sent me to Rath. My task was to meet with their leaders and discuss how we might continue our peace treaty. I never made it that far. When I reached Nastela, I discovered that Governor Lucius was conspiring with the Rathans to overthrow the kingdom. Along with the knights provided by Duke Kane, we attempted to overthrow Lucius. We failed. He hired too many mercs for us to handle. Most of knights were killed and the rest of us were sold to slavers in Miranna. During the slave auction, I happened to spot an assassination attempt on Captain Kano, saving his life. In gratitude, he purchased and gave me the opportunity to work on his ship to pay off the amount he bought me for. I never told them who I was because I figured it\u2019d make things worse, so I\u2019ve just been here, biding my time waiting for a chance to escape. Then I overheard Kano talking about the unsuspecting prince in Lady Myyr\u2019s employ. Knew that had to be you. Luckily, Darius was infatuated with the Lady and I used his jealousy to turn him against her. You really can\u2019t go anywhere without causing drama, huh? There are a few knights left on Miranna, Garrick among them. I figure we have enough to crew The Boar. Come on, let\u2019s go home.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Epilogue: The Disillusioned Prince", "result": "News of Nastela\u2019s betrayal spread throughout the Brelia Kingdom. The entire army, led by King Orson himself, marched to Nastela. The city was no match for the full strength of Brelia. Rath dishonored their alignment with Nastela and didn\u2019t offer any support in the purge. Governor Lucius took his own life before the city was taken.\n\nMiranna was left without a sole ruler. Many captains attempted to sieze control, but none with enough power to keep it for very long. Without a strong voice to keep order amidst the chaos, the island fell into a state even more lawless than before. Realizing this put Miranna at the mercy of an invading force, the pirate crews voted 5 captains to rule. \u2018The Black Hand\u2019 unified the pirate crews into one fleet terrorizing any ships that strayed too near.\n\nBrelia welcomed you home with a large parade. Citizens lined the streets and cheered for the return of their two princes; the future of their nation. Riding through the cobble streets of Brelia was surreal. Peasants, merchants, and nobility alike greeted you as heroes. King Orson was so overjoyed in having his two sons back that he threw a feast for the entire city. You tried to enjoy the abundance of food and drink, but something was different. Before your mission, you would have eaten and drank throughout the night. You think back to the words Lady Myrr spoke, There is more to life than drinking and fucking. You sat alone, sipping at your wine.\n\n\u201cThis is a rare sight. The Prince sitting alone drinking in melancholy. I thought you would be enjoying your reunion with Natalie.\u201d\n\nYou look up to see Caitlyn. Her blonde hair, though tied back, has a few strands loose near her eyes. Despite most noble women wearing fine dresses, she wears light leather armor.\n\n\u201cDuring our journey, her and Harlan got\u2026 involved. I\u2019m not in the mood to discuss it. How\u2019re you holding up?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cMe? I\u2019m fine. I\u2019m more concerned about you. It\u2019s not like you to not enjoy a party. Did the death of that pirate queen really mess you up? Listen, I never did thank you for saving my life. I know the mission didn\u2019t exactly go as planned, but it all worked out in the end. Brelia is safe and we have you to thank for it.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt doesn\u2019t feel as if I did anything special. At least nothing more than anyone else would have done in my position,\u201d you reply.\n\n\u201cBut you did something. You didn\u2019t let fear of failure bring you to inaction. I know you haven\u2019t been the most responsible prince, but when faced with tragedy you determined what you thought was the right thing to do. That\u2019s the best any of us can ever do.\u201d\n\n\u201cI suppose you\u2019re right. I just can\u2019t shake the feeling that there\u2019s more to life than what I\u2019m experiencing. I have everything I should want, but it still doesn\u2019t feel like enough. I just feel like there\u2019s more out there.\u201d\n\nCaitlyn sits next to you and takes your hand.\n\n\u201cI think you\u2019re exactly where you need to be.\u201d\n\nShe pulls near and kisses you. The restlessness inside you quiets for a brief moment as you lose yourself in the embrace.\n\n\u201cSorrow doesn\u2019t look good on you, Prince. You can\u2019t sit and wonder about the things you don\u2019t have. Enjoy what you have or go chase what you desire. You can\u2019t live a passive life. The choice is up to you.\u201d\n\nShe gets up and leaves you alone. You pour another drink.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Kill Caitlyn", "result": "Lady Myrr gave you her trust. There is no way you were going to betray that. She\u2019s the one that rescued you. She\u2019s the one who you owed your new life to. Taking a deep breath, you know there\u2019s no going back after this. Even if you somehow managed not to get executed, you wouldn\u2019t be able to face Brelia after this.Without hesitation, you draw your sword back with both hands towards Caitlyn\u2019s kneeling body. The blade cuts through the base of her neck with ease. Her headless body falls limply to the floor. Try as you might, you can\u2019t avoid seeing Caitlyn\u2019s face as her head rolls to the floor. It\u2019s a look of sadness as if disappointed her prince would choose an outlaw over her. Your boots are stained with blood. Her blood. The blood of your nation.\n\n\u201cAn unexpected choice. Again your actions fuck me,\u201d Darius comments as he tosses a coin purse to Captain Kano.\n\n\u201cHa! Of course the Prince would side with the woman currently fucking him,\u201d Kano points out.\n\n\u201cYou got what you wanted. Now kill me and let Lady Myrr go,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cI suppose this is the end\u2026 for you,\u201d Darius speaks as he drives his dagger into the unsuspecting Kano.\n\n\u201cWha\u2014 (gurgle) the fuck!\u201d Kano cries out through his blood in surprise.\n\nLady Myrr briefly brings her hand to her mouth and whispers incoherent words into one of the rings on her finger. A piercing screech echoes within the hallway causing all it\u2019s inhabitants to drop their weapons in order to cover their ears. As quickly as it came, the screech subsided. Disoriented, but still reflexive, you grab your sword from the floor, sticking it through Darius\u2019 gut and slicing it wide open. You move on to the next target, while he doubles over in attempt to keep his organs inside. Frenzied by the madness of the situation, you lose yourself in a bloodlust cutting down man after man. The few cuts you receive in your reckless assault are disregarded. You only want more blood. You only want to end more lives. Lady Myrr and her remaining allies join the massacre. Only two members of Kano\u2019s crew manage to escape with their lives.\n\n\u201cLet them go. They will tell the island of our victory. No one will dare challenge me after this,\u201d Lady Myrr says. \u201cThank you, Prince, for choosing me. You saved my life and that is a debt I mean to repay. You\u2019re free. I mean it. If you want to leave, go ahead. I won\u2019t stop you.\u201d\n\n\u201cHow can you just expect me leave after this? I chose you over my own country. I would have nothing without you,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cThen let\u2019s go celebrate your decision.\u201d\n\nShe takes you by the hand, but you pull yours away. You answer her quizzical look as she orders the raid team to disperse.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m not a fucking fool, Myrr. I know what you planned here. You played Kano by planting Darius in his midst. Darius is a piece of shit, but I\u2019ve been around him long enough to know he\u2019s not the traitorous type. You arranged this whole encounter. For what? Out of sheer jealousy and pettiness. When he stuck his dagger into Kano it all made sense. You gave him the fucking idea for the ultimatum because you wanted Caitlyn dead. You knew you couldn\u2019t execute her with me around, so you schemed up this entire thing. You know what the worse part is? I had no fucking choice. I\u2019m enslaved to you, whether you own me or not.\u201d\n\n\u201cMy, my aren\u2019t you the clever one, Prince? It\u2019s time you forget your heritage. It\u2019s holding you back from reaching your full potential. I knew who you were the moment you arrived here. You don\u2019t belong in elegant castles wearing frilly clothing. You belong with me. The things you\u2019ve told me about your past, though not the entire truth, made it clear that you aren\u2019t suited for the throne. That\u2019s Urijah\u2019s responsibility, is it not? You may have hidden the full story from me, but I know you. Your heart longs for the freedom of Miranna. Forget Brelia. You and I will rule this island together. Only Caitlyn\u2019s death would convince me of your undying loyalty. When you insisted she join the raid, I knew what had to be done.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou manipulating bitch,\u201d you curse grabbing Lady Myrr by the throat and throwing her to the ground. She rises to all fours to stand up to her feet. Your foot meets her gut, collapsing her back down to the ground. She rolls over, drawing her sword and lunges towards you. You easily parry her attacks. With ease, you block her advance, taking pleasure in her struggling, futile maneuvers. Lady Myrr thrusts forward into your trap. You slide back just out of range, taking her off balance in her attack. With too much weight in her front foot, you grab at her wrist holding the sword and twist it from her grasp. At the same time your foot finds the underneath of her knee, taking the weight out from under her. She lies at your feet. At your mercy.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill her", "result": "Your mind wanders inside the prison cell to the words you first heard about Lady Myrr. She\u2019s a devil. Her actions ruined your life. Her mad infatuation with you would only mean further manipulation. If she were willing to maneuver you to execute a childhood friend, there is no telling how far she would go to keep you under her spell. With an anguishing cry, you thrust your blade forward. It tears through her upper thigh and lodges deep within the wooden floor.\n\n\u201cI\u2026 can\u2019t,\u201d you utter shaking with the realization. The sword drops from your hand.\n\nLady Myrr rises from the floor, \u201cI know. We are destined for one another. Our fates are now intertwined. Killing me would be as if killing yourself.\u201d\n\nShe picks up your fallen sword and places the hilt within your hand. Her fingers traverse the flat of the blade, staining them red. Then she lightly touches your face marking it with streaks of her blood.\n\n\u201cYou and I will rule together.\u201d\n\nHer hand glides to your chest.\n\n\u201cYou will have everything you ever want.\u201d\n\nHer hand drops lower.\n\n\u201cThat which is not freely offered, you take by force.\u201d\n\nHer hand reaches the intended area causing a slight gasp to escape your lips.\n\n\u201cAre you with me, King of Miranna?\u201d\n\nLost in madness and overtaken by the moment, you answer her with with a grunt, grabbing her forcefully and throwing her back to the floor. Only this time, you join her. Covered in blood, surrounded by the freshly slain bodies of Kano\u2019s crew, you consummate your commitment to Myrr.", "action_results": [{"action": "Epilogue: The Mad Pirate King", "result": "For years you prey upon ships in the Daen Sea. Word had spread throughout Kria of the \u2018Mad Pirate King\u2019 uninterested in treasure. Only blood. It didn't matter if the ship flew Rathan or Brelian colors. They all sank. Your piracy disrupted the flow of trade into Brelia. In order to prevent economic collapse, King Urijah surrendered Brelia to a new rising empire across the eastern sea. His surrender was conditional upon the destruction of Miranna. Their joint fleet littered the Daen with nimble schooners and heavily cannoned galleons. Only a small portion of captains remained loyal to you. The ones you didn\u2019t execute turned to privateering. Upon the deck of your brigantine, The Lady\u2019s Reaper, the armada sailed before you.\n\n\u201cCaptain! There are too many of them. Shall we turn course?\u201d your first mate, Scully, shouts from the helm.\n\n\u201cWhat good would that do?\u201d you answer. \u201cThe entire Daen is filled with their ships. I will not run like a frightened child. I will end this on my own terms.\u201d\n\n\u201cBut Captain, it\u2019s suicide!\u201d\n\nSuddenly, a pistol shot rings out over the deck. The bullet slams into Scully catapulting him backwards.\n\n\u201cAnyone else have reservations about following orders? Good,\u201d Lady Myrr speaks while casually reloading her flintlock pistol.\n\nWith the smell of gunpowder in the air, you address the crew.\n\n\u201cFor years you have served me faithfully. We have made both Rath and Brelia terrified of the seas. Terrified of you. I have given you wealth, freedom, and a life unrestricted by society\u2019s rules. I ask now that you join me one last time. My fate will not be the gallows. I\u2019m glad they sent an armada. Hunting is easier when the prey gathers before you. Let loose the sails! Bring me more ships to sink!\u201d\n\nThe crew cheers and frantically run to their stations. The deck is organized chaos as crewman rush to ready their positions. A heavy wind lies at your back propelling the brigantine to top speed. You take the helm, Lady Myrr alongside you.\n\n\u201cThis is not how I imagined things would go when you were first brought to me,\u201d she speaks staring at the multitude of ships before you.\n\nYou answer taking a swig of rum, \u201cUrijah is a fool. He surrendered Brelia to an outside ruler. It\u2019s despicable. He would clasp the shackles at his own wrists. For what? To defeat one man? Only a weak man surrenders. The strong man fights until he is physically unable. The body is harder to break than the mind. My brother, The King of Slaves, will learn that the hard way.\u201d\n\nMyrr grabs the bottle from your hand and takes a long drink. Wiping her mouth she answers, \u201cI only hope to take as many of these fucking cunts down. They will experience true pain with my blade at their throat. The last thing they\u2019ll see before I send them to Hell will be my smiling face and their blood on my sword. The skills you taught me years ago will take many lives this day. How naive I use to be. I only regret we didn\u2019t have more time to fuck and drink. The Brelians have robbed us of that and they will be punished for it.\u201d\n\nCannon blasts echo across the sea. The front line of the armada fire their forward cannons as they move to engage The Lady\u2019s Reaper. All but one miss, knocking an unfortunate crewman overboard with the impact. One of the galleons flies a family crest you recognize: Kane. Spinning the wheel hard to the left, you direct the brigantine towards The Paragon. The ram at your ship\u2019s bow rips through the galleon's hull with a deadening crunch. Before your crew, or even Myrr react, you jump from the helm across to The Paragon.\n\n\u201cKane! You cock-sucking leech. Where are you?\u201d you scream as your blade sweeps through the poor defense of sailors. Each kill increases your vigor as the blood frenzy continues. A pistol shot slams into your shoulder, only furthering your longing for blood. More enemy crewman gather around you. More lives for you to take.\n\n\u201cI had heard tales of your madness and lust for blood, but seeing it with my own eyes is another thing.\u201d\n\nAn older version of Garrick emerges from below deck. You recognize him instantly despite his finely trimmed goatee and grown out shoulder length hair.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s a tale of misfortune. A former prince, swayed by pussy, turned his back on his people. You caused the downfall of Brelia. You are a disgrace. I was there the night of Caitlyn\u2019s death, did you know that? Your brother and I infiltrated Kano\u2019s crew in attempt to rescue you and escape back to Brelia. But you killed her. You fucking killed Caitlyn, you piece of shit. I don\u2019t understand how the royal family of Orson and Urijah could bear a decadent failure like yourself. Your life has been a whirlwind of chaos and it ends now,\u201d he boldly says.\n\nSuppressing fire shoots from the deck of The Lady\u2019s Reaper causing Garrick\u2019s crew to scramble for cover. Lady Myrr lands next you, throwing the rope back to your ship. She gives you a wink, tosses a bottle of rum your way, and ignites the fuse of a grenade. The shrapnel finds unlucky sailors in it\u2019s way. Through the smoke\u2019s cover, you rush towards Garrick. Your sword is a blur as you feint and attack from unconventional angles. You didn\u2019t forget the reputation of Garrick\u2019s dueling ability, which is why you used untraditional sword forms. His defense is a wall. Not even your expertly disguised feints throw him off. His parries send entire shocks through your arm. By honor, mercy, or perhaps a little of both he does not toy with you. His counter-attack is swift, deflecting your sword aside and taking advantage of the opening. Garrick\u2019s broadsword pierces through your chest, driving straight through the back. Dropping to your knees, you see the fallen body of Lady Myrr bleeding out on the deck. You don\u2019t even try crawling her way. Garrick stands above you, resolute, a tinge of sadness at his face. His sword arcs high in the air. You meet his eyes. Finally, you think. Peace.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Don't kill her", "result": "You just killed Caitlyn instead of Lady Myrr. Killing her now would mean Caitlyn died for nothing.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m sorry,\u201d you mumble and offer a hand to help her up.\n\nShe grabs your hand and allows you to pull her up.\n\n\u201cSo this is what you\u2019ve become? An apologizing, weak shell of a man. I thought we were fit to rule Miranna together. We were going to rule the seas! But I guess I was wrong. The ruler of Miranna apologizes to no one,\u201d Lady Myrr replies.\n\nHer hidden blade pierces your stomach.\n\n\u201cYou may be deadly with a sword, but it takes more than that to rule here. You have to be cunning. You have to be smart. You must be willing to do whatever it takes with no remorse. You obviously are not fit for this life. It\u2019s a shame really. You have taught me many things in the past few weeks. Think of this as my lesson to you.\u201d\n\nOvertaken by grief and surprise, you don\u2019t even fight back. Lady Myrr pierces the blade deeper before ripping it out. She departs, leaving you bleeding out on the floor. The last thing you see before you die is Caitlyn\u2019s body on the floor. You feel disgusted by your actions before finally feeling nothing.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Don't kill either", "result": "You will not take part in his ultimatum. Two options are placed before you, but that does not mean you have to take either. You care immensely for both Lady Myrr and Caitlyn. Each is a part of you. Caitlyn is testament to your heritage and Myrr is your future. With a cry, you take the offensive. Whirling your blade around, you scoop a dagger off the ground and flip it to Cait who catches it with her bound hands. As she works on cutting the rope, you attack Darius with a series of upper cuts and low sweeps. He is able to block a few of your attacks before you catch him with a deep cut to his side. He clutches the wound and with his defenses lowered, you crumple him with a knee to the temple. Captain Kano and the rest of his crew resume their charge. Caitlyn finally gets his hands unbound and joins you armed with the dagger. With the rest of the crew engaged, your assault is brought to a halt. Again, you are forced to fighting back to back to survive.\n\n\u201cWe can\u2019t hold them much longer! Got any ideas?\u201d Lady Myrr shouts as she parries and incoming blade.\n\n\u201cI\u2019m a little too busy to think of one now!\u201d you shout back.\n\nA round object catches your eye on an incoming pirate. At his waist hangs a grenade. You quickly disperse the pirate in front of you and move towards it. Suddenly, Captain Kano blocks your way. He takes another puff at his pipe before swinging his cutlass at your head. Easily dodging the attack, you front roll forward and stab the pirate behind him in the gut. As he drops, you pull the grenade at his belt and turn just in time to block another attack from Kano. You parry a few more before directing his cutlass out of position. With Kano exposed, you bury your sword in his shoulder and rip the pipe from his mouth pulling a few teeth out in the process. Igniting the grenade with the pipe, you toss it into the mix of Kano\u2019s crew. The blast knocks you from your feet. Blinded by the smoke, a hand grabs your arm and pulls you through the dark mist and outside the villa.\n\n\u201cHoly shit! Did you see that?\u201d you exclaim to Caitlyn whose hand just led you out.\n\n\u201cSaw. And felt,\u201d she replies. You notice a sizable wound at her side. The result of the grenade shrapnel.\n\n\u201cFuck, that looks deep. We need to get you medical attention.\u201d\n\nShe waves you off.\n\n\u201cI\u2019ll be fine. Just need to find somewhere to rest for awhile. This whole place is in an uproar. More crew from The Boar is probably on their way. We need to move.\u201d\n\n\u201cWhere\u2019s Lady Myrr?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t know. Didn\u2019t see her escape. She could be dead for all I care. Does she really fuck that good? Why didn\u2019t you just kill her?\u201d Caitlyn asks.\n\n\u201cNow\u2019s not the time, Cait. For all I know, he would have just killed everyone anyway. You can\u2019t trust the word of someone who just betrayed their master.\u201d\n\n\u201cFair point. Let\u2019s get out of here.\u201d\n\nYou aren\u2019t sure where Lady Myrr is. She could be captured by Captain Kano. Going back and looking for her could mean your death, although she was very clear that attempted escape would be punished by death. You don\u2019t think this would count as an attempted escape, but Lady Myrr has a vicious temper and you really don\u2019t want to be on the bad end of it.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go back for her", "result": "There is a reason why you didn\u2019t choose to kill Lady Myrr. Leaving her to die, or worse, would be going back on that decision. No, you had to save her.\n\n\u201cCait, I\u2019m going back,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cWhat? Why?\u201d\n\n\u201cI need to make sure Lady Myrr is ok. She could be Kano\u2019s prisoner. I don\u2019t even want to imagine what that sick fuck would do to her.\u201d\n\n\u201cWho cares? She\u2019s the one holding us here. We\u2019re free! Once I\u2019m healed, we could earn enough money to charter a trip back to Brelia,\u201d Caitlyn says.\n\n\u201cI need to know she\u2019s not dead.\u201d\n\n\u201cYou know, Prince, I\u2019ve never thought you were the smartest guy, but this is fucking dumb. After all we\u2019ve been through, you\u2019re just going to throw your life away for the bitch that\u2019s holding your leash? Fine. Go ahead. Don\u2019t expect any rescue on my part. If I even make it.\u201d\n\nCaitlyn storms off into the darkness leaving you alone. The grenade in the villa caused a lot of damage. Part of the building is still on fire and you can see crew members rushing around with buckets of water. At least they\u2019ll be distracted. Besides, they won\u2019t expect the person who blew a hole in the wall to sneak back in, you reason. You make it past the scrambling fire fighters and make it to the villa. The inside of the building is a mess. Debris is scattered everywhere. The paintings that you first admired are torn and littered on the floor. Turning the corner, you see a bloodied Lady Myrr strapped to a chair in front of Captain Kano and his crew members.\n\n\u201cHeh, bet you didn\u2019t think your plan would turn out this way. Your attempt failed and your new toy of prince left you here to die. You have nothing left except your life. Which I intend to take shortly,\u201d Kano finishes his taunt with a slap to Lady Myrr\u2019s cheek.\n\n\u201cFinish the deed then, swine,\u201d she spits.\n\n\u201cOh, I\u2019m about to. But it\u2019d be a shame not to take advantage of such a beautiful creature before,\u201d Kano\u2019s says running his hand down the side of her face.\n\nYou burst into the room with a string of curses. Fueled by hate, you draw your sword to run Kano through. You never make it that far. A pistol shot tags your leg collapsing you to the ground. As you\u2019re getting up, another shot hits you in the chest. A wounded Darius emerges from the shadows holding two smoking flintlock pistols. You lay in a pool of your own blood. The last thing you see is a cruel smile upon his face as he walks towards Lady Myrr.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Escape with Caitlyn", "result": "There is no point in going back for Lady Myrr. You doubt she escaped the blast. Hell, you were lucky to even make it out. You and Caitlyn travel off the road to the center hub of Miranna. With an island full of fugitives and outlaws you figure it wouldn\u2019t be that difficult to lay low. Even though it\u2019s night, the place is still alive. The taverns almost never close. You and Caitlyn meander through the streets looking for a place to rest. Her skills must be remarkable because Caitlyn is even able to swipe a few coins from a passing by drunk to pay for the room. On the outskirts of the hub, you find a place: The Cove Inn. The place isn\u2019t rowdy like the others you passed by. A few depressed-looking sailors sit at the bar milking their drinks. You pay for a room, not having to say much to the Innkeeper. The service providers on Miranna didn\u2019t question wounded patrons. As long as they had coin. You help lay Caitlyn down on the bed and take a spot next to her.\n\nThe next morning\u2026\n\nYou awaken with pain everywhere. The adrenaline from the night before had finally worn off. With a grunt you sit up to see how Caitlyn\u2019s doing. Her face is white and the wound at her side looks to be infected.\n\n\u201cShit, Cait. Your side\u2026\u201d your voice trails off.\n\nShe barely manages to speak, \u201cI\u2019m sorry, Prince. I let Darius capture me and it\u2019s all my fault. Thank you for saving me. I know you grew close to Lady Myrr.\u201d\n\n\u201cDon\u2019t say that. It\u2019s my fault. You\u2019ll be fine. Just need to rest up a bit. I\u2019ll go find us more money to pay for another night,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cEver the fool, Prince. Will you tell my father I fought bravely?\u201d\n\n\u201cOf course, Cait,\u201d you say tears welling up in your eyes.\n\n\u201cThank you, Prince. I love\u2014\u201d her words cut before she can finish the sentence.\n\nYou press your forehead to hers feeling the weight of your actions. If you hadn\u2019t grown so attached to Lady Myrr, you could have killed her and possibly escaped to Brelia with Caitlyn. Suddenly, you hear heavy footsteps coming from downstairs. You can\u2019t fully hear the conversation with the Innkeeper, but you clearly hear one word in particular: 'Upstairs'. Not taking any chances, you hurriedly put on your sword belt and grab your things. You hesitate, wondering if you shouldn\u2019t leave Caitlyn\u2019s body on the bed. What does it matter at this point? She\u2019s dead and you\u2019ve lost everything. Every move stings as your bruises and open wounds remind you of the night before. It\u2019s not as bad as Cait got, you think. You escape through the window and make your way through the back alley to avoid whoever is downstairs. Out of nowhere, two street thugs appear in front and another two to your back.\n\n\u201cWhat do we have here? A lost nobleman?\u201d the ugly one to your left says. To be fair, they're both ugly.\n\n\u201cWhat? No, why does everyone call me that\u2026 I\u2019m really not in the mood for this,\u201d you reply.\n\nYou try to push past them, but they stop you. Angry at your circumstance, you take it out on the street thugs. Turning on the two behind you first, you whirl around pulling your sword from your belt in one decisive movement. Your sword drives into the gut of one and your fist meets the other\u2019s face. As he\u2019s dazed, you rip your sword out and slice in an upward manner through his throat. You sense the others drawing near and turn to face them. Hindered by your injuries, you parry a few blows before being overtaken by their fury. As you bleed out in the alley, you think of home. You think of Cait.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Wait for more intel", "result": "\u201cIt would be foolish to act from just one report. I suggest you gather more information.\u201d\n\n\u201cMy thoughts exactly. Darius, find out more. You have until the end of the week,\u201d Lady Myrr replies.\n\nWith a bow, Darius exits and leaves you alone with Lady Myrr.\n\n\u201cIf Kano is plotting with the Rathans, he will have tremendous power backing him. I can\u2019t believe no one\u2019s tried to rule Miranna with help from a major nation. Seems like a good idea,\u201d you say.\n\n\u201cOh they\u2019ve tried. The partnership always falls through. It\u2019s hard to keep a solid ally without trust. Ironically, one always ends up betraying the other out of fear of being betrayed,\u201d Lady Myrr answers.\n\n\u201cHas anyone tried to overthrow you since taking power?\u201d you ask.\n\n\u201cTwo or three. It was one after the other as soon as my late husband died. They thought since I was a woman, I would be easy to assassinate. They were small time crews trying to seize an opportunity to gain real power. By the time I was done with them, no one dared oppose me,\u201d Myrr speaks recalling the past.\n\n\u201cNo one until now.\u201d\n\n\u201cAnd it\u2019ll be a while until the next fool tries. Kano's destruction will be a warning to them all. Enough war talk. I need you to fine tune my sword skills before we act,\u201d Myrr says, unsheathing her blade.\n\nLater that week\u2026\n\nYou fall back in your bed exhausted. Lady Myrr does the same beside you. It wasn\u2019t the first time it happened during your months of training. Still, it complicated things a bit. You figured you didn\u2019t have a choice in the matter. Lady Myrr always gets her way and this wasn\u2019t exactly a difficult order to follow. The refusal of her advances would cause more problems, and even possibly your life. You felt a pang of guilt each time for Natalie\u2019s sake, but you couldn\u2019t help wanting more. She curls up next to you and gently runs her hand over your bare skin.\n\n\u201cThat was\u2026 exhilarating,\u201d you break the silence.\n\n\u201cMaybe for you,\u201d Myrr replies.\n\n\u201cYou sure know how to hurt a guy\u2019s feelings.\u201d\n\n\u201cI know how to hurt more than just feelings. Another performance like that and you\u2019ll find out,\u201d Myrr says, holding a straight face.\n\nYou stare in her eyes sensing if she\u2019s messing with you. Finally, she breaks and grins, letting you know she\u2019s joking with a playful grab under the covers. Suddenly, she recoils and clutches at her throat. Her body convulses, and her cough covers you in blood. You look up to see a masked figure dressed in black. You reach for the knife on the nightstand, but you\u2019re too slow. The figure\u2019s broadsword pierces your gut. You stumble out of the bed, tripping and clutching your wound. Naked and unarmed you attempt a feeble punch at the assassin before collapsing. Before your vision completely fades, you recognize the family crest on the broadsword. It\u2019s Brelian.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Refuse", "result": "\u201cNo.\u201d\n\n\u201cDid you just tell me \u2018no\u2019, slave? I don\u2019t care how good your swordsman skills are, no one refuses me, especially not one of my slaves. Guards, dispose this stubborn animal. I will not waste my time on lost causes.\u201d\n\nThe sudden crack of a whip distracts you long enough for several crossbow bolts to pierce your chest. The impact drives you back a few feet, but you remain standing. Darius\u2019 whip tears the skin from your body as you struggle to find a weapon to defend yourself with. Not finding anything you desperately reach for Lady Myrr to use as a shield against the attacks. She easily dodges out of your way, cutting your arm in the attempt with a hidden blade pulled from her dress. Bleeding from several wounds, you finally collapse to the ground. Lady Myrr grabs your hair and pulls your head back exposing your throat.\n\n\u201cNot so confident now, are you?\u201d she taunts while bringing the blade to your throat.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "A Childhood Friend", "result": "Eleven years ago...\n\nIt\u2019s that girl again. Lately you\u2019ve seen her everywhere. Who is she? She has pretty hair.\n\n\u201cMy son, come here,\u201d Queen Laurine calls from across the great hall. \u201cThis is Mary and her daughter, Natalie. You two look about the same age. How old are you Natalie?\u201d\n\nThe girl shyly hides her face within her waist length auburn hair. Apparently that wasn\u2019t enough because she moves behind her mother.\n\n\u201cShe\u2019s seven, Your Grace,\u201d her mother answers with a smile\n\n\u201cReally? She looks older,\u201d you interject.\n\n\u201cHa-ha Prince!\" your mother laughs. \"That\u2019s not very nice. One day you\u2019ll learn not to call ladies older than they actually are. Now why don\u2019t the both of you learn to play together?\u201d\n\nNodding, you move past Mary and grab Natalie\u2019s hand. Leading her through the hallway, you head to the Queen's garden.\n\n\u201cI like this place. There\u2019s lots of colors and different smells,\u201d you comment.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s pretty,\u201d Natalie replies.\n\n\u201cYou know you don\u2019t need to be afraid right? My mother is harsh sometimes, but she won\u2019t hurt you.\u201d\n\nNatalie nods.\n\n\u201cYou have pretty hair. It reminds me of this place\u2026 smelly,\u201d you say with a smile.\n\n\u201cThat\u2019s not very nice,\u201d Natalie replies not catching your playful tone.\n\n\u201cSorry. I didn\u2019t mean it like that.\u201d\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s ok. My mother warned me boys aren\u2019t very smart.\u201d\n\nIt's your turn to be offended. You start to correct her, but then see the grin appear on her face. You match it with one of your own.\n\n\u201cTag, you\u2019re it,\u201d Natalie hits your shoulder and take off down the garden path.\n\nYou admire her hair flowing behind her like waves as she runs. Then you take off after her.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "A History Lesson", "result": "Twelve years ago...\n\n\u201cWhy do I have to read this history book? It\u2019s so boring,\u201d the child, your younger self, questions.\n\n\u201cIt\u2019s important, Prince. One day you may find yourself in a place where this knowledge could save your life,\u201d the elderly Sage answers.\n\n\u201cI thought that\u2019s what the Weapon Masters are supposed to teach me.\u201d\n\n\u201cKnowledge is a powerful ally. People fear what they do not understand. Understanding is only gained after knowledge. With knowledge, you will know no fear.\u201d\n\nNot a rare occurrence, the Sage assigned as your teacher struggles to keep your attention during the lesson. This time, however, his words found the mark. You pick up the history book and start reading A Journeyman\u2019s Notes On Kria:\n\nThe Kria Providence is made up of three nations: The Brelia Kingdom, Rath, and the island of Miranna. Brelia and Rath have fought numerous wars since their founding. The two nations occupy most of the land mass in Kria and each is always trying distinguish themselves from the other. The last war, which ended 10 years ago, resulted in a massive wall built by Brelia. The wall stretches across the entire western border to protect against Rathan raiders. The King of Brelia, Orson, decided to build the wall in order to establish peace. The cyclical nature of the Rathan/Brelian wars needed to end, and the only solution in King Orson\u2019s mind was to take preventative measures against rogue raiding parties. Orson has made it his life mission to keep the peace with Rath.\n\nThe people of Brelia view Rath as uncivilized barbarians. Although Rath doesn't possess the technology or engineering of Brelia, the Rathan people are sturdy. The average Rathan stands almost a head taller than the average Brelian. Dust storms and tornadoes plague Rath causing its people to adapt to the harsh environment. For that reason, Rath doesn't have the enormous cities and buildings that Brelia possess.\n\nMiranna is an island of cutthroats, lawlessness, and pirates. The island is north of both Rath and Brelia across the Cutter\u2019s Channel. Many nations have tried to colonize Miranna and establish their rule. All have failed. Miranna is a place of organized chaos where the law is dictated by the strong. Whoever has the most power is in charge. It's not uncommon for the ruling pirate lord to be assassinated in the night by a rival. Merchant and naval ships know to navigate well away from Miranna. Ships that stray too near are pillaged. The crew is either killed or sold. It\u2019s no secret there is tremendous wealth to be earned in Miranna. The opportunities are seemingly endless. If you can survive its anarchy.", "action_results": [{"action": "End Flashback", "result": "\u201cAre you sure we should be doing this?\u201d the nervous voice of your best friend, Harlan, asks.\n\n\u201cOf course. I can do whatever I want,\" you reply.\n\n\u201cWhat if the King finds out?\u201d\n\n\u201cHa! So what? I\u2019ll deal with him. There\u2019s not much he can do to me that he hasn't tried before.\u201d\n\n\"It\u2019s not you I\u2019m worried about...\u201d\n\nThough you wouldn\u2019t admit it out loud, you know Harlan is right. Being the second-born prince of the Brelia Kingdom had its benefits. Unfortunately for Harlan, he wasn't afforded the same privilege and would likely be punished much more severely.\n\nYou both sat at the bar in one of the city\u2019s shadiest taverns, The Dancing Goat. Lately, you've become somewhat of a regular. You always wore rugged attire, but its patrons somehow assumed you were nobility, probably because you never argued on price like most everyone else. Once a week, The Goat held fights and it wasn't uncommon for the matches to end in death. After weeks of being thoroughly entertained in the crowd, you were ready to test yourself in the ring.\n\n\u201cHey, pretty boy. Are you ready to pop your cherry?\u201d the announcer\u2019s ragged voice resonates over the bar noise.\n\nYou empty your cups contents.\n\n\u201cIf you have anyone skilled enough to challenge me.\u201d\n\n\"The brash ignorance of youth!\" the announcer replies. \"You're not the first soft face to wander in here. Most don't leave as pretty as they come in.\"\n\n\"I intend to stay this good-looking for awhile, old man,\" you reply.\n\nA burly hand grabs your arm and drags you into the circle of a screaming mob. Looking around, you see the drunken faces of screaming gamblers. Standing your opposite and a full head higher, you instantly recognize your opponent. That\u2019s the fucking champion, you think to yourself. His heavily muscled frame is marked with numerous scars. His eyes meet yours and upon sizing you up, the corner of his lip curls into a grin.\n\n\"Ladies and gentlemen! Our very own nobleman has finally grown a pair. I just hope he remembered to clean his fingernails for the occasion (the crowd laughs). Who will welcome him to the pit? A man that needs no introduction. A man that has never been defeated. The champion, Carthus!\"\n\nAt the mention of his name, Carthus lets loose a primal scream and beats his chest in pride. The crowd roars into a frenzy at the sight of the monstrous champion.\n\n\u201cFight!\u201d\n\nCarthus rushes at you like a crazed bull. You're unsuprised by his tactics and quickly get a feel for the man's combat prowess. An untrained man of his size, he depends upon superior strength to compensate for lack of technique. You easily side step his mad charge, tagging him with a right hook on the way past. Angered by the blow, Carthus turns to you and starts a second charge.\n\nYou stand still until he\u2019s almost upon you. Just before he reaches you, your arm underhooks his shoulder and you use his momentum to swing onto his back. You throw hard elbows to the back of his head to soften him up a bit. Dazed by your blows, you slip your arm underneath his chin and lock the choke with both arms. He bucks and grabs at you with both hands in attempt to throw you off. Holding with all your strength, you press your body into his and wrap your legs around his massive frame to keep your center of gravity even with his.\n\n\u201cArghh!\u201d you yell as Carthus bucks and flails around the ring.\n\nAfter a few moments, the lack of air gets to him and you feel his body begin to go limp. His body falls to the ground with an earth-shaking thud. You're careful not to be squished by the falling giant.\n\n\u201cVictory! Nobleman!\u201d\n\n\u201cPour me another drink and bring on the next challenger!\u201d you shout to the cheering crowd.", "action_results": [null, null]}, {"action": "View Map", "result": "", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story65.json b/data/scraper/stories/story65.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2100191 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story65.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=39055", "context": "", "first_story_block": "Your name is Leo Trapa and your achievements as Commodore of your ship Adventurer have already made you one of the most famous sailors in your world of Magellan. The Adventurer is a tough little ship and veteran of several battles, large enough to hold a Crew of 30 Sailors and 30 days worth of Supplies for them. Although you are only twenty-one years old you have already received the rank of Commodore from your Queen in recognition of your superb ability and seamanship.\n\n\nThe World of Magellan on which you live is mostly ocean occupied by a scattering of islands: twenty-five have already been discovered and there are almost certainly many more waiting out there. The people of your homeland, the Kingdom of the Three Islands, have a rich naval tradition and are technologically advanced: the Adventurer carries four cannons and all of your crew are armed with muskets, though these are slow to load making the sword your secondary weapon. A dozen Colonies have been established beyond the Great Reef which rings your three home islands but these range from thriving settlements to tiny outposts of civilization.\n\n\nYour biggest problem on long voyages is that your ship can only carry enough Supplies for 30 days which will make finding and obtaining fresh sources of Supplies your top priority. If you ever run out of Supplies (your Supply number falls to 0) then you and your Crew will starve to death and die. You will almost certainly lose Crew members during your voyage and you must be careful that your Crew number never falls to 0 either: that will mean that you and all your Crew are dead.\n\n\nFrequently there is a time element involved during your voyages and you will want to complete them in the smallest number of Days possible. Successfully completing a Voyage ahead of your Competitors will result in a Score Point which will show if you leave a Comment after the game that you have completed this story with a very high degree of skill. As in previous adventures you will find it useful to make a map of the waters you sail as you may return this way again and the information may benefit you...\n\n\nSo good luck reader, make wise and strategically sound choices and with a little luck, a good course and a fair wind you might live to see your homeland again!", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to begin your adventure (remember to pick up the List of Noted Sailors first)", "result": "You stand in the familiar anteroom of the Royal Palace in Golden Sands, the Capital of The Three Islands, your homeland. Either side of you stand your fellow officers Naomi Swift and Eva Freer, both as experienced on the high seas as you are yourself. Pale and slender with long fair hair Naomi's delicate appearance hides a spirit of iron and determination. Eva on the other hand looks every bit as tough as she is with tomboyish short purple-black hair from beneath which her eyes seem to glare in a challenging way at everything she sees. They are your two best friends for different reasons: for Eva you feel something approaching devotion while at the same time awkwardly aware you inspire similar feelings in Naomi.\n\n\nThe Throne Room's doors open and Richard Quarrel, a slimy snake of a man whose marriage to your Queen has done little to improve his popularity with anyone, smiles at you all.\n\n\n\"The Queen will see you now,\" he announces.\n\n\nGoing inside you find more familiar faces waiting for you. Queen Anne-Marie, cold and imperious sits on her Throne while at her side sits the young foreigner Prince Al-Balu who as always looks completely baffled by what is going on around him. On his other side sits Ann Lovett, his fair-haired interpreter who gives you all a quick smile as you enter. On Anne-Marie's other side is a lady you don't recognize, an attractive dark-haired woman with a mocking smile that gives off the disconcerting impression that she knows something the rest of you don't. As you halt Anne-Marie speaks.\n\n\n\"I have summoned you three here because I have need of your services once more,\" she declares. \"I know recently you have been extremely loud in voicing your criticisms of my rule. I also cannot forget that at the moment the Lapau War was approaching it's climactic battle you all rebelled and refused to follow my orders... However in my great and gracious mercy I will forgive you three as I have a task for you to perform. As you are aware neither Commodore Cuthrew or Finch have returned from their voyage of exploration beyond the Western Passage and it has been nearly three months since they left. Obviously the disapearrences of such experienced officers is troubling to say the least... Commodore Trapa. I want you to lead an expedition to find our lost countrymen and see what has befallen them. This is a difficult challenge but it's success will only increase your already great reputation and lead to generous rewards.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie flickers her eyes over your companions and her expressions darkens as she meets Eva's defiant stare. \"Commodores Freer and Swift will accompany you with their own vessels and will be under your command, you may consider Commodore Swift your deputy. I have arranged for fresh supplies to be cached at the Western Passage and after a suitable interval I will send my friend Captain Dancer through the Eastern Passage with fresh supplies to assist you upon your return.\"\n\n\nYou glance at Captain Dancer's whose smile widens as she meets your eyes. If you didn't know better you could be sure she is trying to tell you something... you cast your gaze across to Quarrel, who is also smiling at you in a way you don't like, and onto Al-Balu and Lovett who are politely listening to Anne-Marie speak and are not looking at you. Anne-Marie is watching you intently and you promise her you will do all you can to find the missing sailors.\n\n\n\"Oh Commodore Trapa,\" Anne-Marie says as you turn to leave and you glance back. \"I expect you to return with Commodores Cuthrew and Finch or not at all. Have a safe voyage.\"\n\n\nThere is something about the way she says those last four words that chills you.\n\n\n\"Do you get the feeling there's something that bitch isn't telling us?\" Eva whispers to you as the three of you leave the Palace and descend down to the quay to prepare your ships for your next voyage.", "action_results": [{"action": "Beginning your journey", "result": "The next morning you and your companions sail your ships out of Golden Sands with the rising sun at your backs. Anne-Marie hasn't notified the people of your voyage so there are no cheering crowds to see you off as on previous voyages which feels oddly unsettling. As always you glance back at your homeland and wonder if you'll ever see her beautiful shores again.Your first objective is the Western Passage which lies about a week's voyage to the west through waters you know well. You can either sail straight there or you can swing Northwest to visit Amethyst, the heavily forested island where your people's ships are built.", "action_results": [{"action": "Swing Northwest to visit Amethyst", "result": "After a short voyage you reach Amethyst to witness another troubling sight.Queen Anne-Marie's enormous flagship Monarch of the Sea is anchored in the harbor and as you watch you can see several new cannons are being loaded aboard to fill the deck with guns. The ship was already heavily armed but now it looks like it contains around twenty cannons, with more being loaded. Deeply unnerved by the sight and puzzled as to why Anne-Marie is so heavily arming her ship you don't land but instead guide your companions away Southwest towards the Western Passage.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Western Passage", "result": "After six days at sea the Western Passage comes into sight, visible from a long way off as looking like a tear in the endless line that is the Great Reef. You have never sailed this way before but both Naomi and Eva have and their ships lead the way, guiding your Adventurer through the narrow Passage. As at all Passages a small camp has been established to keep watch on all ships traveling in and out of the Passage. Both Naomi and Eva strongly below you should stop here for a day and pick up the supplies Anne-Marie has promised she has cached here.", "action_results": [{"action": "Stop to take on fresh supplies", "result": "Knowing it makes sense you order your fellow Captains to drop anchor in the Western Passage and row ashore to meet the men garrisoning the towers. There are two: a young man and an old man and they are happy to help you load some of their spare crates of fish onto your ships. While the old man is showing your sailors where the crates are located you ask the younger man what ships he has seen pass through the Western Passage in recent months.\n\n\n\"Not many since the Second Race to tell you the truth,\" he says scratching his head. \"I suppose the first ship we saw since then was Captain Dancer's Shadow come in from the west with just a dozen sailors on board. She stopped here, picked up supplies and then sailed on to Golden Sands.\"\n\n\nThat is news to you and you frown. \"How long after that did Cuthrew and Finch sail through?\"\n\n\n\"Oh the Sea Ghost and the Royal Escort sailed through about a month after that but it wasn't just them,\" the talkative youth tells you. \"The Shadow and the Indefatigable were with them. They were all gone out west about one month and then the Shadow and the Indefatigable sailed back through from the west without stopping. There was no sign of the Sea Ghost or Royal Escort, I suppose they must have traveled on.\"\n\n\nYou are astounded but before you can ask any more questions the older of the two guards rejoins you.\n\n\n\"Not talking about anything you shouldn't are you?\" he asks looking at his young companion in an unfriendly way. Taking the hint the young man agrees he'd better get on with his duties. That evening after the fresh supplies are loaded aboard your three ships you report the conversation to Naomi and Eva and the three of you agree it looks suspicious.\n\n\n\"Why didn't Anne-Marie tell us that Quarrel and Dancer were with Cuthrew and Finch?\" Naomi asks you. \"And why did they come back without them?\"\n\n\n\"Both of you were in the Second Race,\" you tell Naomi and Eva. \"When you sailed from east to west around Magellan did you see anything suspicious?\"\n\n\n\"I didn't but me and my cousin stuck to the Northwest as much as possible and rarely landed,\" Naomi admits. \"It wasn't just me and Eva who made that voyage either: Finch and Quarrel did as well.\"\n\n\n\"Well I stuck to the Southwest and didn't land much either...\" Eva says frowning. \"Do you reckon someone else found something in these waters?\"\n\n\nYou all glance uncertainly at each other and with a lot on your mind resume your voyage to the west.", "action_results": [{"action": "An Unexpected Encounter", "result": "After sailing through the Western Passage and entering the unknown you order the Adventurer, Explorer and Esme's Joy to hold a steady westerly heading for now. The Great Reef fades from sight behind you but a wholly unexpected object is sighted to the west: a ship! You have soon approached nearer and find the ship is a similar size but a wholly different design to your own, sitting lower in the water and with black sails instead of white. The ship's name, emblazoned across the prow is Morning Glory. As you sail by you are astounded to see men in strange clothes shouting in your own language for you to come aboard!", "action_results": [{"action": "Order your fleet to drop anchor and meet with this strange visitation", "result": "Cautiously you sail towards the strange ship and anchoring the Adventurer alongside you go aboard the Morning Glory with Eva and Naomi who have also anchored their ships nearby. The sailors aboard this strange ship have colorful clothes which are emblazoned with animals and they look at you with as much interest as you look at them. Their commander is a big, strong man with a long grey beard who looks oddly unhappy to see you. He walks forward and greets you in your own language, though with a strong and unusual accent.\n\n\n\"My name is Azai and I am Captain of this ship,\" he tells you. \"What are your names?\"\n\n\n\"I am Commodore Leo Trapa and these are my companions Commodores Eva Freer and Naomi Swift,\" you tell him. Azai looks surprised.\n\n\n\"Indeed?\" he asks thoughtfully. \"It may surprise you to learn that we know of your kingdom already Commodore Trapa though I do not think you know of ours. You are now entering the waters of the Elixi nation. Until recently we were ruled by our Queen Renewal but she... died a few months ago and her son Shingen now rules as King. I and six of my fellow Captains refuse to serve Shingen and his brothers Kenshin and Ieyasu and now we sail under pain of death, outlawed by our own countrymen. If you sail on to the west you will come to the island of Revel, the Capital of our nation. There you will meet with Shingen and his brothers but I would suggest that you be on your guard.\"\n\n\nHaving shared these sentiments Captain Azai refuses to answer any of your further questions and shows absolutely no interest in your homeland. \"We know of your Three Islands already,\" he tells you. \"My people call you the Navar, the Barrier-Folk.I think it is now time we part ways.\" Azai seems keen to be on his way so feeling completely baffled you and your companions return to your ships and weigh anchor. The Morning Glory swiftly sails away to the Southwest and pondering your odd encounter you and your expedition continue west.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Land of the Elixi", "result": "Keeping to your westward course you soon come upon a land unlike any you have seen before: it is a thriving port-island similar in size to Golden Sands but unlike it in every way with vastly different architecture and ships. People in fantastically-dressed clothes soon throng the quays and as you approach the harbor an unexpected sight makes you freeze: the Sea Ghost is riding gently at anchor in the harbor. There is no sign of Finch's ship, the Royal Escort.\n\n\nEntering the harbor cautiously you, Eva and Naomi all anchor your ships alongside the quay and leading your sailors ashore armed and ready you meet with these people. The crowd draws back as you approach but three tall and strong-looking men who are so alike they can only be brothers stride forward to meet you. Their leader is a handsome man with flowing black hair bound in ringlets and a jovial air. \"Hello, hello,\" he cries out taking your hand and pumping it in a massive fist. He speaks your own language with a strange accent.\n\n\n\"My name is Shingen and I am King of the Elixi Nation! This is our Capital Island which we call Revel. These are my brothers, Kenshin and Ieyasu.\" Kenshin is a broad man who smells strongly of alcohol as he shakes your hand with a yellow-toothed grin. Ieyasu looks the youngest and is also the slimmest, dressed simply in black. He doesn't smile at you as you shake hands but instead surveys you with narrow snake-like eyes.\n\n\n\"As you can see we have already been visited by your countrymen,\" Shingen goes on, gesturing at the Sea Ghost. \"Hence how we know your language. Your great Captains Thomas Finch and Tobias Cuthrew landed here some months ago. I am afraid I have sad news for you. Your great sailor Tobias Cuthrew was very ill when he landed and his sickness grew worse. I am sorry to say he has since died and is buried here in our town's cemetery. After his death his companion Captain Finch sailed away. That was two months ago and we have not heard news of him since.\"\n\n\nYou, Eva and Naomi exchange horrified glances. The news that the greatest sailor of your kingdom is dead shakes you all to the core.\n\n\n\"What about Cuthrew's crew?\" Eva demands. \"What became of them?\"\n\n\n\"Many of them went on with Commodore Finch,\" Shingen says cheerfully. \"Many still reside in this town and have become good friends of my people. For some reason none felt an urge to return to the kingdom ruled by your Queen Anne-Marie... now I have an interest in forming an alliance with your Queen so me and my people will give you all the assistance you require. I assume you intend to journey on to find your missing comrade Finch? If you return here tomorrow I will arrange for enough Supplies to re-provision your ships to be assembled on the quay and we will also provide you with a map of our islands to help you safely navigate them.\"\n\n\n\"We must also visit Commodore Cuthrew's grave,\" you tell King Shingen who nods sympathetically.\n\n\n\"Tomorrow, tomorrow,\" he tells you. \"Return tomorrow morning.\"\n\n\nYou, Eva and Naomi return aboard the Adventurer where you hastily confer. Eva is suspicious.\n\n\n\"I saw Cuthrew before he left on his voyage,\" she tells you both. \"He was ill but he wasn't that ill. I don't trust any of those three.\"\n\n\n\"If we sail away they'll be after us in the Sea Ghost and those other little ships in the harbor,\" Naomi points out. \"I think for the time being it's better that we work with these people. Tomorrow we can go ashore and see if Cuthrew really is buried on the island.\"\n\n\n\"I agree,\" you tell her. \"Tomorrow we'll go ashore as planned.\n\n\nThis turns out to be the worst decision of your life.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Fateful Day", "result": "The next morning you, Naomi and Eva lead your sailors ashore onto the quay of Revel. As before there is an expectant crowd waiting for you but the crowd is oddly silent today and looks tense. Glancing round them you notice something strange: there is a ship approaching the island rapidly from the South. Squinting at it you recognize it with a start: it is Thomas Finch's Royal Escort! Eva and Naomi recognize it too and freeze halfway down the quay, your sailors all stop behind you as well. Eva grips your arm, sending a thrill of excitement through you.\n\n\n\"I don't like this,\" she says quietly and for the first time in all the time you have known her she sounds scared.\n\n\nThe crowd parts in Shingen, Kenshin and Ieyasu come striding towards you. Unlike yesterday they are armed: Shingen and Kenshin are carrying drawn swords in their hands while Ieyasu is holding an extremely short-barreled musket which is more like a pistol. As they advance within a few feet of you the crowd behind them edges forward and more weapons appear. With a feeling of horror you realize that you have led your whole expedition into a trap.\n\n\n\"Eva! Naomi! Get back!\" you shout.\n\n\nShingen lunges towards you with his sword but you spring back just in time, drawing your own sword as you do. At the same moment Kenshin gives a mighty sweep of his sword that cuts through both of Naomi Swift's eyes, with a scream she clutches her bleeding face. Ieyasu steps forward, cocks his pistol with a click, raises it and shoots Eva point blank in the chest. She is thrown backwards, landing on her back on the jetty where she lies staring open-eyed at the sky, her face still wearing a last expression of surprise.\n\n\nWith a roar of rage you slash your sword wildly at Shingen, forcing him back. Steel grates as swords clang against each other and muskets bang on both sides. A musket ball whistles past your head and as Shingen retreats you grab the blinded Naomi wand holding her body close to yours with your free arm you drag her back to safety. Your ninety sailors are trapped at the end of the quay facing a crowd several times their own number and death seems inevitable.\n\n\nYour countrymen sell their lives dearly. While you drag Naomi back across the gangplank leading to the Adventurer, musket balls flying so thickly all about you that it seems a miracle you are not hit, your sailors fight the crowd on the quay. They are cut down and butchered mercilessly, a few dozen manage to flee across the gangplank to the Adventurer but most are cut down. You manage to get the Adventurer's anchor raised, the sails raised and manage to steer away from the quay, forced to abandon both the Explorer and Esme's Joy, not to mention the bodies of your countrymen including Eva.\n\n\nEven as the Adventurer moves out into the harbor with the surviving sailors from all three ships on board, about thirty altogether while twice that amount lie dead on Revel's jetties, the Sea Ghost explodes into life, firing a row of six cannons. One of the shot decapitates two of your sailors and another hits a third sailor plumb in the chest, blasting him into several pieces. Gathering speed the Sea Ghost moves forward to cut off your escape.\n\n\nHelp is finally at hand however. The approaching Royal Escort fires two cannons and a volley of musket shots, forcing the Sea Ghost to veer away. This gives you a chance to slip the Adventurer out of the harbor and you sail straight towards the Royal Escort, unaware of who is in command but only knowing that they are on your side. As the Royal Escort turns back towards the South you follow her, putting as much space between you and the murderous tyrants of Revel as possible.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shock", "result": "Eva Freer is dead. It seems impossible but it is true.\n\n\nNaomi Swift has been blinded and will never see again. You carry her into your cabin where your ship's surgeon attends to her injuries night and day. So many have died: altogether you have lost more than sixty sailors and two of your expedition's ships: only the Adventurer and her small Crew remains. For three days you follow the Royal Escort, unaware of where you are going and not particularly caring until you come to a small rocky island. Seven ships, similar in size to the Adventurer but of a different design are anchored offshore. Sailing in among them you meet your new allies.\n\n\nSeven Elixi Captains come aboard the Adventurer. Their leader is Azai, a grey-bearded old man with a permanently worried look who you may have met before. His six companions are Amako, a tall and cold-natured man who stands in sharp contrast to his brother Ryuzoji, a young cheerful man dressed in clothes of bright red. Miura is a big man with a long flowing black beard while his brother Rokkaku is a bit of a dandy, elegantly dressed in fine clothes. Sanada is a tall and handsome man while his companion Sogo has dark skin and unlike the others drinks tea in your cabin while the others accept wine from you. You find all their names a little difficult to remember and in your depressed state can't raise the interest to care much about any of them. Your thoughts are dwelling on Eva and you are only half-listening as Azai talks.\n\n\n\"You are not the first to come to our land, the first visitors were two of your Captains called Finch and Quarrel who came to Revel from the west some six months ago,\" Azau tells you. \"Later a woman called Sapphira Dancer also visited from the west. This was when Renewel was still Queen and kept her evil sons Shingen, Kenshin and Ieyasu in check. A few months after Dancer came four more ships, this time from the east. Dancer, Quarrel, Finch and Tobias Cuthrew were their four Captains.\"\n\n\n\"They stayed at Revel for several weeks. By day your countrymen spoke to Queen Renewel but by night they plotted with Shingen and his brothers in the darkness. One night there was a bloody coup: Shingen cut his mother's throat while she slept and his supporters took control of the Palace. During the coup Cuthrew and Finch tried to intervene on the Queen's side. Cuthrew was shot and killed in the fighting while Finch was stabbed through the chest. He and a few of his sailors managed to get back to their ship and escape.\"\n\n\n\"Me and my six fellow Captains are loyal supporters of Queen Renewel. When Shingen took power and named himself King we fled here with our ships and Commodore Finch. We did our best to help him but Finch's wound was mortal. Knowing he was dying he told us the names of you and your companions as people who could be trusted. After he died we buried him at sea. Since then we have been patrolling the waters between the Western Passage and Revel in hope of meeting you. I saw your ship a week ago and rushed here to alert the other Captains. We sent Finch's remaining Crew aboard the Royal Escort to Revel to meet you. We guessed you would not trust us but you would not doubt the word of your own countrymen... we never expected Shingen would try to murder you all before we could get there. According to Finch, Quarrel and Dancer told him Shingen and Anne-Marie have formed an alliance and together they would kill all who criticized or spoke out against their tyrranical rule...\"\n\n\n\"We are grateful for your help,\" you say wearily and lying in her sickbed in your cabin Naomi nods sightlessly. \"But what can we do now? Eva is dead. Naomi cannot see. We have lost the Explorer and Esme's Joy and most of our Crews. You have seven ships and a few hundred sailors here but there are thousands of armed men in Revel and many more in Golden Sands under Anne-Marie's control... what can we do?\" you stare at the table while the Elixi Captains glance among themselves.\n\n\n\"We have an idea,\" Azai says finally.", "action_results": [{"action": "A slim chance", "result": "\"There appear to be three great nations on this world your people call Magellan,\" Azai tells you. \"There are my people, the Elixi, there are your people who we call the Navar, the Barrier Folk and there are also the Lapau, the spear-armed canoe-warriors who we have learned your people fought a War against. We know that Anne-Marie and Shingen have formed an alliance. Finch told us that Quarrel had claimed to him that the purpose of this alliance was to attack the Lapau on two fronts and crush them as your people failed to do alone. The slaughtered Lapau's lands would be divided between Anne-Marie and Shingen. Me and my companions believe the Lapau are our only possible allies.\"\n\n\n\"King Al-Capu agreed to a peace treaty with Queen Anne-Marie,\" you tell Azai. \"His son is a hostage in Queen Anne-Marie's court. Even if we sail to Matan and even if he believes us, which is unlikely, what can the Lapau do against the combined navies of my people and yours? The Navar as you call us nearly destroyed the Lapau in our War with them, they certainly don't have a chance against both the Navar and Elixi.\" \n\n\n\"We must try,\" Azai insists. \"With your people the Navar and my people the Elixi deceived into this evil alliance by their rulers the Lapau are our only chance for help.\"\n\n\n\"Matan is on the other side of the world,\" you remind Azai. \"To get there we either have to sail through territory ruled by Queen Anne-Marie or territory ruled by your Shingen or through completely uncharted waters. Shingen now has the Sea Ghost, Explorer and Esme's Joy. I am pretty sure that he and his brothers will come after us with everything they've got. You've got a strong little navy here but I don't think it will be a match for the full might of Anne-Marie and Shingen.\n\n\n\"We have thought of that,\" Azai tells you. \"We will all sail to Matan in four different directions. I will go Northeast, skirting the Great Reef and traveling through your kingdom's colonies to reach Matan. Amako and Ryuzoji will sail Southeast, skirting the Great Reef and also pass through your kingdom's colonies to Matan. Miura and Rokkaku will sail Southwest through uncharted waters to Matan and finally Sanada and Sogo will sail Northwest through the islands of the Elixi to Matan. You must choose which of us you think has the best chance of getting through.\"\n\n\nYour mind is still full of memories of Eva's expression of surprise when she was killed. With a deep sigh you cross to where Naomi is lying in her sickbed with a bloodied bandage over her eyes and take her hand in yours. You lower your head and shut your eyes tight and after a few moments of silence you hear the seven Elixi Captains quietly stand up and go outside to prepare their ships for their voyages and await your decision.", "action_results": [{"action": "Reluctant Decisions", "result": "That night while you sit with your agony-ridden companion wondering how your world could possibly have got turned so upside down so quickly the Elixi Captains begin to put their plans into action. The Royal Escort is abandoned and sunk and it's remaining Crew distributed among the other ships: Azai in the Morning Glory, Amako in the Relentless, Ryuzoji in the Lady Luck, Miura in the Royal Avenger, Rokkaku in the Warrior, Sanada in the Charmer, Sogo in the Fortune and of course you and Naomi in the Adventurer. To help you keep track of your new friends Azai thoughtfully provides you with a List of Loyal Elixi Captains.\n\n\nWhen Naomi finally slips into a troubled sleep you go up onto deck for a breath of fresh air and to think about things. The sun is just rising pink in the east and reveals three ships approaching from the north: the Sea Ghost, Esme's Joy and Explorer. With your telescope you can see all three ship's decks are absolutely packed with cannons and sailors. You hear a quiet cough behind you and turn to see Azai standing nearby.\n\n\n\"It is Shingen, Kenshin and Ieyasu,\" he says pointing at the three distant ships. \"They mean to destroy us once and for all I think. We're not strong enough to defeat all three wwith the two hundred sailors we have here so we must leave at once to seek help from the Lapau. I have had your ship resupplied and re-manned but now you must choose which of the four routes to Matan you take. You have sailed much further around Magellan than I have and must use your own knowledge and maps to choose your route. We must move quickly though: once Shingen and Anne-Marie know what they are doing they and their Captains will try to get to Matan ahead of us to warn King Al-Capu not to listen to us! We must be swift.\"\n\n\nPromising to tell Azai your decision within an hour you go down to your cabin to find Naomi has woken up.\n\n\n\"We are going to sail to Matan then?\" she asks you weakly and you tell her that it looks like you'll have to. Naomi hesitates and then slowly tears trickle down from the bloodied bandage around her eyes. \"I want to thank you for what you did for me back there... I know you loved Eva and now she is gone all you have left is me and what help am I now? Nothing but a burden.\"\n\n\n\"You will never be that,\" you assure Naomi. \"If we are to survive this voyage I will need all your help and advice.\"\n\n\nHolding Naomi in a painful hug you mull over which route to take.\n\n\n(Please Pick up and use the List of Loyal Elixi Captains to help you make this important decision).", "action_results": [null, {"action": "Sail Northeast with Azai", "result": "As the morning sun rises the eight ships of you and your allies part ways, speeding off in four different directions. Heading Northeast, the Adventurer keeping alongside the Morning Glory you are relieved to see see the Sea Ghost, Esme's Joy and Explorer up and pursue your companions and none follows after you. You sail to the Northeast towards the place where you first encountered Azai's ship ten days ago (though it seems much longer ago).\n\n\nThe Great Reef is visible along the eastern horizon so both you and Azai adjust course to the north to sail around it. As you do you spot two ships approaching rapidly from the east, the direction of the Western Passage. With a telescope you recognize them as Quarrel's ship Indefatigable and Dancer's ship Shadow. When you tell Naomi what is happening she strongly advises you to avoid them. Azai is of the same opinion.", "action_results": [{"action": "Approach them anyway to see if their commanders are friendly", "result": "Hoping that your countrymen are still friendly you turn the Adventurer towards the two approaching ships. You are swiftly disillusioned: as you approach Quarrel turns the Indefatigable so it's cannons are aiming at you and all six burst into life. One of the cannonballs hits the side of the Adventurer, shredding three of your Crew with splinters, thought fortunately the rest of the shots fall short. You don't stay for another volley, pausing only to fire your ship's two starboard cannons at your adversary you turn back north and pull out of range, knowing for certain now that your former countrymen and your Queen are now your enemies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sailing North", "result": "You sail North hoping to put your two enemies behind you. Though Captain Dancer's Shadow does indeed sail on west towards Revel Quarrel's Indefatigable turns north and pursues the Adventurer and the Morning Glory. For three days this pursuit continues, the Great Reef visible to the east until one evening you have Captain Azai come aboard the Adventurer to discuss the situation. Naomi, sitting upright in her sickbed while a clean bandage is applied to her shattered eyes is keen to fight.\n\n\n\"It is strange that two ships should flee from one,\" she points out. \"I think we should stop and do battle with that lackey Quarrel.\"\n\n\n\"I don't think so,\" Azai says unhappily. \"The Indefatigable is heavily armed and manned and would probably do us more damage than we could do to it. Our main aim is to reach Matan and seek help from the Lapau, we'll be putting our mission in jeopardy if we stop and fight. No... if you choose to turn and fight you cannot expect the Morning Glory to help you.\"\n\n\nIt looks like if you do choose to fight the Adventurer will be doing it alone.", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn and fight", "result": "Determined to fight alone you order the Adventurer to turn about while Azai sails on. Unfortunately for you Quarrel's cannons are larger and have longer range than yours and he opens fire with his bow guns far beyond the range at which you can reply. When you sail south to try to close the range Quarrel cunningly sails south as well, keeping beyond the range of your cannons while pounding you with his. After three of your sailors are killed you angrily abandon the one-sided artillery duel and resume your flight northwards after Azai.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open Sea", "result": "Continuing North you reach a point where the Great Reef bends away to the east where it eventually meets the Northern Passage. Quarrel is still following closely but as storm clouds gather overhead Azai comes aboard your ship with a plan of how you might be able to lose him.\n\n\n\"When this storm hits visibility will be reduced to very little,\" he tells you. \"Under cover of the storm we can alter course to the Northeast, passing close by the Great Reef and when the storm clears we should be out of sight of our adversary.\"\n\n\n\"You want to sail alongside the Great Reef during a storm?\" Naomi asks from her sickbed. \"Are you crazy? That storm is coming in from the west, you'll be dashed against the Reef and sunk!\"\n\n\n\"I think we can get north of the Reef before that storm hits and blows us East,\" Azai argues back. \"Besides, it's our best chance of losing Quarrel.\"\n\n\nYou consider the two options: turning Northeast to try and lose Quarrel in the storm or continuing North and adjusting your course once you are completely clear of the Great Reef.", "action_results": [{"action": "Turn Northeast", "result": "Following Azai you turn the Adventurer Northeast to follow the Morning Glory as it passes perilously close to the Great Reef. You are more wary than him of the dangers of the Reef so you keep further to seaward when the storm hits. Unquestionably the storm is the worst you have ever sailed through and for three days it throws the Adventurer around helplessly but the Morning Glory fares worse: at the height of the storm you witness the Mourning Glory strike a hidden reef and tip completely over onto it's side, it's sailors spilling into the whirling sea. There is nothing you can do for them, indeed you are lucky not to share the same fate though three of your Sailors are washed overboard.\n\n\nFinally the storm abates and the Adventurer finds itself alone just North of the Great Reef. You are not completely alone, just visible far behind you is Quarrel's Indefatigable which has also survived the storm. Your brave companion has met a watery grave leaving you to carry on your voyage to Matan alone. When you report Azai's death to Naomi she merely sighs and bows her head, she is not surprised by the news, only saddened. Turning your ship away from that ill-fated reef you steer on to the Northeast.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open Sea", "result": "It is with some relief that you see the Great Reef vanish from sight as you sail into waters you are familiar with, having passed through them in the Great Race. There are Navar Colonies scattered here and there in this area but you don't know yet if they will be friendly or hostile. With a grin you see the storm-battered Indefatigable finally give up it's pursuit of you and turn away to the Southeast in the direction of the Corral Cabin and the Northern Passage. When you tell Naomi what is happening she gives the first smile you have seen her give since her injury.\n\n\n\"Quarrel must be giving up and returning to Golden Sands to report to Queen Anne-Marie what has happened,\" she tells you. \"If ever there is a good chance to attack him it is now when his ship is battered and his Crew demoralized.", "action_results": [{"action": "Attack the battered Indefatigable", "result": "Feeling confident you turn the Adventurer South to attack the man who has been hunting you. Though damaged the Indefatigable is still more than a match for you though: using long-range cannons Quarrel bombards you from beyond the range of your own smaller cannons and continues sailing south to prevent you closing to within range of your own weapons. You lose three Sailors before angrily breaking off the pursuit and continuing Northeast.", "action_results": [{"action": "A Shipwreck", "result": "Continuing Northeast you come upon a somber sight. A jagged series of rocks rise up from the ocean: pinned between these rocks is the wreckage of a ship called the Dove of the Sea. Like every sailor among your people you know her story: Captained by an inexperienced artist called Rosemary Cleaver the ship was one of your competitors in the Great Race. One stormy night she was wrecked on the rocks resulting in the death of Cleaver and most of her Crew. As Colonies have been established in these waters the wreck has been repeatedly discovered and it is marked on your sea charts: according to these charts Matan lies less than a week's voyage to the east. Still as you sail past the wreckage of the ship something inside you wants you to spend a day going closer and investigating the wreck.", "action_results": [{"action": "Land and investigate the Dove of the Sea", "result": "Carefully steering the Adventurer alongside you go aboard the shattered wreckage of the Dove of the Sea. The broken deck is deserted, all it's Crew having been long since claimed by the sea with one exception: lashed to the helm is a skeleton with it's ribcage and legs broken and splintered. It is Captain Cleaver herself, secured forever at the helm of her ship by the last of her crew. You regard the yellowing bones and grinning skull with morbid thoughts about how one day that may well be you and feeling cold inside you leave this ship of the dead and quickly turn the Adventurer away to the east and your destiny.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sailing East", "result": "The Adventurer skims rapidly over the waves, traveling East towards your final destination. Your Supplies are low but not as low as they have been on previous voyages and you know that soon you will safely be in Matan. At this point in the voyage Naomi is feeling strong enough to leave her sickbed and you guide her up to the quarterdeck where the sea breeze and the sound of the waves seem to do her some good. Holding tightly to your arm she rests one hand on the rail and sighs.\n\n\n\"What do we do if King Al-Capu doesn't listen to us?\" she asks you. \"What do we do if Queen Anne-Marie has already got to him first?\"\n\n\nThe same thoughts had occured to you too and you have no answer.", "action_results": [{"action": "Matan", "result": "Matan finally comes into sight and you, Naomi and all your remaining Crew breathe a sigh of relief. Matan is a tropical island covered in huts: the Capital of the Lapau Nation and home of King Al-Capu. As dozens of Lapau Warriors take to their canoes and paddle out to meet the Adventurer you wonder whether or not you are in time. Have you got to Matan ahead of Anne-Marie, Shingen and their various Captains and ships?\n\n\nNow it is time for you to find out.", "action_results": [{"action": "Click here to find out if you have been fast enough", "result": "You have succeeded in your quest and reached Matan ahead of all your enemies. As the Adventurer sails towards the Lapau Capital hundreds of canoes come out to meet you, each containing spear-armed Lapau warriors. King Al-Capu, a giant grizzled-haired man with his tattooed body covered in old scars comes aboard your ship. Recognizing you from a previous meeting at the end of the Lapau War he shakes your hand. Naomi has joined you on deck to meet Al-Capu who looks surprised to see her sightlessly leaning on you, a bandage around her eyes.\n\n\nAs fast as you can you explain to the King everything that has happened: from the discovery of the Elixi to the murders of Cuthrew and Finch to your own ambush by Shingen at Anne-Marie's behest up to your belief that the alliance between Anne-Marie and Shingen is intended to destroy the Lapau. Al-Capu listens in silence with increasing alarm and when you have finished there is silence for a few moments before Al-Capu speaks in your language but with a heavy accent.\n\n\n\"You have come through difficult trials and dangers Leo Trapa and Naomi Swift,\" he intones. \"If what you say is true then more danger lies ahead. We must speak with Queen Anne-Marie and King Shingen about this. Meanwhile you will rest here at Matan: you are our guests and under the protection of the Lapau nation now.\"\n\n\nFinally you feel like you are safe but this illusion does not last long...", "action_results": [{"action": "Familiar Faces", "result": "Within days of your arrival at Matan your many enemies all bear down on the small island. Ieyasu is the first to arrive aboard the Explorer, coming in from the North he does not land but instead steers around Matan to the south side where he drops anchor. The next day a vast Fleet of your enemies arrive: Anne-Marie's Monarch of the Sea, Lovett's Grand Alliance, Al-Balu's Matan Afloat, Dancer's Shadow, Quarrel's Indefatigable, Kenshin's Esme's Joy, Shingen's Sea Ghost and the Warrior, Royal Avenger and Charmer all sail up in one group from the south. Altogether this eleven-ship fleet is even larger than the War Fleet you sailed with during the Lapau War and it clearly means business. Anne-Marie promptly sends Al-Balu into Matan to invite you and King Al-Capu to a meeting aboard the Matan Afloat that evening.\n\n\nHistory will remember it as The Conference of the Captains.\n\n\nFourteen of you attend the Conference. Escorting the blinded Naomi and the frowning King Al-Capu and protected by numerous royal bodyguards you are rowed out to the Matan Afloat. Waiting for you are Anne-Marie, looking as regal and haughty as ever, the young Prince Al-Balu and his advisor Ann Lovett, Anne-Marie's lackeys Richard Quarrel and Saphia Dancer (the latter grinning broadly at the sight of you), Shingen, Ieyasu and Kenshin standing together and with their hands tied behind them by rope are Amako, Ryuzoji and Rokkaku, the last of the loyal Elixi Captains and prisoners of your enemies. You soon learn the other four are dead: Azai was lost in a storm and Miura, Sanada and Sogo were all killed by either Shingen, Kenshin or Ieyasu. King Al-Capu begins the conference.\n\n\n\"I am puzzled by the words of your Captains Queen,\" he tells Anne-Marie. \"They tell me an amazing story about the Navar and the Elixi conspiring together to murder those Captains who oppose your rule. Surely this cannot be true?\"\n\n\n\"It seems that a mistake has occurred,\" Anne-Marie says calmly surveying you and Naomi. \"It seems that there has been a plot by one close to me to murder those Captains who oppose my rule and this Captain has been asking King Shingen and his brothers to help him kill these Captains claiming it was my wish. This plot has now been uncovered and the man behind it will be punished.\"\n\n\nDrawing a pistol from within her pocket, Anne-Marie turns sideways, points the barrel directly at the side of her husband Richard Quarrel's head and calmly pulls the trigger. Brain matter and skull shards spray over Saphia Dancer, who has finally lost her calm composure and looks deeply shaken. Still wearing a look of astonishment Quarrel topples to the deck and lies there in a pool of blood until at Anne-Marie's order two sailors pick up his body and throw it into the sea. All the Captains at the meeting, including you, look absolutely stunned by this sudden cold-blooded murder except Anne-Marie who continues speaking calmly.\n\n\n\"It seems that after the unfortunate and accidental deaths of Tobias Cuthrew and Thomas Finch during the succession of King Shingen my late husband conceived an idea to kill Leo Trapa, Eva Freer and Naomi Swift and sent orders in my name to King Shingen to have them murdered. Fortunately this plot was only partially successful but it has cost me the valued services of two of my best Captains... I have spoken with King Shingen and he and his brothers are all extremely sorry for their role in this tragic affair.\"\n\n\n\"That is true,\" Shingen says cheerfully and looks at you. \"Commodore Trapa, Commodore Swift, I am extremely sorry for the unfortunate injuries that have befallen you and for the death of your companion Eva Freer. As a way of showing how repentant the whole Elixi nation is I have signed an Alliance with Queen Anne-Marie and opened all our ports and harbors to Navar ships and traders. We had something of a premonition of the Queen's husband's unfortunate death and last night I pledged that if anything were to happen to Quarrel I would like to offer my hand to her in marriage as a way of forming a true and lasting alliance between our two great countries. I am happy to say she has accepted.\"\n\n\nEvents are moving incredibly fast and you are finding it difficult to follow everything that is happening.\n\n\n\"What about the murders of the Elixi Captains by Shingen and his brothers?\" you demand indicating the bound prisoners. \"What about me and my men being hunted all across the sea?\"\n\n\n\"That was another unfortunate misunderstanding,\" Shingen says smoothly. \"I wrongly believed Queen Anne-Marie wanted you dead which is why my brothers and I have been hunting you. These Elixi Captains are a different story... these men are pirates who stole ships from my navy and pillaged my towns and ships. There can only be one punishment for piracy.\"\n\n\nAmako, Ryuzoji and Rokkaku are led to the side of the ship by three sailors who raise their muskets and shoot each of them in the back of the head. One by one the bodies are dropped into the sea and you turn away feeling sick by the sight of your allies being ruthlessly killed. The murders have cast something of a pall over the Conference but Anne-Marie claps her hands together and suddenly becomes extremely business-like.\n\n\n\"Well now that is all cleared up and the guilty parties punished,\" Anne-Marie says happily. \"Leo, Naomi, in recognition of your terrible trials I am immediately promoting both of you to the ranks of Vice Admiral in my Navy, I am also similarly conferring promotions on all those present here. We will all return to Golden Sands together as in the future I will have need of your considerable skills. King Al-Capu, I am sorry for the inconvenience you have been put to and I am happy to return your son and advisor to you. If you would be so kind we would like to buy some supplies from you before beginning our journey back to our homelands. King Shingen and I have a wedding to organize in Golden Sands and we would like both you Leo and you Naomi to attend.\"\n\n\n\"No,\" Naomi says flatly. There is a moment's silence.\n\n\n\"No,\" Anne-Marie asks in a dangerous tone, glaring at her blinded subordinate.\n\n\n\"No,\" Naomi repeats. \"Everyone here present knows it was you and not Quarrel who ordered the deaths of Cuthrew, Finch and Freer and tried to have me and Leo killed. You killed Quarrel to silence him. You King Shingen, together with your brothers, killed your mother Renewel and those seven Captains who were loyal to her memory. All of you have blood on your hands. Once you have us in your power you will kill us as well. With your alliance you will destroy the Lapau and divide the world of Magellan between yourselves. When there is no one else left to fight you will fight each other, do you really expect to last longer than the Queen's last three husbands King Shingen? No ones lives are safe as long as this woman remains Queen.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie looks white and livid with rage. As she stands there before you in her expensive clothes with narrow snakelike eyes glaring out from a pale face you feel nothing but revulsion towards her. Finally King Al-Capu speaks.\n\n\n\"I have heard all the words that I need to,\" he declares. \"Chief Anne-Marie, Chief Shingen, you will take your ships and your people from my lands at once and I do not want you to return. The warriors Leo Trapa and Naomi Swift shall stay here, I do not think they will live one day more under your rule.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie's features compose themselves into a cold and terrible smile.\n\n\n\"Good then,\" she says. \"If there will be War I would rather it was now than later. Last time I was here I allowed myself to be tricked into peace by my Captains. This time we will decide the fate of the Lapau people with one great battle. In one hour we will be in a War that can only end with the complete subjugation of the Lapau people. Trapa, Swift, the next time we meet you will die.\"\n\n\nAnne-Marie, Saphia Dancer, Shingen, Ieyasu and Kenshin all leave the ship with their sailors in longboats and return to their own vessels to get ready to attack. You, Naomi, Al-Capu, Al-Balu and Ann Lovett are left to prepare your own vessels for the coming fight.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Battle of Matan", "result": "The ensuing Battle rages for six hours and ends in the complete destruction of the Lapau Capital.\n\n\nYou have been in over a dozen fights from small single-ship skirmishes to large Fleet-sized engagements but you have never seen anything like this: the Monarch of the Sea, Shadow, Sea Ghost, Explorer, Esme's Joy, Warrior, Royal Avenger and Charmer all sail towards Matan in a long line while the Adventurer, Matan Afloat, Grand Alliance and nearly one thousand canoes wait to meet them. The slaughter is terrible.\n\n\nYou will never forget the sights of the Battle: of the clouds of cannon smoke rising up from the gigantic Monarch of the Sea, the endless crackle of musket fire as your sailors line the rails of the Adventurer to fire at your enemies and of the sight and sound of hundreds of men shooting, spearing, screaming and dying in the blood-soaked waters. One sight in particular will always stay with you: Naomi standing proud and tall near the mast of the Adventurer shouting orders and encouragement to the gunners while cannonballs and musket balls whistle all about her. You never loved and respected her more than you do this day.\n\n\nThere are some successes. The Warrior, Royal Avenger and Charmer are all overrun by Lapau Warriors and sunk. The high point of the Battle for your side comes when you and the Grand Alliance fire simultaneous volleys into the leaderless Indefatigable which promptly explodes into thousands of shards of wood and metal, raining debris down on the entire battlefield. Unfortunately things only get worse after that.\n\n\nArmed with muskets, numerous cannons and hundreds of sailors the ships of Anne-Marie's Fleet easily outmatch the Lapau fighting in the water. By the end of the day the sea is a rising and falling carpet of corpses as the best part of Lapau's warriors lie dead upon those waves. That night Matan is evacuated and Anne-Marie's sailors occupy it, killing any who remain behind whether they be man, woman or child, young or old. The Capital of the great Lapau Nation is burnt to the ground, every last hut and tree consumed by ravenous fire until all that is left is a great mound of ash.\n\n\nMatan is no more.\n\n\nAs the flames lick higher and consume the island you guide the battered but undaunted Adventurer away followed by the Grand Alliance and Matan Afloat. Only a few hundred Lapau warriors have survived the carnage, you can hear Al-Capu screaming in pain and sadness aboard the Matan Afloat. Leaving your victorious enemies behind you steer into the night, no particular destination in mind and no hope in this darkest of nights.\n\n\nYou go down to your cabin and there you find Naomi is already waiting for you, sitting on the edge of her bed with her head in her hands. You sit next to her, take her hand in yours and for a moment the two of you just sit there in silence, each lost in your own thoughts. Finally Naomi speaks.\n\n\n\"This is the beginning of a new kind of war,\" she tells you. \"There must be people, Elixi and Navar, who will not stand for the blood lust of their tyrants. They must know if the Lapau are destroyed then there will be no end to Anne-Marie and Shingen's dark reigns. We must have the support of the people if we have any chance of overthrowing Anne-Marie and Shingen.\"\n\n\n\"We need to kill Anne-Marie,\" you tell Naomi grimly, memories of Eva's dead face and the day's massacre fresh in your mind. \"We need to kill Anne-Marie and Shingen both. For Eva.\"\n\n\nNaomi turns to face you and rubs at her shattered eyes beneath the bandage.\n\n\n\"I know I can never be Eva Freer but I hope that in time our friendship will strengthen and you will come to care for me the way I care for you Leo. You are my everything now I cannot see. I need you more than ever.\"\n\n\n\"I need you to,\" you tell Naomi sincerely. \"Dark days lie ahead of us and I need a friend like you to help me.\"\n\n\nThe candlelight is dancing and flickering on the walls of your cabin as you slowly lean forward and kiss Naomi's lips, feel the pressure of her breasts against your chest and run your finger through her hair and down her back. Outside in the darkness hundreds of silent corpses continue to rise and fall on the ocean's swell but in your cabin as the candle burns down you and Naomi explore each other's naked bodies and moving together rhythmically you consummate your love in the darkness of the night...\n\n\nTo be continued in Magellan 4: Search for Original Ideas.", "action_results": [{"action": "If you are interested in seeing how I get some of my writing ideas click here", "result": "The idea for the Magellan series came from a game I played on Orbiter called Expedition Africa where you roll dice to travel along a map and have to make strategic choices so as not to run out of such things as Food and Men along the way. I used this idea in my first story The Lost Expedition but I found land-based adventures a bit boring and also an over-saturated genre (like Lord of the Rings...). Sea adventures are much more rare and I've enjoyed writing them more than the Land ones.\n\n\nPart of my research for Sea stories involved reading about some of the epic voyages of naval history and out of all of them Ferdinand Magellan's first Circumnavigation of the World seems the most remarkable (the Mutiny on the Bounty is another fascinating story I hope to turn into a story-game sometime but there is already one of those on this site) hence why my fictional world is called Magellan. I wondered what it would have been like if Magellan was racing against other Captains and that is where the idea for Magellan 1 Race into the Great Unknown comes from.\n\n\nFor Magellan 2 I wanted to move into darker territory and used the American and European conquests and slaughter of native populations as a starting point. The Lapau War is based roughly on the Pacific Theatre of World War 2 (did anybody notice how the big surprise Lapau attack on the War Fleet while it rests at anchor is a lot like Pearl Harbor?) and reveals Anne-Marie's almost Hitler-like mentality of might makes right and how she feels it is almost her duty to take from weaker nations to make her own country stronger.\n\n\nIf the Navar are American/European and the Lapau are Natives then the Elixi can be likened to Chinese or Asians. Shingen, Ieyasu and Kenshin all get their names from famous 16th century Japanese War Lords while Azai, Rokkaku, Miura, Ryuzoji, Sogo, Sanada and Amako are all Japanese Clans. I've specifically avoided mention of skin color altogether and hopefully used the characters' names to make them representative of their cultures.\n\n\nThough they are named after Japanese Clans the adventures and fates of Azai et al are loosely based on famous pirates from the Golden Age of Piracy: Azai is based on Benjamin Hornigold, Amako on Charles Vane, Ryuzoji on Calico Jack Rackham, Miura on Blackbeard, Rokkaku on Stede Bonnet, Sanada on Howell Davis and Sogo on Black Bart Roberts. Like their fictional counterparts these pirates had colorful careers and all met rather unpleasant ends but reading about them one gets the impression they accepted early deaths as something that came with the job of being a pirate. Bart Roberts, the most successful of the bunch, even had the phrase \"a short but merry life\" as his motto.\n\n\nSo what awaits Leo and Naomi in Magellan 4: Search for Original Ideas and the conclusion of the series, Magellan 5? I don't want to give away plot ideas except to mention I have been reading a lot about Sir Francis Drake recently and also thinking about how the idea of Turtle Ships / Ironclads could give the unfortunate allies a much-needed advantage in their battle against Anne-Marie and her blood-thirsty henchmen...\n\n\nAnyway, as always thanks for taking the time to read my story and especially for taking the time to read this. The only thing better than writing is feeling that you have hopefully given someone something that is interesting to read!\n\n\nBy the way did anyone notice that the titles of the stories in the Magellan series are not just titles but also advice for life? :)", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Continue North", "result": "Despite Azai's protests you keep a safe distance between the Adventurer and the Great Reef by continuing North while the Morning Glory turns Northeast. It quickly becomes apparent that you have made the right choice because when the storm hits it is by far the worst you have ever sailed through. For three days the Adventurer is battered and driven far to the east along the northern edge of the Great Reef. At the height of the storm you pass a shattered wreck: the Morning Glory lies on her side on a reef, being smashed to pieces by the sea. There is nothing you can do for her sailors and every single one of them drowns.\n\n\nBy the time the storm blows itself out you the Adventurer finds itself alone just north of the Great Reef. Quarrel's Indefatigable is just visible in the distance: like you your adversary has survived the storm. Naomi is saddened but unsurprised to learn of Azai's death and with a heavy heart you know you must press on alone to Matan to seek the help of King Al-Capu. Turning the Adventurer Northeast you continue your voyage.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Sail Southeast with Amako and Ryuzoji", "result": "As the morning sun rises the eight ships split off in four different directions, you steer the Adventurer between the Relentless and Lady Luck heading Southeast. The heavily-armed Explorer turns to pursue you and with a telescope you can make out the figure of Prince Ieyasu standing in the prow. You report this news to the cold-natured Amako and the flamboyant Ryuzoji. Amako scowls at the news.\n\n\n\"Ieyasu is the smartest of his brothers,\" Amako says grimly. \"We can't let him catch up with us.\"\n\n\n\"We'll outfox him yet,\" Ryuzoji says confidently.\n\n\nAfter a few days sailing southeast you spot a small tropical island with a small village by the coast with a few fishing boats bobbing in the waves.\n\n\n\"That is the island-port of Nassa,\" Amako tells you when he and Ryuzoji come aboard the Adventurer. \"It is a minor port and the last Elixi outpost in these waters.\"\n\n\n\"These people are country fools who are loyal to Shingen,\" Ryuzoji tells you. \"I think we should land and seize as much food as we can for the long voyage ahead.\"\n\n\n\"I think it is too dangerous,\" Naomi opinions from her sickbed. \"What if Ieyasu catches up with us? My old ship is fast.\"\n\n\n\"Oh, we will be able to deal with him,\" Amako says with a cold smile. \"These people have betrayed the memory of Queen Renewel so we are raiding the island with or without your help anyway Leo.\"\n\n\nYou frown out of the window at the distant Explorer as you consider your response.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Amako and Ryuzoji in raiding Nassa harbor", "result": "The next morning you, Amako and Ryuzoji sail the Adventurer, Relentless and Lady Luck into the harbor of Nassa. The heavily-outnumbered and unarmed citizens give in without a fight and watch sullenly as sailors ransack their scant reserve of food. As the supplies are loaded aboard your three ships you wait on the jetty of Nassa in increasing uneasiness as the Explorer gets closer and closer. Fortunately Amako has a clever plan.\n\n\nAt dusk as the Explorer approaches the harbor Amako has a dozen fishing boats lashed together and set on fire. As the tide carries them towards the Explorer Ieyasu has to perform rapid evasive action to avoid colliding with this flaming barrier, allowing you, Amako and Ryuzoji to sail your ships out of the harbor, each of you delivering a volley of cannon fire as you pass the Explorer. The Explorer turns to return fire and one of her cannonballs kills three of your Crew as you make your escape.\n\n\n\"I don't know which is worse,\" Naomi says heavily when you tell her about the day's events. \"Having my ship under the command of that murderer or the thought that you might all sink my ship...\"\n\n\nThe Explorer falls behind as you all sail on to the Southeast.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open Sea", "result": "Leaving Nassa behind you and your two companions sail rapidly ahead to the Southeast, the Explorer trailing far behind you. You feel more confident than you have since the massacre at Revel as you know you are now sailing out of Elixi waters and approaching Navar waters which you sailed through in the Great Race, which are scattered with your people's colonies and for which you have maps and charts. One evening Amako and Ryuzoji join you and Naomi for dinner in the cabin of the Adventurer.\n\n\n\"I don't know why we are running,\" Ryuzoji says during the meal, dressed as usual in bright red. \"We outnumber Ieyasu three to one. We should turn around and attack him.\"\n\n\n\"Ieyasu has more guns and sailors aboard the Explorer than we have on our three ships put together,\" Amako says dryly. \"I think we should keep on towards Matan.\"\n\n\n\"The Explorer is a formidable ship,\" Naomi says with a note of pride. \"Easily as fast as the Adventurer and able to sail circles around your smaller ships. I don't think you should attack her.\"\n\n\n\"It's your choice,\" Amako tells you. \"If you say yes we'll all attack Ieyasu, if you say no we'll hold our course.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Instruct the other Captains to turn around and attack Ieyasu", "result": "You give orders to attack the Explorer and the next morning you, Amako and Ryuzoji turn your ships around and sail towards Ieyasu's ship. Unfortunately Ieyasu has an unpleasant surprise for you: his cannons are larger and have longer range than yours and he is able to bombard your three ships while sailing out of range of your own smaller weapons. First Ryuzoji then Amako abandon the attack forcing you to do likewise, all of you having suffered a dozen casualties from the Explorer's accurate cannon fire including three dead aboard the Adventurer.\n\n\n\"I told you she was a hard ship to fight,\" Naomi says proudly when you tell her of the battle.\n\n\n \n\n\"Don't forget you're on our side,\" you remind her with a smile.", "action_results": [{"action": "The danger of Reefs", "result": "The Explorer continues to trail you closely as you and your companions sail into Navar waters. A small storm sweeps down one night from the north and by the time it has cleared at dawn you find it has separated you from your companions. After a tense hour you spot the Lady Luck and sail towards her but by the time you find the Relentless at noon the Explorer has spotted you as well and are closing in. Your heart drops as you see Amako's ship is in serious trouble.\n\n\nThe Relentless has been driven onto a series of reefs that are marked on your charts and is grounded solid with it's cannons pointing impotently up at the sky. Amako and his sailors are desperately trying to free her but there seems to be nothing they can do and as you sail closer Amako glances at the rapidly-approaching Explorer and waves you away. Ryuzoji, pale-faced and stricken over his brother's fate comes aboard the Adventurer.\n\n\n\"We have to leave them,\" he says, looking agonized. \"There is no time to get over there and take Amako and his sailors off before the Explorer catches up with us. Ieyasu is already closer to the Relentless than we are.\"\n\n\n \n\nA quick glance shows you are right but you don't feel right about abandoning your comrade and his Crew without at least trying to save them.\n\n\n \n\n\"It's up to you Leo,\" Naomi says with a shrug.\n\n\n \n\n\"Our mission to Matan is the most important thing,\" Ryuzoji says. \"We can do nothing to help my brother...\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Sail back to try and rescue Amako and his Crew anyway", "result": "Unwilling to abandon your companion you turn the Adventurer back towards the stricken Relentless but it is no good: Ieyasu is closer. As the Explorer sails in closer it fires a volley of cannon shots that kill three of your men and force you to turn the Adventurer away. Forcing to abandon your efforts to rescue Amako you can only watch in horror as Ieyasu's men pour a blast of cannon and musket fire into the stricken vessel before leaping aboard to slaughter the survivors. With a heavy heart you resume your journey towards Matan.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Ghost Ship", "result": "Ieyasu's Crew slaughter Amako's Crew when they catch up with the Relentless and that evening an explosion lights up the dusk as Ieyasu's Crew blow Amako's ship to pieces. The loss of his brother hits Ryuzoji hard and the previously cheerful Captain begins drinking heavily. You have your own concerns as you are now sailing Southeast into Navar waters that are marked on your charts and you are concentrating on not encountering any islands that may contain hostile colonists.\n\n\nOne day an unnerving sight drifts out of the early morning mists: a barnacle-encrusted ship with torn sails and clearly no one steering her. With a telescope you scan the ship and see the deck is covered with yellowed skeletons. A chill goes through you as you recognize the ship as the Revenge. Commanded by a particularly violent Captain called Edward Low (who was also Anne-Marie's first husband) the Revenge was one of your competitors in the Great Race and vanished during that voyage. Apparently you have rediscovered it. You toy with the idea of sailing closer and going aboard but Ryuzoji is terrified by the prospect.\n\n\n\"It is a ghost ship,\" he exclaims, visibly drunk despite the early hour. \"An ill omen!\"\n\n\nNaomi is more rational when you tell her about the side. \"If Ieyasu is as far behind us as you say it might be interesting to go aboard,\" she says mildly. \"I don't see anything to be frightened about in a few old bones.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Spend a day investigating the Revenge", "result": "Your curiosity gets the better of you and you steer the Adventurer alongside the Revenge and go aboard the ghost ship with a few of your braver sailors. All the skeletons aboard the Revenge seem to have died in battle: the deck is littered with swords and muskets and many of the skeletons are twisted in grotesque positions, their yellowed jaws open forever in one last soundless scream. There is no food or water on board but you find a body that can only be Low's clad in the blood-stained rags of once-fine clothes. The skeleton still clutches it's sword in it's hand in a grip so tight it cannot be pried free. Feeling cold inside you leave this ship to resume it's drifting wayward course, return to the Adventurer and sail on.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open Sea", "result": "As the Adventurer and Lady Luck continue to sail Southeast out of Navar waters and into Lapau waters you have good reason to feel confident: the Explorer is still far behind you (though still in sight) and you are getting ever-closer to your destination. You are surprised to see that Ieyasu has also come upon the Revenge and unlike you he has chosen to take possession of the weathered and sinister ship as it has now been manned and has joined the pursuit of you and Ryuzoji, much to your companion's unease. Your two ships are now pursued by two ships as you continue Southeast into Lapau waters.", "action_results": [{"action": "The chase continues", "result": "You have now reached Lapau waters, which you sailed through some months ago as part of Anne-Marie's War Fleet. Remembering the route well you adjust course to the south, which will lead you straight to Matan. The temperature is getting colder now and still despondent over being forced to abandon his brother Ryuzoji is now drinking near-constantly and his low spirits have infected his Crew. Naomi frowns when you share your concern about your fellow Captain with her.\n\n\n\"I think maybe he is more image than substance,\" she tells you and groans as she clasps her hand to the bandage around her eyes. \"Where are the Explorer and Revenge?\"\n\n\n\"They seem to be getting closer,\" you tell her grimly.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "The Snow Mountain", "result": "As you continue South the temperature continues to plummet and you and Ryuzoji are now both becoming concerned about your increasing lack of supplies. One day a familiar sight rises out of the sea before you: a snow-covered mountain. A village of Lapau huts once stood at it's base but Anne-Marie burned them during the Lapau War and judging by the ashes and ruins the Lapau have not returned to this island to rebuild them. Ryuzoji shows more interest than you in the ruined village when he joins you aboard the Adventurer for dinner.\n\n\n\"I want to land there,\" he tells you, slurring his words slightly as he drinks frequently from his wine glass. \"The Lapau may have left some food or supplies there.\"\n\n\n\"I doubt it,\" you tell him. \"It doesn't look like anyone has been there since Anne-Marie burnt their village.\"\n\n\n\"I'm going to go ashore and look anyway,\" Ryuzoji insists. \"Are you coming or not?\"\n\n\n\"Aren't you worried Ieyasu's two ships might catch up with us?\" Naomi asks.\n\n\n\"We'll see them coming a mile off,\" Ryuzoji says breezily. \"If they get too close we'll just weigh anchor and keep running south. Well Leo, are you coming or not?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Accompany Ryuzoji in his forage ashore", "result": "Going ashore with Ryuzoji the next morning with most of your two Crews you approach the ruins of teh village and look around the huts. As you suspected it doesn't look as though anyone has been here for a long time: there is certainly no food anywhere and the whole mountain has an air of bleakness. While you are poking around one of your crewmen suddenly gives a cry of alarm and points back to the shore: the Explorer and Revenge were much closer than your thought and are bearing down on the anchored Adventurer and Lady Luck.\n\n\nWith a mixture of panic and adrenalin pumping through your body you rush back to your longboat and row back to the Adventurer so fast that three of your Crewmen are left behind on the Mountain. You get aboard your ship just ahead of the Explorer and Lady Luck and manage to get the anchor raised and the Adventurer sailing south before Ieyasu can catch up with you. Ryuzoji is not so lucky: the Explorer fires a volley of cannonballs into the sight of the Lady Luck at point blank range and she quickly sinks.\n\n\n \n\nTo your amazement something wholly unexpected happens: Ryuzoji and his Crew row alongside the Revenge where moments later fighting breaks out. Ryuzoji and his Crew manage to overpower the small Crew Ieyasu has put aboard the Revenge and win control of the ship. Somehow out-racing the Explorer the Revenge catches up with you and with it's Captain laughing gleefully at his narrow escape your two ships race south.", "action_results": [{"action": "Flight", "result": "Ryuzoji is ecstatic about his narrow escape from Ieyasu and when you go aboard the blood-stained decks of the Revenge you find he and his surviving sailors (only a dozen or so remain) are all drinking heavily as they celebrate. This state of affairs continues as you continue south and Ryuzoji and his Crew are frequently too drunk to handle their ship properly and it begins to fall behind.\n\n\n\"You need to do something about Ryuzoji,\" Naomi tells you when you explain the problem to her. \"We are having to slow down because he can't handle his ship properly and at this rate the Explorer will catch up with us again before we can reach Matan.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Go aboard the Revenge and try to deal with your fellow Captain", "result": "Going aboard the Revenge with a few men you find Ryuzoji and his sailors predictably drunk and insist to your inebriated companion that this needs to stop. You have been trying to reason with him in his cabin for some time when suddenly shouts and cries fill the night. Rushing out on deck you find that the Explorer has caught up, pulled alongside the Revenge and Ieyasu's sailors are pouring aboard! You take one look and dive into the sea, swimming in board strokes towards the Adventurer. Three of your sailors are left behind and are captured along with Ryuzoji's crew, which are so drunk they give up practically without a fight. You are spotted and a boat is swiftly lowered, rescuing you from the freezing water and the Adventurer continues south. You see that to avoid any risks of Ryuzoji taking control of the Revenge again he and his sailors are transferred aboard the Explorer and the weathered old Revenge is sunk.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Corral Mountain", "result": "As the Adventurer continues to race South, still closely pursued by the Explorer yet another familiar island comes into sight: the scene of the final battle of the Lapau War. A corral mountain rises out of the sea ahead of you, at it's base is a large mound which you know must contain the graves of the Lapau warriors who died trying to protect their home islands from Anne-Marie's War Fleet of which you were a part. Your own dead, including your friend Esme Hale, were buried at sea nearby. This is also the scene of the revolt of Anne-Marie's officers against her where you joined several others in refusing to continue fighting the Lapau. You suspect that more than anything else this has earned you the undying hatred of Anne-Marie and it has cost your friends Tobias Cuthrew, Thomas Finch and Eva Freer their lives.\n\n\n\"We are getting close,\" Naomi says. You are surprised: you are standing on the quarterdeck but Naomi has finally risen from her sickbed and had a sailor help escort her out onto deck. The sea air seems to do her good as she looks stronger than she has in weeks.\n\n\n\"The food situation is getting critical,\" you tell her as you scan the corral mountain. It looks totally deserted and besides you are being too closely pursued by the Explorer to risk stopping now, especially after seeing what happened to Ryuzoji and the Lady Luck.\n\n\n\"It is alright: we are close,\" Naomi tells you. \"A few more days South and we will reach Matan.\"\n\n\n \n\nYou hold her hand in yours for comfort and turn your gaze to the south.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Remain aboard the Adventurer and hope for the best", "result": "You remain aboard the Adventurer fretting about your fellow Captain but during the night Anne-Marie solves the problem for you. The Explorer catches up with the Revenge and Ryuzoji and his drunk Crew are overpowered and captured almost without a fight. To avoid any risk of Ryuzoji retaking the Revenge again Ieyasu has Ryuzoji and his surviving Crew transferred aboard the Explorer and the Revenge is sunk. The Adventurer continues her voyage South alone.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain offshore and wait for him", "result": "You remain offshore and watch as Ryuzoji leads most of his Crew ashore to investigate the village. With mounting alarm you see the Explorer and Revenge getting closer and closer and try to warn Ryuzoji in the village of the threat by firing your ship's cannons. When he awakens to the danger it is too late: the Explorer sails alongside the Lady Luck and fires a volley of cannon shots at point-blank range into it's side. Ryuzoji's ship quickly sinks.\n\n\nAs you are pulling away with the Adventurer something remarkable happens. The Revenge sails up to Ryuzoji and his Crew, who are in a small longboat and were rowing back to the Lady Luck before she sank, and help them aboard. Moments later fighting breaks out and Ryuzoji's Crew manage to overwhelm the small Crew Ieyasu has put aboard the Revenge. Taking control of the Revenge Ryuzoji and his men rapidly outrace the Explorer and sail after you while you give them covering fire with the Adventurer's cannons. Ryuzoji is triumphant as he rejoins you and your two ships resume your flight south.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Anchor offshore and wait for Amako and Ryuzoji to carry out their raid", "result": "You wait offshore to see what happens. The next morning Amako and Ryuzoji lead their ships into Nassa harbor and pillage the village. When the Explorer approaches at dusk Amako lashes together the village's fishing boat fleet, sets them afire and leaves the tide to carry them towards the Explorer. Ieyasu is forced to retreat to save his ship and the Relentless and Lady Luck sail out of the harbor, firing their cannons defiantly at the Explorer as they go. It is a smart piece of seamanship and when your two companions have rejoined the Adventurer you all resume your journey to the Southeast.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Sail Southwest with Miura and Rokkaku", "result": "At dawn the eight ships part way, speeding off in different directions. The three ships of you and your companions, Adventurer, Royal Avenger and Warrior, turn Southwest and for the first time you get a good look at your new friends. Miura is a grim and black-bearded hulking giant of a man while his brother Rokkaku the dandy is a fairly indifferent and vague personality, though well-educated he tends to follow his older brother's lead. The three of you are not alone: the Esme's Joy turns to follow your three ships, it's decks lined with cannons and crew. After three days at sea you manage to make out the hulking figure of Kenshin standing on the ship's prow with your telescope and you relay this information that Kenshin is your pursuer to your fellow Captains.\n\n\n\"Kenshin is ruthless and aggressive,\" Miura declares while Rokkaku nods. \"We should attack him straight away while we have the advantage of ship numbers.\"\n\n\n\"I'm not so sure,\" Naomi says cautiously. \"If he is as strong as you describe he has more cannons and sailors than our ships put together.\"\n\n\n\"We will attack anyway,\" Miura tells you. \"It is up to you if you join us or not.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join your companions in attacking Kenshin", "result": "You, Miura and Rokkaku prepare your ships and turn the Adventurer, Royal Avenger and Warrior around to attack Esme's Joy. Cannons explode into life, cannonballs lance across the water and screams begin to fill the air. The Warrior beaks off the battle quite quickly when a cannonball strikes the rail Rokkaku was leaning on, shredding his right leg with splinters. Outgunned you and Miura follow suit, the three of you having suffered a dozen casualties among your Crews, including three aboard the Adventurer. Having learned that attacking Kenshin directly is a bad idea you all resume your voyage to the Southwest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shin Town", "result": "After a few days sailing a large Elixi port/island is sighted ahead of you. Miura and Rokkaku come aboard the Adventurer to confer with you and Naomi, Rokkaku is on crutches because of his wound.\n\n\n\"That is Shin Town,\" Miura tells you, pointing at the port. \"It is an island that supports Shingen and the town is named after him. I think we should raid it to increase our food supplies for the voyage ahead.\"\n\n\n\"We must be careful that Kenshin does not catch up,\" Naomi points out.\n\n\n\"Kenshin is far behind us and we have time to raid the port for food and make our escape before he catches up,\" Miura says confidently.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Miura and Rokkaku in raiding the town", "result": "Your three ships sail into the harbor and Miura sends a messenger ashore that if the town doesn't swiftly surrender all it's spare supplies then the sailors of your three ships will pillage the town. The threat works well and within an hour boats of supplies are being conveyed to your three ships. Before the Esme's Joy can reach the scene you and your companions have already loaded the deliveries of food aboard your ships and resumed your voyage to the Southwest leaving the looted town behind you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ross", "result": "Sailing steadily Southwest you soon come to another small island, lightly wooded with a small village sitting in a little bay. It is another Elixi island and Miura and Rokkaku know it well.\n\n\n\"That is Ross,\" Miura tells you. \"It's another pro-Shingen island. I think we should raid it.\"\n\n\nRokkaku, now off crutches but limping painfully, nods his agreement.\n\n\n\"Kenshin is getting much closer to us,\" you point out, indicating the Esme's Joy which is indeed closing in. \"I'm worried if we take too long he might trap us in the bay.\"\n\n\n\"You saw what happened at Shin Town where we were fine,\" Miura tells you with a shrug. \"Me and Rokkaku will raid the island anyway, even if you don't.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the raid on Ross", "result": "Together your three ships sail into the little bay and approach the village. All of you are keeping an uneasy eye on the Esme's Joy which is gaining speed and approaching the bay rapidly. Fearful lest you become trapped you decide to call off the raid. As you are all sailing back out disaster strikes: Rokkaku accidentally grounds the Warrior on a hidden sandbar near the mouth of the bay. You and Miura turn the Adventurer and Royal Avenger back to help him but the Warrior is stuck fast.\n\n\nBy now Esme's Joy has arrived on the scene and turns to fire a volley of cannon shots, hitting both your and Miura's ships, killing three of your sailors and forcing you to withdraw. As you and Miura extricate yourselves from the harbor you can only watch as a short but violent exchange of cannon and musket fire rages between the Esme's Joy and Warrior hat only ends when Rokkaku raises the white flag and surrenders. You have lost one of your fellow Captains.", "action_results": [{"action": "Flight to Sull", "result": "Miura does not seem too downcast that his brother is now a prisoner in enemy hands and the Adventurer and Royal Avenger continue their flight Southwest pursued by the Esme's Joy and Warrior until you come upon a small, thickly-wooded island. Miura comes aboard the Adventurer to identify it.\n\n\n\"That is Sull,\" Miura tells you. \"It is an Elixi island but nobody lives there because the trees grow too thickly. I remember there was some talk of establishing a colony there at one time but nothing came of it. There are no animals or food sources there so there is no point in landing.\"\n\n\nAs you are talking you hear a sudden shout on deck and hurry out to see what is happening. To your surprise you witness half a dozen sailors diving overboard from the deck of the Warrior and swimming with surprising speed towards Sull. You can see musket balls splashing into the sea all around them and recognize Rokkaku. You point him out to Miura who looks doubtful.\n\n\n\"He won't get far,\" he says doubtfully. \"He'll either get shot or captured on Sull.\"\n\n\nThere doesn't seem to be much love lost between the two brothers but when you report what is happening to Naomi she tells Miura that he at least or to try to rescue his brother but he refuses.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sail back to try to help your comrade", "result": "You give orders to sail the Adventurer back towards Sull but your efforts are in vain. After three of Rokkaku's companions are shot he gives up his escape attempt, a boat is lowered and he and his surviving men are taken back into captivity. Both the Esme's Joy and Warrior fire volleys of long-range cannon shots which kill some of your Crew. Turning away you follow the Royal Avenger on towards the Southwest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ocracoke", "result": "The fourth island of your voyage is soon sighted, a small tropical island with a sandy bay.\n\n\n\"That is Ocracoke, the last Elixi island in these waters,\" Miura tells you when he comes aboard the Adventurer. \"It is unoccupied at the moment but there are plans to establish a colony here because there are banana trees. We have a long voyage ahead to Matan and I think we should land here and pick up some fruit.\"\n\n\n\"Kenshin sounds like he is getting closer,\" Naomi warns. \"We may be trapped here like Rokkaku was at Ross.\" Miura shrugs and says he is going ashore anyway.", "action_results": [{"action": "Land with Miura to pick up supplies", "result": "You and Miura sail into Ocracoke's bay but as the wind picks up Kenshin bears down with the Warrior and Esme's Joy. Trapped you and Miura are forced to sail the Adventurer and Royal Avenger dangerously close to the ships of your adversaries. Aboard the Adventurer you have a bit of luck: the Warrior runs aground and can do no more than fire a volley of cannon shots that kill three of your sailors as you make your escape. Miura is not so lucky.\n\n\nThe Esme's Joy pulls alongside the Royal Avenger and dozens of attackers pour onto the ship. After fierce hand to hand fighting Miura and most of his sailors are slaughtered and a third ship joins Kenshin's small Fleet. Forced to continue fleeing to the Southwest you now find yourself alone and pursued by a much stronger foe as you sail on into unknown waters.", "action_results": [{"action": "Open Sea", "result": "You and your Crew are now in a very bad situation as the Adventurer continues to sail on alone to the Southwest pursued by Kenshin's three-ship Fleet. Your Supplies are beginning to get low and cap it all off it is beginning to get much colder at night now. Only Naomi remains optimistic during your conversations with her as she lies on her sickbed.\n\n\n\"I think we are leaving Elixi waters and entering Lapau waters,\" she tells you. \"Do you remember that it got cold as well the further south we sailed during the Lapau War? I don't think we're more than two weeks from Matan. We'll get there yet Leo.\"\n\n\nYou wish you shared her optimism.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Snow Island", "result": "As the temperature continues to drop a small snow-covered island appears ahead of you. You are surprised and pleased to see a dozen Lapau canoes bobbing offshore and a few small covered huts on the coast. The Lapau appear to be fishing, jabbing into the water suddenly with their spears and pulling their weapons from the water to reveal shiny, struggling fish speared on the end. Relations between your people and the Lapau have been tense since the end of the Lapau War and you are unsure whether to land and ask for food or not. Naomi is keen on the idea.\n\n\n\"I think they will help us when they learn of the Elixi's treachery,\" she tells you. \"If Kenshin's fleet is far enough away as you say it should be safe.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Spend a day visiting the Lapau and asking for supplies", "result": "Cautiously you approach the small snowy island to beg for food. The Lapau paddle out to meet you and their leader comes aboard the Adventurer, he is a scarred veteran who still limps from a wound he suffered during the Lapau War. He does not look happy to see you and one of your men who can speak his language translates his words.\n\n\n\"Because we lost so much food during the Lapau War many of my people are hungry this year,\" he tells you. \"King Al-Capu has sent warriors beyond our country's borders in search of food to help our struggling people.\"\n\n\nYou explain to him that you are fleeing from an enemy who is hunting you but the chief shrugs.\n\n\n\"Your people's problems are not our concern,\" he tells you diffidently. \"But Prince Al-Balu is your country's guest so we must show some friendship towards you... my men have done well and caught many fish. You may have some.\"\n\n\nThanking the man for his help you have a few dozen fish stowed aboard and resume your journey, feeling remorseful for the suffering you and your fellow Captains have inflicted upon the Lapau on the order of your tyrannical Queen.", "action_results": [{"action": "Onwards", "result": "As the Adventurer sails on Southwest two welcome things happen: it begins to get warmer and Kenshin breaks off his pursuit, turning to the South with his three ships. You suspect that the reason he has broken off the pursuit is because he is low on supplies: you are also low as well. One morning a low rocky island is spotted ahead, to your surprise caves seem to puncture the rocks in many places and with a telescope you can make our skeletons clutching spears and muskets scattered about the island. This is clearly the scene of one of the battles of the Lapau War.\n\n\n\"I think this is an island that Queen Anne-Marie managed to capture with Quarrel and Finch near the end of the Lapau War,\" Naomi tells you frowning when she hears your description of the island. \"She called it Finch Island... do you want to land? It doesn't sound like anyone has visited it since the fighting or that there is anything valuable here.", "action_results": [{"action": "Spend a day visiting the island", "result": "You drop anchor and lead a small party ashore in the ship's boat. The island is a deserted and unnerving place: skeletons lie both above ground and below in the caves, altogether you count about a dozen you believe to be Navar and more than twice that number of spear-armed Lapau. The whole island has a melancholy, almost sad feel, about the senseless loss of life that took place here and you are happy to get back aboard the Adventurer and continue your voyage.", "action_results": [{"action": "A familiar sight and a familiar enemy", "result": "As you sail onwards, your food supplies ever-dwindling, you finally come across something you definitely recognize. A corral mountain juts up out of the sea towards the sky: it was here that the last battle of the Lapau War was fought. Somewhere just offshore your friend Esme Hale and your fallen countrymen received a dignified burial and a small mound near the shoreline at the base of the cliff shows where the Lapau lie. The place makes your blood run a little cold.\n\n\nSo too does an unexpected and un-welcome sight: sailing down from the Northwest is the Explorer. With your telescope you recognize the figure of Ieyasu on the deck. You remember Amako and Ryuzoji sailed Southeast, if they'd survived their voyage they should be approaching from the same direction as Ieyasu but there is no sign of them...\n\n\n\"Someone said my old ship is in sight,\" a voice says behind you. You turn startled: Naomi has risen from her sickbed for the first time since she was blinded and has joined you on the Quarterdeck, guided by two sailors. You confirm that her ship is indeed in sight and Ieyasu seems to be in command.\n\n\n\"You know Leo, I have a bad feeling we might be the only ones to make it through to Matan alive,\" Naomi tells you heavily. \"We'd better turn south here and make our final run to our destination.\"\n\n\nYou agree, give the order to turn south and prepare for the last leg of your voyage to Matan where all your hopes and fears are centered.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Anchor offshore and wait for him", "result": "Wary of sharing the same fate as Rokkaku you keep the Adventurer offshore and watch as Miura sails into the bay. Unfortunately the wind picks up bringing Kenshin's ships speeding into the bay and Miura is unable to escape in time. The Warrior runs aground but the Esme's Joy bears straight down on the Royal Avenger and managed to come alongside. Dozens of Elixi sailors pour onto the decks of the Royal Avenger and Miura and most of his Crew are slaughtered. You can do no more but continue your flight as Kenshin adds a third ship to his fleet.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Decide not to risk your ship and your crew", "result": "As you sail on you watch from deck with your telescope as a volley of musket shots kill some of Rokkaku's companions. Rokkaku and the other survivors abandon their escape attempt and are recaptured when a boat is lowered for them. For some reason you have a worrying feeling that the same fate might befall you and Miura. With a heavy heart you turn your gaze away as the Adventurer continues steadily to the Southwest.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Anchor a safe distance off and wait", "result": "You keep a safe distance offshore and witness a dramatic fight. As Kenshin's Esme's Joy picks up speed and gets closer Miura and Rokkaku decide to abandon the raid and make for the open sea. Disaster strikes when the Warrior gets grounded on a hidden sandbar and Miura is forced to abandon his stricken brother. A short but violent exchange of musket and cannon fire rages between the Esme's Joy and Warrior that ends in Rokkaku raising a white flag and surrender. You and Miura are forced to resume your flight southwest, having lost one of your fellow Captains.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Anchor offshore and wait", "result": "Not trusting the plan you anchor offshore while Miura and Rokkaku sail their ships into Shin Town Harbor. You watch as Miura sends a boat of sailors ashore to demand supplies and to your surprise within an hour the town has sent a boat of supplies out to their two ships. The Royal Avenger and Warrior escape the harbor before Kenshin's Esme's Joy arrives on the scene and together the three of you continue your flight to the Southwest.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Stand off and see what happens", "result": "You drop anchor and watch as the Royal Avenger and Warrior sail back to do battle with the Esme's Joy. After a short exchange of cannon fire first Rokkaku and then Miura break off the fight. You soon learn that Rokkaku has been wounded: his right leg has been shredded by splinters when the rail he was leaning on was hit by a cannon ball. The short fight has achieved nothing except a few casualties among the crews of your allies and given you the knowledge that you are unlikely to be able to defeat Kenshin in a direct fight. You all resume your journey Southwest.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Sail Northwest with Sanada and Sogo", "result": "At dawn the eight ships part way, all speeding off in different directions. You and your two companions steer the Adventurer, Charmer and Fortune Northwest and are disconcerted when the Sea Ghost turns to follow you. With a telescope you can make out the burly figure of King Shingen himself in the stern. You report this information to Sanada and Sogo who are both cheerful and intelligent men. Both warn you not to underestimate Shingen whose cannon and crew aboard the Sea Ghost outnumber your three ships put together.\n\n\nAfter a few days a small island-port comes into sight and Sanada and Sogo come aboard the Adventurer to identify it.\n\n\n\"That is Principe,\" Sanada tells you. \"I have an idea. We will sail in pretending to be loyal Captains in the service of Shingen and request supplies from the village. We'll trick them into resupplying us and then sail away before they are any the wiser.\"\n\n\n\"I don't think that will work,\" Sogo says cautiously. \"Shingen will have issued reports throughout the Elixi islands of what we look like. I will not join you in this.\"\n\n\nSanada however is not to be deterred.", "action_results": [{"action": "Go ashore with Sanada to request food from the town", "result": "Together with Sanada you sail the Adventurer and Charmer into Principe Harbor and anchor while Sanada leads his sailors ashore. It is oddly quiet when suddenly a volley of musket shots is fired by armed villagers hiding in the houses. Sanada is shot in the head and killed instantly along with most of his crew. You and your Crew hastily weigh anchor and sail out of the harbor, abandoning the Charmer to be captured by the pursuing Sea Ghost. Three of your men are killed in this unfortunate defeat.", "action_results": [{"action": "The flight continues", "result": "Sailing Northwest you and Sogo are pursued by Shingen who has now taken possession of the Charmer, which together with the Sea Ghost pursues the Adventurer and Fortune across the sparkling waves. Soon enough a small island with a village at the shore comes into sight which Sogo soon identifies for you.\n\n\n\"That is Ferryland, a pro-Shingen island,\" he tells you. \"I think we should both sail directly up to the village and threaten to fire cannonballs into their homes if the colonists do not immediately give us food.\"\n\n\n\"We must be careful not to be trapped like Sanada was,\" Naomi says cautiously from her sickbed.\n\n\n\"We will be fast,\" Sogo says with a shrug. \"I will go in even if you don't Leo.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Sogo in attacking Ferrytown", "result": "Changing course you and Sogo sail your ships directly into Ferrytown Harbor and shout your threats and demands down to the shore. After firing a few cannon shots the terrified colonists promptly raise a white flag and send out a boat filled with supplies. Taking the goods on board you turn away from the island and are back on course before Shingen and his ships even get close. The whole thing seemed ridiculously easy.", "action_results": [{"action": "Onwards", "result": "Keeping on a Northwest track you and Sogo soon sight another small inhabited island which Sogo identifies to you as another pro-Shingen Elixi island called Trepassey. He is very keen to repeat his tactics which were successful at Ferryland when he comes aboard the Adventurer.\n\n\n\"What worked at Ferryland will work here,\" he insists to you. \"The Colonists in these waters are unusued to fighting and they are all cowards.\"\n\n\n\"Sogo seems to know what he is talking about,\" Naomi says to you quietly.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Sogo in raiding Trepassey", "result": "Sailing into the harbor of Trepassey you and Sogo repeat Sogo's bold tactics of Ferryland and threaten to bombard the town with cannon fire unless supplies are given. Incredibly the colonists of this town are even quicker, no cannon fire is necessary and you are back on your way before Shingen's ships can even get close.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ouidah", "result": "You continue Northwest for a few more days until yet another island with a small village on it comes into sight. Sogo identifies it as Ouidah, the last Elixi port in these waters. Though he is hardly short of supplies Sogo is keen to pillage the island before continuing your voyage across unknown waters towards Lapau territory and Matan. Naomi has been converted by Sogo's past successes and urges you to join him in raiding the island.", "action_results": [{"action": "Join the raid on Ouidah", "result": "For the third time in a row Sogo's plan pays off: you and Sogo sail your ships directly into the harbor and with a few threats and a few cannonballs succeed in obtaining supplies from the frightened colonists: in fact they are bringing the supplies out to you before you have even made your demands! You can only imagine how the relentless pillaging of his colonies is infuriating Shingen and with a broad grin you and Sogo continue your voyage out of Elixi territory and into unfamiliar waters.", "action_results": [{"action": "Northwest to Lapau Territory", "result": "Sailing Northwest a fifth island comes into sight: a small and unoccupied low mound of sand that juts out of the water a few meters: there is clearly nothing there. The morning the island is sighted Sogo joins you and Naomi for breakfast aboard the Adventurer and makes a bold suggestion.\n\n\n\"We should attack Shingen,\" he tells you. \"Together the Adventurer and Fortune should be strong enough to defeat the Sea Ghost and Charmer. I am tired of running and I think if we attack them we have a good chance of winning.\"\n\n\n\"Why fight if we don't have to?\" Naomi asks. \"Personally I think we should keep going to Matan.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Join Sogo in attacking Shingen", "result": "You decide in making a stand to fight Shingen and you and Sogo turn out ships about to attack them. The cannon fire opens at long range and disaster strikes almost immediately when one of the first cannonballs fired by the Sea Ghost decapitates Sogo! You see his headless body topple to the deck in a cloud of red and his Crew give a wail of despair. The Fortune breaks off from the fight and inexplicably turns off to the south. Though you have only suffered three casualties among your Crew you are forced to break off the fight too and steer the Adventurer back towards the Northwest. Shingen ignores the fleeing Fortune and the Sea Ghost and Charmer continue pursuing you to the Northwest.", "action_results": [{"action": "Flight", "result": "You are in the worst state you have been in the voyage so far: alone and pursued by a numerically superior foe you are driving the Adventurer into unknown waters. You believe you have reached the point where you need to turn due West to reach Lapau waters and Matan when disaster strikes: the Adventurer strikes a hidden reef and becomes stuck fast! With the Charmer and Sea Ghost coming up fast behind you, each stronger in cannons and crew than your ship, you need to act fast to get unstuck from the reefs.", "action_results": [{"action": "Start throwing supplies overboard to lighten your vessel", "result": "You order your men to begin throwing barrels of water and cannonballs over the side of your vessel. You have barely begun when a wave suddenly lifts the Adventurer clear and you are able to resume your flight to the west. You have only lost a few days of supplies but with several days journey ahead of you to Matan you begin to worry if you will have enough supplies.", "action_results": [{"action": "Sail on to the West", "result": "Running due west you are now entering Lapau waters and can't be more than a week from your destination but Shingen is still pursuing you intently in his two ships. After a few days a small rocky island comes into sight. It seems to be inhabited by countless goats and down by the shore several Lapau warriors are hunting, killing goats with their spears and carrying the carcasses back to their boats. Ever since the Lapau War relations between your people and theirs have been tense but if you do want to spend a day landing to get some supplies Shingen's ships are far enough behind you that you can do it safely.", "action_results": [{"action": "Land and pick up supplies", "result": "As the Adventurer approaches the rocky island the Lapau promptly take to their boats and paddle away to the north. You are surprised they are fleeing but they don't look a particularly healthy bunch: thin and emaciated they have obviously been starving for some time. You lead a party of sailors ashore, kill a few goats and load the fresh meat into the hold of the Adventurer. Having resupplied yourself you resume your journey west.", "action_results": [{"action": "Approaching Matan", "result": "The Adventurer plunges relentlessly over the rolling waves going deeper and deeper into Lapau territory. You are only a few days from Matan now and have such a lead there is now way that Shingen can catch you: recognizing this the Sea Ghost and Charmer break off the pursuit and turn away to the Southwest. Your Crew cheer and you are standing on the quarterdeck of the Adventurer studying the defeated ships with your telescope when you hear a voice behind you call your name.\n\n\nTurning around you are surprised to see Naomi has finally risen from her sickbed and joined you on the quarterdeck. A clean white bandage covers her shattered eyes and a sailor is leading her by the arm to where you stand. The fresh sea air seems to do Naomi good.\n\n\n\"We are getting close to Matan then?\" she asks. \"Do you think King Al-Capu will listen to us?\"\n\n\n\"I guess we're about to find out,\" you say heavily as the Adventurer completes the last leg of your voyage.", "action_results": [null]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Order your Crew onto the Reef with spades to help free your vessel", "result": "You order some of your men down onto the reef with spades to begin freeing the Adventurer. As they start digging a large wave suddenly sweeps the Adventurer clear while at the same time sweeping your sailors on the reef under your ship. Most manage to swim clear and are hauled hastily aboard but three are never seen again: unable to swim clear they have met a horrible death. Hastily turning the Adventurer to the west you resume your flight from Shingen's ships.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Let him fight his battle on his own", "result": "Unwilling to risk the Adventurer you drop anchor and watch the Fortune turn to do battle with the Charmer and Sea Ghost. Disaster strikes almost immediately when one of the Sea Ghost's first shots bloodily decapitates your loyal ally Sogo. A cry of dismay goes up from his crew who promptly break off the fight and turn their ship southwards. You can do nothing but resume your flight to the Northwest pursed by Shingen's victorious vessels while the Fortune vanishes from sight to the south.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Wait offshore", "result": "You are worried that Sogo is pushing his luck too far but you needed to have no such concerns: the plan once more works and for the third time Sogo pillages an Elixi Colony. With a broad grin you watch as the Fortune sails up to join you and together you push on Northwest.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Anchor offshore", "result": "Caution gets the better of you and you keep offshore but there was no need for caution: the Fortune sails directly into the enemy harbor, obtains supplies from the colonists and promptly sails back out again. You can only imagine how annoyed Shingen is becoming aboard his pursuing ships!", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Wait offshore", "result": "Cautious of the plan you keep the Adventurer a safe distance away but to your surprise everything goes smoothly: Sogo sails his ship directly into the harbor, fires a few cannon shots and has a boat load of supplies brought out to him. Sailing back out of the harbor he is safely away before Shingen and his two ships even get close and together the two of you continue your flight to the Northwest.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}, {"action": "Remain offshore with Sogo", "result": "You remain offshore and watch as Sanada sails the Charmer into Principe's harbor and lead his Crew ashore. As they enter the village he and his crew are ambushed by armed colonists hiding in the buildings and Sanada and most of his sailors are slaughtered in the musket fire and their ship captured. With the Sea Ghost so close there is nothing you can do to avenge your fallen comrade and together with Sogo on the Fortune you resume your flight to the Northwest.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Sail Due West across the open sea towards the Western Passage", "result": "You sail the Adventurer across the rolling waves, the Explorer and Esme's Joy easily keeping speed with you. You are glad to have your two friends either side of you and can think of no one you'd rather sail with. Every evening Naomi and Eva come aboard for dinner and most evening you speculate on what could have happened to Cuthrew and Finch.\n\n\n\"Cuthrew was the best sailor we've got and Finch was no fool,\" Eva opinions one evening. \"Whatever happened to them it must have been something neither of them have ever encountered before or even suspected they would encounter...\"\n\n\n\"We must be careful Leo,\" Naomi tells you. \"Keep a close eye out for any dangers.\"\n\n\nYou nod, uncomfortably aware that the lives of your fellow officers and the ninety sailors under your command rest on your decisions.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story66.json b/data/scraper/stories/story66.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..49956f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story66.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=16577", "context": "", "first_story_block": "This story takes place long ago, in the kingdom of Mystigar.\n\n\nThe King has recently passed, leaving his daughter, the beautiful winged-princess Marmalade, as the only heir. The Princess is not yet of age, so she is left under the guardianship of the the unscrupulous Marques Jacques Pierre. Unsatisfied with being a mere Marques, he has conspired to marry her and seize the throne. \n\n\nIt is declared that a great fair and a tournament of archery shall be held in Marmalade's name. The victor will win her hand in marriage. The tourney is open to all, but the game is fixed, for everyone knows that the Marques is the greatest archer in the land.\n\n\nThe day of the fair is upon us! You play the part of a humble baker's apprentice who, unbeknown to all, is destined to be king!", "action_results": [{"action": "Act I", "result": " \n\nAct I:\n\n\nThe Fair", "action_results": [{"action": "The baker's apprentice", "result": "Today is the day of the fair!\n\n\nThe sun is not even fully up, but already your chores are done. The oven is lit, the dough kneaded, the bread pricked, the floor swept, and the pots scrubbed. You even had a chance to chop a little morning-wood, if you know what I mean. Surely now your master will let you spend the rest of the day at the fair. You have thought of nothing else since it was first announced.\n\n\nYou are busy day dreaming about Princess Marmalade, again, when a shout comes down from the loft; \"Boy!\" Your cantankerous master is finally awake. The ladder strains under his bulk as he climbs down to the kitchen. \"Get off your ass, boy, and warm the ovens,\" he says.\n\n\n\"Master, the ovens are already warm. All of my chores are done. I thought perhaps I could go to the fair?\" you reply.\n\n\nA meaty hand strikes your face. \"The fair! The fair's for minstrels and dandies. Which one are you, boy? Or did you fancy you'd win the tourney and marry the Princess?\" he says, doubling over with laughter. \"Long live King Baker's Boy! Forget that lot and go fetch me some milk.\"\n\n\nHe hands you a copper and sends you out the door with another smack.\n\n\n\"And if I find out you've gone to the fair, boy, I'll chain your face to the oven!\"\n\n\n\"Bastard,\" you curse under your breath while rubbing your swollen lip. One of these days you will chain his fat face to the oven. You head towards the Milkman's stand. He always has a bottle of spirits to share with the young apprentice boys, and his daughter Bessa has the biggest milk jugs you've ever seen.\n\n\nYou reach his stand but no one's there. \n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the Milkman's house", "result": " \"Hello?\" you call as you knock on the Milkman's door. There is no reply but the door is open, so you step inside.\n\n\n\"Great Gods put out that light and stop all this hollerrin'. Can't a man rest his achin' head?\" the Milkman says from his bed. He pulls the covers over his head, spilling several clays jars to the floor. He has had a long night of drinking with the thatcher's boys. \"If you want milk you'll have to get it yourself. Bessa's gone to the fair and I sure as hell ain't doing it in my condition.\" Just your luck, both the spirits and Bessa are gone.\n\n\nYou can hear the cow lowing from the shed, begging to be milked. You grab a pail and sit down on the milking bench.", "action_results": [{"action": "Milk the cow", "result": "You milk the cow while dreaming of Bessa's heaving udders. You are in the shed for much longer than it takes to milk a cow. \n\n\nYou heft the pail and walk back to the house. The Milkman has slipped back into his stupor. You can hear him mumble something about the thatcher's boy and soft hands. There is really no need to pay him. He probably won't even remember you've been here. Screw the Milkman and screw the Baker! It's the day of the fair, you have a copper in your pocket, and you're going to enjoy yourself! You drink deep from the milk bucket before casting it away. You are the master of your own destiny!\n\n\n--\n\n\nThe fair is everything you had hoped. Highborn ladies and goodly knights recite poetry outside of colorful silk pavilions. Naked urchins chase each other about playing tag and brown-fingers, while drunken minstrels belt green sleeves at the top of their lungs. Vendors call their wares from various carts and stands. \n\n\nA fat pastry chef with a pox-marked face yells \"Hot pies! Two coppers!\" while a dwarf cries her ale. You are hungry but cannot afford a pie. The Dwarf, however, will let you drink yourself stupid for a copper. \n\n\nYou look around the crowd hoping to catch a glimpse of the Princess. You spy her in the royal box above the tourney field, framed by a pair of guards who look more jailor than escorts. For one moment your eyes meet and she smiles. \n\n\nA herald cries out below her. \"Gather all yee who would compete in the tourney of archery\" he proclaims. \"To the winner shall be awarded a golden bow and the hand of the beautiful Princess Marmalade. Any man of Mystigar may enter for a single copper.\"\n\n\nA copper for a chance to marry the Princess? What luck!", "action_results": [{"action": "Enter the tourney", "result": "\"Each of ye shall havith three arrows\" says the herald. \"If one of these touchith the bulls eye, you shall advancith to the next round.\" Only one? Piece of cake.\n\n\nA trumpet blows, signaling the start of the round. You nock your arrow, take careful aim, and release. The arrow soars into the air well above the target. Undismayed, you nock your second arrow. This one buries itself in the dirt halfway to the target. Archery is harder than it looks.\n\n\nThis is your one chance to be more than a baker's apprentice. Everything rides on this last arrow. You close your eyes, and imagine your life with the Princess. You see yourself perched between her magnificent wings, your face hidden amongst her golden locks as you soar above the castle. You fly higher and higher, throwing rocks down upon the screaming peasants below. You release the arrow.\n\n\nA perfect bulls eye!\n\n\nRound after round your arrows strike the mark as other contestants are eliminated. The Princess takes notice of your success. Eventually, only you and a single opponent are left; The Marques Jacques Pierre.\n\n\n\"My hat is off to you, good sir\" he says cordially between rounds. \"Tell me, who are you and where did you learn to shoot so well?\"\n\n\n\"I'm just a baker's boy,\" You mumble to him.\n\n\n\"Surely you jest. Never have I heard of a baker's boy with such skill, a true prodigy. You must come hunting with me sometime, I fear the beasts won't stand a chance! But lo, look at this string! it is worn thin and ready to snap. Please change it out for one of mine. it is of the finest make. I won't have it said I took advantage of a poor baker's boy.\"\n\n\nWhat a fine fellow is the Marques. You change out your string and promise to take him up on his hunting offer.\n\n\nYou are summoned to the Princess's private box. \"Baker's boy, you have given me hope for the first time since my father passed,\" the Princess says. \"Defeat the Marques and you will have my heart as well as my hand.\" Wow, no pressure there.\n\n\nThe trumpet sounds to signal the final round. \"For the last and final round, each man shall shootith a single arrow, and the better mark shall win the hand of Princess Marmalade!\" announces the herald. The targets are moved back one hundred feet.\n\n\nThe Marques offers to shoot first. He makes a good shot with his golden arrow just touching the edge of the bulls eye. You approach the mark and prepare to draw, conscious that the Princess is watching you.", "action_results": [{"action": "Draw your bow", "result": "Snap! The new string breaks under the strain, slashing open your cheek. Your arrow does a lazy summersault before landing at your feet.\n\n\n\"The Marques is the winner!\" declares the herald.\n\n\nThat filthy cad, he tricked you! He knew the string would break. You brandish your bow like a club and charge the Marques, but by now the tourney field is overrun with spectators and you cannot reach him through the press. For a moment your eyes catch those of the Princess and she gives you a plaintive look before her and the Marques are carried away. \n\n\nSome hours later you sit at the Dwarf's stall, attempting to drink away your sorrows. You rub the fresh scar on your face, swearing revenge.\n\n\nThere is a tap on your shoulder. You turn to find a mysterious hooded figure behind you. \"A gift,\" she says, \"from the Princess, for her true champion. Please help her before she is forced to marry.\" She hands you a bundle, and disappears into the night. Could it be true? Does the Princess really need your help?\n\n\nA small bone harp without any strings is wrapped with in the bundle. What the hell are you supposed to do with this? Sing your sorrows? You ask the dwarf how much beer the harp will buy, hopefully enough to give you alcohol poisoning.\n\n\n\"You drunk fool! That's no ordinary harp,\" she shouts, \"it's the Harp of Dreams! If you string this harp with the mane of a unicorn and sing the Song of Wishes your greatest wish will come true.\" \n\n\nThat makes sense.\n\n\n\"Take this seed\" says the dwarf, handing you a small pearl. \"The tree which grows from it is the Unicorn's favorite food. Plant it in the Enchanted Forest and he will come to feast upon it.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Travel to the Enchanted Forest", "result": " \n\nAct II:\n\n\nThe Song of Wishes", "action_results": [{"action": "Now things start to get weird...", "result": "The story resumes with you hopelessly lost in the enchanted forest.\n\n\nHungry and tired, you sit on a log to rest and get your bearings. A delicious looking mushroom is growing from the end of the log. You recognize its shiny white cap and blue spots as an edible Dwarf's Finger, then again, it could be a clown egg for all you know, you're not a doctor. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Eat the mushroom", "result": "Delicious! A single bite and you feel completely refreshed. You set off through the Enchanted Forest with an extra swing in your step. \n\n\nSome while later you come upon a dappled glen. A waterfall throws a thin cloud of mist across the clearing and fireflies dance among the rich green leaves. This spot looks as good as any to plant the magic seed. You dig a shallow hole and gently cover the seed with rich brown earth. \n\n\nA magnificent tree shoots forth from the soil. Higher and higher it twists, growing upward. Hundreds of white flowers sprout from its tender shoots, filling the air with their nubile fragrance. Somewhere off in the distance, you hear a horse's neigh. ", "action_results": [{"action": "The unicorn appears", "result": "A majestic white stead gallops out of the mist in slow motion, and stops at your side. You reach for its opalescent mane when your sphincter suddenly loosens. The unmistakable smell of diarrhea fills the air. Your back arches in agony, and your stomach fills with fire. The unicorn screams and runs back into the mist, while blood and puss pours from your belly button... \n\n\n--\n\n\nThe clown looks down at your shredded body for a moment before slithering after the unicorn. I guess it was a clown egg after all.\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "No way, that's obviously going to kill me", "result": "You sensibly leave the mushroom alone. Better to be hungry than dead, you always say.\n\n\nSome while later you come upon a dappled glen. A waterfall throws a thin cloud of mist across the clearing, and fireflies dance among the rich green leaves. This spot looks as good as any to plant the magic seed. You dig a shallow hole and gently cover the seed with rich brown earth. \n\n\nAn enormous tree shoots forth from the soil. Higher and higher it twists, growing upward. Hundreds of white flowers sprout from its tender shoots, filling the air with their nubile fragrance. A magnificent opalescent unicorn gallops out of the mist and kneels at your feet.\n\n\n\"Long ago it was foretold that the true king of Mystigar would plant the sacred tree of the unicorn in this glade,\" says the unicorn. \"Take the hair of my mane as a token of-\" A golden arrow sprouts from his neck before he can finish his sentence.\n\n\n\"Capital shot sir!\" comes a shout from behind you. The Marques and his lackey, Wendell, come riding across the glade, bows in hand. \n\n\n\"Great gods, if it isn't the baker's boy. I thought I had seen the last of you,\" says the Marques. \"Now stand aside. That unicorn's horn will make the perfect wedding gift for the Princess.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Run and hide", "result": "You run blindly into the forest, tears streaming down your face and urine streaming down your leg. What a fool you were to think you could help the Princess.\n\n\nHours pass and you are hopelessly lost. You notice a melodic humming in the distance, like the muffled song of a beautiful maiden. Perhaps it will lead you to safety. The song enchants you, and you follow it deeper into the forest.\n\n\nEventually you find the song's source. The humming emanates from a small clay jar perched upon a toadstool. The melody changes, as if to say \"open me,\" and you are unable to resist. You raise the lid and hundreds of angry siren wasps swarm from the jar. Their relentless stings paralyze you, and you lie helplessly while they lay their eggs in your swollen tongue.\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stand and fight", "result": "You plant yourself in front of the unicorn, fists bared. You've had enough of this pompous Marques. The Marques shrugs and then draws his golden sword. He charges. You duck the blow and kick his horse squarely in the taint. The horse reels, throwing the Marques to the ground.\n\n\nThe Marques is quickly back on his feet and after you again. Defenseless, you are driven backwards. You stumble and the Marques's sword bites deep into your side.\n\n\n\"Sorry it kneads to end like this, baker's boy\" he laughs. He raises his sword for the final blow. \n\n\nThe unicorn, seeing your peril, summons his last bit of strength. A magnificent light radiates from his horn. Blinded, the Marques drops his sword and falls to his knees. You seize the moment and grab the sword. The time has come for your revenge.\n\n\nThe light goes out.\n\n\nWendell stands over the dying unicorn, triumphantly holding the severed horn. Blood loss overcomes you. The sword slips from you hands and you collapse.\n\n\n\"It seems your plan has gone a-rye, baker's boy,\" the Marques quips. He retrieves his sword and picks up the harp. \"Look, Wendell, I'm a little baking minstrel singing songs about pastries on my ugly little harp,\" he sings, capering around you before tossing the harp away derisively. \"Too bad you won't have time to compose a song for my wedding. Come, Wendell, we must get back in time to pick out invitations.\"\n\n\nYou catch one last piece of their conversation as they ride off: \"Explain how this works again, Wendell. Where do I strap the horn?\"\n\n\n\"Your Majesty,\" the unicorn says softly. You crawl to his side as the life flows from your body. \"You must drink of my blood, it is the only way to heal your wounds.\" There is probably another way, maybe a bandage or some salve. Not one to argue with a mythical being, you cup a handful of turquoise blood and bring it to your lips. It tastes like rainbows and dreams. The blood courses through your body, healing you.\n\n\n\"You are the true king of Mystigar. Take the hair of my mane and string the harp. Now, you must go to the crossroads and seek the wise sage. Only he can teach you the Song of Wishes.\" The unicorn begins to fade. \"Don't let the harp fall into the wrong hands. Its powers can be used for great good, or great evil. I must depart from this world, but do not fret for you and I are now one. My spirit will always watch over you. Always...\" The unicorn disappears. From that day on you get the uncomfortable feeling he's watching you whenever you go to the bathroom. \n\n\nYou resume your journey with a heavy heart.", "action_results": [{"action": "The journey continues...", "result": "The forest path eventually leads you to a quaint cottage. A centaur stands out front, raking leaves. The centaur stops raking as you approach. \"Good morning traveler, will you help me tend my garden?\" asks the centaur. \"In exchange I shall give you my daughter's hand in marriage.\"\n\n\nA deal like that is too good to pass up, but how would that even work, you wonder. Perhaps there a special stool or something. You are struggling for a polite way to ask when his daughter trots from the cottage. Her beauty rivals that of Princes Marmalade. She bashfully plays with her long golden braid, and paws the ground playfully with her silver hoof. \n\n\nIt would be impolite to turn down his offer, but you are on a quest. The centaur knows much about quests and the Enchanted Forest, perhaps he can help with your journey.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Tend the centaur's garden", "result": "That night you find yourself in the cottage, alone with the centaur's daughter. She throws you to the ground with incredible centaur strength. She tears off her leather vest, and towers over you in a dominating fashion.\n\n\n\"Tickle my udders, human!\"\n\n\nYou fall hopelessly in love and are married at once. You spend your days raking the centaur's garden and your evenings serenading the centaur's daughter with your harp. At night you lie in her stall, curled up as little spoon, wondering how many legs your children will have. \n\n\n \n\nThe End\n\n\nSure, things worked out fine for you, but how could you abandon the Princess? And seriously, how does that work?\n\n\nYou've found an N. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Ask about the sage", "result": "\"They say the sage is a thousand years old and can see another thousand years into the future. Of course, they also say us centaurs can't wipe our own asses,\" the centaur says. \"Anyway, no one has ever seen the sage, or if they have, they didn't live long enough to talk about it. Travel east across the river to the Crossroads. A spirit guide will appear there and guide you to the sage.\"\n\n\n\"But beware of the Haunted Castle!\" he cautions. \"It is ruled by an evil demon and she is not to be trusted.\"\n\n\nYou take one last look at the centaur's daughter before heading east down the forest path. The centaur calls after you: \"It's not true you know! We can wipe our asses just fine!\"\n\n\n--\n\n\nThe sun is high overhead when you reach the river.\n\n\nThe river is too wide and too strong to ford. If you had a wagon, you might be able to caulk it and float across. The Haunted Castle stands ominously on the river's edge, guarding the only bridge across. It exudes an evil aura. Luckily, there is also a ferry docked on the near shore.", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the ferry", "result": "The ferry is manned by an old leper, draped in shapeless brown rags. His skin is hard and gray, giving him a reptilian appearance. The right side of his body is a misshapen mess of boils and warts. He seems friendly, despite his appearance. \n\n\nYou climb aboard and he begins to pole you across. \"What soft, pink skin you have,\" the ferryman says. \"I bet your worm wiggles like a fish on a string when you walk around. My poor gray balls look like a blueberry stuck to a grapefruit. I can't hardly fit them in my britches, let alone a woman.\"\n\n\nA scaly hand shoots from the water and grabs your arm, interrupting the leper's graphic description of his genitals. The ferryman smacks the arm away with his pole before it can drag you from the boat. Hundreds more rise from the depths. They grab at the boat, churning the river water in a feeding frenzy.\n\n\n\"The River Hags are hungry today.\" The ferryman says. He rises and corners you in the bow of the boat. \"Now, hand over that harp or I will toss you overboard.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Give him the harp", "result": "The ferryman rips the Harp from your grasp.\n\n\n\"Long ago I foresaw this day. How patiently I have waited here for you!\" he exclaims. \"Now all the world shall know my suffering.\"\n\n\nHe strums the Harp and sings the Song of Wishes. His leprous boils fade as he sings, and his skin becomes supple and pink. Your skin erupts with gray boils as his curse is transferred to you. Your foreskin twists up like a balloon animal and warts fill your throat. You start to choke...\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Leap from the boat", "result": "Your leap causes the small boat to capsize and the ferryman is thrown into the water with you.\n\n\nThe leper has been working this river since before you were a stain on your mother's thigh, and the River Hags have been waiting patiently to get their hands on him. They converge upon him and you are momentarily forgotten while they satiate their blood lust. His gargled screams are barely audible over the sound of tearing flesh. \n\n\nYou quickly swim to shore while they are distracted and resume your journey.\n\n\n--\n\n\nThe forest path gradually becomes a lane, and the lane becomes a road. Eventually, it leads you to your destination. A stone pillar rises phallicly from the Crossroads, marking the spot were a dozen paths meet like spokes on a wheel. Three animals step from behind the pillar: a frog, a raven, and a fox. \n\n\n\"Welcome your majesty,\" says the fox.\n\n\n\"We are the spirit guides,\" says the frog.\n\n\n\"We have waited long for you,\" says the crow. \n\n\nYou can tell this is going to get annoying really quickly.\n\n\n\"I am the regrets of man,\" says the frog.\n\n\n\"And I am the sorrows of man,\" says the raven.\n\n\n\"And I am the wiles of man,\" says the fox.\n\n\nYou have no idea what they're talking about. All you care about is which one can lead you to the sage.\n\n\n\"Maybe all of us\" says the crow.\n\n\n\"Maybe none of us,\" says the frog.\n\n\n\"You'll have to trust your heart,\" says the fox.", "action_results": [{"action": "Follow the Fox", "result": "You follow the fox for some distance through the forest when he stumbles. \"Ah I've stubbed my toe. You're going to have to carry me,\" says the fox. \"Please, it really, really, hurts. Carry me and I can tell you where to go. Pretty please.\" His toe looks fine, but you reluctantly pick up the spirit fox. \"Oh you have such strong arms,\" he says.\n\n\nYou travel many miles and the forest becomes dark and ominous. The trees are decorated with shrunken heads and human bones which dangle from their branches like wind chimes. You enter a rocky clearing and deep voice booms from the forest, \"Who dares seek the great sage?\"\n\n\n\"That's my cue,\" says the terrified fox. He hops from your arms and quickly scampers away. It seems his toe has been miraculous healed. \n\n\nA massive lion leaps onto the rocky outcrop ahead of you. He is so large a horse could ride down his gullet. Skulls and bones are tied in his mane like trophies. \"If you wish to see the sage you must answer my riddle. Answer wrong, and I will add you to my decorations\n\n\n\"What rises tall and hard in the morning, showers its golden rays down upon the children, and then, exhausted, hangs its head between the stones?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "The sun", "result": "\"Hmm that's not what I was thinking, but now that you mention it, it could be the sun. You have proven your worth. You may enter.\" The lion opens his enormous mouth and beckons you inside.\n\n\nInside the lion is quite spacious. His ribs form an elegant vaulted ceiling. Goblin skulls, troll bladders, and other magical odds and ends line the wall. A unicorn horn lies discarded next to a pile of furs which serve as the sage's bed.\n\n\nThe sage is a bent old man cloaked in a rat-skin robe. He is balding and barefoot, and a single tooth protrudes from his bottom jaw. \"I've been waiting for you,\" he says. \"You are the chosen one who will learn the Song of Wishes. But first you must be cleansed by a bath in witch's blood.\"\n\n\nYou undress and climb into a large stone tube. The sage pours buckets of thick witch's blood over your head. It runs down your face and into your mouth. \"Hard to believe that witch fills one of these buckets every month. Now about that song. Close your eyes.\" The sage sheds his robe and slips into the tub with you. His tooth cuts sharply into your nipple. A melody fills your mind as he sucks away your life force. It is the Song of Wishes.\n\n\n\"Well that's the song,\" the sage says, wiping his lip. \"You can only sing it once, so use it wisely. Now enough business, lets play tub fountains!\" You leap from the tub and hastily dress. \"Suit yourself, I'll play a solo match. If you're gonna leave you'll have to use the backdoor. Should put you just outside of town.\"\n\n\nAs you crawl out through the lion's colon, your thoughts turn to the Princess.", "action_results": [{"action": "You return to town", "result": "The town is quiet now, the pomp of the fair forgotten. You swagger down the empty street like a cockerel. You found the unicorn, fought the Marques, met the wise sage, learned The Song of Wishes, and you still have time before the wedding. But what are you waiting for? You could sing the song right now and be probing the Princess by nightfall.\n\n\nYou pluck the silky strings of the harp and clear your throat. Before the words can leave your lips a meaty hand falls on your shoulder.\n\n\n\"Hello boy.\"\n\n\nIt's the Baker! He grabs the harp from your hands and gives it a derisive pluck before throwing it over his shoulder. \"I knew you'd run away and become a dandy minstrel. But you're still my apprentice, boy, and I warned you what would happen if you went to the fair...\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Act III", "result": "Act III:\n\n\nThe Wedding\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Meanwhile back at the castle...", "result": "Wendell walks down the muddy street with a list of errands in his hand. He stops in front of the florist's shop when a small bone harp lands at his feet. There is a commotion out in the street; the town baker has just thrown a portly little boy over his shoulder. \n\n\n\"The baker's boy is still alive,\" Wendell says to no one in particular. \"I must warn the Marques!\" He tucks the harp under his arm and races back to the castle. \n\n\n--\n\n\nThe Marques slams closed the tower door. A red, hand-shaped welt mars his face. The Princess hasn't taken the news well.\n\n\n\"The Princess and I are to be married immediately,\" he tells Wendell. \"See that everything is ready. Arrange a special welcome for the Baker's Boy in case he decides to join us. Come to my chambers when you've finished. I need to be fluffed for my wedding night,\" the Marques says, loosening his belt. \n\n\n--\n\n\nInside the tower cell the Princess weeps. She runs to the window, as if to throw her self from the tower, but iron bars prevent her.\n\n\nA small white dove comes to rest on the sill. \"My faithful servant,\" sobs the Princess. \"The Marques has the harp and now I fear the Baker's Boy shan't save me in time. Please, you must find him. I will die before I marry that wicked Marques!\"\n\n\nThe dove flies away with the Princess's last hopes.", "action_results": [{"action": "The denouement", "result": "The Baker makes good on his threat and chains your face to the oven. \"I'm going to the castle to delivery some pastries for the wedding. You'll be nice and crispy by the time a get back.\" The door slams as he leaves. The oven is already warm against your skin.\n\n\nYour face grows hotter every second. Sweat rolls down your body, basting your coin purse in your own grease. You struggle to escape, but the chains are too tight. You cry out for help, but the only one around to hear you is a tiny white dove perched on the window sill.\n\n\nIn response to your cry, the dove transformers into a beautiful cloaked woman. You recognize her as the mysterious woman from the fair, though now her belly is swollen with pregnancy. \"Come Baker's Boy, you must hurry, the wedding is taking place as we speak,\" she says. Lightning bolts fly from her fingertips, shattering the chains.\n\n\n\"But what can I do without the harp? How can I even get into the castle in the first place?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"The castle is expecting food delivered for the wedding,\" she says. \"You can bake a cake and hide inside. The guards will wheel you right up to the chapel.\" What a clever idea. You roll up your sleeves and start to bake.\n\n\nWhen the cake is finished, you hollow it out and climb inside.\n\n\n\"I have a final gift for you,\" the cloaked woman says. She spreads her legs wide and squats down. An egg falls heavily to the floor. \"This egg contains the last of my power. Cracking it shall grant you immense strength.\" Bloody afterbirth trickles down her leg. She begins to fade.\n\n\n\"My dearest Marmalade,\" she says softly. \"How I will miss the sweet taste of your nectar.\" There is a flutter of wings and the woman is gone.\n\n\nSurrounded by confection, you realize you haven't eaten anything in a while and this cake looks almost as tasty as that mushroom back in the forest. Surely a tiny taste won't hurt.", "action_results": [{"action": "Try a tiny bite", "result": "The cake is delicious, perhaps the best you've ever made, but it is too rich for your empty stomach. Your bowels turn, rejecting the sweet frosting. Clench as you might, you cannot prevent the inevitable and your bowels release like a spouting whale. The stench is overwhelming in the confines of the cake. You are both proud and disgusted.\n\n\nArrangements had been made for the thatcher's boys to deliver the cake to the castle. There, a portly guard runs his greasy finger through the frosting to sample the cake. \"What the hell?\" he shouts, spitting out the cake. \"What'd you put in this? It tastes like sewage. Take it away.\"\n\n\nYou and the cake are unceremoniously thrown onto the garbage heap. The foul, garbage-air is refreshing after hotboxing in your own stink.\n\n\nYour arrival has startled a filthy beggar picking through the refuse. He squints at you with one good eye before cracking open a pigeon bone and sucking out the marrow.\n\n\nThe heap offers you a commanding view of the castle. The chapel bells are tolling across the courtyard, but the chapel door is heavily guarded. How will you get in?\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Change clothes with the beggar and sneak in", "result": "The beggar is happy to take your clean clothes in exchange for his rags, even if your pants are a bit crusty. \n\n\nThe guard stops you as you approach the chapel. \"What do we have here? A dirty scrounger at the royal wedding?\" laughs the guard. \"Wait a minute, I recognize you. You're that thrice-damned Baker's Boy!\" he shouts, drawing his sword. \"Wait, no, my mistake. He's a chubby, pimply fella' who smells like onions. You smell like sewage and garbage. Go on inside.\"\n\n\nYou are about to step inside when he grabs your collar. \"I recognize you now. You're One-Eyed Dan. You're that rascal who broke into the smithy and stole the blacksmith's shoes. And then you set fire to the orphanage and raped all those innocent children while they burned alive.\"\n\n\nThe laws of Mystigar take shoe thievery very seriously. The guards seize you, and drag you to the dungeon.\n\n\n--\n\n\nRows of cells line the dungeon walls. They are all empty except for one. In the last cell a diminutive man sits hunched over a pale, eating greedily. He turns to you as the guards march you passed. Excrement stains his face like brown clown makeup. He is clearly mad.\n\n\nThe guards escort you to the torture chamber at the end of the hall for execution, but it seems you will have to wait your turn. \n\n\nA screaming prisoner is strapped upright on a board with a funnel in his mouth. A powerful lodestone hangs before him. The gaoler stands on a stool with his back to you, pouring nails down the funnel. He then pulls the lodestone close to the prisoner's stomach. The iron nails are drawn upwards by the stone's attractive power. The prisoner screams. \n\n\nThe gaoler is none other than Wendell, the Marques's lackey! You must pay him back for what he did to the unicorn.\n\n\nYou slap your apron pocket, breaking the magic egg within. The cool yolk runs down your thigh. A tingle of electric energy races across your skin, standing all of your hairs on end while your scrotum fills with arcane energy. The power is overwhelming. Lightning flies from your fingers, striking the guards. Their armor glows red hot, cooking them alive inside. \n\n\nWendell is no match for your powers. He tries to run but the bolts catch him. His skin sizzles and cracks like a hot dog too long on the fire. You strike him with bolt after bolt until their is nothing left but ash. \n\n\nThe spell fades and your scrotum retreats into your body like a scared snail. You pull the funnel from the prisoner's mouth. \"Thank the gods! I am Sebastian, Prince of Cecum, betrothed of Princess Marmalade,\" he says. \"I know a way into the chapel, release me and together we shall save the Princess.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Free Prince Sebastian", "result": "\"Thank you. I'm not looking forward to using the privy tonight, that's for sure,\" Sebastian says.\n\n\nThe Prince presses on a false stone in the dungeon wall, revealing a hidden passage. \"They brought me in this way. The tunnels are like a maze. Stay close so you don't get lost,\" he says.\n\n\nHe leads you through a tunnel carved in the back of the dungeon. Your path twists and turns through the maze-like tunnels. \"The Princess and I have been promised since birth. When the king passed, I received a letter from the Marques inviting me to the castle to choose wedding invitations, but it was a trap. He had me locked away so I couldn't interfere with his plans.\" \n\n\nYou come to a fork in the tunnel. The sound of distant music fills the left-hand tunnel, a septic odor emanates from the right-hand one. \"Say chap, why exactly do you want to save Princess Marmalade?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "\"Because I love her, and I'm going to marry her!\"", "result": "The right-hand path leads deep below the dungeons. You move cautiously through the darkness with Sebastian following close behind. The tunnel ends abruptly at the edge of a wide chasm and Sebastian maliciously shoves you over the edge.\n\n\nYou land waste deep in the castle septic pit. The chasm is one hundred feet across and hundreds deep. Pipes stick out from the walls at various angels, delivering waste from all over the castle. A thin film of urine and peanuts coat the pit's surface. It smells awful.\n\n\n\"Sorry chap, but that slut Marmalade drips like a sink, and I won't be a cuckold king,\" Sebastian shouts down to you. The echoes of his parting words are interrupted by the pitter-patter of fresh feces falling into the pit.\n\n\nSomething stirs in the depths. The filth bubbles as the segmented body of a giant tapeworm rises before you. \"A thousand yearsss I have waited here for you, baker'sss boy,\" the tapeworm hisses. \"Once I have consumed you, the curssse will be broken and I shall be free of thisss pit.\"\n\n\nThe parasite's square maw distends impossibly wide. The last thing you see is a kernel of corn stuck between its pointed teeth. \n\n\n \n\nYou've Died\n\n\n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "\"I don't know, some chick gave me a magic harp.\"", "result": "You and Sebastian rush up the left-hand tunnel, and soon burst out into the light of the chapel. Princess Marmalade stands upon the altar, her hands and wings tightly bound. \n\n\n\"Jacques Pierre! You have Marmalade's hand,\" shouts Sebastian. \"I will die before that day comes!\" He snatches a decorative sword from the wall and charges the Marques. \n\n\nThe Marques draws his golden sword. \"Then we duel,\" he says.\n\n\nThey rush together and the sound of clashing steel fills the chapel. You untie the Princess while your betters are preoccupied. \"I knew you would save me,\" she cries, throwing her arms around you. \"You're such a good friend.\" \n\n\nSebastian delivers the Marques a fatal blow and then struts up and grabs the Princess about the waist. They kiss furiously, while the Marques bleeds out. When Sebastian finally dislodges his tongue from Marmalades' throat, he slaps her ass and gives you a knowing wink.\n\n\nThey are married immediately and the Princess names you both royal baker and maid of honor.\n\n\n \n\nThe End\n\n\nIf you're a really, really good friend it could eventually turn into something more, right? You're pathetic.\n\n\nYou've found an O. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Screw him, he's your rival", "result": "A faint sound catches your ear. It is the muffled, but unmistakable sound of organ music coming through the walls. There must be a hidden passage. You search the dungeon walls, looking for the source of the sound. The Prince, afraid of losing his only leverage, sings at the top of his lungs.\n\n\n\"There's no room here for you, the Innkeeper said, but I know the Innkeeper's daughter, and there's always room in her bed!\"\n\n\nHis efforts are in vain. Your search uncovers a false stone in the wall, and pressing it reveals a hidden tunnel. You can follow the music all the way to the chapel. Looks like you will not be needing the Prince's help after all.\n\n\n\"Wait! You can't just leave me like this,\" the Prince pleads.\n\n\nHe's right. You casually kick the lodestone to him. Its attractive force tears the nails through his bloated stomach. His corpse reminds you of a blowfish on its period. You race down the tunnel towards the wedding chapel.\n\n\n--\n\n\nA magnificent stained glass window bathes the chapel in rainbow light. Guests fill every pew and more stand in the balcony above. Gifts are piled high on a table in the center of the room. Among them is the gold bow the Marques won at the fair.\n\n\nThe Princess and the Marques stand on an altar with their backs to you. He is about to place a ring on her finger. You shout Marmalade's name and are immediately surrounded by guards. Crossbowmen emerge from the balcony. The organist stops playing. It is an ambush.\n\n\n\"Well well, the guest of honor has finally arrived,\" says the Marques, laughing. He reveals the harp of dreams from beneath his cloak. \"I want to play you a tune our mutual friend, the Sage, taught me.\" He plays the Song of Wishes more deftly than you ever could. Your heart sinks when he reaches the final line:\n\n\n\"Harp of Dreams, punish this knave. Turn the Princess into my slave.\"\n\n\nThe harp shatters and the Princess falls to her knees screaming. When she stands again she has changed; she has lifeless eyes, black eyes, like a doll's eyes. \n\n\n\"Give me a kiss, darling,\" the Marques commands. She gives him a long, passionate kiss. \"Now, kill the baker's boy.\"\n\n\nThe Princess takes flight with a piercing shriek. She circles the chapel once and then dives down and attacks. The guards and guests scatter in fear. You dash under the gift table, narrowly avoiding her wrath. The Princess circles again, building up speed for a second dive. You grab the golden bow, knowing you will only have one shot. You nock an arrow, close your eyes, and draw the bow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Shoot the Princess", "result": "Snap! The string breaks and your arrow falls impotently to the floor. The Marques doubles over with laughter. You have fallen for the same trick twice.\n\n\nThe Princess swoops down and seizes you in a raptorial embrace. Slowly she climbs, struggling to lift your bulk. She will drop you to your death once she gains enough altitude. That magic egg sure would have been handy right about now. There must be another way out. It cannot end like this.\n\n\nTrue love.\n\n\nOf course! The Harps's curse can be broken by true love's kiss. You plant a big wet one on the Princess's pulsating cold soar. She bites through your lip in reciprocation and spits it out to the floor below. Blood fills your mouth.\n\n\nOr not.\n\n\nThe Princess reaches the ceiling and releases her grip...\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died\n\n\n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Shoot the Marques", "result": "The arrow strikes the Marques in the heart. He stumbles once, like a roofied school girl, and then falls from the altar. The spell controlling the Princess is broken with his death. She drops from the sky like a bird striking a plate glass window. \n\n\n\"What have I done!\" she exclaims. \"I have attacked my own subjects whom I am sworn to protect. I am not fit to be Queen, so I must leave Mystigar tonight in penance. You will rule in my stead baker's boy.\"\n\n\n--\n\n\nYour reign is consumed by a single thought: the Baker. He disappeared on the day of the wedding, and was never seen again.\n\n\nYou pour all of the resources of Mystigar into searching for him but the trail is cold. You are unyielding. Bakeries are destroyed, bakers hanged, and ovens outlawed. All other duties are forgotten and the kingdom withers, bankrupted by your single-minded quest.\n\n\nParanoia eats away at you. You know he is out there somewhere, plotting against you. You will find him.\n\n\n \n\nThe End\n\n\nYou really went off the deep end there. Who knew you were so high strung? Better try again, but this time don't leave any loose ends.\n\n\nYou've found a G. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.\n\n\n ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Free the mad man instead", "result": "You open the prisoner's cell. \"Thanks mate,\" the mad man says. He shoves a bone shank between your ribs when your back is turned. \"You have such pretty skin my sweet angel, and plenty of it too. I think I'll sew it into a new raincoat, perhaps a hat and a nice pair of slippers too. But first, I need to finish my lunch.\"\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Use the egg and storm the gates", "result": "You draw the magic egg from your pocket and crack it over your head. Power surges through your limbs. Your manhood swells to thrice its size and curly black hair sprouts from your chest. The guards are no match for your immense strength. You crash through the chapel door in a shower of splinters. \n\n\nA magnificent stained glass window bathes the chapel in rainbow light. Guests fill every pew and more stand in the balcony above. The Princess and the Marques stand on an altar at the head of the chapel with their backs to you. He is about to place a ring on her finger. You shout Marmalade's name and are immediately surrounded by guards. Crossbowmen emerge from the balcony. It is an ambush.\n\n\nThe guards take one look at your pendulous manhood and flee screaming. The Marques, equally impressed, grabs the Princess by her shoulders and throws her through the stained glass window and then runs for the exit. You chase him up a twisting staircase and onto the chapel roof.\n\n\nCornered at the edge of the roof, the cowering Marques cries out for mercy, but you have none. You raise a gargantuan fist and... the power suddenly fades. Your manhood shrivels back to its normal size. The Marques is quick to capitalize. He draws his golden swords and takes the offensive. \"The tables have turned, baker's boy. Too bad you couldn't rise to the occasion,\" he quips. \n\n\nHe drives you back to edge of the roof. Your foot slips and you tumble down the angle of the roof. You catch the gutter, and dangle between the buttresses like the last anal bead. The ground is a long ways below. Your sweaty hand cannot hold on for long. You lose your grip and fall.\n\n\n--\n\n\nThe Marques sheaths his sword and turns away. \"Perhaps I was a bit hasty with the Princess. I can't marry her now if her face is all cut up.\"\n\n\nThe sound of wings fills the air and you rise above the roof, riding on Princess Marmalade's back, triumphantly hold the Harp of Dreams.\n\n\n\"Impossible!\" the Marques shouts in surprise.\n\n\nHarp strings resonate with energy as you play the Song of Wishes. \"Jacques Pierre shall reap what he's sown. Harp of Dreams, turn him to stone!\" you sing.\n\n\nThe Marques tries to run but, but no one can out run magic. The spell catches him at the edge of the roof, where he still stands today, a gargoyle frozen in mid stride. They say you can hear him cry out on stormy nights when the rain runs from his mouth.\n\n\n--\n\n\nYou and the Princess are married at once, and at long last you find yourselves alone in bed. Your stare into her disfigured face, trembling, searching for the right words. She breaks the silence first. \"Say, could you do that thing were your grow huge again?\" she asks. \"Pretty please?\"\n\n\n \n\nThe End\n\n\nBoy is she going to be disappointed. You did well for a mere baker's apprentice, but some of the bad guys got away. \n\n\nYou've found an S. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Stop trying to get me killed!", "result": "You wisely decide not to eat your disguise.\n\n\nArrangements had been made for the thatcher's boys to deliver the cake to the castle. There, a portly guard runs his greasy finger through the frosting to sample the cake. \"Delicious!\" he exclaims. \"Take it to the kitchens at once.\"\n\n\nYou are deposited in the kitchen where you hear a familiar voice: \"Careful with those pastries, boy! Drop one and you'll feel the back of my hand.\" Even though the voice is muffled by the cake, there is no mistaking the Baker. \n\n\nThe urge for revenge is almost as strong as your desire to save the Princess. You fondle the magic egg in your apron pocket.", "action_results": [{"action": "Kill the Baker", "result": "You crack the egg over your head. Power surges through your limbs. Your manhood swells to thrice its size and curly black hair sprouts from your chest and back. You explode from the cake and smash a giant fist into the Baker's face, shattering bone and rupturing white heads. The spit boys and scullery maids run screaming.\n\n\nYou ram the Baker's broken face into the side of the oven again and again, searing his flesh. When there is nothing left but the empty rind, you fold him in half and stuff him into the oven. The magic fades and with it your blood lust. You run for the chapel.\n\n\nA magnificent stained glass window bathes the chapel in rainbow light. Guests fill every pew and more stand in the balcony above. Gifts are piled high on a table in the center of the room. Among them is the opalescent horn of the unicorn.\n\n\nThe Princess and the Marques stand on an altar at the head of the chapel with their backs to you. He is about to place a ring on her finger. You shout Marmalade's name and are immediately surrounded by guards. Crossbowmen emerge from the balcony. It is an ambush.\n\n\n\"Well well, the guest of honor has finally arrived,\" says the Marques, laughing. He reveals the harp of dreams from beneath his cloak. \"Your meddling has gotten stale baker's boy. It ends here.\" He strums the strings and a tremor runs through the hall. The power of the harp should not be taken lightly.\n\n\nThe room shakes violently. Columns crack and the floor twists beneath your feet. The guests panic and stampede for the exit. In the confusion you are able to break free from the guards.\n\n\nThe Marques must be stopped before he brings down the entire chapel. You dash towards the alter but Wendell blocks your way. The stained glass window explodes, showering the hall with colorful razors. You must act quickly.\n\n\nWendell draws his sword. You back pedal, narrowly avoiding his thrusts, until you hit the gift pile and can retreat no more. You desperately grope for a weapon and your hand finds the unicorn horn. You drive the horn upward, penetrating Wendell like a tavern-whore. His expression changes from triumph to bewilderment. The sword falls from his grasp and he collapses. You hear the unicorn's voice whisper \"my spirit will always watch over you.\" \n\n\nThe Marques, sensing defeat, leaps through the window to his steed below. You rush to the Princess and throw your arms around her. \"There is no time!\" she shouts. \"We must retrieve the harp before it brings down the whole castle. Climb on.\" You climb onto her back. She spreads her wings and flies through the window in pursuit.", "action_results": [{"action": "The chase is on", "result": "Flying with the Princess is every bit as thrilling as you had imagined. You cannot conceal your excitement. \"Quit poking me, I'm trying to fly,\" she complains. \n\n\nThe fairgrounds appear below you. They are empty and quiet now. You chase the Marques to the archery grounds. The Princess folds her wings and begins her attack dive. \"Hold on we're-\"\n\n\nA golden arrow sprouts from her throat. The Marques has retrieved his bow and arrows from the tourney and loosed a fateful shaft. The Princess cartwheels uncontrollably and you tumble form the sky.\n\n\nYou barrel into the Marques, breaking your fall. He is knocked out cold. You crawl to the Princess and cradle her lifeless body. Tears stream from you eyes. \n\n\nHow could this happen? Everything has been in vain. She loved you, she needed you, and you failed her. A ragged scream tears from your throat, and then you see the harp. Of course! The power of the harp can revive her. You play like you have never played before. You put everything you have into the song. You reach the last line:\n\n\n\"Powers of magic, hear my cry. Harp of Dreams...\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Don't let the Princess die!", "result": "The Princess is revived by the power of the harp. The harp shatters, its purpose fulfilled. The Marques is quickly apprehended and thrown into the dungeons for treason. \n\n\nYou and the Princess are married at once. Your coronation follows all of the boring traditions and ceremonies like the vigil, the rites, and the human sacrifice.\n\n\nAt long last the moment you have been waiting for arrives; you find yourself alone with the Princess. She sits naked upon the bed, her delicate wings covering everything but her blushing face. Her violet eyes say everything her mouth is afraid to. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Kiss her", "result": "After a brief and dutiful consummation you lie in bed with your arms around the Princess. You tell yourself \"it happens to every man\" but you know it's a lie. \n\n\n\"I can't wait to spend the rest of our lives together, but will you still love me when I'm old?\" The Princess asks.\n\n\n\"Of course,\" you reply.\n\n\n\"Would you still love me if I was fat? Would you love me if I went bald? Would you love me if I was in a wheelchair? Would you still love me if all of my skin fell off and my bones had chickenpox...\"\n\n\nGreat gods, what have you done?\n\n\nThe End\n\n\nSuch womanly nonsense. Quickly, go back and tickle her udders!\n\n\nYou've found a D. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Tickle her udders", "result": "The sun is high in the sky when you awake. The Princess still sleeps beside you amidst the satin sheets, bowlegged with a fresh black eye purpling her pretty features. You rise and fill the basin on your nightstand and wash the urine from your hair. What a night! A Princess for your first time, where do you go from here?\n\n\nAll hail the king of Mystigar!\n\n\nCongratulations! You win! My favorite part was when you rode the minotaur-hydra. What was yours? \n\n\nYou've found a U. Can you solve the Legendary Riddle: \"What did the baker's boy give the Princess on their wedding night?\"", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Kiss the Marques good bye!", "result": "The harp transforms into a wickedly twisted knife; its power fills you with unimaginable strength. \n\n\nWith one hand you lift the broken Marques by his blonde locks. His eyes are filled with fear. He whispers \"please,\" but there is no mercy left in your heart. You drive the blade into his eye socket so hard the hilt breaks his nose and the tip protrudes from the back of his skull. You hurl his dead body into the gutter where the rats and the hobos can take turns defiling it.\n\n\n--\n\n\nThe rain pours down as you turn to take one last look at the castle. The people of Mystigar had begged you to stay and be their king, but only sorrow remains for you there. With a heavy heart you leave Mystigar behind and head into the unknown. Someday, you will have your own kingdom, your own queen. But that is another story...\n\n\n \n\nThe End?\n\n\nKilling the Marques won't bring Princess Marmalade back, but it sure felt good, didn't it?\n\n\nYou've found an H. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Send me a delicious pie!", "result": "The pie is delicious.\n\n\n \n\nThe End\n\n\nThere is nothing like a freshly baked pie.\n\n\nYou've found a T. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.", "action_results": []}, null]}]}, {"action": "Stay hidden and wait for the ceremony", "result": "Inside the cake is dark, and stiflingly hot. The thick confection muffles all sound from the outside world. It only takes a few minutes for you to fall asleep. \n\n\nThe wedding ceremony concludes and the guests gather around the Marques and his crying bride. He draws his golden sword and slices the cake into pieces with a flurry of swordsmanship. The guests gorge themselves, remarking on the cake's delicious filling. Even the Princess smiles as she takes a bite. \"This is the best cake I've ever had,\" she says.\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "It's your, um you know, manhood...", "result": "\"I don't understand,\" the lion says.\n\n\nYou know, the ole sword and stones. Your little wizard. Your widow-splitter. Ham-weasel. Stink-diver. Turkey neck?\n\n\n\"Enough! You are not worthy, so you must perish,\" roars the lion. You try to run, but you are a fat little apprentice boy and he's a one hundred foot magic lion.\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Follow the Crow", "result": "The crow leads you to a land of mountains and fire. A single round hill lies amongst the jagged peaks. Thousands of clamorous birds flock around its crown. It is to there that you must climb. The crow leaves you to join the flock.\n\n\nWhen you finally crest the hill you find it is not a hill at all. You have mounted the belly of an enormous cyclops. Her horned head towers five hundred feet above you, where the birds nest as if she was a seaside cliff. They take turns diving down into the crevices of her nether regions to fill their gullet before returning to feed their young. Her ancient breasts roll listlessly from her belly, resting on the ground one thousand feet below. \n\n\n\"What gift have you brought me in exchange for my knowledge?\" the cyclops booms.\n\n\nNo one told you anything about a gift. You have nothing with you except your clothes and the harp. The harp! What a brilliant idea you could serenade her. Then again, honesty is the best policy.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "I have brought you the gift of music", "result": "You clear your throat and strum the harp to find the key.\n\n\n\"Oh I know the innkeeper's daughter...\" \n\n\nYour song is interrupted by a tremor running through the Cyclops's gut. Geysers of sulfur erupt from beneath her prodigious bulk, scattering the flock of screaming birds.\n\n\n\"Enough!\" the cyclops thunders. \"You are not worthy of my knowledge!\"\n\n\nHer belly fat ripples and ungulates, tossing you about like waves on the ocean. You lose your footing and slide down the curvature of her belly towards certain death. At the last moment you grab hold of a pubic hair as thick as a ship's cable, but it is slick with sweat. Her huge crevice gapes open below you, waiting to swallow you whole. The hair slides from your hand and you fall into the darkness.\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}, {"action": "I have no gift", "result": "\"Nothing!\" Booms the cyclops. She fixes her gaze on you, but her eye drifts lazily down and to the left. \"Then you must do something for me.\" Several birds separate from the flock carrying a fluffy pink dress...\n\n\n--\n\n\n\"Dance prettier! 1 2 3, 1 2 3, and turn. Yes!\" the cyclops giggles. Her clapping hands sound like thunder. \"Now tell me who's a precious little baker's girl? Uh oh, I see something poking out from under that skirt.\"\n\n\nEnough is enough. You stop dancing and cross your arms defiantly. It's time you learned the song.\n\n\n\"Very well.\"\n\n\nOne by one screeching birds descend from the flock. They peck and claw at the cyclops's nipple, tearing it to bloody ribbons. Her single eye rolls back in her head as a quiver of ecstasy runs through her flesh. The birds draw an ancient scroll from the ruin of her nipple. The scroll is made from tanned griffin foreskin and covered in mysterious runes. A song fills your mind as you read it. \n\n\n\"Now you know the Song of Wishes. The song can only be sung once, so sing it wisely, my pretty girl.\" A sudden wave of exhaustion overcomes you. You curl up in the cyclops's naval and fall asleep.\n\n\nYou awake alone, on the road just outside of town.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Follow the Frog", "result": "For a day and a night you follow the frog. At long last you come to the edge of a vast morass. The water is filled with a churning mass of thick, red eels. This is the swamp of the ancient sage.\n\n\nYou wade for miles, waste deep in eels, before reaching a reed hut hidden in the mist. After a prolonged farewell, the frog dives beneath the eels and disappears. You timidly knock on the hut door. \"Come in!\" comes the reply from within.\n\n\nThe sage sits in the center of the hut, her prodigious bulk resting on a nest of reeds. Her skin is blue and hairless. A pair of tiny flippers twitch with delight as dragonfly servants drop spotted mushrooms down her enormous gullet. An endless stream of red eels pours from her backside, falling through a hole in the floor, to the swamp below. \n\n\n\"I have been expecting you, baker's boy,\" she says. \"You have come to learn the Song of Wishes. I will teach it to you in exchange for a kiss.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "No thank you", "result": "You politely decline. The sage makes a face of such hideous dejection you almost feel sorry. Almost. \"Very well. Give me the harp and I shall teach you the song.\" \n\n\nHer fins move deftly along the strings as she plays. The song is oddly soothing until she reaches the final line. \"This song was merely a ploy, to receive a kiss from the tender baker's boy.\"\n\n\nA strange desire takes hold of you. You're lips are drawn to her slimy skin. \"I will have my kiss one way or another, baker's boy,\" she laughs.\n\n\nYou kiss her turgid lips, her smooth scalp, the dark place beneath her flippers. Eels slither down your throat as you give her the most sensual kiss of all. If you still had a gag reflex, you might have been saved. Instead, the eels fill your lungs and you slip into darkness.\n\n\n\"Kissy kissy!\" squeals the sage.\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Kiss the sage", "result": "You close your eyes and plant an openmouthed kiss on her turgid lips. Her tongue tastes like violation. \"Mmmm choke me,\" coos the sage. It takes two hands to squeeze her blubbery throat. \"Ahhh, now I will teach you the song you desire.\"\n\n\n\"Slaves! bring me the box,\" she shouts. A dragonfly delivers her a small, intricately carved box. She raises the lid and a tiny beetle flies out. It lands on your shoulder and crawls into your ear. You feel a wriggle, a pinch, and then an electric shock. A song grows in your mind like the threads of a chrysalis.\n\n\n\"Now you know the Song of Dreams, but be warned, the song can only be sung once, so sing it wisely. And don't worry about the beetle, he'll find his way out eventually,\" says the sage. \"The path north of this hut leads back to town. Now, they say a parting kiss is sweetest.\"\n\n\nYou quickly thank the sage and head down the path before she can kiss you again.", "action_results": [null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Take the bridge", "result": "The castle door swings open before you can knock.\n\n\nAn old woman greets you. Her skin is wrinkled like that of a dried apple. Her curled blue hair is tucked up under a bonnet, and her time-ravaged breasts are tucked into the belt of a robe. She squints at you through thick spectacles. \"Oh a visitor! How exciting. Come in. Come in,\" she says. \"You smell like a centaur's stable. I never cared for centaurs. Lying sluts.\"\n\n\nInside the castle is unremarkable, except for the pervasive old person smell and the abundance of decorative plates. You feel none of the evil presence you experienced before.\n\n\n\"You youngsters are always in such a rush. I insist you stay and rest for the night. It gets so lonely here. I would appreciate the company. Would you care to join me for dinner before turning in?\"\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Join her for dinner", "result": "A long table spread with wondrous food and drink fills the dining room. The old woman takes a seat at the head of the table, and you saddle up at the far end, fill your goblet with wine, and slice off a thick piece of foot-meat from the nearest roast. \n\n\n\"Everyone, I would like you to meet our guest, the Baker's Boy,\" the old woman says. You look around, but the remaining seats are all empty. \"Gerald, sit up straight. Isabelle dear, don't smell your fingers at the table. Its rude,\" she says to no one. \"I'm sorry. Ghosts have the worst table manners. Tell me, what are you doing way out here?\"\n\n\nYou excitedly tell her and the ghosts all about your adventures so far. \n\n\n\"Oh, my poor child,\" the old woman says. \"That strumpet has already forgotten all about you.\" She draws a crystal ball from beneath the table and waves her hand over it. A picture forms inside. You see the Princess in bed with the Marques and the Baker. Impossible! She would never... Would she?\n\n\n\"I've always wanted a son like you. Why don't you forget about that tart Marmalade and stay here with me?\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay and be her son", "result": "\"You are mine now,\" the old woman says.\n\n\nYour body starts to tingle and your vision changes. The room grows darker and one by one the ghosts come in to view. Isabelle waves her sticky fingers at you in greeting. Hundreds of ghosts fill the hall, each a weary traveler like yourself.\n\n\nYou can see the old woman's true form now. She is a benevolent demon with blue skin and four arms. \"Come feed, my children,\" she beckons, opening her robe and revealing a dozen swollen teats. You nestle in beside Gerald and fill yourself with mother's love.\n\n\nYou are home.\n\n\n \n\nThe End\n\n\nThe bottled stuff just doesn't compare to the real thing.\n\n\nYou've found an I. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Decline her offer", "result": "\"How dare you refuse me!\" the old woman screams.\n\n\nHer skin sloughs away revealing a matte of dirty black fur, a long naked tail, and a pointed snout with curving incisors. Her true form is that of a rat-succubus which feeds on the souls of lost travelers. Black blood pours from his beady, red eyes. \"I will have you one way or another!\"\n\n\nYou run from the table, one step ahead of the demon. Angry ghosts follow her like wisps of smoke. She is almost upon you when you step out onto the bridge and she slams into a magical barrier like a bird hitting a picture window. Ghosts and demons are unable to leave the castle.\n\n\nThe demon's frustration is palpable as she paces the barrier, staring at you and salivating. She hurls herself against it repeatedly, checking it for weaknesses. You hurriedly resume your journey before she can break through.\n\n\n--\n\n\nThe forest path gradually becomes a lane, and the lane becomes a road. Eventually, it leads you to your destination. A stone pillar rises phallicly from the Crossroads, marking the spot were a dozen paths meet like spokes on a wheel. Three animals step from behind the pillar: a frog, a raven, and a fox. \n\n\n\"Welcome your majesty,\" says the fox.\n\n\n\"We are the spirit guides,\" says the frog.\n\n\n\"We have waited long for you,\" says the crow. \n\n\nYou can tell this is going to get annoying really quickly.\n\n\n\"I am the regrets of man,\" says the frog.\n\n\n\"And I am the sorrows of man,\" says the raven.\n\n\n\"And I am the wiles of man,\" says the fox.\n\n\nYou have no idea what they're talking about. All you care about is which one can lead you to the sage.\n\n\n\"Maybe all of us\" says the crow.\n\n\n\"Maybe none of us,\" says the frog.\n\n\n\"You'll have to trust your heart,\" says the fox.", "action_results": [null, null, null]}]}, {"action": "Go to bed early", "result": "The old woman leads you to a small tower bedroom, helps you out of your apron, and tucks you into bed.\n\n\nThere is a strange black candle on your nightstand. \"The castle can be a spooky place at night,\" the old woman says. \"This candle will keep the ghosts away, but be careful it doesn't go out.\"\n\n\nShe kisses you on the forehead and takes her leave. No sooner has she closed the door, than you hear the ghosts. Terrifying wailing and moaning fill the hall outside your room. There must be hundreds haunting the castle. \n\n\nIt is impossible to sleep with a ghost orgy going on in the next room, so you slip under the covers for some fun of your own. You are so deep in your geriatric fantasies, that you fail to notice a small draft extinguish the candle.\n\n\nThe bedroom door bursts open. You throw off the covers expecting a ghost, but it is only the kind old woman. \"I warned you not to let it go out,\" she cackles. Her mouth opens wide, and then wider, and wider still, like a snake deep-throating a rat. Smoke like apparitions crawl from her gullet and float towards you. They envelop you and drag you towards her waiting jaws...\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Ask about unicorn blood", "result": "\"Gross! I can't believe you drank that!\" laughs the centaur. \"Classic Unicorn. A joker until the end. That reminds me of the time he and I snuck into the waterfall and stole the mermaids' Swallow Stone. We said we wouldn't give it back until they had each... well this isn't a story to tell in front of my daughter. You should probably go brush your teeth. Any other questions?\"", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "I said give me more ale!", "result": "You awaken in a pool of vomit on the floor of a dark cave. Your head hurts so badly that even the faint light is unbearable. Where are you? What did you do last night? Why is it so cold?\n\n\nYou search yourself and your surroundings for clues. You find a severed horse leg tied around your neck, your apron pocket is stuffed with birdseed, your pants are missing and you might be wearing lipstick, but you can't be sure. If you ever find your way out of this cave you're going to find that dwarf and shake her hand, she makes damn good beer.\n\n\nYour thoughts are interrupted by a voice echoing from the far reaches of the cave: \"Finger puppets. Finger puppets.\" Although it is faint, it is clearly not human.\n\n\n\"Finger puppets. Finger puppets!\"\n\n\nThe voice grows louder. Something is coming and you need to escape. \n\n\n\"Finger puppets!\"\n\n\nIn the distance you can see a dim light. \n\n\n\"Finger puppets!\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Run for the light", "result": "The light grows as you run towards it. Behind you the shouts have become a frantic wale; \"Finger puppets! Finger puppets!\" It is not just a light at the end of the tunnel, it's a hole! You can see the sky beyond, but the voice is right behind you now. \n\n\nYou leap for the opening, but it is too small, and you get stuck halfway through. Something grabs you. You kick and struggle but you feel yourself slipping backwards...\n\n\n\"FINGER PUPPETS!\"\n\n\nThe ground gives way beneath you and you tumble out into the open sky. You land with a splash in a bog. High above, a giant hand retracts into the gaping cave mouth, holding the severed horse leg.\n\n\nThe world around you is not the one you left. You are at the base of a mountain surrounded by an endless jungle. Bone spires reach thousands of feet into a blood red sky. You have come to the land of dragons. Just how much did you drink last night?\n\n\n \n\nThe End\n\n\nI'm sorry, did you want to battle dragons? When I was a kid I wanted a puppy, but I didn't get it. Life is disappointment. Learn to handle your ale.\n\n\nYou've found an H. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stand and fight", "result": "Bravely you brandish the severed horse leg. \"Finger puppets!\" The voice is so close now that you can hear the shuffling of giant feet. A shadow falls across you...\n\n\nA hideous giant stands in the mouth of the tunnel. Its shrunken, rotting, head scrapes the ceiling high above you. Its immense belly drags along the floor between his legs like a field plow. Most terrifying of all, a corpse covers each of its grotesquely long fingers; every finger but one. The corpse arms dances about as it reaches for you...\n\n\n\"FINGER PUPPETS!\"\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, null, {"action": "Steal a pie", "result": "The pie is delicious.", "action_results": [null, null, {"action": "Steal another pie", "result": "You grab a particularly delicious looking pie. Your anus puckers with anticipation as you bite through the flaky crust. The pie is delicious. You devour it greedily and the warm ambergris filling drips down your chin. But during your binge, you fail to notice the pie is cursed.\n\n\nYour bare toes grow into long, twisted roots. Leaves and branches sprout from your head, spiraling skyward. Your skin becomes hard and gnarled. You are a mighty beech tree.\n\n\nFor three hundred years you tower above the fair grounds. Each day, dirty peasant children play brown-fingers amongst your branches, and at night the dryads water your thirsty roots.\n\n\nOne morning, a mighty wizards arrives. He measures your circumference and nods approvingly. \"You should have quit while you were ahead, you greedy little shit.\" He draws a saw from his sleeve and begins to cut.\n\n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}]}]}, {"action": "Tickle her udder", "result": "The cow is not amused. The last thing you ever see is cloven hoof flying towards your face with surprising speed. Bessa eventually finds your broken body sprawled in a heap of cow dung. Never tickle the udder.\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died...\n\n\nHold on! Wait a minute. Mystigar is a dangerous place. You need to be more careful. You can't go around grabbing whatever you please. This is your only warning. Now, go be a good boy and milk the cow.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Screw this, go to the fair", "result": "Screw the Milkman and screw the Baker! It's the day of the fair. You have a copper in your pocket, and you're going to enjoy yourself! You head off down the street with a jump in your step.\n\n\nMain Street is unusually crowded this morning. It seems you were not the only one who got an early start. You push your way into the throng and fall in step behind three farmers, who appear well past drunk despite the hour. They sing ribald songs like \"Two Old Dogs\" and \"The Wobbly Widow\" as they stumble down the street together. \n\n\nYou are about to join in on the chorus of \"The Innkeeper's Daughter\" when a sign catches your eye. It reads: \"The Broken Bodice.\" A woman with a generous supply of cleavage calls to you from the doorway. \"Hey there baker's boy, got time for a tumble?\" ", "action_results": [{"action": "Go to the brothel", "result": "The inside of The Broken Bodice is dim and moist. The decor is a garish mixture of red velvet, gold tassels, and over sized pillows. An overwhelming aura of perfume chokes your nostrils, but it cannot cover the stench of wet crackers. Beautiful women lounge about the room in various stages of undress, doting on eager patrons. Most of the patrons are wealthy old men, some so ancient they probably jizz dust. \n\n\nThe woman with the rolling hills stuffed into her corset is the madame of this fine establishment. \"Oooh I bet this is your first time\" she coos. \"Leave it to my girls to make a man of a baker's boy.\"\n\n\nYou hand her your copper and ask for one of the pretty girls. She tucks the penny into her cleavage and scoffs. \"A copper ain't gonna buy you no princess, but I think we can find some dough for you to prick.\" ", "action_results": [{"action": "Sleep with Grizzela", "result": "The madame escorts you to a dark room in the farthest recesses of the brothel. \"Good luck\" she says, closing the door behind you. You hear a bolt slam down.\n\n\nA baritone voice calls to you from the shadows, \"Ooo I love me a young one.\"\n\n\nA light stubble covers Grizzela's square jaw, and a velvet scarf hides the lump in 'her' neck. \"Don't be scared sugar. I'm gonna show you things you've only dreamed of.\"\n\n\nHer embrace is like iron. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Tickle her udder", "result": "You grab something that looks like an udder and tug with all your might. Grizzela's bald spot glows bright red as she lets out a guttural moan. Your efforts are rewarded by a serving of heavy cream.\n\n\nShe collapses on the straw, gasping for breath. In her fifty-five years as a whore no one has ever given her so much pleasure. \n\n\nWhen the madame finds out what you've done, she hands you a bag of silver and insists that you work for her. You try to decline, but Grizzela's iron grip brooks no arguments. It's not the life you imagined, but the money is good. Men travel from the far corners of the kingdom to lie with the supple Baker's Boy.\n\n\n \n\nThe End\n\n\nThis is not what I had in mind. When I said you were destined to be a king, I didn't mean king of the whores. Perhaps you should try again...\n\n\nYou've found a U. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Let her try something called the \"Iron Unicorn\"", "result": "With trepid anticipation you give yourself up to her. At first the iron is cold, and the leather chafes your skin, but soon you are overcome with unbridled pleasure. You cry out in delight, but the ecstasy of your first prostate orgasm is cut short by an awful tearing sound.\n\n\n\"Not again,\" Grizella says in despair, \"I just can't stand the sight of so much blood.\"\n\n\n \n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Sleep with Satin Jane", "result": "The madame escorts you to a dark room filled with scented candles. \"Have fun,\" she says before closing the door.\n\n\nYou find Satin Jane laying seductively on a straw mattress, wrapped in a red blanket. Her skin is like the palest milk and her hair is a brilliant cinnamon. She spreads her chalk white legs revealing that the rushes match the tapestries. Her beautifully wide face spreads in a gap tooth smile. The Princess and Bessa are forgotten. You burry your face in her pillowy breasts and knead her like the bread dough. \n\n\nThree minutes later you're back on the street, grinning like a fool. Huzzah! A copper well spent. \n\n\nYou step into an alley to relieve yourself, but a horrible burning sensation tears across your shriveled member. Black spots spread from your crotch and crawl up your chest. The pain is blinding and you collapse into the filthy gutter. If only you had put a helm on your soldier!\n\n\nYou've Died", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Sleep with Bessa", "result": "You excitedly follow her down the back hall and out into the yard behind the building. Could it really be Bessa, the Milkman's daughter? The same Bessa you have spent years drooling over at the market each morning? Bessa with the thunderous skin bags, so wondrous the gods cried they day they made them?\n\n\n\"No refunds,\" the Madame says as she closes the door and locks it behind you.\n\n\nThere, chained in the middle of the yard, stands Bessa. This Bessa is not the Milkman's daughter, but an old she goat who looks a little worse for ware. The goat wiggles her backside at you and flexes her mutton-button flirtatiously. You are tempted, but no. There is a line even you will not cross.\n\n\nThat dirty old swamp-donkey swindled you out of your copper, but you have an idea to pay the Madame back. A talented goat like this is worth a pretty penny and you know just where to sell her. You untie Bessa and lead her through the gate and out of the yard. \n\n\n--\n\n\nThe wharf is bustling with crusty old sailors loading cargo onto a galley. Bessa bleats to the men and excitedly dribbles a few drops of milk. You find the ship's steward and offer to sell him the goat. \"Isn't she a site t' raise your mizzenmast,\" he says. \"She'll keep the men happy on a long voyage. I'll give ya one copper for her.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Take the copper and go to the fair", "result": "The fair is everything you had hoped. Highborn ladies and goodly knights recite poetry outside of colorful silk pavilions. Naked urchins chase each other about, playing tag and brown-fingers, while drunken minstrels belt green sleeves at the top of their lungs.\n\n\nVendors call their wares from various carts and stands. A fat pastry chef with a pox-marked face yells \"Hot pies! Two coppers!\" while a dwarf cries her ale. You are hungry, but cannot afford a pie. The dwarf, however, will let you drink yourself stupid for a copper. \n\n\nYou spy the princess in the royal box above the tourney field. She is framed by a pair of guards who look more jailor than escorts. For one moment your eyes meet and she smiles. \n\n\nBelow her a herald speaks. \"Gather all yee who would compete in the tourney of archery\" he proclaims. \"To the winner shall be awarded a golden bow and the hand of the beautiful Princess Marmalade. Any man of Mystigar may enter for a single copper.\"\n\n\nA copper for a chance to marry the princess? What luck!", "action_results": [null, null, null]}, {"action": "Demand more money", "result": "\"Ya drive a hard bargain, but a gal like that is worth more'n a copper. Climb aboard and I'll fetch ya a silver piece,\" the Steward says. You turn to mount the gangplank when something heavy strikes the back of your head and the world goes dark.\n\n\n--\n\n\nYou awaken in the depths of the galley, far out to sea. You are chained to an oar between two large, swarthy galley slaves. They have been here a long time. \"Middle seat is bad luck, little boy. You row twice as much,\" the slave to your left laughs in broken English. The slave to you right smiles and spits in your hair. Drums pound and you begin to row.\n\n\nAll day you pull the galley oar without rest, and all night you row your bench mates while they take turns spitting on you. In the brief moments before dawn when you are allowed to sleep, you dream of storms and shipwrecks. \n\n\n \n\nThe End\n\n\nIt seems it is the Steward who drives a hard bargain. Throw your back into it, land lubber, or you'll end up with the goat.\n\n\nYou've found an S. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.", "action_results": []}]}]}, null]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story67.json b/data/scraper/stories/story67.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6fd84d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story67.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=52499", "context": "", "first_story_block": " The Elken\u2019s massive hoof slams into the snow-coated ground. The tired beast lets out a massive snort. You lean forward in the saddle and scratch just behind its antlers.\n\n\n \u201cGood beast,\u201d you murmur. You give it a kiss, right in its furry mane. \u201cNot too further boy, promise.\u201d\n\n\n The beast comes to a stop. It stands on the edge of the snowy, switchback trail that you\u2019d been following for weeks. Beyond mountain, lies nothing but thick, snow-covered forest. You let out a sigh of relief. You\u2019ve found the spring hunting grounds.\n\n\n You\u2019ve ridden ahead of the rest of the tribe, searching for this very forest. While they make the difficult trek over the mountain (exacerbated by the presence of women, children, and the elderly), you\u2019ve ridden ahead in search for a camp sight for the tribe.\n\n\n You drive your heels into its sides, and the beast begins to carefully plod down the mountainside. It stops only once, to leave a steaming pile of manure in the snow.\n\n\n You wince as you hop out of the saddle, and the drop to the ground sends a jolt through your body. Taking a moment, you briefly insure that your spear and satchel of provisions are still on your back. Satisfied, you drop the reigns over the Elken\u2019s head, and lead him into the forest\u2026\n\n\n***\n\n\n The clearing is in the same spot it's in every year. You know from experience that it can easily house the entire tribe and their huts; the Gods certainly know that this unusually harsh winter has not grown the tribe.\n\n\n It takes a hours to find dry wood for the signal pyre. Eventually, you assemble a pyramid of dead wood and dry brush and set it ablaze with your flint and knife. The flames lick greedily at the cold winter air, and a thick, black plume of smoke reaches up in to the sky.", "action_results": [{"action": "The tribe arrives", "result": " On the fifth day, the tribe arrives. Being the advance scout, you have the honour of setting your tent up first. You unrolled the furs that you stored on the Elken\u2019s back, and strung them over a framework of thick branches. The tent will be able to house five or six of your tribe, easily. You leave a hole at the top to let the smoke from the life-saving fire out.\n\n\n You\u2019re standing in the middle of the clearing, cleaning the Elken with a coarse horsehair brush when the rest of your tribe approaches.\n\n\n Some are walking, some are riding Elken. Mothers clutch their babes to their breasts, while fathers look cautiously to the woods; Fell Bears and wolf-packs have been known to hunt these woods. Disturbingly, gangs of legionnaires have also been stalking the woods. Those taken are presumably fed to whatever foreign gods lord over the Marble City.\n\n\n Caelan, the most elderly man of the tribe, and the chieftain since before you were born, spots you immediately. A youthful grin splits open his aged face. He shivers in the cold, and lets out a cloud of smoke from his mouth, which rapidly dissipates in the frigid winter air. The old man wraps his fur cloak around him.\n\n\n \u201cYou\u2019ve done well by the tribe,\u201d he says, as he approaches, \u201cYour father would be proud.\u201d\n\n\n You dip your head in gratitude.\n\n\n He presses his middle, index, and ring fingers into your forehead. \u201cI release you from your duties as Torchbearer.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cIt\u2019s good to see you, Caelan.\u201d you say as you press your forehead into his \u2014 a salute as old as time.\n\n\n \u201cYou as well, my boy.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cHow was the journey?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cIt was hard. The old paths were snowier than usual, there were some who thought you\u2019d died, and we wouldn\u2019t have a camp-sight to come to.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cStill alive,\u201d you say with a smile.\n\n\n \u201cAnd I\u2019m glad to see it. Still, I shouldn\u2019t complain too much about the journey. We only lost one, this year.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWho was that?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWaiola. Tacitus\u2019 newborn daughter. The cold was too much for her.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThat\u2019s a shame. His first child, yeah?\u201d\n\n\n He nods, and gives you a wan smile. \u201cHe\u2019s been taking it hard. When you see him around, be kind to him and his wife.\u201d\n\n\n You fall silent for a moment. Before you can speak, another approaches. Wrapped in furs with a bow strung across her back. She\u2019s missing her left ear, and there are scars running from the tips of her mouth up her cheek by a few inches. Even still, she\u2019s wearing a broad smile across her face.\n\n\n \u201cYou\u2019re the Torchbearer?\u201d she asks jovially.\n\n\n You glance at Caelan in confusion.\n\n\n \u201cThis is Enya. She\u2019s a tribe-less we picked up on the journey; didn\u2019t feel right to abandon her.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cIt wouldn\u2019t have been,\u201d you agree, before turning back to Enya and extending your hand. She takes it; her grip is firm.\n\n\n She purses her lips and nods as you shake hands. \u201cI\u2019m glad you feel that way.\u201d\n\n\n You snort.\n\n\n \u201cI\u2019m fucking tired,\u201d Caelan says frankly, \u201cwe should see to setting up those tents.\u201d\n\n\n And so you do, for the rest of the day. All of the tribe works together erecting the massive tents that will be their home for the coming months. Thick frameworks are nailed in place, and cured hides are set on the floor so as to avoid sleeping on the snow. Furs are strung from the oak frameworks to trap in heat and act as walls. Firepits in the centres are also constructed, for cooking and boiling water. You work with remarkable efficiency; at the end of the day, your campground resembles a tiny, bustling village.", "action_results": [{"action": "A morning hunt", "result": " It\u2019s before dawn. Tired of the rations brought by the tribe, you\u2019ve decided to bring down the first hunt of the season. You grab your bow, arrows, spear, and satchel, and step outside the warmth and pressed-together bodies of the communal tent.\n\n\n You see Enya outside the tent. She\u2019s sitting cross-legged on a large rock, scraping a piece of flint over a bone knife.\n\n\n \u201cMorning,\u201d you say. You eye her with a slight amount of caution.\n\n\n She returns the greeting, not looking up from the knife.\n\n\n \u201cPlanning on going out for a hunt?\u201d you ask.\n\n\n \u201cAye. Gonna bring down the first buck of the season, I\u2019d reckon.\u201d\n\n\n You raise your eyebrows. \u201cI think you should reckon something else, because I\u2019m about to bring down the first buck of the season.\u201d\n\n\n She snorts, and stands up. \u201cSounds like we have a competition on our hands, then.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Hunt alone", "result": " \u201cAnd a one-sided competition, at that,\u201d you say with a sneer as you lift your weapons off the ground and set off into the forest. You privately savour the look of frustration on the newcomer\u2019s face as you stalk off into the woods.\n\n\n All thoughts of competition are lost once you enter the woods, however. You become one with the forest, once more; a spectre, silently moving over roots, branches and patches of grass. A finder of secret paths and animal tracks.\n\n\n Perhaps you\u2019re there for minutes. Perhaps you\u2019re there for hours, days, or weeks. Time is ephemeral and meaningless when you\u2019re in the forest. Soon, you find a handsome buck; skittish, along with all of its kind.\n\n\n Over hours, you learn the animal\u2019s personality. He\u2019s cautious and smart, and will be a challenge to bring down. You don\u2019t even knock an arrow until your second encounter with him. Finally, on the fourth meeting, you manage to creep up on him unawares.\n\n\n You see his hot breath evaporating in the winter air. You become aware of his place relative to yours on the food chain. You are hunter, and he is prey; this is the way things ought to be.\n\n\n You let go of the bowstring.\n\n\n The arrow flies true, and the bolt tears right through the deer\u2019s vitals. It stumbles for a few paces, before falling face-first into the snow. A crimson puddle seeps out from under him as he breathes his last.\n\n\n You feel a twinge of guilt as you approach him. You slit the deer\u2019s throat for good measure, causing it to leak even more blood out onto the snow. You tie a thick rope around its neck and antlers, and then begin the difficult task of dragging it back to camp\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Return to camp", "result": " You smell smoke long before you reach the camp. Without thinking of it, you drop the deer in the snow; if this is a false alarm, you can come back for it later. Then, you sprint off towards the camp.\n\n\n Your intuition is correct. The camp is in ruins. Three out of the four communal tents have been razed to the ground, and the fourth is smouldering. Bodies litter the ground; killed indiscriminately. Women, children, infants, and a few men all lie in puddles of their own blood.\n\n\n You see Tacitus lying spread-eagled in the snow. It would appear someone has taken pity on his recent misfortunes, and has taken it upon themselves to give him a bright-red smile, just below the chin.\n\n\n Without thinking, you draw your bow and loose an arrow. The arrow embeds itself in the tower-shield of a legionnaire.\n\n\n He shouts something in a language unbeknownst to you, summoning three of his comrades out from the burning tent; one is dragging a half-naked woman along with him.\n\n\n He draws his shortsword and begins to charge towards you. You drop your bow in the sand, and withdraw your spear.\n\n\n Your first thrust is deflected by the shortsword; he retaliates by pushing forward with his oversized shield, sending you scrambling through the snow. You narrowly dodge an overhead swipe from his blade.\n\n\n Seizing an apparent opportunity, you leap to the left, and stab wildly at him with your spear; the blow strikes true, but your stone spear tip uselessly slides off his plated chest armour. You look on his face and see a cruel sneer.\n\n\n With breathtaking speed, he dashes forward and kicks you square in the chest. The blow sends you reeling, and knocks the air clean out of your lungs. You try to regain your footing as he drops his shield and charges at you.\n\n\n The two of you tumble to the snow. You fling your spear aside as you fall. He grabs your neck in one of his gauntleted hands, and begins to crush your throat in an iron grip.\n\n\n Panic grips your world as you frantically look around for options. Your hand closes around your hunting knife. As black spots dance across your vision, you notice something; his armour only extends halfway up his arm, and the rest is covered merely by fur. You seize the initiative and shove the dagger into his exposed forearm. He curses as blood gushes out from the wound, and releases your neck.\n\n\n You greedily inhale as much air as you can. The legionnaire punches you in the face, and his metal knuckles easily break your nose. Blood pours down your face and into your mouth. He punches you again, knocking a tooth down your mouth.\n\n\n Time slows to a halt. His fists glance off your face, mangling it into a bloody ruin. You see your own clouds of hot breath seeping out into the air like a gushing wound. The legionnaires eyes narrow inside his helmet, and a cruel smile splits his face from end to end.\n\n\n Before you\u2019re submerged in darkness, he speaks two words in your language:\n\n\n \u201cElf scum.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Taken as a slave", "result": " You can\u2019t stop throwing up. Even the nutrition-less gruel they serve the slaves is too much for you to handle. As the procession of soldiers and slaves travels South, you leave pools of vomit as a trail.\n\n\n The conditions are harsh. Every day at dawn, you\u2019re loaded into a wagon with a few dozen other slaves. You ride this way for fourteen hours, before a guard distributes furs to wrap yourselves in for the night. You\u2019re given six hours to sleep. When you\u2019re woken, you are let out to relieve yourself and collect water for an hour; then, it\u2019s back to the cart.\n\n\n This is exacerbated by the fact that you are having a hard time remembering your own name. There are other elves on the cart, some of whom you feel like you should recognize; but you find yourself unable to respond to their feeble attempts at conversation. Nothing more than a mewl escapes. You feel heavy and trapped in your own body.\n\n\n On the fourth day of your imprisonment, a legionnaire takes notice and notifies the Centurion. You dimly remember him as the man who broke your head open and let your memories spill out.\n\n\n He approaches. This time, his helmet\u2019s off. If you squint against the painful light, you can see his square jaw, his scowling features, and the scar running the length of his right cheek.\n\n\n \u201cWalk, can this one?\u201d his mastery of your tongue leaves something to be desired.\n\n\n You finish vomiting, and wipe your cheeks. You stagger backwards, and shake your head. He looks disgusted. You barely have time to flinch before he kicks you in the chest, bowling you over in the snow.\n\n\n \u201cGet up.\u201d\n\n\n You comply. He shoves you. The force of the blow sends you sprawling again. You moan feebly.\n\n\n \u201cGet up.\u201d\n\n\n You stagger to your feet once more. He kicks your leg out from under you, laughing as he does it. You feel a forest-fire raging just beneath your skin.\n\n\n \u201cGet up.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Give up", "result": " He exchanges a fast salvo of words with another soldier, who nods affirmatively. The Centurion withdraws his shortsword, and slits your throat. A slurred plea for mercy dies in your throat, as your lifeblood seeps out into the snow, and steam rises from your wound.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Stand up", "result": " He gives you an almost imperceptible nod. You stagger back to the cart, and climb on. Your arms nearly give out as you do so. Later that night, as you moan softly in an agonized haze, the cart rolls to a halt. The other prisoners look about in confusion, and you wince as the stop causes a spike of pain behind your right eye.\n\n\n A soldier steps on, and roughly grabs you by the arm. He leads you out of the cart. By the soldier\u2019s torches, you can see into the woods aways. This is farther South than anyone you know has ever been; you\u2019re not even sure what tribes have the right to hunt here.\n\n\n You fall to your knees, and begin to retch loudly. At this point, there\u2019s no more food or water for you to regurgitate. The legionnaire waits for you to finish, before dragging you back to your feet.\n\n\n You are half-guided, half-dragged to a clearing in the woods. In the centre of the clearing is a massive stump, where a colossal oak might once have stood. A moonbeam illuminates the stump.\n\n\n Standing next to the stump are the Centurion, and someone you\u2019ve never seen before. He\u2019s older than anyone else in the procession, and dressed in civilian\u2019s clothes. He\u2019s holding a satchel with tools poking out of it; a bottle of something mysterious, a few hammers, a saw, and a wickedly sharp-looking knife.\n\n\n Him and the Centurion have a brief, conversation. The old man sounds irritating.\n\n\n The Centurion clears his throat. \u201cI beat\u2026 too hard. Doctor fix this. You fight.\u201d\n\n\n You nod, and find that the gesture causes a dagger-sharp pain in your head and spine.\n\n\n The doctor pulls the bottle out of his flask, and passes it to you.\n\n\n \u201cTwo sips,\u201d the Centurion says tersely, \u201cor it kill.\u201d\n\n\n You take the allotted two sips. A few minutes pass, and you feel whatever medicine is inside the flask begin to take effect. A sudden, irresistible drowsiness comes over you, and you slump forward. You\u2019re only dimly aware of the doctor putting your head on the stump, and withdrawing a small hammer from his belt\u2026", "action_results": [{"action": "Recovery", "result": " You\u2019re dreaming a dark dream, full of clawed things and concealed blades. You can smell smoke nearby. You can hear a beast growling in a foreign tongue, inches behind you. You find that you cannot move. The beast\u2019s tongue slithers into your head, worming past your skull and into your grey matter with ease. You can feel its tongue re-arranging your mind, twisting your memories and thoughts. You let out a silent scream as its tongue splits in twain, and begins to worm out your eyeballs\u2026\n\n\n \n\n ***\n\n\n You awaken on a remarkably comfortable bed, wrapped in an actual blanket; a luxury you\u2019ve never known. You open your eyes, and wince as light pours into them. For the first time in a few days, you remember your own name. You also realize what is going to happen to you.\n\n\n You\u2019re to be taken as a slave, and fed to the Foreign Gods. You\u2019ve heard tales of them whispered around the campfire; bloodthirsty war gods and hedonistic fiends, that can only be satisfied when the blood of innocents are shed on their altars, which stretch all the way up into the heavens. Sometimes, the Foreign Gods even make men fight one another for their sick amusement.\n\n\n Your cry of alarm dies in your throat. You find that you\u2019re still quite weak. Your feeble hands strain against the shackles around your arms \u2014 that\u2019s new. You don\u2019t recall being shackled.\n\n\n You take a moment to collect yourself, and take in your surroundings. You are in a covered cart, which is a nice change from the prisoner\u2019s wagon that you found yourself in earlier. You are now in a covered cabin, which you assume is trailing behind one of the teams of horses.\n\n\n There\u2019s a piece of fabric hanging on the wall with a draft coming through it. Through it, comes the eternally-glowering face of the Centurion. Behind him is an elf with one ear and a scarred mouth.\n\n\n \u201cThis one teach,\u201d the Centurion declares.\n\n\n \u201cTeach what?\u201d you speak the first words since your capture.\n\n\n \u201cLanguage.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cI\u2019m going to teach you their language. It\u2019s important, for what comes next,\u201d she adds.\n\n\n \u201cAnd what does come next?\u201d you groggily wipe the sleep-crust from your eyes.\n\n\n \u201cThe rest of the journey, first of all. Then, you\u2019re going to fight.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWho am I going to fight?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhoever you\u2019re told. He\u2019s going to claim you as his personal slave, and put you to work in the fighting pits.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cFuck.\u201d\n\n\n Enya laughs darkly.", "action_results": [{"action": "Arrival at the city", "result": " On the fourth week of your journey, the city of Florentia Augusta appears on the horizon. It\u2019s marble structures and statues stretch into the sky; compared to the meagre tents and wooden cabins of your people, it\u2019s an impossibility; a living, breathing paradox, that challenges your worldview purely by virtue of its existence.\n\n\n Enya, meanwhile, has partially immersed you into the esoteric world of the Imperial tongue. In a month, you\u2019ve learned more tenses, verb conjugations, and gendered nouns (of which there are three) than you\u2019d ever care to learn. It feels like a brutal tongue, with harsh, almost mathematical requirements that dictate the laws of speech.\n\n\n You\u2019ve grown familiar with a few of the soldiers. Titus wants to marry a baker\u2019s daughter on his return to the Marble City. Magnus looks forward to returning to his family\u2019s ancestral home, to help with the planting season, now that the bitter winter has finally ended.\n\n\n You sit in the cramped, but more comfortable cart that you first awoke in after your surgery. By virtue of being your tutor, Enya has also been given the privilege of staying in the cart, along with a pile of dusty grammatical scrolls.\n\n\n The procession of slaves and soldiers travels through rows upon rows of wealthy farmers\u2019 land, moving forward on the viae publicae; the famously well-constructed system of public roads that connect the Imperium from end to end, from the frozen North, all the way down to the never-ending forest of the Frontier.\n\n\n Surprisingly, the procession of carts and infantry makes a left-turn, instead of heading directly to the city.\n\n\n \u201cWhy are we turning?\u201d you ask of Enya, cautiously trying your new language.\n\n\n \u201cWe\u2019re rejoining the Legion.\u201d she says darkly.\n\n\n \u201cYou are concerned by this.\u201d a flat statement, but meant as a question. Your linguistic skills will improve, with time.\n\n\n \u201cI am. The last time I joined a Legion, I lost an ear, and my smile got bigger than it ought to be.\u201d\n\n\n You dip your head in understanding. \u201cI think we\u2019ve had enough language lessons for the day, yeah?\u201d you say after a moment of contemplation.\n\n\n \u201cYou\u2019re not going to be doing much talking.\u201d\n\n\n ***\n\n\n Enya leans into you to peer out the small, barred window on your side of the cart. She smells like sweat and fear.\n\n\n \u201cFuck,\u201d she breathes.\n\n\n \u201cWhat are you seeing out there?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWe\u2019ve rejoined the legion. There are so many\u2026\u201d\n\n\n \u201cSo many what?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cSo many slaves. Thousands of carts, looks like.\u201d\n\n\n You try not to think about what kind of life all these people are heading into. \u201cMostly elves?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cSome. Northmen, too. A couple of orcs, too; by the gods, I didn\u2019t even think that orcs still existed.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhat\u2019s an orc?\u201d You don\u2019t realize it, but you\u2019ve both lapsed back into your mother tongue.\n\n\n \u201cI\u2019ll tell you later.\u201d\n\n\n She leans back from the window, apparently satisfied with her surveillance. Suddenly, the cart rolls to a halt. You look out the window, and see an impromptu military camp; tents being rapidly erected, carts being parked, and hundreds of men wearing the red-and-purple of the legion. Coloured banners with eagles, bulls and thunderbolts dot the horizon.\n\n\n You lean back, and press your head against the wall. You close your eyes, for a moment. Your head still throbs.\n\n\n \u201cWhat happens now?\u201d you ask, groaning as another wave of pain washes over your head.\n\n\n \u201cI expect we\u2019ll be separated, now.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhy\u2019s that?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThey\u2019re not going to have women fighting in the arena. That would be uncivilized.\u201d\n\n\n You chortle. Enya smiles. \u201cHey, thanks for teaching me some of this fucked up language.\u201d\n\n\n Her smile becomes a grin, albeit one tinged with sadness. Her scars stretch aways up her cheeks. \u201cIt\u2019s been my pleasure.\u201d\n\n\n You reach forward in a handshake. She pushes your hand aside, and pulls you into a surprisingly strong hug. You pull back after a moment. You open your mouth for a second, and then close it; does anything really need to be said?\n\n\n The cart rocks with the force of someone pounding on it with a gauntleted fist.\n\n\n \u201cOut!\u201d declares the Centurion. You climb out first, and Enya follows behind you. You find yourselves in a grassy field, in the middle of a now-sprawling military encampment. \u201cHave you taught him the language?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cI have, sir,\u201d Enya says, dipping her head down and sinking down low.\n\n\n \u201cGood,\u201d he says, a small smile stretching across his face. He withdraws his sword and points to a line of slaves, off in the distance. \u201cyou\u2019re no good as a brothel-girl\u2026 go join the labourers.\u201d\n\n\n She marches off without a protest. Enya throws a worried glance over her shoulder at you, before shuffling into the line and vanishing completely.\n\n\n \u201cShe\u2019ll be a servus publicus; but I\u2019ve something special in mind for you.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cAnd what might that be, sir?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cShe really did teach you.\u201d the Centurion says with a bitter and humourless snort.\n\n\n \u201cAll that could be taught in a month\u2019s time.\u201d the thought occurs to you that he could beat you to death at any time, and none would give you anything more than a passing glance.\n\n\n \u201cShut your mouth unless you\u2019re answering a question, or I\u2019ll cut your fucking tongue out.\u201d\n\n\n You open your mouth in stunned silence. He narrows his eyes. You close your mouth.\n\n\n \u201cYou\u2019ll be my personal slave. Now, I saw you fight, elf; and you were fast. I like that. I\u2019ve had a long and venerable career, and I\u2019m thinking it\u2019s time I retire and get rich. How would you like to make me rich?\u201d\n\n\n You frown.\n\n\n \u201cYou\u2019re allowed to answer that one.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cI would like that very much, sir.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cIf you ever say something that sycophantic and pathetic again, I\u2019ll nail you to a cross and let the eagles rip out your guts.\u201d\n\n\n A crestfallen look falls across your face. The Centurion laughs, then extends a hand. You tentatively shake it.\n\n\n \u201cMy name is Regulus, and we\u2019re going to make each other rich.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "A gladiator", "result": " You bounce the training blade off the slave-boy\u2019s skull. He falls into the sand like a marionette with its strings cut. You scramble into the sand to avoid a heavy wooden club, that buries itself in the ground where you were standing.\n\n\n You snatch the shield from the boy\u2019s unconscious fingers, and use it to ward off the next blow from the shield. You quickly look up at the burly man with the club, just in time to register his next overhand swing. You scramble to the left, and let him over-swing. While his momentum carries him forward, you slam the wooden sword into his kneecap. He screams in pain and falls forward. You drop the shield, and grip the wooden sword two-handed. You drive the point into the base of his skull, where his helmet doesn\u2019t cover. You feel a satisfying crack as it drives into his spine. He sighs softly, and falls to the ground.\n\n\n Bloody, wild-eyed and victorious, you toss the now-bloody training blade into the sand, laughing like a man possessed.\n\n\n A beast of a man emerges from the wooden doors at the far side of the arena. He\u2019s the largest man you\u2019ve ever seen, easily; a dark-skinned giant, who could have stepped out of the sagas of your youth. You would expect a man like that to carry a sword, but he only carries a particularly large tablet. He\u2019s always scratching something into it; from time to time, you wonder what it is he could be writing. \n\n\n \u201cThe elf never fails to surprise me!\u201d he declares to no one in particular. His voice is jovial and booming.\n\n\n \u201cI do my best, Horatius,\u201d you say. A wave of exhaustion sweeps over you, as the adrenaline begins to seep away.\n\n\n \u201cI think you killed that one!\u201d he says cheerfully, pointing to the club-wielder. He\u2019s right; blood is pooling from the man\u2019s eyes and mouth, and his eyes are rolled over into his head.\n\n\n \u201cI didn\u2019t mean to \u2014\u201c you begin quickly. He silences you with a wave of his colossal hand.\n\n\n \u201cHe was weak. If he couldn\u2019t see a strike that obvious coming, he deserved to die.\u201d\n\n\n You nod noncommittally.\n\n\n \u201cI need to talk to you about something, boy.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cAye?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cYou haven\u2019t fought in any games yet, have you?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cI haven\u2019t.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cI\u2019d like to change that. How would you like to fight in the Fisherman\u2019s Games?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cAren\u2019t those for\u2026\u201d you search around for the right word. The mastery of this foreign tongue still eludes you, sometimes. \u201cexperienced fighters?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThey\u2019re for good fighters,\u201d he says with a mischievous smile, \u201cand you, my friend are definitely one of them.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThis is an offer?\u201d\n\n\n He shakes his head. \u201cOnly in the polite sense of the word.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThen I guess I\u2019ll do it.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "A bath and a conversation", "result": " You enter your chambers. It\u2019s a familiar room, by now. Twelve bedrolls to a row, four rows. You sit down in your designated bedroll, and let out a sigh of exhaustion.\n\n\n \u201cI hope you wash yourself before you fall asleep,\u201d a familiar voice chides.\n\n\n You turn to look at the voice, as its owner\u2019s name eludes you temporarily. You look on the childish, perpetually-frightened face of Buchanan. \u201cI\u2019d expect that if I didn\u2019t, you\u2019d knife me in my sleep.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhy would I knife you, when you\u2019ve got knives on your ears, friend?\u201d he says with a wicked grin.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cFuck off,\u201d you say with a snort. You pull off your sandals. Your tunic slides off after the sandals, carrying with it a flimsy set of scale armour that barely covers your chest.\n\n\n \u201cMaybe I will. But we\u2019ve gotta chat, first.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhat about?\u201d undressed, you stand up and collect your armour. You jerk your head to the door.\n\n\n He follows you out of the chamber and into the courtyard. For a slave pen, it\u2019s fairly spacious. A marble bath occupies the centre of it. There\u2019s a weapon rack on one of the walls. In one corner, there\u2019s a small stall, accompanied by a pile of armour, attended by a one-armed slave.\n\n\n \u201cSomeone told me you\u2019re fighting in the Fisherman\u2019s Games, friend.\u201d Buchanan says with a wry smile. You deposit your clothing on the pile, and nod to the attendant.\n\n\n \u201cWho told you that?\u201d you say as you walk to the centre of the courtyard.\n\n\n \u201cA reliable source.\n\n\n \u201cWas that as you were sucking his cock?\u201d you ask, as you ease yourself into the bubbling, volcanic waters of the bath. You sigh contentedly.\n\n\n \u201cLaugh if you must, friend. But life has gotten far easier since Tibur and I came to our arrangement.\u201d\n\n\n You motion for Buchanan to join you in the bath.\n\n\n \u201cDon\u2019t need it.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhen did you last train? You reek.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cPiss off,\u201d he says as he undresses. \n\n\n The two of you sit in silence for a moment. The hot water feels like it\u2019s seeping into your overtired muscles, washing the exhaustion out. \u201cSo, who else has been selected for the games?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cYou, for sure. The orc, I think \u2014 what\u2019s his name?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cBoris.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cAye, him too. Masters\u2019 aren\u2019t sure who the third\u2019s going to be.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWho else is good enough?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWell, it won\u2019t be me, that\u2019s for goddamn sure.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cTibur see to that as well?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cYou know it,\u201d he says with a wry smile.\n\n\n You lean back, pressing the back of your shaved head against the marble lip of the bath. You close your eyes appreciatively.\n\n\n \u201cSo what\u2019s your story, anyway?\u201d he asks.\n\n\n \u201cMy story?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cHow the fuck you got here.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cHow else? The institution of slavery.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cOh, you\u2019re a funny fucker. Seriously, though.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cI got taken as a prisoner of war by some Centurion. Wound up getting sold to here for a fraction of the cost, but he gets some of the profits.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhat profits?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWell, that\u2019s what confuses me. He beat my head in so bad that his man had to dig through my brain to let the pressure out.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWait, really?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cSwear on any gods you want me to. He\u2019s gone to a lot of trouble to make sure I survive long enough to get into the Games.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cOdd,\u201d Buchanan says, as he begins to wash his hair in the bathwater.\n\n\n A third man joins the bath. You recognize him as Boris, the green orc that you discussed earlier. He grunts as he eases himself in. \n\n\n \u201cAfternoon,\u201d he grumbles.\n\n\n \u201cWell isn\u2019t this just a gathering of the races?\u201d Buchanan remarks.\n\n\n \u201cHow\u2019d practice treat you, Boris?\u201d you ask.\n\n\n \u201cShort.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThat\u2019s how we like \u2018em,\u201d Buchanan declares jovially.\n\n\n \u201cWho\u2019d you fight?\u201d you ask of Boris.\n\n\n \u201cSome man.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThis man still with us?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cAye. But I heard you took a life today,\u201d Boris intones. In your few interactions with him, you\u2019ve noticed something: rare is the day that he speaks in anything other than a slow, ponderous monotone.\n\n\n \u201cWho\u2019d you kill? You sick bastard!\u201d Buchanan jokes, \u201cI\u2019ve never heard of a gladiator school with a killer in it!\u201d\n\n\n \u201cI\u2019m afraid to disappoint you, mate, but it wasn\u2019t intentional. Hit him weird, and it must have jolted his spine too hard.\u201d\n\n\n Boris grunts, and leans back in the bath. You notice a scarred-over burn on his chest.\n\n\n Buchanan notices it, then turns to you with a cocked eyebrow.", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask about the scar", "result": " \u201cSomeone in the arena give you that?\u201d you ask, motioning to the scar with one finger.\n\n\n \u201cDifferent arena,\u201d he responds.\n\n\n \u201cHow so?\u201d Buchanan chimes in.\n\n\n Boris exhales through his flat nose. \u201cMy people\u2019s laws are\u2026 different. We don\u2019t practice slavery, and we don\u2019t have prisons. If you do something wrong, you\u2019re paying in pain.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhat did you do wrong?\u201d you ask, curiosity piqued.\n\n\n \u201cI bashed someone\u2019s head, after they were\u2026 unchivalrous to my sister,\u201d he smiles slightly.\n\n\n \u201cAnd they give you that for a fight?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cNo,\u201d he grumbles, as his smile begins to spread across his face, \u201cthey gave me that for a murder.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cGods, how brutal are you people?\u201d Buchanan asks in mock-horror.\n\n\n \u201cHopefully you never find out.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "New Page", "result": " Before you can speak any further, Horatius enters the courtyard, wearing his usual disarming grin. \u201cRejoice, my brothers! Three of you are about to have a great honour! The three men heading to the Fisherman\u2019s Games have been decided.\u201d\n\n\n You look up from your conversation, as does Boris and Buchanan. The rest of the gladiators, and the slave attending the armour-pile all look at the big man in anticipation.\n\n\n \u201cOur three lucky, lucky souls, are going to be Buchanan, that wiry bastard I\u2019m sure you all know and love.\u201d\n\n\n Buchanan punches the ground. \"That son of a whore let me blow him, then he fucking lied to me!\" \n\n\n \u201cThat\u2019s not all, however! We\u2019re also going to be bringing along our favourite elf, and our\u2026 cherished orc friend.\u201d \n\n\n You feel the collective relief of everyone not selected. Strangely, no one finds the prospect of being cut open for the amusement of screaming peasants and horrified aristocrats particularly appealing.\n\n\n \u201cIf you\u2019re one of our lucky contestants, come talk to me. Immediately. That\u2019s all, go back to your duties.\u201d\n\n\n You climb out of the bath, and approach Horatius. The water drips down from your body to the tiled floor. He looks you up and down, as Buchanan and the orc climb out behind you.\n\n\n \u201cSo, are you fine folks ready to put on a good show?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cAlways.\u201d Boris grumbles, robbing you of the chance to speak.\n\n\n \u201cThat\u2019s what I like to here. You lot are dining with me and the Masters tonight; go talk to him over there,\u201d Horatius jerks a thumb to the one-armed slave, \u201cand get some decent clothes to where, why don\u2019t you?\u201d\n\n\n \n\n***\n\n\n That night, you dine in fine fashion.\n\n\n You, along with Boris and Buchanan, lay on long couches with purple fabrics draped over them. There\u2019s a table of food in front of you, with richer food than you\u2019ve ever tasted; grapes, nuts, pieces of sugarcane, thin-sliced beef and pork, along with goblets of wine, perpetually refilled by slaves.\n\n\n \u201cHow would you like to eat like this every day?\u201d Argos asks of you. One of the two owners of the gladiator school, he hails from the senatorial class. You can tell he\u2019s no stranger to the corridors of power, just from how calculated his mannerisms are. He\u2019s a shrewd old man with features like an eagle, and the predatory instincts of one, too.\n\n\n \u201cI could get used to it,\u201d Buchanan says cheerfully, stuffing his face full of spiced pork. \n\n\n \u201cAs well you should,\u201d the other Master responds. You know little of him, save for his apparent dislike of interacting with others, and the fact that he bears the name \u201cGavrill\u201d. You\u2019ve never seen him around the ludus; and this is the first word you\u2019ve heard him speak. \u201cIf you fight well, you could earn a handsome fortune.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThere\u2019s something else to be gained, as well,\u201d Argos says meaningfully, \u201cIf you fight well, and you continue to fight well\u2026 you have your freedom to win.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhat if I just like fighting?\u201d Boris asks, uttering his first words of the evening.\n\n\n \u201cThen you\u2019re in the right place,\u201d Argos says with a smile. He snaps his fingers, and a slave steps forward; a girl, human, and no older than fifteen. She proceeds to wash his hands, and wash Gavrill\u2019s hands as well. When she finishes, she washes yours.\n\n\n \u201cEveryone leave, save for the elf,\u201d Gavrill says bluntly. There is no refusal, of course; he snaps his fingers, and the meal is over. Even the slave-girl leaves. Alone in the dining hall with Gavrill and Argos, you feel their eyes burrowing into your soul, ripping your intentions and thoughts apart, like an eagle would a piece of meat.\n\n\n Argos clears his throat. \u201cAn elf gladiator stands to be very profitable, as I\u2019m sure you know.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThe Centurion understood this,\u201d says Gavrill.\n\n\n \u201cAs do we. If you win these Games, it will be an upset like never before. Men and orcs fight, but elves are something else entirely. The crowds will snap it up like hungry dogs,\u201d Argos drops his voice and looks around, \u201cBut I\u2019m sure you already know this. What you don\u2019t know, is that the Emperor, in his infinite wisdom, has seen fit to modify the game\u2019s this year. Not only will they be to the death, they will also be to the last man. That is, you\u2019ll be fighting your teammates, should they survive as long as you.\u201d\n\n\n The weight of this presses down on your back. You\u2019re not sure how you feel about murdering your allies.\n\n\n \u201cWe tell you this, of course, in absolute secrecy,\u201d Gavrill says, narrowing his eyes, \u201cbecause it would be in everyone\u2019s interest if you won these Games, and we feel that you can.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Time passes", "result": " The night before the Fishermen\u2019s Games, you rest uneasily. You and your team were carted off to a slave-pen on the other side of the city, closer to the forum where the Fishermen\u2019s Games will be held.\n\n\n It doesn\u2019t feel like a slave-pen, however. It feels like a luxurious room. You and your teammates have been provided with a room separate from the other contestants; bought and paid for by the seemingly-infinite coin of Gavrill and Argos. The Masters have also paid for an armed guard (an ex-gladiator, himself) to be posted outside the room, to avoid any last-minute \u201croster changes\u201d.\n\n\n You wonder if it would be best to tell your teammates. After all, full transparency might make them more likely to watch your back. If they don\u2019t know the true nature of the Games, you might be at a tactical advantage, however.\n\n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Tell them the true nature of the Games", "result": " Guilt wracks your mind as you lay awake. \u201cLads, they\u2019re not being straight with us.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhen are they straight with us?\u201d Buchanan asks amusedly.\n\n\n \u201cThey\u2019re rarely as crooked as this. We\u2019re supposed to be a team, right?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cRight,\u201d Boris rumbles, revealing that no one in the room is asleep.\n\n\n \u201cBut if we survive the initial slaughter, they\u2019re going to pit us against each-other like dogs.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhat?\u201d Buchan asks, sitting up from his bed.\n\n\n \u201cAye. This is the kind of bout where only one man gets to walk away, I\u2019m afraid.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThose sons of whores!\u201d Buchanan curses. He punches an expensive pillow.\n\n\n \u201cUnsurprising,\u201d Boris murmurs, \u201cbut shitty.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cSo what\u2019s the plan, then?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWe fight like devils,\u201d Buchanan says flatly.\n\n\n \u201cAnd then? Are we willing to kill each other for their amusement?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWe already do,\u201d says Boris.\n\n\n \u201cI told you this because I didn\u2019t want to stab you in the back, lads. It\u2019s wrong to turn on your allies like this.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cYou could have just kept that information to yourself, it\u2019s true,\u201d Buchanan admits. Boris rumbles affirmatively.\n\n\n \u201cWe shouldn't fight each other, should we survive. We throw down our arms and tell them all to get fucked.\u201d you continue.\n\n\n \u201cI\u2019m all for defiance, but I\u2019d rather not get killed in the process,\u201d Buchanan argues.\n\n\n \u201cIf they kill the winners of a bout, they\u2019ll have a riot on their hands. No way they can kill us, not without it costing them.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cSo what now, then?\u201d Boris asks.\n\n\n \u201cI say we try and get some sleep. We\u2019ve still got to survive this fucking thing.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Fighting side-by-side", "result": " You, Boris and Buchanan stand shackled to each other by the ankles, at the far end of a marble forum. All that separates you from the crowd calling for your blood is a line of private guards (likely slaves themselves), paid for by the Censor arranging the games.\n\n\n There are seven other teams of three, shackled similarly to you and your team. They are equally spaced along the rectangular perimeter of the forum. At the end of the forum opposite to you is an ornate ivory chair, upraised on a wooden platform. Upon which sits the Censor, who has organized these games and paid for them out of pocket. He nods to the crowd, upon which several men begin to distribute loaves of bread, which are quickly torn apart. A fervour begins to rise.\n\n\n He raises a hand for silence. \u201cIn the name of the most gracious gods, who preside over us all. And in the name of the Emperor, whose infinite wisdom leads the Imperium into greater prosperity each year. On this most festive and holy of days, I demand that you fight!\u201d\n\n\n The forum descends into chaos.\n\n\n You stick close to Boris and Buchanan as you move into the throng of bodies. Hot blood sprays across your face as you shove your spear into a man\u2019s neck. Someone screams to the right of you; you turn, and see Boris flinging the broken body of a man like a discarded toy.\n\n\n You sidestep a heavy-looking sword, and riposte with a quick thrust into a man\u2019s bare chest. You rip open a gash in his soft, exposed flesh. He staggers backwards, and someone finishes him off with a trident to the neck.\n\n\n Your arms grow weary. You begin to back out of the throng. A vicious-looking barbarian, painted in blue, notices you.\n\n\n \u201cYour head is mine, elf!\u201d he screams, charging at you. He leaps into the air and swings an axe at your neck. He moves with breathtaking speed, but the chain around his ankle quickly grows taught. He falls to the ground, and you quickly bury your spear in his side. He lets out a soft moan as his lifeblood spills out onto your sandals.\n\n\n You hear Buchanan scream in pain. You turn, and see that he\u2019s been knocked to the ground. A burly orc is strangling him, and his struggles are weakening by the second. You stab the orc in the shoulder, but it only enrages the thing, which looks more like a monster than a man. It lets Buchanan fall to the ground, but picks up its bloodstained axe off the ground, and squeals at you.\n\n\n Boris slams his club into the side of its head, killing it instantly. The force of the blow warps its skull, and causes its head to forcibly rotate into an unnatural position. As it falls to the ground, you look around the makeshift arena, and realize that only one opponent remains. He\u2019s frantically trying to free himself from his shackles by chopping the feet off his dead teammates with a hatchet.\n\n\n You turn to the crowd in a grand gesture, relishing their applause. Then, you throw your spear like a javelin. It tears through his side, and he screams in agony and drops his hatchet. You watch as he pulls the blade out from his torso, only to invite a fresh torrent of blood. He bleeds to death while futilely trying to stem the bleeding with his fingers.", "action_results": [{"action": "A shocking victory", "result": " The crowd erupts into a clamour. They praise you like the gods themselves. The Censor raises his hand for silence. \u201cFair citizens, are these games not to the death?\u201d he asks.\n\n\n The implication is obvious. A stunned silence falls over the crowd. Buchanan smiles grimly, and turns to you. \u201cWe\u2019re really doing this?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cAye,\u201d Boris rumbles, before throwing his club across the forum. The crowd gasps.\n\n\n You realize that you\u2019re unarmed, and raise your arms in an exaggerated shrug. The crowd laughs uproariously.\n\n\n Buchanan eyes you both suspiciously. \u201cYou\u2019re a couple of madmen,\u201d he declares, before he, too, throws his blade away.\n\n\n This act of defiance is met with screams and applause. The uproar grows again, and a wave of joyous celebration ripples through the crowd. The Censor raises his hands for silence, but he\u2019s ignored amid the cheers; the people are drunk on celebration.\n\n\n \u201cKill them!\u201d he screams. Only two of his slave-soldiers hear, but they gladly comply; they break formation and begin to march towards you with terrible intent.\n\n\n The celebration turns to rage. The crowd throw themselves against the shields of the guards, screaming profanity and curses at the Censor. Fists and rocks are thrown at the guards, who struggle to keep the crowd at bay with beatings.\n\n\n \u201cStop!\u201d he bellows. The two soldiers halt in their tracks. \u201cIt would appear, the people have spoken!\u2019\n\n\n The guards manage to shove the crowd back. For now.\n\n\n \u201c\u2026 And the Fisherman\u2019s Games shall have three winners!\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "A victor's reward", "result": " \u201cThat was an impressive show you put on,\u201d Argos says with surprising humour. Both his hands are folded underneath his toga, but you can imagine that they\u2019re clenched fists. \u201cI had hoped it would unfold differently, but alas\u2026 one cannot always predict these things.\u201d\n\n\n The meeting-room, where you shared a dinner with Gavrill and Argos, is now bare. It looks like a dungeon cell. The thought strikes you that it would be a good place for a murder.\n\n\n The door swings open. Gavrill enters. His face is flushed red, and he looks positively less civil than Argos. Argos raises cautionary hand to him. \u201cCalm yourself, brother.\u201d he advises.\n\n\n Gavrill sighs. \u201cYou three must understand that insulting the Censor reflects quite poorly on us.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cThey\u2019re not idiots. You do understand this, correct? You know what it looks like when two wealthy men cannot control their slaves?\u201d Argos turns his pointed gaze to you.\n\n\n \u201cI \u2014 we, understand.\u201d you say, nodding submissively.\n\n\n \u201cAnd yet, we would be idiots to punish you for this act.\u201d Argos continues. Gavrill looks like he\u2019s been struck. \u201cFor you have earned us a tremendous amount of coin, you just don\u2019t know it yet.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cAnd how is that?\u201d Gavrill asks cholerically. You\u2019re beginning to understand why Argos insists on managing their affairs himself.\n\n\n \u201cThis display of loyalty is\u2026 it\u2019s downright chivalrous!\u201d Argos declares, laughing. \u201cThe people love it. A team of fighters, but also a team of best friends. It\u2019s a novelty, even moreso than a team with only one human on it. The people will love it\u2026\u201d\n\n\n \u201cAnd the Editors of the Games will pay for them to appear,\u201d Gavrill concedes.\n\n\n \u201cPrecisely, my dear brother. The question shouldn't be \u2018how do we punish these men?\u2019. The question should be \u2018how do we reward these brave, profitable souls\u2019.\u201d.\n\n\n Argos turns his shrewd gaze to you once more. \u201cWhat do you want, dear elf? If it\u2019s within reason, I can make it so.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Ask for women and wine", "result": " You ask for women and wine, of course.\n\n\n A small villa is constructed next to the ludis. Slaves are purchased for your enjoyment. Some pour wine, but most just sleep with you when you request it. In exchange for shedding blood and thrilling the people, Argos and Gavrill fulfill your every bodily need. Men, women, elves, orcs. It doesn\u2019t particularly matter. For the rest of your days, wine is given out as freely as lovemaking.\n\n\n You\u2019re still a gladiator, but you\u2019re a comfortable one. When you return from a particularly brutal training bout, you simply have your servants drag a seat into the sun and fill you a cup of wine, and you watch the clouds drift lazily by\u2026\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Ask to be the best fighter on the Continent", "result": " Your request is simple. You ask to be the best.\n\n\n Tutors are brought in from across the known world. In time, you develop your own unique school of fighting, centred around the defensive use of the spear, along with weaponizing every part of your body.\n\n\n As your prowess grows, Argos and Gavrill eventually see fit to recall you from the Games entirely. You live comfortably, teaching the new slaves how to survive in the arena, and put on a damn good show doing it.\n\n\n Being an elf, you naturally outlive Gavrill and Argos. At the end of his life, however, Argos sees fit to give you one last gift; your freedom. He buys you out from Reuglus, and makes you your own man.\n\n\n You leave the ludi soon after, and depart the city. You live out the rest of your days teaching the newly-formed Science of the Spear to anyone who can pay your exorbitant fees. You train gladiators, auxiliaries, and the sons (and one daughter) of the wealthy.\n\n\n You live out the rest of your days on your own villa in the country, with dozens of slaves and hundreds of acres of land to your name, the first elf in the Imperium to do achieve wealth of this kind.\n\n\n When you finally die, you do so rich, and content.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Ask for vengeance", "result": " Your request confuses Gavrill and Argos, at first. You ask for the elves of your tribe to be brought to the gladiatorial school. They comply; the women are brought on as servants, and the men are taught to fight.\n\n\n This proves to be their undoing.\n\n\n They fail to notice the conversations in Elfin that end when they walk by. They fail to notice the growing resentment in their slaves. They fail to notice how you\u2019ve taken a special interest in molding your people into effective killers. They fail to notice that you've even trained the women how to fight. \n\n\n When Regulus arrives, you give the signal. The Centurion, now a much older man, has come to survey his investment (and perhaps purchase a few fitting men as mercenaries). You give the centuries-old hunting cry of your people, and you all seize arms from the armoury.\n\n\n The confused guards die in seconds, their throats gashed by the lightning-quick ambushes of enraged elves.\n\n\n Regulus tries to run. You stab him in the back of the heel, crippling him. You beat his head with the butt of your spear, like he beat you, so many years ago. He\u2019s coughing blood, and his tongue has been severed by his own teeth by the time you finally slit his throat.\n\n\n You have the immense pleasure of cornering Gavrill and Argos. For all they\u2019re benevolence, they still own you, and they still made you fight. You kill Gavrill first, by gashing his throat open. Argos lunges forward with a knife produced from his toga, but you trip him onto the floor, and plunge the spear into his heart. His last look is one of intense surprise.\n\n\n You wish that Boris and Buchanan were there, in the end. But while you voluntarily stayed, they took their freedom.\n\n\n A warning bell is rung. The survivors of the massacre all gather round you. Some clutch swords, others axes. Some fight with their bare hands, or a piece of discarded wood. Some are holding training weapons.\n\n\n Even as the legionnaires kick down the door, you know one thing to be true.\n\n\n You have spilled the blood of those who wronged you. You are vindicated.\n\n\nTHE END.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Keep it a secret", "result": " The marble forum is empty, save for the eight teams of combatants. Each team consists of three men, who are lashed together by the feet to discourage cowardice.\n\n\n The crowd is bigger than you could have imagined. It feels as if every working-class freeman, citizen, and slave has gathered around to watch the slaughter that is sure to unfold.\n\n\n An upraised seat on one end of the arena has been erected for the Censor overseeing the games. He\u2019s an austere-looking man with grey hair and a large belly, and a flowing toga.\n\n\n He raises a hand.\n\n\n You glance at your compatriots. Boris looks disturbingly at ease, nearly nude, save for his roughly-hewn breechcloth. He holds a thick club of oak over his shoulder like a farm-slave might hold a plow. Buchanan\u2019s expression is imperceptible underneath his bronze helmet. You can see the gooseflesh on his bare chest, and you can see that his fingers are white from how tight they clutch his sword and shield.\n\n\n You try to steady the shaking of your hands as you clutch your spear like a protective charm. You were allowed to paint yourself blue, in the custom of your people; a screaming, painted barbarian is good for the crowds, after all.\n\n\n \u201cIn the name of the most gracious gods, who preside over us all. And in the name of the Emperor, whose infinite wisdom leads the Imperium into greater prosperity each year. On this most festive and holy of days, I demand that you fight!\u201d The Censor\u2019s voice booms out across the forum, and over the crowd.\n\n\n For a brief second, there is silence.\n\n\n The scream of the crowd and the scream of the gladiators\u2019 charge nearly deafens you. Twenty four men collide in the centre of the forum. You enter a trance. You are dimly aware of the screams of dying men, and the sound of flesh tearing. You hear the rattling of chains, and the collision of armour.\n\n\n You jam your spear into a man\u2019s throat, turning his jugular into a red geyser. You\u2019re blue and red, now.\n\n\n You shove the butt of your weapon into someone\u2019s nose, stunning him just enough that Boris\u2019 gargantuan club can crush their head like a discarded piece of fruit, sending juice spraying all over you.\n\n\n Someone scraps your forehead open with a knife. You turn, just quickly enough to see a spear-tip pierce their cheek, rip through their tongue, and punch out the other side.\n\n\n The fighting ends in a few minutes. You stand amid a slew of ruined corpses; some of them gasp for air, unaware that they\u2019re already dead. Weapons and discarded shields litter the forum. A stunned silence falls over the crowd.\n\n\n And then they scream.\n\n\n And then you scream. You let out a blood-curdling war cry that frightens and excites you. You look around the arena for something else to kill.\n\n\n Your eyes fall on Buchanan. He\u2019s alive and well, but breathing heavily, and he has a gash running down his side. He looks sadly at the corpse of Boris, who has a short-sword still lodged in his jugular.\n\n\nYou grab your spear and raise it, and then you remember; the charade of teamwork is still in place. You quickly shove the point into a wounded man\u2019s jugular, pretending that the coup-de-gras was your intention all along.\n\n\n You bask in the chants of the crowd.\n\n\n \u201cBlood-elf! Blood-elf! Blood-elf!\u201d they chant, throwing their fists in the air.\n\n\n You look down, and realize it\u2019s true. You\u2019re covered in a thick, sticky layer of blood, so much so that it nearly covers the paint you wore into battle.\n\n\n The Censor raises his hand in a pacifying gesture. The crowd falls into silence. \u201cFair citizens, are these games not to the death?\u201d\n\n\n Buchanan stares at you. You don\u2019t make eye contact, and instead look at the chain connecting your leg to his.\n\n\n \u201cThere are two contestants remaining! My friends, we have one more fight to watch!\u201d the Censor continues, \u201cSo, gladiators! Put on a good final show, why don\u2019t you?\u201d\n\n\n You swing your spear like a club, aimed at Buchanan\u2019s head. When he steps back to avoid the blow, you kick your leg back, tugging on the chain. He loses his footing, and slips backward. He dashes his head against the marble, rattling his helmet.\n\n\n You easily parry his half-hearted sword swing, and run his arm through, right at the joint. He screams in pain and drops the sword. You pull the spear-tip out, and toss the weapon aside. You pull his helmet off, and pick up his blood-stained sword off the ground. Raising one hand to the crowd and the Censor, you hold the sword to his throat.\n\n\n \u201cDeath! Death! Death!\u201d the crowd chants. They throw their fists in the air, thumbs upraised.\n\n\n You turn to the Censor. He nods.\n\n\n \u201cSorry, mate,\u201d you say to Buchanan, before hacking into his throat with the edge of the blade. He gurgles, and uselessly paws at your legs. You withdraw the blade, then hack at his neck again; this time, you slice his head clean off.\n\n\n His bloodied head lands with a schlick as it hits the blood-stained marble face-first.\n\n\n \u201cBlood-elf! Blood-elf! Blood-elf!\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "A champion's story", "result": " You awaken, covered in sweat. Across from you, naked, and in a tangle of sheets and covers, is a woman whose name you can\u2019t quite place. You take a moment to admire her features; a smattering of freckles across her cheeks, short blonde hair, and a small nose. Some aristocrat, who\u2019d paid well for the privilege.\n\n\n You step out of bed. Already you can feel your nerves building. You drop yourself to the floor, and do a few dozen push-ups to calm your nerves. You\u2019re sweating, now. You step outside your chamber, leaving the woman to sleep. You didn\u2019t touch a drop of anything except for water last night, but you expect that she will be wrestling with a hangover all day.\n\n\n You leave your house, and step out into the yard of your villa. You dip yourself into your hot-water bath for a few moments, washing the sweat off. Eventually, you step outside and let yourself dry off.\n\n\n You look to the gate in your yard. Chained, but from the outside. You\u2019ve always found that amusing.\n\n\n Someone will be around in your chariot, with your weapons and armour. You sit on a marble bench until such time, watching the clouds. They don\u2019t take long. Soon, the gate opens, and a nervous-looking freeman enters, carrying your belongings. You put on the leather armour, and don your shield and sword. You loop your belt through your helmet\u2019s eye-socket for now.\n\n\n As you leave, he stops.\n\n\n \u201cYou have a client?\u201d he asks.\n\n\n \u201cYeah, but she\u2019ll be asleep for hours yet. This won\u2019t take long.\u201d\n\n\n He nods, and you both step onto your chariot. The man drives you through the streets of the Capital. You whip the crowd into the frenzy, blowing kisses and slapping hands as you\u2019re driven by.\n\n\n Soon, you arrive at the Coliseum. The grandest arena on the Continent by far, it\u2019s a massive amphitheatre that forms the centre of culture for the entire city. When there aren\u2019t gladiatorial games, it regularly hosts dramas and sporting matches of a less lethal variety.\n\n\n The bouts before yours are all boring. Only one man is killed, and it\u2019s an anticlimactic death; he bleeds to death after sustaining several minor injuries. When you step out into the sands of the arena, twirling your sword, you can feel the hunger of the crowd.\n\n\n Your opponent steps out. His casualness is unnerving. He carries his trident like a walking stick. The weighted net in his off-hand, he twirls.\n\n\n \u201cGood morning, sir!\u201d you say jovially. The crowd laughs.\n\n\n \u201cAnd good morning to you!\u201d he responds.\n\n\n You both stop, halfway across the arena, and salute the Emperor. After your salute, you sweep the tip of your blade across the crowd, whipping them up into a maddened state.\n\n\n \u201cBlood-elf! Blood-elf! Blood-elf!\u201d\n\n\n You flash your opponent a charming smile, before donning your helmet. When the helmet hits your head, the crowd falls silent; most have seen you work before. They know that the blood is soon to follow.\n\n\n You bound across the arena and leap at him, plunging your sword towards his neck like a swooping eagle\u2019s talon. He dodges with the grace of a bullfighter. The crowd gasps.\n\n\n You twist, and avoid his thrust to your abdomen. You lash out at his neck, but he steps back, just in time for your blade to sail harmlessly through the air. He reaches out, and beckons you forward. Your blood begins to boil.\n\n\n With a scream, you charge forward, keeping your shield in front of your chest. You shield absorbs his blow, and you stab outward at his exposed chest. He twists, but not fast enough; you scrape his chest open. His blood trickles down to the sand.\n\n\n \u201cNice shot,\u201d he bellows. The crowd laughs. You don\u2019t respond.\n\n\n He thrusts at your neck, but you scramble out of the way. Your riposte scrapes across his armoured forearm.\n\n\n You swing your shield at his head. He ducks low underneath the swing, and stabs at your gut. You dash to the side, only to find that there\u2019s a net blocking your path.\n\n\n You fall into the dirt, wrestling with the net; you find that it\u2019s impossibly heavy, and the harder you struggle, the more you become tangled.\n\n\n \u201cLet\u2019s hope they\u2019re in a giving mood,\u201d he says, as he stomps on your right hand. It breaks two of your fingers, and forces you to drop your sword. He places a foot on your chest, and slowly lowers the trident to your neck.\n\n\n Much to your horror, the crowd is more than happy to accept a new champion.\n\n\n \u201cDeath!\u201d cries a lone voice. The cry is taken up. \u201cDeath! Death! Death!\u201d\n\n\n Your opponent looks to the Emperor, in his high up seat. The Emperor extends his fist, and sticks his thumb into the air.\n\n\n \u201cSorry, mate,\u201d he says as he pulls off your helmet. You struggle like an animal in a trap, but he stomps on your chest, knocking the wind out of your lungs. As you gasp for air, he shoves the trident into your throat. You gurgle, spit, and ineffectually claw at the net.\n\n\n Your head lolls to the side. You\u2019re dimly aware of your blood spilling out onto the sand, and your killer waving his arms to his adoring audience.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}, null]}]}]}]}]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Hunt together", "result": " You regard the defiant, scarred elf for a moment. \u201cNot necessarily.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cHow so?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWe\u2019d probably catch more if we worked together, yeah?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cDon\u2019t think that\u2019s how it works,\u201d she says with a scoff.\n\n\n You think on this, for a moment. \u201cYeah, you\u2019re probably right,\u201d you say, before turning to depart into the forest.\n\n\n She pulls on your arm. \u201cDoesn\u2019t mean we can\u2019t go together, though.\u201d\n\n\n \n\n***\n\n\n \n\n Your arrow pierces the rabbit\u2019s throat, killing it instantly, and pinning it to the ground. You break from your hiding place in the snow to retrieve the arrow, and tie the rabbit to a piece of rope that holds three other rabbits.\n\n\n \u201cNice shot,\u201d Enya says, motioning to the rabbit with her thumb, \u201cright in the neck.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWhat can I say? I have a gift.\u201d you say, grinning. You wipe the blood off the tip of your arrow, and stuff it back into your quiver.\n\n\n She looks into the sky, and measures the sun\u2019s progress against her fingers. \u201cIt\u2019s nearly midday. Should probably head back, yeah?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cHaven\u2019t shot anything big yet, though.\u201d your mouth still waters at the thought of a piece of venison.\n\n\n She grinds her foot into the snow. \u201cThink it might be best for us to head back.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Head back to camp with Enya", "result": " \u201cAye, you\u2019re right,\u201d you say, frowning slightly.\n\n\n \u201cAh, cheer up. We\u2019ll bring down an elk or something tomorrow. Besides, I would have kicked your ass anyway.\u201d she unstrings her bow, and you do the same. You rest the bow over your shoulder, along with your spear and three rabbits.\n\n\n \u201cI seem to notice that I\u2019ve three rabbits, and you have two.\u201d you say mockingly, as you begin to head back to camp.\n\n\n \u201cMaybe so, but I caught a squirrel.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cNo way a squirrel\u2019s worth a rabbit. It\u2019s half the size.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cBut it\u2019s harder to hit.\u201d \n\n\n \u201cI\u2019m sure all the hungry children back at camp will be pleased to note that your measly little squirrel was hard to hit.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cI\u2019m sure they will appreciate my expert marksmanship, thank you very much.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cI\u2019ll believe it when I see it.\u201d\n\n\n \n\n***\n\n\n \n\n As you approach the camp, you take a deep breath of the crisp winter air. It\u2019s tinged with far more smoke than usual; something is terribly wrong.\n\n\n You drop your kills into the snow, and immediately begin to string your longbow again.\n\n\n \u201cWhat\u2019s wrong?\u201d Enya hisses, dropping down into a crouch.\n\n\n \u201cSmells like a wildfire down there.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cMaybe they lost control of a cooking fire?\u201d\n\n\n \u201cOr maybe it\u2019s a fucking raiding party.\u201d\n\n\n Her eyes widen, and she, too, begins to string her bow. Soon, the two of you ghost through the snow-covered forest until you reach the clearing. Your suspicions are immediately confirmed. One of the tents is on fire. A couple dozen tribespeople are kneeling in the snow, and heavy iron manacles are being placed on them by stern-faced legionnaires with short-swords and tower shields.\n\n\n \u201cThey\u2019re being taken,\u201d you whisper.\n\n\n \u201cI can see that.\u201d\n\n\n \u201cWe\u2019ve got to stop them!\u201d you knock an arrow.\n\n\n \u201cWe cannot fight them! There are a bunch of them, and two of us. If you give away our position, we die. We need to leave, and we need to do it now.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight the legionnaires", "result": " You loose the arrow. It strikes true, hitting a legionnaire in the throat. He sinks to the ground, clutching uselessly at his ruined neck. The rest of the soldiers move with frightening efficiency, even as you and Enya begin to fire arrows at them.\n\n\n You manage to fell another, and strike one man in the exposed forearm before they assemble into a formation. Three huge, interlocking shields form an impenetrable barrier to your arrows. Four men in the back cover the heads of the two rows, so that they form a formidable shell of iron.\n\n\n Then, with a slow and terrible deliberateness, they begin to march forwards. You see the wild-eyed terror in Enya\u2019s eyes.\n\n\n \u201cRun.\u201d", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight to the death", "result": " \u201cI\u2019m not running,\u201d you mutter as you drop your bow to the ground, and grip your spear two-handed in front of you. You leap over the snowbank, ready to fight the foreign interlopers who dare to invade your lands and shackle your people.\n\n\n The iron turtle approaches, muttering its arcane, guttural marching-chants. Blades reach out from behind shields like sharp teeth.\n\n\n You shove your spear through one of the gaps in the shield-wall. It bounces off a breastplate. Two shields slam shut, trapping your spear. You pull, but it\u2019s hopelessly stuck.\n\n\n Meanwhile, two men leave the back of the formation and begin to flank you. You drop the spear and draw your knife. You look to all sides like a wounded predator, as the phalanx circles in.\n\n\n You scream as a white-hot blade buries itself in your thigh. You fall to the ground, and lash out at your assailant with your hunting knife. It scores across his exposed cheek, and he screams in pain. The blade remains stuck in your leg.\n\n\n You try to stand as another soldier circles in. He easily catches your forearm as you stab at him. He holds it aloft in a crushing grip.\n\n\n \u201cSubmit.\u201d\n\n\n You shake your head. He nods, and there\u2019s a glimmer of respect in his eyes. He slits your throat, and drops your gurgling carcass to the snow. The last thing you see is a crimson pool forming around you, before you drown in your own blood and fear.\n\n\nTHE END", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Run", "result": " You do as she says.\n\n\n You turn tail and run into the woods, as fast as your legs can carry you. You leave the burning camp in your midst, leaving your people to whatever fate the legionnaires have in store for them.\n\n\n Eventually, your legs can carry you no further, and you collapse into a snowbank, panting like an exhausted dog. You close your eyes and lean back into the snow, letting the cold seep in. You close your eyes\u2026\n\n\n \n\n***\n\n\n \n\n You awake to a boot on your stomach. You quickly open your eyes, expecting the worst. Thankfully, it\u2019s Enya. She scowls at you. Her eyes are red and puffy, and you can see red lines on her cheeks.\n\n\n \u201cWe need to leave.\u201d she says tersely.\n\n\n You climb out from the snow, shivering. The two of you leave the burning camp behind, until the smell of smoke is gone, and you can no longer hear the sound of women being ravaged by legionnaires in front of their husbands and children.\n\n\n You and Enya share a painful memory, and find it easy to part ways after a few weeks. Eventually, you depart the lands entirely, in search of a new tribe.\n\n\n In time, the Imperium grows ever northward in its search for slaves and land. As its numbers swell, the trees are eventually stripped away, and the entire North succumbs to the might of the Eagle.\n\n\n \n\nTHE END.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/story68.json b/data/scraper/stories/story68.json new file mode 100644 index 0000000..78e8880 --- /dev/null +++ b/data/scraper/stories/story68.json @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +{"tree_id": "http://chooseyourstory.com/story/viewer/default.aspx?StoryId=29597", "context": "", "first_story_block": "The Kingdom of Vinia is a beautiful, prosperous country that lies on the southwestern coast of the continent Belacia. While many of the surrounding countries frequently go to war with each other, Vinia has been neutral in all conflicts for centuries. Because of this, many refugees and other citizens flee to Vinia to find peace, creating a rich, diverse, and multicultural population. Vinia's captial city of Dialla is also home to the largest, most prestigious college in all of Belacia. \n\n\nBecause of Vinia's prosperity, some other kingdoms have grown envious and show distaste towards Vinia and its people. The most notable of these enemies is the Kingdom of Niravia, Vinia's less affluent neighbor. However, while the relationship between these two countries has always been tense, it has always been been peaceful.\n\n\nYou are Prince Alexander of Vinia, the only child of King Arien and Queen Lianne. \n\n\nYou have grown up in the royal palace in Dialla, Vinia's seaside capital. Your parents believed it important for you to be humble, so they allowed you to go into the city and play with the common children. As a young boy, you often found yourself on the beach with the other children, calling out to the fishermen in the distance and trying to find seashells. As you got older, you and your friends often spent time in the marketplace helping merchants and listening to members of the Royal Guard tell extravagant stories. Occasionally, you would help the students at the college collect materials for their studies. You had a happy childhood.\n\n\nWhen you were of age, your parents asked you what you wanted to be as an adult. You chose to be a soldier. As a soldier, you will join the Royal Guard, where you will be trained in the art of physical combat. You will become strong of body and mind, and those traits coupled with your unmatched sword skills will make you a difficult foe to defeat.", "action_results": [{"action": "The Story Begins", "result": "You are in your bedchamber, fast asleep. You are exhausted from your training, but when a large thump is heard outside your door, you awake.\n\n\nWhat do you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Call out", "result": "You sit up, annoyed at having been woken up, and call out, \"Who's there?\"\n\n\nThe only response is an eerie silence that fills the air around you. You're beginning to wonder if you had imagined the sound when the door handle begins to turn ever so slowly. \n\n\nDo you...", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab your sword", "result": "You have a bad feeling about what's going on, so you grab your sword from its place next to your bed. You quietly get out of bed and get into a fighting stance, mentally preparing for what may come at you.\n\n\nThe door handle turns completely, accentuated with a small click. Then, the door is pushed open. It gives way to nothing but a pitch black hallway.\n\n\nYou begin to step cautiously toward the door, sword at the ready, when a small dart flies from the darkness and lands in your arm. Another follows, hitting you in the neck. You cry out as your body begins to become numb and your vision blurs. The last thing you remember is falling to the floor. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Wake up", "result": "When you come to, you find yourself in the back of what appears to be a wooden cart with a large piece of cloth placed over top of you. You can hear the sound of the wooden wheels moving through the grass and dirt, the clop of a horse's hooves, and the melodious sounds of a forest. You try to move but find that your hands and feet are tied tightly with rope. There's a piece of cloth shoved in your mouth and another tied around your head (so as to prevent you from spitting out the piece in your mouth).\n\n\nAt first you can't recall why exactly you're in the back of a wooden cart, bound and gagged, but then it all comes rushing back to you; waking up in the middle of the night, being attacked by an unknown intruder. \n\n\nYour mind is reeling, and you can't think of a reason why you would have been attacked in the first place. You don't think you've ever made any enemies, and your kingdom has never been hostile towards another kingdom. You think that maybe someone wanted ransom money, and thought kidnapping you would be the way to get it. That wouldn't be too far fetched. Vinia is arguably the most affluent country in Belacia, after all.\n\n\nJust when you think you're beginning to make sense of what's happened to you, you hear the unmistakable sound of an arrow being shot and a shout from where you presume the driver of the cart would be. There is the thud of a large object falling on the ground, and then the cart suddenly lifts on one side as the wheels of the cart run over the object--presumably the body of your kidnapper.\n\n\n\"Clean work, boys, now let's get that cart!\" you hear a gruff, booming voice yell somewhere not far from you. Was your cart being hijacked?\n\n\nYou hear multiple voices saying calming things to the horse pulling the cart and it slowly comes to a halt. The same voice as before, closer now, says, \"Alright, let's see what this poor sod had with him.\"\n\n\nYour cart had definitely just been hijacked.\n\n\nThe cloth that is covering you is abruptly pulled off of your body, and you wince at your eyes' sudden reintroduction to sunlight. When your eyes adjust, you see a group of five or so men standing over you. They all look thuggish and dirty. They look down at you in confusion.\n\n\n\"What's this?\" the same voice as before, most likely the leader of the group, says. The man is the largest and dirtiest of all present. \"Who are you?\" he asks you. \n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to talk", "result": "You attempt to say something, but the cloth in your mouth prevents you from making any intelligible sounds. \n\n\n\"Oh, right,\" the leader says, as if he's just noticing the fact that you're gagged and can't answer his question. He grabs the cloth covering your mouth, allowing you to spit out the cloth in your mouth. Your mouth is dry, your throat sore from thirst. \"Now then, who are you?\" he asks.\n\n\n \n\n ", "action_results": [{"action": "Lie", "result": "\"My name is Alexander, I'm a knight in training from Vinia,\" you tell them. You don't think it would be smart to tell them who you really are. Just in case.\n\n\n\"Well, Alexander,\" the leader says, \"how'd you find yourself in the back of some guy's cart? Got a debt you forgot to pay?\"\n\n\n\"No, I have no idea what's going on. He just attacked me!\" You tell them. Some of the men nod in understanding. \n\n\nThe leader seems to feel sorry for you. \"Well, why don't you come with us back to ou camp? We can get you fed and watered.\"\n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Go with them", "result": "\"I think I'll take you up on that offer,\" you tell the leader. \"By the way, what's your name?\"\n\n\n\"The name's Jarven,\" he tells you, puffing up his chest in an attempt to look more grand. \n\n\n\"No title?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Nope, just Jarven,\" he confirms. \"My boys and I roam this forest and take what we need to survive.\"\n\n\nWhen Jarven and \"his boys\" begin to walk back into the forest, you follow. You figure it isn't such a bad idea to get some food and water, and then you can try to figure out where you are and why you're there.\n\n\nThe camp doesn't end up being that far of a walk, which you're thankful for. It's situated in a decently sized clearing, with about ten tents surrounding the perimeter--one of which looks larger and nicer than all the others--and has a large bonfire in the middle. There are about ten other men scattered around the camp when you arrive, a few of them playing a card game and the others polishing some swords. It's not the standards that you're used to, but it'll do. \n\n\n\"Everybody,\" Jarven announces,\"this\"--he motions to you--\"is Alexander. He'll be joining us for a little bit. Play nice.\" The men acknowledge their leader's words with a few noncommittal grunt and nods, but for the most part they ignore your presence. Jarven claps you on the shoulder and says, \"Now, let's get you some food and drink, boy.\"\n\n\nJarven leads you to the largest tent, which, although nicer than the others, is still pretty shabby. The inside has a large carpet covering the ground, a cot on the far left side, a small table next to the bed, and a circular dining table to the right. There's a large chest at the end of the bed. \"Go on, have a seat,\" Jarven tells you, waving in the direction of the table. You do as he says. \"I'll be right back.\"\n\n\nYou are then left alone in Jarven's tent. \n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Look around", "result": "With Jarven gone, you figure it'd be a good time to snoop around a little and get up from the table. \n\n\nYou walk towards the chest at the end of the cot and try to open it, but it's locked. Upon further examination, you see a few things on the bedside table. There's a rolled up piece of paper, a few gold coins, a candle, and an empty cup. \n\n\nYou're about to inspect these things further when you hear someone approaching the tent, so you quickly return to your seat at the table.\n\n\nWhen Jarven returns, he does so with a loud, \"Food's ready!\" and places a bowl of stew and a cup of something that might be water in front of you. It smells good, so you dig in right away. \n\n\n\"So, Alexander,\" Jarven says, taking a seat across from you, \"you really from Vinia?\"\n\n\nYou finish chewing your food before answering. \"Yes,\" you tell him, \"I live in Dialla.\"\n\n\n\"Hm. Then why are you here?\" He asks.\n\n\n\"I told you before, the person driving the cart just kidnapped me one night. I don't even know where I am.\"\n\n\nJarven laughs a big, bellowing belly laugh. \"Well you're not in Vinia, I can tell you that much.\"\n\n\nYou sigh, getting somewhat annoyed at the fact you're not getting a straight answer. \"So then where am I?\"\n\n\n\"You're in Niravia.\"\n\n\nYou're taken aback. \"Niravia?\" you ask. You feel slightly sick; Niravia is known for it depravity and poverty, and many of the knights back in Dialla have told you of the things they've experience in the country.\n\n\n\"The one and only.\" Jarven chuckles when he sees the expression on your face. \"Aw, come on, boy, it's not that bad. I'm sure it's not as nice as Vinia, but--\"\n\n\n\"How far are we from the border?\" you cut him off. \n\n\nHe has to think for a moment, but he finally tells you, \"Twenty kilometers, about.\"\n\n\nYou sigh in relief. That's not far enough too far. And Vinia is relatively small country, stretching maybe one hundred kilometers across. It's not an impossible distance to travel on foot, should you choose to do so. \n\n\n\"I wouldn't get my hopes up if I were you, boy,\" Jarven says. \"The journey to the border isn't an easy one. You'd probably die.\"", "action_results": [{"action": "Stay with the bandits", "result": "\"I think you may be right,\" you tell Jarven. He looks pleased at your answer. \"I think I'll stay here for a little while, build up my strength some more before I try to travel home.\"\n\n\nThose were your plans, but you never make it back to Dialla. After about a month of living with the bandits, the group is attacked by some military scouts. In the chaos, you manage to escape death by the sword, but you run into a pack of feral wolves not far from the fighting. This is where you meet your end. ", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Travel to the border", "result": "\"That's a risk I'm going to have to take,\" you tell Jarven. He sighs. \n\n\n\"I guess I should have expected that, there's no reason for you to stay here with us. Have to say I was hoping you would, though, you look like you're a good fighter. Probably could've used you.\"\n\n\n\"Thank you for everything you've done for me,\" you say as you finish up your stew. \"I have no clue what would have happened if you and your men hadn't killed the person driving that cart I was in.\"\n\n\n\"You'd probably be dead!\" He laughs. You don't really know why he finds the prospect of your death so funny. Jarven then gets up and walks over to the chest at the end of his cot. \"You haven't caused any trouble, so I'll give you some things to take with you. Hopefully they'll help.\" He then pulls a key out of his pocket and unlocks the chest. You get up and walk over, standing next to him. \n\n\n\"Let's see...\" he says to himself. \"You'll need...a sword...and a canteen...and a map...and some money...and a knapsack...that should be enough.\" As he says each word, he pulls the corresponding item out of the chest. You're shocked by the man's generosity, but you don't question it. He stands up, holding the canteen, and turns to walk out of the tent. \"I'll go grab you some food and fill this up with some water.\"\n\n\nYou pick up the things Jarven had laid out for you and begin packing your knapsack. He returns with what he promised and gives the food and canteen to you. \n\n\n\"All set?\" he asks as you secure the sword to your belt. It's not as nice as the ones you have in Dialla, but it'll work if you need to defend yourself. You nod at him and he leads you out of the tent. He pulls a crumpled up piece of paper from his pocket and unfolds it, showing that it's a map. \n\n\n\"The map you have is an exact replica of this one,\" he tells you. \"This,\" he says as he points at a small triangular marking about a third of the way from the left edge of the page, \"is this camp. You need to go west to reach Vinia's border. Depending on how you go, you might hit Sirra\"--he points at a house marking in between the camp and the edge of the page--\"where you can stay at the inn. It's kinda run down, but it's better than spending the night in the woods.\"\n\n\n\"And how exactly do I reach Sirra?\" you ask. \n\n\n\"There's a path that goes straight to the border--I'll bring you there, don't worry--but it forks a little while down. If you go on the more northern route then you'll reach Sirra. The other one's a little faster, but there's no guarantee you'll find someplace to sleep. There're some houses along that way, though. Maybe someone will be feelin' hospitable.\"\n\n\nIt's a lot to take in, and you hope you'll remember all the information.\n\n\n\"Now then, let's get you to the road,\" Jarven says jovially, clapping you on the shoulder. He then takes you out of the camp, leading you back the way you had walked earlier. You emerge on a road, the cobblestones worn down by years of use. It was mostly just grass, really, but it was still a clear path that you could easily follow, and for that you were thankful. Jarven grabs your shoulders and turns you so you're facing one way on the path. \n\n\n\"West,\" he says, and gives you a small push. You take the hint and begin walking. As you leave him behind, you hear Jarven shout, \"Don't die out there, kid!\" You don't intend on doing so, but at least it makes you laugh. You wave at him without turning around, your mind set on one thing: getting back to Vinia. \n\n\n \n\nYou've only been walking for a couple of hours when the sun starts to set. You're starting to get hungry again and there's a dull ache in your feet; the rough terrain was doing you no favors.\n\n\nBut you push forward for another fifteen minutes or so, at which point you can see the fork in the road Jarven had told you about. As you approach, you see what looks to be a sign indicating what lies in each direction, but as you get closer you see that the paint is too faded to make out. \n\n\nYou take a swig of water from your canteen and think. The sun is setting quickly, as it always does this time of year, and the forest is quickly coming alive with foreign noises. You need to find someplace to stay for the night--the sooner the better.\n\n\nDo you go to the left or right? ", "action_results": [{"action": "Left", "result": "You go with your gut and take the left path.\n\n\nWithin half an hour, the forest is completely dark. The only light is that coming from the full moon overhead. As you walk, you look up at the sky and see it's littered with hundreds of stars, twinkling like small diamonds. You can't see as many stars in Dialla, what with all of the lights in the city. As beautiful as the sight is, you know you'll enjoy it more when you're safe.\n\n\nHowever, this does not happen. Having taken the left path, you have unintentionally avoided the town of Sirra, and are now stranded in the forest overnight. You grow uneasy as you push forward, the strange sounds of the forest growing louder and louder with every step you take.\n\n\nYou think you're saved when you spot a small house along the road, and you eagerly knock on the door. An older woman opens it, and looks quite concerned by your situation, so she invites you in. She gives you a hot meal and drink, which you happily accept, but it will be your last meal. Unbeknownst to you, the woman was only interested in the supplied you carried and so put poison in your drink. The last thing you see before your vision fades is the fresh, hot meal before you. \n\n\nThis is where you meet your end.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Right", "result": "You decide to take the path to the right. \n\n\nWithin half an hour, the forest is completely dark. The only light is that coming from the full moon overhead. As you walk, you look up at the sky and see it's littered with hundreds of stars, twinkling like small diamonds. You can't see as many stars in Dialla, what with all of the lights in the city. As beautiful as the sight is, you know you'll enjoy it more when you're safe.\n\n\nYour perseverance pays off, because a few minutes later you can see the lights of a town in the distance. You begin running down the path, eager to reach a place where you can relax a little. \n\n\nThe town--Sirra, you presume--isn't large, but it's big enough to have a few shops and an inn. There are a decent amount of people still walking the streets, and you think that Sirra must get a lot of people passing through it since it's so close to the border. \n\n\nYou find the inn easily enough--it's by far the largest building in the town, and most of the people on the streets are going to or coming from it. \n\n\nYou walk in and are met with an environment far different than that found in the inns in Dialla. The room is dark and smoky with a bard at the end playing a low tune. The room is filled with people, but the conversation isn't loud and boisterous, it's almost like a quiet hum. There's a bar to the right that spans the entire side of the building, and stairs directly to your left, most likely leading to the rooms upstairs. \n\n\nYou walk over to the bar and sit down at one of the stools. After a moment one of the workers--a stout, middle aged man with a large beard--comes over to you. \n\n\n\"What'd you like?\" he asks. He's cleaning some glasses and doesn't seem particularly interested in you. You think he might be the barkeep. \n\n\n\"A meal and a room, please,\" you tell him. He laughs.\n\n\n\"Not from around here?\" \n\n\n\"Excuse me?\" You don't think you did anything that would shout to the world that you're not from the area, but this stranger obviously thinks otherwise.\n\n\n\"You're too polite to be from Sirra,\" he chuckles. \"But never mind that--tonight there's either rabbit stew or meat pie. What do you want?\"\n\n\nYou had stew earlier, so you go with the meat pie. The barkeep goes through a door at the far end of the bar--the kitchen, most likely--and comes back a moment later with your food. \n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Eat in silence", "result": "You dig into your food eagerly. The barkeep seems to catch on that you're not in the mood for talking and leaves, going to tend to another customer.\n\n\nThe food is good, and it fills you up quickly. When you're finished you wave the barkeep back over and hand him a few coins. \n\n\n\"How much for the room?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Fifteen,\" he tells you. You hand over the money. He counts it, looking satisfied. \"You get room twenty-four. Second floor on the left.\" With that he leaves and goes into the kitchen. You put your remaining money back in your pocket and make for the stairs. Before you can reach them, however, a large, brutish man steps in front of you and looks down at you menacingly. You're not exactly a small person, and yet this man towers over you. \n\n\n\"Can I help you?\" you ask. You really just want to get to your room and go to sleep, not be bothered by some giant.\n\n\n\"I don't like your face,\" he grunts. You're taken aback a little, because no one's ever insulted you like that before. \n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Fight him", "result": "You don't take kindly to insults, so you throw the first punch, landing a solid blow to the brute's neck.\n\n\nHe's stunned momentarily, but his fist soon slams into your jaw. You're knocked back by the force of his blow, and you crash into one of the tables behind you, your head colliding with a now-shattered plate. You feel the shards cut into your face, but pay it no mind. You get up and try to ready yourself for the fight, but the barkeep is suddenly in front of you and there are a few men holding back your attacker. \n\n\n\"Get him out of here!\" the barkeep yells. The men comply, dragging the struggling brute out of the inn. The barkeep turns to you and asks, \"Are you alright?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, I'm fine,\" you tell him, but the entire side of your face is throbbing. You know you'll be fine, though; you've had worse injuries than a bruised jaw before. \n\n\n\"Head on up to your room, I'll have one of the staff bring up some water and a washcloth so you can clean those cuts.\"\n\n\nYou nod and head up the stairs, the old wood creaking with every step you take. You go up to the second floor and take the second door on the left, just like the barkeep had told you. The room is small, with a bed and a side table, a small dresser in the corner, and a mirror hung on the wall above that dresser. A dim light comes from the candle on the bedside table. You place your bag on the bed and then look at yourself in the mirror. The side of your face is already starting to swell, and there are cuts on your temple and cheek from the plate you fell on. Your nose is bleeding, but you don't think it's broken. \n\n\nA knock on the door pulls you away from the mirror. You open it and a man is standing there, a large bowl of steaming water in his hands and a washcloth hung over his arm. He's probably around your age, with close-cut dark hair and equally dark eyes. He's smiling, but it doesn't quite look genuine. \n\n\n\"For you,\" he says, extending the bowl out to you. \n\n\n\"Thank you,\" you respond, taking the bowl from him. You walk it over to the dresser and put it down. When you turn around, you see he's standing right behind you, although you never heard him enter. He holds out the cloth to you. He's got the same empty smile as before, and up close you notice how hollow his eyes look as well. You begin to feel uneasy and want him to leave. Luckily, when you take the cloth from him he turns and leaves your room, closing the door behind him. \n\n\nWeird. \n\n\nYou take your time washing your wounds, wanting to make sure they don't get infected, before collapsing on your bed. All at once, your fatigue and the stress of your situation hit you. You've been kidnapped, rescued by bandits, and walked god knows how long--all in one day. You're grateful for the adrenaline that must have kept you going, but now that it's worn off your limbs feel achy and tired, your eyelids heavy. Whether you wanted to or not, you slowly drift off to sleep...", "action_results": [{"action": "Wake up", "result": "You're awakened by a knock on your door. You're disoriented, having woken up suddenly, and you struggle to clear your mind of sleepiness. The room is dark, the candle on the bedside table had extinguished on its own. There's another knock, a little more urgent this time, so you stand, stretch, and walk towards the door.\n\n\nWhen you open the door, you find the same man who had delivered your water the night before. You immediately feel uncomfortable in his presence. \n\n\n\"Sorry to wake you, but I have an urgent question,\" he says. \n\n\n\"Do you have any idea what time it is?\" you demand. You were still exhausted, your body weary, and you wanted to go back to sleep.\n\n\nThe man smiled. The expression looked out of place on his face. \"Don't worry, it'll take but a moment.\"\n\n\nYou're about to ask what he has to ask you when he suddenly pushes you back into your room with far more force than you thought a man as scrawny as he would be able to muster. You stumble back away from the man while he closes and locks the door to your room. \n\n\n\"What are you doing?\" you shout. The man doesn't answer you, he simply pulls out a knife. You groan; is he an assassin too?\n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Try to talk to him", "result": "\"Hold on--\" you're cut off by the dagger that now finds itself in your throat. You fall to your knees, bleeding out quickly as your vision begins to fade.\n\n\nThis is where you meet your end.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Fight back", "result": "Recognizing the danger in front of you--and remembering what happened during your last encounter with an assassin--you get into a fighting stance. You see your sword in your periphery and wonder if it would be smart to try to grab it, or if you should just try to use your hands.\n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Grab your sword", "result": "You figure you'll have a better chance of surviving if you have your sword, so you dash across the room towards where it lies with the rest of your supplies. However, the assassin sees what you're trying to do and jumps at you. You move to the side barely in time and make it to the dresser, where you pick up your sword. \n\n\nYou turn to face your attacker, who is recovering from his fall. \n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Charge", "result": "You want to kill this man and get it over with, so you charge at him, sword raised. \n\n\nYou swing down powerfully where the assassin is, but at the last second he moves out of the way and you hit the floor. You pull your sword up and prepare for another attack, but it's too late. You've left your side and back completely open and the assassin takes advantage, stabbing you once in the side and again in the back.\n\n\nYou fall to the ground as you cry out in pain. The last thing you see before you die is the assassin's empty smile.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Take a defensive stance", "result": "Knowing assassins are the masters of dishonest fighting, you get into a defensive stance and wait for the man to attack you. You had been trained how to properly defend yourself back in Dialla, so you're feeling quite good about your chances, even if you don't know how the enemy fights.\n\n\nThe assassin regains his footing and prepares to attack, but you're ready for whatever he can throw at you. When he stabs at you you move out of the way and try to counter his attack, but he's fast and is able to move out of the way as well. The two of you do this dance until you are both exhausted, each getting a few good hits in on the other. \n\n\nYou're thinking you've reached a stalemate when the assassin suddenly jumps at you again, knife in the air. You muster up all of your energy and jump out of the way, and then you use your momentum to swing the hilt of your sword down on the assassin's head, knocking him out momentarily and making him fall to the floor. You kick the man's dagger away from his body and stand over him. \n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Interrogate him", "result": "\"Who are you? Why are you trying to kill me?\" You shout at the assassin. You've bested him, so now it's\ntime to get some answers. He looks up at you, his face vaguely angry, and remains silent. \"Answer me!\" you demand.\n\n\n\"Silence in life, silence in death,\" the assassin spits at you. \n\n\n\"Who do you work for?\"\n\n\n\"Silence in life, silence in death.\"\n\n\nYou sigh; the guy's not going to give you anything. \n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Incapacitate him", "result": "Despite your frustration, you see no need to kill the assassin. He looks up at you, and furiously says, \"Silence in life, silence in death.\" When you hear this, you find it funny. \n\n\n\"You're not dying today,\" you say. You kick him in the head, hard enough to make him pass out, but not hard enough to kill him. \n\n\nIt's then that you hear a furious knocking on the door. You walk over and unlock it before opening it, revealing the barkeep and a few other workers standing in the hallway, all with worried looks on their faces. \n\n\n\"What the devil is going on in there?!\" the barkeep shouts. When he looks behind you and sees the man lying on the floor, the color drains out of his face.\n\n\n\"He tried to kill me,\" you tell him, and he drags his eyes away from the body to inspect your face. He looks as though he is unsure whether to trust you or not. \"All of you, go back to your rooms,\" he tells the people behind you. As they wonder off, you wonder how long they've all been standing out there. The barkeep comes into your room and closes the door. \n\n\n\"What happened?\" he asks. \n\n\n\"I think he's an assassin, he came to my door and ambushed me,\" you reply.\n\n\nThe barkeep rubs his face, obviously overwhelmed by what's happening. \"He was a strange one, I wouldn't be that surprised if he was a shady character.\"\n\n\n\"Unfortunately I couldn't get any information out of him. All he said was 'silence in life, silence in death.'\" At these words, the barkeep froze. \n\n\n\"He said that?\" he asked, looking panicked. \n\n\n\"Yes?\" \n\n\nThe barkeep sat on the edge of the bed, looking like he very much wanted all of this not to be happening. \"That's the motto of the Niravian Crows.\"\n\n\n\"What does that mean? What are the Niravian Crows?\" You asked. \n\n\n\"The assassins that cater to the crown.\"\n\n\n\"Oh.\" You couldn't make sense of this. Why would the king of Niravia target you? There had been no recent disagreement between Vinia and Niravia, nothing that would prompt an attempt to take your life. \"Why would they want to kill me?\" you say allowed to no one in particular. \n\n\n\"Well who are you? You someone important?\" the barkeep asks. You're contemplating how to answer when he continues, \"It doesn't matter. You need to get out of here, though.\"\n\n\nYou look out the sole window in the room and see that the sky is getting brighter. \"Is there any way I can travel to the border? Fast?\" you ask.\n\n\nThe barkeep thinks for a moment before responding, \"There might be a merchant or someone with a cart, or a horse. That'd get you there quick.\"\n\n\n\"I'll look for someone then. Thank you.\" \n\n\n\"Don't mention it.\" The barkeep waves you off and stands up. \"If you want, have some breakfast before you go. But I'd get out of here as soon as possible if I were you. Just make sure to tell me when you go so I can get someone to clean up the body.\" With that, he leaves.\n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [{"action": "Have breakfast", "result": "You figure you should have some food before heading out--you don't really know when your next chance to have good food is--so you gather up your things and head downstairs. There are a few people passed out around the room, but for the most part the place is empty. You think it looks different during the day, the open windows bringing in the early morning light, making the room look larger and more open. Some of the staff are cleaning off tables and preparing for the day, and the barkeep is behind the bar, cleaning dishes.\n\n\nYou go up to the bar and take a seat. \"What's for breakfast?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Eggs and bread,\" he replies. \n\n\n\"I'll have that, then.\" The barkeep walks back to the kitchen and emerges a few minutes later with your food. Upon smelling the delicious food you realize how much the fight with the assassin took out of you, so you dig in. \n\n\n\"Listen,\" the barkeep whispers, leaning in, \"there's a farmer waiting for you by the edge of the town. He's got a large cart that you can ride in. He's not going all the way to the border, but he'll get you there faster than if you were just walking.\"\n\n\nYou nod. \"Okay. Thank you.\"\n\n\n\"Don't mention it,\" he says. \"He wants to leave soon, though, so hurry up and eat.\" \n\n\n\"Wait,\" you say, \"Could you tell me more about the Niravian Crows?\"\n\n\nThe barkeep sighs. \"There's not much more to say about them. They're assassins, hired by the crown. They do whatever they're told, even if it means they'll die.\" He looks at you for a moment, thinking. \"You don't have assassins in Vinia?\"\n\n\n\"We don't really have a need for them,\" you say. \n\n\nThe barkeep chuckles. \"I doubt that, but if you say so.\" You're about to ask what he means when he says, \"You should head out now, don't want that farmer to leave without you.\"\n\n\n\"Oh, alright. Thank you for everything, really.\" You finish up the last of your food and stand, picking up your bag and slinging it over your shoulder. You don't know how you've gotten so lucky, really, first with Jarven and his bandits and now with the barkeep. You thought Niravia was some depraved place, but the people you've encountered have been kind, generally.\n\n\nYou wave a final goodbye to the barkeep before leaving the inn.", "action_results": [{"action": "Head out", "result": " You leave the inn and are thrown back into the world that is Niravia. Sirra looks much different in the daylight. There are mothers and children running around the streets, some merchants set up along the sidewalk trying to sell their wares. People walk to their work, chatting with each other jovially. The sun, although just having risen, illuminates the streets. Despite the fact the town looks nothing like Dialla, it reminds you of your beloved city. The energy of the town lifts your spirits and encourages you to move toward the edge of the town.\n\n\nAs the buildings get more and more spaced out and the people become more sparse you see a man leaning against a cart with two bulls hitched to it. When you get closer, the man calls out, \"Are you the kid I'm supposed to be drivin'?\"\n\n\n\"Yessir,\" you tell him. The man is older, with a weathered look about him.\n\n\n\"Alright, hop in front,\" he tells you, climbing onto the seat on the front of the cart. He grabs the reigns in his hands and waits until you're settled next to him to leave. The bulls aren't fast creatures, but you know they're faster than you. Plus, you won't get tired from walking. \n\n\n\"I'm only following the main road for so long,\" the farmer tells you. While the path leading to Sirra had been shrouded in trees, the path was now winding through farmlands, flat and spreading for as far as the eye could see. You occasionally spot workers in some of the fields. \"I'm going north, to Terrid--it's a small town on the way to the capital--so you're gonna have to walk the little bit back to the border. It's not too far, though. You can make it before sunset.\"\n\n\n\"Okay.\"\n\n\nThe farmer looks at you. \"So tell me about yourself, boy. Got any reason for going to Vinia? Or maybe just visitin'?\"\n\n\n\"I live in Dialla,\" you tell him. \"I'm training to be a soldier. Some...unfortunate circumstances lead me to Niravia.\"\n\n\nThe farmer laughed. \"I can tell ya don't wanna talk about it, it's alright, boy. But a soldier? That's excitin'!\"\n\n\n\"It is,\" you give a small laugh yourself, \"we're trained in defending ourselves and the people, and we get to patrol the city. I've met many colorful characters.\"\n\n\n\"I've always wanted to go to Dialla,\" the farmer confesses. \"My wife went when she was little, once--said it was amazing. I've never even seen the sea.\"\n\n\n\"Doesn't Niravia touch the sea? In the south?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, but everyone says the beach there is rocky and ugly, nothin' compared to Dialla, I'm sure.\"\n\n\n\"Not many places can compare to Dialla, I'm afraid,\" you say. \"You should visit sometime, we love having guests in the city.\"\n\n\nThe farmer smiled. \"Maybe in the winter, when I don't have to care for the farm. I'd have to find someone to watch the animals, though. I won't ask my neighbor, that's for sure. He's a prick.\"\n\n\nYou laugh. \"I'm sure you'll be able to find someone.\"\n\n\nThe rest of your ride with the farmer continues in the same fashion, simply talking about whatever crossed your minds. When you reach the small fork in the path, the farmer brings the cart to a stop. \n\n\n\"Well, this is where we part ways,\" he says. \"Go ahead and take a few vegetables for your travels. Wouldn't want ya to starve, would we?\" he chuckles. \n\n\n\"I couldn't--\"\n\n\n\"Go ahead, boy. You can repay me when I come to Dialla. What's your name? I'll ask for ya at the guards' barracks.\"\n\n\n\"Just ask for Alexander,\" you tell him, going around to the back of the cart where the farmer's wares are. All of the fruits and vegetables look delicious, but you don't want to take too much, so you just grab a nice green apple and a ripe tomato. \n\n\n\"Alright, Alexander, you'll be seein' me in the future!\" the farmer yells as he takes off down the north road. You wave before continuing on the main road. The sun is high in the sky, so you figure it must be around noon.\n\n\nYou walk down the seemingly endless path, the sun beating down on you with every step you take. Not long into the journey you become hungry and stop for some food, sitting on the side of the path as you munch contently on the food you received from the farmer. When you've finished, you stand up and continue on your way. \n\n\nYou feel like you've been walking for years--your feet ache and your mind is weary with doubt--before you see your goal: the border. The border of Vinia is marked very clearly by a ten meter high stone wall. All the fatigue you had suddenly left your body and you began running for the gate at the end of the road, giddy as a child running to play. \n\n\nWhen you reach the large gates, the three guards stationed there look concerned at your happiness.\n\n\n\"Can we help you?\" one of them asks. He's the shortest of the three. \n\n\n\"Yes,\" you say, catching your breath, \"I would like to pass through to Vinia, please.\" Upon hearing you speak, the guards seem to lighten up a little. \n\n\n\"You're from Dialla, aren't you?\" one of them--the youngest--asks. You smile and nod, knowing they must have picked up on the slight accent all native Diallans have. You're shocked by how happy you are to be around your own countrymen again. \n\n\n\"Open the gate!\" the last guard--a woman--shouts, and a moment later the large gate leading into Vinia is lifted, granting you access back to your beloved land. \n\n\n\"Lucky for you, there's a group of guards heading back to Dialla tonight. I'm sure they'd be happy to take you along,\" the short one tells you, pointing you towards the barracks located along the stone wall. There's a large carriage next to it, the horses not yet hitched. You sigh in relief. \n\n\n\"Thank you,\" you tell the guards. \n\n\nThe guards lead you to the barracks, where you are given a fresh meal and new clothes before being loaded on the carriage back to Dialla. You chat with the other soldiers on the ride before letting yourself drift off to sleep, dreaming of the beautiful land you have been returned to. Before you know it, you are back in Dialla. ", "action_results": [{"action": "Fast forward", "result": "You have been back in Dialla for about a week, and your parents have not let you out of their sight since your return. With your help, they plan to take action in some form against Niravia. \n\n\nWhat do you do?", "action_results": [{"action": "Send spies to investigate", "result": "You decide to be cautious and utilize the spies you have at your disposal.\n\n\nYou dispatch multiple agents to Niravia--some working in the royal palace, some living in the capital city--and wait for their feedback. It only takes a few weeks for a report to be sent to you. It claims that spies have found documents sent by the King of Niravia ordering the kidnapping and subsequent public execution of you. \n\n\nYou and your parents barely have time to process this information when it is discovered that one of your spies has been discovered and Niravia's army marches towards the border. Now knowing that the Niravian crown planned on assassinating you to deplete your country's morale, your soldiers and citizens are filled with a passionate desire to crush this threat. All who can help in any way they are able to, so your army is well supplied and strong when it meets Niravia's. \n\n\nVinia easily prospers over Niravia. The battles are violent, but the Vinian army spares as many lives as possible--it's simply their nature. When the royal family is captured, however, the king is executed and the rest of the family banished. You personally take control of Niravia and all of its assets, and with the guidance of your parents you help make the country prosperous and peaceful, although it still has its rustic charm.\n\n\nThe end.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Send a letter to the Niravian royalty", "result": "You decide to take the diplomatic route and send a polite inquiry to the Niravian crown. \n\n\nWithin a few weeks, you receive your reply--in the form of an army marching towards Vinia. While they didn't actually tell you they planned on killing you, you think this is a pretty clear implication of their intentions, so you rally your own troops. Now knowing that the Niravian crown planned on assassinating you to deplete your country's morale, your soldiers and citizens are filled with a passionate desire to crush this threat. All who can help in any way they are able to, so your army is well supplied and strong when it meets Niravia's. \n\n\nVinia easily prospers over Niravia. The battles are violent, but the Vinian army spares as many lives as possible--it's simply their nature. When the royal family is captured, however, the king is executed and the rest of the family banished. You personally take control of Niravia and all of its assets, and with the guidance of your parents you help make the country prosperous and peaceful, although it still has its rustic charm. \n\n\nThe end.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Send an army to seize control of Niravia", "result": "You throw caution to the wind and order troops to seize control of Niravia. \n\n\nVinia easily prospers over Niravia, having taken them by surprise. Vinia hasn't taken part in any battle in centuries, after all. Most of the Niravians don't even put up a fight, and so many innocent lives are spared. When the royal family is captured, the king is executed and the rest of the family is banished. You personally take control of Niravia and all of its assets, and with the guidance of your parents you help make the country prosperous and peaceful, although it still has its rustic charm.\n\n\nThe end.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Lead your troops into battle", "result": "You throw caution to the wind and lead troops to into Niravia. \n\n\nBoth countries are largely unprepared for battle, causing this new war to last for months. Many lives are lost on both sides. Unfortunately, this includes yours. You're leading your troops into the capital of Niravia when an arrow land square in your chest, knocking you off your horse and causing you to be trampled by your troops. In the end, Vinia does prosper and seizes control of Niravia. Your parents get rid of Niravia completely, opting to simply make it part of Vinia, and proceed to reform the lawless lands. Soon after your death they adopt a baby boy and name it Alexander in your honor. \n\n\nThe end.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Forgive and forget", "result": "Much to the dismay of your parents, you decide not to hold a grudge about this whole thing. You made it back safely, after all. \n\n\nA few weeks later, however, you discover that Niravia's army marches towards the border. Your troops are completely unprepared for the invasion, and so Niravia easily overpowers Vinia with its brutality. You and your parents are devastated by the loss of many innocent lives, so you decide together to sacrifice yourself so that this war might end. You are beheaded by the King of Niravia's own sword. Vinia is then plunged into a state of despair, and falls into ruin when the Niravian royalty does not know how to properly run the country.\n\n\nThe end.", "action_results": []}, {"action": "Assassinate the King of Niravia", "result": "You decide to get even with the King of Niravia. \n\n\nDespite the fact you have no royal assassins like the Niravian Crows, you know you can be deceptive if you want to be. You send a letter to Niravia inviting the royals and nobles to a large peace-making ball in Dialla under the guise that you and your parents want to improve relationships with Niravia and forget all that's happened in the past. \n\n\nLuckily the bait is taken, and you have a spy poison the King of Niravia's wine at the end of the night, and he is found dead the next morning. You then banish the rest of the royal family and you personally take control of Niravia and all of its assets. With the guidance of your parents, you help make the country prosperous and peaceful, although it still has its rustic charm.\n\n\nThe end.", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, null]}, {"action": "Kill him", "result": "You have no patience or mercy for the man on the floor in front of you, and you know that if you do not kill him now he will most certainly come after you. With little hesitation, you bury your sword in the assassin's chest, and after you do so, he lets out a weak \"Silence in life, silence in death,\" before the life leaves his body. \n\n\nIt's then that you hear a furious knocking on the door. You walk over and unlock it before opening it, revealing the barkeep and a few other workers standing in the hallway, all with worried looks on their faces. \n\n\n\"What the devil is going on in there?!\" the barkeep shouts. When he looks behind you and sees the man lying dead on the floor, the color drains out of his face.\n\n\n\"He tried to kill me,\" you tell him, and he drags his eyes away from the body to inspect your face. He looks as though he is unsure whether to trust you or not. \"All of you, go back to your rooms,\" he tells the people behind you. As they wonder off, you wonder how long they've all been standing out there. The barkeep comes into your room and closes the door. \n\n\n\"What happened?\" he asks. \n\n\n\"I think he's an assassin, he came to my door and ambushed me,\" you reply.\n\n\nThe barkeep rubs his face, obviously overwhelmed by what's happening. \"He was a strange one, I wouldn't be that surprised if he was a shady character.\"\n\n\n\"Unfortunately I couldn't get any information out of him. All he said was 'silence in life, silence in death.'\" At these words, the barkeep froze. \n\n\n\"He said that?\" he asked, looking panicked. \n\n\n\"Yes?\" \n\n\nThe barkeep sat on the edge of the bed, looking like he very much wanted all of this not to be happening. \"That's the motto of the Niravian Crows.\"\n\n\n\"What does that mean? What are the Niravian Crows?\" You asked. \n\n\n\"The assassins that cater to the crown.\"\n\n\n\"Oh.\" You couldn't make sense of this. Why would the king of Niravia target you? There had been no recent disagreement between Vinia and Niravia, nothing that would prompt an attempt to take your life. \"Why would they want to kill me?\" you say allowed to no one in particular. \n\n\n\"Well who are you? You someone important?\" the barkeep asks. You're contemplating how to answer when he continues, \"It doesn't matter. You need to get out of here, though.\"\n\n\nYou look out the sole window in the room and see that the sky is getting brighter. \"Is there any way I can travel to the border? Fast?\" you ask.\n\n\nThe barkeep thinks for a moment before responding, \"There might be a merchant or someone with a cart, or a horse. That'd get you there quick.\"\n\n\n\"I'll look for someone then. Thank you.\" \n\n\n\"Don't mention it.\" The barkeep waves you off and stands up. \"If you want, have some breakfast before you go. But I'd get out of here as soon as possible if I were you. Just make sure to tell me when you go so I can get someone to clean up the body.\" With that, he leaves.\n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, null]}]}, {"action": "Fight with your fists", "result": "You don't have time to grab a weapon, so you ready yourself for the assassin's attack, your fists raised. However, fists don't do much against a dagger. \n\n\nThe assassin charges, having a significant upper hand because of his weapon. You're able to get a few good hits in, but the assassin manages to stab you in the chest with his dagger. Stunned, you stumble back and fall to the ground as you slowly lose consciousness. \n\n\nThis is where you meet your end. ", "action_results": []}]}]}]}, {"action": "Ignore him", "result": "You don't want to cause any trouble, so you shrug off the boor's comment and try to walk around him.\n\n\n\"Are you ignoring me?\" he shouted, enraged. You sigh.\n\n\n\"Listen, I really don--\"\n\n\nYou're cut off when his fist slams into your jaw. You're knocked back by the force of his blow, and you crash into one of the tables behind you, your head colliding with a now-shattered plate. You feel the shards cut into your face, but pay it no mind. You get up and try to ready yourself for the fight, but the barkeep is suddenly in front of you and there are a few men holding back your attacker. \n\n\n\"Get him out of here!\" the barkeep yells. The men comply, dragging the struggling brute out of the inn. The barkeep turns to you and asks, \"Are you alright?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, I'm fine,\" you tell him, but the entire side of your face is throbbing. You know you'll be fine, though; you've had worse injuries than a bruised jaw before. \n\n\n\"Head on up to your room, I'll have one of the staff bring up some water and a washcloth so you can clean those cuts.\"\n\n\nYou nod and head up the stairs, the old wood creaking with every step you take. You go up to the second floor and take the second door on the left, just like the barkeep had told you. The room is small, with a bed and a side table, a small dresser in the corner, and a mirror hung on the wall above that dresser. A dim light comes from the candle on the bedside table. You place your bag on the bed and then look at yourself in the mirror. The side of your face is already starting to swell, and there are cuts on your temple and cheek from the plate you fell on. Your nose is bleeding, but you don't think it's broken. \n\n\nA knock on the door pulls you away from the mirror. You open it and a man is standing there, a large bowl of steaming water in his hands and a washcloth hung over his arm. He's probably around your age, with close-cut dark hair and equally dark eyes. He's smiling, but it doesn't quite look genuine. \n\n\n\"For you,\" he says, extending the bowl out to you. \n\n\n\"Thank you,\" you respond, taking the bowl from him. You walk it over to the dresser and put it down. When you turn around, you see he's standing right behind you, although you never heard him enter. He holds out the cloth to you. He's got the same empty smile as before, and up close you notice how hollow his eyes look as well. You begin to feel uneasy and want him to leave. Luckily, when you take the cloth from him he turns and leaves your room, closing the door behind him. \n\n\nWeird. \n\n\nYou take your time washing your wounds, wanting to make sure they don't get infected, before collapsing on your bed. All at once, your fatigue and the stress of your situation hit you. You've been kidnapped, rescued by bandits, and walked god knows how long--all in one day. You're grateful for the adrenaline that must have kept you going, but now that it's worn off your limbs feel achy and tired, your eyelids heavy. Whether you wanted to or not, you slowly drift off to sleep...", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Strike up a conversation", "result": "\"So what's there to do in Sirra?\" you ask the barkeep. \n\n\n\"Not much, really. Some people go hunting in the forest, and there are a few farms to the north. It's mostly travelers that pass through, so the people who actually live here live pretty ordinary lives. Not much different than anywhere else.\"\n\n\n\"It's pretty different than where I'm from.\"\n\n\n\"Oh? And where's that?\" he asks.\n\n\n\"Dialla.\"\n\n\nHe laughs. \"I knew you were too polite to be from here. So you're a city boy?\"\n\n\n\"Yeah, part of the Royal Guard,\" you tell him proudly. When you say this you realize just how homesick you are. You miss your friends and your parents. But you know you're not far, so you don't let yourself get too upset.\n\n\n\"Then how'd you find yourself here?\" the barkeep says, and he actually seems somewhat interested in what you have to say.\n\n\n\"It's a big mess,\" you tell him. You don't think you should just go telling people who you truly are. \"I'm just trying to get back now.\"\n\n\n\"Well lucky for you, Sirra's not too far from the border. If you head out early I'm sure you could make it there by noon.\"\n\n\n\"I think I will, thank you.\" By now you've finished your meal, so you hand the barkeep a few coins. \n\n\n\"How much for the room?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Fifteen,\" he tells you. You hand over the money. He counts it, looking satisfied. \"You get room twenty-four. Second floor on the left.\" With that he leaves and goes into the kitchen. You put your remaining money back in your pocket and make for the stairs. Before you can reach them, however, a large, brutish man steps in front of you and looks down at you menacingly. You're not exactly a small person, and yet this man towers over you. \n\n\n\"Can I help you?\" you ask. You really just want to get to your room and go to sleep, not be bothered by some giant.\n\n\n\"I don't like your smug face,\" he grunts. You're taken aback a little, because no one's ever insulted you like that before. \n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}]}, {"action": "Sit and wait for him to return", "result": "While part of you would like to take a look around, you know it would be rude. You simply sit at the table, twiddling your thumbs, for a few minutes. When Jarven returns, he does so with a loud, \"Food's ready!\" and places a bowl of stew and a cup of something that might be water in front of you. It smells good, so you dig in right away. \n\n\n\"So, Alexander,\" Jarven says, taking a seat across from you, \"you really from Vinia?\"\n\n\nYou finish chewing your food before answering. \"Yes,\" you tell him, \"I live in Dialla.\"\n\n\n\"Hm. Then why are you here?\" He asks.\n\n\n\"I told you before, the person driving the cart just kidnapped me one night. I don't even know where I am.\"\n\n\nJarven laughs a big, bellowing belly laugh. \"Well you're not in Vinia, I can tell you that much.\"\n\n\nYou sigh, getting somewhat annoyed at the fact you're not getting a straight answer. \"So then where am I?\"\n\n\n\"You're in Niravia.\"\n\n\nYou're taken aback. \"Niravia?\" you ask. You feel slightly sick; Niravia is known for it depravity and poverty, and many of the knights back in Dialla have told you of the things they've experience in the country.\n\n\n\"The one and only.\" Jarven chuckles when he sees the expression on your face. \"Aw, come on, boy, it's not that bad. I'm sure it's not as nice as Vinia, but--\"\n\n\n\"How far are we from the border?\" you cut him off. \n\n\nHe has to think for a moment, but he finally tells you, \"Twenty kilometers, about.\"\n\n\nYou sigh in relief. That's not far enough too far. And Vinia is relatively small country, stretching maybe one hundred kilometers across. It's not an impossible distance to travel, should you choose to do so.\n\n\n\"I wouldn't get my hopes up if I were you, boy,\" Jarven says. \"The journey to the border isn't an easy one. You'd probably die.\"\n\n\nDo you...", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Run away", "result": "\"I...think I'll take you up on that offer,\" you lie, thinking it might be better for you to get away from these people as soon as possible. You have no idea what they might actually be planning on doing with you. \"By the way, what's your name?\"\n\n\n\"The name's Jarven,\" the leader tells you, puffing up his chest in an attempt to look more grand. \n\n\n\"No title?\" you ask.\n\n\n\"Nope, just Jarven,\" he confirms. \"My boys and I roam this forest and take what we need to survive.\"\n\n\nWhen Jarven and \"his boys\" begin to walk back into the forest, you get up and follow for a few steps before suddenly turning and sprinting as fast as you can in the opposite direction.\n\n\nYou hear them calling after you, but you don't look back. You sprint through this unfamiliar forest, tripping on roots and rocks, for what feels like ages, and you eventually you have to stop to take a rest. You're lungs and throat burn and your legs are numb from running. You lean against a tree and look at your surroundings, but all you see is the emerald see of trees extending for as far as you can see. \n\n\nBecause of your gasping for air, you fail to hear the pack of feral wolves that creep up on you from all sides. When you see the first one you know there's something wrong with it; in its eyes is a bloodlust you've never seen in any animal before. When you try to back away from it slowly, you hear the warning growls of the other wolves behind you. \n\n\nThis is where you meet your end. ", "action_results": []}]}, {"action": "Tell the truth", "result": "\"I am Prince Alexander of Vinia,\" you say. You see all of the men's eyes widen before they all burst out laughing. \"What's so funny? Do you think I'm lying?\" You demand.\n\n\n\"You're no more the Prince of Vinia than I am the the Queen!\" The leader howls with laughter. When the laughter finally dies down, he says, \"I like you, Alexander. Would you like to come with us back to our camp? We can get you fed and watered.\"\n\n\nYou...", "action_results": [null, null]}]}, {"action": "Glare", "result": "You glare at the man. Does he not notice the gag in your mouth? \n\n\nThe leader chuckles. \"Now now, no need for the nasty look. Lemme get that cloth for you.\" He grabs the cloth covering your mouth, allowing you to spit out the cloth in your mouth. Your mouth is dry, your throat sore from thirst. \"Now then, who are you?\" he asks.", "action_results": [null, null]}]}]}, {"action": "Hide", "result": "You have a bad feeling about what's going on, so you quietly get out of your bed and make your way to the large wardrobe in the corner of your room. You open its door and get inside of it. It's a bit of a tight squeeze, but you manage to close the door.\n\n\nYou hear the small click of the door handle being turned completely followed by the slow creak of the door being opened. Now knowing that something isn't right, you cover your mouth with your hand in an attempt to quiet your breathing and stay as still as possible. \n\n\nEverything is silent for a few moment when the wardrobe door is suddenly flung open. An unknown intruder grabs you by the hair and slams your head into the thick wooden frame of the wardrobe. You barely register the pain before you pass out.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Stay in bed", "result": "You have a bad feeling about what's going on, but you decide to remain in your bed. It could be nothing, right?\n\n\nThe door handle is turned completely, accentuated with a small click. The creaking sound the door makes as it is gently pushed open sends shivers down your spine. You begin to think that you should have hidden or grabbed your weapon, just in case.\n\n\nThat's when a dart flies from the darkness, landing directly in your neck. You pull it out, but it's too late; your vision begins to fade and you lose control of your body, slumping forward onto your blankets. The last thing you see before passing out is a figure emerging from the dark hallway, walking towards your bed.", "action_results": [null]}]}, {"action": "Stay in bed", "result": "You feel a little wary of what's going on, but you're too exhausted to really care. You roll over so your back is to your door and are content to go back to sleep. \n\n\nAs you drift off to sleep, you hear the distant click of the door handle being turned. Subconsciously you know you should care, but your sleep addled mind pushes it to the side. \n\n\nSuddenly you are hit over the head with a large, blunt object. You have no chance to react or fight back before everything goes black.", "action_results": [null]}, {"action": "Open the door", "result": "You get out of bed and walk toward the door. It's best to confront whatever's happening head on, right?\n\n\nHowever, just as you begin to reach for the door handle, it turns and the door is swung forward, straight into your face. You're shocked but still conscious as you fall back, now alert to the danger you may be in. You stand up and get into a fighting stance. \n\n\nA figure, clothed in all black, emerges from the darkness beyond your door. They have the look of an assassin about them. \n\n\nYou charge forward, trying to catch the intruder off guard, but despite the fact you are superior to them in physical strength, they are faster than you and easily dodge your attack. As they do so, they stab you in the side with a small dart. You push them away and pull the dart from your side, but you can already begin to feel its affect--your side is beginning to numb and your head is getting foggy. \n\n\nYou are a soldier, though, stubborn and a fighter by nature, so you charge your assailant once again. However, they take advantage of your disoriented state and easily stab you with two more darts. It doesn't take long for you to collapse.", "action_results": [null]}, null]}]} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/data/scraper/stories/text_adventures.txt b/data/scraper/stories/text_adventures.txt index 1aeb452..1d7e3fa 100644 --- a/data/scraper/stories/text_adventures.txt +++ b/data/scraper/stories/text_adventures.txt @@ -1,3 +1,40374 @@ +<|startoftext|>Chapter 1: Born to Kill + + +Year 0 + +“Is this the one?” +“Yeah I guess.” +“What do you mean you guess? It either is or it isn’t.” +“I dunno I lost the list.” +“You what? That’s just great. You realize how much we’re going to get our asses chewed out because of your fuck up? I’m sick of paying for your mistakes.” +“Will you calm down? How the hell are they gonna know anyway? You seen one ugly little baldy, you’ve seen ‘em all. All babies look the same.” +“Not the elven ones.” +“Enough with your elf fetish. These babies are all under the care of the Empire anyway, they’re here for the taking. +“Yeah, the key word being the Empire. You know we need the proper paper work, which you just fucking lost!” +“So what, I can forge it. You really worry too much, there’s so much red tape they ain’t gonna know the difference and what does it matter? The Empire’s getting a body for their purposes anyway.” +“Yeah, but you know how they like the best.” +”How the fuck can they really tell at this age? They do all the real testing later. Look he’s got all his limbs, and he doesn’t display any signs of impurity. I’d say he’s a prime candidate for whatever they have in store for this poor little bastard.” +“Yeah I guess…damn. I can’t imagine what it’s like being brought up like that.” +“Me either, this program has only been going on a few years, but I’ve already heard some fucked up stories about it…y’know its things like this that sometimes make me question the logic of our glorious leaders.” +“Shhhh! Are you mad? Don’t talk like that! It’s not our place to question anything, we’re just supposed to do our jobs! Besides, the logic is quite obvious. If they train people from birth they’ll have superior combat skills and utter loyalty to the Empire.” +“That’s my point though. Is it really necessary? The Empire already produces so much propaganda that it does the job pretty well in producing loyal citizens and if that doesn’t work it also instills so much fear in most that even if someone wanted to start a rebellion; it’s highly unlikely they would.” +“Don’t be so sure, it has happened in the past.” +“The past? When? Like four hundred years ago when the Empire was still in its own infancy? Pfft. Wouldn’t happen anymore and as for having elite combat troops, again what’s the point? We’ve already got camps to train elite groups like the Shadow Guard who are not to be fucked with and we have more than enough resources to create an army of golems that would be just as loyal and kick the shit out of our enemies.” +“Look, I don’t want to talk about this anymore! Our superiors have their reasons, as does the Emperor! Let us just take this baby and be done with this task!” + +The two clerks left the infirmary with you that day where upon you were accepted as a suitable candidate and put into The Eternal Program. + +You don’t remember too much during the time of your very young years, except that you are mostly confined to a room where all your basic needs are met. On a daily basis, a couple bigger people come in to check on you. They have you perform various physical tasks as well as spending time to teach you things like basic reading and writing. Sometimes they ask you various questions and write down your responses while other times they come in and stab you with painful needles with fluid in them. (You don’t like those times) + +You don’t really understand it all, except that you know that the Emperor is always watching you. He is everywhere even if you don’t see him. He is keeping an eye on your actions and you must always obey his will, lest you be punished. You know this to be true because you have this repeatedly told to you. + +Eventually your relative isolation would come to an end. +> Years later... +Year 5 + +You are sitting in a gray room at a desk with several other children your age. All of you glance at each other a lot and it is obvious that there is much curiosity, but nobody speaks. This is very unusual for you, up until now, you have only had minimal contact with others. Most of them are male like you, but a few of them are female. + +Soon the silence comes to an end when a dark skinned woman walks into the room. She has long hair and sharp features. One thing you notice is that despite her long hair covering her ears you can still see that the tips of them are pointed. She must be elven, but in the pictures you’ve seen in books, you’ve never seen one with dark skin before. + +“Hello children, and congratulations on maintaining dignified silence during your time by yourselves. It’s nice to see that your previous human minders aren’t totally incompetent. Still, if you were Svelk children you would’ve been much better trained by now. Ah, but it is not my place to dwell on the limitations of the lesser born. I am merely here to oversee your training into proper Eternals so that you may serve the Emperor to your fullest capabilities. Now before we begin, I suggest you all ask questions now, because this will probably be the only time I will be in the mood for your ignorance.” + +For a moment nobody speaks, but when the elven lady insists, one brave soul raises their hand. + +“Yes, you.” +“Are you an elf?” +“Yes, I am. While the ignorant would use the vulgar term dark elf to describe me, my kind are more properly known as the Svelk. In fact WE are the purest of the elven race. All others you may have the misfortune of meeting are merely diluted members of our bloodline. They are truly pitiful creatures really only fit for extermination. Remember this.” + +“Yes, you.” +“What is your name?” +“My name is unimportant, but you and the rest will always address me as Mistress. Failure to do so will earn my wrath, and more importantly the wrath of the Emperor. Remember this.” + +“Yes, you.” +“What will you teach us?” + +A second passes after the question, when a small bolt of light from the Svelk’s finger tips and hits the child in the chest asking the question. He falls backwards out of his chair and on to the floor. The rest of you jump in your own chairs and look back at him. He is breathing very erratically. + +“I will teach you to OBEY my commands when I give them!” Mistress shouts, she then warns the rest of you. + +“Don’t you dare touch him, let alone help him! (Sigh) And here I thought you lot had been trained better! It occurs to me that I will have to be extra strict in my discipline. As to the question about what I will teach you… I will teach you to be warriors. I will teach you to be wizards if you display the talent. I will teach you to shed yourselves of weakness. I will teach you to serve the Emperor without question and kill without mercy and you will always obey for you will find strength in obedience. You will find joy in order. You will find love in murder. You shall be instruments of terror and genocide if he so wishes it. You will be Eternals…or you will die. Remember this.” + +After Mistress’ speech, the child she struck down eventually struggles back up and gets back in his seat, clutching his chest and still wheezing. + +“I trust you have learned your lesson?” +“Y…yes…Mistress…” he gasps. +“Good, now one more question before we begin…you there. What is your question? Speak up!” Mistress demands while pointing at you, though you have not raised your hand. + +You don’t wish to disagree with Mistress, so you stumble and try to think up a question. + +“Uh…er…I was just wondering when will you teach us to fight Mistress?” +Mistress raises an eyebrow and gives a smirk as she approaches you. +“Fight? And what makes you think that YOU are even ready to learn yet? Do you have even the slightest knowledge of combat tactics?” +“No, Mis…” before you can even complete the sentence Mistress knocks you out of your chair with a quick jab with her hand, the pain from your face spreads to your chest when Mistress steps on it with her boot. She digs it into you and presses all her weight on it, while the rest of your class looks on. + +“Damn right, no you don’t. You weren’t even alert enough to anticipate my attack. You let me get in close and now look at you, you’re completely at my mercy. I am in a position to do whatever I like with you, while you are only in a position to beg or die. So what will it be worm? Are you going to beg for your miserable life, or should I save the Empire’s time and money by killing you now?” +> Beg +The pain is great and you want it to be over with as quickly as possible so you cry out and scream for mercy to Mistress. To this, she merely laughs cruelly and continues to step on your chest. + +“Ha ha ha ha! If this was a real fight do you think an enemy would should you mercy? You truly are pathetic, how did the Empire ever decide that YOU would be a worthy candidate to be an Eternal? Begging for your wretched life as if it was important. It isn’t. Your life is nothing! ALL of your lives are nothing! Your lives will never be anything more than warm bodies to serve the Emperor! The question is, will you even be able to live up to that honored status? The answer is no, if you do not learn mercy is for the weak. Remember this.” + +At this point Mistress finally takes her foot off of you and much like your other classmate hit by her magic bolt, you slowly get up and back in your seat, clutching your chest. You sniffle and try to keep yourself from crying, but the tears are still there. A glare from Mistress causes you to quickly wipe your eyes and try to compose yourself the best you can. + +Time passes by under the harsh guidance of Mistress. She teaches you all that she promised she would and then some. Your lessons are not only that of a combat nature, but of an academic one as well. You wouldn’t be aware of it, but you and your classmates are probably much better educated than other children your age. + +As for you, Mistress never lets you forget of how you begged for your life in front of everyone. While it is true that she sadistically taunts everyone at one time or another, it doesn’t make your emotional and psychological scars go away. + +This shame you experience causes you to become more insecure and you constantly feel the need to prove to everyone that you aren’t weak. When you are called upon to spar with your fellow classmates, you always fight aggressively. For the most part you usually win, and you typically break a few bones of some of your fellow classmates. The lessons of being humiliated by Mistress have not been forgotten. You can’t ever let yourself be put in a vulnerable position again and you must be brutal, it’s the only way you’ll be able to please the Emperor. + +Your personality doesn’t go unnoticed by your instructor and watchers, they make note of it and decide how you should be handled in the next step of your training. + +Year 12 + +You are in a room with a few of your fellow classmates standing in a row. Most of your class has been separated for reasons unknown to you. All you know right now is there is a scarred orc in worn battle armor arguing with a well dressed man who is human. They are speaking about you, but not actually speaking TO you… + +“What? I thought the whole point of this program was to create an elite fighting group like the Shadow Guard, why are you splitting them up and intending to put some of them in regular military units?” the orc questions. +“Things have changed since the program’s inception. Besides, if the latest military reports are any indication I’d say you could use a better quality of recruits, or at least I hope that’s the problem and it isn’t due to a lack of proper training.” the man dressed in black formal wear calmly retorts. +“Hey! I train every grunt I get to be the best killer they can be! I’ve conquered more territory for the Empire than anyone! My record speaks for itself and I could do a hell of a lot more if you put me on the front lines again, so don’t try to tell me I’m not doing my fucking job!” +“Be that as it may, I’d say you still could benefit by having a few Eternals in your ranks, if nothing else than to be a good example.” +“Good example? HAH! We haven’t even seen one of these so-called Eternals in action yet! It’s all been just speculation, and a waste of time and money if you ask me! The Empire should be providing better equipment and more of it, for soldiers on the Rask Frontier, it’s a fucking meat grinder out there and we’re constantly having to put down rebellions by the natives.” +“Well nobody ASKED you, captain and your problems are not mine to deal with. This is the Emperor’s project and he has his reasons. If I were you I’d watch your tone. Victories or not, you are a servant of the Emperor and you will obey orders or you will be replaced.” + +The orc captain steps back from the well dressed man then he takes a deep breath, before speaking. + +“You are lucky that I do serve the Emperor, for that is the only thing keeping me from ripping out your throat, human…very well I shall take these so called Eternal whelps, but let it be known that I shall be testing them to the limit and then some. If they fail, they shall die like anyone else unable to keep up.” +“As you wish commander, I leave it in your capable hands. You will keep me apprised of their progress on a weekly basis. Good day.” The well dressed man says and leaves the room, leaving you all alone with the orc commander. You’ve never seen a real orc in person before, but he looks every bit as intimidating from what you’ve read about them, even if he is much more articulate than you expected. + +He walks up and down the row sizing you all up before speaking. + +“I am Captain Gruz, and I will be in charge of the rest of your training until the Emperor deems otherwise. I imagine that your former instructor was that dark elven bitch, so I trust you all know by now that failure and weakness have no place here. Correct?” +“Yes Captain!” you all shout in unison. +“Heh, well glad to see her skills in teaching discipline are still as effective as ever. Good. Now let’s see how good your combat skills are…” + +At this point you and your fellow classmates instinctively start to pair up to spar with each other, but Gruz stops you. + +“What are you lot doing? I didn’t tell you to get out of formation!” +“But captain, you said to prove our combat skills.” One boy speaks up. +“I…oh wait I see. She had you fighting each other. Typical dark elven training. Create mistrust and loathing even when there is no need for it. (Sigh) I can see I’m going to have to undo some of the shit she instilled in you if I’m going to mold you into the proper killing tools.” + +Time goes by and Captain Gruz begins to train you in various forms of combat, though it’s different. He teaches you and your classmates to fight as a team. This usually involves various large beasts similar to what you have already fought or even small groups of goblinoids. It takes awhile for you to adapt, but after seeing the first couple of casualties, you and the rest manage to pull together to defeat your enemies. + +Academically speaking, you are not taught much. Captain Gruz figures that Mistress taught you enough math and literacy to get by in life. Besides not much need for all that fancy learnin’ stuff when you’re going to be chopping people’s heads off on the battlefield. + +Captain Gruz is just as uncompromising as Mistress in his training, but he seems less gleeful about it. His verbal abuse is more direct and to the point rather than gloating about your failures. He still reminds you all regularly about how it is your sworn duty to serve the Emperor, but you hardly need him to tell you that, to believe otherwise is unthinkable. + +As for you, you find yourself given a role of leadership. Captain Gruz noted your tendency to be one of the first to charge into battle. He however also has some advice for you. + +“I respect your desire for battle, but if you do not control your insecurities you will one day find yourself needlessly unprepared. I suspect that dark elven bitch did something humiliating to you that has resulted in your behavior. Effective in some ways I suppose, but if you truly want to be a leader of men and command respect, you need to master your emotions as you would your weapons. You must do away with insecurities and be fully confident in your abilities. You must walk into battle already KNOWING that you will win, not charging in with a chip on your shoulder with some misguided desire to prove yourself. That’s a quick way to get yourself killed. Contrary to popular belief, your goal is NOT to die for the Emperor. Your goal is to survive and make the other dumb bastards die so that you may continue to serve the Emperor. Think on this when you lead your fellows into your next training assignment.” + +The captain’s words carry much weight with you and in the years during your training you manage to purge most of your doubts about yourself as well as becoming an accomplished warrior. + +Your instructor and watchers once again note your growth and skills, and as usual they make decisions on how you will best serve the Emperor. +> Years pass... +Year 16 + +You are called into Captain Gruz’s office, when you arrive you see the well dress man that you saw four years ago standing with him… and debating with him again. + +“I’m telling you Mr. Mol, I think they should work in the same unit. They’ve trained together and they’ve worked together so well at this point that splitting them up would be folly. Hell, these people have known each other since birth! You know that better than anyone!” Gruz says. +“Yes, captain I’m well aware of the situation, and normally I might agree if their were more of them, but I think their expertise would better serve if we deployed them separately in problem areas of the Empire.” Mr. Mol replies. +“You don’t break up a well oiled machine! I guarantee having them all in the same unit will be a better idea. I mean we still haven’t sent them into a real battle yet! Wouldn’t it be better to see if they can get the job done first before placing them in charge of others?” +“And what a perfect opportunity to lose them all, if something unexpected should happen.” +“Oh for…look that could’ve happened here! And if you’re so worried about them all getting killed in battle then what was the fucking point then? Besides, if they do prove to be useless in battle, better we find that out sooner rather than later when they’re in charge of others and getting them killed as well!” + +Mr. Mol thinks for a moment and then replies. + +“Hmmm, very well you do have a point captain. We’ll try it your way at first and go from there. Have them deployed in the Nalin province. Your services here have been useful as ever. Good day.” + +Mr. Mol, steps out and commander Gruz addresses you. + +“Well you heard all that, you and your fellow Eternal babies are being sent to the Nalin province. It’s not the Rask Frontier, but it’s a suitable first challenge for you guys. We’ve been trying to settle the conquest of that place for a few years now, and technically it is part of the Empire, but we’re still having problems with the Kobold population there. Little bastards are determined to resist and have been conducting a fairly effective guerilla war since we arrived. Though I blame that more on the incompetence of the commander in that region. If I was stationed there, this shit would’ve been taken care of a long time ago…but I’m not, so unfortunately you will have to report to Captain Pollo.” + +Captain Gruz approaches you closer before continuing. + +“Now I’m putting you in charge of your unit for reasons I’m sure you’re aware of. While I’m confident I’ve made the right choice, the burden will ultimately be on you to prove to be an effective leader. Remember, you’re not just a normal soldier, you’re supposed to be an Eternal. An instrument of destruction ordered by the Emperor himself. Failure is never an option for you. Even now there are rumors about your kind, and when you finally show yourselves you will be met by fear, awe, hatred and even distain. Prove yourselves and you will live up to the name that your were given. Anyway, the caravan picking you up will arrive tomorrow. Good luck and dismissed.” + +With this you leave and tell the rest of your people about where you’re going and the general nature of what to expect. They all seem pretty excited to prove themselves, and to be honest so are you. At last you will get the chance to prove yourself and can only imagine that the Emperor will be pleased by what he will see. + +The next day, you and your unit are picked up and the ride there is uneventful, but your unit spends a little time talking about things they see on the way. This is the first time all of you have probably been away from the training center you’ve spent all your lives in. Curiosity about some of the surroundings is natural, but it isn’t just the casual talk that’s different. + +Your comrades are different. They are less reserved than they once were. Captain Gruz might’ve been a strict instructor, but in addition to encouraging teamwork he was also prone to encourage you guys to have a few hours of free time. This loosening of the reigns a bit, allowed a certain amount of familiarity with each other that wasn’t just on a professional level anymore. Even you have felt yourself changing personality wise. + +Still you are all Eternals, and you are loyal to the Emperor. You will never forget that your duty comes first. + +Eventually you all arrive at Fort Glory in the Nalin province where you are stared at by several soldiers who whisper among themselves. None of you pay it any mind though, you simply report to Captain Pollo. He doesn’t look anything like Captain Gruz. He’s human for one thing and wears lighter armor which is impeccably clean. When he sees you, he almost looks bored, like you were interrupting him, but you when you came in he was reclined in his chair and not doing anything of importance. + +“So…you are the Eternals I’ve heard so much about. Humph. I don’t see anything special except that pretty one over there. Oh no, not you dear. That blonde muscular one in the back. Yes, delicious.” Captain Pollo says pointing to one of your men and not even getting out of his chair. + +“Captain Pollo, we are here for our assignments so that we may serve the Emperor.” You say. +“(Sigh) I suppose you are this unit’s leader?” +“ Yes, captain. I am currently their leader and holding the rank of sergeant due to my excellence in my training exercises.” +“Sergeant? YOU? Why you’re a mere boy! All of you are just children! I ask them for more men and they send me children! The only thing you all would be good for is cleaning the fort! In fact that’s what you can go do right now, starting with the toilets!” + +This is exactly what Captain Gruz said would happen. This is your first test. + +“Captain, we have been trained in several forms of combat and fully ready to fight. Send us into battle and we will prove ourselves. We are here to perform our duty for the Emperor and all that entails.” +“All that entails eh? Okay, you want a fight? A few miles east of here, you’ll find a town called Dalt. Its filled with ignorant peasants that constantly whine to us that there are a nest of kobolds lurking in the hills near them. We’re stretched out as it is and can’t spare anymore troops to waste on towns that are of no military importance in the grand scheme of things. Go there and take care of their problem, then maybe we’ll have more to talk about.” + +You nod and all of you leave, but before you are able to Pollo calls you back. + +“Oh one more thing sergeant. Order one of your men to stay here with me. I think you know by now which one I mean.” + +At this point you’re in genuine shock. You may be young, and even a little detached from normal ‘society” but you know exactly what Captain Pollo is implying. You can honestly feel more than surprised by this though. + +“Captain, I will need all of my team to have the best chance to succeed in this mission.” You say. +“Oh? Well sorry, but you’ll have to make do like everyone else here does. Or you could clean the fort like I first ordered you to do, which you chose to ignore.” + +It’s a no win situation, though you try to figure out a loophole that takes the responsibility off of you. + +“Captain, you are of a higher rank than me, surely you could just order him yourself.” +“Ha ha, nice try. No. You want to be a leader of men? You need to make this decision yourself. Tis quite easy I would think. Sacrifice one for the good of the rest. If anything I’d say he’s the lucky one. He gets to stay here enjoying the pleasures of the flesh, and won’t have to be mucking about with kobolds and dealing with idiotic peasants.” +> Leave him behind +Unfortunately Pollo is right, the only decision that makes sense is to leave Gerald behind. + +Still, you aren’t fond of the idea though not necessarily for the moral reasons that most would be. This is an unproductive use of your team’s talents and pointless in the scheme of things. You can’t believe the Empire would allow such a petty man to be in charge of the safety of a province and why isn’t the Emperor aware of such inefficiency? + +“Very well.” +“I knew you’d see things my way. Have fun playing with the kobolds. You’re dismissed.” + +You leave Pollo’s office where your team is still waiting for you. + +“Gerald, I regret that you will not be coming with us on this mission. The Captain wants you to stay with him.” You say. +“What?! But I’m ready to fight!” he protests. +“There will be other missions, I promise you. We will prove ourselves so well on this one, that they will have no choice but to send us out on a regular basis. However, your orders are clear in this matter, you are to remain here with Captain Pollo.” +“B…yes sir.” + +Just before Gerald goes into the captain’s office, you whisper into his ear. + +“Accidents happen.” + +He’s a little puzzled by this comment, but you and the rest of your team proceed to your assignment and nobody says anything more about it. + +When you finally get to the town, it’s a sorry sight. A lot of the buildings are damaged and the streets are filled with debris. There are a few people attempting to clean up the place, but it’s clear that they’re all very demoralized. + +‘Oh, I see the Empire has finally decided to help us; well you’re too late! The kobolds raided this town last night and as you can see completely trashed the place!” says a disheveled man. +“The Empire has many places it has to protect citizen. It is regrettable that your town was attacked, but we are here now to eliminate the problem.” +“You’re here now? Where the fuck were you last night when my wife was killed by those ugly little bastards?” the man says getting in your face. +“Calm yourself citizen, this will not help your situation.” +“My situation? I just said my wife is fucking DEAD! I don’t give a shit about my situation anymore you fucking Empire dickhead! Fuck you and your fucking Emperor!” + +It is at this point the man unwisely pushes your chest with his hand and you instantly grab it and break his whole arm. He predictably crumples in excruciating pain, screaming as the bone juts out of the skin and blood runs out of his body into the mud. All the other towns people who have seen this back off or hide, as they are rightfully worried about what you’re going to do next. + +“Now listen up citizens of Dalt! I understand that you’ve all been through a lot, but that is not a reason to give in to insolence! You are all Empire subjects and you will show proper respect or what’s left of this town will suffer in such a manner that you’ll think what the kobolds did was a birthday party.” + +The man whose arm you broke begins to scream more obscenities at you in between his regular howls of pain. You look at Kane and nod. Kane finishes the man off by quickly decapitating him. You take his head and throw it before one of the crowd of peasants who look on in horror. + +“Remember this.” You say. + +You remain in the town of Dalt for the night and get rooms from an overly cooperative innkeeper. He also tells you a little information about the kobolds such what direction they came from, what sort of equipment they were using and how many there were during the attack. Before getting some rest you spend a little of the time discussing strategy with your team. You all don’t show it too much, but you are all a little excited about tomorrow. + +The next day you set off towards the wooded hills, it doesn’t take long before you see a kobold patrol wandering around. They look exactly like how you’ve seen them in books, sort of like scaly goblins, but from what you’ve heard, a lot more cunning. + +Your team attempts to be stealthy, but perhaps it’s due to the excitement of this first “real” battle. Edgar isn’t as silent as he should be and clumsily steps on a few twigs alerting the patrols. + +The kobold patrol sees all of you, yell excitedly in their language and run away. Edgar is about to chase them, but you knock him to the ground. + +“What the hell?” he says wondering why you stopped him. +“Trap, Edgar. Look.” You say and point to a tripwire that would’ve triggered a spiked log that he almost stepped on. +“Oh.” He says. +“You were trained better than that Edgar and we went over this last night! This area is probably going to be filled with traps. Now come on, we don’t have the luxury of a surprise attack any more.” + +The remainder of this attack is a tedious exercise in cautiousness broken up by quick battles. The kobolds really have set up traps everywhere and take full advantage of your team’s slow movement to launch periodic ambushes themselves. Fortunately they are very poor warriors even in large numbers and you easily dispatch them. All your fighting eventually leads to a cave, which you sort of figured it would. You warn your team that this place is probably going to be a maze and heavily trapped as well. + +“Should we split up so we can cover more ground?” Brenda asks. +“No, we’re going to be neck deep in them when we go into that cave. They may be poor warriors, but even enough of them could overwhelm one or two of us. If we stick together we’ll be fine. Besides, we’re going to be here awhile anyway.” + +There “awhile” isn’t an exaggeration. You spend the remainder of the day and night killing kobolds. Your team seems to enjoy it, but you eventually start to get bored of the monotony. You don’t even bat an eye when you come across what seems to be a breeding chamber and you exterminate all the female kobolds and their young. Eventually you reach a large cave clearing where you meet the leader. + +“Sssss! Defilersss! Murderersss!” a slightly larger kobold hisses at you from some sort of primitive throne and then orders his guards to attack. It’s rather pathetic, as they fare no better than the rest. A few quick sword and axe blows and this kobold chieftain is alone. + +While the rest of your team is eager to kill him like the rest, you have a slightly better idea for him. You engage him in singles combat, which is over pretty quickly. You then subdue him with some rope you have in your pack. + +“Why are we taking him as prisoner? We’re Eternals! We don’t take prisoners!” Edgar shouts. +“Yeah, we also aren’t supposed to miss obviously placed traps either, so there’s a first time for everything. Besides I’ve got a good idea for this one.” + +You drag the kobold leader back to town who curses you the whole time in a mixture of his language and yours. When you arrive it is now dawn and the townspeople are surprised to see you back, let alone with a kobold in tow. + +You tie the kobold leader to a tree near the center of the town and address everyone. + +“Citizens of Dalt! The kobold nest has been completely destroyed. This…thing was the leader of this particular nest and most likely orchestrated the raid; do with him as you will. There of course are other kobold nests in this province, but the Eternals will be taking care of this long overdue problem. All the Empire needs in this matter is your continued obedience and loyalty.” + +After giving this speech you and your team take your leave and hear the screams of the kobold leader as the villagers torture and rip him apart. + +When you arrive back at Fort Glory, other soldiers are surprised to see all of you back alive. It was assumed that at best, half of you would be dead. There is a possible thought of whether you actually succeeded and didn’t just come back in failure, but given that Kane took it upon himself to take “trophies” his gruesome necklace of kobold ears makes it pretty clear that the job was done. + +When you report however, it seems the fort has undergone a change in leadership + +“I’m Lieutenant Anu and now in charge of Fort Glory until further notice. First things first, did you accomplish your mission? +“Mission accomplished, we killed them all lieutenant. All of their warriors, all of their women, all of their babies, pets, their leader, all of them.” +“Well always helps to be sure. Which brings me to the next point. Your man Gerald is currently in the stockade. In fact he may be facing execution.” +“Might I inquire why, sir?” +“I’d say you’d probably know as much about it as I do, but if I had to guess? Captain pervert put the moves on him and your man took exception to it and killed him. He claims it was an accident, but there’s no way the captain twisted his own head ALL THE WAY AROUND just by tripping and falling over.” +“If Gerald says it was an accident, then I believe him sir.” +“Okay look, I’m not going to sit here and say that the captain wasn’t complete scum. I should know I had to serve along side him for the past five years. I saw how he’d have teenage boys brought to his office. Now I know you guys are these Eternals that we’ve all heard about, but dammit man, we can’t just have murders within the ranks, we have to respect some sort of order here!” +“We’re all about respecting order sir…I suppose if it is absolutely necessary to execute Gerald, then that will be regrettable. I would however say that Gerald’s actions actually contributed to more order here and will better for the Empire in general.” +“How so?” +“The removal of captain Pollo, has allowed you to move up in rank and judging by your feelings on this matter you are a person who respects military decorum. I have no doubt, the fort will be run more efficiently now.” + +Lieutenant Anu chuckles a bit. “I’d almost think you were trying to butter me up to save your guy, but I already know you genuinely believe what you’re saying and you’re right anyway. (Sigh) Well…I suppose accidents do happen. Nobody here is going to miss Pollo, so I’ll have Gerald released and write up a report.” +“Sir, can I make a request?” +“Don’t you think you’re pushing your luck?” +“Not my intention sir, but I was going to ask if there’s anything my group could do here that’s a little more challenging than killing kobolds?” +“Hmm, yes I imagine you would feel that way...well on the furthest southern edge of the province there have been bands of nomadic raiders and there have been rumors of them organizing under some sort of shaman. Dunno if it’s true or not. Of course we could also transfer you someplace where the battle is a little more suited to your violence level.” +> Request transfer +You don’t see much point in staying in this place anymore, you would most likely serve the Empire better elsewhere. Captain Anu grants the request, though he mentions he knows that a Mr. Mol is taking interest in your progress here, so it’ll have to go through him first. + +A couple days pass and it is all straightened out. Mr. Mol approves, but he goes with his original plan of separating you all. Brenda and Gerald remain in the Nalin province, Roldan and Warrick go to the Felkan border. You, Kane and Edgar all wind up at the Rask frontier, specifically Fort Defiance. The split is a little odd for all of you, considering you’ve all been together so long. + +You say your goodbyes to Brenda and Gerald first when the caravan comes for you. Next you say your goodbyes to Warrick and Roldan when they make their stop. The remainder of the trip is in relative silence, though sometimes Edgar remarks about how he can’t wait to display his true combat skills against better challenges. + +Eventually you arrive at the Rask frontier and make your stop at Fort Defiance. You haven’t gotten off the caravan five minutes when a man wearing battle armor approaches you. + +“Hey are you the Eternals?” +“Yes we are.” +“I’m Captain Ian, I’ve heard about you and while you don’t look like much, we’ll take anyone at this point. Though I would’ve preferred more battle mages or even orcs at this point. + +Captain Ian begins to give you a run down on the entire area. He mentions that the mortality rate here is high so morale isn’t the best. He goes on to mention that Shadow Guard detachments have been assigned here to help out, but between the ogres and the giants there’s only so much that even they can do. He mentions since you three have already worked together he’s just going to leave you together, but will be assigning you to a new unit where you will have others to command as well. + +With the caravan leaving, the three of you head to your new unit. When you see them, quite a few of them are predictably much older than you, but surprisingly you see that half of them are around your age. + +“So, you’re those Eternals huh?” one the older soldiers says almost dismissively. +“Yes? Did you need something corporal?” you say sensing the hostility. +“Nothing, sergeant. I just wondered if you were.” He says backing down from confrontation. + +The three of you settle in as you begin your assignment at Fort Defiance. + +Year 18 + +“Kane watch out!” you shout as the wind whips around you and the snowfall nearly blinds your vision. + +You can just make out the figure, which you know to be Kane roll out of the way of a club strike from an ogre attempting to attack him from behind. + +You look around and see the bloody dead bodies of several members of your team and the ogres that ambushed you. You knew that patrolling the Kragen Pass during a blizzard was a stupid idea, but Captain Ian insisted that you had to go and do it. It’s no wonder progress hasn’t been made up here with the captain making inept decisions at every turn. He’s not like Captain Pollo, but he’s not much better. You are starting to seriously wonder about how the Empire keeps allowing such incompetence to pass through. + +You run as fast as you can in the snow to help Kane battle the last two ogres. You cleave at the legs of one of the large monsters causing him to fall into the snow then finish him off with another strike through his head. Kane dispatches his own ogre opponent and the battle is finally over. + +“Looks like we’re the only two left again.” Kane says. +“Yeah, I’m getting used to that scenario. Come on, let’s head back. This blizzard isn’t letting up and we’ve done all we can here.” + +You and Kane leave behind the bodies and make your way through the blizzard in silence. It’s times like this you half expect Edgar to start going on about how well he did in battle, of course he hasn’t done that ever since you lost him in that battle against some giants last year. You never exactly approved of his reckless ways and it’s ultimately what got him killed, but you still miss him sometimes. + +You are almost at the end of the pass when a large rumbling is heard. You look overhead and even in this blizzard you can see the large figures looming on the cliffs and it’s what you originally were concerned about when you had to patrol this path. + +“GIANTS! RUN!” you yell and the pair of you attempt to make it out of the pass. Large boulders crash down along side the cliffs with an equally large amount of ice and snow. Kane runs faster and makes it ahead of you, but this only results in you seeing him crushed completely by a falling boulder. You are engulfed in snow and swept up and buried in the stuff. You’re disorientated, tired, freezing and slowly suffocating, but with determination, you manage to dig yourself out. + +Unfortunately several giants face you when you do dig yourself out. You’re out numbered and trapped in the pass. You know that this is most likely going to be your last battle. + +You draw your sword and walk towards the giants. It will be a good death, but your only regret is that you will not survive to serve the Empire for longer than you would’ve liked.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Unfortunately Pollo is right, the only decision that makes sense is to leave Gerald behind. + +Still, you aren’t fond of the idea though not necessarily for the moral reasons that most would be. This is an unproductive use of your team’s talents and pointless in the scheme of things. You can’t believe the Empire would allow such a petty man to be in charge of the safety of a province and why isn’t the Emperor aware of such inefficiency? + +“Very well.” +“I knew you’d see things my way. Have fun playing with the kobolds. You’re dismissed.” + +You leave Pollo’s office where your team is still waiting for you. + +“Gerald, I regret that you will not be coming with us on this mission. The Captain wants you to stay with him.” You say. +“What?! But I’m ready to fight!” he protests. +“There will be other missions, I promise you. We will prove ourselves so well on this one, that they will have no choice but to send us out on a regular basis. However, your orders are clear in this matter, you are to remain here with Captain Pollo.” +“B…yes sir.” + +Just before Gerald goes into the captain’s office, you whisper into his ear. + +“Accidents happen.” + +He’s a little puzzled by this comment, but you and the rest of your team proceed to your assignment and nobody says anything more about it. + +When you finally get to the town, it’s a sorry sight. A lot of the buildings are damaged and the streets are filled with debris. There are a few people attempting to clean up the place, but it’s clear that they’re all very demoralized. + +‘Oh, I see the Empire has finally decided to help us; well you’re too late! The kobolds raided this town last night and as you can see completely trashed the place!” says a disheveled man. +“The Empire has many places it has to protect citizen. It is regrettable that your town was attacked, but we are here now to eliminate the problem.” +“You’re here now? Where the fuck were you last night when my wife was killed by those ugly little bastards?” the man says getting in your face. +“Calm yourself citizen, this will not help your situation.” +“My situation? I just said my wife is fucking DEAD! I don’t give a shit about my situation anymore you fucking Empire dickhead! Fuck you and your fucking Emperor!” + +It is at this point the man unwisely pushes your chest with his hand and you instantly grab it and break his whole arm. He predictably crumples in excruciating pain, screaming as the bone juts out of the skin and blood runs out of his body into the mud. All the other towns people who have seen this back off or hide, as they are rightfully worried about what you’re going to do next. + +“Now listen up citizens of Dalt! I understand that you’ve all been through a lot, but that is not a reason to give in to insolence! You are all Empire subjects and you will show proper respect or what’s left of this town will suffer in such a manner that you’ll think what the kobolds did was a birthday party.” + +The man whose arm you broke begins to scream more obscenities at you in between his regular howls of pain. You look at Kane and nod. Kane finishes the man off by quickly decapitating him. You take his head and throw it before one of the crowd of peasants who look on in horror. + +“Remember this.” You say. + +You remain in the town of Dalt for the night and get rooms from an overly cooperative innkeeper. He also tells you a little information about the kobolds such what direction they came from, what sort of equipment they were using and how many there were during the attack. Before getting some rest you spend a little of the time discussing strategy with your team. You all don’t show it too much, but you are all a little excited about tomorrow. + +The next day you set off towards the wooded hills, it doesn’t take long before you see a kobold patrol wandering around. They look exactly like how you’ve seen them in books, sort of like scaly goblins, but from what you’ve heard, a lot more cunning. + +Your team attempts to be stealthy, but perhaps it’s due to the excitement of this first “real” battle. Edgar isn’t as silent as he should be and clumsily steps on a few twigs alerting the patrols. + +The kobold patrol sees all of you, yell excitedly in their language and run away. Edgar is about to chase them, but you knock him to the ground. + +“What the hell?” he says wondering why you stopped him. +“Trap, Edgar. Look.” You say and point to a tripwire that would’ve triggered a spiked log that he almost stepped on. +“Oh.” He says. +“You were trained better than that Edgar and we went over this last night! This area is probably going to be filled with traps. Now come on, we don’t have the luxury of a surprise attack any more.” + +The remainder of this attack is a tedious exercise in cautiousness broken up by quick battles. The kobolds really have set up traps everywhere and take full advantage of your team’s slow movement to launch periodic ambushes themselves. Fortunately they are very poor warriors even in large numbers and you easily dispatch them. All your fighting eventually leads to a cave, which you sort of figured it would. You warn your team that this place is probably going to be a maze and heavily trapped as well. + +“Should we split up so we can cover more ground?” Brenda asks. +“No, we’re going to be neck deep in them when we go into that cave. They may be poor warriors, but even enough of them could overwhelm one or two of us. If we stick together we’ll be fine. Besides, we’re going to be here awhile anyway.” + +There “awhile” isn’t an exaggeration. You spend the remainder of the day and night killing kobolds. Your team seems to enjoy it, but you eventually start to get bored of the monotony. You don’t even bat an eye when you come across what seems to be a breeding chamber and you exterminate all the female kobolds and their young. Eventually you reach a large cave clearing where you meet the leader. + +“Sssss! Defilersss! Murderersss!” a slightly larger kobold hisses at you from some sort of primitive throne and then orders his guards to attack. It’s rather pathetic, as they fare no better than the rest. A few quick sword and axe blows and this kobold chieftain is alone. + +While the rest of your team is eager to kill him like the rest, you have a slightly better idea for him. You engage him in singles combat, which is over pretty quickly. You then subdue him with some rope you have in your pack. + +“Why are we taking him as prisoner? We’re Eternals! We don’t take prisoners!” Edgar shouts. +“Yeah, we also aren’t supposed to miss obviously placed traps either, so there’s a first time for everything. Besides I’ve got a good idea for this one.” + +You drag the kobold leader back to town who curses you the whole time in a mixture of his language and yours. When you arrive it is now dawn and the townspeople are surprised to see you back, let alone with a kobold in tow. + +You tie the kobold leader to a tree near the center of the town and address everyone. + +“Citizens of Dalt! The kobold nest has been completely destroyed. This…thing was the leader of this particular nest and most likely orchestrated the raid; do with him as you will. There of course are other kobold nests in this province, but the Eternals will be taking care of this long overdue problem. All the Empire needs in this matter is your continued obedience and loyalty.” + +After giving this speech you and your team take your leave and hear the screams of the kobold leader as the villagers torture and rip him apart. + +When you arrive back at Fort Glory, other soldiers are surprised to see all of you back alive. It was assumed that at best, half of you would be dead. There is a possible thought of whether you actually succeeded and didn’t just come back in failure, but given that Kane took it upon himself to take “trophies” his gruesome necklace of kobold ears makes it pretty clear that the job was done. + +When you report however, it seems the fort has undergone a change in leadership + +“I’m Lieutenant Anu and now in charge of Fort Glory until further notice. First things first, did you accomplish your mission? +“Mission accomplished, we killed them all lieutenant. All of their warriors, all of their women, all of their babies, pets, their leader, all of them.” +“Well always helps to be sure. Which brings me to the next point. Your man Gerald is currently in the stockade. In fact he may be facing execution.” +“Might I inquire why, sir?” +“I’d say you’d probably know as much about it as I do, but if I had to guess? Captain pervert put the moves on him and your man took exception to it and killed him. He claims it was an accident, but there’s no way the captain twisted his own head ALL THE WAY AROUND just by tripping and falling over.” +“If Gerald says it was an accident, then I believe him sir.” +“Okay look, I’m not going to sit here and say that the captain wasn’t complete scum. I should know I had to serve along side him for the past five years. I saw how he’d have teenage boys brought to his office. Now I know you guys are these Eternals that we’ve all heard about, but dammit man, we can’t just have murders within the ranks, we have to respect some sort of order here!” +“We’re all about respecting order sir…I suppose if it is absolutely necessary to execute Gerald, then that will be regrettable. I would however say that Gerald’s actions actually contributed to more order here and will better for the Empire in general.” +“How so?” +“The removal of captain Pollo, has allowed you to move up in rank and judging by your feelings on this matter you are a person who respects military decorum. I have no doubt, the fort will be run more efficiently now.” + +Lieutenant Anu chuckles a bit. “I’d almost think you were trying to butter me up to save your guy, but I already know you genuinely believe what you’re saying and you’re right anyway. (Sigh) Well…I suppose accidents do happen. Nobody here is going to miss Pollo, so I’ll have Gerald released and write up a report.” +“Sir, can I make a request?” +“Don’t you think you’re pushing your luck?” +“Not my intention sir, but I was going to ask if there’s anything my group could do here that’s a little more challenging than killing kobolds?” +“Hmm, yes I imagine you would feel that way...well on the furthest southern edge of the province there have been bands of nomadic raiders and there have been rumors of them organizing under some sort of shaman. Dunno if it’s true or not. Of course we could also transfer you someplace where the battle is a little more suited to your violence level.” +> Face the raiders +You decide that it might be wise to maintain a presence here, after all there is still work to be done and you’re confident that things will be better at the fort now. Lieutenant Anu nods and says you can set out in a couple days to the town of Jekka. He mentions that the nomads have never been a problem like the kobold are, but lately they have been reaching that level. He also says they aren’t native to Nalin, but rather the desert land south of it. + +You spend the next couple of days at the fort are spent honing your weapon skills and telling your team to do likewise. Gerald joins you after being released from the stockade. He looks a little embarrassed and you reprimand him for his lack of finesse, but welcome him back. + +Eventually you set off for the southern Nalin border. The journey isn’t as uneventful as the first mission and you encounter a few kobolds attacking travelers along the roads. You easily dispatch them of course. + +The town of Jekka is in much better shape than Dalt, but its obvious the people here have been suffering from attacks. + +“Empire soldiers? Here? I thought you lot were chasing down kobolds to waste time with the likes of us.” A man says to you. He looks to be some sort of town sheriff. +“All Empire towns are under our protection citizen. We have heard this one is suffering heavy raids from the desert nomads.” +“ Well, we’ve been doing okay so far, but a few of the other border villages have gotten it pretty bad. One of them was totally destroyed. Those lizard riders have never been this bad or numerous before. The weird thing is, they just destroy and kill, they don’t actually do any proper raiding or looting, not that it really matters. but for the past few months.” +“We heard rumors of a shaman uniting them.” +“Yeah that’s the rumor, but really nobody knows what’s going on with them. They make quick attacks and then run back to their accursed desert. So when are more Empire soldiers coming?” +“They aren’t.” +“What?! We’ve been holding out for months with no hope in sight and now that you give us a little bit, you take it away again?” +“Citizen, I advise you to calm yourself.” You warn, wondering if you’re going to have to make another point like you did in Dalt. You don’t since thought since the sheriff has more sense. +“Alright, alright, but I’m telling you there are a lot of those lizard riders! I hope you’re more than just regular Empire soldiers. You guys Shadow Guard or something?” +“We’re Eternals.” + +You set up your staging point in Jekka. The desert raiders will probably attack this town again as usual, so you might as well take advantage of the fact. The waiting is tedious, but eventually after few days it pays off. + +Several of the raiders appear in the distance and make no hesitation in their attack. The raiders are trying to rely on intimidation, because they sure aren’t relying on strategy and only attack the town from one direction. The lizard creatures that the raiders ride might be intimidating to the average citizen, but you’ve fought bigger creatures during training. They’re rather clumsy beasts actually and when you and your team begin to use your own hit and run tactics, they start to collide into each other causing problems for the raiders. + +As for the raiders themselves, they prove to be barely better fighters than the kobolds after dismounting several of them. Underneath the desert protection gear they wear, they don’t appear to be human or any other race you’re familiar with, but they bleed just like all them and that’s the important thing. + +As many battles often go, this one is over quicker than it felt. The remaining raiders run off and you order your people to mount up and chase them down which is fairly easy to do. + +Jekka suffered some damage and a few dead, but overall the townspeople couldn’t be happier with the outcome and most shower you with praise. However, you get the impression that you’re going to be facing more of these raiders in the near future and you’re right. + +A couple days pass and another raid on the town of Jekka occurs in the same exact manner, then again a few days after that. A week passes and there are no more raids, but that doesn’t mean they’ve stopped. You already know they’ve been attacking several settlements, so you tell Warrick and Roldan to scout out the closest ones to see what their situation is while you try to build some proper defenses for Jekka. + +A week passes and you learn more about your foes from a villager who survived the destruction of his home. The desert raiders (or the Usksha as you’ve come to find out their proper name) have indeed been united under one banner by a shaman of some sort. The villager says he saw this being with his own eyes and was spared for the sole purpose to warn all that the Usksha will no longer tolerate a foreign presence encroaching on their desert. This shaman said he has been chosen personally by their god Usk to destroy all those that do and that the town of Jekka will not be able to resist the inevitable destiny that it will fall. + +“So, he’s coming here then? Good, saves us the trouble of hunting him down.” You reply. +“Combined with this information and based on what Warrick and I have scouted out, it sounds like there will be even more of them. Possibly a full blown army. We might need reinforcements from Fort Glory.” Roldan says. +“Reinforcements? Hah! We’ve beaten them several times with ease!” +“Would they even get here in time? We don’t exactly know when the attack will come.” Brenda asks. +“They might or they might not, still we should try. Find out who the best runner is in this town and have them travel to Fort Glory with this news. We can continue to prepare in the meantime.” You say. + +The next morning several Uskshas appear in the distance like the other times you fought them. Then more show up, then even more. The town sheriff completely panics and says he’s never seen this many before. This of course causes most of the other townies to panic as well. You slap him and tell him if he and anyone else aren’t going to be helpful then they need to stay out of the way and find someplace to hide. + +They come at you screaming and yelling in their barbarian language and suddenly a huge worm thing comes out of the ground in the center of town. + +“Ha ha! At last a real fight!” Edgar yells and runs at it immediately as it destroys the nearby tavern. You order Kane to come with you to help Edgar while the rest try to delay the rest of the usksha. You just hope the barricades hold up long enough for them to greatly whittle the numbers down. + +You, Edgar and Kane approach the great worm, which bashes its great body into the side of another building, killing many townspeople hiding inside. + +“YOU! You think you can destroy me? I am an avatar of Usk! How can you destroy a god when you are, but a mere child of a corrupt empire?” you suddenly hear in your mind. + +It takes a split moment, but you realize that this beast is the shaman. He has used magic of some kind to transform himself into this thing. It doesn’t matter how much favor he has from his god though, he isn’t one and will die like the rest. + +Using his daggers like climbing gear, Kane jumps as high as he can and sink them into the shaman, while you and Edgar attempt to chop at his body like it was a tree. The shaman roars and attempts to smash you with his body, but you pull Edgar out of the way and Kane jumps off before being crushed. The shaman burrows back into the hole he came from and a few moments later he breaks through in another area of the town and begins destroying the barricades. You reach the shaman just in time for him to sink back into his hole again, while usksha pour in through the broken wall. + +“Shit!” Edgar shouts in exasperation. +“Plug up that opening with their dead bodies!” you shout as you chop off the head of one their lizards before doing the same to the fallen rider. + +Holding the back the tide of usksha isn’t exactly what you want to be doing though, you want to take down that shaman, do that and this battle is over. + +When you hear him break through the ground again elsewhere in town, you tell Kane and Edgar to hold the line here, while you go see if you can get him. + +You see him near the center of town again trying to finish destroying the buildings there. You chop down a few usksha near him and resume attempting to bring him down. He uses his crushing attack like last time, but this time you anticipate and not only dodge, but you manage to run your sword into his eye when his head is at your level. He bellows in pain and attempts to escape again, but you won’t let go of your sword and pull it towards you as he pulls backwards. You fall to the ground as the sword finishes slicing through the shaman’s flesh leaving a gapping wound where his eye and part of his “face” would be. + +You then see the worm collapse to the ground and begin to glow. Some of the others nearby, human and usksha alike stop fighting to stand and watch in wonder. The shaman transforms back into his natural form, his head and body displaying heavy wounds. + +“No…can’t…you…why…we hate you…you aren’t…wanted…your empire will die…we will reclaim what is oursss…” are the scattered words you hear in your head as you approach the shaman’s broken body. +“Stop talking.” You say and run your sword through his other eye. + +It is at this point you hear the howls of several usksha as their mental link with their leader has been severed. You, your team and even a few vengeful townspeople butcher the remaining usksha that don’t get away while attempting to retreat. + +Jekka is half in ruins and many are dead, but the battle has been won. + +The following day a detachment of troops arrive from Fort Glory. They look at the carnage and the platoon leader reports to you. + +“I’m Corporal Delan and I’m here to help you with…shit, what the hell happened here?” +“Victory, corporal. Victory.” You say. +“So…the threat is gone?” +“I wouldn’t say it’s gone, but it won’t be rearing its head for a long time.” +“I say we should march into that desert and wipe them out permanently, then we’d never have to worry about them ever again!” Edgar says. +“Well, if you decide to do that, we’ll help. I know you’ve been busy down here so I don’t know if you’ve heard, but we’ve made great strides in eliminating the kobolds, so Captian Anu told us to help you with this problem as much as we can. +> March into the desert +The usksha are broken and on the run, the opportunity to eliminate them as a future threat is certainly there, along with extending the Empire’s influence south of the Nalin province. Your recent victories have filled you with confidence and you agree you should mount an attack on the usksha. + +“You can’t be serious! Look I know you guys are Eternals, and I won’t deny that you’re the best warriors I’ve ever seen, but even you won’t be able to conquer the usksha in their desert! They’ve lived there for centuries, even before the Empire existed! They know it like nobody else, you’ll be outnumbered and fighting the elements themselves!” the Jekka sheriff exclaims. Somehow he survived the battle by hiding no doubt. + +Perhaps he is content on being a coward all his life, but you were meant for much more! You are an Eternal and the Emperor himself will reward you himself when you make the first steps in civilizing the desert. You slap him again and tell him that you’ll need as much water as everyone can carry. + +After a period of rest, you, your team and Delan’s men set off for the desert. You figure the best way to approach this is to follow the usksha’s tracks. This works out well at first as the lizard mounts are heavy footed creatures that leave deep prints, so you come across several small bands of fleeing usksha. + +When you begin to leave the Nalin province and enter the desert, the prints get harder to track. You follow tracks for two days before you find more usksha. Still, you aren’t finding any large settlements. + +By day four and Delan’s men are starting to complain. He tries to maintain order, but it’s obvious they can’t take the heat of the day and cold of the night. Your own team is fairing better, but even a couple of them are starting to make comments. + +On the seventh night, you’re ambushed by several usksha who spring up from the sands itself; they manage to kill several of Delan’s men before you dispatch them. + +“Sergeant, I think we need to get the hell out of this desert. There’s nothing here, but sand and death!” +“Then leave weakling! We’re more than able to carry out this mission ourselves! We don’t need anybody! We’re Eternals!” Edgar shouts. +“I don’t doubt our abilities sir, but I’m beginning to wonder if this isn’t a waste of time. We’ve defeated the usksha and chased them deep into their own land. Maybe we’ve made our point.” Roldan says. +“I’m finding myself agreeing sir, we could better serve the Empire elsewhere.” Gerald adds. + +“Duly noted. We’re sticking with the original plan and as for you Delan, you’re under my command too, so you aren’t going anywhere either, now I advise you to find your guts and keep what men you have left in line, before I take away what little authority you still have left.” + +Corporal Delan obeys and silently slinks back to his men. Your own people obey as well, but you know that the voices of dissent are already there. Still, you’re convinced that you’ll find something of importance out here along with wiping out usksha. + +On day ten, a strange reptilian creature attacks you. The first instinct is to defend yourself of course, but when it turns Warrick and Gerald to stone instantly, even you find yourself worried. + +“Don’t look at it! It’s got some sort of magic attack!” you shout and put your shield to cover yourself. + +Delan and his couple remaining men don’t even stick around they turn and run completely. Edgar closes his eyes and swings wildly at the beast, but only manages to get himself mauled by the creature’s sharp teeth and claws. The distraction is enough for Brenda to shoot several arrows in the beast while its back is to her. The beast gives a final bellow and dies. + +You survey the damage and it’s pretty bad. You’ve lost two men, and looking at Edgar on the ground it’ll soon be three. He can’t even form any words, he just looks up at the sky gurgling and spitting up blood and trying to clutch at an arm which is no longer there. + +“I told you! I told you we should’ve gone back!” Roldan screams. +“Silence! I’m in charge here and you won’t speak to me like that again!” you say. +“Somebody needs to tell you something, because…” + +You lose your patience from a combination of the disrespect, the loss, the failure, the heat, all of it. You punch Roldan causing him to fall to the ground. He looks up in disbelief at first, but then begins to laugh. + +“Ha ha…ha ha ha ha ha! We…ha ha ha! Found more usksha!” he laughs and points. You all turn to see a sizable group of mounted usksha in the distance. They don’t move in either, instead they shoot at you with their bows. + +Brenda catches an arrow to her leg before you can sound a retreat. You and Kane run, but Roldan just sits there still laughing, the next time you turn your head to look back, he’s no longer sitting up. Brenda tries to keep up, but the arrow in her leg slows her down and eventually she catches two more arrows in her back, killing her much in the same way she killed that strange beast. + +Eventually you and Kane get away, but in all the excitement you don’t know where you are and you don’t even have the tracks you were following to go back to. Under better and less stressful conditions you might get your bearings again, but you never do. + +Your next few days involve wandering the desert being continually worn down by usksha ambushes and the sun. You leave Kane’s dehydrated body and continue alone, but not for long as you eventually also succumb to the heat. + +As you lay dying your thoughts of glory are gone and though dehydrated, you manage to shed a single tear for your failure to serve the Emperor.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide that it might be wise to maintain a presence here, after all there is still work to be done and you’re confident that things will be better at the fort now. Lieutenant Anu nods and says you can set out in a couple days to the town of Jekka. He mentions that the nomads have never been a problem like the kobold are, but lately they have been reaching that level. He also says they aren’t native to Nalin, but rather the desert land south of it. + +You spend the next couple of days at the fort are spent honing your weapon skills and telling your team to do likewise. Gerald joins you after being released from the stockade. He looks a little embarrassed and you reprimand him for his lack of finesse, but welcome him back. + +Eventually you set off for the southern Nalin border. The journey isn’t as uneventful as the first mission and you encounter a few kobolds attacking travelers along the roads. You easily dispatch them of course. + +The town of Jekka is in much better shape than Dalt, but its obvious the people here have been suffering from attacks. + +“Empire soldiers? Here? I thought you lot were chasing down kobolds to waste time with the likes of us.” A man says to you. He looks to be some sort of town sheriff. +“All Empire towns are under our protection citizen. We have heard this one is suffering heavy raids from the desert nomads.” +“ Well, we’ve been doing okay so far, but a few of the other border villages have gotten it pretty bad. One of them was totally destroyed. Those lizard riders have never been this bad or numerous before. The weird thing is, they just destroy and kill, they don’t actually do any proper raiding or looting, not that it really matters. but for the past few months.” +“We heard rumors of a shaman uniting them.” +“Yeah that’s the rumor, but really nobody knows what’s going on with them. They make quick attacks and then run back to their accursed desert. So when are more Empire soldiers coming?” +“They aren’t.” +“What?! We’ve been holding out for months with no hope in sight and now that you give us a little bit, you take it away again?” +“Citizen, I advise you to calm yourself.” You warn, wondering if you’re going to have to make another point like you did in Dalt. You don’t since thought since the sheriff has more sense. +“Alright, alright, but I’m telling you there are a lot of those lizard riders! I hope you’re more than just regular Empire soldiers. You guys Shadow Guard or something?” +“We’re Eternals.” + +You set up your staging point in Jekka. The desert raiders will probably attack this town again as usual, so you might as well take advantage of the fact. The waiting is tedious, but eventually after few days it pays off. + +Several of the raiders appear in the distance and make no hesitation in their attack. The raiders are trying to rely on intimidation, because they sure aren’t relying on strategy and only attack the town from one direction. The lizard creatures that the raiders ride might be intimidating to the average citizen, but you’ve fought bigger creatures during training. They’re rather clumsy beasts actually and when you and your team begin to use your own hit and run tactics, they start to collide into each other causing problems for the raiders. + +As for the raiders themselves, they prove to be barely better fighters than the kobolds after dismounting several of them. Underneath the desert protection gear they wear, they don’t appear to be human or any other race you’re familiar with, but they bleed just like all them and that’s the important thing. + +As many battles often go, this one is over quicker than it felt. The remaining raiders run off and you order your people to mount up and chase them down which is fairly easy to do. + +Jekka suffered some damage and a few dead, but overall the townspeople couldn’t be happier with the outcome and most shower you with praise. However, you get the impression that you’re going to be facing more of these raiders in the near future and you’re right. + +A couple days pass and another raid on the town of Jekka occurs in the same exact manner, then again a few days after that. A week passes and there are no more raids, but that doesn’t mean they’ve stopped. You already know they’ve been attacking several settlements, so you tell Warrick and Roldan to scout out the closest ones to see what their situation is while you try to build some proper defenses for Jekka. + +A week passes and you learn more about your foes from a villager who survived the destruction of his home. The desert raiders (or the Usksha as you’ve come to find out their proper name) have indeed been united under one banner by a shaman of some sort. The villager says he saw this being with his own eyes and was spared for the sole purpose to warn all that the Usksha will no longer tolerate a foreign presence encroaching on their desert. This shaman said he has been chosen personally by their god Usk to destroy all those that do and that the town of Jekka will not be able to resist the inevitable destiny that it will fall. + +“So, he’s coming here then? Good, saves us the trouble of hunting him down.” You reply. +“Combined with this information and based on what Warrick and I have scouted out, it sounds like there will be even more of them. Possibly a full blown army. We might need reinforcements from Fort Glory.” Roldan says. +“Reinforcements? Hah! We’ve beaten them several times with ease!” +“Would they even get here in time? We don’t exactly know when the attack will come.” Brenda asks. +“They might or they might not, still we should try. Find out who the best runner is in this town and have them travel to Fort Glory with this news. We can continue to prepare in the meantime.” You say. + +The next morning several Uskshas appear in the distance like the other times you fought them. Then more show up, then even more. The town sheriff completely panics and says he’s never seen this many before. This of course causes most of the other townies to panic as well. You slap him and tell him if he and anyone else aren’t going to be helpful then they need to stay out of the way and find someplace to hide. + +They come at you screaming and yelling in their barbarian language and suddenly a huge worm thing comes out of the ground in the center of town. + +“Ha ha! At last a real fight!” Edgar yells and runs at it immediately as it destroys the nearby tavern. You order Kane to come with you to help Edgar while the rest try to delay the rest of the usksha. You just hope the barricades hold up long enough for them to greatly whittle the numbers down. + +You, Edgar and Kane approach the great worm, which bashes its great body into the side of another building, killing many townspeople hiding inside. + +“YOU! You think you can destroy me? I am an avatar of Usk! How can you destroy a god when you are, but a mere child of a corrupt empire?” you suddenly hear in your mind. + +It takes a split moment, but you realize that this beast is the shaman. He has used magic of some kind to transform himself into this thing. It doesn’t matter how much favor he has from his god though, he isn’t one and will die like the rest. + +Using his daggers like climbing gear, Kane jumps as high as he can and sink them into the shaman, while you and Edgar attempt to chop at his body like it was a tree. The shaman roars and attempts to smash you with his body, but you pull Edgar out of the way and Kane jumps off before being crushed. The shaman burrows back into the hole he came from and a few moments later he breaks through in another area of the town and begins destroying the barricades. You reach the shaman just in time for him to sink back into his hole again, while usksha pour in through the broken wall. + +“Shit!” Edgar shouts in exasperation. +“Plug up that opening with their dead bodies!” you shout as you chop off the head of one their lizards before doing the same to the fallen rider. + +Holding the back the tide of usksha isn’t exactly what you want to be doing though, you want to take down that shaman, do that and this battle is over. + +When you hear him break through the ground again elsewhere in town, you tell Kane and Edgar to hold the line here, while you go see if you can get him. + +You see him near the center of town again trying to finish destroying the buildings there. You chop down a few usksha near him and resume attempting to bring him down. He uses his crushing attack like last time, but this time you anticipate and not only dodge, but you manage to run your sword into his eye when his head is at your level. He bellows in pain and attempts to escape again, but you won’t let go of your sword and pull it towards you as he pulls backwards. You fall to the ground as the sword finishes slicing through the shaman’s flesh leaving a gapping wound where his eye and part of his “face” would be. + +You then see the worm collapse to the ground and begin to glow. Some of the others nearby, human and usksha alike stop fighting to stand and watch in wonder. The shaman transforms back into his natural form, his head and body displaying heavy wounds. + +“No…can’t…you…why…we hate you…you aren’t…wanted…your empire will die…we will reclaim what is oursss…” are the scattered words you hear in your head as you approach the shaman’s broken body. +“Stop talking.” You say and run your sword through his other eye. + +It is at this point you hear the howls of several usksha as their mental link with their leader has been severed. You, your team and even a few vengeful townspeople butcher the remaining usksha that don’t get away while attempting to retreat. + +Jekka is half in ruins and many are dead, but the battle has been won. + +The following day a detachment of troops arrive from Fort Glory. They look at the carnage and the platoon leader reports to you. + +“I’m Corporal Delan and I’m here to help you with…shit, what the hell happened here?” +“Victory, corporal. Victory.” You say. +“So…the threat is gone?” +“I wouldn’t say it’s gone, but it won’t be rearing its head for a long time.” +“I say we should march into that desert and wipe them out permanently, then we’d never have to worry about them ever again!” Edgar says. +“Well, if you decide to do that, we’ll help. I know you’ve been busy down here so I don’t know if you’ve heard, but we’ve made great strides in eliminating the kobolds, so Captian Anu told us to help you with this problem as much as we can. +> Leave it alone +Marching into the desert without a grand plan other than simple slaughter isn’t much of a plan. The usksha are nomads anyway, you’d never be able to catch all of them in their home turf. + +“No, I believe we’ve taken care of the major problem, but I think you should stay here and oversee the safety of this town now. We’ll head back to Fort Glory and report the situation.” You tell Delan. + +As you pack up and start to leave, Edgar begins to complain. + +“What are we doing? We should be trying to hunt down the rest of the usksha!” +“Our mission here is done, the usksha have been defeated. If we get ordered to mount an expedition into the desert then we shall do so.” +“Bah! Anu is probably going to assign us to fight kobolds again! We should be taking the initiative!” +“It seems every time you take the initiative, I end up having to help you in some way. I’d recommend that you worry less about fighting and more about your combat techniques.” + +At this point Edgar gets noticeably mad, but says nothing and walks off. You’re starting to get slightly concerned about him. You’d rather not have to teach him a lesson like you did when you were still training under Mistress. + +When you arrive at Fort Glory and report to Captain Anu he’s pleased with what you’ve accomplished and is impressed. He says he’d like to keep you here to finish up wiping out the kobold infestation, but he’s received word from the top that your team is to be transferred elsewhere. + +“Where are we going sir?” +“The Rask frontier and I don’t mind saying I don’t envy you.” +“I’ve heard of the place before. What is the situation there?” +“Bad, worse and downright horrible. As far as I know the Empire has been trying to establish order there for decades and not making any progress.” +“Captain, I certainly hope you don’t make it a habit of saying disparaging things about the Empire.” A man says walking into the room. It’s Mr. Mol. +“Uh no sir. Sorry sir.” Captain Anu says sheepishly. + +Mr. Mol overlooks his comments and speaks to you directly. + +“Ignore the captain’s words, everyone exaggerates the situation at the Rask frontier. While the area is having some problems, the fact remains if it really was so bad there, we would’ve pulled out a long time ago. Anyway, congratulations on your latest mission. Couldn’t help overhearing your report in the next room, quite impressive. Which makes me believe it was a good idea to transfer you now.” +“The Eternals are ready to serve the Emperor wherever he may need us sir.” You say. +“And the Emperor will always appreciate your service. He has been watching you, you know. He always is. That is why he believes you would be most effective apart from each other.” +“Sir?” +“You are Eternals, m’boy. You were bred to lead as well as fight. You’ve already proven yourself to be able to do both, but your fellow Eternals will never reach their fullest potential if they live under your shadow. All of you will be separated and given your own commands in territories the Emperor needs you the most. I have no doubt you all will be successful and honor the Emperor with your future victories.” +“W..we will sir, but you said territories. Are we not all being sent to the Rask frontier?” +“Oh I think the captain misunderstood. A few of you are being sent there, but some of you are staying here, and others are yet being sent elsewhere. Here, here’s your orders, you can inform the rest of your team, I’m sure they’ll be excited to hear this news too, oh and consider yourself promoted to lieutenant. The rest of your team members will probably be promoted to sergeant rank when they officially get their assignments. I think that’s about it. A caravan will be here to transfer some of you to your new assignments in a few days. Good day.” + +As Mr. Mol goes walking out the office, you feel a little strange. Your team has been together so long, it feels weird to know that you’re going to be split apart. + +“Sorry for the wrong information, I thought all of you would be sent to the Rask frontier. Well I guess I’m glad to know some of your are staying, heh…are you okay?” Captain Anu asks. +“Huh? Oh yes. I’m okay captain. If you’ll excuse me I have to inform my team of their new assignments.” +“Certainly. Dismissed.” + +You inform your team of the news and there is a mixture of feelings. There is some excitement of gaining their own commands, but are still a little apprehensive about splitting up. Well all of them except Edgar who seems to be solely overjoyed that he’s getting his own command. + +“Okay, Roldan and Brenda, you’re staying here.” +“Damn, I was hoping I’d at least get to go some place different.” Brenda says. +“Make no mistake, this area still needs order established. I believe you and Roldan will do a fine job in continuing the reputation of excellence that we have built here.” + +You continue with the list. + +“Gerald and Warrick, you’re being assigned along the Felkan border. Apparently the non-aggression treaty the Empire had with the Felkan Kingdom has expired and tensions have been high. War with them may even break out.” +“Interesting. Well if war does break out, we’ll be the first one to show the Felkans the error of defying the Emperor’s mercy.” Warrick says. +“Yeah, yeah! Let’s get on with it, where am I going?” Edgar interrupts. + +You glare at Edgar and then continue. + +“You, Kane and I are all being sent to the Rask frontier.” +“As it should be. My skills were going to waste here.” +“Edgar, I’m going to say this while I’m still your superior. I certainly hope you realize that this isn’t a game and you’ll prove yourself to be a competent leader.” +“Hey, I’m just as much of a leader as you are! The difference is I take risks and that will be a trait that will necessary in a place like the Rask frontier! I will rise up in the ranks and bring honor to the name Eternal and glory to the Emperor!” +“You mean glory to yourself because you feel like you have something to prove.” You say. +“And you don’t? You’re a hypocrite anyway! Always were ever since we trained under Mistress! I still recall you begging for your life to her as she crushed you under her boot. From that day on you were always trying to prove yourself and beating the bloody pulp out everyone.” +“And as I recall you were on that end several times Edgar. Is that why you’re still trying to prove yourself?” +“You wanna try that now?” Edgar says getting in your face and at this point all of your fellow Eternals intervene to break up a potential fight. + +“Hey come on you guys! We can’t be seen fighting each other like this! We’re Eternals, we put all that stuff behind us back in training. We’re professionals and supposed to be setting the example for the Empire!” Roldan says. + +Edgar brushes himself and backs off. + +“Tell you what Roldan. You set the example for the Empire. All of you set the example. In the meantime, I’ll be scoring victories and actually serving the Emperor by conquering land in his name.” + +And with these last words, he takes his leave all of you. + +The last few days together are a little awkward with what transpired between you and Edgar. Still you say your goodbyes to Roldan and Brenda when the caravan comes. + +A few days after that, you then say your goodbyes to Warrick and Gerald. + +You, Edgar and Kane sit in silence for the remainder of the trip. Eventually you arrive at the Rask frontier and make your stop at Fort Destiny. You haven’t gotten off the caravan five minutes when a woman wearing battle armor approaches you. + +“Hey are you the Eternals?” +“Yes we are.” +“I’m Captain Krozer, I’ve heard a lot about you and wanted to meet you personally. Welcome to hell.” + +Captain Krozer begins to give you a run down on the entire area. She mentions that the mortality rate here is high so morale isn’t the best, but she hopes that you and the other Eternals assigned here can rally some sort hope here again. + +Captain Krozer also goes on to tell you that there’s been a slight change of plans in your assignments. She says that you’re still staying here, but that Kane and Edgar are going to Fort Defiance, which is further north. Probably for the best considering what transpired between you and Edgar. + +Kane nods a dignified goodbye to you, and gets back on the caravan; Edgar of course isn’t as pleasant and gives you a hostile glare before leaving. + +With the caravan leaving, you head to your new unit. When you see them, quite a few of them are predictably much older than you, but surprisingly you see that half of them are around your age. + +“So, you’re one those Eternals huh?” one the older soldiers says almost dismissively. You’re in no mood to warn anyone this time, so you go straight to the point and throw him to the floor with his arm painfully twisted behind his back. +“Correct, and you’ll address me as sir or lieutenant if you want to keep this arm, because it’ll be very hard to continue doing your duty for the Emperor with just a stump. Understand?” +“Argh. Y..yes sir!” + +And so begins your assignment in the Rask frontier. +> Years pass... +Chapter 2A: For The Empire! + + + +Year 20 + +“Watch it the last ones are coming from the left side!” you shout, pointing at the barbarian wolfmen breaking through the barricade. + +Two of your number go down before the might of the wolfmen. As always you find yourself having to do things yourself. Not that you’re adverse to placing yourself in the thick of battle, but sometimes you get a little tired of having to micromanage. + +One of the wolfmen goes down by your blade with ease, the other three however are shot full of bolts, though you were very nearly in the crossfire. + +“DAMMIT, watch where you’re shooting!” You shout at the dark elven mercenaries. +“Oh stop being so dramatic, we’ve been shooting with these crossbows longer than you’ve even been alive I’d wager.” One of them replies, followed by a few snickers. + +You shake your head at the fact that you have to routinely work with them, let alone having to put up with their kind. Then again you’ve had to put up with a lot around here for the past four years. + +“Are we done fighting these dogs now? When are we going to get back to killing more sveld? That’s a lot more fun.” One of the mercenaries says. +“You aren’t getting paid to have fun svelk! You’re getting paid to do your job. If you really want to go murder your tree loving cousins so bad, we’re not stopping you.” You say. +“Whatever monkey, our job here is done, we’re heading back. Let us know when you need our help again.” The mercenary says and they leave. + +You survey the damage to the logging camp and it’s going to be awhile before this place is up and running to it’s full capabilities again. Still, today is a victory and despite everything, you’ve managed to eliminate more enemies even if it does seem like they are everywhere in this harsh cold land. + +Unfortunately nowadays the Rask frontier isn’t the only place where the Empire has been having problems. Open war broke out with the Felkan Kingdom a couple years ago. Sometimes you wonder how things are going with Warrick and Gerald, but you’ve never heard anything about them, or from them. + +In fact you rarely hear news from anywhere unless it directly concerns you defending mining towns, logging town, or outposts from barbarians or the forest elves. It’s never pretty here, but you can only imagine what they deal with up at Fort Defiance where they routinely face ogres and sometimes even giants. You have heard that Edgar has made quite a name for himself with some of his actions. In a way you’re glad, because he’s living up to the title of an Eternal and doing honor by serving with distinction…still, knowing him he’s doing it all to try to “beat” you. + +As for you, you’ve made quite a name for yourself as well. You have improved the mortality rate of the soldiers here a little (most notably the ones serving under you), but you’ve also managed to successfully defend several towns with low citizen casualties too. + +The greatest accomplishments of yours are the complete destruction of several hostile barbarian tribes. The Black Wolves, the Enclave of the Bear, the Blood Boars, and other minor shape changing tribes have all been exterminated thanks to your relentless nature. Indeed, you’ve become so infamous that the barbarian tribes in this land have come to call you the “The Bane of Rask.” + +This recent battle was a last desperate regroup attack by one of the tribes, the “Silver Fangs” after you wiped out all their women and children in an attack on their camp. Grim business to be sure, but it wasn’t first time and it certainly won’t be the last. These tribes must learn that they cannot stand against the might of the Empire or the Emperor. If they can only learn that with their extinction then so be it. + +You report your victory to Captain Krozer. + +“Excellent as always lieutenant. I know time after time I can count on you. Which leads me to the next major task. From what I can tell we’ve managed to eliminate the major threats in this particular area of the Rask frontier, but we have two left. The forest elves and the Wendigo tribe are the two in question and I’m wondering which one we should focus our attention on first.” + +“Well I can tell you that the Wendigo tribe will be a challenge. They’re the biggest, toughest and meanest of all the barbarian shape shifters. So far we haven’t had a large battle with them yet, but with our extermination of the other tribes, the time is getting closer. As for the elves, it will be more tedious than anything as they use a lot of guerilla tactics and such. We’ve still never found any sort of home, base or camp of theirs, but I suppose those dark elven mercs will be more than willing to help us with eliminating them. I’m sure their leader, Edolith will most likely demand a high price as usual though.” You say. + +“(Sigh) Yeah, I’m sure she will. Things are never easy here. Fuck it; we’re pushing forward on both groups right now and putting an end to it once and for all. The question is, would you prefer to lead a company against the Wendigo tribe or go on a seek and destroy mission on the forest elves.” +> Attack the Wendigo tribe +“While I have every desire to see both of these blights erased from the Empire’s lands, I believe my abilities would be best served in leading the attack against the Wendigo tribe, captain.” You say. +“I had a feeling you’d be more drawn to that idea, and you are probably the best person for it, seeing how many victories you have against the barbarians tribes here. Very well, I shall send another officer to lead the mission against the elves and I hope those mercenaries lower their price in exchange for a chance to kill their tree loving kin. In fact I may go along on that mission.” Captain Krozer replies. +“You are captain?” +“Yes, someone needs to keep an eye on those shifty bastards. Besides I find that I’ve been getting stuck behind the desk too much lately. It’ll be good to be back out in the field. Don’t want to become like one of those fat self-important generals that do nothing except point to maps and make equally fat musings on tactics. A true leader should lead from the front, I’m sure you agree.” +“It is preferable yes…but I do understand the need to keep those with keen military minds safe from major war zones. Such people have their place as all do in their service of the Emperor.” +“Why lieutenant, are you complimenting me on my intelligence? It’s not like you to flirt.” Captain Krozer asks in a tone slightly friendlier than usual, it catches you a little off guard. +“I…no! I mean yes, you are very intelligent, but…” +“Relax lieutenant, just having a little fun, didn’t mean to put you on the spot. Anyway, we’ll pick this up later, you better get prepared for your mission, and good luck.” + +You do exactly that, get prepared. You know this will not be an easy battle. You fought a member of the wendigos by yourself before and it was one of your greatest fights. Fighting an entire tribe of them even with an entire company behind you will not make it easier. Most of the men while capable soldiers, they are still just recruits in some ways when facing the shear might and savagery of these barbarians, let alone a tribe like the wendigos. At this point you wish you had a few battle wizards or even orcs in your ranks, but most of those have been assigned either at Fort Defiance or on the frontlines of the Felkan War. + +You march through the ice and snow towards wendingo territory, along the way you come across a small village completely decimated. Looks like it was a fairly new one made up of some determined settlers. Still, no amount of determination could have possibly made it a good idea to start building a new settlement that was so close to wendigo territory without Empire protection. + +Houses have been burned, and the gory bodies of the dead are everywhere and in pieces. Some of the bodies have even been partially eaten. Not surprising, considering the wendigo tribe will cannibalize their own people if necessary. A couple of the newer recruits throw up at the grisly sight. + +The march eventually leads you a wooded hill area where they make their home. It’s there where you have your first major encounter with the wendigos. Their aren’t a lot of them, but they’re completely vicious and without fear. They think nothing of attacking you despite being outnumbered and bellow their terrible howl. A howl so dreadful it can affect the mind and causes a few of your men to lose their courage completely. + +“It’s all in your head! The Emperor’s Will protects us! Find your nerve or die!” you shout and clash with the nearest wendigo. + +It’s just the first of many such battles. The only good thing is the wendigos are pretty easy to find and make no attempts to hide from you, meaning you don’t really need to make a big effort at hunting them down. The bad thing of course is little by little your company is worn down by their attacks along with the land already being harsh and food being scarce. + +It’s not just that though, this land of theirs, it’s making you feel weird, to say nothing of your men. The howls of the wendingos seem to be on the very winds here. It’s constantly there sapping your mind and making yourself feel strange thoughts. + +“Lieutenant, I’m starting to feel really hungry. A lot of the men are.” Your second says to you. +“We just stopped to eat.” +“I know, but I dunno I’m still hungry.” +“Well we’re not stopping again. We need to keep moving the quicker we do this, the quicker we can go back home and have a proper meal.” +“Yes, a proper meal with meat. Lots of meat. Heh heh.” Your second says and walks away. + +By the fifth day, you finally come across a large wendigo encampment and it is there where you see some sort of leader. You knew they had to have one, these types always do. He’s predictably the largest of his kind and covered in pure white fur. When your company arrives, the wendigos make their howl, but more disturbingly some of your men make a rival howl of their own and charge into battle even before you give the command. + +The battle is a slaughter on both sides. You struggle against the wendigo leader striking several blows that would kill a normal man, but of course then you’re not fighting a man. He swipes you across the chest destroying your breast plate and lands another blow to your head which probably would’ve killed you had you not been wearing a helmet. It is enough to knock you down however. + +“Your combat skill is impressive, Bane of Rask. It will be an honor to add it my own when I devour your heart.” You suddenly hear in your head as you struggle to get up. You’ve heard this sort of talk before. Namely when you were fighting against the usksha shaman. + +You shake off the wendingo leader’s mental attempts to throw you off guard and narrowly avoid his foot stomping on your head. You grab your sword nearby and with all your might, you swing it at the very foot that just tried to crush your head and chop it clean off. + +The wendigo leader howls again, but this is one of pain as he tumbles to the ground. You waste no time and shove the blade down the beast’s gullet. While this would be enough to kill most, the leader manages punch you aside with all his thrashing and then tries to stand up on one foot with a sword still stuck through his mouth and coming out the other side of his head. + +It would be a darkly comical sight under different circumstances watching this beast hop around trying to pull a sword out of his head, but you’re in no mood to laugh. You charge into him as hard as you can to knock him down and grab the sword yanking it back and forth until you succeed in sawing off the top part of his head. + +To their credit, the remaining wendigos continue to fight and die with their leader. The battle is won and even you take a moment to rest. + +This rest is to be short lived. + +“Bane of Rask, you’ve just won a fierce battle wouldn’t it be nice to celebrate by filling your belly with meat? There is a lot in the pot over there.” +“…what?” you say to yourself and hold your head in your hands. +“The pot over there. Lots of tasty meat that this tribe was going to eat before you so rudely interrupted them. No sense in letting it go to waste.” +“…no I just killed you.” +“Did you? Of course if you wish you could just pick a body on the ground and start eating. Why not? You deserve it.” + +You know what’s going on here. The wendigos aren’t truly flesh and blood creatures! They’re some sort of spirits or something otherworldly. No wonder you’ve felt strange the entire time you’ve been here. + +You get up and call your men to leave immediately, only to see some of them have already fully succumbed to the wendigo curse. Eating the bodies laying on the ground and beginning to look less than human and more feral. +> Run +The longer you stay here, the more likely all of you are going to get possessed. This entire land is cursed and you need to get out of here. You and the rest of your unprocessed troops begin to back off while still keeping an eye on the new wendigos. Their preoccupation with fresh bodies is limited however and they soon begin to turn towards you. + +They howl that dreadful noise again and begin to transform. It is at this point some of your men run as fast as then can, others begin to hold their heads telling a voice to shut up. + +“Bane of Rask, join us or die here today!” you hear the voice hiss. + +Several wendigos run after the men who fled, while the others stay to attack you. For whatever reason, they’re not fighting with as much reckless abandon anymore, it’s almost as if they’ve absorbed the fighting skills of your soldiers. Despite this, you manage to pull out a victory, but you’re exhausted and wounded. You see some of your other men already beginning to transform having been possessed by the wendigos and you spare no time in killing them before they can transform as well. + +“Your skills for killing are misused, if you just embraced the primal instinct, you would be able to use your skills to the fullest extent and without the shackles of any higher authority.” +“SHUT UP!” you shout. + +Between the constant assaults to your mind and your wounds, you struggle to make your way out of wendigo territory. It doesn’t help that you’re also still being periodically attacked by the wendigos that presumably finished off the rest of your men who ran away. + +You run your sword through the face of a wendigo and ignore his claws ripping through your own armor and your flesh. You’re tired, but a rage is growing within you due to these constant assaults. You grab the already mortally wounded wendigo and as hard as you can you summon all your strength to break its neck. It falls to the snow in a heavy heap and you do as well. + +“Do it…nobody is around…feed to sustain your strength…” you hear. + +You sink your teeth into the body of the wendigo and begin to feed…or rather the carcass of its former host as the wendigo itself has left its body and managed to weave itself into your mind. Your barrier against it finally shattered, your mind is truly not your own anymore. While you are “alive” you are merely a puppet now. + +You spend the remainder of your days seeking out fresh flesh, until ultimately your mind is completely absorbed and under control of the wendigo.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“While I have every desire to see both of these blights erased from the Empire’s lands, I believe my abilities would be best served in leading the attack against the Wendigo tribe, captain.” You say. +“I had a feeling you’d be more drawn to that idea, and you are probably the best person for it, seeing how many victories you have against the barbarians tribes here. Very well, I shall send another officer to lead the mission against the elves and I hope those mercenaries lower their price in exchange for a chance to kill their tree loving kin. In fact I may go along on that mission.” Captain Krozer replies. +“You are captain?” +“Yes, someone needs to keep an eye on those shifty bastards. Besides I find that I’ve been getting stuck behind the desk too much lately. It’ll be good to be back out in the field. Don’t want to become like one of those fat self-important generals that do nothing except point to maps and make equally fat musings on tactics. A true leader should lead from the front, I’m sure you agree.” +“It is preferable yes…but I do understand the need to keep those with keen military minds safe from major war zones. Such people have their place as all do in their service of the Emperor.” +“Why lieutenant, are you complimenting me on my intelligence? It’s not like you to flirt.” Captain Krozer asks in a tone slightly friendlier than usual, it catches you a little off guard. +“I…no! I mean yes, you are very intelligent, but…” +“Relax lieutenant, just having a little fun, didn’t mean to put you on the spot. Anyway, we’ll pick this up later, you better get prepared for your mission, and good luck.” + +You do exactly that, get prepared. You know this will not be an easy battle. You fought a member of the wendigos by yourself before and it was one of your greatest fights. Fighting an entire tribe of them even with an entire company behind you will not make it easier. Most of the men while capable soldiers, they are still just recruits in some ways when facing the shear might and savagery of these barbarians, let alone a tribe like the wendigos. At this point you wish you had a few battle wizards or even orcs in your ranks, but most of those have been assigned either at Fort Defiance or on the frontlines of the Felkan War. + +You march through the ice and snow towards wendingo territory, along the way you come across a small village completely decimated. Looks like it was a fairly new one made up of some determined settlers. Still, no amount of determination could have possibly made it a good idea to start building a new settlement that was so close to wendigo territory without Empire protection. + +Houses have been burned, and the gory bodies of the dead are everywhere and in pieces. Some of the bodies have even been partially eaten. Not surprising, considering the wendigo tribe will cannibalize their own people if necessary. A couple of the newer recruits throw up at the grisly sight. + +The march eventually leads you a wooded hill area where they make their home. It’s there where you have your first major encounter with the wendigos. Their aren’t a lot of them, but they’re completely vicious and without fear. They think nothing of attacking you despite being outnumbered and bellow their terrible howl. A howl so dreadful it can affect the mind and causes a few of your men to lose their courage completely. + +“It’s all in your head! The Emperor’s Will protects us! Find your nerve or die!” you shout and clash with the nearest wendigo. + +It’s just the first of many such battles. The only good thing is the wendigos are pretty easy to find and make no attempts to hide from you, meaning you don’t really need to make a big effort at hunting them down. The bad thing of course is little by little your company is worn down by their attacks along with the land already being harsh and food being scarce. + +It’s not just that though, this land of theirs, it’s making you feel weird, to say nothing of your men. The howls of the wendingos seem to be on the very winds here. It’s constantly there sapping your mind and making yourself feel strange thoughts. + +“Lieutenant, I’m starting to feel really hungry. A lot of the men are.” Your second says to you. +“We just stopped to eat.” +“I know, but I dunno I’m still hungry.” +“Well we’re not stopping again. We need to keep moving the quicker we do this, the quicker we can go back home and have a proper meal.” +“Yes, a proper meal with meat. Lots of meat. Heh heh.” Your second says and walks away. + +By the fifth day, you finally come across a large wendigo encampment and it is there where you see some sort of leader. You knew they had to have one, these types always do. He’s predictably the largest of his kind and covered in pure white fur. When your company arrives, the wendigos make their howl, but more disturbingly some of your men make a rival howl of their own and charge into battle even before you give the command. + +The battle is a slaughter on both sides. You struggle against the wendigo leader striking several blows that would kill a normal man, but of course then you’re not fighting a man. He swipes you across the chest destroying your breast plate and lands another blow to your head which probably would’ve killed you had you not been wearing a helmet. It is enough to knock you down however. + +“Your combat skill is impressive, Bane of Rask. It will be an honor to add it my own when I devour your heart.” You suddenly hear in your head as you struggle to get up. You’ve heard this sort of talk before. Namely when you were fighting against the usksha shaman. + +You shake off the wendingo leader’s mental attempts to throw you off guard and narrowly avoid his foot stomping on your head. You grab your sword nearby and with all your might, you swing it at the very foot that just tried to crush your head and chop it clean off. + +The wendigo leader howls again, but this is one of pain as he tumbles to the ground. You waste no time and shove the blade down the beast’s gullet. While this would be enough to kill most, the leader manages punch you aside with all his thrashing and then tries to stand up on one foot with a sword still stuck through his mouth and coming out the other side of his head. + +It would be a darkly comical sight under different circumstances watching this beast hop around trying to pull a sword out of his head, but you’re in no mood to laugh. You charge into him as hard as you can to knock him down and grab the sword yanking it back and forth until you succeed in sawing off the top part of his head. + +To their credit, the remaining wendigos continue to fight and die with their leader. The battle is won and even you take a moment to rest. + +This rest is to be short lived. + +“Bane of Rask, you’ve just won a fierce battle wouldn’t it be nice to celebrate by filling your belly with meat? There is a lot in the pot over there.” +“…what?” you say to yourself and hold your head in your hands. +“The pot over there. Lots of tasty meat that this tribe was going to eat before you so rudely interrupted them. No sense in letting it go to waste.” +“…no I just killed you.” +“Did you? Of course if you wish you could just pick a body on the ground and start eating. Why not? You deserve it.” + +You know what’s going on here. The wendigos aren’t truly flesh and blood creatures! They’re some sort of spirits or something otherworldly. No wonder you’ve felt strange the entire time you’ve been here. + +You get up and call your men to leave immediately, only to see some of them have already fully succumbed to the wendigo curse. Eating the bodies laying on the ground and beginning to look less than human and more feral. +> Fight +As grim as it might be and as tired as you are, you can’t just let the spirits infect your men. For one thing it isn’t any way for a soldier to go down. For another they’ll just become the “new tribe” you just cleared out. Maybe this land is cursed, but you’ll not let it be infested with hosts for the spirits that dwell here. + +You draw your sword and several of your men who haven’t been affected do likewise. Those that have been infected finally stop their gruesome feast and look at you. + +“So hungry, must have more flesh, must be fresh, must be YOU!” your second in command screams ghoulishly and attacks you. + +Another battle takes place, though not as long or nearly as hard as the first, but you and what’s left of your company make a full retreat as fast as possible when it’s over. It isn’t a smooth retreat though. The thoughts of hunger are filling your minds constantly and being tired just makes it easier for the spirits to infect your men. Several more times you have to put down members of your own company who have turned. + +It isn’t until you leave those accursed wooded hills that you start to feel more like yourself, but even then the journey back isn’t easy. The cold, the hunger, and the overall mental and physical exhaustion takes its toll on your last remaining men. By the time you reach the nearest friendly settlement you have six left. + +“Heh, just like the old days, you silently chuckle to yourself, briefly thinking of your six Eternal fellows. + +You don’t think you’ve ever been pushed to the limit like this before. Truly it is only by the Emperor’s strength that you managed to make it through. You only hope you have not shamed him too much with your failure. + +Eventually you arrive at Fort Destiny and report to Captain Krozer, who is celebrating with several others in the fort. You don’t know what’s causing this unorthodox behavior, but you’re certainly surprised by it. + +“Captain, I have my mission report.” +“Hey! You’re back Bane of Rask! Isn’t that what they call you around here? Ha ha! I’m glad you’re back, I figured your mission would be as successful as mine! Have a drink!” +“Uh maybe later captain, but I…did you say there was a victory?” +“Well we wouldn’t be sitting here getting drunk if there wasn’t now would we? The campaign against the forest elves was completely successful. I have to give those svelk credit, they can sniff out their kin better than anyone. Was hardly even a fight, when we eventually did find their major home as it was filled mostly with non-combatant women and children. We’d killed most of the warriors trying to get there. Still, always grim business dealing with the enemy civvies. We managed to enslave most of the children at least without killing them, though if the svelk had it their way they would’ve raped and killed everyone. Uncivilized vicious bastards.” The general says taking another drink. +“You enslaved them?” you ask being slightly confused by the idea. +“Well sure…what you think I’d just kill them? I know that’s the way you do things lieutenant, and probably with those shape shifting barbarians its for the best, but let’s just say I’m a little more merciful than you. Hope it doesn’t ruin your perception of me.” +“Uh… not at all. I’m sure you are right captain. The elven children can be indoctrinated to become productive citizens of the Empire. They will learn that our way of life is superior and the correct way.” +“Ha ha, that’s why I like you lieutenant. You don’t know any better. Hey let’s take this conversation back to my office, it’s a little loud here.” + +You say okay and begin to follow her, but she grabs your hand in an effort to lead you. You aren’t sure of how to react, so you just let her. When you get there she sits on her desk and smiles at you. + +“Relax, lieutenant. I know you’re an Eternal, but you’re always so serious.” +“It’s just I really need to report my mission to you captain.” +“Oh very well, I know it’s important to you.” She says taking another drink. + +You tell her exactly what happened and she listens intently to your story. + +“Well lieutenant, looks like you managed to pull out a victory against all odds once again. I figured you would.” She says. +“Victory? I don’t feel like it was a victory, captain. I lost most of the company.” You reply. +“Normally I might agree, but from what you told me, it’s amazing you survived at all, let alone bring anyone back alive. Evil spirits, cursed lands, having to kill your own men turning into insane beasts…not something I’d want to face and I’ve seen my fair share of battles. Besides it sounds like the spirits can’t leave that area and you eliminated a majority of their hosts, as well as depriving them of more by doing what was necessary with our transformed soldiers. We’ll probably always have the odd wendigo running around due to idiotic adventurers exploring places where they shouldn’t, but the danger has been curtailed greatly thanks to you.” +“The Emperor’s will guided me and his vigor gave me the endurance to succeed.” +“Perhaps, but you really should’ve had a battle mage with you. I have no idea why central command has not sent us any despite my requests, things can’t be that bad with the Felkans! Sometimes I wonder what the hell they’re doing down there. Oh well at least I had you right?” she says and gets off her desk. +“Of course, I’ll be here for as long I am needed here general.” + +“Good.” She says and puts her arms around you and kisses you on the lips. You’re taken completely off guard and are completely out of your element. You’re reminded of Captain Pollo’s advances on Gerald, but this is different since you feel a little something for Krozer even though you’ve tried to not think about it. As the time you’ve spent here has gone by, your thoughts of Captain Krozer have sometimes been more than a little “friendly”, but you’ve tried to suppress them. + +You don’t know how to react except you sort of back away. + +“Is something wrong lieutenant?” the general asks +“I…uh…I don’t….should we be doing this?” +“Oh the ranks? Forget about it. I just want sex, it’s not like I’m planning on falling in love. Unless you really feel uncomfortable about protocol, I’d respect it of course, but I’d be lying if I said I wasn’t disappointed.” +“Well, no, I mean… I’ve been having these feelings of lust for you too captain.” You say untactfully. +“Ha ha! Well that’s good to know I guess.” The captain laughs. “So what’s the problem then?” +“…I just…I’ve never…” +“Never…ohhhhh! Really? Though I guess it makes sense. You were trained to kill from birth; going from battlefield to battlefield quoting Empire doctrine (sigh)” the captain touches your face. “Sometimes I wonder if we go too far. Well don’t worry about it; we’ll have time to catch you up. And like I keep telling you, just relax… and call me Alison.” + +You and the cap…Alison have an interesting time. It certainly isn’t anything you’ve experienced before, but its possibly the most pleasurable thing you’ve ever experienced. You understand a little more to as why other soldiers hold it in such high regard. + +You know not to let it affect your duty and after a few days of down time, you are ready to serve the Emperor again. Everyone is, Captain Krozer is going to do it elsewhere though, namely the Arat province on the Felkan border. + +She calls you in to tell you that someone by the name of Mr. Mol has been impressed with your abilities and thinks you are able to handle the Rask frontier without any supervision. As of now you are in charge of Fort Destiny and been promoted to captain. You don’t know what to say. + +“Congratulations on your new command, though I will say I don’t envy it! After being here for six years myself, I’ll be glad to be sent to the Arat province. Those Felkans can’t possibly be any worse than the shit we’ve faced here.” +“It was an honor to serve with you captain.” You say respectfully. +“Oh come on, you don’t need to put up a tough front with me, I know you’ll miss me and cry in your pillows at night.” She says with a smirk. +“I…won’t! I mean I’ll miss you, but…” +“Keep working on developing that sense of humor, but it’s nice to know I’ll be missed.” She says and kisses you on the cheek + +“Good bye and remember to take a rest from all the killing sometimes and enjoy what you can okay?” + +With those last words, Alison walks out of her office…or rather your office. + +And so begins your command of Fort Destiny. +> Years pass... +Year 25 + +“Another protest? What the hell is going on now?” you say. +“I don’t know the exact details, just that the miners are protesting their work conditions in the town of Keplavisk.” Lieutenant Verant replies. +“I’m getting sick of these protests, the Empire provides everything for these ungrateful wretches and they complain? They ought to be lucky we haven’t sent slaves to do their job! Alright send a detachment there and if they don’t break it up, kill a couple to make a point and remind them that it could be much worse.” +“Yes sir.” + +You sit stuck at your desk wondering when something worthwhile is going to happen. When you were first assigned to this job, the frontier was still dangerous. Even with the elimination of the wendigos and the elven home, there were still minor hostile barbarian tribes running around and sometimes even tribes of ogres or the odd giant who had wandered down from further north. + +Eventually you eliminated all of those threats to a degree that they were no longer a factor. Then boredom set in as the area became peaceful. For a moment you tried to take Alison’s advice she once gave you, but the problem is, the peace lasted too long, at least for you. + +Lately though the boredom has become annoyance. There has been a shift in the average Empire citizen’s attitude, namely one of insolence. many have started to complain about their jobs, their food, their freedom, everything. At first you questioned if it wasn’t some sort of supernatural influence as that could at least be a rational explanation of this mass madness. When the first open protests started, you handled them in an efficient manner and they stopped for a while, but only for a while. It’s as if the citizens want you to kill them. + +And apparently the problem isn’t just here. If anything this sort of open disobedience has been rearing its ugly head in other parts of the Empire a lot more than it has here and a lot sooner. + +Don’t these people understand that the Empire protects them and gives them everything? If it were not for Emperor’s wisdom to expand, they wouldn’t even have their homes, jobs in whatever province they hail from, never mind the constant vigilance to protect them against monsters that would rip them apart. + +Sometimes you wish you had been transferred to the Arat province. At least there’s a war going on there. You can only imagine that Warrick and Gerald don’t have to put up with this nonsense. Assuming they are still alive, as you have heard nothing about them and despite your new ranking, you can’t seem to get any information on them either. No word about about Roldan or Brenda either, but you do know that the Nalin province is known to be one of the most orderly places in the Empire now. + +You would even settle for being transferred to Fort Defiance at this point, they at least have to still have to stem the tide of beasts and monsters from the north. You’ve also wondered about Kane and Edgar. They’re the only two you do have some updated information on, but while you’ve all been in this territory for years you haven’t seen them since the day you separated company. Oh you’ve heard a few stories about Edgar killing giants single handedly, but that’s about it. In fact you’re surprised that neither one of them has earned command of Fort Defiance like you have with Fort Destiny. + +Sometimes it’s funny how thinking about something causes it to happen. + +You get a message from Fort Defiance and it’s from Kane! He states that he’s just taken command of Fort Defiance and would like to speak with you in person about some possible joint military operations. You naturally leave for Fort Defiance immediately. A certain excitement and even happiness dwells within you, it’ll be good to see a fellow Eternal again, even if Edgar is probably going to still be combative with you. Who knows though? Maybe he’s changed, it’s been years after all. + +Your trip to Fort Defiance is uneventful and when you arrive at the fort it’s as large as you’ve heard, but then it would have to be to fend off giants. You are greeted by several heavily armored orc troops and what looks to be a battle mage. (You still never managed to get either assigned to your fort) + +“Welcome to Fort Defiance captain! I am to take you to General Kane. He is most eager to see you! Come this way!” the battle mage says and as you are escorted through a series of dimly lit corridors one thought goes through your mind: “General?” + +When you arrive at Kane’s office he looks a little different with his head completely shaved, but other than that he hasn’t changed. He also has another man in his office dressed in dark leather armor, with a cloak. You’ve heard of their reputation, but this is the first time you’ve seen a member of the Shadow Guard. You knew a few were stationed up here though. + +Kane stands up and greets you. + +“Well if it isn’t the Bane of Rask! Ha ha ha! How are you my brother?” Kane says in a jovial manner. +“I’m fine…brother?” you reply being a little confused by Kane’s demeanor and him calling you brother. +“Yes! Of course! We are brothers! We grew up together, we trained together, and we fought together, and we are Eternals! Would that not constitute a brotherly bond?” he says. +“Heh, I suppose it would. Never thought about it before I guess.” You reply with a smile. +“Hey I’d like you to meet another brother of ours, this is Cyrus. Remember him? He was in our class, but he got transferred to the Shadow Guard when they first separated us.” +“Cyrus…oh yes, I do remember him. I have sometimes wondered what happened to some of during that first separation. I guess the rest went to the Shadow Guard then?” +“Yes, but only a few of us survived Shadow Guard training. Very few.” +“Sounds like us, a few of our class didn’t make it through our training either.” + +“No, it was nothing like what you went through. Trust me.” Cyrus says coldly. + +Kane quickly intervenes. + +“Don’t mind Cyrus, he’s a little on the serious side, sort of like you eh?” +“As I recall I don’t remember you being so talkative or jolly either.” You say. +“Hey what can I tell you, I’ve changed as the years went by! I’ve learned to take more joy in life and not worry so much about duty or about the Empire!” + +This last comment is cause for concern. + +“Not worry about the Empire? What kind of talk is that for an Eternal? And I have a few questions, how did you get promoted to general? I mean why would they need a general up here, this fort has been doing fine without one, the Rask frontier is as quiet as ever and there’s a war going on with the Felkan Kingdom. In fact, where is Edgar? I’ve heard so much about his deeds that I would’ve figured that he might get promoted to command here and certainly not to general.” + +At this point Kane and Cyrus look at each other and Kane looks back at you with a less cheery disposition. + +“Very well. It was only a matter of time before I was going to have to bring this up to you anyway. I’ve made myself general and as of recently this fort is no longer under Empire authority.” +“You what?!” +“I saw the light, with the help of Cyrus here I suppose. The Empire is crumbling, I give it a decade at best and we need to make sure we have a good position when the shit goes down. Don’t you see? That’s why I called you here. You’ve got the plebs further south of the Rask frontier under control and if we combined forces, nobody could stop us! + +You’re in shock for a moment. Nothing could have prepared you for something like this. + +“…Kane, you can’t believe that I would go along with something like this!” +“But why not? Surely you have heard the reports of the mass civil unrest going on in the Empire, why even in your own area you have had to put civvies in their place.” +“Yes, and that just means we have to work harder to preserve the Empire, not abandon it in its time of need!” +“Bah! Why bother? It had its time in the sun and now its time for something new to take its place. What better than us? We’re Eternals after all. Just think we could even unite with some of our other siblings in this dying Empire to make ourselves even stronger!” + +You hold your head in your hands at Kane’s words of secession and treason. This is not the same man you knew, and he is certainly not your “brother.” You never thought the day would come when you’d have to kill a fellow Eternal. +> Accept his offer +It takes everything in you to not attack, but you’re hoping you can bide your time to gain a better advantage. You’re never really lied before though, so you take deep breath before speaking. + +“Kane… I think you’re right. Maybe I’ve always known on some level, but it just took someone close to me to point it out. I will join your cause… my brother.” + +Kane smiles and is certainly overjoyed at your response, but Cyrus looks less than enthusiastic, in fact he’s looking past you. + +“That’s great! I knew you’d join us! I told you Cyrus!” Kane says looking at Cyrus, but Cyrus is still looking past you, he makes a nod. + +“Cyrus…wait no!” Kane shouts +“He’s lying Kane! Kill him!” + +You attempt to get up and attack the battle mage behind, but unfortunately he’s already anticipated that and stepped far enough way for you to not get to him in time before he’s already cast a lightning bolt straight in your face. If it had been your body, perhaps you would’ve survived, but a straight blast to your face fries not only your eyes so badly that they melt, but your brain as well. + +You drop down dead before you can hear Kane’s argument that you could’ve been “turned” to the cause.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 25 + +“Another protest? What the hell is going on now?” you say. +“I don’t know the exact details, just that the miners are protesting their work conditions in the town of Keplavisk.” Lieutenant Verant replies. +“I’m getting sick of these protests, the Empire provides everything for these ungrateful wretches and they complain? They ought to be lucky we haven’t sent slaves to do their job! Alright send a detachment there and if they don’t break it up, kill a couple to make a point and remind them that it could be much worse.” +“Yes sir.” + +You sit stuck at your desk wondering when something worthwhile is going to happen. When you were first assigned to this job, the frontier was still dangerous. Even with the elimination of the wendigos and the elven home, there were still minor hostile barbarian tribes running around and sometimes even tribes of ogres or the odd giant who had wandered down from further north. + +Eventually you eliminated all of those threats to a degree that they were no longer a factor. Then boredom set in as the area became peaceful. For a moment you tried to take Alison’s advice she once gave you, but the problem is, the peace lasted too long, at least for you. + +Lately though the boredom has become annoyance. There has been a shift in the average Empire citizen’s attitude, namely one of insolence. many have started to complain about their jobs, their food, their freedom, everything. At first you questioned if it wasn’t some sort of supernatural influence as that could at least be a rational explanation of this mass madness. When the first open protests started, you handled them in an efficient manner and they stopped for a while, but only for a while. It’s as if the citizens want you to kill them. + +And apparently the problem isn’t just here. If anything this sort of open disobedience has been rearing its ugly head in other parts of the Empire a lot more than it has here and a lot sooner. + +Don’t these people understand that the Empire protects them and gives them everything? If it were not for Emperor’s wisdom to expand, they wouldn’t even have their homes, jobs in whatever province they hail from, never mind the constant vigilance to protect them against monsters that would rip them apart. + +Sometimes you wish you had been transferred to the Arat province. At least there’s a war going on there. You can only imagine that Warrick and Gerald don’t have to put up with this nonsense. Assuming they are still alive, as you have heard nothing about them and despite your new ranking, you can’t seem to get any information on them either. No word about about Roldan or Brenda either, but you do know that the Nalin province is known to be one of the most orderly places in the Empire now. + +You would even settle for being transferred to Fort Defiance at this point, they at least have to still have to stem the tide of beasts and monsters from the north. You’ve also wondered about Kane and Edgar. They’re the only two you do have some updated information on, but while you’ve all been in this territory for years you haven’t seen them since the day you separated company. Oh you’ve heard a few stories about Edgar killing giants single handedly, but that’s about it. In fact you’re surprised that neither one of them has earned command of Fort Defiance like you have with Fort Destiny. + +Sometimes it’s funny how thinking about something causes it to happen. + +You get a message from Fort Defiance and it’s from Kane! He states that he’s just taken command of Fort Defiance and would like to speak with you in person about some possible joint military operations. You naturally leave for Fort Defiance immediately. A certain excitement and even happiness dwells within you, it’ll be good to see a fellow Eternal again, even if Edgar is probably going to still be combative with you. Who knows though? Maybe he’s changed, it’s been years after all. + +Your trip to Fort Defiance is uneventful and when you arrive at the fort it’s as large as you’ve heard, but then it would have to be to fend off giants. You are greeted by several heavily armored orc troops and what looks to be a battle mage. (You still never managed to get either assigned to your fort) + +“Welcome to Fort Defiance captain! I am to take you to General Kane. He is most eager to see you! Come this way!” the battle mage says and as you are escorted through a series of dimly lit corridors one thought goes through your mind: “General?” + +When you arrive at Kane’s office he looks a little different with his head completely shaved, but other than that he hasn’t changed. He also has another man in his office dressed in dark leather armor, with a cloak. You’ve heard of their reputation, but this is the first time you’ve seen a member of the Shadow Guard. You knew a few were stationed up here though. + +Kane stands up and greets you. + +“Well if it isn’t the Bane of Rask! Ha ha ha! How are you my brother?” Kane says in a jovial manner. +“I’m fine…brother?” you reply being a little confused by Kane’s demeanor and him calling you brother. +“Yes! Of course! We are brothers! We grew up together, we trained together, and we fought together, and we are Eternals! Would that not constitute a brotherly bond?” he says. +“Heh, I suppose it would. Never thought about it before I guess.” You reply with a smile. +“Hey I’d like you to meet another brother of ours, this is Cyrus. Remember him? He was in our class, but he got transferred to the Shadow Guard when they first separated us.” +“Cyrus…oh yes, I do remember him. I have sometimes wondered what happened to some of during that first separation. I guess the rest went to the Shadow Guard then?” +“Yes, but only a few of us survived Shadow Guard training. Very few.” +“Sounds like us, a few of our class didn’t make it through our training either.” + +“No, it was nothing like what you went through. Trust me.” Cyrus says coldly. + +Kane quickly intervenes. + +“Don’t mind Cyrus, he’s a little on the serious side, sort of like you eh?” +“As I recall I don’t remember you being so talkative or jolly either.” You say. +“Hey what can I tell you, I’ve changed as the years went by! I’ve learned to take more joy in life and not worry so much about duty or about the Empire!” + +This last comment is cause for concern. + +“Not worry about the Empire? What kind of talk is that for an Eternal? And I have a few questions, how did you get promoted to general? I mean why would they need a general up here, this fort has been doing fine without one, the Rask frontier is as quiet as ever and there’s a war going on with the Felkan Kingdom. In fact, where is Edgar? I’ve heard so much about his deeds that I would’ve figured that he might get promoted to command here and certainly not to general.” + +At this point Kane and Cyrus look at each other and Kane looks back at you with a less cheery disposition. + +“Very well. It was only a matter of time before I was going to have to bring this up to you anyway. I’ve made myself general and as of recently this fort is no longer under Empire authority.” +“You what?!” +“I saw the light, with the help of Cyrus here I suppose. The Empire is crumbling, I give it a decade at best and we need to make sure we have a good position when the shit goes down. Don’t you see? That’s why I called you here. You’ve got the plebs further south of the Rask frontier under control and if we combined forces, nobody could stop us! + +You’re in shock for a moment. Nothing could have prepared you for something like this. + +“…Kane, you can’t believe that I would go along with something like this!” +“But why not? Surely you have heard the reports of the mass civil unrest going on in the Empire, why even in your own area you have had to put civvies in their place.” +“Yes, and that just means we have to work harder to preserve the Empire, not abandon it in its time of need!” +“Bah! Why bother? It had its time in the sun and now its time for something new to take its place. What better than us? We’re Eternals after all. Just think we could even unite with some of our other siblings in this dying Empire to make ourselves even stronger!” + +You hold your head in your hands at Kane’s words of secession and treason. This is not the same man you knew, and he is certainly not your “brother.” You never thought the day would come when you’d have to kill a fellow Eternal. +> Decline his offer +The idea is so repugnant to you that you can’t even bring yourself to even lie about joining him. It probably wouldn’t work anyway; you’ve never been a good liar. You breathe deeply before speaking again. + +“Kane, I am NOT going to help you. Now you do what you must, and I shall do what I must.” +“Told you this was a waste of time, let us be done with this.” Cyrus says and points a small crossbow on his wrist and fires it at you, though Kane knocks his hand away causing the bolt to just hit your shoulder. + +You fall back in your chair and grab the battle mage who was still standing by. He falls to floor on top of you and you break his neck. You feel a little dizzy though; whatever was in that dart is putting you to sleep fast. + +You hear Kane and Cyrus arguing as large orcs stomp into the office and begin kicking you as you fall unconscious. + +When you wake up, you hear an unexpected familiar voice, though the most unexpected thing is that you woke up at all. + +“Hey, get up. Good thing that weak ass poison doesn’t work on us very well.” Edgar says helping you up. +“Edgar? What’s happened here?” You ask looking around and finding yourself stripped of most of your clothing and in a cell. + +“I knew he wouldn’t be able to convince you. I told Kane that, but he kept going on about how you’d understand, just like how in time I would come to understand. He said that siblings may have their fights, but in the end they always make up.” +“Is that how come he hasn’t killed us?” +“I guess so, though I don’t think Cyrus would have such sentimental feelings and would have us killed if he had more say in the matter.” +“Well, Cyrus at least seems to be thinking like an Eternal in that respect. Kane has apparently gone completely mad though…how the hell did this happen?!” +“You got time for a story?” Edgar asks rhetorically before explaining from the beginning. + +Edgar says that when he and Kane first arrived they were met with a little hostility from everyone else and while their prowess in battle earned them respect, they still were never really “accepted” by anyone. + +Edgar says he didn’t care of course and was content with the respect that he had earned and getting accolades for slaying giants and such. Kane wasn’t handling the isolation as well and was becoming increasingly more withdrawn. He did his job, but he behaved in a manner that even the orc soldiers found a little unnerving. Nobody wanted to even eat with him, got to a point where the captain of the fort had to send him out primarily on scouting missions by himself. + +Edgar believes that Kane must’ve really taken the split of the team harder than any of you could’ve known. He suspects that might’ve first lead to his quirk of referring to other Eternals as siblings. He would often mention to Edgar sometimes about how much he missed spending time with you all and couldn’t wait for the day when you all would be together again. + +“(Sigh) All he needed was for me to interact with him on a regular basis, but I was too busy concerned with my own glory. Time in this cell has really given me time to reflect on a lot of bad choices I’ve made in the present and the past.” +“What’s done is done now, but where does Cyrus come in?” you ask. + +Edgar explains that Cyrus was transferred here four years ago as part of a replacement Shadow Guard detachment to help with the latest giant incursion. He knows Kane was sent on a mission with the Shadow Guard during that time and that’s probably where they started to talk more to each other. Normally Shadow Guards don’t interact with anyone other than other Shadow Guards, but Kane hung around him to such a degree that Cyrus eventually began to talk with Kane on his own accord. + +“I don’t think Cyrus’ Shadow Guard buddies approved of it too much, but he was their leader so they didn’t say much.” Edgar says. +“So how did they control over the whole fort?” + +Edgar explains again that Cyrus and Kane must’ve cooked up this plan in secret for years, as in time various changes began to occur. + +The only initial thing that Edgar began to notice was the increase in orc troops being sent here. Granted there was always some stationed here, but now they were starting to out number the human soldiers, and he thought they were mostly going to the front lines on the Felkan border. However, this area was still very dangerous, so ultimately more orc troops here didn’t raise any immediate alarms. + +The next thing he noticed was that there were less and less attacks by giants and ogres, but Edgar chalked that up to him killing so many of them that naturally they would probably have less members to spare now. Not to mention with all the orcs here now, the giants were having a tougher time of it. + +The third thing he noticed was Kane becoming less introverted and more aggressive towards the orcs. He witnessed several fights that Kane himself started with various orc leaders. He won with ease of course and it appeared as if he was just being combative out of boredom, but in retrospect there was very real purpose. To establish no doubt to as who is the “real leader.” Captain Ian wasn’t fond of this sort of behavior in any way though and reprimanded Kane several times, but it was obvious he didn’t care. + +“It was at this point I finally started to talk to Kane on a serious level, just to figure out what was going on with him. All he said to me, was you’ll see in another year brother, with a great big grin on his face. Of course when that year came I found out everything. His private orc army. his alliance with the neighboring giant and ogre tribes, his plans to unite this land completely under him and take on the Empire itself. As you can see I didn’t agree with his plans. I know I have my faults, but disloyalty isn’t one of them.” +“He’s allied with ogres and giants? So wait, how long has Kane taken control of this place?” You ask. “We were still getting reports from here from Captain Ian up until last month.” +“Hah! Captain Ian’s been dead for more than a few months now! Kane’s just been going through the motions of sending reports and messengers, probably to make sure you or nobody else sent anyone to investigate before he was ready to openly defy the Empire.” +“By the Emperor I can’t believe I was so close and never suspected anything wrong going on up here, let alone treason!” you say. +“If it’s any consolation, you weren’t the only one. Besides like I said, I was here and I should’ve been the one to do something before anyone. Instead I got myself captured. Tried to bust out a few times, I figured I’d either escape or die trying. There’s just too many of those tough orc bastards though. Even when I managed to get a weapon the blasted battle mage would cast some sort of spell and I’d go completely weak and groggy. Then I’d end up back here again. Heh, Kane’s so crazy now that he still believes that I’ll eventually side with him.” +“Did you say battle mage? As in one?” +“Yeah, used to have two and they probably would’ve liked to get more stationed here before unleashing their plan, but they had to make due with the ones that cooperated. I killed one of them before my first capture.” +“Well they don’t have any now, because I killed the other one before I got sent here.” + +Edgar tries to contain his enthusiasm. + +“That’s great! I mean with you by my side and none of that magic shit to complicate things, you’ve given us a much improved chance to escape for good!” + +Never thought you’d hear Edgar to be so happy to fight along side you, and normally you might even be a little happy too, but right now you’re concerned with escape. The longer you’re gone, the more likely Lieutenant Verant will send someone up here to investigate. They’ll be killed of course and then Kane will undoubtedly push a full attack on to Fort Destiny ad you don’t have the highest hopes that they’d survive an attack by a combined army of orcs, ogres and giants without being prepared at least. + + +You waste no time coming up with a plan. Simplest ones often work the best, Edgar tells you that it’ll be feeding time soon and that you should remain “unconscious” and he’ll do the rest. + +You get into position and eventually hear the footsteps of your orc jailer. + +“Here’s yer food, Ed!” one of them says carrying a bowl. +“Hey! Why’d you dump a dead body into this cell with me?” Edgar says. +“Wha? He ain’t dead he’s just knocked out! I should know I was one of guys that kicked him in da head! Har har har har!” +“Well he died in his sleep then from your kick to his head. I recognize him as an Eternal and Kane’s gonna be pissed that you killed him!” +“He ain’t dead! He sleep!” +“I’m telling you he’s dead! Don’t believe me, you better check yourself.” +“Oh no, I know you Ed. You gonna try bash my skull in as soon as I open door. If he really dead, then I just say you killed him.” +“And you really think Kane’s gonna believe that? He knows Eternal don’t kill each other, that’s why he’s keeping me alive even though I escape!” + +The orc pauses for a moment and decides he can’t take the chance. + +“Bah, alright, I’ll check, but I’m tellin’ you he’s just still unconscious! That shadow guy hit ‘im with one of doze bolts of his. But YOU are gonna do something first.” + +The orc tells Edgar to turn his back and get close to the cell bars, at which point the orc shackles him so her is unable to attack him. Thank the Emperor that most orcs are still not the brightest lanterns. + +The orc approaches you and that’s when you spring into action. You struggle with the orc jailer until you manage to grab his dagger and repeatedly stab him in the throat with it to the point where you nearly decapitate him. + +After kicking the dead orc in the face you grab his keys and release Edgar. + +“Okay I know of a route we can try to escape through, nearly made it the last time, but again the mage showed up. That won’t be a problem this time and they probably won’t think I’ll try it again.” Edgar says. + +The obvious thing to do is to concentrate on escaping the fort, though another part of you wants to go back to find Kane and Cyrus to kill them. +> Escape +As much as you’d like to kill both Kane and Cyrus, you’re outnumbered and you can’t even be sure if you’d catch them together again in this big fort. Better to escape and come back later better prepared to punish them. Still you’re going to need some sort of gear to survive the cold outside of the fort. + +“We can’t just escape half naked like this. We’re going to need some sort of clothing or better yet armor and weapons.” You say +“Yeah, there is a small supply room on the way. It isn’t the main one, but it shouldn’t have any guards by it either. We have to make our way to the kitchen area first, should be relatively empty right now.” + +It takes some sneaking around, but Edgar’s knowledge of the layout gets you there with relative ease. When you do get to the room you find some old battered armor and dull weapons. It will have to do. Edgar mentions that there is a garbage dump chute in the kitchen which leads underground, from there, there’s a long tunnel which eventually leads to a dead end with a hidden hatch. He says he’s knows it leads into a forest area, but not much more than that since the battle mage zapped him and he was dragged back by that time. + +You and Edgar sneak into the kitchen, but it isn’t completely empty. The cook and a couple of his assistants are there, you and Edgar make quick work of them before they notice you, though Edgar is a little sloppier than you and the assistant that he cuts down knocks over a bunch of pots as he body hits the floor. The clatter is quite loud and you waste no time in looking for the garbage chute. It’s foul and disgusting, but there’s no other option. You jump in and slide down quite easy due to the slimy remains of food greasing the chute. + +When you reach the bottom a giant pile of garbage cushions you. The smell is almost overpowering, but you have no time to worry about awful smells as you are attacked by larger than normal vermin feasting through the pile. Your boots squish through the disgusting muck as you swing your weapon to drive away or kill the aggressive rats. Edgar comes crashing down from the chute and helps you. + +“Ugh, forgot how bad this place smelled.” Edgar says kicking a rat. +“Guess you forgot about the giant rats as well?” +“No, but I figured it wouldn’t be that big of a surprise for you.” + +You and Edgar manage to fight your way down the small mountain of trash and make your way down the tunnel until you eventually get to a built in ladder leading up to a hatch. + +“Is this it? It seems like a terrible idea to have this at the fort. Anyone could sneak down here and infiltrate.” You mention. +“Nah, it’s pretty well hidden from the outside, in fact it can only open from the inside. Not like any ogre is bright enough to notice it and a giant certainly couldn’t get down here. Plus it locks shut when you get outside. I think it was originally supposed to be an escape tunnel in the first place, but it looks like it got turned into a garbage pit instead. Come on.” + +Edgar opens up the hatch and holds it open for you as you make your way to the cold outside world. You look around and it is just as Edgar said, a forest area with no major distinguishing markers. You see that the sun is setting and use that as a guide for which general direction you need to go. You figure it’ll probably take a few days to get back to Fort Destiny, but you should be able to make it. + +You and Edgar walk a good half hour before you realize something is wrong. + +“Shhh. You hear that?” you ask. +“Can’t be ogres, they would’ve attacked us by now.” +“It probably isn’t…find cover!” you exclaim. + +Several bolts whiz past you as you duck down rolling around in the snow and run in a zig zag fashion getting behind several trees so as to not get hit. Edgar isn’t as quick as you and he is hit by two of the bolts. Not enough to kill him, but if they have that same toxin that you experienced on them he’s not going to stay conscious for long. + +The Shadow Guard assailants finally show themselves and jump out of the trees. Edgar is feeling the effects of the toxin, but he struggles to stay awake to defend himself. You find yourself fighting three of the shadows that circle around you. One of them attacks and you grab his arm breaking it in one quick move, when another attacks you, you shove his broken arm friend into his blade. They both fall to the ground. + +The third one lands a couple of hits on your back; cutting through the poor armor you’re wearing. You deliver a hefty back kick to his gut and follow up with a spinning swipe with your sword. Your sword’s edge is dull and not sharp enough to cleanly decapitate the shadow, instead it makes a large cruel gash in his neck which spurts blood like a small fountain. The result is still effective and he collapses into the snow. Your other adversary has gotten up off the ground and throws a dagger at you, which you just narrowly avoid. He tries to fight you fairly, but it’s clear he is no match for you and you easily dispatch him. You then finish off the shadow with the broken arm and wound in his belly. + +Edgar is still fighting the two shadows attacking him. Under normal circumstances, he’d probably easily dispatch them, but the toxin is having its effect and from the front and back their short swords stab him. He falls to the ground when the shadow behind him cuts at his tendons. You strike your blade into the skull of one of the shadows when he only crumples to his knees, you slam the dull blade on his head again splitting it open and revealing the gooey brains within. The last shadow tries to run away, and climb to a nearby tree in the hopes of escaping you, but you manage to jump up and grab hi dangling legs and pull him crashing to the ground. After a small scuffle you wrap your forearms around his neck and break it. + +You walk over to Edgar who is still struggling to stay awake, but he’s fighting more than just the toxin now, his wounds are quite severe. You kneel down beside him, it seems odd for you given your past history, but you feel a sense of sadness. + +“He…hey…did you get him?” +“Yeah, Edgar, I got him.” +“That’s… good. I’m sorr..” +“It’s in the past Edgar. Don’t worry about it.” You tell him, as you know what he’s going to apologize for. He then quietly loses consciousness and stops breathing altogether. + +After a few moments of silence, you carry on to Fort Destiny without Edgar. You think about all the things you plan to do to Kane and Cyrus if you manage to get your hands on them the entire time you’re traveling back to Fort Destiny. + +Eventually you get to a town where you ride the rest of the way to Fort Destiny. Lieutenant Verant is relieved to see you. He says was just about to send someone up to Fort Defiance to see what happened to you. You’d really like to raise your entire force from the fort and march upon Fort Defiance immediately, but you question if you’d be able to take it. Other than the defenses being on full alert now, Kane may have already rallied his ogre and giant allies. It might be best if you report this back to the generals at home. Surely they’ll spare you some reinforcements for something like this, not to mention they’ll need to be warned anyway due to the Shadow Guard revolt that’s already been in planning for quite some time. Still, it could be awhile for you to wait, not to mention they may not send you any at all. All which would be wasted time you could’ve spent attacking Kane so he doesn’t get too dug in. +> Wait for reinforcements +With all the extra allies Kane has, you can’t possibly take the fort without heavy losses and with all the problems you’ve been having with peasants you’re still going to need enough troops to keep them in line afterwards. You need at least another army up here. You tell Verant to send a message to the generals back home about the situation and if they can provide reinforcements then to do so right away. In the meantime you’re going to build up the defenses on the fort and the towns in the surrounding area. + +A week or so passes before you get any sort of reply. You are given orders to hold the area, but that’s about it. With this new revelation of the Shadow Guard treachery and dissention within the orc ranks the generals are busily attempting to weed out any more within the home territories as well as having to redistribute regular soldiers where Shadow Guard were keeping the peasants in line. The war with the Felkans is also still going on, so any immediate reinforcements would go to that area first anyway. + +In short, you’re on your own as usual and reports are already coming in about ogre attacks on the outer villages. It’ll only be a matter of time before those are giants or Kane’s entire army of orcs. You curse your situation and prepare yourself for a long ongoing war. + +Year 26 + +“Shoot the bastards!” you shout at the catapult crews. They unleash another volley of rocks on the attacking giants. Several of the rocks hit their targets, but it’s not like you’re not taking a barrage of large boulders either, in fact the orcs have taken to lobbing large balls of dung over the walls and it’s already been starting to cause sickness among your troops. Especially after days of ongoing attack, a dwindling food supply and no relief in sight. + +The months of battling Kane’s traitor brigade has all lead up to this, completely surrounded by them. You did your best to hold them back, but ultimately Kane could replace his losses faster thanks to the brutality of his own troops. After ogres destroyed several of the smaller villages completely along with the mere threat of giants it wasn’t long that some of the peasant communities were willing to accept Kane’s “rule” more readily than the Empire’s, which they were already disgruntled with due to the lack of proper protection among other things. + +The Shadow Guard didn’t help matters as most of them that had been rooted out in the home territories fled up to the Rask under Cyrus’ leadership, along with some of the orcs that had heard about the rebellion. Any towns that hadn’t immediately fell under the sway of the direct fear from Kane’s army fell to the subversive and terror tactics of the Shadow Guard. + +“Get those orcs on the north side! They’re climbing up the fucking walls!” you shout. + +Boiling oil is thrown over the side of the wall, scalding the orcs on ladders. Some of them fall, others are tougher and maintain their grip. You shove the ladder back, making sure to get the ones that the oil failed to. You look around and see that the orcs have begun to break through the front door. You then have that familiar sense that you’ve had so many other times over the past few months. You duck down and roll while swinging your sword in front of you. You hit something and uncloak a Shadow Guard that has managed to infiltrate the fort. He isn’t the only one though. Several more appear nearby to kill the remaining men you have defending the walls. + +You continue to fight valiantly, cutting down many of the Shadow Guard that have managed to get inside the fort. A boulder crashes into the side of the wall destroying it and causing you to fall off the walkway and to the ground within the fort. + +You get back up as quickly as you can to see orcs pouring into the front gates and the remainder of your men slaughtered. Griping your sword one last time your only regret is not taking the opportunity to kill Kane and Cyrus a year ago when you were captured at Fort Defiance. Indeed you played everything a bit too cautiously. None of it matters now though, the only thing you can do is go out like a true warrior. If not victory, then you can take comfort in that at least. + +“For the Empire!” you shout and charge into the horde.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As much as you’d like to kill both Kane and Cyrus, you’re outnumbered and you can’t even be sure if you’d catch them together again in this big fort. Better to escape and come back later better prepared to punish them. Still you’re going to need some sort of gear to survive the cold outside of the fort. + +“We can’t just escape half naked like this. We’re going to need some sort of clothing or better yet armor and weapons.” You say +“Yeah, there is a small supply room on the way. It isn’t the main one, but it shouldn’t have any guards by it either. We have to make our way to the kitchen area first, should be relatively empty right now.” + +It takes some sneaking around, but Edgar’s knowledge of the layout gets you there with relative ease. When you do get to the room you find some old battered armor and dull weapons. It will have to do. Edgar mentions that there is a garbage dump chute in the kitchen which leads underground, from there, there’s a long tunnel which eventually leads to a dead end with a hidden hatch. He says he’s knows it leads into a forest area, but not much more than that since the battle mage zapped him and he was dragged back by that time. + +You and Edgar sneak into the kitchen, but it isn’t completely empty. The cook and a couple of his assistants are there, you and Edgar make quick work of them before they notice you, though Edgar is a little sloppier than you and the assistant that he cuts down knocks over a bunch of pots as he body hits the floor. The clatter is quite loud and you waste no time in looking for the garbage chute. It’s foul and disgusting, but there’s no other option. You jump in and slide down quite easy due to the slimy remains of food greasing the chute. + +When you reach the bottom a giant pile of garbage cushions you. The smell is almost overpowering, but you have no time to worry about awful smells as you are attacked by larger than normal vermin feasting through the pile. Your boots squish through the disgusting muck as you swing your weapon to drive away or kill the aggressive rats. Edgar comes crashing down from the chute and helps you. + +“Ugh, forgot how bad this place smelled.” Edgar says kicking a rat. +“Guess you forgot about the giant rats as well?” +“No, but I figured it wouldn’t be that big of a surprise for you.” + +You and Edgar manage to fight your way down the small mountain of trash and make your way down the tunnel until you eventually get to a built in ladder leading up to a hatch. + +“Is this it? It seems like a terrible idea to have this at the fort. Anyone could sneak down here and infiltrate.” You mention. +“Nah, it’s pretty well hidden from the outside, in fact it can only open from the inside. Not like any ogre is bright enough to notice it and a giant certainly couldn’t get down here. Plus it locks shut when you get outside. I think it was originally supposed to be an escape tunnel in the first place, but it looks like it got turned into a garbage pit instead. Come on.” + +Edgar opens up the hatch and holds it open for you as you make your way to the cold outside world. You look around and it is just as Edgar said, a forest area with no major distinguishing markers. You see that the sun is setting and use that as a guide for which general direction you need to go. You figure it’ll probably take a few days to get back to Fort Destiny, but you should be able to make it. + +You and Edgar walk a good half hour before you realize something is wrong. + +“Shhh. You hear that?” you ask. +“Can’t be ogres, they would’ve attacked us by now.” +“It probably isn’t…find cover!” you exclaim. + +Several bolts whiz past you as you duck down rolling around in the snow and run in a zig zag fashion getting behind several trees so as to not get hit. Edgar isn’t as quick as you and he is hit by two of the bolts. Not enough to kill him, but if they have that same toxin that you experienced on them he’s not going to stay conscious for long. + +The Shadow Guard assailants finally show themselves and jump out of the trees. Edgar is feeling the effects of the toxin, but he struggles to stay awake to defend himself. You find yourself fighting three of the shadows that circle around you. One of them attacks and you grab his arm breaking it in one quick move, when another attacks you, you shove his broken arm friend into his blade. They both fall to the ground. + +The third one lands a couple of hits on your back; cutting through the poor armor you’re wearing. You deliver a hefty back kick to his gut and follow up with a spinning swipe with your sword. Your sword’s edge is dull and not sharp enough to cleanly decapitate the shadow, instead it makes a large cruel gash in his neck which spurts blood like a small fountain. The result is still effective and he collapses into the snow. Your other adversary has gotten up off the ground and throws a dagger at you, which you just narrowly avoid. He tries to fight you fairly, but it’s clear he is no match for you and you easily dispatch him. You then finish off the shadow with the broken arm and wound in his belly. + +Edgar is still fighting the two shadows attacking him. Under normal circumstances, he’d probably easily dispatch them, but the toxin is having its effect and from the front and back their short swords stab him. He falls to the ground when the shadow behind him cuts at his tendons. You strike your blade into the skull of one of the shadows when he only crumples to his knees, you slam the dull blade on his head again splitting it open and revealing the gooey brains within. The last shadow tries to run away, and climb to a nearby tree in the hopes of escaping you, but you manage to jump up and grab hi dangling legs and pull him crashing to the ground. After a small scuffle you wrap your forearms around his neck and break it. + +You walk over to Edgar who is still struggling to stay awake, but he’s fighting more than just the toxin now, his wounds are quite severe. You kneel down beside him, it seems odd for you given your past history, but you feel a sense of sadness. + +“He…hey…did you get him?” +“Yeah, Edgar, I got him.” +“That’s… good. I’m sorr..” +“It’s in the past Edgar. Don’t worry about it.” You tell him, as you know what he’s going to apologize for. He then quietly loses consciousness and stops breathing altogether. + +After a few moments of silence, you carry on to Fort Destiny without Edgar. You think about all the things you plan to do to Kane and Cyrus if you manage to get your hands on them the entire time you’re traveling back to Fort Destiny. + +Eventually you get to a town where you ride the rest of the way to Fort Destiny. Lieutenant Verant is relieved to see you. He says was just about to send someone up to Fort Defiance to see what happened to you. You’d really like to raise your entire force from the fort and march upon Fort Defiance immediately, but you question if you’d be able to take it. Other than the defenses being on full alert now, Kane may have already rallied his ogre and giant allies. It might be best if you report this back to the generals at home. Surely they’ll spare you some reinforcements for something like this, not to mention they’ll need to be warned anyway due to the Shadow Guard revolt that’s already been in planning for quite some time. Still, it could be awhile for you to wait, not to mention they may not send you any at all. All which would be wasted time you could’ve spent attacking Kane so he doesn’t get too dug in. +> March upon the fort now +You can’t wait. You may serve the Empire and be against Kane’s traitorous ways, but there is an unfortunate element in truth in what he says. If you need to get anything done around here, you’ll have to do it yourself, not rely on the Empire. You tell Verant to send a message to the generals back home about the situation and if they can provide reinforcements then to do so right away, but in any case you’re attacking Fort Defiance immediately. + +You muster up all your forces, troops, siege weapons, everything that could help you and leaving only a skeleton crew back to guard Fort Destiny. When you begin your march, you try to remain confident that you can take the fort. As soon as you start to enter the long stretches of snowy wilderness that precede Fort Defiance, tribes of ogres attack you. Kane’s already prepared. + +Within a mile of Fort Defiance and you can see large looming figures in the distance almost as big as the fort itself. You have to remind your troops to find their courage and that no overgrown abomination is going to best any soldier of the Empire. + +On the first day of the siege your catapults hurl their boulders at the fort and your ballistae fire at the giants. It’s an impressive volley, which damages the walls and critically wounds some of their giant allies, but the counter attack is just as brutal to your side. Multiple boulders comes crashing down on your men hurled by the giants. Fort Defiance’s own ballistae aim for your siege weapons, destroying several of them. + +By the third day, you pull your sword out of the last giant after stabbing him several times in the neck and jump several feet to the ground just before his falling body and crush you. Your men are still attempting to break down the doors of the fort which is heavily reinforced. Attempting to scale its walls results in them being scalded to death by boiling oil. The orcs have even resorted to catapulting their dung at you; it’s only going to be a matter of time before disease starts to take effect on your men. You would’ve tried the same thing, but orcs are notoriously resistant to such biological warfare. + +By the fourth day, your troops are dwindling and you’re still no closer to capturing the fort. Ogre tribes harass your people from the outside and you lead your best men to the hidden hatch you escaped from. Upon finding it again, you destroy the hatch door and descend. When you and your men arrive at the garbage pile though, you’re in for a minor surprise, as a troop of orcs are waiting for you. Apparently somebody figured you might try to get in this way. + +The battle with the orcs isn’t a pleasant one. Along with the smell, there is also the disgusting ichor that’s ankle deep as you fight the orcs. Through the filth and trash though you manage to maintain your composure and dispatch the orcs with the help of your men. After the fighting is over, your next plan is to climb up the chute and do damage from within. It takes a little exertion due to the chute being incredibly greasy, but eventually you manage to apply pressure to the sides of the chute and start climbing up it slowly. Your men do likewise. + +You’re about midway through this slimy tube when all of a sudden the top part opens up and your heart sinks when an orcish face appears. + +“Hah, boss waz right. Time to burn now!” he says and throws at torch at you. Normally this wouldn’t do much damage by itself, but with the combination of grease, oil and other flammable muck you’ve been rolling around it, you light up like a tinderbox along with the entire grease covered chute. You lose your grip and slide back down crashing into your men and setting them on fire as well. + +When you hit the pile of garbage below, you’re completely engulfed by the flames and the garbage pile goes up like an inferno. The screams of your men burning alive and your own skin crackling are the last sounds you hear.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The idea is so repugnant to you that you can’t even bring yourself to even lie about joining him. It probably wouldn’t work anyway; you’ve never been a good liar. You breathe deeply before speaking again. + +“Kane, I am NOT going to help you. Now you do what you must, and I shall do what I must.” +“Told you this was a waste of time, let us be done with this.” Cyrus says and points a small crossbow on his wrist and fires it at you, though Kane knocks his hand away causing the bolt to just hit your shoulder. + +You fall back in your chair and grab the battle mage who was still standing by. He falls to floor on top of you and you break his neck. You feel a little dizzy though; whatever was in that dart is putting you to sleep fast. + +You hear Kane and Cyrus arguing as large orcs stomp into the office and begin kicking you as you fall unconscious. + +When you wake up, you hear an unexpected familiar voice, though the most unexpected thing is that you woke up at all. + +“Hey, get up. Good thing that weak ass poison doesn’t work on us very well.” Edgar says helping you up. +“Edgar? What’s happened here?” You ask looking around and finding yourself stripped of most of your clothing and in a cell. + +“I knew he wouldn’t be able to convince you. I told Kane that, but he kept going on about how you’d understand, just like how in time I would come to understand. He said that siblings may have their fights, but in the end they always make up.” +“Is that how come he hasn’t killed us?” +“I guess so, though I don’t think Cyrus would have such sentimental feelings and would have us killed if he had more say in the matter.” +“Well, Cyrus at least seems to be thinking like an Eternal in that respect. Kane has apparently gone completely mad though…how the hell did this happen?!” +“You got time for a story?” Edgar asks rhetorically before explaining from the beginning. + +Edgar says that when he and Kane first arrived they were met with a little hostility from everyone else and while their prowess in battle earned them respect, they still were never really “accepted” by anyone. + +Edgar says he didn’t care of course and was content with the respect that he had earned and getting accolades for slaying giants and such. Kane wasn’t handling the isolation as well and was becoming increasingly more withdrawn. He did his job, but he behaved in a manner that even the orc soldiers found a little unnerving. Nobody wanted to even eat with him, got to a point where the captain of the fort had to send him out primarily on scouting missions by himself. + +Edgar believes that Kane must’ve really taken the split of the team harder than any of you could’ve known. He suspects that might’ve first lead to his quirk of referring to other Eternals as siblings. He would often mention to Edgar sometimes about how much he missed spending time with you all and couldn’t wait for the day when you all would be together again. + +“(Sigh) All he needed was for me to interact with him on a regular basis, but I was too busy concerned with my own glory. Time in this cell has really given me time to reflect on a lot of bad choices I’ve made in the present and the past.” +“What’s done is done now, but where does Cyrus come in?” you ask. + +Edgar explains that Cyrus was transferred here four years ago as part of a replacement Shadow Guard detachment to help with the latest giant incursion. He knows Kane was sent on a mission with the Shadow Guard during that time and that’s probably where they started to talk more to each other. Normally Shadow Guards don’t interact with anyone other than other Shadow Guards, but Kane hung around him to such a degree that Cyrus eventually began to talk with Kane on his own accord. + +“I don’t think Cyrus’ Shadow Guard buddies approved of it too much, but he was their leader so they didn’t say much.” Edgar says. +“So how did they control over the whole fort?” + +Edgar explains again that Cyrus and Kane must’ve cooked up this plan in secret for years, as in time various changes began to occur. + +The only initial thing that Edgar began to notice was the increase in orc troops being sent here. Granted there was always some stationed here, but now they were starting to out number the human soldiers, and he thought they were mostly going to the front lines on the Felkan border. However, this area was still very dangerous, so ultimately more orc troops here didn’t raise any immediate alarms. + +The next thing he noticed was that there were less and less attacks by giants and ogres, but Edgar chalked that up to him killing so many of them that naturally they would probably have less members to spare now. Not to mention with all the orcs here now, the giants were having a tougher time of it. + +The third thing he noticed was Kane becoming less introverted and more aggressive towards the orcs. He witnessed several fights that Kane himself started with various orc leaders. He won with ease of course and it appeared as if he was just being combative out of boredom, but in retrospect there was very real purpose. To establish no doubt to as who is the “real leader.” Captain Ian wasn’t fond of this sort of behavior in any way though and reprimanded Kane several times, but it was obvious he didn’t care. + +“It was at this point I finally started to talk to Kane on a serious level, just to figure out what was going on with him. All he said to me, was you’ll see in another year brother, with a great big grin on his face. Of course when that year came I found out everything. His private orc army. his alliance with the neighboring giant and ogre tribes, his plans to unite this land completely under him and take on the Empire itself. As you can see I didn’t agree with his plans. I know I have my faults, but disloyalty isn’t one of them.” +“He’s allied with ogres and giants? So wait, how long has Kane taken control of this place?” You ask. “We were still getting reports from here from Captain Ian up until last month.” +“Hah! Captain Ian’s been dead for more than a few months now! Kane’s just been going through the motions of sending reports and messengers, probably to make sure you or nobody else sent anyone to investigate before he was ready to openly defy the Empire.” +“By the Emperor I can’t believe I was so close and never suspected anything wrong going on up here, let alone treason!” you say. +“If it’s any consolation, you weren’t the only one. Besides like I said, I was here and I should’ve been the one to do something before anyone. Instead I got myself captured. Tried to bust out a few times, I figured I’d either escape or die trying. There’s just too many of those tough orc bastards though. Even when I managed to get a weapon the blasted battle mage would cast some sort of spell and I’d go completely weak and groggy. Then I’d end up back here again. Heh, Kane’s so crazy now that he still believes that I’ll eventually side with him.” +“Did you say battle mage? As in one?” +“Yeah, used to have two and they probably would’ve liked to get more stationed here before unleashing their plan, but they had to make due with the ones that cooperated. I killed one of them before my first capture.” +“Well they don’t have any now, because I killed the other one before I got sent here.” + +Edgar tries to contain his enthusiasm. + +“That’s great! I mean with you by my side and none of that magic shit to complicate things, you’ve given us a much improved chance to escape for good!” + +Never thought you’d hear Edgar to be so happy to fight along side you, and normally you might even be a little happy too, but right now you’re concerned with escape. The longer you’re gone, the more likely Lieutenant Verant will send someone up here to investigate. They’ll be killed of course and then Kane will undoubtedly push a full attack on to Fort Destiny ad you don’t have the highest hopes that they’d survive an attack by a combined army of orcs, ogres and giants without being prepared at least. + + +You waste no time coming up with a plan. Simplest ones often work the best, Edgar tells you that it’ll be feeding time soon and that you should remain “unconscious” and he’ll do the rest. + +You get into position and eventually hear the footsteps of your orc jailer. + +“Here’s yer food, Ed!” one of them says carrying a bowl. +“Hey! Why’d you dump a dead body into this cell with me?” Edgar says. +“Wha? He ain’t dead he’s just knocked out! I should know I was one of guys that kicked him in da head! Har har har har!” +“Well he died in his sleep then from your kick to his head. I recognize him as an Eternal and Kane’s gonna be pissed that you killed him!” +“He ain’t dead! He sleep!” +“I’m telling you he’s dead! Don’t believe me, you better check yourself.” +“Oh no, I know you Ed. You gonna try bash my skull in as soon as I open door. If he really dead, then I just say you killed him.” +“And you really think Kane’s gonna believe that? He knows Eternal don’t kill each other, that’s why he’s keeping me alive even though I escape!” + +The orc pauses for a moment and decides he can’t take the chance. + +“Bah, alright, I’ll check, but I’m tellin’ you he’s just still unconscious! That shadow guy hit ‘im with one of doze bolts of his. But YOU are gonna do something first.” + +The orc tells Edgar to turn his back and get close to the cell bars, at which point the orc shackles him so her is unable to attack him. Thank the Emperor that most orcs are still not the brightest lanterns. + +The orc approaches you and that’s when you spring into action. You struggle with the orc jailer until you manage to grab his dagger and repeatedly stab him in the throat with it to the point where you nearly decapitate him. + +After kicking the dead orc in the face you grab his keys and release Edgar. + +“Okay I know of a route we can try to escape through, nearly made it the last time, but again the mage showed up. That won’t be a problem this time and they probably won’t think I’ll try it again.” Edgar says. + +The obvious thing to do is to concentrate on escaping the fort, though another part of you wants to go back to find Kane and Cyrus to kill them. +> Fine Kane and Cyrus +“We can’t leave yet, we have to take care of Kane and Cyrus.” You say. +“What? You don’t think it wouldn’t be a better idea to escape and then come back with an army or something?” Edgar replies +“It would be preferable yes, but by that time they’ll be entrenched and possibly already on the move with their own army of giants, ogres and orcs. That’s less likely to happen without Kane or Cyrus here.” +“You don’t think someone else will take their place?” +“I KNOW someone else will take their place, but by getting rid of Kane and Cyrus that shaky allied army that they’ve built up will fall apart. It will then be far easier to handle seeing as it won’t commanded by Eternals.” +“Well, that’s true…okay let’s do it.” + +Edgar suggests getting some basic armor with helmets to disguise and protect yourselves in and mentions the supply room in the human section of the fort should have some. It takes some sneaking around, but Edgar’s knowledge of the layout gets you there with relative ease. When you do get to the room you have to kill a couple human guards, and get dressed in some armor without raising an alarm. + +At least not an obvious one. + +“I told the others that you wouldn’t try to escape. Glad to see I was right.” A man’s voice says from somewhere. You and Edgar both grab weapons and look around putting your backs to each other. +“Knew it was too easy.” Edgar says. +“It still can be.” The voice remarks. +“Who are you? Show yourself!” you demand. +“And have you possibly kill me? Oh no, I know the skill and ruthlessness of the Eternals all too well having served with Cyrus for years, not to mention seeing Edgar in action. And your own reputation speaks on its own, Bane of Rask. There is no need for animosity however, I am willing to help you.” + +“It’s a Shadow Guard, he’s using his blasted magic tricks to stay invisible to us.” Edgar whispers. +“If you’re here to help, why have you allowed this to treason to happen in the first place?” you ask still keeping your guard up. +“Oh various reasons, but let’s just say the major reason is that Cyrus is a very convincing fellow. He probably doesn’t seem like it to you, but he has a certain charm about him. It’s how he’s managed to convince Kane to go along with all this I imagine.” +“So this was all Cyrus’ idea.” You say still scanning the room. +“Eh, it’s a little more complicated than that I think, even I’m not privy to all the details. I only know as much as I do because Cyrus is a little more talkative after sex…” +“Okay, I didn’t need to hear about that!” Edgar exclaims. + +“Look we could stand around and talk all day until the guards realize something is wrong, or you can accept the help of me and the rest of the Shadow Guard. We have come to realize for a while now that this plan is not in our best interest and will only lead to our destruction.” The voice says, +“You do realize that you have already participated in treason and this attempt at switching sides because you know you’ll lose anyway, will not save you?” you say undiplomatically. +“Ha ha! Yes, I would expect no less from the Empire and especially not from an Eternal such as yourself. You Eternals, you think in such absolutes and that’s why you’ll be the death of us all…not YOU of course, but for the rest of us. (Sigh) I think the Shadow Guard should’ve broken away from the Empire years ago before you lot popped up. Anyway it hardly matters now, I’m still offering my help…” + +Before the man can complete his sentence you have managed to locate his whereabouts in the room and grab him. His invisibility disappears to reveal a mundane looking man in a gray cloak. As you hold your sword to him, Edgar does likewise. + +“I hate to burst your ego, but this isn’t the first time an Eternal has managed to detect me, you took longer though.” The gray-cloaked man says. +“How can I trust someone who has defied the Emperor and participated in treasonous acts?” you ask, ignoring the Shadow Guard’s flippant nature. +“You can’t. And being a Shadow Guard probably makes me even less trustworthy. The only thing I can say is you’ll have to make a leap of faith Eternal. I will confess this though. The Shadow Guard’s loyalty to the Empire is starting to be less than absolute. Granted there are still debates about this within our order and not everyone can decide on how we should do it. Personally I felt we should all just leave and not make a big mess about it. Obviously some, like Cyrus feel otherwise. Now I have just relayed perfectly good intelligence on a potential major threat to the Empire. You will be able to warn others after you take care of Kane and Cyrus.” +> Trust the Shadow Guard +You still don’t trust the Shadow Guard, but if what he’s claiming is even partly true then it is indeed something you need to warn others about. This idea of mass treason by the Shadow Guard is troubling to you as their reputations for loyalty to the Empire are impeccable…but then Eternals were supposed to be without disloyalty either. + +There will definitely be a reckoning after this immediate problem is taken care of. + +“Very well, we’ll accept your help, if only because there’s nothing you can do to stop us anyway.” You say releasing the man. +“Spoken like an Eternal. Okay while you track down and face Kane, my brother and sister shadows will create chaos with the orc troops. That should give you plenty of time to kill him and escape.” +“What about Cyrus?” you ask. +“He’ll probably be with Kane discussing strategies as usual, at least I hope he will be. I don’t relish the thought of having to face him myself even with the rest of the shadows behind me. That would be a rather bloody break up and probably not in my favor. But I’m sure you two will have no problems. Let’s get to it shall we?” + +At this point you and Edgar reluctantly leave the Shadow Guard to carry out his part of the plan. + +“You don’t really trust him do you?” Edgar asks. +“Of course not, but if there is the chance that he’ll help it’s a gamble I’m willing to take. We’re already severely outnumbered and in hostile territory if he was lying then nothing was really lost. Let’s get to Kane’s office, that’s probably where he’ll be.” + +You manage to walk through the halls of the fort without difficulty thanks to the face covering helmets. Everyone just assumes you’re just two soldiers going about your routines. When you arrive near the office there are several heavily armored orc guards milling around there. You and Edgar briefly wonder how quickly you can kill them before more come running, but fortune strikes, when another one comes running for a completely different reason. + +“Ay! Ay! You guyz! The prisoners have escaped and doze shadoze are in on it! They snuck up and attacked us in our own quarters! Come on!” the orc yells. +“Wha?! Never did trust dat lot! We can’t leave, da boss is in his office!” one of the guard says. +“We gotta tell ‘im anyway!” another guard adds about to enter the office. +“Hey we’ll tell the general and you take care of the shadows. You orcs are tougher so you’ll be able to handle the situation better than we would. Besides you should go get yourselves some payback for what those bastards have done.” You pipe up and say. +“Yeah! Da humie iz right! Okay, you tell da boss and we’ll take care of doze shadoze!” one of them says and they all going running off without realizing a thing. + +“You know I’ve been serving along side these orcs for years and it still baffles me how Captain Gruz was so articulate and intelligent when compared to the rest of his kind.” Edgar remarks. +“Wonder about it later, we’ve got more important matters.” You say opening the door, and stepping into Kane’s office. + +Kane steps out of his private quarters wondering what’s going on. + +“What the hell is going on out there, I heard all this…you’re not my bodyguards!” +“An Eternal shouldn’t need them, but then you’re no Eternal, you’re a traitor!” you shout. + +Kane draws his weapon and the fight commences. Kane always was one of the more skilled fighters when he served under you, but it’s obvious that he’s improved even more when he manages to disarm Edgar within moments and knocks him into the wall. + +“Why are you doing this brothers!? I’m trying to help us! We could join forces! We could all be a family again! It’s not too late!” Kane pleads while defending himself. +“It is too late for you! You’ve been a fool to believe Cyrus’ lies, where is he?” you yell narrowly missing Kane. + +Kane ignores your questions and fights back with less reluctance. Edgar attempts to help you again, but Kane once more proves to be the better fighter, smashing him in the face and stabbing him in the leg. Edgar falls to the floor. + +“Cyrus was right, I wasted my time with you! And you never were the great warrior you thought you were!” Kane says almost landing a killing blow on Edgar, but you manage to save him by deflecting the sword blow. + +Kane attempts to counter attack but fails and you land a blow across his chest and then another across his face, blinding him in one eye. He drops his weapon and staggers back holding his hand on the gaping bloody wound. + +“(Pant) Why…you…I can’t…” he wheezes and tries to escape past you, but you stop him completely by running him through. You wrench the sword upward to slice further into his internal organs. Blood spills out from the wound and onto the floor and your feet. He looks at you with his remaining good eye. Surprisingly, he smiles. + +“I…forgive you…broth…” he gasps and dies. + +It’s strange; you feel satisfaction for killing a traitor to the Emperor, yet a small part of you feels something else. Sadness perhaps? You turn and see Edgar recovering from his wounds. + +“Thanks. Saving me again, must feel like old times.” Edgar says. +“Old times didn’t involve me killing one of us, speaking of which we need to go find Cyrus.” + +You and Edgar leave Kane’s office and hear the sounds of chaos filling the halls. A human soldier turns the corner and you nearly decapitate him before he shouts at you to stop. He doesn’t recognize you since you still have the helmets on. + +“Hey hold on! I’m human! Man, looks like you guys must’ve fought some of those orc fuckers as well. Have you seen General Kane? He’s supposed to be keeping these idiots under control and they’ve completely lost it!” +“General Kane’s dead. The orcs killed him.” You say. +“He’s fuckin’ dead? Great, he and Cyrus got us into this mess and he’s dead and the other one is missing!” +“Where is Cyrus?” you ask. +“I don’t know, but what I do know is all those Shadow Guard assholes caused all this strife by attacking the orcs in the first place! Then they just took off! At this point I don’t know why I ever listened to this idiotic scheme of breaking away from the Empire! If we get out of this alive, we’ll be lucky if the Empire doesn’t hang us all for treason!” +“You needn’t worry about that, I’ll take care of that right now.” You say and strike down traitor before he can act. + +You curse the fact that Cyrus and the rest of his shadows got away, but there’s no way to track them now, so you and Edgar decide to make your escape from the fort. + +Your escape is fairly easy. When you and Edgar arrive back at Fort Destiny where Lieutenant Verant says he was just about to send someone up to Fort Defiance to see what happened to you. Your own command is to raise every soldier from Fort Destiny and march upon Fort Defiance. + +By the time you arrive, the fort is half in ruins and burning. All the human soldiers have been killed and the surviving orcs have reverted back to their uncivilized nature. It’s a bloody battle, but after it’s all said and done, every orc is slaughtered for their lack of loyalty. + +You report the events to your superiors and tell them everything that happened and Edgar backs up the story with his confirmations as well as his own experiences at Fort Defiance. The news is devastating and drastic measures are taken in an attempt to maintain order. + +The first thing is Fort Defiance is completely abandoned with no plans to rebuild it. The area falls back under the dominion of giants and ogres once again. The small villages that do exist up there are soon destroyed, as they have no protection at all anymore. Fort Destiny takes up the duty of driving away the monstrous tribes that do wander further south now. The lives of the Empire citizens in the Rask frontier are now as hard as they were when you first arrived at the place. + +Next a full investigation is made on every Shadow Guard member, at least the ones the Empire manages to get a hold of. Many openly resist, while other still just make their escape when they can. After a series of major decisions, the Shadow Guard is purged, even some of the ones who claimed their undying loyalty. Their number, while small to begin with, is reduced to zero and bounties are placed on the few that escaped. Including Cyrus. + +As for the orcs, their kind is spared from any sort of major investigation, though it might be because most of them are serving on the front lines of Felkan War and enough of them are getting killed there to thin out their ranks. Not to mention they’re generally not seen as intelligent to be as much of a major threat and it was only due to the manipulation of Cyrus and Kane that they turned. Still, they are watched and they are never to be stationed in such a way that they outnumber human troops again. Questions still abound to as who allowed such orders to transfer so many to Fort Defiance in the first place. + +Oddly even though Cyrus and to a lesser extent Kane were the leaders of this attempted secession, no Eternal is investigated. If anything you’re rewarded with a medal for your service to the Empire. Edgar isn’t though for some reason. + +You maintain your post at the Rask frontier though Edgar is transferred to the Felkan front. You say your goodbyes to him on a friendlier note this time, which after what happened with Kane, you’re glad to do. + +Your position at Fort Destiny is less monotonous now, but its a thankless one as always. The citizens in the area still complain and protest even though you’re protecting them. And despite all their precautions and attempts to crack down on order, the events at Fort Defiance are just the beginning of what the Empire has yet to experience in the years to come. +> Years pass... +Year 30 + +“This place won’t be the same without you sir. I don’t know how I’ll be able to run this place as well as you.” Lieutenant Verant says as you finish packing your things. +“You’ll do fine lieutenant, or should I say captain. You’ll probably get an official promotion soon. Just remember, when the citizens protest I’ve found that flogging one family with children at random keeps the rest in line. Can’t really afford to execute them like we did in the old days, too many ogre attacks already doing a good job of that. Well at least you don’t need to worry about the giants as much anymore.” +“You always did know best sir.” +“Well, I tried to do what I could up here. I don’t know why I’m being stationed to Delerg Province. It’s one of the more peaceful places of the Empire next to the Nalin province. I would prefer to be here or on the Felkan frontlines where I could do more to serve, but I suppose the Emperor knows best where my skills will be used.” +“Oh well I’ve heard the war with the Felkans is coming to an end soon.” +“Yes, I’ve heard that as well…and it concerns me the things that I’ve heard why it’s ending. Mass riots in the major cities of the Empire, soldier shortages, even heard about some of those traitorous shadow criminals carrying out terrorist tactics. And because of these problems what do we do with the Felkans? Another non-aggression pact! We should be butchering them and burning down their cities, not making peace with them again. If all of the Emperor’s enemies had one neck, I would sever it with one sword swipe.” + +Verant says nothing after your rant. Indeed over the past few years he’s heard you rant about the troubles of the Empire a lot more and knows to keep quiet. But if you’re making more outbursts than usual, it’s only because the Empire has more problems than usual. + +Lately you’ve been questioning how “great” the Empire is supposed to be. This is not the place you heard about when you were being trained by Mistress or Captain Gruz. In fact, during your first assignment in the Nalin province you encountered decadent officers and disobedient citizens even then. + +This questioning of the Empire then makes you question the Emperor which causes you great concern for that it treasonous thinking. But still…how is it he has allowed this to happen to his land? He is supposed to be all wise and all-powerful, but you’ve not seen much evidence of either. Never mind the fact that you’ve never seen him at all. + +It’s a rare thought, but there have been even a few times where you wondered what would’ve happened if you had joined Kane when he asked. + +You leave Fort Destiny without another word and board the carriage to the Delerg province. + +A few days later you arrive and Delerg is everything you’ve heard about, very swampy. The town you’re scheduled to arrive in looks like it’s sinking into marsh, which might explain why it’s even called Sinkhole. + +While you don’t know why you’re here, you do know you’re supposed to meet with a contact here, though you don’t know who that is or where you’re supposed to meet. + +As you take in the sights of this dismal town, the villagers look like they can barely contain their fear of you. You aren’t sure if it’s because they’ve heard of your reputation, or if it’s due to their natural suspicious nature. The swamp folk have always been known to be that way. They were one of the few people that didn’t resist Empire dominion at all when they first came to this land, but despite this submissiveness the swamp folk still maintained their wary ways. + +“Well if isn’t the Bane of Rask! It’s been a long time!” a voice calls out to you. You turn around and see not one, but two familiar faces. +“Roldan? Gerald?” you say seeing how much older they’ve gotten. It makes you realize just how much time has passed. +“Of course it’s us!” Roldan says. +“Yeah, we didn’t know you’d be the contact.” Gerald adds. +“Contact? I’m not anyone’s contact. I’m supposed to meet someone here, you guys aren’t it?” you say. +“Erm, no. In fact when Gerald arrived I thought he was the contact and vice versa. Well this is odd. I wonder who we’re supposed to be meeting?” + +You reply that you don’t know and then begin to feel slightly uneasy. With all your past experiences, you start to feel like this might be a trap, then another carriage comes into the town. When the passenger steps out, it’s an old, but still tough looking orc in battle armor. It’s Captain Gruz! He sees all three of you milling about in the open and shuffles over to you. + +“What in blazes are you lot doing out in the open like this? Any potential assassin could strike you down! I thought I taught you better than that! Come on let’s get into the tavern, we can talk there.” He scolds and then heads towards the tavern, you, Gerald and Roldan follow. + +The tavern is dark and nearly empty. The patrons inside see you four sit at a table and then move as far away as possible. + +“You thirsty? I sure am. Four ales!” Captain Gruz says. +“I’m not thirsty captain.” You say. +“They’re not for you, they’re for me! You guys order your own drinks! Anyway I imagine you’re all wondering what this small reunion is all about. Well let’s just say the Empire finally saw fit to take me off the sidelines and place me in charge of something worthwhile for a change. I’ll get right to the point and tell you, the Shadow Guard is here, or at least what’s left of them. For awhile we thought that they might be working with the Felkans, but they’re just taking advantage of the war.” + +This news causes you to sit forward and then look around. + +“Oh don’t worry, they’re not right HERE, lad. They’re in this province though; and you might be interested that Cyrus is the one leading this miserable little band of shadows. I imagine you and he got some unfinished business. In fact that’s why you’re here, since you’ve had a lot of experience in dealing with this situation before. As for you two, your own records are excellent and you’re Eternals. The only ones that are going to be skilled enough to handle this situation I think are Eternals.” +“How come Edgar isn’t here? He also had experience with the Shadow Guard and was with me during the Fort Defiance incident.” +“Eh, Edgar’s skills are best served on the Felkan frontlines right now. I know the war might be coming to an end, but there’s still quite a bit of fighting going on. Besides best not to have all you guys in one place.” +“That’s a different perception than I remember you having when you were arguing with Mr. Mol fourteen years ago.” You say. +“Heh, remembered that did you? Well, as I’m sure you know things change, ideas change. You get older and see things differently. Wouldn’t you agree?” + +You pause before answering, which causes Gruz to study you for a moment. + +“Yes, I suppose so.” You reluctantly reply. +“Of course you do, lad. You’d be a bleeding idiot if you didn’t.” Gruz says taking a drink of one of his ales. +“So, where are these Shadow Guard fanatics anyway?” Gerald asks. +“An old temple deep in the swamps. Used to be their old place of worship back before their Empire days apparently. Looks like Cyrus really bought into that dead religion, though it’s also arrogant of him to try to hide right underneath our noses. Hell, who knows? Maybe he knew he’d get discovered eventually and was just itching for a fight. Anyway, we’ll have some extra help when we arrive there. Trust me, I’ve got it set up.” + +The remainder of the time is playing a little catch up with your former team members while Captain Gruz enjoys his ale. It’s interesting to see how vastly different their experiences have been. + +Gerald says his time was initially boring until the war broke out. From then on he and Warrick were constantly paired up to perform commando mission deep into Felkan territory. Dangerous work, but he says they were treated pretty well by everyone and held in high regard among their fellow soldiers. Even the citizens were less troublesome in the Arat province and the local women threw themselves at him and Warrick every night he laughs. + +Roldan mentions his time was mostly spent cleaning up the rest of the kobolds in the Nalin province, breaking small bandit rings, and ultimately trying to keep the peasants in line. No problems from the usksha again though. When Captain Anu was promoted and sent to the Felkan frontlines, Brenda got promoted to command Fort Glory. The most surprising thing though, he and Brenda apparently married. Wasn’t anything fancy and there was paperwork that had to be filled out (A lot of it) but it was completely approved of by the Empire. + +Your own tales sound remarkably grim when compared to theirs. + +The strangest thing about all this is how they’ve all had contact with each other either directly or through messages. Gerald and Roldan even mention how they got letters from Kane years ago before his actions at Fort Defiance. They both confirm how the letters sounded very longing of the “old days” and referring to them as “brother.” Warrick and Brenda apparently got similar ones too. + +You ask Gerald if he met Edgar when he was transferred there. He replies that he did, but said that he was mostly sent to fight Felkan armies directly right along side most of the orcish detachments. + +“Sheesh. He’s gotta love that considering his experiences with orcs at Fort Defiance.” You say. +“Edgar’s an idiot. Always has been. I saw that even when I was training you guys. He’s a good warrior, but lacks vision. Surprised he’s lasted this long.” Captain Gruz suddenly replies. +“Well, I agree he’s always had a tendency to act without thinking, but after my last dealings with him, I think he’s improved a bit. Changed his outlook. You know, got older and sees things differently now.” You reply. +“Hmm. Maybe, but as far as I’m concerned being a meat shield is about the best thing he’s ever been good for, just like all the rest of dumb fuckers on the Felkan frontlines.” +“Hey, I’m on the Felkan frontlines!” Gerald protests. +“Yeah, and you’re not marching straight into those Felkan shooty weapons either. You’re being a lot more than just a meat shield like the rest of those stupid ass orcs.” +“Rest of those orcs? Not to point out the obvious, but you’re an orc, I mean aren’t those your people?” Roldan asks. +“Yeah and? Does that make us all relatives or some shit? Fuck my people! I got no patience for any of them anymore…” Captain Gruz begins to get loud and cause a scene. + +“Okay captain I think you’ve had enough. I think I saw an inn across the way, let’s get some rooms there and make plans to deal with the shadows tomorrow.” You suggest. +“Grrm, maybe you’re right…” Captain Gruz replies and then promptly falls to the floor. Gerald tries to pick him up. + +“Somebody go get the rooms and the other person help me carry the captain.” Gerald says. +> Help carry the captain +“Go get the rooms Roldan, I’ll help Gerald.” You say. +“Okay.” Roldan agrees and leaves. + +You and Gerald help the Captain Gruz up who is mumbling things the whole time. + +“Fucking idiots. It was perfect…who I am kidding? It was futile to begin with.” +“Just settle down sir.” Gerald says trying to calm him down. +“Or what? You’ll kill me too? Hey I’m not tryin’ ta put the moves on ya, you got your arm around me!” + +Gerald gets quiet really fast and even you start looking around. + +“Oh what? You think I didn’t hear about that incident? Ha ha ha! Relax, ya did the right thing, fuckin’ degenerate deserved it…” Gruz laughs. + +You’re just about to get to the door and that’s when you hear yelling and an explosion coming from the outside followed by screams. The force of it is enough to cause you all to fall back a bit. + +“Shit!” you blurt out and leave Gerald to tend to the captain. + +You look around and see a couple of damaged buildings, more than a few dead bodies in pieces. Your heart sinks though when you see Roldan lying on the ground in front of the damaged inn. + +When you rush over to him, his insides are clearly visible and one of his legs is gone. He struggles to breathe as he looks up at you. You can’t do anything for him. + +“Fuck. Damnit…” you quietly say and kneel down towards his bloody body. +“…tell Brenda that I love her.” +“I will.” +“That’s good…that’s good…hey if we’re all…all siblings like Kane said…that…that doesn’t make Brenda…my sister…does it?” Roldan asks with a small smile. +“Heh, I don’t think so, and even if it did so what? You found happiness with her.” You smile back. +“Yeah…you’re right. You… usually were.” he says and then drifts away. + +This time you do feel sadness at the loss of one of your own. Especially when you had just gotten to know him again. Gerald dashes over to you and even captain Gruz has sobered up a bit from this incident and is now interrogating the nearest hysterical citizen. + +“Who the fuck did this?! Answer me woman!” he demands and slaps her a few times, but she just pathetically cries and begs him to stop. +“Captain! Stop it! It’s obvious she doesn’t know anything!” Gerald shouts. +“Maybe not, but someone here does.” You say. “Alright, listen up! I am an Eternal and the man laying dead next to me was also an Eternal! My wrath for his death shall be the likes you’ve never known and you don’t want to know. One of you saw something, so someone better start talking or else this little town you call home is going to get a whole lot bloodier.” + +Nobody says anything for a while and there’s just dead silence, but eventually a little girl comes out from behind a barrel and speaks up. + +“I saw something Mr. Eternal.” +“Good, glad to see this town isn’t completely infested with cowards. You’re coming with me.” You say and take the girl to a room at the inn and proceed to question her. + +The girl is still a little nervous at first, but soon opens up quite a bit. She mentions that she was walking home from the general store and she saw Roldan leaving the tavern. He was almost to the inn when she saw these two figures shimming like they were almost invisible. She then says what happened next was very quick. The figures ran up to Roldan and then these two men appeared in gray cloaks. They both stabbed him several times before he could defend himself. + +Despite his wounds, he managed to stab one through the neck and grabbed the other when he tried to escape. She said at this point she had been hiding behind the barrel, but saw that the man in gray produced a gas sphere plant from his cloak and he yelled something she couldn’t understand. A blackish field started to emanate from the man, Roldan then fell to the ground and then the large explosion occurred killing several people that didn’t have the sense that the little girl did to get the hell out of there as soon as possible. + +“So much for the shadows not being here.” Gerald remarks. +“Shit, I fucked up. I should’ve known that they might’ve realized that we we’re coming.” Captain Gruz says. +“Doesn’t matter anyway. It’s obvious they’re prepared for a last stand sort of fight, if they’re willing to blow themselves up. No sense in depriving them of that, though I’m hoping they don’t start favoring blowing themselves up. It’s going to make fighting them more dangerous than it should be.” You say. +“Mmm, I know what you mean. Serving on the Felkan frontlines I had to experience several of their own explosive type weapons first hand, but from what I’ve heard those gas plant spheres aren’t common and grow rarely even in this area. Even then, they aren’t explosive on their own. The shadow probably used some sort of magic to make it explode like that. Is that right little girl?” Gerald asks to confirm, to which she nods. + +“Alright enough talk, we all need to get some rest before wiping the bastards out tomorrow.” Captain Gruz says and lies down on his bed. + +At this point you send the little girl away and tell her she’s served the Empire well and leave with Gerald. + +“Do you really think Gruz should be coming with us tomorrow? I mean with his leg and his age and all.” Gerald asks. +“If he wants to go on one last mission then I’m not going to deprive him of that. Don’t worry, he’ll keep up. I get the impression this is sort of personal to him.” +“Personal to him? I imagine it’s personal to you a lot more.” +“True, but I’m trying to not let it.” + +Of course that’s pretty hard to do when you have to put Roldan in a casket and sent back to Brenda. Gerald writes the letter to her. You can only imagine what her reaction is going to be about this news. This makes you wonder about the whole scenario that they were in love and got married. You know you briefly spoke to Roldan about this back at the tavern, but a lot of it still baffles you. How did it first come about? What was it like? Who initiated it? Was the attraction always there, even back when you were all in training? Could something like that ever happen to you? + +You think about the time you were with Captain Krozer and that’s the closest equivalent you have, but you know that wasn’t anything like love. You did respect her though and you’re pretty sure the feeling was mutual. Perhaps that’s how it started, but Brenda and Roldan were just in contact with each long enough to develop it further. + +Eventually you dismiss all these meaningless thoughts and rest up to prepare for your mission tomorrow. + +The next morning, you Gerald and Gruz set off on your journey. The trip through the swamps isn’t an easy one; it actually makes you long for the days of stomping through ice and snow. The whole time you’re traveling you’re constantly alert and feel like at anytime you could be attacked, which turns out to be true with the oversized insects and other minor hostile swamp animals dwelling here, but they aren’t the enemies you’re expecting. + +“So how many Empire troops are we going to have as back up?” Gerald asks Gruz during the trip. +“Empire? I’m lucky I managed to get them to accept my request to go on this mission! They didn’t send me anyone, not that they’d be much help anyway. Most Empire soldiers would stick out like a sore thumb and get themselves killed before they even reached the place. No, I’m relying on the ones that found these ruins to begin with. Dark elven mercs. If anyone can hide out better than the shadows, it’ll be them.” Gruz replies. + +Dark elves. You hated having to work with them back in your early years on the Rask frontier, but you can’t deny their effectiveness. + +“Shh! Do you hear that?” you ask. +“Probably another Sul Monkey. Those things are all over the place. Just glad it’s not mating season for them, otherwise we might be in big trouble. Hey, aren’t you humans related to them in some way?” Gruz asks. + +Gerald is about to reply, and then you hear a whizzing sound followed by a “thunk” sound. You then see Gerald with a large crossbow bolt directly in the center of his head. A single trickle of blood comes from the wound and drips off his nose. + +“I…been hit…” Gerald says and his eyes roll back as he falls into the soft mushy ground. + +“Shit!” Gruz shouts and ducks down into the mud. +> Duck down into the mud as well +You instinctively duck down into the mud like Gruz did; regrettably the hidden assassin anticipated that and begins shooting downward. + +You and Gruz both receive several bolts to the back. Gruz manages too shake off these annoyances partly because he’s wearing heavy armor and the other because as an orc his skin is pretty tough to begin with, especially with his experience. + +While you’re certainly wearing protective gear as well and an Eternal to boot, the bolts sink into your flesh a lot easier and deeper. The pain is great, but you manage to get back up in an effort to find better cover. Gruz spots the shadow assassin and engages him unfortunately two more shadows jump down from the trees to finish you off. Under normal circumstances you’d easily be able to handle the pair of them even with bolts in your back, but in typical shadow fashion, the bolts were dipped in some sort of poison, not strong enough to kill you, but enough to make you sleepy. + +And it’s this drowsiness that is your downfall. You swing at the two shadows a few times before they manage to land their own attacks on you. A quick slash to your neck releases an arterial spray and you’re dead before you even hit the ground.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Go get the rooms Roldan, I’ll help Gerald.” You say. +“Okay.” Roldan agrees and leaves. + +You and Gerald help the Captain Gruz up who is mumbling things the whole time. + +“Fucking idiots. It was perfect…who I am kidding? It was futile to begin with.” +“Just settle down sir.” Gerald says trying to calm him down. +“Or what? You’ll kill me too? Hey I’m not tryin’ ta put the moves on ya, you got your arm around me!” + +Gerald gets quiet really fast and even you start looking around. + +“Oh what? You think I didn’t hear about that incident? Ha ha ha! Relax, ya did the right thing, fuckin’ degenerate deserved it…” Gruz laughs. + +You’re just about to get to the door and that’s when you hear yelling and an explosion coming from the outside followed by screams. The force of it is enough to cause you all to fall back a bit. + +“Shit!” you blurt out and leave Gerald to tend to the captain. + +You look around and see a couple of damaged buildings, more than a few dead bodies in pieces. Your heart sinks though when you see Roldan lying on the ground in front of the damaged inn. + +When you rush over to him, his insides are clearly visible and one of his legs is gone. He struggles to breathe as he looks up at you. You can’t do anything for him. + +“Fuck. Damnit…” you quietly say and kneel down towards his bloody body. +“…tell Brenda that I love her.” +“I will.” +“That’s good…that’s good…hey if we’re all…all siblings like Kane said…that…that doesn’t make Brenda…my sister…does it?” Roldan asks with a small smile. +“Heh, I don’t think so, and even if it did so what? You found happiness with her.” You smile back. +“Yeah…you’re right. You… usually were.” he says and then drifts away. + +This time you do feel sadness at the loss of one of your own. Especially when you had just gotten to know him again. Gerald dashes over to you and even captain Gruz has sobered up a bit from this incident and is now interrogating the nearest hysterical citizen. + +“Who the fuck did this?! Answer me woman!” he demands and slaps her a few times, but she just pathetically cries and begs him to stop. +“Captain! Stop it! It’s obvious she doesn’t know anything!” Gerald shouts. +“Maybe not, but someone here does.” You say. “Alright, listen up! I am an Eternal and the man laying dead next to me was also an Eternal! My wrath for his death shall be the likes you’ve never known and you don’t want to know. One of you saw something, so someone better start talking or else this little town you call home is going to get a whole lot bloodier.” + +Nobody says anything for a while and there’s just dead silence, but eventually a little girl comes out from behind a barrel and speaks up. + +“I saw something Mr. Eternal.” +“Good, glad to see this town isn’t completely infested with cowards. You’re coming with me.” You say and take the girl to a room at the inn and proceed to question her. + +The girl is still a little nervous at first, but soon opens up quite a bit. She mentions that she was walking home from the general store and she saw Roldan leaving the tavern. He was almost to the inn when she saw these two figures shimming like they were almost invisible. She then says what happened next was very quick. The figures ran up to Roldan and then these two men appeared in gray cloaks. They both stabbed him several times before he could defend himself. + +Despite his wounds, he managed to stab one through the neck and grabbed the other when he tried to escape. She said at this point she had been hiding behind the barrel, but saw that the man in gray produced a gas sphere plant from his cloak and he yelled something she couldn’t understand. A blackish field started to emanate from the man, Roldan then fell to the ground and then the large explosion occurred killing several people that didn’t have the sense that the little girl did to get the hell out of there as soon as possible. + +“So much for the shadows not being here.” Gerald remarks. +“Shit, I fucked up. I should’ve known that they might’ve realized that we we’re coming.” Captain Gruz says. +“Doesn’t matter anyway. It’s obvious they’re prepared for a last stand sort of fight, if they’re willing to blow themselves up. No sense in depriving them of that, though I’m hoping they don’t start favoring blowing themselves up. It’s going to make fighting them more dangerous than it should be.” You say. +“Mmm, I know what you mean. Serving on the Felkan frontlines I had to experience several of their own explosive type weapons first hand, but from what I’ve heard those gas plant spheres aren’t common and grow rarely even in this area. Even then, they aren’t explosive on their own. The shadow probably used some sort of magic to make it explode like that. Is that right little girl?” Gerald asks to confirm, to which she nods. + +“Alright enough talk, we all need to get some rest before wiping the bastards out tomorrow.” Captain Gruz says and lies down on his bed. + +At this point you send the little girl away and tell her she’s served the Empire well and leave with Gerald. + +“Do you really think Gruz should be coming with us tomorrow? I mean with his leg and his age and all.” Gerald asks. +“If he wants to go on one last mission then I’m not going to deprive him of that. Don’t worry, he’ll keep up. I get the impression this is sort of personal to him.” +“Personal to him? I imagine it’s personal to you a lot more.” +“True, but I’m trying to not let it.” + +Of course that’s pretty hard to do when you have to put Roldan in a casket and sent back to Brenda. Gerald writes the letter to her. You can only imagine what her reaction is going to be about this news. This makes you wonder about the whole scenario that they were in love and got married. You know you briefly spoke to Roldan about this back at the tavern, but a lot of it still baffles you. How did it first come about? What was it like? Who initiated it? Was the attraction always there, even back when you were all in training? Could something like that ever happen to you? + +You think about the time you were with Captain Krozer and that’s the closest equivalent you have, but you know that wasn’t anything like love. You did respect her though and you’re pretty sure the feeling was mutual. Perhaps that’s how it started, but Brenda and Roldan were just in contact with each long enough to develop it further. + +Eventually you dismiss all these meaningless thoughts and rest up to prepare for your mission tomorrow. + +The next morning, you Gerald and Gruz set off on your journey. The trip through the swamps isn’t an easy one; it actually makes you long for the days of stomping through ice and snow. The whole time you’re traveling you’re constantly alert and feel like at anytime you could be attacked, which turns out to be true with the oversized insects and other minor hostile swamp animals dwelling here, but they aren’t the enemies you’re expecting. + +“So how many Empire troops are we going to have as back up?” Gerald asks Gruz during the trip. +“Empire? I’m lucky I managed to get them to accept my request to go on this mission! They didn’t send me anyone, not that they’d be much help anyway. Most Empire soldiers would stick out like a sore thumb and get themselves killed before they even reached the place. No, I’m relying on the ones that found these ruins to begin with. Dark elven mercs. If anyone can hide out better than the shadows, it’ll be them.” Gruz replies. + +Dark elves. You hated having to work with them back in your early years on the Rask frontier, but you can’t deny their effectiveness. + +“Shh! Do you hear that?” you ask. +“Probably another Sul Monkey. Those things are all over the place. Just glad it’s not mating season for them, otherwise we might be in big trouble. Hey, aren’t you humans related to them in some way?” Gruz asks. + +Gerald is about to reply, and then you hear a whizzing sound followed by a “thunk” sound. You then see Gerald with a large crossbow bolt directly in the center of his head. A single trickle of blood comes from the wound and drips off his nose. + +“I…been hit…” Gerald says and his eyes roll back as he falls into the soft mushy ground. + +“Shit!” Gruz shouts and ducks down into the mud. +> Hide behind a tree +From the trajectory of the bolt, the assassin is in front and probably was trying to hit you instead of Gerald. You immediately run for the nearest tree as several more bolts whiz past you. + +When you reach the tree two Shadow Guards jump down from it and attempt to stab you. You kick one in the groin as hard as you can, while deflecting the blow of the other with your sword. You dodge another attack by falling to the ground and chopping the shadow at one of his legs, nearly hacking it off. When he falls in agony you finish him off with your sword. + +The one staggering around with damaged man part, finally recovers, but attempts to disappear again. You throw your dagger at him as he begins to turn invisible, impaling him in the stomach. Meanwhile it appears that Captain Gruz is taking care of the one who was shooting bolts at you. + +“Bastard!” he says with his boot on the shadow and chopping the shadow’s head in two with his axe. Blood and brains splatter everywhere. + +You move around and scan the area cautiously and try to see if there’s any more shadows lurking about, but if there were they would’ve either attack you by now or run off. When you’re confident that none are left you walk over to Gerald who is dead already. + +“FUCK!” you shout while kicking a nearby piece of clumped up mud. You don’t feel sadness this time so much as you feel frustration. All those years he was performing commando raids in Felkan territory and he gets killed like this? Not even in close combat! Somehow it doesn’t seem right. Just like how Roldan died. You search Gerald’s body and find the letter he was planning on sending Brenda about Roldan, it seems you will have to do it now. Perhaps even alter it. + +Captain Gruz walks over to you, he has a few bolts in him, but he doesn’t seem particularly bothered by them. + +“Feh, I’ve had way worse than this.” He says as he pulls them out. “Y’know we’re on our own now.” +“What do you mean?” you ask. +“I’m saying these bolts, they ain’t Shadow Guard, these are dark elven quality. That fucker over there with his head cleaved in two had one of those fancy repeating dark elven crossbows too. And while I know dark elves to be treacherous bitches that’ll switch sides to whoever’s paying the most, they would NEVER allow anyone to use their equipment. My guess is those mercs that were going to meet us are all dead, well either that or they ran off.” +“Good, I want to kill the rest of these shadows anyway.” You say and proceed on to the ruins. + +Your next step of your journey confirms Gruz’s theory. You and he see signs of battle on your way to the ruins. Several of the bodies are dark elven, but an equal amount are Shadow Guard. + +“Looks like they were ambushed. Heh, pretty hard to do with dark elves. Still, it also looks like the dark elves gave the shadows a hell of a fight. Looks like those are the ruins up ahead. I’m guessing there probably aren’t too many left, this should be over pretty quick.” + +You and Gruz dispense with caution and boldly march into the ruins. You both look around as the crumbling statues of old forgotten gods loom over you. Eventually you find who you’re looking for in the remains of a temple that’s covered in vines and partially sinking into the swamp + +A single Shadow Guard stands over the bodies of several others of his kind. Near the bodies are empty flasks. + +“I’ll be with you soon my brothers and sisters. And especially you Draven.” Cyrus says looking at the bodies and ignoring you completely. +“Aw, how sweet. Glad you decided not to pussy out like the rest of your buddies by poisoning yourself and are at least are willing to face your death like a man.” Gruz replies. +“Yes, well it still remains to be seen Gruz. Though speaking of being a man, I’m impressed that you actually showed up here. I thought that you would’ve continued to hide and try to keep your involvement of these events a secret as you have for all these years.” + +This statement from Cyrus causes you to pause and look at Gruz. He looks guilty of something for a moment and then gives a toothy smile. + +“I wasn’t hiding Cyrus. I was waiting. Waiting until the day when I could finally track you down. It wasn’t my fuck up that got us into this mess. We could’ve been strong enough together to make a break from the Empire if you hadn’t decided to backstab us at Fort Destiny to save your own skin. Hah! See how well that turned out. Look at you now.” + +Even as jaded as you have become about the Empire, you are somewhat surprised about Captain Gruz…but in retrospect, somebody had to have some sort of input on having all those orcs transferred to Fort Defiance. Despite this revelation you’re too numb to excessively care. All you know is over the past few days you’ve seen two of your fellow Eternals die ignobly while doing their duty for the Empire. Something these traitors have obviously disregarded a long time ago. + +“Well, what’s it gonna be lad? You killin’ me or the shadow first?” Gruz asks. +“I think I’ll stick with the original plan. We’ll kill the shadow together, then you and me are going to settle up.” You say calmly. +“That’s the spirit boy!” Gruz laughs and steps towards Cyrus. + +Cyrus makes no more small talk or last minute threats. He focuses purely on combat. You expect him to use his Shadow Guard tricks like poison or invisibility, but he doesn’t. + +He easily dodges Gruz’s powerful yet clumsy attacks and lands a few well placed strikes on him, but Gruz shrugs them off like you’ve seen him do the whole time you’ve been fighting along side him. You can only imagine what an unstoppable juggernaut he must’ve been back in his younger days. + +As for you, you match Cyrus in sword skill. Whatever he learned from the Shadow Guard won’t help him in a face-to-face battle with you. All it takes is for you to take advantage of his divided concentration and you land a mortal blow, slicing his side clean open. + +Cyrus falls and deflects your attempt to split his head open, but he drops his sword from the force of your blow in the process. Weaponless, tired and bleeding out from a deep hole in his side, Cyrus accepts defeat. + +“Do it. Eternal slave of the Empire.” He says coldly and then you fulfill his request by decapitating him. + +You quickly turn to face Gruz, who already has his axe ready. + +“Alright Eternal, let’s finish this.” + +You and Gruz clash weapons. As you battle, you’re reminded of the times when you were still a child and how he taught you to fight. +CLANG! +How he told you to keep a calm head in battle. +TING! +How he told you to serve the Empire. +SHING! +How he had confidence in your skills. +CLANK! +How he saw you as a leader. +CLANK! +How he told you not to die for the Emperor…but to make the other dumb bastard die so that you could continue serving the Emperor + +SWIPE! SLICE! SLISH! SLISH! SLASH! + +How he told you that failure wasn’t an option. + +Gruz finally succumbs to his multiple wounds and falls to one knee leaning on his axe in an effort not to completely collapse. + +“Damn…shit….” Gruz gasps as he breathes heavily and feels his strength completely leaving him. +“Why?” you ask him. +“Why? Heh heh.” Chuckles a bit while at the same time coughing up some blood. “After all you’ve experienced in your service of the Empire, you have to ask me why? My people had already been tamed and conquered decades ago and I bought into the same bullshit you did when I was a little green snot that didn’t know any better. I worked my way up the ranks and did pretty good for myself, but for what? To be a lap dog that begged for a treat every time I did something right and get slapped down because I was rising too much above my so called station? I was still holding on to an idea that was long gone or never existed to begin with. It wasn’t until shortly after your training was complete that I started to seriously change my mind. The Felkan war and the conspiracy that the Shadow Guard came up with just made it easier… I think I’m gonna just lay down for a while.” Gruz says as he loses his last battle with staying conscious. + +You step towards him with your sword ready to strike, but instead you just watch him slowly drift off and hear his last words. + +“I lived a lot longer than I should have. This is a good death for an orc. I’ve seen your new replacements Eternal. They’re monsters. They’ll finish off what’s left of this decaying husk of an Empire, not save it. Good riddance. Heh, don’t worry though; you’ll probably survive the coming shit storm. You’ll outlive everyone.” He says and then finally dies. + +With the way things have been going lately, Gruz may be correct. It doesn’t necessarily make you feel any better though. +> Years pass... +Year 35 + +Another rebellion put down. You wipe your sword of blood and shake your head as you look around at the chaos. This is the Quala province, the very heartland of the Empire. You shouldn’t have to be trying to maintain order here only a few miles away from the capital itself. + +“Ha ha ha! Come on bitch, give it up! I’m an Eternal, you oughta be flattered that I’m even wasting my time on your normal ass!” private Felding says as he attempts to rape a nearby girl. + +You briskly walk over to Felding and pull him off her. You know damn well that the rest of his kind are probably doing stuff like this all over the place, but this one is in your direct sight and under your command. + +“What the hell, captain? If you wanted first dibs you could’ve just said so! Ah look, now she’s getting away!” +“We’re here to maintain order private, not create more chaos.” +“Oh yeah? Coulda fooled me by destroying the entire town like this.” +“Regrettable, but during battle only victory matters.” +“Exactly! We won! So now it’s time to have our fun with these disobedient peasants. Y’know instill fear in them so they won’t do it again.” +“You’re not instilling fear though, you’re just satisfying your own desires.” +“Hey, who says we aren’t supposed to have fun while doing it?” + +It’s like talking to a brick wall. You’ve had these “New Eternals” under your command for a few months now and they are some of the most undisciplined troops you’ve ever had. You can try to encourage them, you can try to reason with them, you can punish them, and none of it has a real effect. The only constant is that they know of your reputation and know that you’re also an Eternal, which makes them just fearful of you enough that they don’t attempt to directly challenge your authority like they have with so many of their other commanders. + +If it were up to you, you would’ve had them all killed for treason as soon as they murdered their first CO, but for whatever reason the Empire wants them active. You’re guessing because the Empire’s desperate. So they were ultimately transferred to you and unfortunately you’re not allowed to kill them either…well unless they try to kill you first. + +You swear this must be what it’s like to be a svelk. + +They are like children, malicious hateful little children. It’s not even their suspect loyalty that baffles you; it’s their complete lack of discipline. Even Kane and Cyrus who opposed you had discipline. Hell, Edgar who was arguably the most emotional and hotheaded of the group was a hundred times more disciplined than any of these new “Eternals.” You remember back to your own training and there were a few of your fellows that didn’t learn proper discipline either. They never made it past Mistress and the few that did, didn’t survive Gruz. Whoever was in charge of their training did a horrible job and should’ve been executed for incompetence along with the rest of these vicious monsters. That old orc was right, they will destroy what’s left of the Empire, but you doubt if they’ll survive long after its downfall. + +You think back to all the real Eternals. You, Edgar and Brenda are the only ones left, as Warrick killed in the final days of the Felkan War. At least you assume that’s what happened, his body was never found and you know he would’ve rather died than let himself be captured to rot in a P.O.W. Camp. Either way it’s truly a loss you never ever got to talk with him again. + +From what you know Edgar is still stationed in the Arat province, probably trying to keep his own “eternals” in line to keep the peace there. As for poor Brenda you know she has her command in the Nalin province and probably still quietly grieving for Roldan. + +After all you’ve been through, it’s come to this and you’re wondering what the hell you’re still fighting for. The Emperor? You haven’t cared about that unknown ruler for years. For all you know he’s some feeble minded inbred idiot figure head that his advisors keep locked away while they bumble around ruling things probably about as well as he would. + +The Empire? Perhaps at one time, but as it has lost territory, respect and apparently all resemblance of sanity over the years you’ve lost all faith that it can ever regain any sort of glory it might have had, if it ever had it to begin with. You’ve tried your best to stem back the tide of chaos, but you’re only one man even if you are an Eternal. + +While you ponder your potential future, private Felding interrupts you. + +“Hey, cap? You’re in a bit of a daze there. So if you’re done I’m going to go now.” +“Hold on, I have one more thing to tell you.” +“(Sigh) What?” Felding says with an exasperated tone. +“You’re not a fucking Eternal. None of you little shits are.” You say and run Felding through and pull up on the sword unleashing his blood and guts onto the ground. Felding makes a high pitched scream and slumps on top of his entrails after you remove the sword. + +“Shit! The cap just killed Felding!” another so called eternal shouts while he and his buddy have just come back from looting some farmer’s home. The pair of them look like they want to run, but you make it easy on them. + +“Go ahead and run or stay. I don’t care anymore. I’m leaving. I will tell you this though, if the Empire sends any of you unruly scum after me, know that I shall take great pleasure in not just killing you, but in drawing it out for as long as possible. Remember this.” + +And with that last warning, you leave your service to the Empire. + +The question now is, where will you go? What will you do? This all feels so wrong when you think about it. You’ve killed so many for abandoning, opposing, or attempting to betray the Empire and here you are doing the same thing. Was it all for nothing? Was it worth it? + +You don’t know. You always believed at the time you were right and that you were doing the right thing. Maybe you were, maybe you weren’t. You just know that you can’t serve something you don’t believe in anymore. Especially when everyone else around you doesn’t either. + +Speaking of not knowing, you don’t know how to do anything except kill people. While you’re certain that you’d be able to hire your skills out somewhere, the idea of being a mercenary is a little distasteful for you. You’d rather not push the svelk comparison that far. + +You could swear loyalty to another government you suppose. Perhaps the Felkan Kingdom? You’re not sure they’d want you, what with all their high tech weapons and your own government once fighting against them. + +The only other alternative for you is to carve out your own territory and rule it as your own. While it’s true you do have leadership qualities, you know nothing of actually running a government. You honestly wouldn’t know where to begin. +> Become a mercenary +You have no desire to serve another government that’s likely to be just as corrupt and useless as the one you served. You don’t really feel like carving out your own territory either, what could you gain, the petty power thrill of being another tyrant with delusions of grandeur? You’ve seen that story play out several times and it hasn’t gotten the people who pursued it anywhere. + +Maybe the svelk had it right. Ultimately serve nobody, but yourself. After all you’ve pretty much had to do that most of the time since the Empire rarely ever saw fit to help you out in any meaningful manner. The question is where can you find work as a mercenary without needing to work for any sort of government. You then remember, Rask. + +The Rask territory completely broke off from the Empire and declared itself independent years ago. No attempt has been made to retake it either, as far as you know Fort Destiny was just completely abandoned. The towns there have banded together as a loose alliance for protection and trade, but nothing more than that. Despite this, they still have need for warriors and such to defend against the many monsters that lurk in the wilderness. + +Sounds like a perfect place for you to earn a living and you’re already are quite familiar with the area. You find a nearby horse and set off for the north. Along the way you see the landscape of the Empire, which at one time was orderly and even idyllic is now burning and in tatters. Despite the chaos you don’t need to do any battle, not even when passing groups of angry peasants who are taking every opportunity to get revenge on their oppressive government and its agents in all forms. You can only assume your reputation is enough to scare them off or they don’t even recognize you. If it’s the latter then it only confirms your belief that you weren’t making that much of a difference in the Empire anyway. + +When you eventually make it to the Rask borders the cold chill and snow are almost welcoming to you. As bad as it was here at times, this harsh place is probably the closest you can call home now, you only hope you can still make one here without too much problem. + +A few miles in and you see Fort Destiny in the distance, it looks about the same. You wonder what it’s being used for now, but you see several young men standing around outside, they look like guards. You approach and are stopped. + +“Halt, this is Kenneth’s Rest. If you’re here to trade then you may enter, but don’t cause any trouble or you’ll find yourself in more than you bargained for!” a young guard says. He’s wearing a patchwork Empire uniform, all of them are. You wonder if these were young recruits that just stayed when the Empire abandoned the place. If so then there are probably others as well, in fact the name Kenneth sounds familiar, but you can’t place it. In any case you could do with a small break so you decide to stop here, you also figure this would be as good a place as any to start looking for work. + +You tell the young man that you are not here to cause trouble, but to look for work. The young guard tells you that you might want to look for Kenneth as he usually needs various jobs done. He says he’s usually found at the inn that being where he keeps his office. + +You enter the fort and see that it has changed quite a bit with various traders selling and buying with each other in the courtyard. It still seems to have most of its defensive siege weapons, though they look like they’re in disrepair. You notice there are still guards patrolling the top walkways, though significantly less than when this place was still a military installation. It is at this time an older guard patrolling in the crowds sees you. + +“Hey! I know you! It’s the Bane of Rask!” he shouts. + +With this call, everyone else now turns to you. Some of the other older guards with long memories begin to realize it’s you as well and move in to advance with their halberds. The younger guards who never served under you do likewise, but from their own hesitation its apparent that stories about you have been told. One of the guards whispers to another who runs off. + +You take all this in stride; you figure that they believe you’re here to punish them all for desertion or treason. Amusing, since at one time that would’ve been true, but you’re actually here for the same reason. + +“Alright you just get off that horse slowly. We don’t want any trouble, we’re just trying to make a new life for ourselves.” +“I understand that, but if I have to get off my horse for any reason, I promise you it won’t be in your best interest that I do so. I’m not here to cause trouble anyway. I just want to talk to Kenneth, I heard he’s the one who has several jobs that need done.” +“Sounds like a trick to me.” One of the younger guards says. +“I assure you as any of the men that have served under me here can attest to, I do not trick. How about I just wait here for Kenneth and the rest of you go about your business… or continue to hold your weapons pointed at my direction if you believe it will make you any safer. That’s fine too.” + +You wait a few minutes still on your horse, hoping you don’t need to turn this place into a bloodbath, and then Kenneth finally appears. That’s when you suddenly remember the name. + +“Lieutenant Verant! I knew the name Kenneth sounded familiar. Just forgot it was your first name, never having called you by it on a regular basis and all.” You remark. Kenneth looks like he’s about to collapse from fear. + +“Oh shit. Now look sir, we can explain all this. I mean…we thought…uh…” + +You hold up your hand for him to stop before he has a heart attack. + +“Verant…Kenneth. There is nothing you can say that could possibly prevent you and everyone here executed for treason to the Empire. Fortunately for you, I am no longer in the service of the Empire.” +“You…you’re not?” +“No. I am shall we say a free agent and looking for a way to put my combat skills to use.” +“I…don’t know what to say.” +“How about saying that you have some work for me?” + +And so your career as a mercenary begins… +> Years pass... +Chapter 3A1: Bane of Rask + + +Year 45 + +“Bastard!” you say landing a killing blow on the last auravrax. + +You do a double check of the cave just to make sure you’ve got all the beasts. It’s times like this you’re reminded of your kobold hunting days. Of course auravraxes are a lot furrier and stupider. Doesn’t make them any less dangerous though considering they’re basically balls of hair with lots of teeth and a vicious streak a mile wide. You wonder how it was you never encountered them before when you were posted up here. You can only assume that the larger creatures like ogres and wendigos kept them in check. Thanks to your depletion of such creatures other predators managed to gain better dominance. Nature is wonderful at balancing things out that way. + +After making a check you pile up the bodies and start skinning. You figure between the payment for this job and the sale you’ll make on the pelts you’ll have enough money for at least of week’s worth of wine, women and song. + +“Nah, to hell with the song. More women.” You chuckle to yourself. + +Thoughts about such “common” pleasures would’ve never entered your head decades ago. Makes you realize how much you’re changed since then, but it’s a good change you think. For the first time, you’ve actually been enjoying life rather than just going through the motions of it like a golem. Life is so much simpler and easier when you don’t have anyone to answer to; especially when that “someone” doesn’t even know what the fuck they’re doing half of the time. Life of course still has its bad moments, but compared to your time serving the Empire, it’s like a non-stop party. + +The Empire, now just another government resigned to the trash heap of history. All of its years of power and whatever glory it claimed it had completely gone. And of course much like Mother Nature, the smaller predators get to take their chance in the sun now that the big one is extinct. One of those smaller predators being one your old fellow Eternals, Edgar. + +You don’t know all the details, but from the rumors you’ve heard he’s declared himself a general and is calling the territory in his control, The Eternal Dominion. He apparently managed to get some of those chaotic eternal wannabes in some semblance of order to help him as well. When you first heard about this you could only shake your head in disappointment. Not even so much for what he’s doing, but more with how he’s doing it. It’s almost like he’s going down the same path that Kane did, but with even less planning and followers that are probably more duplicitous than Shadow Guards. You’d think that he would’ve learned something from that mess. + +Still, it’s his life and you have yours. You stop reminiscing about the past and concentrate on skinning the auravraxes. When you’re finished you cook up one of them to eat and then get some sleep. The next day you set off to Keplavisk with your furs. + +When you get to Keplavisk, the usual people acknowledge you. Some are friendly, some aren’t, and others with longer memories hate your guts for your action when you were trying to maintain order here a long time ago. Just one of the things you have to put up with, after all you still have your reputation of being… + +“Bane of Rask! Bane of Rask! Hey wait up!” Ulivik yells. +“(Sigh) Boy, I told you to stop calling me by that ridiculous name. In fact I told you to stop following me period!” +“Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are those auravrax furs? Did you kill all of them? I bet you just went in and totally destroyed them without fear!” Ulivik says while making sword whooshing sounds. + +You roll your eyes at the teenager’s over enthusiasm and resign yourself to him following you while you head to the town hall. For whatever reason he sees you as some sort of brave “hero” though you wish he wouldn’t. You can’t get too mad at him though, not his fault he’s a dark elf brought up by humans. There’s got to be a lot of confusion going on there. + +You mostly ignore Ulivik’s incessant questioning until you get to the town hall where upon his guard run him off with racial slurs and threats. You enter the building and see the mayor. Mayor Stundle is sitting his fat ass at his desk doing nothing of any importance as usual. + +“Ah Mr. Bane, I can see by the numerous pelts you’re carrying that you’ve taken care of the problem, I knew you would. That’s why you’re the best merc in the Confederation. Your payment is on the desk there.” +“Good, and my name isn’t Bane you know. I keep telling people that.” +“Indeed it may not be, but that’s what everyone knows you as. Can’t fight fame or maybe in your case infamy. Heh heh.” +“Yeah, anyway I showed you the proof, I’ve got some furs to sell.” +“Got a special job for you if you want.” +“Maybe later, I’m going to enjoy myself.” +“Okay, but I can’t promise you it’ll be available when you get back.” + +As you leave Mayor Stundle’s office, Flog is just entering with several ogre scalps. He displays his obvious dislike of you as usual. As thorough as you were when you destroyed Fort Defiance, Flog survived because he did the smart thing of running away and hiding as soon as he saw your army approaching. + +“Outta da way Bane, Flog has to see fat mayor!” +“He’s all yours.” You remark not really wanting to deal with his attitude today, of course in typical orc fashion, Flog feels the need to press the issue. He sees the auravrax furs and makes his move. +“Gruh. You kill little furry things. Flog kill big ogres! More proof that Flog better merc than you!” +“Sure Flog, whatever.” You say dismissively which of course annoys Flog even more. +“Flog gonna kill you one day Bane!” he shouts as you walk away. +“Sure Flog, whenever you’re ready.” You say almost yawning. Another time and place you would’ve killed him for speaking to you in such a manner, but over the years you’ve mellowed with age. Besides he’s been threatening to kill you for the last eight years. The first few times you took him seriously. Now it’s just boring. If he really ever wants to try he knows where to find you, not like you’re hiding. + +After selling your furs you make you take your money to the closest tavern where you proceed to make good on your claim of relaxing. After a couple days of carousing you’re lying in bed with a couple of serving wenches and you decide that you should probably get back to work. No point in waiting around until all your coin is gone, you’ve had your fun now its time to get back to what you’re really good at, killing stuff. You tell the girls in your room to leave and get prepared to go find some more work. + +You’ve barely stepped out of the inn and Ulivik has already found you and nearly gets himself stabbed for sneaking up on you. + +“Hey Mr. Bane, it’s just me!” he says with a worried tone. +“Boy, didn’t I tell you to never sneak up on me like that? I could’ve killed you and I doubt if anyone would’ve blamed me for it!” you shout +“Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are you going on another mission?” +“What do you think?” +“I think you are! But Mayor Stundle already gave out all of the jobs, you’ll probably have to go to another town.” +“And how do you know this?” +“Because I tried to sign up, but I got thrown out of the town hall and called names.” +“Sounds about right, but how did you get in there in the first place?” +“I snuck in. I think I’m getting really good at it!” +“Hmm, sounds like your svelk heritage is finally paying off.” You say. +“Svelk?” Ulivik asks as if you’ve spoken a made up word. +“Svelk, you know it’s the proper name for you dark elves, you mean you’ve never heard the term?” +“No, I’ve been called a dark elf before, but I mostly get called a lot of other names.” +“Well life’s tough kid, now you go run along…” +“Hey why don’t I come with you on your next mission!?” + +And there it is. You knew the day was coming where he’d start asking you to bring him with you. + +“Yeah, no. I work alone.” +“Aw come on! I need the experience! I try to sign up for even the easy jobs and I get thrown out! I’ve even tried going door to door asking if there are any monsters they need killing and they usually just say, yeah the one standing front of me! Then they slam the door in my face! It’s not fair!” +“Why do you want to be a merc anyway? I mean I know you’ve got a family that takes care of you. They must, if they were willing to take on the ostracizing that would come in raising a dark elf baby.” +“They do and I know they love me, but working as a hide tanner is boring! I want to be a mercenary and live a life of adventure! I mean I’ve heard stories of how my race is composed of nothing but mercenaries! Just think, a long proud line of brave ancestors that lived a glorious life of excitement! I should be as noble as them!” + +You almost laugh when hearing how Ulivik has spoken of his race. He truly is out of touch as there is absolutely nothing glorious, proud or noble about them. Even brave is debatable most of the time. + +“Ulivik, if you really want to be a merc, why not just go to Kenneth’s Rest? He doesn’t give a shit who he hires. Hell, he hires dark elves on a regular basis.” +“I would, but uh, I’m not allowed to leave the town…but I know if you were with me, my parents would let me go! So can I please come with you?!” + +This scenario is just so bizarre; you hardly believe that it’s happening, a dark elf practically begging you to teach him to be a mercenary. The crazy thing about all this is you’re actually considering it. You must finally be suffering from some of the blows you’ve taken to the head in the past. It’s the only explanation. +> Take Ulivik with you +You decide to humor the boy and agree. Chances are, he’s not going to get permission from his parents anyway and when that happens he’ll be less likely to bother you again. If he does get permission, well it’s not that far to Kenneth’s Rest and you were going there anyway. Plus you’ll have given him the chance he wants and again he’ll be less likely to bother you. + +“Alright Ulivik, you go ask your parents, but I’m taking you to Kenneth’s Rest and no further. And when we get there, you’re on your own, don’t think that you’re going to be tagging along with me anywhere else.” +“Okay! That’s great! I’ll be right be back…uh could you come with me, so they know I’m telling the truth?” +“Oh fer…fine.” + +You follow Ulivik back to his parent’s store which smells heavily of leather. The pair of them are working on some sort of the hide when you both walk in. + +“Mom! Dad! Mr. Bane said he’d take me to Kenneth’s Rest and teach me to be a mercenary! So can I go now?” +“Hey wait I never said I’d teach…” you start to say before Ulivik’s dad interjects his own comments. +“Oh is that right? And how do you know that? How do you know he won’t just rob and kill you along some lonely road?” +“Or worse!” his mother says. +“Hey wait a minute now…” +“But this isn’t fair! You said if I could find somebody to teach me, that you’d allow me to go!” Ulivik whines. +“Yeah, well we didn’t think you’d actually be successful, let alone get a cold hearted killer like Bane here to agree. Which makes me wonder why he did…” +“Trust me, at this point I’m wondering the same thing.” You reply. +“Ulivik, why can’t you just be interested in the family business? It’s a more honorable profession than being a mercenary. It’s honest work.” +“Yeah and the workin’ man is a sucker! Look at where we live!” +“Hey! We get by just fine, and this business has put food in your belly, clothes on your back and a roof over your head! So don’t you dare bad mouth this proud family tradition!” +“Yeah, well I’m not really your son anyway! And you’re not my real parents! I hate this place and every here hates me!” Ulivik screams and leaves slamming the door. + +You’re left in an awkward situation with his parents. + +“Okay, so I guess that settles that, I’ll just be going now…” you say. +“No, you get back here you sonofabitch.” Ulivik’s dad says. +“Excuse me?” +“I called you a sonofabitch, now if you want to kill me for that you can do it after hearing what I’ve got to say first.” +“Heh, okay. It’s been a weird sort of day today anyway, I’ll play.” You say with a smile. +“Yeah, well I ain’t playing. Look, I know all about you, and you probably don’t know me at all but I remember your ruthless reputation when you were still in service of the Empire. There was a family that lived down the block from me and my wife. We we’re friends and they even had a couple of children. Children that we would sometimes love to entertain because we couldn’t have any of our own. But this family wasn’t happy with the Empire’s rules so they along with several others protested…” + +You stop the tanner right there. + +“Yeah, yeah, I know what you’re going to say, I had them all killed for treason and had their heads put on pikes. Well I was trying to maintain order and I did what I had to do to get the job done. I’m sure this story pales in comparison to others have screamed at me in the past and you don’t even need to make your point about hating me, because I’m used to it anyway. Besides you don’t want your son going to Kenneth’s Rest and I’m certainly not going to drag him along. If anything I’d wish he’d stop looking up to me as some sort of hero and following me around. I was hoping by doing this for him I’d finally be rid of him. So if you don’t mind, I’ll be going now and I’ll also be disappointing you again, by not killing you before I leave.” + +You turn to leave and that’s when you get another unusual request. + +“If you take him to Kenneth’s Rest, will you also look after him?” Ulivik’s mother asks. +“What?!” +“If you want money to do so, we can pay. Just can you look after him for a while at least?” +“Okay…now I’m confused. I thought not only did you not want him to go, but that I was also a ruthless bastard that would probably rob and kill him along a lonely road?” +“Yeah, we don’t want him to go, and yeah you are a ruthless bastard…but I also know you actually do have some sort of code of honor. You might’ve left the Empire behind, but the regimented way of thinking you have is still there. You wouldn’t bother killing my boy unless you felt he was a direct danger to you, and I think we both know that isn’t the case.” Ulivik’s dad says. +“Well that’s the truth.” +“The other thing is…we’re not going to be able to stop him. He’s been getting more and more restless about this, and he’s going to want to pursue this career path whether we want him to or not. At this point he’s just going to run away from home and who knows what trouble he’ll get into. (sigh) Maybe it’s just his nature, bein’ a dark elf and all, but for good or ill, me and my wife have taken on the responsibility of raising him. And part of that is making sure he has the survival skills that he’ll need to make it in this world. We can’t teach him that, but you could. Look, like my wife said, we can pay you a good sum just for you teach him the basics, or whatever else is involved, if you need more, I dunno we’ll try to figure out something.” + +You’re speechless for a moment. Just when you think you’ve seen the worst in people, something like this happens and surprises you. + +“I’m not sure what you expect me to do. I mean this job isn’t something I can teach like from a book. Most of what he’s going to have to learn is going to be from direct experience. I mean I suppose I could teach him some combat skills, but the rest is going to mainly be up to him.” +“Well do what you can, and take this in the meantime.” + +Uliviki’s mother hands you a small bag. When you look inside, it’s nothing but gold coins. This has to be some of their savings, possibly all of their savings. They must really trust you, if they’ve given you this much. + +“I’ll do my best. You have my word as an Eternal.” You say and pocket the bag of coins. With those last words you exit the tanner’s store intending to find Ulivik. Fortunately you know he isn’t far. + +“Ulivik, I know you’re around the corner. Stop sulking, or pouting or whatever teenage angst you’re doing and let’s go.” + +Ulivik slowly comes out from behind the corner. + +“You’re taking me with you?” +“Yeah, I scared your parents into letting you come with me. Now grab whatever gear you want to take and let’s go before all the good jobs are taken.” + +Ulivik is completely giddy at this turn of events and runs back into the store to get his stuff. You on the other hand are wondering how the hell you got yourself into this. Then you feel the bag of coins again and remember. + +On your journey to Kenneth’s Rest, you explain to Ulivik some of the things he should know such as haggling for better prices on jobs and the art of intimidation. You also teach him a few combat moves. He’s a rookie to be sure, but his agility allows him from getting hurt too badly. + +When you get to Kenneth’s Rest, the place is as busy as always. Ulivik is more than a little distracted by the surroundings, and you have to keep reminding him to stay alert. + +“Hey stop staring at the harlots and pay attention! Just because fighting isn’t supposed to be allowed here, doesn’t mean it doesn’t happen. In fact people around here love to start trouble. Don’t stare at anyone in the eye for too long and make sure you don’t bump into anybody. You could either get into a fight, or someone might even try to pick your pocket.” +“Okay. Here isn’t the job board that way?” +“Job board? Hah. I never use those things. I go straight to the source. Trust me, if you want to get a job that pays well; get to know and make contact with the owners or government officials. Fortunately Kenneth used to work for me at one time, so it was quite easy for me to make contact with him. And when we find him, just keep your mouth shut, and let me do all the talking.” + +Eventually you find Kennth, he’s as jumpy as ever whenever you first see him. + +“Sir! I didn’t expect you to be down this way so soon? What can I do for you today?” +“Kenneth, will you relax? It’s been what, like ten years now? I’m not your superior officer anymore; you don’t have to keep calling me sir and getting all nervous and shit.” +“I know sir, just old habits you know? Who’s this with you?” +“This here is Ulivik, and he’s going to be my apprentice for a while.” +“Apprentice? Seriously? Never pegged you as the teaching type.” +“Right, Kenneth, like all those years of training soldiers in this very fort count for nothing at all.” +“No, that’s not what I mean…I just oh I dunno. It’s just odd I guess. He’s a svelk, how come he’s not with his own people?” +“That’s a long and unusual story, and one I don’t have time to go into. Besides we’re not here to satisfy your curiosity, we’re here for jobs, but seeing as this is Ulivik’s first time and all, can we get something maybe a little less…lethal?” +“Hmm, usually that sort of stuff is on the boards, but I think I got something. Oh! There’s a nest of auravraxes a few miles from here.” +“Ugh, more of those furry things? I just wiped out a nest of them a week ago!” +“Well that’s all I got that’s on the easy side. I mean I’ve got some other jobs too, but you said this was more for training your apprentice than anything else.” +“I can take on a harder task Mr. Bane. I mean I have to learn from experience right?” Ulivik pipes up forgetting that he was supposed to keep his mouth shut. + +Still, he might have a point. +> Take on the easy job +Ulivik might think he’s ready, but he’s definitely not. Killing auravraxes might be easy for you, but they’ll be more than enough for him to handle. Anything harder and he may very well be killed in the blink of an eye. Normally this would just be on the job training, but you were sort of paid to look after him for a while at least. + +“Give us the auravrax nest job.” You say. Ulivik looks a little disappointed, but he doesn’t speak out of turn again. Kenneth proceeds to tell you exactly where the creatures have been spotted in large quantities and the pair of you are on your way. + +Along the way, you tell Ulivik how he should approach fighting these things and how not to take them lightly as they can easily take an arm off or any other limb if you aren’t careful. He seems to understand the risk. + +As you get closer to their nest, you begin to encounter the furry fiends. Ulivik slightly freezes up when they spot you and attack. You have to snap him out of it and take up the fighting slack. + +“Come on kid, move in and attack! This is the moment of truth!” you shout. Fortunately, this motivates him to do just that. Of course after the fight, he’s got a very different view of things now. He’s out of breath, his heart is racing and he’s probably feeling a mix of excitement and fear, or perhaps just fear in his case. + +“So, is it everything you expected it to be?” you ask. +“I…yeah, I mean no. I mean…(pant) that was intense.” +“Yeah, well it’s about to get even more intense, we’ve still got a whole bunch more to kill.” + +The auravrax nest is another typical hole in the ground filled with them. Standard stuff for you, but its Ulivik’s true test. If he can make it through alive and in one piece, he might just have what it takes after all. You let him do most of the fighting, only intervening when it really looks like he’s going to get himself eaten or when you’re directly attacked. After he thinks he’s killed them all, you point out that he should double check the entire dwelling just in case. + +“What? But we got ‘em all! I mean if any were still alive they would’ve attacked by now.” +“Not necessarily. A few of the smarter ones will actually find some place to hide and attack when you think you’re safe and let your guard down. Trust me, you better double check. It might be boring, but this is part of the job and you will do it if you want to stay alive. And while you’re at it bring the bodies of the dead ones back here for skinning. You always need proof and the furs usually fetch a good price. It’s a good way to earn extra money. Off your go, and if I hear any more whining from your apprenticeship is at an end and you truly will be on your own.” + +Ulivik certainly doesn’t want that, so he obeys what you tell him to do. You can sort of tell his “hero worship” is already starting to wane a bit though, but that’s good. It’ll keep him grounded and show him that this isn’t some glorious profession that he thinks it is. You figure after about a week of this and he’ll probably be ready to go back to wanting to take up his dad’s business or at least considering it. + +Eventually after all the double checking, skinning and some sleep you head back to Kenneth’s Rest. + +“I know I asked you this earlier, but it bears repeating. Is it everything you thought it would be?” +“Some of it I suppose, I dunno it’s weird. Part of me almost wants to go back to take up my dad’s business.” He says, causing you to smile to yourself at being correct. +“Well if you want to get out, the best time to do it is when you’re ahead. If you’re going to stick with it though, I’m going to warn you, my combat training is only going to get tougher.” +“Tougher? But you saw me handle myself.” +“I saw you nearly get your head bitten off several times if I hadn’t been there to help. And if you think if I’m being mean, you have no idea what being mean really is. MY first training instructor was a sadistic svelk bitch and out of all the people I’ve ever met, she still ranks number one.” +“So is this why you agreed to train me? Some sort of revenge then?” Ulivik asks. +“Ha ha ha! Is that what you think? If I was going to hold grudges for something like that, I’d be bringing genocide to the svelk race. No, if anything she helped me survive and that’s what I’m trying to do for you, assuming you even want to pursue this path. I’d say you’d better decide what your priorities are between now and by the time we get our payment from Kenneth.” + +Ulivik is silent for the rest of the way, makes for a nice change. Still, you are wondering if he’s going to let his steadily decreasing opinion of you change his mind about being a merc. Eventually you get back to Kenneth’s Rest which is busy as usual, you also run into another face you haven’t seen in a while, though you weren’t really missing it in the first place. + +“Well if it isn’t the infamous Bane of Rask, heard you were around.” Eldolith remarks with her small group of svelk milling about behind her. +“Eldolith, I notice your little band of cutthroats is getting smaller and smaller. Keep this up and you’ll soon have no more warm bodies to hide behind and actually have to do the fighting yourself.” +“And I’ve heard you acquired yourself a new one. What’s wrong, human aging finally catching up with you at last Eternal? Is this him? A svelk? Hmmm he is very young, is he your pleasure boy?” + +Before you can reply, Ulivik steps up and speaks. + +“I am a mercenary, like you and the rest of our kind!” + +This of course causes laughter among Edolith and her men. + +“You? You’re no mercenary, let alone one of our kind following around a human like some harlot in heat. No, what you are is a poor mockery of what a svelk should be. Now be gone, your mere presence offends me.” Edolith says and turns her back on you both. Ulivik nearly takes the bait, but you intervene and hold him back from getting himself killed. Eldolith and the rest of her group laugh and head to the inn. + +“Easy, there. Words nothing more. I’m sure you’ve heard worse when you were still working as a tanner.” +“Perhaps, but this is different! I’m a mercenary now, not some weakling tanner!” +“To most you’re still a snot nosed kid that doesn’t know shit and that would be a correct assessment, especially to a svelk. Now I’m sure harsh words from one of your own kind has filled you with a bruised ego, anger and disappointment, but if you try to challenge her, she’d cut you down before you even knew what was happening, as would any of her men.” +“We could take them together!” +“We? No, I might be able to take them. You on the other hand would get in my way and get yourself killed. Besides I am here to train you to become a mercenary, not be your personal avenger. Part of this training is learning when to pick your battles. Now I suggest you ignore her words for now, and let us get our payment from Kenneth. Money tends to cheer most up.” + +Ulivik obeys and follows, then he asks an amusing question. + +“Is she the svelk bitch you spoke of that trained you?” +“Ha ha, no not her. Eldolith pales in comparison. No, she’s just another arrogant svelk merc that likes to do a lot of posturing. She’s actually really insecure about her leadership position. Always has been, even when she was hired by the Empire decades ago, but those are stories for another time.” + +You and Ulivik soon meet up with Kenneth who gives you your payment. This does cheer up Ulivik a little and soon he’s forgotten Eldolith’s insults. Predictably he spends most of his coin on some strumpet looking for an easy mark, she still gives him a good time though. + +The next day, Ulivik’s training continues as it does for at least a year after which time you figure he’s ready to go out on his own. He’s still a little reckless for his own good, but you can sense he really does want to be independent. His hero worship of you is gone and he may even dislike you now, but the respect is still there as it always has been. + +Part of you feels glad that the “job” is over with, but another part of you feels a sense of loss. As strange as it may seem, you started not minding Ulivik’s company. It’s been a long time since you’ve lead anybody into battle or otherwise. Ulivik may have only been one svelk trainee, but it still brought back memories of the “old days”. The old days, back when you had more of a purpose. + +In some ways training Ulivik gave you a higher purpose than just killing for coin again. You also think back to Eldolith’s words about human aging. Sure they’re meaningless now, but how long can you truly keep up a mercenary life? You are definitely in better shape than most humans your age and barring violence you still probably have several years left, but the future is something you are starting to ponder about. Despite being an Eternal, you ARE still human, and from your own experience, being an Eternal does not make one immortal. Growing “old” is something you never considered, at one time you always figured you’d just die in battle one day. That day may still come, but even you have to admit that the prospect of dying in battle no longer holds the same “appeal” as it once did when you were in the service of the Empire. + +At one time you also wondered what other skills you had besides killing. Now you see that you haven’t given yourself as much credit as you should have. You have decades of combat experience behind you, experience that you could easily pass on to others if they were willing to pay for the knowledge. + +You begin to entertain the idea that maybe you should open up some sort of combat training school. The more you think about it, the more the idea appeals to you. You’re going to have to remain a mercenary for quite awhile still as you attempt to gain the coin to get such a place started, and probably still go on jobs even a little afterwards, but you feel like you have a true purpose again. + +And so you set off with your new goal in mind… +> Years pass... +Year 55 + +After another hard day of training various citizens of Rask, you lie in your bed thinking about how much has changed over the years. Never did you think that you’d be running a real business, though to be honest if it wasn’t for legitimate paranoia on the part of the Rask Alliance, you’d probably be spending all of your time still as a merc, as it stands you’re practically responsible for training the closest thing to an army that Rask has, though it’s probably more of an organized militia. + +It’ll be the first line of defense if the Eternal Dominion starts to look to this way for expansion. When the ED started re-conquering the old territory of the Empire it was only natural that the towns and villages of Rask started getting worried. They didn’t break away from the Empire only to replace it with something similar or worse. It was just their luck (and yours) that you wanted to become a professional combat instructor. Soon people from all over Rask were coming to see you. You hardly ever have to do any sort of mercenary work anymore and the mayor of Keplavisk is overjoyed by the fact that you set up shop in his town. + +As for the Eternal Dominion threat, you aren’t sure what to think. There has been no formal declaration of war or even a diplomatic visit to Rask yet, but that doesn’t mean there won’t be, Rask has lots of resources after all. Still, the ED has its hands full still trying to keep everyone in line from the top to the bottom while attempting to gain more holdings. Mass orc migration to Rask are becoming common, even the svelk are more welcome in Rask again. Partly due to the possible need for more mercs if war comes to pass and partly due to dark elves being disliked by the ED, which apparently frowns upon mercenaries (and probably the attitudes of the dark elves in general). + +You have to hand it to “General” Edgar though, you didn’t think he’d be able to get those chaotic brats calling themselves “eternals” organized, though it sounds like they’re still as sadistic as ever and if the rumors are true, another generation of Eternals are being trained as well. You can’t even imagine what they’re going to be like. If war is coming like everyone thinks it is, you know immediately that you’re probably going to be nominated and begged by the various mayors and council members to be some sort of commander. You aren’t sure if you’d accept the position though you probably will mainly because you don’t want to be bothered moving anymore and you’ll be damned if you’ll live under the rule of some half assed Eternals. + +Part of you wonders what the hell is going through Edgar’s mind. He seemed more level headed the last time you saw him, like the incident with Kane forced him to mature, but you guess his aspirations for personal glory were just too great to keep suppressed for long. You also wonder about Brenda, she’s the only other old Eternal that was left, and you have no idea if she’s even still alive or serving with Edgar. You get your answer and then some in a few days. + +Another hard day of training various citizens of Rask and you’re ready to close up shop and then two figures wearing hoods enter. You have flashbacks to fighting the Shadow Guard and you draw your sword. + +“Hold on! It’s me! Warrick! See?” a familiar voice says and reveals himself from under the hood. The face is much older than you remember and sporting an eye patch, and the hair is now nearly gone. But considering you thought Warrick to be dead, you aren’t completely convinced until the second cloaked figure reveals herself and speaks. + +“I told you wearing these things was a bad idea. He probably thought we were Shadow Guards!” she says. Her face is also much older and the hair is completely gray, but you definitely know this one is Brenda. Between the pair of them it truly makes you realize how much time has passed since you saw them. +“And I told you, we need to keep a low profile, this situation is dangerous to the both of us.” Warrick says. + +“Warrick back from the dead and Brenda, I was just recently thinking about what had become of you.” +“We need to talk to you about Edgar.” Warrick says cutting right to the point. +“Yeah I thought so…okay let me lock up and we can talk about this in my quarters.” + +The first thing you find out is that Warrick is now working for the Felkan Kingdom. He says it’s a long story, but it has its roots in his becoming disillusioned with the Empire much like you did. Warrick also goes on to say that’s one of the reasons why he’s here. Edgar definitely has plans to attack it in the future and the crown hopes to avoid another long and troublesome war by recruiting allies this time. He mentions real Felkan diplomats will probably be arriving in Rask soon to speak with the leaders of the towns, but he was sent to specifically reach out to you, because whether you knew it or not, your reputation here carries weight. + +As for Brenda, her position is much more dangerous. She is currently serving the Eternal Dominion, (another long story) but is trying to encourage an underground dissident movement. Not really difficult considering how oppressive Edgar’s regime is. It is the hope of the Felkan Kingdom that the ED will wear itself out on keeping down riots and other potential conquests like Rask before it turns its eyes on the Felkan Kingdom. + +You tell Warrick that he’s probably wasted a trip as the paranoid mentality of the Raskians are already preparing for war with the ED and will have no problem allying with the Felkan Kingdom and that you’ll no doubt be called upon to command the people you’ve been training. Warrick seems relived to hear that, and you and he begin to do a little catching up. Brenda participates as well, though the whole time she seems a little preoccupied. Eventually as the night goes on, Warrick says he must be getting back to report to his superiors. Brenda says that she is not ready to leave as she wishes to speak to you about Roldan and his last days with you. Warrick understands, but warns her that she should not be away for too long so as to arouse suspicion. He would hate to have her sacrifices should lead to her death. + +“Sacrifices…as if he would know about such things. When the Empire needed him the most what did he do? He ran to the fucking enemy. Now his new masters give him commands and the running lapdog thinks he’s free, but he’s still a slave.” She remarks with distain, before continuing. + +“Edgar may be an egomaniac with delusions of grandeur like he always was, but he at least tried to keep the Empire together, even if it is in a different form now. He believes in something better, even if he’s not exactly intelligent enough to carry out that idea. And you, you’re worst of them all. You just dropped out altogether and dedicating yourself to nothing, but coin like a fucking svelk. What the hell happened to you? You used be our leader.” +“I’m not exactly sure what your point is, but if this all pent up anger at me due to Roldan dying I…” +“Don’t you dare fucking mention him! I heard enough of hollow apologies in that damn letter you wrote to me.” +“They were Eternals as we all are. Dying in combat is always a possibility for us, I know their deaths weren’t the most glorious, but at the time they died doing something they believed in. I can hardly help that the institution that they believed in, crumbled soon afterwards. I tried like hell to maintain my own belief in the Empire despite having it time after time again tested. Eventually I saw the light when I had to command a bunch of those new eternals while attempting to put down mass riots near the capital. Was leaving the right decision? I don’t know, but it was for ME. The fact is ALL of our lives were nothing but duty and dedication to a corrupt government that deserved none of it. Kane knew that, Gruz knew that, and as much as I still hate them to this day, the Shadow Guard knew that. When the Empire was in its death throes it affected us all differently. I can’t help the fact that you decided to stay loyal and it didn’t work out resulting in you eventually having to capitulate to Edgar later on. At least you and Roldan had an experience that none of us will ever have. You have at least that to cherish.” + +Brenda is silent for a moment as she takes in your statement. She looks at a ring on her finger, which is obviously still her wedding ring to Roldan. She smiles and then speaks. + +“You’re right I suppose. You usually were when we all served under you. Even you couldn’t have prevented the Empire from falling, the damage was done long before we came into existence. I guess I just never got over Roldan’s death and had nobody except you to blame since you were the only one still alive. The funny thing is I didn’t start blaming you until I found out you left the Empire. You were always our leader, and it seemed unthinkable that you would leave willingly. You know I think none of us really saw anyone else as their leader except you. It’s probably why Kane wanted you to join him, it’s no doubt why Warrick insisted on reaching out to you and it’s why Edgar sent me…” +“Excuse me?” +“One of the things you were wrong about and Warrick too. I am not helping him though he still thinks I am. There is no underground resistance, or at least none that matters. Warrick and his Felkan masters think they can undermine the Eternal Dominion, but they are quite wrong. When Edgar first came to me and explained his cause and ideas I realized it was a just and worthy one. I joined in an effort to help with some of the details that Edgar himself is not nearly as skilled at, still he has proven himself to be more charismatic than he once was, at least to the other eternals and that’s who is mainly important. He wants to create a nation where we Eternals are in control, as it should’ve been.” +“…so why would he want me for, wouldn’t he consider me an enemy like Warrick?” +“No, not like Warrick. While your abandonment did sadden Edgar, he always figured you had a good reason. He never questioned it. And now that you’ve told me your views I see he was right. It’s really quite odd to see how high of regard he holds you. I guess your time with him during Kane’s attempted secession really impacted him.” + +“Brenda, this is a lot to take in, what exactly are you expecting from me then?” +“As Warrick said, your reputation carries weight here and you have the ear of several of the mayors here. Perhaps you could explain to them that even with training that resistance will be useless and that the ED will just slaughter everyone. Better that they should surrender now and have a benevolent overseer such as…you running things.” +“And you really think Raskians are going to go for that idea?” +“What does it matter? They are going to be conquered eventually anyway. I merely suggest other options to Edgar’s plan, which was to convince you to just come with me where you could take command of a battalion to conquer Rask seeing as you know the place the best.” +“Heh, sounds like him. So what was the plan if I refuse altogether? Killing me I suppose?” +“Didn’t come up though I even asked him about it, but as I said Edgar really believes that you’ll help us. Perhaps in some way he didn’t want to think about the alternative. I’m guessing that you are considering the alternative?” +“Don’t see why I shouldn’t, do you?” +“You would have a true purpose again. Serving an idea greater than yourself.” +“I have a true purpose now. I’m training others to fight against those that would take their lives. The Raskians don’t want to be ruled over and quite frankly neither do I, let alone by Edgar.” +“No! You would be different! You, like myself would be given an equal place in the decision making process! Even the other Eternal don’t get that.” +“Yeah, that’s the other thing, I’m loathed to live in a land that considers those new…things, eternals.” +“They are much different now, true they still have their sadistic streak, but only towards the non-eternals and who cares about them?” +“I’m sure the non-eternals do, and while they may very well be inferior, enough of them can topple any government. We saw it happen, and it’ll happen to you too if you aren’t careful.” +“So are you saying you won’t join us?” + +You get the impression that if you say no, she’s going to attack you and you’ll have to defend yourself. Killing Brenda is something you do not want to do, but lying and saying yes is duplicity you’d rather not engage in. +> Say no +You didn’t lie to Kane when he wanted you to join him and you aren’t going to lie to Brenda, but you are going to try to reason with her. + +“Brenda, I didn’t join Kane all those years ago, because his path wasn’t mine and I’m not joining you and Edgar for the same reasons. However I would hope that we don’t end up like me and him did.” +“What you think I’m going to try to kill you? No, I doubt if I could by myself. I fear I probably haven’t kept up my combat skills as honed as you have. To be quite honest, I wasn’t sure what I was going to do, if you rejected the offer. I guess I’ll give Edgar the bad news, but I know he’s not going to take it well and he’ll definitely attack this place with his army and I doubt if you’ll be spared for old times sake.” +“Then you’re going to have to convince him not to. Look, this place is not going to bend to his will. The paranoia and the idea of freedom is stronger here than it has ever been. If you attack Rask, be prepared to suffer considerable losses as I personally will make sure of it. This is my home now. I’m not leaving and I’m not serving another empire either. Even if you win, you will not easily recover from the losses let alone be able to fight the Felkan Kingdom, in fact they will most likely take advantage of the chaos. Now you’ve been in contact with Warrick long enough to know that the Felkan Kingdom is counting on you being disorganized and weak from attacking Rask. If you want to play it smart? Attack them instead and don’t worry about Rask.” +“What’s stopping Rask from attacking us if they ally with the Felkan Kingdom?” +“They won’t trust me. The Felkan Kingdom can send all the diplomats they want, but the Raskians are ultimately not going to stick their necks out for them.” +“And you think Edgar will go for this idea?” +“You know what? He’ll go for it, because if he TRULY respects me, he’ll fucking listen to my advice which has never steered him wrong, not to mention I saved his damn life more than once. I’m telling you to tell him, that he needs to consolidate his forces, get his house in order, maybe retake a few other areas of the old Empire and THEN attack the Felkan Kingdom if he absolutely needs to. Rask is just death zone, it didn’t do the Empire any good and they only held on to it for as long as they did because I was here. I say that not as a boast, but as truth. Does Edgar have anyone like me in his army? I doubt it. The hostile inhabitants here didn’t call me the Bane of Rask for nothing. A name, which I’m still called, even by those I’m helping. If he sets an army in these lands, I’ll make sure they’ll start calling me the Bane of Edgar.” + +Brenda smiles a bit again at your last remark. + +“You always did have a way with words. I missed that sometimes. Okay, well I guess I’ll go then, to deliver your message.” +“Brenda y’know there is another option. You could stay here, or go somewhere else. You don’t need to follow Edgar. You’re fully capable of doing something else with your life.” +“Trust me, it’s tempting. I even thought about joining Warrick when he first approached me, but it’s not for me. Warrick’s path to me is one of a traitor, even if I do understand it and your path is one of freedom…something I guess I just can’t comprehend. I still need the structure and hierarchy. I dunno, maybe I just need to be with other likeminded Eternals. None of them are Roldan, but I don’t feel as lonely.” + +And there it is at last. The real reason why Brenda is following Edgar, you knew it couldn’t be because she blindly believed in his cause. You can’t imagine what is going on in her head and there will be no talking her out of her choice, but you’re glad you won’t have to fight her and hopefully her message to Edgar will get through to him as well. You bid farewell to Brenda, probably for the last time. You go to bed that night, but you don’t really sleep, you just wonder what events the coming months will hold. + +Months pass and just as Warrick said, diplomats from the Felkan Kingdom visit Rask. As you thought, they get a lot of promises of an alliance and some trade deals, but that’s about it. The general consensus of the Raskians is that they won’t be committing any troops unless war comes directly to their doorsteps. Great, now you just hope that Edgar follows your advice… + +Year 58 + +Edgar took your advice, or at least you guess he did. He never attacked Rask. Never even sent anyone, he did however send thousands across the Felkan borders a couple years ago. The war is still going on and you hear it’s even more brutal than the one with the Empire. Edgar has adapted with the times unlike the Empire and is implementing stolen technology from the Felkans. You can only imagine how Warrick is faring and while it is unfortunate, you stopped being their “leader” decades ago and their motives, goals and dreams are their own concerns not yours. + +And your only concern lately is getting old. Every day you notice new pains in your joints and muscles. You’re slower than you once were and not quite as strong anymore. You wonder how your fellow Eternals feel about getting old, though perhaps due to still being engaged in warfare, maybe they don’t dwell on it as much. Brenda and Warrick will probably expect to die in battle, as for Edgar, the fool probably believes he’ll live forever. + +You don’t have as many students anymore, as many of the other towns have taken to creating their own combat schools, mostly run by those you taught. Mercenary work is even harder to come by nowadays; thanks to you each town actually has competent militias that can clean out hostiles without much mercenary aid anymore. Indeed they need something to do considering Edgar never attacked Rask. + +Even the ogre tribes in the far north have settled down. Last you heard, Flog “retired” at one of their primitive villages, a forced wedding to an ogre bride for killing her husband to be. Bet he wishes he’d died with his fellows at Fort Defiance now! Eldolith ended up taking her remaining men to work for the Felkan Kingdom, one of the last mercenary squads to stay in Rask. + +Ulivik said his goodbyes to his family and you even before the mercenary work dried up. Said he was bored of it and wanted to see more of the world and become an “adventurer.” You think his parents were even less pleased to hear that than when he wanted to be a merc, and you’ve never quite understood the appeal of the wandering life of an adventurer either, but you wished him the best. When he left, he thanked you one more time for taking the time to teach him when nobody else would. + +You were always glad he got over his resentment of you due to your harsh training. And while it is true you did initially train him for coin and swore an oath to his parents to look after him during that time, it is because of those actions that you discovered a little more about yourself and focused yourself in the direction to open up your combat school. + +Of course your actions have now changed Rask to an extent that you may have very well put yourself out of a job, but you aren’t worried. You still get students from Keplavisk, so you’ll probably always have a bit of business. Even if you don’t, you’ve been doing some saving over the years. + +You can only prepare yourself now, for whatever changes might come in the future. +> Years pass... +Year 65 + +You get a knock on the door to which causes you to wonder who would be bothering you at this time of night. You’re more than a little annoyed since you were sleeping. + +“Go away, I ain’t getting up.” you say from your chair trying to go back to sleep. +“Open the fuck up, you useless old man!” you hear from outside and it’s enough to motivate you to answer it and punch out the fool who said it. When you open it however, an unexpected visitor meets you. + +“Ulivik?” +“Yeah, it’s me! Well, aren’t you going to invite me in?” he laughs. +“Yeah sure.” You say and the both of you head to your quarters to sit and talk. You still shaking the cobwebs after being awaken from your slumber. + +“Were you asleep?” +“Yeah, what of it?” +“Nothing! Just sort of surprised, I mean I know it’s night, but its still pretty early.” +“Eh, it’s been kind of a lazy day today, felt like sleeping for most of it.” +“You didn’t teach a class today?” +“Class? School’s been officially closed for about two years now. I mean I get few people that seek me out looking to increase their skills every once in awhile, but nowadays everyone goes to that new military academy they opened up here.” +“Oh, I was wondering what that big new building looming near the edge of town was, so they didn’t offer you a job there?” +“Eh, they did, but I didn’t want it. People who I originally trained run it and most of them I didn’t even like when I was teaching them, so I’d rather not have to follow whatever silly guidelines they’ve come up with for that place. Anyway, I sometimes get paid to give speeches on tactics and strategies there. I get by. So where have you been and what brings you back?” + +Ulivik mentions he mainly returned to when he heard his father had died and that he’s probably going to be around for a while to look after his mother. He then excitedly goes on about his various adventures of exploring ruins, caves and finding treasures and lost trinkets. Not enough to get rich, but he’s not in it for that. You enjoy hearing about it all, it’s not like you really go anywhere or do as much anymore. And as the years go on, you are finding yourself with less and less to do. You sort of thought your school and teaching would occupy your time and that if you got bored of that you could always break it up with a little mercenary work. But both of those options are pretty much closed off to you at this point, at least in Rask. The place is less wild and more peaceful now than it ever was under the Empire. + +You could move you suppose, but it’s not such a bad life maybe you should just settle in and enjoy your elderly years in relative peace… + +“..and so then I got my head split open and my entrails eaten by the clawbeast and died. Hey! Are you still with me?” Ulivik asks. +“Huh? Yeah you got your entrails eaten and died.” You answer. +“Well glad to see you’re still listening.” Ulivik laughs. +“Sorry, just a little preoccupied. Anyway, go on.” + +Ulivik knows something’s up with you, and he’s got a pretty good idea what it is. + +“Hey, have you ever thought about leaving Rask and joining your old buddies in the Eternal Dominion?” he asks. +“Wha…oh I don’t think that’s for me. Besides I only have two there, dunno if one of them is even still alive and I never really was exactly friends with Edgar. Speaking of which did you have much trouble traveling through the ED? I heard they aren’t too fond of svelk there ever since most of your people have been hiring themselves out to the Felkans.” +Well as you once pointed out, we’re not really liked anywhere we go, but I never really kept to the populated areas while in the ED so I didn’t have too many problems. However, I did find that dropping your name helped me a few times. You’re sort of known there.” +“Huh. Dunno, why I would be, not like I was ever part of the place. Guess Edgar really did look up to me. Unexpected.” +“Didn’t he offer you a job too one time?” +“Yeah. Don’t think it’s still available though. Like I said, my time serving big governments is over with. I wasted more than thirty years of my life doing it. Not going to waste the remaining years I have left even if it’s a high position of power. Besides, I’m still not sure that I wouldn’t have to kill Edgar if I ever got into an argument with him over something.” +“Surely it would be more interesting than sleeping all day.” +“Hah, probably. I dunno, I just feel like Edgar’s Eternal Dominion is just mimicking a lot of the old Empire. Sure it’s doing well now, but ultimately it’s going to fall just like the Empire did, so what’s the point?” +“Hmm, well you could offer your services to the Felkan Kingdom, I think they could use the help.” +“Yeah, no. I’m not into lost causes. Did that before too and saw the results. The Felkan Kingdom could’ve won the war if they didn’t fight so defensively. There were many times early in the war where they should’ve pressed an attack and took territory. Their fate is probably sealed at this point. Only a matter of time, assuming the ED keeps with it’s policy of total conquest, and doesn’t fuck it up. Anyway don’t get me started on how I nearly got dragged into serving on both sides of that conflict.” + +“Okay, but how about another proposal?” +“I’ll bite. What is it?” +“Well, as you know I’m going to be here awhile looking after my mother, but I need something to do. Rask still has areas of it that are largely unexplored. I sort wondered if you’d like to come with me on an adventure in this very area.” +“Oh? And where would this place be? Most of the places you’re speaking of involve mountains, and as bored as I am, I’m not about to go dragging my ass up a fucking mountain.” +“Ha ha, nah not the mountains, though it still might involve a little bit of climbing.” +“Okay, so where?” +“The Wendigo Hills.” + +Now there’s name that’s spoken of in only whispers nowadays in Rask. Everyone knows about it and doesn’t speak about it, let alone go near it, from humans to ogres and even the few giants still left. Ever since you wiped them out forty five years ago, there have been little problems from those evil spirits. Years later after you first left Rask you heard the various villages got their holy men together to perform some sort of ritual to make sure none of the spirits managed to ever escape from those cursed hills ever again. Of course every once in a blue moon some unfortunate idiot…usually an adventurer gets himself possessed and no expense is spared in hunting down the creature and destroying it. + +Now it looks like Ulivik is intent on being that new unfortunate idiot. + +“Have you lost your fucking mind, because if you haven’t, then you will if you go there and that’s if you’re lucky. I went to that blasted place once, I had a company of soldiers with me and I was in my prime. I barely got out of that place alive and you know what happened to the few soldiers that survived with me? Four of them ultimately committed suicide from their nightmares and the other two got discharged and thrown in the asylum for just going batshit insane. No, I’m not going and if you got any sense, you won’t either. That place does shit your mind. The spirits there are pure evil, and they are not to be trifled with.” +"No, I have a remedy for that! Look at these!" Ulivik says and produces two amulets with a faint blue glow. + +"Let me guess, these things are magical and they're supposed to protect us from getting possessed." +"Correct! Even when I was little, I heard there was supposed to be great treasure in those hills. Nobody has ever had the skill to go in there and claim it, but I want to be the first because I truly feel like I'm ready now. You're the about the one who has traveled the most in those hills and survived. You would be a great help and we can even share whatever we find! Come on, it'll be like old times!" + +"Old" being the key word here. While you were wondering if you were becoming more complacent in your old age, you aren't sure if going to the Wendigo Hills is something you want to do just to prove "you still got it." +> Help Ulivik +Ulivik may be an accomplished warrior now, but out of all the tales he’s told you about his adventures; he still hasn’t faced anything like the wendigos and he’s going to get himself killed or worse if he goes into this with just the hope of some magic bauble around his neck. As much as you’re loathed to go through this again, you decide to help Ulivik. + +“Alright I’ll go, but as soon as I think we’re in a shitload of danger that we can’t handle, you better listen to me, because this isn’t going to be the fun adventure you think it’s going to be. Understand?” +“Sure, but I really don’t think it’s going to be as bad as all that.” +“No, it’ll probably be worse. Now if you don’t mind I’m going to get some sleep and get my mind focused on this fool’s task.” +“Fool’s task? You’re coming with me.” +“Yeah, which says more about my own foolishness than yours, because you don’t know any better. I know we got these magic amulets or whatever, but these… things are going to try to get inside your head and if they succeed, it’s all over. If that happens to you, I won’t hesitate to put a sword through your head, and I expect you to do the same.” +“Ha ha you’d kill me so easily?” Ulivik laughs, but you’re in no mood. +“Hello, I don’t believe we’ve met…by the gods have you remembered nothing of the stories of my past? Of course I’d fucking do it so easily! I’ve killed innocent men and their entire families just because they disagreed with how the Empire was doing things, hell I even killed one of my Eternal brothers because of it. Wouldn’t be anything to kill someone who was turned into a mindless beast even if…” + +You stop yourself right there. + +“Even if what?” Ulivik asks. +“Even if…he’s too stupid to see this is a really bad idea! Anyway, I’m ranting and I’m tired. I’m going to bed, you can let yourself out. And don’t say that I don’t have to go, because I’m already committed now. I gave you my word as an Eternal.” + +Ulivik knows when you say something like that, you’re being serious, so he just nods and tells you he’ll be by tomorrow morning before leaving. As for you, you head off to bed with a myriad of thoughts going on in your head. + +“Can’t believe I nearly said he was like a son to me. What the fuck am I thinkin’ about? Better get your head in the game old man, because wendigos are going to thrive on that. They live on weakness.” You mumble before drifting off to sleep. + +The next morning you and Ulivik set off for the infamous Wendigo Hills. Along the way, you go on about your own major conflicts with them, even when they were originally just thought to be people infected with lycanthropy like the rest of the old barbarian tribes around Rask. Ulivik listens to you in fascination like he did when he was much younger as you’ve never spoken of your experience with the wendigos before to him except in passing. It’s good to know he’s still listening. + +“So after that battle, no wendigo has ever left those hills?” Ulivik asks. +“Eh, we had a couple that still managed to snag bodies and kill a few people before being brought down and exorcised by some of the local hedge wizards we recruited later, but that was mainly due to people idiotically still going into the hills in the first place. Sort of like what we’re doing.” You say. +“But if they’re spirits can’t they just float about possessing people?” +“You’d think so, but for whatever reason they can’t leave these the hills in pure spirit form, they need a body. That’s why when they’re killed they immediately try to hop into a new one or else they get pulled back to the hills. Dunno why, and I don’t think anyone’s bothered to learn the history either. Everyone’s just glad they were deprived of nearly all of their bodies by a certain Eternal decades ago.” +“Ha ha, but what about animals? Couldn’t they just possess animals and leave the hills that way?” +“Always wondered that myself, but again if they could I’d imagine they’d still be a major threat. Besides, when I traversed those hills I didn’t see a single animal, not one, of course I assumed that they probably ate them all. The wendigo are basically consumption and hunger in its purest form. They aren’t big thinkers in the scheme of things and it’s fortunate that they never organized past their barbarian tribal hosts.” +“Sounds like it, but if they are all spirits as you say, then we shouldn’t experience any physical combat at all and with these amulets and our steel trap minds we should be fine! We might even find some sort of ancient lore about how the wendigos came to be tied to those hills!” +“Well you’re as optimistic as ever. I suppose that’s good, it’ll keep your mind better prepared when the wendigos try to oppressively crush your free will. Y’know, now that I think about it, I think that’s what partially saved me. My mind was so dedicated to the Empire back in those days, the wendigos were trying to crush something that wasn’t really my own to begin with.” +“And now?” +“Now? I got my impenetrable cynicism to protect me, which I’ll definitely put more stock in than this ridiculous magical amulet that’ll undoubtedly fail to do anything.” +“Looks like you’re off to a good start with your cynicism.” + +The after a couple days of travel, you eventually make it to the base of the Wendigo Hills. The markings and warning signs line stretch up, down and all the way around as far as you know. No real physical barriers of course, but even those dumb ass ogres that can’t read know better than to pass the line. Of course they usually knew better to begin with, which proves that they’re smarter in that respect. You take a deep breath and step past the markings and make your way up the forested hills. + +It’s at this point your amulet starts to glow a brighter blue, Ulivik claims “that’s how you know that it’s working!” Great. Still, you don’t hear any sinister whispers yet, but there is still that dead silence you remember. As if nothing living is here. + +Ulivik, mentions that he found a crude and well worn map of some of the Rask area during his trip through Eternal Dominion lands and wants to explore some ruins that are clearly marked on it. You mention you haven’t been here in a long time, but you don’t remember ever seeing any, so you can’t be as of much help as he might’ve thought. Ulivik says he doesn’t care though, he’s just glad to have you along. + +“That map is probably old Empire. Like really old Empire, and much might’ve changed since then. It could also be inaccurate to begin with.” +“Yeah, that’s true, but we might as well find out. It’s the journey, not necessarily the destination that’s important! That’s what adventuring is all about.” +“Funny, I always thought it was the misguided hope of finding lots of loot and the avoidance of a real job.” You reply. +“That’s just a bonus.” Ulivik comments and you allow yourself to chuckle. Never thought you’d do that while in this cursed place. + +After a half hour or so of walking, you start to get an uneasy feeling of being watched. You mention this to Ulivik and he says he’s getting that impression too. You ask him if he’s hearing anything, but he says he isn’t except the snow crunching under foot. Neither are you, maybe the amulets are working, but it’s obvious the presence of the wendigos is near. + +Another hour of travel and you and Ulivik see something you didn’t expect. + +“Do you see that? That’s a rabbit! I thought you said nothing was living here?” Ulivik says. +“When I came through I didn’t see a living creature, so I just assumed there wasn’t. I guess there is though.” You reply. +“Maybe the wendigo aren’t here anymore and everyone has been scared of this place for decades for no reason.” +“I wouldn’t go that far. Something is definitely here and just because we’re seeing rabbits doesn’t mean it’s safe. It just means animals must not be suitable hosts for them.” +“Well…hey that rabbit it’s hopping towards us. Hmm, a little larger than average and hopping towards people is rather unusual behavior for a ra…” + +Before Ulivik can finish, his leg is leaped upon and viciously attacked by the rabbit. After some hollering from the surprise, you grab the little furry beast and break its neck. You toss its lifeless body in the snow while Ulivik examines the bite marks in his pants + +“Fuck, that thing chewed through my pant leg and broke the skin! You never mentioned killer rabbits on your travel to here.” +“That’s because I didn’t encounter any, and I doubt if that was really a rabbit anymore. It would seem that animals CAN be hosts after all, they just need a human one or something similar to leave the hills. Anyway, we should really get out here, there are more coming.” +“What? So? I’m sure we can handle a few overgrown possessed rabbits.” Ulivik says still preoccupied with his very minor wound. +“A few, sure, but how about hundreds of them?” you say and draw his attention to literally that number popping up all around you. + +The glaring red eyes of hundreds of possessed bunnies are upon you and their herbivore buck teeth have now been replaced with the toothy fangs of a carnivore hungry for flesh. And they look like they haven’t tasted a bi-ped in a long time… +> Fight your way back home +You slash out at the nearest rabbits and shout at Ulivik that you need to get the hell out of here. + +“What?! We can’t run from rabbits! We’ve both fought worse than this!” Ulivik shouts chopping down a few more of them. +“First of all they aren’t just rabbits, they’re rabbits with wendigos in them. Second of all rabbits are notorious for breeding at an alarming rate. Chances are there are even more bunny bodies for the wendigos to take control of even if we manage to kill all of the ones here. Running from rabbits might not exactly be the bravest thing, but constantly being assaulted by a horde while going deeper into enemy territory and trying to find something that might not even be there anymore is just stupid.” You say hacking at more of them and shaking off the ones jumping on you. +“…agh! Oh all right!” Ulivik shouts and the pair of you manage to cut a path through the rabbit mass and make a break for it.” + +You and Ulivik run chopping up rabbits along the way as the “little” nippers are hopping after you and occasionally leaping on you and get a few bites in. This might all be very comical if your life wasn’t in mortal danger. + +“SHIT!” Ulivik shouts when a group of rabbits catch up and pile on one of his ankles, biting and clawing at it. He falls down face first into the snow and you immediately get rid of the rabbits around Ulivik who is doing likewise. + +“Get off! Get off!” he shouts killing them. + +While you’re kneeling down trying to help, one of the rabbits jumps on your back and with his teeth takes the amulet chain and leaps off with it. + +“What the…get that little furry bastard!” you shout when you feel it lifted from around your neck, but it’s too late the rabbit has run off with it and the rest of the horde is coming. + +“Come on we gotta get outta here!” Ulivik says and the pair of you resume your escape. Unfortunately you’re starting to hear the whispers again. The multitude of them, though one in particular stands out. + +“Welcome back Bane of Rask, we’ve been waiting for you…I’VE been waiting for you.” A voice in your head says. +“Shit, it’s starting, they’re getting inside my head!” you say stomping on another rabbit. +“Just ignore it like you did last time!” Ulivik exclaims. +“Easy for you to say! Argh dammit! My fucking head!” +“You’ve gotten old Bane…you should just give up and let me take over, you’ll be able to lifetimes…” the voice says. +“Shut up.” +“Why do you resist, you’re too weak now. Just submit and this will all go easier…” + +Between the spiritual assaults on your mind and Ulivik’s chewed up ankle the pair of you aren’t exactly running the fastest anymore. You have to stop many times to fight your way through, but it may be true that luck favors the fool and the pair of you have been mighty foolish for doing this in the first place, and eventually you see the end in sight. + +“There! The markers! If we get past those we’ll be fine!” + +Ulivik speaks too soon however as it is at this point several hundred white rabbits who were blending in with the snow open their eyes and reveal the glowing red pin points of evil within them. They sit between you and the closest escape and a larger gray rabbit comes bounding out of a nearby hole in the ground. It’s nearly the size of a bear. You fought a gray wendigo before; you would guess this is the same one. Their leader and the main one that’s been taunting you the whole time. + +“Give up Bane! Your time on this earth is over!” +“SHUT THE FUCK UP!” +“Become meat then! I’ll just use your svelk friend since you seem to care for him so much!” + +You hadn’t heard it yet even with the assault on your head, but all of the rabbits in unison make that awful howling noise that you tried so hard to forget about. Even Ulivik with his magical protection winces at the noise. The battle is then joined as they run at you. You feel bites and slashes of several little claws and teeth breaking your skin. In a way the physical pain helps since its counter acting the mental attack still going on in your head. + +The wendigo leader clumsily leaps towards you even stepping on his own smaller brethren. You roll away and give him a couple chops to his head, succeeding in lopping off part of his ear. This only serves to anger him further and he does a short rush into you, knocking you down. Other rabbits immediately take advantage of the situation and hop on top you and start to bite. You’re busily trying to get them off of you and then the leader smacks you in the head with his oversized claws. You fall into the snow again, this time in a daze. + +“You call yourself an Eternal…such arrogance of an incredibly short lived race. WE have more right to be known as eternals and I will make you suffer for your hubris!” you hear the voice say and then several long fangs sink into the lower part of your leg as the leader attempts to eat you alive. Now you aren’t exactly sure at this point due to the extreme physical pain, but you believe the wendigo leader has most likely bitten straight through your leg and if it hasn’t been completely severed yet, it’s only hanging on by broken bone and torn skin. + +You yell out and muster all your remaining strength, sit up and bring your sword down onto the wendigo leader’s head. Blood spurts everywhere as you twist it into his skull and your own leg is still chewed on in the death throes of the wendigo’s host. Ulivik, who was being overwhelmed by the rest of the rabbits, finally manages to get to you and runs his own sword into the side of the gray wendigo several times causing it to finally release its fangs from your mangled leg. You quickly remove it from the wendigo’s mouth and see a good portion of your leg completely destroyed and bleeding profusely. Despite this fact, you’re determined that you are NOT going to die today. You didn’t get this far just to be eaten by some possessed fucking rabbits. Ulivik helps you up and you hop as fast as you can towards the markers leaving a trail of gore in your wake. When you fall, you crawl as fast as you can instead. Ulivik tries to carry you, but you tell him to just keep the rest of the rabbits off of the pair of you. + +Exhausted and severely injured you manage to make it past the safety barrier, causing the attack to completely cease and you no longer hear the whispers in your head any longer. The rabbits all stare at you from afar. You’re only about ten feet away and you can feel their hatred all the way from here. Ulivik drags you further away from the wendigo area until you tell him to stop. + +“Hey! Stop it, I’m not a fucking rag doll!” you shout. “I need to do something about this leg and fast, I’m beginning to feel really dizzy over here. Make a fire and quickly!” + +One quick look and you know there’s no way it can be saved. It’s only hanging on as it is. You make the decision and chop through the remaining bone and muscle that was still connecting it to the rest of your body. This part doesn’t hurt as it’s mostly already disconnected from any nerves anyway. The following part of applying your heated sword to stop the bleeding hurts like hell though. + +Dizzy and weakened from this whole ordeal, you see that you’ve stopped the bleeding and fall unconscious mumbling “Don’t leave my leg here.” + +A couple days later you finally wake up, though you almost weren’t expecting to. + +“Ah, you’re up, good. Your new leg is finished; I had the wood carver make one for you after I dragged your body back to town. The people here were shocked to see you laid out in such a manner. They thought you were dead at first.” +“Ugh, I sort of wish I was…I’m hardly the supreme warrior I once was, if I’m getting my leg chewed off by oversized rabbits. I’m just not quite ashamed enough to kill myself over it, my will to survive is just too strong I guess.” +“It’s my fault anyway, I should’ve went into that area myself…” +“Oh no. Don’t start doing that. Blaming yourself for what MIGHT have happened is a losing battle. Trust me, I’ve had that same battle. I’m an adult I make my own decisions and I chose to go with you, besides if I hadn’t have come you would’ve had all those little killer wendigo bunnies all over your ass instead and knowing you, you would’ve still insisted on heading to those ruins and gotten yourself killed in the process.” +“Ha ha, maybe so.” +“(Sigh) fucking rabbits...you know they must’ve been cannibalizing themselves in those forms for years. Well the wendigos might not have killed me, but I’m sure my reputation is. Ah fuck it, if I get a few snickers from the locals for losing my leg to a damned rabbit, it’s not the worst thing in the world.” +“Yeah, about that…I sort of lied. I told everyone you saved my life from a ten-foot wendigo that had taken host in an ogre turning it into a complete abomination with rows of teeth and that it was planning to organize a way for the rest of its fellows to leave the barrier.” +“What?!” +“I know you don’t like to lie, but I just thought it sounded a lot more impressive. I mean you know the situation was really dangerous and I know the situation was really dangerous, but everyone else would just think…rabbits? And then laugh like you said.” +“First of all, I’m not actually opposed to lying, I just don’t do it when I respect the person enough not to do it to them. Anyway, I guess you were just concerned about my reputation. I won’t argue the point and it’s done now, besides it’s not like anyone’s going to confirm it by going up there. Hopefully I just don’t get anymore snot nosed kids following me around town begging me to train them because those days are long over.” You laugh. + +You and Ulivik both talk for a few more hours before he eventually leaves to go see his mother. You take the opportunity to inspect your new wooden leg and try it on. It’s going to take some time getting used to, but most major changes do and you’ve survived those. +> Years pass... +Year 75 + +As the years creep up on you and despite missing part of your leg, you still feel don’t feel in any ill health. It’s mostly just aches and pains from your more physical years catching up with you. After the leg incident though, you took that permanent position at the Keplavisk military academy as a strategy instructor, though nowadays it’s looking like it’ll become the Rask military academy. Rask is in the process of becoming a “real nation” rather than just a collection of allied towns. You don’t really know all the politics of it, but the main guiding force was justified Raskian paranoia again. Ever since the Eternal Dominion’s war with the Felkan Kingdom grinded to a halt, the ED has been making overtures to Rask to join them in the veiled form of threats rather than any sort of diplomatic alliance agreements. + +While starting a war on two fronts is always a bad idea you’re guessing Edgar needs the resources that Rask has to make his final push to conquer the Felkans once and for all. You’re also guessing he’s intent on ignoring your advice of not attacking Rask too, you’re just surprised he held out this long. You’re not really worried about it if it comes to war. The Raskians may not have the unnaturally bred “eternals” like the ED does, but they’re trained well enough to make the cost very high if they are in invaded. You should know, you trained most of them. + +You hear a knock on your door and you slowly make your way over. + +“Mail for you Mr. Bane.” A delivery girl says to you when you open up the door. You toss a gold coin to her and take your letter. + +At first you figure it’s from Ulivik, no doubt telling you about whatever grand adventure he’s on this time. The last time he was here, he was for his mother’s funeral. He kept his composure for the most part, but it still wasn’t a good time for him. He didn’t say it in so many words, but he did say that you were the only family he had left. You didn’t follow up, but the pair you said your goodbyes both of you knowing that you had that bond similar to that of a father and son. + +But this letter isn’t from Ulivik, it’s mysteriously labeled as from “a friend.” Considering you’ve never really had any, you’re baffled to as who it could be. When you open it you see that it’s from Edgar, several pages in fact. You sit down to read all of it. + +The beginning of it hopes that the letter has found you as he wants you to take in all of what he has to tell you. He begins by stating that he’s dying. He mentions his health is deteriorating by the day and he doesn’t know how much longer he has left. His “successors” are likely to start a war with Rask soon after his death, it’s only due to their respect that they don’t. The same way his respect for you caused him not to. + +The majority of the letter explains that he wants you to understand why he did what he did and how he wished that you had joined him. He says the incident with Kane never left him and how if he’d only been there to listen to him and help him more, none of that might’ve happened. Perhaps even the Empire would’ve survived. (You doubt that though, it would’ve just taken longer) When the Empire was in its last days he saw how chaotic the new eternals were and realized they needed guidance and a purpose much like Kane did. He always thought that you’d do it, but you left leaving him as the only person willing to. He says it was very difficult and while they ultimately they fell in line, but without the purpose of conquest they wouldn’t stay that way for long. So he began forging a new empire as it were, with the eternals as the leaders as it always should’ve been. The newer generations of eternals were better disciplined, as he made sure their training went very much the same way yours did. Still, they are much more arrogant that he ever was. They believe it is their destiny to rule the world and he believes that he’s set something in motion that even he is no longer in control of. + +“Ah Edgar, always getting yourself in over your head.” You say to yourself. + +The rest of the letter mentions that you two are the last of the old Eternals. Warrick died in Battle of Yaquan when the ED successfully took the city from the Felkans eleven years ago. He says that while he still considered him a traitor to side with former enemies like that, he took no pleasure in his death and heard he died well. + +Brenda died four years ago, but she apparently had become increasingly withdrawn years before that, to the point where she no longer even participated in the major decisions concerning the ED. She was found dead by her own hand with a note stating that she wished to be burned and her ashes scattered near Fort Glory like she did with her husband Roldan. This wish was of course granted. + +Edgar’s last portion of the message also states that he has a last request as well, he wants you to come to the Eternal Dominion as he would like to see you again. He knows that you’ve had your differences and you weren’t ever friends, but right now, you’re the closest thing he’s got. He’s already made the arrangements to let you through and will have an escort waiting for you on the Rask/ED borders for the next few days. He also has placed a separate message with his seal on it, so that they may identify you. + +The message ends there. +> Take a trip to the Eternal Dominion +If Edgar wants to see you, then why not? If he had anything sinister planned for you like having his escort kill you when you arrive. Besides you’re old and you didn’t worry about dying in combat when you were twenty, you’re not going to start worrying about it now. + +You pack a few things for your trip and get your horse ready since you know Rask carriages don’t travel through ED territory anymore. It’s hard getting on damn a horse ever since losing part of your leg, but you’re not about to walk the way there! + +When you reach the border the next day, you see a group of soldiers camped out in the distance beyond it. You see an ED Flag flying so you assume that’s the escort Edgar told you about. When you approach several of the soldiers point muskets at you…heh you sometimes forget of how technology has marched on. + +They immediately ask for identification and you state your name and hand them the message with Edgar’s seal on it. The leader, who is a blonde woman with fair features reads through it and greets you. + +“Greetings sir. My apologies on the initial caution, but we had to be sure. I am Sergeant Kalah, and I am to escort you to Prime Eternal Edgar. I am told he will be most pleased to see you, though I must admit I was also curious about you myself. Many are, as the Prime Eternal has mentioned you several times in high regard.” +“Heh, yeah I’ve heard about that before. Never get used to it though. Well let’s get on our way then.” + +Sergeant Kalah is very talkative on your trip, and goes on about great the ED is, and how it provides for all. She sounds very much like you did a long time ago. You’re a little curious about something so you interrupt her propaganda speak. + +“Tell me sergeant, you and your men are all on the youngish side, what generation of eternal are you exactly?” +“Me sir? I am fourth! We all are, we are newest eternals to serve directly in combat and I’m proud to say that we are so far the first to have natural night vision!” +“You can see in the dark eh? That must come in pretty handy. Wish I’d had that back in the day.” +“Oh yes, the glorious Eternal Dominion was able to fight those treacherous svelk mercenaries that the cowardly Felkans employ on equal footing when we were deployed!” +“Hmm, any other natural abilities?” +“The fourth generation also regenerates better than the third even though they were the first to have such abilities. Under the right circumstances we can potentially regenerate a lost limb.” +“Now THAT is something I definitely would’ve liked to had!” you say knocking on your wooden leg. “Still, with all these advantages I’m sort of surprised you haven’t utterly crushed the Felkans yet.” +“I believe we would, even with our resource shortages. Most of us do! We have the Felkans on the run, I do not understand why we have not pressed forward with our attacks, I long to be in combat again…but it is not my place to question the Prime Eternal’s decisions, I’m sure he has a good reason…” + +Wow, that line sounds familiar. + +“Well all I can say is, sometimes the political aspects of a nation are more complicated than the wars.” You reply + +Sergeant Kalah doesn’t argue, but just says that you may have more wisdom about such things. Kalah and you continue to speak with each other about various subjects and she’s courteous the entire time, in fact she’s downright friendly. You definitely weren’t expecting that and it’s sort of a nice change of pace. While traveling through a town, a couple of pathetic peasants are being beaten in the streets by another soldier, though his uniform seems to be a different color even though it has the same markings. + +“You there! Why are you beating these peasants! What crime have they committed?” she demands. +“Ma’am! These peasants were caught stealing food.” +“Well you shouldn’t be beating them just for that…you should be chopping their hands off!” Kalah says, followed by pleas and screams of the peasants. +“…yes ma’am…alright get over here you lousy thieving scum, let’s make this quick!” the soldier says drawing his sword and striking out at the screaming peasant. However, in his enthusiasm to follow orders he ends up hacking off the peasant’s entire arm. + +More screaming arises from the female peasant who rushes to what is probably are dying husband. Sergeant Kalah rolls her eyes. + +“I swear never let a human do an Eternal’s job…men shoot all three of them.” +“No wait!” the soldier says before several musket balls hit his body. The two peasants are also killed instantly. + +The onlookers of this event duck and hide, but the sergeant makes her point known. + +“Listen up! This town is now on watch! If I hear of anymore thievery or other crimes, I’ll be back to burn down this whole town! And for those of you in charge of keeping the law around here, I better see more competence displayed in the future than I saw today or I’ll have you drawn and quartered! You are ALL servants of the Eternals! We are your masters, we know better than you and you will OBEY.” + +And there it is, the ruthless arrogance. It would appear than Kalah’s friendliness extends only to other Eternals. Can’t say you’re surprised though. You all move on and eventually you reach the capital and the palace where Edgar resides. Funny how this is the first time you’ve ever been to the palace after all those years serving the Empire. + +“This is where we part company, but I must say I hope we meet again in the future, it was an honor to meet you.” +“And it was a pleasure to meet you too…” you say and then you decide to give her a big fat thrill. “…and if I may say if we have more eternals as pretty and commanding as you, we will no doubt rule for thousands of years to come.” +“…I…oh…well thank you sir!” she stutters and smiles before riding off. + +New guards accompany you into the palace and through it. You’ve never been in here before, so you do a little sight seeing as you walk. Eventually you reach the royal bedroom. An older woman is sitting on a chair outside sobbing. She looks regal. Did Edgar get married? You’ve never heard of their being any sort of “queen” of the ED you always assumed he was just ruling alone. Another older muscular man with a stern expression is standing nearby pacing. When you arrive, he frowns even more. + +“Oh so you decided to come after all. A pity.” He says. +“Well, I certainly can say your military is politer than the royalty around here.” +“That is probably because they believe all the stories Prime Eternal Edgar says about you. Such is the foolishness of youth.” +“And who the hell are you exactly?” +“Hmm, not surprised a deserter like you doesn’t remember me. My name is Rissok and I served under you during the Empire riots. I saw you kill my friend in cold blood. A true eternal who served with honor!” + +“Oooooh now I remember. You and your other buddy were looting houses while Felding was attempting to rape a woman. Yeah, real honor there.” You say and Rissok gets in your face. +“Don’t mock me! You are only here because the Prime allows it! If it were up to me, I would have you labeled as a traitor and have you killed!” +“Well nothing is stopping you. You got the guards here, Edgar’s too sick to prevent it and I’ve only got one leg, so I’d say it’s a fair fight.” You remark. +“Stop it! Stop it please! My Edgar is dying! Can’t we have one moment without murder and killing?” the woman sobs. + +At this point Rissok storms off without another word, the guards stick around and tell you that you may enter at any time. Before you do, you have to ask the woman who she is because you get the impression she isn’t an eternal. You just sense it. + +“My apologies, I didn’t know that Edgar was even married. What title do you go by, queen? Emperess?” +“(sniff) No, I’m none of those things. I’m just Eva. Sometime Lady Eva if we’re being formal, but I am not married to Edgar nor am I common knowledge to a majority of the public, I am merely his companion of sorts. He could not marry me, for concern of marrying a non-eternal might weaken his position of leadership. I understood this from the beginning though and do not blame him for it. Eternals have more wisdom on these matters.” + +You’re pretty sure that isn’t necessarily true, but you understand Edgar’s rationale and Eva seems to genuinely be in love with him. You ask her if she wants to come in with you, but she says she has already said her goodbyes and that he wants to see you alone when you arrive. Having no other questions, you enter the bedroom. + +When you see Edgar, he’s lying in his bed and looking completely unwell. He’s pale and his face has a gaunt looking appearance. You can’t even believe this is the same man you fought along side at Fort Defiance. + +“Edgar? ” +“(wheeze) ah…you came…I knew you would. (cough cough) You’re also looking much better than I am…minus a leg I see. How did that happen?” +“Long story…but you! How the hell did you get this sick?! Other than physical pains racking my body, I’ve never been actually sick. I didn’t think we could!” +“Well…after you’ve suffered five or six assassination attempts all laced with various poisons, it tends to fuck up your body a lot quicker…anyway there isn’t much time left I doubt if I’ll make it through the night (cough cough) you’ve read my letter I take it?” +“Yes.” +“Well then you know that when my death comes, anarchy will ensue.” +“Don’t you have a successor? What about Eva?” +“I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but we can’t have children. We Eternals seem to be sterile or barren. I’ve had people try to look into this problem, but they haven’t come up with anything yet. It would seem what makes us superior, takes away our ability to reproduce. Maybe it’s nature balancing itself out, so that we don’t take over the world like so many of our younger eternals seem to want to do.” +“Hmm, I have to admit, I always wondered why all those strumpets I slept with during my merc days never came back with little bundles demanding support.” You reply. “Anyway (cough cough) I’ve drawn up official forms for the person I think could be a successor…” + +You already know where Edgar is going with this. + +“Oh no…don’t say that’s why you dragged me out here…Edgar they aren’t going to listen to me! I haven’t even been living in the ED since it’s formation!” +“That doesn’t matter! You’re still an Eternal! One of the first and probably the best of us! (wheeze cough) They’ll listen more likely than you believe, why do you think I always spoke so highly of you? The younger ones will most likely follow without question, your major opposition will probably be the second generation…but there aren’t too many of them left, you could easily purge them all if you had to.” + +Sheesh, you haven’t even agreed to anything and Edgar’s already suggesting mass purges. It’s like you never left the Empire. + +“Please…I tried to build something here…(cough) I tried to do what you might’ve done if only you’d taken the reins of power, but I can’t go on any longer. The only person who can guide the Eternal Dominion into something worthier is you. I’m asking you not just as former comrade in arms…but as a (cough cough) a fellow Eternal…” + +Edgar’s trying to guilt you into this mess, but it’s just not going to work. This plan of his is doomed to fail and you know it. Every high ranking Eternal is probably going to be vying for power and that idiot Rissok will probably the worst of the lot before Edgar’s body is even cold. Still, this is his dying request. You could always accept his proposal just to appease him on his deathbed. +> Lie and tell him you'll accept the position +This is his last request, what could it hurt to reassure him on his deathbed? It’s not like he’s going to know after he dies. + +“Okay, Edgar. I’ll take it, but I’m still skeptical that I’ll do as good a job as you.” You say to Edgar who manages to smile. +“Thank you, but as I have said, you will find that you will have more support than you think. Now then, let us talk, I wish to know what you’ve been up to. So many years have passed and my own time is short.” + +You oblige Edgar and try to tell him as much as you can about what you’ve been doing since you first left the Empire. He seems to enjoy your tales while interjecting a few of his own, but he mostly just listens as the hours pass his life tether to this world begins to slip away. Finally he has stopped listening completely and died. You sit in silence for a moment to say goodbye to your former comrade in arms…no, a brother. + +You are about to leave and that’s when Rissok comes barging in with a couple of guards and Eva. + +“Is he dead yet?” Rissok asks. +“Yes, and show some fucking respect.” You say. +“Respect? I have been serving the Prime with distinction for years! What have you done, except turn your back on the eternal name! You’re no better than that traitor Warrick! Worse, you think to come here to steal the throne, well not on my watch!” + +At this point Rissok pulls out a flintlock pistol and points it at you. + +“Steal the throne? Hah! I wouldn’t want to run this asylum even if I was begged to, which I was.” +“I knew it! I knew the Prime wanted to see you for such a reason!” +“Yeah, and I said I wasn’t interested, so you can just calm the hell down…” +“Rissok stop it! Is your lust for power so overwhelming that you can’t even contain yourself even in the presence of my dead loved one’s body?” Eva shouts tearfully. + +“Shaddup, ya human harlot!” Rissok says and smacks Eva in the face with the flintlock, dropping her to the floor. You take this opportunity to rush at Rissok, but unfortunately you aren’t as fast as you used to be. Rissok manages to step backward just in time to shoot you in the chest. You fall to the ground mortally wounded. + +“And so ends the first generation. You had your time in the sun, now it is time for the seconds to take over where you failed. Guard, finish this relic off.” +“Nah, we’re not following you either.” A guard says and raises his own musket to Rissok and blows his head off. Rissok’s body collapses on to the floor next to you, blood, skull and brains leaking all over the place. + +Staring at Rissok’s headless body, you chuckle in between your dying gasps before finally passing from this world.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>If Edgar wants to see you, then why not? If he had anything sinister planned for you like having his escort kill you when you arrive. Besides you’re old and you didn’t worry about dying in combat when you were twenty, you’re not going to start worrying about it now. + +You pack a few things for your trip and get your horse ready since you know Rask carriages don’t travel through ED territory anymore. It’s hard getting on damn a horse ever since losing part of your leg, but you’re not about to walk the way there! + +When you reach the border the next day, you see a group of soldiers camped out in the distance beyond it. You see an ED Flag flying so you assume that’s the escort Edgar told you about. When you approach several of the soldiers point muskets at you…heh you sometimes forget of how technology has marched on. + +They immediately ask for identification and you state your name and hand them the message with Edgar’s seal on it. The leader, who is a blonde woman with fair features reads through it and greets you. + +“Greetings sir. My apologies on the initial caution, but we had to be sure. I am Sergeant Kalah, and I am to escort you to Prime Eternal Edgar. I am told he will be most pleased to see you, though I must admit I was also curious about you myself. Many are, as the Prime Eternal has mentioned you several times in high regard.” +“Heh, yeah I’ve heard about that before. Never get used to it though. Well let’s get on our way then.” + +Sergeant Kalah is very talkative on your trip, and goes on about great the ED is, and how it provides for all. She sounds very much like you did a long time ago. You’re a little curious about something so you interrupt her propaganda speak. + +“Tell me sergeant, you and your men are all on the youngish side, what generation of eternal are you exactly?” +“Me sir? I am fourth! We all are, we are newest eternals to serve directly in combat and I’m proud to say that we are so far the first to have natural night vision!” +“You can see in the dark eh? That must come in pretty handy. Wish I’d had that back in the day.” +“Oh yes, the glorious Eternal Dominion was able to fight those treacherous svelk mercenaries that the cowardly Felkans employ on equal footing when we were deployed!” +“Hmm, any other natural abilities?” +“The fourth generation also regenerates better than the third even though they were the first to have such abilities. Under the right circumstances we can potentially regenerate a lost limb.” +“Now THAT is something I definitely would’ve liked to had!” you say knocking on your wooden leg. “Still, with all these advantages I’m sort of surprised you haven’t utterly crushed the Felkans yet.” +“I believe we would, even with our resource shortages. Most of us do! We have the Felkans on the run, I do not understand why we have not pressed forward with our attacks, I long to be in combat again…but it is not my place to question the Prime Eternal’s decisions, I’m sure he has a good reason…” + +Wow, that line sounds familiar. + +“Well all I can say is, sometimes the political aspects of a nation are more complicated than the wars.” You reply + +Sergeant Kalah doesn’t argue, but just says that you may have more wisdom about such things. Kalah and you continue to speak with each other about various subjects and she’s courteous the entire time, in fact she’s downright friendly. You definitely weren’t expecting that and it’s sort of a nice change of pace. While traveling through a town, a couple of pathetic peasants are being beaten in the streets by another soldier, though his uniform seems to be a different color even though it has the same markings. + +“You there! Why are you beating these peasants! What crime have they committed?” she demands. +“Ma’am! These peasants were caught stealing food.” +“Well you shouldn’t be beating them just for that…you should be chopping their hands off!” Kalah says, followed by pleas and screams of the peasants. +“…yes ma’am…alright get over here you lousy thieving scum, let’s make this quick!” the soldier says drawing his sword and striking out at the screaming peasant. However, in his enthusiasm to follow orders he ends up hacking off the peasant’s entire arm. + +More screaming arises from the female peasant who rushes to what is probably are dying husband. Sergeant Kalah rolls her eyes. + +“I swear never let a human do an Eternal’s job…men shoot all three of them.” +“No wait!” the soldier says before several musket balls hit his body. The two peasants are also killed instantly. + +The onlookers of this event duck and hide, but the sergeant makes her point known. + +“Listen up! This town is now on watch! If I hear of anymore thievery or other crimes, I’ll be back to burn down this whole town! And for those of you in charge of keeping the law around here, I better see more competence displayed in the future than I saw today or I’ll have you drawn and quartered! You are ALL servants of the Eternals! We are your masters, we know better than you and you will OBEY.” + +And there it is, the ruthless arrogance. It would appear than Kalah’s friendliness extends only to other Eternals. Can’t say you’re surprised though. You all move on and eventually you reach the capital and the palace where Edgar resides. Funny how this is the first time you’ve ever been to the palace after all those years serving the Empire. + +“This is where we part company, but I must say I hope we meet again in the future, it was an honor to meet you.” +“And it was a pleasure to meet you too…” you say and then you decide to give her a big fat thrill. “…and if I may say if we have more eternals as pretty and commanding as you, we will no doubt rule for thousands of years to come.” +“…I…oh…well thank you sir!” she stutters and smiles before riding off. + +New guards accompany you into the palace and through it. You’ve never been in here before, so you do a little sight seeing as you walk. Eventually you reach the royal bedroom. An older woman is sitting on a chair outside sobbing. She looks regal. Did Edgar get married? You’ve never heard of their being any sort of “queen” of the ED you always assumed he was just ruling alone. Another older muscular man with a stern expression is standing nearby pacing. When you arrive, he frowns even more. + +“Oh so you decided to come after all. A pity.” He says. +“Well, I certainly can say your military is politer than the royalty around here.” +“That is probably because they believe all the stories Prime Eternal Edgar says about you. Such is the foolishness of youth.” +“And who the hell are you exactly?” +“Hmm, not surprised a deserter like you doesn’t remember me. My name is Rissok and I served under you during the Empire riots. I saw you kill my friend in cold blood. A true eternal who served with honor!” + +“Oooooh now I remember. You and your other buddy were looting houses while Felding was attempting to rape a woman. Yeah, real honor there.” You say and Rissok gets in your face. +“Don’t mock me! You are only here because the Prime allows it! If it were up to me, I would have you labeled as a traitor and have you killed!” +“Well nothing is stopping you. You got the guards here, Edgar’s too sick to prevent it and I’ve only got one leg, so I’d say it’s a fair fight.” You remark. +“Stop it! Stop it please! My Edgar is dying! Can’t we have one moment without murder and killing?” the woman sobs. + +At this point Rissok storms off without another word, the guards stick around and tell you that you may enter at any time. Before you do, you have to ask the woman who she is because you get the impression she isn’t an eternal. You just sense it. + +“My apologies, I didn’t know that Edgar was even married. What title do you go by, queen? Emperess?” +“(sniff) No, I’m none of those things. I’m just Eva. Sometime Lady Eva if we’re being formal, but I am not married to Edgar nor am I common knowledge to a majority of the public, I am merely his companion of sorts. He could not marry me, for concern of marrying a non-eternal might weaken his position of leadership. I understood this from the beginning though and do not blame him for it. Eternals have more wisdom on these matters.” + +You’re pretty sure that isn’t necessarily true, but you understand Edgar’s rationale and Eva seems to genuinely be in love with him. You ask her if she wants to come in with you, but she says she has already said her goodbyes and that he wants to see you alone when you arrive. Having no other questions, you enter the bedroom. + +When you see Edgar, he’s lying in his bed and looking completely unwell. He’s pale and his face has a gaunt looking appearance. You can’t even believe this is the same man you fought along side at Fort Defiance. + +“Edgar? ” +“(wheeze) ah…you came…I knew you would. (cough cough) You’re also looking much better than I am…minus a leg I see. How did that happen?” +“Long story…but you! How the hell did you get this sick?! Other than physical pains racking my body, I’ve never been actually sick. I didn’t think we could!” +“Well…after you’ve suffered five or six assassination attempts all laced with various poisons, it tends to fuck up your body a lot quicker…anyway there isn’t much time left I doubt if I’ll make it through the night (cough cough) you’ve read my letter I take it?” +“Yes.” +“Well then you know that when my death comes, anarchy will ensue.” +“Don’t you have a successor? What about Eva?” +“I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but we can’t have children. We Eternals seem to be sterile or barren. I’ve had people try to look into this problem, but they haven’t come up with anything yet. It would seem what makes us superior, takes away our ability to reproduce. Maybe it’s nature balancing itself out, so that we don’t take over the world like so many of our younger eternals seem to want to do.” +“Hmm, I have to admit, I always wondered why all those strumpets I slept with during my merc days never came back with little bundles demanding support.” You reply. “Anyway (cough cough) I’ve drawn up official forms for the person I think could be a successor…” + +You already know where Edgar is going with this. + +“Oh no…don’t say that’s why you dragged me out here…Edgar they aren’t going to listen to me! I haven’t even been living in the ED since it’s formation!” +“That doesn’t matter! You’re still an Eternal! One of the first and probably the best of us! (wheeze cough) They’ll listen more likely than you believe, why do you think I always spoke so highly of you? The younger ones will most likely follow without question, your major opposition will probably be the second generation…but there aren’t too many of them left, you could easily purge them all if you had to.” + +Sheesh, you haven’t even agreed to anything and Edgar’s already suggesting mass purges. It’s like you never left the Empire. + +“Please…I tried to build something here…(cough) I tried to do what you might’ve done if only you’d taken the reins of power, but I can’t go on any longer. The only person who can guide the Eternal Dominion into something worthier is you. I’m asking you not just as former comrade in arms…but as a (cough cough) a fellow Eternal…” + +Edgar’s trying to guilt you into this mess, but it’s just not going to work. This plan of his is doomed to fail and you know it. Every high ranking Eternal is probably going to be vying for power and that idiot Rissok will probably the worst of the lot before Edgar’s body is even cold. Still, this is his dying request. You could always accept his proposal just to appease him on his deathbed. +> Tell the truth and decline +You didn’t lie to Kane when he asked you to join him. + +You didn’t lie to Brenda when she asked you to join the Eternal Dominion + +And you aren’t going to lie to Edgar now. It might not be what he wants to hear, but it’s what he’s going to hear. + +“Edgar, I’m not accepting this position. First of all it’s not realistic despite what you want to believe and I think deep down you know that. Second of all, if I wanted the reins of power as you say, I would’ve taken them a long time ago. Did I ever think about it? Sure, but I came to the conclusion that it wouldn’t lead to anywhere good…and given your condition I’d say I was half right. I say half right, because it is apparent that you did gain a loving wife out it, or whatever she is to you.” + +Edgar is silent while you continue. + +“And while I don’t say my own path was any better, it was ultimately mine and it’s one I intend to finish whatever the future may hold for it. Edgar, don’t worry about what you accomplished and if it’ll last. Just be proud of it now and spend your last moments with your wife. That’s who you need to be concerned about.” + +Edgar hacks and coughs up blood and spits it into a nearby bucket and struggles to breathe, but manages to answer you. + +“Very well…you’ve made your point. And you’re probably right. You usually were. (wheeze) Bring my…my wife in. I do wish to spend the last moments with her…and farewell…my brother.” +“Farewell Edgar.” You say with a nod and leave. + +You step outside and tell Eva that Edgar wants to spend his remaining time left with her. She seems happy with this idea though of course still upset. She runs in and one of the guards says he will escort you out. On the way out, you run into Rissok in the halls and once again he gets into your face. + +“Leaving again are we? Just as well you aren’t welcome here anyway. In fact I’d suggest you make it quick. As soon as Edgar’s breathes his last breath I’m going to make a lot of changes around here.” +“You’re saying you’re going to be in charge after Edgar?” +“Of course! Others might say they are, but they’ll be silenced soon enough, just like all traitors will be. I am the only one qualified to run this nation! +“Hm, well…we can’t have that.” you say and with a quick motion you pull out your dagger and stab Rissok in the neck. Blood spurts out like a fountain when you pull it out and Rissok gurgles clutching his throat attempting to curse you the entire time. + +You pretty much expected to get your head blown off by the guard standing next to you, but he just stood there and did nothing. + +“I had a feeling you were going to do that.” He says in an almost bored tone. “How old is that dagger anyway? That design was outdated even before I was born. We use a much lighter weight metal now that allows a for a smoother cut.” +“Still gets the job done. So I’m guessing by me being still alive, you have no objections with his death?” +“Feh, you could’ve killed him in front of the entire army and nobody would’ve lifted a finger. He was an asshole and I know I wouldn’t have followed him even if the entire Eternal Dominion depended on it. Besides, we third generation eternals are more fit to run things than any of the seconds. Just glad you didn’t decide to stick around, would’ve hated to have to kill a legend.” +“Well if you ever decide to go to war with Rask, you might still get your chance.” You say and the pair of you leave Rissok’s body behind in the corridor as you exit the palace. + +A carriage takes you back to the border where a horse is supplied to you to make the rest of journey home. And you are certainly glad to get back. It’s certainly been a strange few days for you, but then you’re use to strangeness going on in your life. + +A couple days later you get the news that Edgar has died and that the new leadership of the Eternal Dominion as of now is uncertain. Rask of course is still fully expecting war to come their way, but you suspect that probably other than a few skirmishes, most of the fighting will be within the ED itself, or pushing ahead against the Felkan Kingdom. + +You also realize that you really are the last one left now. Kane, Roldan, Gerald, Warrick, Brenda and Edgar all gone. The thought saddens you and you’re reminded of the phrase Gruz told you as he died. + +“You’ll outlive everyone…” + +It looks like it’s come true at last. + +Oh sure there still are all the newer eternals around, but you were the first to be the perfect Empire soldiers in the misguided hope that you could save it. A project that failed utterly for its leaders. + +You think about some of the other Eternals in your class that didn’t even make it past training, or the few like Cyrus that were transferred to the Shadow Guard. You also heard there was a group of eternals that came before you, though all of them died in training and never even made it into the field while the Empire was still “perfecting” their plan. + +You wonder if all of you had made it and kept together as a separate unit, would it have made a difference? Who knows? You wonder if you’ll even be remembered as the years go by. Not just years or decades, but centuries. Edgar tried to create something to last and while he’ll probably have the best chance out of everyone in your group, ultimately history may just list him as a footnote as some obscure ruler. + +As for the rest of you, you’ll be forgotten. At best, you may have the “honor” being brought up in tall tale by drunkards and bards in taverns, which you can live with, but you’d like the rest of your old friends… no, your old brothers and sister to be remembered. + +That’s when you get the idea. You shall write you memoirs. Maybe nobody will read them or care, but what the hell, you need something to occupy your time in your twilight years. You’ve got a lot of it after all. + +Grabbing a quill and some parchment you begin to write. You want to get as much down as you can, but of course a lot of history has passed and you’re having a little difficulty of where to start. + +“Damn, I should’ve done this a lot sooner…oh yeah…might as well start with her.” + +Mistress was her name, and that was about the only thing I ever knew about her. Oh that and the fact that she was a sadistic svelk bitch that helped trained me and my bothers and sister to be killers. Not just killers though, Eternals. + +This is our story.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 75 + +As the years creep up on you and despite missing part of your leg, you still feel don’t feel in any ill health. It’s mostly just aches and pains from your more physical years catching up with you. After the leg incident though, you took that permanent position at the Keplavisk military academy as a strategy instructor, though nowadays it’s looking like it’ll become the Rask military academy. Rask is in the process of becoming a “real nation” rather than just a collection of allied towns. You don’t really know all the politics of it, but the main guiding force was justified Raskian paranoia again. Ever since the Eternal Dominion’s war with the Felkan Kingdom grinded to a halt, the ED has been making overtures to Rask to join them in the veiled form of threats rather than any sort of diplomatic alliance agreements. + +While starting a war on two fronts is always a bad idea you’re guessing Edgar needs the resources that Rask has to make his final push to conquer the Felkans once and for all. You’re also guessing he’s intent on ignoring your advice of not attacking Rask too, you’re just surprised he held out this long. You’re not really worried about it if it comes to war. The Raskians may not have the unnaturally bred “eternals” like the ED does, but they’re trained well enough to make the cost very high if they are in invaded. You should know, you trained most of them. + +You hear a knock on your door and you slowly make your way over. + +“Mail for you Mr. Bane.” A delivery girl says to you when you open up the door. You toss a gold coin to her and take your letter. + +At first you figure it’s from Ulivik, no doubt telling you about whatever grand adventure he’s on this time. The last time he was here, he was for his mother’s funeral. He kept his composure for the most part, but it still wasn’t a good time for him. He didn’t say it in so many words, but he did say that you were the only family he had left. You didn’t follow up, but the pair you said your goodbyes both of you knowing that you had that bond similar to that of a father and son. + +But this letter isn’t from Ulivik, it’s mysteriously labeled as from “a friend.” Considering you’ve never really had any, you’re baffled to as who it could be. When you open it you see that it’s from Edgar, several pages in fact. You sit down to read all of it. + +The beginning of it hopes that the letter has found you as he wants you to take in all of what he has to tell you. He begins by stating that he’s dying. He mentions his health is deteriorating by the day and he doesn’t know how much longer he has left. His “successors” are likely to start a war with Rask soon after his death, it’s only due to their respect that they don’t. The same way his respect for you caused him not to. + +The majority of the letter explains that he wants you to understand why he did what he did and how he wished that you had joined him. He says the incident with Kane never left him and how if he’d only been there to listen to him and help him more, none of that might’ve happened. Perhaps even the Empire would’ve survived. (You doubt that though, it would’ve just taken longer) When the Empire was in its last days he saw how chaotic the new eternals were and realized they needed guidance and a purpose much like Kane did. He always thought that you’d do it, but you left leaving him as the only person willing to. He says it was very difficult and while they ultimately they fell in line, but without the purpose of conquest they wouldn’t stay that way for long. So he began forging a new empire as it were, with the eternals as the leaders as it always should’ve been. The newer generations of eternals were better disciplined, as he made sure their training went very much the same way yours did. Still, they are much more arrogant that he ever was. They believe it is their destiny to rule the world and he believes that he’s set something in motion that even he is no longer in control of. + +“Ah Edgar, always getting yourself in over your head.” You say to yourself. + +The rest of the letter mentions that you two are the last of the old Eternals. Warrick died in Battle of Yaquan when the ED successfully took the city from the Felkans eleven years ago. He says that while he still considered him a traitor to side with former enemies like that, he took no pleasure in his death and heard he died well. + +Brenda died four years ago, but she apparently had become increasingly withdrawn years before that, to the point where she no longer even participated in the major decisions concerning the ED. She was found dead by her own hand with a note stating that she wished to be burned and her ashes scattered near Fort Glory like she did with her husband Roldan. This wish was of course granted. + +Edgar’s last portion of the message also states that he has a last request as well, he wants you to come to the Eternal Dominion as he would like to see you again. He knows that you’ve had your differences and you weren’t ever friends, but right now, you’re the closest thing he’s got. He’s already made the arrangements to let you through and will have an escort waiting for you on the Rask/ED borders for the next few days. He also has placed a separate message with his seal on it, so that they may identify you. + +The message ends there. +> Write a letter back to Edgar +While Edgar may not have any ill will towards you, you just aren’t sure about his subjects. You decide it wouldn’t be the best idea to go deep into Eternal Dominion territory, but Edgar does deserve a letter back, so you begin to write. + +When you’re finished with the letter, the next day you have a professional letter carrier take care of it with your instructions to where it is suppose to be sent. Hopefully it gets to Edgar. + +As the days pass into weeks, you receive the news that Edgar has died and that the Raskians are all concerned that war with the ED may come soon. You aren’t really concerned about such things, but you do feel a little bad that you didn’t visit Edgar now. You hope he got your letter in time, but you guess you’ll never know. It feels odd knowing that you’re the last eternal left from the “original” group. + +The rest of your days are spent mostly going about your business. War never comes to Rask as the Eternal Dominion seems to descend into civil war after Edgar’s death. There are some changes in Rask society, but you just find yourself with less and less to keep yourself occupied. Still, you do enjoy the visits from Ulivik whenever he has the time. + +Year 101 + +During one of Ulivik’s visits, you finally lose the battle you’ve successfully been fighting for over a century and death at last takes you peacefully in your sleep. + +The day after your death Ulivik finds you. After his own short immediate morning period, he makes the arrangements to have your body burned as requested. He then takes your ashes to a high hill and scatters them to the winds. + +“Rask may not have originally been your home, but it became your home. And now you’re part of it forever.” He says as his final words to you. + +While never remembered on a large scale, tall tales about you pop up in taverns in Rask from time to time of various things you did or didn’t do and Ulivik would always speak fondly of you whenever he was asked about his own past.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Ulivik may be an accomplished warrior now, but out of all the tales he’s told you about his adventures; he still hasn’t faced anything like the wendigos and he’s going to get himself killed or worse if he goes into this with just the hope of some magic bauble around his neck. As much as you’re loathed to go through this again, you decide to help Ulivik. + +“Alright I’ll go, but as soon as I think we’re in a shitload of danger that we can’t handle, you better listen to me, because this isn’t going to be the fun adventure you think it’s going to be. Understand?” +“Sure, but I really don’t think it’s going to be as bad as all that.” +“No, it’ll probably be worse. Now if you don’t mind I’m going to get some sleep and get my mind focused on this fool’s task.” +“Fool’s task? You’re coming with me.” +“Yeah, which says more about my own foolishness than yours, because you don’t know any better. I know we got these magic amulets or whatever, but these… things are going to try to get inside your head and if they succeed, it’s all over. If that happens to you, I won’t hesitate to put a sword through your head, and I expect you to do the same.” +“Ha ha you’d kill me so easily?” Ulivik laughs, but you’re in no mood. +“Hello, I don’t believe we’ve met…by the gods have you remembered nothing of the stories of my past? Of course I’d fucking do it so easily! I’ve killed innocent men and their entire families just because they disagreed with how the Empire was doing things, hell I even killed one of my Eternal brothers because of it. Wouldn’t be anything to kill someone who was turned into a mindless beast even if…” + +You stop yourself right there. + +“Even if what?” Ulivik asks. +“Even if…he’s too stupid to see this is a really bad idea! Anyway, I’m ranting and I’m tired. I’m going to bed, you can let yourself out. And don’t say that I don’t have to go, because I’m already committed now. I gave you my word as an Eternal.” + +Ulivik knows when you say something like that, you’re being serious, so he just nods and tells you he’ll be by tomorrow morning before leaving. As for you, you head off to bed with a myriad of thoughts going on in your head. + +“Can’t believe I nearly said he was like a son to me. What the fuck am I thinkin’ about? Better get your head in the game old man, because wendigos are going to thrive on that. They live on weakness.” You mumble before drifting off to sleep. + +The next morning you and Ulivik set off for the infamous Wendigo Hills. Along the way, you go on about your own major conflicts with them, even when they were originally just thought to be people infected with lycanthropy like the rest of the old barbarian tribes around Rask. Ulivik listens to you in fascination like he did when he was much younger as you’ve never spoken of your experience with the wendigos before to him except in passing. It’s good to know he’s still listening. + +“So after that battle, no wendigo has ever left those hills?” Ulivik asks. +“Eh, we had a couple that still managed to snag bodies and kill a few people before being brought down and exorcised by some of the local hedge wizards we recruited later, but that was mainly due to people idiotically still going into the hills in the first place. Sort of like what we’re doing.” You say. +“But if they’re spirits can’t they just float about possessing people?” +“You’d think so, but for whatever reason they can’t leave these the hills in pure spirit form, they need a body. That’s why when they’re killed they immediately try to hop into a new one or else they get pulled back to the hills. Dunno why, and I don’t think anyone’s bothered to learn the history either. Everyone’s just glad they were deprived of nearly all of their bodies by a certain Eternal decades ago.” +“Ha ha, but what about animals? Couldn’t they just possess animals and leave the hills that way?” +“Always wondered that myself, but again if they could I’d imagine they’d still be a major threat. Besides, when I traversed those hills I didn’t see a single animal, not one, of course I assumed that they probably ate them all. The wendigo are basically consumption and hunger in its purest form. They aren’t big thinkers in the scheme of things and it’s fortunate that they never organized past their barbarian tribal hosts.” +“Sounds like it, but if they are all spirits as you say, then we shouldn’t experience any physical combat at all and with these amulets and our steel trap minds we should be fine! We might even find some sort of ancient lore about how the wendigos came to be tied to those hills!” +“Well you’re as optimistic as ever. I suppose that’s good, it’ll keep your mind better prepared when the wendigos try to oppressively crush your free will. Y’know, now that I think about it, I think that’s what partially saved me. My mind was so dedicated to the Empire back in those days, the wendigos were trying to crush something that wasn’t really my own to begin with.” +“And now?” +“Now? I got my impenetrable cynicism to protect me, which I’ll definitely put more stock in than this ridiculous magical amulet that’ll undoubtedly fail to do anything.” +“Looks like you’re off to a good start with your cynicism.” + +The after a couple days of travel, you eventually make it to the base of the Wendigo Hills. The markings and warning signs line stretch up, down and all the way around as far as you know. No real physical barriers of course, but even those dumb ass ogres that can’t read know better than to pass the line. Of course they usually knew better to begin with, which proves that they’re smarter in that respect. You take a deep breath and step past the markings and make your way up the forested hills. + +It’s at this point your amulet starts to glow a brighter blue, Ulivik claims “that’s how you know that it’s working!” Great. Still, you don’t hear any sinister whispers yet, but there is still that dead silence you remember. As if nothing living is here. + +Ulivik, mentions that he found a crude and well worn map of some of the Rask area during his trip through Eternal Dominion lands and wants to explore some ruins that are clearly marked on it. You mention you haven’t been here in a long time, but you don’t remember ever seeing any, so you can’t be as of much help as he might’ve thought. Ulivik says he doesn’t care though, he’s just glad to have you along. + +“That map is probably old Empire. Like really old Empire, and much might’ve changed since then. It could also be inaccurate to begin with.” +“Yeah, that’s true, but we might as well find out. It’s the journey, not necessarily the destination that’s important! That’s what adventuring is all about.” +“Funny, I always thought it was the misguided hope of finding lots of loot and the avoidance of a real job.” You reply. +“That’s just a bonus.” Ulivik comments and you allow yourself to chuckle. Never thought you’d do that while in this cursed place. + +After a half hour or so of walking, you start to get an uneasy feeling of being watched. You mention this to Ulivik and he says he’s getting that impression too. You ask him if he’s hearing anything, but he says he isn’t except the snow crunching under foot. Neither are you, maybe the amulets are working, but it’s obvious the presence of the wendigos is near. + +Another hour of travel and you and Ulivik see something you didn’t expect. + +“Do you see that? That’s a rabbit! I thought you said nothing was living here?” Ulivik says. +“When I came through I didn’t see a living creature, so I just assumed there wasn’t. I guess there is though.” You reply. +“Maybe the wendigo aren’t here anymore and everyone has been scared of this place for decades for no reason.” +“I wouldn’t go that far. Something is definitely here and just because we’re seeing rabbits doesn’t mean it’s safe. It just means animals must not be suitable hosts for them.” +“Well…hey that rabbit it’s hopping towards us. Hmm, a little larger than average and hopping towards people is rather unusual behavior for a ra…” + +Before Ulivik can finish, his leg is leaped upon and viciously attacked by the rabbit. After some hollering from the surprise, you grab the little furry beast and break its neck. You toss its lifeless body in the snow while Ulivik examines the bite marks in his pants + +“Fuck, that thing chewed through my pant leg and broke the skin! You never mentioned killer rabbits on your travel to here.” +“That’s because I didn’t encounter any, and I doubt if that was really a rabbit anymore. It would seem that animals CAN be hosts after all, they just need a human one or something similar to leave the hills. Anyway, we should really get out here, there are more coming.” +“What? So? I’m sure we can handle a few overgrown possessed rabbits.” Ulivik says still preoccupied with his very minor wound. +“A few, sure, but how about hundreds of them?” you say and draw his attention to literally that number popping up all around you. + +The glaring red eyes of hundreds of possessed bunnies are upon you and their herbivore buck teeth have now been replaced with the toothy fangs of a carnivore hungry for flesh. And they look like they haven’t tasted a bi-ped in a long time… +> Fight your way to the ruins +You’ve come this far, no sense in running back home now especially not from rabbits, even if they are possessed by wendigo spirits. + +“Come on let’s get to that ruin of yours, hopefully we’ll be less out in the open there!” you shout slashing out at the nearest bunch of bunnies. +“It should be nearby, this way!” + +The pair of you run chopping up rabbits along the way as the “little” nippers are hopping after you and occasionally leaping on you and get a few bites in. This might all be very comical if your life wasn’t in mortal danger. After about fifteen minutes of this, you’re still practically waist deep in rabbits and no closer to your goal. You’re starting to regret your initial decision. + +“Ulivik, what the fuck man? I though you said it was close by?!” +“It is! It is! I just need to look at my map again!” Ulivik says fumbling with his map. +“Ulivik we don’t have time for all that! We’re getting surrounded, and like normal rabbits they seem to have multiplied severely. They’re going to wear us down by attrition if this keeps up.” +“Hold on I, agh!” + +White rabbits, which were blending into the snow, suddenly pop up and bite at the legs and ankles of you and Ulivik. This causes Ulivik to fall to his hands and knees in the snow as they continue their attack. + +“Get off! Get off!” he shouts killing them, unfortunately one the rabbits jumps on his back and with his teeth takes the amulet chain and leaps off with it. + +“Ulivik no! Your amulet! We need to get the fuck outta here now!” +“Arrrrgh! My head feels like it’s going to explode! Shut up! Shut up!” Ulivik yells. + +The mental assault has already begun and you tell Ulivik to quickly try to think about other things and drown out the wendigo voices, he’s obviously in pain though. In the meantime you’re attempting to drag him back the way you came while still fighting off rabbits. + +More and more of the ferocious furballs leap on to you and Ulivik, and sure enough your own amulet chain is eventually broken off as well. + +“Welcome back Bane of Rask, we always knew you’d come back.” You hear in your head and then a gray rabbit the size of a bear comes bounding out of a hole in the ground. It is at this point, the wendigos make their awful howl in unison. Ulivik screams in pain and you’re not feeling so great yourself, but you refuse to be beaten by an overgrown rabbit. + +You quickly run over to the wendigo leader and hack at its head, putting out one of its eyes. The beast roars and succeeds in smacking you to the ground with its claws. + +“Foolish mortal! You cannot hope to win this battle! Give up now and let me take over…” + +You ignore the taunts of the wendigo leader, you ignore the whispers of the wendigos’ mental assault, you ignore the countless bites into your flesh from their hosts. You just focus on one thing. Killing that gray sonofabitch. + +You roll out of the way the leader’s attack and shove your sword in his side and then using your dagger you put out his other eye. Blind and still enraged he clumsily tries to lash out against you with his claws again, but once again you dodge and pulling your sword of his side, you shove it into his head this time and twist it back and forth making sure it cuts through skull, brains and everything else. + +“You haven’t won…” you hear in your head while stomping on some nearby rabbits still biting at your ankles. Ulivik is staggering towards you with a trail of his own dead rabbits in his wake. + +“Ulivik, come on we still need to get outta here, before the leader regroups with a new body!” you say and grab at Ulivik to help pull him towards you. Ulivik stares at you blankly for a moment, and then his demeanor changes to a less friendly one. + +Your heart sinks knowing what has happened, and you try to let go, but his own grip becomes very tight as his nails dig into your flesh. + +“I told you, you couldn’t win.” + +In Ulivik’s body, the wendigo is much quicker than you and manages to knock your sword out of your hand and then knock you to the ground. You scramble for your weapon, but you feel a kick to your head followed by a couple of stomps to it. Bloody and dazed, you lose consciousness before you are made into the wendigo’s long awaited meal.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 65 + +You get a knock on the door to which causes you to wonder who would be bothering you at this time of night. You’re more than a little annoyed since you were sleeping. + +“Go away, I ain’t getting up.” you say from your chair trying to go back to sleep. +“Open the fuck up, you useless old man!” you hear from outside and it’s enough to motivate you to answer it and punch out the fool who said it. When you open it however, an unexpected visitor meets you. + +“Ulivik?” +“Yeah, it’s me! Well, aren’t you going to invite me in?” he laughs. +“Yeah sure.” You say and the both of you head to your quarters to sit and talk. You still shaking the cobwebs after being awaken from your slumber. + +“Were you asleep?” +“Yeah, what of it?” +“Nothing! Just sort of surprised, I mean I know it’s night, but its still pretty early.” +“Eh, it’s been kind of a lazy day today, felt like sleeping for most of it.” +“You didn’t teach a class today?” +“Class? School’s been officially closed for about two years now. I mean I get few people that seek me out looking to increase their skills every once in awhile, but nowadays everyone goes to that new military academy they opened up here.” +“Oh, I was wondering what that big new building looming near the edge of town was, so they didn’t offer you a job there?” +“Eh, they did, but I didn’t want it. People who I originally trained run it and most of them I didn’t even like when I was teaching them, so I’d rather not have to follow whatever silly guidelines they’ve come up with for that place. Anyway, I sometimes get paid to give speeches on tactics and strategies there. I get by. So where have you been and what brings you back?” + +Ulivik mentions he mainly returned to when he heard his father had died and that he’s probably going to be around for a while to look after his mother. He then excitedly goes on about his various adventures of exploring ruins, caves and finding treasures and lost trinkets. Not enough to get rich, but he’s not in it for that. You enjoy hearing about it all, it’s not like you really go anywhere or do as much anymore. And as the years go on, you are finding yourself with less and less to do. You sort of thought your school and teaching would occupy your time and that if you got bored of that you could always break it up with a little mercenary work. But both of those options are pretty much closed off to you at this point, at least in Rask. The place is less wild and more peaceful now than it ever was under the Empire. + +You could move you suppose, but it’s not such a bad life maybe you should just settle in and enjoy your elderly years in relative peace… + +“..and so then I got my head split open and my entrails eaten by the clawbeast and died. Hey! Are you still with me?” Ulivik asks. +“Huh? Yeah you got your entrails eaten and died.” You answer. +“Well glad to see you’re still listening.” Ulivik laughs. +“Sorry, just a little preoccupied. Anyway, go on.” + +Ulivik knows something’s up with you, and he’s got a pretty good idea what it is. + +“Hey, have you ever thought about leaving Rask and joining your old buddies in the Eternal Dominion?” he asks. +“Wha…oh I don’t think that’s for me. Besides I only have two there, dunno if one of them is even still alive and I never really was exactly friends with Edgar. Speaking of which did you have much trouble traveling through the ED? I heard they aren’t too fond of svelk there ever since most of your people have been hiring themselves out to the Felkans.” +Well as you once pointed out, we’re not really liked anywhere we go, but I never really kept to the populated areas while in the ED so I didn’t have too many problems. However, I did find that dropping your name helped me a few times. You’re sort of known there.” +“Huh. Dunno, why I would be, not like I was ever part of the place. Guess Edgar really did look up to me. Unexpected.” +“Didn’t he offer you a job too one time?” +“Yeah. Don’t think it’s still available though. Like I said, my time serving big governments is over with. I wasted more than thirty years of my life doing it. Not going to waste the remaining years I have left even if it’s a high position of power. Besides, I’m still not sure that I wouldn’t have to kill Edgar if I ever got into an argument with him over something.” +“Surely it would be more interesting than sleeping all day.” +“Hah, probably. I dunno, I just feel like Edgar’s Eternal Dominion is just mimicking a lot of the old Empire. Sure it’s doing well now, but ultimately it’s going to fall just like the Empire did, so what’s the point?” +“Hmm, well you could offer your services to the Felkan Kingdom, I think they could use the help.” +“Yeah, no. I’m not into lost causes. Did that before too and saw the results. The Felkan Kingdom could’ve won the war if they didn’t fight so defensively. There were many times early in the war where they should’ve pressed an attack and took territory. Their fate is probably sealed at this point. Only a matter of time, assuming the ED keeps with it’s policy of total conquest, and doesn’t fuck it up. Anyway don’t get me started on how I nearly got dragged into serving on both sides of that conflict.” + +“Okay, but how about another proposal?” +“I’ll bite. What is it?” +“Well, as you know I’m going to be here awhile looking after my mother, but I need something to do. Rask still has areas of it that are largely unexplored. I sort wondered if you’d like to come with me on an adventure in this very area.” +“Oh? And where would this place be? Most of the places you’re speaking of involve mountains, and as bored as I am, I’m not about to go dragging my ass up a fucking mountain.” +“Ha ha, nah not the mountains, though it still might involve a little bit of climbing.” +“Okay, so where?” +“The Wendigo Hills.” + +Now there’s name that’s spoken of in only whispers nowadays in Rask. Everyone knows about it and doesn’t speak about it, let alone go near it, from humans to ogres and even the few giants still left. Ever since you wiped them out forty five years ago, there have been little problems from those evil spirits. Years later after you first left Rask you heard the various villages got their holy men together to perform some sort of ritual to make sure none of the spirits managed to ever escape from those cursed hills ever again. Of course every once in a blue moon some unfortunate idiot…usually an adventurer gets himself possessed and no expense is spared in hunting down the creature and destroying it. + +Now it looks like Ulivik is intent on being that new unfortunate idiot. + +“Have you lost your fucking mind, because if you haven’t, then you will if you go there and that’s if you’re lucky. I went to that blasted place once, I had a company of soldiers with me and I was in my prime. I barely got out of that place alive and you know what happened to the few soldiers that survived with me? Four of them ultimately committed suicide from their nightmares and the other two got discharged and thrown in the asylum for just going batshit insane. No, I’m not going and if you got any sense, you won’t either. That place does shit your mind. The spirits there are pure evil, and they are not to be trifled with.” +"No, I have a remedy for that! Look at these!" Ulivik says and produces two amulets with a faint blue glow. + +"Let me guess, these things are magical and they're supposed to protect us from getting possessed." +"Correct! Even when I was little, I heard there was supposed to be great treasure in those hills. Nobody has ever had the skill to go in there and claim it, but I want to be the first because I truly feel like I'm ready now. You're the about the one who has traveled the most in those hills and survived. You would be a great help and we can even share whatever we find! Come on, it'll be like old times!" + +"Old" being the key word here. While you were wondering if you were becoming more complacent in your old age, you aren't sure if going to the Wendigo Hills is something you want to do just to prove "you still got it." +> Stay home +Complacent or not, you’re really thinking that this is just a bad idea all the way round. + +“Ulivik, I’m telling you, this isn’t a good idea. I’m not about to place your faith in some amulet that may or may not work and you shouldn’t either. I know you’re an adventurer and all, but some places are just better left alone.” +“Oh come on! The man I knew wouldn’t have backed down from a challenge like this!” +“The man you knew was twenty years younger, and I still had a purpose for my wandering. I was a merc, remember? Look, if the fact that I won’t go traipsing around in wendigo territory looking for ruins that might not even be there and wearing an amulet hoping it’ll protect me disappoints you, well I guess I’m just going to have to disappoint you.” + +Ulivik does indeed look disappointed, but he doesn’t argue the point anymore. Instead he just abruptly gathers his belongings and starts to leave. + +“Ulivik, I really wish you’d heed my advice on this. Think about it, have I ever lead you wrong?” + +He stops for a moment, and thinks, but continues his exit. + +“No, maybe you haven’t, but just as you have picked your path to become an old man who is content on resting on his laurels now. I still feel the zest for excitement and danger, and I am compelled to do what I must. It’s just a shame we couldn’t have shared in it together just one more time.” Ulivik says and leaves. + +Once again you are left by yourself to reflect on your life and Ulivik’s words. He might have his own point about resting on your “laurels” but what the hell, it’s not like you haven’t deserved it. You could go back and forth on such things, but honestly you’re a little more concerned about Ulivik and what he’s potentially going to get himself into. Still, he’s an adult and capable of making his own decisions. + +Days pass and you don’t hear anything from Ulivik. True he was a little mad at you, but you’re pretty sure he’d come back to see you before he left. You begin to fear the worst. You end up going to his mother’s house to see if he’s been there or shown up, but she says she hasn’t seen him. She’s worried as well, though she’s understandably more upset about it. + +Your next move is to go to the militia and make a report, you don’t expect anything to be done, but you figure that the “risk” of a possible wendigo possession is more than enough to keep all the towns alert about it. You are nearly tempted to go looking for him in wendigo territory yourself, but you decide that it would only serve in getting you killed as well, and there’s no way you’d even be able to track him. + +Weeks pass into months and there is still no sign of Ulivik. No wendigo attacks either, so you can only assume that he wasn’t possessed, just killed and eaten. Many times you go back and forth in your head wondering if you’d just gone with him that maybe he’d still be alive…or maybe there would be two dead instead of one. Can’t second-guess your decisions, you learned that a long time ago, but still you feel saddened by Ulivik’s passing. He had a lot of potential and in some odd way he almost felt like a son to you. + +Life goes on though, but it feels a little emptier. + +Year 73 + +The rest of your years have been spent mostly going about your life with increasingly less and less for you to do. There are some changes in society, but ultimately you begin to feel the decline of your own will to live. You never thought you’d feel that way, but there it is. You just don’t have anything else to keep you motivated anymore. + +The thrill of living finally disappears from you entirely and you are found dead by your own hand. While you were not sick and still in relatively good health for a man your age, you decided that you would end it before you might not be in such a condition to do so. A note explaining your suicide is left nearby and the town gives you a proper cremation. Some of your old students turn out for it and say a few words, but in time you are soon forgotten and only brought up as the subject of “tall tales” by drunkards in Rask taverns every once in a blue moon.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 55 + +After another hard day of training various citizens of Rask, you lie in your bed thinking about how much has changed over the years. Never did you think that you’d be running a real business, though to be honest if it wasn’t for legitimate paranoia on the part of the Rask Alliance, you’d probably be spending all of your time still as a merc, as it stands you’re practically responsible for training the closest thing to an army that Rask has, though it’s probably more of an organized militia. + +It’ll be the first line of defense if the Eternal Dominion starts to look to this way for expansion. When the ED started re-conquering the old territory of the Empire it was only natural that the towns and villages of Rask started getting worried. They didn’t break away from the Empire only to replace it with something similar or worse. It was just their luck (and yours) that you wanted to become a professional combat instructor. Soon people from all over Rask were coming to see you. You hardly ever have to do any sort of mercenary work anymore and the mayor of Keplavisk is overjoyed by the fact that you set up shop in his town. + +As for the Eternal Dominion threat, you aren’t sure what to think. There has been no formal declaration of war or even a diplomatic visit to Rask yet, but that doesn’t mean there won’t be, Rask has lots of resources after all. Still, the ED has its hands full still trying to keep everyone in line from the top to the bottom while attempting to gain more holdings. Mass orc migration to Rask are becoming common, even the svelk are more welcome in Rask again. Partly due to the possible need for more mercs if war comes to pass and partly due to dark elves being disliked by the ED, which apparently frowns upon mercenaries (and probably the attitudes of the dark elves in general). + +You have to hand it to “General” Edgar though, you didn’t think he’d be able to get those chaotic brats calling themselves “eternals” organized, though it sounds like they’re still as sadistic as ever and if the rumors are true, another generation of Eternals are being trained as well. You can’t even imagine what they’re going to be like. If war is coming like everyone thinks it is, you know immediately that you’re probably going to be nominated and begged by the various mayors and council members to be some sort of commander. You aren’t sure if you’d accept the position though you probably will mainly because you don’t want to be bothered moving anymore and you’ll be damned if you’ll live under the rule of some half assed Eternals. + +Part of you wonders what the hell is going through Edgar’s mind. He seemed more level headed the last time you saw him, like the incident with Kane forced him to mature, but you guess his aspirations for personal glory were just too great to keep suppressed for long. You also wonder about Brenda, she’s the only other old Eternal that was left, and you have no idea if she’s even still alive or serving with Edgar. You get your answer and then some in a few days. + +Another hard day of training various citizens of Rask and you’re ready to close up shop and then two figures wearing hoods enter. You have flashbacks to fighting the Shadow Guard and you draw your sword. + +“Hold on! It’s me! Warrick! See?” a familiar voice says and reveals himself from under the hood. The face is much older than you remember and sporting an eye patch, and the hair is now nearly gone. But considering you thought Warrick to be dead, you aren’t completely convinced until the second cloaked figure reveals herself and speaks. + +“I told you wearing these things was a bad idea. He probably thought we were Shadow Guards!” she says. Her face is also much older and the hair is completely gray, but you definitely know this one is Brenda. Between the pair of them it truly makes you realize how much time has passed since you saw them. +“And I told you, we need to keep a low profile, this situation is dangerous to the both of us.” Warrick says. + +“Warrick back from the dead and Brenda, I was just recently thinking about what had become of you.” +“We need to talk to you about Edgar.” Warrick says cutting right to the point. +“Yeah I thought so…okay let me lock up and we can talk about this in my quarters.” + +The first thing you find out is that Warrick is now working for the Felkan Kingdom. He says it’s a long story, but it has its roots in his becoming disillusioned with the Empire much like you did. Warrick also goes on to say that’s one of the reasons why he’s here. Edgar definitely has plans to attack it in the future and the crown hopes to avoid another long and troublesome war by recruiting allies this time. He mentions real Felkan diplomats will probably be arriving in Rask soon to speak with the leaders of the towns, but he was sent to specifically reach out to you, because whether you knew it or not, your reputation here carries weight. + +As for Brenda, her position is much more dangerous. She is currently serving the Eternal Dominion, (another long story) but is trying to encourage an underground dissident movement. Not really difficult considering how oppressive Edgar’s regime is. It is the hope of the Felkan Kingdom that the ED will wear itself out on keeping down riots and other potential conquests like Rask before it turns its eyes on the Felkan Kingdom. + +You tell Warrick that he’s probably wasted a trip as the paranoid mentality of the Raskians are already preparing for war with the ED and will have no problem allying with the Felkan Kingdom and that you’ll no doubt be called upon to command the people you’ve been training. Warrick seems relived to hear that, and you and he begin to do a little catching up. Brenda participates as well, though the whole time she seems a little preoccupied. Eventually as the night goes on, Warrick says he must be getting back to report to his superiors. Brenda says that she is not ready to leave as she wishes to speak to you about Roldan and his last days with you. Warrick understands, but warns her that she should not be away for too long so as to arouse suspicion. He would hate to have her sacrifices should lead to her death. + +“Sacrifices…as if he would know about such things. When the Empire needed him the most what did he do? He ran to the fucking enemy. Now his new masters give him commands and the running lapdog thinks he’s free, but he’s still a slave.” She remarks with distain, before continuing. + +“Edgar may be an egomaniac with delusions of grandeur like he always was, but he at least tried to keep the Empire together, even if it is in a different form now. He believes in something better, even if he’s not exactly intelligent enough to carry out that idea. And you, you’re worst of them all. You just dropped out altogether and dedicating yourself to nothing, but coin like a fucking svelk. What the hell happened to you? You used be our leader.” +“I’m not exactly sure what your point is, but if this all pent up anger at me due to Roldan dying I…” +“Don’t you dare fucking mention him! I heard enough of hollow apologies in that damn letter you wrote to me.” +“They were Eternals as we all are. Dying in combat is always a possibility for us, I know their deaths weren’t the most glorious, but at the time they died doing something they believed in. I can hardly help that the institution that they believed in, crumbled soon afterwards. I tried like hell to maintain my own belief in the Empire despite having it time after time again tested. Eventually I saw the light when I had to command a bunch of those new eternals while attempting to put down mass riots near the capital. Was leaving the right decision? I don’t know, but it was for ME. The fact is ALL of our lives were nothing but duty and dedication to a corrupt government that deserved none of it. Kane knew that, Gruz knew that, and as much as I still hate them to this day, the Shadow Guard knew that. When the Empire was in its death throes it affected us all differently. I can’t help the fact that you decided to stay loyal and it didn’t work out resulting in you eventually having to capitulate to Edgar later on. At least you and Roldan had an experience that none of us will ever have. You have at least that to cherish.” + +Brenda is silent for a moment as she takes in your statement. She looks at a ring on her finger, which is obviously still her wedding ring to Roldan. She smiles and then speaks. + +“You’re right I suppose. You usually were when we all served under you. Even you couldn’t have prevented the Empire from falling, the damage was done long before we came into existence. I guess I just never got over Roldan’s death and had nobody except you to blame since you were the only one still alive. The funny thing is I didn’t start blaming you until I found out you left the Empire. You were always our leader, and it seemed unthinkable that you would leave willingly. You know I think none of us really saw anyone else as their leader except you. It’s probably why Kane wanted you to join him, it’s no doubt why Warrick insisted on reaching out to you and it’s why Edgar sent me…” +“Excuse me?” +“One of the things you were wrong about and Warrick too. I am not helping him though he still thinks I am. There is no underground resistance, or at least none that matters. Warrick and his Felkan masters think they can undermine the Eternal Dominion, but they are quite wrong. When Edgar first came to me and explained his cause and ideas I realized it was a just and worthy one. I joined in an effort to help with some of the details that Edgar himself is not nearly as skilled at, still he has proven himself to be more charismatic than he once was, at least to the other eternals and that’s who is mainly important. He wants to create a nation where we Eternals are in control, as it should’ve been.” +“…so why would he want me for, wouldn’t he consider me an enemy like Warrick?” +“No, not like Warrick. While your abandonment did sadden Edgar, he always figured you had a good reason. He never questioned it. And now that you’ve told me your views I see he was right. It’s really quite odd to see how high of regard he holds you. I guess your time with him during Kane’s attempted secession really impacted him.” + +“Brenda, this is a lot to take in, what exactly are you expecting from me then?” +“As Warrick said, your reputation carries weight here and you have the ear of several of the mayors here. Perhaps you could explain to them that even with training that resistance will be useless and that the ED will just slaughter everyone. Better that they should surrender now and have a benevolent overseer such as…you running things.” +“And you really think Raskians are going to go for that idea?” +“What does it matter? They are going to be conquered eventually anyway. I merely suggest other options to Edgar’s plan, which was to convince you to just come with me where you could take command of a battalion to conquer Rask seeing as you know the place the best.” +“Heh, sounds like him. So what was the plan if I refuse altogether? Killing me I suppose?” +“Didn’t come up though I even asked him about it, but as I said Edgar really believes that you’ll help us. Perhaps in some way he didn’t want to think about the alternative. I’m guessing that you are considering the alternative?” +“Don’t see why I shouldn’t, do you?” +“You would have a true purpose again. Serving an idea greater than yourself.” +“I have a true purpose now. I’m training others to fight against those that would take their lives. The Raskians don’t want to be ruled over and quite frankly neither do I, let alone by Edgar.” +“No! You would be different! You, like myself would be given an equal place in the decision making process! Even the other Eternal don’t get that.” +“Yeah, that’s the other thing, I’m loathed to live in a land that considers those new…things, eternals.” +“They are much different now, true they still have their sadistic streak, but only towards the non-eternals and who cares about them?” +“I’m sure the non-eternals do, and while they may very well be inferior, enough of them can topple any government. We saw it happen, and it’ll happen to you too if you aren’t careful.” +“So are you saying you won’t join us?” + +You get the impression that if you say no, she’s going to attack you and you’ll have to defend yourself. Killing Brenda is something you do not want to do, but lying and saying yes is duplicity you’d rather not engage in. +> Lie and say yes +This is probably going to bite you in the ass later, but you just can’t bring yourself to kill Brenda…at least not this day. It may very well come in the future though. + +“Alright Brenda, I’ll help you, but I’m staying here in Rask. Forgive me, if I’m not quite trusting enough to go walking into ED territory just yet.” +“Well I guess I can understand your caution, but what are you going to do up here to help us?” +“I’ll do what you said I’ll try to convince people that they should submit to the ED, it will most likely still require a lot of bloodshed and it this goal isn’t going to be an immediate one. However, I’m confident that I can do this, I have enough supporters to raise an a big enough army to get me started. I know this territory the best so any wannabe freedom fighters hoping to escape into the wilderness to wage a guerilla war won’t be a problem either. When I think the time is right, I’ll contact the ED to step in to mop up and to reinforce order, but I really think your armies would be better spent on hitting the Felkan Kingdom and hard. If they’re putting out feelers for alliances with Rask, then they’re probably desperate. You tell Edgar I’ve personally suggested this, he’ll listen. He should, after all I’ve never given him bad advice before.” + +That last part is very difficult for you to say, knowing that you’re blatantly lying. The worst part is Brenda doesn’t even question you. She too believes that you’re being completely genuine and requires no further “proof” that you’re actually going to do what you say other than your word and your impeccable past reputation. + +She leaves a little happier than when she arrived. You on the other hand are a little sadder. At best The Edgar will follow your advice and the Felkan Kingdom will do enough damage to the Eternal Dominion that they won’t be in any condition to attack Rask. It may even collapse. Not exactly great for Edgar or Brenda, but at least you wouldn’t need to fight against them. + +At worst…well you’d rather not have to think about that, but you’ve always prepared for the worst. The next day you suggest to the mayor of Keplavisk that Rask seriously invest in thinking about building a proper military academy, possibly even a professional army. + +In the following months several meetings with the heads of the Rask towns occur. You give your opinion on the Eternal Dominion situation, but you leave out the whole meeting with Brenda and Warrick of course. Eventually the politicians agree that more protection might be necessary and steps to ensure it are taken. Since you brought all this to their attention, you are nominated to run the military academy. + +Year 58 + +Edgar took your advice…at least initially. He sent thousands across the Felkan borders a couple years ago. The war with the Felkan Kingdom is currently at a stalemate, but you hear it’s even more brutal than the one with the Empire. Edgar has adapted with the times unlike the Empire and has implementied stolen technology from the Felkans. You can only imagine how Warrick has fared, but you got your own problems due to your lying, though maybe it was inevitable, who can say? + +When it became apparent that you weren’t actually doing anything to help bring Rask under the Eternal Dominion banner, Edgar correctly came to the conclusion that you lied. Sensing that Rask may even be gearing up for their own invasion, Edgar risks a two front war and strikes out at Rask. + +While the Eternal Dominion is certainly short of man power due to their war with the Felkan Kingdom, they make up for it with ruthless fanaticism and of course the fact that they’re using updated technology as well. Their first major push is at Kenneth’s Rest. The old fort stands strong for a day before it is taken. Everyone that wasn’t killed during the battle or escaped was executed upon capture. This happens with a couple of the smaller villages before the Raskian army manages to stop the advance. From the butchery that the ED troops have been displaying it’s obvious that they aren’t taking prisoners. + +On the Raskian side, patriotism goes up and they have no intention on surrendering if that was even indeed an option. Mercenaries, who were previously beginning to leave due to the lack of jobs for them suddenly become in the market again. They are used mainly for harassment purposes such as destroying supply lines. Flog has turned out to be quite the asset. He sees the Eternal Dominion to be nothing more than the Empire under a new name (And he really hated the Empire) and has managed to unite some of the more “civilized” ogre tribes to help destroy the inheritors of the Empire legacy. Eldolith still runs her small svelk band and charges the highest price as usual for her services. Ulivik even has a small group of humans following him now. They mostly consist of survivors who managed to escape death at the hands of the ED attacks on their homes and in it for revenge not the money, in fact neither is Ulivik anymore. Ever since the invasion he gave up his mercenary life in exchange for that of a patriot fighting for his family and home. You’re glad to see he has become a competent warrior. + +Due to your warning of this threat years before, your position at the academy and all your years of combat experience you are made into a full blown general and practically given extensive powers over all military functions. A very powerful position, in fact it’s rather ironic. You didn’t ask or even want to “rule” over Rask, but your current arrangement practically makes you a potential dictator. Even more so due to the fact that you’re an Eternal, a representation of a past oppressor and a current aggressor towards Rask. + +While the politicians have given you this role, not all Raskians are happy with this idea, but as long as you’re fighting the Eternal Dominion no disgruntled Raskian has tried to assassinate you yet. While you miss being able to personally lead troops into battle, you still try to be as close to the action as you can, by traveling with the army rather than staying in an office somewhere. + +The war with the ED has already taken quite a toll on Rask, and it doesn’t look lik it’s going to end anytime soon. The best you can do is dig in and make sure you make the ED pay for every inch they step deeper into Rask territory. +> Years pass... +Year 65 + +As you settle down for the night, you think about how you got in this position. + +As the war started to drag on, the tactics changed from one of conquest to one of annihilation. The ED began outright destroying any village and town they managed to capture. They sent in suicidal fanatics to blow themselves up or blow up mines and other areas of production. They managed to poison the water supply of one towns, but the worst was their intentional sacrifices in the Wendigo Hills. The ED dragged over a hundred of their own citizens into the Wendigo Hills, which had been off limits to any right thinking being ever since you went into that cursed territory. The wendigos had been confined there for decades with no sentient hosts to possess and allow their escape, but that all changed when presented with the new ones the ED provided. The wendigos of course immediately ran amok with their new bodies and became a problem for everyone. + +In the meantime the ED attempted one last push on Keplavisk. It was a bloodbath on both sides and the cost was high, but ultimately it never fell, and it was that the last major battle with the ED. Hostilities with the Eternal Dominion aren’t over, but they have stopped mostly due to their own internal problems. As powerful as they were, they couldn’t keep up a two front war with two foes that had no intention on rolling over. It was only a matter of time before attrition took its toll on the ED and fortunately the arrogance of the younger eternals caused them to finally question Edgar’s abilities to lead properly. Wasn’t long before they started squabbling amongst themselves. + +Of course the damage they did to Rask left a permanent mark. + +You were initially hailed as a hero by most and the rebuilding process begun, but Rask was in terrible condition. Towns and villages that hadn’t been completely destroyed were still wrecked to a degree that would take months or even a year to recover. This wouldn’t be so bad, if they weren’t also under protected due to a shortage of soldiers from the war. Wendigos, bandits, other monsters and even rogue eternals from the ED are such a problem that it makes the rebuilding process even longer and you conclude that spreading the soldiers too thin will ultimately hurt you in the long run. + +You argue with the remaining politicians that what needs to be done is to cluster and re-group. Keplavisk is still the most intact and has always been the “capital” of Rask of sorts and it’s the biggest town to the point that’s its practically a city. You say that the remaining Raskian population should move to Keplavisk where the focus can be directed into rebuilding it and protection can be easier. + +This isn’t a popular decision. Some Raskians don’t understand why you can’t just station more troops at their respective towns, but the fact remains you won’t have enough to defend Keplavisk, if you stretch them out any more and quite frankly Keplavisk is the most important city if Rask has any hope of not descending into anarchic wilderness again. Some citizens of Keplavisk don’t especially like the idea of “immigrants” moving into their city, but the major accusation is that since the mayor of Keplavisk was killed (along with most of his immediate staff) in the last battle with the ED, you’re about the closest thing to a leader. As such, some of the pessimists who claimed you would become a dictator with the powers that were given you at the start of the war are sort of becoming true. + +So you ultimately play the role that was given you. + +The first thing you do is call back all soldiers to Keplavisk and urge all other Raskians to do likewise. You say nobody has to come and you won’t force anybody, but as of now, you’re focusing only on Keplavisk and defense will be solely on the shoulders of the towns themselves. + +Fortunately as a successful military leader, you’re popular with the soldiers, so most of them return. Some originally lived in Keplavisk, some had no home any more, and some sensed a better life so they brought their families with them. With absolutely no more protection anymore, this has the bonus effect of bringing in non-military Raskians to Keplavisk as well though a lot aren’t exactly happy about it. + +The citizens that stubbornly stayed to rebuild their own homes didn’t last too long. By the end of the year only a few of the villages far north (that were mostly spared the ravages of war anyway) exist as other beacons of civilization. + +Kaplavisk on the other hand is transformed from a town half in ruins to a well defended prosperous city state by the end of that same year. No longer is town hall the “center of government”, but rather the military academy, which also serves as your new home. Defenses are as best as you can get them, sturdy walls, cannons, implementation of firearms and when you can draft them, people with minor magic powers to upkeep wards to prevent wendigos from sneaking into the city. + +True there are still the occasional protests about how there is much less “freedom” now, but it never really gets out of hand. Well at least not yet. The major rabble-rouser unfortunately is Ulivik of all people. His years as a “freedom fighter” against the Eternal Dominion have changed a bit of his outlook on life, namely he sees that Rask won the war just only to be conquered by an Eternal anyway. + +You tried to speak to him personally about this, but he seems firm in his beliefs. He states that when you trained him to be a mercenary even though you were tough, he still respected you. When you fought against the ED he mentions that his original worship of you almost returned as nobody did more to prevent them from taking over than you did. + +But now that you’ve allowed people to die without protection just because they wouldn’t do what you say and turned his home into a police state he cannot just stand by and do nothing. He says he doesn’t want to fight you for a couple reasons, but if it comes down to it, he will. + +He’s put you in a difficult position, which normally wouldn’t be very difficult if he were anyone else. You have a slight soft spot for Ulivik, but that soft spot only goes so far. You’ve got to deal with him some how because if you let him continue he’ll gain more followers, despite his svelk origins. Capitulating to him isn’t an option either, you start giving in now, you’ll have to give in later, maybe not even to him, but others with similar ideas and you can’t afford to start loosening up the reins. At least not anytime soon. + +You need to come up with an idea before you can get some sleep tonight. +> Execution +It is with a heavy heart and regret that this has to be done, but the only way you’re going make this problem go away is by making an example out of him. While it’s possible he’ll become a martyr, his “cause” is still manageable for your soldiers if a riot breaks out. After he’s dead, it’s unlikely anyone else will take up the mantle and those that might’ve been on the fence will fall in line. Besides he’s a svelk, who is going to shed many tears over him? + +Having made this decision you finally get some sleep, though not very restful sleep. + +The next day you order for Ulivik’s arrest along with his main followers. This doesn’t go over well. Ulivik refuses to be taken into custody and puts up a fight. A very good fight that involves him escaping completely and several soldiers dead. + +You order a full manhunt for Ulivik, but he proves quite elusive. In the meantime you execute his followers, but this is when other citizens start expressing a dislike for how you’re handling things. The major advantage you have is the military, but as you crack down harder, the soldiers become slightly overworked. Some of them even have their own disagreement with how you’re doing things. + +Before you know it you’ve got small riots in the streets and Ulivik keeps popping up every now and then just to stir the chaos even more. Before you know it, work places like woodmills and mines have to shut down due to you having to keep more troops inside the city rather on the outside to protect the workers. It’s all falling apart. + +You put down riots, execute more people, but ultimately it all come to a head one late night in your own room. + +You wake up and grab your weapon to see Ulivik lurking in the shadows. He’s obviously snuck in, and most likely killed any guards nearby. Doesn’t matter, you’ll either kill him or he’ll kill you before anyone arrives. + +“I figured it would come to this.” You say and prepare for battle. + +The two of you clash and you give him a good fight, but his youth, speed and dedication to his cause are an advantage, while you are old, slower and at this point you don’t even care anymore. + +He eventually slashes you across the chest and runs you through. You fall to the floor feeling the life drain from you. + +“Ugh…shit that really hurts (cough).” You say coughing up blood. +“Why didn’t you just give the people more freedom?” Ulivik asksin a demanding tone. The strange thing is, in retrospect you don’t have a really good answer except… + +“I…guess the old Eternal ways of (cough) domination and war just got the better of me…heh knew there was a reason why I originally didn’t try to become a tyrant all those years ago. It never ends well…” +“It didn’t have to be this way!” Ulivik now exclaims almost as if he’s holding back tears. +“Maybe…but now’s your chance to make it better. Hope you’re prepared for it…I was getting tired of it anyway…” you say and pass from this world.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 65 + +As you settle down for the night, you think about how you got in this position. + +As the war started to drag on, the tactics changed from one of conquest to one of annihilation. The ED began outright destroying any village and town they managed to capture. They sent in suicidal fanatics to blow themselves up or blow up mines and other areas of production. They managed to poison the water supply of one towns, but the worst was their intentional sacrifices in the Wendigo Hills. The ED dragged over a hundred of their own citizens into the Wendigo Hills, which had been off limits to any right thinking being ever since you went into that cursed territory. The wendigos had been confined there for decades with no sentient hosts to possess and allow their escape, but that all changed when presented with the new ones the ED provided. The wendigos of course immediately ran amok with their new bodies and became a problem for everyone. + +In the meantime the ED attempted one last push on Keplavisk. It was a bloodbath on both sides and the cost was high, but ultimately it never fell, and it was that the last major battle with the ED. Hostilities with the Eternal Dominion aren’t over, but they have stopped mostly due to their own internal problems. As powerful as they were, they couldn’t keep up a two front war with two foes that had no intention on rolling over. It was only a matter of time before attrition took its toll on the ED and fortunately the arrogance of the younger eternals caused them to finally question Edgar’s abilities to lead properly. Wasn’t long before they started squabbling amongst themselves. + +Of course the damage they did to Rask left a permanent mark. + +You were initially hailed as a hero by most and the rebuilding process begun, but Rask was in terrible condition. Towns and villages that hadn’t been completely destroyed were still wrecked to a degree that would take months or even a year to recover. This wouldn’t be so bad, if they weren’t also under protected due to a shortage of soldiers from the war. Wendigos, bandits, other monsters and even rogue eternals from the ED are such a problem that it makes the rebuilding process even longer and you conclude that spreading the soldiers too thin will ultimately hurt you in the long run. + +You argue with the remaining politicians that what needs to be done is to cluster and re-group. Keplavisk is still the most intact and has always been the “capital” of Rask of sorts and it’s the biggest town to the point that’s its practically a city. You say that the remaining Raskian population should move to Keplavisk where the focus can be directed into rebuilding it and protection can be easier. + +This isn’t a popular decision. Some Raskians don’t understand why you can’t just station more troops at their respective towns, but the fact remains you won’t have enough to defend Keplavisk, if you stretch them out any more and quite frankly Keplavisk is the most important city if Rask has any hope of not descending into anarchic wilderness again. Some citizens of Keplavisk don’t especially like the idea of “immigrants” moving into their city, but the major accusation is that since the mayor of Keplavisk was killed (along with most of his immediate staff) in the last battle with the ED, you’re about the closest thing to a leader. As such, some of the pessimists who claimed you would become a dictator with the powers that were given you at the start of the war are sort of becoming true. + +So you ultimately play the role that was given you. + +The first thing you do is call back all soldiers to Keplavisk and urge all other Raskians to do likewise. You say nobody has to come and you won’t force anybody, but as of now, you’re focusing only on Keplavisk and defense will be solely on the shoulders of the towns themselves. + +Fortunately as a successful military leader, you’re popular with the soldiers, so most of them return. Some originally lived in Keplavisk, some had no home any more, and some sensed a better life so they brought their families with them. With absolutely no more protection anymore, this has the bonus effect of bringing in non-military Raskians to Keplavisk as well though a lot aren’t exactly happy about it. + +The citizens that stubbornly stayed to rebuild their own homes didn’t last too long. By the end of the year only a few of the villages far north (that were mostly spared the ravages of war anyway) exist as other beacons of civilization. + +Kaplavisk on the other hand is transformed from a town half in ruins to a well defended prosperous city state by the end of that same year. No longer is town hall the “center of government”, but rather the military academy, which also serves as your new home. Defenses are as best as you can get them, sturdy walls, cannons, implementation of firearms and when you can draft them, people with minor magic powers to upkeep wards to prevent wendigos from sneaking into the city. + +True there are still the occasional protests about how there is much less “freedom” now, but it never really gets out of hand. Well at least not yet. The major rabble-rouser unfortunately is Ulivik of all people. His years as a “freedom fighter” against the Eternal Dominion have changed a bit of his outlook on life, namely he sees that Rask won the war just only to be conquered by an Eternal anyway. + +You tried to speak to him personally about this, but he seems firm in his beliefs. He states that when you trained him to be a mercenary even though you were tough, he still respected you. When you fought against the ED he mentions that his original worship of you almost returned as nobody did more to prevent them from taking over than you did. + +But now that you’ve allowed people to die without protection just because they wouldn’t do what you say and turned his home into a police state he cannot just stand by and do nothing. He says he doesn’t want to fight you for a couple reasons, but if it comes down to it, he will. + +He’s put you in a difficult position, which normally wouldn’t be very difficult if he were anyone else. You have a slight soft spot for Ulivik, but that soft spot only goes so far. You’ve got to deal with him some how because if you let him continue he’ll gain more followers, despite his svelk origins. Capitulating to him isn’t an option either, you start giving in now, you’ll have to give in later, maybe not even to him, but others with similar ideas and you can’t afford to start loosening up the reins. At least not anytime soon. + +You need to come up with an idea before you can get some sleep tonight. +> Exile +You don’t think you could bring yourself to kill Ulivik directly or indirectly, besides it’s not likely to help anything. He’d most likely become a martyr and you’d never be done fighting future uprisings in his name. + +You then come up with an idea: Exile. If people are really unhappy here they can get the hell out and they can take their chances making it on their own. It has the potential to cause an exodus, but you doubt if it will. Not many with families will be willing to leave and it’s still less harsh than execution. You are giving people a chance to live after all, it’s up to them if they can survive in Rask without the benefit of protection or survive long enough for them to leave it entirely. + +Not killing dissidents, it’s a radical idea in it’s own right, but you’re going to gamble on it. + +Having made this decision you finally get some sleep, though not exactly restful sleep. + +The next day when Ulivik is protesting with his little group in front of the academy you and several soldiers march up to him. + +“Okay Ulivik, this ends today.” You say. +“And so it begins, I was wondering when you’d finally let loose and start threatening people for speaking out against you. That’s what you used to do back in your Empire days isn’t it? Well we aren’t going quietly to be executed, as I said, if you want a fight, I’m more than willin to give it to you right here and now!” +“I’m not executing you Ulivik.” +“Well we’re not going to rot in your jails either.” +“Will you shut the fuck up? I’ve heard your complaints outside my window for the past several months, the least you can do is listen to me for a change.” +“Very well, but this better be good.” +“Don’t presume to tell me what is good, because this isn’t a compromise. I’m going to say this once and once only and this is going out to all of you. Any more dissension or acts of stirring up shit for no reason, and you’re gone. And what I mean by gone, I mean exile. And not just you, I’m talking ALL your family, all your friends and even your fucking pets. All of you that don’t like how things are being run in this city, well you can get the fuck out. Let’s see you do better out there. Lots of luck…” + +Ulivik is a little surprised by your tactic, but it doesn’t deter him and he gets in your face. You keep your soldiers back. + +“You can’t just throw people out of the city! These people have a right, we ALL have a right to live here and voice our concerns when the government is failing to provide a suitable quality of life!” Ulivik exclaims. +“Failing? What the hell are you talking about? We’re protecting everyone from bandits, monsters, eternal dominion hold outs and do I even need to mention the wendigos? Nobody starves, everyone has a job, and all people have to do is follow a few simple fucking rules. I’m not demanding people bring me their virgin daughters! I’m not having people routinely tortured for not believing in some religion! Yeah there have been some sacrifices like food rationing and curfews, but I’ve been pretty damn fair about everything and YOU of all people should know that!” + +Ulivik stops for a moment and while it seems like he knows you have a point, he refuses to back down still. Perhaps you taught him too well. + +“So basically what you’re saying is we should just be grateful that you’re not Edgar…” + +And that’s the last straw, you lose your temper and proving you can still be quick for your age, you punch Ulivik in face. He staggers back and is disoriented enough for your soldiers to get a firm grip on him. He tries to twist free, but you have four soldiers lift him up grabbing one of his limbs each. + +“Let me go tyrant! Too cowardly to face me in battle? So much for your eternal bravery!” +“Lucky for you, since you weren’t even fast enough to dodge my punch, open the gates and throw his ass out. And if the rest of you want to join him, you can pack your shit and go too!” + +As you and the soldiers escort Ulivik out of the city, the rest of his followers lose their courage. Most of them have families and friends and aren’t willing to risk your wrath anymore. Other citizens look on at the spectacle and just stare in silent awe. The only one making any sort of noise is Ulivik who is cursing you and everyone else who isn’t helping him. You ignore his curses, and just simmer in anger at the situation. + +Eventually you reach the gates and with a mighty heave your soldiers throw Ulivik a few feet and face first into the snow. He scrambles to get up and upon turning around; your soldiers draw several muskets on him. + +“Goodbye, Ulivik, don’t come back or else I won’t be as merciful next time.” You say from the gate. + +“Merciful? You’re throwing me out of my own fucking home you bastard!” +“At least I’m not throwing your mother out as well, and at least you’re still alive.” +“Fuck you. I can’t believe I used to look up to you.” +“And I never told you to, you chose to do that! And you chose this path as well. I’m merely doing what I think is best, just like I did then. (sigh) I’m sorry it has to be this way, but you’ll survive Ulivik…I know I taught you that…close the gates.” + +As the gates close you see Ulivik just standing by himself looking very alone. It’s sort of sad. He started out as a disliked “outsider” due to his race in this town when he was growing up and now he has at last been banished from it for good. Not even one of his so called followers or even a bystander pleaded for him or even joined him by leaving. He did a lot for Rask during the war and he was speaking out for their “rights”, but that doesn’t seem to account for shit in the scheme of things to people. While it’s a fortunate situation, it still doesn’t seem right even if he was opposing you. + +Over the next few months you half expect Ulivik to be attacking soldiers outside the gates of the city and holding some sort of one man vendetta or possibly even gathering a small group of bandits robbing the miners or loggers and such, but that doesn’t happen. He’s gone, but you’re confident he’s not dead. You just hope he’s moved on to better things. + +As for you and everyone else life goes on. + +Year 75 + +With age catching up on you every day you sometimes wonder if it’s even worth getting out of bed anymore. You tire of the tedious act of governing, but you have no real successor to take your place. There are a couple of officers you have in mind, which could do a competent job you suppose, and that’s when you make a major decision. You decide to step down from power and hand this mess over to someone else. Since you know whoever you pick is going to have to be a strong leader and nip any potential coups in the bud, you pick the three most charismatic, intelligent and loyal that you can think of and call them into the training area in front of an audience of soldiers. + +You then announce that the three men will fight to the death and whoever is left standing gets to be in charge. The three officers look a little surprised and the audience is silent, but it doesn’t take long for one of the men to try to sneak attack on one of the others. + +The fight is a good one. As you watch you fight back to the days when you watched your classmates fight each other for Mistress. That was so long ago and as crazy as it seems you’ve actually been missing those days lately, everything much simpler at least. All of them are gone now. Last you heard of Edgar is that he was assassinated four years ago as the Eternal Dominion continued to fragment into petty fiefdoms ruled by equally petty eternal warlords. You don’t know about Warrick or Brenda, but you sometimes like to think they managed to escape the madness and are living satisfying lives. Barring that, you hope they died well in whatever battle that was their last. + +Eventually one man is left standing. Bruised, bloody and battered, but victorious. It is at this point you stand up and congratulate him and make another announcement to the crowd. + +“Captain Eddings has proved himself worthy of succeeding me. I trust you will serve this man as well as you have served me all these years. Congratulations Eckers, you’ve just been promoted to…uh general I guess.” +“Thank you sir, I will do everything in my power to ensure the safety and prosperity of the city.” Eddings remarks with pride. +“I’m sure you will, I’m sure you will, why don’t you head to the infirmary first though. As for me I’m going back to sleep. You can catch up with me later if you need some explanation on anything, but I left some notes on my desk for you as a general guideline.” You say and head back to your room. + +You know you’ll probably still be running things for a while at least and probably be consulted many times, but you still feel as if a weight has been lifted off you. The problem is, you wonder how you’ll spend your free time. You’ll think of something you suppose.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to humor the boy and agree. Chances are, he’s not going to get permission from his parents anyway and when that happens he’ll be less likely to bother you again. If he does get permission, well it’s not that far to Kenneth’s Rest and you were going there anyway. Plus you’ll have given him the chance he wants and again he’ll be less likely to bother you. + +“Alright Ulivik, you go ask your parents, but I’m taking you to Kenneth’s Rest and no further. And when we get there, you’re on your own, don’t think that you’re going to be tagging along with me anywhere else.” +“Okay! That’s great! I’ll be right be back…uh could you come with me, so they know I’m telling the truth?” +“Oh fer…fine.” + +You follow Ulivik back to his parent’s store which smells heavily of leather. The pair of them are working on some sort of the hide when you both walk in. + +“Mom! Dad! Mr. Bane said he’d take me to Kenneth’s Rest and teach me to be a mercenary! So can I go now?” +“Hey wait I never said I’d teach…” you start to say before Ulivik’s dad interjects his own comments. +“Oh is that right? And how do you know that? How do you know he won’t just rob and kill you along some lonely road?” +“Or worse!” his mother says. +“Hey wait a minute now…” +“But this isn’t fair! You said if I could find somebody to teach me, that you’d allow me to go!” Ulivik whines. +“Yeah, well we didn’t think you’d actually be successful, let alone get a cold hearted killer like Bane here to agree. Which makes me wonder why he did…” +“Trust me, at this point I’m wondering the same thing.” You reply. +“Ulivik, why can’t you just be interested in the family business? It’s a more honorable profession than being a mercenary. It’s honest work.” +“Yeah and the workin’ man is a sucker! Look at where we live!” +“Hey! We get by just fine, and this business has put food in your belly, clothes on your back and a roof over your head! So don’t you dare bad mouth this proud family tradition!” +“Yeah, well I’m not really your son anyway! And you’re not my real parents! I hate this place and every here hates me!” Ulivik screams and leaves slamming the door. + +You’re left in an awkward situation with his parents. + +“Okay, so I guess that settles that, I’ll just be going now…” you say. +“No, you get back here you sonofabitch.” Ulivik’s dad says. +“Excuse me?” +“I called you a sonofabitch, now if you want to kill me for that you can do it after hearing what I’ve got to say first.” +“Heh, okay. It’s been a weird sort of day today anyway, I’ll play.” You say with a smile. +“Yeah, well I ain’t playing. Look, I know all about you, and you probably don’t know me at all but I remember your ruthless reputation when you were still in service of the Empire. There was a family that lived down the block from me and my wife. We we’re friends and they even had a couple of children. Children that we would sometimes love to entertain because we couldn’t have any of our own. But this family wasn’t happy with the Empire’s rules so they along with several others protested…” + +You stop the tanner right there. + +“Yeah, yeah, I know what you’re going to say, I had them all killed for treason and had their heads put on pikes. Well I was trying to maintain order and I did what I had to do to get the job done. I’m sure this story pales in comparison to others have screamed at me in the past and you don’t even need to make your point about hating me, because I’m used to it anyway. Besides you don’t want your son going to Kenneth’s Rest and I’m certainly not going to drag him along. If anything I’d wish he’d stop looking up to me as some sort of hero and following me around. I was hoping by doing this for him I’d finally be rid of him. So if you don’t mind, I’ll be going now and I’ll also be disappointing you again, by not killing you before I leave.” + +You turn to leave and that’s when you get another unusual request. + +“If you take him to Kenneth’s Rest, will you also look after him?” Ulivik’s mother asks. +“What?!” +“If you want money to do so, we can pay. Just can you look after him for a while at least?” +“Okay…now I’m confused. I thought not only did you not want him to go, but that I was also a ruthless bastard that would probably rob and kill him along a lonely road?” +“Yeah, we don’t want him to go, and yeah you are a ruthless bastard…but I also know you actually do have some sort of code of honor. You might’ve left the Empire behind, but the regimented way of thinking you have is still there. You wouldn’t bother killing my boy unless you felt he was a direct danger to you, and I think we both know that isn’t the case.” Ulivik’s dad says. +“Well that’s the truth.” +“The other thing is…we’re not going to be able to stop him. He’s been getting more and more restless about this, and he’s going to want to pursue this career path whether we want him to or not. At this point he’s just going to run away from home and who knows what trouble he’ll get into. (sigh) Maybe it’s just his nature, bein’ a dark elf and all, but for good or ill, me and my wife have taken on the responsibility of raising him. And part of that is making sure he has the survival skills that he’ll need to make it in this world. We can’t teach him that, but you could. Look, like my wife said, we can pay you a good sum just for you teach him the basics, or whatever else is involved, if you need more, I dunno we’ll try to figure out something.” + +You’re speechless for a moment. Just when you think you’ve seen the worst in people, something like this happens and surprises you. + +“I’m not sure what you expect me to do. I mean this job isn’t something I can teach like from a book. Most of what he’s going to have to learn is going to be from direct experience. I mean I suppose I could teach him some combat skills, but the rest is going to mainly be up to him.” +“Well do what you can, and take this in the meantime.” + +Uliviki’s mother hands you a small bag. When you look inside, it’s nothing but gold coins. This has to be some of their savings, possibly all of their savings. They must really trust you, if they’ve given you this much. + +“I’ll do my best. You have my word as an Eternal.” You say and pocket the bag of coins. With those last words you exit the tanner’s store intending to find Ulivik. Fortunately you know he isn’t far. + +“Ulivik, I know you’re around the corner. Stop sulking, or pouting or whatever teenage angst you’re doing and let’s go.” + +Ulivik slowly comes out from behind the corner. + +“You’re taking me with you?” +“Yeah, I scared your parents into letting you come with me. Now grab whatever gear you want to take and let’s go before all the good jobs are taken.” + +Ulivik is completely giddy at this turn of events and runs back into the store to get his stuff. You on the other hand are wondering how the hell you got yourself into this. Then you feel the bag of coins again and remember. + +On your journey to Kenneth’s Rest, you explain to Ulivik some of the things he should know such as haggling for better prices on jobs and the art of intimidation. You also teach him a few combat moves. He’s a rookie to be sure, but his agility allows him from getting hurt too badly. + +When you get to Kenneth’s Rest, the place is as busy as always. Ulivik is more than a little distracted by the surroundings, and you have to keep reminding him to stay alert. + +“Hey stop staring at the harlots and pay attention! Just because fighting isn’t supposed to be allowed here, doesn’t mean it doesn’t happen. In fact people around here love to start trouble. Don’t stare at anyone in the eye for too long and make sure you don’t bump into anybody. You could either get into a fight, or someone might even try to pick your pocket.” +“Okay. Here isn’t the job board that way?” +“Job board? Hah. I never use those things. I go straight to the source. Trust me, if you want to get a job that pays well; get to know and make contact with the owners or government officials. Fortunately Kenneth used to work for me at one time, so it was quite easy for me to make contact with him. And when we find him, just keep your mouth shut, and let me do all the talking.” + +Eventually you find Kennth, he’s as jumpy as ever whenever you first see him. + +“Sir! I didn’t expect you to be down this way so soon? What can I do for you today?” +“Kenneth, will you relax? It’s been what, like ten years now? I’m not your superior officer anymore; you don’t have to keep calling me sir and getting all nervous and shit.” +“I know sir, just old habits you know? Who’s this with you?” +“This here is Ulivik, and he’s going to be my apprentice for a while.” +“Apprentice? Seriously? Never pegged you as the teaching type.” +“Right, Kenneth, like all those years of training soldiers in this very fort count for nothing at all.” +“No, that’s not what I mean…I just oh I dunno. It’s just odd I guess. He’s a svelk, how come he’s not with his own people?” +“That’s a long and unusual story, and one I don’t have time to go into. Besides we’re not here to satisfy your curiosity, we’re here for jobs, but seeing as this is Ulivik’s first time and all, can we get something maybe a little less…lethal?” +“Hmm, usually that sort of stuff is on the boards, but I think I got something. Oh! There’s a nest of auravraxes a few miles from here.” +“Ugh, more of those furry things? I just wiped out a nest of them a week ago!” +“Well that’s all I got that’s on the easy side. I mean I’ve got some other jobs too, but you said this was more for training your apprentice than anything else.” +“I can take on a harder task Mr. Bane. I mean I have to learn from experience right?” Ulivik pipes up forgetting that he was supposed to keep his mouth shut. + +Still, he might have a point. +> Take a harder job +Nothing like trial by fire, if Ulivik thinks he can handle it, he’ll learn soon enough. + +“Kenneth just give us whatever job pays the most currently right now.” You say. +“Oh okay then, that’s easy. There’s a troll somewhere south of here near the old Empire border. Dunno exactly where he’s making his home, I’m guess there’s a hole in the ground somewhere though, anyway it’s been eating a lot of travelers and merchants on the roads whenever it’s feeling a little hungry. It’s only just arrived, but it’s hurting business and for some reason none of these fucking cowards will go and kill it!” Kenneth shouts so everyone in the bar can hear him. + +“A troll? Where the hell did he come from? They’re rare enough as it is, and even less likely to wander around above ground.” You remark. +“I have no idea, but it’s ruining business. So are you going to take the job?” +“Yeah sure, should be interesting.” You say. + +You and Ulivik get up and leave who looks less enthusiastic now. + +“What’s wrong with you?” +“Oh uh, nothing. Just didn’t expect it would be a troll. You only hear about them in stories.” +“Yeah, well this ain’t no story and they’re quite real. I should know I’ve fought one before when I was serving as a soldier here. Damn thing blended in the darkness of the cave and took out three men before we even knew what was going on. Now it’s a common misconception that you can only kill them with fire, but that’s probably the best way to kill ‘em anyway given how tough their skin is, let alone their regenerative abilities…” + +At this point Ulivik begins to look pale, an amazing feat for a dark elf. You address the situation before continuing. + +“Okay and I can tell by your look, you’re having second thoughts about all this. If you want to back out, there’s still time you know. Do you want to back out?” + +Ulivik’s silence isn’t an answer. + +“Look, you better tell me now because when we’re facing nine feet of green and black horror I don’t want to be having to pull your fat out of the fire because you’re freezing up in terror.” +“I’m not backing out and I won’t freeze up!” he exclaims. +“Okay then, come on we need to get a few extra supplies.” + +Ulivik’s answer doesn’t exactly convince you that he still isn’t scared about all this, but sometimes fear can be a good thing. Keeps you on your toes. Besides one would have to be a complete moron to not be a little worried about facing a troll. The only time you faced one, wasn’t exactly a picnic and you had the advantage of numbers on your side. Normally you don’t waste your money on things like explosives, but you make an exception and buy a couple of firebombs along with some oil flasks, torches and a whetstone to make sure your sword is extra sharp. + +Along the way to your destination, you tell Ulivik how he should approach fighting the thing and whatever he does to not let it corner him or get the drop on him. If either one happens he’s dead. You also tell him that unlike an ogre or a giant, trolls are a lot faster and sneakier than their size would indicate. + +You travel for about a good portion of the day on your way towards the southern Rask border. You stick to the road since you figure if the troll has been ambushing merchants and travelers, he’s got to be stalking the road. When night comes you make a camp along side of it, but there still is no sign of any troll yet. + +“Hey you said these things don’t usually come out from underground?” Ulivik asks. +“Well the one I encountered was living in a cave that was being mined, and all the other stories I’ve heard and you’ve probably heard is that they’re completely subterranean. Whatever the truth is, this one has been lurking above ground and out in the open, so maybe they just don’t like sunlight. Probably has a home somewhere nearby, but there aren’t any hills or mountains in this part of Rask, just forest. Could be living in there I suppose, but I’m betting he’s probably got a hidden entrance in the ground somewhere and he’s living right underneath us.” + +This of course causes Ulivik to start looking at the ground around him. + +“How do we know it’ll even show up?” +“We don’t, but if it’s been attacking people like Kenneth says it has, then us lingering around the road will probably draw its attention. Of course there’s no point in sitting around and using up all our energy by staying up all night. We’ll be taking shifts. You seem to be alert already so you’re taking first watch while I get a little rest.” + +When you close your eyes you begin to slowly drift off, though you’ve always been sort of a light sleeper, so you never really fall into a deep sleep. What wakes you up completely is a sickening cracking sound and heavy breathing. + +You stand up with your sword in hand and you’re just in time to see a large gangly figure with its hands around Ulivik’s head which is now completely backwards. He didn’t even have a chance. Seeing you, the troll emits a low growl and drops Ulivik’s body. The troll lurches and leaps about in a chaotic manner. It tries to circle you in such a way that it’ll be behind you, but you don’t allow that to happen. Eventually it gets frustrated and attacks you head on. + +Fighting the troll is harder than the last time you fought one before and not just due to the fact that you had back up. The open space of the outside world is actually more beneficial for the troll’s fighting style which is jerky and involves a lot of leaping around. Many times the creature manages to smash you with its hardened fists due to its extended reach alone. Feels like getting hit by fucking battering ram. + +Your own hits against it don’t seem to do anything, except the one time when you actually manage to cleave one of the troll’s legs off just below the knee. This doesn’t deter its attack though. It merely backs off long enough for it to change its fighting style. It comes at you on all fours (or rather threes in this case). During this time you’ve taken the opportunity to light up one of the firebombs to throw at the thing, but by the time you light it, it’s already upon you and knocked you down. Pinnining you to the ground as best it can, the troll punches you in the face, breaking your nose to a point where it practically explodes into a mess of blood. You gasps for air as it follows up by sinking its teeth deep into your sword arm. The sound of bone cracking is a sure sign that it won’t be long before the troll chews it off completely. + +In the meantime the firebomb you lit fell close by and its fuse is still burning down. Somehow between your eyes covered in blood, the difficulty breathing and the pain wracking your entire body while a troll is eating you alive, you manage to grab the firebomb with your good arm and hold it right near the troll’s head. + +You get a minor satisfaction at the troll’s expression when he sees the bomb just before it goes off, blowing the pair of you up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Chapter 3A1: Bane of Rask + + +Year 45 + +“Bastard!” you say landing a killing blow on the last auravrax. + +You do a double check of the cave just to make sure you’ve got all the beasts. It’s times like this you’re reminded of your kobold hunting days. Of course auravraxes are a lot furrier and stupider. Doesn’t make them any less dangerous though considering they’re basically balls of hair with lots of teeth and a vicious streak a mile wide. You wonder how it was you never encountered them before when you were posted up here. You can only assume that the larger creatures like ogres and wendigos kept them in check. Thanks to your depletion of such creatures other predators managed to gain better dominance. Nature is wonderful at balancing things out that way. + +After making a check you pile up the bodies and start skinning. You figure between the payment for this job and the sale you’ll make on the pelts you’ll have enough money for at least of week’s worth of wine, women and song. + +“Nah, to hell with the song. More women.” You chuckle to yourself. + +Thoughts about such “common” pleasures would’ve never entered your head decades ago. Makes you realize how much you’re changed since then, but it’s a good change you think. For the first time, you’ve actually been enjoying life rather than just going through the motions of it like a golem. Life is so much simpler and easier when you don’t have anyone to answer to; especially when that “someone” doesn’t even know what the fuck they’re doing half of the time. Life of course still has its bad moments, but compared to your time serving the Empire, it’s like a non-stop party. + +The Empire, now just another government resigned to the trash heap of history. All of its years of power and whatever glory it claimed it had completely gone. And of course much like Mother Nature, the smaller predators get to take their chance in the sun now that the big one is extinct. One of those smaller predators being one your old fellow Eternals, Edgar. + +You don’t know all the details, but from the rumors you’ve heard he’s declared himself a general and is calling the territory in his control, The Eternal Dominion. He apparently managed to get some of those chaotic eternal wannabes in some semblance of order to help him as well. When you first heard about this you could only shake your head in disappointment. Not even so much for what he’s doing, but more with how he’s doing it. It’s almost like he’s going down the same path that Kane did, but with even less planning and followers that are probably more duplicitous than Shadow Guards. You’d think that he would’ve learned something from that mess. + +Still, it’s his life and you have yours. You stop reminiscing about the past and concentrate on skinning the auravraxes. When you’re finished you cook up one of them to eat and then get some sleep. The next day you set off to Keplavisk with your furs. + +When you get to Keplavisk, the usual people acknowledge you. Some are friendly, some aren’t, and others with longer memories hate your guts for your action when you were trying to maintain order here a long time ago. Just one of the things you have to put up with, after all you still have your reputation of being… + +“Bane of Rask! Bane of Rask! Hey wait up!” Ulivik yells. +“(Sigh) Boy, I told you to stop calling me by that ridiculous name. In fact I told you to stop following me period!” +“Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are those auravrax furs? Did you kill all of them? I bet you just went in and totally destroyed them without fear!” Ulivik says while making sword whooshing sounds. + +You roll your eyes at the teenager’s over enthusiasm and resign yourself to him following you while you head to the town hall. For whatever reason he sees you as some sort of brave “hero” though you wish he wouldn’t. You can’t get too mad at him though, not his fault he’s a dark elf brought up by humans. There’s got to be a lot of confusion going on there. + +You mostly ignore Ulivik’s incessant questioning until you get to the town hall where upon his guard run him off with racial slurs and threats. You enter the building and see the mayor. Mayor Stundle is sitting his fat ass at his desk doing nothing of any importance as usual. + +“Ah Mr. Bane, I can see by the numerous pelts you’re carrying that you’ve taken care of the problem, I knew you would. That’s why you’re the best merc in the Confederation. Your payment is on the desk there.” +“Good, and my name isn’t Bane you know. I keep telling people that.” +“Indeed it may not be, but that’s what everyone knows you as. Can’t fight fame or maybe in your case infamy. Heh heh.” +“Yeah, anyway I showed you the proof, I’ve got some furs to sell.” +“Got a special job for you if you want.” +“Maybe later, I’m going to enjoy myself.” +“Okay, but I can’t promise you it’ll be available when you get back.” + +As you leave Mayor Stundle’s office, Flog is just entering with several ogre scalps. He displays his obvious dislike of you as usual. As thorough as you were when you destroyed Fort Defiance, Flog survived because he did the smart thing of running away and hiding as soon as he saw your army approaching. + +“Outta da way Bane, Flog has to see fat mayor!” +“He’s all yours.” You remark not really wanting to deal with his attitude today, of course in typical orc fashion, Flog feels the need to press the issue. He sees the auravrax furs and makes his move. +“Gruh. You kill little furry things. Flog kill big ogres! More proof that Flog better merc than you!” +“Sure Flog, whatever.” You say dismissively which of course annoys Flog even more. +“Flog gonna kill you one day Bane!” he shouts as you walk away. +“Sure Flog, whenever you’re ready.” You say almost yawning. Another time and place you would’ve killed him for speaking to you in such a manner, but over the years you’ve mellowed with age. Besides he’s been threatening to kill you for the last eight years. The first few times you took him seriously. Now it’s just boring. If he really ever wants to try he knows where to find you, not like you’re hiding. + +After selling your furs you make you take your money to the closest tavern where you proceed to make good on your claim of relaxing. After a couple days of carousing you’re lying in bed with a couple of serving wenches and you decide that you should probably get back to work. No point in waiting around until all your coin is gone, you’ve had your fun now its time to get back to what you’re really good at, killing stuff. You tell the girls in your room to leave and get prepared to go find some more work. + +You’ve barely stepped out of the inn and Ulivik has already found you and nearly gets himself stabbed for sneaking up on you. + +“Hey Mr. Bane, it’s just me!” he says with a worried tone. +“Boy, didn’t I tell you to never sneak up on me like that? I could’ve killed you and I doubt if anyone would’ve blamed me for it!” you shout +“Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are you going on another mission?” +“What do you think?” +“I think you are! But Mayor Stundle already gave out all of the jobs, you’ll probably have to go to another town.” +“And how do you know this?” +“Because I tried to sign up, but I got thrown out of the town hall and called names.” +“Sounds about right, but how did you get in there in the first place?” +“I snuck in. I think I’m getting really good at it!” +“Hmm, sounds like your svelk heritage is finally paying off.” You say. +“Svelk?” Ulivik asks as if you’ve spoken a made up word. +“Svelk, you know it’s the proper name for you dark elves, you mean you’ve never heard the term?” +“No, I’ve been called a dark elf before, but I mostly get called a lot of other names.” +“Well life’s tough kid, now you go run along…” +“Hey why don’t I come with you on your next mission!?” + +And there it is. You knew the day was coming where he’d start asking you to bring him with you. + +“Yeah, no. I work alone.” +“Aw come on! I need the experience! I try to sign up for even the easy jobs and I get thrown out! I’ve even tried going door to door asking if there are any monsters they need killing and they usually just say, yeah the one standing front of me! Then they slam the door in my face! It’s not fair!” +“Why do you want to be a merc anyway? I mean I know you’ve got a family that takes care of you. They must, if they were willing to take on the ostracizing that would come in raising a dark elf baby.” +“They do and I know they love me, but working as a hide tanner is boring! I want to be a mercenary and live a life of adventure! I mean I’ve heard stories of how my race is composed of nothing but mercenaries! Just think, a long proud line of brave ancestors that lived a glorious life of excitement! I should be as noble as them!” + +You almost laugh when hearing how Ulivik has spoken of his race. He truly is out of touch as there is absolutely nothing glorious, proud or noble about them. Even brave is debatable most of the time. + +“Ulivik, if you really want to be a merc, why not just go to Kenneth’s Rest? He doesn’t give a shit who he hires. Hell, he hires dark elves on a regular basis.” +“I would, but uh, I’m not allowed to leave the town…but I know if you were with me, my parents would let me go! So can I please come with you?!” + +This scenario is just so bizarre; you hardly believe that it’s happening, a dark elf practically begging you to teach him to be a mercenary. The crazy thing about all this is you’re actually considering it. You must finally be suffering from some of the blows you’ve taken to the head in the past. It’s the only explanation. +> Don't take Ulivik +While it’s an interesting possibility, you’re not training soldiers anymore; you’re done with that mess and quite frankly, you doubt if Ulivik would make a good warrior of any kind. + +“Look kid, I’ve put up with you for quite some time now, but enough is enough. I told you, go down to Kenneth’s Rest and get a job. If you’re too much of a sissy to disobey your parents, then you ain’t gonna have what it takes to be a merc in the first place. Now leave me the hell alone, or I’m gonna hurt you very very badly and you don’t want that.” + +Ulivik tries to beg some more, but after a few menacing glares and threatening steps towards him, he backs off, saddened by your hostility. Having gotten rid of Ulivik, you set off for a different town further north, they’re always having problems up there. + +A few months later when you’re back in Keplavisk, you fully expect Ulivik to be bothering you again, but you see no sign of him which is odd since he always seems to know exactly when you come into town. While getting a drink at the tavern you ask the barkeep in passing where he is. + +“Oh that dark elven boy? Ran off and got himself killed a couple months ago. Damn fool was trying to be a mercenary and I guess some bandits finally taught him that he wasn’t. Good riddance I say. Don’t need any of their kind around, didn’t like ‘em when they were doing thug work for the Empire…erm, no offence Mr. Bane…” +“Hmm, just gimme my drink.” You say. + +While Ulivik’s death doesn’t affect you on any emotional level, you are a little surprised to hear about it. You didn’t think he actually would have the heart to try to strike out on his own. Oh well, that’s how it is in this business though, one moment you’re here the next you aren’t. Everything is fleeting and you can’t worry about tomorrow, you just have to live for today. + +Life for you continues on as usual. + +Year 50 + +You wake up from another night of debauchery and predictably you feel pretty terrible from it. Your head hurts and your body aches all over, of course your body would ache anyway. The years have been taking a toll on how you push yourself physically and the battles you fight. The excessive parties in between really don’t help though. + +You just lay in bed for a while dreading the fact that you’ll be running out of coin soon again and have to go to work again. It’s an endless cycle, and while the freedom you’ve enjoyed since leaving the Empire has been nice, the past couple of years you’ve started feel like something is missing. Namely purpose and direction. The Empire had numerous faults, but in the beginning it did give you such things and part of you misses it. + +You begin to wonder if you shouldn’t go join Edgar in his Eternal Dominion or maybe offer to serve the Felkan Kingdom to give yourself some sort of goal larger than yourself. You quickly dismiss such thoughts though for several reasons, one of the biggest ones being that you now you’ve had your taste of freedom, you don’t really want to be following orders from a large government again. (Let alone Edgar) + +Of course maybe you just need a change of scenery and just leave this area entirely. There certainly nothing really tying you down except perhaps your own comfort of familiarity. You’ve spent more than half of your life in Rask, hell it’s actually been more of your “home” than the Empire ever was so despite your emotional disconnect with people, you ‘re a little attached to the area. +> Leave Rask +You’ve lived in Rask as an “occupier” and as a “citizen” and neither one have really fulfilled you. You decide that it might very well be time to leave. You have no idea where you’re going to go or what you’re going to do, but you guess you’ll figure it out eventually. + +You pack up what belongings you can carry and do a little shopping for other necessities before you set off on your journey. When you eventually get to the Rask border, you take a look back, wondering if you’ll ever return one day… + +You don’t. + +You spend your remaining years traveling far from Rask, far from old Empire territory and far from any land you’ve ever known. While some of it is interesting, you still never feel “content.” You mostly support yourself just by living off the land and doing some occasional mercenary work when passing through towns and villages. You never do settle down in one area for long though. + +You might be an Eternal and your fighting spirit is always willing, but that doesn’t stop the ravages of time from taking their toll on your body. Between the constant traveling and the combat, your body is aching all the time. You aren’t as fast or as strong as you used to be and you often forget you aren’t young anymore, or more likely you have full knowledge of it and are just too stubborn to change. + +Your unwillingness to settle down and die peacefully in your bed eventually catches up with you during a mercenary job you take in some small town in a far away land. Bandits are raiding the town on a regular basis and you take part in defending it. You do well enough for a man your age, but ultimately you are brought down by several of them who manage to surround and gain the advantage over you. + +You fall to several sword blows to your body and collapse in a bloody heap in the streets of the town.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While it’s an interesting possibility, you’re not training soldiers anymore; you’re done with that mess and quite frankly, you doubt if Ulivik would make a good warrior of any kind. + +“Look kid, I’ve put up with you for quite some time now, but enough is enough. I told you, go down to Kenneth’s Rest and get a job. If you’re too much of a sissy to disobey your parents, then you ain’t gonna have what it takes to be a merc in the first place. Now leave me the hell alone, or I’m gonna hurt you very very badly and you don’t want that.” + +Ulivik tries to beg some more, but after a few menacing glares and threatening steps towards him, he backs off, saddened by your hostility. Having gotten rid of Ulivik, you set off for a different town further north, they’re always having problems up there. + +A few months later when you’re back in Keplavisk, you fully expect Ulivik to be bothering you again, but you see no sign of him which is odd since he always seems to know exactly when you come into town. While getting a drink at the tavern you ask the barkeep in passing where he is. + +“Oh that dark elven boy? Ran off and got himself killed a couple months ago. Damn fool was trying to be a mercenary and I guess some bandits finally taught him that he wasn’t. Good riddance I say. Don’t need any of their kind around, didn’t like ‘em when they were doing thug work for the Empire…erm, no offence Mr. Bane…” +“Hmm, just gimme my drink.” You say. + +While Ulivik’s death doesn’t affect you on any emotional level, you are a little surprised to hear about it. You didn’t think he actually would have the heart to try to strike out on his own. Oh well, that’s how it is in this business though, one moment you’re here the next you aren’t. Everything is fleeting and you can’t worry about tomorrow, you just have to live for today. + +Life for you continues on as usual. + +Year 50 + +You wake up from another night of debauchery and predictably you feel pretty terrible from it. Your head hurts and your body aches all over, of course your body would ache anyway. The years have been taking a toll on how you push yourself physically and the battles you fight. The excessive parties in between really don’t help though. + +You just lay in bed for a while dreading the fact that you’ll be running out of coin soon again and have to go to work again. It’s an endless cycle, and while the freedom you’ve enjoyed since leaving the Empire has been nice, the past couple of years you’ve started feel like something is missing. Namely purpose and direction. The Empire had numerous faults, but in the beginning it did give you such things and part of you misses it. + +You begin to wonder if you shouldn’t go join Edgar in his Eternal Dominion or maybe offer to serve the Felkan Kingdom to give yourself some sort of goal larger than yourself. You quickly dismiss such thoughts though for several reasons, one of the biggest ones being that you now you’ve had your taste of freedom, you don’t really want to be following orders from a large government again. (Let alone Edgar) + +Of course maybe you just need a change of scenery and just leave this area entirely. There certainly nothing really tying you down except perhaps your own comfort of familiarity. You’ve spent more than half of your life in Rask, hell it’s actually been more of your “home” than the Empire ever was so despite your emotional disconnect with people, you ‘re a little attached to the area. +> Stick around +You may be in a “rut” but you realize you’re too old to just start all over again, somewhere else and quite frankly you don’t really want to. Rask is your home now, and while life might not be perfect here, it’s a lot better than how your life was during the Empire. You just need to push that lingering Empire indoctrination from your mind that you thought was gone. + +You roll out of bed and get yourself in the frame of mind to go to work again… + +Year 54 + +“And that’s how I killed the last giant in Rask! Another round!” you exclaim as everyone in the tavern hangs on your every word. Later you continue your tradition of bedding whatever wench that is pretty enough and willing that night. + +The past four years have been relatively good for you, or at least you’ve been trying to make the best of them. Since your last self reflection you’ve funneled your energy in not only your mercenary work, but to be the best one in Rask by deliberately taking on the most dangerous jobs as well as blatantly stealing jobs from other mercs. While this has made you a lot more famous with the average citizens who appreciate your monster and bandit slaying, it’s also made you quite unpopular with all the rest of the mercs. + +Naturally this unpopularity puts a target on your back and while most of the mercs are far too scared to actually to confront you face to face they do eventually build up a coalition to take you out once and for all. + +One day on your way to take out what you believe to be a bandit hideout, you’re traveling into a wooded area and get the impression that something is amiss, like you’re walking into an ambush. + +At first you think it might be the bandits who caught on to you, but you’ve dealt with too many of those types to know that they’re either too stupid to lay an ambush or they’re smart enough to have already run away. + +That’s when you draw your sword… + +“Alright, I know you’re all out there! I guess this has been a long time coming, so let’s get this shit over. The merc population needs a little thinning out anyway.” You shout. + +Predictably Flog comes out hiding with a motley group of humans and even a couple of ogres he must’ve intimidated into joining him. + +“Flog told you he’d kill you one day! Today is da day!” +“Took you long enough and you still need a group to help you…” you hear the crunch of a twig behind you and you instinctively duck and roll to your left as several bolts go flying into trees narrowly missing you. + +“Reload!” you hear a female svelk voice shout while you run for cover behind some rocks. +“Hey! This is Flog’s kill! Told you not to try to kill him, just prevent his escape!” +“Hah! You got Eldolith to help you? You working for orcs now Eldy? My how far you’ve come from once working for the Empire!” you mock. +“You won’t be laughing for too much longer Eternal. You’ve stolen your last job from us!” Eldolith shouts back. + +While you hide behind the rocks, Flog orders some of the other mercs to go after you, doesn’t take any time for you at all to kill several of them. Eldolith orders another volley of bolts from her men, but you use a merc you grabbed as a shield and run deeper in the forest. + +Flog’s ogres run after you and thanks to their great stamina, they manage to catch up to you before long, you stop your running, spin around and with as much force as you can you chop at one of the ogre’s legs. He doesn’t stop in time and you nearly chop it completely off, unfortunately he crashes into you bellowing in pain the whole time. You crawl out from under the one leg ogre and finish him off, only to have his buddy nearly cave your head in with his club. + +You shove your dagger upwards into the ogre’s balls and his low growls and snarls become high-pitched squeaks as his manhood is now shredded. He falls to his knees and before you can finish him off, the svelks arrive with their blasted repeating crossbows again. A couple take aim immediately while two others attempt to run around behind you. Having little in the way of options you run to the nearest tree for cover and try to get close enough to cut one of them down. + +You succeed in dodging and reaching the first two, who put up a poor showing of swordsmanship, but the other two that ran around in back of you fire their own volleys and you feel the piercing pain of two bolts going into your left leg and another going into your back. You collapse on top of one of the other dead svelk. The pain is coursing throughout your body, but you’re in a vulnerable position, and in order to survive you can only hope you’re fast enough to get the drop on them. + +Playing dead you rely on your hearing to sense how close the svelk are stepping through the snow to check on you. This is harder than in sounds with a severely wounded ogre moaning about his wounds the whole time. You also see two other images running towards you, it’s Flog and Eldolith. You can’t wait any longer. + +You grab one of the dead svelk’s crossbows and with all your strength you roll on your back (Biting your lip at the pain due to the bolt there) and fire at the surprised svelks moving towards you. You were never an expert on ranged weapons, but you don’t miss at your range and the two svelk go down. You then point it at the balless ogre and put him out of his misery with a single bolt to his head. + +“Shit! He’s got one of the crossbows!” Eldolith shouts and pulls out her own with taking cover. Flog on the other hand doesn’t seem particularly worried. + +“No more hiding! Flog put an end to Bane once and for all!” he yells and charged at you with his axe. You shoot your remaining bolts at him, but only succeed in hitting Flog in the arm, which barely stops his stride. You scramble to get up and throw the crossbow at Flog who bats away the oncoming object. + +Flog swings his axe and catches you with a glancing blow to your chest, ripping your armor and breaking the skin. You stagger backwards trying not to fall again. + +“Yooze gonna die today Bane! Ha ha ha ha ha!” Flog laughs followed by a sudden yell of pain as he feels several bolts go into his own back. He immediately stops his advance on you and falls to one knee coughing up blood. + +“Traitorous dark elven bitch!” he shouts. + +This gives you enough time to stagger away again and grab another one of the dead svelk crossbows and hide again. You aren’t feeling so great yourself; you know the svelk bolts probably were dipped in some sort of poison. In fact you’re surprised it hasn’t incapacitated you yet. You just hope you can get through this quick enough to drag yourself back to the closest town. + +You look out from behind your cover just in time to see Flog attempting to advance on Eldolith and her firing another volley into his body. She ends up having to step back quite a bit and reload again before finally finishing him off. He falls backwards into the snow looking like a pin cushion. + +“Bad move Eldy. Should’ve let Flog wear me down a lot more and then killed him.” You shout. +“Wear you down? Hah, he would’ve killed you, in your current condition. No, I want the pleasure of killing you myself.” + +While she pontificates you attempt to shoot at her from behind your cover, but you miss. + +“Nice try. How are you feeling over there Bane? Not too good I imagine. Had to make sure the poison was really strong, I know how you Eternals got that annoying resistance to the stuff.” + +At this point, you are indeed starting to feel quite unwell. You begin to feel nauseous and you’re having a hard time standing up. When you begin retching, you hear Eldolith speak again. + +“You know Bane, this is near the same area where I helped your old captain kill all those elves. That was a good day too. You’re starting to sound pretty bad over there Bane, how about you just give yourself up and let me finish you off? Wouldn’t you rather be killed by a worthy foe rather than just succumb to the poison? There’s no shame in being beaten by your betters.” + +You’re running out of time and you know it. + +“Alright…you got a point damn you. I’m coming out, here I’ll throw out the crossbow just to reassure you!” you shout and throw your crossbow from behind your cover. +“Good, good, glad to see you submitting to the inevitable. Now come out slowly.” + +The way you’re feeling right now, you doubt if you could come out any other way. You see Eldolith pointing her crossbow at you while stepping out from her own cover and moving closer towards you. She smirks and in typical svelk fashion can’t help but gloat. + +“I must say I am surprised that you decided to surrender, I would’ve thought your eternal pride would’ve prevented such a thing. But I guess those days are long gone just like the Empire you once served eh?” +“Just get this over with.” You say and then fall to your hands and knees in the snow vomiting up blood. +“Mmm, perhaps I’ll enjoy watching you squirm some more. The once great Bane of Rask finally…” + +You knew you could count on Eldolith being a typical svelk. While she’s taunting you, she doesn’t pay attention that your hands are doing something rather simple such as balling up the hardened snow. With all your strength you throw the snowball at her. Being caught off guard she dodges it and shoots wildly at you. You manage to roll out of the way and grab the crossbow you threw away. You unload the entire thing at her and as luck would have it, the bolts land true for the most part. Three of them go into her side and another into her neck. + +She falls into the snow coughing up blood and holding on to her side. You hear her cursing you with her dying breaths as you attempt to leave the area. While you have won, you know you aren’t going to survive too much longer. + +You manage to crawl a few more meters before the poison finally takes it toll. Your last thoughts are nostalgic ones. You allow yourself to smile at the times you got to enjoy life and your past victories, even this one. Yes this is a good death you think and then you pass on.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Chapter 3A1: Bane of Rask + + +Year 45 + +“Bastard!” you say landing a killing blow on the last auravrax. + +You do a double check of the cave just to make sure you’ve got all the beasts. It’s times like this you’re reminded of your kobold hunting days. Of course auravraxes are a lot furrier and stupider. Doesn’t make them any less dangerous though considering they’re basically balls of hair with lots of teeth and a vicious streak a mile wide. You wonder how it was you never encountered them before when you were posted up here. You can only assume that the larger creatures like ogres and wendigos kept them in check. Thanks to your depletion of such creatures other predators managed to gain better dominance. Nature is wonderful at balancing things out that way. + +After making a check you pile up the bodies and start skinning. You figure between the payment for this job and the sale you’ll make on the pelts you’ll have enough money for at least of week’s worth of wine, women and song. + +“Nah, to hell with the song. More women.” You chuckle to yourself. + +Thoughts about such “common” pleasures would’ve never entered your head decades ago. Makes you realize how much you’re changed since then, but it’s a good change you think. For the first time, you’ve actually been enjoying life rather than just going through the motions of it like a golem. Life is so much simpler and easier when you don’t have anyone to answer to; especially when that “someone” doesn’t even know what the fuck they’re doing half of the time. Life of course still has its bad moments, but compared to your time serving the Empire, it’s like a non-stop party. + +The Empire, now just another government resigned to the trash heap of history. All of its years of power and whatever glory it claimed it had completely gone. And of course much like Mother Nature, the smaller predators get to take their chance in the sun now that the big one is extinct. One of those smaller predators being one your old fellow Eternals, Edgar. + +You don’t know all the details, but from the rumors you’ve heard he’s declared himself a general and is calling the territory in his control, The Eternal Dominion. He apparently managed to get some of those chaotic eternal wannabes in some semblance of order to help him as well. When you first heard about this you could only shake your head in disappointment. Not even so much for what he’s doing, but more with how he’s doing it. It’s almost like he’s going down the same path that Kane did, but with even less planning and followers that are probably more duplicitous than Shadow Guards. You’d think that he would’ve learned something from that mess. + +Still, it’s his life and you have yours. You stop reminiscing about the past and concentrate on skinning the auravraxes. When you’re finished you cook up one of them to eat and then get some sleep. The next day you set off to Keplavisk with your furs. + +When you get to Keplavisk, the usual people acknowledge you. Some are friendly, some aren’t, and others with longer memories hate your guts for your action when you were trying to maintain order here a long time ago. Just one of the things you have to put up with, after all you still have your reputation of being… + +“Bane of Rask! Bane of Rask! Hey wait up!” Ulivik yells. +“(Sigh) Boy, I told you to stop calling me by that ridiculous name. In fact I told you to stop following me period!” +“Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are those auravrax furs? Did you kill all of them? I bet you just went in and totally destroyed them without fear!” Ulivik says while making sword whooshing sounds. + +You roll your eyes at the teenager’s over enthusiasm and resign yourself to him following you while you head to the town hall. For whatever reason he sees you as some sort of brave “hero” though you wish he wouldn’t. You can’t get too mad at him though, not his fault he’s a dark elf brought up by humans. There’s got to be a lot of confusion going on there. + +You mostly ignore Ulivik’s incessant questioning until you get to the town hall where upon his guard run him off with racial slurs and threats. You enter the building and see the mayor. Mayor Stundle is sitting his fat ass at his desk doing nothing of any importance as usual. + +“Ah Mr. Bane, I can see by the numerous pelts you’re carrying that you’ve taken care of the problem, I knew you would. That’s why you’re the best merc in the Confederation. Your payment is on the desk there.” +“Good, and my name isn’t Bane you know. I keep telling people that.” +“Indeed it may not be, but that’s what everyone knows you as. Can’t fight fame or maybe in your case infamy. Heh heh.” +“Yeah, anyway I showed you the proof, I’ve got some furs to sell.” +“Got a special job for you if you want.” +“Maybe later, I’m going to enjoy myself.” +“Okay, but I can’t promise you it’ll be available when you get back.” + +As you leave Mayor Stundle’s office, Flog is just entering with several ogre scalps. He displays his obvious dislike of you as usual. As thorough as you were when you destroyed Fort Defiance, Flog survived because he did the smart thing of running away and hiding as soon as he saw your army approaching. + +“Outta da way Bane, Flog has to see fat mayor!” +“He’s all yours.” You remark not really wanting to deal with his attitude today, of course in typical orc fashion, Flog feels the need to press the issue. He sees the auravrax furs and makes his move. +“Gruh. You kill little furry things. Flog kill big ogres! More proof that Flog better merc than you!” +“Sure Flog, whatever.” You say dismissively which of course annoys Flog even more. +“Flog gonna kill you one day Bane!” he shouts as you walk away. +“Sure Flog, whenever you’re ready.” You say almost yawning. Another time and place you would’ve killed him for speaking to you in such a manner, but over the years you’ve mellowed with age. Besides he’s been threatening to kill you for the last eight years. The first few times you took him seriously. Now it’s just boring. If he really ever wants to try he knows where to find you, not like you’re hiding. + +After selling your furs you make you take your money to the closest tavern where you proceed to make good on your claim of relaxing. After a couple days of carousing you’re lying in bed with a couple of serving wenches and you decide that you should probably get back to work. No point in waiting around until all your coin is gone, you’ve had your fun now its time to get back to what you’re really good at, killing stuff. You tell the girls in your room to leave and get prepared to go find some more work. + +You’ve barely stepped out of the inn and Ulivik has already found you and nearly gets himself stabbed for sneaking up on you. + +“Hey Mr. Bane, it’s just me!” he says with a worried tone. +“Boy, didn’t I tell you to never sneak up on me like that? I could’ve killed you and I doubt if anyone would’ve blamed me for it!” you shout +“Sorry, Mr. Bane. Hey are you going on another mission?” +“What do you think?” +“I think you are! But Mayor Stundle already gave out all of the jobs, you’ll probably have to go to another town.” +“And how do you know this?” +“Because I tried to sign up, but I got thrown out of the town hall and called names.” +“Sounds about right, but how did you get in there in the first place?” +“I snuck in. I think I’m getting really good at it!” +“Hmm, sounds like your svelk heritage is finally paying off.” You say. +“Svelk?” Ulivik asks as if you’ve spoken a made up word. +“Svelk, you know it’s the proper name for you dark elves, you mean you’ve never heard the term?” +“No, I’ve been called a dark elf before, but I mostly get called a lot of other names.” +“Well life’s tough kid, now you go run along…” +“Hey why don’t I come with you on your next mission!?” + +And there it is. You knew the day was coming where he’d start asking you to bring him with you. + +“Yeah, no. I work alone.” +“Aw come on! I need the experience! I try to sign up for even the easy jobs and I get thrown out! I’ve even tried going door to door asking if there are any monsters they need killing and they usually just say, yeah the one standing front of me! Then they slam the door in my face! It’s not fair!” +“Why do you want to be a merc anyway? I mean I know you’ve got a family that takes care of you. They must, if they were willing to take on the ostracizing that would come in raising a dark elf baby.” +“They do and I know they love me, but working as a hide tanner is boring! I want to be a mercenary and live a life of adventure! I mean I’ve heard stories of how my race is composed of nothing but mercenaries! Just think, a long proud line of brave ancestors that lived a glorious life of excitement! I should be as noble as them!” + +You almost laugh when hearing how Ulivik has spoken of his race. He truly is out of touch as there is absolutely nothing glorious, proud or noble about them. Even brave is debatable most of the time. + +“Ulivik, if you really want to be a merc, why not just go to Kenneth’s Rest? He doesn’t give a shit who he hires. Hell, he hires dark elves on a regular basis.” +“I would, but uh, I’m not allowed to leave the town…but I know if you were with me, my parents would let me go! So can I please come with you?!” + +This scenario is just so bizarre; you hardly believe that it’s happening, a dark elf practically begging you to teach him to be a mercenary. The crazy thing about all this is you’re actually considering it. You must finally be suffering from some of the blows you’ve taken to the head in the past. It’s the only explanation. +> Ulivik (Outcast) +Ulivik is a strange young man. First of all he’s a svelk that had been abandoned as a baby, presumably by one of the many mercenaries that travel through the area. It’s not uncommon for dark elf mothers to abandon their young if they are an “inconvenience”, it is however less common for these babies to survive, let alone taken care of by others. Ulivik was that lucky rarity that a human couple that couldn’t have any children of their own literally stumbled upon him in the woods. + +Other than that, he hasn’t exactly been all that lucky. Given the reputation of his kind, it’s hardly surprising that he’s practically run off or insulted everywhere he goes. How his adopted parent’s business hasn’t suffered is amazing, but it’s a small enough town that people understand that the couple was trying for a child for a very long time and keep their dislike for the svelk youth to a minimum. Doesn’t stop other youths from being complete bastards to him though. + +Perhaps due to his outcast nature he’s latched on to the idea of a mercenary life of being a glorious life of excitement and adventure. Naturally when he found out that you were one of the best mercenaries in the region, he attached himself to you almost immediately and whenever you’re in town, he asks you a bunch of questions. Even getting hostile with him doesn’t drive him away since he’s so used to it, so nowadays you just resign yourself to the temporary annoyance. + +He’s sort of a good example of the whole nature vs. nurture nonsense you overheard some drunk philosopher babbling about in a local tavern once. You have to admit, sometimes you feel a little sorry for him, never thought you’d feel that way towards anyone, let alone a svelk.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 35 + +Another rebellion put down. You wipe your sword of blood and shake your head as you look around at the chaos. This is the Quala province, the very heartland of the Empire. You shouldn’t have to be trying to maintain order here only a few miles away from the capital itself. + +“Ha ha ha! Come on bitch, give it up! I’m an Eternal, you oughta be flattered that I’m even wasting my time on your normal ass!” private Felding says as he attempts to rape a nearby girl. + +You briskly walk over to Felding and pull him off her. You know damn well that the rest of his kind are probably doing stuff like this all over the place, but this one is in your direct sight and under your command. + +“What the hell, captain? If you wanted first dibs you could’ve just said so! Ah look, now she’s getting away!” +“We’re here to maintain order private, not create more chaos.” +“Oh yeah? Coulda fooled me by destroying the entire town like this.” +“Regrettable, but during battle only victory matters.” +“Exactly! We won! So now it’s time to have our fun with these disobedient peasants. Y’know instill fear in them so they won’t do it again.” +“You’re not instilling fear though, you’re just satisfying your own desires.” +“Hey, who says we aren’t supposed to have fun while doing it?” + +It’s like talking to a brick wall. You’ve had these “New Eternals” under your command for a few months now and they are some of the most undisciplined troops you’ve ever had. You can try to encourage them, you can try to reason with them, you can punish them, and none of it has a real effect. The only constant is that they know of your reputation and know that you’re also an Eternal, which makes them just fearful of you enough that they don’t attempt to directly challenge your authority like they have with so many of their other commanders. + +If it were up to you, you would’ve had them all killed for treason as soon as they murdered their first CO, but for whatever reason the Empire wants them active. You’re guessing because the Empire’s desperate. So they were ultimately transferred to you and unfortunately you’re not allowed to kill them either…well unless they try to kill you first. + +You swear this must be what it’s like to be a svelk. + +They are like children, malicious hateful little children. It’s not even their suspect loyalty that baffles you; it’s their complete lack of discipline. Even Kane and Cyrus who opposed you had discipline. Hell, Edgar who was arguably the most emotional and hotheaded of the group was a hundred times more disciplined than any of these new “Eternals.” You remember back to your own training and there were a few of your fellows that didn’t learn proper discipline either. They never made it past Mistress and the few that did, didn’t survive Gruz. Whoever was in charge of their training did a horrible job and should’ve been executed for incompetence along with the rest of these vicious monsters. That old orc was right, they will destroy what’s left of the Empire, but you doubt if they’ll survive long after its downfall. + +You think back to all the real Eternals. You, Edgar and Brenda are the only ones left, as Warrick killed in the final days of the Felkan War. At least you assume that’s what happened, his body was never found and you know he would’ve rather died than let himself be captured to rot in a P.O.W. Camp. Either way it’s truly a loss you never ever got to talk with him again. + +From what you know Edgar is still stationed in the Arat province, probably trying to keep his own “eternals” in line to keep the peace there. As for poor Brenda you know she has her command in the Nalin province and probably still quietly grieving for Roldan. + +After all you’ve been through, it’s come to this and you’re wondering what the hell you’re still fighting for. The Emperor? You haven’t cared about that unknown ruler for years. For all you know he’s some feeble minded inbred idiot figure head that his advisors keep locked away while they bumble around ruling things probably about as well as he would. + +The Empire? Perhaps at one time, but as it has lost territory, respect and apparently all resemblance of sanity over the years you’ve lost all faith that it can ever regain any sort of glory it might have had, if it ever had it to begin with. You’ve tried your best to stem back the tide of chaos, but you’re only one man even if you are an Eternal. + +While you ponder your potential future, private Felding interrupts you. + +“Hey, cap? You’re in a bit of a daze there. So if you’re done I’m going to go now.” +“Hold on, I have one more thing to tell you.” +“(Sigh) What?” Felding says with an exasperated tone. +“You’re not a fucking Eternal. None of you little shits are.” You say and run Felding through and pull up on the sword unleashing his blood and guts onto the ground. Felding makes a high pitched scream and slumps on top of his entrails after you remove the sword. + +“Shit! The cap just killed Felding!” another so called eternal shouts while he and his buddy have just come back from looting some farmer’s home. The pair of them look like they want to run, but you make it easy on them. + +“Go ahead and run or stay. I don’t care anymore. I’m leaving. I will tell you this though, if the Empire sends any of you unruly scum after me, know that I shall take great pleasure in not just killing you, but in drawing it out for as long as possible. Remember this.” + +And with that last warning, you leave your service to the Empire. + +The question now is, where will you go? What will you do? This all feels so wrong when you think about it. You’ve killed so many for abandoning, opposing, or attempting to betray the Empire and here you are doing the same thing. Was it all for nothing? Was it worth it? + +You don’t know. You always believed at the time you were right and that you were doing the right thing. Maybe you were, maybe you weren’t. You just know that you can’t serve something you don’t believe in anymore. Especially when everyone else around you doesn’t either. + +Speaking of not knowing, you don’t know how to do anything except kill people. While you’re certain that you’d be able to hire your skills out somewhere, the idea of being a mercenary is a little distasteful for you. You’d rather not push the svelk comparison that far. + +You could swear loyalty to another government you suppose. Perhaps the Felkan Kingdom? You’re not sure they’d want you, what with all their high tech weapons and your own government once fighting against them. + +The only other alternative for you is to carve out your own territory and rule it as your own. While it’s true you do have leadership qualities, you know nothing of actually running a government. You honestly wouldn’t know where to begin. +> Serve another government +You can’t bring yourself to be some lawless mercenary like a svelk and you can’t fathom even trying to run your own piece of territory. You’re no ruler. You’re a warrior that currently has no direction or mission. The only chance to find purpose is to pledge yourself to another nation. Again, the only one you know of any note is the Felkan Kingdom. You only know a little about them based on the propaganda the Empire has told you as well as the brief conversation you had with Gerald when you temporarily reunited with him. + +Technically the Empire is at peace with the Felkan Kingdom, but there are still skirmishes. Though nowdays it’s due to rogue Empire soldiers (and peasants too) becoming outright bandits rather than any patriotic reason. The Felkan Kingdom has been trying to keep out Empire refugees as well, which means you’ll probably just get turned around, if not outright fired upon. Still with shitty situation you’re in, getting shot doesn’t even seem like a bad option at this point + +You find a nearby horse and set off for the west. Along the way you see the landscape of the Empire, which at one time was orderly and even idyllic is now burning and in tatters. Despite the chaos you don’t need to do any battle, not even when passing groups of angry peasants who are taking every opportunity to get revenge on their oppressive government and its agents in all forms. You can only assume your reputation is enough to scare them off or they don’t even recognize you. If it’s the latter then it only confirms your belief that you weren’t making that much of a difference in the Empire anyway. + +When you get to the Arat province you find it in a bit better condition than other territory you’ve rode through, though when you ride through the town of Bucklesberg the peasants give you hateful glances or just outright run into their homes. You see in the middle of the town square several heads stuck on pikes with their eyes gouged out, some of them of children. In the very center of that is a pole with a sign attached. + +THIS TOWN IS UNDER THE DOMINION OF THE ETERNALS. LAW WILL THRIVE UNDER THE NEW ORDER. DISOBEDIENCE WILL BE CRUSHED. + +OBEY AND LIVE. REBEL AND DIE. + +-GENERAL EDGAR + +You read the sign twice you to make sure what you’re reading is correct. You almost wish you could say you’re surprised, and perhaps that small naive part of you still is, but you’re disappointed more than anything else. You of course don’t know the whole story, but quite frankly you don’t even want to know. All this revelation does is make you want to get out of Empire lands as quick as possible because it seems like it really was ever good for is turning everybody into a wannabe sovereign. + +You hasten your pace to the Felkan border as you don’t wish to have any potential conflict with this new “regime” that seems to be trying to form here. It’s a shame, because you did think about trying to find Edgar before going to the border hoping that maybe he’d join you. Now? He’d probably try to convince you to join him. Seen that story play out too, you’d rather not have to go through it again. Edgar obviously has chosen his path to deal with the Empire’s inevitable collapse and you must choose yours. + +Eventually you get to the Felkan border which is predictably well guarded by several men with their fancy musket weapons. From what you’ve heard they aren’t very sporting, but can blow through even a heavily armored orc instantly. Could’ve used some of those yourself ten years ago. + +“Alright just stop right there. You come any closer and you’ll have a brand new hole in your body.” One of them says pointing his weapon at you. +“Sheesh Harry, can’t you come up with a better threat than that?” +“Fuck you Wally, we’re turning back refugees every damn day, they can’t all be winners.” +“Uh guys, I don’t think this one’s a refugee, he’s wearing military armor.” Another one says which at this point all of them point their weapons at you. + +You take this in stride you figured they wouldn’t exactly be welcoming. + +“Alright I don’t know why the hell an Empire soldier is here, but I suggest you just turn right back around. We’re supposed to be at peace now in case you didn’t know it, which judging by some of you lot you don’t.” Harry says. +“I no longer serve the Empire, I request to serve your kingdom instead.” You say. +“Ha ha ha, yeah right. Look even if we were inclined to believe you, we don’t need your kind especially since you can’t even keep your own shit together. We know you’re having a civil war or whatever it is right now. You’re lucky our king is such a pussy that he refuses to take advantage of the situation otherwise, we’d fucking own the Arat province right now.” Harry replies. +“Hell yeah Harry! We should’ve just marched in and took it when they were begging for peace!” Wally adds + +The one soldier’s words are most interesting. Especially how he speaks about his ruler so freely and without fear. It is apparent that despite their dislike of their ruler, yet they are very dedicated to their nation. It is sort of a comforting thing to see after so many you’ve encountered over the years weren’t. Perhaps you could find a place here, assuming you can get past this first obstacle. + +“Very well gentlemen the only thing I can tell you that might convince you, is that I am an Eternal, born and bred for combat. I say with no boast that I am the best of my kind and while I am not yet familiar with your weapons, I dare say my combat skill and knowledge would allow me to learn rather quickly. All I ask is that I be allowed to speak with someone with more authority so that I can be given a proper chance.” +“Eternal? You ain’t no Eternal, you’re way too old. I’ve seen those bastards running around on the other side of the border and they’re either in their twenties or younger. Dunno why you’d claim to be one of them for anyway, they’re not even human, they’re fucking soulless monsters. Heard enough horror stories from all the refugees we have to turn away. Some of those stories…pretty heartbreaking stuff…” Harry says getting a little choked about one of the stories he seems to be thinking about. It’s at that point one of his buddies pipes up. +“Hey, uh maybe he’s one of those OTHER Eternals.” +“Oh an original? I dunno, didn’t they not make too many of them?” Wally asks as if any of his buddies know. +“How the hell should I know Wally?” +“Well you were the fucker that brought it up! All right there’s an easy way to do this. Chuck, head back to Fort Soot, and see Captain Warrick, he’ll…” +“Hold on did you say Captain Warrick?” you ask. +“Yeah? And?” +“I know him seeing as we practically grew up together. He was believed to be dead, how is it that he’s a captain in the Felkan military?” +“Hmm, well perhaps you can ask him that yourself, if you really do know him. Okay change of plan, we’ll take you to see Captain Warrick, but you better not try anything funny. We’ll need you to get off that horse and hand over your weapons. Chuck and Wally, you’re with me, the rest of you keep an eye on the border as usual, we’ll be back soon.” + +You comply with their demands and have them march you to Fort Soot. The thing you notice immediately are all the trenches built into the land. Left overs from the war you imagine. When you get to Fort Soot it isn’t particularly large, though it does seem to be heavily defended with weapons you’ve heard about before. Cannons they’re called, and they are very devastating. You remember Gerald telling you how they could destroy stone golems as if they were made of paper. Makes you wonder why for all it’s power that the Empire didn’t fund money and time into developing such wonders as it certainly would’ve helped a lot more than their Eternal project. You quietly chuckle at the irony of that thought briefly thinking what you would’ve been doing now if there hadn’t been such a project. Probably not marching into a Felkan fort that’s for sure. + +When you are brought into Warrick’s office it’s like a trip to the past. Warrick’s changed quite a bit. He’s wearing an eyepatch for one thing and he’s lost most of his hair, but you’d still recognize him. He also recognizes you though he’s still having trouble believing it. + +“By the gods, is it really you?” +“Yes, it’s me. By the gods? Not by the Emperor anymore I see.” +“Nope and never will be again, which brings me to my next question. Why have you come here? I certainly hope it isn’t on some fool mission to bring me to justice for being a traitor…” +“Ha ha. Maybe at one time, but not anymore either. I guess you could say, I’m also a traitor, though I don’t think I am. The Empire betrayed itself a long time ago and I can’t serve a place that has not even the slightest concept of honor or loyalty even if it was the one that taught me such ideals.” +“I must say, I am a little surprised that you of all people would come to that conclusion. You were the most dedicated of all of us. I know that you are telling the truth though, as you were never a liar. So you’ve left the Empire then and come here to…?” +“Pledge myself to the Felkan Kingdom, though it seems I wasn’t the only one who had that idea.” +“Hah, yeah a bit of a long story that. Before we continue I’ll have to clear this with a lot of people first, and you’re probably going to have to prove yourself several times, but if you’re serious about this then you’ll most likely be accepted. I’ve found things work with a little more leniency in the Felkan Kingdom.” +“All I want is a new chance.” + +And so began your service to the Felkan Kingdom. +> Years pass... +Chapter 3A2: For the Kingdom! + + +Year 40 + +“I don’t understand why the hell we haven’t just gone marching into the Arat province and taken it from the Eternal Dominion. We have superior weaponry, and they aren’t even that organized. I don’t care how skilled they are in combat, they can’t stop a bullet.” A soldier complains. +“So, do you think we’ll really be going to war again?” his buddy asks. +“Is there any fucking doubt? The Empire might be dead, but that Eternal Dominion or whatever it’s called took its place and from what I can gather the ones running that are complete monsters. No small feat considering how the Empire was run…uh no offense sarge.” + +You shake your head as a sign that you could care less how they discuss the Empire, as you’re busy keeping on the look out for potential enemies and you tell them to stop talking and do likewise. Felkan soldiers tend to be a little more chatty than you’re used to, they also tend to be a little over confident in battle at times due to their reliance on firearms. Their melee skills aren’t bad, but they aren’t anywhere near those of a say an Empire soldier, let alone an Eternal. You learned how to handle a musket pretty quickly, but much like the same reason you avoided using bows and such, ranged combat just isn’t quite your thing. Still, you appreciate their destructive power and having an advantage so you have no problems carrying around a couple of flintlock pistols on your person. + +Another thing that’s different is a government that isn’t actually interested in conquest despite its people often expressing such desires. You’ve never met the king or any of the royals, but from what you’ve heard the king is more of a scholar rather than a warrior ruler. Some consider this a weakness, but you aren’t convinced that it is. The king apparently believes conquest would just drain the coffers of what is currently a healthy economy (despite a recent war) and it’s better to put that money to other uses. The Felkans in general are always looking for new ways to advance the quality of life for all through scientific advancement. You don’t remember that sort of thing in the Empire where the status quo was law. While magic was reserved for the elite and still not common in the Empire, it’s practically non-existent in the Felkan Kingdom, which might explain their tendency towards scientific endeavors. Well that, and the fact that a good number of gnomes live among them who probably produce most of the great inventions in the kingdom. + +Still, you often hear a lot of criticism about the king; sometimes it makes you wonder if there shouldn’t be cause for concern. If this were the Empire you would’ve been expected to harshly discipline all of those soldiers that insulted the Emperor. Here, there is a lot more freedom in what you can say. + +Yes, there are so many differences from the Empire and you often feel out of place. Hell you feel strange enough only being a sergeant again. Five years and they still haven’t felt that you warrant a promotion to a higher rank, you don’t know why they still don’t trust you as much as they trust Warrick considering he actually fought against them directly. Of course he actually saved the lives of some important Felkan royals, so that’s probably the reason. + +They don’t keep you stationed on the frontlines of the Arat border like they do with Warrick either, for the past several years you’ve been stationed at a fort at the other end of the kingdom, though the fort is so small it’s more like an outpost. Fort Green is located near a small village called Blossomdale and that’s basically what you’ve been defending. It’s a rather dull assignment and only broken up by the occasional skirmishes with gnolls, bandits or other denizens living in the untouched forests and the hills. You’ve tried to make the best of things. You keep your mind mostly focused on your job like you always do. + +One good thing is that the soldiers that serve under you don’t seem to mind your Eternal origins, but you do get the impression they’re a little afraid of you. Your superior officer Captain Eckers seems okay with you as well. He’s the only one stationed here that’s older than you and probably sees you as someone he has a little more in common with, not to mention you bring a little more discipline to the fort and encourage more drilling and combat training. + +Eventually your shift is over and as usual, nothing happened today. Your replacements take over your post and you make your way back to the fort. The rest of the soldiers head to Blossumdale presumably for a little R&R as they often do. + +When you get back to the fort, somebody tells you that Captain Eckers wants to see you, so you proceed to his office. + +“Have a seat sergeant. So was today any different than yesterday? Any hostiles to be dispatched or anything?” +“No sir, things were quiet as usual.” You answer. +“I figured as much. It’s been like this for the past eight months. You know it’s always been slow around here, but lately…(sigh) I don’t know. I suppose we should be glad this place isn’t under attack constantly, but the boredom of nothing to do is frustrating.” +“I know the feeling sir.” +“Heh, I’ll bet. Bred for war and all that…you once had a command at a fort at one time did you not?” +“Yes sir I did, in Rask.” +“Yeah, I’ve heard about that area. I’ll bet you never ran out of fighting up there.” +“Well sir, we sort of did since I did my best to try to exterminate the most dangerous threats. For a while things got slow then we had a series of uprisings became a problem and I had to be in involved in putting those down so I wasn’t quite as bored anymore.” +“Uprisings. Now that would be an interesting event, though I don’t think I’m quite that bored yet. Still, I wonder if one wouldn’t do some good. Get those royals off their asses and actually do something for a change.” +“I’m sure they do what they can…the land is prosperous after all.” You say unsure of how to react and still wondering why you were called in here. + +“Yeah, yeah, I know, but really what good is that going to do when the Eternal Dominion comes beating down our door? I served on the front lines of the war with the Empire from beginning to end, and I saw shit that even I wasn’t prepared to see. Even with our technological advantage, sometimes I don’t know how we managed to hold the Empire off…I guess you guys really had a lot of internal problems.” +“Yes, yes we did sir. A lot.” +“Right, and that’s the only reason why we held out. If the Empire had been a united front like it used to be… well me and you probably wouldn’t be having this conversation.” +“Captain, if I may interject for a moment. I have heard citizens and soldiers on more than one occasion suggest that the Felkan Kingdom should become more aggressive. I’m puzzled to as why if things are going well. after all the Empire engaged in continual conquest and I think we know how that turned out.” +“You have a point about the Empire, but you also should remember the Empire lasted several centuries before collapsing. I don’t presume to know exactly all the problems you had, but I can tell you what the problems we have are and why the people are getting sick of it.” +“And what are those sir?” +“Fucking gnomes.” +“Gnomes? Don’t they provide all the wonderful inventions for this Kingdom?” +“Yeah, and they also have been using us as protection for decades and the royals are in their fucking pockets. We aren’t really ruled by the royals, the damned gnomish inventors and businessmen rule us. They don’t want us expanding too much, because then we just might be harder to control. They also don’t want us to become too strong militarily because we just might turn it against them. I mean hell, I think you’ve seen how our soldiers aren’t exactly the best fighters and rely on firearms. I shudder to think if we ever had to actually fight without them. It didn’t always used to be that way, at least not back in my day. That’s why you’re a damn breath of fresh air. You’re actually a REAL warrior.” + +You just sit and listen as the captain begins getting even angrier during his rant. + +“You know why I’m stationed here in the ass end of nowhere? Because I spoke my mind on what I thought about gnomes and suggested we needed to stop being pussies and actually start taking more land. I mean take this place for example. If we had just a couple more platoons, and the orders, we could march into those hills nearby and wipe out all those damned gnolls for good. But what do we do instead? Wait around for the fuckers to attack us then sit here with our thumbs up our asses until they rebuild and do it all over again. We’re better than that! Or at least we used to be!” at this point Captain Eckers slams his fist on his desk. He’s silent with his head looking down for a moment and then looks up to address you. + +“…forgive me sergeant, I get a little emotional about this stuff sometimes. I really shouldn’t. Thank you for your report and listening. I just need someone to speak my mind to sometimes…anyway dismissed.” + +You get up and leave, thinking about what has transpired. + +It basically sounds like the captain doesn’t believe in his government anymore. You know what that’s like, but you just aren’t sure if it’s as bad as he’s claiming or he’s just a bitter old man that’s mad because times changed and he pissed off the wrong people in charge of his career. However as you’re reminded he isn’t the only person you’ve heard speaking out, he just happens to be the only one that’s gone into more detail than you’re used to. + +You also wonder if he told you all this stuff for a reason, is he hinting for you to do something? And what could you do? You’re a lower rank than him and not exactly high on the hierarchy. You’re also pretty much an outsider. Stirring up trouble isn’t exactly something you should be doing, and you pledged yourself to serve the kingdom and its king, not overthrow it. If you were going to be doing that, you might as well have joined the Eternal Dominion. + +You aren’t sure of what to make of all this gnome business though, if that is even true. You’ve never paid too much attention to them being in a lot of the positions of power. Part of you though does make you wonder about who you’re really serving and if it is really the gnomes like the captain claims, then your whole oath to the kingdom is pretty much a joke. Then again if they really are controlling everything, does it really make a difference? Things seem to still be running well and you personally just don’t have any real proof that there is some conspiracy even though it wouldn’t surprise you too much if there was one going on. + +One thing you know though, if others are feeling like the captain does, this isn’t going to go away. This is going to get worse; in fact it may already be too late to stop something from occurring. You could very well find yourself serving in another collapsing government again. +> Report to the captain +You don’t know if this is actually going to do any good, but if the captain ever decides to suddenly secede from the Felkan Kingdom, you want someone to know that you weren’t part of it from the beginning. The problem there isn’t a higher-ranking officer at the fort and you don’t really know anybody that you could report this to. You suppose you write a letter to Major Samuels at Fort Smoke. He’s in charge of the whole Ibim province, but then you think what if he feels the same way as the captain? If that’s the case, then you’d probably become hated not just at your fort, but in other circles as well. You’d possibly even be demoted or worse. You’ve managed to make a life here with minimal friction, and you’d hate to just throw that all away, but you have to do something. For good or ill your duty is to the kingdom now and you need to defend against all potential threats, external and internal, and from your experience the internal ones are the worst. + +That’s when you come up with the idea that you’ll write to Warrick about this. He might not be able to do anything about it considering he’s in another province, but he’s about the only one you can trust and maybe he knows something and can at least give you advice. + +You write a letter to Warrick that night and hand it to a professional courier in Blossumdale the next day. Not having anything else to do, you return to your duties. Days pass into weeks and weeks pass into months. Just when you’re starting to wonder if your letter got intercepted and someone having sinister plans for you, you get a letter back from Warrick. + +You’re anxious to see his reply and you find a quiet place to open it up and read it private. You’re expecting a long letter, but instead you get a short one that’s to the point. + +Things are already in motion to remedy the situation soon and your duty to the kingdom has been noted. + +Warrick + +You can only guess that Captain Eckers will soon be gone with wording like that. You didn’t expect anything to be done either, just advice. Warrick must have better connections than you thought. + +Another week passes since you received Warrick’s reply and Fort Green is visited by a general with his personal assistants, a couple of royals and a well-dressed gnome. The visit is unexpected by everyone, especially Captain Eckers since he’d know first if anyone was scheduled to visit. + +Captain Eckers and several others are taken into rooms and questioned separately. The rest of you are ordered to go about your business and to not interfere. Later you are called in as well. You find yourself face to face with one of the generals. General Benson. He’s probably about the same age as Eckers, though obviously more successful. + +“Sergeant, I’m going to make this quick. You are the one who wrote the letter to Captain Warrick are you not?” General Benson asks. +“Yes, sir.” +“And why did you write to Captain Warrick about your concerns? Why not write to Major Samuels? He is the superior officer in charge of this province.” +“Well, I wasn’t sure if I should sir. For all I knew he might’ve had sympathies with Captain Eckers and if that had been the case, my situation would not have been a good one.” +“Hold on sergeant, are you telling me Major Samuels is also part of this?” +“No, I don’t even know the Major sir, I was just being cautious on my part. I wrote to Warrick because…well he’s the only person I felt I could absolutely trust.” + +The general is silent for a moment while he looks you up and down. + +“Tell me, have you had any conflict while being here?” +“Conflict with the other soldiers? No sir, can’t say that I have, I tend to just do my job and keep to myself as far as social matters are concerned.” +“What about your relationship with Captain Eckers?” +“It’s a respectful one sir, I feel no malice towards him nor perceive any towards me.” +“Yet you felt the need to report him.” +“Well sir, I thought it was something that might be needed to be brought to the attention of those in a higher position than me. Dissension in the ranks is no good sir. These sorts of things need to be taken care of before they spread. I know from direct experience, sir.” +“Hmmm, yes I suppose you would…” + +General Benson continues to study you as if he’s trying to read your mind, after a minute of this, he backs off and starts to pack up some papers on a nearby desk. + +“I think we have everything we need to know. We weren’t exactly sure about you for a long time, and quite frankly some of us still aren’t. Your lack of trust among your fellow soldiers is concerning, but considering what we’ve found here, possibly understandable. As of now, I’m promoting you to captain and putting you in charge of Fort Green until further notice. You’ll be receiving some new soldiers soon to replace the men that will be leaving here. And hopefully this reward for your dedication to the Kingdom alleviates some of your trust issues.” +“It will sir. It will. Thanks you sir.” +“Very good, you’re dismissed.” + +You step out of the room feeling a sense of accomplishment. This is truly the first time since you pledged loyalty to the Felkan Kingdom that you feel appreciated. With this new command you actually feel like you’re back to where you’re supposed to be again, which is something you haven’t felt since you were taken off of your command in Rask. Granted Fort Green is no Fort Destiny, but it’s better than where you were. + +As for Captain Eckers, he and several other soldiers are escorted out of the fort as the rest of you stand by and watch. On his way out Eckers glares at you, he doesn’t say anything, but you can feel as if his stare is burning a hole in you. He knows someone said something, and he knows that someone was you. It’s too bad it had to be this way, but what’s done is done and it’s time to move on. + +Over the next few months you begin running the fort a lot more efficiently, the soldiers aren’t particularly thrilled about it since they’ve gotten used to not doing as much under Captain Eckers, which is another good reason why he needed to leave. Instead of whining, he should’ve been thinking up stuff to keep everyone’s mind’s occupied. + +After a few more months of extra training, you pick the soldier who has shown the most promise and pull them aside in your office for a talk. + +“Let’s see… Sergeant Dawn Young…easy name to remember. You’re one of the newer transfers here. Says that before you came here, you served on the Kilania Plains. Not exactly familiar with that area, but I hear it’s infested with centaurs. Half man half horse or something like that?” +“Yes sir, they are little more than wild beast. They get drunk, breed, start fights and from what I can tell that’s about it.” +“Hmm, bet they were a joy to fight. Well from your record it says you successfully lead several attacks on them. I’m guessing they are no longer a problem anymore?” +“Well they are less of a problem than they were. I was told to hold back, by my commanding officer at the time. I know if we had pressed against them though we could’ve wiped them out completely though.” She remark with a slightly annoyed tone. + +Sounds like typical Felkan policy. You have to admit, Eckers did have a point about certain things. While you’re not going to support possible rebellion like he did, you are going to change some things. + +“Okay you sound like the kind of soldier I need. Consider yourself promoted to lieutenant and you’re my new second.” +“…wow…thank you sir!” +“Don’t go thanking me just yet, you still have live to enjoy it. I want you to take two platoons of soldiers, march over to those hills a few miles away and I want you to wipe out ALL of the gnolls that you see.” +“All of them sir?” +“All of them. Their warriors, their citizens, their women, their children. If there are little baby gnolls sucking on marrowbones in their cribs, I want you to kill them too.” + +Your orders are a little shocking to Dawn. She’s probably never heard anyone commanding the murder of infants before let alone the total war doctrine you’re following, even if it is against a bunch of barbaric monsters. + +“Lieutenant, am I going to have to find someone else to do this?” you ask. +“…Um no sir. I just…well…the other soldiers sir. I’m not sure if they’ll follow such orders.” +“Oh yes they will. Because it’s going to be YOUR job to make sure they follow them. Besides I’ve noticed guns tend to take away a lot of the emotional impact of killing. Not even like you have to look someone in the eye and take away their life. You can sit back comfortably from a few feet away and pull the trigger. They’ll be able to kill baby gnolls a lot easier than you think, and after this first time, it’s only going to get easier. I’m sure you’ll do fine, I have faith that you’re up to this task. I wouldn’t have picked you if I didn’t. You’re dismissed.” + +Looking a little overwhelmed, Dawn nods and leaves your office. + +Now all you have to concern yourself about is whether your changes get you thrown out of the fort like Captain Eckers. +> Years pass... +Year 45 + +“They’ll probably attack at night sir.” Dawn says to you. +“Yeah, gnolls are predictable that way. Is Blossumdale under control? +“Yes sir, we executed most of the rabble rousers, the rest have shut up complaining about food rationing and troops permanently stationed in the town now sir.” +“Good. Ooooooh I’m gonna hear it for that one.” You groan. +“I don’t see why sir, you were merely keeping order and doing what needed to be done to help protect the kingdom.” +“Perhaps, but the top brass won’t see it that way. There won’t be any way to keep this one quiet. News is going to travel eventually, despite the fact that I’m already keeping a lot of stuff out of the reports as it is. Hell, I’ve been getting blamed for stirring up a so called hornet’s nest with the gnolls since this war began.” +“That’s not true sir, if you hadn’t sent me into those hills all those years ago, we wouldn’t have found out that they’d been planning a mass invasion for quite some time.” +“That may be the case, but it doesn’t change the fact that they need to blame me for whatever reason.” +“Sir if they’re so displeased with you, why have they not just replaced you?” +“Good question. I imagine it’s because the gnolls are a very real threat and that I am actually doing a good job at holding back the gnolls with what little resources I do have. Everyone is still so worried about the Eternal Dominion possibly invading that they’re shoving all the troops along that border. Oh well, I guess I should be grateful they finally sent us some new cannons, though it took three years to get them. Okay lieutenant, that will be all, I suggest you prepare everyone because I get the feeling the gnolls’ attack tonight is going to be a big one.” + +Dawn nods and leaves your office. She’s a good second; you couldn’t have picked a better choice. You’re actually proud of how all your soldiers have stepped up over the past few years. All they needed was a little more discipline and something to keep them focused like a relentless army of hyena men eager to rip them apart and feast on their bodies. + +Despite the fact that the top brass nearly hates you and you’re on the eve of what is probably going to be a vicious battle. You feel good, like the best you’ve felt in years. You have a command, you have soldiers that are utterly dedicated and you have a ruthless enemy to fight. The excitement of battle is near and you can’t wait to bask in the violence of it. This is what you were BORN for. + +As darkness falls, you stand on top of the battlements and see the gnolls arrive right on time. They might be fierce warriors, but their ongoing crap strategy of throwing as many troops at you as possible isn’t working for them. You think orcs might’ve even been smarter than that, well at least Gruz would’ve been. There are an awful lot of them though this time, it appears that you were right, tonight’s battle is going to be a big one. + +As the horde gets closer, you also see several flying creatures in the distance. Wyverns. The bastards actually managed to tame wyverns. Looks like they’re a little brighter than you initially gave them credit for. You tell the cannon crews to fire upon the wyverns as soon as they get in range, all musket men on top of the fort as well. + +You stare down at the temporary wall you’ve built around the fort where some of your other troops are guarding and hope it’ll hold up well. They’ll eventually break it down, but hopefully not before heavy losses. You also hope the fortifications at Blossumdale will hold out. You couldn’t spare as many troops there, but you’re confident that Dawn will be able to handle the situation if the gnolls split up their attack. + +The battle starts off with the gnolls attempting a rain of arrows technique, fortunately you prepared for that by having everyone equipped with shields nearby. The Felkans as a general rule don’t use them too much anymore due to their reliance on firearms, but your re-emphasis on close combat training made your request for a shipment of shields quite logical. + +The wyverns then dive in from above while the horde concentrates on below. A couple of your new cannons prove their worth by landing a nice cannon ball into the side of one their heads, even better when it crashes into the gnoll horde. Another cannon ball tears a hole in the wing of another causing it and it’s rider to attempt a crash landing in the distance. + +Out of the remaining three wyverns, one veers away and heads to Blossumdale, while the other two focus on the fort. You order all your men to fire upon one of them which riddles it with gunshot wounds. Not enough to kill it however as lands on the fort and manages crush and bite some of the cannon crews. It’s rider fires a bow taking out a musket man next to you, and that’s when you make a running leap forward to stab the wyvern right in the neck. Blood gushes out and the beast flails about, causing the rider to fall off and over the fort walls to the ground below. + +You dodge the beast’s attempt at biting you in two and make a long slash cut through one of it’s wing so it can’t fly away. It tries to smash you with it’s tail, but you roll out of the way and finally land a killing blow by jumping on its back and running your sword through the top of it’s head. + +The other wyvern has been faring better against the remaining men on the fort roof, though it’s rider lies dead with a gunshot wound to his face. Since the beast is intent on hovering above rather than actually landing you have to make another running jump to grab on to one of its feet. The creature attempts to shake you off, but you manage to hang on long enough to stab upward several times into it’s soft underbelly. The creature twists and roars in pain, this time managing to cause you to fall to the fort roof, you are then covered in gouts of wyvern blood and chunks of entrails. You order your remaining men to fire upon it as it desperately tries to fly away. The musket balls do their job and the beast falls to the war zone bellow, unfortunately crashing into one of the temporary walls you put up. Granted the dead beast’s bulk is now acting a small block now, but the gnoll horde has a slightly easier access than it did before. + +You tell your men to start firing upon the horde, which is starting to surround the entire fort, while you rush down to the ground floor to help out the rest of your troops. You also notice that some of the horde is indeed breaking off into a separate group and moving past the fort towards Blossumdale. + +Ladders go up to scale the walls, and axes attempt to bring them down completely. Some of the gnolls have already gotten in. Won’t be long before they completely overrun this first layer of defense. After hacking down several of them, you tell all your men to fall back to the front gates and inside the fort. You have everyone barricade the doors as best you can while telling several soldiers on top to start dropping firebombs on the gnolls from the roof. + +Several explosions deafen the ears of all involved in this battle, smokes completely envelopes the fort and gnoll body parts are covering the battlefield. After briefly falling back, the gnolls continue their attack and try to scale the fort walls with ladders and break down the front gates with a battering ram. + +“We’re out of firebombs and we’re running low on gunpowder sir!” one of your men says. +“We’ve greatly decreased their numbers now, we can take the rest of them hand to hand, hell just start dropping the rest of the cannon balls on their heads when they try to come up!” + +The gnolls fail at scaling the walls, but their size and strength makes their attempts at breaking down the front gate a lot more successful. Dozens of them come pouring in and you’re the first one to charge into battle. You aren’t even paying much attention to the rest of your troops at this point, you’re goal is to just kill as many as these gnolls as possible. You were covered in blood already, now you’ve just replaced one coat of blood for another. + +Eventually after lopping off the heads of several of these hyenas you see one their number arrive standing much larger than the rest. It’s the leader. The biggest one is ALWAYS the leader with these types. + +After making that annoying laughing growl sound that they love to make the gnoll leader sees you and swings his huge morning star into the floor near your feet. When he lifts it up to strike again you attempt to close the gap and you duck just in time for it to miss your head. You bring the gnoll leader down with a chop to his shins. Like a great tree he falls to his knees and you chop his head off like you’ve done with so many of his other kin. + +One of the gnolls seeing their leader dead, and already taken considerable losses, the gnoll shouts something in his strange language and they begin to retreat. + +“We’ve won!” a soldier shouts. +“No, not yet, we’ve still got gnolls at Blossumdale, not to mention not all of these fuckers are running away yet.” + +While you are pretty certain the battle here is indeed finishing up, you aren’t sure what the situation is at Blossumdale. Besides Blossumdale, part of you is specifically concerned about Dawn, you know you really shouldn’t be as she’s a very capable soldier, but the concern is still there. + +There is still mopping up to do around the fort, but you really should send reinforcements to Blossumdale, the question is whether or not you should lead them personally. +> Lead the reinforcements personally +The situation at Blossumdale needs to be looked after directly, the fort will be fine now. Besides saving the town, your concern for Dawn is great and you want to make sure she’s okay. After dispatching the remaining gnolls in the fort, you order a platoon to accompany you to Blossumdale while the rest of the soldiers reinforce the fort. You rush as quickly as you can to Blossumdale. + +Call it bad luck, rash behavior, or the fate of the battle, but unfortunately you never make it. On your way to Blossumdale, gnolls that retreated from the fort are still very much lurking about on the fringes of the area. A group of them notices you, but you’re in such a hurry you don’t notice them in time. + +Several arrows fly out from their hiding spot and bring down several of your men. You try to look for somewhere to hide and take cover, but you’re completely out in the open. A couple more arrows fly and they hit their mark, and one that flies into your neck is the last one you feel. + +As you lay dying, you can only hope that Dawn is alive and well, because you aren’t due to your lapse in judgment.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 45 + +“They’ll probably attack at night sir.” Dawn says to you. +“Yeah, gnolls are predictable that way. Is Blossumdale under control? +“Yes sir, we executed most of the rabble rousers, the rest have shut up complaining about food rationing and troops permanently stationed in the town now sir.” +“Good. Ooooooh I’m gonna hear it for that one.” You groan. +“I don’t see why sir, you were merely keeping order and doing what needed to be done to help protect the kingdom.” +“Perhaps, but the top brass won’t see it that way. There won’t be any way to keep this one quiet. News is going to travel eventually, despite the fact that I’m already keeping a lot of stuff out of the reports as it is. Hell, I’ve been getting blamed for stirring up a so called hornet’s nest with the gnolls since this war began.” +“That’s not true sir, if you hadn’t sent me into those hills all those years ago, we wouldn’t have found out that they’d been planning a mass invasion for quite some time.” +“That may be the case, but it doesn’t change the fact that they need to blame me for whatever reason.” +“Sir if they’re so displeased with you, why have they not just replaced you?” +“Good question. I imagine it’s because the gnolls are a very real threat and that I am actually doing a good job at holding back the gnolls with what little resources I do have. Everyone is still so worried about the Eternal Dominion possibly invading that they’re shoving all the troops along that border. Oh well, I guess I should be grateful they finally sent us some new cannons, though it took three years to get them. Okay lieutenant, that will be all, I suggest you prepare everyone because I get the feeling the gnolls’ attack tonight is going to be a big one.” + +Dawn nods and leaves your office. She’s a good second; you couldn’t have picked a better choice. You’re actually proud of how all your soldiers have stepped up over the past few years. All they needed was a little more discipline and something to keep them focused like a relentless army of hyena men eager to rip them apart and feast on their bodies. + +Despite the fact that the top brass nearly hates you and you’re on the eve of what is probably going to be a vicious battle. You feel good, like the best you’ve felt in years. You have a command, you have soldiers that are utterly dedicated and you have a ruthless enemy to fight. The excitement of battle is near and you can’t wait to bask in the violence of it. This is what you were BORN for. + +As darkness falls, you stand on top of the battlements and see the gnolls arrive right on time. They might be fierce warriors, but their ongoing crap strategy of throwing as many troops at you as possible isn’t working for them. You think orcs might’ve even been smarter than that, well at least Gruz would’ve been. There are an awful lot of them though this time, it appears that you were right, tonight’s battle is going to be a big one. + +As the horde gets closer, you also see several flying creatures in the distance. Wyverns. The bastards actually managed to tame wyverns. Looks like they’re a little brighter than you initially gave them credit for. You tell the cannon crews to fire upon the wyverns as soon as they get in range, all musket men on top of the fort as well. + +You stare down at the temporary wall you’ve built around the fort where some of your other troops are guarding and hope it’ll hold up well. They’ll eventually break it down, but hopefully not before heavy losses. You also hope the fortifications at Blossumdale will hold out. You couldn’t spare as many troops there, but you’re confident that Dawn will be able to handle the situation if the gnolls split up their attack. + +The battle starts off with the gnolls attempting a rain of arrows technique, fortunately you prepared for that by having everyone equipped with shields nearby. The Felkans as a general rule don’t use them too much anymore due to their reliance on firearms, but your re-emphasis on close combat training made your request for a shipment of shields quite logical. + +The wyverns then dive in from above while the horde concentrates on below. A couple of your new cannons prove their worth by landing a nice cannon ball into the side of one their heads, even better when it crashes into the gnoll horde. Another cannon ball tears a hole in the wing of another causing it and it’s rider to attempt a crash landing in the distance. + +Out of the remaining three wyverns, one veers away and heads to Blossumdale, while the other two focus on the fort. You order all your men to fire upon one of them which riddles it with gunshot wounds. Not enough to kill it however as lands on the fort and manages crush and bite some of the cannon crews. It’s rider fires a bow taking out a musket man next to you, and that’s when you make a running leap forward to stab the wyvern right in the neck. Blood gushes out and the beast flails about, causing the rider to fall off and over the fort walls to the ground below. + +You dodge the beast’s attempt at biting you in two and make a long slash cut through one of it’s wing so it can’t fly away. It tries to smash you with it’s tail, but you roll out of the way and finally land a killing blow by jumping on its back and running your sword through the top of it’s head. + +The other wyvern has been faring better against the remaining men on the fort roof, though it’s rider lies dead with a gunshot wound to his face. Since the beast is intent on hovering above rather than actually landing you have to make another running jump to grab on to one of its feet. The creature attempts to shake you off, but you manage to hang on long enough to stab upward several times into it’s soft underbelly. The creature twists and roars in pain, this time managing to cause you to fall to the fort roof, you are then covered in gouts of wyvern blood and chunks of entrails. You order your remaining men to fire upon it as it desperately tries to fly away. The musket balls do their job and the beast falls to the war zone bellow, unfortunately crashing into one of the temporary walls you put up. Granted the dead beast’s bulk is now acting a small block now, but the gnoll horde has a slightly easier access than it did before. + +You tell your men to start firing upon the horde, which is starting to surround the entire fort, while you rush down to the ground floor to help out the rest of your troops. You also notice that some of the horde is indeed breaking off into a separate group and moving past the fort towards Blossumdale. + +Ladders go up to scale the walls, and axes attempt to bring them down completely. Some of the gnolls have already gotten in. Won’t be long before they completely overrun this first layer of defense. After hacking down several of them, you tell all your men to fall back to the front gates and inside the fort. You have everyone barricade the doors as best you can while telling several soldiers on top to start dropping firebombs on the gnolls from the roof. + +Several explosions deafen the ears of all involved in this battle, smokes completely envelopes the fort and gnoll body parts are covering the battlefield. After briefly falling back, the gnolls continue their attack and try to scale the fort walls with ladders and break down the front gates with a battering ram. + +“We’re out of firebombs and we’re running low on gunpowder sir!” one of your men says. +“We’ve greatly decreased their numbers now, we can take the rest of them hand to hand, hell just start dropping the rest of the cannon balls on their heads when they try to come up!” + +The gnolls fail at scaling the walls, but their size and strength makes their attempts at breaking down the front gate a lot more successful. Dozens of them come pouring in and you’re the first one to charge into battle. You aren’t even paying much attention to the rest of your troops at this point, you’re goal is to just kill as many as these gnolls as possible. You were covered in blood already, now you’ve just replaced one coat of blood for another. + +Eventually after lopping off the heads of several of these hyenas you see one their number arrive standing much larger than the rest. It’s the leader. The biggest one is ALWAYS the leader with these types. + +After making that annoying laughing growl sound that they love to make the gnoll leader sees you and swings his huge morning star into the floor near your feet. When he lifts it up to strike again you attempt to close the gap and you duck just in time for it to miss your head. You bring the gnoll leader down with a chop to his shins. Like a great tree he falls to his knees and you chop his head off like you’ve done with so many of his other kin. + +One of the gnolls seeing their leader dead, and already taken considerable losses, the gnoll shouts something in his strange language and they begin to retreat. + +“We’ve won!” a soldier shouts. +“No, not yet, we’ve still got gnolls at Blossumdale, not to mention not all of these fuckers are running away yet.” + +While you are pretty certain the battle here is indeed finishing up, you aren’t sure what the situation is at Blossumdale. Besides Blossumdale, part of you is specifically concerned about Dawn, you know you really shouldn’t be as she’s a very capable soldier, but the concern is still there. + +There is still mopping up to do around the fort, but you really should send reinforcements to Blossumdale, the question is whether or not you should lead them personally. +> Stay behind and secure the fort +You need to stay here and oversee the purging of this fort, and the surrounding area. You can’t start running off half assed because you’re a little worried about one soldier even if she is one of the best ones you’ve had under your command. (Not including your fellow Eternals of course) + +After slaying all the gnolls still in the fort, you regroup your soldiers and tell one of the sergeants to head over the Blossumdale with a couple platoons and help in whatever way they can. You tell the rest of your soldiers to start rebuilding the walls, clear out the dead bodies and to help you do a sweep of the area. + +Your sweep of the area is a tedious, but vital one. A lot of the gnolls retreated to various areas just enough to be out of sight, but were obviously still attempting to regroup again. Good thing you stayed behind to mop up all these little clusters so they didn’t form a big one again. By the time you’re satisfied with your results, the sun is coming up and you return to the fort more than a little tired. + +When you get back, you’re happy to see Dawn there. + +“Sir, Blossumdale still stands sir, the rest of the soldiers are securing it and the area.” +“Glad to hear it, and glad to see you made it out in one peace. Was the fighting heavy?” +“It was, but from the looks of it, the fighting was worse here. The only problem we had is with a wyvern.” +“Lucky you only had one. We had four of them and I had to kill two of them myself.” +“That’s one more than me then, sir.” + +You smile at her remark and after a brief discussion on what the next course of action will be, you get some rest. + +Over the next few months the gnoll attacks die down, but they don’t stop completely. Most of your activities involve going further into the wilderness and taking out whatever villages or camps they have. In the meantime your superiors are telling you to stop your actions as the war has been won and now you’re just using up valuable manpower and resources. You really aren’t though; you’ve been doing just fine with the limited supplies that they see fit to give you. Somehow this situation seems very familiar… + +While your superiors do a lot of complaining, nothing actually happens to you. It would seem they’re bitching at you just for the sake of bitching. The gnolls might not actually be able to invade properly anymore, but if you let them regroup again, they’ll try it. Your goal is to purge them all, or at the very least drive them away so they don’t try it ever again. + +Year 50 + +“This is bullshit sir, executing those protestors was the right thing to do!” +“Calm down lieutenant.” You say to Dawn. +“No sir, this isn’t right! They can’t punish you just for doing your fucking job!” +“Okay lieutenant I said calm down! Now listen, I need you on your best behavior, because they’re going to question all of us. I saw this happen to my predecessor. (sigh) Who knows maybe I did go too far, I mean I haven’t exactly been following Felkan policies, I’ve been sort of doing my own thing out here for the past ten years.” +“Yeah, but your actions are protecting the kingdom! How can that be wrong?” + +You look at Dawn and see that she’s changed quite a bit since she stood here in this office several years ago hesitant to kill baby gnolls. She’s practically like an Empire soldier now. Everyone in this fort is and that’s what is no doubt getting you into trouble. Still, they shouldn’t be blamed for what you just ordered them to do. + +“Well, maybe I was protecting the kingdom, but I still wasn’t following the laws. And I certainly broke enough of them. Just don’t worry; I’ll do everything in my power to make sure nobody here gets blamed. I mean you were all just following orders.” +“Thank you sir, but I knew exactly what I was doing and if they put you against the wall in front of a firing squad for treason, then I want to be standing right next to you.” +“…that’s a very…enthusiastic sentiment, but I don’t think that will be necessary. I mean maybe this won’t even be all that bad, they did at least warn me that they were coming. They didn’t even do that with Eckers. Look lieutenant…Dawn, whatever happens don’t go doing something foolish like trying to save me or sacrificing yourself or something. Just continue to serve the kingdom and try to follow the laws the best you can, okay?” + +Dawn is visible upset by all this. She turns her head for a moment while sniffling, then turns back to you and agrees. She then excuses herself to get ready for this investigation. Wasn’t really until this moment that you see that you’ve have a very deep effect on her. You didn’t expect to, as you treated her like any one else under your command, well maybe you did compliment her a little bit more, but that’s only because she did more. + +Eventually the investigation group gets arrives. To your surprise it consists of only two people, General Benson, and that gnome you saw before during Captain Ecker’s investigation, you certainly hope this turns out a lot better. + +All your troops stand at attention and you greet the general. After a brief exchange the well dress gnome parts company with the general who approaches you and just shakes his head. + +“I knew we made a bad decision.” He says and motions you to your office. + +You sit down and the general sits down and he begins his questions right away. + +“Let’s get right to it shall we? You are aware that you’re serving the Felkan Kingdom aren’t you?” +“Yes sir.” +“Oh? You do? Well then, is there any particular reason why you’re treating this area as if you still serving your long dead Empire?” +“I’m not sure I follow you sir.” +“Don’t play stupid with me, I’ve read the reports and followed all your actions for the past ten years! You’ve trained these soldiers to the point that they’re fanatically loyal and dedicated, you started a war with the gnolls and didn’t stop hostilities until you completely eliminated their species, during which time you executed several Felkan citizens in Blossumdale and now you’ve done it again! Tell me, is war, murder and genocide all they taught you in the Empire?” +“Basically.” +“You might not want to be so flip with me, Eternal, your ass is just a step away from the gallows yourself.” +“Sir, with all due respect if I was such a problem for the past ten years, why not get rid of me before now?” +“Ohhh, believe me, if I’d had any say in the matter you would’ve been.” +“Sir, everything I’ve done has been for the good of the Felkan Kingdom. I mean loyal and dedicated soldiers, since when is that a bad thing? Soldiers are supposed to follow orders of their superiors and government. That’s sort of their whole purpose.” +“That’s rather ironic coming from you who seems to blatantly ignores orders like not starting wars.” +“Sir, the gnolls were an ongoing problem even if they weren’t planning an invasion. Isn’t it better that they’re all dead so that Felkan citizens don’t have to worry about getting robbed and killed on the roads? Blossomdale probably wouldn’t be standing if we hadn’t stopped them.” +“Do you really want to bring up Blossumdale captain?” +“Why the hell not? You’re bringing everything else up.” You say starting to get angry. +“Watch your tone, and if you insist…I already know your half assed excuse for executing citizens during the war with the gnolls, but please explain to me why you did it again this time, just so I can try to understand your fucked Eternal logic.” +“Well it’s rather simple, some of the citizens were protesting the new tax that the king imposed. They were in front of the town hall screaming at their mayor as if he was directly to blame. We stepped in to calm them down, they started getting more violent and began throwing rocks. We told them to stop, they didn’t, so we opened fire on them. After rounding up the main rabble rousers who didn’t get shot the first time, we executed them properly.” +“And that’s it? That’s your excuse for gunning down several citizens?” +“If they hadn’t done , what we told them not to do, they’d still be alive right now, sir.” +“And there it is again, they didn’t do what you told them to do, so they got killed, but when it comes to you, you apparently do whatever the hell you want.” +“That’s not true sir I was trying to stop a potential rebellion, you can ask the mayor and any of my soldiers about the situation and…” +“I’m not asking them, I’m asking you! You wantonly executing protestors like that is more likely to cause a damn rebellion not stop one! Or… maybe that’s what you really want Eternal? I mean that’s what you’re doing isn’t it? You train the troops to be utterly loyal, not to the Kingdom but to YOU. You’re starting wars, you’re executing Felkans which is going to cause more harm than good. Maybe this is your way of getting revenge on us? Perhaps you’re trying to start your own little Empire with you as the emperor this time?” + +You can’t believe these accusations. Here you’ve been doing what you can for the Felkan Kingdom by fighting off hostiles and putting down dissidents and you’re the one getting accused of treason. You just rub your hands over your face trying hard not to chuckle too much at the dark humor in all this. General Benson just stares at you disapprovingly as he usually does, but remains silent. It is at this point the well-dressed gnome walks in and nods at the general, he lights up some pipeweed and stands in the corner observing. + +It’s at that moment you think back to Captain Ecker’s accusations on the gnomes. Maybe he was right after all. Hardly matters at this point, because as far you’re concerned everyone in charge here has been an asshole. + +“Sir, I chopped up a shitload of gnolls and executed dissidents in the service of this fucking kingdom and the whole time I’ve done it all I’ve gotten is bitching and general ungratefulness, yet I haven’t complained. I didn’t even complain when you fuckers never sent me supplies on time to help fight the gnoll invasion. I execute some worthless fucking peasants stirring up shit, and I’m the fucking bad guy some how. Sir, I don’t need to re-create the Empire, because as fucked up as the government policies are here, I THOUGHT I WAS STILL SERVING THE FUCKING THING!” you shout. + +You slump back in your chair still fuming after your outburst, and that’s when the gnome speaks up in between puffs of his pipe. + +“So, Eternal did you want to leave?” he asks. +“What?” +“I’m asking you, did you want to leave? If you can’t find a place here, then perhaps it would be better if you left. In gratitude of all your service to the kingdom, this is a one time offer for you to leave free and clear. There will be no repercussions except that you can never return here.” +> Leave +You’ve tried to fit in here, but maybe it just isn’t meant to be. The Felkan Kingdom hasn’t given you the sense of purpose that you wanted except during the time you were fighting the gnolls and that’s only because you created an environment that you felt comfortable in. This place operates in such a way that is at odds with how you do things and this “generous” offer that the gnome has given you is probably the best you’re going to get, if you insist on staying. + +When you tell the gnome you’re going to leave, General Benson is obviously pleased, though the gnome doesn’t gloat. He simply nods and tells you that perhaps this is for the best. He assures you that nobody will be punished for any of the actions taken place her and that Lieutenant Young will take command of the fort. He also says he hopes you can find somewhere you belong. + +You pack up your stuff and attempt to make a silent exit, but that’s doomed to failure. Most of your soldiers want you to stay and even want to join you, but you tell them all that the Felkan Kingdom needs them and that there duty is here. Dawn is the most upset, but she manages to keep it together + +As you put Fort Green and the Felkan Kingdom further behind you, you start to wonder what you’re going to do now. Thinking back to what the gnome said, “Some place you belong” and you wonder if you do belong in the Eternal Dominion. From what you’ve heard Edgar’s been getting more organized, he’s even managed to conquer some of the old territories that the Empire lost. Perhaps he could use your help and maybe you could find your place there. + +Another part of you wonders if you shouldn’t just leave this whole region. Travel to someplace far away and completely different. Maybe you need a brand new start. +> Travel to the Eternal Dominion +You’re an Eternal and while you never cared much for the new generation of Eternals, it’s probably the best chance you’ve got at feeling a sense of greater purpose. Eternal Dominion is in its own way sort of the successor to the Empire, so maybe with a little work, you can get things going to how you like them again. + +As you make your trek back east, you get the feeling that you’re being followed, but when you reach the outskirts of the Eternal Dominion you no longer have that feeling. You travel through the southern portion of the Arat province and stop at a small village where you ask the local innkeeper where the nearest Eternal stronghold is. He tells you there’s a new fort several miles away where there are some Eternals stationed, he also mentions that you shouldn’t go messing around with them as they don’t like anyone who isn’t an Eternal to be wandering near there without reason. + +“Well guess they’ll like me then.” You say and leave. + +When you get to the fort you are predictably stopped and given the hard looks. You’re not intimidated in the least and explain who you are. They seem a little skeptical at first, obviously they’ve heard of you, but since they never served directly under you, they aren’t sure what you look like. One of them tells you to wait, while one of their fellows goes to ask someone inside. + +You stand around waiting, while the remaining guards continue to give you dirty looks. Eventually one of them comes back out. + +“Well? You confirmed who I was?” +“Yeah, our captain said he served under you, during the rebellions in Quala. Watch your head.” + +This strange remark causes you to instinctively look up just in time to see someone pointing a musket at you from the top of the fort. Then you hear a loud blast and the top of your head is blown off in an explosion of skull and gray matter. You continue to stand and stare up for a moment and with what’s left of your brain you realize the bastard who just shot you was one those new eternals present when you killed private Felding. + +Your body then collapses in a heap, while the rest of the new eternals congratulate their captain on his shot.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’ve tried to fit in here, but maybe it just isn’t meant to be. The Felkan Kingdom hasn’t given you the sense of purpose that you wanted except during the time you were fighting the gnolls and that’s only because you created an environment that you felt comfortable in. This place operates in such a way that is at odds with how you do things and this “generous” offer that the gnome has given you is probably the best you’re going to get, if you insist on staying. + +When you tell the gnome you’re going to leave, General Benson is obviously pleased, though the gnome doesn’t gloat. He simply nods and tells you that perhaps this is for the best. He assures you that nobody will be punished for any of the actions taken place her and that Lieutenant Young will take command of the fort. He also says he hopes you can find somewhere you belong. + +You pack up your stuff and attempt to make a silent exit, but that’s doomed to failure. Most of your soldiers want you to stay and even want to join you, but you tell them all that the Felkan Kingdom needs them and that there duty is here. Dawn is the most upset, but she manages to keep it together + +As you put Fort Green and the Felkan Kingdom further behind you, you start to wonder what you’re going to do now. Thinking back to what the gnome said, “Some place you belong” and you wonder if you do belong in the Eternal Dominion. From what you’ve heard Edgar’s been getting more organized, he’s even managed to conquer some of the old territories that the Empire lost. Perhaps he could use your help and maybe you could find your place there. + +Another part of you wonders if you shouldn’t just leave this whole region. Travel to someplace far away and completely different. Maybe you need a brand new start. +> Travel to a distant land +You don’t feel as if the Eternal Dominion is really the place for you. You couldn’t stand the new generation of eternals and you doubt if you’ll like the ones coming after them. You aren’t even sure if Edgar would be all that friendly to you as it’s a pretty fair bet that he knows you went to join the Felkan Kingdom. Who knows how he’d react and with an entire nation under his command the odds wouldn’t be in your favor. + +So that only leaves one choice for you. Leaving these lands completely and finding your place elsewhere. It’s a little daunting as you’re wading into unknown waters as it were, but after all the things you’ve faced in your life you’re ready for the next challenge. + +You travel further west putting the Felkan Kingdom far behind you. Over the course of the next three days you live off the land and basically just observe your surroundings. You haven’t even been attacked, which you figured you would be by something the further you got from civilization. You have gotten the impression that you’re being followed however… + +The next night you make camp as usual and go to sleep, or at least you pretend to. You “sleep” for a couple hours and then get up in the middle of the night to circle around whoever it is that’s following you. + +Eventually behind a large rock in a small copse of trees you find your stalker. You had a feeling who it might be, but you weren’t sure. + +“I really hope you aren’t following me, why I think you’re following me.” You say to Dawn. + +She awakens slightly groggy, but still fully aware of her surroundings. + +“Damn, I thought I was being sneaky.” Dawn remarks while slowly getting up. +“You might’ve been had it been anyone other than me, so why are you following me?” +“I’m not here to kill you, if that’s what you think sir.” +“I didn’t actually, though I sort of wish you were, might make this a whole lot easier.” +“You…you aren’t going to kill me are you?!” Dawn says in alarm. +“What? No! What I am going to do is send you back home. I’m sure you’ve been AWOL long enough.” +“I’m not going back home sir, I resigned my position shortly after you left.” +“You what? Dawn, why did you do that? You had a command position!” +“I didn’t want it sir, I don’t want to serve the Felkan Kingdom, I want to be with you.” +“(Sigh) See this is the reason why I hoped you weren’t following me.” +“Sir, I…” +“Stop calling me sir! I’m not your commanding officer anymore! Look…I think I know why you’re following me and I don’t think it’s a good idea.” + +Dawn doesn’t immediately comment and the both of you are silent for a moment, as the pair of you knows you’re referring to feelings she has for you go beyond simple respect. And while you’ve been pretty closely guarded about the situation as well, it would be a lie to say you don’t feel something for her as well. + +“Oh… and why is that exactly?” she slowly asks. +“Because I don’t know where the hell I’m going or know what the hell I’m going to do with myself now. All of what I was taught to believe in, is gone and there is no getting that back. I’m literally lost and I doubt if I’ll ever settle down.” +“Well if I come with you, perhaps you’ll be a little less lost with another set of eyes helping you.” +“Dawn. You have a country. A home. A life. You even have a command if you get back there quick enough. You have something to fight for, do you really want to give that up?” +“If I don’t have you, then yes. Maybe because of your upbringing, you hold such things in very high regard. Most people don’t work that way, you know.” +“(Sigh) Yes I know, but what I’m saying is coming with me is unlikely to result in us settling down and living out our lives in some sort of wedded bliss with a house and kids.” +“And who says I want that? I will be happy just as long as I’m by your side. If that means forever wandering, then I’ll be right there wandering next to you. My life before I met you, wasn’t a great one as you probably know and I only joined the military as an escape from poverty. You believed in me enough to give me my very first command. You taught me that I was capable of more when I sometimes wasn’t even sure myself. After all you’ve done for me it wouldn’t be right for me to leave you when you’re feeling something similar now.” + +Even you can’t help but be touched by that remark and you aren’t exactly sure of how to respond. When Dawn approaches closer to you, and the pair of you look into each other’s eyes, the response is certain and the pair of you kiss, finally taking those first steps towards your love for each other. + +The next morning after your passionate embrace, you and Dawn begin your journey together and leave the known region far behind. In the years that follow the pair of you wander, seeing new sights and getting into adventures. Several times you genuinely attempt to find a place where you feel comfortable, but it just never happens. While the pair of you never do settle down, your love continues to last. + +What ultimately happens to the both of you is lost to time.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You need to stay here and oversee the purging of this fort, and the surrounding area. You can’t start running off half assed because you’re a little worried about one soldier even if she is one of the best ones you’ve had under your command. (Not including your fellow Eternals of course) + +After slaying all the gnolls still in the fort, you regroup your soldiers and tell one of the sergeants to head over the Blossumdale with a couple platoons and help in whatever way they can. You tell the rest of your soldiers to start rebuilding the walls, clear out the dead bodies and to help you do a sweep of the area. + +Your sweep of the area is a tedious, but vital one. A lot of the gnolls retreated to various areas just enough to be out of sight, but were obviously still attempting to regroup again. Good thing you stayed behind to mop up all these little clusters so they didn’t form a big one again. By the time you’re satisfied with your results, the sun is coming up and you return to the fort more than a little tired. + +When you get back, you’re happy to see Dawn there. + +“Sir, Blossumdale still stands sir, the rest of the soldiers are securing it and the area.” +“Glad to hear it, and glad to see you made it out in one peace. Was the fighting heavy?” +“It was, but from the looks of it, the fighting was worse here. The only problem we had is with a wyvern.” +“Lucky you only had one. We had four of them and I had to kill two of them myself.” +“That’s one more than me then, sir.” + +You smile at her remark and after a brief discussion on what the next course of action will be, you get some rest. + +Over the next few months the gnoll attacks die down, but they don’t stop completely. Most of your activities involve going further into the wilderness and taking out whatever villages or camps they have. In the meantime your superiors are telling you to stop your actions as the war has been won and now you’re just using up valuable manpower and resources. You really aren’t though; you’ve been doing just fine with the limited supplies that they see fit to give you. Somehow this situation seems very familiar… + +While your superiors do a lot of complaining, nothing actually happens to you. It would seem they’re bitching at you just for the sake of bitching. The gnolls might not actually be able to invade properly anymore, but if you let them regroup again, they’ll try it. Your goal is to purge them all, or at the very least drive them away so they don’t try it ever again. + +Year 50 + +“This is bullshit sir, executing those protestors was the right thing to do!” +“Calm down lieutenant.” You say to Dawn. +“No sir, this isn’t right! They can’t punish you just for doing your fucking job!” +“Okay lieutenant I said calm down! Now listen, I need you on your best behavior, because they’re going to question all of us. I saw this happen to my predecessor. (sigh) Who knows maybe I did go too far, I mean I haven’t exactly been following Felkan policies, I’ve been sort of doing my own thing out here for the past ten years.” +“Yeah, but your actions are protecting the kingdom! How can that be wrong?” + +You look at Dawn and see that she’s changed quite a bit since she stood here in this office several years ago hesitant to kill baby gnolls. She’s practically like an Empire soldier now. Everyone in this fort is and that’s what is no doubt getting you into trouble. Still, they shouldn’t be blamed for what you just ordered them to do. + +“Well, maybe I was protecting the kingdom, but I still wasn’t following the laws. And I certainly broke enough of them. Just don’t worry; I’ll do everything in my power to make sure nobody here gets blamed. I mean you were all just following orders.” +“Thank you sir, but I knew exactly what I was doing and if they put you against the wall in front of a firing squad for treason, then I want to be standing right next to you.” +“…that’s a very…enthusiastic sentiment, but I don’t think that will be necessary. I mean maybe this won’t even be all that bad, they did at least warn me that they were coming. They didn’t even do that with Eckers. Look lieutenant…Dawn, whatever happens don’t go doing something foolish like trying to save me or sacrificing yourself or something. Just continue to serve the kingdom and try to follow the laws the best you can, okay?” + +Dawn is visible upset by all this. She turns her head for a moment while sniffling, then turns back to you and agrees. She then excuses herself to get ready for this investigation. Wasn’t really until this moment that you see that you’ve have a very deep effect on her. You didn’t expect to, as you treated her like any one else under your command, well maybe you did compliment her a little bit more, but that’s only because she did more. + +Eventually the investigation group gets arrives. To your surprise it consists of only two people, General Benson, and that gnome you saw before during Captain Ecker’s investigation, you certainly hope this turns out a lot better. + +All your troops stand at attention and you greet the general. After a brief exchange the well dress gnome parts company with the general who approaches you and just shakes his head. + +“I knew we made a bad decision.” He says and motions you to your office. + +You sit down and the general sits down and he begins his questions right away. + +“Let’s get right to it shall we? You are aware that you’re serving the Felkan Kingdom aren’t you?” +“Yes sir.” +“Oh? You do? Well then, is there any particular reason why you’re treating this area as if you still serving your long dead Empire?” +“I’m not sure I follow you sir.” +“Don’t play stupid with me, I’ve read the reports and followed all your actions for the past ten years! You’ve trained these soldiers to the point that they’re fanatically loyal and dedicated, you started a war with the gnolls and didn’t stop hostilities until you completely eliminated their species, during which time you executed several Felkan citizens in Blossumdale and now you’ve done it again! Tell me, is war, murder and genocide all they taught you in the Empire?” +“Basically.” +“You might not want to be so flip with me, Eternal, your ass is just a step away from the gallows yourself.” +“Sir, with all due respect if I was such a problem for the past ten years, why not get rid of me before now?” +“Ohhh, believe me, if I’d had any say in the matter you would’ve been.” +“Sir, everything I’ve done has been for the good of the Felkan Kingdom. I mean loyal and dedicated soldiers, since when is that a bad thing? Soldiers are supposed to follow orders of their superiors and government. That’s sort of their whole purpose.” +“That’s rather ironic coming from you who seems to blatantly ignores orders like not starting wars.” +“Sir, the gnolls were an ongoing problem even if they weren’t planning an invasion. Isn’t it better that they’re all dead so that Felkan citizens don’t have to worry about getting robbed and killed on the roads? Blossomdale probably wouldn’t be standing if we hadn’t stopped them.” +“Do you really want to bring up Blossumdale captain?” +“Why the hell not? You’re bringing everything else up.” You say starting to get angry. +“Watch your tone, and if you insist…I already know your half assed excuse for executing citizens during the war with the gnolls, but please explain to me why you did it again this time, just so I can try to understand your fucked Eternal logic.” +“Well it’s rather simple, some of the citizens were protesting the new tax that the king imposed. They were in front of the town hall screaming at their mayor as if he was directly to blame. We stepped in to calm them down, they started getting more violent and began throwing rocks. We told them to stop, they didn’t, so we opened fire on them. After rounding up the main rabble rousers who didn’t get shot the first time, we executed them properly.” +“And that’s it? That’s your excuse for gunning down several citizens?” +“If they hadn’t done , what we told them not to do, they’d still be alive right now, sir.” +“And there it is again, they didn’t do what you told them to do, so they got killed, but when it comes to you, you apparently do whatever the hell you want.” +“That’s not true sir I was trying to stop a potential rebellion, you can ask the mayor and any of my soldiers about the situation and…” +“I’m not asking them, I’m asking you! You wantonly executing protestors like that is more likely to cause a damn rebellion not stop one! Or… maybe that’s what you really want Eternal? I mean that’s what you’re doing isn’t it? You train the troops to be utterly loyal, not to the Kingdom but to YOU. You’re starting wars, you’re executing Felkans which is going to cause more harm than good. Maybe this is your way of getting revenge on us? Perhaps you’re trying to start your own little Empire with you as the emperor this time?” + +You can’t believe these accusations. Here you’ve been doing what you can for the Felkan Kingdom by fighting off hostiles and putting down dissidents and you’re the one getting accused of treason. You just rub your hands over your face trying hard not to chuckle too much at the dark humor in all this. General Benson just stares at you disapprovingly as he usually does, but remains silent. It is at this point the well-dressed gnome walks in and nods at the general, he lights up some pipeweed and stands in the corner observing. + +It’s at that moment you think back to Captain Ecker’s accusations on the gnomes. Maybe he was right after all. Hardly matters at this point, because as far you’re concerned everyone in charge here has been an asshole. + +“Sir, I chopped up a shitload of gnolls and executed dissidents in the service of this fucking kingdom and the whole time I’ve done it all I’ve gotten is bitching and general ungratefulness, yet I haven’t complained. I didn’t even complain when you fuckers never sent me supplies on time to help fight the gnoll invasion. I execute some worthless fucking peasants stirring up shit, and I’m the fucking bad guy some how. Sir, I don’t need to re-create the Empire, because as fucked up as the government policies are here, I THOUGHT I WAS STILL SERVING THE FUCKING THING!” you shout. + +You slump back in your chair still fuming after your outburst, and that’s when the gnome speaks up in between puffs of his pipe. + +“So, Eternal did you want to leave?” he asks. +“What?” +“I’m asking you, did you want to leave? If you can’t find a place here, then perhaps it would be better if you left. In gratitude of all your service to the kingdom, this is a one time offer for you to leave free and clear. There will be no repercussions except that you can never return here.” +> Continue to stay +As tempting as it might be to leave, you did that once before and it hasn’t turned out that great. Besides where would you go now? The only place that you know of that has any resemblance of civilization is the Eternal Dominion, and you’re fairly certain you wouldn’t be welcomed. Right now you’re sort of wishing that you’d stuck around during the last days of the Empire instead of leaving. Perhaps you could’ve made more of a difference than you thought, or maybe you could’ve fit in better among the ranks of the Eternal Dominion. The general was probably correct on a few points. You have tried to make this place more “Empire like”, but it’s all you know. You can only change so much. You wonder how Warrick managed to adapt as well as he did in a much shorter period of time. + +The only other option is leaving this land far behind and living as a directionless wanderer hoping that you find something. You can’t do that either. You’ve made your choice and you have to stick by it now for good or ill. + +“I want to stay. I pledged myself to this Kingdom and I meant it. So whatever punishment you feel is necessary, I’ll accept, but I just ask that you don’t punish anyone under my command. They’re good soldiers and only did what they were told to do.” + +The gnome asks the general to step outside and for you to stay put. You do so and wait in your office mostly staring at the various objects in it. Eventually the gnome returns, he pulls up a chair and sits across from you. + +“First things first, you’re not going to be punished for and anything and your actions have been appreciated. Perhaps not by everyone in the kingdom, but in certain circles they are. Personally, I don’t think you were intentionally trying to carve out your own piece of land, I truly believe you were doing what was best for the Felkan Kingdom. However, some are still concerned with your Empire past. I know you can’t help what you were and in some cases still are, but there is always a slight fear there. Especially you being one those Eternals and all.” +“Warrick’s an Eternal, he directly fought against the Felkan Kingdom and he seems be accepted.” You point out. +“Warrick, is a special case…(sigh) I probably shouldn’t even be telling you this, but considering the cluster fuck this situation is becoming, I’m going to be just as honest as you have with me. Warrick didn’t voluntarily join the kingdom, he was made that way.” +“Made? What do you mean? Mind control? Torture?” you say in shock at this revelation. +“I doubt if any torture would cause anyone to switch their allegiances, at least not permanently and we don’t engage in any sort of magic mumbo jumbo around here. No, Warrick was a dedicated foe against the Felkan Kingdom. We tried to get him and his partner for a long time, but never could catch them. Things got even worse when his partner was replaced by that Edgar fellow. By the gods, Edgar was a menace on the battlefield…anyway back to Warrick. Warrick as you probably know was mainly engaged in sabotage and similar tactics. Well, his luck just ran out one day ironically towards the last days of the war. Had a small explosive hit the side of his face by one of the many traps set up.” +“But he lived.” +“Yes, but he wouldn’t have if our medics hadn’t been nearby at the time. When he was found he was bleeding from his eye socket and didn’t even know where he was or who he was. Soldiers probably would’ve probably killed him, but like I said, he was luckily found by a couple of gnome medics, they decided to…re-align him instead. Memories are an unpredictable thing, so attempting to practically reconstruct his entire past would’ve been a fool’s errand, instead they just slowly over time convinced him that he had willingly joined the Felkan Kingdom due to his disillusionment of the Empire as he healed up. It worked a lot better than we thought, I can only guess that Warrick may have had some genuine disillusionment with the Empire.” +“But isn’t that still risky? Couldn’t he still remember what really happened one day?” +“Doubt it, as I’m sure you’re aware from talking with him, his memory when discussing anything before his injury is patchy. In any case we also keep an eye on him…you seem to be taking this well, I would’ve thought you might’ve been angry and trying to kill me by now.” +“Maybe at one time I would’ve been furious, perhaps a small part of me is, but I’m more baffled by the idea that you’d go through the trouble that you as opposed to the more efficient task of killing him.” +“Ahh yes, well that is one of the failings of my race I believe. A lot of us are non-violent at heart; ironic considering that we also develop some of the most destructive weapons in the known world. Peace through superior firepower I suppose.” + +With the way the gnome is speaking, he’s practically telling you how things are really run in the Felkan Kingdom. His very presence is proof of it. + +“So it’s true? The gnomes do really run the kingdom?” you ask. +“Heh, I wish that was the case, certainly we have a lot of influence, but nothing is ever certain. There are always complications.” +“So why are you telling me all this? Aren’t you worried that I’ll kill you and try to free Warrick from your brainwashing techniques or try to stir up anti-gnome rhetoric like Eckers or others?” +“You could certainly try, but I doubt if you’d be very successful. The only thing you might be able to do is easily kill me and start a small rebellion with your company of Empire-like troops. You’d probably do a lot of damage, but you wouldn’t topple the kingdom. Besides what I’m telling you, I’m telling you for a reason.” + +The gnome stops smoking completely and leans forward as best he can with as short as he is. + +“There are changes coming Eternal, necessary changes to keep the Kingdom from falling and quite frankly I believe we NEED someone like you. The conspiracy theory that we gnomes run everything is only half true. The fact is, we’re suffering from as much infighting as any other race does. Tell me Eternal, were you aware that a long time ago the gnomes used to live in the Empire as slaves? Hell we were responsible for most of the technological advancements that the Empire even had, like the aqueducts and such. Good thing we never discovered gunpowder during that time, we’d probably still be living under Empire boots.” +“Yes, I did study Empire history when I was little, it was required. Don’t remember anything specific being said about your people though, just that you were slaves.” +“Heh, figures that they would play down our achievements. Truth is, while we were slaves we had comfortable positions. We were treated well and kept safe. Wasn’t until we saw what the Empire did to our Halfling cousins that we made the decision to make a mass exodus. They were slaves too, but not treated as well, so naturally they wanted equal rights like any normal citizen. When they didn’t get that, they pushed harder. When the Empire pushed back, it wasn’t a pretty.” +“Yes, the Halfling uprising. I read about that.” +“Uprising? It was more like a slaughter. We tried to warn them against such actions, but they were too proud even though they had no chance. The Empire as you know wiped them all out. I believe it was the first time we saw the Empire practice genocide on such a scale. We couldn’t fight the Empire, but we couldn’t stay for fear of our own lives. After all what would’ve happened if the Empire decided that we were also getting too uppity one day? When we eventually arrived to these lands the Felkans didn’t even have a kingdom yet, but when it started looking like they would get organized, we made the decision to ingrain ourselves into helping shape it. We would not become slave again, but living in a powerful nation could protect us if the Empire ever started expanding this way, and given the past few decades I’d say we were right.” + +A fascinating little part of history you have to admit, but you still aren’t sure what this all has to do with you. + +“So, exactly how do I fit in here?” +“The Empire might be gone, but you and specifically the Eternal Dominion are its successors. And from what I can tell the ED looks like its every bit as ruthless as the Empire, perhaps even more so. Some of us are starting to believe the Felkan policies on aggression need to be altered. Due to our past with seeing first hand of what happened to the Halflings, our people are generally disgusted by the thought of slavery or total annihilation of any race. Hence all the policies against engaging in wars of conquest and aggression and the more relaxed political views…well at least until you came along.” +“Well I know why I act the way I do, but there were others who obviously don’t agree with the policies long before I showed up.” +“And that’s true too. Mostly humans though, I suppose humans just have a natural tendency towards conquest. That’s why my circle believes we need to let go of our past a bit and start changing before the grumblings get worse. Perhaps a little nationalism is what the Felkan Kingdom needs to direct the hatred towards external threats rather than crumbling from within. And as bad as I feel saying this, what you did with the gnolls was very necessary.” +“Well if it eases your conscience I probably didn’t strictly wipe out ALL the gnolls, I’m sure quite a few of them just ran far away.” +“Doesn’t really matter, they’re gone and no longer a threat. The fact is we’re probably going to need more like you when we eventually go up against the ED, if only because of your experience, let alone your mindset. You’re going to be transferred; in fact everyone here is going to be transferred to Fort Soot. You’re going to be needed on the frontlines.” +“Isn’t that where Warrick is stationed?” +“Yes, but we’ve got another task for him, his sabotage and stealth skills can be used to help us as opposed to all those years he was working against us. Now there’s some other stuff that needs to be done as well, but you really don’t need to worry about it. All I need you to do is to prepare everyone along the Arat border for a possible invasion. The ED is getting more organized everyday and we can’t afford to be caught off guard. You said you pledged yourself to defend this kingdom…I trust even after all of what you’ve learned here, that pledge is still true?” +“I gave my word and you’ve revealed much about the real way things work around here. That’s probably more than the Empire ever did. The Felkan Kingdom has my loyalty, but I must be allowed to do things my way when it comes to battle and war.” +“That…will be arranged. As I’ve said, other things need to be taken care of, but rest assured you will have support, just one thing, could you stop killing protesting peasants? I understand that’s a hold over from your Empire training, but that’s something you’re really going to have to stop doing.” +“I will. My apologies.” +“It’s alright, just no more of it in the future unless you’re specifically given the order to do so. Anyway probably won’t be a problem, not many villages along the Arat borders anymore since the last war. Okay, I believe that’s it, oh by the way, my name is Klemto Zookwinkle and I’ll most likely be in touch in the future.” + +The gnome shakes your hand, straightens his hat and leaves the office, leaving you to take in all of the new information thrust upon you. Oddly the only thing you can immediately think is: + +“Klemto Zookwinkle? That’s silly fucking name!” you laugh. +> Years pass... +Year 55 + +Another clear night and you look out across the Arat border from the fort roof knowing that the ED could invade soon…though you’ve been waiting for about five years now. If anything you’d wish that they’d hurry up and do it or as you’ve often suggested to Klemto, that you strike at the ED first. + +He of course claims he’s still trying to sway the royals to do such a thing, most importantly the king. Seems the gnomes are still playing tug of war with their puppet strings. You suggested that a few assassinations would do the trick, but Klemto was a little upset at you for that suggestion. + +In any case Klemto better hurry up and get this war started, because more anti-gnome groups are starting to pop up and it’s getting harder to keep them quiet, especially since they aren’t wrong about their accusations. + +As for you, you’re a major now and you’re not only in charge of Fort Soot, but the entire Gan province as far as military is concerned. You’ve been busying yourself with having the soldiers keep to their patrols and training. Instilling the same routines that you did at Fort Green. Your results have been more or less just as successful. Dawn is still your second, though she’s a captain now and she’s more of a concern to you than any potential war right now. + +You really should’ve transferred her to another fort, as she’s certainly competent enough to run one and even during the gnoll war you suspected that she had feelings for you that were more than just a professional respect. The problem is, you had feelings for her too and by the time both of you admitted them to each other it unleashed itself in a night of passion. This wasn’t like what happened between you and Alison at Fort Destiny though, you didn’t separate love and sex from each other and now you’re too attached to Dawn to have her transferred. + +It hasn’t been an excessive problem in day-to-day operations, but to you it’s a definite weakness on your part. You don’t even know how the hell you can even feel love as you’ve never really experienced it before, but then you remember Brenda and Roldan and they did. They even worked together and married. Perhaps you’re over thinking it. + +Speaking of Brenda, you’ve finally got information on what she’s been up to thanks to Warrick’s intelligence gathering missions. She’s apparently still in charge of all of the Nalin province and the only other Eternal that has equal rank to Edgar. She joined the Eternal Dominion years ago when Edgar came to her in Nalin, but Warrick has told you that she isn’t happy with the situation. Warrick has said that she is willing to give out Edgar’s plans and troops movements. So far they’ve been updating their equipment and consolidating their territory still. She claims that Edgar has his sights on either re-conquering Rask or invading the Felkan Kingdom, but nothing is certain yet. The big thing is Edgar has actually managed to completely unite the new eternals under a doctrine that only they are fit to rule and new generations of eternals are still being trained. You have to say, you’re a little impressed by his accomplishments. + +Edgar a despot, Warrick a brainwashed spy, Brenda a traitorous informant and you in charge of an army that was once an enemy. If someone told you when you were fresh out of Gruz’s training school that this is how the four of you would end up, you never would’ve believed it. + +“Roldan, Gerald…Kane, I can only imagine what you’re thinking as you watch us all from wherever you are.” You say out loud, briefly thinking about the good old days when things were simpler. + +You stop with the nostalgia to return to your room to get some rest, where you find Dawn sleeping. You try not to wake her, but you’re doomed to failure. She moves over to cuddle next to you. + +“Go back to sleep.” You tell her. +“Hey, if you’re here, who’s in charge of the fort?” she groggily asks. +“Lieutenant Baker.” +“Him? Ugh, I better go on duty…” +“Hey come back to bed. He’s capable of handling it, besides, it’s not like anything is going on.” +“I guess so. I just feel more comfortable with you or me in charge.” +“Yeah, well you’ve been working too hard anyway. You probably need more rest than anyone, so go back to sleep.” +“Mmmm, I’m up now, but if you’d like me to stay in bed, we could do something else…” Dawn says rubbing your chest and kissing the side of your face. + +Yeah, you’ve been over thinking the possible downsides of this relationship too much lately. You take Dawn up on her offer and have fun living for the moment rather than pondering the past or concerning yourself about future. + +The next morning you return to your duties as usual. For most of the day it looks like it’s going to be another routine one, and that’s when you get an unexpected visit from Klemto. When he arrives in your office, he has a slight frown in his face. + +“I’m suspecting bad news.” You say. +“Well, it’s fifty fifty I suppose. Warrick has just given me news that Edgar is planning on attacking the Rask frontier. Not exactly sure how long it’ll take him, before he sets his sights on us again though. There isn’t really a government system in place there, it’s more of a collection of isolated towns relying on mercs to keep monsters at bay from what I’m told.” +“Edgar and I were both stationed at Rask for many years. He’s got the advantage of knowing the area and everything else, but he also has to know that the place tends towards lawlessness. He might be able to easily conquer towns, but the manpower involved in keeping them under control is a constant drain. Not to brag, but if it hadn’t been for me keeping a tight leash on things there, the Empire would’ve never gotten control of it as well as they did. +“Heh, well the ED has several eternals to keep a tight leash on it as you say.” +“And those eternals aren’t me.” +“Well, you seem to be in proud mood today.” +“Just stating the facts.” +“I see, well in any case that brings me to the next bit of news. You may be getting a transfer soon.” +“Transfer? Why?” +“Well the king and several others have always been uncomfortable with you in charge of the armies here on the frontlines as you probably know. It’s only due to the threat of the potential invasion and my circle’s influence that we managed to keep you in power here.” +“Are you fucking kidding me? After all their worrying about an invasion for years, you mean they’re suddenly not anymore, because Edgar’s attacking Rask? That’s pretty fucking short sighted.” You say. +“No, the intention is to still keep up the defenses here and keep the same procedures you set in place of course, but just uh, replace you.” +“Right, because I could suddenly raise an army and try to overthrow the throne at any given time…fuck. I thought you were supposed to calm those fears!” +“I tried! I really did! I mean I think I’m lucky we accomplished what we did! And I tried to fight for you on this too, but it’s just too much now and they want you gone. It’ll make everyone feel better.” +“Yes, everyone but me obviously.” +“Hey you’ve always claimed to be a soldier dedicated to the kingdom for good or bad. Isn’t this one of those times where you stepping down quietly to make everyone feel better would be best for the kingdom, instead of causing a fuse and potentially causing more problems?” +“So I accept this, and then what happens? Where am I getting transferred to? Some fort in the middle of nowhere again?” +“Well, that’s just it, you’re kind of going to be transferred to the uh…private sector. Are you familiar the merchant’s guild at the capital? Well, you’ll be the new head of security there!” Klemto says trying to make it sound impressive. + +You can’t believe this. + +“Are you telling me I’m not even going to be part of the damn army anymore? I’m just going to be a glorified guard?” +“You’ll be well paid and get a better place to stay than this dreary fort!” +“You know I don’t give a shit about all that, I’m a warrior! I want to fight!” +“And that’s still an option! I mean it’s not like you’ll be sitting around doing nothing. In fact with the guild could use a little extra protection since the rise in anti-gnomism going on lately.” +“Trust me, there’s some of that going on here too, right now.” + +Klempto seems like he wants to pat your arm reassure you, but decides better of it. + +“Look, I’m sorry about all this. It sucks I know, but the popular opinion is just not in our favor. That’s why we want you at the guild; most of my faction of likeminded fellows are there. We think we could still remedy this later.” +“You’d think with all your influence and control of the economy you’d be able to do something about this now.” +“Yes, well it isn’t as easy as you think.” +“Yeah, well it could be.” You say. + +Klempto musters up all his courage and points a finger at you. + +“And I don’t want to hear you talking like that anymore! I know what you’re implying and the answer is no! Unlike you humans, we gnomes don’t kill one another despite our disagreements! Now I suggest you prepare for your transfer, take care of all your affairs here and a carriage will come and get you in a few days. I suppose you’ll want that Dawn girl to take over here, which will be acceptable. I managed to convince the opposition of that.” +“Gee, thanks for small favors.” + +At this point Klemto just backs away from you and begins to leave, before he does though he speaks once more. + +“Y’know, you shouldn’t really see this as a bad thing. I mean think about how old you are getting. You humans don’t have that high of a life span. Shouldn’t you want to start slowing down on the war and battle a bit and start concentrating on enjoying your approaching elderly years?” +“If you’re still trying to convince me you’re failing miserably, because that’s the biggest load of shit I’ve ever heard for several reasons that I’m not even going to get into. But I’ll address the age thing briefly. Yeah I know I’m not twenty, but I fucking know I’m still a better warrior than any of the soldiers under my command, let alone an average Felkan soldier. And while you keep saying I’m human, I’m not. I’m a fucking Eternal. We’re better than a normal human and when the ED invades they’re going to SHOW you that they are mainly because they aren’t afraid to do whatever it kill their enemies, unlike you lot.” + +Sensing he better leave this time, Klemto quickly runs off out of your office, leaving you to ponder your situation. Just last night you were feeling good in the arms of Dawn, and now you got a bunch of shit shoved at you that you’re supposed to just sit and eat it. + +It’s enough for you to attack the Eternal Dominion anyway +> Follow orders +As much as you don’t like it, if even a third of what Klemto said is true, if you went ahead and did your own thing again, you could very well destabilize the kingdom even more, possibly even a civil war. You aren’t looking to become like Kane, and if it means you have to step down to preserve the kingdom, then that’s what you’ll do. It just frustrates you that after all you’ve done, you still aren’t trusted, but perhaps it will always be this way. If anything its perhaps something of a phenomenon that they accepted you in the first place, though if Warrick is anything to go by, it’s only to exploit you. + +Resigned to your orders, you make preparations to pass your command to Dawn. She doesn’t like the news any better than you do, in fact she suggests that you should attack the Eternal Dominion anyway, but you explain the repercussions of such actions. + +“But you did that with the gnolls and that worked out!” +“Yeah, and that was a different situation. Don’t have the luxury of doing whatever anymore even if I do think it would be in the kingdom’s best interest. Listen, you’re going to be in charge here, so I don’t want you doing anything rash either. No point in you getting into trouble, you understand?” +“Yes, but I still don’t like this. And I don’t think this is a good idea.” +“Neither do I, but we have our orders.” +“Well maybe you like your orders, but I still don’t. If you’re not going to be commander here, then I don’t want to serve here anymore either.” +“What?! You can’t just throw away your career like that because of me! Besides without me here, this place is going to need a good leader.” +“I don’t care about all that. I care about you, and if the kingdom isn’t seeing fit to give you the respect you deserve then it doesn’t deserve me as a leader. Besides if all is so great as they claim then they won’t need me there.” +“I really think you should think this through. Besides what are you going to do, if not this?” +“I’m pretty sure with my vast skill set, I’ll find something, I’ll also probably move to the capital and get married.” +“Married?” you say not grasping her insinuation immediately, then when she touches your hand, you get it. + +A lot of upcoming changes has been dumped on you this day, you just hope you can adapt to all of them. + +Year 58 + +The Eternal Dominion gains ground every day, yet the people here in the capital act like everything is going well. If you’d attacked like you wanted to, the Felkan Kingdom wouldn’t have gotten caught off guard like it did. Warrick and whatever other spies the Felkan Kingdom had on the field were all fed bad intel, and while the soldiers in the Gan province fought well, the commander who was put in charge of the province was an idiot that allowed most of it get overrun. Even if shitty intel, you’re damn sure that you would’ve at least prevented that from happening. Dawn would’ve too. + +You regret not ignoring orders and going through with your plan. Dawn isn’t as hard on herself, but she does sometimes wonders if she should’ve stayed on as commander of the Gan armies. But it’s too late for any of that now. The pair of you just go about your less exciting lives. She a combat instructor at an academy and you still head of security for the merchant’s guild. + +In the beginning your job was slightly more engaging, with all the anti-gnome stuff going on. You even prevented a nutjob from blowing up the guild once. Nowadays the anti-gnome sentiment has more or less disappeared. It’s sort of hard to be angry at the little guys who are continuing to make weapons that blow up an enemy that’s bashing the door down. + +As a result you’re mostly attempting to figure out the best guards for the various caravans that get sent out. Sometimes you go out on these as well just to break up the monotony. Predictably they’re always supply caravans to the frontlines so you can get the latest and best information on what’s going on, because the gods know that they never claim anything bad is going on in the capital. + +Here, closer to the fighting is where you feel a little more comfortable. You really miss it. While your current married life with Dawn is good, and you have no major worries, you still feel the call of war, but you are unable to participate. It’s a very frustrating situation that you never get used to and you never will. It’s just not in your nature. + +One day on one of your supply runs, you travel to a town called Yevdin which is in desperate need of almost everything as it is being held by only a few soldiers. Most of the civilians have evacuated save for a few of the stubborn ones unwilling to run. You respect that. + +It’s of some surprise that you meet Warrick there; he’s equally surprised to see you as well. While you wait for the supplies to be unloaded, you go over and speak to him. + +“What’re you doing here?” Warrick asks. +“Staving off the boredom of my current assignment, and you?” +“Waiting for my impending death.” +“Well at least your punishment will be over soon…I thought you were a captain. Why are you a sergeant now?” +“Got busted down for being wrong on the intelligence reports, all those years ago. I guess I should be lucky I didn’t get executed for gross incompetence. I really fucked up on that one.” +“Oh, I’d say you’re in good company as far as that’s concerned, so don’t be too hard on yourself. Besides even if you’d done your mission right, you might’ve just gotten drummed out of the military altogether.” You say. +After a brief discussion with Warrick, you learn that this town is facing an imminent large-scale invasion. Not that the town is really important, but it happens to be in the way of another important target, so it’s going to be overrun on the way. These supplies aren’t so much as to ensure the soldiers’ survival, but rather their survival long enough to make it a costly victory for the Eternal Dominion. Warrick doesn’t appear to be concerned though. + +“So, I never did get the whole story, why’d you get removed?” Warrick asks +“Long story, but let’s just say I think the ones running things like things the way they are right now.” +“Surely you’re joking. Why would anyone in the Felkan Kingdom want this situation?” + +You could tell Warrick all about the things you’ve overheard, things you’ve suspected and things you’ve outright seen just by being closer to the gnomes in the merchant’s guild. But it wouldn’t make any difference. Warrick’s been on a string for a long time now and despite his own situation, he seems in a very positive mood. Perhaps ignorance is bliss, or perhaps its because he’s still fighting and doing what he always was meant to do. The same thing you were meant to do. + +“Come on, we’ve delivered the stuff, let’s get the hell outta here!” the gnome merchant shouts to you. +“You go on ahead with the rest of the guards. I’m staying here.” You say. +“What?! Are you crazy? This place is about to be destroyed!” +“Yeah I know. Tell my wife I really tried, but that this is what I was meant to do.” + +The gnome doesn’t try to talk you out of your plan, he just shakes his head and gets in the carriage ordering the rest of the guards to ride off as quick as possible. Warrick says nothing about your decision either. Even though the pair of you haven’t really been in close contact since you both served together in Nalin, he knows why you made your decision. + +The next few days aren’t filled with impending doom, but rather one of contentment. In between keeping a look out, and checking your defenses you and Warrick do a lot of catching up on the past, though the pair of you mostly stick to the happier memories of when you both were in the Empire. The other soldiers listen in on your stories. They don’t quite get all of them, but seeing the good spirits of their leader, seems to put them in a slightly better mood as well. And that’s good, their last moments should be as unpleasant as possible, there will be plenty of time for that when the Eternal Dominion arrives. + +Eventually the Eternal Dominion arrives with an impressively large force. The small part of you that believed you’d make this out alive shortly disappears, but this doesn’t make you second-guess yourself. You’re still comfortable in your decision and this is certainly preferable to what you’ve been doing for the past three years. + +“Sir, it’s been an honor to serve with you.” Warrick suddenly says to you, even giving you the old Empire salute. +“The honor is both of ours.” You say. +“For the Empire, sir.” +“For the Empire, Warrick.” You reply. + +The first volley of cannon shots strike the front ranks of the Eternal Dominion troops and the battle is joined… + + + + + + +“Prime Eternal, the town of Yevdin was taken, but we suffered massive casualties, we need reinforcements before we can take Fort Everlast.” A messenger says. +“What?! You idiots! You see what we’re working with here Brenda? I expect this sort of incompetence from our human soldiers, but that army had a good portion of Eternals in it! Bah! These new ones for all their extra abilities, they still lack that spark that we have!” Edgar cursed. +“Why did we suffer so many losses at Yevdin? Do the Felkans have a new weapon?” Brenda asks. +“Reports indicate no new weapon, but there were a group of soldiers that seemed to be incredibly determined. Even when the town was taken, a few of them had taken to an underground shelter beneath the town and skirmished with the force for five more days.” +“We should be so lucky to have Eternals such dedication.” Edgar mutters. +“Any description of these enemy soldiers?” Brenda asks. + +The messenger reports that there was nothing out of the ordinary about any of the soldiers and doesn’t have a description since he didn’t know that it was important. He says he knows the leader had an eye patch which clues Edgar and Brenda that that was Warrick. + +He also mentions one other that wasn’t in a soldier uniform, but was the last to be killed. Edgar and Brenda briefly wonder a bit, and then nod to each other before dismissing the messenger. + +“It was stupid of the Felkans to remove him from command in the first place, but I guess even they couldn’t keep him off the battlefield forever.” Brenda says. +“No, and that was that spark I was referring to earlier. Just think if the pair of them had stayed here instead? Think of all the things we could’ve accomplished! Such a waste. Well it’s over now and with those two out of the way, I think our plan is going to be a lot easier.” +“True, but I still wish things had been different.” +“So do I Brenda, so do I.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 55 + +Another clear night and you look out across the Arat border from the fort roof knowing that the ED could invade soon…though you’ve been waiting for about five years now. If anything you’d wish that they’d hurry up and do it or as you’ve often suggested to Klemto, that you strike at the ED first. + +He of course claims he’s still trying to sway the royals to do such a thing, most importantly the king. Seems the gnomes are still playing tug of war with their puppet strings. You suggested that a few assassinations would do the trick, but Klemto was a little upset at you for that suggestion. + +In any case Klemto better hurry up and get this war started, because more anti-gnome groups are starting to pop up and it’s getting harder to keep them quiet, especially since they aren’t wrong about their accusations. + +As for you, you’re a major now and you’re not only in charge of Fort Soot, but the entire Gan province as far as military is concerned. You’ve been busying yourself with having the soldiers keep to their patrols and training. Instilling the same routines that you did at Fort Green. Your results have been more or less just as successful. Dawn is still your second, though she’s a captain now and she’s more of a concern to you than any potential war right now. + +You really should’ve transferred her to another fort, as she’s certainly competent enough to run one and even during the gnoll war you suspected that she had feelings for you that were more than just a professional respect. The problem is, you had feelings for her too and by the time both of you admitted them to each other it unleashed itself in a night of passion. This wasn’t like what happened between you and Alison at Fort Destiny though, you didn’t separate love and sex from each other and now you’re too attached to Dawn to have her transferred. + +It hasn’t been an excessive problem in day-to-day operations, but to you it’s a definite weakness on your part. You don’t even know how the hell you can even feel love as you’ve never really experienced it before, but then you remember Brenda and Roldan and they did. They even worked together and married. Perhaps you’re over thinking it. + +Speaking of Brenda, you’ve finally got information on what she’s been up to thanks to Warrick’s intelligence gathering missions. She’s apparently still in charge of all of the Nalin province and the only other Eternal that has equal rank to Edgar. She joined the Eternal Dominion years ago when Edgar came to her in Nalin, but Warrick has told you that she isn’t happy with the situation. Warrick has said that she is willing to give out Edgar’s plans and troops movements. So far they’ve been updating their equipment and consolidating their territory still. She claims that Edgar has his sights on either re-conquering Rask or invading the Felkan Kingdom, but nothing is certain yet. The big thing is Edgar has actually managed to completely unite the new eternals under a doctrine that only they are fit to rule and new generations of eternals are still being trained. You have to say, you’re a little impressed by his accomplishments. + +Edgar a despot, Warrick a brainwashed spy, Brenda a traitorous informant and you in charge of an army that was once an enemy. If someone told you when you were fresh out of Gruz’s training school that this is how the four of you would end up, you never would’ve believed it. + +“Roldan, Gerald…Kane, I can only imagine what you’re thinking as you watch us all from wherever you are.” You say out loud, briefly thinking about the good old days when things were simpler. + +You stop with the nostalgia to return to your room to get some rest, where you find Dawn sleeping. You try not to wake her, but you’re doomed to failure. She moves over to cuddle next to you. + +“Go back to sleep.” You tell her. +“Hey, if you’re here, who’s in charge of the fort?” she groggily asks. +“Lieutenant Baker.” +“Him? Ugh, I better go on duty…” +“Hey come back to bed. He’s capable of handling it, besides, it’s not like anything is going on.” +“I guess so. I just feel more comfortable with you or me in charge.” +“Yeah, well you’ve been working too hard anyway. You probably need more rest than anyone, so go back to sleep.” +“Mmmm, I’m up now, but if you’d like me to stay in bed, we could do something else…” Dawn says rubbing your chest and kissing the side of your face. + +Yeah, you’ve been over thinking the possible downsides of this relationship too much lately. You take Dawn up on her offer and have fun living for the moment rather than pondering the past or concerning yourself about future. + +The next morning you return to your duties as usual. For most of the day it looks like it’s going to be another routine one, and that’s when you get an unexpected visit from Klemto. When he arrives in your office, he has a slight frown in his face. + +“I’m suspecting bad news.” You say. +“Well, it’s fifty fifty I suppose. Warrick has just given me news that Edgar is planning on attacking the Rask frontier. Not exactly sure how long it’ll take him, before he sets his sights on us again though. There isn’t really a government system in place there, it’s more of a collection of isolated towns relying on mercs to keep monsters at bay from what I’m told.” +“Edgar and I were both stationed at Rask for many years. He’s got the advantage of knowing the area and everything else, but he also has to know that the place tends towards lawlessness. He might be able to easily conquer towns, but the manpower involved in keeping them under control is a constant drain. Not to brag, but if it hadn’t been for me keeping a tight leash on things there, the Empire would’ve never gotten control of it as well as they did. +“Heh, well the ED has several eternals to keep a tight leash on it as you say.” +“And those eternals aren’t me.” +“Well, you seem to be in proud mood today.” +“Just stating the facts.” +“I see, well in any case that brings me to the next bit of news. You may be getting a transfer soon.” +“Transfer? Why?” +“Well the king and several others have always been uncomfortable with you in charge of the armies here on the frontlines as you probably know. It’s only due to the threat of the potential invasion and my circle’s influence that we managed to keep you in power here.” +“Are you fucking kidding me? After all their worrying about an invasion for years, you mean they’re suddenly not anymore, because Edgar’s attacking Rask? That’s pretty fucking short sighted.” You say. +“No, the intention is to still keep up the defenses here and keep the same procedures you set in place of course, but just uh, replace you.” +“Right, because I could suddenly raise an army and try to overthrow the throne at any given time…fuck. I thought you were supposed to calm those fears!” +“I tried! I really did! I mean I think I’m lucky we accomplished what we did! And I tried to fight for you on this too, but it’s just too much now and they want you gone. It’ll make everyone feel better.” +“Yes, everyone but me obviously.” +“Hey you’ve always claimed to be a soldier dedicated to the kingdom for good or bad. Isn’t this one of those times where you stepping down quietly to make everyone feel better would be best for the kingdom, instead of causing a fuse and potentially causing more problems?” +“So I accept this, and then what happens? Where am I getting transferred to? Some fort in the middle of nowhere again?” +“Well, that’s just it, you’re kind of going to be transferred to the uh…private sector. Are you familiar the merchant’s guild at the capital? Well, you’ll be the new head of security there!” Klemto says trying to make it sound impressive. + +You can’t believe this. + +“Are you telling me I’m not even going to be part of the damn army anymore? I’m just going to be a glorified guard?” +“You’ll be well paid and get a better place to stay than this dreary fort!” +“You know I don’t give a shit about all that, I’m a warrior! I want to fight!” +“And that’s still an option! I mean it’s not like you’ll be sitting around doing nothing. In fact with the guild could use a little extra protection since the rise in anti-gnomism going on lately.” +“Trust me, there’s some of that going on here too, right now.” + +Klempto seems like he wants to pat your arm reassure you, but decides better of it. + +“Look, I’m sorry about all this. It sucks I know, but the popular opinion is just not in our favor. That’s why we want you at the guild; most of my faction of likeminded fellows are there. We think we could still remedy this later.” +“You’d think with all your influence and control of the economy you’d be able to do something about this now.” +“Yes, well it isn’t as easy as you think.” +“Yeah, well it could be.” You say. + +Klempto musters up all his courage and points a finger at you. + +“And I don’t want to hear you talking like that anymore! I know what you’re implying and the answer is no! Unlike you humans, we gnomes don’t kill one another despite our disagreements! Now I suggest you prepare for your transfer, take care of all your affairs here and a carriage will come and get you in a few days. I suppose you’ll want that Dawn girl to take over here, which will be acceptable. I managed to convince the opposition of that.” +“Gee, thanks for small favors.” + +At this point Klemto just backs away from you and begins to leave, before he does though he speaks once more. + +“Y’know, you shouldn’t really see this as a bad thing. I mean think about how old you are getting. You humans don’t have that high of a life span. Shouldn’t you want to start slowing down on the war and battle a bit and start concentrating on enjoying your approaching elderly years?” +“If you’re still trying to convince me you’re failing miserably, because that’s the biggest load of shit I’ve ever heard for several reasons that I’m not even going to get into. But I’ll address the age thing briefly. Yeah I know I’m not twenty, but I fucking know I’m still a better warrior than any of the soldiers under my command, let alone an average Felkan soldier. And while you keep saying I’m human, I’m not. I’m a fucking Eternal. We’re better than a normal human and when the ED invades they’re going to SHOW you that they are mainly because they aren’t afraid to do whatever it kill their enemies, unlike you lot.” + +Sensing he better leave this time, Klemto quickly runs off out of your office, leaving you to ponder your situation. Just last night you were feeling good in the arms of Dawn, and now you got a bunch of shit shoved at you that you’re supposed to just sit and eat it. + +It’s enough for you to attack the Eternal Dominion anyway +> Disobey orders +You wouldn’t have gotten promoted if you hadn’t reported Captain Eckers, and you wouldn’t have gotten this command if you hadn’t took it upon yourself to launch an attack on the gnolls. The fact is, throughout most of your life, you’ve followed orders, but it’s only when you’ve taken matters into your own hands on important decisions that you’ve gotten anywhere. + +Why should this time be any different? + +For one thing, just because there are reports that the ED aren’t planning an invasion any time soon, doesn’t mean that’s true. Not that you doubt Warrick’s skills as a spy, but there’s always a possibility that false information is being leaked intentionally and that someone is on to him. Hell, maybe its even Brenda pretending to be on his side, you don’t know. + +The other thing is even if the info is true it’s not like they couldn’t still invade during or after their invasion of Rask. And it would be better to catch THEM off guard instead of the other way around, because you’re pretty sure they aren’t expecting the Felkan Kingdom to attack first. + +You’re most likely going to get into a shitload of trouble for all this, but when you get this war started, the ED isn’t going to listen to diplomacy, when they get attacked; they’re not going to stop. When that happens the kingdom isn’t going to have any choice but to help you. Or it could just backfire horribly. + +It’s all a gamble, but one you’re willing to risk, because you’re damned if you’re going to grow old and just become a guard for fat gnome merchants after all you’ve done and sacrificed. And if you die in battle, then it’ll be a death you’ve been destined for since birth. + +You find Dawn and tell her that you want orders put out to all the forts in the province. A full offensive across the Arat border and into ED territory is to be launched. + +“So the ED is invading soon?” Dawn asks. +“No, but after we destroy a couple of their forts and towns they will be. Have the message sent out that all forces are to converge on that ED town about twenty miles past the border, Bucklesberg. I’ll meet the rest of the battalion commanders there and plan the next attack after the place has been razed to the ground.” +“Wait, you’re going?” +“Yes, I’m leading this attack personally. I’m not some helpless old man you know!” +“I didn’t say…wait, this plan isn’t official is it? What did that gnome tell you?” +“A bunch of shit as usual. Now I’m going to need you here to keep things orderly on this side of the border. It might get ugly, but I know you can handle it. Just remember, we’re doing this for the good of the kingdom, even if its leaders are too stupid to see it.” + +Dawn looks a little concerned and it reminds you of when you first asked her to completely wipe out a gnoll village, but then she proves herself, as you knew she would. + +“It will be done, my love.” She says and leaves to send out the messengers. + +You order all troops in the fort to ready themselves for battle save for a skeleton crew to protect the fort. When they’re completely ready, you ride your horse up and down the line of them and are glad to see the dedication they are displaying. You can see that they have no need for any sort of long-winded motivating speech; they’ve been anticipating this moment for years, just as you have. + +“For the kingdom!” you shout which is followed by a loud cheer from your soldiers, then your army begins its march to war. + +When you get within a mile of Bucklesburg, a scout reports that the town isn’t completely undefended. In fact there is a larger than normal group of soldiers there along with Eternals. There may even be a mage there. + +“Hmm, it might appear that Edgar might’ve been amassing troops to prepare for an invasion after all, either that or he’s just distrustful. Doesn’t matter, we’re killing everything there anyway.” + +The battle of Bucklesburg is a massacre. The ED puts up as good a fight as they could have, but ultimately they’re overrun and outnumbered. The town is completely burned to the ground and the only survivors are the few villagers that had sense to run when you were seen coming in the distance. + +This is just the first step of the plan. When the rest of your soldiers arrive from the other forts you march again. + +By day nine, you’ve taken one the Eternal Dominion’s forts. It’s very damaged from the fighting, but you figure it will serve as a temporary base of operations while you plan your next attacks. After this battle you’ve also confirmed from various documents that you’ve found in the commander’s office that Edgar WAS planning to invade the kingdom, meaning you were right to attack. + +On day sixteen you get a message from Dawn, stating that the entire Gan province has been declared “under hostile control” and that all fort commanders are to relinquish their control to the kingdom immediately. Naturally this hasn’t happened, but the rest of the kingdom’s soldiers are supposedly being prepared to take back the province by force, however there is a lot of civil unrest going on as well due to some of the public opinion openly agreeing with conquest. She says that it’s part of the anti-gnome movement that claims they’ve been keeping the kingdom weak on purpose. She also says she is doing everything in her power to keep control of the Gan province and sends her love. + +On day twenty-two you get a visitor to Fort Ruin (as you’ve renamed it). + +“Hello Klemto, I hope your journey here wasn’t too dangerous, we’ve been trying to keep the road to the kingdom somewhat safe.” You say. +“Eternal, we’ve got a lot to talk about.” +“Yes, I suspect we do. So here, this’ll save time.” You say and throw a journal at Klemto who catches it. +“What’s this?” +“It’s the ex-captain of this fort journal. Makes mention of all the plans for the invasion on the kingdom, as well as a few amusing sexual desires. Second generation eternals certainly are a twisted bunch even when brought under control.” +“At least they can be brought under control, which is more than can be said for you.” +“I don’t understand, I’m did this for the kingdom and the proof is right there that I’m right! Don’t believe me? I’ve got more official documents I can give you.” +“It doesn’t matter if you’re right! It never fucking mattered! What you were supposed to do is obey orders! You pushed a boundary that’s too far this time I can’t fix this! Not now!” +“I question if you ever could in the first place. I’m sure you only kept me around as long as it served your purpose. Build up the pitiful defenses along the Felkan borders and then just get shuffled off to defend your fat merchants because they’re getting death threats from bigots that actually have a point whether they even know it or not. Face it, YOU fuckers helped create the Felkan government and you share part of the problems with it. Me? I’m just serving it. I told you before, I pledged myself to the kingdom, but my only stipulation was that I do things my way and that I not be held back in doing it. You got in my way and I had no choice, but to defy you. You can’t give a sword to me, and tell me not to kill the enemy with it. That’s what a fucking sword is for.” + +Klemto, rubs a hand over his face and sits down in silence. His face has a slightly gaunt appearance than you last remember it. Every time you’ve seen him he’s always been dressed very nice, but even his expensive clothing is a bit disheveled, even a small tear in his jacket. He takes a deep breath and speaks. + +“Major, you really don’t know what’s going on back home do you?” +“Dawn sent me a letter recently about a week ago about some of what’s going on. I hear the Gan province has been declared hostile and the rest of the kingdom army is planning to retake it.” +“Yes, and even that is being put on hold, you know why? Because somebody blew up the merchant’s guild two days ago! The day before? A duke was executed for conspiracy to kill the fucking king! At this point the Eternal Dominion doesn’t need to invade us, the Felkan Kingdom will be in ruins by the time their armies even arrive! You haven’t saved the kingdom, you’ve destroyed it!” he shouts with his eyes beginning to water and nearly hyperventilating the whole time. You have to say, you’ve never seen him ever this upset. You quickly get some water from a nearby pitcher and pour him a glass. + +“I don’t know what we’re going to do…I don’t know what we’re going to do…” he says in between drinks. +“Look calm down Klemto, maybe it isn’t as bad as you think.” You tell him. +“Bad? It’s fucking tragic! With the destruction of the merchant’s guild, the economy is going to go down the fucking privy hole, the king is an ineffectual idiot that’ll probably be successfully assassinated in a couple months, we’re suffering from civil revolts, we got a rogue province and on top of everything we’re at war with the Eternal Dominion!” + +Sounds pretty familiar. + +“Well, maybe it is as bad as you say. The question is what are YOU going to do about it?” you ask. +“Do? What can I do? I’m just one gnome! I’m hated in general by most non-gnomes and even most of my own people since they personally blame me, for having a hand in allowing you to be in charge of all the military in Gan. Even most of my friends that agreed with me were all killed in the bombing! I have nobody to help me fix this!” +“You’re wrong there, you’ve got me. Look, take all these documents concerning the invasion plans, and do your best in convincing everyone and anyone important that this first strike was very necessary. If you’re telling me that the king already is in danger of being assassinated…well maybe it’ll be best to let that happen and place someone who is more likely to support the cause. I have to imagine that there’s some power hungry royal ready to step up to the task.” +“Assassinate the king, this is what it’s come to? I don’t know maybe you’re even right, it’s just I really hoped it wouldn’t come to that. We gnomes have been puppet masters, but we’ve never engaged in assassination tactics before.” +“Well, I think you’re going to have to forget your previous tactics if you want the kingdom to survive regardless of who is actually on the throne. It’s either that or cut your losses and leave like I did with the Empire. I caution you though, if you truly believe in the kingdom and love it like I think you do, you might later regret that decision.” + +Klemto calms down a bit and looks at you to see that you speak from experience with that last remark. And it is true; there is a part of you that misses the Empire for all its faults. You’re making the best of things and you even manage to be content most of the time, but there is always something “missing” and you can’t get it back. + +“Okay, Eternal. Okay. Hand me all the documents that you mentioned, and I’ll get started on a plan. (Sigh) I just hope you can hold back the full wrath of the Eternal Dominion all by yourself.” +“Don’t you worry about that, I brought this problem on, so I’ll be the one to take care of it. Just try to keep the rest of the Felkan army off of my back, even if they aren’t going to help.” + +Klemto leaves with the documents and you return to your duties. You can’t be sure what’s going to become of the kingdom, but one thing is certain, you aren’t going to abandon your duty like last time. +> Years pass... +Year 58 + +Your soldiers stand ready at camp as a single enemy approaches you. He shows no fear and has a look of determination and blazing fury in his eyes. He might even be able to cut down everyone in his path just to get to you, but that won’t be necessary, as you have ordered everyone to stand down. This is between you and him. He’s an Eternal, a true one that you once served with, if either of you are to die today, it should at the hands of the other. No others are worthy. + +He’s stood in opposition to you for a few years now and now that his side has finally lost completely, his side has resorted to acts of desperation to continue a long lost battle. This is just another example of that desperation. + +The pair of you look at each other and say nothing. It wouldn’t do any good anyway, neither of you is going listen. You both believed in the same thing once, but not anymore. In his eyes you ruined all that. + +The two of you clash swords. + +You remember when you saw him after a long stretch of distance from each other; you felt a sense of relief. There you were in a hostile environment not exactly knowing what would come next and you saw a friendly face that was more than willing to help out. + +You land a kick to his stomach and smash his face with the pommel of your sword, destroying several of his teeth. He staggers back mouth filled with blood, but manages to block your next attack. + +After that last time you saw him you were soon separated again. Oh sure, you heard about him, and he probably heard about your deeds as well, but you haven’t actually seen each other until this moment. No matter who wins, it’s going to be the last time. + +You feel the deep cut of the sword sinking into your shoulder. Fighting through the pain, you manage to keep a firm grip of your sword and swing it into his side. You both hear a crack signaling that not only have you opened up a severe wound, but also broken a rib or two. He reels back from you as his side now drips red with gore. He’s unsteady and breathing hard, but he’s not going to stop. He’s got nothing left to lose. If you were in his shoes, you wouldn’t stop either. + +The funny thing about this is you always thought you’d be having this battle with Edgar, not Warrick. + +A slash at your leg brings you down to one knee, but Warrick isn’t able to capitalize on bringing his sword down on your head, since you slash upward into his groin. He screams out, dropping his weapon and you painfully lift yourself up on your one good leg and land your own strike across his head. The sickening sound of skull meeting metal is heard and he falls to the ground with blood and brains leaking out the side. He gurgles a few unintelligible things, but some of it starts to form complete thoughts. + +“You…? Wha…what are you doing here? I thought…you were still stationed in …Rask… I…don’t rem…gnomes…” + +After all this time, his memory is starting to come back. Your hit to his head, must’ve done something. You kneel down beside his bloody body and provide him a better last memory. + +“I was sent here to help you Warrick. It was a very important mission for the Empire. You got blown up by a trap, but we succeeded Warrick. We won. Remember this.” +“We…won…yeah…we…” Warrick mumbles and then finally expires. + +You tell your soldiers to burn his body and not to disturb you for the rest of day, despite the medic insisting that you really should have your wounds seen to. + +You sit in your tent in silence trying to rationalize killing yet another one of your former comrade in arms. He was trying to kill you. Warrick was on the wrong side of the civil war. A new king had to be installed and new policies had to be implemented. It had to be done, to protect the kingdom. Just like you had to kill Kane to protect the Empire… + +It was a shitty end to an honorable man, but death by your hand is probably the best thing you could’ve done for him and at least in his final moments he believed he was elsewhere. You sometime wish you were. + +The next day, you get your wounds properly patched up and get back to the business of holding off the Eternal Dominion, which hasn’t been the same since Edgar was assassinated last year. Apparently the new eternals didn’t agree with his leadership since it wasn’t producing the results they wanted. They might not have agreed with it, but he was doing better than whoever the idiot that’s in charge now is. + +You wonder what happened to Brenda, you knew she was up there with Edgar in ranking, but since she’s not in charge of the ED you can only assume that she was killed along with Edgar. You’re the last one left and you think back to Gruz’s last words to you. + +“You’ll outlive everyone…” + +It’s finally come true. + +Year 65 + +More aches and pains as you slowly get out of bed. With every passing year you feel more of them and it’s getting to a point where you can’t reasonably get into the thick of battle anymore with sword in hand. Sure you’re still a good fighter, but you’re slowing down and don’t have the strength that you once did. Of course some would say you weren’t supposed to be doing that anyway as a leader should stay in the back and give orders from behind the safety of his soldiers. But then you always did cling to your old ways. + +Still, it’s not like you need to anymore, as the Eternal Dominion hasn’t been a threat in years. You knew they’d fall apart soon after Edgar died. Their territory or what’s left of it basically consists of petty warlords fighting each other more than fighting anyone else, let along the kingdom. Nowadays your job as a general mostly consists of pushing a few bits around on a map. Sometimes you still try to remain active by visiting areas that are experiencing heavy combat. + +With no real opposition anymore and a stronger king in charge, the Felkan Kingdom is entering a period of aggressive expansion. With the newly acquired Arat province under control right now the king is looking towards Rask due to its resources. Diplomatic feelers were sent to see if the towns up there would join willingly, but no luck. You know from experience how difficult it is to hold, as the land is wild and its people are fiercely independent minded especially since they threw off the shackles of Empire rule and aren’t willing to have another large government tell them what to do. + +While you’re certainly the most qualified to carry out an invasion on Rask, you aren’t sure if you still have the energy anymore. Granted you wouldn’t be personally, but you still remember the headaches of holding the place. Ever since Dawn retired to become an instructor, she’s been dropping hints about you retiring as well. Perhaps it’s time to follow in your wife’s footsteps and join her. +> Continue as general +You can’t retire, at least not yet. Despite your aches, pains, and old age, you still feel the call of war within and the fire of it still hasn’t disappeared from you. You wonder if it ever will, but until that time, your place is on the battlefield despite your diminished capacity. + +Within a few months the decree in passed. Rask is to be invaded, as you knew it would. You know how the powers in charge work. They want results and they want them fast so you’re going to try your best to provide just that, you amass a large army and send it forth to conquer. Since you’ve got access to more powerful weapons this time, perhaps this invasion won’t be as difficult as you think if you show an overwhelming display of force. + +The first strike is against Kenneth’s Rest which you once knew as Fort Destiny. The place apparently had been converted into a hang out for mercenaries and a trading spot. Your army faces a lot of dark elven mercenaries that were enjoying their pay at the time, but most of them flee seeing as there isn’t any profit in defending a place they don’t actually have any loyalty to. + +When Kenneth’s Rest is taken, you ride out to it so you can carry out your orders closer to the action. + +“So you’ll be leaving soon again?” Dawn asks. +“You know how it is, if I don’t make a personal appearance they’re likely to fuck up my orders.” +“They can’t handle it themselves?” +“While I’m sure they could, I’m still the most familiar with the area. I think it would be best if I went there myself. Dawn, you shouldn’t really worry. I mean I’m not even going to be on the frontlines and there were more times in the past of when I could’ve been killed.” +“It’s not that, it’s just I dunno, when we got married and as we both get older I suppose I just figured we’d settle down a bit more so we could enjoy our remaining time together.” +“Like a normal married couple?” +“Well, yes.” +“Dawn, I think you know you didn’t exactly marry a normal person.” +“Yes, I know that too. Still, I do wonder when you’ll eventually realize that you don’t need to prove yourself anymore. I think everyone knows you aren’t an armchair general. Ever since the new king took the throne, you’ve actually had nothing but support. I’m pretty sure your name will go down in history.” +“It’s not about that, I pledged myself to this kingdom and its survival. Part of that is me making sure this invasion of Rask doesn’t go badly, because while we’re on top now, I’d rather make sure we stay that way and it doesn’t become a drain on our kingdom which then has a chain reaction of making things worse.” +“You didn’t abandon your duty.” Dawn says to you. +“What?” you ask, turning to face her. +“You didn’t abandon your duty to the Empire. I know that’s why you try so hard here and still do. I’ve always known that the first time you told me of your past. You always speak in such a way about it with a mix of regret and frustration yet always with a sense of pride. You still struggle with that one thing that you consider a failure on your part, when if you think about it…it was the best thing you ever did.” + +You hold Dawn’s hand and the pair of you look at each other’s wedding rings. She has an argument that can’t be debated as far as that is concerned. If you hadn’t left the Empire when you did, you doubt if you would’ve been married. Most likely you probably would’ve gotten a knife in the back by one of those treacherous new eternals by this point. + +You hold Dawn tightly and kiss her, before explaining. + +“You’re absolutely right of course. It was the best thing I could’ve done, but that’s not the whole picture. I was raised different than anyone in the Felkan Kingdom, hell I was raised different than most in the Empire. I was brought up not just for war, battle and combat, but also to this ideal. An ideal that wasn’t reality unfortunately, but there it was still implanted in my mind regardless. The thing is while that ideal barely existed in the Empire as I knew it, I see the spark of it coming to pass here in the Felkan Kingdom, and it’s like I finally belong here and I want to be apart of it’s glory as much as I can before I’m too old to be of any more use. Maybe I’m trying to live out the rest of my life as IF the Empire had never fallen. Perhaps that’s what I’ve been doing all along for the past few decades.” + +Dawn nods and understands, but you know she would still prefer you to stay closer to home. + +“Someday Dawn, someday.” You tell her before you leave for Rask. + +You almost feel like history repeating itself when you enter Kenneth’s Rest, though it’s a comforting feeling. + +Using Kenneth’s Rest as your base of operations in the Rask province, you decide the next attack should be the largest town in the region, which is Keplavisk. While Rask doesn’t strictly have a proper central government, Keplavisk is the closest thing to a capital. Take that out and everything else should be a lot easier. You tell your captain that when he enters the smoldering ruins of the town to relay a message to the survivors. + +“Tell them that the Bane of Rask has returned.” + +Year 75 + +You have to admit, that while retirement has it’s good and bad points, you think you’ve finally gotten your “struggle” out of your system now. You initially thought after you retired you would still have that “pull” but you don’t. Your successful campaign in Rask was truly a bookend of sorts. Maybe it was a kind of closure for you. + +Your retirement basically consists of you spending a lot of time with Dawn which is time well spent as you grow old together. You sometimes wonder if Dawn wanted children, though she never specifically addressed it. Nature never took its course in that area. Dawn is about twenty years younger than you, and she was still in her childbearing years when you first got together. You don’t think it was a problem with her though, you hold the belief that it probably was with you. Perhaps Eternals weren’t meant to reproduce, or maybe you weren’t. Still, you know that Roldan and Brenda never had any children that you know of, so you maintain the belief that it’s one of the limitations of an Eternal. After all if an Eternal could breed offspring his attention might not be solely on war. + +Besides your time with Dawn, you sometimes fill your time giving instruction at one of the military academies. You attend the occasional special royal event and recently you just accepted an award for everything you’ve done for the kingdom. There are also plans on having a statue made of you, but that isn’t set in stone (literally) yet. + +You sometimes walk down the streets of the capital and see how much it’s changed in such a short time and continuing to thrive. Soldiers marching down the street keeping order. Citizens going about their business, proud of their nation and not trying to overthrow anything. + +This is what the Empire should’ve been like. + +This is what you were taught to believe in. + +And it fills you with happiness that it was you that was part of making this come true.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 58 + +Your soldiers stand ready at camp as a single enemy approaches you. He shows no fear and has a look of determination and blazing fury in his eyes. He might even be able to cut down everyone in his path just to get to you, but that won’t be necessary, as you have ordered everyone to stand down. This is between you and him. He’s an Eternal, a true one that you once served with, if either of you are to die today, it should at the hands of the other. No others are worthy. + +He’s stood in opposition to you for a few years now and now that his side has finally lost completely, his side has resorted to acts of desperation to continue a long lost battle. This is just another example of that desperation. + +The pair of you look at each other and say nothing. It wouldn’t do any good anyway, neither of you is going listen. You both believed in the same thing once, but not anymore. In his eyes you ruined all that. + +The two of you clash swords. + +You remember when you saw him after a long stretch of distance from each other; you felt a sense of relief. There you were in a hostile environment not exactly knowing what would come next and you saw a friendly face that was more than willing to help out. + +You land a kick to his stomach and smash his face with the pommel of your sword, destroying several of his teeth. He staggers back mouth filled with blood, but manages to block your next attack. + +After that last time you saw him you were soon separated again. Oh sure, you heard about him, and he probably heard about your deeds as well, but you haven’t actually seen each other until this moment. No matter who wins, it’s going to be the last time. + +You feel the deep cut of the sword sinking into your shoulder. Fighting through the pain, you manage to keep a firm grip of your sword and swing it into his side. You both hear a crack signaling that not only have you opened up a severe wound, but also broken a rib or two. He reels back from you as his side now drips red with gore. He’s unsteady and breathing hard, but he’s not going to stop. He’s got nothing left to lose. If you were in his shoes, you wouldn’t stop either. + +The funny thing about this is you always thought you’d be having this battle with Edgar, not Warrick. + +A slash at your leg brings you down to one knee, but Warrick isn’t able to capitalize on bringing his sword down on your head, since you slash upward into his groin. He screams out, dropping his weapon and you painfully lift yourself up on your one good leg and land your own strike across his head. The sickening sound of skull meeting metal is heard and he falls to the ground with blood and brains leaking out the side. He gurgles a few unintelligible things, but some of it starts to form complete thoughts. + +“You…? Wha…what are you doing here? I thought…you were still stationed in …Rask… I…don’t rem…gnomes…” + +After all this time, his memory is starting to come back. Your hit to his head, must’ve done something. You kneel down beside his bloody body and provide him a better last memory. + +“I was sent here to help you Warrick. It was a very important mission for the Empire. You got blown up by a trap, but we succeeded Warrick. We won. Remember this.” +“We…won…yeah…we…” Warrick mumbles and then finally expires. + +You tell your soldiers to burn his body and not to disturb you for the rest of day, despite the medic insisting that you really should have your wounds seen to. + +You sit in your tent in silence trying to rationalize killing yet another one of your former comrade in arms. He was trying to kill you. Warrick was on the wrong side of the civil war. A new king had to be installed and new policies had to be implemented. It had to be done, to protect the kingdom. Just like you had to kill Kane to protect the Empire… + +It was a shitty end to an honorable man, but death by your hand is probably the best thing you could’ve done for him and at least in his final moments he believed he was elsewhere. You sometime wish you were. + +The next day, you get your wounds properly patched up and get back to the business of holding off the Eternal Dominion, which hasn’t been the same since Edgar was assassinated last year. Apparently the new eternals didn’t agree with his leadership since it wasn’t producing the results they wanted. They might not have agreed with it, but he was doing better than whoever the idiot that’s in charge now is. + +You wonder what happened to Brenda, you knew she was up there with Edgar in ranking, but since she’s not in charge of the ED you can only assume that she was killed along with Edgar. You’re the last one left and you think back to Gruz’s last words to you. + +“You’ll outlive everyone…” + +It’s finally come true. + +Year 65 + +More aches and pains as you slowly get out of bed. With every passing year you feel more of them and it’s getting to a point where you can’t reasonably get into the thick of battle anymore with sword in hand. Sure you’re still a good fighter, but you’re slowing down and don’t have the strength that you once did. Of course some would say you weren’t supposed to be doing that anyway as a leader should stay in the back and give orders from behind the safety of his soldiers. But then you always did cling to your old ways. + +Still, it’s not like you need to anymore, as the Eternal Dominion hasn’t been a threat in years. You knew they’d fall apart soon after Edgar died. Their territory or what’s left of it basically consists of petty warlords fighting each other more than fighting anyone else, let along the kingdom. Nowadays your job as a general mostly consists of pushing a few bits around on a map. Sometimes you still try to remain active by visiting areas that are experiencing heavy combat. + +With no real opposition anymore and a stronger king in charge, the Felkan Kingdom is entering a period of aggressive expansion. With the newly acquired Arat province under control right now the king is looking towards Rask due to its resources. Diplomatic feelers were sent to see if the towns up there would join willingly, but no luck. You know from experience how difficult it is to hold, as the land is wild and its people are fiercely independent minded especially since they threw off the shackles of Empire rule and aren’t willing to have another large government tell them what to do. + +While you’re certainly the most qualified to carry out an invasion on Rask, you aren’t sure if you still have the energy anymore. Granted you wouldn’t be personally, but you still remember the headaches of holding the place. Ever since Dawn retired to become an instructor, she’s been dropping hints about you retiring as well. Perhaps it’s time to follow in your wife’s footsteps and join her. +> Retire +As much as you might like to go on, you decide that perhaps it is finally time to pass the torch to younger and more energetic men and women than yourself. You also know it would probably make Dawn happier. You’ve done quite a bit for the Felkan Kingdom and served as well as you could have under the circumstances. You just wish you had time to do more, or at least the youth, if not the time. + +When you step down, its sort of a surprise to the entire Felkan military, they always figured you’d never willingly step down and probably die in office. Even the new ruling class is a little disappointed to see you leave, you were after all instrumental in their rise to power. + +A small service celebrating your years of dedication to the Felkan Kingdom is held which you naturally attend and you even give a small speech. It’s all very patriotic and keeps the up the morale and optimistic outlook of the kingdom for everyone. Shortly after your retirement, you do indulge in the frivolities of said retirement; this pretty much consists of not doing much of anything or spending time with Dawn. It’s fun for a while. + +When you start to keep up on the news on the Rask invasion, you become increasingly dismayed by what your successor is doing. There are victories at first, but they eventually become costly ones. The Raskians begin organizing enough to make further conquest difficult. + +Eventually several lower ranking officers begin calling for you to return if only as a consultant or strategic advisor. You actually would gladly volunteer as you definitely want to help the kingdom and you’re starting to find your retired life a little boring. Unfortunately the current general doesn’t want that, as he wants to take all the credit for the conquest of Rask and if he’s able, to surpass your victories. The fool manages to sway the king in his favor by pointing out that they hold most of the territory and are plundering its resources. The king of course is just concerned with the bottom line, so he keeps him on. + +Of course the biggest problem with this, is it’s incredibly short sighted. The Raskians sabotage their mines and fight a guerilla war that makes things even worse. Felkan soldiers die by the thousands over the course of several years and this begins to have a downward spiral. Not a grand one, but it’s noticeable that the cracks are starting to show and people are beginning to protest again. + +You don’t agree with how the government is handling things, but you’re a patriot to the end and one day you get into an argument with a group of them on the street. Dawn tells you to let it go, but the more they get in your face, the more you won’t let it go and eventually you feel that call to violence again… + +You punch out one of the protestors, which causes more shouting from the rest of the crowd as well as the soldiers attempting to keep order. One the soldiers respectfully attempts to hold you back, but you continue to try to attack the rest of the protestors and screaming at them of how ungrateful they all are. With tensions heating up on all sides, it’s only a matter of time before things escalate and somebody fires a shot and it isn’t from the soldiers, it’s from one of the protestors carrying a concealed pistol. + +You feel the impact to your chest and fall to the ground as mass chaos erupts all around you. Dawn screams for a medic and attempts to drag you out of the way, but you’re already coughing up blood and gasping for breath as the chest wound continues to bleed out your vital fluids. + +“Dawn…(gasp, gurgle)” is all you can utter before your heart stops beating.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 58 + +Your soldiers stand ready at camp as a single enemy approaches you. He shows no fear and has a look of determination and blazing fury in his eyes. He might even be able to cut down everyone in his path just to get to you, but that won’t be necessary, as you have ordered everyone to stand down. This is between you and him. He’s an Eternal, a true one that you once served with, if either of you are to die today, it should at the hands of the other. No others are worthy. + +He’s stood in opposition to you for a few years now and now that his side has finally lost completely, his side has resorted to acts of desperation to continue a long lost battle. This is just another example of that desperation. + +The pair of you look at each other and say nothing. It wouldn’t do any good anyway, neither of you is going listen. You both believed in the same thing once, but not anymore. In his eyes you ruined all that. + +The two of you clash swords. + +You remember when you saw him after a long stretch of distance from each other; you felt a sense of relief. There you were in a hostile environment not exactly knowing what would come next and you saw a friendly face that was more than willing to help out. + +You land a kick to his stomach and smash his face with the pommel of your sword, destroying several of his teeth. He staggers back mouth filled with blood, but manages to block your next attack. + +After that last time you saw him you were soon separated again. Oh sure, you heard about him, and he probably heard about your deeds as well, but you haven’t actually seen each other until this moment. No matter who wins, it’s going to be the last time. + +You feel the deep cut of the sword sinking into your shoulder. Fighting through the pain, you manage to keep a firm grip of your sword and swing it into his side. You both hear a crack signaling that not only have you opened up a severe wound, but also broken a rib or two. He reels back from you as his side now drips red with gore. He’s unsteady and breathing hard, but he’s not going to stop. He’s got nothing left to lose. If you were in his shoes, you wouldn’t stop either. + +The funny thing about this is you always thought you’d be having this battle with Edgar, not Warrick. + +A slash at your leg brings you down to one knee, but Warrick isn’t able to capitalize on bringing his sword down on your head, since you slash upward into his groin. He screams out, dropping his weapon and you painfully lift yourself up on your one good leg and land your own strike across his head. The sickening sound of skull meeting metal is heard and he falls to the ground with blood and brains leaking out the side. He gurgles a few unintelligible things, but some of it starts to form complete thoughts. + +“You…? Wha…what are you doing here? I thought…you were still stationed in …Rask… I…don’t rem…gnomes…” + +After all this time, his memory is starting to come back. Your hit to his head, must’ve done something. You kneel down beside his bloody body and provide him a better last memory. + +“I was sent here to help you Warrick. It was a very important mission for the Empire. You got blown up by a trap, but we succeeded Warrick. We won. Remember this.” +“We…won…yeah…we…” Warrick mumbles and then finally expires. + +You tell your soldiers to burn his body and not to disturb you for the rest of day, despite the medic insisting that you really should have your wounds seen to. + +You sit in your tent in silence trying to rationalize killing yet another one of your former comrade in arms. He was trying to kill you. Warrick was on the wrong side of the civil war. A new king had to be installed and new policies had to be implemented. It had to be done, to protect the kingdom. Just like you had to kill Kane to protect the Empire… + +It was a shitty end to an honorable man, but death by your hand is probably the best thing you could’ve done for him and at least in his final moments he believed he was elsewhere. You sometime wish you were. + +The next day, you get your wounds properly patched up and get back to the business of holding off the Eternal Dominion, which hasn’t been the same since Edgar was assassinated last year. Apparently the new eternals didn’t agree with his leadership since it wasn’t producing the results they wanted. They might not have agreed with it, but he was doing better than whoever the idiot that’s in charge now is. + +You wonder what happened to Brenda, you knew she was up there with Edgar in ranking, but since she’s not in charge of the ED you can only assume that she was killed along with Edgar. You’re the last one left and you think back to Gruz’s last words to you. + +“You’ll outlive everyone…” + +It’s finally come true. + +Year 65 + +More aches and pains as you slowly get out of bed. With every passing year you feel more of them and it’s getting to a point where you can’t reasonably get into the thick of battle anymore with sword in hand. Sure you’re still a good fighter, but you’re slowing down and don’t have the strength that you once did. Of course some would say you weren’t supposed to be doing that anyway as a leader should stay in the back and give orders from behind the safety of his soldiers. But then you always did cling to your old ways. + +Still, it’s not like you need to anymore, as the Eternal Dominion hasn’t been a threat in years. You knew they’d fall apart soon after Edgar died. Their territory or what’s left of it basically consists of petty warlords fighting each other more than fighting anyone else, let along the kingdom. Nowadays your job as a general mostly consists of pushing a few bits around on a map. Sometimes you still try to remain active by visiting areas that are experiencing heavy combat. + +With no real opposition anymore and a stronger king in charge, the Felkan Kingdom is entering a period of aggressive expansion. With the newly acquired Arat province under control right now the king is looking towards Rask due to its resources. Diplomatic feelers were sent to see if the towns up there would join willingly, but no luck. You know from experience how difficult it is to hold, as the land is wild and its people are fiercely independent minded especially since they threw off the shackles of Empire rule and aren’t willing to have another large government tell them what to do. + +While you’re certainly the most qualified to carry out an invasion on Rask, you aren’t sure if you still have the energy anymore. Granted you wouldn’t be personally, but you still remember the headaches of holding the place. Ever since Dawn retired to become an instructor, she’s been dropping hints about you retiring as well. Perhaps it’s time to follow in your wife’s footsteps and join her. +> Year 61 (Klemto's Lamentation) +As you think about your own possible future and if your “time” has come to settle into old age and compromise, you also think back to another who was struggling with his own future… + +“Eternal, come drink with me one last time!” Klemto says sitting in a very basic chair near an equally unimpressive table. He’s not drunk yet, but he will be soon, if he keeps drinking. + +You take a quick glance at his home and most of it is very simplistic and lacks the luxury that he once had. It’s obvious he’s fallen on hard times now that the civil war has wrapped up. He no longer wears a suit; instead he has on a drab torn shirt and a pair of plain pants. Even one of his shoes has a hole in it. + +“No that’s okay, Klem…it is my understanding that all of the remaining gnomes in the kingdom are leaving on their own accord. I thought that you would be busy making preparations to join them.” +“Of their own accord? Hah! That’s rich! Richer than me anyway! No, my dear Eternal, I think the change in the regime has made it quite clear that our kind are not wanted in any capacity. In fact I got a personal warning from that bastard calling himself king right now. After all the shit we did for him too…oh well. At least they’re letting us leave peacefully this time. Lot more than I can say for the Empire.” + +You aren’t exactly sure how to respond, but it doesn’t matter because Klemto is in a talkative mood. + +“Y’know though, I don’t blame him.” +“You don’t?” +“Pfftt no. He’s a fucking human. And all humans are alike, power hungry and ready to backstab someone as soon as they get it and crush all those when they get on top. I get it. They got short life spans. Gotta get shit done a lot quicker. All of them do and if persecuting, enslaving or killing an entire race stands in their way, so be it.” +“You seem to be taking all this well.” +“Well? Well how else can I take it? I certainly can’t do shit about it can I? Hell, I’m just lucky I backed the right side of the civil war, otherwise we probably wouldn’t be having this conversation and I’d be in a mass grave right now.” +“That’s a good way to look at things. By surviving you can still make a life for yourself and rebuild.” + +Klemto bursts out laughing, spitting out most of his drink. + +“Ohhhh, that’s a good one Eternal. I guess that’s why I don’t blame you either. You don’t know any better.” +“Blame me? I didn’t put you in your current position.” +“Oh and you mean to say you had NOTHING at all to do with the current change in regime? The expansion of the Felkan Kingdom? Hell, even the rise in nationalistic fervor? You can stand here and look me in the fucking eye and say you had absolutely NOTHING to do with that?” +“…very well. Perhaps my actions did set certain events in motion, but I did it for the kingdom!” +“Right! You’re right. You DID do it for the kingdom and that’s why you don’t know any better. You aren’t even human. You look like one. You sound like one. Hell, you must even have some feelings like one given your marriage. Still a little surprised about that one…but like you once said to me, you aren’t human. You’re a fucking abomination that managed to finish a job that a corrupt dead society set in motion long ago.” +“And what is that exactly, Klemto?” +“Conquest and genocide. My people…my people escaped the slavery of the Empire centuries ago, and for what? For us to be practically destroyed by YOU. Whether you did it knowingly or not, you managed to complete the job. The Felkan Kingdom? It’s not the Felkan Kingdom anymore. It’s the fucking Empire. My people? My people are scattered and more divided in away that we’ve ever known! We…turned on each other…(sob)…we KILLED one another (choke)…you…you did so…(sob) much damage…” + +Klemto breaks down completely at this point and cries softly to himself. You really don’t know how to respond at all. Part of you actually feel sorry for him, as odd as it may seem. You and he didn’t always get along; you never really trusted him and you certainly never forgave his kind for what they did to Warrick... + +And yet, besides Dawn, he’s the closest you’ve had to a “friend” since you’ve been in the Felkan Kingdom. Despite all of what he is saying to you, the fact remains he did help you several times. + +And that’s where the problem lies… + +“(Sniff) And despite all of the damage you did, you are not to blame. We are, or rather I am. I was the fool who believed that you could bring about change for the better. I was the fool who helped you the entire time. There is no way you could’ve gotten away with most of what you got away with had I not intervened with my connections and even convinced some of my fellows to go down the path to hell. If I had any of the great intelligence that we gnomes are supposed to be known for, you should’ve been executed the first time we met, but I had to be an optimist. Idealism…the disease of idiots.” + +Klemto takes a long swig of his bottle draining it completely before throwing it to the floor. + +“Klemto…I did appreciate your help when you gave it. I mean that.” +“I know you did, just wish I could help myself.” +“You can. Like I said, you’re a survivor and intelligent. You can rebuild somewhere else maybe even better than ever.” +“Heh, while I appreciate your words of encouragement Eternal, I don’t think so. You see, I’m not just an exile from the Felkan Kingdom, I’m also an exile from my own people now, or what remains of them. Seems they blame me for what’s happened as well…I guess I can at least take solace in the fact that their hatred of me has kept them united them on some level.” +“But, surely you could make it on your own, somewhere!” +“I don’t think so. We gnomes have always been communal in nature. Perhaps in some ways we DO rely on integrating into other societies to protect us. Hopefully one day we won’t and we’ll carve out a land of our own. But in any case I won’t be there to see it, and I’m too old to try to make it on my own even if I was going to attempt such a mad plan. No Eternal, there comes a time in your life when you realize it’s time to retire. I think I probably should’ve done so a LONG time ago, but I stayed in the game because I thought I could do some more good. Instead I just made things worse, A LOT worse. Sometimes you have to look back at your past, smile at the good times, forget about the bad and enjoy old age. Unfortunately for me there are too many bad times to forget and no place for me to enjoy the good times…” + +You begin to get a little apprehensive by Klemto’s tone and words. + +“Klem…” + +Klemto suddenly pulls out a flintlock pistol and points it to his head. + +“Goodbye Eternal.” + +And with those last words you saw Klemto blow his brains out. + +Naturally you don’t have the same problems as he did, but perhaps he could’ve been right about there coming a time to retire. Quitting while you’re ahead so to speak, and not screwing up your past accomplishments by being too stubborn. + +You certainly wouldn’t want to end up in a hopeless position like poor Klemto.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wouldn’t have gotten promoted if you hadn’t reported Captain Eckers, and you wouldn’t have gotten this command if you hadn’t took it upon yourself to launch an attack on the gnolls. The fact is, throughout most of your life, you’ve followed orders, but it’s only when you’ve taken matters into your own hands on important decisions that you’ve gotten anywhere. + +Why should this time be any different? + +For one thing, just because there are reports that the ED aren’t planning an invasion any time soon, doesn’t mean that’s true. Not that you doubt Warrick’s skills as a spy, but there’s always a possibility that false information is being leaked intentionally and that someone is on to him. Hell, maybe its even Brenda pretending to be on his side, you don’t know. + +The other thing is even if the info is true it’s not like they couldn’t still invade during or after their invasion of Rask. And it would be better to catch THEM off guard instead of the other way around, because you’re pretty sure they aren’t expecting the Felkan Kingdom to attack first. + +You’re most likely going to get into a shitload of trouble for all this, but when you get this war started, the ED isn’t going to listen to diplomacy, when they get attacked; they’re not going to stop. When that happens the kingdom isn’t going to have any choice but to help you. Or it could just backfire horribly. + +It’s all a gamble, but one you’re willing to risk, because you’re damned if you’re going to grow old and just become a guard for fat gnome merchants after all you’ve done and sacrificed. And if you die in battle, then it’ll be a death you’ve been destined for since birth. + +You find Dawn and tell her that you want orders put out to all the forts in the province. A full offensive across the Arat border and into ED territory is to be launched. + +“So the ED is invading soon?” Dawn asks. +“No, but after we destroy a couple of their forts and towns they will be. Have the message sent out that all forces are to converge on that ED town about twenty miles past the border, Bucklesberg. I’ll meet the rest of the battalion commanders there and plan the next attack after the place has been razed to the ground.” +“Wait, you’re going?” +“Yes, I’m leading this attack personally. I’m not some helpless old man you know!” +“I didn’t say…wait, this plan isn’t official is it? What did that gnome tell you?” +“A bunch of shit as usual. Now I’m going to need you here to keep things orderly on this side of the border. It might get ugly, but I know you can handle it. Just remember, we’re doing this for the good of the kingdom, even if its leaders are too stupid to see it.” + +Dawn looks a little concerned and it reminds you of when you first asked her to completely wipe out a gnoll village, but then she proves herself, as you knew she would. + +“It will be done, my love.” She says and leaves to send out the messengers. + +You order all troops in the fort to ready themselves for battle save for a skeleton crew to protect the fort. When they’re completely ready, you ride your horse up and down the line of them and are glad to see the dedication they are displaying. You can see that they have no need for any sort of long-winded motivating speech; they’ve been anticipating this moment for years, just as you have. + +“For the kingdom!” you shout which is followed by a loud cheer from your soldiers, then your army begins its march to war. + +When you get within a mile of Bucklesburg, a scout reports that the town isn’t completely undefended. In fact there is a larger than normal group of soldiers there along with Eternals. There may even be a mage there. + +“Hmm, it might appear that Edgar might’ve been amassing troops to prepare for an invasion after all, either that or he’s just distrustful. Doesn’t matter, we’re killing everything there anyway.” + +The battle of Bucklesburg is a massacre. The ED puts up as good a fight as they could have, but ultimately they’re overrun and outnumbered. The town is completely burned to the ground and the only survivors are the few villagers that had sense to run when you were seen coming in the distance. + +This is just the first step of the plan. When the rest of your soldiers arrive from the other forts you march again. + +By day nine, you’ve taken one the Eternal Dominion’s forts. It’s very damaged from the fighting, but you figure it will serve as a temporary base of operations while you plan your next attacks. After this battle you’ve also confirmed from various documents that you’ve found in the commander’s office that Edgar WAS planning to invade the kingdom, meaning you were right to attack. + +On day sixteen you get a message from Dawn, stating that the entire Gan province has been declared “under hostile control” and that all fort commanders are to relinquish their control to the kingdom immediately. Naturally this hasn’t happened, but the rest of the kingdom’s soldiers are supposedly being prepared to take back the province by force, however there is a lot of civil unrest going on as well due to some of the public opinion openly agreeing with conquest. She says that it’s part of the anti-gnome movement that claims they’ve been keeping the kingdom weak on purpose. She also says she is doing everything in her power to keep control of the Gan province and sends her love. + +On day twenty-two you get a visitor to Fort Ruin (as you’ve renamed it). + +“Hello Klemto, I hope your journey here wasn’t too dangerous, we’ve been trying to keep the road to the kingdom somewhat safe.” You say. +“Eternal, we’ve got a lot to talk about.” +“Yes, I suspect we do. So here, this’ll save time.” You say and throw a journal at Klemto who catches it. +“What’s this?” +“It’s the ex-captain of this fort journal. Makes mention of all the plans for the invasion on the kingdom, as well as a few amusing sexual desires. Second generation eternals certainly are a twisted bunch even when brought under control.” +“At least they can be brought under control, which is more than can be said for you.” +“I don’t understand, I’m did this for the kingdom and the proof is right there that I’m right! Don’t believe me? I’ve got more official documents I can give you.” +“It doesn’t matter if you’re right! It never fucking mattered! What you were supposed to do is obey orders! You pushed a boundary that’s too far this time I can’t fix this! Not now!” +“I question if you ever could in the first place. I’m sure you only kept me around as long as it served your purpose. Build up the pitiful defenses along the Felkan borders and then just get shuffled off to defend your fat merchants because they’re getting death threats from bigots that actually have a point whether they even know it or not. Face it, YOU fuckers helped create the Felkan government and you share part of the problems with it. Me? I’m just serving it. I told you before, I pledged myself to the kingdom, but my only stipulation was that I do things my way and that I not be held back in doing it. You got in my way and I had no choice, but to defy you. You can’t give a sword to me, and tell me not to kill the enemy with it. That’s what a fucking sword is for.” + +Klemto, rubs a hand over his face and sits down in silence. His face has a slightly gaunt appearance than you last remember it. Every time you’ve seen him he’s always been dressed very nice, but even his expensive clothing is a bit disheveled, even a small tear in his jacket. He takes a deep breath and speaks. + +“Major, you really don’t know what’s going on back home do you?” +“Dawn sent me a letter recently about a week ago about some of what’s going on. I hear the Gan province has been declared hostile and the rest of the kingdom army is planning to retake it.” +“Yes, and even that is being put on hold, you know why? Because somebody blew up the merchant’s guild two days ago! The day before? A duke was executed for conspiracy to kill the fucking king! At this point the Eternal Dominion doesn’t need to invade us, the Felkan Kingdom will be in ruins by the time their armies even arrive! You haven’t saved the kingdom, you’ve destroyed it!” he shouts with his eyes beginning to water and nearly hyperventilating the whole time. You have to say, you’ve never seen him ever this upset. You quickly get some water from a nearby pitcher and pour him a glass. + +“I don’t know what we’re going to do…I don’t know what we’re going to do…” he says in between drinks. +“Look calm down Klemto, maybe it isn’t as bad as you think.” You tell him. +“Bad? It’s fucking tragic! With the destruction of the merchant’s guild, the economy is going to go down the fucking privy hole, the king is an ineffectual idiot that’ll probably be successfully assassinated in a couple months, we’re suffering from civil revolts, we got a rogue province and on top of everything we’re at war with the Eternal Dominion!” + +Sounds pretty familiar. + +“Well, maybe it is as bad as you say. The question is what are YOU going to do about it?” you ask. +“Do? What can I do? I’m just one gnome! I’m hated in general by most non-gnomes and even most of my own people since they personally blame me, for having a hand in allowing you to be in charge of all the military in Gan. Even most of my friends that agreed with me were all killed in the bombing! I have nobody to help me fix this!” +“You’re wrong there, you’ve got me. Look, take all these documents concerning the invasion plans, and do your best in convincing everyone and anyone important that this first strike was very necessary. If you’re telling me that the king already is in danger of being assassinated…well maybe it’ll be best to let that happen and place someone who is more likely to support the cause. I have to imagine that there’s some power hungry royal ready to step up to the task.” +“Assassinate the king, this is what it’s come to? I don’t know maybe you’re even right, it’s just I really hoped it wouldn’t come to that. We gnomes have been puppet masters, but we’ve never engaged in assassination tactics before.” +“Well, I think you’re going to have to forget your previous tactics if you want the kingdom to survive regardless of who is actually on the throne. It’s either that or cut your losses and leave like I did with the Empire. I caution you though, if you truly believe in the kingdom and love it like I think you do, you might later regret that decision.” + +Klemto calms down a bit and looks at you to see that you speak from experience with that last remark. And it is true; there is a part of you that misses the Empire for all its faults. You’re making the best of things and you even manage to be content most of the time, but there is always something “missing” and you can’t get it back. + +“Okay, Eternal. Okay. Hand me all the documents that you mentioned, and I’ll get started on a plan. (Sigh) I just hope you can hold back the full wrath of the Eternal Dominion all by yourself.” +“Don’t you worry about that, I brought this problem on, so I’ll be the one to take care of it. Just try to keep the rest of the Felkan army off of my back, even if they aren’t going to help.” + +Klemto leaves with the documents and you return to your duties. You can’t be sure what’s going to become of the kingdom, but one thing is certain, you aren’t going to abandon your duty like last time. +> Year 56 (Wedding Day) +You never thought such a day would come for you, ever. But here you are standing before a woman that you’ve come to feel closer to than anyone else. Not even your fellow Eternals, who at this point are all pretty much hostile to you, even Warrick, now that he’s taken the side of the loyalists in the Felkan civil war. You are hardly surprised though; you knew it was bound to happen given what the gnomes did to him. Even Klemto, who managed to convince most of his brethren to join you, can’t undo the unwavering loyalty they instilled in him. + +The civil war pales in comparison to the war you’re fighting with the Eternal Dominion, you might’ve gotten an initial advantage over them, but they are certainly trying to make up for it now. Edgar must be enraged. + +But none of that matters right now. + +A Felkan civil war and war with the Eternal Dominion, and still you are able to put all those more pressing conflicts aside to focus on Dawn. You look at her youthful face and into blue eyes and it makes you realize just how much younger she is than you. You wonder briefly if her youth is part of what makes her so desirable. Not for the superficial reasons that most would consider, but her youth itself. Looking at how young she is, makes you forget how old you are. You dismiss such thoughts, as you have enough aching joints and pains to always remind you how old you’re getting. + +Besides, it’s a much deeper connection and the pair of you knows that. She has been with you through all of this and supported you the entire way. You don’t even think you could’ve accomplished all of this without her. It is like the pair of you is in perfect harmony with each other at times. You can’t imagine yourself without her in someway. + +You think you now understand what Roldan was talking about when he spoke of Brenda. + +With war looming all around the pair of you, death is always a possibility, but this gesture, this ritual, this bond that you both are going through will signify that even if the unfortunate should occur to either one of you, you know that the love you felt was always there, and will always be there. + +The pair of you aren’t even paying attention to the local holy man performing the ceremony or the few soldiers in attendance as witnesses, it’s just you and her as the pair of you embrace and kiss.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You don’t know if this is actually going to do any good, but if the captain ever decides to suddenly secede from the Felkan Kingdom, you want someone to know that you weren’t part of it from the beginning. The problem there isn’t a higher-ranking officer at the fort and you don’t really know anybody that you could report this to. You suppose you write a letter to Major Samuels at Fort Smoke. He’s in charge of the whole Ibim province, but then you think what if he feels the same way as the captain? If that’s the case, then you’d probably become hated not just at your fort, but in other circles as well. You’d possibly even be demoted or worse. You’ve managed to make a life here with minimal friction, and you’d hate to just throw that all away, but you have to do something. For good or ill your duty is to the kingdom now and you need to defend against all potential threats, external and internal, and from your experience the internal ones are the worst. + +That’s when you come up with the idea that you’ll write to Warrick about this. He might not be able to do anything about it considering he’s in another province, but he’s about the only one you can trust and maybe he knows something and can at least give you advice. + +You write a letter to Warrick that night and hand it to a professional courier in Blossumdale the next day. Not having anything else to do, you return to your duties. Days pass into weeks and weeks pass into months. Just when you’re starting to wonder if your letter got intercepted and someone having sinister plans for you, you get a letter back from Warrick. + +You’re anxious to see his reply and you find a quiet place to open it up and read it private. You’re expecting a long letter, but instead you get a short one that’s to the point. + +Things are already in motion to remedy the situation soon and your duty to the kingdom has been noted. + +Warrick + +You can only guess that Captain Eckers will soon be gone with wording like that. You didn’t expect anything to be done either, just advice. Warrick must have better connections than you thought. + +Another week passes since you received Warrick’s reply and Fort Green is visited by a general with his personal assistants, a couple of royals and a well-dressed gnome. The visit is unexpected by everyone, especially Captain Eckers since he’d know first if anyone was scheduled to visit. + +Captain Eckers and several others are taken into rooms and questioned separately. The rest of you are ordered to go about your business and to not interfere. Later you are called in as well. You find yourself face to face with one of the generals. General Benson. He’s probably about the same age as Eckers, though obviously more successful. + +“Sergeant, I’m going to make this quick. You are the one who wrote the letter to Captain Warrick are you not?” General Benson asks. +“Yes, sir.” +“And why did you write to Captain Warrick about your concerns? Why not write to Major Samuels? He is the superior officer in charge of this province.” +“Well, I wasn’t sure if I should sir. For all I knew he might’ve had sympathies with Captain Eckers and if that had been the case, my situation would not have been a good one.” +“Hold on sergeant, are you telling me Major Samuels is also part of this?” +“No, I don’t even know the Major sir, I was just being cautious on my part. I wrote to Warrick because…well he’s the only person I felt I could absolutely trust.” + +The general is silent for a moment while he looks you up and down. + +“Tell me, have you had any conflict while being here?” +“Conflict with the other soldiers? No sir, can’t say that I have, I tend to just do my job and keep to myself as far as social matters are concerned.” +“What about your relationship with Captain Eckers?” +“It’s a respectful one sir, I feel no malice towards him nor perceive any towards me.” +“Yet you felt the need to report him.” +“Well sir, I thought it was something that might be needed to be brought to the attention of those in a higher position than me. Dissension in the ranks is no good sir. These sorts of things need to be taken care of before they spread. I know from direct experience, sir.” +“Hmmm, yes I suppose you would…” + +General Benson continues to study you as if he’s trying to read your mind, after a minute of this, he backs off and starts to pack up some papers on a nearby desk. + +“I think we have everything we need to know. We weren’t exactly sure about you for a long time, and quite frankly some of us still aren’t. Your lack of trust among your fellow soldiers is concerning, but considering what we’ve found here, possibly understandable. As of now, I’m promoting you to captain and putting you in charge of Fort Green until further notice. You’ll be receiving some new soldiers soon to replace the men that will be leaving here. And hopefully this reward for your dedication to the Kingdom alleviates some of your trust issues.” +“It will sir. It will. Thanks you sir.” +“Very good, you’re dismissed.” + +You step out of the room feeling a sense of accomplishment. This is truly the first time since you pledged loyalty to the Felkan Kingdom that you feel appreciated. With this new command you actually feel like you’re back to where you’re supposed to be again, which is something you haven’t felt since you were taken off of your command in Rask. Granted Fort Green is no Fort Destiny, but it’s better than where you were. + +As for Captain Eckers, he and several other soldiers are escorted out of the fort as the rest of you stand by and watch. On his way out Eckers glares at you, he doesn’t say anything, but you can feel as if his stare is burning a hole in you. He knows someone said something, and he knows that someone was you. It’s too bad it had to be this way, but what’s done is done and it’s time to move on. + +Over the next few months you begin running the fort a lot more efficiently, the soldiers aren’t particularly thrilled about it since they’ve gotten used to not doing as much under Captain Eckers, which is another good reason why he needed to leave. Instead of whining, he should’ve been thinking up stuff to keep everyone’s mind’s occupied. + +After a few more months of extra training, you pick the soldier who has shown the most promise and pull them aside in your office for a talk. + +“Let’s see… Sergeant Dawn Young…easy name to remember. You’re one of the newer transfers here. Says that before you came here, you served on the Kilania Plains. Not exactly familiar with that area, but I hear it’s infested with centaurs. Half man half horse or something like that?” +“Yes sir, they are little more than wild beast. They get drunk, breed, start fights and from what I can tell that’s about it.” +“Hmm, bet they were a joy to fight. Well from your record it says you successfully lead several attacks on them. I’m guessing they are no longer a problem anymore?” +“Well they are less of a problem than they were. I was told to hold back, by my commanding officer at the time. I know if we had pressed against them though we could’ve wiped them out completely though.” She remark with a slightly annoyed tone. + +Sounds like typical Felkan policy. You have to admit, Eckers did have a point about certain things. While you’re not going to support possible rebellion like he did, you are going to change some things. + +“Okay you sound like the kind of soldier I need. Consider yourself promoted to lieutenant and you’re my new second.” +“…wow…thank you sir!” +“Don’t go thanking me just yet, you still have live to enjoy it. I want you to take two platoons of soldiers, march over to those hills a few miles away and I want you to wipe out ALL of the gnolls that you see.” +“All of them sir?” +“All of them. Their warriors, their citizens, their women, their children. If there are little baby gnolls sucking on marrowbones in their cribs, I want you to kill them too.” + +Your orders are a little shocking to Dawn. She’s probably never heard anyone commanding the murder of infants before let alone the total war doctrine you’re following, even if it is against a bunch of barbaric monsters. + +“Lieutenant, am I going to have to find someone else to do this?” you ask. +“…Um no sir. I just…well…the other soldiers sir. I’m not sure if they’ll follow such orders.” +“Oh yes they will. Because it’s going to be YOUR job to make sure they follow them. Besides I’ve noticed guns tend to take away a lot of the emotional impact of killing. Not even like you have to look someone in the eye and take away their life. You can sit back comfortably from a few feet away and pull the trigger. They’ll be able to kill baby gnolls a lot easier than you think, and after this first time, it’s only going to get easier. I’m sure you’ll do fine, I have faith that you’re up to this task. I wouldn’t have picked you if I didn’t. You’re dismissed.” + +Looking a little overwhelmed, Dawn nods and leaves your office. + +Now all you have to concern yourself about is whether your changes get you thrown out of the fort like Captain Eckers. +> Dawn Young (Personnel File) +Dawn grew up in a poor neighborhood with a mother that barely wanted her to begin with. Despite this disadvantage and her humble upbringing she was determined to not stay stuck with her lot in life and turn to a life of crime like so many of her peers. Instead she decided to make something of herself by joining up with the Felkan military at sixteen; a younger age than most in the Felkan army, which is usually at least eighteen. + +She’s about twenty now and from what you can tell she’s served pretty commendably wherever she was stationed. You can also respect the fact she overcame the obstacles that life placed in front of her and it’s probably what made you choose her over a couple of the other potential candidates. She also transferred here shortly after you replaced Eckers, which might explain why she doesn’t have the bad habits that a lot of the other troops have which also made her the best candidate. + +She seems capable, and you’re confident you’ve made a good choice in picking a second.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Chapter 3A2: For the Kingdom! + + +Year 40 + +“I don’t understand why the hell we haven’t just gone marching into the Arat province and taken it from the Eternal Dominion. We have superior weaponry, and they aren’t even that organized. I don’t care how skilled they are in combat, they can’t stop a bullet.” A soldier complains. +“So, do you think we’ll really be going to war again?” his buddy asks. +“Is there any fucking doubt? The Empire might be dead, but that Eternal Dominion or whatever it’s called took its place and from what I can gather the ones running that are complete monsters. No small feat considering how the Empire was run…uh no offense sarge.” + +You shake your head as a sign that you could care less how they discuss the Empire, as you’re busy keeping on the look out for potential enemies and you tell them to stop talking and do likewise. Felkan soldiers tend to be a little more chatty than you’re used to, they also tend to be a little over confident in battle at times due to their reliance on firearms. Their melee skills aren’t bad, but they aren’t anywhere near those of a say an Empire soldier, let alone an Eternal. You learned how to handle a musket pretty quickly, but much like the same reason you avoided using bows and such, ranged combat just isn’t quite your thing. Still, you appreciate their destructive power and having an advantage so you have no problems carrying around a couple of flintlock pistols on your person. + +Another thing that’s different is a government that isn’t actually interested in conquest despite its people often expressing such desires. You’ve never met the king or any of the royals, but from what you’ve heard the king is more of a scholar rather than a warrior ruler. Some consider this a weakness, but you aren’t convinced that it is. The king apparently believes conquest would just drain the coffers of what is currently a healthy economy (despite a recent war) and it’s better to put that money to other uses. The Felkans in general are always looking for new ways to advance the quality of life for all through scientific advancement. You don’t remember that sort of thing in the Empire where the status quo was law. While magic was reserved for the elite and still not common in the Empire, it’s practically non-existent in the Felkan Kingdom, which might explain their tendency towards scientific endeavors. Well that, and the fact that a good number of gnomes live among them who probably produce most of the great inventions in the kingdom. + +Still, you often hear a lot of criticism about the king; sometimes it makes you wonder if there shouldn’t be cause for concern. If this were the Empire you would’ve been expected to harshly discipline all of those soldiers that insulted the Emperor. Here, there is a lot more freedom in what you can say. + +Yes, there are so many differences from the Empire and you often feel out of place. Hell you feel strange enough only being a sergeant again. Five years and they still haven’t felt that you warrant a promotion to a higher rank, you don’t know why they still don’t trust you as much as they trust Warrick considering he actually fought against them directly. Of course he actually saved the lives of some important Felkan royals, so that’s probably the reason. + +They don’t keep you stationed on the frontlines of the Arat border like they do with Warrick either, for the past several years you’ve been stationed at a fort at the other end of the kingdom, though the fort is so small it’s more like an outpost. Fort Green is located near a small village called Blossomdale and that’s basically what you’ve been defending. It’s a rather dull assignment and only broken up by the occasional skirmishes with gnolls, bandits or other denizens living in the untouched forests and the hills. You’ve tried to make the best of things. You keep your mind mostly focused on your job like you always do. + +One good thing is that the soldiers that serve under you don’t seem to mind your Eternal origins, but you do get the impression they’re a little afraid of you. Your superior officer Captain Eckers seems okay with you as well. He’s the only one stationed here that’s older than you and probably sees you as someone he has a little more in common with, not to mention you bring a little more discipline to the fort and encourage more drilling and combat training. + +Eventually your shift is over and as usual, nothing happened today. Your replacements take over your post and you make your way back to the fort. The rest of the soldiers head to Blossumdale presumably for a little R&R as they often do. + +When you get back to the fort, somebody tells you that Captain Eckers wants to see you, so you proceed to his office. + +“Have a seat sergeant. So was today any different than yesterday? Any hostiles to be dispatched or anything?” +“No sir, things were quiet as usual.” You answer. +“I figured as much. It’s been like this for the past eight months. You know it’s always been slow around here, but lately…(sigh) I don’t know. I suppose we should be glad this place isn’t under attack constantly, but the boredom of nothing to do is frustrating.” +“I know the feeling sir.” +“Heh, I’ll bet. Bred for war and all that…you once had a command at a fort at one time did you not?” +“Yes sir I did, in Rask.” +“Yeah, I’ve heard about that area. I’ll bet you never ran out of fighting up there.” +“Well sir, we sort of did since I did my best to try to exterminate the most dangerous threats. For a while things got slow then we had a series of uprisings became a problem and I had to be in involved in putting those down so I wasn’t quite as bored anymore.” +“Uprisings. Now that would be an interesting event, though I don’t think I’m quite that bored yet. Still, I wonder if one wouldn’t do some good. Get those royals off their asses and actually do something for a change.” +“I’m sure they do what they can…the land is prosperous after all.” You say unsure of how to react and still wondering why you were called in here. + +“Yeah, yeah, I know, but really what good is that going to do when the Eternal Dominion comes beating down our door? I served on the front lines of the war with the Empire from beginning to end, and I saw shit that even I wasn’t prepared to see. Even with our technological advantage, sometimes I don’t know how we managed to hold the Empire off…I guess you guys really had a lot of internal problems.” +“Yes, yes we did sir. A lot.” +“Right, and that’s the only reason why we held out. If the Empire had been a united front like it used to be… well me and you probably wouldn’t be having this conversation.” +“Captain, if I may interject for a moment. I have heard citizens and soldiers on more than one occasion suggest that the Felkan Kingdom should become more aggressive. I’m puzzled to as why if things are going well. after all the Empire engaged in continual conquest and I think we know how that turned out.” +“You have a point about the Empire, but you also should remember the Empire lasted several centuries before collapsing. I don’t presume to know exactly all the problems you had, but I can tell you what the problems we have are and why the people are getting sick of it.” +“And what are those sir?” +“Fucking gnomes.” +“Gnomes? Don’t they provide all the wonderful inventions for this Kingdom?” +“Yeah, and they also have been using us as protection for decades and the royals are in their fucking pockets. We aren’t really ruled by the royals, the damned gnomish inventors and businessmen rule us. They don’t want us expanding too much, because then we just might be harder to control. They also don’t want us to become too strong militarily because we just might turn it against them. I mean hell, I think you’ve seen how our soldiers aren’t exactly the best fighters and rely on firearms. I shudder to think if we ever had to actually fight without them. It didn’t always used to be that way, at least not back in my day. That’s why you’re a damn breath of fresh air. You’re actually a REAL warrior.” + +You just sit and listen as the captain begins getting even angrier during his rant. + +“You know why I’m stationed here in the ass end of nowhere? Because I spoke my mind on what I thought about gnomes and suggested we needed to stop being pussies and actually start taking more land. I mean take this place for example. If we had just a couple more platoons, and the orders, we could march into those hills nearby and wipe out all those damned gnolls for good. But what do we do instead? Wait around for the fuckers to attack us then sit here with our thumbs up our asses until they rebuild and do it all over again. We’re better than that! Or at least we used to be!” at this point Captain Eckers slams his fist on his desk. He’s silent with his head looking down for a moment and then looks up to address you. + +“…forgive me sergeant, I get a little emotional about this stuff sometimes. I really shouldn’t. Thank you for your report and listening. I just need someone to speak my mind to sometimes…anyway dismissed.” + +You get up and leave, thinking about what has transpired. + +It basically sounds like the captain doesn’t believe in his government anymore. You know what that’s like, but you just aren’t sure if it’s as bad as he’s claiming or he’s just a bitter old man that’s mad because times changed and he pissed off the wrong people in charge of his career. However as you’re reminded he isn’t the only person you’ve heard speaking out, he just happens to be the only one that’s gone into more detail than you’re used to. + +You also wonder if he told you all this stuff for a reason, is he hinting for you to do something? And what could you do? You’re a lower rank than him and not exactly high on the hierarchy. You’re also pretty much an outsider. Stirring up trouble isn’t exactly something you should be doing, and you pledged yourself to serve the kingdom and its king, not overthrow it. If you were going to be doing that, you might as well have joined the Eternal Dominion. + +You aren’t sure of what to make of all this gnome business though, if that is even true. You’ve never paid too much attention to them being in a lot of the positions of power. Part of you though does make you wonder about who you’re really serving and if it is really the gnomes like the captain claims, then your whole oath to the kingdom is pretty much a joke. Then again if they really are controlling everything, does it really make a difference? Things seem to still be running well and you personally just don’t have any real proof that there is some conspiracy even though it wouldn’t surprise you too much if there was one going on. + +One thing you know though, if others are feeling like the captain does, this isn’t going to go away. This is going to get worse; in fact it may already be too late to stop something from occurring. You could very well find yourself serving in another collapsing government again. +> Leave it alone +Captain Eckers is probably just venting, you doubt if he’s actually going to do anything. Besides the captain is about the only one you can slightly relate to around here and he’s always been all right with you so you decide it wouldn’t be a good idea to report him. + +You return to your duties as usual without giving it anymore thought. In the passing months, the captain never spouts off anything else to you so you figure you were right in your assumption that he was just venting. Nothing to major worry about except the increasing boredom of not having much to do at the fort. You haven’t seen a gnoll in months now and you don’t really like it. They’ve never disappeared for this long of a stretch and it makes you suspect they could be up to something because you refuse to believe that they’ve just decided to leave you alone. + +The next time you see the captain, you tell him that you’d like to take a platoon up into the hills to scout out the area, and while he says he’d like to send you, he has his orders. + +“But you said yourself, that we could do a lot more good if we just went into the hills and wiped out all the gnolls.” You point out. +“I know what I said that day, and perhaps I shouldn’t have spoken out like that to a subordinate. (sigh) Look, despite my feelings on this situation I know I’ve damaged my career enough as it is. If I go disobeying orders, I’m just going to get myself in deeper. Besides if the gnolls have been as quiet as they have been perhaps we did kill them all, or at least scared them so much that they won’t attack ever again.” + +You of course aren’t convinced, but there is little you can do. If the captain is content on sitting on his hands you’re going to have to do some hand sitting yourself. It’s very frustrating. + +Year 41 + +“They’re breaking down the doors!” a soldier yells. +“Hold ‘em dammit! Don’t let these hyena bastards step one foot into this fort!” Captain Eckers commands. + +The captain can order everyone all he wants, but the fact is those gnolls ARE breaking down that door. They have an overwhelming superiority of numbers on their side and even of reinforcements did arrive right now, you’re still sure that it wouldn’t be enough to save you in time. + +As you grimly prepare yourself for the onslaught that’s about to bust through the doors, you think about how bad of a choice you made seeking to find your place here in this kingdom of cowards and fools. If you’d stayed with the Empire instead of leaving it, you wouldn’t be in this situation now. Even if you failed to keep it from collapsing, you would’ve at least died honorably in its service. + +But this? There will be no honor in this death. You’re going to die, because your superiors and their superiors were either too timid or idiotic to do what was necessary and you’re an even bigger idiot for following along into oblivion. + +No more time for regret now though, the gnolls are breaking through. Already the first soldiers still trying to keep the doors shut are screaming their death cries from the axes cleaving into their flesh and spilling their innards onto the floor. Captain Eckers displays a pitiful showing as a gnoll with a halberd severs his head from his body before he can even attack once. + +As for you, you make the gnolls earn every inch they step into the fort. The first two that step to you have their heads blown to gooey pieces with your flintlocks, and then you resort to tried and true methods of slaughter. + +You hack down several of their number before suffering any major wounds. Even then, you continue to fight with the determination of ten men. The bodies of gnolls pile up, the blood is everywhere and you’ve just suffered an injury that should’ve rightfully killed you, but you continue to fight. All the anger you feel at this situation is being directed utterly towards the gnolls until it finally burns itself out and your body pushes itself past its limitations of physical exertion. + +An axe cleaves into your skull, followed by another into your arm, severing it just enough to hang from a bit of tendon. You fall to your knees, then to the floor and that’s when you feel another axe to your back destroying your spine. A finally kick by a hefty boot to the face and the gibbering laughing howls of the gnolls is the last thing you hear.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You can’t bring yourself to be some lawless mercenary like a svelk and you can’t fathom even trying to run your own piece of territory. You’re no ruler. You’re a warrior that currently has no direction or mission. The only chance to find purpose is to pledge yourself to another nation. Again, the only one you know of any note is the Felkan Kingdom. You only know a little about them based on the propaganda the Empire has told you as well as the brief conversation you had with Gerald when you temporarily reunited with him. + +Technically the Empire is at peace with the Felkan Kingdom, but there are still skirmishes. Though nowdays it’s due to rogue Empire soldiers (and peasants too) becoming outright bandits rather than any patriotic reason. The Felkan Kingdom has been trying to keep out Empire refugees as well, which means you’ll probably just get turned around, if not outright fired upon. Still with shitty situation you’re in, getting shot doesn’t even seem like a bad option at this point + +You find a nearby horse and set off for the west. Along the way you see the landscape of the Empire, which at one time was orderly and even idyllic is now burning and in tatters. Despite the chaos you don’t need to do any battle, not even when passing groups of angry peasants who are taking every opportunity to get revenge on their oppressive government and its agents in all forms. You can only assume your reputation is enough to scare them off or they don’t even recognize you. If it’s the latter then it only confirms your belief that you weren’t making that much of a difference in the Empire anyway. + +When you get to the Arat province you find it in a bit better condition than other territory you’ve rode through, though when you ride through the town of Bucklesberg the peasants give you hateful glances or just outright run into their homes. You see in the middle of the town square several heads stuck on pikes with their eyes gouged out, some of them of children. In the very center of that is a pole with a sign attached. + +THIS TOWN IS UNDER THE DOMINION OF THE ETERNALS. LAW WILL THRIVE UNDER THE NEW ORDER. DISOBEDIENCE WILL BE CRUSHED. + +OBEY AND LIVE. REBEL AND DIE. + +-GENERAL EDGAR + +You read the sign twice you to make sure what you’re reading is correct. You almost wish you could say you’re surprised, and perhaps that small naive part of you still is, but you’re disappointed more than anything else. You of course don’t know the whole story, but quite frankly you don’t even want to know. All this revelation does is make you want to get out of Empire lands as quick as possible because it seems like it really was ever good for is turning everybody into a wannabe sovereign. + +You hasten your pace to the Felkan border as you don’t wish to have any potential conflict with this new “regime” that seems to be trying to form here. It’s a shame, because you did think about trying to find Edgar before going to the border hoping that maybe he’d join you. Now? He’d probably try to convince you to join him. Seen that story play out too, you’d rather not have to go through it again. Edgar obviously has chosen his path to deal with the Empire’s inevitable collapse and you must choose yours. + +Eventually you get to the Felkan border which is predictably well guarded by several men with their fancy musket weapons. From what you’ve heard they aren’t very sporting, but can blow through even a heavily armored orc instantly. Could’ve used some of those yourself ten years ago. + +“Alright just stop right there. You come any closer and you’ll have a brand new hole in your body.” One of them says pointing his weapon at you. +“Sheesh Harry, can’t you come up with a better threat than that?” +“Fuck you Wally, we’re turning back refugees every damn day, they can’t all be winners.” +“Uh guys, I don’t think this one’s a refugee, he’s wearing military armor.” Another one says which at this point all of them point their weapons at you. + +You take this in stride you figured they wouldn’t exactly be welcoming. + +“Alright I don’t know why the hell an Empire soldier is here, but I suggest you just turn right back around. We’re supposed to be at peace now in case you didn’t know it, which judging by some of you lot you don’t.” Harry says. +“I no longer serve the Empire, I request to serve your kingdom instead.” You say. +“Ha ha ha, yeah right. Look even if we were inclined to believe you, we don’t need your kind especially since you can’t even keep your own shit together. We know you’re having a civil war or whatever it is right now. You’re lucky our king is such a pussy that he refuses to take advantage of the situation otherwise, we’d fucking own the Arat province right now.” Harry replies. +“Hell yeah Harry! We should’ve just marched in and took it when they were begging for peace!” Wally adds + +The one soldier’s words are most interesting. Especially how he speaks about his ruler so freely and without fear. It is apparent that despite their dislike of their ruler, yet they are very dedicated to their nation. It is sort of a comforting thing to see after so many you’ve encountered over the years weren’t. Perhaps you could find a place here, assuming you can get past this first obstacle. + +“Very well gentlemen the only thing I can tell you that might convince you, is that I am an Eternal, born and bred for combat. I say with no boast that I am the best of my kind and while I am not yet familiar with your weapons, I dare say my combat skill and knowledge would allow me to learn rather quickly. All I ask is that I be allowed to speak with someone with more authority so that I can be given a proper chance.” +“Eternal? You ain’t no Eternal, you’re way too old. I’ve seen those bastards running around on the other side of the border and they’re either in their twenties or younger. Dunno why you’d claim to be one of them for anyway, they’re not even human, they’re fucking soulless monsters. Heard enough horror stories from all the refugees we have to turn away. Some of those stories…pretty heartbreaking stuff…” Harry says getting a little choked about one of the stories he seems to be thinking about. It’s at that point one of his buddies pipes up. +“Hey, uh maybe he’s one of those OTHER Eternals.” +“Oh an original? I dunno, didn’t they not make too many of them?” Wally asks as if any of his buddies know. +“How the hell should I know Wally?” +“Well you were the fucker that brought it up! All right there’s an easy way to do this. Chuck, head back to Fort Soot, and see Captain Warrick, he’ll…” +“Hold on did you say Captain Warrick?” you ask. +“Yeah? And?” +“I know him seeing as we practically grew up together. He was believed to be dead, how is it that he’s a captain in the Felkan military?” +“Hmm, well perhaps you can ask him that yourself, if you really do know him. Okay change of plan, we’ll take you to see Captain Warrick, but you better not try anything funny. We’ll need you to get off that horse and hand over your weapons. Chuck and Wally, you’re with me, the rest of you keep an eye on the border as usual, we’ll be back soon.” + +You comply with their demands and have them march you to Fort Soot. The thing you notice immediately are all the trenches built into the land. Left overs from the war you imagine. When you get to Fort Soot it isn’t particularly large, though it does seem to be heavily defended with weapons you’ve heard about before. Cannons they’re called, and they are very devastating. You remember Gerald telling you how they could destroy stone golems as if they were made of paper. Makes you wonder why for all it’s power that the Empire didn’t fund money and time into developing such wonders as it certainly would’ve helped a lot more than their Eternal project. You quietly chuckle at the irony of that thought briefly thinking what you would’ve been doing now if there hadn’t been such a project. Probably not marching into a Felkan fort that’s for sure. + +When you are brought into Warrick’s office it’s like a trip to the past. Warrick’s changed quite a bit. He’s wearing an eyepatch for one thing and he’s lost most of his hair, but you’d still recognize him. He also recognizes you though he’s still having trouble believing it. + +“By the gods, is it really you?” +“Yes, it’s me. By the gods? Not by the Emperor anymore I see.” +“Nope and never will be again, which brings me to my next question. Why have you come here? I certainly hope it isn’t on some fool mission to bring me to justice for being a traitor…” +“Ha ha. Maybe at one time, but not anymore either. I guess you could say, I’m also a traitor, though I don’t think I am. The Empire betrayed itself a long time ago and I can’t serve a place that has not even the slightest concept of honor or loyalty even if it was the one that taught me such ideals.” +“I must say, I am a little surprised that you of all people would come to that conclusion. You were the most dedicated of all of us. I know that you are telling the truth though, as you were never a liar. So you’ve left the Empire then and come here to…?” +“Pledge myself to the Felkan Kingdom, though it seems I wasn’t the only one who had that idea.” +“Hah, yeah a bit of a long story that. Before we continue I’ll have to clear this with a lot of people first, and you’re probably going to have to prove yourself several times, but if you’re serious about this then you’ll most likely be accepted. I’ve found things work with a little more leniency in the Felkan Kingdom.” +“All I want is a new chance.” + +And so began your service to the Felkan Kingdom. +> Warrick (AWOL) +“So when did you decide to leave the Empire?” you ask. +“Oh that was a slow drawn out process actually. After all the shit I saw, I began to feel a severe amount of disillusionment for the Empire. Even on the front lines and being involved in a lot of fighting, I saw all the corruption going on, the incompetence of lazy commanders…it was like Captain Pollo multiplied by ten. I mean here we are trying to conquer an enemy that was somewhat equal to us as far as military and in some cases superior and we’re just throwing soldiers into the field, without any regard for tactics or strategy!” +“Sounds pretty bad, last time I spoke to Gerald, he never mentioned all the problems.” +“Heh, well I think Gerald didn’t like to focus on the negative, but trust me when I tell you it was a complete fuck up from beginning to end. The only competent officer I remember was a Major Krozer…” +“Wait, did you say Krozer? As in Alison Krozer?” you interrupt. +“Yeah I guess. Never knew her first name, never really met her either, but she was sending out orders that were making a whole hell of a lot more sense for a while. A shame she got assassinated by a fucking bomb only a few months after her arrival.” + +You don’t say anything to this news. You sort of figured that maybe she had gotten killed, but a part of you sort of hoped that maybe she found a way out of the Empire as well. Seems silly to have a strong feeling about her given you hadn’t seen her in so long and your one night tryst, but even not counting that, she was still a good officer that always played straight with you. The fact she got killed in a similar manner than Roldan did, certainly makes you feel that she deserved better. + +Warrick begins to notice your silence, and then you quickly pick the conversation up again. + +“So…how did you lose your eye?” +“To be quite honest I don’t even remember, though that’s probably due to me losing the damn eye in the first place. I remember reaching my limit with the Empire towards the last days of the war. I mean we were supposed to be making peace with the Felkans, because we couldn’t get our own shit together and we still had commanders throwing soldiers at the Felkan borders! What kind of logic is that? Anyway, at that point I just said fuck it and decided to leave. I wasn’t entirely sure where I was going to go, and I don’t remember exactly what happened soon after, but I’m guessing I must’ve crossed into Felkan territory or something, because the last thing I remember was a flash and everything went black. Guess I was so pre-occupied, I forgot to stay alert for traps. Next thing I knew, I woke up on a Felkan medic table. They said they found me and kept me alive, but couldn’t save my eye. I still have memory problems about other parts of the past too, but nothing serious.” +“Surprised they didn’t kill you, or leave you to die instead.” +“Eh, the Felkans have always been a little odd that way. Their medics have some sort of code or something, but still here was a hated enemy and they were treating me a hell of a lot better than the Empire ever did. That’s pretty much when I offered my services to them. Took a while for them to trust me, but eventually they did. Of course it helped later on I saved the lives of some royals, but that’s a tale for another time. I think we need to get you started on your own new life here.” +“Yeah, I still feel a little odd about all this.” You say. +“You’ll get used to it, and in time you’ll see that your efforts will be better appreciated here than they ever were in the Empire. Trust me, you’re on the winning team now.” + +You just smile and nod at Warrick’s statement. While you don’t doubt that you’re on “the winning team” only time will tell if you will be truly appreciated.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 35 + +Another rebellion put down. You wipe your sword of blood and shake your head as you look around at the chaos. This is the Quala province, the very heartland of the Empire. You shouldn’t have to be trying to maintain order here only a few miles away from the capital itself. + +“Ha ha ha! Come on bitch, give it up! I’m an Eternal, you oughta be flattered that I’m even wasting my time on your normal ass!” private Felding says as he attempts to rape a nearby girl. + +You briskly walk over to Felding and pull him off her. You know damn well that the rest of his kind are probably doing stuff like this all over the place, but this one is in your direct sight and under your command. + +“What the hell, captain? If you wanted first dibs you could’ve just said so! Ah look, now she’s getting away!” +“We’re here to maintain order private, not create more chaos.” +“Oh yeah? Coulda fooled me by destroying the entire town like this.” +“Regrettable, but during battle only victory matters.” +“Exactly! We won! So now it’s time to have our fun with these disobedient peasants. Y’know instill fear in them so they won’t do it again.” +“You’re not instilling fear though, you’re just satisfying your own desires.” +“Hey, who says we aren’t supposed to have fun while doing it?” + +It’s like talking to a brick wall. You’ve had these “New Eternals” under your command for a few months now and they are some of the most undisciplined troops you’ve ever had. You can try to encourage them, you can try to reason with them, you can punish them, and none of it has a real effect. The only constant is that they know of your reputation and know that you’re also an Eternal, which makes them just fearful of you enough that they don’t attempt to directly challenge your authority like they have with so many of their other commanders. + +If it were up to you, you would’ve had them all killed for treason as soon as they murdered their first CO, but for whatever reason the Empire wants them active. You’re guessing because the Empire’s desperate. So they were ultimately transferred to you and unfortunately you’re not allowed to kill them either…well unless they try to kill you first. + +You swear this must be what it’s like to be a svelk. + +They are like children, malicious hateful little children. It’s not even their suspect loyalty that baffles you; it’s their complete lack of discipline. Even Kane and Cyrus who opposed you had discipline. Hell, Edgar who was arguably the most emotional and hotheaded of the group was a hundred times more disciplined than any of these new “Eternals.” You remember back to your own training and there were a few of your fellows that didn’t learn proper discipline either. They never made it past Mistress and the few that did, didn’t survive Gruz. Whoever was in charge of their training did a horrible job and should’ve been executed for incompetence along with the rest of these vicious monsters. That old orc was right, they will destroy what’s left of the Empire, but you doubt if they’ll survive long after its downfall. + +You think back to all the real Eternals. You, Edgar and Brenda are the only ones left, as Warrick killed in the final days of the Felkan War. At least you assume that’s what happened, his body was never found and you know he would’ve rather died than let himself be captured to rot in a P.O.W. Camp. Either way it’s truly a loss you never ever got to talk with him again. + +From what you know Edgar is still stationed in the Arat province, probably trying to keep his own “eternals” in line to keep the peace there. As for poor Brenda you know she has her command in the Nalin province and probably still quietly grieving for Roldan. + +After all you’ve been through, it’s come to this and you’re wondering what the hell you’re still fighting for. The Emperor? You haven’t cared about that unknown ruler for years. For all you know he’s some feeble minded inbred idiot figure head that his advisors keep locked away while they bumble around ruling things probably about as well as he would. + +The Empire? Perhaps at one time, but as it has lost territory, respect and apparently all resemblance of sanity over the years you’ve lost all faith that it can ever regain any sort of glory it might have had, if it ever had it to begin with. You’ve tried your best to stem back the tide of chaos, but you’re only one man even if you are an Eternal. + +While you ponder your potential future, private Felding interrupts you. + +“Hey, cap? You’re in a bit of a daze there. So if you’re done I’m going to go now.” +“Hold on, I have one more thing to tell you.” +“(Sigh) What?” Felding says with an exasperated tone. +“You’re not a fucking Eternal. None of you little shits are.” You say and run Felding through and pull up on the sword unleashing his blood and guts onto the ground. Felding makes a high pitched scream and slumps on top of his entrails after you remove the sword. + +“Shit! The cap just killed Felding!” another so called eternal shouts while he and his buddy have just come back from looting some farmer’s home. The pair of them look like they want to run, but you make it easy on them. + +“Go ahead and run or stay. I don’t care anymore. I’m leaving. I will tell you this though, if the Empire sends any of you unruly scum after me, know that I shall take great pleasure in not just killing you, but in drawing it out for as long as possible. Remember this.” + +And with that last warning, you leave your service to the Empire. + +The question now is, where will you go? What will you do? This all feels so wrong when you think about it. You’ve killed so many for abandoning, opposing, or attempting to betray the Empire and here you are doing the same thing. Was it all for nothing? Was it worth it? + +You don’t know. You always believed at the time you were right and that you were doing the right thing. Maybe you were, maybe you weren’t. You just know that you can’t serve something you don’t believe in anymore. Especially when everyone else around you doesn’t either. + +Speaking of not knowing, you don’t know how to do anything except kill people. While you’re certain that you’d be able to hire your skills out somewhere, the idea of being a mercenary is a little distasteful for you. You’d rather not push the svelk comparison that far. + +You could swear loyalty to another government you suppose. Perhaps the Felkan Kingdom? You’re not sure they’d want you, what with all their high tech weapons and your own government once fighting against them. + +The only other alternative for you is to carve out your own territory and rule it as your own. While it’s true you do have leadership qualities, you know nothing of actually running a government. You honestly wouldn’t know where to begin. +> Rule your own territory +You can’t bring yourself to be some like the svelk and be mercenary scum who have no other goals than to earn coin. By the same token you’re not going to pledge yourself to yet another government that will probably be just as corrupt and decadent as the one you just left. Maybe in a way, Kane was right. He was obviously suffering a mental breakdown as well as being manipulated, but the concept of forming your own nation would be the surest way to ‘get it right.” You could run things the way they SHOULD be. + +The question is where to start? You’d need at least an army to conquer anything and right now you don’t really have that. You’re sure you could probably get those “new eternals” to follow you, but there still isn’t enough of them even if you were inclined to subject yourself to the torture of futility. Regular soldiers would probably follow you, but nowadays they’re so scattered that you’d literally have to travel all over most of the Empire to collect them, not to mention all the fighting you’d have to do during this state of anarchy. The only place you can think of is the Nalin province. It’s virtually the one place still left in the empire that isn’t suffering outright revolts, though the citizens are reportedly still severely disgruntled, Brenda is also there in command of Fort Glory. Perhaps she’ll see the wisdom of your plan and help you, if that’s the case you should be able to pull it off. + +You find a nearby horse and set off for the south. Along the way you see the landscape of the Empire, which at one time was orderly and even idyllic is now burning and in tatters. Despite the chaos you don’t need to do any battle, not even when passing groups of angry peasants who are taking every opportunity to get revenge on their oppressive government and its agents in all forms. You can only assume your reputation is enough to scare them off or they don’t even recognize you. If it’s the latter then it only confirms your belief that you weren’t making that much of a difference in the Empire anyway. + +When you get to the Nalin province you find it in much better condition than the rest of the places in the Empire that you’ve ridden through. Fort Glory looks slightly different, namely it looks more heavily fortified and a lot better cared for than when you left this place. When you approach Fort Glory, you are momentarily halted by the guards, but when you tell them who you are and that you need to see Brenda they immediately let you in. + +Brenda is very surprised to see you. She looks a lot different from the teenage girl you parted company with. Her hair is going gray and she has a very “tired” look about her. As if the whole weight of responsibility is crashing down on her, but she still carries herself with confidence and strength. + +“When my soldiers told me it was you I couldn’t believe it, it’s been so long since we’ve seen one another. Wow you haven’t really changed at all.” She says almost smiling. +“It is good to see you too, Brenda. Still as pretty as ever.” You say, unsure of how to respond. +“Pretty? Now that’s a word I never thought I’d hear you say. Let alone to me. Maybe you have changed more than I thought.” +“Well I mean I never thought you were ugly, Brenda. I was just trying to reply to your compliment with one of my own.” +“Ha ha, a complete lack of tact. That’s more like the old you. Still it’s nice to hear, though I hope for your sake, you’re a better sweet talker to the other girls out there.” +“Brenda, I have to talk to you in private about something it’s very important and I don’t know how you’re going to react.” You say by passing her statement. +“Oh geez, you’re not going to suddenly confess some sort of hidden love for me that you’ve kept to yourself all these years are you?” +“What?! NO! This is something important!” + +Brenda’s a little amused by how you worded your statement especially since she was joking. You just aren’t in a “joking mood” though right now and after what you have to tell Brenda you doubt if she will too. + +“Look, I apologize for my outburst. It’s just that this is really important.” +“Okay, we’ll go to my office and speak privately there.” + +When you get to Brenda’s office you don’t bother beating around the bush and you just tell her everything. Your thoughts, feelings, actions and ultimately your plan and why you came here. Now she really is amazed. You of all people were practically a paragon of duty and loyalty and here you are openly confessing that you’ve abandoned the Empire. + +“Okay, wow. Well you’ve just been full of surprises today.” +“Will you help me?” +“What exactly am I supposed to do? I mean are you seriously asking me to just hand over control of this fort to you while you play pretend emperor?” +“No! I mean shit I don’t know I haven’t thought out all the details yet I guess. It’s just (sigh) Look Brenda, I just left ALL I’ve known. Everything I’ve ever been taught to believe in is GONE, if it ever existed to begin with. I didn’t have many choices on what to do next and this seemed to be the best choice all things considered. I came here because I didn’t know where else to go quite frankly. I see now that this was just as foolish an idea leaving the Empire in the first place, I guess…” +“No it wasn’t.” +“What wasn’t?” +“Leaving the Empire. I mean I certainly understand your reasons. I share them. Maybe not in the exact same way, but they are there. Hell I think in these dark times, everyone shares them. I dunno perhaps you just made that extra step that the rest of us here aren’t quite willing to make yet.” +“What do you mean?” you ask. +“I mean everyone in this fort and probably the entire province would be for seceding from the Empire at this point. I think the only reason why nobody has done it yet or even rioted is due to way we run things here at Fort Glory. We found it much better by just letting people go about their business if we’re not threatening them all the time and actually defending them from real external threats. The only real problem here is the high taxes which the Empire imposes on this region, that of course tends to make people a little grumpy, but not quite enough to riot. They remember what this place used to be like after all." +“Not threatening people you say? That’s a pretty wild concept. Did you think that one up?” +“Nah, the credit goes to Roldan, he was the first to suggest it. He probably would’ve made a better fort commander too and if he had been promoted instead of me, he might still be here…” +“Brenda, okay you can’t think like that. If he’d been promoted then you’d probably be dead and…” +“I know, I know. I just get a little sad thinking about him not being here sometimes. Okay, anyway let’s do it. Let’s break away from the Empire. Like you said, shouldn’t take much convincing, though I hope you’re prepared for a shitstorm from this. We might not much problem from the population, as I said they’ll probably be relieved to not have to pay the high taxes any more, but we’re going to get Empire armies to come down here eventually.” +“Possibly, but it’s pretty bad Brenda. I’m not sure if they’ll be able to really do anything, the government is on the brink of collapse. If anything we might be getting an influx of people wanting to come here to join. You’re just lucky they didn’t saddle you with those new eternals. If they had, I guarantee this place wouldn’t be as nice as it is now.” +“So I’ve heard. I suppose I am lucky. This whole province is lucky.” + +Brenda takes a deep breathe before speaking again. + +“Okay so how exactly are we doing this? I mean what system are we going to have in place?” +“Well, given what you’ve told me about how you’ve been running things, I’ve had one new idea. How about YOU run this place and you be the leader?” +“ME? But…I don’t know anything about running a nation or anything like that!” +“Seems to me you’ve been running this place pretty well for years. You know the people and better yet, they know you. I think if I was in charge…well they’d think they were living under the Empire again. No, I realize now my place isn’t to rule, but to fight. It really is what I’m good at. About the only thing.” +“Now come on, you have great leadership skills!” +“Leadership skills for combat perhaps, but not for ruling. I think whatever is it that you had with Roldan made you and him more in touch with human nature and that’s a good thing.” +“Yes…it was a good thing. I just wish he was here. I could certainly use his help right now.” Brenda says reminiscing. + +You pat Brenda on the shoulder in your effort to comfort her; she tells you she’s fine though. You and Brenda at that point set your plan in motion to split from the Empire. +> Years pass... +Chapter 3A3: Remnant + + +Year 45 + +In all the years you served the Empire, you always felt like you were being held back in some way; lack of supplies, lack of equipment, ungrateful rioting peasants, or incompetent commanding officers. In most cases it was never a failing on your part. + +For the past few years, you’ve come to appreciate no longer having any of those limitations. In Nalin everyone more or less works for the greater good of the country. In fact it could be argued that this is more the case here than it ever was in the Empire, at least as far as you saw. Brenda eventually declared the biggest town (Now a city) Dalt to be the capital and moved there to better manage things. You of course are head of the army and remained at Fort Glory. + +Despite her initial inexperience at running a nation, Brenda has proven to do a fair job at it. Hand picking town mayors and other bureaucratic types to help run things certainly helps. What also helps is Nalin is a much smaller nation than the Empire was. The long arm of the army doesn’t need to go far to catch someone doing something against the law. + +Your intimidating reputation as head of the army obviously keeps people in line as well. Still, it isn’t complete fear; they know you’ll also keep them safe. When Usksha raiders started gathering around the southern borders again, you made sure to strike at them before they could attack any of the southern towns. You wish you could just go into the Usksha Desert and wipe them all out, but you know you just don’t have the resources for such a thing. Still, you did find a temporary solution in the form of an equally old annoyance. The kobold tribes who eventually realized that continuing to fight against you would result in genocide, agreed to relocate to the edges of the southern Nalin border where they would help defend it. This has worked out quite well. The harsh terrain conditions closer to the desert as well as the occasional Usksha raids keep the kobold population down as well as aid as a front line defense without having to waste valuable troops. + +For the most part everything has been running quite well, perhaps a little too well to the point where you get a little bored, but you don’t even mind that now. You’re just glad to be part of a nation that isn’t crippled by corruption. + +“This is the last remnant of the true Empire.” You sometimes think. + +Of course a certain person might disagree with that thought, namely Edgar. + +Edgar hasn’t contacted you or Brenda. Brenda wonders if it’s because he considers you both traitors for seceding from the Empire, and while that sounds like Edgar, you suspect it’s more because he’s been very busy. Ever since the Empire fell, Edgar has been busily trying to unite all the new “eternals” under his command and his results are quite surprising. He’s not only managed to do it, but he’s forged his own nation calling it the Eternal Dominion. He claims it is the successor to the Empire and as general he has vowed to reunite all the old lands by any means. So far he’s had varying success, but he’s doing well under the circumstances. He’s also created a strict hierarchy system where Eternals are considered to be the superior ruling class and everyone else is below them. You aren’t exactly sure what to make of this ideology. + +Assuming he’s successful, you know it’s only going to be a matter of time before Edgar comes marching an army from the north. Brenda has the same concerns and lately a majority of the military has been stationed on the northern borders. You just aren’t sure it’ll be enough. Brenda wonders if an alliance would be best, but the only other major power in the region is the Felkan Kingdom, and you’re not exactly sure if they would even be in a position to help, let alone willing to help. The enemy of my enemy isn’t always your friend. + +This ties in with the other matter that has come up is expansion. Nalin has had a steadily growing population for quite some time and since the south is hostile desert, the western side of Nalin is covered by an equally imposing mountain range and to the north is old empire lands suffering from destroyed infrastructure and near anarchy, the only logical conclusion is to the east. + +Slowly over time Brenda has encouraged Nalin citizens to systematically settle the eastern wilderness. The Empire for some reason never colonized this territory. It probably was marked, but just never exploited due to other more pressing matters. In any case, things have gone more or less peacefully as there have been no encounters with any hostile natives and it has proven to be great farming land. While things are peaceful there now, there’s no telling what could happen later and due to all the troops on the northern border, the eastern territory has a minimum number of soldiers there. Right now you and Brenda are discussing on how to best to maximize your defenses. + +“Have you sent envoys to Edgar? Is it possible that he wouldn’t be a problem in the future?” you ask Brenda. +“I actually have a couple times over the years and none of them ever returned. Which is why I’m convinced he’s pissed at us.” +“Hmm, well guess we better up keep the defenses on the northern borders then. Still, my own reports say he’s still nowhere near us. He’s been trying to tame the core region of the old Empire as well as maintain order in places he’s already conquered. There is the option to take redeploy some of the troops to the east.” +“But of course that would weaken us in the north.” +“Well yes, but if you’re really worried about the east, then that’s all I can suggest other than conscription.” +“Yeah, thought about that, and I’m not exactly keen on that idea. The people have been happy for quite awhile. We start conscripting like the Empire did, they might not be as happy.” Brenda says +“They’ll be even less happy, if Edgar comes barging down here declaring them all inferior while letting his Eternal troops run amok.” +“You wouldn’t allow that to happen.” Brenda says. +“Well I certainly would try my best to not let it happen, but let’s just say I’m not as certain about things as I once was, there is always the chance things can go horribly wrong.” +“Yeah, I understand that. (Sigh) Well, I suppose we can restart conscription. It’s not going to be popular, but I think if we stress how much of a threat Edgar potentially is, we’ll prevent the civil unrest. I’ll get my civilian advisors to start spinning the propaganda. I’ll leave it up to you how you want to deploy the troops; I think it would be best to put most of the conscripts on the east though, as I think we’ll need most of the experienced troops on the northern borders.” +“I’ll certainly consider all the options. I guess I’ll get to it then and leave you to your work as well.” You say and are about to leave when Brenda calls out to you. +“Hey, I know you’re very duty bound anyway, but I just want to say, I’m glad you’re here to help me.” +“Well I’m happy to help, but I’m sure you’d do just as well without me here.” +“Perhaps, but it’s sort of comforting to have another Eternal around to talk to. I just feel like we connect a lot better you know?” +“Yes, I do agree. We do share a bond that most others will never know.” + +Brenda goes to hug you and you’re a little unsure of how to react at first, but you hug her back. Before you leave Brenda asks you one more question. + +“Do you think Edgar’s ideology for his nation is correct? Do you think Eternals are superior to everyone else?” + +You think about the question for a moment, then answer. + +“I think Edgar thinks it is correct. In one aspect, I agree with it, I mean look at the pair of us. We’re both in the highest positions of power and people seem to be accepting of it. However, from my own experiences with the new Eternals I’m not actually convinced that THEY are superior to the average human except in combat and sadism which I suppose are good enough to instill fear into the masses.” +“Heh, but isn’t that what we do?” +“Of course, but we do it because we know it’s necessary to maintain order. The new Eternals engage in pointless cruelty because they enjoy it. They’re no better than svelks in that regard. They’re so eager to move on to next atrocity that they let their emotions cloud their purity of battle. I believe this is a weakness on their part and that is why I do not consider them superior.” + +Brenda smiles a bit at your answer. + +“The Empire really should’ve made you a general straight out of training. I’m certain you would’ve single handedly saved it.” +“I don’t know. Perhaps it was beyond saving by that time. If you’ll excuse me…” you say and leave Brenda’s office. + +As you leave the capital building, you think back on how you left the Empire. While you’re satisfied with your decision, part of you does wonder IF you could’ve done anything. Not just at that time, but before then. Is there another decision you could’ve made that would’ve prevented the situation you’re in now? + +After a brief run down in your mind of endless possibilities you quickly dismiss such thoughts as a fool’s game. You were right, the Empire was beyond any help you could’ve provided. Nalin is your concern now and you need to make the decisions to how to best protect it starting with deciding where to send the conscripts when Brenda enacts her decree. +> Send them to the northern borders +As much of a threat Edgar could potentially be, he’s not knocking down your door right now and as safe as the east seems to be, it’s still mainly uncharted territory. Anything could be lurking over there. Best to have experienced troops there just in case, in fact you’re going to have them make scouting expeditions. + +When Brenda enacts conscription there is a lot of grumbling as was expected, but nothing more. Many of the conscripts are a little nervous about being put on the northern borders after hearing all the scary things about Edgar and his “baby eating” army. You make sure to keep enough vets there to keep them in line until they toughen up a bit more. You also make sure to keep a close eye on the situation. + +Months pass a life goes on as usual, and you begin to get reports on the eastern wilderness. Most of the scouts say that there is evidence of other denizens living further east. In fact there seems to be a small tribal war going on between four separate groups. Two of those are human barbarian tribes, one them is elven, but much wilder than what you know of them and the last one is a race you’re not familiar with called the Slin. They’re apparently reptilian in nature though, similar to the kobolds, but much larger and meaner. + +All of them save for one of the human tribes have been hostile to your scouts. Your scouts report that most attacks were accompanied by slurs and curses against the Empire. Even the Slin have been reported to utter a few recognizable insults in their strange reptilian tongue. + +You can only guess that all of these folks at one time came in contact with the Empire and it wasn’t a good experience. Makes sense they would mistake you for Empire troops as well considering that all your troops are either still wearing the same armor or very similar armor. Some of the really old guard are still wearing the same insignias. Sort of like you do actually. + +While you’re confident that individually these uncivilized savage tribes wouldn’t be a match in a straight up fight, there is always the possibility that they could all unite against you which would make things a little more difficult. They’ve all most likely been living here a long time too, so they’ll have the advantage of knowing the land better. + +Right now the situation is similar to the one you have with Edgar. They’re all preoccupied fighting each other and not immediately close to any Nalin settlements. Stirring up a hornet’s nest by marching east could bring that tribal alliance that you don’t really want. + +Then again you have been getting sort of bored lately…maybe you DO want it a little. + +You make the decision and you’re wiping out these troublesome tribes before they become a major problem. You’re also going to personally lead this campaign of expansion; it’s been far too long since you’ve experienced a real battle again. + +Brenda is supportive of the idea, though she reminds you that if trouble comes to the northern borders she’s going to have to pull everyone back immediately. Since that could happen at any time, you decide you need to handle this as quickly as you can, but at the same time, not sloppy. + +First thing you do is establish a sizable war camp near the closest Nalin village in the eastern wilderness. You then have your scouts contact the human tribe that wasn’t hostile and to tell them that you want to meet their leader to discuss about destroying their enemies. + +Your scouts return with a crude map and report that the chieftain of the Belkaz Tribe is willing to listen, but that you must come meet him in his own village several miles away towards the southern hills and that if you arrive with more than five men he will consider you hostile and order an attack. + +“Acceptable. I was going there by myself anyway.” You say taking the map. +“Sir?” one of your scouts says after looking at the other in surprise. +“It’s fine. Corporal Bajin isn’t it? You did your job. Take a break, and tell the rest that I’ll be back soon.” +“But…don’t you think you should take some of us with you? I mean they’re barbarians and not exactly trustworthy.” Bajin says. +“Oh I know that, but if I can’t handle a simple mission every once in awhile, well what kind of general am I? Relax, I’ll be back.” You say and gallop away on your horse towards the village. + +As you get closer to your destination, you start noticing the usual primitive totems typical of such tribes establishing their territory. Eventually several barbarian types wrapped in furs and other crude cloth stop you. + +“This is Belkaz territory! You go back or die!” one of them shouts as they all point spears at you. +“I have business with your chieftain. My scouts contacted some of your fellows about it not too long ago.” + +After speaking amongst themselves for a moment, one addresses you again. + +“You must be leader of the Empire men to the west. Other tribes hate you. Scared of you. Very funny because you are not scary. Not even that big. But other tribes cowards, we not. Come with us and do not try anything!” + +You follow the Belkaz to their village which is a fairly large one. You assume that there are probably others, but that this is just their “capital.” You get off your horse and look around and see the usual trappings of a primitive village. This whole situation is starting to remind you of your time in Rask. Though you hope that these particular barbarians aren’t shapeshifters or spirits in disguise otherwise this idea of yours is not going to go well. + +The Belkaz chieftain comes out of his hut. He’s certainly a big muscular man. Almost ogre sized. Hell, he may even have ogre blood in him. Heavily tattooed, various tribal piercing. All proof of his manhood and tolerance to pain no doubt. A worn looking axe hangs by his side. Probably has seen a lot of battle. You figure he slaughtered his way to the top like most of his kind do. Whether it was enemies of the tribe or rivals within the tribe, it doesn’t matter, he’s proven himself to be the best warrior and that’s what makes him the leader. The rest fall in line when he give them an order. + +He stands before you looking down at you. Probably wondering how someone so small could be a leader of anything. + +“Huh. Empire man. You wanted to discuss a possible alliance?” +“No, I wanted to discuss destroying your enemies.” You say looking up. +“Hrm? Yeah, I said alliance. You need help destroying other tribes.” +“Yes, I need help, but no I do not need an alliance.” +“You speak in riddles Empire man.” +“My apologies. Perhaps this is something you would better understand.” You say and draw your sword. + +The Belkaz immediately goes for his axe, but fails you draw it in time since you land a heavy blow on his forearm nearly chopping it completely off. He bellows in pain and falls back holding on to his dangling bloody limb. Two Belkaz attempt to spear you in the back, but you easily dispatch them with spinning swing to their bellies unleashing their innards all over the ground. + +You run another Belkaz through as you advance towards the chieftain who has managed to draw his axe and recover from the initial shock of losing a vital limb which still partially dangles by the skin and bleeds profusely. He swings his axe recklessly at your head screaming the whole time. The battle was over long ago for him though as you easily duck such an attack and aim your sword directly at his groin. Literally destroying his manhood, his screams suddenly become much higher pitched as the useless member falls to the ground along with its two friends. + +Dropping his axe, falling to his knees and attempting to hold himself up with his one good arm, you finish him off with a chop to his head, and then another, and then another until his head splits in two. Already dead at this point, you then stomp on his split skull crushing the brain matter leaking out. + +The rest of the Belzak tribe at this point is either hiding or staring in awe of how easily you dispatch their leader. You look around and after catching your breath, you speak. + +“This man did not lead your tribe to victory against your enemies. As such he was also your enemy and needed to die. This will be your fate as well if you do not submit to my army. If you wish to live and see victory over your enemies, then you will join me. If not…well you will join him.” You say and point at their dead chieftain with your sword. + +You get back on your horse unopposed and ride back to your camp where some of your soldiers have been mildly concerned about you. You address the camp and one of your lieutenants in particular. + +“Everyone get some rest tonight our path to victory begins tomorrow. Lieutenant Harren I’m going to need you to take a platoon and head out to the main Belzak village tomorrow. Be on guard, as usual, but I think you’ll find the natives quite agreeable with helping you in any way they can. In fact I dare say after this is all over they’ll be some of the most loyal of our newest citizens.” +> Years pass... +Year 46 + +It took longer than you expected, but you’ve at last tracked down the main lair of the Slin. They’ve stretched this little war out the longest, but this is where it’s going to end. + +Arrows unleashed by Slin bows hit some of your Belzak skimishers, but your own soldiers advance on the cave opening undeterred with their shields held up to protect them. + +You shake your head when you see the remaining Belzak run away. They’ve actually been completely useless when fighting the Slin. The only time they seemed to prove useful is when you were wiping out the Fleg tribe. + +The Fleg were pretty odd as you came to find out that they were decedents of once regular Empire citizens that started believing in some weird cult that took hold in the Nalin province long before you were around. The Empire stomped it out, but obviously the remainder fled here. Surrender and backing down wasn’t an option for them. When you got to their last village you found that they all committed ritual suicide. Their cult finally wiped out. + +You and your men fight your way into the cave entrance, several large Slin come lumbering from various tunnels hissing and charging at you. You like that. You appreciate a foe that gives no quarter and doesn’t run even in the face of certain death. + +It’s more than can be said of the wild elves. They were fierce fighters at first, but after you wiped out the Fleg and started making great progress against the Slin, something in them must’ve changed. It’s as if all their courage left them. Their elder came to you and begged you to spare them from genocide. These elves were all former slaves that managed to run away from the Empire long ago. The elder spoke of how he should’ve known it was folly to run away and that eventually the Empire would eventually find them again even if it took them hundreds of years. You told him that the Empire was no more, but his peoples’ attacks on your soldiers was something that couldn’t be forgiven. + +Taking a page from Captain Krozer’s handling of elves in Rask, you had all the adults and elderly killed. Any children were taken to become wards of the state. While slavery doesn’t exist in Nalin as it did in the Empire, you figure these children can still be indoctrinated to be proper citizens and given a second chance at a better life. Sometimes mercy can be a good thing. + +Several Slin lie dead at your feet. More of them continue to pour in as you and your remaining men travel further into the cavern. + +No, there will be no capitulation, or cowardly escape through suicide here. Before you killed the elven elder, he told you that the Slin apparently once lived in the Delerg swamps before being driven out by the Empire. (With the help of the Shadow Guard) Funny how all these people managed to settle in the same area and fight each other rather than unite, but then they all had different reasons and ways of life. + +The Slin don’t even realize that the Empire has fallen, and attempting to explain it to them at this point wouldn’t do any good even if you wanted to bother with such a thing. You’re close enough to being one of their oppressors in their eyes and your goals of kill or be killed were locked in as soon as you stepped into their territory + +The final confrontation takes place in what you guess to be brood chamber. Even Slin children are vicious enough to take part in battle. The Slin matriarch isn’t as big as the ones you’ve been fighting, but she has the advantage of some sort of primitive magic. She casts a poisonous cloud causing several of your troops that had followed you, immediately gag, cough and vomit. They eventually succumb to the toxins and choking on their own blood and bleeding from every orifice. The cloud doesn’t make you feel too well either, but being an Eternal you’re made of stronger stuff and have natural immunities to most poisons. +Her brood bite at your legs as you attempt to fight through the haze of the poison cloud. You slaughter all of them and ignore the pain of several teeth cutting through your leggings and into your flesh. + +The matriarch hisses at you backing away as you advance towards her. She attempts to cast another spell, but you interrupt her by slashing her staff out of her hand. Lacking any other weapons, she resorts to her natural ones that are just as good to kill someone with. She lunges at you and wrestles you to the ground where you lose your sword in the process. + +Having a hard time seeing and breathing due to the cloud, you begin to feel a lot weaker and you struggle to free your arms from her talons. + +“Babies! Ssss! You kill my babiessss!” She says attempting to bite your face off. You more your head in such a manner that she only manages to bite your ear off instead. At this time you finally manage to free one of your arms and bring a fist to the side of her head. It isn’t enough to knock her off of you, but it’s enough to daze her enough so you can free your other arm. With both hands free you take your thumbs and jam them into the red orbs of the matriarch succeeding in pulling one out completely. + +The matriarch shrieks in pain holding her face and you push her off of you. Blind and crawling on the ground, she attempts to look for her staff. You stand up and easily grab your own weapon and put the matriarch out of her misery with a chop to her leathery neck. Another severs her head completely. + +You stagger out of the Slin brood chamber coughing up some blood from all the poison you inhaled from the now dissipating cloud. Some of your troops that were still fighting Slin in other parts of the cavern see that you’re not feeling your best and go to help you. + +You don’t remember exactly what happened after that. You must’ve passed out briefly because the next thing you know you’re lying outside the cave surrounded by some of your soldiers and a few of the belzaks who must’ve regained their courage after they ran away. You’re still not feeling good, who knows how much of that poison is in your system. + +“I’ve seen this before! He needs certain herbs to cure the poison, and I have some, I can mix up an antidote right here!” one of the belzak says. +“Shut the fuck up tribal, you oughta be glad we’re not executing you right now for desertion on the battle field! In fact let’s take care of that right now!” a soldier remarks and you hear a scuffle and protests of wanting to help and begging for life. + +You struggle to get up, and you manage it just barely. You feel like you’re going to collapse again and you aren’t sure if you’re going to make it to the medic back at the war camp. + +In the meantime the belzakians are begging you to call off you soldiers. +> Call off the execution +You’re feeling so ill at this point that if these deserters can actually do something to help you, you’ll give them a pass. + +“Release them…let them make their antidote.” You gasp. + +Your soldiers are hesitant, but fulfill your orders and release the belzakians so that they can do their work. The one who spoke up thanks you immediately and starts asking his buddies to help him mix up the antidote. + +You lie on a bed roll drifting in and out of deliriousness hoping they hurry up with that antidote, eventually one of them approaches you. + +“This is for you, my merciful general!” + +You grab the wooden bowl that they’ve mixed the antidote in and struggle to sit up. After gazing into the green liquid you drink deeply. + +“Yes, drink, soon all your pain will be no more!” the belzak exclaims + +You might be ill and your hearing might be off due to missing an ear now, but the tone of the belzak’s voice is a little concerning. And you have every right to be concerned unfortunately it’s a little too late. + +Your throat and your entire insides feel like they’re on fire. If you were ill before, that “antidote” you just drank made it ten times worse. You struggle to breathe and attempt to grab at the belzak who avoids your feeble attempts, though your other soldiers grab him and his fellows. + +“YES DIE TYRANT! DIE FOR MAKING MY TRIBE SLAVES!” he screams before one of your soldiers cuts his throat. + +It’s no victory though; your own life ends soon after as the mixture of poisons in your system shut down your body completely.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 46 + +It took longer than you expected, but you’ve at last tracked down the main lair of the Slin. They’ve stretched this little war out the longest, but this is where it’s going to end. + +Arrows unleashed by Slin bows hit some of your Belzak skimishers, but your own soldiers advance on the cave opening undeterred with their shields held up to protect them. + +You shake your head when you see the remaining Belzak run away. They’ve actually been completely useless when fighting the Slin. The only time they seemed to prove useful is when you were wiping out the Fleg tribe. + +The Fleg were pretty odd as you came to find out that they were decedents of once regular Empire citizens that started believing in some weird cult that took hold in the Nalin province long before you were around. The Empire stomped it out, but obviously the remainder fled here. Surrender and backing down wasn’t an option for them. When you got to their last village you found that they all committed ritual suicide. Their cult finally wiped out. + +You and your men fight your way into the cave entrance, several large Slin come lumbering from various tunnels hissing and charging at you. You like that. You appreciate a foe that gives no quarter and doesn’t run even in the face of certain death. + +It’s more than can be said of the wild elves. They were fierce fighters at first, but after you wiped out the Fleg and started making great progress against the Slin, something in them must’ve changed. It’s as if all their courage left them. Their elder came to you and begged you to spare them from genocide. These elves were all former slaves that managed to run away from the Empire long ago. The elder spoke of how he should’ve known it was folly to run away and that eventually the Empire would eventually find them again even if it took them hundreds of years. You told him that the Empire was no more, but his peoples’ attacks on your soldiers was something that couldn’t be forgiven. + +Taking a page from Captain Krozer’s handling of elves in Rask, you had all the adults and elderly killed. Any children were taken to become wards of the state. While slavery doesn’t exist in Nalin as it did in the Empire, you figure these children can still be indoctrinated to be proper citizens and given a second chance at a better life. Sometimes mercy can be a good thing. + +Several Slin lie dead at your feet. More of them continue to pour in as you and your remaining men travel further into the cavern. + +No, there will be no capitulation, or cowardly escape through suicide here. Before you killed the elven elder, he told you that the Slin apparently once lived in the Delerg swamps before being driven out by the Empire. (With the help of the Shadow Guard) Funny how all these people managed to settle in the same area and fight each other rather than unite, but then they all had different reasons and ways of life. + +The Slin don’t even realize that the Empire has fallen, and attempting to explain it to them at this point wouldn’t do any good even if you wanted to bother with such a thing. You’re close enough to being one of their oppressors in their eyes and your goals of kill or be killed were locked in as soon as you stepped into their territory + +The final confrontation takes place in what you guess to be brood chamber. Even Slin children are vicious enough to take part in battle. The Slin matriarch isn’t as big as the ones you’ve been fighting, but she has the advantage of some sort of primitive magic. She casts a poisonous cloud causing several of your troops that had followed you, immediately gag, cough and vomit. They eventually succumb to the toxins and choking on their own blood and bleeding from every orifice. The cloud doesn’t make you feel too well either, but being an Eternal you’re made of stronger stuff and have natural immunities to most poisons. +Her brood bite at your legs as you attempt to fight through the haze of the poison cloud. You slaughter all of them and ignore the pain of several teeth cutting through your leggings and into your flesh. + +The matriarch hisses at you backing away as you advance towards her. She attempts to cast another spell, but you interrupt her by slashing her staff out of her hand. Lacking any other weapons, she resorts to her natural ones that are just as good to kill someone with. She lunges at you and wrestles you to the ground where you lose your sword in the process. + +Having a hard time seeing and breathing due to the cloud, you begin to feel a lot weaker and you struggle to free your arms from her talons. + +“Babies! Ssss! You kill my babiessss!” She says attempting to bite your face off. You more your head in such a manner that she only manages to bite your ear off instead. At this time you finally manage to free one of your arms and bring a fist to the side of her head. It isn’t enough to knock her off of you, but it’s enough to daze her enough so you can free your other arm. With both hands free you take your thumbs and jam them into the red orbs of the matriarch succeeding in pulling one out completely. + +The matriarch shrieks in pain holding her face and you push her off of you. Blind and crawling on the ground, she attempts to look for her staff. You stand up and easily grab your own weapon and put the matriarch out of her misery with a chop to her leathery neck. Another severs her head completely. + +You stagger out of the Slin brood chamber coughing up some blood from all the poison you inhaled from the now dissipating cloud. Some of your troops that were still fighting Slin in other parts of the cavern see that you’re not feeling your best and go to help you. + +You don’t remember exactly what happened after that. You must’ve passed out briefly because the next thing you know you’re lying outside the cave surrounded by some of your soldiers and a few of the belzaks who must’ve regained their courage after they ran away. You’re still not feeling good, who knows how much of that poison is in your system. + +“I’ve seen this before! He needs certain herbs to cure the poison, and I have some, I can mix up an antidote right here!” one of the belzak says. +“Shut the fuck up tribal, you oughta be glad we’re not executing you right now for desertion on the battle field! In fact let’s take care of that right now!” a soldier remarks and you hear a scuffle and protests of wanting to help and begging for life. + +You struggle to get up, and you manage it just barely. You feel like you’re going to collapse again and you aren’t sure if you’re going to make it to the medic back at the war camp. + +In the meantime the belzakians are begging you to call off you soldiers. +> Have them killed +“Kill these fucking deserters and get me to the medic.” You say. + +The screams of the belzak deserters begging for their lives and death squeals fall on deaf ears…or rather ear as the case may be now. + +Eventually you manage to make it to the medic who immediately starts administering an antidote to you. You’re out of commission and very sick for a couple of days, but after which time you’re at least able to stand without feeling ill anymore. Your chewed off ear isn’t an excessive problem as you can still hear relatively well, still you do feel a sense of “loss.” + +In any event the expansionist eastern campaign is over. All the tribes have been either wiped out or subdued to the point of submissiveness. Brenda will be relieved to hear it, as you know she was always concerned about having most of the veteran troops there instead of the northern borders. She’ll also be pleased that there weren’t many losses overall. + +You’re satisfied with the results, though now you’re just wondering what you’re going to do with yourself again. + +Year 50 + +“Our defenses are strong in the north. Have been for years. No need to be concerned about that.” You say. +“I know, but this is a big thing. I mean after all these years now Edgar wants to speak with us?” Brenda asks. +“My reports say he’s gotten a lot more organized and isn’t dealing with anarchy in his ranks anymore. He even re-conquered the old core lands of the Empire. It could be that he wants to see how strong we really are. His message said he’s coming alone without anyone else.” +“Well, maybe that’s a good sign. Maybe he just wants to talk.” +“Or maybe he wants to kill us both to a great show of strength so Nalin will capitulate with minimum fuss.” You point out. +“Yeah…there is that tactic. (sigh) Well I guess we all knew this day was coming. Guess I better practice my combat skills., which sadly have probably declined from lack of use. Would you spar with me?” +“Of course. Don’t worry, I’m sure you’re not that out of practice.” You remark. + +You and Brenda go to her personal training room where you and her prepare to spar. Brenda makes a few remarks about this being like the old days when Mistress made you fight each other. Brenda mentions the time when you broke Gerald’s arm and Kane’s nose when she pit them both against you. + +“Yeah, I remember that. That was my first match. Mistress had it in for me after I begged for my life. I was always pretty aggressive after that, well at least until Gruz told me I should master my anger better, and I did…anyway let’s get on with this.” You say not really wanting to think about those days or any of the names mentioned. + +Brenda isn’t quite as skilled as you remember her to be and she has indeed let her talents decline. Then again as you remember she always was more skilled with the bow. Something you never quite got the hang of yourself. You begin to get more in a “drill instructor mode” and shout commands at her to watch her techniques. + +“Alright, alright, I told you I was out of practice.” She shouts back. +“Well you shouldn’t have let it get this bad in the first place.” You say. + +After this remark, Brenda begins to get a little annoyed, which of course means she makes even more mistakes. + +“Brenda, come on I know you’re better than this! Focus!” +“I am!” +“Well prove it!” +“Well, I’m sorry I’m not the fucking lord of war that you are!” +“You don’t need to be me, you just need to be an Eternal!” +“What the hell for? The Empire is fucking dead and we’ve just been upkeeping a parody of it for the past fifteen years! I don’t even know what I’m doing trying to run this fucking country anymore! I never wanted this! I…I just wanted…to spend the rest of my…(sob) life with Roldan…(sob)” + +At this point Brenda sits down on the floor and completely breaks down in tears. You can honestly say you weren’t expecting this. + +“Brenda…” +“I’m sorry, but I can’t be the Eternal you are. I can’t even be the Eternal that Edgar is. I lost that edge when I fell in love. I wasn’t supposed to and neither was Roldan! If we hadn’t been so weak, he’d still be alive and…” +“Dammit Brenda, you can’t keep blaming yourself for his death! Your relationship and whatever feelings you had for each other had nothing to do with some insane asshole blowing him up. What’s bringing this all on? Edgar? I think you’re worrying about him more than you need to. I mean for all we know he just wants play catch up and even if he doesn’t we’re going to be ready for him and his army of half assed Eternals…” + +Brenda shakes her head and tries to compose herself. +“No, it’s not Edgar. It’s you.” +“Me? What do you mean? Out with it.” +“I…I think I’ve developed the same kind of feelings for you that I did for Roldan.” Brenda says. + +Another surprise for you today, not exactly the best timing with all that’s coming up soon. + +“…Uh…I don’t know what to say…I guess…I mean…are you sure?” you ask. +“I think I’d know. It’s been building up slowly over time. At first I was just happy to have you around, another Eternal to talk to. Sure you weren’t Roldan, and you’re certainly less fun loving than he could be, but there was that familiar bond. Then when you were so instrumental in helping to keep order in this place, I remembered why we all admired and respected you as a leader so much back in the day. It also began to remind me of how Roldan and I complimented each other in keeping order here during the days of the Empire. You were bringing the memories of those good old days back and making them reality again.” +“You probably just still miss him and are transferring those feelings.” +“I thought so too, which is why I didn’t do anything before. In fact I was feeling guilty about it, I thought I was dishonoring Roldan’s memory. Wasn’t until I heard about your close call with death during your campaign in the east that I knew it was more than mere transference. I was so happy that you were still alive, I nearly told you how I felt when you came back. I just didn’t think you suffered from such weaknesses and I wanted to remain strong because your respect was more important than my silly attractions.” + +You don’t have much experience with any of this, but you need to say or do something make Brenda feel better. + +“Brenda, you’ll always have my respect. As for anything between us, I never thought about it because I figured you’d always be carrying a torch for Roldan. I’m not opposed to the idea however. I mean we do have much in common and contrary to popular belief, I’m not quite the unfeeling golem that most consider me to be. I do have feelings, even if I don’t show them a lot and I would’ve thought you knew that.” +“I know you do, but you’re in control of them or you at least direct them better. I worry that if by some chance something would to occur between us, that you would lose your edge. I don’t want you to become weaker or distracted because of me. You’re needed as you are now.” + +You’re about to reply, and then there’s a knock on the door. + +“Sorry to disturb your training, but I’ve been told that the leader of the Eternal Dominion has been spotted at the northern border. He’s on a horse by himself, and several soldiers are already escorting him to Fort Glory. Did you want to meet him there or did you want us to escort him all the way to the capital?” a voice asks from behind the door. + +The pair of you didn’t expect him this soon, let alone be in the middle of the discussion you’re having now. You’d probably both like to wrap this up before having to focus on Edgar, though the question is if you’d have enough time to do it anyway. +> Meet Edgar at the fort +You and Brenda might have a bit more on your mind now, but this is much more important. + +“Brenda, I know emotions are running high right now, but I think we need to go meet Edgar. We can talk more about this later.” You say. +“Yes. Yes, of course. We need to get back to business. I’ll be okay. This was silly anyway. Need to focus.” Brenda says standing back up and wiping her eyes. + +You and Brenda ride off to Fort Glory. The ride there is done with minimal talking, but that’s sort of to be expected. The thing is you never seriously thought about Brenda in that way until she just brought it up today. Sure you always knew you had that bond from both of you being Eternals and the fact that you’ve served together for so long. You may have even had the occasional sexual thought about her, but like you said to her, you always figured she would’ve carried a torch for Roldan. You would’ve just been a substitute at best. + +Now you’re having scenarios in your head about the two of you being together in a closer way and you really shouldn’t be thinking about that at this moment. Maybe she’s right in a way maybe if you did have something together it would cause you to lose your edge. It’s certainly clouding your judgment right now and you’re not even together. + +When you get to Fort Glory you’re told that Edgar is waiting for you in your meeting room. When you ask how he seems, the soldiers say he’s been stand offish, but not overly hostile. About what you expected. + +When you and Brenda reach the meeting room, you ask her if she’s ready, and she remarks that she is. The door opens and you both step in and see Edgar sitting in a chair with a big grin on his face. He stands up and addresses the both of you. + +“Well it’s about time! I’ve missed the both of you! Come here!” he says jovially with his arms out walking towards you. + +“Uh… yeah, hey Edgar. Good to see you too.” Brenda says when he gives her a big hug. + +Looks like it’s going to be a day of surprises… + +Edgar stops hugging Brenda and then looks at you. You stand a little back from him as you don’t want to be hugged, but Edgar doesn’t try it. + +“Oh don’t worry, I know you’re the serious minded Bane of Rask! Bane of Nalin too now I hear! Heh, but how are you?” +“I’m fine Edgar.” You say. +“Good, good. I just have to say it’s really great seeing the both of you again! I mean you two are like my brother and sister! No, you ARE my brother and sister!” + +The last time you heard this sort of sibling talk before was from Kane and if you weren’t wary before, you certainly are now. + +“Edgar, I’m glad you seem to be in a good mood and all, but I sent envoys to contact you several times in the past and none of them ever returned. We always assumed you had them killed and were angry at us.” Brenda says. +“You did? When was the last one?” +“Mmm, last one was about six years ago I believe. After that, I saw no need to waste lives.” +“Aw! You should’ve kept sending them! I don’t know if you’re aware of just how much anarchy and infighting I’ve had to put up with! Those envoys probably got killed by the new Eternals and nobody ever told me about it! Hell, they might’ve even gotten killed by run of the mill bandits, it was pretty lawless back in the early days! Shit, if I had known you guys weren’t pissed at ME, I would’ve made this trek sooner!” +“Wait, so you weren’t mad at us?” +“Mad at you guys? What the hell for?! Oh you mean seceding from the Empire? Well I have to say I was more shocked than angry about that. I mean YOU especially.” Edgar says pointing at you. “But in time I heard about what you two were doing down here and I respected what the pair of you were attempting to do.” + +You and Brenda look at each other, wondering what Edgar THINKS you both were trying to do. + +“Oh? And what was that exactly?” Brenda asks. +“You saw that the Empire was a lost cause, but you were trying to uphold a portion of it, though this patch of territory. I’ve heard about your great success in keeping order and how you’ve even added more land to your nation. Only an Eternal could do something like that and that’s why both of you were successful!” + +Edgar isn’t far off, at least from your perspective. Though he probably has a more idealistic vision of it than the reality, which was this; you didn’t know where else to go and over time Nalin was transformed into a “mini Empire” because you didn’t know any other way. Brenda’s reasons are probably based on simple emotional attachment. + +“Well, we were doing the best we could under the circumstances, but you forged a whole new nation, so you’ve been successful too Edgar.” Brenda says. +“Ah yes, but it wasn’t easy! There were many times I almost wanted to give up and come join you two! But I knew I couldn’t do that, I had a vision that I had to make work! A nation run by Eternals and I’m proud to say it’s all finally coming together and I think it’s finally time for us, to reunite like we were meant to!” + +You and Brenda look at each other again. + +“Edgar, I don’t think it’s quite as simple as all that. We’re going to have to discuss this, all of it.” Brenda remarks and the three of you sit down to do just that. + +Edgar starts off by saying that while he respects what you’ve done, he doesn’t think that you’re going about things the right way and that you’re still thinking like “The Empire” and clinging to the old way of doing things. He points out that within his new regime he’s pushed for advances in weapon technology like the Felkan Kingdom has and managed to even “acquire” such gunpowder based weapons. He’s also managed to get a few mages to help in getting the Eternal process started again. + +When you bring up your experience with the new Eternals, Edgar reassures you that they don’t have the discipline issues at all anymore. He says he’s manages to instill the pride of being an Eternal into them and they’ve shaped up enough to no longer behave like the bloodthirsty children you knew them to be. He also says the next generation of Eternals are almost ready to prove their worth now as well and says he has made sure that their training was stricter and more in line with how you were trained. + +“Don’t you see I’m creating a new nation like the Empire, but how it should’ve been run! A nation run by us Eternals! Only we are able to efficiently run things. The lessers can either wisely listen to us, or be crushed underfoot.” +“That sounds very nice Edgar, but what is our place in this new nation?” you ask. +“Well, you’d be helping of course! I mean we would be ruling as…uh…a council! Yes! A council of three! The Eternal Council!” +“A council huh? Don’t you think that might ruin your standing with the new eternals who you’ve probably conditioned to listen to a single strong leader?” you ask. +“And they’ll still listen to me, because if they don’t they’ll get executed!” +“So…you’d actually be in charge then.” +“Well yes. I mean no. I mean…fuck, why are you fighting me on this!? I just want us to all work together again like we should’ve been doing a long time ago!” Edgar says in an exasperated tone. He’s actually getting upset. You’re not really being a dick on purpose, but you have a lot of reservations about this plan Edgar has, even if he has genuine good intentions. + +Brenda has been fairly silent for a while, but she suddenly stands up and says to Edgar that she needs to speak to you outside. He says okay, but is obviously troubled by how this is going. + +Brenda and you leave and after dismissing the soldiers standing outside, you’re standing in an empty corridor. + +“I think we should join Edgar.” Brenda says. +“What? Just like that? You’d be giving up control of your own nation. Don’t you have some concerns?” +“Not really. I think you heard me say not too long ago, that I never wanted it. And you heard him, it sounds like Edgar’s done a good job so far and just wants our help.” +“And I’m not sure if I want to. I know he claims to have those second generation Eternals under control, but I just don’t trust them. And now he’s saying there’s a whole new batch to deal with.” +“I’m sure we can handle it, that’s probably why he wants us to help. Besides, we’d be with others of our kind at least; don’t you wish for that sometimes? To not constantly be alone?” +“Maybe my experiences are different, but not particularly. Besides, you’re not alone. You’ve got me.” + +There is an uncomfortable silence with that statement. The unresolved issue between the pair of you has reared its ugly head again. + +“I know, but I still have conflicting feelings about you and if we don’t join Edgar he’s going to declare war on us. Can we truly have any sort of meaningful relationship then? Would you become less focused with me on the back of your mind? If we join Edgar, the pressure to constantly run things would be off of us. We would have time to explore the potential for a deeper relationship. Look, I know your feelings on the new Eternals, but I don’t think it’s just that. You’re in charge here at least in the military aspect of things, which quite frankly is the only thing that does matter to you. You don’t want to give that up and I understand, but I think you need to look at the bigger picture here.” +> Join Edgar +Maybe Brenda’s got a point; maybe you need to let go of your control a bit. Edgar has certainly proven to be a more capable leader than when you last knew him, and he seems to genuinely want you and Brenda to have an equal partnership. You’re still a little skeptical of that, but you’ll see how it goes. + +There’s also your unresolved situation with Brenda. She has feelings for you and you realize you do have them for her. If there is the potential for something deeper here, maybe it would be better if the pressures of potential war with the Eternal Dominion were eliminated. Plus she wants to join, and you feel as if trusting in her judgment would be a positive step in your relationship. + +“Okay Brenda. I agree. Let’s join the Eternal Dominion.” You say. + +Brenda smiles and gives you a hug added with a kiss, which startles you a little. You both very nearly make out in the hallway, but then you remember Edgar is still waiting for you. + +You and Brenda return to the room where Edgar looks a bit on edge. You decide to let Brenda break the news to him. + +“Edgar, we’ve talked it over and we accept your offer.” + +Edgar looks incredibly relieved and leaps out of his seat to shake both of your hands. + +“Great! That’s great! Whew! For a moment I thought you weren’t going to go for it, but I should’ve known you’d see the wisdom in this! This is going to be the best thing for all of us! You’ll see!” +“You realize, there’s going to be a lot of things to sort out Edgar.” You say. +“Oh yeah! I know we’ll hammer out the details and we’ll be equals in this. You don’t know what this means to me! The rest of our family united again, nothing can stop us! Not even that traitor Warrick!” +“Warrick?” you and Brenda ask in unison. +“Yeah, he joined the Felkan Kingdom didn’t you know? He joined a former enemy of the Empire! I guess you two probably wouldn’t know being so far away from it and all. Oh well, doesn’t matter we’ll take him down like with did with Kane! Eh? Remember that?” Edgar says nudging you. +“Yeah I remember Edgar.” You reply. + +Edgar is so happy right now, you think he’s almost about to cry. It’s definitely not a side you’ve ever seen of him before. + +“Ah, well I wish I could stick around longer to celebrate, but I have to return. Got some things to take care of and prepare before the great merging of our territories! But we’ll be seeing a lot of each other soon enough!” + +Edgar leaves in good spirits and biding you both goodbye. As you and Brenda see him ride off, you shake your head in almost disbelief after all that’s happened today. + +“It’s been an overly emotionally day for you today I imagine.” Brenda says. +“You’re not joking. I guess I am an emotionless golem compared to the rest of you.” +“Oh I wouldn’t say that. You handled everything very well, for a golem.” +“Heh. I just hope this is the right decision.” +“You still think you and Edgar will clash?” +“After today, it’s not really Edgar that I’m concerned about, there’s still all those newer generation of Eternals to deal with. I hope Edgar really does have them under control.” +“I’m sure everything will be fine. Odd news about Warrick though, thought he was dead.” +“Yeah, that was just one of the many surprises today.” +“Well enough about them, I think we’ve got us to discuss.” + +You and Brenda retire to your quarters at Fort Glory. After an hour or so of talking, you both decide that it’s time to take it to the more physical side of things. The night of passion you spend with Brenda is just one of many you hope in the years to come. + +Year 53 + +You and Brenda now oversee the Nalin territory as a married couple. The transition hasn’t been a completely easy one, there was a lot of outright dissent when the announcement that Nalin was going to be annexed by the Eternal Dominion. Many of the citizens saw you and Brenda as their protectors against the ED, and then you went and joined it, and they had no say in the matter. + +Multiple rebellions had to be put down, Edgar wanted to send in Eternals to take care of the problem, but you and Brenda disagreed with that idea as it would just reinforce the fears of the less rebellious population. You instead resorted to more traditional means using normal Nalin troops, though your soldiers weren’t exactly happy about it as they felt betrayed as well. + +While things in Nalin eventually settled down, the area feels like it could erupt with another rebellion at any time. You and Brenda haven’t really been able to enjoy your newfound relationship with all the problems cropping up, though you do make the time when you can. + +In the meantime Edgar has suggested that you and Brenda move into the royal palace and live there instead. He’s wanted you to do that for some time. He’s also been hinting and letting the Eternals go in and reinforce law and order at Nalin once and for all. + +“We’ve already joined the Eternal Dominion why not leave and live in the palace? It is the capital after all and we are partial rulers.” Brenda asks. +“Because there’s still problems here and I’d like to fix them before traipsing off to some cushy palace.” You reply. +“You’re just stalling. We’ve done the best we can to get this place to assimilate, and at this point it really would be for the best to let the Eternals come in and maintain the order now. We’ve moved beyond this, and we deserve spending some downtime together. Besides, I would’ve at least thought you’d want to talk with Edgar about his battle plans to invade the Felkan Kingdom. Best way you can do that is to be at the palace.” +“Because…ah shit. You’re right. I am stalling. It’s still hard to let go of personally managing this place I suppose. There’s also the fact that I still don’t like the idea of having to deal with those second gen Eternals on a daily basis.” +“Oh come on, you’ve spoken with some of them when we visited the palace before. They all seem pretty respectful.” Brenda says. +“Yeah, I suppose, I dunno…okay let’s move to the palace. I suppose we do deserve the break of living on the edge of dirty peasants possibly storming the gates.” + +Brenda moves closer and hugs you in a loving way and kisses you. Despite all the shit you’ve had to deal with concerning Nalin, you’ve never felt happier than you have with Brenda. It is still weird to you that you can even feel this way. You never thought it was possible to feel so comfortable with another person on this sort of level, not even with another Eternal. Brenda has a way about her that manages to make you feel like everything is going to be okay. Safe even. + +You and Brenda send word to Edgar that you’re both making your preparations to move and he sends a letter back stating how pleased he is and will send one of his personal royal carriages to come pick you. You accept, what the hell, why not ride in needless luxury? + +You both pack what you can and intend on sending for the rest of your things later. The pair of you board the carriage when it arrives and settle in for a long ride. + +“See, told you the new Eternals respect us, you saw how polite our drivers are.” Brenda says. +“Well these ones seem to be anyway. But I have been thinking more about it and I’m starting to accept the idea of making this change. I’ve been thinking of some ideas about Edgar’s plans for the Felkan Kingdom invasion.” +“I figured you’d see a bright side to it.” +“Yeah, he’s going to need my direct help on that plan. I’m just glad I managed to talk him out of invading Rask. That would’ve been a disaster.” + +You excitedly tell Brenda what you plan to tell Edgar for the Felkan Kingdom invasion, and she listens intently, but also gives her own input on some things. You take some of her ideas into consideration and generally enjoy this time you have. Later the pair of you begin to drift off together, not exactly the easiest thing to do in a carriage, but you’ve always been a light sleeper any way. + +Times passes and then suddenly… + +“SHIT! ATTACK!” you hear one of the Eternal drivers shout followed by the sound of a pistol shot. + +You instantly wake up and Brenda does likewise. You look out the window on your side and see several people armed with bows firing at the carriage. You then hear a loud crash that sounds like it came from in front of you, then the carriage screeches to a halt. The sounds of dying whinnies of horses soon follow. + +You grab your own flintlock and fire off a shot from inside the carriage; Brenda meanwhile loads up her bow and fires off arrows from her side. You can hear the two Eternal drivers jumping off and yelling about getting to cover and closing the gap on these attackers. That’s exactly what you had in mind; you never did get the hang of these gunpowder weapons. + +You step out of the carriage and head for the nearest tree to get some cover. You look over at the other two Eternals ducked behind a large rock and motion them to run around the other way to help Brenda, They seem to understand. + +In the meantime you manage to dodge arrows by ducking tree to tree and when you finally close the gap, you cleave one of your attackers’ heads clean off. The rest of them draw their own swords and axes to attack, but in close combat it’s no contest. You dispatch all of them with ease. They don’t appear to be the unwashed rabble you’ve been pissing off lately, they’re too well armed and armored. You doubt if they’re simple bandits either. These are probably mercenaries, but you don’t have time to figure out right now who hired them, you turn around to go help Brenda. + +By the time you get to the half destroyed carriage again, you don’t hear anymore sounds of battle. When you see the Brenda’s side of the carriage has been opened and some blood stain you begin to worry. Running over to the other side, you see several bodies of the attackers and then a few feet away, you see Brenda lying face down on the ground. Your heart sinks. + +You run over to her and turn her over and your worst fears are confirmed, her eyes show no signs of life. Your eyes begin to water and a mixture of rage and sorrow causes you to cry out. As you hold her body you don’t see any arrow or sword wounds, you do notice two gunshots to her chest though… + +Upon the realization of who killed your beloved Brenda, you don’t even get to face the treacherous dogs. The two Eternal drivers blast you from afar, one shot to your back and one to your head, killing you instantly. + +Your deaths are blamed on an ambush by some of the disgruntled population of Nalin. To his credit, Edgar doesn’t believe the story and has the two Eternals executed for suspicion and incompetence. + +It’s of minor consequence though, the real conspirators of this assassination remain uncaught and you’re still dead.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Brenda might have a bit more on your mind now, but this is much more important. + +“Brenda, I know emotions are running high right now, but I think we need to go meet Edgar. We can talk more about this later.” You say. +“Yes. Yes, of course. We need to get back to business. I’ll be okay. This was silly anyway. Need to focus.” Brenda says standing back up and wiping her eyes. + +You and Brenda ride off to Fort Glory. The ride there is done with minimal talking, but that’s sort of to be expected. The thing is you never seriously thought about Brenda in that way until she just brought it up today. Sure you always knew you had that bond from both of you being Eternals and the fact that you’ve served together for so long. You may have even had the occasional sexual thought about her, but like you said to her, you always figured she would’ve carried a torch for Roldan. You would’ve just been a substitute at best. + +Now you’re having scenarios in your head about the two of you being together in a closer way and you really shouldn’t be thinking about that at this moment. Maybe she’s right in a way maybe if you did have something together it would cause you to lose your edge. It’s certainly clouding your judgment right now and you’re not even together. + +When you get to Fort Glory you’re told that Edgar is waiting for you in your meeting room. When you ask how he seems, the soldiers say he’s been stand offish, but not overly hostile. About what you expected. + +When you and Brenda reach the meeting room, you ask her if she’s ready, and she remarks that she is. The door opens and you both step in and see Edgar sitting in a chair with a big grin on his face. He stands up and addresses the both of you. + +“Well it’s about time! I’ve missed the both of you! Come here!” he says jovially with his arms out walking towards you. + +“Uh… yeah, hey Edgar. Good to see you too.” Brenda says when he gives her a big hug. + +Looks like it’s going to be a day of surprises… + +Edgar stops hugging Brenda and then looks at you. You stand a little back from him as you don’t want to be hugged, but Edgar doesn’t try it. + +“Oh don’t worry, I know you’re the serious minded Bane of Rask! Bane of Nalin too now I hear! Heh, but how are you?” +“I’m fine Edgar.” You say. +“Good, good. I just have to say it’s really great seeing the both of you again! I mean you two are like my brother and sister! No, you ARE my brother and sister!” + +The last time you heard this sort of sibling talk before was from Kane and if you weren’t wary before, you certainly are now. + +“Edgar, I’m glad you seem to be in a good mood and all, but I sent envoys to contact you several times in the past and none of them ever returned. We always assumed you had them killed and were angry at us.” Brenda says. +“You did? When was the last one?” +“Mmm, last one was about six years ago I believe. After that, I saw no need to waste lives.” +“Aw! You should’ve kept sending them! I don’t know if you’re aware of just how much anarchy and infighting I’ve had to put up with! Those envoys probably got killed by the new Eternals and nobody ever told me about it! Hell, they might’ve even gotten killed by run of the mill bandits, it was pretty lawless back in the early days! Shit, if I had known you guys weren’t pissed at ME, I would’ve made this trek sooner!” +“Wait, so you weren’t mad at us?” +“Mad at you guys? What the hell for?! Oh you mean seceding from the Empire? Well I have to say I was more shocked than angry about that. I mean YOU especially.” Edgar says pointing at you. “But in time I heard about what you two were doing down here and I respected what the pair of you were attempting to do.” + +You and Brenda look at each other, wondering what Edgar THINKS you both were trying to do. + +“Oh? And what was that exactly?” Brenda asks. +“You saw that the Empire was a lost cause, but you were trying to uphold a portion of it, though this patch of territory. I’ve heard about your great success in keeping order and how you’ve even added more land to your nation. Only an Eternal could do something like that and that’s why both of you were successful!” + +Edgar isn’t far off, at least from your perspective. Though he probably has a more idealistic vision of it than the reality, which was this; you didn’t know where else to go and over time Nalin was transformed into a “mini Empire” because you didn’t know any other way. Brenda’s reasons are probably based on simple emotional attachment. + +“Well, we were doing the best we could under the circumstances, but you forged a whole new nation, so you’ve been successful too Edgar.” Brenda says. +“Ah yes, but it wasn’t easy! There were many times I almost wanted to give up and come join you two! But I knew I couldn’t do that, I had a vision that I had to make work! A nation run by Eternals and I’m proud to say it’s all finally coming together and I think it’s finally time for us, to reunite like we were meant to!” + +You and Brenda look at each other again. + +“Edgar, I don’t think it’s quite as simple as all that. We’re going to have to discuss this, all of it.” Brenda remarks and the three of you sit down to do just that. + +Edgar starts off by saying that while he respects what you’ve done, he doesn’t think that you’re going about things the right way and that you’re still thinking like “The Empire” and clinging to the old way of doing things. He points out that within his new regime he’s pushed for advances in weapon technology like the Felkan Kingdom has and managed to even “acquire” such gunpowder based weapons. He’s also managed to get a few mages to help in getting the Eternal process started again. + +When you bring up your experience with the new Eternals, Edgar reassures you that they don’t have the discipline issues at all anymore. He says he’s manages to instill the pride of being an Eternal into them and they’ve shaped up enough to no longer behave like the bloodthirsty children you knew them to be. He also says the next generation of Eternals are almost ready to prove their worth now as well and says he has made sure that their training was stricter and more in line with how you were trained. + +“Don’t you see I’m creating a new nation like the Empire, but how it should’ve been run! A nation run by us Eternals! Only we are able to efficiently run things. The lessers can either wisely listen to us, or be crushed underfoot.” +“That sounds very nice Edgar, but what is our place in this new nation?” you ask. +“Well, you’d be helping of course! I mean we would be ruling as…uh…a council! Yes! A council of three! The Eternal Council!” +“A council huh? Don’t you think that might ruin your standing with the new eternals who you’ve probably conditioned to listen to a single strong leader?” you ask. +“And they’ll still listen to me, because if they don’t they’ll get executed!” +“So…you’d actually be in charge then.” +“Well yes. I mean no. I mean…fuck, why are you fighting me on this!? I just want us to all work together again like we should’ve been doing a long time ago!” Edgar says in an exasperated tone. He’s actually getting upset. You’re not really being a dick on purpose, but you have a lot of reservations about this plan Edgar has, even if he has genuine good intentions. + +Brenda has been fairly silent for a while, but she suddenly stands up and says to Edgar that she needs to speak to you outside. He says okay, but is obviously troubled by how this is going. + +Brenda and you leave and after dismissing the soldiers standing outside, you’re standing in an empty corridor. + +“I think we should join Edgar.” Brenda says. +“What? Just like that? You’d be giving up control of your own nation. Don’t you have some concerns?” +“Not really. I think you heard me say not too long ago, that I never wanted it. And you heard him, it sounds like Edgar’s done a good job so far and just wants our help.” +“And I’m not sure if I want to. I know he claims to have those second generation Eternals under control, but I just don’t trust them. And now he’s saying there’s a whole new batch to deal with.” +“I’m sure we can handle it, that’s probably why he wants us to help. Besides, we’d be with others of our kind at least; don’t you wish for that sometimes? To not constantly be alone?” +“Maybe my experiences are different, but not particularly. Besides, you’re not alone. You’ve got me.” + +There is an uncomfortable silence with that statement. The unresolved issue between the pair of you has reared its ugly head again. + +“I know, but I still have conflicting feelings about you and if we don’t join Edgar he’s going to declare war on us. Can we truly have any sort of meaningful relationship then? Would you become less focused with me on the back of your mind? If we join Edgar, the pressure to constantly run things would be off of us. We would have time to explore the potential for a deeper relationship. Look, I know your feelings on the new Eternals, but I don’t think it’s just that. You’re in charge here at least in the military aspect of things, which quite frankly is the only thing that does matter to you. You don’t want to give that up and I understand, but I think you need to look at the bigger picture here.” +> Don't join Edgar +Brenda’s argument that you don’t want to give up a lot of your autonomy is correct in many ways. Perhaps you are a little stuck in the past as well. You still remember having to save Edgar’s life on more than one occasion. The idea of him telling you what to do is something that just doesn’t sit right with you, even if you have put away your differences with him a long time ago. His council idea, while a valiant attempt is doomed to failure. Ultimately there can only be one real leader and while you don’t mind following Brenda, you are not going to follow Edgar. The moment you disagree with him on something major it’s going to get ugly again. + +“Brenda I understand that you’re officially in charge of Nalin so ultimately it is your decision, but call it pride or even a hunch, but I feel that joining with Edgar would only lead to bad things occurring. What we control now is stable and with minimal chaos, maybe it isn’t the Empire or even the Eternal Dominion, but it is ours. If Edgar declares war on us for not joining, then so be it. At least that tells us where we always stood with him in the first place. And as for us, well if there is anything at all between us, then that relationship won’t be effected whether we’re at war with Edgar or not, so you shouldn’t even let that cloud your judgment on this matter.” +“And what if I decided that we should join with the Eternal Dominion? Would you leave?” Brenda asks. +“Honestly I don’t know what I’d do…(sigh) I suppose I’d support your decision even though I didn’t agree with it. Where that would leave us as far as a relationship is concerned, well as I said before, if there is anything genuine and meant to be there, then it’ll survive it. Wouldn’t change my feelings for you.” + +Brenda smiles at your remark. The first you’ve seen her do so all day. She then approaches and kisses you and you embrace her. You then both remember you’ve got Edgar waiting for an answer. + +You and Brenda return to the room where Edgar looks a bit on edge. You decide to let Brenda break the news to him. + +“Edgar, I’m sorry, but we both feel that Nalin should remain independent of the Eternal Dominion at this time.” +“But…but you’ve seen everything I’ve done! I’ve done all this for us! Eternals! Don’t you see that?!” Edgar says in an aspirated tone. +“We…know you did and we appreciate it, but I think our path is different from yours.” Brenda says and then looks at you. Edgar notices this and tries a different tactic. +“Oh wait. You two are together now? Well that’s great! I mean I wasn’t aware of it, but that’s great! You weren’t worried I was going to try anything did you? Ha ha, I’ve got tons of concubines! I wouldn’t dream of coming between you two! Heh, so if that was your only concern, you can join me and…” +“No Edgar, it’s not that. We’re just happy with the way things are, but thank you all the same.” Brenda says. + +And here it comes. Edgar’s face changes to red and he begins breathing heavier. + +“HAPPY? How the fuck can you two be so damn happy living in such mediocrity?! You’re fucking Eternals! We’re supposed to be ruling the fucking world! You two are no better than that traitor Warrick!” +“Warrick?” you and Brenda ask in unison. +“Yeah, he joined the Felkan Kingdom didn’t you know? He joined a former enemy of the Empire! Of course you two probably haven’t been keeping up on events since you’ve been playing grab ass with each other for the past fifteen years! By the Emperor’s dead cock, you didn’t wait long for Roldan to be dead did you?” + +This remark causes Brenda’s calm demeanor to shift entirely and she stands up and draws her weapon. + +“You say one more fucking thing about my dead husband, and I’ll send you back to the Eternal Dominion in fucking pieces!” + +Edgar draws his own weapon, but was a little surprised by her response. It’s all you can do to hold Brenda back. + +“Alright, I think…” you start to say before Edgar cuts you off. + +“And you! What the fuck happened to you? You were supposed to be the BEST of us! You were the one that was the leader! Now look at you! You’re following Brenda because she’s spread her legs for you? Where the hell are your balls? You know when we were young I disliked you a lot, but I always respected you. After our escape from Fort Defiance I liked you as well as respected you. Now? I can’t say I feel either.” +“Okay Edgar…” +“Out of all of us YOU were the one that was supposed to prevent the Empire from falling! What did you do? You ran away! You know what I did? I stayed until the bitter end picking up the pieces! I saw the fucking capital in flames! I tried so hard to prevent it…I tried…and you didn’t help me, (sob) none of you did…” + +At this point Edgar collapses back in his seat sobbing and going on about how he failed. His motivations for everything he’s done are a little clearer now. Even after the verbal abuse he laid down on Brenda, she sees now he probably didn’t mean any of it. + +After all these years, Edgar is still like a teenager trying to prove himself by over compensating. You actually feel sorry for him. You can only imagine the internal torment he’s been going through all these years since the Empire fell. Justifications, rationalizations, outright blocking out reality, he’s probably done it all. + +You sit down next to Edgar and pat him on the back. + +“Edgar. There was nothing any of us could’ve done. It was a doomed mission to begin with. You did your best and that’s all anyone could’ve done. Even an Eternal.” + +Edgar tries to compose himself while you give your pep talk. + +“You’ve accomplished much and you should be proud of your achievements on their own merits, not as compensation for perceived failings. This is your path and your destiny. Brenda and I, we have our own path.” +“Okay…okay…” Edgar sniffles. + +Before he leaves he apologizes to Brenda and says he has no intention on invading Nalin, but he still hopes that one day you’ll reconsider in joining him + +“It’s possible. Perhaps one day our paths will reunite.” You answer. +“I hope that day will be soon, goodbye my Eternal brother.” Has says extending his hand. +“Goodbye Edgar.” You reply and shake his hand. + +After Edgar leaves the fort you sit down and run your hands over your face and taking a deep breath from all the emotional baggage you had to put up with today. + +“It’s been an overly emotionally day for you today I imagine.” Brenda says. +“You’re not joking. I guess I am an emotionless golem compared to the rest of you.” +“Oh I wouldn’t say that. You handled everything very well, for a golem.” +“Heh. Well anyway that’s one less thing to worry about.” +“You don’t think we shouldn’t still be concerned about him? I mean I know he said he wouldn’t invade, but there’s always the possibility of a sneak attack.” +“Edgar’s a lot of things, but he not a backstabber. At least he wouldn’t be for us. If he ever does decide to do it, I promise you, it’ll be announced in a very dramatic fashion weeks in advance.” +“Yes, I suppose you’re right. Odd news about Warrick though, thought he was dead.” +“Yeah, that was just one of the many surprises today. But I guess that was his path and how he dealt with the fall. It’s all in the past now anyway, I’m not going to judge him.” +“Well enough about them, I think we’ve got us to discuss.” + +You and Brenda retire to your quarters at Fort Glory. After an hour or so of talking, you both decide that it’s time to take it to the more physical side of things. The night of passion you spend with Brenda is just one of many in the years to come. +> Years pass... +Year 55 + +You and Brenda now rule the nation of Nalin as a married couple. There has been some issue on what your official titles are now. The simplest choices would be emperor and empress or king and queen. Eventually Brenda settled for imperatrix, which would officially make you imperator, though you still go by general for the most part. + +In any case life has been good. You don’t even mind that things have been slow since you conquered all those tribals in the east. You’ve been taking a slightly more active role in running the nation from an administrative point of view, but sometimes you still long for the day of a good battle. When that day comes you’ve also tried to keep up on the changing times of changing warfare. While the days of close combat are far from over, if the Eternal Dominion is starting to slowly incorporate firearms into their ranks, then you better do likewise if only to maintain a show of strength. + +The ED isn’t hostile though and you maintain a good trading relationship with them. Edgar still hopes you’re going to join him one day, especially since you know he’s got designs on going to war with the Felkan Kingdom (You gave him some friendly advice to not bother with invading Rask). + +He’d probably like you to at least be involved in a joint military operation with him, but you think he’s over extending himself and the Felkan Kingdom is no pushover. It’s not exactly like you’re near the Felkan Kingdom as far as location is concerned either. All you’d be doing is having soldiers die in a war that doesn’t even directly benefit your nation. + +That being said, Nalin hasn’t sided with the Felkan Kingdom either in any way. Again, due to your location, you’ve had minimal contact with them. Brenda thought about allying with them in the past, but that was never seriously considered (Good thing too). Somehow though you imagine you’re going to get dragged into this saber rattling between the Eternal Dominion and the Felkan Kingdom. + +Funny how that feeling turns out to be true. + +Late one night you and Brenda are awakened from your sleep. Some envoy from the Felkan Kingdom has sudden decided to show up in the middle of the night. Demanding to see the pair of you and claiming it’s very urgent. You and Brenda don’t get much sleep as it is, so you’re inclined to tell your soldiers to just shoot him and go back to bed, but you’ve got a good idea of who it is. + +“You really think it’s him?” Brenda ask. +“You really think it isn’t? It was only a matter of time. Ugh, I guess we better get this over with.” + +You shout at the guard behind the door to hold the envoy in the meeting room and keep a close eye on him until you and Brenda get there. After grumbling and getting dress you and Brenda head to the meeting room where you see a familiar face. He’s missing an eye, all of his hair and his face has a few more winkles and scars on it now, but you still recognize him. + +“Warrick, you better have a damn good reason for waking us up in the middle of the night.” You say. +“…you aren’t surprised it’s me?” +“Not really, I actually thought you’d show up sooner, and how the hell did you manage to join the Felkan Kingdom anyway?” +“It’s a long story…but well anyway, I’m glad to see you both. I was surprised to hear about your marriage. Didn’t think that…” +“Warrick, I’m tired as well. It’s not easy running a nation and I’ve been doing it even longer than my husband has, so get to the damn point of the visit or let this wait until tomorrow.” Brenda demands rubbing one of her eyes. + +Warrick looks a little hurt by your remarks, but he gets on with it. + +“Very well, to business. The Felkan Kingdom wants an alliance with you.” +“Yeah sort of figured that. Anything else?” you ask. +“Erm, no, but…” +“Okay then, the answer is no. We can talk more about old times tomorrow, if you want. Good night.” Brenda says starting to turn around to go back to bed. +“Hey wait! No? Just like that?! You don’t even want to consider the benefits?” Warrick asks. +“What benefits? If we ally with the Felkan Kingdom, all it’s going to do is piss off the Eternal Dominion who we have a good relationship with diplomatically and tradewise. What is the Felkan Kingdom going to offer?” Brenda replies. +“How the fact that we’re more likely to leave you alone after the war with the Eternal Dominion is over?” +“Warrick…Warrick…you should know threats aren’t going to sway us.” You remark. +“What?! NO! I meant, argh look. What I’m saying is if the unfortunate should happen and the Eternal Dominion wins don’t you think that they’ll try to invade you next?” +“I suppose it’s possible yes.” +“Whereas if the Felkan Kingdom wins, we have no intention on even expanding our borders.” +“Probably true, but that still doesn’t help us during the war. A war that is really between you and the ED.” +“I can’t believe I’m trying to convince YOU of all people to go to war. I would’ve thought you would’ve jumped at this chance!” Warrick says in a raised tone. +“Things change Warrick, and just because I’m not jumping through your hoops doesn’t mean I’ve lost a taste for battle. But I’m thinking on a grander scale now. Going to war with the Eternal Dominion doesn’t do us or Nalin any good. It’s just going to result in dead soldiers at best. We’ve found that our continued expansion eastward is much better in building up the country. Maximum gain with minimum losses.” You say. + +Warrick paces a bit and sputters. He obviously thought this was going to go better. + +“So that’s it then huh? You just take Edgar’s side over mine. I thought you didn’t like him anyway.” +“Warrick, it’s not about taking sides. If you haven’t noticed we’re not exactly allied with the ED either. We trade with them and are on friendly terms, but that’s out of convenience more than anything. Trust me, Edgar’s been trying to get us to join for years. I don’t know what you’re even worried about, the Eternal Dominion is formidable I’m sure, but the Felkan Kingdom survived a war with the Empire. I’m guessing you should be able to handle the ED.” +“I don’t know if we can.” He calmly states. + +There’s a moment of silence where you weren’t expecting him to say such a thing so blatantly like that. + +“Look, I didn’t want to say anything. The Felkan Kingdom is what I serve now and I serve it to the best of my abilities as I did the Empire. To do anything less would be a failure as an Eternal on my part.” +“But?” +“But I see the weaknesses that we have and I can’t ignore them. It’s not public knowledge to anyone outside the kingdom, but we’re also suffering a large gnoll invasion from the west. It caught us completely by surprise. The Felkan Kingdom is a mighty nation, but right now it’s straining its resources just to stay alive. A war with the ED…and we all know it’s coming, could break us. The funny thing is I feel like I’m in the Empire all over again. You know during the bad times.” +“I think they were ALL bad times Warrick. We just made the best of them.” Brenda says. +“Perhaps. (sigh) I guess I can’t convince you ally with us, I mean you’ve got a good thing going on here and you shouldn’t wreck it. I’m glad. Glad that some of us are doing well. But couldn’t you at least break off your trade routes? I mean that would at least cause Edgar’s attention to be diverted. He might suspect you’re up to something and not attack the Felkan Kingdom. At least not right away. It might be enough time for us to put up a better defense.” +“Yeah and he might also attack us instead.” Brenda remarks. +“I don’t think he will, because then he has to divert his own soldiers and resources and then he’ll be worried that we will attack. He can’t fight a two front war, even Edgar’s smart enough not to risk that. And that’s if he dares fighting you in the first place.” +“That’s a big if, there Warrick.” You say. + +You and Brenda tell Warrick you’ll both discuss this in a little more detail outside. He says he understands and will await your decision. + +You and Brenda don’t have too much to talk about really, since it’s basically coming down to helping out a former comrade in arms and starting a possible war with another one or avoiding the situation entirely. Brenda is for staying neutral; oddly you’re actually of two minds of this. +> Stay neutral +As much as you might like to help Warrick out, you just really aren’t in a position to do so on any meaningful level. Breaking your trade routes with the Eternal Dominion is just foolish. You tell Brenda you’ll break the news this time. + +You both enter the room where Warrick awaits your answer. + +“Sorry Warrick, while we do understand your troubles, we can’t help you. What you’re asking for is too much and we see no benefit for us or Nalin in general.” + +Warrick’s face doesn’t drop and he doesn’t get any angrier, All in all, he takes your response a lot better than Edgar did. + +“Very well. I shall tell my superiors that you are not interested in any sort of alliance with us. I hope that one day this may change. I suppose I will also take my leave now, sorry to have bothered the both of you, but it was still good to see you again.” He says and leaves immediately. + +You and Brenda remark on he was probably more disappointed than he let on, but what’s done is done and you’ve all made your choices now. The pair of you go back to bed and try to get some sleep. + +Year 56 + +“We’ve got to do something about this epidemic. If this keeps up we’re not going to have a population left to rule over!” Brenda says. +“Well so far the problem has hit the eastern territory of Nalin yet. We’ve scoured the land for healers, medics and a few hedge wizards and they’re doing all they can, but this thing is really bad in a few of the towns. I’ve quarantined all of the major areas where this plague is taking place, but understandably a lot the soldiers aren’t exactly keen on their duties there mainly because they don’t want to get sick either. The only ones who aren’t kicking up much of a fuss about it are soldiers with families in those towns.” You reply. +“(Sigh) Shit. I’ve talked to all of the advisors and nobody has a clue where, who and why this thing might’ve started. You got any ideas?” +“Unfortunately the only one I can think of just a hunch, and I’d rather not believe it. I think Warrick, or at least the Felkan Kingdom had something to do with it. For all we know they could’ve had saboteurs in here for years planning this.” +“If it was them, I hope Edgar rips them a new asshole now that he’s at war with them.” +“Be that as it may, I’m still hoping that wasn’t the case, not because I don’t want to believe a former friend could do this to us, but more because it doesn’t reflect well on my duties to protect the nation. I mean if the Felkan Kingdom had saboteurs here, how was it that I didn’t see it until now?” +“You can’t start doubting yourself, we need to focus on the problem at hand first.” +“You’re right of course. Well as I see it, if we really want to stop the plague, we need to kill everyone in the quarantined areas, then cleanse everything with fire.” +“Wait, hold on. There’s no other way? Can’t we just have more medics and healers transferred to those places?” +“I don’t see what good that would do. From the reports a lot of these people are practically dead or dying as it is. It doesn’t do any good for them to linger and possibly get others sick. Better to just kill them now and save the medics to observe the places that only have a few sick people.” +“You do realize that something like this is not going to be popular right? I mean are the soldiers even going to be willing to do such a thing?” +“Well we try pretty hard to keep up the old ways of Empire indoctrination, I don’t think we should have major problems, though I suppose those with families might protest (Sigh) I guess we’ll have to take care of them as well.” +“This isn’t sounding like a great idea. Maybe we should just keep the quarantine and let them all slowly die off. We could always say we’re looking for a cure, and whether one comes or not, the problem will take care of itself.” Brenda suggests. +“The problem with that plan is we’re diverting soldiers from more important duties and continuing to risk lives that can still be useful to Nalin.” You say. + +You and Brenda weigh the pros and cons of your limited choices. +> Kill everyone in the quarantine +Ultimately, when in doubt killing everyone has worked for you on several occasions in the past, no reason to change tactic now. Brenda really doesn’t think this is such a good idea, but you convince her that if there is going to be problems you might as well get them over with quickly. + +First thing you do is get every remaining “old guard” officer that’s still serving since the days of the Empire and have them put in charge of this operation. You know they won’t even question this command coming from you. Then you tell them to go through their personnel rosters to see who is going to be up for this grim task. You personally suggest to include all of those elves you made into orphans years ago. While they may all be good indoctrinated soldiers now, you think they wouldn’t hesitate at a chance to kill some humans and would be good candidates for this job. Besides, elves seem to be more resistant to the plague anyway. + +Three entire towns are put to the sword, gun and torch until there is nothing left, but burned corpses and hollowed out buildings. In keeping with non-humans being seemingly less affected by the plague, you have kobolds remove the bodies and clean out what they can. They’re more than happy to do this as they get the chance to loot some stuff for their own impoverished reservation you’ve set aside for them. + +This action causes an outcry, which hasn’t been seen in a long time. Not even when conscription was implemented were things this bad. As predicted you have to execute several soldiers who took up arms against you during the cleansing. Many Nalin citizens aren’t happy with the fact that you’ve implemented several non-humans in helping with this massacre as well. Indeed some begin calling you their inhuman “Eternal overlords.” + +As far as the plague goes, you did successfully wipe it out from being an ongoing danger. Medics, healers and the like are able to focus their attentions on the places where it’s less of a problem and eventually it is gone completely. + +The repercussions of this action are that you now have a split nation. Eastern Nalin is still prosperous as the plague barely even reached the area. You also still have all of your supporters mainly from there who appreciate the fact that you stopped the plague from spreading. Western Nalin however is a mess and pockets of lawlessness begin to appear. You naturally take steps in trying to curb this problem by being more oppressive… + +Year 60 + +“You want to move the capital?” +“I don’t see why not. It’s obvious that eastern Nalin is where the prosperity is, I don’t see why us as rulers shouldn’t be living there instead.” Brenda remarks. +“I do. By having the seat of power here, we still maintain control over this area and are displaying a show of dominance. If we go running to the east, it looks like we’re effectively abandoning the area and that’s going to make the less desirable elements here even more motivated to pursue whatever lawlessness they want. We need to maintain control.” +“Well what if I don’t? Ever since the plague hit, it’s been a downward spiral for western Nalin. We’ve tried and tried to get it back to what it once was, but throwing soldiers at the problem is just a bandage. It didn’t help that you had soldiers shaking down people looking for other possible Felkan Kingdom saboteurs.” +“I had to be sure to make sure something like the plague didn’t happen again!” +“Look, I know you don’t like losing control of anything and we’ve had arguments about how the plague was handled to begin with, but we are in a spot now that we need to make a serious change in things if we want to avoid getting overthrown by mobs and our heads on pikes in the future.” +“Oh come on, like that’s going to happen.” +“I said in the future, not immediately. And don’t be so sure of yourself, you’re not twenty anymore you know.” +“I know that!” +“Do you? Because sometime I wonder. I love you and you’re still a great warrior and you’re probably still better than most men half your age, but you can’t go around thinking you’re invincible anymore. There are guns now you know, someone could just assassinate you from a few feet away and not even engage you in combat. The days of the Empire are over, you have to realize that.” +“I know that too, Brenda.” +“And that’s why you’re frustrating to deal with sometimes, because you DO know it, yet sometimes you completely lapse into the mindset of the good old days.” +“So what the hell are you proposing? That we just relinquish complete control of the western Emp…Nalin? That we run and hide to the east, because it’s easier?” +“Let me put this into terms you can understand. Eastern Nalin is healthy, thriving even. Western Nalin is very sick and slowly dying. It can’t be cured, so what’s the best way to deal with it? Cut it off and focus on the more important area that is still of use.” + +Brenda’s analogy to your idea of how you handled the plague makes sense even if you don’t want to admit it. Brenda’s right about a lot of things, you aren’t young anymore. You haven’t been for a long time and even though you aren’t even on the frontlines of any fighting anymore you find yourself getting tired and weary of the constant conflict that Nalin has been suffering from the past few years. + +You’ve tried to halt the ravages of time to the best of your abilities, but ultimately even as an Eternal, you’re not immune to such things. You begin to wonder if the past few years were more about you wanting to relive your “youth” a bit rather than seeking out possible traitors, saboteurs, and other dissidents. + +You could insist on staying and Brenda would probably go along grudgingly, but she’s also right. You’re just going to become even more hated by the citizens in this area and it only takes one dumb ass peasant with a with a gun or even a bomb, to kill you. Maybe at one point you wouldn’t have even cared if that had happened, but you’ve had a long and enjoyable life with Brenda for several years now. A relationship you never even dreamed of before it happened. + +You see now that want to live as long as possible with her as your older years advance, because ultimately she is the only other one you have in your life and the only other one that is going to understand you. + +“Okay Brenda. Let’s cut off the sick limb.” You say. + +Brenda is happy you see reason and her plan is set in motion. + +Over the next few months, the Nalin government is relocated to one of the bigger central towns in the eastern territory, Adlen. The town soon swells to become a city with the influx of people. Military is pulled out of the west next. A few soldiers desert and don’t follow in this exodus, but you just let it go. If they don’t want to be here, then it’s better off that they aren’t. Most merchants and businesses are the next to follow. + +After these major transfers, western Nalin is declared no longer under protection and an independent territory. This causes some debate on if eastern Nalin is still “Nalin” since technically it was never part of the territory originally. After some discussion eastern Nalin is renamed the nation Naleen. Most of the eastern citizens have oddly developed an accent in which they’ve been pronouncing “Nalin” like that anyway for years. + +As for Nalin, the people that still dwell there are either happy about it or too poor to move. You figure the biggest winners will be the kobolds, at least until the Eternal Dominion sends in forces to take the land, assuming they have the time and manpower. You’ve heard they’re doing well against the Felkan Kingdom, but things could always change. + +In any event none of it is your concern anymore. Still, you hope that this really is the last time you have to make a big move like this again, you don’t know if you want to bother with a third time. +> Years pass... +Year 70 + +It’s a calm night and you stand outside on the balcony of your palace and look down at the city of Adlen. Brenda comes out to join you. + +“It’s good when everything is going well isn’t it?” Brenda asks. +“It’s definitely going better for us now. Certainly going better than it is for Prime Eternal Edgar too.” +“Always thought that was a ridiculous title. I don’t understand how he’s at a stalemate with the Felkan Kingdom, he was doing so well against them for the longest time.” +“I figured he’s eventually over extend himself, though he’s also had a few personal set backs like several assassination attempts for one. From his last letter he doesn’t sound like he’s doing too well healthwise. He says the last two times he’s been stabbed, the assassin’s knife was coated with a heavy duty poison. The bolt that went into his back was too. If he wasn’t an Eternal he’d probably be dead by now.” +“Well that’s better than Warrick.” +“Yeah, but from that letter Edgar sent, he said Warrick died at the battle of Yaquan six years ago. Regardless of his loyalties, he died like how an Eternal is supposed to die. Edgar will be lucky if he dies from a successful assassination, because it’s sounding like the poison build up in his system might get him first. He’s sick and weak. It’s a shame really, I remember him being so hale and hearty at one time. If I were him I’d probably give up the ruling nonsense, join his soldiers in the next battle and die in one last blaze of glory.” +“Is that how you wish to die? You want to go out in one last blaze of glory?” Brenda asks. +“Eh, sometimes I still think about it, but not really seriously. I guess I’ve finally grown past it.” You laugh. +“Didn’t think that would happen actually.” +“Well, if Naleen starts suffering an unstoppable rebellion I guess I still got a shot at it. I’ll meet the unwashed mobs with sword in hand.” +“Heh, well if that happens I guess I’ll join you, because I’m too old to be moving the capital again.” + +You both smile and hold each other side by side still looking out at the city. Yes, life is good when things are running well. + +Year 75 + +You, Brenda and your elite guards step into Edgar’s palace, and it’s every bit as impressive as you thought it would be. Lots of statues, symbols of war, etc. Certainly a lot of bigger than your humble palace, but then Edgar always was one for overcompensation. You all are taken through the palace to see Edgar, along the way you and Brenda continue to take in some of the sights. + +“Isn’t weird that all those years we served the Empire that this the first time we’ve ever stepped foot into this place?” Brenda says. +“Yeah, Edgar must’ve spent a fortune rebuilding it.” +“Did he ever actually meet the emperor?” +“No he never did. He said he assumed that he either fled or burned up in the fire, by the time he got to the palace. For all we know, maybe there never was an emperor.” +“Just one of life’s mysteries I guess.” + +Eventually you reach the royal bedroom. An older woman is sitting on a chair outside sobbing. She looks regal. You wonder if this is “Eva” that he’s referred to a couple times in his letters. She’s not exactly his queen since she’s human, but you know she is definitely his companion. Another older muscular man with a stern expression is standing nearby pacing. When you arrive, he frowns even more. + +“Oh so you two decided to come after all. A pity.” He says. +“And who the hell are you exactly?” you ask. +“Hmm, not surprised a deserter like you doesn’t remember me. My name is Rissok and I served under you during the Empire riots. I saw you kill my friend in cold blood. A true Eternal who served with honor!” + +“Oooooh now I remember. You and your other buddy were looting houses while Felding was attempting to rape a woman. Yeah, real honor there.” You say. +“Don’t mock me! You are only here because the Prime allows it! If it were up to me, I would have you labeled as a traitor and have you killed!” + +At this point your guards take up a defensive stance and Rissok’s do likewise. + +“Well if you’re going to make a move, better do it quick.” You say. +“Stop it! Stop it please! My Edgar is dying! Can’t we have one moment without murder and killing?” the woman sobs. + +At this point Rissok storms off without another word, the guards stick around and tell you that you and Brenda may enter at any time, but your own guards must stay outside. Before you do, Brenda addresses the woman. + +“We apologize, we did not mean to cause you distress. Are you Lady Eva by any chance?” +“(sniff) Yes. Yes I am.” +“Edgar’s spoken highly of you in his letters.” Brenda says which causes a slight smile on her face. +“I know that he’s better than me in everyway being an Eternal, yet he shows such compassion and sweetness by making me, a non-eternal, his only companion. I don’t know what I ever did to deserve such an honor, but I will always be grateful for it.” + +Brenda asks her if she wants to come in too, but she says she has already said her goodbyes and that he wants to see you both alone when you arrive. Having no other questions, you both enter the bedroom. + +When you see Edgar, he’s lying in his bed and looking completely unwell. He’s pale and his face has a gaunt looking appearance. You can’t even believe this is the same man you fought along side at Fort Defiance. + +“Edgar?” you ask just to make sure. +“(wheeze) ah…you both came…I knew you would. (cough cough) There isn’t much time…I trust you’ve read my letter?” +“Yes.” +“Well then you know that when my death comes, anarchy will ensue.” +“Don’t you have a successor?” +“I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but I imagine Brenda has and that’s we can’t have children.” + +You look at Brenda and she nods and mentions she learned that with Roldan when they were together. It’s never been a topic you’ve brought up, but you always had your suspicions. Edgar continues his speech. + +“We Eternals seem to be sterile or barren. I’ve had people try to look into this problem, but they haven’t come up with anything yet. It would seem what makes us superior, takes away our ability to reproduce. Maybe it’s nature balancing itself out, so that we don’t take over the world like so many of our younger eternals seem to want to do. Anyway (cough cough) I’ve drawn up official forms for the only two I think could be proper successors…” + +You already know where Edgar is going with this. + +“Oh no…don’t say that’s why you dragged us out here…Edgar they aren’t going to listen to us! We aren’t even ED citizens!” +“This is rather unrealistic Edgar.” Brenda adds. + +“That doesn’t matter! You’re still Eternals! (wheeze cough) They’ll listen more likely than you believe, why do you think I always spoke so highly of you two? The younger ones will most likely follow without question, your major opposition will probably be the second generation…but there aren’t too many of them left, you could easily purge them all if you had to. Please…I tried to build something here…(cough) but I can’t go on any longer. The only people who can guide the Eternal Dominion into something worthier are you two. I’m asking not just as a dying man or friend …but as a (cough cough) a fellow Eternal…” + +You and Brenda look at each other and you both know your answer. Edgar’s trying to guilt you into this mess, but it’s just not going to work. This plan of his is doomed to fail and you know it. Every high ranking Eternal is probably going to be vying for power. And you and Brenda have your own nation, your own lives, and you’ve told Edgar this before, but it’s time to tell him one last time. + +“Edgar, we’re not accepting this position. First of all it’s not realistic despite what you want to believe and I think deep down you know that. Second of all, these are your final moments Edgar. Don’t worry about what you accomplished and if it’ll last. Just be proud of it now and spend your last moments with your wife or whatever you consider her. That’s who you need to be concerned about.” + +Edgar hacks and coughs up blood and spits it into a nearby bucket and struggles to breathe, but manages to answer you. + +“Very well…you’ve made your point. And you’re probably right. You usually were. (wheeze) Bring my…my wife in. I do wish to spend the last moments with her…and farewell…my Eternal siblings.” +“Farewell Edgar.” You say with a nod. Brenda says goodbye as well before you both leave. + +You step outside and tell Eva that Edgar wants to spend his remaining time left with her. She seems happy with this idea though of course still upset. She runs in and you, Brenda and the rest of your group are escorted out and back to the carriage that brought you here. + +When you finally get back to Naleen, you and Brenda are both glad to be home, though you both talk for quite awhile about this recent event and how it’s odd to think that you both are going to be the only original Eternals left soon. + +A couple days later you get the news that Edgar has died and that the new leadership of the Eternal Dominion as of now is uncertain. Fortunately you don’t really have to worry about it. Naleen is strong enough and far enough away that any sort of chaotic attack from the new ruler is very unlikely. You suspect that most of the fighting will be within the ED itself, or pushing ahead against the Felkan Kingdom. + +In the meantime you wonder about your own legacy and if you’ll be remembered on any meaningful level. Brenda isn’t really concerned about it; she figures you’ll both be in the history books as the first rulers of Naleen if nothing else. That sounds fine, but you wonder if that would necessarily be the case, after all you never met the emperor, you don’t even know his name or really anything about him except what you were taught as a child and that was most definitely all propaganda. You know even less about his predecessors. History may very well remember the Empire, but information on its rulers is either going to be sketchy or non-existent in another century. Edgar will probably be forgotten in even less time. + +You get the idea that a solid written record is in order. + +“Since when are you a writer?” Brenda asks. +“I’m not, but maybe we can work on this together, I mean you are part of this too.” +“Well that’s certainly true. Okay, so how did you want to go about this?” +> Create a book painting you in a positive light +While you toy with the idea of creating a book telling the complete truth, but decide it would probably be better to just do one as a partial propaganda piece. People have enough excuses to complain about you, no need to add more sticks to the fire. + +“Sounds like that might be for the best. So are you going to still start from the beginning?” Brenda asks. +“Well I’ll briefly touch upon some of my time serving the Empire, but I’ll mostly deal with when Nalin broke away from it and beyond. Obviously I’ll focus on the most memorable parts, not the times where I just sat around reading skirmish reports.” +“Still going to take a while you realize.” +“I know it’s not going to be in one night, but I feel like a lasting record of us should exist. I mean after we’re gone, who’s to say that we won’t be forgotten soon after? I mean I understand what Edgar was trying to do, but sadly I don’t think he’s going to be remembered in the scheme of things. I don’t think the Eternal Dominion is even going to survive too much longer now that he’s dead.” +“Hmm, you might be right about that. So you don’t mind that the book might be excessively biased?” +“Brenda, ALL history is biased in favor of its victors. Why should we be any different? Besides, I’m sure people will make up more than enough lies about us to make up for it when we’re gone.” +“Heh, you’re probably right about that too. Okay then, let’s get started, I want to make sure I’m in a good portion of this history as well.” Brenda says with a smile. + +You and Brenda immediately get to work on your project. You and her take turns doing the writing for the most part, but the pressures of ruling sometimes get in the way, so it takes longer than it probably would have if you both didn’t have other responsibilities. + +Your ambitious project takes more than a few years to complete, but when it is finally finished you definitely feel a sense of accomplishment. It may not be conquering an enemy or territory or anything like that, but if this goes the way you want, you will have achieved much more than simple victory. You will have achieved a kind of immortality. + +The huge tome immediately copied several times when it is complete. The great thing about being a ruler is you’ve got underlings that can do this. You make sure to keep the original writing for yourself. The first copies go out to a few Naleen schools, libraries and other places of higher learning where you decree that it is to become required reading. (Another great thing about being in charge!) + +In time there probably isn’t a single citizen that hasn’t at least heard of the book, if not read it. There are a few criticisms about the book from intellectual types claiming that it is little more than the usual propaganda, but such people don’t voice such opinions for very long or they quickly shut up about them. For the most part though, the book brainwashes the masses enough that you at least never have to worry about any possible uprisings again. + +Year 101 + +“Brenda…did you say that our book Eternal Vigilance has reached lands outside Naleen?” you ask. +“Yes, I have been told as much, but from what I’ve heard it isn’t popular like it is here. It’s been dismissed as little more than the fat musings of tyrants…that would be us.” +“Ah, I suppose everyone’s a critic. Well I guess we at least we’ll probably be remembered by our subjects, for however long that lasts.” +“You shouldn’t worry about such things right now, it’s not important.” +“I know Brenda. I suppose it was just a last foolish attempt to keep the Empire alive. I know it sounds odd, but even though the Empire fell long ago, I still felt like it existed in a small form as long as we original Eternals lived. Silly I suppose.” +“No, it was just something that you believed in. No sillier than any of the gods that people worship.” +“Hrm. The gods. We never were a religious bunch were we? I wonder after I die if I’ll meet any of the gods if they even exist.” + +Brenda gets a bit quiet at that last statement, you don’t mean to upset her, but you’ve got to be realistic at this stage. + +“Brenda, I love you.” You say. +“And I love you.” She says back and squeezes your hand. + +For a moment the two of you are just silent for a while. You’re were getting tired anyway, but the both of you don’t really need to speak to communicate. You know each other better than any two people could. You’ve been through a lot together and this is will be your final journey with her. + +As you begin to get sleepy, you surprise Brenda by making a small chuckle. + +“What’s so funny?” she asks. +“Captain Gruz…he said I would outlive everyone. I’m glad to have proved him wrong.” You say and give Brenda a smile. She manages to smile back through the tears. + +Life is slipping away now. This your final battle against an opponent who has stalked you for over a century. + +“For the Empire…” you whisper as your last battle cry and finally succumb to eternal sleep. + +Your funeral is a big deal. All of Naleen comes out for it, and there is a lot military marching, saluting, and all of that. Various officials give several speeches in your honor about your deeds and accomplishments. Brenda says a few words, but your death has been an emotional drain on her and she saves her strength to get through the day. + +You’re ultimately placed in a fancy tomb with nice statues of you and Brenda in your “warrior prime” just inside the doorway of it. + +A couple months later Brenda joins you in death and she is placed in the same tomb by your side where upon it is sealed, shutting the pair of you in darkness forever. + +Your place in history is remembered best in the nation of Naleen, but as time goes on as time always does, you are remembered less fondly. Eventually there comes a day when the latest rulers have your books burned altogether as to establish their own cult of personality. Your book never reached many other far off lands and if it did, it wasn’t wide spread to cause any significant impact. + +The nation of Naleen goes through various changes of government systems as decades pass by and you and Brenda ultimately become just “names” of past rulers and not much more than that. + +Ultimately when it too ceases to be (Conquered by the great kobold/usksha alliance three hundred years later) you are forgotten altogether. Though the kobolds and usksha still stay far away from the graveyard ruins of your tomb, fearing it to be cursed and believing that disturbance will cause the vengeful spirits of the Eternals to rise up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 70 + +It’s a calm night and you stand outside on the balcony of your palace and look down at the city of Adlen. Brenda comes out to join you. + +“It’s good when everything is going well isn’t it?” Brenda asks. +“It’s definitely going better for us now. Certainly going better than it is for Prime Eternal Edgar too.” +“Always thought that was a ridiculous title. I don’t understand how he’s at a stalemate with the Felkan Kingdom, he was doing so well against them for the longest time.” +“I figured he’s eventually over extend himself, though he’s also had a few personal set backs like several assassination attempts for one. From his last letter he doesn’t sound like he’s doing too well healthwise. He says the last two times he’s been stabbed, the assassin’s knife was coated with a heavy duty poison. The bolt that went into his back was too. If he wasn’t an Eternal he’d probably be dead by now.” +“Well that’s better than Warrick.” +“Yeah, but from that letter Edgar sent, he said Warrick died at the battle of Yaquan six years ago. Regardless of his loyalties, he died like how an Eternal is supposed to die. Edgar will be lucky if he dies from a successful assassination, because it’s sounding like the poison build up in his system might get him first. He’s sick and weak. It’s a shame really, I remember him being so hale and hearty at one time. If I were him I’d probably give up the ruling nonsense, join his soldiers in the next battle and die in one last blaze of glory.” +“Is that how you wish to die? You want to go out in one last blaze of glory?” Brenda asks. +“Eh, sometimes I still think about it, but not really seriously. I guess I’ve finally grown past it.” You laugh. +“Didn’t think that would happen actually.” +“Well, if Naleen starts suffering an unstoppable rebellion I guess I still got a shot at it. I’ll meet the unwashed mobs with sword in hand.” +“Heh, well if that happens I guess I’ll join you, because I’m too old to be moving the capital again.” + +You both smile and hold each other side by side still looking out at the city. Yes, life is good when things are running well. + +Year 75 + +You, Brenda and your elite guards step into Edgar’s palace, and it’s every bit as impressive as you thought it would be. Lots of statues, symbols of war, etc. Certainly a lot of bigger than your humble palace, but then Edgar always was one for overcompensation. You all are taken through the palace to see Edgar, along the way you and Brenda continue to take in some of the sights. + +“Isn’t weird that all those years we served the Empire that this the first time we’ve ever stepped foot into this place?” Brenda says. +“Yeah, Edgar must’ve spent a fortune rebuilding it.” +“Did he ever actually meet the emperor?” +“No he never did. He said he assumed that he either fled or burned up in the fire, by the time he got to the palace. For all we know, maybe there never was an emperor.” +“Just one of life’s mysteries I guess.” + +Eventually you reach the royal bedroom. An older woman is sitting on a chair outside sobbing. She looks regal. You wonder if this is “Eva” that he’s referred to a couple times in his letters. She’s not exactly his queen since she’s human, but you know she is definitely his companion. Another older muscular man with a stern expression is standing nearby pacing. When you arrive, he frowns even more. + +“Oh so you two decided to come after all. A pity.” He says. +“And who the hell are you exactly?” you ask. +“Hmm, not surprised a deserter like you doesn’t remember me. My name is Rissok and I served under you during the Empire riots. I saw you kill my friend in cold blood. A true Eternal who served with honor!” + +“Oooooh now I remember. You and your other buddy were looting houses while Felding was attempting to rape a woman. Yeah, real honor there.” You say. +“Don’t mock me! You are only here because the Prime allows it! If it were up to me, I would have you labeled as a traitor and have you killed!” + +At this point your guards take up a defensive stance and Rissok’s do likewise. + +“Well if you’re going to make a move, better do it quick.” You say. +“Stop it! Stop it please! My Edgar is dying! Can’t we have one moment without murder and killing?” the woman sobs. + +At this point Rissok storms off without another word, the guards stick around and tell you that you and Brenda may enter at any time, but your own guards must stay outside. Before you do, Brenda addresses the woman. + +“We apologize, we did not mean to cause you distress. Are you Lady Eva by any chance?” +“(sniff) Yes. Yes I am.” +“Edgar’s spoken highly of you in his letters.” Brenda says which causes a slight smile on her face. +“I know that he’s better than me in everyway being an Eternal, yet he shows such compassion and sweetness by making me, a non-eternal, his only companion. I don’t know what I ever did to deserve such an honor, but I will always be grateful for it.” + +Brenda asks her if she wants to come in too, but she says she has already said her goodbyes and that he wants to see you both alone when you arrive. Having no other questions, you both enter the bedroom. + +When you see Edgar, he’s lying in his bed and looking completely unwell. He’s pale and his face has a gaunt looking appearance. You can’t even believe this is the same man you fought along side at Fort Defiance. + +“Edgar?” you ask just to make sure. +“(wheeze) ah…you both came…I knew you would. (cough cough) There isn’t much time…I trust you’ve read my letter?” +“Yes.” +“Well then you know that when my death comes, anarchy will ensue.” +“Don’t you have a successor?” +“I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but I imagine Brenda has and that’s we can’t have children.” + +You look at Brenda and she nods and mentions she learned that with Roldan when they were together. It’s never been a topic you’ve brought up, but you always had your suspicions. Edgar continues his speech. + +“We Eternals seem to be sterile or barren. I’ve had people try to look into this problem, but they haven’t come up with anything yet. It would seem what makes us superior, takes away our ability to reproduce. Maybe it’s nature balancing itself out, so that we don’t take over the world like so many of our younger eternals seem to want to do. Anyway (cough cough) I’ve drawn up official forms for the only two I think could be proper successors…” + +You already know where Edgar is going with this. + +“Oh no…don’t say that’s why you dragged us out here…Edgar they aren’t going to listen to us! We aren’t even ED citizens!” +“This is rather unrealistic Edgar.” Brenda adds. + +“That doesn’t matter! You’re still Eternals! (wheeze cough) They’ll listen more likely than you believe, why do you think I always spoke so highly of you two? The younger ones will most likely follow without question, your major opposition will probably be the second generation…but there aren’t too many of them left, you could easily purge them all if you had to. Please…I tried to build something here…(cough) but I can’t go on any longer. The only people who can guide the Eternal Dominion into something worthier are you two. I’m asking not just as a dying man or friend …but as a (cough cough) a fellow Eternal…” + +You and Brenda look at each other and you both know your answer. Edgar’s trying to guilt you into this mess, but it’s just not going to work. This plan of his is doomed to fail and you know it. Every high ranking Eternal is probably going to be vying for power. And you and Brenda have your own nation, your own lives, and you’ve told Edgar this before, but it’s time to tell him one last time. + +“Edgar, we’re not accepting this position. First of all it’s not realistic despite what you want to believe and I think deep down you know that. Second of all, these are your final moments Edgar. Don’t worry about what you accomplished and if it’ll last. Just be proud of it now and spend your last moments with your wife or whatever you consider her. That’s who you need to be concerned about.” + +Edgar hacks and coughs up blood and spits it into a nearby bucket and struggles to breathe, but manages to answer you. + +“Very well…you’ve made your point. And you’re probably right. You usually were. (wheeze) Bring my…my wife in. I do wish to spend the last moments with her…and farewell…my Eternal siblings.” +“Farewell Edgar.” You say with a nod. Brenda says goodbye as well before you both leave. + +You step outside and tell Eva that Edgar wants to spend his remaining time left with her. She seems happy with this idea though of course still upset. She runs in and you, Brenda and the rest of your group are escorted out and back to the carriage that brought you here. + +When you finally get back to Naleen, you and Brenda are both glad to be home, though you both talk for quite awhile about this recent event and how it’s odd to think that you both are going to be the only original Eternals left soon. + +A couple days later you get the news that Edgar has died and that the new leadership of the Eternal Dominion as of now is uncertain. Fortunately you don’t really have to worry about it. Naleen is strong enough and far enough away that any sort of chaotic attack from the new ruler is very unlikely. You suspect that most of the fighting will be within the ED itself, or pushing ahead against the Felkan Kingdom. + +In the meantime you wonder about your own legacy and if you’ll be remembered on any meaningful level. Brenda isn’t really concerned about it; she figures you’ll both be in the history books as the first rulers of Naleen if nothing else. That sounds fine, but you wonder if that would necessarily be the case, after all you never met the emperor, you don’t even know his name or really anything about him except what you were taught as a child and that was most definitely all propaganda. You know even less about his predecessors. History may very well remember the Empire, but information on its rulers is either going to be sketchy or non-existent in another century. Edgar will probably be forgotten in even less time. + +You get the idea that a solid written record is in order. + +“Since when are you a writer?” Brenda asks. +“I’m not, but maybe we can work on this together, I mean you are part of this too.” +“Well that’s certainly true. Okay, so how did you want to go about this?” +> Tell the whole story +While creating a book for all the masses to read and absorb might help solidify a remembrance of you and Brenda, you’re thinking on a bigger picture. + +“Wait, you want to tell your experiences from the past seventy five years?” +“Well, just the most memorable ones. Obviously I’m not going to focus on the days where I just sat at a desk reading skirmish reports or what I was eating on a particular day.” +“Do you realize how long that’s going to take?” +“I know it’s not going to be in one night. I want to tell the whole story or at least as much as I can.” +“That’s pretty ambitious. I figured you were just going to start from Nalin’s independence from the Empire at most.” +“See that’s just it, I, WE didn’t just suddenly appear when we took official control of Nalin and later Naleen. We’ve got a lot of history behind us. We’re Eternals and we’re the last of our kind. There should be some sort of lasting record of us.” +“Last of our kind? There’s a whole nation of them if you remember.” Brenda reminds you. +“Yes and that’s exactly my point. Do you think it’s going to last? Do you think any of new generations are going to be stable enough to think beyond their own petty power? I’d wager that they don’t even continue the method to create anymore of them, now that Edgar’s dead. He was the only one who was trying to leave a lasting legacy beyond himself. The rest of them? They’re going to wonder why they’re creating potential rivals and no longer bother.” +“You might be right about that. So, you weren’t interested in creating this in a more positive light for people to remember you?” +“Ha ha, I’m pretty sure such a task is impossible. No matter how much propaganda I churned out for the masses, I’m certain it wouldn’t make the citizens start believing I’m a nice person. Even the military doesn’t think such a thing. This isn’t going to be about making me look good. I’ll let history decide that, but this written account will at least provide a solid guide from which they can judge.” +“But won’t it still be biased?” +“Probably, but given that I want to include everything, I’m still not portraying myself as some benevolent ruler with a pleasant background. Now you said you would help, did you still wish to? I mean I want to include everything, but I guess I can leave out anything that portrays you in a negative way.” +“My love, I was right along side you on your less popular decisions, in fact I made a lot of them myself. I’m not innocent and I would imagine the average citizen wouldn’t consider me a nice person either. Well, maybe nicer than you, but you’re a hard act to follow.” Brenda says with a smile. + +You and Brenda immediately get to work on your project. You and her take turns doing the writing for the most part, but the pressures of ruling sometimes get in the way, so it takes longer than it probably would have if you both didn’t have other responsibilities. + +Your ambitious project takes more than a few years to complete, but when it is finally finished you definitely feel a sense of accomplishment. It may not be conquering an enemy or territory or anything like that, but if this goes the way you want, you will have achieved much more than simple victory. You will have achieved a kind of immortality. + +The huge tome immediately copied several times when it is complete. The great thing about being a ruler is you’ve got underlings that can do this. You make sure to keep the original writing for yourself. The first copies go out to a few Naleen schools, libraries and other places of higher learning where you decree that it is to become required reading. (Another great thing about being in charge!) + +In time there probably isn’t a single citizen that hasn’t at least heard of the book, if not read it. There is a slight backlash to “telling all” however. Some students, professors, intellectuals and other academics take the opportunity to use examples from the book to prove what tyrants you are and Brenda are and how if Naleen is ever going to achieve its maximum potential then relics of tyranny need to be gotten rid of. An increase in protests about silly “freedoms” and “rights” pop up a little more. + +An annoying side effect to be sure, but a predictable one. Executing them all would only prove their point of course, but you really don’t disagree with them in the first place. You and Brenda ARE relics of tyranny. In fact you stated as much in the book. You were created by a government obsessed with control and molded into Eternals to enforce that control. You can’t help what you are and you’re not going to apologize for any of your actions. + +In any case, if it wasn’t this, you would’ve gotten protests about something, it’s been a while. Besides you have more than your share of intellectual defenders as well your loyal military, so you’re not worried about revolutions anytime soon.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As much as you might like to help Warrick out, you just really aren’t in a position to do so on any meaningful level. Breaking your trade routes with the Eternal Dominion is just foolish. You tell Brenda you’ll break the news this time. + +You both enter the room where Warrick awaits your answer. + +“Sorry Warrick, while we do understand your troubles, we can’t help you. What you’re asking for is too much and we see no benefit for us or Nalin in general.” + +Warrick’s face doesn’t drop and he doesn’t get any angrier, All in all, he takes your response a lot better than Edgar did. + +“Very well. I shall tell my superiors that you are not interested in any sort of alliance with us. I hope that one day this may change. I suppose I will also take my leave now, sorry to have bothered the both of you, but it was still good to see you again.” He says and leaves immediately. + +You and Brenda remark on he was probably more disappointed than he let on, but what’s done is done and you’ve all made your choices now. The pair of you go back to bed and try to get some sleep. + +Year 56 + +“We’ve got to do something about this epidemic. If this keeps up we’re not going to have a population left to rule over!” Brenda says. +“Well so far the problem has hit the eastern territory of Nalin yet. We’ve scoured the land for healers, medics and a few hedge wizards and they’re doing all they can, but this thing is really bad in a few of the towns. I’ve quarantined all of the major areas where this plague is taking place, but understandably a lot the soldiers aren’t exactly keen on their duties there mainly because they don’t want to get sick either. The only ones who aren’t kicking up much of a fuss about it are soldiers with families in those towns.” You reply. +“(Sigh) Shit. I’ve talked to all of the advisors and nobody has a clue where, who and why this thing might’ve started. You got any ideas?” +“Unfortunately the only one I can think of just a hunch, and I’d rather not believe it. I think Warrick, or at least the Felkan Kingdom had something to do with it. For all we know they could’ve had saboteurs in here for years planning this.” +“If it was them, I hope Edgar rips them a new asshole now that he’s at war with them.” +“Be that as it may, I’m still hoping that wasn’t the case, not because I don’t want to believe a former friend could do this to us, but more because it doesn’t reflect well on my duties to protect the nation. I mean if the Felkan Kingdom had saboteurs here, how was it that I didn’t see it until now?” +“You can’t start doubting yourself, we need to focus on the problem at hand first.” +“You’re right of course. Well as I see it, if we really want to stop the plague, we need to kill everyone in the quarantined areas, then cleanse everything with fire.” +“Wait, hold on. There’s no other way? Can’t we just have more medics and healers transferred to those places?” +“I don’t see what good that would do. From the reports a lot of these people are practically dead or dying as it is. It doesn’t do any good for them to linger and possibly get others sick. Better to just kill them now and save the medics to observe the places that only have a few sick people.” +“You do realize that something like this is not going to be popular right? I mean are the soldiers even going to be willing to do such a thing?” +“Well we try pretty hard to keep up the old ways of Empire indoctrination, I don’t think we should have major problems, though I suppose those with families might protest (Sigh) I guess we’ll have to take care of them as well.” +“This isn’t sounding like a great idea. Maybe we should just keep the quarantine and let them all slowly die off. We could always say we’re looking for a cure, and whether one comes or not, the problem will take care of itself.” Brenda suggests. +“The problem with that plan is we’re diverting soldiers from more important duties and continuing to risk lives that can still be useful to Nalin.” You say. + +You and Brenda weigh the pros and cons of your limited choices. +> Let the healers find a cure +Killing everyone might have its benefits, but perhaps a less bloodthirsty approach would be for the best right now. You and Brenda decide to keep the quarantine up and just encourage the medics to work harder on a cure. + +The next few months are relatively calm, there’s a lot of grumbling, but nothing serious yet. No cure has been found yet and while the less affected areas seem to be stabilized, the ones in the quarantine aren’t getting any worse either. This is somewhat of a problem, part of the hope is that they would ultimately just all die off if a cure isn’t found. As it stands, the ones that have managed to survive the plague are now just carriers which makes them a lot more dangerous. + +A few healers try their hand at various cures, but nothing works, if anything you just lose more physicians as they too become infected and have to stay inside. The situation gets worse when you have escapees and the soldiers stationed outside the quarantine area start to show symptoms of the plague and have to be shoved in as well. Eventually you station all those elves you made orphans (now proper Nalin soldiers) all those years ago around the quarantined area, as non-humans seem to be more resistant. You even “deputize” kobolds as soldiers as well as they’re virtually immune. This isn’t a popular decision, but purging the infected areas would be even less so. You hold out hope that a cure will be found soon. + +Year 60 + +You sit quietly contemplating everything that has transpired for the past four years. + +When the plague had managed to re-establish itself throughout Nalin, and worse in eastern Nalin and it became apparent that no one was close to a cure, you went through with your original plan of cleansing the infected areas. There were still protests against you carrying out such a grim plan, but such dissent was silenced. However it was a bit too late at that point. + +Several towns in eastern Nalin claimed you and Brenda were unfit as rulers for letting this happen and threatened to secede. Resistance probably would’ve been crushed with ease, but with a shortage of troops due to the plague, general dislike of your rule and others just taking advantage of the coming chaos, it wasn’t as easy as it could’ve been. Opposition was crushed, but ultimately large sections of Nalin had either been ravaged by the plague or civil war. Nalin wasn’t so much of a nation anymore than it was a collection of towns in a war torn land. + +Eventually the strain of holding so much land with the troop shortage you now suffered was too much and territory had to be abandoned anyway. After some restructuring, the nation of Nalin was much smaller than it was when the Empire ruled over it. It was a small poor miserable country, with equally poor miserable citizens. Edgar has offered to absorb Nalin into the Eternal Dominion and give you a place at his side, but you’re still too prideful to except such an offer, even if you know he means well. + +“Brooding again, dear?” Brenda says tapping you on the shoulder. +“Just temporarily lost in thought.” You answer. +“You figure out how to re-conquer all our lost territory yet?” +“Not quite, but I’m working on it.” +“Well I wouldn’t worry about it. I think we had a good run, we should just look at other options.” +“Brenda are you seriously reconsidering joining the Eternal Dominion, because…” +“No, but there are other options.” +“You mean just focusing on building up what we have left?” +“Well that’s certainly one possibility, but quite frankly I’m not interested in that either. This whole ruling business…it’s not fun anymore. I question if it ever was at least for me anyway. You sort of made it tolerable, but I think I’m done.” + +You get a little worried by this statement. + +“You’re not talking about suicide are you?” +“What? No! Sheesh, I’m not ready for the grave, but it is something that is much closer than it was in the past. I mean is fighting over this little piece of shitty land and running it really what I want to be doing in my twilight years? Not really, life’s short enough as it is. I’ve come to that conclusion and that’s why I’m leaving all of this behind. I’m guessing you might feel a little different about it though.” +“You’re damn right I feel different about it! We can’t just run away from this! We’ve got to re-establish our rule! I know it’ll take a while, but it can be done!” + +Brenda smiles and touches your face. + +“For what purpose? I hate to tell you this, but you’re not young anymore either.” +“I…I know that!” +“Do you? Because sometime I wonder. I love you and you’re still a great warrior and you’re probably still better than most men half your age, but you can’t go around thinking you’re invincible anymore. There are guns now you know, someone could just assassinate you from a few feet away and not even engage you in combat. The days of the Empire are over, you have to realize that.” +“I know that too, Brenda.” +“And that’s why you’re frustrating to deal with sometimes, because you DO know it, yet sometimes you completely lapse into the mindset of the good old days. Look, you know I love you, and I know you love me, but I can’t do this mini empire shit anymore.” +“So what’s your solution then?” +“Well, I was thinking we just leave.” +“And go where?” +“I dunno, someplace else. Further east I guess, someplace far away from this entire region though. I mean there’s probably a great big world out there, and we’ve just been stuck in a small portion of it.” +“Hmm, so you’re suggesting we just live like vagabonds and wanderers with no set home?” +“Well maybe for a time, but who knows maybe we’ll eventually find some place to settle down.” +“Wait a minute you’re going on about how we’re not young anymore, yet you’re advocating wandering the wilderness like some young snot nosed adventurers. Sounds like you’re talking out both sides of your mouth…” +“Okay fine, you don’t have to come with me, you can sit here and play brooding overlord until somebody either assassinates you or the unwashed masses storm the palace.” Brenda says turning away and walking. + +“Hold on! Wait! (sigh) Look, I know what you’re saying and you’ve got a point. It’s just really hard for me to give all this up. I’d feel like I would be abandoning my post and I did that once already with the Empire. And while it was the best decision I ever made, it still stays with me like a black spot, and I’m sure you know that. Abandoning Nalin is like history repeating itself all over again.” +“Remember what you told Edgar when he visited? There was nothing any of us could’ve done. It was a doomed mission to begin with. You did your best and that’s all anyone could’ve done. Even an Eternal.” + +You give a slight smile and nod. + +“Okay, Brenda. Let’s get out of here.” + +You and Brenda pack some equipment and take your leave of your rulership of Nalin. You don’t even bother assigning a successor or anything like that, you decide whoever wants it bad enough can hold it if they have the desire. You and Brenda head east and stick to the wilderness when traveling through old Nalin territory, eventually you pass through it and you’re exploring new land. Living off the land is quite easy for you and the freedom is a nice change of pace. After a few months, you don’t miss Nalin at all, and are just glad to be spending more quality time with Brenda. + +In the years that follow the pair of you wander, seeing new sights and getting into a few skirmishes a long the way. Eventually the pair of you do settle down close to a small village in a far away land where you live out the remainder of your lives in complete obscurity and peace.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 55 + +You and Brenda now rule the nation of Nalin as a married couple. There has been some issue on what your official titles are now. The simplest choices would be emperor and empress or king and queen. Eventually Brenda settled for imperatrix, which would officially make you imperator, though you still go by general for the most part. + +In any case life has been good. You don’t even mind that things have been slow since you conquered all those tribals in the east. You’ve been taking a slightly more active role in running the nation from an administrative point of view, but sometimes you still long for the day of a good battle. When that day comes you’ve also tried to keep up on the changing times of changing warfare. While the days of close combat are far from over, if the Eternal Dominion is starting to slowly incorporate firearms into their ranks, then you better do likewise if only to maintain a show of strength. + +The ED isn’t hostile though and you maintain a good trading relationship with them. Edgar still hopes you’re going to join him one day, especially since you know he’s got designs on going to war with the Felkan Kingdom (You gave him some friendly advice to not bother with invading Rask). + +He’d probably like you to at least be involved in a joint military operation with him, but you think he’s over extending himself and the Felkan Kingdom is no pushover. It’s not exactly like you’re near the Felkan Kingdom as far as location is concerned either. All you’d be doing is having soldiers die in a war that doesn’t even directly benefit your nation. + +That being said, Nalin hasn’t sided with the Felkan Kingdom either in any way. Again, due to your location, you’ve had minimal contact with them. Brenda thought about allying with them in the past, but that was never seriously considered (Good thing too). Somehow though you imagine you’re going to get dragged into this saber rattling between the Eternal Dominion and the Felkan Kingdom. + +Funny how that feeling turns out to be true. + +Late one night you and Brenda are awakened from your sleep. Some envoy from the Felkan Kingdom has sudden decided to show up in the middle of the night. Demanding to see the pair of you and claiming it’s very urgent. You and Brenda don’t get much sleep as it is, so you’re inclined to tell your soldiers to just shoot him and go back to bed, but you’ve got a good idea of who it is. + +“You really think it’s him?” Brenda ask. +“You really think it isn’t? It was only a matter of time. Ugh, I guess we better get this over with.” + +You shout at the guard behind the door to hold the envoy in the meeting room and keep a close eye on him until you and Brenda get there. After grumbling and getting dress you and Brenda head to the meeting room where you see a familiar face. He’s missing an eye, all of his hair and his face has a few more winkles and scars on it now, but you still recognize him. + +“Warrick, you better have a damn good reason for waking us up in the middle of the night.” You say. +“…you aren’t surprised it’s me?” +“Not really, I actually thought you’d show up sooner, and how the hell did you manage to join the Felkan Kingdom anyway?” +“It’s a long story…but well anyway, I’m glad to see you both. I was surprised to hear about your marriage. Didn’t think that…” +“Warrick, I’m tired as well. It’s not easy running a nation and I’ve been doing it even longer than my husband has, so get to the damn point of the visit or let this wait until tomorrow.” Brenda demands rubbing one of her eyes. + +Warrick looks a little hurt by your remarks, but he gets on with it. + +“Very well, to business. The Felkan Kingdom wants an alliance with you.” +“Yeah sort of figured that. Anything else?” you ask. +“Erm, no, but…” +“Okay then, the answer is no. We can talk more about old times tomorrow, if you want. Good night.” Brenda says starting to turn around to go back to bed. +“Hey wait! No? Just like that?! You don’t even want to consider the benefits?” Warrick asks. +“What benefits? If we ally with the Felkan Kingdom, all it’s going to do is piss off the Eternal Dominion who we have a good relationship with diplomatically and tradewise. What is the Felkan Kingdom going to offer?” Brenda replies. +“How the fact that we’re more likely to leave you alone after the war with the Eternal Dominion is over?” +“Warrick…Warrick…you should know threats aren’t going to sway us.” You remark. +“What?! NO! I meant, argh look. What I’m saying is if the unfortunate should happen and the Eternal Dominion wins don’t you think that they’ll try to invade you next?” +“I suppose it’s possible yes.” +“Whereas if the Felkan Kingdom wins, we have no intention on even expanding our borders.” +“Probably true, but that still doesn’t help us during the war. A war that is really between you and the ED.” +“I can’t believe I’m trying to convince YOU of all people to go to war. I would’ve thought you would’ve jumped at this chance!” Warrick says in a raised tone. +“Things change Warrick, and just because I’m not jumping through your hoops doesn’t mean I’ve lost a taste for battle. But I’m thinking on a grander scale now. Going to war with the Eternal Dominion doesn’t do us or Nalin any good. It’s just going to result in dead soldiers at best. We’ve found that our continued expansion eastward is much better in building up the country. Maximum gain with minimum losses.” You say. + +Warrick paces a bit and sputters. He obviously thought this was going to go better. + +“So that’s it then huh? You just take Edgar’s side over mine. I thought you didn’t like him anyway.” +“Warrick, it’s not about taking sides. If you haven’t noticed we’re not exactly allied with the ED either. We trade with them and are on friendly terms, but that’s out of convenience more than anything. Trust me, Edgar’s been trying to get us to join for years. I don’t know what you’re even worried about, the Eternal Dominion is formidable I’m sure, but the Felkan Kingdom survived a war with the Empire. I’m guessing you should be able to handle the ED.” +“I don’t know if we can.” He calmly states. + +There’s a moment of silence where you weren’t expecting him to say such a thing so blatantly like that. + +“Look, I didn’t want to say anything. The Felkan Kingdom is what I serve now and I serve it to the best of my abilities as I did the Empire. To do anything less would be a failure as an Eternal on my part.” +“But?” +“But I see the weaknesses that we have and I can’t ignore them. It’s not public knowledge to anyone outside the kingdom, but we’re also suffering a large gnoll invasion from the west. It caught us completely by surprise. The Felkan Kingdom is a mighty nation, but right now it’s straining its resources just to stay alive. A war with the ED…and we all know it’s coming, could break us. The funny thing is I feel like I’m in the Empire all over again. You know during the bad times.” +“I think they were ALL bad times Warrick. We just made the best of them.” Brenda says. +“Perhaps. (sigh) I guess I can’t convince you ally with us, I mean you’ve got a good thing going on here and you shouldn’t wreck it. I’m glad. Glad that some of us are doing well. But couldn’t you at least break off your trade routes? I mean that would at least cause Edgar’s attention to be diverted. He might suspect you’re up to something and not attack the Felkan Kingdom. At least not right away. It might be enough time for us to put up a better defense.” +“Yeah and he might also attack us instead.” Brenda remarks. +“I don’t think he will, because then he has to divert his own soldiers and resources and then he’ll be worried that we will attack. He can’t fight a two front war, even Edgar’s smart enough not to risk that. And that’s if he dares fighting you in the first place.” +“That’s a big if, there Warrick.” You say. + +You and Brenda tell Warrick you’ll both discuss this in a little more detail outside. He says he understands and will await your decision. + +You and Brenda don’t have too much to talk about really, since it’s basically coming down to helping out a former comrade in arms and starting a possible war with another one or avoiding the situation entirely. Brenda is for staying neutral; oddly you’re actually of two minds of this. +> Convince Brenda to help Warrick +Maybe it isn’t the most tactically sound decision, but he’s still an Eternal and you feel like you should give him a fighting chance. It takes some convincing, but Brenda eventually agrees with you, but she still thinks this isn’t one of your better ideas. You both go back inside to tell Warrick the news. + +“Okay, Warrick after talking it over, we’ll help you indirectly by breaking trade with the Eternal Dominion.” + +Warrick’s face doesn’t show a great degree of happiness, but one more of relief.. + +“Thank you. Thank you both, my friends. This might not seem like much, but it still helps. I’ll never forget what you’ve done here.” +“Yeah, yeah, you better go before I change my mind.” Brenda says. + +Warrick, not wishing to wear out his welcome he bids you both goodbye and takes his leave. Brenda remarks again that she sees no good coming of this, but what’s done is done and you’ve all made your choices now. The pair of you go back to bed and try to get some sleep. + +Year 56 + +“Great that’s all we need a war with the Eternal Dominion while we have a fucking epidemic going on right now!” Brenda shouts throwing a paperweight against the wall in frustration. + +When the trade routes were broken with the Eternal Dominion, Edgar did not take it well, and while it was always a risk, you didn’t think he’d actually wage a two front war over it. He immediately suspected you both were in league with each other and declared war on you both. + +You would probably fare better against the ED, but a terrible plague has hit Nalin pretty hard around the same time. Nobody knows exactly where it came from or how it spread, but the common thought is that the Eternal Dominion has something to do with it. You on the other hand entertain another idea, one that you’d rather not believe and that’s Warrick had something to do with it. + +Destabilize your country and weaken it to a point where the Eternal Dominion can destroy it completely while they also waste their own manpower at the same time. Possibly even spread the plague to their own lands too. It’s a good plan. + +If that really is the case, you question your judgment and beginning to wonder if you’re even fit to command anything anymore. You know Brenda has been a little distant towards you lately, however to her credit she has not blamed you for the current situation. Though she wouldn’t since she’d only blame herself as well for agreeing to break trade with the ED to begin with. + +In any case, right now is not really the time to second guess or lament possible past mistakes, a serious situation rears it’s ugly head right now and it must be take care of. + +“Well, the plague hasn’t hit eastern Nalin yet and we’ve drafted every healer, medic and hedge wizard we can find to help cure this blight. We’ve managed to quarantine the towns and cities that have been hit the hardest. The problem with that though is we’ve had to redistribute soldiers to those places where we could desperately use them on the northern borders.” You explain. +“Yes, I’m aware of the situation, what’s your solution?” Brenda demands. +“Kill everyone in the quarantine and cleanse it with fire. No more people, no more plague and we can focus on the war.” + +Brenda chuckles. + +“Figures you’d suggest something like that.” +“Well I’m coming up with the most efficient plan, waiting around for the docs to come up with a cure isn’t really time we can afford.” You say. +“And massacring entire settlements isn’t going to endear us to anyone. You know what? To hell with it, I’m leaving this up to you, I’m sick of running this fucking country anyway…” Brenda says and walks out the room. + +You aren’t exactly sure of what to make of that response, but you go through with your cleansing plan since you can’t afford to wait around for some cure that may never come. + +Killing everyone has worked for you on several occasions in the past, no reason to change tactic now. First thing you do is get every remaining “old guard” officer that’s still serving since the days of the Empire and have them put in charge of this operation. You know they won’t even question this command coming from you. Then you tell them to go through their personnel rosters to see who is going to be up for this grim task. You personally suggest including all of those elves you made into orphans years ago. While they may all be good indoctrinated soldiers now, you think they wouldn’t hesitate at a chance to kill some humans and would be good candidates for this job. Besides, elves seem to be more resistant to the plague anyway. + +Three entire towns are put to the sword, gun and torch until there is nothing left, but burned corpses and hollowed out buildings. In keeping with non-humans being seemingly less affected by the plague, you have kobolds remove the bodies and clean out what they can. They’re more than happy to do this as they get the chance to loot some stuff for their own impoverished reservation you’ve set aside for them. + +This action causes a great outcry and you even have to execute several soldiers who took up arms against you during the cleansing. Many Nalin citizens aren’t happy with the fact that you’ve implemented several non-humans in helping with this massacre as well. Indeed some begin calling you their inhuman “Eternal overlords” and wonder if they aren’t already under the rule of the Eternal Dominion. + +As far as the plague goes, you did successfully wipe it out from being an ongoing danger. Medics, healers and the like are able to focus their attentions on the places where it’s less of a problem and eventually it is gone completely. + +As for everything else, western Nalin, is in horrible condition and soldiers from eastern Nalin have to be brought in to reinforce the northern borders which have now changed hands a bit as the ED army has pushed you back. Eastern Nalin is in good shape as it was spared the plague and isn’t in any immediate danger from the fighting, but there are rumors of the population aren’t happy. + +With the plague gone though, you dig in ready to focus on the Eternal Dominion invasion. +> Years pass... +Year 60 + +“Fort Glory has fallen sir.” A disheveled messenger tells you while you look over a map of Nalin in your tent. +“Doesn’t matter, it was no longer a priority anymore.” You say not looking up. +“So you’re still going through with the plan involving the kobold sappers?” +“Yes. I figure it’ll take a few days for those eternals get settled in their new conquest and then that fort crumbles right underneath them. A shame, I used to like that fort, but this is war.” +“Sir, I don’t mean to question your orders, but how can you trust those little scaley bastards? They’re little more than animals.” +“That may be, but they’re animals that are more scared of me than anything else, and that’s all that’s important. Speaking of which how do things fare in eastern Nalin?” +“All major settlements are under martial law, lots of structures destroyed, several dissidents executed and there are reports of rebels in the wilderness, but most of it is still under our control.” +“Good enough for now I suppose. Tell Captain Yasil, that I want her to mount an attack on Camp Conquest in a tomorrow. We’re going to make our major offensive soon and I want her to weaken that camp as much as possible.” +“…you mean that large eternal camp in northern Nalin? The main one? That’s suicide! Her company is only at half strength from the last mission you sent her on!” the messenger exclaims. +“Her sacrifice will be remembered. That will be all.” You say still not looking up. + +The messenger sounds like he would like to say something else, but realizes he better not and just leaves. Smart move on his part. You would’ve killed him. You have little patience for hesitation nowadays, especially since you’ve got nothing left to lose. + +You rub your eyes and stop looking at the map of Nalin and sit down to take a short break. You’re tired, but you don’t remember the last time you had a good night’s sleep. You look over at a portrait you had made of Brenda a long time ago before this war ever broke out. An image of her in happier times. + +You often speak to the portrait, during times like this and tonight is no different. + +“You were right, shouldn’t have broken that trade agreement with the ED (Sigh) just wish I would’ve been the one that paid for that mistake instead of you. Though I suppose I paid for it, when some suicidal asshole shot you in the head two years ago.” + +You focus more attention on the portrait + +“Maybe you’re better off…I mean you were getting increasingly unhappy. Heh, who knows maybe you would’ve just left altogether. You were right about ruling not being any fun too, I’ve been trying to do your job and mine, but I find myself just not caring about much lately. I’m half ready to just get up and leave it all behind, but I still feel the need to control and regain what has been lost. Maybe it’s that old Empire syndrome popping up again. I dunno. Recently I’ve just been focusing on the war. It’s about the only slight pleasure I get anymore. Sometimes I wade into battles, bones creaking, joints aching and five times slower and weaker than I once was, yet do it anyway. I guess I’m hoping to at least die a warrior’s death, but somehow I still manage to survive. The war’s not over yet though, so maybe there’s still time right?” + +You pick up the portrait and look directly into Brenda’s face. + +“I don’t know if you still loved me near the end of everything, but I still loved you. Still do. Maybe I’ll be with you soon.” You say. + +You put down the portrait and lie down on your bed. You won’t get a good night’s sleep, but you don’t need it. You just need a quick recharge before you go back to the business of war. + +The next couple of day pass and you’re ready for your final push. You have no idea if you’ll actually succeed in driving out the Eternal Dominion, but you’re ready to put an end to this one way or another. You lead the battalions to the north. + +When you arrive to the frontlines, you receive a report that Fort Glory completely collapsed and killed a couple of companies of eternals that were planning their next move from there. Kobolds took advantage of the chaos and finished off the wounded. Captain Yasil’s mission was also somewhat successful, you see the smoke in the distance from the main ED camp. The smell of gunpowder from the cannons lingers in the air; hundreds of trenches are filled with the living and the dead on both sides. + +You heard that this is how the battlefield looked when the Empire fought the Felkan Kingdom, seems like this is going to be standard for war, until something else changes in the way people kill others. You remember when things were much simpler though. The funny thing is that the Felkan Kingdom is despite being accustomed to this sort of fighting and more technologically advanced, they’re apparently having a much worse time holding off the Eternal Dominion than you have, though you imagine that they’re getting more of the brunt of the combat. + +You are approached by several of your officers; they say their respective companies are ready to advance, if you give the word. You nod and tell them the attack will commence. + +You watch as thousands of your soldiers run forward to kill and die for you. If there has always been one consistency with you, is you ability is muster up a shitload of people to do that, even when you’re not popular. And you’re REALLY not popular with the average Nalin citizen right now. + +But ungratefulness is something you’re used to. You experience the same thing in Rask, after you destroyed all the barbarian tribes. Peasants complain and know nothing of real sacrifice. Not like you do. + +The battle is going strong and a cannon ball from the other side even crashes a few feet away from you. One of your majors advises that you should step further back from the battle so you stay out of harm’s way. + +But maybe you don’t want to; in fact maybe you want to just end it all right now. +> Walk into the battle +You look out at the battlefield from your horse and get off of it. This is it. The time is right. The major is screaming at you to take cover and asking you what do you think you’re doing walking forward into the battlefield like you’re doing, but you ignore him. + +No sooner have you taken number of steps forward and large explosion occurs behind you causing you to fall forward. You push yourself up and look behind to see a small crater where the major and your horse once stood. Your head hurts and seems to be bleeding, but you shake off the cobwebs and crawl into the nearest trench. + +The stench of death fills your nose immediately. You see several dead soldiers with various fatal wounds. A few living ones are looking for their next opportunity to crawl forward to the next trench. They see you and are quite surprised. + +“Gen..general?” one of them says. +“What are you lot waiting for? There’s a great big war out there just dying to be won!” +“Uh, well the enemy cannons are…” +“No excuses! Come on, follow me! I’ll lead you to fucking victory!” you shout excitedly and crawl out of the trench. + +The soldiers are a little reluctant to follow you at first, but they do so anyway. Explosions and gunfire are all around you as you crawl forward. The danger you’ve put yourself in right now is giving you a rush. You make your way to the next trench where you encounter even more of your soldiers who are in close combat with the enemy eternals. You help out with your own superior swordsmanship. + +“That’s how you do it!” you shout as you run your sword through the neck of an enemy. “Eternals my fucking ass! Back in my day, a single eternal could’ve killed the lot of you! And that Eternal would’ve been me!” you tell your men who are a little unnerved by your remarks. + +“But fortunately I’m helping!” you shout with a slight giggle and motion them to follow you forward. + +You crawl from trench to trench through mud, blood, guts, bodies, and all around nastiness and you love every moment of it. The soldiers you’ve “picked up” along the way believe you’ve gone completely mad, but they continue to follow since you’re actually making progress and your combat abilities still surpass their own. + +You don’t even know how many eternals and “regular” soldiers you’ve killed so far, but you aren’t keeping track. All that you do know is that you still haven’t reached your goal. Along with completely disregarding your safety, you start to become a little delusional as well, you end up shouting at your men that they need to watch out for possible wendigos in the area confusing the hell out of them. + +“Why isn’t there snow? There’s usually snow in Rask.” You mumble to yourself. + +You see the enemy camp in sight and there is already some fighting going on there, but by the Emperor, you are NOT going to miss this fight! + +“For the Empire!” you shout, which at this point your soldier aren’t even surprised by whatever you yell about now. They’re too busy thanking their gods that you managed to lead them to the enemy camp with no losses. + +Camp Conquest is in chaos. There is fighting everywhere and you jump right in the middle of it. You proceed with your bloodthirsty adrenaline crusade. You suffer several wounds that probably would’ve stopped a normal man your age in their tracks and even you’re starting to feel the effects. Fortunately you’ve still got your small personal troop behind you to take up the slack. + +“Look general there’s the commander’s tent!” one of them shouts. It would appear your enthusiasm has finally rubbed off. + +With sword cuts across your face, a bleeding gash on your left arm, your armor half destroyed and a bullet in one of your legs, you continue forward. You’re starting to feel a little wobbly though. + +“These Eternals will pay for their betrayal of the Emperor!” you mutter. + +The enemy commander with some of his own staff stands around several dead bodies and upon seeing you he pats his mace in his hand waiting for you to arrive. As you get closer, there’s something somewhat familiar about him. Like you knew him, but he’s older now. + +He bashes the face in of one of your soldiers before clashing with you. He starts to babble about how he’s wanted revenge on you for killing his friend twenty-five years ago. He kicks you to the ground and tries to crush your skull, but you roll out of the way. + +Your head is really starting to hurt, and you’re feeling a little dizzy. Images of the past and present begin to mix together and you have a moment of clarity of where you are, and it isn’t Rask and you aren’t serving the Empire. + +The bleeding from the back of your head was actually caused by shrapnel from the explosive cannon ball that nearly killed you at the beginning of the battlefield. You’ve been suffering from a mild brain injury the entire time, hence your delusions. This fool that’s trying to kill you now is one of those eternals that was under your command when you left the Empire and killed private Felding in the process. + +You dodge another mace swing as you try to regain your wits. You’re stating to feel your strength really ebb. This is what reality feels like and it sucks, you were enjoying yourself up until this point. + +You don’t know if you’re actually going to survive this, but you’ll be damned if you’re going to give this asshole the satisfaction of getting his revenge. You hack at his foot causing him to fall to one knee. You then strike out against one of his soldiers trying to sneak attack you. Before the commander to get back up, you hack his arm off at the shoulder. Blood spews from the stump and he screams in agony. He stops screaming when you kick his teeth in and sever his head from his body. + +You look around and see that your soldiers are winning the day. You know that the Eternal Dominion presence is still in Nalin, but it has now been greatly reduced with this victory. The war isn’t over yet, but maybe it is for you. + +You stagger to the asshole’s tent you just killed and lie down on his bedroll. You head hurts something fierce and you’re starting to feel like you’re about to pass out. One of your soldiers says he’ll go find a medic or healer, but really you don’t care anymore. + +You’re going to die here and that’s okay. You’ve had your last win and really even if you did survive to see final victory; you’d rather not go through the drudgery of ruling alone anymore. You’re too old and too tired and now that Brenda’s gone, you just don’t have the motivation anymore. + +“Brenda, I’m coming to join you.” You say and close your eyes. + +You never wake up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 60 + +“Fort Glory has fallen sir.” A disheveled messenger tells you while you look over a map of Nalin in your tent. +“Doesn’t matter, it was no longer a priority anymore.” You say not looking up. +“So you’re still going through with the plan involving the kobold sappers?” +“Yes. I figure it’ll take a few days for those eternals get settled in their new conquest and then that fort crumbles right underneath them. A shame, I used to like that fort, but this is war.” +“Sir, I don’t mean to question your orders, but how can you trust those little scaley bastards? They’re little more than animals.” +“That may be, but they’re animals that are more scared of me than anything else, and that’s all that’s important. Speaking of which how do things fare in eastern Nalin?” +“All major settlements are under martial law, lots of structures destroyed, several dissidents executed and there are reports of rebels in the wilderness, but most of it is still under our control.” +“Good enough for now I suppose. Tell Captain Yasil, that I want her to mount an attack on Camp Conquest in a tomorrow. We’re going to make our major offensive soon and I want her to weaken that camp as much as possible.” +“…you mean that large eternal camp in northern Nalin? The main one? That’s suicide! Her company is only at half strength from the last mission you sent her on!” the messenger exclaims. +“Her sacrifice will be remembered. That will be all.” You say still not looking up. + +The messenger sounds like he would like to say something else, but realizes he better not and just leaves. Smart move on his part. You would’ve killed him. You have little patience for hesitation nowadays, especially since you’ve got nothing left to lose. + +You rub your eyes and stop looking at the map of Nalin and sit down to take a short break. You’re tired, but you don’t remember the last time you had a good night’s sleep. You look over at a portrait you had made of Brenda a long time ago before this war ever broke out. An image of her in happier times. + +You often speak to the portrait, during times like this and tonight is no different. + +“You were right, shouldn’t have broken that trade agreement with the ED (Sigh) just wish I would’ve been the one that paid for that mistake instead of you. Though I suppose I paid for it, when some suicidal asshole shot you in the head two years ago.” + +You focus more attention on the portrait + +“Maybe you’re better off…I mean you were getting increasingly unhappy. Heh, who knows maybe you would’ve just left altogether. You were right about ruling not being any fun too, I’ve been trying to do your job and mine, but I find myself just not caring about much lately. I’m half ready to just get up and leave it all behind, but I still feel the need to control and regain what has been lost. Maybe it’s that old Empire syndrome popping up again. I dunno. Recently I’ve just been focusing on the war. It’s about the only slight pleasure I get anymore. Sometimes I wade into battles, bones creaking, joints aching and five times slower and weaker than I once was, yet do it anyway. I guess I’m hoping to at least die a warrior’s death, but somehow I still manage to survive. The war’s not over yet though, so maybe there’s still time right?” + +You pick up the portrait and look directly into Brenda’s face. + +“I don’t know if you still loved me near the end of everything, but I still loved you. Still do. Maybe I’ll be with you soon.” You say. + +You put down the portrait and lie down on your bed. You won’t get a good night’s sleep, but you don’t need it. You just need a quick recharge before you go back to the business of war. + +The next couple of day pass and you’re ready for your final push. You have no idea if you’ll actually succeed in driving out the Eternal Dominion, but you’re ready to put an end to this one way or another. You lead the battalions to the north. + +When you arrive to the frontlines, you receive a report that Fort Glory completely collapsed and killed a couple of companies of eternals that were planning their next move from there. Kobolds took advantage of the chaos and finished off the wounded. Captain Yasil’s mission was also somewhat successful, you see the smoke in the distance from the main ED camp. The smell of gunpowder from the cannons lingers in the air; hundreds of trenches are filled with the living and the dead on both sides. + +You heard that this is how the battlefield looked when the Empire fought the Felkan Kingdom, seems like this is going to be standard for war, until something else changes in the way people kill others. You remember when things were much simpler though. The funny thing is that the Felkan Kingdom is despite being accustomed to this sort of fighting and more technologically advanced, they’re apparently having a much worse time holding off the Eternal Dominion than you have, though you imagine that they’re getting more of the brunt of the combat. + +You are approached by several of your officers; they say their respective companies are ready to advance, if you give the word. You nod and tell them the attack will commence. + +You watch as thousands of your soldiers run forward to kill and die for you. If there has always been one consistency with you, is you ability is muster up a shitload of people to do that, even when you’re not popular. And you’re REALLY not popular with the average Nalin citizen right now. + +But ungratefulness is something you’re used to. You experience the same thing in Rask, after you destroyed all the barbarian tribes. Peasants complain and know nothing of real sacrifice. Not like you do. + +The battle is going strong and a cannon ball from the other side even crashes a few feet away from you. One of your majors advises that you should step further back from the battle so you stay out of harm’s way. + +But maybe you don’t want to; in fact maybe you want to just end it all right now. +> Stay where you are +You tell you subordinate to fuck off and state that you’re not going to run away and cower in some tent. You’re going to observe and give assistance when necessary like a general should. He pleads with you once more, but you merely tell him that if he doesn’t get out of your face you’re going to kill him yourself. + +No sooner have you said that, a nearby explosion knocks you off your horse, which ends up falling on top of you as well. You feel a sharp numbness in your right leg, which is under the horse. + +You look over at the major who was speaking to you and half of his face has been blown off. You can’t hear a thing as the explosion has made you completely deaf though your hearing wasn’t the greatest with only one ear and all. + +Using all your strength you pull yourself out from underneath your horse, which is quite dead. A couple of your other officers see you and come to help pull you out and you see that your leg is broken to the point where the bone is coming through the skin. One of your lieutenants goes to stop the bleeding and she’s obviously yelling at others to get help, but you still can’t hear a thing. + +You can make out her saying something to you, probably that she’s going to put the bone back in place. You just nod quickly and shout at her to do it. She does and it’s one of the most excruciating things you’ve felt in a long time and you’ve had more than your share of wounds. It’s only through your own will power that you don’t scream out. + +While the lieutenant wraps up your leg with a splint, two others come with a stretcher. You don’t want to be helped up, but you are any way. “Standing up” straight you decline being put on the stretcher and insist that you’ll hop to the nearest horse if you have to. The female lieutenant says something to you while she continues to help prop you up, but you’re still deaf and can’t hear anything she’s saying. You can only guess it’s something about doing it for your own good. + +You aren’t going to be told what to do and you push her away, only to fall down. You curse and yell at your weakness and begin to crawl away. You can only assume the rest of your staff is yelling at you back, but you can’t see their faces, your eyes are staring at dirt right now. + +You crawl for a moment and that’s when you start to hear something again. + +“Gen……..mu….now! C… on!” + +You feel several hands turn you around and your staff is intent on forcibly putting you on the stretcher. You don’t bother struggling because that’s when through your damaged hearing that you hear a distinct whistling sound. + +“Brenda, I...” You say before the explosive cannon ball wipes you all out.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Kill these fucking deserters and get me to the medic.” You say. + +The screams of the belzak deserters begging for their lives and death squeals fall on deaf ears…or rather ear as the case may be now. + +Eventually you manage to make it to the medic who immediately starts administering an antidote to you. You’re out of commission and very sick for a couple of days, but after which time you’re at least able to stand without feeling ill anymore. Your chewed off ear isn’t an excessive problem as you can still hear relatively well, still you do feel a sense of “loss.” + +In any event the expansionist eastern campaign is over. All the tribes have been either wiped out or subdued to the point of submissiveness. Brenda will be relieved to hear it, as you know she was always concerned about having most of the veteran troops there instead of the northern borders. She’ll also be pleased that there weren’t many losses overall. + +You’re satisfied with the results, though now you’re just wondering what you’re going to do with yourself again. + +Year 50 + +“Our defenses are strong in the north. Have been for years. No need to be concerned about that.” You say. +“I know, but this is a big thing. I mean after all these years now Edgar wants to speak with us?” Brenda asks. +“My reports say he’s gotten a lot more organized and isn’t dealing with anarchy in his ranks anymore. He even re-conquered the old core lands of the Empire. It could be that he wants to see how strong we really are. His message said he’s coming alone without anyone else.” +“Well, maybe that’s a good sign. Maybe he just wants to talk.” +“Or maybe he wants to kill us both to a great show of strength so Nalin will capitulate with minimum fuss.” You point out. +“Yeah…there is that tactic. (sigh) Well I guess we all knew this day was coming. Guess I better practice my combat skills., which sadly have probably declined from lack of use. Would you spar with me?” +“Of course. Don’t worry, I’m sure you’re not that out of practice.” You remark. + +You and Brenda go to her personal training room where you and her prepare to spar. Brenda makes a few remarks about this being like the old days when Mistress made you fight each other. Brenda mentions the time when you broke Gerald’s arm and Kane’s nose when she pit them both against you. + +“Yeah, I remember that. That was my first match. Mistress had it in for me after I begged for my life. I was always pretty aggressive after that, well at least until Gruz told me I should master my anger better, and I did…anyway let’s get on with this.” You say not really wanting to think about those days or any of the names mentioned. + +Brenda isn’t quite as skilled as you remember her to be and she has indeed let her talents decline. Then again as you remember she always was more skilled with the bow. Something you never quite got the hang of yourself. You begin to get more in a “drill instructor mode” and shout commands at her to watch her techniques. + +“Alright, alright, I told you I was out of practice.” She shouts back. +“Well you shouldn’t have let it get this bad in the first place.” You say. + +After this remark, Brenda begins to get a little annoyed, which of course means she makes even more mistakes. + +“Brenda, come on I know you’re better than this! Focus!” +“I am!” +“Well prove it!” +“Well, I’m sorry I’m not the fucking lord of war that you are!” +“You don’t need to be me, you just need to be an Eternal!” +“What the hell for? The Empire is fucking dead and we’ve just been upkeeping a parody of it for the past fifteen years! I don’t even know what I’m doing trying to run this fucking country anymore! I never wanted this! I…I just wanted…to spend the rest of my…(sob) life with Roldan…(sob)” + +At this point Brenda sits down on the floor and completely breaks down in tears. You can honestly say you weren’t expecting this. + +“Brenda…” +“I’m sorry, but I can’t be the Eternal you are. I can’t even be the Eternal that Edgar is. I lost that edge when I fell in love. I wasn’t supposed to and neither was Roldan! If we hadn’t been so weak, he’d still be alive and…” +“Dammit Brenda, you can’t keep blaming yourself for his death! Your relationship and whatever feelings you had for each other had nothing to do with some insane asshole blowing him up. What’s bringing this all on? Edgar? I think you’re worrying about him more than you need to. I mean for all we know he just wants play catch up and even if he doesn’t we’re going to be ready for him and his army of half assed Eternals…” + +Brenda shakes her head and tries to compose herself. +“No, it’s not Edgar. It’s you.” +“Me? What do you mean? Out with it.” +“I…I think I’ve developed the same kind of feelings for you that I did for Roldan.” Brenda says. + +Another surprise for you today, not exactly the best timing with all that’s coming up soon. + +“…Uh…I don’t know what to say…I guess…I mean…are you sure?” you ask. +“I think I’d know. It’s been building up slowly over time. At first I was just happy to have you around, another Eternal to talk to. Sure you weren’t Roldan, and you’re certainly less fun loving than he could be, but there was that familiar bond. Then when you were so instrumental in helping to keep order in this place, I remembered why we all admired and respected you as a leader so much back in the day. It also began to remind me of how Roldan and I complimented each other in keeping order here during the days of the Empire. You were bringing the memories of those good old days back and making them reality again.” +“You probably just still miss him and are transferring those feelings.” +“I thought so too, which is why I didn’t do anything before. In fact I was feeling guilty about it, I thought I was dishonoring Roldan’s memory. Wasn’t until I heard about your close call with death during your campaign in the east that I knew it was more than mere transference. I was so happy that you were still alive, I nearly told you how I felt when you came back. I just didn’t think you suffered from such weaknesses and I wanted to remain strong because your respect was more important than my silly attractions.” + +You don’t have much experience with any of this, but you need to say or do something make Brenda feel better. + +“Brenda, you’ll always have my respect. As for anything between us, I never thought about it because I figured you’d always be carrying a torch for Roldan. I’m not opposed to the idea however. I mean we do have much in common and contrary to popular belief, I’m not quite the unfeeling golem that most consider me to be. I do have feelings, even if I don’t show them a lot and I would’ve thought you knew that.” +“I know you do, but you’re in control of them or you at least direct them better. I worry that if by some chance something would to occur between us, that you would lose your edge. I don’t want you to become weaker or distracted because of me. You’re needed as you are now.” + +You’re about to reply, and then there’s a knock on the door. + +“Sorry to disturb your training, but I’ve been told that the leader of the Eternal Dominion has been spotted at the northern border. He’s on a horse by himself, and several soldiers are already escorting him to Fort Glory. Did you want to meet him there or did you want us to escort him all the way to the capital?” a voice asks from behind the door. + +The pair of you didn’t expect him this soon, let alone be in the middle of the discussion you’re having now. You’d probably both like to wrap this up before having to focus on Edgar, though the question is if you’d have enough time to do it anyway. +> Let the soldiers escort Edgar to the capital +Edgar can wait, you need to wrap this up now, or at least get some sort of temporary closure on this situation. + +“Bring Edgar here, it won’t hurt him to ride a little longer!” you yell before turning your attention back to Brenda. + +“Okay, we’ve got a little more time and that’s all I need. Stop worrying about me, I’m not going to suddenly turn into some love sick idiot that can’t think things through if we have a deeper relationship! My question is, do you want one with me? Do you genuinely feel that strongly for me?” +“Yes, I do.” Brenda says. +“Then we shouldn’t avoid how we feel.” You reply and kiss Brenda. + +Brenda kisses you back and the pair of you give in to your physical desires. You’re both at it so long you lose track of time and you’re interrupted again with another knock at the door. + +“Erm, I hate to disturb you again, but I’ve just received word that general Edgar was attacked on the road by fanatics opposing our talks with the Eternal Dominion. We don’t even know what’s happened to him and soldiers are…” +“WHAT?!” you shout. “Fuck, hold on!” + +In exasperation you get dressed as fast as you can and Brenda does likewise. You’re cursing the entire time, Brenda says nothing, but you can imagine that she’s already starting to blame herself for this. + +You question the advisor on what he’s heard and he mentions that Edgar and his escort were ambushed near the village of Helas. Apparently nobody even saw it coming, the guards that were assigned to escort had several crossbow bolts in their bodies. Edgar must’ve put up a fight since there were some of the assassins found dead at the scene, though no sign of him. There was a blood trail, but it disappeared after a half of mile or so. So far none of the villagers from Helas have been incredibly helpful, which pretty much indicates that most of them must’ve known about it. + +Brenda orders a complete search of the area, while you press forward to interrogating the entire village of Helas. You don’t have too much success and just find out how much the inhabitants really don’t like the idea Nalin becoming friendly with the Eternal Dominion. They assume if that happens then you’ll start lording it over them like the Eternals do in the Dominion (as opposed to the “nice” way you do it now) + +After executing half of the village, you proceed with the search, but you still can’t find any trace of Edgar. You suspect that he’s covering his tracks and making his way back home. You can’t allow that to happen, because if he does, he’s going to declare war on you probably believing this to be a set up, and while that may happen anyway, you’d at least like to try to convince him that it wasn’t. Or failing that, depriving the Eternal Dominion of their leader… + +You order double the amount of troops along the northern borders; you’re going to need them there regardless of what happens. Brenda and you have a long argument about how your feelings lead to this situation. Brenda of course says that it just proves her right and that you need to put an end to the relationship. You get to the point where you’re too frustrated with her to argue anymore and perhaps in some small way she has a point so you ultimately agree and say it’s business from here on out. + +A couple months pass and still no word on Edgar either. You aren’t exactly ready to declare him dead, but if he was still alive and managed to make it back to the Eternal Dominion, it really seems like he would’ve declared war on you by now. As it stands you haven’t heard a word from them. They haven’t even sent any threatening messengers asking about their leader (you assume he told them he was going to visit you). You chalk it up to whatever selfish power grab they probably got going on. Still there’s always the possibility they could attack even with disorganized leadership. However it isn’t really Edgar or the ED that you’re worried about, things are obviously strained with Brenda. Brenda and you barely even meet in person anymore and you mainly stay at Fort Glory. She’s been delegating a lot of responsibility to her staff and become increasingly withdrawn. You attempt to reach out to her, but she doesn’t respond positively and just requests that you leave her alone. From what her advisors tell you, she spends most of her time staring and talking to a portrait of Roldan a lot and constantly re-reading love letters he wrote to her. Mostly apologizing for straying from him and being responsible for his death. + +You step in to take up the slack of rulership, and there aren’t too many objections though things in Nalin haven’t exactly been the most calm as far as civil obedience goes lately. + +Year 51 + +“…and so I’m sorry. I’m sorry that my weakness diminished your strength. Even though we didn’t go through with a closer relationship, I know you were continuing to worry about me. I couldn’t let you be distracted with lesser concerns. I saw that happen with Roldan, and I wouldn’t let it happen to you too. + +I think this will be for the best. I feel like I’ve just been walking through a parody of life ever since Roldan died and I think you know that I was growing weary of rulership anyway. + +Assuming Edgar is indeed dead, I guess this will make you the last of the original Eternals. I guess what you once told me what Captain Gruz’s last words were are true. You outlived everyone. + +Thank you for your company and making the last fifteen years much more bearable, I wish you well in whatever your future plans are, but I’m going to be with my beloved Roldan now. + +May you always remain the paragon of the Empire that you are. + +Love Brenda + +You knew it was only a matter of time and you suspected it was coming, but perhaps this is the only way it could’ve been. Apparently she hadn’t been happy for a long time, still, you wish that things could’ve been different. Maybe you didn’t exactly have a relationship with Brenda like Roldan did, but you did have one of sorts for the past fifteen years and now you definitely feel a great sense of loss because she’s gone. + +However, life goes on. After shedding a few tears in private and composing yourself, you fold the letter and put it with the rest of your personal belongings. You then make arrangements for her funeral, which is a small one. You have her body burned outside Fort Glory since you know that she had Roldan’s body burned outside the fort as well. It only seems fitting. + +You officially take over as sole ruler of Nalin unsure of what the future may hold. +> Years pass... +Year 56 + +“Sir, you want us to completely wipe out all settlements with the plague?” Colonel Gemma asks. +“That’s what I said isn’t it? I’ve already assigned all the medics, healers and hedge wizards in the land to focus on the less affected areas. As for those places really bad off kill all the people, cleanse the area with fire, no more problem.” +“But, you’re going to have mass riots! The people will protest, even soldiers! I mean some of their families are in the quarantined areas!” +“Well I guess you better have those soldiers executed then if you think they’ll be a problem. In fact I’m surprised to hear you balk from these orders, I remember you when you were a young soldier wiping out Belzak women and children without hesitation.” +“I…I’m not sir, I’m just concerned about the repercussions of potentially losing more of our army.” +“You let me worry about the repercussions! Look here’s what you do, gather up all the old guard such as yourself to carry out this plan. In fact get those elves I made into orphans during the tribal wars. I’m guessing they should be good and obedient soldiers by now, but they probably won’t hesitate to murder some defenseless humans. The plague doesn’t seem to be affecting non-humans as much anyway, so they’re probably more resistant. In fact gather some of those kobolds too; they can clear out the bodies. Those little bastards seem to be immune altogether. That’s all for now.” + +Gemma nods and takes her leave. + +You have more concerns today, but you’re delegating them to the advisors as usual. If it isn’t a problem that can be solved by force, you’re not very interested in it. Brenda was right; ruling is a pain in the ass. When she was alive, you still had the “fun” part to focus on, now you have to do it all. This latest plague is probably the most exciting thing that’s happened in years. Still can’t figure out how and where it originated from though. A passing thought was it might be saboteurs from the Eternal Dominion, but they’ve been fighting amongst themselves ever since Edgar died. Never did find his body. You still wonder exactly what it was he wanted to discuss with you and Brenda. An alliance perhaps? A threat to submit? You’ll never know. + +The nation of Nalin has become a lot more totalitarian under your rule. You’ve actually made it even more “Empire like” than it already was mostly because it’s what you know, but also because it makes you at least feel like things are how they “should be”. Lately though even that hasn’t helped your mindset. You’ve become increasingly bored with just plain ruling, and after this plague nonsense is taken care of, you’re thinking of doing something to shake things up a bit. + +The obvious idea is to expand again, specifically aggressive expansion into Eternal Dominion territory. It’s been too long since you’ve experienced a good fight. + +The other idea you’ve had is one you probably wouldn’t have considered again, but at this point any change would be welcome. You’ve thought about just leaving. Leaving everything behind and the region entirely. +> Expand +You left the Empire behind because you no longer believed in it. Nalin has become a kind of substitute for it though and ever since Brenda died, you’ve tried to make it even more like the Empire. This may be the closest you’re going to get back to the “good old days” and with age ever creeping up on you, you need to make the best of things and not wallow in indecision or hesitation. You’re the last of the real Eternals and you’re going to act as such. + +Nalin WILL become the new Empire. + +After a few months of putting out some of the backlash of how you handled the plague, you make your plans for expansion. You also fully intend overseeing it personally. + +The first round of conquests go well. The disorganized Eternals and their slaves don’t give you too much trouble; indeed some of the population welcomes your intervention. Most of the new generations of Eternals have been so excessively cruel that their subjects are willing to accept any other tyrant as an improvement, even if it’s another Eternal. + +Eventually you do hit a brick wall of sorts, the remaining Eternals realize they need to unite against you. The Eternal Dominion is more advanced technology wise (having stolen ideas and equipment from the Felkan Kingdom), though through your initial conquests, you’ve made steps to try to close the gap in the availability of gunpower-based weapons for your own soldiers. + +Still, even with the current stand off with the Eternal Dominion, you victories restore some of the appreciation of your citizens in Nalin who are probably just glad your violence is focused on others for a change. + +The balance of power has been shifted enough for the Felkan Kingdom to take greater notice of you too, especially since now your territory borders some of their own. They send one of their own to speak to you, while you’re currently at a conquered ED Fort making plans for your next attack. To your surprise one of their own, is also one of your own too, or as least was at one time. + +“Warrick?” you ask. He’s obviously older, has a missing eye and no hair, but you still recognize him despite your near disbelief. +“Yes, it’s me…see you’re missing a few body parts as well.” He says causing you to touch where your ear used to be. Sometimes you even forget that it’s missing. + +“Well you know how it is…but I thought you were dead! I mean I’d heard…how is it that you’re working for the Felkan Kingdom now?” +“That’s a long story, but let’s just say I found my own path, like I see you found yours. Which is sort of why I’m here.” + +Warrick mentions to you that the Felkan Kingdom has been expecting an attack from the Eternal Dominion for more than a decade, even after the disappearance of their leader Edgar. However, now that the ED seems to be no longer a potential threat they’re worried about Nalin invading, perhaps even more so since you seem to be a more organized potential threat. + +“Well, you can tell your king or whoever, that I’m not interested in the Felkan Kingdom. The Nalin Empire isn’t in a position to attack such a powerful nation at this time.” +“At this time…that implies that you might later.” +“Heh, well you might be right, just as I might believe that you’re planning on attack us.” +“True, and while you probably will rightfully remain suspicious, the Felkan Kingdom has no interest in conquest. Especially not right now. I probably shouldn’t tell you this, but we’re still dealing with a massive gnoll invasion that hit our land years ago. Fighting another war isn’t something we want right now.” +“Hmm, you’re right, you shouldn’t be giving vital intelligence away like that. This new information gives me an advantage. Knowing that you aren’t as powerful as I once thought, I may very well attack you now.” +“Well I suppose you’ll do what you have to then, but if you’re still the leader I know you to be, you won’t. You don’t want to fight a war on two fronts either.” Warrick says in an unconcerned tone. +“Ha ha! And you would be correct! But enough about power struggles, let’s talk for a moment just as Eternals.” + +Warrick’s tale of how he came to be in the service of the Felkan Kingdom is a little sketchy. He mentions that during the last days of the Empire he was still under orders to perform his usual sabotaging missions. He says that he managed to integrate himself in their favor by rescuing some of the royal family who were apparently in the wrong place at the wrong time. Children actually. He says he doesn’t remember all of it exactly though except there was a big explosion and the next thing he knew when he woke up is that he was missing an eye and was given a job. Already knowing how the Empire was beginning to crumble he accepted. + +You proceed to tell Warrick about your time since the Empire fell. He listens intently as you go on about the various thoughts you’ve gone through since that time. You mention Edgar to him, which interests him greatly. He says the Felkan government assumed that he was killed by one of his own men in a power struggle. He asks if you ever found his body or any evidence of his death. You tell him you never did, for all you know he still got killed by one of his own men, assuming he had managed to get back to the Eternal Dominion. + +You also mention Brenda. Warrick displays a bit of sadness when he hears the whole story, and you sort of relive some of that sadness as well. It hasn’t been that long since she died after all. + +“So, we’re really the last two left then?” Warrick says. +“Looks that way, though to be honest I thought you’d been dead for years. Glad to see you’re still around.” +“Even if we may be enemies one day?” +“We’re Eternals. The originals. We’ll always have a bond that nobody else will and if we should end up on opposite ends of the battlefield it still doesn’t change that. Assuming that day ever comes and we’re both still in fighting condition, seek me out as I shall seek you out and we’ll settle things in the only way they can be.” + +Warrick nods at your proposal and is silent for a moment as if deep in thought. He then eventually gets up and tells you he has to leave. He mentions that he’ll tell his superiors that the Nalin Empire has no hostile intentions towards the Felkan Kingdom at this time. + +The pair of you shake hands and part company, possibly knowing if you ever do see each other again, it won’t be on friendly terms. Still, there is a small bit of you that was happy to see an old comrade again. + +You return to the business of waging war on the pathetic remains of the Eternal Dominion. + +Year 65 + +“Sir, you are incredibly lucky that the sword didn’t hit any vital organs and just pierced the top layer of muscle.” Lieutenant Davis says as he applies a mixture of some salve to the wound. +“Agh! Yeah, lucky me. Just patch me up, I want to finish off these wannabes once and for all.” You say wincing at the burning sensation of the ointment working to seal the wound. +“General, victory is assured, is it really necessary for you personally be involved in the combat? Your military expertise is better served as the mind. Colonel Gemma says she’s got a handle on things.” +“Yeah, well if she’s got such a handle on things, why did I have to save her ass at the Battle of Julk Pass? And what’s this shit about my military expertise is better served with my mind? You’re lucky I don’t have you executed for saying shit like that! I was killing werebeasts, orcs and other shit you ain’t even heard about before you were even a twinkle in your parent’s eyes! I’m still every bit of a warrior as I… ah shit! My fucking head!” you suddenly shout and lie back down on the table. + +A couple of other medical types apply something cold to your head saying that you need to rest. The plate they put in your head from the bullet wound needs to be “adjusted.” You grudgingly comply and close your eyes. + +You hate this weakness. Old age, the only enemy you can’t outmaneuver, regardless of how hard you try. Death isn’t something you’ve ever been afraid of, indeed part of you never expected to even live this long. But death by old age? Natural causes? That’s something you never even seriously considered before, even if it was in the back of your mind. + +If you continue your insistence on believing you’re still in your twenties, you’re going to die on the battlefield. You know that, and you’re okay with that idea, but part of you wonders if it’s just foolish to throw your life away over being stubborn when you could still live and do more with you life. The Nalin Empire is thriving and you’ve almost conquered the Eternal Dominion which means you effectively restored most of the old Empire. A feat Edgar was probably trying to accomplish no doubt, but much like him, if you died suddenly, who knows how long it would last before it crumbled. + +If you want to leave any sort of real legacy, you would most likely have to step back now and begin to make preparations for a line of succession and you’d need a lot of time to do that to sort out all the details. This would mean you’d no longer be able to take such a personal approach to war again. Your days as a warrior would effectively be over and you’d be back to the drudgery of bureaucratic rulership again. + +You have to take a long look at yourself and decide now, if that’s what your fate is going to be. +> Continue to lead by example +You spend the rest of the day in your personal tent still recovering from your last battle thinking about your situation. + +Your head still hurts from where part of your skull was replaced with a crude metal plate and your body aches all over as it has been for years. You’re nearly deaf in your one working ear. You’ve got scars all over your face and body. You even have a couple of missing fingertips now. Yet for good or ill, you’re going to at least see this war through to its end. You have to be hands on when it comes to battle. You were raised to be a warrior, a killer, and an instrument of war. There have been times you’ve had stray thoughts on a different life, but ultimately it’s always come back to war. + +You weren’t meant to be an old man who dies on his throne either through natural causes or assassination, and you definitely weren’t meant to find a love and live happily ever after. + +You are an Eternal and you were meant to die in battle. Whatever happens afterwards is of minor importance. + +The next morning you muster up all your strength and stand. You’re a little wobbly, but you manage it and step outside. Several of your staff urges you to rest, but you ignore their concerns. + +You plan your attack on the “Eternal City” with your top staff. It was once the capital of the Empire, now it’s the last stand of the Eternal Dominion. At this point there really isn’t too much strategy involved. You just plan on blowing up the walls and storming the place with as many soldiers as possible. You remark that when the walls are down, you’ll be leading the first assault. + +“General! You can’t be serious! I understand you want to be involved in the battle, but this is going too far! You know very well the battalion that goes in first is going to suffer the most losses.” Colonel Gemma exclaims. +“It won’t if I’m leading it.” You say. “However, when I fall, you’re next in line. I trust you know what to do. ALL of you know what you’re supposed to do.” + +This remark causes a dead silence among your staff. You didn’t even say IF you fall, you said WHEN you fall. You realize this and collect your thoughts in what you believe to be your last speech to all of them. + +“(Sigh) Look, I’m tired. I’m old. I got more scars than all of you put together. I’m missing portions of my body. I’m in constant pain and I got a fucking plate in my head. I appreciate all the service you’ve given in the past few years and in some cases decades. Your concern for my life is noted, but I know it’s time. I’ve lived a satisfying life. I won’t say good, because I’ve been through enough shit to know that isn’t true, but I can say it had its good moments. And I fully intend on making my last moments on earth satisfying as well by leading all of you to victory before it’s all over. So! You all have your orders, and if I’m wrong about my impending death…well I’ll see you all in the palace when this is over and you all can taunt me for being an overly dramatic old man. One taunt per person of course.” + +This last remark lightens the mood enough for a couple of them to smile. One even manages to give a small chuckle. You figure even if you don’t believe it, you should try to keep morale up. + +The attack on the city commences. It won’t really take long to bring the walls down. Never thought the day would come where you’d actually be attacking this place. It’s funny, in all the years you served the Empire, you never once set foot into it’s capital, let alone the Emperor’s palace. You sometimes wonder what exactly happened to the Emperor when the Empire fell. Was he killed? Did he escape? Was there really ever an Emperor at all? + +It’s all irrelevant now you suppose. + +After a couple days of bombardment by catapults and cannons you at last breach the walls enough that the opening cannot be repaired quick enough. That’s when you make your move. + +“ATTACK!” you shout while galloping forward with your horse, which is shaking you enough to make every bone in your body ache. You’ve never really liked riding horses, but if you want to be the first one in the city, you need the speed, because running just isn’t something you do much anymore. + +You get closer and closer to the city nearly getting blown to pieces in the process by the cannon fire. How you aren’t shot off your horse by a stray bullet is short of amazing. It’s just as well you’re nearly deaf, you doubt if you could stand the noise of the explosions if you weren’t. + +You reach the wall breach and it is there your horse rears up from the wall of pikes held by the enemy. This temporarily saves its life, but a few shots are fired and the beast makes one last neigh before collapsing. You are also hit in the leg by one of these shots, but you fortunately manage to avoid having the horse land on you when you’re thrown from it. Sensing that you’re an easy target some the enemy soldiers break their formation and attempt to attack you while you’re down, but you’re far from being out of this fight. Ignoring the pain, you stand up and meet your attackers head on, easily slaying them. You then proceed to fight your way through the breach just before the rest of your soldiers reach it to help you. + +The bodies of the dead surround you and the streets are quite literally running red with blood. The mixture of gunpowder and death fills your lungs when you breathe deeply and it smells a hell of a lot better than that poison cloud that Slin witch inflicted on you years ago. + +Limping around on one good leg, you help out the rest of your soldiers who are a little faster than you now in engaging the enemy. You tell them all to take the palace, a lot of them shout back at you, but you can only really read their lips due to the noise and your bad hearing. + +The Eternal Dominion’s last stand has them pulling out all the stops for this battle, at one point you find yourself facing a large group of orc troops in heavy armor and a single battle mage desperately trying to defend the gates of the palace. It’s been a while since you’ve faced either of these enemies, but you’re not going to run at this late stage. + +Your soldiers engage the orcs and you try to focus on the battle mage who is chanting something, a couple of shots are fired at him, but whatever magic barrier he has up blocks them. When you reach him, his eyes turn completely red and a ring of flame suddenly emanates from him burning you and several others nearby. You fall to the palace steps trying to put the flames out and after managing to do so you realize you’re now blind in one eye and the other eye sees a statue outside the palace beginning to move. + +“Fuck, he’s bringing it to life.” You say to yourself. Your body then feels a heavy mace blow to your left arm shattering several bones in it. It’s quite possible that you would die right there if not for a fellow soldier killing the orc that attacked you. Somebody helps you up and you’re feeling nearly delirious at this point. Someone shouts about you bleeding from the head, but you can’t really hear them, you’re still focused on the mattle mage, who has nearly brought the statue to life. + +Fighting through the pain as usual, you rush at the mage, even knocking an orc down in the process. The barrier doesn’t stop non-projectiles and you easily tackle him. He tries to cast a spell, but is unable to when you shove your armored fist into his mouth. As he chokes on his own blood and teeth, you pull part of his tongue out and then smash his skull open on the palace steps painting them with his brains. Whatever magic that was about to power the statue dies with him and it stops moving. + +You stand back up with great effort, one of your soldiers shouts something about getting into the palace and you just nod and limp your way inside. Victory is at hand. + +You step inside the palace and even in the midst of this carnage it is certainly impressive. You can only imagine what it looked like at the height of the Empire’s might. Several of your soldiers engage the last remaining hold outs, but you just wander about looking at the palace. You feel sort of odd, like almost delirious, but you try to ignore it. It has been a tiring day after all. + +You see the skirmishing going on in the hallways and rooms, but you’re looking for something in particular, the throne room. You eventually find it, and surprisingly it’s empty. A couple of vases and banner have been knocked to the floor, but other than that, it’s in relatively good condition. + +You gaze upon the single impressive platinum throne at the back and approach it. You feel a sudden sense of accomplishment and pride in your deeds. You’re also still feeling woozy and you collapse to one knee, but some how it seems appropriate. + +“I see. The Emperor…he was still watching…he was always watching…I’ve passed the test.” You says to yourself staring at the floor. + +You then look up at the empty throne. + +“I have restored the Empire. I have restored its glory. I will take my place with you soon.” You say and then pass out, never to wake up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You left the Empire behind because you no longer believed in it. Nalin has become a kind of substitute for it though and ever since Brenda died, you’ve tried to make it even more like the Empire. This may be the closest you’re going to get back to the “good old days” and with age ever creeping up on you, you need to make the best of things and not wallow in indecision or hesitation. You’re the last of the real Eternals and you’re going to act as such. + +Nalin WILL become the new Empire. + +After a few months of putting out some of the backlash of how you handled the plague, you make your plans for expansion. You also fully intend overseeing it personally. + +The first round of conquests go well. The disorganized Eternals and their slaves don’t give you too much trouble; indeed some of the population welcomes your intervention. Most of the new generations of Eternals have been so excessively cruel that their subjects are willing to accept any other tyrant as an improvement, even if it’s another Eternal. + +Eventually you do hit a brick wall of sorts, the remaining Eternals realize they need to unite against you. The Eternal Dominion is more advanced technology wise (having stolen ideas and equipment from the Felkan Kingdom), though through your initial conquests, you’ve made steps to try to close the gap in the availability of gunpower-based weapons for your own soldiers. + +Still, even with the current stand off with the Eternal Dominion, you victories restore some of the appreciation of your citizens in Nalin who are probably just glad your violence is focused on others for a change. + +The balance of power has been shifted enough for the Felkan Kingdom to take greater notice of you too, especially since now your territory borders some of their own. They send one of their own to speak to you, while you’re currently at a conquered ED Fort making plans for your next attack. To your surprise one of their own, is also one of your own too, or as least was at one time. + +“Warrick?” you ask. He’s obviously older, has a missing eye and no hair, but you still recognize him despite your near disbelief. +“Yes, it’s me…see you’re missing a few body parts as well.” He says causing you to touch where your ear used to be. Sometimes you even forget that it’s missing. + +“Well you know how it is…but I thought you were dead! I mean I’d heard…how is it that you’re working for the Felkan Kingdom now?” +“That’s a long story, but let’s just say I found my own path, like I see you found yours. Which is sort of why I’m here.” + +Warrick mentions to you that the Felkan Kingdom has been expecting an attack from the Eternal Dominion for more than a decade, even after the disappearance of their leader Edgar. However, now that the ED seems to be no longer a potential threat they’re worried about Nalin invading, perhaps even more so since you seem to be a more organized potential threat. + +“Well, you can tell your king or whoever, that I’m not interested in the Felkan Kingdom. The Nalin Empire isn’t in a position to attack such a powerful nation at this time.” +“At this time…that implies that you might later.” +“Heh, well you might be right, just as I might believe that you’re planning on attack us.” +“True, and while you probably will rightfully remain suspicious, the Felkan Kingdom has no interest in conquest. Especially not right now. I probably shouldn’t tell you this, but we’re still dealing with a massive gnoll invasion that hit our land years ago. Fighting another war isn’t something we want right now.” +“Hmm, you’re right, you shouldn’t be giving vital intelligence away like that. This new information gives me an advantage. Knowing that you aren’t as powerful as I once thought, I may very well attack you now.” +“Well I suppose you’ll do what you have to then, but if you’re still the leader I know you to be, you won’t. You don’t want to fight a war on two fronts either.” Warrick says in an unconcerned tone. +“Ha ha! And you would be correct! But enough about power struggles, let’s talk for a moment just as Eternals.” + +Warrick’s tale of how he came to be in the service of the Felkan Kingdom is a little sketchy. He mentions that during the last days of the Empire he was still under orders to perform his usual sabotaging missions. He says that he managed to integrate himself in their favor by rescuing some of the royal family who were apparently in the wrong place at the wrong time. Children actually. He says he doesn’t remember all of it exactly though except there was a big explosion and the next thing he knew when he woke up is that he was missing an eye and was given a job. Already knowing how the Empire was beginning to crumble he accepted. + +You proceed to tell Warrick about your time since the Empire fell. He listens intently as you go on about the various thoughts you’ve gone through since that time. You mention Edgar to him, which interests him greatly. He says the Felkan government assumed that he was killed by one of his own men in a power struggle. He asks if you ever found his body or any evidence of his death. You tell him you never did, for all you know he still got killed by one of his own men, assuming he had managed to get back to the Eternal Dominion. + +You also mention Brenda. Warrick displays a bit of sadness when he hears the whole story, and you sort of relive some of that sadness as well. It hasn’t been that long since she died after all. + +“So, we’re really the last two left then?” Warrick says. +“Looks that way, though to be honest I thought you’d been dead for years. Glad to see you’re still around.” +“Even if we may be enemies one day?” +“We’re Eternals. The originals. We’ll always have a bond that nobody else will and if we should end up on opposite ends of the battlefield it still doesn’t change that. Assuming that day ever comes and we’re both still in fighting condition, seek me out as I shall seek you out and we’ll settle things in the only way they can be.” + +Warrick nods at your proposal and is silent for a moment as if deep in thought. He then eventually gets up and tells you he has to leave. He mentions that he’ll tell his superiors that the Nalin Empire has no hostile intentions towards the Felkan Kingdom at this time. + +The pair of you shake hands and part company, possibly knowing if you ever do see each other again, it won’t be on friendly terms. Still, there is a small bit of you that was happy to see an old comrade again. + +You return to the business of waging war on the pathetic remains of the Eternal Dominion. + +Year 65 + +“Sir, you are incredibly lucky that the sword didn’t hit any vital organs and just pierced the top layer of muscle.” Lieutenant Davis says as he applies a mixture of some salve to the wound. +“Agh! Yeah, lucky me. Just patch me up, I want to finish off these wannabes once and for all.” You say wincing at the burning sensation of the ointment working to seal the wound. +“General, victory is assured, is it really necessary for you personally be involved in the combat? Your military expertise is better served as the mind. Colonel Gemma says she’s got a handle on things.” +“Yeah, well if she’s got such a handle on things, why did I have to save her ass at the Battle of Julk Pass? And what’s this shit about my military expertise is better served with my mind? You’re lucky I don’t have you executed for saying shit like that! I was killing werebeasts, orcs and other shit you ain’t even heard about before you were even a twinkle in your parent’s eyes! I’m still every bit of a warrior as I… ah shit! My fucking head!” you suddenly shout and lie back down on the table. + +A couple of other medical types apply something cold to your head saying that you need to rest. The plate they put in your head from the bullet wound needs to be “adjusted.” You grudgingly comply and close your eyes. + +You hate this weakness. Old age, the only enemy you can’t outmaneuver, regardless of how hard you try. Death isn’t something you’ve ever been afraid of, indeed part of you never expected to even live this long. But death by old age? Natural causes? That’s something you never even seriously considered before, even if it was in the back of your mind. + +If you continue your insistence on believing you’re still in your twenties, you’re going to die on the battlefield. You know that, and you’re okay with that idea, but part of you wonders if it’s just foolish to throw your life away over being stubborn when you could still live and do more with you life. The Nalin Empire is thriving and you’ve almost conquered the Eternal Dominion which means you effectively restored most of the old Empire. A feat Edgar was probably trying to accomplish no doubt, but much like him, if you died suddenly, who knows how long it would last before it crumbled. + +If you want to leave any sort of real legacy, you would most likely have to step back now and begin to make preparations for a line of succession and you’d need a lot of time to do that to sort out all the details. This would mean you’d no longer be able to take such a personal approach to war again. Your days as a warrior would effectively be over and you’d be back to the drudgery of bureaucratic rulership again. + +You have to take a long look at yourself and decide now, if that’s what your fate is going to be. +> Retire your sword +Your head still hurts from where part of your skull was replaced with a crude metal plate and your body aches all over as it has been for years. You’re nearly deaf in your one working ear. You’ve got scars all over your face and body. You even have a couple of missing fingertips now. Even if you did go into battle again, you probably wouldn’t even make it to the city. + +You’ve finally realized that your days of battle are over, or at least over on any meaningful level. It’s a sobering thought and not one you’re happy with, but if you’re going to truly re-establish the Empire or have a reasonable successor nation, then you’re going to have to step back from the battlefield. + +The next day you call in your top staff and tell them that you will indeed pull yourself out of the final push on to the “Eternal City”, they all of course agree with your decision and state they are glad to hear you’ve made it. You tell them all what you want done still as far as the attack is concerned and you also say you aren’t going to be running off the battlefield just yet, as you still want to oversee things from a distance at least. + +There really isn’t too much strategy in the scheme of things. You plan on breaching the wall with cannons and catapults and then your soldiers will kill everything hostile within. Simple enough. + +You watch from outside your tent when the attack commences, hours pass and everything is going as planned and then your head begins to hurt once again. Cursing, you go back inside to lie down for a while. After a few minutes you begin to feel better, but now you’re tired. If your hearing was better you probably wouldn’t be able to fall asleep, but as it is, the faint sounds of the cannons and battle aren’t enough to keep you awake. You figure a small nap won’t hurt, so you allow yourself to drift off. + +You begin to have a dream where you are back in Mistress’ classroom. Everything is the same except you’re the only one there and you’re five years old again. Mistress then walks into the room with a sneer on her face. + +“You disappoint me, but then I should’ve expected such weakness from one that begs for his life when faced with the possibility of death!” Mistress says to you. +“I…” is all you get out before she kicks you in the chest and steps on you. You look up and see her cruelly smiling at you. +“Silence! Did you learn nothing from me? You lack discipline! You always did! You’re weak and soft! That’s why your Empire fell! You think you can restore it? It’s gone! Just like most of your fellow Eternals and you’ll be next, if you don’t beg. Now do it! Beg!” +“No…I…” you gasp. +“What?! You dare disobey me?” Mistress shouts and ceases stepping on you for a moment to pick you up and slap you across the face. You slap her back and she throws you into a bunch of chairs. +“Impudent whelp! You will learn to obey!” she yells and moves towards you. + +You scramble back and stand up. She approaches closer and you pick up a chair and attempt to hit her with it, but she grabs it and yanks it from your hands. + +“Nice try Eternal, but it’s too late for fighting back.” + +You try to get out of the way, but you feel hard wooden chair smashing into your body which is already bruised and sore from being thrown. You collapse on the floor and feel something wet dripping from your head. It’s blood. + +You are picked up and turned around by Mistress; she spits in your face and lifts you in the air. You can barely focus on her face as you’re feeling very dizzy. + +“Is this the best you can do? You couldn’t even land one hit on me and you’re trying to restore the Empire? You need to just let it die. Its time came and went just like yours did. Yet instead of letting go and dying with dignity you’re choosing to live as a parody of yourself ruling a parody of the Empire. Pathetic!” Mistress says and throws you, though you don’t hit a wall like you expect to, you just continue to fly backwards in the air and then someone catches you. + +“Oof! What the hell son, I’m not carrying you, you fight your own battles!” you hear Captain Gruz say and then he drops you to the floor. When you stand back up you’re a little bigger. You’re twelve and in Gruz’s training room. + +“Now listen, I know we had our differences, but don’t you listen to that svelk bitch, she’s just projecting her own failures onto you. I say go for it. I mean I think you know you can achieve anything you set your mind to. So what if you’re an old broken down warhorse now? You can still restore the Empire. The hard part is over! It’s just the boring part that you have to take care of, and if you start on it now, you might even take care of all of it before you die! But remember you have to work with others, for it to succeed! Now go on, and for the Emperor’s sake, let go of the fucking past, it doesn’t need to be perfect! Nothing ever is!” + +At this point Captain Gruz points to a door and you comply and grab the handle and pull the door towards you… + +“Sir! Sir! It’s just me!” Colonel Gemma shouts. You open your eyes and see her blurry image and your hand strongly grabbing her wrist. She probably was trying to wake you up and you instinctively reacted. Seeing that you’re not in danger you let her go. + +“What the hell’s going on?” you say sitting up and rubbing your head. +“I just wanted to inform you that we won. The city is uh…ours.” +“Hmm, what’s that hesitation in your voice?” +“No hesitation, just well…” +“Colonel, my head still hurts so I’m in no mood for your sputtering, now out with it!” +“The city is ours and the enemy has been defeated, but I’m afraid that the city has been totally destroyed.” +“Destroyed? What the fuck happened?” +‘There were some complications…sir…I…” + +You don’t let her finish; you get off you bed, push her aside and are blinded by the light when you open the tent. When you fell asleep it was mid-day, now the sun is coming up! Were you asleep the whole damn day? + +You look in the distance and see the Eternal City with heavy smoke rising from it. In fact there is a weird purple cloud hovering over part of it as well. You can’t even see any of the large towers anymore and it looks like the palace was trashed as well, if the destroyed domes and spires are any indication. So much for making this the new capital or even stepping foot into a place that you never even got to visit when you were serving the Empire. + +“Why the hell didn’t someone wake me?!” you shout. Several officers nearby are silent. Gemma once again attempts to explain that someone did, but you were in a deep sleep and thought you’d only be angry if you thought they couldn’t handle things. + +You look at her and the rest of your staff. Here they are scared of your next reaction and there are several of them and one of you. Some are in very fit condition and all of them are armed with firearms as well as close combat weapons. If they were all of the mind to overthrow you by putting several bullets in your body they could easily do it, and quite frankly you wouldn’t even blame them either. + +Yet somehow their mixture of fear and respect for you prevents them from doing so. This is what you have to work with and this is as good as it gets. It could be a lot worse. + +“(Sigh) Alright. You all did well and I’m proud of all of you. There’s going to be some changes in command structure, but we can get to that later. I want a carriage sent here to take me back to the capital, but before that I guess a small victory celebration is in order.” +“General, you don’t want the Eternal City?” someone asks. +“Well it would’ve been nice, but no. In fact just leave it; I don’t even want it rebuilt. It’s a relic of a past that’s long dead. The Nalin Empire doesn’t need it.” + +You go back in your tent to lay down while hearing the faint sounds of cheering of your staff and surviving soldiers outside. + +You drift off again and hope you have better dreams this time around. +> Years pass... +Year 75 + +Another day of aches and pains, getting old sucks. + +After a couple of years of finally putting down the rest of the new Eternal hold outs, you’ve been spending most of your time restructuring the Nalin Empire’s command structure, economy, security and all the rest that goes with it. You haven’t done a bad job considering you were bred for war, not administration, then again you’ve been doing it in limited capacity for years, you just decided to totally focus on it for once and the results are excellent. + +While you still have the reputation for ruthlessness, you’ve managed to temper that a bit in last few years even with all the changes you’ve made. Most rulers would probably have to worry about coups or assassination attempts, but those haven’t been a problem due to the high amount of respect you’ve earned from the military. General Cynthia Gemma is officially your second in command, so if anything happens to you, she takes over. Though sometimes you wonder if you’ll outlive her given your knack of surviving. Warrick who was the only other Eternal left besides you died last year. Before he did, he sent a letter informing you that his final hours were upon him. + +He didn’t exactly say what was wrong, just that he felt the combination of his age and old wounds catching up to him. It wasn’t a long letter, just mostly him saying how he was glad he never had to fight you as he still respected you as a leader. The respect was mutual. Indeed it was one of the factors to as why you never attacked the Felkan Kingdom. You mourned his passing as you morn the passing of all your fellow Eternals. Most of them deserved better ends. All of them actually. + +And now here you are the last of not just your old comrades, but of your kind. The last words that Gruz once told you, have at last come true…you outlived everyone. + +Whether you were tougher, smarter, or luckier than the rest you don’t know. Maybe it was something by design when the Empire altered you. Maybe it was just common sense and the simple will to live. + +Though lately you’ve been wondering about “living.” You don’t have too many thrills left anymore and the constant pain you’re in, doesn’t make things any easier. You didn’t quite understand all of Brenda’s choice to end her life at the time, but as you’ve reflected on it again and again over the years you get it now and you’re starting to wonder if it’s time to join your fellows. + +Besides all you victories in battle, you’ve practically rebuilt the Empire. At least you have as best you could’ve done, all things considered and that’s no easy achievement. You have done enough for anyone to feel proud of doing and if you died now, there would be no shame. + +Still, part of you wonders if you’ve lived this long what else could you accomplish if you went on a little longer? Granted you could mess up your already strong reputation, but you could also go on to other great things. +> End your life +If you were younger perhaps you’d go on to try to conquer the world, but that’s a task for other more energetic leaders than yourself. You’ve had your battles and won your victories, now it’s time for your hard earned rest. + +However you fully intend on going out the same way you lived and you call Gemma and all your closest staff to assemble in the throne room. You dress in your old Empire gear and ignore the constant pain as you slowly walk to meet them there. When you arrive, they’re all at attention and respectful as usual. You look them all over and sit down on your throne to rest before you go through with what you have planned. + +“My loyal staff and soldiers, the time has come for me to realize that I may no longer be in fit condition to properly lead you all anymore. I believe I have done a good job all these years, but a good leader also knows when his or her time is possibly at an end.” + +Your staff and some of the guards look a little surprised by your remark. They would probably verbally disagree with you, but they’ve grown accustomed to know when to speak and now is not the time. + +“I’m not just getting old, I’m a shell of my former self, I have been for quite some time. However there was still work that needed to be done, so I persevered through the pain and the stress to achieve my goal. And that has been accomplished, the Nalin Empire is now a worthy successor to the old Empire.” + +You take a long pause and stand up again. The ache of this action alone makes you glad you won’t have to go through it anymore soon. You slowly step towards your staff and address them. + +“I may no longer be fit to lead…but then again maybe I am. There is still battle lust that rages in these old bones. I will not just step down and live out some sort of feeble existence where I am only trotted out during celebrations or when advice is needed. I won’t be some ancient relic to be handled with sympathy or awe. No, if my reign is truly meant to end today then it shall be by combat. General Gemma draw your weapon.” You say and draw your sword. +“Sir, I…” +“I SAID DRAW YOUR WEAPON OR I’LL KILL YOU WHERE YOU STAND!” you demand. + +General Gemma draws her weapon and steps forward. You stand back and position yourself into your fighting stance. + +“Alright now the rest of you listen, if the good general here kills me, you follow her. If not, then you still follow me. It’s pretty easy. And as for you, defend yourself!” you shout and attack. + +Your swords clash and the battle commences. At first Cynthia seems to only be on the defense, as if she’s unwilling to harm you, let alone kill you. You can see it in her eyes that this isn’t a battle she wants to fight, not so much due to fear, but due to respect. Part of you understands her reluctance and you appreciate it, so you figure you need to push her a bit. + +“What’s the matter? Can’t beat an old man? Then again you’re no spring chicken yourself, perhaps I should’ve chosen a younger successor.” + +It’s not the cruelest thing you’ve ever said, but it does the job. Cynthia begins to go on the offensive. + +Pain wracks your body with every sword swing, but even with your battered body and slower reflexes you’re still proving to be a match for Cynthia. She’s not an unskilled warrior, she wouldn’t be in her position if she was, but even with a few more taunts you’re getting the impression she’s still holding back…either that or you’re still that good. + +Perhaps it’s a combination of both, because Cynthia leaves herself wide open for a killing blow that you could easily take advantage of. You don’t think she even did it intentionally; she’s just so upset at having to fight you that her head is not completely in the fight. Of course that’s never really ever been a problem for you even during the worst of conditions, and there were some bad ones. + +You realize that you’ll probably win this fight and you weren’t really expecting to. You nearly laugh at the absurdity that you may very well have to kill half your staff before one of them is able to take your position through combat, and that’ll only be because you’d be so tired by that point. If you were even ten years younger you could probably kill them all. + +But that isn’t your goal today. You goal was to go out in one last battle and if that means you’re going to have to “help” events along then so be it. You don’t take advantage of the opening, but you do leave one for Cynthia. One that she can’t ignore, though there is a split second of hesitation… + +Then you feel the sharp blade rip past your flesh and into your upper chest. A couple of ribs break from the force and your heart is sliced open as it passes by it and out the other side of your back. + +You stop to look down and see the blade slowly being withdrawn from your body and covered in your blood. It won’t be long now and you feel death already beginning to take you. You see Cynthia convey a troubled expression on her face and look away as your body falls to the floor. Everyone else looks on in stunned silence. + +Coughing up blood and bleeding out all over the floor, the last thing you hear even with your near deafness is a quiet “I’m sorry.” and feel the touch of a hand. + +Then you feel nothing else ever again. + +Your funeral is a large event, with lots of military honors and grand speeches about your accomplishments. You are placed in a fancy tomb with an impressive statue nearby. It’s a fitting funeral. + +The memory of you exists for quite some time, but as time does with all things, eventually it wears away. Successor after successor become less capable of holding together what you have built. Nothing lasts forever. + +Civil wars, invasions, in fighting and countless other factors play apart in the eventual complete dissolution of the Nalin Empire as an entity three hundred years later and a new dark age begins once again. + +Still, every once in awhile various savage tribes stumble upon your weathered broken statues when scavenging through the various ruins that dot the landscape. They don’t know your name, they don’t know what you did, they know nothing of what you accomplished or where you came from. Yet the dominating stance and the determined look on the face still convey the idea that a great warrior once called these lands his own. + +It is hardly surprising that eventually one of these savages found inspiration in these statues to forge her own empire. + +Such is the cycle of things.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 75 + +Another day of aches and pains, getting old sucks. + +After a couple of years of finally putting down the rest of the new Eternal hold outs, you’ve been spending most of your time restructuring the Nalin Empire’s command structure, economy, security and all the rest that goes with it. You haven’t done a bad job considering you were bred for war, not administration, then again you’ve been doing it in limited capacity for years, you just decided to totally focus on it for once and the results are excellent. + +While you still have the reputation for ruthlessness, you’ve managed to temper that a bit in last few years even with all the changes you’ve made. Most rulers would probably have to worry about coups or assassination attempts, but those haven’t been a problem due to the high amount of respect you’ve earned from the military. General Cynthia Gemma is officially your second in command, so if anything happens to you, she takes over. Though sometimes you wonder if you’ll outlive her given your knack of surviving. Warrick who was the only other Eternal left besides you died last year. Before he did, he sent a letter informing you that his final hours were upon him. + +He didn’t exactly say what was wrong, just that he felt the combination of his age and old wounds catching up to him. It wasn’t a long letter, just mostly him saying how he was glad he never had to fight you as he still respected you as a leader. The respect was mutual. Indeed it was one of the factors to as why you never attacked the Felkan Kingdom. You mourned his passing as you morn the passing of all your fellow Eternals. Most of them deserved better ends. All of them actually. + +And now here you are the last of not just your old comrades, but of your kind. The last words that Gruz once told you, have at last come true…you outlived everyone. + +Whether you were tougher, smarter, or luckier than the rest you don’t know. Maybe it was something by design when the Empire altered you. Maybe it was just common sense and the simple will to live. + +Though lately you’ve been wondering about “living.” You don’t have too many thrills left anymore and the constant pain you’re in, doesn’t make things any easier. You didn’t quite understand all of Brenda’s choice to end her life at the time, but as you’ve reflected on it again and again over the years you get it now and you’re starting to wonder if it’s time to join your fellows. + +Besides all you victories in battle, you’ve practically rebuilt the Empire. At least you have as best you could’ve done, all things considered and that’s no easy achievement. You have done enough for anyone to feel proud of doing and if you died now, there would be no shame. + +Still, part of you wonders if you’ve lived this long what else could you accomplish if you went on a little longer? Granted you could mess up your already strong reputation, but you could also go on to other great things. +> Continue to live +No, there are still battles to be won even if they aren’t of the physical nature anymore. + +One of these battles is how to prevent all of what you’ve built from collapsing soon after you die. You don’t believe it’ll fall into complete anarchy immediately of course and you’re sure that your first few successors will probably do a good enough job since you’ve set it up in such a manner, but entropy and decline seem to be factors as certain as death. + +You wonder if this would be easier if you had been able to have children. You know that you can’t just by experience and your own past discussions with Brenda when she spoke of Roldan. No Eternals could have children. You never did know why and just chalked it up to it being something in the process of your creation. Maybe nature balancing itself? + +In any case you do come up with something. You think back to the old Empire and the emperor. You never did get to meet him…or her…or it! You once wondered if there even was an emperor. You assume there had to have been at one time, probably several, but something changed. Something changed to make people believe that the emperor wasn’t just a mortal anymore, but an immortal of sorts. It’s this sort of thinking that held the old Empire for a very long time. + +It occurs to you that you need to start this very same mindset now. Most of the citizens as of right now hold a certain respect for you and the military is in near awe. You need to keep that going even after you’re dead. The population needs to believe that you’re still alive, watching and protecting them forever. You’re not really looking for immortality for yourself so much as you’re looking for immortality for what you’ve struggled to rebuild. Even creating a strong cult of personality so that you still have “followers” long after your death won’t solve the problem. + +Basically, you can’t die and you mean you literally can’t die. + +Of course this is impossible, so you have to do the next best thing. Fake your life. Create the same lie that the Empire did. Granted you don’t know if they did, but you’re going to have to attempt it the best way you can. It’s a gamble and it might not even work, but you figure it’s worth a shot and you won’t really know if it fails or not since you’ll be too dead to care. + +You call General Gemma into your chambers. She arrives promptly as usual though she seems a confused as you never call anyone into your private chambers. + +“Ah good, you’re here. We’ve got some important things to talk about.” + +You begin to explain your plan to Cynthia. It’s a lot for her to take in, but she certainly understands it, she also provides some input that you didn’t immediately think about. + +In time a few more of your closest staff are informed of this plan and sworn to absolute secrecy then the plan is set into motion. You begin to make less public appearances and have little contact with anyone else except your staff, and begin to have propaganda spread about how you seem to be undergoing a transformation. + +You confine yourself to your private chambers most of the time and never leave the palace at all. It’s like a prison, but this is what you need to do in order to carry out this grand plan. You keep yourself busy by thinking up more ideas for your grand plan and making notes as you go. + +You think about having all your palace guards replaced by some sort of golem, but then that would require having mages around all the time and you’d rather not deal with that factor. So you do something else, you implement your own elite warrior program. The Silent Ones, utterly loyal soldiers conditioned from birth to serve the Nalin Empire and you no matter what. Their tongues are also removed so that they cannot speak any lies or speak out of turn. + +Year 88 + +The Silent Ones have replaced all other normal palace guards and nobody else other than a select few are able to enter the palace at all and only Cynthia is able to directly have contact with you. + +The palace becomes a very quiet place which you enjoy as you can now wander more around your own home without bumping into anyone other than your new guards. The Silent Ones may be young still, but you don’t doubt their loyalty or their skill. When you look them in the eyes, you can see the near worship they’ve been trained to have. Reminds you of the old days when you used to feel the same way about your leader, though at least they’ve gotten to see you and know you’re real, you felt you owed them that much for their indoctrination. + +Cynthia is supposed to meet with you today as she normally does. You figure it’ll be about the usual stuff She meets you in your private chambers as usual. + +“Hello Cynthia, I hope you are well today.” You say. +“I’m fine sir, and you?” +“The usual aches and pain, though ever since I threw everyone out of the palace, I’ve actually felt better than I have in years. Things sort of feel more relaxed when you don’t have a host of advisors constantly chattering in your ear all the time wanting to get your attention about something.” +“Yes, it would be a blessing I suppose. You sure you don’t want a medic or anything to keep track of your health?” +“What for? I’m going to live forever remember? Start bringing doctors in here and all there needs to be is one bystander to see it and start spreading lies about me possibly being dead or dying.” +“Well there are a few rumors about you already…” +“Ah yes, but just that there are strange goings on at this palace, changes and such. That coupled with the ongoing propaganda about me, the commoners and the average soldiers don’t really know what to think. It’s important that they believe that they don’t just have a series of tyrants watching them, they need an immortal sentinel.” +“Why not just create a religion and tie it into the state?” +“Oh no, not doing that. I’ve already seen some of that in action with my countless battles with barbarian tribes. In Rask, several of them were all practically worshipping the same faceless deities and continued to fight each other due to small disagreements in how it was interpreted. They would’ve done better to put aside their petty differences in doctrine and unite under it against us instead. Religion can unite people, but it can also divide them worse than anything else, it’s why I outlawed organized religions and cults a long time ago. It’s a silly concept anyway. The idea of beings with so much power over us, yet do nothing.” +“But who says they don’t? Maybe they work through us or something…” + +Your eyebrows rise a bit. + +“Why Cynthia, I didn’t take you for a believer in the gods.” +“I…I don’t know. I mean, even though there is less magic in the world nowadays, it still exists. There are so many fantastic things in this world that I just don’t think it’s out of the realm of impossibility to have gods.” +“Hmm, well I’m not convinced. I think holy men of all kinds just perpetuate this lie to serve their own ends.” + +At one time Cynthia might’ve been a little too scared to approach you about this, but given how close you’ve been over the years, perhaps she has gotten a little more familiar. + +“But, isn’t that similar to the lie we’re trying to perpetuate?” she says. + +You look at her with a completely serious expression, one of annoyance actually. She looks slightly worried now, and then you smile. + +“You’re probably right, but in our case we’re doing it for the greater good!” you laugh. + +As your laugher can be heard throughout the quiet halls of the palace, somehow it brings a little joy to the Silent Ones. Your happiness brings them happiness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 56 + +“Sir, you want us to completely wipe out all settlements with the plague?” Colonel Gemma asks. +“That’s what I said isn’t it? I’ve already assigned all the medics, healers and hedge wizards in the land to focus on the less affected areas. As for those places really bad off kill all the people, cleanse the area with fire, no more problem.” +“But, you’re going to have mass riots! The people will protest, even soldiers! I mean some of their families are in the quarantined areas!” +“Well I guess you better have those soldiers executed then if you think they’ll be a problem. In fact I’m surprised to hear you balk from these orders, I remember you when you were a young soldier wiping out Belzak women and children without hesitation.” +“I…I’m not sir, I’m just concerned about the repercussions of potentially losing more of our army.” +“You let me worry about the repercussions! Look here’s what you do, gather up all the old guard such as yourself to carry out this plan. In fact get those elves I made into orphans during the tribal wars. I’m guessing they should be good and obedient soldiers by now, but they probably won’t hesitate to murder some defenseless humans. The plague doesn’t seem to be affecting non-humans as much anyway, so they’re probably more resistant. In fact gather some of those kobolds too; they can clear out the bodies. Those little bastards seem to be immune altogether. That’s all for now.” + +Gemma nods and takes her leave. + +You have more concerns today, but you’re delegating them to the advisors as usual. If it isn’t a problem that can be solved by force, you’re not very interested in it. Brenda was right; ruling is a pain in the ass. When she was alive, you still had the “fun” part to focus on, now you have to do it all. This latest plague is probably the most exciting thing that’s happened in years. Still can’t figure out how and where it originated from though. A passing thought was it might be saboteurs from the Eternal Dominion, but they’ve been fighting amongst themselves ever since Edgar died. Never did find his body. You still wonder exactly what it was he wanted to discuss with you and Brenda. An alliance perhaps? A threat to submit? You’ll never know. + +The nation of Nalin has become a lot more totalitarian under your rule. You’ve actually made it even more “Empire like” than it already was mostly because it’s what you know, but also because it makes you at least feel like things are how they “should be”. Lately though even that hasn’t helped your mindset. You’ve become increasingly bored with just plain ruling, and after this plague nonsense is taken care of, you’re thinking of doing something to shake things up a bit. + +The obvious idea is to expand again, specifically aggressive expansion into Eternal Dominion territory. It’s been too long since you’ve experienced a good fight. + +The other idea you’ve had is one you probably wouldn’t have considered again, but at this point any change would be welcome. You’ve thought about just leaving. Leaving everything behind and the region entirely. +> Leave +You thought you left the Empire because it no longer felt like the government you swore to serve. Now that you’re actually in charge and made things more like how they should be, you still feel dissatisfied. Maybe you’ve just got too much “warrior” in you to deal with the minute details of rulership, maybe you just miss Brenda; maybe it’s a combination of several things. The point remains that you’re burned out on civilization in general and maybe you just need to be by yourself for a while. Granted you’ve always been a bit by yourself even among your fellow Eternals, but you’re thinking you need to be really alone. By yourself and maybe finding your own way elsewhere. + +So you pack up some of your belongings and leave. You don’t bother even telling anyone, you just go and head east. You keep to the wilderness and eventually when you step beyond the borders of eastern Nalin, you at last feel like a great weight has been lifted off your shoulders. After a few months, you don’t miss Nalin at all. + +In the years that follow you wander, seeing new sights and getting into a few skirmishes a long the way. Sometimes you genuinely attempt to find a place where you feel comfortable, but it just never happens and you continue your wandering. + +While you continue to feel the ravages of old age always creeping up on you, you stubbornly refuse to submit to them. Ever the warrior, you eventually meet your end in battle with a group of opportunistic svelk bandits.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 56 + +“Sir, you want us to completely wipe out all settlements with the plague?” Colonel Gemma asks. +“That’s what I said isn’t it? I’ve already assigned all the medics, healers and hedge wizards in the land to focus on the less affected areas. As for those places really bad off kill all the people, cleanse the area with fire, no more problem.” +“But, you’re going to have mass riots! The people will protest, even soldiers! I mean some of their families are in the quarantined areas!” +“Well I guess you better have those soldiers executed then if you think they’ll be a problem. In fact I’m surprised to hear you balk from these orders, I remember you when you were a young soldier wiping out Belzak women and children without hesitation.” +“I…I’m not sir, I’m just concerned about the repercussions of potentially losing more of our army.” +“You let me worry about the repercussions! Look here’s what you do, gather up all the old guard such as yourself to carry out this plan. In fact get those elves I made into orphans during the tribal wars. I’m guessing they should be good and obedient soldiers by now, but they probably won’t hesitate to murder some defenseless humans. The plague doesn’t seem to be affecting non-humans as much anyway, so they’re probably more resistant. In fact gather some of those kobolds too; they can clear out the bodies. Those little bastards seem to be immune altogether. That’s all for now.” + +Gemma nods and takes her leave. + +You have more concerns today, but you’re delegating them to the advisors as usual. If it isn’t a problem that can be solved by force, you’re not very interested in it. Brenda was right; ruling is a pain in the ass. When she was alive, you still had the “fun” part to focus on, now you have to do it all. This latest plague is probably the most exciting thing that’s happened in years. Still can’t figure out how and where it originated from though. A passing thought was it might be saboteurs from the Eternal Dominion, but they’ve been fighting amongst themselves ever since Edgar died. Never did find his body. You still wonder exactly what it was he wanted to discuss with you and Brenda. An alliance perhaps? A threat to submit? You’ll never know. + +The nation of Nalin has become a lot more totalitarian under your rule. You’ve actually made it even more “Empire like” than it already was mostly because it’s what you know, but also because it makes you at least feel like things are how they “should be”. Lately though even that hasn’t helped your mindset. You’ve become increasingly bored with just plain ruling, and after this plague nonsense is taken care of, you’re thinking of doing something to shake things up a bit. + +The obvious idea is to expand again, specifically aggressive expansion into Eternal Dominion territory. It’s been too long since you’ve experienced a good fight. + +The other idea you’ve had is one you probably wouldn’t have considered again, but at this point any change would be welcome. You’ve thought about just leaving. Leaving everything behind and the region entirely. +> Cythia Gemma (Personnel File) +From all accounts Cynthia had a very average upbringing, though it would appear that her family was never big on the military lifestyle as most of them seem to have had a history of working as laborers of some sort. You can only guess she was a bit of a black sheep. + +Actually you’ve never really known Cynthia on a personal level, but you’ve known her to be a competent soldier and later officer. Though currently a colonel, in some ways she’s still a little “unready” than her position would suggest, as she has risen through some of the ranks due to the older officers retiring or dying off. Still, she’s served with distinction during the tribal wars in the east and has kept on top of the bandit rings that sometimes still pop up and you wouldn’t have suggested her promotions if you didn’t think she could handle it. + +She’s always been a little too eager to please at times, but you really can’t fault her for being loyal.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Chapter 3A3: Remnant + + +Year 45 + +In all the years you served the Empire, you always felt like you were being held back in some way; lack of supplies, lack of equipment, ungrateful rioting peasants, or incompetent commanding officers. In most cases it was never a failing on your part. + +For the past few years, you’ve come to appreciate no longer having any of those limitations. In Nalin everyone more or less works for the greater good of the country. In fact it could be argued that this is more the case here than it ever was in the Empire, at least as far as you saw. Brenda eventually declared the biggest town (Now a city) Dalt to be the capital and moved there to better manage things. You of course are head of the army and remained at Fort Glory. + +Despite her initial inexperience at running a nation, Brenda has proven to do a fair job at it. Hand picking town mayors and other bureaucratic types to help run things certainly helps. What also helps is Nalin is a much smaller nation than the Empire was. The long arm of the army doesn’t need to go far to catch someone doing something against the law. + +Your intimidating reputation as head of the army obviously keeps people in line as well. Still, it isn’t complete fear; they know you’ll also keep them safe. When Usksha raiders started gathering around the southern borders again, you made sure to strike at them before they could attack any of the southern towns. You wish you could just go into the Usksha Desert and wipe them all out, but you know you just don’t have the resources for such a thing. Still, you did find a temporary solution in the form of an equally old annoyance. The kobold tribes who eventually realized that continuing to fight against you would result in genocide, agreed to relocate to the edges of the southern Nalin border where they would help defend it. This has worked out quite well. The harsh terrain conditions closer to the desert as well as the occasional Usksha raids keep the kobold population down as well as aid as a front line defense without having to waste valuable troops. + +For the most part everything has been running quite well, perhaps a little too well to the point where you get a little bored, but you don’t even mind that now. You’re just glad to be part of a nation that isn’t crippled by corruption. + +“This is the last remnant of the true Empire.” You sometimes think. + +Of course a certain person might disagree with that thought, namely Edgar. + +Edgar hasn’t contacted you or Brenda. Brenda wonders if it’s because he considers you both traitors for seceding from the Empire, and while that sounds like Edgar, you suspect it’s more because he’s been very busy. Ever since the Empire fell, Edgar has been busily trying to unite all the new “eternals” under his command and his results are quite surprising. He’s not only managed to do it, but he’s forged his own nation calling it the Eternal Dominion. He claims it is the successor to the Empire and as general he has vowed to reunite all the old lands by any means. So far he’s had varying success, but he’s doing well under the circumstances. He’s also created a strict hierarchy system where Eternals are considered to be the superior ruling class and everyone else is below them. You aren’t exactly sure what to make of this ideology. + +Assuming he’s successful, you know it’s only going to be a matter of time before Edgar comes marching an army from the north. Brenda has the same concerns and lately a majority of the military has been stationed on the northern borders. You just aren’t sure it’ll be enough. Brenda wonders if an alliance would be best, but the only other major power in the region is the Felkan Kingdom, and you’re not exactly sure if they would even be in a position to help, let alone willing to help. The enemy of my enemy isn’t always your friend. + +This ties in with the other matter that has come up is expansion. Nalin has had a steadily growing population for quite some time and since the south is hostile desert, the western side of Nalin is covered by an equally imposing mountain range and to the north is old empire lands suffering from destroyed infrastructure and near anarchy, the only logical conclusion is to the east. + +Slowly over time Brenda has encouraged Nalin citizens to systematically settle the eastern wilderness. The Empire for some reason never colonized this territory. It probably was marked, but just never exploited due to other more pressing matters. In any case, things have gone more or less peacefully as there have been no encounters with any hostile natives and it has proven to be great farming land. While things are peaceful there now, there’s no telling what could happen later and due to all the troops on the northern border, the eastern territory has a minimum number of soldiers there. Right now you and Brenda are discussing on how to best to maximize your defenses. + +“Have you sent envoys to Edgar? Is it possible that he wouldn’t be a problem in the future?” you ask Brenda. +“I actually have a couple times over the years and none of them ever returned. Which is why I’m convinced he’s pissed at us.” +“Hmm, well guess we better up keep the defenses on the northern borders then. Still, my own reports say he’s still nowhere near us. He’s been trying to tame the core region of the old Empire as well as maintain order in places he’s already conquered. There is the option to take redeploy some of the troops to the east.” +“But of course that would weaken us in the north.” +“Well yes, but if you’re really worried about the east, then that’s all I can suggest other than conscription.” +“Yeah, thought about that, and I’m not exactly keen on that idea. The people have been happy for quite awhile. We start conscripting like the Empire did, they might not be as happy.” Brenda says +“They’ll be even less happy, if Edgar comes barging down here declaring them all inferior while letting his Eternal troops run amok.” +“You wouldn’t allow that to happen.” Brenda says. +“Well I certainly would try my best to not let it happen, but let’s just say I’m not as certain about things as I once was, there is always the chance things can go horribly wrong.” +“Yeah, I understand that. (Sigh) Well, I suppose we can restart conscription. It’s not going to be popular, but I think if we stress how much of a threat Edgar potentially is, we’ll prevent the civil unrest. I’ll get my civilian advisors to start spinning the propaganda. I’ll leave it up to you how you want to deploy the troops; I think it would be best to put most of the conscripts on the east though, as I think we’ll need most of the experienced troops on the northern borders.” +“I’ll certainly consider all the options. I guess I’ll get to it then and leave you to your work as well.” You say and are about to leave when Brenda calls out to you. +“Hey, I know you’re very duty bound anyway, but I just want to say, I’m glad you’re here to help me.” +“Well I’m happy to help, but I’m sure you’d do just as well without me here.” +“Perhaps, but it’s sort of comforting to have another Eternal around to talk to. I just feel like we connect a lot better you know?” +“Yes, I do agree. We do share a bond that most others will never know.” + +Brenda goes to hug you and you’re a little unsure of how to react at first, but you hug her back. Before you leave Brenda asks you one more question. + +“Do you think Edgar’s ideology for his nation is correct? Do you think Eternals are superior to everyone else?” + +You think about the question for a moment, then answer. + +“I think Edgar thinks it is correct. In one aspect, I agree with it, I mean look at the pair of us. We’re both in the highest positions of power and people seem to be accepting of it. However, from my own experiences with the new Eternals I’m not actually convinced that THEY are superior to the average human except in combat and sadism which I suppose are good enough to instill fear into the masses.” +“Heh, but isn’t that what we do?” +“Of course, but we do it because we know it’s necessary to maintain order. The new Eternals engage in pointless cruelty because they enjoy it. They’re no better than svelks in that regard. They’re so eager to move on to next atrocity that they let their emotions cloud their purity of battle. I believe this is a weakness on their part and that is why I do not consider them superior.” + +Brenda smiles a bit at your answer. + +“The Empire really should’ve made you a general straight out of training. I’m certain you would’ve single handedly saved it.” +“I don’t know. Perhaps it was beyond saving by that time. If you’ll excuse me…” you say and leave Brenda’s office. + +As you leave the capital building, you think back on how you left the Empire. While you’re satisfied with your decision, part of you does wonder IF you could’ve done anything. Not just at that time, but before then. Is there another decision you could’ve made that would’ve prevented the situation you’re in now? + +After a brief run down in your mind of endless possibilities you quickly dismiss such thoughts as a fool’s game. You were right, the Empire was beyond any help you could’ve provided. Nalin is your concern now and you need to make the decisions to how to best protect it starting with deciding where to send the conscripts when Brenda enacts her decree. +> Send them to the east +If the Eternal Dominion ever does decide to attack, it’ll be better if your best soldiers are already assigned to the northern borders rather than having to scramble to pull them back from the east. You also figure the conscripts can put in their time exploring the eastern wilderness along with defending the few settlements you currently have there right now. + +When Brenda enacts conscription there is a lot of grumbling as was expected, but nothing more. Many of the conscripts are just glad you aren’t assigning them to the northern borders after hearing all the scary things about Edgar and his “baby eating” army. They won’t just be there without any supervision either, as you’ll still have a few veteran officers overseeing the situation. + +Months pass a life goes on as usual, and you begin to get reports on the eastern wilderness. Most of the scouts say that there is evidence of other denizens living further east. In fact there seems to be a small tribal war going on between four separate groups. Two of those are human barbarian tribes, one them is elven, but much wilder than what you know of them and the last one is a race you’re not familiar with called the Slin. They’re apparently reptilian in nature though, similar to the kobolds, but much larger and meaner. + +All of them save for one of the human tribes have been hostile to your scouts. Your scouts report that most attacks were accompanied by slurs and curses against the Empire. Even the Slin have been reported to utter a few recognizable insults in their strange reptilian tongue. + +You can only guess that all of these folks at one time came in contact with the Empire and it wasn’t a good experience. Makes sense they would mistake you for Empire troops as well considering that all your troops are either still wearing the same armor or very similar armor. Some of the veteran officers are even still wearing the same insignias. Sort of like you do actually. + +You’re very disappointed by the reports you’ve been getting on the various skirmishes your soldiers have had. Most of them involve heavy losses or in some cases outright defeats! Most of the conscripts apparently just aren’t cut out to handle these savages, they’re still too green and they also lack the desire to fight in the first place. + +The problem is worse than just losing soldiers though. Most of these were young males and females, sons and daughter taken from their homes that didn’t want to be soldiers in the first place. Predictably there is peasant backlash from this. + +Not willing to risk any more soldiers, you immediately order a halt to the scouting and make the decision that you’re going to have to go oversee things personally. Normally you wouldn’t mind this since you were getting bored lately, but you don’t like the circumstances to why you have to do it. + +Brenda certainly hopes you can fix things, because while keeping the peasants in line through force is a time-honored tradition, it isn’t really helping things right now. You can’t afford to have a full-scale revolt over this. What you’d like to do is wipe out every single one of those tribes as soon as possible before they can unite against you, but you know you can’t really do that without either toughening up the conscripts or taking your vets off the northern borders and since that really isn’t an option, you’re going to have to toughen up the recruits. + +The first thing you do is gather all your officers assigned there and reprimand them, stating if they were doing their job properly, you wouldn’t have to come here and do it for them. You might’ve even had some of them executed for incompetence, but you really can’t afford to lose anyone right now. + +Second of all you have a new camp built near one the eastern Nalin villages. This is where all the soldiers are going to be housed and training until further notice. Soldier rotations to be stationed at the few eastern settlements will be implemented. But most importantly a whole new training schedule is going to be put into action. You need to get these folks to start thinking the right way. It is your hope that in a couple of months, they start shaping up into the solider you need them to be. + +The first few weeks go pretty horrible. Your rigorous and harsh training causes some of the conscripts to go from low morale to suicidal. After three deaths, one of your officers claims you’re pushing them too hard and you’re going to have to ease up. + +“Captain Talger isn’t it?” you ask. +“Yes sir.” +“You did serve under the Empire didn’t you?” +“Yes sir, for many years until we…uh seceded.” +“You remember what the punishment was for questioning a superior’s decisions?” +“…yes…yes I do sir.” He says in a very worried tone. + +After a moment of silence, you tell him to follow you outside to the training grounds. + +You and Captain Talger walk to the middle of the grounds where several people are training, if they aren’t you tell one of your other officers to call everyone to the grounds immediately. When everyone arrives, you address the crowd. + +“It has come to my attention that I may be training you lot too hard. This has been told to me, by Captain Talger here and he may have a point.” + +Talger looks slightly surprised to hear you say that, he also relaxes a little. + +“I understand that many of you do not want to be here. I also understand that many of you are not naturally killers. Few are. Most of you would just like to go back home and live nice little safe lives. And contrary to popular belief, I actually can understand that as well.” + +You walk over to a nearby weapon rack and examine a few swords, taking one of fairly good quality. You begin to speak again. + +“However, that’s not going to happen.” You say and throw the sword to the ground near Captain Talger’s feet. + +“Captain pick up the sword.” +“Sir?” +“I SAID PICK UP THE SWORD!” you shout. + +Talger immediately picks up the sword. You see him tremble a little, but manages to keep it together. The crowd looks on anxious to see what will happen next. + +“Good, now attack me.” You say and draw your own blade. + +Talger nearly speaks, but stops himself. He realizes he doesn’t really have any options in this. He closes his eyes for a brief moment presumably to calm himself and then approaches you. + +He attacks you with some skill and nearly manages to hit you, but ultimately you are the superior warrior and you stop holding back. You manage to smash his face with the pommel of your own sword. His nose nearly explodes into a mass of blood, but before he falls, you grab his sword arm and break it, causing him to drop his weapon and cry out before tumbling to the ground. + +You kick the sword away and address the crowd again. + +“You see this? This man knew he was facing potential death and he did not run away. He faced it like a soldier and tried to do his best. He showed true dedication. You all should be so brave. That’s all I’m asking, it is not such a difficult lesson to learn.” + +You look down at Captain Talger who is trying hard not to scream out in any more pain and is having a hard time breath due to his bloody nose. + +“However, this man also spoke out against me…Captain Talger are you ready for your sentence?” +“…(wheeze)…argh….(wheeze)…I…acce…(wheeze) accept…” +“Your life will serve as a lesson to the rest, you will have an honorable burial.” You quietly say and bring your sword down on his chest killing him instantly. + +The crowd remains silent as you draw out your sword from Talger’s body. + +“Learn from this man’s bravery and dedication…but also learn from his mistakes. DO NOT FUCK WITH ME! You all WILL become proper soldiers and you WILL serve Nalin with nothing less than your best! If you do not, none of you will leave here alive. For anyone thinking about suicide I suggest you just come down here now and let me kill you so I’m not wasting my time training you fucking grub worms! Oh and in case you all want to get cute and unite by walking down here together as a group, I suggest that you don’t if you value your lives, because I have no problem killing every last one of you by myself if I have to! I’ve destroyed entire villages of werewolves including their young, it’ll take me even less time to lay waste to you pathetic shitheads.” + +You continue your rant. + +“Let me make this clear you maggots, we have enemies to the east of us, that won’t fucking hesitate to rip your guts out and eat them. Do you really think if you all just go back home they’re going to leave you alone? No, they’re going to eventually advance westward and invade all those nice little peaceful homes you all so desperately want to go back to. You want a nice safe home, well you’re going to need to earn your keep and fight for it. You either die in here or die out there; it’s your choice. The big difference is out there you have a chance against those fucking savages. In here with me? You’ve got none. So I suggest you all start getting your shit together now, I don’t want to repeat this lesson again.” + +You take you leave and head back to your office, leaving everyone to ponder your words. + +A few days later there is an improvement in performance. Still a few suicides here and even some training deaths, but its just the weak being culled from the heard as usual. +> Years pass... +Year 48 + +“We can’t take anymore forces off the northern borders you know that!” Brenda says. +“I know that better than anyone, but we’re making progress against those barbarians in the east. I just need a company…” +“And I said no! Look I know you’re mainly in charge of all the military stuff here, but you remember that I’m the one that’s in charge of the entire country! In fact I was running this area quite fine until you came along and started gradually changing things! Now I got a war in the east, peasant uprisings, a potential aggressor up north and a troop shortage that can’t possibly deal with all these problems! I’m beginning to wonder if you didn’t create all this chaos just to relive your Empire days again…” +“Hey! I’m done nothing but try to protect this nation and build it up! And I think my success in the east has proven that!” +“Look, I know you’ve done your part, and I hate to sound like an old Empire bureaucrat, but we can’t spare anymore soldiers for the eastern provinces. Can’t you make due with what you have?” +“Believe me, I would if could. Molding the conscripts into proper soldiers took longer than expected and even after I was successful, a small portion of them died in the process. Then I had hoped to get the one tribe that wasn’t initially hostile to us to ally with us as a useful diversion, but due to our initial losses against the other three tribes, the savages assumed we were too weak to make an alliance with and began attacking us too. I still think we would’ve been okay though if they had all stayed fragmented. After we wiped out the Belkaz Tribe for their poor judgment, the other three tribes formed a truce and united under one banner. It’s made fighting them a lot more difficult especially since they know every inch of the land better and they outnumber us. The only good thing is they haven’t really launched any effective counter attacks on our settlements so far, but they have been getting better at it.” + +Brenda rubs a hand over her face before speaking again. + +“You can’t just build up the defenses on the villages and maintain a solid defense?” +“Well that’s sort of where we’re at right now, and that’s the problem. The elves are no problem; the other tribe of humans isn’t either. It’s those Slin that are causing the most grief. They can replace their losses a lot quicker, or at least they must mature much quicker. In fact I’ve noticed a disturbing tactic by them, if they can call it that. Namely whenever there is a group attack by the three tribes, the Slin will deliberately hold back and the first to retreat when the battle starts to swing the wrong way. I see larger groups of them all the time yet they’re taking the least amount of losses from their side. At this point, I’m even wondering if there is an “alliance” so much as the Slin eventually enslaved the two remaining tribes and is using them to weaken us, while they continue to breed more lizards. If that is the case, we could be overrun even if we adopt siege mentality.” +“So what is it that you want to do exactly?” +“We know where the Slin home is at. I want to launch a full assault on it. I figure if we at least take them out, the other two tribes will be easy, they may even surrender, not that it’ll do them any good…” +“Right and I imagine that you want to lead this attack personally.” +“Of course.” +“Uh huh, and don’t you think it’s very dangerous to go rushing into the heart of enemy territory outnumbered and undermanned like you are?” +“Well I wouldn’t do it without the soldiers.” +“Right, and that’s why you aren’t doing it at all. Look, even I gave you the men you require, you’d have to promise me that you wouldn’t let a single one get killed, and you and I both know that’s not going to happen. The other thing is, I can’t really afford to potentially lose you either.” +“Brenda, have you so little faith in me? I’ve been in more dangerous situations than this! One time in Rask I…” +“Yes, yes, I know all your deeds and they’re all very impressive, but you’re not in your twenties anymore and we don’t have the soldiers! I’m sorry, but we’re dealing with multiple problems right now and I need every capable commander possible even the stubborn ones like yourself. Now that’s it, and I don’t want to hear anymore about this!” + +Brenda’s remark dismissing your accomplishments and implying that you’re no longer in your prime is incredibly insulting and you lose your composure. It doesn’t help that you’re already frustrated with how the eastern campaign has been playing out. You grab one side of her desk and flip it over. This noise causes two guards rush in, but they’re a little unsure of how to react given that it’s you. Brenda leaps back and puts her hand on her weapon, instinctively you put your own hand on your weapon as well. + +“Have you lost your mind?!” she says. +“No, my mind is quite clear, it’s you who has lost their mind if you think I’m going to just let you forget all the shit I’ve done, and let you just dismiss it like that! How soon you forget that I used to lead you into battle against kobolds and uskshas. I’ve been risking my life for years, what the hell have you been doing except stagnating here behind a desk much like this entire area would’ve been until I came along. I gave you a fucking purpose when the Empire fell!” + +You soon find that Brenda is every bit as mad at you as you are with her. + +“Yeah? Well maybe I didn’t fucking want it in the first place! You…you know what? If you want to take control, you go right ahead, because I’m done with it! Done! I’m leaving this shit behind.” + +Brenda walks past you, without fear and out the door. Her guards try to address her, but she pulls away and continues to walk, leaving you in her messy office. You’re still angry, so you don’t really believe she’s serious, however you ARE going to take those soldiers like you planned. + +A couple days pass and you’re about to make your way back to the east when you receive word that Brenda has completely disappeared. She can’t be found at all. You can’t believe that she would really abandon all this just because of an argument and part of you is a little concerned. You wonder if you should set aside your mission for a moment to find her. + +However, if she really is gone, then you’ll be head of Nalin by default, while this is somewhat appealing to you, it also means you have to deal with all the stuff that Brenda usually took care of, namely all the unfun stuff that doesn’t involve killing and battle. +> Go look for Brenda +You and her have been through too much to let this end like this, you don’t like it, but you decide to put off your mission. You tell the company commander to proceed to the destination and just help with the defenses until you return. You then inform Brenda’s advisors to take care of things while you personally search for her. They tell you that soldiers are already looking for her, but you say they aren’t doing a good enough job. + +You follow some leads based on previous reports, and while nobody else seems to be able to find Brenda, you’re a little more skilled in finding a fellow Eternal. Your tracking eventually leads further south into the kobold reservations. For some reason nobody thought to question these scaly bastards who turn out to be pretty helpful, though it’s probably because they’re very scared of you. They tell you they saw the “Eternal lady in charge of everything” walking by herself heading even further south towards the Usksha Desert. They think she’s going there to kill all the uskshas by herself, now they think you’re going to help her and seem pretty optimistic that the pair of you will eliminate the usksha forever. + +Brenda may be an Eternal, you still never pegged her as the sort to deliberately kill herself through battle. This can’t all be because of an argument. You quickly make your way to the last known direction that the kobolds saw her heading in. After a day of non-stop riding, you see her standing at the edge of the Usksha Desert. It’s obvious she hear you, but she continues to look out across the endless sand. + +“I thought you’d be on your way to wage war on those barbarians in the east by now.” She says as you get off your horse. +“Brenda, this is silly and not like you. Come on back to where you belong.” You demand. + +Brenda laughs at this statement. + +“You think you can order me around like a common soldier? Fuck you! You aren’t my commanding officer and haven’t been in years. I’m my own person and I’ll do whatever the hell I want!” +“And what do you want?” +“What I want? I want my husband back and that’s impossible.” +“So…you blame me for his death? Is that it?” + +Brenda shakes her head in exasperation. + +“No, no, no! This isn’t even about you! This is about me! It wasn’t until our argument, that I finally realized I’ve just been living a parody of life. The Empire is gone, my husband is gone. What the hell is my purpose for living anymore? I’ve just been running Nalin all these years, because quite frankly I don’t know what the hell to do with myself. You think I really care about any of that? No. That’s why I can leave it all behind, just like that.” +“Brenda, something must’ve kept you going, if you only just recently came to this conclusion.” +“Yeah, and that something were delusions. When you first came back, it was a nice. I knew we hadn’t seen each other in years, and I knew you were the same rigid emotionless golem you’ve been since we were young, but you were like a solid anchor in what was a sea of uncertainty during those dark days of the Empire’s fall. I had nobody else I could relate to, but we still had a bond of sorts. So I latched on to you and decided to go along with your ideas and it was comforting…for a while. Then as the years went by, I started to get bored, then dissatisfied. When the little war in the east began and problems began to crop up and headache after headache started, I seriously started questioning what I’m doing.” +“Okay…so you’re bored by the administrative duties…” +“I wish it was just that, but I don’t think you still understand. Let me see if I can explain it better.” + +Brenda approaches you and sits down on the ground. You do likewise, but you’re still alert about possible wandering usksha raiders who could ride by. Brenda comments on this. + +“See, look at you. Here we are just talking and you’re probably expecting to do battle with some wandering uskshas. That’s what gets you going. I know the fall of the Empire had to be pretty hard for you, seeing a system which you believed in fall apart and dissolve before your eyes. Even though you eventually knew it was all built on lies, a piece of you was still gone forever. However, I don’t think it was your true love. It might’ve been your first, but not your true love. Battle, war, killing. That is your passion. That’s your true love. As strange as that may be to some, I understand it.” + +Brenda’s somehow words ring true with you. You still aren’t quite sure on all this love stuff, but you’re listening. + +“The Empire was my first love as well. It probably was for all of us Eternals, but Roldan was my true love. I’m not getting him back, and I don’t even have the Empire to fall back on. I don’t know, perhaps by falling in love with Roldan, it weakened me as an Eternal and I should be stronger. I’m convinced it weakened Roldan.” +“We’ve been making progress in making Nalin similar to the Empire. It could even be better or greater if we work at it.” You say, unsure of how to react to her Roldan comments. +“Yes, I know that’s what you’ve been trying to do and for a while that’s what I thought might help me as well, but it’s not. Also, like I said, you at least can keep yourself happy for your love of battle. Nalin won’t replace the Empire, and even if it could, it won’t make any difference. It would be if I tried to replace Roldan with another…it won’t make me happier.” + +The way Brenda looks at you with that last statement implying that maybe she feels something for you. + +“Brenda, are you developing feelings for me?” you ask and she just smiles. +“As I’ve always said, I’ve always liked your directness. Let’s just say I might’ve, but I came to my senses. And that isn’t an insult towards you; it’s just not meant to be for me. Okay, I think I’ve wasted enough time.” She says and stands up. She begins to walk towards the desert. + +“Hey wait!” you call out. +“Goodbye, I’m sure you’ll make an excellent emperor for Nalin, or whatever you decide to call yourself.” + +You grab Brenda’s shoulder. + +“So this is it? You going to just commit suicide by walking into the desert?” +“I assume the uskshas will overwhelm me before the heat gets me, and why are you trying to stop me. I would’ve thought you of all people would’ve approved of dying in battle.” +“I would, but it just doesn’t make sense here! I mean you still have purpose! You’re still fully capable and healthy enough to accomplish many things!” +“Perhaps, but the thrill of living is gone and I’m not waiting any longer to see if it comes back. Now I’m heading into that desert and you can’t stop me, well you could, but that would no doubt have the same result I’m looking for.” + +You let Brenda go and stand in silence for a moment. You think about your own goals and your own past briefly. Brenda is right about several things concerning your personality and your motivations, but she doesn’t know everything. You run up next to her as she makes her first steps into the desert. + +“What’re you doing?” she asks. +“I’m joining you. I figure you could use the help.” +“...I don’t believe you. I’m trying to end my life with dignity and on my own terms and you’re going to get in the way of that?” +“Who said I was stopping you? I’m just traveling with you, I don’t have some magical ability to stop the usksha from attacking. And who said I was doing this all for you? My true love is battle remember? Fighting an endless amount of usksha in a hostile environment? Sounds like a challenge worthy of a warrior of my stature.” +“But…you can’t just throw away your life like this!” +“Who said I was? I fully intend on making it to the other end of the desert long after you’ve died.” You remark. + +Brenda begins to get annoyed. + +“What?! Look I know I’m out of practice, but I’m not going to die that quickly! I’m still a fucking Eternal you know!” +“Yes, I do know and that’s why I’m coming with you. You made a lot of good points about me, but one you forgot is that I’m not quite the emotionless golem you make me out to be. My time with you has reminded me of that bond I used to have with all of you before we all got separated. We’re Eternals, and I’m not going to leave you. Now if that means we die together in this desert, then so be it. BUT I want to propose something.” +“Oh? What’s that?” +“If we do manage to get to the other side of this desert, you need to abandon your death wish.” + +Brenda chuckles a bit. + +“Okay, I guess that’s fair. Hell, if we make it through I might just have to re-evaluate my fleeting feelings for you.” + +You don’t answer her on that comment; you just keep an eye out for potential danger. The heat isn’t a problem right now since it’s getting dark, which is at least one good thing. As you continue to walk Brenda begins to speak again. + +“So what makes you think there IS another side to this desert? Not like it’s ever been explored before. For all you know it’s just endless desert” Brenda asks. +“Oh I dunno. I just have a hunch. It has to end somewhere. Besides I’m curious now. I once briefly considered leading troops into here before, when we were first assigned to deal with the usksha.” +“Really? What stopped you?” +“The fact that Edgar was screaming in my ear about it meant it was bound to be a bad idea. Common sense mostly. Strange that I had more of it back then, than I do right now.” +“There’s still time for you to turn back.” +“What and run Nalin by myself? Not for me. I’d likely end up executing the entire nation. I wasn’t meant to rule…shh hear that?” +“Yeah, sounds like those lizards that the usksha like to ride. They’ll be here soon. Just like old times eh?” +“Like I never left.” +“I…I’m glad you’re here with me.” Brenda says looking at you. + +You look at her and nod. + +“Me too Brenda. Me too.” + +The pair of you soon engage the usksha in battle, just one of many during your time in the desert. + +Many believe you both died in the desert eventually succumbing to the heat and your wounds. The kobolds still tell an interesting story of how you both died, but then became vengeful spirits that continue to stalk the usksha to this day. + +A few believe you managed to make it through and made a new life with each other in a far away land. + +What ultimately happened to you and Brenda is unknown and lost to time.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 48 + +“We can’t take anymore forces off the northern borders you know that!” Brenda says. +“I know that better than anyone, but we’re making progress against those barbarians in the east. I just need a company…” +“And I said no! Look I know you’re mainly in charge of all the military stuff here, but you remember that I’m the one that’s in charge of the entire country! In fact I was running this area quite fine until you came along and started gradually changing things! Now I got a war in the east, peasant uprisings, a potential aggressor up north and a troop shortage that can’t possibly deal with all these problems! I’m beginning to wonder if you didn’t create all this chaos just to relive your Empire days again…” +“Hey! I’m done nothing but try to protect this nation and build it up! And I think my success in the east has proven that!” +“Look, I know you’ve done your part, and I hate to sound like an old Empire bureaucrat, but we can’t spare anymore soldiers for the eastern provinces. Can’t you make due with what you have?” +“Believe me, I would if could. Molding the conscripts into proper soldiers took longer than expected and even after I was successful, a small portion of them died in the process. Then I had hoped to get the one tribe that wasn’t initially hostile to us to ally with us as a useful diversion, but due to our initial losses against the other three tribes, the savages assumed we were too weak to make an alliance with and began attacking us too. I still think we would’ve been okay though if they had all stayed fragmented. After we wiped out the Belkaz Tribe for their poor judgment, the other three tribes formed a truce and united under one banner. It’s made fighting them a lot more difficult especially since they know every inch of the land better and they outnumber us. The only good thing is they haven’t really launched any effective counter attacks on our settlements so far, but they have been getting better at it.” + +Brenda rubs a hand over her face before speaking again. + +“You can’t just build up the defenses on the villages and maintain a solid defense?” +“Well that’s sort of where we’re at right now, and that’s the problem. The elves are no problem; the other tribe of humans isn’t either. It’s those Slin that are causing the most grief. They can replace their losses a lot quicker, or at least they must mature much quicker. In fact I’ve noticed a disturbing tactic by them, if they can call it that. Namely whenever there is a group attack by the three tribes, the Slin will deliberately hold back and the first to retreat when the battle starts to swing the wrong way. I see larger groups of them all the time yet they’re taking the least amount of losses from their side. At this point, I’m even wondering if there is an “alliance” so much as the Slin eventually enslaved the two remaining tribes and is using them to weaken us, while they continue to breed more lizards. If that is the case, we could be overrun even if we adopt siege mentality.” +“So what is it that you want to do exactly?” +“We know where the Slin home is at. I want to launch a full assault on it. I figure if we at least take them out, the other two tribes will be easy, they may even surrender, not that it’ll do them any good…” +“Right and I imagine that you want to lead this attack personally.” +“Of course.” +“Uh huh, and don’t you think it’s very dangerous to go rushing into the heart of enemy territory outnumbered and undermanned like you are?” +“Well I wouldn’t do it without the soldiers.” +“Right, and that’s why you aren’t doing it at all. Look, even I gave you the men you require, you’d have to promise me that you wouldn’t let a single one get killed, and you and I both know that’s not going to happen. The other thing is, I can’t really afford to potentially lose you either.” +“Brenda, have you so little faith in me? I’ve been in more dangerous situations than this! One time in Rask I…” +“Yes, yes, I know all your deeds and they’re all very impressive, but you’re not in your twenties anymore and we don’t have the soldiers! I’m sorry, but we’re dealing with multiple problems right now and I need every capable commander possible even the stubborn ones like yourself. Now that’s it, and I don’t want to hear anymore about this!” + +Brenda’s remark dismissing your accomplishments and implying that you’re no longer in your prime is incredibly insulting and you lose your composure. It doesn’t help that you’re already frustrated with how the eastern campaign has been playing out. You grab one side of her desk and flip it over. This noise causes two guards rush in, but they’re a little unsure of how to react given that it’s you. Brenda leaps back and puts her hand on her weapon, instinctively you put your own hand on your weapon as well. + +“Have you lost your mind?!” she says. +“No, my mind is quite clear, it’s you who has lost their mind if you think I’m going to just let you forget all the shit I’ve done, and let you just dismiss it like that! How soon you forget that I used to lead you into battle against kobolds and uskshas. I’ve been risking my life for years, what the hell have you been doing except stagnating here behind a desk much like this entire area would’ve been until I came along. I gave you a fucking purpose when the Empire fell!” + +You soon find that Brenda is every bit as mad at you as you are with her. + +“Yeah? Well maybe I didn’t fucking want it in the first place! You…you know what? If you want to take control, you go right ahead, because I’m done with it! Done! I’m leaving this shit behind.” + +Brenda walks past you, without fear and out the door. Her guards try to address her, but she pulls away and continues to walk, leaving you in her messy office. You’re still angry, so you don’t really believe she’s serious, however you ARE going to take those soldiers like you planned. + +A couple days pass and you’re about to make your way back to the east when you receive word that Brenda has completely disappeared. She can’t be found at all. You can’t believe that she would really abandon all this just because of an argument and part of you is a little concerned. You wonder if you should set aside your mission for a moment to find her. + +However, if she really is gone, then you’ll be head of Nalin by default, while this is somewhat appealing to you, it also means you have to deal with all the stuff that Brenda usually took care of, namely all the unfun stuff that doesn’t involve killing and battle. +> Continue with your mission +If Brenda wants to abandon her duty, you’re more than willing to take up the slack. Wouldn’t be the first time anyway. You don’t know if she’s just sulking or really not returning, but either way you’re pretty disappointed in her right now. You always thought she was stronger than that, you guess that’s what love does to someone. Makes them weak. It’s probably why Roldan wasn’t alert to stop that Shadow Guard that killed him. + +You can’t dwell on such things now; you’ve got more important matters to deal with. You tell Brenda’s advisors that as of now you’re taking over rulership of Nalin and that you want them to take care of things while you destroy the eastern barbarians. They tell you that there are several matters that really require your attention, but you say eliminating the threat in the east is your primary concern first. + +You head east with your company of veteran troops and meet up with the rest of your forces at Camp Steadfast. You explain your plan of attack and how it is to be carried out. Granted there isn’t much to it other than marching straight into the heart of Slin territory and wiping them all out, but you try to give a motivational speech, to improve their morale and mindset because it isn’t going to be easy. + +At the crack of dawn, you begin your march. Doesn’t take long before you face opposition. You defeat them with ease for the most part. When you begin to enter the woods though that’s when things get tougher. + +The elves and the degenerate human tribe known as the Fleg begin to attack you from the trees. Or more accurately, the elves stay in the trees and the Fleg throw themselves at you like the suicidal idiots they are. A few of your men catch arrows, and some of them are killed by the various traps the elves have set, but eventually the Fleg are all killed and the elves have either fled or run off as well. + +You take a moment to rest and regroup. Your company is still strong, but you aren’t at the numbers you’d like to face the Slin. You curse yourself for not spreading them out a little more, part of you is still a little pre-occupied with Brenda leaving. + +“Damn it, get your head in the battle.” You mutter to yourself. + +After taking a very short break, you continue towards where you know the Slin make their home. It’s a slightly swampy area. Not as bad as the time you spent in the Delerg Province, but it still isn’t the best of fighting conditions for you and your soldiers. You start meeting large groups of Slin hissing and lumbering at you from all sides. Your soldiers put up a good struggle as usual and you fight through what seems to be the endless horde, but you suffer many losses before you even make it their cave lair. + +One of your men begs you to turn back as he does not believe you have the numbers to take on the rest of the Slin. After all who knows how many are in there. You don’t listen though. You’re furious by their desire to leave everything, and it doesn’t help that you’re still angry about Brenda doing the same thing. + +“We’re nearly there and you dare suggest retreat on the verge of victory? I’ve faced worse odds and more dangerous enemies by myself! You’ve all been slacking off on the northern borders too long and getting weak! That ends today, I’m in charge of this company, I’m in charge of this army, I’m even in charge of the whole fucking nation of Nalin! Now we’re going to finish this and we’re going to win! There’s going to be a lot of changes after this is over, now come on!” + +You and your men fight your way into the cave entrance, several large Slin come lumbering from various tunnels hissing and charging at you. There’s so many that you sometimes have to resort to punching the beasts because there isn’t even any room to swing your sword. The Slin aren’t weaklings though and are creatures of great strength, you and your remaining soldiers are beaten severely. You continue to struggle, but several of your bones are broken, your flesh is ripped and torn and you’ve got a few chunks bitten out of you. + +As more Slin run towards your position, you look around and see you’re the last of your company left. You don’t understand what went wrong. You’ve been in worse situations, you’ve survived worse conditions, how is it that you’re losing and on the verge of death? + +In your last moments you see your loss as not your failure, but those around you for not being as strong as you. It hardly matters in the end as the Slin still put your skull as a trophy along side the rest of the “weaklings” they killed.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You can’t bring yourself to be some like the svelk and be mercenary scum who have no other goals than to earn coin. By the same token you’re not going to pledge yourself to yet another government that will probably be just as corrupt and decadent as the one you just left. Maybe in a way, Kane was right. He was obviously suffering a mental breakdown as well as being manipulated, but the concept of forming your own nation would be the surest way to ‘get it right.” You could run things the way they SHOULD be. + +The question is where to start? You’d need at least an army to conquer anything and right now you don’t really have that. You’re sure you could probably get those “new eternals” to follow you, but there still isn’t enough of them even if you were inclined to subject yourself to the torture of futility. Regular soldiers would probably follow you, but nowadays they’re so scattered that you’d literally have to travel all over most of the Empire to collect them, not to mention all the fighting you’d have to do during this state of anarchy. The only place you can think of is the Nalin province. It’s virtually the one place still left in the empire that isn’t suffering outright revolts, though the citizens are reportedly still severely disgruntled, Brenda is also there in command of Fort Glory. Perhaps she’ll see the wisdom of your plan and help you, if that’s the case you should be able to pull it off. + +You find a nearby horse and set off for the south. Along the way you see the landscape of the Empire, which at one time was orderly and even idyllic is now burning and in tatters. Despite the chaos you don’t need to do any battle, not even when passing groups of angry peasants who are taking every opportunity to get revenge on their oppressive government and its agents in all forms. You can only assume your reputation is enough to scare them off or they don’t even recognize you. If it’s the latter then it only confirms your belief that you weren’t making that much of a difference in the Empire anyway. + +When you get to the Nalin province you find it in much better condition than the rest of the places in the Empire that you’ve ridden through. Fort Glory looks slightly different, namely it looks more heavily fortified and a lot better cared for than when you left this place. When you approach Fort Glory, you are momentarily halted by the guards, but when you tell them who you are and that you need to see Brenda they immediately let you in. + +Brenda is very surprised to see you. She looks a lot different from the teenage girl you parted company with. Her hair is going gray and she has a very “tired” look about her. As if the whole weight of responsibility is crashing down on her, but she still carries herself with confidence and strength. + +“When my soldiers told me it was you I couldn’t believe it, it’s been so long since we’ve seen one another. Wow you haven’t really changed at all.” She says almost smiling. +“It is good to see you too, Brenda. Still as pretty as ever.” You say, unsure of how to respond. +“Pretty? Now that’s a word I never thought I’d hear you say. Let alone to me. Maybe you have changed more than I thought.” +“Well I mean I never thought you were ugly, Brenda. I was just trying to reply to your compliment with one of my own.” +“Ha ha, a complete lack of tact. That’s more like the old you. Still it’s nice to hear, though I hope for your sake, you’re a better sweet talker to the other girls out there.” +“Brenda, I have to talk to you in private about something it’s very important and I don’t know how you’re going to react.” You say by passing her statement. +“Oh geez, you’re not going to suddenly confess some sort of hidden love for me that you’ve kept to yourself all these years are you?” +“What?! NO! This is something important!” + +Brenda’s a little amused by how you worded your statement especially since she was joking. You just aren’t in a “joking mood” though right now and after what you have to tell Brenda you doubt if she will too. + +“Look, I apologize for my outburst. It’s just that this is really important.” +“Okay, we’ll go to my office and speak privately there.” + +When you get to Brenda’s office you don’t bother beating around the bush and you just tell her everything. Your thoughts, feelings, actions and ultimately your plan and why you came here. Now she really is amazed. You of all people were practically a paragon of duty and loyalty and here you are openly confessing that you’ve abandoned the Empire. + +“Okay, wow. Well you’ve just been full of surprises today.” +“Will you help me?” +“What exactly am I supposed to do? I mean are you seriously asking me to just hand over control of this fort to you while you play pretend emperor?” +“No! I mean shit I don’t know I haven’t thought out all the details yet I guess. It’s just (sigh) Look Brenda, I just left ALL I’ve known. Everything I’ve ever been taught to believe in is GONE, if it ever existed to begin with. I didn’t have many choices on what to do next and this seemed to be the best choice all things considered. I came here because I didn’t know where else to go quite frankly. I see now that this was just as foolish an idea leaving the Empire in the first place, I guess…” +“No it wasn’t.” +“What wasn’t?” +“Leaving the Empire. I mean I certainly understand your reasons. I share them. Maybe not in the exact same way, but they are there. Hell I think in these dark times, everyone shares them. I dunno perhaps you just made that extra step that the rest of us here aren’t quite willing to make yet.” +“What do you mean?” you ask. +“I mean everyone in this fort and probably the entire province would be for seceding from the Empire at this point. I think the only reason why nobody has done it yet or even rioted is due to way we run things here at Fort Glory. We found it much better by just letting people go about their business if we’re not threatening them all the time and actually defending them from real external threats. The only real problem here is the high taxes which the Empire imposes on this region, that of course tends to make people a little grumpy, but not quite enough to riot. They remember what this place used to be like after all." +“Not threatening people you say? That’s a pretty wild concept. Did you think that one up?” +“Nah, the credit goes to Roldan, he was the first to suggest it. He probably would’ve made a better fort commander too and if he had been promoted instead of me, he might still be here…” +“Brenda, okay you can’t think like that. If he’d been promoted then you’d probably be dead and…” +“I know, I know. I just get a little sad thinking about him not being here sometimes. Okay, anyway let’s do it. Let’s break away from the Empire. Like you said, shouldn’t take much convincing, though I hope you’re prepared for a shitstorm from this. We might not much problem from the population, as I said they’ll probably be relieved to not have to pay the high taxes any more, but we’re going to get Empire armies to come down here eventually.” +“Possibly, but it’s pretty bad Brenda. I’m not sure if they’ll be able to really do anything, the government is on the brink of collapse. If anything we might be getting an influx of people wanting to come here to join. You’re just lucky they didn’t saddle you with those new eternals. If they had, I guarantee this place wouldn’t be as nice as it is now.” +“So I’ve heard. I suppose I am lucky. This whole province is lucky.” + +Brenda takes a deep breathe before speaking again. + +“Okay so how exactly are we doing this? I mean what system are we going to have in place?” +“Well, given what you’ve told me about how you’ve been running things, I’ve had one new idea. How about YOU run this place and you be the leader?” +“ME? But…I don’t know anything about running a nation or anything like that!” +“Seems to me you’ve been running this place pretty well for years. You know the people and better yet, they know you. I think if I was in charge…well they’d think they were living under the Empire again. No, I realize now my place isn’t to rule, but to fight. It really is what I’m good at. About the only thing.” +“Now come on, you have great leadership skills!” +“Leadership skills for combat perhaps, but not for ruling. I think whatever is it that you had with Roldan made you and him more in touch with human nature and that’s a good thing.” +“Yes…it was a good thing. I just wish he was here. I could certainly use his help right now.” Brenda says reminiscing. + +You pat Brenda on the shoulder in your effort to comfort her; she tells you she’s fine though. You and Brenda at that point set your plan in motion to split from the Empire. +> Brenda (Loss) +After discussing a few more things about the plan to break away from the Empire, you change the subject to a more personal nature. + +“So other than the slow collapse of the Empire…how have you been doing?” you ask. +“Me? I’ve been okay. Just been taking one day as it comes, I guess in times like this though, that’s about all anyone can do. I’ve just been keeping myself occupied, sometimes hard to do since like I said, it’s relatively peaceful here. Guess our plan might shake thing up a bit though.” Brenda remarks. +“Yeah, hopefully for the better.” + +There is a long pause before Brenda continues the conversation + +“I just want to say, I appreciated the letter you sent when Roldan died.” Brenda says. +“Well I felt it was only right, I probably didn’t have the words that Gerald might’ve had though.” +“No, they were fine. I was almost just as upset to hear about him as well that day, even though I hadn’t spoken or seen him in years. Had a hard time keeping it together for the next few months, don’t really know how I did it.” +“You’re an Eternal, and you’ll always have an inner strength to carry you through the hard times when you need it.” +“Perhaps. (Sigh) It’s been a few years now and I still think about Roldan. I mean I know there was always the potential for danger, and one of us getting killed was a possibility, but I dunno it just doesn’t seem real at times. I remember when we first started to desire one another, it didn’t seem real either, but then it just felt so right. We knew each other, we grew up together, and we just operated in perfect sync.” +“Yes, Roldan mentioned feeling the same way. He loved you very much.” +“I know.” +“So…where did you bury Roldan?” +“I didn’t. I had his body burned and his ashes spread to the wind outside Fort Glory. He would’ve wanted it that way. He said when he died, he didn’t want some lavish military funeral. Still, a lot of the soldier still paid their respects by standing on the battlements and giving a salute in unison.” +“Well, sounds a lot nicer than what I could do for Gerald. After the mission I dragged his body out of the swamp and back to Sinkhole. The local Empire officials said they wouldn’t bother with a proper funeral since he had no family and that it would’ve been better to just leave him in the swamp. After slamming that pencil pusher’s head into the desk, I went straight to the local undertaker and had him dig a hole for Gerald in the cemetary. Not the most elaborate of funerals, but he deserved a proper buried rather than just being left face down in the mud…though I guess in the scheme of things it hardly matters, its still in the ground and getting eaten by worms…” +“No, no, you did the right thing.” Brenda says reassuringly. “You always did look out for the rest of us in some way. That’s why I never blamed you for Roldan’s death. I knew you would’ve prevented it if you could’ve.” +“Yes, I would’ve.” +“Well, let us not dwell on such dark issues too much longer, we’ve got other things to think about. Better ones for a better future, like you said.” + +Brenda smiles at you and you return the gesture. + +You feel sort of funny about it, but you briefly wonder if you had still been stationed here instead of Roldan, would you and Brenda gotten together?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>From the trajectory of the bolt, the assassin is in front and probably was trying to hit you instead of Gerald. You immediately run for the nearest tree as several more bolts whiz past you. + +When you reach the tree two Shadow Guards jump down from it and attempt to stab you. You kick one in the groin as hard as you can, while deflecting the blow of the other with your sword. You dodge another attack by falling to the ground and chopping the shadow at one of his legs, nearly hacking it off. When he falls in agony you finish him off with your sword. + +The one staggering around with damaged man part, finally recovers, but attempts to disappear again. You throw your dagger at him as he begins to turn invisible, impaling him in the stomach. Meanwhile it appears that Captain Gruz is taking care of the one who was shooting bolts at you. + +“Bastard!” he says with his boot on the shadow and chopping the shadow’s head in two with his axe. Blood and brains splatter everywhere. + +You move around and scan the area cautiously and try to see if there’s any more shadows lurking about, but if there were they would’ve either attack you by now or run off. When you’re confident that none are left you walk over to Gerald who is dead already. + +“FUCK!” you shout while kicking a nearby piece of clumped up mud. You don’t feel sadness this time so much as you feel frustration. All those years he was performing commando raids in Felkan territory and he gets killed like this? Not even in close combat! Somehow it doesn’t seem right. Just like how Roldan died. You search Gerald’s body and find the letter he was planning on sending Brenda about Roldan, it seems you will have to do it now. Perhaps even alter it. + +Captain Gruz walks over to you, he has a few bolts in him, but he doesn’t seem particularly bothered by them. + +“Feh, I’ve had way worse than this.” He says as he pulls them out. “Y’know we’re on our own now.” +“What do you mean?” you ask. +“I’m saying these bolts, they ain’t Shadow Guard, these are dark elven quality. That fucker over there with his head cleaved in two had one of those fancy repeating dark elven crossbows too. And while I know dark elves to be treacherous bitches that’ll switch sides to whoever’s paying the most, they would NEVER allow anyone to use their equipment. My guess is those mercs that were going to meet us are all dead, well either that or they ran off.” +“Good, I want to kill the rest of these shadows anyway.” You say and proceed on to the ruins. + +Your next step of your journey confirms Gruz’s theory. You and he see signs of battle on your way to the ruins. Several of the bodies are dark elven, but an equal amount are Shadow Guard. + +“Looks like they were ambushed. Heh, pretty hard to do with dark elves. Still, it also looks like the dark elves gave the shadows a hell of a fight. Looks like those are the ruins up ahead. I’m guessing there probably aren’t too many left, this should be over pretty quick.” + +You and Gruz dispense with caution and boldly march into the ruins. You both look around as the crumbling statues of old forgotten gods loom over you. Eventually you find who you’re looking for in the remains of a temple that’s covered in vines and partially sinking into the swamp + +A single Shadow Guard stands over the bodies of several others of his kind. Near the bodies are empty flasks. + +“I’ll be with you soon my brothers and sisters. And especially you Draven.” Cyrus says looking at the bodies and ignoring you completely. +“Aw, how sweet. Glad you decided not to pussy out like the rest of your buddies by poisoning yourself and are at least are willing to face your death like a man.” Gruz replies. +“Yes, well it still remains to be seen Gruz. Though speaking of being a man, I’m impressed that you actually showed up here. I thought that you would’ve continued to hide and try to keep your involvement of these events a secret as you have for all these years.” + +This statement from Cyrus causes you to pause and look at Gruz. He looks guilty of something for a moment and then gives a toothy smile. + +“I wasn’t hiding Cyrus. I was waiting. Waiting until the day when I could finally track you down. It wasn’t my fuck up that got us into this mess. We could’ve been strong enough together to make a break from the Empire if you hadn’t decided to backstab us at Fort Destiny to save your own skin. Hah! See how well that turned out. Look at you now.” + +Even as jaded as you have become about the Empire, you are somewhat surprised about Captain Gruz…but in retrospect, somebody had to have some sort of input on having all those orcs transferred to Fort Defiance. Despite this revelation you’re too numb to excessively care. All you know is over the past few days you’ve seen two of your fellow Eternals die ignobly while doing their duty for the Empire. Something these traitors have obviously disregarded a long time ago. + +“Well, what’s it gonna be lad? You killin’ me or the shadow first?” Gruz asks. +“I think I’ll stick with the original plan. We’ll kill the shadow together, then you and me are going to settle up.” You say calmly. +“That’s the spirit boy!” Gruz laughs and steps towards Cyrus. + +Cyrus makes no more small talk or last minute threats. He focuses purely on combat. You expect him to use his Shadow Guard tricks like poison or invisibility, but he doesn’t. + +He easily dodges Gruz’s powerful yet clumsy attacks and lands a few well placed strikes on him, but Gruz shrugs them off like you’ve seen him do the whole time you’ve been fighting along side him. You can only imagine what an unstoppable juggernaut he must’ve been back in his younger days. + +As for you, you match Cyrus in sword skill. Whatever he learned from the Shadow Guard won’t help him in a face-to-face battle with you. All it takes is for you to take advantage of his divided concentration and you land a mortal blow, slicing his side clean open. + +Cyrus falls and deflects your attempt to split his head open, but he drops his sword from the force of your blow in the process. Weaponless, tired and bleeding out from a deep hole in his side, Cyrus accepts defeat. + +“Do it. Eternal slave of the Empire.” He says coldly and then you fulfill his request by decapitating him. + +You quickly turn to face Gruz, who already has his axe ready. + +“Alright Eternal, let’s finish this.” + +You and Gruz clash weapons. As you battle, you’re reminded of the times when you were still a child and how he taught you to fight. +CLANG! +How he told you to keep a calm head in battle. +TING! +How he told you to serve the Empire. +SHING! +How he had confidence in your skills. +CLANK! +How he saw you as a leader. +CLANK! +How he told you not to die for the Emperor…but to make the other dumb bastard die so that you could continue serving the Emperor + +SWIPE! SLICE! SLISH! SLISH! SLASH! + +How he told you that failure wasn’t an option. + +Gruz finally succumbs to his multiple wounds and falls to one knee leaning on his axe in an effort not to completely collapse. + +“Damn…shit….” Gruz gasps as he breathes heavily and feels his strength completely leaving him. +“Why?” you ask him. +“Why? Heh heh.” Chuckles a bit while at the same time coughing up some blood. “After all you’ve experienced in your service of the Empire, you have to ask me why? My people had already been tamed and conquered decades ago and I bought into the same bullshit you did when I was a little green snot that didn’t know any better. I worked my way up the ranks and did pretty good for myself, but for what? To be a lap dog that begged for a treat every time I did something right and get slapped down because I was rising too much above my so called station? I was still holding on to an idea that was long gone or never existed to begin with. It wasn’t until shortly after your training was complete that I started to seriously change my mind. The Felkan war and the conspiracy that the Shadow Guard came up with just made it easier… I think I’m gonna just lay down for a while.” Gruz says as he loses his last battle with staying conscious. + +You step towards him with your sword ready to strike, but instead you just watch him slowly drift off and hear his last words. + +“I lived a lot longer than I should have. This is a good death for an orc. I’ve seen your new replacements Eternal. They’re monsters. They’ll finish off what’s left of this decaying husk of an Empire, not save it. Good riddance. Heh, don’t worry though; you’ll probably survive the coming shit storm. You’ll outlive everyone.” He says and then finally dies. + +With the way things have been going lately, Gruz may be correct. It doesn’t necessarily make you feel any better though. +> Letter to Brenda (An apology) +Dear Brenda + +I’ve never been any good with this sort of stuff, but I hope this letter will explain the exact nature of what happened. + +It is with the sincerest regret to inform you that Roldan has died in the line of duty. I will be having his body shipped back to you, so that you may have a proper funeral for him or how ever you wish to dispose of the shell that once contained a great warrior. I suppose I should also mention that Gerald also died during the mission. He actually wrote the first letter to you, but given his death soon after, I felt that it be more appropriate to rewrite it altogether. + +How I wish I could at least tell you Roldan died a great noble death, slaying hundreds of enemies before falling, but that was not the case. Instead, he was practically assassinated by suicidal Shadow Guards that blew him up and themselves as well, because they were too cowardly to face him in an honorable fight. + +I know the two of you fell in love and were married. I am not an expert on such things, and I can’t imagine the sense of loss that you will feel because of this, but know that you have my sympathies. When I saw him die before my very eyes from a gutless attack I felt a sadness dwell inside me as I had lost a comrade in arms. + +I also felt anger. Anger that I wasn’t there to stop it and anger at those who did it. I realize though the anger at myself was pointless. There is no point in blaming yourself in situations like this. Better to deal with the direct cause of the problem and focus all of the anger towards that instead. + +I don’t know if it will be of any comfort, but I killed all those responsible. I wish I could’ve killed more, but most of the spineless shadows committed some sort of ritual suicide by the time we reached their hideout. I did manage to kill their leader Cyrus though. I also killed Captain Gruz. Turned out he was a traitor the whole time. I’m beginning to wonder who isn’t a traitor nowadays. + +The past few days have seemed surreal, like nothing is making as much sense anymore, but then I think things stopped making sense the day I had to kill Kane. The Empire isn’t like how we learned about when we were children. Everything was so much simpler then. + +I’m going to stop writing now, because I think I’m getting off focus of the important topic at hand and that’s Roldan. I’ll close this letter with letting you know that in his last moments he spoke fondly of you, and that he loved you. + +We should all be so lucky to have something so certain in life and actually have it last.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 30 + +“This place won’t be the same without you sir. I don’t know how I’ll be able to run this place as well as you.” Lieutenant Verant says as you finish packing your things. +“You’ll do fine lieutenant, or should I say captain. You’ll probably get an official promotion soon. Just remember, when the citizens protest I’ve found that flogging one family with children at random keeps the rest in line. Can’t really afford to execute them like we did in the old days, too many ogre attacks already doing a good job of that. Well at least you don’t need to worry about the giants as much anymore.” +“You always did know best sir.” +“Well, I tried to do what I could up here. I don’t know why I’m being stationed to Delerg Province. It’s one of the more peaceful places of the Empire next to the Nalin province. I would prefer to be here or on the Felkan frontlines where I could do more to serve, but I suppose the Emperor knows best where my skills will be used.” +“Oh well I’ve heard the war with the Felkans is coming to an end soon.” +“Yes, I’ve heard that as well…and it concerns me the things that I’ve heard why it’s ending. Mass riots in the major cities of the Empire, soldier shortages, even heard about some of those traitorous shadow criminals carrying out terrorist tactics. And because of these problems what do we do with the Felkans? Another non-aggression pact! We should be butchering them and burning down their cities, not making peace with them again. If all of the Emperor’s enemies had one neck, I would sever it with one sword swipe.” + +Verant says nothing after your rant. Indeed over the past few years he’s heard you rant about the troubles of the Empire a lot more and knows to keep quiet. But if you’re making more outbursts than usual, it’s only because the Empire has more problems than usual. + +Lately you’ve been questioning how “great” the Empire is supposed to be. This is not the place you heard about when you were being trained by Mistress or Captain Gruz. In fact, during your first assignment in the Nalin province you encountered decadent officers and disobedient citizens even then. + +This questioning of the Empire then makes you question the Emperor which causes you great concern for that it treasonous thinking. But still…how is it he has allowed this to happen to his land? He is supposed to be all wise and all-powerful, but you’ve not seen much evidence of either. Never mind the fact that you’ve never seen him at all. + +It’s a rare thought, but there have been even a few times where you wondered what would’ve happened if you had joined Kane when he asked. + +You leave Fort Destiny without another word and board the carriage to the Delerg province. + +A few days later you arrive and Delerg is everything you’ve heard about, very swampy. The town you’re scheduled to arrive in looks like it’s sinking into marsh, which might explain why it’s even called Sinkhole. + +While you don’t know why you’re here, you do know you’re supposed to meet with a contact here, though you don’t know who that is or where you’re supposed to meet. + +As you take in the sights of this dismal town, the villagers look like they can barely contain their fear of you. You aren’t sure if it’s because they’ve heard of your reputation, or if it’s due to their natural suspicious nature. The swamp folk have always been known to be that way. They were one of the few people that didn’t resist Empire dominion at all when they first came to this land, but despite this submissiveness the swamp folk still maintained their wary ways. + +“Well if isn’t the Bane of Rask! It’s been a long time!” a voice calls out to you. You turn around and see not one, but two familiar faces. +“Roldan? Gerald?” you say seeing how much older they’ve gotten. It makes you realize just how much time has passed. +“Of course it’s us!” Roldan says. +“Yeah, we didn’t know you’d be the contact.” Gerald adds. +“Contact? I’m not anyone’s contact. I’m supposed to meet someone here, you guys aren’t it?” you say. +“Erm, no. In fact when Gerald arrived I thought he was the contact and vice versa. Well this is odd. I wonder who we’re supposed to be meeting?” + +You reply that you don’t know and then begin to feel slightly uneasy. With all your past experiences, you start to feel like this might be a trap, then another carriage comes into the town. When the passenger steps out, it’s an old, but still tough looking orc in battle armor. It’s Captain Gruz! He sees all three of you milling about in the open and shuffles over to you. + +“What in blazes are you lot doing out in the open like this? Any potential assassin could strike you down! I thought I taught you better than that! Come on let’s get into the tavern, we can talk there.” He scolds and then heads towards the tavern, you, Gerald and Roldan follow. + +The tavern is dark and nearly empty. The patrons inside see you four sit at a table and then move as far away as possible. + +“You thirsty? I sure am. Four ales!” Captain Gruz says. +“I’m not thirsty captain.” You say. +“They’re not for you, they’re for me! You guys order your own drinks! Anyway I imagine you’re all wondering what this small reunion is all about. Well let’s just say the Empire finally saw fit to take me off the sidelines and place me in charge of something worthwhile for a change. I’ll get right to the point and tell you, the Shadow Guard is here, or at least what’s left of them. For awhile we thought that they might be working with the Felkans, but they’re just taking advantage of the war.” + +This news causes you to sit forward and then look around. + +“Oh don’t worry, they’re not right HERE, lad. They’re in this province though; and you might be interested that Cyrus is the one leading this miserable little band of shadows. I imagine you and he got some unfinished business. In fact that’s why you’re here, since you’ve had a lot of experience in dealing with this situation before. As for you two, your own records are excellent and you’re Eternals. The only ones that are going to be skilled enough to handle this situation I think are Eternals.” +“How come Edgar isn’t here? He also had experience with the Shadow Guard and was with me during the Fort Defiance incident.” +“Eh, Edgar’s skills are best served on the Felkan frontlines right now. I know the war might be coming to an end, but there’s still quite a bit of fighting going on. Besides best not to have all you guys in one place.” +“That’s a different perception than I remember you having when you were arguing with Mr. Mol fourteen years ago.” You say. +“Heh, remembered that did you? Well, as I’m sure you know things change, ideas change. You get older and see things differently. Wouldn’t you agree?” + +You pause before answering, which causes Gruz to study you for a moment. + +“Yes, I suppose so.” You reluctantly reply. +“Of course you do, lad. You’d be a bleeding idiot if you didn’t.” Gruz says taking a drink of one of his ales. +“So, where are these Shadow Guard fanatics anyway?” Gerald asks. +“An old temple deep in the swamps. Used to be their old place of worship back before their Empire days apparently. Looks like Cyrus really bought into that dead religion, though it’s also arrogant of him to try to hide right underneath our noses. Hell, who knows? Maybe he knew he’d get discovered eventually and was just itching for a fight. Anyway, we’ll have some extra help when we arrive there. Trust me, I’ve got it set up.” + +The remainder of the time is playing a little catch up with your former team members while Captain Gruz enjoys his ale. It’s interesting to see how vastly different their experiences have been. + +Gerald says his time was initially boring until the war broke out. From then on he and Warrick were constantly paired up to perform commando mission deep into Felkan territory. Dangerous work, but he says they were treated pretty well by everyone and held in high regard among their fellow soldiers. Even the citizens were less troublesome in the Arat province and the local women threw themselves at him and Warrick every night he laughs. + +Roldan mentions his time was mostly spent cleaning up the rest of the kobolds in the Nalin province, breaking small bandit rings, and ultimately trying to keep the peasants in line. No problems from the usksha again though. When Captain Anu was promoted and sent to the Felkan frontlines, Brenda got promoted to command Fort Glory. The most surprising thing though, he and Brenda apparently married. Wasn’t anything fancy and there was paperwork that had to be filled out (A lot of it) but it was completely approved of by the Empire. + +Your own tales sound remarkably grim when compared to theirs. + +The strangest thing about all this is how they’ve all had contact with each other either directly or through messages. Gerald and Roldan even mention how they got letters from Kane years ago before his actions at Fort Defiance. They both confirm how the letters sounded very longing of the “old days” and referring to them as “brother.” Warrick and Brenda apparently got similar ones too. + +You ask Gerald if he met Edgar when he was transferred there. He replies that he did, but said that he was mostly sent to fight Felkan armies directly right along side most of the orcish detachments. + +“Sheesh. He’s gotta love that considering his experiences with orcs at Fort Defiance.” You say. +“Edgar’s an idiot. Always has been. I saw that even when I was training you guys. He’s a good warrior, but lacks vision. Surprised he’s lasted this long.” Captain Gruz suddenly replies. +“Well, I agree he’s always had a tendency to act without thinking, but after my last dealings with him, I think he’s improved a bit. Changed his outlook. You know, got older and sees things differently now.” You reply. +“Hmm. Maybe, but as far as I’m concerned being a meat shield is about the best thing he’s ever been good for, just like all the rest of dumb fuckers on the Felkan frontlines.” +“Hey, I’m on the Felkan frontlines!” Gerald protests. +“Yeah, and you’re not marching straight into those Felkan shooty weapons either. You’re being a lot more than just a meat shield like the rest of those stupid ass orcs.” +“Rest of those orcs? Not to point out the obvious, but you’re an orc, I mean aren’t those your people?” Roldan asks. +“Yeah and? Does that make us all relatives or some shit? Fuck my people! I got no patience for any of them anymore…” Captain Gruz begins to get loud and cause a scene. + +“Okay captain I think you’ve had enough. I think I saw an inn across the way, let’s get some rooms there and make plans to deal with the shadows tomorrow.” You suggest. +“Grrm, maybe you’re right…” Captain Gruz replies and then promptly falls to the floor. Gerald tries to pick him up. + +“Somebody go get the rooms and the other person help me carry the captain.” Gerald says. +> Go get the rooms +“I’ll get the rooms, you help Gerald.” You say. +“Okay.” Roldan agrees and proceeds to lift up Gruz on the other side. + +You exit the tavern and make your way to the inn, which is across the road. You’re half way across when you sense something isn’t right. You notice a little girl across the road staring at something and that’s when you realize there are shadows about. + +The first one attempts to stab you in the back, but you spin and dodge, then stab him through the stomach. The second one aborts his own attack and attempts to escape. You however grab him with your free hand. + +It is at this point, he pulls out some sort of odd round plant and screams something you don’t understand and a black aura suddenly emanates from him. + +“Shit!” you shout and run him through in the hopes of killing him before he can complete whatever spell he’s casting. He drops the plant on the ground, but smiles at you. + +“It’s already done Eternal!” he laughs and then you are both engulfed in an explosion and blown several feet from where you were, though only part of you. + +What remains of your body is scattered in pieces along the road of Sinkhole. You actually manage to live a few more seconds to see the images of what you presume to be Roldan and Gerald running out of the tavern, then everything goes dark.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 30 + +“This place won’t be the same without you sir. I don’t know how I’ll be able to run this place as well as you.” Lieutenant Verant says as you finish packing your things. +“You’ll do fine lieutenant, or should I say captain. You’ll probably get an official promotion soon. Just remember, when the citizens protest I’ve found that flogging one family with children at random keeps the rest in line. Can’t really afford to execute them like we did in the old days, too many ogre attacks already doing a good job of that. Well at least you don’t need to worry about the giants as much anymore.” +“You always did know best sir.” +“Well, I tried to do what I could up here. I don’t know why I’m being stationed to Delerg Province. It’s one of the more peaceful places of the Empire next to the Nalin province. I would prefer to be here or on the Felkan frontlines where I could do more to serve, but I suppose the Emperor knows best where my skills will be used.” +“Oh well I’ve heard the war with the Felkans is coming to an end soon.” +“Yes, I’ve heard that as well…and it concerns me the things that I’ve heard why it’s ending. Mass riots in the major cities of the Empire, soldier shortages, even heard about some of those traitorous shadow criminals carrying out terrorist tactics. And because of these problems what do we do with the Felkans? Another non-aggression pact! We should be butchering them and burning down their cities, not making peace with them again. If all of the Emperor’s enemies had one neck, I would sever it with one sword swipe.” + +Verant says nothing after your rant. Indeed over the past few years he’s heard you rant about the troubles of the Empire a lot more and knows to keep quiet. But if you’re making more outbursts than usual, it’s only because the Empire has more problems than usual. + +Lately you’ve been questioning how “great” the Empire is supposed to be. This is not the place you heard about when you were being trained by Mistress or Captain Gruz. In fact, during your first assignment in the Nalin province you encountered decadent officers and disobedient citizens even then. + +This questioning of the Empire then makes you question the Emperor which causes you great concern for that it treasonous thinking. But still…how is it he has allowed this to happen to his land? He is supposed to be all wise and all-powerful, but you’ve not seen much evidence of either. Never mind the fact that you’ve never seen him at all. + +It’s a rare thought, but there have been even a few times where you wondered what would’ve happened if you had joined Kane when he asked. + +You leave Fort Destiny without another word and board the carriage to the Delerg province. + +A few days later you arrive and Delerg is everything you’ve heard about, very swampy. The town you’re scheduled to arrive in looks like it’s sinking into marsh, which might explain why it’s even called Sinkhole. + +While you don’t know why you’re here, you do know you’re supposed to meet with a contact here, though you don’t know who that is or where you’re supposed to meet. + +As you take in the sights of this dismal town, the villagers look like they can barely contain their fear of you. You aren’t sure if it’s because they’ve heard of your reputation, or if it’s due to their natural suspicious nature. The swamp folk have always been known to be that way. They were one of the few people that didn’t resist Empire dominion at all when they first came to this land, but despite this submissiveness the swamp folk still maintained their wary ways. + +“Well if isn’t the Bane of Rask! It’s been a long time!” a voice calls out to you. You turn around and see not one, but two familiar faces. +“Roldan? Gerald?” you say seeing how much older they’ve gotten. It makes you realize just how much time has passed. +“Of course it’s us!” Roldan says. +“Yeah, we didn’t know you’d be the contact.” Gerald adds. +“Contact? I’m not anyone’s contact. I’m supposed to meet someone here, you guys aren’t it?” you say. +“Erm, no. In fact when Gerald arrived I thought he was the contact and vice versa. Well this is odd. I wonder who we’re supposed to be meeting?” + +You reply that you don’t know and then begin to feel slightly uneasy. With all your past experiences, you start to feel like this might be a trap, then another carriage comes into the town. When the passenger steps out, it’s an old, but still tough looking orc in battle armor. It’s Captain Gruz! He sees all three of you milling about in the open and shuffles over to you. + +“What in blazes are you lot doing out in the open like this? Any potential assassin could strike you down! I thought I taught you better than that! Come on let’s get into the tavern, we can talk there.” He scolds and then heads towards the tavern, you, Gerald and Roldan follow. + +The tavern is dark and nearly empty. The patrons inside see you four sit at a table and then move as far away as possible. + +“You thirsty? I sure am. Four ales!” Captain Gruz says. +“I’m not thirsty captain.” You say. +“They’re not for you, they’re for me! You guys order your own drinks! Anyway I imagine you’re all wondering what this small reunion is all about. Well let’s just say the Empire finally saw fit to take me off the sidelines and place me in charge of something worthwhile for a change. I’ll get right to the point and tell you, the Shadow Guard is here, or at least what’s left of them. For awhile we thought that they might be working with the Felkans, but they’re just taking advantage of the war.” + +This news causes you to sit forward and then look around. + +“Oh don’t worry, they’re not right HERE, lad. They’re in this province though; and you might be interested that Cyrus is the one leading this miserable little band of shadows. I imagine you and he got some unfinished business. In fact that’s why you’re here, since you’ve had a lot of experience in dealing with this situation before. As for you two, your own records are excellent and you’re Eternals. The only ones that are going to be skilled enough to handle this situation I think are Eternals.” +“How come Edgar isn’t here? He also had experience with the Shadow Guard and was with me during the Fort Defiance incident.” +“Eh, Edgar’s skills are best served on the Felkan frontlines right now. I know the war might be coming to an end, but there’s still quite a bit of fighting going on. Besides best not to have all you guys in one place.” +“That’s a different perception than I remember you having when you were arguing with Mr. Mol fourteen years ago.” You say. +“Heh, remembered that did you? Well, as I’m sure you know things change, ideas change. You get older and see things differently. Wouldn’t you agree?” + +You pause before answering, which causes Gruz to study you for a moment. + +“Yes, I suppose so.” You reluctantly reply. +“Of course you do, lad. You’d be a bleeding idiot if you didn’t.” Gruz says taking a drink of one of his ales. +“So, where are these Shadow Guard fanatics anyway?” Gerald asks. +“An old temple deep in the swamps. Used to be their old place of worship back before their Empire days apparently. Looks like Cyrus really bought into that dead religion, though it’s also arrogant of him to try to hide right underneath our noses. Hell, who knows? Maybe he knew he’d get discovered eventually and was just itching for a fight. Anyway, we’ll have some extra help when we arrive there. Trust me, I’ve got it set up.” + +The remainder of the time is playing a little catch up with your former team members while Captain Gruz enjoys his ale. It’s interesting to see how vastly different their experiences have been. + +Gerald says his time was initially boring until the war broke out. From then on he and Warrick were constantly paired up to perform commando mission deep into Felkan territory. Dangerous work, but he says they were treated pretty well by everyone and held in high regard among their fellow soldiers. Even the citizens were less troublesome in the Arat province and the local women threw themselves at him and Warrick every night he laughs. + +Roldan mentions his time was mostly spent cleaning up the rest of the kobolds in the Nalin province, breaking small bandit rings, and ultimately trying to keep the peasants in line. No problems from the usksha again though. When Captain Anu was promoted and sent to the Felkan frontlines, Brenda got promoted to command Fort Glory. The most surprising thing though, he and Brenda apparently married. Wasn’t anything fancy and there was paperwork that had to be filled out (A lot of it) but it was completely approved of by the Empire. + +Your own tales sound remarkably grim when compared to theirs. + +The strangest thing about all this is how they’ve all had contact with each other either directly or through messages. Gerald and Roldan even mention how they got letters from Kane years ago before his actions at Fort Defiance. They both confirm how the letters sounded very longing of the “old days” and referring to them as “brother.” Warrick and Brenda apparently got similar ones too. + +You ask Gerald if he met Edgar when he was transferred there. He replies that he did, but said that he was mostly sent to fight Felkan armies directly right along side most of the orcish detachments. + +“Sheesh. He’s gotta love that considering his experiences with orcs at Fort Defiance.” You say. +“Edgar’s an idiot. Always has been. I saw that even when I was training you guys. He’s a good warrior, but lacks vision. Surprised he’s lasted this long.” Captain Gruz suddenly replies. +“Well, I agree he’s always had a tendency to act without thinking, but after my last dealings with him, I think he’s improved a bit. Changed his outlook. You know, got older and sees things differently now.” You reply. +“Hmm. Maybe, but as far as I’m concerned being a meat shield is about the best thing he’s ever been good for, just like all the rest of dumb fuckers on the Felkan frontlines.” +“Hey, I’m on the Felkan frontlines!” Gerald protests. +“Yeah, and you’re not marching straight into those Felkan shooty weapons either. You’re being a lot more than just a meat shield like the rest of those stupid ass orcs.” +“Rest of those orcs? Not to point out the obvious, but you’re an orc, I mean aren’t those your people?” Roldan asks. +“Yeah and? Does that make us all relatives or some shit? Fuck my people! I got no patience for any of them anymore…” Captain Gruz begins to get loud and cause a scene. + +“Okay captain I think you’ve had enough. I think I saw an inn across the way, let’s get some rooms there and make plans to deal with the shadows tomorrow.” You suggest. +“Grrm, maybe you’re right…” Captain Gruz replies and then promptly falls to the floor. Gerald tries to pick him up. + +“Somebody go get the rooms and the other person help me carry the captain.” Gerald says. +> Old Comrades (Catching up) +“…and so that’s what Warrick and I have been up to. Just making things difficult as best we can for the Felkan Kingdom.” Gerald says. +“I’m just surprised that put you on these sneaky commando raids, Warrick I can understand, he’s always been a stealthy individual, but you were usually rushing into battle like the rest of us.” You reply. +“Hey, I’ve changed a bit since you last saw me. Besides, it’s not all sneaking around. Some of it requires just enough to get in and then we can raise as much havoc as we need to. Still, if it’s a mission that requires a lot of covert operations, then Warrick goes in by himself. I’d go to, but I’m too damn tall and stick out like a sore thumb sometimes.” +“Heh, maybe they should put Edgar on your missions, he’s short enough.” Roldan laughs. +“Yeah right, he’d go charging in screaming at the top of his lungs for the entire Felkan Kingdom to attack him.” +“Oh I don’t know about that, he’s changed as well last time I saw him. He’s a lot better disciplined now. Speaking change, how the hell did YOU get married?” You ask Roldan. +“Well you see, when a man and a woman love each other…” + +This causes a bit of laughing from Gerald and Roldan, but you’re as serious as ever. + +“You know what I mean, Roldan.” +“Yes, I know what you mean, sheesh. I see some things haven’t changed. Well it’s rather simple. Brenda and I spent so much time together and our thoughts, our actions, and just I dunno everything about us seemed to be in relative harmony. It only seemed natural that we end up together. It was like…what other people call love I guess? Hard to know for certain, I mean I think we all know that wasn’t something we were trained to for. Anyway we just ended up taking the next logical step, but we were pretty worried that the Empire would frown upon it and possibly even split us up. Turned out of course they just made us fill out a bunch of annoying paperwork. I don’t even think whatever pencil pusher was in charge even realized we were Eternals. Just bureaucracy as usual.” +“Bah, you just got lucky you had no real competition. Had I still been stationed there, things would’ve been a lot different!” Gerald remarks. + +While Roldan gives Gerald a light punch to his arm, you’re about to ask further questions about Roldan’s marriage when Gruz suddenly asks you a strange question. + +“Tell me Eternal, what are you going to do when you get old?” +“Huh? Get old?” +“Yes, when you get old, you do realize it will happen right?” +“Well…uh yeah.” +“Okay then, what are you going to do?” +“I guess I never thought about it.” +“Hm. Sounds about right. Most young people don’t.” he replies and goes back to his ale. + +This odd interlude is interrupted once again by Gerald and Roldan who were so preoccupied with their little playful banter that they didn’t even hear Gruz’s remarks. + +“So… big bad Bane of Rask! Heh.” Gerald says and does a little drumming motion on the table. “Heard a lot of stories about some of stuff you’ve done. Maybe you can clear up some of the rumors and truths.” +“You mean like Kane?” you bluntly say. +“Er…well actually I got some of that story about that from Edgar last time I saw him. I was certainly surprised how bad it was when he told me directly, but after one of the letters I got from Kane months before, it did have an odd tone to it…” +“Wait a minute. Hold on. Kane sent you a letter?” +“Yeah, I assumed he sent one to all of us. Warrick got one the same time I did.” +“Brenda and I received letters as well. Very odd. Kept referring to us as his brother and sister throughout the thing.” Roldan adds. + +You’re at a loss that you didn’t receive one considering when Kane first met you he was very eager to have you on his side. You initially chalk it up to Cyrus’ meddling, but then Gerald asks another question. + +“You know speaking of letters, how come you never answered any of mine? I had a few sent to Rask a few months after we all got split up, but never got a reply. I was sort of worried you were dead for a while until deeds of your exploits started popping up.” +“Letters? I never got any letters. Never got any letters from anyone.” You say. +“Well that would explain your surprise at Brenda and I getting married because we made sure to send one to everyone on the team. Hell, even Edgar wrote back to congratulate us.” + +Gerald makes a remark to Roldan that maybe Rask has shitty mail service, and then Gruz pipes up again while they’re talking with each other. + +“Don’t worry about it lad. Isolation makes one stronger anyway.” +“What?” +“Teamwork, cooperation, greater good, its all bullshit. In the end it’s just about survival and who crosses that finish line between life and death last is the winner. Just sucks about those last laps though when you’re practically crawling towards it just to get the shit over with.” Gruz says taking another drink. + +You aren’t exactly sure what Gruz is going on about, but you’re getting the impression that he’s had more than enough to drink. You decide that you all need to start wrapping up this little get together soon so you can concentrate better at the true task at hand.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“We can’t leave yet, we have to take care of Kane and Cyrus.” You say. +“What? You don’t think it wouldn’t be a better idea to escape and then come back with an army or something?” Edgar replies +“It would be preferable yes, but by that time they’ll be entrenched and possibly already on the move with their own army of giants, ogres and orcs. That’s less likely to happen without Kane or Cyrus here.” +“You don’t think someone else will take their place?” +“I KNOW someone else will take their place, but by getting rid of Kane and Cyrus that shaky allied army that they’ve built up will fall apart. It will then be far easier to handle seeing as it won’t commanded by Eternals.” +“Well, that’s true…okay let’s do it.” + +Edgar suggests getting some basic armor with helmets to disguise and protect yourselves in and mentions the supply room in the human section of the fort should have some. It takes some sneaking around, but Edgar’s knowledge of the layout gets you there with relative ease. When you do get to the room you have to kill a couple human guards, and get dressed in some armor without raising an alarm. + +At least not an obvious one. + +“I told the others that you wouldn’t try to escape. Glad to see I was right.” A man’s voice says from somewhere. You and Edgar both grab weapons and look around putting your backs to each other. +“Knew it was too easy.” Edgar says. +“It still can be.” The voice remarks. +“Who are you? Show yourself!” you demand. +“And have you possibly kill me? Oh no, I know the skill and ruthlessness of the Eternals all too well having served with Cyrus for years, not to mention seeing Edgar in action. And your own reputation speaks on its own, Bane of Rask. There is no need for animosity however, I am willing to help you.” + +“It’s a Shadow Guard, he’s using his blasted magic tricks to stay invisible to us.” Edgar whispers. +“If you’re here to help, why have you allowed this to treason to happen in the first place?” you ask still keeping your guard up. +“Oh various reasons, but let’s just say the major reason is that Cyrus is a very convincing fellow. He probably doesn’t seem like it to you, but he has a certain charm about him. It’s how he’s managed to convince Kane to go along with all this I imagine.” +“So this was all Cyrus’ idea.” You say still scanning the room. +“Eh, it’s a little more complicated than that I think, even I’m not privy to all the details. I only know as much as I do because Cyrus is a little more talkative after sex…” +“Okay, I didn’t need to hear about that!” Edgar exclaims. + +“Look we could stand around and talk all day until the guards realize something is wrong, or you can accept the help of me and the rest of the Shadow Guard. We have come to realize for a while now that this plan is not in our best interest and will only lead to our destruction.” The voice says, +“You do realize that you have already participated in treason and this attempt at switching sides because you know you’ll lose anyway, will not save you?” you say undiplomatically. +“Ha ha! Yes, I would expect no less from the Empire and especially not from an Eternal such as yourself. You Eternals, you think in such absolutes and that’s why you’ll be the death of us all…not YOU of course, but for the rest of us. (Sigh) I think the Shadow Guard should’ve broken away from the Empire years ago before you lot popped up. Anyway it hardly matters now, I’m still offering my help…” + +Before the man can complete his sentence you have managed to locate his whereabouts in the room and grab him. His invisibility disappears to reveal a mundane looking man in a gray cloak. As you hold your sword to him, Edgar does likewise. + +“I hate to burst your ego, but this isn’t the first time an Eternal has managed to detect me, you took longer though.” The gray-cloaked man says. +“How can I trust someone who has defied the Emperor and participated in treasonous acts?” you ask, ignoring the Shadow Guard’s flippant nature. +“You can’t. And being a Shadow Guard probably makes me even less trustworthy. The only thing I can say is you’ll have to make a leap of faith Eternal. I will confess this though. The Shadow Guard’s loyalty to the Empire is starting to be less than absolute. Granted there are still debates about this within our order and not everyone can decide on how we should do it. Personally I felt we should all just leave and not make a big mess about it. Obviously some, like Cyrus feel otherwise. Now I have just relayed perfectly good intelligence on a potential major threat to the Empire. You will be able to warn others after you take care of Kane and Cyrus.” +> Kill him +There is no way you’re going to trust a Shadow Guard even if he has given you good information. He’s still a traitor that would betray you at the nearest opportunity he deserves no less than death. Without another word you run him through and muffle any yelps he might’ve made during his death. + +“Good idea, no way we could’ve trusted him.” Edgar says. +“Come on, we should head to Kane’s office, that’s probably where he’s at, hopefully Cyrus is there as well.” + +You manage to walk through the halls of the fort without difficulty thanks to the face covering helmets. Everyone just assumes you’re just two soldiers going about your routines. When you arrive near the office there are several heavily armored orc guards milling around there. You and Edgar briefly wonder how quickly you can kill them before more come running, but unfortunately, when another one comes running your potential plans of distraction them are gone. + +“Ay! Ay! You guyz! The prisoners have escaped! Come on!” the orc yells. +“Wha?! Well we can’t leave, da boss is in his office! Go get dem shadoze ta help!” one of the guard says. +“Hey we’ll tell the general and you take care of the prisoners. You orcs are tougher so you’ll be able to handle the situation better than we would.” You pipe up and say. +“Hmm, you might be right about us bein’ stronger, but even weaklings like you should be able to handle two unarmed prisoners. We gots orders, we stay here wit da boss.” + +“To hell with this.” Edgar suddenly says and attacks one of the orcs. + +You do battle with the orcs, though it isn’t an easy fight, they’re obviously Kane’s bodyguards for a reason. You haven’t even defeated all of them yet, when Kane comes out of his office. + +“What’s going…assassins!” Kane shouts, not immediately realizing it’s you and Edgar with your helmets on. + +You attempt to engage Kane, but one of the last orc guards knocks you into the wall and attempts to get you in a bear hug. You manage to get free, and after landing a couple of good strikes, the orc collapses to one knee where upon you finish him off. You turn around in time to see Kane taking advantage of Edgar’s own fight with the last orc guard. Kane runs his sword through Edgar’s side. Edgar pauses his attack from the blow which allows the orc guard to follow up with a good strike with his mace. + +A sickening crunch of Edgar’s skull along with the clang of metal accompanies his helmet being knocked off of him. Edgar crumples to the floor and doesn’t move. + +“Edgar?” Kane says to himself. You waste no time more time and attack. + +You dodge the last orc guard’s clumsy attack with his mace while blocking Kane’s own as well. + +“Why are you fighting me?! We should be on the same side brother!” he exclaims desperately, realizing who you are. + +The orc guard winds up another swing, and you aim low taking out his legs, when he falls to the floor, you kick Kane away from you so you can finish off the last guard. + +After killing the orc, Kane attempts to attack you but fails and you land a blow across his chest and then another across his face, blinding him in one eye. He drops his weapon and staggers back holding his hand on the gaping bloody wound. + +“(Pant) Why…you…I can’t…” he wheezes and tries to escape past you, but you stop him completely by running him through. You wrench the sword upward to slice further into his internal organs. Blood spills out from the wound and onto the floor and your feet. He looks at you with his remaining good eye. Surprisingly, he smiles. + +“I…forgive you…broth…” he gasps and dies. + +You don’t have time to check on Edgar or anything else when you feel several bolts go into your back. You collapse to the floor and feel that same toxin you felt when Cyrus shot you, except this time you feel a whole lot sicker, due to getting a heavier dose. + +“I have to say this probably worked out a whole lot better this way. With Kane out of the way, perhaps we can use these orcs to our more direct advantage after all.” You hear Cyrus remark as several Shadow Guards circle around you. + +“Don’t expect to wake up from this one.” Is the last thing you hear before another bolt goes into your skull.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Chapter 2A: For The Empire! + + + +Year 20 + +“Watch it the last ones are coming from the left side!” you shout, pointing at the barbarian wolfmen breaking through the barricade. + +Two of your number go down before the might of the wolfmen. As always you find yourself having to do things yourself. Not that you’re adverse to placing yourself in the thick of battle, but sometimes you get a little tired of having to micromanage. + +One of the wolfmen goes down by your blade with ease, the other three however are shot full of bolts, though you were very nearly in the crossfire. + +“DAMMIT, watch where you’re shooting!” You shout at the dark elven mercenaries. +“Oh stop being so dramatic, we’ve been shooting with these crossbows longer than you’ve even been alive I’d wager.” One of them replies, followed by a few snickers. + +You shake your head at the fact that you have to routinely work with them, let alone having to put up with their kind. Then again you’ve had to put up with a lot around here for the past four years. + +“Are we done fighting these dogs now? When are we going to get back to killing more sveld? That’s a lot more fun.” One of the mercenaries says. +“You aren’t getting paid to have fun svelk! You’re getting paid to do your job. If you really want to go murder your tree loving cousins so bad, we’re not stopping you.” You say. +“Whatever monkey, our job here is done, we’re heading back. Let us know when you need our help again.” The mercenary says and they leave. + +You survey the damage to the logging camp and it’s going to be awhile before this place is up and running to it’s full capabilities again. Still, today is a victory and despite everything, you’ve managed to eliminate more enemies even if it does seem like they are everywhere in this harsh cold land. + +Unfortunately nowadays the Rask frontier isn’t the only place where the Empire has been having problems. Open war broke out with the Felkan Kingdom a couple years ago. Sometimes you wonder how things are going with Warrick and Gerald, but you’ve never heard anything about them, or from them. + +In fact you rarely hear news from anywhere unless it directly concerns you defending mining towns, logging town, or outposts from barbarians or the forest elves. It’s never pretty here, but you can only imagine what they deal with up at Fort Defiance where they routinely face ogres and sometimes even giants. You have heard that Edgar has made quite a name for himself with some of his actions. In a way you’re glad, because he’s living up to the title of an Eternal and doing honor by serving with distinction…still, knowing him he’s doing it all to try to “beat” you. + +As for you, you’ve made quite a name for yourself as well. You have improved the mortality rate of the soldiers here a little (most notably the ones serving under you), but you’ve also managed to successfully defend several towns with low citizen casualties too. + +The greatest accomplishments of yours are the complete destruction of several hostile barbarian tribes. The Black Wolves, the Enclave of the Bear, the Blood Boars, and other minor shape changing tribes have all been exterminated thanks to your relentless nature. Indeed, you’ve become so infamous that the barbarian tribes in this land have come to call you the “The Bane of Rask.” + +This recent battle was a last desperate regroup attack by one of the tribes, the “Silver Fangs” after you wiped out all their women and children in an attack on their camp. Grim business to be sure, but it wasn’t first time and it certainly won’t be the last. These tribes must learn that they cannot stand against the might of the Empire or the Emperor. If they can only learn that with their extinction then so be it. + +You report your victory to Captain Krozer. + +“Excellent as always lieutenant. I know time after time I can count on you. Which leads me to the next major task. From what I can tell we’ve managed to eliminate the major threats in this particular area of the Rask frontier, but we have two left. The forest elves and the Wendigo tribe are the two in question and I’m wondering which one we should focus our attention on first.” + +“Well I can tell you that the Wendigo tribe will be a challenge. They’re the biggest, toughest and meanest of all the barbarian shape shifters. So far we haven’t had a large battle with them yet, but with our extermination of the other tribes, the time is getting closer. As for the elves, it will be more tedious than anything as they use a lot of guerilla tactics and such. We’ve still never found any sort of home, base or camp of theirs, but I suppose those dark elven mercs will be more than willing to help us with eliminating them. I’m sure their leader, Edolith will most likely demand a high price as usual though.” You say. + +“(Sigh) Yeah, I’m sure she will. Things are never easy here. Fuck it; we’re pushing forward on both groups right now and putting an end to it once and for all. The question is, would you prefer to lead a company against the Wendigo tribe or go on a seek and destroy mission on the forest elves.” +> Seek out the elves +“I’ve had to work around those svelk for a while now. If they’re going to help us attack the elves, it might be a good idea for me to go on that one so I can keep an eye on them, captain.” You say. +“Yes, you do have a reputation even among those shifty bastards, though they’d never admit it. Okay, sounds good. I shall send another officer to lead the mission against the Wendigo tribe. I may even just go along on that mission.” Captain Krozer replies. +“You are captain?” +“Yes, I find that I’ve been getting stuck behind the desk too much lately. It’ll be good to be back out in the field. Don’t want to become like one of those fat self-important generals that do nothing except point to maps and make equally fat musings on tactics. A true leader should lead from the front, I’m sure you agree.” +“It is preferable yes…but I do understand the need to keep those with keen military minds safe from major war zones. Such people have their place as all do in their service of the Emperor.” +“Why lieutenant, are you complimenting me on my intelligence? It’s not like you to flirt.” Captain Krozer asks in a tone slightly friendlier than usual, it catches you a little off guard. +“I…no! I mean yes, you are very intelligent, but…” +“Relax lieutenant, just having a little fun, didn’t mean to put you on the spot. Anyway, we’ll pick this up later, you better get prepared for your mission, and good luck.” + +You do exactly that. You know that this is going to be a tedious mission. The elves rarely ever fight in straight up combat. It’s typically a series of ambushes and hit and run tactics with some traps thrown in for good measure. Attempting to locate their hideout is going to be equally as tedious. While the dark elves will certainly be helpful, you wish you had a few battle wizards, but most of those have been assigned either at Fort Defiance or on the frontlines of the Felkan War. + +The first thing you do is talk with the leader of the dark elven mercenaries about how would be the best way to track down the elves. Eldolith normally is outwardly disdainful of humans, but she manages to just barely contain that distain in your case. She’s typical of her kind, arrogant and acts like she’s doing you a favor just by being in your presence. Reminds you of the days when Mistress trained you. + +“Ah the Bane of Rask, if it isn’t my favorite mon…human. What do I owe this dubious pleasure?” she asks while polishing one of her leather boots. +“We want to find the elven home and destroy them for good.” +“Finally ready to destroy those sveld eh? About fucking time. The whole time we’ve been playing around with your semi-evolved barbaric kin, I’ve had a few of my men out scouting this entire forsaken frontier. We got a lead a few months ago and we’re pretty sure it’s good.” +“Wait. Hold on. You’ve known where they’ve been hiding and you didn’t report it to us?” +“As I recall your superior isn’t paying us for reconnaissance. We’re just here to fight. Besides, it’s still not necessarily a one hundred percent sure thing.” +“If you’re so opposed to doing jobs that you aren’t being paid for, why’d you do this secret scouting mission anyway?” +“We’re also not just here for YOU, human. We have our own agenda. The only reason why we have not followed up on this lead, is because we’ve been busy helping you monkeys, not to mention we all felt it would also be best if we had more warm bodies to distract our hated kind with. Congratulations.” Eldolith sneers. + +In typical dark elf fashion she’s attempting to provoke you to get angry for her amusement and to put on a show for her men. Won’t work though. + +“Wise decision Eldolith. No way you could’ve handled them yourselves.” +“We could have, but as I stated we were busy helping YOU.” +“If you say so. Anyway I’ll expect to your group to be ready in a couple hours.” You say and leave, but your own dismissive behavior annoys Eldolith so much that she boldly grabs your arm. This is all the excuse you needed. + +“Don’t you turn your back on…ack!” Eldolith is interrupted when you quickly turn around grab her arm, spin her around and twist it behind her back. You other arm is wrapped tightly around her neck. + +Her men grab their crossbows and point them at you, but it’s a futile gesture, she’s in front of you, they’d be more likely to hit her than you. + +“Put your bows down you fools!” she struggles to yell. +“I advise you all to heed your leader’s orders. Even if you did manage to kill me, not one of you would make it out of this fort alive. I might remind you that you initiated this by putting your hands on me in the first place, surely I had the right to defend myself correct?” +“(Sigh) Yes, it would’ve been foolish to react in any other way I suppose. The mistake was mine. Ugh, I’m going to have the stench of human on me for days. Release me!” + +No please or begging of course, just more orders. Still, you’ve made your point. You let her go by shoving her down on the floor. As you leave you can hear her verbally abusing her own men. She’s going to have problems maintaining her leadership position now after looking so weak. You’re going to have to be careful as well, lest you “accidentally” get a bolt in the back during the heat of battle, but then again you’re always alert while dark elves are around. + +Eventually you set off on your mission. For a while it’s a simple uneventful march through ice and snow. Eldolith mentions that the Alabaster Pines are where they think the elves are making their home, but not in the traditional sense. There is evidence that they are actually making their home underground. + +“Can you believe it? Members of our kind actually living like those disgusting rock eaters? It shames me to even think that these sveld were actually even related to us at one time.” Edolith says. + +When you reach the Alabaster Pines, you remind your company to keep alert for traps and potential ambushes. You also tell them to keep alert of your so called “allies” as well. + +It doesn’t take long before you’re attacked. The elves predictably engage in their guerilla tactics. These attacks might’ve taken a greater toll, but with the help of the dark elves, the long range attacks that they favor are less effective. The deeper you go into the forest, the more desperate the attacks become. They begin to attack you directly in hand to hand combat and to the death. They scream curses and obscenities in your language and their own calling you all murderers and evil. + +The dark elves of course are enjoying all this. You and your company on the other hand aren’t. Not due to any sort of sympathy they are the enemy after all, but this is just another mission to you. Funny that you should have a more “detached” attitude than the mercenaries themselves. + +Soon you enter a part of the forest where the trees are so tall that they completely block out the sky. There isn’t even that much snow ground. Almost a “warm” feeling encompasses the place. + +“One of my scouts said they made it this far before and that’s where he found evidence that these sveld had an entrance to an underground lair. Should be near an odd blue rock. Let’s look around.” Edolith says to you. +“Where’s that scout of yours, shouldn’t he be able to show us directly?” you ask. +“The useless bastard is lying dead with two sveld arrows in him a mile back. Now come on, we’ll be able to find this place better if all us look.” +“I’m not sure. Something about this seems too easy. Why don’t you look, and we’ll stay alert to make sure this isn’t an ambush.” +“If the sveld were going to ambush us, they would’ve done it by now or haven’t you noticed how desperate their attacks have gotten? They probably already know we’re coming and building up defenses as we speak. The longer we take, the tougher it’s going to be to root them out.” +> Help in the search +Edolith’s right, the elves would’ve attacked already. You order your men to help in the search. It doesn’t take long to find what you’re looking for. + +“Lieutenant! I found a blue rock and it looks like there’s a hidden door in the ground.” One of your men yells. +“Your monkeys are as subtle as ever with their howling.” Edolith says. You ignore her and make your way to the location along with the rest of your company. + +You look down the hole and see a long ladder descend into the darkness. This will probably be the most dangerous part as the elves could pick you off as you attempt to climb down. Elves can see in the dark, while you and your men are going to have to rely on torches. You’re about to go down, when several of your men volunteer first, claiming that they’d rather you not be placed in potential uncertain danger as your combat skills will be necessary for the final battle to come. You reluctantly agree and allow it. + +“Ah blind loyalty, such a wonderful thing is it not?” Edolith says. “I could only wish my own men would volunteer their lives so selflessly rather than me having to threaten them. Of course if I didn’t threaten them every now and then, they’d forget their place and try to stab me in the back.” + +While Edolith’s speech on dark elf culture is fascinating, you are in no mood to hear anymore of her musings, so you descend down the ladder next. + +As it turns out there wasn’t anything to worry about, your men that have proceeded before you are safely waiting for you at the bottom. They say they haven’t even noticed any traps, though it’s pretty dark down here. You call up and say you want the svelk to start coming down since their own night vision will come in handy. When enough of them have descended down the ladder, you begin to proceed ahead. + +You travel down a long corridor of dirt with a couple of the dark elves leading the way. You arrive at what is a larger open area with minor lighting and that’s when you hear more shouting followed by higher pitched screams. One of the dark elves yells at everyone to either get out of the way or duck. A bright ball of flame then appears. You just barely manage to scramble out of the mouth of the corridor and into the dirt before the fireball engulfs a good portion of it. Most of the people who were near the front end of it are incinerated instantly while the ones towards the back you can only hope that the blast didn’t travel that far. + +You and a the few dark elves that got out of the way engage what looks to be an older elf mumbling something in his language. He’s obviously a wizard. The dark elves attempt to take him down with their repeating crossbows, but he has some sort of magic shield up. The dark elves keep firing as he picks them off with well placed lightning bolts, you take cover behind some sort of house structure. You can hear whimpering inside and also hear the rest of your men and dark elves who didn’t get caught in the fire blast rush into the area. + +“Don’t just stand out in the open catching lightning bolts! Take cover and keep firing!” you hear Edolith shout. + +You peer out from behind your cover and see your men valiantly attempt to rush the wizard, but only succeeding in dying to his lightning spell which conducts and spreads very well due to their metal armor. The dark elves can’t break through his barrier either, the only option will be to get in close enough to chop his head off or get him to drop his shield, but how to do that without getting fried is another matter. + +Still hearing the whimpering from inside the house structure, you quickly run inside to investigate. Inside you see a female elf with a younger one cowering in the corner of their home. They say something in their language, which you can only guess is pleas for you not to kill them. You also see a crib with a baby in it and you quickly get a plan. + +You grab the baby and push aside the mother’s feeble attempts to stop you. Carrying the crying baby under your arm you run out of the house. You see the wizard still blasting bolts at the dark elves and you make a beeline towards him. He notices you and as he begins to cast his spell you throw the baby at him as hard as you can. The shock of having a baby thrown at him catches him severely off guard and he stops casting. He also drops his shield to catch the baby. + +“FIRE!” you hear Eldolith shout and the dark elves comply. + +Bolts sinks into the wizard’s head dropping him. +Another bolt ceases the baby’s cries. +Several more bolts enter your body. You crash to the ground severely wounded. + +You attempt to crawl away, but you’re coughing up blood and already breathing hard. Edolith runs over to you and kicks the sword out of your hand when you weakly attempt to defend yourself. + +“Baby throwing…I gotta admit that was a good one. A worthy tactic of even a svelk. It’s almost a shame I had to kill you. You weren’t bad for a monkey, but I got a reputation to maintain among my own men. Just business, nothing personal. Well okay, maybe it is a little personal.” + +You grab at her leg while she gloats, your grip is strong enough that she has to hack your arm off before she can get her foot away. You lose consciousness just before Edolith announces the gleeful massacre of the remaining elven women and children.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“I’ve had to work around those svelk for a while now. If they’re going to help us attack the elves, it might be a good idea for me to go on that one so I can keep an eye on them, captain.” You say. +“Yes, you do have a reputation even among those shifty bastards, though they’d never admit it. Okay, sounds good. I shall send another officer to lead the mission against the Wendigo tribe. I may even just go along on that mission.” Captain Krozer replies. +“You are captain?” +“Yes, I find that I’ve been getting stuck behind the desk too much lately. It’ll be good to be back out in the field. Don’t want to become like one of those fat self-important generals that do nothing except point to maps and make equally fat musings on tactics. A true leader should lead from the front, I’m sure you agree.” +“It is preferable yes…but I do understand the need to keep those with keen military minds safe from major war zones. Such people have their place as all do in their service of the Emperor.” +“Why lieutenant, are you complimenting me on my intelligence? It’s not like you to flirt.” Captain Krozer asks in a tone slightly friendlier than usual, it catches you a little off guard. +“I…no! I mean yes, you are very intelligent, but…” +“Relax lieutenant, just having a little fun, didn’t mean to put you on the spot. Anyway, we’ll pick this up later, you better get prepared for your mission, and good luck.” + +You do exactly that. You know that this is going to be a tedious mission. The elves rarely ever fight in straight up combat. It’s typically a series of ambushes and hit and run tactics with some traps thrown in for good measure. Attempting to locate their hideout is going to be equally as tedious. While the dark elves will certainly be helpful, you wish you had a few battle wizards, but most of those have been assigned either at Fort Defiance or on the frontlines of the Felkan War. + +The first thing you do is talk with the leader of the dark elven mercenaries about how would be the best way to track down the elves. Eldolith normally is outwardly disdainful of humans, but she manages to just barely contain that distain in your case. She’s typical of her kind, arrogant and acts like she’s doing you a favor just by being in your presence. Reminds you of the days when Mistress trained you. + +“Ah the Bane of Rask, if it isn’t my favorite mon…human. What do I owe this dubious pleasure?” she asks while polishing one of her leather boots. +“We want to find the elven home and destroy them for good.” +“Finally ready to destroy those sveld eh? About fucking time. The whole time we’ve been playing around with your semi-evolved barbaric kin, I’ve had a few of my men out scouting this entire forsaken frontier. We got a lead a few months ago and we’re pretty sure it’s good.” +“Wait. Hold on. You’ve known where they’ve been hiding and you didn’t report it to us?” +“As I recall your superior isn’t paying us for reconnaissance. We’re just here to fight. Besides, it’s still not necessarily a one hundred percent sure thing.” +“If you’re so opposed to doing jobs that you aren’t being paid for, why’d you do this secret scouting mission anyway?” +“We’re also not just here for YOU, human. We have our own agenda. The only reason why we have not followed up on this lead, is because we’ve been busy helping you monkeys, not to mention we all felt it would also be best if we had more warm bodies to distract our hated kind with. Congratulations.” Eldolith sneers. + +In typical dark elf fashion she’s attempting to provoke you to get angry for her amusement and to put on a show for her men. Won’t work though. + +“Wise decision Eldolith. No way you could’ve handled them yourselves.” +“We could have, but as I stated we were busy helping YOU.” +“If you say so. Anyway I’ll expect to your group to be ready in a couple hours.” You say and leave, but your own dismissive behavior annoys Eldolith so much that she boldly grabs your arm. This is all the excuse you needed. + +“Don’t you turn your back on…ack!” Eldolith is interrupted when you quickly turn around grab her arm, spin her around and twist it behind her back. You other arm is wrapped tightly around her neck. + +Her men grab their crossbows and point them at you, but it’s a futile gesture, she’s in front of you, they’d be more likely to hit her than you. + +“Put your bows down you fools!” she struggles to yell. +“I advise you all to heed your leader’s orders. Even if you did manage to kill me, not one of you would make it out of this fort alive. I might remind you that you initiated this by putting your hands on me in the first place, surely I had the right to defend myself correct?” +“(Sigh) Yes, it would’ve been foolish to react in any other way I suppose. The mistake was mine. Ugh, I’m going to have the stench of human on me for days. Release me!” + +No please or begging of course, just more orders. Still, you’ve made your point. You let her go by shoving her down on the floor. As you leave you can hear her verbally abusing her own men. She’s going to have problems maintaining her leadership position now after looking so weak. You’re going to have to be careful as well, lest you “accidentally” get a bolt in the back during the heat of battle, but then again you’re always alert while dark elves are around. + +Eventually you set off on your mission. For a while it’s a simple uneventful march through ice and snow. Eldolith mentions that the Alabaster Pines are where they think the elves are making their home, but not in the traditional sense. There is evidence that they are actually making their home underground. + +“Can you believe it? Members of our kind actually living like those disgusting rock eaters? It shames me to even think that these sveld were actually even related to us at one time.” Edolith says. + +When you reach the Alabaster Pines, you remind your company to keep alert for traps and potential ambushes. You also tell them to keep alert of your so called “allies” as well. + +It doesn’t take long before you’re attacked. The elves predictably engage in their guerilla tactics. These attacks might’ve taken a greater toll, but with the help of the dark elves, the long range attacks that they favor are less effective. The deeper you go into the forest, the more desperate the attacks become. They begin to attack you directly in hand to hand combat and to the death. They scream curses and obscenities in your language and their own calling you all murderers and evil. + +The dark elves of course are enjoying all this. You and your company on the other hand aren’t. Not due to any sort of sympathy they are the enemy after all, but this is just another mission to you. Funny that you should have a more “detached” attitude than the mercenaries themselves. + +Soon you enter a part of the forest where the trees are so tall that they completely block out the sky. There isn’t even that much snow ground. Almost a “warm” feeling encompasses the place. + +“One of my scouts said they made it this far before and that’s where he found evidence that these sveld had an entrance to an underground lair. Should be near an odd blue rock. Let’s look around.” Edolith says to you. +“Where’s that scout of yours, shouldn’t he be able to show us directly?” you ask. +“The useless bastard is lying dead with two sveld arrows in him a mile back. Now come on, we’ll be able to find this place better if all us look.” +“I’m not sure. Something about this seems too easy. Why don’t you look, and we’ll stay alert to make sure this isn’t an ambush.” +“If the sveld were going to ambush us, they would’ve done it by now or haven’t you noticed how desperate their attacks have gotten? They probably already know we’re coming and building up defenses as we speak. The longer we take, the tougher it’s going to be to root them out.” +> Stay vigilant +This still feels off to you, no your company isn’t going to scatter themselves looking for odd colored rocks, the dark elves first found this place they can do the leg work. Edolith of course is annoyed that you aren’t going to help and for a moment she almost says if you’re not going to participate in the search then they aren’t either. However it’s quite clear her desire to put more of her kin to the sword is a lot stronger than defying you, she throws up her hands, mumbles something about you being scared monkeys and orders all of her men to start searching the area. You tell your own men to set themselves up in a defensive perimeter, so just in case this is still an ambush, you’re at least no going to get caught off guard and have a weak point open. About an hour passes and one of the dark elves finds the rock with a hidden door in the ground nearby. + +“Well we found it, some of my more enthusiastic men have taken it upon themselves to head down there already. Just as well considering you monkeys can’t see in the dark.” Edolith says to you. + +You have your own men light up torches and follow the dark elves down the ladder and into the darkness. As it turns out there wasn’t anything to worry about. There was no trap waiting to pick anyone off the ladder, just like there wasn’t any ambush. + +When you finally get down into the elven hideout, many of the dark elves and some of your own men have already gone on ahead. Edolith has opted to stay near the back, closer to where you are. A few moment after traveling down the dark dirt corridor, you hear a bunch of yelling up front, followed by high pitched squeals further up ahead and then something spoke in the elven that sounds like a command. Then a bright light appears far in front of you. + +“SHIELDS AND DUCK DOWN!” you yell, realizing this is a fireball. There’s no place to run because you’re stuck in the corridor, you duck down behind the large shields that the men in front have and hope for the best. You feel the heat of the flame that incinerates the unfortunate souls caught in front, and you’re even burned a little, but you were lucky that the blast didn’t extend too far back. + +Having survived the blast, you and the survivors run over the burned bodies and out of the corridor into the large open dimly lit area beyond as soon as you can before another fireball comes at you. It is then you see an older elf mumbling something in his language. Obviously a wizard of some sort. The dark elves that survived are attempting to shoot bolts at him, but he has a magic shield up. He strikes a couple of them down with well placed lightning bolts. + +“Don’t just stand out in the open catching lightning bolts! Take cover and keep firing!” you hear Edolith shout. + +You tell your own men to take cover as well. With all their metal armor they’d end up being mass fried by the lightning. As for you, you find cover behind a house structure where you hear whimpering inside. + +You peer out from behind your cover and see your men pinned down behind cover, but safe. The dark elves can’t break through his barrier, the only option will be to get in close enough to chop his head off or get him to drop his shield, but how to do that without getting fried is another matter. + +Still hearing the whimpering from inside the house structure, you quickly run inside to investigate. Inside you see a female elf with a younger one cowering in the corner of their home. They say something in their language, which you can only guess is pleas for you not to kill them. You also see a crib with a baby in it and you quickly get a plan. + +You grab the baby and push aside the mother’s feeble attempts to stop you. Carrying the crying baby under your arm you run out of the house. You see the wizard still blasting bolts at the dark elves and you make a beeline towards him. He notices you and as he begins to cast his spell you throw the baby at him as hard as you can. The shock of having a baby thrown at him catches him severely off guard and he stops casting. He also drops his shield to catch the baby. + +“FIRE!” you hear Eldolith shout and the dark elves comply. + +Bolts sinks into the wizard’s head dropping him. +Another bolt ceases the baby’s cries. + +“WATCH OUT CAPTAIN!” you hear one of your men shout and you instinctively attempt to get back into cover. Several bolts just miss you, but your still catch one to the leg before scrambling behind another rock. + +The sounds of battle between your men and the dark elves fills your ears as you try to pull the bolt out. You just get the bolt out of your leg, when Edolith attempts to cleave your head in. You roll out of the way and pick up your sword, though you’re having a little trouble standing. + +“I have to admit, baby throwing was a tactic worthy of a svelk. Too bad I have to kill you, you were okay for a monkey. But I got a reputation to maintain among my men.” +“So do I.” you answer and clash weapons with Edolith. + +She’s quicker and lands a few good hits, but her mistake is getting in close enough for you to grab her long flowing hair. She attempts to pull free, but you yank hard and grab her wrist. You then break it causing her to drop her weapon. She holds back yelling out in pain and knees you as hard as she can in the groin and jamming her sharp fingernails straight into your eye. + +This doesn’t cause you to release your grip. With the pain slowly creeping up from your nuts and into your stomach and bloody ocular jelly leaking out your socket you take both of your arms and wrap them around Edolith’s waist and squeeze tightly in an attempt to break her back. You then smash her in the face several times with your head, breaking her nose completely and even knocking out a few teeth. The pair of you crash to the ground and you finish her off by viciously biting out her throat. The copper taste of her blood fills the taste buds of your tongue and you spit a thick glob of it on her face as she gurgles and dies. + +After it’s all said and done, you stagger to your feet victorious over your opponent. One of your men comes up to you. + +“Sir! Are you alright?” +“No. But I’ll heal.” +“Okay…well all the treacherous dark elves are dead and it looks like all the regular elves are too. There are only women and children left hiding in their homes and none of them are fighters.” +“Are they still elves?” you ask. +“Well yes.” +“Then kill ‘em all. I’m sick of the whole fucking race at this point.” You say and stagger off. + +After the grim business of extermination the elves, you and the remainder of your company set off back to Fort Destiny. A day later when you finally arrive at the fort you notice it’s a lot more empty from when you left it. In fact Captain Krozer isn’t even here. Lieutenant Verant seems to be in charge though he’s almost subservient when you address him. + +“By the Emperor! Lieutenant I think you need to see a medic, you’ve got a limp, your skin is burned and cut up and your eye is missing!” he says when seeing your wounds. +“Where’s Captain Krozer? I wish to report our total victory on the elves as well as the treachery of the dark ones that we’ll no longer have to pay.” +“Captain Krozer? She went with most of the men to do battle with the wendigo tribe. Their territory is quite a ways, but I imagine she’ll be back soon. Congratulations on your victory, but go see the medic right away!” + +You nod and allow yourself to finally relax at the medic’s office. You’ve been running on adrenaline for quite some time and now that your safe, you at last feel like you can rest a little. Most of your wounds aren’t particularly bad, except for the eye, which can’t be repaired. The medic just does his best to remove the permanently damaged orb, clean the socket and give you a patch. + +“You’ll be able to fight good enough with one eye. You just have to move your head a lot more.” He says. + +You rest for a couple days, which are still pretty quiet around the fort. You and everyone else are expecting Captain Krozer to show up, but the worst is starting to creep into everyone’s mind. + +“We need to send a search team.” You say. +“We can’t afford to! Between the men you lost fighting the elves, and the entire missing company that Krozer lead, we need all of them here in the area!” Verant says. +“Oh come on Verant! We can’t spare at least ten? I’ll lead the search!” +“(Sigh) Look I didn’t really want this responsibility. I figured she’d come back and I could go back to filing out reports!” +“Well if we don’t find her or if she’s dead, then you’re going to be in this job a lot longer than you thought.” +“I know…I know…hey why don’t you take over?” +“What?” +“Sure! You’re a leader of men and a big tough Eternal! You’d do a better job than me.” +“Well of course I would, but doesn’t this have to be official, like assigned from a higher commanding officer?” +“You said it yourself, Krozer may already be dead, if that’s the case then who’s really going to know? Besides I’m in charge I can hand over the reigns of power if I feel I am no longer fit to command.” +“Okay, but what if she’s not dead? When she comes walking in, she’s going to wonder what the hell’s going on, and both of us are going to get in trouble and I am not getting in trouble over nonsense.” +“I shouldn’t think we’d get in that much trouble. I mean you know Captain Krozer, she’s fairly easy going as far as commanding officers go. She’s probably yell at me more than anything, but not likely to put us on report or anything serious.” +> Take command +Verant is right about one thing, you’ll probably get more accomplish if you’re in charge. You agree and take command, of course your first order of business is to have Verant catch you up on what exactly has been going. He explains that in addition to Captain Krozer’s disappearance, there have been a few patrols not reporting in either, when you ask what has he done about this, he says nothing, in fact that’s why he didn’t want to send you out for fear of losing you too. + +“So your approach to everything has been to just adopt a siege mentality and not let any of the soldiers out while someone is obviously picking us off? By the Emperor I should have you killed right now for extreme incompetence, but quite frankly I’m going to need you for all the bureaucratic stuff that I’m not exactly familiar with.” + +You breathe deeply to contain some of the anger you’re feeling with Verant’s cowardice before continuing. + +“Okay I want double men on all the patrols, I want them to question every townsperson within the area about what they might know. I also want you to send word to the generals back home about the situation, maybe we can get some reinforcements up here. In fact send a well armed group up to Fort Defiance too, maybe they can spare some help too.” +“Very well sir, and Captain Krozer?” Verant asks. +“Well with this new information that you gave me with missing patrols, we probably should hold off on the search. If anything she’s probably dead and the wendigos are most likely behind the missing patrols too. This seems a little sneaky for them though, who knows maybe we’ve got another threat that we don’t know about.” + +Your first orders as head of Fort Destiny are carried out. It takes days of waiting, but eventually you get some results, though not all good. + +Your patrols aren’t attacked, but the townsfolk are very upset with how things have been going for them. They’ve been victims of kidnappings as well as the occasional outright murder. The main problem is nobody has been caught doing any of it. People are either just turning up missing, or pieces of their bodies are being found have eaten and mauled. Again, this part points to the wendigos, but this is still very odd behavior for them if it is them. They have never been known for their stealth tactics, and have always been the most outright brutal of all the barbarian tribes. You can only wonder if its due to them being the “last” major ones in the area that they’ve changed. + +Regardless, you don’t really have enough troops to go marching into wendigo territory now. Which bring you to your second problem. + +Word from headquarter approves of you taking command and even officially promotes you to captain. Another letter from Mr. Mol even states that he’s impressed with your progress and says you no longer need any sort of supervision. Unfortunately that’s all the help you get. The top brass claims that they can’t afford to send you anyone as most are needed on the Felkan border. As for the team you sent to Fort Defiance, it disappeared. You can only assume they were killed, this also makes you wonder if Fort Defiance is alright. You can’t think of a time any communication has really gone on between the two forts since you’ve been here. In any event you’ve got your own concerns for now and you’re going to have to figure out what to do with your limited resources… + +Year 23 + +“Get the bastards on the north side! They’re climbing up the fucking walls!” you shout. + +Boiling oil is thrown over the side of the wall, scalding the wendigos as they fall to the ground several feet below. You look around and see a nearby soldier laughing uncontrollably. + +“Its heh heh heh heh heh all so clear! We should stop fighting. We need to EMBRACE THE BEAST!” he snarls and runs at you. You decapitate him and throw his body over the battlements below. + +“Why do you resist us Eternal? Your skills would be most welcome to our…” +“SHUT UP! SHUT UP!” you shout at the disembodied voice. + +The years of battling the wendigos has all lead up to this. Surrounded by an army of them. You did your best to try to curb their growth, but ultimately they replenished their numbers with greater ease than you did. Even when you did manage to get reinforcements it still was never enough. The wendigos as you would come to learn aren’t truly flesh and blood creatures. They are spirits that possess the minds of others. You demanded battle wizards, but none were sent. You demanded golems, but none were sent. You did get a company of orcs, but this was more of a detriment as their minds were even more susceptible to wendigo influence. + +You chop off the hand of another wendigo that attempts to make it over the wall. You look around and see that they’ve already broken through the front door. + +How the wendigos suddenly became so sneaky is still somewhat of a mystery and it hardly matters at this point, but if you had to guess; When captain Krozer attacked them all those years ago, they must’ve possessed her, learned from her and adapted her tactics. They realized that if they did not they would’ve been destroyed without any more hosts. So they watched, they waited; they picked off victims and possessed converts one by one. And even with you opposing them at every turn town after town fell. Those peasants that weren’t killed or turned, fled to the southern parts of the Empire. Even some of your soldiers deserted. + +The wendigos deprived themselves of food for far too long though and over the past few months it has finally unleashed itself into this orgy of violence. An all out attack on the fort, which really is the only bastion of civilization left in the Rask frontier. + +You see what few men you have left get slaughtered below before struggling against two more wendigos of your own. You shove your sword through a wendigo’s heart while trying to ignore the pain of it sinking its teeth into your flesh. Despite swiveling your head around as much as you can to see all your opponents, you feel a heavy blow to your back and claws ripping through your armor. You’re then thrown from the walkway and to the ground. + +You try to get back up as quick as you can and then foot to the face prevents you from doing so. Your weapon is ripped from your hand and another foot comes down on top of your head cracking your skull. The internal bleeding in your brain causes a delirious effect for one moment and then you pass out forever before the wendigos feat upon your body.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This still feels off to you, no your company isn’t going to scatter themselves looking for odd colored rocks, the dark elves first found this place they can do the leg work. Edolith of course is annoyed that you aren’t going to help and for a moment she almost says if you’re not going to participate in the search then they aren’t either. However it’s quite clear her desire to put more of her kin to the sword is a lot stronger than defying you, she throws up her hands, mumbles something about you being scared monkeys and orders all of her men to start searching the area. You tell your own men to set themselves up in a defensive perimeter, so just in case this is still an ambush, you’re at least no going to get caught off guard and have a weak point open. About an hour passes and one of the dark elves finds the rock with a hidden door in the ground nearby. + +“Well we found it, some of my more enthusiastic men have taken it upon themselves to head down there already. Just as well considering you monkeys can’t see in the dark.” Edolith says to you. + +You have your own men light up torches and follow the dark elves down the ladder and into the darkness. As it turns out there wasn’t anything to worry about. There was no trap waiting to pick anyone off the ladder, just like there wasn’t any ambush. + +When you finally get down into the elven hideout, many of the dark elves and some of your own men have already gone on ahead. Edolith has opted to stay near the back, closer to where you are. A few moment after traveling down the dark dirt corridor, you hear a bunch of yelling up front, followed by high pitched squeals further up ahead and then something spoke in the elven that sounds like a command. Then a bright light appears far in front of you. + +“SHIELDS AND DUCK DOWN!” you yell, realizing this is a fireball. There’s no place to run because you’re stuck in the corridor, you duck down behind the large shields that the men in front have and hope for the best. You feel the heat of the flame that incinerates the unfortunate souls caught in front, and you’re even burned a little, but you were lucky that the blast didn’t extend too far back. + +Having survived the blast, you and the survivors run over the burned bodies and out of the corridor into the large open dimly lit area beyond as soon as you can before another fireball comes at you. It is then you see an older elf mumbling something in his language. Obviously a wizard of some sort. The dark elves that survived are attempting to shoot bolts at him, but he has a magic shield up. He strikes a couple of them down with well placed lightning bolts. + +“Don’t just stand out in the open catching lightning bolts! Take cover and keep firing!” you hear Edolith shout. + +You tell your own men to take cover as well. With all their metal armor they’d end up being mass fried by the lightning. As for you, you find cover behind a house structure where you hear whimpering inside. + +You peer out from behind your cover and see your men pinned down behind cover, but safe. The dark elves can’t break through his barrier, the only option will be to get in close enough to chop his head off or get him to drop his shield, but how to do that without getting fried is another matter. + +Still hearing the whimpering from inside the house structure, you quickly run inside to investigate. Inside you see a female elf with a younger one cowering in the corner of their home. They say something in their language, which you can only guess is pleas for you not to kill them. You also see a crib with a baby in it and you quickly get a plan. + +You grab the baby and push aside the mother’s feeble attempts to stop you. Carrying the crying baby under your arm you run out of the house. You see the wizard still blasting bolts at the dark elves and you make a beeline towards him. He notices you and as he begins to cast his spell you throw the baby at him as hard as you can. The shock of having a baby thrown at him catches him severely off guard and he stops casting. He also drops his shield to catch the baby. + +“FIRE!” you hear Eldolith shout and the dark elves comply. + +Bolts sinks into the wizard’s head dropping him. +Another bolt ceases the baby’s cries. + +“WATCH OUT CAPTAIN!” you hear one of your men shout and you instinctively attempt to get back into cover. Several bolts just miss you, but your still catch one to the leg before scrambling behind another rock. + +The sounds of battle between your men and the dark elves fills your ears as you try to pull the bolt out. You just get the bolt out of your leg, when Edolith attempts to cleave your head in. You roll out of the way and pick up your sword, though you’re having a little trouble standing. + +“I have to admit, baby throwing was a tactic worthy of a svelk. Too bad I have to kill you, you were okay for a monkey. But I got a reputation to maintain among my men.” +“So do I.” you answer and clash weapons with Edolith. + +She’s quicker and lands a few good hits, but her mistake is getting in close enough for you to grab her long flowing hair. She attempts to pull free, but you yank hard and grab her wrist. You then break it causing her to drop her weapon. She holds back yelling out in pain and knees you as hard as she can in the groin and jamming her sharp fingernails straight into your eye. + +This doesn’t cause you to release your grip. With the pain slowly creeping up from your nuts and into your stomach and bloody ocular jelly leaking out your socket you take both of your arms and wrap them around Edolith’s waist and squeeze tightly in an attempt to break her back. You then smash her in the face several times with your head, breaking her nose completely and even knocking out a few teeth. The pair of you crash to the ground and you finish her off by viciously biting out her throat. The copper taste of her blood fills the taste buds of your tongue and you spit a thick glob of it on her face as she gurgles and dies. + +After it’s all said and done, you stagger to your feet victorious over your opponent. One of your men comes up to you. + +“Sir! Are you alright?” +“No. But I’ll heal.” +“Okay…well all the treacherous dark elves are dead and it looks like all the regular elves are too. There are only women and children left hiding in their homes and none of them are fighters.” +“Are they still elves?” you ask. +“Well yes.” +“Then kill ‘em all. I’m sick of the whole fucking race at this point.” You say and stagger off. + +After the grim business of extermination the elves, you and the remainder of your company set off back to Fort Destiny. A day later when you finally arrive at the fort you notice it’s a lot more empty from when you left it. In fact Captain Krozer isn’t even here. Lieutenant Verant seems to be in charge though he’s almost subservient when you address him. + +“By the Emperor! Lieutenant I think you need to see a medic, you’ve got a limp, your skin is burned and cut up and your eye is missing!” he says when seeing your wounds. +“Where’s Captain Krozer? I wish to report our total victory on the elves as well as the treachery of the dark ones that we’ll no longer have to pay.” +“Captain Krozer? She went with most of the men to do battle with the wendigo tribe. Their territory is quite a ways, but I imagine she’ll be back soon. Congratulations on your victory, but go see the medic right away!” + +You nod and allow yourself to finally relax at the medic’s office. You’ve been running on adrenaline for quite some time and now that your safe, you at last feel like you can rest a little. Most of your wounds aren’t particularly bad, except for the eye, which can’t be repaired. The medic just does his best to remove the permanently damaged orb, clean the socket and give you a patch. + +“You’ll be able to fight good enough with one eye. You just have to move your head a lot more.” He says. + +You rest for a couple days, which are still pretty quiet around the fort. You and everyone else are expecting Captain Krozer to show up, but the worst is starting to creep into everyone’s mind. + +“We need to send a search team.” You say. +“We can’t afford to! Between the men you lost fighting the elves, and the entire missing company that Krozer lead, we need all of them here in the area!” Verant says. +“Oh come on Verant! We can’t spare at least ten? I’ll lead the search!” +“(Sigh) Look I didn’t really want this responsibility. I figured she’d come back and I could go back to filing out reports!” +“Well if we don’t find her or if she’s dead, then you’re going to be in this job a lot longer than you thought.” +“I know…I know…hey why don’t you take over?” +“What?” +“Sure! You’re a leader of men and a big tough Eternal! You’d do a better job than me.” +“Well of course I would, but doesn’t this have to be official, like assigned from a higher commanding officer?” +“You said it yourself, Krozer may already be dead, if that’s the case then who’s really going to know? Besides I’m in charge I can hand over the reigns of power if I feel I am no longer fit to command.” +“Okay, but what if she’s not dead? When she comes walking in, she’s going to wonder what the hell’s going on, and both of us are going to get in trouble and I am not getting in trouble over nonsense.” +“I shouldn’t think we’d get in that much trouble. I mean you know Captain Krozer, she’s fairly easy going as far as commanding officers go. She’s probably yell at me more than anything, but not likely to put us on report or anything serious.” +> Seek out Captain Krozer first +“I would still like to seek out the captain first. If I can’t find her after my search, then I will take command.” +“But, what if YOU go missing then?” +“Well I guess you’ll still be in power then won’t you? But you feel it would improve my chances of coming back then perhaps you better authorize some soldiers to come with me.” +“Oh very well! But be careful!” + +You shake your head at Verant’s meek style of leadership and gather your men for a search mission. You have no idea why such a man would go into the military if he didn’t want the authority over others, let alone how he got as high as he did in the first place. + +When you gather your men, you set off on your journey to find out if Captain Krozer is dead or alive. As you make your way to Wendigo territory, you travel through a few towns you get a lot of pleas and complaints from the peasants. Apparently they’ve been suffering from attacks, but not in the traditional raiding sense. People have been going missing, or sometimes there have been pieces of bodies found, but no outright raids. You of course ask where are all the normal patrols that guard the area and the peasants either tell you that they’ve all disappeared or they stopped showing up days ago. More of Verant’s lack attention. The fool should’ve been investigating these incidents a long time ago, as soon as soldiers stopped reporting in. After this is over with, and assuming Captain Krozer is indeed dead, you definitely will be taking command and most likely have Verant executed for extreme incompetence. + +It’s obvious the Wendigo tribe must have something to do with this, but this doesn’t really seem like their style based on their reputation and your own brief combat with them in the past. They are the most brutal and vicious of the barbarian tribes, they out of any of them wouldn’t rely on covert tactics like this, something must’ve have severely changed. + +You continue your journey and just before you get to the territory of the Wendigos you pass through another town. This one looks like it was a fairly new one made up of some determined settlers. It also looks like it was attack recently which is amazing since there are actually survivors. Some of the townsfolk fixing a building see you, wave you over and you approach them + +“Citizens, why have you built a town here? Nevermind the fact that the Empire has not authorized such a settlement, but this is dangerously close to Wendigo territory. It would be for your own safety to leave this place.” You say. +“Oh yes, we know, we suffered an attack by them about a week ago, but we won’t be scared off! Really they aren’t nearly as bad as their reputation claims.” The carpenter says while looking around at his fellows as they nod. Something is very strange about all this. The peasants all have a peculiar smirk like they’re hiding something. +“Hey, wait aren’t you Roger from Keplavisk? Your wife mentioned her husband going missing and you match his description.” One of your men suddenly pipes up. + +“Huh, uh no. My name isn’t Roger and I’ve never been there. Never married either. You must have me mixed up with him. I just got one of those faces y’know. Hey why don’t you guys rest at our inn? I mean you probably will want to, before you fight the big bad Wendigos in their home territory and all.” The carpenter +“Who said that’s what we were going to do?” you ask. +“Well I assumed you were…if you aren’t well I suppose that’s fine too! But you’ll probably still want to rest in our inn.” +“You’re acting very strange citizen…” + +It’s at this point you draw your weapon, the rest of your men do likewise. The townsfolk don’t look too bothered, but they do back up smiling the whole time which reveals that their teeth are decidedly less human looking. + +“Good, prefer it this way anyway. Fuck all this sneaking around!” one of them remarks and in complete unison they howl an unpleasant noise and begin to transform. + +You manage to chop down a few of them before they complete their change, it doesn’t make things any easier though. Despite their great strength, you and your men are winning the skirmish and that’s when more of that awful howling penetrates your ears. + +Many more Wendigos come running into the town, completely cutting you off from any sort of retreat. You continue to fight as your own men begin to fall under the onslaught of the Wendigos eventually you are the last one left and severely outnumbered. You attempt to ignore the pain of their claws digging into your flesh and their powerful blows knocking you around like a ragdoll, you do your best, but your weapons is ripped from you along with your hand that was welding it. Desperate, you bite the current Wendigo, holding you in his grip, though you find that his bite is much more damaging than your own when part of your shoulder is chewed off. + +You feel a snap and the bone in your other arm is broken through the skin. The wendigo throws you up against the wall of one of the damaged houses and you fall to the snow bleeding profusely from several wounds. You struggle to stand, but you just don’t have the strength left. You expect the killing blow to come soon, but you hear one more of those awful howls before it’s over. + +Captain Krozer stands over you, though you know it can’t be her. + +“Y..you are not th…the captain…” you say. +“You would be correct Eternal, however she did mention before her mind was absorbed that you would stop us. Good thing her mind was so full of strategies and tactics for me to impliment. I think it really was time for us to update our way of life anyway. Can’t stagnate and remain in barbaric bodies forever. I would have you just us…but in your current state, well I just don’t think you would be as effective anymore. A shame, your body would’ve provided as an excellent host. Oh well I still should be able to enjoy the succulent life blood from your heart.” + +The last thing you see is the inhuman face of whatever it is inhabiting Krozer’s body as it reaches into your chest to pull out your still beating heart.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Marching into the desert without a grand plan other than simple slaughter isn’t much of a plan. The usksha are nomads anyway, you’d never be able to catch all of them in their home turf. + +“No, I believe we’ve taken care of the major problem, but I think you should stay here and oversee the safety of this town now. We’ll head back to Fort Glory and report the situation.” You tell Delan. + +As you pack up and start to leave, Edgar begins to complain. + +“What are we doing? We should be trying to hunt down the rest of the usksha!” +“Our mission here is done, the usksha have been defeated. If we get ordered to mount an expedition into the desert then we shall do so.” +“Bah! Anu is probably going to assign us to fight kobolds again! We should be taking the initiative!” +“It seems every time you take the initiative, I end up having to help you in some way. I’d recommend that you worry less about fighting and more about your combat techniques.” + +At this point Edgar gets noticeably mad, but says nothing and walks off. You’re starting to get slightly concerned about him. You’d rather not have to teach him a lesson like you did when you were still training under Mistress. + +When you arrive at Fort Glory and report to Captain Anu he’s pleased with what you’ve accomplished and is impressed. He says he’d like to keep you here to finish up wiping out the kobold infestation, but he’s received word from the top that your team is to be transferred elsewhere. + +“Where are we going sir?” +“The Rask frontier and I don’t mind saying I don’t envy you.” +“I’ve heard of the place before. What is the situation there?” +“Bad, worse and downright horrible. As far as I know the Empire has been trying to establish order there for decades and not making any progress.” +“Captain, I certainly hope you don’t make it a habit of saying disparaging things about the Empire.” A man says walking into the room. It’s Mr. Mol. +“Uh no sir. Sorry sir.” Captain Anu says sheepishly. + +Mr. Mol overlooks his comments and speaks to you directly. + +“Ignore the captain’s words, everyone exaggerates the situation at the Rask frontier. While the area is having some problems, the fact remains if it really was so bad there, we would’ve pulled out a long time ago. Anyway, congratulations on your latest mission. Couldn’t help overhearing your report in the next room, quite impressive. Which makes me believe it was a good idea to transfer you now.” +“The Eternals are ready to serve the Emperor wherever he may need us sir.” You say. +“And the Emperor will always appreciate your service. He has been watching you, you know. He always is. That is why he believes you would be most effective apart from each other.” +“Sir?” +“You are Eternals, m’boy. You were bred to lead as well as fight. You’ve already proven yourself to be able to do both, but your fellow Eternals will never reach their fullest potential if they live under your shadow. All of you will be separated and given your own commands in territories the Emperor needs you the most. I have no doubt you all will be successful and honor the Emperor with your future victories.” +“W..we will sir, but you said territories. Are we not all being sent to the Rask frontier?” +“Oh I think the captain misunderstood. A few of you are being sent there, but some of you are staying here, and others are yet being sent elsewhere. Here, here’s your orders, you can inform the rest of your team, I’m sure they’ll be excited to hear this news too, oh and consider yourself promoted to lieutenant. The rest of your team members will probably be promoted to sergeant rank when they officially get their assignments. I think that’s about it. A caravan will be here to transfer some of you to your new assignments in a few days. Good day.” + +As Mr. Mol goes walking out the office, you feel a little strange. Your team has been together so long, it feels weird to know that you’re going to be split apart. + +“Sorry for the wrong information, I thought all of you would be sent to the Rask frontier. Well I guess I’m glad to know some of your are staying, heh…are you okay?” Captain Anu asks. +“Huh? Oh yes. I’m okay captain. If you’ll excuse me I have to inform my team of their new assignments.” +“Certainly. Dismissed.” + +You inform your team of the news and there is a mixture of feelings. There is some excitement of gaining their own commands, but are still a little apprehensive about splitting up. Well all of them except Edgar who seems to be solely overjoyed that he’s getting his own command. + +“Okay, Roldan and Brenda, you’re staying here.” +“Damn, I was hoping I’d at least get to go some place different.” Brenda says. +“Make no mistake, this area still needs order established. I believe you and Roldan will do a fine job in continuing the reputation of excellence that we have built here.” + +You continue with the list. + +“Gerald and Warrick, you’re being assigned along the Felkan border. Apparently the non-aggression treaty the Empire had with the Felkan Kingdom has expired and tensions have been high. War with them may even break out.” +“Interesting. Well if war does break out, we’ll be the first one to show the Felkans the error of defying the Emperor’s mercy.” Warrick says. +“Yeah, yeah! Let’s get on with it, where am I going?” Edgar interrupts. + +You glare at Edgar and then continue. + +“You, Kane and I are all being sent to the Rask frontier.” +“As it should be. My skills were going to waste here.” +“Edgar, I’m going to say this while I’m still your superior. I certainly hope you realize that this isn’t a game and you’ll prove yourself to be a competent leader.” +“Hey, I’m just as much of a leader as you are! The difference is I take risks and that will be a trait that will necessary in a place like the Rask frontier! I will rise up in the ranks and bring honor to the name Eternal and glory to the Emperor!” +“You mean glory to yourself because you feel like you have something to prove.” You say. +“And you don’t? You’re a hypocrite anyway! Always were ever since we trained under Mistress! I still recall you begging for your life to her as she crushed you under her boot. From that day on you were always trying to prove yourself and beating the bloody pulp out everyone.” +“And as I recall you were on that end several times Edgar. Is that why you’re still trying to prove yourself?” +“You wanna try that now?” Edgar says getting in your face and at this point all of your fellow Eternals intervene to break up a potential fight. + +“Hey come on you guys! We can’t be seen fighting each other like this! We’re Eternals, we put all that stuff behind us back in training. We’re professionals and supposed to be setting the example for the Empire!” Roldan says. + +Edgar brushes himself and backs off. + +“Tell you what Roldan. You set the example for the Empire. All of you set the example. In the meantime, I’ll be scoring victories and actually serving the Emperor by conquering land in his name.” + +And with these last words, he takes his leave all of you. + +The last few days together are a little awkward with what transpired between you and Edgar. Still you say your goodbyes to Roldan and Brenda when the caravan comes. + +A few days after that, you then say your goodbyes to Warrick and Gerald. + +You, Edgar and Kane sit in silence for the remainder of the trip. Eventually you arrive at the Rask frontier and make your stop at Fort Destiny. You haven’t gotten off the caravan five minutes when a woman wearing battle armor approaches you. + +“Hey are you the Eternals?” +“Yes we are.” +“I’m Captain Krozer, I’ve heard a lot about you and wanted to meet you personally. Welcome to hell.” + +Captain Krozer begins to give you a run down on the entire area. She mentions that the mortality rate here is high so morale isn’t the best, but she hopes that you and the other Eternals assigned here can rally some sort hope here again. + +Captain Krozer also goes on to tell you that there’s been a slight change of plans in your assignments. She says that you’re still staying here, but that Kane and Edgar are going to Fort Defiance, which is further north. Probably for the best considering what transpired between you and Edgar. + +Kane nods a dignified goodbye to you, and gets back on the caravan; Edgar of course isn’t as pleasant and gives you a hostile glare before leaving. + +With the caravan leaving, you head to your new unit. When you see them, quite a few of them are predictably much older than you, but surprisingly you see that half of them are around your age. + +“So, you’re one those Eternals huh?” one the older soldiers says almost dismissively. You’re in no mood to warn anyone this time, so you go straight to the point and throw him to the floor with his arm painfully twisted behind his back. +“Correct, and you’ll address me as sir or lieutenant if you want to keep this arm, because it’ll be very hard to continue doing your duty for the Emperor with just a stump. Understand?” +“Argh. Y..yes sir!” + +And so begins your assignment in the Rask frontier. +> Rask Frontier (History Lesson) +Much like the Nalin province, Rask is on the outskirts of the Empire, except to the north rather than the south. It’s a cold, snowy land made up of a lot of mountain ranges and long stretches of forests. It’s also rich with resources and the Empire has made great strides in building mines and lumber mills here. + +The Empire’s been attempting to tame this area for decades, but its history here hasn’t been the best, as it almost seems that it is fighting the very natural order of things here. The environment is harsh all by itself, but when you add in the various denizens that live there, it makes things even more difficult. + +Several vicious barbarian tribes live here some of which carry various “conditions” that allow them to turn into beasts such as wolves or bears. Elves who have managed to escape the shadow of the Empire have made their homes here as well. The worst of the lot are the numerous ogre tribes and giants that live here, fortunately they stick further north, but every once in awhile they wander further south and cause trouble. + +The military presence is strong here, but isn’t as well supported like it should be and as a result it can only do so much. Svelk mercs are usually used to bolster the ranks a bit, but they’re not something the various fort commanders like to use. There are even a few battle mages, elite orc troops and Shadow Guard stationed here, though they are mostly further north where the ogres and giants are the problem. + +Another problem is the citizens themselves, for whatever reason the citizens in Rask tend to have a more independent mindset. Many that live here see themselves as pioneers taming the land despite the fact that if it wasn’t for the Empire, most of them would’ve been massacred, raped, or eaten by now. In any event, they’re more likely to openly criticize the government and its gotten to the point where most of the military barely bothers to do anything about it. They’ve got so many other concerns that unless the plebes are openly rioting, a few mouthy peasants don’t even rank on the countless list of dangers in Rask.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 16 + +You are called into Captain Gruz’s office, when you arrive you see the well dress man that you saw four years ago standing with him… and debating with him again. + +“I’m telling you Mr. Mol, I think they should work in the same unit. They’ve trained together and they’ve worked together so well at this point that splitting them up would be folly. Hell, these people have known each other since birth! You know that better than anyone!” Gruz says. +“Yes, captain I’m well aware of the situation, and normally I might agree if their were more of them, but I think their expertise would better serve if we deployed them separately in problem areas of the Empire.” Mr. Mol replies. +“You don’t break up a well oiled machine! I guarantee having them all in the same unit will be a better idea. I mean we still haven’t sent them into a real battle yet! Wouldn’t it be better to see if they can get the job done first before placing them in charge of others?” +“And what a perfect opportunity to lose them all, if something unexpected should happen.” +“Oh for…look that could’ve happened here! And if you’re so worried about them all getting killed in battle then what was the fucking point then? Besides, if they do prove to be useless in battle, better we find that out sooner rather than later when they’re in charge of others and getting them killed as well!” + +Mr. Mol thinks for a moment and then replies. + +“Hmmm, very well you do have a point captain. We’ll try it your way at first and go from there. Have them deployed in the Nalin province. Your services here have been useful as ever. Good day.” + +Mr. Mol, steps out and commander Gruz addresses you. + +“Well you heard all that, you and your fellow Eternal babies are being sent to the Nalin province. It’s not the Rask Frontier, but it’s a suitable first challenge for you guys. We’ve been trying to settle the conquest of that place for a few years now, and technically it is part of the Empire, but we’re still having problems with the Kobold population there. Little bastards are determined to resist and have been conducting a fairly effective guerilla war since we arrived. Though I blame that more on the incompetence of the commander in that region. If I was stationed there, this shit would’ve been taken care of a long time ago…but I’m not, so unfortunately you will have to report to Captain Pollo.” + +Captain Gruz approaches you closer before continuing. + +“Now I’m putting you in charge of your unit for reasons I’m sure you’re aware of. While I’m confident I’ve made the right choice, the burden will ultimately be on you to prove to be an effective leader. Remember, you’re not just a normal soldier, you’re supposed to be an Eternal. An instrument of destruction ordered by the Emperor himself. Failure is never an option for you. Even now there are rumors about your kind, and when you finally show yourselves you will be met by fear, awe, hatred and even distain. Prove yourselves and you will live up to the name that your were given. Anyway, the caravan picking you up will arrive tomorrow. Good luck and dismissed.” + +With this you leave and tell the rest of your people about where you’re going and the general nature of what to expect. They all seem pretty excited to prove themselves, and to be honest so are you. At last you will get the chance to prove yourself and can only imagine that the Emperor will be pleased by what he will see. + +The next day, you and your unit are picked up and the ride there is uneventful, but your unit spends a little time talking about things they see on the way. This is the first time all of you have probably been away from the training center you’ve spent all your lives in. Curiosity about some of the surroundings is natural, but it isn’t just the casual talk that’s different. + +Your comrades are different. They are less reserved than they once were. Captain Gruz might’ve been a strict instructor, but in addition to encouraging teamwork he was also prone to encourage you guys to have a few hours of free time. This loosening of the reigns a bit, allowed a certain amount of familiarity with each other that wasn’t just on a professional level anymore. Even you have felt yourself changing personality wise. + +Still you are all Eternals, and you are loyal to the Emperor. You will never forget that your duty comes first. + +Eventually you all arrive at Fort Glory in the Nalin province where you are stared at by several soldiers who whisper among themselves. None of you pay it any mind though, you simply report to Captain Pollo. He doesn’t look anything like Captain Gruz. He’s human for one thing and wears lighter armor which is impeccably clean. When he sees you, he almost looks bored, like you were interrupting him, but you when you came in he was reclined in his chair and not doing anything of importance. + +“So…you are the Eternals I’ve heard so much about. Humph. I don’t see anything special except that pretty one over there. Oh no, not you dear. That blonde muscular one in the back. Yes, delicious.” Captain Pollo says pointing to one of your men and not even getting out of his chair. + +“Captain Pollo, we are here for our assignments so that we may serve the Emperor.” You say. +“(Sigh) I suppose you are this unit’s leader?” +“ Yes, captain. I am currently their leader and holding the rank of sergeant due to my excellence in my training exercises.” +“Sergeant? YOU? Why you’re a mere boy! All of you are just children! I ask them for more men and they send me children! The only thing you all would be good for is cleaning the fort! In fact that’s what you can go do right now, starting with the toilets!” + +This is exactly what Captain Gruz said would happen. This is your first test. + +“Captain, we have been trained in several forms of combat and fully ready to fight. Send us into battle and we will prove ourselves. We are here to perform our duty for the Emperor and all that entails.” +“All that entails eh? Okay, you want a fight? A few miles east of here, you’ll find a town called Dalt. Its filled with ignorant peasants that constantly whine to us that there are a nest of kobolds lurking in the hills near them. We’re stretched out as it is and can’t spare anymore troops to waste on towns that are of no military importance in the grand scheme of things. Go there and take care of their problem, then maybe we’ll have more to talk about.” + +You nod and all of you leave, but before you are able to Pollo calls you back. + +“Oh one more thing sergeant. Order one of your men to stay here with me. I think you know by now which one I mean.” + +At this point you’re in genuine shock. You may be young, and even a little detached from normal ‘society” but you know exactly what Captain Pollo is implying. You can honestly feel more than surprised by this though. + +“Captain, I will need all of my team to have the best chance to succeed in this mission.” You say. +“Oh? Well sorry, but you’ll have to make do like everyone else here does. Or you could clean the fort like I first ordered you to do, which you chose to ignore.” + +It’s a no win situation, though you try to figure out a loophole that takes the responsibility off of you. + +“Captain, you are of a higher rank than me, surely you could just order him yourself.” +“Ha ha, nice try. No. You want to be a leader of men? You need to make this decision yourself. Tis quite easy I would think. Sacrifice one for the good of the rest. If anything I’d say he’s the lucky one. He gets to stay here enjoying the pleasures of the flesh, and won’t have to be mucking about with kobolds and dealing with idiotic peasants.” +> Refuse to leave him behind +Despite your desire to go on an official mission, you feel that it would be worse to leave one of your team members behind, especially what would lie in store for him. + +“I will not leave a member of my team behind. We need to be together to produce the best results, captain.” +“I see. Well, we’ll see how true that is when you’re all cleaning out the toilets. You’re on clean up detail until further notice. That will be all.” Pollo says in a perturbed tone. + +You leave Captain Pollo’s office with the bad news to your team. + +“WHAT?! I was ready for a fight!” Edgar yells. +“What happened in there?” Roldan asks. +“Yeah, we were going on a proper mission and not we aren’t!” Gerald adds completely oblivious that he wasn’t going anywhere to begin with. +“Look, there will be other times, let’s not dwell on it, we’ve got toilets to clean…” + +The rest of your team follows your lead and grumble a bit, but Edgar is doing the most of it. By the end of the day you’ve cleaned up a lot of the fort, but really, this isn’t what you want to be doing. + +The next day, Captain Pollo feels that you’ve done such a good job that he says that your talents would be wasted in battle. He feels that other more experienced soldiers can now be freed up from such trivial duties that your team is performing. You’re kept at the fort doing all sorts of menial labor. + +Day pass into months and the mocking never stops from the other soldiers in the fort who call you the “mop kids”. This angers all of you, but of course once again Edgar is the one that nearly comes to blows with other soldiers. You have to stop him several times. Eventually his anger is directed towards you. + +“Fuck! This shit is all your fault anyway! What the hell did you do to piss off Captain Pollo all those months ago?” +“Nevermind Edgar! And you’re out of line, I am your leader!” +“Hah! Some great job you got us fearless leader! We’re making the Empire safe from filthy shitholes and dirty floors!” Edgar says getting in your face. + +Before the others can break it up, you grab Edgar and slam him up against the wall. + +“You wanna know what I did? I refused to leave Gerald behind to get fucked by that sick dipshit captain!” you shout in his face. +“What?” Edgar says. +“He…he wanted to fuck me?!” Gerald says in disbelief +“Well it was pretty obvious when we first met him, Gerald.” Brenda remarks. +“Surprised he didn’t just order you to leave him, or more logically order Gerald himself.” Roldan adds. + +You let go of Edgar. + +“I dunno, I think he’s playing some sort of game. Maybe it’s a test even. Like if I’m willing to leave a man behind or not.” You answer. +“Well I sure wish you had sergeant, because that would’ve been the smart thing to do! So what if Gerald would’ve had to please the captain? It’s not like it would’ve been a big deal. The greater good of the team and the Empire would’ve been better served with the rest of us chopping up some kobolds, not mopping floors and cleaning!” Edgar says unsympathetically. +“HEY!” Gerald replies. +“Right, Edgar, I’ll remember your speech the next time some sicko wants me to leave you behind instead.” +“Look all I’m saying, is you gotta make tough decisions like that if you want to be a real leader! Just think if we were on a mission and you had to leave Gerald or any of us behind to die, to complete it? You would’ve probably froze up and got us all killed. I’m not sure if I believe in you as our leader if you can’t make simple choices…” + +Between the monotonous cleaning, the mocking, Edgar’s bitching and your own doubt about your leadership abilities, you can’t take it anymore. You punch Edgar in the face mid-sentence and knock him to the floor, he’s dazed for a moment, but doesn’t hesitate to attack you right back. + +The pair of you are going at it which draws the attention of several passing soldiers, who take the time to mock you. This is a mistake on their part as you and Edgar are in a heightened state of anger causing you both to attack them instead. This then escalates into others aiding them, which in turn causes your team to aid you as well. + +The brawl is chaotic and counter productive, but for a brief moment you actually feel “alive” again. You imagine most of your fellow Eternals do too after all this is the first “battle” they’ve had in months. Unfortunately Kane feels so alive, he forgets that he’s fighting fellow Empire soldiers and ends up killing three of them. + +The brawl ends with the opposing soldiers running and the rest of you standing around looking at Kane who doesn’t know why you aren’t celebrating your victory. + +When this is brought to the attention of Captain Pollo he’s furious and has you all put in the stockade and mentions that a trial will be held tomorrow to decide what to do with you. He already doesn’t like you, so you’re guessing it’s just going to be for show and then he’ll do whatever he likes anyway. + +“Look, Kane is the one who killed them, he should be the one to take the fall!” Edgar points out. +“For the greater good of the team huh, Edgar?” Warrick replies. +“Damn right! Look you know I’m right! If we try to fight this, the captain is just going to punish all of us!” +“He’s going to punish us all anyway Edgar!” +“And you’re probably right, but Kane here is the only one who’ll get the noose. I mean no offense Kane, but come on even you know I’m right on this!” + +As much as you’d like to punch out Edgar again, that’s what lead to this in the first place. Actually if you had just left behind Gerald, this could’ve all been avoided. Maybe Edgar’s right, the good of the many outweighing the needs of the few. You were taught that before in training, you don’t know why you questioning it now. + +Still, it doesn’t feel right just throwing Kane to the wolves, just like it didn’t feel right leaving Gerald behind. +> Defend Kane +You’re a team and you were trained together as one. You feel that you should do everything you can to protect one of your own, especially in this sort of situation. Besides, Captain Pollo is most likely going to punish you all anyway. You might well stand for what you believe in. + +Edgar naturally disagrees with you again, but grudgingly goes along with it since he doesn’t want to be on the receiving end of another one of your beatings. Everyone else agrees more readily. Kane while appreciative seems to be oddly detached from the situation, almost as if he doesn’t care. + +The next day all of you are marched into the cafeteria, which is serving as a makeshift court room. Many of the other soldiers are calling for your blood, but some of them are just sitting quietly. Captain Pollo asks both sides what exactly happened, and despite the other side making themselves look more sympathetic, fact remains Kane DID kill three of them. There really isn’t any way to defend against it. You attempt to direct blame to the other soldiers and claim it was an accident, but nothing works. + +Captain Pollo decides that all of you are at fault and says you’re all going to be executed for treason. It is at that point to make one last plea. + +“Captain! I beg you not to carry out this sentence! At least not on my team! I was the leader. I was the one who should’ve kept a better handle on them. This incident is my fault. If you have to execute someone, execute me, but not for treason, for incompetence in the service of the Empire. I may have failed to serve the Emperor, but the rest of my team may still make up for this terrible mistake that is mainly my fault.” + +It’s an impassioned plea. Even the soldiers that were cheering for your sentence are silent. Captain Pollo thinks for a moment and readdresses you. + +“Very well. I suppose you have a point. However Kane still killed three men, his crime can’t go unpunished. He will still be executed for murder and treason. The rest of your team members will be freed, but I’m having them all separated and transferred to other places. I can’t take the chance of having another incident like this happening again. Maybe the Rask frontier would be a better place for them since they want to fight so much. Execution will take place tomorrow morning. Court adjourned.” + +Before you’re taken away, you address the rest of your team one last time. + +“Learn from my mistakes. Be a better Eternal than I was and live up to the name. Serve the Emperor well.” + +You and Kane are taken to separate cells. You spend the rest of the night thinking about why you felt the way you did. It doesn’t make sense based on your training. Mistress beat duty and obedience into you, yet you rejected Captain Pollo’s initial request. Gruz certainly thought you were leadership material. He was obviously was wrong. A lot of questions go through your mind, but ultimately you realize it’s futile. You’re to be executed at morning and it’ll hardly matter what reason you had for any of your actions. You eventually fall asleep. + +The next morning, you and Kane are taken from your cells and marched to the gallows. The pair of you say nothing the entire time until the hangman puts the noose around your neck and you are asked if you have any last words. + +Kane continues to remain silent. You are slightly more verbal. + +“Long live the Emperor! Long live the Empire!” you shout before the lever is pulled and your neck snaps like a twig.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Despite your desire to go on an official mission, you feel that it would be worse to leave one of your team members behind, especially what would lie in store for him. + +“I will not leave a member of my team behind. We need to be together to produce the best results, captain.” +“I see. Well, we’ll see how true that is when you’re all cleaning out the toilets. You’re on clean up detail until further notice. That will be all.” Pollo says in a perturbed tone. + +You leave Captain Pollo’s office with the bad news to your team. + +“WHAT?! I was ready for a fight!” Edgar yells. +“What happened in there?” Roldan asks. +“Yeah, we were going on a proper mission and not we aren’t!” Gerald adds completely oblivious that he wasn’t going anywhere to begin with. +“Look, there will be other times, let’s not dwell on it, we’ve got toilets to clean…” + +The rest of your team follows your lead and grumble a bit, but Edgar is doing the most of it. By the end of the day you’ve cleaned up a lot of the fort, but really, this isn’t what you want to be doing. + +The next day, Captain Pollo feels that you’ve done such a good job that he says that your talents would be wasted in battle. He feels that other more experienced soldiers can now be freed up from such trivial duties that your team is performing. You’re kept at the fort doing all sorts of menial labor. + +Day pass into months and the mocking never stops from the other soldiers in the fort who call you the “mop kids”. This angers all of you, but of course once again Edgar is the one that nearly comes to blows with other soldiers. You have to stop him several times. Eventually his anger is directed towards you. + +“Fuck! This shit is all your fault anyway! What the hell did you do to piss off Captain Pollo all those months ago?” +“Nevermind Edgar! And you’re out of line, I am your leader!” +“Hah! Some great job you got us fearless leader! We’re making the Empire safe from filthy shitholes and dirty floors!” Edgar says getting in your face. + +Before the others can break it up, you grab Edgar and slam him up against the wall. + +“You wanna know what I did? I refused to leave Gerald behind to get fucked by that sick dipshit captain!” you shout in his face. +“What?” Edgar says. +“He…he wanted to fuck me?!” Gerald says in disbelief +“Well it was pretty obvious when we first met him, Gerald.” Brenda remarks. +“Surprised he didn’t just order you to leave him, or more logically order Gerald himself.” Roldan adds. + +You let go of Edgar. + +“I dunno, I think he’s playing some sort of game. Maybe it’s a test even. Like if I’m willing to leave a man behind or not.” You answer. +“Well I sure wish you had sergeant, because that would’ve been the smart thing to do! So what if Gerald would’ve had to please the captain? It’s not like it would’ve been a big deal. The greater good of the team and the Empire would’ve been better served with the rest of us chopping up some kobolds, not mopping floors and cleaning!” Edgar says unsympathetically. +“HEY!” Gerald replies. +“Right, Edgar, I’ll remember your speech the next time some sicko wants me to leave you behind instead.” +“Look all I’m saying, is you gotta make tough decisions like that if you want to be a real leader! Just think if we were on a mission and you had to leave Gerald or any of us behind to die, to complete it? You would’ve probably froze up and got us all killed. I’m not sure if I believe in you as our leader if you can’t make simple choices…” + +Between the monotonous cleaning, the mocking, Edgar’s bitching and your own doubt about your leadership abilities, you can’t take it anymore. You punch Edgar in the face mid-sentence and knock him to the floor, he’s dazed for a moment, but doesn’t hesitate to attack you right back. + +The pair of you are going at it which draws the attention of several passing soldiers, who take the time to mock you. This is a mistake on their part as you and Edgar are in a heightened state of anger causing you both to attack them instead. This then escalates into others aiding them, which in turn causes your team to aid you as well. + +The brawl is chaotic and counter productive, but for a brief moment you actually feel “alive” again. You imagine most of your fellow Eternals do too after all this is the first “battle” they’ve had in months. Unfortunately Kane feels so alive, he forgets that he’s fighting fellow Empire soldiers and ends up killing three of them. + +The brawl ends with the opposing soldiers running and the rest of you standing around looking at Kane who doesn’t know why you aren’t celebrating your victory. + +When this is brought to the attention of Captain Pollo he’s furious and has you all put in the stockade and mentions that a trial will be held tomorrow to decide what to do with you. He already doesn’t like you, so you’re guessing it’s just going to be for show and then he’ll do whatever he likes anyway. + +“Look, Kane is the one who killed them, he should be the one to take the fall!” Edgar points out. +“For the greater good of the team huh, Edgar?” Warrick replies. +“Damn right! Look you know I’m right! If we try to fight this, the captain is just going to punish all of us!” +“He’s going to punish us all anyway Edgar!” +“And you’re probably right, but Kane here is the only one who’ll get the noose. I mean no offense Kane, but come on even you know I’m right on this!” + +As much as you’d like to punch out Edgar again, that’s what lead to this in the first place. Actually if you had just left behind Gerald, this could’ve all been avoided. Maybe Edgar’s right, the good of the many outweighing the needs of the few. You were taught that before in training, you don’t know why you questioning it now. + +Still, it doesn’t feel right just throwing Kane to the wolves, just like it didn’t feel right leaving Gerald behind. +> Place all the blame on Kane +You already made one mistake by place one man’s welfare above the good of the team. You can’t afford to do it this time when all your lives may very be at stake. + +Edgar is of course happy you came to this conclusion, the rest of your team isn’t as happy. A couple even argue with you a bit, though it isn’t over so much that you’re not standing up for him, so much as you aren’t consistent. Kane on the other hand seems oddly okay with your decision. He says if it’s for the good of the team then so be it. It’s almost as if he doesn’t care. + +The next day all of you are marched into the cafeteria, which is serving as a makeshift court room. Many of the other soldiers are calling for your blood, but some of them are just sitting quietly. Captain Pollo asks both sides what exactly happened, and despite the other side making themselves look more sympathetic than they are, you do nothing to protect Kane in any way. You say that it was all his fault and you had no control over his actions. Kane accepts full responsibility and doesn’t even try to defend himself. + +While this keeps you and the rest of your team from facing the gallows, it doesn’t keep you out of complete trouble. Since you were the leader of the team, you are stripped of your rank and busted back down to private. Captain Pollo says that all of you are to be transferred as well since he doesn’t want something like this happening again. Kane is scheduled to hang in the morning. + +When court is dismissed all of you return to your room. Edgar goes on about how lucky you all were, but nobody is in the mood to hear it. Eventually he says he’ll be glad to get transferred from everyone anyway since you’re all holding him back, he then leaves to report to his cleaning duties. + +The next morning when Kane is executed none of you attend to watch it, indeed you’re all wonder where you’re going to be transferred, which is supposed to be in a couple days. + +As it turns out you didn’t need to wonder at all. Mr. Mol finds out about what happened and isn’t pleased about how it was handled. He allows the transfer of most of your team, since he believed you all would be better off separate to begin with, but you’re left at Fort Glory since he also believes that you utterly failed to show any leadership qualities. As such you’re not fit to be located anywhere important. + +Captain Pollo, who never liked you to begin with is even more perturbed that he couldn’t get rid of all of you (At least not the one he found attractive) keeps you on clean up detail and other menial jobs. You’re a private now, so it’s not even like you can use your rank as an excuse of how your skills are being wasted. + +The only thing that keeps you going is the delusion that maybe your service is still benefiting the Empire in some small way, even if you aren’t actively fighting for it. At least it does for a while. + +Year 17 + +“But captain, you’ve got kobolds running all over the countryside, there are those desert nomads destroying entire towns in the southern part of Nalin, you’re starting to get bandit reports…at least let me go on patrol!” you say to Pollo. +“Everything is under control private, the last thing I need is your help! And why aren’t you attending your duties?” +“Captain, if I may say, we do need every man we can get out there. Most of the ones we got are reluctant to even leave the fort at this point. Surely you must see that someone who wants to fight is a benefit, not a hindrance.” Lieutenant Anu interjects. +“And when I want your opinion lieutenant I’ll ask for it! I gave you a chance to fight before and you didn’t take it, when you had the chance.” +“Oh fer…captain I’d think you’d want anyone going out there to fight if only so you won’t have to do it.” +“What are you implying lieutenant?” +“I’m implying you’re a fucking incompetent asshole who worries more about procuring young boys from nearby towns rather than the safety of this province! And I for one can’t stand by and watch it any longer! As of right now I’m invoking the right to take command; you have proven a complete fuck up since I’ve been stationed here. Private, I’m giving you permission to get on a horse and out to the town of Yalef. They’re in the middle of a siege from the usksha there. Hopefully you can get there and do something.” + +Captain Pollo protests and he argues back and forth with his second in command, but when the guards enter the room, they are obviously on Anu’s side. Not wishing to get involved in this anymore than you are, you take the opportunity to follow Anu’s orders. + +Part of you is very excited about this, at last you feel like a weight has been lifted off your chest and you’re finally free to serve the Empire in a more substantial way. + +Your journey to Yalef isn’t an uneventful one. You’re actually attacked several times by kobolds. One of these ambushes succeeds in killing your horse. You dispatch the kobolds, but even with all your training you find that not being in any sort of combat for a year has made you slightly rusty. + +You carry on to the town of Yalef, fighting and resting when you must. By the time you get within sight of the town, half of it is in ruins and multiple horsemen surround the place. These must be the usksha or the desert horsemen you’ve heard about. Some of them see you and immediately attack. + +You do well against them all things considered that you’re outnumbered, fighting alone, tired and slightly wounded with your many skirmishes with the kobolds. The problems come when the usksha change up tactics and begin firing arrows at you instead. You’re caught by a couple of the arrows before you can get cover. + +As you hide behind a rock, trying to figure out how you’re going to actually get to the town, you feel a sharp pain in your body. This is followed by several more and you slump into the rock, struggling to breathe. You notices several more arrows in you, but these are smaller and you from you’ve seen all the usksha were in front of your near the town. + +Then sounds of inhuman high pitched giggling fill your ears. It’s another kobold ambush! The little fuckers must’ve been hiding in the mud and dirt nearby waiting for their own time to strike. + +You see several approach you, while others go off to engage the usksha, but you know your role in this is over. Your eyes close and are just glad your last moments were fighting for the Empire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 16 + +You are called into Captain Gruz’s office, when you arrive you see the well dress man that you saw four years ago standing with him… and debating with him again. + +“I’m telling you Mr. Mol, I think they should work in the same unit. They’ve trained together and they’ve worked together so well at this point that splitting them up would be folly. Hell, these people have known each other since birth! You know that better than anyone!” Gruz says. +“Yes, captain I’m well aware of the situation, and normally I might agree if their were more of them, but I think their expertise would better serve if we deployed them separately in problem areas of the Empire.” Mr. Mol replies. +“You don’t break up a well oiled machine! I guarantee having them all in the same unit will be a better idea. I mean we still haven’t sent them into a real battle yet! Wouldn’t it be better to see if they can get the job done first before placing them in charge of others?” +“And what a perfect opportunity to lose them all, if something unexpected should happen.” +“Oh for…look that could’ve happened here! And if you’re so worried about them all getting killed in battle then what was the fucking point then? Besides, if they do prove to be useless in battle, better we find that out sooner rather than later when they’re in charge of others and getting them killed as well!” + +Mr. Mol thinks for a moment and then replies. + +“Hmmm, very well you do have a point captain. We’ll try it your way at first and go from there. Have them deployed in the Nalin province. Your services here have been useful as ever. Good day.” + +Mr. Mol, steps out and commander Gruz addresses you. + +“Well you heard all that, you and your fellow Eternal babies are being sent to the Nalin province. It’s not the Rask Frontier, but it’s a suitable first challenge for you guys. We’ve been trying to settle the conquest of that place for a few years now, and technically it is part of the Empire, but we’re still having problems with the Kobold population there. Little bastards are determined to resist and have been conducting a fairly effective guerilla war since we arrived. Though I blame that more on the incompetence of the commander in that region. If I was stationed there, this shit would’ve been taken care of a long time ago…but I’m not, so unfortunately you will have to report to Captain Pollo.” + +Captain Gruz approaches you closer before continuing. + +“Now I’m putting you in charge of your unit for reasons I’m sure you’re aware of. While I’m confident I’ve made the right choice, the burden will ultimately be on you to prove to be an effective leader. Remember, you’re not just a normal soldier, you’re supposed to be an Eternal. An instrument of destruction ordered by the Emperor himself. Failure is never an option for you. Even now there are rumors about your kind, and when you finally show yourselves you will be met by fear, awe, hatred and even distain. Prove yourselves and you will live up to the name that your were given. Anyway, the caravan picking you up will arrive tomorrow. Good luck and dismissed.” + +With this you leave and tell the rest of your people about where you’re going and the general nature of what to expect. They all seem pretty excited to prove themselves, and to be honest so are you. At last you will get the chance to prove yourself and can only imagine that the Emperor will be pleased by what he will see. + +The next day, you and your unit are picked up and the ride there is uneventful, but your unit spends a little time talking about things they see on the way. This is the first time all of you have probably been away from the training center you’ve spent all your lives in. Curiosity about some of the surroundings is natural, but it isn’t just the casual talk that’s different. + +Your comrades are different. They are less reserved than they once were. Captain Gruz might’ve been a strict instructor, but in addition to encouraging teamwork he was also prone to encourage you guys to have a few hours of free time. This loosening of the reigns a bit, allowed a certain amount of familiarity with each other that wasn’t just on a professional level anymore. Even you have felt yourself changing personality wise. + +Still you are all Eternals, and you are loyal to the Emperor. You will never forget that your duty comes first. + +Eventually you all arrive at Fort Glory in the Nalin province where you are stared at by several soldiers who whisper among themselves. None of you pay it any mind though, you simply report to Captain Pollo. He doesn’t look anything like Captain Gruz. He’s human for one thing and wears lighter armor which is impeccably clean. When he sees you, he almost looks bored, like you were interrupting him, but you when you came in he was reclined in his chair and not doing anything of importance. + +“So…you are the Eternals I’ve heard so much about. Humph. I don’t see anything special except that pretty one over there. Oh no, not you dear. That blonde muscular one in the back. Yes, delicious.” Captain Pollo says pointing to one of your men and not even getting out of his chair. + +“Captain Pollo, we are here for our assignments so that we may serve the Emperor.” You say. +“(Sigh) I suppose you are this unit’s leader?” +“ Yes, captain. I am currently their leader and holding the rank of sergeant due to my excellence in my training exercises.” +“Sergeant? YOU? Why you’re a mere boy! All of you are just children! I ask them for more men and they send me children! The only thing you all would be good for is cleaning the fort! In fact that’s what you can go do right now, starting with the toilets!” + +This is exactly what Captain Gruz said would happen. This is your first test. + +“Captain, we have been trained in several forms of combat and fully ready to fight. Send us into battle and we will prove ourselves. We are here to perform our duty for the Emperor and all that entails.” +“All that entails eh? Okay, you want a fight? A few miles east of here, you’ll find a town called Dalt. Its filled with ignorant peasants that constantly whine to us that there are a nest of kobolds lurking in the hills near them. We’re stretched out as it is and can’t spare anymore troops to waste on towns that are of no military importance in the grand scheme of things. Go there and take care of their problem, then maybe we’ll have more to talk about.” + +You nod and all of you leave, but before you are able to Pollo calls you back. + +“Oh one more thing sergeant. Order one of your men to stay here with me. I think you know by now which one I mean.” + +At this point you’re in genuine shock. You may be young, and even a little detached from normal ‘society” but you know exactly what Captain Pollo is implying. You can honestly feel more than surprised by this though. + +“Captain, I will need all of my team to have the best chance to succeed in this mission.” You say. +“Oh? Well sorry, but you’ll have to make do like everyone else here does. Or you could clean the fort like I first ordered you to do, which you chose to ignore.” + +It’s a no win situation, though you try to figure out a loophole that takes the responsibility off of you. + +“Captain, you are of a higher rank than me, surely you could just order him yourself.” +“Ha ha, nice try. No. You want to be a leader of men? You need to make this decision yourself. Tis quite easy I would think. Sacrifice one for the good of the rest. If anything I’d say he’s the lucky one. He gets to stay here enjoying the pleasures of the flesh, and won’t have to be mucking about with kobolds and dealing with idiotic peasants.” +> Surviving Soldiers (Your Team) +There were eighteen of you that were sent to Captain Gruz, now there are only seven of you left, but that’s because you all proved to be the strongest and you proved to be the most gifted of them all. + +While you were picked to be a “leader” fairly earlier on in your training, you never really interacted with your classmates as much on a social level since you felt as team leader you were supposed to keep a proper barrier between you and your subordinates. + +Still, you have gotten to know them all on a personal level due to practically growing up with all of them, even if you haven’t been excessively close to any of them. + +Gerald is blonde with fair skin and probably the tallest. You remember when Mistress first put you against him you were slightly afraid of him, though you learned that day that size does not always equal skill. Still, he has certainly improved since those times otherwise he wouldn’t be here. From other observations you’ve made, he is one of the more talkative members of your team, and tends to get along with everyone. + +Warrick is a brown skinned youth with very curly hair. He tends to be more serious minded than some of the others, but can be talkative when he wants to be. Warrick’s fighting abilities were always good, but never anything special. He has proven to be a lot stealthier than the rest of you, but other than that nothing stands out about him. + +Brenda is the only female that made it through training, though there weren’t many to begin with. Female Eternals weren’t given any special treatment, so the fact that she is here, means she has definitely proven herself. Her fighting skills are adequate, but it is with ranged weapons like a bow where she really shines. While you all were altered at birth to function slightly differently than a normal human, the biology of a teenager and all that entails still affects all of you on some level. On more than one occasion your fellow male Eternals have begun to look at her a little differently than each other and sometimes you hear discussions about her and her physical attributes (Mostly Edgar and Gerald). It is unknown if she thinks similar things about the rest of you. As always you have attempted to maintain a proper barrier, though even you cannot deny that you’ve let yourself get distracted a few times by her… green eyes. + +Roldan, like Warrick doesn’t stand out in any meaningful way, however he does display a great sense of duty like you do. His combat skills are also about the same as Warrick’s. He tends to try to diffuse disagreements between others in the team when they arise. Almost like a “peacemaker.” You find this behavior a little strange for an Eternal, but you appreciate his efforts in helping to support a cohesive unit. If you were looking for a second, it would be Roldan. He’s a stable influence on the team. + +Kane is probably the best warrior in the team besides you. Mistress pitted him against you in your first match as well. After you incapacitated Gerald, Kane nearly beat you, but you managed to pull out a victory. (Much to Mistress’ dismay) Since that first victory, Kane and you have had several sparring sessions. Most of the time you won, but there were times when he did. Every time he did though, he would always ask if you were okay. Outside of these sessions, he has always been very respectful of you. You might even consider him to be your second, but he tends to stay in the back even more than Warrick and takes no initiative on anything unless directly called upon. He barely speaks to anyone, has a rather distant demeanor towards everyone else and he keeps to himself even more than you do. Still, he works well in the team when the time comes and nobody can doubt his combat skills. + +Edgar is your “problem” teammate with fiery red hair and an equally fiery temper. He’s always been a little more emotional than the rest of you though that doesn’t detract from his combat skills, which rank up there with Kane’s though unlike Kane, he’s never beaten you, but oh boy would he like to. Edgar would like to do a lot of things; one of those things is be the leader. He borders on insubordination at times and is probably the most outspoken of the group and will be the first one to point out flaws in something even if he turns out to be wrong (which he usually is). He also is an arrogant braggart that boasts about his abilities or successes whenever they arise. Unsurprisingly, he tends to rub everyone else the wrong way and if there is ever a major disagreement on the team, he’s usually the center of it. However, he can back up most of his boasts and is more than willing to prove himself and is not a coward in any sense of the word. Your own opinion of him is that he would be a much better warrior, and possibly could be a leader if he became more disciplined, a LOT more disciplined. You’re guessing his short stature (only Brenda is shorter) is part of what makes him behave the way he does.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 16 + +You are called into Captain Gruz’s office, when you arrive you see the well dress man that you saw four years ago standing with him… and debating with him again. + +“I’m telling you Mr. Mol, I think they should work in the same unit. They’ve trained together and they’ve worked together so well at this point that splitting them up would be folly. Hell, these people have known each other since birth! You know that better than anyone!” Gruz says. +“Yes, captain I’m well aware of the situation, and normally I might agree if their were more of them, but I think their expertise would better serve if we deployed them separately in problem areas of the Empire.” Mr. Mol replies. +“You don’t break up a well oiled machine! I guarantee having them all in the same unit will be a better idea. I mean we still haven’t sent them into a real battle yet! Wouldn’t it be better to see if they can get the job done first before placing them in charge of others?” +“And what a perfect opportunity to lose them all, if something unexpected should happen.” +“Oh for…look that could’ve happened here! And if you’re so worried about them all getting killed in battle then what was the fucking point then? Besides, if they do prove to be useless in battle, better we find that out sooner rather than later when they’re in charge of others and getting them killed as well!” + +Mr. Mol thinks for a moment and then replies. + +“Hmmm, very well you do have a point captain. We’ll try it your way at first and go from there. Have them deployed in the Nalin province. Your services here have been useful as ever. Good day.” + +Mr. Mol, steps out and commander Gruz addresses you. + +“Well you heard all that, you and your fellow Eternal babies are being sent to the Nalin province. It’s not the Rask Frontier, but it’s a suitable first challenge for you guys. We’ve been trying to settle the conquest of that place for a few years now, and technically it is part of the Empire, but we’re still having problems with the Kobold population there. Little bastards are determined to resist and have been conducting a fairly effective guerilla war since we arrived. Though I blame that more on the incompetence of the commander in that region. If I was stationed there, this shit would’ve been taken care of a long time ago…but I’m not, so unfortunately you will have to report to Captain Pollo.” + +Captain Gruz approaches you closer before continuing. + +“Now I’m putting you in charge of your unit for reasons I’m sure you’re aware of. While I’m confident I’ve made the right choice, the burden will ultimately be on you to prove to be an effective leader. Remember, you’re not just a normal soldier, you’re supposed to be an Eternal. An instrument of destruction ordered by the Emperor himself. Failure is never an option for you. Even now there are rumors about your kind, and when you finally show yourselves you will be met by fear, awe, hatred and even distain. Prove yourselves and you will live up to the name that your were given. Anyway, the caravan picking you up will arrive tomorrow. Good luck and dismissed.” + +With this you leave and tell the rest of your people about where you’re going and the general nature of what to expect. They all seem pretty excited to prove themselves, and to be honest so are you. At last you will get the chance to prove yourself and can only imagine that the Emperor will be pleased by what he will see. + +The next day, you and your unit are picked up and the ride there is uneventful, but your unit spends a little time talking about things they see on the way. This is the first time all of you have probably been away from the training center you’ve spent all your lives in. Curiosity about some of the surroundings is natural, but it isn’t just the casual talk that’s different. + +Your comrades are different. They are less reserved than they once were. Captain Gruz might’ve been a strict instructor, but in addition to encouraging teamwork he was also prone to encourage you guys to have a few hours of free time. This loosening of the reigns a bit, allowed a certain amount of familiarity with each other that wasn’t just on a professional level anymore. Even you have felt yourself changing personality wise. + +Still you are all Eternals, and you are loyal to the Emperor. You will never forget that your duty comes first. + +Eventually you all arrive at Fort Glory in the Nalin province where you are stared at by several soldiers who whisper among themselves. None of you pay it any mind though, you simply report to Captain Pollo. He doesn’t look anything like Captain Gruz. He’s human for one thing and wears lighter armor which is impeccably clean. When he sees you, he almost looks bored, like you were interrupting him, but you when you came in he was reclined in his chair and not doing anything of importance. + +“So…you are the Eternals I’ve heard so much about. Humph. I don’t see anything special except that pretty one over there. Oh no, not you dear. That blonde muscular one in the back. Yes, delicious.” Captain Pollo says pointing to one of your men and not even getting out of his chair. + +“Captain Pollo, we are here for our assignments so that we may serve the Emperor.” You say. +“(Sigh) I suppose you are this unit’s leader?” +“ Yes, captain. I am currently their leader and holding the rank of sergeant due to my excellence in my training exercises.” +“Sergeant? YOU? Why you’re a mere boy! All of you are just children! I ask them for more men and they send me children! The only thing you all would be good for is cleaning the fort! In fact that’s what you can go do right now, starting with the toilets!” + +This is exactly what Captain Gruz said would happen. This is your first test. + +“Captain, we have been trained in several forms of combat and fully ready to fight. Send us into battle and we will prove ourselves. We are here to perform our duty for the Emperor and all that entails.” +“All that entails eh? Okay, you want a fight? A few miles east of here, you’ll find a town called Dalt. Its filled with ignorant peasants that constantly whine to us that there are a nest of kobolds lurking in the hills near them. We’re stretched out as it is and can’t spare anymore troops to waste on towns that are of no military importance in the grand scheme of things. Go there and take care of their problem, then maybe we’ll have more to talk about.” + +You nod and all of you leave, but before you are able to Pollo calls you back. + +“Oh one more thing sergeant. Order one of your men to stay here with me. I think you know by now which one I mean.” + +At this point you’re in genuine shock. You may be young, and even a little detached from normal ‘society” but you know exactly what Captain Pollo is implying. You can honestly feel more than surprised by this though. + +“Captain, I will need all of my team to have the best chance to succeed in this mission.” You say. +“Oh? Well sorry, but you’ll have to make do like everyone else here does. Or you could clean the fort like I first ordered you to do, which you chose to ignore.” + +It’s a no win situation, though you try to figure out a loophole that takes the responsibility off of you. + +“Captain, you are of a higher rank than me, surely you could just order him yourself.” +“Ha ha, nice try. No. You want to be a leader of men? You need to make this decision yourself. Tis quite easy I would think. Sacrifice one for the good of the rest. If anything I’d say he’s the lucky one. He gets to stay here enjoying the pleasures of the flesh, and won’t have to be mucking about with kobolds and dealing with idiotic peasants.” +> Nalin Province (History Lesson) +The Nalin province exists on the southern outskirts of the Empire and is one of the quieter areas of it, one might even call it “backwards” but that wouldn’t really be a fair assessment. The people here are slightly simpler than in the other parts, but they maintain a strong work ethic and loyalty for the most part. + +Due to its lack of importance, lack of “serious” problems and remoteness, only the barest amount of military is actually stationed here to oversee the province, probably not nearly enough, but until the Empire decides to explore the wilderness to the east of it or possibly the Usksha desert to the south, then the status quo will remain. + +The major problem that the Nalin province suffers is mainly the kobolds that infest the area. Citizens have complained, but nothing has really been done to eradicate the problem. Without a concentrated effort to root them out, they’ll always be a menace and while they may be small they are can do a lot of damage in large numbers, and that always seems to be the case. + +Other than kobolds, the only other common problem is with bandits, but lately there has been another threat coming from the desert. Odd nomads that ride lizard mounts have been sighted more and more on the edges of the desert and Nalin. There haven’t been many encounters, but the few there have been, have been hostile. Why they have been wandering from their desert is unknown, but they’ll be a bigger problem than kobolds if more of them decide to make sort of mass migration.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The pain is great and you want it to be over with as quickly as possible so you cry out and scream for mercy to Mistress. To this, she merely laughs cruelly and continues to step on your chest. + +“Ha ha ha ha! If this was a real fight do you think an enemy would should you mercy? You truly are pathetic, how did the Empire ever decide that YOU would be a worthy candidate to be an Eternal? Begging for your wretched life as if it was important. It isn’t. Your life is nothing! ALL of your lives are nothing! Your lives will never be anything more than warm bodies to serve the Emperor! The question is, will you even be able to live up to that honored status? The answer is no, if you do not learn mercy is for the weak. Remember this.” + +At this point Mistress finally takes her foot off of you and much like your other classmate hit by her magic bolt, you slowly get up and back in your seat, clutching your chest. You sniffle and try to keep yourself from crying, but the tears are still there. A glare from Mistress causes you to quickly wipe your eyes and try to compose yourself the best you can. + +Time passes by under the harsh guidance of Mistress. She teaches you all that she promised she would and then some. Your lessons are not only that of a combat nature, but of an academic one as well. You wouldn’t be aware of it, but you and your classmates are probably much better educated than other children your age. + +As for you, Mistress never lets you forget of how you begged for your life in front of everyone. While it is true that she sadistically taunts everyone at one time or another, it doesn’t make your emotional and psychological scars go away. + +This shame you experience causes you to become more insecure and you constantly feel the need to prove to everyone that you aren’t weak. When you are called upon to spar with your fellow classmates, you always fight aggressively. For the most part you usually win, and you typically break a few bones of some of your fellow classmates. The lessons of being humiliated by Mistress have not been forgotten. You can’t ever let yourself be put in a vulnerable position again and you must be brutal, it’s the only way you’ll be able to please the Emperor. + +Your personality doesn’t go unnoticed by your instructor and watchers, they make note of it and decide how you should be handled in the next step of your training. + +Year 12 + +You are in a room with a few of your fellow classmates standing in a row. Most of your class has been separated for reasons unknown to you. All you know right now is there is a scarred orc in worn battle armor arguing with a well dressed man who is human. They are speaking about you, but not actually speaking TO you… + +“What? I thought the whole point of this program was to create an elite fighting group like the Shadow Guard, why are you splitting them up and intending to put some of them in regular military units?” the orc questions. +“Things have changed since the program’s inception. Besides, if the latest military reports are any indication I’d say you could use a better quality of recruits, or at least I hope that’s the problem and it isn’t due to a lack of proper training.” the man dressed in black formal wear calmly retorts. +“Hey! I train every grunt I get to be the best killer they can be! I’ve conquered more territory for the Empire than anyone! My record speaks for itself and I could do a hell of a lot more if you put me on the front lines again, so don’t try to tell me I’m not doing my fucking job!” +“Be that as it may, I’d say you still could benefit by having a few Eternals in your ranks, if nothing else than to be a good example.” +“Good example? HAH! We haven’t even seen one of these so-called Eternals in action yet! It’s all been just speculation, and a waste of time and money if you ask me! The Empire should be providing better equipment and more of it, for soldiers on the Rask Frontier, it’s a fucking meat grinder out there and we’re constantly having to put down rebellions by the natives.” +“Well nobody ASKED you, captain and your problems are not mine to deal with. This is the Emperor’s project and he has his reasons. If I were you I’d watch your tone. Victories or not, you are a servant of the Emperor and you will obey orders or you will be replaced.” + +The orc captain steps back from the well dressed man then he takes a deep breath, before speaking. + +“You are lucky that I do serve the Emperor, for that is the only thing keeping me from ripping out your throat, human…very well I shall take these so called Eternal whelps, but let it be known that I shall be testing them to the limit and then some. If they fail, they shall die like anyone else unable to keep up.” +“As you wish commander, I leave it in your capable hands. You will keep me apprised of their progress on a weekly basis. Good day.” The well dressed man says and leaves the room, leaving you all alone with the orc commander. You’ve never seen a real orc in person before, but he looks every bit as intimidating from what you’ve read about them, even if he is much more articulate than you expected. + +He walks up and down the row sizing you all up before speaking. + +“I am Captain Gruz, and I will be in charge of the rest of your training until the Emperor deems otherwise. I imagine that your former instructor was that dark elven bitch, so I trust you all know by now that failure and weakness have no place here. Correct?” +“Yes Captain!” you all shout in unison. +“Heh, well glad to see her skills in teaching discipline are still as effective as ever. Good. Now let’s see how good your combat skills are…” + +At this point you and your fellow classmates instinctively start to pair up to spar with each other, but Gruz stops you. + +“What are you lot doing? I didn’t tell you to get out of formation!” +“But captain, you said to prove our combat skills.” One boy speaks up. +“I…oh wait I see. She had you fighting each other. Typical dark elven training. Create mistrust and loathing even when there is no need for it. (Sigh) I can see I’m going to have to undo some of the shit she instilled in you if I’m going to mold you into the proper killing tools.” + +Time goes by and Captain Gruz begins to train you in various forms of combat, though it’s different. He teaches you and your classmates to fight as a team. This usually involves various large beasts similar to what you have already fought or even small groups of goblinoids. It takes awhile for you to adapt, but after seeing the first couple of casualties, you and the rest manage to pull together to defeat your enemies. + +Academically speaking, you are not taught much. Captain Gruz figures that Mistress taught you enough math and literacy to get by in life. Besides not much need for all that fancy learnin’ stuff when you’re going to be chopping people’s heads off on the battlefield. + +Captain Gruz is just as uncompromising as Mistress in his training, but he seems less gleeful about it. His verbal abuse is more direct and to the point rather than gloating about your failures. He still reminds you all regularly about how it is your sworn duty to serve the Emperor, but you hardly need him to tell you that, to believe otherwise is unthinkable. + +As for you, you find yourself given a role of leadership. Captain Gruz noted your tendency to be one of the first to charge into battle. He however also has some advice for you. + +“I respect your desire for battle, but if you do not control your insecurities you will one day find yourself needlessly unprepared. I suspect that dark elven bitch did something humiliating to you that has resulted in your behavior. Effective in some ways I suppose, but if you truly want to be a leader of men and command respect, you need to master your emotions as you would your weapons. You must do away with insecurities and be fully confident in your abilities. You must walk into battle already KNOWING that you will win, not charging in with a chip on your shoulder with some misguided desire to prove yourself. That’s a quick way to get yourself killed. Contrary to popular belief, your goal is NOT to die for the Emperor. Your goal is to survive and make the other dumb bastards die so that you may continue to serve the Emperor. Think on this when you lead your fellows into your next training assignment.” + +The captain’s words carry much weight with you and in the years during your training you manage to purge most of your doubts about yourself as well as becoming an accomplished warrior. + +Your instructor and watchers once again note your growth and skills, and as usual they make decisions on how you will best serve the Emperor. +> Captain Gruz and his kind (History Lesson) +While you were under Mistress’ class you learned that orcs were conquered by the Empire long before you were even born. They probably would’ve been wiped out completely if someone didn’t have the great idea of enslaving them for their strength instead. + +In time someone suggested that they be used as shock troops for places where fighting was heavy. This wasn’t a popular idea at first, but was implemented with caution as by that time the first generation of conquered orcs had long died out. + +It turned out to be a good idea as most orcs have an ingrained love of battle in the first place and while usually not that intelligent, it’s enough that one can tell them to “go kill the enemy over there” and they’ll do it. Orcs were eventually “raised up” from a slave race to a more indentured servant one where most served in the military; it also helped keep their population down. + +Captain Gruz is a very rare orc in that he’s brighter than most of his kind. He’s probably smarter than some humans. Second, he’s in a much higher position than those of his kind are usually allowed. However he proved himself countless times in battle, and if there is something that usually gains respects from Empire officials, its combat victories. He also had the fortune to have superior officers that were open minded enough to promote him. + +During his training sessions, he always speaks highly of the Empire and of the Emperor and always reminds you all of your own duty to them both. He also has a tendency to tell tales of past battles he has had as examples to follow or to learn from. You don’t know about the rest of your class, but you find these tales fascinating. You know he must love to fight with how he tells these tales, and you also know he must be a great warrior. All of which makes you wonder why he isn’t still on the battlefield. + +Still, it isn’t your place to question such things.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 5 + +You are sitting in a gray room at a desk with several other children your age. All of you glance at each other a lot and it is obvious that there is much curiosity, but nobody speaks. This is very unusual for you, up until now, you have only had minimal contact with others. Most of them are male like you, but a few of them are female. + +Soon the silence comes to an end when a dark skinned woman walks into the room. She has long hair and sharp features. One thing you notice is that despite her long hair covering her ears you can still see that the tips of them are pointed. She must be elven, but in the pictures you’ve seen in books, you’ve never seen one with dark skin before. + +“Hello children, and congratulations on maintaining dignified silence during your time by yourselves. It’s nice to see that your previous human minders aren’t totally incompetent. Still, if you were Svelk children you would’ve been much better trained by now. Ah, but it is not my place to dwell on the limitations of the lesser born. I am merely here to oversee your training into proper Eternals so that you may serve the Emperor to your fullest capabilities. Now before we begin, I suggest you all ask questions now, because this will probably be the only time I will be in the mood for your ignorance.” + +For a moment nobody speaks, but when the elven lady insists, one brave soul raises their hand. + +“Yes, you.” +“Are you an elf?” +“Yes, I am. While the ignorant would use the vulgar term dark elf to describe me, my kind are more properly known as the Svelk. In fact WE are the purest of the elven race. All others you may have the misfortune of meeting are merely diluted members of our bloodline. They are truly pitiful creatures really only fit for extermination. Remember this.” + +“Yes, you.” +“What is your name?” +“My name is unimportant, but you and the rest will always address me as Mistress. Failure to do so will earn my wrath, and more importantly the wrath of the Emperor. Remember this.” + +“Yes, you.” +“What will you teach us?” + +A second passes after the question, when a small bolt of light from the Svelk’s finger tips and hits the child in the chest asking the question. He falls backwards out of his chair and on to the floor. The rest of you jump in your own chairs and look back at him. He is breathing very erratically. + +“I will teach you to OBEY my commands when I give them!” Mistress shouts, she then warns the rest of you. + +“Don’t you dare touch him, let alone help him! (Sigh) And here I thought you lot had been trained better! It occurs to me that I will have to be extra strict in my discipline. As to the question about what I will teach you… I will teach you to be warriors. I will teach you to be wizards if you display the talent. I will teach you to shed yourselves of weakness. I will teach you to serve the Emperor without question and kill without mercy and you will always obey for you will find strength in obedience. You will find joy in order. You will find love in murder. You shall be instruments of terror and genocide if he so wishes it. You will be Eternals…or you will die. Remember this.” + +After Mistress’ speech, the child she struck down eventually struggles back up and gets back in his seat, clutching his chest and still wheezing. + +“I trust you have learned your lesson?” +“Y…yes…Mistress…” he gasps. +“Good, now one more question before we begin…you there. What is your question? Speak up!” Mistress demands while pointing at you, though you have not raised your hand. + +You don’t wish to disagree with Mistress, so you stumble and try to think up a question. + +“Uh…er…I was just wondering when will you teach us to fight Mistress?” +Mistress raises an eyebrow and gives a smirk as she approaches you. +“Fight? And what makes you think that YOU are even ready to learn yet? Do you have even the slightest knowledge of combat tactics?” +“No, Mis…” before you can even complete the sentence Mistress knocks you out of your chair with a quick jab with her hand, the pain from your face spreads to your chest when Mistress steps on it with her boot. She digs it into you and presses all her weight on it, while the rest of your class looks on. + +“Damn right, no you don’t. You weren’t even alert enough to anticipate my attack. You let me get in close and now look at you, you’re completely at my mercy. I am in a position to do whatever I like with you, while you are only in a position to beg or die. So what will it be worm? Are you going to beg for your miserable life, or should I save the Empire’s time and money by killing you now?” +> Die +The pain is great and you want it to be over with as quickly as possible, but you know to beg for mercy would be shameful, so you gasp say you’d rather die than beg. This response surprises her to a point that she actually takes her boot off your chest giving you relief. + +“Truly, little one? You accept death so quickly? Have you no instinct for survival, or are you merely a fool? Still, your refusal to beg at least shows promise. It also shows that you know your place and that your life is ultimately not your own. It is nothing. ALL of your lives are nothing! Your lives will never be anything more than warm bodies to serve the Emperor! Remember this.” + +At this point much like your other classmate hit by her magic bolt, you slowly get up and back in your seat, clutching your chest. It hurts, but you compose yourself the best you can. + +Time passes by under the harsh guidance of Mistress. She teaches you all that she promised she would and then some. Your lessons are not only that of a combat nature, but of an academic one as well. You wouldn’t be aware of it, but you and your classmates are probably much better educated than other children your age. + +As for you, Mistress doesn’t treat you any worse or better than any of the other children, but your first experience with her did have an effect on your behavior. You take her lesson that your life ultimately not being important to heart and you become more and more withdrawn. So withdrawn in fact that you almost become invisible to your fellow classmates and even Mistress sometimes forgets that you’re there at all. If it was not for group projects and sparring lessons you probably would be forgotten. + +You obey commands and do your training and that is all. Why bother worrying about anything else when your life is not your own? You must follow orders even if it means your death, it’s the only way you’ll be able to please the Emperor. + +Despite your low key nature, your personality doesn’t completely go unnoticed by your instructor and watchers, they make note of it and decide how you should be handled in the next step of your training. + +Year 12 + +You are in a room with a few of your fellow classmates standing in a row. Most of your class has been separated for reasons unknown to you. All you know right now is there is a man in a dark robe speaking with a well dressed man. They are speaking about you, but not actually speaking TO you… + +“Far be it from me to question orders, but I thought the whole point of this program was to create a separate elite fighting unit. Why are they now being split up and more importantly why are some being placed with us?” +“Things have changed since the program’s inception. Besides I would’ve thought the Shadow Guard would’ve appreciated such an honor of receiving such worthy candidates.” the man dressed in black formal wear calmly retorts. +“That remains to be seen. I’m sure you’re fully aware of our strict guidelines on who is accepted. There are tests and rituals to go through.” +“So, put ‘em through whatever it is you do. Look, I’d say you could benefit by having a few Eternals in your ranks, if nothing else than to keep you from getting lax.” +“Lax? Our group has been the eyes and ears of the Empire for centuries, and our vigilance is beyond reproach. We haven’t even seen one of these so-called Eternals can do. It’s all been just speculation, and if I may be so bold, a misguided appropriation of time and funds. The Empire should be providing the regular military better equipment and more of it, so that we don’t have to be sent in to help them on the frontlines when we could be doing better things with our time such as keeping the Empire safe from subversives and other internal parasites.” +“Your concerns are irrelevant. This is the Emperor’s project and he has his reasons. If I were you I’d watch your tone. For someone who doesn’t question orders, one wonders if you have to be reminded that you are a servant of the Emperor and you will obey or you will be replaced.” + +The robed individual steps towards the well dressed man before speaking. + +“Fortunately for you, I do serve the Emperor, for that is the only thing keeping me from ripping out your throat. Never question my loyalty again…very well I shall take these so called Eternals, but if they fail to live up to Shadow Guard standard, then they shall die like anyone else.” +“As you wish brother, I leave it in your capable hands. You will keep me apprised of their progress on a weekly basis. Good day.” The well dressed man says and leaves the room, leaving you all alone with the robed man. You’ve never seen a Shadow Guard before, but while he doesn’t look quite as menacing from what you’ve heard about them you know that he is a force to be reckoned with by reputation alone. + +He walks up and down the row sizing you all up before speaking. + +“I am Brother Gray, and I will be in charge of the rest of your training until the Emperor deems otherwise. I imagine that your former instructor was that svelk woman, so I trust you all know by now that failure and weakness have no place here. Correct?” +“Yes Brother!” you all shout in unison. +“Hmm, well glad to see her skills in teaching discipline are still as effective as ever. Good. Now let’s see how good your combat skills are…” + +At this point you and your fellow classmates instinctively start to pair up to spar with each other, but Gray stops you and immediately knows what’s going on. + +“Oh no, you won’t be fighting each other. The svelk’s cultivation of mistrust and loathing in all of you has its place, but not for our purposes. As a Shadow Guard you will learn that the reliance on such emotions to be a hindrance, as all emotions are. I can see I will have to undo some of the foolishness she has instilled in you all.” + +Time goes by and Brother Gray begins to train you in various forms of combat. It’s actually similar to some of the stuff Mistress was starting to teach you as he goes on about unconventional warfare such as poisoning water supplies and assassinations. However he also teaches you and your classmates to work better as a team. One test involves fighting a strange beast called a Thought Lurker. It is one of the most grueling battles you’ve ever had and it doesn’t require weapons at all. It takes place all in your mind and it utterly destroys a few of your classmates. It is only when you and your classmates concentrate together as one you are ultimately successful in defeating it. + +Academically speaking, you are still given a well-rounded education. A strong mind and knowledge wins more battles than any blade did as Brother Gray says. + +Brother Gray is just as uncompromising as Mistress in his training, but he is not gleeful about it at all. His verbal abuse is a cold disappointment rather than gloating about your failures. He still reminds you all regularly about how it is your sworn duty to serve the Emperor, but you hardly need him to tell you that, to believe otherwise is unthinkable. + +As for you, you find yourself fitting in better here. It might be due to the conditioning that emotions are a hindrance and the emphasis on duty since you already had a slightly stoic personality coming in. There is a calming peace of knowing exactly what you need to be placing importance on. Despite your nature of blending into the background, you have not gone unnoticed by Brother Gray who approaches you to give you direct advice one day. + +“You are a little different from your fellows. I have noticed that you adapted much better to training than they did. You may even survive the ritual when the time comes, however I will give you a little advice. I can see that you do not believe your life is truly important. You believe that you feel it is merely your duty to serve and if you die in the process, then you will die. I imagine this might be the result of something that the Svelk woman did to you…in any event, this approach will not do. There is no weakness in maintaining a survival instinct while serving. Yes, you will be called upon to perform dangerous duties or even suicidal ones in the service of the Emperor, but you should always try to survive even if the odds are against you. The Shadow Guard has been doing it for centuries. Remember, the longer you survive, the longer you can continue serving the and there is no greater honor. Think on this on your next training assignment.” + +Brother Gray’s words carry much weight with you and in the years during your training you begin to discard your overly fatalistic approach to life well as becoming an accomplished warrior. + +Your instructor and watchers once again note your growth and skills, and as usual they make decisions on how you will best serve the Emperor. +> Years pass... +Year 16 + +You and four of your fellow Eternals stand once again before Brother Gray this time though he is joined by another one of his fellow shadows. This man is almost indistinguishable from Brother Gray, similar robe, head covering hood, the only thing really different about him is that he’s slightly taller. + +“Eternals, you have survived this far when some of your fellows have not. This means you show promise in joining our order, but it does not yet mean you belong. There is one more test that you have to pass through, before that can happen. I shall let Master Ebon explain more.” + +With this, Master Ebon steps forward and begins to speak, it is at that moment you notice that something is slightly off about him. Like part of him is becoming translucent momentarily. + +“Eternals, I have heard much about you and how skilled you all are. So far I am not impressed. You have been given gifts and advantages from birth yet only a few of you actually made it this far. However, given Brother Gray’s sterling assessment of all of you that do remain, perhaps I just need to see it for myself. In any event, all of you shall be undergoing the Ritual of the Shadow. It is in this important ceremony that you will gain abilities such as this…” + +Master Ebon, suddenly disappears completely and before you know it, he is behind all of you, forcing you all to turn around. + +“This is just a simple ability, compared to others you will gain in time, assuming you survive the ritual. I should also mention this ritual will also open your eyes to the truth and bind you…all of us in a way you have never even pondered before. I am not sure if you Eternals have bonded despite growing up together, but you even if you have, that bond will not compare to that of the shadows. Our order has existed for a very long time and will continue to do so long after other systems haven fallen to the dung heap of history.” + +Master Ebon at this point turns around and begins to chant in some strange language. After about five minutes of this, a shimmering portal opens up, though it sort of fades in and out of existence. + +“And now Eternals, the ritual begins. You two, enter the portal together.” Ebon says pointing at Cyrus and Brian. The pair of them nod and walk into the portal. + +After a few moments have passed, Ebon speaks again. + +“You two, enter the portal together.” He says and Talia and David enter the portal leaving you by yourself. + +A longer stretch of time passes and even you begin to feel a little anxious despite your best efforts.” Master Ebon naturally notices this. + +“Since you have been spoken about in such high regard from Brother Gray, I have decided that you do not need to take this test, you are already skilled enough. In fact I believe that you probably do not belong in our order, and you would best serve the Emperor as a soldier. I will inform Mr. Mol of this and he will probably have you transferred to an appropriate post of your skill.” +“Master Ebon, I’m not afraid to go through the ceremony! I want to do this!” you protest. +“Hmm, didn’t expect you to protest. I was told that you have a habit of not questioning orders almost to a suicidal degree, though due to your skill, you manage to survive, so I know you are not afraid. However, while loyalty and obedience are certainly important traits to have, I believe that your particular mindset really would serve the Empire’s military instead. The military is a very simple place. Your superiors tell you to kill and you kill. They tell you to die, and you die. The Shadow Guard is a less…absolute branch that requires questioning and deeper thought at times. Contrary to popular belief we do not just snatch people off the streets because someone criticizes the Empire. Such a policy would undoubtedly depopulate countless cities and towns. No, we only seek out those that truly desire the fall of the Empire and sometimes that requires investigations.” +“So you are telling me I am not intelligent enough to be a Shadow Guard.” +“I didn’t say that. Again from what I’ve heard, you have exceptional intelligence. No, what I’m saying is your mindset is different. Now I know Brother Gray said he spoke to you about maintaining a survival instinct, but mere survival isn’t enough.” +“I know this. I survive so that I may serve the Emperor longer.” + +Master Ebon at this point raises his hands and drops them. + +“And that’s exactly why you would better serve in the military. There is no shame in this, not everyone is meant to be a Shadow Guard, not even an Eternal. I will make the preparations to have you transferred.” + +Master Ebon turns from you to speak to Brother Gray and you’re left speechless. You’re also left with a lot of conflicting feelings. You feel disappointed, angry and confused all at the same time. Part of you is content on accepting Ebon’s assessment. He may even be right. He’s talking about questioning and complex thought and you don’t exactly know what he means by all that. What else could there be other than serving the Empire? + +Another part of you feels defiant. You want to prove that he is wrong, you want to jump into the portal before he can do anything about it. Maybe he’s expecting you to do that though. Maybe this is a test? But why would there be a test that encourages disobedience? + +In any event, if you’re going to make your move, you need to do it now. +> Stay where you are +You might not agree, but you aren’t going to disobey orders. Besides, maybe the military would be better for you. To be quite honest you thought you were going to be serving in it anyway. + +You are taken back to your room by Brother Gray who says he will be sorry to lose one so talented, but if Master Ebon feels you are not right for the order, then you should not be here. He says that Mr. Mol will be informed at once of the situation and he will give you your new assignment from there. + +You aren’t too sure what to think about everything, but you’re confident that you will be placed somewhere fitting to your skills. Hopefully soon, so you can start serving the Emperor properly. + +A couple days pass and it is all straightened out. Mr. Mol seems slightly disappointed that you’re being transferred out, but mentions that he knows where to put you. He has you transferred to the Rask frontier, specifically a place called Fort Defiance. + +It’s a long carriage ride to a cold snowy land, but eventually you make it there. You haven’t gotten off the caravan five minutes when a man wearing battle armor approaches you. + +“Hey are you one of those Eternals?” +“Yes I am.” +“I’m Captain Ian, I’ve heard about you and while you don’t look like much, we’ll take anyone at this point. Though I would’ve preferred more battle mages or even orcs at this point. + +Captain Ian begins to give you a run down on the entire area. He mentions that the mortality rate here is high so morale isn’t the best. He goes on to mention that Shadow Guard detachments have been assigned here to help out, but between the ogres and the giants there’s only so much that even they can do. He mentions the new unit you are to be assigned to and to report to it as soon as possible. + +With the caravan leaving, you head to your new unit. When you see them, quite a few of them are predictably much older than you, but surprisingly you see that half of them are around your age. Your superior gruffly introduces himself as sergeant Baily and that he expects you to pull your weight and then some, because there is no room for slackers here. You of course say you have no intention of slacking, and are thrilled to be here to serve the Empire. + +Your enthusiasm is met with dismissal from Baily and a couple of snickers from other soldiers, but nobody else really says anything. You are told to find a bed and make it your own. + +You settle in as you begin your assignment at Fort Defiance. + +Year 17 + +Knee deep in snow with minimal visibility due to a blizzard and chilled to the bone. This situation would be unpleasant even without ogres trying to cave in your skull at the moment. + +You dodge the ogre’s swing and cleave one of his legs causing him to fall into the snow, then you finish him off. You look around and see the bloody dead bodies of several members of the squad and of the ogres that ambushed you. + +“Damn it! I knew this was going to fucking happen! He does this every fucking year! He sends a bunch of unlucky bastards to patrol this pass during the worst winter month and they get torn up every time. To hell with this, we’ve been out here long enough, we’re getting outta here!” Sergeant Baily shouts to you and the remainder of the squad. + +You have to admit you didn’t see the logic in sending a group to patrol Kragen Pass either, but then you’ve noticed that Captain Ian isn’t the greatest mind for tactics or strategy. Your whole time here hasn’t been what you expected, but then you’re just glad that you’re doing something meaningful to serve the Emperor. + +Your squad leaves the bodies behind and makes its way through the blizzard in silence. You briefly think about how this time last year, you were a potential candidate as a Shadow Guard, funny how things change so quickly. You’ve seen some of the Shadow Guard that have been stationed here, but you’ve never spoken to any of them, they tend to keep to themselves, like they’re hiding secrets nobody else is supposed to know about. In any case, you appreciate their combat training, its certainly helped you survive in this harsh environment. + +During this momentary retreat into your own thoughts, a large rumbling is heard. You look overhead and even in this blizzard you can see the large figures looming on the cliffs. Given that you can actually make out the figures in this snow, you know that these aren’t more ogres. + +“GIANTS! RUN!” Sergeant Baily shouts to you and the remainder of the squad. You all attempt to run as fast as you can out of the pass. Large boulders crash down along side the cliffs with an equally large amount of ice and snow. You see two of your number crushed by the boulders thrown by the giants. You and Sergeant Baily make it a little further, only to be engulfed in snow and buried in the stuff. + +You’re disorientated, tired, freezing and slowly suffocating, but with determination, you manage to dig yourself out. You look around to find Baily, but apparently he was killed immediately or didn’t have the strength to dig himself out. It’s too bad, because you could’ve used his help when you see several giants now advancing on your position, though perhaps it wouldn’t have mattered. + +You know that this is most likely going to be your last battle. You draw your sword and walk towards the giants. It will be a good death, but your only regret is that you will not survive to serve the Empire for longer than you would’ve liked.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 16 + +You and four of your fellow Eternals stand once again before Brother Gray this time though he is joined by another one of his fellow shadows. This man is almost indistinguishable from Brother Gray, similar robe, head covering hood, the only thing really different about him is that he’s slightly taller. + +“Eternals, you have survived this far when some of your fellows have not. This means you show promise in joining our order, but it does not yet mean you belong. There is one more test that you have to pass through, before that can happen. I shall let Master Ebon explain more.” + +With this, Master Ebon steps forward and begins to speak, it is at that moment you notice that something is slightly off about him. Like part of him is becoming translucent momentarily. + +“Eternals, I have heard much about you and how skilled you all are. So far I am not impressed. You have been given gifts and advantages from birth yet only a few of you actually made it this far. However, given Brother Gray’s sterling assessment of all of you that do remain, perhaps I just need to see it for myself. In any event, all of you shall be undergoing the Ritual of the Shadow. It is in this important ceremony that you will gain abilities such as this…” + +Master Ebon, suddenly disappears completely and before you know it, he is behind all of you, forcing you all to turn around. + +“This is just a simple ability, compared to others you will gain in time, assuming you survive the ritual. I should also mention this ritual will also open your eyes to the truth and bind you…all of us in a way you have never even pondered before. I am not sure if you Eternals have bonded despite growing up together, but you even if you have, that bond will not compare to that of the shadows. Our order has existed for a very long time and will continue to do so long after other systems haven fallen to the dung heap of history.” + +Master Ebon at this point turns around and begins to chant in some strange language. After about five minutes of this, a shimmering portal opens up, though it sort of fades in and out of existence. + +“And now Eternals, the ritual begins. You two, enter the portal together.” Ebon says pointing at Cyrus and Brian. The pair of them nod and walk into the portal. + +After a few moments have passed, Ebon speaks again. + +“You two, enter the portal together.” He says and Talia and David enter the portal leaving you by yourself. + +A longer stretch of time passes and even you begin to feel a little anxious despite your best efforts.” Master Ebon naturally notices this. + +“Since you have been spoken about in such high regard from Brother Gray, I have decided that you do not need to take this test, you are already skilled enough. In fact I believe that you probably do not belong in our order, and you would best serve the Emperor as a soldier. I will inform Mr. Mol of this and he will probably have you transferred to an appropriate post of your skill.” +“Master Ebon, I’m not afraid to go through the ceremony! I want to do this!” you protest. +“Hmm, didn’t expect you to protest. I was told that you have a habit of not questioning orders almost to a suicidal degree, though due to your skill, you manage to survive, so I know you are not afraid. However, while loyalty and obedience are certainly important traits to have, I believe that your particular mindset really would serve the Empire’s military instead. The military is a very simple place. Your superiors tell you to kill and you kill. They tell you to die, and you die. The Shadow Guard is a less…absolute branch that requires questioning and deeper thought at times. Contrary to popular belief we do not just snatch people off the streets because someone criticizes the Empire. Such a policy would undoubtedly depopulate countless cities and towns. No, we only seek out those that truly desire the fall of the Empire and sometimes that requires investigations.” +“So you are telling me I am not intelligent enough to be a Shadow Guard.” +“I didn’t say that. Again from what I’ve heard, you have exceptional intelligence. No, what I’m saying is your mindset is different. Now I know Brother Gray said he spoke to you about maintaining a survival instinct, but mere survival isn’t enough.” +“I know this. I survive so that I may serve the Emperor longer.” + +Master Ebon at this point raises his hands and drops them. + +“And that’s exactly why you would better serve in the military. There is no shame in this, not everyone is meant to be a Shadow Guard, not even an Eternal. I will make the preparations to have you transferred.” + +Master Ebon turns from you to speak to Brother Gray and you’re left speechless. You’re also left with a lot of conflicting feelings. You feel disappointed, angry and confused all at the same time. Part of you is content on accepting Ebon’s assessment. He may even be right. He’s talking about questioning and complex thought and you don’t exactly know what he means by all that. What else could there be other than serving the Empire? + +Another part of you feels defiant. You want to prove that he is wrong, you want to jump into the portal before he can do anything about it. Maybe he’s expecting you to do that though. Maybe this is a test? But why would there be a test that encourages disobedience? + +In any event, if you’re going to make your move, you need to do it now. +> Run into the portal +Test or not, you’re not going to stand here and accept the judgment that Master Ebon has passed on you. You’re more than strong enough to pass through the ceremony, you know you are and to prove it, you immediately make a run for the portal. + +“Master Ebon, the Eternal is running towards the portal!” you hear Brother Gray shout just as you make a leap into the shimmering portal. If Ebon said anything you didn’t hear it, in fact as soon as you pass through the portal you don’t hear anything. You also don’t see anything or even feel anything. It’s like you’ve stepped into a place that has sucked out all your senses. You even attempt to speak out loud, but nothing comes out, of course you wouldn’t really know since you can’t hear anything. You don’t believe you’re standing on anything and feels like you’re “floating” in some sort of void. + +As for your mental state of mind, your feelings have become muted. You still have them, but they aren’t as strong as they once were. Even before when you suppressed your feelings yourself, you never managed it to this degree. Everything has become deadened. + +All of this is so strange and you briefly wonder if you’ve made a mistake, but then you hear a voice, but it’s inside your head. It isn’t some sort of subconscious either. It’s a very real external force speaking to you in your mind. The voice is a whisper, but loud at the same time, almost overpowering. + +“You were not given permission to be here. Why have you disobeyed your superior?” the voice asks. +“I…I wanted to prove I was worthy.” You answer. It is a strange sensation to speak with just your brain. +“I see…so do you think you are worthy?” +“Yes.” +“Your confidence is admirable. Yet, you do not even where you are, let alone WHO you are.” +“I am an Eternal.” +“Are you? Tell me, how can one be an Eternal, when one has not even experienced life outside what your superiors have told you? How can one be eternal when one is a mere baby in terms of existence? How can one be eternal when you are before a being that has existed longer than you mortals first came up with the idea of your primitive methods of measuring time? No, you are not eternal. You are confused.” + +The voice is absolutely oppressive. Any feelings that were dead before are replaced with an extreme feeling of hopelessness and as the voice stated confusion. Within that moment you start to question everything you were taught. Not the skills, but the ideology. Still, you try to maintain your mind, by asking questions. + +“Are…are you the god of the Shadow Guards?” +“That designation I suppose is accurate in a sense, but one should not get stuck with just one description, lest it confine you. I am many things as are you, even if you do not realize it yet, despite what your superior believes. Not to say he is wrong, just that he does not have the…insight I possess. Now your fellows that entered before you did are limited in their thought processes. Some have already failed due to their lack of complex thought. Tell me, are you loyal to your Emperor and your Empire?” +“…of course!” you say, though due to your experience in this place, you feel a lot less certain of that, for the first time. This whole event is troubling to you. You almost feel suicidal for not answering with absolute certainty. +“One cannot serve two masters, or at least not for long. The ones your Empire has designated the Shadow Guard are my loyal servants. They are loyal to ME, first. You cannot be a true member of this order if you place your Emperor above me. My followers have survived by hiding in plain sight and making themselves indispensable to the Empire. They have done this for centuries, but there will be a reckoning some day soon and the question is, who’s side are you going to be on?” + +You cannot answer. The concept of not placing the Emperor about all is so abhorrent to you that you can’t even comprehend it. Yet here you are being asked this question by a god no less. He’s even suggested a reckoning of some sort that indicates the Shadow Guard will betray the Empire in the future! How can you argue with such a being though? If you disagree it is likely to destroy you, but in this place you almost can’t help but to swear subservience to this god. You feel so helpless that it’s almost like the choice Mistress gave you except even worse. +> Swear to serve the god to survive +You want to live so much that nothing else matters to you, and no matter how much it sickens you utter “I…I will serve you…” with great effort. +“Yes, you will serve, but do you mean it? I don’t think so. You’re lying to survive this encounter. This is interesting. I was correct in that you are not as rigid as your fellows. If you are willing to risk lying to me in an attempt to save your life, then you are possibly willing to do ANYTHING to save your own life…that means there is still hope for you. I’d advise you though, do not wait too long to pick a side, otherwise you may find that even your will to survive won’t be enough to save you. + +The feeling of oppression leaves you, and it’s instead replaced by a surge of pain jolting through your body. You’d probably cry out if you could, instead you suffer in silence. + +“You will be given the powers I bestow to all my worshippers. Whether you will use them to further the cause or not, is another matter, but one that shall be interesting to see unfold. I have a feeling we shall speak again Eternal.” +And with those last words, you blackout and lose consciousness. + +When you wake up, you find yourself back in the room where you first stepped into the portal. Master Ebon, Brother Gray, Cyrus and Talia all stand around you. + +“He’s awake.” Brother Gray remarks. +“Hmm, it truly is the work of Dendrin that he survived the process. Dendrin must’ve seen something in him that I did not. I will have to ask for forgiveness of my lack of vision tonight in my prayers. You two, help your brother up, he has proven worthy to be called a shadow and passed Dendrin’s judgement.” + +As Cyrus and Talia help you up, you’re feeling a little groggy and you ask who Dendrin is. Everyone goes silent as if you’ve said the wrong thing. + +“Who is Dendrin? Are you jesting? Dendrin is our god! Surely his name appeared in your mind when he spoke to you during the ceremony.” Talia exclaims. +“Huh…oh…right…I dunno I feel so drained and woozy right now.” You sputter, so as to cover up your less than typical experience with Dendrin. +“Hmm, well that does happen. Some new members take days to fully recover after being in the presence of his power.” Master Ebon remarks. “In any case, I welcome the three of you to the fold and you are now truly as brothers and sister to us. Our bond is stronger than any can hope to imagine and with Dendrin’s guidance there is nothing we can’t accomplish. You three shall report to Fortress Gloom, from there you will receive your future assignments and even additional training on your new powers. I shall take my leave now as I have other more important duties to perform. Brother Gray I trust you can take it from here.” + +Master Ebon leaves, and Brother Gray does indeed take over. He mentions that the four of you will be heading by carriage to Fortress Gloom, which is located in Quala, the home province of the Empire. Fortress Gloom is apparently the sole head quarters of all the Shadow Guard. + +On the carriage ride there Brother Gray speaks more on Gloom. + +“Personally we’d prefer it if we were located in the Delerg province, but since most of our assignments are in Quala, the Empire desires that we stay close by, still our home at least borders on Delerg so it isn’t all bad and things will be set right one day. +“What is so special about Delerg?” you ask and once again you’ve said something that causes disapproving silence followed by scolding. + +“Sheesh, you really are out of it aren’t you? Delerg is the original home of the Shadows! You should know this when Dendrin open your mind to our history!” Cyrus shouts. + +Once again you apologize and claim you’re having problems with gaps in your memory and continued disorientation. Brother Gray is a little more understanding and says that you’ll soon recover and remember everything and that in the mean time you can refresh your memory with the books at Fortress Gloom. + +You thank him and decide to stay quiet until you can get a better understanding of your situation. It is apparent that you did not pass through the ceremony like everyone else did. Cyrus and Talia seem like they’re dedicated converts now. Brian and David are no where to be seen and nobody has mentioned them. You can assume that Dendrin destroyed them for some reason. Presumably because they refused to serve, but still that doesn’t explain why you were spared. Dendrin obviously knew you were just paying him lip service to save your own life, and he passed you anyway. Is there something else in store for you? + +You don’t know and you can’t do much about it right now. You just hope you can make it through this. + +Eventually the carriage stops at the edge of a forest area. + +“Okay we have to walk the rest of the way; it’s not too far though.” Gray remarks and all of you get out and the carriage driver quickly makes his way out of the area. + +Gray leads the way through the dark forest. The trees have so much foliage that they’re blocking out most of the sunlight. Several times you could swear something is watching you in the trees, but nothing attacks. Gray, Cyrus and Talia, aren’t on edge as you are, but then they wouldn’t have cause to be. + +Eventually you all an area with a large rock formation in the forest. Gray mumbles a few words and then another portal opens up in one of the large rocks. He tells you all to follow and you do. After a long flight of stairs downward, you finally reach Gloom proper. It certainly lives up to its name as you travel the corridors the entire place is barely lit, the place is also very quiet. Gray goes on to explain that the place used to be a former Derro stronghold, but they abandoned it for unknown reasons long before the Shadow Guard started to use it. + +After a small tour of a small portion of the fortress, Brother Gray tells you all that you will all share the same room with some of the other newer members for now, though he says that the room itself might currently be empty as they are probably on their duties right now. He also goes on to say that he wants you to test out your shadow powers in the training are tomorrow before you go on assignments, so you should try to rest in the meantime. + +You, Cyrus and Talia retire to your room and sure enough it is indeed empty of any other members right now. You all grab a bed that doesn’t look like it has been taken yet. Cyrus begins to speak. + +“I don’t know about the rest of you, but I’m going to test some of my powers now. I figure I should get a head start on the practice.” He says and then attempts to make himself invisible. He flickers for a moment, but then fails completely causing himself to collapse on the bed. + +“Wow, maybe I shouldn’t have tried something so hard at first.” He says breathing hard. + +Talia does something a little different; she begins to run from one end of the room to the other. For a brief moment she is a barely visible blur, but she too is winded from the effort. + +“I think we should wait until we have proper instruction first. You two are going to hurt yourselves.” You say. +“Proper instruction? All the knowledge is right here! Dendrin saw to that!” Cyrus says pointing to his head. “All we need to do is practice.” +“Leave him be brother, he’s still recovering from his experience being in the presence of Dendrin.” +“Yeah, I guess. What an eye opener that experience was though! Seriously, all that stuff we learned was really enlightening. Don’t you agree sister?” +“Oh yes. Just think, all those lies they told us just to try to keep us loyal to the so called Emperor. Murderous tyrant is all he really is and his day will come.” Talia says. + +You can’t believe what you’re hearing. It’s unreal to hear two Eternals you’ve practically grown up with to speak such…treason! You don’t know what they heard when they went through the ceremony, but it’s very apparent they have been corrupted. As much as you’ve been trying to keep your feelings on everything secret, you almost feel like you must speak or do something about it. +> Confront Cyrus and Talia +Cyrus and Talia are still Eternals and you have to believe that despite whatever divine indoctrination has taken place that they still have some sort of loyalty to the Emperor and not the Shadow Guard and certainly not Dendrin. + +In any case, you’re going to try to get through to them and you don’t know how to do that except just by being direct. + +“Do you two really think Dendrin is more powerful than the Emperor?” you ask. +“Of course! How could he not be? Why would you even ask such a thing?” Cyrus says. +“Dendrin showed us…all of us that the Emperor and the Empire is a lie and corrupt! He is the only true path! You were in his presence! How can you doubt him?” Talia adds. + +“I might ask you two how you can you suddenly revere Dendrin and turn your back on all of what has been taught us? Dendrin…whatever he is obviously is going to show us, or tell us whatever he wants for his own purposes, that doesn’t make it true! We’re Eternals first remember? We swore to serve the Empire, it’s why we were born!” +“Stop it! Just stop! You’re speaking heresy and foolishness! I think your mind was too weak to withstand the greatness of Dendrin and has been damaged!” Talia says. +“On the contrary I would ask how is it that I have maintained MY ability to question the Shadow Guard agenda? Why is it that Dendrin did not just destroy me if I wasn’t worthy? Perhaps I’m the strong one. I managed to hold on to my beliefs against a god while you two quickly abandoned them completely. Now you’ve got two options, you can either leave this place with me and we shall report this treasonous organization to the Empire and I swear I will not mention your own doubts in the Emperor.” +“The only reporting you should be doing is to either Brother Gray or Master Ebon about your sickness and hope they know how to treat it! I’m warning you, continue to speak the way you have been or…” +“Or else what Cyrus? You’ll kill me?” you ask and shake your head. “Do what you must then, but see now that I will not be able to get through to you. Now what about you Talia? Are you completely…” + +Before you can complete the sentence, Cyrus attacks you. You narrowly miss a blade to your chest and throw Cyrus face first into a nearby bed. You then follow up with a stomp to his spine though you fail to break it and instead he just grunts in pain. You pull out your own sword and then that’s when Cyrus starts using his new shadow powers. He rolls out of the way and turns invisible. + +You begin swinging at his closest location, but he slips by and stabs you in the foot. You wince at this pain and kick forward with your other foot. I lands somewhere into Cyrus, because he makes another sound. At this point he’s flickering in and out and also breathing heavy. His inexperience at the shadow magic has reared its ugly head again to your advantage. + +Unfortunately you were so focused on fighting Cyrus that you completely forgot about Talia, she however hasn’t forgotten about you. You feel two daggers go excruciatingly into your back and puncture your vital organs. You yell out in pain and collapse on to the floor. + +“(Wheeze) Thank you my sister. (Pant) Only a shadow for a little while and we’ve already managed to kill an enemy of Dendrin! I’m sure someone heard our fighting, but I’m going to go find Brother Gray, you stay here and watch his body, though I imagine he won’t give you anymore trouble.” Cyrus says and leaves. + +You aren’t dead yet, but you soon will be. Talia, stands far enough away from you so you can’t do anything sudden to her in your last moments. + +“Why did you have to say anything? Why didn’t you just submit to the will of Dendrin? You made me kill you!” Talia says with a tone of regret in her voice. +“No I didn’t…I did my duty. You chose to abandon yours…” +“I didn’t! I…” + +Talia’s voice quivers a bit, like she’s genuinely upset about having to kill you. You didn’t expect that, maybe it will cause her to question her priorities now. Perhaps your actions here have accomplish something after all and the seed of chaos has been planted to destroy the Shadow Guard from the inside before they can carry out whatever plans to betray the Empire. + +You comfort yourself with these thoughts as you pass from this world.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You want to live so much that nothing else matters to you, and no matter how much it sickens you utter “I…I will serve you…” with great effort. +“Yes, you will serve, but do you mean it? I don’t think so. You’re lying to survive this encounter. This is interesting. I was correct in that you are not as rigid as your fellows. If you are willing to risk lying to me in an attempt to save your life, then you are possibly willing to do ANYTHING to save your own life…that means there is still hope for you. I’d advise you though, do not wait too long to pick a side, otherwise you may find that even your will to survive won’t be enough to save you. + +The feeling of oppression leaves you, and it’s instead replaced by a surge of pain jolting through your body. You’d probably cry out if you could, instead you suffer in silence. + +“You will be given the powers I bestow to all my worshippers. Whether you will use them to further the cause or not, is another matter, but one that shall be interesting to see unfold. I have a feeling we shall speak again Eternal.” +And with those last words, you blackout and lose consciousness. + +When you wake up, you find yourself back in the room where you first stepped into the portal. Master Ebon, Brother Gray, Cyrus and Talia all stand around you. + +“He’s awake.” Brother Gray remarks. +“Hmm, it truly is the work of Dendrin that he survived the process. Dendrin must’ve seen something in him that I did not. I will have to ask for forgiveness of my lack of vision tonight in my prayers. You two, help your brother up, he has proven worthy to be called a shadow and passed Dendrin’s judgement.” + +As Cyrus and Talia help you up, you’re feeling a little groggy and you ask who Dendrin is. Everyone goes silent as if you’ve said the wrong thing. + +“Who is Dendrin? Are you jesting? Dendrin is our god! Surely his name appeared in your mind when he spoke to you during the ceremony.” Talia exclaims. +“Huh…oh…right…I dunno I feel so drained and woozy right now.” You sputter, so as to cover up your less than typical experience with Dendrin. +“Hmm, well that does happen. Some new members take days to fully recover after being in the presence of his power.” Master Ebon remarks. “In any case, I welcome the three of you to the fold and you are now truly as brothers and sister to us. Our bond is stronger than any can hope to imagine and with Dendrin’s guidance there is nothing we can’t accomplish. You three shall report to Fortress Gloom, from there you will receive your future assignments and even additional training on your new powers. I shall take my leave now as I have other more important duties to perform. Brother Gray I trust you can take it from here.” + +Master Ebon leaves, and Brother Gray does indeed take over. He mentions that the four of you will be heading by carriage to Fortress Gloom, which is located in Quala, the home province of the Empire. Fortress Gloom is apparently the sole head quarters of all the Shadow Guard. + +On the carriage ride there Brother Gray speaks more on Gloom. + +“Personally we’d prefer it if we were located in the Delerg province, but since most of our assignments are in Quala, the Empire desires that we stay close by, still our home at least borders on Delerg so it isn’t all bad and things will be set right one day. +“What is so special about Delerg?” you ask and once again you’ve said something that causes disapproving silence followed by scolding. + +“Sheesh, you really are out of it aren’t you? Delerg is the original home of the Shadows! You should know this when Dendrin open your mind to our history!” Cyrus shouts. + +Once again you apologize and claim you’re having problems with gaps in your memory and continued disorientation. Brother Gray is a little more understanding and says that you’ll soon recover and remember everything and that in the mean time you can refresh your memory with the books at Fortress Gloom. + +You thank him and decide to stay quiet until you can get a better understanding of your situation. It is apparent that you did not pass through the ceremony like everyone else did. Cyrus and Talia seem like they’re dedicated converts now. Brian and David are no where to be seen and nobody has mentioned them. You can assume that Dendrin destroyed them for some reason. Presumably because they refused to serve, but still that doesn’t explain why you were spared. Dendrin obviously knew you were just paying him lip service to save your own life, and he passed you anyway. Is there something else in store for you? + +You don’t know and you can’t do much about it right now. You just hope you can make it through this. + +Eventually the carriage stops at the edge of a forest area. + +“Okay we have to walk the rest of the way; it’s not too far though.” Gray remarks and all of you get out and the carriage driver quickly makes his way out of the area. + +Gray leads the way through the dark forest. The trees have so much foliage that they’re blocking out most of the sunlight. Several times you could swear something is watching you in the trees, but nothing attacks. Gray, Cyrus and Talia, aren’t on edge as you are, but then they wouldn’t have cause to be. + +Eventually you all an area with a large rock formation in the forest. Gray mumbles a few words and then another portal opens up in one of the large rocks. He tells you all to follow and you do. After a long flight of stairs downward, you finally reach Gloom proper. It certainly lives up to its name as you travel the corridors the entire place is barely lit, the place is also very quiet. Gray goes on to explain that the place used to be a former Derro stronghold, but they abandoned it for unknown reasons long before the Shadow Guard started to use it. + +After a small tour of a small portion of the fortress, Brother Gray tells you all that you will all share the same room with some of the other newer members for now, though he says that the room itself might currently be empty as they are probably on their duties right now. He also goes on to say that he wants you to test out your shadow powers in the training are tomorrow before you go on assignments, so you should try to rest in the meantime. + +You, Cyrus and Talia retire to your room and sure enough it is indeed empty of any other members right now. You all grab a bed that doesn’t look like it has been taken yet. Cyrus begins to speak. + +“I don’t know about the rest of you, but I’m going to test some of my powers now. I figure I should get a head start on the practice.” He says and then attempts to make himself invisible. He flickers for a moment, but then fails completely causing himself to collapse on the bed. + +“Wow, maybe I shouldn’t have tried something so hard at first.” He says breathing hard. + +Talia does something a little different; she begins to run from one end of the room to the other. For a brief moment she is a barely visible blur, but she too is winded from the effort. + +“I think we should wait until we have proper instruction first. You two are going to hurt yourselves.” You say. +“Proper instruction? All the knowledge is right here! Dendrin saw to that!” Cyrus says pointing to his head. “All we need to do is practice.” +“Leave him be brother, he’s still recovering from his experience being in the presence of Dendrin.” +“Yeah, I guess. What an eye opener that experience was though! Seriously, all that stuff we learned was really enlightening. Don’t you agree sister?” +“Oh yes. Just think, all those lies they told us just to try to keep us loyal to the so called Emperor. Murderous tyrant is all he really is and his day will come.” Talia says. + +You can’t believe what you’re hearing. It’s unreal to hear two Eternals you’ve practically grown up with to speak such…treason! You don’t know what they heard when they went through the ceremony, but it’s very apparent they have been corrupted. As much as you’ve been trying to keep your feelings on everything secret, you almost feel like you must speak or do something about it. +> Remain silent +As much as you want to, speaking about your own thoughts on this situation would be folly. Cyrus and Talia have obviously been brainwashed and you’re deep in a fortress that contains traitors that would undoubtedly overwhelm you even if did try to escape. No, your time will be better spent waiting until you are at least able to get out of the fortress and report to someone of importance in the Empire. + +It’s about the only thing you can do. In the meantime you’re going to have to do your best to fit in and learn. Instead of engaging in the practicing of your shadow powers (Which you’re still too worried about using to be honest) you take one of the books in a nearby shelf and begin reading about the laws and scripture of the Shadow Guard seeing as you didn’t experience the immediate knowledge of all this stuff during your encounter with Dendrin. + +You fall asleep reading, but you don’t exactly have a restful sleep. The next morning you are awakened and the three of you are taken to the training room as discussed the day before. Talia and Cyrus seem to master their new powers relatively quickly; you on the other hand have some problems. Your trainer, Brother Shade doesn’t understand why you are, but is somewhat frustrated that he has to spend more time with you. He never threatens you with any sort of physical punishment though, which is a relief. + +After a few weeks Talia and Cyrus have been sent on various assignments, meanwhile you’re still confined to the fortress due to your sub-par shadow magic (Though not your fighting skills) Brother Shade insists that you stay another few months before being sent on any mission. This gives you more cause for some anxiousness since you really want to leave in order to tell someone about this place. Instead you continue to try to learn as much as you can through reading. + +You don’t mix too much with the other Shadow Guards and mostly keep to yourself. You just don’t feel any connection with any of them even after studying more of the history and beliefs. You just look at them and see traitors to the Empire. The eeriest thing is how the Shadow Guard occasionally makes passing treasonous remarks and will mention how the Empire will fall soon, like it’s a foregone conclusion. + +Even Cyrus and Talia, are sort of distant now. The only time they really speak is to taunt you about your magic training. You have to wonder if they is a little revenge going on there as you were always a better close combat fighter than either of them. They of course are fitting in very well with the rest. Cyrus especially seems close to another Shadow Guard by the name of Draven. + +You try to remain positive though that you’ll eventually get the chance to leave this place. While to most people in your situation feeling fear and nervousness would be pretty natural, but for you it is definitely something that isn’t natural and you don’t like it at all. + +Eventually that day comes and you are summoned to Brother Gray’s office. + +“Okay, I believe you’re ready. I don’t understand why it took you so long though, you showed such promise during our initial training exercises.” +“I suppose I’m just not magically inclined Brother Gray.” +“Perhaps, but the power and knowledge that Dendrin infused into you, should’ve circumvented any of that…no matter I’ve been told by Brother Shade that your skill is good enough now. Still, I’m also trouble by the reports that you’ve been distant to your fellow Shadows. This is your family now, you shouldn’t be stand offish to them, you need to embrace them as your brothers and sisters because that’s what they are.” +“I’m sorry Brother Gray, I guess I’ve just felt self-conscious about my lack of magic skills. Everyone else picked it up so easy compared to me and I didn’t feel like I belonged.” +“Hmm, well I suppose you probably received some taunts, but family members do that too. You shouldn’t have taken it too personal, and I think if you would’ve asked, one of them would’ve helped you. Surely Brother Cyrus or Sister Talia would’ve helped given that you have the most in common with them.” +“Maybe…I dunno. They fit in better.” +“(Sigh) This won’t do at all. Here I am thinking that you were ready, but apparently you have some deeper issues. I swear you are the first to have such a problem. I mean you know that we are all on the same side here right? You know that we will stick together no matter what correct? We all have a duty to Dendrin and we are going to see to it that his glory be restored and that means teamwork, community and family.” +“…yes I suppose you’re right.” +“Well I’m not right about everything. I think you need to be involved in some more socializing around here, before we send you out.” +“What? But I’m ready! I want to leave!” you say with a loud tone. +“And I don’t think that’s a good idea. You obviously don’t feel welcomed by your fellow Shadows, and that’s not a good mindset to have out in the field if you don’t trust your own family.” +“But…” +“No buts! I know you’re probably anxious to start serving Dendrin in a meaningful way, but I still think you need to stay a little longer. There will be no more debate about this. Dendrin demands that his worshippers trust one another, for it is our unity that will ensure our struggle will succeed. I think you’ll need to stay in here for the remainder of the year, then I think you should be ready. You are dismissed, brother.” + +The remainder of the year, your heart sinks into further hopelessness. You don’t know if you can stand this place much longer, let alone have to make “friends” with the people here. + +Yet you must if you want to survive. And that’s what you did when you met Dendrin isn’t it? You did what you had to, to survive. You leave Brother Gray’s office. + +“By the Emperor, give me the strength to exist in this lair of traitors that seek to do you harm. May I be strong enough to survive and warn you in time.” You quietly say to yourself. + +As you head back to your room to attempt to make friends. You wonder why Dendrin let you live when he knew you would seek to destroy his followers. Is it some sort of sick game that a being like him finds amusing? + +It must be, because it’s the only rational explanation at this point. +> Years pass... +Year 18 + +“And so I said to the blacksmith, well if you’re intending on killing the Emperor, you better damn well have a better plan than those group of thugs you’ve been supplying with weapons in the sewers. At least supply them to some thugs who the Emperor wouldn’t be able to smell six miles away!” you say, and this is followed by a few laughs from some of your fellow shadows. +“Hah, good one brother! Tell me, what did you do to the blacksmith?” Brother Murk asks. +“Oh we relocated him to our safehouse in Derlerg along with his buddies, reported that we eliminated him as a dissident…you know the usual. I must say, their surprise that we aren’t going to kill them is always amusing though.” You reply. +“Yes, given our reputation, I imagine it is. Still, it’s all for a good cause eh, brother?” +“Yes brother, it certainly is.” You say to Murk with a nod and take another drink of black tea. +“Well I have to say I’m very glad you’ve finally managed to settle in brother, I have to admit, for awhile I was getting a little worried about you. You just didn’t seem like yourself after our ceremony initiation.” Talia says. +“Yeah, well I guess I was just a late bloomer or something.” +“Don’t worry about it brother, it’s all in the past. What matters now is that we’re all on the same page now.” Murk replies. + +On the same page…the problem is you really aren’t on the same page. You haven’t been since you got here. The other problem? You’re starting to feel like you might be getting there though. During the time you were forced to socialize you just swallowed your fear and self-doubt and proceeded like it was any mission. And you were successful. Perhaps a little too successful. + +Once you actually got sent out on a mission, you were paired up with Brother Murk. A fellow you had become semi-friendly with during your months of socializing. Your original plan was as soon as you left Gloom, you were going to run to the nearest Empire fort and make your report. + +Though for this plan to succeed in any meaningful way you would’ve had to kill Murk and despite your better judgment, you couldn’t bring yourself to do it. You later cursed yourself for this temporary weakness and the next time you were sent out, you vowed to yourself that you’d do it again, the problem was you had only become friendlier with Murk within that time. You failed again. + +By the time they rotated your partnership and you were paired you with someone else, you still couldn’t do it, because now you actually started to feel like the Shadow Guard really was like a family to you. And you liked that feeling. In fact it was the best you’ve felt in a long time. + +Yet, now you are in a difficult position. You are still loyal to the Empire and the Emperor first, but you haven’t been able to find the fortitude to expose the Shadow Guard for what they are. You attempt to rationalize it in your mind, by claiming the longer you stay the more you learn about their exact plans, and while that’s certainly true, it really isn’t the TRUTH. + +The real truth is you’re starting to believe in the Shadow Guard’s cause slightly. You don’t know if it’s because you’ve spent so much time here that you’ve developed some sort of emotional attachment or some odd sort of subtle indoctrination. + +Is this what Dendrin really had in store for you? Did he know you could be turned even without his intervention? Before you had that experience everything was so certain, your feelings weren’t a constant source of ups and downs. Even under Mistress, you don’t remember ever feeling this. It was either success or death. It was very simple and you preferred it. + +Now you don’t know what the hell you’re doing. Are you a traitor? Are you still loyal? Are you both? Are you neither? + +You excuse yourself from the rest of your brothers and sister and say you have to get some rest, though in reality you have to take a long look at your priorities. Once again you spend a few more months going through your usual routines and quietly suffering in silence. + +That comes to a halt when Murk comes into the barracks one day… + +“Hey, where are brother Cyrus and sister Talia?” he immediately asks you. +“Uh, sister Talia I think is in the library and brother Cyrus is probably with brother Draven somewhere.” You reply. +“Oh, well I’ll go get Talia, someone else can look for Cyrus, but you need to report to Master Ebon right away.” +“What’s this all about?” +“I don’t know, just that he wants you, Talia and Cyrus to see him. Something about someone from the Empire wanting to meet with all three of you. Sounds important.” + +You get up and walk to Master Ebon’s office which remains closed, so you wait. A few moments later, Talia joins you. + +“Hello, brother. Isn’t master Ebon here?” +“If he is, he isn’t answering his door, so I’ve been waiting outside.” +“Do you know what this is about?” +“Dunno, just that someone from the Empire wants to see us.” + +Talia nods and remains silent. Soon Cyrus joins you and asks a similar question, to which you answer in a similar manner. He grunts at you and stands as far from you as possible, though he says something polite to Talia. Same old Cyrus. + +No sooner has Cyrus got there, when Ebon’s door opens. You hear a voice that tells you to come in. You didn’t even think he was inside, but you guess he was really waiting to see you all together. When you all enter, he tell Cyrus to close the door and gets right to the point. + +“You three have been summoned by Mr. Mol. Apparently he wants to ask you a few questions and is insisting on doing it somewhere in the capital I believe. In any case, he claims he wants to check on your progress as an Eternal, but I suspect he’s fishing for information about us.” +“You don’t think he suspects anything do you?” Talia asks. +“I do not believe he knows anything about our true goals, if he or anyone did, I have no doubt we would’ve been moved upon by now. No, I think this is just another Empire ploy to try to get more inside intel on our organization, which for the reasons I just mentioned they cannot know about.” +“I won’t say a word to this running dog of the Empire! My eyes have been open a long time and my loyalty is and will always be to Dendrin.” Cyrus says. + +Master Ebon nods. “Yes, I know it will be. I have no doubt, but I still would like you all to just be on your guard when answering questions none the less. It probably won’t come to this, but kill yourselves if you have to. It won’t be ideal, since it’ll arouse suspicion, but it’ll still give us time to go ahead with our plan anyway, even if it would be a few years early. Anyway, the three of you are to make your way to the town of Lenet and from there you’ll take an Empire carriage to the capital. Return immediately if you are able. May Dendrin and the shadows hide your true intentions.” + +With those last words, Ebon sends you away and the three of you set off on your journey. You begin to feel nervous as soon as you leave Gloom, you weren’t expecting this happening, but deep down you did know that something like it was going to happen eventually. You remain mostly quiet during the journey as you try to get in a certain frame of mind of what you’re going to do or say. Cyrus is mostly silent as well, though you’re guessing that’s because he’s so firmly entrenched in his belief in Dendrin, that he knows what he’s going to say and do. + +Talia is the only talkative one and that’s mainly questions about what you both think Mr. Mol will ask you. You know she’s dedicated herself to Dendrin, but you sense that perhaps she’s a little nervous too, though you don’t know if it’s due to her new loyalty to Dendrin or because she’s been harboring secret loyalty to the Empire like you have. You decide to imagine it’s the latter, mainly because you want to make yourself feel better. + +Eventually the carriage from Lenet reaches Qale, the Empire’s capital and several soldiers immediately step forward to say they are here to escort you to Mr. Mol. The three of you are taken from the opulence of one of the main streets and quickly through a system of back alleys until you eventually reach a non-descript building. You enter and there you see Mr. Mol. It’s the well dressed man you saw speaking to Brother Gray six years ago. He’s also wearing the same formal black suit he was back then. + +“Ah, the Shadow Eternals. I’ve so wanted to catch up with your progress, but my attention was on your less subtle peers for a while. I think we’ve sorted them out though, so now it’s time to sort you out as well. Just a formality really, we just want to see if you’re achieving your full potential in the Shadow Guard. After all you’re Eternals first, and we wouldn’t want your talents to not be used to their fullest potential in the service of the Emperor, right?” + +Cyrus and Talia say nothing, but you feel obligated to acknowledge that question if only to not look suspicious. + +“Correct. All that we are, we owe to the Emperor’s will.” you say. +“Glad to hear it! Now then we’re just going to be asking you some questions, these soldiers will take you to a place to wait. Off you go.” + +At this point the three of are marched out of the room and down a long hallway. The cold broken stone walls and desolation of this place almost makes Gloom look cheery by comparison. Eventually you reach a door on your left and Cyrus is told to wait inside the room. He enters without a word, but gives you and Talia a look like “Say nothing!” + +A few moments later you reach another door on the left, this time Talia is told to wait inside. She hesitates for a moment, but enters. She gives you a look as well, though this one is more of concern. + +Finally you reach the last door on the left and you are told to enter and wait. You do so without looking at anyone. The door shuts behind you and the ominous sound of a lock is heard. + +There isn’t much you can do, so you sit down at one of the chairs in the middle of the room and wait. + +And wait…and wait…and wait…and wait… + +You don’t know how much time has passed, but you get up and move about several times before sitting down again. You don’t quite panic as much as you think you would, but being alone with your thoughts is definitely not the best thing for you. Right now you’re already thinking they’ve managed to break Talia into talking and probably killed Cyrus. + +Maybe if you cooperate right now, there will be leniency? Why shouldn’t you cooperate? The Shadow Guard ARE traitors after all, and this is just the kick in the ass you needed to remind you of that. + +But then there’s the other part of you that feels loyal to the shadows and how you shouldn’t betray them. You go back and forth what you’re going to do several times, and then you hear the lock on the door. Mr. Mol enters… +> Tell him everything +You’re going to tell him everything. Yes, it is true that you’ve bonded a bit with the Shadow Guard and you can even understand their motivations, but Mr. Mol is right. You’re an Eternal first and your duty is ultimately to the Emperor. If you suffer any punishment due to not coming forward sooner then so be it. + +Mr. Mol sits down in the other chair in the room and before he can even say anything you get straight to the point. + +“The Shadow Guard is planning to betray the Empire. They have been for years. Centuries even. They’ve just been biding their time for the right moment to strike, and that moment is supposed to be soon.” + +Mr. Mol sits back and exhales deeply. + +“Well, I guess that saves me a little time. I certainly thank you for that, your fellow Eternals were disappointing in that regard.” +“Are…are they dead?” +“Dead? Oh no. They’re very much alive. Knew they were hiding something, but I assumed it was just typical Shadow Guard bullshit about their god and rituals. Possibly even manipulating things to benefit their order, but that’s certainly to be expected. (Sigh) We really should’ve been doing something about them a long time ago, and to a certain extent that’s why you Eternals were created. I’m glad at least one of you managed to avoid brainwashing…which brings me to another question. Why didn’t you come forward with this information before?” +“I…I have no excuse…I felt very influenced sir. After I went through the shadow ceremony and their god spoke to me…I…” +“Hold on, you actually spoke to Dendrin?” Mr. Mol stop you. +“Yes, you know the god’s name?” +“Of course I do, it isn’t as much of a secret as the shadows like to pretend. It just isn’t spoken out loud in public because that’s part of the original agreement. Certainly don’t need a bunch of religious fanatics gaining any more power by speaking highly of their god to the masses. Even if said fanatics are loyal to the Emperor, which apparently has never been the case if what you’re saying is true. Now start at the beginning and ALL of what you’ve learned.” + +You start from the moment you ran into the portal and continue about your experiences from there. Mr. Mol makes several notes and tells you to explain in greater detail on certain things. As you tell him all the shadow secrets you know, you feel a great weight lifted off of you, but you still feel very anxious since you don’t know what’s going to happen to you afterwards. + +“Okay…this is great information. Makes a lot of sense now any past attempts to infiltrate the Shadow Guard have never worked when their own god is indoctrinating them completely in their ceremony. Well except you of course. Guess nobody’s perfect, not even a god. Still, we shouldn’t have been so complacent either, but with this information I think we can get this under control within time.” +“So what’s next?” you ask. +“Next? Well you and your fellows go back to Gloom like nothing has happened. I’ll be in touch with you in the future to give you further instructions.” +“You’re not going to destroy them now?” +“Heh, well we certainly could with this information alone, but from what you’ve told me, the dissention is more than just the Shadow Guard at this point. They’ve got safehouses of dissidents in various locations…this is a big job and ideally, we want to neutralize the majority of this threat in one swoop. If we moved now all it would do is tear the Empire in half sooner rather than later. This isn’t going to be pretty even if our counter plan goes right, but the best thing is we do know that we need to focus internally now. Plans to invade the Felkan Kingdom again will have to wait unfortunately.” +“So, I’m not to be punished?” +“Punished? What for? Oh you mean because you felt influenced? Well, that is concerning, however considering you just told me everything after constantly being bombarded with shadow propaganda not to mention Dendrin’s own words I’d say your willpower is strong enough to resist anything. In fact I need to make a note of that too, it’ll help to know for future Eternals.” +“Future Eternals?” +“Oh yes, the project is still going on. In fact we’ll need more of your type to fill in the gap that will be left by the Shadow Guard when they’re gone. Those that know the value of loyalty and duty to the Empire like you of course. We’ll try to prevent mistakes like Talia and Cyrus this time. Like I said nobody’s perfect, but we can still strive towards it.” + +Mr. Mol then sits forward, puts a hand on your shoulder and stares into your eyes. + +“The Empire needs you more than ever to defend it from its enemies and you’re in the perfect position to do so. Is your duty clear?” +“Yes, I live to serve the Empire and the Emperor. They will always come first, before everything else.” You confidently reply. +“Good. Good. I’m glad to hear it and I certainly hope now you feel better and less alone knowing that you have the entire might of the Empire supporting you.” +“I do. Thank you.” +“Now then, I want you to go back with your fellows and carry on as normal. As I stated I will be contacting you in the future and your official mission now is to gather as much information of the Shadow Guard as possible. I know you’ve given me a lot already, but there’s always more that can be acquired.” + +This new sense of encouragement, purpose and direction coupled with telling Mr. Mol everything makes you feel a lot better about your choice. So much so, that you even volunteer to go beyond what he asks. + +“Did you want me to assassinate anyone?” +“Heh, I like your enthusiasm, but it might be best for you to concentrate info gathering first. Though I suppose if you can somehow arrange a group of shadows to face with an accident without getting caught, I’m not opposed to it. Simple sabotage is good too, as long as they don’t get the impression that anyone is on to them.” + +You understand, and you are lead out of the room and back into the main room where you see Cyrus and Talia waiting with the soldiers. + +“Okay I believe we are done here. I am pleased to find that all of you are obviously living up to your potential. I was a little concerned only because a couple of your non-shadow Eternals already have proven to lack the discipline we thought they had. One was executed for killing his superior officer and another one died by breaking a solid fighting formation during a battle. I’m glad to see all of you are much better in that regard and I can only chalk that up to the Shadow Guard’s superior training techniques. Perhaps more Eternals in the future will join as it is obvious you all have tremendous willpower and great loyalty to the Empire.” Mr. Mol says glancing over at you with that last line. + +And with that, the three of you are lead back to the carriage, which takes you back to Lenet, and from there you walk back to Gloom. You’re all more talkative at this point, Talia and Cyrus go on about the questions with each other and you. Of course you lie and state you were asked similar ones. + +“So do you think he suspected anything?” Talia asks. +“Doubt it. The Empire fool didn’t even ask anything remotely important. It is obvious Dendrin’s shadow covers his eyes from the truth. So much so that it required minimum effort on our part to even lie to him. I mostly just omitted truth.” Cyrus mocks. +“Omissions of the truth are usually better than outright lies anyway. Less of a chance to get caught up in a web.” Talia comments. +“Yeah, I didn’t even need to lie at all.” You say which causes you to laugh inside your head given the double meaning of that remark. + +After the three of you report to Master Ebon, he seems pleased with how things turned out, but states that he’s pushing to enact the plan sooner for concern that the Empire may still suspect something. He then says to expect things to get hectic soon, but with Dendrin’s guidance you all will surely prevail and the Empire will collapse. + +You retire to your bed to get some rest as it’s been a long stressful day. You’re finally glad to have settled your crisis of loyalty though. With these comforting thoughts you drift off to sleep… + +As you sleep you begin to dream. You dream that you’re in the same void like space when you walked into that portal two years ago. You feel nothing and you sense nothing for a long time then you hear the voice, that oppressive voice that invades your mind completely. + +“So Eternal, you have chosen to betray me.” +“You said yourself that I was only saying I’d serve to save myself in your presence. Why are you so surprised?” +“I am not, I’m merely observing your motivations which were equally unsurprising. I’m fascinated that one such as you would have the willpower and strength to defy a god, yet still be narrow minded enough to trust in a mortal government. You may as well be a golem.” +“The Empire hasn’t threatened me with death, unlike you have.” + +The whispery voice suddenly lets out a hearty laugh to loud in your mind that it’s painful. + +“And you believe that? The Empire has done nothing BUT try to kill you from birth! Wasn’t until you arrived to train under the shadows that your risk for death was lowered! Even when you met me, I never directly threatened you with death, I gave you a choice for which you should be grateful!” +“Deity, if I offend your omnipotence so much, then why not kill me now? You obviously have the power to invade my dreams and if I’m a threat, you should do what needs to be done.” +“Eternal, Eternal, you are no more of a threat to me than your beloved Empire is. And your insolence does not offend me, it is your ignorance that offends me. If you believe this path is one of survival you are sadly mistaken.” +“And joining a hopeless cause like your cult of fanatics is?” +“Eternal, you will see. Eventually you will see. You ask me to kill you now and though I could, I wouldn’t because it will be interesting to see you running about trying your best to undermine my loyal followers. However, the major question is, will you survive in the process? The odds are against you Eternal. Severely against you.” +“I will prevail.” +“Perhaps, but at what cost?” + +With those last words, you wake up. You try to go back to sleep, but it isn’t easy. Just like actively spying on the shadows isn’t going to be easy, especially since Dendrin himself knows what you’re doing. You just can’t figure out why he is insisting on tormenting you like this, what can he possibly get out of this other than sadistic pleasure? You can even comprehend that aspect, but what you don’t get is why he wouldn’t immediately get rid of you in order to help his own followers. + +Is this an elaborate trick or does he just not give a shit about his worshippers? You don’t know. The best you can do is what you can achieve in the mortal realm and leave the motivations of any gods out of the picture. +> Years pass... +Chapter 2B1: The Emperor’s Shadow + + +Year 20 + +“So you say, Brother Cyrus and Brother Draven are going to be assigned to Rask soon?” you ask. +“That’s what I’ve heard from Brother Gray. Them and a few others. Next year at the latest.” Murk says +“What’s the reason, from what I’ve heard it doesn’t seem like the Empire has a good grip on Rask anyway.” +“Well that’s sort of the point! By weakening the areas where the power isn’t as strong it causes the Empire to divert resources from other places and making those much easier to bring down as well. We’re going to need it too, Master Ebon was sure the Empire would’ve started another war with the Felkan Kingdom by now, but as it stands they’re practically friends with them, well as much as the Empire can be. Oh well there’s still time I suppose.” +“We don’t have that much time, we should push things along in our favor with some international incidents.” Brother Shade says. “In fact, I’m going to mention that to Master Ebon next time I see him.” +“You don’t think that he hasn’t already thought of such a plan?” Talia asks. +“Perhaps, but let’s just say I’ve been here a little longer than the rest of you, and while I know Master Ebon is just waiting for the right time to strike, he’s been playing the waiting game a little longer than I think is necessary. In fact I think he’s been playing it so long that maybe his vision has become clouded from certain opportunities.” + +This statement from Brother Shade gets a lot of looks, but nobody says anything. The shock is too great. Even you are surprised as this is the first time you believe you’ve heard something close to an open criticism about Master Ebon or the leadership structure in general + +And that’s something you can definitely use. + +Soon after his statement Brother Shade leaves to attend his duties. + +“Brother Shade should watch how he talks about Master Ebon. Ebon speaks directly to Dendrin on a daily basis and knows best on how to proceed.” Murk remarks. +“Then why did you not speak up, instead of just sitting there?” Sister Bianca asks. +“Uh…well…” +“Always trying to impress the ladies, eh Murk?” you chuckle and take your leave as well to go seek out Brother Shade, he hasn’t gone far and you catch up with him in the hallway. Fortunately nobody else is around. When you get his attention he’s not exactly cordial. + +“Oh it’s you, what do you want, I have duties to attend to brother.” +“Nothing excessively important brother, I just wanted to say you aren’t alone.” +“Aren’t alone in what?” Shade asks. +“You aren’t alone in how you feel. I think we should strike against the Empire now as well. All this waiting around isn’t helping our cause.” +“Well I suggest if you want to help our cause, you keep your feelings to yourself brother and focus on your responsibilities…and your magic skills.” +“But brother, you said…” +“Nevermind what I said! I spoke in haste to a bunch of snot nosed shadows that barely know what it truly means to serve Dendrin. Now leave me be!” + +Shade at this point pushes you aside and walks off. Well that didn’t go like you hoped; still, you can report this to Mr. Mol who you have to meet in a few days anyway. + +When you meet Mr. Mol at the usual spot, you tell him everything you know as usual. + +“So, planning to destabilize Rask, eh? Well I’ll see what we can do about that…tell me have you heard any plots involving orcs?” Mr. Mol asks. +“Mmm, I don’t believe I have. I would’ve told you.” +“Okay then, maybe it’s not related, but some of our orcish troops have been getting restless lately, mostly those stationed in Rask too. If we had proceeded with our invasion of the Felkan Kingdom like we wanted, we could’ve thinned out their ranks a little. As much as we need them in the far northern reaches of Rask right now, I fear that having them all in a large group is asking for trouble. I guess we’ll transfer some to Nalin, I hear they’re having problems with the usksha nomads and kobolds down there. Speaking of the Felkan Kingdom tell me about this plot to start a war with them.” +“There isn’t one, so much as there have been suggestions to do so by a Brother Shade.” +“Ohhh, dissention in the order. I like it. So is this guy losing his faith or something?” +“I do not believe its that more so that he feels Master Ebon is being too cautious. He wants to strike now and he knows that Ebon’s plan hinged on the Empire being distracted with the Felkan Kingdom, so he suggested starting one ourselves in passing, though when I approached him about how I agreed that we were being too cautious, he told me to not speak of it again and to leave him alone.” +“We can still possibly use this. The fact that he mentioned it says that he’s thinking about it, even if he himself isn’t totally committed to the idea. Try to speak to him some more on the subject of starting a war with the Felkan Kingdom.” +“But if he does want to go through with the plan, won’t starting a war with the Felkan Kingdom be exactly what they want?” +“Well, it’s a gamble to be sure, but quite frankly we were going to invade the Felkan Kingdom again anyway, but…ha ha I got it.” Mr. Mol says with a big grin on his face. + +“Okay forget what I told you about speaking with Shade, I’ve just gotten a better idea. I’m going to have to discuss this with a few others and the order is going to have to come from the Emperor himself, but I’m pretty sure he’ll agree to this.” +“What the plan?” +“I think we should send several Shadow Guard into Felkan territory to assassinate their king and other high ranking officials. We should even demand the best. This will occupy some of the shadows and hopefully this puts the Felkans in a state of chaos as well. While this operation is taking place, I doubt the remaining shadows will act just yet with several of their best fellows gone. In the meantime, we can start wiping out those safe houses and dissident hideouts you’ve been giving us the locations to over the years. This will no doubt alert what remains of the shadows that we’re on to them at this point, but it won’t matter. Thanks to you, we also know the exact location of Gloom and let’s just say we’ve got some allies that can help us with that underground fortress.” +“That sounds like a good plan.” +“Thanks, just thought of it, but like I said, I need to speak with a few others first. As usual I’ll be in touch, but all you need to do for now is go about your usual duties within the Shadow Guard. You’ve done excellent work as usual.” + +Mr. Mol shakes your hand as you part ways and you feel a great sense of pride in your accomplishments. You also feel better that this charade may all come to an end soon and you’ll be free of masquerading as a shadow. + +When you get back to Gloom, Brother Shade suddenly surprises you on your way back to your bunk. + +“Hey you, where have you been?” he demands to know. You’re so taken by surprise; all you do is stumble over your words. +“Uh…well…” +“Uh huh. Probably slacking with some cheap tart as usual. I know you sneak off sometimes to the nearby villages. I know you’re young and full of hormones, but you know very well that making yourself unclean with non-shadows is frowned upon.” +“I…I’m sorry, Brother Shade.” You say. +“Well you can ask for Dendrin’s forgiveness in your prayers later, right now I want to discuss something with you. Come with me.” + +You follow Brother Shade through the winding halls of Gloom until you eventually reach a small empty storage room. After doing a quick perusal, closing the door and casting a cloak of shadows spell, he speaks to you again. + +“Okay, it’s safe to speak. You and me are going to start a war with the Felkan Kingdom.” +“What…you spoke to Master Ebon, about this?” +“Yes, and the old fool is too set in his ways just as I thought he would be. Says it’s too risky. Bullshit. What better time than now?” +“Well I suppose, but…uh…just us?” you say in an attempt to stall. +“As far as I know you’re the only one who feels we need to do something now and I can’t wait around and investigate if others feel like you do. Besides we can easily do this. I know your shadow magic is weak, but your fighting skills are excellent.” + +You didn’t expect this. + +“Okay, so just us…sure. Dendrin shrouds us in protective darkness right? We can easily assassinate the Felkan king…” +“Hold on there brother. Now we’re just starting a war, not destabilizing the government. Well, not their government anyway. Heading deep into Felkan territory to kill their leader isn’t necessary and will just serve to waste time. No, we just need to go in, make a statement and get out. Maybe take out a large portion of one of their outposts and leave a maimed survivor to tell the tale.” + +Sounds like Brother Shade has already planned this out. The problem is his plan doesn’t exactly fit your own. Mr. Mol wants to assassinate the Felkan King and possibly some other high ranking types. It’ll also bide a little time for him to get things in place. Brother Shade’s plan probably won’t throw the Felkan Kingdom into chaos, but will serve to anger them and that might distract the Empire too much if the Felkans are focused. Who could’ve thought starting a war would be so precise? + +In any event, you agree to Shade’s plan and he says the pair of you will head to the village of Venji in the Arat province near the Felkan border. From there, you’ll cross the Felkan border and infiltrate the nearest Felkan outpost to carry out the plan. When you ask about the others, Shade dismisses the consequences of his fellow shadows. He says when things have been set in motion they will have no choice but to accept the reality. He then mumbles about there possibly being some more changes before leaving. + +Of course you don’t want to carry out that plan, so you’re going to have to kill Brother Shade on the way. Not exactly an easy task, so you might try reporting him to Master Ebon or Brother Gray instead and try to have him taken care of using the shadow’s own code of conduct. +> Kill Brother Shade +His plan is going to mess everything up and reporting him probably will just result in him getting scolded and he’ll sneak off later anyway. You need to kill him. It’s part of your overall goal anyway. + +The next few days you spend mostly in the training room, trying to get yourself ready for what will probably be a grueling battle. Quite frankly if you do it right, you won’t have to fight him at all as you’re going to try to catch him completely with his guard down, but if that doesn’t work, you’re going to have a struggle on your hands and you need to be prepared. + +Brother Shade helped directly train your magic skills, so as usual you’re hoping your combat skills will be the deciding factor, but your major advantage will be the element of surprise. You make sure your blade is extra sharp and your arm crossbow is in good working condition. You fully expect Dendrin to harass you in your dreams, but that doesn’t happen. + +When the day finally arrives you and Brother Shade take your leave of Gloom and head to Venji. Brother Shade and yourself travel under the cloak most of the time, though up keeping such magic is tiring business, so you rest a few times on your way. During your time together, you find out more about Brother Shade’s thoughts. He goes on about how Master Ebon is not fit to speak for Dendrin anymore. Shade believes the old man isn’t even in contact with Dendrin anymore as Shade knows that Dendrin would not want to wait any longer for the shadows to live under Empire rule. Shade knows that Dendrin would want action to be taken right now and that only those that prove themselves to be proactive in these times will be rewarded when the dust finally settles. + +You can’t speak for Ebon, but from what you can tell, Shade doesn’t really know shit what Dendrin really wants. You don’t either, but then you aren’t one of his blind sheep that follows his orders. Still, it’s somewhat fascinating to see one of the shadows not fall completely in step with the rest. If Mr. Mol hadn’t suggested his idea, you probably would’ve gone through with Shade’s mission and try to sew a little more dissension on both sides to flame the fans of a shadow civil war. As it stands though, he needs to die, but you’re still trying to build yourself up to do it. You have no idea why either, you’ve had the opportunity a few times and you’re far enough away from civilization since you’ve been sticking to the back roads. + +Eventually the humble village of Venji is in sight, and you’re going to have to kill Shade soon. You think you’re going to pass the village, but Shade starts heading towards it. + +“We’re not actually entering it are we? So far we’ve managed to stay out of sight.” +“And we’ll continue to do so, I can maintain the cloak, but if you’re feeling weak you stay here. I’ll be back soon anyway.” +“But why are you going into the village?” +“Because there’s bound to be a couple of Empire soldiers stationed there. We’re going to need a couple of disguises.” +“You’re going to kill Empire soldiers?” +“Yes, and why is that a problem?” + +It’s not. Actually it’s a perfect excuse for you. + +“No, I just didn’t know the entire plan. I guess I’ll wait here I am feeling a little drained from the magic and I wouldn’t want to jeopardize the mission.” You answer. + +Brother Shade grunts and turns his back to you, and just before he cloaks again, you raise your arm and fire your crossbow at him. Your aim is true and the bolt lands directly into the back of his skull. He’s dead even before he falls face first into the ground . + +It’s done and it was so quick. He didn’t suspect anything or even see it coming. Now you’ve got to get rid of the body and think up a story. Nobody saw you leaving together, you made sure of that, but you’ve both been gone awhile. You figure you’ll think of something on your way back to Gloom. + +You strip Shade of his robe, weapons, then you cut off his head and dig a small hole to toss it into along with his robe and weapons. You figure nobody is going to recognize him now and that’s not even counting the wolves or other wandering animals that will probably find the body to feast on first. + +When you finally get back, you get several people asking you where you’ve been. + +“Where in Dendrin’s name have you been? You just left without reporting to Brother Gray for assignment!” Brother Murk exclaims. +“I was doing my usual patrols in the Quala province. I didn’t think I was being switched from them any time soon, so I just left. Was it a problem?” +“Well sort of, Brother Shade is missing as well, you weren’t with him were you?” +“No, I wasn’t, I haven’t seen him since I left Gloom a couple days ago either.” +“Okay, well you’re going to need to explain that to Master Ebon, he believes Brother Shade went and did something rash.” +“Oh? Like what?” +“Like defying Master Ebon and the will of Dendrin. Anyway, you better hurry to Master Ebon’s office.” + +You do as Murk suggests. You just hope you can convince him as easily. + +You enter Master Ebon’s office and see him, Brother Gray AND Cyrus. You can guess what the first two are doing here, but you don’t know why Cyrus would. He’s giving you a dirty look from underneath his hood as usual. + +“At last, we can get to the bottom of this.” Brother Gray remarks. +“I certainly hope so, because there are some serious allegations going on and conspiracy in the air.” Master Ebon says while looking at you. +“I’m telling you I saw the pair of them together several times and the day they both left, he made sure to leave several minutes after Brother Shade.” Cyrus remarks. + +And there it is. Cyrus is on to you, well maybe not entirely, but apparently he was skulking around spying on you when you thought nobody was looking. And here you were thinking he was on assignment or with his boyfriend most of the time. + +“So what if I left several minutes after Brother Shade? What does that prove? Am I supposed to wait hours? A day? What would be enough time for you? And what’s this all about anyway? What did Brother Shade do?” +“Oh like you don’t know.” +“Brother Cyrus, quiet!” Master Ebon says before continuing. “And to answer your question, I’m sure you’re aware of Brother Shade’s recent behavior and his desire to move things along as far as our plan goes. He approached me not too long ago, about starting a war with the Felkan Kingdom, I told him no and he got very angry. Then he disappears for a few days when I specifically told him to stay here and concentrate on his prayers to Dendrin. We believe he’s gone and tried to do this himself. You being gone without reporting to Brother Gray wouldn’t normally be held to such scrutiny, but Cyrus here has said he’s seen you speaking with Brother Shade several times before his disappearance.” +“So I shouldn’t have spoken to him? I can’t be the only one that spoke to him before he disappeared.” +“Yes, but you are the only one that left without reporting to Brother Gray first, not to mention up until then I’ve been told that you and he never interacted much. All of this seems very suspicious and it grieves me something like this is being brought to me, especially when so much is at stake right now.” + +You’re trying to remain as calm as possible, but the pressure is on. Cyrus looks on with a faint smug expression like he’s anxious to see you get into trouble. You need to come up with an explanation and you aren’t sure if outright lying is going to help you. Maybe you should tell them the truth…up to a point of course. +> Stick with your lies +If you tell them you killed Brother Shade because of what he was planning to do, the first thing Master Ebon is going to ask is why you didn’t report it to him sooner and you’re libel to get yourself into more trouble. The best thing to do is just lie; after all it’s what you’ve been doing the whole time you’ve been here. + +“I tell you honestly and under the ever watchful gaze of Dendrin, that I was on my usual patrol in the Quala province…but…” +“But what?” Master Ebon asks. +“Well, I’m embarrassed as I have strayed from Dendrin’s lessons in restraint.” +“What’re you talking about? Speak!” +“I…uh was with a woman. A couple of them in fact…” + +This explanation isn’t one any of them expected. + +“In fact that’s why Brother Shade was speaking to me so much, he said he knew about my dealings with women of uh…low moral fiber and told me to stop it at once. I did and I tired, but when he left I assumed he was going on his own usual assignment in the Delerg province and wouldn’t know if I left to go meet with my…uh favorites…” + +At this point Master Ebon puts his hands over his face. Brother Gray gives you a stern look, and Cyrus starts shaking his head. + +“No, I don’t believe that. He’s lying!” he says. +“Brother Cyrus I told you to be silent! I won’t tell you again!” Master Ebon snaps. +“I’m not lying! In fact I assumed that’s partly why I was being called in here, I figured Brother Shade somehow found out I’d been whoremongering again and told all of you.” +“Well you didn’t need Brother Shade to tell on you, because you’ve done a fine job of it yourself!” Brother Gray remarks. “I’m very disappointed in you.” + +Master Ebon stands up at this point. + +“Okay, enough. Obviously the only thing you’re guilty of is not keeping your dick in your robes. We’ve got more important things to worry about though. Brother Shade is still missing and possibly going to ruin our plans because of his own foolish impulsiveness. I want all available shadows to go searching for him and for Dendrin’s sake keep this dead silent! We don’t need the Empire suspecting anything.” +“Understood, I’ll inform them now.” Brother Gray says and leaves. + +Master Ebon then stares at Cyrus. + +“Well? What’re you still doing here? Go find Brother Shade!” +“But what about him? I know he’s lying and hiding something! My instincts tell me I’m right!” +“And I suggest you stop listening to your instincts and start listening to Dendrin’s orders. Now I know you thought you were protecting the order, but I would remind you that falsely accusing a brother is considered forbidden. Next time you get the urge to do so, I’d advise you to have better proof or else it’ll be YOU who is in here facing the judgement of Dendrin. Dismissed.” + +Cyrus is obviously angry at this verdict, but merely nods and leaves. You’re about to as well, but Master Ebon calls you back. + +“Oh no, you stay. I’m not done with you just yet. There are still a few questionable things about your story and the only reason why I’m giving you the benefit of the doubt is because I hardly believe Brother Shade would’ve asked you of all people to help him. His open criticism of your shadow magic abilities displayed exactly how he felt about you, which wasn’t very fondly. I believe he would’ve asked Sister Dusk if he would’ve asked anyone to help him considering that was his lover. She’s already been cleared though. And speaking of lovers, I’d warn you to cease your whoremongering RIGHT NOW. If I find out you’ve relapsed, you’ll be undergoing the long abandoned ritual of the sexless shadow. I’ll let your imagination fill in the details.” + +You give a minor wince and nod. + +“Understood, Master Ebon. I shall pray for Dendrin’s forgiveness and strength to guide me.” +“Very well, now go help your siblings search for Brother Shade.” + +You leave Master Ebon’s office and you don’t get far when Cyrus suddenly appears next to you. + +“You think you’re really clever don’t you?” he sneers. +“Shouldn’t you be helping in the search for Brother Shade instead of spying on me?” you reply. +“The search for Brother Shade…hah…that’s a laugh. I think we both know what happened to him.” +“Well if you know then maybe you should tell Master Ebon, because I sure don’t know.” +“Yes, play your little game. But I know you…we’re Eternals and we grew up together long enough for me to know you’re hiding something. I’ve noticed you leaving and disappearing during your off hours, this incident with Brother Shade isn’t the only thing you’ve been hiding. Something is going on.” +“Cyrus, why the hell are you stalking me? Things not going well with Draven or something? Well I’m not interested, in case you haven’t been paying attention, my preference is female whores, not boys.” +“Cute, but I’m going to find out what you’re up to, and when I do Dendrin himself will see who you truly are.” Cyrus says and then walks briskly past you. + +“Oh I think Dendrin already knows better than any of you who I truly am, which is why all of you are fucking idiots for following a god that doesn’t give a shit.” You mutter quietly. +> Time passes... +Year 21 + +“So do you think you’ll be going on the assassination mission?” Talia asks. +“I dunno, I think I’m still under watch for my past indiscretions.” You reply. +“Oh come on, even Master Ebon can’t believe you’re going to find some Felkan trollop to lay with while on your way to kill the king!” Murk laughs. + +You give a small chuckle and go back to poisoning your bolts. When Mr. Mol explained to you that the plan was going through, you wondered if you were going to be one the assassins. Mr. Mol said he was leaving it up to the Shadow Guard to pick “their best” as requesting you, might give you away especially given the mess you told him that followed with Shade. Mr. Mol congratulated you on how you handled that and as far as that event is concerned to the Shadow Guard, it’s still a mystery. His body was never found and it’s known he didn’t start a war with the Felkan Kingdom. The general consensus is he just left never to return due to his disagreement with Master Ebon. Brother Murk remarked on the irony that if he’d only waited a little longer, he could’ve been one of those sent to kill the Felkan King now. + +In any event you know the plan on both sides. As soon as the assassination mission is underway the Empire is going to start purging the shadow safehouses and all known dissidents before moving on to Gloom. From what you know, orc troops are going to be used liberally in this. Mr. Mol said it will thin out the ranks and put their restlessness more at ease. He also mentioned that he’s going to be sending in some of your former classmates as well. Your mission will differ depending on where the Shadow Guard send you. If you’re going on the assassination, then you’ll carry that out, but it will also be you job to eliminate all the rest of the shadows with you. If you’re left at home, then it’ll be your job to start sabotaging Gloom and taking out any shadow that gets in your way in the process. Mr. Mol mentions that some allies that owe the Empire a favor will be taking down the brunt of Gloom. + +Master Ebon has decided to make the move when the Felkan War is in full swing. Fortunately their plan to destabilize Rask was abandoned as all shadows were “suddenly” transferred out of there by decree of the Emperor. The Shadow Guard’s plan won’t even get off the ground if all goes well, at best, there will be a few major battles and then the hunting of escapees. + +Everything should go well for the Empire. The only perpetual pain is Cyrus. He’s only gotten more hostile since the Shade incident and even more so when he found out he wasn’t being sent to Rask. He claimed it was your fault and the pair of you had to be separated. He didn’t make any more accusations further than that, but he knows something is going on. You’re guessing he’ll probably be one of those on assassination mission. If he’s not around and you’re left behind, it’ll make your job a whole lot easier without the possibility of him spying on you. + +Then again if you’re both on the mission, it’ll give you an excellent chance to kill him, because at this point you want to as much as he probably wants to kill you and that idea certainly appeals to you. Later that day you pay a visit to Brother Gray. + +“Can I help you brother?” he says looking up from his desk. +“Brother Gray, I know you’re still disappointed with my indiscretions, but I would like to prove myself that I am dedicated to Dendrin’s laws and commandments and I feel the best way to do that is to be on the assassination mission. I’ve even been practicing my shadow magic and while it isn’t as strong as say Sister Talia’s, I’m confident that it will be sufficient for the mission.” +“Hmmm, well you were being considered, but you were still on the fence as it were. As for me being disappointed, you shouldn’t have been concerned with that, so much as you should’ve been concerned with offending Dendrin. However, if it puts you at ease, I ceased being disappointed a while ago. I’ve noticed that you’ve been more focused lately, so I know you’re trying to atone for your actions. It’s mainly why I was considering you for the mission. As for your skills, I’m still baffled to as why your magic abilities aren’t as strong as they should be, but I suppose your combat abilities make up for it and I think you’d be more than suitable for the mission in that regard, but I’m a little more concerned with sending you on any mission with Brother Cyrus since he is being considered as well. I’d rather not risk jeopardizing the mission, so I need to leave one of you here.” + +It’s apparent that whether you stay here or go on the mission that you probably won’t be dealing with Cyrus, which is a little disappointing and a minor reason to as why you wanted to go on the assassination mission in the first place. + +“I understand brother and I accept your judgment.” You say humbly. +“Well I don’t have the final say, that honor belongs to Master Ebon and he ultimately answers to Dendrin as do we all. He will determine if you’re worthy or not, but I’ll see what I can do for you. So is that all brother?” +“Yes. I shall take my leave and return to my duties.” + +You leave Brother Gray’s office, shaking your head at it all. Not about the mission, but more about the fact that Brother Gray still believes very much in you. In fact other than Cyrus and perhaps Draven you still can’t believe how you’re so accepted here, it never seems real to you. You can’t be exactly sure, but you think Talia has been examining you as a potential mate. Especially after all that business of you sleeping with countless whores became public knowledge. You can only guess she figures you’ve got a lot of experience, well that and the only other Eternal around is gay. + +Even Master Ebon hasn’t doled out any harsher punishment on to you more than what he did during your false confession. If you were in his shoes, you would’ve had yourself executed for the slightest possibility that you were involved in Brother Shade’s disappearance. Strange that the shadows’ treacherous nature would be so blind to someone so close to bringing them down. + +Their deity Dendrin hasn’t spoken to you in any dreams lately, or for quite awhile actually. Perhaps he got tired of taunting you or whatever game he’s playing. Though +perhaps he’s lulling you into a false sense of security. You still always expect him to visit you any time you sleep. Of course maybe that’s part of his way of fucking with you as well. + +In any case, you return to your room and engage in your routine fake behavior of friendship. You’ll be so glad when this will be over, it sickens you when you actually start feeling like you’re actually friends with these traitors rather than crushing them under foot in the Emperor’s name. + +A couple days pass and you get called to Master Ebon’s office and when you get there, you also see Talia, Murk, Bianca and Dusk. He mentions that you’ve been chosen to go on the mission. He wasn’t sure at first, but after Brother Gray’s recommendation on your behalf and after consulting Dendrin for a sign, he says that you were chosen instead of Cyrus. He goes on to say he hopes that the pair of you straighten your feelings out soon, because there is going to be a great need for solidarity more than ever after this mission. + +Master Ebon also goes on to explain that Sister Dusk will be in charge of this mission and that you all will defer to her experience. Ebon brings up a bit of a change in the mission too, a change you’re not too pleased to hear. + +“We’re not assassinating the Felkan king. Dendrin showed me that our cause would be best served by deliberate incompetence.” +“What?” you ask out loud, feeling a very real sense of having heard this plan before a year ago. +“Killing the king would only throw the Felkans into disarray. We want them to be focused when they declare war on the Empire. Instead I want you to infiltrate the palace, kill a few guards and then get out as if it was a failed assassination attempt. This will definitely alert the Felkans to start beating their war drums and it hinders the Empire’s own plans. You all will be assumed dead by the Empire for obvious reasons, but in reality you will just return to us and will have to stay out of sight… which shouldn’t be too hard given our nature. When you do return, we shall put the final part of our plan in motion when the Felkans retaliate.” + +Maybe he’s not visiting you in your dreams anymore, but he’s definitely still fucking with you. Now you’ve got two things to take care of personally. You have to kill the shadow squad AND the king. + +Master Ebon tells you that the mission will be underway in the next few days and dismisses the lot of you. + +“Hey you got in after all!” Murk says after you leave the office. +“I’m glad, you certainly deserve it.” Talia adds with a smile. + +When you return to your barracks, a death glare comes from Cyrus and Draven doesn’t look too happy with you either. The pair of them immediately leave the room. You can only imagine that he’s super pissed because you’ve been chosen to go on the mission rather than him. You wouldn’t be surprised if he tried to kill you in your sleep tonight. + +Not that you’re going to get any sleep, since you’re going to be up all night trying to figure out how you’re going to pull off your additional assignment. + +The day soon arrives and everyone gathers in the assembly hall to see you off. Master Ebon makes a small speech. + +“Brothers and sisters of the shadow, today is truly the beginning of the end for the Empire. These five have been chosen by Dendrin to carry out his plan. May their mission be a success and may all of them get back safely so that they may help the rest of us continue the fight at home. And if they should fall, know that they fall for a worthy cause and will pass from this world to serve in Dendrin’s shadow realm forever and there is no greater honor.” + +“Death to the Empire! For Dendrin!” Master Ebon shouts and everyone else follows suit, then the five of you leave. + +The first part of the trip to the Arat province is fairly laid back and the usual friendly banter goes on during this time, though Sister Dusk is consistently telling the rest of you to knock it off as your minds should be more focused on this mission. You’ve never really had too much interaction with Dusk before, but it is apparent to as why she was Shade’s lover. She seems very much like him in some ways. + +Yes, this mission is starting to feel all too familiar. + +In between the party banter, you’ve been coming up with various potential plans. One plan involves continuing the mission and during the infiltration of the palace you’ll try to kill them or get them killed by the guards. This allows you to get inside the palace with their help and you’re still in a good position to try to kill the king, of course this also means you’re going to have to be quick if you want to kill everyone without anyone getting away. + +The other plan would be to try to convince Dusk to split up the group and meet up at the Felkan palace. This would allow you to pick off a few of them before you get to the palace and perhaps make it more manageable. The problem is you’re going to have to come up with a good excuse, not to mention you’ll be a few bodies short in case you do run into trouble with the Felkan soldiers. Never mind the fact you’re going to have to convince Dusk of this in the first place. +> Continue with the original plan +Too complicated and too much can go wrong. It’ll probably be better to just play it by ear. You’re fairly confident that so much will be going on that you’ll be able to pull it off. + +The next part of the journey is your first big step. Crossing into Felkan territory. This is actually very easy. The outposts aren’t nearly as well guarded as they should be and combined with sticking to the wilderness and using magic to cloak yourself and its incredibly simple. The five of you camp out in a secluded wood where Sister Dusk addresses the situation. + +“Okay, now this is focus time. The Felkan capital Dessle, is still a long way to go, but I think we can get there by tomorrow night. It’s just as well since night is when we work best. Now remember we’re just breaking in, killing some guards and getting out. Don’t actually kill the king, assuming we run into him. Good thing we don’t have to, it’s not like we exactly have a map of the palace to go hunting him down.” +“Can’t we just take out one of those outposts we passed by? I mean it would still start a war.” Murk jokes, but Dusk isn’t amused. +“Brother, I suggest you stop joking about such things, you know the reason why, we’re doing things the way we’re doing them, but more importantly Dendrin wants it done this way!” Now get some rest, we’re going to need to be at full strength tomorrow.” + +Murk shuts up and mentally chalks up yet another way he embarrassed himself in from of Bianca. You also make mental notes, namely on who you should kill first. You wonder if you should take out the strongest or weakest first. You could probably easily dispatch Murk and Bianca without too much trouble. You aren’t aware of Dusk’s full abilities, but you know she is at least accomplished as Shade was. Talia, however is an Eternal and you know how strong she is. + +“You thinking about how you’re going to handle things if everything goes wrong?” Talia suddenly asks. +“Huh? Oh. Yeah I guess you could say that.” +“Figured. You’re always deep in thought, I’ve noticed you’ve been doing that a lot lately, especially at night in your bed.” +“Hm, glad to see Cyrus isn’t the only one spying on me.” You answer. +“I wasn’t really spying, so much as I was studying you, besides I think you noticed that I was.” +“Yes, I did notice.” +“Of course you did, because you’re always alert. You’re always aware. And I think you know of my desire.” + +Talia sits next to you very closely. While you were certainly aware of her interest, you didn’t expect it right now! You react immediately to her advances. + +“Talia, stop for a moment. Do you really think this is a good idea right now?” +“What better time than now?” + +You’ve heard that line before though the situation is completely different than the one a year ago. This state of affairs is a little weird even for you, considering you were thinking about killing her not a few moments ago. + +“Talia, I really don’t think we have time for this. We need to get some rest, we’ve got a very important mission tomorrow.” You reply. +“Well it won’t take that long will it?” +“Won’t take long?” +“Well I mean I know you’ve been with all those trollops, and your goal there probably wasn’t to make them feel good, but rather yourself. And I imagine you wanted to do that as quickly as possible. I don’t need to be pleasured…I mean perhaps I will express some interest in it during the act and maybe we can try for fun if the mission goes well, but right now I just want your essence.” +“My essence? Wait a minute; you just want me to impregnate you?” +“Well I want you to try. I suppose I should’ve come to you sooner with this, but I do see you as a potential mate. Even though we are all siblings and equals in the eyes of Dendrin, quite frankly WE…” Talia grabs your hand and puts it to her heart and then your own. “…are Eternals. We still have a bond that the others don’t and you’re the only one I believe is worthy for me. Our child will be an Eternal and a Shadow like us and we will raise him or her to follow Dendrin as we do. Now I believe you will come out of this mission alive and we will probably talk about our future together in greater detail later, but like you I also prepare in case something should go wrong. If you should fall in battle, then I want to at least have a part of you to live on through me.” + +This was definitely not something you anticipated. All these years of managing to distance yourself emotionally from all of these traitors and it’s been cracked within a few moments. Or maybe you still had the feelings and you never got rid of them, only buried them deeply. Doesn’t matter, you’re still left with the same problem, pangs of conscience. Weakness. + +Though perhaps it’s due to Talia being a fellow Eternal that has caused it. She obviously hasn’t abandoned all of her superiority complex. And she’s right; you do still have a bond. You just wish she was on the right side, because you don’t have time to convince her. + +You hope Dendrin’s having a good laugh at all this, because this is the best twist yet. Bastard. + +You could decline her advances, no you SHOULD decline her advances, but for whatever reason you accept them. Maybe it’s your weakness of will, maybe it’s your hormones or maybe it’s just your own twisted way of granting a dead woman her last request, even if she’s unaware of it. + +The pair of you leave the camp far enough away, cast a spell for privacy and embrace. At least neither of you will die not knowing the pleasures of the flesh. You have to admit, you were always a bit curious. How funny that your reputation as a whoremonger couldn’t have been any further from the truth. After it’s over you both return and go to your bedrolls without speaking another word. You notice Sister Dusk sleeping against a tree and open one eye as if to let you know what you were up to, but she doesn’t do anything else. Perhaps she understands the need for hasty copulation, having lost her own mate only a year ago. + +The next day, you set off. Murk tries to speak to you and makes a few comments about noticing that Talia was eyeing you a lot yesterday, but you tell him to leave it alone and focus on the mission. Dusk tells him the same thing when she sees him jabbering on as usual. As for Talia, she hasn’t spoken to you, though perhaps her mind is focused on the mission like it should be. Where your mind should be actually. + +You try to get back your focus and are finding it difficult. What are you supposed to do now? Throw everything away just for a one night with a woman? Even if she is an Eternal and you could reconcile yourself with being a traitor, you don’t fit in with the shadows and you never will. You’ve done too much to go back and the shadows are doomed at this point anyway. + +No, the Emperor and the Empire need you, and that’s who your life is dedicated to, nobody else. + +You spend the remainder of the journey cloaked and sticking to the less populated parts of the Felkan kingdom, though you eventually reach the capital and sneak over the walls of the city. Fortunately night is falling by that time. While you’re still struggling with your own dilemmas you do take the time to notice how much different the Felkan society is. A lot less soldiers first of all, though their soldiers all carry gunpowder based weapons in addition to their normal weapons. In fact their whole society is slightly more technologically advanced than the Empire, but that won’t mean anything compared to the sheer might of the Empire when they bring their full force to bear down on the Felkans. You hope that you’ll perhaps be part of that after crushing the shadows. + +Eventually the five of you are just outside the palace walls of where you presume the king is located. It is here where Dusk addresses the group again. + +“You all know the plan, get in, cause some havoc, don’t kill the king and get the hell out. Still, I think we’ll do a better job with the last part if we’re not all bunched up as a group. I want some of us to go to the other side of the palace and start from that side, the soldiers and guards will be less likely to gang up on all of us that way. I’d say about thirty to forty five minutes should do it and afterwards, we’ll meet up at that wood where we made camp yesterday, then we’ll continue the rest of the journey back to Gloom from there. Now I just need someone to volunteer to come with me and the rest of you can scale the palace wall here.” + +Well it looks like your original plan of trying to split up the group is going to come true after all, the question is do you want to take care of Dusk first or whoever decides to be on the second team? +> Volunteer to go with Dusk +This is a perfect time to get Dusk alone, so you immediately volunteer. + +“I’ll go, unless you’d prefer someone else.” You say. +“No, you’ll do. Come on, we’re going around to the other side, as for the rest of you, wait about five minutes before scaling that wall, afterwards, I leave you to use your best judgment on how to handle things. May Dendrin’s shadow keep you safe.” + +You and Dusk leave the group and hurry as fast as possible to the other side of the palace. When you arrive you both cast your spider walk spell to scale the wall. The pair of you find yourself on the edge of some sort of palace garden. Farther away, a couple soldiers stand guard on a stone patio area near an entrance to the palace proper where some steps lead up to. + +“Well that was certainly convenient. We can use all this shrubbery to hide in, give our magic a rest for a moment.” Dusk says. +“Great, I was getting drained anyway.” You remark. +“Oh I don’t know brother, I think you’ve held up better than most give you credit for. I think after all this is over, I owe you a big apology.” +“What for? Until this mission, we’ve never interacted for good or bad.” +“Well let’s just say someone told me to never trust you because you were responsible for Brother Shade’s disappearance.” +“(Sigh) Cyrus.” You say. +“Yes, but I think your actions on this mission so far have disproved him…especially your meeting with Sister Talia yesterday. I believe if you really had any ill intent, you wouldn’t have submitted to her plan to be impregnated.” +“Oh?” +“Yes, Sister Talia has spoken to me about her plan to have you as a mate before, though I didn’t think she’d act on it during the mission. Obviously you have some connection to her as well, I guess it’s an Eternal thing. Anyway, let’s get on with the mission.” + +Sister Dusk slowly crawls through the bushes in the garden, steadily getting in range where she can take out the guards. Her back is to you and you slowly draw your blade. + +“You know these bushes are also good to hide bodies in so no wandering guards suddenly come across them.” You say and suddenly grab Dusk roughly with one hand over her mouth and then slashing her throat deeply with your knife. + +Dusk attempts to flail about, but you keep her from doing too much of it, but putting all your weight on top of her body and slamming her face into the ground. The gurgling death sounds she makes are muffled by the soil, which is now being watered by her blood. Eventually she stops moving, but apparently it was enough to move the bushes enough that one of the guards noticed something odd. You see the both of them through the cover of the undergrowth approaching your position. + +You wait until they’re close enough then stand up and throw your knife into the eye of one of them, and then before the other can lift his firearm, you fire your own bolt from your armbow. It strikes him in the chest and he falls down dead instantly. The one who got hit in the eye is still on the ground, groaning, but you quickly silence his moaning with a sword to his neck. You drag both of their bodies into the bushes to keep Dusk’s body company. + +Now you just have to figure out where the hell the king is in this big place. Hopefully you’ll bump into a servant or maybe even a royal family member who you can scare into giving you information, so you’re not wandering around while more Felkan soldiers pour into the place. + +You systematically search nearly twenty rooms, which probably doesn’t take you very long, but it feels like forever given how precious time is. You still can’t believe you haven’t run into any more soldiers yet, the Felkans seem to have a false sense of security with their superior weaponry and in general. + +About ten minutes pass of searching and while you’re in a spare bedroom you hear noise and shouting. Something about there being assassins in the palace and to get the king to safety. Talia and the others must be doing their work, and now you’ve got even less time to do your job. You curse and cloak yourself in a dark corner of the room fully expecting a guard to step in, but instead you finally have a bit of luck. + +“Come on inside here, lock the door and got through the secret passage in here.” A well-dressed young man says. +“Are you sure? Shouldn’t we be with the guards?” a young female in a fancy dress says, locking the door. +“Nah, we’ll be fine. These passages go all over the palace, even outside the city. The gnome builders did a good job of making sure this place had escape routes everywhere. Besides, you’re with me and I’ll protect you.” The young man says patting a flintlock pistol by his side. + +He pushes the bed and feels around the floor until you see him open up some sort of hatch. He starts to climb down and that’s when you make your move. + +The young man looks up just in time to see you materialize behind his girlfriend and slit her throat. He doesn’t even get a chance scream out, when you use your unnatural speed to kick him in the face. He loses his grip on the ladder and falls. You follow him down by jumping down the hatch, landing on top of him hard feet first. A crack is heard and you’re pretty sure you’ve broken one or two of his ribs. + +Despite the pain he must be in, he still tries to grab his pistol, but you easily take it from him and continue to kneel on top of his chest. He’s too busy trying to catch his breath to be able to scream now. + +“Don’t cry out and you might get out of this alive. You look like you might be important…you a royal or a noble or something?” +He painfully nods and wheezes. +“Okay, good then you probably know where the king is. Tell me or the pain you’re feeling right now will become ten times worse.” + +These royals must not have any sort of disciplined upbringing or even have the concept of honor at all, because the only thing the prevents him from telling you immediately is the extreme pain he’s suffering. You’re actually surprised he told you at all, you figured it would be a long shot. You also ask him where the exit to outside the city is from this passage and he tells you that as well. After you’ve gotten all you feel you need, you finish him off with a dagger to his throat. + +You run down the twisting dark passageway trying to look for the door that leads to the king’s room, and eventually you find it. You search and listen to the door first, just in case the young royal wasn’t as soft as he seemed and actually lied to you. You do hear some talking, but you can’t quite make out what is being said. Having little other options you unlock the door and enter. + +You exit through a big painting and find yourself in a very luxurious room with very fancy furniture. Two figures, a man and a woman, in regal clothing stare at you in a mixture of terror and disbelief. Four more figures are dressed in standard guard gear. + +“GUARDS! ASSASSIN!” the male figure shouts at which point all his guards lift up their firearms and point them at you. You speed up again and duck as the musket balls fly in slow motion above your head. You return fire on your own with your armbow. The bolt flies true and it strikes the male figure in the head. You’re going to take a guess that you just killed the king. + +You quickly run out of the entryway, before you even see his body hit the floor. A scream is heard from what is probably the queen as you run down the passage. The sound of guards chasing you soon follows. You feel like you’re going to pass out just by running and stopping to fight them isn’t an option, there’s going to just be more of them and they’ll easily overwhelm you in the state of exhaustion you’re in. You’re going to have to use your magic again, but that’s part of the reason why you’re feeling so drained. You’ve probably tapped into that blasted shadow magic more than you ever have for the past few days. + +While speeding yourself up seems like the logical thing to do, it drains you a lot more than merely cloaking yourself, which is aided by the natural darkness around you. You nip just out of sight and cloak yourself and continue on your way. You hear a couple guards shouting orders for some of them to go one way and they’ll go the other. + +You can hear three of them heading in your direction, though they obviously can’t see you and believe that you’ve ran so far ahead of them. You step into one of the passages entryways and hide, hoping they won’t think to examine it. Fortunately after one of them briefly glances at the entryway and sees nothing has been disturbed, they all pass you by. You could try to pick them off now, or you could go through the entryway and hope it leads somewhere secluded so you can rest a bit more. +> Dispatch the guards +You can’t afford to linger, you need to get out of here, if not only to escape but also to catch up with the other shadows so you can kill them before they reach Gloom. + +You head in the direction where the young royal you killed told you where an exit existed, or at least you hope it does. + +Along the way you see some of the guards up ahead still searching for you. Their backs are towards you, so it’s a simple matter of picking them off even in your exhausted state. A bolt hits one in the head for an instant kill, by the time the second one turns around to see his partner slump to the floor you’ve already run up and dispatched him with a dagger to his throat. The third one shouts for help and attempts to fire his weapon at you. You feel the hot burn of lead graze the side of your leg before tackling him and shoving your sword through his chest. + +You quickly examine your wound which isn’t life threatening, but it’s enough to cause you to limp a bit. You can hear more guards heading your way, so you continue to press onward, hoping you’ll get to the exit soon. Unfortunately you never make it. You’re so tired from all your magic use that you’re having trouble even staying awake, combined with the fact that you just used up your remaining energy dispatching those soldiers and your limp, you aren’t going very far. + +You pass out before the soldiers even capture you. When you come to you find yourself in chains and in a cell. The regal woman you saw when you killed the king stands before you with several soldiers and a dagger in her hand. + +“Good, I wanted you to be awake for this. Soldiers, open his mouth. We’ll start with his tongue first, I don’t feel like hearing whatever lies or final attempts at taunts while I show this Empire scum the true meaning of pain.” + +You attempt to struggle, you even bite part of a finger off, but it’s about the last damage you ever do to anybody. Some of your teeth are knocked or pulled out and then your tongue soon follows. + +The woman…the queen as you come to learn is quite upset with you killing her husband, but even more upset that the young royal you killed was apparently her son. She mentions how bloodshed for its own sake or revenge is mostly frowned upon in the kingdom, but in your case she’s making an exception. + +The queen puts you through a long list of agonizing tortures; she never does get the satisfaction of hearing you scream though. She begins to get angrier, which would cause you to laugh if you weren’t suffering in silence. The suffering you feel isn’t from the torture though, it’s from the fact that you only half completed your mission. You can only hope that your deeds will be enough for the Empire to bring down the shadows and the Felkan Kingdom. It will have to be. + +Eventually, the queen tires of torturing you and orders her men to put an end to your misery by slitting your throat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This is a perfect time to get Dusk alone, so you immediately volunteer. + +“I’ll go, unless you’d prefer someone else.” You say. +“No, you’ll do. Come on, we’re going around to the other side, as for the rest of you, wait about five minutes before scaling that wall, afterwards, I leave you to use your best judgment on how to handle things. May Dendrin’s shadow keep you safe.” + +You and Dusk leave the group and hurry as fast as possible to the other side of the palace. When you arrive you both cast your spider walk spell to scale the wall. The pair of you find yourself on the edge of some sort of palace garden. Farther away, a couple soldiers stand guard on a stone patio area near an entrance to the palace proper where some steps lead up to. + +“Well that was certainly convenient. We can use all this shrubbery to hide in, give our magic a rest for a moment.” Dusk says. +“Great, I was getting drained anyway.” You remark. +“Oh I don’t know brother, I think you’ve held up better than most give you credit for. I think after all this is over, I owe you a big apology.” +“What for? Until this mission, we’ve never interacted for good or bad.” +“Well let’s just say someone told me to never trust you because you were responsible for Brother Shade’s disappearance.” +“(Sigh) Cyrus.” You say. +“Yes, but I think your actions on this mission so far have disproved him…especially your meeting with Sister Talia yesterday. I believe if you really had any ill intent, you wouldn’t have submitted to her plan to be impregnated.” +“Oh?” +“Yes, Sister Talia has spoken to me about her plan to have you as a mate before, though I didn’t think she’d act on it during the mission. Obviously you have some connection to her as well, I guess it’s an Eternal thing. Anyway, let’s get on with the mission.” + +Sister Dusk slowly crawls through the bushes in the garden, steadily getting in range where she can take out the guards. Her back is to you and you slowly draw your blade. + +“You know these bushes are also good to hide bodies in so no wandering guards suddenly come across them.” You say and suddenly grab Dusk roughly with one hand over her mouth and then slashing her throat deeply with your knife. + +Dusk attempts to flail about, but you keep her from doing too much of it, but putting all your weight on top of her body and slamming her face into the ground. The gurgling death sounds she makes are muffled by the soil, which is now being watered by her blood. Eventually she stops moving, but apparently it was enough to move the bushes enough that one of the guards noticed something odd. You see the both of them through the cover of the undergrowth approaching your position. + +You wait until they’re close enough then stand up and throw your knife into the eye of one of them, and then before the other can lift his firearm, you fire your own bolt from your armbow. It strikes him in the chest and he falls down dead instantly. The one who got hit in the eye is still on the ground, groaning, but you quickly silence his moaning with a sword to his neck. You drag both of their bodies into the bushes to keep Dusk’s body company. + +Now you just have to figure out where the hell the king is in this big place. Hopefully you’ll bump into a servant or maybe even a royal family member who you can scare into giving you information, so you’re not wandering around while more Felkan soldiers pour into the place. + +You systematically search nearly twenty rooms, which probably doesn’t take you very long, but it feels like forever given how precious time is. You still can’t believe you haven’t run into any more soldiers yet, the Felkans seem to have a false sense of security with their superior weaponry and in general. + +About ten minutes pass of searching and while you’re in a spare bedroom you hear noise and shouting. Something about there being assassins in the palace and to get the king to safety. Talia and the others must be doing their work, and now you’ve got even less time to do your job. You curse and cloak yourself in a dark corner of the room fully expecting a guard to step in, but instead you finally have a bit of luck. + +“Come on inside here, lock the door and got through the secret passage in here.” A well-dressed young man says. +“Are you sure? Shouldn’t we be with the guards?” a young female in a fancy dress says, locking the door. +“Nah, we’ll be fine. These passages go all over the palace, even outside the city. The gnome builders did a good job of making sure this place had escape routes everywhere. Besides, you’re with me and I’ll protect you.” The young man says patting a flintlock pistol by his side. + +He pushes the bed and feels around the floor until you see him open up some sort of hatch. He starts to climb down and that’s when you make your move. + +The young man looks up just in time to see you materialize behind his girlfriend and slit her throat. He doesn’t even get a chance scream out, when you use your unnatural speed to kick him in the face. He loses his grip on the ladder and falls. You follow him down by jumping down the hatch, landing on top of him hard feet first. A crack is heard and you’re pretty sure you’ve broken one or two of his ribs. + +Despite the pain he must be in, he still tries to grab his pistol, but you easily take it from him and continue to kneel on top of his chest. He’s too busy trying to catch his breath to be able to scream now. + +“Don’t cry out and you might get out of this alive. You look like you might be important…you a royal or a noble or something?” +He painfully nods and wheezes. +“Okay, good then you probably know where the king is. Tell me or the pain you’re feeling right now will become ten times worse.” + +These royals must not have any sort of disciplined upbringing or even have the concept of honor at all, because the only thing the prevents him from telling you immediately is the extreme pain he’s suffering. You’re actually surprised he told you at all, you figured it would be a long shot. You also ask him where the exit to outside the city is from this passage and he tells you that as well. After you’ve gotten all you feel you need, you finish him off with a dagger to his throat. + +You run down the twisting dark passageway trying to look for the door that leads to the king’s room, and eventually you find it. You search and listen to the door first, just in case the young royal wasn’t as soft as he seemed and actually lied to you. You do hear some talking, but you can’t quite make out what is being said. Having little other options you unlock the door and enter. + +You exit through a big painting and find yourself in a very luxurious room with very fancy furniture. Two figures, a man and a woman, in regal clothing stare at you in a mixture of terror and disbelief. Four more figures are dressed in standard guard gear. + +“GUARDS! ASSASSIN!” the male figure shouts at which point all his guards lift up their firearms and point them at you. You speed up again and duck as the musket balls fly in slow motion above your head. You return fire on your own with your armbow. The bolt flies true and it strikes the male figure in the head. You’re going to take a guess that you just killed the king. + +You quickly run out of the entryway, before you even see his body hit the floor. A scream is heard from what is probably the queen as you run down the passage. The sound of guards chasing you soon follows. You feel like you’re going to pass out just by running and stopping to fight them isn’t an option, there’s going to just be more of them and they’ll easily overwhelm you in the state of exhaustion you’re in. You’re going to have to use your magic again, but that’s part of the reason why you’re feeling so drained. You’ve probably tapped into that blasted shadow magic more than you ever have for the past few days. + +While speeding yourself up seems like the logical thing to do, it drains you a lot more than merely cloaking yourself, which is aided by the natural darkness around you. You nip just out of sight and cloak yourself and continue on your way. You hear a couple guards shouting orders for some of them to go one way and they’ll go the other. + +You can hear three of them heading in your direction, though they obviously can’t see you and believe that you’ve ran so far ahead of them. You step into one of the passages entryways and hide, hoping they won’t think to examine it. Fortunately after one of them briefly glances at the entryway and sees nothing has been disturbed, they all pass you by. You could try to pick them off now, or you could go through the entryway and hope it leads somewhere secluded so you can rest a bit more. +> Go through the door +As much as you’d like to get the hell out of here, you’re in no condition to fight. You’re practically on the verge of falling unconscious. You take a risk and open up the door. + +You step inside and find yourself in some sort man sized wooden structure, almost like a box. Upon further inspection the top of it opens up and it basically is a box, though its really just an elaborate structure to blend in with the other wooden boxes in the storage room you appear to be in. The storage room proper also consists of a lot of barrels and other assorted junk. It’s not very big and the junk just makes it cluttered, though there is a single door that leads out. + +You have no intention of doing that though; you just need to rest a bit. You close up the passage entrance behind you and sit down in one of the corners of the “box” you’re in. Yes, you just need to rest a moment, and then you’ll be fine… + +You find yourself in total darkness without your senses again. + +“That last bit seems to have put you out. Just think how much easier this would’ve been if you had served me. Your magic wouldn’t cause you to feel so drained and it would be a lot stronger as well. Of course if you were following me, you wouldn’t be engaging in this elaborate duplicity.” Dendrin says +“Duplicity? Your worshippers are dedicated to duplicity! You accuse me of such things, when you are doing nothing but reveling in such behavior! I am merely serving the Empire as I was always meant to. You on the other hand are supposed to be a god to your followers yet you do nothing to warn them.” you reply. +“My reasons for how I treat my followers are my own and you are not worthy to know them.” +“Worthy…like the rest of your worshippers that blindly follow you into destruction?” +“No…but are you really so much different? You follow the Emperor blindly and he is just a man, at least the shadows are wise enough to revere a superior being. You believe you are superior to the shadows, but you are not. You do not see the flaws and that is why you’ve earned no explanation. Not because you aren’t a true shadow, but because of your own lack of vision. You will eventually see though, if not now then later. Of course by then it will be much too late. I’m sure we will speak again, no matter how much you deny me and crusade against the shadows, we will forever be linked…for as long as you’re alive anyway.” + +You suddenly wake up. After a moment of grogginess, you suddenly remember where you are. The Felkan palace! How long have you been asleep? You have no idea, but you’ve really dodged an arrow if nobody found you sleeping right in the heart of the enemy territory! You quickly open up the passage door again and it would appear that the coast is clear. Remembering what the young royal you killed earlier said you make your way to the exit that leads outside. Once again you expect there to be soldiers placed at the exit, but there are none. The Felkans must think you escaped already, either that or they’re very poor at security, either one doesn’t surprise you at this point. + +It’s about noon, and you’ve undoubtedly kept your “fellow” shadows waiting, if they are still waiting at all. They probably think you were killed along with Dusk. You have no idea if they know anything about the assassination, but you’re guessing they probably left before you completed your task. In any event, you’ve still got the job of killing them three and you don’t know if you’re going to get the chance now. Lacking a better idea, you head to the meeting point and hope that they’re still there. + +You finally get there just as it starts to get late in the day. No Felkan patrols in the area, but you still cautiously enter the woods. You aren’t completely out of luck as you see Murk pacing back and forth, looking around nervously. + +“Murk, where are the others?” you say, causing him to jump and nearly point his armbow at you. +“Brother! You’re alive! Thank Dendrin!” he says with a bit of joy, though he look visibly upset. +“It wasn’t easy, but where are the others?” +“Talia went on ahead and assumed you and Dusk were dead. Bianca…she…(sniffle) didn’t make it.” He quickly wipes his eyes when he tells you. +“Oh.” +“I don’t understand, everything was going well and were already on our way to escaping, then all of a sudden there were Felkan soldiers everywhere! Bianca got shot in the back, by one of those infernal Felkan weapons! (sniffle) I know she didn’t see me as a potential mate, but I always hoped one day that…(sob)…sorry brother…I know there are more important things right now.” +“It’s understandable brother, but how long ago did Talia leave?” +“She left not long after we arrived here which was this morning. She’s probably already in Empire territory by now. I stayed just to make sure we hadn’t lost any more people. I had to hope. I’m glad to see you alive, but I hesitate to ask… Dusk isn’t with you. Did she fall as well?” +“Yes.” +“(Sigh) Another loss. Well as grim as this has been, I suppose we should get used to it in the coming months when we finally strike against the Empire properly. There are going to be a lot of our brothers and sisters that will probably fall in the cause of Dendrin.” + +“Well you’re right and wrong about that Murk.” You say, approaching him. +“What do you mean?” +“You’re right that a lot of shadows will fall in the cause of Dendrin…you’re wrong about thinking that I’d really consider any of you traitors to be my siblings!” you say and quickly grab him towards you and stab him in the stomach. The look of shock overwhelms him. + +“Wh…why broth…er…wh…” he sputters before you finish him off with a snap of his neck. + +You look down at Murk’s dead body and you feel nothing for him. You remember the times you nearly killed him before, but hesitated. Perhaps this is a good sign that you’re finally getting all these lingering feelings out of your system. Well three out of four were taken out, still not good enough though and you doubt if you’ll get to Talia in time for her to make her report to Master Ebon or Brother Gray. Still you have to try, so you make your journey right away and leave the body of Murk behind. + +You push your magic to the limit to speed your yourself up, you just hope Talia isn’t doing the same; it’s going to be hard enough to track her. You’re going to take a wild guess that she’ll probably use the same route you took to get to the Felkan border, at least you hope so. + +Night falls and you’ve made good time by getting into Empire territory as quickly as you have, but you’re getting incredibly exhausted. Even if you do get to Talia, you aren’t even sure you’ll have the energy to take her. You continue to press on though. + +“I will NOT be stopped by Dendrin’s petty favor of magic. My mind WILL overcome and I WILL use the gifts he gave me against him!” You mutter to yourself. + +Night eventually passes into day again and you manage get just outside the town of Lenet which is the closest town to Gloom. You still haven’t seen Talia, and can only hope she hasn’t made it to Gloom yet. In the meantime you feel horrible at this point and on the verge of passing out. You decide to head over to a small river that you know nearby and hope that some water will perk you up or at least prevent you from falling unconscious again. + +You retch and cough the whole time you drag yourself to the river. Finally you collapse nearly face first into the damned river. You look at your reflection which is just inches away from your face and you nearly see a stranger looking back. + +“What the…” you say to yourself. + +Your reflection doesn’t display the age that you know yourself to be, but rather that of an older you. You put your hands to your face and can feel the wrinkle lines. You hadn’t been noticing before, but you look at your hands and see how weathered they look. This overuse of shadow magic has taken its toll on your body. You may have even shortened your life span, you have no idea. + +“Brother! What are you doing over there by the river? Are you sick?” you hear a familiar voice ask. + +You turn around and see Talia. You must’ve somehow unknowingly passed her in your rush to reach her, since she is coming from the same direction you were. When she sees you, her surprise nearly matches that of Murk when you killed him. + +“You’re…alive! But…what happened to you? Your face! Some of your hair is white! What manner of magic did this?” she asks out of concern and begins to approach you. + +You look at Talia one last time as a fellow Eternal that once held the ideals of the Empire. There is so much you could say to her, but there really wouldn’t be any point. Better to just get this over before you get overcome with feeling again. + +You forgot to reload your armbow, but fortunately you still have the flintlock that you took from the young royal. You hope it’s reliable, because you don’t have the energy to fight her. + +Without another word, you pull out the flintlock and shoot it straight at Talia’s head. She falls instantly when she’s hit. You slowly stagger up and walk over to her and see that a good portion of the top left side of her head has been blown off. The deadness in her eyes is apparent, as are the brains leaking out. + +Mission accomplished. + +You stumble into the town of Lenet and make arrangements for a carriage to take you to the capital. From there you hope you can contact Mr. Mol. For now though you’re going to sleep the whole way there and hope you don’t get some annoying visit from Dendrin, because as of now you’ve finally freed yourself of the shadows. + +As far as your concerned the only time you want to be in their presence again is to face them in battle as a proper enemy and you are looking forward to that in the near future. +> Years pass... +Year 25 + +“Good work on destroying another shadow cell, the sooner we get them all, the sooner we can focus all our attention on the Felkan Kingdom.” +“I agree sir, especially since I would like to be involved in the conquest of the Felkans.” +“Heh, well I’m sure something will be found for you. I assume you’ll report to someone else after this is over though.” Mr. Mol says. + +This bit of casual news surprises you a little; you can’t help but to question it. + +“Sir, where are you going?” +“Me? Nowhere, but if you’re referring to reporting to someone else, what I mean is if you are transferred to serve in the Felkan war, I probably won’t be your superior anymore. You’d be a military matter as opposed to the unique situation you are now. Quite frankly if it wasn’t for you, I probably wouldn’t be in charge of anyone. Even the new Eternal Project is in the hands of another now, has been for years.” + +This seems like information that shouldn’t be freely shared with a subordinate, but once again Mr. Mol says it so casually its like he doesn’t care. He also notices that you’re wondering if you should inquire further, but he stops you. + +“Don’t worry about it. I spoke of things you needn’t have known or have to concern yourself with. Let’s focus on the task at hand.” +“Very well sir.” + +You and Mr. Mol get back to the business of eliminating the remaining shadow cells. In some ways it is hard to believe that this is almost over. By your estimate there are probably only about thirty shadows left at best, most of them were killed three years ago during the destruction of Fortress Gloom. You wish you could’ve been involved in that, but for whatever reason, the Empire’s allies took care of it by themselves. You never met or even saw these allies, but you heard that it was the Derro. You do know that Master Ebon and Brother Gray died in this assault, meaning someone else took control of the remaining shadows, and you know that had to be Cyrus. + +Cyrus and the surviving shadows managed to incite the pathetic remains of dissidents the Empire hadn’t silenced yet, but nothing excessive thanks to the destruction of all those safe houses in advance. The only major cause of concern was very the minor orc revolt at a fort in Rask that was separate from shadow influence. It was lucky that Mr. Mol separated most of them with transfers and prevented the shadows from establishing any sort of presence there otherwise it might’ve been much worse. + +In any event this whole thing probably would’ve been over by now if the Empire’s attention weren’t also focused on the war with the Felkan Kingdom. Fortunately that’s going well too due to their own internal strife going on with the crown. + +“From what I can tell, they’ve pulled out of all the other provinces and mainly retreated to Delerg. Somewhat predictable, but I suppose it's the best place for them to hide out right now. I’ve tried to get more soldiers posted there to help, but again the Felkan war takes priority. I wish I could’ve even got one of your former classmates to help, but well, I’ve mentioned the problem with that.” +“No matter, I’ll handle it with what help I’ve got.” +“I know you can, but I’ve hired some extra hands anyway. I’ve got a dark elf mercenary attachment in Delerg I know they’re supposed to be helping with the barbarian tribes in Rask, but I’m paying for this out of my own pocket and they’ll go where the money goes. Besides I think this group is sick of the snow anyway.” +“If you think they’ll help, then they’ll be put to good use.” You remark. +“Their leader is called Tyren. Met him once and he’s a typical svelk, arrogant and condescending. His mercenary band is currently at the town Sinkhole. You’ll be meeting them there. Now I know you’ve worked with Empire soldiers and that’s worked out okay, but working with the svelk will be different…though I imagine that won’t be a problem for you. Just never turn your back on them and be on your guard.” +“I will as always, but now I must ask, will they be more of a liability than help.” You ask. +“No, I wouldn’t have bothered if I thought that. It’s just… well they’re svelk and all that goes with it. A lot of bullshit posturing by them that’s all. You’ll be fine, anyway I suppose you’ll want to get some rest before your trip to Delerg tomorrow. Carriage will pick you up tomorrow. That will be all.” + +The next day you take the carriage to the Delerg province. It doesn’t take long, but it does give you time to yourself, which you use to briefly reflect on the past few years and your possible future, among other things. + +When you get to Sinkhole it looks exactly like how the name describes it, half of the town in the swamp and the rest of looking like it’s about to collapse. Still, you’re not here to sight see, you’re here to hopefully put down the remainder of the shadows for good. Since you’re anxious to get this over with, you immediately head to the tavern where you’re guessing the svelk are hanging out. You anxious to get this over with too, granted you’ve only had a single experience with one of their kind, but that was enough even without Mr. Mol’s previous warnings. + +You enter the tavern, which isn’t much better than the outside of it. The dark elven presence is unmistakable since they’re the only ones in the place since they’re the only ones in the place save for the poor bartender and the couple of waitresses. You’d guess that the svelk intimidated the usual patrons. You wonder why there aren’t any Empire soldiers taking care of this, but again you remember, there aren’t many stationed here and they’re all probably at an outpost or a fort in the area. They see you and three of them approach. + +“Who let the monkey in? I thought their kind were content swinging in the trees in the jungles and swamps outside.” One of them says +“You must have some sort of balls walking into this place monkey. We thought we did a good job of scaring the rest away, except the bartender and his lovely wait staff of course.” another says. +“Lovely? If you like slumming I guess, but I suppose you males really will rut with anything won’t you? Monkey, I suggest you leave, before my comrade’s macho boasting is put into action.” A female svelk remarks. + +You don’t have time for this, and these mercenary svelk scum only respect one thing anyway. You don’t like using it anymore, but you feel an impression must be made and you tap into your shadow magic. + +In lightning speed you punch the female svelk in the nose and stab the bragging male svelk in the leg and trip him face first into the floor. The third svelk raises his crossbow, but you use your own armbow to shoot a bolt right through his hand. + +The three svelk all lie on the ground nursing their wounds, meanwhile the rest of them haven’t even moved to help their fellows, though a dark elf with long black hair speaks from the table he’s sitting at. + +“So, I’m guessing you’re our Empire contact. That traitor shadow we’ve heard so much about. I suppose your skills are impressive enough…for a monkey.” +“And you must be Tyren and don’t address me as monkey again, let alone as a traitor shadow. I did not betray the shadows, they betrayed the Empire! I am an Eternal and loyal only to the Empire and the Emperor!” +“Pity, you were more interesting as a traitor. Loyalty is overrated. Now…Eternal, if you’re done beating up my people, I have information where the shadows have been hiding out at.” +“You already know where they are?” +“Of course. We scoured most of this forsaken swampland as soon as that Mol guy hired us. Quite frankly it wasn’t hard to find them, they’re at some old temple dedicated to their god I think. Surprised the Empire with all it’s resources couldn’t do it, but then what do you expect from a government run by monkeys? Anyway, we’ve been waiting on you, Mol said that you’d want to take care of this personally. We’re just here for back up, so when you want to take them out, let us know, until then let us get back to our drinks.” +“Wait, so what have the shadows been doing all this time?” +“Hell if I know Eternal. They haven’t been stirring up trouble if that’s what you think though. As far as I can tell they’ve been doing their best to try to lay low, because they haven’t left that ruined temple of theirs in weeks. I mean I suppose it’s possible that some of them have been sneaking out to go elsewhere, but we’ve checked up on them a few times and the majority of them are still at the temple.” +“And you don’t think that they don’t know that you’ve been spying on them?” you ask. +“Hardly. Perhaps you humans clumsily stomp around when spying, but we svelk have been doing it for centuries! Even some religious fanatics with shadow magic aren’t going to detect us. Oh sure they probably know we’re in the area, but that’s about it. Trust me; we’re still going to catch them by surprise when we slip into their sad little temple.” + +Not exactly the kind of thing to fill you with confidence that the svelk are on top of things like their leader claims. Still, if the shadows haven’t been causing any problems like Tyren claims, then striking against them now before they can do any sort of regrouping might be the way to go. +> Invade the temple now +Even if the svelk weren’t as thorough as they claim, whatever defenses the shadows have or don’t have aren’t going to be enough to stop you anyway, so you decide to get this done with once and for all. + +“Alright Tyren get your people together, we’re going right now.” +“Don’t presume to order me about human. Just because you took down a few of my weaker subordinates does not put you in charge here.” +“No, the fact that I am on important Empire business and you’re just hired hands DOES put me in charge. If you would prefer a more physical demonstration of my authority however, I can certainly oblige.” + +Tyren gives you a look that he like to put you up to your threat, but common sense causes him to back down. Instead he forces a fake smile. + +“Sheesh, you Eternals are so damn serious about everything. Glad the Empire never cooked up more of your type. We’ll be ready to go in a few minutes, large bar tab to settle up with you understand. Wouldn’t want our sterling reputation be tarnished by not paying our debts.” + +You shake your head and wait outside. Naturally the dark elves take a little longer than a few minutes, but eventually they emerge from the tavern and all of you are on your way. + +The journey deeper into the swamp is fairly uneventful. Despite the unfriendly nature of the terrain, there aren’t any dangerous denizens in these swamps. The only creatures of any note are the Sul monkeys, which the dark elves continually make jokes about how humans are related to them. Tyren still gives you a glare every once in awhile, but that’s to be expected given that you threatened his authority in front of his people. He probably had to reassert it after you left the bar to wait for them. + +Eventually you start getting closer to the temple and you wonder if you should cloak yourself, but there really isn’t any point considering you’re traveling with all these dark elves. Actually you’re a little surprised you haven’t sensed or detected any shadows skulking around. You’d think they’d at least want to patrol the outer perimeter of their temple. Between that and what Tyren told you, this behavior of the shadows has been very strange, unless they believe they can hide for another couple hundred centuries to get revenge. If that is the case, they’ve gone completely delusional. + +“We’re here.” Tyren says when you arrive within the sight of the temple. +“This is very strange. I would’ve thought they would’ve had a patrol or even a look out standing outside the temple. Even if they were cloaked I would’ve sensed something.” You reply. +“Told you they haven’t been seen leaving the temple that much, so how did you want to handle this?” + +You’re a little amazed that Tyren openly asked for your advice. You tell him that when you get inside the temple to just be a little cautious as the shadows could be hiding anywhere insider it and maybe they set up traps inside. Tyren nods and relays a couple of orders in his native language to the rest of his people. + +All of you quickly move towards the temple entrance and suddenly you get that sense of something not being right, you at first figure it’s the shadows about to decloak for a surprise attack. The reality is a lot worse. + +The shadows cloaked something, but not themselves. They cloaked some sort of explosive which more than a few dark elves bump into when approaching the temple. They go off immediately and cause a spectacular chain reaction. The only thing that saves you, is the fact that you speed yourself up just quick enough to avoid the majority of the blast. Even then the explosion still catches you and you’re thrown into a tree at high impact several feet away. You’re hurt bad enough that you’ve broken a few bones and you struggle to stand up. + +You fully expect a shadow to come leaping out from somewhere or Cyrus himself to appear, but that doesn’t happen. In fact when you stagger back to the temple area, you see that it’s practically collapsed on itself (along with the charred remains of a lot of dark elves). You have no idea if the shadows planned to destroy their own temple, but if there were any inside, it would be unlikely that they survived. Still, you can’t take that chance, and you begin to limp over to the devastated temple. + +You hear a noise and swing around to defend yourself, but see that it’s Tyren and a couple of his people. One of them looks in pretty bad shape, and Tyren himself looks a little worse for wear. + +“(Cough cough) Shit…certainly didn’t expect that.’ He says. +“Well maybe if you’d done your job correctly your little band of mercs wouldn’t be in pieces right now. Come on, we have to make sure all the shadows are dead. For all we know they aren’t even here and this was just a set up.” You reply and turn to head towards the temple. + +Maybe if you’d been thinking more clearly and weren’t still a little scattered from the explosion, you wouldn’t have turned your back on Tyren. However, you did and he took full advantage. + +You feel the piercing pain of the first bolt going into your back, followed by three more. You collapse to the muddy ground attempting to crawl away. You even try to use your shadow magic, but as fate would have it, it doesn’t work. It would appear Dendrin’s “favor” has been finally taken away. You’re left with the question to as why now of all times and there are several answers that pop into your head, but the only one that comforts you is that perhaps he finally lost all power due to losing all his followers. + +You’ll never know of course, just like you’ll never know if the svelk will be punished for killing you when the next bolt goes into your skull.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 25 + +“Good work on destroying another shadow cell, the sooner we get them all, the sooner we can focus all our attention on the Felkan Kingdom.” +“I agree sir, especially since I would like to be involved in the conquest of the Felkans.” +“Heh, well I’m sure something will be found for you. I assume you’ll report to someone else after this is over though.” Mr. Mol says. + +This bit of casual news surprises you a little; you can’t help but to question it. + +“Sir, where are you going?” +“Me? Nowhere, but if you’re referring to reporting to someone else, what I mean is if you are transferred to serve in the Felkan war, I probably won’t be your superior anymore. You’d be a military matter as opposed to the unique situation you are now. Quite frankly if it wasn’t for you, I probably wouldn’t be in charge of anyone. Even the new Eternal Project is in the hands of another now, has been for years.” + +This seems like information that shouldn’t be freely shared with a subordinate, but once again Mr. Mol says it so casually its like he doesn’t care. He also notices that you’re wondering if you should inquire further, but he stops you. + +“Don’t worry about it. I spoke of things you needn’t have known or have to concern yourself with. Let’s focus on the task at hand.” +“Very well sir.” + +You and Mr. Mol get back to the business of eliminating the remaining shadow cells. In some ways it is hard to believe that this is almost over. By your estimate there are probably only about thirty shadows left at best, most of them were killed three years ago during the destruction of Fortress Gloom. You wish you could’ve been involved in that, but for whatever reason, the Empire’s allies took care of it by themselves. You never met or even saw these allies, but you heard that it was the Derro. You do know that Master Ebon and Brother Gray died in this assault, meaning someone else took control of the remaining shadows, and you know that had to be Cyrus. + +Cyrus and the surviving shadows managed to incite the pathetic remains of dissidents the Empire hadn’t silenced yet, but nothing excessive thanks to the destruction of all those safe houses in advance. The only major cause of concern was very the minor orc revolt at a fort in Rask that was separate from shadow influence. It was lucky that Mr. Mol separated most of them with transfers and prevented the shadows from establishing any sort of presence there otherwise it might’ve been much worse. + +In any event this whole thing probably would’ve been over by now if the Empire’s attention weren’t also focused on the war with the Felkan Kingdom. Fortunately that’s going well too due to their own internal strife going on with the crown. + +“From what I can tell, they’ve pulled out of all the other provinces and mainly retreated to Delerg. Somewhat predictable, but I suppose it's the best place for them to hide out right now. I’ve tried to get more soldiers posted there to help, but again the Felkan war takes priority. I wish I could’ve even got one of your former classmates to help, but well, I’ve mentioned the problem with that.” +“No matter, I’ll handle it with what help I’ve got.” +“I know you can, but I’ve hired some extra hands anyway. I’ve got a dark elf mercenary attachment in Delerg I know they’re supposed to be helping with the barbarian tribes in Rask, but I’m paying for this out of my own pocket and they’ll go where the money goes. Besides I think this group is sick of the snow anyway.” +“If you think they’ll help, then they’ll be put to good use.” You remark. +“Their leader is called Tyren. Met him once and he’s a typical svelk, arrogant and condescending. His mercenary band is currently at the town Sinkhole. You’ll be meeting them there. Now I know you’ve worked with Empire soldiers and that’s worked out okay, but working with the svelk will be different…though I imagine that won’t be a problem for you. Just never turn your back on them and be on your guard.” +“I will as always, but now I must ask, will they be more of a liability than help.” You ask. +“No, I wouldn’t have bothered if I thought that. It’s just… well they’re svelk and all that goes with it. A lot of bullshit posturing by them that’s all. You’ll be fine, anyway I suppose you’ll want to get some rest before your trip to Delerg tomorrow. Carriage will pick you up tomorrow. That will be all.” + +The next day you take the carriage to the Delerg province. It doesn’t take long, but it does give you time to yourself, which you use to briefly reflect on the past few years and your possible future, among other things. + +When you get to Sinkhole it looks exactly like how the name describes it, half of the town in the swamp and the rest of looking like it’s about to collapse. Still, you’re not here to sight see, you’re here to hopefully put down the remainder of the shadows for good. Since you’re anxious to get this over with, you immediately head to the tavern where you’re guessing the svelk are hanging out. You anxious to get this over with too, granted you’ve only had a single experience with one of their kind, but that was enough even without Mr. Mol’s previous warnings. + +You enter the tavern, which isn’t much better than the outside of it. The dark elven presence is unmistakable since they’re the only ones in the place since they’re the only ones in the place save for the poor bartender and the couple of waitresses. You’d guess that the svelk intimidated the usual patrons. You wonder why there aren’t any Empire soldiers taking care of this, but again you remember, there aren’t many stationed here and they’re all probably at an outpost or a fort in the area. They see you and three of them approach. + +“Who let the monkey in? I thought their kind were content swinging in the trees in the jungles and swamps outside.” One of them says +“You must have some sort of balls walking into this place monkey. We thought we did a good job of scaring the rest away, except the bartender and his lovely wait staff of course.” another says. +“Lovely? If you like slumming I guess, but I suppose you males really will rut with anything won’t you? Monkey, I suggest you leave, before my comrade’s macho boasting is put into action.” A female svelk remarks. + +You don’t have time for this, and these mercenary svelk scum only respect one thing anyway. You don’t like using it anymore, but you feel an impression must be made and you tap into your shadow magic. + +In lightning speed you punch the female svelk in the nose and stab the bragging male svelk in the leg and trip him face first into the floor. The third svelk raises his crossbow, but you use your own armbow to shoot a bolt right through his hand. + +The three svelk all lie on the ground nursing their wounds, meanwhile the rest of them haven’t even moved to help their fellows, though a dark elf with long black hair speaks from the table he’s sitting at. + +“So, I’m guessing you’re our Empire contact. That traitor shadow we’ve heard so much about. I suppose your skills are impressive enough…for a monkey.” +“And you must be Tyren and don’t address me as monkey again, let alone as a traitor shadow. I did not betray the shadows, they betrayed the Empire! I am an Eternal and loyal only to the Empire and the Emperor!” +“Pity, you were more interesting as a traitor. Loyalty is overrated. Now…Eternal, if you’re done beating up my people, I have information where the shadows have been hiding out at.” +“You already know where they are?” +“Of course. We scoured most of this forsaken swampland as soon as that Mol guy hired us. Quite frankly it wasn’t hard to find them, they’re at some old temple dedicated to their god I think. Surprised the Empire with all it’s resources couldn’t do it, but then what do you expect from a government run by monkeys? Anyway, we’ve been waiting on you, Mol said that you’d want to take care of this personally. We’re just here for back up, so when you want to take them out, let us know, until then let us get back to our drinks.” +“Wait, so what have the shadows been doing all this time?” +“Hell if I know Eternal. They haven’t been stirring up trouble if that’s what you think though. As far as I can tell they’ve been doing their best to try to lay low, because they haven’t left that ruined temple of theirs in weeks. I mean I suppose it’s possible that some of them have been sneaking out to go elsewhere, but we’ve checked up on them a few times and the majority of them are still at the temple.” +“And you don’t think that they don’t know that you’ve been spying on them?” you ask. +“Hardly. Perhaps you humans clumsily stomp around when spying, but we svelk have been doing it for centuries! Even some religious fanatics with shadow magic aren’t going to detect us. Oh sure they probably know we’re in the area, but that’s about it. Trust me; we’re still going to catch them by surprise when we slip into their sad little temple.” + +Not exactly the kind of thing to fill you with confidence that the svelk are on top of things like their leader claims. Still, if the shadows haven’t been causing any problems like Tyren claims, then striking against them now before they can do any sort of regrouping might be the way to go. +> Do some scouting of your own +As much as you’d like to get this over with and put an end to Cyrus once and for all, you aren’t putting your faith in svelk recon. You’ll some of your own spying and if you even need them, you’ll enlist their help. + +When you ask Tyren where the temple is so you can do your own spying, he says that you’re just wasting your time and likely to just give your element of surprise away if you linger and insist on this foolishness. He doesn’t really care though since he’s getting paid either way, so he gives you the information. + +“You know where to find me, when you’re done fooling around.” Tyren says as you head towards the door. You look back and scan the three svelk sitting in a corner still bandaging their wounds. + +“From what I can tell, your people can’t handle it when I’m just fooling around. I question if they could handle it when faced with folks who won’t be.” You reply and leave. + +You immediately make your way deeper into the swamps towards the shadow temple. Despite the unfriendly nature of the terrain, there aren’t any dangerous denizens in these swamps. The only creatures of any note are the Sul monkeys and they seem to be content going about their normal routines. While you were in the Shadow Guard, you heard a few tales that a reptilian race called the Slin used to live here until the shadows removed them all at the request of the Empire. + +Eventually you start getting closer to the temple and decide to cloak yourself. Again, you hate to use the magic anymore, but as long as you don’t over do it, you’ll be fine. Actually you’re a little surprised you haven’t sensed or detected any shadows skulking around. You’d think they’d at least want to patrol the outer perimeter of their temple. Between that and what Tyren told you, this behavior of the shadows has been very strange, unless they believe they can hide for another couple hundred centuries to get revenge. If that is the case, they’ve gone completely delusional. + +You then finally see them, just outside the temple. You hide behind a nearby rock and spy on what they’re doing. You see them placing spherical plants in various places outside the temple. You’ve seen the plant several times in the swamp; they give off a faint harmless gas nothing more, but it looks like the shadows are doing something to change that. + +You see them infusing the plants with magic causing them to give a pulsating green glow. The shadows back away cautiously every time they do this. Then they cloak the plant. You’re guessing that bumping into or lingering too close to the plants causes something very bad to happen now. You watch them do this for about an hour before they go back into the temple. Another couple hours pass, and none of them have exited from it again. It would appear they have retired for the day and you’re left pondering what to do next. + +Going back and getting Tyren’s help would probably be the intelligent thing to do, but you really don’t know how they’re going to get past the plants. Even if they toss rocks at them to cause them to go off, you have no idea what the result is going to be. For all you know, the shadows might have an escape route to go through as soon as the plants do whatever it is they’re going to do. By yourself, you could probably speed your way past the plants without anything happening. + +You decide you’ll do this alone. You’ve practically been taking down the shadows since the beginning by yourself; you might as well finish it by yourself. If you fall in battle, then you fall, but either way, you’re making sure Cyrus dies today. + +You take a deep breath, mumble those infernal incantations and prepare yourself to speed past the plants, you’re just glad you saw exactly where the shadows placed them. As you’re running by them, you half expect them to still do something. They don’t though and you reach the entryway. + +The whole place is silent as you’d expect, but this seems different. It’s like you can’t even detect anyone here. Not to mention you’d expect to run into some shadows at least guarding near the entrance. Makes you question what the hell they’re doing in here. After moving deeper into the temple you soon find out. + +You see Cyrus standing over the bodies of several shadows. Near the bodies are empty flasks. + +“I’ll be with you soon my brothers and sisters. And especially you Draven.” Cyrus says looking at the bodies and ignoring you completely. +“After all your talk of freedom and all your supposed dedication against the so called tyranny of the Empire, this is what it comes to Cyrus? Ritual suicide? I expected at least more of a fight during the last stand of the shadows.” You call out. + +Cyrus finally pays attention to you and his eyes display a distant coldness rather than outright hatred. + +“You never did understand us or the will of Dendrin, Empire puppet. You never will.” Cyrus says. +“Oh I think I understood all too well, considering Dendrin spoke to me on several occasions. The difference is, I was strong enough to resist his lies. You call me a puppet, then what are you? A discarded toy by an uncaring god who has lead you to ruin? How fitting that your death is to be in one of his half forgotten temples. In another hundred years the shadows will be forgotten completely.” +“It doesn’t matter. We carried out Dendrin’s faith as best we could…we can only hope that he will take mercy on us for our failure as we pass from this world to the next.” + +You shake your head at Cyrus’ words. You can hardly believe he’s speaking such rot and believing it. It’s actually making you angry to hear it. + +“You actually believe that shit? When you die here today, and you WILL die here. It will just be your corpse rotting until it finally disappears completely to time. Dendrin cares NOTHING for you or any of the shadows! He never did! If he did, he would’ve done a better job at helping you! He knew I was working against the shadows from the very beginning and yet he didn’t see fit to expose me! Did he come to any of you in a dream or a vision or anything? No, because ultimately he didn’t give a fuck and probably only saw the shadows as his personal playthings. Shit, the only person in that order that had any resemblance of sense was you of all people. YOU knew I was working against the shadows before anyone else suspected and nobody even listened to you! They told you that you were overacting and did nothing until it was too late. So why the hell would you still stay loyal to an order that is so short sighted?” + +Cyrus kneels down by the body of Dravin and touches his face. Cyrus looks up at you again, this time with a faint trace of emotion this time. It seems you might’ve misjudged his true motivations. + +“Perhaps all of what you say it true, but Dendrin did lead me to Dravin and for that alone earns my loyalty even if everything else was a lie. I pity you. Duty is all that is in your heart and it’s apparently all you’ll ever know.” He says. +‘Pity yourself. You’re even more weak willed than I thought if you did this for something as silly as love.” +“I have no regrets, but I don’t owe you anymore explanations. You’re not here for that, you’re here to mindlessly carry out your duty. Well come on then and finish it!” Cyrus shouts and draws his sword. + +The battle between the pair of you is finally joined. There is no magic use or shadow tricks. It’s just one Eternal fighting another in straight up combat. Cyrus’ mistake. He would’ve done well to use magic as it could’ve put him on equal footing, perhaps even gave him the advantage, but perhaps he didn’t want it. Maybe this is his form of suicide. + +Eventually you land a mortal blow, slicing his side clean open. Cyrus falls and deflects your attempt to split his head open, but he drops his sword from the force of your blow in the process. Weaponless, tired and bleeding out from a deep hole in his side, Cyrus accepts defeat. + +“Do it. Eternal slave of the Empire.” He says coldly and then you fulfill his request by decapitating him. + +It’s finished. At last it’s finally finished. You begin to smile. + +“It’s finished Dendrin! You see this? In your own home! All of your followers, all of your sheep, fucking dead! Never again will you threaten the Empire! It has survived your treachery and you will be forgotten like you should’ve been centuries ago!” you shout, followed by your laughter. + +Some very loud explosions outside in turn follow your laughter. Someone or something has stumbled on to those plants. The temple, which was already in ruins, begins to crumble from the force of the explosions. You narrowly avoid getting hit by a large piece of ceiling, but the rest of it will be collapsing soon. + +Your first instinct is to speed yourself up to get out of the temple, but you find that your magic isn’t working. You quickly run to the entrance and find that it’s already blocked by debris. The temple is still collapsing and you’re either going to have to find another way out of act quickly to remove the rubble blocking the entrance. +> Find another way out +If you stand here trying to move rubble you’ll probably get crushed, surely there has to be another opening somewhere considering this place was falling apart before the explosions. + +You run back to the main room where all the shadows lay dead and you try to scan a possible opening you can get through while dodging pieces of concrete nearly hitting you. You think you’ve spotted an exit and run to it, but your luck finally gives out as fast as the ceiling. You feel a crushing blow to the back of your head. Not enough to knock you out immediately, but enough to do it eventually. You stagger back and forth as blood pours from the top of your head. + +“Damn it…can’t die…here…” you say and fall to the floor unconscious as the temple continues to collapse around you. + +Once again you’re in a place where your senses are completely dead. + +“No, Eternal you will not die here today, but you would’ve done better to do so I believe.” +“Still speaking cryptically Dendrin? Face the truth, the Empire beat you. I beat you. Your followers are all gone and there is nobody left to spread your lies.” +“I wouldn’t say that. I’ve still got you.” +“No you don’t, you’ve NEVER had me.” +“Perhaps not your mind, but as I said, we will forever be connected, whether you like it or not.” +“I don’t think so, I tried using your magic and it didn’t even work! My link to you is so distant now that it will soon be severed!” +“Is that what you think? Is it not more likely that I stopped you from being able to tap into the realm of shadow for your magic anymore? If anything you should be thanking me, since you obviously didn’t have the willpower to stop doing it yourself, despite all your bravado that you wanted nothing to do with the shadows.” + +You ignore Dendrin’s mocking; you won’t let him attempt to turn his ultimate defeat into some sort of “victory.” + +“I used your so called gifts against you Dendrin! I’ve won your little game and you have no more toys to play with. I will continue to live my life serving the Empire and you will have to find another way to amuse yourself.” +“Well Eternal, you may be right on both accounts, but that doesn’t mean those two aren’t intertwined…but don’t worry Eternal, I don’t intend on visiting to bother you again. I doubt if anything I could say would change your mind about anything. Though I do wonder how you can justify your continued existence.” +“What are you babbling about?” +“You said the shadows were a threat to the Empire. You obviously felt this stronger than anyone considering that for the past four years you’ve been ruthlessly seeking them out. You even charged into this temple by yourself without any back up.” +“Does this have a point?” +“You’re the last shadow, Eternal. How can your beloved Empire survive as long as you do? How do you know that one day something within you doesn’t suddenly turn you against it?” +“I AM NOT A SHADOW!” you manage to shout verbally in this ocean of sensory deprivation. The sound is so loud it becomes deafening, then painful and then you wake up. + +You look around you and find yourself still in the temple, or what remains of it. As it stands now there are plenty of exits since there a gaping holes in the walls. You rub your aching head and make your way out of the temple. On your way out you see several body parts strewn about the front of the temple. Upon further inspection they’re dark elven. You don’t see Tyren’s body (or head), but then he might’ve been blown up beyond recognition. + +You can only guess Tyren and his people came to the temple when they thought you’d been killed. Seems a little odd though considering they were pretty much content on swilling ale until you were going to give them the order to invade the temple. In any case you’ll relay all this information to Mr. Mol when you return to report to him. For now you’re in for a long walk back to Sinkhole. + +A few days later you get in contact with Mr. Mol who immediately sends a carriage to come pick you up. According to reports, you were assumed dead, apparently some of the dark elves that didn’t get blown up by the gas plants reported you dead without bothering to check. + +When you arrive in the capital a large group of soldiers escort you to Mr. Mol. Like more than the average amount, it makes you wonder what’s been going on while you’ve been gone. Maybe the Felkans made their own assassination attempt? + +When you arrive before Mr. Mol, he’s flanked by several more soldiers. In fact these ones are orcs. Mr. Mol sees you and looks down rubbing his fingers through his hair in a nervous manner. What is going on here? + +“I thought you’d died. Guess I should’ve known better than to trust those lazy svelk mercs. Guess I won’t be hiring them out of pocket ever again. Heh. So the shadows…are they all dead?” +“Yes, though sadly most of them committed some sort of suicide by the time I got there. I did however slay Cyrus myself. So it’s over.” +“Good. Good.” Mr. Mol says with a deep exhale. +“Mr. Mol, what’s with all the soldiers? Was the capital attacked while I was away? Is there some sort of need for all this extra protection?” +“No, the capital wasn’t attacked, but there is a need for extra protection…against you.” + +At this point Mr. Mol stands as far as he can from you and the heavily armed orc soldier step forward to block any potential advance you’d make on him. The soldiers behind you suddenly grab your arms to restrain you. You’re taken by surprise and natural instinct takes over and you react violently. A small scuffle ensues and Mr. Mol is shouting the whole time for them not to kill you, but only to restrain you. It’s doomed to failure, as you’re still more than a match for the soldiers and you kill two of them, before Mr. Mol tells them all to back off and calls more guards to come in. + +You’re left in a corner confused and angry with your sword drawn. + +“WHY?! What is this?!” you demand. +“It’s a precaution. The shadows are dead and they need to stay that way! You’re the last of their kind.” +“I’m not a fucking shadow!” +“It’s not my call. This is a decree from an office higher than mine, probably from the Emperor himself. I did all I could, but it has to be this way.” + +You can’t believe this. You can’t believe what you’re hearing. + +“But I’ve proven my loyalty! I’ve proven that I serve the Emperor and the Empire!” you shout. + +Mr. Mol once again puts his hand over his face and breathes deeply before speaking. + +“I know, but how do we know it’ll stay that way? You told me Dendrin was playing head games with you on several occasions. How do we know your indoctrination won’t kick in at a later time? Maybe he’s always had power over you, maybe this is all just another part of his plan.” +“NO! I beat him! My willpower and duty to the Emperor was stronger!” +“…look…I believe you. I always have. But as I said, this is out of my hands. Honestly you were treading in dangerous waters as soon as you confessed the plans of the shadows and you were running on borrowed time when they transferred me out of the Eternal Project. It was only due to your over zealous dedication in hunting the shadows and my intervention that your existence was continued. When the extermination of the shadows was complete, you were to follow. I had hoped those svelk would’ve done the job, but I guess there were unforeseen complications. Just as well, I should’ve been brave enough to do it face to face anyway. You deserved that much. I apologize.” + +You ignore Mr. Mol’s attempt at justification. This all doesn’t seem real to you, you think that maybe this is some sort of mind fuck by Dendrin, but unfortunately it isn’t and you know it. You just can’t believe that you were lied to the whole time and about to be discarded as a tool that has no more use. + +Is this what you fought so hard to preserve? Is this your reward for all your hard work? Your whole life has involved nothing but lies, duplicity and treachery and you tried your best to persevere through all of it. + +You find yourself nearly laughing despite the anger you’re feeling right now. Dendrin’s last words to you, was how can you justify your existence due to being a shadow. You wonder if he knew the Empire would feel that way, even if you didn’t. Chances are, he did. Maybe that’s what he meant by your continued service to the Empire and his amusement being intertwined. + +The situation now isn’t good. Even if you did manage to fight your way out of here, where would you go? You’d be a wanted criminal of the Empire and that’s the only thing you’ve ever dedicated yourself to. Even though it wants to kill you right now, you can’t bring yourself to fight against it. You worked too hard to preserve it. + +And that’s when you remember a lesson you learned a long time ago in Mistress’ class. An important lesson that is going to get you through this: Submit and obey the Empire. You are nothing compared to the Emperor's glory and you will die if necessary to preserve his reign. + +You put your sword down slowly and address Mr. Mol. + +“You should not be apologizing sir. I should be the one to apologize as I have killed two men who were only doing their duty and I have also tried to prevent you from doing yours as well. If the Empire believes I am a potential danger then I must die. I will not see it destroyed after I have spent my life trying to defend it from internal threats, even if that threat could be me. We all may have to give our lives in the service of the Empire and today I will give mine.” + +Your speech is followed by several soldiers restraining you, though it’s hardly necessary. Mr. Mol approaches you with a display of regret on his face. + +“Maybe it won’t be widely acknowledged, but your service was important and as long as the Empire lives, you will also live. (Sigh) You deserved better though.” + +And with those words, Mr. Mol makes a nodding gesture and you feel several blades go into your body repeatedly. You don’t even feel the pain; you just put your mind in another place to numb yourself. One of those shadow tricks you learned. You guess perhaps it is better that you die if you’re still using such things. Maybe Dendrin was playing a sick waiting game with you. Well it won’t work and Cyrus was wrong too. You do know something of love. You love the Empire and the Emperor and that’s why you’ll willingly die for them. + +“Long live…the Em…pire…” you say and then expire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As much as you’d like to get this over with and put an end to Cyrus once and for all, you aren’t putting your faith in svelk recon. You’ll some of your own spying and if you even need them, you’ll enlist their help. + +When you ask Tyren where the temple is so you can do your own spying, he says that you’re just wasting your time and likely to just give your element of surprise away if you linger and insist on this foolishness. He doesn’t really care though since he’s getting paid either way, so he gives you the information. + +“You know where to find me, when you’re done fooling around.” Tyren says as you head towards the door. You look back and scan the three svelk sitting in a corner still bandaging their wounds. + +“From what I can tell, your people can’t handle it when I’m just fooling around. I question if they could handle it when faced with folks who won’t be.” You reply and leave. + +You immediately make your way deeper into the swamps towards the shadow temple. Despite the unfriendly nature of the terrain, there aren’t any dangerous denizens in these swamps. The only creatures of any note are the Sul monkeys and they seem to be content going about their normal routines. While you were in the Shadow Guard, you heard a few tales that a reptilian race called the Slin used to live here until the shadows removed them all at the request of the Empire. + +Eventually you start getting closer to the temple and decide to cloak yourself. Again, you hate to use the magic anymore, but as long as you don’t over do it, you’ll be fine. Actually you’re a little surprised you haven’t sensed or detected any shadows skulking around. You’d think they’d at least want to patrol the outer perimeter of their temple. Between that and what Tyren told you, this behavior of the shadows has been very strange, unless they believe they can hide for another couple hundred centuries to get revenge. If that is the case, they’ve gone completely delusional. + +You then finally see them, just outside the temple. You hide behind a nearby rock and spy on what they’re doing. You see them placing spherical plants in various places outside the temple. You’ve seen the plant several times in the swamp; they give off a faint harmless gas nothing more, but it looks like the shadows are doing something to change that. + +You see them infusing the plants with magic causing them to give a pulsating green glow. The shadows back away cautiously every time they do this. Then they cloak the plant. You’re guessing that bumping into or lingering too close to the plants causes something very bad to happen now. You watch them do this for about an hour before they go back into the temple. Another couple hours pass, and none of them have exited from it again. It would appear they have retired for the day and you’re left pondering what to do next. + +Going back and getting Tyren’s help would probably be the intelligent thing to do, but you really don’t know how they’re going to get past the plants. Even if they toss rocks at them to cause them to go off, you have no idea what the result is going to be. For all you know, the shadows might have an escape route to go through as soon as the plants do whatever it is they’re going to do. By yourself, you could probably speed your way past the plants without anything happening. + +You decide you’ll do this alone. You’ve practically been taking down the shadows since the beginning by yourself; you might as well finish it by yourself. If you fall in battle, then you fall, but either way, you’re making sure Cyrus dies today. + +You take a deep breath, mumble those infernal incantations and prepare yourself to speed past the plants, you’re just glad you saw exactly where the shadows placed them. As you’re running by them, you half expect them to still do something. They don’t though and you reach the entryway. + +The whole place is silent as you’d expect, but this seems different. It’s like you can’t even detect anyone here. Not to mention you’d expect to run into some shadows at least guarding near the entrance. Makes you question what the hell they’re doing in here. After moving deeper into the temple you soon find out. + +You see Cyrus standing over the bodies of several shadows. Near the bodies are empty flasks. + +“I’ll be with you soon my brothers and sisters. And especially you Draven.” Cyrus says looking at the bodies and ignoring you completely. +“After all your talk of freedom and all your supposed dedication against the so called tyranny of the Empire, this is what it comes to Cyrus? Ritual suicide? I expected at least more of a fight during the last stand of the shadows.” You call out. + +Cyrus finally pays attention to you and his eyes display a distant coldness rather than outright hatred. + +“You never did understand us or the will of Dendrin, Empire puppet. You never will.” Cyrus says. +“Oh I think I understood all too well, considering Dendrin spoke to me on several occasions. The difference is, I was strong enough to resist his lies. You call me a puppet, then what are you? A discarded toy by an uncaring god who has lead you to ruin? How fitting that your death is to be in one of his half forgotten temples. In another hundred years the shadows will be forgotten completely.” +“It doesn’t matter. We carried out Dendrin’s faith as best we could…we can only hope that he will take mercy on us for our failure as we pass from this world to the next.” + +You shake your head at Cyrus’ words. You can hardly believe he’s speaking such rot and believing it. It’s actually making you angry to hear it. + +“You actually believe that shit? When you die here today, and you WILL die here. It will just be your corpse rotting until it finally disappears completely to time. Dendrin cares NOTHING for you or any of the shadows! He never did! If he did, he would’ve done a better job at helping you! He knew I was working against the shadows from the very beginning and yet he didn’t see fit to expose me! Did he come to any of you in a dream or a vision or anything? No, because ultimately he didn’t give a fuck and probably only saw the shadows as his personal playthings. Shit, the only person in that order that had any resemblance of sense was you of all people. YOU knew I was working against the shadows before anyone else suspected and nobody even listened to you! They told you that you were overacting and did nothing until it was too late. So why the hell would you still stay loyal to an order that is so short sighted?” + +Cyrus kneels down by the body of Dravin and touches his face. Cyrus looks up at you again, this time with a faint trace of emotion this time. It seems you might’ve misjudged his true motivations. + +“Perhaps all of what you say it true, but Dendrin did lead me to Dravin and for that alone earns my loyalty even if everything else was a lie. I pity you. Duty is all that is in your heart and it’s apparently all you’ll ever know.” He says. +‘Pity yourself. You’re even more weak willed than I thought if you did this for something as silly as love.” +“I have no regrets, but I don’t owe you anymore explanations. You’re not here for that, you’re here to mindlessly carry out your duty. Well come on then and finish it!” Cyrus shouts and draws his sword. + +The battle between the pair of you is finally joined. There is no magic use or shadow tricks. It’s just one Eternal fighting another in straight up combat. Cyrus’ mistake. He would’ve done well to use magic as it could’ve put him on equal footing, perhaps even gave him the advantage, but perhaps he didn’t want it. Maybe this is his form of suicide. + +Eventually you land a mortal blow, slicing his side clean open. Cyrus falls and deflects your attempt to split his head open, but he drops his sword from the force of your blow in the process. Weaponless, tired and bleeding out from a deep hole in his side, Cyrus accepts defeat. + +“Do it. Eternal slave of the Empire.” He says coldly and then you fulfill his request by decapitating him. + +It’s finished. At last it’s finally finished. You begin to smile. + +“It’s finished Dendrin! You see this? In your own home! All of your followers, all of your sheep, fucking dead! Never again will you threaten the Empire! It has survived your treachery and you will be forgotten like you should’ve been centuries ago!” you shout, followed by your laughter. + +Some very loud explosions outside in turn follow your laughter. Someone or something has stumbled on to those plants. The temple, which was already in ruins, begins to crumble from the force of the explosions. You narrowly avoid getting hit by a large piece of ceiling, but the rest of it will be collapsing soon. + +Your first instinct is to speed yourself up to get out of the temple, but you find that your magic isn’t working. You quickly run to the entrance and find that it’s already blocked by debris. The temple is still collapsing and you’re either going to have to find another way out of act quickly to remove the rubble blocking the entrance. +> Move the rubble +There’s no time to go searching for another exit, the whole place is probably going to collapse. You start moving rocks as fast as you can as the roof continues to tumble down. Unfortunately you’re not quick enough and while your attention is divided, you don’t evade the rest of the ceiling that crashes on your head. Buried under several pounds debris you begin to lose consciousness. + +“No…can’t die…not in this accursed place.” are your last words.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 25 + +“Good work on destroying another shadow cell, the sooner we get them all, the sooner we can focus all our attention on the Felkan Kingdom.” +“I agree sir, especially since I would like to be involved in the conquest of the Felkans.” +“Heh, well I’m sure something will be found for you. I assume you’ll report to someone else after this is over though.” Mr. Mol says. + +This bit of casual news surprises you a little; you can’t help but to question it. + +“Sir, where are you going?” +“Me? Nowhere, but if you’re referring to reporting to someone else, what I mean is if you are transferred to serve in the Felkan war, I probably won’t be your superior anymore. You’d be a military matter as opposed to the unique situation you are now. Quite frankly if it wasn’t for you, I probably wouldn’t be in charge of anyone. Even the new Eternal Project is in the hands of another now, has been for years.” + +This seems like information that shouldn’t be freely shared with a subordinate, but once again Mr. Mol says it so casually its like he doesn’t care. He also notices that you’re wondering if you should inquire further, but he stops you. + +“Don’t worry about it. I spoke of things you needn’t have known or have to concern yourself with. Let’s focus on the task at hand.” +“Very well sir.” + +You and Mr. Mol get back to the business of eliminating the remaining shadow cells. In some ways it is hard to believe that this is almost over. By your estimate there are probably only about thirty shadows left at best, most of them were killed three years ago during the destruction of Fortress Gloom. You wish you could’ve been involved in that, but for whatever reason, the Empire’s allies took care of it by themselves. You never met or even saw these allies, but you heard that it was the Derro. You do know that Master Ebon and Brother Gray died in this assault, meaning someone else took control of the remaining shadows, and you know that had to be Cyrus. + +Cyrus and the surviving shadows managed to incite the pathetic remains of dissidents the Empire hadn’t silenced yet, but nothing excessive thanks to the destruction of all those safe houses in advance. The only major cause of concern was very the minor orc revolt at a fort in Rask that was separate from shadow influence. It was lucky that Mr. Mol separated most of them with transfers and prevented the shadows from establishing any sort of presence there otherwise it might’ve been much worse. + +In any event this whole thing probably would’ve been over by now if the Empire’s attention weren’t also focused on the war with the Felkan Kingdom. Fortunately that’s going well too due to their own internal strife going on with the crown. + +“From what I can tell, they’ve pulled out of all the other provinces and mainly retreated to Delerg. Somewhat predictable, but I suppose it's the best place for them to hide out right now. I’ve tried to get more soldiers posted there to help, but again the Felkan war takes priority. I wish I could’ve even got one of your former classmates to help, but well, I’ve mentioned the problem with that.” +“No matter, I’ll handle it with what help I’ve got.” +“I know you can, but I’ve hired some extra hands anyway. I’ve got a dark elf mercenary attachment in Delerg I know they’re supposed to be helping with the barbarian tribes in Rask, but I’m paying for this out of my own pocket and they’ll go where the money goes. Besides I think this group is sick of the snow anyway.” +“If you think they’ll help, then they’ll be put to good use.” You remark. +“Their leader is called Tyren. Met him once and he’s a typical svelk, arrogant and condescending. His mercenary band is currently at the town Sinkhole. You’ll be meeting them there. Now I know you’ve worked with Empire soldiers and that’s worked out okay, but working with the svelk will be different…though I imagine that won’t be a problem for you. Just never turn your back on them and be on your guard.” +“I will as always, but now I must ask, will they be more of a liability than help.” You ask. +“No, I wouldn’t have bothered if I thought that. It’s just… well they’re svelk and all that goes with it. A lot of bullshit posturing by them that’s all. You’ll be fine, anyway I suppose you’ll want to get some rest before your trip to Delerg tomorrow. Carriage will pick you up tomorrow. That will be all.” + +The next day you take the carriage to the Delerg province. It doesn’t take long, but it does give you time to yourself, which you use to briefly reflect on the past few years and your possible future, among other things. + +When you get to Sinkhole it looks exactly like how the name describes it, half of the town in the swamp and the rest of looking like it’s about to collapse. Still, you’re not here to sight see, you’re here to hopefully put down the remainder of the shadows for good. Since you’re anxious to get this over with, you immediately head to the tavern where you’re guessing the svelk are hanging out. You anxious to get this over with too, granted you’ve only had a single experience with one of their kind, but that was enough even without Mr. Mol’s previous warnings. + +You enter the tavern, which isn’t much better than the outside of it. The dark elven presence is unmistakable since they’re the only ones in the place since they’re the only ones in the place save for the poor bartender and the couple of waitresses. You’d guess that the svelk intimidated the usual patrons. You wonder why there aren’t any Empire soldiers taking care of this, but again you remember, there aren’t many stationed here and they’re all probably at an outpost or a fort in the area. They see you and three of them approach. + +“Who let the monkey in? I thought their kind were content swinging in the trees in the jungles and swamps outside.” One of them says +“You must have some sort of balls walking into this place monkey. We thought we did a good job of scaring the rest away, except the bartender and his lovely wait staff of course.” another says. +“Lovely? If you like slumming I guess, but I suppose you males really will rut with anything won’t you? Monkey, I suggest you leave, before my comrade’s macho boasting is put into action.” A female svelk remarks. + +You don’t have time for this, and these mercenary svelk scum only respect one thing anyway. You don’t like using it anymore, but you feel an impression must be made and you tap into your shadow magic. + +In lightning speed you punch the female svelk in the nose and stab the bragging male svelk in the leg and trip him face first into the floor. The third svelk raises his crossbow, but you use your own armbow to shoot a bolt right through his hand. + +The three svelk all lie on the ground nursing their wounds, meanwhile the rest of them haven’t even moved to help their fellows, though a dark elf with long black hair speaks from the table he’s sitting at. + +“So, I’m guessing you’re our Empire contact. That traitor shadow we’ve heard so much about. I suppose your skills are impressive enough…for a monkey.” +“And you must be Tyren and don’t address me as monkey again, let alone as a traitor shadow. I did not betray the shadows, they betrayed the Empire! I am an Eternal and loyal only to the Empire and the Emperor!” +“Pity, you were more interesting as a traitor. Loyalty is overrated. Now…Eternal, if you’re done beating up my people, I have information where the shadows have been hiding out at.” +“You already know where they are?” +“Of course. We scoured most of this forsaken swampland as soon as that Mol guy hired us. Quite frankly it wasn’t hard to find them, they’re at some old temple dedicated to their god I think. Surprised the Empire with all it’s resources couldn’t do it, but then what do you expect from a government run by monkeys? Anyway, we’ve been waiting on you, Mol said that you’d want to take care of this personally. We’re just here for back up, so when you want to take them out, let us know, until then let us get back to our drinks.” +“Wait, so what have the shadows been doing all this time?” +“Hell if I know Eternal. They haven’t been stirring up trouble if that’s what you think though. As far as I can tell they’ve been doing their best to try to lay low, because they haven’t left that ruined temple of theirs in weeks. I mean I suppose it’s possible that some of them have been sneaking out to go elsewhere, but we’ve checked up on them a few times and the majority of them are still at the temple.” +“And you don’t think that they don’t know that you’ve been spying on them?” you ask. +“Hardly. Perhaps you humans clumsily stomp around when spying, but we svelk have been doing it for centuries! Even some religious fanatics with shadow magic aren’t going to detect us. Oh sure they probably know we’re in the area, but that’s about it. Trust me; we’re still going to catch them by surprise when we slip into their sad little temple.” + +Not exactly the kind of thing to fill you with confidence that the svelk are on top of things like their leader claims. Still, if the shadows haven’t been causing any problems like Tyren claims, then striking against them now before they can do any sort of regrouping might be the way to go. +> The carriage ride (Self reflection) +As you wait in the bumpy ride to Sinkhole, you think back on some of the things that have occurred to you within the past few years and your current situation. + +You remember soon after Gloom was officially destroyed, everyone figured mopping up the remaining shadows wouldn't take too long. Who knew they'd be able to hold out for four years? Though to be honest, you knew they'd be able to hold out for as long as they had the ability to do so, mainly because they were being lead by not just a shadow, but by an Eternal. No matter what his allegiances are, Cyrus is always going to be one and that is what truly makes him a formidable foe, not because of his silly faith in Dendrin. In fact his faith in Dendrin is what makes him weak like the rest. There were several times you nearly caught up to him, but he always managed to stay one step ahead of you. He ran like a coward with no sense of honor. With any luck, this will be his last holdout and he'll have nowhere to run this time. + +Dendrin. Another being that you haven't had much contact with in several years, thankfully. You don't know why. Maybe it's due to his loss of followers making him weaker or perhaps you've sufficiently distanced yourself now that he can't contact you anymore. Or maybe he just saw the futility of trying to play head games with you. You stood in the very heart of the enemy and won. He couldn't break you and is suffering considerable losses because of it. + +Yes, when Cyrus is finally dead, you'll be able to thrive and spread the Emperor's glory elsewhere. You continue to look forward to being transferred to the frontlines of the Felkan war zone. You just hope the war isn't won before you get there given how successful things have been on that front. + +Part of you does wonder about the new Eternal Project that Mr. Mol speaks of though. Will the new Eternal be the same as you or possibly better? If they are better, are you going to be considered obsolete? This is why you MUST prove yourself. You have to show that even by the time the new Eternals are ready, YOU will be still of value to the Empire. Perhaps it will even be you who will lead the new ones into battle. Part of you likes that idea. Not just leading troops into battle as you've done that before during raids on shadow hideouts, but leading other Eternals. + +Sometimes you wonder what life would've been like if you'd been one of the Eternals to serve as a soldier instead. You don't know much about those former classmates, but you do know not many of them are left either, though you have heard two of them ended up marrying each other. One of them is on the Felkan frontlines while other is stationed in the Nalin province defending it from desert nomads from the south. + +Makes you think about Talia, and how it was a shame that she had to die. She was a fine Eternal otherwise. Perhaps if she had been on the right side, you would've married her. She certainly wanted to produce a child with you. + +Though maybe its best you hadn't been assigned as a soldier or else the shadow plot wouldn't have been uncovered by you and then where would the Empire be? In a much worse situation most likely. + +Yes, your journey thus far while not an easy one, is one you can feel a sense of accomplishment in. You sit back and relax for the rest of the carriage ride, knowing that your deeds have probably prevented the Empire from plunging into mass riots or even rebellion. + +It fills you with pride and a little happiness that you have served it and the Emperor so well. You can only hope to serve with such distinction in the future.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Too complicated and too much can go wrong. It’ll probably be better to just play it by ear. You’re fairly confident that so much will be going on that you’ll be able to pull it off. + +The next part of the journey is your first big step. Crossing into Felkan territory. This is actually very easy. The outposts aren’t nearly as well guarded as they should be and combined with sticking to the wilderness and using magic to cloak yourself and its incredibly simple. The five of you camp out in a secluded wood where Sister Dusk addresses the situation. + +“Okay, now this is focus time. The Felkan capital Dessle, is still a long way to go, but I think we can get there by tomorrow night. It’s just as well since night is when we work best. Now remember we’re just breaking in, killing some guards and getting out. Don’t actually kill the king, assuming we run into him. Good thing we don’t have to, it’s not like we exactly have a map of the palace to go hunting him down.” +“Can’t we just take out one of those outposts we passed by? I mean it would still start a war.” Murk jokes, but Dusk isn’t amused. +“Brother, I suggest you stop joking about such things, you know the reason why, we’re doing things the way we’re doing them, but more importantly Dendrin wants it done this way!” Now get some rest, we’re going to need to be at full strength tomorrow.” + +Murk shuts up and mentally chalks up yet another way he embarrassed himself in from of Bianca. You also make mental notes, namely on who you should kill first. You wonder if you should take out the strongest or weakest first. You could probably easily dispatch Murk and Bianca without too much trouble. You aren’t aware of Dusk’s full abilities, but you know she is at least accomplished as Shade was. Talia, however is an Eternal and you know how strong she is. + +“You thinking about how you’re going to handle things if everything goes wrong?” Talia suddenly asks. +“Huh? Oh. Yeah I guess you could say that.” +“Figured. You’re always deep in thought, I’ve noticed you’ve been doing that a lot lately, especially at night in your bed.” +“Hm, glad to see Cyrus isn’t the only one spying on me.” You answer. +“I wasn’t really spying, so much as I was studying you, besides I think you noticed that I was.” +“Yes, I did notice.” +“Of course you did, because you’re always alert. You’re always aware. And I think you know of my desire.” + +Talia sits next to you very closely. While you were certainly aware of her interest, you didn’t expect it right now! You react immediately to her advances. + +“Talia, stop for a moment. Do you really think this is a good idea right now?” +“What better time than now?” + +You’ve heard that line before though the situation is completely different than the one a year ago. This state of affairs is a little weird even for you, considering you were thinking about killing her not a few moments ago. + +“Talia, I really don’t think we have time for this. We need to get some rest, we’ve got a very important mission tomorrow.” You reply. +“Well it won’t take that long will it?” +“Won’t take long?” +“Well I mean I know you’ve been with all those trollops, and your goal there probably wasn’t to make them feel good, but rather yourself. And I imagine you wanted to do that as quickly as possible. I don’t need to be pleasured…I mean perhaps I will express some interest in it during the act and maybe we can try for fun if the mission goes well, but right now I just want your essence.” +“My essence? Wait a minute; you just want me to impregnate you?” +“Well I want you to try. I suppose I should’ve come to you sooner with this, but I do see you as a potential mate. Even though we are all siblings and equals in the eyes of Dendrin, quite frankly WE…” Talia grabs your hand and puts it to her heart and then your own. “…are Eternals. We still have a bond that the others don’t and you’re the only one I believe is worthy for me. Our child will be an Eternal and a Shadow like us and we will raise him or her to follow Dendrin as we do. Now I believe you will come out of this mission alive and we will probably talk about our future together in greater detail later, but like you I also prepare in case something should go wrong. If you should fall in battle, then I want to at least have a part of you to live on through me.” + +This was definitely not something you anticipated. All these years of managing to distance yourself emotionally from all of these traitors and it’s been cracked within a few moments. Or maybe you still had the feelings and you never got rid of them, only buried them deeply. Doesn’t matter, you’re still left with the same problem, pangs of conscience. Weakness. + +Though perhaps it’s due to Talia being a fellow Eternal that has caused it. She obviously hasn’t abandoned all of her superiority complex. And she’s right; you do still have a bond. You just wish she was on the right side, because you don’t have time to convince her. + +You hope Dendrin’s having a good laugh at all this, because this is the best twist yet. Bastard. + +You could decline her advances, no you SHOULD decline her advances, but for whatever reason you accept them. Maybe it’s your weakness of will, maybe it’s your hormones or maybe it’s just your own twisted way of granting a dead woman her last request, even if she’s unaware of it. + +The pair of you leave the camp far enough away, cast a spell for privacy and embrace. At least neither of you will die not knowing the pleasures of the flesh. You have to admit, you were always a bit curious. How funny that your reputation as a whoremonger couldn’t have been any further from the truth. After it’s over you both return and go to your bedrolls without speaking another word. You notice Sister Dusk sleeping against a tree and open one eye as if to let you know what you were up to, but she doesn’t do anything else. Perhaps she understands the need for hasty copulation, having lost her own mate only a year ago. + +The next day, you set off. Murk tries to speak to you and makes a few comments about noticing that Talia was eyeing you a lot yesterday, but you tell him to leave it alone and focus on the mission. Dusk tells him the same thing when she sees him jabbering on as usual. As for Talia, she hasn’t spoken to you, though perhaps her mind is focused on the mission like it should be. Where your mind should be actually. + +You try to get back your focus and are finding it difficult. What are you supposed to do now? Throw everything away just for a one night with a woman? Even if she is an Eternal and you could reconcile yourself with being a traitor, you don’t fit in with the shadows and you never will. You’ve done too much to go back and the shadows are doomed at this point anyway. + +No, the Emperor and the Empire need you, and that’s who your life is dedicated to, nobody else. + +You spend the remainder of the journey cloaked and sticking to the less populated parts of the Felkan kingdom, though you eventually reach the capital and sneak over the walls of the city. Fortunately night is falling by that time. While you’re still struggling with your own dilemmas you do take the time to notice how much different the Felkan society is. A lot less soldiers first of all, though their soldiers all carry gunpowder based weapons in addition to their normal weapons. In fact their whole society is slightly more technologically advanced than the Empire, but that won’t mean anything compared to the sheer might of the Empire when they bring their full force to bear down on the Felkans. You hope that you’ll perhaps be part of that after crushing the shadows. + +Eventually the five of you are just outside the palace walls of where you presume the king is located. It is here where Dusk addresses the group again. + +“You all know the plan, get in, cause some havoc, don’t kill the king and get the hell out. Still, I think we’ll do a better job with the last part if we’re not all bunched up as a group. I want some of us to go to the other side of the palace and start from that side, the soldiers and guards will be less likely to gang up on all of us that way. I’d say about thirty to forty five minutes should do it and afterwards, we’ll meet up at that wood where we made camp yesterday, then we’ll continue the rest of the journey back to Gloom from there. Now I just need someone to volunteer to come with me and the rest of you can scale the palace wall here.” + +Well it looks like your original plan of trying to split up the group is going to come true after all, the question is do you want to take care of Dusk first or whoever decides to be on the second team? +> Stay silent +Dusk could pick you anyway, so there really isn't any need to volunteer. You're still going to have to find the king, kill him and the rest of the shadows regardless of who you're "working" with. + +Dusk ends up picking Talia and tells you, Bianca, and Murk to wait five minutes before scaling the wall after they leave to head to the other side. She then tells you she trusts you to use your best judgment on things. Killing Bianca and Murk should be too hard without Dusk or Talia here, the pair of their combat skills are nowhere near your own. The hard part will be tracking down the king. + +Within the five minutes you wait, you see Murk fail to impress Bianca as usual with his wooing attempts. You can't believe he'd waste his time on the eve of such of an important mission. As you see him fail for the umpteenth you have no idea why you ever considered him your "friend." He's an idiot even in the hierarchy of the shadows. + +"Why the hell did they even pick him?" you wonder. + +Maybe it's a lot of built up rage, hatred and other bad thoughts you've been keeping under wraps for years, but you can't help but continue to feel disgust for Murk. + +"Okay, I think about five minutes have passed. We should get going." Murk suggests. +"Might as well, I'm not here to watch you bumble around all night trying to impress Bianca who obviously isn't interested in you and never will be." You say. + +There's a momentary silence and both Bianca and Murk give a look of surprise to the fact that you've said something so direct concerning their "relationship." + +"I…we…we'll speak on this later." Murk says and starts to cast his spider walk spell. +"No, we really won't." you reply and cast your speed spell. You raise your armbow and hit Bianca with a bolt to her throat. She falls helplessly attempting to gurgle a spell. Murk, sees this tries to cancel his current spell to match your speed, but he isn't fast enough. You draw two daggers and impale him several times with them before he even hits the ground. + +You think he tries to ask you "why?" before he dies, but you aren't really sure because you're too busy driving your daggers into his skull for the kill at the time. After dealing with Murk, you go over to finish off Bianca who is still attempting to struggle against death. + +"Let this be known before you die, the Emperor shall reign forever and your dying god will be forgotten like he should've been centuries ago!" you say and stab her in the heart. + +You feel as if you've just taken your first steps towards freedom at last with the deaths of Bianca and Murk. Two more to go, but first you need to find the Felkan king and finish off that part of your mission before an alarm is raised when Talia and Dawn start killing guards. You cast your spider walk spell and quickly scale the wall. + +When you get to the other side you're near a lot of carts with stacks of supplies on them. A quick look reveals that they're mostly sacks of food. You must be outside the royal kitchen or something. Sure enough you hear several voices coming from a nearby door which opens up. + +"Alright start hauling in those sacks of potatoes; we got enough space for them in here now." A chef says with several of his staff following outside. + +Well you weren't planning on massacring an entire kitchen staff, but you don't have the luxury of waiting around or looking for another quick entrance and using any more magic right now is going to start making you feel exhausted. You ready your blade. + +The hapless kitchen staff is naturally unable to fend against you. The head chef throws a cleaver at you, but that's about the closest any of them come to hitting you. By the time you're finished, the entryway looks like it's leading into a cannibal's kitchen rather than a royal one. A few of the staff made some yelps of pain when you killed them, so you quickly leave the area and hope you can find the king. + +You search about eight rooms before you start hearing yelling and the sounds of alarm. A lot of them mention guards being killed. Surprisingly you haven't even run into any guards yet, so you're guessing Talia and Dawn must be to blame. You curse since that means they're probably already on their way to making their escape and this place is going to be crawling with soldiers. Never mind the fact that the king is probably going to be actively hiding now. + +Against your desires, you cloak yourself and speed yourself up in an effort to help your search. You kill several soldiers during this time, but no king. You do manage to get a hold of a couple fancy dressed women that look like nobility or royalty. It doesn't take much to scare them, but they claim they don't know where the king is, and tell you he's probably already been moved from the palace. + +There is just no way you're going to be able to assassinate the king and kill Dawn and Talia in time. In fact at this point, you aren't even sure if you'd be able to kill the king seeing as you have no idea if he has left the palace, or if he's still in it. That isn't even the main problem, the main problem is your excessive magic use has left you incredibly fatigued. You feel like you're going to pass out at any moment. While you're struggling to stake awake and decide on what to do next, the Felkan soldiers finally pinpoint your location and begin coming in force. + +Were they attacking you with close combat weapons, you might've been able to fight them off. Were you more alert, you might've been able to dodge their bullets. As it stands neither of those possibilities exist and several soldiers fire their muskets at you. Hot lead hits you in the arm and the leg. When you fall and try to crawl away another blast hits you in the back. + +"I've…failed…forgive me…my Emper…or…" are your last words.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 21 + +“So do you think you’ll be going on the assassination mission?” Talia asks. +“I dunno, I think I’m still under watch for my past indiscretions.” You reply. +“Oh come on, even Master Ebon can’t believe you’re going to find some Felkan trollop to lay with while on your way to kill the king!” Murk laughs. + +You give a small chuckle and go back to poisoning your bolts. When Mr. Mol explained to you that the plan was going through, you wondered if you were going to be one the assassins. Mr. Mol said he was leaving it up to the Shadow Guard to pick “their best” as requesting you, might give you away especially given the mess you told him that followed with Shade. Mr. Mol congratulated you on how you handled that and as far as that event is concerned to the Shadow Guard, it’s still a mystery. His body was never found and it’s known he didn’t start a war with the Felkan Kingdom. The general consensus is he just left never to return due to his disagreement with Master Ebon. Brother Murk remarked on the irony that if he’d only waited a little longer, he could’ve been one of those sent to kill the Felkan King now. + +In any event you know the plan on both sides. As soon as the assassination mission is underway the Empire is going to start purging the shadow safehouses and all known dissidents before moving on to Gloom. From what you know, orc troops are going to be used liberally in this. Mr. Mol said it will thin out the ranks and put their restlessness more at ease. He also mentioned that he’s going to be sending in some of your former classmates as well. Your mission will differ depending on where the Shadow Guard send you. If you’re going on the assassination, then you’ll carry that out, but it will also be you job to eliminate all the rest of the shadows with you. If you’re left at home, then it’ll be your job to start sabotaging Gloom and taking out any shadow that gets in your way in the process. Mr. Mol mentions that some allies that owe the Empire a favor will be taking down the brunt of Gloom. + +Master Ebon has decided to make the move when the Felkan War is in full swing. Fortunately their plan to destabilize Rask was abandoned as all shadows were “suddenly” transferred out of there by decree of the Emperor. The Shadow Guard’s plan won’t even get off the ground if all goes well, at best, there will be a few major battles and then the hunting of escapees. + +Everything should go well for the Empire. The only perpetual pain is Cyrus. He’s only gotten more hostile since the Shade incident and even more so when he found out he wasn’t being sent to Rask. He claimed it was your fault and the pair of you had to be separated. He didn’t make any more accusations further than that, but he knows something is going on. You’re guessing he’ll probably be one of those on assassination mission. If he’s not around and you’re left behind, it’ll make your job a whole lot easier without the possibility of him spying on you. + +Then again if you’re both on the mission, it’ll give you an excellent chance to kill him, because at this point you want to as much as he probably wants to kill you and that idea certainly appeals to you. Later that day you pay a visit to Brother Gray. + +“Can I help you brother?” he says looking up from his desk. +“Brother Gray, I know you’re still disappointed with my indiscretions, but I would like to prove myself that I am dedicated to Dendrin’s laws and commandments and I feel the best way to do that is to be on the assassination mission. I’ve even been practicing my shadow magic and while it isn’t as strong as say Sister Talia’s, I’m confident that it will be sufficient for the mission.” +“Hmmm, well you were being considered, but you were still on the fence as it were. As for me being disappointed, you shouldn’t have been concerned with that, so much as you should’ve been concerned with offending Dendrin. However, if it puts you at ease, I ceased being disappointed a while ago. I’ve noticed that you’ve been more focused lately, so I know you’re trying to atone for your actions. It’s mainly why I was considering you for the mission. As for your skills, I’m still baffled to as why your magic abilities aren’t as strong as they should be, but I suppose your combat abilities make up for it and I think you’d be more than suitable for the mission in that regard, but I’m a little more concerned with sending you on any mission with Brother Cyrus since he is being considered as well. I’d rather not risk jeopardizing the mission, so I need to leave one of you here.” + +It’s apparent that whether you stay here or go on the mission that you probably won’t be dealing with Cyrus, which is a little disappointing and a minor reason to as why you wanted to go on the assassination mission in the first place. + +“I understand brother and I accept your judgment.” You say humbly. +“Well I don’t have the final say, that honor belongs to Master Ebon and he ultimately answers to Dendrin as do we all. He will determine if you’re worthy or not, but I’ll see what I can do for you. So is that all brother?” +“Yes. I shall take my leave and return to my duties.” + +You leave Brother Gray’s office, shaking your head at it all. Not about the mission, but more about the fact that Brother Gray still believes very much in you. In fact other than Cyrus and perhaps Draven you still can’t believe how you’re so accepted here, it never seems real to you. You can’t be exactly sure, but you think Talia has been examining you as a potential mate. Especially after all that business of you sleeping with countless whores became public knowledge. You can only guess she figures you’ve got a lot of experience, well that and the only other Eternal around is gay. + +Even Master Ebon hasn’t doled out any harsher punishment on to you more than what he did during your false confession. If you were in his shoes, you would’ve had yourself executed for the slightest possibility that you were involved in Brother Shade’s disappearance. Strange that the shadows’ treacherous nature would be so blind to someone so close to bringing them down. + +Their deity Dendrin hasn’t spoken to you in any dreams lately, or for quite awhile actually. Perhaps he got tired of taunting you or whatever game he’s playing. Though +perhaps he’s lulling you into a false sense of security. You still always expect him to visit you any time you sleep. Of course maybe that’s part of his way of fucking with you as well. + +In any case, you return to your room and engage in your routine fake behavior of friendship. You’ll be so glad when this will be over, it sickens you when you actually start feeling like you’re actually friends with these traitors rather than crushing them under foot in the Emperor’s name. + +A couple days pass and you get called to Master Ebon’s office and when you get there, you also see Talia, Murk, Bianca and Dusk. He mentions that you’ve been chosen to go on the mission. He wasn’t sure at first, but after Brother Gray’s recommendation on your behalf and after consulting Dendrin for a sign, he says that you were chosen instead of Cyrus. He goes on to say he hopes that the pair of you straighten your feelings out soon, because there is going to be a great need for solidarity more than ever after this mission. + +Master Ebon also goes on to explain that Sister Dusk will be in charge of this mission and that you all will defer to her experience. Ebon brings up a bit of a change in the mission too, a change you’re not too pleased to hear. + +“We’re not assassinating the Felkan king. Dendrin showed me that our cause would be best served by deliberate incompetence.” +“What?” you ask out loud, feeling a very real sense of having heard this plan before a year ago. +“Killing the king would only throw the Felkans into disarray. We want them to be focused when they declare war on the Empire. Instead I want you to infiltrate the palace, kill a few guards and then get out as if it was a failed assassination attempt. This will definitely alert the Felkans to start beating their war drums and it hinders the Empire’s own plans. You all will be assumed dead by the Empire for obvious reasons, but in reality you will just return to us and will have to stay out of sight… which shouldn’t be too hard given our nature. When you do return, we shall put the final part of our plan in motion when the Felkans retaliate.” + +Maybe he’s not visiting you in your dreams anymore, but he’s definitely still fucking with you. Now you’ve got two things to take care of personally. You have to kill the shadow squad AND the king. + +Master Ebon tells you that the mission will be underway in the next few days and dismisses the lot of you. + +“Hey you got in after all!” Murk says after you leave the office. +“I’m glad, you certainly deserve it.” Talia adds with a smile. + +When you return to your barracks, a death glare comes from Cyrus and Draven doesn’t look too happy with you either. The pair of them immediately leave the room. You can only imagine that he’s super pissed because you’ve been chosen to go on the mission rather than him. You wouldn’t be surprised if he tried to kill you in your sleep tonight. + +Not that you’re going to get any sleep, since you’re going to be up all night trying to figure out how you’re going to pull off your additional assignment. + +The day soon arrives and everyone gathers in the assembly hall to see you off. Master Ebon makes a small speech. + +“Brothers and sisters of the shadow, today is truly the beginning of the end for the Empire. These five have been chosen by Dendrin to carry out his plan. May their mission be a success and may all of them get back safely so that they may help the rest of us continue the fight at home. And if they should fall, know that they fall for a worthy cause and will pass from this world to serve in Dendrin’s shadow realm forever and there is no greater honor.” + +“Death to the Empire! For Dendrin!” Master Ebon shouts and everyone else follows suit, then the five of you leave. + +The first part of the trip to the Arat province is fairly laid back and the usual friendly banter goes on during this time, though Sister Dusk is consistently telling the rest of you to knock it off as your minds should be more focused on this mission. You’ve never really had too much interaction with Dusk before, but it is apparent to as why she was Shade’s lover. She seems very much like him in some ways. + +Yes, this mission is starting to feel all too familiar. + +In between the party banter, you’ve been coming up with various potential plans. One plan involves continuing the mission and during the infiltration of the palace you’ll try to kill them or get them killed by the guards. This allows you to get inside the palace with their help and you’re still in a good position to try to kill the king, of course this also means you’re going to have to be quick if you want to kill everyone without anyone getting away. + +The other plan would be to try to convince Dusk to split up the group and meet up at the Felkan palace. This would allow you to pick off a few of them before you get to the palace and perhaps make it more manageable. The problem is you’re going to have to come up with a good excuse, not to mention you’ll be a few bodies short in case you do run into trouble with the Felkan soldiers. Never mind the fact you’re going to have to convince Dusk of this in the first place. +> Try to convince Dusk of your plan +Felkan soldiers aren't going to be a problem, but you need to get rid of Dusk and perhaps a few others before you get to the palace because you aren't going to have time to do it when you need to focus on assassinating the king. You approach Dusk as she stands away from the rest of the group examining the map. + +"Sister Dusk, why don't we split up and meet at the palace?" you ask. +"For what purpose, brother? It would be more efficient to just all go together." Dusk replies. +"If we run into major trouble during our journey in Felkan territory, it would be better if some of us still got to the palace in a timely manner. Besides a larger group will attract more attention." +"And neither of those things are going to be a problem since we'll be cloaked the whole time." +"Well how do we know the Felkans don't have something to prevent that? Wouldn't it be better to remain on the side of caution?" +"I think it would be better for you if you had more faith in Dendrin's protection and stopped speaking nonsense. I'm in charge and I'm telling you we're all going as a group. Besides I don't want all five of us running around separately, because as you say if we do run into trouble, we'd be stronger as a group." +"I didn't mean all five of us go separately, we could still be in groups. Like you and I go as one group and the other three go as another." +"You and I? Seems like you've thought this out." +"Despite Murk constantly failing to impress Bianca, they work very well together, so they should stay together and I assumed Talia would be the logical choice as a leader. Her skills are better than Bianca and Murk's so she could lead them. Granted my combat skills are probably better, my magic is not. I believe I would be better off with you where your magic and my combat abilities can complement each other. We're going to have to split up when we get to the palace anyway if our intent is to sow as much chaos as possible before escaping, better that we do it now before we get too comfortable with a larger group." + +Dusk still doesn't look entirely convinced, however she tells you to wait and she goes over to speak to the others. After a few moments of discussion, she turns back to you. + +"Okay, you might have a point. You'll come with me and we'll approach the Felkan capital Dessle from the north, Talia and the rest will approach it from the south. Neither of us are going to reach it today, but we'll definitely make it by tomorrow night where we can meet up and I'll relay the next course of action. Try to stick to the wilderness and non-populated areas until then. May Dendrin guide us all." + +Dusk and you set off, about five minutes in she states that she forgot to mention that the area Talia is suppose to be heading into is supposed to be have regular patrols, so she should be warned about that. You wait for Dusk to return pondering when the best time would be to kill her. Probably not until you a good ways into Felkan territory, maybe just before you get into Dessle. Eventually Dusk comes back and you're on your way again. + +Crossing into Felkan territory is very easy. The outposts aren’t nearly as well guarded as they should be and combined with sticking to the wilderness and using magic to cloak yourself it's incredibly simple. You eventually camp out in a secluded wood where Sister Dusk becomes more talkative. + +"We made pretty good time, with minimal problems. I guess you had a good idea. I suggest we both get some rest, tomorrow will be the big event." +"Yeah, hopefully the rest are doing just as well." You remark. +"Oh I wouldn't worry about them. I'm sure they're fine." + +Nodding in agreement, you decide this would probably be the best place as any to get rid of Dusk. You figure you'll pretend to go to sleep, wait until she's asleep and make your move. + +After waiting for about an hour, you finally get the impression she's asleep thanks to the sounds of snoring. Not very quiet for a shadow, but it helps you any way. You slowly get up and make your way towards her. + +Your blade is drawn and just before you strike, you feel a bolt go into your side. + +"Ah shit!" you cry out and fall to the ground. Another bolt goes into your leg and Dawn "wakes up". She wasn't the only one faking sleep it seems. + +"I knew it! I knew Brother Cyrus wasn't just ranting and I knew you probably were involved with killing my mate Shade. Filthy traitor!" Dusk exclaims, kicking you in the face. + +Talia, Murk and Bianca all come out from the underbrush. Dawn must've told them to follow you the whole time. They all look on in disappointment at you, but Talia especially. + +"I didn't want to believe it…how could you betray Dendrin like this? How long have you been a traitor?" Talia asks while reloading her armbow. +"Me a traitor? No, it is YOU who is the traitor! All of you! All of you have betrayed the Emperor for your pitiful god who cares nothing for you!" you shout in defiance. "I know this because Dendrin himself has spoken to me on several occasions trying to convert me to his will, but it didn't work." +"He does care, or else he would not have tried to bring you into the fold. How sad that you did not learn his wisdom and accept his mercy." Murk says. +"How sad that you actually believe that. You're more pathetic than he is. If he really cared for any of you, he would've warned you about having a so called traitor in your midst. He didn't, so that says a lot about your revered deity." +"Enough! I won't hear anymore of these vicious lies! Your treachery ends here today traitor." Dusk shouts back and attempts to finish you off with a sword blow, but you've got enough fight in you to roll out of the way and return with your own attack, hacking Dusk's foot off. + +It's a small victory though, the rest of the shadows move in and run you through several times. Defiant to the end you laugh and state that they've won nothing here and the Empire will survive as you die.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>His plan is going to mess everything up and reporting him probably will just result in him getting scolded and he’ll sneak off later anyway. You need to kill him. It’s part of your overall goal anyway. + +The next few days you spend mostly in the training room, trying to get yourself ready for what will probably be a grueling battle. Quite frankly if you do it right, you won’t have to fight him at all as you’re going to try to catch him completely with his guard down, but if that doesn’t work, you’re going to have a struggle on your hands and you need to be prepared. + +Brother Shade helped directly train your magic skills, so as usual you’re hoping your combat skills will be the deciding factor, but your major advantage will be the element of surprise. You make sure your blade is extra sharp and your arm crossbow is in good working condition. You fully expect Dendrin to harass you in your dreams, but that doesn’t happen. + +When the day finally arrives you and Brother Shade take your leave of Gloom and head to Venji. Brother Shade and yourself travel under the cloak most of the time, though up keeping such magic is tiring business, so you rest a few times on your way. During your time together, you find out more about Brother Shade’s thoughts. He goes on about how Master Ebon is not fit to speak for Dendrin anymore. Shade believes the old man isn’t even in contact with Dendrin anymore as Shade knows that Dendrin would not want to wait any longer for the shadows to live under Empire rule. Shade knows that Dendrin would want action to be taken right now and that only those that prove themselves to be proactive in these times will be rewarded when the dust finally settles. + +You can’t speak for Ebon, but from what you can tell, Shade doesn’t really know shit what Dendrin really wants. You don’t either, but then you aren’t one of his blind sheep that follows his orders. Still, it’s somewhat fascinating to see one of the shadows not fall completely in step with the rest. If Mr. Mol hadn’t suggested his idea, you probably would’ve gone through with Shade’s mission and try to sew a little more dissension on both sides to flame the fans of a shadow civil war. As it stands though, he needs to die, but you’re still trying to build yourself up to do it. You have no idea why either, you’ve had the opportunity a few times and you’re far enough away from civilization since you’ve been sticking to the back roads. + +Eventually the humble village of Venji is in sight, and you’re going to have to kill Shade soon. You think you’re going to pass the village, but Shade starts heading towards it. + +“We’re not actually entering it are we? So far we’ve managed to stay out of sight.” +“And we’ll continue to do so, I can maintain the cloak, but if you’re feeling weak you stay here. I’ll be back soon anyway.” +“But why are you going into the village?” +“Because there’s bound to be a couple of Empire soldiers stationed there. We’re going to need a couple of disguises.” +“You’re going to kill Empire soldiers?” +“Yes, and why is that a problem?” + +It’s not. Actually it’s a perfect excuse for you. + +“No, I just didn’t know the entire plan. I guess I’ll wait here I am feeling a little drained from the magic and I wouldn’t want to jeopardize the mission.” You answer. + +Brother Shade grunts and turns his back to you, and just before he cloaks again, you raise your arm and fire your crossbow at him. Your aim is true and the bolt lands directly into the back of his skull. He’s dead even before he falls face first into the ground . + +It’s done and it was so quick. He didn’t suspect anything or even see it coming. Now you’ve got to get rid of the body and think up a story. Nobody saw you leaving together, you made sure of that, but you’ve both been gone awhile. You figure you’ll think of something on your way back to Gloom. + +You strip Shade of his robe, weapons, then you cut off his head and dig a small hole to toss it into along with his robe and weapons. You figure nobody is going to recognize him now and that’s not even counting the wolves or other wandering animals that will probably find the body to feast on first. + +When you finally get back, you get several people asking you where you’ve been. + +“Where in Dendrin’s name have you been? You just left without reporting to Brother Gray for assignment!” Brother Murk exclaims. +“I was doing my usual patrols in the Quala province. I didn’t think I was being switched from them any time soon, so I just left. Was it a problem?” +“Well sort of, Brother Shade is missing as well, you weren’t with him were you?” +“No, I wasn’t, I haven’t seen him since I left Gloom a couple days ago either.” +“Okay, well you’re going to need to explain that to Master Ebon, he believes Brother Shade went and did something rash.” +“Oh? Like what?” +“Like defying Master Ebon and the will of Dendrin. Anyway, you better hurry to Master Ebon’s office.” + +You do as Murk suggests. You just hope you can convince him as easily. + +You enter Master Ebon’s office and see him, Brother Gray AND Cyrus. You can guess what the first two are doing here, but you don’t know why Cyrus would. He’s giving you a dirty look from underneath his hood as usual. + +“At last, we can get to the bottom of this.” Brother Gray remarks. +“I certainly hope so, because there are some serious allegations going on and conspiracy in the air.” Master Ebon says while looking at you. +“I’m telling you I saw the pair of them together several times and the day they both left, he made sure to leave several minutes after Brother Shade.” Cyrus remarks. + +And there it is. Cyrus is on to you, well maybe not entirely, but apparently he was skulking around spying on you when you thought nobody was looking. And here you were thinking he was on assignment or with his boyfriend most of the time. + +“So what if I left several minutes after Brother Shade? What does that prove? Am I supposed to wait hours? A day? What would be enough time for you? And what’s this all about anyway? What did Brother Shade do?” +“Oh like you don’t know.” +“Brother Cyrus, quiet!” Master Ebon says before continuing. “And to answer your question, I’m sure you’re aware of Brother Shade’s recent behavior and his desire to move things along as far as our plan goes. He approached me not too long ago, about starting a war with the Felkan Kingdom, I told him no and he got very angry. Then he disappears for a few days when I specifically told him to stay here and concentrate on his prayers to Dendrin. We believe he’s gone and tried to do this himself. You being gone without reporting to Brother Gray wouldn’t normally be held to such scrutiny, but Cyrus here has said he’s seen you speaking with Brother Shade several times before his disappearance.” +“So I shouldn’t have spoken to him? I can’t be the only one that spoke to him before he disappeared.” +“Yes, but you are the only one that left without reporting to Brother Gray first, not to mention up until then I’ve been told that you and he never interacted much. All of this seems very suspicious and it grieves me something like this is being brought to me, especially when so much is at stake right now.” + +You’re trying to remain as calm as possible, but the pressure is on. Cyrus looks on with a faint smug expression like he’s anxious to see you get into trouble. You need to come up with an explanation and you aren’t sure if outright lying is going to help you. Maybe you should tell them the truth…up to a point of course. +> Tell them the altered truth +Blatant lying tends to complicate things and if you're caught, it's only going to make you look worse. You might be better off telling the truth and omitting part of it. + +"Alright, alright, I'll tell you the truth, but I was only trying to protect Brother Shade's memory…and I was ashamed." +"What are you talking about brother?" Master Ebon asks. +"(Sigh) Brother Shade did speak with me, but he was mainly complaining. Stating that you didn't really know the will of Dendrin at all and action needed to be taken now regardless of what you said. At first I thought he was just spouting his usual rants, but the last time we spoke he wanted me to go with him to attack a Felkan outpost. The plan was to kill everyone there except one maimed survivor to tell the tale. He hoped that would bring war quicker and you'd have no choice, but to act on the plan." +"Why didn't you report this?" Brother Gray snaps. +"I told you, I didn't want Brother Shade to get into trouble just for having a momentary lapse in judgment and I thought I could talk him out of it. So I followed him and I caught up to him I tried to convince him his plan was folly. I failed and when I tried to physically stop him, he beat me and warned if I tried again he'd kill me. Fearing for my life I ran. That was the last I saw him." + +Master Ebon is silent and puts his face in his hands. Brother Gray gives a look of disapproval and shakes his head. Cyrus on the other hand takes the opportunity to question you. + +"You really expect us to believe your lies? You probably agreed to the plan, got scared and tried to back out of it. You killed Brother Shade and made up this story to…" +"Brother Cyrus that's enough! You are not the one doing the interrogating here! Know your place in Dendrin's shadow! There has obviously been too much of people overstepping their bounds lately and you'd do well to not follow that same path. In fact, you need to leave. Brother Gray and I will handle it from here." + +Cyrus looks a bit put off by this order, but obeys. He gives a dirty look at you before leaving though. You're left standing in front of Master Ebon and Brother Gray. + +"Brother, do you realize what sort of position you've put us in?" +"I realize it's bad, but…" +"No, you don't! All of our plans could be ruined because YOU didn't report this like you should have! For all we know Brother Shade has completed his rash mission and the war will be occur too soon!" +"And that's the best case scenario." Brother Gray adds. "Brother Cyrus' theory, though accusatory, does make me question if what you're saying IS the entire truth." +"It is! I swear to Dendrin!" +"Perhaps, but due to your deeds, a punishment still must be decided…I believe the silence of the shadow will do since you prefer to remain quiet. When your tongue is removed, I believe you shall forever know the price of your failure. Brother Gray please escort…" + +You aren't about to let yourself be mutilated by these religious fanatics, you draw your weapon, but Master Ebon mumbles a few words and you're held in place. + +"Brother, cease your hostility NOW! You will submit to this punishment or you will face much worse!" Brother Gray shouts. +"Never! I'll never submit to you! The Empire will live forever and your order will be ground into dust! Long live the Emperor!" you shout breaking all pretense of your allegiance, which causes a look of surprise from Brother Gray's face. Master Ebon however just shuts his eyes. + +"Dendrin will preserve us through this unforeseen hardship, and we will prevail, just as he has said we would centuries ago. Your actions will not stop what cannot be stopped." Master Ebon says calmly and with a few quietly spoken words, your heart stops killing you instantly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Chapter 2B1: The Emperor’s Shadow + + +Year 20 + +“So you say, Brother Cyrus and Brother Draven are going to be assigned to Rask soon?” you ask. +“That’s what I’ve heard from Brother Gray. Them and a few others. Next year at the latest.” Murk says +“What’s the reason, from what I’ve heard it doesn’t seem like the Empire has a good grip on Rask anyway.” +“Well that’s sort of the point! By weakening the areas where the power isn’t as strong it causes the Empire to divert resources from other places and making those much easier to bring down as well. We’re going to need it too, Master Ebon was sure the Empire would’ve started another war with the Felkan Kingdom by now, but as it stands they’re practically friends with them, well as much as the Empire can be. Oh well there’s still time I suppose.” +“We don’t have that much time, we should push things along in our favor with some international incidents.” Brother Shade says. “In fact, I’m going to mention that to Master Ebon next time I see him.” +“You don’t think that he hasn’t already thought of such a plan?” Talia asks. +“Perhaps, but let’s just say I’ve been here a little longer than the rest of you, and while I know Master Ebon is just waiting for the right time to strike, he’s been playing the waiting game a little longer than I think is necessary. In fact I think he’s been playing it so long that maybe his vision has become clouded from certain opportunities.” + +This statement from Brother Shade gets a lot of looks, but nobody says anything. The shock is too great. Even you are surprised as this is the first time you believe you’ve heard something close to an open criticism about Master Ebon or the leadership structure in general + +And that’s something you can definitely use. + +Soon after his statement Brother Shade leaves to attend his duties. + +“Brother Shade should watch how he talks about Master Ebon. Ebon speaks directly to Dendrin on a daily basis and knows best on how to proceed.” Murk remarks. +“Then why did you not speak up, instead of just sitting there?” Sister Bianca asks. +“Uh…well…” +“Always trying to impress the ladies, eh Murk?” you chuckle and take your leave as well to go seek out Brother Shade, he hasn’t gone far and you catch up with him in the hallway. Fortunately nobody else is around. When you get his attention he’s not exactly cordial. + +“Oh it’s you, what do you want, I have duties to attend to brother.” +“Nothing excessively important brother, I just wanted to say you aren’t alone.” +“Aren’t alone in what?” Shade asks. +“You aren’t alone in how you feel. I think we should strike against the Empire now as well. All this waiting around isn’t helping our cause.” +“Well I suggest if you want to help our cause, you keep your feelings to yourself brother and focus on your responsibilities…and your magic skills.” +“But brother, you said…” +“Nevermind what I said! I spoke in haste to a bunch of snot nosed shadows that barely know what it truly means to serve Dendrin. Now leave me be!” + +Shade at this point pushes you aside and walks off. Well that didn’t go like you hoped; still, you can report this to Mr. Mol who you have to meet in a few days anyway. + +When you meet Mr. Mol at the usual spot, you tell him everything you know as usual. + +“So, planning to destabilize Rask, eh? Well I’ll see what we can do about that…tell me have you heard any plots involving orcs?” Mr. Mol asks. +“Mmm, I don’t believe I have. I would’ve told you.” +“Okay then, maybe it’s not related, but some of our orcish troops have been getting restless lately, mostly those stationed in Rask too. If we had proceeded with our invasion of the Felkan Kingdom like we wanted, we could’ve thinned out their ranks a little. As much as we need them in the far northern reaches of Rask right now, I fear that having them all in a large group is asking for trouble. I guess we’ll transfer some to Nalin, I hear they’re having problems with the usksha nomads and kobolds down there. Speaking of the Felkan Kingdom tell me about this plot to start a war with them.” +“There isn’t one, so much as there have been suggestions to do so by a Brother Shade.” +“Ohhh, dissention in the order. I like it. So is this guy losing his faith or something?” +“I do not believe its that more so that he feels Master Ebon is being too cautious. He wants to strike now and he knows that Ebon’s plan hinged on the Empire being distracted with the Felkan Kingdom, so he suggested starting one ourselves in passing, though when I approached him about how I agreed that we were being too cautious, he told me to not speak of it again and to leave him alone.” +“We can still possibly use this. The fact that he mentioned it says that he’s thinking about it, even if he himself isn’t totally committed to the idea. Try to speak to him some more on the subject of starting a war with the Felkan Kingdom.” +“But if he does want to go through with the plan, won’t starting a war with the Felkan Kingdom be exactly what they want?” +“Well, it’s a gamble to be sure, but quite frankly we were going to invade the Felkan Kingdom again anyway, but…ha ha I got it.” Mr. Mol says with a big grin on his face. + +“Okay forget what I told you about speaking with Shade, I’ve just gotten a better idea. I’m going to have to discuss this with a few others and the order is going to have to come from the Emperor himself, but I’m pretty sure he’ll agree to this.” +“What the plan?” +“I think we should send several Shadow Guard into Felkan territory to assassinate their king and other high ranking officials. We should even demand the best. This will occupy some of the shadows and hopefully this puts the Felkans in a state of chaos as well. While this operation is taking place, I doubt the remaining shadows will act just yet with several of their best fellows gone. In the meantime, we can start wiping out those safe houses and dissident hideouts you’ve been giving us the locations to over the years. This will no doubt alert what remains of the shadows that we’re on to them at this point, but it won’t matter. Thanks to you, we also know the exact location of Gloom and let’s just say we’ve got some allies that can help us with that underground fortress.” +“That sounds like a good plan.” +“Thanks, just thought of it, but like I said, I need to speak with a few others first. As usual I’ll be in touch, but all you need to do for now is go about your usual duties within the Shadow Guard. You’ve done excellent work as usual.” + +Mr. Mol shakes your hand as you part ways and you feel a great sense of pride in your accomplishments. You also feel better that this charade may all come to an end soon and you’ll be free of masquerading as a shadow. + +When you get back to Gloom, Brother Shade suddenly surprises you on your way back to your bunk. + +“Hey you, where have you been?” he demands to know. You’re so taken by surprise; all you do is stumble over your words. +“Uh…well…” +“Uh huh. Probably slacking with some cheap tart as usual. I know you sneak off sometimes to the nearby villages. I know you’re young and full of hormones, but you know very well that making yourself unclean with non-shadows is frowned upon.” +“I…I’m sorry, Brother Shade.” You say. +“Well you can ask for Dendrin’s forgiveness in your prayers later, right now I want to discuss something with you. Come with me.” + +You follow Brother Shade through the winding halls of Gloom until you eventually reach a small empty storage room. After doing a quick perusal, closing the door and casting a cloak of shadows spell, he speaks to you again. + +“Okay, it’s safe to speak. You and me are going to start a war with the Felkan Kingdom.” +“What…you spoke to Master Ebon, about this?” +“Yes, and the old fool is too set in his ways just as I thought he would be. Says it’s too risky. Bullshit. What better time than now?” +“Well I suppose, but…uh…just us?” you say in an attempt to stall. +“As far as I know you’re the only one who feels we need to do something now and I can’t wait around and investigate if others feel like you do. Besides we can easily do this. I know your shadow magic is weak, but your fighting skills are excellent.” + +You didn’t expect this. + +“Okay, so just us…sure. Dendrin shrouds us in protective darkness right? We can easily assassinate the Felkan king…” +“Hold on there brother. Now we’re just starting a war, not destabilizing the government. Well, not their government anyway. Heading deep into Felkan territory to kill their leader isn’t necessary and will just serve to waste time. No, we just need to go in, make a statement and get out. Maybe take out a large portion of one of their outposts and leave a maimed survivor to tell the tale.” + +Sounds like Brother Shade has already planned this out. The problem is his plan doesn’t exactly fit your own. Mr. Mol wants to assassinate the Felkan King and possibly some other high ranking types. It’ll also bide a little time for him to get things in place. Brother Shade’s plan probably won’t throw the Felkan Kingdom into chaos, but will serve to anger them and that might distract the Empire too much if the Felkans are focused. Who could’ve thought starting a war would be so precise? + +In any event, you agree to Shade’s plan and he says the pair of you will head to the village of Venji in the Arat province near the Felkan border. From there, you’ll cross the Felkan border and infiltrate the nearest Felkan outpost to carry out the plan. When you ask about the others, Shade dismisses the consequences of his fellow shadows. He says when things have been set in motion they will have no choice but to accept the reality. He then mumbles about there possibly being some more changes before leaving. + +Of course you don’t want to carry out that plan, so you’re going to have to kill Brother Shade on the way. Not exactly an easy task, so you might try reporting him to Master Ebon or Brother Gray instead and try to have him taken care of using the shadow’s own code of conduct. +> Report Brother Shade +Killing him is just going to complicate things for you, better to be a good little shadow and go through the proper channels in this case. You immediately go see Brother Gray and state you need to see Master Ebon. + +"And why do you need to see him right now?" Brother Gray asks. +"It's about Brother Shade, I fear he's going to do something rash that could ruin everything the shadows have worked so hard for." +"What is it?" + +You explain Brother Shade's plan in its entirety and how you pretended to go along with it so he wouldn't suddenly run away or attempt to attack you. + +"This is a very serious accusation, but…(sigh) not really all that surprising given his behavior lately. Before we take this to Master Ebon, I'm curious to as why he approached you of all people to help him. I don't believe hearing him ever saying a good word about you, so picking you is a bit puzzling to me. Is there something you should tell me?" +"Well…I'm sort of embarrassed, but Brother Shade knew that I saw a few uh…women of low moral fiber during some of my patrols and threatened to report me, if I didn't help him." +"(Sigh) Well…I'm glad you at least had the sense to come clean in the face of a greater threat. I'll keep this from Master Ebon, but we're going to have a serious talk about your own indiscretions later! As for Brother Shade do you know where he is now?" +"I believe he's in his room getting his stuff prepared for the mission." +"Okay, I'm going to send some brothers outside his room to make sure he doesn't leave while I go fetch Master Ebon. If Brother Shade even tries to escape instead of staying put, well that's going to prove his guilt, though I'm hoping it won't come to that and he'll at least stay put and submit the proper punishment that Master Ebon deems necessary." +"What should I do?" you ask. +"You, go back to your own room and stay there until you're called for to tell your story in front of Master Ebon and Brother Shade." + +You nod and head back to your bunk. Nobody is there though; they must be on their patrols. You wait a few minutes expecting Brother Gray or someone else to come get you to come confirm your story in front of Master Ebon or whoever, but nobody does. You do however begin to hear the sounds of fighting though in the halls. + +"Wonderful, they can't even hold their own defectors in place." You mutter and draw your weapon. You then cast cloak on yourself and hide in one of the corners of the room with your eyes on the doorway at all times. Eventually someone enters the room, but it's not Shade, its Murk. + +"Hey brother, are you in here? I just came back from patrol and heard Brother Shade is running amok through Gloom! What's going on?" +"Shhh! Quiet you idiot! He's…" + +Before you can even complete that sentence, Murk is suddenly thrown face first into the floor. It would seem your instincts were right and he decided to get revenge rather than seek escape. You attempt to cast a decloak on Shade which works, but not in time for Murk to get his bearings. Shade smashes Murk's face into the floor. He may or may not have killed him, but in any event he's not going to be getting up to help you anytime soon. + +"You may have prevented me from serving Dendrin like the rest of these short sighted fools, but I guarantee that you will not live to see the fruits of your treachery." He says and attacks. + +You engage Shade in battle and the pair of you are fairly matched as far martial combat are concerned. The problems arise when Shade falls back on magic. He speeds himself up getting few good hits on you. You attempt to do the same thing and it helps, but you still are at a disadvantage. He matches every move you've got and has wounded you to the point where you're starting to doubt that you'll win this battle. You push yourself harder and hope your will to survive will win out. Eventually help comes in the form of several more shadows and Brother Gray. + +Several bolts go flying into Shade's back and he falls to the floor in a heap. You never thought you'd think this, but you're actually glad to see the shadows this time. + +"Brother are you alright?" Brother Gray asks. +"Yes, I think so (Whew) lemme catch my…ulk!" you utter and then you feel a bolt go through your heart. You look down long enough to see Shade's armbow stretched out and then the rest of his body become still for the final time. + +You soon follow him, unable to believe that your service to the Empire came to such an abrupt end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 18 + +“And so I said to the blacksmith, well if you’re intending on killing the Emperor, you better damn well have a better plan than those group of thugs you’ve been supplying with weapons in the sewers. At least supply them to some thugs who the Emperor wouldn’t be able to smell six miles away!” you say, and this is followed by a few laughs from some of your fellow shadows. +“Hah, good one brother! Tell me, what did you do to the blacksmith?” Brother Murk asks. +“Oh we relocated him to our safehouse in Derlerg along with his buddies, reported that we eliminated him as a dissident…you know the usual. I must say, their surprise that we aren’t going to kill them is always amusing though.” You reply. +“Yes, given our reputation, I imagine it is. Still, it’s all for a good cause eh, brother?” +“Yes brother, it certainly is.” You say to Murk with a nod and take another drink of black tea. +“Well I have to say I’m very glad you’ve finally managed to settle in brother, I have to admit, for awhile I was getting a little worried about you. You just didn’t seem like yourself after our ceremony initiation.” Talia says. +“Yeah, well I guess I was just a late bloomer or something.” +“Don’t worry about it brother, it’s all in the past. What matters now is that we’re all on the same page now.” Murk replies. + +On the same page…the problem is you really aren’t on the same page. You haven’t been since you got here. The other problem? You’re starting to feel like you might be getting there though. During the time you were forced to socialize you just swallowed your fear and self-doubt and proceeded like it was any mission. And you were successful. Perhaps a little too successful. + +Once you actually got sent out on a mission, you were paired up with Brother Murk. A fellow you had become semi-friendly with during your months of socializing. Your original plan was as soon as you left Gloom, you were going to run to the nearest Empire fort and make your report. + +Though for this plan to succeed in any meaningful way you would’ve had to kill Murk and despite your better judgment, you couldn’t bring yourself to do it. You later cursed yourself for this temporary weakness and the next time you were sent out, you vowed to yourself that you’d do it again, the problem was you had only become friendlier with Murk within that time. You failed again. + +By the time they rotated your partnership and you were paired you with someone else, you still couldn’t do it, because now you actually started to feel like the Shadow Guard really was like a family to you. And you liked that feeling. In fact it was the best you’ve felt in a long time. + +Yet, now you are in a difficult position. You are still loyal to the Empire and the Emperor first, but you haven’t been able to find the fortitude to expose the Shadow Guard for what they are. You attempt to rationalize it in your mind, by claiming the longer you stay the more you learn about their exact plans, and while that’s certainly true, it really isn’t the TRUTH. + +The real truth is you’re starting to believe in the Shadow Guard’s cause slightly. You don’t know if it’s because you’ve spent so much time here that you’ve developed some sort of emotional attachment or some odd sort of subtle indoctrination. + +Is this what Dendrin really had in store for you? Did he know you could be turned even without his intervention? Before you had that experience everything was so certain, your feelings weren’t a constant source of ups and downs. Even under Mistress, you don’t remember ever feeling this. It was either success or death. It was very simple and you preferred it. + +Now you don’t know what the hell you’re doing. Are you a traitor? Are you still loyal? Are you both? Are you neither? + +You excuse yourself from the rest of your brothers and sister and say you have to get some rest, though in reality you have to take a long look at your priorities. Once again you spend a few more months going through your usual routines and quietly suffering in silence. + +That comes to a halt when Murk comes into the barracks one day… + +“Hey, where are brother Cyrus and sister Talia?” he immediately asks you. +“Uh, sister Talia I think is in the library and brother Cyrus is probably with brother Draven somewhere.” You reply. +“Oh, well I’ll go get Talia, someone else can look for Cyrus, but you need to report to Master Ebon right away.” +“What’s this all about?” +“I don’t know, just that he wants you, Talia and Cyrus to see him. Something about someone from the Empire wanting to meet with all three of you. Sounds important.” + +You get up and walk to Master Ebon’s office which remains closed, so you wait. A few moments later, Talia joins you. + +“Hello, brother. Isn’t master Ebon here?” +“If he is, he isn’t answering his door, so I’ve been waiting outside.” +“Do you know what this is about?” +“Dunno, just that someone from the Empire wants to see us.” + +Talia nods and remains silent. Soon Cyrus joins you and asks a similar question, to which you answer in a similar manner. He grunts at you and stands as far from you as possible, though he says something polite to Talia. Same old Cyrus. + +No sooner has Cyrus got there, when Ebon’s door opens. You hear a voice that tells you to come in. You didn’t even think he was inside, but you guess he was really waiting to see you all together. When you all enter, he tell Cyrus to close the door and gets right to the point. + +“You three have been summoned by Mr. Mol. Apparently he wants to ask you a few questions and is insisting on doing it somewhere in the capital I believe. In any case, he claims he wants to check on your progress as an Eternal, but I suspect he’s fishing for information about us.” +“You don’t think he suspects anything do you?” Talia asks. +“I do not believe he knows anything about our true goals, if he or anyone did, I have no doubt we would’ve been moved upon by now. No, I think this is just another Empire ploy to try to get more inside intel on our organization, which for the reasons I just mentioned they cannot know about.” +“I won’t say a word to this running dog of the Empire! My eyes have been open a long time and my loyalty is and will always be to Dendrin.” Cyrus says. + +Master Ebon nods. “Yes, I know it will be. I have no doubt, but I still would like you all to just be on your guard when answering questions none the less. It probably won’t come to this, but kill yourselves if you have to. It won’t be ideal, since it’ll arouse suspicion, but it’ll still give us time to go ahead with our plan anyway, even if it would be a few years early. Anyway, the three of you are to make your way to the town of Lenet and from there you’ll take an Empire carriage to the capital. Return immediately if you are able. May Dendrin and the shadows hide your true intentions.” + +With those last words, Ebon sends you away and the three of you set off on your journey. You begin to feel nervous as soon as you leave Gloom, you weren’t expecting this happening, but deep down you did know that something like it was going to happen eventually. You remain mostly quiet during the journey as you try to get in a certain frame of mind of what you’re going to do or say. Cyrus is mostly silent as well, though you’re guessing that’s because he’s so firmly entrenched in his belief in Dendrin, that he knows what he’s going to say and do. + +Talia is the only talkative one and that’s mainly questions about what you both think Mr. Mol will ask you. You know she’s dedicated herself to Dendrin, but you sense that perhaps she’s a little nervous too, though you don’t know if it’s due to her new loyalty to Dendrin or because she’s been harboring secret loyalty to the Empire like you have. You decide to imagine it’s the latter, mainly because you want to make yourself feel better. + +Eventually the carriage from Lenet reaches Qale, the Empire’s capital and several soldiers immediately step forward to say they are here to escort you to Mr. Mol. The three of you are taken from the opulence of one of the main streets and quickly through a system of back alleys until you eventually reach a non-descript building. You enter and there you see Mr. Mol. It’s the well dressed man you saw speaking to Brother Gray six years ago. He’s also wearing the same formal black suit he was back then. + +“Ah, the Shadow Eternals. I’ve so wanted to catch up with your progress, but my attention was on your less subtle peers for a while. I think we’ve sorted them out though, so now it’s time to sort you out as well. Just a formality really, we just want to see if you’re achieving your full potential in the Shadow Guard. After all you’re Eternals first, and we wouldn’t want your talents to not be used to their fullest potential in the service of the Emperor, right?” + +Cyrus and Talia say nothing, but you feel obligated to acknowledge that question if only to not look suspicious. + +“Correct. All that we are, we owe to the Emperor’s will.” you say. +“Glad to hear it! Now then we’re just going to be asking you some questions, these soldiers will take you to a place to wait. Off you go.” + +At this point the three of are marched out of the room and down a long hallway. The cold broken stone walls and desolation of this place almost makes Gloom look cheery by comparison. Eventually you reach a door on your left and Cyrus is told to wait inside the room. He enters without a word, but gives you and Talia a look like “Say nothing!” + +A few moments later you reach another door on the left, this time Talia is told to wait inside. She hesitates for a moment, but enters. She gives you a look as well, though this one is more of concern. + +Finally you reach the last door on the left and you are told to enter and wait. You do so without looking at anyone. The door shuts behind you and the ominous sound of a lock is heard. + +There isn’t much you can do, so you sit down at one of the chairs in the middle of the room and wait. + +And wait…and wait…and wait…and wait… + +You don’t know how much time has passed, but you get up and move about several times before sitting down again. You don’t quite panic as much as you think you would, but being alone with your thoughts is definitely not the best thing for you. Right now you’re already thinking they’ve managed to break Talia into talking and probably killed Cyrus. + +Maybe if you cooperate right now, there will be leniency? Why shouldn’t you cooperate? The Shadow Guard ARE traitors after all, and this is just the kick in the ass you needed to remind you of that. + +But then there’s the other part of you that feels loyal to the shadows and how you shouldn’t betray them. You go back and forth what you’re going to do several times, and then you hear the lock on the door. Mr. Mol enters… +> Keep quiet +You’re fooling yourself. You’ve only been struggling with your loyalty issues because you were brought up to obey the Emperor and serve the Empire. + +But really what have you learned since then? You’ve learned that a great majority of it is all lies. True, the Shadow Guard has their own agenda, but it isn’t just based on following their god, it’s actively trying to free others under the tyranny of the Empire. And are they seeking to take the place of the Empire? No, they’re just going to return to Derlerg and return to how their lives used to be, before the Empire arrived, everyone else is free to do as they please. + +Is that something you really need to fight against? People that want to bring freedom to not just themselves, but to others as well? Dendrin said that he didn’t believe you were going to serve him and you were just saying you were to survive. He also said you weren’t as rigid as your fellows. He’s right on both accounts. You don’t think that you’ll ever be a true shadow, but perhaps you agree with their goals at least in this case. Besides, you’ve bonded more with the people at Gloom who have actively helped you in the past than you have with a faceless Emperor who you haven’t even seen let alone gotten any help from. If anything the Empire has nearly tried to kill you since the moment you were born. + +You make your choice within that moment. You’re going to remain quiet and not tell Mr. Mol anything, but if you get accused you doubt if you’ll kill yourself, you’re more likely to make a valiant escape attempt instead. + +Mr. Mol sits down and begins his line of questioning. + +“So how are you today?” he asks. +“I’m fine.” +“And how are your duties going in the Shadow Guard?” +“Fine sir. The rooting out of dissidents and traitors to the Empire is a tireless one, sir.” +“Yes, it is…” Mr. Mol says with a pause. “Tell me, are there times when you have found someone not guilty?” +“Never sir.” +“Never? Really? Surely not all your searches come up with violent dissidents. Perhaps some of the citizens are merely just speaking harmless nonsense?” +“If they are, then they would’ve been wise to keep their mouth shut sir. The Emperor is not to be criticized and his will is what guides the greatness of the Empire.” +“I see…” Mr. Mol says and takes some notes. + +“Tell me, what do you think of the Shadow Guard?” +“They are the hands of the Emperor, sir.” +“His hands huh? That implies they are so important that the Emperor cannot do without them.” +“Not at all sir. The hands are nothing compared to the mind that controls it. The Emperor is the mind that controls the hands. They are nothing without his direction and guidance. This is known and accepted as it has been from the beginning. But I am not truly a Shadow Guard, I am an Eternal. My duty is and will always be to the Emperor first. If you order me to abandon the Shadow Guard because you feel my talents would be better served elsewhere, I shall do so.” +“Hmm, no I do not think that’s necessary.” + +Mr. Mol asks you a few more questions and you answer in the best way you can. All in all Mr. Mol seems almost bored by your answers, like he was hoping to hear something much more exciting. You’re not sorry to disappoint him, but you’re definitely trying your hardest to maintain a cool demeanor in the face of certain treason if he suspects the slightest lie. + +Eventually he finishes and you are lead out of the room and back into the main room where you see Cyrus and Talia waiting with the soldiers. + +“Okay I believe we are done here. I am pleased to find that all of you are obviously living up to your potential. I was a little concerned only because a couple of your non-shadow Eternals already have proven to lack the discipline we thought they had. One was executed for killing his superior officer and another one died by breaking a solid fighting formation during a battle. I’m glad to see all of you are much better in that regard and I can only chalk that up to the Shadow Guard’s superior training techniques. Perhaps more Eternals in the future will join as it is obvious you all have tremendous willpower and great loyalty to the Empire.” Mr. Mol says. + +And with that, the three of you are lead back to the carriage, which takes you back to Lenet, and from there you walk back to Gloom. You’re all more talkative at this point, Talia and Cyrus go on about the questions with each other and you. Of course you lie and state you were asked similar ones. + +“So do you think he suspected anything?” Talia asks. +“Doubt it. The Empire fool didn’t even ask anything remotely important. It is obvious Dendrin’s shadow covers his eyes from the truth. So much so that it required minimum effort on our part to even lie to him. I mostly just omitted truth.” Cyrus mocks. +“Omissions of the truth are usually better than outright lies anyway. Less of a chance to get caught up in a web.” Talia comments. +“Oh I dunno, all I did was lie and he never suspected a thing.” You say. + +After the three of you report to Master Ebon, he seems pleased with how things turned out, but states that he’s pushing to enact the plan sooner for concern that the Empire may still suspect something. He then says to expect things to get hectic soon, but with Dendrin’s guidance you all will surely prevail and the Empire will collapse. + +You retire to your bed to get some rest as it’s been a long stressful day. You’re finally glad to have settled your crisis of loyalty though. With these comforting thoughts you drift off to sleep… + +As you sleep you begin to dream. You dream that you’re in the same void like space when you walked into that portal two years ago. You feel nothing and you sense nothing for a long time then you hear the voice, but it isn’t oppressive like the first time. + +“So you did not betray me after all…I am a little surprised mortal. Perhaps you see after all.” +“I see that the Empire is indeed a corrupt system that needs to be brought down, but I don’t feel the need to worship you.” +“It is a start, but know that this path you take now will be very dangerous. As strong as you are your survival is not guaranteed. It shall be interesting to see you try however.” + +With those last words, you wake up. You try to go back to sleep, but it isn’t easy. Just like bringing down the Empire isn’t going to be easy. You just can’t figure out why Dendrin, doesn’t take a more active role in helping his followers. He obviously has the power, but you don’t know. The best you can do is what you can achieve in the mortal realm and leave the motivations of any gods out of the picture. +> Years pass... +Chapter 2B2: Dendrin’s Shadow + + +Year 20 + +“So Brother Cyrus and Brother Draven are going to be assigned to Rask soon?” you ask. +“That’s what I’ve heard from Brother Gray. Them and a few others. Next year at the latest.” Murk says +“Good idea, from what I've heard the Empire is always having problems with that area, though I think they'll start having problems in other areas too soon now that they're officially at war with the Felkan Kingdom." +"Personally I don't think we should be waiting around now, we should push things along even more.” Brother Shade says. “In fact, I’m going to mention that to Master Ebon next time I see him.” +“You don’t think that he hasn’t already thought of such a plan?” Talia asks. +“Perhaps, but let’s just say I’ve been here a little longer than the rest of you, and while I know Master Ebon is just waiting for the right time to strike, he’s been playing the waiting game a little longer than I think is necessary.” + +This statement from Brother Shade gets a lot of looks, but nobody says anything. Even you are surprised as this is the first time you believe you’ve heard something close to an open criticism about Master Ebon or the leadership structure in general. + +Soon after his statement Brother Shade leaves to attend his duties. + +“Brother Shade should watch how he talks about Master Ebon. Ebon speaks directly to Dendrin on a daily basis and knows best on how to proceed.” Murk remarks. +“Then why did you not speak up, instead of just sitting there?” Sister Bianca asks. +“Uh…well…” +“Always trying to impress the ladies, eh Murk?” you chuckle and take your leave to go about your duties as well. + +Later that night you fall asleep and have an encounter with someone you don't want to interact with unless you have to… + +"So I see you’re fitting in well after all. Glad to see it seeing as you still don't particularly hold a lot of faith in my help. You are a most puzzling creature Eternal." Dendrin says. +"For someone with god powers, you aren't very omniscient. As I said, I joined the Shadow Guard's cause because it’s the best chance to bring down the Empire. Master Ebon is the leader and whether he's getting reliable guidance from you or not is irrelevant, he's who I'm following not you.” +"Interesting, so you've just exchanged one Emperor for another." +"No, for one I actually have interacted with Master Ebon and understand his motivations and goals better. As far as I know about the Emperor and the Empire, they're just into power for power's sake. And what do you care? I'm following Ebon and he follows you, so shouldn't you be happy?" + +At this point a low chortle pierces your brain. + +"Perhaps I am. Perhaps I am. As always I enjoy our little talks Eternal." + +Sometime later you wake up from your sleep, still wondering what the hell Dendrin's game is. + +Year 21 + +"Besides the hidden cells we already have, I think we can definitely count on the elven population for support when the time comes, I don't think there's a single one that would defend the Empire, if it meant a true end to it. As for the human population well its hit or miss. We know we'll stir up any slaves and probably criminal types looking to take advantage of the chaos. The poorer folk might be a bit divided. Some are still brainwashed fools happy to toil under the iron fist, though happily a lot seem to be grumbling as of late. It'll probably go more to our favor when the revolution goes full swing." You tell your fellow shadows. +"Good to hear. The reports I get from Cyrus at Fort Defiance are promising as well. He says that he's made contact with the orc commander who has been stirring up a bit of rebellion in the orcs. He's been slowly transferring many of them to Rask and concentrating on having them all rebel there though. This Captain Gruz states it would be too risky to do it with the orc serving on the Felkan frontlines as well since he needs to keep his profile somewhat low and they're probably just going to get killed soon in that meat grinder anyway." Brother Gray remarks. +"And I still say we should've pushed further on sabotage on that front, not to mention try to convince Gruz to influence the orcs stationed there anyway." +"Yes, yes, so you've said. Brother Shade isn't it enough that your voice was heard on the orc issue at all? You should be satisfied with that fact rather than pushing for needless recklessness. Your idea contribution was utilized in the best way that will advance Dendrin's agenda. Be happy for such a thing brother." Brother Gray responds. + +Brother Shade sits back down and scowls, but says nothing else except a few grumbles. He does glare at you as if you're to blame, but it's not your fault. You've been putting in just as much work as everyone trying to cultivate dissension and looking for weaknesses to exploit when the time comes, you sort of hope it comes soon though because even you are getting tired of the waiting around. You're still an Eternal and the desire for combat on a grand scale is still there. + +After the meeting you head towards your room since you have no more duties for today. As you walk down the corridor Talia catches up with you. + +"Where is Brother Murk, normally he's by your side talking to you after these things." +"He had to rush to the Delerg province; he had duties to attend to there immediately after the meeting. +"I see, for a moment I thought you were going to tell me he was attempting to unsuccessfully attempt to charm sister Bianca again." +"He probably still did that before he left." +"I don't know why he puts himself through the hassle. It is obvious she will never feel that way about him." Talia remarks. +"Oh I dunno, with enough time he might wear her down in twenty years." +"Perhaps, but his time would better spent elsewhere pursuing a mate. Certain people just aren't made to be together, unlike say us for example." + +While you and Talia have grown slightly closer over the years, you weren't aware it was to that level! + +"Okay Talia, you're going to have to explain in greater detail on this issue, because I'm lost." +"I intend to. Basically I am choosing you now as a mate. I think you know there is wisdom in this." +"Wha? Now? Me? Why?" +"Because even though we are all siblings and equals in the eyes of Dendrin, quite frankly WE…” Talia grabs your hand and puts it to her heart and then your own. “…are Eternals. We still have a bond that the others don’t and you’re the only one I believe is worthy for me. Besides, I'm sure you are sick of waiting around for the revolution to get started and are feeling the urge for combat a lot. I figure we could both blow off some of those urges with other intimate activities." +"…does that really work?" +"I dunno, I've heard it does. It's not like I've tried this before, I guess we'll have to find out, assuming you want to that is…you aren't like Brother Cyrus are you?" +"Hah, no. I just haven't thought about it a lot about it in general. I guess I've got a lot on my mind most of the time." +"I sensed as much, as you always seem to be deep in thought a lot. Is it anything in particular?" + +You almost want to tell her how your whole experience with the Shadow Guard has most likely been a lot different from everyone else's. How you don't have faith in Dendrin and how you've personally had several frustrating conversations with him. And most importantly how you always wonder if secretly attempting to overthrow the Empire is even going to work in the first place. + +You don't though because it's only going to complicate things and perhaps you should take the time to relax every once in a while. You aren't even going to wonder if getting it on with Talia is even a good idea at this time. You're just going to act on her advances. + +The pair of you find a secluded spot and embrace. While it's a completely new sensation to the pair of you, it somehow feels natural. Not just the act itself, but rather who you're with. Perhaps Talia was right in thinking that as Eternals you do still have a bond that the others don't. + +She was also right about another thing too, sex does help with some of the pent up energy you both have. The pair of you engage in this activity quite a bit in the months to come. + +Near the end of the year, the time to revolt is still no closer, but it would seem a spontaneous riot has broken out in one of the smaller towns just within province and several have been on the verge of doing so. Ever since the Felkan war broke out, the Shadow Guard haven't really been assigned there since the Empire has soldiers coming in and out of the area most of the time so it keeps the idea of rebellion down with the masses. + +However it would appear that's part of the problem in the first place as a lot of the soldiers have just been taking advantage such as supplementing their food supplies by emptying entire grain storages or fields. The rumors of worse things abound as well, but as always the Empire doesn't pay any attention to such things. The military and its conquest of the Felkan Kingdom is top priority. The peasants are just going to have to make do and suffer through it as always. + +Normally soldiers would put down the dissension going on in the province, but most of the military is currently attempting to make a big push on the Felkan Kingdom to break the current stalemate and it doesn't really want to divert any more soldiers than necessary. As the Shadow Guard are supposed to be the secret police enforcers in the first place, your order has been assigned to take care of the problem and the Empire wants an example made of the town of Hewlif which has openly rioted to the point where they've murdered all the Empire soldiers within it. + +While Brother Shade urges that this would be good time to openly strike, Master Ebon again says no and says the charade still needs to be kept. Even you find this to be a little strange since this would indeed be a good opportunity and judging by some of the other reactions of your fellow shadows they may be in agreement. + +"But how are we supposed to hide any potential rebels this time? I mean this is a whole town that the Empire wants us to wipe off the map!" Sister Bianca exclaims. +"We aren't. We're going to obey the Empire on this one and do exactly what we're told." Master Ebon says. +"WHAT?! Are you serious? This is supposed to be what we're fighting against! These average ordinary citizens have displayed more courage than you by taking matters into their own hands!" +"Brother Shade!" Brother Gray snaps. +"NO, I will not be silent this time! I must speak! We have the resources, we have infiltrated enough! Now is not the time to sneak about in the background, Dendrin wanted us to be free and I won't let you or this doddering old fool hold us back with your indecisiveness any longer!" + +Without another word, Brother Shade speeds himself up and moves in for the attack. He can't possibly win even if he does reach Master Ebon in time…unless you attempted to help him. +> Help in the assassination +Brother Shade has a point, waiting around for things to happen isn’t why you’re going along with the shadows. You thought they were actually trying to make major changes, but it’s apparent a change in leadership might be indeed necessary. + +You speed yourself up and fire your armbow at Master Ebon, but instead of hitting him it hits Brother Gray instead. He clutches his eye and falls to the floor. You really didn’t mean to hit him though; he just got in the way. Several shadows behind you tackle you to the floor, but this followed by more shadows assaulting your attackers. Apparently you and Shade’s actions have caused a minor civil war within the shadow ranks and those that disagreed with Master Ebon are taking their opportunity. + +While you’re trying to avoid getting trampled to death, Brother Shade’s attack isn’t as successful; he gets just within reach of Master Ebon before he’s struck down with whatever mind power that Master Ebon apparently has. He displays it quite prominently when Shade instantly clutches his head as if it's about to explode. While that doesn't happen, he does begin to bleed from his ears and nose. He lets out one long scream of pain before collapsing to floor, this causes the current in-fighting to stop and just stare at Master Ebon who is now displaying an expression of fury the likes you’ve never seen on anyone before. + +“SO THIS IS WHAT IT HAS COME TO?” He shouts and points over at Brother Gray’s body. “How can we possibly defeat the Empire if we’re killing each other and doubting Dendrin’s will? If Dendrin right now struck ALL of us dead for this blasphemy, I could not blame him! Nor would I because it is not my place, nor anyone else’s to judge his plans! It is obvious that this order must undergo purification before we are even able to overthrow the Empire! Centuries of planning completely gone, but this is how it MUST be if we are ever to be truly free under Dendrin’s blessed design.” + +Master Ebon pauses a moment and then points in your direction. + +“We’ll start with you for your murder of Brother Gray!” + +Before you can even react you feel a sharp pain wrack your brain then it courses throughout your entire body. It feels like your entire body is on fire and having thousands of blades stabbing you at the same time. + +You begin bleeding, screaming and writhing on the floor just like Brother Shade did with one importance difference, Master Ebon actually makes your head explode into gooey chunks just to get his point across about purifying the shadow order.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Chapter 2B2: Dendrin’s Shadow + + +Year 20 + +“So Brother Cyrus and Brother Draven are going to be assigned to Rask soon?” you ask. +“That’s what I’ve heard from Brother Gray. Them and a few others. Next year at the latest.” Murk says +“Good idea, from what I've heard the Empire is always having problems with that area, though I think they'll start having problems in other areas too soon now that they're officially at war with the Felkan Kingdom." +"Personally I don't think we should be waiting around now, we should push things along even more.” Brother Shade says. “In fact, I’m going to mention that to Master Ebon next time I see him.” +“You don’t think that he hasn’t already thought of such a plan?” Talia asks. +“Perhaps, but let’s just say I’ve been here a little longer than the rest of you, and while I know Master Ebon is just waiting for the right time to strike, he’s been playing the waiting game a little longer than I think is necessary.” + +This statement from Brother Shade gets a lot of looks, but nobody says anything. Even you are surprised as this is the first time you believe you’ve heard something close to an open criticism about Master Ebon or the leadership structure in general. + +Soon after his statement Brother Shade leaves to attend his duties. + +“Brother Shade should watch how he talks about Master Ebon. Ebon speaks directly to Dendrin on a daily basis and knows best on how to proceed.” Murk remarks. +“Then why did you not speak up, instead of just sitting there?” Sister Bianca asks. +“Uh…well…” +“Always trying to impress the ladies, eh Murk?” you chuckle and take your leave to go about your duties as well. + +Later that night you fall asleep and have an encounter with someone you don't want to interact with unless you have to… + +"So I see you’re fitting in well after all. Glad to see it seeing as you still don't particularly hold a lot of faith in my help. You are a most puzzling creature Eternal." Dendrin says. +"For someone with god powers, you aren't very omniscient. As I said, I joined the Shadow Guard's cause because it’s the best chance to bring down the Empire. Master Ebon is the leader and whether he's getting reliable guidance from you or not is irrelevant, he's who I'm following not you.” +"Interesting, so you've just exchanged one Emperor for another." +"No, for one I actually have interacted with Master Ebon and understand his motivations and goals better. As far as I know about the Emperor and the Empire, they're just into power for power's sake. And what do you care? I'm following Ebon and he follows you, so shouldn't you be happy?" + +At this point a low chortle pierces your brain. + +"Perhaps I am. Perhaps I am. As always I enjoy our little talks Eternal." + +Sometime later you wake up from your sleep, still wondering what the hell Dendrin's game is. + +Year 21 + +"Besides the hidden cells we already have, I think we can definitely count on the elven population for support when the time comes, I don't think there's a single one that would defend the Empire, if it meant a true end to it. As for the human population well its hit or miss. We know we'll stir up any slaves and probably criminal types looking to take advantage of the chaos. The poorer folk might be a bit divided. Some are still brainwashed fools happy to toil under the iron fist, though happily a lot seem to be grumbling as of late. It'll probably go more to our favor when the revolution goes full swing." You tell your fellow shadows. +"Good to hear. The reports I get from Cyrus at Fort Defiance are promising as well. He says that he's made contact with the orc commander who has been stirring up a bit of rebellion in the orcs. He's been slowly transferring many of them to Rask and concentrating on having them all rebel there though. This Captain Gruz states it would be too risky to do it with the orc serving on the Felkan frontlines as well since he needs to keep his profile somewhat low and they're probably just going to get killed soon in that meat grinder anyway." Brother Gray remarks. +"And I still say we should've pushed further on sabotage on that front, not to mention try to convince Gruz to influence the orcs stationed there anyway." +"Yes, yes, so you've said. Brother Shade isn't it enough that your voice was heard on the orc issue at all? You should be satisfied with that fact rather than pushing for needless recklessness. Your idea contribution was utilized in the best way that will advance Dendrin's agenda. Be happy for such a thing brother." Brother Gray responds. + +Brother Shade sits back down and scowls, but says nothing else except a few grumbles. He does glare at you as if you're to blame, but it's not your fault. You've been putting in just as much work as everyone trying to cultivate dissension and looking for weaknesses to exploit when the time comes, you sort of hope it comes soon though because even you are getting tired of the waiting around. You're still an Eternal and the desire for combat on a grand scale is still there. + +After the meeting you head towards your room since you have no more duties for today. As you walk down the corridor Talia catches up with you. + +"Where is Brother Murk, normally he's by your side talking to you after these things." +"He had to rush to the Delerg province; he had duties to attend to there immediately after the meeting. +"I see, for a moment I thought you were going to tell me he was attempting to unsuccessfully attempt to charm sister Bianca again." +"He probably still did that before he left." +"I don't know why he puts himself through the hassle. It is obvious she will never feel that way about him." Talia remarks. +"Oh I dunno, with enough time he might wear her down in twenty years." +"Perhaps, but his time would better spent elsewhere pursuing a mate. Certain people just aren't made to be together, unlike say us for example." + +While you and Talia have grown slightly closer over the years, you weren't aware it was to that level! + +"Okay Talia, you're going to have to explain in greater detail on this issue, because I'm lost." +"I intend to. Basically I am choosing you now as a mate. I think you know there is wisdom in this." +"Wha? Now? Me? Why?" +"Because even though we are all siblings and equals in the eyes of Dendrin, quite frankly WE…” Talia grabs your hand and puts it to her heart and then your own. “…are Eternals. We still have a bond that the others don’t and you’re the only one I believe is worthy for me. Besides, I'm sure you are sick of waiting around for the revolution to get started and are feeling the urge for combat a lot. I figure we could both blow off some of those urges with other intimate activities." +"…does that really work?" +"I dunno, I've heard it does. It's not like I've tried this before, I guess we'll have to find out, assuming you want to that is…you aren't like Brother Cyrus are you?" +"Hah, no. I just haven't thought about it a lot about it in general. I guess I've got a lot on my mind most of the time." +"I sensed as much, as you always seem to be deep in thought a lot. Is it anything in particular?" + +You almost want to tell her how your whole experience with the Shadow Guard has most likely been a lot different from everyone else's. How you don't have faith in Dendrin and how you've personally had several frustrating conversations with him. And most importantly how you always wonder if secretly attempting to overthrow the Empire is even going to work in the first place. + +You don't though because it's only going to complicate things and perhaps you should take the time to relax every once in a while. You aren't even going to wonder if getting it on with Talia is even a good idea at this time. You're just going to act on her advances. + +The pair of you find a secluded spot and embrace. While it's a completely new sensation to the pair of you, it somehow feels natural. Not just the act itself, but rather who you're with. Perhaps Talia was right in thinking that as Eternals you do still have a bond that the others don't. + +She was also right about another thing too, sex does help with some of the pent up energy you both have. The pair of you engage in this activity quite a bit in the months to come. + +Near the end of the year, the time to revolt is still no closer, but it would seem a spontaneous riot has broken out in one of the smaller towns just within province and several have been on the verge of doing so. Ever since the Felkan war broke out, the Shadow Guard haven't really been assigned there since the Empire has soldiers coming in and out of the area most of the time so it keeps the idea of rebellion down with the masses. + +However it would appear that's part of the problem in the first place as a lot of the soldiers have just been taking advantage such as supplementing their food supplies by emptying entire grain storages or fields. The rumors of worse things abound as well, but as always the Empire doesn't pay any attention to such things. The military and its conquest of the Felkan Kingdom is top priority. The peasants are just going to have to make do and suffer through it as always. + +Normally soldiers would put down the dissension going on in the province, but most of the military is currently attempting to make a big push on the Felkan Kingdom to break the current stalemate and it doesn't really want to divert any more soldiers than necessary. As the Shadow Guard are supposed to be the secret police enforcers in the first place, your order has been assigned to take care of the problem and the Empire wants an example made of the town of Hewlif which has openly rioted to the point where they've murdered all the Empire soldiers within it. + +While Brother Shade urges that this would be good time to openly strike, Master Ebon again says no and says the charade still needs to be kept. Even you find this to be a little strange since this would indeed be a good opportunity and judging by some of the other reactions of your fellow shadows they may be in agreement. + +"But how are we supposed to hide any potential rebels this time? I mean this is a whole town that the Empire wants us to wipe off the map!" Sister Bianca exclaims. +"We aren't. We're going to obey the Empire on this one and do exactly what we're told." Master Ebon says. +"WHAT?! Are you serious? This is supposed to be what we're fighting against! These average ordinary citizens have displayed more courage than you by taking matters into their own hands!" +"Brother Shade!" Brother Gray snaps. +"NO, I will not be silent this time! I must speak! We have the resources, we have infiltrated enough! Now is not the time to sneak about in the background, Dendrin wanted us to be free and I won't let you or this doddering old fool hold us back with your indecisiveness any longer!" + +Without another word, Brother Shade speeds himself up and moves in for the attack. He can't possibly win even if he does reach Master Ebon in time…unless you attempted to help him. +> Stop the assassination +Brother Shade has gone too far this time in this foolish attempt at a coup. You didn't think he attempt such a thing, but maybe you should've seen it was coming. As such you feel like it's your duty to try to stop him before he can do any major damage. + +You speed yourself up and fire your armbow at Shade just as he reaches Master Ebon and Brother Gray. It's not a fatal hit, since your bolt amusingly hits him in the ass; however it's enough to throw him off and whatever power Master Ebon has, he displays it quite prominently when Shade instantly clutches his head as if it's about to explode. While that doesn't happen, he does begin to bleed from his ears and nose. He lets out one long scream of pain before collapsing to floor. + +Everyone else stands silent as Brother Gray checks to see if he's dead and then confirms it. You hear a quiet whimper of "I told him." come from the crowd. It must be Sister Dusk who was Brother Shade's lover. Even she didn't help him. + +"This is a sad day for all shadows. To think that one of our own would…I cannot speak of it…(Sigh) I am only relieved to see that the rest of you still hold more faith in Dendrin than Shade did." Master Ebon say and then looks at you. + +"And I thank you for reacting so quickly brother. I always know your loyalty to Dendrin to be impeccable. I think that's why you need to be one to be in charge of this mission. I know it's grim, but our order has done such deeds in the past. Just think of this as being a means to an end. A means to an end before we're all truly free." +"I…understand Master Ebon. And I accept your confidence in me." + +After some discussion on the events that just occurred you are instructed to gather together some shadows to help you put down the revolt in Hewlif. You already know who you're going to pick though, Murk, Bianca and Talia, though you're sensing they have the recent event on their minds. + +"It's just like Master Ebon said, this is just one of the things we have to do before we put our own plan into action." You say back at your barracks. +"I just don't know. I mean I don't agree with Brother Shade's actions on trying to kill Master Ebon, but he might've had a point about all this waiting around. When ARE we going to strike out against the Empire properly?" Sister Bianca says. +"Yeah, I mean I know we've had to kill a lot of innocent people here and there for the Empire to keep up appearances, but we're talking about an entire town here. I just don't know…" Brother Murk says. + +You can't believe what you're hearing right now. Why all the doubts? Is this the so called faith in Dendrin? You're so frustrated that you lash out. +"Oh for…I thought we were all doing this to serve Dendrin! I mean Master Ebon gets his orders from him and then we follow Master Ebon! It's a hierarchy that I THOUGHT we were supposed to adhere to, that's why I tried to stop Brother Shade in first fucking place! I don't have time for this, look if you lack the stomach to do this, I'll wipe out the entire town myself, and won't think twice about it!" + +You turn from your fellows and storm out of Gloom. As you're walking out you can sense other shadows that don't agree with Master Ebon, give you a few glares on the way out. You don't understand any of this. You thought Dendrin's brainwashing technique made them all utterly loyal, you can see now that it has its limits. Granted the only one that actually did anything against the order was Brother Shade, and he at least had enough courage to try to carry out his convictions, unlike the rest who just stood around to watch him die. You find it ironic that you're probably least faithful when it comes to Dendrin himself, yet your loyalty to the order is a lot more secure. + +On your way to stop at Lenet, you sense someone following you. You turn and see Talia. + +"It's you." +"And a big greeting to you too, brother! Sheesh, I thought you'd wait for me after your rant at least." +"I didn't think anyone was interested in coming with me." +"You should know better than that." +"So you agree with what I did?" +"Well, I have to admit…and I'd only admit this to you…I sort of thought Brother Shade had a point." +"Well of course he had a point. I mean for the briefest moment I thought about helping him." +"You did?" +"Yes, but I didn't because as far as I'm concerned I've chosen a side and for good or ill I fully intend on carrying out its mission or die trying. So if that means I've got to wipe out every town in the Arat province to bring the Empire down, well so fucking be it." + +Talia smiles a bit at your statement. + +"Now that is why YOU are the only one worthy of me." +"Oh, you just picked me because Cyrus turned out to be gay." +"Ha ha! Nah, I already knew what was up with him even back when we were all in Mistresses class. He was always staring that that one classmate of ours…what was his name…oh yeah Gerald. Can't say I blame him though, Gerald was probably the most handsome in class." +"Hmm. I didn't take much notice of any of that." +"No I wouldn't expect you would've. You tended to lurk in the background and just focus on the training and your orders. Though you're still focused on your orders, you're a lot more pro-active about it rather than lurking in the background now. I suppose that sort of unquestioning dedication is what makes you a great fighter though." + +You thank Talia for her compliment. For the remainder of journey you and her keep the chatter to a minimum. After all it is true that you do prefer to keep your mind focused on the task at hand. + +When you finally arrive near the town of Hewlet, you see a group a ragged Empire soldiers standing nearby. They hardly look like the Empire's "best". + +"Are you the shadow people the Empire sent for?" one of them asks. He doesn't look very old, in fact he's probably younger than you are. All of them look like that. You didn't realize how bad it was on the Empire's recruitment front. + +"Yes, yes we are and who are you supposed to be?" +"I'm private first class Jones and this is my squad. We're sort of supposed to be watching the town. To make sure none of the dissidents attempt to leave it." +"And?" +"And what…uh sir?" Jones asks unsure of how to address you. +"And so have any of them left?" +"Um, not really. Well I mean I guess a few did before we arrived, but it looks like the rest are hunkered down in the town. I think they're building barricades around it." +"How come the Empire hasn't sent a company in there to just wipe them out." +"Not sure sir, but they said it wasn't the army's priority right now and that's what you Shadow Guard were here for." + +You shake your head at the absurdity of this. If there was ever a good argument for overthrowing the Empire this would be it. The sheer inefficiency of this is just ridiculous. Instead of having a group of snot-nosed recruits to play sentry, the Empire could've easily sent in a company of well trained troops to put down the fucking uprising and been done with it! Unless the war with the Felkan Kingdom is going a lot worse than you've heard of course. Right now you're glad you decided to aid the Shadow Guard despite your recent frustration with them. + +"So uh, where are the rest of your people? Are they invisible or something?" Jones asks. +"No, it's just us." You answer. +"…just you? But there's at least two hundred people in that town!" +"Two hundred? Then that probably means only about fifty have any sort of combat experience, and maybe out of those, ten of which have beyond the basics. The rest…hardly worth thinking about. Still with only two of us here there are bound to be a few escapees. Oh well, we'll do what we can, the rest of you just stay out the way." + +Due to your cold seriousness, Jones is at a loss of how to respond other than a yes sir. You look at Talia, who nods at you as an indication that she's ready. + +The pair of you don't speed up or use any shadow magic tricks on your way to the town. The sounds of threatening shouts are blocked out as you approach. A few arrows are shot at you, but they are so pitifully aimed you don't even need to dodge most of them. + +As you get closer, you feel the stirring of battle approaching and you can hardly contain yourself. Whether this will help the Empire or the Shadow Guard cause you don't care right now, because all you're thinking about is how finally you'll be getting into a proper battle. + +You sense that Talia feels the same way. + +The following is a bloodbath, the hapless townspeople are no match for you or Talia. You don't even bother speeding yourself up, you rely on natural raw skill. By the time you've butchered most of the combat capable people, the rest of the townsfolk have either run and hid or tried to run off completely. You catch most of the stragglers though when you find a group of small children cowering in their school house (after running one of their teachers through with a sword) you get an idea. + +"Children, this is your lucky day, for today you not only get to be witnesses but also messengers. It is an important message that I want you all to spread to whatever other town you to run to. Tell the people that if they continue to cause trouble, they won't have to fear the Empire, but the Shadows. Oppose the Empire, and you will die. Oppose the Shadows and you will beg for a death that won't come quick enough. We have displayed mercy here today. Remember this." + +You then dismiss the children with a wave of your hand who go running and screaming out of the room and probably in several different directions. When you leave the school, Talia waves at you. + +"Hey are we chasing these kids down too? I just saw a bunch of them rushing out of the school crying the whole time." +"No, I sent them off with an important message." +"Oh, what was it?" +"Hopefully an incentive for when the big day eventually arrives, the people will be more likely to side with us than the Empire or at least more afraid of us that they won't oppose us. In any case we've done our job here and the Empire shouldn't be bitching about it anymore." + +You and Talia take your leave of the newly created ghost town. You wonder if your small idea will have any effect, probably not, though you guess you won't really know until the day of the big revolt comes. +> Years pass... +Year 25 + +You settle into the bed of the dead Empire captain for the night. Normally you'd be a lot more alert, but you've got an entire group of shadows here at the conquered Empire outpost, not to mention several elven freedom fighters. You're fairly confident that they'll wake you if a counter attack comes. + +For now though you really need to get a good night's rest. You've been fighting non-stop for the past couple of weeks and you need a quick recharge at least. It doesn't help that the use of shadow magic drains you as well and probably why you don't use it much. Not that you really need to anyway, your natural skills work well enough. + +While the rebellion has only just gotten started, a lot of progress has been made. All the provinces from what you know of are suffering revolts on some scale. The worst of the lot being Rask where Cyrus has taken control of Fort Defiance. The shadow/orc alliance seems to be working well up there and the rest of the towns aren't exactly in line to help the Empire. Apparently the strongest resistance is from the second Empire fort called Destiny and another Eternal called Captain Kane is in charge. You barely remember him from class, though you heard he made a name for himself wiping out various barbarian tribes. + +Speaking of Eternals, one has been personally put in charge of attempting to eliminate the shadow striker cells like yours. A Captain Roldan. You do vaguely remember him from class. Tended to follow orders to the letter during training. Sort of like you in a way, but different. He was more extroverted you think, you guess that's why he was chosen to be a soldier rather than a shadow. You still don't know the reasoning was for making you a Shadow Guard candidate anyway, if you had to guess it was to try to spy on them. + +Of course this all makes you wonder what if you hadn't been chosen? What if you'd been a regular soldier? Would you have been content on just following Empire orders and never knowing any better? You'll never know of course. You've chosen your path and it's best to make most of it. Not that you regret your decision as the rebellion goes well. + +And with that positive thought you fall asleep. As you drift off you find yourself back in the numbness of the void… + +"It's finally happened. Rebellion across the Empire. Are you finally satisfied?" +"I'm satisfied in that I'm glad we've finally stopped sitting on our hands. Why ask me anyway? You're the one that's been guiding the shadows all this time for centuries to rebel. Shouldn't you be the one that's excessively happy about it?" you ask +"Oh I suppose…" +"You suppose? I don't get you. You act like you don't care one way or another about it!" +"Perhaps the time has passed." +"What?!" +"Oh don't get me wrong, I once wanted to see the Empire fall because it infringed on my own control over the mortals that were worshipping me at the time. And it's been interesting how over the decades and centuries that my little followers have been building up their strength to defeat them, but quite frankly I figured they would've done it long before then. Now? Well its okay, but I've lost a bit of interest since that time." + +If you weren't floating in a void of sensory deprivation you'd yell and scream at Dendrin so loudly that the rage would be felt throughout your body right now. + +"But that's your fucking fault. YOU were the one guiding them! If you wanted them to strike before now, you should've made some sort of sign to Master Ebon, or whoever was in charge at the time!" +"Quite frankly I stopped giving them any advice centuries ago. I found it was much more interesting to see them figure out things on their own. The only time I speak to any of them is during the ceremony process." +"If that's the case, why all the indoctrination, if you're such a fan of free will?" +"How long do you think that actually lasts? It's only temporary! Just long enough to get them to have faith in me. Whether they continue to follow me or not is all them and on a related note, whatever so called signs the shadow leaders have been talking about are either ones they made up or made up in their heads. Glad to see Ebon finally decided to get off his ass and do something and be interesting for a change though." +"So I was right! I've been right all along! You're nothing but a fucking fraud. You're not a god at all." +"No, Eternal YOU got it wrong. It isn't I who is a fraud. It's the religion itself! I didn't originally call ANYONE to worship me. They did that naturally when one of those big hairless monkeys stumbled into a cave and messed around with some lost magical Derro object that opened up a portal where I dwelled. I was perfectly content spending infinity in my own realm until that time, but things change and I took an interest in these new creatures and their world. Wasn't my fault that they saw me as some deity just because they couldn't comprehend me in any other way." +"You didn't exactly deter that thinking though." +"Well you have me there Eternal. And I say so what? I gave these creatures purpose, meaning and even magical power! In return they worship me and serve. If you really think about it, is that not the definition of a god? And so what if I have lost interest in my subjects? True, they have proven loyal, but I grow bored with their antics. I seek other stimulus now." + +As strange as it may seem you sort of understand Dendrin's point of view. He views humans and mortals in general as you would watch insects. They're interesting to watch for awhile, but after some time has passed you're ready to move on. And really who's to say that if you weren't some powerful being you wouldn't do the same? Still, you have more questions. + +"Okay, but why not move on then if you're so bored?" +"Because I'm not quite THAT bored yet. Besides when you arrived things started to get interesting again. Never had anyone resist my indoctrination so strongly before. I probably could've increased it, but that might've killed you besides I thought it would be more interesting to see if you followed me even without the indoctrination. It's interesting to see that while you have decided to follow the shadow's cause, you have been nothing but indifferent to outright hostile towards the religion even before you found all this out. That displays a grain of imagination and it's mainly why I've been in contact with you. In fact you're about the only mortal I've spoken to on a regular basis in centuries." +"I guess I'm the lucky one then." You remark. +"Your sarcasm aside, you actually are lucky, because I'm about to give you some friendly advice. Namely, don't go back to Gloom." +"What? What are you talking about?" +"That's all you get Eternal. Heed my advice or don't, it makes no difference to me. Talk to you again later perhaps." + +Once again you wake up though this time Dendrin gave you some direct information. Quite a bit of it really. You aren't even sure of what to make of all of it. You mean you always knew something was off with the whole shadow religion, but you didn't think he'd actually admit it all to you. Makes you wonder why he did, when he's been so cryptic in the past. Then against perhaps he knows you can't actually tell anyone, or rather you could, but wouldn't be believed and most likely attacked as a heretic. Perhaps that's his little joke on you. Yeah sounds like him. + +Still he's also given you a warning of not going back to Gloom. Why? Is something terrible going to happen there? Does he mean forever or just in the near future or is he just trying to play head games with you as usual? + +In reality, you aren't even scheduled to go back to Gloom anytime soon. Your job has been to sew as much chaos as you can across the Quala province. Still, if something bad IS going to happen there, maybe you should try to prevent it or warn somebody or something because right now Brother Gray and Master Ebon are supposed to be preparing a proper army of shadows to march directly on the capital, though not in the traditional way. Apparently they're going to try to use a magical gate to travel through the shadow world and pop up right in the heart of the Emperor's Palace. Such magic is very powerful to use, but also very time consuming and fatiguing. You know they have been going through some sort of long involved ritual which is involving several of the more powerful shadows to link their energy and even draw upon some of the weaker ones. You know Murk and Bianca are there rather than working in a shadow guerilla detachment. (They never quite looked at you the same way again after the incident with Shade.) Talia is also there, though she's one of those lending her powerful shadow magic skills to the ritual. + +And despite one of the most important events occurring at Gloom right now, the ONLY reason why you'd return there to possibly risk your own life is for Talia. You've grown closer to her in a way that you never thought possible. The relationship you've experienced with her is just one more reason why fighting against the Empire is the best idea you ever had. + +Still all of this might be for naught if something happens to Gloom. You still don't know WHAT that could be and for all you know it could just be something that will affect your life not anyone else's. (And from Dendrin's tone, not for the better) +> Go back to Gloom yourself +Considering you willingly chose to oppose the Empire, you'd say you've already gotten over the whole putting yourself in great danger bit. You might as well go back to Gloom to find out what's going on if anything at all. If something is happening, then you need to help anyway. If something isn't, well nothing will have been lost except time attending your own duties you suppose. Still there isn't any reason for you to hold up the rest of your group. You call to speak to one of your fellow shadows that you believe to be the most skilled. + +"Sister Yvette, I need to go back to Gloom and no I can't be talked out of it either, but I assure you it is incredibly important. I want you to take charge of this group until I return. I think you know your mission and I'm sure you'll do a fine job." +"But brother, your orders from Master Ebon are to stay with this group, and do not need to report your progress. He's busy performing the ritual at Gloom at this time, what is so important that you have to go back?" +"It's a long story, but let's just say I've had my own personal sign from Dendrin himself." +"You…you have? Is something bad going to happen? Should we all go with you?!" +"As I said, you stay here and carry on the fight. I don't know if something bad is going to happen, but if it does, we're going to need shadows like you still doing your job to help bring down the Empire." + +Sister Yvette reluctantly agrees though it's apparent she would either prefer to go with you or for you to stay with the group. You don't know why, since she's actually been a shadow longer than you and should have more confidence in her ability to lead, but it's like with anything, some people are just naturally more gifted than others, even if they are supposed to be equals. + +You make your way back to Gloom as fast as possible, even using some magic to speed yourself up. It's tempting to attack some of the stray Empire soldiers you hide out from along the way, but you need to focus on just getting back. One thing you've noticed though is that you aren't really encountering any soldiers heading in the direction of Gloom. You would've thought (even without the warning) that more Empire soldiers would've been marching that way. In fact this revolt has been going on for months now and there have been no attempts by the Empire to attack Gloom, they've just been focusing on putting out the fires you've been setting everywhere else. You don't know if that's because they're lacking the manpower to adequately attack it due to the Felkan War, if they're just biding their time or maybe it's just Empire incompetence due to them not anticipating this even happening and having a backup plan for it. + +Eventually you arrive at Gloom the next night. You're a little tired, but you can't let that bother you. When you approach the rock formation you chant the usual words to reveal the opening and descend down the stairs. Gloom is normally a pretty quiet place. Rare is the time where you can hear lots of shouting or the clomping of footsteps. + +Right now you're hearing both in abundance, followed by the familiar sounds of metal clanging against metal. Apparently your worst fears have been confirmed. + +You rush down the rest of the stairs and peer around a corner just in time to seem half a dozen heavily armored figures chopping a shadow to pieces with axes. The figures themselves aren't very tall, almost squat like, but their armor still makes them look massive and you can't even see their faces. + +It makes you pause a bit; these are a powerful unknown foe as you've never seen any soldiers like this before in the Empire military and you can only assume they're helping the Empire. You take a deep breath and cast a cloak on yourself along with speeding yourself up again before pressing forward with your attack. + +You try to drive your blade through the armor of one of the figures, but it resists your attempts. The only thing you do manage is to do is knock him off balance long enough for him to tip over completely. You fire a bolt from your armbow at another one. It pierces his full face helm and knocks him back, but apparently not enough to kill him because he doesn't fall down. + +The other four have now turned their attention to you and while you run around striking them with your weapon, your blades just aren't getting through their armor. With your cloak off and your speed wearing down, one of them helps their buddy off the ground and the one with the poison bolt in his face helm has rejoined the fight after having pulled it out. What sort of creatures are these? + +You decide to back off a bit and reassess the situation, and then you make a complete retreat when the six of them start advancing on your position. Your saving grace is they aren't very fast in that armor and you easily find a storage room to hide in. You think you're alone, but you aren't. + +"Brother… I never thought I'd see you again…" you hear familiar voice struggle to exclaim. + +You turn and see Murk lying in a corner bleeding profusely. One of his hands is missing and he's holding in his innards with the remaining one. + +"Murk? What's going on? What's happened here?" +"It's the Derro…they've returned…(cough) always heard they abandoned this place. Guess they REALLY want it back." +"The Derro? How? When?" +"A couple days ago brother. We've been fighting them off here for the past two days, but unsuccessfully I'm afraid. Everything was going well with the ritual and we would've been making a full invasion right in the heart of the capital if they hadn't just suddenly showed up. They disrupted everything. They came out of the damn walls and even from underneath the floors. They aren't as big as us, but the little bastards are the toughest things I've ever encountered and who knows what they look like under all that heavy armor." +"The Empire is probably behind this attack." +"Probably, but does it matter? They're killing us and no matter how much we try, we can't beat them!" +"They can't be invincible. Everything dies." +"Oh yeah, you can kill 'em, just really hard to, due to all that armor. Even without that, though they seem to have some natural magic resistance. (cough) I saw one of those fuckers take a full blast of shadow fire from Master Ebon himself, and he kept coming at him like a golem. It wasn't until Brother Gray stepped in to help that they turned him into blackened heap of melted metal." +"Where are Master Ebon and Brother Gray?" +"Brother Gray is dead. I saw him surrounded and literally torn apart by those things, I mean they (choke) ripped his limbs off like a rag doll…it was horrible. I don't…even want to…" + +Brother Murk begins to get upset, but you really need him to continue so you can get a better idea of how bad this is and maybe find some way of turning it around. + +"Murk, what about Master Ebon?" +"I don't know. Probably dead! Just like Brother Gray and (sob) Bianca…I tried! I tried so hard to save her!" +"Sister Bianca is dead too?" +"No, not the last time I saw her. A couple of the Derro were dragging her unconscious battered body in chains to one of their invasion entrances. I've noticed they've been doing that with several of the female shadows. I tried to save her, and what you see before you is the result of my attempted heroics. I know she never saw me as a potential mate, but…I don't want to think about what they'll do to her…(sob)." + +This new information suddenly makes you ask the question that you're afraid to ask. + +"Talia? Did you see them take Talia?" +"No, brother. I haven't seen Sister Talia since the interruption of the ritual. She may still be alive and fighting. Oh why didn't Dendrin prevent this destruction? Why wasn't this foreseen? We were on the verge of victory and now all is lost!" Murk cries out. +"Hey! All isn't lost yet! The Empire WILL fall, I promise you." You say looking at Murk. + +He manages a faint smile, but his life force is fading fast. + +"Perhaps it will brother, but I won't live to see it anymore …I'm sorry for…" +"Murk, you don't have…" + +And you don't bother finishing you sentence. Murk is dead and even though you drifted apart slightly in last few years, you're going to miss him. + +Right now though you need to figure out what you're going to do. Tactically, this looks like a no win situation. From Murk's last words, the Derro have already managed to slaughter most of the shadows and have successfully overrun the fortress. You've already tried to fight a few and didn't make much headway. You might do better to get out of here and inform the remainder of the shadows topside of the bad news so that you can regroup. + +Of course the other part of you wants to at least try to find Talia, and even some other shadows that may need your help, because assuming you get out of this alive, you're going to need all the help you can get in continuing your plan to overthrow the Empire. +> Leave Gloom +This place is a mass grave at this point, these Derro have left nothing alive and if anyone is, then they’re probably dying like poor Murk was. You need to get out of here now and try to regroup the shadows above ground. + +You make your way back towards the entrance; unfortunately the large group of Derro that were in your way when you entered are still in your way while you’re trying to exit. They’re guarding the entry gate to the stairway up which is now locked so you aren’t going to be able to sneak past them and fighting them is obviously not a winning solution either. + +You find a spot nearby to hide in and wait for hours hoping that the group moves, but they just stand there like statues. You don’t even see them speaking to each other. After even more hours of waiting they still haven’t moved and you have to change your hiding spot anyway, because another group of Derro starts approaching uncomfortably close to your position. + +So you do the only thing you can think of, you sneak back to where Murk’s body was and hide there. You figure eventually they will have to move on. + +After one day passes you still hear the clanking of armored foot steps roaming about Gloom, you manage to sneak out again and to your dismay the Derro are not only still there, but they’re in the same exact positions. At this point you’re getting very frustrated; you need to get out of here! + +Since you’re trapped anyway, you decide to start looking for possible other survivor, though you’re less optimistic now than ever. You spider climb on the ceiling and cloak yourself to avoid the Derro, but you don’t find much save for massacred shadows and Derro patrols thoroughly searching Gloom. You can’t believe how relentless this race is. + +In your search you never do find Talia. Not even her body. You can only hope she somehow managed to escape and didn’t suffer the fate of Bianca. You’d actually rather not think about it. You do find Master Ebon’s body though. He was heavily wounded and alone in some forgotten room, not unlike Murk. + +Two more days pass and you’re still stuck in Gloom. You’ve managed to keep yourself going by raiding the kitchen for food and drink, but the Derro are still all over the place. (And still guarding the entryway) You don’t know if they’ve permanently moved in here or what, but you hope that isn’t the case because that’s going to make escape even harder. + +By day five you get desperate. You come up with a plan to try to kill a few of the Derro guarding the entryway. You fail utterly and are turned back, worse the Derro now realize there is still at least one shadow in the area so they double up on patrols around the entryway and other important zones like the kitchen + +On day nine you’re exhausted from evading Derro patrols. You don’t know how the hell they’ve been managing to track you, but your cloak spell isn’t working anymore. Just as well, because using your shadow magic is draining all your endurance at this point. + +On day twelve you’re awakened by several explosions followed by the stomping of metal boots at a much quicker pace. You can hear shouting in Derro tongue, but you have no idea what’s going on except more explosions are occurring shaking loose the stones and dirt above your head. You step out from your hiding spot and feel the rumbling all over and the strong scent of brimstone and smoke in the air. The Derro have purposely done something to collapse the entire complex! + +You immediately speed yourself up and rush to the entrance as you need to get out now or you’ll be buried alive. Fully expecting that at least the entryway will be open now, you are in for a brutal shock when you see the same group of Derro STILL guarding it despite the fact that the entire place is coming down. If you could even see their faces, it probably would be a look of unconcern on them, because the Derro are still more or less not moving while standing guard. + +With no more hope, you rush into battle in a vain attempt to escape. You don’t make it far, though you give as good of a fight as you can. The battle ultimately ends with you getting an axe in your spine, which is then followed by another axe blow to your left hand severing it. + +When you collapse to the ground mercy comes swiftly in the form of a large stone falling on your skull.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Considering you willingly chose to oppose the Empire, you'd say you've already gotten over the whole putting yourself in great danger bit. You might as well go back to Gloom to find out what's going on if anything at all. If something is happening, then you need to help anyway. If something isn't, well nothing will have been lost except time attending your own duties you suppose. Still there isn't any reason for you to hold up the rest of your group. You call to speak to one of your fellow shadows that you believe to be the most skilled. + +"Sister Yvette, I need to go back to Gloom and no I can't be talked out of it either, but I assure you it is incredibly important. I want you to take charge of this group until I return. I think you know your mission and I'm sure you'll do a fine job." +"But brother, your orders from Master Ebon are to stay with this group, and do not need to report your progress. He's busy performing the ritual at Gloom at this time, what is so important that you have to go back?" +"It's a long story, but let's just say I've had my own personal sign from Dendrin himself." +"You…you have? Is something bad going to happen? Should we all go with you?!" +"As I said, you stay here and carry on the fight. I don't know if something bad is going to happen, but if it does, we're going to need shadows like you still doing your job to help bring down the Empire." + +Sister Yvette reluctantly agrees though it's apparent she would either prefer to go with you or for you to stay with the group. You don't know why, since she's actually been a shadow longer than you and should have more confidence in her ability to lead, but it's like with anything, some people are just naturally more gifted than others, even if they are supposed to be equals. + +You make your way back to Gloom as fast as possible, even using some magic to speed yourself up. It's tempting to attack some of the stray Empire soldiers you hide out from along the way, but you need to focus on just getting back. One thing you've noticed though is that you aren't really encountering any soldiers heading in the direction of Gloom. You would've thought (even without the warning) that more Empire soldiers would've been marching that way. In fact this revolt has been going on for months now and there have been no attempts by the Empire to attack Gloom, they've just been focusing on putting out the fires you've been setting everywhere else. You don't know if that's because they're lacking the manpower to adequately attack it due to the Felkan War, if they're just biding their time or maybe it's just Empire incompetence due to them not anticipating this even happening and having a backup plan for it. + +Eventually you arrive at Gloom the next night. You're a little tired, but you can't let that bother you. When you approach the rock formation you chant the usual words to reveal the opening and descend down the stairs. Gloom is normally a pretty quiet place. Rare is the time where you can hear lots of shouting or the clomping of footsteps. + +Right now you're hearing both in abundance, followed by the familiar sounds of metal clanging against metal. Apparently your worst fears have been confirmed. + +You rush down the rest of the stairs and peer around a corner just in time to seem half a dozen heavily armored figures chopping a shadow to pieces with axes. The figures themselves aren't very tall, almost squat like, but their armor still makes them look massive and you can't even see their faces. + +It makes you pause a bit; these are a powerful unknown foe as you've never seen any soldiers like this before in the Empire military and you can only assume they're helping the Empire. You take a deep breath and cast a cloak on yourself along with speeding yourself up again before pressing forward with your attack. + +You try to drive your blade through the armor of one of the figures, but it resists your attempts. The only thing you do manage is to do is knock him off balance long enough for him to tip over completely. You fire a bolt from your armbow at another one. It pierces his full face helm and knocks him back, but apparently not enough to kill him because he doesn't fall down. + +The other four have now turned their attention to you and while you run around striking them with your weapon, your blades just aren't getting through their armor. With your cloak off and your speed wearing down, one of them helps their buddy off the ground and the one with the poison bolt in his face helm has rejoined the fight after having pulled it out. What sort of creatures are these? + +You decide to back off a bit and reassess the situation, and then you make a complete retreat when the six of them start advancing on your position. Your saving grace is they aren't very fast in that armor and you easily find a storage room to hide in. You think you're alone, but you aren't. + +"Brother… I never thought I'd see you again…" you hear familiar voice struggle to exclaim. + +You turn and see Murk lying in a corner bleeding profusely. One of his hands is missing and he's holding in his innards with the remaining one. + +"Murk? What's going on? What's happened here?" +"It's the Derro…they've returned…(cough) always heard they abandoned this place. Guess they REALLY want it back." +"The Derro? How? When?" +"A couple days ago brother. We've been fighting them off here for the past two days, but unsuccessfully I'm afraid. Everything was going well with the ritual and we would've been making a full invasion right in the heart of the capital if they hadn't just suddenly showed up. They disrupted everything. They came out of the damn walls and even from underneath the floors. They aren't as big as us, but the little bastards are the toughest things I've ever encountered and who knows what they look like under all that heavy armor." +"The Empire is probably behind this attack." +"Probably, but does it matter? They're killing us and no matter how much we try, we can't beat them!" +"They can't be invincible. Everything dies." +"Oh yeah, you can kill 'em, just really hard to, due to all that armor. Even without that, though they seem to have some natural magic resistance. (cough) I saw one of those fuckers take a full blast of shadow fire from Master Ebon himself, and he kept coming at him like a golem. It wasn't until Brother Gray stepped in to help that they turned him into blackened heap of melted metal." +"Where are Master Ebon and Brother Gray?" +"Brother Gray is dead. I saw him surrounded and literally torn apart by those things, I mean they (choke) ripped his limbs off like a rag doll…it was horrible. I don't…even want to…" + +Brother Murk begins to get upset, but you really need him to continue so you can get a better idea of how bad this is and maybe find some way of turning it around. + +"Murk, what about Master Ebon?" +"I don't know. Probably dead! Just like Brother Gray and (sob) Bianca…I tried! I tried so hard to save her!" +"Sister Bianca is dead too?" +"No, not the last time I saw her. A couple of the Derro were dragging her unconscious battered body in chains to one of their invasion entrances. I've noticed they've been doing that with several of the female shadows. I tried to save her, and what you see before you is the result of my attempted heroics. I know she never saw me as a potential mate, but…I don't want to think about what they'll do to her…(sob)." + +This new information suddenly makes you ask the question that you're afraid to ask. + +"Talia? Did you see them take Talia?" +"No, brother. I haven't seen Sister Talia since the interruption of the ritual. She may still be alive and fighting. Oh why didn't Dendrin prevent this destruction? Why wasn't this foreseen? We were on the verge of victory and now all is lost!" Murk cries out. +"Hey! All isn't lost yet! The Empire WILL fall, I promise you." You say looking at Murk. + +He manages a faint smile, but his life force is fading fast. + +"Perhaps it will brother, but I won't live to see it anymore …I'm sorry for…" +"Murk, you don't have…" + +And you don't bother finishing you sentence. Murk is dead and even though you drifted apart slightly in last few years, you're going to miss him. + +Right now though you need to figure out what you're going to do. Tactically, this looks like a no win situation. From Murk's last words, the Derro have already managed to slaughter most of the shadows and have successfully overrun the fortress. You've already tried to fight a few and didn't make much headway. You might do better to get out of here and inform the remainder of the shadows topside of the bad news so that you can regroup. + +Of course the other part of you wants to at least try to find Talia, and even some other shadows that may need your help, because assuming you get out of this alive, you're going to need all the help you can get in continuing your plan to overthrow the Empire. +> Search for Talia +Your main purpose of coming here in the first place was to make sure Talia was safe. You can't leave now without trying to find her or at least her body if she's dead. + +You leave the storage room and decide your best bet would be to keep yourself cloaked the entire time while you search the fortress. You also decide to use spider crawl just to make sure you're really out of sight. + +As you stick to the ceilings of corridors and rooms you survey the carnage of what the Derro have wrought on the shadows. It's almost like they didn't have a chance. You now have to believe that this was why the Empire wasn't attacking Gloom, they had some sort of deal with the Derro to do it for them and since this used to be a Derro home at one time, they probably knew every ancient secret passage and entire layout of it. + +You progressively get more and more discouraged in your search and that's when you hear a voice in your head. Not Dendrin's though, it's distinctly a human one. + +"To…the left and down the hall…hurry…not much time…" you hear Master Ebon say. Lacking any other ideas, you follow his instructions and make your make to his location from where you are. As you do so, you notice there aren't any Derro in this direction, though there are a few dead ones. You're guessing that the rest of their fellows haven't searched this area as much. + +"The door…at the end…hurry…" + +Sensing that there are no Derro in the immediate area, you climb down from the ceiling and prepare to enter the door at the end of the corridor. When you arrive in front of it, you hear a loud click as it opens. + +"Quick, inside!" a brother says pulling you in by the arm roughly. + +A quick glance and you see a couple more shadows both in wounded condition. You then see Master Ebon in some sort of spell trance. He's also wounded, but his status looks a lot worse. He probably shouldn't even be alive with the deep bleeding gashes he displays across his body. A female shadow stands near him also wounded. When you see her face more clearly and recognize her as Talia, your worries are at least divided by half. + +"What are you doing here?" she exclaims. +"I heard the voice of Dendrin and…" in that moment you realize you've just admitted you've heard his voice for the first time. You then realize this isn't the time to keep it a secret and you continue. "…he…uh gave me a warning… are you alright?" +"Just a light wound…wait, you said Dendrin spoke to you? He warned you about the attack?" +"Well, not in so many words. Look we need get out of here, I can explain everything later." + +You then hear Master Ebon's voice again. He still isn't speaking verbally though and is using his mind. + +"Dendrin spoke to you? Lucky lad. He hasn't spoken to me since I first became a shadow. I always thought he would eventually, but he never did. I assumed he was testing me, to make my own decisions. Perhaps I offended him by claiming those decisions came from him directly, but I didn't know what else to do…" +"Master Ebon, we can discuss this later, right now we really need to leave!" +"Is Master Ebon speaking to you through his mind?" Talia asks. +"Yes, and what's he doing anyway? He's just sitting there with gashes in his chest deep enough for me to see his heart beating and bleeding out. As I said we need to leave before the Derro kill us all." + +Master Ebon interrupts you. + +"They've already succeeded in killing me I fear, but I still have powerful magic…enough to save the remainder of you…to carry on the fight…" + +Master Ebon's eyes begin to turn completely black, this is followed by his entire body. A shimmering portal then opens up nearby. + +"This…was to take us to strike at the very heart of the Empire…but now just an escape…to friends. Continue the fight there. The Empire will fall as long as you continue to fight. Dendrin I hope you can forgive my failures as I have served to the best of my abilities…I am ready to enter your realm of shadow if you will allow it…" + +"Master Ebon!" Talia shouts when she sees his body undergo his transformation. +"He can't be helped and he's giving us a chance to escape. We need to take it now!" +"But where is it going?" the shadow that grabbed you by the arm asks. +"He said to friends, but quite frankly it could lead into the middle of an Empire battalion and I think we'd still have better chances! Now come on!" + +Without another word you all enter the portal. Within seconds your eyes are nearly blinded by the whiteness of snow and you feel a blast of cold air whipping around you. + +"DIE! Shadow bastard!" you suddenly hear and turn around just in time to avoid a sword strike to the head. Realizing that this is an Empire soldier and not a Derro, you quickly dispatch your assailant who falls turning the snow red. + +When you said being transported into the middle of an Empire battalion would be a better situation, you didn't actually mean it! Fortunately it isn't quite as bad as all that. + +Getting your bearings you notice you're on a battlefield. The bodies of several Empire troops lay on the ground and are mixed in with those of orcs and shadows. A great fortress looms in the distance. + +"Fort Defiance…" you say to yourself. +"Brother, we're over here!" one of the shadows calls out to you and you run over to the group. (Apparently, all the others teleported to a place out of immediate danger!) + +"Are we in Rask?" the shadow who grabbed you asks. You still don't know his name, you can only guess he was one of the newer recruits after you joined. +"Well it doesn't look like Delurg that's for sure. I'm guessing that group ahead of us fighting the Empire troops are our brothers and sisters from Fort Defiance." Talia says. +"Looks like it, well no time like the present, we need to go help them." +"But what about those two? They're badly wounded and can't fight properly." The new shadow asks. +"(Sigh) Very well, you, what's your name anyway?" +"I'm Brother Gannon. I just joined recently…" +"Yes brother, we can get all that getting to know you stuff out of the way later. I want you to take those two and head over to that fort in the distance. I'm sure they can get help there. What about you Talia, I know you're wounded too, do you need any first aid?" + +Talia draws her weapon. + +"I'll worry about my minor cuts after we take care of this Empire scum." She answers in a harsh tone. +"Okay then let's go down there and drive back the Empire!" you answer back. + +You and Talia sprint as fast as you can to where all the action is taking place. Swords are clashed, halberds are swung, skulls are smashed and heads are severed. Mostly all in your favor and the Empire troops were actually losing even before you got here. Still, it's good to be on a winning side of a fight today and you feel energized by the battle. + +A short reunion occurs as you finish off the last of the stubborn Empire soldiers. + +"What the…? What are you doing here?! I thought you were supposed to be in the Quala province!"Cyrus exclaims running his sword through an enemy. +"Things change brother and how have you been doing?" you answer doing the same. +"We've been getting wave after wave of Empire skirmishers recently, but nothing serious yet. Honestly I would've thought we would've had a full on assault by now. I think they're trying to whittle us down, it won't work though. We're entrenched and have people all over the area slowly turning the population of Rask against them…is that Talia over there? What's SHE doing here? Last I heard she was supposed to be back in Gloom helping with the ritual that Master Ebon and Brother Gray were doing." +"Like I said, things change Cyrus." + +At this moment there is a lull in the fighting that allows Cyrus to actually stop fighting. He looks at you his expression is one you've never seen before. One of genuine worry. + +"Oh no…what happened?" + +You don't even know where to begin. + +"Cyrus let's just get through this battle and celebrate THIS victory over the Empire. We can dwell on the troubled times to come later." + +The pair of you say nothing more for the rest of the battle which soon ends with your victory. You just wish it was a better one, because it cannot possibly counteract the incredible loss you have suffered this dark day. + +You think back on how you told Murk in his dying breaths that the Empire would fall, you also think back to how Master Ebon believed it would fall in his on dying breaths. If you had to guess, you think Talia probably still believes it and you know Cyrus will even when you tell him all that has happened. The righteousness in the shadows' cause and its unwavering faith in Dendrin has always been its strength that it cannot lose no matter how bad the odds. + +Of course it would help if you actually believed all that nonsense. + +Which brings you to your next dilemma: You already let it slip to Talia that you spoke to Dendrin and Brother Gannon was also there to hear it (and maybe even the other two wounded shadows heard it as well) , so it'll probably be brought up after everyone is caught up to speed on the war front and what happened at Gloom. The fact that Dendrin spoke to you is actually why you're here in the first place. + +The question is should you even mention what Dendrin said to you or just lie about what he said? Your own feelings on the situation are that Dendrin, god or not, is not worth following let alone creating a fanatical religion around. He obviously doesn't give a shit about any of you and sees you all as amusing toys at best. However, given the grim situation, the misguided slavish devotion to Dendrin might be the only thing that'll keep their spirits up. Not to mention you wonder if you'd even be believed. Cyrus himself is a very dedicated believer, he may even turn violent and you aren't even sure if Talia would believe you. +> Tell the truth about Dendrin +You really can't pay any more lip service to Dendrin after what you know and it's silly to let this charade go on. What's the point of rebelling against the Empire if it was solely built on the whim of a being that doesn't even care about his own followers anymore? + +After Cyrus catches you up on the situation at Rask, you and Talia tell him what happened at Gloom. Talia fills in the details better since she was actually there. Cyrus seems a little distraught at hearing so many shadows dying nevermind losing the shadow home, but he doesn't seem broken in his goals to continue to fight the Empire. + +"It doesn't matter, we've still got agents in the Quala province and other places. Once we reconnect with the various cells we can regroup. We need to tell the others here though now, the sooner we get this information out the way the quicker they can deal with the loss. The Empire is desperate and we'll overcome whatever else they decide to throw at us because Dendrin will see us to victory." +"Yeah, about that I've got some more to tell you, in fact Talia you'll want to hear this as well. And before I start I need to both to not interrupt until I'm finished. Afterwards you can do what you like." + +This gets their attention and they sit down to listen to your tale. You start from the moment Dendrin first spoke to you and go from there. The look on both of their faces is first one of shock then as you explain more, Cyrus' face is one of calmness with a simmering anger that is only growing with every "blasphemy" you speak about Dendrin. He eventually closes his eyes as if blocking out the sight of you will help keep him from attacking you. +Talia's expression displays more of a concern than anger. You aren't sure if it's because she believes you or is pained by the idea that someone she loves is basically speaking out against something she has placed unwavering faith in. + +You'll soon find out you suppose. + +When you finish, there is a moment of silence and then Cyrus takes a deep and opens his eyes. You feel him staring right through you and you are ready to fight if necessary, but he speaks instead. + +"Is that it?" he asks. +"Yes." You reply. +"What the hell do you hope to gain by this?" +"Wha? Nothing, I just feel that the…" +"And I'm supposed to believe this shit?" +"Believe what you want Cyrus, it's the truth." +"No, it isn't! Look I can believe that Dendrin perhaps warned you about Gloom because it was a dire situation, but I DO NOT BELIEVE…" Cyrus catches himself raising his voice and then stops to calm down again. + +"I do not believe that you were speaking to him on a regular basis. Only Master Ebon could speak with him in such a manner!" +"He couldn't speak to Dendrin at all! He even admitted as much before he died! Talia was there for that, come on back me up here!" + +Talia turns away and hides her face. It's obvious now that she believes you, but doesn't WANT to believe you. Her silence though doesn't help in convincing Cyrus. + +"Just because you're mates doesn't mean you're allowed to bully her into your heretical way of thinking!" +"What? No! Look, I can drag in Brother Gannon and confirm it as well since I'm pretty sure he heard everything as well!" +"No, you're not poisoning anyone else with this shit. I can't believe…I mean where do I fucking start? You've stood here and just admitted that you've never been a believer in Dendrin! That's the whole foundation of our organization!" +"Okay first of all I never said I didn't believe in him. He's very real and I know because he's been playing games with the shadows for centuries and fucking with my head since I met the bastard." +"Yes, so you've said. So why you? You say that when you first met him during the ceremony that you resisted him and then gave in only to save your own life. You even said you still weren't sure if you weren't going to turn us all in to Mr. Mol when he questioned us that one time. Why would Dendrin speak with someone whose faith in him was so lacking?" +"Fuck, I don't know Cyrus! Don't you think I've tried to figure that out? My best assessment? He's a sadistic fucker that gets bored easily so he finds new ways to amuse himself." +"You insult Dendrin one more time and it'll be your last." Cyrus warns. +"Oh fuck you Cyrus, you've wanted to kill me since we were Mistresses class. Just admit it and stop hiding behind an excuse." +"Really? Is that what you think? Because if it is, then you're wrong about that as well. Yes, it's true I didn't like you for a long time, but after that moment when all of us walked out of Mr. Mol's interrogation room without betraying the shadows and staying true to the cause my opinion of you changed. I saw then we really were as brothers. Pity it turned out to be a lie. A horrible vicious lie." + +At this point Talia steps in. + +"So where does this leave us?" +"What do you mean?" you ask. +"I mean you've been keeping this all a secret for years. Why tell us now when things are at their worst for us?" +"I…don't know. Maybe because things ARE at their worst and if we're going to continue this fight against the Empire, then we need to do it for the right reasons rather than for the misguided devotion of a false god…" +"DENDRIN IS NOT A FALSE GOD!" Cyrus snaps and attempts to tackle you. You and he roll around on the floor punching each other for a while until you both finally break a few pieces of furniture and back off to catch a breather. Talia tells the both of you stop fighting. + +As you stare at him from across the room, you know that some part of him must be questioning his beliefs. If he really thought you were completely full of shit, he would've made more of an effort to try to kill you. And this scuffle tells you is he's pissed at you for making him question his beliefs. Still doesn't mean he won't try to kill you later if you press this issue, but it's more than you could've hoped for. + +"Look Cyrus, I know this sucks and maybe Dendrin is a god… I know he certainly thinks he is, but I'm still not following him. It's enough that I have to listen to his cryptic warnings and outright taunts on a random basis. I do see the need for the Empire to fall because it's corrupt, it's inefficient, and it's oppressive. However, I also see that in this shadow organization. How can you be against something when you're part of something else that's just as bad?" + +Cyrus doesn't answer he's still standing there fuming at you, but Talia says something. + +"I understand what you're saying, but Dendrin has at least given us our powers and shadow magic. Maybe everything what you've said about him is true, but does it really matter? In a way he sparked this rebellion centuries before any of us were even around. Without him, would their even been a rebellion able to hurt the Empire as bad as it has? I mean even with all that happened at Gloom, I still believe as Cyrus does that victory will come. I'm sure the orcs, the elves, the poor, the criminals and others all have their own reasons for wanting to see the Empire fall. Does it really matter why as long their beliefs carry them to see it through?" +"(Sigh) No, I guess it doesn't Talia, but maybe for ME it does and I can't be a shadow anymore, or at least not one that buys into this worship of Dendrin. I can't live a lie and just go through the motions anymore. Now I will continue to fight the Empire. I'm still here for that, if I wasn't I would've betrayed you all to Mr. Mol years ago. Though I might be fighting the damned Empire for the most cliché reason ever now, which is love. When we bonded Talia, that's what gave me more of a purpose to fight the Empire more than anything. It's why I even went back to Gloom AFTER Dendrin told me not to. I couldn't leave you in potential danger." +"Oh fucking spare me your romantic sense of nobility!" +"Cyrus stop!" Talia yells. +"He's just using honeyed words to get you on his side and somehow excuse his blasphemy. I can't believe you're even listening to him or even trying to see his side of things." +"Oh really Cyrus and your reasons for fighting the Empire are purely for Dendrin huh?" you say. +"Of course, why else would they be?" +"Oh I don't know, maybe a certain shadow by the name of Draven comes to mind? Sure you aren't just a little more dedicated because of him?" +"You leave Draven out of this!" +"Fine, but your little outburst just proved my point. You're ready to fight me again just for mentioning his name which proves you might be doing a little of this for love as well." +"I'm ready to fight you again, because you're attempting to sew chaos and dissent and I for one have had enough! If you want to abandon Dendrin fine. If you want to continue fighting the Empire for your own reasons fine. But you're not doing it here. I want you out of my fucking fort and I don't want to see you ever again!" +"You can't kick me out, you're not head of the fucking shadows." You laugh. +"Oh no? All of our leaders are dead! WE are the next in line if you haven't noticed and quite frankly I've got more support than you do. Always have. And if I wanted to I could expose your heresy to the shadows in the fort and have your head right now. The only reason why I'm not? Because I'm doing this out of respect for Talia and at one time I did consider you my brother. But you're nothing to me now. You're not an ally, you're not a brother, you're not a friend!" + +You look over to Talia hoping for support, but she offers none. + +"Talia, aren't you going to help me over here? All your professed love for me meaning nothing? Aren't we supposed to be mates?" +"And we always will be my love…but I cannot follow your path. I just can't…I'm sorry…" +"But…" you start to say, but you see that it won't do any good. You thought you were getting through to them too, but it would appear that even in the face of the truth, they are willing to stay in denial. Not even love can overcome faith it seems. + +You gather up all your belongings and start to leave, but you turn to address both of them before doing so. + +"You both know I'm right and you know why? Because all three of us have another bond and that's the fact we're Eternals and as such we have a tendency to acknowledge a hierarchy especially among our own kind even if we don't want to do it. Cyrus, I'm stronger than you, I'm smarter than you and just better than you in general. You've always known that. If we were in any other organization, I would be your superior officer or leader and what I would say would be unquestioned because you'd know that as your superior, I'd ALWAYS be right. You just can’t admit it to yourself and let's face it, given how you flaunted how much support you had and how our leaders are dead, I'd say your true Eternal colors are finally showing. Talia…well I think you know where we stand. You were the one that brought up our bond as Eternals years ago. One would think that you would be listening to that instinct now, but for some reason you're not. When you're ready to tell me, I'll be around." + +With those last words you leave Fort Defiance wondering if they'll ever face the truth. In the mean time you now have to figure out how to fight a one man war against the Empire. A daunting task to be sure, but part of you feels strangely free now that you've officially broken away from the shadows. Time will tell if you've broken away from Dendrin however. +> Time passes… +Year 30 + +You throw another log on to the fire in an effort to keep warm. A futile task, but it's better than freezing. You'd like to stay in a town, but Empire troops seem to be everywhere in Rask nowadays ever since they halted the war with the Felkan Kingdom. From what you hear it wasn't exactly on favorable terms either, but you imagine that they needed to just so they had enough manpower to fight the rebellion. + +And if it isn't them, then it’s the shadows who you've had a few unfortunate runs in with over the past couple years. Seems Cyrus told everyone you were a heretic after all. You aren't really surprised though, you even understand it. He's trying to solidify his power base and he still sees you as a potential threat even though you have no desire to take anything he has, let alone the shadows. You haven't even heard Dendrin's voice since you left the shadows and while you're glad of that, it's still like everyone has completely abandoned you. (Your shadow magic abilities have weakened quite a bit, but aren't gone completely, so you're guessing Dendrin's probably still watching you for whatever twisted reason.) + +You wish you could figure out why Talia turned on you though, but the only answer you can come up with is her bond with the shadows was stronger than her bond with you despite everything you shared. + +It doesn't sadden you so much as it disappoints you though perhaps you had too much faith in the relationship. You laugh to yourself about that one since you probably lost faith in the Empire and Dendrin quicker than you did in Talia. Even now you still hold out the hope that she'll return to you and see that her own in Dendrin is incorrect. + +Of course this also makes you question why the hell you're still doing all this. Like fighting the Empire for instance, why are you still bothering? When you were first part of the shadows, you were united with them in their cause if not their reasons. It wasn't probably the best motivation, but it was enough for you at that point because back then you were so damn confused about who you should even be loyal to. + +When you got together with Talia, your motivation became stronger. However that motivation is all gone. Talia isn't around and the shadows have for the most part turned on you. Why bother? What are you getting out of it really? Even if the Empire does fall, then what? The shadows original plan was to go back to their old ways of private worship, but if Cyrus' leadership is any indication that plan will be thrown out. He'll most likely just try to carve out a nation of his own using similar oppressive measures. + +You doubt he'll get the chance though. Sure the Empire has been greatly weakened, but by your observations it'll eventually overwhelm the rebellion through sheer numbers alone and things will most likely go back to the way they were before and the people will just accept it. It's not like your efforts are even appreciated by anyone at this point. The more you think about it, the more you think how you probably should've just stayed loyal to the Empire. You would've saved yourself a whole lot of hassle. + +You wonder if you're just going through the motions because you don't have anything better to do. Though perhaps that's not entirely true, there is ONE thing that has stayed with you and that's your love of battle. + +You think that has to be a major part of it. You could be fighting Empire soldiers or shadows and it ultimately wouldn't matter to you (And it really doesn't at this point because they're both hostile to you) you just like getting into the thick of combat and striking down whatever enemy that's in your way. Makes you think you'd probably be better off working as a mercenary like those svelk do. Unfortunately you don't really have that option considering both sides of this conflict hate you. If you wanted to pursue that life you'd have to move on to a different land somewhere, after the world has to be a bigger place than what you've seen right? + +Still, you aren't and have never been motivated by money. You figure if it really is battle lust that's keeping you going then you might as well stay here since there's no shortage of it. And despite your brief period of re-assessing your situation, you are still hoping Talia will one day see the light and come back to you. + +In the meantime you're just going to have to live off the land and continue the fight though you don't even know how much longer that's going to last, Captain Kane has been pushing for final victory a lot harder lately. + +You know Cyrus has sent out assassination attempts against him, but they've all failed. Kane might not have the fancy shadow tricks, but he's still an Eternal and a pretty vicious one. Really you're sort of disappointed that Cyrus wouldn't at least try to do the deed himself, if he's serious about being a leader. + +Likewise Kane has tried to take Fort Defiance, but so far it has lived up to its name, the problem though is it won't for long. The Empire has slowly been putting down the major rebellions in the south, and Captain Roldan has been hunting the remaining shadows still down there and doing a good job of it too. This means more troops have been getting sent up to Rask lately. Not enough to finish off the shadows, but enough to start making a difference in swinging the long stalemate. + +It doesn't help that the alliance with the orcs has broken down with the shadows and you've heard rumors that their ring leader Gruz was finally caught in the act of sabotaging and misinformation and executed. Flog took it upon himself to take charge and didn't agree with how Cyrus was doing things since the orcs were still taking the brunt of the casualties. One would think this would've ended in bloodshed, but Flog apparently was remarkably forward thinking for an orc. + +Flog took the remainder of his people and headed even further north to where the giants, ogres and other manner of monsters make their homes. As far as he was concerned the Empire wasn't going to ever be able to extend its territory that far north in the state they're in and saw no more reason to waste more lives to help the shadows (who only saw them as tools anyway). + +As it stands the shadows, civilian dissidents and even some soldiers that turned traitor are about all that's left to defend Fort Defiance. Village and town support is next to nil now. There are probably still a few rebel bands hiding in the wilderness (much like you do) but you'd venture to say that they do even less damage than you do, which is pretty sad considering they at least have a bit more support and people than you do. + +This rebellion will be crushed in a few months if something doesn't change quickly and about the only thing that's going to do that at this point is doing something Cyrus has been failing to do: Killing Kane. Get him out of way and it'll probably take months for the Empire to get their shit together before they put in an equally competent person. (You'd guess that will probably be Roldan, but you'll have to deal with that later.) It'll give the rebellion a bit of breathing room up here in Rask at least. + +The question is how to do it. You could try to break into Fort Destiny, but security there is always at maximum and your shadow magic stealth tricks aren't as strong now. Even trying to disguise yourself as a guard might only get you so far. Still, you can always trust that your combat skills will get you through day if magic and trickery fail. + +You also could wait for an opportunity for Kane to leave the fort, he does do that from time to time when he wants to make an example of a town or engage in a major battle. The problem is the next major battle he'll probably engage in is trying to take Fort Defiance again, and by that time it'll be too late since he'll probably win this time. + +This means you're going to have to do something that'll make him so angry that he'll want to make an example of some hapless village that isn't falling in line with the Empire. +> Sneak into the fort +Elaborate plans usually mean more chance of failure, better to just stick with a simple assassination where you’re at least sure to face Kane. You make preparations mainly in the form of a making a strong poison. The shadows always used them on their bolts, but given that Kane’s an Eternal he’s not going to be floored by the stuff instantly. Ideally you’ll get a single shot while he’s asleep, but who knows how this is going to play out so you take the time to heavily poison several small throwing daggers you’ll take with you as well. Not very sporting perhaps, but you’re trying to accomplish a very difficult task by yourself as quickly as possible. + +The next day you make you way to the outskirts of Fort Destiny, making sure to avoid getting spotted by the multiple patrols along the way. One thing about the Empire is they typically stick to certain building designs. While you weren’t in Fort Defiance very long you do remember the layout. If you’re lucky, Fort Destiny’s layout should be similar. + +Sneaking about and scaling the walls of the fort aren’t really a problem for you. You don’t even need to rely on your magic that much. You make things easier for yourself by slitting the throat of an isolated guard in one of the towers and disguising yourself in his clothing and armor. It won’t fool everyone, especially if they take a closer look, but it should help. + +As you make your way through the fort you’re relieved to find that the layout is indeed very similar to Fort Defiant’s layout. This will make escape a lot easier. The closer you think you’re getting to Kane’s quarters the larger amount of soldiers standing around as guards. Eventually you get to a point where there’s no way you’ve going to be able to bluff or sneak your way in. You’re going to just have to kill them, the problem is that’s going to alert everyone. So you do the only thing you can think of. + +You cloak yourself and start tossing your poisoned throwing daggers at the soldiers. Naturally you catch them off guard and the poison is strong enough to kill them almost instantly. While you’ve cleared the way and done it as silently as you were able, there’s still enough noise of their lifeless bodies hitting the floor. + +This is just enough noise to alert Kane who was sleeping in his quarters, or perhaps he wasn’t sleeping since when he steps out of his room, he’s fully dressed in battle armor (It’s entirely possible he sleeps in it though) with axe in hand. + +He’s certainly as imposing as his reputation. + +Wasting no time you throw your remaining daggers at him and shoot your armbow bolt at him. The daggers unfortunately are deflected from his armor or he dodges them completely, the bolt sinks into his arm, but the poison doesn’t seem to slow him down. + +“Pfah! You shadows and your poisons. I developed immunities to those years ago! Now fight like a man!” he says and charges at you. + +You block his attack just barely. In fact he keeps on the pressure for a good five minutes before you can even maneuver in such a way to attack back. By this time more soldiers have arrived, but Kane shouts at them saying he wants to slay you himself. They obey, but there’s enough of them to block all the immediate exits. This is pretty grim, even if you win, you don’t see how you’re going to get out alive, unless you impress them so much with your victory that you break their morale. + +Of course first you have to win, and right now that’s looking more doubtful by the second. Kane is matching you in combat skill in everyway. In fact he’s actually a little bit better than you and you’re forced to rely on your shadow magic to give you a slight edge. + +It doesn’t give much of one though; Kane’s slaughtered so many shadows trying to assassinate him with magic that he’s developed his own battle style against them. Your own weak magic is more of a hindrance to you in the long run as you quickly begin to get fatigued from using it. + +“What’s the matter outcast? Weak magic, because you’re no longer Dendrin’s favored? Ha ha! I know who you are and you’re a disgrace to the name Eternal!” Kane remarks and slams you into the wall with all of his weight. You feel like all the air has left your body and you struggle to catch your breath when you receive another slam to your head with his metal gauntlet. + +Bleeding from your head and lying prone of the floor isn’t a great position during any sort of fight and this one is no exception. Kane wastes no time in finishing you off with an axe blow to your face. + +The Butcher of Rask has claimed another victory.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 30 + +You throw another log on to the fire in an effort to keep warm. A futile task, but it's better than freezing. You'd like to stay in a town, but Empire troops seem to be everywhere in Rask nowadays ever since they halted the war with the Felkan Kingdom. From what you hear it wasn't exactly on favorable terms either, but you imagine that they needed to just so they had enough manpower to fight the rebellion. + +And if it isn't them, then it’s the shadows who you've had a few unfortunate runs in with over the past couple years. Seems Cyrus told everyone you were a heretic after all. You aren't really surprised though, you even understand it. He's trying to solidify his power base and he still sees you as a potential threat even though you have no desire to take anything he has, let alone the shadows. You haven't even heard Dendrin's voice since you left the shadows and while you're glad of that, it's still like everyone has completely abandoned you. (Your shadow magic abilities have weakened quite a bit, but aren't gone completely, so you're guessing Dendrin's probably still watching you for whatever twisted reason.) + +You wish you could figure out why Talia turned on you though, but the only answer you can come up with is her bond with the shadows was stronger than her bond with you despite everything you shared. + +It doesn't sadden you so much as it disappoints you though perhaps you had too much faith in the relationship. You laugh to yourself about that one since you probably lost faith in the Empire and Dendrin quicker than you did in Talia. Even now you still hold out the hope that she'll return to you and see that her own in Dendrin is incorrect. + +Of course this also makes you question why the hell you're still doing all this. Like fighting the Empire for instance, why are you still bothering? When you were first part of the shadows, you were united with them in their cause if not their reasons. It wasn't probably the best motivation, but it was enough for you at that point because back then you were so damn confused about who you should even be loyal to. + +When you got together with Talia, your motivation became stronger. However that motivation is all gone. Talia isn't around and the shadows have for the most part turned on you. Why bother? What are you getting out of it really? Even if the Empire does fall, then what? The shadows original plan was to go back to their old ways of private worship, but if Cyrus' leadership is any indication that plan will be thrown out. He'll most likely just try to carve out a nation of his own using similar oppressive measures. + +You doubt he'll get the chance though. Sure the Empire has been greatly weakened, but by your observations it'll eventually overwhelm the rebellion through sheer numbers alone and things will most likely go back to the way they were before and the people will just accept it. It's not like your efforts are even appreciated by anyone at this point. The more you think about it, the more you think how you probably should've just stayed loyal to the Empire. You would've saved yourself a whole lot of hassle. + +You wonder if you're just going through the motions because you don't have anything better to do. Though perhaps that's not entirely true, there is ONE thing that has stayed with you and that's your love of battle. + +You think that has to be a major part of it. You could be fighting Empire soldiers or shadows and it ultimately wouldn't matter to you (And it really doesn't at this point because they're both hostile to you) you just like getting into the thick of combat and striking down whatever enemy that's in your way. Makes you think you'd probably be better off working as a mercenary like those svelk do. Unfortunately you don't really have that option considering both sides of this conflict hate you. If you wanted to pursue that life you'd have to move on to a different land somewhere, after the world has to be a bigger place than what you've seen right? + +Still, you aren't and have never been motivated by money. You figure if it really is battle lust that's keeping you going then you might as well stay here since there's no shortage of it. And despite your brief period of re-assessing your situation, you are still hoping Talia will one day see the light and come back to you. + +In the meantime you're just going to have to live off the land and continue the fight though you don't even know how much longer that's going to last, Captain Kane has been pushing for final victory a lot harder lately. + +You know Cyrus has sent out assassination attempts against him, but they've all failed. Kane might not have the fancy shadow tricks, but he's still an Eternal and a pretty vicious one. Really you're sort of disappointed that Cyrus wouldn't at least try to do the deed himself, if he's serious about being a leader. + +Likewise Kane has tried to take Fort Defiance, but so far it has lived up to its name, the problem though is it won't for long. The Empire has slowly been putting down the major rebellions in the south, and Captain Roldan has been hunting the remaining shadows still down there and doing a good job of it too. This means more troops have been getting sent up to Rask lately. Not enough to finish off the shadows, but enough to start making a difference in swinging the long stalemate. + +It doesn't help that the alliance with the orcs has broken down with the shadows and you've heard rumors that their ring leader Gruz was finally caught in the act of sabotaging and misinformation and executed. Flog took it upon himself to take charge and didn't agree with how Cyrus was doing things since the orcs were still taking the brunt of the casualties. One would think this would've ended in bloodshed, but Flog apparently was remarkably forward thinking for an orc. + +Flog took the remainder of his people and headed even further north to where the giants, ogres and other manner of monsters make their homes. As far as he was concerned the Empire wasn't going to ever be able to extend its territory that far north in the state they're in and saw no more reason to waste more lives to help the shadows (who only saw them as tools anyway). + +As it stands the shadows, civilian dissidents and even some soldiers that turned traitor are about all that's left to defend Fort Defiance. Village and town support is next to nil now. There are probably still a few rebel bands hiding in the wilderness (much like you do) but you'd venture to say that they do even less damage than you do, which is pretty sad considering they at least have a bit more support and people than you do. + +This rebellion will be crushed in a few months if something doesn't change quickly and about the only thing that's going to do that at this point is doing something Cyrus has been failing to do: Killing Kane. Get him out of way and it'll probably take months for the Empire to get their shit together before they put in an equally competent person. (You'd guess that will probably be Roldan, but you'll have to deal with that later.) It'll give the rebellion a bit of breathing room up here in Rask at least. + +The question is how to do it. You could try to break into Fort Destiny, but security there is always at maximum and your shadow magic stealth tricks aren't as strong now. Even trying to disguise yourself as a guard might only get you so far. Still, you can always trust that your combat skills will get you through day if magic and trickery fail. + +You also could wait for an opportunity for Kane to leave the fort, he does do that from time to time when he wants to make an example of a town or engage in a major battle. The problem is the next major battle he'll probably engage in is trying to take Fort Defiance again, and by that time it'll be too late since he'll probably win this time. + +This means you're going to have to do something that'll make him so angry that he'll want to make an example of some hapless village that isn't falling in line with the Empire. +> Lure him out +If you actually had a little help, you probably would be able to pull off killing him in the fort, but the risks are too great and while you might have a love of battle, you also have a strong sense of self-preservation. So luring Kane out it is. + +The next day you come up with a plan and your first step is seeking out a lone peasant. It doesn't take long and after you get him to calm down you ask him a few simple questions such as if he has family, where he lives, is he part of the rebellion, etc. + +Happily he's pretty informed on things being a travelling peddler and all. He ultimately tells you he has no ties to the rebellion, but he's aware of certain villages that he's visited that still have sympathies a lot stronger than they let on. You make a note of where to head to for the third step of your plan. The second step involving killing the peasant and disguising yourself as him, well not as him, but as another wandering merchant. + +After disposing of his body you set off towards the town of Volgst. You start off by assessing the Empire strength there. It's moderate, but nothing that couldn't be handled. It's obvious the people are just trying to go about their business, but if what the peddler said was correct, this place has just been temporarily cowed into submission due to occupation and closer proximity to Fort Destiny. + +You decide to head to the local tavern and take in some of the atmosphere. You order a drink sit at a table in the corner and pretend you're just going through some of your inventory. You get a few people asking you about some of the jewelry you have on the table. To you it looks cheap and it probably is, so you don't charge much, just what you think its worth since you aren't here for that anyway. + +You sit there a few hours and then finally some Empire soldiers come through the door. The tavern gets a bit quieter and that's when you decide to make things louder again. + +"Hey barkeep! Gimme another ale!" you shout walking up to the bar interrupting the soldiers who were attempting to order their own drinks. +"Uh, hold on sir. I just have to serve these gentlemen first." +"Oh come on, I was here first and they aren't supposed to be drinking on the job anyway!" + +At this point one of the soldiers addresses you. + +"We happen to be off duty right now citizen." +"Off duty? When there are rebels running around all over the place? What the hell man? You should be out there killing the sons of bitches, not getting drunk!" +"I can assure you we are, and citizen you need to calm down." +"Why is it taking so long anyway? Is that captain of yours just sitting on his fat ass in that fort all day while rebels terrorize the area? I thought the Empire was supposed to be doing something about it, but it looks like it's as impotent as ever!" + +At this point now several bar patrons start to take notice, some try to get you to calm down, others just outright leave. The soldiers to your surprise haven't tried to kill you yet. It's almost like they're trying to diffuse the situation and dismiss you as some loudmouth drunk because all they really want to do is relax after a long day. Oddly enough, you can understand it, unfortunately you can't relax either. + +You step it up and physically push one of the soldiers. That does it, and the swords come out. You kill two soldiers almost immediately, the third one runs off for help, leaving the fourth one to try to finish you off. He fails miserably when you run your sword through his chest. + +Three bodies lay at your feet and several patrons are in shock along with a very scarred bartender. + +"What the fuck did you just do? We're all dead men!" he screams. +"You were dead long before I got here. Now if you want to live, you'll help me fight these Empire assholes and get them the hell out of this town." +"You dumb fuck, don't you realize they'll just send more troops? The Butcher of Rask himself will probably come here himself and lay waste to the entire town!" +"That's what I'm counting on. Now I know this place still has rebellion sympathies, and I'm telling you right now, if you really want to be free of the Empire you'll start helping me rather than hiding…or don't if your conviction is lacking. Either way I'm stepping outside and I'm going to be killing Empire soldiers and I'm not stopping until all of them are fucking dead. Do what you like." + +You take your leave at this point and face the small platoon of soldiers that is running in your direction. You don't use any shadow magic, just pure skill to put soldier after soldier down. After you've killed about six of them in the open street, some of the citizens actually start growing a backbone and begin to help. + +A riot ensues and you've accomplished your mission. The remaining soldiers are quickly overwhelmed and those that aren't manage to run off. You could easily catch up with them, but you figure Kane will show up quicker if someone's alive to talk about what happened. While the celebrating is going on, you take the opportunity to slip away before someone holds you up as some sort of hero when you really aren't. This is all just a means to an end to you. + +Your escape back into the wilderness isn't completely unnoticed though and you draw your weapon again when you sense yourself being followed. + +"Alright I know somebody is following me…shadowing me even. Might as well come out now so we can get this over with because no cloak is going to help hide you." + +A lone shadow materializes. To your surprise it's Brother Gannon. He's little older now and a lot more worn looking, almost beaten. He has no intention of trying to kill you. + +"Did you have to do that? That place was one of the few towns left that was still able to sneak supplies to us! When Kane finds out what happened he's going to destroy the place! We're suffering from a lack of supplies and allies as it is!" he exclaims. +"Yeah? Well maybe if Cyrus was taking a more personal hand in this war like I just did, he'd be inspiring more people to follow him more openly. What the hell happened to him? I've been out here on my own for five fucking years and I've seen nothing but Cyrus make mistake after mistake! Pulling back and attempting to lay low? Losing your orc allies? Not reconnecting with the shadows south of Rask?" +"Actually we did try to do that, but…(sigh) nevermind you're right it's all gone horribly wrong. Master Cyrus' leadership isn't like Master Ebon's. I mean I know he's the one that's guiding us and speaking to Dendrin personally, but his need for control is so uncompromising sometimes. As much as I hate it, I'm actually glad I got assigned to be this town's liaison, anything to be out of that fort! He keeps saying that Dendrin won't let us lose and that final victory will come, but it seems so bleak now. I'm trying to keep the faith, I'm really trying, but…oh why won't Dendrin just hear our prayers and help us now?" + +You shake your head and smile at the delusion that continues to plague the shadows. "Why should he? It's more amusing for him to see you all desperately try to squirm out of your hopeless situation." + +This cynical (yet true) answer is met with a dead silence. Poor Gannon looks so forlorn that he's probably agreeing with you in his head. Gannon might come in useful though so you decide to try to not break his spirit completely. + +"However, MAYBE Dendrin did answer your prayers, namely in the form of me. I probably just bought you all a little more time." You add. +"What? Your big plan to kill Kane? The Butcher of Rask? I heard you down there in the tavern! If Captain Kane even comes he's going to come with a company of elite soldiers not by himself! Besides, Cyrus sent the best shadows against him and he's killed them all! Why do you think you have a chance?" +"Simple. I'm an Eternal and if Cyrus remembered that he was instead some Dendrin worshipping fool, we wouldn't be in this situation now." +"Yeah? Well Sister Talia is one of you Eternals too, she could've done something as well. I don't see you blaming her." + +You grab Gannon by his collar before he can react. You stop yourself from killing him, because you know he's just pissed at his lot in life right now. Not to mention he's got a point. + +"You know what you're right. She could've. It's not really important right now though, what IS important is that we get prepared for Kane's arrival." +"We?" +"Oh yes. You want to help turn things around, you'll help me." +"How?" + +How is a good question. The easiest way is to have him help you organize the townsfolk so that they can at least put up a good fight against the soldiers while you take care of Kane. + +The long shot would be to send him back to Fort Destiny to explain your plan and hope he can convince the shadows to come help you. It's a gamble, but maybe Cyrus hates the Empire just a little more than he hates you. +> Send Gannon back +While the people of this town can probably put up a bit of resistance, they aren't going to last too long if Gannon is to be believed. You need some help of worth, so you tell Gannon that he needs to go report back to his master. + +"What? Master Cyrus isn't going send anyone to help a heretic like you!" +"He will if he wants to keep this town still supplying you lot. I'm not asking him to come down here himself, since I know that would be too much for him now, but I'm saying he could at least send some shadows down here to help kill someone who is detrimental in your continued existence. However, regardless of what you or Cyrus decide I’m going to be fighting the Empire, because contrary to popular belief, I'm not your enemy.” + +And with those words you head back to your campsite to get prepared. You check up on the town the next day and see they’re already starting to barricade the place. If they’re lucky, you figure they’ll only lose about a half of the town before the battle is over. A couple days later you scout a little further south of Volgst and that’s when you see a large group of soldiers approaching. Several on horseback, many more on foot and unfortunately a single catapult as well. If Kane is actually with them, you’d guess he’d be on horseback, but then you can’t tell at this distance. + +You find a good elevated spot in some trees and when the mass of troops get in range you do a little sniping with your bow which you’ve gotten a lot better with over these past five years thanks to your need to hunt on a regular basis (And certainly a lot better than your single shot armbow which you practically never use anymore) You fire at the ones on horseback first, you don’t get Kane, but you do find out he’s the one that starts shouting the loudest about getting that sniping sonofabitch. Turns out he was walking the entire time. You try to aim for him, but now the chaos is so great within ranks that he wisely takes advantage of getting lost in the mass. + +Doesn’t take long before they figure out where it’s coming from and start responding in kind. You immediately dash from your position and retreat deeper into the wilderness. A group of soldiers are sent to look for you though you dispatch them with relative ease as you use the terrain to your advantage. + +By the time you’re done with the goon squad that was sent after you, the rest of them are hastening their way towards Volgst. If Cyrus is sending anyone, they’re obviously coming at the eleventh hour, or more likely not at all. Can’t say you’re surprised, but it would’ve been nice to have some help. + +When you make it back to the outskirts of Volgst, you see that it’s prepared for a frontal assault. You watch from distance for about a half hour before Kane’s company arrives. He doesn’t bother with any sort of diplomacy and orders the catapult to fire. A rock smashes through the barricades and the make shift wall that was set up in front of the town. They’re wide open for the Empire troops to pour in now, with the Butcher leading the way. + +You make your way towards town and jump into the battle, which naturally isn’t going well for the citizens of Volgst. When you arrive it gets a little better, but even you can’t stop the carnage and what will probably be the utter destruction of Volgst. Right now though all you’re trying to do is seek out Kane and kill him. + +And as luck would have it, you bump into him, or rather the pair of you catch sight of each other in the middle of the chaos. He doesn’t dodge you or even make any sort of threatening war cry, he just walks straight towards you and you to him. + +When he stands before you, he certainly displays the signs of a battle-hardened warrior, but there’s something more to it than just his size, armor and scars. It’s his eyes. Not like a hate filled wraith behind them, but more like he’s experienced something that’s caused the light in them to go out. Almost soulless. + +“The Butcher of Rask, himself. At last we meet.” You say. +“Yes, and you would be the shadow outcast and it will be a pleasure to finally bring you to the Emperor’s justice that you’ve evaded for so long.” +“Hmm, guess you better get to it then.” + +Kane swings his axe, which you dodge and the battle is joined. + +“You’re weak. You cannot hope to win this battle.” He says preparing for another swing. +“Right now, just getting rid of you will be sufficient.” You reply. +“You think you can best me? This isn’t Mistress’ class anymore and you’re no Eternal. When I look at you, I see the mockery of what is supposed to be an Eternal. You’re not even a shadow. You are a pariah that has no honor at all. You’re part of the sickness that has infected the Empire. A sickness that will be cut out and purified like all others.” + +While Kane tells you what he really thinks about you, he’s also matching you in combat skills. To be quite honest you might’ve been a little too over confident in your abilities because he’s really putting you to the test. It doesn’t help that in the midst of this one on one fight you also have to dodge other attacks. You use a little shadow magic to speed yourself up and it helps, but it isn’t nearly as strong as it once was not to mention you feel the drain a lot quicker. You land a couple of good hits on Kane before you have to stop from fatigue. Kane however has no such problems and isn’t slowed at all by his wounds + +“Is that the extent of your precious shadow magic outcast? No wonder you were kicked out.” Kane says and catches you with a glancing blow across your chest followed by a hefty to your left knee, which causes you to lose balance and fall. You barely roll of the way of his next swing. + +You stagger back up only to get your sword knocked out of your hand when you attempt to block another of Kane’s axe blows. Becoming desperate you fire your armbow and a bolt flies into Kanes chest. It doesn’t stop him and he charges into you knocking you back onto the ground. He doesn’t follow up with his axe this time, instead he puts all his crushing weight upon your chest by sitting on it and attempting to choke the life out of you with his own hands. + +“You’re going to die here today, because you believe in nothing and that makes you nothing and when I’m finished choking the life out of your pathetic body I’m going to eat your fucking heart because I can.” Kane at this point pauses with a deranged little smirk. “Heh, maybe one of those wendigo bastards did get to me just a little…” then his face becomes deadly serious again. + +As you struggle to remain conscious all you can see are the souless eyes of Kane looking down upon you as he intends to make good on his threats. You punch him several times in the face to no avail. You even take out one of his eyes and he’s still not deterred as it dangles uselessly from its bloody socket. You’d probably be a lot more scared if you weren’t teetering on passing out. + +During this walk along the line of life and death a familiar numbness washes over you and you hear a voice you haven’t heard in a long time… + +“You’re lucky I still find you interesting.” Dendrin says and then within that moment you feel Kane’s hand release their death grip followed by him bellowing in pain. His weight is soon lifted off you and you attempt to regain your assessment of the situation. + +Still feeling woozy you grab a nearby sword and see Kane (with a brand new bloody dagger in his back) fighting what looks to be a blurry shadowy figure. It’s Talia and you’re glad to see her in more ways than one. + +Wasting no time, you run up behind Kane and hamstring him. He falls to his knees cursing you the entire time. Talia follows up with a slash to his neck. + +“(gurgle) Long live (sputter) the…Em (gurgle) pire…” he utters and falls to the ground dead. + +You take a quick look around at your surroundings and see that most of the town has indeed been destroyed or on fire. Bodies are everywhere, but it looks like what remains of the Empire is in retreat mainly due to the death of their leader who you have to agree was a pretty impressive figure. As for the townsfolk, a lot of them are just trying to help their wounded along with open grieving for their dead. + +The one thing you aren’t seeing are any shadows. Well other than Talia of course who is now walking towards you. + +“Thank you.” you say to Talia still trying to catch your breath. +“You know that’s not necessary, but I do question what the hell you were thinking attempting to take on not just the infamous Bane of Rask by yourself, but a whole company of Empire troops as well.” +“I thought I was trying to change the tide of the rebellion, because if you haven’t noticed it isn’t going well for you.” +“I’m surprised you even still consider it your concern actually. You don’t believe in the Emperor, you don’t believe in Dendrin, why bother taking any side? You could’ve just left years ago.” +“First of all you do know I believe in Dendrin, I just don’t worship him. Second of all I made a vow to you years ago and I’ve never abandoned it. So if your fight is still with the Empire then my fight is also still with the Empire. Besides, I’ve always believed the Empire is made up of a bunch of arrogant oppressive bastards that need to be taken down a peg anyway. So where are the rest of the shadows?” +“There aren’t any. I’m it. Cyrus had no intention of helping you, in fact he even killed poor Brother Gannon for not attempting to kill you when he had the chance. That’s when I left.” +“Didn’t he try to stop you?” +“He made threats, but ultimately did nothing other than saying I was a heretic and mentioned that I would be considered an enemy of the shadows from now on.” +“Well I’d probably tell you right now that you should’ve done that a long time ago, but considering you just saved my life, I won’t.” + +Talia shakes her head. +“You realize you just said, “I told you so” anyway don’t you? Doesn’t matter though because my reasons for leaving are slightly different than yours. I still believe in Dendrin, I just don’t believe in Cyrus, at least not anymore. Though I was questioning his leadership ability for a few years now. Guess this suicidal attempt of taking on the Empire by you was just the final kick I needed to get me to leave because I never abandoned my vow to you either. So thank you as well.” +“Not necessary.” You say with a smile and the pair of you embrace. + +There are still a lot of unresolved issues between you and Talia, but none of those really matter right now. What does matter is that when you needed help she helped you thus reconfirming your belief that not all your waiting was for naught. As for Dendrin, you can’t really be sure if he actually had anything to do with guiding her to you, or if he’s just giving the impression that he did, either way you’re still not worshipping him. + +Though you imagine you’ll have plenty of time to debate about religious philosophy with Talia now that the pair of you are reunited, it’s just a question of where you’re going to go and do now. +> Time passes... +Year 31 + +Sometimes it seems surreal that the Empire hasn’t attempted to retake Rask yet, but then there have been a few major changes all decidedly not in the favor of the Empire. + +First off, Kane’s death was a bigger deal than even you thought it would be. Kane’s “Butcher of Rask” infamy wasn’t exactly the most efficient way of keeping the plebs in line, but it was working better than nothing at all. Not to mention it was also keeping his command in line as well. When he died, Empire troop morale in Rask dropped and the native Raskians’ morale went up significantly. The towns finally unified enough that they declared Rask to be independent of Empire law and rule. + +You figured the Empire would send more troops to re-establish order, but instead they started withdrawing from the area entirely. Apparently some of the shadows still causing problems for the Empire south of Rask started engaging in suicidal tactics and taking out high ranking commanders, including Captain Roldan (Who you always thought would’ve been one of the first to be sent to Rask) With this set back, the Empire decided it would be better to crush all the opposition in places where they at least had a majority of control, hence Rask was left alone for now at least. + +In the meantime, the shadows are…well a shadow of their former selves. It is almost quite certain that all of them south of Rask are being ruthlessly hunted to extinction and there weren’t many left in the first place (even less when they started with suicide tactics). The last shadow “stronghold” is Fort Defiance where presumably Cyrus still rules over his small group of brainwashed followers. You say presumably because nobody has heard anything from them since Kane was killed. You haven’t even been the target of any revenge assassination attempts. The place is still intact, but has effectively closed itself off from the outside world. Despite the major shadow influence on starting the rebellion in the first place and people helping them in the past, nobody is in any particular hurry to thank them and Fort Defiance is looked upon as a monastery of religious fanatics that should be steered clear of. + +As for you and Talia, you’re exceptions, but not by much. You were known as a shadow outcast long before Kane’s death so nothing much has changed with how people treat you, though sometimes you get a few small thank yous for directly being involved in Kanes death, then on the flip side you also get a few fuck yous for indirectly being involved in the near total destruction of Volgst. + +Talia on the other hand doesn’t get much of either. It’s somewhat known that she was the one that actually killed Kane, but due to her continued dedication to Dendrin, she’s just looked upon as one of the “acceptable” religious fanatics, rather than any sort of hero. Not to mention nobody wants to piss off the killer of the Kane. + +In keeping with your outcast nature you and Talia have made yourself at home in one of the many abandoned cabins in the wilderness. It’s not much, but after fixing it up it’s a suitable home. You both are fairly self sufficient + +While things are currently peaceful, you’re finding it harder and harder to find ways to pass the time. Part of you is always on guard believing that one day the Empire will eventually come back or even closer to home, that shadows will attempt to kill you. You’ve set up many traps and scouted several potential escape routes as possible. Even with that large of a concern you’re still left with a lot of extra time which is mostly spent with Talia and that’s becoming another situation lately. + +Talia is also finding herself restless, possibly even more than you are. Part of the problem is that she was once part of a bigger community that she identified with and now she is effectively isolated from that community. That isn’t the only the problem though, she still believes in Dendrin and the “shadow way” and namely that means all her ideals and plans for the future have practically gone by the wayside. She once stated to you that one of the reasons why she bonded with you is because she had this idea that when the Empire was brought down you and her would spawn several Eternal shadows to become little Dendrin worshippers and presumably strengthen the community because of it. + +Well, the Empire hasn’t fallen, the shadows are near extinct and Talia hasn’t gotten pregnant despite how much the pair of you have had sex. To be quite honest you were never really paying too much attention to that last one until Talia started bringing it up recently. You always figured she was using some sort of shadow magic to prevent such a thing in the past due to how inconvenient it would be (You know planning a rebellion and all), but now in this time of “peace” it’s been brought to your attention that something must be seriously wrong. + +Given that you weren’t really a true shadow to begin with, the whole legacy thing wasn’t really something you were placing a priority on, though you do find it a bit odd. You can only come up with the conclusion that you, her or perhaps both of you just can’t produce offspring. Talia on the other hand feels that something NEEDS to be done to try to correct this, and that something is placing greater faith in Dendrin to bless you with children. + +This in it of itself is asking the impossible of you, but Talia also wants to travel to the Delerg province to locate his original temple. She remembers where it is and she figures that perhaps the connection to him will be stronger there. + +As one can imagine this has caused a great source of arguing on your part. Disregarding the fact that Derlerg is still Empire territory and that both of you aren’t exactly wanted there, there’s also the fact that you’re never going to “believe” in Dendrin like Talia, no matter how much she wants you to. The best you’d be able to do is fake it, and you’ve tried that before, didn’t work for you. You also aren’t really convinced that he’d bless you with children anyway, given how unhelpful he is in the first place and that’s assuming he’s even able to do such a thing. + +However, all of these arguments have fallen on semi-deaf ears. Talia is quite aware of your feelings on the matter, but she would like you to make the attempt. She tries to point out that Dendrin has been guiding or at least looking out for you in some way, because if he wasn’t he wouldn’t have spoken to you on a regular basis in the past or guided her to you when Kane was getting the better of you. If that were anyone else telling you about that last one, you’d think they’d be trying to get you to do what they want as “payment” for saving your life. However, given that it’s Talia, you know she’s being sincere in her belief, which makes it even harder to argue against since you can at least understand the idea of owing someone. + +At this point, if you really insisted on staying put you aren’t sure if Talia wouldn’t just leave again, after all she did put her faith of Dendrin over you before. This makes you question if this is even going to work out to anyway. Sure, you and Talia have had some good times in the distant past and even recently, but this just might be an obstacle that’s always going to be between you both and going to be insurmountable. +> Stay in Rask +Maybe Talia’s a believer, but you’re not and you aren’t about to go traveling across miles of hostile territory, let alone staying in it, just for the purpose of her religious beliefs. You’ve put up with enough of Dendrin and this shadow nonsense long enough and you’re not pointlessly risking your life because of it. You put your foot down and tell Talia that she can worship Dendrin all she wants, but you’re not going on some fool pilgrimage in the hopes of having children. + +Talia doesn’t argue anymore, she just resigns herself to her defeat. However, things between the pair of you are noticeably strained now, if they weren’t already. + +Year 33 + +She hadn’t been happy in a long time, you knew that due to the fact the pair of you barely spoke to each other anymore. You even figured you’d wake up or return from hunting one day and she’d be gone like last time. But you didn’t think it would be like this. + +You finish covering up her snowy grave and stand there for a while cursing the whole situation. The suicide note simply stating the words “I’m sorry” will forever be embedded in your mind. + +The thing is you don’t think it was just the conflict of religious beliefs or even the desire to have child (which was tied to her belief of Dendrin being able to help in that matter). To be sure those two factors probably didn’t help, but you always got the impression there was something else. Something you think she wanted to tell you, but couldn’t for some reason. + +Doesn ‘t matter now whatever the case may be. She’s dead and that’s that. + +You return to your cabin. + +Year 35 + +You always knew the Empire would come back to Rask, but you thought they’d come back to conquer it, not destroy it. + +There were always rumors, but you never paid too much attention most of the time mainly because you had so much else going on in your life, but when the announcement of the Empire’s new eternals came about, you had no choice but to pay attention especially since there was a lot more of them, hundreds actually. And the first place they sent them was to Rask to raze the place to the ground. + +Town after town has been completely obliterated by these new eternals and the people no matter how united can’t stop them. Some have tried to pledge their allegiance to the Empire again, but they were killed like everyone else. Not since the days of Kane has Rask experienced such brutality on a wide scale. + +You thought what remnants of the shadows are left would be trying to do more, but so far there hasn’t been a peep from them. Cyrus seems content on keeping all of them hold up in Fort Defiance. It won’t work because you know that they’re the main target, the rest is probably just combat practice and to send a message. When the time comes, Fort Defiance and all the shadows within are going to massacred. You’ve toyed with the idea that you could probably easily evade the advancing army if you went further north and laid low in the mountains or deep forests. You’re pretty confident that you’d be able to survive this onslaught that way. + +The thing is you’ve sort of lost the will to go on. You haven’t been the same since Talia died. Even when you were apart for five years the hope of her returning was still there to keep you going. Even when your relationship had been strained in the last years of her life she was at least still there. But now? She’s dead and she won’t be coming back and there’s no more reason for you to fight the Empire any longer. Even Dendrin hasn’t spoke to you in years; you’re guessing he’s moved on. Makes sense given that you haven’t been very entertaining lately. + +From your estimates an army should be passing through your area soon, you need to get prepared… + +The next day you visit Talia’s grave for the last time. + +“For what’s worth… I’m sorry too Talia.” You say and head towards the main road. + +You stand in the center and see a massive force in the distance, won’t be long now you think as you draw your weapon. Several hundred eternals march straight towards you on foot and horseback. They don’t even stop to see if this is possibly an ambush of some sort. Perhaps they don’t care or are confident that if it is, they’ll be able to handle it. + +Doesn’t take long before you can hear them shouting about how they’re going to enjoy killing you and the rest of your shadow “friends”. You can’t help but smile at that one. + +You do about as well as someone could be expected against an army of eternals. Meaning you kill about three of them, before you’re enthusiastically overwhelmed and ultimately chopped, stabbed, crushed and stomped into bloody pieces. + +You last dying thoughts are how these new eternals might be young but they’re already vicious bastards. Didn’t seem very disciplined though. Who knows, perhaps they will eventually become a problem for the very Empire that created them. + +You certainly did.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 31 + +Sometimes it seems surreal that the Empire hasn’t attempted to retake Rask yet, but then there have been a few major changes all decidedly not in the favor of the Empire. + +First off, Kane’s death was a bigger deal than even you thought it would be. Kane’s “Butcher of Rask” infamy wasn’t exactly the most efficient way of keeping the plebs in line, but it was working better than nothing at all. Not to mention it was also keeping his command in line as well. When he died, Empire troop morale in Rask dropped and the native Raskians’ morale went up significantly. The towns finally unified enough that they declared Rask to be independent of Empire law and rule. + +You figured the Empire would send more troops to re-establish order, but instead they started withdrawing from the area entirely. Apparently some of the shadows still causing problems for the Empire south of Rask started engaging in suicidal tactics and taking out high ranking commanders, including Captain Roldan (Who you always thought would’ve been one of the first to be sent to Rask) With this set back, the Empire decided it would be better to crush all the opposition in places where they at least had a majority of control, hence Rask was left alone for now at least. + +In the meantime, the shadows are…well a shadow of their former selves. It is almost quite certain that all of them south of Rask are being ruthlessly hunted to extinction and there weren’t many left in the first place (even less when they started with suicide tactics). The last shadow “stronghold” is Fort Defiance where presumably Cyrus still rules over his small group of brainwashed followers. You say presumably because nobody has heard anything from them since Kane was killed. You haven’t even been the target of any revenge assassination attempts. The place is still intact, but has effectively closed itself off from the outside world. Despite the major shadow influence on starting the rebellion in the first place and people helping them in the past, nobody is in any particular hurry to thank them and Fort Defiance is looked upon as a monastery of religious fanatics that should be steered clear of. + +As for you and Talia, you’re exceptions, but not by much. You were known as a shadow outcast long before Kane’s death so nothing much has changed with how people treat you, though sometimes you get a few small thank yous for directly being involved in Kanes death, then on the flip side you also get a few fuck yous for indirectly being involved in the near total destruction of Volgst. + +Talia on the other hand doesn’t get much of either. It’s somewhat known that she was the one that actually killed Kane, but due to her continued dedication to Dendrin, she’s just looked upon as one of the “acceptable” religious fanatics, rather than any sort of hero. Not to mention nobody wants to piss off the killer of the Kane. + +In keeping with your outcast nature you and Talia have made yourself at home in one of the many abandoned cabins in the wilderness. It’s not much, but after fixing it up it’s a suitable home. You both are fairly self sufficient + +While things are currently peaceful, you’re finding it harder and harder to find ways to pass the time. Part of you is always on guard believing that one day the Empire will eventually come back or even closer to home, that shadows will attempt to kill you. You’ve set up many traps and scouted several potential escape routes as possible. Even with that large of a concern you’re still left with a lot of extra time which is mostly spent with Talia and that’s becoming another situation lately. + +Talia is also finding herself restless, possibly even more than you are. Part of the problem is that she was once part of a bigger community that she identified with and now she is effectively isolated from that community. That isn’t the only the problem though, she still believes in Dendrin and the “shadow way” and namely that means all her ideals and plans for the future have practically gone by the wayside. She once stated to you that one of the reasons why she bonded with you is because she had this idea that when the Empire was brought down you and her would spawn several Eternal shadows to become little Dendrin worshippers and presumably strengthen the community because of it. + +Well, the Empire hasn’t fallen, the shadows are near extinct and Talia hasn’t gotten pregnant despite how much the pair of you have had sex. To be quite honest you were never really paying too much attention to that last one until Talia started bringing it up recently. You always figured she was using some sort of shadow magic to prevent such a thing in the past due to how inconvenient it would be (You know planning a rebellion and all), but now in this time of “peace” it’s been brought to your attention that something must be seriously wrong. + +Given that you weren’t really a true shadow to begin with, the whole legacy thing wasn’t really something you were placing a priority on, though you do find it a bit odd. You can only come up with the conclusion that you, her or perhaps both of you just can’t produce offspring. Talia on the other hand feels that something NEEDS to be done to try to correct this, and that something is placing greater faith in Dendrin to bless you with children. + +This in it of itself is asking the impossible of you, but Talia also wants to travel to the Delerg province to locate his original temple. She remembers where it is and she figures that perhaps the connection to him will be stronger there. + +As one can imagine this has caused a great source of arguing on your part. Disregarding the fact that Derlerg is still Empire territory and that both of you aren’t exactly wanted there, there’s also the fact that you’re never going to “believe” in Dendrin like Talia, no matter how much she wants you to. The best you’d be able to do is fake it, and you’ve tried that before, didn’t work for you. You also aren’t really convinced that he’d bless you with children anyway, given how unhelpful he is in the first place and that’s assuming he’s even able to do such a thing. + +However, all of these arguments have fallen on semi-deaf ears. Talia is quite aware of your feelings on the matter, but she would like you to make the attempt. She tries to point out that Dendrin has been guiding or at least looking out for you in some way, because if he wasn’t he wouldn’t have spoken to you on a regular basis in the past or guided her to you when Kane was getting the better of you. If that were anyone else telling you about that last one, you’d think they’d be trying to get you to do what they want as “payment” for saving your life. However, given that it’s Talia, you know she’s being sincere in her belief, which makes it even harder to argue against since you can at least understand the idea of owing someone. + +At this point, if you really insisted on staying put you aren’t sure if Talia wouldn’t just leave again, after all she did put her faith of Dendrin over you before. This makes you question if this is even going to work out to anyway. Sure, you and Talia have had some good times in the distant past and even recently, but this just might be an obstacle that’s always going to be between you both and going to be insurmountable. +> Travel to Delerg +Maybe you love Talia more than she loves you, or maybe you’re just tired of practically being a loner all the time and at least if you have Talia, you know you’ve got someone on your side. Whatever the reason, you tell Talia that you’re willing to go to Delerg with her. Her reaction is a happy one though she admits she’s a little surprised you agreed as quickly as you did. + +Later that night you fall asleep wondering how the hell you got yourself into this. + +Then a numbness washes over you… + +“So, ready to come back to the fold eh?” you hear Dendrin say. +“Hardly.” You reply. +“I didn’t think so, but you always continue to intrigue me. I mean here you are supporting a woman that obviously places faith over love. Why would you do such a thing? The Empire’s most fanatical soldiers have faith in their false Emperor and the shadows…what’s left of them still have faith in me yet they have no real proof that their respective masters approve of them or feel anything back. Yet you have proof that Talia’s faith in me is stronger than her love for you and you still stand by her.” +“Because I’m an idiot obviously.” +“That remains to be seen, but I don’t think so. In fact you’re being clever enough to avoid my question. Don’t think I haven’t noticed. Is it possible that you’re heading to into Empire territory in the hope of getting into major battle again? Has been awhile and I know you do enjoy it so.” + +You don’t answer, you just try to go back to waiting out this “dream”, but Dendrin isn’t letting you. + +“Passive silence? That’s not your usual tactic with me. You’ve always been a fighter, a warrior! But I’ll take that silence as a sign that I was right.” +“Take it however you want, but take it away from me.” +“Hmm, not sure if I like this new approach to our talks, but if I had an opinion on your decision, it’s that you’ve made the right one. I think that you’ll find something else in my old temple too. Well now you will since I’ve just mentally transferred the position of a very hidden place in it. Hope the baby situation works out for you, I think fatherhood would suit you, and it’ll give me a new follower! I’ll be watching as usual.” + +In the next few weeks you and Talia make your preparations to leave Rask. When you tell her that Dendrin spoke to you and placed the image of a stone “button” to reveal a secret part of the temple, Talia is again overjoyed and remarks that this is a good sign that he cares for your well being and merely wants your worship in return. You don’t bother saying what you really think, but instead just nod and tell Talia that perhaps she’s right and that maybe one day your faith in him will be as strong as hers. + +The journey is a long one, it probably wouldn’t be if you could actually use shadow magic to speed yourself up without passing out anymore, but since you’re not yet a “true believer” again, looks like ol’ Dendrin’s withholding the perks still. Doesn’t seem to bother Talia, she’s very positive during the whole trip. She talks about how you can both make your home in the temple and start your new lives there. She goes on about how you can also put out feelers on how the rebellion situation is going on in Delerg and how maybe you can get it split from the Empire like Rask did. You have to admit you don’t mind that idea. + +There are a few times on the trip through the Quala province you could’ve avoided combat with Empire patrols, but you deliberately engage them when the time is right. You make an effort to leave no survivors in these attacks; every dead soldier is a blow to the Empire right? + +Eventually you make it to Delerg and the place is crawling with Empire troops, it looks like they’ve really been trying to clean up around here. You keep a lower profile here and it takes a lot of sneaking around, but eventually you make it to Dendrin’s temple which have several rotten heads on pikes facing the temple along with several rotten bodies (partially eaten by the wildlife and insects) strewn around and even inside the temple. + +“These are shadows.” Talia says with a touch of sadness in her voice. +“I know…even with half her face covered in maggots I recognize that one. Sister Yvette. I always wondered what happened to her after I left her in charge of my cell when I went back to Gloom. (Sigh) I figured it would be something like this.” +“Do you think these are all the shadows that we lost contact with south of Rask?” +“Most of them I suppose. I guess maybe they had the same idea and made a last stand here where they thought Dendrin would protect them. Looks like…” you stop yourself from saying something completely negative like “he didn’t.” so you think of something slightly less negative and say: “they fought so hard that the Empire tried to make some sort of example out of them.” +“We need to take them down off the pikes.” Talia says. +“No we need to leave them be, since I’m sure the Empire has patrols come around here, and if they see all the heads suddenly gone, they’re going to correctly assume shadows are around. We need to keep a low profile if we’re going to stick around here remember?” +“I…suppose discretion would be best right now.” + +You and Talia move past the pike heads and enter the temple, which is surprisingly in good condition though signs of battle obviously took place here. You waste no time in seeking out the stone “button” that will open up a secret place in the temple. Eventually you find it (which you doubt you would’ve been able to do if Dendrin hadn’t told you) and descend down. + +What you find is better than you could’ve hoped for when you first arrived and that’s living quarters for what you presume would be for the old shadow high priests or whatever. It isn’t fancy, but it’s fairly clean. You imagine that this place hasn’t been accessed in centuries. The walls are very solidly made so it doesn’t even look like signs of any natural intrusion have occurred either. There is one “room” that sticks out which isn’t man made and that’s a small natural cavern, which seems to be an underground garden of some sort with a shallow stream of fresh water flowing through it. Blue glowing fungus lights up the place and there are no exits other than the small openings the water is flowing through. + +With no suspicion whatsoever Talia immediately takes some purple berries off one of the bushes and pops them in her mouth and remarks how good they taste. +“Hey those could be poisonous!” you exclaim. +“Oh you doubter, Dendrin lead us here! We won’t come to any harm! +“I’m being cautious. This cavern is strange; I mean wouldn’t a garden like this have overgrown or decayed without regular care? I imagine the water stream is seeping into the soil and sustaining them, but some of these plants wouldn’t survive without sunlight either.” +“It’s obviously magical and don’t you see? Dendrin provides as usual. We now have a good supply have fresh sustenance and water. Why question it, for it is one less thing to worry about! With this place we could easily hide underneath the Empire’s noses and strike from the shadows again.” Talia says. +“As long as they don’t call in their Derro buddies again, I agree that this will make a suitable hideout. I suppose you’re probably right about the garden being magical. Sort of odd though, never known Dendrin to be into the whole nature thing.” +“Well we cannot hope to know all of a god’s interests and thoughts. As I’ve said, why question it? It is enough that it’s something good and we could use that right now. Now come, we should thank Dendrin for this together.” + +As you join Talia in thanking Dendrin, you can’t help but wonder if this is all some elaborate plan by Dendrin to actually get you to be a true believer, or if he doesn’t really care if you believe, just as long as you’re going through the motions. + +Either way, you’ll do this for Talia because that’s who you’re really faithful to. +> Years pass... +Year 35 + +Despite your best efforts, stirring up more dissent in Delerg seems to be a losing battle. It’s not just the Empire though; it’s the people here in general. Most of them are content on being dominated. Funny how in the “birthplace” of the shadows, that rebellion would be less here. + +The best you’ve been able to do is organize small groups of society’s misfits, lowlifes and outright psychopaths and they’re just doing it for the shits and giggles for the most part, but whatever works at this point. + +You and Talia have been very careful about not giving the impression of any shadow activity in the area and that’s a good thing because lately the Empire has been throwing its weight around once more. Almost as if it’s gotten a second wind. + +And it has. + +There were always rumors, but you never paid too much attention most of the time mainly because you had so much else going on in your life, but when the announcement of the Empire’s new eternals came about, you had no choice but to pay attention especially since there was a lot more of them, hundreds actually. + +The first place they sent them was to Rask. Not surprising considering the Empire lost the territory. What wasn’t expected is that the Empire didn’t just send them to conquer the place. They sent them to destroy it. Town after town was completely obliterated by these new eternals and the people no matter how united couldn’t stop them. Some tried to pledge their allegiance to the Empire again, but they were killed like everyone else. Not since the days of Kane had Rask experienced such brutality on a wide scale. + +After most of the towns had been laid to waste, Fort Defiance was next. In fact this was the main objective in the first place. The rest of it? Just in the way and served to test the viciousness of the new eternals. Perhaps even to scare the remaining shadows still huddled up in that run down fort. “Defiance” was a reminder of an old wound. A loss. A humiliation. The Empire didn’t just lose a fort, or even a whole province; they lost it because of the shadows, the ones who caused all this in the first place. They had to be eliminated once and for all. + +You heard that the siege didn’t even last three days and Fort Defiance was destroyed along with all the remaining shadows inside. Cyrus himself was found dead with another male shadow (Who you presume was probably Draven) in an embrace. Apparently they had poisoned themselves rather than give the satisfaction to the Empire of killing them. + +Talia gets a little sad when she hears the news. While she left due to her feelings for you and Cyrus’ incompetence, she was there for five years and still considered them all her brothers and sisters. A loss of any of Dendrin’s faithful is a loss to all who revere him. + +While you aren’t exactly broken up about it, you certainly aren’t jumping for joy. Now that the Empire has satisfied its blood revenge on what they believed to be the last of the shadows, they’re going to unleash these new eternals on the rest of their provinces in full force too. They’ve already started deploying them in the Quala and Arat province. Delerg can’t be far behind. + +“While I hate to always be the cynic. Things are looking really damn bleak right about now Talia.” +“They’ve been bad before and we’ve still pulled through. Dendrin will preserve us and the Empire will fall.” +“Yeah…well…” +“Oh come on now my love, don’t tell me you’re starting to lose your faith again.” + +It’s always so charmingly naïve of Talia to believe that you’re not just faking everything. Still, even while faking it, you can’t help but be a “doubter” sometimes. + +“Well no…but we’re the last two shadows left Talia. I mean, sure Cyrus was obviously a bad leader and all that, but above all else he was a devoted worshipper of Dendrin along with all the rest. I have to question why Dendrin isn’t doing something more direct to help his own followers now more than ever.” +“Cyrus’ actions had obviously offended Dendrin, and he was punished along with all those that followed him. True, I weep for their passing, but they strayed from the teachings. They were no longer fighting the Empire or trying to carry out Dendrin’s will and as a result Rask was ravaged. We on the other hand were smart enough to leave and carry on the fight. For years now we’ve successfully hid ourselves right under the noses of the Empire. I know we’re careful, but we’re not that lucky. Dendrin has obviously clouded the Empire’s collective mindset from believing there are shadows here in Delerg. Your magic is back completely. I’d say Dendrin is looking out for only those that are worthy. When the Empire does finally fall, it will be a new era and it only takes two…” + +Talia takes your hand and looks into your eyes. + +“…to recreate the shadows stronger than ever.” + +While you’re glad Talia’s confidence in victory is so certain, you’re not convinced as usual. Even if Dendrin is helping you both out on some small level like Talia believes he is, he’s going to have to do a hell of a lot more. In the meantime you’re going to prepare yourself for the inevitable new eternal invasion. You begin setting up traps in and around the temple though you imagine the day when they actually get used is probably going to be the day you’re making your last stand. + +Months pass and you go through your usual routines of opposing the Empire, then that fateful day comes. A platoon of the new eternals arrive in Sinkhole. They aren’t there to destroy it, but they barely act like it. Under the cover of cloak you spy on them for a period of several days, and you see them routinely assaulting people even when there is no real cause for it other than pure sadistic glee. Even their non-eternal commander doesn’t have much control over them. Sometimes when he tells them to stop beating someone, they just look at him like he’ll be next. Whoever trained these eternals obviously didn’t do a good job, it’s like they have no discipline what so ever. + +That’s when you begin to wonder if the Empire hasn’t put the last nail in their own coffin. These monsters the Empire has unleashed upon the world are going to cause them more problems than they’re going to solve. You can see that even now. + +Another month passes and more of them arrive in Delerg. You and Talia engage small bands of them during their patrols, and they aren’t slouches in a fight either despite only being teenagers. Naturally when dead eternals start becoming more common, Delerg starts getting the thumbscrews put to it. While all the little villages in Delerg aren’t put to the torch a lot of them are. Sinkhole becomes a staging ground for public executions and worse. + +Eventually the few that were actually supporting the rebellion are all rounded up and killed. It gets harder and harder to sneak around the swamp ambushing patrols, and you and Talia never seem to get enough rest to recharge up your magic. + +And today is the day when all this catches up with you both… + +As you withdraw your sword from a dead foe, you hear the sounds of several bows being drawn behind you as well as above you. Fortunately, whoever is in charge has decided to be an overly dramatic fool and doesn’t attack immediately. You and Talia stand back to back trying to get a bit of a breather before the next assault. + +A young man appears from behind the archers. He’s obviously one of the new eternals though he’s wearing a captain’s rank, which strikes you as a bit odd. + +“Give it up shadow scum. Oh yes, we’ve figured out who you really are now. Should’ve known a few of you would’ve been sneaking around somewhere, but that ends now. You’ve exhausted yourselves and your magic won’t help you now. Even if you can outrun the arrows I’ve got eternals all over the swamp right now waiting for you in all directions.” The young captain sneers. +“The Empire getting so desperate they’re promoting babies now?” you say. +“The Empire is getting better now that we’re around. Our former captain was inferior so he was replaced. Only an eternal is fit to lead other eternals. Of course you two would know nothing about being real eternals having betrayed the Empire after all, but really even if you had stayed loyal, you’d be obsolete now anyway. Time to put an end to your kind in more ways than one.” +“You brats talk too much.” You say and you and Talia speed yourselves up to run back into the undergrowth and avoid the arrow barrage to come. + +You’re successful, but you’re getting really tired really fast. Even Talia is experiencing fatigue. You need to run to safety to get some temporary relief, but chances are if they know about you being shadows, they’ll assume you’ll run straight to Dendrin’s old temple where there might be a larger group of eternals waiting for you. +> Run to the sanctuary +Given that the captain said he had eternals all over the swamp, going deeper into it probably isn’t going to help. Hell, who knows what else could attack, not like the swamps are exactly a friendly place and all you need to do is get yourself killed stepping into quicksand because you’re tired and not paying proper attention. + +You and Talia race to the temple, dispatching eternals that get in your way, but the constant arrows flying from what seems to be everywhere are what prove to be the most hazardous in this gauntlet because despite your unnatural speed, it doesn’t make it impossible to get hit. + +“Ah! Damn it!” you hear Talia shout and fall to the ground. She’s got an arrow in her back by some lucky shot. You barely avoid getting shot yourself when you stop to pick her up. + +“You got enough in you to cloak yourself?” +“Yeah I think so…” +“Okay do it.” + +The pair of you cloak yourselves and you get out of the area as eternals continue to fire blindly at where they think you’re located. + +It takes you a little longer to make it back to the sanctuary under cloak, carrying Talia over your shoulder, as well as trying to avoid the eternals swarming the swamp, but eventually it’s in sight. Unfortunately you were right and a large group of eternals are stand watch around the place. + +You sneak by just long enough to make it to the steps and that’s when your own energy starts to give out and you collapse breaking your cover completely. First eternal that reaches you gets a sword blow to his face causing him to fall backwards into two of his fellows. You engage two more and Talia, despite having an arrow in her back manages to fight off another one. Though she’s still far from peak condition. A sword strike catches her across the leg and then a dagger is shoved into her stomach. Before you can react to help her, she manages to helps herself by slitting the throat of the eternal who believed her to be already defeated. + +Talia manages to drag herself into the temple while you attempt to fight the rest of the eternals off as long as you can. When you dispatch them you see more eternals begin to swarm out of the swamp and approach the temple. + +Finding Talia in the temple entry way bleeding out, you pick her up in your arms once again and make haste for the sanctuary. While you’re running down one of the corridors you hear the work of your various traps going into action when death screams echo throughout the temple. + +“I told you not to enter the place you fools! I knew this place was going to be trapped! We’ll wait them out!” you hear another voice shout. + +Nobody sees you enter your sanctuary and only when you seal it up do you take time to worry about how much Talia’s been hurt. It’s bad and while you’re good at fighting and even some basic first aid, you can’t fix this. Not even your magic can. + +“They’re going to be waiting awhile…we’ve got unlimited food and water down here…” Talia says. +“Shh, don’t speak. We gotta…Dendrin! Dendrin will help!” you say and start praying to Dendrin in desperation. + +After a few minutes of this, Talia speaks again. + +“Why are you praying…you don’t believe he’s going actually help anyway…you never have…it’s okay I know you did it for me. You’ve always done it all for me…that’s your real faith...” + +You stop and look at her; she looks so pale now due to the blood loss. + +“I’m going to go back up there and kill every last one of those sons of bitches!” you exclaim, trying to fight back the tears. +“No…stay here with me my love…please…” + +You hold on to her hand and watch as life slowly ebbs from her and eventually she begins to drift into unconsciousness. + +“I…heard him…” she says with a faint smile and then passes on. + +You sit by her side quietly sobbing in a small pool of her blood on the floor for what is probably an hour or so. Eventually you pull yourself together and do what needs to be done. You take her body to the garden and bury it there. It’s as fitting of a gravesite as any for her and really you don’t have many options right now anyway. + +You were tired when you arrived here and now after burying your beloved you’re exhausted along with being emotionally drained. If those new eternals come for you now they’re going to have to kill you in your sleep, because that’s what you do in the garden. + +Unconsciousness takes you followed by the numbness, though now the numbness is welcome. + +“You probably don’t believe it, but you have my sympathies Eternal. Talia was always devoted, no matter what hardship was thrown in her face, she always believed even if her own logic told her not to at times.” Dendrin says. +“And look where it got her.” +“Yes, and look where it got her. Are you honestly going to keep blaming me for everything tragic in your life? You could easily blame yourself for not being quick enough to help her, or those new eternals for killing her in the first place.” +“I’m done blaming you for anything, because ultimately you don’t DO anything, which is what I’ve been saying for years. Tell me, was it ever in your power to bless Talia with a child?” +“No.” +“Really? You admit this so freely? The great Dendrin admits to something he can’t do?” +“Why wouldn’t I? You know there are already limitations to my power so why tell you I can do something when I can’t? I’m not a fertility god and I can’t cure the sterility that infects you eternals.” +“Hold on, so you’re saying it wasn’t just Talia, it was me as well?“ +“Yes. Cyrus too, though it wouldn’t have mattered in his case. So I imagine it has something to do with the process of how you Eternals are magically altered. Perhaps it’s nature’s way of balancing itself out. Who knows? But procreating was never really on your high priority list nor was creating a new line of shadows, so the question is what are you going to do now?” +“Well when I wake up I intend on carrying out my promise of killing every one of those bastards up top.” +“For what purpose? Revenge? Talia already killed the one directly causing her mortal wound and killing the rest won’t bring her back. Even if you did manage to kill all the ones currently up there, more are just going to come and you’ll fall to them eventually.” +“Then that’s what will happen.” +“Eternal I urge you to reconsider. I know of your love of battle, I know it’s probably one of the few things that stirs something within you and ultimately that’s how you want to die. I can respect that. But I also know that you have a strong survival instinct as well. Not to mention I don’t think Talia would want you to just throw your life away on a hopeless battle when there is no need to.” +“Why the sudden sense of concern, afraid of losing your source of entertainment? Besides, I don’t think I’m going to have a choice anyway. If I wait down here, all they’re going to do is eventually storm the place anyway, traps or not. Then they’ll eventually find the button that leads down here.” +“You’re correct on the first assumption with the traps, but they won’t find out how to get down here. They just won’t, trust me.” +“Trust you? Are you trying to be funny?” +“Not at all, but you do what you want. I can’t stop you. I will say this though, despite our unstable relationship I think you do know I HAVE been looking out for in small ways. Perhaps I haven’t helped the way you’d like me to, but I have helped. And yes it is true that if you died I would be losing my favorite form of entertainment, but I do genuinely like you Eternal and I don’t see your part in this world at an end yet. Far from it actually, I still see much potential in you, but you’re going to have to be patient for a while. There is always time for revenge if you still desire it. Trust me.” + +You can’t argue with Dendrin on that one, he would know all about planning and waiting to make the right time to serve revenge. That’s what the rebellion started by the shadows’ was all about for the most part. He seems pretty adamant that you won’t be found down here, so you’re guessing he’s probably going to make it impossible for anyone to even stumble upon the hidden button that leads down here. + +“Dendrin, I just have one more question. Did you really speak to Talia before she died?” +“Yes. As I said, as devoted as she was, she deserved to hear the voice of her god.” +“What did you say exactly?” +“Ha ha. I fear that would be telling Eternal and also a private matter. Let’s just say the words were of a comforting nature in her final moments of life.” +“Then I guess it was all worth it.” + +When you wake up, you don’t follow through with your suicidal plan of charging into battle and you decide to take Dendrin’s advice and wait. Fortunately the place is stocked with it’s own library. You never really bothered glance at the books before let alone read them, but there’s no time to start like the present. + +A few weeks pass and you start hearing noises from up above. You take that to mean that they finally got tired of waiting you out and are searching the temple along with many of them falling afoul of the traps no doubt. You stay alert at this time, believing that they will find their way down here eventually, but as Dendrin told you, they never do. + +At one point the whole underground sanctuary shakes and you hear several loud crashing noises from above. You’re ultimately okay, but if you had to guess they probably just destroyed the temple either with magic or maybe even with a catapult they dragged through the swamp. For all you know you might be trapped down here now, but you’re not worried. You’ll get out of here eventually, when you feel that the time is right. +> Years pass... +Chapter 3B2: Last Shadow + + +Year 45 + +You travel back to the sanctuary under cloak as you have many times before. The sanctuary isn’t much to look at anymore ever since it collapsed ten years ago, but one thing’s for sure, nobody ever comes around here, making it the perfect place to live ever since you started to live like a recluse. + +You scan the area to make sure there is nobody around before you go through your secret entrance; you remember how long it took you just dig your way out of the place. You probably could’ve stayed down there indefinitely, but there are only so many times you can read the same books over. It was only natural that you got curious about what was going on in outside world after the first few years of being buried had past. + +About another year of digging and it was a brand new world. The Empire had fallen, but not much had changed in the scheme of things. In some ways the situation might’ve been worse for the average person. You travelled under cloak to explore what used to be the territory of the old Empire, only to find that most of it was now divided up into petty fiefdoms run by the new eternals. + +You knew as soon as you saw these new eternals they were going to hasten the Empire’s fall, not save it. You also weren’t surprised to find most of them fighting over the scraps of their dead “parent.” They lack any sort of discipline of your generation, as far as you’re concerned they’re twisted mutants of eternals, but not real ones. + +Most of the population that had existed under the Empire has become practically enslaved under the new eternals. There are a few that remain autonomous, but this is mainly in Rask where the place is a war zone even compared to places like Quala or Arat. From what you’ve heard Flog and his orc/ogre horde have been spreading to southern Rask and making it hard for any eternal attempting to plant a flag and keep it there. It’s gotten so bad that what eternals do lay claim there have resorted to hiring svelk mercenaries to help. And the svelk aren’t exactly well liked by the new eternals (Though that’s one issue you’d have to agree with them on). + +The other area that remains free from of new eternal domination in Nalin, which is seemingly a beacon of “light” and under the control of the only other first generation eternal known to be alive, Brenda. She apparently has a non-aggression pact with the eternal upstarts, but has made it clear she will not let them destroy what’s left of what she considers to be the last remnants of the Empire. You don’t know whether it’s out of respect or fear that she has managed to avoid war with any of them. + +As for Delerg, it’s not a warzone, but it’s no paradise. Delerg is slightly unique in that it’s currently only “ruled” by one eternal by the name of Brutus, with no major competition. Brutus is not quite as ambitious either; he and his crony eternals seem content to just wallow in the swamp. One might think that perhaps he’s just biding his time and waiting for an opening to invade the weakest eternal in Quala, but in reality he wouldn’t have the means to do it anyway, his entourage is more of a gang rather than any proper army. He’s just lucky Delerg isn’t a profitable target by any other eternal or else he’d probably be wiped out by a real invasion. + +You’ve often wondered why you continue to stay in Delerg or even the general area even after you took your “tour” of the old provinces and saw the chaos for yourself. You have no real answer other than you have nowhere else to go and that you’ve lived at the temple for so long now that you consider it your home regardless of who is calling themselves ruler there. + +The other reason you guess is Talia. Even after all these years you still haven’t quite moved on. You speak to Talia a lot, but she’s not much of a conversationalist anymore, not that you mind. You’d rather speak with her than Dendrin who you don’t know why still insists on speaking with you at all though thankfully it’s been rare nowadays. + +Later that night you go through your usual routine of a little training to keep your skills sharp and eating your dinner. You then visit the garden and speak with Talia about what you did today. + +“Visited Sinkhole again today. Still the same rundown town it’s always been. You’d think since Brutus made it his headquarters that he’d actually have a little pride to build it up a bit. Instead he and his lackies seem to just enjoy kicking around the same pathetic peasants, molesting hapless young girls and generally being assholes. Must be nice to enjoy doing the same routine over and over again.” + +You grab a handful of dirt and throw it where you buried Talia. + +“Sometimes I feel like uncloaking and killing them all, just to see what they’d do, you know? I bet they’d be scared shitless. The return of the shadows! Ooooooooh!” + +You laugh a bit. + +“Of course you know I did feel like killing them all after you died, but now? What’s the point? It won’t bring you back, and most of those bastards get themselves killed over stupidity anyway. Hell I’d probably be honoring them by gracing them with my blade to their hearts.” + +You throw a stone in the small stream nearby. + +“I mean I suppose if I did kill them, I’d be helping out those they’re tormenting now…but why bother? Most of those wretches were content living under the yoke of the Empire, they can be happy with what that mindset got them! Remember when I was trying start up a minor rebel cell here? All I could practically get were the fucking criminals and other miscreants. I mean what the hell does that say about society when those are only type willing to fight against tyranny?” + +You start to get angrier at the predictable silence. + +“I mean it’s not my fight anymore! I did what I could back in the day and it wasn’t appreciated by anyone, sometimes not even by you! The Empire is dead! I’ve done my bit, so if someone else wants to play freedom fighter they can have at it. I’m done…I’m...I’m sorry…” you say as you slump down near Talia’s grave. + +You sit in silence for quite a while, and eventually you fall asleep. + +“You’re not still moping about are you? I thought you’d be over the hermit thing by now.” Dendrin says +“I can’t really be a hermit when you keep interrupting my solitude all the damn time.” +“Oh please, you secretly crave it! If you really cherished your solitude that much, why the hell do you even bother leaving this place to make your little trips all over the countryside?” +“I only did that once because I was curious about the changes in the world.” +“But you still continue to make your routine trips in Delerg at least. You know nothing has changed for quite some time, same eternals tormenting the peasants as usual. It’s almost as boring as a routine as you have, must be an eternal thing. My point is, if you really wanted solitude, you wouldn’t risk leaving this place at all. You wouldn’t lurk on the outskirts of civilization spying on what others are doing. You also wouldn’t still be talking to your mate who hasn’t been in any condition to talk back in quite some time. I don’t think this hermit thing is for you. You need to be doing something else.” +“Oh like what? Entertaining you? Look if you’re so bored, why don’t you go bother someone else and leave me alone? I’ve repeatedly told you, I’m not here for your amusement.” +“Obviously not. (Sigh) Very well Eternal, but you know I’m right. You can’t keep going on like this. You’re going to have to change your surroundings eventually, because you might as well be lying in a grave right next to Talia given that you’ve fallen asleep in the dirt and have small cave insects crawling on you.” +“Don’t think I haven’t considered it.” +“Stop talking nonsense. You’re not suicidal and even if you were, you’d be too cowardly to go through with it anyway. Just like you’re too cowardly to change your current situation by leaving this place.” +“First you say I’m not really a hermit because I’m leaving here on a regular basis, but now you’re saying I’m too cowardly to leave it? How does that make sense?” +“I’m saying you’re going about everything half assed! You want to be a hermit? Fine then you need to shut yourself off from the outside world completely and not run around topside and vicariously getting your socialization kicks by spying on others. However I don’t think that’s what you want. I think you WANT to go back to doing what you used to do, but you’ve been staying hidden from the known world so long that you don’t want to risk what peace you have. Its safer that way.” +“And I haven’t earned a little peace? Given everything I’ve been through?” +“Maybe you have Eternal. I don’t know, but what I do know is you don’t seem to be satisfied with it, so what I’m saying is you need to change your situation. Otherwise you might as well be dead because you’re not living, you’re just surviving.” +“It’s enough.” +“Are you sure?” +“Always has been.” + +At this point Dendrin stops speaking. You don’t know if it’s because he’s just tired of arguing with you or if it’s because you’ve actually won the argument. Dendrin can’t really deny that surviving to a certain extent has been enough for you in the past. + +In any case the numbness eventually subsides and you wake up. + +After brushing yourself off you head back to your real bed and ponder what you’re really going to do since despite it all, Dendrin has once again managed to weasel a little truth in his words and its enough to make you think. +> Continue to live here +Dendrin can chatter in your ear all he wants it’s not going to make you change how you want to live your life. What the hell has he ever done for you? + +You the sleep the rest of the night in your bed and most of the day as well. In fact you don’t leave the sanctuary for over a month. Eventually you start to get restless again and you go for a walk in the middle of the night. + +“I’m leaving Talia, I’ll be back soon.” You say. + +Tromping around through the swamp at night isn’t something you normally do since the place is already a breeding ground for biting insects during the day, its even worse at night. The Sul Monkeys are usually a little more active as well. Sometimes they even get vicious if they sense an easy target; fortunately they seem to be scared of you. + +As you wander through the night you reminisce about the old days, back when you were in Rask and temporarily separated from Talia. It wasn’t an easy time, but you survived it, just like you’re surviving without her now. + +“Pfft. Dendrin thinks he’s so smart. Suggesting that I can’t…” you begin to whisper to yourself, but just then your thoughts are interrupted by shrieks and pleas nearby. This is followed by some loud obnoxious voices. + +“Go ahead a scream bitch, not like anyone’s going to save you!” a voice yells. +“Hey are you taking your turn?” the second voice asks. +“Naw, I’m just gonna fuck the boy, seein’ as we already beat him unconscious. Less trouble.” A third voice replies. +“Suit yourself.” The second voice says. + +Great, you wandered in the middle of a sexual assault in progress. What is it with these new eternals and rape? They’re always engaging in it like its going out of style. Must be some sort of defect in their minds during their training or something because none of the first generation eternals that you know of were so focused on their genital region. Even Kane, as infamous as he was for his atrocities was never known for rape. Though given some of the other things he did to his enemies, that’s not saying much. + +You shake your head as the cries, grunts and laughter gets louder and louder. They presumably have all the same natural ability and training the first generation eternals had and this is what they do with it. You turn back to go home. + +“SHUT UP BITCH!” you hear followed by a smacking sound. +“Hah! Teach her to open her mouth when she doesn’t have a dick in it.” + +Your hand tightens around your sword hilt as you stop walking for a moment. + +“I’m not getting involved. They don’t deserve my help. None of them ever did…” you mutter and take another step. + +“Shit! This bitch is tight! She must be a virgin!” +“So must be her boyfriend’s ass!” + +You do a complete pivot. + +“(Sigh) Damn it…” + +You rush towards the sounds of the group and after passing through some tall swamp plants; you find two of the eternals on top of the bodies of their victims. The third one is standing around watching the pair of them, laughing. + +He stops laughing when he catches the sight of your blade shining in the moonlight. + +“Oh shi…” he utters and you split his head with your sword. + +The eternal on top of the girl manages to stop what he’s doing long enough to look up, which allows her to give him enough of a shove and crawl away backwards from him. + +The other eternal on top of the young man doesn’t even bother getting off his victim, instead he makes idle threats. + +“Come closer and I’ll break this boy’s fucking neck!” he shouts and pulls the unconscious young man’s head into his arms preparing to twist. +“He’s better off dead anyway at this point.” You say. + +You hear a bone crack followed by the sound of your sword cleaving the neck of the eternal. He attempts to grab at you while making horrible gurgling noises, but he only manages to falls face first into the muddy ground. + +The third eternal at this point has pulled up his pants and drawn his weapon, but given that he hasn’t attacked you immediately like he should have, you know that means he’s scared. They haven’t been challenged in so long, they’ve forgotten what its like. + +You forgot too. You forgot how thrilling combat was. All those old feelings are starting to come back. You’re enjoying this. + +“Give me a fight.” You say. + +The eternal attempts to oblige your request, but does a poor job at it. A couple of sword parries and dodges later and you’ve already opened up a wound in his chest and hacked a deep cut in his leg. He drops his sword and collapses on his ass in the mud. + +“Please! Stop! Look, you can have the girl okay? Do whatever you want with her!” +“How the hell did you idiots ever take over anything? You’re not eternals. You’re fucking pathetic.” +“And what are hell are you?” +“I’m a shadow of the past and right now the past is catching up with you.” + +A little dramatic, but you’re having too much fun. + +Your line is lost on the eternal anyway who continues to plea like the girl did when he was raping her. You show the same amount of mercy and smack him across the face with your hilt before shoving your sword into his crotch. His voice goes into a high scream and then silent when you finish him off with a couple stomps to his head cracking his skull. Another couple stomps and his body stops breathing. + +You look around the area and see the young girl still nearby. In this moonlight you can see she’s huddled with her knees up to her body and her arms wrapped around them. She’s also completely naked with bruises on one side of her face and partially covered in mud and dirt. She can’t be any older than twenty; her dead boyfriend was probably around the same age. She rocks back and forth sobbing. + +Even when the physical damage heals, this is event is still going to be a scar in her mind for as long as she lives. You have no reassuring words for her, only advice. + +“Go home girl and grow stronger from this experience.” You say and leave her to her misery. + +You eventually arrive back at the sanctuary and excitedly tell Talia about what happened tonight. + +“…yeah, it was something to see. I sort of wondered if I was going to be rusty, but it all came back pretty naturally. Didn’t even use any magic. Heh. I…I think I’ll be really busy soon. So if I forget to talk to you or anything, its not because I don’t love you. I’ll just have my mind on other things okay? Okay. I’m glad you understand.” + +Over the next few days you pick off a few more eternals that you catch unawares in the swamps. Doesn’t take Brutus long to start realizing that someone is standing up to him, though from conversations you’ve eve’s dropped on, he isn’t entirely sure who it is yet and even thinks it might be the pre-cursor to an invasion. He’ll wish that was the case by the time you’re through. + +The peasants though are still being oppressed as usual. Perhaps even worse than they already were, since the eternals are taking their frustrations out on them, you can’t understand why they aren’t at least being encouraged by the situation and trying to fight back. + +You briefly wonder if you should dispense with your secretive solitary operations and try to get a “rebellion” going again, but you quickly dismiss such ideas. Maybe you’re indirectly helping the people, but you’re mainly just doing this for your own personal reasons. You’re not going to do is try to enlist aid again. Those days are long gone you’re not putting up with the headache of them anymore. Someone else can do it if they feel so inclined. You’re working fine on your own. You’ve done it many times in the past and will continue to do so in the future. + +Besides if you were successful in starting up a rebellion, then you’d eliminate your targets too quickly. As it stands right now, you’re enjoying taking your time. If you wanted to kill them all as fast as possible, you could easily do it. + +Over the course of a few months you continue your activities. Brutus starts sending patrols in large groups. He also destroys one of the smaller villages claiming that they know who has been attacking them if not involved in the attacks directly. If something like that doesn’t motivate the people nothing will. + +As it turns out, it has motivated at least one and when you’re spying an eternal patrol camp you aren’t surprised to see a familiar smaller figure hiding nearby. She thinks that nobody sees her, and so far she’s correct as far as the eternals are concerned, but you see her as clear as day. She hasn’t seen you of course due to your cloak. + +Looks like she took your advice, but she has no idea what she’s doing. Her desire for vengeance is going to get her killed, though maybe she feels like she has no reason to live at this point. + +In any event, she’s going to get in the way of your own plans, if you don’t do something. +> Approach her +You’re not going to rush into battle when you aren’t entirely sure of the situation yet. You need to get her out of here before she messes everything up. + +You silently move towards her staying cloaked the whole time. You try to pay attention to what the eternals are doing while still moving towards the girl. When you finally reach her, she still isn’t quite aware of your presence, you she begins to look around as if she senses something. + +You’re just about to lunge at her, when her sense that someone is near causes her to panic and she ends up falling backwards causing enough noise to attract the attention of the nearby eternals. + +“Shit.” You curse and decloak before the girl. She’s very surprised to see you. + +“Don’t speak, just get the hell out of here!” you shout at her as you here the eternals rushing over to check what’s going on. +“But…” she utters. +“I said don’t…” you say and then feel a spear fly into your back from a second group of eternals that were just returning to camp. + +You manage to spin around and muster enough of a fight to dispatch a couple of the eternals advancing on you, but even you can’t hold your ground against such odds with a sharp object puncturing your vital organs. Even speeding yourself up only serves to prolong the inevitable and you eventually succumb to the onslaught. + +As for the girl she didn’t get far and the eternals make good on finishing her off this time.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Dendrin can chatter in your ear all he wants it’s not going to make you change how you want to live your life. What the hell has he ever done for you? + +You the sleep the rest of the night in your bed and most of the day as well. In fact you don’t leave the sanctuary for over a month. Eventually you start to get restless again and you go for a walk in the middle of the night. + +“I’m leaving Talia, I’ll be back soon.” You say. + +Tromping around through the swamp at night isn’t something you normally do since the place is already a breeding ground for biting insects during the day, its even worse at night. The Sul Monkeys are usually a little more active as well. Sometimes they even get vicious if they sense an easy target; fortunately they seem to be scared of you. + +As you wander through the night you reminisce about the old days, back when you were in Rask and temporarily separated from Talia. It wasn’t an easy time, but you survived it, just like you’re surviving without her now. + +“Pfft. Dendrin thinks he’s so smart. Suggesting that I can’t…” you begin to whisper to yourself, but just then your thoughts are interrupted by shrieks and pleas nearby. This is followed by some loud obnoxious voices. + +“Go ahead a scream bitch, not like anyone’s going to save you!” a voice yells. +“Hey are you taking your turn?” the second voice asks. +“Naw, I’m just gonna fuck the boy, seein’ as we already beat him unconscious. Less trouble.” A third voice replies. +“Suit yourself.” The second voice says. + +Great, you wandered in the middle of a sexual assault in progress. What is it with these new eternals and rape? They’re always engaging in it like its going out of style. Must be some sort of defect in their minds during their training or something because none of the first generation eternals that you know of were so focused on their genital region. Even Kane, as infamous as he was for his atrocities was never known for rape. Though given some of the other things he did to his enemies, that’s not saying much. + +You shake your head as the cries, grunts and laughter gets louder and louder. They presumably have all the same natural ability and training the first generation eternals had and this is what they do with it. You turn back to go home. + +“SHUT UP BITCH!” you hear followed by a smacking sound. +“Hah! Teach her to open her mouth when she doesn’t have a dick in it.” + +Your hand tightens around your sword hilt as you stop walking for a moment. + +“I’m not getting involved. They don’t deserve my help. None of them ever did…” you mutter and take another step. + +“Shit! This bitch is tight! She must be a virgin!” +“So must be her boyfriend’s ass!” + +You do a complete pivot. + +“(Sigh) Damn it…” + +You rush towards the sounds of the group and after passing through some tall swamp plants; you find two of the eternals on top of the bodies of their victims. The third one is standing around watching the pair of them, laughing. + +He stops laughing when he catches the sight of your blade shining in the moonlight. + +“Oh shi…” he utters and you split his head with your sword. + +The eternal on top of the girl manages to stop what he’s doing long enough to look up, which allows her to give him enough of a shove and crawl away backwards from him. + +The other eternal on top of the young man doesn’t even bother getting off his victim, instead he makes idle threats. + +“Come closer and I’ll break this boy’s fucking neck!” he shouts and pulls the unconscious young man’s head into his arms preparing to twist. +“He’s better off dead anyway at this point.” You say. + +You hear a bone crack followed by the sound of your sword cleaving the neck of the eternal. He attempts to grab at you while making horrible gurgling noises, but he only manages to falls face first into the muddy ground. + +The third eternal at this point has pulled up his pants and drawn his weapon, but given that he hasn’t attacked you immediately like he should have, you know that means he’s scared. They haven’t been challenged in so long, they’ve forgotten what its like. + +You forgot too. You forgot how thrilling combat was. All those old feelings are starting to come back. You’re enjoying this. + +“Give me a fight.” You say. + +The eternal attempts to oblige your request, but does a poor job at it. A couple of sword parries and dodges later and you’ve already opened up a wound in his chest and hacked a deep cut in his leg. He drops his sword and collapses on his ass in the mud. + +“Please! Stop! Look, you can have the girl okay? Do whatever you want with her!” +“How the hell did you idiots ever take over anything? You’re not eternals. You’re fucking pathetic.” +“And what are hell are you?” +“I’m a shadow of the past and right now the past is catching up with you.” + +A little dramatic, but you’re having too much fun. + +Your line is lost on the eternal anyway who continues to plea like the girl did when he was raping her. You show the same amount of mercy and smack him across the face with your hilt before shoving your sword into his crotch. His voice goes into a high scream and then silent when you finish him off with a couple stomps to his head cracking his skull. Another couple stomps and his body stops breathing. + +You look around the area and see the young girl still nearby. In this moonlight you can see she’s huddled with her knees up to her body and her arms wrapped around them. She’s also completely naked with bruises on one side of her face and partially covered in mud and dirt. She can’t be any older than twenty; her dead boyfriend was probably around the same age. She rocks back and forth sobbing. + +Even when the physical damage heals, this is event is still going to be a scar in her mind for as long as she lives. You have no reassuring words for her, only advice. + +“Go home girl and grow stronger from this experience.” You say and leave her to her misery. + +You eventually arrive back at the sanctuary and excitedly tell Talia about what happened tonight. + +“…yeah, it was something to see. I sort of wondered if I was going to be rusty, but it all came back pretty naturally. Didn’t even use any magic. Heh. I…I think I’ll be really busy soon. So if I forget to talk to you or anything, its not because I don’t love you. I’ll just have my mind on other things okay? Okay. I’m glad you understand.” + +Over the next few days you pick off a few more eternals that you catch unawares in the swamps. Doesn’t take Brutus long to start realizing that someone is standing up to him, though from conversations you’ve eve’s dropped on, he isn’t entirely sure who it is yet and even thinks it might be the pre-cursor to an invasion. He’ll wish that was the case by the time you’re through. + +The peasants though are still being oppressed as usual. Perhaps even worse than they already were, since the eternals are taking their frustrations out on them, you can’t understand why they aren’t at least being encouraged by the situation and trying to fight back. + +You briefly wonder if you should dispense with your secretive solitary operations and try to get a “rebellion” going again, but you quickly dismiss such ideas. Maybe you’re indirectly helping the people, but you’re mainly just doing this for your own personal reasons. You’re not going to do is try to enlist aid again. Those days are long gone you’re not putting up with the headache of them anymore. Someone else can do it if they feel so inclined. You’re working fine on your own. You’ve done it many times in the past and will continue to do so in the future. + +Besides if you were successful in starting up a rebellion, then you’d eliminate your targets too quickly. As it stands right now, you’re enjoying taking your time. If you wanted to kill them all as fast as possible, you could easily do it. + +Over the course of a few months you continue your activities. Brutus starts sending patrols in large groups. He also destroys one of the smaller villages claiming that they know who has been attacking them if not involved in the attacks directly. If something like that doesn’t motivate the people nothing will. + +As it turns out, it has motivated at least one and when you’re spying an eternal patrol camp you aren’t surprised to see a familiar smaller figure hiding nearby. She thinks that nobody sees her, and so far she’s correct as far as the eternals are concerned, but you see her as clear as day. She hasn’t seen you of course due to your cloak. + +Looks like she took your advice, but she has no idea what she’s doing. Her desire for vengeance is going to get her killed, though maybe she feels like she has no reason to live at this point. + +In any event, she’s going to get in the way of your own plans, if you don’t do something. +> Launch your attack now +Even as quiet as you are, if you head over to her location, you might miss your best opportunity to attack even if you were waiting for a slightly better opening. Still no point in taking chances, you speed yourself up just give yourself that extra edge. + +As your blade sinks into the back of one of the eternals you materialize before the rest of their eyes and they look as if they see a ghost. Their surprise doesn’t last long, but it’s enough for you to chop down another one before they can put up a decent defense. + +“Behind you!” you hear a voice shout and you instinctively duck down and spin around to shoot a bolt at whatever might be behind you. You catch an attacker in the leg with it, but from what you can see a bunch more eternals have arrived to help their buddies. This is why you wanted to wait a moment longer before attacking. + +One of the eternals in charge shouts at one of his men to go catch the girl that just shouted a warning to you. At this point running might not be a bad option for yourself. If you had your back against something, you might be better able to fight them, but being surrounded and outnumbered like this isn’t the best situation. + +You make a break for it, but the eternals are wise enough to not all chase you directly, some instead run along either side of you hoping to head you off. It doesn’t help that a few are carrying spears and are fairly proficient at throwing them. + +You cloak yourself and climb up a tree, which helps lose them. They continue to search the area where they last saw you. Eventually they give up and argue with each other about losing you. + +You wait about an hour in the tree before you decide its safe to come down. You head back to the sanctuary cursing your unpreparedness. That speed spell also took it out of you. You feel more drained than you have in a long time; it’s almost like the old days when you were complete crap at casting magic. You’re guessing your long detachment from Dendrin has made your shadow magic even weaker. At least you can still cloak without too many problems it seems. + +Eventually you get back home only to see a visitor waiting for you. It’s the girl and she’s sitting on a pile of rubble near your secret entrance. Now that you can see her in a better light, she’s much different looking from the wailing waif you last saw. She stinks of the swamp like she’s been living in it for days. Her face is healed up with a few minor scars, but her eyes display a stare that could be matched by some battle weary warriors. You’re actually a little surprised to see her since it implies that she knew where you lived, meaning she’s sneakier than you thought. + +“Nobody followed me. I lost my pursuer.” +“Did you kill him?” +“No.” +“Then how the hell do you know you really lost him? Maybe he let you get away, just to follow you at his leisure. What the hell were you doing out there, you know damn well you’re no match for those guys.” +“Neither are you it seems.” +“I would’ve been had I waited a little longer to gather all the information instead of jumping into battle like an idiot.” +“So why’d you jump in like an idiot?” +“Because I saw you and you were already a factor I didn’t need to deal with if you decided to jump in like an idiot. So I did it instead, hoping that was all of them. Apparently not. Still, got a few of them I guess. There’s always tomorrow. Now if you don’t mind, I’m going inside and I don’t need you knowing exactly where the entrance is even if you already knew where I lived.” + +The girl doesn’t move. + +“So basically what you’re saying is you risked your life to prevent me from getting hurt.” +“No, I told you why I did it. Don’t read into something that isn’t there, now I suggest you do what I told you to do last time and go home.” +“I can’t considering they destroyed my village not long ago. Completely.” + +You exhale deeply since you heard about that, but of course you had no idea she was from there. + +“So that was your village? Was it random, or did they know you were there for the…first attack?” +“I think they knew. They didn’t know exactly what had happened or who was there, but they guessed someone in the village knew something. Some in the village knew what I told them, like my family, Aaron’s family, and close neighbors, but nobody gave me up. I sort of wished they did, they’d all be alive right now.” +“If you felt that way, why not turn yourself in?” +“Because I was scared? Because I didn’t want to die? Because I’d somehow beaten the odds and endured something I shouldn’t have?” +“Because you wanted to survive.” You say. +“Yes, because I wanted to survive. Just like I wanted to survive when they started lining up everyone to more efficiently butcher them. I managed to run. I left my mother, my father, my little brother, my friends. I left them ALL behind. I didn’t try to save them Maybe I could’ve I don’t think so, but I didn’t even try. All I wanted to do is survive. And that’s what I’ve been doing ever since, living in the swamp attempting to survive and plot revenge.” +“Hmm, well you’ve got the survival bit down at least. So were you the only survivor from your village?” +“I dunno, I think some others ran. Don’t know what happened to them though. So when are we going to attack again?” +“I’M going to get some rest and I’ll attack again when I feel like it. YOU I don’t know what you’re going to do, but I suggest you go find some place to hide where those bastards can’t find you. Now leave. I’m not going to ask nicely again.” + +The girl hops down from her sitting spot. + +“No, I’m not going anywhere. YOU saved me. Twice. Which means right now you’re the closest thing I have to a friend and friends help each other out. Besides, I did warn you about that guy going to attack you. Surely that warrants me at least some place to stay. I won’t get in the way. I know how to take care of myself. I know I can do a lot more than I used to…” +“Look this isn’t some shelter for lost girls! This is my damn home! I don’t owe you shit! Now get the fuck outta here!” you yell and stand directly in front of her, but she’s unmoved. +“You’re going to have to fucking kill me then!” she shouts back in your face. + +At this point you’re more worried about your voices attracting attention. You feel like knocking her out, but that would only be a temporary solution and despite being a fairly ruthless killer, you’re not going to oblige her alternative. + +You push her out of the way and open up your entrance. She’s probably a little amazed that she was so close to it and didn’t realize it. + +“Well? Don’t just stand there with a dumb look on your face; get inside before we attract the attention of something other than Sul Monkeys.” You say and motion her inside. + +“What’s your name anyway?” +“Lena.” + +Dendrin’s going to have a field day with this and you’ve got nobody to blame but yourself. +> Time passes... +Year 46 + +“Think the girl will survive your big attack plan?” Dendrin asks. +“If she does, she does. If she doesn’t, well that’s the way it goes.” You reply. +“You don’t mean that. You’re just trying to play tough. I know better.” +“Well if you know better why do you insist on asking stupid questions?” +“Tradition?” +“Hah…okay I’ll admit that one was a little amusing.” +“Glad to see you’re in a better mood nowadays, but I imagine having someone to converse back and forth with on a regular basis might be helping. I told you, that you couldn’t go on with your life as it was and I was right! And you say I don’t look out for you.” +“Yeah, that must be why you’ve seen fit to deprive me of nearly all my magic abilities.” +“You’re not a believer. I can’t give to someone who has no faith. Sorry, but I don’t make the rules. Besides, you were never a magic lover anyway.” +“Perhaps not, but I found it useful in certain situations. Doesn’t matter, I’ve been making due…I suppose it has made me adapt, and kept me from relying on a crutch.” +“Well if that’s your way of saying thanks, I guess I’ll take it. Good luck tomorrow.” + +You wake up. + +Today is the day, after months of carrying out a personal guerrilla war on Brutus’ gang (you refuse to acknowledge such rabble as any sort of “army”) you’ve managed to whittle it down to a manageable size to the point where he’s had Sinkhole barricaded. You’re not sure why considering its not going to stop you, but if the fool actually thinks building a shaky wooden wall and locking himself in his house is actually going to save him, so be it. + +While you get ready, Lena’s already set to go. You think she’s been anxious for this day more than you have. + +Lena has been helping you and for her part she’s done an adequate job. She’s taken to training well, though that’s probably because she doesn’t have much left anymore. You’ve had to pull her fat out of the fire on more than one occasion, but you expected you would when you first agreed to have her help you. + +And at least she’s helping you. That’s more than can be said about anyone else! Despite all the damage you’ve done to their oppressors, your actions have not inspired others to take up arms against what’s left of the eternals. You can’t say you’re surprised though. Lena on more than one occasion has travelled to a few of the swamp villages in the hopes of getting help, but no luck. You told her it was a waste of time, but she had to learn on her own your suppose. + +You probably never show it and you’d certainly never admit it, but you do respect Lena and don’t mind her company. Though there’s still another whose company you prefer. (And that that isn’t Dendrin) + +“I’m going now. I’ll be back later to tell you all about it.” You tell Talia before you leave. + +You and Lena make your way to Sinkhole. Along the way Lena makes her usual snappy comments. It’s one of her less endearing qualities. + +“So you couldn’t get Talia to help us for this one?” +“Well maybe if I’d been a believer in Dendrin, he would’ve seen fit to raise her from the dead or something, but seeing as he’s as much of an asshole as you’re being right now, no I couldn’t get Talia’s help. Maybe next time.” You reply. +“I’m sorry, I really shouldn’t have said that, I…” +“Forget it. You’re nervous just like you are whenever we go into battle and you’re deflecting as usual. Just save those witty remarks for combat. Seems to work on those wannabe eternals who get flustered over the smallest taunts.” + +Sinkhole’s rickety wall doesn’t quite extend all the way around the town, but its enough that there’s no way to easily go around it without either wading through the deep marsh water or just barging through the front gate. If you still had your magic, you’d just scale the wall with the spider walk spell, but you don’t have that luxury anymore. Chopping or kicking through the wall would probably take time and attract attention. You’d like to at least catch the enemy a little off guard. + +So you decide to do the classic “pincer maneuver.” + +“Lena, you sneak around through the marsh where there is no wall and enter Sinkhole that way.” +“Wait, where are you going to be?” +“I’m going through the main gate of course. They’ll be focusing on me so much that you’ll probably be able to take down several of Brutus’ men before some of them converge on your position.” +“Are you going to be all right?” +“We’ve worked together for months now and you have to ask me that? Don’t worry about me, I’ve faced worse. A lot worse. Now Brutus will probably be hold up in that big house of his. Don’t try to enter it until I get there since the place will probably be trapped.” +“What if I see him outside?” +“I doubt it since the coward seems determined to throw everyone under his command at us while he hides. In the off chance you do see him, he’ll probably be trying to escape so by all means try to stop him in that case. Now let’s get going.” + +As you and Lena part company you know there’s a fifty fifty chance Lena is going to disregard everything you’ve said and try to enter Brutus’ home and try to kill him herself. You’re going have to be quick if you want to beat her there. + +Predictably several eternals guard the front gate and when you appear before them, the alarm is raised and they attack. If they’re lucky, they might actually last more than a five minutes against you… + +Four minutes later you’ve already fought your way through the main gate. You see several more eternals standing in the road with weapons drawn, but they look unsure to as whether or not to attack you or run away. Surprisingly one speaks up, he’s a short man with brown hair wearing leather armor. He’s very average looking and not at all anything like what the second generation eternals are supposed to be which are great hulking warrior types. + +“Hold for a moment! I would speak with you. There is no need for animosity.” +“What, you trying to stall for time and set up an amubush? Not likely, let’s get on with this!” you reply and advance. + +He and the two other eternals standing behind him all back away while still attempting to hold a defensive position. + +“Wait just a moment, damn it! There are not enough of us left to set up a fucking ambush! We’re all that’s left, besides Brutus barricaded in his house. I mean we already know you could kill us all within seconds, is it really going to hurt to hear what I have to say?” +“Alright, make it quick.” +“Okay, we’re giving up. I mean just let us get the hell out of here and we’ll never enter this damn swamp ever again. This ain’t worth it and I certainly ain’t dying for Brutus.” +“What makes you think I’d let you go?” +“Look I know who you are. You’re not just some crazy ass old shadow; you’re also an eternal. A first gen. Oh yes, I heard stories about you in the old days and unlike most of my kind, I took them seriously. I also remember because I was assigned here when you were still causing trouble for the old Empire. Everyone thought you died when we collapsed the temple on you, but when our boys started getting picked off over the last year, I had a feeling who it might be. I tried to warn Brutus that we should just leave, but the fool wouldn’t listen. +“Hmm, too bad you weren’t smart enough to leave yourself.” +“Well, Brutus may be a fool, but he’s still my friend.” +“Friends? Didn’t know you second gens, had the concept of it…but he’s so much of a friend, that you’re ready to abandon him now?” +“I don’t like it, but if I have to chose between loyalty to my friend and survival, survival is going to win.” +“While this is all very interesting, you still haven’t answered my question, why the hell should I let you go?” +“Because I talked Brutus out of destroying this entire town and the rest of the little villages in this swamp? Did you know when you started murdering us, his first order was to wage systematic genocide on the people of Delerg? Granted he still wiped out a few villages completely, but I managed to save lives because even I thought that was going too far. Other did too, I was just the only one brave enough to tell him in a way that showed it wouldn’t be wise to do it.” +“So that makes you a good guy?” +“No, I didn’t say it makes me a good guy, I’m just saying that my deeds at least should be taken into consideration. I mean…fuck…you’ve killed a lot of us and you’ll likely kill Brutus as well. Isn’t that enough? We’re no threat to you and we’re not going to come back to launch some sort of sneak attack. You can have free reign of this place, I’d rather just put this shithole far behind me. You’ll never see us again.” + +This guy might not be playing for time to have more of his buddies ambush you, but he’s still taken up more than enough and there’s no indication of Lena showing up who probably would’ve attacked them by now. Since she hasn’t that can only mean she’s decided to take on Brutus himself, which means she’s probably going to get herself killed if you don’t reach the house soon. +> Take care of the eternals first +If Lena’s gone ahead without heeding your warnings, she’s going to have to fend for herself, because there’s no way you’re taking chances with just the word of this asshole. + +“If you paid attention to history and old stories like you say you do, then you’d also know that I was never one to show mercy to my enemies. You’re a bigger fool than your friend Brutus if you’re thinking I’m going to let you go for any reason.” +“I had to try.” The eternal says with a resigned sigh. He turns and nods to his cohorts and they scatter in different directions while he advances on you. + +Great, now you’ll have to chase them all down. + +You dispatch the big talker fairly quickly, you manage to catch another one with your armbow before he gets too far and you finally chase down the third one just as he reaches the front gate. You notice several citizens starting to creep out from their homes and other hiding places. Still helpful as ever. + +You head quickly to the “mansion” sized home near the marshlands. You approach cautiously and that’s when you see Lena waiting nearby it. Apparently she decided to listen after all. + +“What took you so long? I’d like to get rid of this bastard and change out of these wet clothes.” +“Glad to see you listened for once, but didn’t you think I’d need help?” +“You told me, not to worry about you and to just wait for you.” +“Hmm, I suppose I did. Nevermind, did you have any problems?” +“Other than having to pull leeches off my body? No. There were a couple eternals near the area where I came through, but I killed them while they were still trying to make up their minds on whether or not to leave their posts to investigate the noise you were stirring up at the front gate. Besides that, I investigated the surrounding area outside this house and I haven’t seen any evidence that Brutus has tried to leave it.” +“Let’s just hope he doesn’t have some sort of underground tunnel built. Let’s go.” + +After breaking down the door, you cautiously move throughout the house. While certainly bigger than the rest of homes in Sinkhole, it probably doesn’t look much better from the inside. The place is a wreck, you’d think as a leader he’d want to keep his own home in better condition, but then given that you live in an underground hole of a collapsed temple which was already in ruins when you arrived there, maybe you aren’t exactly in a position to make judgments as far as living arrangements are concerned. + +“No traps so far.” Lena whispers. +“Considering there’s so much junk and garbage in this place, they could be well hidden. Keep a look out anyway, and stay quiet! No need to give our position away.” +“I’m sure he already knows we’re…” + +Before Lena can complete her statement, Brutus appears from around a corner and nearly takes her head off with an axe. Fortunately for her, you block the attack. At last you get a close look at the great leader himself, and once again you’re unimpressed by what you see. Makes this whole endeavor hardly even worth it at this point. + +“I’ll make you wish you hadn’t come back from the dead shadow!” Brutus exclaims right before you shut him up with a head-butt and then slicing his belly open. Falling to the floor and desperately attempting to hold in his entrails he starts to scoot back from you. + +“You new eternals always talk too much.” You say. “Lena…if you’d like to do the honors.” + +Lena wastes no time in taking up your offer. She points her spear at Brutus, who makes a plea for his life through bribery. It doesn’t work and Lena skewers him in the chest with the spear. + +Then she does it again… and again… and again… and… + +“Sonofabitch! You killed my family! Bastard! Die! Die! Fuck you…” Lena sobs the whole time. +“Lena he’s dead. You can stop now. He can’t order anyone else anymore. None of them can do anything anymore, we killed them all.” You say and grab the spear from her. + +She looks at you with tears streaming down from her eyes and for the first time since that first night you saw her assaulted she looks vulnerable again. The hardened exterior has allowed itself to collapse. She hugs tightly you and continues to sob. You aren’t exactly sure how to react except to reciprocate for a moment, but you’re uncomfortable so you gently push her away when you feel enough time has passed. She’s still upset, but begins to compose herself. + +“(sniff) So what’s next?” she asks. +“What do you mean?” +“What’s next? I mean we killed all of the eternals here in Delerg. Aren’t we going to go to Quala and continue? Where should we strike first?” + +You figured something like this would happen. Lena isn’t going to stop here. Already her desire for more vengeance is taking over. And while you certainly understand it and even agree with it to an extent, you just aren’t sure if this is truly the path for her. + +She has talent to be sure, but she’s attempting to take on a task that will far exceed her abilities even with you at her side. That’s the other problem. You fear that you might not even be on your best performance since you’ll always be worrying about her in the back of your mind. + +Still part of you would like to continue your partnership with her wherever that may lead. You certainly aren’t moping around like you used to and Lena’s enthusiasm bring a bit of a joy to your life. +> Join Lena +Lena will probably go whether you do or not so you might as well go with her to keep her safer. You can also continue training her which can only help in her survival. You also enjoy Lena’s company too and your spirits haven’t been remotely this high for a long time. + +“Slow down girl, we’ll get to them eventually. They aren’t going anywhere. Right now we should take a break before planning our next attack.” + +Lena nods and says that maybe you’re right and that you should take a break. The pair of you takes your leave of Sinkhole and head back home as the peasants start to slowly fill the streets again. + +When you get back home, Lena is definitely in a much better mood. + +“It felt so good killing all those bastards! I think I’m only just realizing just exactly how good though!” she says followed by a triumphant yell of victory. +“Well you should be proud of what you managed to accomplish. It was a great victory and I’m proud of you too.” + +Lena smiles at your remark and hugs you again. + +“Oh I would’ve never done it without your help! You’ve been so good and helpful to me! We’ll go on to more victories against those eternal bastards, I just know it!” + +Lena’s body against yours so good to you right now. You feel closer to her than ever and not just in a physical way. During your embrace both of your eyes meet and it doesn’t take long before your lips follow along with other parts of your body. + +Later while she’s asleep beside you, you walk into the garden feeling somewhat guilty for your actions. + +“I…uh…I’m home. I meant to tell you sooner, but I…(sigh)…” you begin to say to Talia’s grave. + +It takes you a while to even muster up courage to speak again. + +“Talia, I’m sorry…but as much as I tried to fight them I have feelings for Lena. She’s a brave girl. She has that same fighting spirit. You know, like you did…” + +You take the silence that follows as accusatory. + +“No! I’m not replacing you! I just…NO! She won’t die like you did! I’ll make sure she’s safe! That’s why I’m going to look out and be with her! Look I can’t morn you forever! Why won’t you just let me move on? I have to move on right?! Wouldn’t you want me to do that?!” + +The further silence just makes you run out of the garden and into one of the other rooms. You begin to curse and sob at your situation. You know it’s completely irrational, but you don’t understand why you can’t move on. + +After you compose yourself, you head back to your room where Lena is still happily sleeping. Fortunately despite your rather loud outbursts, she hasn’t stirred at all. When you get back into bed she instinctively cuddles next to you. + +“Where’d you go?” she asks sleepily. +“Uh…just thought I heard a weird noise. It was nothing.” You remark. +“Oh.” She replies and drifts back to sleep. + +You on the other hand are practically up for the rest of the night trying to put a ghost to rest once and for all. You manage to succeed, but you still don’t feel good about it. Hopefully in time, you’ll be able to live with it, but in order to do that, you’re going to have to leave this place and not come back. There are just too many memories here. + +Year 50 + +Lena wanted to take the fight to the eternals, and she’s really been sticking to that promise. + +In the beginning you were mainly targeting eternal soldiers and such. This naturally drew the ire of whatever local warlord that had established dominance there. This wasn’t a problem since you mostly just moved on to another location in Quala. + +The problem was you weren’t just fighting eternals now, you were fighting the multitudes of human followers said eternal warlords have under their command. Given that you were only two people, you were more than a little outnumbered. Also while Lena may be better skilled than she was, but she still does not have the capability to assassinate a battle hardened eternal warlord commanding said armies. You probably might have had better luck, if you were younger and still had access to your shadow magic, as it stands though, you’ve lost that ability completely now. It would seem that Dendrin’s link to you has practically been broken at this point, though he has still spoken to you from time to time. Mostly to tell you that your actions are a pathetic attempt to live in the past and you’re just following around Lena like a glorified bodyguard. This has lead to the usual predictable arguments. Dendrin must’ve gotten tired of arguing with you though since he hasn’t been speaking with you in quite some time, which suits you just fine. + +Eventually, Lena once again attempted to stir up the local populations in the hopes of getting some more help, she was a little more successful this time, but nobody has ever lasted very long. They either they quit for various reasons after the first few missions, or they get themselves killed. The ones that do stick around are mostly criminal types who enjoy the violence along with the looting on the side. + +All of this pretty much means Lena’s the leader of a group of bandits masquerading around as “freedom fighters.” You and Lena are now wanted in several territories in Quala. Even a few eternal rulers have declared temporary truce just so they can send joint forces against you. Svelk mercs have also been hired to hunt you down. While you’ve been generally supportive of Lena’s misguided quest for vengeance, you haven’t always thought its necessarily the wisest thing to pursue. Your last raid on a small encampment got half of the gang killed and Lena wounded to the point where she’s going to be in no condition to go on another until she heals. + +Right now you’re siting beside her bandaged body while she rests. You wonder if you shouldn’t at least try to talk a little sense into her. Its getting to the point where you believe your luck is going to run out eventually and while you’re enjoying fighting side by side with her, part of you would like to pull back a bit. If only to ensure your survival so you can actually enjoy her company a lot longer. + +Just as you’ve completed pondering this situation, Lena starts stirring from her sleep. + +“Did we win?” she asks. +“Yes, but it was at a high cost. I told you we should’ve prepared longer. And you shouldn’t have charged into battle like that.” +“Doesn’t matter, as long as we got that bastard.” +“You do realize that the sergeant was the only eternal in the platoon right? The rest were just regular humans.” +“So? If they take orders from an eternal and do their bidding, they’re just as bad. You know that better than anyone.” + +There it is again. Her blind need for vengeance as usual. You’re beginning to think she cares more about that, than she does you. +> Talk to Lena about quitting +“Lena, you’ve been getting more reckless lately, and I’m starting to get concerned.” +“What? These wounds? I’ll heal. And I don’t even need to wait that long anyway, I could be up and around before then.” +“If you didn’t pick a fight every chance you get, and actually took time to step back for a moment, you’d probably suffer less cuts and bruises. And while I know the group we hang around with are a bunch of low life scum for the most part, we still can’t afford to lose them like we’ve been doing. Especially when the risk is starting to severely outweigh the potential rewards.” +“Well, maybe its time we get some new people to help. Try to find some disgruntled peasant or something again.” + +You shake your head. + +“Lena, you’re not hearing me. I’m saying maybe its time to quit while you’re ahead. I mean what are we even doing anymore?” +“We’re fighting against injustice and tyranny! I thought that’s what you used to do!” +“Yeah, that’s what I USED to do. What I’m doing now I’m not so sure. Lena, you’re letting your desire for vengeance overwhelm you. You’re not thinking straight. You shoot down all my ideas when it comes to sound strategies. I mean lately you’ve just been throwing cautious right out the window.” +“And you always played it cautious, when fighting the Empire?” +“Y’know what? YES. Yes I did whenever it was possible, y’know why? Because they fucking outnumbered us in everyway that’s why! And despite the fact that I taught you how to fight, you are NOT me. You will NEVER be me. You passion for vengeance brought on by your unfortunate experiences, will never replace the rush I get when I get into a battle which always gives me an edge. And let me tell you something else. As good as I am, I can’t always be everywhere so that I can save you just in time.” +“Well who the hell is asking you to save me?!” Lena says with a displeased look on her face. +“Someone needs to save you, because you sure as hell haven’t been of clear mind to maintain your self-preservation anymore! Lena look, I know you’d like nothing more than to personally kill every eternal you could get your hands on, but it’s not going to happen. Even if you could, it won’t change what has already happened.” + +You hold on to Lena’s hand. + +“Lena, I’m asking you for me, stop this now, before it completely consumes you. Are your feelings for vengeance stronger than your feelings for me?” + +You look into Lena’s eyes and her previous expression of displeasure turns to one of avoidance. She tries to speak, but stops. Sensing that she needs to respond, she gives you an answer. + +“You, you know I love you.” +“Yes, I’m sure you do, but you will not avoid my question so easily.” +“I’m not…I…I…just…” + +At this point, you close your eyes and sigh deeply. + +“It’s okay Lena. It’s okay. This was probably my own damn fault anyway. Good luck.” You say and kiss her on the head before attempting to leave. +“Wait! Where are you going?!” +“I can’t stay with you Lena. You’re on a path to self-destruction that I can’t follow. I did that already with Talia and her dedication to Dendrin. Now that I think about it, this whole thing has been me trying to relive my own past by being with you. Trying to rekindle the same spark I had with Talia. I can’t even lie to myself about it anymore. Anyway I’m rambling now, so I bid you goodbye and I hope you eventually see that you don’t need to follow the path you’re on.” + +You exit the tent with the Lena still calling for you, but you just keep walking. You notice you aren’t the only one leaving. You see some of the thugs packing up their stuff and heading off to greener pastures no doubt. Maybe with less people to help, Lena will be less likely to mount foolish attacks. At least you hope she has that much sense. + +As for you, you realize that if you’re going to live in the past, you’re going to do it the right way. + +You travel back to Delerg. Back to the temple. Back home. The place is the same, its like you never left. You enter the garden… + +“I’m home Talia. I’m home and I shouldn’t have left. I see that now. I can only hope you can forgive me. Can you forgive me?” + +You approach Talia’s grave. + +“Yes. Yes of course you forgive me. Just like I forgave you. We…we were always meant to be together.” You say closing your eyes and unsheathing your blade. + +“I should’ve done this a long time ago.” You say and thrust your blade into yourself. + +You fall beside Talia’s grave as your life force drains out. Your last thoughts are peaceful ones.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Lena will probably go whether you do or not so you might as well go with her to keep her safer. You can also continue training her which can only help in her survival. You also enjoy Lena’s company too and your spirits haven’t been remotely this high for a long time. + +“Slow down girl, we’ll get to them eventually. They aren’t going anywhere. Right now we should take a break before planning our next attack.” + +Lena nods and says that maybe you’re right and that you should take a break. The pair of you takes your leave of Sinkhole and head back home as the peasants start to slowly fill the streets again. + +When you get back home, Lena is definitely in a much better mood. + +“It felt so good killing all those bastards! I think I’m only just realizing just exactly how good though!” she says followed by a triumphant yell of victory. +“Well you should be proud of what you managed to accomplish. It was a great victory and I’m proud of you too.” + +Lena smiles at your remark and hugs you again. + +“Oh I would’ve never done it without your help! You’ve been so good and helpful to me! We’ll go on to more victories against those eternal bastards, I just know it!” + +Lena’s body against yours so good to you right now. You feel closer to her than ever and not just in a physical way. During your embrace both of your eyes meet and it doesn’t take long before your lips follow along with other parts of your body. + +Later while she’s asleep beside you, you walk into the garden feeling somewhat guilty for your actions. + +“I…uh…I’m home. I meant to tell you sooner, but I…(sigh)…” you begin to say to Talia’s grave. + +It takes you a while to even muster up courage to speak again. + +“Talia, I’m sorry…but as much as I tried to fight them I have feelings for Lena. She’s a brave girl. She has that same fighting spirit. You know, like you did…” + +You take the silence that follows as accusatory. + +“No! I’m not replacing you! I just…NO! She won’t die like you did! I’ll make sure she’s safe! That’s why I’m going to look out and be with her! Look I can’t morn you forever! Why won’t you just let me move on? I have to move on right?! Wouldn’t you want me to do that?!” + +The further silence just makes you run out of the garden and into one of the other rooms. You begin to curse and sob at your situation. You know it’s completely irrational, but you don’t understand why you can’t move on. + +After you compose yourself, you head back to your room where Lena is still happily sleeping. Fortunately despite your rather loud outbursts, she hasn’t stirred at all. When you get back into bed she instinctively cuddles next to you. + +“Where’d you go?” she asks sleepily. +“Uh…just thought I heard a weird noise. It was nothing.” You remark. +“Oh.” She replies and drifts back to sleep. + +You on the other hand are practically up for the rest of the night trying to put a ghost to rest once and for all. You manage to succeed, but you still don’t feel good about it. Hopefully in time, you’ll be able to live with it, but in order to do that, you’re going to have to leave this place and not come back. There are just too many memories here. + +Year 50 + +Lena wanted to take the fight to the eternals, and she’s really been sticking to that promise. + +In the beginning you were mainly targeting eternal soldiers and such. This naturally drew the ire of whatever local warlord that had established dominance there. This wasn’t a problem since you mostly just moved on to another location in Quala. + +The problem was you weren’t just fighting eternals now, you were fighting the multitudes of human followers said eternal warlords have under their command. Given that you were only two people, you were more than a little outnumbered. Also while Lena may be better skilled than she was, but she still does not have the capability to assassinate a battle hardened eternal warlord commanding said armies. You probably might have had better luck, if you were younger and still had access to your shadow magic, as it stands though, you’ve lost that ability completely now. It would seem that Dendrin’s link to you has practically been broken at this point, though he has still spoken to you from time to time. Mostly to tell you that your actions are a pathetic attempt to live in the past and you’re just following around Lena like a glorified bodyguard. This has lead to the usual predictable arguments. Dendrin must’ve gotten tired of arguing with you though since he hasn’t been speaking with you in quite some time, which suits you just fine. + +Eventually, Lena once again attempted to stir up the local populations in the hopes of getting some more help, she was a little more successful this time, but nobody has ever lasted very long. They either they quit for various reasons after the first few missions, or they get themselves killed. The ones that do stick around are mostly criminal types who enjoy the violence along with the looting on the side. + +All of this pretty much means Lena’s the leader of a group of bandits masquerading around as “freedom fighters.” You and Lena are now wanted in several territories in Quala. Even a few eternal rulers have declared temporary truce just so they can send joint forces against you. Svelk mercs have also been hired to hunt you down. While you’ve been generally supportive of Lena’s misguided quest for vengeance, you haven’t always thought its necessarily the wisest thing to pursue. Your last raid on a small encampment got half of the gang killed and Lena wounded to the point where she’s going to be in no condition to go on another until she heals. + +Right now you’re siting beside her bandaged body while she rests. You wonder if you shouldn’t at least try to talk a little sense into her. Its getting to the point where you believe your luck is going to run out eventually and while you’re enjoying fighting side by side with her, part of you would like to pull back a bit. If only to ensure your survival so you can actually enjoy her company a lot longer. + +Just as you’ve completed pondering this situation, Lena starts stirring from her sleep. + +“Did we win?” she asks. +“Yes, but it was at a high cost. I told you we should’ve prepared longer. And you shouldn’t have charged into battle like that.” +“Doesn’t matter, as long as we got that bastard.” +“You do realize that the sergeant was the only eternal in the platoon right? The rest were just regular humans.” +“So? If they take orders from an eternal and do their bidding, they’re just as bad. You know that better than anyone.” + +There it is again. Her blind need for vengeance as usual. You’re beginning to think she cares more about that, than she does you. +> Continue to stand by her +You’ve been a fool over one woman in the past, why not another one? At least you can identify with Lena’s obsession a bit better than Talia’s worship of Dendrin. It may be true that one day your luck will run out, but you’ve been running on borrowed time for decades. What better way to die in battle beside one you care about? + +Just like you should’ve years ago… + +“What’s wrong?” Lena asks due to your silence to her previous statement. +“Nothing. Nothing at all.” You say and give her a kiss on the lips. + +“I’d just prefer if you listened to my ideas a little more in the future. I’m only looking out for your safety.” +“I know. You’re probably right. I’d like to stay alive long enough to kill every eternal after all.” Lena says with a small chuckle and then holds on to her side when it causes a bit of pain. + +Lena spends the rest of the week healing up. It’s the longest amount of “downtime” you’ve had in quite a while. You’d actually enjoy it a bit more, if Dendrin didn’t visit you and continue to impart his views on your situation. + +“She’s going to lead you to ruin. I’m telling you Eternal.” Dendrin remarks. +“Yes, yes, yes. You’ve been telling me that for years now. You should know at this point I don’t give a shit if it does. It’s better than living like I was. At least now I feel alive again. Besides you were always bitching at me for living like a hermit anyway.” +“Yes, but I didn’t know you were exchange one self destructive lifestyle for another.” +“Dendrin, my whole fucking life has been self-destructive, long before I even had the misfortune of meeting you. My first major choice I can remember was either to beg for my life or die when I was five. I chose to die. Pretty much tells you all you need to know about me. So how about you leave me alone once and for all and let me get back to it okay? You’ll get no more entertainment from this mortal.” +“Apparently not. Very well then Eternal, go forth and die.” + +And that’s the last time you ever hear from Dendrin. + +Year 54 + +Here you are hold up in some abandoned cabin with svelk mercenaries shouting obscenities from outside. Lena lies on a dirty bed bleeding out and attempting to stay conscious. You’re not doing too good yourself. You knew it would end like this and you still don’t regret your decision in what is probably going to be your last moments on this world. + +It’s only a matter of time before the svelk just decide to burn you out. Somehow you can’t help but laugh at the fact that the first person who nearly killed you was a svelk. Everything has come full circle it seems. + +“Is..it…(cough) time?” Lena weakly asks. +“Can you stand up?” +“I don’t think so…I hurt all over and just want to sleep.” +“Its okay, you’ll be able to sleep soon. We both will. Here I’ll help, just grab your dagger.” + +You pick up Lena in an attempt to stand her up and while she’s practically dead weight, you manage to do it. + +“Do…you ever regret saving me?” Lena asks. +“Never.” You tell her and kiss her one more time before exiting the cabin with her. + +You and Lena make it five steps before the svelk open fire on you with their crossbows.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>If Lena’s gone ahead without heeding your warnings, she’s going to have to fend for herself, because there’s no way you’re taking chances with just the word of this asshole. + +“If you paid attention to history and old stories like you say you do, then you’d also know that I was never one to show mercy to my enemies. You’re a bigger fool than your friend Brutus if you’re thinking I’m going to let you go for any reason.” +“I had to try.” The eternal says with a resigned sigh. He turns and nods to his cohorts and they scatter in different directions while he advances on you. + +Great, now you’ll have to chase them all down. + +You dispatch the big talker fairly quickly, you manage to catch another one with your armbow before he gets too far and you finally chase down the third one just as he reaches the front gate. You notice several citizens starting to creep out from their homes and other hiding places. Still helpful as ever. + +You head quickly to the “mansion” sized home near the marshlands. You approach cautiously and that’s when you see Lena waiting nearby it. Apparently she decided to listen after all. + +“What took you so long? I’d like to get rid of this bastard and change out of these wet clothes.” +“Glad to see you listened for once, but didn’t you think I’d need help?” +“You told me, not to worry about you and to just wait for you.” +“Hmm, I suppose I did. Nevermind, did you have any problems?” +“Other than having to pull leeches off my body? No. There were a couple eternals near the area where I came through, but I killed them while they were still trying to make up their minds on whether or not to leave their posts to investigate the noise you were stirring up at the front gate. Besides that, I investigated the surrounding area outside this house and I haven’t seen any evidence that Brutus has tried to leave it.” +“Let’s just hope he doesn’t have some sort of underground tunnel built. Let’s go.” + +After breaking down the door, you cautiously move throughout the house. While certainly bigger than the rest of homes in Sinkhole, it probably doesn’t look much better from the inside. The place is a wreck, you’d think as a leader he’d want to keep his own home in better condition, but then given that you live in an underground hole of a collapsed temple which was already in ruins when you arrived there, maybe you aren’t exactly in a position to make judgments as far as living arrangements are concerned. + +“No traps so far.” Lena whispers. +“Considering there’s so much junk and garbage in this place, they could be well hidden. Keep a look out anyway, and stay quiet! No need to give our position away.” +“I’m sure he already knows we’re…” + +Before Lena can complete her statement, Brutus appears from around a corner and nearly takes her head off with an axe. Fortunately for her, you block the attack. At last you get a close look at the great leader himself, and once again you’re unimpressed by what you see. Makes this whole endeavor hardly even worth it at this point. + +“I’ll make you wish you hadn’t come back from the dead shadow!” Brutus exclaims right before you shut him up with a head-butt and then slicing his belly open. Falling to the floor and desperately attempting to hold in his entrails he starts to scoot back from you. + +“You new eternals always talk too much.” You say. “Lena…if you’d like to do the honors.” + +Lena wastes no time in taking up your offer. She points her spear at Brutus, who makes a plea for his life through bribery. It doesn’t work and Lena skewers him in the chest with the spear. + +Then she does it again… and again… and again… and… + +“Sonofabitch! You killed my family! Bastard! Die! Die! Fuck you…” Lena sobs the whole time. +“Lena he’s dead. You can stop now. He can’t order anyone else anymore. None of them can do anything anymore, we killed them all.” You say and grab the spear from her. + +She looks at you with tears streaming down from her eyes and for the first time since that first night you saw her assaulted she looks vulnerable again. The hardened exterior has allowed itself to collapse. She hugs tightly you and continues to sob. You aren’t exactly sure how to react except to reciprocate for a moment, but you’re uncomfortable so you gently push her away when you feel enough time has passed. She’s still upset, but begins to compose herself. + +“(sniff) So what’s next?” she asks. +“What do you mean?” +“What’s next? I mean we killed all of the eternals here in Delerg. Aren’t we going to go to Quala and continue? Where should we strike first?” + +You figured something like this would happen. Lena isn’t going to stop here. Already her desire for more vengeance is taking over. And while you certainly understand it and even agree with it to an extent, you just aren’t sure if this is truly the path for her. + +She has talent to be sure, but she’s attempting to take on a task that will far exceed her abilities even with you at her side. That’s the other problem. You fear that you might not even be on your best performance since you’ll always be worrying about her in the back of your mind. + +Still part of you would like to continue your partnership with her wherever that may lead. You certainly aren’t moping around like you used to and Lena’s enthusiasm bring a bit of a joy to your life. +> Persuade against her idea +This isn’t going to be easy or fun for you, but it is regrettably necessary. You’re going to not only have to convince her that she shouldn’t pursue this path, but also push her away in general. + +“Lena, you won, be happy with your victory. I know you’d like to kill every eternal out there, but it just isn’t feasible.” +“I won? My family is still fucking dead!” +“And? You think you’re the only one who’s ever lost something dear to them? Going on a vengeance crusade still isn’t going to bring them back and it’s just going to get you killed!” +“What the hell else do I have to live for?!” +“What do you have to live for? You’re still young for one thing, you’ve got your whole life ahead of you. Yes, what happened was tragic for you, but you’ve grown stronger because of it and you survived the ordeal. Now make the most of it. Live your life. Find someone to settle down with or whatever it is normal people do.” +“Normal people…do you really think I can go back to a normal life? Be someone’s little housewife?” +“Okay maybe not normal…look I’m just saying you going on some fool errand of trying to kill every one of those assholes claiming to be eternals is going to get you killed. Not all of them are going to be as inept as the ones that were hanging around here. The other ones? They’re constantly at war and are battle hardened. I guarantee they’ll be much tougher opponents and much more organized.” +“But wouldn’t you be there to help? You could train me more and…you could start up a rebellion in Quala! Just like you did in the old days you told me about!” +“Ha ha. No, those days are long over. I’ve told you that before. I’m not going anywhere and I’m not training you any more. You are not meant for this sort of life. I helped clear out this swamp and now I will probably go back to my previous life of solitude.” + +Lena begins to tear up again. It’s obvious she doesn’t like where this is going. + +“You’re kicking me out of your home aren’t you?” +“(Sigh) You had to know this arrangement wasn’t going to last forever. I know you’ll find some place to be I mean I’m sure you’ll be treated very well by most people considering you just helped remove their oppressors.” +“Save me your words, (sniffle) I thought we were…a team…I thought you cared…just go away. Leave me alone.” + +You don’t say anything else, because saying anything else is just going to make things harder and likely make things worse. So you just leave. + +It feels like forever getting back home, but eventually you do and head straight to the garden. + +“I’m back home, just like I said I would be. I even brought you something.” You say and put some blue flowers you picked on your way back home on her grave. + +“Oh Lena? Yeah she’s gone. I think its for the best she didn’t live here anymore y’know? Dendrin already impedes on us enough. Didn’t need her around too.” + +“I mean if she’d stayed she would’ve just been miserable here and eventually we would’ve ended up going to Quala like she wanted and she would’ve gotten herself killed. At least this way, she won’t do it now…well I suppose I can’t be sure of that, but I think the fact that she waited for me instead of charging into Brutus’ place by herself is a good indication. Showed me she’s always heeded my advice and not only that, she’s not as overly confidant as I thought she was. Without me around she’ll eventually abandoned her need for vengeance and settle into the normal life she was supposed to lead. She… deserves it, don’t you think?” you say with your voice quivering a bit. + +You begin to wipe your eyes and sniffle a bit. + +“No, of course I didn’t love her! What kind of opportunist would I be if I took advantage of some girl half my age that had a shitload of emotional baggage and a fragile personality? I’d be no better than those wannabe eternals that’s what. Besides, I didn’t think of her in that way, I just…look I’m tired all right? I’m going to bed.” + +You leave the garden and collapse on your bed. It takes awhile but eventually you start to fall asleep hoping that you don’t have to put up with any smart-ass comments from Dendrin anytime soon. + +He has uncharacteristically heard you for once because he leaves you alone for quite some time. + +You briefly consider doing what you told Lena not to do and that’s go kill eternals in the Quala region, but really that bores you already. Besides, you feel it isn’t going to be quite as much fun anymore without Lena around. + +It suddenly occurs to you that you should do some travelling again. You don’t have much else to do, so why not? Still, this will always be your home no matter what. You won’t leave for good. You just need a change of scenery. + +You decide that you’ll travel not to places you’ve already been or already know about, but to parts unknown, namely Delerg itself. Despite it being part of the Empire, much of it still remains unexplored. You decide you might as well stay relatively close to home if you have the intention of coming back. + +You pack up some gear and get ready to go, of course saying good-bye to Talia and telling her you’ll return eventually. + +Year 50 + +Passing the time by exploring uncharted parts of Delerg has kept you a bit busy over these past few years. It’s amazing that nobody had done it before, but the stories about the Delerg swamp being much more hostile the deeper you went were true. + +You travelled north for quite awhile, but eventually the swamp thinned out completely until it turned into vast bodies of water. Going further would’ve required a boat and you didn’t really have any wish to do that once you saw a glimpse of some of the things lurking in the water. + +Travelling east was an ordeal that you nearly didn’t survive. The swamp became more jungle like and it almost seemed as if the land itself was protecting something or otherwise it just didn’t want anyone going further east. You did battle with several beasts that you’d never seen before and probably nobody else from the “civilized” world had either. It wasn’t just beasts that were hostile, or even the plants, but also a short dark race of humans. Their small stature didn’t make them any less dangerous. Eventually you had to turn back because of the constant attacks that even you couldn’t keep defending against. You swear the trees must’ve been spawning the little bastards. + +Thankfully as an eternal you’re somewhat resistant to poisons, because it served you well during that time. + +Still if you stopped doing something just because it nearly killed you, you wouldn’t have accomplished anything in your life. So eventually you travelled south and beyond the swamp and jungle you discovered a whole new land, yet very much the same as the one you’re familiar with. + +Four tribes, two of them human, one elven and another one reptilian, all of them warring with each other and all of them fairly hostile towards you when confrontation was your only option with them. + +From what you could figure out, three of the factions were all displaced by the Empire in some way when it still existed. The reptilian tribe apparently was nearly exterminated by the shadows in the earlier days of the Empire as they once lived in the Delerg province. (Which explains why they were especially hostile towards you) + +You explored as much as you could and eventually departed leaving the factions to their private war. + +Naturally the whole time you were exploring you were periodically returning back home. Delerg itself never changed, it was the same quiet place it always had been. Every once in a while you’d attempt to trade goods in Sinkhole for the rare items you might need, people never accepted any payment you might offer and instead just handed it to you for free. Nowadays you’re considered the last shadow protector of the land and well respected. Of course you aren’t the only one. + +Lena is also well respected thanks to her deeds. Her assumption that she would never be able to fit into a normal life again were wrong as she did find someone to settle down. Though she was right that she would not be a simple housewife and is a hunter and trapper by trade. You know she lives in one of the smaller villages, probably much like the one she grew up in, but you’ve never spoken to her directly. You see no point in dredging up the past and you have both gone your separate ways now. You’re glad that she managed to move on, which is more than can be said for others… + +“Why have you been writing a lot lately? Never known you to pursue such interests.” Dendrin asks. +“I dunno. Why not? Not like I’m currently wandering topside at the moment and I already read all the books here. Figured I’d write about stuff I encountered or did on my last travels.” +“So you’re writing a book?” +“More like a personal journal. Not like I’m going to share it with anyone.” +“So why do it?” +“As I said, why not? Don’t you have something better to do?” +“Not really, though I thought you would be considering the impending invasion.” +“Invasion?” +“Yes, the invasion. I know you’ve been running all over the place lately, but haven’t you been keeping up on the local discussions, I assumed you had since I know you do visit Sinkhole on occasion. One of those eternals or several of them apparently have figured out this place has no active resistance of any kind and would be easy pickings.” +“Oh that. Yes I’m aware of what’s going on and I’ve been preparing for the inevitable.” +“What? Your usual training? You really think you’re going to be able to pull off what you did before by yourself? You do realize that if this place is invaded again, it won’t be occupied by the ones that were here before?” +“Yes, I’m well aware and as I said, I’ll be ready.” +“Are you planning on leaving?” +“No, but I’m glad you’ve still got faith in my combat abilities…as I asked before, don’t you have something better to do?” +“I might have to find something better to do soon if you aren’t around anymore.” Dendrin says. + +You wake up. + +You’re also left to ponder his “concern” for you. He’s right in that if there is an invasion, it’ll most likely be a proper army like when the Empire occupied Delerg. + +So what can you really do about it if it does happen? Leave? You’re past thinking like that. This is your home until the day you die. + +Fight? You probably will eventually just to break up the monotony, but you doubt if you’ll be able to keep your “secret” home a secret. Ever since you made your reappearance it’s a well known fact of where you live by most of the Delergites. Even the group of eternals you got rid of before eventually figured it out, though by that time they were too damned scared to ever launch any sort of offensive. + +The other problem to this is you are starting to feel your age. It’s partly why you stopped your exploring and returned home to rest. Fighting your own extended personal war by yourself for any reason is getting to be less of a viable option especially if this potential invasion force is dead set on keeping the province. And it isn’t like anyone else is going to help… + +Well perhaps one person might, but the situation would be vastly different and she has her own life now, though you wonder what sort of life that might be when the invasion comes. + +The only other option you have is to just lay low in the temple and never come out when the invasion arrives. You could easily seal up the entrance that even if it were found, it wouldn’t be easy to get in. +> Live as you have +You spent many years practically buried alive, you’re not about to spend your remaining life that way. Better you should just die in battle instead. Of course you only intend on doing that if there are no other options. + +So if this place stands any chance at all you’re going to enlist the help of the only person you know that will fight tooth and nail. You have no idea how Lena is going to react to seeing you again, but its something you’re going to have to do. + +You travel to the small village that lies to the south of Sinkhole where you know Lena has made her home. Its nameless, unspectacular and the people there live simple lives, but that’s usually the standard for the villages around here. + +After asking a few of the locals, one of them directs you to where Lena’s house is located. It doesn’t surprise you that it’s a bit isolated from the rest of the village. In any case it looks a lot better made than the rest. The muscular man outside chopping wood might have something to do with that though. He’s younger than you, though probably not more than ten years and probably a wood cutter by trade. He puts down his axe when he notices you walking up, which shows he doesn’t sense believe you mean him harm. While he’s probably a little surprised by your presence, it’s obvious he knows who you are, why not? Everyone does in this swamp. + +“So…the shadow finally comes to visit. I always wondered when this day would come. My name is Henry. Lena has spoken about you on several occasions.” +“Nothing good I expect.” +“On the contrary, she’s always spoken highly of you. If I was a more insecure man, I’d probably be jealous. However, I believe the bond I have with Lena is an unbreakable one…well save for death of course. Even love must give way for reality after all.” + +Shows how much he knows given that you still speak to Talia as if she were still alive. Of course you may not exactly be the beacon of sanity. + +“Anyway, if you’re here to see Lena, she’s out right now hunting, but should be back soon. I can’t promise that she’ll greet you warmly however.” Henry remarks and then crying is heard on the front porch of the house from a basket. He excuses himself to go see to it. + +You watch from a distance as you see Henry take a child from the basket and make the usual parental reassurances to calm the child. The child must only be a few months old, you didn’t know that Lena had a baby recently. You hear the name Tulla being said a few times and then Henry looks back over to you. + +“A handful this one sometimes. Still worth it though.” He says to you with a smile. +“Worth fighting for I hope.” You reply. + +Henry’s smile disappears at your remark. + +“Of course.” +“Well that would make you better than most parents in this forsaken swamp. But the willingness to fight isn’t going to carry the day you know.” + +“Neither is an old broken down eternal who belongs to a long dead order.” A familiar voice says. You turn around and see Lena carrying few dead Sul Monkeys and a small Croxidile. She’s changed a bit, a little older and weathered by life, but its still the girl you remember. She motions to Henry to go inside and he nods and complies. + +“So that’s the family huh?” you say. “I didn’t realize you had recently given birth. Congratulations I guess. I knew you’d find…” +“Why are you here?” Lena asks as she sets up the Sul Monkeys for skinning. +“Okay, right to the point then…there’s an invasion coming.” +“Yes, I’m well aware of the rumors.” +“I doubt if they’re rumors at this point.” +“So? What are you suggesting then?” +“I really don’t know. I mean…(Sigh) look if there is an army coming from Quala, they aren’t going to be the push overs that were here before.” +“Yes, I’m aware of that too. That’s why I’ve been trying to build up a resistance. I dunno if they’ll be any good in a fight, but it’s better than nothing.” +“Wait, you mean you actually got people to potentially help you? When?” +“I’ve been doing it ever since you abandoned me. Making contacts, building up friendships and all that stuff. I’m surprised that you didn’t know about it, but then you have been traipsing around the swamp for the past few years. Surprised you didn’t just leave for good. I mean what is there for you here?” +“Its my home too you know.” + +Lena snorts at your answer. + +“Home…you don’t have a home. You aren’t even a true shadow by your own admission. The only reason why you still live here is because you buried Talia in that wrecked temple you call home. You can’t move on.” +“Perhaps, but someone else hasn’t moved on from her school girl crush either apparently. Henry’s nearly my age. He’s my height and his hair is even my color, one might call that… substitution.” +“Don’t you dare criticize Henry! He’s a good man! Better than you’ll ever be!” Lena shouts, but you notice she is careful enough to throw down her skinning knife before getting in your face and poking you in the chest. Not that you would’ve taken it as a serious threat anyway. + +“Again perhaps, but I didn’t come here to criticize him or fight with you. Look, I’m going to be fighting the eternals regardless of your answer, but I thought it might be wise to contact someone else who I know is a fighter. Apparently though you’ve managed to find more though so perhaps you don’t need my help. Now if you don’t want or need my help, I shall take my leave, but it’s always here if you want it directly.” + +Lena says nothing other than picking up her knife and going back to skinning. You turn to leave and get about a few paces, before she calls back to you. + +“Wait. Since you’re more out of the loop than I thought, it might be good to bring you up to speed on the specifics of what is known and what is planned. If only to make sure you don’t get in the way of our own operations with your lone wolf tactics. So let me finish this first and you can come on in. We’ll have dinner before going over some of the details.” +“Very well.” You respond. + +After your visit is over, you leave with a better grasp of what’s to come. You just aren’t optimistic about it being enough, but then fighting the odds has always been what you’ve done all your life. No point in changing precedent. +> Years pass… +Year 55 + +You always were one to defy the odds, but you knew it could only end like this. + +Luck certainly played a large factor in your favor at the beginning. First off the invasion rumors were still just rumors for quite a while. It gave you and Lena more time to prepare and it was definitely preparation that was needed. + +By the time the eternal warlord Victor sent anyone to establish dominance, most of the population had actually been motivated to help. This was mostly thanks to Lena again, as well others she recruited. Victor’s first attempt was surprisingly diplomatic, as he sent in an ambassador of sorts along with a company of his troops in Sinkhole. There was an attempt to talk the Delergites into just capitulating with assurances that no harm would come to them if they had. Ultimately these empty promises were wasted and with your help, the first battle of Delerg was a crushing defeat for Victor. There was a lot of celebrating afterwards. + +You knew it was just the beginning though. + +The first few years were a back and forth guerilla war. Victor immediately seized Sinkhole and made it his base of operations. Battles were fought throughout the swamp and jungle. Some of the villages were occupied during this time, but there was still hope. + +Then came the moment you knew was going to happen and that’s when Victor got tired of playing nice. + +Losing way more troops and spending a lot more time than he wanted to, Victor started making demands that if the Delergites didn’t surrender immediately he was going to set the whole province to the torch. He also wanted you personally to be delivered to him dead or alive. He probably assumed that since you were a shadow, you were actually the main one responsible for leading this thing. + +There were a couple attempts to assault your home, but you had made sure it was a death trap for anyone even entering the nearby area, let alone the ruins themselves. The other attempt was to surround the area to at least contain you, but that didn’t really work either considering you just used a different access route that you made years ago and they’ll probably never find that one since its nowhere near the ruins and you have to actually swim underwater to access it. + +Eventually an order was given to just try to kill you on sight when possible and that the subjugation of Delerg was the main priority. + +To her credit Lena managed to maintain the Delergites’ enthusiasm of resisting Victor and most continued to fight, but heart alone isn’t enough sometimes. Victor just sent in more troops and began to make good on his promises of setting the province on fire. Village after village burned. Those that weren’t killed were taken away, probably in slavery. + +Things got so grim that you briefly pondered the idea of praying to Dendrin for help if only to try to get your shadow magic back, but given that it didn’t save Talia, you saw no reason to bother. Dendrin even told you not to bother, as he knew you’d never be a believer. Apparently your mere lip service would no longer be sufficient at this point. + +Dendrin did suggest that you attempt to convert others to the shadow religion though and he’d be more than willing to grant them powers providing they went through all the normal procedures. You laughed at that idea, you’re no missionary and had no time to bother with whatever self-serving plan Dendrin was hatching. Besides, the Delergites weren’t interested in anything else except surviving the next attack by Victor, they were already committed to one “cause” and that was more than enough. + +And now here you are in Lena’s village, the last stand of the Delerg resistance. It doesn’t much resemble a village anymore so much as it resembles a small walled fort now. And when Victor’s forces attack again, it’ll resemble a smoldering ruin. + +As you look around the village through the rain you see so many wounded and many more just plain exhausted. Things weren’t even this bad for them under the Empire during its last days. They weren’t even this bad under Brutus’ gang. + +This is what fighting the good fight has brought them. Death for those that resist and slavery for those that gave up long ago. All of them have to be thinking or have already thought at one time: “Was it worth it?” Some probably think no. Some probably think yes. And they’d both be right. + +It’s definitely what you think and have thought in the past. + +The difference is you know that YOU can survive this. You’ll live to fight another day. Its what you’ve always done and it’ll probably what you’ll continue to do until some lucky bastard manages to kill you. Who knows? Maybe that day is sooner than you think. + +You really aren’t worried about yourself though; lately you’ve been slightly more concerned about someone else. + +And it isn’t Lena. + +“Hey Uncle Shadow, are the invaders coming today?” Tulla walks up and asks you seemingly oblivious to the fact that it’s raining. + +You have no idea where she got the idea to call you “uncle shadow”, but she’s been doing it for so long now that you don’t bother to tell her not to anymore. + +“Probably not in this rain. Victor’s soldiers are still going to need a catapult or battering ram to get through the gates. They aren’t going to be able to drag one of those things here in the mud at least not effectively. Not just mud either, but water as well; the rivers and marsh are overflowing because of the rain. If you look down there you can see we’ve practically got a small moat around us. No my guess is they’ll wait for the rains to stop and then a few days after so the water level drops.” You explain while fixing your hood over your head. +“And then they’ll attack?” +“Yes, and then they’ll probably attack.” +“And will we win again?” + +You don’t answer; instead you motion Tulla to the overhanging roof at a nearby sleeping house. + +“Didn’t your mother teach you to come in out of the rain?” you say shaking off your own water soaked tunic. +“I like the rain. It feels nice.” Tulla remarks. + +It’s funny to see how Tulla was brought up in such a warzone yet she maintains an innocent sense of appreciation for simple things like rain. + +“Where is your mother anyway? Shouldn’t she be looking out for you?” +“Oh you know her, she’s busy a lot making plans with people to fight the bad people that attack us. It’s boring to sit there.” +“Perhaps, but you still should stay near her. Its not exactly safe out here.” +“But I am safe, because you’re here and you’re a great warrior! Mommy says so!” +“Hmm. I’ll bet, but I’m also busy and I can’t keep an eye on you all the time.” +“I’ll bet you can! Mommy says that you’re also the fastest warrior here!” +“Mommy talks a lot about me to you does she?” +“Yes! She says that you’re a lot more useful than daddy was.” + +You don’t even know how to respond to that. You always figured that even if Lena never did truly “love” Henry, you always thought she at least respected and cared for him. Henry wasn’t a bad guy; he just wasn’t cut out for fighting. It’s certainly not his fault that he died trying to defend this village. He’s only been dead a year and it really doesn’t seem right that she’s bad mouthing him to their daughter like this. Its not really right that she’s always been so distant to Tulla in general, but you’ve never understood that. + +Or maybe you do. + +Lena’s deluded herself that she’s always pursued this resistance because it’s about defending her family, other families and the homeland from tyranny, and it is to an extent. But her real reasons? She still hasn’t let go of the hate she has for eternals and she wants to kill as many as possible before she dies. (Never mind the fact that it’s mostly other humans actually making up the rank and file of Victor’s troops and Vic himself isn’t anywhere near the battlefield) + +In the scheme of things she never really wanted a family because as far as she was concerned her family died when she was a little girl and all that was left was the hatred that burned within. Everyone else to her is a secondary concern. You might be the exception because you managed to better focus her rage and possibly even quell the fire of it a bit. + +Who knows what might’ve happened had you taken Lena as some sort of youthful substitute for Talia. Who knows what might’ve happened had Victor not invaded. Would Lena still have insisted on her vendetta? + +You don’t know and it isn’t important because it’s the past and now is the present. She has obviously chosen a path and its not one you’re going down because you’re not responsible for her. You’ve helped as much as you could and you’re done. + +Still, while it probably won’t do any good, part of you feels like you should go confront Lena before you leave. +> Confront Lena +You’re going to try one last time with Lena. MAYBE you can talk some sense into her. + +“Come on.” You say and grab Tulla by her little hand to pull her along as you walk. +“Where are we going?” +“To see your mother.” + +Lena usually holds her meetings in a drab looking two-floor house near the center of the village which she’s made into her home since the village was walled up. You go there immediately and find her standing behind a table while she speaks to a bunch of other people standing in the room. It’s packed, but you make your way through the crowd. Lena notices and wonders if you’re here to tell everyone that there’s an attack coming. + +“What’s going on? Are those bastards coming to attack us?” Lena asks. +“No, but I need to talk to you NOW.” +“I’m in the middle of something, can’t it wait?” +“No, this is something that needs to be addressed in private, and if you’re unwilling to do so, I’m going to start clearing this room out in a less civilized manner.” + +Knowing that you’ll do it, Lena tells everyone that the meeting is over and that everyone should go back to their duties. When the home clears out, you’re left with just Tulla and Lena in the room. You tell Tulla to go upstairs and find something to busy herself with. She complies though she’s not enthusiastic about it. She also isn’t a fool and knows when an argument is about to happen. + +“Okay everyone’s gone, now what’s so damned important?” Lena says. +“Well for starters how about your own daughter? You let her wander away like this all the time, knowing damn well how dangerous it is.” +“She seeks you out right? I trust that you’ll look after her.” +“Yeah, but the problem with that is I’m not her damn parent and I’m supposed to be keeping an eye on other things that are of more importance remember?” +“And? I just sit around all day doing nothing? What exactly do you think I do and have been doing?” +“Losing a war and satisfying your desire for vengeance, but that’s not what I’m here about, I’m here to try to talk sense into you one last time…” +“Oh here we go. Wisdom from the old shadow once again. Save your breath I’ve heard your fat musings about our situation time and time again. And as I’ve said before nobody is forcing you to stay. Go on back to your hole and hide with your beloved corpse. That is what you’re best at right?” +“Lena, this isn’t about me, this is about YOU and your family, or what remains of it. This battle is lost, you know it and I know. Everyone probably knows it, but they’re still following you out of loyalty and desperation.” +“You know damn well we can’t surrender.” +“I’m not talking about that! I’m saying you need to take Tulla and just get the fuck out of here. You fought the good fight as long you could; you probably crippled Victor’s army and wasted his resources to the point where he’s probably struggling to maintain his holdings in Quala. I mean I think you’re way past even now.” +“Even? Is that supposed to be a joke? Victor kills us and enslaves us all and because he’s suffering from a little manpower shortage we’re supposed be even? What kind of leader would I be if I just abandoned everyone?” +“Fine then, if you really care about the people then talk them into leaving with you. Hell, I even know of an area where everyone could settle down anew. It’s not the friendliest place, but it’s the northern part of Delerg and out of reach from Victor or anyone else desiring to establish a military presence.” +“Since when have you been some protector of the people?” + +Now you start to get exasperated. + +“Lena, we’ve had this discussion before, but if you insist…I was doing this YEARS before YOU were even a lust filled idea in your parents’ heads! Protector of the people…I’ve probably been doing more than YOU to protect the people of Delerg even now. At least I’m suggesting a way for them to survive, but let’s get serious for a second. You’re right, I don’t care about any of them, I only care about one in particular. Okay two, but you don’t want me to care in that way…you want me to want me to care on a whole other level but the time for has long since past if it was ever a possibility to begin with.” + +Lena’s expression, which is usually one of coldness nowadays, begins to crack a little. She turns her head a bit and brushes her hair in an effort to hide possible tears starting to form. + +“Look Lena, the first time you explained your reasons for staying to fight five years ago, you managed to convince me because you were right and despite how I knew this was going to play out, it was still a worthy cause. However, I’m right too. There is nothing to be gained by being a martyr or dying a hero, or whatever it is exactly you’re trying to do here. If you don’t care about your own life, at least think of your daughter’s life. You’ve been distant with her ever since she was born, one would think in these times you’d want to spend more time with her not less. Let alone bad mouthing her father who DID spend time with her or leaving her in the company of a complete stranger.” + +“I’m not leaving her with a complete stranger, I’m leaving her with you!” Lena says and begins to break down. + +“SHE’LL BE SAFE WITH YOU! SHE’LL BE HAPPY WITH YOU!” + +Lena collapses in a nearby chair with her head in her hands weeping. + +“She’ll…survive with you…(sob)” + +You suddenly realize the situation that Lena has placed you in, and you hate her for it. You shake your head in disbelief. Out of all the things that have happened in your life, this has got to be the most unforeseen to your mind. You have no words; you instead just leave Lena to her crying and walk out the front door. + +You stand outside the house for a moment as the rain continues to fall just trying to wrap your head around all of this. You don’t even know where to start. Did she always plan this? Was this a last minute decision? Does she just expect you to… + +“Hey Uncle Shadow are you and mommy done fighting?” you hear Tulla ask as she comes from around a corner. +“Huh? Where’d you come from? I thought you were upstairs.” +“I was, but I sneaked out while you and mommy were yelling at each other. Sneaked like you do! I wanted to play in the rain. So are you done fighting?” +“Yeah…I think we’re done fighting…” you say looking back at the door. +“That’s good. I didn’t like it when mommy and daddy fighted either.” She says. + +With her question answered, Lena’s attention has already been distracted by the rain, which she gleefully plays in by splashing a nearby puddle. She has no idea what the hell is going on and what just happened. + +You watch her play for a moment and then call her over. + +“Tulla, come here.” +“Yes, uncle?” +“Do you have any items that are special to you?” +“Yes!” +“Well go in and grab them, but ONLY the ones you think are really important. Some clothes too. We’re going on a trip and we won’t be back for a long time.” +“Where are we going?” +“We’re uh, going to your uncle shadow’s secret hideout. Nobody will be able to hurt us there.” +“Yay! Is mommy coming too?” +“No…she’s got important stuff to do here. Look, get your belongings and let’s go. I’ll be right here waiting.” + +Tulla goes inside and you wait. Doesn’t take long For Tulla to come back out with a small bag of her things. + +“I’m ready uncle.” +“You say good bye to your mom?” +“Yes. She was crying and sad when I first went inside, but when I told her I was leaving with you, she looked up at me and smiled a little. She told me that she loved me and to do what you say.” + +You nod at Tulla’s explanation of events. + +“Are you going in to say goodbye?” +“No, your mother and I have said our goodbyes. Let’s go.” + +Your trip back to the temple is surprisingly uneventful. You don’t even need to avoid any patrols. You do take the long way though and go through your alternate entrance. This causes a bit of worry for Tulla since she’s never gone underwater before, but you reassure her that as long as she holds on to you, you won’t let her drown and will hold her up to catch her breath using the air pockets in the underground tunnel. Naturally she believes you can do anything so this immediately alleviates her fears. + +Eventually you’re home. + +“This place is dark and scary.” Tulla remarks looking around. +“Yeah, but my home, and your home too now. You can stay in this room, it was your mother’s at one time.” +“Wow there are a lot of books in that room!” +“That’s the library.” +“What in there?” Tulla asks and points to the cavern with the garden. +“That’s…a private area. Don’t go in there without permission okay? Even if you talking or faint whispering.” +“A ghost doesn’t live there does it?” +“Heh, well sort of I suppose.” You smirk. “But don’t worry she’s friendly…in fact forget what I said, let’s go into that room right now.” + +You enter the garden with Tulla hiding somewhat behind you still nervous about the “ghost.” You point out Talia’s grave to Tulla. + +“There she is. She doesn’t speak or anything though. She just listens, mainly to me of course. Her name is Talia.” +“Oh is she like my daddy?” Tulla asks making the connection that Talia isn’t a real ghost and just dead. +“Yes, yes she is, but I still talk to her. Because I still love her.” + +Tulla starts to ask another question, but you are in mood to answer any more as its been a long strange day. You tell Tulla to go to her room and dry off and unpack. You then mention you’ll see her shortly. Tulla leaves you alone to be with your beloved. You sit down beside Talia’s grave and think about the strange situation you’re in. + +“Well Talia, it probably isn’t exactly how you ever envisioned it, but we have a child now.” +> Years pass… +Year 70 + +As the years go by, you know that day is coming soon that you won’t and shouldn’t keep Tulla sheltered from the surface too much longer. Granted you’ll still be with her when that day comes, but having been to the surface every once in a while to keep apprised of the situation, Delerg still isn’t exactly the friendliest place. + +Victor dumped so much into the campaign to conquer Delerg he’s been trying to get the most out of it by rebuilding Sinkhole into a proper town (Calling it Triumph). Apparently he’s also decided to make more plans to develop the area namely by chopping down the jungle to the south and to the east. This has been slow going though especially to the east which you know full well just how hostile the jungle flora and fauna get in that direction. (Oddly he hasn’t decided to expand north which is just as well since he’d probably call for the temple’s ruins to be dug up or built over, or something similar and you’d have to deal with his troops more directly.) As a result of all this redevelopment he’s not only got the pitiful remains of the enslaved Delergites working day and night, but he’s also imported many of his subjects from Quala to do work as well. A lot of these seem to be prisoners of varying types. Some are genuine criminals like murderers and thieves. Most though just couldn’t pay their taxes and it was either this or as a conscript to serve on one of the war fronts that Victor is engaged in with other Quala warlords. + +Amusingly you’re no longer on the “wanted list.” An eternal captain by the name of Brom that runs the military garrison in Triumph claims he killed you during the final battle for Delerg. (In fact that’s how he got his current promotion) You’re not exactly sure how he “proved” this, but you’re guessing he just threw a black cloak on some dead body, destroyed the face to the point of recognition and made everything up. + +Naturally he brags quite a bit about doing it. You’re not sure what’s funnier, the fact that he’s lying about it, or the fact that he managed to fool everyone into believing his lie (Including Victor, apparently). + +In any event, it doesn’t bother you since it makes life easier without some angry warlord trying to hunt you down. Besides you’ve got enough on your mind just looking after Tulla. + +“Come on, get your head out of those books, its time for your training.” You say to Tulla. +“But we train all the time! Can’t I just finish this one book?” Tulla whines. +“No! We have to keep to a schedule. Now let’s get to it.” + +Tulla puts away her book in defeat and leaves the library to head to the training room. It’s been more of an effort to get her to do her training lately. + +“Why do I have to train so hard? You never let me go up to the surface anyway.” Tulla says. +“And you won’t be going up to the surface until I’m confident that you can take care of yourself. I know you think I’m just being mean, but trust me what I’m doing is going to ensure your survival. I won’t always be around, you know.” + +Tulla doesn’t reply to your remark she just picks up her wooden sword and gets into the fighting stance you’ve been teaching her. You and her spar for a few moments and fortunately despite her less than enthusiastic desire to be here, she does not slack off and proves to be absorbing everything you’ve been teaching her all these years. + +“Good. Glad to see you’re taking this seriously. Now let’s try something new.” You say and change up your style. You tell Tulla to pay attention. + +An hour later you and her are taking a break. Though it’s mainly for you. Every damn bone in your body aches and the ravages of time never let you forget that your earlier years of near perpetual combat have taken their toll. + +“Are you okay uncle?” Tulla asks in concern. +“Yes, I’m fine. Just old war wounds acting up as usual. We’ll pick up training again in a few minutes.” + +While you lay prone recovering, Tulla decides to be inquisitive as usual. + +“Uncle, did you train as hard as this when you were my age?” Tulla asks. +“Heh heh…I was trained harder than you at an even younger age.” You chuckle. +“Was it the shadows who trained you so hard?” +“Not at first. It was some sadistic svelk bitch that called herself Mistress. She trained me up until I was twelve, and then I was transferred over to the shadows.” +“Oh. So is that when you learned magic?” +“Yeah I learned it eventually. Never really liked using it though.” +“I would like to use magic like a shadow! I’ve read you could turn yourself in invisible, make yourself really fast or even walk like a spider on a ceiling!” +“Yeah some of it was pretty handy I guess. Haven’t been able to use any in years though. +“Because Dendrin doesn’t like you anymore?” +“Not exactly…but something like that…yes.” + +You’ve explained a little bit about Dendrin to Tulla in the past, you don’t think she fully understands all of it, but you do know that she spends a lot of time reading the old tomes about shadow history and such. Which is why she’s been getting increasingly more curious about him and the shadows in general. She probably would like to hear a more personal view of the organization. + +A view you don’t even want to get into anytime soon. So you try to change the subject. + +“Alright, we’ve rested enough, let’s get back to it.” You say getting off the floor. + +Just as you’re about to begin, Tulla makes a statement. + +“It’s a shame you and Dendrin don’t get along anymore. If you did, you could teach me shadow magic and it would help me survive better.” + +You say nothing and just tell her to focus on defending herself. Tulla complies, but she’s not the one that’s preoccupied, you are. The remark she’s just made is going to be the first step in a long series of questions and problems. You know she’s going to eventually ask why can’t she become a shadow. They already intrigue her the more she reads the books. + +What are you going to do? Tell her she can’t read anymore? Put further restrictions on her? The whole point of this is to make her independent and avoid sheltering her. + +You dwell on this for the rest of day and until you manage to fall asleep… + +Nothing happens. You fully expected Dendrin to visit and give some sort of “sagely” advice and most likely try to convince you to let Tulla become a shadow, but he doesn’t. + +Weeks go by while you’re still struggling with this decision and you still get no visit from Dendrin. This is one of the rare times you’d actually wish he’d show up and try to convince you just so you’d have a compass of doing the exact opposite. Of course maybe he doesn’t care. He did say he was bored of the shadows for centuries after all. + +In the end this isn’t up to him. This decision is on you. Tulla’s interest in the shadows is only going to increase and you’re going to have to let her find her own way or nip it in the bud now. The problem is despite all your own prejudices against Dendrin and the shadow religion in general, you’d be a complete hypocrite if you didn’t admit that the training did provide you with the means of surviving this long. The shadow magic also helped in that endeavor. Even Tulla made that connection. + +Tulla already shows much promise combat wise. If she could cast magic, she’d probably become very powerful indeed. +> Allow Tulla to be a shadow +After some further thinking you realize that its not really your decision either it’s hers. If being a shadow is what she wants to be, then you’re not going to stand in the way. + +The next day you approach Tulla about it and she’s noticeably happy about the situation. + +“So I’ll get to use magic?” she asks. +“Well that’s part of it I suppose, but if you’re going to pursue this, you’re going to have to train even harder AND you’re going to have to do some of it on your own. I can tell you what I know, but I can’t cast magic anymore so you’ll have to really absorb what you learn in those spell books in the library and keep up on your prayers to Dendrin. Though I’m pretty sure as long as you’re praising him you’ll get your powers.” +“What about the initiation ritual?” +“The what?” +“The initiation ritual. The ritual every shadow has to go through. I’ve read about it and it says it involves opening up a portal to Dendrin’s realm.” +“Oh yeah, that. Well I dunno, I think that’s just a formality.” +“No! I have to connect with Dendrin before I’m able to use the magic and even if I got the ritual right, I can’t open the portal unless I have magic ability to begin with!” +“Okay okay…don’t worry, I’ll think of something.” + +Of course that “something” isn’t something that you particularly want to do, + +Later that night before you go to sleep, you pray to Dendrin. It isn’t exactly the most pious of prayers, but you figure you’ll at least get a visit this time. + +You figure right. + +“Well it’s been a long time since you’ve done that. I’m guessing you need something from me.” Dendrin says. +“Yeah and you know what.” +“No I actually don’t, why don’t you tell me, I’d be very interested in what has caused you to pursue such a desperate measure. For you of course.” +“Determined to play this up for all its worth I see. (Sigh) Fine. Tulla wants to be a shadow, but she can’t be one until a portal to the shadow realm can be opened. Is there anyway you can help with that?” +“Are you asking me to give you your magic powers back?” +“I was actually going to ask if you’d grant powers to Tulla. She thinks that she has to go through the initiation ritual in order to gain them.” +“She does. If it were as simple as worshipping me, then everyone would be doing it. So how are you going to open up the portal to my home?” +“Come on you can’t help me out here?” +“I’m sorry, but what do you want me to do? I have no connection with the girl and I can’t just grant her powers! Those are the rules.” +“Alright so can you grant me powers so I can open up the portal then?” +“And why would I want to do that?” +“Because I’ve provided you with years of fucking entertainment that’s why! I mean shit, you can even take ‘em away after I open the damn thing if you want. One would think you of all people would want this anyway, it’s a new follower for you.” +“You presume much Eternal.” +“Yeah I suppose I do. Fine then, don’t help me. I’ll fine some way of helping myself as usual…” +“Hold on, I never said I would help you, but tell me Eternal why do you want this so much? You do realize that once she enters my realm she will undergo a change that will cause her to become a proper devotee correct? In time her faith will only get stronger and your own influence on her will dwindle. I know you care for this little girl, so I’m asking you now are you prepared to make this sacrifice?” + +“If it will better ensure her survival, then yes.” You then think about Talia’s own devotion to Dendrin “Besides, it wouldn’t be the first time.” +“Very well then Eternal, I shall grant you your magic powers temporarily so that you may help Tulla on her first steps to becoming a shadow. Who knows, perhaps you may even realize that I’ve actually been helping you all this time and come back to the fold…” +“I won’t argue and claim that you haven’t given a few good pieces of advice or even genuinely helped me on occasion. But you and I both know that any help you’ve given me, is to help yourself as well as your own twisted fascination with me. I’ll always know that and it’s why I can’t ever worship you as a god.” +“You do realize however, your life could’ve been a lot less painful if you had just complied and paid respect even to a superficial degree?” +“I’m not sure how much more superficial I could’ve gotten. I mean I was practically walking on the unbeliever line at the best of times. After Talia died, what was even the point of that anymore? Besides, I’d say you giving me my powers back now despite my blasphemous ways is a win for me in my book.” +“Ha ha, perhaps, but what of my influence over your daughter?” + +Its weird, even though you’ve taken care of Tulla like a daughter you’ve never called her that. Not even in your conversations with Talia. Dendrin’s choice of words you imagine is him trying to make some sort of point, but whatever it is you don’t care. + +“What of it? Despite everything I know about you, you’ve never been actively malicious towards me or even your own followers. Apathetic? Inattentive? Yes, but you’ve always done the bare minimum as far as help is concerned which is providing the ability to tap into the shadow realm so that your worshippers can cast spells. I don’t really see you being any more influential than that because it would actually require effort on your part. It’s why you just indoctrinate everyone during the initiation ritual. So Tulla will pray to an uncaring god of a silly religion. Whatever. As long as it helps her survive, I’m fine with your influence. The most you’ll do is take away the magic if Tulla ever overcomes the indoctrination and stops worshipping, which I don’t see happening. Not even Talia’s love for me overcame it.” + +There’s a brief silence followed by a low chuckle. + +“You’re lucky I’ve always liked you Eternal. Tell your daughter that I will be looking forward to seeing her soon.” + +You wake up and the first thing you do is try to cloak yourself. It takes a little effort, but it works. You then try to speed yourself up and that works as well. You decide to spare your endurance on anymore tests and head to the library. Unsurprisingly you see Tulla there reading by candlelight. + +“Oh, I didn’t know you were up. I was just reading up on some of the old shadow masters.” +“”What you should be doing is reading up on one of those spell books rather than history. I’ll be preparing to open the portal to Dendrin’s realm after I study up on the spell first.” +“You…you are? But how? Your magic…” +“Its back, Dendrin has seen fit to bless me with the ability again if only to help you. He also says he’s looking foreword to seeing you.” +“He is? I don’t know what to say! I mean this is an opportunity I’ve wanted for a while now.” +“I know you have, so you better get yourself prepared because as I’ve already said, this will be a big commitment. When you go through that portal, you will be changed. You will think differently due to your connection to Dendrin. You may even dislike me afterwards…” +“Oh that’s silly! Why would I dislike you? You’re the one who saved me from certain death and has trained me for all these years. You’re the one who is making this all possible and for that I shall always be grateful to you.” + +You see the sincerity in her eyes and the brightness in her smile when she says that. You can only hope that she retains that feeling. + +The next few days you spend reading over the initiation ritual. You remember reading about it before during your “hermit” years, never thought you’d actually ever be casting it though. + +Finally the day comes and you open up the portal much in the same way Master Ebon opened it up for you so long ago. It’s funny; Master Ebon actually tried to talk you out of entering the portal. Claimed you didn’t have the right mindset to be a shadow. Of course at the time, you had no idea what he was really talking about. You just saw it as an insult that you weren’t worthy enough and you just went in anyway disregarding orders just to prove you were worthy. That decision probably changed your life forever just like this will change Tulla forever, though in a different way. + +The shimmering portal to Dendrin’s realm fades in and out of existence and you watch Tulla approach. + +“Are you ready for this?” you ask her. +“I am uncle.” She replies +“Then enter the portal.” + +After a quick hug, Tulla composes herself and enters the portal. You watch and begin to wait for her return. +> Years pass... +Year 75 + +“Well the liberation of Delerg seems to be going better this time around, Triumph has been seized. Let’s hope when Tulla wins this war, it’ll stay free of petty dictators once and for all.” You say to Talia. + +Tulla’s been succeeding in her goal nearly as soon as she put her mind to it, which wasn’t long after her shadow initiation. Tulla managed to recruit people even easier than her mother did, you guess she inherited her charisma in that way. Of course it helped that the people from Quala forced to live in Delerg weren’t very happy with Victor for a long time anyway. Not to mention all the criminal types that had been brought here to work off their sentences as well as the outright slaves. Delerg pretty much became a breeding ground of recruits. What was surprising is that Tulla managed to not only recruit them into a rebellion, but also got some interested into becoming shadows. That’s mainly where your help came in. You provided your home as the training ground along with performing the initiation ritual for said recruits. With their help you even managed to rebuild the temple a bit, though you still tend to keep to your underground sanctuary. + +It’s odd though, this new generation of shadows don’t seem quite as fanatical as the ones you were familiar with. They revere Dendrin of course, but they don’t regard someone like you with hostility. You remember you were shocked when Tulla first came back from the portal and you found that she treated you with the same respect that she always had despite your attitude towards Dendrin. At first you figured that maybe your previous influence over her had been so great that it over came Dendrin’s indoctrination, but its obvious now that Dendrin hasn’t been doing the old routine of indoctrinating the shadows with mindless loyalty anymore. + +You’d ask him about it, but he hasn’t been speaking to you lately. Besides, you’d rather not jinx a good thing. It’s enough that you’ve still got your magic to a small degree. + +“Just wish I could be of more help to her. Damn old body. I hate this weakness. I used to be so quick and strong.” You continue to say to Talia. You haven’t had a chance to speak with her like this in a while so you’re taking advantage of your sudden clearing of responsibility. + +“You ever think we could’ve actually won a sound victory against the Empire? I’ve been thinking about it, and I think we could’ve. Maybe I shouldn’t have been so proud and just never told you and Cyrus the truth about Dendrin. It might’ve kept us more united. Certainly would’ve help when I fought Kane practically all by myself. Remember that? What a battle! I was probably at my peak and I still couldn’t get the advantage over that tough bastard. I was really happy to see you when you showed up and not just because you saved my life either, though it played a big part of it at the time.” + +You suddenly stop reminiscing because your statement has now made you think about how you didn’t manage to save her life. After all these years, you wonder why you continue to do this to yourself and why you can’t move on. You can only guess its because what Talia once said. You’re Eternals and you had a special bond that nobody else did. + +There must be some truth to it, Brenda was the ruler of the Nalin Empire for decades and she never married or even took another lover after her beloved Roldan died during the Empire War. Last news you heard of her was that she committed suicide a couple years ago and her second in command Tarna took power. You guess the absence of her mate for so many years was just ultimately too much for her to bother going on. You wonder if it hadn’t been for your encounter with Lena and later your relationship with Tulla if you would’ve eventually done the same thing. Probably not in the same way, but still… + +It also makes you realize how many people you’ve outlived in general. If you were anyone else you probably would’ve been dead several times over already. You’re not just the last of the true Eternals, but as the second generation has been murdering each other out of existence, you might very well end up being the last one period. + +“Survival Talia, I always was good at it.” You say patting the earth near the grave. + +You suddenly hear Tulla calling for you. + +“Yes, Tulla I’m in here.” + +Tulla stands near the entrance of the cavern with a large black book in her hand. She knows when you’re speaking with Talia, she prefers not to disturb you. + +“I’m sorry I didn’t realize you were busy.” She asks. +“It’s fine, I was finished anyway. What is it? The liberation of Delerg is going well I trust?” +“Oh yes. Victor’s troops have been pushed back to the borders. Actually there are reports that he’s suffering strife in his territory in Quala as well.” +“Not surprising. Most of those so-called eternals have little grasp on how to rule effectively. As soon as a crack forms their little dominions start folding like a house of cards. Look at Warden Matron Brenda. She ran the Nalin Empire for what, about thirty some odd years? She kept it stable and those second generation eternals never dared to attack her.” +“I’m surprised to hear you praise her. Didn’t you fight against her in the old Empire war?” +“Not directly, but it doesn’t matter. I can at least respect her even if she was on the other side. Who knows? Maybe if things had been different, we may have fought on the same side. Bah, I’m rambling nonsense, what was it that you needed?” +“Oh, this book.” Tulla says and hands it to you. + +You glance through it and then close it. + +“Yes, what about it?” +“Do you know what it is? I can’t really make any sense of the rest of it and most of it is in a language I don’t even understand.” +“Oh yeah, I vaguely remember this book now. I tried reading it once during my hermit days, but I put it back pretty quickly and never looked at it again until just now. It holds a spell called the ritual of ascension.” +“Ritual of ascension? Sounds pretty impressive.” +“I suppose it does. It was supposedly passed down from Dendrin himself to the first Shadow Master. It wasn’t really clear what it does exactly except that it would strengthen the shadows link to Dendrin’s realm forever. I guess that means it would make the shadows more powerful. Dunno though. Seems weird that no Shadow Master ever tried to use it. Maybe it was more of a symbolic thing.” +“Maybe…but maybe now is the time to try it!” +“I doubt if you need this spell to win the war with Victor.” +“No, but a chance to bring ourselves closer to Dendrin? Why shouldn’t we jump at such a chance?” +“Eh...I think you’re asking the wrong person, Tulla.” +“I know, but I’m so busy with coordinating the war effort, I just don’t have time to study this book like I would’ve been able to in the old days. I mean I suppose I could wait until after the war is won, but who knows how long that will be exactly? And there’s never a guarantee on survival.” +“Don’t say that.” You remark. +“You know better than anyone that life can be cut short in a blink of an eye.” +“Hmm, I also know that sometime life can just go on and on and on…” you say causing Tulla to laugh. + +“Alright, I’ll study this book again, I’ve got the time after all. You just be careful out there.” You say. + +Tulla thanks you and after a couple more brief exchanges she’s on her way again, leaving you alone. + +“Well Talia, I said I wanted to help more, guess I better get to it.” + +You spend the next few days reading over the book. You thought you weren’t going to have any better luck than you did decades ago, but actually you understand it a little better now. You can even figure out some of the unfamiliar language. The problem though is you’re still not getting a good feeling about the ritual. + +It’s still vague on what exactly will happen, but the shadows would be linked with Dendrin’s realm not just in a spiritual sense, but also in a very real physical sense. The shadows essentially would become REAL shadows. Incorporeal and no longer susceptible to the weaknesses that most beings suffer. At least that’s what you think it means. + +Worshipping Dendrin is one thing, but becoming some sort of a wisp? An intangible being with real no sense of self? You can’t imagine wanting to transform yourself in such a manner regardless of the benefits. However you wouldn’t be involved, it would be Tulla and the rest of her shadows and they may be more willing to jump at the chance. True they aren’t the fanatics like the old shadows, but one never can tell. + +You even attempt to pray to Dendrin, just so you can ask him more about this ritual, but you have no luck. You’re on your own in this and you’re only left with a couple choices. You could just destroy the book and solve the problem that way or you can tell Tulla the truth about the spell and let her make her own decision. +> Destroy the book +You’re not taking any chances, this ritual doesn’t feel right to you and you’re not going to let Tulla put herself in any more danger in the name of Dendrin. You put the book to the flame. You half expected it to be invulnerable or something similar, but it burns fairly quickly and easily. + +You wonder if you should think up a lie to tell Tulla. Maybe tell her that you lost the book or something, but you can’t lie to her. Besides, you’re fairly certain she wouldn’t believe you anyway. You’re just going to have to deal with her getting angry with you. + +Unfortunately you don’t expect her to get quite as angry as she does. + +“You destroyed the book?! What’s wrong with you?! That was obviously a sacred book with a sacred ritual to Dendrin and the shadows! I trusted you!” Tulla yells. +“I’m sorry Tulla, but that ritual didn’t feel right. Not in my heart. I couldn’t let you perform it and something bad happening to you.” +“But that wasn’t your call! That was mine!” +“Tulla, I know you’re a shadow and a dedicated follower of Dendrin and all that, but you really don’t know what a manipulative uncaring and unfeeling bastard he is. I know! I’ve been speaking with him for decades!” +“Yes, I’ve heard all this countless times. And just because your relationship with him wasn’t positive, it doesn’t give you the right to dictate MY relationship with him!” + +You can’t contain your own anger at how Tulla is reacting to you just trying to look out for her. + +“What fucking relationship? Does he even speak to you? Does he? No! He doesn’t! You know why? Because he doesn’t give a shit about you! And the sooner you learn that fact, the better off you’ll be!” +“Dendrin will speak to me when he deems it to be so. In fact maybe he’s not speaking to me because I’m still associating with you.” +“Are you listening to yourself? How can you even say such nonsense?! I’M the one who even got your foot in the door to be a fucking shadow in the first place! I’M the one who’s been training you, and supporting you all these damn years! I’M the one who SAVED your life when you were a little girl! So don’t tell me that your associating with me is some sort of negative!” + +Tulla gets quiet and looks at you with a stare you’ve never ever seen her give to you before. + +“You know something uncle? You’re right. And I am grateful for everything you did for me up to this point. But I see now that our minds are not the same on this and our paths differ completely. I shall continue to respect you, but I believe our relationship will not be the same after this.” + +Tulla takes her leave immediately. You call out to her, but she doesn’t listen. You curse yourself for getting angry like you did, but you still believe you did the right thing. + +Days pass and you hear nothing from Tulla. There aren’t any of her shadows coming to the temple for training either. You begin to get concerned so you make a trip to Triumph and start asking questions. + +You find out that nothing has happened to Tulla, except that she’s been fighting directly on the front lines. You imagine that she’s probably working out her anger through battle. A bit reckless, but you’ve often turned to battle many times when you were angry so its one way of channeling it you suppose. + +Weeks pass into months and eventually into years. Victor has been driven out completely, yet you hear nothing from Tulla in all that time. You don’t hear anything from any shadow or Dendrin for that matter, not that you don’t mind his silence, but its like everyone has abandoned you completely. You learn that Triumph has been renamed New Gloom and a new shadow temple is in the process of being built there. When you attempt to find out more about Tulla, other shadows barely speak with you and only say that Tulla cannot be bothered as she has important business as Shadow Mistress. + +Naturally you become outraged that you’re not being allowed to see her and despite your best efforts you are only beaten by shadows for your troubles. If only you much younger and they weren’t hiding behind their shadow magic. + +As you drag your bloodied body out of New Gloom it is at that moment you realize that Tulla has not and will not forgive you for what you did. You feel a great sorrow that you haven’t felt since Talia died. You return home that day and go to the only one who has continued to stand by your side for decades. + +“Talia… I have tried to do the right thing whenever I could, but everyone I’ve ever cared about has either died or in this last case pushed me away. There is no longer a place for me in this world. I come to join you at last and put aside this life time of anguish once and for all.” + +You lie down beside Talia’s grave and thrust your blade into yourself.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 75 + +“Well the liberation of Delerg seems to be going better this time around, Triumph has been seized. Let’s hope when Tulla wins this war, it’ll stay free of petty dictators once and for all.” You say to Talia. + +Tulla’s been succeeding in her goal nearly as soon as she put her mind to it, which wasn’t long after her shadow initiation. Tulla managed to recruit people even easier than her mother did, you guess she inherited her charisma in that way. Of course it helped that the people from Quala forced to live in Delerg weren’t very happy with Victor for a long time anyway. Not to mention all the criminal types that had been brought here to work off their sentences as well as the outright slaves. Delerg pretty much became a breeding ground of recruits. What was surprising is that Tulla managed to not only recruit them into a rebellion, but also got some interested into becoming shadows. That’s mainly where your help came in. You provided your home as the training ground along with performing the initiation ritual for said recruits. With their help you even managed to rebuild the temple a bit, though you still tend to keep to your underground sanctuary. + +It’s odd though, this new generation of shadows don’t seem quite as fanatical as the ones you were familiar with. They revere Dendrin of course, but they don’t regard someone like you with hostility. You remember you were shocked when Tulla first came back from the portal and you found that she treated you with the same respect that she always had despite your attitude towards Dendrin. At first you figured that maybe your previous influence over her had been so great that it over came Dendrin’s indoctrination, but its obvious now that Dendrin hasn’t been doing the old routine of indoctrinating the shadows with mindless loyalty anymore. + +You’d ask him about it, but he hasn’t been speaking to you lately. Besides, you’d rather not jinx a good thing. It’s enough that you’ve still got your magic to a small degree. + +“Just wish I could be of more help to her. Damn old body. I hate this weakness. I used to be so quick and strong.” You continue to say to Talia. You haven’t had a chance to speak with her like this in a while so you’re taking advantage of your sudden clearing of responsibility. + +“You ever think we could’ve actually won a sound victory against the Empire? I’ve been thinking about it, and I think we could’ve. Maybe I shouldn’t have been so proud and just never told you and Cyrus the truth about Dendrin. It might’ve kept us more united. Certainly would’ve help when I fought Kane practically all by myself. Remember that? What a battle! I was probably at my peak and I still couldn’t get the advantage over that tough bastard. I was really happy to see you when you showed up and not just because you saved my life either, though it played a big part of it at the time.” + +You suddenly stop reminiscing because your statement has now made you think about how you didn’t manage to save her life. After all these years, you wonder why you continue to do this to yourself and why you can’t move on. You can only guess its because what Talia once said. You’re Eternals and you had a special bond that nobody else did. + +There must be some truth to it, Brenda was the ruler of the Nalin Empire for decades and she never married or even took another lover after her beloved Roldan died during the Empire War. Last news you heard of her was that she committed suicide a couple years ago and her second in command Tarna took power. You guess the absence of her mate for so many years was just ultimately too much for her to bother going on. You wonder if it hadn’t been for your encounter with Lena and later your relationship with Tulla if you would’ve eventually done the same thing. Probably not in the same way, but still… + +It also makes you realize how many people you’ve outlived in general. If you were anyone else you probably would’ve been dead several times over already. You’re not just the last of the true Eternals, but as the second generation has been murdering each other out of existence, you might very well end up being the last one period. + +“Survival Talia, I always was good at it.” You say patting the earth near the grave. + +You suddenly hear Tulla calling for you. + +“Yes, Tulla I’m in here.” + +Tulla stands near the entrance of the cavern with a large black book in her hand. She knows when you’re speaking with Talia, she prefers not to disturb you. + +“I’m sorry I didn’t realize you were busy.” She asks. +“It’s fine, I was finished anyway. What is it? The liberation of Delerg is going well I trust?” +“Oh yes. Victor’s troops have been pushed back to the borders. Actually there are reports that he’s suffering strife in his territory in Quala as well.” +“Not surprising. Most of those so-called eternals have little grasp on how to rule effectively. As soon as a crack forms their little dominions start folding like a house of cards. Look at Warden Matron Brenda. She ran the Nalin Empire for what, about thirty some odd years? She kept it stable and those second generation eternals never dared to attack her.” +“I’m surprised to hear you praise her. Didn’t you fight against her in the old Empire war?” +“Not directly, but it doesn’t matter. I can at least respect her even if she was on the other side. Who knows? Maybe if things had been different, we may have fought on the same side. Bah, I’m rambling nonsense, what was it that you needed?” +“Oh, this book.” Tulla says and hands it to you. + +You glance through it and then close it. + +“Yes, what about it?” +“Do you know what it is? I can’t really make any sense of the rest of it and most of it is in a language I don’t even understand.” +“Oh yeah, I vaguely remember this book now. I tried reading it once during my hermit days, but I put it back pretty quickly and never looked at it again until just now. It holds a spell called the ritual of ascension.” +“Ritual of ascension? Sounds pretty impressive.” +“I suppose it does. It was supposedly passed down from Dendrin himself to the first Shadow Master. It wasn’t really clear what it does exactly except that it would strengthen the shadows link to Dendrin’s realm forever. I guess that means it would make the shadows more powerful. Dunno though. Seems weird that no Shadow Master ever tried to use it. Maybe it was more of a symbolic thing.” +“Maybe…but maybe now is the time to try it!” +“I doubt if you need this spell to win the war with Victor.” +“No, but a chance to bring ourselves closer to Dendrin? Why shouldn’t we jump at such a chance?” +“Eh...I think you’re asking the wrong person, Tulla.” +“I know, but I’m so busy with coordinating the war effort, I just don’t have time to study this book like I would’ve been able to in the old days. I mean I suppose I could wait until after the war is won, but who knows how long that will be exactly? And there’s never a guarantee on survival.” +“Don’t say that.” You remark. +“You know better than anyone that life can be cut short in a blink of an eye.” +“Hmm, I also know that sometime life can just go on and on and on…” you say causing Tulla to laugh. + +“Alright, I’ll study this book again, I’ve got the time after all. You just be careful out there.” You say. + +Tulla thanks you and after a couple more brief exchanges she’s on her way again, leaving you alone. + +“Well Talia, I said I wanted to help more, guess I better get to it.” + +You spend the next few days reading over the book. You thought you weren’t going to have any better luck than you did decades ago, but actually you understand it a little better now. You can even figure out some of the unfamiliar language. The problem though is you’re still not getting a good feeling about the ritual. + +It’s still vague on what exactly will happen, but the shadows would be linked with Dendrin’s realm not just in a spiritual sense, but also in a very real physical sense. The shadows essentially would become REAL shadows. Incorporeal and no longer susceptible to the weaknesses that most beings suffer. At least that’s what you think it means. + +Worshipping Dendrin is one thing, but becoming some sort of a wisp? An intangible being with real no sense of self? You can’t imagine wanting to transform yourself in such a manner regardless of the benefits. However you wouldn’t be involved, it would be Tulla and the rest of her shadows and they may be more willing to jump at the chance. True they aren’t the fanatics like the old shadows, but one never can tell. + +You even attempt to pray to Dendrin, just so you can ask him more about this ritual, but you have no luck. You’re on your own in this and you’re only left with a couple choices. You could just destroy the book and solve the problem that way or you can tell Tulla the truth about the spell and let her make her own decision. +> Tell the truth +You believe you’d probably be better off destroying the book, but this isn’t about you. Once again it’s about Tulla. You allowed Tulla to make her own decision on becoming a shadow; you’ll allow her to make this decision on her own as well. + +Doesn’t mean you can’t try to sway her against it though. + +A week passes and Tulla returns for a visit and asks you what you’ve learned about the ritual. You explain to her what is involved and what you think the result is after it is completed. She’s intrigued, which makes you a little worried. + +“Tulla, I know you might not want to hear this and you’ll probably think that I’m just displaying my own prejudices against Dendrin, but I don’t think going through with this ritual is a good idea.” +“Oh? Why not?” +“Because you’d be giving up you so much. I mean do you really want to be a real shadow that does nothing but serve Dendrin? I mean I know you’re happy serving him now, but you still have the chance to walk away if you should ever change your mind later. This ritual would be a one-way trip. And who knows what it will do to you exactly.” +“It could be nothing like what you’re worrying about then.” Tulla points out. +“Yes, or it could be something even worse than what I’m worrying about. (Sigh) I dunno Tulla, I mean it is ultimately your decision, but I do not believe performing this ritual is a good idea and I worry about you. It is supposed to be cast by a Shadow Master anyway. As it stands, this order doesn’t even officially have a Shadow Master. I mean I certainly don’t count, and I don’t know about you, has Dendrin spoken to you?” +“No. Sadly Dendrin has not yet seen fit to speak with me in the same way he does with you. +“Hmm, he hasn’t spoken to me in a long time either. I even tried asking him about the ritual, no luck though.” + +Tulla looks at you in silence for a moment. + +“Well given that we still need to worry about Victor, I suppose maybe this isn’t the best time to be messing about with unknown spells and rituals especially when we don’t exactly know what they do. Dendrin hasn’t seen fit to tell you and he hasn’t seen fit to speak to me, so perhaps we’re not worthy of performing it anyway. Maybe nobody has, which is why its never been cast. Another day perhaps.” Tulla says. +“Perhaps.” You say causing Tulla to smile a bit and then give you a great big hug. You’re a little surprised at the suddenness of it given the situation. + +“Wha…what’s this for?” +“For being so wonderful of course! You obviously had deep concerns about this ritual and worried about me in particular yet you still allowed me to make the decision. You have always allowed me to make my own choices, just like when I wished to become a shadow to begin with. You could’ve easily forbade me to become one, just like you could’ve destroyed the book.” +“Trust me, it did cross my mind on both accounts.” +“But you didn’t, because you encourage me to be my own person.” +“Hmm, some might call that being overly permissive.” +“Well I call it being a supportive father.” Tulla exclaims. + +The two of you just look at each other for a moment. The realization that Tulla just acknowledged you as her father takes only a few seconds to sink in. + +“And you’re the best I could ever have in a daughter.” You remark trying to not burst into too much emotion and the pair of you embraces tighter as if the pair of you never wants to let the other one go. + +Eventually you do though and Tulla gives you a small peck on the cheek before saying she has to get back to the battle for Delerg. + +“I can still help directly you know. I could lob a few shadow bolts a peoples’ heads.” you remark. +“I know, but I worry about you as well. Besides, I’ve been having success in getting more people interested in being shadows. They’ll be coming here for brief training and initiation soon. Your skills a better put to use here.” +“Very well, I’ll be here.” + +Tulla leaves and you’re soon left alone pondering all of what just happened. While you’re certainly glad you managed to convince Tulla against the ritual today, who knows what will happen in the future. Still, you can’t dwell on the possible doom and gloom of the future. You’ve done that most of your life. Right now you’re little more than happy that you’re no longer just “uncle” to Tulla. She considers you her father just as you’ve considered her your daughter for a long time. + +You naturally go to Talia and tell her the news. + +“Tulla called me her father today. Didn’t expect it and I have to say I got all choked up about it nearly to the point that I couldn’t reply back. Made me happy. Don’t think I’ve ever been exactly this happy in a long time. I mean I’ve had moments where I wasn’t unhappy, but I’ve haven’t felt this good since, well since before you died.” + +You sit down near Talia’s grave and touch the ground. + +“I…just wish you were here to experience it.” You say with a few sniffles. You rub your eyes a few times and just sit quietly near the grave until you eventually fall asleep… + +“You continue to surprise Eternal. I really thought you’d destroy that book and make it seem like an accident.” +“Just shows you haven’t been paying attention for over sixty years. However, I am in good spirits and I won’t even let this visit from you bring me down.” +“It’s never my intension I assure you. But you aren’t worried about Tulla one day casting the ritual of ascension?” +“Sorry, like I said, I’m not going to dwell on such matters right now. If she does, then so be it. It’ll be her decision to make as usual. Oh and thanks for helping me out on that as usual. You could’ve at least told me what it does.” +“Sorry, but you don’t get that knowledge. It’s something a shadow master just has to know to do when they feel the time is right. Their choice, not my influence. Something you’re encouraging in your daughter right? But if it’ll ease your mind a bit, she’ll never be able to perform it in your life time.” +“What do you mean?” +“She’s not a Shadow Master or Mistress in her case and she won’t be until the current one dies.” + +You don’t get it at first, but then you do which just raises further confusion. + +“Wait…so that means…me? I’M the Shadow Master? Since when?” +“Unofficially since Master Ebon died, though when you were the last one left you were pretty much the only candidate left.” +“Wha…but you never told me!” +“You never asked, plus I doubt if I had told you, it would’ve made much of a difference to your antagonistic mindset.” +“But…this still doesn’t make sense! I strayed so far that I didn’t even have shadow magic ability!” +“Eh, you were still the closest thing to a shadow. Though I’m pleased that a new group will be able to carry on after you. It’s odd, I was bored with the shadows, but I think starting fresh like this has renewed my interest a bit. I think giving them a bit more free will and making them a little less mind numbingly devoted helps with that. Just think when the group starts numbering in the hundreds or thousands, oh the conflicts of doctrine interpretation they’ll have! I can just see the holy wars now! And I suppose I have you to thank for all of it.” + +You shake your head at Dendrin’s enthusiasm at his predicted carnage. He hasn’t changed at all, it’s all still just a game to him, but you’re hardly surprised. Still, you doubt if such a thing will happen any time soon and oddly, you are sort of pleased to hear that Tulla can’t perform the ritual even if she tries. Though you do wonder one thing. + +“So tell me, did you know all this was going to happen? Did you know that I would eventually bring about a new group of shadows for you to enjoy all over again?” +“Well as I always said, I predicted you making a major change and you did.” +“And that’s that?” +“And that’s that.” Dendrin says. If you could see place a face with this reply, it would definitely be a smug one. + +You’re not getting any more information out of Dendrin, he’s back to being his usual cryptic self so you don’t bother trying anymore. + +“I shall leave you now Eternal, we will only speak once more to each other in the far future, but for now I give you a much needed rest from my divine discourse. Think of it as your reward for all your service…as a shadow.” Dendrin says with a laugh. + +You eventually wake up. You brush the dirt off of yourself and groggily look over at Talia’s grave. + +“Well Talia, Dendrin say’s he’s leaving me alone for a long time. I guess you were right, he does eventually answer all prayers.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 70 + +As the years go by, you know that day is coming soon that you won’t and shouldn’t keep Tulla sheltered from the surface too much longer. Granted you’ll still be with her when that day comes, but having been to the surface every once in a while to keep apprised of the situation, Delerg still isn’t exactly the friendliest place. + +Victor dumped so much into the campaign to conquer Delerg he’s been trying to get the most out of it by rebuilding Sinkhole into a proper town (Calling it Triumph). Apparently he’s also decided to make more plans to develop the area namely by chopping down the jungle to the south and to the east. This has been slow going though especially to the east which you know full well just how hostile the jungle flora and fauna get in that direction. (Oddly he hasn’t decided to expand north which is just as well since he’d probably call for the temple’s ruins to be dug up or built over, or something similar and you’d have to deal with his troops more directly.) As a result of all this redevelopment he’s not only got the pitiful remains of the enslaved Delergites working day and night, but he’s also imported many of his subjects from Quala to do work as well. A lot of these seem to be prisoners of varying types. Some are genuine criminals like murderers and thieves. Most though just couldn’t pay their taxes and it was either this or as a conscript to serve on one of the war fronts that Victor is engaged in with other Quala warlords. + +Amusingly you’re no longer on the “wanted list.” An eternal captain by the name of Brom that runs the military garrison in Triumph claims he killed you during the final battle for Delerg. (In fact that’s how he got his current promotion) You’re not exactly sure how he “proved” this, but you’re guessing he just threw a black cloak on some dead body, destroyed the face to the point of recognition and made everything up. + +Naturally he brags quite a bit about doing it. You’re not sure what’s funnier, the fact that he’s lying about it, or the fact that he managed to fool everyone into believing his lie (Including Victor, apparently). + +In any event, it doesn’t bother you since it makes life easier without some angry warlord trying to hunt you down. Besides you’ve got enough on your mind just looking after Tulla. + +“Come on, get your head out of those books, its time for your training.” You say to Tulla. +“But we train all the time! Can’t I just finish this one book?” Tulla whines. +“No! We have to keep to a schedule. Now let’s get to it.” + +Tulla puts away her book in defeat and leaves the library to head to the training room. It’s been more of an effort to get her to do her training lately. + +“Why do I have to train so hard? You never let me go up to the surface anyway.” Tulla says. +“And you won’t be going up to the surface until I’m confident that you can take care of yourself. I know you think I’m just being mean, but trust me what I’m doing is going to ensure your survival. I won’t always be around, you know.” + +Tulla doesn’t reply to your remark she just picks up her wooden sword and gets into the fighting stance you’ve been teaching her. You and her spar for a few moments and fortunately despite her less than enthusiastic desire to be here, she does not slack off and proves to be absorbing everything you’ve been teaching her all these years. + +“Good. Glad to see you’re taking this seriously. Now let’s try something new.” You say and change up your style. You tell Tulla to pay attention. + +An hour later you and her are taking a break. Though it’s mainly for you. Every damn bone in your body aches and the ravages of time never let you forget that your earlier years of near perpetual combat have taken their toll. + +“Are you okay uncle?” Tulla asks in concern. +“Yes, I’m fine. Just old war wounds acting up as usual. We’ll pick up training again in a few minutes.” + +While you lay prone recovering, Tulla decides to be inquisitive as usual. + +“Uncle, did you train as hard as this when you were my age?” Tulla asks. +“Heh heh…I was trained harder than you at an even younger age.” You chuckle. +“Was it the shadows who trained you so hard?” +“Not at first. It was some sadistic svelk bitch that called herself Mistress. She trained me up until I was twelve, and then I was transferred over to the shadows.” +“Oh. So is that when you learned magic?” +“Yeah I learned it eventually. Never really liked using it though.” +“I would like to use magic like a shadow! I’ve read you could turn yourself in invisible, make yourself really fast or even walk like a spider on a ceiling!” +“Yeah some of it was pretty handy I guess. Haven’t been able to use any in years though. +“Because Dendrin doesn’t like you anymore?” +“Not exactly…but something like that…yes.” + +You’ve explained a little bit about Dendrin to Tulla in the past, you don’t think she fully understands all of it, but you do know that she spends a lot of time reading the old tomes about shadow history and such. Which is why she’s been getting increasingly more curious about him and the shadows in general. She probably would like to hear a more personal view of the organization. + +A view you don’t even want to get into anytime soon. So you try to change the subject. + +“Alright, we’ve rested enough, let’s get back to it.” You say getting off the floor. + +Just as you’re about to begin, Tulla makes a statement. + +“It’s a shame you and Dendrin don’t get along anymore. If you did, you could teach me shadow magic and it would help me survive better.” + +You say nothing and just tell her to focus on defending herself. Tulla complies, but she’s not the one that’s preoccupied, you are. The remark she’s just made is going to be the first step in a long series of questions and problems. You know she’s going to eventually ask why can’t she become a shadow. They already intrigue her the more she reads the books. + +What are you going to do? Tell her she can’t read anymore? Put further restrictions on her? The whole point of this is to make her independent and avoid sheltering her. + +You dwell on this for the rest of day and until you manage to fall asleep… + +Nothing happens. You fully expected Dendrin to visit and give some sort of “sagely” advice and most likely try to convince you to let Tulla become a shadow, but he doesn’t. + +Weeks go by while you’re still struggling with this decision and you still get no visit from Dendrin. This is one of the rare times you’d actually wish he’d show up and try to convince you just so you’d have a compass of doing the exact opposite. Of course maybe he doesn’t care. He did say he was bored of the shadows for centuries after all. + +In the end this isn’t up to him. This decision is on you. Tulla’s interest in the shadows is only going to increase and you’re going to have to let her find her own way or nip it in the bud now. The problem is despite all your own prejudices against Dendrin and the shadow religion in general, you’d be a complete hypocrite if you didn’t admit that the training did provide you with the means of surviving this long. The shadow magic also helped in that endeavor. Even Tulla made that connection. + +Tulla already shows much promise combat wise. If she could cast magic, she’d probably become very powerful indeed. +> Don’t allow it +Forbidding her to do anything or restricting her is only going to cause her to resent you even more or worse run away completely. You aren’t going to let her be a shadow and become some indoctrinated idiot with no mind of her own though. + +There’s only one solution you can come up with, you’re going to have to leave this place and live elsewhere. If the temptation isn’t readily available then it the desire for it may eventually go away. Well you hope at least. + +But where could you go? Its not like the surrounding areas are exactly all that friendly. The only places you can think of that might be relatively free of strife are the Nalin Empire and the Felkan Kingdom. + +The Nalin Empire is closer since you’d only have to travel through part of Quala. It’s still run by Matron Warden Brenda, and from what you know she keeps it pretty orderly and safe. It’s somewhat amusing to think that you’d be running to a place that is basically the last remnants of the old Empire. Your only real concern with going there is that Brenda’s as old as you and you’ve heard rumors that her second in command Tarna is a very ambitious woman. You might end up heading to a place that will either be going on a war of conquest or even suffering a civil war soon. + +The Felkan Kingdom is a much longer trek and you’d have to travel through Quala and Arat, which is daunting prospect given how dangerous both places are. You also don’t know much about the Felkan Kingdom save for the propaganda that the Empire told everyone which probably means it isn’t that bad of a place. It still exists so you’re guessing it’s fairly stable. + +In any case you’ll figure it out later, right now you have to make preparations. + +When you tell Tulla the news that you need to leave this place and go to the surface her reaction is a mixture of confusion and joy. Confusion to as why it is so urgent to leave, but joy that she’s finally getting to leave. You make up a story of saying you’ve been noticing Victor’s people scouting the topside of the temple ruins lately and how you think its only a matter of time before they try to either start digging or collapse the place on you. This excuse seems to work. + +Tulla of course tries to pack some books with her, but you tell her to leave such things, as you need to go quickly and travel light. She complains a bit, but after you raise your voice slightly, she capitulates. + +“Okay, I’m ready to go uncle. Do you think it’s raining? I hope so, I really miss the rain.” Tulla remarks. +“Well, we’ll know soon enough, but I need to do one more thing first. Wait by the entrance, I’ll be there shortly.” + +While Tulla waits, you head into the garden one last time. + +“Talia, I’m leaving now and I probably won’t be returning this time. I wish there was some other way, but I just can’t allow Tulla to become a shadow. I need to take her out of this place. Its for the best anyway, can’t allow her to become sheltered.” + +You move closer to Talia’s grave. + +“I’ll continue to honor your memory even though I won’t be here anymore. I promise. I love you you…goodbye.” You say and kneel down to touch her grave before leaving. + +Immediately after you and Tulla leave the temple, she happily takes in the outside scenery. + +“The sky! The trees! Its all as wonderful as I remembered!” she says. +“Yeah, well keep the joy to a minimum, Delerg’s become an even less friendly place than you probably remember too. We need to keep a low profile until we reach our destination.” +“So what is our destination?” Tulla asks. +> Travel to the Nalin Empire +The Nalin Empire is closer and quite frankly you’re too damn old to be sneaking around on long extended trips nowadays. + +“The Nalin Empire? Are you sure? I thought you told me it was run by an eternal.” Tulla says. +“It is, but she’s like me. She’s a first gen and given that she’s run the place for several decades without any attacks or other major problems it’s one of the more stable places I can think of.” + +Your journey out of Delerg is fortunately without conflict. Your journey through Quala isn’t however, though you’re lucky enough to not get harassed by any professional soldier types and its just bandits. + +Tulla does well against them, you don’t do too bad yourself considering your age, but during the fight it’s never been more apparent of how old you actually are. + +“You okay uncle?” Tulla asks you after the battle. +“Yeah…(pant)…just…well like I’ve said before. I’m just old. Though I can honestly say, I’m proud of you and glad to see that you’re more than capable of taking care of yourself. Now let’s loot these sons of bitches and hope they actually robbed some people before their pathetic attempt on us. I’m pretty sure we’re going to need some money when we get to Nalin.” + +When you eventually arrive in Nalin, you make your way to Dalt, which is one of the major cities in the land. Tulla is in awe. Most of her life has been spend underground in practical isolation. She’s never seen anything so busy, everything is almost overwhelming, but she seems to enjoy it. The funny thing is, you’re pretty much in the same situation as Tulla. Most of your life has been spent away from civilization and in isolation. Even when you were around other shadows you were still alone. Unlike Tulla though, you don’t feel comfortable here. + +“Uncle this place is amazing! There’s so much here to do!” +“Mm, well keep in mind that while this place isn’t Delerg or Quala, there are still dangers here. Perhaps more subtle ones. Here.” You hand over what valuables you have to Tulla. + +“Now with this stuff, you can probably get a room at a quality inn for quite a while. I imagine you’d probably be able to get a job as a serving girl easily, but I doubt that’s something you’d want to do. So I suggest maybe something in the local security or maybe even the recruiting office. Given most of female soldier types I’ve noticed stomping around here, I don’t think they’d turn you away due to gender. Age maybe, but after you prove what you’re capable of, I don’t think you’ll have any problems.” + +You give Tulla a hug though she seems confused. + +“Uncle, I don’t understand.” +“Tulla, this is your chance to start a new life. I wish you all the best with it, but this…” you make hand motions at the buildings around you. “This isn’t me. I wanted to bring you to a place where you can have a normal life, well as normal as it can get anyway. And I have. As for me, I’m too old to change and get accustomed to new situations.” +“But where will you go?” +“Oh, I’ll be around. You don’t think I’d just abandon you completely do you? I just won’t be here. Besides, I noticed when we took that short cut through the woods; we passed a run down old cabin on the way here. Pretty sure it’s abandoned. Seems like it would be a good place to spend my remaining years.” + +You give Tulla a hug. Tulla returns your hug and kisses you on the cheek, promising to visit you at some point when she gets the chance. + +You leave the city and return to the abandoned cabin you mentioned to Tulla. The place is indeed abandoned. Needs some fixing up, but you can get to that tomorrow, its been a long past couple days and you’re glad to have proper place to sleep for a change… + +“You really think this is what’s best for Tulla? Encouraging her to become some common soldier? A soldier of a government for all intents and purposes is a remnant of what you spent your life fighting against?” Dendrin asks. +“Yeah, I’m amused by the irony myself.” You say. “But I believe she will thrive in this environment or least she’ll have a better chance than where she was.” +“If you’d gotten past your irrational prejudices, and allowed Tulla to become a shadow she would’ve thrived a lot better no matter what environment she was in. +“And that’s what you’re really pissed about isn’t it? You were hoping that the shadows would be resurrected somehow with Tulla? Well sorry to disappoint you, but the shadows die with me and as far as I’m concerned they already died long ago.” +“You short sighted fool, this wasn’t about Tulla, this was a chance for you to finally achieve something worthwhile in your miserable life!” +“Yeah, well I’ve never been here to impress you, so if I’m no longer a source of amusement or interest to you I guess you can start leaving me alone finally.” +“I suppose so. You’re a great disappointment Eternal.” +“I’m sure I am.” + +And that’s the last time you ever hear from Dendrin ever again. + +In the months to follow you spend fixing up your cabin and generally living a simple life. Tulla comes and visits you as she promised. The next time you see her she’s in a soldier’s uniform. Apparently she made an impression. She mentions that the Nalin Empire is always on the look out for new recruits anyway. + +A couple years pass and the ruler of Nalin dies. Apparently Brenda committed suicide, but given how ambitious her second is, you wonder if Tarna didn’t have anything to do with it. You briefly have a concern that Nalin will be plunged into civil war, but fortunately Tarna keeps the Empire together and it was never in such danger. Tarna is perhaps s a little stricter than Brenda is, not that it matters to you since you live a self-sufficient life in the middle of nowhere and have a “daughter” in the army. The only thing you ever have problems with is competing with the nearby kobold tribe for game. + +Tulla still visits you from time to time, but the visits get rare due to her responsibilities, but you don’t mind. She’s living her life after all and that’s what you always wanted for her. + +Years pass into decades and you live long enough to see the Nalin Empire embark on a war of conquest of Quala. You know Tulla was sent to the front lines because she made one last visit before leaving. You wished her luck as you always do, but you know better than anyone that war is an ugly business and death can come at any time. + +You never do see her again. You never know if she was killed or if she was just on assigned elsewhere. + +Eventually your last remaining years are spent as you most often lived: Alone and your thoughts mostly revolving around Talia. With your last dying breath you tell her that you’ll be joining her soon.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Forbidding her to do anything or restricting her is only going to cause her to resent you even more or worse run away completely. You aren’t going to let her be a shadow and become some indoctrinated idiot with no mind of her own though. + +There’s only one solution you can come up with, you’re going to have to leave this place and live elsewhere. If the temptation isn’t readily available then it the desire for it may eventually go away. Well you hope at least. + +But where could you go? Its not like the surrounding areas are exactly all that friendly. The only places you can think of that might be relatively free of strife are the Nalin Empire and the Felkan Kingdom. + +The Nalin Empire is closer since you’d only have to travel through part of Quala. It’s still run by Matron Warden Brenda, and from what you know she keeps it pretty orderly and safe. It’s somewhat amusing to think that you’d be running to a place that is basically the last remnants of the old Empire. Your only real concern with going there is that Brenda’s as old as you and you’ve heard rumors that her second in command Tarna is a very ambitious woman. You might end up heading to a place that will either be going on a war of conquest or even suffering a civil war soon. + +The Felkan Kingdom is a much longer trek and you’d have to travel through Quala and Arat, which is daunting prospect given how dangerous both places are. You also don’t know much about the Felkan Kingdom save for the propaganda that the Empire told everyone which probably means it isn’t that bad of a place. It still exists so you’re guessing it’s fairly stable. + +In any case you’ll figure it out later, right now you have to make preparations. + +When you tell Tulla the news that you need to leave this place and go to the surface her reaction is a mixture of confusion and joy. Confusion to as why it is so urgent to leave, but joy that she’s finally getting to leave. You make up a story of saying you’ve been noticing Victor’s people scouting the topside of the temple ruins lately and how you think its only a matter of time before they try to either start digging or collapse the place on you. This excuse seems to work. + +Tulla of course tries to pack some books with her, but you tell her to leave such things, as you need to go quickly and travel light. She complains a bit, but after you raise your voice slightly, she capitulates. + +“Okay, I’m ready to go uncle. Do you think it’s raining? I hope so, I really miss the rain.” Tulla remarks. +“Well, we’ll know soon enough, but I need to do one more thing first. Wait by the entrance, I’ll be there shortly.” + +While Tulla waits, you head into the garden one last time. + +“Talia, I’m leaving now and I probably won’t be returning this time. I wish there was some other way, but I just can’t allow Tulla to become a shadow. I need to take her out of this place. Its for the best anyway, can’t allow her to become sheltered.” + +You move closer to Talia’s grave. + +“I’ll continue to honor your memory even though I won’t be here anymore. I promise. I love you you…goodbye.” You say and kneel down to touch her grave before leaving. + +Immediately after you and Tulla leave the temple, she happily takes in the outside scenery. + +“The sky! The trees! Its all as wonderful as I remembered!” she says. +“Yeah, well keep the joy to a minimum, Delerg’s become an even less friendly place than you probably remember too. We need to keep a low profile until we reach our destination.” +“So what is our destination?” Tulla asks. +> Travel to the Felkan Kingdom +The Felkan Kingdom is further away from the chaos and while it’ll be a long trek, you feel it’ll be a better place for Tulla to start a new life. + +“The Felkan Kingdom? That’s a long distance, are you sure you’re up for that?” Tulla asks. +“Of course I am! I’m not so old that I can’t make a simple trip! Now let’s get going.” You snap. + +Your journey out of Delerg is fortunately without conflict. Your journey through Quala isn’t however, though you’re lucky enough to not get harassed by any professional soldier types and its just bandits. + +Tulla does well against them, you don’t do too bad yourself considering your age, but during the fight it’s never been more apparent of how old you actually are. + +“You okay uncle?” Tulla asks you after the battle. +“Yeah…(pant)…just…well like I’ve said before. I’m just old. Though I can honestly say, I’m proud of you and glad to see that you’re more than capable of taking care of yourself. Now let’s loot these sons of bitches and hope they actually robbed some people before their pathetic attempt on us. I’m pretty sure we’re going to need some money when we get to the Felkan Kingdom.” + +You continue your journey through Quala and continue to feel your age. You don’t have too many more problems in Quala, but Arat is another story. + +As bad as Quala is, Arat is still in relative anarchy. You and Tulla are attacked several times and unfortunately it is during one of those attacks that your age catches up to you. In this case your attackers happen to be a small group of svelk. + +The svelk are more than a match for Tulla despite her skills, and you as well. Though you manage to at least fight long enough for Tulla to escape. You on the other hand succumb to your wounds and the svelk finish you off with a few bolts to your head.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’re going to try one last time with Lena. MAYBE you can talk some sense into her. + +“Come on.” You say and grab Tulla by her little hand to pull her along as you walk. +“Where are we going?” +“To see your mother.” + +Lena usually holds her meetings in a drab looking two-floor house near the center of the village which she’s made into her home since the village was walled up. You go there immediately and find her standing behind a table while she speaks to a bunch of other people standing in the room. It’s packed, but you make your way through the crowd. Lena notices and wonders if you’re here to tell everyone that there’s an attack coming. + +“What’s going on? Are those bastards coming to attack us?” Lena asks. +“No, but I need to talk to you NOW.” +“I’m in the middle of something, can’t it wait?” +“No, this is something that needs to be addressed in private, and if you’re unwilling to do so, I’m going to start clearing this room out in a less civilized manner.” + +Knowing that you’ll do it, Lena tells everyone that the meeting is over and that everyone should go back to their duties. When the home clears out, you’re left with just Tulla and Lena in the room. You tell Tulla to go upstairs and find something to busy herself with. She complies though she’s not enthusiastic about it. She also isn’t a fool and knows when an argument is about to happen. + +“Okay everyone’s gone, now what’s so damned important?” Lena says. +“Well for starters how about your own daughter? You let her wander away like this all the time, knowing damn well how dangerous it is.” +“She seeks you out right? I trust that you’ll look after her.” +“Yeah, but the problem with that is I’m not her damn parent and I’m supposed to be keeping an eye on other things that are of more importance remember?” +“And? I just sit around all day doing nothing? What exactly do you think I do and have been doing?” +“Losing a war and satisfying your desire for vengeance, but that’s not what I’m here about, I’m here to try to talk sense into you one last time…” +“Oh here we go. Wisdom from the old shadow once again. Save your breath I’ve heard your fat musings about our situation time and time again. And as I’ve said before nobody is forcing you to stay. Go on back to your hole and hide with your beloved corpse. That is what you’re best at right?” +“Lena, this isn’t about me, this is about YOU and your family, or what remains of it. This battle is lost, you know it and I know. Everyone probably knows it, but they’re still following you out of loyalty and desperation.” +“You know damn well we can’t surrender.” +“I’m not talking about that! I’m saying you need to take Tulla and just get the fuck out of here. You fought the good fight as long you could; you probably crippled Victor’s army and wasted his resources to the point where he’s probably struggling to maintain his holdings in Quala. I mean I think you’re way past even now.” +“Even? Is that supposed to be a joke? Victor kills us and enslaves us all and because he’s suffering from a little manpower shortage we’re supposed be even? What kind of leader would I be if I just abandoned everyone?” +“Fine then, if you really care about the people then talk them into leaving with you. Hell, I even know of an area where everyone could settle down anew. It’s not the friendliest place, but it’s the northern part of Delerg and out of reach from Victor or anyone else desiring to establish a military presence.” +“Since when have you been some protector of the people?” + +Now you start to get exasperated. + +“Lena, we’ve had this discussion before, but if you insist…I was doing this YEARS before YOU were even a lust filled idea in your parents’ heads! Protector of the people…I’ve probably been doing more than YOU to protect the people of Delerg even now. At least I’m suggesting a way for them to survive, but let’s get serious for a second. You’re right, I don’t care about any of them, I only care about one in particular. Okay two, but you don’t want me to care in that way…you want me to want me to care on a whole other level but the time for has long since past if it was ever a possibility to begin with.” + +Lena’s expression, which is usually one of coldness nowadays, begins to crack a little. She turns her head a bit and brushes her hair in an effort to hide possible tears starting to form. + +“Look Lena, the first time you explained your reasons for staying to fight five years ago, you managed to convince me because you were right and despite how I knew this was going to play out, it was still a worthy cause. However, I’m right too. There is nothing to be gained by being a martyr or dying a hero, or whatever it is exactly you’re trying to do here. If you don’t care about your own life, at least think of your daughter’s life. You’ve been distant with her ever since she was born, one would think in these times you’d want to spend more time with her not less. Let alone bad mouthing her father who DID spend time with her or leaving her in the company of a complete stranger.” + +“I’m not leaving her with a complete stranger, I’m leaving her with you!” Lena says and begins to break down. + +“SHE’LL BE SAFE WITH YOU! SHE’LL BE HAPPY WITH YOU!” + +Lena collapses in a nearby chair with her head in her hands weeping. + +“She’ll…survive with you…(sob)” + +You suddenly realize the situation that Lena has placed you in, and you hate her for it. You shake your head in disbelief. Out of all the things that have happened in your life, this has got to be the most unforeseen to your mind. You have no words; you instead just leave Lena to her crying and walk out the front door. + +You stand outside the house for a moment as the rain continues to fall just trying to wrap your head around all of this. You don’t even know where to start. Did she always plan this? Was this a last minute decision? Does she just expect you to… + +“Hey Uncle Shadow are you and mommy done fighting?” you hear Tulla ask as she comes from around a corner. +“Huh? Where’d you come from? I thought you were upstairs.” +“I was, but I sneaked out while you and mommy were yelling at each other. Sneaked like you do! I wanted to play in the rain. So are you done fighting?” +“Yeah…I think we’re done fighting…” you say looking back at the door. +“That’s good. I didn’t like it when mommy and daddy fighted either.” She says. + +With her question answered, Lena’s attention has already been distracted by the rain, which she gleefully plays in by splashing a nearby puddle. She has no idea what the hell is going on and what just happened. + +You watch her play for a moment and then call her over. + +“Tulla, come here.” +“Yes, uncle?” +“Do you have any items that are special to you?” +“Yes!” +“Well go in and grab them, but ONLY the ones you think are really important. Some clothes too. We’re going on a trip and we won’t be back for a long time.” +“Where are we going?” +“We’re uh, going to your uncle shadow’s secret hideout. Nobody will be able to hurt us there.” +“Yay! Is mommy coming too?” +“No…she’s got important stuff to do here. Look, get your belongings and let’s go. I’ll be right here waiting.” + +Tulla goes inside and you wait. Doesn’t take long For Tulla to come back out with a small bag of her things. + +“I’m ready uncle.” +“You say good bye to your mom?” +“Yes. She was crying and sad when I first went inside, but when I told her I was leaving with you, she looked up at me and smiled a little. She told me that she loved me and to do what you say.” + +You nod at Tulla’s explanation of events. + +“Are you going in to say goodbye?” +“No, your mother and I have said our goodbyes. Let’s go.” + +Your trip back to the temple is surprisingly uneventful. You don’t even need to avoid any patrols. You do take the long way though and go through your alternate entrance. This causes a bit of worry for Tulla since she’s never gone underwater before, but you reassure her that as long as she holds on to you, you won’t let her drown and will hold her up to catch her breath using the air pockets in the underground tunnel. Naturally she believes you can do anything so this immediately alleviates her fears. + +Eventually you’re home. + +“This place is dark and scary.” Tulla remarks looking around. +“Yeah, but my home, and your home too now. You can stay in this room, it was your mother’s at one time.” +“Wow there are a lot of books in that room!” +“That’s the library.” +“What in there?” Tulla asks and points to the cavern with the garden. +“That’s…a private area. Don’t go in there without permission okay? Even if you talking or faint whispering.” +“A ghost doesn’t live there does it?” +“Heh, well sort of I suppose.” You smirk. “But don’t worry she’s friendly…in fact forget what I said, let’s go into that room right now.” + +You enter the garden with Tulla hiding somewhat behind you still nervous about the “ghost.” You point out Talia’s grave to Tulla. + +“There she is. She doesn’t speak or anything though. She just listens, mainly to me of course. Her name is Talia.” +“Oh is she like my daddy?” Tulla asks making the connection that Talia isn’t a real ghost and just dead. +“Yes, yes she is, but I still talk to her. Because I still love her.” + +Tulla starts to ask another question, but you are in mood to answer any more as its been a long strange day. You tell Tulla to go to her room and dry off and unpack. You then mention you’ll see her shortly. Tulla leaves you alone to be with your beloved. You sit down beside Talia’s grave and think about the strange situation you’re in. + +“Well Talia, it probably isn’t exactly how you ever envisioned it, but we have a child now.” +> Shadow shelter for lost girls (Dendrin’s Input) +“Planning on turning this place in an orphanage and calling it Uncle Shadow’s shelter for lost girls?” Dendrin mocks. You knew this was coming. +“I’m really in no mood, you know.” You reply. +“Oh you’re always in a mood. Just never a fun one.” +“Well get your jabs in now and get it over with, I know you want to.” +“I’m sure I don’t know what you’re talking about. If you think I’m going to make fun of you and this situation you’ve misjudged me as usual. On the contrary, I think it’s very brave of you to take on such an unfamiliar responsibility at your age.” +“I wasn’t left with much choice, now was I?” +“Sure you were, you could’ve just left the girl to die along with her mother. You didn’t though, I imagine for several reasons. Such as your not so secret need for living mortal company, or your dormant paternal instinct that apparently has gotten stronger in your later years. Even I didn’t see that one coming until you took in this girl’s mother a decade ago.” +“Yeah… let’s not bring her up right now.” +“My apologies. Anyway this should certainly be fascinating to observe.” +“And there it is, the whole reason for your interest. Something new to view. Glad I can always be a constant source of amusement to you Den.” +“Eternal you’re more than a source of amusement for me and I think you know that. I still believe as I did when I let you live during your shadow indoctrination ceremony that you are destined for important things.” +“Well let me know what those important things are when you find out.” +“It may be that you’re already involved in them.” + +Before you can make a retort about Dendrin’s usual vagueness, you wake up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 55 + +You always were one to defy the odds, but you knew it could only end like this. + +Luck certainly played a large factor in your favor at the beginning. First off the invasion rumors were still just rumors for quite a while. It gave you and Lena more time to prepare and it was definitely preparation that was needed. + +By the time the eternal warlord Victor sent anyone to establish dominance, most of the population had actually been motivated to help. This was mostly thanks to Lena again, as well others she recruited. Victor’s first attempt was surprisingly diplomatic, as he sent in an ambassador of sorts along with a company of his troops in Sinkhole. There was an attempt to talk the Delergites into just capitulating with assurances that no harm would come to them if they had. Ultimately these empty promises were wasted and with your help, the first battle of Delerg was a crushing defeat for Victor. There was a lot of celebrating afterwards. + +You knew it was just the beginning though. + +The first few years were a back and forth guerilla war. Victor immediately seized Sinkhole and made it his base of operations. Battles were fought throughout the swamp and jungle. Some of the villages were occupied during this time, but there was still hope. + +Then came the moment you knew was going to happen and that’s when Victor got tired of playing nice. + +Losing way more troops and spending a lot more time than he wanted to, Victor started making demands that if the Delergites didn’t surrender immediately he was going to set the whole province to the torch. He also wanted you personally to be delivered to him dead or alive. He probably assumed that since you were a shadow, you were actually the main one responsible for leading this thing. + +There were a couple attempts to assault your home, but you had made sure it was a death trap for anyone even entering the nearby area, let alone the ruins themselves. The other attempt was to surround the area to at least contain you, but that didn’t really work either considering you just used a different access route that you made years ago and they’ll probably never find that one since its nowhere near the ruins and you have to actually swim underwater to access it. + +Eventually an order was given to just try to kill you on sight when possible and that the subjugation of Delerg was the main priority. + +To her credit Lena managed to maintain the Delergites’ enthusiasm of resisting Victor and most continued to fight, but heart alone isn’t enough sometimes. Victor just sent in more troops and began to make good on his promises of setting the province on fire. Village after village burned. Those that weren’t killed were taken away, probably in slavery. + +Things got so grim that you briefly pondered the idea of praying to Dendrin for help if only to try to get your shadow magic back, but given that it didn’t save Talia, you saw no reason to bother. Dendrin even told you not to bother, as he knew you’d never be a believer. Apparently your mere lip service would no longer be sufficient at this point. + +Dendrin did suggest that you attempt to convert others to the shadow religion though and he’d be more than willing to grant them powers providing they went through all the normal procedures. You laughed at that idea, you’re no missionary and had no time to bother with whatever self-serving plan Dendrin was hatching. Besides, the Delergites weren’t interested in anything else except surviving the next attack by Victor, they were already committed to one “cause” and that was more than enough. + +And now here you are in Lena’s village, the last stand of the Delerg resistance. It doesn’t much resemble a village anymore so much as it resembles a small walled fort now. And when Victor’s forces attack again, it’ll resemble a smoldering ruin. + +As you look around the village through the rain you see so many wounded and many more just plain exhausted. Things weren’t even this bad for them under the Empire during its last days. They weren’t even this bad under Brutus’ gang. + +This is what fighting the good fight has brought them. Death for those that resist and slavery for those that gave up long ago. All of them have to be thinking or have already thought at one time: “Was it worth it?” Some probably think no. Some probably think yes. And they’d both be right. + +It’s definitely what you think and have thought in the past. + +The difference is you know that YOU can survive this. You’ll live to fight another day. Its what you’ve always done and it’ll probably what you’ll continue to do until some lucky bastard manages to kill you. Who knows? Maybe that day is sooner than you think. + +You really aren’t worried about yourself though; lately you’ve been slightly more concerned about someone else. + +And it isn’t Lena. + +“Hey Uncle Shadow, are the invaders coming today?” Tulla walks up and asks you seemingly oblivious to the fact that it’s raining. + +You have no idea where she got the idea to call you “uncle shadow”, but she’s been doing it for so long now that you don’t bother to tell her not to anymore. + +“Probably not in this rain. Victor’s soldiers are still going to need a catapult or battering ram to get through the gates. They aren’t going to be able to drag one of those things here in the mud at least not effectively. Not just mud either, but water as well; the rivers and marsh are overflowing because of the rain. If you look down there you can see we’ve practically got a small moat around us. No my guess is they’ll wait for the rains to stop and then a few days after so the water level drops.” You explain while fixing your hood over your head. +“And then they’ll attack?” +“Yes, and then they’ll probably attack.” +“And will we win again?” + +You don’t answer; instead you motion Tulla to the overhanging roof at a nearby sleeping house. + +“Didn’t your mother teach you to come in out of the rain?” you say shaking off your own water soaked tunic. +“I like the rain. It feels nice.” Tulla remarks. + +It’s funny to see how Tulla was brought up in such a warzone yet she maintains an innocent sense of appreciation for simple things like rain. + +“Where is your mother anyway? Shouldn’t she be looking out for you?” +“Oh you know her, she’s busy a lot making plans with people to fight the bad people that attack us. It’s boring to sit there.” +“Perhaps, but you still should stay near her. Its not exactly safe out here.” +“But I am safe, because you’re here and you’re a great warrior! Mommy says so!” +“Hmm. I’ll bet, but I’m also busy and I can’t keep an eye on you all the time.” +“I’ll bet you can! Mommy says that you’re also the fastest warrior here!” +“Mommy talks a lot about me to you does she?” +“Yes! She says that you’re a lot more useful than daddy was.” + +You don’t even know how to respond to that. You always figured that even if Lena never did truly “love” Henry, you always thought she at least respected and cared for him. Henry wasn’t a bad guy; he just wasn’t cut out for fighting. It’s certainly not his fault that he died trying to defend this village. He’s only been dead a year and it really doesn’t seem right that she’s bad mouthing him to their daughter like this. Its not really right that she’s always been so distant to Tulla in general, but you’ve never understood that. + +Or maybe you do. + +Lena’s deluded herself that she’s always pursued this resistance because it’s about defending her family, other families and the homeland from tyranny, and it is to an extent. But her real reasons? She still hasn’t let go of the hate she has for eternals and she wants to kill as many as possible before she dies. (Never mind the fact that it’s mostly other humans actually making up the rank and file of Victor’s troops and Vic himself isn’t anywhere near the battlefield) + +In the scheme of things she never really wanted a family because as far as she was concerned her family died when she was a little girl and all that was left was the hatred that burned within. Everyone else to her is a secondary concern. You might be the exception because you managed to better focus her rage and possibly even quell the fire of it a bit. + +Who knows what might’ve happened had you taken Lena as some sort of youthful substitute for Talia. Who knows what might’ve happened had Victor not invaded. Would Lena still have insisted on her vendetta? + +You don’t know and it isn’t important because it’s the past and now is the present. She has obviously chosen a path and its not one you’re going down because you’re not responsible for her. You’ve helped as much as you could and you’re done. + +Still, while it probably won’t do any good, part of you feels like you should go confront Lena before you leave. +> Just leave +You’re not wasting any more time with Lena or stretching this out any longer than you have to. You begin to leave. + +“Uncle Shadow where are you going?” Tulla asks. +“Home. And I suggest that’s where you go. Tell your mother if she’s got any sense of self preservation left she’ll get you and herself out of here too.” +“But aren’t you staying to help us fight the bad men?” Tulla asks, not fully understanding the situation. + +“No, I’m not. (sigh) I’m sorry Tulla, but even if you don’t realize it yet you’ve been dealt a bad hand in life. If your mother doesn’t flee soon like I think she won’t then I can only tell you one last thing.” + +You put your hand on Tulla’s shoulder and look her in the eyes. + +“When the bad men come, you HIDE. Find a safe place and hide, and then run when you’re able. Even if you see or hear them doing bad things to your mother you continue to run or hide. They won’t show mercy and they will do bad things to you as well. If you want to survive, you will listen to me.” + +It’s a cold hard truth and Tulla just stares at you with the rain continuing to pour down on the pair of you. You think she’s probably more upset that you’re leaving than anything else you’ve told her. You can’t do anything for her though except hope that she absorbs your advice. + +As you start to leave, you briefly consider taking Tulla with you, but you dismiss the idea. You already “took in” one young girl in trouble and you can see how that turned out. You’re no parental figure and you’re not responsible for Tulla either. + +Your journey back home is an uneventful one. When you finally arrive you immediately head to the garden. + +“I’m back Talia. For good this time, as I don’t believe I’ll be making many more trips topside.” + +The silence continues to question you. + +“Why? Well because I’m done with it all that’s why. I mean I tried to relive the thrill of battle and that only has a temporary effect on my good mood, eventually it just gets boring. I’ve explored most of lands and found nothing of interest save for hostile people and unfriendly terrain. I’ve helped those in need and it only serves to either make their situations worse or prolong the inevitable. What’s the point of it all? I’ve come to realize that down here with you is where I belong and it’s where I shall stay for the rest of my life. However long that happens to be.” + +After telling all this to Talia, you feel like a great weight has been lifted off of you. It feels good to no longer have to worry about anyone other than yourself again. You excuse yourself to Talia and head off to your bedroom to get some much-needed sleep… + +“While I appreciate that you finally had the common sense to abandon a hopeless cause I’m a little concerned by your return to a hermit life style.” Dendrin remarks. +“Yeah, well I would think by now that you’d know I don’t really care about your opinions on my life.” +“But you can still be so much more, or at least you could still be destined for greater things. I see that, how come you don’t?” +“Maybe I don’t want to be destined for such things even if they are true? Maybe I’m happy just spending the rest of my life here? What difference does it make? Besides I’m sure my so-called destiny would only serve to benefit you in some way so that’s not exactly a motivator either. And if you don’t like what I’m doing or you no longer find that I provide you with the amusement that your own pathetic existence so desperately craves then you can fucking leave me alone.” +“Very well Eternal. I can see I should waste no more time with you. My only regret is I did not see your inadequacies sooner. Perhaps I should’ve picked someone more motivated. Oh well. Time to move on.” + +And with that, you never hear from Dendrin ever again. You also never go to the surface again. + +Years pass as they always do. You more or less keep yourself occupied by writing in your journal and speaking with Talia. It’s not much stimuli, but don’t seem to mind it at first. In time though you begin to get a little more detached from reality. You begin adding new people to speak with, such as arguing with Cyrus on a regular basis about how his tactics will not work against an Empire encampment or laughing at Murk on his latest tale of how he’s failed to woo Bianca. + +In other words, you practically go mad. One moment you’re fully aware of your surroundings and living in the present, the next you’re living in the past again. You’ve created your own reality and aren’t leaving it anytime soon. + +You continue like this for a few more decades until you eventually die as the mad hermit you are, and like most mad hermits, you leave no lasting presence in the world.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You spent many years practically buried alive, you’re not about to spend your remaining life that way. Better you should just die in battle instead. Of course you only intend on doing that if there are no other options. + +So if this place stands any chance at all you’re going to enlist the help of the only person you know that will fight tooth and nail. You have no idea how Lena is going to react to seeing you again, but its something you’re going to have to do. + +You travel to the small village that lies to the south of Sinkhole where you know Lena has made her home. Its nameless, unspectacular and the people there live simple lives, but that’s usually the standard for the villages around here. + +After asking a few of the locals, one of them directs you to where Lena’s house is located. It doesn’t surprise you that it’s a bit isolated from the rest of the village. In any case it looks a lot better made than the rest. The muscular man outside chopping wood might have something to do with that though. He’s younger than you, though probably not more than ten years and probably a wood cutter by trade. He puts down his axe when he notices you walking up, which shows he doesn’t sense believe you mean him harm. While he’s probably a little surprised by your presence, it’s obvious he knows who you are, why not? Everyone does in this swamp. + +“So…the shadow finally comes to visit. I always wondered when this day would come. My name is Henry. Lena has spoken about you on several occasions.” +“Nothing good I expect.” +“On the contrary, she’s always spoken highly of you. If I was a more insecure man, I’d probably be jealous. However, I believe the bond I have with Lena is an unbreakable one…well save for death of course. Even love must give way for reality after all.” + +Shows how much he knows given that you still speak to Talia as if she were still alive. Of course you may not exactly be the beacon of sanity. + +“Anyway, if you’re here to see Lena, she’s out right now hunting, but should be back soon. I can’t promise that she’ll greet you warmly however.” Henry remarks and then crying is heard on the front porch of the house from a basket. He excuses himself to go see to it. + +You watch from a distance as you see Henry take a child from the basket and make the usual parental reassurances to calm the child. The child must only be a few months old, you didn’t know that Lena had a baby recently. You hear the name Tulla being said a few times and then Henry looks back over to you. + +“A handful this one sometimes. Still worth it though.” He says to you with a smile. +“Worth fighting for I hope.” You reply. + +Henry’s smile disappears at your remark. + +“Of course.” +“Well that would make you better than most parents in this forsaken swamp. But the willingness to fight isn’t going to carry the day you know.” + +“Neither is an old broken down eternal who belongs to a long dead order.” A familiar voice says. You turn around and see Lena carrying few dead Sul Monkeys and a small Croxidile. She’s changed a bit, a little older and weathered by life, but its still the girl you remember. She motions to Henry to go inside and he nods and complies. + +“So that’s the family huh?” you say. “I didn’t realize you had recently given birth. Congratulations I guess. I knew you’d find…” +“Why are you here?” Lena asks as she sets up the Sul Monkeys for skinning. +“Okay, right to the point then…there’s an invasion coming.” +“Yes, I’m well aware of the rumors.” +“I doubt if they’re rumors at this point.” +“So? What are you suggesting then?” +“I really don’t know. I mean…(Sigh) look if there is an army coming from Quala, they aren’t going to be the push overs that were here before.” +“Yes, I’m aware of that too. That’s why I’ve been trying to build up a resistance. I dunno if they’ll be any good in a fight, but it’s better than nothing.” +“Wait, you mean you actually got people to potentially help you? When?” +“I’ve been doing it ever since you abandoned me. Making contacts, building up friendships and all that stuff. I’m surprised that you didn’t know about it, but then you have been traipsing around the swamp for the past few years. Surprised you didn’t just leave for good. I mean what is there for you here?” +“Its my home too you know.” + +Lena snorts at your answer. + +“Home…you don’t have a home. You aren’t even a true shadow by your own admission. The only reason why you still live here is because you buried Talia in that wrecked temple you call home. You can’t move on.” +“Perhaps, but someone else hasn’t moved on from her school girl crush either apparently. Henry’s nearly my age. He’s my height and his hair is even my color, one might call that… substitution.” +“Don’t you dare criticize Henry! He’s a good man! Better than you’ll ever be!” Lena shouts, but you notice she is careful enough to throw down her skinning knife before getting in your face and poking you in the chest. Not that you would’ve taken it as a serious threat anyway. + +“Again perhaps, but I didn’t come here to criticize him or fight with you. Look, I’m going to be fighting the eternals regardless of your answer, but I thought it might be wise to contact someone else who I know is a fighter. Apparently though you’ve managed to find more though so perhaps you don’t need my help. Now if you don’t want or need my help, I shall take my leave, but it’s always here if you want it directly.” + +Lena says nothing other than picking up her knife and going back to skinning. You turn to leave and get about a few paces, before she calls back to you. + +“Wait. Since you’re more out of the loop than I thought, it might be good to bring you up to speed on the specifics of what is known and what is planned. If only to make sure you don’t get in the way of our own operations with your lone wolf tactics. So let me finish this first and you can come on in. We’ll have dinner before going over some of the details.” +“Very well.” You respond. + +After your visit is over, you leave with a better grasp of what’s to come. You just aren’t optimistic about it being enough, but then fighting the odds has always been what you’ve done all your life. No point in changing precedent. +> The family (Henry and Tulla) +While eating at the dinner table, you find that unlike Lena, Henry is actually very hospitable. You discover that your guess that he was a woodcutter by trade was correct. He’s also lived here all his life and still remembers when the old Empire claimed Delerg. + +“I do not ever recall seeing you in the resistance during the Empire days.” You remark. +“I wasn’t. At the time I was more concerned with taking care of my first wife who was sick, than changing the government…besides as much as it may make me look like a coward, the Empire did not interfere much with our lives, so I saw no reason to fight. Especially since you shadows looked to have the matter well in hand.” +“Hmm, glad we kept up a good appearance considering we ultimately lost.” +“But the Empire did fall.” +“It may have fell, but it got replaced with something far worse. Sometimes I think things would’ve been better if we hadn’t done shit. Your reasons for not fighting are certainly valid ones, but tell me, what did you do when the eternals first arrived? I have to admit I am not entirely familiar with the last years of the Empire and its immediate aftermath. I was trapped underground for a while you see. But I do know that there were a group of thuggish eternals that eventually laid claim here. I know because Lena and I eventually got rid of them. Why did you not fight then?” + +Lena starts to get agitated with you questioning her husband, but he calms her and says it’s quite all right. + +“When Brutus’ group came around and set up shop independently of the Empire I just laid low as I would never have been a match for any of them, even if they didn’t severely outnumber me. Fortunately laying low was easy as you can see this village is one of the furthest ones from Sinkhole. It’s practically on the ass end of civilization. Besides, my first wife had died of her illness around that time and I went through an extended period of mourning. I…uh sort of shut myself off from the world I guess. I was in no condition to fight anyone. If anything I might’ve welcomed death at that point in my life. All I did most of the time during those days was visit Alanna’s grave a lot and speak to it.” + +You can’t help but see a very strong similarity here. When you look at Lena, she looks away as if you’re going to call her out on her choice of husbands again. Of course you aren’t though, but it does prove you were right about some of your previous remarks about her. + +Meanwhile Henry finishes his tale. + +“But eventually I realized that I had to move on with life and eventually I accepted reality.” +“Good for you Henry. It takes a brave man to face reality.” You say and drink from your cup giving Lena the option of calling you out on your own flights of fantasy concerning Talia. Of course she doesn’t. + +You chat a bit more with Henry. He says while he isn’t much of a fighter due to inexperience, he says that Lena has shown him a few things as she has been trying to teach others as well. + +“I have to say, I’ve never quite understood the Delergites’ unwillingness to fight. Well the majority of them anyway.” You mention. +“Surely as a shadow, you know the reason.” +“I do? I’m afraid you’ll have to enlighten me Henry. While I may be a shadow in name, let’s just say I may not be the best representative.” +“Well you are aware of what most of us in Delerg are taught about the shadows right? I mean about how conquerors may come and go, but the shadows will always remain as they have for centuries. And that the shadows will always defend and protect this place. With the shadows around, most people just believe that eventually they’ll take care of the major problems.” +“Yes, I am aware of it, I just never thought any of you lot bought into it so seriously. The dependency issues aside, why continue to believe it at all? The shadows belong to the rubble heap of history now. Surely YOU don’t still believe such things.” + +Henry thinks a bit, but not too long. + +“Well, yes.” +“You do? Why?” +“You’re still here to help aren’t you?” + +You give a smile and even chuckle a bit. + +“Heh, well maybe you’re right, Henry.” +“However as I mentioned before outside I am willing to fight and not rely others. After met Lena, I found that there are some things worth fighting for. Now with my new daughter Tulla in this world I find that to be truer than ever.” Henry says while looking at the baby basket nearby. + +Lena reaches over to squeeze Henry’s hand briefly. You say nothing to this moment of closeness; you just get temporary lost in thoughts of long ago. You think about how this arrangement is probably similar to something Talia wanted. Well perhaps not exactly, but definitely the family part. + +The thing is, you never really seriously considered such things even when Talia spoke of it. Part of it was your foremost concern of surviving the next thing the Empire decided to throw at you. The other part is it just wasn’t something you were excessively interested in. Now though, looking at something like this a little more close up, you can’t help but think “what if?” + +Of course that’s not a “what if” that can ever be achieved. Even if Talia was still alive, you couldn’t have children anyway. Quite frankly you’ve spent so much time killing, wouldn’t really know what to do with the prospect of taking care of anything so helpless like a child, though you’d guess that perhaps Talia would’ve been more of the nurturing one while you trained it to fight or something you actually knew about. + +The funny thing is you get the impression that Henry serves more of that purpose of a “nurturer” than Lena does, who while obviously loving towards the child, she maintains more of a distance from it than Henry does. Almost as if she’s reluctant to bond with it on a major level.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You spent many years practically buried alive, you’re not about to spend your remaining life that way. Better you should just die in battle instead. Of course you only intend on doing that if there are no other options. + +So if this place stands any chance at all you’re going to enlist the help of the only person you know that will fight tooth and nail. You have no idea how Lena is going to react to seeing you again, but its something you’re going to have to do. + +You travel to the small village that lies to the south of Sinkhole where you know Lena has made her home. Its nameless, unspectacular and the people there live simple lives, but that’s usually the standard for the villages around here. + +After asking a few of the locals, one of them directs you to where Lena’s house is located. It doesn’t surprise you that it’s a bit isolated from the rest of the village. In any case it looks a lot better made than the rest. The muscular man outside chopping wood might have something to do with that though. He’s younger than you, though probably not more than ten years and probably a wood cutter by trade. He puts down his axe when he notices you walking up, which shows he doesn’t sense believe you mean him harm. While he’s probably a little surprised by your presence, it’s obvious he knows who you are, why not? Everyone does in this swamp. + +“So…the shadow finally comes to visit. I always wondered when this day would come. My name is Henry. Lena has spoken about you on several occasions.” +“Nothing good I expect.” +“On the contrary, she’s always spoken highly of you. If I was a more insecure man, I’d probably be jealous. However, I believe the bond I have with Lena is an unbreakable one…well save for death of course. Even love must give way for reality after all.” + +Shows how much he knows given that you still speak to Talia as if she were still alive. Of course you may not exactly be the beacon of sanity. + +“Anyway, if you’re here to see Lena, she’s out right now hunting, but should be back soon. I can’t promise that she’ll greet you warmly however.” Henry remarks and then crying is heard on the front porch of the house from a basket. He excuses himself to go see to it. + +You watch from a distance as you see Henry take a child from the basket and make the usual parental reassurances to calm the child. The child must only be a few months old, you didn’t know that Lena had a baby recently. You hear the name Tulla being said a few times and then Henry looks back over to you. + +“A handful this one sometimes. Still worth it though.” He says to you with a smile. +“Worth fighting for I hope.” You reply. + +Henry’s smile disappears at your remark. + +“Of course.” +“Well that would make you better than most parents in this forsaken swamp. But the willingness to fight isn’t going to carry the day you know.” + +“Neither is an old broken down eternal who belongs to a long dead order.” A familiar voice says. You turn around and see Lena carrying few dead Sul Monkeys and a small Croxidile. She’s changed a bit, a little older and weathered by life, but its still the girl you remember. She motions to Henry to go inside and he nods and complies. + +“So that’s the family huh?” you say. “I didn’t realize you had recently given birth. Congratulations I guess. I knew you’d find…” +“Why are you here?” Lena asks as she sets up the Sul Monkeys for skinning. +“Okay, right to the point then…there’s an invasion coming.” +“Yes, I’m well aware of the rumors.” +“I doubt if they’re rumors at this point.” +“So? What are you suggesting then?” +“I really don’t know. I mean…(Sigh) look if there is an army coming from Quala, they aren’t going to be the push overs that were here before.” +“Yes, I’m aware of that too. That’s why I’ve been trying to build up a resistance. I dunno if they’ll be any good in a fight, but it’s better than nothing.” +“Wait, you mean you actually got people to potentially help you? When?” +“I’ve been doing it ever since you abandoned me. Making contacts, building up friendships and all that stuff. I’m surprised that you didn’t know about it, but then you have been traipsing around the swamp for the past few years. Surprised you didn’t just leave for good. I mean what is there for you here?” +“Its my home too you know.” + +Lena snorts at your answer. + +“Home…you don’t have a home. You aren’t even a true shadow by your own admission. The only reason why you still live here is because you buried Talia in that wrecked temple you call home. You can’t move on.” +“Perhaps, but someone else hasn’t moved on from her school girl crush either apparently. Henry’s nearly my age. He’s my height and his hair is even my color, one might call that… substitution.” +“Don’t you dare criticize Henry! He’s a good man! Better than you’ll ever be!” Lena shouts, but you notice she is careful enough to throw down her skinning knife before getting in your face and poking you in the chest. Not that you would’ve taken it as a serious threat anyway. + +“Again perhaps, but I didn’t come here to criticize him or fight with you. Look, I’m going to be fighting the eternals regardless of your answer, but I thought it might be wise to contact someone else who I know is a fighter. Apparently though you’ve managed to find more though so perhaps you don’t need my help. Now if you don’t want or need my help, I shall take my leave, but it’s always here if you want it directly.” + +Lena says nothing other than picking up her knife and going back to skinning. You turn to leave and get about a few paces, before she calls back to you. + +“Wait. Since you’re more out of the loop than I thought, it might be good to bring you up to speed on the specifics of what is known and what is planned. If only to make sure you don’t get in the way of our own operations with your lone wolf tactics. So let me finish this first and you can come on in. We’ll have dinner before going over some of the details.” +“Very well.” You respond. + +After your visit is over, you leave with a better grasp of what’s to come. You just aren’t optimistic about it being enough, but then fighting the odds has always been what you’ve done all your life. No point in changing precedent. +> The warrior wife (Lena) +Soon, dinner is over and Henry says that he’ll clean up, as he knows you and Lena have things to discuss concerning the possible invasion. Lena motions you back outside to talk. + +“Won’t Henry be joining us for this?” you ask. +“He doesn’t need to, he’s already more up to speed on things than you are, besides he needs to clean up and look after the baby.” +“Okay then.” + +While Lena goes over to speak with Henry about some more mundane domestic manner, yoou head back outside into the silent darkness. Usually there are a few Sul Monkeys making noises at night, but you’d guess that Lena being a hunter and all, the monkeys have learned to stay far away from this area. You find a nearby stump to sit on and wait for Lena who makes her appearance soon. + +“Okay I know we spoke about some of the this at dinner, but what exactly do you know about this impeding invasion?” +“Like I said, all I know is its one of the local eternal warlords in Quala. I think he just calls himself The Victor or something silly like that because of his conquests.” +“Something exactly like that, though I believe he thinks it’s a clever play on words due to his real name being Victor. He doesn’t seem to be an excessively cruel ruler for an eternal, just a very arrogant one. Believes everyone should serve him. His ego aside, he has been one of the more successful warlords in Quala, but I think he’s turned his sights on Delerg for extra conscripts and tribute to help fund conquests elsewhere.” +“Well it isn’t like there’s much else here. So do you have any idea what his military strength might be?” +“I’m not sure, but uh, I think it’s in the thousands.” +“Is that low or high? I mean this does make a difference.” +“I don’t know! I mean I think it might be around ten.” +“Okay…so if its around ten and if he’s not a reckless idiot, that probably means he’ll only send around fifteen hundred troops maximum here, probably less initially since he won’t believe he’ll have any resistance. Now how many people do we have?” +“Altogether we might have a little less than a hundred.” + +Lena as she continues to go on about how not all of those that she’s managed to enlist to help are even combat capable. Some have just agreed to help in a no combat way such as passing on information and such. Which means if they aren’t willing to fight, they’ll be practically useless when the battle starts getting heavy and Victor decides to just start decimating entire towns. + +Lena finally asks your opinion on the situation. + +“So what do you think?” +“I think we’re fucked, that’s what I think. How much have you trained the people that will fight?” +“Some of them already know how, and I’ve trained others a little. I intend on stepping up the training sessions more soon.” +“Not going to be enough, I can tell you that right now, also when I say fight I’m talking at least your level or better. You better get on it fast. Now what about traps?” +“What about them?” +“Have you set any up? I mean time at least could be taken to do that; you are a damn trapper after all.” +“And what do you expect me to do? Dig a hidden spiked pit in a road that people use on a regular basis? I can’t start setting up traps in public areas! I’ve done as much as I can around this village and even then I have to be careful. Some child playing in the wrong area and I’m the one getting blamed.” +“(Sigh) Fine, I’ll figure out something then. I’ll start trapping the less travelled roads and the clearer parts of the swamp and jungle where an army might travel through. You might want to let people know if you’re that concerned with avoiding potential accidents.” +“Why don’t you tell them? You are considered the revered protector of Delerg, last shadow.” +“Because I’m done with people? Because I did all that shit in the past and it didn’t work? If I was really all that respected and revered, I should be able to walk into Sinkhole and say hey, you’re all in great danger and if you want a slim chance of surviving the shitstorm that’s going to come your way then you better follow me and have everyone do it with absolute loyalty.” +“So you want to have the same sort of absolute authority that one of those eternal warlords has because you know what’s best for the lessers?” +“That’s not what I meant, but if you’re going to go there, yeah it would make things a hell of a lot easier. Besides, YOU’RE the leader of this resistance, not me. I’m here to help as much as I can, but as good as I am, I can’t do every damn thing.” +“So far the only thing you have done is point out that I’m doing everything wrong. When you actually start helping let me know.” + +You begin to get angry. + +“What Lena? You want me to pat you on the head like some doting father and say you’ve done a good job so far and that everything will be all right? Well I’m not going to do that, because the outlook on this isn’t fucking good! A superior force with better resources and most likely better fighting ability over all outnumbers us. You seem to forget I fought this battle before thirty damn years ago with better odds. You know how that ended? Complete destruction of my side, that’s how it ended. We fucking LOST Lena, spectacularly and completely. So what if the Empire fell soon after? Did it help anything in the long run? No, not one bit. Did drunken bards at taverns sing the valiant but hopeless deeds of the shadows or anyone else? No. Was it all fucking worth it at all? No. And do you think when Delerg is eventually overrun, its towns destroyed, its people killed and its jungles burned to the ground; it’ll make any bit of difference what we did? No. And you’re an idiot if you think it will.” + +At one time Lena might’ve cried or run away by your harsh words, but she’s much harder now of course. + +“If you feel we’re all doomed anyway then why help at all?” she asks. +“Because I’m an a mean old bastard that doesn’t have much else to do with the remainder of life except enjoy a good fight from time to time. And my point is, that YOU aren’t. Remember how after we killed Brutus you wanted to go on a suicidal rampage of attacking eternals in Quala? Remember how I managed to guide you from that by pushing you away? Seems like that worked out pretty well didn’t it? You’re alive and have a family rather than the rotting corpse that you’d probably be if you’d went ahead with your original idea.” + +You take a deep breath and exhale and touch Lena’s shoulder before continuing. + +“Well I’m making another guiding attempt except I’m telling you straight to your face now. You have a family and you have something to fight for, it’s true. But you’re not winning this. You can get the hell out of this forsaken swamp and make a new life elsewhere. I know you have it within you. Even if you don’t care about yourself or even Henry, think about Tulla. I mean…” +“Let me stop you right there asshole.” Lena says with authority. + +“So let me get this straight, you telling me I should just run away? That I should leave my home?” +“I’m telling you, you should survive.” +“Well survival isn’t enough sometimes. Maybe it was when I fled my village as it burned to the ground, but not anymore. I’m fighting BECAUSE of my family. This is OUR home and we aren’t going to be bullied by anyone or run away when things look bad. You once fought for a worthy cause, overthrowing the tyranny of the old Empire. You must have believed in it at one time or else you would’ve just fled the area at the nearest opportunity.” +“To some extent yes, but if it wasn’t for Talia, I probably wouldn’t have stayed as long as I did.” +“Yes, the great love of your life that was the reason for most of your choices…I know. But how long are you going to hide behind that ghost? You told me you once broke up with her for a few years due to a disagreement of faith. You didn’t even think you’d ever get back with her, yet you stuck around in that frozen wasteland Rask and continued to fight the Empire all by yourself. You still must’ve believed in your cause. When you saved me on that terrible night, you didn’t do that for Talia either. You didn’t even do it out of boredom, or the thrill of battle, or whatever other reason you want to hide behind. You did it because you felt it was the RIGHT thing to do.” + +You stand silent as Lena continues her speech. + +“You’re a survivor, but I do not believe that it’s enough for you either. You still want to fight for a worthy cause and your morality keeps getting more in the way than you’d like to admit. If you were truly just a survivor, you wouldn’t even be here. You want to help me, because you CARE. You’re even trying to convince me to leave because you care. I’m not leaving. Preventing Delerg from being occupied by a hostile force is a worthy cause to fight for. Many won’t fight, well I think as you once told me, they’re weak. And even though it may be frustrating and unrewarding sometimes its up to the strong to protect the weak. I believe that fighting for a positive cause will be setting a good example for Tulla and she will grow up seeing that. And if we die…then at least we all died fighting for something worthy and what we believe in. I would think you of all people would approve of such a death.” + +You have no argument. + +“I would. Very well, I believe I have most of the information I need here, I’ll probably start doing my own spying into the Quala province and find out more. I’ll keep you posted. I…um…well…” you start to fumble with an apology, but Lena stops you. +“Don’t worry, I know. You’re just a mean old bastard.” She says. +“Heh, yeah.” You chuckle and start to leave, but before you go Lena grabs your arm and leans in to kiss you on the cheek. + +“What was that for?” +“For everything.” + +You and Lena look into each other’s eyes for a moment and then you turn to leave again. When you get few paces you turn to see Lena still watching you for a moment and then turn to head back to her home. + +“Shut up Dendrin.” You mutter as you walk back to the temple.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This isn’t going to be easy or fun for you, but it is regrettably necessary. You’re going to not only have to convince her that she shouldn’t pursue this path, but also push her away in general. + +“Lena, you won, be happy with your victory. I know you’d like to kill every eternal out there, but it just isn’t feasible.” +“I won? My family is still fucking dead!” +“And? You think you’re the only one who’s ever lost something dear to them? Going on a vengeance crusade still isn’t going to bring them back and it’s just going to get you killed!” +“What the hell else do I have to live for?!” +“What do you have to live for? You’re still young for one thing, you’ve got your whole life ahead of you. Yes, what happened was tragic for you, but you’ve grown stronger because of it and you survived the ordeal. Now make the most of it. Live your life. Find someone to settle down with or whatever it is normal people do.” +“Normal people…do you really think I can go back to a normal life? Be someone’s little housewife?” +“Okay maybe not normal…look I’m just saying you going on some fool errand of trying to kill every one of those assholes claiming to be eternals is going to get you killed. Not all of them are going to be as inept as the ones that were hanging around here. The other ones? They’re constantly at war and are battle hardened. I guarantee they’ll be much tougher opponents and much more organized.” +“But wouldn’t you be there to help? You could train me more and…you could start up a rebellion in Quala! Just like you did in the old days you told me about!” +“Ha ha. No, those days are long over. I’ve told you that before. I’m not going anywhere and I’m not training you any more. You are not meant for this sort of life. I helped clear out this swamp and now I will probably go back to my previous life of solitude.” + +Lena begins to tear up again. It’s obvious she doesn’t like where this is going. + +“You’re kicking me out of your home aren’t you?” +“(Sigh) You had to know this arrangement wasn’t going to last forever. I know you’ll find some place to be I mean I’m sure you’ll be treated very well by most people considering you just helped remove their oppressors.” +“Save me your words, (sniffle) I thought we were…a team…I thought you cared…just go away. Leave me alone.” + +You don’t say anything else, because saying anything else is just going to make things harder and likely make things worse. So you just leave. + +It feels like forever getting back home, but eventually you do and head straight to the garden. + +“I’m back home, just like I said I would be. I even brought you something.” You say and put some blue flowers you picked on your way back home on her grave. + +“Oh Lena? Yeah she’s gone. I think its for the best she didn’t live here anymore y’know? Dendrin already impedes on us enough. Didn’t need her around too.” + +“I mean if she’d stayed she would’ve just been miserable here and eventually we would’ve ended up going to Quala like she wanted and she would’ve gotten herself killed. At least this way, she won’t do it now…well I suppose I can’t be sure of that, but I think the fact that she waited for me instead of charging into Brutus’ place by herself is a good indication. Showed me she’s always heeded my advice and not only that, she’s not as overly confidant as I thought she was. Without me around she’ll eventually abandoned her need for vengeance and settle into the normal life she was supposed to lead. She… deserves it, don’t you think?” you say with your voice quivering a bit. + +You begin to wipe your eyes and sniffle a bit. + +“No, of course I didn’t love her! What kind of opportunist would I be if I took advantage of some girl half my age that had a shitload of emotional baggage and a fragile personality? I’d be no better than those wannabe eternals that’s what. Besides, I didn’t think of her in that way, I just…look I’m tired all right? I’m going to bed.” + +You leave the garden and collapse on your bed. It takes awhile but eventually you start to fall asleep hoping that you don’t have to put up with any smart-ass comments from Dendrin anytime soon. + +He has uncharacteristically heard you for once because he leaves you alone for quite some time. + +You briefly consider doing what you told Lena not to do and that’s go kill eternals in the Quala region, but really that bores you already. Besides, you feel it isn’t going to be quite as much fun anymore without Lena around. + +It suddenly occurs to you that you should do some travelling again. You don’t have much else to do, so why not? Still, this will always be your home no matter what. You won’t leave for good. You just need a change of scenery. + +You decide that you’ll travel not to places you’ve already been or already know about, but to parts unknown, namely Delerg itself. Despite it being part of the Empire, much of it still remains unexplored. You decide you might as well stay relatively close to home if you have the intention of coming back. + +You pack up some gear and get ready to go, of course saying good-bye to Talia and telling her you’ll return eventually. + +Year 50 + +Passing the time by exploring uncharted parts of Delerg has kept you a bit busy over these past few years. It’s amazing that nobody had done it before, but the stories about the Delerg swamp being much more hostile the deeper you went were true. + +You travelled north for quite awhile, but eventually the swamp thinned out completely until it turned into vast bodies of water. Going further would’ve required a boat and you didn’t really have any wish to do that once you saw a glimpse of some of the things lurking in the water. + +Travelling east was an ordeal that you nearly didn’t survive. The swamp became more jungle like and it almost seemed as if the land itself was protecting something or otherwise it just didn’t want anyone going further east. You did battle with several beasts that you’d never seen before and probably nobody else from the “civilized” world had either. It wasn’t just beasts that were hostile, or even the plants, but also a short dark race of humans. Their small stature didn’t make them any less dangerous. Eventually you had to turn back because of the constant attacks that even you couldn’t keep defending against. You swear the trees must’ve been spawning the little bastards. + +Thankfully as an eternal you’re somewhat resistant to poisons, because it served you well during that time. + +Still if you stopped doing something just because it nearly killed you, you wouldn’t have accomplished anything in your life. So eventually you travelled south and beyond the swamp and jungle you discovered a whole new land, yet very much the same as the one you’re familiar with. + +Four tribes, two of them human, one elven and another one reptilian, all of them warring with each other and all of them fairly hostile towards you when confrontation was your only option with them. + +From what you could figure out, three of the factions were all displaced by the Empire in some way when it still existed. The reptilian tribe apparently was nearly exterminated by the shadows in the earlier days of the Empire as they once lived in the Delerg province. (Which explains why they were especially hostile towards you) + +You explored as much as you could and eventually departed leaving the factions to their private war. + +Naturally the whole time you were exploring you were periodically returning back home. Delerg itself never changed, it was the same quiet place it always had been. Every once in a while you’d attempt to trade goods in Sinkhole for the rare items you might need, people never accepted any payment you might offer and instead just handed it to you for free. Nowadays you’re considered the last shadow protector of the land and well respected. Of course you aren’t the only one. + +Lena is also well respected thanks to her deeds. Her assumption that she would never be able to fit into a normal life again were wrong as she did find someone to settle down. Though she was right that she would not be a simple housewife and is a hunter and trapper by trade. You know she lives in one of the smaller villages, probably much like the one she grew up in, but you’ve never spoken to her directly. You see no point in dredging up the past and you have both gone your separate ways now. You’re glad that she managed to move on, which is more than can be said for others… + +“Why have you been writing a lot lately? Never known you to pursue such interests.” Dendrin asks. +“I dunno. Why not? Not like I’m currently wandering topside at the moment and I already read all the books here. Figured I’d write about stuff I encountered or did on my last travels.” +“So you’re writing a book?” +“More like a personal journal. Not like I’m going to share it with anyone.” +“So why do it?” +“As I said, why not? Don’t you have something better to do?” +“Not really, though I thought you would be considering the impending invasion.” +“Invasion?” +“Yes, the invasion. I know you’ve been running all over the place lately, but haven’t you been keeping up on the local discussions, I assumed you had since I know you do visit Sinkhole on occasion. One of those eternals or several of them apparently have figured out this place has no active resistance of any kind and would be easy pickings.” +“Oh that. Yes I’m aware of what’s going on and I’ve been preparing for the inevitable.” +“What? Your usual training? You really think you’re going to be able to pull off what you did before by yourself? You do realize that if this place is invaded again, it won’t be occupied by the ones that were here before?” +“Yes, I’m well aware and as I said, I’ll be ready.” +“Are you planning on leaving?” +“No, but I’m glad you’ve still got faith in my combat abilities…as I asked before, don’t you have something better to do?” +“I might have to find something better to do soon if you aren’t around anymore.” Dendrin says. + +You wake up. + +You’re also left to ponder his “concern” for you. He’s right in that if there is an invasion, it’ll most likely be a proper army like when the Empire occupied Delerg. + +So what can you really do about it if it does happen? Leave? You’re past thinking like that. This is your home until the day you die. + +Fight? You probably will eventually just to break up the monotony, but you doubt if you’ll be able to keep your “secret” home a secret. Ever since you made your reappearance it’s a well known fact of where you live by most of the Delergites. Even the group of eternals you got rid of before eventually figured it out, though by that time they were too damned scared to ever launch any sort of offensive. + +The other problem to this is you are starting to feel your age. It’s partly why you stopped your exploring and returned home to rest. Fighting your own extended personal war by yourself for any reason is getting to be less of a viable option especially if this potential invasion force is dead set on keeping the province. And it isn’t like anyone else is going to help… + +Well perhaps one person might, but the situation would be vastly different and she has her own life now, though you wonder what sort of life that might be when the invasion comes. + +The only other option you have is to just lay low in the temple and never come out when the invasion arrives. You could easily seal up the entrance that even if it were found, it wouldn’t be easy to get in. +> Lay low +You had a brief revival of the “glory days” when you first fought along side Lena. And while it was fun while it lasted, you believe you’re done with such things now. A storm is coming and you’re not going to stand in its path because it’ll ultimately be a fool’s game. + +You take steps to seal up the more accessible entrance to your sanctuary. It would take quite the effort to try to break in now, but you doubt if anyone will make the effort. You’ve been in this situation before and you handled it just fine. You can easily do it again despite what Dendrin might say. + +You do wonder how Lena will handle the situation. She’ll probably fight, but if she’s learned anything, she’d do better to flee with her family. In any case you’ve made your decision and you return to the familiarity of the garden. + +“Looks like I’ll be spending a lot more time with you again Talia, just like the old days.” + +Year 65 + +Several years have passed and you still haven’t a clue what’s been going on the surface nor do you care anymore. You haven’t even made the attempt to even take a peek, you’ve kept your entrance sealed and haven’t dug out any new ones. As predicted nobody has attempted to intrude on you, so why bother leaving? + +Throughout the years you’ve been trying to keep your mind occupied with your conversations with Talia and even Dendrin when he sees fit to speak to you anymore. You also continue to write in the journal you keep, but if anyone read it now, they probably wouldn’t understand any of it as your thoughts have become disjointed and not of a sound mind. + +You babble a lot to yourself nowadays, and not just in the usual way you do with Talia. Over the years you’ve actually been including others, such as arguing with Cyrus on a regular basis about how his tactics will not work against an Empire encampment or laughing at Murk on his latest tale of how he’s failed to woo Bianca. + +In other words, you’ve practically gone mad. One moment you’re fully aware of your surroundings and living in the present, the next you’re living in the past again. You’ve created your own reality and aren’t leaving it anytime soon. Dendrin tries to snap you out of it, but eventually he realizes the futility of the task and stops speaking to you altogether. Hardly matters as you’ve got more than enough disembodied voices in your head to keep you company. + +You continue like this for a few more decades until you eventually die as the mad hermit you are, and like most mad hermits, you leave no lasting presence in the world.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 46 + +“Think the girl will survive your big attack plan?” Dendrin asks. +“If she does, she does. If she doesn’t, well that’s the way it goes.” You reply. +“You don’t mean that. You’re just trying to play tough. I know better.” +“Well if you know better why do you insist on asking stupid questions?” +“Tradition?” +“Hah…okay I’ll admit that one was a little amusing.” +“Glad to see you’re in a better mood nowadays, but I imagine having someone to converse back and forth with on a regular basis might be helping. I told you, that you couldn’t go on with your life as it was and I was right! And you say I don’t look out for you.” +“Yeah, that must be why you’ve seen fit to deprive me of nearly all my magic abilities.” +“You’re not a believer. I can’t give to someone who has no faith. Sorry, but I don’t make the rules. Besides, you were never a magic lover anyway.” +“Perhaps not, but I found it useful in certain situations. Doesn’t matter, I’ve been making due…I suppose it has made me adapt, and kept me from relying on a crutch.” +“Well if that’s your way of saying thanks, I guess I’ll take it. Good luck tomorrow.” + +You wake up. + +Today is the day, after months of carrying out a personal guerrilla war on Brutus’ gang (you refuse to acknowledge such rabble as any sort of “army”) you’ve managed to whittle it down to a manageable size to the point where he’s had Sinkhole barricaded. You’re not sure why considering its not going to stop you, but if the fool actually thinks building a shaky wooden wall and locking himself in his house is actually going to save him, so be it. + +While you get ready, Lena’s already set to go. You think she’s been anxious for this day more than you have. + +Lena has been helping you and for her part she’s done an adequate job. She’s taken to training well, though that’s probably because she doesn’t have much left anymore. You’ve had to pull her fat out of the fire on more than one occasion, but you expected you would when you first agreed to have her help you. + +And at least she’s helping you. That’s more than can be said about anyone else! Despite all the damage you’ve done to their oppressors, your actions have not inspired others to take up arms against what’s left of the eternals. You can’t say you’re surprised though. Lena on more than one occasion has travelled to a few of the swamp villages in the hopes of getting help, but no luck. You told her it was a waste of time, but she had to learn on her own your suppose. + +You probably never show it and you’d certainly never admit it, but you do respect Lena and don’t mind her company. Though there’s still another whose company you prefer. (And that that isn’t Dendrin) + +“I’m going now. I’ll be back later to tell you all about it.” You tell Talia before you leave. + +You and Lena make your way to Sinkhole. Along the way Lena makes her usual snappy comments. It’s one of her less endearing qualities. + +“So you couldn’t get Talia to help us for this one?” +“Well maybe if I’d been a believer in Dendrin, he would’ve seen fit to raise her from the dead or something, but seeing as he’s as much of an asshole as you’re being right now, no I couldn’t get Talia’s help. Maybe next time.” You reply. +“I’m sorry, I really shouldn’t have said that, I…” +“Forget it. You’re nervous just like you are whenever we go into battle and you’re deflecting as usual. Just save those witty remarks for combat. Seems to work on those wannabe eternals who get flustered over the smallest taunts.” + +Sinkhole’s rickety wall doesn’t quite extend all the way around the town, but its enough that there’s no way to easily go around it without either wading through the deep marsh water or just barging through the front gate. If you still had your magic, you’d just scale the wall with the spider walk spell, but you don’t have that luxury anymore. Chopping or kicking through the wall would probably take time and attract attention. You’d like to at least catch the enemy a little off guard. + +So you decide to do the classic “pincer maneuver.” + +“Lena, you sneak around through the marsh where there is no wall and enter Sinkhole that way.” +“Wait, where are you going to be?” +“I’m going through the main gate of course. They’ll be focusing on me so much that you’ll probably be able to take down several of Brutus’ men before some of them converge on your position.” +“Are you going to be all right?” +“We’ve worked together for months now and you have to ask me that? Don’t worry about me, I’ve faced worse. A lot worse. Now Brutus will probably be hold up in that big house of his. Don’t try to enter it until I get there since the place will probably be trapped.” +“What if I see him outside?” +“I doubt it since the coward seems determined to throw everyone under his command at us while he hides. In the off chance you do see him, he’ll probably be trying to escape so by all means try to stop him in that case. Now let’s get going.” + +As you and Lena part company you know there’s a fifty fifty chance Lena is going to disregard everything you’ve said and try to enter Brutus’ home and try to kill him herself. You’re going have to be quick if you want to beat her there. + +Predictably several eternals guard the front gate and when you appear before them, the alarm is raised and they attack. If they’re lucky, they might actually last more than a five minutes against you… + +Four minutes later you’ve already fought your way through the main gate. You see several more eternals standing in the road with weapons drawn, but they look unsure to as whether or not to attack you or run away. Surprisingly one speaks up, he’s a short man with brown hair wearing leather armor. He’s very average looking and not at all anything like what the second generation eternals are supposed to be which are great hulking warrior types. + +“Hold for a moment! I would speak with you. There is no need for animosity.” +“What, you trying to stall for time and set up an amubush? Not likely, let’s get on with this!” you reply and advance. + +He and the two other eternals standing behind him all back away while still attempting to hold a defensive position. + +“Wait just a moment, damn it! There are not enough of us left to set up a fucking ambush! We’re all that’s left, besides Brutus barricaded in his house. I mean we already know you could kill us all within seconds, is it really going to hurt to hear what I have to say?” +“Alright, make it quick.” +“Okay, we’re giving up. I mean just let us get the hell out of here and we’ll never enter this damn swamp ever again. This ain’t worth it and I certainly ain’t dying for Brutus.” +“What makes you think I’d let you go?” +“Look I know who you are. You’re not just some crazy ass old shadow; you’re also an eternal. A first gen. Oh yes, I heard stories about you in the old days and unlike most of my kind, I took them seriously. I also remember because I was assigned here when you were still causing trouble for the old Empire. Everyone thought you died when we collapsed the temple on you, but when our boys started getting picked off over the last year, I had a feeling who it might be. I tried to warn Brutus that we should just leave, but the fool wouldn’t listen. +“Hmm, too bad you weren’t smart enough to leave yourself.” +“Well, Brutus may be a fool, but he’s still my friend.” +“Friends? Didn’t know you second gens, had the concept of it…but he’s so much of a friend, that you’re ready to abandon him now?” +“I don’t like it, but if I have to chose between loyalty to my friend and survival, survival is going to win.” +“While this is all very interesting, you still haven’t answered my question, why the hell should I let you go?” +“Because I talked Brutus out of destroying this entire town and the rest of the little villages in this swamp? Did you know when you started murdering us, his first order was to wage systematic genocide on the people of Delerg? Granted he still wiped out a few villages completely, but I managed to save lives because even I thought that was going too far. Other did too, I was just the only one brave enough to tell him in a way that showed it wouldn’t be wise to do it.” +“So that makes you a good guy?” +“No, I didn’t say it makes me a good guy, I’m just saying that my deeds at least should be taken into consideration. I mean…fuck…you’ve killed a lot of us and you’ll likely kill Brutus as well. Isn’t that enough? We’re no threat to you and we’re not going to come back to launch some sort of sneak attack. You can have free reign of this place, I’d rather just put this shithole far behind me. You’ll never see us again.” + +This guy might not be playing for time to have more of his buddies ambush you, but he’s still taken up more than enough and there’s no indication of Lena showing up who probably would’ve attacked them by now. Since she hasn’t that can only mean she’s decided to take on Brutus himself, which means she’s probably going to get herself killed if you don’t reach the house soon. +> Let them go and help Lena +Lena’s more important right now. This lot seems like they’re not eager for a fight. Even if they do regain their courage at a later date, you figure you can easily deal with them then. + +“Today is your lucky day, get the hell out of here and don’t let me see you again!” you say. The speaker of the group nods and thanks you while he and the rest of his fellows quickly run past you and out the front gate. + +You head quickly to the “mansion” sized home near the marshlands. You approach cautiously and that’s when you see Lena just arriving. You’re glad you got here in time. + +“Good there you are, did you have any problems?” you ask. +“Other than having to pull leeches off my body? No. There were a couple eternals near the area where I came through, but I killed them while they were still trying to make up their minds on whether or not to leave their posts to investigate the noise you were stirring up at the front gate. Besides that, I investigated the surrounding area outside this house and I haven’t seen any evidence that Brutus has tried to leave it.” +“Let’s just hope he doesn’t have some sort of underground tunnel built. Let’s go.” + +After breaking down the door, you cautiously move throughout the house. While certainly bigger than the rest of homes in Sinkhole, it probably doesn’t look much better from the inside. The place is a wreck, you’d think as a leader he’d want to keep his own home in better condition, but then given that you live in an underground hole of a collapsed temple which was already in ruins when you arrived there, maybe you aren’t exactly in a position to make judgments as far as living arrangements are concerned. + +“No traps so far.” Lena whispers. +“Considering there’s so much junk and garbage in this place, they could be well hidden. Keep a look out anyway, and stay quiet! No need to give our position away.” +“I’m sure he already knows we’re…” + +Before Lena can complete her statement, Brutus appears from around a corner and nearly takes her head off with an axe. Fortunately for her, you block the attack. At last you get a close look at the great leader himself, and once again you’re unimpressed by what you see. Makes this whole endeavor hardly even worth it at this point. + +“I’ll make you wish you hadn’t come back from the dead shadow!” Brutus exclaims right before you shut him up with a head-butt and then slicing his belly open. Falling to the floor and desperately attempting to hold in his entrails he starts to scoot back from you. + +“You new eternals always talk too much.” You say. “Lena…if you’d like to do the honors.” + +Lena wastes no time in taking up your offer. She points her spear at Brutus, who makes a plea for his life through bribery. It doesn’t work and Lena skewers him in the chest with the spear. + +Then she does it again… and again… and again… and… + +“Sonofabitch! You killed my family! Bastard! Die! Die! Fuck you…” Lena sobs the whole time. +“Lena he’s dead. You can stop…” you start to say and then you feel a crushing blow to the back of your skull knocking you to the floor. + +You were paying so much attention to Lena’s breakdown that you didn’t hear anyone else enter the house. It’s the trio of eternals that you previously let go. You attempt to get up, but only get another smash to your head for your troubles. + +“We kept our word shadow, you never saw us again!” you hear one of them laugh and this is followed by a final blow to your skull which splits it open causing bits of brains to splatter nearby. + +Lena charges at them already in a rage from before and while she manages to wound one of them, they ultimately take advantage of her unhinged state and finish her off with ease.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Even as quiet as you are, if you head over to her location, you might miss your best opportunity to attack even if you were waiting for a slightly better opening. Still no point in taking chances, you speed yourself up just give yourself that extra edge. + +As your blade sinks into the back of one of the eternals you materialize before the rest of their eyes and they look as if they see a ghost. Their surprise doesn’t last long, but it’s enough for you to chop down another one before they can put up a decent defense. + +“Behind you!” you hear a voice shout and you instinctively duck down and spin around to shoot a bolt at whatever might be behind you. You catch an attacker in the leg with it, but from what you can see a bunch more eternals have arrived to help their buddies. This is why you wanted to wait a moment longer before attacking. + +One of the eternals in charge shouts at one of his men to go catch the girl that just shouted a warning to you. At this point running might not be a bad option for yourself. If you had your back against something, you might be better able to fight them, but being surrounded and outnumbered like this isn’t the best situation. + +You make a break for it, but the eternals are wise enough to not all chase you directly, some instead run along either side of you hoping to head you off. It doesn’t help that a few are carrying spears and are fairly proficient at throwing them. + +You cloak yourself and climb up a tree, which helps lose them. They continue to search the area where they last saw you. Eventually they give up and argue with each other about losing you. + +You wait about an hour in the tree before you decide its safe to come down. You head back to the sanctuary cursing your unpreparedness. That speed spell also took it out of you. You feel more drained than you have in a long time; it’s almost like the old days when you were complete crap at casting magic. You’re guessing your long detachment from Dendrin has made your shadow magic even weaker. At least you can still cloak without too many problems it seems. + +Eventually you get back home only to see a visitor waiting for you. It’s the girl and she’s sitting on a pile of rubble near your secret entrance. Now that you can see her in a better light, she’s much different looking from the wailing waif you last saw. She stinks of the swamp like she’s been living in it for days. Her face is healed up with a few minor scars, but her eyes display a stare that could be matched by some battle weary warriors. You’re actually a little surprised to see her since it implies that she knew where you lived, meaning she’s sneakier than you thought. + +“Nobody followed me. I lost my pursuer.” +“Did you kill him?” +“No.” +“Then how the hell do you know you really lost him? Maybe he let you get away, just to follow you at his leisure. What the hell were you doing out there, you know damn well you’re no match for those guys.” +“Neither are you it seems.” +“I would’ve been had I waited a little longer to gather all the information instead of jumping into battle like an idiot.” +“So why’d you jump in like an idiot?” +“Because I saw you and you were already a factor I didn’t need to deal with if you decided to jump in like an idiot. So I did it instead, hoping that was all of them. Apparently not. Still, got a few of them I guess. There’s always tomorrow. Now if you don’t mind, I’m going inside and I don’t need you knowing exactly where the entrance is even if you already knew where I lived.” + +The girl doesn’t move. + +“So basically what you’re saying is you risked your life to prevent me from getting hurt.” +“No, I told you why I did it. Don’t read into something that isn’t there, now I suggest you do what I told you to do last time and go home.” +“I can’t considering they destroyed my village not long ago. Completely.” + +You exhale deeply since you heard about that, but of course you had no idea she was from there. + +“So that was your village? Was it random, or did they know you were there for the…first attack?” +“I think they knew. They didn’t know exactly what had happened or who was there, but they guessed someone in the village knew something. Some in the village knew what I told them, like my family, Aaron’s family, and close neighbors, but nobody gave me up. I sort of wished they did, they’d all be alive right now.” +“If you felt that way, why not turn yourself in?” +“Because I was scared? Because I didn’t want to die? Because I’d somehow beaten the odds and endured something I shouldn’t have?” +“Because you wanted to survive.” You say. +“Yes, because I wanted to survive. Just like I wanted to survive when they started lining up everyone to more efficiently butcher them. I managed to run. I left my mother, my father, my little brother, my friends. I left them ALL behind. I didn’t try to save them Maybe I could’ve I don’t think so, but I didn’t even try. All I wanted to do is survive. And that’s what I’ve been doing ever since, living in the swamp attempting to survive and plot revenge.” +“Hmm, well you’ve got the survival bit down at least. So were you the only survivor from your village?” +“I dunno, I think some others ran. Don’t know what happened to them though. So when are we going to attack again?” +“I’M going to get some rest and I’ll attack again when I feel like it. YOU I don’t know what you’re going to do, but I suggest you go find some place to hide where those bastards can’t find you. Now leave. I’m not going to ask nicely again.” + +The girl hops down from her sitting spot. + +“No, I’m not going anywhere. YOU saved me. Twice. Which means right now you’re the closest thing I have to a friend and friends help each other out. Besides, I did warn you about that guy going to attack you. Surely that warrants me at least some place to stay. I won’t get in the way. I know how to take care of myself. I know I can do a lot more than I used to…” +“Look this isn’t some shelter for lost girls! This is my damn home! I don’t owe you shit! Now get the fuck outta here!” you yell and stand directly in front of her, but she’s unmoved. +“You’re going to have to fucking kill me then!” she shouts back in your face. + +At this point you’re more worried about your voices attracting attention. You feel like knocking her out, but that would only be a temporary solution and despite being a fairly ruthless killer, you’re not going to oblige her alternative. + +You push her out of the way and open up your entrance. She’s probably a little amazed that she was so close to it and didn’t realize it. + +“Well? Don’t just stand there with a dumb look on your face; get inside before we attract the attention of something other than Sul Monkeys.” You say and motion her inside. + +“What’s your name anyway?” +“Lena.” + +Dendrin’s going to have a field day with this and you’ve got nobody to blame but yourself. +> Lesson One for Lena (A conversation) +“And this will be your room. You can fix it how you want, but don’t make a fucking mess. Also I don’t know what combat skills you’ve learned since I last saw you, but if you’re serious about this like you appear to be, you will be training under me starting tomorrow. I’m not taking you along if you don’t know how to handle yourself better.” You say. +“Great. It’s what I want anyway.” +“Hmm, you’ll probably rethink that, once I actually start training you. Anyway, goodni…” +“Hey I know you have some magic abilities, but are you really a shadow?” Lena asks. + +Her question catches you off guard. + +“Yeah, I guess. I mean not really. Shit, I dunno. Just go to bed kid, you’ll need the sleep because you’ve got other things to worry about.” +“What sort of answer is that?” +“The only one I’m giving you right now. ” +“Sheesh, I just figured it would be important if I knew if you were actually what you claimed when you killed those eternals that…assaulted me.” +“What? What did I say? I remember a lot of killing and screaming, but that’s it.” +“You said something like I’m the shadow of the past and right now the past is catching up with you. And then you killed one of them.” + +You now remember that line. That was rather over the top of you, and you’re sort of surprised you forgot it so quickly. + +“Heh, remembered that did you…but then I suppose it might’ve been more memorable for you…(sigh). The answer to your question is…complex. Officially I am a shadow, but +I am not a faithful one as far as the crazy religion is concerned.” +“So you don’t believe in Daylin?” +“Dendrin is his name and I didn’t say I didn’t believe in him, I just don’t worship him. One would think he’d want to leave me alone because of it, but for whatever reason he still insists on speaking with me on occasion. Don’t ask me why, I don’t know either. Maybe he just finds me interesting because I’m an eternal.” + +Your statement causes Lena’s eyes to go wide. She wasn’t expecting you to say something like that. + +“Oh don’t worry, I’m an original eternal, not like the ones you know about.” +“How did an eternal become a shadow?” +“Long story and maybe I’ll tell you one day assuming you survive training, now that’s it for questions for tonight. You better get some rest, I’m serious.” + +Lena ceases her questions and realizes that she’s reached the limit on them for tonight. You leave her and head to your room wondering what the hell you’re thinking. You hesitate to sleep just because you don’t want to suffer through Dendrin’s predictable taunts and questions. So you end up heading to the garden to speak to the only person you can. + +“Hi Talia, as you might know we’ve got a visitor. It’s that girl that I saved a few months ago. She seems to think she’s a warrior now.” You say shaking your head and sitting by Talia’s grave. + +“Yeah I dunno what I’m doing either, but I figure if she wants to get revenge that bad, then maybe she’s earned the right to succeed and I should at least train her properly. I mean hell, it isn’t like I have much else to do and it wouldn’t be so bad having someone help me again.” + +You suddenly begin to feel a little nervous. + +“I mean of course she’ll never replace you. NEVER. I just…um…I look…” + +While you sit there trying to explain yourself to a dead woman, you don’t even notice Lena entering the garden. + +“What’s going on? Who are you talking to?” she asks in all innocence and you fly into a rage at being intruded on. + +“GET THE FUCK OUT OF HERE! DON’T YOU EVER FUCKING ENTER THIS PLACE AGAIN!” you stand up and shout while walking towards her. You’re menacing enough that Lena genuinely fears that you’re going to hurt her and she runs out of the room. + +While Lena runs back to her room, you calm down a bit and stop yourself at the entryway of the garden and realize that you might’ve gotten a little more upset than you should have. + +“(Sigh) Shit.” You quietly say and begin to head towards Lena’s room. When you get there you see her trying not to cry and packing what little belongings she owns. + +“Where are you going?” +“I’m leaving, I guess you’re right, I shouldn’t be here.” +“Lena, stop. Where are you going to go? Back to live in the swamp with eternals hunting for your head? Look I’m sorry, but I haven’t had anyone living here for quite a while and you caught me off guard during, well a private time. +“So who were you speaking with?” +“Talia, my dead wife. Except I like to pretend she’s still alive sometimes. Hmm, now that I think about it, that’s not a very strong incentive for you to stay.” You morbidly joke. + +You sort of expect Lena to agree and continue her attempt to leave, but she doesn’t. + +“I…suppose I understand. For a while after my boyfriend Aaron was killed, I still couldn’t quite accept the fact he was dead either. Sometimes I pretended he was just off travelling for an extended period of time. When the rest of my family died, well I didn’t hold that illusion for any of them or even Aaron anymore. I had to accept reality. No point in living in a fantasy land when it isn’t real right?” +“Truer words have never been spoken. I believe you have the right mindset Lena and I also believe your training will go well.” + +As you turn to leave, Lena can’t resist asking that last question. + +“Uh, if you don’t mind me asking, but how did your wife die?” +“In battle against the eternals, about ten years ago.” + +Lena’s expression is a puzzled one. Here you just congratulated her on her acceptance of reality, yet you’ve been drifting in and out of fantasy for a decade. You stop her before she even asks. + +“Lesson one, do as I say, not as I do.” You remark and leave.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Chapter 3B2: Last Shadow + + +Year 45 + +You travel back to the sanctuary under cloak as you have many times before. The sanctuary isn’t much to look at anymore ever since it collapsed ten years ago, but one thing’s for sure, nobody ever comes around here, making it the perfect place to live ever since you started to live like a recluse. + +You scan the area to make sure there is nobody around before you go through your secret entrance; you remember how long it took you just dig your way out of the place. You probably could’ve stayed down there indefinitely, but there are only so many times you can read the same books over. It was only natural that you got curious about what was going on in outside world after the first few years of being buried had past. + +About another year of digging and it was a brand new world. The Empire had fallen, but not much had changed in the scheme of things. In some ways the situation might’ve been worse for the average person. You travelled under cloak to explore what used to be the territory of the old Empire, only to find that most of it was now divided up into petty fiefdoms run by the new eternals. + +You knew as soon as you saw these new eternals they were going to hasten the Empire’s fall, not save it. You also weren’t surprised to find most of them fighting over the scraps of their dead “parent.” They lack any sort of discipline of your generation, as far as you’re concerned they’re twisted mutants of eternals, but not real ones. + +Most of the population that had existed under the Empire has become practically enslaved under the new eternals. There are a few that remain autonomous, but this is mainly in Rask where the place is a war zone even compared to places like Quala or Arat. From what you’ve heard Flog and his orc/ogre horde have been spreading to southern Rask and making it hard for any eternal attempting to plant a flag and keep it there. It’s gotten so bad that what eternals do lay claim there have resorted to hiring svelk mercenaries to help. And the svelk aren’t exactly well liked by the new eternals (Though that’s one issue you’d have to agree with them on). + +The other area that remains free from of new eternal domination in Nalin, which is seemingly a beacon of “light” and under the control of the only other first generation eternal known to be alive, Brenda. She apparently has a non-aggression pact with the eternal upstarts, but has made it clear she will not let them destroy what’s left of what she considers to be the last remnants of the Empire. You don’t know whether it’s out of respect or fear that she has managed to avoid war with any of them. + +As for Delerg, it’s not a warzone, but it’s no paradise. Delerg is slightly unique in that it’s currently only “ruled” by one eternal by the name of Brutus, with no major competition. Brutus is not quite as ambitious either; he and his crony eternals seem content to just wallow in the swamp. One might think that perhaps he’s just biding his time and waiting for an opening to invade the weakest eternal in Quala, but in reality he wouldn’t have the means to do it anyway, his entourage is more of a gang rather than any proper army. He’s just lucky Delerg isn’t a profitable target by any other eternal or else he’d probably be wiped out by a real invasion. + +You’ve often wondered why you continue to stay in Delerg or even the general area even after you took your “tour” of the old provinces and saw the chaos for yourself. You have no real answer other than you have nowhere else to go and that you’ve lived at the temple for so long now that you consider it your home regardless of who is calling themselves ruler there. + +The other reason you guess is Talia. Even after all these years you still haven’t quite moved on. You speak to Talia a lot, but she’s not much of a conversationalist anymore, not that you mind. You’d rather speak with her than Dendrin who you don’t know why still insists on speaking with you at all though thankfully it’s been rare nowadays. + +Later that night you go through your usual routine of a little training to keep your skills sharp and eating your dinner. You then visit the garden and speak with Talia about what you did today. + +“Visited Sinkhole again today. Still the same rundown town it’s always been. You’d think since Brutus made it his headquarters that he’d actually have a little pride to build it up a bit. Instead he and his lackies seem to just enjoy kicking around the same pathetic peasants, molesting hapless young girls and generally being assholes. Must be nice to enjoy doing the same routine over and over again.” + +You grab a handful of dirt and throw it where you buried Talia. + +“Sometimes I feel like uncloaking and killing them all, just to see what they’d do, you know? I bet they’d be scared shitless. The return of the shadows! Ooooooooh!” + +You laugh a bit. + +“Of course you know I did feel like killing them all after you died, but now? What’s the point? It won’t bring you back, and most of those bastards get themselves killed over stupidity anyway. Hell I’d probably be honoring them by gracing them with my blade to their hearts.” + +You throw a stone in the small stream nearby. + +“I mean I suppose if I did kill them, I’d be helping out those they’re tormenting now…but why bother? Most of those wretches were content living under the yoke of the Empire, they can be happy with what that mindset got them! Remember when I was trying start up a minor rebel cell here? All I could practically get were the fucking criminals and other miscreants. I mean what the hell does that say about society when those are only type willing to fight against tyranny?” + +You start to get angrier at the predictable silence. + +“I mean it’s not my fight anymore! I did what I could back in the day and it wasn’t appreciated by anyone, sometimes not even by you! The Empire is dead! I’ve done my bit, so if someone else wants to play freedom fighter they can have at it. I’m done…I’m...I’m sorry…” you say as you slump down near Talia’s grave. + +You sit in silence for quite a while, and eventually you fall asleep. + +“You’re not still moping about are you? I thought you’d be over the hermit thing by now.” Dendrin says +“I can’t really be a hermit when you keep interrupting my solitude all the damn time.” +“Oh please, you secretly crave it! If you really cherished your solitude that much, why the hell do you even bother leaving this place to make your little trips all over the countryside?” +“I only did that once because I was curious about the changes in the world.” +“But you still continue to make your routine trips in Delerg at least. You know nothing has changed for quite some time, same eternals tormenting the peasants as usual. It’s almost as boring as a routine as you have, must be an eternal thing. My point is, if you really wanted solitude, you wouldn’t risk leaving this place at all. You wouldn’t lurk on the outskirts of civilization spying on what others are doing. You also wouldn’t still be talking to your mate who hasn’t been in any condition to talk back in quite some time. I don’t think this hermit thing is for you. You need to be doing something else.” +“Oh like what? Entertaining you? Look if you’re so bored, why don’t you go bother someone else and leave me alone? I’ve repeatedly told you, I’m not here for your amusement.” +“Obviously not. (Sigh) Very well Eternal, but you know I’m right. You can’t keep going on like this. You’re going to have to change your surroundings eventually, because you might as well be lying in a grave right next to Talia given that you’ve fallen asleep in the dirt and have small cave insects crawling on you.” +“Don’t think I haven’t considered it.” +“Stop talking nonsense. You’re not suicidal and even if you were, you’d be too cowardly to go through with it anyway. Just like you’re too cowardly to change your current situation by leaving this place.” +“First you say I’m not really a hermit because I’m leaving here on a regular basis, but now you’re saying I’m too cowardly to leave it? How does that make sense?” +“I’m saying you’re going about everything half assed! You want to be a hermit? Fine then you need to shut yourself off from the outside world completely and not run around topside and vicariously getting your socialization kicks by spying on others. However I don’t think that’s what you want. I think you WANT to go back to doing what you used to do, but you’ve been staying hidden from the known world so long that you don’t want to risk what peace you have. Its safer that way.” +“And I haven’t earned a little peace? Given everything I’ve been through?” +“Maybe you have Eternal. I don’t know, but what I do know is you don’t seem to be satisfied with it, so what I’m saying is you need to change your situation. Otherwise you might as well be dead because you’re not living, you’re just surviving.” +“It’s enough.” +“Are you sure?” +“Always has been.” + +At this point Dendrin stops speaking. You don’t know if it’s because he’s just tired of arguing with you or if it’s because you’ve actually won the argument. Dendrin can’t really deny that surviving to a certain extent has been enough for you in the past. + +In any case the numbness eventually subsides and you wake up. + +After brushing yourself off you head back to your real bed and ponder what you’re really going to do since despite it all, Dendrin has once again managed to weasel a little truth in his words and its enough to make you think. +> Leave the area +Whether you’re content on just surviving or not isn’t really the issue, staying here in what amounts to be an oversized grave wallowing in self pity from time to time probably isn’t the best thing for your mind. You’re already starting to go a little off kilter in that regard. There is really nothing for you here or Delerg or even the area in general. Maybe shouldn’t just change your surroundings, maybe you need to just leave them completely. + +It takes you about a month, but eventually you gather up the motivation to leave the temple for good. You visit Talia’s grave one last time before you leave. + +“I’m sorry Talia, but I have to leave you now. We’ll… be together again some day.” + +You keep your goodbyes to Talia short because if you draw it out any longer you’ll end up staying. + +When you leave the temple you aren’t exactly sure which direction to head in. You could head west through Quala, Arat and eventually to the Felkan Kingdom. From there you’ll decide your next course of action of what to do next. + +Of course you could do the unthinkable and do what even the Empire avoided and that’s head east deeper into the Delerg swamp. There are rumors of horrors that live further in and while that might be true, the swamp has to end somewhere. It isn’t like anyone to your knowledge has ever explored past it. Part of this intrigues you a bit. At the very least the danger would keep your mind focused on other things. +> Head east into deep Delerg jungle +The whole point of changing your surroundings is to go someplace where you haven’t been before. You’ve been through Quala and Arat and you’d rather not have to travel through them again. You’re going to off in a completely new direction. + +Your journey through the eastern swamp is an ordeal to say the least. The swamp eventually becomes more of a jungle it almost seems as if the land itself is protecting something or otherwise it just doesn’t want anyone going further east. + +You do battle with several beasts that you’ve never seen before and probably nobody else from the “civilized” world has either. It’s not just beasts that are hostile, or even the plants, but also a short dark race of humans. Their small stature doesn’t make them any less dangerous. If it wasn’t for your magic abilities you doubt if you’d be able to handle so many because you swear the trees must be spawning the little bastards. Thankfully as an eternal you’re also somewhat resistant to poisons. + +Still the constant attacks are taking their toll and you’re exhausted from fighting and magic use. The moment you are able to get a small bit of sleep, even Dendrin is suggesting that perhaps you should go back. You ignore him though. He’s always giving you contradictory suggestions. One moment he’s telling you to something like change your surroundings, and the next he’s telling you how that’s bad. You wish he’d just leave you alone once and for all. + +You press onward and eventually the jungle thins out a bit and you discover what looks to be some very old ruins. Another temple perhaps, but its design isn’t like the shadow temple. Your curiosity gets the better of you and you decide to enter. If nothing else, it’ll give you a bit of relief from the tree dwelling attackers. + +You cautiously explore, but so far the ruins seem empty. You don’t even come across any of the jungle fauna making their home here. Your guess that it was once some sort of temple seems to be on target as you come across several altars and odd symbols. Lot of drawing of snakes too. You’re guessing it was dedicated to some sort of snake god. + +Not finding anything of interest, you step back outside only to suddenly feel four sharp darts going into your body. The pygmies set up an ambush! You stagger back inside the ruins cursing yourself for not being more observant. + +You can hear them shouting excitedly from outside while you’re pulling out the dart from behind a fallen stone pillar. Given that they typically attack you with abandon of their own well-being, you fully expect them to come rushing into the temple to attack you. It’ll be taxing, but you’ll have the advantage in the cover of the darkness. + +That doesn’t happen however. They don’t enter the temple at all and seem to be waiting for you to come out. You wonder if they consider this place taboo or something. In any case you decide you’ll take advantage by resting a moment and when you feel like you’ve got the energy, you’ll cloak yourself and sneak past them all. + +You wait in the darkness for quite a while and keeping an ear out for the pygmies. Though while you’re listening out for them, you then hear another sound which sounds very close. A hissing sound that is right behind you… + +You turn around and swing your weapon, but the instant you do, an incredibly bright light blinds you. You then feel the whip of a tail smashing you in the chest causing you to fall backwards and hit your head on the stone floor. + +Through your grogginess and hazy eye sight you manage to just make out your attacker which seems to be some sort of serpent creature, but with arms like a human holding a staff with a glowing tip. + +You attempt to mumble a spell to speed you up, but the serpent creature is faster even without magical enhancements. Its head lunges forward and you feel its fangs sink deep into your throat puncturing the jugular. You die instantly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Whether you’re content on just surviving or not isn’t really the issue, staying here in what amounts to be an oversized grave wallowing in self pity from time to time probably isn’t the best thing for your mind. You’re already starting to go a little off kilter in that regard. There is really nothing for you here or Delerg or even the area in general. Maybe shouldn’t just change your surroundings, maybe you need to just leave them completely. + +It takes you about a month, but eventually you gather up the motivation to leave the temple for good. You visit Talia’s grave one last time before you leave. + +“I’m sorry Talia, but I have to leave you now. We’ll… be together again some day.” + +You keep your goodbyes to Talia short because if you draw it out any longer you’ll end up staying. + +When you leave the temple you aren’t exactly sure which direction to head in. You could head west through Quala, Arat and eventually to the Felkan Kingdom. From there you’ll decide your next course of action of what to do next. + +Of course you could do the unthinkable and do what even the Empire avoided and that’s head east deeper into the Delerg swamp. There are rumors of horrors that live further in and while that might be true, the swamp has to end somewhere. It isn’t like anyone to your knowledge has ever explored past it. Part of this intrigues you a bit. At the very least the danger would keep your mind focused on other things. +> Head west to the Felkan Kingdom +You think you’d still rather stick to familiar terrain first, so you decide that you’ll head to the Felkan Kingdom and see what happens from there. + +Your journey through Quala takes a while, but is fairly uneventful. Same chaos going on that you saw before with various eternal warlords squabbling over the scraps of a fallen regime. You don’t really see it getting better any time sooner. In fact you wonder if overthrowing the Empire made a damn bit of difference at all. In some ways things are even worse. + +Arat fairs even worse. There doesn’t seem to be any sort of law and order of any kind here. There isn’t even a petty dictator around, its just complete anarchy. The only semblance of order is on the Felkan boarders where the overworked Felakans are busily attempting to keep the riff raff from coming in. Naturally you simply cloak and sneak over. + +The Felkan Kingdom is something you’ve heard about usually in a negative light from the Empire, but of course like with most things that seems to have been propaganda. The Felkan Kingdom is very different from what you’re used to seeing though. The whole place seems to embrace technology and new ideas more readily than the Empire did. You see many instances of soldiers carrying around the “black powder” weapons you’ve heard about. + +You stay in the Felkan lands for a while mostly keeping to the more rural parts of it, but the land is currently involved in a war of its own against a race of creatures called Gnolls making those same rural parts fairly dangerous. You have many of your own run ins with them while attempting to make a home here. + +Eventually you decide to move on and leave Felkan territory. + +You travel for years to distant lands, never finding a place to call home. In time, Dendrin stops speaking to you altogether and you find that you no longer have any magic ability at all. You see it as a small price to pay for never having to deal with him again. + +What ultimately happens to you is lost to history.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 35 + +Despite your best efforts, stirring up more dissent in Delerg seems to be a losing battle. It’s not just the Empire though; it’s the people here in general. Most of them are content on being dominated. Funny how in the “birthplace” of the shadows, that rebellion would be less here. + +The best you’ve been able to do is organize small groups of society’s misfits, lowlifes and outright psychopaths and they’re just doing it for the shits and giggles for the most part, but whatever works at this point. + +You and Talia have been very careful about not giving the impression of any shadow activity in the area and that’s a good thing because lately the Empire has been throwing its weight around once more. Almost as if it’s gotten a second wind. + +And it has. + +There were always rumors, but you never paid too much attention most of the time mainly because you had so much else going on in your life, but when the announcement of the Empire’s new eternals came about, you had no choice but to pay attention especially since there was a lot more of them, hundreds actually. + +The first place they sent them was to Rask. Not surprising considering the Empire lost the territory. What wasn’t expected is that the Empire didn’t just send them to conquer the place. They sent them to destroy it. Town after town was completely obliterated by these new eternals and the people no matter how united couldn’t stop them. Some tried to pledge their allegiance to the Empire again, but they were killed like everyone else. Not since the days of Kane had Rask experienced such brutality on a wide scale. + +After most of the towns had been laid to waste, Fort Defiance was next. In fact this was the main objective in the first place. The rest of it? Just in the way and served to test the viciousness of the new eternals. Perhaps even to scare the remaining shadows still huddled up in that run down fort. “Defiance” was a reminder of an old wound. A loss. A humiliation. The Empire didn’t just lose a fort, or even a whole province; they lost it because of the shadows, the ones who caused all this in the first place. They had to be eliminated once and for all. + +You heard that the siege didn’t even last three days and Fort Defiance was destroyed along with all the remaining shadows inside. Cyrus himself was found dead with another male shadow (Who you presume was probably Draven) in an embrace. Apparently they had poisoned themselves rather than give the satisfaction to the Empire of killing them. + +Talia gets a little sad when she hears the news. While she left due to her feelings for you and Cyrus’ incompetence, she was there for five years and still considered them all her brothers and sisters. A loss of any of Dendrin’s faithful is a loss to all who revere him. + +While you aren’t exactly broken up about it, you certainly aren’t jumping for joy. Now that the Empire has satisfied its blood revenge on what they believed to be the last of the shadows, they’re going to unleash these new eternals on the rest of their provinces in full force too. They’ve already started deploying them in the Quala and Arat province. Delerg can’t be far behind. + +“While I hate to always be the cynic. Things are looking really damn bleak right about now Talia.” +“They’ve been bad before and we’ve still pulled through. Dendrin will preserve us and the Empire will fall.” +“Yeah…well…” +“Oh come on now my love, don’t tell me you’re starting to lose your faith again.” + +It’s always so charmingly naïve of Talia to believe that you’re not just faking everything. Still, even while faking it, you can’t help but be a “doubter” sometimes. + +“Well no…but we’re the last two shadows left Talia. I mean, sure Cyrus was obviously a bad leader and all that, but above all else he was a devoted worshipper of Dendrin along with all the rest. I have to question why Dendrin isn’t doing something more direct to help his own followers now more than ever.” +“Cyrus’ actions had obviously offended Dendrin, and he was punished along with all those that followed him. True, I weep for their passing, but they strayed from the teachings. They were no longer fighting the Empire or trying to carry out Dendrin’s will and as a result Rask was ravaged. We on the other hand were smart enough to leave and carry on the fight. For years now we’ve successfully hid ourselves right under the noses of the Empire. I know we’re careful, but we’re not that lucky. Dendrin has obviously clouded the Empire’s collective mindset from believing there are shadows here in Delerg. Your magic is back completely. I’d say Dendrin is looking out for only those that are worthy. When the Empire does finally fall, it will be a new era and it only takes two…” + +Talia takes your hand and looks into your eyes. + +“…to recreate the shadows stronger than ever.” + +While you’re glad Talia’s confidence in victory is so certain, you’re not convinced as usual. Even if Dendrin is helping you both out on some small level like Talia believes he is, he’s going to have to do a hell of a lot more. In the meantime you’re going to prepare yourself for the inevitable new eternal invasion. You begin setting up traps in and around the temple though you imagine the day when they actually get used is probably going to be the day you’re making your last stand. + +Months pass and you go through your usual routines of opposing the Empire, then that fateful day comes. A platoon of the new eternals arrive in Sinkhole. They aren’t there to destroy it, but they barely act like it. Under the cover of cloak you spy on them for a period of several days, and you see them routinely assaulting people even when there is no real cause for it other than pure sadistic glee. Even their non-eternal commander doesn’t have much control over them. Sometimes when he tells them to stop beating someone, they just look at him like he’ll be next. Whoever trained these eternals obviously didn’t do a good job, it’s like they have no discipline what so ever. + +That’s when you begin to wonder if the Empire hasn’t put the last nail in their own coffin. These monsters the Empire has unleashed upon the world are going to cause them more problems than they’re going to solve. You can see that even now. + +Another month passes and more of them arrive in Delerg. You and Talia engage small bands of them during their patrols, and they aren’t slouches in a fight either despite only being teenagers. Naturally when dead eternals start becoming more common, Delerg starts getting the thumbscrews put to it. While all the little villages in Delerg aren’t put to the torch a lot of them are. Sinkhole becomes a staging ground for public executions and worse. + +Eventually the few that were actually supporting the rebellion are all rounded up and killed. It gets harder and harder to sneak around the swamp ambushing patrols, and you and Talia never seem to get enough rest to recharge up your magic. + +And today is the day when all this catches up with you both… + +As you withdraw your sword from a dead foe, you hear the sounds of several bows being drawn behind you as well as above you. Fortunately, whoever is in charge has decided to be an overly dramatic fool and doesn’t attack immediately. You and Talia stand back to back trying to get a bit of a breather before the next assault. + +A young man appears from behind the archers. He’s obviously one of the new eternals though he’s wearing a captain’s rank, which strikes you as a bit odd. + +“Give it up shadow scum. Oh yes, we’ve figured out who you really are now. Should’ve known a few of you would’ve been sneaking around somewhere, but that ends now. You’ve exhausted yourselves and your magic won’t help you now. Even if you can outrun the arrows I’ve got eternals all over the swamp right now waiting for you in all directions.” The young captain sneers. +“The Empire getting so desperate they’re promoting babies now?” you say. +“The Empire is getting better now that we’re around. Our former captain was inferior so he was replaced. Only an eternal is fit to lead other eternals. Of course you two would know nothing about being real eternals having betrayed the Empire after all, but really even if you had stayed loyal, you’d be obsolete now anyway. Time to put an end to your kind in more ways than one.” +“You brats talk too much.” You say and you and Talia speed yourselves up to run back into the undergrowth and avoid the arrow barrage to come. + +You’re successful, but you’re getting really tired really fast. Even Talia is experiencing fatigue. You need to run to safety to get some temporary relief, but chances are if they know about you being shadows, they’ll assume you’ll run straight to Dendrin’s old temple where there might be a larger group of eternals waiting for you. +> Run deeper into the swamp +You don’t want to risk heading back to the temple, it’s bound to be crawling with new eternals. + +“Talia, don’t go to the temple! This way!” you exclaim grabbing her arm. +“What? We need to go where Dendrin will protect us the most!” +“He’s not helping us now! Let’s gnnnt!” + +While you were standing around arguing you catch two arrows to the back and then another to your side. You’re down and Talia attempts to drag you into cover before cloaking the pair of you. Cloak or not, the arrows continue to be fired in your vicinity, won’t be long before more find their mark or worse the rest of the eternal chasing you catch up. + +“We need to get out of here and back to the sanctuary now! Can you stand up?” Talia asks. +“Probably, but I’m not going to be going too fast all shot full of arrows, and with this pain I’m not sure how long I’m going to be able to upkeep the shadow magic. Look, just go on without me, I’ll figure out something.” +“I’m not doing that! I already left you once when you needed help, I’m not doing it again!” +“Well this situation isn’t looking good, you realize that right?” +“I know.” + +You and Talia look into each other’s eyes and briefly kiss. You had some good times; your only regret is you won’t have any more with her. + +The arrows stop as more eternals start swarming the vicinity. While one of them is barking orders to find you, Talia decloaks and cleaves his head in starting the battle off. Despite your limited mobility, you manage to throw some of your attackers off their game by fighting low to the ground. A couple of them go down by your hand, but ultimately there are too many of them and you feel a crushing mace blow to your head followed by a blade to your chest. + +As your sight begins to fade, you see Talia still giving the eternals a good fight. Hopefully she’ll make it back to the sanctuary like she wanted to in the first place. + +You won’t.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Maybe you love Talia more than she loves you, or maybe you’re just tired of practically being a loner all the time and at least if you have Talia, you know you’ve got someone on your side. Whatever the reason, you tell Talia that you’re willing to go to Delerg with her. Her reaction is a happy one though she admits she’s a little surprised you agreed as quickly as you did. + +Later that night you fall asleep wondering how the hell you got yourself into this. + +Then a numbness washes over you… + +“So, ready to come back to the fold eh?” you hear Dendrin say. +“Hardly.” You reply. +“I didn’t think so, but you always continue to intrigue me. I mean here you are supporting a woman that obviously places faith over love. Why would you do such a thing? The Empire’s most fanatical soldiers have faith in their false Emperor and the shadows…what’s left of them still have faith in me yet they have no real proof that their respective masters approve of them or feel anything back. Yet you have proof that Talia’s faith in me is stronger than her love for you and you still stand by her.” +“Because I’m an idiot obviously.” +“That remains to be seen, but I don’t think so. In fact you’re being clever enough to avoid my question. Don’t think I haven’t noticed. Is it possible that you’re heading to into Empire territory in the hope of getting into major battle again? Has been awhile and I know you do enjoy it so.” + +You don’t answer, you just try to go back to waiting out this “dream”, but Dendrin isn’t letting you. + +“Passive silence? That’s not your usual tactic with me. You’ve always been a fighter, a warrior! But I’ll take that silence as a sign that I was right.” +“Take it however you want, but take it away from me.” +“Hmm, not sure if I like this new approach to our talks, but if I had an opinion on your decision, it’s that you’ve made the right one. I think that you’ll find something else in my old temple too. Well now you will since I’ve just mentally transferred the position of a very hidden place in it. Hope the baby situation works out for you, I think fatherhood would suit you, and it’ll give me a new follower! I’ll be watching as usual.” + +In the next few weeks you and Talia make your preparations to leave Rask. When you tell her that Dendrin spoke to you and placed the image of a stone “button” to reveal a secret part of the temple, Talia is again overjoyed and remarks that this is a good sign that he cares for your well being and merely wants your worship in return. You don’t bother saying what you really think, but instead just nod and tell Talia that perhaps she’s right and that maybe one day your faith in him will be as strong as hers. + +The journey is a long one, it probably wouldn’t be if you could actually use shadow magic to speed yourself up without passing out anymore, but since you’re not yet a “true believer” again, looks like ol’ Dendrin’s withholding the perks still. Doesn’t seem to bother Talia, she’s very positive during the whole trip. She talks about how you can both make your home in the temple and start your new lives there. She goes on about how you can also put out feelers on how the rebellion situation is going on in Delerg and how maybe you can get it split from the Empire like Rask did. You have to admit you don’t mind that idea. + +There are a few times on the trip through the Quala province you could’ve avoided combat with Empire patrols, but you deliberately engage them when the time is right. You make an effort to leave no survivors in these attacks; every dead soldier is a blow to the Empire right? + +Eventually you make it to Delerg and the place is crawling with Empire troops, it looks like they’ve really been trying to clean up around here. You keep a lower profile here and it takes a lot of sneaking around, but eventually you make it to Dendrin’s temple which have several rotten heads on pikes facing the temple along with several rotten bodies (partially eaten by the wildlife and insects) strewn around and even inside the temple. + +“These are shadows.” Talia says with a touch of sadness in her voice. +“I know…even with half her face covered in maggots I recognize that one. Sister Yvette. I always wondered what happened to her after I left her in charge of my cell when I went back to Gloom. (Sigh) I figured it would be something like this.” +“Do you think these are all the shadows that we lost contact with south of Rask?” +“Most of them I suppose. I guess maybe they had the same idea and made a last stand here where they thought Dendrin would protect them. Looks like…” you stop yourself from saying something completely negative like “he didn’t.” so you think of something slightly less negative and say: “they fought so hard that the Empire tried to make some sort of example out of them.” +“We need to take them down off the pikes.” Talia says. +“No we need to leave them be, since I’m sure the Empire has patrols come around here, and if they see all the heads suddenly gone, they’re going to correctly assume shadows are around. We need to keep a low profile if we’re going to stick around here remember?” +“I…suppose discretion would be best right now.” + +You and Talia move past the pike heads and enter the temple, which is surprisingly in good condition though signs of battle obviously took place here. You waste no time in seeking out the stone “button” that will open up a secret place in the temple. Eventually you find it (which you doubt you would’ve been able to do if Dendrin hadn’t told you) and descend down. + +What you find is better than you could’ve hoped for when you first arrived and that’s living quarters for what you presume would be for the old shadow high priests or whatever. It isn’t fancy, but it’s fairly clean. You imagine that this place hasn’t been accessed in centuries. The walls are very solidly made so it doesn’t even look like signs of any natural intrusion have occurred either. There is one “room” that sticks out which isn’t man made and that’s a small natural cavern, which seems to be an underground garden of some sort with a shallow stream of fresh water flowing through it. Blue glowing fungus lights up the place and there are no exits other than the small openings the water is flowing through. + +With no suspicion whatsoever Talia immediately takes some purple berries off one of the bushes and pops them in her mouth and remarks how good they taste. +“Hey those could be poisonous!” you exclaim. +“Oh you doubter, Dendrin lead us here! We won’t come to any harm! +“I’m being cautious. This cavern is strange; I mean wouldn’t a garden like this have overgrown or decayed without regular care? I imagine the water stream is seeping into the soil and sustaining them, but some of these plants wouldn’t survive without sunlight either.” +“It’s obviously magical and don’t you see? Dendrin provides as usual. We now have a good supply have fresh sustenance and water. Why question it, for it is one less thing to worry about! With this place we could easily hide underneath the Empire’s noses and strike from the shadows again.” Talia says. +“As long as they don’t call in their Derro buddies again, I agree that this will make a suitable hideout. I suppose you’re probably right about the garden being magical. Sort of odd though, never known Dendrin to be into the whole nature thing.” +“Well we cannot hope to know all of a god’s interests and thoughts. As I’ve said, why question it? It is enough that it’s something good and we could use that right now. Now come, we should thank Dendrin for this together.” + +As you join Talia in thanking Dendrin, you can’t help but wonder if this is all some elaborate plan by Dendrin to actually get you to be a true believer, or if he doesn’t really care if you believe, just as long as you’re going through the motions. + +Either way, you’ll do this for Talia because that’s who you’re really faithful to. +> Talia’s Revelation (Year 33) +When you first got to Dendrin’s sanctuary (As it came to be called), you basically stayed in your underground paradise a lot, since Talia was still pre-occupied with the idea of you both having a baby during that time. It was actually fun shutting out the world completely for a while. Even the prayers to Dendrin you faked didn’t bother you. + +As months went by, it was apparent nothing was happening and Talia began to get noticeably upset. She started blaming you, stating that because you had turned from Dendrin he was still punishing you and her by association. Naturally you argued back pointing out that you’ve been praying to Dendrin right along side her and the fact you traveled here should be proof that’s you’re trying to change. It doesn’t help and ultimately she just gets more upset. Weeks pass by where you don’t even speak to each other, and that’s when you tried something voluntarily that you never thought you’d do. + +You genuinely prayed to Dendrin. Not for yourself, but for Talia. You even bargained with him stating that you’d actually become a true believer if he just granted her prayers. Predictably he never answered. All this caused you to do is get angry and curse him like you have so many times in the past. In the meantime, Talia wasn’t angry with you anymore so much as she had fallen into a depression. + +With Talia in a depression, you found yourself getting angrier at the situation. At Talia, at Dendrin, at the shadows, at the Empire and at yourself. Naturally you had to get your mind off things and that’s when you remembered what the hell you were there for in the first place. To stir up shit for the Empire here in Delerg again. + +You began leaving the sanctuary on a regular basis and ambushing Empire troops. Pretty soon you were back to a routine like you were in Rask during your isolated years. Talia never helps you during this time and mostly remains in her depression, but it hardly matters since you’re focused on Empire soldiers. This remains your routine for months. + +But recently things take an odd turn, namely you feel your shadow magic getting stronger again. You don’t know if was due to the temple or the prayers or Dendrin being a whimsical asshole as usual, but you try to focus on the positive and hope that maybe this will snap Talia out her general sadness as well. + +“Talia, I know you’ve been feeling down for the past year or so, but I think I’ve got some good news for you. My shadow magic is coming back.” +“Really?” +“Yes, so I imagine that this means Dendrin must be happy with me and if he’s happy with me, he’s gotta be happy with you right?” + +You see Talia temporarily smile, but then this drops as quickly as it appears. In fact the expression on her face looks even sadder if that was possible. + +“What the hell, I would’ve thought that this would’ve snapped you out of this long time depression you’ve been in.” +“I wish it did (sob) but instead it only confirms what I think the problem has been all along. (sob).” Talia weeps. +“I don’t understand.” +“I should’ve told you before…” +“What?! What should you have told me?” +“You were never the problem, it was me! (sob) I wasn’t good enough! (sob)” +“Talia, you need to calm yourself, and explain what you’re going on about.” +“Dendrin, he speaks to you. He always has, regardless of your thoughts and beliefs about him he obviously sees the greatness in you. You couldn’t have been problem.” +“Are…are you talking about getting pregnant? Talia, you don’t know that. I mean I probably have pissed off Dendrin on some level, and just because I got some of my magic back doesn’t mean he’s going to suddenly…” + +Talia interrupts you. +“No! You don’t understand! I’ve tried this before and it didn’t work! I betrayed our vow! Our bond! And Dendrin is punishing me for not being patient with you!” + +This revelation causes a dead silence from you. It certainly wasn’t something you were expecting. You feel like you should be angry and you are, but you’ve got more questions first. + +“Wait so you had sex with someone else? When? It can’t have been recently unless you’ve been sneaking off to Sinkhole while I’ve been killing Empire soldiers.” +“No, not recently. It was during the five years we weren’t together. I don’t know what sort of emotions you went through while we were apart, but I went through a lot. Kept them bottled up for the most part, but they were still there. I loved you, but after you left I saw all our future plans disappear. It was devastating. For the first couple of years I held out hope that maybe somehow you’d return, but then I realized you wouldn’t. So I thought I had to move on in my life and alter my future plans with someone else.” +“So…what then? You fucked an entire barrack of shadows?” +“Please! This is hard enough for me without you being judgmental and hostile!” +“You know what Talia, I’m mad, but I guess I’m not really surprised. I mean you placed your faith in Dendrin over me, so why not someone else?” +“I did not! Yes it is true that my faith in Dendrin will always be stronger, but I didn’t place my love for you under anyone else. I’ve never loved any other person except you! (sob) And I wasn’t fucking an entire barrack of shadows! I picked ONE. One that seemed strong and fairly intelligent. One that looked like he’d sire a strong child. One I thought might prove to be a suitable father even if he was a poor substitute for you. And I only did that, because I wanted the shadows to start preparing strong stock for the next generation of Dendrin worshippers, because I knew Cyrus wasn’t going to be able to fucking do it!” + +You rub your hand over your face. It always comes back to Dendrin. Why and how you fell in love with a religious fanatic is a mystery to you, but the fact is you are and despite this revelation, you really can’t stay mad at her. And really for all intents and purposes you weren’t a couple for those five years despite the fact that you might’ve pined over her a couple times. She probably did the same; she just did it in her own way. + +You almost ask who guy was, but you don’t bother. You probably don’t know him or if you did, you probably don’t remember him since all the shadows you knew from the old days in Gloom are pretty much a blur to you now. Besides it’s not like you’re going to travel all the way to Rask just to satisfy some macho need to kick his teeth in. The poor bastard is still living under Cyrus’ rule anyway, not much more you could do to him, assuming he is still alive in the first place. + +That just leaves you to deal with Talia, which you aren’t sure what to do. Her sadness and depression isn’t just a result of her perception of betraying you, it’s also her overall perception that she believes she isn’t worthy in Dendrin’s eyes. Personally, you think if Dendrin is even paying attention to this little drama at all he’s probably having a good laugh. Your own view here doesn’t matter, so you do what you’ve been doing. Fake it. + +“Talia, have you ever considered that maybe Dendrin has decided that now is not the time for you to have children?” you ask. +“What do you mean?” she replies sniffling. +“Well I mean wartime isn’t exactly the best time to have children. The Empire is still out for our blood and we have to remain alert. Harder to fight if you’re carrying a baby in your belly. You said Dendrin was the one who started the seeds of this rebellion, maybe he wants you…us to help finish it before blessing us with children which we can raise a lot better when we don’t have arrows flying at our heads.” + +This explanation, this rationale, this excuse causes Talia to reassess her thoughts. You watch her for a moment mentally thinking about how she’s going to fit this into her perception of the world. + +“Do you really think that’s the reason?” she asks. +“I think it could be, but then I don’t presume to know Dendrin’s grand plan.” +“Oh no, nobody could… but still it makes sense. Yes, I can see the wisdom in that plan.” +“It is a wise plan. So, are you starting to feel a bit better?” +“Yes, I suppose so. I really shouldn’t have let myself get like this in the first place. I should’ve had more faith in Dendrin. If I had, I wouldn’t have become weak like this!” +“Don’t worry about it now, I’m sure this happened for a reason too. Everything is over and done with and whatever happened in the past is in the past.” + +This statement seems to be the last one that gets her out of her dark mood. As she hugs you, you breathe a sigh of relief that you managed to convince her. Actually you aren’t really sure if you did convince her, so much as she took your offer of something to support her mental defenses on facing possible reality. + +This problem might pop up again if you actually succeed in toppling the Empire, but given that you still have a lot to do before that’s a reality, you won’t have to worry about Talia’s self-doubt again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>If you actually had a little help, you probably would be able to pull off killing him in the fort, but the risks are too great and while you might have a love of battle, you also have a strong sense of self-preservation. So luring Kane out it is. + +The next day you come up with a plan and your first step is seeking out a lone peasant. It doesn't take long and after you get him to calm down you ask him a few simple questions such as if he has family, where he lives, is he part of the rebellion, etc. + +Happily he's pretty informed on things being a travelling peddler and all. He ultimately tells you he has no ties to the rebellion, but he's aware of certain villages that he's visited that still have sympathies a lot stronger than they let on. You make a note of where to head to for the third step of your plan. The second step involving killing the peasant and disguising yourself as him, well not as him, but as another wandering merchant. + +After disposing of his body you set off towards the town of Volgst. You start off by assessing the Empire strength there. It's moderate, but nothing that couldn't be handled. It's obvious the people are just trying to go about their business, but if what the peddler said was correct, this place has just been temporarily cowed into submission due to occupation and closer proximity to Fort Destiny. + +You decide to head to the local tavern and take in some of the atmosphere. You order a drink sit at a table in the corner and pretend you're just going through some of your inventory. You get a few people asking you about some of the jewelry you have on the table. To you it looks cheap and it probably is, so you don't charge much, just what you think its worth since you aren't here for that anyway. + +You sit there a few hours and then finally some Empire soldiers come through the door. The tavern gets a bit quieter and that's when you decide to make things louder again. + +"Hey barkeep! Gimme another ale!" you shout walking up to the bar interrupting the soldiers who were attempting to order their own drinks. +"Uh, hold on sir. I just have to serve these gentlemen first." +"Oh come on, I was here first and they aren't supposed to be drinking on the job anyway!" + +At this point one of the soldiers addresses you. + +"We happen to be off duty right now citizen." +"Off duty? When there are rebels running around all over the place? What the hell man? You should be out there killing the sons of bitches, not getting drunk!" +"I can assure you we are, and citizen you need to calm down." +"Why is it taking so long anyway? Is that captain of yours just sitting on his fat ass in that fort all day while rebels terrorize the area? I thought the Empire was supposed to be doing something about it, but it looks like it's as impotent as ever!" + +At this point now several bar patrons start to take notice, some try to get you to calm down, others just outright leave. The soldiers to your surprise haven't tried to kill you yet. It's almost like they're trying to diffuse the situation and dismiss you as some loudmouth drunk because all they really want to do is relax after a long day. Oddly enough, you can understand it, unfortunately you can't relax either. + +You step it up and physically push one of the soldiers. That does it, and the swords come out. You kill two soldiers almost immediately, the third one runs off for help, leaving the fourth one to try to finish you off. He fails miserably when you run your sword through his chest. + +Three bodies lay at your feet and several patrons are in shock along with a very scarred bartender. + +"What the fuck did you just do? We're all dead men!" he screams. +"You were dead long before I got here. Now if you want to live, you'll help me fight these Empire assholes and get them the hell out of this town." +"You dumb fuck, don't you realize they'll just send more troops? The Butcher of Rask himself will probably come here himself and lay waste to the entire town!" +"That's what I'm counting on. Now I know this place still has rebellion sympathies, and I'm telling you right now, if you really want to be free of the Empire you'll start helping me rather than hiding…or don't if your conviction is lacking. Either way I'm stepping outside and I'm going to be killing Empire soldiers and I'm not stopping until all of them are fucking dead. Do what you like." + +You take your leave at this point and face the small platoon of soldiers that is running in your direction. You don't use any shadow magic, just pure skill to put soldier after soldier down. After you've killed about six of them in the open street, some of the citizens actually start growing a backbone and begin to help. + +A riot ensues and you've accomplished your mission. The remaining soldiers are quickly overwhelmed and those that aren't manage to run off. You could easily catch up with them, but you figure Kane will show up quicker if someone's alive to talk about what happened. While the celebrating is going on, you take the opportunity to slip away before someone holds you up as some sort of hero when you really aren't. This is all just a means to an end to you. + +Your escape back into the wilderness isn't completely unnoticed though and you draw your weapon again when you sense yourself being followed. + +"Alright I know somebody is following me…shadowing me even. Might as well come out now so we can get this over with because no cloak is going to help hide you." + +A lone shadow materializes. To your surprise it's Brother Gannon. He's little older now and a lot more worn looking, almost beaten. He has no intention of trying to kill you. + +"Did you have to do that? That place was one of the few towns left that was still able to sneak supplies to us! When Kane finds out what happened he's going to destroy the place! We're suffering from a lack of supplies and allies as it is!" he exclaims. +"Yeah? Well maybe if Cyrus was taking a more personal hand in this war like I just did, he'd be inspiring more people to follow him more openly. What the hell happened to him? I've been out here on my own for five fucking years and I've seen nothing but Cyrus make mistake after mistake! Pulling back and attempting to lay low? Losing your orc allies? Not reconnecting with the shadows south of Rask?" +"Actually we did try to do that, but…(sigh) nevermind you're right it's all gone horribly wrong. Master Cyrus' leadership isn't like Master Ebon's. I mean I know he's the one that's guiding us and speaking to Dendrin personally, but his need for control is so uncompromising sometimes. As much as I hate it, I'm actually glad I got assigned to be this town's liaison, anything to be out of that fort! He keeps saying that Dendrin won't let us lose and that final victory will come, but it seems so bleak now. I'm trying to keep the faith, I'm really trying, but…oh why won't Dendrin just hear our prayers and help us now?" + +You shake your head and smile at the delusion that continues to plague the shadows. "Why should he? It's more amusing for him to see you all desperately try to squirm out of your hopeless situation." + +This cynical (yet true) answer is met with a dead silence. Poor Gannon looks so forlorn that he's probably agreeing with you in his head. Gannon might come in useful though so you decide to try to not break his spirit completely. + +"However, MAYBE Dendrin did answer your prayers, namely in the form of me. I probably just bought you all a little more time." You add. +"What? Your big plan to kill Kane? The Butcher of Rask? I heard you down there in the tavern! If Captain Kane even comes he's going to come with a company of elite soldiers not by himself! Besides, Cyrus sent the best shadows against him and he's killed them all! Why do you think you have a chance?" +"Simple. I'm an Eternal and if Cyrus remembered that he was instead some Dendrin worshipping fool, we wouldn't be in this situation now." +"Yeah? Well Sister Talia is one of you Eternals too, she could've done something as well. I don't see you blaming her." + +You grab Gannon by his collar before he can react. You stop yourself from killing him, because you know he's just pissed at his lot in life right now. Not to mention he's got a point. + +"You know what you're right. She could've. It's not really important right now though, what IS important is that we get prepared for Kane's arrival." +"We?" +"Oh yes. You want to help turn things around, you'll help me." +"How?" + +How is a good question. The easiest way is to have him help you organize the townsfolk so that they can at least put up a good fight against the soldiers while you take care of Kane. + +The long shot would be to send him back to Fort Destiny to explain your plan and hope he can convince the shadows to come help you. It's a gamble, but maybe Cyrus hates the Empire just a little more than he hates you. +> Keep Gannon with you +Cyrus isn’t likely to help you no matter what so the most help you’re going to get is Gannon and while that won’t be much it’ll be better than nothing. + +“Gannon I want you to go back to the town and do what you shadows are supposed to be doing, stirring up the people and getting them organized.” +“What? I’m not doing that! When the Empire army arrives with or without Kane, the whole place is going to get leveled anyway!” +“Look you either help me now and have a chance to make a difference or return to Cyrus and try to explain why you aren’t at your post. I’m pretty sure he’ll be able to sense if you’re lying given how nervous you constantly are. Now what’s it going to be?” +“Oh alright I’ll help, but we’re all dead men anyway!” +“Really need to work on that confidence Gannon. Maybe you should pray to Dendrin for some.” + +And with those words you head back to your campsite to get prepared. You check up on the town the next day and see they’re already starting to barricade the place. Gannon’s even taking a bit of a leadership role. If they’re lucky, you figure they’ll only lose about a half of the town before the battle is over. A couple days later you scout a little further south of Volgst and that’s when you see a large group of soldiers approaching. Several on horseback, many more on foot and unfortunately a single catapult as well. If Kane is actually with them, you’d guess he’d be on horseback, but then you can’t tell at this distance. + +You find a good elevated spot in some trees and when the mass of troops get in range you do a little sniping with your bow which you’ve gotten a lot better with over these past five years thanks to your need to hunt on a regular basis (And certainly a lot better than your single shot armbow which you practically never use anymore) You fire at the ones on horseback first, you don’t get Kane, but you do find out he’s the one that starts shouting the loudest about getting that sniping sonofabitch. Turns out he was walking the entire time. You try to aim for him, but now the chaos is so great within ranks that he wisely takes advantage of getting lost in the mass. + +Doesn’t take long before they figure out where it’s coming from and start responding in kind. You immediately dash from your position and retreat deeper into the wilderness. A group of soldiers are sent to look for you though you dispatch them with relative ease as you use the terrain to your advantage. + +By the time you’re done with the goon squad that was sent after you, the rest of them are hastening their way towards Volgst. You hope Gannon’s done a decent job in rallying the people. + +When you make it back to the outskirts of Volgst, you see that it’s prepared for a frontal assault. You watch from distance for about a half hour before Kane’s company arrives. He doesn’t bother with any sort of diplomacy and orders the catapult to fire. A rock smashes through the barricades and the make shift wall that was set up in front of the town. They’re wide open for the Empire troops to pour in now, with the Butcher leading the way. + +You make your way towards town and jump into the battle, which naturally isn’t going well for the citizens of Volgst. When you arrive it gets a little better, but even you can’t stop the carnage and what will probably be the utter destruction of Volgst. You haven’t seen Gannon at all, he’s either dead already or more likely the coward’s run off. Right now though all you’re trying to do is seek out Kane and kill him. + +And as luck would have it, you bump into him, or rather the pair of you catch sight of each other in the middle of the chaos. He doesn’t dodge you or even make any sort of threatening war cry, he just walks straight towards you and you to him. + +When he stands before you, he certainly displays the signs of a battle-hardened warrior, but there’s something more to it than just his size, armor and scars. It’s his eyes. Not like a hate filled wrath behind them, but more like he’s experienced something that’s caused the light in them to go out. Almost soulless. + +“The Butcher of Rask, himself. At last we meet.” You say. +“Yes, and you would be the shadow outcast and it will be a pleasure to finally bring you to the Emperor’s justice that you’ve evaded for so long.” +“Hmm, guess you better get to it then.” + +Kane swings his axe, which you dodge and the battle is joined. + +“You’re weak. You cannot hope to win this battle.” He says preparing for another swing. +“Right now, just getting rid of you will be sufficient.” You reply. +“You think you can best me? This isn’t Mistress’ class anymore and you’re no Eternal. When I look at you, I see the mockery of what is supposed to be an Eternal. You’re not even a shadow. You are a pariah that has no honor at all. You’re part of the sickness that has infected the Empire. A sickness that will be cut out and purified like all others.” + +While Kane tells you what he really thinks about you, he’s also matching you in combat skills. To be quite honest you might’ve been a little too over confident in your abilities because he’s really putting you to the test. It doesn’t help that in the midst of this one on one fight you also have to dodge other attacks. You use a little shadow magic to speed yourself up and it helps, but it isn’t nearly as strong as it once was not to mention you feel the drain a lot quicker. You land a couple of good hits on Kane before you have to stop from fatigue. Kane however has no such problems and isn’t slowed at all by his wounds + +“Is that the extent of your precious shadow magic outcast? No wonder you were kicked out.” Kane says and catches you with a glancing blow across your chest followed by a hefty to your left knee, which causes you to lose balance and fall. You barely roll of the way of his next swing. + +You stagger back up only to get your sword knocked out of your hand when you attempt to block another of Kane’s axe blows. Becoming desperate you fire your armbow and a bolt flies into Kanes chest. It doesn’t stop him and he charges into you knocking you back onto the ground. He doesn’t follow up with his axe this time, instead he puts all his crushing weight upon your chest by sitting on it and attempting to choke the life out of you with his own hands. + +“You’re going to die here today, because you believe in nothing and that makes you nothing and when I’m finished choking the life out of your pathetic body I’m going to eat your fucking heart because I can.” Kane at this point pauses with a deranged little smirk. “Heh, maybe one of those wendigo bastards did get to me just a little…” then his face becomes deadly serious again. + +As you struggle to remain conscious all you can see are the souless eyes of Kane looking down upon you as he intends to make good on his threats. You punch him several times in the face to no avail. You even take out one of his eyes and he’s still not deterred as it dangles uselessly from its bloody socket. You’d probably be a lot more scared if you weren’t teetering on passing out. Eventually darkness envelops you and Kane finishes you off with a brutal snap to your neck. + +For what it’s worth he doesn’t eat your heart afterwards.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your main purpose of coming here in the first place was to make sure Talia was safe. You can't leave now without trying to find her or at least her body if she's dead. + +You leave the storage room and decide your best bet would be to keep yourself cloaked the entire time while you search the fortress. You also decide to use spider crawl just to make sure you're really out of sight. + +As you stick to the ceilings of corridors and rooms you survey the carnage of what the Derro have wrought on the shadows. It's almost like they didn't have a chance. You now have to believe that this was why the Empire wasn't attacking Gloom, they had some sort of deal with the Derro to do it for them and since this used to be a Derro home at one time, they probably knew every ancient secret passage and entire layout of it. + +You progressively get more and more discouraged in your search and that's when you hear a voice in your head. Not Dendrin's though, it's distinctly a human one. + +"To…the left and down the hall…hurry…not much time…" you hear Master Ebon say. Lacking any other ideas, you follow his instructions and make your make to his location from where you are. As you do so, you notice there aren't any Derro in this direction, though there are a few dead ones. You're guessing that the rest of their fellows haven't searched this area as much. + +"The door…at the end…hurry…" + +Sensing that there are no Derro in the immediate area, you climb down from the ceiling and prepare to enter the door at the end of the corridor. When you arrive in front of it, you hear a loud click as it opens. + +"Quick, inside!" a brother says pulling you in by the arm roughly. + +A quick glance and you see a couple more shadows both in wounded condition. You then see Master Ebon in some sort of spell trance. He's also wounded, but his status looks a lot worse. He probably shouldn't even be alive with the deep bleeding gashes he displays across his body. A female shadow stands near him also wounded. When you see her face more clearly and recognize her as Talia, your worries are at least divided by half. + +"What are you doing here?" she exclaims. +"I heard the voice of Dendrin and…" in that moment you realize you've just admitted you've heard his voice for the first time. You then realize this isn't the time to keep it a secret and you continue. "…he…uh gave me a warning… are you alright?" +"Just a light wound…wait, you said Dendrin spoke to you? He warned you about the attack?" +"Well, not in so many words. Look we need get out of here, I can explain everything later." + +You then hear Master Ebon's voice again. He still isn't speaking verbally though and is using his mind. + +"Dendrin spoke to you? Lucky lad. He hasn't spoken to me since I first became a shadow. I always thought he would eventually, but he never did. I assumed he was testing me, to make my own decisions. Perhaps I offended him by claiming those decisions came from him directly, but I didn't know what else to do…" +"Master Ebon, we can discuss this later, right now we really need to leave!" +"Is Master Ebon speaking to you through his mind?" Talia asks. +"Yes, and what's he doing anyway? He's just sitting there with gashes in his chest deep enough for me to see his heart beating and bleeding out. As I said we need to leave before the Derro kill us all." + +Master Ebon interrupts you. + +"They've already succeeded in killing me I fear, but I still have powerful magic…enough to save the remainder of you…to carry on the fight…" + +Master Ebon's eyes begin to turn completely black, this is followed by his entire body. A shimmering portal then opens up nearby. + +"This…was to take us to strike at the very heart of the Empire…but now just an escape…to friends. Continue the fight there. The Empire will fall as long as you continue to fight. Dendrin I hope you can forgive my failures as I have served to the best of my abilities…I am ready to enter your realm of shadow if you will allow it…" + +"Master Ebon!" Talia shouts when she sees his body undergo his transformation. +"He can't be helped and he's giving us a chance to escape. We need to take it now!" +"But where is it going?" the shadow that grabbed you by the arm asks. +"He said to friends, but quite frankly it could lead into the middle of an Empire battalion and I think we'd still have better chances! Now come on!" + +Without another word you all enter the portal. Within seconds your eyes are nearly blinded by the whiteness of snow and you feel a blast of cold air whipping around you. + +"DIE! Shadow bastard!" you suddenly hear and turn around just in time to avoid a sword strike to the head. Realizing that this is an Empire soldier and not a Derro, you quickly dispatch your assailant who falls turning the snow red. + +When you said being transported into the middle of an Empire battalion would be a better situation, you didn't actually mean it! Fortunately it isn't quite as bad as all that. + +Getting your bearings you notice you're on a battlefield. The bodies of several Empire troops lay on the ground and are mixed in with those of orcs and shadows. A great fortress looms in the distance. + +"Fort Defiance…" you say to yourself. +"Brother, we're over here!" one of the shadows calls out to you and you run over to the group. (Apparently, all the others teleported to a place out of immediate danger!) + +"Are we in Rask?" the shadow who grabbed you asks. You still don't know his name, you can only guess he was one of the newer recruits after you joined. +"Well it doesn't look like Delurg that's for sure. I'm guessing that group ahead of us fighting the Empire troops are our brothers and sisters from Fort Defiance." Talia says. +"Looks like it, well no time like the present, we need to go help them." +"But what about those two? They're badly wounded and can't fight properly." The new shadow asks. +"(Sigh) Very well, you, what's your name anyway?" +"I'm Brother Gannon. I just joined recently…" +"Yes brother, we can get all that getting to know you stuff out of the way later. I want you to take those two and head over to that fort in the distance. I'm sure they can get help there. What about you Talia, I know you're wounded too, do you need any first aid?" + +Talia draws her weapon. + +"I'll worry about my minor cuts after we take care of this Empire scum." She answers in a harsh tone. +"Okay then let's go down there and drive back the Empire!" you answer back. + +You and Talia sprint as fast as you can to where all the action is taking place. Swords are clashed, halberds are swung, skulls are smashed and heads are severed. Mostly all in your favor and the Empire troops were actually losing even before you got here. Still, it's good to be on a winning side of a fight today and you feel energized by the battle. + +A short reunion occurs as you finish off the last of the stubborn Empire soldiers. + +"What the…? What are you doing here?! I thought you were supposed to be in the Quala province!"Cyrus exclaims running his sword through an enemy. +"Things change brother and how have you been doing?" you answer doing the same. +"We've been getting wave after wave of Empire skirmishers recently, but nothing serious yet. Honestly I would've thought we would've had a full on assault by now. I think they're trying to whittle us down, it won't work though. We're entrenched and have people all over the area slowly turning the population of Rask against them…is that Talia over there? What's SHE doing here? Last I heard she was supposed to be back in Gloom helping with the ritual that Master Ebon and Brother Gray were doing." +"Like I said, things change Cyrus." + +At this moment there is a lull in the fighting that allows Cyrus to actually stop fighting. He looks at you his expression is one you've never seen before. One of genuine worry. + +"Oh no…what happened?" + +You don't even know where to begin. + +"Cyrus let's just get through this battle and celebrate THIS victory over the Empire. We can dwell on the troubled times to come later." + +The pair of you say nothing more for the rest of the battle which soon ends with your victory. You just wish it was a better one, because it cannot possibly counteract the incredible loss you have suffered this dark day. + +You think back on how you told Murk in his dying breaths that the Empire would fall, you also think back to how Master Ebon believed it would fall in his on dying breaths. If you had to guess, you think Talia probably still believes it and you know Cyrus will even when you tell him all that has happened. The righteousness in the shadows' cause and its unwavering faith in Dendrin has always been its strength that it cannot lose no matter how bad the odds. + +Of course it would help if you actually believed all that nonsense. + +Which brings you to your next dilemma: You already let it slip to Talia that you spoke to Dendrin and Brother Gannon was also there to hear it (and maybe even the other two wounded shadows heard it as well) , so it'll probably be brought up after everyone is caught up to speed on the war front and what happened at Gloom. The fact that Dendrin spoke to you is actually why you're here in the first place. + +The question is should you even mention what Dendrin said to you or just lie about what he said? Your own feelings on the situation are that Dendrin, god or not, is not worth following let alone creating a fanatical religion around. He obviously doesn't give a shit about any of you and sees you all as amusing toys at best. However, given the grim situation, the misguided slavish devotion to Dendrin might be the only thing that'll keep their spirits up. Not to mention you wonder if you'd even be believed. Cyrus himself is a very dedicated believer, he may even turn violent and you aren't even sure if Talia would believe you. +> Don't address it +If this war against the Empire is going to succeed on any level, the unity and upkeep of morale must be there. You’re not going to destroy those things at such a fragile time, even if you do know that Dendrin’s opinion of the shadows hasn’t been high in a long time. Besides, you’ve paid lip service to the lie this long, you can do it a little longer. You have to, no matter how much you don’t like it. + +After Cyrus catches you up on the situation at Rask, you and Talia tell him what happened at Gloom. Talia fills in the details better since she was actually there. Cyrus seems a little distraught at hearing so many shadows dying never mind losing the shadow home, but he doesn't seem broken in his goals to continue to fight the Empire. + +"It doesn't matter, we've still got agents in the Quala province and other places. Once we reconnect with the various cells we can regroup. We need to tell the others here though now, the sooner we get this information out the way the quicker they can deal with the loss. The Empire is desperate and we'll overcome whatever else they decide to throw at us because Dendrin will see us to victory." +“Indeed he will. I know its why he warned me to go back to Gloom and help who I could there.” You respond. + +Cyrus looks at you as if he’s unsure of how to take your claim. + +“Yes, so you mentioned before in how you even knew about Gloom. Are you sure it was Dendrin and just not perhaps some sort of instinct? We are all shadows after all and we do have a bond.” +“There can be no mistake, Dendrin spoke to me and warned me in a dream. Even Master Ebon believed me in his final moments.” +“It’s true, he did.” Talia says. +“Forgive me brother, it’s not that I meant to call you a liar, it’s just I would’ve thought if Gloom was in danger that he would’ve spoken directly to Master Ebon about it or any other shadow at Gloom, like Sister Talia. +“I cannot know the will of Dendrin brother, I can only follow the way he guides me.” You answer. + +Cyrus nods at you answer as if to acknowledge that it satisfies him. + +“True brother. Well, I suppose maybe this was all part of Dendrin’s great plan. I mean not to speak ill of Master Ebon as he was a great man, but perhaps Dendrin saw that he wasn’t the one to lead the shadows into the next era. Perhaps it was meant to be that a new leader take charge.” +“Oh? And who do you think that leader is?” you ask. +“I don’t know, but I’m sure Dendrin will pick the next Master when the time is right. In the meantime I think that we three should pick up the leadership slack.” Cyrus answers. +“Yes, I agree.” + +After you agree, Cyrus excuses himself saying that he should break this news to everyone else. When he leaves it gives you and Talia a chance to speak. + +“Thanks for backing me up, I don’t think Cyrus really believed my claim.” +“No problem, but I don’t see why he wouldn’t, I mean it makes perfect sense that Dendrin would warn you about Gloom. As I have often said, we may be shadows and devoted to Dendrin, but we’re also Eternals and are better qualified to lead. Perhaps Cyrus is right and Dendrin sees that as well. I heard Master Ebon when he said Dendrin never spoke to him. It’s obvious that he was never truly meant to lead the shadows.” +“Maybe, but personally I’m just glad I got to you in time.” + +Talia smiles and moves closer to kiss you. With all that’s gone on today, you just enjoy the moment. + +In the weeks to come, the three of you are taking steps to regroup the shadows and the rebellion in general. Despite some of his earlier claims of reconnecting with shadows south of Rask, Cyrus doesn’t seem to put much effort in to it and focuses his attention mostly on consolidating power in Rask. Cyrus claims that if you get enough support pushing the Empire entirely out of Rask would follow and then you could get so entrenched that the Empire would never be able to take back the province. + +While that’s a not a bad idea, you believe it would ultimately be folly to only focus on such a plan. The Empire can’t be allowed to mop up the rest of the rebellion in other places. They need to have their attention and forces divided as much as possible. Cyrus of course feels it would be a waste of time to continue supporting the rebellion in other places and would only weaken your position in Rask overall. When Talia points out that it’s not just rebels, but fellow shadows that need help, Cyrus relents a bit, but he still doesn’t seem to eager to send people. + +So you take it upon yourself to reconnect with the other shadow cells. You tell Talia, that she should stay to help Cyrus since you can easily do it on your own and that Cyrus wants all the help he can get consolidating power in Rask. + +What you don’t tell her is that you’d like somebody in Rask to keep an eye on things since Cyrus is starting to act a little sketchy. You figure that if Cyrus is up to something, Talia will no doubt inform you. + +After a few months you manage to make contact with most of the shadow cells and get them regrouped to do the maximum amount of chaos. You were glad to find that Sister Yvette has been leading well in your absence. Her and another shadow cell leader, Brother Theo have joined together and have been doing their best in creating trouble for the Empire. After your new orders and some encouraging words about how Dendrin will still see the shadows to victory, you assign them both to be your “go to” shadows as far as rebellion operations outside of Rask are concerned. + +In the meantime, Talia has been attempting to fix the allied relationship with the orcs at Rask. The orc leader Captain Gruz still hasn’t been heard from, so it is assumed that he was found out and executed. The orc liaison Flog at this point has declared himself leader and is increasingly feeling underappreciated mainly because Cyrus has been more or less treating the orcs as battle fodder, which is exactly how the Empire was treating them. Not a great idea especially since he’s big on the whole idea of getting enough support to drive the Empire out of Rask. + +On the outside, Cyrus is supportive and even friendly at times towards you when you’re actually in his presence. Talia says other than what you’ve noticed, he hasn’t acted strange in any way. Cyrus has just been focused on stirring up more dissent in Rask, but you get the strong impression he’s plotting something more. You just don’t exactly know what it is yet, but you imagine you’ll find out eventually. + +Hopefully it won’t involve killing him because you didn’t fake your devotion to Dendrin just to have the shadows torn apart by a petty power grab. + +If it wasn’t for Talia, you’d be half tempted to just let it all fall into ruin at this point, but you’ll see this through for now. +> Years pass… +Year 30 + +“No, I say we take all of our resources and make a forward push on Fort Destiny. We can hit Captain Kane from the north and from the south.” Cyrus says. +“And I’m telling you that we can’t do that. Our people aren’t grouped together on the southern Rask border ready to strike, they’re scattered all over the place and that’s how they should remain! I keep telling you this, besides I’ve got a better plan for the shadow cells in the Quala province.” You remark. +“Brothers, this yelling isn’t helping.” Talia sighs. + +Another typical day on the “Shadow Council”, you and Cyrus arguing, with Talia stuck in the middle. You really wish that wasn’t the case, but it is just inevitable that you and Cyrus are going to always disagree on something. You don’t even know why you bother meeting to discuss battle plans nowadays, what usually happens is a bunch of arguing like this and then you both go off and do your own thing. This hasn’t really been a problem in the past mainly because your plans are all outside of Rask, while Cyrus’ plans are always within Rask so they never conflict for the most part. Also, the Empire’s attention was divided due to their war with the Felkan Kingdom. + +However things have changed. The Empire recently signed a non-agression pact with the Felkan Kingdom meaning they’ve been able to focus a hell of a lot better on the rebellion. You need to do something to swing the tide in your favor before they begin to gather enough momentum to roll right over you. + +Cyrus’ plan is the one he’s been endorsing for years. Consolidate Rask and drive out the Empire from it completely. As the war has raged on over the years this has been done for the most part. The only thing that really stands in the way are a few of the loyalist border towns and Captain Kane in Fort Destiny. The problem is that’s still a big obstacle to get over and a major assault would result in considerable losses. + +Cyrus has in the past sent groups of shadows to assassinate Captain Kane, but so far all attempts have failed. Kane’s reputation as the “Butcher of Rask” isn’t just for show and him being a battle hardened Eternal means he’s more than a match even for the average shadow. Cyrus probably would’ve sent more, but Talia convinced him that it was just pointlessly sending shadows to their deaths. You didn’t necessarily think the idea was without promise, but you suggested that an assassination attempt might work if you, Talia and Cyrus actually did it since you feel that you’d have the skill to pull it off, but Cyrus dismissed that idea, claiming that Talia is right and that assassination should be taken off the table. + +So a major assault it is, of course this is why Cyrus wants you to gather all of your shadow cells outside of Rask and have them attack from the south in a classic pincer maneuver. It would probably work, but you’d still have heavy losses especially those attacking from the south since the Empire could redeploy reinforcements early enough that your forces could be caught in the middle too. + +You imagine this idea would appeal to Cyrus since then options would be limited to just focusing on Rask and you wouldn’t have any forces at all anymore. You get the impression that when the Empire is finally defeated Cyrus has major plans for Rask given how badly he wants to focus on it. Perhaps he has some long-range goal of starting his own “empire.” However, he’s still short sighted as far as your concerned because even if you went along with his plan, it would just hold off the Empire a few extra years and wouldn’t stop them from taking back Rask given the new information you’ve received from your contacts. + +The Empire has been breeding new Eternals, the number is unknown, but it’s apparently enough to create an army of them. They’re not “ready” yet, but in a few more years they soon will be and if that happens you might not be able to stop them if the Empire unleashed them on Rask. However, you’ve received the information of where this new Eternal training camp is which is a remote location in the Quala province close to the Arat border. The only other information you have on the place is that the main complex appears to be underground since children. The place doesn’t appear to be heavily guarded up top, but who knows what security is like down below. Considering magic is involved in creating Eternals, it’s a sure bet that there are going to be wizard types about. + +Your plan is to destroy this place by leading a small group of the most skilled shadows you have. While this is going on, your other cells will strike out at vital areas in the Empire at the same time to keep them from immediately sending out reinforcements to the camp. You actually wouldn’t mind Cyrus to come with you since he is a skilled fighter, but you aren’t even going to ask since you know what his answer will be. Cyrus doesn’t even believe that it’s a top priority and claims that if Rask is liberated then you can attack the camp later since these new Eternals still won’t be battle ready for a while. + +If you go off and do your own thing, your concern is that Cyrus is going to do the same thing and get everyone under his command killed in his attempt to take Fort Destiny. Of course if you help him you’re left with the same problem that it’s very probable that your shadow cells are going to get hit pretty hard during the assault on Fort Destiny and Cyrus won’t actually lend any help when you want to destroy the new Eternal camp. + +There’s also the issue that you’re trying to maintain the unity as always. Cyrus is really pushing for this assault on Fort Destiny and doing your own thing this time might be the “last straw” and the last thing you need is to do is start a shadow civil war. + +After a lot more arguing, everyone decides to call it a day and make a decision tomorrow. Talia as always says she’ll side with whatever you decide, but would prefer if you and Cyrus actually worked together for once. That doesn’t exactly help you and you have a hard time sleeping. When you finally do get to sleep you still don’t get any rest… + +“So what are you going to do Eternal? You and Cyrus continue to clash and it’s only a matter of time before things between you are going to end badly.” Dendrin remarks. +“Doesn’t take a god to figure that one out.” You say. +“Yes, but it takes a fool to blatantly ignore the obvious. By continuing to not support Cyrus’ you’re just driving a wedge deeper in the shadow organization that will eventually split you in two. Something I thought you were trying to avoid given that you made such an effort to keep it together.” +“Well someone had to, because you certainly weren’t doing it.” +“I’m not here to hold the collective hands of the shadows. As I’ve said, I’ve done that already and it was a boring experience. Besides you seem to be enjoying your new leadership role, who am I to take it away from you?” +“I’m not leader of the shadows, I’m….” +“Nonsense! You ARE leader of the shadows. Perhaps you’re currently sharing that duty with your Eternal peers, but you’re clearly the strongest of that group. Talia certainly has potential, but her blind devotion to certain things is her weakness. It clouds her judgement.” +“So she’s not worthy because she’s so loyal to you?” +“Not just me, but to you as well. It doesn’t occur to her in the slightest that you’re keeping secrets or lying to her about your real feelings on the shadows. She just believes you, just like she misguidedly believes that one day she’ll have eternal shadow babies with you.” +“Wait, she can’t have kids?” +“No and neither can you. Neither can Cyrus for that matter, though I doubt it that’s ever going to come up with him. Don’t ask me why you can’t, I don’t know. I can only imagine it has something to do with how they magically altered you Eternals back in the labs. I’m not a fertility god either, so her constant praying to me isn’t going to help.” + +This sudden news does explain a few things. You’re going to have to inform Talia of this at some point, you just don’t know when would be the best time. Yet another thing for you worry about. + +Dendrin continues his speech + +“And for all of Cyrus’ bluster of being a shadow he obviously lacks as a good leader. I dare say if you weren’t around, the Empire would be on the verge of driving the shadows to extinction right now. He may be better liked than you, but even that’s starting to change and it certainly doesn’t hold true for any shadow not stationed in your little fort. You’ve got allies and support in places other than Rask, Cyrus doesn’t and it worries him. After all it’s well known now that you were the one that heard my warning about Gloom and attempted to save who you could.” +“You didn’t warn me, you gave a cryptic comment and it wasn’t even one that urged me to return to Gloom. I just told everyone you did.” +“See, lying to the rest of the shadows about something I didn’t actually say. You’re already doing a great job of following the traditions of shadow leaders!” Dendrin laughs. + +Is Dendrin mocking you, is he encouraging you, is it both? You can never quite tell. + +“So what are you saying? Are you officially appointing me as the new leader of the shadows?” +“Official? Since when have you known me to be so formal? And I’m not appointing you as anything; you don’t even have faith in me anyway, but if you really want to be in charge just do it already. I’d be careful though, that Cyrus fellow might get the same idea someday soon and I suppose you’ll need to decide if the expense of your own ambition is worth keeping the shadows together.” + +Once again after Dendrin’s little mind games you wake up. Whether Dendrin’s encouraging you or not, you’re going through with you plan and if that hurts Cyrus’ fragile ego then you’ll deal with it later, because the Empire is still a bigger threat right now. + +The next day you tell Talia that you’re going through with your plan. + +“I figured you would, but you know Brother Cyrus isn’t going to be happy about this.” +“Brother Cyrus needs to realize that Rask isn’t only front we’re fighting the Empire on and get over it.” +“Yes, I know. (Sigh) Well I’ll try to keep things stable here while you’re gone. Hopefully I can convince him that now is not a good time to assault Fort Destiny.” +“No, I’d rather you join me on this mission. I could use all the powerful shadows I can get, because I’m certainly not going to be able to get any other shadows to join me from here.” +“You want me to go? I mean of course I’ll go with you, but aren’t you worried about what might happen here if I don’t stay to help look after things?” + +While Talia would certainly be a great asset to your mission, but she also serves as a bit of a counter balance to Cyrus when you’re not around. +> Have Talia go with you +As much as it might be wise to have Talia keep Cyrus in check, you’d rather her come with you on this mission, as you’ll need all the skilled help you can get. Talia’s shadow magic is certainly more powerful than your own, even though you’ve found in recent years that yours isn’t weak as it once was. + +When the pair of you confront Cyrus, he’s predictably furious claiming that the pair of you are wasting time and not following Dendrin’s plan like you should be. He goes on about how the attack on Fort Destiny should take top priority. You don’t bother arguing, it’s all been said before and if he wants to do anything about it, then he can try to stop you. He doesn’t of course, but there’s definitely a hostile glare as you leave. + +“You think he’ll go ahead with his attack anyway?” Talia asks. +“If he does, I can only hope he’s as determined to drive the Empire out of Rask like he seems to be because that raw desire might just win him through the day. Anyway we’ll deal with it after this mission.” + +Talia and you travel a couple of days to the Quala province and eventually reach the meeting spot at night. There await around twenty shadows you picked which also includes Sister Yvette. You would’ve picked Brother Theo as well, but you needed someone to coordinate the other shadow cells in Quala. + +“As soon as I got the message that you were coming, our other shadow cells got into position to strike out at the other targets across Quala. I assume you’re ready to assault the camp brother?” Sister Yvette asks nearly as soon as you arrive. +“Yes, let’s get this over with, because this is going to be pretty grim business. Now I know some of you have already done a few necessary things, but probably not on this scale. These new eternals are only going to be children, and if the rumors are true, hundreds of them. Despite this they will still be dangerous, as they have no doubt gone through some of the Empire’s brainwashing techniques and training. You are not to hesitate just because they are young. Slay all of them…for Dendrin.” You add at the end. +“For Dendrin!” the rest of the shadows say in unison. +“Also be aware that there will no doubt be battle mages around and who knows what else. Let’s try to do this as silently as possible until it’s no longer an option. Everybody cloak.” + +Sister Yvette and couple of the other shadows take the lead due to their basic knowledge of the outside of the camp and even some of the interior. When you have to go below ground though, it’s going to be anything goes. You know going in that you’ll be severely outnumbered, but the whole point of doing it this way is to utilize your strengths which is stealth and terror on a grand scale. Something Cyrus doesn’t really get despite his dedication to Dendrin. + +Neck snaps, bolts to the head and blades to the back dispatch the patrolling soldiers quietly and quickly. You then move from bunkhouse to bunkhouse slitting the throats of the sleeping soldiers inside. With everyone up top dead, it’s time to descend into the underground. + +“I’ll take the lead for this.” You remark. “Everyone remember, we’ve got a lot of killing tonight, there’s A LOT of these new eternals. Try not to speed yourself up unless it’s necessary. You don’t want to exhaust yourself prematurely. In fact save the magic for just cloaking if possible, we’re still going to try this the stealthy way.” + +You make your way through the underground complex, which is very well made. In fact the solid stonewalls remind you of Gloom…and that might not be a good thing. + +“Where do you think they’re keeping these new eternals?” Talia asks. +“I don’t know, they have to be around though. I mean I’m a little surprised that they’d all be asleep. As I remember our training we didn’t get much of that and were even woken up in the middle of the night to perform tasks.” You reply. +“True, I can still remember Mistress’ domineering voice commanding that we all wake up followed by a whip crack…maybe she’s not in charge anymore?” +“I hope she is, I’d like to repay that bitch while we’re here.” You remark. +“You don’t think they moved everyone out do you?” Talia asks. +“We’ve been watching this place for a few months now and just yesterday I saw a large group of those new eternals training up top. I don’t see how they could’ve moved them all so quickly without us noticing.” Yvette answers +“We are underground, who knows maybe they’ve got escape tunnels. (Sigh) Shit, I really hope that isn’t the case, because I’m already concerned with the architecture of this place.” You say. +“What do you mean?” +“The walls, the archways, doesn’t it look a little familiar? Like Gloom right? And who originally made Gloom?” +“…the Derro.” Talia says. +“Exactly and while I was expecting battle mages or elite guards, I wasn’t expecting those little armored juggernauts on legs. Okay fine, we’ll deal with it, we just need to decide on what to do next.” + +Your comment is met with silence, mainly because everyone figures that you’re the one to come up with the plan on what to do next. + +“Everyone stay here, Talia and I will scout ahead a little bit then come back with a plan.” You say. + +You and Talia continue down one of the corridors hoping to find something, almost anything really and that’s when you finally stumble upon an argument between a derro and a mage at the far end of the corridor. The pair of them don’t sense either of you, but there’s no reason to be foolish, you and Talia quickly get out of their possible line of sight and you listen for a moment. + +“When the hell are you dwarves going to start harvesting those trolls? I want to get on with the enchantment process!” a disheveled looking mage with a scraggly beard says. +“When Marik’s done brewing the last batch of regeneration serum. No point in doing it until then and I’d remind you to watch your words with me wizard.” A short figure in heavy armor remarks in a very deep tone. This is the first you’ve ever heard a derro speak common before, you don’t know if that’s his voice or his armor causing it to sound like that. +“Watch my words? I’ll do as I please! I don’t even want to be here with you rock eaters! Your boss is a mad man that barely knows what he’s doing. I swear we were better off with svelk mercenaries as trainers.” +“I’m not surprised you would praise such a decadent race as your own race is decadent as well. You are lucky to even have us as allies due to a pact, now I suggest you go back to your quarters where the rest of your kind may play with your magic lights until you’re called upon to actually do something useful for a change. Do not speak with us again until such time.” + +The wizard nearly says something, but decides not to and storms off in one direction while the derro warrior walks off in the other. + +“Well if that’s any indication we know where the wizards are and we know where the derro are.” Talia says. +“Yeah, but where the hell are the eternals?” +“Perhaps we’ll find them after we dispatch those two groups first?” +“I sure hope so.” +“We probably should split up the group and tackle them at the same time, because I’m sure we won’t remain stealthy for too long while fighting either group and we certainly don’t want the other to come running and attack us from behind when they hear the sounds of battle.” + +As far as you can tell magic isn’t all that effective on the derro and while Talia’s an excellent fighter, her superior magic skills would probably be more effective eliminating the mages. You tell her that you’ll take on the derro and to go get the rest of the group. + +After retrieving the rest of the group, you and Talia part company. Yvette goes off with Talia as well. You’re confident that they’ll easily succeed in their task, you’re a little more concerned with how you’re going to accomplish yours though especially if it turns out to be a lot of derro. + +Your groups heads off in the direction that you saw the derro walking towards. Doesn’t take long for you to start seeing a few of them milling about in the hallways and side rooms. None of the shadows in your group have ever faced the derro before, they’ve just heard the stories of how they destroyed Gloom. Naturally they want revenge. + +“We’re not attacking them yet. We’ll find a better way… Dendrin always provides a better way.” You say which calms them down. You can’t believe how effectively either. It’s a little unsettling to control a group with just the mere mention of a name, but that’s how shadow masters have been doing it for centuries you suppose. + +Your group takes to spider walking on the ceilings to avoid the derro, It worked back in Gloom and it works here too. As you creep through, you can hear rumbling and monstrous growling followed by shouting in the derro’s language. You follow sound and eventually you reach a large lab area filled with contraptions, a lot of alchemy equipment and several metal boxes of what you would guess to contain very angry trolls. From their growling they sound as horrible as the stories you’ve heard. You’ve also heard how strong they were too; whatever the derro got them locked up in must be some very strong material because you can see several punch marks even from this distance. + +Several derro warriors stand near the boxes with weapons ready, a few more are standing guard at strategic areas. In the center of all this is another small figure, but this one isn’t armored. He’s bald with a gray skin color and dressed in a white robe of some sort, which is covered in blood, and several other unidentifiable fluids. He’s frantically going back and forth to several tables with mutilated bodies on them, waving a sharp knife in his hand all the while yelling in his language. You’re guessing that’s what one of these derro really looks like. Certainly less impressive. + +You have no idea what exactly is going on here and what it has to do with the new eternals, but you need to attack the derro fast before Talia attacks the mages and causes enough noise for some of the derro to investigate it. + +You suppose you and the rest could just drop down from the ceiling in a surprise attack, speed yourself up and hope for the best, but circumstances have given you something else to work with. + +It’s a simple magic trick that most shadows take for granted, in fact most never really appreciate its uses and that spell is one that unlocks regular locks which the derro have seen fit to use on the boxes they’re holding the trolls in. If you did that, you could unleash the trolls on the derro, of course the problem with that plan is you’ve never faced trolls before and they could be ten times worse than the derro. Not to mention you’d have to deal with both groups. +> Drop down for a sneak attack +Not wishing to add a third unknown element to the fray you decide to just deal with the derro. You signal to your group to speed yourselves up and jump down for the attack. + +The derro are surprised at first and due to your unnatural speed, your group actually manages to bring a couple down due to ganging up on them. The problem is you’re outnumbered and despite your speed, your weapons are largely still not very effective on them in one on one combat. It doesn’t help that the derro begin to haphazardly lob their firebomb weapons in order to stop the shadows from zipping around all over the place. It’s sloppy, but effective as you see several of your fellows get caught in the blasts. The derro on the other hand are mostly protected by their heavy armor. + +You see the unarmored derro run away to a locked door on the far side of the room, and just when he manages to open it; you shoot him in the back with your armbow, which causes him to collapse to the floor. You don’t know where he’s trying to go, but he’s not getting far. + +Unfortunately neither are you as a firebomb lands right near your feet and explodes. You feel the impact and the burning as you go flying in the air. Your death comes quickly when your burning body lands wrong and breaks your neck.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As much as it might be wise to have Talia keep Cyrus in check, you’d rather her come with you on this mission, as you’ll need all the skilled help you can get. Talia’s shadow magic is certainly more powerful than your own, even though you’ve found in recent years that yours isn’t weak as it once was. + +When the pair of you confront Cyrus, he’s predictably furious claiming that the pair of you are wasting time and not following Dendrin’s plan like you should be. He goes on about how the attack on Fort Destiny should take top priority. You don’t bother arguing, it’s all been said before and if he wants to do anything about it, then he can try to stop you. He doesn’t of course, but there’s definitely a hostile glare as you leave. + +“You think he’ll go ahead with his attack anyway?” Talia asks. +“If he does, I can only hope he’s as determined to drive the Empire out of Rask like he seems to be because that raw desire might just win him through the day. Anyway we’ll deal with it after this mission.” + +Talia and you travel a couple of days to the Quala province and eventually reach the meeting spot at night. There await around twenty shadows you picked which also includes Sister Yvette. You would’ve picked Brother Theo as well, but you needed someone to coordinate the other shadow cells in Quala. + +“As soon as I got the message that you were coming, our other shadow cells got into position to strike out at the other targets across Quala. I assume you’re ready to assault the camp brother?” Sister Yvette asks nearly as soon as you arrive. +“Yes, let’s get this over with, because this is going to be pretty grim business. Now I know some of you have already done a few necessary things, but probably not on this scale. These new eternals are only going to be children, and if the rumors are true, hundreds of them. Despite this they will still be dangerous, as they have no doubt gone through some of the Empire’s brainwashing techniques and training. You are not to hesitate just because they are young. Slay all of them…for Dendrin.” You add at the end. +“For Dendrin!” the rest of the shadows say in unison. +“Also be aware that there will no doubt be battle mages around and who knows what else. Let’s try to do this as silently as possible until it’s no longer an option. Everybody cloak.” + +Sister Yvette and couple of the other shadows take the lead due to their basic knowledge of the outside of the camp and even some of the interior. When you have to go below ground though, it’s going to be anything goes. You know going in that you’ll be severely outnumbered, but the whole point of doing it this way is to utilize your strengths which is stealth and terror on a grand scale. Something Cyrus doesn’t really get despite his dedication to Dendrin. + +Neck snaps, bolts to the head and blades to the back dispatch the patrolling soldiers quietly and quickly. You then move from bunkhouse to bunkhouse slitting the throats of the sleeping soldiers inside. With everyone up top dead, it’s time to descend into the underground. + +“I’ll take the lead for this.” You remark. “Everyone remember, we’ve got a lot of killing tonight, there’s A LOT of these new eternals. Try not to speed yourself up unless it’s necessary. You don’t want to exhaust yourself prematurely. In fact save the magic for just cloaking if possible, we’re still going to try this the stealthy way.” + +You make your way through the underground complex, which is very well made. In fact the solid stonewalls remind you of Gloom…and that might not be a good thing. + +“Where do you think they’re keeping these new eternals?” Talia asks. +“I don’t know, they have to be around though. I mean I’m a little surprised that they’d all be asleep. As I remember our training we didn’t get much of that and were even woken up in the middle of the night to perform tasks.” You reply. +“True, I can still remember Mistress’ domineering voice commanding that we all wake up followed by a whip crack…maybe she’s not in charge anymore?” +“I hope she is, I’d like to repay that bitch while we’re here.” You remark. +“You don’t think they moved everyone out do you?” Talia asks. +“We’ve been watching this place for a few months now and just yesterday I saw a large group of those new eternals training up top. I don’t see how they could’ve moved them all so quickly without us noticing.” Yvette answers +“We are underground, who knows maybe they’ve got escape tunnels. (Sigh) Shit, I really hope that isn’t the case, because I’m already concerned with the architecture of this place.” You say. +“What do you mean?” +“The walls, the archways, doesn’t it look a little familiar? Like Gloom right? And who originally made Gloom?” +“…the Derro.” Talia says. +“Exactly and while I was expecting battle mages or elite guards, I wasn’t expecting those little armored juggernauts on legs. Okay fine, we’ll deal with it, we just need to decide on what to do next.” + +Your comment is met with silence, mainly because everyone figures that you’re the one to come up with the plan on what to do next. + +“Everyone stay here, Talia and I will scout ahead a little bit then come back with a plan.” You say. + +You and Talia continue down one of the corridors hoping to find something, almost anything really and that’s when you finally stumble upon an argument between a derro and a mage at the far end of the corridor. The pair of them don’t sense either of you, but there’s no reason to be foolish, you and Talia quickly get out of their possible line of sight and you listen for a moment. + +“When the hell are you dwarves going to start harvesting those trolls? I want to get on with the enchantment process!” a disheveled looking mage with a scraggly beard says. +“When Marik’s done brewing the last batch of regeneration serum. No point in doing it until then and I’d remind you to watch your words with me wizard.” A short figure in heavy armor remarks in a very deep tone. This is the first you’ve ever heard a derro speak common before, you don’t know if that’s his voice or his armor causing it to sound like that. +“Watch my words? I’ll do as I please! I don’t even want to be here with you rock eaters! Your boss is a mad man that barely knows what he’s doing. I swear we were better off with svelk mercenaries as trainers.” +“I’m not surprised you would praise such a decadent race as your own race is decadent as well. You are lucky to even have us as allies due to a pact, now I suggest you go back to your quarters where the rest of your kind may play with your magic lights until you’re called upon to actually do something useful for a change. Do not speak with us again until such time.” + +The wizard nearly says something, but decides not to and storms off in one direction while the derro warrior walks off in the other. + +“Well if that’s any indication we know where the wizards are and we know where the derro are.” Talia says. +“Yeah, but where the hell are the eternals?” +“Perhaps we’ll find them after we dispatch those two groups first?” +“I sure hope so.” +“We probably should split up the group and tackle them at the same time, because I’m sure we won’t remain stealthy for too long while fighting either group and we certainly don’t want the other to come running and attack us from behind when they hear the sounds of battle.” + +As far as you can tell magic isn’t all that effective on the derro and while Talia’s an excellent fighter, her superior magic skills would probably be more effective eliminating the mages. You tell her that you’ll take on the derro and to go get the rest of the group. + +After retrieving the rest of the group, you and Talia part company. Yvette goes off with Talia as well. You’re confident that they’ll easily succeed in their task, you’re a little more concerned with how you’re going to accomplish yours though especially if it turns out to be a lot of derro. + +Your groups heads off in the direction that you saw the derro walking towards. Doesn’t take long for you to start seeing a few of them milling about in the hallways and side rooms. None of the shadows in your group have ever faced the derro before, they’ve just heard the stories of how they destroyed Gloom. Naturally they want revenge. + +“We’re not attacking them yet. We’ll find a better way… Dendrin always provides a better way.” You say which calms them down. You can’t believe how effectively either. It’s a little unsettling to control a group with just the mere mention of a name, but that’s how shadow masters have been doing it for centuries you suppose. + +Your group takes to spider walking on the ceilings to avoid the derro, It worked back in Gloom and it works here too. As you creep through, you can hear rumbling and monstrous growling followed by shouting in the derro’s language. You follow sound and eventually you reach a large lab area filled with contraptions, a lot of alchemy equipment and several metal boxes of what you would guess to contain very angry trolls. From their growling they sound as horrible as the stories you’ve heard. You’ve also heard how strong they were too; whatever the derro got them locked up in must be some very strong material because you can see several punch marks even from this distance. + +Several derro warriors stand near the boxes with weapons ready, a few more are standing guard at strategic areas. In the center of all this is another small figure, but this one isn’t armored. He’s bald with a gray skin color and dressed in a white robe of some sort, which is covered in blood, and several other unidentifiable fluids. He’s frantically going back and forth to several tables with mutilated bodies on them, waving a sharp knife in his hand all the while yelling in his language. You’re guessing that’s what one of these derro really looks like. Certainly less impressive. + +You have no idea what exactly is going on here and what it has to do with the new eternals, but you need to attack the derro fast before Talia attacks the mages and causes enough noise for some of the derro to investigate it. + +You suppose you and the rest could just drop down from the ceiling in a surprise attack, speed yourself up and hope for the best, but circumstances have given you something else to work with. + +It’s a simple magic trick that most shadows take for granted, in fact most never really appreciate its uses and that spell is one that unlocks regular locks which the derro have seen fit to use on the boxes they’re holding the trolls in. If you did that, you could unleash the trolls on the derro, of course the problem with that plan is you’ve never faced trolls before and they could be ten times worse than the derro. Not to mention you’d have to deal with both groups. +> Unlock the boxes +You all move close enough so you’re above the boxes and then with a brief whisper, every lock on the troll boxes clicks. + +And then all the box doors are suddenly torn open. + +“TROLLS! TROLLS! TROLLS!” is all you can make out from the derro who are now shouting rushing into the lab to combat the trolls now emerging from their prisons. Their appearance is indeed as fearsome as you heard in stories. Tall with long gangly limbs and blackish green skin. You sort of expected them to be more massive much like an ogre, but there isn’t an ounce of fat on them, and even though they’re relatively thin they’re all solid muscle. They definitely look hungry though with their large teeth though. + +The trolls also prove to be a lot quicker than you expected as well. You watch them leap and dodge the derro attacks, which look slow and clumsy by comparison. You see a troll smash a derro to the floor with one punch, leap on top of him and easily peel off his armor with its talons. A scream soon follows when the troll eviscerates him. Several more derro begin lighting some sort of round metal objects and toss them at some of the trolls. These devices explode into flames and seem to hurt the trolls who howl in pain, but continue to attack while still on fire. The unarmored derro tosses a few glass beakers at the trolls too. You assume it must be some sort of acid given how it starts to eat away at a troll’s skin when it hits. + +As you and the rest of the shadows stay cloaked on the ceiling watching this carnage unfold, you’re unsure of whom to start attacking because you can’t let either group completely dominate the other. + +There are more derro, but the trolls are very tough and are putting up more than enough of a fight. You see the unarmored derro run away to a locked door on the far side of the room, and just when he manages to open it; you shoot him in the back with your armbow, which causes him to collapse to the floor. You don’t know where he’s trying to go, but he’s not getting far. + +“SHADOWS!” one of the derro shouts as you all decloak to join the fight. For the most part you all keep your distance when you can from the trolls and attempt to finish off any severely wounded derro. + +“Kill everything!” you shout and make your way to the staggering unarmored derro to finish him off. He fumbles with some sort of strange weapon he takes out of his pocket, but you kick it from his hand and smash him in the face with the pommel of your sword. + +“Shadows! You narrow minded religious fanatics dare desecrate the progress of science? Your actions will not go unpunished here toAGH!” the unarmored derro is cut short on his dying monologue with your blade to his chest. + +You look around and see that most of the derro have been literally shredded open by the trolls who have focused most of their attention on them, but they’ve started to pay more attention to the shadows now that the derro numbers have dwindled. Speeding yourselves up at least manages to match their own swiftness, but they’re still no pushovers as you find out when you’re locked into one on one combat with one of the trolls. Being this close to the creature, you get the full force of its horrible odor and that combined with the smell of its still burnt flesh are almost enough to put you off your fight. You haven’t smelled something so bad in…well ever. + +You do manage to overcome though only after nearly hacking off its leg long enough for you to realize that the derro were using fire and acid on the trolls for a reason. Troll may not instantly regenerate, but you need to stop it before you give them time to do so. As the troll continues to rapidly crawl after you on three limbs, you grab one of those firebombs from a dead derro and light it with a near by torch. + +You narrowly avoid the explosion when you toss it at the troll who is successfully blown to pieces. + +“Really hope those pieces don’t reform into little trolls.” You mutter. + +The remainder of the battle involves much of the same tactics, though some of your shadows aren’t quite as skilled as you are and fall in combat. Fortunately reinforcements come in the form of Talia and Yvette and with their help you finally finish off the remainder of the trolls and whatever derro that are still attempting to cling to life. + +“Were those things actual trolls?” Yvette asks. +“Yep and if they weren’t such savage monsters I’d be thanking them for killing most of the derro for us. Are you two the only ones left?” +“No, but only Brother Haze besides us made it and he’s currently tending to his wounds. He would’ve been in no condition to help fight the trolls and derro. The fight with the mages wasn’t an easy one.” Talia says. +“I’ll bet, but I never had any doubt that you wouldn’t be victorious. Did you see any sign of any new eternals?” +“No, the mages’ quarters didn’t seem to house any of them and there weren’t any other bedrooms in that direction either. I saw some training facilities and a large library, but nothing more. What about over here?” +“Well other than this big lab, we haven’t seen anything of any note either. We passed a lot of derro bedrooms a long the way, but that’s about it.” +“What about that door?” Yvette asks pointing over to the one where the unarmored derro lies dead. +“I don’t know where that one goes to. That derro certainly was in a rush to escape out that way though. Guess we all might as well check it out.” + +You quickly take a head count and altogether there’s six of you left, seven if you count Haze who isn’t even with you. If this door leads to the hundreds of young eternals, you question if you’ll even be able to kill them all before they can overwhelm you. + +When you open it up you find yourself on a platformed level, which overlooks a huge room. It’s nearly the size of a small hamlet you think. There are several ladders that descend down to the lower level which contain translucent containers all hooked up with tubing and connected with each other and large strange machines. When you climb down the ladder you inspect the containers more closely and make out a small figure floating in liquid within it. + +There are hundreds of these containers, possible even a thousand. + +“I think we just found the new eternals.” You say. +“Wait, are they in those tanks?” Talia asks. +“I believe so. Looks like the Empire has a whole new way of breeding Eternals or at least altering them. I assume they take them out to train them and then pop ‘em back in when they aren’t needed. Pretty convenient I suppose.” +“This…this all seems wrong somehow. Against nature. We should destroy this place as soon as possible. Those derro weapons you were using on the trolls were explosive, if we could find more we use some of them to collapse this place.” Yvette says. +“Or maybe there’s a some sort of switch that kills them in the tank. Seems like the Empire would be inclined to implement something like that.” Talia adds. + +Normally you’d be all for killing all these little bastards while still lying in their “cribs”, but it suddenly hits you that you might have an opportunity here. You didn’t think about it before, because you thought you were going to have to fight these little runts in the corridors of this place. However circumstances have definitely changed. + +Maybe you could get them to be on YOUR side. Why not? They’re young enough that they could probably take re-indoctrination. Problem is, it still might take a lot of time and while this was a great blow to the Empire, it doesn’t put them out of the fight yet. They may eventually find out what’s happened and come back for this place and you’re not really in a position to defend it. +> Kill the new eternals +It’s a good idea, but probably impractical and you don’t have the luxury of being impractical at this time. You’d have to retrain them and everything. No, better to just kill them and get this mission over with. + +You and the rest of the shadows search for more derro explosives and find a whole room filled with them. You take your time setting up them up in areas, though quite honestly you don’t really know what you’re doing. Yvette seems to have a little better grasp on them for some reason, but even she’s just guessing since she’s never worked with such weaponry before. Talia tries to find some sort of “kill switch” as a safer alternative, but fails to do so. + +When you think you’re prepared, you tell everyone else to leave the complex and you’ll light the extended fuse. You assure Talia that you’ll be all right since you’ll just speed yourself up. Sister Yvette interrupts you however saying that she’ll volunteer to light the fuse since she feels that if anything does go wrong, it would be a greater loss to the shadows if you died instead. + +You ask Yvette if she really wants to take the risk and she assures you that risking her life to save a brother isn’t a risk, it’s an honor to all that serve Dendrin. + +“Well…I can’t argue with that I suppose. Okay, but I’m sure we’re all worrying over nothing.” +“You’re probably right brother, but just in case we aren’t, I was honored to serve beside you brother.” Sister Yvette says. + +You and the rest of the shadows leave the complex as fast as you can and put a good deal of distance away from the camp before you hear a very large explosion. You turn around and see the entire camp sink into itself. You’re guessing it worked. + +“Does anyone see Sister Yvette?” you ask looking for a figure running in the distance. +“No, but let’s wait a bit.” +“Yes well we can’t wait too long, that explosion was loud enough to alert someone. Won’t be long before the Empire sends troops here.” + +You wait a few minutes, but Yvette still hasn’t shown up. Thinking that maybe she’s hurt, you insist on going back to the camp to search for her. + +There isn’t much left of the camp when you see the destruction caused by the blast. You all look around the wreckage, but you find no trace of her body. You get angry.” + +“Fuck! She surely had enough time to get out of the blast! I mean that’s what our speed spell is for isn’t it?!” you shout. +“It is regrettable, but this mission was filled with danger right from the start and she died for a reason. That could’ve been you.” Talia says. +“Yes, but…(Sigh) I dunno. If she had fallen in battle that would’ve been one thing, but to die like this after we already achieved victory? She deserved better.” You says. +“Well, I’m sure she’s in a better place with Dendrin now as she has served him well.” +“Yeah…” you mutter, severely holding back on what you really think about Dendrin. “Come on let’s get out of here before any Empire soldiers show up.” + +Before heading back to Rask you tell Brother Theo about the new changes. Fortunately he’s still alive, when you check to see how those other shadow cell attack turned out. Reports have started to come in about the attack on the camp, which isn’t too surprising despite all the chaos going on elsewhere that brother Theo caused. He is saddened to hear of sister Yvette’s death and says she was very instrumental in helping him coordinate the shadow cells, but he’ll make do. + +Eventually you make your way back to Rask which you’re happy to find out Cyrus was smart enough to not risk attacking Fort Destiny. Unfortunately he caused a different set back entirely. Talia was about the only one keeping the Flog and the rest of his orcs on good terms. You rarely interacted with him and he never got along with Cyrus who was usually condescending to him. While you were gone apparently a small skirmish ensued between the orcs and shadows. Amazingly nobody was actually killed, but several were wounded and ultimately Flog left with the remainder of the orcs. + +“Are you fucking kidding me?” you yell in exasperation. +“Where did they go?” Talia asks. +“How should I know, further north I think where the rest of those overgrown idiots dwell. I don’t care, we don’t need them anyway!” Cyrus says. + +After your recent loss of Yvette, you’re not really in any mood for Cyrus’ shortsightedness. + +“Oh well, I’m glad that YOU decided that for all of us! Did it even occur to you that we might need them if we were going to attack Fort Destiny?” +“Now you think that’s a good idea? What about all the arguing you did, saying it was a rotten idea?” +“I said it wasn’t the best idea at this time, I wasn’t opposed to it AFTER we got rid of the new eternals. Priorities!” +“Sure, that’s great when they’re YOURS brother. When it comes to the rest of our plans you just ignore them.” +“Well that hardly matters now, because you just fucking ruined your own plans by pissing off our orc allies. Nice going with the self sabotage brother!” + +Cyrus looks you up and down with distain in his face. “Fine. We’ll do it your way.” Cyrus begins to storm off + +“Wait, brother Cyrus where are you going?” Talia asks. +“Well seeing as our chosen brother of Dendrin is obviously correct about everything and as he pointed out that we cannot do anything without our orc allies any longer, I’m going to follow his suggestion that he gave me not long ago. I’m going to lead an assassination squad myself to get rid of Kane once and for all.” +“Hold on! Wait, we need to plan better for something like that we can’t just…” Talia runs after him. + +You dismiss Cyrus and whatever he plans to do, you don’t care anymore. You already offered your help to him on this before and the whole plan at the time was dismissed because of his own pettiness. If he succeeds then that’s good. He’s done something useful for a change, if not then he’ll be out of the way and no longer whining about his our feeble plans. Either way he’s on his own on this. + +Three days later reports come in on Cyrus’ death and all shadows he took with him on the mission. Kane wasn’t even severely wounded. In fact all this has done is raise his reputation. Talia doesn’t say it, but she implies that you should’ve helped Cyrus even if claimed he wouldn’t have accepted it. + +Draven is devastated by the news and commits suicide soon afterwards. With this sudden loss of several prominent shadows, morale takes a bit of a dive, especially since Cyrus was still well liked around Fort Defiance. + +Year 31 + +“So Flog’s dead?” you ask. +“Yes, I couldn’t get through to him. He insisted that if he didn’t keep raiding the northern villages that support us, his people would’ve just seen him as weak and killed him anyway. Ultimately he said he would’ve preferred to die by my hand and so he did.” Talia replies. +“Well, I suppose that’ll stop organized raids, but it won’t stop them completely.” +“Indeed. Flog’s leadership was probably keeping the rest of his tribe in line and all those various ogre tribes as well. With him gone, it’s going to be chaos.” +“I know. I know. Shit. Well we can only hope that they spend more time fighting each other. In the meantime I’ve got to figure out a way of keeping up the pressure south of Rask. Captain Roldan is starting to become as much of a problem as Kane, has he even left that fortress yet?” +“Nope, report say ever since brother Cyrus’ attempts he doesn’t leave it anymore and he’s been getting an influx of troops as reinforcements lately.” +“Damn it! (Sigh) All right, double up on the shadow protection in key towns. Last thing we need is Kane’s mindless scorched land tactics destroying the places that are helping us.” + +Year 32 + +You slash through the jugular of Kane and even as blood gushes from his throat he laughs madly claiming that you’ll never defeat the Empire. You shove his body out of the window just to shut up his final death throes. + +You look over at Talia’s body and curse yourself for allowing this to happen. You knew you should’ve gone on this mission by yourself, but she wanted to be by your side. You don’t even have time to morn right now as you hear the rest of the soldiers scrambling up the stairs to defend their now dead master. + +You climb out the very window you threw Kane out of and scale down the walls of the fort and make your escape. When you make it back home, you find plenty of time to weep and morn for your dead love. + +With Talia dead, a small portion of your own will to go on has died as well. + +Year 33 + +“The south wall of the fort has been breached!” Brother Gannon shouts. +“Well get ready to kill the bastards that are going to be pouring in then damn it!” you shout back. + +The situation is grim and getting worse with every passing second. You can’t believe how the Empire has managed to turn this all around, though it didn’t help that you had a few set backs of your own. Now Captain Roldan is at your gates and there’s nothing you can do to stop it. + +You watch as the remaining shadows desperately fight the overwhelming number of Empire soldiers. + +“Dendrin, if you’re still watching, I hope you had a good run of amusement, because it’s about to end.” You mutter and rush into the hopeless battle. + +During Roldan’s life, he would go on to speak about how you were a worthy opponent during conversations about the battle of Fort Defiance. Probably out of minor respect that you were an Eternal. + +Ultimately though history only remembered Roldan and how he gloriously destroyed the shadow traitors once and for all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You all move close enough so you’re above the boxes and then with a brief whisper, every lock on the troll boxes clicks. + +And then all the box doors are suddenly torn open. + +“TROLLS! TROLLS! TROLLS!” is all you can make out from the derro who are now shouting rushing into the lab to combat the trolls now emerging from their prisons. Their appearance is indeed as fearsome as you heard in stories. Tall with long gangly limbs and blackish green skin. You sort of expected them to be more massive much like an ogre, but there isn’t an ounce of fat on them, and even though they’re relatively thin they’re all solid muscle. They definitely look hungry though with their large teeth though. + +The trolls also prove to be a lot quicker than you expected as well. You watch them leap and dodge the derro attacks, which look slow and clumsy by comparison. You see a troll smash a derro to the floor with one punch, leap on top of him and easily peel off his armor with its talons. A scream soon follows when the troll eviscerates him. Several more derro begin lighting some sort of round metal objects and toss them at some of the trolls. These devices explode into flames and seem to hurt the trolls who howl in pain, but continue to attack while still on fire. The unarmored derro tosses a few glass beakers at the trolls too. You assume it must be some sort of acid given how it starts to eat away at a troll’s skin when it hits. + +As you and the rest of the shadows stay cloaked on the ceiling watching this carnage unfold, you’re unsure of whom to start attacking because you can’t let either group completely dominate the other. + +There are more derro, but the trolls are very tough and are putting up more than enough of a fight. You see the unarmored derro run away to a locked door on the far side of the room, and just when he manages to open it; you shoot him in the back with your armbow, which causes him to collapse to the floor. You don’t know where he’s trying to go, but he’s not getting far. + +“SHADOWS!” one of the derro shouts as you all decloak to join the fight. For the most part you all keep your distance when you can from the trolls and attempt to finish off any severely wounded derro. + +“Kill everything!” you shout and make your way to the staggering unarmored derro to finish him off. He fumbles with some sort of strange weapon he takes out of his pocket, but you kick it from his hand and smash him in the face with the pommel of your sword. + +“Shadows! You narrow minded religious fanatics dare desecrate the progress of science? Your actions will not go unpunished here toAGH!” the unarmored derro is cut short on his dying monologue with your blade to his chest. + +You look around and see that most of the derro have been literally shredded open by the trolls who have focused most of their attention on them, but they’ve started to pay more attention to the shadows now that the derro numbers have dwindled. Speeding yourselves up at least manages to match their own swiftness, but they’re still no pushovers as you find out when you’re locked into one on one combat with one of the trolls. Being this close to the creature, you get the full force of its horrible odor and that combined with the smell of its still burnt flesh are almost enough to put you off your fight. You haven’t smelled something so bad in…well ever. + +You do manage to overcome though only after nearly hacking off its leg long enough for you to realize that the derro were using fire and acid on the trolls for a reason. Troll may not instantly regenerate, but you need to stop it before you give them time to do so. As the troll continues to rapidly crawl after you on three limbs, you grab one of those firebombs from a dead derro and light it with a near by torch. + +You narrowly avoid the explosion when you toss it at the troll who is successfully blown to pieces. + +“Really hope those pieces don’t reform into little trolls.” You mutter. + +The remainder of the battle involves much of the same tactics, though some of your shadows aren’t quite as skilled as you are and fall in combat. Fortunately reinforcements come in the form of Talia and Yvette and with their help you finally finish off the remainder of the trolls and whatever derro that are still attempting to cling to life. + +“Were those things actual trolls?” Yvette asks. +“Yep and if they weren’t such savage monsters I’d be thanking them for killing most of the derro for us. Are you two the only ones left?” +“No, but only Brother Haze besides us made it and he’s currently tending to his wounds. He would’ve been in no condition to help fight the trolls and derro. The fight with the mages wasn’t an easy one.” Talia says. +“I’ll bet, but I never had any doubt that you wouldn’t be victorious. Did you see any sign of any new eternals?” +“No, the mages’ quarters didn’t seem to house any of them and there weren’t any other bedrooms in that direction either. I saw some training facilities and a large library, but nothing more. What about over here?” +“Well other than this big lab, we haven’t seen anything of any note either. We passed a lot of derro bedrooms a long the way, but that’s about it.” +“What about that door?” Yvette asks pointing over to the one where the unarmored derro lies dead. +“I don’t know where that one goes to. That derro certainly was in a rush to escape out that way though. Guess we all might as well check it out.” + +You quickly take a head count and altogether there’s six of you left, seven if you count Haze who isn’t even with you. If this door leads to the hundreds of young eternals, you question if you’ll even be able to kill them all before they can overwhelm you. + +When you open it up you find yourself on a platformed level, which overlooks a huge room. It’s nearly the size of a small hamlet you think. There are several ladders that descend down to the lower level which contain translucent containers all hooked up with tubing and connected with each other and large strange machines. When you climb down the ladder you inspect the containers more closely and make out a small figure floating in liquid within it. + +There are hundreds of these containers, possible even a thousand. + +“I think we just found the new eternals.” You say. +“Wait, are they in those tanks?” Talia asks. +“I believe so. Looks like the Empire has a whole new way of breeding Eternals or at least altering them. I assume they take them out to train them and then pop ‘em back in when they aren’t needed. Pretty convenient I suppose.” +“This…this all seems wrong somehow. Against nature. We should destroy this place as soon as possible. Those derro weapons you were using on the trolls were explosive, if we could find more we use some of them to collapse this place.” Yvette says. +“Or maybe there’s a some sort of switch that kills them in the tank. Seems like the Empire would be inclined to implement something like that.” Talia adds. + +Normally you’d be all for killing all these little bastards while still lying in their “cribs”, but it suddenly hits you that you might have an opportunity here. You didn’t think about it before, because you thought you were going to have to fight these little runts in the corridors of this place. However circumstances have definitely changed. + +Maybe you could get them to be on YOUR side. Why not? They’re young enough that they could probably take re-indoctrination. Problem is, it still might take a lot of time and while this was a great blow to the Empire, it doesn’t put them out of the fight yet. They may eventually find out what’s happened and come back for this place and you’re not really in a position to defend it. +> Attempt to convert them +“I think we should take this opportunity to make them see the way of the shadows.” You say. +“What?!” Yvette exclaims. +“Are you serious?” Talia asks. +“Well okay maybe not all of them, but I’d think that with the right teaching they could become valuable assets.” +“NO! These are the enemy and must be destroyed! You said so yourself when we first began this mission!” Yvette says. +“And perhaps I was a bit hasty. I can’t be entitled to speak out of turn and make a mistake once in awhile?” +“No brother, but I think leaving these…abominations alive for whatever reason is a bigger mistake.” +“Abominations…and I suppose you believe me and Talia are abominations too eh sister?” +“Wha…no! I mean…(sputter) you’re different! You…” +“How? Me, Talia, and Cyrus for that matter were all brought up from birth and indoctrinated to serve the Empire, but what happened? We saw the truth of Dendrin’s wisdom instead! Is it not possible that these…children who aren’t even as old as we were be re-educated to do the same?” +“Well…I suppose, but…” +“Think about it sister, some of the greatest enemies of the Empire were brought up within the very heart of it! Let’s continue to turn the Empire’s obsessive need for control against itself! And better yet, bring more servants into the fold of Dendrin.” + +Sister Yvette looks a bit hesitant, it’s obvious she has some real problems with this plan, but she isn’t really sure how to argue against you. Part of it stems from you making a bit of a point, and the other stems from the fact that despite her own confidence being better than it was, she still feels inferior to you…perhaps that’s just the aura you have as an Eternal though. + +“Yes…I suppose I see the wisdom in attempting to educate these children in the ways of Dendrin.” Sister Yvette says. She might not believe it now, but in time she’ll either convince herself or get used to it. Either way you just need her obedience. + +As for the remainder of the shadows if they have anything meaningful to say on the subject they keep it to themselves. That just leaves Talia, who is going to require a little bit more convincing since you sense her look of disagreement. + +“Um…sister Yvette, could you and the rest leave me and sister Talia alone for a moment.” + +As the rest of them leave, you move over to Talia who looks out over the hundreds of eternal containers. + +“I sense some disapproval from this plan?” +“Not so much disapproval, but rather apprehension.” +“What about the training? I know it won’t be easy, but I figure we can open up that ritual portal to Dendrin and let him decide if they’re worthy or not, you know, like he did with us.” +“And you know how to do that? Because I sure don’t! It’s not like Master Ebon or Brother Gray imparted that knowledge on to me before they died!” +“Well your magic is strong, and hey I know Cyrus has some old shadow tomes back at Fort Defiance, we can probably find something in there about it.” +“Well I’m glad you seem to have this all figured out then, just wish you would’ve let me on this sooner.” +“I would have, but this honestly just came to mind. I mean how was I to know that these kids were going to be safely locked up in oversized glass tubes? I thought we were going to be waist deep in their blood by now.” +“So who is going to train them? I know it’s not going to be you. Me I suppose right?” +“Well…you would be the best qualified…but hey Sister Yvette could help you and other shadows too! In fact I could have some transferred here just in case of an Empire attack when…” +“Damn it I’m not worried about all that, I’m wondering WHY you came up with this plan at all! I know there’s another reason than just turning them against the Empire or even bringing new shadows into Dendrin’s fold and don’t say that there isn’t! We’re the same and we’ve bonded as lovers. I know there’s more going on in your head because I know YOU. Now tell me. + +Talia never was one to mince words and perhaps it is time you didn’t either. + +“Very well my love. You should know everything.” + +And from there you tell Talia everything…except you don’t. + +You tell her that Dendrin did not only speak to you on the day Gloom was attacked, you tell her he’s spoken to you in the past on several occasions. You just never said anything about it before Gloom because you didn’t want to be thought a liar and be labeled a heretic. + +You also tell her that Dendrin has urged you to follow your own path and to seize leadership of the shadows. You didn’t want to initially because you wanted to try to hold things together because things seemed so fractured, but given that Dendrin has recently warned you about Cyrus’ potential treachery you thought it might be best to have another group of allies in case the worst occurs. + +“So…we’re keeping this a secret from Cyrus?” +“Yes, I think that would be for the best. If he knew about this, you know he’d be against it. Cyrus is clinging to the old shadow ways and still has clout, but that will be coming to an end soon.” +“I dunno…I mean I agree that Cyrus shouldn’t be leader and that you would make an excellent shadow master especially since Dendrin talks to you, but hiding things from Cyrus and possibly planning for his death? I mean is there no other way? He’s not just a shadow, he’s one of us.” +“So are a few other eternals from our class if you remember. These little bastards here were going to be against us until we intervened…which bring me to my other reason and this one is harder for me to tell because it involves you and me.” +“All of this involves the both of us, what else could it possibly be that would trouble me more than conspiracy against one of our brothers?” + +You bring up the very real and unaltered truth that Dendrin told you about eternals. The fact that none of you are able to have children due how you were created. Talia gets quiet and sits down for a moment. She tries very hard not to cry, but her voice is obviously quivering when she speaks again. + +“…I…guess (sniff) that explains a lot…but um…I mean Dendrin could do something…I mean he…” +“Dendrin… (Sigh) …how do I put this? Dendrin is…complex. It’s true that he helps us directly by granting our magical abilities and perhaps in ways of major importance when he warned me about Gloom, but he’s not here to collectively hold the hands of the shadows. (You can’t believe you just repeated Dendrin’s own words) He would prefer that the shadows made their own destiny as it were. I mean, I’m sure if he wanted to, he could’ve just laid waste to the Empire a long time ago, but he didn’t. He wanted the shadows to endure and in enduring grow stronger from the situation they were placed in. Just like you…we will have to endure in not being able to have children. But getting back to the heart of the matter, that’s part of why I decided that we should try to save these young eternals. I mean you’ll get to train them first hand in the ways of Dendrin. It would almost be like you were the mother of several hundred eternal shadows.” +“But then they can never produce offspring either.” +“Well we don’t know that. I mean it looks like they’ve been altered in a significantly different way. But even if they can’t so what? If we had had children there would be no guarantee that they’d all survive to reproduce either. You mustn’t worry about this, because after all is said and done, you will still be doing Dendrin’s work and serving him faithfully and really isn’t that what it’s all about?” + +You look into her eyes and touch her on the shoulder. She grabs your hand on her shoulder and looks down for a moment and breathes deeply. After a couple of seconds she looks back up at you. + +“Very well, this does seem to be a suitable course of action. But quite frankly I don’t think we can save all of these children. Some of them are going to be lost causes and if the Empire ever attacks this place in force, we’re going to have to collapse this place anyway, we can’t properly defend it, at least not at this time.” +“Of course, I agree. I trust you will do what you can.” +“I always do my love.” + +With this new plan settled, you and Talia kiss each other before parting company. You tell Sister Yvette that she is to report to Talia directly now and that you’ll be contacting Brother Theo about the new changes. Fortunately he’s still alive, when you check to see how those other shadow cell attack turned out. No reports have even come in about the attack on the camp, which isn’t too surprising given all the chaos going on elsewhere that brother Theo caused and the fact you didn’t leave any survivors or let anyone escape. + +Eventually you make your way back to Rask which you’re happy to find out Cyrus was smart enough to not risk attacking Fort Destiny. Unfortunately he caused a different set back entirely. Talia was about the only one keeping the Flog and the rest of his orcs on good terms. You rarely interacted with him and he never got along with Cyrus who was usually condescending to him. While you were gone apparently a small skirmish ensued between the orcs and shadows. Amazingly nobody was actually killed, but several were wounded and ultimately Flog left with the remainder of the orcs. + +“What?! They’re gone? Where?!” you ask. +“How should I know, further north I think where the rest of those overgrown idiots dwell. I don’t care, we don’t need them anyway!” Cyrus says. “And where is Sister Talia? Did you get her killed in your foolish mission?” +“No our mission was a success, and she’ll be taking care of some of the business we have in the south from now on because it’s apparent my attention should start being more focused here.” +“Oh so now you’ve decided that, after all those times I’ve suggested that since you first arrived here? You know what, I’ve been putting in work here for nearly a decade now, what makes you even think you know what the best plan of action is here?” +“Well I wouldn’t have pissed off our orc allies if I had the desire to attack Fort Destiny for one. (Sigh) Cyrus I’m on your side for Dendrin’s sake! I mean we’re supposed to be fighting the Empire, not each other. Can’t you see that brother?” + +Cyrus looks you up and down with distain in his face. + +“All I see is someone that talks a good game about serving Dendrin, but ultimately his words ring hollow to my ears. Always have. Time will tell though, brother and there will be a reckoning. Dendrin will not suffer false prophets and pretenders. I hope for your sake you aren’t one because his wrath will be terrible. Do what you want.” Cyrus says and leaves the room. + +Funny how Cyrus is probably the only one who can see through your bullshit, yet still be painfully wrong. More amusement for Dendrin you suppose. +> Years pass... +Year 35 + +Finally after years of set backs, Rask is at last free of the Empire and the other provinces are sure to follow. Kane is dead and most of the last Empire fanatics in Rask are dead. The Empire can’t send any more troops because it’s barely holding on to what it has. It’s the beginning of the end for it, but for the shadows it’s just the beginning. + +For the past couple years during the mopping up process, the shadows have slowly been withdrawing from other parts of the Empire and heading to Rask. This consolidation of forces is something that Cyrus has been wanting for years, but of course you never felt it was the right time. Now with the Empire on the decline you can agree that it is something that can be done. + +Fort Defiance has become the new shadow home and has officially been renamed as Evergloom, not the most original name, but everyone seems to like it. + +Ironically Evergloom is about one of the only major beacons of “light” in Rask nowadays. The sheer destruction that Kane caused to most of the towns in Rask before he died has left little in the way of civilization. The rebuilding process is in swing, but it’ll be awhile before it gets back to the way it was, perhaps it’ll never be the same again and nature will reclaim the land. + +It hardly matters though; the shadows have their own rebuilding process to go through, one of which is how leadership is going to be settled once and for all. As it stands, you still haven’t officially taken full control of the shadows yet and it’s still more or less run by a “council” of sorts made up of you, Talia and Cyrus. Cyrus has been somewhat less antagonistic towards you since the Empire was driven from Rask, but that might be because he’s running out of supporters. Your decisions and victories have earned the respect of most shadows and they see you as leader. + +There are also the new eternal shadows that have been coming along in their training very well and the well-known fact that you’ve spoken directly to Dendrin, though you haven’t lately, not for a long time in fact. Doesn’t stop the fact that you say you have though when you want to get things done. Part of you feels like the biggest hypocrite in the world for it, but then the other part of you feels like your ends have justified the means at this point so why care about it? You’ve kept the shadows together with lies, but really the whole organization has been kept together through lies for centuries, you’re not really doing anything different. + +Perhaps though it isn’t so much the lying that gets to you, but rather the idea of being a shadow when you’ve never really “felt” like one. You stayed motivated by fighting the Empire because that was something you could get behind, but now what are you supposed to do? Revere Dendrin and worship him? Not something you’re really interested in doing full time especially considering your knowledge of him. + +Of course then there’s always Talia, who is practically the only reason at this point why you’d want to stay leader for the shadows, well that and the budding desire to be in charge thanks to your Eternal heritage. There’s also the fact that given how much effort you went through to hold the shadows together it would almost seem a waste to toss it all away. + +Yes, a decision is going to have to be made soon, but not today. You fall asleep later that night and after all this time you finally get some “divine” advice. + +“It’s been awhile.” You say. +“Don’t tell me you actually missed me.” Dendrin remarks. +“Hardly, though I was wondering if you’d lost interest at last.” +“In you? Not at all, I’ve just been quietly observing. I’ve found that you seem to work best with minimal influence. Keep doing what you’re doing and I’m unlikely to ever lose interest in you.” +“Keep doing what I’m doing eh? So you want me to officially take full leadership of the shadows.” +“I didn’t say that. Not then and not now. Do what you want. I told you that before. If you’re asking me what I think, yes I would prefer you to take up as leader and quite honestly I’m surprised you haven’t done it already.” +“I was planning to, but now that the Empire is on its way out, I’m not sure if I want to be bothered.” +“Nonsense, you’re an Eternal. Aren’t you lot sort of born to lead?” +“I suppose, but I can’t see myself spending the rest of my life living a priestly existence in our new monastery where all I do is tell people to kiss your ass all night and day, let alone do it myself.” + +This remark causes a booming laugh echo throughout your mind. + +“So don’t do that.” Dendrin remarks. +“Well wouldn’t I sort of have to?” +“You haven’t for this long, why would you start now?” +“I mean I know I’d be faking it, but I still see it as a dreary existence.” +“And like I said, don’t do that. You’re the leader, what you say goes. If you want to abandon the old shadow ways there isn’t anything keeping you from doing it. I don’t usually point out the obvious, but what you have right now is potentially very powerful. You have in your hands is the ability to guide a religion, an ideology. You shouldn’t waste that. Take advantage before someone else does.” +“I’m not blind, I see that, but I question where do you come in? Surely if I some how lessened the shadows’ reliance on prayer, they’d also lose their abilities.” +“Not entirely unless you made them stop worshipping me altogether.” +“But I don’t worship you, I mean not really and I still have my powers.” +“Well that’s because you’re special, but if you did have a little more faith in me, your powers would increase too. You could be as strong as your old Master Ebon for example. That’s just how it works and you have take the good with the bad, but I’m sure you knew that already.” +“So it would seem.” You answer. + +Shortly after this exchange you wake up. + +“Something wrong?” Talia asks when she sees you waking up so suddenly. +“Huh? Oh, nothing. Dendrin just spoke to me again.” +“He did? What were his divine words this time?” +“Oh…uh he said that now is the right time to officially become the Shadow Master. +“That’s wonderful! Though I thought he would’ve told you a lot sooner…no matter though as I’m sure he had his reasons.” + +Good old trusting Talia. You love her, but you’ll never understand how naïve she can be when it comes to this. As you start to get ready to call a shadow gathering there’s a knock on your room door. + +“Who’s there?” you ask. +“It’s me brother. Brother Gannon. Brother Cyrus wants to see you immediately in the meeting room. He says it’s extremely important.” +“What’s it about?” +“I dunno, he just said it’s really important and he needs to see you immediately.” +“Okay then, thank you brother.” You reply. + +As you continue to get dressed, Talia speaks to you again. + +“What do you think he wants?” +“With Cyrus, who knows?” +“Do you want me to come with you?” +“What for? You might as well get all the shadows together while I’m talking to Cyrus.” +“But…I don’t know…I’m just a little concerned.” +“Aren’t you always telling me I should try to get along with Cyrus? Besides, he’s actually been tolerable lately. Maybe with the Empire gone, he’s lightened up a bit.” +“Maybe…well if you think it’ll be okay, I’ll go round up the brothers and sisters.” + +As you and Talia part company you make your way to the meeting room. On your way it occurs to you that Cyrus may very be planning to kill you rather than talk. You aren’t sensing anyone cloaked yet, but then maybe they’ll all be in the room with him. + +If this is an ambush, the only one he’s going to be able to count on to help him is probably Draven. Cyrus just doesn’t have the clout he once did in fact you believe if he tried, he wouldn’t be accepted as leader anyway. Of course you don’t have any intention of getting killed if this is what he’s planning. + +You open up the door and see Cyrus standing near the table by himself. You can’t sense anyone else; maybe he wants this to be a one on one matter. + +“There you are, I wasn’t sure you were coming. I want to speak to you on something very important and this has to be settled right now.” + +No doubt he’s talking about the leadership position. You know he still desperately wants it and he’s just going through the motions of being civilized about it right now. You aren’t waiting around… + +Before Cyrus even knows what’s going on, you fire your armbow at him. He reacts in time to move, but not before a bolt goes into his arm. + +“Agh! What the fuck are you doing?!” he says clutching his arm and backing away from you. +“I’m settling this right now, we both know what this is all about. You’re going to kill me because you want to be in charge and that’s not happening.” + +You rush forward to attack and Cyrus once again dodges and backs away from you. He hasn’t even drawn his weapon yet. +“What? No! Look! I just called you in to talk! I was going to tell you that I’ve come to the realization that you’re the worthy one to lead the shadows! I know it’s taken me a long time, but I see that you’re the chosen one of Dendrin.” +“Bullshit, you’ve desired to be shadow master since Master Ebon died.” +“And probably even a little bit before, but I see that I was wrong to think such things even if I never spoke them out loud. Perhaps Dendrin punished me for it by never speaking to me. He speaks to you and your actions have lead us to finally be free of the Empire. Why should I keep questioning your ability? It’s obvious that you have a greater destiny and I realize that I should just graciously step aside. Who am I to question the will of Dendrin? I yield to you shadow master.” + +Cyrus seems pretty sincere in his words and despite everything he has always been a dedicated disciple of Dendrin for good or ill. If he really believes that Dendrin has a plan for you, he wouldn’t stand in the way of it. + +Now that you really think about it, he’s never really done anything that would indicate that he was ever actively trying to kill you. It’s possible you’ve just been paranoid about this whole thing. +> Allow Cyrus to live +You think back on all the things you’ve been doing and some of it has been pretty questionable. True you thought you were doing what was necessary because you were trying to fight off the Empire. And your actions as ruthless as some of them were, they may have been necessary, but now? What’s the justification to kill Cyrus? Because you think he’ll try to kill you in the future? + +Honestly at this point you’d completely understand it if did, but as you look at him he’s obviously begging to be included in your plans now. You’ve overshadowed him so much that he’s given up and acknowledging your dominance much like a beta wolf does with an alpha. If you distrust him because you feel as an Eternal he’s going to take power from you, what of all those young eternals you rescued? Do you kill them too just in case? What of Talia? Where does it all end? Dendrin hasn’t helped either considering he’s been more or less favoring you to kill Cyrus and seizing power for a while now. Doing the opposite of what he suggests might be the right move. + +Sure Cyrus been a dick in the past, but you don’t need to continue your own ruthless behavior towards him. This is supposed to be a new beginning for the shadows after all and maybe putting aside old dusty quarrels is a way to start it. + +“Cyrus, I’m sorry. I should’ve been more trusting of a fellow shadow.” You say. + +Cyrus seems more surprised than anyone to hear you apologize. He pulls out the bolt before speaking again. + +“Thank you brother. And I meant what I said, I accept you as the new shadow master.” +“Well, there are going to be a lot of changes around here and I’m going to need your help in implementing them. Let’s go to the gathering hall, I was going to make my official announcement as shadow master there.” + +You leave with Cyrus to address the rest of the shadows that are no doubt waiting for you in the gathering hall. When you arrive, they’re all waiting around for you as expected. You see Talia standing nearby and approach her while Cyrus goes to join Draven in the audience. + +“Is everything okay? I noticed Cyrus rubbing his arm.” Talia remarks. +“Everything’s been settled. Cyrus and I have come to an understanding.” +“Really?” +“Well for now, but I’m hoping that it stays that way. We’ll see I suppose.” + +You give Talia a quick kiss before heading to the front of the hall and addressing everyone. + +“We may have defeated the Empire my fellow shadows, but that does not mean we can rest! Dendrin spoke to me again today and told me that today is the day that I claim the title of shadow master and lead the shadows properly into this new era. The first thing we need to do is rebuild and that involves spreading our faith when possible. We must be strong so that there will never again be the possibility of the shadows having to submit under another power ever again.” + +This reaction predictably gets a small shout of approval. + +“And though I am shadow master, I cannot do this by myself. I need all of your help, some of you more than others, but everyone will do their part in serving Dendrin’s will. This is a new era for the shadows and we will see it prosper.” + +You end your speech with a “For Dendrin” remark to solidify a positive reaction, which seems to do the trick. You take your leave and start making plans on restructuring the shadow organization and how things have been done. It’ll take a bit of time and you’ll have to slowly introduce a few things, but it can be accomplished. + +Later that night you predictably get another visit from Dendrin. + +“So…you didn’t kill him after all, you sure that’s wise?” Dendrin asks. +“As I told Talia, we’ll see, but I’m not convinced he’s my enemy, if he ever truly was. He’s just overly devoted to an uncaring god and that’s warped his world view.” +“Careful, all those overly devoted followers of that uncaring god are officially under your command now. You might want to start rethinking how you approach speaking to me if you wish to remain that way.” +“Why? If you have something planned, I certainly can’t stop you. Besides, you’ve told me time and time again, the only reason why you pay attention at all any more is because of me. Maybe I don’t agree with you or the role that I’ve been thrust into, but I’m going to continue doing my best at it, because that’s just how I am. But if you’re going to kill me for the shits and giggles, just go ahead and do it and quit with the idle threats.” + +Again you hear that booming laughter echo throughout your head. + +“And that’s why I’ve always liked you Eternal. It’ll be interesting if you’re right about Cyrus or the shadows in general for that matter. But as you said, I guess we’ll see. I’ll be watching as always.” + +And so begins the new era of the Shadows… +> Years pass... +Chapter 3B1: Shadow Master + + +Year 41 + +“We had to kill another group of ogres sniffing around the fort today.” Cyrus remarks. +“Yeah, I know the battle woke me up, by the time I got ready, all of them had been killed.” You reply. “I’m going to have to speak with Flog, because I thought we had an understanding that he was to keep the giant and ogre population down or at least manageable.” +“I say we just kill him and be done with it.” +“Hmm, yeah I know he’s not your favorite person, but he’s proven himself useful, vital even in the past. Besides he’s the only thing keeping that’s keeping that rabble in line.” +“He’s also the only thing keeping them organized. Maybe he’s planning on making an army to march upon us.” +“Yes, I have considered that too, I’m just wondering what’s worse. A completely hostile unchecked horde of giantkin or a semi organized army of the same which may or may not be reasoned with.” +“Perhaps you may need to ask Dendrin for guidance on this matter.” Cyrus says. +“Perhaps…” + +If Dendrin actually did have any advice on the matter, it probably wouldn’t do you much good anyway considering how whimsical he is, not to mention he’s chosen not to speak to you for quite some time, as he is prone to do. + +Being Shadow Master has been a bit of odd since you’ve taken the position mainly because you don’t feel like you have a specific purpose. + +The first two years were easy enough as you were still mostly concerning yourself with rebuilding Evergloom for defense, additional training for the shadows and making sure Rask kept its independence, but that was never truly ever an issue since the Empire never did make a come back and reports of their continual descent into chaos was assured. + +The next two years consisted of a halfhearted attempt at spreading “the faith” mainly to build up numbers. From what you could piece together of shadow history from the few books that Cyrus still had, the shadows never had an aggressive policy on such things, pre or post Empire days, they mostly relied on people either coming to them of their own free will or being “born” into it. There have been a few shadow births, but you’d rather have a more traditional way of gaining recruits because “breeding” a new order isn’t really going to be a big option seeing as your current ratio of men and women isn’t great and those with Eternal heritage can’t reproduce at all. While you could’ve easily told everyone to start putting the remaining Raskian towns to the blade and do the whole “convert or die” thing, you decided it wouldn’t be that great of an idea for several reasons. So you relied on a more missionary way of doing things like sending certain shadows to towns and stressing the benefits of being a shadow. It got a few people interested, but nothing major. The Raskians in general have become less trustful of the shadows over the years now that the war with the Empire is over, almost as if they are expecting you to start launching a religious crusade. You soon got the impression that the Raskians would prefer if the lot of you would just leave them alone now. Somewhat ungrateful considering all you’ve done in securing the country’s freedom, but hardly surprising. + +Last year was the official fall of the Empire, from what you heard the Emperor’s palace was in flames and the few remaining generals or strong military men have taken it upon themselves to carve out various fiefdoms for themselves while other places have gone the way of total anarchy. There was even a little bit of celebrating in Rask and among the shadows when it occurred. However, you couldn’t help but be a little disappointed that the great enemy you struggled so hard against was now gone forever. Like you craved the chance to fight them again if only for the opportunity to be in battle once again which has sorely been lacking. + +Now with the giantkin starting to become a problem once again, you’re half tempted to take Cyrus’ advice. You’re certain that it would be a sure victory for you and to an extent, Flog has been getting less and less reasonable as the years have gone on. Perhaps it is time to get rid of him and take your chances with more problems with giantkin in the future. + +Instead of talking with Dendrin about it, you choose to discuss this situation with someone that will have a better opinion on the situation. + +“It sounds like you’ve sort of made your mind up about Flog already.” Talia remarks. +“You might be right, but I was wondering what your opinion was on the matter.” +“Better you should ask Dendrin for guidance on that, rather than me. Though I suppose if he has become more militant maybe it’s for the best, but…” +“But you think I should try to renegotiate with him?” +“No, I wasn’t going to suggest that, I was going to say maybe we should leave Rask altogether.” +“What? Why?” +“The people here obviously don’t want us around, food isn’t the easiest thing to come by and we’re basically the first target whenever a group of ogres or giants come lumbering down south.” +“We faced the Empire and survived against all odds, I think we can handle being disliked by the plebs and the occasional giant attack.” +“You’re probably right, but I just feel like we’re stagnating here. Like we aren’t rebuilding the order the way that we should. We’ve also lost a lot of history, even certain rituals. I mean I’ve remembered as much as we were taught and tried to pass these lessons on to the new eternals when I first trained them and continue to do so. The tomes we still have here help a bit, but ultimately when we lost Gloom, we lost a lot more than just a home.” +“Well, where would we go? +“That I don’t know. Delerg perhaps?” +“That’s quite the distance, not to mention the area isn’t all that much more hospitable in terms of environment given that it’s mostly swamp.” +“Yes, but it is the birthplace of the shadows and we do have an old temple there.” +“Yeah and it hasn’t been used in centuries and is probably a crumbling ruin that’s half sunk into the swamp by now! Has anyone here actually ever been there, because I’ve only ever heard about it.” +“Yes, I believe a few of the older brothers and sisters have. They would know the best way to get there. I want to just say though, that this is merely my opinion. I do not know if moving all of us somewhere else is the best solution or if it will even help, but I just feel like the longer we stay here, the further away we’re going to get from our roots and in another couple of generations, the shadows won’t be anything like the ones of old. But perhaps that is Dendrin’s will, as I said I don’t know. Only you would know being the Shadow Master and able to speak to him directly for guidance.” + +You give an acknowledging nod, but in reality you’re just left with another decision to make all by yourself. What Talia is suggesting sounds crazy and quite frankly you don’t even care about shadow history, but what does make this idea appealing is the journey and the challenge. You were just thinking about a change of some sort and while killing Flog and his little band would break up the monotony, perhaps a whole change of scenery is really in order. +> Kill Flog +Making some sort of “pilgrimage” isn’t really what you need at this point. While you might be drawn to the journey because of the potential for combat in the end you’re going to be left with the same problem again when you finally do get settled. Not to mention who is to say the temple is even big enough or in any condition to act as a new home. + +Tomorrow you resolve to go out to the village where Flog has been making his home (Which he’s renamed “Flogtown”) and bring down the wrath of the shadows upon him. He probably won’t be expecting it, but he’s brought this on himself. + +Just as planned you tell Cyrus and the rest that you have asked for Dendrin’s guidance on the matter and he has stated that the orcs and giantkin must be purged. You decide to take Cyrus and most of the new eternals with you as they are the most eager for the chance to do battle. Talia offers to join you, but you tell her you want someone with authority to still maintain the fort while you’re gone. Though you don’t anticipate this being a drawn out conflict. + +Your trip is uneventful other than the beginning of some light snowfall. When you arrive at Flogtown, you see that Flog has made a few changes since the last time you were here. Namely he’s erected a tall crude fence around the village, the gate is open, but there are several orc guards standing by. When they see you, they immediately go into a battle stance and one of them runs inside the gate presumably to warn Flog. + +“Halt! You shadows have no audience with Flog or any business here, get out!” one of the guards says. + +You don’t respond, you just order a command to fire where upon several bolts pepper the outspoken guard and the rest of your people attack the remaining ones. When the gate closes down, all of you just spider walk over the walls and gain entry that way. + +The “town” itself looks like slave camp, and that’s probably because it is. Of it’s also because you allowed it in exchange for Flog’s help years ago. You can only imagine what the other few towns that Flog seized control of look like. You see miserable wretches of human beings locked in cages or in chains and making no effort to fight or even escape. It’s like the orcs have broken their spirit so much that they can’t even rejoice at the orc’s inevitable demise. + +The slaying of the orc and ogre contingent doesn’t take long in fact you’re almost bored while you do it. The younger eternals seem to be getting a kick out of it though, gleefully lopping heads off and laughing the whole time. You sometimes wonder about them. Even with all the indoctrination and discipline that Talia has instilled in them, you see a certain bloodlust that they continue to share and they just go completely wild when actually in battle. You can only chalk it up to whatever experimentation that occurred to them before you arrived. + +You then see one of them attempting to open up the cages with the slaves inside, at first you assume that he’s trying to free them. Then when he gets the door open he throws one of the women to the ground and… + +“Hey you! What the hell are you doing?” you question. +“I’m taking the reward that Dendrin has provided master!” the eternal remarks without any hint of shame of what he’s attempting to do. +“That isn’t a reward and more importantly the fucking battle isn’t over yet! So get your dick back in your pants and get back to fighting!” +“Yes, master.” He sheepishly obeys and pulls his pants back up before going off on his way and leaving the slave woman who is still lying on the ground. + +You shake your head because know damn well Talia did NOT teach them that and none of them have even exhibited that sort of behavior before. You aren’t going dwell on it now, but you’re going to talk to Talia about it when you get back. In the meantime you attempt to help the woman, but she continues to be practically limp. Since there’s no place to really take her right now, you just put her back in the cage and tell her to stay there until the fighting is over. She mumbles some sort of acknowledgement, but that’s all you get out of her. + +Soon the fighting begins to die down, still no sign of Flog though, he apparently was never here. You’re going to have to hunt him down at one of his other villages. Still, that now leaves you with what you’re going to do with the now free townspeople. + +“They certainly aren’t the traditionally spirited people of Rask anymore. I don’t think they ever will be. They’re pretty pathetic, death might be a welcome release to some of these folks.” Cyrus remarks. +“Maybe, but we’re not going to be the one to decide that. Let’s just release their shackles and open up the cages and move on to Flog’s other villages.” + +You order the enslaved villagers to be released and eventually some of them actually begin to speak. + +“Is…is it over? Are we free?” an older man asks you. +“Yes, you are free now. Free to go about your business and your lives.” You say. +“Well, I suppose that’s a good thing then…I just have one question shadow.” +“What’s that?” +“How?” +“How what?” +“How are we supposed to just go back to our old lives after this?” + +When you don’t answer right away, the old man then stands up straight as much as he can and looks you directly in the eye. + +“You did this shadow. I know, we all know. You think that orc bastard didn’t boast about how you all allowed him to enslave the lot of us in exchange for his help against the Empire? I can’t even blame the orcs, they’re brutes by nature, but you. You were supposed to be helping the people of Rask, but instead it looks like you were helping yourselves.” +“That’s not even remotely true, we were still the main ones fighting the Empire and shouldering the brunt of their hostility. I made some tough decisions that would ultimately result in their downfall and it worked.” +“Right, the Empire falls and everyone is free except for us. Being slaves and all we never got much in the way of news, but from what I heard, the Empire hadn’t been a real threat in a significant number of years. Did you even think that maybe when the threat of the Empire was over you should at least attempt to free us? Not that we would’ve been any less pissed at you, but it would’ve at least showed that you gave a shit to a minor degree.” +“Old man you better shut your mouth right now! You are speaking to the Shadow Master! The Chosen One of Dendrin!” one of the new eternals shouts and pushes the old man to the ground. You stop him from going any further with it though. + +The old man wobbly stands back up. + +“Shadow Master huh? Chosen One? All sounds like emperor to me. So tell me, why DID you come? I get the impression it wasn’t to free us.” +“No. Flog has been stepping out of line and needs to be dealt with.” +“Ha ha ha ha! You hear that? The shadows’ pet orc was disobedient and that’s why we can have our freedom today! Thank the gods for the chaotic nature of orcs eh?” + +At this point the newly freed villagers are starting to find their “spirit” again and begin crowding around the old man in a show of solidarity. Your eternal shadows are more than willing to kill them, but this isn’t what you want. For one it wouldn’t be a fight, it would be a slaughter. Second they’re completely right to be angry and you can’t really blame them. + +“Look, I cannot apologize for the decision that was made. It happened and it can’t be changed. I don’t think you’d accept an apology anyway. Is there anything you need from us? Perhaps help in rebuilding or…” +“No shadow. We need nothing from you. Well maybe one thing, none of us ever want to see you shadows in this town ever again.” +“Very well, we shall take our leave.” You say and call your shadows to exit this forsaken town. + +The other towns that Flog controls are much further away and the snowfall and the wind are starting to get worse. You could go ahead and chase him now, but you didn’t exactly prepare for an extended pursuit. You could probably return to Evergloom and prepare properly, it isn’t likely that Flog is going to be leaving the area, and whatever pitiful defense he can muster isn’t going to be a match for you anyway. +> Pursue Flog +You need to take care of this now; you can’t risk the chance of Flog making things harder for you than they need to be. There’s also the fact that these eternals are still hyped up from battle. You’d rather they get it out of their system before taking them back home. + +Pressing on through the beginnings of a blizzard, you eventually reach the second town that you suspect Flog to be dwelling. Your reception there isn’t any better and battle predictably follows. The shadow magic and natural skill win out the day, but once again the shadows get a little overzealous in their desire to kill. + +“What the fuck…HEY! Leave the damn slaves alone!” you shout when you see a group of eternals near a bunch of them. They either can’t hear you due to the howling wind (very unlikely) or they are deliberately ignoring you because they’re so engrossed in what they’re doing. + +When you reach them, you push them aside and see several dead slaves, some of them children and the elderly. None of the eternals say anything, they don’t need to given that their weapons are covered in blood. + +“Why the fuck did you lot not only disobey my earlier orders, but blatantly ignore me when I shouted at you?” +“Sorry master, but the slaves started attacking us for some reason and we only defended ourselves. It all just happened so fast that I guess we got focused on battle.” One of the eternals says, the others looks to him and agree. + +This has to be the absolute WORST lie you’ve ever heard. They surely can’t really believe you’ll accept it as an excuse. Nevertheless there it is, a bold face lie. They probably think that you’ll just chew them out, but they’re wrong about that… + +Without another word, you kill the one who came up with the lie with a slash to his throat. You then dispatch the other three as quickly as possible. The rest of the eternals look on intently. Cyrus makes no move to stop you either. Even after you’ve killed them, you’re still incredibly angry. It isn’t even so much about them killing the slaves. It’s the fact that they not only disobeyed you they also feebly tried to lie to your face about it. + +“Now you all are going to listen up, because I’m not repeating myself! I am the Shadow Master here! This means that I am Dendrin’s chosen and you ALL are to follow my orders without question or argue about them! I catch ANY of you disobeying me again, you can join your fellows lying dead in the snow over there! Now free the rest of the slaves, and let’s get the fuck out of here since Flog doesn’t seem to be here either.” + +You head to the front gates of the town, cursing the fact that you have to keep traveling in this horrible weather and put up with these disobedient eternals. Yes, you’re really going to have to have a LONG discussion with Talia, when you get back. Cyrus and the rest follow you out when they’re finished freeing the slaves. You leave immediately since you’re in no mood to hear any “scolding” from the newly freed population or you’ll be prone to start killing them yourself. + +The last town you know Flog enslaved is an even further distance, so much so it’s practically on the edge of giant territory. Makes you wonder how the hell the town survived as long as it did before Flog enslaved it. The snow continues to fall and the cold is getting near unbearable. Cyrus suggests that perhaps it might be a good idea to turn back to Evergloom since not even using magic to speed yourself up is very effective when the snow is getting knee deep. Even cloaking wouldn’t be an advantage due to tracks being left in the snow. You aren’t thinking clearly though and you insist on pressing forward. + +When you get to the last town, there is a giant standing guard. You dispense with any pretenses and order an immediate attack. Normally speeding around the giant and chopping him down like a tree would probably work, but as Cyrus pointed out even with unnatural speed, your movement is still hampered by the snow. It doesn’t help that the visibility isn’t the greatest either. The giant on the other hand has no such problems and manages to smash two of the eternals with his great club. + +While you’re all trying to take down the giant, an alarm sound is raised. You quickly order the eternals to climb over the walls and wipe out the orcs while you and Cyrus take care of the giant since they just seem to be getting in your way. + +You and Cyrus circle around the giant, dodging and stabbing when you can. Eventually the giant has so many holes in his legs that he loses balance and falls backwards onto the wooden fence of the town. The wooden posts naturally impale the giant in several vital organs finishing him off. You and Cyrus enter the village and see a few buildings crushed under the giant’s body. Not surprisingly there have also been a few people crushed under the giant as well, orcs, slaves and even eternals. This is turning out to be a mess, though at this point you don’t even care that you’re losing some of the eternals given how they’ve been acting lately. + +You shout at any nearby shadows to start looking for Flog who still hasn’t made an appearance of course it’s hard to see anyone at this point with the snow falling as heavy as it is. + +“We need to get into one of these buildings! This snowstorm is getting too strong!” Cyrus yells. +“Alright, let’s get in that one!” you shout back in agreement. + +You approach a building that vaguely looks like a store of some sort. You try the door, but find it locked. Using all your might, you bash the door open and stumble inside. + +That’s when you find Flog, but unfortunately you never see him since he was hiding near the door and he cleaves you in the head with an axe when you bashed it open and stumbled in. + +It’s a sudden and ignoble death after surviving everything that you have. The only consolation is that Cyrus kills Flog in retaliation, but it hardly matters when you’re dead.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Making some sort of “pilgrimage” isn’t really what you need at this point. While you might be drawn to the journey because of the potential for combat in the end you’re going to be left with the same problem again when you finally do get settled. Not to mention who is to say the temple is even big enough or in any condition to act as a new home. + +Tomorrow you resolve to go out to the village where Flog has been making his home (Which he’s renamed “Flogtown”) and bring down the wrath of the shadows upon him. He probably won’t be expecting it, but he’s brought this on himself. + +Just as planned you tell Cyrus and the rest that you have asked for Dendrin’s guidance on the matter and he has stated that the orcs and giantkin must be purged. You decide to take Cyrus and most of the new eternals with you as they are the most eager for the chance to do battle. Talia offers to join you, but you tell her you want someone with authority to still maintain the fort while you’re gone. Though you don’t anticipate this being a drawn out conflict. + +Your trip is uneventful other than the beginning of some light snowfall. When you arrive at Flogtown, you see that Flog has made a few changes since the last time you were here. Namely he’s erected a tall crude fence around the village, the gate is open, but there are several orc guards standing by. When they see you, they immediately go into a battle stance and one of them runs inside the gate presumably to warn Flog. + +“Halt! You shadows have no audience with Flog or any business here, get out!” one of the guards says. + +You don’t respond, you just order a command to fire where upon several bolts pepper the outspoken guard and the rest of your people attack the remaining ones. When the gate closes down, all of you just spider walk over the walls and gain entry that way. + +The “town” itself looks like slave camp, and that’s probably because it is. Of it’s also because you allowed it in exchange for Flog’s help years ago. You can only imagine what the other few towns that Flog seized control of look like. You see miserable wretches of human beings locked in cages or in chains and making no effort to fight or even escape. It’s like the orcs have broken their spirit so much that they can’t even rejoice at the orc’s inevitable demise. + +The slaying of the orc and ogre contingent doesn’t take long in fact you’re almost bored while you do it. The younger eternals seem to be getting a kick out of it though, gleefully lopping heads off and laughing the whole time. You sometimes wonder about them. Even with all the indoctrination and discipline that Talia has instilled in them, you see a certain bloodlust that they continue to share and they just go completely wild when actually in battle. You can only chalk it up to whatever experimentation that occurred to them before you arrived. + +You then see one of them attempting to open up the cages with the slaves inside, at first you assume that he’s trying to free them. Then when he gets the door open he throws one of the women to the ground and… + +“Hey you! What the hell are you doing?” you question. +“I’m taking the reward that Dendrin has provided master!” the eternal remarks without any hint of shame of what he’s attempting to do. +“That isn’t a reward and more importantly the fucking battle isn’t over yet! So get your dick back in your pants and get back to fighting!” +“Yes, master.” He sheepishly obeys and pulls his pants back up before going off on his way and leaving the slave woman who is still lying on the ground. + +You shake your head because know damn well Talia did NOT teach them that and none of them have even exhibited that sort of behavior before. You aren’t going dwell on it now, but you’re going to talk to Talia about it when you get back. In the meantime you attempt to help the woman, but she continues to be practically limp. Since there’s no place to really take her right now, you just put her back in the cage and tell her to stay there until the fighting is over. She mumbles some sort of acknowledgement, but that’s all you get out of her. + +Soon the fighting begins to die down, still no sign of Flog though, he apparently was never here. You’re going to have to hunt him down at one of his other villages. Still, that now leaves you with what you’re going to do with the now free townspeople. + +“They certainly aren’t the traditionally spirited people of Rask anymore. I don’t think they ever will be. They’re pretty pathetic, death might be a welcome release to some of these folks.” Cyrus remarks. +“Maybe, but we’re not going to be the one to decide that. Let’s just release their shackles and open up the cages and move on to Flog’s other villages.” + +You order the enslaved villagers to be released and eventually some of them actually begin to speak. + +“Is…is it over? Are we free?” an older man asks you. +“Yes, you are free now. Free to go about your business and your lives.” You say. +“Well, I suppose that’s a good thing then…I just have one question shadow.” +“What’s that?” +“How?” +“How what?” +“How are we supposed to just go back to our old lives after this?” + +When you don’t answer right away, the old man then stands up straight as much as he can and looks you directly in the eye. + +“You did this shadow. I know, we all know. You think that orc bastard didn’t boast about how you all allowed him to enslave the lot of us in exchange for his help against the Empire? I can’t even blame the orcs, they’re brutes by nature, but you. You were supposed to be helping the people of Rask, but instead it looks like you were helping yourselves.” +“That’s not even remotely true, we were still the main ones fighting the Empire and shouldering the brunt of their hostility. I made some tough decisions that would ultimately result in their downfall and it worked.” +“Right, the Empire falls and everyone is free except for us. Being slaves and all we never got much in the way of news, but from what I heard, the Empire hadn’t been a real threat in a significant number of years. Did you even think that maybe when the threat of the Empire was over you should at least attempt to free us? Not that we would’ve been any less pissed at you, but it would’ve at least showed that you gave a shit to a minor degree.” +“Old man you better shut your mouth right now! You are speaking to the Shadow Master! The Chosen One of Dendrin!” one of the new eternals shouts and pushes the old man to the ground. You stop him from going any further with it though. + +The old man wobbly stands back up. + +“Shadow Master huh? Chosen One? All sounds like emperor to me. So tell me, why DID you come? I get the impression it wasn’t to free us.” +“No. Flog has been stepping out of line and needs to be dealt with.” +“Ha ha ha ha! You hear that? The shadows’ pet orc was disobedient and that’s why we can have our freedom today! Thank the gods for the chaotic nature of orcs eh?” + +At this point the newly freed villagers are starting to find their “spirit” again and begin crowding around the old man in a show of solidarity. Your eternal shadows are more than willing to kill them, but this isn’t what you want. For one it wouldn’t be a fight, it would be a slaughter. Second they’re completely right to be angry and you can’t really blame them. + +“Look, I cannot apologize for the decision that was made. It happened and it can’t be changed. I don’t think you’d accept an apology anyway. Is there anything you need from us? Perhaps help in rebuilding or…” +“No shadow. We need nothing from you. Well maybe one thing, none of us ever want to see you shadows in this town ever again.” +“Very well, we shall take our leave.” You say and call your shadows to exit this forsaken town. + +The other towns that Flog controls are much further away and the snowfall and the wind are starting to get worse. You could go ahead and chase him now, but you didn’t exactly prepare for an extended pursuit. You could probably return to Evergloom and prepare properly, it isn’t likely that Flog is going to be leaving the area, and whatever pitiful defense he can muster isn’t going to be a match for you anyway. +> Return to Evergloom +While it may be just a “little” snow and wind now, you’re quite familiar with just how bad the weather can suddenly change in Rask, especially as far north as you are. You aren’t going to get yourself half frozen to death due to bad planning. You tell everyone you’re all returning to Evergloom,. Nobody protests, but by the looks and whispering, you can tell they aren’t happy about it. They’re obviously all in the mood for more killing, but they’re going to just have to wait. You need to talk to Talia about some of the new eternals’ recent behavior anyway. + +When you arrive back at Evergloom, the snow has already gotten past ankle deep and it’s still falling. You believe now you’ve made the right decision and you probably won’t be able to pursue Flog until this sudden snowstorm lets up. In the meantime you go to Talia and explain the situation at Flogtown and what happened with one of the new eternals. The funny thing is she doesn’t seem entirely surprised by the behavior. + +“Well, it was definitely wrong for any of them to grumble about your orders. I will speak to all of them about this on our next training session, but I don’t think you need to worry, they are still just young and prone to a bit of undisciplined behavior at times. They all still know you are the Shadow Master and must be obeyed.” +“Talia, I’m not even worried about that since I’m sure if they got too out of line I could handle any one of them. I’m more concerned with this uncontrolled bloodlust that they seem to display along with other more unsavory acts when engaging in battle.” +“As I said they are just young and full of piss and vinegar. Besides, don’t you usually enjoy battle too?” +“Yes I don’t deny that, I never have. I believe it’s part of being an Eternal, but I don’t get a sadistic gleeful pleasure out of it like they seem to do and I certainly don’t try to violate anyone.” +“The one you’re speaking about, Brother Seminai, was he successful in his attempt?” +“No, I told you I stopped him before he could.” +“Hmm, perhaps you should’ve let him continue.” + +You are genuinely shocked to hear Talia say this. + +“What?! Are you seriously encouraging that we allow our people to rape others?” +“Not encouraging, but…(sigh) look I’m sure you’re aware that the numbers of our order currently aren’t that great and the ratio of men far exceeds the women. Our human members are either single men or attached to other human women and while I expect our female shadows to do their duty to help bring in new shadows to this world, it still isn’t enough.” +“Talia, We tried recruiting…” +“Yes, I know and that hasn’t been successful either. Now my point was, our eternal shadows are also mostly male, there are currently only a couple of females and the pairing of an eternal male and female seems to result in no offspring. So…” +“Wait a minute! Just stop right there. How do you know this?” +“Simple, I caught two of them raping one of the girls in a storeroom three years ago and after nine months the act produced no offspring.” + +Now you’re floored. You can’t believe what you’re hearing. + +“And you never thought to tell me this?” +“I never told you about it, since I saw no reason to trouble you with it especially since you had other matters on your mind at the time. The new eternals are primarily my concern and as such it was my responsibility to keep them in line. My initial thought was to put them to death obviously, but then I realized we don’t have the numbers to just throw away like that and I saw an opportunity to see IF the new eternals were fertile, unlike us. If they had been, it would’ve solved both of our problems by replenishing our numbers with superior eternal blood. So instead I only harshly punished the boys and reminded them that Dendrin does not permit the harming of fellow shadows and that if they ever do it again, then they will suffer final judgment by your hand. They obeyed and understood.” +“And what of the victim?” +“It took some time, but I calmed the sister and reassured her that it would never happen again, but to never speak of it for it may disrupt the order of the shadows. She understood. I watched her for a while to see if she was pregnant, but nothing ever showed up and that was the end of it. A pity, but I still held out hope that maybe it was only one gender that was sterile. I don’t know which one though, so that’s why I was saying earlier that it might’ve been in our best interest to let the Brother Seminai have his way with that peasant girl. A potential half eternal is still better than none.” + +You know Talia sees the new eternals to a certain extent as her “children” and as such she’s tends to do the protective mother thing on rare occasions. You also know that Talia still harbored the idea of re-creating the shadow order with hundreds of eternal babies. Especially after you told her of how you and her couldn’t have any, but you never thought she’d go to these lengths. This is almost delusional, no, it IS delusional and you’re putting a stop to it right now. + +“Talia, this is…misguided. It’s obvious that these eternals are just like us in that they are sterile. And I don’t think replenishing our numbers by raping the population is the answer.” +“Oh? Just like your choice to allow Flog to enslave several towns was misguided? Well I don’t see you coming up with any better ideas on attempting to preserve the order from dying out, let alone the eternals! Don’t you dare make me out to be some monster, I’m only trying to figure out a way to keep us from just disappearing from history once we’re all dead and turned to dust!” Talia yells getting upset in the process. She’s completely ignoring all “protocol” that you’re Shadow Master at this point, but you don’t care about that, never have when it comes to her. Still, you’re going to have to settle this matter before the night’s over and to be fair, she’s right in that you aren’t in any position to judge her. Ultimately the both of you make up and you make the decision that you’re going to call a meeting of the shadows. + +It’s just as well you decide to get your “house in order” because the snowstorm only gets worse as the night goes on and you’re literally snowed in for about a month, but fortunately you’ve got more than enough food stored up. You take the time to re-establish the rules and what is acceptable and what isn’t. + +This goes about as well as can be expected. Nobody speaks up out of turn or protests, but you know that there is a simmering resentment underneath. By the time the snowstorm is over, you’re glad to send them all out to go seek out Flog and murder him along with anyone under his command.. + +When you get to the next enslaved village, you find the place in even worse shape than the first one. The snowstorm hit this place pretty badly and apparently not much food had been stored up. Gruesome sights of half eaten bodies on spits are prominent and not all of them consist of human slaves, some of them are of other orcs, even an ogre. You’re attacked on sight immediately, but it’s probably more due to hunger than anything else. After a quick skirmish you don’t find anything else alive in the village. All the slaves have either been eaten or froze to death. Flog apparently wasn’t here either, you shake your head and mutter “Of course it would have to be the last one.” + +Going to the final village, you find it in better condition than the last one, but that isn’t saying much. Looking at the mostly eaten giant laying outside the village, it looks like Flog got enterprising in his cannibalism and rationed out the meat on a larger target. + +The gate isn’t even guarded and you walk right in. Orcs and slaves alike both take notice. It is there you finally catch sight of Flog. + +“Flog.” You call out. +“Shadow.” He answers. + +There is a brief pause of wondering what your intentions exactly are, but not for long and he orders his people to defend themselves. It’s a futile order as the new eternals have been itching for a real fight since they left Evergloom and are more than a match for the orcs and ogres. You can only hope none of them decide to take out their enthusiasm on the human slaves like last time. + +Flog himself is cut down in a joint effort between you and Cyrus. Flog never does question why you’re attacking him, probably because he was too busy trying to survive at the time. Wouldn’t matter anyway, his fate was decided long ago. + +“What are we going to do about the slaves?” Cyrus asks. +“Free them before we leave of course.” You remark. +“Do you think they’ll really survive? None of them look too good.” +“Well of course they don’t, they’re fucking slaves, Cyrus. What are you suggesting, that we take them with us?” +“Well no, I just wasn’t sure, since you seemed to want to help the ones in the other village.” +“If there’s anything I’ve learned, it’s that we’ve done enough to these folks. The best thing we can do for them has been done. We’ve freed them. It’ll be up to them if they want to survive.” +“Understood.” + +With that last bit of wisdom, the slaves are freed though none of them are in any particular condition to enjoy it. You take your leave before they muster up the strength to start cursing you like the last ones did. + +On the long trek back home, you ponder the future of what you’re going to have to do to keep this order sustainable and right now you’re coming up blank. You hope that you can to better than that soon, because that’s an unacceptable solution. It’s times like this when you wish you had a misplaced faith in a god so that you could pray to them for guidance. + +Of course it wouldn’t do you much good, if that god were anything like Dendrin. +> Years pass... +Year 45 + +“It’s no use Master, I tried to speak with the mayor, but they refuse to deal with us anymore. They said it is no longer a good idea to trade with us anymore since they depend on other the trade of other villages and they’re more important.” Brother Gannon tells you. + +And that was the last of the known places in Rask to cut ties with you. Now you’re truly on your own. This has been going on for quite some time now ever since citizens of those enslaved towns you freed managed to make contact with the other towns south of you. There were always rumors, but nobody ever knew for sure, they may not have even cared, but when those ex-slaves told them of the exact horrors they faced, well it put you in a pretty bad light and you weren’t exactly on the honor list to begin with. One by one the towns started banning shadows from even entering and stopped trade with you. + +Normally two such things wouldn’t mean a lot, but given that were currently attempting to recruit through missionary work again, that is no longer an option at all now. As for trade, the shadows are self reliant, but the land is pretty harsh and sometimes a little trade for things you need helps a lot. You don’t have that option either anymore. + +The shadows are divided on their opinions. Some say none of it matters as long as they trust in Dendrin to provide. These are mostly from the older human shadows. Some of the ones with families are a little more concerned, but most of them have taken it upon themselves to become dedicated hunters and gatherers. Cyrus surprisingly is in this camp. He and Draven have been responsible for bringing in most of the basic supplies you need. Though sometimes they come back with things that don’t seem to come from the “wild”. You can only guess they’ve taken to thievery of some of the closer villages. Doesn’t matter to you, whatever works and as long as they don’t get caught. + +The eternal shadows on the other hand are militant as usual about things. They believe the villages should be paying you tribute for freeing them from the Empire in the first place. In a way, you can understand their frustration, but launching an assault on the Raskians isn’t going to help anything. In the meantime you’ve been trying to keep them occupied with killing giantkin that lumber down from the northern mountains. It helps a little, but there have been times you’ve had to stop one or two of them from starting fights with the human shadows. + +You’ve spoken to Talia repeatedly about their behavior, but she tells you that she’s done all she can. She thinks part of the problem is that they never heard Dendrin’s voice or been in his presence, so while she has attempted to indoctrinate them as best she could, only Dendrin could make it absolute. Barring finding a book (which no longer exists) to perform that same ritual that you, Talia and Cyrus experienced long ago, you’d have to speak to Dendrin himself about it, and he still hasn’t seen fit to speak to you for a long time. It’s been quite a while now, you wonder if he’s finally lost interest in you. +Of course since you’ve wondered if that’s the case, he ends up popping up a few days later during your sleep. + +“Should’ve known better than to think you’d left for good.” You say. +“Well, I did leave for quite awhile, I can see where you came up with that conclusion, sorry about that, but I was preoccupied with other matters. No need to worry yourself about them and anyway I’m here now! So rejoice that I may help you in your time of need!” Dendrin replies. +“Yeah, don’t think that’ll be necessary.” +“Oh no? From what I can tell you’re having a bit of trouble keeping those eternal shadows of yours under control. I would’ve expected better, but no matter as I’ve said I’m here to help.” +“And just what did you have planned, were you going to offer to indoctrinate them like you tried to do with me?” +“A possibilities, is that what you’d like me to do?” +“Would it work?” +“Of course, but loyalty to the shadows or to me isn’t their problem. Your mate has done an excellent job indoctrinating them herself. In fact they’re so loyal they’re ready to start kill the local population because of it. I say why not let them?” +“Because you don’t have to deal with the headache of the situation and starting a potential war isn’t what I had planned.” +“Well why not? You’re obviously failing to keep the order thriving under peace, you might as well go for more violent means. It is what you Eternals are good at and what you know isn’t it? I’m sort of surprised you’ve shied away from it.” +“Does everyone believe me to some sort of warmonger? Look, yes its true I enjoy battle, I probably always will. I will also probably always feel a sense of boredom or dissatisfaction when going for long periods of time without doing it. However, I was never one to seek it out on a whim. I fought the Empire, because it was the right thing to do, I took out Flog for similar reasons and to correct mistakes of the past.” +“You killed Flog because he wasn’t useful anymore and he was becoming a thorn in your side, don’t fool yourself, Eternal.” +“Very well, but there was still a purpose. Attacking the Raskian people just because they distrust us or hate us? What is the purpose? Some sort of petty revenge because they won’t bow down? Why should they, and I can’t say as I blame them. Even not counting after they found out about the slavery incident, we were attempting to convert their people. People aren’t too fond of others pushing their beliefs on them. We were also part of the Empire too at one point. The shadows willingly aided it as a sort of secret security force in the hopes of betraying it one day. Sure there was always the claim that it was for “everyone” but at the core it was ALWAYS for the shadows first and foremost and you KNOW it because YOU were the one that set the rebellion in motion centuries ago.” +“And? What if it was?” +“Yes, the ends justify the means and I understand that, but I see no justification in attacking the Raskians. If my goal had been to carve out some sort of Shadow version the Empire I might as well had fought for the other side instead and saved myself the trouble. Besides if we did start attacking, they would see us exactly as how we saw Flog; A thorn in the side, which had outlived its usefulness. Sure we could easily subjugate them all, but only at a great cost of stretching ourselves very thin and we all saw how that worked out for the Empire.” +”Those are all interesting things to think about, but I think your real problem is clear enough and quite basic. You’ve primarily got a division of the flock and that’s your biggest concern. You’ve got normals and you’ve got Eternals. You aren’t going to be able to settle anything properly until get rid of one or the other and if you have any intention on keeping this order together like you’re trying to do…why are you at this point?” +“Good question, but I think the only answer is the same one as usual.” +“Oh yes, your mate…well I suppose that does make things a bit harder for you doesn’t it? I don’t even think she would want you disposing of her “children.” Might make for an unhappy marriage I suppose. Then again, the normal shadows are the only ones who can breed. Yes, looks like you’re going to have an interesting decision to make.” +“I’m not ordering half of the shadows to death just for your amusement.” +“You might not have to, events may thrust you into such a position where you’ll be forced to choose one side or the other anyway. Well I leave it in your capable hands as usual shadow. As usual I’ll be watching.” + +As usual Dendrin has not helped you at all. Nice to see some things never change. Still, the new eternals are the ones that have caused problems and will probably continue to do so in the future. It would be nice if they just went away. + +You flirt with the idea that maybe whittling down their numbers might at least make them more manageable. Unfortunately they’ve proven quite capable in combat, so you’d have to find some sort of excuse of sending them deep into giant country, namely the actual mountains. You’d probably have to lead them yourself too, just to make sure everything goes “right.” + +Of course if you did this, you’re not only potentially causing problem between you and Talia if she ever found out, but also you’d be engaging in double dealing on a level equivalent to selling out those villages to Flog and you just learned the hard way on how wrong that was. +> Leave it alone +As much of a pain in the ass as they may be, you can’t just start planning a mass assassination of them because of it. They really haven’t defied you directly yet anyway. Of course you’ve rather them not get to that point, so you’re going to hope that things get better… + +Naturally things like this never just “get better”. + +Year 46 + +“That’s it! They went too fucking far this time. You warned them and more importantly I warned them about this. I told them to stay AWAY from the damn peasants and the villages, they didn’t and now we’ve got a massacre on our hands! Our reputation in this country is bad enough without assholes with short tempers slaughtering a handful of peasants that were rightfully giving them suspicious looks!” you yell. +“I think you need to calm yourself, this isn’t as bad as it may seem. Brother Seminai said that…” + +You interrupt Talia. + +“Ah yes, the usual instigator and trouble maker. Why wasn’t I surprised to hear it was he that came up with the idiotic plan to steal food from one of the local villages and why the hell were they doing it in the first place? Cyrus and Draven take care of that and they do a fine enough job of it!” +“I believe he just thought it might impress or please you to show some initiative.” +“If I wanted him to go skulking around pilfering supplies I would’ve given the order! His job and the rest of the eternal shadows are to just patrol our territory. It’s not that damn hard! If they were really bored they could’ve went hunting or even sought out a giant to kill. I mean they didn’t even use their cloak to go about their thievery! What the fuck were they thinking? They either wanted to get into a fight deliberately or they’re stupidier than I thought! Either way I’m not putting up with such incompetence, where are the five of them right now?” +“They’re currently in the barracks, but I don’t think you should…” + +You push Talia out of the way and head to the barracks, she chases after you and tries to plead on their behalf, but you’re tired of it and them. After today, everything is going to be different in more ways than one. + +You get to the barracks and see several of the eternal shadows standing around talking, the five involved in the incident are in the center. All of them look at you when you enter the room. + +“You have disobeyed direct orders from me and more importantly Dendrin. I don’t care what your excuses are, because I’m tired of hearing them. The punishment will be death.” +You say and draw your weapon. Talia cries out a “No!” but you are unmoved. + +To their credit, Brother Seminai and the other four step forward and kneel before you. + +“We accept your decision Shadow Master…but I beg you not to punish all of us. It was my idea. I beg not for my life, but those of my brothers who merely followed my lead.” +“Then they deserve death even more than you, since they were foolish enough to simply follow like sheep. This is my final judgment and the will of Dendrin!” + +With those words you kill Brother Seminai first, then you go down the line. All the rest of the Eternals stand watching. You think this might be the first time they’ve actually paid any genuine attention to you. With your sword drenched in blood you point to the five bodies on the floor. + +“These five disobeyed and have paid their price, but we may still pay our own due to their actions. You lot always seem eager for battle, well I certainly hope you want that, because I guarantee that it will definitely be coming to us.” + +You turn to Talia, who is trying to cry as quietly as possible at seeing five of her “children” dead. You lift her chin up with your hand. + +“Talia…my love. See to it that they’re ready to attack Volgst in twenty minutes.” +“(sniffle) You…you’re commanding an attack on one of the villages?” she asks in confusion. +“What choice have I got? These fucking idiots just started an incident that can’t be repaired by diplomacy, which wouldn’t be an option for us anyway. The way I see it, we either start attacking fast and hard now, or we wait around for them to build up an army of some sort. We’re already going to be vilified, might as well go with it at this point.” + +Year 48 + +It’s amazing how quickly the tide of a war can change in just a couple years. You’re sure the Empire felt the same way. + +You stand amidst the ruins of Evergloom. Well not really the ruins so much as the “empty halls” of Evergloom. Almost all of the shadows are dead, you’ve spent most of the day clearing the bodies. You knew the Raskians would strike back, that was certain. It was also futile on their part. Even the most skilled militiamen their towns could muster wouldn’t be any match for the shadows. You also knew you wouldn’t feasibly be able to occupy the towns, so you didn’t bother, instead putting most of them to the torch. You might as well been called “The Shadow Butcher of Rask” (The old ghost of Kane must be laughing his crazy head off at that one.) + +However what wasn’t anticipated was the amount of wealth the Raskians scraped together in order to fight back. They hired lots of Svelk mercenaries to assist in the war. The dark elves proved to be better fighters and just as ruthless. You knew this having had to fight a few of them during the Empire war, but the new eternals let their arrogance get the better of them as usual and many of them were killed before they figured out that this wasn’t a game anymore. + +The major turning point was year ago at the battle of Keplavisk where the Raskians won their first outright victory against you. Since that time, it’s been one skirmish after another. Your numbers slowly dwindling and the Raskians getting support from a warlord south of Rask. (He’s an ex-Empire general, so he’s probably helping due to revenge as well as for his own personal gain on Rask) + +Then bad timing struck when Evergloom suffered giant tribe attack, you don’t know what caused them to suddenly stir from their mountains, but they struck hard. Didn’t help that the vicious svelk took advantage of this situation by slipping in their own assassination team. The target wasn’t you or even any of the eternals though. It was any child or mother they found in the Evergloom. They had succeeded in their plan by the time they were all cut down. + +This was devastating to the morale of the human shadows, who increasingly began blaming the eternal shadows for causing this mess in the first place. Eventually all that unifying faith in Dendrin bullshit went out the window and ultimately the tempers exploded into an orgy of violence. + +What you’re cleaning up right now is the bloody aftermath of four days of infighting. Only a few of the eternal shadows survived and they are now no longer the loyal disciples of Dendrin anymore. The events have changed them into the selfish cold blooded killers that they were always were at their core. The ones that survived abandoned Evergloom, presumably to go wage their own personal battle on the Raskians. You guess that they’ll probably be little better than common bandits and probably survive just as long as one. + +The funny thing is they were bred probably in the hopes of destroying the shadows, and they’ve actually done it. Perhaps a little later than what was planned, but the shadows are certainly no more. + +The Eternals will soon follow as well. Cyrus is dead. Died defending his “normal” lover Draven. You sort of wish you went out the same way, but ever the survivor you managed to live when others died. Besides, you had to kill Talia yourself when she sided with her “children”, claiming that you always hated them and how all of this was your fault. She never did get over the fact that you killed five of them in front of her and by the time the big fight occurred the both of you weren’t exactly on amicable terms anymore. Still you never did harbor the same sort of feelings of anger for her that she did for you. + +As you look down at her bloody body, you shed a few tears and say a few words telling her that you still love her. After a few more moments, you put her body with the rest and set the pile on fire, before leaving Evergloom forever. + +You briefly wonder if you should seek your death in battle with the Raskians, but you dismiss that plan since you’d hate to give them the satisfaction. Instead you decide to go further north, to the mountains where the giants roam. Surely you’ll be taken down eventually by a combination of them and the harsh elements alone. + +You figure you’ll get there quicker by speeding yourself up, but you immediately find out that your spell doesn’t work. In fact none of your magic works. It would appear that Dendrin has finally lost interest. + +“Huh. Well that’s one good thing at least.” You say and begin to walk.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 45 + +“It’s no use Master, I tried to speak with the mayor, but they refuse to deal with us anymore. They said it is no longer a good idea to trade with us anymore since they depend on other the trade of other villages and they’re more important.” Brother Gannon tells you. + +And that was the last of the known places in Rask to cut ties with you. Now you’re truly on your own. This has been going on for quite some time now ever since citizens of those enslaved towns you freed managed to make contact with the other towns south of you. There were always rumors, but nobody ever knew for sure, they may not have even cared, but when those ex-slaves told them of the exact horrors they faced, well it put you in a pretty bad light and you weren’t exactly on the honor list to begin with. One by one the towns started banning shadows from even entering and stopped trade with you. + +Normally two such things wouldn’t mean a lot, but given that were currently attempting to recruit through missionary work again, that is no longer an option at all now. As for trade, the shadows are self reliant, but the land is pretty harsh and sometimes a little trade for things you need helps a lot. You don’t have that option either anymore. + +The shadows are divided on their opinions. Some say none of it matters as long as they trust in Dendrin to provide. These are mostly from the older human shadows. Some of the ones with families are a little more concerned, but most of them have taken it upon themselves to become dedicated hunters and gatherers. Cyrus surprisingly is in this camp. He and Draven have been responsible for bringing in most of the basic supplies you need. Though sometimes they come back with things that don’t seem to come from the “wild”. You can only guess they’ve taken to thievery of some of the closer villages. Doesn’t matter to you, whatever works and as long as they don’t get caught. + +The eternal shadows on the other hand are militant as usual about things. They believe the villages should be paying you tribute for freeing them from the Empire in the first place. In a way, you can understand their frustration, but launching an assault on the Raskians isn’t going to help anything. In the meantime you’ve been trying to keep them occupied with killing giantkin that lumber down from the northern mountains. It helps a little, but there have been times you’ve had to stop one or two of them from starting fights with the human shadows. + +You’ve spoken to Talia repeatedly about their behavior, but she tells you that she’s done all she can. She thinks part of the problem is that they never heard Dendrin’s voice or been in his presence, so while she has attempted to indoctrinate them as best she could, only Dendrin could make it absolute. Barring finding a book (which no longer exists) to perform that same ritual that you, Talia and Cyrus experienced long ago, you’d have to speak to Dendrin himself about it, and he still hasn’t seen fit to speak to you for a long time. It’s been quite a while now, you wonder if he’s finally lost interest in you. +Of course since you’ve wondered if that’s the case, he ends up popping up a few days later during your sleep. + +“Should’ve known better than to think you’d left for good.” You say. +“Well, I did leave for quite awhile, I can see where you came up with that conclusion, sorry about that, but I was preoccupied with other matters. No need to worry yourself about them and anyway I’m here now! So rejoice that I may help you in your time of need!” Dendrin replies. +“Yeah, don’t think that’ll be necessary.” +“Oh no? From what I can tell you’re having a bit of trouble keeping those eternal shadows of yours under control. I would’ve expected better, but no matter as I’ve said I’m here to help.” +“And just what did you have planned, were you going to offer to indoctrinate them like you tried to do with me?” +“A possibilities, is that what you’d like me to do?” +“Would it work?” +“Of course, but loyalty to the shadows or to me isn’t their problem. Your mate has done an excellent job indoctrinating them herself. In fact they’re so loyal they’re ready to start kill the local population because of it. I say why not let them?” +“Because you don’t have to deal with the headache of the situation and starting a potential war isn’t what I had planned.” +“Well why not? You’re obviously failing to keep the order thriving under peace, you might as well go for more violent means. It is what you Eternals are good at and what you know isn’t it? I’m sort of surprised you’ve shied away from it.” +“Does everyone believe me to some sort of warmonger? Look, yes its true I enjoy battle, I probably always will. I will also probably always feel a sense of boredom or dissatisfaction when going for long periods of time without doing it. However, I was never one to seek it out on a whim. I fought the Empire, because it was the right thing to do, I took out Flog for similar reasons and to correct mistakes of the past.” +“You killed Flog because he wasn’t useful anymore and he was becoming a thorn in your side, don’t fool yourself, Eternal.” +“Very well, but there was still a purpose. Attacking the Raskian people just because they distrust us or hate us? What is the purpose? Some sort of petty revenge because they won’t bow down? Why should they, and I can’t say as I blame them. Even not counting after they found out about the slavery incident, we were attempting to convert their people. People aren’t too fond of others pushing their beliefs on them. We were also part of the Empire too at one point. The shadows willingly aided it as a sort of secret security force in the hopes of betraying it one day. Sure there was always the claim that it was for “everyone” but at the core it was ALWAYS for the shadows first and foremost and you KNOW it because YOU were the one that set the rebellion in motion centuries ago.” +“And? What if it was?” +“Yes, the ends justify the means and I understand that, but I see no justification in attacking the Raskians. If my goal had been to carve out some sort of Shadow version the Empire I might as well had fought for the other side instead and saved myself the trouble. Besides if we did start attacking, they would see us exactly as how we saw Flog; A thorn in the side, which had outlived its usefulness. Sure we could easily subjugate them all, but only at a great cost of stretching ourselves very thin and we all saw how that worked out for the Empire.” +”Those are all interesting things to think about, but I think your real problem is clear enough and quite basic. You’ve primarily got a division of the flock and that’s your biggest concern. You’ve got normals and you’ve got Eternals. You aren’t going to be able to settle anything properly until get rid of one or the other and if you have any intention on keeping this order together like you’re trying to do…why are you at this point?” +“Good question, but I think the only answer is the same one as usual.” +“Oh yes, your mate…well I suppose that does make things a bit harder for you doesn’t it? I don’t even think she would want you disposing of her “children.” Might make for an unhappy marriage I suppose. Then again, the normal shadows are the only ones who can breed. Yes, looks like you’re going to have an interesting decision to make.” +“I’m not ordering half of the shadows to death just for your amusement.” +“You might not have to, events may thrust you into such a position where you’ll be forced to choose one side or the other anyway. Well I leave it in your capable hands as usual shadow. As usual I’ll be watching.” + +As usual Dendrin has not helped you at all. Nice to see some things never change. Still, the new eternals are the ones that have caused problems and will probably continue to do so in the future. It would be nice if they just went away. + +You flirt with the idea that maybe whittling down their numbers might at least make them more manageable. Unfortunately they’ve proven quite capable in combat, so you’d have to find some sort of excuse of sending them deep into giant country, namely the actual mountains. You’d probably have to lead them yourself too, just to make sure everything goes “right.” + +Of course if you did this, you’re not only potentially causing problem between you and Talia if she ever found out, but also you’d be engaging in double dealing on a level equivalent to selling out those villages to Flog and you just learned the hard way on how wrong that was. +> Engage the plan +Given that you were supposed to be loyal to the Empire and then backstabbed them in probably one of the most traitorous acts in history. What’s one more betrayal? Your situation with Flog, is much different than your situation with the new eternals. With him, you originally caused more problems by keeping him alive. With the new eternals you’ll actually be solving problems by killing them off. It’s going to be tricky, but you’re pretty sure you can do it. + +You decide to call a meeting that you have received a message from Dendrin himself and how he has warned you of an impending invasion of giants. Dendrin has told you that you need to march into the mountains and thin out the population as much as possible in a pre-emptive strike since they’d never expect it. + +Since this would be a “mission” for the best warriors, several of the new eternals are perfect for it, doesn’t even take much convincing since they’re all practically begging to go. You don’t take them all however, since that might be a bit suspicious. Instead you take all of the ones that you know have been showing the most signs of disruptive behavior. (Which is still most of them). As far as you can tell all of the shadows, human or eternal take you at your word and suspect nothing. The only two you’re concerned about is Talia and Cyrus. + +Talia, is a little concerned, that you’re embarking on this dangerous undertaking with several of her “children”, but using the excuse that it is “Dendrin’s will” stirs up no suspicion from her. Cyrus volunteers to go, indeed he assumed he was, but you tell him that he’s needed at Evergloom in case something major happens while you’re away. Cyrus is probably so honored that you’d put him in charge of something so important that he doesn’t get suspicious either. + +You set off with around thirty of the eternals and head straight for the Raskian Mountains. You don’t really have plan at this point, other than to wander the mountains long enough killing giants that attrition will take its toll. When the survivor number gets low enough, you’ll take care of the rest personally, and make the trek back to Evergloom alone claiming how you eventually fought a giant king and that everyone died gloriously in Dendrin’s honor. + +Before you even reach the mountains you get into combat with ogre tribes, then mixed tribes with a couple giants and ogres. No problems so far, but you’re noticing that a few of the eternals are starting to get a little tired because the fools have been over using their shadow magic. This is going to be over sooner than you think if they continue to not pace themselves. + +Tracking giant lairs in the mountains really isn’t all that difficult, just like for the large footprints in the snow and the really big caves. The first few battles go well, but after that, people start getting wounded. A few days go by and exhaustion starts setting in along with hunger. It’s not just tough on the eternal shadows, it’s a challenge for you as well since you’re right there along with all of them. Things start to get interesting when you start facing something more than giants, namely lizard like creatures that breathe gouts of ice at you. These ice drakes are the cause of your first casualties. + +A couple more days pass, and you’ve lost a little more than half of your people. Most of them in battle, but a couple of them have died due to the treacherous terrain of the mountains like falling off the side of it. You sort of expected them to whine or at least grumble by this point. They haven’t done any of that, and they’ve followed your orders without question. You’re a little impressed. The fact that so many of them have died on this mission is probably a humbling experience for them; perhaps it has even changed them a bit. You decide that maybe you don’t need to kill them all and just an experience like this is enough. + +When you wake up the next day, you call the remaining eternals to order and tell them that Dendrin has visited you and has said that your mission is finished and that the invasion will no longer take place. (You actually feel pretty safe saying that considering how many giant you really did kill!) You then also tell them that Dendrin has looked favorably on all of them for carrying out his orders and obeying their Shadow Master without argument. They seem to like the idea that their god has given them some praise. + +As you make your way back to Evergloom, you begin to think about this plan you came up with and while you don’t feel bad about it, you do wonder if there was another way that might not have involved so much death. Still, what’s done is done now, and it seems to have had a desired effect. Probably for the best that you did cut the plan short though since even you are feeling very tired after this ordeal and would like to get some rest in a proper bed. Also reminds you of how you aren’t as young as you used to be either. + +The rest of the trip is fairly uneventful until you step into Kragen Pass and then you start to get an uneasy feeling half way through… + +A rumbling is heard on both sides of the pass and then several large snow covered boulders are flying over your heads. + +“GIANTS! RUN!” you shout. + +During your bloody march through the mountains, some of the giants figured you were trying to kill all of their kind. It would appear that when facing potential genocide, the big brutes are able to employ a little strategy in their usually dim noggins, like retreating from the mountains and ambushing you in this pass by throwing big ass rocks at you. Crude, simple, but effective. + +Before anyone can speed their way through the pass, the giants block it off by causing a minor avalanche on both ends while continuing to hurl boulders at you. In everyone’s current state of exhaustion, it isn’t long before some of the eternals are crushed. + +You try your best to find a potential hiding spot or even a small cave, but there are none. Eventually the barrage of boulders being thrown crushes you too. + +The irony in all this is your actions actually cause a massive giant attack on Evergloom in the next few weeks as they seek to preserve themselves from being killed, by destroying Evergloom and the remaining shadows.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Chapter 3B1: Shadow Master + + +Year 41 + +“We had to kill another group of ogres sniffing around the fort today.” Cyrus remarks. +“Yeah, I know the battle woke me up, by the time I got ready, all of them had been killed.” You reply. “I’m going to have to speak with Flog, because I thought we had an understanding that he was to keep the giant and ogre population down or at least manageable.” +“I say we just kill him and be done with it.” +“Hmm, yeah I know he’s not your favorite person, but he’s proven himself useful, vital even in the past. Besides he’s the only thing keeping that’s keeping that rabble in line.” +“He’s also the only thing keeping them organized. Maybe he’s planning on making an army to march upon us.” +“Yes, I have considered that too, I’m just wondering what’s worse. A completely hostile unchecked horde of giantkin or a semi organized army of the same which may or may not be reasoned with.” +“Perhaps you may need to ask Dendrin for guidance on this matter.” Cyrus says. +“Perhaps…” + +If Dendrin actually did have any advice on the matter, it probably wouldn’t do you much good anyway considering how whimsical he is, not to mention he’s chosen not to speak to you for quite some time, as he is prone to do. + +Being Shadow Master has been a bit of odd since you’ve taken the position mainly because you don’t feel like you have a specific purpose. + +The first two years were easy enough as you were still mostly concerning yourself with rebuilding Evergloom for defense, additional training for the shadows and making sure Rask kept its independence, but that was never truly ever an issue since the Empire never did make a come back and reports of their continual descent into chaos was assured. + +The next two years consisted of a halfhearted attempt at spreading “the faith” mainly to build up numbers. From what you could piece together of shadow history from the few books that Cyrus still had, the shadows never had an aggressive policy on such things, pre or post Empire days, they mostly relied on people either coming to them of their own free will or being “born” into it. There have been a few shadow births, but you’d rather have a more traditional way of gaining recruits because “breeding” a new order isn’t really going to be a big option seeing as your current ratio of men and women isn’t great and those with Eternal heritage can’t reproduce at all. While you could’ve easily told everyone to start putting the remaining Raskian towns to the blade and do the whole “convert or die” thing, you decided it wouldn’t be that great of an idea for several reasons. So you relied on a more missionary way of doing things like sending certain shadows to towns and stressing the benefits of being a shadow. It got a few people interested, but nothing major. The Raskians in general have become less trustful of the shadows over the years now that the war with the Empire is over, almost as if they are expecting you to start launching a religious crusade. You soon got the impression that the Raskians would prefer if the lot of you would just leave them alone now. Somewhat ungrateful considering all you’ve done in securing the country’s freedom, but hardly surprising. + +Last year was the official fall of the Empire, from what you heard the Emperor’s palace was in flames and the few remaining generals or strong military men have taken it upon themselves to carve out various fiefdoms for themselves while other places have gone the way of total anarchy. There was even a little bit of celebrating in Rask and among the shadows when it occurred. However, you couldn’t help but be a little disappointed that the great enemy you struggled so hard against was now gone forever. Like you craved the chance to fight them again if only for the opportunity to be in battle once again which has sorely been lacking. + +Now with the giantkin starting to become a problem once again, you’re half tempted to take Cyrus’ advice. You’re certain that it would be a sure victory for you and to an extent, Flog has been getting less and less reasonable as the years have gone on. Perhaps it is time to get rid of him and take your chances with more problems with giantkin in the future. + +Instead of talking with Dendrin about it, you choose to discuss this situation with someone that will have a better opinion on the situation. + +“It sounds like you’ve sort of made your mind up about Flog already.” Talia remarks. +“You might be right, but I was wondering what your opinion was on the matter.” +“Better you should ask Dendrin for guidance on that, rather than me. Though I suppose if he has become more militant maybe it’s for the best, but…” +“But you think I should try to renegotiate with him?” +“No, I wasn’t going to suggest that, I was going to say maybe we should leave Rask altogether.” +“What? Why?” +“The people here obviously don’t want us around, food isn’t the easiest thing to come by and we’re basically the first target whenever a group of ogres or giants come lumbering down south.” +“We faced the Empire and survived against all odds, I think we can handle being disliked by the plebs and the occasional giant attack.” +“You’re probably right, but I just feel like we’re stagnating here. Like we aren’t rebuilding the order the way that we should. We’ve also lost a lot of history, even certain rituals. I mean I’ve remembered as much as we were taught and tried to pass these lessons on to the new eternals when I first trained them and continue to do so. The tomes we still have here help a bit, but ultimately when we lost Gloom, we lost a lot more than just a home.” +“Well, where would we go? +“That I don’t know. Delerg perhaps?” +“That’s quite the distance, not to mention the area isn’t all that much more hospitable in terms of environment given that it’s mostly swamp.” +“Yes, but it is the birthplace of the shadows and we do have an old temple there.” +“Yeah and it hasn’t been used in centuries and is probably a crumbling ruin that’s half sunk into the swamp by now! Has anyone here actually ever been there, because I’ve only ever heard about it.” +“Yes, I believe a few of the older brothers and sisters have. They would know the best way to get there. I want to just say though, that this is merely my opinion. I do not know if moving all of us somewhere else is the best solution or if it will even help, but I just feel like the longer we stay here, the further away we’re going to get from our roots and in another couple of generations, the shadows won’t be anything like the ones of old. But perhaps that is Dendrin’s will, as I said I don’t know. Only you would know being the Shadow Master and able to speak to him directly for guidance.” + +You give an acknowledging nod, but in reality you’re just left with another decision to make all by yourself. What Talia is suggesting sounds crazy and quite frankly you don’t even care about shadow history, but what does make this idea appealing is the journey and the challenge. You were just thinking about a change of some sort and while killing Flog and his little band would break up the monotony, perhaps a whole change of scenery is really in order. +> Make the journey to Delerg +While you aren’t convinced that going to Delerg is necessarily the best idea, maybe you do need a change of scenery. With the population being unhelpful and the troubles with Flog, it might very well be best to leave before this gets worse. Besides, while it isn’t common knowledge that you made a deal with Flog to enslave the northern most towns in exchange for his help, there have always been “rumors” amongst some of the Raskians and eventually those rumors are going to become an even bigger problem. + +Part of you feels like you’re “running away” from conflict and that somewhat bothers you. However, you spent your life running away from the Empire and striking at the right time to strengthen your own position while weakening their own. Why shouldn’t you employ a similar outlook on life in general? Retreat from an unfavorable position to hopefully a better one, it couldn’t hurt at this point. + +The next day you call all the shadows to gather in the main hall and announce that you’ve conversed with Dendrin and that he’s told you that the shadows need to go back to reclaim the shadow homeland in Delerg and that your future is there not in Rask. Many of the human shadows seem to be enthusiastic about this idea. The Eternal shadows less so, but that might be for several reasons. In any event, you tell everyone that all of you will be packing up everything and moving on as soon as possible. Since it is looking a snowstorm is coming you’ll have plenty of time to prepare and you’ll leave Evergloom when it subsides. You also ask some of the older shadows if they know where the original temple is exactly located in Delerg. Brother Theo says that he knows and that he remembers visiting it once back in his youth when he was escorting some rebels to the shadow safe houses in Delerg. + +“Despite it being in ruins and covered in overgrowth, I still felt it to be a place of power. Not power in the traditional sense, but more like a feeling. A feeling that the cause of the Shadows was the correct one and that by trusting in Dendrin, we would eventually return to the temple of our forefathers one day. It looks like that day has finally come and I couldn’t be happier.” Brother Theo says. +“Well brother, we aren’t there yet. We’ve still got to get there. The Empire might be gone, but who knows what might’ve taken its place. The journey still might be dangerous.” You reply. +“I know Shadow Master, but Dendrin guided us successfully through the Empire War. I know he will guide us to our home just as easily.” +“Yes, I suppose he will.” + +A month passes before you can actually get going due to the snowstorm. Everyone’s glad to leave too being stuck in the fort for so long. You wish you hadn’t had to eat up a lot of your food supply though, but you figure you’ll worry about food along the way either by hunting for it or trading for it when possible. + +As you and the shadows begin your exodus from Evergloom, you look back at the old Empire fort that was your home for so long. You wonder how long it’ll be before someone else takes residence there. If you had to guess, Flog will probably figure out it isn’t occupied anymore, take it over and start using it as a staging ground to assault the southern towns of Rask. You’ll bet the Raskians will wish you were still around when that eventually happens. + +The journey through Rask is slow going. You can’t just speed yourselves up considering all the equipment and belongings you’ve got packed on wagons, carts and horses. Still, you aren’t in any danger as you pass through Raskian towns. While it alarms the people to see so many shadows nobody dares attack you. You find trade easy, as they are eager to help see you on your way. You didn’t really think you’d have trouble traveling through Rask though, it’s after Rask that you’re more concerned about. + +From what news has reached you, ever since the Empire fell the Quala province has fragmented into several bickering warlords, each fighting for control of what’s left. In some ways the people of the land are in a worse situation than when the Empire existed, but that isn’t something you can really dwell on now. Your goal is to get through the land and you’re sure to run into someone’s territory as you travel through and they’ll no doubt be hostile about it. Not much can be done except hope for the best because much like speeding yourselves up isn’t an option, neither is cloaking yourselves. Well you could, but those horses and wagons are still going to be visible. + +“How are we going to play this?” Talia asks as you stand at the Rask border. +“I know our information structure started falling into disuse when we drove the Empire from Rask, but does anyone have any information on what the exact situation is in Quala?” you ask. +“Last I heard, an ex-Empire general declared himself the local warlord of the northern most portion of Quala. A General Ackerson I believe.” Cyrus remarks. +“Never heard of him.” +“I don’t think most did, even before the rebellion he wasn’t a very prominent general and the Empire tended to have more than a few useless high ranking officers that never did much. I only knew about him due to all the years working in the shadow cells and keeping abreast of all the Empire military commanders. He got his rank mostly due to family connections and was never put in charge of anything important. I don’t even think he was even in charge of anything during the rebellion days, at least not that know of when I was still situated in Quala. Still, I assume he must have some skill in combat and have some charisma if he’s made himself a warlord now. Well that or very rich which might be more of the case.” Brother Theo adds. +“Okay, any other information on warlords in the area?” you ask. + +Nobody knows anything else other than he seems to be the top one. Funny how the most obscure people can rise to power when the opportunity presents itself. Stepping off the road, you could probably just trespass through General Ackerson’s territory to reach Delerg and you’d only have him to deal with him if need be, of course it’s going to be even slower going due to all your baggage. The terrain that way is known to be somewhat hilly and if gets too rough, you might even have to leave some of your stuff behind. Rough terrain aside, there’s also the open fields you’d have to cross too. Not much cover if a large patrol of archers happened upon you. + +Of course sticking to the road will be quicker and unobtrusive to your baggage carts, but you’d still have to trespass through Ackerson’s territory and assuming you got through that, you’d probably have to go through some other warlord’s territory as well before you reached Delerg. On top of all this, you have no idea how you’ll be treated by any towns you pass through. +> Travel off road +The Empire might be dead, but chances are shadows probably still aren’t welcomed in these parts. You’re not afraid of a fight, but you aren’t sure just how much manpower and support this warlord has and there is no need to take unnecessary chances. Besides, some of the shadows traveling with you have actual families; if there is going to be growth in this organization then you can’t risk them. + +“Okay everyone, we’re heading off road. I’m warning you now, we may have to drop baggage if need be, but until then, we’re continuing our journey to Delerg. I also want all of you Eternal shadows to cloak yourself and walk on our perimeter. If you see anything or anyone that might be hostile, don’t reveal yourself, but instead report to either me, Cyrus or Talia directly and take a position that will allow you to ambush any interlopers when the time comes.” +“Won’t we look like an easier target with less people visible? Shouldn’t we have a show of force instead?” Cyrus asks. +“We could, but we’d likely be attacked anyway since we’re probably going to be outnumbered here. This way at least we’ll have the drop on anyone who decides to attack. There’s no easy way to do this, better that we play to our strengths and use stealth. That’s why I want to avoid the roads altogether.” +“Very well Shadow Master.” Cyrus remarks. + +As you continue your journey across the long stretch of uneven fields, Talia comes up to speak to you. + +“I think you’ve made the right decision in traveling off road like this.” +“Hope so, we’re pretty open out here. I’d hate for some platoon of patrolling archers to start firing at us.” +“Well the cloaked scouts around us should give us a little warning at least. That was a good idea too. In fact I’m pretty excited about this whole journey. It’s a new chance to start over and I think it will do everyone some good…though I hope we will find a book or writings of the old ritual to open up the portal to Dendrin again.” +“Well, it’s a pretty old ruin and in swamp. I don’t think we can get our hopes up too much that anything like that survived, but that doesn’t matter right? I mean if people are going to follow Dendrin, then he’ll find a way to reach them surely.” +“I suppose you’re right, I just…well it’s silly I guess, but the new batch of eternal brothers and sisters never got properly indoctrinated by Dendrin and I think it would do them well to hear his words from his own voice.” +“I don’t think we need to worry about their loyalty or dedication at this point, you’ve probably trained and taught them better than anyone could’ve about the ways of the shadow save for Dendrin himself.” +“Yeah…maybe that’s what’s needed...” + +Talia at this point gets very quiet. Her face shows a combination of fear and guilt. It’s obvious she wants to tell you more, but now she’s afraid to. + +“Talia, let’s ride over there from the rest of the group for a moment.” You say. + +Talia nods and rides off and you tell Cyrus to take oversee everything while you talk to Talia privately. When you ride over next to her she’s in the middle of crying. + +“Talia, I don’t know what this is all about, but you know you can tell me and not be afraid about it.” +“I’m not afraid of you… (sob) I mean I know your feelings for me are so strong that you’d probably be willing to overlook almost any transgression and that’s partly what I’m afraid of, because (sob) I don’t want you to get in trouble because of my decisions.” +“Wha…? How am I going to get into trouble? What IS this all about and start from the beginning.” + +After calming herself, Talia begins to tell you what exactly is troubling her and she starts from the beginning which apparently was three years ago. She tells you that she caught two of the male eternals raping one of the female ones in a storeroom and that she did nothing about it, because she wanted to see if they suffered from infertility like the old eternals did. Instead she let the two males off with a warning and convinced the victim that something like this would never happen again. She also tells you that of course the female never got pregnant so it would seem the infertility also exists in the new eternals as well. + +“And you never thought to tell me this before?” +“You had other concerns on your mind and I had it under control, or at least I thought I did…” +“What? What happened?” +“While we were waiting out the snowstorm, remember how Brother Seminai broke his neck while coming back from look out duty? He slipped on some ice and fell down the stairs?” +“(Sigh) Let me guess, he was pushed?” +“Sister Grace did. It was apparently in retaliation when he had raped her two night before. She told me and begged me not to tell you since she didn’t want to be punished for harming another shadow…it isn’t her fault. Its mine, I should’ve taught them all better, I am their mother and they are my children and I’ve failed them.” + +You shake your head at this point. You know Talia’s always had a maternal instinct towards the eternals, but you didn’t think it would go this far. You also have always known the newer eternals to be a bit more “wilder” but that only seemed to be in battle and you could easily rein them in. You never realized there was a deeper darkness within them and who knows how many harbor these undesirable traits. + +“Okay, first question. This Brother Seminai and Sister Grace were they also the ones involved three years ago? I mean is this a repeat action?” +“No, those were three different eternals.” +“Wonderful, I was hoping to limit my worry. Anyway, I know we’re low on the women folk in our order, but I think you know we can’t tolerate wanton raping just because their horny and undisciplined.” +“I know and it was wrong of me to keep this from you in the first place…I just wanted our order to flourish with the blood of eternals…I mean yes I have hope that the shadows will at least grow, but we’re also eternals and we will eventually die out.” +“Well, if these new ones are displaying these types of traits, maybe it’s better that we do. I mean I don’t pretend to be a devout clergy man that does nothing but good deeds and I will always have a desire for battle, I think most Eternals do having it bred into them, but I’ve never committed cruelty for the sake of it.” +“What are you going to do?” +“I’m not sure yet, but my other question is why did you think I would get into trouble?” +“Because while you knew nothing about this, you would still be innocent in Dendrin’s eyes and because I know your love for me is such that no matter what you decide punishment won’t befall me even though it should. Dendrin I fear would not look favorably on you if you decide to do nothing to all those guilty after hearing what I’ve told you.” + +It’s funny, but you’ve been keeping a bigger secret than Talia for decades. You almost feel like telling her that Dendrin isn’t going to give a shit what you decide especially since he hasn’t seen fit to even speak to you in years. + +In any case, you probably need to do something, though you just aren’t sure it needs to be now. You’re in the middle of potentially hostile territory and settling an internal dispute might not be the best thing right now. Still the new eternals are going to have to be dealt with on some level and the sooner the better. As for Talia, she’s right in that you wouldn’t do anything to her, but it is somewhat surprising that she allowed this to happen. She might be a bit delusional, but you still love her. You give her an answer that should seem impartial though. + +“Talia, I need to know the names of the brothers involved in the rape three years ago and I need to know of any other eternal who has displayed potential disruptive behavior within the shadow order. I will have to consult Dendrin on this and decide what should be done with them…and you.” +“I…I understand. I know you must be fair on this matter and I will accept any judgment that Dendrin sees fit to give.” +“Well, I will have to as well and despite you only just now telling me, I may still be in trouble as well. After all as Shadow Master I really should’ve been more aware of my own people, but don’t worry about me. I will beg Dendrin for his forgiveness and that of all involved in this. Perhaps he will show mercy.” +“We can only hope.” Talia replies and tells you the names as the two of you ride back to the group. + +Later that night you continue to ponder whether or not to dispose of your more troublesome followers. Granted the two in question haven’t done anything in three years, but that potential is always there, and so are the ones that haven’t done anything yet, but show signs of it. You can only guess this is more due to their breeding not anything they’ve been taught since they still uphold the tenets of being a shadow without question and that’s a bigger problem. + +If you kill them, is it going to stop there? All of them came out of those Derro tanks and who knows what the hell kind of magical concoction is coursing through their veins to make them behave in such an unstable manner and why is it becoming more of a problem lately? + +It’s times like this you almost wish that you actually COULD call upon Dendrin for his help… + +And why can’t you? + +What could it hurt? + +If you actually pray to him for help and he doesn’t listen, then nothing was lost and you’re back to what your plan was originally, which is dealing with the situation yourself in a violent manner. + +Of course if he actually does listen, he might very well help, but with a “catch.” You’ve known Dendrin for too long to know that when he does help, he doesn’t often do it in anyway that could be considered generous. +> Help yourself +You’ve gotten this far without begging for Dendrin’s help before, you’re not going to start now. Given that he hasn’t spoken to you in years maybe he’s finally lost interest. If that’s the case you’d hate to tempt disrupting that by calling on him directly. + +Before you go to sleep, you decide that it’ll be better off to kill the problem eternals that look like they’re going to continue being as such. You’ll make up some sort of story that Dendrin told you or some such nonsense. Everyone will believe it. You have it done soon after you get to your destination though, no sense in wasting potential manpower in hostile territory. + +Having made your decision you drift off into a deep sleep. You’re really tired, the stress of the day and the move in general has gotten to you more than you thought! + +In fact you’re so tired you don’t even wake up when you’re attacked in the middle of the night. It isn’t until Talia slaps you across the face that you awaken. + +“Ow! What the hell’s going on?” you ask rubbing your cheek. +“We’re being attacked! Get up and move!” she shouts. + +A bright light is illuminating the nighttime sky along with several fire arrows. You’ roll under a wagon to avoid immediate danger. + +It would appear General Ackerson’s men have discovered you and have attacked in force. They’re being smart about it too, attacking at night with archers and unfortunately also a couple of battle mages who are making the darkness disappear with their spells. + +“How the hell did they sneak up on us? I had scouts around the perimeter to avoid this sort of thing!” you mutter to yourself. Doesn’t matter now you suppose, what you have to do is get the hell out of here as fast as possible. You don’t like running, but you’ll end up losing more people if you stick around and fight. Besides, there are probably more troops behind the archers or at least on their way. However you do see this as an opportunity, in fact it saves you the trouble of even weeding out various eternals. + +You deliberately give orders that all the eternals need to engage Ackerson’s army while the rest of the shadows make the escape attempt. + +“Everyone else, grab what you can, head for those hills, speed up and cloak!” you shout. +“You can’t send them to engage the army, they’ll all be killed!” Talia says. +“If it is Dendrin’s will, then that’s what’s going to happen, better that they should die in his service than all of be destroyed, now let’s move!” you shout back. + +Talia isn’t happy with the decision, but follows your lead. + +The soldiers are still shooting at you of course, but they’re doing it blind. Some of the mages get a few people though by blindly throwing fireballs in the general direction. It isn’t long before the ranged attacks become lessened when the eternals close in for combat. As you get closer and closer to the hills, the arrows and fireballs have seemed to have stopped altogether. + +The next few days also involve some fighting with more soldiers in the hills, and while it’s mostly swordsmen you still don’t have a major advantage as you’re short several good warriors since losing all of the eternals. You curse the fact that you behaved so rashly. Though nobody is cursing more than Cyrus when Dravin gets cut down by a lucky soldier, he nearly kills all the skirmishers himself after that happens. After the battle he still hasn’t calmed down. + +“Cyrus I know you’re upset about Dravin, but we’ve got to keep moving.” +“Fuck you! This is YOUR fault!” Cyrus shouts as he morns over Dravin’s body. “If you hadn’t sent all the eternals to sacrifice themselves we might’ve had more people with us to close the gaps in our defenses! What the hell were you thinking?” +“I was thinking that I was trying to save most of the shadows instead of all of getting killed instead!” +“Well you’ve sure done a great job of that oh great Shadow Master!” +“Cyrus, you honestly have a problem with me being Shadow Master after you practically begged like a pathetic worm for me to spare your life?” +“And that was the biggest mistake of my entire life! I see now that you were never the chosen one of Dendrin, either that or he’s abandoned you and as a result us completely! Did you ever really talk to him at all or did you just make it all up?” +“I knew I should’ve killed you…” +“What’s stopping you now?” + +Talia attempts to separate the pair of you, but both of you are ready to draw weapons on each other. Meanwhile Theo is attempting to keep the rest of the shadows in order who are not only demoralized by the attacks and loss of people, but also the fact that their leadership is fighting on top of it. + +Things go from bad to worse when Talia is accidentally stabbed in the chest by Cyrus when he tries to stab you instead. You see her fall to ground with a look of shock on her face. Cyrus stands with a bloody dagger in his hand with a similar look of surprise on his face. + +“I…didn’t…I meant to…I…” Cyrus stutters as your eyes look right through him. + +You waste no time and tackle him to the ground. Theo shouts for you to stop, but you don’t hear anything until you hear the last sounds of Cyrus’ breath as you choke the life out of him before breaking his neck. By the time you’re done, no body knows what to think or do. They just stand around watching the self destruction of their order. + +You go back over to Talia’s body and find her still alive, but breathing weakly. + +“I’m sorry Talia, I…should’ve be able to stop…” +“Stop what? It was Dendrin’s will that…I die obviously…at least I’ll see my eternals again…my children…” Talia says and lapses into unconsciousness and then death. + +You shed a few tears over her death, then Theo tries to get you to move. + +“Shadow Master we have to keep moving as you said.” +“You want to keep moving go ahead Theo. I’ll be staying here.” Looking off in the distance. +“But you’re the Shadow Master, you have to…” +“I don’t have to do shit! You want the job? Go ahead, I make you Shadow Master. Lots of luck! Now begone!” you shout. + +Theo stands there for a while and starts to say something, but stops. Instead he just tells the remaining shadows to keep moving and eventually they’re all out of the area leaving you alone with several dead bodies surrounding you. + +When the rest of General Ackerson’s men reach you, you’re still sitting on the ground cradling Talia’s body. They shout some predictable threats and such at you, but you ignore them. You don’t care anymore. You’re numb all the way until you feel a sword blow to your head. + +And then you feel nothing ever again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Empire might be dead, but chances are shadows probably still aren’t welcomed in these parts. You’re not afraid of a fight, but you aren’t sure just how much manpower and support this warlord has and there is no need to take unnecessary chances. Besides, some of the shadows traveling with you have actual families; if there is going to be growth in this organization then you can’t risk them. + +“Okay everyone, we’re heading off road. I’m warning you now, we may have to drop baggage if need be, but until then, we’re continuing our journey to Delerg. I also want all of you Eternal shadows to cloak yourself and walk on our perimeter. If you see anything or anyone that might be hostile, don’t reveal yourself, but instead report to either me, Cyrus or Talia directly and take a position that will allow you to ambush any interlopers when the time comes.” +“Won’t we look like an easier target with less people visible? Shouldn’t we have a show of force instead?” Cyrus asks. +“We could, but we’d likely be attacked anyway since we’re probably going to be outnumbered here. This way at least we’ll have the drop on anyone who decides to attack. There’s no easy way to do this, better that we play to our strengths and use stealth. That’s why I want to avoid the roads altogether.” +“Very well Shadow Master.” Cyrus remarks. + +As you continue your journey across the long stretch of uneven fields, Talia comes up to speak to you. + +“I think you’ve made the right decision in traveling off road like this.” +“Hope so, we’re pretty open out here. I’d hate for some platoon of patrolling archers to start firing at us.” +“Well the cloaked scouts around us should give us a little warning at least. That was a good idea too. In fact I’m pretty excited about this whole journey. It’s a new chance to start over and I think it will do everyone some good…though I hope we will find a book or writings of the old ritual to open up the portal to Dendrin again.” +“Well, it’s a pretty old ruin and in swamp. I don’t think we can get our hopes up too much that anything like that survived, but that doesn’t matter right? I mean if people are going to follow Dendrin, then he’ll find a way to reach them surely.” +“I suppose you’re right, I just…well it’s silly I guess, but the new batch of eternal brothers and sisters never got properly indoctrinated by Dendrin and I think it would do them well to hear his words from his own voice.” +“I don’t think we need to worry about their loyalty or dedication at this point, you’ve probably trained and taught them better than anyone could’ve about the ways of the shadow save for Dendrin himself.” +“Yeah…maybe that’s what’s needed...” + +Talia at this point gets very quiet. Her face shows a combination of fear and guilt. It’s obvious she wants to tell you more, but now she’s afraid to. + +“Talia, let’s ride over there from the rest of the group for a moment.” You say. + +Talia nods and rides off and you tell Cyrus to take oversee everything while you talk to Talia privately. When you ride over next to her she’s in the middle of crying. + +“Talia, I don’t know what this is all about, but you know you can tell me and not be afraid about it.” +“I’m not afraid of you… (sob) I mean I know your feelings for me are so strong that you’d probably be willing to overlook almost any transgression and that’s partly what I’m afraid of, because (sob) I don’t want you to get in trouble because of my decisions.” +“Wha…? How am I going to get into trouble? What IS this all about and start from the beginning.” + +After calming herself, Talia begins to tell you what exactly is troubling her and she starts from the beginning which apparently was three years ago. She tells you that she caught two of the male eternals raping one of the female ones in a storeroom and that she did nothing about it, because she wanted to see if they suffered from infertility like the old eternals did. Instead she let the two males off with a warning and convinced the victim that something like this would never happen again. She also tells you that of course the female never got pregnant so it would seem the infertility also exists in the new eternals as well. + +“And you never thought to tell me this before?” +“You had other concerns on your mind and I had it under control, or at least I thought I did…” +“What? What happened?” +“While we were waiting out the snowstorm, remember how Brother Seminai broke his neck while coming back from look out duty? He slipped on some ice and fell down the stairs?” +“(Sigh) Let me guess, he was pushed?” +“Sister Grace did. It was apparently in retaliation when he had raped her two night before. She told me and begged me not to tell you since she didn’t want to be punished for harming another shadow…it isn’t her fault. Its mine, I should’ve taught them all better, I am their mother and they are my children and I’ve failed them.” + +You shake your head at this point. You know Talia’s always had a maternal instinct towards the eternals, but you didn’t think it would go this far. You also have always known the newer eternals to be a bit more “wilder” but that only seemed to be in battle and you could easily rein them in. You never realized there was a deeper darkness within them and who knows how many harbor these undesirable traits. + +“Okay, first question. This Brother Seminai and Sister Grace were they also the ones involved three years ago? I mean is this a repeat action?” +“No, those were three different eternals.” +“Wonderful, I was hoping to limit my worry. Anyway, I know we’re low on the women folk in our order, but I think you know we can’t tolerate wanton raping just because their horny and undisciplined.” +“I know and it was wrong of me to keep this from you in the first place…I just wanted our order to flourish with the blood of eternals…I mean yes I have hope that the shadows will at least grow, but we’re also eternals and we will eventually die out.” +“Well, if these new ones are displaying these types of traits, maybe it’s better that we do. I mean I don’t pretend to be a devout clergy man that does nothing but good deeds and I will always have a desire for battle, I think most Eternals do having it bred into them, but I’ve never committed cruelty for the sake of it.” +“What are you going to do?” +“I’m not sure yet, but my other question is why did you think I would get into trouble?” +“Because while you knew nothing about this, you would still be innocent in Dendrin’s eyes and because I know your love for me is such that no matter what you decide punishment won’t befall me even though it should. Dendrin I fear would not look favorably on you if you decide to do nothing to all those guilty after hearing what I’ve told you.” + +It’s funny, but you’ve been keeping a bigger secret than Talia for decades. You almost feel like telling her that Dendrin isn’t going to give a shit what you decide especially since he hasn’t seen fit to even speak to you in years. + +In any case, you probably need to do something, though you just aren’t sure it needs to be now. You’re in the middle of potentially hostile territory and settling an internal dispute might not be the best thing right now. Still the new eternals are going to have to be dealt with on some level and the sooner the better. As for Talia, she’s right in that you wouldn’t do anything to her, but it is somewhat surprising that she allowed this to happen. She might be a bit delusional, but you still love her. You give her an answer that should seem impartial though. + +“Talia, I need to know the names of the brothers involved in the rape three years ago and I need to know of any other eternal who has displayed potential disruptive behavior within the shadow order. I will have to consult Dendrin on this and decide what should be done with them…and you.” +“I…I understand. I know you must be fair on this matter and I will accept any judgment that Dendrin sees fit to give.” +“Well, I will have to as well and despite you only just now telling me, I may still be in trouble as well. After all as Shadow Master I really should’ve been more aware of my own people, but don’t worry about me. I will beg Dendrin for his forgiveness and that of all involved in this. Perhaps he will show mercy.” +“We can only hope.” Talia replies and tells you the names as the two of you ride back to the group. + +Later that night you continue to ponder whether or not to dispose of your more troublesome followers. Granted the two in question haven’t done anything in three years, but that potential is always there, and so are the ones that haven’t done anything yet, but show signs of it. You can only guess this is more due to their breeding not anything they’ve been taught since they still uphold the tenets of being a shadow without question and that’s a bigger problem. + +If you kill them, is it going to stop there? All of them came out of those Derro tanks and who knows what the hell kind of magical concoction is coursing through their veins to make them behave in such an unstable manner and why is it becoming more of a problem lately? + +It’s times like this you almost wish that you actually COULD call upon Dendrin for his help… + +And why can’t you? + +What could it hurt? + +If you actually pray to him for help and he doesn’t listen, then nothing was lost and you’re back to what your plan was originally, which is dealing with the situation yourself in a violent manner. + +Of course if he actually does listen, he might very well help, but with a “catch.” You’ve known Dendrin for too long to know that when he does help, he doesn’t often do it in anyway that could be considered generous. +> Pray to Dendrin +You never thought you’d ever be doing this willingly… + +“Dendrin, if you’re still watching me, we need to have a talk and you probably know what it is about already. So have your giggles if you must about all this, but I’m asking you for your help and I mean real help, not cryptic answers or hollow words. And if you don’t listen to me, then I suppose I’ll figure it out myself as usual.” + +About ten minutes later after your “prayer” you drift off to sleep and find yourself in a place you haven’t been in a long time. + +“Been a long time Eternal. While I’m glad to see it is you who initiated the dialogue for a change, I am a little hurt though that you’ve only called on me because you need help. But I suppose any progress with a cynical soul like you is better than nothing. Why its almost like you’re taking a leap of faith…” + +Great he’s going to milk this for all its worth. + +“Anyway enough of that, what can I do for you exactly today?” +“Well I figure you being all knowing and all, you’re already familiar with the dilemma, so I was hoping that…in your benevolent wisdom, you’d see fit to help me.” + +A loud chortle echos throughout your mind. + +“All knowing and benevolent wisdom is it? A word of advice Eternal, don’t attempt to grovel, it doesn’t suit you. Though I do appreciate the attempt as it shows there is hope for you after all, which I always believed would be the case. The answer is yes, I will help you.” +“That’s it?” +“Yes. What? Is there more you required from me?” +“No, but…well what are you going to do exactly?” +“Get rid of your problems of course.” +“That’s what I’m talking about. You’re not being specific, I mean for all I know your version of getting rid of my problems means killing me.” +“My dear Eternal have you gained faith in me only to lose it so quickly? (Sigh) I suppose this is a bit too much for you. Very well I shall explain MY end of the bargain. When you reach Delerg, I want you to go to my temple and in a very hidden location on one of the walls near a pillar you will find a button. Press it and you shall recover most of the lost shadow history in an area below the temple. One of the books includes the ritual to open up the portal to my realm. Send your remaining Eternals into it and I shall do the rest.” +“That…that’s almost exactly what Talia had hoped for when she suggested this journey.” +“Yes, I know. That’s because she’s a believer. So if you’re still wondering what my price is, it’s just gaining more loyal followers that will no longer cause potential strife within the order… and the assurance on your part that you will be doing your best to restoring my temple to its former glory.” +“Of course…wait you said remaining Eternals. What did you mean?” +“Oh you’ll find out soon.” + +Suddenly you are pulled out your state of numbness and into the real world. + +“Get up! We’re being attacked!” Talia yells and picks you up by the arm. A bright light is illuminating the nighttime sky along with several fire arrows. You roll under a wagon to avoid immediate danger. + +It would appear General Ackerson’s men have discovered you and have attacked in force. They’re being smart about it too, attacking at night with archers and unfortunately also a couple of battle mages who are making the darkness disappear with their spells. + +“How the hell did they sneak up on us? I had scouts around the perimeter to avoid this sort of thing!” you mutter to yourself. Doesn’t matter now you suppose, what you have to do is get the hell out of here as fast as possible. You don’t like running, but you’ll end up losing more people if you stick around and fight. Besides, there are probably more troops behind the archers or at least on their way. + +“Everyone, grab what you can, head for those hills, speed up and cloak!” you shout. Talia and Cyrus both repeat this order so everyone can hear it. You sort of figured you’d end up dropping most of baggage, but probably not exactly like this! + +The soldiers are still shooting at you of course, but they’re doing it blind. Some of the mages get a few people though by blindly throwing fireballs in the general direction. Of course not every shadow has listened to you, some of them decided to run in the direction of the soldiers instead. These are some of the eternals of course. As you get closer and closer to the hills, the arrows and fireballs have seemed to have stopped altogether, it seems as if some of the eternals have managed to tie up the troops by engaging in close combat with some of them. + +The next few days also involve some fighting with more soldiers in the hills, but since it’s mostly swordsmen you’re got more of an advantage on your side and you lose no more people. Eventually the attacks stop altogether. You’ve either gotten far enough away, or General Ackerson has decided it’s not worth losing any more men over. + +You take a head count to see who is still alive and you now understand what Dendrin meant by the “remaining eternals” as most of the ones who did die were eternals. (Specifically the same ones Talia gave you the names of) Talia also asks you if you consulted Dendrin’s advice on what is to be done about what was discussed before. + +“I believe our recent attack has solved some of it, and Dendrin told me that when we reach the temple, he will solve the rest. He also said that you were right all along, we were meant to take this journey. I think we had to suffer a few losses before the shadow order can truly move forward.” You tell Talia, she seems relieved that you or her aren’t in trouble with Dendrin. + +When the hills begin to flatten and ground starts to become soft, you know that you’ve reached the Delerg border. Brother Theo takes the lead from here and compared to your journey through Quala its downright uneventful other than annoying groups of Sul-monkeys that throw things from the low trees every once in awhile. + +Eventually you arrive at the temple and everyone is filled with a great joy. You figure you should make some sort of uplifting speech about triumph and such, so you do. Then you tell everyone to start exploring the temple and get settled in where they can, you’ll worry about fixing the place up later. + +The inside of the temple is in surprisingly good condition. You waste no time in seeking out the stone “button” that will open up a secret place in the temple. Eventually you find it (which you doubt you would’ve been able to do if Dendrin hadn’t told you) and descend down. + +What you find is better than you could’ve hoped for when you first arrived and that’s living quarters for what you presume would be for the old shadow high priests or whatever. It isn’t fancy, but it’s fairly clean. You imagine that this place hasn’t been accessed in centuries. The walls are very solidly made so it doesn’t even look like signs of any natural intrusion have occurred either. Just as Dendrin said, there is a fully stocked library which no doubt contain most of the shadow’s history and wisdom, and more importantly the ritual that you can use on the eternals. Talia, immediately starts looking through the books while you and Cyrus explore the rest of the place. + +There is one “room” that sticks out which isn’t man made and that’s a small natural cavern, which seems to be an underground garden of some sort with a shallow stream of fresh water flowing through it. Blue glowing fungus lights up the place and there are no exits other than the small openings the water is flowing through. Cyrus takes some purple berries off one of the bushes and pops them in his mouth and remarks how good they taste. + +“Looks like we won’t have to worry about clean water immediately, even our food can be supplemented here. Dendrin provides as usual.” He says. +“Indeed and while I know we all serve Dendrin, rank also has its privileges. I’ll be sleeping down here in one of those bedrooms with Talia.” You remark. +“Heh, well there are three of them from what I’ve seen, surely the Shadow Master doesn’t need ALL of them.” Cyrus replies. +“Well I might’ve needed them to store belongings, but since we dropped most of them, I suppose I don’t have any problem with you and Draven taking one of the rooms. How is Draven anyway, if it wasn’t for you, I’d probably forget he’s even with us.” +“Oh he’s fine. He’s always been a bit more on the quiet side as you know.” +“Mm, well since I’m in a generous mood, I guess Brother Theo and Sister Yvette can take the third room. The pair of them have helped the shadows in more ways than I can count. Besides I know they got something going on with each other, have no idea why they haven’t bonded properly yet though.” +“Maybe they don’t want to be tied down to one person?” +“If that was the case, I wouldn’t see them together almost all the time. I swear since we first kicked the Empire out of Rask, those two have been practically joined at the hip.” + +Before Cyrus can agree with your observation Talia steps in and interrupts. + +“I found it! I found the book! We can perform the ritual!” she exclaims. +“Already? That was quick. Okay, well you study it and we’ll get to it as soon as possible.” +“But you are Shadow Master my love, only YOU can do it properly.” Talia says and thrusts the book upon you. +“Oh…well I suppose my magical abilities have come a long way from what they used to be. Very well then, I shall study this tome and we can give the new eternals a proper induction into the shadows like we all were right?” + +Talia and Cyrus both nod at your remark. + +You excuse yourself and retire to your bedroom to begin a long night of studying. +> Time passes... +Year 46 + +Took long enough, and sometimes it never seemed like it was going to happen, but you’ve finally restored Dendrin’s temple. Restoring it wasn’t easy either, especially not one as big and in such disrepair like Dendrin’s. The surprising thing is you’ve not only restored it in appearance, but in use as well. + +The one of the first difficult things was getting the stone. Delerg isn’t exactly flush with rock quarries. The second difficult thing was getting help to restore it in the first place. The shadows might be great warriors and have more knowledge than the average peasant, but nobody in your ranks is a laborer or into masonry. Obviously outside help was necessary. + +Fortunately since the fall of the Empire, Delerg had once again become a quiet place with no “leader.” Most of the inhabitants were content to go about their simple lives like they once did before the Empire. When you arrived in Sinkhole, to ask around for workers to try to restore the temple, some couldn’t volunteer fast enough to help. + +This need to help you, was a combination of a few things. The most important one being that Delerg was always shadow friendly. The Empire may have ruled it for a while, but the respect that its people had for the shadows was always greater. The shadows after all were once the main protectors of the area before the Empire. + +Combining this with the fact that the shadows were the main ones who helped influence so much rebellion and caused the destruction of the Empire, it was only natural that you were as warmly embraced like you were. Good thing too, because you certainly didn’t have the coin to pay the workers in the first place! + +As the temple was slowly being restored, more people started flocking to your aid. Some of these were old rebels that the shadows lost contact with when you started consolidating your forces in Rask. They remember you though and offer help in any way their skills allow. + +While you were always a little surprised by how much free help you were always willing to get, what surprised you more is how little you really needed to do to get it. These people had no one telling them what to do or how to live anymore, and yet a lot of them seemed to be in a big hurry for that to change by becoming Dendrin worshippers! You understand gratitude, but to willingly surrender a portion of your earnings and time to serve an invisible being that you had no proof existed, while some guy claiming to be his “representative” tell you how you should live seemed like a step backwards for them at least. For you though, it was all beneficial as eventually some of these devoted souls wanted to become full-fledged shadows. Naturally you accepted them into your ranks provided they could pass through the testing. + +Right now things have been better for you than they have ever been. You’ve got a nice restored temple, a fair sized congregation, the ranks of the shadows are slowly starting to grow again and most importantly you haven’t had to deal with any problems with the new eternals (Now known as the Shadow Blades) ever since they all went through the ritual. Dendrin was true to his word on that, just like you were true to yours by restoring his temple. + +Still, even after directly helping you, you still can’t bring yourself to “worship” Dendrin. Not really. Part of you feels like it was the least he could’ve done after all the stuff in the past he’s put you through. Another of part of you feels as if you’ve “repaid the debt” by restoring the temple. + +He’s probably granted you more power as you’ve noticed your magical abilities becoming superior to everyone else’s and it taking much less effort, but again you still feel no sense of “awe” in Dendrin that would cause you to willingly worship him as a god. + +To you, he’s a very powerful being that is a whimsical ally at best. You’ve come to realize that he is probably deserving of your respect in regard to his power and you always keep that in mind when up keeping the charade of his religion. Perhaps it is enough, or at least it’ll have to be since you don’t see yourself changing your mind on the matter anytime soon, especially when you’ve been trying to figure out what your next big course of action should be. + +The problem with a lack of conflict is that you find yourself very bored. Even in Rask, the monotony was broken up with the occasional giant or ogre attack. Here in Delerg there are no such great dangers surprisingly enough. Most dangerous swamp beasts prefer to stick to their own stomping grounds which all seem to be away from your part of the swamp and Sul-monkeys aren’t a threat so much as they’re an occasional annoyance when large groups of them decide to use the temple roof as a mating area! The last time you had any true conflict was when General Ackerson’s men ambushed you and part of you hasn’t forgotten that incident. From what you know, he’s still in power and sometimes you’d like to change that just on principle. + +Quala is still an area in a power struggle between competing warlords, but so far there have been no attempt by any of them to expand into Delerg, probably because there isn’t much here in the first place save for swamp. Not to mention there are most likely trickles of news coming in about the return of the shadows to Delerg. Most of the warlords being ex-Empire probably would like to get some sort of revenge, but know that their losses would be considerable if they even attempted such a thing, so you are left alone. + +Talia and Cyrus seem to be content with how things are now, why can’t you be? Funny that you were concerned about the new eternals being restless and getting themselves into trouble, while here you are considering starting a fight because your bored with peace! The only real reason you can think of is petty revenge on General Ackerson and that’s not a very good one even if you could easily tell everyone that Dendrin told you all to go kill him. + +In your moment of introspection, you take another look at what you’ve accomplished. You went from being a lone unbeliever practically trapped in an organization that was determined to overthrow an enemy several times larger than itself to the victorious leader of said organization, which is now thriving under your watch. + +You probably could defeat Ackerson, but at what cost? Last you heard he has thousands of men at his command still and that includes a few battle mages. The shadows may be growing slowly, but that’s just it, slowly. You don’t have anywhere near the numbers to start raising armies. Sure, you have the entire support of probably all of Delerg, but that doesn’t mean much in the scheme of things if most of the people aren’t warriors. You kill Ackerson and take his territory then what? You hold it? How long can that last with the numbers you’d have left? You doubt if the people of Quala would be as supportive, if anything they probably blame the shadows for the miserable warring state they live in now. This doesn’t even factor in the OTHER warlords in the area. They may all decide to gang up on you and if you’re in any sort of weakened condition they may even press their attack into Delerg itself. + +No, the risk doesn’t seem worth it compared to the petty gain. The shadows have never been about conquest and they probably shouldn’t start now. However, that doesn’t mean you should stay idle. Peace is fine, but perhaps there is a way of initiating conflict without actually doing it. + +It occurs to you that the warlords of Quala won’t always be fighting. Eventually one of them is going to win or manage to unite the area in some way. When that happens then Delerg might be in potential danger, so it would be in your best interest to make sure that doesn’t happen. Keep Quala weak and disorganized while keeping Delerg the opposite. + +You start sending in shadows into Quala to get a good idea of what the situation is there, but not to actually do anything yet. Theo is mostly in charge of this due to his previous experience of working extensively in the region during the Empire war. Eventually after a couple months you have all the information you really need and ready to put the second part of your plan into action, which is to keep the region destabilized. This is going to include sabotage, misdirection, more spying, and assassinations, all those things that play on the strengths of the shadows. + +“I like it. So when do we start assassinating people?” Cyrus remarks causing Draven to chuckle. +“Well, we probably should decide who needs it first. Some of the leaders sound so incompetent that it might be better if we left them in charge.” Talia adds. +“Shouldn’t we have some sort of plan before doing this?” Yvette asks. +“We do have a plan, I just explained it.” You say not understanding why she would ask such a question. +“I…think what my wife means is should we not have a greater plan other than sewing chaos. I do not presume to disagree with your reasons Shadow Master, but I do believe that causing discord for the sake of doing it might seem a bit…well…short term.” Theo says. +“So you believe that we should actually take territory? I explained why I believe that would be a problem.” +“No, no, I agree that we shouldn’t be marching armies into Quala, I guess what I mean is perhaps this would also be a good time to launch an aggressive campaign of converting unbelievers. You know send our better speakers to some of the smaller villages that are unhappy with life under the warlords and telling them how Dendrin can release them from such misery. Given enough time, we would have so many converted that we wouldn’t have to worry about raising an army or Quala ever being a threat because most of the population would all be believers in Dendrin.” + +An interesting suggestion from Theo and one you weren’t really expecting from him. He also mentions he could get back in contact with some of the old rebels he knows are still living in Quala to help more directly as well. +> Go with Theo’s plan +It might be a bit a more complex than what you first envisioned, but it probably would be well worth it to try. You agree to Theo’s plan and put it in motion. + +Theo says that the first thing he should do is to directly contact Sam Jowin, one of the major warlords in the area. He’s fairly sure that Sam will agree to help out the shadows especially if it means stomping out the remaining pathetic remnants of the Empire. Plus it’ll be one less warlord to worry about if he’s on the side of the shadows. + +“Just like the old days eh?” you say. +“Yes, I suppose so.” Theo answers. +“I don’t see why we can’t still send our Blades in to cause some problems yet. I mean we know they can do it without being detected.” Cyrus remarks. +“We’ll get a chance, don’t worry. Just have to wait a bit longer for the right time.” You remark. +“Hm, I suppose so.” Cyrus answers. + +You get the impression that Theo is more than a little excited about doing this and Cyrus is a little disappointed that he doesn’t get to do more at this time. Looks like it wasn’t just you getting bored with peace either after bringing this plan up. Though Yvette is looking a bit concerned mainly for her husband most likely, she really shouldn’t though given how skilled he is, let alone the fact that it’s part of his duty as a shadow anyway. + +While you aren’t actually getting into any action, it still feels good to be planning something more than the daily prayers to Dendrin. + +Year 50 + +“Ackerson’s men were seen at the edges of the Delerg borders again. Pretty sure they’re preparing for an attack this time.” Brother Gannon remarks. +“(Sigh) Call for the Blades to do double patrols.” You say rubbing your head. +“I told you we should’ve just assassinated him when we had the chance, now that bastard’s not only really entrenched, but he’s also gained ground in Quala! What the fuck is Theo DOING over there, we haven’t heard from him in months!” Cyrus exclaims. +“He’s serving Dendrin and the shadows as he always has! Thanks to him, we’ve gotten converts and making our ranks grow! And don’t you think I’m just as concerned about him not having reported in for a long time?!” Yvette snaps. +“Yes, I’m sure you are Yvette, but the converts we’ve gained haven’t really strengthened us to any great degree and in fact they may have been a hindrance as it just brought more attention to ourselves.” Talia remarks. +“And how would’ve Cyrus’ plan of assassinating everyone not called attention to us? You don’t think if leaders just started dropping dead people wouldn’t have suspected us? Everyone knew were located here in Delerg and could’ve attacked us eventually anyway. At least now we not only have a few extra human converts, but also one of the warlords on our side.” Yvette says. + +Yevette’s “human” remark gets your attention, despite everyone else missing it. What is she getting at? + +“For now. How the hell do we know this Sam nutter isn’t going to turn on us when he gets strong enough? Ever since he decimated Anu’s forces, he’s gotten into a position where he could attack us in force just as easily as Ackerson could, probably more so. Which brings me to the question of why the hell hasn’t he been pushing Ackerson a lot harder? I mean, he’s supposed to be our ally, move in man! Attack!” Cyrus shouts. +“Well from last reports months ago, Theo says Sam was having problems with the western front and to the south from Brenda.” Talia interjects, in an attempt to keep Cyrus calm, it doesn’t work. + +“Oh that’s bullshit Talia and you know it! Those assholes in western Quala are so disorganized they’re barely a threat to each other, let alone Sam. And as for Brenda, I don’t think so. I’ve got some of my OWN people spying down in Nalin and they say the place is pretty damn peaceful apart from the raids that Sam sends down there. Even the kobolds are mostly contributing members of society now. Shit, if Brenda wasn’t on the wrong side I’d say she’d make a better ally than Sam would. + +Now Cyrus’ remark gets your attention, in fact it gets EVERYONE’S attention. + +“Cyrus who and WHEN did you send people to the Nalin province? I didn’t order such a thing!” you remark. +“I sent a few Blades last year and you’re right you didn’t tell me and if I’m in violation of the shadow code, then you by all means you’re well in your rights to have me executed…but I felt like we needed to know what the hell Brenda is up to! I mean she’s potentially the biggest threat to us military wise, not to mention she IS the last true remnant of the Empire.” + +You shake your head not so much at what Cyrus did, but the fact that you didn’t catch it. You think back to when you first came up with this plan and now you wonder why you just didn’t leave well enough alone. You wanted to be free of boredom and now you’ve got it in abundance. + +“What’s done is done now, but I’d like to know why the hell you didn’t at least report what you found immediately considering that you said you send them a year ago!” you remark. +“They were still gathering intel and I wanted to make sure if this was going to cost me my life, it was going to be worth it at least!” +“Cyrus, stop being so damn dramatic, nobody’s killing anyone here.” Talia says. +“Maybe they should though…” Yvette says. + +Another statement that causes a pause in the arguing. + +“What was that Yvette?” Cyrus says in a challenging way, Dravin who has been quiet the whole time now gets up and attempts to hold Cyrus back. Yvette is obviously upset about more than a few things, her husband’s disappearance being one of them, but she doesn’t back down from Cyrus despite she’d be no match for him. + +“I said maybe you should be killed! You directly defied the Shadow Master AND Dendrin’s will! You know according to the ancient ways of the shadows, you would’ve been subjected to having your hands and feet cut off followed by your eyes ears and nose before your mouth was fused shut and you were dragged out to the swamp where the Sul Monkeys could feast on what was left!” +“In case you haven’t noticed sister, these aren’t the old days anymore.” Cyrus says almost daring her to attack. +“Yeah, don’t I know it.” Yvette says, looking at him, Talia, then you before storming off. + +“Well if you’re going to have me killed, I’ll be in my room waiting for your decision seeing as I can’t break any rules there.” Cyrus remarks dryly and walks off as well. Draven follows in an attempt to calm him, giving you a few worried glances as he leaves. + +You and Talia are left in the room by yourselves. Sometimes you wish it was always like that. + +“You can’t seriously be considering executing Cyrus for this.” Talia says. +“Probably not, but it’s really not a good sign of what he did. We’re supposed to be sneaking around against other people, not each other.” +“His intentions were for the good of the shadows.” +“Yeah and you know what they say about good intentions. Ugh, how the hell did I let that slip by me in the first place?” +“It slipped by all of us, Cyrus is skilled.” +“Yeah and that’s the problem. Call me paranoid, but in an order where everyone can cloak at will, dropping your guard for one moment could lead to a quick death if someone wanted to do it.” +“Now, you can’t start thinking like that! We’re all Dendrin’s faithful, we don’t hurt one another.” +“Forgotten about Brother Seminai and Sister Grace huh? Yes, I know that was a different situation, but the problem still stands. In fact it’s the same original problem with just a few minor differences.” +“What do you mean?” +“Didn’t you notice Yvette? It’s obvious that she doesn’t like our kind, meaning Eternals. I dunno if this is a new thing or if she’s always harbored these feelings. Besides getting the new ones under control, I was also hoping it would prevent any possible conflict we might have had between the pure human shadows and Eternal shadows, but apparently not.” +“Well what are we going to do about that?” +“Good question, I’m going to have to think on that and Cyrus’ recent behavior, because while he might not be deserving of execution, I can’t just have him going off and doing his own thing like that. Especially since it was only due to me showing him mercy and a hell of a lot of trust that I allowed him to live in the first place. Pulling a stunt like this is making me regret that decision.” + +Talia leaves you alone at this point, she just gives you the usual if you find yourself lost, to seek Dendrin’s guidance. The funny thing is maybe you should’ve considering Dendrin warned you that Cyrus would still be a potential problem years ago. + +You sit by yourself thinking and going back and forth on what to do about Cyrus and after an hour you’re still no closer to a solution. At this point you don’t even want to bother thinking about what to do about Yvette, though getting someone to seek out her husband would be a good start. + +As you’re about to leave the council chamber, Draven appears in the doorway. He looks like he’s even more worried than when he left. He’s even shaking a bit. + +“Uh…um Shadow Master. I…” +“What is it Draven? And why are you shaking?” + +He doesn’t answer and just starts sniffling and trying not to cry. He looks like he’s going to have a complete breakdown and then suddenly he breathes deeply and exhales. + +“Draven what happened? Where’s Cyrus and what’s he done?” you ask sensing that this is the cause of his behavior. + +“Nothing. And I’m sorry.” Draven says and he suddenly speeds himself up and attempts to shoot you with his armbow! + +Being more powerful in the ways of shadow magic now, you easily speed yourself up and dodge this attempt on your life. You react with a shadowfire bolt to his head, Draven falls back and drops dead instantly. + +You briefly wonder why Draven would attempt such a thing, knowing that he couldn’t have won, but you don’t dwell on it too much since you figure that Cyrus was behind it in the first place. + +“ASSASSIN! SHADOWS BLOCK THE ENTRANCES! LET NO ONE LEAVE!” you yell as loud hoping the whole temple heard it as you can and run out of the council room looking for Cyrus. + +In the chaos, you continue bellowing orders to everyone while still looking for Cyrus and telling others to find him as well. Talia rushes to you asking what’s going on and you explain that Draven just tried to kill you. + +“WHAT?!” +“Obviously Cyrus put him up to it. If this isn’t proof that he is not only disobedient to Dendrin’s laws, but also willing to betray them, I don’t know what is!” Yvette says overhearing the conversation. + +Just as you’re about to tell some of the shadows to go scouring the swamp for Cyrus, he suddenly pops up running into the gathering hall directly towards you. Thinking that he’s trying to finish the job himself you immediately order him to be stopped and then create a small barrier around yourself. Several of the Blades, along with Talia gather around you as well. You’re glad that the Blades’ loyalty seems to be on your side, even if a couple of them did obey Cyrus’ orders to go into Nalin. + +Cyrus is practically tackled to the floor though he’s confused to as why it’s happening. + +“What the…why is everyone holding me down?! What is this? Where’s Draven?” he says. +“You know damn well where he is, you sent him to kill me not a few minutes ago!” you answer. +“WHAT?! I did no such thing! He was upset about went down in the council chambers and…wait where is he?” +“Where do you think? I’m still alive to confront you on your treachery aren’t I? I mean you had to have known that I’d easily dispatch Draven.” + +This remark causes silence in Cyrus. He looks down, as you demand to know who else is involved in his little conspiracy. When he looks up again to address you, his face shows a mixture of anger and anguish. + +“There is no conspiracy you paranoid fuck! Don’t you think if I had planned one some of these people would’ve been trying to kill you right now? I would’ve thought that you would’ve at least thought higher of me that I could’ve come up with a better plan, which I wasn’t doing in the first place! I mean if I had, I certainly wouldn’t have allowed myself to be caught like an idiot like this. I thought we settled all this years ago when you first became Shadow Master. I pledged my loyalty and I meant that! I see my words mean nothing after all though, so do what you want. I submit myself to Dendrin and your final judgement as I always have.” + +Such in-fighting of the shadow leaders in a public display hasn’t probably been seen since Brother Shade tried to kill Master Ebon. Cyrus seems resigned to whatever fate you have in store for him, but you’re wondering if he’s trying to stall for time somehow. He claims that he doesn’t have others working for him, but for all you know they’re just staying quiet so that they can’t get into trouble and their courage to go through with your assassination has failed them completely. + +Or perhaps they just want Cyrus himself out of the way so that they can take power at a later time. +> Kill Cyrus +Cyrus has proven time and time again to be a thorn in your side. You tried to give him a chance, but there is just too much ambition in him. Even if he wasn’t behind Dravin’s actions, his behavior has proven time and time again that he isn’t going to let Dravin’s death go if you spare him. How long will it be before deep-seated resentment and anger get to him and he really seeks out revenge? + +You can’t take that chance. + +Without another word you perform the same spell that Master Ebon once did to stop Brother Shade from killing him. Cyrus’ silence is now broken by his grunts and gasps of pain as he clutches his head. He begins bleeding from the ears and eventually the eyes. + +“I…join…you…Drav…” he manages to utter before her brain explodes inside his head. Cyrus’ body lies motionless on the floor and you address the crowd. + +“This was unfortunate, but necessary. Let this be an example to those that would seek to harm or conspire against their brothers and sisters. Dendrin will not tolerate traitors and neither will I. Someone get this out of my sight.” You say waving to Cyrus’ body. + +The next few days are a little tense, but eventually things relax a little. You’re still trying to find Brother Theo. When you manage to contact Sam directly he says he thought Theo was going back to report to you weeks ago since he hasn’t seen him since that time. He goes on to say that Theo tended to move about a lot since he was also spreading a bit of the shadow faith in his spare time. He also apologizes for not keeping a better eye on General Ackerson and his latest patrols on your borders, but he’s been having difficulties with Brenda and even some of the other eastern warlords lately. + +Sam isn’t the only one apologizing. Yvette also says she’s sorry to you and how she’s just been so upset about her husband that she didn’t meant to speak out of line before. She says she knows that you’ve been leading well as Shadow Master. You tell her that you appreciate her support and tell her to just keep faith in Dendrin that you’ll eventually find Theo even if he’s dead, he’ll be given a proper burial. + +Unfortunately when he does pop up again he’s not dead and you find out what he’s been up to isn’t good for the shadows even though he believes it to be. + +All the new shadows Brother Theo has been converting in Quala have been following a much different doctrine than the regular one. Namely one that doesn’t see Eternals in the order at all. He claims that the Eternals have created a caste system where you’re on top and humans are at the bottom. It doesn’t help that he’s also been manipulating Sam into helping him so he not only has a loyal group of heretics to his cause, but also an entire regular army. + +This in itself is bad, but Yvette has been secretly helping him the whole time and spreading dissention to the other human followers in Delerg as well. Twisting your own words by claiming that the Eternals are not true brothers and sisters of Dendrin because they aren’t human so it’s perfectly fine to harm them. Going on about how the Blades were abominations that you and Talia saw as an opportunity to use as leverage over the human members. How she was forced to see the first hand horrors of where they were “born.” + +It is a testament to Yvette’s speech skills that she managed to convince so many under your nose and fooled you as well despite your initial concern about her. You never knew she was so talented in that way, part of you always still remembered her as the girl who obediently followed your orders during the rebellion. + +When it all comes out, you curse yourself for not being more observant and suspicious of her. Perhaps if you’d not worried so much about Cyrus being a major problem, you wouldn’t have overlooked another possible coup from someone else. + +Yvette’s treachery is taken care of soon after the first Blade is suddenly attacked. It’s at a great cost though, not so much due to the casualties on the loyal side, but more due to the fact that she convinced so many that you had to kill. Yvette herself attempts to escape when she sees the battle isn’t going well, but she is brought down by the eternals she sought to destroy. + +Of course this isn’t the end. Theo and his army is still out there and they won’t be as easy to put down. + +Year 55 + +The Temple of Dendrin is in ruins and you’re putting down the last of the culprits. + +“You can’t beat me Theo, despite all your treachery you cannot match my power.” You say slamming him into the wall. +“It doesn’t matter! You’re finished! The shadows are finished!” +“Then you defeated your own purpose! Weren’t you trying to save them?” +“YES! But I soon realized that if Dendrin continued to support you then what was the point of serving him at all?” +“Was this before or after you killed your own friend Sam and took complete control?” +“I have no regrets! Anything to ensure your downfall! Look at you now, you rule NOTHING!” Theo starts to laugh. + +You imagine he’s gone slightly mad from this little civil war. This latest suicidal onslaught of his pretty much proves it. You aren’t wasting anymore time with him and you unleash a blast of shadow flame straight to his face. You watch as Theo alternates from laughing to screaming while his flesh burns away until nothing is left except a charred skull. + +He’s right though, the shadows really are no more. What tattered remains exist cannot possibly rebuild the order even if you still had any desire to do so. + +One of your loyal shadows Brother Gannon comes up to you asking what should be done next and you tell them you don’t know, only that you’re going to rest and you don’t want to be disturbed. + +You collapse on the bed in your chambers, which feels lonelier ever since Talia died in battle a year ago, but you’re used to it. + +You drift off… + +“Quite the battle Eternal, but I knew you’d win.” Dendrin remarks. +“Leave me alone, this whole thing is your fault.” +“Back to blaming me for things I see. Some things never change.” +“Well I’ll tell you one thing that’s changing…I’m done.” +“Done with what?” +“You know damn well what. I’m done with the shadows. I tried to lead them, but ultimately they were just as self destructive as the Empire. If anything they were doing better under it. Makes me wonder why the hell I bothered opposing it in the first place.” +“You’re just feeling discouraged, maybe you should…” +“Maybe I should what? Pick up the pieces and start all over again? What for? There’s nothing left and I don’t even believe in this fucking religion myself. Not to mention you did nothing to stop its destruction since I’ve known you, so why should I keep knocking my brains out doing it for you? What has it got me, except a lot of grief and a dead wife. So fuck this. I’m quitting this game and as far as I’m concerned this entertainment of yours is over!” + +Dendrin is silent for a moment and then of course comes back with a retort as usual. + +“Very well, you lot were getting boring anyway. Goodbye Eternal, it was interesting while it lasted.” + +You later wake up in the middle of the night hoping that’s the last time Dendrin ever talks to you again. You then pack up some of your belongings and decide to leave the temple for good. You don’t make a clean getaway though as Brother Gannon sees you exiting the front doors as he’s wandering the halls. + +“Shadow Master where are you going?” +“Anywhere, nowhere, I don’t really know yet, but I can’t stay here any longer. I don’t think I ever was supposed to…maybe Yvette and Theo were right in a way. Maybe Eternals shouldn’t be shadows.” You say. +“You shouldn’t say things like that! We need you to lead what remains of us, to interpret the will of Dendrin clearly.” + +You laugh. + +“You want to see the will of Dendrin clearly? Take a look at the destruction around you. That’s his will. THAT’S what he represents. Do yourself a favor Gannon, get out of this place and live the rest of your life doing what you want. There are already enough people in the earthly realm ready to tell you what to do, no need to add other worldly ones to that list. Goodbye.” + +And with that you leave the crumbling remnants of the shadows forever and travel to places unknown. What ultimately happens to you is lost to time, but safe to say you never hear from Dendrin ever again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It might be a bit a more complex than what you first envisioned, but it probably would be well worth it to try. You agree to Theo’s plan and put it in motion. + +Theo says that the first thing he should do is to directly contact Sam Jowin, one of the major warlords in the area. He’s fairly sure that Sam will agree to help out the shadows especially if it means stomping out the remaining pathetic remnants of the Empire. Plus it’ll be one less warlord to worry about if he’s on the side of the shadows. + +“Just like the old days eh?” you say. +“Yes, I suppose so.” Theo answers. +“I don’t see why we can’t still send our Blades in to cause some problems yet. I mean we know they can do it without being detected.” Cyrus remarks. +“We’ll get a chance, don’t worry. Just have to wait a bit longer for the right time.” You remark. +“Hm, I suppose so.” Cyrus answers. + +You get the impression that Theo is more than a little excited about doing this and Cyrus is a little disappointed that he doesn’t get to do more at this time. Looks like it wasn’t just you getting bored with peace either after bringing this plan up. Though Yvette is looking a bit concerned mainly for her husband most likely, she really shouldn’t though given how skilled he is, let alone the fact that it’s part of his duty as a shadow anyway. + +While you aren’t actually getting into any action, it still feels good to be planning something more than the daily prayers to Dendrin. + +Year 50 + +“Ackerson’s men were seen at the edges of the Delerg borders again. Pretty sure they’re preparing for an attack this time.” Brother Gannon remarks. +“(Sigh) Call for the Blades to do double patrols.” You say rubbing your head. +“I told you we should’ve just assassinated him when we had the chance, now that bastard’s not only really entrenched, but he’s also gained ground in Quala! What the fuck is Theo DOING over there, we haven’t heard from him in months!” Cyrus exclaims. +“He’s serving Dendrin and the shadows as he always has! Thanks to him, we’ve gotten converts and making our ranks grow! And don’t you think I’m just as concerned about him not having reported in for a long time?!” Yvette snaps. +“Yes, I’m sure you are Yvette, but the converts we’ve gained haven’t really strengthened us to any great degree and in fact they may have been a hindrance as it just brought more attention to ourselves.” Talia remarks. +“And how would’ve Cyrus’ plan of assassinating everyone not called attention to us? You don’t think if leaders just started dropping dead people wouldn’t have suspected us? Everyone knew were located here in Delerg and could’ve attacked us eventually anyway. At least now we not only have a few extra human converts, but also one of the warlords on our side.” Yvette says. + +Yevette’s “human” remark gets your attention, despite everyone else missing it. What is she getting at? + +“For now. How the hell do we know this Sam nutter isn’t going to turn on us when he gets strong enough? Ever since he decimated Anu’s forces, he’s gotten into a position where he could attack us in force just as easily as Ackerson could, probably more so. Which brings me to the question of why the hell hasn’t he been pushing Ackerson a lot harder? I mean, he’s supposed to be our ally, move in man! Attack!” Cyrus shouts. +“Well from last reports months ago, Theo says Sam was having problems with the western front and to the south from Brenda.” Talia interjects, in an attempt to keep Cyrus calm, it doesn’t work. + +“Oh that’s bullshit Talia and you know it! Those assholes in western Quala are so disorganized they’re barely a threat to each other, let alone Sam. And as for Brenda, I don’t think so. I’ve got some of my OWN people spying down in Nalin and they say the place is pretty damn peaceful apart from the raids that Sam sends down there. Even the kobolds are mostly contributing members of society now. Shit, if Brenda wasn’t on the wrong side I’d say she’d make a better ally than Sam would. + +Now Cyrus’ remark gets your attention, in fact it gets EVERYONE’S attention. + +“Cyrus who and WHEN did you send people to the Nalin province? I didn’t order such a thing!” you remark. +“I sent a few Blades last year and you’re right you didn’t tell me and if I’m in violation of the shadow code, then you by all means you’re well in your rights to have me executed…but I felt like we needed to know what the hell Brenda is up to! I mean she’s potentially the biggest threat to us military wise, not to mention she IS the last true remnant of the Empire.” + +You shake your head not so much at what Cyrus did, but the fact that you didn’t catch it. You think back to when you first came up with this plan and now you wonder why you just didn’t leave well enough alone. You wanted to be free of boredom and now you’ve got it in abundance. + +“What’s done is done now, but I’d like to know why the hell you didn’t at least report what you found immediately considering that you said you send them a year ago!” you remark. +“They were still gathering intel and I wanted to make sure if this was going to cost me my life, it was going to be worth it at least!” +“Cyrus, stop being so damn dramatic, nobody’s killing anyone here.” Talia says. +“Maybe they should though…” Yvette says. + +Another statement that causes a pause in the arguing. + +“What was that Yvette?” Cyrus says in a challenging way, Dravin who has been quiet the whole time now gets up and attempts to hold Cyrus back. Yvette is obviously upset about more than a few things, her husband’s disappearance being one of them, but she doesn’t back down from Cyrus despite she’d be no match for him. + +“I said maybe you should be killed! You directly defied the Shadow Master AND Dendrin’s will! You know according to the ancient ways of the shadows, you would’ve been subjected to having your hands and feet cut off followed by your eyes ears and nose before your mouth was fused shut and you were dragged out to the swamp where the Sul Monkeys could feast on what was left!” +“In case you haven’t noticed sister, these aren’t the old days anymore.” Cyrus says almost daring her to attack. +“Yeah, don’t I know it.” Yvette says, looking at him, Talia, then you before storming off. + +“Well if you’re going to have me killed, I’ll be in my room waiting for your decision seeing as I can’t break any rules there.” Cyrus remarks dryly and walks off as well. Draven follows in an attempt to calm him, giving you a few worried glances as he leaves. + +You and Talia are left in the room by yourselves. Sometimes you wish it was always like that. + +“You can’t seriously be considering executing Cyrus for this.” Talia says. +“Probably not, but it’s really not a good sign of what he did. We’re supposed to be sneaking around against other people, not each other.” +“His intentions were for the good of the shadows.” +“Yeah and you know what they say about good intentions. Ugh, how the hell did I let that slip by me in the first place?” +“It slipped by all of us, Cyrus is skilled.” +“Yeah and that’s the problem. Call me paranoid, but in an order where everyone can cloak at will, dropping your guard for one moment could lead to a quick death if someone wanted to do it.” +“Now, you can’t start thinking like that! We’re all Dendrin’s faithful, we don’t hurt one another.” +“Forgotten about Brother Seminai and Sister Grace huh? Yes, I know that was a different situation, but the problem still stands. In fact it’s the same original problem with just a few minor differences.” +“What do you mean?” +“Didn’t you notice Yvette? It’s obvious that she doesn’t like our kind, meaning Eternals. I dunno if this is a new thing or if she’s always harbored these feelings. Besides getting the new ones under control, I was also hoping it would prevent any possible conflict we might have had between the pure human shadows and Eternal shadows, but apparently not.” +“Well what are we going to do about that?” +“Good question, I’m going to have to think on that and Cyrus’ recent behavior, because while he might not be deserving of execution, I can’t just have him going off and doing his own thing like that. Especially since it was only due to me showing him mercy and a hell of a lot of trust that I allowed him to live in the first place. Pulling a stunt like this is making me regret that decision.” + +Talia leaves you alone at this point, she just gives you the usual if you find yourself lost, to seek Dendrin’s guidance. The funny thing is maybe you should’ve considering Dendrin warned you that Cyrus would still be a potential problem years ago. + +You sit by yourself thinking and going back and forth on what to do about Cyrus and after an hour you’re still no closer to a solution. At this point you don’t even want to bother thinking about what to do about Yvette, though getting someone to seek out her husband would be a good start. + +As you’re about to leave the council chamber, Draven appears in the doorway. He looks like he’s even more worried than when he left. He’s even shaking a bit. + +“Uh…um Shadow Master. I…” +“What is it Draven? And why are you shaking?” + +He doesn’t answer and just starts sniffling and trying not to cry. He looks like he’s going to have a complete breakdown and then suddenly he breathes deeply and exhales. + +“Draven what happened? Where’s Cyrus and what’s he done?” you ask sensing that this is the cause of his behavior. + +“Nothing. And I’m sorry.” Draven says and he suddenly speeds himself up and attempts to shoot you with his armbow! + +Being more powerful in the ways of shadow magic now, you easily speed yourself up and dodge this attempt on your life. You react with a shadowfire bolt to his head, Draven falls back and drops dead instantly. + +You briefly wonder why Draven would attempt such a thing, knowing that he couldn’t have won, but you don’t dwell on it too much since you figure that Cyrus was behind it in the first place. + +“ASSASSIN! SHADOWS BLOCK THE ENTRANCES! LET NO ONE LEAVE!” you yell as loud hoping the whole temple heard it as you can and run out of the council room looking for Cyrus. + +In the chaos, you continue bellowing orders to everyone while still looking for Cyrus and telling others to find him as well. Talia rushes to you asking what’s going on and you explain that Draven just tried to kill you. + +“WHAT?!” +“Obviously Cyrus put him up to it. If this isn’t proof that he is not only disobedient to Dendrin’s laws, but also willing to betray them, I don’t know what is!” Yvette says overhearing the conversation. + +Just as you’re about to tell some of the shadows to go scouring the swamp for Cyrus, he suddenly pops up running into the gathering hall directly towards you. Thinking that he’s trying to finish the job himself you immediately order him to be stopped and then create a small barrier around yourself. Several of the Blades, along with Talia gather around you as well. You’re glad that the Blades’ loyalty seems to be on your side, even if a couple of them did obey Cyrus’ orders to go into Nalin. + +Cyrus is practically tackled to the floor though he’s confused to as why it’s happening. + +“What the…why is everyone holding me down?! What is this? Where’s Draven?” he says. +“You know damn well where he is, you sent him to kill me not a few minutes ago!” you answer. +“WHAT?! I did no such thing! He was upset about went down in the council chambers and…wait where is he?” +“Where do you think? I’m still alive to confront you on your treachery aren’t I? I mean you had to have known that I’d easily dispatch Draven.” + +This remark causes silence in Cyrus. He looks down, as you demand to know who else is involved in his little conspiracy. When he looks up again to address you, his face shows a mixture of anger and anguish. + +“There is no conspiracy you paranoid fuck! Don’t you think if I had planned one some of these people would’ve been trying to kill you right now? I would’ve thought that you would’ve at least thought higher of me that I could’ve come up with a better plan, which I wasn’t doing in the first place! I mean if I had, I certainly wouldn’t have allowed myself to be caught like an idiot like this. I thought we settled all this years ago when you first became Shadow Master. I pledged my loyalty and I meant that! I see my words mean nothing after all though, so do what you want. I submit myself to Dendrin and your final judgement as I always have.” + +Such in-fighting of the shadow leaders in a public display hasn’t probably been seen since Brother Shade tried to kill Master Ebon. Cyrus seems resigned to whatever fate you have in store for him, but you’re wondering if he’s trying to stall for time somehow. He claims that he doesn’t have others working for him, but for all you know they’re just staying quiet so that they can’t get into trouble and their courage to go through with your assassination has failed them completely. + +Or perhaps they just want Cyrus himself out of the way so that they can take power at a later time. +> Question him further +Something doesn’t quite add up about all this. Cyrus’ position isn’t looking too good right now, but he’s right in that he certainly would’ve come up with a better plan than something like this. You’re willing to at least hear him out. + +“Cyrus, you convinced me once before that I should trust you. Convince me again.” You say. +“I can’t, you’ll have to make that decision yourself. All I can do is explain what I think might’ve caused Draven to behave in the manner that he did. (Sniffle) Okay first of all I didn’t send any of the Blades to Nalin secretly…Dravin did. I didn’t even know until a couple months after he did and he confessed everything to me. Naturally I got mad about it, but what was done was done and I just told him to keep his mouth shut about it to anyone else. This didn’t come out again until our earlier council meeting where I claimed I sent them because I didn’t want Draven to get into trouble for it.” +“Right Cyrus, you expect any of us to believe that? Draven’s dead so you’re just using him as a scapegoat right now in a miserable excuse to escape Dendrin’s justice!” Yvette exclaims, but Cyrus just ignores her and continues with her story. +“After the meeting, Draven got very upset and was worried that you were going to have me executed. I told him that, that wasn’t likely, but he just kept claiming it was all his fault. I tried to calm him down, we argued and he eventually left the room. That was the last I saw of him…I knew he was distressed, but I just never thought that he’d…(sob).” + +At this point Cyrus breaks down into tears. There is an awkward silence followed by some whispering and then your own decision. + +“Let him go. He’s innocent. Well innocent of attempting to kill me anyway.” + +This judgment comes to a bit of a surprise to everyone, even Cyrus. A few shadows obviously don’t agree and Yvette makes her voice the loudest. + +“Have you left all your senses? This…traitor just tried to kill you and you’re letting him off the hook?” +“You would be wise to watch and remember who you are speaking to!” you snap. “I believe Cyrus. You know why? Because he was so damn in love with Draven that’s why. I believe that he would’ve covered up for his mistakes and I also believe he wouldn’t have willingly set up Draven on a suicidal assassination mission. His grief is proof of that.” +“It’s all an act! He’s faking those tears!” Yvette exclaims. +“So I should believe that your tears for your lost husband Theo are also fake then?” +“That’s different! My husband Theo is a loyal shadow! Draven AND Cyrus are obviously both traitors and have no loyalty to anyone save themselves! I cannot believe that you would show this much leniency, but I suppose even a treacherous one of your kind is better to have around to keep us humans in line huh?” +“Yvette, we’re all shadows, whether we’re human or eternal. Nobody here has been shown preferential treatment.” Talia says. + +And now it all comes out. + +“SHUT UP! I won’t listen to your lies any longer! I had to listen to your rationales for YEARS when I helped you in that freak lab where they grew those eternal monsters you misguidedly call your children. You don’t think I knew about all the messed up shit you allowed to happen within your own kind? Theo knew it and I know and I can’t stay silent anymore! You Eternals have twisted this order into your own caste system! The Empire may be dead, but its obvious its creations are still around to carry out its will!” Yvette turns to the crowd around and makes the rest of her point. “A true shadow is human and all are equal in the eyes of Dendrin, but these Eternals can’t see that, so they always seek to be tyrants no matter how benevolent! We must not let this go on! We must appeal to Dendrin’s sense of justice and change the way things are!” + +Yvette has gone beyond the usual disagreements now and is basically declaring open rebellion you can’t help but notice the pattern. Also makes you realize that Theo most likely isn’t dead, but rather attempting to get reinforcements in Quala to bring back to attack you. Didn’t see that one either, but even at this point it isn’t too late to curb the damage. It’s not going to be easy though. + +In the meantime you’ll have to do damage control right here at home. You just hope that it doesn’t involve killing your entire human population. + +You don’t bother arguing with Yvette, instead you just perform the same spell that Master Ebon once did to stop Brother Shade from killing him. Her ranting turns into groans of pain as she clutches her head. She begins bleeding from the ears and gasps. + +“You…will…not…w…win…” she manages to utter before her brain explodes inside her head. Yvette’s body lies motionless on the floor and you address the crowd. + +“I’m going to make this quick. I am Shadow Master, the chosen one of Dendrin, for good or ill, you ALL will follow my orders. This is how it has always been for centuries. Now I’m giving a moment of leniency as of right now…anyone who has problems with that for whatever reason, should leave this temple now and never return. I cannot stop you from continuing to worship Dendrin, but you will no longer be a member of this order. + +At this point a few shadows do indeed start to leave. + +“Very well, for those that are leaving, you will have until dawn to gather your belongings and take whatever families you may have out of this temple. Any attempt to approach us in the future will result in death.” + +As the disgruntled shadows leave, you continue your speech. + +“As for the rest of you, I expect NO disloyalty from any of you lest you suffer the same fate at Sister Yvette AND Brother Draven. Which brings me to you Cyrus, what am I supposed to do with you? While I do believe you didn’t have anything to do with what Draven did, you basically covered for someone who disobeyed orders regardless of their intentions and then later attempted to assassinate me.” +“I have no words Shadow Master…the last few moments have been…interesting. All I can do is put my life in your hands and hope Dendrin will find mercy on me.” + +Cyrus looks even more defeated than the last time you spared his life. Besides being a shadow, Draven was one of his main reasons for living. He’d probably consider it a mercy if you did kill him at this point. You do consider it, but ultimately you decide living is a more fitting punishment. + +“Cyrus, you are also banished from this temple. You have until dawn to gather your belongings. Never return or the punishment will be death.” You say. +“Very well. I shall obey your decision and I will take my leave now as I will have no use of anything where I’m going.” He says. You almost ask him where he intends to go, but given his grim remark you can take a guess that he seek out death via combat. +Just as Cyrus gets up off the floor to leave, Talia speaks out. + +“Cyrus! Don’t you want to see Draven’s body before you leave?” +“No. The man I loved is long gone; it’s just an empty shell now. Dispose of it as such.” He says and leaves. + +And that’s that. Draven dead, Yvette dead, Cyrus exiled and Theo is still hiding in Quala somewhere. It’s just you and Talia now…just like you wanted, though perhaps not quite like this. + +You spend the rest of the night with Talia talking about how to go about finding Theo and also tracking down any and all other shadows currently stationed out in Quala. You’re going to have to determine just how many people he’s turned against you and anyone “new” is going to be under the most suspicion. Even the people in this temple who stayed aren’t completely out of clear, but you can easily perform a ritual that will allow you to root out any potential traitors still in hiding here. + +About the only ones you can trust completely are…well the eternal members. + +After the last of the disgruntled shadows leaves the temple, you contact one of the Blades that Cyrus or rather Dravin sent to Nalin. Glen is his name. He probably wonders if he’s in trouble, but you dispel those concerns immediately when you say that you know he was just following orders of a superior and meant no subterfuge. + +“Shadow Master, how may I serve?” he asks. +“I want you to take some of the Blades and follow the exiled shadows for a while. See where they go and what they’re doing. Now if you see any of them making contact with other shadows in Quala, I want you to find out all you can, then I want you to kill anyone and everyone there that is plotting against us.” +“Yes Master, it will be done.” +“Good. Oh and for this mission pick your ranks from other eternals. Let’s just say that after all that has gone on today, some of our human members might be slightly uncomfortable about killing other human shadows even if they are exiles.” +“Very well, but what if the exiles do not contact other potential traitors?” +“Continue to have them followed for a few more miles, then find a quiet spot to kill them as well. Can’t have them potentially starting a new sect of Dendrin worship after all. We have to remain united if we’re going to continue to survive this set back.” +“Understood Master.” + +It is at this moment you appreciate having these new eternals with you now. Their dedication to you (and Dendrin) is so certain now that you could tell them to massacre the entire town of Sinkhole and they’d do it without any arguing. You never concerned yourself about it before but you’re beginning to sympathize a bit with Talia on the fact that they can’t breed, because you sure could use a few more of them. + +Glen asks one more question before carrying out the order. + +“Shadow Master, are we to follow the exile Cyrus as well?” +“No, he’s probably long gone by now and despite his crime, he was still ultimately loyal. Don’t bother.” + +You’re fully aware that with these last couple of orders, you’ve probably just supported Yvette’s argument. The irony is though; you weren’t trying to create any sort of caste system initially, and it’s only due to current events that you’re having to resort to a bit more preferential treatment because you don’t know who to trust right now. Eternals are naturally better warriors so you made them all part of the elite fighting group and let the less skilled human shadows tend to their families. Theo, Yvette and Dravin were all human and made up half the council, they all had a voice that could be heard. Yes, it’s true that an Eternal is in charge, but that’s hardly your fault when at nearly every turn you’ve been the one to rescue the shadows from destruction whether it’s from external or internal forces. + +“And Dendrin chose me to lead, so it must be right.” you laugh to yourself, though you imagine Dendrin’s probably having the biggest laugh of all as usual. +> Years pass... +Year 55 + +“Theo I know you’re here I can sense your presence, you might as well come on out and take your punishment with some dignity.” You say looking down the dimly lit stairway. + +You can’t believe after all these years; it’s come down to you personally tracking Theo hiding in the cellar of a simple abandoned farmhouse. Several of the Blades stand behind you asking if they should go in and get him, but you decline. You can handle this yourself, in fact you’d rather do it yourself. + +“Just stand guard, I’ll be back soon.” You say to Glen who nods and has the Blades guard the perimeter. + +You walk down the stairs without any worry about your safety. Even if Theo does attack you, and you’re fairly certain he isn’t going to be in any condition to do, you’ll easily be able to defend yourself. + +The cellar isn’t large and add the fact that there are several stacks of boxes and barrels here make the cellar seem even smaller than it is. + +“Supplies. Supplies still here from the Empire rebellion. Never did get around to using them.” Theo’s voice says from the corner of the room. You see him in his torn and tattered robe and sitting against the wall. Between his missing hand and half burned face, he’s a mess. + +“Didn’t get around to using them for this one either.” You say. +“Honestly, I’d forgotten about this place until recently. Had so many old safehouses, I was bound to forget some of them. Don’t know why I forgot about this one though…it’s rather peaceful. Serene even. I guess its remoteness helps. Yeah, this would’ve been a good place to settle down…maybe another life. Right?” +“I don’t think Dendrin does reincarnation. Least of all for traitors.” +“Yeah, I suppose so I guess. Good thing I stopped believing in him years ago.” Theo laughs weakly. + +“You know, if you stopped believing in him, you could’ve just left rather than cause a whole lot of unnecessary fighting. It’s not like I would’ve stopped you.” +“And tell me Eternal, would you leave if your own wife still believed in Dendrin?” Theo asks accusingly. You don’t know if he’s just asking hypothetically or if he is actually implying something. +“No, I suppose I wouldn’t.” +“Of course not. Besides…I did still believe up until I found out you killed her. From that point I knew that Dendrin truly didn’t support my cause, so why bother worshipping a god that doesn’t? Of course had to still keep up the charade since I had managed to hold sway over some of the new converts in Quala.” +“And that’s when you decided to just kill Sam, declare yourself in charge of his forces and repeatedly tried to invade the temple?” +“Well seemed like a good idea at the time. Honestly if that bastard Ackerson had just allied with me, I believe I would’ve had a good chance at winning. Didn’t expect him to make a separate peace with you though.” +“The fool has still got his sights set on Rask and doesn’t want to expend any military effort that isn’t focused on that endeavor. You might’ve done better trying to get help from Brenda in Nalin, heard she’s not too fond of shadows having caused the death of her husband and all.” +“Believe me I tried, she sent my messengers back without heads and a note saying she wasn’t helping even if I wasn’t really a shadow anymore and as far as she was concerned she hoped that we all killed one another.” +“Well thanks to you, this was certainly another set back for the shadows. Sort of makes the whole original rebellion rather pointless.” +“No…not for me. I think those were the happiest days of my life. I had a purpose, my enemy was clear and I knew I would win because Dendrin was on my side. Then I won, and that’s when it all started to slowly fall apart.” +“Hah. I can certainly understand where you’re coming from on that perspective. Part of your behavior in all this probably stemmed from being a rebel for so long that you never knew quite how to adjust and when the opportunity presented itself, you immersed yourself in the role again because it was comfortable. Really, any of your other reasons were all secondary and just an excuse.” + +Theo doesn’t answer he just looks down and nods a few times in a rocking motion as he clutches where his left hand used to be. Eventually he staggers upward sliding his back against the wall in an effort to stand up. You’re guessing he’s ready to die now. + +“Just one question Eternal, does Dendrin really speak to you?” +“When he feels like it, but if it makes you feel any better he hasn’t cared about the shadows for a very long time and the only reason why he takes an interest in them at all is due to me.” +“…well I guess I was doomed from the very beginning then.” +“So was I Theo…so was I.” you say and hit Theo with a powerful shadowfire bolt which burns directly through his chest leaving a big hole and a black mark against the wall. Theo slumps down and the leader of the “new rebellion” is dead. + +The damage he’s caused isn’t so readily repairable. In addition to losing many shadows he’s also created a separate faction of them (Something you were trying to avoid), which are still located in pockets across Quala. The beliefs are basically the same (and without the indoctrination ritual obviously), with the exception that YOU or any other non-pure human for that matter shouldn’t be a shadow, let alone in charge of the order. + +Your first thought is that you should probably hunt them all down and wipe them out before they become a problem, but then again this little conflict has been taking a toll on the shadows you have left. Some of the children don’t even have mothers and fathers anymore. It might be time to pack up the gear and attempt to rebuild again. + +As you think on this, you make your way up the stairs and wince at a couple of the aches in your joints in doing so. You might be an Eternal, but you sure as hell aren’t starting to feel like one in the past few years as old age is becoming a little more apparent to you. Makes you sort of glad that you don’t have to rely solely on regular combat anymore thanks to your increased magic abilities gifted to you by your “dedication” to Dendrin no doubt. + +In any case you’re tired and you tell Glen that Theo is dead, but you’re going to stay here for the night before heading home again. Glen as usual nods and says he’ll keep everyone on watch. + +You find an old bed that probably has been slept in years, but it doesn’t look infested with bed bugs so you use it. Doesn’t take long for you to slowly drift off to sleep, but you get the impression that you’re not going to get a peaceful rest. + +“So another enemy falls before you, keep this up and you’ll outlive everyone.” Dendrin remarks. +“Figured you’d show up eventually. Any words of advice on what to do next?” you ask. +“Not really, you seem to have it under control. So…still bored?” +“No, but I hate set backs.” +“Come now you should be used to such things by now.” +“I am, but that doesn’t mean I have to like them. Especially when I feel like packing it all in because there’s little point in going on.” +“So you don’t intend on destroying the heretic shadows?” +“I almost don’t intend on going back to the temple. I feel like just leaving altogether.” +“You’ve said that before, many times. You won’t though.” +“Of course I won’t, but I feel like no matter what I do something severely sets back the shadows. Against all odds I’ve taken it upon myself to be their leader and protect them better than you ever do and I’m still lying about being a true believer.” +“Oh you’re a believer, a cynical one, but you’re a believer. If you weren’t you would’ve left a long time ago because it’s a little bit more than just Talia keeping you here.” +“I don’t see what else there is, because it sure isn’t to bask in the glory of your voice.” +“It’s power pure and simple. It’s being in charge. It’s telling others what to do and ruling them like a king or emperor if you prefer.” +“I might agree with you if I actually thought I was in charge of anything so grand. Besides, it’s really you they’re all worshipping not me.” +“And is that what your problem is? That you’re doing all the work and not getting any of the perks? And here I thought all that nice magical power I’ve been granting to you was a fine way of rewarding you.” +“Well it hasn’t hurt. You’re right though, I don’t mind being in charge and I do thrive on a bit of conflict, but sometimes it just gets a bit tiring that’s all.” +“Ah, and now you see why I stopped directly leading the shadows altogether!” +“Yeah, well I don’t have that luxury unless you can elevate me to godhood.” +“Ha ha, even if I could, obviously I wouldn’t want the competition.” +“Too bad, maybe if you could you wouldn’t suffer from boredom either.” +“Hmm, interesting insight as always Eternal. Well, I’ll let you get back to it. Oh and just in case you did want my advice, I’d rather you not destroy the so-called heretic shadows. They might not be following you, but they do still worship me.” + +And once again you wake up, with more dubious advice from your “god.” You sometimes wonder whenever he does give you any of his wisdom if he wants you to do the exact opposite of what he says, because you practically do every time. + +In any case, you can’t dwell on the nature of the divine at this moment. You’re still left with the decision about how to fix the mess you have to clean up. +> Go back to the temple and focus on rebuilding +What few heretical shadows still remain isn’t many and they don’t exactly have any type of leadership anymore. Hunting them all down seems like a waste of your time and possibly manpower, especially since Quala is more hostile and destabilized than ever now. Chances are the heretics will eventually resort to the typical banditry that goes on here and they’ll get wiped out by one of the warlord factions. Even if they manage to join up with any of the factions, they’ll likely abandon their newfound religion in the process. + +Rebuilding what you have left seems like a better idea at this point, so you send a message out to all your people to leave this war torn land and head back to Delerg. + +When you arrive in Delerg, your temple seems so much emptier now. Well certainly empty of more adults. You don’t have many Blades left either anymore, only about a dozen from what remains of the original amount you had. Not counting all the ones that never made it out of their tanks or failed Talia’s training when she was trying to bring them into the fold of course. + +Orphaned children that are fairly young have so far been taken care of in more communal way as needed, though you ask if Talia wants to take charge of all them in the same way she did the eternals and eventually train them to be Blades. She declines though and says the children should probably start being assigned to a more permanent family arrangement starting with volunteers first. + +You’re confident that the numbers will build back up since there are always people in Delerg that are drawn to join the order. Assuming you have no further major conflict, things should go back to their previous “boring” ways of simple temple routine in no time. This time though you’re looking forward to a bit of boredom. This last major clash has somewhat made you realize that maybe you should be taking it easier in your later years. Not that you’re ready for the grave, but you just aren’t young like you used to be and you can’t single handedly fight entire wars for the shadows anymore even with your increased magical powers. It’s a strain and you’ve got so much on your plate in general. + +Maybe Dendrin knew this too and that’s why he suggested that you not hunt down the heretics in that cryptic way that he tends to do. You think back to how you said to him that you couldn’t afford to not be directly involved and relax in the way that he does, and while that is true, there really isn’t any reason why you couldn’t start following his lead just a little. It also makes you start to wonder if he’s been right about a few things. + +Weeks and months pass as you go through the motions of temple routine, though it’s been a little different for you somehow. Like you’ve actually started to attempt to find a deeper reason behind the words of all the texts you read from. You don’t know if it’s because you’re trying to embrace this new moment of peace within the shadows (as opposed to the fidgeting boredom you usually suffer from) or if it’s because you’re becoming genuinely interested in the stuff. + +Are you finally becoming a “believer?” + +Dendrin claims you already are and it seems impossible, but you have noticed yourself having slightly more civilized conversations with Dendrin as the years have gone on, even agreeing with him at times. You remember practically ranting at him when you were young, in retrospect it’s amazing that he didn’t kill you given his power. He pretty much put up with you and he didn’t have to. He hasn’t helped you in probably the most direct way most of the time, but really would you have wanted him to? Your insistence on always forging your own way was always paramount to you and he probably saw that and acted accordingly by letting you make your own choices. + +You’ve only really prayed genuinely once to Dendrin and that was back when you wanted help with getting the new eternals under control. Even then it was a last ditch reason and you did it more out of selfish desperation rather than any genuine belief. You begin to wonder if it couldn’t hurt to just sincerely pray to him once in a while. Not in the hopes of getting anything out of him, but just…well to show a little bit of gratitude. + +It is probably due to your new found attempt at piety that attracts more people to the temple and restores some of the hope that the shadows will overcome this set back like they have so many before in the past. + +Year 60 + +“One of the heretics was caught near the temple. He claims that another group stand at the border of Delerg. We confirmed this and most of them haggard and tired looking. This speaker claims that he wishes to speak with you about making peace and an urgent matter.” Brother Gannon says. +“Hmm, have to say I didn’t think they’d last as long as they did. They didn’t mention what this so called urgent matter was about?” you reply. +“No, just that it was of great importance to anyone who reveres Dendrin.” +“Probably a trick of some sort, you should just have all of them killed.” Glen remarks. +“Yes, that would be the safe bet, but I suppose it wouldn’t hurt to listen seeing as I’m not particularly worried about them. Drag him in, but keep a tight hold on him.” +“Very well Shadow Master.” Glen says. + +The heretic is brought in and he certainly is a miserable looking wretch. It isn’t due to any roughing up by your own shadows either, as he was confirmed to be in the same state as the rest of his fellows waiting for him. He’s very nervous and looking around as much as he can while two of the Blades grasp his arms and several other shadows look on at the proceedings. + +“Well? We don’t have all day. Out with it heretic scum!” Talia demands before you can say anything. + +“Oh! Right…uh…Shadow Master I beg you in Dendrin’s name to call off your assassins! We have seen that Theo’s teachings were the improper doctrine! We submit to your rule as the rightful chosen one of Dendrin himself and ask for mercy by allowing us to merge with the true and only temple dedicated to him!” the heretic whines. You certainly weren’t expecting this, and you’re also wondering about these assassins. + +“Assassins? We haven’t sent anyone to seek out your destruction. If that were the case we would’ve done it years ago.” +“You…haven’t? But that seems impossible.” +“Why? It isn’t like shadows are well accepted anywhere else except Delerg as you surely know. What makes you think it isn’t General Ackerson or any of the many other warlords in the area?” +“No, he is too busy fighting Mog, Son of Flog’s orc and ogre horde in Rask. Rumors are he’s sick as well and his underlings are already squabbling over who is going to take power when he’s gone. As for other warlords, they aren’t a threat to us, at least not in any meaningful way, and most of them are too direct and unsophisticated to engage in the terror tactics that your assassins have. Your assassins tell us that they are the hand of justice in Dendrin’s name.” +“As I said we have sent no assassins. I don’t know what kind of game you’re playing, but I’m not falling for it.” +“No please wait! Maybe you didn’t send the assassins, but if that’s true then this is more alarming news! Because they’re using shadow magic to accomplish their tasks! If it isn’t you or anyone in your order as you say, who are they? And will they attack you as well?” + +This does give you a bit of pause though it’s hard to tell with someone that’s supposed to be your enemy. He does look quite sincere in his words and his fear. + +If it wasn’t any of your people, then who would it be? It’s quite possible that it’s just another rogue group that split off from the original heretics and formed yet a third faction of shadows. Of course if that was the case, they should know about it instead of jumping to the conclusion that it is you. + +Of course this could all still be just an elaborate trick. Perhaps an attempt to make you suspicious of people in your own group carrying out tasks that you didn’t order. There’s also the other urgent matter that they said they had to tell you, which you question the heretic on. + +“So what is this other urgent matter you had to tell us?” you ask. +“Oh, yes that, well there are rumors that Warden Matron Brenda of Nalin is planning on invading Delerg.” +“What? I know she hates the shadows, but reports have always established that she has never set sights on anything north of the Nalin province. She doesn’t even have an established presence in Quala.” Talia remarks. +“Well, I didn’t say she planned on holding the territory, just that she was planning on invading it. I don’t know. It is what we have heard in our travels to get here.” +“Could be Brenda that’s sending the assassins then and using something similar to shadow magic that these blasphemous fools are taking as the real thing. Maybe we should prepare ourselves, after killing these heretics of course.” Glen remarks. + +“But we’re sincere! I’M sincere! How…how about we prove ourselves by being judged directly by Dendrin himself? You could perform the initiation ritual to open the portal to his realm. If he accepts our forgiveness then surely that would be proof that our hearts and souls are truthful, right? If he doesn’t then we won’t survive the process anyway.” The heretic exclaims. +“Well, that would be one way of ensuring their dedication I suppose.” Talia says to you. +> Perform the initiation ritual +“Very well, you and what remains of your people may come back to the true temple of Dendrin if he sees fit to forgive you for your transgressions. Glen, get the rest of this miserable lot back here and I’ll prepare the ritual.” +“It will be done.” Glen says and gathers some of the Blades to help him. + +“As for you, what is your name?” you ask the heretic. +“Remi, Shadow Master.” +“Remi, you’re going to be held outside, I don’t want your heretic ass befouling the temple until it’s time to throw you into the portal.” + +The two Blades holding him take him away and you head off to go get yourself prepared. + +“So what do you think about the potential invasion business?” Talia asks. +“I’m going to deal with this first and worry about that afterwards, but I don’t think there’s anything to it. Just rumors.” +“I agree. I’m surprised that you’re giving the heretics a second chance though.” +“I’m not. Dendrin is. Well maybe he is, for all I know he’ll still see them as potential troublemakers and do away with them. I’m wondering who is killing them though, because while I don’t think its Brenda behind this, I’m not convinced that we’re necessarily safe. For all we know after they’re done targeting these heretics they could be coming after us.” +“Wait, so do you think it was good idea to allow them to join?” +“As I said I’m putting this in Dendrin’s hands. Whoever has been targeting the heretics will most likely show themselves to us a lot sooner. Besides I’d rather they did, since they’re also performing acts that weren’t sanctioned by this temple or masquerading as shadows.” + +As you gather up the components needed to perform the ritual from your room, you hear a lot of noise coming from the ground floor. An alarm has been raised. It would seem that the assassins have decided to show themselves right now. You quickly run up stairs and find mass chaos and + +“We’re being attacked! I was standing outside watching the Blades guards the heretic and then all of a sudden five shadows materialized right beside the three of them and killed them! I didn’t even sense them! None of us did!” Gannon remarks. +“I was inside, but he’s right I didn’t sense anyone cloaked. You have the best abilities in such matter, did you sense an intruding presence of any kind?” Talia says. +“No…but how many did you say there were?” you ask. +“At least five! Maybe more!” Gannon answers. +“Odd, I’m only sensing one hostile presence in the area. Where are the rest of the Blades?” +“Most of them are still out with the heretics, I’ve had the temple doors locked tight so whoever they are can’t get in, but we’re going to have to fight this one out. We’ll all go out there together in a show of force and…” + +You raise your hand up and shake your head. + +“No Talia, I don’t think that’ll be necessary. I know who the attacker is.” You say and head towards the main temple doors. +“Wait where are you going?” +“I’m facing the attacker myself. They deserve that much.” +“Wait! You can’t go out there alone! We don’t know how many there are and…” +“As I have said. There is only one, they’re just really quick and probably using some sort of mirror image. Trust me. Better yet, trust in Dendrin.” You tell Talia with a smile. + +Talia says nothing else; her mouth opens to do so, but realizes that you won’t be swayed by anything. Instead she just looks a bit upset. + +“Talia, whatever happens, know that I love you.” you say before exiting the temple and closing the temple doors again. + +You walk down the steps and on to the soft ground and look around at your surroundings. To the left you see the bloody bodies of your two Blades and Remi. One clean cut to each of their throats. + +“Cyrus, you might as well come out. I know its you.” you say. + +Within a few moments a figure materializes in front of you and it is ideed Cyrus. He’s much older looking now of course, but it’s him. He’s also much paler, unnaturally so. You notice his right hand is also sporting a couple missing fingers. Whatever he’s been up to has taken a toll on his body. + +“Remember the days when you couldn’t cast a simple cloak spell without tiring yourself out.” Cyrus asks. “Now look at you with your superior extra sensory abilities. You even knew who it was.” +“Well, given the heretic’s story and the fact that I could only sense a single attacker, I sort of figured it would be you. Why have you come back Cyrus?” +“It was not my intention I assure you. I merely wanted to punish the rest of the heretics. I had thought that their plan to come here was going to finish the job for me, but I was surprised to learn that you have decided to show them mercy. When did this happen? When did the great Shadow Master become so lenient against those that have defied him?” +“It was decided that the heretics are going to be judged by Dendrin himself. If he sees them as a threat or unforgivable then they will presumably die for their crimes. If not then they will be accepted back. I see no leniency.” +“Oh no? That was more of a choice than I got.” +“Well perhaps you are right…perhaps you should also get a chance to come back. Did you want…” +“What I want is for YOU to hand over the rest of the heretics or kill them yourself! They are traitors and deserve to die!” +“Cyrus, you’ve dispensed enough of your brand of justice on them. So much so that they’ve run to back to us pleading for help and willing to submit to Dendrin’s judgment, is that not justice?” +“They need to die! THAT is Dendrin’s justice! Justice that wasn’t being pursued until I took matters into my own hands. You know. I accepted a lot. I accepted the fact that you were a better warrior than me. I accepted that you were the chosen one of Dendrin. I even accepted it when you killed my Dravin. I accepted exile and a life of wandering. But never once did I think you weren’t up to the task of being a good Shadow Master, until you failed to finish off the heretics. And now, you’re accepting them back into the fold? This is a bigger blasphemy than what Brother Theo pulled! If you continue to protect them I will see to it that you suffer the same punishment!” +“So now you know better then Dendrin?” + +Cyrus is exasperated by your remark and takes a moment to form his new arguments inbetween his huffing and puffing. + +“Do not twist my words! And you stand there as if YOU know Dendrin? Hah! You don’t even fucking believe in him! Yes, I know you. I know that you’re just playing a role that you don’t even believe yourself! Even back when we were just fresh out of training I always sensed that your heart and soul was never truly dedicated to the cause! Your whole life has been a fraud!” + +Your calm demeanor begins to crack at this remark. + +“Not dedicated? After all the countless battles I’ve engaged in personally and the leadership roles I’ve taken to keep the shadows alive and you question my dedication? Cyrus, I’m not going to deny that you are right in that I wasn’t always the strongest of faith. I’ll stand here and shout it in front of the fucking temple and throughout this forsaken swamp that I was practically a heathen most of the time. But people change. I changed. Perhaps I have been a fraud for most of my life, but are you just so damn jealous and bitter that it wasn’t you?” + +Cyrus gets in your face, but you make no defensive move. You don’t even flinch. Though several of the shadows and Talia are watching from the temple. You sense they want to move in, but you wave them back without looking in their direction. + +“YES! YES I AM SO DAMN JEALOUS! WHY WAS IT YOU?! WHY WASN’T IT ME!? I WAS THE LOYAL ONE! I WAS THE ONE WHO ALWAYS BELIEVED! I (Sob) WAS THE…(Sob) Why, why, why didn’t he ever speak to me again?” Cyrus crumples down to the ground and breaks down in tears. You crouch beside him. + +“Cyrus, I don’t have an answer. Dendrin does what he wants because he’s more powerful than the rest of us. That’s the cynical answer and that’s the answer I’ve believed for years. I probably still do a little bit, but in recent years I’ve come to the conclusion that maybe there is a plan of some sort even if I don’t understand all of it. If there wasn’t Dendrin wouldn’t have chosen me at all and guided me in the unique way that he does right from the start. Cyrus, you can come back to us too. It isn’t too late. You don’t even need to submit to the ritual, I know that you’re more dedicated to Dendrin’s true teachings than anyone.” + +You smile and extend your hand to help Cyrus up. He wipes his face and looks at you for a moment. He attempts to smile back, but it turns into a pained expression. + +“Sorry Shadow Master, but I can’t play second fiddle anymore. At least I’ll be remembered for this!” he says grabbing your hand to pull you forward and with lightning speed he plunges a dagger into your heart. + +The last thing you hear as your body collapses to the ground are several screams followed by a lot of yelling. Then everything goes black and you feel numb. + +“Am I dead?” you ask floating in the void. +“Well it’s not good.” You hear Dendrin say. +“I don’t imagine it is. I suppose you’re going to say I should’ve listened from the beginning and that Cyrus was going to be trouble again.” +“No, it worked out better this way.” +“What, you wanted him to kill me and take over?” +“Not at all, in fact Cyrus didn’t live long enough to enjoy killing you. He was riddled with bolts by the Blades who were just returning when this happened. Though I think he could’ve easily avoided the attack and he actually let them kill him…just like you allow him to kill you. Why? Were you finally tired of life?” +“No…I just…I dunno I was really attempting to get through to him. I knew it would probably fail, but I had to try. When his eyes gave away his intentions, I knew that he wouldn’t be happy unless he killed me. He was either going to succeed or fail, but I decided to put it in your hands. Seems hard to believe that I’d do anything like this.” +“Well as you said in your speech to Cyrus, you changed. Unfortunately Cyrus never did, though I say unfortunately for him. You’ll be fine. Off you go and thanks for believing in me.” + +With those last words from Dendrin you suddenly wake up exactly where you fell. You find yourself surrounded by shadows and Talia weeping over your body, though she stops when you appear to be alive again. + +“He’s alive!” Glen shouts and tells some of the others to back off. +“Look! His chest wound is gone as well! Truly this must be Dendrin’s work, to bring our Shadow Master back from the dead like this!” + +While several of the other shadows begin to cheer, fawn and act generally awe stricken, Talia merely holds you tightly happy that you’re still alive. As you hug her back, you’re glad to be alive as well. +> Years pass... +Year 75 + +“Seems hard to believe that we haven’t had any major conflict in over a decade.” Talia says. +“What is harder to believe is that I stopped missing it. But I imagine the major powers are too busy fighting over the Quala region to worry about us as usual. I mean you’ve got the Empire of Nalin, Drog Son of Mog’s Horde and even the Felkan Kingdom all annexing portions of it.” +“Who do you think will win it?” +“The Nalin Empire will probably take most of it. Their new ruler Tarna is very ambitious as she started laying groundwork to invade Quala soon after Brenda’s suicide…which was pretty suspicious anyway. I’m sure Drog is ambitious too, but predictably his son Og will soon challenge him for leadership and they’ll resort to infighting as usual. As for the Felkan Kingdom, I believe the only reason why they started eating up land from Arat to Quala is to initially stop the on going anarchy that was starting to cross over into their borders. I think when they finally reach borders with Nalin, the expansion for them will halt and then it’ll be a long stand off…history repeats itself again.” +“You sound a bit concerned.” +“Well, I’m fairly confident that we won’t be attacked anytime soon, but as I said, history repeats itself and you’re always going to get that one leader that’s determined to prove themselves no matter how foolish the odds.” +“Even against a chosen one of a god?” Talia chuckles. +“Especially against a chosen one of a god, even if only to claim they defied the divine.” +“Is that what you would’ve done?” +“Of course.” You laugh. “But as I said, I do not believe an attack will come in our time. It’s going to come after us, I don’t know how long, but the shadows are going to have to be prepared.” +“Dendrin, will look over them as he always has.” +“I sure hope so, because I can’t do it forever. I may be an Eternal, but I’m not eternal. I’ve been studying some of our members as a potential successor, but I’m still not sure if any of them are up to the task.” +“You have? I didn’t know.” +“Well unless Dendrin tells me himself who he wants as his chosen, it’s sort of up to me and nobody has told me they’ve been speaking to him on a regular basis either.” +“Actually you never told anyone either until years later.” +“Yeah, but that was a little different…besides I’m also pondering a more permanent solution to our potential safety issues.” +“Oh? What’s that?” +“The Ritual of Ascension” + +Talia is a little taken back by your statement. The Ritual of Ascension was supposedly passed down from Dendrin himself to the first Shadow Master, telling him that it was only to be used if he felt the shadows were ready for it. + +The results are not entirely clear on what it does, but what Dendrin explained is that it would unify the shadows to his own realm forever. Not just in a spiritual sense, but in a very real physical sense. The shadows essentially would become REAL shadows. Incorporeal and no longer susceptible to the weaknesses that most beings suffer. At least that’s what you think happens. + +Obviously no Shadow Master ever felt this way for any reason. Even during the time under the Empire, it was never seriously considered as a solution to the problem, which gives an indication to how this ritual is viewed with more awe and fear than anything else. + +Still, the procedures of the ritual do exist and they have been written down. Dendrin passed them to the shadows obviously believing that one day it would be used so you don’t see why you shouldn’t consider it as an option. + +In the meantime Talia has gotten over her surprise. + +“Well, if you believe that we are worthy and ready, then I will certainly follow you in performing this ritual. I believe everyone will, there is no question about that. You have lead the shadows through some of the toughest conflicts in our long history. You’ve even returned from death itself because Dendrin believed your work here was not done. Perhaps this is why.” +“Heh, I never thought about that before. Still, perhaps I should consult Dendrin about this before making a final decision.” You say. +“Of course. Obtaining his guidance in this very important matter would be essential.” + +Later that night you pray to Dendrin and go to sleep fully expecting him to see him soon… + +But nothing happens. + +You do this night after night until four months go by, and still you get no sign. Dendrin not speaking to you for month or even years on end is nothing new to you, but in every instance where you’ve directly requested his guidance he has always appeared. Not this time. + +You start to wonder if him not appearing is a sign that maybe you shouldn’t go through with this ritual. Of course maybe this is one of those decisions that’s so important that you need to make it for yourself. Are you ready? Do you consider the rest of the shadows ready? + +You know everyone now is a loyal worshipper of Dendrin and have an equal amount of faith in you as well. You really don’t see how they could be any more ready than they are now. They won’t fear the unknown no matter what it is, as long as they trust in Dendrin. Becoming one with Dendrin seems like it would be ideal to most in the order, though perhaps you have a few reservations about it for a few reasons, but then maybe that’s why the ritual has never seriously been considered in the past by other Shadow Masters. + +Maybe it hasn’t been just you. Maybe they all had their doubts about Dendrin’s plan. Maybe it’s just a natural thing when it comes to being “a leader.” + +You don’t fear death. You’ve always accepted it from the first time Mistress put the boot to your chest and demanded that you beg for your life to the time when you stood your ground against Cyrus without fighting back. You always believed you were going to die (well permanently anyway) either in combat or through some sort of violence, but it’s starting to look like you’ll end up dying as an old man in your sleep. Nothing wrong with that. + +Your concern is what exactly happens to you after you perform this ritual? Are you dead? Are you alive? Are you something else? Will you still be on this world? There are so many questions and one of them is will you be better off in this form, or is death better? + +You already assume that when you die, you’ll be in Dendrin’s realm. That being your understanding of how death in the service of a god works. What makes this different? Would you just be speeding up the process in some sort of mass suicide? + +The fact is, you won’t know unless you go through with it. +> Perform the ritual +There were a lot of things you didn’t have full knowledge on and you risked going through with your ideas anyway. Seems to have worked so far, and since you’ve never been one to play it too safe, you’ll go through with the Ascension Ritual. + +After another couple days of being completely sure of your dedication, you make the announcement to everyone. Many of the shadows immediately cheer at the news, others aren’t entirely sure what you’re talking about which isn’t surprising since the Ascension Ritual isn’t common knowledge to the newer shadows. Still when you explain it, they all seem excited about the plan. The ritual takes a bit of planning on your part, but eventually you’ve got everything in place. + +When the time comes you stand outside the temple in front of the several hundred shadows with their heads down in prayer. From the ones nearly as old as you to the ones that are barely out of the crib, all shadows are lending their own energy and faith to your own in the effort of pulling off this historical moment. + +Talia stands by your side as always. You look at her and wonder if you would’ve even come this far if you hadn’t fallen in love with her. Of course maybe that was part of Dendrin’s plan too. + +“Dendrin, we are your shadows! We have served your will for centuries no matter what the struggles. From before the Empire and through it, and after it’s inevitable demise. We will always be your faithful servants in the years to come. These forms however are limited and we would wish to continue serving you in a less restrictive one. We feel we are ready. I feel we are ready. This is the destiny of the shadows! We will become one with you forever at last!” you say and then begin the incantations. + +Most of your people recite what you say in unison while others stand at the far ends and chant supporting verses, which are essential to the ritual. Talia is also chanting yet another portion of it while making gestures with her hands to begin the first part of opening up the portal to Dendrin’s realm. This part is is almost like the initiation ritual, but of course much more complex and involved. + +A large portal opens up above all of you and darkness spreads across the sky, even beyond your own area. There is no wind or lightning or anything that most would connect with such a grand attempt altering reality. Instead, it remains true to Dendrin, and it just gets very dark and you start to feel a tingling numbness. + +You begin to see some of the shadows fall to the ground. You don’t know if they’ve died or just fainted. None of them are deterred though; they all continue to perform their parts for as long as they are able. This is like one of your personal encounters with Dendrin when you’ve slept, but instead everyone is experiencing it in the real world. You begin to feel all five of your senses becoming non-existent and the numbness is close to complete at this point. + +Eventually you can’t even see most of the shadows in front of you and you can hardly hear them anymore. Still you know you’re on the right path, the blackness is engulfing everything. You briefly look over at Talia who is barely visible now. She continues to chant like a true believer that she’s always been. + +A few minutes pass and you soon can’t hear anything except your own voice now and even that is very faint, though you can’t be sure it’s due to losing your hearing or your voice. Probably both. You look over one more time at Talia who you see start to teeter from exhaustion. You see her look over at you as well before you lose sight of her completely to the blackness. + +You continue to silently chant while your mind fights the fatigue you’re experiencing. It feels like you’ve been doing this forever, but you have to finish. You wonder what’s happening to everyone else. You wonder if they’re still alive. You wonder if Talia is still alive. + +“Eternal, do you know what you do?” you hear inside your head. It’s Dendrin, he’s made his presence known at last. You can’t talk to him though, you need to focus. + +“Eternal, once you complete this ritual there will be no going back. Things will never be the same and I do not believe the results will be what you envisioned.” + +He’s testing you. He is always testing you. Of course the results won’t be what you envisioned! For one thing you went into this not knowing what was going to happen exactly. Second of all when it comes to Dendrin you know that nothing ever happens the exact way it should. That doesn’t matter though, because things always work out in the end. + +“Eternal, are you sure this is what you want?” + +Of course it is. You want the shadows to be free of anymore harm. You’ve been their shepherd for over decades now. They would’ve ultimately been destroyed without you. When you’re gone the shadows will fall prey to something else, whether it be from external forces or internal ones. Dendrin still cares very little for them despite his fondness for you. Dendrin knows this as well, that’s why he had the plan to make YOU care. + +You see that now. You see it all so clearly no. + +By directly uniting the shadows with Dendrin, the problems of the past will no longer apply. The shadows will be an extension of Dendrin himself and he’ll have no choice but to care. + +You begin the finishing lines of the ritual. + +“Very well, I can see you have made your decision…an interesting one and you’ll get your wish. Farewell Eternal, I shall always remember you as you were and your deeds, even if nobody else will.” + +With those last words you succumb to absolute numbness. Your mind however is being bombarded with the voices of hundreds of voices. Many of them confused and scared, you can’t help but feel similar, you don’t know where you are. Are you still at the temple? Are you dead? Are you in Dendrin’s realm? + +Your mind calls out to the rest of the voices to cease, but it’s of little help. You keep trying until you hear one familiar voice in the crowd. + +“You’ve done it my love. We have joined with Dendrin! Join with the rest of us!” +“Talia? Where are you?” +“Am I everywhere! We are everywhere! Do you not sense it?” +“I can’t sense anything. All I hear is the noise of voices.” +“Ignore them, eventually all of them will be silenced and it will soon just be one voice. I was singled out by Dendrin to help guide you though.” +“I don’t understand, are we dead? Where are we?” +“You will understand everything when you let go. You once told me to trust you, now I’m asking you to trust me…better yet trust in Dendrin.” + +Talia was your link to the shadows for the longest time and now she’s your link one last time. You let go and eventually the voices become quieter and quieter and then silent. + +Then nothingness… + +In the days following the Shadow Rift of Delerg, several of the super powers fighting over the Quala region actually stopped fighting for a moment out fear that something much worse potentially threatened them all. A united group of explorers eventually traveled into the shadow covered Delerg province to see what was going on. + +They returned unscathed, but said the swamps were now completely devoid of life. The largest settlement Sinkhole was now a ghost town and the Shadow Temple was completely gone. As if it had never existed. Nobody knew what to make of this so for awhile there was an uneasy peace. + +Years passed and eventually the same lusts for power started cropping up again and eventually it was business as usual. Delerg was still off limits to most people, but not considered particularly dangerous. Every once in awhile a group of adventurers would explore it, in some attempt to find hidden treasures of the mysterious shadow order, but these always ended in failure. + +Within a century the shadows that once blanketed Delerg began to disappear and once again life started to flourish there. People even started moving there to live again and as with all things, another government eventually placed its flag in the area declaring the land as its own. + +As for the shadows, they lived on as a memory and in time that memory faded into legend and then forgotten completely. + +Except by one being, who had long moved on from this world to seek out a new one to with which to entertain itself.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 75 + +“Seems hard to believe that we haven’t had any major conflict in over a decade.” Talia says. +“What is harder to believe is that I stopped missing it. But I imagine the major powers are too busy fighting over the Quala region to worry about us as usual. I mean you’ve got the Empire of Nalin, Drog Son of Mog’s Horde and even the Felkan Kingdom all annexing portions of it.” +“Who do you think will win it?” +“The Nalin Empire will probably take most of it. Their new ruler Tarna is very ambitious as she started laying groundwork to invade Quala soon after Brenda’s suicide…which was pretty suspicious anyway. I’m sure Drog is ambitious too, but predictably his son Og will soon challenge him for leadership and they’ll resort to infighting as usual. As for the Felkan Kingdom, I believe the only reason why they started eating up land from Arat to Quala is to initially stop the on going anarchy that was starting to cross over into their borders. I think when they finally reach borders with Nalin, the expansion for them will halt and then it’ll be a long stand off…history repeats itself again.” +“You sound a bit concerned.” +“Well, I’m fairly confident that we won’t be attacked anytime soon, but as I said, history repeats itself and you’re always going to get that one leader that’s determined to prove themselves no matter how foolish the odds.” +“Even against a chosen one of a god?” Talia chuckles. +“Especially against a chosen one of a god, even if only to claim they defied the divine.” +“Is that what you would’ve done?” +“Of course.” You laugh. “But as I said, I do not believe an attack will come in our time. It’s going to come after us, I don’t know how long, but the shadows are going to have to be prepared.” +“Dendrin, will look over them as he always has.” +“I sure hope so, because I can’t do it forever. I may be an Eternal, but I’m not eternal. I’ve been studying some of our members as a potential successor, but I’m still not sure if any of them are up to the task.” +“You have? I didn’t know.” +“Well unless Dendrin tells me himself who he wants as his chosen, it’s sort of up to me and nobody has told me they’ve been speaking to him on a regular basis either.” +“Actually you never told anyone either until years later.” +“Yeah, but that was a little different…besides I’m also pondering a more permanent solution to our potential safety issues.” +“Oh? What’s that?” +“The Ritual of Ascension” + +Talia is a little taken back by your statement. The Ritual of Ascension was supposedly passed down from Dendrin himself to the first Shadow Master, telling him that it was only to be used if he felt the shadows were ready for it. + +The results are not entirely clear on what it does, but what Dendrin explained is that it would unify the shadows to his own realm forever. Not just in a spiritual sense, but in a very real physical sense. The shadows essentially would become REAL shadows. Incorporeal and no longer susceptible to the weaknesses that most beings suffer. At least that’s what you think happens. + +Obviously no Shadow Master ever felt this way for any reason. Even during the time under the Empire, it was never seriously considered as a solution to the problem, which gives an indication to how this ritual is viewed with more awe and fear than anything else. + +Still, the procedures of the ritual do exist and they have been written down. Dendrin passed them to the shadows obviously believing that one day it would be used so you don’t see why you shouldn’t consider it as an option. + +In the meantime Talia has gotten over her surprise. + +“Well, if you believe that we are worthy and ready, then I will certainly follow you in performing this ritual. I believe everyone will, there is no question about that. You have lead the shadows through some of the toughest conflicts in our long history. You’ve even returned from death itself because Dendrin believed your work here was not done. Perhaps this is why.” +“Heh, I never thought about that before. Still, perhaps I should consult Dendrin about this before making a final decision.” You say. +“Of course. Obtaining his guidance in this very important matter would be essential.” + +Later that night you pray to Dendrin and go to sleep fully expecting him to see him soon… + +But nothing happens. + +You do this night after night until four months go by, and still you get no sign. Dendrin not speaking to you for month or even years on end is nothing new to you, but in every instance where you’ve directly requested his guidance he has always appeared. Not this time. + +You start to wonder if him not appearing is a sign that maybe you shouldn’t go through with this ritual. Of course maybe this is one of those decisions that’s so important that you need to make it for yourself. Are you ready? Do you consider the rest of the shadows ready? + +You know everyone now is a loyal worshipper of Dendrin and have an equal amount of faith in you as well. You really don’t see how they could be any more ready than they are now. They won’t fear the unknown no matter what it is, as long as they trust in Dendrin. Becoming one with Dendrin seems like it would be ideal to most in the order, though perhaps you have a few reservations about it for a few reasons, but then maybe that’s why the ritual has never seriously been considered in the past by other Shadow Masters. + +Maybe it hasn’t been just you. Maybe they all had their doubts about Dendrin’s plan. Maybe it’s just a natural thing when it comes to being “a leader.” + +You don’t fear death. You’ve always accepted it from the first time Mistress put the boot to your chest and demanded that you beg for your life to the time when you stood your ground against Cyrus without fighting back. You always believed you were going to die (well permanently anyway) either in combat or through some sort of violence, but it’s starting to look like you’ll end up dying as an old man in your sleep. Nothing wrong with that. + +Your concern is what exactly happens to you after you perform this ritual? Are you dead? Are you alive? Are you something else? Will you still be on this world? There are so many questions and one of them is will you be better off in this form, or is death better? + +You already assume that when you die, you’ll be in Dendrin’s realm. That being your understanding of how death in the service of a god works. What makes this different? Would you just be speeding up the process in some sort of mass suicide? + +The fact is, you won’t know unless you go through with it. +> Train a successor +There is too much that is unknown to you about the Ascension Ritual that you don’t want to risk it. Maybe it would result in better protection, but at what cost? The problem is you don’t know what the cost is and Dendrin isn’t forth coming about the information anytime soon. + +There is also placing faith in others to think about. You mainly considered the Ascension Ritual because you had concerns about any successor doing your job as well as you could, but really the shadows have had many Shadow Masters in the past and the order never suffered complete destruction. They endured centuries under the Empire, and they’ll easily endure centuries now that they aren’t under it. If anything the shadows are in the best position than they ever have been. + +You tell Talia that you’ve decided to train a successor and that you’d like her help on the matter. She of course agrees, but asks you about the Ascension Ritual. + +“There’s no need for it. The shadows will be alright without me.” You say with a smile. “But we should still pick the best candidate for the position just to be sure.” + +The follow days are busy ones after you announce that you’re choosing a successor. This news is somewhat surprising since you’re so well respected that it is almost inconceivable that you’ll die one day (Especially since you’ve come back to life once already). Still, those that are chosen are very honored that they have been considered for the position. + +“How come you chose all younger shadows? I would’ve thought you would’ve chosen those more experienced.” Talia asks. +“If I was going to do that, I would’ve just made you my successor and been done with it. But since I don’t plan on dying just yet, I figure it would be better for when the inevitable does happen the successor won’t be ready for the grave themselves. Besides, it’s easier to train young people they aren’t set in their ways of doing things yet.” +“I suppose that’s true. I just realized that most of these candidates were born after the Empire fell. That almost seems surreal that most of them only know about the Empire through stories now. The youngest one here…Sister Celia is only twenty years old. She was just coming into this world as you were putting an end to Theo’s rebellion.” +“Yet she’s one of the main candidates I’m leaning towards. She has shown a lot of promise both magically and combat wise. I believe Glen saw her as a potential future Blade, but I think she’d make a fine successor if she passes the tests. She has proven to be wise for her age as well.” +“You seem to be quite fond of her.” Talia remarks. +“You aren’t jealous are you?” you chuckle. +“Pfft, hardly. I’m still an Eternal and there’s no way any mere human girl could compete with me for your affections. If I believed that to be the case, then I’d just call for you to step down as Shadow Master right now because obviously you’d gone feeble minded with age.” + +This last remark causes you to laugh out loud in agreement before kissing her in a loving manner. It is true though, probably more than Talia even realizes. If you hadn’t fallen in love with her, you question if you would’ve ever stuck with the shadows in those early years. Cyrus’ last rant that somewhat “outted” you as unbeliever back in the day never was questioned since Dendrin brought you back from the dead. It was more than enough proof that you were his chosen and believer now. + +Still, you’ve gotten the impression that Talia has almost wanted to ask you for a little more detail on that matter, but she never has. Of course, maybe she always had her suspicions and didn’t care since she knew you were still doing what she saw as the right thing. On that matter you’ve almost wanted to ask her, but you never have. + +Some things are better left unsaid especially if they aren’t true anymore. + +After the first day of testing the candidates, you finally get a visit from Dendrin that night. + +“So, you’ve finally decided to train a successor. Gone are the plans for the Ascension Ritual?” +“Is that what you wanted? Because I tried to ask you, but I got no answer.” +“And you’ll continue to get no answer. That’s something only you can decide, besides I think our relationship has worked best when I let you make your own decisions. Are you confident in your decision?” +“Yes, I am.” +“Then that’s all that matters. I’m sure it will work out fine.” +“Will you still be watching over the shadows after I’m gone?” +“That, I will answer, but I can’t give a solid one because I haven’t made up my mind yet. I hate to tell you this, because you’ve been so very interesting, but you’ve started to become dull to watch lately. This isn’t your fault though; you are mortal and getting old. It was bound to happen that you would start slowing down eventually. This latest dilemma that you were having about the Ascension Ritual was the most interesting you’ve been in years.” + +You don’t know quite how to respond. You’re not angry. You’ve passed that stage long ago. You are somewhat insulted though, since despite it all, Dendrin has always been fascinated by your actions. Takes a bit of wind out of your sails to hear he’s getting bored even by you. Disheartening even, especially since you’ve taken the steps to best ensure the survival of the shadows as well as making your own leap of faith. + +“Yeah, well we can’t all be deities.” You answer, as you do not wish to argue. +“No, but perhaps…” +“What?” you ask, but all you hear is Dendrin speaking to himself. + +“…hmmm…maybe that would work…but…no…I suppose I could try that…yes that will take time…but then…oh well if it doesn’t work it’s no loss of mine anyway.” +“What are you talking about?” you ask again. +“Can’t talk right now. I need to work on some things. As I said you’ve got the situation well in hand it looks like, so I’ll speak to you again when you die.” +“Wait!” you say and then you wake up. + +You spend the next few days wondering what Dendrin has planned, but of course you can’t really know. All you do know is he promised to speak with you when you die, whenever that is, hopefully not too soon. + +Realizing that you can’t worry or actually do anything about it, you focus your attention back to testing the potential candidates. By the end Celia does indeed prove to be the best one and you make it official. + +“Sister Celia, I hope you realize that by being chosen, a great amount of responsibility will be placed upon you. I also hope you will be prepared to endure whatever it is that I will ask of you.” you start to say. +“Of course Shadow Master I…” +“The Shadow Master was not finished speaking! Speak when you are allowed to do so!” Talia snaps causing Celia to shut up immediately. + +“As I was saying, you will be working closely with me directly or Talia in most cases, but who knows where you may need to be sent in the future. Perhaps we will need to send someone to speak with the Warden Matron of the Nalin Empire. Perhaps you will have to patrol the Delerg border with your fellow shadows. Any and all of these tasks from the complex to the mundane may be asked of you, because if you are to perform the duties of the Shadow Master you will need to be skilled in everything. Dendrin may watch over us, but that does not mean you can rely on him to pull you out of every situation. He favors the strong and the intelligent that can be self-reliant first and foremost. Remember this.” + +After a bit of silence Celia realizes that she can now speak when you nod to her. + +“I will Shadow Master. I will.” +“Good. That will be all for today. I suggest you get some rest, for tomorrow you will begin your TRUE training.” You say and dismiss her. + +After she leaves you turn back to Talia. + +“Nice job in putting a little fear into the girl, though I can’t help but think you enjoyed that a bit.” +“Of course I did, but I bet she’ll remember not to do it again.” +“Oh of that, I have no doubt. Really as long as she remembers everything we plan to teach her she’ll be fine I think.” +“Hah. No small task.” + +Talia’s right about that, it won’t be a small task, not for Celia and not for you either. Still, nothing is worth doing without hard work and that’s basically been your whole life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>What few heretical shadows still remain isn’t many and they don’t exactly have any type of leadership anymore. Hunting them all down seems like a waste of your time and possibly manpower, especially since Quala is more hostile and destabilized than ever now. Chances are the heretics will eventually resort to the typical banditry that goes on here and they’ll get wiped out by one of the warlord factions. Even if they manage to join up with any of the factions, they’ll likely abandon their newfound religion in the process. + +Rebuilding what you have left seems like a better idea at this point, so you send a message out to all your people to leave this war torn land and head back to Delerg. + +When you arrive in Delerg, your temple seems so much emptier now. Well certainly empty of more adults. You don’t have many Blades left either anymore, only about a dozen from what remains of the original amount you had. Not counting all the ones that never made it out of their tanks or failed Talia’s training when she was trying to bring them into the fold of course. + +Orphaned children that are fairly young have so far been taken care of in more communal way as needed, though you ask if Talia wants to take charge of all them in the same way she did the eternals and eventually train them to be Blades. She declines though and says the children should probably start being assigned to a more permanent family arrangement starting with volunteers first. + +You’re confident that the numbers will build back up since there are always people in Delerg that are drawn to join the order. Assuming you have no further major conflict, things should go back to their previous “boring” ways of simple temple routine in no time. This time though you’re looking forward to a bit of boredom. This last major clash has somewhat made you realize that maybe you should be taking it easier in your later years. Not that you’re ready for the grave, but you just aren’t young like you used to be and you can’t single handedly fight entire wars for the shadows anymore even with your increased magical powers. It’s a strain and you’ve got so much on your plate in general. + +Maybe Dendrin knew this too and that’s why he suggested that you not hunt down the heretics in that cryptic way that he tends to do. You think back to how you said to him that you couldn’t afford to not be directly involved and relax in the way that he does, and while that is true, there really isn’t any reason why you couldn’t start following his lead just a little. It also makes you start to wonder if he’s been right about a few things. + +Weeks and months pass as you go through the motions of temple routine, though it’s been a little different for you somehow. Like you’ve actually started to attempt to find a deeper reason behind the words of all the texts you read from. You don’t know if it’s because you’re trying to embrace this new moment of peace within the shadows (as opposed to the fidgeting boredom you usually suffer from) or if it’s because you’re becoming genuinely interested in the stuff. + +Are you finally becoming a “believer?” + +Dendrin claims you already are and it seems impossible, but you have noticed yourself having slightly more civilized conversations with Dendrin as the years have gone on, even agreeing with him at times. You remember practically ranting at him when you were young, in retrospect it’s amazing that he didn’t kill you given his power. He pretty much put up with you and he didn’t have to. He hasn’t helped you in probably the most direct way most of the time, but really would you have wanted him to? Your insistence on always forging your own way was always paramount to you and he probably saw that and acted accordingly by letting you make your own choices. + +You’ve only really prayed genuinely once to Dendrin and that was back when you wanted help with getting the new eternals under control. Even then it was a last ditch reason and you did it more out of selfish desperation rather than any genuine belief. You begin to wonder if it couldn’t hurt to just sincerely pray to him once in a while. Not in the hopes of getting anything out of him, but just…well to show a little bit of gratitude. + +It is probably due to your new found attempt at piety that attracts more people to the temple and restores some of the hope that the shadows will overcome this set back like they have so many before in the past. + +Year 60 + +“One of the heretics was caught near the temple. He claims that another group stand at the border of Delerg. We confirmed this and most of them haggard and tired looking. This speaker claims that he wishes to speak with you about making peace and an urgent matter.” Brother Gannon says. +“Hmm, have to say I didn’t think they’d last as long as they did. They didn’t mention what this so called urgent matter was about?” you reply. +“No, just that it was of great importance to anyone who reveres Dendrin.” +“Probably a trick of some sort, you should just have all of them killed.” Glen remarks. +“Yes, that would be the safe bet, but I suppose it wouldn’t hurt to listen seeing as I’m not particularly worried about them. Drag him in, but keep a tight hold on him.” +“Very well Shadow Master.” Glen says. + +The heretic is brought in and he certainly is a miserable looking wretch. It isn’t due to any roughing up by your own shadows either, as he was confirmed to be in the same state as the rest of his fellows waiting for him. He’s very nervous and looking around as much as he can while two of the Blades grasp his arms and several other shadows look on at the proceedings. + +“Well? We don’t have all day. Out with it heretic scum!” Talia demands before you can say anything. + +“Oh! Right…uh…Shadow Master I beg you in Dendrin’s name to call off your assassins! We have seen that Theo’s teachings were the improper doctrine! We submit to your rule as the rightful chosen one of Dendrin himself and ask for mercy by allowing us to merge with the true and only temple dedicated to him!” the heretic whines. You certainly weren’t expecting this, and you’re also wondering about these assassins. + +“Assassins? We haven’t sent anyone to seek out your destruction. If that were the case we would’ve done it years ago.” +“You…haven’t? But that seems impossible.” +“Why? It isn’t like shadows are well accepted anywhere else except Delerg as you surely know. What makes you think it isn’t General Ackerson or any of the many other warlords in the area?” +“No, he is too busy fighting Mog, Son of Flog’s orc and ogre horde in Rask. Rumors are he’s sick as well and his underlings are already squabbling over who is going to take power when he’s gone. As for other warlords, they aren’t a threat to us, at least not in any meaningful way, and most of them are too direct and unsophisticated to engage in the terror tactics that your assassins have. Your assassins tell us that they are the hand of justice in Dendrin’s name.” +“As I said we have sent no assassins. I don’t know what kind of game you’re playing, but I’m not falling for it.” +“No please wait! Maybe you didn’t send the assassins, but if that’s true then this is more alarming news! Because they’re using shadow magic to accomplish their tasks! If it isn’t you or anyone in your order as you say, who are they? And will they attack you as well?” + +This does give you a bit of pause though it’s hard to tell with someone that’s supposed to be your enemy. He does look quite sincere in his words and his fear. + +If it wasn’t any of your people, then who would it be? It’s quite possible that it’s just another rogue group that split off from the original heretics and formed yet a third faction of shadows. Of course if that was the case, they should know about it instead of jumping to the conclusion that it is you. + +Of course this could all still be just an elaborate trick. Perhaps an attempt to make you suspicious of people in your own group carrying out tasks that you didn’t order. There’s also the other urgent matter that they said they had to tell you, which you question the heretic on. + +“So what is this other urgent matter you had to tell us?” you ask. +“Oh, yes that, well there are rumors that Warden Matron Brenda of Nalin is planning on invading Delerg.” +“What? I know she hates the shadows, but reports have always established that she has never set sights on anything north of the Nalin province. She doesn’t even have an established presence in Quala.” Talia remarks. +“Well, I didn’t say she planned on holding the territory, just that she was planning on invading it. I don’t know. It is what we have heard in our travels to get here.” +“Could be Brenda that’s sending the assassins then and using something similar to shadow magic that these blasphemous fools are taking as the real thing. Maybe we should prepare ourselves, after killing these heretics of course.” Glen remarks. + +“But we’re sincere! I’M sincere! How…how about we prove ourselves by being judged directly by Dendrin himself? You could perform the initiation ritual to open the portal to his realm. If he accepts our forgiveness then surely that would be proof that our hearts and souls are truthful, right? If he doesn’t then we won’t survive the process anyway.” The heretic exclaims. +“Well, that would be one way of ensuring their dedication I suppose.” Talia says to you. +> Have them killed +You’ve spent a lot of time and effort trying to rebuild what these heretics destroyed and now they want your help? You’re in no mood. + +“I’ll spare Dendrin’s time and judge you all myself. And that judgment is death, kill this traitor and go wipe out the rest hanging out near our borders.” You say. +“No! No wait! Please, you’ve….” The heretic pleads before one of the Blades cuts his throat. After disposing of him, Glen takes a small group of them to finish off the rest, from what you hear it was easy, but brutal business as usual. + +Of course that still leaves a few questions to as who was killing them in the first place. Your guess is if General Ackerson is as sick as the heretic claimed, then perhaps the current power struggle going on involves getting rid of potential wild cards in the nearby region like say groups of fanatical cultists. They are the only nearby major power with battle mages that could reliably emulate the sort of magic the heretics claimed to see. + +The only other power that you know of that has a few magic users is the Nalin Empire, but you can’t see Brenda bothering with such elaborate tactics. She’d be more likely to just send a traditional group of assassins or even a small platoon of well trained warriors and even then only to get rid of the shadows closest to her borders. The rumor that she’s planning to invade Delerg seem like just that, rumors. + +Still you tell everyone to keep alert and double your own patrols on the Delerg borders just in case. Not much more you can do except wait. + +Weeks and months pass and nobody has invaded or even come close to wandering near the Delerg borders. General Ackerson dies of his illness, the government collapses and Mog takes advantage of the situation, but other than that major change nothing else notable happens in Quala. As for the Nalin Empire, not a peep from them either. + +You stick to your usual heightened alert status for a little while longer, and then eventually relent a bit by the year is over. + +Year 63 + +“I KNEW I should’ve killed that bastard! I KNEW it!” you yell. +“You couldn’t have known he’d do something like this.” Talia says in an attempt to calm you. +“I should’ve known that he’d do SOMETHING though! Fuck! If he wasn’t dead already, I’d personally find him and kill him myself!” + +You’re speaking about Cyrus of course. Years after exiling him you have finally heard from him again in a second hand manner which will plunge you into a war with the Nalin Empire. If the rumors weren’t true before, they’re going to be true soon. + +You aren’t exactly sure what Cyrus was up to during his years in exile, but if you had to guess it was planning some sort of revenge or looking for a way to redeem himself (In retrospect, it wouldn’t surprise you if he had been behind the heretic killings as well)…maybe it was both. Either way the day he assassinated Warden Matron Brenda during a speech to her people the whole time shouting “Down with Empires! Dendrin Forever! Shadows Forever!” is the day he fucked all of you over. + +He apparently didn’t survive too long after that, but you’re guessing he knew it was a suicide mission anyway. Didn’t take long before Brenda’s successor Tarna declared war on you. Makes perfect sense, seeing as their well-respected leader was killed by a shadow. Doesn’t matter if he was a nutter that was acting alone, someone has to pay. Someone also has to be a good scapegoat while Tarna consolidates her own power and gains enough popularity by destroying her predecessor’s old enemies. + +That someone is you naturally. + +While the Nalin Empire has to actually march an army over Quala before reaching you, the situation isn’t good. Unlike the first time you fought an Empire, you had a lot more support, even after the Gloom incident, you still had the help of the normal people pissed at the Empire everywhere. The old Empire was also already greatly weakened, corrupt and fighting multiple front battles. + +Now? You have no such advantage. The Nalin Empire is a strong power on the rise that is now unified by a very ambitious and focused leader who very much wants to add the destruction of the shadows to the first of her great achievements. + +There’s also the fact that you’re no longer a young man anymore. You’re old, tired even. And while you’ll fight harder than someone half your age, the fact remains you’re not as energetic as you once were. + +You bury your hands in your face for a moment just thinking about the shitstorm that is to come. Talia rubs your shoulders. + +“We’ll get through this. Dendrin saw us see victory over one Empire, he’ll let us see victory over another.” She says optimistically. + +You look up at her to see her smiling back. After all these years you still can’t resist her cheerful faith in Dendrin. Quite frankly, you really wish you had listened to Dendrin decades ago when he suggested that you kill Cyrus. You might’ve avoided a lot of unnecessary conflict throughout your time as Shadow Master. + +Too late now and no looking back. You’ll deal with this problem as you have with all others that have ever been thrust upon you, which is with a weapon in hand. Not really like you have a choice anyway. You tried to open a dialogue with Tarna, but she isn’t interested in speaking to you. + +Year 65 + +You look over at the remainder of your shadows. You know that they will fight to the last and for every one of them that falls, they will take ten enemies with them, but this is your last stand. + +By your side stands Talia, even now she holds faith that Dendrin will magically turn the tide of this battle, but you don’t see it happening. In fact you haven’t spoken to him for quite a while. He probably knows when something is coming to an end. He must be still watching since you all have your shadow magic so he hasn’t abandoned you completely. + +Seems like he could’ve at least gave you a “Good luck” speech before battle, but who knows? Maybe he doesn’t like goodbyes. + +Still, you see no reason you can’t give your own. + +“Shadows! The enemy is pounding down the door as I speak so I’ll make it brief. Whether we live or die here today is irrelevant. What matters is that fight so furiously that we will always be remembered. If we live, then they will remember to never attack us again.” + +You pause for the next part; because this is what you know will happen. + +“If we die…well they will remember the day they almost lost to a force much smaller than themselves. Perhaps a lesson will be learned that those faithful to Dendrin were a force to be reckoned with during their time on this world. And perhaps from there a seed of intrigue will be planted causing some to seek out his wisdom. For while we may die here, we will still live on forever with Dendrin in the afterlife! And there can be no greater reward than that.” + +It is an inspiring speech and morale is raised. Talia gives you one last hug and kiss afterwards. + +“I love you.” she says. +“And I love you.” you reply back. + +The temple doors crack at last and the stone crumbles before the might of the battering ram. Hordes of Nalin troops pour in. + +You embrace your final battle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 55 + +“Theo I know you’re here I can sense your presence, you might as well come on out and take your punishment with some dignity.” You say looking down the dimly lit stairway. + +You can’t believe after all these years; it’s come down to you personally tracking Theo hiding in the cellar of a simple abandoned farmhouse. Several of the Blades stand behind you asking if they should go in and get him, but you decline. You can handle this yourself, in fact you’d rather do it yourself. + +“Just stand guard, I’ll be back soon.” You say to Glen who nods and has the Blades guard the perimeter. + +You walk down the stairs without any worry about your safety. Even if Theo does attack you, and you’re fairly certain he isn’t going to be in any condition to do, you’ll easily be able to defend yourself. + +The cellar isn’t large and add the fact that there are several stacks of boxes and barrels here make the cellar seem even smaller than it is. + +“Supplies. Supplies still here from the Empire rebellion. Never did get around to using them.” Theo’s voice says from the corner of the room. You see him in his torn and tattered robe and sitting against the wall. Between his missing hand and half burned face, he’s a mess. + +“Didn’t get around to using them for this one either.” You say. +“Honestly, I’d forgotten about this place until recently. Had so many old safehouses, I was bound to forget some of them. Don’t know why I forgot about this one though…it’s rather peaceful. Serene even. I guess its remoteness helps. Yeah, this would’ve been a good place to settle down…maybe another life. Right?” +“I don’t think Dendrin does reincarnation. Least of all for traitors.” +“Yeah, I suppose so I guess. Good thing I stopped believing in him years ago.” Theo laughs weakly. + +“You know, if you stopped believing in him, you could’ve just left rather than cause a whole lot of unnecessary fighting. It’s not like I would’ve stopped you.” +“And tell me Eternal, would you leave if your own wife still believed in Dendrin?” Theo asks accusingly. You don’t know if he’s just asking hypothetically or if he is actually implying something. +“No, I suppose I wouldn’t.” +“Of course not. Besides…I did still believe up until I found out you killed her. From that point I knew that Dendrin truly didn’t support my cause, so why bother worshipping a god that doesn’t? Of course had to still keep up the charade since I had managed to hold sway over some of the new converts in Quala.” +“And that’s when you decided to just kill Sam, declare yourself in charge of his forces and repeatedly tried to invade the temple?” +“Well seemed like a good idea at the time. Honestly if that bastard Ackerson had just allied with me, I believe I would’ve had a good chance at winning. Didn’t expect him to make a separate peace with you though.” +“The fool has still got his sights set on Rask and doesn’t want to expend any military effort that isn’t focused on that endeavor. You might’ve done better trying to get help from Brenda in Nalin, heard she’s not too fond of shadows having caused the death of her husband and all.” +“Believe me I tried, she sent my messengers back without heads and a note saying she wasn’t helping even if I wasn’t really a shadow anymore and as far as she was concerned she hoped that we all killed one another.” +“Well thanks to you, this was certainly another set back for the shadows. Sort of makes the whole original rebellion rather pointless.” +“No…not for me. I think those were the happiest days of my life. I had a purpose, my enemy was clear and I knew I would win because Dendrin was on my side. Then I won, and that’s when it all started to slowly fall apart.” +“Hah. I can certainly understand where you’re coming from on that perspective. Part of your behavior in all this probably stemmed from being a rebel for so long that you never knew quite how to adjust and when the opportunity presented itself, you immersed yourself in the role again because it was comfortable. Really, any of your other reasons were all secondary and just an excuse.” + +Theo doesn’t answer he just looks down and nods a few times in a rocking motion as he clutches where his left hand used to be. Eventually he staggers upward sliding his back against the wall in an effort to stand up. You’re guessing he’s ready to die now. + +“Just one question Eternal, does Dendrin really speak to you?” +“When he feels like it, but if it makes you feel any better he hasn’t cared about the shadows for a very long time and the only reason why he takes an interest in them at all is due to me.” +“…well I guess I was doomed from the very beginning then.” +“So was I Theo…so was I.” you say and hit Theo with a powerful shadowfire bolt which burns directly through his chest leaving a big hole and a black mark against the wall. Theo slumps down and the leader of the “new rebellion” is dead. + +The damage he’s caused isn’t so readily repairable. In addition to losing many shadows he’s also created a separate faction of them (Something you were trying to avoid), which are still located in pockets across Quala. The beliefs are basically the same (and without the indoctrination ritual obviously), with the exception that YOU or any other non-pure human for that matter shouldn’t be a shadow, let alone in charge of the order. + +Your first thought is that you should probably hunt them all down and wipe them out before they become a problem, but then again this little conflict has been taking a toll on the shadows you have left. Some of the children don’t even have mothers and fathers anymore. It might be time to pack up the gear and attempt to rebuild again. + +As you think on this, you make your way up the stairs and wince at a couple of the aches in your joints in doing so. You might be an Eternal, but you sure as hell aren’t starting to feel like one in the past few years as old age is becoming a little more apparent to you. Makes you sort of glad that you don’t have to rely solely on regular combat anymore thanks to your increased magic abilities gifted to you by your “dedication” to Dendrin no doubt. + +In any case you’re tired and you tell Glen that Theo is dead, but you’re going to stay here for the night before heading home again. Glen as usual nods and says he’ll keep everyone on watch. + +You find an old bed that probably has been slept in years, but it doesn’t look infested with bed bugs so you use it. Doesn’t take long for you to slowly drift off to sleep, but you get the impression that you’re not going to get a peaceful rest. + +“So another enemy falls before you, keep this up and you’ll outlive everyone.” Dendrin remarks. +“Figured you’d show up eventually. Any words of advice on what to do next?” you ask. +“Not really, you seem to have it under control. So…still bored?” +“No, but I hate set backs.” +“Come now you should be used to such things by now.” +“I am, but that doesn’t mean I have to like them. Especially when I feel like packing it all in because there’s little point in going on.” +“So you don’t intend on destroying the heretic shadows?” +“I almost don’t intend on going back to the temple. I feel like just leaving altogether.” +“You’ve said that before, many times. You won’t though.” +“Of course I won’t, but I feel like no matter what I do something severely sets back the shadows. Against all odds I’ve taken it upon myself to be their leader and protect them better than you ever do and I’m still lying about being a true believer.” +“Oh you’re a believer, a cynical one, but you’re a believer. If you weren’t you would’ve left a long time ago because it’s a little bit more than just Talia keeping you here.” +“I don’t see what else there is, because it sure isn’t to bask in the glory of your voice.” +“It’s power pure and simple. It’s being in charge. It’s telling others what to do and ruling them like a king or emperor if you prefer.” +“I might agree with you if I actually thought I was in charge of anything so grand. Besides, it’s really you they’re all worshipping not me.” +“And is that what your problem is? That you’re doing all the work and not getting any of the perks? And here I thought all that nice magical power I’ve been granting to you was a fine way of rewarding you.” +“Well it hasn’t hurt. You’re right though, I don’t mind being in charge and I do thrive on a bit of conflict, but sometimes it just gets a bit tiring that’s all.” +“Ah, and now you see why I stopped directly leading the shadows altogether!” +“Yeah, well I don’t have that luxury unless you can elevate me to godhood.” +“Ha ha, even if I could, obviously I wouldn’t want the competition.” +“Too bad, maybe if you could you wouldn’t suffer from boredom either.” +“Hmm, interesting insight as always Eternal. Well, I’ll let you get back to it. Oh and just in case you did want my advice, I’d rather you not destroy the so-called heretic shadows. They might not be following you, but they do still worship me.” + +And once again you wake up, with more dubious advice from your “god.” You sometimes wonder whenever he does give you any of his wisdom if he wants you to do the exact opposite of what he says, because you practically do every time. + +In any case, you can’t dwell on the nature of the divine at this moment. You’re still left with the decision about how to fix the mess you have to clean up. +> Wipe out the rest of the heretics +If all your years of knowing him has taught you anything, its what’s best for Dendrin hasn’t always been what’s best for you. While rebuilding is certainly going to be a priority, you still need to wipe out the rest of the heretics as well. It’s the only way you’re going to prevent problems in the future. + +You call Glen and the rest of the Blades and tell them that you’ll be heading back to the temple for a break and get some things in order and then you’ll be helping them again soon. In the meantime they can use this place as a base of sorts while attempting to hunt down the rest of the heretics. Glen nods, but has noticed your physical pain increase over the course of this conflict. He suggests that perhaps you shouldn’t worry yourself about it directly as you have more important duties to the shadows and they’re confident that they can handle it. + +“Glen, I’m not some crippled old man. I still got fight left in me. I was killing men by the dozens long before you were even thought about. Do not assume just because I have a few extra aches and pains that I’m not fully capable of combat!” you say getting angry at his innocent suggestion. +“My apologies Shadow Master. Didn’t mean to offend.” He replies with a nod. +“No…no…of course you didn’t. Sorry, this is been a long ordeal and it’s not over yet. Just gets tiring sometimes. Okay, I’m off, I can make it back to the temple by myself, don’t worry about escorting me back.” + +Glen is about to ask if you’re sure, but he stops himself from doing so lest he be reprimanded again. + +The journey back to the temple is uneventful. You let everyone know that Theo has been killed, but heretics still remain. You then go on to say that the Blades and yourself will seek the rest out, but everyone else should focus on rebuilding. Talia questions if you should be going. + +“I think the Blades can handle whatever pathetic remnants are left of the heretics. You’d probably be better serving here where you can help in the rebuilding process. You know how the shadows like you around as an inspiration.” Talia says. +“They should be getting their inspiration from Dendrin and if people liked me so much we wouldn’t have had a civil war. Besides, the shadows will like me more if I’m actively doing something about potential threats in the future. Part of the reason these heretics got out of control in the first place is because I wasn’t paying enough attention. It’s my responsibility to see this through to the end.” You answer. +“Are you sure that’s what this is about? And not about say…getting old and trying to prove that you’ve still got it?” +“You too? I just had to hear this before from Glen. Granted he didn’t say it like you did, but I know damn well he thought it. Let me tell you something, I could still take out every one of those Blades AND the heretics on top of it all by myself!” + +Talia smiles a bit and rubs your shoulder. + +“Yes, I know you could my love. Nobody is truly suggesting that you still aren’t a great warrior, but you don’t have to prove anything to anyone, least of all to me. You don’t need to go wading into battle anymore, those days are past, Dendrin made you Shadow Master not just for your combat skills. You’re a leader and you can allow yourself to rest.” +“I’ll rest when I’m dead. Besides, the last time I got complacent, Theo and Yvette conspired against us, but I’ve said this before.” +“Yes, you have. (Sigh) I suppose you want me to take charge of things here while you go off to prove your alpha maleness. Very well, have fun and be careful.” Talia says and kisses you goodbye. + +Talia is right of course. You are doing this mainly to prove you still “got it.” That you can still travel across the countryside getting into fights. It’s silly and pointless, but its what you want to do and another part of you has missed it. + +The next few weeks you travel with the remaining Blades hunting down heretic hideouts all across Quala. It’s actually amazing how fast some of them have spread out, and they’ve probably spread out even more since the news of their leaders death and how you’re actively hunting them. + +The heretics aren’t the only problem however. You also have to deal with the chaos that’s currently going on in Quala. With Sam and now Theo gone, the region has destabilized again, with several would be leaders all rising up with their own little factions ready to attack anyone who is trespassing on their turf. This doesn’t even include the already established warlords that are eyeing the new leaderless territory that’s ripe for the taking. Even General Ackerson’s troops have been seen patrolling further south than they normally do. Doesn’t help that shadows aren’t really popular for several reasons, but fortunately you can avoid most unnecessary battles due to cloaking. + +However, you probably don’t do that as much as you should thanks to your mindset of trying to prove something. As a result you lose the remainder of your Blades in a skirmish with a very large group of General Ackerson’s men lead by a battle mage who despite the non aggression pact, decided that you were just too tempting of a target in the “new land” they recently claimed. + +You manage to drag yourself back to Theo’s old hideout, which you were using as a base, cursing the whole time. You’re wounded and angry that once again you weren’t strong enough to stop something bad from happening, yet not really realizing that it was your arrogance that was the cause of it this time. + +“Fuck! Shit! I’m not old! I’m not useless! I’m still a warrior!” you say to yourself as you nurse your wounds sitting in the dark farmhouse. +“No, I’m afraid your time has passed.” You hear a whispery voice say. + +At first you think its Dendrin since he’s always been one to kick you while you’re down, but then you’re wide awake and he’s never contacted you in that state. Your focus has been so preoccupied with your own pride that you didn’t sense another presence in the farmhouse when you dragged yourself here… + +You turn around just in time to utter “Cy…” before you feel a blade slash across your throat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 46 + +Took long enough, and sometimes it never seemed like it was going to happen, but you’ve finally restored Dendrin’s temple. Restoring it wasn’t easy either, especially not one as big and in such disrepair like Dendrin’s. The surprising thing is you’ve not only restored it in appearance, but in use as well. + +The one of the first difficult things was getting the stone. Delerg isn’t exactly flush with rock quarries. The second difficult thing was getting help to restore it in the first place. The shadows might be great warriors and have more knowledge than the average peasant, but nobody in your ranks is a laborer or into masonry. Obviously outside help was necessary. + +Fortunately since the fall of the Empire, Delerg had once again become a quiet place with no “leader.” Most of the inhabitants were content to go about their simple lives like they once did before the Empire. When you arrived in Sinkhole, to ask around for workers to try to restore the temple, some couldn’t volunteer fast enough to help. + +This need to help you, was a combination of a few things. The most important one being that Delerg was always shadow friendly. The Empire may have ruled it for a while, but the respect that its people had for the shadows was always greater. The shadows after all were once the main protectors of the area before the Empire. + +Combining this with the fact that the shadows were the main ones who helped influence so much rebellion and caused the destruction of the Empire, it was only natural that you were as warmly embraced like you were. Good thing too, because you certainly didn’t have the coin to pay the workers in the first place! + +As the temple was slowly being restored, more people started flocking to your aid. Some of these were old rebels that the shadows lost contact with when you started consolidating your forces in Rask. They remember you though and offer help in any way their skills allow. + +While you were always a little surprised by how much free help you were always willing to get, what surprised you more is how little you really needed to do to get it. These people had no one telling them what to do or how to live anymore, and yet a lot of them seemed to be in a big hurry for that to change by becoming Dendrin worshippers! You understand gratitude, but to willingly surrender a portion of your earnings and time to serve an invisible being that you had no proof existed, while some guy claiming to be his “representative” tell you how you should live seemed like a step backwards for them at least. For you though, it was all beneficial as eventually some of these devoted souls wanted to become full-fledged shadows. Naturally you accepted them into your ranks provided they could pass through the testing. + +Right now things have been better for you than they have ever been. You’ve got a nice restored temple, a fair sized congregation, the ranks of the shadows are slowly starting to grow again and most importantly you haven’t had to deal with any problems with the new eternals (Now known as the Shadow Blades) ever since they all went through the ritual. Dendrin was true to his word on that, just like you were true to yours by restoring his temple. + +Still, even after directly helping you, you still can’t bring yourself to “worship” Dendrin. Not really. Part of you feels like it was the least he could’ve done after all the stuff in the past he’s put you through. Another of part of you feels as if you’ve “repaid the debt” by restoring the temple. + +He’s probably granted you more power as you’ve noticed your magical abilities becoming superior to everyone else’s and it taking much less effort, but again you still feel no sense of “awe” in Dendrin that would cause you to willingly worship him as a god. + +To you, he’s a very powerful being that is a whimsical ally at best. You’ve come to realize that he is probably deserving of your respect in regard to his power and you always keep that in mind when up keeping the charade of his religion. Perhaps it is enough, or at least it’ll have to be since you don’t see yourself changing your mind on the matter anytime soon, especially when you’ve been trying to figure out what your next big course of action should be. + +The problem with a lack of conflict is that you find yourself very bored. Even in Rask, the monotony was broken up with the occasional giant or ogre attack. Here in Delerg there are no such great dangers surprisingly enough. Most dangerous swamp beasts prefer to stick to their own stomping grounds which all seem to be away from your part of the swamp and Sul-monkeys aren’t a threat so much as they’re an occasional annoyance when large groups of them decide to use the temple roof as a mating area! The last time you had any true conflict was when General Ackerson’s men ambushed you and part of you hasn’t forgotten that incident. From what you know, he’s still in power and sometimes you’d like to change that just on principle. + +Quala is still an area in a power struggle between competing warlords, but so far there have been no attempt by any of them to expand into Delerg, probably because there isn’t much here in the first place save for swamp. Not to mention there are most likely trickles of news coming in about the return of the shadows to Delerg. Most of the warlords being ex-Empire probably would like to get some sort of revenge, but know that their losses would be considerable if they even attempted such a thing, so you are left alone. + +Talia and Cyrus seem to be content with how things are now, why can’t you be? Funny that you were concerned about the new eternals being restless and getting themselves into trouble, while here you are considering starting a fight because your bored with peace! The only real reason you can think of is petty revenge on General Ackerson and that’s not a very good one even if you could easily tell everyone that Dendrin told you all to go kill him. + +In your moment of introspection, you take another look at what you’ve accomplished. You went from being a lone unbeliever practically trapped in an organization that was determined to overthrow an enemy several times larger than itself to the victorious leader of said organization, which is now thriving under your watch. + +You probably could defeat Ackerson, but at what cost? Last you heard he has thousands of men at his command still and that includes a few battle mages. The shadows may be growing slowly, but that’s just it, slowly. You don’t have anywhere near the numbers to start raising armies. Sure, you have the entire support of probably all of Delerg, but that doesn’t mean much in the scheme of things if most of the people aren’t warriors. You kill Ackerson and take his territory then what? You hold it? How long can that last with the numbers you’d have left? You doubt if the people of Quala would be as supportive, if anything they probably blame the shadows for the miserable warring state they live in now. This doesn’t even factor in the OTHER warlords in the area. They may all decide to gang up on you and if you’re in any sort of weakened condition they may even press their attack into Delerg itself. + +No, the risk doesn’t seem worth it compared to the petty gain. The shadows have never been about conquest and they probably shouldn’t start now. However, that doesn’t mean you should stay idle. Peace is fine, but perhaps there is a way of initiating conflict without actually doing it. + +It occurs to you that the warlords of Quala won’t always be fighting. Eventually one of them is going to win or manage to unite the area in some way. When that happens then Delerg might be in potential danger, so it would be in your best interest to make sure that doesn’t happen. Keep Quala weak and disorganized while keeping Delerg the opposite. + +You start sending in shadows into Quala to get a good idea of what the situation is there, but not to actually do anything yet. Theo is mostly in charge of this due to his previous experience of working extensively in the region during the Empire war. Eventually after a couple months you have all the information you really need and ready to put the second part of your plan into action, which is to keep the region destabilized. This is going to include sabotage, misdirection, more spying, and assassinations, all those things that play on the strengths of the shadows. + +“I like it. So when do we start assassinating people?” Cyrus remarks causing Draven to chuckle. +“Well, we probably should decide who needs it first. Some of the leaders sound so incompetent that it might be better if we left them in charge.” Talia adds. +“Shouldn’t we have some sort of plan before doing this?” Yvette asks. +“We do have a plan, I just explained it.” You say not understanding why she would ask such a question. +“I…think what my wife means is should we not have a greater plan other than sewing chaos. I do not presume to disagree with your reasons Shadow Master, but I do believe that causing discord for the sake of doing it might seem a bit…well…short term.” Theo says. +“So you believe that we should actually take territory? I explained why I believe that would be a problem.” +“No, no, I agree that we shouldn’t be marching armies into Quala, I guess what I mean is perhaps this would also be a good time to launch an aggressive campaign of converting unbelievers. You know send our better speakers to some of the smaller villages that are unhappy with life under the warlords and telling them how Dendrin can release them from such misery. Given enough time, we would have so many converted that we wouldn’t have to worry about raising an army or Quala ever being a threat because most of the population would all be believers in Dendrin.” + +An interesting suggestion from Theo and one you weren’t really expecting from him. He also mentions he could get back in contact with some of the old rebels he knows are still living in Quala to help more directly as well. +> Stick with your own plan +Theo might mean well, but you’re a firm believer that simple plans often work best and since you’ve got the last word, you’re sticking with your original plan. + +“It’s a good idea Theo, but I believe it may stir up more attention towards us, if we start attempting to convert people outside Delerg. It may even cause certain warlords to unite against us if they believe us to be threatening enough. Better that we keep our presence to a minimum and especially not try to contact any of them directly. What I want you to do instead is to just keep an eye on Anu and Sam since they’re close by, but since they seem to be content on bashing each other in the head just send some Blades to perform sabotage on both sides just to keep them mired down.” +“As you wish Shadow Master.” Theo remarks. +“The western Quala warlords seem pretty occupied as well so we don’t need to deal with them either. General Ackerson though I want assassinated. I know he’s attempting to expand into Rask, but the man is the biggest threat as far as powers in Quala and I don’t want him to improve that position in the future. Cyrus, since you’re really eager about doing this, I’m going to leave it up to you who to send, but I imagine you’ll want to oversee things personally.” +“It will be done Shadow Master, and thank you.” +“I believe that’s about it, we can go over more details one on one later.” + +After the meeting Talia speaks to you directly. + +“You sure you want to leave it to Cyrus? I would’ve thought you would’ve wanted to handle something so important yourself.” +“I’m confident that Cyrus can do the job efficiently. If nothing else he’s enthusiastic for things like this. I thought about going too, but I’m slowly begining to realize I’ll be needing to delegate and remaining at this temple more. Besides I’m sure there will be other opportunities to go kill someone. Never seems to be a shortage in fact.” +“Well that’s true.” +“I’m thinking I’ll spend more time looking after the security within the Delerg province. I mean yes we have potential enemies outside the province, but it doesn’t hurt to keep alert in our homestead.” +“I suppose not, but we’re pretty well liked here.” +“Perhaps, but if I’ve learned anything, its that enemies can exist anywhere of you look hard enough.” + +Over the next few days your initial plans go off quite well. General Ackerson is assassinated successfully and there wasn’t even any indication there was shadow involvement. As of now his group is fighting amongst itself and no longer united. Captain Anu and Sam Jowin have each been suffering set backs and of course blaming each other for them. + +You then relent a bit to let the chaos do its work in Quala until it looks like the place is going to stabilize once again and that’s when you send in shadows to create strife again. It becomes routine just like any of the prayer sessions for Dendrin. + +Of course as good as the shadows are, you can’t go undetected forever and eventually someone catches on to what’s really been going happening… + +“There’s a huddled mass of people outside the temple, Shadow Master. We’re keeping them out obviously, but their speaker really wants to see you.” Brother Gannon says to you. +“Who are these people?” +“Mostly peasants I believe, but they aren’t from Delerg, they’re from Quala. Under Sam’s dominion I think. They say they want our help.” +“Our help? What’s bringing this on and what makes them think we’re going to help a bunch of unbelievers?” Cyrus asks. In fact you all are wondering what this is all about. + +“Well I guess the best way to find out is to ask them. Send in their speaker and keep the rest outside. If anything looks suspicious kill them all.” You say. + +Brother Gannon nods and waves in the Qualans’ speaker. While you expect a grubby peasant with dirty clothing to come shuffling in, you instead get a young man dressed in leather armor. Despite his warrior garb he’s nervous. He’s trying his best to be brave, but you sense the fear in him. + +“Well? Out with it, you traveled a long way just to waste our time.” Talia remarks. +“Yes, my apologies, um Shadowlord is it?” +“Shadow Master actually, but let’s just get on with why you saw fit to lead a bunch of peasants here and why you think we can even help you.” you say. +“Oh yes that. My name is Flynn and we all live in the Quala Freelands, which as you know is run by Sam Jowin. I myself am a soldier of relatively low rank…and uh…look there’s no easy way of saying this so I guess I’ll get right to it. We want you to kill Sam.” + +You have to admit this wasn’t exactly the sort of help you thought they were going to ask for. You and the rest of your council look at each other before you speak again. + +“And why do you think we would do that?” +“Because you routinely sabotage our side and Captain Anu’s? Because you were most likely involved in the assassination of General Ackerson? It wasn’t apparent at first, but…” +“Now stop right there for a moment Flynn, and think very carefully on your next words.” +“I…I’m sorry Shadow Master, but I do not know any other way to put this.” +“Very well then, let me help you. Even if we were involved in such activities and that’s not an admission, what still makes you think that we would be willing to assassinate your beloved leader?” +“He’s NOT a beloved leader! Sam is no better than the tyrannical Emperor that ruled over us before! I will admit during his freedom fighter days he was an inspiration, but now? He’s just another petty warlord that doesn’t give a shit about anything other than his own power!” +“That’s a pretty bold statement. I knew Sam during the Empire War years and even fought along side him a couple times. He was always a fair man from what I knew of him and cared for those under his command.” Theo remarks. +“Yeah, well he’s changed drastically since then, the things he’s done... the things I’ve had to do in his service…I do not even wish to think about let alone discuss. So do you need payment? We weren’t sure what we’d need to get your help. We have scraped together valuables and gold for you. I don’t know if its enough, I mean I think we could scrape a bit more, but…here’s what we got.” + +At this point Flynn reaches for a small pouch on his side and extends his hand towards all of you with it. Cyrus snatches it from him and reveals a few gold coins and a couple of gems of low quality. Probably a paltry amount, but then you don’t really know what the going rate is for assassination is these days never having done it for money before. + +“And you think we’re mere thugs for hire?” Cyrus asks throwing the pouch back at Flynn who barely catches it. + +“No! I mean well…we uh…are also prepared to give you a virgin girl in exchange for your help if you aren’t motivated by profit.” +“A virgin girl?” Yvette asks. +“Yeah, for your sacrifices to Dendrin. Isn’t that what you guys do?” + +At this point Cyrus gets so pissed at Flynn he punches him in the face. Theo isn’t too happy with him either and begins calling Flynn names. You on the other hand, chuckle to yourself thinking that human sacrifice might actually break up the monotony around the temple sometimes. And while you’re not seriously considering such a thing, you are seeing an opportunity here to change things up a bit. + +“Alright Cyrus that will do for now. This man obviously came to us for help and kicking the hell out of this poor bastard isn’t going to help matters.” +“But he insulted Dendrin! And he insults the shadows by coming to us like we’re some lowly criminals!” +“No this man came to us looking for skilled assassins who can get the job done right. And that’s what we are, aren’t we? I mean that’s partly how we won the war against the Empire isn’t it? If there are already rumors going around by ignorant peasants that we killed General Ackerson and have been involved in sabotage in Quala then our cover has already been blown at this point. We may as well embrace it.” +“What are you saying?” Talia asks. + +“I’m saying that we should take this man up on his offer. However, our payment will be that he owes us a favor. In fact ALL of those that are with him today will owe us a favor. Be sure to get all their names before they leave here. It may be big, it may be small, it may never come at all, but when we call it in, they better deliver…are we agreed to this Flynn?” you say extending your hand to help him up. + +He’s unsure at first, but eventually he takes it and gets up. Sam must really be some sort of bastard if Flynn is agreeing to this arrangement. + +“I…I accept your terms Shadow Master.” +“Good, it’ll be taken care of as soon as possible.” +“Thank you! Thank you!” he says and starts to bow a lot while he steps backwards towards the door. +“Excuse me, but where do you think you’re going?” +“I was taking my leave Shadow Master.” +“Not with that pouch of valuables you aren’t. They were a gift to us were they not?” +“Oh…yes…of course. Here you go. My apologies Shadow Master.” Flynn says and tosses the bag to you. +“Good. NOW you may go.” + +After Flynn leaves the temple you remind some of the Blades to get all their names down. Meanwhile your council is a little confused by your latest decision + +“Are you serious about this?” Theo asks. +“Of course I am, if I wasn’t I wouldn’t have made the offer.” You answer. +“But we’re helping unbelievers!” Cyrus says. +“So? We helped them during the Empire War too, what makes now so different? I’ll tell you what makes it different, we’re actually going to be profiting from it for a change. Look if we’re going to stay safe, and I mean truly safe from external threats we need to get back on to the world stage. Staying isolated in this swamp is only going to work for so long and eventually someone is going to come here with an army and attempt to overwhelm us. Last time I checked our numbers are still low.” +“Okay, but weren’t we ensuring our safety by destabilizing Quala?” Theo asks. +“We were, but as I said our presence has obviously become known now. It’s nobody’s fault, it was bound to happen eventually, but that means we’ve got two options. Either we stop completely and risk Quala being united under one person who decides they want to emulate the Empire which means war in the far future. Or we continue doing what we’re doing and risk pissing everyone off to such a degree that they stop fighting each other and unite against us, which means war in the near future. Neither of those sound attractive so I’m choosing the third option.” +“Which is?” Yvette asks. +“We offer our services to the highest bidder. We become the go to organization for assassination. We spread so much fear and terror that nobody will ever want to attack us, they will instead wish to curry our favor in exchange for our help. And Cyrus I already see you’re about to protest and I don’t know why because you’re the first one who usually wants to go practice your killing skills on someone. I’d think you of all people would be happy with this arrangement.” +“You may be right.” Cyrus says. +“But what about Dendrin?” Yvette asks. +“Yes! What about the integrity of this order?” Theo adds +“Dendrin is the god of shadows. Why else would he give us such powers if not to use them in such a manner? But if it will calm everyone down I will certainly consult him on this matter. At this time though I have made my decision on what is best for the shadows.” + +None of them may see it now, but you really are taking steps to ensure the survival of the shadows. The shadows were feared during their lackey days under the Empire and during the rebellion the Empire itself learned to fear the shadows. + +Now? The fear still exists, but not to the extent that it needs to be. Not to the extent that it SHOULD be. You’re going to get that fear back and that reputation is what going to keep you all alive and thrive. + +Surely Dendrin would certainly approve of that. In fact you know that sadistic bastard would. +> Years pass... +Year 50 + +With all business taken care of, you tell Talia to let you know if anything important comes up since you’re going to catch a few moments of sleep. Seems like you don’t do much of that anymore. + +As you settle down for some much needed rest, you drift off thinking about all what you’ve managed to accomplish. + +Quala is essentially under your thumb and you haven’t even resorted to an army to do it. You’ve got people from there paying you left and right to assassinate their enemies whether it is in tangible goods or simple favors that you intend on calling in some day. + +It doesn’t stop there either; you’ve even had a few people travel all the way from the Arat province and even Rask to use your services. It of course helps that you’ve never failed to assassinate a chosen target. + +As a result, you’ve accomplished much of what you first envisioned. You’ve managed to put enough dread into those in power to not want to invade Delerg for fear of their own deaths or on the more pragmatic side of things they’d prefer to have you around in case they want to get rid of someone. + +“You’re enjoying all this aren’t you Eternal? I know you’re playing the emotionless cold hearted assassin guild leader and all, but deep down you’re enjoying every moment of it. It’s okay to admit it, not like I’m going to tell anyone.” +“Of course I am, but not for the reasons you believe. I’m enjoying this because things are going well for the shadows for once AND I’m not terminally bored while leading them. For the longest time I could achieve one or the other but not both.” +“Going well? Haven’t you had to execute ten shadows, including two of your own council? Theo and Yvette I believe?” +“It was necessary. They were conspiring and disagreeing with the new direction the shadows needed to go in order to thrive. Besides, I didn’t say we were without problems. I just meant things were good in general and you don’t seem to have a problem with what I’m doing. You even encouraged me when I made the effort to consult you about it.” +“Of course I don’t. In fact you’ve actually made the shadows more interesting than they have been in a long time. So…now that you’re on top of the world so to speak, what’s your next move?” +“Nothing major though I imagine it won’t stay like that for long. I don’t delude myself that the calmer times last forever, just that I should enjoy them while I can.” + +Those words prove to be true considering that Delerg sudden gets a large influx of svelk mercenaries in the town of Sinkhole one day. What’s more disturbing is they weren’t detected until they were in the town. This could be the precursor to an invasion for all you know and you personally go with Cyrus and several other Blades to sort this out. + +When you arrive, a few shadows that were in the town report that the svelk haven’t been doing anything except carousing at the tavern. He says they’ve been obnoxious, but nothing serious yet. Besides Mistress, the only dark elves you’ve had to deal with were those that were hired by the Empire to kill you during your time in Rask, so your opinion of them isn’t exactly high to begin with, but that probably makes you the same as everyone else in that aspect. + +You know damn well they have to be here for a reason other than spending money on booze though. + +You enter the tavern and it gets suddenly much quieter from the revelry you heard before entering. The staff looks miserable, particularly the waitresses and only a few other customers remain trying to hide in a dark corner, probably too scared to pass the dark elves to leave. + +“Ah! The great Shadow Master graces us with his presence! I was wondering if we could be expecting you. I told my soldiers here that if we showed up unannounced that we’d get your attention. It is truly a testament to your patrols that we found ourselves hard pressed to evade them undetected until we arrived in this dismal town.” One dark elf says while sitting at a table with his fellows. You presume he’s probably their leader. +“What do you svelk want and make it quick.” You say. +“Straight to the point eh? Very well then. My name is Tyren and what I want is to hire your services.” + +You don’t believe it. + +“You? You want to hire the shadows to kill someone? Since when did svelk rely on assassins? Doesn’t your race learn such a trade from birth and gleefully kill as a matter of course?” + +Suddenly Tyren stands up as if he’s offended by your remark. + +“And what do you know of us, shadow? What do you know that you haven’t heard second hand from the grubby ignorant peasants?” +“Trust me, I know your kind well enough that your senseless posturing and fake attempt at being offended are not going to intimidate or second guess myself. You’re a race of sadistic murderous mercenaries that go from battlefield to battlefield profiting from conflict which I don’t have a problem with. What I do have a problem with is when a bunch of them suddenly show up in my backyard where there is no conflict. You come here saying you need our help, yet show up unannounced and without coming to us directly. That shows a severe lack of disrespect, and there is no reason why I shouldn’t just kill the lot of you now and throw your worthless carcasses to the Sul-Monkeys.” + +You and your shadows take a step forward and Tyren’s demeanor changes immediately though he tries to play it off like he was joking. + +“Sheesh, calm down. I didn’t realize you shadows were so fucking serious all the time. Fine I’ll explain in greater detail. I want you to kill the leader of another Svelk mercenary company. She goes by the name of Edolith. Currently she’s located in the eastern part of the Quala province fighting for one of the half assed warlords there. I want her dead because she’s been taking all the good paying jobs for years and also with her dead I may even be able to gain her warband which has no other viable leaders to take her place.” + +Tyren takes a drink before continuing. + +“Now I know what you’re thinking why don’t I do this myself or even join an opposing side and kill her on the battlefield that way. Well it is with great risk in front of ALL my soldiers that I admit that I am neither clever or strong enough to take her on, though I would remind my soldiers that I could easily kick all of their asses.” And with those words he quickly draws a dagger and stabs one of his men in the throat. The dark elf spits out a glob of blood and falls backwards gasping for life until Tyren finishes him off with a crushing stomp to his head. + +Naturally all the rest of the svelk look upon this as a normal thing, Tyren then turns to you. + +“So I call upon you, the shadows for help, the greatest assassins ever known in recent history. I believe that your order has the skill to pull off her assassination. So do we have a deal?” +“Not really considering you haven’t even described payment yet. What could you possibly offer? Svelk mercenaries aren’t known for their wealth and trust me you’d need a considerable amount for me to even consider this.” +“Hmmm, well what about we owe you a favor?” + +Now you laugh. + +“A favor from you lot? Not likely. We have no need of mercenaries and I doubt if you’d come through with it anyway. We’d probably have to slaughter you all and while that would be doing the world a favor and maybe even sort of fun, I’d like to at least have something tangible if I’m going to help you.” +“You’re incredibly suspicious of us. You sure you don’t have svelk blood? No probably not, you’re pretty ugly even for a human, but what can you do seeing as you all evolved from those Sul-Monkeys out there right? Ha ha ha ha! Okay but seriously… Zarren! Get over here with that big bag!” Tyren shouts at one of his underlings. + +Zarren comes to Tyren’s table with a big bag and dumps the contents out on it. What is revealed is more than just regular valuables. There are also some books and other objects as well. So much that part of loot falls to the floor. + +“Hey, I recognize that book…its one I read during my days at Gloom! I thought it was lost forever.” Dravin suddenly exclaims. “In fact a lot of these objects are from Gloom! These ceremony rings, these cups…where the hell did you get this stuff?” +“Oh we svelk do a lot of trading with all kinds of people in our travels, those rock eating dwarves just being one of many. We sort of thought you all might be interested in lost objects from your old stomping grounds. Along with the gems and gold, I’d say this should be more than enough payment shouldn’t it?” + +While you aren’t overly attached to any “lost objects” from Gloom, you can see Dravin is pretty fond of some of them. You imagine the older human shadows that are still around would be happy to see such things again. Even Cyrus is looking at a couple things, and you know Talia would be interested in them. The actual valuables are probably a fair payment for a job such as this. + +Still part of you doesn’t trust the svelk. Something about all this seems a bit sketchy. You don’t know what exactly, but it just doesn’t feel quite right to you. +> Accept the contract +You don’t trust the svelk, but if they have some sort of ambush planned, you’re fairly confident that you can handle anything they’re going to throw at you. In any event you’ll be taking the payment in advance. + +“Very well svelk. We’ll take the job. Pack up the loot and put it in the bag.” +“Hey wait, we didn’t say we were paying you all of it now. We need some assurance you’ll complete the job! Half up front, half later!” +“Yeah, not going to happen. I don’t trust you as it is; you really think I’m not taking all the payment now? You’re delusional.” You say. + +Tyren is perturbed by your insistence, but then he realizes he’s not exactly in friendly territory and severely outnumbered. + +“Fine, just as long as that bitch is dead.” He replies and he proceeds to give the specifics of where Edolith is located before he takes his leave. You tell Cyrus and Dravin to take the best Blades and carry out the job. + +“And be very careful. Don’t take anything for granted. I still don’t trust them.” You say. +“Don’t worry about us, we’ll be able to sense a trap.” Cyrus remarks. + +When you make it back to the temple with the lost items from Gloom, all the older shadows are eager to look through them, hoping to find something personal of theirs. Talia is especially glad to see the return of them and reassures you that you made a good decision to take the contract. + +The next day Cyrus, Dravin and several other Blades have set off on their mission and its business as usual at the temple. + +About afternoon, several shadows report that they suddenly aren’t feeling well. Given that you’re in a swamp, you could chalk this up to the environment, the problem with that is the shadows tend use their magic to fend off such ailments. Plus some of the eternals are sick as well and they’re naturally resilient to disease and sickness. + +By night time, you and Talia aren’t feeling well either and a couple of the shadows have already died of this mysterious illness. Prayers to Dendrin have been made, but he’s not listening as usual. + +“It’s the fucking svelk. I know it. They caused this somehow.” You say in between feeling sick. + +You’re so dizzy you can barely think, but it suddenly occurs to you what’s going on. It’s what they paid you, or rather the objects from Gloom. They must’ve done something to them. Maybe a curse of some sort. + +“Get all of the objects out of this temple and we need to cast a purification ritual right now!” you say. + +As several shadows attempt to carry out this order, you try your best to get prepared for the ritual. Other shadows are deathly ill by this point and you’re not going to save them in time. + +“Shadow Master, the svelk are attacking just outside the temple!” Brother Gannon wheezes. + +You attempt to order the temple doors locked, but the svelk have already managed to barge in by this point. Under normal circumstances, you’d be more than a match for them, but whatever this curse is, it’s affected the shadows quite severely and they’ve taken full advantage of your weakness. Most are so sick they can’t concentrate to cast any spells, and that includes you. + +You put up a good fight, but ultimately the effects of the curse and Tyren’s sneak attack prove to be too much. You eventually fall to one of their repeating crossbows. With several bolts lodged in your vital organs your last thoughts are of the hope that Cyrus will survive whatever the svelk had planned for him.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 50 + +With all business taken care of, you tell Talia to let you know if anything important comes up since you’re going to catch a few moments of sleep. Seems like you don’t do much of that anymore. + +As you settle down for some much needed rest, you drift off thinking about all what you’ve managed to accomplish. + +Quala is essentially under your thumb and you haven’t even resorted to an army to do it. You’ve got people from there paying you left and right to assassinate their enemies whether it is in tangible goods or simple favors that you intend on calling in some day. + +It doesn’t stop there either; you’ve even had a few people travel all the way from the Arat province and even Rask to use your services. It of course helps that you’ve never failed to assassinate a chosen target. + +As a result, you’ve accomplished much of what you first envisioned. You’ve managed to put enough dread into those in power to not want to invade Delerg for fear of their own deaths or on the more pragmatic side of things they’d prefer to have you around in case they want to get rid of someone. + +“You’re enjoying all this aren’t you Eternal? I know you’re playing the emotionless cold hearted assassin guild leader and all, but deep down you’re enjoying every moment of it. It’s okay to admit it, not like I’m going to tell anyone.” +“Of course I am, but not for the reasons you believe. I’m enjoying this because things are going well for the shadows for once AND I’m not terminally bored while leading them. For the longest time I could achieve one or the other but not both.” +“Going well? Haven’t you had to execute ten shadows, including two of your own council? Theo and Yvette I believe?” +“It was necessary. They were conspiring and disagreeing with the new direction the shadows needed to go in order to thrive. Besides, I didn’t say we were without problems. I just meant things were good in general and you don’t seem to have a problem with what I’m doing. You even encouraged me when I made the effort to consult you about it.” +“Of course I don’t. In fact you’ve actually made the shadows more interesting than they have been in a long time. So…now that you’re on top of the world so to speak, what’s your next move?” +“Nothing major though I imagine it won’t stay like that for long. I don’t delude myself that the calmer times last forever, just that I should enjoy them while I can.” + +Those words prove to be true considering that Delerg sudden gets a large influx of svelk mercenaries in the town of Sinkhole one day. What’s more disturbing is they weren’t detected until they were in the town. This could be the precursor to an invasion for all you know and you personally go with Cyrus and several other Blades to sort this out. + +When you arrive, a few shadows that were in the town report that the svelk haven’t been doing anything except carousing at the tavern. He says they’ve been obnoxious, but nothing serious yet. Besides Mistress, the only dark elves you’ve had to deal with were those that were hired by the Empire to kill you during your time in Rask, so your opinion of them isn’t exactly high to begin with, but that probably makes you the same as everyone else in that aspect. + +You know damn well they have to be here for a reason other than spending money on booze though. + +You enter the tavern and it gets suddenly much quieter from the revelry you heard before entering. The staff looks miserable, particularly the waitresses and only a few other customers remain trying to hide in a dark corner, probably too scared to pass the dark elves to leave. + +“Ah! The great Shadow Master graces us with his presence! I was wondering if we could be expecting you. I told my soldiers here that if we showed up unannounced that we’d get your attention. It is truly a testament to your patrols that we found ourselves hard pressed to evade them undetected until we arrived in this dismal town.” One dark elf says while sitting at a table with his fellows. You presume he’s probably their leader. +“What do you svelk want and make it quick.” You say. +“Straight to the point eh? Very well then. My name is Tyren and what I want is to hire your services.” + +You don’t believe it. + +“You? You want to hire the shadows to kill someone? Since when did svelk rely on assassins? Doesn’t your race learn such a trade from birth and gleefully kill as a matter of course?” + +Suddenly Tyren stands up as if he’s offended by your remark. + +“And what do you know of us, shadow? What do you know that you haven’t heard second hand from the grubby ignorant peasants?” +“Trust me, I know your kind well enough that your senseless posturing and fake attempt at being offended are not going to intimidate or second guess myself. You’re a race of sadistic murderous mercenaries that go from battlefield to battlefield profiting from conflict which I don’t have a problem with. What I do have a problem with is when a bunch of them suddenly show up in my backyard where there is no conflict. You come here saying you need our help, yet show up unannounced and without coming to us directly. That shows a severe lack of disrespect, and there is no reason why I shouldn’t just kill the lot of you now and throw your worthless carcasses to the Sul-Monkeys.” + +You and your shadows take a step forward and Tyren’s demeanor changes immediately though he tries to play it off like he was joking. + +“Sheesh, calm down. I didn’t realize you shadows were so fucking serious all the time. Fine I’ll explain in greater detail. I want you to kill the leader of another Svelk mercenary company. She goes by the name of Edolith. Currently she’s located in the eastern part of the Quala province fighting for one of the half assed warlords there. I want her dead because she’s been taking all the good paying jobs for years and also with her dead I may even be able to gain her warband which has no other viable leaders to take her place.” + +Tyren takes a drink before continuing. + +“Now I know what you’re thinking why don’t I do this myself or even join an opposing side and kill her on the battlefield that way. Well it is with great risk in front of ALL my soldiers that I admit that I am neither clever or strong enough to take her on, though I would remind my soldiers that I could easily kick all of their asses.” And with those words he quickly draws a dagger and stabs one of his men in the throat. The dark elf spits out a glob of blood and falls backwards gasping for life until Tyren finishes him off with a crushing stomp to his head. + +Naturally all the rest of the svelk look upon this as a normal thing, Tyren then turns to you. + +“So I call upon you, the shadows for help, the greatest assassins ever known in recent history. I believe that your order has the skill to pull off her assassination. So do we have a deal?” +“Not really considering you haven’t even described payment yet. What could you possibly offer? Svelk mercenaries aren’t known for their wealth and trust me you’d need a considerable amount for me to even consider this.” +“Hmmm, well what about we owe you a favor?” + +Now you laugh. + +“A favor from you lot? Not likely. We have no need of mercenaries and I doubt if you’d come through with it anyway. We’d probably have to slaughter you all and while that would be doing the world a favor and maybe even sort of fun, I’d like to at least have something tangible if I’m going to help you.” +“You’re incredibly suspicious of us. You sure you don’t have svelk blood? No probably not, you’re pretty ugly even for a human, but what can you do seeing as you all evolved from those Sul-Monkeys out there right? Ha ha ha ha! Okay but seriously… Zarren! Get over here with that big bag!” Tyren shouts at one of his underlings. + +Zarren comes to Tyren’s table with a big bag and dumps the contents out on it. What is revealed is more than just regular valuables. There are also some books and other objects as well. So much that part of loot falls to the floor. + +“Hey, I recognize that book…its one I read during my days at Gloom! I thought it was lost forever.” Dravin suddenly exclaims. “In fact a lot of these objects are from Gloom! These ceremony rings, these cups…where the hell did you get this stuff?” +“Oh we svelk do a lot of trading with all kinds of people in our travels, those rock eating dwarves just being one of many. We sort of thought you all might be interested in lost objects from your old stomping grounds. Along with the gems and gold, I’d say this should be more than enough payment shouldn’t it?” + +While you aren’t overly attached to any “lost objects” from Gloom, you can see Dravin is pretty fond of some of them. You imagine the older human shadows that are still around would be happy to see such things again. Even Cyrus is looking at a couple things, and you know Talia would be interested in them. The actual valuables are probably a fair payment for a job such as this. + +Still part of you doesn’t trust the svelk. Something about all this seems a bit sketchy. You don’t know what exactly, but it just doesn’t feel quite right to you. +> Decline the contract +While it probably would make some of your shadows happy, you just don’t trust Tyren at all. This all seems too straight forward and with these objects from Gloom he’s offering…well its almost as if he’s over eager for you to take the job. + +“Tyren, I’m sorry you traveled all this way from wherever you previously were and dragged a bag of treasure with you along the way, but I’m going to have to say, this contract is not in the best interest of the shadows at this time.” +“What?!” Dravin asks. +“Are you serious?” Cyrus exclaims. +“Since when do the shadows turn down a contract?” Tyren asks. +“It’s been known to happen. Now if you please, leave these premises and don’t return.” You say ignoring Dravin and Cyrus’ outbursts. + +“But this part of our history he’s got here! How can we not take the contract?” Dravin says. +“I realize that, but it’s the past, not the future and I believe taking this contract is not the best for our future.” +“But…” +“Dravin! I am Shadow Master here, do NOT question me further on this!” +“Hey, he’s asking a valid question. You don’t need to pull rank like that.” Cyrus adds. +“Cyrus, don’t you start too. This is not the time or place.” + +While you bicker with Cyrus and Dravin, Tyren and his men begin to snicker which causes you to snap at them. + +“Didn’t I tell you merc scum to get the fuck out of here?” +“Okay, okay, we’re leaving.” Tyren chuckles though they’re taking their time gathering up the valuables that they spilled on the table. + +Meanwhile Dravin insists on arguing with Cyrus backing him up naturally. + +“Look, I don’t mean to question you Shadow Master, but I just think Dendrin would want us to have our history back, if only part of it.” +“I agree. Besides I’m sure Talia would like some of these things as well.” + +You can hardly believe the insubordination going on here. + +“The both of you are unbelievable right now. Questioning me and arguing in front of fucking dark elves? Did we turn into a pack of orcs overnight? Attempting to use my wife as some sort of support for your disobedience? You want the past? Fine, let’s just take it!” you shout and you draw your weapon. Before anyone can do anything else you grab the nearest dark elf and run him through. + +“Treachery! Defend yourselves!” Tyren shouts and drops some gems to pull his crossbow. + +The skirmish in the tavern is quick and bloody affair. The dark elves fight the best they can, but the advantage is to you in every way. You allow none to escape and the tavern is littered with their dead and a couple of your own by the end of it. The bar staff peep out from behind their hiding places. + +While the rest of the shadows gather up the valuables that are now all over the floor and place them into the bag, you search Tyren’s body on a hunch you had long before you engaged in this bloodbath and fortunately you find something in the form of a letter. + +Tyren, + +Make sure to wait a day before triggering the curse we put on those objects the rock eaters sold us. That should be more than enough time for the shadows to have placed them somewhere in their temple. The magic words are at the bottom of this letter and they should be simple enough even for you to memorize. + +As for the shadow assassin squad they’ll send after me, don’t worry about that, I’ve got that covered and have the ambush ready. You just stay near the Delerg province and monitor the situation with the after effects of the wasting curse. If it looks like they’re severely weakened by it then by all means attack the temple yourself before I get there. + +Also remember to destroy this letter, the last thing I need is for the shadows to kill you and find this on your corpse because you were an incompetent fool. Assuming you don’t mess this up on your end. We should at least be able to cripple the shadows to a degree that they’ll no longer be a threat to our livelihood. + +Edolith + +You figured it was something like this. Makes sense the svelk would see the shadows as major competition. + +“Next time just listen to my orders instead of bitching like a couple of housewives at the market!” you say shoving the letter in Cyrus’ hand. + +Cyrus looks it over. + +“Okay, so you were right, but we outsmarted them, got their stuff and we can perform a sanctify ritual on these objects. This situation turned out better than if we had just let them go.” + +You’re already angry at this whole situation and this is just the final straw for you. + +“Cyrus that’s not the damn point. My point is you AND Dravin undermined my authority in front of not only the rest of the shadows but outsiders as well as if you knew better. When I told you to desist you continued to piss and moan…in fact you’re STILL doing it!” + +Before Cyrus can come up with another snappy come back, you speed yourself up and punch him in the face. He reels backwards and you follow up with a kick sending him to the floor. He attempts to get up, but you kick him again in the face and then with a power stomp you smash his shin, breaking the bone through the skin. He bellows in pain and Dravin dares to try to stop you. + +“Shadow Master plea…” is all he utters before you give him a chop to his throat and then twist his arm behind his back before slamming his face into the table. + +“You! Stretch out his other arm across the table and take out your dagger.” You say to closest Blade, while continuing to hover behind Dravin. The Blade obeys without hesitation and Dravin is begging for mercy when he hears the unsheathing of a dagger. You can also hear Cyrus pleading for you not to harm Dravin. + +Still holding on to Dravin’s other arm, you half turn around to face him. + +“YOU shut the fuck up, before I break your other shin! I’m not killing him, but a lesson must be taught to both of you! Now you, what’s your name?” you ask the Blade since you never can keep track of these new eternals’ names, you swear they must’ve altered them all in those tanks to look similar or something. +“Glen, Shadow Master.” +“Glen, take Dravin’s pinky finger.” +“NO!” Dravin screams. +“Okay take his ring finger too!” you say and twist Dravin’s arm further. “You wanna go for the whole hand? Then keep fighting me! You’re lucky I’m not taking them from your dominant hand! Glen proceed.” + +Glen cuts off Dravin’s pinky first which causes him to let out a stifled yelp. Glen moves on to the ring finger, and you’re not sure if it’s the combination of the shock and fear, but whatever the reason Dravin ends up passing out completely. + +“Wrap up his hand and carry him back to the temple.” You tell Glen. + +Cyrus is still on the floor sitting up with his shinbone sticking out of his leg. He’s still in great pain, but you believe he’s more upset about Dravin. You crouch down beside him. + +“I’m sorry it had to be this way brother, but I spared your life once for a reason Cyrus. You agreed to obey my commands as Shadow Master and today you repeatedly defied my will. Am I going to regret that decision?” +“…no…no…” Cyrus says trying not cry out. +“No what?” you ask again forcing him to look directly into your eyes. +“No…Shadow Master…” +“Good. Good. Something like this can never happen again.” You say and stand back up. + +You tell the other Blades to carry Cyrus and grab the ill gotten bag of loot back to the temple since you’re going on ahead of everyone else. You then turn your attention to the frightened tavern staff. + +“Apologies for the mess. Leave them some gold to help clean up this filth off their floor and tables.” You say while stepping over a dark elf corpse and then heading out the door. + +When you get back the temple Talia asks you what happened and where everyone else is. + +“Had to put down some treacherous svelk, as far as I’m concerned all of their kind now has a permanent target on their backs if any us see one of them again. But we got some things off of them I think you’ll be pleasantly surprised with, you’ll have to perform a sanctify ritual over them first though before bringing them into the temple. As for the rest of the Blades, they’ll be along shortly with said loot I imagine, oh and I’m dissolving the Council. Really no point in it anymore.” +“Wha…well you are Shadow Master, but did you mention this Dravin and Cyrus?” +“Oh trust me, they know.” +> Years pass... +Year 55 + +You wake up with yet another permanent ache in your body. Getting old really sucks and it probably doesn’t help that you’ve spent decades fighting all your life. Who knows how many broken bones, deep cuts, head blows and other bodily trauma you’ve had. However, you’re probably more fit than most people your age and your magic ability is certainly a great equalizer. + +You go over some of the newest contract requests and one catches your eye due to it suffering from multiple misspellings and the murdering of language in general. When you see that it’s from Flog you’re a little impressed that he was able to write as well as he did. + +From what you can make out in the horribly written letter, he wants to meet with some of your people because he’s got a major problem on his hands and he hopes that seeing as he once helped you fight the Empire, you’d help him out in return. + +You shake your head at that remark considering that as you recall you basically spared his life in exchange for his support. He doesn’t go into specifics about who he wants killed, but he goes on to say that he’s acquired a lot of wealth in his “conquest” of Rask. A bit of stretching the truth since while its true he owns the biggest stretch on territory there, the area is far from conquered. + +Amusingly he wants you to meet him at Blood Tooth, which is apparently what he renamed Evergloom after he moved in years after you left. He states he’ll go into more specifics then, mainly because he doesn’t want the letter possibly falling into the wrong hands and also because all this writing makes his brain hurt. He also mentions that while it isn’t necessary, he’d prefer to meet with you personally since he’s confident in your abilities to get the job done. + +You can’t help but smile a little at that last statement. + +“You’re not going are you?” Talia asks. +"Why not? I’ve been running the shadows for this long and I haven’t even taken a contract myself. Seems a bit hypocritical don’t you think?” +“You’re the Shadow Master, you don’t need to concern yourself with such things.” +“Maybe, but I’ve always believed that a leader really should lead by example and I’ve done that for the most part.” +“What about that incident with the dark elves?” +“Eh, I actually didn’t even plan that and it really doesn’t count. I just think I need to go on this one.” +“You just want to prove that you aren’t getting old. Don’t think I haven’t noticed you been mentioning it lately.” +“Yeah…well maybe. But still…hey why don’t you come with me?” +“Me?” +“Well why not? Flog’s always liked you and it’ll probably make the meeting go over better. Besides, you should be keeping your abilities up as well.” +“Excuse me, but I continue to spar with the Blades every day.” +“And so do I, but it isn’t enough unless their real danger involved. Come on, you mean to say you don’t miss the old days just a little bit?” +“Not particularly, but I see that this is important to you, so I shall accompany you, but aren’t you concerned about this being a trap?” +“Not really, no. While Flog has always been a little more cunning than the average orc and an opportunistic fool, he’s never been suicidal. I’m pretty sure he knows if he tried to ambush me, it wouldn’t end well for him. Even if he managed to succeed, he also knows that the full force of the shadows would hunt him down personally and with as many enemies as he probably has I doubt if he needs to add more. Besides if it is an ambush, that’ll just make things more interesting and Dendrin’s always looking out for us anyway.” + +Your flip remark about Dendrin gets a nod in agreement by Talia who doesn’t take it as a flip remark, but rather that you’re being genuine. “Well I suppose there is that and as the chosen of Dendrin you’d be even better protected, but who is going to be running things while we’re gone?” +“I don’t think we’re going to be gone for that long, but Cyrus can do it. Not like he goes on many missions anymore either.” + +This is true. Ever since the incident with the dark elves, Cyrus and Dravin started becoming more withdrawn. Granted Dravin was never an extrovert, but with Cyrus it’s a little sad. It’s like you completely crushed his spirit that day. He lost his unofficial position as leader of the Blades due to the permanent limp you gave him and resigned himself to keeping up on internal security. Sometimes you feel a little bad about it, but you believe that in the long run it was a good thing. Cyrus, even though he’d pledged himself to you still harbored a bit of willfulness that was starting to come back. If allowed to flourish longer, he may have become more of a problem and would have had to been killed. + +Though perhaps his current fate is worse than death. + +When you approach Cyrus about the situation with Flog, he’s surprised that you’re going, let alone putting him in charge of the temple until you get back. He of course agrees and wishes you luck. Given how Flog was never his favorite person, you wonder why he didn’t at least express the same concerns about meeting with him like Talia did, and then it occurs to you that perhaps he’s hoping you do get killed. + +In any event, you’re not going to worry about it. You instead hand pick some of the best Blades to come with you to Blood Tooth and set off on your journey as soon as possible. + +The journey to Rask is fairly uneventful. While you mostly keep to the off beaten trails, you know most in Quala are wise enough to not attack a group of shadows even if they did see you. The “stable” leader of northern Quala, First Mage Galen has practically bent over backwards to stay on your good side. You sort of wonder if that is who Flog wants you to assassinate considering all the back and forth attempts at conquest into each other’s realms by the pair of them. If it is, then he better have a hell of a lot of money. + +When you reach the Rask it mostly looks very much how it did when you left it. Much of it untouched wilderness though the occasional battlefield markings are apparent. Some are even fairly recent. + +“Hey Flog didn’t say anything about safe passage did he in his letter?” Talia asks. +“No, but I don’t think he’d be able to enforce it very well anyway. You know how tribal orcs are, even under a strong leader they tend towards chaotic acts.” +“Well as you said, I suppose that’ll make things more interesting. Actually a battle would probably warm me up right about now. I think I got too used to the heat, though I wasn’t exactly fond of the freezing cold back in the old days either.” +“Really? I kind of preferred it, but we’re going to be making camp soon, we can warm up a little then.” + +Later that night at your campsite you take first watch. You can’t really rest anyway since your body aches a bit. As the night goes on, you remember back to the time when you doing this as a regular thing, seems like a lifetime ago. + +As you lose yourself in the past a bit you suddenly hear a noise. Like howling, but it isn’t from any sort of wolf that you’ve ever heard. Doesn’t even sound like a natural one and it sounds pretty close by. + +“Everyone get up!” you shout with your weapon drawn. + +As everyone starts to get up ready for battle, more of those howls can be heard. They’re nearly painful at this point and several of you are clutching at least one of your ears. + +“What the hell is that?” Talia shouts. +“Not sure, but we’re about to find out.” You say as all of you form a back-to-back circle for defense. + +Several glowing red eyes appear in the dark forest around you, when your assailants finally show themselves, they are in the form of orcs, but more feral and savage looking (even for orcs). + +“You think Flog set this up?” Talia asks you while eyeing her closest possible attacker. +“Let’s worry about it afterwards.” You say and the orcs attack. + +You’ve had to fight a few unruly orcs in the past and though its been awhile, you know their tactics wouldn’t have switched up that much. They almost lope at you and circle around you like an animal would, in fact animalistic is the best way to describe them since at this range you can see they aren’t even wearing much clothing beyond a loin cloth and a few grisly trophies in the form of bloody body parts. Their hands resemble claws and some of them aren’t even attacking with weapons at all and are just using their nails, which are unnaturally long for orcs. + +You cross swords with one of them and even while speeding yourself up, it’s still nearly matching you blow for blow. Its face is close enough for you to get the good look and it’s contorted looking with an extra wide mouth filled with teeth. Whatever the hell this thing is, it isn’t any kind of orc you’ve ever seen or encountered. You muster up all your strength and land a powerful strike against the orc’s head nearly severing the top part of it completely. It attempts to still attack you, flailing its arms wildly and still making that horrible howling sound. + +Then you hear a whispery voice in your mind. At first you think its Dendrin, but then you’re not asleep and you don’t feel the same numbness, but rather the exact opposite. A sharp pain in your head. + +“The battle is lost mortal. You cannot kill us. You must submit to us, it is the only way to save yourself.” + +You look around to see Talia and most of the other shadows still fighting, but you also see a couple of them clutching their heads and falling to the ground in pain. These definitely aren’t orcs you’re fighting considering they’re using some sort of psychic attack. + +You could either try to finish off the rest of the orcs to stop the attacks or cast a shield over the minds of you and your shadows, though its very difficult to concentrate right now. +> Cast the spell +You attempt to block everything out in your mind a concentrate on your spell. More voices invade your mind and you begin shouting out Dendrin’s name loudly during your chanting in an effort to drown out the supernatural voice in your head. You also shout to everyone to try to shut out the voices you know they have to be hearing as well. + +“NO! You cannot escape us! You are MEAT!” you hear and the voices begin to fade a bit. You notice that your shadows aren’t struggling with their mental assaults anymore either and regular combat goes a lot better. Soon, all attackers are killed and Talia comes over to you rubbing her head a bit after dispatching her orc. + +“What the hell are these things?” +“Well I’m not exactly sure, but if I had to guess, they’re wendigos. Evil spirits that take over the bodies of the living and try to consume anyone they can. Found notes written about them after we took Kane’s fort. He apparently fought them all the way back to their home territory and trapped them there. Looks like these idiots let them loose again or something. We should be safe now and I’ve got everyone shielded, but everyone else should keep up their own shield just as added protection. We can link that mental power to each other if we just focus.” +“Just like back in shadow training when we all fought that brain lurker huh?” Talia asks. +“I believe it was a thought lurker, but yeah something like that. Odd that we never encountered another one of those creatures.” +“I think I remember Brother Gray said they typically only lived underground or something.” + +Probably some sort of “gift” from the Derro no doubt, but you stop dwelling on the past and pack up you camp so you can continue your journey. You’ll have to get some sleep later. + +The rest of the journey is more of an endurance test against the elements rather than any more fighting. Even while sticking to the forests you feel the full strength of the cold winds and snowfall that has decided to grace you with its presence. You see a village in the distance, and briefly ponder if you should head to it and sleep at an inn, but the fact remains you don’t know what you can expect there. You’re guessing Flog might’ve enslaved most of the towns in Rask, but who knows what they’ve been turned into. Chances are they’re probably the equivalent of slave camps now patrolled by a bunch of over eager orcs or ogres ready to attack anyone they don’t know. + +“I certainly hope Flog told his people to expect us when we finally get to Blood Tooth!” Talia says wrapping herself up and walking on as you decide to avoid the village. + +When you finally arrive at Blood Tooth, you see that Flog hasn’t changed your old home too much, other than the typical orc totems that their kind seem to favor. A group of orcs stand outside looking off in several direction as if they’re expecting someone, but that might not necessarily be you though. They still haven’t noticed you though. + +“Well, this is it. We might as well just approach. Be ready for anything though.” You tell everyone. + +You reveal yourself from your cloak and begin to walk towards the group. They finally see you and begin waving you down. + +“Shadows! Come quickly! Not safe out here!” one shouts. +“Well I’m guessing we’re being welcomed at least.” Talia says. +“For now. Like I said be ready for anything.” + +The orcs waste no time in calling for their fort doors to be opened and you’re lead in. Now the place looks less like how you remember. It’s definitely got that orcish touch now, not to mention smell. Eventually you meet Flog on his throne. The years have taken their toll on him to the point where you don’t feel so old any more. Flog stands up slowly and limps over to you, refusing the use of any sort of cane. His face bear the scars of multiple battles and he’s only got one hand, though the stump naturally has some sort of crude weapon grafted to it. His reign is most likely in danger being the age he is, let alone some of his obvious injuries. Still he’s hanging in there somehow, you’ve got to give him credit. + +“Shadow Master, its been a long time. And your mate Talia…wait you did not bring the strange lover did you?” +“Strange…oh!” you realize. “No, Cyrus is back in Delerg.” +“Good. Good. Never liked him. You two. Like. Treat Flog fairly and with honor. Um, let us go to my meeting room. Much to discuss. Very important. Your shadows can stay here, drink and partake of our females!” + +You look over and see several female orcs AND ogres attempting to look seductive towards some of your shadows. You think this is the first time you’ve seen any of them look genuinely scared during this mission. + +“Ah no, I don’t think that’ll be necessary Flog.” You say. +“All strange lovers too huh? Just as well, couldn’t survive being with an orc woman anyway. Let us go.” + +Flog takes you and Talia to the very place where you used to hold small meetings and you all sit down before he speaks. + +“Flog is old and will die soon. Flog know this and accepts it. Flog can only hope that Flog die in combat, but that time is not yet now. Flog cannot let it be so, so Flog call on those who may help.” +“Well that’s the whole reason for this, but I don’t understand the need for secrecy and why the hell we had to drag ourselves all the way up here. You know there are wendigo prowling about in Rask now?” +“Yes, Flog well aware of it because Flog’s son Mog foolishly attempted to harness them in his grab for power. Now Rask have evil spirits wandering about and Mog is making his move against Flog. Mog need to die.” + +There’s your contract, but you still don’t get all of this. + +“Okay, but…well normally I don’t ask why, however my curiosity about all this is still there. I mean in orc culture is it not the tradition of the strong to kill the current chief, most preferably one of his sons?” +“Indeed that would be the case, but Flog not feel that Mog deserve it. Mog’s reckless behavior with the wendigo is just one example. Mog also prove to be wasteful with slave towns. If Mog take charge, all of this will collapse. Flog not want it to collapse. Flog want orcs to continue to expand kingdom. Crush puny Galen one day and then beyond.” +“Beyond huh? That include the shadows Flog?” Talia asks. +“Heh. Perhaps one day the shadows and orcs will do battle and on that glorious day orcs will stand on top of the burning ruins of your god’s temple…but not today or even in Flog’s lifetime. All Flog ask now is for help, willing to pay large fee. You shadows also left things here when you abandoned this place. Stuffed things in a storeroom, perhaps you might want them back?” + +That sounds very familiar. + +“So if you don’t want Mog to take charge who did you have in mind?” Talia asks. +“Next son in line of course. Skog. Skog smart like Flog but not strong enough to beat Mog. Skog from proper orc woman. Mog from terrible drunken night with an ogress. Glad cannot remember much, but Flog do remember a lot of hair and…” +“Okay didn’t quite need those details. So where is Mog?” you say. +“Mog at Mogtown further north plotting my death and preparing to invade Bloodtooth. Be here soon, that’s why he needs to die soon. Mog prefer the company of ogres and giants mostly. Mog also have slave witch with him. Human. She one who released the wendigo and try to tame. Foolish. Cannot tame spirits. Bad idea.” +“I see…well Talia and I need to talk privately first. Just to discuss the exact details.” + +Flog nods and lets you and Talia go off in a corner to speak quietly to each other. + +“What’s wrong?” Talia asks. +“I dunno that part about giving us old shadow items as payment got me suspicious.” +“We can always sanctify them first, but I doubt if Flog put any sort of curse on them. If he’s honest enough to say the orcs will wage war on us one day he’s not going to bother with the same trickery the dark elves did.” +“Well there’s that too. I’m wondering why the hell should we help a potential enemy in the future.” +“Really anyone we perform jobs for could be our enemies in the future.” +“True, but they’re all human and they generally have a healthier fear of us and death in general than orcs. Flog only has some sense because he’s a little smarter and he’s known us longer.” +“Exactly, these are orcs we’re talking about, do you really think it’s going to matter who takes charge? While that idea in Flog’s head is a nice dream for him, I think we both know it’s just that. There is no way orcs are going to stay unified long enough to form some major kingdom of any kind, not for long anyway. Even with Rask more or less under their rule, its still very tribal here and prone to infighting. Besides, with Dendrin on our side, how would then even stand a chance?” +“Heh, yes I suppose so. Though I’m just wondering if rather than dragging our asses further up north and facing giants, ogres, witches and who knows what else out in the open and by ourselves, if we shouldn’t just make a different offer to Flog.” +“Like what?” +“Well like staying here and helping him in a more direct way. Flog claimed that Mog would probably be coming to invade soon. There will be so much chaos going on, we could probably slip out the fort and move around behind the army to assassinate Mog that way. Might even be easier.” +“Yeah, but who knows how long it’ll take him to invade or if he’ll even come personally and I don’t think Flog is going to go for that idea. Besides don’t you think being involved in a siege would be even more dangerous than trying to sneak into a town when they aren’t expecting trouble?” +> Go ahead with the original plan +Flog probably won’t go for it and being here during a siege probably will be just as if not more dangerous. + +“Okay, we’ll stay here for a moment to get some rest and then get going. I hate to admit it but with the recent wendigo encounter and traipsing across the countryside I’m eager to get this over with since I’m starting to feel my age.” You quietly say to Talia. +“Are you going to be okay?” +“Yes, I’ll be fine, just need to get this mission over with.” + +You stay at Blood Tooth for a few hours to rest, but soon set off on your mission since the company of orcs isn’t something you or any of the shadows want to endure for very long. + +The journey to Mogtown is a miserable one, since the snow begins to fall heavier the further north you go. The snow is so deep that you can’t really speed yourself up since your legs are buried in the snow to the point where you can’t even run. Cloaking is useless since you’re leaving tracks everywhere. By the time you reach your destination, you’ve half frozen and exhausted. + +When you see Mogtown in the distance, you’re in for a slight surprise. The front of the town is crawling with troops. Giants, orcs, and ogres are all standing around preparing to invade Blood Tooth no doubt. You expected some guards outside, but nothing like this. + +“We’ll sneak around the back and scale the wall from there. Mog’s probably still inside the town in one of the more important looking buildings.” You tell everyone. + +Your plan is about the best you can do under the circumstances and while you manage to avoid detection from the patrols, unfortunately there are more wendigos lurking on the outskirts ready to pick anyone off that comes near. They waste no time attacking you and while you’re better prepared for such creatures now, the noise ends up attracting the town garrison. + +“Quick, scale the walls and let’s find this half breed bastard!” you shout. + +After scaling the walls you find yourself surrounded by more enemies waiting for you. You have to butcher your way through several orcs and ogres before you can catch a breather. You run down an alleyway to avoid more troops descending on your position. + +The alley way seems to have been converted into a slave pen filled with humans. You briefly consider freeing them in order to cause a little chaos, but the humans in the cages look so pathetic, you doubt if they’d have the power to even move. + +Suddenly large shadows loom over you in the form of a couple giants who are standing on the outside of the nearby town walls throwing great clots of snow at you.. They succeed in destroying some buildings, killing some slaves as well as slowing you down when you feel a great force slam you to the ground from above. + +You struggle to maintain consciousness as you try to dig your way out of an icy grave. You don’t have time to morn when you notice Talia’s lifeless body as you dig by it. When your head reaches air you take a deep breath, but this small comfort is cut short when you catch an arrow in the skull.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You attempt to block everything out in your mind a concentrate on your spell. More voices invade your mind and you begin shouting out Dendrin’s name loudly during your chanting in an effort to drown out the supernatural voice in your head. You also shout to everyone to try to shut out the voices you know they have to be hearing as well. + +“NO! You cannot escape us! You are MEAT!” you hear and the voices begin to fade a bit. You notice that your shadows aren’t struggling with their mental assaults anymore either and regular combat goes a lot better. Soon, all attackers are killed and Talia comes over to you rubbing her head a bit after dispatching her orc. + +“What the hell are these things?” +“Well I’m not exactly sure, but if I had to guess, they’re wendigos. Evil spirits that take over the bodies of the living and try to consume anyone they can. Found notes written about them after we took Kane’s fort. He apparently fought them all the way back to their home territory and trapped them there. Looks like these idiots let them loose again or something. We should be safe now and I’ve got everyone shielded, but everyone else should keep up their own shield just as added protection. We can link that mental power to each other if we just focus.” +“Just like back in shadow training when we all fought that brain lurker huh?” Talia asks. +“I believe it was a thought lurker, but yeah something like that. Odd that we never encountered another one of those creatures.” +“I think I remember Brother Gray said they typically only lived underground or something.” + +Probably some sort of “gift” from the Derro no doubt, but you stop dwelling on the past and pack up you camp so you can continue your journey. You’ll have to get some sleep later. + +The rest of the journey is more of an endurance test against the elements rather than any more fighting. Even while sticking to the forests you feel the full strength of the cold winds and snowfall that has decided to grace you with its presence. You see a village in the distance, and briefly ponder if you should head to it and sleep at an inn, but the fact remains you don’t know what you can expect there. You’re guessing Flog might’ve enslaved most of the towns in Rask, but who knows what they’ve been turned into. Chances are they’re probably the equivalent of slave camps now patrolled by a bunch of over eager orcs or ogres ready to attack anyone they don’t know. + +“I certainly hope Flog told his people to expect us when we finally get to Blood Tooth!” Talia says wrapping herself up and walking on as you decide to avoid the village. + +When you finally arrive at Blood Tooth, you see that Flog hasn’t changed your old home too much, other than the typical orc totems that their kind seem to favor. A group of orcs stand outside looking off in several direction as if they’re expecting someone, but that might not necessarily be you though. They still haven’t noticed you though. + +“Well, this is it. We might as well just approach. Be ready for anything though.” You tell everyone. + +You reveal yourself from your cloak and begin to walk towards the group. They finally see you and begin waving you down. + +“Shadows! Come quickly! Not safe out here!” one shouts. +“Well I’m guessing we’re being welcomed at least.” Talia says. +“For now. Like I said be ready for anything.” + +The orcs waste no time in calling for their fort doors to be opened and you’re lead in. Now the place looks less like how you remember. It’s definitely got that orcish touch now, not to mention smell. Eventually you meet Flog on his throne. The years have taken their toll on him to the point where you don’t feel so old any more. Flog stands up slowly and limps over to you, refusing the use of any sort of cane. His face bear the scars of multiple battles and he’s only got one hand, though the stump naturally has some sort of crude weapon grafted to it. His reign is most likely in danger being the age he is, let alone some of his obvious injuries. Still he’s hanging in there somehow, you’ve got to give him credit. + +“Shadow Master, its been a long time. And your mate Talia…wait you did not bring the strange lover did you?” +“Strange…oh!” you realize. “No, Cyrus is back in Delerg.” +“Good. Good. Never liked him. You two. Like. Treat Flog fairly and with honor. Um, let us go to my meeting room. Much to discuss. Very important. Your shadows can stay here, drink and partake of our females!” + +You look over and see several female orcs AND ogres attempting to look seductive towards some of your shadows. You think this is the first time you’ve seen any of them look genuinely scared during this mission. + +“Ah no, I don’t think that’ll be necessary Flog.” You say. +“All strange lovers too huh? Just as well, couldn’t survive being with an orc woman anyway. Let us go.” + +Flog takes you and Talia to the very place where you used to hold small meetings and you all sit down before he speaks. + +“Flog is old and will die soon. Flog know this and accepts it. Flog can only hope that Flog die in combat, but that time is not yet now. Flog cannot let it be so, so Flog call on those who may help.” +“Well that’s the whole reason for this, but I don’t understand the need for secrecy and why the hell we had to drag ourselves all the way up here. You know there are wendigo prowling about in Rask now?” +“Yes, Flog well aware of it because Flog’s son Mog foolishly attempted to harness them in his grab for power. Now Rask have evil spirits wandering about and Mog is making his move against Flog. Mog need to die.” + +There’s your contract, but you still don’t get all of this. + +“Okay, but…well normally I don’t ask why, however my curiosity about all this is still there. I mean in orc culture is it not the tradition of the strong to kill the current chief, most preferably one of his sons?” +“Indeed that would be the case, but Flog not feel that Mog deserve it. Mog’s reckless behavior with the wendigo is just one example. Mog also prove to be wasteful with slave towns. If Mog take charge, all of this will collapse. Flog not want it to collapse. Flog want orcs to continue to expand kingdom. Crush puny Galen one day and then beyond.” +“Beyond huh? That include the shadows Flog?” Talia asks. +“Heh. Perhaps one day the shadows and orcs will do battle and on that glorious day orcs will stand on top of the burning ruins of your god’s temple…but not today or even in Flog’s lifetime. All Flog ask now is for help, willing to pay large fee. You shadows also left things here when you abandoned this place. Stuffed things in a storeroom, perhaps you might want them back?” + +That sounds very familiar. + +“So if you don’t want Mog to take charge who did you have in mind?” Talia asks. +“Next son in line of course. Skog. Skog smart like Flog but not strong enough to beat Mog. Skog from proper orc woman. Mog from terrible drunken night with an ogress. Glad cannot remember much, but Flog do remember a lot of hair and…” +“Okay didn’t quite need those details. So where is Mog?” you say. +“Mog at Mogtown further north plotting my death and preparing to invade Bloodtooth. Be here soon, that’s why he needs to die soon. Mog prefer the company of ogres and giants mostly. Mog also have slave witch with him. Human. She one who released the wendigo and try to tame. Foolish. Cannot tame spirits. Bad idea.” +“I see…well Talia and I need to talk privately first. Just to discuss the exact details.” + +Flog nods and lets you and Talia go off in a corner to speak quietly to each other. + +“What’s wrong?” Talia asks. +“I dunno that part about giving us old shadow items as payment got me suspicious.” +“We can always sanctify them first, but I doubt if Flog put any sort of curse on them. If he’s honest enough to say the orcs will wage war on us one day he’s not going to bother with the same trickery the dark elves did.” +“Well there’s that too. I’m wondering why the hell should we help a potential enemy in the future.” +“Really anyone we perform jobs for could be our enemies in the future.” +“True, but they’re all human and they generally have a healthier fear of us and death in general than orcs. Flog only has some sense because he’s a little smarter and he’s known us longer.” +“Exactly, these are orcs we’re talking about, do you really think it’s going to matter who takes charge? While that idea in Flog’s head is a nice dream for him, I think we both know it’s just that. There is no way orcs are going to stay unified long enough to form some major kingdom of any kind, not for long anyway. Even with Rask more or less under their rule, its still very tribal here and prone to infighting. Besides, with Dendrin on our side, how would then even stand a chance?” +“Heh, yes I suppose so. Though I’m just wondering if rather than dragging our asses further up north and facing giants, ogres, witches and who knows what else out in the open and by ourselves, if we shouldn’t just make a different offer to Flog.” +“Like what?” +“Well like staying here and helping him in a more direct way. Flog claimed that Mog would probably be coming to invade soon. There will be so much chaos going on, we could probably slip out the fort and move around behind the army to assassinate Mog that way. Might even be easier.” +“Yeah, but who knows how long it’ll take him to invade or if he’ll even come personally and I don’t think Flog is going to go for that idea. Besides don’t you think being involved in a siege would be even more dangerous than trying to sneak into a town when they aren’t expecting trouble?” +> Propose to help Flog against the siege +“It can’t hurt to ask, if he declines we can just go through with the regular plan.” You say. +“I guess so, but I still don’t see Flog going for this idea.” + +You approach Flog about your idea and just as Talia said he isn’t keen on it. + +“The whole point of having you kill Mog is so Flog doesn’t get siege!” +“But you have the advantage now of us helping you. Think about it Flog, if you send us to assassinate Mog you get rid of your rival, but you still need to bring his followers under control who will all break up into petty warbands that you’ll have to chase down. That’s time wasted. On the other hand, if Mog were to die in battle against you, that would be different. You’d not only be killing him, but also killing most of his troops on top of it. You might even get some to switch sides and pledge new allegiance to you. You’ll also have the added bonus of still looking like a powerful chief who can defeat would be rivals. You could be ruling a lot longer than you think.” + +You just said all the right things because it doesn’t take long for Flog to think about your words and agree. + +“Hmm, you shadows might be right. Okay you help with siege instead, but must prepare quickly!” Flog says and leaves to go bark orders at his people. + +“Well you convinced him, but I’m curious why this change in tactic? You don’t really think we couldn’t have succeeded the other way?” +“I’m sure we could have, but let’s just say I think we would’ve suffered greater losses. I suppose the recent battle with the wendigo and this very trip up here has made me realize that I AM getting old and trying to prove that I can wade into battle either by myself or with only a small group isn’t necessarily the best option for me anymore, especially not when your life is in danger too. Here, we can keep low and not be the main targets. Mog is going to be focused on tearing down the defenses and killing Flog first and foremost. He’s not going to expect us sneaking up on him and neither are his troops. I’d prefer if we had as many orc grunts taking the brunt of the fighting.” +“Just like the old days huh?” +“Just like.” + +You make your plans to stay; you just hope you don’t have to wait too long for an attack. A couple days pass and you get a visit. + +“Slumming nowadays are we?” Dendrin asks. +“Trust me I’m regretting that I ever came here now.” You answer. +“Oh, I think we both know you had to do this, if only to see if you still could do it. After this is all over, this’ll be out of your system and you’ll content setting up assassinations from the safety of your desk again.” +“Thanks for your confidence in me, and while you’re probably right, I can’t help but think I’ve just given up and accepted mediocrity and the eventual limitations brought on by old age now.” +“What limitations? You’ve made the shadows a force of fear to entire nations. You’ve got some of the leaders of those nations to even show deference to you in the form of gifts just so you might not take a contract out on their miserable lives. So what if you aren’t as effective with a sword anymore? You’ve got magic to compensate! And what is any of that compared to the influence you’ve spread?” + +You have to admit, Dendrin is right. + +“When that half breed moron comes marching down with his army over grown brutes, you needn’t go skulking around his camp like a common thief. You don’t even need to rely on ducking and weaving while casting shadowfire from behind some boulder. Stand on top of the world and tap into your full potential and most of all trust in me.” +“What do you mean exactly?” you ask. +“You’ll have to figure that out for yourself, but it’s pretty easy. You don’t much time though.” + +Just as you’re about to ask Dedrin what he means, you’re sudden awakened by a general alarm. + +“Mog’s coming! Everyone to arms!” you hear shouted several times throughout the fort. + +Talia is already preparing for battle, she sees you’ve awakened. + +“Good, you’re awake we’ve got to get moving.” She says approaching you. + +You slowly get up and take your time as you shake away your grogginess. + +“No we really don’t. You go gather all the rest of the shadows and meet me on the battlements as soon as you can.” +“What are you going to do?” +“Not sure yet, but I’m going to do something.” + +You don’t even get fully dressed in your armor. You just head to the highest battlements, which you know to be at the roof of the tower portion of the fort. When you reach the top, the cold wind whips around you and there are no orcs here. You imagine they’re all on the lower battlements or reinforcing the doors. + +From the top of the tower you can see Mog’s army in the not so far distance. Besides the orcs and ogres, he’s also got several giants with him along with hordes of human slaves dragging the baggage carts and pushing war machines. + +You continue to watch Mog’s army get into position to attack the fort. You look up into the sky and see that more snow is starting to fall. Funny, but you don’t feel the cold at all now. + +You close your eyes and concentrate. You mentally chant in your head and try to draw on the power of Dendrin and of the shadow realm. + +Talia and the other shadows eventually arrive during your chanting and while you hear a couple of them call out to you, you ignore them and then you can’t hear them at all. It’s like your whole body has shifted into the shadow realm and nothing around you exists save for that numbness. + +The attack on Blood Tooth begins and a boulder goes crashing into the side of a wall and you don’t even know about it. Talia and some of the shadows try to pull you back in since they fear a boulder could hit the tower next. But its silly, you have nothing to fear because you’re about to bring it… + +The sky begins to darken unnaturally and you suddenly find yourself outside in between Blood Tooth and Mog’s army except it isn’t “you” its some sort of shadowy avatar of yourself. You see hundreds of Mog’s orcs and ogres before you. They looked confused at first, but they should be scared and they soon will be. You move in for the attack. + +You cut down the first row of attackers in front of you with ease and then the next, and then the next and so forth. The hundreds of weapon blows you experience are nothing to you as they pass through your avatar. Eventually they wise up and start panicking, crying out about dark magic and running in the other direction. + +A couple of giants try to stop you, but they don’t have any more luck than anyone else. Their large bodies eventually just become large corpses that only manage to crush a few unlucky souls that don’t get out of the way in time. + +Eventually you make your way through to Mog’s encampment where you see a very large orc with light green skin and a great fat belly. You’re guessing that would be Mog. Mog still isn’t fully aware of why his men are breaking and running. All he knows is his battle plans are falling into disarray. One of his lieutenants sees your shadowy form and points at you shouting several things in orcish. + +Mog shouts something as well, motioning a haggard looking human woman to help; you’re guessing that this is his witch. She begins to cast some sort of spell, but she blinks once and you’re suddenly before her eyes. This breaks her concentration, but not as much as your blade through her abdomen. + +Seeing his only source of magic power killed and most of his troops running away he attempts to do likewise. He may as well be running in slow motion though due to your speed. He doesn’t even feel it when you thrust your blade through his back and pierce his heart. He just looks down long enough to see the tip of the blade disappearing from the newly made hole in his chest as it is being pulled back out. He doesn’t have time to ponder anything else except his own death within that split second and then fall down dead. + +Your goal here in Rask is done and you slowly fade from the battlefield. You suddenly find yourself back in your own body, which is still standing on top of the tower. Talia and your Blades are standing by. + +“It is done. Mog is dead.” You say. +“What happened exactly? I mean we tried to approach you, but a force of some sort suddenly protected your body so we didn’t wish to proceed any further. We just observed, but we could hear the fighting still going on from below.” Talia says. +“I tapped into my full potential like Dendrin suggested. Though I might not be doing that all the time in the near future, I actually feel a little drained from it. Still, it felt good to be on the battlefield just one more time. We better go find Flog, I’m sure he’ll be wondering what the hell is going on.” + +Your actions were seen by most of Flog’s soldiers and they were in awe. Flog himself is pretty humble when talking with you again. You do not gloat over any of it though because you believe you’ve made a lasting impression here. Even if the orcs do manage to keep some sort of kingdom together, your actions today are going to remembered well enough for them to tell stories about to their offspring and those offspring will fear the shadows properly just as their parents do today. + +Eventually you take your payment and begin your journey back to Delerg. + +While you appreciate Dendrin’s suggestion and it helped you out immensely, but if his goal was to make you more into a “believer” it didn’t entirely work. One act of channeling divine power doesn’t make you believe in him as your “god” so much as it makes you desire that power on a more stable basis. +> Years pass... +Year 65 + +Delerg has been completely transformed. No longer is it known as just that dismal swamp where the shadows make their home. It’s literally been transformed into the land of shadows. + +You called upon powers of Dendrin in one great ritual to forever cast a cloud of darkness over the area. Delerg is now a land of perpetual twilight. Most in Quala would not ever dare raise an army to invade it now even if they wanted to, for fear of the unnatural shadow magic that now pervades the place. Indeed the High Council of the Quala Freelands pay you tribute due their border touching Delerg. Since nobody even wants to visit Delerg anymore, you’ve established a smaller settlement in the Freelands for a few reasons. One being for potential recruits of which there are always a few that wish to join and another for those that have need of the shadows’ services, which are still in demand. + +Skog’s tribes of Rask may very well overrun the magiocracy of northern Quala one day, but they definitely will never set one green foot into Delerg, but then ever since your actions in Rask you didn’t have much concern about that happening anyway. + +The svelk have all been run out of the immediate area. You’ve either hunted them all down, or they moved further east towards the Felkan Kingdom, which has begun to spread to the west in an attempt to establish order in the still chaotic Arat province. + +Still despite Delerg’s fearsome appearance and reputation now, there are still those that would prefer to address you directly… + +“An emissary from the Nalin Empire on the Delerg border wants to see you. Says she has an offer that you’ll find most enticing.” Gannon tells you. +“Don’t they all? Very well give her passage to approach the temple.” You say wondering what this could be about. + +The Nalin Empire is still the only major power nearby that you have not had a major effect on. It continues to be run by Warden Matron Brenda whose hatred for the shadows is quite well known. As your influence has steadily grown beyond Delerg relations between that government and your organization have grown in intensity. The Nalin Empire has made it quite clear that any shadow found within its borders or anyone enlisting the aid of shadows will be executed. + +Still it doesn’t keep you from having a few agents still there though information is still hard to come by. At least any meaningful information. Brenda is a private person and her citizens are all fairly loyal. You’ve only ever gotten a few people from there actually trying to hire you and that was only in the early years. You’ve had no contracts from there for maybe ten years or more and never any meeting from a formal member of the government there. So to get an emissary from there now? This is an odd day indeed. + +When you find out this emissary is Tarna, your preoccupation dwindles a bit and focuses more on this meeting. Tarna is known to be Brenda’s second in command and the one who enforces most of the laws of the land. When she arrives she looks like all the reports you’ve heard. Long brunette hair, swarthy skin, warrior type with a haughty air about her, etc. She travels only with a couple servant types who look scared shitless to even be in Delerg let alone the actual temple of Dendrin. Tarna though looks genuinely unimpressed and you don’t even sense any fear in her. A state of combat readiness perhaps, but she’d be a damn fool not to feel that way…actually she’s a damn fool as far as you’re concerned seeing as she isn’t afraid. + +She should be. + +Normally Talia would be with you to meet her, but Talia’s currently meeting with Cyrus and Dravin in Quala to see if any of the potential shadow recruits are worthy. So you meet with Tarna privately. + +“So what brings such a high ranking member of the Nalin Empire to Delerg? Has the Nalin Empire finally decided to lift its ban on shadows traveling through its domain?” you ask. +“Hardly, and I’m fairly certain the illegality of it doesn’t stop you from doing so anyway. But I’m not here to make small talk with you fanatics, I’m here on a matter that I think you’ll want to take.” +“Do tell.” +“It’s about Warden Matron Brenda. She needs to be…removed.” + +A little surprising perhaps, but not really. You’ve heard that Tarna has shown signs of great ambition. + +“Just like that eh? You wish for the death of your master so easily?” +“That old bitch is NOT my master…” she begins to say, but you interrupt. +“Yes she is. We ALL have a master in some way. I am master for example of all the shadows, but then Dendrin is master over all of us. Sometimes it is even natural to want to overthrow our masters…” you say with a very real double meaning, though Tarna isn’t concerned with your own thoughts. +“Whatever, I didn’t come here for your loony shadow philosophies. I came here to hire your people. I can promise you more than payment in the form of money, I can also promise you legality. Make it so it isn’t an offense for shadows to enter Nalin or to hire them.” +“Well, I suppose that would make things easier, and that’s quite generous. However, I question why you would do such a thing. I mean what do you gain by letting us freely in your newly acquired country?” +“Safety and a powerful ally.” +“Heh, don’t think either of those terms have been ever used to describe the shadows, but I’m intrigued.” +“You shadows are the most powerful organization in this part of the world. More powerful than some so called governments. Far more power than you should have actually, if I had been Brenda I would’ve sent an army to crush you long ago before you got too entrenched. I never understood how she could hate you so much yet never act directly towards you. She claims her actions are tempered with caution, but I say they are riddled with cowardice.” +“Strong words…so how would putting you in charge benefit us? You just said you’d attempt to destroy us.” +“Because I’m pragmatic and I see such a war would bring ruin to Nalin and I wish only to bring glory to it. For far too long the Nalin Empire has remained stagnant, still clutching on to the skeletal remains of the old Empire that Brenda served. It needs to grow and I intend to make it do just that. The shadows can help in this task. I believe I should want to call upon your services many times when usual tactics aren’t enough in the future. And then there are those that may want to call upon you to stop me from achieving my goals. If we have an understanding, it can be profitable for you.” + +Sounds like Tarna really wants to be in charge. She gives you the price she’s willing to pay and it certainly is reasonable, doesn’t make you immediately agree to it though. + +“So, you desire the shadows to serve as your government’s personal assassins? We had an arrangement like that once before…I believe you know how that ended.” +“No! This would be different! The shadows would remain completely independent. You could still worship your silly god and not answer to any government. I do not even wish to conquer Delerg, you can have this swampland. I just want the rest! Quala, Arat, Rask, even the Felkan Kingdom! And as I said the shadows would still have free reign to ply their trade anywhere in the glorious Empire of Nalin.” + +She’s certainly confident and upfront about things, of course perhaps not too much since she is here attempting to hire you after all. You can certainly see an upside to such an arrangement. It also sounds like a lot of promises that might not be kept, however it isn’t necessarily because Tarna’s a liar. Her big plans may just fall flat due to arrogance. If so, it’ll probably be better than her being successful and you’ll have your foot already in the door to start gaining more of a presence in the Nalin Empire. There is always the fact you could just kill her if she attempts to betray you, the problem though is the Nalin Empire isn’t like the many mini-states of Quala, or even the orc tribal alliance in Rask, it’s a much larger unified entity. A war with them could get very costly though you’ve certainly faced bigger and you’ve got the resources. + +A bigger concern for you is getting distracted with a war. Your growing obsession over the past few years is with wanting to somehow harness Dendrin’s power independent of him. He’s vaguely hinted at several times in the past that he isn’t a real “god” just very powerful. What if you could do the same and somehow take his place? You’ve been trying to study all the old tomes you have in your possession over and over again in the hopes of finding something and you believe that you’ll probably have to mix several complex incantations and rituals in order to even attempt such a thing. Most likely you’ll have to study some non-shadow magic as well. You received some of those books back that Brenda snagged from the Derro lab when Flog gave those that were left behind at Evergloom to you, but you still haven’t found quite what you’re looking for in them. + +Still, you’re fairly certain the magiocracy of northern Quala probably has more books that you lost years ago when you had to flee General Ackerson’s attack. Flog’s already at war with them, it might be time to give him a little extra help again and forget about helping Tarna achieve her petty dreams entirely. +> Help Tarna +You’ve done some questionable things, but you’ve always honored a deal and never pursued a war of aggression. As much as you might want to loot the Quala magiocracy for their magic treasures in an effort to pursue your own plans, you do have an agreement of non-aggression with them. + +That just leaves Tarna’s offer which you could still decline, but you see an opportunity here. + +“Okay we might have an agreement, but do you have any old magical tomes laying around or treasures of a magical nature? Because that’s what we’re going to need to get this job done.” + +Tarna is understandably hesitant. + +“You want me to deliver potential weapons that be used against us in the future?” +“Well if you want to put it that way, yes. However, if you really want the throne as bad as I think you do, you’ll find it to be a fair offer. Besides, I’m risking giving you the throne and taking it on your word alone that you won’t ever attack us, though I’m fairly certain whatever we have now is more than enough to defeat you anyway. You really wouldn’t be giving us an advantage.” +“Shadow arrogance…(sigh) well I mean we have a few gathering dust in our treasury. Powerful mages aren’t exactly common in our realm, but I don’t want to risk stealing them away and then you tell me that you don’t want them for whatever reason.” +“Just bring what you have along with the payment you mentioned, but we’re not doing the deed until we get paid first.” +“What?! That means I have to have an excuse to make another trip up here, which might take me a few months from now!” +“Not my problem, but like I said you’re the one who wants the throne, surely if you’ve waited this long, you can probably wait a little longer. There’s always the option of sending someone else to deliver the payment though.” + +Tarna is getting more and more frustrated, but she can’t help but capitulate to your demands. + +“Fine you’ll see me in a few months from now because quite frankly I don’t trust anyone else enough to handle what I’ll turn over to you.” +“So be it. See you then.” + +Tarna leaves and its back to business as usual, when Talia returns she has a lot of reservations about the deal with Tarna for several reasons, but after a bit of debating she stops since you being the chosen of Dendrin means you presumably know what you’re doing. + +After a few months pass, Tarna comes back with the payment as promised. The spell books she’s hands over to you aren’t quite what you hoped, but a deal’s a deal and you send the best Blades to assassinate Brenda. Within the week the job is successful…though unfortunately not without a hitch since some of the shadows were killed during the job and it becomes well known who did the deed. + +Naturally Tarna attempts to save her own ass by accusing the shadows of aggressive behavior and proof that you all need to be invaded. This doesn’t entirely work in her favor though as it was long suspected that Tarna’s ambition was what caused this in the first place. The Nalin Empire ends up going through a minor power struggle and by the time the dust settles Tarna has been executed for treason and one of Brenda’s loyalists takes power. + +Unfortunately this loyalist faction now in power decides that Tarna’s suggestion that the shadows be invaded is the only good idea she ever came up with and steps are made to do just that in revenge for the death of their beloved leader. + +The initial phases of the Nalin Shadow conflict begin in the Quala Freelands where the shadows have an outpost. It not only serves as a way of hurting you, but also expanding their own territory. Tarna might not have gotten throne, but her dreams of a new expansionist Nalin Empire are coming true. + +Year 67 + +The shadows have been pushed back to the Delerg province entirely now. The Nalin Empire in the meantime has managed to completely annex the Quala Freelands into its territory and has even managed to “tame” a few of the eastern Quala warlords. + +On the shadow front, you’ve been doing all you can to keep the Nalinites out of Delerg to the point that it’s distracted you from your original goal of attempting to figure out a way to free the shadows from Dendrin’s whims and harness his power independently. + +Year 69 + +Nalin’s attempts to repeatedly conquer Delerg continue to fail, but the attrition on the shadows is starting to take its toll. You just can’t replace your numbers like the Nalinites can. Worse is the fact that they’ve been using kobold “commandos” which continue to dig underground tunnels in an effort to launch sneak attacks. The only reason why that tactic hasn’t been more successful is due to the soft swampland that collapses very easily or just starts filling tunnels with water. Still there have been a few times it has worked. + +The shadows have had to go completely on the defensive and all involvement in assassination for hire has been stopped. The shadows are also starting to lose their aura of “fear” they once had due to the Nalinite’s determination to destroy you as a result you no longer have what you could consider “allies” anymore. + +Year 73 + +It took nearly all your energy but you’ve just turned back an entire Nalin battalion along with their svelk mercenaries. Damned dark elves would have to come back like opportunistic scavengers. + +You look around at the blasted area. Your last spell probably destroyed several miles of swampland, trees, wildlife and most likely Sinkhole. The temple is still intact more or less, though you can’t say too much for the shadows themselves. Cyrus, Dravin, Glen, Gannon are all dead from this war. Even your beloved Talia died in this latest attack. + +You’ve won this day, but you question the next time. There are only a few shadows left and while you probably could continue to fight you wonder why bother, the Nalin Empire has practically won at this point even if you have made it very costly for them. Your only consolation is that you’ve probably depleted much of their coffers in this war. + +Dendrin himself has been suspiciously quiet during this time and hasn’t spoken to you at all. You almost wonder if he some how set up events due to his knowledge of what you were originally planning concerning him. Hardly matters you guess since that isn’t a possibility anymore. + +You bury Talia and order the rest of your remaining shadows to prepare for the next attack. + +It takes a while, but eventually another attack does come. Not quite as big as last time, but it doesn’t need to be. You’re so tired at this point that you don’t even fight as hard as you could. When the finale comes in the form of several swords and spears pointing at you, you welcome it just to put an end to it all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 65 + +Delerg has been completely transformed. No longer is it known as just that dismal swamp where the shadows make their home. It’s literally been transformed into the land of shadows. + +You called upon powers of Dendrin in one great ritual to forever cast a cloud of darkness over the area. Delerg is now a land of perpetual twilight. Most in Quala would not ever dare raise an army to invade it now even if they wanted to, for fear of the unnatural shadow magic that now pervades the place. Indeed the High Council of the Quala Freelands pay you tribute due their border touching Delerg. Since nobody even wants to visit Delerg anymore, you’ve established a smaller settlement in the Freelands for a few reasons. One being for potential recruits of which there are always a few that wish to join and another for those that have need of the shadows’ services, which are still in demand. + +Skog’s tribes of Rask may very well overrun the magiocracy of northern Quala one day, but they definitely will never set one green foot into Delerg, but then ever since your actions in Rask you didn’t have much concern about that happening anyway. + +The svelk have all been run out of the immediate area. You’ve either hunted them all down, or they moved further east towards the Felkan Kingdom, which has begun to spread to the west in an attempt to establish order in the still chaotic Arat province. + +Still despite Delerg’s fearsome appearance and reputation now, there are still those that would prefer to address you directly… + +“An emissary from the Nalin Empire on the Delerg border wants to see you. Says she has an offer that you’ll find most enticing.” Gannon tells you. +“Don’t they all? Very well give her passage to approach the temple.” You say wondering what this could be about. + +The Nalin Empire is still the only major power nearby that you have not had a major effect on. It continues to be run by Warden Matron Brenda whose hatred for the shadows is quite well known. As your influence has steadily grown beyond Delerg relations between that government and your organization have grown in intensity. The Nalin Empire has made it quite clear that any shadow found within its borders or anyone enlisting the aid of shadows will be executed. + +Still it doesn’t keep you from having a few agents still there though information is still hard to come by. At least any meaningful information. Brenda is a private person and her citizens are all fairly loyal. You’ve only ever gotten a few people from there actually trying to hire you and that was only in the early years. You’ve had no contracts from there for maybe ten years or more and never any meeting from a formal member of the government there. So to get an emissary from there now? This is an odd day indeed. + +When you find out this emissary is Tarna, your preoccupation dwindles a bit and focuses more on this meeting. Tarna is known to be Brenda’s second in command and the one who enforces most of the laws of the land. When she arrives she looks like all the reports you’ve heard. Long brunette hair, swarthy skin, warrior type with a haughty air about her, etc. She travels only with a couple servant types who look scared shitless to even be in Delerg let alone the actual temple of Dendrin. Tarna though looks genuinely unimpressed and you don’t even sense any fear in her. A state of combat readiness perhaps, but she’d be a damn fool not to feel that way…actually she’s a damn fool as far as you’re concerned seeing as she isn’t afraid. + +She should be. + +Normally Talia would be with you to meet her, but Talia’s currently meeting with Cyrus and Dravin in Quala to see if any of the potential shadow recruits are worthy. So you meet with Tarna privately. + +“So what brings such a high ranking member of the Nalin Empire to Delerg? Has the Nalin Empire finally decided to lift its ban on shadows traveling through its domain?” you ask. +“Hardly, and I’m fairly certain the illegality of it doesn’t stop you from doing so anyway. But I’m not here to make small talk with you fanatics, I’m here on a matter that I think you’ll want to take.” +“Do tell.” +“It’s about Warden Matron Brenda. She needs to be…removed.” + +A little surprising perhaps, but not really. You’ve heard that Tarna has shown signs of great ambition. + +“Just like that eh? You wish for the death of your master so easily?” +“That old bitch is NOT my master…” she begins to say, but you interrupt. +“Yes she is. We ALL have a master in some way. I am master for example of all the shadows, but then Dendrin is master over all of us. Sometimes it is even natural to want to overthrow our masters…” you say with a very real double meaning, though Tarna isn’t concerned with your own thoughts. +“Whatever, I didn’t come here for your loony shadow philosophies. I came here to hire your people. I can promise you more than payment in the form of money, I can also promise you legality. Make it so it isn’t an offense for shadows to enter Nalin or to hire them.” +“Well, I suppose that would make things easier, and that’s quite generous. However, I question why you would do such a thing. I mean what do you gain by letting us freely in your newly acquired country?” +“Safety and a powerful ally.” +“Heh, don’t think either of those terms have been ever used to describe the shadows, but I’m intrigued.” +“You shadows are the most powerful organization in this part of the world. More powerful than some so called governments. Far more power than you should have actually, if I had been Brenda I would’ve sent an army to crush you long ago before you got too entrenched. I never understood how she could hate you so much yet never act directly towards you. She claims her actions are tempered with caution, but I say they are riddled with cowardice.” +“Strong words…so how would putting you in charge benefit us? You just said you’d attempt to destroy us.” +“Because I’m pragmatic and I see such a war would bring ruin to Nalin and I wish only to bring glory to it. For far too long the Nalin Empire has remained stagnant, still clutching on to the skeletal remains of the old Empire that Brenda served. It needs to grow and I intend to make it do just that. The shadows can help in this task. I believe I should want to call upon your services many times when usual tactics aren’t enough in the future. And then there are those that may want to call upon you to stop me from achieving my goals. If we have an understanding, it can be profitable for you.” + +Sounds like Tarna really wants to be in charge. She gives you the price she’s willing to pay and it certainly is reasonable, doesn’t make you immediately agree to it though. + +“So, you desire the shadows to serve as your government’s personal assassins? We had an arrangement like that once before…I believe you know how that ended.” +“No! This would be different! The shadows would remain completely independent. You could still worship your silly god and not answer to any government. I do not even wish to conquer Delerg, you can have this swampland. I just want the rest! Quala, Arat, Rask, even the Felkan Kingdom! And as I said the shadows would still have free reign to ply their trade anywhere in the glorious Empire of Nalin.” + +She’s certainly confident and upfront about things, of course perhaps not too much since she is here attempting to hire you after all. You can certainly see an upside to such an arrangement. It also sounds like a lot of promises that might not be kept, however it isn’t necessarily because Tarna’s a liar. Her big plans may just fall flat due to arrogance. If so, it’ll probably be better than her being successful and you’ll have your foot already in the door to start gaining more of a presence in the Nalin Empire. There is always the fact you could just kill her if she attempts to betray you, the problem though is the Nalin Empire isn’t like the many mini-states of Quala, or even the orc tribal alliance in Rask, it’s a much larger unified entity. A war with them could get very costly though you’ve certainly faced bigger and you’ve got the resources. + +A bigger concern for you is getting distracted with a war. Your growing obsession over the past few years is with wanting to somehow harness Dendrin’s power independent of him. He’s vaguely hinted at several times in the past that he isn’t a real “god” just very powerful. What if you could do the same and somehow take his place? You’ve been trying to study all the old tomes you have in your possession over and over again in the hopes of finding something and you believe that you’ll probably have to mix several complex incantations and rituals in order to even attempt such a thing. Most likely you’ll have to study some non-shadow magic as well. You received some of those books back that Brenda snagged from the Derro lab when Flog gave those that were left behind at Evergloom to you, but you still haven’t found quite what you’re looking for in them. + +Still, you’re fairly certain the magiocracy of northern Quala probably has more books that you lost years ago when you had to flee General Ackerson’s attack. Flog’s already at war with them, it might be time to give him a little extra help again and forget about helping Tarna achieve her petty dreams entirely. +> Decline her request +You’ve got other important things to concern yourself with; you don’t have time to risk backing a potential wild card. When you decline to help her, she’s surprised. + +“What?! Are you serious? Since when do the shadows decline a contract?” +“Why does everyone assume we take everything? We only accept deals that would be in our favor and quite frankly dealing with you seems like it would be a losing game at best, so if that’s all our business here…” + +“But you would be destroying an enemy!” +“An enemy who as you just said is too cowardly to make a move against us. I think the status quo is working just fine right now. Now I suggest you leave before you make me angry.” + +Tarna stares at you for a moment and looks exasperated, but realizes there will be no convincing you. + +“Fine! But remember this shadow. Brenda isn’t going to be in charge forever and I will be taking power one day. You may find that declining to help me now was not a good idea. I will remember this shadow.” She says and walks out of the room. + +You sit there for a moment thinking, and then you get up to follow her. Just as she is storming out the front temple doors with her servants you hit her in the back with a small bolt of shadowfire, not enough to kill her, because you’re not done with her yet. + +Her servants attempt to run, but you tell the nearby shadows to dispose of them which they do so with ease and then drag Tarna’s body towards you. She tries to pull her sword out, but her hand is stepped on by a shadow and then her sword taken away completely. + +Despite all this, she remains defiant. + +“Fool! You kill me and you’ll have the entire might of Nalin on your head! You really think I won’t be missed?” +“Not really. I know for a fact, you were on a mission to meet with the High Council of the Freelands before you came on this little detour. I mean come on; you came here to hire us to assassinate your master. You weren’t going to report your sidetrip here. Even if you have co-conspirators back home, I doubt if any of them have the balls you do and they’ll most likely keep quiet about your disappearance. Oh they may very well try to blame the shadows for your death, but I believe at worst, Brenda will assume you were killed by bandits in the wilderness of the Freelands.” +“You assume much, shadow.” +“Perhaps, but just to be safe, I’ll keep you around for maybe a few months. Just in case a Nalin army does come sniffing around, then I can drag your ragged ass out in chains where you can fully admit you were plotting treachery to them first hand and prove that not only did we not act against the Nalin Empire, but in fact helped it…heh heh. Who knows? Maybe it’ll even be a brand new era of peace between our two people.” + +Tarna is starting to break at this point, she’s starting to realize that she has vastly overstepped her bounds. + +“You…you really think they’ll believe that? You really think I would admit it?” +“Oh yes, because IF they do arrive, you’ll tell them everything and practically be begging them to execute you if only to end the nightmares you’ll soon experience.” you say and then move your face closer to hers. “I can sense your fear…funny how you should feel it only now when its too late. Take her away.” + +Nobody will come for her, you’re sure of it. Now with that out of the way you can get back to your own plans. + +Aggressively pursuing conflict with the magiocracy is probably going to be a violation of your agreement with them, but with Skog’s help you don’t see any need to worry. As for Skog, he’s very much like his father in that he knows a good deal when it presents itself. + +The shadows will follow as long as you tell them that Dendrin commands it. You’ll get no dissent, that hasn’t been a problem in quite some time. + +You begin to make the preparations. + +Year 66 + +“We’ve completely looted the magiocracy’s treasury of their most prized magic items and tomes. Some of them are items we lost long ago, but most of it is stuff we’ve never seen before. Possibly old Empire.” Glen tells you as he hands you a few books. +“Makes sense. Most of those mages running that place were ex-Empire after all. Well good, our mission was a success then. I trust the magiocracy is probably on its death knell?” +“It is Shadow Master. While it hasn’t collapsed completely yet, I believe Skog’s rabble is doing its best to make sure it stomps out.” +“Good. Just bring in the rest of the stuff and we’ll sort through it. That’ll be all for now.” + +Glen nods and takes his leave. As you leaf through the pages of one of the books, Talia addresses you. + +“When are we going to hold the ceremony for all those shadows lost in the service of Dendrin?” +“Huh? Oh, I dunno, soon I suppose. You can take care of those details.” You say without looking up. +“…I will…but…” +“What?” you say starting to get annoyed. +“Well you could show a little more sympathy. I mean these brave shadows died. Our brothers and sisters died. They should at least be given the honor and respect they deserve.” +“Talia, they died serving Dendrin. That’s what they’re SUPPOSED to do. By all means have the ceremony honoring the dead, but I have other living concerns that require immediate attention.” +“And that’s the other thing I’ve been wanting to speak to you about. I’ve noticed over the years, you have become obsessed with magic of all kinds. You pour over the old shadow tomes even more than I do. In fact I practically have to snatch them out of your hands if I need to look up something at times. You’ve also become much colder and distant. It’s almost like you don’t even care about any of us anymore and see us all as minions and henchmen. You talk about spreading fear to our enemies and how it is Dendrin’s will, but is it absolutely necessary to treat your fellow shadows in the same manner?” +“Talia, I never treat you with anything other than respect and honor. You know that.” +“For now, but I’m not talking about just me. I’m talking about everyone else. Look I know you’re the chosen of Dendrin and you know his plan better than anyone, but have you become so far removed that you don’t even feel a shred of empathy anymore? I mean remember Master Ebon? He cared for all of us…” +“He’s also dead, so I don’t see how following his example is going to get us anywhere the shadows need to be which is what I’m trying to accomplish. You say that I’m far removed from the rest, when in actuality I’ve been trying to keep my knowledge of my surroundings to damn near omnipotent level. I’ve kept the shadows thriving by implementing changes. Changes that Dendrin obviously agrees with, but what you don’t realize, what none of you realize is that I’m trying to accomplish something that will establish shadow survival long after I’ve shuffled off this mortal realm.” +“And what is that exactly? You mind at least telling me?” +“I’m talking about transcending.” + +Talia pauses and thinks she knows what you’re talking about. + +“Are…are you talking about performing the ritual of ascension?” + +She’s only partially right. You’ve read through the ritual and while you don’t exactly understand all of it, you believe that you should only implement a large part of it. You do not believe it is the direction the shadows need to go and you are still seeking out a way to alter it to suit what you want to accomplish. + +“I cannot give you an answer yet as I’m still working on the specifics, but rest assured you will be the first to know when I figure everything out. Just trust me as you would trust in Dendrin. Have I ever lead the shadows wrong? And if I was doing something wrong, would Dendrin not smite me?” + +Once again invoking Dendrin’s lack of action towards you manages to convince Talia that whatever you’re planning it must be for the greater good of the shadows. + +And you are, just not for Dendrin’s sake. +> Years pass... +Year 75 + +“Do you really believe you can separate yourself from me? You think that you can actually steal my power without consequence?” Dendrin asks. +“Yes, I have figured out a way and you will do nothing about it. You know why? Because you are a being of much power sure, but you and I know that you are no god and. More importantly we would not even be stealing any power from you, because I also know you are not even native to the shadow realm; you are merely using it as a source to act as a god. In my years of study, I have come to learn what you truly are and that is a Yequk, a whimsical being of the planes that loves to leech of the energy of a plane. Your kind also has a tendency to masquerade as gods or demons for amusement purposes and will bestow magic powers to those who believe in you or in my case, for the hell of it.” You reply. + +There is silence for a while, but eventually Dendrin speaks. + +“Well done Eternal, I always thought I would manage to make you a believer though. I always thought that eventually you would come around, and for a while it looked it like you might, but ultimately you resisted. I suppose it’s my own fault for not killing you immediately, but your potential for amusement value was too great to resist. However even with this knowledge do you really believe the shadows will survive without me granting them powers?” +“The shadows could directly draw upon the source of the shadow realm under the right circumstances. Circumstances that I have finally unlocked, all I need to do is perform the ritual.” +“Well, it looks like you’ve got it all figured out Eternal. I just hope there aren’t any unforeseen consequences to your plan…” +“Is that supposed to be a threat?” +“Perhaps, but not necessarily one from me because let’s face it what would be the point? No, I believe your problem is of more mortal matters.” +“The shadows will follow me in performing the ritual.” +“Oh of that I have no doubt, you know why? Because you’ll tell them what you’ve always told them, that it’s my will that must be carried out! But tell me this Eternal, what is the point of this endeavor if I am most likely going to be worshipped anyway? Do you really believe that you can just expose the truth so easily? If you could, you would’ve done so long ago.” +“No! Now is different, because I can actually do something about it. I can show the shadows that they don’t need you to sustain their powers. That’s the whole point of this.” +“No, the whole point of this is I’m the only enemy that you’ve never been fully able to beat. You’ve denied me, you’ve ignored me, you’ve blatantly insulted me and you’ve even changed the religion to something that you prefer better…though I always agreed with what you did in that aspect. This whole thing is nothing more than an attempt to defeat me before you die of old age and it’s a pointless endeavor based on your pride if you ask me.” +“Well nobody asked you.” you say starting to get angry. +“I genuinely don’t understand what your problem is, because we’ve ALL benefited from this arrangement. You’ve even called on me for help in the past.” +“Moments of weakness, I assure you.” +“Yes, I’m sure seeing as you’ve been hung up on the whole instilling fear into everyone and no room for the weak type of thing for the past couple of decades. Your problem started when you started believing in your own rhetoric. YOU want to be the one that the shadows worship. YOU want to be the god of fear and shadows. You don’t want to share any of the credit with me.” +“And why should I? I’m the one whose really been guiding them all these years! You’ve done absolutely nothing! They’d all be fucking dead if you had your way! You even admitted as much. You’ve claimed on several occasions that you’ve been bored of the shadows for years and you’ve only taken a more direct interest in them recently because I came along.” +“While all of that may be true, what you’re forgetting is I’ve been guiding them a lot longer than you have. I gave them purpose for centuries! And what did you think other shadow masters were doing all those years? Twiddling their thumbs? No they were also guiding the shadows! You think you’re not the only shadow master to have these sorts of feelings? You already know by Master Ebon’s own dying admission that he never spoke to me and lied the whole time. You really think other shadow masters didn’t have their own doubts of whether I was a god, or even existed? You’re just the first one to figure out the entire truth and let the bitterness get to you. So by all means perform your little magic ritual and tap directly into the power of this shadow realm. I’m sure it’ll be a success, but you will never be free of the religion tied to it. My name will always be attached to the shadows. Perhaps now more than ever, for a day may have soon come that I would’ve abandoned the shadows entirely and moved on to other things. On that day, they would’ve lost all their powers and undoubtedly the organization would’ve soon collapsed afterwards. Now? You’re going to give them access to the power directly whether I’m here or not. Who do you think is going to still be worshipped? That’s right.” + +“So I’ll risk exposing the truth.” You say in an attempt to continue to be defiant. +“Before or after the ritual? If its before, you’re not even going to get a chance to complete it because you’ll be strung up as a heretic or you’ll be forced to kill them all. I doubt even your own mate would side with you even if she and possibly a few others might suspect you’re right. Faith is a powerful thing and you know this. If it’s after the ritual, you might have better success, but I doubt it. At best you’ll end up getting utter chaos because you’ll get rogue shadows that will see no reason to be part of the group anymore. Just think about those in the past that dared to oppose the status quo like Theo, Yvette or even Shade. Don’t you think there will be MORE dissident types when they know there is absolutely no chance of them losing their powers now? The shadows will eventually splinter apart through selfishness. Of course perhaps you don’t care, but I think you do care about the shadows more than you let on sometimes. If you didn’t, you wouldn’t be making such a grand effort of trying to free them from me.” + +You hate it when Dendrin makes good points and this time he’s made several. + +“I’m…not going to win this one am I?” you say. +“My advice? You’d be better off letting this one go. You’re a mortal and have limitations. Enjoy what little time you have left. But it’s your choice, and I’ve always believed that you work better without guidance, so do what you will.” + +You wake up from your mental ordeal and sit up placing your head within your hands trying to come to grips with your own short sightedness. It’s almost enough to make you cry. + +“What’s wrong? You seem upset. Bad dream?” Talia asks when she sees you after rousing from her own sleep. +“No…I…no. I’m fine. Just still tired I guess.” + +You lay back down and Talia soon goes back to sleep. You’re left wondering what you’re going to do, but it all seems so pointless now no matter what you decide. + +If you go ahead with the ritual anyway and expose the truth, you’re going to face all the potential problems Dendrin mentioned. Of course you could just keep up the lie about Dendrin, but that seems to be defeating your original purpose. +> Perform the ritual and tell the truth +The whole point of this is to free the shadows from the lie. They’ll be pissed at first and there will probably be violence, but you see this will be for the best in the long run. + +You get up and gather the books you’ve been studying and go over one more time this ritual you have planned. You don’t even know if it’ll even work, but you’re fairly certain you haven’t gotten any of the magic words or signs wrong. + +You send a general announcement out that after all assassination missions have been completed, no more are to be given and that all shadows are to remain at the temple until the Ritual of Ascension is to be completed. (Which is what you’ve called it, because you’re practically performing the same thing just with some of your own alterations) + +Many of the shadows immediately cheer at the news, others aren’t entirely sure what you’re talking about which isn’t surprising since the Ascension Ritual isn’t common knowledge to the newer shadows. Still when you explain it, they all seem excited about the plan. + +When the time comes you stand outside the temple in front of the several hundred shadows with their heads down in prayer. From the ones nearly as old as you to the ones that are barely out of the crib, all shadows are lending their own energy to your own in the effort of pulling off this historical moment. + +Talia stands by your side as always. You look at her and wonder if you would’ve even come this far if you hadn’t fallen in love with her. Lately you’ve been a bit distant with her, but you promise that’ll change when this is all over. + +“We are shadows! We have endured for centuries no matter what the struggles. From before the Empire and through it, and after it’s inevitable demise. We will continue to thrive in the years to come. We feel we are ready for this power. I feel we are ready. This is the destiny of the shadows!” you say and then begin the incantations. + +Most of your people recite what you say in unison while others stand at the far ends and chant supporting verses, which are essential to the ritual. Talia is also chanting yet another portion of it while making gestures with her hands to begin the first part of opening up the portal to Dendrin’s realm. This part is almost like the initiation ritual, but of course much more complex and involved. + +A large portal opens up above all of you and even with the sky already in perpetual darkness; it seems to get even darker. There is no wind or lightning or anything that most would connect with such a grand attempt altering reality. Instead, it just gets very dark and you start to feel a tingling numbness. + +You begin to see some of the shadows fall to the ground. You don’t know if they’ve died or just fainted. None of them are deterred though; they all continue to perform their parts for as long as they are able. This is like one of your personal encounters with Dendrin when you’ve slept, but instead everyone is experiencing it in the real world. You begin to feel all five of your senses becoming non-existent and the numbness is close to complete at this point. + +Eventually you can’t even see most of the shadows in front of you and you can hardly hear them anymore. Still you know you’re on the right path, the blackness is engulfing everything. You briefly look over at Talia who is barely visible now. She continues to chant like a true believer that she’s always been. + +A few minutes pass and you soon can’t hear anything except your own voice now and even that is very faint, though you can’t be sure it’s due to losing your hearing or your voice. Probably both. You look over one more time at Talia who you see start to teeter from exhaustion. You see her look over at you as well before you lose sight of her completely to the blackness. + +You continue to silently chant while your mind fights the fatigue you’re experiencing. It feels like you’ve been doing this forever, but you have to finish. You wonder what’s happening to everyone else. You wonder if they’re still alive. You wonder if Talia is still alive. + +“Decided to go through with it after all eh? I thought you might.” you hear inside your head. It’s Dendrin, you can’t talk to him though, you need to focus since you’re going into the part of the ritual that you’ve created yourself with other non-shadow incantations. + +“Eternal, are you sure this is even going to work? Perhaps you should stop before you continue any further.” + +And now you know that you’ve made the right decision. He’s trying to talk you out it. + +“Eternal, are you sure this is what you want?” + +Of course it is. This is what will be for the best for the shadows. You’ve been their true master for over decades now. They would’ve ultimately been destroyed without you. When you’re gone the shadows will fall prey to something else, whether it be from external forces or internal ones. Dendrin doesn’t give a shit about them despite his fondness for you. By doing this, they’ll always be strong and independent of him whether they know it or not. + +You begin the finishing lines of the ritual. + +“Very well, I can see you have made your decision.” + +With those last words you succumb to absolute numbness and pass out. + +Hours later you awaken to Talia’s face staring at you along with several other shadows. + +“Thank Dendrin, he’s still alive.” You hear Gannon say. +“My love are you all right?” Talia asks. +Yes. Yes I’m fine, just a little disorientated. How is everything else? Did it work?” +“Well I suppose so. I mean we all feel a little different now. Some have expressed an increase in magical abilities. What exactly was the ritual supposed to do?” Talia asks. +“It was to make us more powerful and our shadow magic stronger.” You say. +“You mean like make our link stronger to Dendrin?” +“More like the opposite.” +“What do you mean?” + +As you attempt to explain what you did and why you did it the reactions are varied but most are not positive. Some of them are in such a state of shock they don’t know what to think. Others are angry to the point of saying you have damned them all in the eyes of Dendrin. Others are angrier that you were lying to them this whole time. Faith is a powerful thing and when you directly challenge it like you’ve just done, it tends to result in bad things. + +Talia herself can’t even look at you, she leaves your side as an angry mob of shadows begins to close in on you. You tell them all to back off before you’re forced to destroy them, then you call them a bunch of ingrates that should be thankful for what you’ve done. This goes over about as well as can be expected. + +You end up vaporizing several shadows to ash and wounding many severely before you’re eventually mobbed and restrained. They don’t even give you the dignity of stabbing you to death, one of the shadows smashes your head with a rock and you crumple to the ground feeling the countless kicks and punches to your body. Eventually you’re beaten to a bloody pulp, but the shadows continue to torment your body in death by ripping it apart and throwing it to the Sul Monkeys. + +The order of the shadows doesn’t survive too much longer after your gruesome death. Most shadows are unable to come to grips with reality and commit suicide. The more cynical ones simply walk away and pursue new lives as independent “shadow wizards.” + +Some of the more fanatical ones descend into outright insanity and continue to worship Dendrin and commit increasingly bizarre and bloody acts in order to “regain his favor”. Talia ends up leading a group like this for a while before she finally loses it completely and kills herself. + +As for Dendrin he sticks around to watch the final death throes of the religion he once posed as a god for, and when it’s finally over he moves on to new and more entertaining things.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 75 + +“Do you really believe you can separate yourself from me? You think that you can actually steal my power without consequence?” Dendrin asks. +“Yes, I have figured out a way and you will do nothing about it. You know why? Because you are a being of much power sure, but you and I know that you are no god and. More importantly we would not even be stealing any power from you, because I also know you are not even native to the shadow realm; you are merely using it as a source to act as a god. In my years of study, I have come to learn what you truly are and that is a Yequk, a whimsical being of the planes that loves to leech of the energy of a plane. Your kind also has a tendency to masquerade as gods or demons for amusement purposes and will bestow magic powers to those who believe in you or in my case, for the hell of it.” You reply. + +There is silence for a while, but eventually Dendrin speaks. + +“Well done Eternal, I always thought I would manage to make you a believer though. I always thought that eventually you would come around, and for a while it looked it like you might, but ultimately you resisted. I suppose it’s my own fault for not killing you immediately, but your potential for amusement value was too great to resist. However even with this knowledge do you really believe the shadows will survive without me granting them powers?” +“The shadows could directly draw upon the source of the shadow realm under the right circumstances. Circumstances that I have finally unlocked, all I need to do is perform the ritual.” +“Well, it looks like you’ve got it all figured out Eternal. I just hope there aren’t any unforeseen consequences to your plan…” +“Is that supposed to be a threat?” +“Perhaps, but not necessarily one from me because let’s face it what would be the point? No, I believe your problem is of more mortal matters.” +“The shadows will follow me in performing the ritual.” +“Oh of that I have no doubt, you know why? Because you’ll tell them what you’ve always told them, that it’s my will that must be carried out! But tell me this Eternal, what is the point of this endeavor if I am most likely going to be worshipped anyway? Do you really believe that you can just expose the truth so easily? If you could, you would’ve done so long ago.” +“No! Now is different, because I can actually do something about it. I can show the shadows that they don’t need you to sustain their powers. That’s the whole point of this.” +“No, the whole point of this is I’m the only enemy that you’ve never been fully able to beat. You’ve denied me, you’ve ignored me, you’ve blatantly insulted me and you’ve even changed the religion to something that you prefer better…though I always agreed with what you did in that aspect. This whole thing is nothing more than an attempt to defeat me before you die of old age and it’s a pointless endeavor based on your pride if you ask me.” +“Well nobody asked you.” you say starting to get angry. +“I genuinely don’t understand what your problem is, because we’ve ALL benefited from this arrangement. You’ve even called on me for help in the past.” +“Moments of weakness, I assure you.” +“Yes, I’m sure seeing as you’ve been hung up on the whole instilling fear into everyone and no room for the weak type of thing for the past couple of decades. Your problem started when you started believing in your own rhetoric. YOU want to be the one that the shadows worship. YOU want to be the god of fear and shadows. You don’t want to share any of the credit with me.” +“And why should I? I’m the one whose really been guiding them all these years! You’ve done absolutely nothing! They’d all be fucking dead if you had your way! You even admitted as much. You’ve claimed on several occasions that you’ve been bored of the shadows for years and you’ve only taken a more direct interest in them recently because I came along.” +“While all of that may be true, what you’re forgetting is I’ve been guiding them a lot longer than you have. I gave them purpose for centuries! And what did you think other shadow masters were doing all those years? Twiddling their thumbs? No they were also guiding the shadows! You think you’re not the only shadow master to have these sorts of feelings? You already know by Master Ebon’s own dying admission that he never spoke to me and lied the whole time. You really think other shadow masters didn’t have their own doubts of whether I was a god, or even existed? You’re just the first one to figure out the entire truth and let the bitterness get to you. So by all means perform your little magic ritual and tap directly into the power of this shadow realm. I’m sure it’ll be a success, but you will never be free of the religion tied to it. My name will always be attached to the shadows. Perhaps now more than ever, for a day may have soon come that I would’ve abandoned the shadows entirely and moved on to other things. On that day, they would’ve lost all their powers and undoubtedly the organization would’ve soon collapsed afterwards. Now? You’re going to give them access to the power directly whether I’m here or not. Who do you think is going to still be worshipped? That’s right.” + +“So I’ll risk exposing the truth.” You say in an attempt to continue to be defiant. +“Before or after the ritual? If its before, you’re not even going to get a chance to complete it because you’ll be strung up as a heretic or you’ll be forced to kill them all. I doubt even your own mate would side with you even if she and possibly a few others might suspect you’re right. Faith is a powerful thing and you know this. If it’s after the ritual, you might have better success, but I doubt it. At best you’ll end up getting utter chaos because you’ll get rogue shadows that will see no reason to be part of the group anymore. Just think about those in the past that dared to oppose the status quo like Theo, Yvette or even Shade. Don’t you think there will be MORE dissident types when they know there is absolutely no chance of them losing their powers now? The shadows will eventually splinter apart through selfishness. Of course perhaps you don’t care, but I think you do care about the shadows more than you let on sometimes. If you didn’t, you wouldn’t be making such a grand effort of trying to free them from me.” + +You hate it when Dendrin makes good points and this time he’s made several. + +“I’m…not going to win this one am I?” you say. +“My advice? You’d be better off letting this one go. You’re a mortal and have limitations. Enjoy what little time you have left. But it’s your choice, and I’ve always believed that you work better without guidance, so do what you will.” + +You wake up from your mental ordeal and sit up placing your head within your hands trying to come to grips with your own short sightedness. It’s almost enough to make you cry. + +“What’s wrong? You seem upset. Bad dream?” Talia asks when she sees you after rousing from her own sleep. +“No…I…no. I’m fine. Just still tired I guess.” + +You lay back down and Talia soon goes back to sleep. You’re left wondering what you’re going to do, but it all seems so pointless now no matter what you decide. + +If you go ahead with the ritual anyway and expose the truth, you’re going to face all the potential problems Dendrin mentioned. Of course you could just keep up the lie about Dendrin, but that seems to be defeating your original purpose. +> Perform the ritual and keep up the lie +It’s not the most ideal plan that you had, but at least if you perform the ritual, the shadows won’t be left in the lurch whenever Dendrin decides to cut out on them. Sure they’ll still be paying tribute to an uncaring and possibly empty god, but then again haven’t they always? + +You get up and gather the books you’ve been studying and go over one more time this ritual you have planned. You don’t even know if it’ll even work, but you’re fairly certain you haven’t gotten any of the magic words or signs wrong. + +It suddenly occurs to you that maybe you should also create a new initiation ritual too. It won’t be necessary for new recruits to be brainwashed into meeting with Dendrin anymore, in fact it would probably be a hindrance. + +And that’s when you suddenly realize a bunch of things you can’t believe you overlooked! + +You’re not going to “beat” Dendrin in your lifetime. He probably won’t even be beaten decades after your death, but you still have time to set the plans to do it now. First things first though. + +You send a general announcement out that after all assassination missions have been completed, no more are to be given and that all shadows are to remain at the temple until the Ritual of Ascension is to be completed. (Which is what you’ve called it, because you’re practically performing the same thing just with some of your own alterations) + +Many of the shadows immediately cheer at the news, others aren’t entirely sure what you’re talking about which isn’t surprising since the Ascension Ritual isn’t common knowledge to the newer shadows. Still when you explain it, they all seem excited about the plan. + +When the time comes you stand outside the temple in front of the several hundred shadows with their heads down in prayer. From the ones nearly as old as you to the ones that are barely out of the crib, all shadows are lending their own energy to your own in the effort of pulling off this historical moment. + +Talia stands by your side as always. You look at her and wonder if you would’ve even come this far if you hadn’t fallen in love with her. Lately you’ve been a bit distant with her, but you promise that’ll change when this is all over. + +“Dendrin, we are your shadows! We have served your will for centuries no matter what the struggles. From before the Empire and through it, and after it’s inevitable demise. We will always be your faithful servants in the years to come. We feel we are ready for this power. I feel we are ready. This is the destiny of the shadows!” you say and then begin the incantations. + +Most of your people recite what you say in unison while others stand at the far ends and chant supporting verses, which are essential to the ritual. Talia is also chanting yet another portion of it while making gestures with her hands to begin the first part of opening up the portal to Dendrin’s realm. This part is almost like the initiation ritual, but of course much more complex and involved. + +A large portal opens up above all of you and even with the sky already in perpetual darkness; it seems to get even darker. There is no wind or lightning or anything that most would connect with such a grand attempt altering reality. Instead, it just gets very dark and you start to feel a tingling numbness. + +You begin to see some of the shadows fall to the ground. You don’t know if they’ve died or just fainted. None of them are deterred though; they all continue to perform their parts for as long as they are able. This is like one of your personal encounters with Dendrin when you’ve slept, but instead everyone is experiencing it in the real world. You begin to feel all five of your senses becoming non-existent and the numbness is close to complete at this point. + +Eventually you can’t even see most of the shadows in front of you and you can hardly hear them anymore. Still you know you’re on the right path, the blackness is engulfing everything. You briefly look over at Talia who is barely visible now. She continues to chant like a true believer that she’s always been. + +A few minutes pass and you soon can’t hear anything except your own voice now and even that is very faint, though you can’t be sure it’s due to losing your hearing or your voice. Probably both. You look over one more time at Talia who you see start to teeter from exhaustion. You see her look over at you as well before you lose sight of her completely to the blackness. + +You continue to silently chant while your mind fights the fatigue you’re experiencing. It feels like you’ve been doing this forever, but you have to finish. You wonder what’s happening to everyone else. You wonder if they’re still alive. You wonder if Talia is still alive. + +“Decided to go through with it after all eh? I thought you might.” you hear inside your head. It’s Dendrin, you can’t talk to him though, you need to focus since you’re going into the part of the ritual that you’ve created yourself with other non-shadow incantations. + +“Eternal, are you sure this is even going to work? Perhaps you should stop before you continue any further.” + +And now you know that you’ve made the right decision. He’s trying to talk you out it. + +“Eternal, are you sure this is what you want?” + +Of course it is. This is what will be for the best for the shadows. You’ve been their true master for over decades now. They would’ve ultimately been destroyed without you. When you’re gone the shadows will fall prey to something else, whether it be from external forces or internal ones. Dendrin doesn’t give a shit about them despite his fondness for you. By doing this, they’ll always be strong and independent of him whether they know it or not. + +You begin the finishing lines of the ritual. + +“Very well, I can see you have made your decision.” + +With those last words you succumb to absolute numbness and pass out. + +Hours later you awaken to Talia’s face staring at you along with several other shadows. + +“Thank Dendrin, he’s still alive.” You hear Gannon say. +“My love are you all right?” Talia asks. +“Yes. Yes I’m fine, just a little disorientated. How is everything else? Did it work?” +“Well I suppose so. I mean we all feel a little different now. Some have expressed an increase in magical abilities. What exactly was the ritual supposed to do?” Talia asks. +“I believe that’s what it was supposed to do, increase our abilities. The ritual was vague. Maybe it just brought us a little closer to Dendrin’s power source…allow us to tap directly into his divine energy as it were.” You say. +“You mean like make our link stronger with him?” +“Yes, I suppose so.” You say in a non-committal way. + +As you are helped up and give a squeezing hug to Talia, you realize you need to get several things in order now. You aren’t exactly young anymore and you have much to accomplish. + +After things have calmed down a bit and it’s back to business as usual, you announce that you will be choosing a successor. This comes somewhat of a surprise, but not entirely as you are of advanced years. You and Talia go through a list of the potential candidates and eventually you settle on a young twenty year old girl by the name of Celia. She shows much promise in her combat and magic abilities and Glen had been considering her as a Blade before you picked her. + +Mentoring her begins immediately, but that isn’t your only plan. The shadows are still going to believe in Dendrin for quite some time, you don’t have years left in you to make such a large change in that system, but you have set up the foundation as best you can. + +So you begin to write a journal, a journal containing the truth. You intend on passing this on to Celia when you die. Hopefully you can mold her a bit in such a way that when she does read this, she’ll be strong enough to accept the truth about the shadows, about Dendrin, about all of it. + +It’s all a bit of a gamble, but then most of your actions have been your entire life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’ve got other important things to concern yourself with; you don’t have time to risk backing a potential wild card. When you decline to help her, she’s surprised. + +“What?! Are you serious? Since when do the shadows decline a contract?” +“Why does everyone assume we take everything? We only accept deals that would be in our favor and quite frankly dealing with you seems like it would be a losing game at best, so if that’s all our business here…” + +“But you would be destroying an enemy!” +“An enemy who as you just said is too cowardly to make a move against us. I think the status quo is working just fine right now. Now I suggest you leave before you make me angry.” + +Tarna stares at you for a moment and looks exasperated, but realizes there will be no convincing you. + +“Fine! But remember this shadow. Brenda isn’t going to be in charge forever and I will be taking power one day. You may find that declining to help me now was not a good idea. I will remember this shadow.” She says and walks out of the room. + +You sit there for a moment thinking, and then you get up to follow her. Just as she is storming out the front temple doors with her servants you hit her in the back with a small bolt of shadowfire, not enough to kill her, because you’re not done with her yet. + +Her servants attempt to run, but you tell the nearby shadows to dispose of them which they do so with ease and then drag Tarna’s body towards you. She tries to pull her sword out, but her hand is stepped on by a shadow and then her sword taken away completely. + +Despite all this, she remains defiant. + +“Fool! You kill me and you’ll have the entire might of Nalin on your head! You really think I won’t be missed?” +“Not really. I know for a fact, you were on a mission to meet with the High Council of the Freelands before you came on this little detour. I mean come on; you came here to hire us to assassinate your master. You weren’t going to report your sidetrip here. Even if you have co-conspirators back home, I doubt if any of them have the balls you do and they’ll most likely keep quiet about your disappearance. Oh they may very well try to blame the shadows for your death, but I believe at worst, Brenda will assume you were killed by bandits in the wilderness of the Freelands.” +“You assume much, shadow.” +“Perhaps, but just to be safe, I’ll keep you around for maybe a few months. Just in case a Nalin army does come sniffing around, then I can drag your ragged ass out in chains where you can fully admit you were plotting treachery to them first hand and prove that not only did we not act against the Nalin Empire, but in fact helped it…heh heh. Who knows? Maybe it’ll even be a brand new era of peace between our two people.” + +Tarna is starting to break at this point, she’s starting to realize that she has vastly overstepped her bounds. + +“You…you really think they’ll believe that? You really think I would admit it?” +“Oh yes, because IF they do arrive, you’ll tell them everything and practically be begging them to execute you if only to end the nightmares you’ll soon experience.” you say and then move your face closer to hers. “I can sense your fear…funny how you should feel it only now when its too late. Take her away.” + +Nobody will come for her, you’re sure of it. Now with that out of the way you can get back to your own plans. + +Aggressively pursuing conflict with the magiocracy is probably going to be a violation of your agreement with them, but with Skog’s help you don’t see any need to worry. As for Skog, he’s very much like his father in that he knows a good deal when it presents itself. + +The shadows will follow as long as you tell them that Dendrin commands it. You’ll get no dissent, that hasn’t been a problem in quite some time. + +You begin to make the preparations. + +Year 66 + +“We’ve completely looted the magiocracy’s treasury of their most prized magic items and tomes. Some of them are items we lost long ago, but most of it is stuff we’ve never seen before. Possibly old Empire.” Glen tells you as he hands you a few books. +“Makes sense. Most of those mages running that place were ex-Empire after all. Well good, our mission was a success then. I trust the magiocracy is probably on its death knell?” +“It is Shadow Master. While it hasn’t collapsed completely yet, I believe Skog’s rabble is doing its best to make sure it stomps out.” +“Good. Just bring in the rest of the stuff and we’ll sort through it. That’ll be all for now.” + +Glen nods and takes his leave. As you leaf through the pages of one of the books, Talia addresses you. + +“When are we going to hold the ceremony for all those shadows lost in the service of Dendrin?” +“Huh? Oh, I dunno, soon I suppose. You can take care of those details.” You say without looking up. +“…I will…but…” +“What?” you say starting to get annoyed. +“Well you could show a little more sympathy. I mean these brave shadows died. Our brothers and sisters died. They should at least be given the honor and respect they deserve.” +“Talia, they died serving Dendrin. That’s what they’re SUPPOSED to do. By all means have the ceremony honoring the dead, but I have other living concerns that require immediate attention.” +“And that’s the other thing I’ve been wanting to speak to you about. I’ve noticed over the years, you have become obsessed with magic of all kinds. You pour over the old shadow tomes even more than I do. In fact I practically have to snatch them out of your hands if I need to look up something at times. You’ve also become much colder and distant. It’s almost like you don’t even care about any of us anymore and see us all as minions and henchmen. You talk about spreading fear to our enemies and how it is Dendrin’s will, but is it absolutely necessary to treat your fellow shadows in the same manner?” +“Talia, I never treat you with anything other than respect and honor. You know that.” +“For now, but I’m not talking about just me. I’m talking about everyone else. Look I know you’re the chosen of Dendrin and you know his plan better than anyone, but have you become so far removed that you don’t even feel a shred of empathy anymore? I mean remember Master Ebon? He cared for all of us…” +“He’s also dead, so I don’t see how following his example is going to get us anywhere the shadows need to be which is what I’m trying to accomplish. You say that I’m far removed from the rest, when in actuality I’ve been trying to keep my knowledge of my surroundings to damn near omnipotent level. I’ve kept the shadows thriving by implementing changes. Changes that Dendrin obviously agrees with, but what you don’t realize, what none of you realize is that I’m trying to accomplish something that will establish shadow survival long after I’ve shuffled off this mortal realm.” +“And what is that exactly? You mind at least telling me?” +“I’m talking about transcending.” + +Talia pauses and thinks she knows what you’re talking about. + +“Are…are you talking about performing the ritual of ascension?” + +She’s only partially right. You’ve read through the ritual and while you don’t exactly understand all of it, you believe that you should only implement a large part of it. You do not believe it is the direction the shadows need to go and you are still seeking out a way to alter it to suit what you want to accomplish. + +“I cannot give you an answer yet as I’m still working on the specifics, but rest assured you will be the first to know when I figure everything out. Just trust me as you would trust in Dendrin. Have I ever lead the shadows wrong? And if I was doing something wrong, would Dendrin not smite me?” + +Once again invoking Dendrin’s lack of action towards you manages to convince Talia that whatever you’re planning it must be for the greater good of the shadows. + +And you are, just not for Dendrin’s sake. +> Twilight of the Eternals (Year 73) +It’s been a strange year. You’ve outlived two more of the original Eternals. In both cases it was suicide and oddly enough, for similar reasons. + +The ruler of the Nalin Empire, Warden Matron Brenda was found dead by her own hand earlier this year. It was quite the big event, but it doesn’t look like it’ll fall into chaos though, as there was already another successor established soon after Tarna went “missing.” You always knew nobody was going to come looking for her, hell perhaps Brenda knew of her treachery and just gave her the rope to hang herself with. + +Brenda apparently left no explanation other than how she had wanted to join her beloved Roldan at last and had grown weary of life without him. + +Right now you’re in the attendance of the burial ceremony for Cyrus who did the same thing. Dravin died last year of natural causes and you know it was a major loss for Cyrus who had been with him so long. Still you thought he’d get over it eventually, but then again what else did he really have? After you established your undisputed dominance as well as crippling him, the only thing that he had to keep him going was Dravin and his faith in Dendrin. And his faith was probably a lot less than it once was given all that had happened to him. Really Dravin was his only constant and the only one who had stuck by him. + +Perhaps it was an eternal thing? Something within that causes eternals pre-disposed to suicide after losing their mate? Still not likely since Brenda went on for decades and none of the new eternals display such behavior, though granted they were created in a much different manner than the originals. Also while you love Talia, you can’t imagine killing yourself if she died. You’d morn certainly, but you’d have to carry on. Especially with what you’re attempting to accomplish. You briefly wonder if that means you love her less, but you dismiss such thoughts, after all if every person committed suicide after the death of their own mates there would be a hell of a lot less people in the world. You wonder if you died if Talia would end her life. You certainly hope she wouldn’t and would go on with living life. There are enough things trying to kill you without doing it yourself. + +Now you and Talia are the last of the originals and it’s a bit of a sobering thought. You were bred to serve the Empire and neither of you ever did. You’ve outlived the Empire, you’ve outlived all the other original eternals and you’ve outlived several shadows you once considered friends and peers. People like Murk. Like Bianca. Like Brother Gray. It all seems so long ago. You can’t even remember their faces anymore. + +You’ve even managed to outlive most of the second-generation eternals. A handful of them still live, but it seems funny that barely any of them have survived up to this point when there were so many more than the first generation. The age old “They don’t make them like they used to” statement you suppose could apply here. + +As you stand and stare at Cyrus’ body you don’t even know you’re here. He’s dead and that’s that. You’ve got much more important things to do. You very nearly didn’t bother to come, but Talia’s insistence was a large part of your attendance. + +“Well Cyrus, I always thought it would come to one of us killing the other, and I suppose it nearly did a couple times, but it would seem fate had other ideas.” You quietly say to Cyrus’ body. + +Okay perhaps the other part of your attendance was out of the genuine respect you once had for him. + +“(Sigh) You’re an idiot. You didn’t need to kill yourself. What did it accomplish? I could’ve still used your help on certain things. You weren’t useless you know, you were always loyal despite everything.” + +Perhaps your attendance was out the genuine respect you STILL have for him. + +“Now you’re useless of course. Now I have to have someone else look after the temple security. Heh. You probably killed yourself just to inconvenience me. Bastard. Good one though.” You chuckle. + +You take one last look at Cyrus. He does look peaceful. Free of worry, concerns, and all of that other shit. He probably thought he was going to meet Dravin in the shadow realm where Dendrin holds a party for all loyal shadows. Of course that’s a fool’s idea. You know the truth about Dendrin and you need to get back to that particular problem right now. + +“So long Cyrus…my brother.” You say and take your leave.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 55 + +You wake up with yet another permanent ache in your body. Getting old really sucks and it probably doesn’t help that you’ve spent decades fighting all your life. Who knows how many broken bones, deep cuts, head blows and other bodily trauma you’ve had. However, you’re probably more fit than most people your age and your magic ability is certainly a great equalizer. + +You go over some of the newest contract requests and one catches your eye due to it suffering from multiple misspellings and the murdering of language in general. When you see that it’s from Flog you’re a little impressed that he was able to write as well as he did. + +From what you can make out in the horribly written letter, he wants to meet with some of your people because he’s got a major problem on his hands and he hopes that seeing as he once helped you fight the Empire, you’d help him out in return. + +You shake your head at that remark considering that as you recall you basically spared his life in exchange for his support. He doesn’t go into specifics about who he wants killed, but he goes on to say that he’s acquired a lot of wealth in his “conquest” of Rask. A bit of stretching the truth since while its true he owns the biggest stretch on territory there, the area is far from conquered. + +Amusingly he wants you to meet him at Blood Tooth, which is apparently what he renamed Evergloom after he moved in years after you left. He states he’ll go into more specifics then, mainly because he doesn’t want the letter possibly falling into the wrong hands and also because all this writing makes his brain hurt. He also mentions that while it isn’t necessary, he’d prefer to meet with you personally since he’s confident in your abilities to get the job done. + +You can’t help but smile a little at that last statement. + +“You’re not going are you?” Talia asks. +"Why not? I’ve been running the shadows for this long and I haven’t even taken a contract myself. Seems a bit hypocritical don’t you think?” +“You’re the Shadow Master, you don’t need to concern yourself with such things.” +“Maybe, but I’ve always believed that a leader really should lead by example and I’ve done that for the most part.” +“What about that incident with the dark elves?” +“Eh, I actually didn’t even plan that and it really doesn’t count. I just think I need to go on this one.” +“You just want to prove that you aren’t getting old. Don’t think I haven’t noticed you been mentioning it lately.” +“Yeah…well maybe. But still…hey why don’t you come with me?” +“Me?” +“Well why not? Flog’s always liked you and it’ll probably make the meeting go over better. Besides, you should be keeping your abilities up as well.” +“Excuse me, but I continue to spar with the Blades every day.” +“And so do I, but it isn’t enough unless their real danger involved. Come on, you mean to say you don’t miss the old days just a little bit?” +“Not particularly, but I see that this is important to you, so I shall accompany you, but aren’t you concerned about this being a trap?” +“Not really, no. While Flog has always been a little more cunning than the average orc and an opportunistic fool, he’s never been suicidal. I’m pretty sure he knows if he tried to ambush me, it wouldn’t end well for him. Even if he managed to succeed, he also knows that the full force of the shadows would hunt him down personally and with as many enemies as he probably has I doubt if he needs to add more. Besides if it is an ambush, that’ll just make things more interesting and Dendrin’s always looking out for us anyway.” + +Your flip remark about Dendrin gets a nod in agreement by Talia who doesn’t take it as a flip remark, but rather that you’re being genuine. “Well I suppose there is that and as the chosen of Dendrin you’d be even better protected, but who is going to be running things while we’re gone?” +“I don’t think we’re going to be gone for that long, but Cyrus can do it. Not like he goes on many missions anymore either.” + +This is true. Ever since the incident with the dark elves, Cyrus and Dravin started becoming more withdrawn. Granted Dravin was never an extrovert, but with Cyrus it’s a little sad. It’s like you completely crushed his spirit that day. He lost his unofficial position as leader of the Blades due to the permanent limp you gave him and resigned himself to keeping up on internal security. Sometimes you feel a little bad about it, but you believe that in the long run it was a good thing. Cyrus, even though he’d pledged himself to you still harbored a bit of willfulness that was starting to come back. If allowed to flourish longer, he may have become more of a problem and would have had to been killed. + +Though perhaps his current fate is worse than death. + +When you approach Cyrus about the situation with Flog, he’s surprised that you’re going, let alone putting him in charge of the temple until you get back. He of course agrees and wishes you luck. Given how Flog was never his favorite person, you wonder why he didn’t at least express the same concerns about meeting with him like Talia did, and then it occurs to you that perhaps he’s hoping you do get killed. + +In any event, you’re not going to worry about it. You instead hand pick some of the best Blades to come with you to Blood Tooth and set off on your journey as soon as possible. + +The journey to Rask is fairly uneventful. While you mostly keep to the off beaten trails, you know most in Quala are wise enough to not attack a group of shadows even if they did see you. The “stable” leader of northern Quala, First Mage Galen has practically bent over backwards to stay on your good side. You sort of wonder if that is who Flog wants you to assassinate considering all the back and forth attempts at conquest into each other’s realms by the pair of them. If it is, then he better have a hell of a lot of money. + +When you reach the Rask it mostly looks very much how it did when you left it. Much of it untouched wilderness though the occasional battlefield markings are apparent. Some are even fairly recent. + +“Hey Flog didn’t say anything about safe passage did he in his letter?” Talia asks. +“No, but I don’t think he’d be able to enforce it very well anyway. You know how tribal orcs are, even under a strong leader they tend towards chaotic acts.” +“Well as you said, I suppose that’ll make things more interesting. Actually a battle would probably warm me up right about now. I think I got too used to the heat, though I wasn’t exactly fond of the freezing cold back in the old days either.” +“Really? I kind of preferred it, but we’re going to be making camp soon, we can warm up a little then.” + +Later that night at your campsite you take first watch. You can’t really rest anyway since your body aches a bit. As the night goes on, you remember back to the time when you doing this as a regular thing, seems like a lifetime ago. + +As you lose yourself in the past a bit you suddenly hear a noise. Like howling, but it isn’t from any sort of wolf that you’ve ever heard. Doesn’t even sound like a natural one and it sounds pretty close by. + +“Everyone get up!” you shout with your weapon drawn. + +As everyone starts to get up ready for battle, more of those howls can be heard. They’re nearly painful at this point and several of you are clutching at least one of your ears. + +“What the hell is that?” Talia shouts. +“Not sure, but we’re about to find out.” You say as all of you form a back-to-back circle for defense. + +Several glowing red eyes appear in the dark forest around you, when your assailants finally show themselves, they are in the form of orcs, but more feral and savage looking (even for orcs). + +“You think Flog set this up?” Talia asks you while eyeing her closest possible attacker. +“Let’s worry about it afterwards.” You say and the orcs attack. + +You’ve had to fight a few unruly orcs in the past and though its been awhile, you know their tactics wouldn’t have switched up that much. They almost lope at you and circle around you like an animal would, in fact animalistic is the best way to describe them since at this range you can see they aren’t even wearing much clothing beyond a loin cloth and a few grisly trophies in the form of bloody body parts. Their hands resemble claws and some of them aren’t even attacking with weapons at all and are just using their nails, which are unnaturally long for orcs. + +You cross swords with one of them and even while speeding yourself up, it’s still nearly matching you blow for blow. Its face is close enough for you to get the good look and it’s contorted looking with an extra wide mouth filled with teeth. Whatever the hell this thing is, it isn’t any kind of orc you’ve ever seen or encountered. You muster up all your strength and land a powerful strike against the orc’s head nearly severing the top part of it completely. It attempts to still attack you, flailing its arms wildly and still making that horrible howling sound. + +Then you hear a whispery voice in your mind. At first you think its Dendrin, but then you’re not asleep and you don’t feel the same numbness, but rather the exact opposite. A sharp pain in your head. + +“The battle is lost mortal. You cannot kill us. You must submit to us, it is the only way to save yourself.” + +You look around to see Talia and most of the other shadows still fighting, but you also see a couple of them clutching their heads and falling to the ground in pain. These definitely aren’t orcs you’re fighting considering they’re using some sort of psychic attack. + +You could either try to finish off the rest of the orcs to stop the attacks or cast a shield over the minds of you and your shadows, though its very difficult to concentrate right now. +> Finish them off +You’re having a hard enough time concentrating as it is, you aren’t going to waste time trying to cast a spell. Besides you got by just fine without magic in the past and if you kill them all quick enough the danger will be over. + +You quickly kill the orc that Talia is fighting and just in time too since she is visibly exhausted from the battle. + +“Are you all right?” +“Yeah…I just…my head…” +“Stay out of the way and just keep fighting it, this’ll be over soon.” You say and Talia staggers over to a nearby tree out of the way of the major fighting. + +You dispatch another orc and then another and then another, but the voices seem to be growing more numerous and more powerful. + +“You cannot win! Cease your struggle! You are…” +“SHUT UP!” you yell out as you run your sword through the neck of another orc. + +You barely avoid another attack, but not from an orc, but rather from one of your own shadows. When you see his face up close it has that same unnaturally wide mouth filled with sharp teeth. Its at that point you realize what you’re dealing with, wendigos. You briefly read about them in Kane’s journal after you took Fort Destiny. They’re evil spirits that constantly crave flesh and possess bodies of the living, which explains why the voices have been getting stronger as you’ve been depriving them of bodies. Now they’ve hopped into the bodies of your shadows. + +You go on the defensive and put up a good fight despite being outnumbered and assaulted physically and mentally, but it all comes to an end when you suddenly feel a strong force hit your back and then through your body and out your chest. You look down to see a clawed hand drenched in blood and what looks to be part of your heart. + +The claw is pulled back out and you fall to the snow dead. Talia gobbles up your heart before joining the rest of the shadows devouring your body.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Theo might mean well, but you’re a firm believer that simple plans often work best and since you’ve got the last word, you’re sticking with your original plan. + +“It’s a good idea Theo, but I believe it may stir up more attention towards us, if we start attempting to convert people outside Delerg. It may even cause certain warlords to unite against us if they believe us to be threatening enough. Better that we keep our presence to a minimum and especially not try to contact any of them directly. What I want you to do instead is to just keep an eye on Anu and Sam since they’re close by, but since they seem to be content on bashing each other in the head just send some Blades to perform sabotage on both sides just to keep them mired down.” +“As you wish Shadow Master.” Theo remarks. +“The western Quala warlords seem pretty occupied as well so we don’t need to deal with them either. General Ackerson though I want assassinated. I know he’s attempting to expand into Rask, but the man is the biggest threat as far as powers in Quala and I don’t want him to improve that position in the future. Cyrus, since you’re really eager about doing this, I’m going to leave it up to you who to send, but I imagine you’ll want to oversee things personally.” +“It will be done Shadow Master, and thank you.” +“I believe that’s about it, we can go over more details one on one later.” + +After the meeting Talia speaks to you directly. + +“You sure you want to leave it to Cyrus? I would’ve thought you would’ve wanted to handle something so important yourself.” +“I’m confident that Cyrus can do the job efficiently. If nothing else he’s enthusiastic for things like this. I thought about going too, but I’m slowly begining to realize I’ll be needing to delegate and remaining at this temple more. Besides I’m sure there will be other opportunities to go kill someone. Never seems to be a shortage in fact.” +“Well that’s true.” +“I’m thinking I’ll spend more time looking after the security within the Delerg province. I mean yes we have potential enemies outside the province, but it doesn’t hurt to keep alert in our homestead.” +“I suppose not, but we’re pretty well liked here.” +“Perhaps, but if I’ve learned anything, its that enemies can exist anywhere of you look hard enough.” + +Over the next few days your initial plans go off quite well. General Ackerson is assassinated successfully and there wasn’t even any indication there was shadow involvement. As of now his group is fighting amongst itself and no longer united. Captain Anu and Sam Jowin have each been suffering set backs and of course blaming each other for them. + +You then relent a bit to let the chaos do its work in Quala until it looks like the place is going to stabilize once again and that’s when you send in shadows to create strife again. It becomes routine just like any of the prayer sessions for Dendrin. + +Of course as good as the shadows are, you can’t go undetected forever and eventually someone catches on to what’s really been going happening… + +“There’s a huddled mass of people outside the temple, Shadow Master. We’re keeping them out obviously, but their speaker really wants to see you.” Brother Gannon says to you. +“Who are these people?” +“Mostly peasants I believe, but they aren’t from Delerg, they’re from Quala. Under Sam’s dominion I think. They say they want our help.” +“Our help? What’s bringing this on and what makes them think we’re going to help a bunch of unbelievers?” Cyrus asks. In fact you all are wondering what this is all about. + +“Well I guess the best way to find out is to ask them. Send in their speaker and keep the rest outside. If anything looks suspicious kill them all.” You say. + +Brother Gannon nods and waves in the Qualans’ speaker. While you expect a grubby peasant with dirty clothing to come shuffling in, you instead get a young man dressed in leather armor. Despite his warrior garb he’s nervous. He’s trying his best to be brave, but you sense the fear in him. + +“Well? Out with it, you traveled a long way just to waste our time.” Talia remarks. +“Yes, my apologies, um Shadowlord is it?” +“Shadow Master actually, but let’s just get on with why you saw fit to lead a bunch of peasants here and why you think we can even help you.” you say. +“Oh yes that. My name is Flynn and we all live in the Quala Freelands, which as you know is run by Sam Jowin. I myself am a soldier of relatively low rank…and uh…look there’s no easy way of saying this so I guess I’ll get right to it. We want you to kill Sam.” + +You have to admit this wasn’t exactly the sort of help you thought they were going to ask for. You and the rest of your council look at each other before you speak again. + +“And why do you think we would do that?” +“Because you routinely sabotage our side and Captain Anu’s? Because you were most likely involved in the assassination of General Ackerson? It wasn’t apparent at first, but…” +“Now stop right there for a moment Flynn, and think very carefully on your next words.” +“I…I’m sorry Shadow Master, but I do not know any other way to put this.” +“Very well then, let me help you. Even if we were involved in such activities and that’s not an admission, what still makes you think that we would be willing to assassinate your beloved leader?” +“He’s NOT a beloved leader! Sam is no better than the tyrannical Emperor that ruled over us before! I will admit during his freedom fighter days he was an inspiration, but now? He’s just another petty warlord that doesn’t give a shit about anything other than his own power!” +“That’s a pretty bold statement. I knew Sam during the Empire War years and even fought along side him a couple times. He was always a fair man from what I knew of him and cared for those under his command.” Theo remarks. +“Yeah, well he’s changed drastically since then, the things he’s done... the things I’ve had to do in his service…I do not even wish to think about let alone discuss. So do you need payment? We weren’t sure what we’d need to get your help. We have scraped together valuables and gold for you. I don’t know if its enough, I mean I think we could scrape a bit more, but…here’s what we got.” + +At this point Flynn reaches for a small pouch on his side and extends his hand towards all of you with it. Cyrus snatches it from him and reveals a few gold coins and a couple of gems of low quality. Probably a paltry amount, but then you don’t really know what the going rate is for assassination is these days never having done it for money before. + +“And you think we’re mere thugs for hire?” Cyrus asks throwing the pouch back at Flynn who barely catches it. + +“No! I mean well…we uh…are also prepared to give you a virgin girl in exchange for your help if you aren’t motivated by profit.” +“A virgin girl?” Yvette asks. +“Yeah, for your sacrifices to Dendrin. Isn’t that what you guys do?” + +At this point Cyrus gets so pissed at Flynn he punches him in the face. Theo isn’t too happy with him either and begins calling Flynn names. You on the other hand, chuckle to yourself thinking that human sacrifice might actually break up the monotony around the temple sometimes. And while you’re not seriously considering such a thing, you are seeing an opportunity here to change things up a bit. + +“Alright Cyrus that will do for now. This man obviously came to us for help and kicking the hell out of this poor bastard isn’t going to help matters.” +“But he insulted Dendrin! And he insults the shadows by coming to us like we’re some lowly criminals!” +“No this man came to us looking for skilled assassins who can get the job done right. And that’s what we are, aren’t we? I mean that’s partly how we won the war against the Empire isn’t it? If there are already rumors going around by ignorant peasants that we killed General Ackerson and have been involved in sabotage in Quala then our cover has already been blown at this point. We may as well embrace it.” +“What are you saying?” Talia asks. + +“I’m saying that we should take this man up on his offer. However, our payment will be that he owes us a favor. In fact ALL of those that are with him today will owe us a favor. Be sure to get all their names before they leave here. It may be big, it may be small, it may never come at all, but when we call it in, they better deliver…are we agreed to this Flynn?” you say extending your hand to help him up. + +He’s unsure at first, but eventually he takes it and gets up. Sam must really be some sort of bastard if Flynn is agreeing to this arrangement. + +“I…I accept your terms Shadow Master.” +“Good, it’ll be taken care of as soon as possible.” +“Thank you! Thank you!” he says and starts to bow a lot while he steps backwards towards the door. +“Excuse me, but where do you think you’re going?” +“I was taking my leave Shadow Master.” +“Not with that pouch of valuables you aren’t. They were a gift to us were they not?” +“Oh…yes…of course. Here you go. My apologies Shadow Master.” Flynn says and tosses the bag to you. +“Good. NOW you may go.” + +After Flynn leaves the temple you remind some of the Blades to get all their names down. Meanwhile your council is a little confused by your latest decision + +“Are you serious about this?” Theo asks. +“Of course I am, if I wasn’t I wouldn’t have made the offer.” You answer. +“But we’re helping unbelievers!” Cyrus says. +“So? We helped them during the Empire War too, what makes now so different? I’ll tell you what makes it different, we’re actually going to be profiting from it for a change. Look if we’re going to stay safe, and I mean truly safe from external threats we need to get back on to the world stage. Staying isolated in this swamp is only going to work for so long and eventually someone is going to come here with an army and attempt to overwhelm us. Last time I checked our numbers are still low.” +“Okay, but weren’t we ensuring our safety by destabilizing Quala?” Theo asks. +“We were, but as I said our presence has obviously become known now. It’s nobody’s fault, it was bound to happen eventually, but that means we’ve got two options. Either we stop completely and risk Quala being united under one person who decides they want to emulate the Empire which means war in the far future. Or we continue doing what we’re doing and risk pissing everyone off to such a degree that they stop fighting each other and unite against us, which means war in the near future. Neither of those sound attractive so I’m choosing the third option.” +“Which is?” Yvette asks. +“We offer our services to the highest bidder. We become the go to organization for assassination. We spread so much fear and terror that nobody will ever want to attack us, they will instead wish to curry our favor in exchange for our help. And Cyrus I already see you’re about to protest and I don’t know why because you’re the first one who usually wants to go practice your killing skills on someone. I’d think you of all people would be happy with this arrangement.” +“You may be right.” Cyrus says. +“But what about Dendrin?” Yvette asks. +“Yes! What about the integrity of this order?” Theo adds +“Dendrin is the god of shadows. Why else would he give us such powers if not to use them in such a manner? But if it will calm everyone down I will certainly consult him on this matter. At this time though I have made my decision on what is best for the shadows.” + +None of them may see it now, but you really are taking steps to ensure the survival of the shadows. The shadows were feared during their lackey days under the Empire and during the rebellion the Empire itself learned to fear the shadows. + +Now? The fear still exists, but not to the extent that it needs to be. Not to the extent that it SHOULD be. You’re going to get that fear back and that reputation is what going to keep you all alive and thrive. + +Surely Dendrin would certainly approve of that. In fact you know that sadistic bastard would. +> Adapt or die (Year 49) +Theo and Yvette are brought before you restrained by two Blades each. They are heavily beaten, but still display a look of defiance on their faces. The rest of the shadows look on in anticipation of what you intend to do. Indeed some may still be in the dark about what exactly is going on. + +“Here they are Shadow Master, brought to you alive as you wanted.” + +You approach the both of them, starting with Theo first. + +“What’s wrong? Have you grown so drunk with power that you’ve become too lazy to do your own dirty work anymore?” Theo asks. +“What’s wrong? Have you grown so cowardly that you had to conspire with other shadows rather than attempt to sink the blade in my back yourself? If I was as lazy as you claimed, I wouldn’t have been keeping track of your increasing insubordinate activity and your attempts of poisoning the minds of other shadows. Doesn’t matter though, you were useful in that regard by saving me the trouble of determining for certain those that can’t adapt with the times.” +“Adapt with the times? Is that what all this is called? I call it turning away from Dendrin’s will! How can any of you follow this…mad man masquerading as a Shadow Master? We’ve become nothing more than assassins for hire and selling out our very beliefs for petty profit and corrupt favors!” +“And what would YOU have us do? Continue to remain isolated in our dreary temple going through the motions of prayers all day and night until we die? The old shadows did that and look what happened, they…WE were practically enslaved by the Empire! WE were their lackies and servants for centuries! And now that we’ve finally cast off those shackles you want us to be put in a position again where that could happen again? I say never again.” + +Theo naturally isn’t convinced, but his fate was sealed a long time ago anyway. Yvette decides it’s her turn to speak out. + +“You keep saying WE as if you’re actually as shadow, but you aren’t! You’re a corruption! An abomination! You’re something the Empire grew in a lab! ALL of your kind are! You treat this order like your own private caste system, with all the Eternals at the top and us pure humans at the bottom! The Empire may be dead, but from where I’m standing its legacy still lives on to continue its tyranny over us in the form of YOU!” +“That’s bullshit and you know it. Any human or Eternal can perform the same duties, I show no preferences. You and Theo were on my council. Trusted and well respected advisors that I thought were loyal. Dravin is on the council and he is human as well.” You say +“Yeah, because he’s Cyrus’ bitch…” Theo mutters. This causes Cyrus to lunge at Theo so quickly that you barely manage to keep him from killing him right there. + +“Let us kill this traitor and be done with it!” Cyrus shouts. +“Yeah, let’s get on with it, why draw it out, we all know what’s going to happen.” Theo replies. +“Yes we do, but that’s not nearly as important as the journey itself.” You say. +“What journey?” +“This one. The one we’re on right now. Let me ask you this so that I may show a glaring flaw in your reasoning. IF I was as bad as you claim and I’ve turned the shadows from the will of Dendrin why was I not stopped? Why was I even picked to be Shadow Master? Why weren’t you able to succeed with your plan to kill me?” + +Theo is silent. He has no good answer, though you get the impression he wants to give you his own thoughts on the matter, but you interrupt before he can. + +“I’ll tell you why. Because what I’m doing here, the direction I’ve taken the shadow IS Dendrin’s will! He WANTED someone like me in charge, because face it; I’ve been a major reason why this fucking order even continues to exist! I have on more than one occasion made the hard decisions that have ensured the survival of the shadows! I fought against the very Empire, which as your wife says created me in a lab somewhere. My loyalty to the shadows and to Dendrin has ALWAYS been there if it hadn’t he wouldn’t have chosen me. You dare stand there and judge me after I’ve either directly or indirectly saved everyone here at one time or another? Nobody can judge me except Dendrin, I think you forgot that lesson.” + +At last you’ve pushed the buttons that cause Theo to utter the words in front of everyone that you were waiting for. + +“Then maybe Dendrin doesn’t know what the fuck he’s doing! And maybe I’ve wasted my life following a so-called deity that doesn’t give a shit whether we live or die! Fuck you and fuck Dendrin!” Theo snarls and you give a hidden smile while the rest of the shadows either jeer at him in disgust or show a less verbal way of disapproval such as shaking their heads. + +“Well there you have it brothers and sisters, an unrepentant verbal admission of disloyalty, I think we can all see who has really turned from Dendrin’s will here.” You say. + +You say nothing else and focus on Theo’s mind as he stares at you with burning hatred. You begin to perform the same spell that Master Ebon did on Brother Shade when he tried to kill him. Theo dies in very much the same way, with his ears and nose bleeding first, followed by gasps. He never screams though. Eventually his brain explodes inside his head and he slumps down dead. + +You then turn to Yvette, she looks thoroughly beaten at this point and doesn’t even look at you. You were going to ask if she wishes to say anything else, but it would be pointless and besides you’ve gotten what you wanted out of this. You focus on her mind and within a few agonizing moments it’s all over for her. + +Afterwards you give a small speech about how this is a reminder of how traitors like Theo will always be brought to justice because Dendrin sees all and knows all. You also reassure them all of how good things have been going for the shadows since you’ve engaged in the current activities you’ve been doing and how loyalty to Dendrin will ultimately be rewarded in the afterlife. + +As you go back to your own duties, you can’t help but think about Theo’s few last words and how you briefly wanted to agree with him, if only to see the amusing confusion on the shadows faces.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 46 + +Took long enough, and sometimes it never seemed like it was going to happen, but you’ve finally restored Dendrin’s temple. Restoring it wasn’t easy either, especially not one as big and in such disrepair like Dendrin’s. The surprising thing is you’ve not only restored it in appearance, but in use as well. + +The one of the first difficult things was getting the stone. Delerg isn’t exactly flush with rock quarries. The second difficult thing was getting help to restore it in the first place. The shadows might be great warriors and have more knowledge than the average peasant, but nobody in your ranks is a laborer or into masonry. Obviously outside help was necessary. + +Fortunately since the fall of the Empire, Delerg had once again become a quiet place with no “leader.” Most of the inhabitants were content to go about their simple lives like they once did before the Empire. When you arrived in Sinkhole, to ask around for workers to try to restore the temple, some couldn’t volunteer fast enough to help. + +This need to help you, was a combination of a few things. The most important one being that Delerg was always shadow friendly. The Empire may have ruled it for a while, but the respect that its people had for the shadows was always greater. The shadows after all were once the main protectors of the area before the Empire. + +Combining this with the fact that the shadows were the main ones who helped influence so much rebellion and caused the destruction of the Empire, it was only natural that you were as warmly embraced like you were. Good thing too, because you certainly didn’t have the coin to pay the workers in the first place! + +As the temple was slowly being restored, more people started flocking to your aid. Some of these were old rebels that the shadows lost contact with when you started consolidating your forces in Rask. They remember you though and offer help in any way their skills allow. + +While you were always a little surprised by how much free help you were always willing to get, what surprised you more is how little you really needed to do to get it. These people had no one telling them what to do or how to live anymore, and yet a lot of them seemed to be in a big hurry for that to change by becoming Dendrin worshippers! You understand gratitude, but to willingly surrender a portion of your earnings and time to serve an invisible being that you had no proof existed, while some guy claiming to be his “representative” tell you how you should live seemed like a step backwards for them at least. For you though, it was all beneficial as eventually some of these devoted souls wanted to become full-fledged shadows. Naturally you accepted them into your ranks provided they could pass through the testing. + +Right now things have been better for you than they have ever been. You’ve got a nice restored temple, a fair sized congregation, the ranks of the shadows are slowly starting to grow again and most importantly you haven’t had to deal with any problems with the new eternals (Now known as the Shadow Blades) ever since they all went through the ritual. Dendrin was true to his word on that, just like you were true to yours by restoring his temple. + +Still, even after directly helping you, you still can’t bring yourself to “worship” Dendrin. Not really. Part of you feels like it was the least he could’ve done after all the stuff in the past he’s put you through. Another of part of you feels as if you’ve “repaid the debt” by restoring the temple. + +He’s probably granted you more power as you’ve noticed your magical abilities becoming superior to everyone else’s and it taking much less effort, but again you still feel no sense of “awe” in Dendrin that would cause you to willingly worship him as a god. + +To you, he’s a very powerful being that is a whimsical ally at best. You’ve come to realize that he is probably deserving of your respect in regard to his power and you always keep that in mind when up keeping the charade of his religion. Perhaps it is enough, or at least it’ll have to be since you don’t see yourself changing your mind on the matter anytime soon, especially when you’ve been trying to figure out what your next big course of action should be. + +The problem with a lack of conflict is that you find yourself very bored. Even in Rask, the monotony was broken up with the occasional giant or ogre attack. Here in Delerg there are no such great dangers surprisingly enough. Most dangerous swamp beasts prefer to stick to their own stomping grounds which all seem to be away from your part of the swamp and Sul-monkeys aren’t a threat so much as they’re an occasional annoyance when large groups of them decide to use the temple roof as a mating area! The last time you had any true conflict was when General Ackerson’s men ambushed you and part of you hasn’t forgotten that incident. From what you know, he’s still in power and sometimes you’d like to change that just on principle. + +Quala is still an area in a power struggle between competing warlords, but so far there have been no attempt by any of them to expand into Delerg, probably because there isn’t much here in the first place save for swamp. Not to mention there are most likely trickles of news coming in about the return of the shadows to Delerg. Most of the warlords being ex-Empire probably would like to get some sort of revenge, but know that their losses would be considerable if they even attempted such a thing, so you are left alone. + +Talia and Cyrus seem to be content with how things are now, why can’t you be? Funny that you were concerned about the new eternals being restless and getting themselves into trouble, while here you are considering starting a fight because your bored with peace! The only real reason you can think of is petty revenge on General Ackerson and that’s not a very good one even if you could easily tell everyone that Dendrin told you all to go kill him. + +In your moment of introspection, you take another look at what you’ve accomplished. You went from being a lone unbeliever practically trapped in an organization that was determined to overthrow an enemy several times larger than itself to the victorious leader of said organization, which is now thriving under your watch. + +You probably could defeat Ackerson, but at what cost? Last you heard he has thousands of men at his command still and that includes a few battle mages. The shadows may be growing slowly, but that’s just it, slowly. You don’t have anywhere near the numbers to start raising armies. Sure, you have the entire support of probably all of Delerg, but that doesn’t mean much in the scheme of things if most of the people aren’t warriors. You kill Ackerson and take his territory then what? You hold it? How long can that last with the numbers you’d have left? You doubt if the people of Quala would be as supportive, if anything they probably blame the shadows for the miserable warring state they live in now. This doesn’t even factor in the OTHER warlords in the area. They may all decide to gang up on you and if you’re in any sort of weakened condition they may even press their attack into Delerg itself. + +No, the risk doesn’t seem worth it compared to the petty gain. The shadows have never been about conquest and they probably shouldn’t start now. However, that doesn’t mean you should stay idle. Peace is fine, but perhaps there is a way of initiating conflict without actually doing it. + +It occurs to you that the warlords of Quala won’t always be fighting. Eventually one of them is going to win or manage to unite the area in some way. When that happens then Delerg might be in potential danger, so it would be in your best interest to make sure that doesn’t happen. Keep Quala weak and disorganized while keeping Delerg the opposite. + +You start sending in shadows into Quala to get a good idea of what the situation is there, but not to actually do anything yet. Theo is mostly in charge of this due to his previous experience of working extensively in the region during the Empire war. Eventually after a couple months you have all the information you really need and ready to put the second part of your plan into action, which is to keep the region destabilized. This is going to include sabotage, misdirection, more spying, and assassinations, all those things that play on the strengths of the shadows. + +“I like it. So when do we start assassinating people?” Cyrus remarks causing Draven to chuckle. +“Well, we probably should decide who needs it first. Some of the leaders sound so incompetent that it might be better if we left them in charge.” Talia adds. +“Shouldn’t we have some sort of plan before doing this?” Yvette asks. +“We do have a plan, I just explained it.” You say not understanding why she would ask such a question. +“I…think what my wife means is should we not have a greater plan other than sewing chaos. I do not presume to disagree with your reasons Shadow Master, but I do believe that causing discord for the sake of doing it might seem a bit…well…short term.” Theo says. +“So you believe that we should actually take territory? I explained why I believe that would be a problem.” +“No, no, I agree that we shouldn’t be marching armies into Quala, I guess what I mean is perhaps this would also be a good time to launch an aggressive campaign of converting unbelievers. You know send our better speakers to some of the smaller villages that are unhappy with life under the warlords and telling them how Dendrin can release them from such misery. Given enough time, we would have so many converted that we wouldn’t have to worry about raising an army or Quala ever being a threat because most of the population would all be believers in Dendrin.” + +An interesting suggestion from Theo and one you weren’t really expecting from him. He also mentions he could get back in contact with some of the old rebels he knows are still living in Quala to help more directly as well. +> Council and Blades (New Shadow Structure) +Since the new eternals all went through “proper” shadow indoctrination, they’ve all been a lot calmer. Still killers of course, but at least now you haven’t seen any signs of them acting unstable. + +Besides you, Cyrus and Talia, they are probably still the best warriors you have though, so you decided to still keep them a bit separate from the rest of the “rank and file” by naming them the Shadow Blades. They seem to like the designation. There are a few “normal” shadows in the Blades as well since anyone can be one if they’re skilled enough. While the Eternals still tend to see Talia as their “mother” Cyrus and Draven are the ones who mostly send them out on patrols or missions nowadays. Talia’s learned to let go of her “children” a bit. + +The other main reason for the creation of the Blades is due to the fact that a lot of the shadows have families now or are attempting to start on such. Seeing as you don’t do a lot of warring nowadays, you figure it would be all right to relax the need for everyone to be on constant alert all the time. All shadows are still required to upkeep their martial and magic skills though. + +The other change you decided on was to create a council of sorts. As Shadow Master your word goes (Or Dendrin’s “Word” as they all sometimes believe) but you’ve been trying to become more inclusive in some of the decision making mainly because some of the more menial tasks or administrative duties are a bore to you and it helps if you don’t have to do it all by yourself. (Bad enough you’ve got to keep up on all the shadow lore, fortunately you let Talia handle some of that) + +So far the Shadow Council is made up of you, Talia, Cyrus, Draven, Yvette and Theo. Three Eternals, three humans and one of those pairings is one of each. You believe it’s pretty equal all things considered.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 46 + +Took long enough, and sometimes it never seemed like it was going to happen, but you’ve finally restored Dendrin’s temple. Restoring it wasn’t easy either, especially not one as big and in such disrepair like Dendrin’s. The surprising thing is you’ve not only restored it in appearance, but in use as well. + +The one of the first difficult things was getting the stone. Delerg isn’t exactly flush with rock quarries. The second difficult thing was getting help to restore it in the first place. The shadows might be great warriors and have more knowledge than the average peasant, but nobody in your ranks is a laborer or into masonry. Obviously outside help was necessary. + +Fortunately since the fall of the Empire, Delerg had once again become a quiet place with no “leader.” Most of the inhabitants were content to go about their simple lives like they once did before the Empire. When you arrived in Sinkhole, to ask around for workers to try to restore the temple, some couldn’t volunteer fast enough to help. + +This need to help you, was a combination of a few things. The most important one being that Delerg was always shadow friendly. The Empire may have ruled it for a while, but the respect that its people had for the shadows was always greater. The shadows after all were once the main protectors of the area before the Empire. + +Combining this with the fact that the shadows were the main ones who helped influence so much rebellion and caused the destruction of the Empire, it was only natural that you were as warmly embraced like you were. Good thing too, because you certainly didn’t have the coin to pay the workers in the first place! + +As the temple was slowly being restored, more people started flocking to your aid. Some of these were old rebels that the shadows lost contact with when you started consolidating your forces in Rask. They remember you though and offer help in any way their skills allow. + +While you were always a little surprised by how much free help you were always willing to get, what surprised you more is how little you really needed to do to get it. These people had no one telling them what to do or how to live anymore, and yet a lot of them seemed to be in a big hurry for that to change by becoming Dendrin worshippers! You understand gratitude, but to willingly surrender a portion of your earnings and time to serve an invisible being that you had no proof existed, while some guy claiming to be his “representative” tell you how you should live seemed like a step backwards for them at least. For you though, it was all beneficial as eventually some of these devoted souls wanted to become full-fledged shadows. Naturally you accepted them into your ranks provided they could pass through the testing. + +Right now things have been better for you than they have ever been. You’ve got a nice restored temple, a fair sized congregation, the ranks of the shadows are slowly starting to grow again and most importantly you haven’t had to deal with any problems with the new eternals (Now known as the Shadow Blades) ever since they all went through the ritual. Dendrin was true to his word on that, just like you were true to yours by restoring his temple. + +Still, even after directly helping you, you still can’t bring yourself to “worship” Dendrin. Not really. Part of you feels like it was the least he could’ve done after all the stuff in the past he’s put you through. Another of part of you feels as if you’ve “repaid the debt” by restoring the temple. + +He’s probably granted you more power as you’ve noticed your magical abilities becoming superior to everyone else’s and it taking much less effort, but again you still feel no sense of “awe” in Dendrin that would cause you to willingly worship him as a god. + +To you, he’s a very powerful being that is a whimsical ally at best. You’ve come to realize that he is probably deserving of your respect in regard to his power and you always keep that in mind when up keeping the charade of his religion. Perhaps it is enough, or at least it’ll have to be since you don’t see yourself changing your mind on the matter anytime soon, especially when you’ve been trying to figure out what your next big course of action should be. + +The problem with a lack of conflict is that you find yourself very bored. Even in Rask, the monotony was broken up with the occasional giant or ogre attack. Here in Delerg there are no such great dangers surprisingly enough. Most dangerous swamp beasts prefer to stick to their own stomping grounds which all seem to be away from your part of the swamp and Sul-monkeys aren’t a threat so much as they’re an occasional annoyance when large groups of them decide to use the temple roof as a mating area! The last time you had any true conflict was when General Ackerson’s men ambushed you and part of you hasn’t forgotten that incident. From what you know, he’s still in power and sometimes you’d like to change that just on principle. + +Quala is still an area in a power struggle between competing warlords, but so far there have been no attempt by any of them to expand into Delerg, probably because there isn’t much here in the first place save for swamp. Not to mention there are most likely trickles of news coming in about the return of the shadows to Delerg. Most of the warlords being ex-Empire probably would like to get some sort of revenge, but know that their losses would be considerable if they even attempted such a thing, so you are left alone. + +Talia and Cyrus seem to be content with how things are now, why can’t you be? Funny that you were concerned about the new eternals being restless and getting themselves into trouble, while here you are considering starting a fight because your bored with peace! The only real reason you can think of is petty revenge on General Ackerson and that’s not a very good one even if you could easily tell everyone that Dendrin told you all to go kill him. + +In your moment of introspection, you take another look at what you’ve accomplished. You went from being a lone unbeliever practically trapped in an organization that was determined to overthrow an enemy several times larger than itself to the victorious leader of said organization, which is now thriving under your watch. + +You probably could defeat Ackerson, but at what cost? Last you heard he has thousands of men at his command still and that includes a few battle mages. The shadows may be growing slowly, but that’s just it, slowly. You don’t have anywhere near the numbers to start raising armies. Sure, you have the entire support of probably all of Delerg, but that doesn’t mean much in the scheme of things if most of the people aren’t warriors. You kill Ackerson and take his territory then what? You hold it? How long can that last with the numbers you’d have left? You doubt if the people of Quala would be as supportive, if anything they probably blame the shadows for the miserable warring state they live in now. This doesn’t even factor in the OTHER warlords in the area. They may all decide to gang up on you and if you’re in any sort of weakened condition they may even press their attack into Delerg itself. + +No, the risk doesn’t seem worth it compared to the petty gain. The shadows have never been about conquest and they probably shouldn’t start now. However, that doesn’t mean you should stay idle. Peace is fine, but perhaps there is a way of initiating conflict without actually doing it. + +It occurs to you that the warlords of Quala won’t always be fighting. Eventually one of them is going to win or manage to unite the area in some way. When that happens then Delerg might be in potential danger, so it would be in your best interest to make sure that doesn’t happen. Keep Quala weak and disorganized while keeping Delerg the opposite. + +You start sending in shadows into Quala to get a good idea of what the situation is there, but not to actually do anything yet. Theo is mostly in charge of this due to his previous experience of working extensively in the region during the Empire war. Eventually after a couple months you have all the information you really need and ready to put the second part of your plan into action, which is to keep the region destabilized. This is going to include sabotage, misdirection, more spying, and assassinations, all those things that play on the strengths of the shadows. + +“I like it. So when do we start assassinating people?” Cyrus remarks causing Draven to chuckle. +“Well, we probably should decide who needs it first. Some of the leaders sound so incompetent that it might be better if we left them in charge.” Talia adds. +“Shouldn’t we have some sort of plan before doing this?” Yvette asks. +“We do have a plan, I just explained it.” You say not understanding why she would ask such a question. +“I…think what my wife means is should we not have a greater plan other than sewing chaos. I do not presume to disagree with your reasons Shadow Master, but I do believe that causing discord for the sake of doing it might seem a bit…well…short term.” Theo says. +“So you believe that we should actually take territory? I explained why I believe that would be a problem.” +“No, no, I agree that we shouldn’t be marching armies into Quala, I guess what I mean is perhaps this would also be a good time to launch an aggressive campaign of converting unbelievers. You know send our better speakers to some of the smaller villages that are unhappy with life under the warlords and telling them how Dendrin can release them from such misery. Given enough time, we would have so many converted that we wouldn’t have to worry about raising an army or Quala ever being a threat because most of the population would all be believers in Dendrin.” + +An interesting suggestion from Theo and one you weren’t really expecting from him. He also mentions he could get back in contact with some of the old rebels he knows are still living in Quala to help more directly as well. +> Warlord Warzone (Full report on Quala) +You finally get a full report on the situation in Quala, and even a little bit beyond. + +Theo tells you that there are three major warlords in the area still struggling for power in Quala. General Ackerson you know about and most of his forces are concentrated in the northern most region. While he still insists on going by general he’s mostly shed all his old Empire trappings. Even the soldiers have different uniforms now. So far he’s still the best organized and the most secure in his position. Lately he’s come to a bit of a stop though since he’s apparently been attempting to get a foothold into Rask probably for its resources, but with little success. + +The two closest to Delerg have been slugging it out nearly since the Empire fell. One of those is an ex-Empire Captain Anu and the other is apparently an old rebel leader that Theo knew by the name of Sam Jowin. Anu seems to maintain the delusion that by holding on to the completely ruined territory of the old empire that it somehow still exists. The soldiers still wear their increasingly dirty and worn out armor. His territory is mostly poor with little value anymore seeing as the capital was practically burned to the ground in the Empire’s final days. The good captain took the fall pretty hard and is reportedly not the most stable man, but he’s managed to stay in power due to fanaticism and determination alone. + +The same could be said for Sam. From what Theo remembers of his old dealings with him, was that his whole family was ripped from their homes and killed in front of him for not paying their taxes on time. When they were about to get to him, he managed to kill two of the soldiers and escape into the wilderness. Didn’t take long before the shadows found him and brought him into the rebellion that was still in planning at the time. He didn’t like the waiting, but fortunately for him he didn’t need to wait long since all out war broke out in the next year. Theo mentions that Sam was a naturally charismatic leader type that had an absolute hatred for anything Empire. He isn’t surprised that he’s still fighting and determined to stomp out anything that might resemble the old Empire. +Of course this is coming at a price since Sam is somewhat emulating it by declaring himself “leader of the free people of Quala” whether they want him to be or not. + +Theo goes on to say that the southern most region of Quala seems to be “no man’s land” between Sam and one of your old classmates, an Eternal by the name of Brenda. (Probably the “last loyal” one to the Empire and widow of the Eternal Roldan) He also says that her territory extends all the way south of that to include practically the entire Nalin province. She’s basically been running it all by herself and it hasn’t really suffered much since the Empire fell. In fact if there were any place of the Empire that still “exists” it would be here rather than whatever Anu thinks he’s defending. However, Brenda has never pressed further into Quala and only defends her borders whenever Sam gets the urge to launch a raid for whatever reason. + +As for the western region of Quala, it’s mostly an ongoing warzone between several petty warlords. Nobody really of any note and at this point all of them are little more than bandit thugs with delusions of grandeur. The Arat province is apparently even worse in this respect and has descended into complete anarchy to the point that the overflow of banditry and lawlessness has even been giving the Felkan Kingdom minor border headaches. + +All of this is rather fascinating to you, and a little…well the word isn’t disheartening, but you don’t know…you always did slightly believe (Despite your overwhelming cynicism) that you were actually a force of “good” by toppling the Empire. Maybe the methods weren’t the most pure, but the ends justified the means. Now you see that it didn’t really change all that much, and made it worse in some places. And now here you are plotting to change the landscape even further and probably going to make things even worse. + +Still, if this all works in favor of the shadows maybe it’s all worth it, after all it did the first time.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You never thought you’d ever be doing this willingly… + +“Dendrin, if you’re still watching me, we need to have a talk and you probably know what it is about already. So have your giggles if you must about all this, but I’m asking you for your help and I mean real help, not cryptic answers or hollow words. And if you don’t listen to me, then I suppose I’ll figure it out myself as usual.” + +About ten minutes later after your “prayer” you drift off to sleep and find yourself in a place you haven’t been in a long time. + +“Been a long time Eternal. While I’m glad to see it is you who initiated the dialogue for a change, I am a little hurt though that you’ve only called on me because you need help. But I suppose any progress with a cynical soul like you is better than nothing. Why its almost like you’re taking a leap of faith…” + +Great he’s going to milk this for all its worth. + +“Anyway enough of that, what can I do for you exactly today?” +“Well I figure you being all knowing and all, you’re already familiar with the dilemma, so I was hoping that…in your benevolent wisdom, you’d see fit to help me.” + +A loud chortle echos throughout your mind. + +“All knowing and benevolent wisdom is it? A word of advice Eternal, don’t attempt to grovel, it doesn’t suit you. Though I do appreciate the attempt as it shows there is hope for you after all, which I always believed would be the case. The answer is yes, I will help you.” +“That’s it?” +“Yes. What? Is there more you required from me?” +“No, but…well what are you going to do exactly?” +“Get rid of your problems of course.” +“That’s what I’m talking about. You’re not being specific, I mean for all I know your version of getting rid of my problems means killing me.” +“My dear Eternal have you gained faith in me only to lose it so quickly? (Sigh) I suppose this is a bit too much for you. Very well I shall explain MY end of the bargain. When you reach Delerg, I want you to go to my temple and in a very hidden location on one of the walls near a pillar you will find a button. Press it and you shall recover most of the lost shadow history in an area below the temple. One of the books includes the ritual to open up the portal to my realm. Send your remaining Eternals into it and I shall do the rest.” +“That…that’s almost exactly what Talia had hoped for when she suggested this journey.” +“Yes, I know. That’s because she’s a believer. So if you’re still wondering what my price is, it’s just gaining more loyal followers that will no longer cause potential strife within the order… and the assurance on your part that you will be doing your best to restoring my temple to its former glory.” +“Of course…wait you said remaining Eternals. What did you mean?” +“Oh you’ll find out soon.” + +Suddenly you are pulled out your state of numbness and into the real world. + +“Get up! We’re being attacked!” Talia yells and picks you up by the arm. A bright light is illuminating the nighttime sky along with several fire arrows. You roll under a wagon to avoid immediate danger. + +It would appear General Ackerson’s men have discovered you and have attacked in force. They’re being smart about it too, attacking at night with archers and unfortunately also a couple of battle mages who are making the darkness disappear with their spells. + +“How the hell did they sneak up on us? I had scouts around the perimeter to avoid this sort of thing!” you mutter to yourself. Doesn’t matter now you suppose, what you have to do is get the hell out of here as fast as possible. You don’t like running, but you’ll end up losing more people if you stick around and fight. Besides, there are probably more troops behind the archers or at least on their way. + +“Everyone, grab what you can, head for those hills, speed up and cloak!” you shout. Talia and Cyrus both repeat this order so everyone can hear it. You sort of figured you’d end up dropping most of baggage, but probably not exactly like this! + +The soldiers are still shooting at you of course, but they’re doing it blind. Some of the mages get a few people though by blindly throwing fireballs in the general direction. Of course not every shadow has listened to you, some of them decided to run in the direction of the soldiers instead. These are some of the eternals of course. As you get closer and closer to the hills, the arrows and fireballs have seemed to have stopped altogether, it seems as if some of the eternals have managed to tie up the troops by engaging in close combat with some of them. + +The next few days also involve some fighting with more soldiers in the hills, but since it’s mostly swordsmen you’re got more of an advantage on your side and you lose no more people. Eventually the attacks stop altogether. You’ve either gotten far enough away, or General Ackerson has decided it’s not worth losing any more men over. + +You take a head count to see who is still alive and you now understand what Dendrin meant by the “remaining eternals” as most of the ones who did die were eternals. (Specifically the same ones Talia gave you the names of) Talia also asks you if you consulted Dendrin’s advice on what is to be done about what was discussed before. + +“I believe our recent attack has solved some of it, and Dendrin told me that when we reach the temple, he will solve the rest. He also said that you were right all along, we were meant to take this journey. I think we had to suffer a few losses before the shadow order can truly move forward.” You tell Talia, she seems relieved that you or her aren’t in trouble with Dendrin. + +When the hills begin to flatten and ground starts to become soft, you know that you’ve reached the Delerg border. Brother Theo takes the lead from here and compared to your journey through Quala its downright uneventful other than annoying groups of Sul-monkeys that throw things from the low trees every once in awhile. + +Eventually you arrive at the temple and everyone is filled with a great joy. You figure you should make some sort of uplifting speech about triumph and such, so you do. Then you tell everyone to start exploring the temple and get settled in where they can, you’ll worry about fixing the place up later. + +The inside of the temple is in surprisingly good condition. You waste no time in seeking out the stone “button” that will open up a secret place in the temple. Eventually you find it (which you doubt you would’ve been able to do if Dendrin hadn’t told you) and descend down. + +What you find is better than you could’ve hoped for when you first arrived and that’s living quarters for what you presume would be for the old shadow high priests or whatever. It isn’t fancy, but it’s fairly clean. You imagine that this place hasn’t been accessed in centuries. The walls are very solidly made so it doesn’t even look like signs of any natural intrusion have occurred either. Just as Dendrin said, there is a fully stocked library which no doubt contain most of the shadow’s history and wisdom, and more importantly the ritual that you can use on the eternals. Talia, immediately starts looking through the books while you and Cyrus explore the rest of the place. + +There is one “room” that sticks out which isn’t man made and that’s a small natural cavern, which seems to be an underground garden of some sort with a shallow stream of fresh water flowing through it. Blue glowing fungus lights up the place and there are no exits other than the small openings the water is flowing through. Cyrus takes some purple berries off one of the bushes and pops them in his mouth and remarks how good they taste. + +“Looks like we won’t have to worry about clean water immediately, even our food can be supplemented here. Dendrin provides as usual.” He says. +“Indeed and while I know we all serve Dendrin, rank also has its privileges. I’ll be sleeping down here in one of those bedrooms with Talia.” You remark. +“Heh, well there are three of them from what I’ve seen, surely the Shadow Master doesn’t need ALL of them.” Cyrus replies. +“Well I might’ve needed them to store belongings, but since we dropped most of them, I suppose I don’t have any problem with you and Draven taking one of the rooms. How is Draven anyway, if it wasn’t for you, I’d probably forget he’s even with us.” +“Oh he’s fine. He’s always been a bit more on the quiet side as you know.” +“Mm, well since I’m in a generous mood, I guess Brother Theo and Sister Yvette can take the third room. The pair of them have helped the shadows in more ways than I can count. Besides I know they got something going on with each other, have no idea why they haven’t bonded properly yet though.” +“Maybe they don’t want to be tied down to one person?” +“If that was the case, I wouldn’t see them together almost all the time. I swear since we first kicked the Empire out of Rask, those two have been practically joined at the hip.” + +Before Cyrus can agree with your observation Talia steps in and interrupts. + +“I found it! I found the book! We can perform the ritual!” she exclaims. +“Already? That was quick. Okay, well you study it and we’ll get to it as soon as possible.” +“But you are Shadow Master my love, only YOU can do it properly.” Talia says and thrusts the book upon you. +“Oh…well I suppose my magical abilities have come a long way from what they used to be. Very well then, I shall study this tome and we can give the new eternals a proper induction into the shadows like we all were right?” + +Talia and Cyrus both nod at your remark. + +You excuse yourself and retire to your bedroom to begin a long night of studying. +> Old Tomes (The Ritual of Ascension) +While studying the book that contains the initiation ritual in the library, Talia comes over to see how you’re doing. + +“Still at it? I didn’t realize the ritual was that complex.” She says. +“It isn’t actually. From what I can tell it just requires a lot of focus and belief. I’m fairly certain I can handle that. I actually got sidetracked by some of these other tomes here.” You answer and point out a bunch of other books nearby. + +“Heh, sort of funny to see you like this. I remember a time when you weren’t the most eager to perform any sort of magic mainly because you weren’t very good at it.” +“Trust me, it’s still not my favorite area, but I feel I have been growing in power and gotten better. So I figured I should learn some of the other major rituals and such.” + +Talia nods as she looks through the books. Eventually she picks up a heavy black one and begins glancing through it. + +“The ritual of ascension? What’s that?” +“Good question. I actually wasted quite a bit of time reading through that one, before starting on reading the stuff I was supposed to be reading about. Basically I don’t know what it does exactly. In fact some of it is in a language I don’t even recognize.” +“Yeah, I see that.” +“The rest of the wording I have read is almost deliberately cryptic. Terribly annoying and not very helpful. You’d think whoever wrote it down, would’ve made it a lot clearer. Well anyway, I’ll study it in length some other time. Right now I’m just going to go over the initiation ritual once more and then get some sleep.” +“Very well. I’ll see you then.” Talia says and kisses you before leaving. + +After she leaves, you take another glance though the book containing the ritual of ascension. Still not understanding it any better, you toss it aside and return to more immediate studies.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While you aren’t convinced that going to Delerg is necessarily the best idea, maybe you do need a change of scenery. With the population being unhelpful and the troubles with Flog, it might very well be best to leave before this gets worse. Besides, while it isn’t common knowledge that you made a deal with Flog to enslave the northern most towns in exchange for his help, there have always been “rumors” amongst some of the Raskians and eventually those rumors are going to become an even bigger problem. + +Part of you feels like you’re “running away” from conflict and that somewhat bothers you. However, you spent your life running away from the Empire and striking at the right time to strengthen your own position while weakening their own. Why shouldn’t you employ a similar outlook on life in general? Retreat from an unfavorable position to hopefully a better one, it couldn’t hurt at this point. + +The next day you call all the shadows to gather in the main hall and announce that you’ve conversed with Dendrin and that he’s told you that the shadows need to go back to reclaim the shadow homeland in Delerg and that your future is there not in Rask. Many of the human shadows seem to be enthusiastic about this idea. The Eternal shadows less so, but that might be for several reasons. In any event, you tell everyone that all of you will be packing up everything and moving on as soon as possible. Since it is looking a snowstorm is coming you’ll have plenty of time to prepare and you’ll leave Evergloom when it subsides. You also ask some of the older shadows if they know where the original temple is exactly located in Delerg. Brother Theo says that he knows and that he remembers visiting it once back in his youth when he was escorting some rebels to the shadow safe houses in Delerg. + +“Despite it being in ruins and covered in overgrowth, I still felt it to be a place of power. Not power in the traditional sense, but more like a feeling. A feeling that the cause of the Shadows was the correct one and that by trusting in Dendrin, we would eventually return to the temple of our forefathers one day. It looks like that day has finally come and I couldn’t be happier.” Brother Theo says. +“Well brother, we aren’t there yet. We’ve still got to get there. The Empire might be gone, but who knows what might’ve taken its place. The journey still might be dangerous.” You reply. +“I know Shadow Master, but Dendrin guided us successfully through the Empire War. I know he will guide us to our home just as easily.” +“Yes, I suppose he will.” + +A month passes before you can actually get going due to the snowstorm. Everyone’s glad to leave too being stuck in the fort for so long. You wish you hadn’t had to eat up a lot of your food supply though, but you figure you’ll worry about food along the way either by hunting for it or trading for it when possible. + +As you and the shadows begin your exodus from Evergloom, you look back at the old Empire fort that was your home for so long. You wonder how long it’ll be before someone else takes residence there. If you had to guess, Flog will probably figure out it isn’t occupied anymore, take it over and start using it as a staging ground to assault the southern towns of Rask. You’ll bet the Raskians will wish you were still around when that eventually happens. + +The journey through Rask is slow going. You can’t just speed yourselves up considering all the equipment and belongings you’ve got packed on wagons, carts and horses. Still, you aren’t in any danger as you pass through Raskian towns. While it alarms the people to see so many shadows nobody dares attack you. You find trade easy, as they are eager to help see you on your way. You didn’t really think you’d have trouble traveling through Rask though, it’s after Rask that you’re more concerned about. + +From what news has reached you, ever since the Empire fell the Quala province has fragmented into several bickering warlords, each fighting for control of what’s left. In some ways the people of the land are in a worse situation than when the Empire existed, but that isn’t something you can really dwell on now. Your goal is to get through the land and you’re sure to run into someone’s territory as you travel through and they’ll no doubt be hostile about it. Not much can be done except hope for the best because much like speeding yourselves up isn’t an option, neither is cloaking yourselves. Well you could, but those horses and wagons are still going to be visible. + +“How are we going to play this?” Talia asks as you stand at the Rask border. +“I know our information structure started falling into disuse when we drove the Empire from Rask, but does anyone have any information on what the exact situation is in Quala?” you ask. +“Last I heard, an ex-Empire general declared himself the local warlord of the northern most portion of Quala. A General Ackerson I believe.” Cyrus remarks. +“Never heard of him.” +“I don’t think most did, even before the rebellion he wasn’t a very prominent general and the Empire tended to have more than a few useless high ranking officers that never did much. I only knew about him due to all the years working in the shadow cells and keeping abreast of all the Empire military commanders. He got his rank mostly due to family connections and was never put in charge of anything important. I don’t even think he was even in charge of anything during the rebellion days, at least not that know of when I was still situated in Quala. Still, I assume he must have some skill in combat and have some charisma if he’s made himself a warlord now. Well that or very rich which might be more of the case.” Brother Theo adds. +“Okay, any other information on warlords in the area?” you ask. + +Nobody knows anything else other than he seems to be the top one. Funny how the most obscure people can rise to power when the opportunity presents itself. Stepping off the road, you could probably just trespass through General Ackerson’s territory to reach Delerg and you’d only have him to deal with him if need be, of course it’s going to be even slower going due to all your baggage. The terrain that way is known to be somewhat hilly and if gets too rough, you might even have to leave some of your stuff behind. Rough terrain aside, there’s also the open fields you’d have to cross too. Not much cover if a large patrol of archers happened upon you. + +Of course sticking to the road will be quicker and unobtrusive to your baggage carts, but you’d still have to trespass through Ackerson’s territory and assuming you got through that, you’d probably have to go through some other warlord’s territory as well before you reached Delerg. On top of all this, you have no idea how you’ll be treated by any towns you pass through. +> Travel on road +You’ve got a lot of baggage to travel with and the longer you can do it on road, the quicker you’ll get to your destination. Whatever tolls or other harassment that any wannabe emperors have in store can be dealt with. Certainly can’t be worse than what you’ve already faced. + +“Okay we’re taking the roads brothers and sisters. Remember that we are potentially entering hostile territory, so keep alert and be prepared.” You tell everyone before continuing on the journey. + +Half a day passes without incident; of course it doesn’t stay that way when several people patrolling the road up ahead and immediately head your way. They aren’t dressed in proper Empire armor, but the way they swagger with self-importance; you’re guessing they’re probably some sort of militia recruits under the command of this General Ackerson. + +Several of the Eternals are itching for a fight and while you don’t doubt you’d win, you’d rather try to get through without doing it. Last thing you need is to fight a running battle through the Quala province. + +“Shadow scum! This area belongs to General Ackerson, don’t you know your kind aren’t wanted here? It was your kind that caused this once great nation to fall, but fortunately we have people like the general to pick up the pieces to make it stronger than ever.” The leader of the soldiers says. +“Uh huh, we’re just passing through and have no desire to start a fight.” You reply, but of course this idiot doesn’t have a sense of self-preservation. +“Oh no? What’s all this then? A baggage train of supplies to support your war effort? I don’t believe you shadow! Why should any of us trust you after the great betrayal?” +“Because if we wanted to destroy you we would’ve done it already, empire dog!” one of the Eternals snaps. + +This isn’t going well and several of the soldiers begin to ready their weapons. + +“As I said, we are merely passing through and have no desire to start a war. We already have our freedom, we don’t care if you’re trying to rebuild the Empire or something else to take its place. We just want to be left in peace. However if you really wish to pursue this course of action, let me remind you that you are currently outmatched and outnumbered. We whittled away the Empire with forces smaller than what you see here. It would not take more than ten of us to destroy whatever government you’re trying to re-establish now. Are you such fools that you would willingly throw your lives away so easily? You say to the soldiers. + +The leader realizes that he’ll have to swallow his overflowing pride and capitulate to your accurate assessment of the situation. + +“…very well…let the shadows pass.” He meekly remarks and he and his men step aside. + +You and the shadows pass through, but you know that’s just he beginning of what you’ll probably have to face. Cyrus mentions that perhaps they should be killed so they don’t warn anyone, but really whether they do or not isn’t going to make much of a difference. You’re a big enough target that anyone can see you if they just open their eyes. + +You soon pass through a town in the process of being rebuilt, your reception there isn’t much better. The citizens all give you an evil eye and the soldiers stand ready to attack at anytime. Nobody does anything, but the second town you pass through makes up for that… + +“BOOOOOOO! Go home shadow shit!” +“Zealots! Sheep! Go suck your god’s cock!” +“Get out of our town you fucking fanatics!” + +These citizens are obviously very upset about the shadows. So much so that not only do they call you names, they also start throwing rotten fruit at some of you. This is too much for the eternals who are were barely holding their homicidal urges in check to begin with. + +Before you can react, several eternals respond to the rotten fruit by shooting bolts at the peasants. Naturally none of them miss either. The town’s militia steps in and before you know it, you’ve killed half of the town and the rest of the citizens are running for their lives. The eternals aren’t contents with letting anyone live though, so they make that extra effort to chase most of them down. They seem to get a sadistic pleasure out of it and you have to rein them in. + +Naturally you’re pretty mad, but mostly at yourself for trying to cross Quala by road in the first place. You can see now this was a really bad idea, but now you’ll just have to make the best of it. + +The next day one of your people says they’ve scouted ahead and that a large army is heading your way. Worse, more troops are heading from other directions as well. Cyrus advises that you all should dump all non-essentials, cloak, and make a speed run towards the wilderness. Yvette point out that several of the shadow children or even babies in some cases don’t have such abilities and their parents aren’t likely to leave them. Theo says he knows of an old hide out and you could lay low there for a while and it is defensible. Talia is strangely silent on the whole matter, in fact she’s been silent during most of the trip, like she’s preoccupied with something else. You can’t imagine what given the shit you’re waist deep in right now, you’ll have to ask her about it later. + +Eventually you take Theo’s advice since running isn’t a real option right now and you need a good defensible place. You do take Cyrus’ advice though and have everyone dump all non-essential equipment. + +The trip to the old hideout is uneventful, unfortunately Theo forgot to take into consideration that some of his old hideouts might’ve actually been discovered since the last time he used them. This one in particular has been turned into a battle mage enclave. You didn’t even know Ackerson had any under his command, but he does and they took great measures in protecting their private base with magical security. They were alerted as soon as you entered the area and took steps to ambush you. + +The fight with the battle mages takes a heavy toll. Along with many shadows, you also lose Yvette as well as Dravin. Cyrus launched himself into a rage cutting down several of the mages before being heavily wounded. He’s still alive and being carried on a stretcher, but you doubt if he’ll make it, if you ever get to the temple. Which at this point is looking less likely since you’re now effectively stuck inside the hideout and surrounded by General Ackerson’s troops. + +Many of the shadows are praying to Dendrin which you encourage if only to keep their morale up, but of course you’re holding no such faith. The only ones seemingly having a good time are the new eternals who are enjoying the carnage way too much. You don’t care though given the circumstances as they’re about the only worthwhile fighters you’ve got left. + +While the shadows are used to fighting near impossible odds, not all of those were victories and this will unfortunately be one of those times. + +You think up the only possible plan that might work and that’s if you take all the eternals and try to distract the majority of the army while some of the other shadows get away. When you explain your plan, everyone is content to listen and obey since there really isn’t a choice in the matter. + +“Theo, I want you to lead the escape since you still know the area best. Talia, you’re going to be in charge and possibly the new…” +“I’m staying.” Talia says cutting you off. +“Talia, I don’t know if I’m coming back from this battle.” +“Exactly. Why would I leave you now of all times? Besides, you’re taking my…children with you. If we are to die today, then I would do it as a family.” Talia says and grabs your hand. + +You look down at her hand and then her face. You can see that there will be no changing her mind. + +“Very well, then Theo, you will be the new Shadow Master. Good luck and I hope you understand Dendrin better than I did.” + +Theo thanks you for the honor and prepares everyone to get ready to move. You, Talia and the rest of the eternals prepare for the attack. It’s funny; you realize that the shadows will no longer be split anymore between human and eternal. Assuming they make it, the surviving shadows will all be human. Perhaps it’s better this way, eternals were not meant to be holy men and worshipping fickle gods. They were meant to die in battle. That was what you were originally bred for after all. + +“You two, carry Cyrus into battle. He’s one of us and he’ll die like one of us.” You say to two of the new eternals. Cyrus, while struggling to maintain consciousness manages a weak smile in your direction. + +“You ready my love?” Talia asks. +“I was born for this.” You answer. + +And with that you, Talia, Cyrus and the last of the eternals go forth and face your destiny. + +Your names are forgotten, but the surviving solders of that battle always remembered the day they didn’t win a battle against shadows, but instead remember the day that they almost lost a battle against eternals.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 35 + +Finally after years of set backs, Rask is at last free of the Empire and the other provinces are sure to follow. Kane is dead and most of the last Empire fanatics in Rask are dead. The Empire can’t send any more troops because it’s barely holding on to what it has. It’s the beginning of the end for it, but for the shadows it’s just the beginning. + +For the past couple years during the mopping up process, the shadows have slowly been withdrawing from other parts of the Empire and heading to Rask. This consolidation of forces is something that Cyrus has been wanting for years, but of course you never felt it was the right time. Now with the Empire on the decline you can agree that it is something that can be done. + +Fort Defiance has become the new shadow home and has officially been renamed as Evergloom, not the most original name, but everyone seems to like it. + +Ironically Evergloom is about one of the only major beacons of “light” in Rask nowadays. The sheer destruction that Kane caused to most of the towns in Rask before he died has left little in the way of civilization. The rebuilding process is in swing, but it’ll be awhile before it gets back to the way it was, perhaps it’ll never be the same again and nature will reclaim the land. + +It hardly matters though; the shadows have their own rebuilding process to go through, one of which is how leadership is going to be settled once and for all. As it stands, you still haven’t officially taken full control of the shadows yet and it’s still more or less run by a “council” of sorts made up of you, Talia and Cyrus. Cyrus has been somewhat less antagonistic towards you since the Empire was driven from Rask, but that might be because he’s running out of supporters. Your decisions and victories have earned the respect of most shadows and they see you as leader. + +There are also the new eternal shadows that have been coming along in their training very well and the well-known fact that you’ve spoken directly to Dendrin, though you haven’t lately, not for a long time in fact. Doesn’t stop the fact that you say you have though when you want to get things done. Part of you feels like the biggest hypocrite in the world for it, but then the other part of you feels like your ends have justified the means at this point so why care about it? You’ve kept the shadows together with lies, but really the whole organization has been kept together through lies for centuries, you’re not really doing anything different. + +Perhaps though it isn’t so much the lying that gets to you, but rather the idea of being a shadow when you’ve never really “felt” like one. You stayed motivated by fighting the Empire because that was something you could get behind, but now what are you supposed to do? Revere Dendrin and worship him? Not something you’re really interested in doing full time especially considering your knowledge of him. + +Of course then there’s always Talia, who is practically the only reason at this point why you’d want to stay leader for the shadows, well that and the budding desire to be in charge thanks to your Eternal heritage. There’s also the fact that given how much effort you went through to hold the shadows together it would almost seem a waste to toss it all away. + +Yes, a decision is going to have to be made soon, but not today. You fall asleep later that night and after all this time you finally get some “divine” advice. + +“It’s been awhile.” You say. +“Don’t tell me you actually missed me.” Dendrin remarks. +“Hardly, though I was wondering if you’d lost interest at last.” +“In you? Not at all, I’ve just been quietly observing. I’ve found that you seem to work best with minimal influence. Keep doing what you’re doing and I’m unlikely to ever lose interest in you.” +“Keep doing what I’m doing eh? So you want me to officially take full leadership of the shadows.” +“I didn’t say that. Not then and not now. Do what you want. I told you that before. If you’re asking me what I think, yes I would prefer you to take up as leader and quite honestly I’m surprised you haven’t done it already.” +“I was planning to, but now that the Empire is on its way out, I’m not sure if I want to be bothered.” +“Nonsense, you’re an Eternal. Aren’t you lot sort of born to lead?” +“I suppose, but I can’t see myself spending the rest of my life living a priestly existence in our new monastery where all I do is tell people to kiss your ass all night and day, let alone do it myself.” + +This remark causes a booming laugh echo throughout your mind. + +“So don’t do that.” Dendrin remarks. +“Well wouldn’t I sort of have to?” +“You haven’t for this long, why would you start now?” +“I mean I know I’d be faking it, but I still see it as a dreary existence.” +“And like I said, don’t do that. You’re the leader, what you say goes. If you want to abandon the old shadow ways there isn’t anything keeping you from doing it. I don’t usually point out the obvious, but what you have right now is potentially very powerful. You have in your hands is the ability to guide a religion, an ideology. You shouldn’t waste that. Take advantage before someone else does.” +“I’m not blind, I see that, but I question where do you come in? Surely if I some how lessened the shadows’ reliance on prayer, they’d also lose their abilities.” +“Not entirely unless you made them stop worshipping me altogether.” +“But I don’t worship you, I mean not really and I still have my powers.” +“Well that’s because you’re special, but if you did have a little more faith in me, your powers would increase too. You could be as strong as your old Master Ebon for example. That’s just how it works and you have take the good with the bad, but I’m sure you knew that already.” +“So it would seem.” You answer. + +Shortly after this exchange you wake up. + +“Something wrong?” Talia asks when she sees you waking up so suddenly. +“Huh? Oh, nothing. Dendrin just spoke to me again.” +“He did? What were his divine words this time?” +“Oh…uh he said that now is the right time to officially become the Shadow Master. +“That’s wonderful! Though I thought he would’ve told you a lot sooner…no matter though as I’m sure he had his reasons.” + +Good old trusting Talia. You love her, but you’ll never understand how naïve she can be when it comes to this. As you start to get ready to call a shadow gathering there’s a knock on your room door. + +“Who’s there?” you ask. +“It’s me brother. Brother Gannon. Brother Cyrus wants to see you immediately in the meeting room. He says it’s extremely important.” +“What’s it about?” +“I dunno, he just said it’s really important and he needs to see you immediately.” +“Okay then, thank you brother.” You reply. + +As you continue to get dressed, Talia speaks to you again. + +“What do you think he wants?” +“With Cyrus, who knows?” +“Do you want me to come with you?” +“What for? You might as well get all the shadows together while I’m talking to Cyrus.” +“But…I don’t know…I’m just a little concerned.” +“Aren’t you always telling me I should try to get along with Cyrus? Besides, he’s actually been tolerable lately. Maybe with the Empire gone, he’s lightened up a bit.” +“Maybe…well if you think it’ll be okay, I’ll go round up the brothers and sisters.” + +As you and Talia part company you make your way to the meeting room. On your way it occurs to you that Cyrus may very be planning to kill you rather than talk. You aren’t sensing anyone cloaked yet, but then maybe they’ll all be in the room with him. + +If this is an ambush, the only one he’s going to be able to count on to help him is probably Draven. Cyrus just doesn’t have the clout he once did in fact you believe if he tried, he wouldn’t be accepted as leader anyway. Of course you don’t have any intention of getting killed if this is what he’s planning. + +You open up the door and see Cyrus standing near the table by himself. You can’t sense anyone else; maybe he wants this to be a one on one matter. + +“There you are, I wasn’t sure you were coming. I want to speak to you on something very important and this has to be settled right now.” + +No doubt he’s talking about the leadership position. You know he still desperately wants it and he’s just going through the motions of being civilized about it right now. You aren’t waiting around… + +Before Cyrus even knows what’s going on, you fire your armbow at him. He reacts in time to move, but not before a bolt goes into his arm. + +“Agh! What the fuck are you doing?!” he says clutching his arm and backing away from you. +“I’m settling this right now, we both know what this is all about. You’re going to kill me because you want to be in charge and that’s not happening.” + +You rush forward to attack and Cyrus once again dodges and backs away from you. He hasn’t even drawn his weapon yet. +“What? No! Look! I just called you in to talk! I was going to tell you that I’ve come to the realization that you’re the worthy one to lead the shadows! I know it’s taken me a long time, but I see that you’re the chosen one of Dendrin.” +“Bullshit, you’ve desired to be shadow master since Master Ebon died.” +“And probably even a little bit before, but I see that I was wrong to think such things even if I never spoke them out loud. Perhaps Dendrin punished me for it by never speaking to me. He speaks to you and your actions have lead us to finally be free of the Empire. Why should I keep questioning your ability? It’s obvious that you have a greater destiny and I realize that I should just graciously step aside. Who am I to question the will of Dendrin? I yield to you shadow master.” + +Cyrus seems pretty sincere in his words and despite everything he has always been a dedicated disciple of Dendrin for good or ill. If he really believes that Dendrin has a plan for you, he wouldn’t stand in the way of it. + +Now that you really think about it, he’s never really done anything that would indicate that he was ever actively trying to kill you. It’s possible you’ve just been paranoid about this whole thing. +> Kill Cyrus anyway +Your paranoia is justified. Cyrus might even believe his own words right now, but he still wants to be shadow master and he’ll kill you to do it. Maybe not today, maybe not tomorrow, but he’ll try it when you least expect it. He’s probably just biding his time; you aren’t fooled by this act. Cyrus may claim to be a dedicated shadow, but he’s an Eternal first and he’ll always have that desire to lead within him. + +“I’m glad you yielded to me Cyrus, because there’s no point in putting off the inevitable!” you shout and lunge forward to attack. + +Cyrus doesn’t move fast enough to dodge your attack and your sword sinks deep into his abdomen. However he also manages to unleash two smaller daggers he had hidden and swings both arms around you to plunge them into your back. The pair of you fall to the floor with each others weapons lodged in vital organs. + +“Why brother? I was going to join you…” he gasps. +“No… you weren’t. You just…stabbed me…” +“You attacked…now we’re both done for and along with us, the shadows…” Cyrus says and starts to fall unconscious. + +You attempt to grab at Cyrus’ daggers in your back, but your own lifeforce starts to fade as well. + +“Talia still lives…she’ll fix everything…she’ll lead…” you mumble and then join Cyrus in death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“I think we should take this opportunity to make them see the way of the shadows.” You say. +“What?!” Yvette exclaims. +“Are you serious?” Talia asks. +“Well okay maybe not all of them, but I’d think that with the right teaching they could become valuable assets.” +“NO! These are the enemy and must be destroyed! You said so yourself when we first began this mission!” Yvette says. +“And perhaps I was a bit hasty. I can’t be entitled to speak out of turn and make a mistake once in awhile?” +“No brother, but I think leaving these…abominations alive for whatever reason is a bigger mistake.” +“Abominations…and I suppose you believe me and Talia are abominations too eh sister?” +“Wha…no! I mean…(sputter) you’re different! You…” +“How? Me, Talia, and Cyrus for that matter were all brought up from birth and indoctrinated to serve the Empire, but what happened? We saw the truth of Dendrin’s wisdom instead! Is it not possible that these…children who aren’t even as old as we were be re-educated to do the same?” +“Well…I suppose, but…” +“Think about it sister, some of the greatest enemies of the Empire were brought up within the very heart of it! Let’s continue to turn the Empire’s obsessive need for control against itself! And better yet, bring more servants into the fold of Dendrin.” + +Sister Yvette looks a bit hesitant, it’s obvious she has some real problems with this plan, but she isn’t really sure how to argue against you. Part of it stems from you making a bit of a point, and the other stems from the fact that despite her own confidence being better than it was, she still feels inferior to you…perhaps that’s just the aura you have as an Eternal though. + +“Yes…I suppose I see the wisdom in attempting to educate these children in the ways of Dendrin.” Sister Yvette says. She might not believe it now, but in time she’ll either convince herself or get used to it. Either way you just need her obedience. + +As for the remainder of the shadows if they have anything meaningful to say on the subject they keep it to themselves. That just leaves Talia, who is going to require a little bit more convincing since you sense her look of disagreement. + +“Um…sister Yvette, could you and the rest leave me and sister Talia alone for a moment.” + +As the rest of them leave, you move over to Talia who looks out over the hundreds of eternal containers. + +“I sense some disapproval from this plan?” +“Not so much disapproval, but rather apprehension.” +“What about the training? I know it won’t be easy, but I figure we can open up that ritual portal to Dendrin and let him decide if they’re worthy or not, you know, like he did with us.” +“And you know how to do that? Because I sure don’t! It’s not like Master Ebon or Brother Gray imparted that knowledge on to me before they died!” +“Well your magic is strong, and hey I know Cyrus has some old shadow tomes back at Fort Defiance, we can probably find something in there about it.” +“Well I’m glad you seem to have this all figured out then, just wish you would’ve let me on this sooner.” +“I would have, but this honestly just came to mind. I mean how was I to know that these kids were going to be safely locked up in oversized glass tubes? I thought we were going to be waist deep in their blood by now.” +“So who is going to train them? I know it’s not going to be you. Me I suppose right?” +“Well…you would be the best qualified…but hey Sister Yvette could help you and other shadows too! In fact I could have some transferred here just in case of an Empire attack when…” +“Damn it I’m not worried about all that, I’m wondering WHY you came up with this plan at all! I know there’s another reason than just turning them against the Empire or even bringing new shadows into Dendrin’s fold and don’t say that there isn’t! We’re the same and we’ve bonded as lovers. I know there’s more going on in your head because I know YOU. Now tell me. + +Talia never was one to mince words and perhaps it is time you didn’t either. + +“Very well my love. You should know everything.” + +And from there you tell Talia everything…except you don’t. + +You tell her that Dendrin did not only speak to you on the day Gloom was attacked, you tell her he’s spoken to you in the past on several occasions. You just never said anything about it before Gloom because you didn’t want to be thought a liar and be labeled a heretic. + +You also tell her that Dendrin has urged you to follow your own path and to seize leadership of the shadows. You didn’t want to initially because you wanted to try to hold things together because things seemed so fractured, but given that Dendrin has recently warned you about Cyrus’ potential treachery you thought it might be best to have another group of allies in case the worst occurs. + +“So…we’re keeping this a secret from Cyrus?” +“Yes, I think that would be for the best. If he knew about this, you know he’d be against it. Cyrus is clinging to the old shadow ways and still has clout, but that will be coming to an end soon.” +“I dunno…I mean I agree that Cyrus shouldn’t be leader and that you would make an excellent shadow master especially since Dendrin talks to you, but hiding things from Cyrus and possibly planning for his death? I mean is there no other way? He’s not just a shadow, he’s one of us.” +“So are a few other eternals from our class if you remember. These little bastards here were going to be against us until we intervened…which bring me to my other reason and this one is harder for me to tell because it involves you and me.” +“All of this involves the both of us, what else could it possibly be that would trouble me more than conspiracy against one of our brothers?” + +You bring up the very real and unaltered truth that Dendrin told you about eternals. The fact that none of you are able to have children due how you were created. Talia gets quiet and sits down for a moment. She tries very hard not to cry, but her voice is obviously quivering when she speaks again. + +“…I…guess (sniff) that explains a lot…but um…I mean Dendrin could do something…I mean he…” +“Dendrin… (Sigh) …how do I put this? Dendrin is…complex. It’s true that he helps us directly by granting our magical abilities and perhaps in ways of major importance when he warned me about Gloom, but he’s not here to collectively hold the hands of the shadows. (You can’t believe you just repeated Dendrin’s own words) He would prefer that the shadows made their own destiny as it were. I mean, I’m sure if he wanted to, he could’ve just laid waste to the Empire a long time ago, but he didn’t. He wanted the shadows to endure and in enduring grow stronger from the situation they were placed in. Just like you…we will have to endure in not being able to have children. But getting back to the heart of the matter, that’s part of why I decided that we should try to save these young eternals. I mean you’ll get to train them first hand in the ways of Dendrin. It would almost be like you were the mother of several hundred eternal shadows.” +“But then they can never produce offspring either.” +“Well we don’t know that. I mean it looks like they’ve been altered in a significantly different way. But even if they can’t so what? If we had had children there would be no guarantee that they’d all survive to reproduce either. You mustn’t worry about this, because after all is said and done, you will still be doing Dendrin’s work and serving him faithfully and really isn’t that what it’s all about?” + +You look into her eyes and touch her on the shoulder. She grabs your hand on her shoulder and looks down for a moment and breathes deeply. After a couple of seconds she looks back up at you. + +“Very well, this does seem to be a suitable course of action. But quite frankly I don’t think we can save all of these children. Some of them are going to be lost causes and if the Empire ever attacks this place in force, we’re going to have to collapse this place anyway, we can’t properly defend it, at least not at this time.” +“Of course, I agree. I trust you will do what you can.” +“I always do my love.” + +With this new plan settled, you and Talia kiss each other before parting company. You tell Sister Yvette that she is to report to Talia directly now and that you’ll be contacting Brother Theo about the new changes. Fortunately he’s still alive, when you check to see how those other shadow cell attack turned out. No reports have even come in about the attack on the camp, which isn’t too surprising given all the chaos going on elsewhere that brother Theo caused and the fact you didn’t leave any survivors or let anyone escape. + +Eventually you make your way back to Rask which you’re happy to find out Cyrus was smart enough to not risk attacking Fort Destiny. Unfortunately he caused a different set back entirely. Talia was about the only one keeping the Flog and the rest of his orcs on good terms. You rarely interacted with him and he never got along with Cyrus who was usually condescending to him. While you were gone apparently a small skirmish ensued between the orcs and shadows. Amazingly nobody was actually killed, but several were wounded and ultimately Flog left with the remainder of the orcs. + +“What?! They’re gone? Where?!” you ask. +“How should I know, further north I think where the rest of those overgrown idiots dwell. I don’t care, we don’t need them anyway!” Cyrus says. “And where is Sister Talia? Did you get her killed in your foolish mission?” +“No our mission was a success, and she’ll be taking care of some of the business we have in the south from now on because it’s apparent my attention should start being more focused here.” +“Oh so now you’ve decided that, after all those times I’ve suggested that since you first arrived here? You know what, I’ve been putting in work here for nearly a decade now, what makes you even think you know what the best plan of action is here?” +“Well I wouldn’t have pissed off our orc allies if I had the desire to attack Fort Destiny for one. (Sigh) Cyrus I’m on your side for Dendrin’s sake! I mean we’re supposed to be fighting the Empire, not each other. Can’t you see that brother?” + +Cyrus looks you up and down with distain in his face. + +“All I see is someone that talks a good game about serving Dendrin, but ultimately his words ring hollow to my ears. Always have. Time will tell though, brother and there will be a reckoning. Dendrin will not suffer false prophets and pretenders. I hope for your sake you aren’t one because his wrath will be terrible. Do what you want.” Cyrus says and leaves the room. + +Funny how Cyrus is probably the only one who can see through your bullshit, yet still be painfully wrong. More amusement for Dendrin you suppose. +> Diplomacy (Year 31) +This is really annoying. + +You cut down the orc you wounded from before. You knew he wasn’t getting far in this blizzard. Unfortunately you’ve lost sight of Flog again. You’ll pick up the trail again to be sure, but this whole thing is a complete waste of time. + +If Cyrus hadn’t pissed off the orcs, they could’ve been sent to prevent Kane from destroying another town. Instead the Flog and his merry little band have been raiding the little villages north of Fort Defiance, villages that were supporting the shadows. + +This can’t continue and will not continue. + +A cave lies up ahead, knowing Flog he’s probably set up some sort of crude ambush, but that’s where he’s going to be. You need to get out of this blizzard anyway before you freeze. Shadows don’t have any magic that keeps you warm after all. + +You’d like to where Cyrus is since he’s supposed to be helping you in this task. (This is fault after all) You told him to not to bother chasing those other orcs as they were obviously just a distraction. + +The cave provides welcoming warmth from the cold outside. It also provides a welcoming committee in the form of three ogres. This would be Flog’s crude ambush. + +You dodge the first ogre trying to cave your head in with a club and make a deep slash across his great fat belly. Innards are emptied out onto the cave floor along with a foul odor. The other two ogres knock over their mortally wounded companion in his own blood and shit to reach you. + +As powerful as they are, ogres in your experience have never been particular good fighters. It’s over reliance on brute strength and no match for your own abilities. A lot easier than trolls that’s for sure. You never want to have to fight one of those things again. + +You easily avoid the ogres’ attacks and hamstring the pair of them before they even know what’s going on. You jump on the back of one of them and put a dagger through the back of his neck. He throws you off as he gags on his own blood. + +The last ogre crawls at you while you shake off the cobwebs of being thrown into the cave wall. A familiar “shhh thunk!” sound is heard and you see a bolt going through the eye of the ogre. He continues to crawl at you for a moment before succumbing to brain death. You look to your left and see Cyrus loading up another bolt in his armbow. + +“These creatures were always unworthy of being in the presence of Dendrin’s faithful to begin with.” Cyrus says calmly +“Where have you been?” +“I got lost in the blizzard temporarily when I was chasing those orcs. I’m here now so let’s finish this brother.” + +You shake you head sometimes wondering why you don’t just kill him and declare yourself shadow master, but he’s still got enough followers to make that problematic and thanks to this orc distraction, you need his help. There’s also the fact that Talia would still prefer you to somehow find a way to work it out with him. There have been times where you think you have, but then there is some sort of disagreement and the both of you are back where you started. + +You figure all of the same reasons are why Cyrus hasn’t attempted to kill you and declare himself shadow master. He certainly could get away with it up here in the hinterlands and you sort of wondered if that’s why he agreed to come with you on this mission. He could kill you and then claim you fell in battle. Who’d really know? But again, he needs you, probably even more than he’d like to admit. You also know that perhaps somewhere within him, he’d prefer that you’d be on better terms as well. + +The pair of you travel further into the cave and eventually you come across a single figure standing by a small fire. It’s Flog. + +“Shadows, Flog sees that you have finally tracked him.” +“Wasn’t exactly difficult considering all the raiding you were doing. You really brought this upon yourself Flog.” You answer. +“How else are we supposed to sustain ourselves? Can’t farm in this land and orcs not farmers anyway. Hunting is scarce lately. Too much competition with giants and unfriendly ogre tribes. Humie villages have lots of supplies. They have more than enough. Stupid for having a settlement in hostile territory anyway.” +“It wasn’t excessively hostile until you started raiding them and two, those supplies are to help the rebellion against the Empire, you do remember that war remember?” +“Flog remembers. Flog remembers all too well since shadows just used orcs as sword fodder to hide behind. Shadows no better than the Empire.” + +At this point Cyrus speaks up. “Why are we wasting words on this savage, let us kill the beast the be done with it.” +“Huh, you seemed to hide the most. If not for pretty female shadow, Flog would’ve killed you a long time ago.” +“Enough! Flog, your alliance with the shadows while probably not ideal, it was to your benefit. Since our split, the Empire has managed to make a small come back here in Rask. If the Empire gets strong enough to defeat us, you know you’ll be next.” +“Bah! Flog not care anymore! Empire is weak enough now. Empire will never be able to tame the upper reaches of Rask. Flog will make his home there and be free. Empire YOU shadows problem now.” +“Very well Flog, but there’s one problem with that plan. Namely you’re not getting out of this cave to be able to live free. You won’t be living at all in fact.” +“Oh…right…Flog see…” + +At this point you fully expect Flog to make a last moment attack, but he doesn’t, instead he takes his hand away from his weapon. + +“Anyway Flog can convince shadows?” he asks. +“Wait, are you seriously trying to negotiate?” you ask +“Yeah, if it gets Flog to live.” + +You can’t help but chuckle a little. Talia always told you Flog was intelligent for an orc. You can only imagine how intelligent Captain Gruz was considering he was the originator of this orc rebellion. Cyrus of course isn’t finding this amusing at all. + +“Why are you laughing? This orc scum insults Dendrin and us! I’m putting an end to this…” + +Cyrus attempts to shoot Flog with his armbow, but you stop him from doing so and the bolt flies harmlessly into the wall. This would be a perfect time for Flog to try to escape, but he doesn’t. Either he’s smart enough to know you’d just find him again, or he’s serious about coming to some sort of agreement. This situation isn’t totally unsalvageable with Flog, but it certainly makes your current situation with Cyrus worse. + +“Brother, you deal with this orc barbarian if you wish, but I’ll not have any part of it! And if whatever deal you make with it bites all of us, I will be the first one to make sure you pay for your poor decisions! I make this vow to Dendrin himself!” Cyrus exclaims and storms off. + +After a brief moment of silence, you speak to Flog. + +“Alright Flog, this is a negotiation, but you won’t be changing anything about them because everything is going to be on MY terms. Okay first off, you can’t raid the villages north of Fort Defiance anymore. The people are expecting the shadows to protect them and we can’t do that AND fight the Empire. I think you know what takes precedence, however if we can’t protect them, they won’t give us any supplies because they’re either losing them to you or they lose faith in us and won’t help.” +“But if Flog don’t do that, what remains of my tribe will see me as weak and kill me anyway.” +“Yes I know. And we’d just be left with the same problem. So this is what I want you to do. I don’t want you to raid the villages.I want you to enslave them.” +“You want Flog to enslave the villages?” +“Yes, I assume you still have enough orcs to do it, and if you don’t I’m sure you can also engage in your favorite past time of beating up ogres into submission to join you. In fact I’d prefer you to do that, just so we don’t have to deal with those big lugs sniffing around the fort. They waste our time. So enslave the villagers and you’ll never have to raid them again and you can take what you want when you want…and when the shadows want.” +“Hur hur…Flog see now. Won’t that make shadows look bad?” +“Who is going to know? It isn’t like many people travel back and forth past Fort Defiance, let alone to those remote villages. Just keep anyone from escaping and we should be fine. I trust you’ll be able to handle all this.” +“Sure, sure. Flog can do all that. Giants might still be a problem, but Flog will find a way.” +“Glad to hear it. I’m counting on you to keep that savage north tamed up there, while we can focus on the Empire.” +“Hrmmm, lotta faith in Flog. Though you shadow only place faith in your god.” +“I place faith in your desire to live. Talia’s told me about how smart you are before. I know you can see this to be a good deal for you. You get to be practically independent and a leader and all you have to do is supply us every once in awhile. Better than dying by my hand I’d imagine.” +“Huh yes good deal. Liked pretty shadow female, always dealt straight with Flog. Still not as pretty as orc female. Too skinny and not green enough. Good mate for you though.” +“Heh, yes well I certainly think so.” +“Alright shadow. Flog agree…but one question. How you know that Flog not eventually raise army to attack you in the future?” +“Because…” you smile. “I also have faith that you dislike Cyrus so much that you’d rather prove him wrong by NOT attacking me.” + +With this statement Flog lets out a hearty laugh and you leave him to his mirth. He may become a problem in the future, but for now you’ve got him back on your side and eliminated the source of trouble to the north of you. + +On your way out of the cave Cyrus stands waiting and asks you if you killed Flog, you tell him you took care of the problem. Cyrus just gives one of his trademark dirty looks and walks ahead of you. + +One thing’s for sure; if your relationship with Cyrus doesn’t get better you’ll be dealing with that problem before one with Flog.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“I think we should take this opportunity to make them see the way of the shadows.” You say. +“What?!” Yvette exclaims. +“Are you serious?” Talia asks. +“Well okay maybe not all of them, but I’d think that with the right teaching they could become valuable assets.” +“NO! These are the enemy and must be destroyed! You said so yourself when we first began this mission!” Yvette says. +“And perhaps I was a bit hasty. I can’t be entitled to speak out of turn and make a mistake once in awhile?” +“No brother, but I think leaving these…abominations alive for whatever reason is a bigger mistake.” +“Abominations…and I suppose you believe me and Talia are abominations too eh sister?” +“Wha…no! I mean…(sputter) you’re different! You…” +“How? Me, Talia, and Cyrus for that matter were all brought up from birth and indoctrinated to serve the Empire, but what happened? We saw the truth of Dendrin’s wisdom instead! Is it not possible that these…children who aren’t even as old as we were be re-educated to do the same?” +“Well…I suppose, but…” +“Think about it sister, some of the greatest enemies of the Empire were brought up within the very heart of it! Let’s continue to turn the Empire’s obsessive need for control against itself! And better yet, bring more servants into the fold of Dendrin.” + +Sister Yvette looks a bit hesitant, it’s obvious she has some real problems with this plan, but she isn’t really sure how to argue against you. Part of it stems from you making a bit of a point, and the other stems from the fact that despite her own confidence being better than it was, she still feels inferior to you…perhaps that’s just the aura you have as an Eternal though. + +“Yes…I suppose I see the wisdom in attempting to educate these children in the ways of Dendrin.” Sister Yvette says. She might not believe it now, but in time she’ll either convince herself or get used to it. Either way you just need her obedience. + +As for the remainder of the shadows if they have anything meaningful to say on the subject they keep it to themselves. That just leaves Talia, who is going to require a little bit more convincing since you sense her look of disagreement. + +“Um…sister Yvette, could you and the rest leave me and sister Talia alone for a moment.” + +As the rest of them leave, you move over to Talia who looks out over the hundreds of eternal containers. + +“I sense some disapproval from this plan?” +“Not so much disapproval, but rather apprehension.” +“What about the training? I know it won’t be easy, but I figure we can open up that ritual portal to Dendrin and let him decide if they’re worthy or not, you know, like he did with us.” +“And you know how to do that? Because I sure don’t! It’s not like Master Ebon or Brother Gray imparted that knowledge on to me before they died!” +“Well your magic is strong, and hey I know Cyrus has some old shadow tomes back at Fort Defiance, we can probably find something in there about it.” +“Well I’m glad you seem to have this all figured out then, just wish you would’ve let me on this sooner.” +“I would have, but this honestly just came to mind. I mean how was I to know that these kids were going to be safely locked up in oversized glass tubes? I thought we were going to be waist deep in their blood by now.” +“So who is going to train them? I know it’s not going to be you. Me I suppose right?” +“Well…you would be the best qualified…but hey Sister Yvette could help you and other shadows too! In fact I could have some transferred here just in case of an Empire attack when…” +“Damn it I’m not worried about all that, I’m wondering WHY you came up with this plan at all! I know there’s another reason than just turning them against the Empire or even bringing new shadows into Dendrin’s fold and don’t say that there isn’t! We’re the same and we’ve bonded as lovers. I know there’s more going on in your head because I know YOU. Now tell me. + +Talia never was one to mince words and perhaps it is time you didn’t either. + +“Very well my love. You should know everything.” + +And from there you tell Talia everything…except you don’t. + +You tell her that Dendrin did not only speak to you on the day Gloom was attacked, you tell her he’s spoken to you in the past on several occasions. You just never said anything about it before Gloom because you didn’t want to be thought a liar and be labeled a heretic. + +You also tell her that Dendrin has urged you to follow your own path and to seize leadership of the shadows. You didn’t want to initially because you wanted to try to hold things together because things seemed so fractured, but given that Dendrin has recently warned you about Cyrus’ potential treachery you thought it might be best to have another group of allies in case the worst occurs. + +“So…we’re keeping this a secret from Cyrus?” +“Yes, I think that would be for the best. If he knew about this, you know he’d be against it. Cyrus is clinging to the old shadow ways and still has clout, but that will be coming to an end soon.” +“I dunno…I mean I agree that Cyrus shouldn’t be leader and that you would make an excellent shadow master especially since Dendrin talks to you, but hiding things from Cyrus and possibly planning for his death? I mean is there no other way? He’s not just a shadow, he’s one of us.” +“So are a few other eternals from our class if you remember. These little bastards here were going to be against us until we intervened…which bring me to my other reason and this one is harder for me to tell because it involves you and me.” +“All of this involves the both of us, what else could it possibly be that would trouble me more than conspiracy against one of our brothers?” + +You bring up the very real and unaltered truth that Dendrin told you about eternals. The fact that none of you are able to have children due how you were created. Talia gets quiet and sits down for a moment. She tries very hard not to cry, but her voice is obviously quivering when she speaks again. + +“…I…guess (sniff) that explains a lot…but um…I mean Dendrin could do something…I mean he…” +“Dendrin… (Sigh) …how do I put this? Dendrin is…complex. It’s true that he helps us directly by granting our magical abilities and perhaps in ways of major importance when he warned me about Gloom, but he’s not here to collectively hold the hands of the shadows. (You can’t believe you just repeated Dendrin’s own words) He would prefer that the shadows made their own destiny as it were. I mean, I’m sure if he wanted to, he could’ve just laid waste to the Empire a long time ago, but he didn’t. He wanted the shadows to endure and in enduring grow stronger from the situation they were placed in. Just like you…we will have to endure in not being able to have children. But getting back to the heart of the matter, that’s part of why I decided that we should try to save these young eternals. I mean you’ll get to train them first hand in the ways of Dendrin. It would almost be like you were the mother of several hundred eternal shadows.” +“But then they can never produce offspring either.” +“Well we don’t know that. I mean it looks like they’ve been altered in a significantly different way. But even if they can’t so what? If we had had children there would be no guarantee that they’d all survive to reproduce either. You mustn’t worry about this, because after all is said and done, you will still be doing Dendrin’s work and serving him faithfully and really isn’t that what it’s all about?” + +You look into her eyes and touch her on the shoulder. She grabs your hand on her shoulder and looks down for a moment and breathes deeply. After a couple of seconds she looks back up at you. + +“Very well, this does seem to be a suitable course of action. But quite frankly I don’t think we can save all of these children. Some of them are going to be lost causes and if the Empire ever attacks this place in force, we’re going to have to collapse this place anyway, we can’t properly defend it, at least not at this time.” +“Of course, I agree. I trust you will do what you can.” +“I always do my love.” + +With this new plan settled, you and Talia kiss each other before parting company. You tell Sister Yvette that she is to report to Talia directly now and that you’ll be contacting Brother Theo about the new changes. Fortunately he’s still alive, when you check to see how those other shadow cell attack turned out. No reports have even come in about the attack on the camp, which isn’t too surprising given all the chaos going on elsewhere that brother Theo caused and the fact you didn’t leave any survivors or let anyone escape. + +Eventually you make your way back to Rask which you’re happy to find out Cyrus was smart enough to not risk attacking Fort Destiny. Unfortunately he caused a different set back entirely. Talia was about the only one keeping the Flog and the rest of his orcs on good terms. You rarely interacted with him and he never got along with Cyrus who was usually condescending to him. While you were gone apparently a small skirmish ensued between the orcs and shadows. Amazingly nobody was actually killed, but several were wounded and ultimately Flog left with the remainder of the orcs. + +“What?! They’re gone? Where?!” you ask. +“How should I know, further north I think where the rest of those overgrown idiots dwell. I don’t care, we don’t need them anyway!” Cyrus says. “And where is Sister Talia? Did you get her killed in your foolish mission?” +“No our mission was a success, and she’ll be taking care of some of the business we have in the south from now on because it’s apparent my attention should start being more focused here.” +“Oh so now you’ve decided that, after all those times I’ve suggested that since you first arrived here? You know what, I’ve been putting in work here for nearly a decade now, what makes you even think you know what the best plan of action is here?” +“Well I wouldn’t have pissed off our orc allies if I had the desire to attack Fort Destiny for one. (Sigh) Cyrus I’m on your side for Dendrin’s sake! I mean we’re supposed to be fighting the Empire, not each other. Can’t you see that brother?” + +Cyrus looks you up and down with distain in his face. + +“All I see is someone that talks a good game about serving Dendrin, but ultimately his words ring hollow to my ears. Always have. Time will tell though, brother and there will be a reckoning. Dendrin will not suffer false prophets and pretenders. I hope for your sake you aren’t one because his wrath will be terrible. Do what you want.” Cyrus says and leaves the room. + +Funny how Cyrus is probably the only one who can see through your bullshit, yet still be painfully wrong. More amusement for Dendrin you suppose. +> Treachery (Year 32) +“We’re going to have to clear out of here soon, the Empire is finally getting their ass in gear to retake this camp. Captain Roldan himself is supposed to be on his way and he’s been pretty efficient in squashing shadow cells as of late.” Talia remarks. +“Yeah I know. He’s proven as hard to kill as ol’ butcher Kane. Both have survived several assassination attempts. Heh, this war would’ve been a lot easier had they been put into the Shadow Guard too.” +“Well, what are we going to do about him? Because while we can clear out the camp and collapse the rest, it doesn’t stop the fact that Roldan is our biggest potential threat. He’s proving to be the most competent Empire commander they have.” +“Yeah I know…I’ll have to think on it. So how many of the new eternals can we save?” +“Well there are still hundreds in those tanks and quite frankly I dunno if half of those are even functioning properly anymore. Some were empty to begin with too. I know we’ve open up at least a hundred or so of those tanks and some of the children had to be…dealt with immediately. I’d say we got around sixty or seventy that are still undergoing re-education. And of those? I’d say only about nine that have taken to it completely.” + +You exhale deeply; you knew it was going to be tough, but only nine? That really puts a crimp in your plans for a potential army of loyal eternal shadows on your side. + +“Those tomes I gave you didn’t help open a portal to Dendrin so you could do the indoctrination ceremony?” +“I couldn’t find anything in them about it. The best thing I found was in one of the Empire mage’s spellbooks. A mind control spell which has helped in the conditioning process. Not shadow magic, but whatever works right?” +“You’ll get no argument from me. Might as well take those with you, what about derro equipment?” +“Mostly hand weapons that we don’t need or machinery that we can’t use. However there were schematics for stuff laying about. Mostly on those explosive weapons they were using during the troll fight. Sister Yvette has mostly been studying those since I believe it troubles her less than indoctrinating these new eternals. There’s a lot of that explosive stuff unused too. We’ll use that to destroy this complex.” +“Maybe we could use it to set up a trap as well.” You say forming a plan. +“How so exactly? I mean I sort of get where you’re going with your thought process; when Roldan arrives we could blow up his army, but there’s no guarantee we’d get all of them or even him and we’d have to stick around which would most likely be suicide as his army is reportedly the best around and we severely lack in numbers. Hell, I’m not even sure some of those kids we’re educating wouldn’t help the Empire.” +“Except those nine right?” +“Well yes, except them. What are you suggesting?” + +You explain to Talia that you all will evacuate this camp as planned, taking with you spellbooks, derro tech schematics and those children that are in the process of being re-educated. What’s staying are the explosives and those nine children… + +“Wait, wait, you seriously want these children to sacrifice their lives?” +“It’s not like they’re doing it for no reason. They’ll be striking a blow against the Empire, and dying in the service of Dendrin. You told me they were loyal didn’t you?” +“Well yes, but…” +“Well when the army comes through Roldan will have it searched from top to bottom. He’ll probably even do a little wandering himself when everything appears to be in order. Then when he’s got his guard down, these nine you’ve told me about will come from their hiding spots light the fuses in the strategically located areas. Just to make sure they accomplish their missions, they will also be carrying explosives on their person. They probably aren’t expecting the new eternals are indoctrinated and some aren’t going to expect finding so called helpless children at all. In fact maybe we should tell one to play up the victim role about the terrible shadows and when Roldan wants to hear their story…BOOM! He’s no more.” + +While this seems like a solid plan to you, Talia once again is showing reservations about your ideas. + +“But these children have worked so hard to devote themselves to Dendrin. The odds were so against them, yet their trust and faith helped them overcome their Empire brainwashing. It doesn’t seem right for them to die when they have only just awakened. There are other shadows here. Adult ones who would also gladly sacrifice themselves, could we not use one of them instead?” +“Normally I’d say yes, but an adult shadow is of much more worth in case of a major battle in the near future. Now I’m aware these children are eternals, but they are still children. They are not even the same age that we were when were first exposed to the shadow way. I can’t wait for them to grow and I can’t use any of ones you’re still in the process of educating because I can’t risk any of them not following through with the plan. Talia, I know this is grim business and I know you may have even gotten attached to them…like any mother would. But there comes a time where even a mother has to let go, and really, you knew that something like this might be a possibility. Take comfort in the fact that their actions will save other shadows and their siblings.” +“I know the reasons. I know the stakes, but I won’t take comfort in it. And I can’t be the one to send them to their deaths. You’ll have to do it.” Talia says and looks away from you, obviously trying to hide her eyes, which are tearing up. +“Very well. I suppose I owe them that much.” You say and ask where they are. + +When you go to the room where they’re located, they are all in prayer to Dendrin. They don’t even stop to notice you until they’re finished. Well they’re definitely loyal to Dendrin that’s for sure. + +They recognize you as a shadow and ask who you are. When you tell them your name, their eyes get wide and they suddenly start to get very excited. + +“You’re Mother Talia’s husband!” +“You’re the one who speaks to Dendrin!” +“You’re the scourge of the Empire!” + +Looks like Talia’s been speaking about you in high regard to these children as well. + +“Are you here to send us on a mission to kill Empire soldiers?” one of them asks. +“Oh yes. I am here to send you all on a mission. Possibly one of the most important in the war against the Empire. We haven’t much time though and I will have to explain quickly, are you all ready to serve in Dendrin’s name?” +“Yes! For Dendrin!” they all shout in unison. + +While everyone else starts evacuating the camp, you start taking the children through the plan. Sister Yvette briefly shows you and the children where she’s placing the explosives to collapse the underground complex. She also shows the children how to use the explosives. She’s noticeably unnerved by the fact that these children are going to sacrifice themselves. She never agreed with saving the eternals to begin with, but apparently she has now grown a little more used to the children and isn’t happy about seeing them going to their deaths. + +You haven’t been around these children long enough to get so attached to them, but you can understand it. Even within the short time you’ve spent with these nine you can appreciate their enthusiastic potential. It is sort of a shame since who knows what they would accomplish if they were to grow up, but there are still several dozen more that will be saved and hopefully they will eventually become just like these nine. + +Towards the end of the evacuation, you wave good-bye to the nine and remind them of their duty and how Dendrin will accept them when their work is done. Talia also sticks around to say her farewells. + +“Children, remember all that I have taught you and remember that Dendrin loves you…and that…(sniffle) I love you…(sniffle) and will always do so.” +“We love you too Mother Talia.” They all say in unison and go up to hug her. + +After a couple seconds of this, Talia tells them good-bye and leaves with you. The pair of you travel behind the rest mostly in silence. No sooner have you traveled out of sight of the camp, Talia breaks down and cries. A few shadows turn around wondering what’s going on, but you tell them all to go on ahead and that you’ll both be along shortly. + +You stand beside her during her sorrow, but you offer no words of comfort since there are none. In fact chances are you’ll make her feel worse as it was your decision after all. Eventually after she lets it all out, she pulls herself together. Still sad of course, but ready to put it behind her. You continue your journey to Brother Theo’s hideout that he’s prepared for the evacuation. + +A few days later you get word from contacts of an Empire army being nearly wiped out by a series of large explosions. For a brief moment the Empire first thought it might even be a Felkan attack due to their use of gunpower weaponry, however it was confirmed by the few survivors that it was another shadow ambush. Naturally you are painted to be the lowliest of villains due to children being used, but Empire propaganda has always been so over the top that you doubt if people will even believe it, and those that do…well they were probably never going to be on your side anyway. + +The best news is when you hear that a funeral will be held in Captain Roldan’s honor as he died during one of the blasts. + +You have won a great victory and confirms that your decision to save the eternals was a good one. Even if all the others prove to be untrainable, those nine were more than worth it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“I think we should take this opportunity to make them see the way of the shadows.” You say. +“What?!” Yvette exclaims. +“Are you serious?” Talia asks. +“Well okay maybe not all of them, but I’d think that with the right teaching they could become valuable assets.” +“NO! These are the enemy and must be destroyed! You said so yourself when we first began this mission!” Yvette says. +“And perhaps I was a bit hasty. I can’t be entitled to speak out of turn and make a mistake once in awhile?” +“No brother, but I think leaving these…abominations alive for whatever reason is a bigger mistake.” +“Abominations…and I suppose you believe me and Talia are abominations too eh sister?” +“Wha…no! I mean…(sputter) you’re different! You…” +“How? Me, Talia, and Cyrus for that matter were all brought up from birth and indoctrinated to serve the Empire, but what happened? We saw the truth of Dendrin’s wisdom instead! Is it not possible that these…children who aren’t even as old as we were be re-educated to do the same?” +“Well…I suppose, but…” +“Think about it sister, some of the greatest enemies of the Empire were brought up within the very heart of it! Let’s continue to turn the Empire’s obsessive need for control against itself! And better yet, bring more servants into the fold of Dendrin.” + +Sister Yvette looks a bit hesitant, it’s obvious she has some real problems with this plan, but she isn’t really sure how to argue against you. Part of it stems from you making a bit of a point, and the other stems from the fact that despite her own confidence being better than it was, she still feels inferior to you…perhaps that’s just the aura you have as an Eternal though. + +“Yes…I suppose I see the wisdom in attempting to educate these children in the ways of Dendrin.” Sister Yvette says. She might not believe it now, but in time she’ll either convince herself or get used to it. Either way you just need her obedience. + +As for the remainder of the shadows if they have anything meaningful to say on the subject they keep it to themselves. That just leaves Talia, who is going to require a little bit more convincing since you sense her look of disagreement. + +“Um…sister Yvette, could you and the rest leave me and sister Talia alone for a moment.” + +As the rest of them leave, you move over to Talia who looks out over the hundreds of eternal containers. + +“I sense some disapproval from this plan?” +“Not so much disapproval, but rather apprehension.” +“What about the training? I know it won’t be easy, but I figure we can open up that ritual portal to Dendrin and let him decide if they’re worthy or not, you know, like he did with us.” +“And you know how to do that? Because I sure don’t! It’s not like Master Ebon or Brother Gray imparted that knowledge on to me before they died!” +“Well your magic is strong, and hey I know Cyrus has some old shadow tomes back at Fort Defiance, we can probably find something in there about it.” +“Well I’m glad you seem to have this all figured out then, just wish you would’ve let me on this sooner.” +“I would have, but this honestly just came to mind. I mean how was I to know that these kids were going to be safely locked up in oversized glass tubes? I thought we were going to be waist deep in their blood by now.” +“So who is going to train them? I know it’s not going to be you. Me I suppose right?” +“Well…you would be the best qualified…but hey Sister Yvette could help you and other shadows too! In fact I could have some transferred here just in case of an Empire attack when…” +“Damn it I’m not worried about all that, I’m wondering WHY you came up with this plan at all! I know there’s another reason than just turning them against the Empire or even bringing new shadows into Dendrin’s fold and don’t say that there isn’t! We’re the same and we’ve bonded as lovers. I know there’s more going on in your head because I know YOU. Now tell me. + +Talia never was one to mince words and perhaps it is time you didn’t either. + +“Very well my love. You should know everything.” + +And from there you tell Talia everything…except you don’t. + +You tell her that Dendrin did not only speak to you on the day Gloom was attacked, you tell her he’s spoken to you in the past on several occasions. You just never said anything about it before Gloom because you didn’t want to be thought a liar and be labeled a heretic. + +You also tell her that Dendrin has urged you to follow your own path and to seize leadership of the shadows. You didn’t want to initially because you wanted to try to hold things together because things seemed so fractured, but given that Dendrin has recently warned you about Cyrus’ potential treachery you thought it might be best to have another group of allies in case the worst occurs. + +“So…we’re keeping this a secret from Cyrus?” +“Yes, I think that would be for the best. If he knew about this, you know he’d be against it. Cyrus is clinging to the old shadow ways and still has clout, but that will be coming to an end soon.” +“I dunno…I mean I agree that Cyrus shouldn’t be leader and that you would make an excellent shadow master especially since Dendrin talks to you, but hiding things from Cyrus and possibly planning for his death? I mean is there no other way? He’s not just a shadow, he’s one of us.” +“So are a few other eternals from our class if you remember. These little bastards here were going to be against us until we intervened…which bring me to my other reason and this one is harder for me to tell because it involves you and me.” +“All of this involves the both of us, what else could it possibly be that would trouble me more than conspiracy against one of our brothers?” + +You bring up the very real and unaltered truth that Dendrin told you about eternals. The fact that none of you are able to have children due how you were created. Talia gets quiet and sits down for a moment. She tries very hard not to cry, but her voice is obviously quivering when she speaks again. + +“…I…guess (sniff) that explains a lot…but um…I mean Dendrin could do something…I mean he…” +“Dendrin… (Sigh) …how do I put this? Dendrin is…complex. It’s true that he helps us directly by granting our magical abilities and perhaps in ways of major importance when he warned me about Gloom, but he’s not here to collectively hold the hands of the shadows. (You can’t believe you just repeated Dendrin’s own words) He would prefer that the shadows made their own destiny as it were. I mean, I’m sure if he wanted to, he could’ve just laid waste to the Empire a long time ago, but he didn’t. He wanted the shadows to endure and in enduring grow stronger from the situation they were placed in. Just like you…we will have to endure in not being able to have children. But getting back to the heart of the matter, that’s part of why I decided that we should try to save these young eternals. I mean you’ll get to train them first hand in the ways of Dendrin. It would almost be like you were the mother of several hundred eternal shadows.” +“But then they can never produce offspring either.” +“Well we don’t know that. I mean it looks like they’ve been altered in a significantly different way. But even if they can’t so what? If we had had children there would be no guarantee that they’d all survive to reproduce either. You mustn’t worry about this, because after all is said and done, you will still be doing Dendrin’s work and serving him faithfully and really isn’t that what it’s all about?” + +You look into her eyes and touch her on the shoulder. She grabs your hand on her shoulder and looks down for a moment and breathes deeply. After a couple of seconds she looks back up at you. + +“Very well, this does seem to be a suitable course of action. But quite frankly I don’t think we can save all of these children. Some of them are going to be lost causes and if the Empire ever attacks this place in force, we’re going to have to collapse this place anyway, we can’t properly defend it, at least not at this time.” +“Of course, I agree. I trust you will do what you can.” +“I always do my love.” + +With this new plan settled, you and Talia kiss each other before parting company. You tell Sister Yvette that she is to report to Talia directly now and that you’ll be contacting Brother Theo about the new changes. Fortunately he’s still alive, when you check to see how those other shadow cell attack turned out. No reports have even come in about the attack on the camp, which isn’t too surprising given all the chaos going on elsewhere that brother Theo caused and the fact you didn’t leave any survivors or let anyone escape. + +Eventually you make your way back to Rask which you’re happy to find out Cyrus was smart enough to not risk attacking Fort Destiny. Unfortunately he caused a different set back entirely. Talia was about the only one keeping the Flog and the rest of his orcs on good terms. You rarely interacted with him and he never got along with Cyrus who was usually condescending to him. While you were gone apparently a small skirmish ensued between the orcs and shadows. Amazingly nobody was actually killed, but several were wounded and ultimately Flog left with the remainder of the orcs. + +“What?! They’re gone? Where?!” you ask. +“How should I know, further north I think where the rest of those overgrown idiots dwell. I don’t care, we don’t need them anyway!” Cyrus says. “And where is Sister Talia? Did you get her killed in your foolish mission?” +“No our mission was a success, and she’ll be taking care of some of the business we have in the south from now on because it’s apparent my attention should start being more focused here.” +“Oh so now you’ve decided that, after all those times I’ve suggested that since you first arrived here? You know what, I’ve been putting in work here for nearly a decade now, what makes you even think you know what the best plan of action is here?” +“Well I wouldn’t have pissed off our orc allies if I had the desire to attack Fort Destiny for one. (Sigh) Cyrus I’m on your side for Dendrin’s sake! I mean we’re supposed to be fighting the Empire, not each other. Can’t you see that brother?” + +Cyrus looks you up and down with distain in his face. + +“All I see is someone that talks a good game about serving Dendrin, but ultimately his words ring hollow to my ears. Always have. Time will tell though, brother and there will be a reckoning. Dendrin will not suffer false prophets and pretenders. I hope for your sake you aren’t one because his wrath will be terrible. Do what you want.” Cyrus says and leaves the room. + +Funny how Cyrus is probably the only one who can see through your bullshit, yet still be painfully wrong. More amusement for Dendrin you suppose. +> Brutality (Year 33) +The day has finally come to pass, an all out assault on Fort Destiny. Just what Cyrus always wanted. + +What he probably didn’t want though is you organizing most of it, but really without you this wouldn’t even be going through. The provinces south of Rask don’t need shadow support quite as much anymore as there is now a sufficient about of chaos going on throughout. So much so that Empire troops have been getting pulled out of Rask just to keep order down south. No more support is coming to Rask, not even dark elven mercenaries and up until last year only the most desperate of them were even taking the jobs. Which is why you decided that now is the best time to pull all your strength from the south to combine with supporters in Rask drive out the Empire once and for all. + +The Empire’s sole beacon of existence in Rask now is Fort Destiny and Captain Kane himself. Without either the Empire will have officially lost Rask. The Empire has been having a shortage in competent military leadership and losing Captain Roldan was certainly a great blow. + +The assault is taking place nearly the same way it was first envisioned, and attack from the north and the south. The difference is that now you’ve brought along derro explosives to help in your cause along with about fifty loyal eternal shadows who may be young, but are already proving their worth. Cyrus needless to say wasn’t pleased to hear about that secret you’d kept from him. + +Cyrus also wasn’t pleased when you managed to have Flog lend some of his orc and ogre subjects to help out, but what really helped was his inclusion of a couple of giants to provide “rock thrower” support. + +The initial attack goes about as expected. Great rocks thrown and crashing into the sides of the fort on the north side, while firebombs blow up the walls on the south side. It isn’t all one sided though as catapults are fired back at your people. + +By day three Fort Destiny stands half in ruins with several holes in its walls and dead soldiers in the courtyard. Both giants are dead, one even lying slumped over a collapsed wall with a ballista bolt through his head. Most of the ogres have died as well. The Raskian people who have lent their support have taken a lot of casualties, but you think that thanks to Kane’s past cruelty and the desire to drive out the Empire they see the losses as acceptable. Fortunately there haven’t been many casualties on the shadows’ side of your army. + +As you, Cyrus and Talia stand alongside your occupying forces; the only real structure left is the battered citadel in the center. The front door to it has been strongly barricaded from the inside, but there are enough holes in the upper parts of it that it would be a simple matter of scaling the thing and entering through one of them. + +“Anyone seen Kane’s body in this bloody mess?” Talia asks. +“He’s probably in his citadel, but I’m not going to bother going through some sort of drawn out process of getting him.” You reply. +“So are you sending in your fancy new eternal babies to scale the walls?” Cyrus asks. +“Probably could, but they’d probably get slaughtered by the likes of Kane. And Kane’s most likely still got a bunch of solders locked up with him in there to help him. No, we’re not sending in ANY shadows. It’s just a waste of their lives at this point. Got a much better idea.” You say looking up at the citadel. + +“Kane! Butcher of Rask! The battle is at an end, let us not draw this out any further than it needs to, come on out and face death with the honor I know you to have!” you shout. + +For a long moment there is silence. + +“If you insist on hiding in there like a eunuch I’m going to simply line this citadel’s base with explosives and bring it crashing down with you in it! Is that what sort of death you want for you and your men hiding with you?” + +This statement causes some laughter from the upper reaches of the citadel. + +“My men in here are all dead! I killed them all myself when they talked about surrendering to you shadow scum! Traitors! Weaklings! All of them! This entire country is filled with the disease that infects the Empire! I have done my duty in cleansing it to the best of my abilities.” Kane answers. + +Given Kane’s reputation there’s no real reason to doubt this, but something about the way he’s saying it makes it apparent that he may have very well lost it. + +“So are you coming out to cleanse us as well?” you ask. +“Any other day I would have, but no shadow parasite, my days of cleansing are indeed at an end. After having to slay my own soldiers, I have spent the remaining time thinking about the future and come to an unfortunate conclusion.” +“And what might that be?” +“The disease that has infected the Empire is incurable. Even if I lived my days in perpetual glorious battle I still would not be able to save it. Indeed, I believe I may have already…” + +As Kane trails off and goes silent, Cyrus begins to get impatient. + +“Are we really going to listen to this twaddle? Let’s get on with killing this mad bastard and be done with it!” +“Yeah, I don’t think this is going anywhere, it sounds like Kane has snapped or something.” Talia adds. +“Alright, alright, start getting the explosives ready.” You answer, though you can’t help but be a little curious about what Kane has to say. He’s been a thorn in your side for so long, it just seems so odd for things to end this way. You honestly thought he would’ve been the first to rush head long into battle as soon as your forces started rushing into the fort. + +No sooner have your plans been put into action, Kane begins speaking again and this time he stands upon a windowsill completely naked. + +“What the fuck…” you say to yourself. + +“I don’t envy you shadows. You serve a cause that is inherently corrupt and lacking in purity. My cause was pure and just, but I made a mistake…and I also feel the corruption taking place within me. As hard as I try to suppress it…it’s there and I cannot allow that. I must die before I allow it to infect me completely! Though I may die here today, I will live forever! FOR THE EMPIRE AND THE EMPEROR!” he shouts and then jumps. + +The rest of you on the ground move out of the way to avoid his falling body which splats spectacularly when it eventually hits. + +“Didn’t expect that to happen.” Talia remarks. +“I have to admit this was a bit bizarre.” +“Feh, obviously a coward when faced against a real opponent. I told you all for years we should’ve attacked him sooner, but I suppose it was easier for the both of you to follow your own agendas and hide things behind my back.” Cyrus says and then turns away from the both of you. + +You aren’t going to argue with Cyrus today, you’ll have plenty of time to do that later. He may even have a point, but you really believe that it was better to wait. Kane didn’t nearly have the same number of soldiers or support as he had three years ago. Still, you wonder about his odd behavior at the end. You tell some of your people to blow up the citadel door and to help you search it. + +When you get inside, you confirm that Kane was not lying when he said he killed his own men. Butchered would be a completely accurate one here since he didn’t just kill them, he chopped most of them into pieces. As bloody as the sight is, the smell is much worse. The whole place reeks of death and some of the Raskans who enter the citadel walk right back out gagging. You dare say the inside of this citadel is as bloody as the battlefield outside. + +Upon a closer inspection of some of the bodies, you notice a few teeth marks, like he might’ve even eaten a portion of them. When you finally get to Kane’s quarters you see several journals strewn about the floor, Some of the journals are shredded and others have pages ripped out, but you skim through a few of them out of curiosity. + +Kane’s journals provide a fascinating look into his descent into madness. From what you can tell, his personality didn’t start changing severely until after a mission that involved the wendigo tribe. Apparently they weren’t a barbarian tribe so much as they were evil spirits that masqueraded in the bodies of them. They subsisted on eating flesh of any living beings and were always hungry. + +Apparently they could also possess people at will, and needed to in order to be able to leave their “home”. Kane ended up finding all this out the hard way and lost an entire company. Though ultimately victorious the wendigo mental assaults on his mind took their toll it seems. He wasn’t possessed, but it definitely unhinged him. From there on his behavior started getting more bloodthirsty. His faith in the Empire seemed to be a bit of a solid rock for him that allowed him to maintain a degree of normalcy, but when the Empire started loosing ground in Rask, and elsewhere, it was a cascading effect into full-blown insanity. A lot of his writing towards the end seems to be random and disjointed. His last entry mentions nearly matches what his final words were to you. + +You look around the room some more and find a military map of Rask. You make a note the location of where Kane said he faced the wendigo so that you know to avoid it in the future.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 30 + +“No, I say we take all of our resources and make a forward push on Fort Destiny. We can hit Captain Kane from the north and from the south.” Cyrus says. +“And I’m telling you that we can’t do that. Our people aren’t grouped together on the southern Rask border ready to strike, they’re scattered all over the place and that’s how they should remain! I keep telling you this, besides I’ve got a better plan for the shadow cells in the Quala province.” You remark. +“Brothers, this yelling isn’t helping.” Talia sighs. + +Another typical day on the “Shadow Council”, you and Cyrus arguing, with Talia stuck in the middle. You really wish that wasn’t the case, but it is just inevitable that you and Cyrus are going to always disagree on something. You don’t even know why you bother meeting to discuss battle plans nowadays, what usually happens is a bunch of arguing like this and then you both go off and do your own thing. This hasn’t really been a problem in the past mainly because your plans are all outside of Rask, while Cyrus’ plans are always within Rask so they never conflict for the most part. Also, the Empire’s attention was divided due to their war with the Felkan Kingdom. + +However things have changed. The Empire recently signed a non-agression pact with the Felkan Kingdom meaning they’ve been able to focus a hell of a lot better on the rebellion. You need to do something to swing the tide in your favor before they begin to gather enough momentum to roll right over you. + +Cyrus’ plan is the one he’s been endorsing for years. Consolidate Rask and drive out the Empire from it completely. As the war has raged on over the years this has been done for the most part. The only thing that really stands in the way are a few of the loyalist border towns and Captain Kane in Fort Destiny. The problem is that’s still a big obstacle to get over and a major assault would result in considerable losses. + +Cyrus has in the past sent groups of shadows to assassinate Captain Kane, but so far all attempts have failed. Kane’s reputation as the “Butcher of Rask” isn’t just for show and him being a battle hardened Eternal means he’s more than a match even for the average shadow. Cyrus probably would’ve sent more, but Talia convinced him that it was just pointlessly sending shadows to their deaths. You didn’t necessarily think the idea was without promise, but you suggested that an assassination attempt might work if you, Talia and Cyrus actually did it since you feel that you’d have the skill to pull it off, but Cyrus dismissed that idea, claiming that Talia is right and that assassination should be taken off the table. + +So a major assault it is, of course this is why Cyrus wants you to gather all of your shadow cells outside of Rask and have them attack from the south in a classic pincer maneuver. It would probably work, but you’d still have heavy losses especially those attacking from the south since the Empire could redeploy reinforcements early enough that your forces could be caught in the middle too. + +You imagine this idea would appeal to Cyrus since then options would be limited to just focusing on Rask and you wouldn’t have any forces at all anymore. You get the impression that when the Empire is finally defeated Cyrus has major plans for Rask given how badly he wants to focus on it. Perhaps he has some long-range goal of starting his own “empire.” However, he’s still short sighted as far as your concerned because even if you went along with his plan, it would just hold off the Empire a few extra years and wouldn’t stop them from taking back Rask given the new information you’ve received from your contacts. + +The Empire has been breeding new Eternals, the number is unknown, but it’s apparently enough to create an army of them. They’re not “ready” yet, but in a few more years they soon will be and if that happens you might not be able to stop them if the Empire unleashed them on Rask. However, you’ve received the information of where this new Eternal training camp is which is a remote location in the Quala province close to the Arat border. The only other information you have on the place is that the main complex appears to be underground since children. The place doesn’t appear to be heavily guarded up top, but who knows what security is like down below. Considering magic is involved in creating Eternals, it’s a sure bet that there are going to be wizard types about. + +Your plan is to destroy this place by leading a small group of the most skilled shadows you have. While this is going on, your other cells will strike out at vital areas in the Empire at the same time to keep them from immediately sending out reinforcements to the camp. You actually wouldn’t mind Cyrus to come with you since he is a skilled fighter, but you aren’t even going to ask since you know what his answer will be. Cyrus doesn’t even believe that it’s a top priority and claims that if Rask is liberated then you can attack the camp later since these new Eternals still won’t be battle ready for a while. + +If you go off and do your own thing, your concern is that Cyrus is going to do the same thing and get everyone under his command killed in his attempt to take Fort Destiny. Of course if you help him you’re left with the same problem that it’s very probable that your shadow cells are going to get hit pretty hard during the assault on Fort Destiny and Cyrus won’t actually lend any help when you want to destroy the new Eternal camp. + +There’s also the issue that you’re trying to maintain the unity as always. Cyrus is really pushing for this assault on Fort Destiny and doing your own thing this time might be the “last straw” and the last thing you need is to do is start a shadow civil war. + +After a lot more arguing, everyone decides to call it a day and make a decision tomorrow. Talia as always says she’ll side with whatever you decide, but would prefer if you and Cyrus actually worked together for once. That doesn’t exactly help you and you have a hard time sleeping. When you finally do get to sleep you still don’t get any rest… + +“So what are you going to do Eternal? You and Cyrus continue to clash and it’s only a matter of time before things between you are going to end badly.” Dendrin remarks. +“Doesn’t take a god to figure that one out.” You say. +“Yes, but it takes a fool to blatantly ignore the obvious. By continuing to not support Cyrus’ you’re just driving a wedge deeper in the shadow organization that will eventually split you in two. Something I thought you were trying to avoid given that you made such an effort to keep it together.” +“Well someone had to, because you certainly weren’t doing it.” +“I’m not here to hold the collective hands of the shadows. As I’ve said, I’ve done that already and it was a boring experience. Besides you seem to be enjoying your new leadership role, who am I to take it away from you?” +“I’m not leader of the shadows, I’m….” +“Nonsense! You ARE leader of the shadows. Perhaps you’re currently sharing that duty with your Eternal peers, but you’re clearly the strongest of that group. Talia certainly has potential, but her blind devotion to certain things is her weakness. It clouds her judgement.” +“So she’s not worthy because she’s so loyal to you?” +“Not just me, but to you as well. It doesn’t occur to her in the slightest that you’re keeping secrets or lying to her about your real feelings on the shadows. She just believes you, just like she misguidedly believes that one day she’ll have eternal shadow babies with you.” +“Wait, she can’t have kids?” +“No and neither can you. Neither can Cyrus for that matter, though I doubt it that’s ever going to come up with him. Don’t ask me why you can’t, I don’t know. I can only imagine it has something to do with how they magically altered you Eternals back in the labs. I’m not a fertility god either, so her constant praying to me isn’t going to help.” + +This sudden news does explain a few things. You’re going to have to inform Talia of this at some point, you just don’t know when would be the best time. Yet another thing for you worry about. + +Dendrin continues his speech + +“And for all of Cyrus’ bluster of being a shadow he obviously lacks as a good leader. I dare say if you weren’t around, the Empire would be on the verge of driving the shadows to extinction right now. He may be better liked than you, but even that’s starting to change and it certainly doesn’t hold true for any shadow not stationed in your little fort. You’ve got allies and support in places other than Rask, Cyrus doesn’t and it worries him. After all it’s well known now that you were the one that heard my warning about Gloom and attempted to save who you could.” +“You didn’t warn me, you gave a cryptic comment and it wasn’t even one that urged me to return to Gloom. I just told everyone you did.” +“See, lying to the rest of the shadows about something I didn’t actually say. You’re already doing a great job of following the traditions of shadow leaders!” Dendrin laughs. + +Is Dendrin mocking you, is he encouraging you, is it both? You can never quite tell. + +“So what are you saying? Are you officially appointing me as the new leader of the shadows?” +“Official? Since when have you known me to be so formal? And I’m not appointing you as anything; you don’t even have faith in me anyway, but if you really want to be in charge just do it already. I’d be careful though, that Cyrus fellow might get the same idea someday soon and I suppose you’ll need to decide if the expense of your own ambition is worth keeping the shadows together.” + +Once again after Dendrin’s little mind games you wake up. Whether Dendrin’s encouraging you or not, you’re going through with you plan and if that hurts Cyrus’ fragile ego then you’ll deal with it later, because the Empire is still a bigger threat right now. + +The next day you tell Talia that you’re going through with your plan. + +“I figured you would, but you know Brother Cyrus isn’t going to be happy about this.” +“Brother Cyrus needs to realize that Rask isn’t only front we’re fighting the Empire on and get over it.” +“Yes, I know. (Sigh) Well I’ll try to keep things stable here while you’re gone. Hopefully I can convince him that now is not a good time to assault Fort Destiny.” +“No, I’d rather you join me on this mission. I could use all the powerful shadows I can get, because I’m certainly not going to be able to get any other shadows to join me from here.” +“You want me to go? I mean of course I’ll go with you, but aren’t you worried about what might happen here if I don’t stay to help look after things?” + +While Talia would certainly be a great asset to your mission, but she also serves as a bit of a counter balance to Cyrus when you’re not around. +> Have her stay +“Perhaps you’re right. Cyrus is probably going to be fuming about me going ahead with this mission instead of gathering for an assault on the Fort Destiny. Best if you stay here and make sure he doesn’t go off and get everyone killed trying to do it with insufficient forces.” You reply. + +After kissing Talia goodbye, you set off on your journey immediately figuring Talia can explain everything to Cyrus instead. You travel a couple of days to the Quala province and eventually reach the meeting spot at night. There await around twenty shadows you picked which also includes Sister Yvette. You would’ve picked Brother Theo as well, but you needed someone to coordinate the other shadow cells in Quala. + +“As soon as I got the message that you were coming, our other shadow cells got into position to strike out at the other targets across Quala. I assume you’re ready to assault the camp brother?” Sister Yvette asks nearly as soon as you arrive. +“Yes, let’s get this over with, because this is going to be pretty grim business. Now I know some of you have already done a few necessary things, but probably not on this scale. These new eternals are only going to be children, and if the rumors are true, hundreds of them. Despite this they will still be dangerous, as they have no doubt gone through some of the Empire’s brainwashing techniques and training. You are not to hesitate just because they are young. Slay all of them…for Dendrin.” You add at the end. +“For Dendrin!” the rest of the shadows say in unison. +“Also be aware that there will no doubt be battle mages around and who knows what else. Let’s try to do this as silently as possible until it’s no longer an option. Everybody cloak.” + +Sister Yvette and couple of the other shadows take the lead due to their basic knowledge of the outside of the camp and even some of the interior. When you have to go below ground though, it’s going to be anything goes. You know going in that you’ll be severely outnumbered, but the whole point of doing it this way is to utilize your strengths which is stealth and terror on a grand scale. As you go about your business, you can’t help but start thinking about Talia, and briefly worrying about if Cyrus has given her any problems. You really should keep your mind occupied at a time like this, but you’re having a hard time. + +Neck snaps, bolts to the head and blades to the back dispatch the patrolling soldiers quietly and quickly… + +Due to your distraction, you fail to get a clean hit on one of the guards and he screams out loudly alerting some of the camp. Cursing your luck you signal to the nearest shadows to start moving from bunkhouse to bunkhouse to kill any soldiers still sleeping inside them. + +Doesn’t take long before a general alarm is raised. It isn’t quite that bad as you’re still easily taking them down from the cover of night and invisibility. The problem comes when one of the soldiers has gone to get extra help from below in the form of battle mages. + +Working together, the mages form an invisible shield to protect themselves and then dispel your cloak ability. Another one starts casting fireballs from behind the safety of the shield. Your speeding ability helps you and your shadows finish off the rest of the soldiers and once you manage to pass through the shield, you eliminate two of the mages and break their concentration. The remaining ones begin to run back to the underground portion of the camp. + +“Come on, we can’t let them get away!” you yell to the remainder of your shadows and chase after the mages. + +You hack down a couple more fleeing mages as you chase them into the complex. The last few remaining are screaming for help and it comes, but not in the form that you thought. + +Several heavily armored figures with axes begin to fill the corridor ahead of you. Derro. + +You briefly look behind you and see that your own forces are insufficient to tackle such foes. You’re also wondering if the new eternals are even here, as you haven’t seen a single one since you arrived. + +“Go back! Go back!” you exclaim. +“What? Why?” Yvette asks not really understanding the reality of the situation. The rest of the shadows are unsure of how to proceed. +“Those are the derro! We have to go back!” you exclaim. + +Meanwhile during this short exchange, one of the derro has thrown one of their firebombs near your feet. You see it just in time to grab Yvette and try to speed out of the way, but the explosion just catches you in its radius. Everything seems like a blur for a few moments and the next thing you know you’re face first on the floor with no feeling in one of your legs and your clothing on fire. + +You attempt to roll in an effort to extinguish the flames, and that’s when you see Yvette’s lifeless burning body nearby staring at you with dead eyes. This is soon followed by a crushing smash to your head and everything goes black. + +Unfortunately your life doesn’t end there. + +When you wake up you find yourself strapped to a table in a large lab. You see a lot of alchemy equipment, other tables with mutilated bodies on them and in a far corner of the room you see several large containers with loud growling noises emanating from them. Derro stand near them with weapons drawn. + +“No need for you to worry about that. Those trolls can’t get out of there I assure you. Good thing too, they’d rip us all apart in minutes! Heh heh heh heh!” a voice says to you. When you look over to your left, you see a short figure nearly eye level with you even though you’re strapped to a table. He’s bald with a gray skin color and dressed in a white robe of some sort, which is covered in blood, and several other unidentifiable fluids. You’re guessing that he’s an unarmored derro. + +“While you have caused quite a bit of a mess, I’m honestly very glad one of your kind has showed up. The Emperor sort of frowned on my suggestion to take one of their loyal Eternals for experimentation, shame about your leg getting blown off, but beggars can’t be choosers right?” the derro says. He then approaches closer with a mad gleam in his eye and a bloody knife in his hand. + +You say a few defiant words to the derro, but he’s unmoved by your futile protests. He goes on to say how your vivisection will come in handy in helping with the new eternal project. Mentally you try to prepare yourself for the pain, but nothing can prepare you for what will be your last days on this mortal plane. + +By day three you’re begging for them to just kill you. The derro of course ignores your pleas claiming that he has to keep you alive to finish his research. + +By day five, you’re actually screaming for Dendrin to help you. This naturally amuses the sadistic derro who says that he has to remember to strengthen the mind resistance of the new eternals so they aren’t as weak willed to fall prey to such superstitions. + +By day nine, you feel nothing any longer and the derro tells his fellows to toss you to the trolls.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your main purpose of coming here in the first place was to make sure Talia was safe. You can't leave now without trying to find her or at least her body if she's dead. + +You leave the storage room and decide your best bet would be to keep yourself cloaked the entire time while you search the fortress. You also decide to use spider crawl just to make sure you're really out of sight. + +As you stick to the ceilings of corridors and rooms you survey the carnage of what the Derro have wrought on the shadows. It's almost like they didn't have a chance. You now have to believe that this was why the Empire wasn't attacking Gloom, they had some sort of deal with the Derro to do it for them and since this used to be a Derro home at one time, they probably knew every ancient secret passage and entire layout of it. + +You progressively get more and more discouraged in your search and that's when you hear a voice in your head. Not Dendrin's though, it's distinctly a human one. + +"To…the left and down the hall…hurry…not much time…" you hear Master Ebon say. Lacking any other ideas, you follow his instructions and make your make to his location from where you are. As you do so, you notice there aren't any Derro in this direction, though there are a few dead ones. You're guessing that the rest of their fellows haven't searched this area as much. + +"The door…at the end…hurry…" + +Sensing that there are no Derro in the immediate area, you climb down from the ceiling and prepare to enter the door at the end of the corridor. When you arrive in front of it, you hear a loud click as it opens. + +"Quick, inside!" a brother says pulling you in by the arm roughly. + +A quick glance and you see a couple more shadows both in wounded condition. You then see Master Ebon in some sort of spell trance. He's also wounded, but his status looks a lot worse. He probably shouldn't even be alive with the deep bleeding gashes he displays across his body. A female shadow stands near him also wounded. When you see her face more clearly and recognize her as Talia, your worries are at least divided by half. + +"What are you doing here?" she exclaims. +"I heard the voice of Dendrin and…" in that moment you realize you've just admitted you've heard his voice for the first time. You then realize this isn't the time to keep it a secret and you continue. "…he…uh gave me a warning… are you alright?" +"Just a light wound…wait, you said Dendrin spoke to you? He warned you about the attack?" +"Well, not in so many words. Look we need get out of here, I can explain everything later." + +You then hear Master Ebon's voice again. He still isn't speaking verbally though and is using his mind. + +"Dendrin spoke to you? Lucky lad. He hasn't spoken to me since I first became a shadow. I always thought he would eventually, but he never did. I assumed he was testing me, to make my own decisions. Perhaps I offended him by claiming those decisions came from him directly, but I didn't know what else to do…" +"Master Ebon, we can discuss this later, right now we really need to leave!" +"Is Master Ebon speaking to you through his mind?" Talia asks. +"Yes, and what's he doing anyway? He's just sitting there with gashes in his chest deep enough for me to see his heart beating and bleeding out. As I said we need to leave before the Derro kill us all." + +Master Ebon interrupts you. + +"They've already succeeded in killing me I fear, but I still have powerful magic…enough to save the remainder of you…to carry on the fight…" + +Master Ebon's eyes begin to turn completely black, this is followed by his entire body. A shimmering portal then opens up nearby. + +"This…was to take us to strike at the very heart of the Empire…but now just an escape…to friends. Continue the fight there. The Empire will fall as long as you continue to fight. Dendrin I hope you can forgive my failures as I have served to the best of my abilities…I am ready to enter your realm of shadow if you will allow it…" + +"Master Ebon!" Talia shouts when she sees his body undergo his transformation. +"He can't be helped and he's giving us a chance to escape. We need to take it now!" +"But where is it going?" the shadow that grabbed you by the arm asks. +"He said to friends, but quite frankly it could lead into the middle of an Empire battalion and I think we'd still have better chances! Now come on!" + +Without another word you all enter the portal. Within seconds your eyes are nearly blinded by the whiteness of snow and you feel a blast of cold air whipping around you. + +"DIE! Shadow bastard!" you suddenly hear and turn around just in time to avoid a sword strike to the head. Realizing that this is an Empire soldier and not a Derro, you quickly dispatch your assailant who falls turning the snow red. + +When you said being transported into the middle of an Empire battalion would be a better situation, you didn't actually mean it! Fortunately it isn't quite as bad as all that. + +Getting your bearings you notice you're on a battlefield. The bodies of several Empire troops lay on the ground and are mixed in with those of orcs and shadows. A great fortress looms in the distance. + +"Fort Defiance…" you say to yourself. +"Brother, we're over here!" one of the shadows calls out to you and you run over to the group. (Apparently, all the others teleported to a place out of immediate danger!) + +"Are we in Rask?" the shadow who grabbed you asks. You still don't know his name, you can only guess he was one of the newer recruits after you joined. +"Well it doesn't look like Delurg that's for sure. I'm guessing that group ahead of us fighting the Empire troops are our brothers and sisters from Fort Defiance." Talia says. +"Looks like it, well no time like the present, we need to go help them." +"But what about those two? They're badly wounded and can't fight properly." The new shadow asks. +"(Sigh) Very well, you, what's your name anyway?" +"I'm Brother Gannon. I just joined recently…" +"Yes brother, we can get all that getting to know you stuff out of the way later. I want you to take those two and head over to that fort in the distance. I'm sure they can get help there. What about you Talia, I know you're wounded too, do you need any first aid?" + +Talia draws her weapon. + +"I'll worry about my minor cuts after we take care of this Empire scum." She answers in a harsh tone. +"Okay then let's go down there and drive back the Empire!" you answer back. + +You and Talia sprint as fast as you can to where all the action is taking place. Swords are clashed, halberds are swung, skulls are smashed and heads are severed. Mostly all in your favor and the Empire troops were actually losing even before you got here. Still, it's good to be on a winning side of a fight today and you feel energized by the battle. + +A short reunion occurs as you finish off the last of the stubborn Empire soldiers. + +"What the…? What are you doing here?! I thought you were supposed to be in the Quala province!"Cyrus exclaims running his sword through an enemy. +"Things change brother and how have you been doing?" you answer doing the same. +"We've been getting wave after wave of Empire skirmishers recently, but nothing serious yet. Honestly I would've thought we would've had a full on assault by now. I think they're trying to whittle us down, it won't work though. We're entrenched and have people all over the area slowly turning the population of Rask against them…is that Talia over there? What's SHE doing here? Last I heard she was supposed to be back in Gloom helping with the ritual that Master Ebon and Brother Gray were doing." +"Like I said, things change Cyrus." + +At this moment there is a lull in the fighting that allows Cyrus to actually stop fighting. He looks at you his expression is one you've never seen before. One of genuine worry. + +"Oh no…what happened?" + +You don't even know where to begin. + +"Cyrus let's just get through this battle and celebrate THIS victory over the Empire. We can dwell on the troubled times to come later." + +The pair of you say nothing more for the rest of the battle which soon ends with your victory. You just wish it was a better one, because it cannot possibly counteract the incredible loss you have suffered this dark day. + +You think back on how you told Murk in his dying breaths that the Empire would fall, you also think back to how Master Ebon believed it would fall in his on dying breaths. If you had to guess, you think Talia probably still believes it and you know Cyrus will even when you tell him all that has happened. The righteousness in the shadows' cause and its unwavering faith in Dendrin has always been its strength that it cannot lose no matter how bad the odds. + +Of course it would help if you actually believed all that nonsense. + +Which brings you to your next dilemma: You already let it slip to Talia that you spoke to Dendrin and Brother Gannon was also there to hear it (and maybe even the other two wounded shadows heard it as well) , so it'll probably be brought up after everyone is caught up to speed on the war front and what happened at Gloom. The fact that Dendrin spoke to you is actually why you're here in the first place. + +The question is should you even mention what Dendrin said to you or just lie about what he said? Your own feelings on the situation are that Dendrin, god or not, is not worth following let alone creating a fanatical religion around. He obviously doesn't give a shit about any of you and sees you all as amusing toys at best. However, given the grim situation, the misguided slavish devotion to Dendrin might be the only thing that'll keep their spirits up. Not to mention you wonder if you'd even be believed. Cyrus himself is a very dedicated believer, he may even turn violent and you aren't even sure if Talia would believe you. +> War Report (Allies & The Butcher of Rask) +After the battle, Cyrus tells you more about the situation in Rask on the way back to Fort Defiance. It's mostly positive compared to what you'll have to him about Gloom and possibly Dendrin. + +He says that the orcs have been holding up their end and even managed to ally with some of the ogre tribes nearby (Though it's usually only after killing most of the tribes to establish dominance first) Not much luck with the giants yet, but at least they aren't attacking like they used to in the old days. He mentions that the current orc commander here, Flog has been in contact with Captain Gruz on strategies and tactics, though the letters are getting rarer. One wonders if Gruz hasn't already been discovered or if he's just having to lay low for a while. You get the impression Cyrus seems to see your orc allies as useful, but ultimately expendable tools to take the hits that the shadows don't need to. + +"I think after this is all over, the orcs are going their separate ways and that's fine. This has always been an alliance of convenience, but like I said, we've also been turning the population of Rask against the Empire. Though it's not exactly hard when they've got someone like Kane in charge of the area. The man has probably done more to alienate the citizens of Rask more than anyone." +"Oh yes, the infamous Captain Kane, Butcher of Rask. Heard about his ruthlessness even way down in the Quala province. Didn't he earn his nickname by wiping out several barbarian tribes here? +"Yeah, he was stationed at Fort Destiny, years before I got here. Showed absolutely no mercy when it came to cutting down the various barb tribes from what I heard. Same thing for the renegade elven population here too." +"Didn't he recently wipe out a small hamlet because the people were complaining about food rationing?" Talia asks. +"One hamlet? Try three and it was only a handful of people complaining. I don't even think they were openly criticizing the Empire's overall tyranny so much as they were just hungry. Captain Kane however took it as a threat to his authority and had the entire hamlet wiped out to the last man, woman and child. Then he did the same thing to two of the neighboring hamlets as a warning for other places to not complain anymore. That sort of thing might be effective on barbs or monsters, but it isn't effective in the long run on citizens you're supposed to be protecting. The fear eventually disappears and only instills great hatred and that's why we've been able to get help from the local population as far as hidden supplies and intelligence when they're able." + +You remember Kane in class and him being a very capable fighter who actually killed two of your other classmates during sparing lessons. You don't even think he did it intentionally though, he just thought that's what he was supposed to do because Mistress encouraged such behavior. Given his unassuming and quiet nature back then though, you're a little surprised he wasn't picked to be a shadow guard, though perhaps they realized his dedicated to orders would be more useful as a soldier. + +"Well, I can't say I'm too surprised. I mean he is one of…" you stop yourself from saying "us" since you know Cyrus would probably be insulted by it. He identifies more with being a shadow than an Eternal now. + +"…the Empire's lap dogs after all. They say jump and he asks how high." You finish. +"True…but…" Cyrus says and stops. + +Now this is interesting. You didn't expect this sort of hesitation from Cyrus. + +"But what Cyrus?" Talia asks. +"I dunno. I sometimes wonder if we all could've turned out like that, if we hadn't been picked to be shadows." +"Heh, well I have to admit, I have wondered the same thing sometimes." You reply. +"I know I really shouldn't, but I sometimes feel sorry for our unenlightened classmates. I mean so many of them didn't have a chance to hear the truth of Dendrin's call. +"Seriously?" you ask in genuine surprise. +"Yes. The worst part is I really believe I could get through to someone like Kane under the right circumstances and could turn him to our side. Show him that the Empire is a corrupt entity that needs to be destroyed. I'll never get that chance, but such is the will of Dendrin, just as it was his will that we were picked to hear his words instead of them." +"I suppose…" you answer. + +Your private feelings on Dendrin aside, you have to admit this is a side of Cyrus you've never seen before. He has always been so dedicated to Dendrin, that to hear him express any sort of sympathy towards an unbeliever let alone an Empire enemy is unheard of. You doubt if you could have such sympathy towards people trying to kill you and you aren't even a religious fanatic like he is. + +In any case it doesn't make your decision on whether or not to tell the truth about what Dendrin said to you any easier.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 25 + +You settle into the bed of the dead Empire captain for the night. Normally you'd be a lot more alert, but you've got an entire group of shadows here at the conquered Empire outpost, not to mention several elven freedom fighters. You're fairly confident that they'll wake you if a counter attack comes. + +For now though you really need to get a good night's rest. You've been fighting non-stop for the past couple of weeks and you need a quick recharge at least. It doesn't help that the use of shadow magic drains you as well and probably why you don't use it much. Not that you really need to anyway, your natural skills work well enough. + +While the rebellion has only just gotten started, a lot of progress has been made. All the provinces from what you know of are suffering revolts on some scale. The worst of the lot being Rask where Cyrus has taken control of Fort Defiance. The shadow/orc alliance seems to be working well up there and the rest of the towns aren't exactly in line to help the Empire. Apparently the strongest resistance is from the second Empire fort called Destiny and another Eternal called Captain Kane is in charge. You barely remember him from class, though you heard he made a name for himself wiping out various barbarian tribes. + +Speaking of Eternals, one has been personally put in charge of attempting to eliminate the shadow striker cells like yours. A Captain Roldan. You do vaguely remember him from class. Tended to follow orders to the letter during training. Sort of like you in a way, but different. He was more extroverted you think, you guess that's why he was chosen to be a soldier rather than a shadow. You still don't know the reasoning was for making you a Shadow Guard candidate anyway, if you had to guess it was to try to spy on them. + +Of course this all makes you wonder what if you hadn't been chosen? What if you'd been a regular soldier? Would you have been content on just following Empire orders and never knowing any better? You'll never know of course. You've chosen your path and it's best to make most of it. Not that you regret your decision as the rebellion goes well. + +And with that positive thought you fall asleep. As you drift off you find yourself back in the numbness of the void… + +"It's finally happened. Rebellion across the Empire. Are you finally satisfied?" +"I'm satisfied in that I'm glad we've finally stopped sitting on our hands. Why ask me anyway? You're the one that's been guiding the shadows all this time for centuries to rebel. Shouldn't you be the one that's excessively happy about it?" you ask +"Oh I suppose…" +"You suppose? I don't get you. You act like you don't care one way or another about it!" +"Perhaps the time has passed." +"What?!" +"Oh don't get me wrong, I once wanted to see the Empire fall because it infringed on my own control over the mortals that were worshipping me at the time. And it's been interesting how over the decades and centuries that my little followers have been building up their strength to defeat them, but quite frankly I figured they would've done it long before then. Now? Well its okay, but I've lost a bit of interest since that time." + +If you weren't floating in a void of sensory deprivation you'd yell and scream at Dendrin so loudly that the rage would be felt throughout your body right now. + +"But that's your fucking fault. YOU were the one guiding them! If you wanted them to strike before now, you should've made some sort of sign to Master Ebon, or whoever was in charge at the time!" +"Quite frankly I stopped giving them any advice centuries ago. I found it was much more interesting to see them figure out things on their own. The only time I speak to any of them is during the ceremony process." +"If that's the case, why all the indoctrination, if you're such a fan of free will?" +"How long do you think that actually lasts? It's only temporary! Just long enough to get them to have faith in me. Whether they continue to follow me or not is all them and on a related note, whatever so called signs the shadow leaders have been talking about are either ones they made up or made up in their heads. Glad to see Ebon finally decided to get off his ass and do something and be interesting for a change though." +"So I was right! I've been right all along! You're nothing but a fucking fraud. You're not a god at all." +"No, Eternal YOU got it wrong. It isn't I who is a fraud. It's the religion itself! I didn't originally call ANYONE to worship me. They did that naturally when one of those big hairless monkeys stumbled into a cave and messed around with some lost magical Derro object that opened up a portal where I dwelled. I was perfectly content spending infinity in my own realm until that time, but things change and I took an interest in these new creatures and their world. Wasn't my fault that they saw me as some deity just because they couldn't comprehend me in any other way." +"You didn't exactly deter that thinking though." +"Well you have me there Eternal. And I say so what? I gave these creatures purpose, meaning and even magical power! In return they worship me and serve. If you really think about it, is that not the definition of a god? And so what if I have lost interest in my subjects? True, they have proven loyal, but I grow bored with their antics. I seek other stimulus now." + +As strange as it may seem you sort of understand Dendrin's point of view. He views humans and mortals in general as you would watch insects. They're interesting to watch for awhile, but after some time has passed you're ready to move on. And really who's to say that if you weren't some powerful being you wouldn't do the same? Still, you have more questions. + +"Okay, but why not move on then if you're so bored?" +"Because I'm not quite THAT bored yet. Besides when you arrived things started to get interesting again. Never had anyone resist my indoctrination so strongly before. I probably could've increased it, but that might've killed you besides I thought it would be more interesting to see if you followed me even without the indoctrination. It's interesting to see that while you have decided to follow the shadow's cause, you have been nothing but indifferent to outright hostile towards the religion even before you found all this out. That displays a grain of imagination and it's mainly why I've been in contact with you. In fact you're about the only mortal I've spoken to on a regular basis in centuries." +"I guess I'm the lucky one then." You remark. +"Your sarcasm aside, you actually are lucky, because I'm about to give you some friendly advice. Namely, don't go back to Gloom." +"What? What are you talking about?" +"That's all you get Eternal. Heed my advice or don't, it makes no difference to me. Talk to you again later perhaps." + +Once again you wake up though this time Dendrin gave you some direct information. Quite a bit of it really. You aren't even sure of what to make of all of it. You mean you always knew something was off with the whole shadow religion, but you didn't think he'd actually admit it all to you. Makes you wonder why he did, when he's been so cryptic in the past. Then against perhaps he knows you can't actually tell anyone, or rather you could, but wouldn't be believed and most likely attacked as a heretic. Perhaps that's his little joke on you. Yeah sounds like him. + +Still he's also given you a warning of not going back to Gloom. Why? Is something terrible going to happen there? Does he mean forever or just in the near future or is he just trying to play head games with you as usual? + +In reality, you aren't even scheduled to go back to Gloom anytime soon. Your job has been to sew as much chaos as you can across the Quala province. Still, if something bad IS going to happen there, maybe you should try to prevent it or warn somebody or something because right now Brother Gray and Master Ebon are supposed to be preparing a proper army of shadows to march directly on the capital, though not in the traditional way. Apparently they're going to try to use a magical gate to travel through the shadow world and pop up right in the heart of the Emperor's Palace. Such magic is very powerful to use, but also very time consuming and fatiguing. You know they have been going through some sort of long involved ritual which is involving several of the more powerful shadows to link their energy and even draw upon some of the weaker ones. You know Murk and Bianca are there rather than working in a shadow guerilla detachment. (They never quite looked at you the same way again after the incident with Shade.) Talia is also there, though she's one of those lending her powerful shadow magic skills to the ritual. + +And despite one of the most important events occurring at Gloom right now, the ONLY reason why you'd return there to possibly risk your own life is for Talia. You've grown closer to her in a way that you never thought possible. The relationship you've experienced with her is just one more reason why fighting against the Empire is the best idea you ever had. + +Still all of this might be for naught if something happens to Gloom. You still don't know WHAT that could be and for all you know it could just be something that will affect your life not anyone else's. (And from Dendrin's tone, not for the better) +> Send another shadow back instead +Knowing Dendrin, he’s probably warned you after something bad has already happened at Gloom and is toying with you just to see what you’ll do. You’re just hoping Talia is all right, but you can’t go back just for one woman and your actions here are more important to the cause right now. If some major tragedy already has happened, then you probably won’t be able to do anything about it. + +While you’re a necessity here, that doesn’t mean you can’t send another in your place to check on Gloom. You call to speak to one of your fellow shadows that you believe to be the most skilled. + +“Sister Yvette, I need you to go back to Gloom and check on things there.” +“What? But brother, we are to assault a supply caravan to Roldan’s camp soon. You know it’ll be heavily guarded and it would be best to utilize all the strength we have on it.” +“I know. That’s why I will have these people here and the cell we have in the Guf Hills to help. Don’t worry about it.” +“Brother, my place is here to fight along side you against the Empire. We are not due to check in at Gloom anytime soon and Master Ebon is performing the important ceremony there. I don’t understand why you would want me to disturb that for no reason.” + +You didn’t really want to get into this because it’s likely to bring forth more questions, but Yvette is proving to be unmoving on this request. + +“Sister Yvette I have reason to believe Gloom may be in danger. Call it instinct, call it a premonition or call it the will of Dendrin, I don’t care, but I REALLY feel someone needs to check in on Gloom. I’d do it myself, but seeing as my mission here takes priority it would be irresponsible for me to leave my command. So I’m sending you. Now I hope you will obey my orders and if everything is in fact okay there you can make a complaint to Master Ebon at his earliest convenience. If not, well I believe we’ll have bigger problems.” + +Your explanation still doesn’t tell her much and you can sense that she’s very hesistant about just following through on your order based on a hunch, but given that it’s Gloom then it’s still worth checking out even if nothing is going on there. It also helps that you’ve been a very effective cell leader. Sister Yvette has certainly been a shadow longer than you, but your skills and leadership have established your dominance. Despite how everyone is supposed to be equal in the shadows there will always be those who are leaders and those who are followers. + +“Very well…I will go. What should I do if there is trouble?” she asks. +“Help in any way you can then return to me as soon as possible unless you bump into Master Ebon and he has different order for you. As I said I will be meeting with the cell in the Guf Hills and we will probably be making that a temporary base of operations.” +“Okay, I’ll take my leave as soon as possible. My Dendrin watch over you and guide you to success on the next mission…and I hope you’re wrong about Gloom, brother.” +“Me too.” + +The next day you make your way to the Guf Hills, thinking not only about Gloom, but Dendrin as well. You briefly wonder if there might be a way of telling the shadows about Dendrin, but you quickly dismiss the idea. None of them would believe you and it wouldn’t do much good right now any way. The Empire is still the major threat and until that enemy is defeated only then will you even have the time to worry about the shadows’s sham of a religion. + +When you try to make contact with Brother Theo in the Guf Hills, it isn’t a straightforward process. Naturally there is always a little caution, but those under his command are a suspicious violent lot even before the rebellion broke out. The rebels he’s been directing primarily consist of criminals or ignorant peasants that have always made their homes in these hills and most of them are both. Many of them make racial slurs at the elves in your own company and if you had to guess there’s evidence of some inbreeding going on with some of these hill peasants. + +After a short stand off, Brother Theo comes out and admonishes all of them for their behavior towards you. Most of them grumble and go back to doing what they were doing. You tell your own people to find a spot and keep away from the others while you and Brother Theo talk to each other. + +“Glad you’re here brother and with a couple of fellow shadows I see. That’s good, because we could use more disciplined types here!” +“Brother Theo, what is going on here? I mean I know we’re using anyone who has a grudge against the Empire, but these people have to be some of the lowest dregs of humanity.” +“You’ll get no argument from me brother. It is truly Dendrin testing my patience with these people, but I will pass that test and besides after this is all said and done, the Empire will fall and that’s the major goal right now.” +“True, but are these people actually any good in a fight?” +“Hah! That’s all these people practically know. These folks might be unruly, but they know these hills better than anyone else, so we manage to stay hidden from Empire search teams for long periods of time. And if we can’t, then we stay one step ahead of them before we’re discovered. Having had to listen to their stories over and over, the families around this region have chaffed living under the Empire rule for almost as long as the shadows. Apparently they’ve been planning and building up supplies for a very long time. Pity we didn’t know about them sooner, but as you can tell they aren’t very trusting of anyone who isn’t family.” +“I’m sort of surprised the Empire didn’t stomp them out of the hills given their problem with authority figures.” +“Eh, they might seem like idiots, but they’re smarter than they look and can obviously play the waiting game. Also I guess when the Empire discovered there weren’t even any minerals worth mining in these hills, they took less notice of the place and basically just left the Guf people to their own devices as long as they paid their taxes on time. Most were wise enough to at least obey that one law and even those that didn’t pay knew the hills so well it simply wasn’t worth the Empire’s time to track down an evader. Oh sure every once in awhile the Empire would sometimes send a few dark elven mercs to track down the more serious criminals, but that had mixed success and at the time the Empire was always more concerned with either conquest or territory that was actually worth something. Probably never believed that these hill folk could ever be a legitimate threat to them either. A bit short sighted of them, but then that’s the Empire for you.” + +You nod and agree. As fascinating as all this is, your mind is still on Gloom. Of course you’re not going to mention any of that to Brother Theo, so you ask him what the plan is to assault Captain Roldan’s supply caravan. He tells you it’s a simple plan, the caravan is going to be passing through a nearby area that leads into a valley in a couple of days and in that time you’ll be setting an ambush from both sides as well. + +“Actually I’m glad you’ve brought some elves with you, we could use more archers.” Theo remarks. +“Yeah, well don’t believe all the myths. They aren’t all expert marksmen, but the ones with me are still good enough for this ambush.” You reply. “Still, something about this seems a bit too easy. The Empire has to know that running a supply line through that valley is an all too tempting target especially with a known enemy making their home nearby.” +“That supply caravan is going straight to Captain Roldan, it’s going to be very heavily guarded. Chances are they’re just arrogant enough to believe that any possible attack isn’t going to succeed. This is the Empire after all.” +“Hmm, maybe…” + +After Brother Theo reassures you of the success of the plan you head back to your own people who thankfully haven’t gotten into any fights with the hill folk. Fortunately the next two days of preparation also pass without too much incident. Some the elves get a few more slurs thrown their way, but nothing that they haven’t been called before. One the hill folk actually speaks to you at great length asking you questions and such. You get the impression he was trying to get a feel of not only who you are, but the shadows in general. He wasn’t hostile towards you though, they apparently know better than to anger shadows too much. + +In the back of your mind during all this is still Gloom. Yvette wouldn’t be back yet even if she hadn’t found anything, but you still fear the worst. Makes you wonder if you shouldn’t have gone yourself. It’s too late now though and you need to focus on the task at hand. + +The day finally comes and the supply caravan enters the valley. You on one side with your group and Brother Theo with his group on the other. He also has people ready to cut the supply caravan off from the front and from retreat as well. + +The large group of wagons and carriages are heavily guarded as expected. Several soldiers of the elite variety and you see an Empire battle mage as well. You wait for Brother Theo’s signal… + +But before that can happen, the supply wagons suddenly stop and the battle mage suddenly casts a faint blue barrier over the entire supply caravan. Brother Theo orders his people to fire arrows at them, but they bounce harmlessly off the barrier. You shake your head cursing because you knew this was going to be too easy. + +“Rebellious fools, did you really think you were smart enough to ambush the Empire so easily? Flee now and enjoy your worthless lives for a little while longer or face your death with a smidgeon of honor by coming down into this valley!” the soldier in charge of the caravan shouts. + +“Looks like we’re going to have to do this the hard way.” You say to yourself. + +You’ve still got them outnumbered and surrounded even if you can’t rain a bunch of arrows on them, not to mention your own combat skills are more than a match for most Empire soldiers. + +Still there’s no reason to be foolish, you don’t tell your people to charge down the valley, you let the Gufians do that, since they seem eager to do that sort of thing. Even the ones directly under Brother Theo’s command are rushing past him. As for the empire troops, they seem content on waiting for you inside the safety of their barrier. Unfortunately some of them have bows too and theirs work perfectly well from inside the barrier. + +You, Theo and the other shadows easily dodge such attacks thanks to your shadow magic ability to speed yourself up to quickly close the gap. Most of the non-shadows aren’t as lucky. The numbers are evened up a bit more by the time the major close combat occurs. + +The Empire battle mage releases the barrier and then casts some sort of speed spell on his own people. Again, this merely matches the shadows, but it’s a severe advantage against the non-shadows. You need to eliminate that mage quick. +> Fire a bolt at the mage +You try to get a clear shot at the mage with your armbow. Despite the chaos your aim is true and the bolt flies directly at the mage’s head…only for an Empire soldier to step in the way and get killed instead. + +Another shadow tries to follow your lead by firing at the mage as well, but at this point he’s put up his own personal barrier. Realizing he’s in danger, he raises his hand up and a large arc of electricity emanates from it hitting several of your allies as well as Empire soldiers. Fortunately you were far enough away and quickly cloak yourself to avoid being targeted more directly. + +You run around one of the wagons and see the mage is still focused on frying his victims. You quickly load up another bolt and fire again, this time you don’t miss this time as the bolt enters his temple killing him instantly. With the mage dispatched the Empire soldiers suddenly slow down to their normal speed and the battle swings in your favor once again. Still after it’s all said and done, this was more costly than it should’ve been. Brother Theo’s lost more than half of his “hill folk” and you’ve suffered some losses as well and you’ve still got Gloom to worry about. + +You can’t take the waiting anymore and you decide after a short rest period, you’re heading back to Gloom with the remaining shadows under your command. You get some questions, but you simply tell them that Dendrin himself told you go back and much like Yvette they back down and fall in line. + +You half expect an encampment of Empire troops surrounding the entrance of Gloom, but instead what you find is worse. The rock that acted as the concealed entrance to Gloom is gone, or rather reduced to rubble. + +You and the rest of the shadows with you dig in the rubble for quite a while, but you don’t even reach where the stairs would be, its just more debris. It’s apparent that the entire entryway has been collapsed from beneath; possibly even all of Gloom has been buried. There’s no sign of Yvette either, but you can assume since she never reported back to you, she must’ve entered Gloom before whatever happened here. + +While the rest of shadows start lamenting what might’ve become of Master Ebon and the rest, you on the other hand mourn quietly for Talia. You also silently curse yourself for not going back to Gloom immediately, if you had maybe you could’ve done something. + +With this destruction of Gloom, the shadows have been dealt a crippling blow. Possibly one they can’t come back from. You’re going to have to try to regroup what cells you can and try to alter a strategy plan. The main problem with that plan isn’t so much the sheer impossibility of it, so much as with Talia gone you don’t know if your heart going to be completely in the “cause” anymore. Really she was one of your main motivations, and now that Dendrin has flat out told you how he doesn’t give a damn about the shadows, you sort of have inside information on how this rebellion is likely to turn out. + +Only time will tell you suppose… + +Year 30 + +“Has nobody been able to contact Cyrus up in Rask?” you ask. +“Minimal contact brother. As I said, last time we did it was two years ago and he said he couldn’t spare anyone. Reports also said he lost his orc allies up there.” Brother Theo remarks. +“Wonderful, the Empire is closing in on us and we can’t even count on the bare minimum support.” +“We shouldn’t give up hope brother. Dendrin has preserved us this long.” + +You ignore Theo’s remarks since you don’t feel like spending what will probably your last moments in life, on a religious debate. Suffice to say, the few shadows that remain with you know full well of your feelings on Dendrin. If you weren’t such a desperate situation, you’d be correct in believing that they’d kill you as a heretic. However, when someone has kept you alive for five years in a grim situation, people tend to overlook certain things they find spiritually offensive. And that’s what you’ve been trying your best to do on sheer determination and revenge, but in the end the numbers have always been against you, and the Empire has finally managed to focus on eliminating the shadows. Stopping their war with the Felkan Kingdom helped, but the efforts of Captain Roldan have probably been the most damaging to the shadows in recent years (Along with Captain Kane in Rask). + +You briefly wonder why you stayed to fight seeing as you had no faith in Dendrin and Talia was gone, but ultimately it was always your desire for battle that kept you around. Maybe it always was leading you to do the things you did. + +And now here you are hold up in a cave in the Guf Hills where you were five years ago. The Empire has soldiers and dark elven mercs sweeping the hills looking for you. It’ll only be a matter of time. You just hope Captain Roldan himself will be the one to find you. You’d like to at least face the man who’s been hunting you for years in combat before you die. + +When the cave is swarmed with enemies, you don’t get your wish. Still, you give a fight that satisfies you when sheer numbers finally bring you down. + +The best thing is, you never have to worry Dendrin ever speaking to you again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Knowing Dendrin, he’s probably warned you after something bad has already happened at Gloom and is toying with you just to see what you’ll do. You’re just hoping Talia is all right, but you can’t go back just for one woman and your actions here are more important to the cause right now. If some major tragedy already has happened, then you probably won’t be able to do anything about it. + +While you’re a necessity here, that doesn’t mean you can’t send another in your place to check on Gloom. You call to speak to one of your fellow shadows that you believe to be the most skilled. + +“Sister Yvette, I need you to go back to Gloom and check on things there.” +“What? But brother, we are to assault a supply caravan to Roldan’s camp soon. You know it’ll be heavily guarded and it would be best to utilize all the strength we have on it.” +“I know. That’s why I will have these people here and the cell we have in the Guf Hills to help. Don’t worry about it.” +“Brother, my place is here to fight along side you against the Empire. We are not due to check in at Gloom anytime soon and Master Ebon is performing the important ceremony there. I don’t understand why you would want me to disturb that for no reason.” + +You didn’t really want to get into this because it’s likely to bring forth more questions, but Yvette is proving to be unmoving on this request. + +“Sister Yvette I have reason to believe Gloom may be in danger. Call it instinct, call it a premonition or call it the will of Dendrin, I don’t care, but I REALLY feel someone needs to check in on Gloom. I’d do it myself, but seeing as my mission here takes priority it would be irresponsible for me to leave my command. So I’m sending you. Now I hope you will obey my orders and if everything is in fact okay there you can make a complaint to Master Ebon at his earliest convenience. If not, well I believe we’ll have bigger problems.” + +Your explanation still doesn’t tell her much and you can sense that she’s very hesistant about just following through on your order based on a hunch, but given that it’s Gloom then it’s still worth checking out even if nothing is going on there. It also helps that you’ve been a very effective cell leader. Sister Yvette has certainly been a shadow longer than you, but your skills and leadership have established your dominance. Despite how everyone is supposed to be equal in the shadows there will always be those who are leaders and those who are followers. + +“Very well…I will go. What should I do if there is trouble?” she asks. +“Help in any way you can then return to me as soon as possible unless you bump into Master Ebon and he has different order for you. As I said I will be meeting with the cell in the Guf Hills and we will probably be making that a temporary base of operations.” +“Okay, I’ll take my leave as soon as possible. My Dendrin watch over you and guide you to success on the next mission…and I hope you’re wrong about Gloom, brother.” +“Me too.” + +The next day you make your way to the Guf Hills, thinking not only about Gloom, but Dendrin as well. You briefly wonder if there might be a way of telling the shadows about Dendrin, but you quickly dismiss the idea. None of them would believe you and it wouldn’t do much good right now any way. The Empire is still the major threat and until that enemy is defeated only then will you even have the time to worry about the shadows’s sham of a religion. + +When you try to make contact with Brother Theo in the Guf Hills, it isn’t a straightforward process. Naturally there is always a little caution, but those under his command are a suspicious violent lot even before the rebellion broke out. The rebels he’s been directing primarily consist of criminals or ignorant peasants that have always made their homes in these hills and most of them are both. Many of them make racial slurs at the elves in your own company and if you had to guess there’s evidence of some inbreeding going on with some of these hill peasants. + +After a short stand off, Brother Theo comes out and admonishes all of them for their behavior towards you. Most of them grumble and go back to doing what they were doing. You tell your own people to find a spot and keep away from the others while you and Brother Theo talk to each other. + +“Glad you’re here brother and with a couple of fellow shadows I see. That’s good, because we could use more disciplined types here!” +“Brother Theo, what is going on here? I mean I know we’re using anyone who has a grudge against the Empire, but these people have to be some of the lowest dregs of humanity.” +“You’ll get no argument from me brother. It is truly Dendrin testing my patience with these people, but I will pass that test and besides after this is all said and done, the Empire will fall and that’s the major goal right now.” +“True, but are these people actually any good in a fight?” +“Hah! That’s all these people practically know. These folks might be unruly, but they know these hills better than anyone else, so we manage to stay hidden from Empire search teams for long periods of time. And if we can’t, then we stay one step ahead of them before we’re discovered. Having had to listen to their stories over and over, the families around this region have chaffed living under the Empire rule for almost as long as the shadows. Apparently they’ve been planning and building up supplies for a very long time. Pity we didn’t know about them sooner, but as you can tell they aren’t very trusting of anyone who isn’t family.” +“I’m sort of surprised the Empire didn’t stomp them out of the hills given their problem with authority figures.” +“Eh, they might seem like idiots, but they’re smarter than they look and can obviously play the waiting game. Also I guess when the Empire discovered there weren’t even any minerals worth mining in these hills, they took less notice of the place and basically just left the Guf people to their own devices as long as they paid their taxes on time. Most were wise enough to at least obey that one law and even those that didn’t pay knew the hills so well it simply wasn’t worth the Empire’s time to track down an evader. Oh sure every once in awhile the Empire would sometimes send a few dark elven mercs to track down the more serious criminals, but that had mixed success and at the time the Empire was always more concerned with either conquest or territory that was actually worth something. Probably never believed that these hill folk could ever be a legitimate threat to them either. A bit short sighted of them, but then that’s the Empire for you.” + +You nod and agree. As fascinating as all this is, your mind is still on Gloom. Of course you’re not going to mention any of that to Brother Theo, so you ask him what the plan is to assault Captain Roldan’s supply caravan. He tells you it’s a simple plan, the caravan is going to be passing through a nearby area that leads into a valley in a couple of days and in that time you’ll be setting an ambush from both sides as well. + +“Actually I’m glad you’ve brought some elves with you, we could use more archers.” Theo remarks. +“Yeah, well don’t believe all the myths. They aren’t all expert marksmen, but the ones with me are still good enough for this ambush.” You reply. “Still, something about this seems a bit too easy. The Empire has to know that running a supply line through that valley is an all too tempting target especially with a known enemy making their home nearby.” +“That supply caravan is going straight to Captain Roldan, it’s going to be very heavily guarded. Chances are they’re just arrogant enough to believe that any possible attack isn’t going to succeed. This is the Empire after all.” +“Hmm, maybe…” + +After Brother Theo reassures you of the success of the plan you head back to your own people who thankfully haven’t gotten into any fights with the hill folk. Fortunately the next two days of preparation also pass without too much incident. Some the elves get a few more slurs thrown their way, but nothing that they haven’t been called before. One the hill folk actually speaks to you at great length asking you questions and such. You get the impression he was trying to get a feel of not only who you are, but the shadows in general. He wasn’t hostile towards you though, they apparently know better than to anger shadows too much. + +In the back of your mind during all this is still Gloom. Yvette wouldn’t be back yet even if she hadn’t found anything, but you still fear the worst. Makes you wonder if you shouldn’t have gone yourself. It’s too late now though and you need to focus on the task at hand. + +The day finally comes and the supply caravan enters the valley. You on one side with your group and Brother Theo with his group on the other. He also has people ready to cut the supply caravan off from the front and from retreat as well. + +The large group of wagons and carriages are heavily guarded as expected. Several soldiers of the elite variety and you see an Empire battle mage as well. You wait for Brother Theo’s signal… + +But before that can happen, the supply wagons suddenly stop and the battle mage suddenly casts a faint blue barrier over the entire supply caravan. Brother Theo orders his people to fire arrows at them, but they bounce harmlessly off the barrier. You shake your head cursing because you knew this was going to be too easy. + +“Rebellious fools, did you really think you were smart enough to ambush the Empire so easily? Flee now and enjoy your worthless lives for a little while longer or face your death with a smidgeon of honor by coming down into this valley!” the soldier in charge of the caravan shouts. + +“Looks like we’re going to have to do this the hard way.” You say to yourself. + +You’ve still got them outnumbered and surrounded even if you can’t rain a bunch of arrows on them, not to mention your own combat skills are more than a match for most Empire soldiers. + +Still there’s no reason to be foolish, you don’t tell your people to charge down the valley, you let the Gufians do that, since they seem eager to do that sort of thing. Even the ones directly under Brother Theo’s command are rushing past him. As for the empire troops, they seem content on waiting for you inside the safety of their barrier. Unfortunately some of them have bows too and theirs work perfectly well from inside the barrier. + +You, Theo and the other shadows easily dodge such attacks thanks to your shadow magic ability to speed yourself up to quickly close the gap. Most of the non-shadows aren’t as lucky. The numbers are evened up a bit more by the time the major close combat occurs. + +The Empire battle mage releases the barrier and then casts some sort of speed spell on his own people. Again, this merely matches the shadows, but it’s a severe advantage against the non-shadows. You need to eliminate that mage quick. +> Close in for the kill +You cut down a nearby soldier and try to close the gap between you and the mage. Despite the chaos the mage notices you and then raise his hand up and a large arc of lightning is unleashed from it. Not only are you hit, but several of your allies and even Empire troops are hit as well. Unfortunately for you, the Empire has always considered any of their own people expendable, so the mage doesn’t stop with his chain lightning spell. + +You feel the electricity course through your body and burn you from the inside out. By the time the mage finally releases his spell, you’re one of the many smoking black corpses created by his handiwork. + +Ultimately you’re just another forgotten body in a long line of victorious battles for the Empire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 18 + +“And so I said to the blacksmith, well if you’re intending on killing the Emperor, you better damn well have a better plan than those group of thugs you’ve been supplying with weapons in the sewers. At least supply them to some thugs who the Emperor wouldn’t be able to smell six miles away!” you say, and this is followed by a few laughs from some of your fellow shadows. +“Hah, good one brother! Tell me, what did you do to the blacksmith?” Brother Murk asks. +“Oh we relocated him to our safehouse in Derlerg along with his buddies, reported that we eliminated him as a dissident…you know the usual. I must say, their surprise that we aren’t going to kill them is always amusing though.” You reply. +“Yes, given our reputation, I imagine it is. Still, it’s all for a good cause eh, brother?” +“Yes brother, it certainly is.” You say to Murk with a nod and take another drink of black tea. +“Well I have to say I’m very glad you’ve finally managed to settle in brother, I have to admit, for awhile I was getting a little worried about you. You just didn’t seem like yourself after our ceremony initiation.” Talia says. +“Yeah, well I guess I was just a late bloomer or something.” +“Don’t worry about it brother, it’s all in the past. What matters now is that we’re all on the same page now.” Murk replies. + +On the same page…the problem is you really aren’t on the same page. You haven’t been since you got here. The other problem? You’re starting to feel like you might be getting there though. During the time you were forced to socialize you just swallowed your fear and self-doubt and proceeded like it was any mission. And you were successful. Perhaps a little too successful. + +Once you actually got sent out on a mission, you were paired up with Brother Murk. A fellow you had become semi-friendly with during your months of socializing. Your original plan was as soon as you left Gloom, you were going to run to the nearest Empire fort and make your report. + +Though for this plan to succeed in any meaningful way you would’ve had to kill Murk and despite your better judgment, you couldn’t bring yourself to do it. You later cursed yourself for this temporary weakness and the next time you were sent out, you vowed to yourself that you’d do it again, the problem was you had only become friendlier with Murk within that time. You failed again. + +By the time they rotated your partnership and you were paired you with someone else, you still couldn’t do it, because now you actually started to feel like the Shadow Guard really was like a family to you. And you liked that feeling. In fact it was the best you’ve felt in a long time. + +Yet, now you are in a difficult position. You are still loyal to the Empire and the Emperor first, but you haven’t been able to find the fortitude to expose the Shadow Guard for what they are. You attempt to rationalize it in your mind, by claiming the longer you stay the more you learn about their exact plans, and while that’s certainly true, it really isn’t the TRUTH. + +The real truth is you’re starting to believe in the Shadow Guard’s cause slightly. You don’t know if it’s because you’ve spent so much time here that you’ve developed some sort of emotional attachment or some odd sort of subtle indoctrination. + +Is this what Dendrin really had in store for you? Did he know you could be turned even without his intervention? Before you had that experience everything was so certain, your feelings weren’t a constant source of ups and downs. Even under Mistress, you don’t remember ever feeling this. It was either success or death. It was very simple and you preferred it. + +Now you don’t know what the hell you’re doing. Are you a traitor? Are you still loyal? Are you both? Are you neither? + +You excuse yourself from the rest of your brothers and sister and say you have to get some rest, though in reality you have to take a long look at your priorities. Once again you spend a few more months going through your usual routines and quietly suffering in silence. + +That comes to a halt when Murk comes into the barracks one day… + +“Hey, where are brother Cyrus and sister Talia?” he immediately asks you. +“Uh, sister Talia I think is in the library and brother Cyrus is probably with brother Draven somewhere.” You reply. +“Oh, well I’ll go get Talia, someone else can look for Cyrus, but you need to report to Master Ebon right away.” +“What’s this all about?” +“I don’t know, just that he wants you, Talia and Cyrus to see him. Something about someone from the Empire wanting to meet with all three of you. Sounds important.” + +You get up and walk to Master Ebon’s office which remains closed, so you wait. A few moments later, Talia joins you. + +“Hello, brother. Isn’t master Ebon here?” +“If he is, he isn’t answering his door, so I’ve been waiting outside.” +“Do you know what this is about?” +“Dunno, just that someone from the Empire wants to see us.” + +Talia nods and remains silent. Soon Cyrus joins you and asks a similar question, to which you answer in a similar manner. He grunts at you and stands as far from you as possible, though he says something polite to Talia. Same old Cyrus. + +No sooner has Cyrus got there, when Ebon’s door opens. You hear a voice that tells you to come in. You didn’t even think he was inside, but you guess he was really waiting to see you all together. When you all enter, he tell Cyrus to close the door and gets right to the point. + +“You three have been summoned by Mr. Mol. Apparently he wants to ask you a few questions and is insisting on doing it somewhere in the capital I believe. In any case, he claims he wants to check on your progress as an Eternal, but I suspect he’s fishing for information about us.” +“You don’t think he suspects anything do you?” Talia asks. +“I do not believe he knows anything about our true goals, if he or anyone did, I have no doubt we would’ve been moved upon by now. No, I think this is just another Empire ploy to try to get more inside intel on our organization, which for the reasons I just mentioned they cannot know about.” +“I won’t say a word to this running dog of the Empire! My eyes have been open a long time and my loyalty is and will always be to Dendrin.” Cyrus says. + +Master Ebon nods. “Yes, I know it will be. I have no doubt, but I still would like you all to just be on your guard when answering questions none the less. It probably won’t come to this, but kill yourselves if you have to. It won’t be ideal, since it’ll arouse suspicion, but it’ll still give us time to go ahead with our plan anyway, even if it would be a few years early. Anyway, the three of you are to make your way to the town of Lenet and from there you’ll take an Empire carriage to the capital. Return immediately if you are able. May Dendrin and the shadows hide your true intentions.” + +With those last words, Ebon sends you away and the three of you set off on your journey. You begin to feel nervous as soon as you leave Gloom, you weren’t expecting this happening, but deep down you did know that something like it was going to happen eventually. You remain mostly quiet during the journey as you try to get in a certain frame of mind of what you’re going to do or say. Cyrus is mostly silent as well, though you’re guessing that’s because he’s so firmly entrenched in his belief in Dendrin, that he knows what he’s going to say and do. + +Talia is the only talkative one and that’s mainly questions about what you both think Mr. Mol will ask you. You know she’s dedicated herself to Dendrin, but you sense that perhaps she’s a little nervous too, though you don’t know if it’s due to her new loyalty to Dendrin or because she’s been harboring secret loyalty to the Empire like you have. You decide to imagine it’s the latter, mainly because you want to make yourself feel better. + +Eventually the carriage from Lenet reaches Qale, the Empire’s capital and several soldiers immediately step forward to say they are here to escort you to Mr. Mol. The three of you are taken from the opulence of one of the main streets and quickly through a system of back alleys until you eventually reach a non-descript building. You enter and there you see Mr. Mol. It’s the well dressed man you saw speaking to Brother Gray six years ago. He’s also wearing the same formal black suit he was back then. + +“Ah, the Shadow Eternals. I’ve so wanted to catch up with your progress, but my attention was on your less subtle peers for a while. I think we’ve sorted them out though, so now it’s time to sort you out as well. Just a formality really, we just want to see if you’re achieving your full potential in the Shadow Guard. After all you’re Eternals first, and we wouldn’t want your talents to not be used to their fullest potential in the service of the Emperor, right?” + +Cyrus and Talia say nothing, but you feel obligated to acknowledge that question if only to not look suspicious. + +“Correct. All that we are, we owe to the Emperor’s will.” you say. +“Glad to hear it! Now then we’re just going to be asking you some questions, these soldiers will take you to a place to wait. Off you go.” + +At this point the three of are marched out of the room and down a long hallway. The cold broken stone walls and desolation of this place almost makes Gloom look cheery by comparison. Eventually you reach a door on your left and Cyrus is told to wait inside the room. He enters without a word, but gives you and Talia a look like “Say nothing!” + +A few moments later you reach another door on the left, this time Talia is told to wait inside. She hesitates for a moment, but enters. She gives you a look as well, though this one is more of concern. + +Finally you reach the last door on the left and you are told to enter and wait. You do so without looking at anyone. The door shuts behind you and the ominous sound of a lock is heard. + +There isn’t much you can do, so you sit down at one of the chairs in the middle of the room and wait. + +And wait…and wait…and wait…and wait… + +You don’t know how much time has passed, but you get up and move about several times before sitting down again. You don’t quite panic as much as you think you would, but being alone with your thoughts is definitely not the best thing for you. Right now you’re already thinking they’ve managed to break Talia into talking and probably killed Cyrus. + +Maybe if you cooperate right now, there will be leniency? Why shouldn’t you cooperate? The Shadow Guard ARE traitors after all, and this is just the kick in the ass you needed to remind you of that. + +But then there’s the other part of you that feels loyal to the shadows and how you shouldn’t betray them. You go back and forth what you’re going to do several times, and then you hear the lock on the door. Mr. Mol enters… +> Shadowy Agenda (More history and goals) +In the years you’ve been here, you’ve learned much more about the Shadow Guard’s plans along with their history, which of course has a much positive spin than the usual things the Empire puts out about them or the common perception. + +Before the Empire, the worshippers of Dendrin made their home in the Derlerg province. However, only a special few became “shadows” and they became more like protectors and holy people of the territory. Whole villages were dedicated to the worship of Dendrin, but there was no crusade or oppression of those who did not. Dendrin was not a deity that encouraged conversion by the sword, which is more than can be said for the Empire when they eventually arrived. + +When the Empire (Still known as the Qualan Empire at the time) came to Derlerg, the people were unsure of what to do. Most wanted to fight off this potential aggressor, but instead they asked for the guidance of their Dendrin priests. The shadows then consulted each other, and finally Dendrin. + +The answer to all surprised his faithful. Dendrin told them to surrender without a fight. He told them to not only surrender, but to swear loyalty to this “so called Emperor” and offer to be part of his armies. He said he knew where their true loyalties lay and that all would be revealed in time. + +He told them to ask for only one stipulation of the Empire and that was that they are allowed to continue their worship and to never mention his name except among each other. (Hence why you’ve never heard the name of Dendrin, until you joined the Shadow Guard) + +Trusting in Dendrin, the shadows obeyed. When they asked for an audience with the emperor they did exactly what Dendrin told them to. The Emperor was amazed and even overjoyed at such an offer. When he saw the powers that the shadows offered, he accepted their loyalty without many other questions. He was still hesitant about their insistence on their religion, but this was during a time when the Empire was less restrictive about such things and after proving themselves several times in the following years, the Emperor dismissed their worship as silly superstition, but ultimately not a threat to his power. + +Years passed to decades and the Derlerg province eventually assimilated completely to the Empire. Most of the people who once worshipped Dendrin, didn’t anymore and the new generation born were completely ignorant of him. However his shadows still kept the faith like they were suppose to, but there were still so few, and that’s when Dendrin came to them again. He told them that they must start actively looking for worthy candidates to join or preferably, to breed with each other to produce more shadows. + +This was a new order by Dendrin to actively recruit as opposed to people seeking out Dendrin themselves, but once again, the shadows obeyed. The Empire certainly didn’t mind having more shadows to serve it either. It was around this time that the decree came that the Shadow Guard proper was formed to serve as a type of internal security since the Empire was growing larger and needed to weed out dissidents. Some most likely objected to this trust in the shadows, but the Emperor was convinced of their loyalty so they were elevated to the status they are today. + +Unfortunately for him, the Emperor would’ve done well to be more paranoid and to have listened to his advisors at the time. + +The Shadow Guard have been planning, and scheming and waiting since the very beginning to overthrow the Empire. Dendrin foresaw that if they resisted in the beginning they would’ve been crushed. True the Empire would’ve suffered losses, but his followers would’ve been wiped out completely, and without followers what use is a god? + +Now centuries have passed. The Shadow Guard is so entrenched in the Empire that if it were to rebel now, as it surely will, the Empire would surely be vastly damaged and most likely fall. Right now the shadow guard’s duty is to root out dissidents and that’s true up to a point. Some are immediately passed over to the Empire to keep up appearances, others are killed if they prove unhelpful, but for those that are too useful to turn over and are willing to help, then they join the “normal” resistance that the Shadow Guard has been building up over the years. When the revolution comes, it won’t just be the shadows rebelling. + +Strangely, there doesn’t seem to be any grand plans to “take over” though. The main goal seems to be overthrowing the Empire and gaining “freedom”. This seems very odd to you. You could understand better if there was a system in place for the shadows to take power afterwards, but why would they want to overthrow something, only to leave anarchy behind? + +It would seem the shadows are intending to do just that, and then a mass exodus back to the Delerg province to rebuild their old temple and continue to worship Dendrin. Nothing more, nothing less. + +While you should find everything about this agenda repugnant, you can’t help but respect and admire the patience and planning of such a cunning plan. You doubt if you could maintain such a facade for so long. Then again you’ve been blending in as one of them for two years now and your own loyalty isn’t necessarily to them. + +Perhaps you’ve come to respect the Shadow Guard so much because you’ve started to think like them…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 18 + +“And so I said to the blacksmith, well if you’re intending on killing the Emperor, you better damn well have a better plan than those group of thugs you’ve been supplying with weapons in the sewers. At least supply them to some thugs who the Emperor wouldn’t be able to smell six miles away!” you say, and this is followed by a few laughs from some of your fellow shadows. +“Hah, good one brother! Tell me, what did you do to the blacksmith?” Brother Murk asks. +“Oh we relocated him to our safehouse in Derlerg along with his buddies, reported that we eliminated him as a dissident…you know the usual. I must say, their surprise that we aren’t going to kill them is always amusing though.” You reply. +“Yes, given our reputation, I imagine it is. Still, it’s all for a good cause eh, brother?” +“Yes brother, it certainly is.” You say to Murk with a nod and take another drink of black tea. +“Well I have to say I’m very glad you’ve finally managed to settle in brother, I have to admit, for awhile I was getting a little worried about you. You just didn’t seem like yourself after our ceremony initiation.” Talia says. +“Yeah, well I guess I was just a late bloomer or something.” +“Don’t worry about it brother, it’s all in the past. What matters now is that we’re all on the same page now.” Murk replies. + +On the same page…the problem is you really aren’t on the same page. You haven’t been since you got here. The other problem? You’re starting to feel like you might be getting there though. During the time you were forced to socialize you just swallowed your fear and self-doubt and proceeded like it was any mission. And you were successful. Perhaps a little too successful. + +Once you actually got sent out on a mission, you were paired up with Brother Murk. A fellow you had become semi-friendly with during your months of socializing. Your original plan was as soon as you left Gloom, you were going to run to the nearest Empire fort and make your report. + +Though for this plan to succeed in any meaningful way you would’ve had to kill Murk and despite your better judgment, you couldn’t bring yourself to do it. You later cursed yourself for this temporary weakness and the next time you were sent out, you vowed to yourself that you’d do it again, the problem was you had only become friendlier with Murk within that time. You failed again. + +By the time they rotated your partnership and you were paired you with someone else, you still couldn’t do it, because now you actually started to feel like the Shadow Guard really was like a family to you. And you liked that feeling. In fact it was the best you’ve felt in a long time. + +Yet, now you are in a difficult position. You are still loyal to the Empire and the Emperor first, but you haven’t been able to find the fortitude to expose the Shadow Guard for what they are. You attempt to rationalize it in your mind, by claiming the longer you stay the more you learn about their exact plans, and while that’s certainly true, it really isn’t the TRUTH. + +The real truth is you’re starting to believe in the Shadow Guard’s cause slightly. You don’t know if it’s because you’ve spent so much time here that you’ve developed some sort of emotional attachment or some odd sort of subtle indoctrination. + +Is this what Dendrin really had in store for you? Did he know you could be turned even without his intervention? Before you had that experience everything was so certain, your feelings weren’t a constant source of ups and downs. Even under Mistress, you don’t remember ever feeling this. It was either success or death. It was very simple and you preferred it. + +Now you don’t know what the hell you’re doing. Are you a traitor? Are you still loyal? Are you both? Are you neither? + +You excuse yourself from the rest of your brothers and sister and say you have to get some rest, though in reality you have to take a long look at your priorities. Once again you spend a few more months going through your usual routines and quietly suffering in silence. + +That comes to a halt when Murk comes into the barracks one day… + +“Hey, where are brother Cyrus and sister Talia?” he immediately asks you. +“Uh, sister Talia I think is in the library and brother Cyrus is probably with brother Draven somewhere.” You reply. +“Oh, well I’ll go get Talia, someone else can look for Cyrus, but you need to report to Master Ebon right away.” +“What’s this all about?” +“I don’t know, just that he wants you, Talia and Cyrus to see him. Something about someone from the Empire wanting to meet with all three of you. Sounds important.” + +You get up and walk to Master Ebon’s office which remains closed, so you wait. A few moments later, Talia joins you. + +“Hello, brother. Isn’t master Ebon here?” +“If he is, he isn’t answering his door, so I’ve been waiting outside.” +“Do you know what this is about?” +“Dunno, just that someone from the Empire wants to see us.” + +Talia nods and remains silent. Soon Cyrus joins you and asks a similar question, to which you answer in a similar manner. He grunts at you and stands as far from you as possible, though he says something polite to Talia. Same old Cyrus. + +No sooner has Cyrus got there, when Ebon’s door opens. You hear a voice that tells you to come in. You didn’t even think he was inside, but you guess he was really waiting to see you all together. When you all enter, he tell Cyrus to close the door and gets right to the point. + +“You three have been summoned by Mr. Mol. Apparently he wants to ask you a few questions and is insisting on doing it somewhere in the capital I believe. In any case, he claims he wants to check on your progress as an Eternal, but I suspect he’s fishing for information about us.” +“You don’t think he suspects anything do you?” Talia asks. +“I do not believe he knows anything about our true goals, if he or anyone did, I have no doubt we would’ve been moved upon by now. No, I think this is just another Empire ploy to try to get more inside intel on our organization, which for the reasons I just mentioned they cannot know about.” +“I won’t say a word to this running dog of the Empire! My eyes have been open a long time and my loyalty is and will always be to Dendrin.” Cyrus says. + +Master Ebon nods. “Yes, I know it will be. I have no doubt, but I still would like you all to just be on your guard when answering questions none the less. It probably won’t come to this, but kill yourselves if you have to. It won’t be ideal, since it’ll arouse suspicion, but it’ll still give us time to go ahead with our plan anyway, even if it would be a few years early. Anyway, the three of you are to make your way to the town of Lenet and from there you’ll take an Empire carriage to the capital. Return immediately if you are able. May Dendrin and the shadows hide your true intentions.” + +With those last words, Ebon sends you away and the three of you set off on your journey. You begin to feel nervous as soon as you leave Gloom, you weren’t expecting this happening, but deep down you did know that something like it was going to happen eventually. You remain mostly quiet during the journey as you try to get in a certain frame of mind of what you’re going to do or say. Cyrus is mostly silent as well, though you’re guessing that’s because he’s so firmly entrenched in his belief in Dendrin, that he knows what he’s going to say and do. + +Talia is the only talkative one and that’s mainly questions about what you both think Mr. Mol will ask you. You know she’s dedicated herself to Dendrin, but you sense that perhaps she’s a little nervous too, though you don’t know if it’s due to her new loyalty to Dendrin or because she’s been harboring secret loyalty to the Empire like you have. You decide to imagine it’s the latter, mainly because you want to make yourself feel better. + +Eventually the carriage from Lenet reaches Qale, the Empire’s capital and several soldiers immediately step forward to say they are here to escort you to Mr. Mol. The three of you are taken from the opulence of one of the main streets and quickly through a system of back alleys until you eventually reach a non-descript building. You enter and there you see Mr. Mol. It’s the well dressed man you saw speaking to Brother Gray six years ago. He’s also wearing the same formal black suit he was back then. + +“Ah, the Shadow Eternals. I’ve so wanted to catch up with your progress, but my attention was on your less subtle peers for a while. I think we’ve sorted them out though, so now it’s time to sort you out as well. Just a formality really, we just want to see if you’re achieving your full potential in the Shadow Guard. After all you’re Eternals first, and we wouldn’t want your talents to not be used to their fullest potential in the service of the Emperor, right?” + +Cyrus and Talia say nothing, but you feel obligated to acknowledge that question if only to not look suspicious. + +“Correct. All that we are, we owe to the Emperor’s will.” you say. +“Glad to hear it! Now then we’re just going to be asking you some questions, these soldiers will take you to a place to wait. Off you go.” + +At this point the three of are marched out of the room and down a long hallway. The cold broken stone walls and desolation of this place almost makes Gloom look cheery by comparison. Eventually you reach a door on your left and Cyrus is told to wait inside the room. He enters without a word, but gives you and Talia a look like “Say nothing!” + +A few moments later you reach another door on the left, this time Talia is told to wait inside. She hesitates for a moment, but enters. She gives you a look as well, though this one is more of concern. + +Finally you reach the last door on the left and you are told to enter and wait. You do so without looking at anyone. The door shuts behind you and the ominous sound of a lock is heard. + +There isn’t much you can do, so you sit down at one of the chairs in the middle of the room and wait. + +And wait…and wait…and wait…and wait… + +You don’t know how much time has passed, but you get up and move about several times before sitting down again. You don’t quite panic as much as you think you would, but being alone with your thoughts is definitely not the best thing for you. Right now you’re already thinking they’ve managed to break Talia into talking and probably killed Cyrus. + +Maybe if you cooperate right now, there will be leniency? Why shouldn’t you cooperate? The Shadow Guard ARE traitors after all, and this is just the kick in the ass you needed to remind you of that. + +But then there’s the other part of you that feels loyal to the shadows and how you shouldn’t betray them. You go back and forth what you’re going to do several times, and then you hear the lock on the door. Mr. Mol enters… +> Dendrin’s Disciples (Your “siblings”) +In the few years you’ve been with the Shadow Guard, you still haven’t gotten used to the idea their strange hierarchy system. The part you understand is the initiate level, which are the prospects who have not yet gone through the ceremony. They are lowest and understand why as far as the shadow hierarchy goes. It’s after the ceremony where it gets confusing to you. + +Everyone that passes through the ceremony is either a brother or sister according to gender and nobody is technically above anyone, though there is obviously still a hierarchy system in place based on experience. For example Brother Gray and Brother Murk are supposed to be equals, but Brother Gray is really his superior (along with most others) since he’s been a shadow for much longer and has more knowledge than Murk. + +From what you know, this “equality” is part of the idea that Dendrin wanted the shadows to not fight amongst themselves and to concentrate on their true enemy the Empire. While this is a strange concept for you, it must have worked since the shadows do treat each other more like a family and you haven’t observed any real power conflicts with any of them. + +The one exception is Master Ebon. Apparently even in a family of “siblings”, there still needs to be a parental figure and Master Ebon would be that “father”. It is he who supposedly speaks to Dendrin directly about his greatest visions, ideas and prophecies on how to best proceed. + +Though this seems questionable to you, considering if Dendrin spoke to him directly about the most important matters, why wouldn’t he mention you and your doubting loyalties? + +In any event, you’ve come to know quite a few shadows since your time here and against your better judgment, even become friendly with them. You have to admit; they aren’t all like what the common perception of them is. Master Ebon, as mentioned is the overall leader, and other than that you don’t know too much about him personally except that he has been a meticulous planner much like his predecessors. + +Brother Gray would probably be the closest thing to a second in command. Brother Gray has always seemed to try to help you though perhaps not in any way you’d like. But his words of encouragement on survival during your training and his concern that you should feel welcome here like a family member display that he genuinely is trying to look out for you since he has on several occasions praised your combat skills. + +If there were a proper hierarchy, Brother Shade would probably be your commanding officer or sergeant since he’s been here longer than the rest of you and relays a lot of orders to the rest of you. He still goes on missions as well, unlike Brother Gray. He seems a little more militant than the rest of his fellows, and you don’t mean in his worship of Dendrin, but rather his desire to see the Empire fall. You get the impression he’s tired of waiting. + +Sister Talia, or just Talia as you still think of her. During your years with her in Mistress’ class she was much like you in that she kept to the background and mostly just followed instruction. She was a good fighter; you recall her shutting up one of your louder classmates (Edgar you think his name was) with one punch when they were paired up together to fight for the first time. Other than that, you didn’t really talk to her and that continued even during your shadow guard training. + +After the ceremony however, she interacted with you more, mostly taunting your shadow magic abilities initially, but in time she began to speak to you on a friendlier level, she even apologized and claimed that she should not have mocked you so, and should have tried to help you instead. Since that time, she’s been cordial with you. In different circumstances, you’d probably appreciate her friendliness in your situation; the problem is she’s part of which you consider the enemy. It’s even worse, since she’s an Eternal like you and her brainwashed mindset is much more distressing to you. + +Brother Cyrus or just Cyrus as you still think of him. Much like you and Talia, he kept to the background in Mistress’ class. Also like Talia he was a good fighter, though you remember having to go up against him once, and you beat him. It wasn’t an easy victory, but you sometimes wonder if he continued to hold a grudge because he still remains stand offish to you. He even still says something snide about your shadow magic aptitude once in awhile. Especially since Cyrus himself has proven to be quite apt at using shadow magic + +Cyrus seems to have embraced the worship of Dendrin wholeheartedly, even more than Talia, though again you wonder if his new relationship with Draven has something to do with enforcing that, rather than anything Dendrin did to brainwash him. Lately though he’s been away a lot and given more assignments. Apparently he’s moving “up” as far as shadow responsibilities go. + +Brother Draven is Cyrus’ special friend, or in other words his lover. You aren’t exactly sure when it started, since you were concerned with your own crisis of loyalties at the time, but you really don’t care anyway. + +Draven has never really spoken too much to you, but when he has he’s at least been friendlier than Cyrus. He’s mentioned he was born into the shadows, but that his own parents died when he was young though he doesn’t say how exactly. From what you’ve seen his combat abilities are nowhere near that of you or any of the other Eternals (Then again few shadows are) but his shadow magic is much better. He’s a little older than Cyrus, probably by a few years, but despite that, Cyrus is still obviously the dominant one of the relationship, but then given that Cyrus is still an Eternal at heart, which seems logical to you. + +Brother Murk is probably the closest thing you have to a “friend” in here. Though he probably wouldn’t be, if he knew your true thoughts. He’s about Draven’s age, but unlike Draven he was born in the Derlerg province and actively sought out to be part of the shadows, since his family was one of the few that still quietly worshipped Dendrin even after centuries of others forgot him. Apparently it was always a dream of someone in his family to become a shadow, so Murk pestered the shadows until they finally gave him a chance. He passed and it was the happiest day of his life. + +Murk was one of the few that tried to reach out to you even when he saw you struggling with shadow magic (among other things). During the times when you were paired up and had to fight actual dissidents who didn’t want to listen to you (Not all are willing to trust let alone join the shadow guard agenda, and some are little more than violent criminals) he’s always had your back. In between missions, he likes to tell you of his latest attempts to woo Sister Bianca. + +It is a shame that such a worthy comrade has dedicated his life to the wrong side and it will be regrettable when the day comes that you may have to kill him yourself.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Test or not, you’re not going to stand here and accept the judgment that Master Ebon has passed on you. You’re more than strong enough to pass through the ceremony, you know you are and to prove it, you immediately make a run for the portal. + +“Master Ebon, the Eternal is running towards the portal!” you hear Brother Gray shout just as you make a leap into the shimmering portal. If Ebon said anything you didn’t hear it, in fact as soon as you pass through the portal you don’t hear anything. You also don’t see anything or even feel anything. It’s like you’ve stepped into a place that has sucked out all your senses. You even attempt to speak out loud, but nothing comes out, of course you wouldn’t really know since you can’t hear anything. You don’t believe you’re standing on anything and feels like you’re “floating” in some sort of void. + +As for your mental state of mind, your feelings have become muted. You still have them, but they aren’t as strong as they once were. Even before when you suppressed your feelings yourself, you never managed it to this degree. Everything has become deadened. + +All of this is so strange and you briefly wonder if you’ve made a mistake, but then you hear a voice, but it’s inside your head. It isn’t some sort of subconscious either. It’s a very real external force speaking to you in your mind. The voice is a whisper, but loud at the same time, almost overpowering. + +“You were not given permission to be here. Why have you disobeyed your superior?” the voice asks. +“I…I wanted to prove I was worthy.” You answer. It is a strange sensation to speak with just your brain. +“I see…so do you think you are worthy?” +“Yes.” +“Your confidence is admirable. Yet, you do not even where you are, let alone WHO you are.” +“I am an Eternal.” +“Are you? Tell me, how can one be an Eternal, when one has not even experienced life outside what your superiors have told you? How can one be eternal when one is a mere baby in terms of existence? How can one be eternal when you are before a being that has existed longer than you mortals first came up with the idea of your primitive methods of measuring time? No, you are not eternal. You are confused.” + +The voice is absolutely oppressive. Any feelings that were dead before are replaced with an extreme feeling of hopelessness and as the voice stated confusion. Within that moment you start to question everything you were taught. Not the skills, but the ideology. Still, you try to maintain your mind, by asking questions. + +“Are…are you the god of the Shadow Guards?” +“That designation I suppose is accurate in a sense, but one should not get stuck with just one description, lest it confine you. I am many things as are you, even if you do not realize it yet, despite what your superior believes. Not to say he is wrong, just that he does not have the…insight I possess. Now your fellows that entered before you did are limited in their thought processes. Some have already failed due to their lack of complex thought. Tell me, are you loyal to your Emperor and your Empire?” +“…of course!” you say, though due to your experience in this place, you feel a lot less certain of that, for the first time. This whole event is troubling to you. You almost feel suicidal for not answering with absolute certainty. +“One cannot serve two masters, or at least not for long. The ones your Empire has designated the Shadow Guard are my loyal servants. They are loyal to ME, first. You cannot be a true member of this order if you place your Emperor above me. My followers have survived by hiding in plain sight and making themselves indispensable to the Empire. They have done this for centuries, but there will be a reckoning some day soon and the question is, who’s side are you going to be on?” + +You cannot answer. The concept of not placing the Emperor about all is so abhorrent to you that you can’t even comprehend it. Yet here you are being asked this question by a god no less. He’s even suggested a reckoning of some sort that indicates the Shadow Guard will betray the Empire in the future! How can you argue with such a being though? If you disagree it is likely to destroy you, but in this place you almost can’t help but to swear subservience to this god. You feel so helpless that it’s almost like the choice Mistress gave you except even worse. +> Defy the god with all your strength +You aren’t going to compromise your beliefs. Not even to a god. + +“I will never serve you! My loyalty will always be to the Emperor!” you communicate with your mind. You feel absolutely drained even having this thought. + +For a long time there is a silence and you’re just floating in the void, with only a sense of impending doom ever growing within your head. + +“So be it. I respect your dedication Eternal. May you serve your Emperor in whatever afterlife finds you, because you won’t be doing it in this life.” The voice whispers and then you feel the numbness that has invaded your body, now invading your mind. + +It isn’t painful. It isn’t anything really. Your brain shuts down along with the rest of your body, which is then enveloped by the void. You completely cease to be and are explained to have died during the Shadow Guard ceremony to Mr. Mol when he asks for an update on your progress.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The pain is great and you want it to be over with as quickly as possible, but you know to beg for mercy would be shameful, so you gasp say you’d rather die than beg. This response surprises her to a point that she actually takes her boot off your chest giving you relief. + +“Truly, little one? You accept death so quickly? Have you no instinct for survival, or are you merely a fool? Still, your refusal to beg at least shows promise. It also shows that you know your place and that your life is ultimately not your own. It is nothing. ALL of your lives are nothing! Your lives will never be anything more than warm bodies to serve the Emperor! Remember this.” + +At this point much like your other classmate hit by her magic bolt, you slowly get up and back in your seat, clutching your chest. It hurts, but you compose yourself the best you can. + +Time passes by under the harsh guidance of Mistress. She teaches you all that she promised she would and then some. Your lessons are not only that of a combat nature, but of an academic one as well. You wouldn’t be aware of it, but you and your classmates are probably much better educated than other children your age. + +As for you, Mistress doesn’t treat you any worse or better than any of the other children, but your first experience with her did have an effect on your behavior. You take her lesson that your life ultimately not being important to heart and you become more and more withdrawn. So withdrawn in fact that you almost become invisible to your fellow classmates and even Mistress sometimes forgets that you’re there at all. If it was not for group projects and sparring lessons you probably would be forgotten. + +You obey commands and do your training and that is all. Why bother worrying about anything else when your life is not your own? You must follow orders even if it means your death, it’s the only way you’ll be able to please the Emperor. + +Despite your low key nature, your personality doesn’t completely go unnoticed by your instructor and watchers, they make note of it and decide how you should be handled in the next step of your training. + +Year 12 + +You are in a room with a few of your fellow classmates standing in a row. Most of your class has been separated for reasons unknown to you. All you know right now is there is a man in a dark robe speaking with a well dressed man. They are speaking about you, but not actually speaking TO you… + +“Far be it from me to question orders, but I thought the whole point of this program was to create a separate elite fighting unit. Why are they now being split up and more importantly why are some being placed with us?” +“Things have changed since the program’s inception. Besides I would’ve thought the Shadow Guard would’ve appreciated such an honor of receiving such worthy candidates.” the man dressed in black formal wear calmly retorts. +“That remains to be seen. I’m sure you’re fully aware of our strict guidelines on who is accepted. There are tests and rituals to go through.” +“So, put ‘em through whatever it is you do. Look, I’d say you could benefit by having a few Eternals in your ranks, if nothing else than to keep you from getting lax.” +“Lax? Our group has been the eyes and ears of the Empire for centuries, and our vigilance is beyond reproach. We haven’t even seen one of these so-called Eternals can do. It’s all been just speculation, and if I may be so bold, a misguided appropriation of time and funds. The Empire should be providing the regular military better equipment and more of it, so that we don’t have to be sent in to help them on the frontlines when we could be doing better things with our time such as keeping the Empire safe from subversives and other internal parasites.” +“Your concerns are irrelevant. This is the Emperor’s project and he has his reasons. If I were you I’d watch your tone. For someone who doesn’t question orders, one wonders if you have to be reminded that you are a servant of the Emperor and you will obey or you will be replaced.” + +The robed individual steps towards the well dressed man before speaking. + +“Fortunately for you, I do serve the Emperor, for that is the only thing keeping me from ripping out your throat. Never question my loyalty again…very well I shall take these so called Eternals, but if they fail to live up to Shadow Guard standard, then they shall die like anyone else.” +“As you wish brother, I leave it in your capable hands. You will keep me apprised of their progress on a weekly basis. Good day.” The well dressed man says and leaves the room, leaving you all alone with the robed man. You’ve never seen a Shadow Guard before, but while he doesn’t look quite as menacing from what you’ve heard about them you know that he is a force to be reckoned with by reputation alone. + +He walks up and down the row sizing you all up before speaking. + +“I am Brother Gray, and I will be in charge of the rest of your training until the Emperor deems otherwise. I imagine that your former instructor was that svelk woman, so I trust you all know by now that failure and weakness have no place here. Correct?” +“Yes Brother!” you all shout in unison. +“Hmm, well glad to see her skills in teaching discipline are still as effective as ever. Good. Now let’s see how good your combat skills are…” + +At this point you and your fellow classmates instinctively start to pair up to spar with each other, but Gray stops you and immediately knows what’s going on. + +“Oh no, you won’t be fighting each other. The svelk’s cultivation of mistrust and loathing in all of you has its place, but not for our purposes. As a Shadow Guard you will learn that the reliance on such emotions to be a hindrance, as all emotions are. I can see I will have to undo some of the foolishness she has instilled in you all.” + +Time goes by and Brother Gray begins to train you in various forms of combat. It’s actually similar to some of the stuff Mistress was starting to teach you as he goes on about unconventional warfare such as poisoning water supplies and assassinations. However he also teaches you and your classmates to work better as a team. One test involves fighting a strange beast called a Thought Lurker. It is one of the most grueling battles you’ve ever had and it doesn’t require weapons at all. It takes place all in your mind and it utterly destroys a few of your classmates. It is only when you and your classmates concentrate together as one you are ultimately successful in defeating it. + +Academically speaking, you are still given a well-rounded education. A strong mind and knowledge wins more battles than any blade did as Brother Gray says. + +Brother Gray is just as uncompromising as Mistress in his training, but he is not gleeful about it at all. His verbal abuse is a cold disappointment rather than gloating about your failures. He still reminds you all regularly about how it is your sworn duty to serve the Emperor, but you hardly need him to tell you that, to believe otherwise is unthinkable. + +As for you, you find yourself fitting in better here. It might be due to the conditioning that emotions are a hindrance and the emphasis on duty since you already had a slightly stoic personality coming in. There is a calming peace of knowing exactly what you need to be placing importance on. Despite your nature of blending into the background, you have not gone unnoticed by Brother Gray who approaches you to give you direct advice one day. + +“You are a little different from your fellows. I have noticed that you adapted much better to training than they did. You may even survive the ritual when the time comes, however I will give you a little advice. I can see that you do not believe your life is truly important. You believe that you feel it is merely your duty to serve and if you die in the process, then you will die. I imagine this might be the result of something that the Svelk woman did to you…in any event, this approach will not do. There is no weakness in maintaining a survival instinct while serving. Yes, you will be called upon to perform dangerous duties or even suicidal ones in the service of the Emperor, but you should always try to survive even if the odds are against you. The Shadow Guard has been doing it for centuries. Remember, the longer you survive, the longer you can continue serving the and there is no greater honor. Think on this on your next training assignment.” + +Brother Gray’s words carry much weight with you and in the years during your training you begin to discard your overly fatalistic approach to life well as becoming an accomplished warrior. + +Your instructor and watchers once again note your growth and skills, and as usual they make decisions on how you will best serve the Emperor. +> The Shadow Guard (History Lesson) +The Shadow Guard are an elite branch of the Empire’s security force. Technically they aren’t military, but they do help out the rank and file soldiers when assigned to. Their main task is internal security of the Empire’s core regions however. Much like anything concerning the history with the Empire, the shadow’s history is also a little murky, but for as long as anyone can remember, the Shadow Guard have been serving since the early days of the Empire. + +While the shadows are feared and respected by most across the normal population, the higher ranking military officials tend to be suspicious of them for various reasons. One of the major reasons being their religious nature as they are practically a religious order of “warrior monks”. + +While the shadows do serve the Empire and dedicate their loyalty to the Emperor, they also worship a deity of some sort and have always done so, indeed it is supposedly how they all maintain their more magical abilities. Something like this might normally be considered a threat and the religion stamped out, but given their order’s utter dedication to the Emperor for centuries they have been given some allowances that most would not receive. Not to mention that they are absolutely vital at keeping the population in check nowadays. + +The Shadow Guard’s procedures for choosing new recruits are almost as strict as the Eternal process. Besides the usual demanding combat training, they also have to go through some sort of ritual, which the shadows keep very private. It has something to do with their religion though, and not everyone survives the process. If the initiate survives then he or she becomes a fully-fledged shadow and all the abilities and powers that come with it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 5 + +You are sitting in a gray room at a desk with several other children your age. All of you glance at each other a lot and it is obvious that there is much curiosity, but nobody speaks. This is very unusual for you, up until now, you have only had minimal contact with others. Most of them are male like you, but a few of them are female. + +Soon the silence comes to an end when a dark skinned woman walks into the room. She has long hair and sharp features. One thing you notice is that despite her long hair covering her ears you can still see that the tips of them are pointed. She must be elven, but in the pictures you’ve seen in books, you’ve never seen one with dark skin before. + +“Hello children, and congratulations on maintaining dignified silence during your time by yourselves. It’s nice to see that your previous human minders aren’t totally incompetent. Still, if you were Svelk children you would’ve been much better trained by now. Ah, but it is not my place to dwell on the limitations of the lesser born. I am merely here to oversee your training into proper Eternals so that you may serve the Emperor to your fullest capabilities. Now before we begin, I suggest you all ask questions now, because this will probably be the only time I will be in the mood for your ignorance.” + +For a moment nobody speaks, but when the elven lady insists, one brave soul raises their hand. + +“Yes, you.” +“Are you an elf?” +“Yes, I am. While the ignorant would use the vulgar term dark elf to describe me, my kind are more properly known as the Svelk. In fact WE are the purest of the elven race. All others you may have the misfortune of meeting are merely diluted members of our bloodline. They are truly pitiful creatures really only fit for extermination. Remember this.” + +“Yes, you.” +“What is your name?” +“My name is unimportant, but you and the rest will always address me as Mistress. Failure to do so will earn my wrath, and more importantly the wrath of the Emperor. Remember this.” + +“Yes, you.” +“What will you teach us?” + +A second passes after the question, when a small bolt of light from the Svelk’s finger tips and hits the child in the chest asking the question. He falls backwards out of his chair and on to the floor. The rest of you jump in your own chairs and look back at him. He is breathing very erratically. + +“I will teach you to OBEY my commands when I give them!” Mistress shouts, she then warns the rest of you. + +“Don’t you dare touch him, let alone help him! (Sigh) And here I thought you lot had been trained better! It occurs to me that I will have to be extra strict in my discipline. As to the question about what I will teach you… I will teach you to be warriors. I will teach you to be wizards if you display the talent. I will teach you to shed yourselves of weakness. I will teach you to serve the Emperor without question and kill without mercy and you will always obey for you will find strength in obedience. You will find joy in order. You will find love in murder. You shall be instruments of terror and genocide if he so wishes it. You will be Eternals…or you will die. Remember this.” + +After Mistress’ speech, the child she struck down eventually struggles back up and gets back in his seat, clutching his chest and still wheezing. + +“I trust you have learned your lesson?” +“Y…yes…Mistress…” he gasps. +“Good, now one more question before we begin…you there. What is your question? Speak up!” Mistress demands while pointing at you, though you have not raised your hand. + +You don’t wish to disagree with Mistress, so you stumble and try to think up a question. + +“Uh…er…I was just wondering when will you teach us to fight Mistress?” +Mistress raises an eyebrow and gives a smirk as she approaches you. +“Fight? And what makes you think that YOU are even ready to learn yet? Do you have even the slightest knowledge of combat tactics?” +“No, Mis…” before you can even complete the sentence Mistress knocks you out of your chair with a quick jab with her hand, the pain from your face spreads to your chest when Mistress steps on it with her boot. She digs it into you and presses all her weight on it, while the rest of your class looks on. + +“Damn right, no you don’t. You weren’t even alert enough to anticipate my attack. You let me get in close and now look at you, you’re completely at my mercy. I am in a position to do whatever I like with you, while you are only in a position to beg or die. So what will it be worm? Are you going to beg for your miserable life, or should I save the Empire’s time and money by killing you now?” +> Struggle +The pain is great and you want it to be over with as quickly as possible, but you know to beg for mercy would be shameful and you don’t want to die so you desperately try to push her boot off of you. Naturally you are unsuccessful and this response only enrages her further. + +“Insolent fool! I said beg or die! Those were your choices and you dare defy my orders?” Mistress exclaims and takes her boot off of your chest, only to begin kicking and stomping on you. You try to escape, but she bends down and roughly picks up by the collar. “Don’t you dare try to run while I discipline you! YOU… WILL… O… BEY!” Mistress says while slapping your face at intervals of her verbal abuse. Finally she throws you to back to the floor. + +“Now get back in your seat and never defy me again! Your life is nothing! ALL of your lives are nothing! Your lives will never be anything more than warm bodies to serve the Emperor! And you will not even be able to live up to that honored status, if you do not learn obedience. Remember this.” + +At this point you stagger back in your seat, aching all over. It hurts a lot, but despite the beating, you don’t feel fear, instead you feel anger. Anger at Mistress certainly, but more at yourself for being so powerless. + +Time passes by under the harsh guidance of Mistress. She teaches you all that she promised she would and then some. Your lessons are not only that of a combat nature, but of an academic one as well. You wouldn’t be aware of it, but you and your classmates are probably much better educated than other children your age. + +As for you, Mistress rides you the hardest for defying her. There are more than several times where she basically pits the rest of the class against you during the combat training sessions. You suffer horrible beatings most of the time, but eventually you adapt and manage to hold your own until Mistress finds yet another way to make the fight unfair. You are obedient and follow the orders of Mistress, but internally you are harboring thoughts of resentment, hatred and defiance towards her. And so what if you are? She isn’t the Emperor. That’s the only person you really have to revere. + +Your personality doesn’t go unnoticed by your instructor and watchers, they make note of it and decide how you should be handled in the next step of your training. + +Year 12 + +You are in a room by yourself sitting in a chair. Everyone else in your class has been separated for reasons unknown to you. All you know right now is Mistress is speaking with a well dressed man. They are speaking about you, but not actually speaking TO you… + +“So just this one? Are you sure?” the well dressed man asks. +“Should be thankful you have even that. The last pathetic batch of humans you had me train didn’t even survive, let alone get this far. However this one is the closest for your purposes. Though by Svelk standards he would be put in the slave pits and the rest of your so called Eternals would be killed for their poor performance.” Mistress mocks. +“Hmm, yes and that’s why your own society is doing so well now. No, we will still find uses for the others. Perhaps as military officers, or even members of the Shadow Guard and they will still be of great service to the Emperor. Still, I wish we had more than just one, oh well he will have to do. We will improve the results of the Eternal Program with the next group.” + +At this point Mistress begins laughing. + +“Is something amusing?” +“Yes, yes it is. Extremely. You humans and your grand schemes to hold on to power, do you really believe that this Eternal program of yours is going to make a difference? Potential external threats are the least of your concerns. Your Empire is rotting from within and your territory is succumbing to chaos every day.” +“And I suppose you would be an expert on such things, seeing as your own people experienced this millennia ago and still haven’t even managed to rebuild a cohesive unified government again, while your so called lesser cousins have thrived.” +“My people were conquering this world and more, while yours were still bumbling around trying to figure out how to make fire like the pack of monkeys you evolved from! And our rulers were the gods themselves, not petty dictators who think they are!” +“Yes and again I ask, what are your people doing now? They’re a race of scattered mercenaries selling their services to the highest bidders with no sense of loyalty to anyone, but to themselves. Speaking of which, you are merely a guest within the Empire. While your services are valuable to us, if you speak ill of the Emperor again you can always be replaced by another money whore of your kind.” + +Mistress’ eyes narrow and she quickly grabs the man holding a dagger to his throat before speaking. + +“Fortunately for you, this job is paying very well. For that is the only thing keeping me from slitting your throat. Never speak to me that way again human…now leave so that I may train this so called Eternal.” She says and releases him. + +The well dress man looks a bit shaken up, but he composes himself. +“You will keep me apprised of his progress on a weekly basis, and this incident will not be forgotten!” He says and walks quickly out of the room. + +At this point Mistress turns to you, and you fully expect to receive a beating, but instead she questions you. + +“So, what did you think of that little exchange?” +“It is not my place to give an opinion on the debates of my superiors. I am merely here to be trained by you so that I may better serve the Emperor.” You say. +“Yes, yes, yes, very nice safe and boring answer, but what do you REALLY think…I order you to tell me.” + +You pause to gather your thoughts and then speak. + +“I think it is odd that you are not an Empire citizen and hold no loyalty to him, yet you are training me Mistress.” +“Ha ha ha, yes well it is an odd situation, but not an uncommon one. You will find that many make compromises in life.” +“But Mistress, how can you tell me to believe in something, that you yourself do not believe in?” +“It’s easy. I’m just saying what they would have me say. What do I care, I’m profiting greatly from this and at the end of the day I’m the one coming out ahead. But I think you need a better example than me, a more personal one…namely yourself.” + +You look confused, before Mistress continues. + +“You hate me. I know you do, do not deny it. You don’t want to put up with me, yet you obey my commands without question. Why?” +“Because you are my superior Mistress, and you have been ordered…paid to train me, by the Emperor.” +“Ah, so if I was training you, and the Emperor was not involved, you would still obey my commands?” +“Perhaps I would Mistress, since I would most likely be killed by you if I didn’t obey, as you are far more skilled than I am. I would obey until there was a way to somehow kill you or even escape. +“Interesting…so you would compromise you beliefs.” + +You didn’t think about it like that, but you quickly think up a retort. + +“No Mistress, I do not believe it would be a compromise, I would be ensuring my survival so that I may serve the Emperor longer.” +“Ha ha, if you say so. But tell me, does the revelation that not everyone praises your Emperor discourage or shake your own loyalty to him?” +“No Mistress.” +“Why not? You surely know that all of this is propaganda. You’ve never even met your Emperor. He could be an idiotic cripple for all you know.” +“It doesn’t matter Mistress, I wouldn’t even be here if not for him. I am being trained to be an Eternal, something he himself ordered. Because of that, I already know I have been given the highest honor and a better chance than most. I owe this training, this loyalty, and this life to him regardless of what others might think.” + +Mistress just nods at your answer, there is no sneer or smirk in her face this time. She has perhaps a look of semi-respect for you. + +“Very well, let us begin your training Eternal…” +> Years pass... +Year 16 + +You stand alone before Mistress face to face in the room you’ve been trained in by her for the past four years. You’re training has been grueling to say the least, you’ve been forced to fight various beasts and people using traditional weapons as well as battle magic. You’ve been subjected to harsh environment conditions not to mention the psychological torture that Mistress seems to enjoy. You can’t imagine that your classmates had training this tough. + +“Today is the big day Eternal. Today is the day you get to kill me with your own bare hands.” Mistress says with her usual wry smile. “Think you can handle that?” +“If that’s what my training entails today, I shall certainly do my best, Mistress.” +“Your best won’t be good enough I assure you. Better you should just accept your death now or beg for mercy…but I believe we know you won’t do either of those things mainly because you’re too stupid to know your place.” +“If you say so Mistress.” + +Mistress’ smile becomes a disappointed frown. She would prefer you to fear her, but that’s no longer going to happen so she’d at least like you to get angry which does happen from time to time. It isn’t always easy maintaining a detached demeanor given how much abuse you’ve put up with, but if you’ve learned anything, it annoys the hell out of her. + +“Your attempt at remaining emotionless just continues to prove what a mindless fool you are. Attempting to show bravery when today is the day you know you’re…” + +And before she can even complete her sentence you throw a punch at her face. She dodges, but doesn’t quite make it and part of your fist hits the side of her cheek, which staggers her backwards. + +You press your attack with another punch, but are blocked when she throws up her hand creating a force shield. + +“Too bad, that was the only chance you’re going to get.” She says and knocks you to the ground with sweeping kick to your feet. + +You barely have to time to roll out of the way before Mistress conjures some sort of magical sword in her hand and tries to impale you with it. You get enough distance to cast firebolts at her, but again she blocks them with her barrier. She counters with some sort of ice cone, which covers you in frost and chills you to the bone before you can counter it with your own barrier. + +Mistress is relentless with casting spell after spell and you’re getting weaker with each passing moment just trying to keep up your defenses. Mistress’ magic is not only stronger than yours, but she’s also had a lot more experience in maintaining her stamina while using it. If you keep this up, she’ll kill you for sure. + +“I’ve seen better magic cast by half blind hedge wizards!” Mistress mocks and casts a poison cloud that suddenly envelops you within your own protective barrier. You instantly feel sick and stagger out of the cloud, dropping your barrier in the process. + +Taking advantage of your distraction she throws her magic sword which probably would’ve decapitated you had you not had your head down and vomiting up a bit of blood at the time. As it stands you merely feel the blade graze the top of your head. + +You look up just in time for her to conjure a new weapon, which materializes in her hand. You waste no time in conjuring one of your own to deflect the second attack she attempts to bring down on your head. + +“Quit struggling monkey. You’re no match for me in martial combat either!” + +She might be right, but just like when you were five, you’re not going to just accept death. With all your might you push her back with your weapon and then drop it only to grab her by the wrist with both hands and break it. Mistress makes a yelp and drops her weapon. + +She kicks you in the crotch and punches you in the side of the head with her one good hand. You feel pain, but try to ignore it as you trade another couple of punches and kicks with her before pulling her to the floor while crushing all your weight on her left arm which you were still holding by her broken wrist. The pair of you rolls on the floor for a moment and at this point you’re severely bleeding from scratches on your face and head. She must’ve had a hidden blade on her as well because you definitely feel one go into your back and being twisted around. She attempts to bite your throat out, but you headbutt her in the nose and rotate her around with her left arm. You break it to the point where the bone has snapped out from the skin. She stifles her urge to cry out and instead tries to break free, but you’re doing the best you can to prevent her from going anywhere by pressing all your weight on her and using your free hand to reach around to choke her. + +The pair of you are a mess, but that’s not the weird part, the weird part is you’re starting to get…excited. + +“(Gasp) I can feel your enthusiasm…pressing into me. Well…(gasp) is it everything you expected Eternal?” Mistress asks, which catches you so off guard you release your grip from her neck. + +Heavily panting and trying to push herself up off the floor with her good arm. Mistress turns her head enough so she can see your face. Her eyes still display that coldness you’re used to, but there’s something else there. Something…seductive. + +“I bet right now, you don’t know whether to kill me… or fuck me.” +“Wha…what?” you exclaim. +“Don’t deny it…you’ve always wanted me in this way. I know how you’ve looked at my body lustfully during our training sessions. I know your violent primal urges. All the hatred you’ve built up over the years for me could only be unleashed in this way. The need to conquer and defile your enemy in every way imaginable. And who am I, but your enemy? Finish it Eternal or am I mistaken and you’re lacking in that simple task as well?” She says and begins to laugh. + +Her taunts, her laughter, everything about her are enough to put you over the edge. The twisted thing is she’s right. You do feel some sort of…the word isn’t attraction…you don’t know what the correct word for it would be, but you feel it. + +You release her arm and painfully pull the bloody dagger out of your back to slice the back of her form fitting clothing and rip most of it off of her. While she continues to taunt you, you toss the dagger aside, proceed to pull down your own breeches and thrust into her roughly from behind. + +From there it gets surreal as she goes from continuing to taunt you and what are presumably sounds of ecstasy. She even demands that you to continue choking her. All of this puts you in such a state of confusion that you have a hard time even finishing. This whole experience is quite unknown to you as you’ve only read about such activities, but certainly never engaged in them. Surely, it isn’t always like this? + +When you’ve finished you briefly collapse backwards which is all the time Mistress needs to gain her advantage. She grabs the bloody dagger you pulled out your back and stabs you in the leg with it. You think she was aiming higher, but you managed to drag yourself out of the way in time to avoid such a grievous injury. Unfortunately she still manages to cast some sort of force spell and slam you against the wall with it. You can’t move no matter how hard you try. Mistress, naked and bloodied from your battle approaches you with one useless broken arm and her other hand up keeping the spell with the cruel smile on her face you’re used to seeing. + +“Look at you, you’re already spent.” she remarks getting closer to you as you feel her spell continuing to crush you into the wall. + +“All right. That will do. I don’t know what the point of all this was, but I’m putting an end to it right now.” Mr. Mol suddenly says. You didn’t even see him enter the room, though you were sort of pre-occupied. +“Mmm, interesting that you waited until after the floor show before putting an end to it Jacob. Did our actions excite you as well? Maybe you could’ve joined in or perhaps you just like to watch. Yes, I imagine watching is something a eunuch like yourself is only capable of.” + +Mistress releases her spell as Mr. Mol comes closer to the pair of you. You slump to the floor exhausted. + +“The Emperor says he’s ready now and there is no more need to test him.” Mr. Mol says. +“Maybe not for your precious Emperor, but I needed to test him for myself.” Mistress replies. +“For what purpose?” +“Just to see if he was up to the challenge, but he was severely lacking in every way just as I suspected. Take your creation Jacob, I am done with him.” + +Still in discussion with Mr. Mol, Mistress isn’t paying attention to you at all. You are beneath her notice now and you aren’t sure if that makes you madder than the fact that she just defeated you in battle when you thought for sure you had her beat. You stare at the dagger in your leg and think how easy it would be to use it on that bitch while she isn’t paying attention. +> Stab Mistress with the dagger +Mistress has been playing sadistic sick games with you for years and now she’s just “done” with you? There is no way you’re going to let her continue to walk this world. + +You pull the dagger out of your leg and as quietly as you can you stand up. Unfortunately Mr. Mol spoils your surprise attack by noticing you and speaking. + +“You. Report to the medical…hey what are you doing?” he says realizing that you’re now rushing as fast as you can with dagger in hand. + +Mistress turns around just in time to stop you plunging the dagger into her. She casts some sort of lightning bolt into your chest with her hand good hand, which throws you back into the wall. Your whole body goes into a convulsion from the shock. + +“Insolent worm! You dare to continue with your foolish attempt to kill your betters? Since you obviously failed to learn this lesson, I’m going to have to teach it to you again!” Mistress shouts before unleashing another lighting blast and this time she hits you with a continual charge. + +Your body begins to sizzle from the inside out and the last thing you hear is Mr. Mol screaming at her to stop as the Emperor wants you alive. + +“The Emperor’s just going to have to make a new Eternal then, because this one’s done.” She replies and kicks your blackened burned body.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 16 + +You stand alone before Mistress face to face in the room you’ve been trained in by her for the past four years. You’re training has been grueling to say the least, you’ve been forced to fight various beasts and people using traditional weapons as well as battle magic. You’ve been subjected to harsh environment conditions not to mention the psychological torture that Mistress seems to enjoy. You can’t imagine that your classmates had training this tough. + +“Today is the big day Eternal. Today is the day you get to kill me with your own bare hands.” Mistress says with her usual wry smile. “Think you can handle that?” +“If that’s what my training entails today, I shall certainly do my best, Mistress.” +“Your best won’t be good enough I assure you. Better you should just accept your death now or beg for mercy…but I believe we know you won’t do either of those things mainly because you’re too stupid to know your place.” +“If you say so Mistress.” + +Mistress’ smile becomes a disappointed frown. She would prefer you to fear her, but that’s no longer going to happen so she’d at least like you to get angry which does happen from time to time. It isn’t always easy maintaining a detached demeanor given how much abuse you’ve put up with, but if you’ve learned anything, it annoys the hell out of her. + +“Your attempt at remaining emotionless just continues to prove what a mindless fool you are. Attempting to show bravery when today is the day you know you’re…” + +And before she can even complete her sentence you throw a punch at her face. She dodges, but doesn’t quite make it and part of your fist hits the side of her cheek, which staggers her backwards. + +You press your attack with another punch, but are blocked when she throws up her hand creating a force shield. + +“Too bad, that was the only chance you’re going to get.” She says and knocks you to the ground with sweeping kick to your feet. + +You barely have to time to roll out of the way before Mistress conjures some sort of magical sword in her hand and tries to impale you with it. You get enough distance to cast firebolts at her, but again she blocks them with her barrier. She counters with some sort of ice cone, which covers you in frost and chills you to the bone before you can counter it with your own barrier. + +Mistress is relentless with casting spell after spell and you’re getting weaker with each passing moment just trying to keep up your defenses. Mistress’ magic is not only stronger than yours, but she’s also had a lot more experience in maintaining her stamina while using it. If you keep this up, she’ll kill you for sure. + +“I’ve seen better magic cast by half blind hedge wizards!” Mistress mocks and casts a poison cloud that suddenly envelops you within your own protective barrier. You instantly feel sick and stagger out of the cloud, dropping your barrier in the process. + +Taking advantage of your distraction she throws her magic sword which probably would’ve decapitated you had you not had your head down and vomiting up a bit of blood at the time. As it stands you merely feel the blade graze the top of your head. + +You look up just in time for her to conjure a new weapon, which materializes in her hand. You waste no time in conjuring one of your own to deflect the second attack she attempts to bring down on your head. + +“Quit struggling monkey. You’re no match for me in martial combat either!” + +She might be right, but just like when you were five, you’re not going to just accept death. With all your might you push her back with your weapon and then drop it only to grab her by the wrist with both hands and break it. Mistress makes a yelp and drops her weapon. + +She kicks you in the crotch and punches you in the side of the head with her one good hand. You feel pain, but try to ignore it as you trade another couple of punches and kicks with her before pulling her to the floor while crushing all your weight on her left arm which you were still holding by her broken wrist. The pair of you rolls on the floor for a moment and at this point you’re severely bleeding from scratches on your face and head. She must’ve had a hidden blade on her as well because you definitely feel one go into your back and being twisted around. She attempts to bite your throat out, but you headbutt her in the nose and rotate her around with her left arm. You break it to the point where the bone has snapped out from the skin. She stifles her urge to cry out and instead tries to break free, but you’re doing the best you can to prevent her from going anywhere by pressing all your weight on her and using your free hand to reach around to choke her. + +The pair of you are a mess, but that’s not the weird part, the weird part is you’re starting to get…excited. + +“(Gasp) I can feel your enthusiasm…pressing into me. Well…(gasp) is it everything you expected Eternal?” Mistress asks, which catches you so off guard you release your grip from her neck. + +Heavily panting and trying to push herself up off the floor with her good arm. Mistress turns her head enough so she can see your face. Her eyes still display that coldness you’re used to, but there’s something else there. Something…seductive. + +“I bet right now, you don’t know whether to kill me… or fuck me.” +“Wha…what?” you exclaim. +“Don’t deny it…you’ve always wanted me in this way. I know how you’ve looked at my body lustfully during our training sessions. I know your violent primal urges. All the hatred you’ve built up over the years for me could only be unleashed in this way. The need to conquer and defile your enemy in every way imaginable. And who am I, but your enemy? Finish it Eternal or am I mistaken and you’re lacking in that simple task as well?” She says and begins to laugh. + +Her taunts, her laughter, everything about her are enough to put you over the edge. The twisted thing is she’s right. You do feel some sort of…the word isn’t attraction…you don’t know what the correct word for it would be, but you feel it. + +You release her arm and painfully pull the bloody dagger out of your back to slice the back of her form fitting clothing and rip most of it off of her. While she continues to taunt you, you toss the dagger aside, proceed to pull down your own breeches and thrust into her roughly from behind. + +From there it gets surreal as she goes from continuing to taunt you and what are presumably sounds of ecstasy. She even demands that you to continue choking her. All of this puts you in such a state of confusion that you have a hard time even finishing. This whole experience is quite unknown to you as you’ve only read about such activities, but certainly never engaged in them. Surely, it isn’t always like this? + +When you’ve finished you briefly collapse backwards which is all the time Mistress needs to gain her advantage. She grabs the bloody dagger you pulled out your back and stabs you in the leg with it. You think she was aiming higher, but you managed to drag yourself out of the way in time to avoid such a grievous injury. Unfortunately she still manages to cast some sort of force spell and slam you against the wall with it. You can’t move no matter how hard you try. Mistress, naked and bloodied from your battle approaches you with one useless broken arm and her other hand up keeping the spell with the cruel smile on her face you’re used to seeing. + +“Look at you, you’re already spent.” she remarks getting closer to you as you feel her spell continuing to crush you into the wall. + +“All right. That will do. I don’t know what the point of all this was, but I’m putting an end to it right now.” Mr. Mol suddenly says. You didn’t even see him enter the room, though you were sort of pre-occupied. +“Mmm, interesting that you waited until after the floor show before putting an end to it Jacob. Did our actions excite you as well? Maybe you could’ve joined in or perhaps you just like to watch. Yes, I imagine watching is something a eunuch like yourself is only capable of.” + +Mistress releases her spell as Mr. Mol comes closer to the pair of you. You slump to the floor exhausted. + +“The Emperor says he’s ready now and there is no more need to test him.” Mr. Mol says. +“Maybe not for your precious Emperor, but I needed to test him for myself.” Mistress replies. +“For what purpose?” +“Just to see if he was up to the challenge, but he was severely lacking in every way just as I suspected. Take your creation Jacob, I am done with him.” + +Still in discussion with Mr. Mol, Mistress isn’t paying attention to you at all. You are beneath her notice now and you aren’t sure if that makes you madder than the fact that she just defeated you in battle when you thought for sure you had her beat. You stare at the dagger in your leg and think how easy it would be to use it on that bitch while she isn’t paying attention. +> Resist the urge +As much as you would like to, you know it would be folly. You’re in no condition to attack again and you’ve already underestimated her enough today. Besides, she’s probably expecting you to attack her, perhaps even hoping you will just so she has the excuse to kill you. + +In the meantime, Mr. Mol has stopped speaking with her and points over at you. + +“You. Report to the medical ward and get yourself healed up as quickly as you can. You’ve got an important meeting soon and the appropriate clothing for it will be provided for while you’re there. And for the Emperor’s sake, put your damn pants back on before you leave this room.” +“Uh, yes sir.” You say sheepishly. + +Mr. Mol gives a disapproving look and shakes his head before walking out the door. + +You pull the knife out of your leg and stagger up to retrieve your pants. While putting them back on, you see Mistress near the door casting some sort of spell over her broken arm. She appears to be healing it all on her own and within the moment it takes you to get over to the exit, she has healed it completely. Once again she turns her attention back to you. + +“Too bad you can’t heal yourself so easily, but I couldn’t teach you all of my tricks now could I? Mind if I have my dagger back? No wait, why don’t you keep it as a reminder of our quality time together…and your complete and utter defeat.” Mistress says with a big grin. + +She sees your hand tightening around the handle of the dagger. + +“Do it. I know you wanted to earlier when my back was turned to you.” She grabs your hand with the knife and presses it in her stomach and then moves it upward between her breasts. She presses deep enough that the point is cutting her skin a bit. “Thrust that blade deep into me. This is your best chance Eternal.” + +You want to, you REALLY want to…but this is just another head game she’s playing. There’s some sort of trick, you know it. + +“No, I am to report to the medical ward immediately.” You say trying not to look into her eyes or focus on her naked body. +“Ah yes, duty calls. Very well. Another day perhaps.” She says and then lets go of your hand only to rub up against the side of you and press her lips near your ear. + +“You were right not to do it. I would’ve killed you. And this…my dear Eternal, is why you will never beat mommy. Remember this.” She says and licks the side of your face followed by a sensual kiss to your lips as her hand rubs your chest. + +Once again your hormones impede your better judgment and the temporary distraction is just another tactic for her to hurt you in some way. She suddenly bites your lip hard enough to draw blood and then spits the blood back in your face laughing the whole time. + +It is at this moment that even within your short amount of years on this world, you can’t ever imagine encountering a more cruel and twisted creature. If there are other such people, beings, or whatever, Mistress has managed to completely desensitize you to the point that you aren’t going to be surprised by them. + +But then maybe that was one of the things she was trying to teach you. + +With Mistress’ laughter still ringing in your ears, you exit the room holding your bleeding lip and head to the medical ward. While you’re waiting you examine your last “gift” from Mistress. It is a very fine weapon and probably svelk made given that its blade is made of an uncommon material. You want to say its mithril, but you can’t exactly be sure since studying various types of metal wasn’t really in your schedule. It certainly isn’t common steel that’s for sure. As for the hilt you can’t even guess, except that it’s some sort of dark metal, sturdy and has a simple design. You eventually put it away when the medical mages are ready to help you. + +You’re healed relatively quickly by the medical mages. Apparently you are not to waste time lying around in a bed, as this meeting of yours is very important. When you put on the new clothes that have been provided, they are of a higher quality cloth and definitely fancier than what you’re used to. + +You don’t have wait long before Mr. Mol arrives. + +“There you are, hmmm well you look presentable enough I suppose. I trust you’re all healed up and feeling better?” Mr. Mol says looking you up and down. +“Yes, much better sir.” +“Good, because you’re going to meet the Emperor himself. This is a great honor for you Eternal, I hope you realize this.” + +This revelation that you’re going to meet the Emperor in person is more than enough to put you in better spirits. + +“Of course sir. I know that the Emperor is all-powerful and all seeing and I should be grateful for my existence to him. And I am.” +“Well, don’t tell me, tell him when you meet him. Let us be on our way.” + +You follow Mr. Mol outside, something you rarely do. You’re usually cooped up inside the training facility all the time. A carriage waits for you and you enter it with Mr. Mol. Along the way to the capital Mr. Mol tells you how you should act and various other things to expect. The one thing he doesn’t tell you is what the Emperor looks like, but you suppose you’ll find out soon enough. + +When you reach the capital Qale, it’s just as big as you’ve heard. Though you sort of thought that everyone would be dressed similar to you and the place would be practically paved in gold. Not that you’re disappointed, but it’s just much…different than you expected. + +The palace on the other hand is as impressive as you thought it would be. The inside and out. Royal guards are everywhere and you see more than a few people in the fancy clothes similar to your own and Mol’s. You expect to enter a grand throne room, but Mr. Mol tells you that the Emperor hasn’t used the throne room in all the time he has known him. In fact, from what he’s heard, the Emperor hasn’t used it in centuries since he rarely meets with anyone directly anymore except with a few trusted associates. + +With this sort of information, you truly realize what a really rare opportunity this is and how proud you are that you’re getting to experience it. + +After going down a long stairway and through several corridors, you eventually come big empty room with a giant sturdy silver door with two equally large black statues on either side, which are made of some sort of crystal. They appear to be warrior figures of some sort, but when you look at the face, they have none; or rather their face is that of a skull. Each one carries a battle-axe in their hands, which arc over the top of the door. + +Mr. Mol approaches the door and whispers something and in a few moments, the door creeks open just enough for the pair of you to enter. + +The room opens up and all you see are shelves and row after row of books. You’d almost think you’d stepped into a library of some sort. After the rows of books the room opens up to a more spacious area, which consists of luxurious furnishings from the carpet to the tapestries on the walls. And there in a fancy leather chair sits an old man in a robe reading a book. You draw his attention when you and Mol approach and stands up. + +Is this the Emperor? If it is, your perceptions have been challenged again. He doesn’t look anything like the figure you imagined. + +“Ah, Jacob. Good of you to be on time as usual. And this…this must be the one I’ve heard so much about! So am I everything you expected me to be? Well? Speak up son!” +“Uh…yes my Emperor?” +“You’re a bad liar son. I thought your previous teacher would’ve taught you better in that regard. Oh well, you’re still young and I can probably teach you better than anyone.” +“Teach me my Emperor?” +“Of course teach you, you’ll be learning everything you need to know from me from now on.” +“I…I’m honored my Emperor!” +“And you can stop with that my emperor nonsense every time you address me. I’m not Mistress, or whatever the hell that svelk bitch is calling herself these days. I don’t demand some sort of power trip formality.” +“Of course my…of course.” +“Ha ha! They told me you learned quick! Now let’s get to…eh? Jacob you still here? Don’t you have something important to do?” +“Yes, but I needed your input sir, it’s about the shadows, something needs to be done with them.” +“Don’t you have those other two eternals to use as spies? Wasn’t that your idea?” +“Yes, but…” +“Well don’t bother me with it again until you find out more. Now leave us.” The Emperor says and waves Jacob away. + +Jacob looks like he wants to say more, but he stops and instead just nods and makes his exit, leaving you alone with the Emperor who turns his attention back to you. + +“So, back to you son. Where do you see yourself in say…oh five years?” +“Well, I suppose on the battlefield destroying your enemies and serving you of course.” +“Of course you would, if you were some grunt destined for sword fodder. No you’re destined for much greater things. That, I promise you. But we can talk about that all in good time for right now I’ll bet you have some questions of your own. Go ahead, ask me anything and I assure you there is no question that will be too personal. If you ask something I feel you do not need to know then I shall not tell you. Simple enough right?” +“Yes, sounds reasonable.” +“Good, so why don’t you start?” + +The first problem is that you don’t even know WHERE to start. You eventually do ask some things you’re curious about and the Emperor is very forth coming with information. You do not want to take advantage his kindness though so you stop after you feel most of your curiosity has been sated. Besides, there will be opportunity to learn more later. + +And so the Emperor begins his process of mentoring you… +> Years pass... +Year 19 + +The day of reckoning is coming soon for all traitors; particularly the shadows and you’re just itching to play your part. It was you after all that influenced the Emperor on such an important decision. You just wonder what that role will be since the Emperor is currently explaining part of the plan to you and you’re still not entirely sure of how this is going to play out. + +“But isn’t the military already going to wipe out the shadows?” you ask. +“I told you son, I had a contingency plan for the shadows a long time ago. Our military isn’t even going to be involved for the most part. Maybe a few soldiers to mop up a few escapees, but their subterranean fort called Gloom is also serving as their handy underground tomb…heh that rhymed. Anyway what I’m saying is I have an old alliance with the derro and the fort the shadows are currently using as their headquarters was originally created by the derro who abandoned it because there wasn’t any worthwhile mining prospects in the area any longer. The derro still know every secret passage and inch of that place and can launch a surprise attack at anytime. And before you even ask, yes they’ll be MORE than enough to finish off the shadows. Personally I wish I could use them against the Felkans, but that’s not meant to be since they don’t do favors like this on a regular basis.” +“Can we be sure to get all of the shadows though? Won’t a lot of them be on topside?” +“Well we’re trying to coordinate the attack so there won’t be a lot of shadows on the surface at the time. However we do keep track of their patrol routes and schedules, we even try to keep track of their unofficial patrol routes that they seem to prefer. Basically the derro will get most of them underground, the more tedious thing isn’t getting rid of the shadows, it’ll be wiping out any of non-shadow sympathizers they’ve recruited to their cause. I might use specialized teams to take care of that…in fact I think I’ll put you in that group. It’ll give you an opportunity to put those combat skills of yours to good use! And it’ll also give you a good opportunity to be in demonstrating your ability to lead since I’m also putting you in charge of it.” + +You don’t know what to say. Not that you’re displeased with such an opportunity, its just you really weren’t expecting it. + +“I won’t fail you Emperor.” You remark. +“Of course you won’t since it’s not an option, but as I said I have complete faith in you. Now I’m going to tell you right now all of them have got more battlefield experience and in some cases several decades, but don’t let that intimidate you. YOU are in charge. Never forget that.” + +The Emperor goes on to explain that while you’ll be working with a specific group, you naturally won’t be working without the full support of the Empire. He states that there will be other groups like yours scouring the countryside for shadows and any other potential rebel types. + +“Most of those scum are probably going to be hiding out in that backwards swamp province of Delerg, so that’s where you’ll be heading. It’ll probably be a good idea to do a purge anyway, so you’ve got full permission to use whatever means to stomp out anyone who even remotely is showing signs of rebellious behavior. The derro are still getting prepared, so you’ll have a little time to get to know your team before we stop this misguided revolution before it starts. You’ll head to Delerg in a couple days and await further orders there.” + +Your trip to Delerg is an uneventful carriage ride, though it does give you time to see a little more of the Empire countryside. Along the way you read up a little more about the Delerg area and how it used to be the original home of the shadows. It was there where the Emperor first made his alliance with them. You also refresh yourself on the shadows themselves and how they typically go about fighting. Their favored tactic is to remain cloaked invisibly and then launch a sneak attack followed by hasting themselves to finish off anyone else. + +When you reach Delerg you stop in a rundown town appropriately called Sinkhole. From there you are told the rest of your team is meeting you there. No sooner have you gotten off the carriage when you’re approached by a large scarred orc in battle armor. + +“You the Emperor’s boy?” he asks in a gruff tone, though much more coherent than you were lead to expect from his kind. +“I am in his service and was sent here, if that’s what you mean. Who are you?” +“All business, I guess you’re him. I’m Captain Gruz at your command I suppose since I’ve been informed that you’re in charge of this thing. The most of your command is in the local barracks. The svelk mercs have been busy scouting though, better that they stay out our way until its time anyway.” +“Wait, svelk mercs?” +“Yeah, they’re trying to find any hidden safe houses and such that the shadows might have scattered about in the deeper reaches of the swamp. Figured you knew seeing as you’re buddies with the Emperor and all.” +“I’m not his buddy, I’m his dedicated agent who is honored to serve him to the best of my ability!” you say starting to get annoyed by the orc’s choice of words. +“Okay, I meant no disrespect…I will say though you need to lighten up a bit lad. Even the other Eternals I trained weren’t quite as serious as you seem to be.” + +While this is news to you that he was a trainer to some of your other classmates, you don’t see as that having any bearing on how he should tell you how to behave. + +“Well YOU didn’t train me, because I surpassed my classmates! I survived ordeals that would’ve most likely killed them! So do not presume to tell me how I should act!” + +Captain Gruz’s stoic expression cracks a bit, you at first think his face is going to turn into an expression of anger, but instead he smirks a bit. + +“Mistress trained you didn’t she?” he asks. +“Yes, and what of it?” you snap. +“Nothing, just explains some things. Come then, I’m sure you’ll want to talk to the troops and enlighten them how you’re going to be running things. Now I know this is your first command, but don’t worry, I’ll be here to give advice and make sure the rest of the troops take you seriously.” +“If I want your advice, I’ll ask for it captain. And the troops should be taking me seriously regardless of your presence. I am here by the orders of the Emperor himself! That should be more than enough motivation for them to obey my commands!” +“…I suppose so sir.” Gruz answers though you get the impression he’d like to say more. + +When you and Gruz enter the barracks, you’re welcomed to a surprising sight. It’s filled with orcs! First svelk mercenaries and now orc troops! You didn’t know you were going to be leading two distinctly different races! When Gruz notices your expression, his own is one of amusement. The other orcs stop their loud discussions and begin to study you. They appear unimpressed. + +“Ey cappin’ ooo dis humie in da fancy leather armor? You get ‘im from the local ‘orehouse fer me? Har har har har!” one orc says which is followed by loud laughter from the rest. +“Alright everyone calm down this is…” Gruz tries to interject, but you stop him. +“I can speak for myself!” you say realizing that you must take an aggressive stance. It is clear that the Emperor put you in this situation to force you to deal with surprises and how well you can handle commanding unruly troops. + +“All you need to know about me is that I am your superior for the duration of this operation and you will cease behaving like the near mindless beasts you are and start earning your keep for the Empire by following my orders!” + +This works on a few of the orcs, but the outspoken one has decided to keep pressing the issue of challenging your authority. + +“Beast iz it? I’ll have you know ima fookin’ lady!” the orc says standing up. To be quite honest you thought the orc was male, but between the battle armor and ugliness of all of them they all look alike to you. +“I don’t care what gender you are, you WILL follow my orders or…” +“Or whut? Whachu gonna do?” the female orc says getting closer and staring down at you ready for a fight. + +You look over at Gruz who just gives you a look that expresses “Hey, you said you didn’t need my help.” and you’re right you don’t need his help. You know how to handle this. + +You scan another orc who is egging on the loud female. The orc looks fairly formidable and is on the larger side (though they’re all bigger than you). + +“HEY YOU!” you shout out to the orc. +“Huh? Whut?” +“You male?” +“Yeah.” +“Good.” You say and immediately attack him after pushing past the female orc. + +While this battle could be over within seconds if you used magic, you can’t do that here. The orcs need to respect your natural battle skills if they’re going to properly respect you. Of course you need to beat said orc first and one you’ve decided to make an example of isn’t about to just let that happen and readies his morning star. +> Go for his eyes and face +You attempt to slam the pommel of your sword into the orc’s face, but he anticipates that move and blocks it with ease. Using his strength he manages to push you away so hard that you end up tripping backwards over a small stool on the floor. Now that he has a bit of distance he swings his morning star at you and you just barely manage to get out of the way before it crushes the stool you just tripped over. + +You grab the chain of the morning star in an attempt to take it away from him, but he jerks back so hard that you end up being pulled with it and land right in front of his feet. Then you get a hefty steel boot to the face, specifically the nose…which unfortunately due to the angle of the kick, the bone inside goes inside you brain. + +You convulse on the floor, gurgling and bleeding from the nose and mouth for a few seconds before dying. + +Captain Gruz is naturally furious at his subordinate who insists that he didn’t mean to kill you and can’t help that humans are so weak and squishy. Ever the wily one, Gruz tells some of the other orcs to get rid of your body and ultimately blames your disappearance on the svelk scouts. The svelk being who they are, are not believed when they protest their innocence and those that don’t immediately flee are rounded up and executed by the Empire. + +The Emperor laments your death for a few days, but soon comes to the conclusion that if you were dispatched so easily then you must not have been worthy anyway.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 19 + +The day of reckoning is coming soon for all traitors; particularly the shadows and you’re just itching to play your part. It was you after all that influenced the Emperor on such an important decision. You just wonder what that role will be since the Emperor is currently explaining part of the plan to you and you’re still not entirely sure of how this is going to play out. + +“But isn’t the military already going to wipe out the shadows?” you ask. +“I told you son, I had a contingency plan for the shadows a long time ago. Our military isn’t even going to be involved for the most part. Maybe a few soldiers to mop up a few escapees, but their subterranean fort called Gloom is also serving as their handy underground tomb…heh that rhymed. Anyway what I’m saying is I have an old alliance with the derro and the fort the shadows are currently using as their headquarters was originally created by the derro who abandoned it because there wasn’t any worthwhile mining prospects in the area any longer. The derro still know every secret passage and inch of that place and can launch a surprise attack at anytime. And before you even ask, yes they’ll be MORE than enough to finish off the shadows. Personally I wish I could use them against the Felkans, but that’s not meant to be since they don’t do favors like this on a regular basis.” +“Can we be sure to get all of the shadows though? Won’t a lot of them be on topside?” +“Well we’re trying to coordinate the attack so there won’t be a lot of shadows on the surface at the time. However we do keep track of their patrol routes and schedules, we even try to keep track of their unofficial patrol routes that they seem to prefer. Basically the derro will get most of them underground, the more tedious thing isn’t getting rid of the shadows, it’ll be wiping out any of non-shadow sympathizers they’ve recruited to their cause. I might use specialized teams to take care of that…in fact I think I’ll put you in that group. It’ll give you an opportunity to put those combat skills of yours to good use! And it’ll also give you a good opportunity to be in demonstrating your ability to lead since I’m also putting you in charge of it.” + +You don’t know what to say. Not that you’re displeased with such an opportunity, its just you really weren’t expecting it. + +“I won’t fail you Emperor.” You remark. +“Of course you won’t since it’s not an option, but as I said I have complete faith in you. Now I’m going to tell you right now all of them have got more battlefield experience and in some cases several decades, but don’t let that intimidate you. YOU are in charge. Never forget that.” + +The Emperor goes on to explain that while you’ll be working with a specific group, you naturally won’t be working without the full support of the Empire. He states that there will be other groups like yours scouring the countryside for shadows and any other potential rebel types. + +“Most of those scum are probably going to be hiding out in that backwards swamp province of Delerg, so that’s where you’ll be heading. It’ll probably be a good idea to do a purge anyway, so you’ve got full permission to use whatever means to stomp out anyone who even remotely is showing signs of rebellious behavior. The derro are still getting prepared, so you’ll have a little time to get to know your team before we stop this misguided revolution before it starts. You’ll head to Delerg in a couple days and await further orders there.” + +Your trip to Delerg is an uneventful carriage ride, though it does give you time to see a little more of the Empire countryside. Along the way you read up a little more about the Delerg area and how it used to be the original home of the shadows. It was there where the Emperor first made his alliance with them. You also refresh yourself on the shadows themselves and how they typically go about fighting. Their favored tactic is to remain cloaked invisibly and then launch a sneak attack followed by hasting themselves to finish off anyone else. + +When you reach Delerg you stop in a rundown town appropriately called Sinkhole. From there you are told the rest of your team is meeting you there. No sooner have you gotten off the carriage when you’re approached by a large scarred orc in battle armor. + +“You the Emperor’s boy?” he asks in a gruff tone, though much more coherent than you were lead to expect from his kind. +“I am in his service and was sent here, if that’s what you mean. Who are you?” +“All business, I guess you’re him. I’m Captain Gruz at your command I suppose since I’ve been informed that you’re in charge of this thing. The most of your command is in the local barracks. The svelk mercs have been busy scouting though, better that they stay out our way until its time anyway.” +“Wait, svelk mercs?” +“Yeah, they’re trying to find any hidden safe houses and such that the shadows might have scattered about in the deeper reaches of the swamp. Figured you knew seeing as you’re buddies with the Emperor and all.” +“I’m not his buddy, I’m his dedicated agent who is honored to serve him to the best of my ability!” you say starting to get annoyed by the orc’s choice of words. +“Okay, I meant no disrespect…I will say though you need to lighten up a bit lad. Even the other Eternals I trained weren’t quite as serious as you seem to be.” + +While this is news to you that he was a trainer to some of your other classmates, you don’t see as that having any bearing on how he should tell you how to behave. + +“Well YOU didn’t train me, because I surpassed my classmates! I survived ordeals that would’ve most likely killed them! So do not presume to tell me how I should act!” + +Captain Gruz’s stoic expression cracks a bit, you at first think his face is going to turn into an expression of anger, but instead he smirks a bit. + +“Mistress trained you didn’t she?” he asks. +“Yes, and what of it?” you snap. +“Nothing, just explains some things. Come then, I’m sure you’ll want to talk to the troops and enlighten them how you’re going to be running things. Now I know this is your first command, but don’t worry, I’ll be here to give advice and make sure the rest of the troops take you seriously.” +“If I want your advice, I’ll ask for it captain. And the troops should be taking me seriously regardless of your presence. I am here by the orders of the Emperor himself! That should be more than enough motivation for them to obey my commands!” +“…I suppose so sir.” Gruz answers though you get the impression he’d like to say more. + +When you and Gruz enter the barracks, you’re welcomed to a surprising sight. It’s filled with orcs! First svelk mercenaries and now orc troops! You didn’t know you were going to be leading two distinctly different races! When Gruz notices your expression, his own is one of amusement. The other orcs stop their loud discussions and begin to study you. They appear unimpressed. + +“Ey cappin’ ooo dis humie in da fancy leather armor? You get ‘im from the local ‘orehouse fer me? Har har har har!” one orc says which is followed by loud laughter from the rest. +“Alright everyone calm down this is…” Gruz tries to interject, but you stop him. +“I can speak for myself!” you say realizing that you must take an aggressive stance. It is clear that the Emperor put you in this situation to force you to deal with surprises and how well you can handle commanding unruly troops. + +“All you need to know about me is that I am your superior for the duration of this operation and you will cease behaving like the near mindless beasts you are and start earning your keep for the Empire by following my orders!” + +This works on a few of the orcs, but the outspoken one has decided to keep pressing the issue of challenging your authority. + +“Beast iz it? I’ll have you know ima fookin’ lady!” the orc says standing up. To be quite honest you thought the orc was male, but between the battle armor and ugliness of all of them they all look alike to you. +“I don’t care what gender you are, you WILL follow my orders or…” +“Or whut? Whachu gonna do?” the female orc says getting closer and staring down at you ready for a fight. + +You look over at Gruz who just gives you a look that expresses “Hey, you said you didn’t need my help.” and you’re right you don’t need his help. You know how to handle this. + +You scan another orc who is egging on the loud female. The orc looks fairly formidable and is on the larger side (though they’re all bigger than you). + +“HEY YOU!” you shout out to the orc. +“Huh? Whut?” +“You male?” +“Yeah.” +“Good.” You say and immediately attack him after pushing past the female orc. + +While this battle could be over within seconds if you used magic, you can’t do that here. The orcs need to respect your natural battle skills if they’re going to properly respect you. Of course you need to beat said orc first and one you’ve decided to make an example of isn’t about to just let that happen and readies his morning star. +> Go for his legs +The orc assumes you’re going to go for his head, but unless you’re trying to kill them, merely smashing an orc in the face with anything less than an iron maul is likely to just piss them off, so while he guards up, you strike at his legs. + +Naturally he’s still armored down there, but he’s taken a bit off guard when you duck down start chopping your sword at his shin protectors. Since your own face is now closer to his feet the orc attempts to kick you in the face and that’s what you were hoping for. You drop your sword and catch his foot so he’s at your complete mercy. The orc is already so off balance that you barely even need to shove him so he crashes to the floor. + +As he tries to get up, now you smash a heavy-duty wooden chair over his head. It doesn’t break the first time, but when you do it again three more times the legs you were holding loosen enough that the rest of the chair flies from your grasp. While his helmet is protecting him somewhat, the repeated impact of the chair to his head is still enough to keep him dazed. In fact he ends up spitting out a couple of teeth. Despite this, he still seems as if he’s going to continue to oppose you, but you see him briefly look at Gruz who seems to give him a certain look back. The orc then puts up a hand as if to say he yields. You accept his capitulation. + +Victorious, you’ve made it quite clear you are not to be questioned. The rest of the orcs stop their jeering at you and a few go over to help their companion. Gruz walks over to you and his expression is now one of being impressed. + +“Well I guess you definitely walk the walk. You recognized that by beating the head in of one of the bigger males that you’d earn more respect than beating the female that was openly mocking you. You also weren’t trying to kill him, which shows that you were just trying to establish dominance rather than punishment. I’m guessing the Emperor must’ve told you about orc culture?” +“Not really, I just sort of guessed.” +“Ha ha ha ha! Well I suppose we usually aren’t that hard to figure out. Though you might have more problems on your hands now. Looks like you impressed the lady over there.” + +You look over where Gruz is pointing and it’s the same female orc that was mocking you earlier. Again its difficult for you to tell exactly, but from Gruz’s suggestion and the way the orc is blinking (fluttering?) her eyes you can only make one conclusion. + +“She’s…she’s not flirting with me is she?” you ask in hesitation. +“She was flirting with you the moment you came in the door!” Gruz laughs. + +Not wishing to think about that any further, you call everyone to attention and explain how things are going to be done in an organized manner and how you don’t want to leave anything to chance when it comes to this mission given that it is of vital importance to the Empire. They seem to understand, though Gruz sometimes reinforces the point to them in a more direct manner. You ask Gruz when the svelk are due to arrive back with their report and he says they should be back within a day or two. + +Seeing as you haven’t much else to do, you just wait for the svelk and your orders to proceed with your mission for the next couple days. You don’t interact too much with the orcs though you do converse with Gruz about minor things concerning the mission as well as your increasing annoyance that the svelk still haven’t reported in yet. + +“We’re paying these fools good money to do a job, is it too much for them to act like professionals?” you exclaim. +“With the svelk? It’s too much to ask them to do anything. Though it is rather odd they haven’t reported yet. Even they tend to obey the rule of money unless someone else has offered them more.” +“Wait, what are you saying? You think the svelk are in league with the shadows and were bribed?” +“Probably not. The shadows aren’t known for hording wealth and anything valuable they might own is probably sacred to their god or something. I’d be more inclined to believe they got themselves discovered and perhaps even ambushed. For all we know they’re all dead and we’ve just tipped our hand.” +“Well, we’ll continue to wait for the official word, besides the svelk have been the ones doing the scouting correct? We can’t very well attack anything if we don’t have a target.” + +Gruz nods at your decision and goes back to what he was doing. Another couple days pass and at last the svelk do show up. + +“Ugh. Tyren, did we really have to come back to this place? The stench of these green beasts is offensive.” One of them says as he enters. +“I know, but apparently the person we’re supposed to report our findings to should be here now…hey any of you foul smelling gentlemen seen our fearless leader yet?” this Tyren shouts. You guess he’s the svelk captain. + +As irritated as the orcs are by the svelk’s words, you’re more irritated by them for everything else. + +“I’m in charge of this operation, and where the hell have you been, you were supposed to report in days ago!” You exclaim. + +Tyren looks at you as if he’s unimpressed by you barking orders at him and continues to remain dismissive. + +“So we’re here now, is it time to attack or something?” he replies. +“No, but as I said, you should’ve reported in days ago.” +“So what’s the big deal? Maybe you’re not aware of this, but scouting this swamp isn’t exactly the quickest thing to do.” +“I don’t want to hear your lame excuses! You could’ve easily sent back a single messenger to give me an update!” +“Couldn’t do that, I needed all my men in case we ran into trouble. Dangerous business out there, I’m sure you know.” + +The svelk has an answer for everything and him giving an arrogant smirk the whole time isn’t helping matters. It reminds you of HER and you begin to get angrier. Captain Gruz starts to notice and even interjects trying to smooth things over. + +“Tyren I know it’s difficult, but you might want to rein in the whole smug svelk act that your people are so proud of. This man isn’t just your superior, he’s a direct rep from the Emperor himself.” +“Maybe he’s YOUR superior orc, but he’s not mine. Nobody fucking tells me how to do my fucking job. And I have a very hard time believing that this young whelp is a representation of anything other than a sign of how desperate the Empire is getting for officers!” + +Something within you snaps and all you can see is a svelk you want to kill for all the shit Mistress put you through. + +“Fucking bitch!” you utter and unleash a small ball of flame into the face of Tyren. He screams in agony as the flesh on his face burns. The rest of the svelk are taken by surprise by this move, though they don’t do anything to stop you. You kick Tyren to the floor while he desperately tries to put the flames on his face out. You help him put the flames out by smashing his face in with your fist repeatedly. Unlike the tougher orc bone structure, the bones of a svelk aren’t as resilient and you can hear the crunching sound of his nose, jaw and skull cracking as you continue to do major mayhem on his face. Tyren’s face is a mass of burnt gory meat at this point yet you still aren’t done. That’s when you take your dagger and scoop his eyes out with it. As you carve out the two bloody orbs, the shrieking is enough that the residents of Sinkhole who happen to be walking outside the barracks quickly run home in fear. + +Your actions while excessive are probably made slightly more disturbing due to the fact that you’re muttering incoherently and making small giggling noises the whole time you’re doing them. It’s enough to establish to everyone that they’re obviously in the presence of someone who isn’t just in charge, but also may well be a madman. One things for sure, after Tyren’s makes his last gurgling pleas while you’re slitting his throat and you’re up to your forearms in his blood, nobody is thinking about pissing you off now. + +You stand up from your bloody work feeling surprisingly much better. Happy even. + +“Remember this.” Is all you say to the group of svelk, before you turn to go to your own private quarters. + +The next day Captain Gruz gives you the scout report from the svelk. You thank him and go over some strategies since you’re feeling in a better mood now. Gruz is all too willing to give his opinions on how certain places should be approached and handled. He really does have some good ideas. Makes you wonder if you weren’t being a little too hard on him when you first met him. + +“Captain, when the orders come in, I want you to be in charge of a second team. We’ll cover more ground that way and they’ll be less of a chance for potential rebels to escape.” You say. +“Are you sure sir, you don’t think we’d be better off keeping a larger force together? I’ve always found that it’s always preferable to have more numbers than you potentially need. But you’re in charge of course.” + +Just as you’re about to discuss and ponder the pros and cons of each plan, a messenger walks in. It’s the official orders. Looks like the time for planning is over. +> Go with your plan +While you’re sure Gruz probably means well, you were put in charge of this mission and you’re not going to second guess your own judgment, which has been sound so far in dealing with the situation. + +“We’ll proceed with my plan and split the team up into two strike forces with you commanding one of them.” You say. +“As you say sir.” +“Did the svelk report say they saw any actual shadows at any of these places?” +“Not at most of the locations as they seem to be just safe houses for normal rebels, but there was one in particular which seems to be more of an actual armed camp that they saw more than a few of shadows hanging around.” +“Okay then, I’ll take the svelk and attack that place first and your group can concentrate on the regular rebel locations.” +“Are you sure you want to do that sir? I mean being alone with all the svelk?” +“I’m well aware of their treacherous nature, but as you just saw I am not intimidated by them. They just saw that as well. Besides, they’re being paid well for this job and I trust that their greed along with my example of their leader is not going to incur any more disobedience or grand standing.” +“Probably not sir, but just be careful.” +“Noted. Anyway, let’s get going we’ve got traitors to purge and I’m anxious to see it through.” + +You and Gruz get the troops ready. You give a quick briefing of the plan the pair of you take your respective groups and part ways. After a march through the swamp you reach your first target and it does indeed resemble a small military compound. It’s really just a walled village though. You’d guess that this particular place is so far from normal civilization that this just went unnoticed and the shadows eventually just subverted the entire place or at least started placing sympathizers there. + +You order the attack and all goes well. The svelk and yourself easily scale the walls though given how pathetic the opposition is though, you almost wonder if you couldn’t have taken this place all by yourself. You still haven’t seen any of the rumored shadows in this place though and that slightly concerns you. Did they already flee, or did they just cloak? + +“Keep alert! There may be shadows still lurking about!” you shout as you cut down one of the rebels. + +No sooner have you said that, when you sense something amidst the chaos. A feeling like you’re being targeted… + +Unfortunately you still don’t know where the attacker is located until its too late. A female shadow decloaks and fires a bolt that sinks into your chest before you can move out of the way. + +Shadow bolts tend to be dipped in a poison and this one is no different as you begin to feel the affects. Fortunately being an Eternal you’re immune to it killing you, unfortunately it still is enough to start making you feel dizzy. + +The female shadow is moving faster than anything you’ve ever seen and she’s moving right towards you. + +You order the svelk in a slurring tone to fire their crossbows, but nobody answers your call. You can’t be sure if it’s due to the fact that in the chaos nobody could hear or understand what you said or if the svelk have conveniently decided to not follow your orders. In any event you’re on your own. + +You block the shadow’s attack with a force shield and follow up with a stream of fire from your other hand though the shadow easily dodges your attack. You feel two sharp pains in both of your sides and at first you think the shadow has moved so quick that she’s gotten behind you to stab you, but it turns out it’s a second shadow that has snuck up on you. + +In the end it doesn’t really matter as the result is the same and you collapse face first into the ground. A final blade through your back finishes you off for good.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The orc assumes you’re going to go for his head, but unless you’re trying to kill them, merely smashing an orc in the face with anything less than an iron maul is likely to just piss them off, so while he guards up, you strike at his legs. + +Naturally he’s still armored down there, but he’s taken a bit off guard when you duck down start chopping your sword at his shin protectors. Since your own face is now closer to his feet the orc attempts to kick you in the face and that’s what you were hoping for. You drop your sword and catch his foot so he’s at your complete mercy. The orc is already so off balance that you barely even need to shove him so he crashes to the floor. + +As he tries to get up, now you smash a heavy-duty wooden chair over his head. It doesn’t break the first time, but when you do it again three more times the legs you were holding loosen enough that the rest of the chair flies from your grasp. While his helmet is protecting him somewhat, the repeated impact of the chair to his head is still enough to keep him dazed. In fact he ends up spitting out a couple of teeth. Despite this, he still seems as if he’s going to continue to oppose you, but you see him briefly look at Gruz who seems to give him a certain look back. The orc then puts up a hand as if to say he yields. You accept his capitulation. + +Victorious, you’ve made it quite clear you are not to be questioned. The rest of the orcs stop their jeering at you and a few go over to help their companion. Gruz walks over to you and his expression is now one of being impressed. + +“Well I guess you definitely walk the walk. You recognized that by beating the head in of one of the bigger males that you’d earn more respect than beating the female that was openly mocking you. You also weren’t trying to kill him, which shows that you were just trying to establish dominance rather than punishment. I’m guessing the Emperor must’ve told you about orc culture?” +“Not really, I just sort of guessed.” +“Ha ha ha ha! Well I suppose we usually aren’t that hard to figure out. Though you might have more problems on your hands now. Looks like you impressed the lady over there.” + +You look over where Gruz is pointing and it’s the same female orc that was mocking you earlier. Again its difficult for you to tell exactly, but from Gruz’s suggestion and the way the orc is blinking (fluttering?) her eyes you can only make one conclusion. + +“She’s…she’s not flirting with me is she?” you ask in hesitation. +“She was flirting with you the moment you came in the door!” Gruz laughs. + +Not wishing to think about that any further, you call everyone to attention and explain how things are going to be done in an organized manner and how you don’t want to leave anything to chance when it comes to this mission given that it is of vital importance to the Empire. They seem to understand, though Gruz sometimes reinforces the point to them in a more direct manner. You ask Gruz when the svelk are due to arrive back with their report and he says they should be back within a day or two. + +Seeing as you haven’t much else to do, you just wait for the svelk and your orders to proceed with your mission for the next couple days. You don’t interact too much with the orcs though you do converse with Gruz about minor things concerning the mission as well as your increasing annoyance that the svelk still haven’t reported in yet. + +“We’re paying these fools good money to do a job, is it too much for them to act like professionals?” you exclaim. +“With the svelk? It’s too much to ask them to do anything. Though it is rather odd they haven’t reported yet. Even they tend to obey the rule of money unless someone else has offered them more.” +“Wait, what are you saying? You think the svelk are in league with the shadows and were bribed?” +“Probably not. The shadows aren’t known for hording wealth and anything valuable they might own is probably sacred to their god or something. I’d be more inclined to believe they got themselves discovered and perhaps even ambushed. For all we know they’re all dead and we’ve just tipped our hand.” +“Well, we’ll continue to wait for the official word, besides the svelk have been the ones doing the scouting correct? We can’t very well attack anything if we don’t have a target.” + +Gruz nods at your decision and goes back to what he was doing. Another couple days pass and at last the svelk do show up. + +“Ugh. Tyren, did we really have to come back to this place? The stench of these green beasts is offensive.” One of them says as he enters. +“I know, but apparently the person we’re supposed to report our findings to should be here now…hey any of you foul smelling gentlemen seen our fearless leader yet?” this Tyren shouts. You guess he’s the svelk captain. + +As irritated as the orcs are by the svelk’s words, you’re more irritated by them for everything else. + +“I’m in charge of this operation, and where the hell have you been, you were supposed to report in days ago!” You exclaim. + +Tyren looks at you as if he’s unimpressed by you barking orders at him and continues to remain dismissive. + +“So we’re here now, is it time to attack or something?” he replies. +“No, but as I said, you should’ve reported in days ago.” +“So what’s the big deal? Maybe you’re not aware of this, but scouting this swamp isn’t exactly the quickest thing to do.” +“I don’t want to hear your lame excuses! You could’ve easily sent back a single messenger to give me an update!” +“Couldn’t do that, I needed all my men in case we ran into trouble. Dangerous business out there, I’m sure you know.” + +The svelk has an answer for everything and him giving an arrogant smirk the whole time isn’t helping matters. It reminds you of HER and you begin to get angrier. Captain Gruz starts to notice and even interjects trying to smooth things over. + +“Tyren I know it’s difficult, but you might want to rein in the whole smug svelk act that your people are so proud of. This man isn’t just your superior, he’s a direct rep from the Emperor himself.” +“Maybe he’s YOUR superior orc, but he’s not mine. Nobody fucking tells me how to do my fucking job. And I have a very hard time believing that this young whelp is a representation of anything other than a sign of how desperate the Empire is getting for officers!” + +Something within you snaps and all you can see is a svelk you want to kill for all the shit Mistress put you through. + +“Fucking bitch!” you utter and unleash a small ball of flame into the face of Tyren. He screams in agony as the flesh on his face burns. The rest of the svelk are taken by surprise by this move, though they don’t do anything to stop you. You kick Tyren to the floor while he desperately tries to put the flames on his face out. You help him put the flames out by smashing his face in with your fist repeatedly. Unlike the tougher orc bone structure, the bones of a svelk aren’t as resilient and you can hear the crunching sound of his nose, jaw and skull cracking as you continue to do major mayhem on his face. Tyren’s face is a mass of burnt gory meat at this point yet you still aren’t done. That’s when you take your dagger and scoop his eyes out with it. As you carve out the two bloody orbs, the shrieking is enough that the residents of Sinkhole who happen to be walking outside the barracks quickly run home in fear. + +Your actions while excessive are probably made slightly more disturbing due to the fact that you’re muttering incoherently and making small giggling noises the whole time you’re doing them. It’s enough to establish to everyone that they’re obviously in the presence of someone who isn’t just in charge, but also may well be a madman. One things for sure, after Tyren’s makes his last gurgling pleas while you’re slitting his throat and you’re up to your forearms in his blood, nobody is thinking about pissing you off now. + +You stand up from your bloody work feeling surprisingly much better. Happy even. + +“Remember this.” Is all you say to the group of svelk, before you turn to go to your own private quarters. + +The next day Captain Gruz gives you the scout report from the svelk. You thank him and go over some strategies since you’re feeling in a better mood now. Gruz is all too willing to give his opinions on how certain places should be approached and handled. He really does have some good ideas. Makes you wonder if you weren’t being a little too hard on him when you first met him. + +“Captain, when the orders come in, I want you to be in charge of a second team. We’ll cover more ground that way and they’ll be less of a chance for potential rebels to escape.” You say. +“Are you sure sir, you don’t think we’d be better off keeping a larger force together? I’ve always found that it’s always preferable to have more numbers than you potentially need. But you’re in charge of course.” + +Just as you’re about to discuss and ponder the pros and cons of each plan, a messenger walks in. It’s the official orders. Looks like the time for planning is over. +> Go with Gruz's plan +As good as you believe you are in combat, you have to admit to yourself that you don’t really have too much experience in leading a large group. Perhaps it would be wiser to defer to someone who does have such experience. + +“Very well, you may be right. I suppose we really shouldn’t worry about anyone escaping since if they do, they’ll eventually be found anyway. Did the svelk report say they saw any actual shadows at any of these places?” +“Not at most of the locations as they seem to be just safe houses for normal rebels, but there was one in particular which seems to be more of an actual armed camp that they saw more than a few of shadows hanging around.” +“We’re going to hit that place first then. I just hope the svelk were as silent about their scouting as you said they claimed to be. Anyway, let’s get going we’ve got traitors to purge and I’m anxious to see it through.” + +You and Gruz get the troops ready. The general idea is to first have the svelk to sneak up on the target locations and then after they initiate the attack the orcs come charging in from all sides. It seems simple, but perhaps simple plans work the best due to less chance of things going wrong. At least you hope they do. + +After a march through the swamp you reach your first target and it does indeed resemble a small military compound. It’s really just a walled village though. You’d guess that this particular place is so far from normal civilization that this just went unnoticed and the shadows eventually just subverted the entire place or at least started placing sympathizers there. + +You order the attack and all goes well. The svelk and yourself easily scale the walls while Gruz and the orcs bash down the pitiful gates. Given how pathetic the opposition is though, you almost wonder if you couldn’t have taken this place all by yourself. You still haven’t seen any of the rumored shadows in this place though and that slightly concerns you. Did they already flee, or did they just cloak? + +“Keep alert! There may be shadows still lurking about!” you shout as you cut down one of the rebels. + +No sooner have you said that, when you sense something amidst the chaos. A feeling like you’re being targeted… + +“GET DOWN!” Gruz shouts as a female shadow decloaks and fires a bolt at you. You’re just quick enough to duck down and avoid being hit. + +An orc attempts to strike her down, but she easily fends off the attack and eliminates him instead. She’s moving faster than anything you’ve ever seen. + +“Crossbows now!” you order and the svelk mercenaries closest to you unleash their own bolts at the shadow. She may be quick, but she can’t avoid all of the bolts from the repeating crossbows. She catches more than few bolts and collapses in a heap. + +As she attempts to crawl away you go over to her to finish her off and that’s when you get that feeling again only this time you know where its coming from and instinctively pull up your sword to deflect the hit. When the shadow decloaks you’re close enough to see the hatred in his eyes, you’re also close enough to hear him muttering about revenge for Bianca. You’re guessing that was the female shadow that’s now a pincushion. + +He attempts to pull the same speed trick, but you prevent him from doing so by interrupting his spell with a dagger to his side. + +“Not such a good day to be a shadow is it traitor?” you ask as you twist the blade around. + +Shocked by the metal piercing his insides, he reels backwards when you pull out the blade and his death follows when Gruz smashes his axe in the side of the shadow’s head. + +You go over to finish off the female shadow who is still desperately trying to crawl away. + +“There will be no escape. The Emperor’s eye sees all and justice will be delivered to all who oppose him!” you exclaim before running your sword through her back. + +You keep alert for the possibility of more shadows lurking, but either those two were the only ones, or the rest have fled. If they have, no matter, they will be found. + +The rest of the battle is more of a simple matter. The non-shadow rebels are no match for your superior force and a few try to surrender, pleading for you to at least spare their families. You spare no one as traitors cannot be tolerated. Your ruthless orders to cut down every man, woman and child are not questioned, though the svelk take a bit more pleasure in it. + +The village is put to the torch and you’re eager to move on to the next target. You want to stomp out ALL of these traitors before they even get the possibility of regrouping. + +Day after day you wipe out several small encampments and hideouts of the rebels. It’s sickening to you that there is as many as there are. How could any citizen defy the Empire or the Emperor? Don’t they know it is a losing proposition? Don’t they realize and appreciate how much he has done for all of their miserable lives? + +As for the shadows, their treachery is even more sickening. The Emperor gave them all a grand honor of serving him in a most important way and they’ve been nurturing rebellion in their black hearts for centuries and enticing the weak willed into helping them. Fitting that they call themselves shadows, as they are cowards who obviously rely on tricks and subversion to gain any sort of advantage. Well that stops very soon. + +“This one was an easy one. They gave up almost immediately.” Captain Gruz says cleaning off his axe after a short skirmish. +“Yes, a pity they should only realize until it’s too late the folly of their treason.” You reply. +“Yes, I imagine many have felt that way.” Gruz answers. +“And all of them are fools for doing so. And fools deserve no mercy. The loyal and dedicated on the other hand are to be rewarded. Captain, we are nearing the end of our mission and I imagine I will soon return to the Emperor to give my report. I want to tell you that I will be speaking highly of you to him and suggesting that you receive some sort of higher position.” + +Gruz isn’t sure how to respond though he thanks you. + +“I was just doing my duty sir, but I thank you. However if you’re serious about your wanting to do something for me and it isn’t too bold of me to ask, I do have specific request.” +“Speak freely then.” + +Gruz looks around as if he’s being watched and then moves closer toward you and speaks almost whispering. + +“I know I’m sort of the Empire’s token intelligent orc and that’s fine. However it’s my people sir. I really do try to keep them in line and for the most part it works, but I’m still just one man and despite common perception, orcs do have minds of their own and think about deeper things than just looting and pillaging sometimes.” +“What are you getting at?” +“What I’m saying sir, is all I would request is you ask the Emperor if he could give his loyal and dedicated orc soldiers a pay raise. It doesn’t even have to be that large. I mean the extra fighting and danger they are always assigned to do is fun and all, but just a little something extra so they know they’re being appreciated for their hard work would be welcome.” + +Well that was bold of Gruz, but you did tell him to speak freely. However, you’re suspicious of his request, since it almost sounds a bit like blackmail. +> Let it pass +You’d call him out on it, but you decide you’ll leave this one to the Emperor to ultimately decide. Besides, you figure you owe him that much for possibly saving your life. + +“I don’t know if I have that much pull with the Emperor, but I will mention it to him.” +“That’s all I ask.” + +In a few more days your task in Delerg is completed and all known targets have been eliminated. Delerg has also been effectively cowed into submission given what you did there. Stories of the ruthless young Eternal that destroyed entire villages to purge traitors are already being spread. Not exactly true since technically you only destroyed a couple and the rest were just rebel made hideouts, but if it teaches the people to fear the repercussions of treasonous behavior in the future you don’t care. You tell the Emperor as much during your report, he seems pleased with your report and feelings on the matter. + +“The destruction of the shadows went better than I had hoped. There are probably a few shadows that fled while they were on the surface, but the derro took out all of them that were in Gloom. I think to be on the safe side I’m going to have that old ruined temple of theirs in Delerg destroyed. No need for it to become some sort of symbol or some such nonsense. Speaking of Delerg, you did an excellent job. It must’ve been a shock to find out you weren’t just going to lead svelk, but orcs as well. Hated to surprise you like that, but I figured if you could successfully lead an operation with those two types under duress, you were definitely fit to lead anyone.” +“I am glad I met your expectations.” +“I never had any doubt…so what are your thoughts on good Captain Gruz and his request? I’m sure you had some on the subject.” +“Personally sir, I believe he has overstepped his bounds with this veiled threat, which is regrettable since I was beginning to respect him as a capable leader.” + +The Emperor nods a bit. + +“Hm, he must’ve made a bit of an impression on you to acknowledge his skills. So what do you believe should be done? Should he be killed or ignored? Obviously I’ve already made up my mind on the subject, but as always, I’m interested in your thoughts.” + +In the past you sometimes hesitated to give an answer, but now you know that the Emperor always wants to hear what you really think and you’re more than willing to tell him. + +“Well…I do believe he is genuine. I do believe he only wants his people to receive a little extra recognition for their duty. Some lesser beings cannot be merely satisfied with just serving greatness and they must be rewarded in a more tangible way. If it is possible, I would grant Gruz’s request. It will keep him and the rest of green skins happy for quite awhile and you’ll have no problems from them in the near future. Having the orcs calm and obedient right now is also important also because we have just eliminated our internal security force as it were. We will need to rely on raw force to maintain order as well as to stomp out the remaining shadows and rebels. After the Empire has been better stabilized, we can always purge Gruz and some of the orcs later if necessary.” + +The Emperor displays a big grin on his face and puts his hand on your shoulder. + +“I swear son, if I didn’t know better I’d think you had the ability to read minds. Sometimes its like I’m talking to a mirror that’s several centuries younger than me. Yes, I fully intend on granting his request. Time will tell if he requires purging though he’s getting on in years for an orc and who knows what dangerous battlefields he may be sent to in the future? Anyway Jacob and I are already rebuilding a new internal security force. I might get Marik’s help on this too, though I know he really wants to work on his current project, but there really isn’t any need for it now…anyway you don’t need to worry about any of this, I’m sending you to help with more shadow hunting and rebel clean up in the core province area. Don’t want to let up on them yet and you seem to be good at setting an example. Putting the fear into the populace to discourage any further thoughts of treason and all of that. I’ll be so glad when we’ve got things back to normal again, so I can focus my attention to the Felkan Kingdom again. Still, it doesn’t need to be work all the time now does it? Maybe you should go out and celebrate, you have my full permission to take a week off. Go get yourself one of those high priced elven whores I’m always hearing about, its on me son!” The Emperor laughs. + +Sometimes you still can’t get over just how relaxed the Emperor can suddenly get about everything. The funny thing is, it makes you feel relaxed too, to a certain extent anyway. Maybe it’s due to this that you sometimes wonder about something he’s always calling you a lot… + +Son. + +You don’t know if he’s using it as a term of endearment or it’s his “nickname” for you, or what. The funny thing is you do find him to be a “fatherly” figure. You’ve resisted addressing it before, but now something is urging you to do so. + +“I have a question and I don’t know how to ask this of you.” +“Well speak son, you know you can always tell or ask me anything, doesn’t mean you’ll get it though.” The Emperor says with another chuckle. + +“Are you my father?” you ask and there is a short pause of silence. The Emperor doesn’t look too surprised that you asked the question though. +“Do you want me to be your father?” he asks back which naturally just confuses you even more and you feel a little silly for asking in the first place. + +“I…I just…I dunno, you’re always calling me son and…just forget it. I allowed my feelings of respect and admiration of you to exceed their boundaries. Forgive me, Emperor.” +“You’re too tightly wound sometimes. Don’t worry about it; I wasn’t offended by your question. But my question still stands, do you WANT me to be your father?” +“I’d like to think you are, but I imagine I’m just wishing you are.” +“If you think I am. Then I am. If that’s what pleases you then what difference does it make?” +“None, I suppose.” You answer, but the Emperor can see that it does make a difference to you even if you don’t want it to. + +“Tell me, have you ever wondered about your parents? I mean you obviously know that they didn’t raise you.” +“No. I’ve never really thought of them at all.” You answer. + +Its true too, you have genuinely never wondered about who your parents were. You were far too busy with torturous training to ever really ponder such things. It’s only been recently that this subject has recently popped into your head. + +“I didn’t think so. They were never in your life and you were an orphan in the care of the Empire. And who runs the Empire?” + +You smile and see what the Emperor is trying to do. + +“You. The Empire took care of me and since you are the Empire, then really you’ve been responsible for raising me my whole life.” +“Correct! Now, do you feel better?” +“A little, though how come you call me frequently call me son anyway?” +“Well because of all the reasons you would think of me as your father. I’ve been providing for you as well as teaching you how to survive in this world. And hell, I’m even fond of you. Those factors alone already qualify me more as a father more than some of those peasants out their that just keep breeding children and never take any responsibility for them, so why not call you son?” + +You know it seems silly, but the fact that the Emperor practically considers you his son gives you a good feeling. Possibly the best you’ve ever felt. Somewhere within the hardened exterior that was beat into you, there still exists a child who would like nothing more than to just hug the Emperor right now. You resist this faint urge of course. As close as you’re feeling to the Emperor at this moment, you still have this sense of duty and protocol stuck in your head even if the Emperor himself isn’t quite as hung up on such things. + +I thank you for explaining all this and putting this all into perspective, but I think I still feel more comfortable addressing you as Emperor.” +“As you wish, but again if you ever let the occasional paternal label slip out every now and then, it wouldn’t be something that would offend me. I’m sure more than a few of my subjects have called me much worse things.” The Emperor snickers. + +Later that night as you preparing to go to sleep you think on the Emperor’s words and just as you’re basking in the comfort of them, your mind briefly wanders into something much more unpleasant. + +If the Emperor is your “father” does that make Mistress your “mother?” + +She even referred to herself as that once. While she was just being sick when she said it, the twisted thing is now you can’t help but think of her as a semi-maternal figure. She was in your life longer than any other adult during your growing years and for good or ill is responsible for most of your combat skills. In fact, so far she’s been in your life longer and probably more influential on your development than ANYONE. + +You suddenly don’t feel very well pondering that and don’t sleep well that night. +> Years pass... +Chapter 2C: Fortunate Son + + +Year 21 + +The time for all out war is getting closer and the Emperor is getting more impatient with delaying it any further. He probably feels he’s wasted enough time with putting out the pitiful rebellious fires and the restructuring of the Empire in the past couple of years. + +You’ve been looking forward to a little action as well. You haven’t had much to do in a while ever since your purges in Delerg and Quala. Ever since the official forming of the Eyes they’re supposed to be the primary ones looking after the internal peace of the Empire and rebellious activity has been practically nil. Still, it was practically non-existent just as the Eyes were coming into service. One wonders if it wasn’t due to the threat of a new “secret police” but rather the fact that you had already been overly efficient in purging dissension by depopulating entire areas. Indeed it was probably for the best that you were replaced before you deprived the Empire of potential soldiers for the upcoming war with the Felkans. + +Still, there are always those that refuse to give up. The prime one being the so-called “Last Shadow”, Cyrus. Cyrus was an Eternal though you don’t remember too much about him other than he always was one of the stealthier classmates that seemed to never fail in getting a cheap shot on you when Mistress was having you spar against him. You say “was” an Eternal because as far you’re concerned he ceased being one the moment he betrayed the Empire. Now he is nothing more than a traitor who needs to be exterminated. + +Cyrus was one of those few shadows that happened to be on the surface at the time of the destruction of Gloom. He also avoided your purges due to initially being in Quala and then eventually fleeing to the rural areas in Arat. He constantly moves around a lot, making hit and run attacks on patrols or caravans. He does travel with a group, but they aren’t so much rebels as they’re just ambitious bandits and thugs. They probably don’t give a damn about whatever Cyrus religious and philosophical views are for opposing the Empire. They’re just in it for the killing and the loot. + +Nevertheless, they are a nuisance and given that the Arat province is the staging ground to attack the Felkan Kingdom, the Emperor is more than annoyed that the Eyes haven’t succeeded in tracking him yet and he doesn’t want to waste any proper military on Cyrus mainly because he sees it as Jacob’s fault for various reasons… + +“Well he’s your failure Jacob, fix it!” The Emperor exclaims. +“The Eyes have been attempting to apprehend him my Emperor, but he has proven quite elusive. They just need more time to…” +“Jacob when I told you to put together an efficient internal security force I expected you to succeed in this endeavor.” +“My Emperor the Eyes are efficient! I mean rebellious attitudes are the lowest they’ve been in…well probably more than I’ve ever seen!” +“Well they aren’t good enough, if they can’t capture the so-called Last Shadow. I’d send in svelk mercs if I hadn’t put our funding into Marik’s factory to produce new weapons to combat the Felkans. You do realize we have a war with the Felkans to pursue and your bumbling is delaying that task!” +“I understand that, but we shouldn’t go to war until we have everything absolutely settled all internal matters in the Empire first! Cyrus is likely to start ambushing supply wagons and then where would we be?” + +You watch as the Emperor continues to verbally abuse Jacob. It’s a scene you’ve seen many times in the past and will probably see many more times in the future. Jacob really does try to serve the best he can and from what you can tell he’s fairly good at his job, but for whatever reason its just never good enough for the Emperor no matter what. + +While you normally don’t interrupt such sessions, you do feel the need to interject. + +“I would have to agree that if we are to crush the Felkans we should just go ahead and start the process now. As much of a nuisance this last shadow has been, his impact has been minimal and certainly not enough to warrant a paralysis in our military matters. We are a large nation and we are always going to have a few internal matters to resolve.” + +The Emperor naturally is pleased that you’ve backed him up in this matter, though Jacob looks less than enthused given that he’s already fighting a losing argument. + +“Thank you son. See this Jacob? This is a TRUE Eternal! Not like the rest of those losers, traitors and ne’er do wells you oversee!” + +Jacob has no more words, he might continue but knows it would be a futile endeavor and he’s walking on thin ice as it is given how the Emperor is really letting him have it today. + +Again you feel the need to interject. + +“If I may, I would be happy to assist in this matter with the shadow terrorist.” You say. +“That’s not necessary, I wouldn’t presume to take you away from whatever duties the Emperor has seen fit to bestow upon you.” Jacob replies. +“Considering how inept you’ve been in taking care of this, maybe I should send him to help.” The Emperor says before turning to address you directly. “I did have plans for you to take a command position when we start our assault on the Felkans, but the position will still be there when you’re done with bailing out Jacob if you so desire. I’ll leave it up to you. In the meantime I’m going to finish up my preparations to make the first attack on the Felkans. Now go with Jacob if you wish to help him, or stay here, but in any event I don’t want to hear anymore about this shadow matter from anyone until it’s been resolved.” + +Jacob makes his way slowly out the door, though while he hasn’t said it you see a look in his eye that he’s hoping you’ll provide assistance despite his previous words of it not being necessary. +> Help Jacob +Maybe its because you feel slightly sorry for Jacob or maybe its because you do see Cyrus as a potential liability if left unchecked and his traitorous ways are an insult to the name Eternal, but whatever the reason you decide to help Jacob. + +“I believe I shall help Jacob in this matter. I started out crushing shadows and rebels, I might as well finish the job.” You say the Emperor. +“Very well, but I trust you won’t take as long as Jacob has. Remember I need you for important tasks for the war!” + +You and Jacob both leave the Emperor’s presence. As soon as you’re out the door, Jacob addresses you. + +“I thank you for your assistance.” +“I haven’t done anything yet.” +“I’m not talking about the situation with the shadow, I mean intervening before the Emperor found a reason to have me executed.” +“Oh I doubt if that would’ve happened.” +“I don’t know. Lately I can’t seem to do anything right by him, I really try to serve to the best of my abilities. I always have.” +“I know you do.” + +Jacob and you don’t speak too much too each other normally, but your relationship has always been a cordial one. + +“I guess I should be glad the Emperor is so fond of you, it might be the only thing that’s keeping me alive. You are the Eternal that wasn’t a failure of course and for that I am very thankful.” + +Because you were directly trained by Mistress you sometimes forget that Jacob (or Mr. Mol as you once knew him) was the one that was primarily in charge of your development at least in a behind the scenes way. You’ve never really thought about your other classmates since you always had more pressing matters, but now you’re a little curious. + +“Just how many of my other classmates survived?” +“Not many. Besides you? Eight and three of them are already dead and one of those became a traitorous shadow.” +“And another one is the last shadow still giving the Empire grief.” You say. +“Yes. (Sigh) I had such high hopes for Cyrus, he showed so much potential. Damned shadow indoctrination. Anyway that just leaves four who I assure you are not losers or failures and are in fact very accomplished soldiers of the Empire. They finished out their training with Captain Gruz, who I’m sure you’re familiar with.” +“Yes, I am.” You say somewhat wishing that you could’ve been so lucky. +“I still keep apprised of their activity since they are all still technically under my watch. I’m just glad the Emperor didn’t take the project out of my hands and proceed with Marik’s crazed ideas.” +“Could you tell me a little more about them?” +“Certainly!” Jacob remarks perking up a bit. He’s genuinely glad someone is showing an interest. + +He tells you that Kane has been instrumental in taming the Rask frontier. Says that he’s even developing a bit of a reputation of his own given his merciless slaughter of the barbarian and ogre tribes up there. He’s being considered for a fort commander position. + +Brenda and Roldan have been doing similar things in the Nalin province with the kobolds and usksha desert raiders that sometimes plague the area. Either one could also become a fort commander as well, though he believes Brenda might be the better candidate as he believes Roldan can go on to greater things. He goes on to say that the both of them have become unusually close though and Roldan has even requested that they be allowed to marry! Jacob sees nothing particularly unreasonable about this request and is considering allowing it. + +“You’ll actually be working with the last one, Warrick. I assigned him to the Eyes and so far he’s been the closest to catching Cyrus. Excellent tracker. I nearly considered Warrick to become an infiltrator for the shadows initially, but it’s a good thing I didn’t considering how things worked out with Cyrus.” + +This is all somewhat fascinating to you as you do remember all of them, but mainly as your opponents in the fighting arena when Mistress was sending the entire class to try to kill you on regular basis. In fact Jacob realizes this and suddenly asks you if it’ll be a problem working with Warrick. + +“No, why would it?” +“Well I know that due to Mistress’ training you had a less friendly relationship with your classmates than everyone else.” +“It’s all in the past, for me it is at least. I survived and grew stronger from the experience. And it certainly wasn’t his fault. He was just doing what he was told. Everyone was. Besides, might be interesting working with someone from the old class on more cooperative terms this time.” +“Good. I’m glad to hear you say that.” Jacob says with a smile. + +Eventually you reach Jacob’s office where you see not one but three desks piled in paperwork. Jacob grumbles about how his underlings were supposed to there to take care of some of it today, but as usual he’ll probably have to do it all himself. After rummaging through a stack, he pulls out a few pieces of parchment and some scrolls and then says you’re taking a carriage ride to an Eye staging ground near Bucklesburg in the Arat province. Jacob says he’ll explain more about the situation along the way (as well as doing some of his paperwork. + +A carriage ride later, you’re all caught up on the area as well as the specifics of Cyrus’ most recent attacks. When you arrive in Bucklesberg you’re met by who you presume are Eyes and one face that while a little older now you recognize as Warrick. He stares at you at a bit and obviously recognizes you as well, but says nothing since it isn’t his time to speak. + +“Eyes, you may have heard of this man you see before you. He is the main reason why we managed to stop this potential full scale rebellion and keep it to a few crazed traitors that are desperately trying to hang on to their lives a little while longer.” Jacob starts off telling all of them. A little bit of an exaggeration of course, but then only a few know about the derro involvement in the destruction of shadows, and most of them are currently the same rotting bodies in Gloom. Your involvement on the other hand is infamous. + +“Now I leave you to it.” Jacob says and leaves. + +Since you are already up to speed on everything due to Jacob’s briefing, you basically tell the Eyes that how they’re planning to catch Cyrus is all wrong and how they need to do things differently. + +“Waiting around for Cyrus to attack patrols and caravans and then attempting to stop him in the act isn’t working because Cyrus is quicker and a better warrior than all of you. You know how I know this? Because you haven’t killed him yet. Even if he hasn’t managed to recruit his lackies into following that silly religion of his, he’s obviously trained them into an efficient hardened fighting force. Taking rebel captives and torturing them for information isn’t working because Cyrus is smart enough to change his plans completely when he knows his people have been captured. Besides, I guarantee you could catch and kill all of his people and he’d just disappear for a few years and pop up again with a new group. Which brings me to the point of why trying to search the wilderness for him isn’t working either, you don’t have the numbers to do it.” You say before turning to Warrick. “And as good as you are at tracking, Cyrus is still a shadow and he’s got the magic to mask himself. If he doesn’t want to be found, he won’t be.” + +Before you can continue, one of the Eyes is brave enough to question you. Unsurprisingly it’s the one in charge, Sightmaster Davison. + +“So what’s your solution?” Davison asks. + +At this point Warrick’s own face displays a grimace with a small shake of his head knowing that his immediate superior is going to be punished for the disruption. + +You walk up to the Eye and backhand him in the face. + +“Do not interrupt.” You say calmly. Davison nods quickly while holding on to the side of his face. Then you slap him a couple more times followed by a punch to his face. He falls to the floor and you launch into a speech. + +“MY solution is to bring down this shadow which all of you have failed to do! The Emperor is tired of your failures! We are to conquer the Felkan Kingdom soon and yet you cannot eliminate a few measly traitors! It is only because I decided to intervene that the lot of you haven’t been executed for your incompetence on this matter! While you may all be the Eyes of the Emperor, I am his terrible weapon that carries out his righteous justice. Pray that justice is never to be carried out on you.” + +Now that you’ve given a proper “inspirational” speech all you have to do is come up with a solution. The thing is one of their attempted tactics of trying to ambush Cyrus while he’s attacking caravans could still work if YOU get a hold of him. Of course you could come up with your own plan. +> Set up your own plan +Cyrus obviously isn’t going to be caught by something so mundane; you’ll have to do something more elaborate. Like if he thought there were shadow sympathizers on the rise again. + +“We’re going to turn this town into a hub of sedition, traitors and shadow sympathizers.” You remark. + +Several Eyes including Warrick look at each other and WANT to question why you’d want to do such a thing, but nobody dares say anything though. + +“Good, Glad everyone waited for me to continue this time. Cyrus will be more likely to let his guard down if he thinks he has a solid base of operations rather than running like an animal in the wilderness. We need this town to become that base. Now here’s how we’re going to do it…” + +First thing you tell everyone is that you’re going to be harassing the people of Bucklesberg to an unreasonable degree. You get to this fairly quickly and perhaps a little too zealously. + +You begin an inquisition of sorts to “root out” any potential shadow sympathies. Naturally all the folks of Bucklesburg protest their innocence and swear they’ve never even thought such a thing. Of course you don’t listen and have people executed publically anyway. Wives, children, doesn’t matter, the point is to become hated. + +When you feel you’ve done enough damage you call for the Eyes to pull out of the town. + +The next phase of your plan is to have someone disseminate subversive ideas in Bucklesberg. You have an Eye sneak back in and start by writing graffiti against the Empire on walls and placing simple pamphlets encouraging people to join Cyrus. You have to wait a couple of weeks before this starts bearing any fruit, but eventually one of the Eyes reports that the town is starting to show signs of rebelliousness. + +Meanwhile caravans are still being attacked and you get a message from the Emperor saying that he expected you to have settled this problem a lot quicker as he really wants to get on with attacking the Felkan Kingdom. You begin to get a little nervous. + +A couple more weeks pass and nothing major has happened. You had hoped that Cyrus or perhaps one of his followers had gotten the rumors about the town of Bucklesberg becoming unfriendly towards the Empire, but Warrick tells you that he hasn’t seen any sign of Cyrus or his group anywhere near the town. They’re still keeping to the wilderness and making their lightning raids on caravans. As for Bucklesberg itself, there have been a few meetings but not much else. + +Your plan is failing to produce results and you get another message from the Emperor which is noticeably more hostile in tone. All it says is you better do something about Cyrus by the end of the week or you are to report back to him immediately. Feeling the pressure you can’t wait out this plan any longer, you’re going to have to attempt to catch him in the act of attacking one of the caravans. Your only advantage is nobody has been defending them for several weeks so Cyrus may have been lulled into a false sense of security. + +You and the Eyes travel towards where the supply caravan is and maintain a respectable distance from it and keep out of sight. You travel along side it for miles and there are a couple of Eyes who start wondering if Cyrus is even going to attack it. You know he will though and of course you turn out to be right. + +The caravan guard hold their own against the rebel bandits, but as soon as Cyrus decloaks he begins making short work of them. It is at this point Sightmaster Davison orders the Eyes to attack. As the skirmish between the Eyes and Cyrus unfolds, you begin to concentrate. You visualize water and then that water slowly solidifying into ice. The temperature around you begins to get very cold and soon so does the entire area. + +It is at this point Cyrus notices you in the distance and realizes that he is outclassed this time. He panics like a true coward and calls for a retreat, but its too late, you utter the incantation and cover the surrounding area in ice. The caravan, the guards, the rebels and the Eyes are all covered in frost that causes most of them to be frozen on the spot. + +You run over to the site and see several of the still living shivering profusely and moaning from the pain of frost burn. A few of the hardy have managed to endure the effects of the spell, though they are busily trying to free their feet from ice before frostbite sets in. Others lie dead and frozen, Cyrus is not among them though and you catch sight of him slowly attempting to get away and heading towards a forest. His attempts to speed himself up make him only moderately faster due to the frost covering his body. + +You begin to concentrate in the direction Cyrus was heading. Instead of visualizing water, you now visualize fire and much like the small ice storm you created, you now create one of flame. While you’re casting the spell however, Cyrus manages to turn invisible and you don’t see what direction he fled in before your firestorm hits the area. + +The forest that Cyrus was headed towards is suddenly set ablaze along with the fielded area near it. However Cyrus must’ve escaped because if he had been caught in the firestorm he would’ve instantly decloaked. + +You begin to swear and curse of how you nearly had him while you’re surveying the carnage you caused to your own people. Sightmaster Davison is fully encased in ice, Warrick is only just managing to free himself from his own icy restraints. You were in such a hurry to capture Cyrus that you didn’t think to at least hold Warrick back so he might be able to track Cyrus in case he managed to get away again. That opportunity has been lost now. You and the remaining Eyes head back to the closest settlement which is Bucklesberg where you try to figure out what your next move is going to be. + +Its most likely because you’re tired as well as concerned with having to possibly face the Emperor that you don’t appreciate the aura of hostility in Bucklesberg. + +You and the Eyes are suddenly pelted with several rocks. Peasants aren’t usually known for their combat abilities, but forming angry mobs and throwing rocks is certainly something they’re good at. + +Not that you don’t put up a fight and massacre several of the peasants, but the fact is they’re in a nearly fanatical state and throw themselves upon you like suicidal lemmings thanks to your own actions that made them that way in the first place. Several of them are actually shouting that the shadows will rise again and that Cyrus will lead them. + +Your fate is ultimately an ignoble one of being beaten to death in the streets, drawn and quartered and finally your head stuck on a pole along with the remaining Eyes as a symbol of renewed defiance against the Empire. + +Later Bucklesberg is razed to the ground and all within are purged for treason. The Emperor doesn’t morn your loss, but rather is angry with himself for wasting his time on someone who he comes to believe was an idiot.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Maybe its because you feel slightly sorry for Jacob or maybe its because you do see Cyrus as a potential liability if left unchecked and his traitorous ways are an insult to the name Eternal, but whatever the reason you decide to help Jacob. + +“I believe I shall help Jacob in this matter. I started out crushing shadows and rebels, I might as well finish the job.” You say the Emperor. +“Very well, but I trust you won’t take as long as Jacob has. Remember I need you for important tasks for the war!” + +You and Jacob both leave the Emperor’s presence. As soon as you’re out the door, Jacob addresses you. + +“I thank you for your assistance.” +“I haven’t done anything yet.” +“I’m not talking about the situation with the shadow, I mean intervening before the Emperor found a reason to have me executed.” +“Oh I doubt if that would’ve happened.” +“I don’t know. Lately I can’t seem to do anything right by him, I really try to serve to the best of my abilities. I always have.” +“I know you do.” + +Jacob and you don’t speak too much too each other normally, but your relationship has always been a cordial one. + +“I guess I should be glad the Emperor is so fond of you, it might be the only thing that’s keeping me alive. You are the Eternal that wasn’t a failure of course and for that I am very thankful.” + +Because you were directly trained by Mistress you sometimes forget that Jacob (or Mr. Mol as you once knew him) was the one that was primarily in charge of your development at least in a behind the scenes way. You’ve never really thought about your other classmates since you always had more pressing matters, but now you’re a little curious. + +“Just how many of my other classmates survived?” +“Not many. Besides you? Eight and three of them are already dead and one of those became a traitorous shadow.” +“And another one is the last shadow still giving the Empire grief.” You say. +“Yes. (Sigh) I had such high hopes for Cyrus, he showed so much potential. Damned shadow indoctrination. Anyway that just leaves four who I assure you are not losers or failures and are in fact very accomplished soldiers of the Empire. They finished out their training with Captain Gruz, who I’m sure you’re familiar with.” +“Yes, I am.” You say somewhat wishing that you could’ve been so lucky. +“I still keep apprised of their activity since they are all still technically under my watch. I’m just glad the Emperor didn’t take the project out of my hands and proceed with Marik’s crazed ideas.” +“Could you tell me a little more about them?” +“Certainly!” Jacob remarks perking up a bit. He’s genuinely glad someone is showing an interest. + +He tells you that Kane has been instrumental in taming the Rask frontier. Says that he’s even developing a bit of a reputation of his own given his merciless slaughter of the barbarian and ogre tribes up there. He’s being considered for a fort commander position. + +Brenda and Roldan have been doing similar things in the Nalin province with the kobolds and usksha desert raiders that sometimes plague the area. Either one could also become a fort commander as well, though he believes Brenda might be the better candidate as he believes Roldan can go on to greater things. He goes on to say that the both of them have become unusually close though and Roldan has even requested that they be allowed to marry! Jacob sees nothing particularly unreasonable about this request and is considering allowing it. + +“You’ll actually be working with the last one, Warrick. I assigned him to the Eyes and so far he’s been the closest to catching Cyrus. Excellent tracker. I nearly considered Warrick to become an infiltrator for the shadows initially, but it’s a good thing I didn’t considering how things worked out with Cyrus.” + +This is all somewhat fascinating to you as you do remember all of them, but mainly as your opponents in the fighting arena when Mistress was sending the entire class to try to kill you on regular basis. In fact Jacob realizes this and suddenly asks you if it’ll be a problem working with Warrick. + +“No, why would it?” +“Well I know that due to Mistress’ training you had a less friendly relationship with your classmates than everyone else.” +“It’s all in the past, for me it is at least. I survived and grew stronger from the experience. And it certainly wasn’t his fault. He was just doing what he was told. Everyone was. Besides, might be interesting working with someone from the old class on more cooperative terms this time.” +“Good. I’m glad to hear you say that.” Jacob says with a smile. + +Eventually you reach Jacob’s office where you see not one but three desks piled in paperwork. Jacob grumbles about how his underlings were supposed to there to take care of some of it today, but as usual he’ll probably have to do it all himself. After rummaging through a stack, he pulls out a few pieces of parchment and some scrolls and then says you’re taking a carriage ride to an Eye staging ground near Bucklesburg in the Arat province. Jacob says he’ll explain more about the situation along the way (as well as doing some of his paperwork. + +A carriage ride later, you’re all caught up on the area as well as the specifics of Cyrus’ most recent attacks. When you arrive in Bucklesberg you’re met by who you presume are Eyes and one face that while a little older now you recognize as Warrick. He stares at you at a bit and obviously recognizes you as well, but says nothing since it isn’t his time to speak. + +“Eyes, you may have heard of this man you see before you. He is the main reason why we managed to stop this potential full scale rebellion and keep it to a few crazed traitors that are desperately trying to hang on to their lives a little while longer.” Jacob starts off telling all of them. A little bit of an exaggeration of course, but then only a few know about the derro involvement in the destruction of shadows, and most of them are currently the same rotting bodies in Gloom. Your involvement on the other hand is infamous. + +“Now I leave you to it.” Jacob says and leaves. + +Since you are already up to speed on everything due to Jacob’s briefing, you basically tell the Eyes that how they’re planning to catch Cyrus is all wrong and how they need to do things differently. + +“Waiting around for Cyrus to attack patrols and caravans and then attempting to stop him in the act isn’t working because Cyrus is quicker and a better warrior than all of you. You know how I know this? Because you haven’t killed him yet. Even if he hasn’t managed to recruit his lackies into following that silly religion of his, he’s obviously trained them into an efficient hardened fighting force. Taking rebel captives and torturing them for information isn’t working because Cyrus is smart enough to change his plans completely when he knows his people have been captured. Besides, I guarantee you could catch and kill all of his people and he’d just disappear for a few years and pop up again with a new group. Which brings me to the point of why trying to search the wilderness for him isn’t working either, you don’t have the numbers to do it.” You say before turning to Warrick. “And as good as you are at tracking, Cyrus is still a shadow and he’s got the magic to mask himself. If he doesn’t want to be found, he won’t be.” + +Before you can continue, one of the Eyes is brave enough to question you. Unsurprisingly it’s the one in charge, Sightmaster Davison. + +“So what’s your solution?” Davison asks. + +At this point Warrick’s own face displays a grimace with a small shake of his head knowing that his immediate superior is going to be punished for the disruption. + +You walk up to the Eye and backhand him in the face. + +“Do not interrupt.” You say calmly. Davison nods quickly while holding on to the side of his face. Then you slap him a couple more times followed by a punch to his face. He falls to the floor and you launch into a speech. + +“MY solution is to bring down this shadow which all of you have failed to do! The Emperor is tired of your failures! We are to conquer the Felkan Kingdom soon and yet you cannot eliminate a few measly traitors! It is only because I decided to intervene that the lot of you haven’t been executed for your incompetence on this matter! While you may all be the Eyes of the Emperor, I am his terrible weapon that carries out his righteous justice. Pray that justice is never to be carried out on you.” + +Now that you’ve given a proper “inspirational” speech all you have to do is come up with a solution. The thing is one of their attempted tactics of trying to ambush Cyrus while he’s attacking caravans could still work if YOU get a hold of him. Of course you could come up with your own plan. +> Catch him in the act of one of his attacks +The next thing you say surprises all of the Eyes. + +“Now there’s a caravan coming through the area north of here in the next few days that is carrying a lot of supplies for the military. Cyrus isn’t going to be able to resist attacking it even if he thinks it’s a set up. We’re going to intercept him when he attacks it and put an end to him once and for all.” + +Several Eyes including Warrick look at each other and WANT to question why you’d scold them about a particular idea they’ve used and then you want to continue using it. Nobody dares say anything though. + +“Good. Glad everyone waited for me to continue this time. You’re probably wondering why we’re going to continue to use a strategy after I just pointed out that it has failed so many times. Well, the strategy was a simple one and sometimes simple ones are best. The advantage you have now is that I am with you and I will be able to handle Cyrus and will not let him get away. Besides, you’ve failed so many times at stopping him that he’s bound to be a little cocky now and won’t be expecting any major surprises. Even if he does, he probably also thinks he’s the chosen one of his god and invincible. Time to show Cyrus that his false god cannot protect him.” + +You finish by telling them all to get themselves prepared, as you will be moving out soon. + +“Warrick you come over here. I want to talk with you.” + +Warrick complies with your request probably with some concern to his well being. + +“I want you to stick with me during this attack. I need you alive and your chances of survival will increase if you’re with me. While I don’t think there will be any problems, it will still be good to have a second just in case we need to chase after Cyrus. Any questions, now is the time to ask.” +“I have no questions sir.” +“Very well.” + +You and the Eyes travel towards where the supply caravan is and maintain a respectable distance from it and keep out of sight. You travel along side it for miles and there are a couple of Eyes who start wondering if Cyrus is even going to attack it. You know he will though and of course you turn out to be right. + +The caravan guard hold their own against the rebel bandits, but as soon as Cyrus decloaks he begins making short work of them. It is at this point Sightmaster Davison orders the Eyes to attack. + +“Not you. As I said, you’re sticking with me.” You say to Warrick while grabbing his shoulder to hold him back. + +As the skirmish between the Eyes and Cyrus unfolds, you begin to concentrate. You visualize water and then that water slowly solidifying into ice. The temperature around you begins to get very cold and soon so does the entire area. + +It is at this point Cyrus notices you in the distance and realizes that he is outclassed this time. He panics like a true coward and calls for a retreat, but its too late, you utter the incantation and cover the surrounding area in ice. The caravan, the guards, the rebels and the Eyes are all covered in frost that causes most of them to be frozen on the spot. + +“Now we get our traitor.” You say to Warrick and the pair of you run over to the caravan battle site. + +You see several of the still living shivering profusely and moaning from the pain of frost burn. A few of the hardy have managed to endure the effects of the spell, though they are busily trying to free their feet from ice before frostbite sets in. Others lie dead and frozen, Cyrus is not among them though and Warrick catches sight of him slowly attempting to get away and heading towards a forest. His attempts to speed himself up make him only moderately faster due to the frost covering his body. + +Wasting no time, Warrick grabs his bow and fires several arrows at Cyrus, a couple hit their mark. Cyrus stumbles and staggers, but doesn’t fall. He instead manages to turn invisible. + +“Shit! But he’s wounded, I can track him if we hurry!” Warrick exclaims, but once again you stop him from proceeding. +“You’ve proven your worth Warrick, but your tracking skills won’t be necessary today.” You say and begin to concentrate in the direction Cyrus was heading. Instead of visualizing water, you now visualize fire and much like the small ice storm you created, you now create one of flame. + +The forest that Cyrus was limping towards is suddenly set ablaze along with the fielded area near it. A burning figure once again decloaks and you hear the screams all the way from the caravan site which is starting to thaw due to the proximity of the heat. + +Desperately Cyrus tries to make his way out of the inferno and back towards the caravan site, you calmly walk to him with Warrick following. By the time you reach him, Cyrus is crawling towards you half frozen, half burned, and death closely following him. + +“You see what this path has brought you traitor. No so called freedom, no glory for your god, not even a heroic death. You’re an embarrassment to the name Eternal and you will not be remembered save as an example of what happens to all that would oppose the Emperor.” + +Cyrus struggles to look up at you and it’s probably the first time you’ve been this close to each other since Mistress’ class. His face is nearly unrecognizable due to the severe burns. He attempts to speak, but only the utterance of distorted grunts from a scorched throat occurs. Doesn’t matter, he has nothing of value to say. Traitors never do. + +You kneel down and with your dagger you end his life for good. + +“What next?” Warrick suddenly asks. +“I report the death of this traitor to Jacob and I return to my place by the Emperor’s side where I wait for his further orders. As for you, I suggest you help what’s left of your group. I believe I saw your Sightmaster encased in ice, meaning he will no longer be able to carry out his duty. I can’t think of a more worthy replacement than you so I will make mention of it to Jacob.” + +Warrick is surprised by your words. He looks back at the caravan site, which is still a mess from your previous ice spell, he then looks ahead and watches the flames consume the nearby forest. + +“Better to kill a thousand innocent men than to let one traitor sew chaos. Better to lay waste to paradise than to let it continue to house enemies of the Empire.” You say, though Warrick certainly understands even if he has never truly been in such a situation until now where it was necessary. + +Jacob’s response when you meet him again is a little less understanding when he finds out how you handled things… + +“Of course its good that Cyrus is dead, but… was it absolutely necessary to burn down an entire forest and sacrifice nearly an entire platoon of Eyes along with the entire compliment of caravan guards?” Jacob asks. +“I saw it as the best way to be sure to put an end to Cyrus. And I would think you of all people would be happy for the matter to be handled given how worried you were about it before. The Emperor will also be happy and isn’t that what’s most important, that he can proceed with his war on the Felkans without further delay?” + +Jacob pauses before addressing your statement. + +“Yes and I really wish we weren’t doing that.” +“Doing what?” +“Going to war with the Felkan Kingdom.” +“You don’t believe the Empire should crush its enemies?” you ask. +“I don’t believe we should waste the resources on a pointless war on a powerful nation that has never shown any signs of aggression.” +“Just because they don’t openly display it doesn’t mean they aren’t planning something.” You say. +“Yes, I’ve heard the speech about the duplicitous gnome masters several times. You can’t know how glad I was when I first found out that you managed to convince the Emperor to even postpone the war to take care of the shadows first. Can you imagine what might’ve happened had you not done that? I…look you know I serve the Empire and my loyalty will never be in question to it, but on this point I really don’t think this war is a good idea in the long run. Do you not believe that it wouldn’t be better if we conserved our resources and pursued other ways to enrich the Empire that don’t involve war? You convinced the Emperor once to postpone a potentially damaging war, could you not sway his thoughts on this matter any further?” +“Jacob, it is the Emperor’s will that the Felkan Kingdom must be destroyed. The plan has already been set in motion. No words of mine would ever convince him otherwise, even if I wanted to. Which I don’t because as I see it, the gnomes and by extension the Felkan Kingdom must pay for their continued insults towards the Emperor. And that insult is their mere existence. Their punishment will be death.” + +Jacob realizes that he will have no luck in attempting to incorporate you into his desire to convince the Emperor to not go to war, so he drops the issue. + +“I hope so for the sake of the Empire. Well, I suppose my next task will be to find a few more recruits to fill in the gaps for the latest fallen Eyes. Warrick will certainly make a good Sightmaster. Glad to hear that the pair of you worked so well together and he survived at least. I…nevermind.” + +Jacob once again is starting act like he wants to address something more, but stops himself again, you urge him to continue. +“What is it Jacob?” +“Nothing. Just... I mean your actions in Delerg and also what you just recently did to put down one traitor…well I’m just saying that it’s good that you are so dedicated. Remember that Empire must survive no matter what the cost.” +“Of course. You don’t need to remind me of such a thing.” + +“No. Of course I don’t.” Jacob says and bids you goodbye. + +You don’t understand Jacob’s odd behavior, especially since it seemed a little contradictory. One moment he was nearly scolding you for your methods, the next he was praising you for them. When you tell the Emperor about you conversation with Jacob he doesn’t seem to be concerned, he’s too excited about finally going to war with the Felkans. + +“Jacob is like an old woman sometimes. He worries too much, that’s what he does. The only thing we need to worry about is how to make sure none of those little gnome bastards escape this time! Ha ha!” the Emperor says. +“They won’t.” you reply with certainty. +> Years pass... +Year 23 + +With another town taken, you put your sword through the chest of a Felkan soldier begging for his life, one of many from your experience. The average Felkan soldier to you does not seem to match up to Empire ones in any capacity. They are certainly not better in the ways of martial combat or endurance. The only real advantage you can see them having is their gunpowder weaponry and better proficiency with it and even that isn’t much of an advantage anymore given that the Emperor’s derro friend has been evening up the odds in that way. + +You walk around surveying the carnage of burning buildings and Empire soldiers busily searching homes to make sure there aren’t any more of the enemy hiding out. A small explosion grabs your attention and you see a single Empire soldier stagger out of a home with one of his arms blown off. He stumbles for a bit and then collapses before others rush to his aid. + +Traps have probably done more damage to the battalion you were assigned to rather than actual combat. This was an easy battle. In fact your whole time being assigned to Major Krozer’s battalion has been a bit of a breeze for you. The southwestern front of the Felkan Kingdom isn’t as heavily defended or at least from your experience it isn’t defended well. Perhaps all of the better Felkan soldiers are on the other fronts. + +You sort of wish the Emperor had seen fit to have you aid Captain Roldan whose battalion has been seeing a lot of major fighting. However, the Emperor firmly stated that your skills would be of better use here and so you shall carry out your duty. Your main goal is to keep the Felkans from attempting to pull any sort of major flanking maneuver and keeping them boxed in. While conquest isn’t the main goal, it is a secondary objective to make a slow push northward towards the Felkan heartland though you imagine you’ll soon face Felkan reinforcements from the west before then. That is if they don’t still have their hands full with the gnoll tribes that are currently assaulting them their eastern front. + +“Another victory for the Empire, eh Mr. Sunshine?” you hear a voice from behind say. It’s Major Krozer. She’s a competent leader and has obviously earned her position, but much like your experience with Gruz, she seems a little “relaxed” on rules of protocol at times such as her periodic insistence on being too playful with you. + +“I’ve told you before to stop calling me by that ridiculous name.” you snap. +“Hey, I didn’t invent it. That’s what the troops call you behind your back due to your…unique personality.” + +You begin to get angry. + +“Are you telling me I don’t have the respect of the troops and they use this name to mock me?!” +“No! They’re scared shitless of you, hence why they don’t call it to your face. The sunshine reference is due to the fact that you’re so damn grim and merciless all the time. Its supposed to be ironic I guess. If you’d like, I could tell them to start calling you Mr. Harbinger of Destruction instead. Pretty sure the Felkans already call you that.” Major Krozer replies. +“I’m not interested in having any sort of witty nickname and if anyone continues to refer to me other than by my name or my rank, I’ll have them flogged for their impertinence and that’s just for the first offence.” +“Hm, well I guess I better relay that to the troops. Fun and humor are cancelled until further notice.” +“Fun? We’re at war major! This is not a time to be having fun! It is not a time for jokes! It is a time to be crushing our enemies and ensuring their extinction!” + +“And you’re claiming that YOU don’t find those two bloody past times fun for you? Let’s talk seriously for a moment, I’ve seen you in battle and you are truly a sight to behold. It’s almost like watching a work of art with how you move from enemy to enemy slaying all those that oppose you. And that’s just close combat, I’m not even referring to when you’re throwing flaming hunks of rocks at the enemy and then following it up with a few lightning bolts. My point is, I’ve seen you lay waste to our opponents and I believe it’s more than just a job to you. Yes, you’re serving the Empire and the Emperor, but you’re having fun doing it. This war is FUN for you and that good, but some of us need to find fun in perhaps less extreme ways and sometimes that might involve the cheap joke here and there. Surely that doesn’t warrant a death sentence? I mean all of our lives could be snuffed out anytime, what’s the harm in a little humor as long as everyone is still doing their job?” + +The major’s words hit a mark with you. You can’t deny that you are having what might be considered “fun” when you’re in battle. You enjoy it because its what you were meant to do. You also think back to what the Emperor said to you one time “Sometimes, you’re too tightly wound son.” This might be one of those times. + +“Alright, alright, you’ve made your point. Fine nobody will be flogged, but I better not hear the name Mr. Sunshine or any other cute nickname within earshot.” +“Of course sir.” +“Good. So…the troops say my battle techniques look like a work of art?” +“No. I believe they just see you as a whirlwind of violence that they need to stay out of the way lest they get caught in the path. I’m the one who believes your battle techniques look like a work of art, but then I’m a daughter of the army, so I don’t know much about real art. I just know what I like.” The major says with a smile. +“Oh. Uh, well thanks.” You answer and not feeling quite sure of what else to say. + +With the debate about acceptable protocol out of the way Major Krozer goes on to tell you that despite significant damage most of the town’s population is still alive. While you’re usually known for razing entire settlements to the ground, the major is slightly less bloodthirsty than you are. + +“While I know you like to eliminate enemies of the Empire and stomp them into a red spot on the ground. I’d suggest that we not do that this time and use this town as a stopping spot for our supplies and reinforcements.” +“Hmm. Perhaps, but we’ll have to leave a detachment here to oversee this place.” +“Well how big is that going to have to be? Not that big I should think since I really don’t believe the population is going to give us any more trouble. I’ve seen most of them and they look thoroughly defeated.” +“True, but I believe an example should still be made just to get the point across of who is in charge. I’d say about twenty peasants should do it. A mixture of different ages and genders too just to show them that we’re being serious.” +“I’d ask you if that is really necessary, but I know what your answer is going to be. Very well, I’ll get some of our soldiers on it. I sometimes have concerns that we’ll go too far and their hate will override their fear and cause a revolt.” +“And that’s why I prefer to raze entire settlements. Nobody can revolt when they’re all dead.” +“But then what’s left to rule?” Krozer asks before taking her leave. + +She has a point, but it isn’t one you’ve concerned yourself with during this war mainly because the Emperor has made it quite clear to you that he’s actually more interested in destroying the Felkan Kingdom rather than conquering it. This is more of a war of annihilation rather than one of subjugation. + +Just as you’re about to oversee the execution of peasants, a messenger arrives. + +“For your eyes only sir. Important message from the Emperor.” The messenger says and hands you a sealed scroll. + +You take the scroll and quickly open it. It has been too long since you’ve last heard anything directly from the Emperor. Upon reading it, it states that you are to report directly to the location where Marik has been making all of the new weapons. Doesn’t state why, just says you need to be there. You’ve never been to Marik’s factory before, actually you’ve never even met Marik before despite having heard of him several times. Guess this will be your introduction. + +It is a little odd to be taken out of the fighting like this and also not explaining why, but the Emperor must have his reasons. You immediately tell the major. + +“You’re leaving? Why?” she asks. +“Can’t reveal why, but I assure you that it is on the Emperor’s orders.” You reply. +“Oh. Well I suppose you have to go then. This’ll be a huge blow to the might of our forces with you gone.” +“You shouldn’t think such things. You’re soldiers of the Empire. You are more than a match for any enemy, let alone the Felkans. You’re also a skilled leader and tactician that has kept our losses to a minimum. You’ll do fine without me.” +“I suppose we can get by without your battle skills, but how will we ever cope without your cheerful personality around here?” she says with a serious face which then slowly turns into a smile. + +Normally this is the kind of thing that perturbs you, but maybe you’re getting used to it. + +“Well I’m sure my sunny disposition has made such a lasting impression that its now within all of your hearts so that you may experience it wherever you go.” You reply in a deadpan manner, surprising the major. +“Was that a joke you just made?” +“How the hell would I know, its not like I’ve ever made one before.” +“Well you’re on a roll now. Hopefully you will come back so we can actually experience this less self-controlled version of yourself.” +“Anything’s possible I suppose.” You say and take your leave. + +Your only major decision now is whether or not to take the long way around back within all the pacified territory you’ve been pushing through during your time with Krozer’s battalion or risk taking a short cut north through disputed territory that you know is still being battled over by both sides. +> Take the long way around +While it’s not usually like you to play it too safe and you aren’t one to avoid conflict, your present duty is to reach your destination in a timely manner. A short cut might seem quicker, but given that you know how hot the conflict is going on right now, its likely that you might very well get caught in the middle of it thus delaying your orders. + +Your trip is predictably uneventful save for running into a few small regiments of reinforcements that you redirect towards the town you just conquered. When you make it back to Arat you only make short stops in villages to water your horse. Eventually you see the factory within sight rather than just the permanent black cloud that hoovers over it. The factory has somewhat been a source of concern by the local population as the pollution from the place has contaminated the nearby rivers as well as the land surrounding it. However it has provided a new source of employment though its not the safest place to work, but in this world what is safe? + +When you get there you are met by a small contingent of Eyes standing outside the factory’s gates, which are locked up. + +“I don’t know if I should be happy or worried that the Emperor has sent his terrible weapon of righteous justice.” One of the Eyes says. The Eye doesn’t look familiar to you, but he obviously was with you during the capture of Cyrus. Good to know your words are remembered at least. + +“What’s going on?” +“Apparently a few days ago a giant green monster punched through one of the doors to the basement of the factory and killed several workers and guards before we got here. Someone claimed it was a troll. If it was a troll I can only imagine it dug itself up from the underground since that’s where they live right?” +“So I’ve heard, but what are you doing standing out here?” +“Sightmaster Ansolom’s orders. The troll hasn’t left the factory for whatever reason and he wants to make sure its at least contained while he and some others try to kill the thing. Though they’ve been in there since yesterday, I fear the worst.” +“Ansolom? What happened to Warrick?” +“Sightmaster Warrick is stationed elsewhere with another group of Eyes. I don’t know where. So are you going in?” +“Of course.” +“You…uh don’t need us to come in with you do you?” the Eye asks while unlocking the gate. +“No. Continue your little guard duty, I believe you would only get in my way anyway.” You say and open up the gate. + +No sooner have you entered when the Eyes close the gate and lock it back up. You shake your head and cautiously walk through the factory’s outer yard. You see all manner of strange machines along with hundreds of boxes of various weapons large and small set for shipping, but the place is dead silent. You’re not even finding any dead bodies; you’re guessing they must be inside the factory itself and probably the troll as well. + +You’re wondering where Marik is in all this. From what you know he and a small group of derro work deep underneath this factory unknown to most, even the regular workers. There is supposed to be a battle mage that acts as the factory supervisor too. On top of everything else now you have to look for a sightmaster who is supposed to be here taking care of this problem and you still don’t understand why you were dragged off the frontline just to handle a troll, or what you still assume is a troll. + +When you enter the factory itself, that’s when you see all the damage to the place. It’s a mess with broken equipment and dead bodies everywhere. While you’ve heard the stories about how terrible trolls are you nearly have a hard time believing it was just one of them that caused all this damage. + +Besides looking like a tomb the factory is about as silent as one as well. You would’ve thought the troll would at least be feasting on its kills or at least walking about the factory, but you’ve heard nothing. This of course puts you more on guard since now you’re wondering if the thing is aware of your presence and silently stalking you. + +You climb up to one of the upper walkways to get a better view. You still can’t see the creature from your position, but apparently it was up here at some point since you’re finding the odd limb along the walkway. The supervisor’s office is up here so you decide to head towards it hoping that maybe you’ll find some answers. + +As you get closer you see that a battle must’ve taken place near there because you see a body just outside the doorway of the office. There are a couple other bloody bodies lying near it as well. Upon closer inspection the body just outside the doorway is headless but wearing a robe. This was probably the battle mage supervisor. The other bodies are a little fresher but still in mauled condition. They wear the uniform of an Eye, but you suddenly have more pressing concerns when not one, but two trolls appear on the far end of the walkways. + +They look every bit as vicious as you’ve heard. Big, green, long gangly limbs and seem to lope in a jerky manner towards you snarling and howling the whole time. You have no idea how such large creatures were able to hide from you, but they’ve made their presence known now and you’re trapped with no easy retreat. + +They’re quick, but you manage to unleash a single bolt of flame at one of the trolls, which causes it to immediately leap over the railing and take a long drop down to the floor below busily trying to beat the flames out of its hide. It is so focused on doing this that it fails to realize that it is in a factory with several explosive elements. All it takes is for the troll to crash its body into one of the small barrels of the volatile powder and the troll is blown to pieces though the force of the explosion is even enough to rock you to the floor of the walkway. You get up just in time for the second troll to smash its fist into your chest and you go flying into the office hitting the wall. You feel like you’ve been hit by a giant club and struggle to catch your breath. You scan the room and to your left you see another dead body of an Eye. This one is the sightmaster and he looks as if all his limbs have been broken. + +The troll advances and you manage to kick the door shut, which slows it down long enough to buy you some time. When it slams the door back open you cast a bolt of flame in its face. It reels back bellowing with pain and clutching its eyes, but unlike his friend he isn’t running away. + +Ignoring the pain, you stand back up and with sword in hand you slash the troll across one of its knees causing it to stumble. It manages to swipe its claws across your stomach, but fortunately you dodge most of attack and only suffer ripped armor and a surface wound. The troll tries to continue its success, but even as quick as it is, you are able to get the advantage and bring your blade across its think neck. + +Unfortunately you fail to sever the troll’s head completely and your sword gets stuck half way through it. Black blood is spraying everywhere and the troll grabs your sword arm digging its claws into the skin and muscle. It will very likely rip it off if you don’t do something immediately. +> Pull your dagger and stab it in the arm +You pull out your dagger and begin repeatedly stabbing the troll in the arm to the point where you nearly sever it. Its grip loosens as it hisses in pain. You nearly get your head punched in by the troll’s other fist, but you fall backwards on the walkway in time for it to miss. The troll fails to follow up with another attack since it attempts to remove the sword from its neck presumably to regenerate properly. + +Taking advantage of this breather you cast a lightning blast right at the sword, which acts as a great conductor to fry the troll inside and out. You have to back up just so the troll’s flailing body doesn’t hit you. Eventually when the troll’s body is burned to a crisp and you’re fairly certain you’ve fried its vital organs enough that it can’t possibly regenerate you stop and the troll crashes to the floor still smoking and twitching. Then you retrieve your sword and finish decapitating the troll just to be sure. + +You take a small rest after your battle, though you keep alert for another troll. Thankfully no more show up, but there’s still the question about Marik and where the hell the trolls came from in the first place. Both potential answers are going to lie in the basement you imagine so that’s where you continue your exploration. + +The factory basement is in just about as much disarray as the ground floor and there are a few dead bodies, but no trolls or derro for that matter. You search until you come across a large metal door which has been partially ripped off its hinges, a long set of stairs go down. It would appear there is an even deeper part of the factory. + +You go down the stairway, which seems almost like forever and when you finally get to the bottom, you hear a lot of shouting in an unfamiliar language. You walk down a corridor and find a large open area with presumably more factory equipment, but some of it looks very strange. You see machines, which are emanating a lightning arc similar to the spell you can cast or what nature does during a storm. Other things look like giant tubes with something inside, though from this distance you can’t tell what. + +Among the machinery you also see short heavily armored figures busily trying to clean up the area. You can’t even see their faces, but you’re guessing these are the infamous derro. + +“You there! Who are you surfacer? Are you one of the factory workers?” a deep voice suddenly calls to you from the right. You look and see a very pale figure wearing white coat covered in blood and a bunch of other things you can’t identify. This bald wild-eyed fellow is about the same size as the armored figure so you come to one conclusion. + +“The Emperor sent me. Are you Marik?” +“I am Marik…you must be the one he refers to as his son. But why would the Emperor send you here?” +“I was only given orders to come here, but within such time I faced two trolls that apparently slaughtered not only many factory workers, but its supervisor AND several of the Emperor’s Eyes! I had thought they might’ve killed you as well, but since that is not the case, I am hoping that you can shed some light on the situation.” +“Shit, I had a feeling one of them escaped up there, but not two. And I assumed that the fucking poncy wizard would at least be able to handle it. Figures that fop wouldn’t have the stones when faced with such a beast, let alone two of them.” +“Escaped? Excuse me, but what the hell were trolls doing here in the first place? And why did you not send men to help kill the beasts?” +“If you have not noticed by the mess already, but my men and I have been dealing with trolls down here as well.” +“It looks as if you were not fighting them when I arrived and you still have not answered why there were trolls down here in the first place?” +“I know you’re held in high regard by the Emperor and obviously your skills are impressive if a scrawny thing like you can handle two adult trolls, but you will cease questioning me in such a manner now surfacer!” +“I will question your competence if you are the reason for this disaster! These trolls have just caused a stop in production which is vital to the Emperor’s war on the Felkan Kingdom!” + +Marik’s expression begins to show more aggression though he’s smiling at the same time. He almost looks as if he’s going to break into laughter. + +“Surfacer, I have known the Emperor much longer than YOU have even been alive! Maybe you’re unfamiliar with the complexities of our relationship, so I will let your words pass as ones of a concerned child for his parent’s wishes. But NEVER question my competence ever again! I am the very reason the Emperor is able to pursue a successful war on the Felkans in the first place! My work here is to find even better ways to crush his enemies! The trolls? Part of my experiments as new weapons for the war! Sometimes experiments fail! Science is not always exact! Do you think YOU were the first Eternal?” +“Yes, I’m well aware I was among the first successful ones, but that still doesn’t excuse why you sent no men to at least scout the factory if you believed trolls had escaped.” +“The Emperor should’ve told you more about our people then. We derro do not step foot on the surface if we can help it. My people may have an alliance with the Emperor, but that alliance does not extend to such madness.” +“I was lead to believe madness was a common derro trait.” +“It is, but even then there are limits! Indeed I may very well be among the most mad and even I will not soil myself by setting foot on your surface world.” +“But the factory is enclosed, you’d still be shielded from the sun if that is death to your kind.” + +Marik begins laughing in a tone that is much different from his deep voice. It’s an annoying ear piercing laugh. + +“Your ignorance of the derro is embarrassing as is usual for a surfacer. I suggest you learn more in your pitifully short lifespan. Ask your Emperor for guidance, perhaps he will have the patience to tell you more about us, I do not. I have work to do for the Emperor.” Marik says and turns away from you. His fellow derro have been standing by watching the pair of you the entire time as if ready to act if violence should break out. + +Violence may still occur if Marik continues to act dismissively towards you. + +“Do not walk away from me derro! You still have much to answer for! What exactly is it that you are doing here? What is so important that you so carelessly endanger the war effort? You will give me answers of substance that I can give to the Emperor!” + +Your words cause Marik to stop. + +“Your loyalty to the Emperor is admirable. Tell me though, what gives you cause to believe that you’d make it out of here to able to report to him?” +“Trust me derro, I may indeed not be able to take all of you, but YOU I would make an example of.” + +Marik once again makes that annoying laugh again. + +“Your knowledge of the derro continues to lack. If you truly knew anything, you’d know that death is not something the derro fear.” +“And now it is you who do not listen. I said nothing of killing you, I said make an example of. After I beat you within an inch of your life, I’d drag your bloody body to the surface which you obviously loathe so much. I thank you for exposing your flaws within our short meeting.” + +Marik turns to face you once again. He studies you as if to assess if you’re being serious. He realizes you are. + +“Well, I’ll be. A surfacer nearly as mad as a derro, for it is the only explanation for your threats that you speak out of your ass and ignorance. Heh. Very well then perhaps we do have something in common. Come with me then Eternal, I will satisfy your questions and then you can go tell the Emperor that we’re not just playing with our dicks down here.” + +Marik waves away the other derro and tells them to get back to work while he goes on to explain what’s going on down here. + +He tells you that while he has provided the Emperor with the gift of gunpowder weapons to combat the Felkans he states that he is bored with creating such things. He wants to move on to other, more interesting things. You don’t exactly understand everything he’s saying, but apparently this includes altering trolls in such a way to use them as living weapons. + +Obviously success has eluded him, but Marik claims it will work eventually he just needs more time. He then goes on to say that the schematics of the weapons he’s already made should be somewhat known to surfacers now and that perhaps those weapons could be built in another factory run purely by surfacers. Allowing him of course to work more unencumbered by the possibility of his experiments causing problems in the future. + +“I will report this to the Emperor and allow him to decide, but personally I can’t say as this is a good use of time and resources. Better to perfect the weapons you’ve already created than to play around with uncertain ones.” +“Funny you should say that Eternal, because one could say the same of your kind.” +“There is a difference. Obviously when I was born I was still not a mindless untrainable animal like a troll.” +“No, but obviously an effort was made to make you better than the average human and then some. No effort was spared in perfecting you and your kind until some of you actually survived the entire process.” + +Marik’s words about the creation of the Eternals peaks your interest. + +“Tell me Marik, how much were you involved in the creation of the Eternals?” +“Sadly very little. Most of my ideas for the…project were considered a bit too extreme, then that fool Jacob somehow managed to gain complete control of the project. The advantage of being a surfacer I suppose. If I had control, you and your fellow classmates would’ve been even better. In fact you wouldn’t have had to endure much training at all, you would’ve instantly been BORN with natural skill and talent. (Sigh) If only the Emperor saw the wisdom in continuing the project with me at the helm…I could truly create some living weapons.” +“What are you talking about exactly?” +“For someone so close to the Emperor, I see he keeps you out of the loop on things and if he is then there must be a reason for it. I have probably said too much…I suggest if you want more answers then speak with him. Go now, I have work to do. Much work to do.” + +When Marik says this he begins making nervous twitches and see him eye a nearby metal door, which makes you suspicious. +> Confront Marik +Whatever Marik is hiding behind that door has peaked your interest. For all you know he’s hiding something that could possibly threaten the Empire. You make your way towards the door and Marik comes just shy of physically stopping you. + +“Hey, where are you going?” he asks. +“I wanna see what’s behind that door now step aside Marik.” +“You can’t! There’s dangerous material in there. Chemicals and stuff like that. Safe for us derro, but completely toxic to a human like you.” +“Well as you pointed out not a few minutes ago, I’m better than the average human, now stand aside.” +“You can’t!” Marik shrieks and begins giggling. +“Marik, last chance to get outta my way…” + +Marik suddenly stops his annoying giggling and begins snorting and hyperventilating while giving you a hostile stare. It would almost be amusing if you could see the humorous side of it. + +“Alright fine! But you’re going to spoil the surprise!” he shrieks and gets out of your way. + +You step to the metal door and open it up to a platformed level, which overlooks a huge room. It’s nearly the size of a small hamlet you think. There are several ladders that descend down to the lower level which contain translucent containers all hooked up with tubing and connected with each other and large strange machines. Even from this distance you can make out small figures floating in liquid within the containers. + +You’re about to ask Marik what all this is when suddenly you hear him scream… + +“SURPRISE!” + +And then the back of your head is blown off by Marik’s personal pistol. Your lifeless body slumps to the floor soon after part of your brains do. + +Marik and his fellow derro cover up your death by explaining to the Emperor that the escaped trolls killed you. The Emperor temporarily mourns your death, but ultimately decides that if something like a troll killed you, then perhaps you weren’t worthy of your status after all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You pull out your dagger and begin repeatedly stabbing the troll in the arm to the point where you nearly sever it. Its grip loosens as it hisses in pain. You nearly get your head punched in by the troll’s other fist, but you fall backwards on the walkway in time for it to miss. The troll fails to follow up with another attack since it attempts to remove the sword from its neck presumably to regenerate properly. + +Taking advantage of this breather you cast a lightning blast right at the sword, which acts as a great conductor to fry the troll inside and out. You have to back up just so the troll’s flailing body doesn’t hit you. Eventually when the troll’s body is burned to a crisp and you’re fairly certain you’ve fried its vital organs enough that it can’t possibly regenerate you stop and the troll crashes to the floor still smoking and twitching. Then you retrieve your sword and finish decapitating the troll just to be sure. + +You take a small rest after your battle, though you keep alert for another troll. Thankfully no more show up, but there’s still the question about Marik and where the hell the trolls came from in the first place. Both potential answers are going to lie in the basement you imagine so that’s where you continue your exploration. + +The factory basement is in just about as much disarray as the ground floor and there are a few dead bodies, but no trolls or derro for that matter. You search until you come across a large metal door which has been partially ripped off its hinges, a long set of stairs go down. It would appear there is an even deeper part of the factory. + +You go down the stairway, which seems almost like forever and when you finally get to the bottom, you hear a lot of shouting in an unfamiliar language. You walk down a corridor and find a large open area with presumably more factory equipment, but some of it looks very strange. You see machines, which are emanating a lightning arc similar to the spell you can cast or what nature does during a storm. Other things look like giant tubes with something inside, though from this distance you can’t tell what. + +Among the machinery you also see short heavily armored figures busily trying to clean up the area. You can’t even see their faces, but you’re guessing these are the infamous derro. + +“You there! Who are you surfacer? Are you one of the factory workers?” a deep voice suddenly calls to you from the right. You look and see a very pale figure wearing white coat covered in blood and a bunch of other things you can’t identify. This bald wild-eyed fellow is about the same size as the armored figure so you come to one conclusion. + +“The Emperor sent me. Are you Marik?” +“I am Marik…you must be the one he refers to as his son. But why would the Emperor send you here?” +“I was only given orders to come here, but within such time I faced two trolls that apparently slaughtered not only many factory workers, but its supervisor AND several of the Emperor’s Eyes! I had thought they might’ve killed you as well, but since that is not the case, I am hoping that you can shed some light on the situation.” +“Shit, I had a feeling one of them escaped up there, but not two. And I assumed that the fucking poncy wizard would at least be able to handle it. Figures that fop wouldn’t have the stones when faced with such a beast, let alone two of them.” +“Escaped? Excuse me, but what the hell were trolls doing here in the first place? And why did you not send men to help kill the beasts?” +“If you have not noticed by the mess already, but my men and I have been dealing with trolls down here as well.” +“It looks as if you were not fighting them when I arrived and you still have not answered why there were trolls down here in the first place?” +“I know you’re held in high regard by the Emperor and obviously your skills are impressive if a scrawny thing like you can handle two adult trolls, but you will cease questioning me in such a manner now surfacer!” +“I will question your competence if you are the reason for this disaster! These trolls have just caused a stop in production which is vital to the Emperor’s war on the Felkan Kingdom!” + +Marik’s expression begins to show more aggression though he’s smiling at the same time. He almost looks as if he’s going to break into laughter. + +“Surfacer, I have known the Emperor much longer than YOU have even been alive! Maybe you’re unfamiliar with the complexities of our relationship, so I will let your words pass as ones of a concerned child for his parent’s wishes. But NEVER question my competence ever again! I am the very reason the Emperor is able to pursue a successful war on the Felkans in the first place! My work here is to find even better ways to crush his enemies! The trolls? Part of my experiments as new weapons for the war! Sometimes experiments fail! Science is not always exact! Do you think YOU were the first Eternal?” +“Yes, I’m well aware I was among the first successful ones, but that still doesn’t excuse why you sent no men to at least scout the factory if you believed trolls had escaped.” +“The Emperor should’ve told you more about our people then. We derro do not step foot on the surface if we can help it. My people may have an alliance with the Emperor, but that alliance does not extend to such madness.” +“I was lead to believe madness was a common derro trait.” +“It is, but even then there are limits! Indeed I may very well be among the most mad and even I will not soil myself by setting foot on your surface world.” +“But the factory is enclosed, you’d still be shielded from the sun if that is death to your kind.” + +Marik begins laughing in a tone that is much different from his deep voice. It’s an annoying ear piercing laugh. + +“Your ignorance of the derro is embarrassing as is usual for a surfacer. I suggest you learn more in your pitifully short lifespan. Ask your Emperor for guidance, perhaps he will have the patience to tell you more about us, I do not. I have work to do for the Emperor.” Marik says and turns away from you. His fellow derro have been standing by watching the pair of you the entire time as if ready to act if violence should break out. + +Violence may still occur if Marik continues to act dismissively towards you. + +“Do not walk away from me derro! You still have much to answer for! What exactly is it that you are doing here? What is so important that you so carelessly endanger the war effort? You will give me answers of substance that I can give to the Emperor!” + +Your words cause Marik to stop. + +“Your loyalty to the Emperor is admirable. Tell me though, what gives you cause to believe that you’d make it out of here to able to report to him?” +“Trust me derro, I may indeed not be able to take all of you, but YOU I would make an example of.” + +Marik once again makes that annoying laugh again. + +“Your knowledge of the derro continues to lack. If you truly knew anything, you’d know that death is not something the derro fear.” +“And now it is you who do not listen. I said nothing of killing you, I said make an example of. After I beat you within an inch of your life, I’d drag your bloody body to the surface which you obviously loathe so much. I thank you for exposing your flaws within our short meeting.” + +Marik turns to face you once again. He studies you as if to assess if you’re being serious. He realizes you are. + +“Well, I’ll be. A surfacer nearly as mad as a derro, for it is the only explanation for your threats that you speak out of your ass and ignorance. Heh. Very well then perhaps we do have something in common. Come with me then Eternal, I will satisfy your questions and then you can go tell the Emperor that we’re not just playing with our dicks down here.” + +Marik waves away the other derro and tells them to get back to work while he goes on to explain what’s going on down here. + +He tells you that while he has provided the Emperor with the gift of gunpowder weapons to combat the Felkans he states that he is bored with creating such things. He wants to move on to other, more interesting things. You don’t exactly understand everything he’s saying, but apparently this includes altering trolls in such a way to use them as living weapons. + +Obviously success has eluded him, but Marik claims it will work eventually he just needs more time. He then goes on to say that the schematics of the weapons he’s already made should be somewhat known to surfacers now and that perhaps those weapons could be built in another factory run purely by surfacers. Allowing him of course to work more unencumbered by the possibility of his experiments causing problems in the future. + +“I will report this to the Emperor and allow him to decide, but personally I can’t say as this is a good use of time and resources. Better to perfect the weapons you’ve already created than to play around with uncertain ones.” +“Funny you should say that Eternal, because one could say the same of your kind.” +“There is a difference. Obviously when I was born I was still not a mindless untrainable animal like a troll.” +“No, but obviously an effort was made to make you better than the average human and then some. No effort was spared in perfecting you and your kind until some of you actually survived the entire process.” + +Marik’s words about the creation of the Eternals peaks your interest. + +“Tell me Marik, how much were you involved in the creation of the Eternals?” +“Sadly very little. Most of my ideas for the…project were considered a bit too extreme, then that fool Jacob somehow managed to gain complete control of the project. The advantage of being a surfacer I suppose. If I had control, you and your fellow classmates would’ve been even better. In fact you wouldn’t have had to endure much training at all, you would’ve instantly been BORN with natural skill and talent. (Sigh) If only the Emperor saw the wisdom in continuing the project with me at the helm…I could truly create some living weapons.” +“What are you talking about exactly?” +“For someone so close to the Emperor, I see he keeps you out of the loop on things and if he is then there must be a reason for it. I have probably said too much…I suggest if you want more answers then speak with him. Go now, I have work to do. Much work to do.” + +When Marik says this he begins making nervous twitches and see him eye a nearby metal door, which makes you suspicious. +> Report to the Emperor +While part of you wants to confront Marik on your suspicions that he’s not telling you everything you get the impression that you’ve pushed your luck enough with taking an aggressive stance. There are some unknown factors going on here and you’d probably be better off just reporting back to the Emperor about all this, he knows Marik and the derro better than you do. + +“I’ll leave you to it then and I shall tell the Emperor that the situation here has been dealt with along with your suggestions for a second factory.” + +Marik seemingly ignores your statement and goes back to ordering his fellow derro. You make your way to the exit and Marik suddenly calls out to you. + +“Yes on your way Eternal, back to your accursed surface. Its days are numbered you know and that will be the day that…hehehehehe…what was I…talking about? Back to work you lot!” + +On your way out you tell the Eyes to continue guarding the factory until further notice and make your journey back to the capital. + +When you get to the Emperor’s room, he’s hunched over a large map and placing small metal figures in certain locations. + +“There you are m’boy. Did you hear? We just took Fort Soot. A great victory this day, though we’ll need to shore up our own defenses there. I trust by your presence you’ve taken care of whatever problem happened at the factory and it is now up and running again.” +“I regret to tell you that the problem has only been partially solved.” +“Oh? I trust you have a good reason for this oversight.” + +You explain everything to the Emperor hoping that he isn’t mad, fortunately he isn’t or at least he isn’t mad at you. + +“Bah, damn that crazy derro and his experiments! I told him I just need the practical, not fancy super weapons! Trolls, what the hell is he thinking? You know his race was once on the losing end of a war with those beasts? Marik himself would’ve been eaten by one had I not stepped in and saved his ass. (Sigh) Okay I’ll have a levy of peasants build another factory then, I probably should have several anyway, I just didn’t want to waste time and resources on building them right now.” +“So…you’re just going to give Marik what he wants?” +“Why not? We gave Gruz what he wanted didn’t we and he’s certainly less deserving. Besides Marik’s right, he’s already provided the schematics for most of the cannons, muskets, pistols and other types of weapons. I’m fairly certain that we can have purely run human factory now. The common folk aren’t entirely dim. Marik can have his little so called secret workshop, maybe he’ll even come up with something useful.” +“I’m still concerned about Marik. He seemed like he was hiding something more than just experimenting on trolls though.” +“Of course he was. He probably has something really twisted going on behind closed doors, but for all his madness, secrets and genuine derro isolationist xenophobia, he’s loyal. He’ll do nothing that will harm the Empire especially since he has no desire to rule it. Derro pacts are for life and to break one would be as offensive to them as walking on the surface.” + +The Emperor says this with a lot of certainty though you’re still a little apprehensive, however the Emperor has had more dealings with the derro and known Marik much longer than you have so he’s more knowledgeable on this than you. + +“Very well, if you are not concerned, I shall cease my own.” +“Good, but I’m glad you’re suspicious. Being paranoid keeps your wits sharp and alert. Besides you might be partially right. While I know Marik doesn’t have any intentional desires to harm the Empire his work may unintentionally harm it as shown with this incident with his troll experiment. I will have a personal talk with him just to keep him on a tighter leash so to speak.” +“I’m still confused one thing though, why send me?” +“Because you get things done of course. What was I going to do, have Jacob send in more Eyes? You see how well that worked and given that the problem was trolls it’s a good thing I sent you in rather than lose even more of them. I knew what ever it was that was the problem, you’d be able to handle it.” +“I see, its just I thought my role in the Felkan war was more important.” +“It is, it is my son and this was still related to said war and trust me it was far more important than winning some small battle somewhere.” + +The Emperor steps forward towards you and gives you that familiar hand on your shoulder bit when he’s about to tell you something he feels you should take to heart. + +“Listen, I know you probably would like to be fighting in the thick of the war, slaying Felkans left and right and I know you’d be successful and good at it. However you are MORE than just some glorified soldier to be sent in to fight and die. Hell, I may have even told you to take a back up of Eyes had I known about the trolls with this recent incident.” +“Wait, are you trying to protect me?” +“Of course I am. Yes, I’m well aware that your life is built on danger and that you’ve never been a stranger to life and death situations, but I’d like to keep your chances of staying alive at least out of the impossible zone. You have been indispensible to me and I am not going to risk sending you into a meat grinder just because you fight well. You are much more important. I need you as not only a commander of troops, but also as my personal agent. Now is there anything else?” + +You take the opportunity to tell the Emperor about what exactly is going on your side of the warfront. He seems pleased with the information and tells you that you can go back to assist Krozer’s battalion now that your assignment is over. The Emperor goes on to say how he continues to be proud of your accomplishments and that he means it when he says just how important you are to him. You leave the palace with a great feeling of pride and accomplishment. Not just that though, you feel like you’re genuinely appreciated and coming from the Emperor… well there can be nothing better. + +Since you haven’t been gone long, you make your way back to the ex-Felkan town you just conquered and find that Krozer’s army hasn’t moved yet. + +“You’re back already? That was quick, we hardly had time to miss you.” Major Krozer says. +“Well I knew you’d all be lost without me, so I figured I’d better hurry back as soon as possible.” +“Another joke? Before you left you were attempting some of those.” +“So what’s been going on here?” +“Nothing really, after we executed the twenty you suggested, the inhabitants here are truly submissive. I was just about to pick some troops to stay here and head out with the rest. I believe the next target is a small village called Gelim. Not much of one, but then this is further away from the Felkan heartland of course.” + +You think for a moment and say something that shocks the major. + +“The troops could probably due with a small rest. Let’s stay here another three days, it’s not going to make that much of a difference. I doubt that little village is going to provide much of a resistance, let alone be able to shore up any sort of strong defense within that time. We’ve got the Felkans pinned in from here and last reports say they’re focusing most of their troops on the frontlines or against those gnolls to the east. ” +“Alright, the attempts at humor are one thing, but NOW I’m starting to worry a shape shifter has taken your place.” +“No worries, let’s just say I’m in a less grim mood.” +“You are? Then the gods must truly do exist because I never thought I’d see the day. I guess whatever it is that the Emperor had you doing went well then.” +“It did, but this has nothing to do with that. I just want to make sure the soldiers are well rested and not run ragged. Make sure you have them gather here in the town square in a few moments, I’d like to give them a speech about how their efforts have been appreciated.” +“By the Emperor?” +“I’m sure he does too, but I figured the troops might wants to know that someone a little closer to them appreciates their hard work even if he doesn’t always say it.” +“I’ll get them together, but I imagine they’ll enjoy the fact that you’re allowing them three days rest more. Still, some encouraging words do help the morale for some.” +“I hope you know that this appreciation includes everyone here and that especially means you. This battalion is under your command and you’ve done a fine job running it.” +“I think officially out outrank me, given that you report directly to the Emperor.” +“Perhaps, but while I have given my own input with strategies and battle, I have always allowed you to make the final decisions because this is still your command and I respect that and you. The Empire is stronger with you leading some of its armies.” +“Wow, I’m nearly speechless right now. Keep complimenting me like that and I’ll start to think you’ve developed intimate feelings for me.” +“What?” +“Oh you know. Saying to me I’d look prettier out of my uniform and how we should talk in private. Then the next thing I know you’re telling me to drop down and give you head.” +“I…I wouldn’t! I mean, I wouldn’t abuse my position of authority like that!” you exclaim. + +The major laughs a bit. + +“Relax, I know you wouldn’t. The whole time on this assignment I haven’t seen you take an interest in anyone.” +“Why would I? I’m supposed to be focusing on the task of destroying the Felkans, not indulging in baser pleasures.” +“Mm, perhaps, but not everyone is so single minded in their duties or get their fun from the battlefield like you seem to do. Why do you think we have a group of whores follow our army around? Do you not think some of the soldiers sneak off with each other sometimes? I won’t even get into some of the stuff we probably aren’t seeing after we crush one of the Felkan population zones. And as for the abuse of power from a superior, you’re probably one of the first that I know that hasn’t even tried to use it as some sort of threat to have sex with someone of a lower rank.” +“Yes well I suppose that’s the ugly side of war.” You reply. + +Now the major starts laughing out loud even more. + +“You’re hilarious! Brutality and carnage on a grand scale, death and destruction everywhere, and you think whores, a few random rapes and some sexual harassment is the ugly bit. That’s why I like you, because you don’t know any better. Anyway thanks for the compliments and know that I have also found that despite your usual overly serious demeanor it’s been a pleasure serving with you as well and I look forward to our continued positive relationship.” +“As do I.” + +With you and Major Krozer at a friendlier understanding of one another as well as the Emperor’s earlier words to you, you feel a lot happier about your current assignment. +> Years pass... +Year 25 + +While the war with the Felkans seemed to be going smoothly, the situation has changed somewhat. The Empire still has the upper hand, but unfortunately this has become a three-way entanglement. + +The gnolls tribes harassing the Felkans on the western borders apparently weren’t just separate chaotic bands of raiders, but rather a full-fledged conquering horde. After smashing most of the Felkan defenses they have proceeded further into the heartland and that’s where they finally came to blows with the Empire. + +So far the gnolls been more of an annoyance to the Empire, but its been distracting enough that it’s given the Felkans enough time to retreat and regroup further north. The Felkans are much reduced in strength now, but they are still definitely not a defeated nation yet. If anything their resolve has gotten stronger and their defenses have too. + +Last reports tell of how the orcs attempted to break through the defenses of the city of Yaquan only to be nearly wiped out by large weapons mounted to the city’s towers that apparently harness the power of lightning. One blast ripped through the ranks of the heavily armored orcs and spread like a chain of death killing most of them instantly. These new “lightning guns” are no doubt the inventions of the gnomes. + +You heard Captain Gruz was amongst the casualties which would put orc leadership in jeopardy, but since there are so few of them left, the remainder of their now decimated number have regrouped under Roldan’s command who is busily trying to figure out a way to proceed without losing half of his troops in the process. So far though the gnolls have been making that task difficult with their own ongoing attacks. + +The only upside to all this is the Felkans seem to be playing up to their typical siege mentality and not making any sort of counter attacks probably hoping that the Empire and the gnolls will continue to kill each other to the point where nobody is in any position to attack them anymore. Of course that just means they’re getting further entrenched. If enough time passes it may very well make most assaults on what’s left of them extremely costly. + +Meanwhile you and Alison have been mostly fighting off the gnoll hordes on a regular basis. You’d like to press further west to take the fight to them, but you know you need to stay in occupied Felkan territory to either help defend the main army or to support it when the time finally comes to make the final push on the Felkans. Lately most of your days are dull waiting or slightly less dull combat since the gnolls themselves rely mostly on numbers and terror rather than skill. The terror factor isn’t much of one when going against the hardened troops of the Empire and numbers account for nothing when faced with Empire discipline. + +Still, its frustrating not being allowed to do more and tensions are starting to run hot by everyone in the high command… + +“But if we continue to attack as we have, we will risk losing it all! I urge you my Emperor for the good of the Empire we should withdraw now! What can it hurt? We have proven our point and even acquired some territory in the process. Why not just let those barbaric gnolls fight over the scraps what’s left of the ruins.” Jacob says to the Emperor. +“Jacob, I said it before I don’t give a damn what the costs are, I won’t let those fucking gnomes continue to mock from behind their smug little walled cities! And I didn’t come this far to be turned back by the incursions of some mongrel dog men or guns that shoot a little light! I don’t care what it takes we aren’t going to rest until the Felkan Kingdom ceases to exist along with those fucking gnomes!” the Emperor shouts and flips a nearby table. + +“Why are you yelling at me? I’m just giving my honest opinion on the situation, I’m not even in charge of the military matters!” Jacob whimpers. +“But you ARE in charge of the other Eternals, and guess who is leading the majority of our forces in Felkan territory? That’s right, Roldan. Now I’ll grant you that he’s been fairly successful up until this point, but the fact that he hasn’t made any progress for the past few months is severely starting to decrease my faith that he can get the job done.” +“He’s doing the best he can under the circumstances and he’s the best qualified general we have, I don’t think he should be replaced.” +“I’m beginning to think I should start replacing SOMEONE.” The Emperor unsubtly threatens. + +You’ve seen the Emperor mad before and it’s never a good thing. Poor Jacob is trying to stand his ground on this matter, but its obvious the man is incredibly scared for his life. To be fair you actually can see his concerns on the situation, but this thing with the gnomes…well it’s an ongoing source of irritation for the Emperor. Jacob is also taking a verbal lashing for something that really isn’t his fault. True, he monitors the progress of the other Eternals, but in reality it’s not anything meaningful. Not to mention it actually was you who originally convinced the Emperor that Roldan should lead on the main assault force, yet the Emperor has either forgotten this fact, or perhaps still insists on seeing it all as Jacob’s fault. + +Since you still feel partly responsible you decide to interject to try to calm things down. + +“Emperor, I could take over Roldan’s command if you prefer, though I would still like to keep him on as part of the command staff.” +“While I’m sure you would no doubt do a much better job, I’d rather have you’re where you currently are.” The Emperor says which somewhat disappoints you. +“Of course, of course. Wouldn’t want to risk your precious loyal dog.” Mistress suddenly remarks, this draws an angry glance of both you and the Emperor. + +“What? I’m just saying what Jacob’s thinking, personally I don’t really give a shit what drone you decide to sacrifice in your futile war.” Mistress says causing Jacob’s eyes to widen, shake his head and raise his hands assuring that he thought no such thing. +“Ever with the clever remarks. Too bad the rest of your race isn’t half as clever, or you might not be a bunch of mercenaries.” +“I’m not sure why we’re even relying on svelk scum anyway. Alison and I have been doing just fine fighting off the gnolls by ourselves for example.” You remark. +“Alison? Oh, is that the name of the dirty blonde shield maiden that I’ve heard you’ve been getting close to? Tell me, when you’re sticking it to her do you try to visualize that its me?” + +A vulgar comment as usual from Mistress. Not unexpected either. While you’d be lying if it weren’t a little annoying, you certainly aren’t going to give her the satisfaction of a retort. + +“No answer? Are you not even going to stand up for the honor of your female plaything? Then again I suppose she isn’t worthy of it. I mean given that you experienced the best, why would you bother defending something so inferior?” Mistress continues to taunt. + +“Emperor, we are here to discuss the important business of crushing the Felkans, do we really have to listen to the boring and predictable slurs of this…dubious ally?” you ask. +“No, of course we don’t. Hold your vile svelk tongue unless you’ve actually got something more worthwhile to contribute.” +“I have contributed more than my fair share to your foolish crusade. I have come to the conclusion that this war is a losing proposition for my people. I won’t even go into the meat grinder you’ve got our mercenary bands dealing with on the Felkan front. And while I’m sure that may cause you much joy, we svelk are not mindless orc slaves and will NOT fall into your clumsy manipulative plans of convenient genocide through attrition. Yeah, we’re pulling out and moving on to greener pastures.” +“Since when are you or any other svelk so concerned about the future of your people? You’re also acting like you’re in harms way and unless you’ve been sneaking off to fight alongside your kin, you’ve personally risked nothing. You’re also still being paid well so what the hell do you care?” the Emperor remarks. +“You humans think you always have everything figured out about everything when you really don’t know shit. As I said, the price is too high, and we will be moving on to better opportunities.” +“(Sigh) Stop being so damn dramatic, and what the hell do you really want?” the Emperor asks in an exasperated tone. + +Mistress proceeds to tell the Emperor that she’s quite serious about pulling out svelk aid unless she gets more support in return. + +“If you want our continued help, we do not believe that this General Roldan is able to accomplish his assault on the city of Yaquan in an efficient manner. So I would request that you either change the leadership or transfer us to the gnoll front at Major Krozer’s war camp.” Mistress says and glances at you. +“No! We’ve been doing just fine without you! We don’t need morale falling low because svelk are infesting the camp.” You protest. +“And here I thought you were a professional first and foremost. Open your eyes. Even you can see the benefit of our superior troops being directly added to your fighting force. Besides, I heard how you handled the first time you worked with svelk warriors before, surely if one of them gets out of line, you’ll just go on a bloodthirsty rampage to make a point of who is really in charge.” + +You look to the Emperor expecting him to say something about this matter, but he waves you over to speak with you privately. Mistress rolls her eyes and wanders over to one of the bookshelves while Jacob fumbles about with some papers. + +“Son, I’m going to include you in this decision, because this is something I think you feel strongly about and I’d rather have you in a positive state of mind. I don’t want to lose svelk support as they have been helpful despite their…well you know. I also have doubts about Roldan getting the job done as well, so the suggestion to replace him isn’t out of the question as far as I’m concerned. In any case I’m either going to have to replace him or send all the svelk to the gnoll front, but I know that won’t exactly make you happy.” +> Suggest that Roldan be replaced +While you don’t agree with the idea that Roldan won’t be able to get the job done, you’d rather have him replaced than get an influx of svelk troops. You’d try to suggest yourself again, but you know the Emperor has made his mind up on the matter. + +“If you believe General Roldan cannot get the job done, then I suppose it might be better if he’s replaced.” You remark which gets Jacob’s disapproval. +“But he can do it! Replacing Roldan at this point would be folly!” +“Enough Jacob! The decision has been made! General Roldan will be replaced and demoted!” the Emperor remarks. +“Demoted?” +“Yes demoted! Be happy he isn’t being executed for incompetence on the battlefield!” +“But I thought he was just going to be replaced! My Emperor I beg you not to do this! Roldan has worked so hard for his position!” +“Jacob, is there some sort of reason why you keep arguing this point with me? Delusions? Stupidity? A death wish perhaps?” the Emperor asks and Jacob shuts up immediately. + +Mistress stretches and yawns before commenting on the situation. + +“If you all are done in this pointless exercise male ineptitude, is there anything else I need to waste my time with here?” +“Yes, we’re done. Get the hell out of my chambers and take Jacob with you. And while I wish I could chat with you my son, I still have to speak with Marik. I sometimes wonder if he just uses his madness as an excuse to be absent minded and claim he didn’t know there was a meeting. I just hope he’s actually made progress on his project he convinced me to proceed with.” The Emperor remarks and the rest of you leave his chambers. + +You expect Mistress to make some sort of remark as you’re all walking out of the palace, but she ends up quickly walking ahead of you instead. Jacob doesn’t speak with you either, he glances at you a couple times, but he’s obviously a little upset that you supported the Emperor’s decision to have Roldan replaced. + +Really though, you can’t worry about it. As far as you’re concerned hanging on to your sanity is a lot more vital. You can only imagine how the svelk would’ve grated on your nerves if they had been transferred, especially since you’re not actively advancing any more, but rather just defending against gnoll attack. Idle svelk mercs in between the down time isn’t something you want to deal with. + +Alison is certainly happy to hear about the close call of playing host to a bunch of svelk. + +“Well I’m certainly glad you supported the Emperor’s first decision, I don’t think morale would’ve been great around here with dark elves in the camp.” She says. +“No, but I can’t say they’re that great now.” You reply. +“What do you mean? There hasn’t been any major complaining that I know of, and I tend to keep apprised of the situation with my troops.” +“Well, maybe it’s just me then. I’d like to be actively DOING something other than sitting around waiting to be attacked.” +“Welcome to the army. You do know that boring waiting around in between battles is what we do right?” +“I’m well aware that’s part of it, but its not like we need to sit here. We could at least be attacking the gnolls so as to make them no longer a threat. I mean we should be doing that anyway. After all, we’re going to have to deal with them eventually, better to do it now when we have the strength rather than later. I’ve heard other soldiers commenting about feeling something similar. And I would think that you probably would like to take the fight to the gnolls as well.” + +Alison nods. + +“Well, I can’t argue with you on that point. The troops are a little restless in that respect I suppose. I admit it would be good to get some of this pent up violence out of everyone’s system, but as you’ve said, the Emperor’s orders are to stay here.” +“I don’t know, but I’m starting to think that maybe we should just NOT stay here.” +“Seriously? You’d go against a direct order from the Emperor?” + +At this point you don’t know. You want to be loyal and follow orders, but your desire for battle is still there. Not to mention you know you could win if it came down to it. Surely the Emperor would approve if you were victorious. + +You decide you’re going to do it, you’re going to make a full attack on the gnolls. + +“It’s about time we took the fight to those mongrel dogs.” Alison says with a little enthusiasm, but then her cautious side comes out. “But what about the Emperor?” +“You don’t need to worry about that. I will take full responsibility if he gets angry about it. I’ll just say I took command of your battalion.” +“Hah, I always knew you were going to do that some day, anyway.” +“Sorry, but I can’t think of any other way.” +“Don’t apologize to me, I won’t have to face the Emperor’s wrath, well I hope I won’t at least.” +“Like I said, don’t worry about that. And don’t worry about me either. I don’t want to sound prideful, but I’m fairly confident the Emperor won’t even get too angry with me, especially since I intend on wiping out the immediate gnoll threat.” + +A month goes by and you’re initially successful on your promise. The gnolls are no match for you in straight up combat. You even manage to save a few of the occupied Felkan communities from complete destruction and are welcomed as liberators. + +Just when you think you can drive the gnolls out entirely you’re dealt two big blows. + +One, the siege of Yaquan has not gone well since Roldan was replaced. It seems that General Ackerson has not only managed to fail in taking the city, but he’s also managed to lose so many soldiers that there has been a call for your battalion to support his losses. + +This couldn’t have come at a worse time mainly because now the gnolls who you thought you had on the run were craftier than it seemed. + +The gnolls have been breeding and training a large group of wyverns within a small mountain in the area. They’ve also been bringing reinforcements from beyond the Felkan borders. You’re taken off guard enough that you actually have to fall back before you’re completely overrun. + +If you leave to go to help General Ackerson, the gnolls are going to not only take back everything you gained, but will take your territory as well. However, if you stay to fight back the gnolls, you’d really be defying orders, not to mention possibly costing the Empire a needed victory against the Felkans. + +There isn’t much for it, you’ll have to split the battalion with Alison and decide which front you want to fight on. +> Stay on the gnoll front +As much as you wanted to be on the front lines of this war before, now you feel like you’ve got a score to settle with the gnolls. Not to mention you feel like you need to finish up what you started. + +“Are you going to be okay here?” Alison asks. +“I’ll be fine, you just be concerned with your assignment because it sounds like General Ackerson isn’t exactly the best replacement and I’m now cursing myself for having Roldan removed at all.” +“You couldn’t have known. Besides, do you really think having the svelk transferred here would’ve made things better for us?” +“I dunno. Maybe we could’ve used the extra troops to combat the gnolls and at the same time Roldan would’ve still been in charge of the siege. Doesn’t matter now I suppose, let’s just make the best of it.” + +Within the next few days Alison and you say your final goodbyes before she leaves. Afterwards, you try to make the best of your defenses, but you’re stretched thin. You send a messenger to request reinforcements, but naturally most soldiers are being sent to the Felkan front. The gnoll hordes aren’t even being considered a credible threat, which couldn’t be further from the truth considering that you’ve been losing more territory to them and the fact is you just can’t protect it all due to lack of manpower. + +A couple more months go by and news on the Felkan front gets worse. The siege of Yaquan has been completely abandoned and General Ackerson’s forces are now in retreat. Word is he’s lost more than half of those under his command, and whatever remaining svelk mercs that were helping have left. You have no idea if Alison is one of those, but you have more pressing concerns of your own. You haven’t had much rest.You’ve had to use your magic with such regularity to combat the gnolls that its exhausting just to cast the simplest of destructive spells. Little by little your remaining soldiers have been getting whittled down. The ones still alive are drained and suffering from low morale. + +Within the week, there is another gnoll attack, a massive push to finally finish off the only viable defenders in the area. You make the gnolls earn every inch they take. The first two wyverns that appear in the distance, you strike down with a powerful lightning spell. Several of the initial attackers have their heads blown to gooey pieces by your troops’ muskets, and then you resort to tried and true methods of slaughter. + +You hack down several of their number before suffering any major wounds. Even then, you continue to fight with the determination of ten men. The bodies of gnolls pile up, the blood is everywhere and you’ve just suffered an injury that should’ve rightfully killed you, but you continue to fight. All the anger you feel at this situation is being directed utterly towards the gnolls until it finally burns itself out and your body pushes itself past its limitations of physical exertion. + +An axe cleaves into your skull, followed by another into your arm, severing it just enough to hang from a bit of tendon. You fall to your knees, then to the floor and that’s when you feel another axe to your back destroying your spine. A finally kick by a hefty boot to the face and the gibbering laughing howls of the gnolls is the last thing you hear.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While you don’t agree with the idea that Roldan won’t be able to get the job done, you’d rather have him replaced than get an influx of svelk troops. You’d try to suggest yourself again, but you know the Emperor has made his mind up on the matter. + +“If you believe General Roldan cannot get the job done, then I suppose it might be better if he’s replaced.” You remark which gets Jacob’s disapproval. +“But he can do it! Replacing Roldan at this point would be folly!” +“Enough Jacob! The decision has been made! General Roldan will be replaced and demoted!” the Emperor remarks. +“Demoted?” +“Yes demoted! Be happy he isn’t being executed for incompetence on the battlefield!” +“But I thought he was just going to be replaced! My Emperor I beg you not to do this! Roldan has worked so hard for his position!” +“Jacob, is there some sort of reason why you keep arguing this point with me? Delusions? Stupidity? A death wish perhaps?” the Emperor asks and Jacob shuts up immediately. + +Mistress stretches and yawns before commenting on the situation. + +“If you all are done in this pointless exercise male ineptitude, is there anything else I need to waste my time with here?” +“Yes, we’re done. Get the hell out of my chambers and take Jacob with you. And while I wish I could chat with you my son, I still have to speak with Marik. I sometimes wonder if he just uses his madness as an excuse to be absent minded and claim he didn’t know there was a meeting. I just hope he’s actually made progress on his project he convinced me to proceed with.” The Emperor remarks and the rest of you leave his chambers. + +You expect Mistress to make some sort of remark as you’re all walking out of the palace, but she ends up quickly walking ahead of you instead. Jacob doesn’t speak with you either, he glances at you a couple times, but he’s obviously a little upset that you supported the Emperor’s decision to have Roldan replaced. + +Really though, you can’t worry about it. As far as you’re concerned hanging on to your sanity is a lot more vital. You can only imagine how the svelk would’ve grated on your nerves if they had been transferred, especially since you’re not actively advancing any more, but rather just defending against gnoll attack. Idle svelk mercs in between the down time isn’t something you want to deal with. + +Alison is certainly happy to hear about the close call of playing host to a bunch of svelk. + +“Well I’m certainly glad you supported the Emperor’s first decision, I don’t think morale would’ve been great around here with dark elves in the camp.” She says. +“No, but I can’t say they’re that great now.” You reply. +“What do you mean? There hasn’t been any major complaining that I know of, and I tend to keep apprised of the situation with my troops.” +“Well, maybe it’s just me then. I’d like to be actively DOING something other than sitting around waiting to be attacked.” +“Welcome to the army. You do know that boring waiting around in between battles is what we do right?” +“I’m well aware that’s part of it, but its not like we need to sit here. We could at least be attacking the gnolls so as to make them no longer a threat. I mean we should be doing that anyway. After all, we’re going to have to deal with them eventually, better to do it now when we have the strength rather than later. I’ve heard other soldiers commenting about feeling something similar. And I would think that you probably would like to take the fight to the gnolls as well.” + +Alison nods. + +“Well, I can’t argue with you on that point. The troops are a little restless in that respect I suppose. I admit it would be good to get some of this pent up violence out of everyone’s system, but as you’ve said, the Emperor’s orders are to stay here.” +“I don’t know, but I’m starting to think that maybe we should just NOT stay here.” +“Seriously? You’d go against a direct order from the Emperor?” + +At this point you don’t know. You want to be loyal and follow orders, but your desire for battle is still there. Not to mention you know you could win if it came down to it. Surely the Emperor would approve if you were victorious. + +You decide you’re going to do it, you’re going to make a full attack on the gnolls. + +“It’s about time we took the fight to those mongrel dogs.” Alison says with a little enthusiasm, but then her cautious side comes out. “But what about the Emperor?” +“You don’t need to worry about that. I will take full responsibility if he gets angry about it. I’ll just say I took command of your battalion.” +“Hah, I always knew you were going to do that some day, anyway.” +“Sorry, but I can’t think of any other way.” +“Don’t apologize to me, I won’t have to face the Emperor’s wrath, well I hope I won’t at least.” +“Like I said, don’t worry about that. And don’t worry about me either. I don’t want to sound prideful, but I’m fairly confident the Emperor won’t even get too angry with me, especially since I intend on wiping out the immediate gnoll threat.” + +A month goes by and you’re initially successful on your promise. The gnolls are no match for you in straight up combat. You even manage to save a few of the occupied Felkan communities from complete destruction and are welcomed as liberators. + +Just when you think you can drive the gnolls out entirely you’re dealt two big blows. + +One, the siege of Yaquan has not gone well since Roldan was replaced. It seems that General Ackerson has not only managed to fail in taking the city, but he’s also managed to lose so many soldiers that there has been a call for your battalion to support his losses. + +This couldn’t have come at a worse time mainly because now the gnolls who you thought you had on the run were craftier than it seemed. + +The gnolls have been breeding and training a large group of wyverns within a small mountain in the area. They’ve also been bringing reinforcements from beyond the Felkan borders. You’re taken off guard enough that you actually have to fall back before you’re completely overrun. + +If you leave to go to help General Ackerson, the gnolls are going to not only take back everything you gained, but will take your territory as well. However, if you stay to fight back the gnolls, you’d really be defying orders, not to mention possibly costing the Empire a needed victory against the Felkans. + +There isn’t much for it, you’ll have to split the battalion with Alison and decide which front you want to fight on. +> Go to the Felkan front +Given that you feel responsible for the problems going on at Yaquan you think you need to go if only to try to fix things. + +“I had a feeling you’d want to go to the Felkan front.” Alison remarks. +“Someone is going to have to fix this mess. I’m just hoping I can do something about it.” + +Within the next few days Alison and you say your final goodbyes before you leave. You hope Alison will be able to deal with the gnolls with less troops, but she tells you to not worry about her problems and just focus on the task you’ll have to accomplish. + +Your march to Yaquan is an uneventful one, but when you arrive you’ve got more than enough to deal with. + +General Ackerson’s war camp is one of the most unorganized camps you’ve ever seen. He obviously isn’t that well respected either as he is arguing with a couple of his lieutenants and a mage of some sort. + +“Galen, I’m sick of hearing your excuses, just get it done!” Ackerson exclaims to the mage. +“Oh yes, its so easy for you isn’t it? Just sitting in the back giving orders and not being in the line of immediate fire. Magic isn’t an unlimited art that we wizards can just keep on doing for days on end with no rest! It’s bad enough you wasted all of our golems and we’re reduced to salvaging the remnants. By the Emperor, at least Roldan tried to think things out, I wonder if you even passed the academy or if you just had a relative that promoted you…” + +At this point Ackerson lunges at Galen and the pair have to be broken up. You help keep a little order and when they see who you are everyone straightens up a little more. + +“Is this what’s been going on here? Petty bickering and incompetence on a scale that could be classified as treason? Everyone needs to shut the fuck up right now, because I’m not going to say this again…” + +Doesn’t take long for you to establish a new order of things. Technically General Ackerson is supposed to still be in charge of this operation, but given your close ties to the Emperor you aren’t debated. + +While you manage to reorganize the army and take new approach of attack, you can still see why Roldan was having so much trouble with this city. The gnome lightning guns are still ripping through most of the troops and its taking all the magic of the remaining mages left just to upkeep a simple barrier so the war camp can’t be targeted. + +In fact you wish Roldan was still here just so you could promote him back up to help you, but unfortunately he was killed in battle shortly after his demotion. (Another one of Ackerson’s bright ideas to make a frontal assault on the city again) The svelk mercenaries at this point have left claiming that no amount of money is worth this meat grinder. All of this makes you really wish you hadn’t supported the Emperor’s idea to replace Roldan. + +You decide to have tunnels dug under the city and bring it down that way. It takes longer than you’d like, but you can’t rely on mage support to help with it due to their main concern to upkeep the barriers. + +Eventually your men break through to the sewer system where you believe it should be an easy victory from there, but unfortunately the gnomes trapped the hell out the sewers and you lose several troops in the process. One of the Felkans even manages to sneak about the sewers and collapse the invasion tunnels setting your victory back. + +Meanwhile your troops on the surface are faring no better, though they fear you more than they did Ackerson or even Roldan and that fear is enough for them to make that push to finally break down the gates. Sensing true victory at last, you decide that you’re going to join the fight personally. + +You enter the streets of the city with your troops, mopping up whatever pitiful resistance remains. There isn’t much though and soon the city is yours and you can’t wait to write to Alison about your great victory. + +Unfortunately she will only hear of it from someone else. + +War being what it is, is always a messy endeavor. Just when one thinks a battle is over, there is always that last hold out or trap and that’s what gets you. + +The city’s mayor reportedly stayed in the city hall the entire time of the siege and is supposedly still alive. You, Ackerson and a couple of other officers enter the city hall for the purpose of dictating the Empire’s acquisition of this city, the changes that will come AND seeing if the mayor is willing to comply. Hopefully he does since it saves time on replacing him with your own bureaucrats which might take a while. + +No sooner have you entered and you see the place is completely empty. At first you think its just because people went elsewhere, but it doesn’t take long for you to not feel right about the place. + +“We need to get out of here…” is the last thing you utter before the entire place explodes. One final trap set by the Felkans. + +You are eventually found half burned, blown up and crushed by the rubble. You’re barely breathing by the time they dig you out, and by the time they carry you out, you’ve already expired. + +Your victory and death at Yaquan is remembered and used as a propaganda point for the Empire for the remainder of their war with the Felkan Kingdom.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 25 + +While the war with the Felkans seemed to be going smoothly, the situation has changed somewhat. The Empire still has the upper hand, but unfortunately this has become a three-way entanglement. + +The gnolls tribes harassing the Felkans on the western borders apparently weren’t just separate chaotic bands of raiders, but rather a full-fledged conquering horde. After smashing most of the Felkan defenses they have proceeded further into the heartland and that’s where they finally came to blows with the Empire. + +So far the gnolls been more of an annoyance to the Empire, but its been distracting enough that it’s given the Felkans enough time to retreat and regroup further north. The Felkans are much reduced in strength now, but they are still definitely not a defeated nation yet. If anything their resolve has gotten stronger and their defenses have too. + +Last reports tell of how the orcs attempted to break through the defenses of the city of Yaquan only to be nearly wiped out by large weapons mounted to the city’s towers that apparently harness the power of lightning. One blast ripped through the ranks of the heavily armored orcs and spread like a chain of death killing most of them instantly. These new “lightning guns” are no doubt the inventions of the gnomes. + +You heard Captain Gruz was amongst the casualties which would put orc leadership in jeopardy, but since there are so few of them left, the remainder of their now decimated number have regrouped under Roldan’s command who is busily trying to figure out a way to proceed without losing half of his troops in the process. So far though the gnolls have been making that task difficult with their own ongoing attacks. + +The only upside to all this is the Felkans seem to be playing up to their typical siege mentality and not making any sort of counter attacks probably hoping that the Empire and the gnolls will continue to kill each other to the point where nobody is in any position to attack them anymore. Of course that just means they’re getting further entrenched. If enough time passes it may very well make most assaults on what’s left of them extremely costly. + +Meanwhile you and Alison have been mostly fighting off the gnoll hordes on a regular basis. You’d like to press further west to take the fight to them, but you know you need to stay in occupied Felkan territory to either help defend the main army or to support it when the time finally comes to make the final push on the Felkans. Lately most of your days are dull waiting or slightly less dull combat since the gnolls themselves rely mostly on numbers and terror rather than skill. The terror factor isn’t much of one when going against the hardened troops of the Empire and numbers account for nothing when faced with Empire discipline. + +Still, its frustrating not being allowed to do more and tensions are starting to run hot by everyone in the high command… + +“But if we continue to attack as we have, we will risk losing it all! I urge you my Emperor for the good of the Empire we should withdraw now! What can it hurt? We have proven our point and even acquired some territory in the process. Why not just let those barbaric gnolls fight over the scraps what’s left of the ruins.” Jacob says to the Emperor. +“Jacob, I said it before I don’t give a damn what the costs are, I won’t let those fucking gnomes continue to mock from behind their smug little walled cities! And I didn’t come this far to be turned back by the incursions of some mongrel dog men or guns that shoot a little light! I don’t care what it takes we aren’t going to rest until the Felkan Kingdom ceases to exist along with those fucking gnomes!” the Emperor shouts and flips a nearby table. + +“Why are you yelling at me? I’m just giving my honest opinion on the situation, I’m not even in charge of the military matters!” Jacob whimpers. +“But you ARE in charge of the other Eternals, and guess who is leading the majority of our forces in Felkan territory? That’s right, Roldan. Now I’ll grant you that he’s been fairly successful up until this point, but the fact that he hasn’t made any progress for the past few months is severely starting to decrease my faith that he can get the job done.” +“He’s doing the best he can under the circumstances and he’s the best qualified general we have, I don’t think he should be replaced.” +“I’m beginning to think I should start replacing SOMEONE.” The Emperor unsubtly threatens. + +You’ve seen the Emperor mad before and it’s never a good thing. Poor Jacob is trying to stand his ground on this matter, but its obvious the man is incredibly scared for his life. To be fair you actually can see his concerns on the situation, but this thing with the gnomes…well it’s an ongoing source of irritation for the Emperor. Jacob is also taking a verbal lashing for something that really isn’t his fault. True, he monitors the progress of the other Eternals, but in reality it’s not anything meaningful. Not to mention it actually was you who originally convinced the Emperor that Roldan should lead on the main assault force, yet the Emperor has either forgotten this fact, or perhaps still insists on seeing it all as Jacob’s fault. + +Since you still feel partly responsible you decide to interject to try to calm things down. + +“Emperor, I could take over Roldan’s command if you prefer, though I would still like to keep him on as part of the command staff.” +“While I’m sure you would no doubt do a much better job, I’d rather have you’re where you currently are.” The Emperor says which somewhat disappoints you. +“Of course, of course. Wouldn’t want to risk your precious loyal dog.” Mistress suddenly remarks, this draws an angry glance of both you and the Emperor. + +“What? I’m just saying what Jacob’s thinking, personally I don’t really give a shit what drone you decide to sacrifice in your futile war.” Mistress says causing Jacob’s eyes to widen, shake his head and raise his hands assuring that he thought no such thing. +“Ever with the clever remarks. Too bad the rest of your race isn’t half as clever, or you might not be a bunch of mercenaries.” +“I’m not sure why we’re even relying on svelk scum anyway. Alison and I have been doing just fine fighting off the gnolls by ourselves for example.” You remark. +“Alison? Oh, is that the name of the dirty blonde shield maiden that I’ve heard you’ve been getting close to? Tell me, when you’re sticking it to her do you try to visualize that its me?” + +A vulgar comment as usual from Mistress. Not unexpected either. While you’d be lying if it weren’t a little annoying, you certainly aren’t going to give her the satisfaction of a retort. + +“No answer? Are you not even going to stand up for the honor of your female plaything? Then again I suppose she isn’t worthy of it. I mean given that you experienced the best, why would you bother defending something so inferior?” Mistress continues to taunt. + +“Emperor, we are here to discuss the important business of crushing the Felkans, do we really have to listen to the boring and predictable slurs of this…dubious ally?” you ask. +“No, of course we don’t. Hold your vile svelk tongue unless you’ve actually got something more worthwhile to contribute.” +“I have contributed more than my fair share to your foolish crusade. I have come to the conclusion that this war is a losing proposition for my people. I won’t even go into the meat grinder you’ve got our mercenary bands dealing with on the Felkan front. And while I’m sure that may cause you much joy, we svelk are not mindless orc slaves and will NOT fall into your clumsy manipulative plans of convenient genocide through attrition. Yeah, we’re pulling out and moving on to greener pastures.” +“Since when are you or any other svelk so concerned about the future of your people? You’re also acting like you’re in harms way and unless you’ve been sneaking off to fight alongside your kin, you’ve personally risked nothing. You’re also still being paid well so what the hell do you care?” the Emperor remarks. +“You humans think you always have everything figured out about everything when you really don’t know shit. As I said, the price is too high, and we will be moving on to better opportunities.” +“(Sigh) Stop being so damn dramatic, and what the hell do you really want?” the Emperor asks in an exasperated tone. + +Mistress proceeds to tell the Emperor that she’s quite serious about pulling out svelk aid unless she gets more support in return. + +“If you want our continued help, we do not believe that this General Roldan is able to accomplish his assault on the city of Yaquan in an efficient manner. So I would request that you either change the leadership or transfer us to the gnoll front at Major Krozer’s war camp.” Mistress says and glances at you. +“No! We’ve been doing just fine without you! We don’t need morale falling low because svelk are infesting the camp.” You protest. +“And here I thought you were a professional first and foremost. Open your eyes. Even you can see the benefit of our superior troops being directly added to your fighting force. Besides, I heard how you handled the first time you worked with svelk warriors before, surely if one of them gets out of line, you’ll just go on a bloodthirsty rampage to make a point of who is really in charge.” + +You look to the Emperor expecting him to say something about this matter, but he waves you over to speak with you privately. Mistress rolls her eyes and wanders over to one of the bookshelves while Jacob fumbles about with some papers. + +“Son, I’m going to include you in this decision, because this is something I think you feel strongly about and I’d rather have you in a positive state of mind. I don’t want to lose svelk support as they have been helpful despite their…well you know. I also have doubts about Roldan getting the job done as well, so the suggestion to replace him isn’t out of the question as far as I’m concerned. In any case I’m either going to have to replace him or send all the svelk to the gnoll front, but I know that won’t exactly make you happy.” +> Accept svelk transfer +You don’t like disagreeing with the Emperor’s strategic decisions and you certainly don’t want to deal with svelk in your camp, but from what you know of Roldan replacing him now wouldn’t be a good move as he is the best-qualified general. The only person you can think of that would be better is yourself, but the Emperor has made it quite clear he wants you to stay put, so you aren’t going to argue the issue. + +“If you believe the svelk can be useful as support on the gnoll front, then I shall figure out a way to make it work.” You remark, which seems to surprise the Emperor. +“Mm, very well. You sure it won’t be a problem?” +“No, no problem. However at the slightest sign of some sort of treachery or them not pulling their weight then I’ll suggest the next decree you pass be one that executes all svelk in Empire territory.” + +Hah, trust me, I’ve nearly had that one on the list for centuries. I know you’ll be able to handle this though. Just wish everyone was as competent as you.” The Emperor says and gives a glare at Jacob who is still briskly going through some papers. +“I really do think Jacob is trying his best. He only wants what’s good for the Empire.” +“Then he better start doing a better job. Anyway let’s get on with it.” + +The Emperor proceeds to tell Mistress that the svelk mercenary bands will be assigned to the gnoll front, but that they will ultimately answer to you and that any problems from them will result in mass executions. Mistress doesn’t seem at all bothered by this; in fact she simply chuckles and says that’s fine. + +The Emperor then goes on to tell Jacob that General Roldan better start making more progress soon or he will have another general take his place. Then he says he has to meet with Marik. + +“I sometimes wonder if he just uses his madness as an excuse to be absent minded and claim he didn’t know there was a meeting. I just hope he’s actually made progress on his project he convinced me to proceed with. Okay all of you are dismissed.” The Emperor remarks and the rest of you leave his chambers. + +You expect Mistress to make some sort of remark as you’re all walking out of the palace, but she ends up quickly walking ahead of you instead. Jacob on the other hand takes the opportunity. + +“I just wanted to thank you for once again trying to shield me from the Emperor’s wrath, though I fear that it won’t be long before my services are no longer needed. That day is coming soon. I know it.” +“You’re worrying too much as usual. The Emperor knows you’re indispensible.” +“No YOU’RE indispensible. That crazy derro Marik is indispensible. Even that svelk bitch is considered indispensible, though I really don’t know why. Me? I’m just another bureaucratic bean counting pencil-pushing advisor that’s getting old. There are several just waiting to take my place. You know I had twelve attempts to poison me in the last year?” +“By who?” +“By other bean counting pencil-pushing bureaucrats obviously. I’m sure you know that’s how I got my job. Eliminated the previous advisor. Of course with the way things are going, the Emperor himself is likely to do it personally. I just wish I could get him to see that this war is a drain on the Empire. Even if we win, the victory still won’t outweigh the amount of cost in resources, gold, population we spent to pursue it. I mean sure we have the land, but a lot of it has been rendered unusable due to the slash and burn policy that’s been favored. We haven’t even left a lot of people alive to tax! Now this thing with Roldan, I really don’t know what he expects me to do.” +“How is internal security lately?” you ask. +“Its fine. Good all things considered. The Eyes have successfully replaced the shadows it seems as far as that is concerned. Reputation is everything.” +“Do you think you could re-assign some of them and it not affect domestic safety?” +“What do you mean?” + +You explain that perhaps using some Eyes as assassins and spies might work better than the usual military scouts. Perhaps their expertise of blending in, stealth and other such tactics can get them to sneak in the city and bring it down from within. + +“I can’t believe I didn’t think of that. In fact, why didn’t the Emperor think of that? It’s certainly an idea worthy of consideration and Warrick would be an excellent candidate to lead such an operation. If the Emperor believes I have more input in this matter than I actually do, I might as well make such accusations true and hopefully successful for my sake.” Jacob remarks. +“I’m sure this plan will hasten the fall of the Felkan Kingdom. You’ll have not one but two Eternals in vital positions on the front lines now.” +“Don’t you mean three? You didn’t include yourself.” +“Oh, well I’m doing my part sure, but…nevermind.” +“But you want to be where Roldan is.” +“I don’t even necessarily want to lead the main attack force at this point, I just feel like I should at least be part of it. I know the Emperor explained to me he doesn’t want to throw me into the meat grinder of war because he sees greater potential in me, but I feel like sometimes I’m not being able to live up to that potential.” + +Jacob pats you on the side of your arm. + +“Now you’re the one worrying too much. You are more vital to this war than you believe. This advice you just gave me proves that. The Emperor is just well…a little protective of you because he’s so proud of you. Can you blame him? Don’t worry; your day to really shine will come some day. Maybe even sooner than you think.” + +After Jacob’s minor pep talk you feel a little better about your own position, of course then you remember you now have a bunch of svelk assigned to your camp. + +Alison is probably slightly less happy about it than you are. + +“Was there nothing that could be done?” Alison asks. +“I told you, it was either this or replace General Roldan and that would’ve been a major strategic mistake.” +“Well are you going to be okay with this?” +“Me? Sure. Guidelines have already been established, I’m ultimately in charge of them and believe me I’ve every intention to not letting them get away with shit. I’ll tell them as soon as they start arriving. In the meantime, let’s make arrangements for our new allied support. Better that we do it now before they think they can just make themselves at home here.” + +No sooner do the svelk mercenaries start arriving, you begin laying down the rules of how things are going to be to all the respective captains in private. They are of course unenthused about such things, but given that you didn’t dress them down in front of everyone most grudgingly comply with your decrees. + +There is one captain by the name of Eldolith, however who just manages to rub you the wrong way… + +“Yes, yes, I’ve already been briefed on the situation. We all have, so you can stop wasting your time by asserting your pitiable need for dominance.” Eldolith remarks. + +You look at the haughty svelk captain and you already know who you see before you. You’re feeling a mixture of things right now, but you told the Emperor that you were going to make this work, so you’re going to at least get a certain amount of enjoyment out of it. + +“But if I don’t keep reinforcing it, then you’ll never truly grasp the idea that you are subservient to me. And as we all know it’s important to keep the lesser born in their place. That is the svelk way is it not?” you say. + +Eldolith nearly makes a retort, but stops. You aren’t letting her off that easy. + +“Oh? You wish to say something else? Maybe that I am not a svelk and that I am the lesser born? Perhaps something about how humans are nothing more than hairless Sul Monkeys? Come on, say what you want. I’ve heard it all before by your kind and it’s the same old shit. Come on, just give me an excuse.” you say and then grab her by the throat and begin to squeeze while your hot breath invades her nostrils. + +Eldolith says nothing, she doesn’t even try to resist she just continues to stare at you defiantly, accepting of death if necessary or whatever else you have in mind. + +“You don’t fool me svelk bitch, deep down you’re scared…or maybe…maybe you’re getting excited? Yeah, I bet that’s it…I know what YOU like…” you say and your other hand begins to wander touching Eldolith’s body. Then you realize what you’re doing and you immediately stop and make haste back to the Empire side of the camp. + +Alison asks you if everything went all right, and you sharply dismiss her by exclaiming that of course everything is fine. Alison doesn’t take too much offense since she figures having the svelk in camp is probably going to put you in a bad mood. + +You wonder now if you didn’t want the svelk transferred here so you could have the opportunity to unleash some of your lingering desires. To get a gleeful sadistic pleasure of verbally abusing them or sending them on dangerous missions, or even killing one of them yourself if they step out of line. You don’t even want to dwell on what you felt like doing to Eldolith. + +Did Mistress plan this somehow? She couldn’t have. It was your choice. + +“By the Emperor, get a hold of yourself! This is all on you. You need to fight this. This temptation will be great, but you WILL overcome it. You will act like a professional. You need to act like a disciplined agent of the Empire. You will not lower yourself. The Emperor will give me strength of mind and body.” You mutter to yourself. + +While you’re struggling with your inner demons you also need to focus on the real problem at hand which are the gnolls. Alison, like you, would prefer to do something more proactive to them rather than constantly waiting around for their attacks. Given that you’re now stuck with them, here’s where the svelk will come in handy. + +You could send them in to regularly launch guerilla raids against the gnolls in their own territory, of course this might be seen as using them as “disposable warriors” which is something that they were complaining about while on the Felkan front. + +About the only other purpose would be to use them as scouts in order to prepare for a large counter attack against the gnolls. Of course you really aren’t supposed to be doing that, as the orders are clear that you are to remain in occupied Felkans lands just in case your support is needed elsewhere. +> Use the svelk as skirmishers +While you aren’t going to defy direct orders you figure you can at least lessen the gnoll attacks and keep the svelk out of your hair at the same time. Alison is certainly supportive of the idea. + +You tell the svelk leaders what you want done and how you want it done. You get no dissension or even any grumbles. They either realize you mean business or they’re all silently conspiring against you to strike at a later time. Probably both, but for right now its enough that they just obey your orders. + +The next few weeks are relatively calm ones. The svelk are doing a good job of keeping the gnolls so off balanced that they haven’t been attacking. The troops have enjoyed the respite from battle, though you’re a bit bored by the continued lack of it. Still, you’re getting a bit of enjoyment out the svelk having to do all the grunt work and follow your orders. + +Eventually the svelk start losing some of their number and that’s when the complaints begin to start. Naturally they choose the one captain that is most likely to get under your skin… + +“What?” you ask when Eldolith enters your tent. +“My comrades and I wish to discuss the terms of our current assignment.” Eldolith says. +“Terms? There are no terms. You are to continue harassing the gnolls. What don’t you understand? It’s a simple enough task even for you.” + +Eldolith pauses. She wants to say something insulting. Something derogatory, but she can’t and she knows it. + +“Are we really so loathsome to you?” she asks. +“Hah! Is this a trick question? I mean you are joking right?” you reply. +“No, I’m being quite serious. I mean I know what you’re doing, we all do. You’re sending us out to fight the gnolls day after day with barely any rest. You’re hoping that we’ll either all get killed off, or we’ll all just end up leaving.” +“You don’t miss a thing do you, guess that’s why you’re part of the higher born eh? Hey, you’re mercs, if you don’t like the job you can always quit right?” +“Right, and we already protested about our less than stellar position on the Felkan Front. If we leave this job under the same circumstances, well it isn’t very good for our mercenary reputation now is it? Even if there is it the truth that the Empire is just using us as cannon fodder because they ran out of orcs!” +“You’re breaking my heart and the hearts of everyone else that has great love for your kind, oh wait nobody likes your kind. Get out of my tent, I’ve got nothing more to say on this matter…” you say and wave your hand dismissively. + +Eldolith is beginning to get angry. She can’t even form a sentence. Instead she looks behind her and goes back to the entryway of your tent and makes sure it’s closed. Then she turns around with a hostile stare. + +“Seriously? You really think you have a chance? Alright then, make your move.” You remark expecting Eldolith to attack you. + +Instead she takes off her sword sheath and begins unstrapping some of her armor. + +“What the hell are you doing?” +“I’ll be doing you in a few moments. That is what you want isn’t it?” she says. + +It takes you a moment to collect your thoughts before you can answer. + +“While I won’t deny your beauty, if you think you can fuck your way out of this situation, you’re sorely mistaken.” +“No, I don’t. But we have to come to some sort of compromise.” Eldolith says and finishes removing most of her clothing. She gets on all fours and begins crawling towards you in a seductive motion. You might not want it to, but this situation is definitely arousing you. Its not really Eldolith physical attractiveness though, it’s the opportunity to see this svelk so humbled that she has no choice but to debase herself before you like a common whore. + +“Okay…so what did you have in mind?” you ask as you look down on Eldolith who is now kneeling before you and starting to unbuckle your own belt. +“Oh perhaps maybe you could rotate the attacks on the gnolls? Like every few days perhaps your troops could launch raids on the gnolls instead? It isn’t like…(mmmm) you can’t spare a few. It would break up their monotony of not doing anything and we can get a chance to… (mmmm) rest.” +“Ahhh, alright alright, just shut up and keep doing what you’re doing.” You say and just let yourself enjoy being serviced and imagining that it’s really Mistress. + +The next day you approach Alison about the new plan. While she isn’t opposed to the idea, since she thinks the troops shouldn’t get complacent anyway, she’s a little puzzled by your sudden change. + +“I thought your plan was to force the svelk to leave or have them all slowly get killed off by the gnolls.” +“Eh, like you said. We probably shouldn’t let the troops get too complacent. Besides, the occasional foray into the gnoll occupied land isn’t really breaking orders.” +“Uh huh.” Alison says with a minor smirk. +“What?” +“Nothing.” +“No, you’ve got something to say, so say it.” You say with accusation. +“Sheesh, kind of defensive aren’t you? I don’t care if you’re sticking it to that svelk captain. I told you long ago when we started having our own intimate encounters that we didn’t have any hold on each other. So enjoy your little svelk piece of ass, I know you have…a preference for that.” + +Alison’s remark makes you angry. + +“It’s not even like that Alison! Its not about sex, its about her utter humiliation and…” +“Hold on there, I don’t need details! Look, I’m just going to tell you this. Whatever arrangement you have with her, just make sure you keep on top of it. Because I know you think you have everything under control, but in my eyes she’s just doing what women have been doing since the beginning of time.” +“And what’s that?” +“Manipulating a man with her pussy. And she’s a svelk on top of everything else, so that makes her fives times as tricky. I’d watch it if I were you.” +“Alison, I think I have more experience with svelk females than you do, unless you aren’t telling me something.” +“Ha ha, you wish. And keeping within that subject, do NOT even think about trying to orchestrate some sort of bizarre three way with us. I’m not into women and I’m definitely not into svelk.” Alison remarks. +“Wasn’t planning to.” +“Good, now I guess we better decide which platoon is going to go out there to raid the gnolls.” + +The plan is set into motion and there are no major complaints from Empire soldiers, it would appear that some of them indeed were getting itchy for combat. The svelk mercs are also satisfied or at least not complaining as much. + +As for you, you’ve been able to sate your desire for battle, by taking it out on Eldolith. You enjoy bedding her whenever you can and you are in no way gentle about it. You’re fairly abusive verbally and physically, but Eldolith just takes it in silence, or when you want her to, you make her beg or even thank you for the things you do to her. + +And the whole time you’re still fantasizing that it’s Mistress. You even call Eldolith that sometimes. It gets to a point where you don’t even let Eldolith go out on missions, you basically make her your personal “pleasure girl.” + +A month goes by and the siege on Yaquan is finally successful. A few Eyes managed to infiltrate and bring the walls down from within and from there, Roldan’s army did the rest. While you’re pleased to hear about a victory for the Empire, your own orders remain the same. You’re so busy enjoying degrading Eldolith that you’ve lost a little sight of what you were born to do. You don’t notice it, but Alison certainly does. + +“Is this a good time to speak with you?” Alison asks looking cautiously into your tent. +“Sure. What’s up?” you say as you sharpen your sword. +“I just wanted to tell you that apparently we’ve been making so many successful raids on the gnolls that they’ve been pulling back. We could advance and take their territory if we wanted to. I wouldn’t be surprised if the surviving Felkans even welcomed us as liberators.” +“That would certainly be a change from how they usually welcome us, which is not at all.” +“Indeed. So…?” Alison asks as if you have something more to say. +“So what?” +“Well, I just thought that maybe you had heard something from the Emperor. A messenger from him perhaps. I mean the Yaquan siege was successful and there are no signs that we are needed to support General Roldan’s army anytime soon. I mean it’s starting to get a bit frustrating just sitting here not really advancing especially when we’re beginning to beat back the enemy.” +“Haven’t heard anything, so our orders to hold this position still stand. Sorry.” You say continuing to sharpen your sword. + +Alison stares at you with dismay. + +“Yeah.” Alison says and starts to leave, but you stop her. +“Is there a problem?” +“Just getting restless because I don’t feel like I’ve been actively doing anything lately. You know something YOU used to feel before you became so enamored with your svelk slave girl.” +“So…what? You want me to visit your tent sometime? Because I can do that, but you told me …” + +Alison interrupts you with more exasperation. + +“No, contrary to your belief, my world does not revolve around your dick. What I AM getting concerned about is my battalion. I had hoped this command would involve a lot more active combat and less waiting around. If I wanted to do that, I could’ve stayed in Rask. You used to feel the same way as I remember.” +“Alison, orders are orders, you should know that better than anyone. What do you want me to do? We’re supposed to stay put and that’s that. All I can tell you is make the best of the situation.” +“Like you have? Look I’m just saying, we’ve already bent orders by launching raids gnoll occupied land anyway. Surely we can do something similar now.” + +Alison has a bit of a point. +> Take the land +Orders or not, it would be foolish to not take advantage of the situation. You’re going to support Alison’s decision to advance and if there are repercussions then you’ll take the responsibility. Alison seems relieved that you’ve listened to her and goes to make preparations. + +“Alison, before you leave, you were also right about me getting distracted. I’m sorry I haven’t been keeping my mind on what’s really important lately.” You say. +“Well, I’m just glad you’re starting to come to your senses. However, I suppose in the scheme of things, there was no major harm done. You’re not the first guy to think with his dick and abuse his power. Congratulations, you’re true Empire officer after all!” Alison laughs and leaves. + +You don’t laugh because you were supposed to be better than that. When you think about it, you weren’t even the aggressor when you started your involvement. Hell, Alison was probably right about that too. Eldolith was manipulating you from the start. For all you know she was planted here by Mistress for that reason. For what exact purpose you’re not sure, but the best thing you can do is to put a stop to it right now. + +When Eldolith arrives in your tent, you’re packing up some supplies. + +“Good, right on time. We’re going to move out soon. You can go join your merc band and stay there, its over.” +“What?” +“You heard me. Figured you’d be happy about it.” + +Eldolith isn’t. + +“Are you fucking kidding me? After all the nasty vile degrading shit I did, you’re just tossing me aside like a common whore?!” +“Well you did behave like one. And please don’t act like there wasn’t some sort of motive of your own. I rotated the raids. You got what you wanted as well, hope it was worth it.” + +Eldolith doesn’t answer she’s too mad to speak. Instead she just storms out of the tent, which gives you a little chuckle. + +“Sheesh, if I’d known that would piss her off so severely I would’ve done that a week ago.” You remark to yourself + +The battalion soon moves into the previously occupied gnoll territory and indeed it is as the scouts have been saying. The gnolls have completely pulled out or at least that have from the immediate area. There are probably still some attempting to hold the border territory and they are definitely still going to be beyond the border so defense is still a top priority. + +As for the Felkan communities, there isn’t too much left. The gnolls didn’t leave too many people alive. Your army makes the best of what settlements you do find in adequate condition. The Felkans offer no resistance; in fact they don’t show much emotion at all. Its like most are numb from whatever terror the gnolls caused. + +After a couple weeks go by scouts begin sighting gnolls lurking about on the outskirts of your perimeters. Not wishing to linger about like you have before, you and Alison agree to just move in and eliminate the rest of them. + +The initial assault is fairly successful, but then you are caught off guard and you curse yourself for not being more careful. The gnolls have been luring you into a false sense of superiority. + +The gnolls have been breeding and training a large group of wyverns within a small mountain in the area. They’ve also been bringing reinforcements from beyond the Felkan borders. You’re taken off guard enough that you actually have to fall back before you’re completely overrun. + +It is during the chaos of one of these retreats that revenge is finally enacted. + +After doing battle with a small band of gnolls, you get separated from the main Empire battalion. You never do get a chance to meet up with them again, you do however bump into a group of svelk. You don’t even have time to react before you’re riddled with svelk crossbow bolts. You collapse to the ground, bloodied and dying. + +In typical svelk fashion Eldolith shows up now that you’re in no condition to do anything to her. + +“My mother isn’t going to like this, but I don’t give a shit. Besides, you were starting to get cozy with that blonde monkey again, which made this whole stupid idea of hers pointless.” + +Mother? Could Eldolith’s mother be Mistress? + +Eldolith crouches near your body and whispers in your ear. + +“My only regret is that you’re not going to experience the pain you fucking deserve. Don’t worry though, you will be quite a sight when they find your body though.” + +With this final threat in your mind, you die of your wounds. + +The svelk carry your body all the way back to Empire occupied territory where Eldolith does work to it personally. Then she orders it left so that Empire soldiers can find it before leaving the area with her group completely. + +Members of Alison’s battalion find it and assume that perhaps the gnolls got a hold of you, but when Alison sees that your body has been practically flayed, your genitals have been cut off and stuffed in your mouth along with your own dagger shoved up your rectum, she knows it was most likely Eldolith. + +Alison decides the blame the gnolls anyway. Mainly because it rallies the troops to fight harder and partly because while she had no love for Eldolith, she understands why she did it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While you aren’t going to defy direct orders you figure you can at least lessen the gnoll attacks and keep the svelk out of your hair at the same time. Alison is certainly supportive of the idea. + +You tell the svelk leaders what you want done and how you want it done. You get no dissension or even any grumbles. They either realize you mean business or they’re all silently conspiring against you to strike at a later time. Probably both, but for right now its enough that they just obey your orders. + +The next few weeks are relatively calm ones. The svelk are doing a good job of keeping the gnolls so off balanced that they haven’t been attacking. The troops have enjoyed the respite from battle, though you’re a bit bored by the continued lack of it. Still, you’re getting a bit of enjoyment out the svelk having to do all the grunt work and follow your orders. + +Eventually the svelk start losing some of their number and that’s when the complaints begin to start. Naturally they choose the one captain that is most likely to get under your skin… + +“What?” you ask when Eldolith enters your tent. +“My comrades and I wish to discuss the terms of our current assignment.” Eldolith says. +“Terms? There are no terms. You are to continue harassing the gnolls. What don’t you understand? It’s a simple enough task even for you.” + +Eldolith pauses. She wants to say something insulting. Something derogatory, but she can’t and she knows it. + +“Are we really so loathsome to you?” she asks. +“Hah! Is this a trick question? I mean you are joking right?” you reply. +“No, I’m being quite serious. I mean I know what you’re doing, we all do. You’re sending us out to fight the gnolls day after day with barely any rest. You’re hoping that we’ll either all get killed off, or we’ll all just end up leaving.” +“You don’t miss a thing do you, guess that’s why you’re part of the higher born eh? Hey, you’re mercs, if you don’t like the job you can always quit right?” +“Right, and we already protested about our less than stellar position on the Felkan Front. If we leave this job under the same circumstances, well it isn’t very good for our mercenary reputation now is it? Even if there is it the truth that the Empire is just using us as cannon fodder because they ran out of orcs!” +“You’re breaking my heart and the hearts of everyone else that has great love for your kind, oh wait nobody likes your kind. Get out of my tent, I’ve got nothing more to say on this matter…” you say and wave your hand dismissively. + +Eldolith is beginning to get angry. She can’t even form a sentence. Instead she looks behind her and goes back to the entryway of your tent and makes sure it’s closed. Then she turns around with a hostile stare. + +“Seriously? You really think you have a chance? Alright then, make your move.” You remark expecting Eldolith to attack you. + +Instead she takes off her sword sheath and begins unstrapping some of her armor. + +“What the hell are you doing?” +“I’ll be doing you in a few moments. That is what you want isn’t it?” she says. + +It takes you a moment to collect your thoughts before you can answer. + +“While I won’t deny your beauty, if you think you can fuck your way out of this situation, you’re sorely mistaken.” +“No, I don’t. But we have to come to some sort of compromise.” Eldolith says and finishes removing most of her clothing. She gets on all fours and begins crawling towards you in a seductive motion. You might not want it to, but this situation is definitely arousing you. Its not really Eldolith physical attractiveness though, it’s the opportunity to see this svelk so humbled that she has no choice but to debase herself before you like a common whore. + +“Okay…so what did you have in mind?” you ask as you look down on Eldolith who is now kneeling before you and starting to unbuckle your own belt. +“Oh perhaps maybe you could rotate the attacks on the gnolls? Like every few days perhaps your troops could launch raids on the gnolls instead? It isn’t like…(mmmm) you can’t spare a few. It would break up their monotony of not doing anything and we can get a chance to… (mmmm) rest.” +“Ahhh, alright alright, just shut up and keep doing what you’re doing.” You say and just let yourself enjoy being serviced and imagining that it’s really Mistress. + +The next day you approach Alison about the new plan. While she isn’t opposed to the idea, since she thinks the troops shouldn’t get complacent anyway, she’s a little puzzled by your sudden change. + +“I thought your plan was to force the svelk to leave or have them all slowly get killed off by the gnolls.” +“Eh, like you said. We probably shouldn’t let the troops get too complacent. Besides, the occasional foray into the gnoll occupied land isn’t really breaking orders.” +“Uh huh.” Alison says with a minor smirk. +“What?” +“Nothing.” +“No, you’ve got something to say, so say it.” You say with accusation. +“Sheesh, kind of defensive aren’t you? I don’t care if you’re sticking it to that svelk captain. I told you long ago when we started having our own intimate encounters that we didn’t have any hold on each other. So enjoy your little svelk piece of ass, I know you have…a preference for that.” + +Alison’s remark makes you angry. + +“It’s not even like that Alison! Its not about sex, its about her utter humiliation and…” +“Hold on there, I don’t need details! Look, I’m just going to tell you this. Whatever arrangement you have with her, just make sure you keep on top of it. Because I know you think you have everything under control, but in my eyes she’s just doing what women have been doing since the beginning of time.” +“And what’s that?” +“Manipulating a man with her pussy. And she’s a svelk on top of everything else, so that makes her fives times as tricky. I’d watch it if I were you.” +“Alison, I think I have more experience with svelk females than you do, unless you aren’t telling me something.” +“Ha ha, you wish. And keeping within that subject, do NOT even think about trying to orchestrate some sort of bizarre three way with us. I’m not into women and I’m definitely not into svelk.” Alison remarks. +“Wasn’t planning to.” +“Good, now I guess we better decide which platoon is going to go out there to raid the gnolls.” + +The plan is set into motion and there are no major complaints from Empire soldiers, it would appear that some of them indeed were getting itchy for combat. The svelk mercs are also satisfied or at least not complaining as much. + +As for you, you’ve been able to sate your desire for battle, by taking it out on Eldolith. You enjoy bedding her whenever you can and you are in no way gentle about it. You’re fairly abusive verbally and physically, but Eldolith just takes it in silence, or when you want her to, you make her beg or even thank you for the things you do to her. + +And the whole time you’re still fantasizing that it’s Mistress. You even call Eldolith that sometimes. It gets to a point where you don’t even let Eldolith go out on missions, you basically make her your personal “pleasure girl.” + +A month goes by and the siege on Yaquan is finally successful. A few Eyes managed to infiltrate and bring the walls down from within and from there, Roldan’s army did the rest. While you’re pleased to hear about a victory for the Empire, your own orders remain the same. You’re so busy enjoying degrading Eldolith that you’ve lost a little sight of what you were born to do. You don’t notice it, but Alison certainly does. + +“Is this a good time to speak with you?” Alison asks looking cautiously into your tent. +“Sure. What’s up?” you say as you sharpen your sword. +“I just wanted to tell you that apparently we’ve been making so many successful raids on the gnolls that they’ve been pulling back. We could advance and take their territory if we wanted to. I wouldn’t be surprised if the surviving Felkans even welcomed us as liberators.” +“That would certainly be a change from how they usually welcome us, which is not at all.” +“Indeed. So…?” Alison asks as if you have something more to say. +“So what?” +“Well, I just thought that maybe you had heard something from the Emperor. A messenger from him perhaps. I mean the Yaquan siege was successful and there are no signs that we are needed to support General Roldan’s army anytime soon. I mean it’s starting to get a bit frustrating just sitting here not really advancing especially when we’re beginning to beat back the enemy.” +“Haven’t heard anything, so our orders to hold this position still stand. Sorry.” You say continuing to sharpen your sword. + +Alison stares at you with dismay. + +“Yeah.” Alison says and starts to leave, but you stop her. +“Is there a problem?” +“Just getting restless because I don’t feel like I’ve been actively doing anything lately. You know something YOU used to feel before you became so enamored with your svelk slave girl.” +“So…what? You want me to visit your tent sometime? Because I can do that, but you told me …” + +Alison interrupts you with more exasperation. + +“No, contrary to your belief, my world does not revolve around your dick. What I AM getting concerned about is my battalion. I had hoped this command would involve a lot more active combat and less waiting around. If I wanted to do that, I could’ve stayed in Rask. You used to feel the same way as I remember.” +“Alison, orders are orders, you should know that better than anyone. What do you want me to do? We’re supposed to stay put and that’s that. All I can tell you is make the best of the situation.” +“Like you have? Look I’m just saying, we’ve already bent orders by launching raids gnoll occupied land anyway. Surely we can do something similar now.” + +Alison has a bit of a point. +> Stay put +Alison might have a point, but you’re not willing to defy the Emperor so directly. + +“Nothing can be done, we’re just going to have to stay here.” You remark. + +Alison throws her hands up in the air and rolls her eyes. + +“That’s not going to change a thing you know.” You say. +“Oh believe me, if I thought it would, I would’ve done it a long time ago. I’m just going to say one more thing, and I don’t give a shit if this is stepping out of my boundaries. This little arrangement you have with Eldolith is getting out of hand. I can’t believe I’d actually start feeling sorry for a svelk, but a couple nights ago when I was making my own perusal of our perimeter I caught her sitting by herself actually crying. I didn’t even think that was possible for a svelk. Of course she tried to play it off and told me to mind my business and called me a blonde monkey, but she wasn’t fooling anyone.” +“Really? She was crying? Bitch doesn’t cry when we’re together, glad to hear she at least does though.” You chuckle. + +Alison is shocked by your gleeful sociopathic behavior. + +“By the Emperor, even when I served with fucking Kane, I never heard him speak in such a manner. Look I know most of what we do for the Empire is pretty ruthless and merciless. I also know you’re probably among the most cold hearted when it comes to such things. But what you’re doing is…” +“What am I doing Alison? What am I doing that is oh so terrible? Didn’t you tell me years ago that you’ve run into Empire officers that take advantage of underlings via sexual favors?” +“Yeah, and I never said that was right either. Also I said sexual favors. The key word being sex. Whatever it is you’re doing to Eldolith is going beyond sex and you know it.” +“So what? She’s a svelk anyway. She’s not even a proper Empire citizen, let alone soldier. Hey I’ll tell you this, the svelk would treat ALL of us like I treat Eldolith if they could get away with it. I know that from experience.” + +“So that’s your excuse? Because a svelk woman was cruel to you, you’re going to act like her? You’re going to act like a svelk?” Alison says which causes you to grab her by her throat and slam her to the ground. + +Alison’s eyes widen in fear when she sees this person that she thought she knew stare at her with a murderous rage and squeeze tightly around her throat. + +“Don’t you EVER fucking accuse me of that. EVER. You do that again, and you’ll be in this tent right along side that svelk cunt. We’ll have that three way you said you didn’t want. And you know what? NOBODY is going to do a damn thing about it, because I’M in fucking charge here. Got it?” + +Alison continues to stare as you slowly release your grip to she can talk. + +“Got it.” She answers. + +You get off of Alison who can’t leave your tent quick enough. + +Later you begin to feel like you went a little too far with Alison. You really didn’t mean to, but her words just set you off. She should’ve known not to compare you to a svelk. The next day you try to speak with Alison, but she’s very distant. She doesn’t want to talk about what happened and as far as she’s concerned the pair of you should just keep things professional now. + +“Alison, I didn’t mean…” +“If you really do have any sort of respect for me at all, you’ll just leave me be unless its concerning military matters.” Alison remarks. + +You back away from Alison, you realize you’ve destroyed your relationship with her forever. + +You go back to your tent and begin pacing back and forth thinking about your mistake. The more you think about it, the angrier you get. You’re angry with yourself mainly, but then you realize something. + +Eldolith was the initial aggressor in your arrangement. Not you. This might’ve been a set up right for something else right from the start. It was Mistress! She did this! She was jealous of your relationship with Alison, so Eldolith was sent to fuck it up. + +Even worse, you fell for it all and you hit the final nail in the coffin yourself. + +Now seething with fury, you storm out of your tent and head over to the svelk encampment. The svelk barely have time to realize who is attacking them before you cut down several of them. You start shouting for Eldolith to come out along with how you intend to + +The Empire encampment at first thinks gnolls are attacking, but when some of the troops arrive and see you massacring svelk, they aren’t entirely sure what to do. + +“Sir, calm down! I know you don’t…Ack!” a soldier says, trying to restrain you, but only gets a sword in the stomach for his trouble instead. Another soldier tries to reason with you, and you cut him down too. You’re completely unreasonable at this point and the only thing that’s going to stop you is either your death or Eldolith’s. + +As you set fire to three more svelk with a fireball you begin laughing at the carnage you’re causing. Still you aren’t going to be truly happy until you find Eldolith. + +And then you see her running in the distance. You cast a lightning bolt at her, which drops her instantly. You know it isn’t enough to kill her though, but that wasn’t your intent anyway. You pull out your dagger and walk towards her. + +“It’s time to learn another lesson Mistress. And its gonna hurt you a lot more than it will me.” You say. +“I’m…not Mistress…you crazy monkey…” Eldolith manages to utter. + +At this point you don’t even hear her. Indeed it’s probably not only irrelevant at this point, but most likely unclear if you’re even mentally in the present because all you can see is Mistress’ face. You saw her face on all the svelk you killed. You enjoyed killing her over and over. And now you’re going to enjoy killing her again. + +Or at least you would have if a arrow through your neck didn’t stop you first. + +You gasp and clutch at your throat before you slump down to the ground a few inches away from Eldolith. + +“Shit! He’s dead!” one of the Empire soldiers remarks. +“Hm. I’m surprised myself. It’s been awhile since I used a bow.” Alison answers. +“You killed him! You really killed him!” another remarks. +“Yes, but he needed to be put down. You saw him kill Empire soldiers.” Alison says. +“But wasn’t he the Emperor’s right hand man or something?” +“Yes. Are there any svelk left alive?” +“No, I think he killed them all.” +“Not all of them.” Alison says. + +Alison takes aim with her bow again and aims for Eldolith who is just starting to shake off the effects of the lightning bolt. She slumps down dead as well. + +“Okay this is what we’re going to do…” Alison says when turning towards her soldiers. + +Alison neatly explains away everything with a gnoll attack. It also helps that the gnolls did attack soon after this incident in greater force than before. Fortunately for Alison she’s well respected and liked by the soldiers so nobody ever contradicts her story. Not to mention they’re glad to be rid of the svelk and to a small degree you as well given how fearful they all were of you. + +Still, part of Alison always regretted that it had to be done at all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You don’t like disagreeing with the Emperor’s strategic decisions and you certainly don’t want to deal with svelk in your camp, but from what you know of Roldan replacing him now wouldn’t be a good move as he is the best-qualified general. The only person you can think of that would be better is yourself, but the Emperor has made it quite clear he wants you to stay put, so you aren’t going to argue the issue. + +“If you believe the svelk can be useful as support on the gnoll front, then I shall figure out a way to make it work.” You remark, which seems to surprise the Emperor. +“Mm, very well. You sure it won’t be a problem?” +“No, no problem. However at the slightest sign of some sort of treachery or them not pulling their weight then I’ll suggest the next decree you pass be one that executes all svelk in Empire territory.” + +Hah, trust me, I’ve nearly had that one on the list for centuries. I know you’ll be able to handle this though. Just wish everyone was as competent as you.” The Emperor says and gives a glare at Jacob who is still briskly going through some papers. +“I really do think Jacob is trying his best. He only wants what’s good for the Empire.” +“Then he better start doing a better job. Anyway let’s get on with it.” + +The Emperor proceeds to tell Mistress that the svelk mercenary bands will be assigned to the gnoll front, but that they will ultimately answer to you and that any problems from them will result in mass executions. Mistress doesn’t seem at all bothered by this; in fact she simply chuckles and says that’s fine. + +The Emperor then goes on to tell Jacob that General Roldan better start making more progress soon or he will have another general take his place. Then he says he has to meet with Marik. + +“I sometimes wonder if he just uses his madness as an excuse to be absent minded and claim he didn’t know there was a meeting. I just hope he’s actually made progress on his project he convinced me to proceed with. Okay all of you are dismissed.” The Emperor remarks and the rest of you leave his chambers. + +You expect Mistress to make some sort of remark as you’re all walking out of the palace, but she ends up quickly walking ahead of you instead. Jacob on the other hand takes the opportunity. + +“I just wanted to thank you for once again trying to shield me from the Emperor’s wrath, though I fear that it won’t be long before my services are no longer needed. That day is coming soon. I know it.” +“You’re worrying too much as usual. The Emperor knows you’re indispensible.” +“No YOU’RE indispensible. That crazy derro Marik is indispensible. Even that svelk bitch is considered indispensible, though I really don’t know why. Me? I’m just another bureaucratic bean counting pencil-pushing advisor that’s getting old. There are several just waiting to take my place. You know I had twelve attempts to poison me in the last year?” +“By who?” +“By other bean counting pencil-pushing bureaucrats obviously. I’m sure you know that’s how I got my job. Eliminated the previous advisor. Of course with the way things are going, the Emperor himself is likely to do it personally. I just wish I could get him to see that this war is a drain on the Empire. Even if we win, the victory still won’t outweigh the amount of cost in resources, gold, population we spent to pursue it. I mean sure we have the land, but a lot of it has been rendered unusable due to the slash and burn policy that’s been favored. We haven’t even left a lot of people alive to tax! Now this thing with Roldan, I really don’t know what he expects me to do.” +“How is internal security lately?” you ask. +“Its fine. Good all things considered. The Eyes have successfully replaced the shadows it seems as far as that is concerned. Reputation is everything.” +“Do you think you could re-assign some of them and it not affect domestic safety?” +“What do you mean?” + +You explain that perhaps using some Eyes as assassins and spies might work better than the usual military scouts. Perhaps their expertise of blending in, stealth and other such tactics can get them to sneak in the city and bring it down from within. + +“I can’t believe I didn’t think of that. In fact, why didn’t the Emperor think of that? It’s certainly an idea worthy of consideration and Warrick would be an excellent candidate to lead such an operation. If the Emperor believes I have more input in this matter than I actually do, I might as well make such accusations true and hopefully successful for my sake.” Jacob remarks. +“I’m sure this plan will hasten the fall of the Felkan Kingdom. You’ll have not one but two Eternals in vital positions on the front lines now.” +“Don’t you mean three? You didn’t include yourself.” +“Oh, well I’m doing my part sure, but…nevermind.” +“But you want to be where Roldan is.” +“I don’t even necessarily want to lead the main attack force at this point, I just feel like I should at least be part of it. I know the Emperor explained to me he doesn’t want to throw me into the meat grinder of war because he sees greater potential in me, but I feel like sometimes I’m not being able to live up to that potential.” + +Jacob pats you on the side of your arm. + +“Now you’re the one worrying too much. You are more vital to this war than you believe. This advice you just gave me proves that. The Emperor is just well…a little protective of you because he’s so proud of you. Can you blame him? Don’t worry; your day to really shine will come some day. Maybe even sooner than you think.” + +After Jacob’s minor pep talk you feel a little better about your own position, of course then you remember you now have a bunch of svelk assigned to your camp. + +Alison is probably slightly less happy about it than you are. + +“Was there nothing that could be done?” Alison asks. +“I told you, it was either this or replace General Roldan and that would’ve been a major strategic mistake.” +“Well are you going to be okay with this?” +“Me? Sure. Guidelines have already been established, I’m ultimately in charge of them and believe me I’ve every intention to not letting them get away with shit. I’ll tell them as soon as they start arriving. In the meantime, let’s make arrangements for our new allied support. Better that we do it now before they think they can just make themselves at home here.” + +No sooner do the svelk mercenaries start arriving, you begin laying down the rules of how things are going to be to all the respective captains in private. They are of course unenthused about such things, but given that you didn’t dress them down in front of everyone most grudgingly comply with your decrees. + +There is one captain by the name of Eldolith, however who just manages to rub you the wrong way… + +“Yes, yes, I’ve already been briefed on the situation. We all have, so you can stop wasting your time by asserting your pitiable need for dominance.” Eldolith remarks. + +You look at the haughty svelk captain and you already know who you see before you. You’re feeling a mixture of things right now, but you told the Emperor that you were going to make this work, so you’re going to at least get a certain amount of enjoyment out of it. + +“But if I don’t keep reinforcing it, then you’ll never truly grasp the idea that you are subservient to me. And as we all know it’s important to keep the lesser born in their place. That is the svelk way is it not?” you say. + +Eldolith nearly makes a retort, but stops. You aren’t letting her off that easy. + +“Oh? You wish to say something else? Maybe that I am not a svelk and that I am the lesser born? Perhaps something about how humans are nothing more than hairless Sul Monkeys? Come on, say what you want. I’ve heard it all before by your kind and it’s the same old shit. Come on, just give me an excuse.” you say and then grab her by the throat and begin to squeeze while your hot breath invades her nostrils. + +Eldolith says nothing, she doesn’t even try to resist she just continues to stare at you defiantly, accepting of death if necessary or whatever else you have in mind. + +“You don’t fool me svelk bitch, deep down you’re scared…or maybe…maybe you’re getting excited? Yeah, I bet that’s it…I know what YOU like…” you say and your other hand begins to wander touching Eldolith’s body. Then you realize what you’re doing and you immediately stop and make haste back to the Empire side of the camp. + +Alison asks you if everything went all right, and you sharply dismiss her by exclaiming that of course everything is fine. Alison doesn’t take too much offense since she figures having the svelk in camp is probably going to put you in a bad mood. + +You wonder now if you didn’t want the svelk transferred here so you could have the opportunity to unleash some of your lingering desires. To get a gleeful sadistic pleasure of verbally abusing them or sending them on dangerous missions, or even killing one of them yourself if they step out of line. You don’t even want to dwell on what you felt like doing to Eldolith. + +Did Mistress plan this somehow? She couldn’t have. It was your choice. + +“By the Emperor, get a hold of yourself! This is all on you. You need to fight this. This temptation will be great, but you WILL overcome it. You will act like a professional. You need to act like a disciplined agent of the Empire. You will not lower yourself. The Emperor will give me strength of mind and body.” You mutter to yourself. + +While you’re struggling with your inner demons you also need to focus on the real problem at hand which are the gnolls. Alison, like you, would prefer to do something more proactive to them rather than constantly waiting around for their attacks. Given that you’re now stuck with them, here’s where the svelk will come in handy. + +You could send them in to regularly launch guerilla raids against the gnolls in their own territory, of course this might be seen as using them as “disposable warriors” which is something that they were complaining about while on the Felkan front. + +About the only other purpose would be to use them as scouts in order to prepare for a large counter attack against the gnolls. Of course you really aren’t supposed to be doing that, as the orders are clear that you are to remain in occupied Felkans lands just in case your support is needed elsewhere. +> Use the svelk as scouts +This may be the most “rebellious” idea you’ve had, but you can’t just sit here like a Felkan waiting to get attacked. You need the battle, you were born for it. Not to mention if you’re actively fighting someone it should keep your mind off of other things. + +Now all you have to do is to convince Alison. True she is technically in charge of the battalion and you have always respected that, but if push came to shove you could easily pull rank on her and you’d rather not do such a thing. + +Fortunately, it doesn’t come to that. + +“It’s about time we took the fight to those mongrel dogs.” she says with a little enthusiasm, but then her cautious side comes out. “But this plan, is this approved by the Emperor?” +“No, but you don’t need to worry about that. I will take full responsibility if he gets angry about it. I’ll just say I took command of your battalion.” +“Hah, I always knew you were going to do that some day, anyway.” +“Sorry, but I can’t think of any other way.” +“Don’t apologize to me, I won’t have to face the Emperor’s wrath, well I hope I won’t at least.” +“Like I said, don’t worry about that. And don’t worry about me either. I don’t want to sound prideful, but I’m fairly confident the Emperor won’t even get too angry with me, especially since I intend on wiping out the immediate gnoll threat.” +“What happens if we get called to aid Roldan?” +“If it’s before we launch our major attack on gnoll lands then we’ll comply. If it’s during, well we’ll give what aid we can. The main thing is to get this finished as quickly as possible hence why I’m sending svelk scouts first to give us info on key locations of where to strike.” +“You think we can trust them to do their job properly?” +“Who knows, but they’re still getting paid well and this is a much easier assignment than where they previously were, so they will most likely do their jobs. Besides I’ll make sure to send some of our stealthier troops with them and make a point of how their safety is also a priority if they don’t want me to think that they’re up to some sort of treachery. They won’t like it, but who gives a shit, they’re svelk.” + +Alison laughs at your comment and then says she’ll start getting her end of things prepared. + +You tell the svelk leaders what you want done and how you want it done. You get no dissension or even any grumbles. They either realize you mean business or they’re all silently conspiring against you to strike at a later time. Probably both, but for right now its enough that they just obey your orders. + +The next few weeks are semi-anxious ones while you’re still waiting for svelk intelligence reports. You really hope you can take down the gnoll horde or at least cripple it before anything on Felkan front pops up. You experience a few gnoll raids during this time, but they aren’t anything out of the ordinary. If the gnolls are on to any spying going on they haven’t changed their usual attacks. + +Eventually the svelk bands start trickling back in and while most of the information is just standard intelligence that will come in useful during the main attack, one of the reports is more alarming. + +“The gnolls have a large group of wyverns in that small mountain in the distance. From what I can tell they’ve been keeping them fed just enough that they’re still strong, but not enough that they’re fat and happy. They’re quite vicious. It’s a wonder the flying beasts don’t just eat the gnolls, but it would appear the mongrel dog men have a way with the creatures. Probably been training them since they hatched.” Eldolith remarks. +“How many wyverns exactly?” you ask. +“Not exactly sure, we couldn’t get that far into the caves without being detected since the place is extremely heavily guarded, but a good number of them. Enough to make things problematic if they attacked. I might hazard a guess that maybe they’ve been trying to lull you all into a false sense of complacency, but that almost seems a bit too cunning for gnolls. Still, its amazing what the…lesser born can accomplish when they aren’t taken seriously.” Eldolith says and gives you a look as if that comment was directed towards you specifically. Other svelk in the tent move a bit nervously since they know she’s possibly endangering them as well. + +Why is she testing you like this? + +Ignoring her comment you get back to the business at hand. + +“Okay, well this changes things a bit, but we’ll make arrangements. Glad you all found this out. Your actions have helped the Empire immensely. I’ll make sure you all get a little extra gold for this service, dismissed.” + +As everyone leaves your tent, Eldolith stays behind. + +“Is their something else you needed captain?” you ask as you mentally prepare yourself. +“Funny I was going to ask the same of you. I thought that perhaps you’d like to discipline me for my earlier words.” +“That won’t be necessary in light of your latest report on the gnolls. I’m willing to let it pass.” +“Oh? Well perhaps maybe I’d like my reward then for my work.” Eldolith remarks and then moves over to you which causes you to move back. +“What the hell do you think your doing?” +“Don’t worry, I’m not trying to kill you. I know I’d be no match for a great warrior like you. I just thought that maybe you’d like to take this opportunity to get to know me better. I see you still staring at me sometimes, probably wishing that you’d done what you wanted to do when we first met. Your hand clenched around my throat, your loins pulsating and wanting to violate me. Well here I am.” + +At this point Eldolith takes your hand and wraps her lips around your index finger making “mmm” noises. While you can’t deny the desires, you also can’t help but find humor in this since you now know the clumsy intentions for certain. + +You pull your finger out of her mouth and laugh. + +“Why are you laughing?” Eldolith asks in annoyed tone. +“You! This! This is a joke. I had my doubts at first when the svelk all got transferred here, but now I know for certain. Mistress put you up specifically to this to fuck with me. Well it won’t work.” +“Are you sure? You seem pretty distracted.” Eldolith says attempting to be seductive again. +“Ha ha, I won’t deny your beauty and my own fucked up cravings, but sorry your techniques in mindfuckery are sorely lacking and I’ve had the master, or Mistress if you prefer. You’re not even worth me worrying about anymore now that I know your game, which is that you’re just a pawn in Mistress’ own twisted game, whatever that is.” + +Your condescension and dismissal is bad enough, but what seems to set off Eldolith the most is… +“Stop calling my mother by that ridiculous name! I don’t know why she insists on adopting your lesser born titles and nicknames!” +“Mother?” you ask genuinely surprised. +“Yes, and I told her this was a stupid idea in the first place! She should be taking steps to return our people back to their rightful place, not playing mind games with some monkey grunt. Ugh! I can’t believe I sucked on your finger.” +“I’m sure it was everything you dreamed about. So you’re her daughter. I have to admit I thought there was a resemblance and it wasn’t just that haughty strut or those cold eyes that are so common to your race… wait so what is her real name?” +“Ask her yourself! I’m done here. From now on I’m just doing my duty as a merc until I’m transferred out of this human hellhole.” Eldolith shouts and storms off. + +Well this little incident has been bizarre to say the least. Mistress basically sent her own daughter to have sex with you. You don’t pretend to understand the mind of the svelk, but what kind of fucked up family dynamic do they have and for what purpose? Is this some sort of ploy to keep you unfocused so you’ll make a critical mistake somewhere? Eldolith did mention about taking steps to return her people to their rightful place and how she’s obviously pissed that Mistress isn’t doing it. + +Of course knowing Mistress, maybe messing with you is part of the greater plan? But how? In any case you can’t worry about it now since you do have to get back to accomplishing your immediate task. You meet back up with Alison to tell her of the new plan due to the wyverns. + +“So, I saw your svelk girlfriend stomp out of your tent pretty mad. Trouble in paradise?” Alison asks. +“Hardly. Just more svelk bullshit. And she isn’t my girlfriend.” +“Hey, I said we weren’t betrothed to each other when we started our own little intimate encounters so you don’t need to hide anything. I hear enough things around the camp about you two.” + +NOW it hits you. + +“Oh shit, THAT’S what this is all about! I can’t believe it!” you start laughing again. +“What?” Alison asks. +“She’s jealous of you!” +“Eldolith?” +“No! Her mother, Mistress!” +“Mistress is Eldolith’s mother? +“Yeah, and she sent her daughter to have sex with me hoping it would fuck up OUR relationship!” + +You tell Alison everything that happened between you and Eldolith, you even confess everything that happened the first time you met her which is probably why the rumors were going around about the two of you. Alison believes you since you’ve never been one to lie let alone to her. + +“So wait… your former instructor is jealous of me so she sent her daughter to have sex with you?” Alison says. +“It’s the only explanation.” +“I dunno, I mean…wow…that seems pretty hard to believe.” +“Believe it. The svelk mind is capable of some truly twisted petty shit.” +“Well I can believe that, but I’m just having a hard time believing that a svelk female would be jealous of the appearance of…as they would say a monkey.” +“Don’t say that, you’re beautiful.” You say. +“Okay I know I’m not ugly, but beautiful is pushing it.” +“Not at all. You’re a soldier, a warrior of the Empire, a maiden of battle striking fear and terror into the hearts of our enemies. I’ve seen you slay many in battle with a skill that many could only hope to achieve. I’ve seen your sword and armor drenched in the blood of our enemies and the dirt of the battlefield. With each battle you win, with each enemy you kill you carry out the will of the Empire and the Emperor. Your cause is so pure and righteous… how could I not find that beautiful? + +Alison smiles at your unique attempt at compliments. + +“Well when you make it sound like that, how can I disagree?” + +You and Alison spend some intimate time that night and in the next few days you begin your risky attack on gnoll territory. It goes well at first, and you aren’t suddenly taken by surprise when flocks of wyvern riders try to swoop in on the battlefield. + +Some of the peasants from the Felkan towns that were occupied by the gnolls actually welcome you as saviors and immediately pledge themselves to the Empire, mostly because the Felkan Kingdom failed to defend them in the first place and that any ruler is better than the gnolls. This comes somewhat as an unexpected benefit to your decision. + +After a month of slaughtering gnolls, two things major things happen, one of them good and one of them possibly bad. + +The siege on Yaquan is finally successful. A few Eyes managed to infiltrate and bring the walls down from within and from there, Roldan’s army did the rest. While you’re pleased to hear about a victory for the Empire, you’ve also just received a message telling you to return to the capital immediately. It would appear that your proactive approach to the gnolls has finally caught the Emperor’s attention. You don’t know if he’ll be angry or pleased, or what. + +The second part of this dilemma is that you are still trying to make that one big push to wipe out the majority of the gnoll forces. Alison naturally says that if you have to leave she can handle it without you and you have no doubt about that, but that’s not the issue. It’s more that you’d like to finish what you started and that if you are going to return to the Emperor to answer for your disobedience, you’d like to at least have a complete victory under your belt. + +Surely when the Emperor sees that you’ve crushed another enemy in his name and even added more subjects and territory he couldn’t be too mad could he? +> Return immediately +As much as it would be in your favor to return with a massive victory, you’re going to have to settle on what you believe to be an assured one instead. Putting off a direct order from the Emperor would only make matters worse for you and you believe you’re in enough trouble as it is. + +“You shouldn’t worry so much, didn’t you say that the Emperor probably wouldn’t get mad at you?” Alison asks. +“Yeah I said that to convince myself that what I wanted to do was a good idea at the time. Doesn’t matter, what’s done is done and I will face whatever the Emperor has in store for me and as I said before, I’ll take full responsibility.” +“You don’t need to do that. You know full well I was itching to get into it with the gnolls as too.” +“Well, I want to anyway because I…um…uh” + +Alison raises an eyebrow when you start to stumble over your words; you quickly recover and change the subject. + +“Look, just proceed with the plan as normal. I think we’ve wiped out most of their wyvern forces and even their dire wolf cavalry. We need to at least push them off of all the territory they took from the Felkans. If I return…” +“WHEN you return.” Alison interrupts. +“Heh, okay. When I return we can figure it out from there. Oh and this goes without saying but keep an eye on the svelk. They’ve all been fairly professional since we started this aggressive campaign on the gnolls, but well you know, they’re svelk and who knows what they might be up to.” +“Of course.” +“Okay I guess that’s about it.” + +You linger a moment longer just sort of staring at Alison wondering if this will be the last time you ever see her again. It seems silly given how the pair of you have risked your lives in battle so many times that death could’ve just been a sword cleave or stray arrow away. This is different though and its not because you’re afraid of any execution that Emperor might inflict on you, its more because you’d hate to not have the chance to spend any more time with Alison. + +Is this what is known as “romantic” love? You’re familiar with the concept, it just has always seemed bizarre to you or at least not a priority. Love of the Emperor, love of the Empire, love of duty and battle are concepts you understand, but your feelings towards Alison are a little different even when you attempt to make the comparisons in your head. + +Sensing you’re more overcome with emotions than you’d admit, Alison once again takes your relationship that extra step further. + +“You don’t need to say it. I know.” She says and kisses you. + +With that pleasant feeling still persisting, you take your leave and make your long trip back to the capital. It’s a miserable trip since it practically rains the entire way, almost like the storm is following you. You cast your shield spell to give yourself some relief from the elements though it still doesn’t help when your horse has to trudge through some of the muddier back roads. Eventually you arrive at your destination. + +You enter the Emperor’s chambers and while lately when you’ve met with him he’s either hovering over his war table with maps and small figures on them or he’s speaking with Jacob and the others, but this time he’s alone and sitting in his chair. He isn’t reading either, he’s staring down at the floor as if deep in thought. + +“Why?” He asks without looking up. His voice doesn’t sound angry so much as it sounds distant. + +This simple question could only be asking you why you disobeyed his orders. You have several elaborate answers you could give. You’ve practiced them all, but now that you’re actually in front of the Emperor you know that no answer is going to help so you cut to chase. + +“I have no suitable excuse because there is none. There is no reason good enough to explain why I disobeyed your orders. I have returned merely to accept whatever punishment you have deemed suitable for my betrayal.” + +There is a pause of silence after your words. The Emperor slowly looks up at you and you feel his eyes staring right through you. The room even starts to feel more oppressive. Its as if you aren’t even alone with the Emperor, its like there are a thousand eyes upon you. Judging you. + +“I see. But you will not evade my question so easily. Now tell me why, I just need to know. Tell me. I will believe you my son.” The Emperor says in an almost soothing voice. + +So you tell him your reasons; that you were merely tired of sitting on the sidelines waiting around for the gnolls to continue attacking you. That you wanted to do something of more substance for the Empire. The Emperor listens to your explanation, but you get the impression he’s also studying you. + +“So…your reasons for disobeying my orders were entirely your idea? You were not influenced in any way?” +“Of course.” +“There wasn’t perhaps another person of the female persuasion who whispered in your ear late in the night about glory and power?” +“No my Emperor. I mean unless you’re speaking of a petty a svelk ploy that I recently experienced. Mistress sent her daughter to…” +“No, not her and not her spawn, though I’m well aware of that weirdness going on as well. Don’t worry I fully intend on having a chat with her as well since that sort of thing needs to stop. But that is somewhat related to what I’m getting at and who I KNOW you’re attempting to protect. That young major you’ve been having a relationship with.” +“Alison? While our relationship is sometimes a physical one, it is always professional. It was my idea to launch the attack on the gnolls and I already gave the reasons. She had no choice but to follow my orders when I took command of her battalion. She is a good solider and was only following orders.” +“And I suppose right now she’s still following your orders. Attacking the gnolls despite the fact that I wanted that battalion purely for defense of our current holdings or for reinforcements to our main attack force…” the Emperor at this point trails off and shakes his head with a sigh. He then gets up off his chair and walks over to you. + +The Emperor soon stands before you and he doesn’t look angry, but he does seem disappointed. In some ways that’s almost as bad and you hang your head down a little in shame. The Emperor then suddenly grabs your head with both hands and stares intently into your eyes for a few seconds, which feels like eternity as you stand completely still staring back. + +“Very well. I believe we are done here.” He says with a smile and lets you go. +“That…that’s it?” +“For now. Yes. You may go back to your battalion and finish your little campaign against the gnolls since I hear you are winning against them, however just kick them out of former Felkan lands and secure the borders. Do not push further into their original territory. We still can’t spread ourselves too thin, remember we still have the Felkan Kingdom to destroy.” +“Understood.” +“It better be, because I’m very serious about that order. Our recent victory at Yaquan is getting the ball rolling again and I don’t want to have to be worrying about you going rogue. Especially since I’m going to have need of you for the final push again the Felkans. It is obvious to me now that you do need to be on the frontlines of this war as a general even if your real position is technically higher than that.” +“I…I don’t know what to say.” +“Well, don’t thank me. This is probably something I should’ve done a long time ago. The fault is mine for wanting to protect you. I don’t know why, since I know you’re more than capable of handling yourself. I guess we’ll just chalk it up to parental protectiveness. In any case, finish up with those mongrel half dogs quickly because you’ll be called upon soon. That is all.” + +You leave the Emperor’s chambers unsure of how to feel exactly. You were expecting the worst, even death, but instead you’ve practically been rewarded for your actions. + +When you explain things to Alison she’s very happy for you. + +“See? Nothing but good news and I told you that you’d be coming back.” +“Yeah…” you acknowledge. +“Now what? I would think you’d be happy not only to be alive, but also be promoted to the Felkan frontlines where you always wanted to be.” +“I…don’t know. I mean I am and it is a great honor and everything I wanted…but now…well I’m used to having you by my side.” +“Well that’s sweet, but I’m sure you knew we’d eventually be separated at some point. I mean we are military and military gets moved around.” +“I know. Still, I’m going to miss all our time together.” +“You’re not going yet are you? I thought you were here until the gnolls were booted out.” +“I am.” +“Well let’s not get gloomy about things just yet, we’ve still got quite a few of those bastards running about. Let us spend our remaining quality time together kicking their asses and celebrating our victory afterwards.” + +You smile and agree. Perhaps it is best that you enjoy the time you do have together now rather than mope about such things. + +You do wonder if you’ll be able to stay in much contact with Alison when you’re reassigned. You’re skeptical that you’ll have much time to write letters to her and have no doubt that you’ll have to focus more on the Felkans. However, you can’t help but think she’ll still be in the back of your mind. And if it is only a memory then it’s a much better replacement for who was usually in the back of your mind. + +Maybe you and Alison aren’t exactly in love as most would see it, but as far as you’re concerned you’ll always love her for at least displacing the twisted memories of Mistress out of your head. +> Years pass... +Year 28 + +You hate these baby-sitting missions, but when the Emperor wants something done right he always requests you personally to do it, so here you are marching hundreds of gnomes to their new home. + +As the army has been getting closer to the Felkan capital and conquering its other important cities, the gnome population has been larger. While The Emperor has relented slightly on a complete slash and burn policy of Felkan cities, he’s still made it quite clear that ALL gnomes are to be taken as prisoners to a special place he’s had built in the recently conquered Felkan territory. + +Its called Gnome’s Home and you believe Marik had a hand in designing some of it, but it isn’t something you’ve really kept up on since you’ve been focused the business of proper warfare. However you’re on your way there now so you’ll guess you’ll see it soon. + +The whole reason you’re overseeing this prisoner train in the first place is because too many gnomes have been escaping their chains though it’s hardly surprising. Gnomes are very adept at picking locks, combine that with their fear of what’s to come and one gets a lot of escapes. Of course most of them get killed shortly after their escapes, but the Emperor has made it quite clear that he wants no more of that and that he really wants them to be taken to Gnome’s Home. + +You don’t really understand why since you assume they’re just going to be killed there anyway, but you’re just here to follow orders. He is the Emperor and this is what he wants. Still, sometimes you have to admit that you agree with Jacob on this; The Emperor’s hatred of gnomes is a bit…irrational at times. + +As you get closer to the location of Gnome’s Home, you hear a lot of cries and whispered prayers to gods from the prisoners. Some of the guards attempt to quiet them all down, but it’s a losing proposition, you just tell your troops to keep a close eye for escape attempts as usual. + +From a distance it looks like one of Marik’s factories, as you get closer though there’s something slightly more sinister about it. Granted it’s a place of execution, but you get the impression something more is going on here and its not just torture. The feeling here is oppressive the closer you get to it, even for you. + +Eventually you get to the black iron gates and make an announcement of your arrival and you’re let in almost immediately. Now you couldn’t smell it before, but when those gates up, you’re nearly overwhelmed by a strong smell of death and that’s saying something given the battlefields you’ve been on and the carnage you’ve engaged in. + +“Sorry about the smell General, but we’ve been having some problems with our furnaces lately, among other things, so the dead bodies have been piling up. Good thing they’re so small eh?” one of the guards that lets you in remarks with a laugh. + +As the gnomes are herded in you take a look around the “yard” and indeed you do see the largest pile of rotting gnome bodies you’ve ever seen. Nearby you see other guards busily attempting to load the bodies into carts to take them somewhere for proper disposal. Meanwhile you also see what you assume to be small dwellings for the prisoner gnomes since you see pitiful versions of them peeking out at times. + +All in all, it’s not a pretty sight, but the smell is still the worst of it. Shit, piss, vomit, blood, rot, and putrification are all in full force, but none of this horror is bothering you. There is something else going on here that feels severely unnatural that’s causing you to feel off. Maybe its magic, you don’t know, but something about the place tells you it’s more than just an oversized execution center. + +Just as you’re about to leave, you’re approached by dirty, unkept looking man with wild facial hair and even wilder hair on his head. He’s dressed in medium chainmail armor and large battle axe is on his back. With him are a couple of larger ugly brutish looking creatures. They aren’t green, so you know they aren’t orcs. Ogres perhaps, but you weren’t aware there were any that lived in this region let alone “tamed”. + +Then it suddenly occurs to you who this is… + +“Its you! The Harbinger of Death! The Emperor’s right hand and weapon of righteous justice! It’s been a long time! Oh we heard stories about you even all the way up in Rask! What brings you here? Are you assigned here now?” he asks excitedly. + +This is Kane, the Butcher of Rask. He’s nearly unrecognizable from when you last remember him. You’ve heard the stories about him as well and from his unhinged looking appearance they might be true. Though he seems to be quite friendly with you, which you wouldn’t expect given the tales you’ve heard. + +“Hello Kane, it has been a long time. I have not been assigned here; I’m just dropping off these prisoners because the Emperor considers it of vital importance that I do it. But I thought you were assigned in Rask.” +“Oh no need for me there any longer, we pretty much tamed everything there, well as much could be, but rest assured the Empire isn’t suffering from routine ogre and giant attacks there anymore. These two big lugs here are proof of that. And the barbarian tribes have been completely wiped out along with those pitiful attempts at secessionist movements! Not that those were ever a serious threat.” +“Well that’s good. I’m glad to hear you were so instrumental in making positive changes for the Empire.” You say. +“Me? I was just doing what I was supposed to right? I mean killing the enemies of the Empire and slaughtering those that oppose it is what we’re here for! But I don’t need to tell you that, you know duty to the Emperor better than anyone! Anyway with Rask tamed they said my talents would be better spent elsewhere so I assumed I would be sent to the Felkan front to fight or even lead, but I didn’t expect to be sent here. Still I’m just happy to be doing my part!” +“That’s a good attitude to have Kane. So…what exactly do you do here?” +“Nothing much, just make sure the gnomes don’t escape. None of them have either. We’ve got lots of things in place to make sure of that. Other than that I oversee the day to day operations. Not quite as exciting as my days in Rask, but I dunno…” + +At this point Kane looks at the large pile of dead gnome bodies on the other side of the yard and sort of zones out for a moment. He then begins to smile a bit before continuing. + +“It has its benefits.” +“I see.” +“Would you like a small tour? You know, just so you can maybe let the Emperor know or whoever that everything is running smoothly here?” +“I don’t think that will be necessary. It looks like you’re doing a fine job here, besides I…” + +Before you can finish that old familiar voice that you’ve come to dread speaks. + +“Hey lover, it’s about time you got here. Your services are needed for something most important.” Mistress says. Normally you’re on your guard, but somehow she snuck up behind you and startles you even though you attempt not to show it. Naturally this amuses her. + +“Aww did I scare you? Glad to see some things never change.” Mistress says as she attempts to stroke your face. +“What do you want and why are you here?” you ask slapping her hand away. +“Sent here by the Emperor for something oh so important to him. You didn’t think you were just brought here to escort these pathetic gnomes to their deaths did you? You’re needed here for something else.” +“I was simply told to escort the prisoners, nothing more nothing less. I don’t have time for whatever fucked up games you want to play with me.” +“I assure you this is no game this…” Mistress stops speaking and looks at Kane as if wondering why he’s still around. +“Don’t you have something better to do like counting up the new prisoners or something? Why don’t you and your two equally dimwitted friends go eat some gnomes or whatever it is you do, the superior beings are speaking now.” + +While you’re a little surprised that Mistress referred to you as a “superior being” you’re more surprised by Kane’s reaction. Given what you know about Kane’s reputation you’d expect him to at least show a little anger towards Mistress even if he didn’t display any disobedience. Kane shows nothing but subservience though. + +“Apologies Mistress, I will leave you two alone.” Kane remarks and gives a nod to you and quickly turns away motioning to his ogre guards to follow while bellowing an order to another nearby guard. Mistress shakes her head at all this. + +“I don’t know how Jacob convinced the Emperor to let that miserable creature oversee this place rather than putting him down like a mad dog like he deserves.” +“Why would he be put to death? From what I’ve heard and seen he’s a completely loyal soldier who has done much for the Empire. His deeds in Rask alone prove that.” +“Not feeling sympathetic towards your old classmate are you? Yes he was useful, but he’s a loose cannon and such factors shouldn’t be allowed to thrive. Given your own suggestions on using the orcs as sword fodder to keep them from being a problem in the future I would think you’d see the wisdom in such things.” +“The orcs were numerous and a genuine threat because of their chaotic nature. Kane is a loyal Eternal even if he does have a reputation for being overly bloodthirsty and even cruelty. And I would think that last one would be a mark in his favor given that you have that in common.” + +Mistress chuckles at your remark. + +“You comment asides, Kane is still not like either of us. He’s…well perhaps we can discuss such things at another time and in any case its not my concern, what is my concern is this ritual I need your help with.” +“You? You need MY help? You’re actually saying that?” +“(Sigh) Yes, is it so hard to believe? The Emperor needs us to perform a soul banishment ritual. I’ve practically been doing all the prep work myself for a while now, since all of the mages sent to help have been unsurprisingly not up to the task. When you start using magic involving souls it can get taxing even for the most skilled. It’s also been ages since I’ve performed one of these and its obvious that you were the best candidate to help me.” + +You can’t believe what you’re hearing and at this point you’re wondering if the Emperor really does want you here for what Mistress claims. He never gave such an order to you and it seems like that would be something he’d tell you. Then again you were never given the full report on the troll factory either and he did say he was going to speak with Mistress about her on going attempts at making your life miserable. This might also be another test by the Emperor. Maybe to see if you can put aside personal differences to work together? + +“Very well, if it is the Emperor’s wish that we work together then so be it. However, do not mistake my compliance for submissiveness. I am only willing to engage in this task because it is of importance to the Emperor and I am trusting that even you would not lie about something like that for you know that any sort of underhanded trick to kill or harm me in anyway would stir his wrath that I believe even YOU do not want to stir up. Now I suggest we get on with it so we can keep our time together at a minimum.” +“As you wish, but there is no need for hostility or suspicion. As you’ve said the Emperor would be quite angry indeed if I caused you harm in anyway, not that it’s ever been my intension contrary to popular belief.” +“Is this some sort of new tactic of yours? Acting civil in some vain attempt to get on my good side? Don’t bother, you’ll never be on it.” +“I’m getting that impression, but perhaps we can still talk about this later, for now let’s get on with this as you suggested. Follow me, I’ll take you to where we need to be.” + +You follow Mistress to one of the larger buildings where a lot of smoke is coming from and guards are periodically wheeling gnome bodies into. Large furnaces burn the countless bodies. As you walk through the crematorium, you notice that there are a few gnomes that aren’t quite dead yet, but are being thrown into the furnaces anyway. Eventually you come to a set of stairs going down. + +“Down here unfortunately.” Mistress remarks and you follow her down a long flight of stairs to a great open room lit by several candles Along two of the wall you see hundreds of jars with what looks to be wisps inside. They all give off a faint blue glow making the need for candles somewhat unnecessary. + +“I hate these designs by Marik, he can’t think past his derro mindset and create something that doesn’t have an underground portion to it.” Mistress remarks. “Personally I would’ve rather had something like this right in the center of the yard so that all those little gnomes could see just exactly what is going to happen to them every day. I mean its one thing to know they’re going to die, but it’s truly a thing of beauty when you completely obliterate something wouldn’t you agree?” +“What exactly are you talking about?” +“Why those souls that you see on the walls of course! Can’t very well perform a soul banishment ritual without souls obviously.” +“Those wispy things are souls?” +“Yes, hundreds of little souls. Souls that I’ve had to drag out of hundreds of little gnomes. No little feat though, as I said magic involving souls gets draining very fast. Ranks up there with healing magic and other branches of necromancy…I need you to stand over there on the line of that circle across from that wall.” Mistress says pointing over to a large circle on the floor. + +You slowly step over to where Mistress has told you to be. Given how much you’ve been following her orders you half feel like you’re back in her class. Though her attitude is much different and that’s been bothering you since this encounter. Surely she’s up to something and there has to be angle in it for her. If she isn’t up to something you can only believe that the Emperor’s talk really put the fear into her. + +Mistress stands to the left of you on the line of the circle across from the other wall of souls and tells you that she’s going to begin the ritual all she says she needs from you is to provide support and make sure none of the souls get away. + +“Get away?” +“You don’t think they’re going to just let themselves get banished to oblivion do you? They’re probably already pissed about being trapped in magic jars. Now concentrate!” + +Mistress begins to chant something in a language you’re not familiar with and you’ve heard the svelk language before. The wisps in the jars begin to get even more agitated and the faint glow they give off begins to get brighter. You begin to get images of torment invading your head all at once. + +You see exactly everything that’s been happening to the gnomes here, the torture, the humiliation, the executions and now ultimate annihilation. Even from what little you’ve seen from being in this place, your years on the battlefield and even your own brutal childhood training, its still pretty gruesome and sadistic, but it isn’t the images that are currently affecting you. It’s the voices… + +“Help us! Free us! It’s her, she did this! Stole our souls to destroy! Hate her! Kill her! You could kill her. You hate her too. Do it! If not for us or any sort of moral conscience then for yourself. We can see what she did to you. She will always torment you and you will never know rest from her until she is dead. She could die right now. Nobody would know and no one would care.” you hear several voices saying to you all at once and right now you don’t have much reason to not follow their suggestions. + +If Mistress was to die, it could easily be explained away after all accidents happen all the time when performing dangerous magic. And it is true she’s not likely to be missed by anyone save perhaps the Emperor, and you doubt he would for very long. +> Sabotage the ritual +You’re doing it. You’re getting her out of your life forever. No longer will you have to put up with whatever mind games she has planned whenever you’re forced to meet with her. + +You step from the circle and break your magic link with Mistress. She’s immediately taken off guard. + +“Agh! You fool! What are you doing?! Step back to the circle before you doom the both of us!” she exclaims as she is presumably psychically assaulted by the gnome souls. + +You know Mistress is strong and can probably fend off the attack if really pushed, but you intend on giving her another distraction by drawing your sword. She’s either going to have to stop you which will expose her mind to the vengeful souls or not stop you and get stabbed which will have the same effect. + +Suddenly your own mind is completely shattered and multiple souls assault your mind. The pain is excruciating and you collapse on the floor and begin convulsing. You aren’t innocent in all this as far as they’re concerned. Your involvement in the Felkan campaign has probably resulted in most of the gnomes being rounded up and sent to Gnome’s Home in the first place. + +For the first time you not only see the horror that has been this place, but you also experience all of it. Your mind can’t take it and neither can your body, which begins to lose all control of its functions. You’re leaking all manner of bodily fluids out every possible place you could be leaking from. + +Eventually you’re nothing more than an empty shell, but not quite dead. The souls have stopped attacking and Mistress is lying on the floor not too far from you own, her own mind destroyed as well. The pair of you continue to stare upward and slack jaw in a comatose state for quite some time, until Kane eventually wanders down to investigate. + +Kane isn’t quite sure of what to make of all of it, but sensing that he can’t leave the pair of you like this he comes up with his own solution. + +Unknown to you, Kane was possessed by a wendigo during his tour in Rask, though his hunger is well sated here. Kane never liked Mistress’ threats of exposure or taunts and proceeds to eat her alive. Of course being a vegetable she is unable to scream as his teeth sink into her flesh. + +You on the other hand, Kane ends your life with a blade to your throat out of respect for you before feasting on your corpse.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 28 + +You hate these baby-sitting missions, but when the Emperor wants something done right he always requests you personally to do it, so here you are marching hundreds of gnomes to their new home. + +As the army has been getting closer to the Felkan capital and conquering its other important cities, the gnome population has been larger. While The Emperor has relented slightly on a complete slash and burn policy of Felkan cities, he’s still made it quite clear that ALL gnomes are to be taken as prisoners to a special place he’s had built in the recently conquered Felkan territory. + +Its called Gnome’s Home and you believe Marik had a hand in designing some of it, but it isn’t something you’ve really kept up on since you’ve been focused the business of proper warfare. However you’re on your way there now so you’ll guess you’ll see it soon. + +The whole reason you’re overseeing this prisoner train in the first place is because too many gnomes have been escaping their chains though it’s hardly surprising. Gnomes are very adept at picking locks, combine that with their fear of what’s to come and one gets a lot of escapes. Of course most of them get killed shortly after their escapes, but the Emperor has made it quite clear that he wants no more of that and that he really wants them to be taken to Gnome’s Home. + +You don’t really understand why since you assume they’re just going to be killed there anyway, but you’re just here to follow orders. He is the Emperor and this is what he wants. Still, sometimes you have to admit that you agree with Jacob on this; The Emperor’s hatred of gnomes is a bit…irrational at times. + +As you get closer to the location of Gnome’s Home, you hear a lot of cries and whispered prayers to gods from the prisoners. Some of the guards attempt to quiet them all down, but it’s a losing proposition, you just tell your troops to keep a close eye for escape attempts as usual. + +From a distance it looks like one of Marik’s factories, as you get closer though there’s something slightly more sinister about it. Granted it’s a place of execution, but you get the impression something more is going on here and its not just torture. The feeling here is oppressive the closer you get to it, even for you. + +Eventually you get to the black iron gates and make an announcement of your arrival and you’re let in almost immediately. Now you couldn’t smell it before, but when those gates up, you’re nearly overwhelmed by a strong smell of death and that’s saying something given the battlefields you’ve been on and the carnage you’ve engaged in. + +“Sorry about the smell General, but we’ve been having some problems with our furnaces lately, among other things, so the dead bodies have been piling up. Good thing they’re so small eh?” one of the guards that lets you in remarks with a laugh. + +As the gnomes are herded in you take a look around the “yard” and indeed you do see the largest pile of rotting gnome bodies you’ve ever seen. Nearby you see other guards busily attempting to load the bodies into carts to take them somewhere for proper disposal. Meanwhile you also see what you assume to be small dwellings for the prisoner gnomes since you see pitiful versions of them peeking out at times. + +All in all, it’s not a pretty sight, but the smell is still the worst of it. Shit, piss, vomit, blood, rot, and putrification are all in full force, but none of this horror is bothering you. There is something else going on here that feels severely unnatural that’s causing you to feel off. Maybe its magic, you don’t know, but something about the place tells you it’s more than just an oversized execution center. + +Just as you’re about to leave, you’re approached by dirty, unkept looking man with wild facial hair and even wilder hair on his head. He’s dressed in medium chainmail armor and large battle axe is on his back. With him are a couple of larger ugly brutish looking creatures. They aren’t green, so you know they aren’t orcs. Ogres perhaps, but you weren’t aware there were any that lived in this region let alone “tamed”. + +Then it suddenly occurs to you who this is… + +“Its you! The Harbinger of Death! The Emperor’s right hand and weapon of righteous justice! It’s been a long time! Oh we heard stories about you even all the way up in Rask! What brings you here? Are you assigned here now?” he asks excitedly. + +This is Kane, the Butcher of Rask. He’s nearly unrecognizable from when you last remember him. You’ve heard the stories about him as well and from his unhinged looking appearance they might be true. Though he seems to be quite friendly with you, which you wouldn’t expect given the tales you’ve heard. + +“Hello Kane, it has been a long time. I have not been assigned here; I’m just dropping off these prisoners because the Emperor considers it of vital importance that I do it. But I thought you were assigned in Rask.” +“Oh no need for me there any longer, we pretty much tamed everything there, well as much could be, but rest assured the Empire isn’t suffering from routine ogre and giant attacks there anymore. These two big lugs here are proof of that. And the barbarian tribes have been completely wiped out along with those pitiful attempts at secessionist movements! Not that those were ever a serious threat.” +“Well that’s good. I’m glad to hear you were so instrumental in making positive changes for the Empire.” You say. +“Me? I was just doing what I was supposed to right? I mean killing the enemies of the Empire and slaughtering those that oppose it is what we’re here for! But I don’t need to tell you that, you know duty to the Emperor better than anyone! Anyway with Rask tamed they said my talents would be better spent elsewhere so I assumed I would be sent to the Felkan front to fight or even lead, but I didn’t expect to be sent here. Still I’m just happy to be doing my part!” +“That’s a good attitude to have Kane. So…what exactly do you do here?” +“Nothing much, just make sure the gnomes don’t escape. None of them have either. We’ve got lots of things in place to make sure of that. Other than that I oversee the day to day operations. Not quite as exciting as my days in Rask, but I dunno…” + +At this point Kane looks at the large pile of dead gnome bodies on the other side of the yard and sort of zones out for a moment. He then begins to smile a bit before continuing. + +“It has its benefits.” +“I see.” +“Would you like a small tour? You know, just so you can maybe let the Emperor know or whoever that everything is running smoothly here?” +“I don’t think that will be necessary. It looks like you’re doing a fine job here, besides I…” + +Before you can finish that old familiar voice that you’ve come to dread speaks. + +“Hey lover, it’s about time you got here. Your services are needed for something most important.” Mistress says. Normally you’re on your guard, but somehow she snuck up behind you and startles you even though you attempt not to show it. Naturally this amuses her. + +“Aww did I scare you? Glad to see some things never change.” Mistress says as she attempts to stroke your face. +“What do you want and why are you here?” you ask slapping her hand away. +“Sent here by the Emperor for something oh so important to him. You didn’t think you were just brought here to escort these pathetic gnomes to their deaths did you? You’re needed here for something else.” +“I was simply told to escort the prisoners, nothing more nothing less. I don’t have time for whatever fucked up games you want to play with me.” +“I assure you this is no game this…” Mistress stops speaking and looks at Kane as if wondering why he’s still around. +“Don’t you have something better to do like counting up the new prisoners or something? Why don’t you and your two equally dimwitted friends go eat some gnomes or whatever it is you do, the superior beings are speaking now.” + +While you’re a little surprised that Mistress referred to you as a “superior being” you’re more surprised by Kane’s reaction. Given what you know about Kane’s reputation you’d expect him to at least show a little anger towards Mistress even if he didn’t display any disobedience. Kane shows nothing but subservience though. + +“Apologies Mistress, I will leave you two alone.” Kane remarks and gives a nod to you and quickly turns away motioning to his ogre guards to follow while bellowing an order to another nearby guard. Mistress shakes her head at all this. + +“I don’t know how Jacob convinced the Emperor to let that miserable creature oversee this place rather than putting him down like a mad dog like he deserves.” +“Why would he be put to death? From what I’ve heard and seen he’s a completely loyal soldier who has done much for the Empire. His deeds in Rask alone prove that.” +“Not feeling sympathetic towards your old classmate are you? Yes he was useful, but he’s a loose cannon and such factors shouldn’t be allowed to thrive. Given your own suggestions on using the orcs as sword fodder to keep them from being a problem in the future I would think you’d see the wisdom in such things.” +“The orcs were numerous and a genuine threat because of their chaotic nature. Kane is a loyal Eternal even if he does have a reputation for being overly bloodthirsty and even cruelty. And I would think that last one would be a mark in his favor given that you have that in common.” + +Mistress chuckles at your remark. + +“You comment asides, Kane is still not like either of us. He’s…well perhaps we can discuss such things at another time and in any case its not my concern, what is my concern is this ritual I need your help with.” +“You? You need MY help? You’re actually saying that?” +“(Sigh) Yes, is it so hard to believe? The Emperor needs us to perform a soul banishment ritual. I’ve practically been doing all the prep work myself for a while now, since all of the mages sent to help have been unsurprisingly not up to the task. When you start using magic involving souls it can get taxing even for the most skilled. It’s also been ages since I’ve performed one of these and its obvious that you were the best candidate to help me.” + +You can’t believe what you’re hearing and at this point you’re wondering if the Emperor really does want you here for what Mistress claims. He never gave such an order to you and it seems like that would be something he’d tell you. Then again you were never given the full report on the troll factory either and he did say he was going to speak with Mistress about her on going attempts at making your life miserable. This might also be another test by the Emperor. Maybe to see if you can put aside personal differences to work together? + +“Very well, if it is the Emperor’s wish that we work together then so be it. However, do not mistake my compliance for submissiveness. I am only willing to engage in this task because it is of importance to the Emperor and I am trusting that even you would not lie about something like that for you know that any sort of underhanded trick to kill or harm me in anyway would stir his wrath that I believe even YOU do not want to stir up. Now I suggest we get on with it so we can keep our time together at a minimum.” +“As you wish, but there is no need for hostility or suspicion. As you’ve said the Emperor would be quite angry indeed if I caused you harm in anyway, not that it’s ever been my intension contrary to popular belief.” +“Is this some sort of new tactic of yours? Acting civil in some vain attempt to get on my good side? Don’t bother, you’ll never be on it.” +“I’m getting that impression, but perhaps we can still talk about this later, for now let’s get on with this as you suggested. Follow me, I’ll take you to where we need to be.” + +You follow Mistress to one of the larger buildings where a lot of smoke is coming from and guards are periodically wheeling gnome bodies into. Large furnaces burn the countless bodies. As you walk through the crematorium, you notice that there are a few gnomes that aren’t quite dead yet, but are being thrown into the furnaces anyway. Eventually you come to a set of stairs going down. + +“Down here unfortunately.” Mistress remarks and you follow her down a long flight of stairs to a great open room lit by several candles Along two of the wall you see hundreds of jars with what looks to be wisps inside. They all give off a faint blue glow making the need for candles somewhat unnecessary. + +“I hate these designs by Marik, he can’t think past his derro mindset and create something that doesn’t have an underground portion to it.” Mistress remarks. “Personally I would’ve rather had something like this right in the center of the yard so that all those little gnomes could see just exactly what is going to happen to them every day. I mean its one thing to know they’re going to die, but it’s truly a thing of beauty when you completely obliterate something wouldn’t you agree?” +“What exactly are you talking about?” +“Why those souls that you see on the walls of course! Can’t very well perform a soul banishment ritual without souls obviously.” +“Those wispy things are souls?” +“Yes, hundreds of little souls. Souls that I’ve had to drag out of hundreds of little gnomes. No little feat though, as I said magic involving souls gets draining very fast. Ranks up there with healing magic and other branches of necromancy…I need you to stand over there on the line of that circle across from that wall.” Mistress says pointing over to a large circle on the floor. + +You slowly step over to where Mistress has told you to be. Given how much you’ve been following her orders you half feel like you’re back in her class. Though her attitude is much different and that’s been bothering you since this encounter. Surely she’s up to something and there has to be angle in it for her. If she isn’t up to something you can only believe that the Emperor’s talk really put the fear into her. + +Mistress stands to the left of you on the line of the circle across from the other wall of souls and tells you that she’s going to begin the ritual all she says she needs from you is to provide support and make sure none of the souls get away. + +“Get away?” +“You don’t think they’re going to just let themselves get banished to oblivion do you? They’re probably already pissed about being trapped in magic jars. Now concentrate!” + +Mistress begins to chant something in a language you’re not familiar with and you’ve heard the svelk language before. The wisps in the jars begin to get even more agitated and the faint glow they give off begins to get brighter. You begin to get images of torment invading your head all at once. + +You see exactly everything that’s been happening to the gnomes here, the torture, the humiliation, the executions and now ultimate annihilation. Even from what little you’ve seen from being in this place, your years on the battlefield and even your own brutal childhood training, its still pretty gruesome and sadistic, but it isn’t the images that are currently affecting you. It’s the voices… + +“Help us! Free us! It’s her, she did this! Stole our souls to destroy! Hate her! Kill her! You could kill her. You hate her too. Do it! If not for us or any sort of moral conscience then for yourself. We can see what she did to you. She will always torment you and you will never know rest from her until she is dead. She could die right now. Nobody would know and no one would care.” you hear several voices saying to you all at once and right now you don’t have much reason to not follow their suggestions. + +If Mistress was to die, it could easily be explained away after all accidents happen all the time when performing dangerous magic. And it is true she’s not likely to be missed by anyone save perhaps the Emperor, and you doubt he would for very long. +> Proceed as normal +You are sorely tempted. You are really sorely tempted. However, there are a couple factors at play that are preventing you from doing so. One, you’re dubious about trusting a bunch of gnome souls. It isn’t like they still aren’t your enemy no matter what form they take or the situation at hand. The enemy of your enemy is still YOUR enemy as far as you’re concerned. This could be a trick to get the upper hand on their part. + +Second and most importantly, this is still a mission for the Emperor. If he wanted you to work with Mistress to send a bunch of gnome souls to oblivion then that’s what you’re going to do regardless of your personal feelings towards her. + +You begin to concentrate and try to mentally shut out the voices. Its extremely difficult, in fact you don’t actually succeed in doing so, but you do stay focused enough to keep up Mistress’ energy. An unearthly howl invades your head as a jet-black orb appears in the center of the room. You feel like its sucking the life out of you and you instinctively start to back away. + +“NO! Don’t move! You’ll ruin the spell! It won’t be much longer, look its already working!” Mistress shouts and points to the jars, which are now growing dimmer again. You then see one of the wisps completely disappear; followed by another and another, until they all begin fading away. As the souls vanish, the voices begin to get quieter and more desperate sounding as they beg you to stop. Eventually you hear nothing at all and the orb in the room disappears as well. + +“There, that should do it for a while, until the next batch.” Mistress remarks as she wipes her forehead and fixes her hair. “Whew, that was a little more strenuous than I thought it would be, it was very helpful for you to be here. We make a pretty good team…” +“Stop. Just stop.” You say interrupting. +“Stop what?” Mistress asks as if she doesn’t know what you’re talking about. +“You know damn well what. I told you that this attempt to be pleasant isn’t going to work and its totally transparent.” + +Mistress smiles, but it isn’t that cruel smirk that you’re used to, its one more of admiration. + +“I guess I deserve this hostility. However, I’d rather you hate me than be weak, though I suppose in some ways you still have a few flaws common to your race…but I can overlook those because I know that they will disappear in time. I just wish you’d recognize and shed those flaws soon, because you may need to do so. As I have said before, I have always tried to help you and I won’t stop just because you can’t see that or harbor thoughts of ill intent on me. Like you briefly considering listening to those desperate gnome souls. You don’t think I don’t know how tempted you were to sabotage the ritual just to get a chance to kill me? I could hear everything they said to you.” +“And I didn’t because my main duty was to see this mission done for the Emperor, do you have a point?” +“My point is you have so much more potential than you realize. You just fended off a psychic assault by hundreds of souls. Hundreds of vengeful souls feeding off your already strong desires to do me harm and you still resisted. Not many can boast such will power even if they’ve had superior training by the best teachers. Now your former classmate Kane? He struggles right now with just one miserable wendigo spirit within him and it’s half taken him over already.” +“What are you talking about?” +“He’s a wendigo now or rather possessed by one. It’s a spirit that possesses a living host and usually turns them into a slavering beast that is constantly looking for meat and flesh to quell its everlasting hunger.” + +Well this is a new twist on whatever angle Mistress is attempting to pull. + +“If that’s the case, why hasn’t he been going around eating everyone then?” you ask. +“Who’s saying he hasn’t? Wendigo’s may have poor impulse control, but they can be cunning when necessary. I imagine he’s only managed to hide it so well because he’s been associating with the savages and unsophisticated trash in Rask and turned his bloody deeds into the reputation of a ruthless warrior that could be feared and respected. Here? He’s overseeing a death factory with a steady supply of meat. Who’s going to miss a few dead gnome bodies or living gnomes for that matter? The wendigo probably hasn’t completely taken Kane over because it’s gotten lazy and happy with its current arrangement.” +“And of course you’re the only one who knows all this.” +“Perhaps Jacob suspects something amiss, but I guarantee I’m the only one who knows that doesn’t fear the thing that wears Kane’s skin. The beast knows I can destroy it within a blink and it would rather continue to enjoy its current arrangement.” +“Hmm, excuse me if I’m having a difficult time believing you. In any case, it doesn’t change my own opinions on you, so I’m not sure what you’re trying to gain by telling me all this.” +“Look, believe me, or don’t, but I assure you there is no gain in this for me by telling you. I merely used him as an example of how you continue to be superior to your former classmates. (Sigh) Sometimes I wonder if I should’ve showed you just a little more intimacy during our sessions together. Perhaps then you would’ve at least known to trust me.” Mistress says and tries to touch your hand. Once again you recoil at her advances and step backward. + +“Do that again and you’ll pull back a stump. And the next time you need to banish gnome souls or whatever else you can do it yourself.” +“Well that’s ultimately not really your call now is it? If the Emperor wants you to help me, then you’ll have to right? Isn’t it a shame that you can’t just do what you want, when you want?” Mistress says with one of her more familiar smirks. +“There it is. I was waiting for one of your sneering comments.” +“Sneering comments? But isn’t obeying the Emperor what you WANT to do? Aren’t you glad to follow his every command because he is as you say infallible? How is my comment a sneering one? It just points out the facts, that’s all. Your problem is you think I’m your enemy when I’ve done nothing but try to help you despite yourself.” +“Sure, whatever, I’m tired of your fat musings.” you say and begin to leave, but Mistress gets in your way. + +“I see you’ve still got my dagger. Still can’t completely get me out of your mind even though you have your little shield maiden fluff on the side?” +“The memories I associate with this dagger are something you should be wary of, lest I share them with you.” +“Oh? Well why don’t you use it right now, if you hate me so much? I gave you a chance to kill me once before and you didn’t take it…but it wasn’t because you were a coward. It wasn’t even because you knew you weren’t strong enough to do it. It’s because deep down YOU know that you love me and I will ALWAYS be the only woman for you. ALWAYS.” Mistress says and with a sudden quickness she grabs your head with both hands and kisses you hard on the lips. + +And for a split second that twisted part of you enjoys it. Without thinking you nearly begin to put both of your arms around her, then you come back to your senses and push her off of you and draw out the dagger. She backs off. + +“Ohh, you know how I like foreplay! Come on, stick it in mommy!” Mistress says with excitement. +“You…you…you’re one fucked up bitch and I’m not playing your game!” You sharply remark and make your way quickly back upstairs. +“Remember Eternal, always AND forever! The sooner you learn that, the better off you’ll be!” Mistress shouts and begins laughing. + +As you’re storming out of the furnace building everything is a bit of a blur. You know you knock aside a couple of guards pushing big wheeled containers full of bodies, but you don’t really notice anything else until you see Kane again outside in the yard bellowing orders. He looks different though, like more bestial. You look again he doesn’t even look human anymore. His mouth has become enlarged with several rows of razor teeth and his hands more like claws. The strange thing is nobody else seems to notice this. + +You walk over closer to him and now he looks more like he did. You feel like you’re having a hard time focusing. What the hell is going on? As you begin rubbing your eyes you don’t notice Kane walking over to you. + +“Hey you’re still here. I trust your business with Mistress went well?” Kane asks you as you open your eyes and there you see it again. That THING instead of Kane. Between what Mistress told you and this, you justifiably feel threatened. + +“Get the hell back! I know what you are!” you say and point your dagger at Kane, which was still in your hand. + +Kane’s ogre guards look unsure of what to do, as do other nearby guards, but Kane raises his hands up. + +“Its okay! Its okay! Nothing to see here, get back to work!” Kane says and then gives a nervous smile, but it isn’t a nervous smile to you, it seems more like he’s barring his fangs. In fact to you he looks like he might even attack. + +You don’t know what to do exactly. Obviously you’re seeing something odd with Kane, why you weren’t before is the strange part though. You don’t know if you’re really in danger here or if Mistress did something to you to make you see this and possibly do something rash. +> Kill Kane +You don’t hesitate. You see and know what needs to be done. Without another word you lunge at Kane who makes no attempt to defend himself and plunge your dagger directly in the center of his chest. + +“Thank…the Emperor…” he utters and falls to the ground, though when he finally hits, his body twitches, makes snarling sounds and then stops. + +And that’s when the wendigo attacks you. + +“You are a much stronger vessel anyway. Let me inside and I can make you even stronger.” The wendigo voice hisses. +“Get out of my fucking head!” you shout and start clutching your head. + +Under normal circumstances, you probably wouldn’t have had as much trouble fending off the possession attack by the wendigo, but not only are you severely drained from your previous ordeal, but you weren’t feeling right after it either. To make matters worse a few of the livelier gnomes watching decide to take advantage of the situation and make an escape attempt. + +“This is our only chance! Get his keys!” one of them shouts and you are suddenly knocked over and half trampled on by several gnome feet when they make their way towards Kane’s body. + +In the middle of the chaos of guards chasing down gnomes and gnomes attempting to flee, you’re having a seizure and losing the battle for your mind. Things get worse when Mistress arrives. + +“(Sigh) Why’d you go and do that for? You got yourself all riled up for no good reason, went and did something foolish and now look at you. Maybe your mind isn’t as strong as I thought it was. Well, as much as you deserve it I can’t let you masquerade as one of those things.” + +Mistress casts a banishment spell and while that’s a great thing to cast on them while they’re still hovering about, but when they’ve managed to already get their hooks in their desired host it tends to have a negative effect on said host and whatever pain you were going through with the wendigo’s possession is now five times worse as you now begin to experience the pain the wendigo feels as it is slowly obliterated. + +After it’s all said and done the wendigo is gone along with your mind. While its possible you might be able to live some sort of existence if someone assisted you with things like eating, but you don’t live in such a world and you certainly aren’t around any such people that would be willing to do that, hell if you could express anything anymore you’d say yourself that you wouldn’t want to live any more in this near vegetative state. + +Fortunately Mistress knows this and puts an end to your life. It’s probably the kindest thing she’s ever done for you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are sorely tempted. You are really sorely tempted. However, there are a couple factors at play that are preventing you from doing so. One, you’re dubious about trusting a bunch of gnome souls. It isn’t like they still aren’t your enemy no matter what form they take or the situation at hand. The enemy of your enemy is still YOUR enemy as far as you’re concerned. This could be a trick to get the upper hand on their part. + +Second and most importantly, this is still a mission for the Emperor. If he wanted you to work with Mistress to send a bunch of gnome souls to oblivion then that’s what you’re going to do regardless of your personal feelings towards her. + +You begin to concentrate and try to mentally shut out the voices. Its extremely difficult, in fact you don’t actually succeed in doing so, but you do stay focused enough to keep up Mistress’ energy. An unearthly howl invades your head as a jet-black orb appears in the center of the room. You feel like its sucking the life out of you and you instinctively start to back away. + +“NO! Don’t move! You’ll ruin the spell! It won’t be much longer, look its already working!” Mistress shouts and points to the jars, which are now growing dimmer again. You then see one of the wisps completely disappear; followed by another and another, until they all begin fading away. As the souls vanish, the voices begin to get quieter and more desperate sounding as they beg you to stop. Eventually you hear nothing at all and the orb in the room disappears as well. + +“There, that should do it for a while, until the next batch.” Mistress remarks as she wipes her forehead and fixes her hair. “Whew, that was a little more strenuous than I thought it would be, it was very helpful for you to be here. We make a pretty good team…” +“Stop. Just stop.” You say interrupting. +“Stop what?” Mistress asks as if she doesn’t know what you’re talking about. +“You know damn well what. I told you that this attempt to be pleasant isn’t going to work and its totally transparent.” + +Mistress smiles, but it isn’t that cruel smirk that you’re used to, its one more of admiration. + +“I guess I deserve this hostility. However, I’d rather you hate me than be weak, though I suppose in some ways you still have a few flaws common to your race…but I can overlook those because I know that they will disappear in time. I just wish you’d recognize and shed those flaws soon, because you may need to do so. As I have said before, I have always tried to help you and I won’t stop just because you can’t see that or harbor thoughts of ill intent on me. Like you briefly considering listening to those desperate gnome souls. You don’t think I don’t know how tempted you were to sabotage the ritual just to get a chance to kill me? I could hear everything they said to you.” +“And I didn’t because my main duty was to see this mission done for the Emperor, do you have a point?” +“My point is you have so much more potential than you realize. You just fended off a psychic assault by hundreds of souls. Hundreds of vengeful souls feeding off your already strong desires to do me harm and you still resisted. Not many can boast such will power even if they’ve had superior training by the best teachers. Now your former classmate Kane? He struggles right now with just one miserable wendigo spirit within him and it’s half taken him over already.” +“What are you talking about?” +“He’s a wendigo now or rather possessed by one. It’s a spirit that possesses a living host and usually turns them into a slavering beast that is constantly looking for meat and flesh to quell its everlasting hunger.” + +Well this is a new twist on whatever angle Mistress is attempting to pull. + +“If that’s the case, why hasn’t he been going around eating everyone then?” you ask. +“Who’s saying he hasn’t? Wendigo’s may have poor impulse control, but they can be cunning when necessary. I imagine he’s only managed to hide it so well because he’s been associating with the savages and unsophisticated trash in Rask and turned his bloody deeds into the reputation of a ruthless warrior that could be feared and respected. Here? He’s overseeing a death factory with a steady supply of meat. Who’s going to miss a few dead gnome bodies or living gnomes for that matter? The wendigo probably hasn’t completely taken Kane over because it’s gotten lazy and happy with its current arrangement.” +“And of course you’re the only one who knows all this.” +“Perhaps Jacob suspects something amiss, but I guarantee I’m the only one who knows that doesn’t fear the thing that wears Kane’s skin. The beast knows I can destroy it within a blink and it would rather continue to enjoy its current arrangement.” +“Hmm, excuse me if I’m having a difficult time believing you. In any case, it doesn’t change my own opinions on you, so I’m not sure what you’re trying to gain by telling me all this.” +“Look, believe me, or don’t, but I assure you there is no gain in this for me by telling you. I merely used him as an example of how you continue to be superior to your former classmates. (Sigh) Sometimes I wonder if I should’ve showed you just a little more intimacy during our sessions together. Perhaps then you would’ve at least known to trust me.” Mistress says and tries to touch your hand. Once again you recoil at her advances and step backward. + +“Do that again and you’ll pull back a stump. And the next time you need to banish gnome souls or whatever else you can do it yourself.” +“Well that’s ultimately not really your call now is it? If the Emperor wants you to help me, then you’ll have to right? Isn’t it a shame that you can’t just do what you want, when you want?” Mistress says with one of her more familiar smirks. +“There it is. I was waiting for one of your sneering comments.” +“Sneering comments? But isn’t obeying the Emperor what you WANT to do? Aren’t you glad to follow his every command because he is as you say infallible? How is my comment a sneering one? It just points out the facts, that’s all. Your problem is you think I’m your enemy when I’ve done nothing but try to help you despite yourself.” +“Sure, whatever, I’m tired of your fat musings.” you say and begin to leave, but Mistress gets in your way. + +“I see you’ve still got my dagger. Still can’t completely get me out of your mind even though you have your little shield maiden fluff on the side?” +“The memories I associate with this dagger are something you should be wary of, lest I share them with you.” +“Oh? Well why don’t you use it right now, if you hate me so much? I gave you a chance to kill me once before and you didn’t take it…but it wasn’t because you were a coward. It wasn’t even because you knew you weren’t strong enough to do it. It’s because deep down YOU know that you love me and I will ALWAYS be the only woman for you. ALWAYS.” Mistress says and with a sudden quickness she grabs your head with both hands and kisses you hard on the lips. + +And for a split second that twisted part of you enjoys it. Without thinking you nearly begin to put both of your arms around her, then you come back to your senses and push her off of you and draw out the dagger. She backs off. + +“Ohh, you know how I like foreplay! Come on, stick it in mommy!” Mistress says with excitement. +“You…you…you’re one fucked up bitch and I’m not playing your game!” You sharply remark and make your way quickly back upstairs. +“Remember Eternal, always AND forever! The sooner you learn that, the better off you’ll be!” Mistress shouts and begins laughing. + +As you’re storming out of the furnace building everything is a bit of a blur. You know you knock aside a couple of guards pushing big wheeled containers full of bodies, but you don’t really notice anything else until you see Kane again outside in the yard bellowing orders. He looks different though, like more bestial. You look again he doesn’t even look human anymore. His mouth has become enlarged with several rows of razor teeth and his hands more like claws. The strange thing is nobody else seems to notice this. + +You walk over closer to him and now he looks more like he did. You feel like you’re having a hard time focusing. What the hell is going on? As you begin rubbing your eyes you don’t notice Kane walking over to you. + +“Hey you’re still here. I trust your business with Mistress went well?” Kane asks you as you open your eyes and there you see it again. That THING instead of Kane. Between what Mistress told you and this, you justifiably feel threatened. + +“Get the hell back! I know what you are!” you say and point your dagger at Kane, which was still in your hand. + +Kane’s ogre guards look unsure of what to do, as do other nearby guards, but Kane raises his hands up. + +“Its okay! Its okay! Nothing to see here, get back to work!” Kane says and then gives a nervous smile, but it isn’t a nervous smile to you, it seems more like he’s barring his fangs. In fact to you he looks like he might even attack. + +You don’t know what to do exactly. Obviously you’re seeing something odd with Kane, why you weren’t before is the strange part though. You don’t know if you’re really in danger here or if Mistress did something to you to make you see this and possibly do something rash. +> Leave +Kane isn’t making any move against you and you aren’t going to kill him based on suspicion especially with all the weirdness going on here in general. The best thing you feel you can do is just get the hell out of here. + +As you order the gates to be opened you continue to keep an eye on Kane and he does the same to you. You aren’t seeing the monstrous traits like you were anymore which makes you believe that Mistress did do something to you. Possibly when she kissed you. + +Then as you begin to leave, Kane calls out to you. + +“Are you going to tell the Emperor?” + +You turn around and face Kane who now isn’t even looking you in the eye. In fact you’d say he even looks ashamed. The funny thing is Kane just gave himself away, though maybe he wanted to. + +Since you aren’t exactly sure what the situation is except what Mistress has told you, you ask Kane a simple question. + +“Are you still loyal to the Emperor?” +“Yes.” Kane says looking up, straightening himself a little and making a major effort to look you in the eye. +“Then he already knows, otherwise I would’ve been sent here to kill you.” + +Kane nods and begins to form disjointed sentences. You imagine he’s probably going to try to explain his side of things, but quite frankly after the day you’ve had here, you don’t care. + +“I don’t need to know how it happened. I don’t need to know why it happened. I am not your judge. Just continue to serve the Empire and the Emperor with distinction and loyally as you have been. However the moment that thing inside you takes over completely, the moment you stop doing your duty, the moment you are considered a dangerous liability to the Empire… I will be your executioner. Remember this.” +“I will.” Kane says. + +Kane steps forward and raises his hand in a salute. You return the salute, which seems to make Kane happy. You get back on your horse and ride away eager to put as much distance between you and Gnome’s Home as fast as possible. + +When you arrive back at your own war camp, your two main commanders Captain Ackerson and Battlemage Galen are arguing over the battle plans as usual. They’re competent men its just too bad that they can’t get along if you aren’t around to bang their heads together. You learned very quickly why Roldan was quick to shove them on to you. + +“Sir, I’m glad you’re back, I have tried to reason with this hedge wizard, but the man is being an unreasonable asshole. He doesn’t see that sending in our remaining golems on a suicidal run on Fort Tinker will result in a much quicker collapse of its walls and allow the rest of the troops to just pour in and overrun the place. The quicker we take this fort the quicker we can march on the capital.” Captain Ackerson says. +“And do you realize the waste you’re suggesting? What if we need those golems for our assault on the capital? You think golems are easy to make? No of course you don’t because you’re a muscle bound moron who just thinks brute strength and numbers are going to win the day!” Galen remarks. + +You’re in no mood. + +“Will both of you idiots shut the fuck up, I’m sick of your petty arguing! Look, use half of the golems to bring down one of the walls and back them up with a couple cannon units. The golems will probably be destroyed and those cannon crews are probably going to get hammered by whatever new gnome invention the Felkans have, but it should be enough. Or come up with something else, I don’t give a shit right now, just get it the fuck done and don’t bother me again until you’ve made more progress!” you yell and leave the war tent to make your way to your own private tent. + +As soon as you open your tent, you have another unexpected encounter in your long line of unexpected encounters lately, however this one is much more pleasant. + +“Alison? What’re you doing here?” +“I figured I’d surprise you. The eastern front has been pretty quiet ever since we destroyed the majority of the gnoll horde you know. It’s not like I can’t sneak away every once in a while. I was actually surprised when I got here that you weren’t around, so where did you sneak off to?” +“Orders from the Emperor. Special mission. It was…ugh…it’s done and I really don’t want to talk about it right now, I’m just glad to see you. You’re a welcome sight right now.” +“Aren’t I always?” Alison remarks with a smile. + +You and Alison speak a bit, but you both know not to waste an opportunity like this and the pair of you get to doing what lovers normally do. It’s a good feeling, but its not just the sex (though that’s certainly good too) its just the fact that you still can’t believe someone can make you feel this way. + +You wouldn’t admit to this openly, but sometimes when you’re with Alison you feel a bond there that might even rival your bond with the Emperor. There have even been times you’ve briefly worried if there will come a day where you’d have to outright choose between the Emperor or Alison. The concern though isn’t that you’d have to do it, your concern is that there is the possibility that if it came down to it, you might choose Alison. You try to dismiss such thoughts however, after all when is a situation like that ever going to occur? Better to focus on the pleasant present rather than the possible grim future. + +As the pair of you lies together, Alison starts to drift off in your arms and says something a little strange. + +“Thank you.” +“Thank you? For what exactly? The orgasm?” +“For this night. I just feel so loved right now. And I love you too. You do know that don’t you?” Alison asks looking into your eyes. +“Of course I know that, I love you too.” +“Just laying here with you makes me feel so safe.” Alison remarks and cuddles into you even more. +“I suppose, but I’d hardly think you’d need me to protect you when you’re more than capable of doing it yourself. Is there something wrong? You don’t normally talk like this.” +“Nothing’s wrong. I guess I just felt a little girly there for a moment. Still, it’s nice to hear you say it to me and it’s nice to know this side of you.” Alison says and begins to drift off. + +You briefly wonder if you lived a “normal” married life, most of your nights would be like this. Lying in bed holding your significant other. Getting up in the morning to do your mundane peasant job. Would you also have children? That’s something you’ve never even considered, though given your several intimate encounters with Alison you’re a little surprised you haven’t gotten into possible baby complications. Perhaps you’ve just been lucky, or maybe she’s been taking Stillness potions bought from Empire alchemists. Of course she might just be barren, or maybe you’re sterile. abort + +Whatever the case she’s never brought up the subject and you certainly don’t intend to since it isn’t a priority and as far as you’re concerned, never will be. + +With these final thoughts you join Alison in sleep. + +Hours pass and you are awakened by the sounds of cannons and warfare in the distance. + +“Ugh, I guess they’ve started…(Yawn) I suppose I better get up and see what’s going on before Galen and Ackerson start arguing over how to best execute the survivors. Hey did you need to…” you say and then realize that Alison is no longer laying anywhere next to you. She’s not even in the tent. What you do see is a piece of parchment nearby. + +You pick it up and you feel something is wrong as soon as you do. + +Your first thoughts are perhaps it is some sort of “break up” letter. You have heard of such things occurring with soldiers that have been far away from their wives or husbands sometimes. Perhaps Alison sees the futility in your current arrangement since you have such a significant duty to the Emperor and doesn’t want you to have to “choose”. + +However, after you read the words on it you WISH it were a break up letter. + +The words merely say: + +Always and forever. Remember this. + +Your heart sinks. You just slept with Mistress. + +She must’ve magically disguised herself as Alison. You don’t even know how to react. Your normally reserved emotions are all over the place. You feel a little sick, you definitely feel rage, but more at yourself for not being observant and falling for Mistress’ tricks once again. + +You end up nearly destroying everything in your tent in rage screaming incoherent obscenities not giving a damn about what the soldiers or officers walking by might be wondering what’s going on. In fact it’s a good thing none of them pop their head to investigate since you’re so angry you might’ve killed them. + +After you’re spent, you fall to your knees feeling defeated. + +“I’m sorry Alison…I’m sorry…” you say over and over again in between catching your breath and looking at your portrait of her. + +And worst part of all this, is you still enjoyed your night with Mistress. Even if it really wasn’t your fault, you briefly wish you hadn’t allowed yourself to grow so attached to Alison so this wasn’t even an issue. You should’ve just been concentrating on your duty to the Emperor and now you’re paying the price for not staying focused. You’re focused now though. + +With the battle of Fort Tinker already in full swing, you make your way into the war torn fort and unleash the rest of your renewed energy there. Your enemies suffer greatly that day. + +By the time its all over you feel slightly better even though you know you’ll probably still have to deal with Mistress’ shit later. Until then though there are important tasks still at hand and the major one being that the Felkan Kingdom needs to be destroyed and you intend to see that through. +> Years pass... +Year 30 + +The day has come at last, the Felkan capital; Dessel has been broken wide open. Its defenses have been shattered and all that’s left now is to scoop out the soft underbelly within. + +“How long do you think they’ll hold out?” Roldan asks. +“A few more hours, perhaps even a day. No more I suspect. I have to admit that I thought the remaining Felkan ruling class would’ve surrendered long before now, let alone fight to the bitter end. I suppose they were still carrying out the will of their gnomish masters even though most of them are dead or soon will be.” You remark. +“I know they had a lot of influence and were responsible for the technological inventions along with running the merchant guilds, but do you really believe the Felkan Kingdom was run by gnomes?” +“Of course. Its what the Emperor believed and ultimately that’s been the purpose of this whole war, to eliminate the gnome threat. Happily with this final nail in the coffin, that’s been accomplished.” +“You know some of them probably escaped long before the war started going badly for the Felkans.” +“Perhaps, but I’m sure in time they will be found. The Emperor’s domain has already been extended much within the past few years alone, I’m sure eventually it will cover the entire world and in the long run all those that oppose the Emperor will be brought to justice. Either by me, or by someone else loyal to his service.” +“Well, until such time I’m just wondering where I’ll be assigned after all this. Personally I’m hoping to get a little free time so I can see my wife Brenda again. It’s been so long and I miss her. I’m sure you feel something similar about Alison.” + +You pause for a moment before speaking. + +“I will go where my duty takes me after this assignment. Alison understands that, she is a military woman after all.” You remark. +“Well of course, but I was just stating that it would be nice to take a break from duty for a moment to enjoy the company of someone you care about.” +“We’re Eternals Roldan. So is Brenda for that matter. Our existence is duty. You would do well to remember that.” +“I am aware of it! I was just…oh forget it.” Says and walks away from you. + +You and Roldan have been a little less cordial to each other lately, then again the two of you never have quite “clicked” with each other for some reason. Actually there are probably several reasons on your side as well as his, but you aren’t going to waste your time pondering them since you are both able to work together in a professional manner and never engaged in anything other than the low level disagreements. As long as the respect is still there between you two, why bother analyzing it? + +Besides this mission is nearly over now anyway. You’re fairly certain you’ll be reassigned somewhere else. You do wonder if you’ll get some down time as Roldan mentioned though. + +If you do, you’re more than likely going to try to spend some of it with Alison, though you’ve still been going back and forth on how well that’s going to go when you tell her what happened two years ago. You certainly couldn’t tell her something like that in a letter and from what letters you’ve received from her she still doesn’t know. Mistress probably wouldn’t tell her to stir up chaos because it would be more fun letting you worry about it for all this time. You’re just glad you never had to help assist Mistress at Gnome’s Home again, though now you’re even wondering if that was ever a real order from the Emperor when it did occur. + +You haven’t spoken to the Emperor directly or even indirectly in quite some time either. That’s actually been a little concerning to you as well. Still, you figure you soon will be when this is all over and the Felkans have finally been crushed once and for all. + +You watch the capital smoke and burn in the distance. Occasionally a small explosion causes pieces of the already breached wall fly into several directions. + +“Well I’m not going to miss out on all the fun, before it’s over.” You say to yourself and head towards the city. + +As it turns out you don’t miss much. The city’s defenders consist of mostly children and elders at this point. They don’t provide too much resistance now that they have no walls to hide behind. The royal guard is still around but quick work is made of them. As for the royals themselves most of them took the coward’s way out. You find several of them lying dead at their lavish dinner table with several knocked over empty wine cups. + +Upon further searching you find what you guess to be the royal bedroom and who you guess to be the Felkan king and queen lying dead in the bed. They must’ve taken the same poison since you see the same cups near the bodies. As you study the pair of them and how they are holding hands in death, you notice a crib in the corner of the room. While you’re inspecting this, Warrick walks in. + +“Oh there you are. We’ve found that some of these rooms lead to a system of secret passages. We’ve already started to explore them, but we haven’t found anyone yet. I don’t even think they lead outside the city, just to other portions of the palace. Looks like we won.” Warrick remarks. +“Looks that way. Sort of a disappointing climax given how the Felkans insisted on dragging this out. Continue your search though; someone still might be hiding in them. You find any gnomes?” +“No and I don’t believe there are any in city either. At least no reports have popped up about any.” +“Guess we got all of them then. The Emperor will be pleased to hear that. Carry on.” + +For the next few days you observe the destruction of Dessel. Roldan remarks that the city shouldn’t be destroyed, but rather appropriated by the Empire as it wouldn’t take much to rebuild the damage and would be easier than building a brand new city here. Orders are orders though. While the Emperor might’ve relaxed his zeal on burning every Felkan city to the ground, he was still pretty clear about the capital. You imagine he sees it as the last symbol of gnomish defiance. + +In the middle of this process Jacob unexpectedly visits you. + +“Didn’t expect to see you here.” You remark while sharpening your weapon. +“Well the Emperor wants to see you, plus I also have to speak with Roldan and Warrick about their next assignments, so I figured I might as well come here in person.” Jacob says looking around at the destruction. “So, it’s finally done. The Felkan Kingdom is no more. I have to admit, I was worried about this war on more than one occasion.” +“You don’t need to tell me, you told me on more than one occasion. You should’ve had more faith in the Emperor, he knew its destruction was inevitable.” +“Well, thanks in part to your actions no doubt.” Jacob says with a brief smile. +“I am merely the weapon which does the job. If you’re looking for Roldan, he’s in the large tent on that small hill over to the east. Warrick’s probably with him. I need to get going if the Emperor wishes to see me…is Mistress going to be there?” +“I don’t believe so.” +“Good, don’t really need the negativity ruining this moment.” You remark and begin to leave. +“Um…there’s something else I need to talk to you about before you leave.” Jacob says hesitantly. +“What?” +“It’s about the Emperor, he’s uh…well…” +“He’s what?! What is he?! Jacob, just spit it out.” +“He’s sick.” +“What? Sick? That’s ridiculous! I’ve never known him to ever show illness.” +“I know it may seem hard to believe, but I’m telling you last time I spoke with him, he didn’t look well. He seemed very tired and just really pale.” +“He runs the Empire! Of course there’s going to be times he’s going to be tired! It has to be taxing keeping track of everything. As for being pale, he doesn’t exactly go skipping about in the sunlight you know.” +“I know all that. Look, just when you see him you’ll know what I’m talking about. I mean I’m sure the Emperor will live a very long time, but we should prepare…um…just in case…” +“Just in case what Jacob?” you ask beginning to get angry at the insinuation that the Emperor may die. Jacob sensing he’s overstepped a boundary quickly shuts up. +“Erm…nevermind. Forget I said anything. I’m worrying too much as usual…but still…(sigh) forget it. I’ll let you get on your way.” + +You shake your head and begin to leave again, when Jacob once again stops you. + +“Oh one more thing. Before you go see the Emperor, you’re supposed to make a visit to Gnome’s Home first.” +“Are you fucking kidding me? Aren’t all the gnomes there dead by now?” +“Maybe, I dunno. Something to do with souls I think. I never did know exactly what went on there, and I don’t really think I want to know. All I do know is you’re supposed to assist.” +“Assist who? Mistress? I already assisted her once there and let’s just say what transpired wasn’t pleasant. She hasn’t needed my assistance for the past two years since that time, why does she need it now all of a sudden? Fuck that, I’m not helping her anytime soon. In fact if I saw her again, I’d probably kill the bitch after what happened last time!” + +Jacob begins to step back from you. + +“Easy now, I’m just the messenger here. I don’t even know if she’s there. It’s what the Emperor told me to tell you. I mean if you don’t want to do it, I suggest you take it up with him personally.” + +At this point you might just do that. Nobody can question your loyalty or your dedication to the Emperor, but this request…its just asking too much. You thought he spoke with her about leaving you alone and she’s already ignored that. How long must you put up with this svelk bitch? +> Head to Gnome's Home +An order from the Emperor is an order from the Emperor no matter what. If you have to go to Gnome’s Home, then you have to go. If you have to assist Mistress then that’s what you’ll have to do. Doesn’t mean you have to like it though. + +You get on your horse and make your way to Gnome’s Home. On your way you think about how you’re going to handle the situation if you have to assist Mistress. Then you realize that the time has come. + +You’re going to kill the bitch. This has been a long time coming anyway. You aren’t sure if you’re just going to attack her if you see her or if you’ll do something a little more subtle, but one thing is certain, she’s going to be dead by the time you leave that gnome murder factory. + +When you arrive at Gnome’s Home the outside looks about the same the last time you were here and when you’re let inside the gates, it smells about the same as well. Probably even a little bit worse. + +You step inside and see a lot less living gnomes and lot more dead ones. A few pathetic examples lay half dead outside their dwellings covered in their own filth. Whatever attempts at keeping this place slightly clean have long since stopped. The entire place is disgusting and you feel like you’re going to catch something just standing here. + +“Hey, I heard you were coming, welcome back!” you hear a voice shout. It’s Kane. He’s a bit unkept and wild looking, but still friendly. You notice he doesn’t have his ogre friends with him any more. + +“Hello Kane. You’re looking…well.” +“Thanks. I’ve been feeling well. Been keeping very busy what with all the gnome killing and all. As you can see, we’re almost finished. Figured we’d speed up the process by cutting back on the clean up portion, I mean this whole place is going to be shut down after we kill ‘em all anyway. I’ll be sort of sad to see it go, but nothing lasts forever right?” +“Right, so my assignment was to assist in something?” +“Oh yes, sorry. I don’t get to talk to many people nowadays. Anyway Mistress is waiting for you down in the soul obliteration chamber. I’m not actually sure if that’s what it’s called, but given what happens there, seems as good a name as any.” + +You thank Kane and make your way to where Mistress is located. Along the way you see the usual piles of bodies being tossed into the large furnaces by bored guards. When you get down to the chamber you see that Mistress is already in the process of preparation. You see more jars containing souls than you did last time and that gives you the idea of how to kill her. + +“Hey lover, you’re here right on time.” She remarks. +“Yeah, let’s just get this over with.” You say. +“Well, I’m certainly glad you didn’t feel that way during our last encounter.” +“You tricked me during that last encounter!” +“True, but didn’t it feel so good? Besides its not like anyone knows so what’s the harm?” +“You know what? I’m tired of fighting it, maybe you’re right.” You answer. + +Mistress is a bit surprised to hear you say that. + +“Er…of course I am! I’ve always had your best interest in mind. That’s what I’ve always been telling you.” +“And I think I finally realize it after all these years. I mean you were the one who practically taught me everything I know. Who would know better for me than you?” you say and walk over to Mistress. + +You grab Mistress around the waist and give her a passionate kiss. All part of the act of course and part of you hates it, but the other part is definitely getting excited. + +Afterwards Mistress looks at you with a glee that you’ve only really seen when she’s torturing someone. (Which was usually you). + +“Okay, down boy, we’ve still got business to take care of here. Glad to see you’re finally seeing things how they really are though. After this bit of business perhaps we can talk more about the future. Our future.” +“Looking forward to it.” You say and slap her on her ass before taking your position on the circle line. + +Mistress goes on to tell you that the process will be just like before, but will require even more focus than last time. She says one of the reasons why she wanted your help this time (Other than wanting to see you again) was because she wants to dispose of more gnome souls than usual. She says that while she enjoyed the torture, suffering and extermination of an entire race she absolutely hates the smell and general dirtiness of the place and the sooner she’s out of here the better. + +Your plan is simple. You’re going to sabotage the ritual. You’re fairly certain the gnome souls will try to convince you to do it like they did last time anyway. + +Mistress begins chanting and soon the spell begins to take effect. You begin to hear the whispers of gnome souls in your head. More than last time and saying the exact same thing. + +“Break the circle! Save us! Kill the svelk! Save us from oblivion!” you hear and you begin to do just that and stop focusing your energy towards Mistress. She of course realizes what you’re doing, but doesn’t say anything, instead she just shuts her eyes as if to concentrate harder. + +You decide a blade through her body should really take her off her game plan, since she’s either going to have to stop you which will expose her mind to the vengeful souls or not stop you and get stabbed which will have the same effect. + +You draw your sword and then suddenly your own mind shield is completely shattered and multiple souls assault your mind. The pain is excruciating and you collapse on the floor and begin convulsing. + +“Did you really think I couldn’t see through your charade?” Mistress shouts as your mind continues to be destroyed by the gnome souls. You don’t know why they’re not attacking Mistress, but you see why they’re attacking you. You aren’t innocent in all this as far as they’re concerned. Your involvement in the Felkan campaign has probably resulted in most of the gnomes being rounded up and sent to Gnome’s Home in the first place. + +For the first time you not only see the horror that has been this place, but you also experience all of it. Your mind can’t take it and neither can your body which begins to lose all control of its functions. You’re leaking all manner of bodily fluids out every possible place you could be leaking from. + +Eventually you’re nothing more than an empty shell, but not quite dead. The souls have stopped attacking and Mistress stands over you. + +“I really had hoped you were serious, but I just couldn’t take that chance. I reinforced my own mental shield and cast a repulsion spell. Of course the souls have now completely escaped annihilation, but what the hell, that’s the Emperor’s obsession not mine.” + +You continue to stare upward and slack jaw in a comatose state. + +“(Sigh) I suppose the malicious svelk thing to do, would be to continue to keep you alive in this state for a little while longer, but I think you’re probably too far gone for me to even get any enjoyment out of that. Besides, even I couldn’t do that to you. I’m just a fool for love I guess.” + +Mistress kneels down and takes her dagger that she gave you a long time ago and holds it to your throat. + +“Well at least I got to kiss you one last time.” She says and ends what remains of your life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 30 + +The day has come at last, the Felkan capital; Dessel has been broken wide open. Its defenses have been shattered and all that’s left now is to scoop out the soft underbelly within. + +“How long do you think they’ll hold out?” Roldan asks. +“A few more hours, perhaps even a day. No more I suspect. I have to admit that I thought the remaining Felkan ruling class would’ve surrendered long before now, let alone fight to the bitter end. I suppose they were still carrying out the will of their gnomish masters even though most of them are dead or soon will be.” You remark. +“I know they had a lot of influence and were responsible for the technological inventions along with running the merchant guilds, but do you really believe the Felkan Kingdom was run by gnomes?” +“Of course. Its what the Emperor believed and ultimately that’s been the purpose of this whole war, to eliminate the gnome threat. Happily with this final nail in the coffin, that’s been accomplished.” +“You know some of them probably escaped long before the war started going badly for the Felkans.” +“Perhaps, but I’m sure in time they will be found. The Emperor’s domain has already been extended much within the past few years alone, I’m sure eventually it will cover the entire world and in the long run all those that oppose the Emperor will be brought to justice. Either by me, or by someone else loyal to his service.” +“Well, until such time I’m just wondering where I’ll be assigned after all this. Personally I’m hoping to get a little free time so I can see my wife Brenda again. It’s been so long and I miss her. I’m sure you feel something similar about Alison.” + +You pause for a moment before speaking. + +“I will go where my duty takes me after this assignment. Alison understands that, she is a military woman after all.” You remark. +“Well of course, but I was just stating that it would be nice to take a break from duty for a moment to enjoy the company of someone you care about.” +“We’re Eternals Roldan. So is Brenda for that matter. Our existence is duty. You would do well to remember that.” +“I am aware of it! I was just…oh forget it.” Says and walks away from you. + +You and Roldan have been a little less cordial to each other lately, then again the two of you never have quite “clicked” with each other for some reason. Actually there are probably several reasons on your side as well as his, but you aren’t going to waste your time pondering them since you are both able to work together in a professional manner and never engaged in anything other than the low level disagreements. As long as the respect is still there between you two, why bother analyzing it? + +Besides this mission is nearly over now anyway. You’re fairly certain you’ll be reassigned somewhere else. You do wonder if you’ll get some down time as Roldan mentioned though. + +If you do, you’re more than likely going to try to spend some of it with Alison, though you’ve still been going back and forth on how well that’s going to go when you tell her what happened two years ago. You certainly couldn’t tell her something like that in a letter and from what letters you’ve received from her she still doesn’t know. Mistress probably wouldn’t tell her to stir up chaos because it would be more fun letting you worry about it for all this time. You’re just glad you never had to help assist Mistress at Gnome’s Home again, though now you’re even wondering if that was ever a real order from the Emperor when it did occur. + +You haven’t spoken to the Emperor directly or even indirectly in quite some time either. That’s actually been a little concerning to you as well. Still, you figure you soon will be when this is all over and the Felkans have finally been crushed once and for all. + +You watch the capital smoke and burn in the distance. Occasionally a small explosion causes pieces of the already breached wall fly into several directions. + +“Well I’m not going to miss out on all the fun, before it’s over.” You say to yourself and head towards the city. + +As it turns out you don’t miss much. The city’s defenders consist of mostly children and elders at this point. They don’t provide too much resistance now that they have no walls to hide behind. The royal guard is still around but quick work is made of them. As for the royals themselves most of them took the coward’s way out. You find several of them lying dead at their lavish dinner table with several knocked over empty wine cups. + +Upon further searching you find what you guess to be the royal bedroom and who you guess to be the Felkan king and queen lying dead in the bed. They must’ve taken the same poison since you see the same cups near the bodies. As you study the pair of them and how they are holding hands in death, you notice a crib in the corner of the room. While you’re inspecting this, Warrick walks in. + +“Oh there you are. We’ve found that some of these rooms lead to a system of secret passages. We’ve already started to explore them, but we haven’t found anyone yet. I don’t even think they lead outside the city, just to other portions of the palace. Looks like we won.” Warrick remarks. +“Looks that way. Sort of a disappointing climax given how the Felkans insisted on dragging this out. Continue your search though; someone still might be hiding in them. You find any gnomes?” +“No and I don’t believe there are any in city either. At least no reports have popped up about any.” +“Guess we got all of them then. The Emperor will be pleased to hear that. Carry on.” + +For the next few days you observe the destruction of Dessel. Roldan remarks that the city shouldn’t be destroyed, but rather appropriated by the Empire as it wouldn’t take much to rebuild the damage and would be easier than building a brand new city here. Orders are orders though. While the Emperor might’ve relaxed his zeal on burning every Felkan city to the ground, he was still pretty clear about the capital. You imagine he sees it as the last symbol of gnomish defiance. + +In the middle of this process Jacob unexpectedly visits you. + +“Didn’t expect to see you here.” You remark while sharpening your weapon. +“Well the Emperor wants to see you, plus I also have to speak with Roldan and Warrick about their next assignments, so I figured I might as well come here in person.” Jacob says looking around at the destruction. “So, it’s finally done. The Felkan Kingdom is no more. I have to admit, I was worried about this war on more than one occasion.” +“You don’t need to tell me, you told me on more than one occasion. You should’ve had more faith in the Emperor, he knew its destruction was inevitable.” +“Well, thanks in part to your actions no doubt.” Jacob says with a brief smile. +“I am merely the weapon which does the job. If you’re looking for Roldan, he’s in the large tent on that small hill over to the east. Warrick’s probably with him. I need to get going if the Emperor wishes to see me…is Mistress going to be there?” +“I don’t believe so.” +“Good, don’t really need the negativity ruining this moment.” You remark and begin to leave. +“Um…there’s something else I need to talk to you about before you leave.” Jacob says hesitantly. +“What?” +“It’s about the Emperor, he’s uh…well…” +“He’s what?! What is he?! Jacob, just spit it out.” +“He’s sick.” +“What? Sick? That’s ridiculous! I’ve never known him to ever show illness.” +“I know it may seem hard to believe, but I’m telling you last time I spoke with him, he didn’t look well. He seemed very tired and just really pale.” +“He runs the Empire! Of course there’s going to be times he’s going to be tired! It has to be taxing keeping track of everything. As for being pale, he doesn’t exactly go skipping about in the sunlight you know.” +“I know all that. Look, just when you see him you’ll know what I’m talking about. I mean I’m sure the Emperor will live a very long time, but we should prepare…um…just in case…” +“Just in case what Jacob?” you ask beginning to get angry at the insinuation that the Emperor may die. Jacob sensing he’s overstepped a boundary quickly shuts up. +“Erm…nevermind. Forget I said anything. I’m worrying too much as usual…but still…(sigh) forget it. I’ll let you get on your way.” + +You shake your head and begin to leave again, when Jacob once again stops you. + +“Oh one more thing. Before you go see the Emperor, you’re supposed to make a visit to Gnome’s Home first.” +“Are you fucking kidding me? Aren’t all the gnomes there dead by now?” +“Maybe, I dunno. Something to do with souls I think. I never did know exactly what went on there, and I don’t really think I want to know. All I do know is you’re supposed to assist.” +“Assist who? Mistress? I already assisted her once there and let’s just say what transpired wasn’t pleasant. She hasn’t needed my assistance for the past two years since that time, why does she need it now all of a sudden? Fuck that, I’m not helping her anytime soon. In fact if I saw her again, I’d probably kill the bitch after what happened last time!” + +Jacob begins to step back from you. + +“Easy now, I’m just the messenger here. I don’t even know if she’s there. It’s what the Emperor told me to tell you. I mean if you don’t want to do it, I suggest you take it up with him personally.” + +At this point you might just do that. Nobody can question your loyalty or your dedication to the Emperor, but this request…its just asking too much. You thought he spoke with her about leaving you alone and she’s already ignored that. How long must you put up with this svelk bitch? +> Go directly to the Emperor +You get on your horse and make your way to the Empire capital. + +You’re not doing it, plain and simple. The Emperor can deal with you as he sees fit, but you are not going to help Mistress for any reason. You made the attempt and it resulted in trickery again. + +Besides, why the hell should you follow every little menial task? You’ve been instrumental in keeping the damn Empire together; you shouldn’t be subjugated to such indignities! Jacob just told you the Emperor is sick, well he better watch it if he wants to stick around long enough to get better. + +You can’t believe you just thought such a thing. What the hell is wrong with you? The thoughts and acts of disobedience are bad enough, but to actually consider… + +You can’t even think it again. Something must be seriously wrong with your mind. Maybe Mistress did something more to you. Maybe she did some sort of magic spell to your head to make you harbor thoughts of dissension. At least you hope that’s case, because if she didn’t then you’d have to come to grips that you thought about killing the Emperor all on your own. Whatever the reason, you’ll be keeping that one to yourself. + +When you get to the Emperor’s chambers you hear him call for you immediately. Some coughing immediately follows his voice. You’ve definitely never heard him do that before + +“There you are my son, I’m glad to see you. It’s been so long since we’ve talked face to face.” He says as he sits hunched over a desk. He almost looks like he’s struggling to prop himself up. Maybe he is as sick as Jacob says. He’s as pale as Jacob said and his eyes are starting to have a sunken in looking appearance. What used to look like a man in his fifties now looks more like a man in his seventies. In fact he almost looks a bit more like how you thought he was going to when you first met him. +You know he’s powerful. Certainly more powerful than you, but he looks so much frailer now. It makes you ashamed that you had thoughts about killing him; especially after all he’s done for you. + +“Emperor! I was told you were sick, but I didn’t believe it! How?” +“Sick? (Cough cough) Well I suppose that’s one way of putting it. I’m guessing Jacob told you I was practically on my death bed or something. He still worries too much and you shouldn’t either. I’m not sick, I’m…well its complicated, but suffice to say, I’m not dying anytime soon. Trust me on that one. Now I’d (Cough cough) like a report on the Felkans. Have we finally destroyed them once and for all?” + +“Yes, the capital has been taken and is in the process of being destroyed. The battle mages will be casting defilement spells to make sure nothing ever grows there again. The ruling royals from what we can tell all committed mass suicide.” +“Figures. But as long as everyone’s dead, it’s still good. So what about gnomes? Any in the capital?” +“None. I can only guess we got all of them at Gnome’s Home.” +“One can (cough cough) only hope. So have they all been sentenced to oblivion yet?” +“I don’t know, I haven’t been Gnome’s Home.” +“You haven’t? I thought you got here pretty quickly. Surely Jacob told you that I wanted you to go there.” +“Yes, he told me I was to go there to assist and I know that could only mean assisting Mistress with the destruction of gnome souls. It was with great regret that I disobeyed this order, but I simply cannot help that woman again, if ever. The last time I made the attempt was two years ago when I was assisting her at Gnome’s Home and there was some…unpleasantness.” +“Was there now? I hadn’t heard about this and I spoke to her about leaving you alone, as you well know. So what exactly happened? She try to kill you?” +“No, she (sigh) made unwanted advances on me. I turned her down, and later when I went back to my camp she magically disguised herself as Alison and slept with me that way. I of course didn’t now until afterwards.” +“”Is that all? Here I was thinking it was something serious.” the Emperor replies in a bored tone followed by more coughing. “However, I can see that this is something that was very serious to you so I will of course dismiss your transgression of not following orders…again. In the future I will also make sure that you and her are never to work together under any circumstances. I guess my attempt at being peacemaker didn’t work out. (cough cough) Doesn’t matter anyway, but tell me what are you exactly mad concerning that situation that occurred? I get the impression it’s more than just Mistress fucking with you as usual.” + +He’s right. The fact that Mistress tricked you isn’t what bothered you the most; it’s the fact that you unwittingly betrayed Alison. The fact that Mistress cloaked herself as someone you have feelings for…no someone you LOVE to trick you just made it all the worse. You tell the Emperor as much, he nods in between another coughing fit. + +“So, you do love this Alison girl then? It’s not just lust or perhaps a fleeting fancy. You actually love her?” the Emperor asks. +“I do.” +“And this girl, she feels the same way?” +“I believe she does.” +“Hmm, you better be sure son.” +“Yes, I know she does.” +“I see… well do you want some advice?” +“From you, of course.” +“ (cough cough) Shit. (cough) Okay, here it is then, you’ll save yourself some pain if you end this relationship altogether. Now just listen. I know you’re an intelligent person and an excellent strategist in the matters of war, but on the matters of love you’re…and I don’t mean this as an insult…but you’re a little inexperienced. It’s okay though, even after several centuries I still haven’t figured it all out yet. But I still know more than you and I’m telling you that you’ll be better off not getting deeply involved with such things. Why do you think I’ve never had an Empress by my side? It complicates things to a whole new level and that’s complications YOU don’t need.” + +You’re speechless for a moment. You can’t think of anything to say except… + +“Is this an order?” +“An order? No, I’d never give such an order concerning matters of the heart; it is merely advice. You may do as you wish. In fact you may do as you wish for quite some time. I’m giving you some down time in light of our glorious victory over the Felkans. We’ll of course be having some celebrations going on here in the capital so if you get the chance you should probably (cough cough) join in the (cough cough) festivities. When you’re needed to return to duty, I’ll send for you as usual. I also want you to know, I’m proud of you son and for all you’ve done for the Empire and know you’ll continue to serve the Empire loyally (cough cough) and with dedication in the future.” + +The Emperor at this point slowly gets up and heads off towards his bedroom area coughing the whole time. You almost ask him if he needs help, but you’d rather not insult him. Besides you’re too busy pondering his advice to you about Alison. + +Even you thought about how being in a relationship with Alison put you in a position to fall for Mistress’ trickery. You think about Roldan and how he’s married and it doesn’t seem to affect his judgment, but it’s different for him. He’s married to another Eternal and he doesn’t have the responsibilities you have. + +But as they say, the heart wants what the heart wants and you’ve wanted to spend time with Alison ever since you were split up from her. And now that this war is finally over you have the time to do it. Should you break up with her just because of some potential problems in the future with Mistress or anything else? +> End things with Alison +As much as this is going to pain you to do, you need to end your relationship with Alison, if only to save her life. The more you think about it, who knows what the hell Mistress could do next and she’s already proven to ignore the Emperor’s warnings before. Then there’s the Emperor himself. It’s obvious he doesn’t approve of the relationship, and continuing it could potentially be problematic. You certainly wouldn’t want to fall out of favor with the Emperor even if you do love Alison. + +You’re going to keep this as short as possible and hopefully Alison will too. What’s going to make this worse is the fact that this will be the first time you’ve seen each other in years. + +You leave the palace and the capital to make your way to where Alison is currently stationed, which means a long ride back to the new eastern frontier of the Empire. You eventually arrive at Fort Stalwart, which is actually just a renamed and rebuilt fort once held by the ex-Felkan Kingdom. + +Given your reputation, the gates are immediately opened for you. A few of the older soldiers are also probably aware of your relationship with their commanding officer so orders are already given to alert Alison of your sudden arrival. She meets you even before you make it to her office. + +She flashes a smile when she sees you and goes to put her arms around you presumably to kiss you. While you’d love for her to do so, you stop Alison, which confuses the hell out her. + +“What’s this? Oh. The other soldiers around. You and your insistence on keeping protocol. Very well let’s get to my quarters so we can get you back into your comfort zone, because its been too damn long.” +“It has and we should get back to your quarters, but I’m fairly sure you’re not going to be in the mood for what you probably had in mind after I tell you what I have to tell you.” + +Alison steps back and gives you a tilted look. + +“Hmm, sounds serious. You look even more grim than usual. Well let’s get this over with.” Alison says and the pair of you head towards her quarters. + +Her private quarters are neat and clean, as you’d expect, on the right wall you see your portrait, which is right across from her bed. Placed in such a way so the first thing she sees when she wakes up is you. + +“Alright. Out with it and let’s see exactly how mad you think I’m going to be at you.” Alison remarks closing her door. You sit on the bed and take a deep breath then exhale giving her a look on your face, which contains a hint of regret. + +“Geez…this must be bad. I don’t think I’ve ever seen you like this. Its almost like you’re afraid to tell me. Shit, maybe I better sit down too.” Alison says taking a seat in one her chairs. +“Alison…I love you. I want you to know that before I say anything else. I never thought I could ever feel this way at all about anyone. It just wasn’t something I was taught or even learned. (whew) Okay enough stalling. Here it is…” + +You tell her that you want to end this relationship. You don’t offer too much of an explanation though, just some vague reason that your duties to the Emperor are always going to take precedence and its not fair to her to have a steady relationship with you because who knows where you’re going to be sent to next and for how long. + +You expect Alison to show some sign of emotion at this point. For the most part she remains stoically silent just listening to everything, but you can tell she is a little surprised by this news. + +“I see…well if that’s what you want I won’t try to argue with you about it. Everyone is an adult here and has the freedom of choice. I must admit this has taken me a bit off guard. I sort of thought our relationship was a bit more than just the occasional tumble, but apparently I was wrong. Wish I’d known before though, I could’ve…never mind. +“I knew you were going to be angry.” +“I’m not exactly angry, I’m not sure how I feel. Look just tell me one thing because I have to know. Are you still having a sexual relationship with Mistress?” + +Now this statement catches you off guard. + +“What? No! I don’t love Mistress! You know that!” +“I didn’t ask you that. I asked you if you were still having some sort of sexual relationship with her. You don’t need to be in love with her. Hell, you don’t even need to like her. But you’ve told me enough of your past with her to know that you both have some sort of twisted attachment to one another. Now I’m going to just ask you one more time. Have you had any sort of intimate contact with her since we parted company?” + +You muster up all your confidence and put on a straight face. + +“No. I swear to you. I haven’t.” + +Alison stares at you for a long time. Looking into your eyes and trying to ascertain if you’re lying or not. You get the impression she doesn’t believe you, however since you’ve never been known to be a liar (especially not to her) and your facial expression exhibits a look of truthfulness she can’t completely jump to that conclusion. + +“I want to believe you. I suppose if I really wanted to know, I’d tell you to swear on the life of the Emperor, but I won’t do that. It wouldn’t make any difference anyway, because in the scheme of things what does it matter if you’re lying or not. You still came to tell me that our relationship isn’t going to work even if we do have strong feelings for each other, and you’re probably right. The funny thing is before I met you; I was pretty much a free spirited type when it came to relationships. I suppose I’ll return to that mindset, but I’ll always wonder what if?” +“Alison…” +“Goodbye Eternal, I don’t want you to see what is going to come next.” Alison remarks as her voice starts to crack. + +And with those words she turns her back on you. You leave her to her sadness and feel awful about it, but you know it’ll be better for her this way. + +As for you, you’ll just keep serving the Emperor as you always have. +> Years pass... +Year 32 + +You look for a seat on the palace balcony to watch Roldan’s big parade celebration. + +Well actually it’s supposed an anniversary of the Felkan Kingdom’s demise, but due to Roldan’s important role in the war and his popularity with the people he’s certainly the major focus. + +Yes, Roldan’s certainly made advances since the Felkan War ended. He got assigned to wipe out the rest of the gnoll tribes in the west. Something you figured you’d get assigned to do considering you did have something to do with beating back those mongrel men in the first place. + +Instead, the Emperor has been keeping you closer to home. With the recently acquired Felkan territory and the westward expansion, the Eyes are a little stretched so you’ve mostly been trying to eliminate the new bandit havens popping up in the old Felkan territory along with helping to fend off any desperate gnoll raids that attempt to sneak through. You’re also supposed to be making sure the new “citizens” aren’t planning to rebel, but given how badly they were beaten down, they’re just glad that you’re allowing them to live. So far no seditious activity has been detected. + +You’re not jealous of Roldan, it’s just that you figured you’d be something a lot more important after the Felkan War. You’d rather be out there conquering new lands for the Emperor and getting into the heat of battles rather than playing super sentinel. At least if you were in active battle it would keep your mind from wandering to thoughts of Alison. It seems like not a day goes by where you don’t think about her. + +Even right now as you sit waiting for the parade she dwells in your thoughts, until you hear that old familiar and unwelcome voice… + +“Hey lover, figured you’d be here. Jacob’s been looking for you. He won’t shut up about how proud he is of Roldan and how he’s so happy about this farce of a celebration.” + +You ignore Mistress, but she keeps talking. + +“He also has Roldan’s wife Brenda with him. One of your old classmates as you know. She’s aged horribly. I mean this is a celebration; the least she could do is attempt to fix herself up rather than stomping around in combat boots and inadequately polished armor like a common soldier. I mean just because you have a lowly status doesn’t mean you always have to look the part. Oh well, I suppose if one doesn’t know, one never will. But enough about her, how have you been?” + +Mistress sits down next to you and puts her arm around your shoulder. You continue to try to ignore her. + +“Oh come on, you can’t still be mad at me. You enjoyed our time together. If you hadn’t you wouldn’t have wisely made your decision to split with that little shield maiden of yours. I mean I’ll grant you that she had a certain rustic charm that you sometimes find in lesser creatures, but you knew deep down that she wasn’t for you. Hey, I’ve got an idea why don’t you and I go back to your private quarters and relive some old times? Has to be more appealing than watching this pointless exercise in patriotism. I’ll even let you ejaculate in my mouth and swallow your sweet essence. Come on, I KNOW you’d enjoy that. Seeing me on my knees and debasing myself for you in such a manner. You’d be totally in control. Or maybe you could just bend me over raw and brutally penetrate my…” + +At this point you can’t ignore her anymore and you brush her arm off of you and stand up. + +“Stay away from me. I’m only going to tell you once.” You say, but Mistress just sits there and smiles. +“And what if I don’t? Will you promise to punish me long and hard?” + +Mistress says a few more vulgar things causing a bit of a scene for the other spectators. You don’t know if you’ll even be able to stick around for this celebration. You weren’t in the best of moods before and Mistress’ presence is making it worse. +> Leave the celebration +You aren’t sticking around to put up with Mistress’ usual obscene suggestions; you’re getting out of here. Mistress of course calls out to you as you leave, but doesn’t follow you. On your way out you bump into Jacob and who you presume is probably Brenda, but you don’t even acknowledge either of them you just want out of this place. You don’t start feeling better until you leave the palace and even then you feel like your whole day has been ruined. You make your way through the hectic streets not paying too much attention to the fact that the parade has started. You’re too pre-occupied with your self loathing on entertaining the idea of going back and taking Mistress up on her offer. + +Then you hear a lot of screaming and yelling. This is followed by a lot of people running in all different directions. + +“General Roldan’s dead!” +“Shadows! The shadows are back!” +“They’ll kill us all!” + +You snap out of your thoughts and process this new sudden information. You see one the Eyes nearby and question him. + +“Hey you! Where the hell is the rest of your unit? More importantly where the hell is Warrick?” you ask the Eye. +“My unit is trying to keep this area under control while searching the nearby buildings here. As far as I know, Sightmaster Warrick was last seen near the city gates.” +“Well the palace needs some extra protection, I want you to get the rest of your unit over there now. Your primary concern is supposed to be defending the Emperor anyway!” + +You make your way towards the city gates, which is a chore, but when you finally get a clear view of the gates, you find Warrick and Brenda arguing with each in the middle of the chaos. + +“I’ve got Eyes scouring the city and mages casting detection spells to back them up, I’m doing all I can Brenda!” Warrick exclaims. +“Well you’re sure doing a bang up job of that eyeboy, considering you weren’t even able to prevent my husband from getting fucking decapitated in front of everyone! That was a fucking shadow Warrick! It probably already left the city already!” Brenda retorts. +“I’m well aware of what it was Brenda, I had to track down and fight them a lot more than you ever did!” +“And given that your group was supposed to have wiped them out, you fucked up on that job too!” +“Brenda if you want to go on your own personal manhunt, fine, you don’t need my permission to do it. Go find and grab the nearest mage and have at it! I don’t have time to argue with you, I’m having a hard enough time trying to coordinate everything in this chaos right now.” + +Warrick looks semi-relieved when he sees you arrive. + +“I’m glad you’re here, you’ve got magic abilities. Can you take Brenda with you?” + +Brenda turns to you though she isn’t as happy to see you either. + +“Great, the other fuck up who was supposed to have been responsible for the extermination of the shadows.” Brenda remarks. +“Brenda I know you’re angry right now and understandably upset, but I’m not going to tolerate the same sort of verbal abuse you’ve been heaping on Warrick. Now I’ll certainly help you, but we’re going to do this without the arguing.” + +Your calm yet firm demeanor doesn’t quell the high emotions going through Brenda right now, but they do at least establish a behavior guideline. + +“Alright fine.” She remarks. +“Good, now let’s start checking the sewers.” +“The sewers? Are you sure?” Brenda asks. +“No, but I’m making a good guess that it being a shadow, it probably hasn’t gone far and is enjoying the whole idea of hiding right under our noses and possibly even planning the next step to cause further chaos. Besides, shit is often found in the sewers.” +“I’ve got people already searching the sewers.” Warrick pipes up. +“Yeah well, maybe if you had some stationed there and had a thorough search of the sewers before the parade none of this would be necessary now.” +“That’s not fair, Jacob said…” +“I don’t want to hear it Warrick. As far as I’m concerned Brenda’s got a right to be pissed at you considering you were supposed to be in charge of security for this thing.” + +Leaving Warrick behind, you and Brenda find the nearest manhole and descend into the smelly darkness. And it does smell pretty awful. Still not as bad as Gnome’s Home though, you don’t think anything will ever smell worse than that place. + +You keep a detection spell constantly on hoping it will catch something worthwhile, but you know this is a long shot and the equivalent of looking for a needle in a haystack. Still, you couldn’t just sit around doing nothing. Brenda might’ve been out of line speaking to you in such a manner, but in some ways you do feel a little responsible since you thought you’d wiped out all the shadows. + +Brenda and you are more or less silent the whole time you search the sewers. You never do run into any of Warrick’s people, but then the sewers are just as large as the city itself. It’s not surprising you aren’t having much luck finding a shadow, if one is even hiding down here in the first place. + +“Damn it. I’m sorry Brenda.” +“What?” +“I don’t know where to even look, the sewers were just a blind guess. I have no real idea where to look. You probably were right; the shadow probably already left the city and if that’s the case, who know where the hell it fled to.” + +Brenda doesn’t say anything at first and you fully expect her to go off on you, but she doesn’t, instead she starts crying. Or rather she fails in trying not to cry. It would appear that the fact that her husband is dead is finally hitting her hard. + +“Brenda I…” you start to say and then a faint whistling sound is heard and you feel a sharp pain going through your back. You look down long enough to see the head of a crossbow bolt. Blood spreads across your chest and you stagger around and stare at a grinning decaying face. You then feel two blades separate your head from your body. + +The good news is your hunch was correct. The bad news is your detection spell couldn’t work on something that was already dead and as a result so are you. + +You can only hope that Brenda gets her revenge and figures it all out, because you won’t.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 32 + +You look for a seat on the palace balcony to watch Roldan’s big parade celebration. + +Well actually it’s supposed an anniversary of the Felkan Kingdom’s demise, but due to Roldan’s important role in the war and his popularity with the people he’s certainly the major focus. + +Yes, Roldan’s certainly made advances since the Felkan War ended. He got assigned to wipe out the rest of the gnoll tribes in the west. Something you figured you’d get assigned to do considering you did have something to do with beating back those mongrel men in the first place. + +Instead, the Emperor has been keeping you closer to home. With the recently acquired Felkan territory and the westward expansion, the Eyes are a little stretched so you’ve mostly been trying to eliminate the new bandit havens popping up in the old Felkan territory along with helping to fend off any desperate gnoll raids that attempt to sneak through. You’re also supposed to be making sure the new “citizens” aren’t planning to rebel, but given how badly they were beaten down, they’re just glad that you’re allowing them to live. So far no seditious activity has been detected. + +You’re not jealous of Roldan, it’s just that you figured you’d be something a lot more important after the Felkan War. You’d rather be out there conquering new lands for the Emperor and getting into the heat of battles rather than playing super sentinel. At least if you were in active battle it would keep your mind from wandering to thoughts of Alison. It seems like not a day goes by where you don’t think about her. + +Even right now as you sit waiting for the parade she dwells in your thoughts, until you hear that old familiar and unwelcome voice… + +“Hey lover, figured you’d be here. Jacob’s been looking for you. He won’t shut up about how proud he is of Roldan and how he’s so happy about this farce of a celebration.” + +You ignore Mistress, but she keeps talking. + +“He also has Roldan’s wife Brenda with him. One of your old classmates as you know. She’s aged horribly. I mean this is a celebration; the least she could do is attempt to fix herself up rather than stomping around in combat boots and inadequately polished armor like a common soldier. I mean just because you have a lowly status doesn’t mean you always have to look the part. Oh well, I suppose if one doesn’t know, one never will. But enough about her, how have you been?” + +Mistress sits down next to you and puts her arm around your shoulder. You continue to try to ignore her. + +“Oh come on, you can’t still be mad at me. You enjoyed our time together. If you hadn’t you wouldn’t have wisely made your decision to split with that little shield maiden of yours. I mean I’ll grant you that she had a certain rustic charm that you sometimes find in lesser creatures, but you knew deep down that she wasn’t for you. Hey, I’ve got an idea why don’t you and I go back to your private quarters and relive some old times? Has to be more appealing than watching this pointless exercise in patriotism. I’ll even let you ejaculate in my mouth and swallow your sweet essence. Come on, I KNOW you’d enjoy that. Seeing me on my knees and debasing myself for you in such a manner. You’d be totally in control. Or maybe you could just bend me over raw and brutally penetrate my…” + +At this point you can’t ignore her anymore and you brush her arm off of you and stand up. + +“Stay away from me. I’m only going to tell you once.” You say, but Mistress just sits there and smiles. +“And what if I don’t? Will you promise to punish me long and hard?” + +Mistress says a few more vulgar things causing a bit of a scene for the other spectators. You don’t know if you’ll even be able to stick around for this celebration. You weren’t in the best of moods before and Mistress’ presence is making it worse. +> Stay for the celebration +You aren’t going to let her run you off, but you aren’t going to put up with her either. You see a seat on the other side of the balcony and head to it. Mistress says a few more things, but eventually stops when you aren’t responding to her anymore. + +You sit there in silence, attempting not to look in her direction, you almost feel glad when Jacob shows up with who you presume is Brenda, but he begins going on about how proud he is a of Roldan and other things you don’t really care about right now. + +“Jacob, I’m in no mood to speak about anything, I’m only here out of formalities. No offense to you, Roldan or anyone. I just really don’t want to be here right now and would like this over with as soon as possible.” + +Jacob isn’t sure how to react at first and then he looks over to his left and sees Mistress sitting over at the far end of the balcony. He gets it. + +“Apologies.” He says and whispers to Brenda about something before turning his attention to the parade, which is just beginning to get underway. + +As you sit there watching you try to lose yourself in the moment, but it’s difficult when you’re fighting the urge to take Mistress up on her offer. Every once in a while you glance over at her and catch a glimpse of her legs. You think about how you’d love to have them wrapped around you while your hands are wrapped around her throat. + +While you successfully lose yourself in this violent fantasy you are suddenly snapped out of it when everyone starts cheering very loudly. + +General Roldan arrives on a giant extravagant platform carried by a dozen or so elven slaves. He stands there in very shiny ornamental armor with an equally ornamental weapon by his side. He waves to the crowds on both sides and accepts their cheers. Brenda and Jacob are both smiling and Jacob is shouting louder than anyone else on the balcony. + +Then something unexpected happens. + +A cloaked figure suddenly materializes right behind Roldan. From this distance you can’t be sure, but it doesn’t look entirely human. As the crowd’s cheers become sounds of horror, you see this figure draw two curved blades and in one quick move decapitates Roldan before he even knows there is an attacker behind him. + +His body and head don’t even hit the surface of the platform before the cloaked figure disappears again. The elven slaves at this point panic and drop the platform, this is soon followed by the rest of the citizens generally running all over the place and soldiers swarming the streets trying to maintain order. The city is in chaos. + +Jacob is just sitting there in shock. Alison has immediately ordered everyone on the balcony to get inside the palace. Brenda on the other hand has already left; you imagine she’s taken to the streets to go find her husband’s assassin herself. + +“That was a fucking shadow.” You say to yourself and then you look over to Mistress and see her still sitting in her chair as well, but she’s not in shock. You see a small smirk across her face. That same cruel smirk you’ve seen many times before. + +You KNOW she’s behind this and she’s gone too far this time. + +You push aside the panicking spectators and rush towards Mistress. She turns to your direction just in time for you to tackle her to the ground and begin punching her in the face. Nobody tries to stop you. + +“You fucking treacherous bitch! You did this! I’m putting an end to you once and for all!” you shout. + +Mistress’ face is bloody and her nose is broken, but she isn’t without fight left in her. She rakes her nails across your eyes, which is enough for her to wiggle out from under you. + +“I didn’t have anything to do with this you crazy bastard!” she shouts, but you aren’t listening to her lies. You don’t even care that you’re half blind, you continue to grab at her so she can’t get away. + +“You’re not talking your way out of this, you svelk cunt!” you say and stab her in the stomach with the dagger she gave you. She attempts to cast a spell at you, but you grab her hand and break it before she even gets a word out. + +You pick her up off the floor like a rag doll and slam her back against the balcony railing. Her upper half hangs vulnerably over the railing and your intention is to see that the other half soon follows. + +“And now I’m going to punish you. It might not take you LONG to fall, but when you hit the ground it will certainly be HARD.” You remark as you hands grab both her legs to finish pushing her over, but Mistress still isn’t done yet. + +“There you go, sweet talking me again.” She says and with one last burst of energy and surprising strength she grabs your collar and pulls you forward and the pair of you go tumbling over the balcony. + +Your last thoughts before you hit the cold stone courtyard below are of the happier times with Alison followed by the happy thoughts that at least you got to see Mistress hit the ground a split second before you do.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You get on your horse and make your way to the Empire capital. + +You’re not doing it, plain and simple. The Emperor can deal with you as he sees fit, but you are not going to help Mistress for any reason. You made the attempt and it resulted in trickery again. + +Besides, why the hell should you follow every little menial task? You’ve been instrumental in keeping the damn Empire together; you shouldn’t be subjugated to such indignities! Jacob just told you the Emperor is sick, well he better watch it if he wants to stick around long enough to get better. + +You can’t believe you just thought such a thing. What the hell is wrong with you? The thoughts and acts of disobedience are bad enough, but to actually consider… + +You can’t even think it again. Something must be seriously wrong with your mind. Maybe Mistress did something more to you. Maybe she did some sort of magic spell to your head to make you harbor thoughts of dissension. At least you hope that’s case, because if she didn’t then you’d have to come to grips that you thought about killing the Emperor all on your own. Whatever the reason, you’ll be keeping that one to yourself. + +When you get to the Emperor’s chambers you hear him call for you immediately. Some coughing immediately follows his voice. You’ve definitely never heard him do that before + +“There you are my son, I’m glad to see you. It’s been so long since we’ve talked face to face.” He says as he sits hunched over a desk. He almost looks like he’s struggling to prop himself up. Maybe he is as sick as Jacob says. He’s as pale as Jacob said and his eyes are starting to have a sunken in looking appearance. What used to look like a man in his fifties now looks more like a man in his seventies. In fact he almost looks a bit more like how you thought he was going to when you first met him. +You know he’s powerful. Certainly more powerful than you, but he looks so much frailer now. It makes you ashamed that you had thoughts about killing him; especially after all he’s done for you. + +“Emperor! I was told you were sick, but I didn’t believe it! How?” +“Sick? (Cough cough) Well I suppose that’s one way of putting it. I’m guessing Jacob told you I was practically on my death bed or something. He still worries too much and you shouldn’t either. I’m not sick, I’m…well its complicated, but suffice to say, I’m not dying anytime soon. Trust me on that one. Now I’d (Cough cough) like a report on the Felkans. Have we finally destroyed them once and for all?” + +“Yes, the capital has been taken and is in the process of being destroyed. The battle mages will be casting defilement spells to make sure nothing ever grows there again. The ruling royals from what we can tell all committed mass suicide.” +“Figures. But as long as everyone’s dead, it’s still good. So what about gnomes? Any in the capital?” +“None. I can only guess we got all of them at Gnome’s Home.” +“One can (cough cough) only hope. So have they all been sentenced to oblivion yet?” +“I don’t know, I haven’t been Gnome’s Home.” +“You haven’t? I thought you got here pretty quickly. Surely Jacob told you that I wanted you to go there.” +“Yes, he told me I was to go there to assist and I know that could only mean assisting Mistress with the destruction of gnome souls. It was with great regret that I disobeyed this order, but I simply cannot help that woman again, if ever. The last time I made the attempt was two years ago when I was assisting her at Gnome’s Home and there was some…unpleasantness.” +“Was there now? I hadn’t heard about this and I spoke to her about leaving you alone, as you well know. So what exactly happened? She try to kill you?” +“No, she (sigh) made unwanted advances on me. I turned her down, and later when I went back to my camp she magically disguised herself as Alison and slept with me that way. I of course didn’t now until afterwards.” +“”Is that all? Here I was thinking it was something serious.” the Emperor replies in a bored tone followed by more coughing. “However, I can see that this is something that was very serious to you so I will of course dismiss your transgression of not following orders…again. In the future I will also make sure that you and her are never to work together under any circumstances. I guess my attempt at being peacemaker didn’t work out. (cough cough) Doesn’t matter anyway, but tell me what are you exactly mad concerning that situation that occurred? I get the impression it’s more than just Mistress fucking with you as usual.” + +He’s right. The fact that Mistress tricked you isn’t what bothered you the most; it’s the fact that you unwittingly betrayed Alison. The fact that Mistress cloaked herself as someone you have feelings for…no someone you LOVE to trick you just made it all the worse. You tell the Emperor as much, he nods in between another coughing fit. + +“So, you do love this Alison girl then? It’s not just lust or perhaps a fleeting fancy. You actually love her?” the Emperor asks. +“I do.” +“And this girl, she feels the same way?” +“I believe she does.” +“Hmm, you better be sure son.” +“Yes, I know she does.” +“I see… well do you want some advice?” +“From you, of course.” +“ (cough cough) Shit. (cough) Okay, here it is then, you’ll save yourself some pain if you end this relationship altogether. Now just listen. I know you’re an intelligent person and an excellent strategist in the matters of war, but on the matters of love you’re…and I don’t mean this as an insult…but you’re a little inexperienced. It’s okay though, even after several centuries I still haven’t figured it all out yet. But I still know more than you and I’m telling you that you’ll be better off not getting deeply involved with such things. Why do you think I’ve never had an Empress by my side? It complicates things to a whole new level and that’s complications YOU don’t need.” + +You’re speechless for a moment. You can’t think of anything to say except… + +“Is this an order?” +“An order? No, I’d never give such an order concerning matters of the heart; it is merely advice. You may do as you wish. In fact you may do as you wish for quite some time. I’m giving you some down time in light of our glorious victory over the Felkans. We’ll of course be having some celebrations going on here in the capital so if you get the chance you should probably (cough cough) join in the (cough cough) festivities. When you’re needed to return to duty, I’ll send for you as usual. I also want you to know, I’m proud of you son and for all you’ve done for the Empire and know you’ll continue to serve the Empire loyally (cough cough) and with dedication in the future.” + +The Emperor at this point slowly gets up and heads off towards his bedroom area coughing the whole time. You almost ask him if he needs help, but you’d rather not insult him. Besides you’re too busy pondering his advice to you about Alison. + +Even you thought about how being in a relationship with Alison put you in a position to fall for Mistress’ trickery. You think about Roldan and how he’s married and it doesn’t seem to affect his judgment, but it’s different for him. He’s married to another Eternal and he doesn’t have the responsibilities you have. + +But as they say, the heart wants what the heart wants and you’ve wanted to spend time with Alison ever since you were split up from her. And now that this war is finally over you have the time to do it. Should you break up with her just because of some potential problems in the future with Mistress or anything else? +> Continue your relationship +You’re sure the Emperor means well and he probably does have more knowledge on these things. But he doesn’t know Alison the way you know her. You also can’t and won’t spend your life in fear that something might occur that will cause strife between you and Alison. + +That’s why you’re going to tell her what happened two years ago and face whatever the consequences may be. + +You leave the palace and the capital to make your way to where Alison is currently stationed, which means a long ride back to the new eastern frontier of the Empire. You eventually arrive at Fort Stalwart, which is actually just a renamed and rebuilt fort once held by the ex-Felkan Kingdom. + +Given your reputation, the gates are immediately opened for you. A few of the older soldiers are also probably aware of your relationship with their commanding officer so orders are already given to alert Alison of your sudden arrival. She meets you even before you make it to her office. + +She flashes a smile when she sees you and goes to put her arms around you presumably to kiss you. While you’d love for her to do so, you stop Alison, which confuses the hell out her. + +“What’s this? Oh. The other soldiers around. You and your insistence on keeping protocol. Very well let’s get to my quarters so we can get you back into your comfort zone, because its been too damn long.” +“It has and we should get back to your quarters, but I’m not sure if you’re going to be in the mood for what you probably had in mind after I tell you what I have to tell you.” + +Alison steps back and gives you a tilted look. + +“Hmm, sounds serious. You look even more grim than usual. Well let’s get this over with.” Alison says and the pair of you head towards her quarters. + +Her private quarters are neat and clean, as you’d expect, on the right wall you see your portrait, which is right across from her bed. Placed in such a way so the first thing she sees when she wakes up is you. + +“Alright. Out with it and let’s see exactly how mad you think I’m going to be at you.” Alison remarks closing her door. You sit on the bed and take a deep breath then exhale giving her a look on your face which contains a mixture of shame and guilt. + +“Geez…this must be bad. I don’t think I’ve ever seen you like this. Its almost like you’re afraid to tell me. Shit, maybe I better sit down too.” Alison says taking a seat in one her chairs. +“Alison…I love you. I want you to know that before I say anything else. I never thought I could ever feel this way at all about anyone. It just wasn’t something I was taught or even learned. (whew) Okay enough stalling. Here it is…” + +You tell Alison everything that happened two years ago at Gnome’s Home and afterwards. You also explain that you didn’t want to tell her in a letter because you felt something like this should be face to face. You expect Alison to show some sign of anger at this point, but she remains stoically silent just listening to everything. + +Lastly, and you weren’t planning on telling her this either, but you mention that the Emperor suggested that you break up with her and how you obviously ignored this advice because your feelings are just that strong for her. This one causes her eyes to widen a little. + +“Wow, obsessed svelk, rape through magic trickery, warnings from the Emperor, defying orders…sheesh. Bet you never thought you’d have to deal with things like this.” +“Rape?” you say. +“Well, yes. Its not like you willingly had sex with her, you willingly had sex with what you THOUGHT was me. It might’ve been a civilized form of it, but it still was rape since you wouldn’t have had sex with who it really was. What else would you call what that svelk bitch did to you? The act doesn’t always include a bunch of men holding down a hapless young girl and ramming their dicks into her you know.” + +Hell, you never even thought about that. For a brief moment you feel slightly…violated. + +“And here I thought she was just making up shit and posturing.” Alison continues. +“Wait a minute. You…knew? When?” you ask. +“For about two years now. Though as you might expect she told things a little differently. Never mentioned about disguising herself as me.” +“So she visited you? You never mentioned it in your letters.” +“Well hey guess what, neither did you. Though in your case I can understand why. In my case it was more I thought she was just so full of shit that I didn’t believe her in the first place and in the second place I knew you were so busy with the Felkans that I didn’t want to distract you with unpleasant thoughts of her in my letters. Figured it would be best to keep her out of them.” + +“What did she tell you exactly?” +“She appeared in my office one night claiming that she would always be the main woman in your life. And how I didn’t stand chance against her and that I should just give up now. She said this along with the predictable insults of monkey and my general appearance. Then she mentioned how she easily seduced you into having sex with her and that you would always be hers. Like I said she was so overly dramatic about everything I thought she had to be lying.” +“So what did you do?” +“Nothing, I mostly just shrugged my shoulders and told her I thought she was lying. I also mentioned that I found it pretty sad that for all her superior svelk talent and beauty she was still jealous of a mere monkey like myself and obsessed with a man who obviously did not share the strong feelings she obviously has for you. Then to finish up my retort I also told her that even if what she said was true, that even if you did have sex with her it would only make you appreciate me all the more.” +“Yikes. I can imagine she didn’t like that.” +“Oh no, she did not like it at all. Her face turned from a smug sneer to one of frothing anger. I thought she was going to attack me, some flames started emanating from her fingers and for a moment it felt like a force was keeping me from drawing my own weapon. I couldn’t even call out for other soldiers to help. I guess she thought better of it though because she just stood there for a moment staring at me and then made her way out the window. Wasn’t long after that incident the svelk merc support was transferred out of here, which was fine by me and everyone else of course. Not like we needed them against gnoll attacks anymore anyway.” + +“I can’t believe all this happened and you aren’t mad.” You say. +“Oh trust me I’m mad, but if you think its with you, you’re mistaken. I can’t do much about it though I suppose. I’m not really concerned with your little svelk stalker. I’m a little more troubled with what you just told me about the Emperor. I get the impression he doesn’t care for my influence, not that I think I really have any over you.” +“Oh that? I wouldn’t worry about him. I believe he’s just overly concerned with my well-being again. He’s always been a little over protective at times, like a father with an only son I suppose. Right now though I’m just wondering how you feel about me after all is said and done.” +“I don’t feel anything. Ha ha ha …wait that came out wrong. What I mean is I still feel the same way I always have about you. I love you. Nothing has changed.” +“Good, then let’s get married. Let’s take our relationship to its next logical step.” +“Married? You serious?” +“Well sure. I mean don’t people who feel the way we do get married?” +“Usually I guess…but I dunno…seems like there some forces against us, and that’s not even including one of us dying violently in battle. I mean in some ways the Emperor might be right. You might save yourself some pain if you ended our relationship now.” +“Perhaps, but I won’t get to experience the good stuff if I did that.” +“Good stuff eh? Is that what you’re calling it now?” Alison jokes. “Well, you sure you’re ready for the pain of possibly losing me on some forsaken battlefield somewhere?” +“How do you know you’ll die first? You could outlive me.” +“Pfft, please. You’ll outlive everyone. You’d outlast this entire world, if you had the time.” Alison laughs. +“So will you marry me?” +“Yes, of course I will.” + +As fitting for two soldiers, you and Alison don’t have a fancy wedding; in fact you get married the next day in some small town in the Arat province by a local bureaucrat. Alison is still on duty for the next week so you return to her post and spend your wedding night in her quarters at Fort Stalwart. She tells you though as soon as she has time off, the pair of you are going to spend quality time doing something fun which doesn’t involve the bedroom. You don’t see the need since the bedroom is just fine with you, but you agree. + +While waiting for Alison’s time off, you take it upon yourself to have a pair of proper rings made for you and Alison. You also have what possessions you actually own sent to Fort Stalwart since you don’t know where you’ll be stationed next and there is as good of place as any. + +After you’ve taken care of all that, you still have a day left to wait for Alison, so you go back to see the Emperor, you figure he should know what you’ve done and he’ll know eventually anyway. + +When you see him again, he’s still coughing a lot and moving slowly when he walks. He seems happy to see you though. + +“My (cough cough) son. This is an unexpected (cough) visit. I would’ve thought you would’ve been off enjoying your down time.” He says. +“I am, but I have also come to tell you something. I have married Alison.” +“Oh. I see. Well (cough cough) whatever makes you happy son. I trust she makes you happy.” +“Yes.” +“Then I’m happy for you. (cough cough) Heh, that was quick. Have to admit I didn’t expect you to marry her. You should’ve told me though (cough cough) I could’ve ordered a big city celebration like what (cough cough) we’re doing for the victory over the Felkans. You two could’ve walked down the streets with fancy guard and everything.” +“That would’ve been very generous, but I don’t think that would’ve been either of our style.” +“I suppose not. Well as I (cough cough) have said, I’m happy for you, enjoy your time together and cherish it. So was there anything else?” +“No, nothing of any note.” +“Very well…(cough cough) ugh…I’m still afflicted as you can tell. I need to just rest, so if you’ll excuse me.” + +Again, you feel like asking if he needs help, but you resist. Instead you just quietly start to leave. The Emperor speaks to you as he makes his way back to his bedroom. + +“Oh. Don’t (cough cough) worry about Semra. I spoke with her earlier a couple days ago about bothering you again.” +“Semra?” +“Yeah, you know (cough cough) Mistress. I made it quite clear to her if she did do it again that she’d be executed, along with every other svelk in the Empire. (cough cough) Funny thing is, she went into a complete breakdown exclaiming that I didn’t need to worry about that ever again, because as far she was concerned she never wanted to see you ever again. Then she (cough) proceeded to swear in common tongue as well as her own language. Mostly about you. Then she stormed off. If I didn’t know better I thought she was going to cry. I actually wondered what it was that caused all that. Now I know. I guess you had a hidden witness (cough cough) to your wedding.” + +“Shit.” You say quietly to yourself in amazement. Then you address the Emperor. + +“Thank you, sir.” +“No problem. (cough cough) Think of it as my wedding gift to you.” + +Well you couldn’t have asked for a better one, assuming she really does stay away. +> Years pass... +Year 32 + +“It’s not just a celebration for Roldan, it’s the celebration of the victory over the Felkans.” You remark. +“I know that, but why is he getting a special parade? Roldan wasn’t the only one who brought down the Felkan Kingdom! He wasn’t even the only general!” Alison exclaims. +“He was involved in the brunt of the major conflicts, including most of the vital forts and cities and most importantly the last siege on the Felkan capital.” You reply. +“As I recall YOU played a major role along with several others!” +“Well Roldan’s also been making great progress in eliminating the gnolls tribes on our western borders too. We probably won’t be having any trouble with them anymore at the rate he’s going.” +“And as I recall YOU also played a major role in that during the Felkan War! Hell, so did I and continued to do so long after you got transferred to the frontlines! Shit, if it hadn’t been for us keeping those mongrel barbarians back who knows how the war would’ve turned out?” +“Alison why are you so angry about this?” +“I just don’t understand why you aren’t getting a big parade or accolades either.” Alison says as she finishes getting dressed. +“I dunno, I’m not really concerned about it though.” You reply apathetically. “Besides you know I don’t care for all this kind of pomp and flash that comes with these sorts of celebrations anyway. If I didn’t have to be here out of formality I wouldn’t even be attending.” +“Maybe, but it doesn’t seem fair that you’ve been getting punished just because you married me.” +“Here we go, this concept again…” + +Alison goes into her usual rant about how since you got married to her, you’ve been getting less important assignments. She feels that the Emperor has been punishing you by keeping you in the background while allowing Roldan to take more of a prominent role such as sending him to conquer the gnoll tribes of the west. + +You can see this argument, and you have even entertained it a bit from time to time, but ultimately you’ve dismissed it, mainly because despite everything you’re still reporting directly to the Emperor. You’re still his most trusted of all his advisors. + +You’re still his son. + +Besides its not like you’re sitting around doing nothing. The Emperor has just been keeping you closer to home because this is where you’re currently needed. With the recently acquired Felkan territory and the westward expansion, the Eyes are a little stretched so you’ve mostly been trying to eliminate the new bandit havens popping up in the old Felkan territory along with helping to fend off any desperate gnoll raids that attempt to sneak through. You’re also supposed to be making sure the new “citizens” aren’t planning to rebel, but given how badly they were beaten down, they’re just glad that you’re allowing them to live. So far no seditious activity has been detected. + +True, you’d rather be out there conquering new lands in his name and getting into the heat of battles rather than playing super sentinel, but at least you get to see Alison more often. It’s a good trade off as far as you’re concerned. + +As far as Roldan is concerned you aren’t worried about him being “favored.” This large celebration for Roldan is more Jacob’s idea mainly because Roldan has largely become well known along with being well liked throughout the Empire. Not just by the military, but by the normal citizens as well. He’s generally regarded as a hero of sorts. + +Jacob practically begged the Emperor for this special celebration because he felt it would be good for overall morale throughout the Empire. Well that, and the fact Jacob feels “vindicated” that his own influence on the Eternals has proved successful. Though you sort of had a major role in Jacob’s fortune in that endeavor as well, something else Alison mentions in her rant. + +“You know, I might be getting sent to the unexplored land east of Nalin. There’s been discussion about expansion in that direction.” You say to Alison in the hopes that it will calm her down a bit. +“Yeah? Well I certainly hope you’ll get your own special celebration when you conquer whoever lives there. I’m sorry. I don’t know why this is getting to me. This doesn’t bother you, so it shouldn’t bother me. You’re right anyway, I guess if you’d really fallen out of favor you would’ve been sent to go tame the inhospitable usksha desert south of Nalin alone in a loin cloth welding just a wooden sword.” + +You chuckle at Alison’s scenario. + +“Okay how do I look? Do I look presentable for the Emperor’s palace?” + +Alison stands before you in a black dress. It isn’t excessively fancy, but it’s certainly not something peasant would wear. While you’ve seen Alison in civilian clothing before, you’ve not seen her in something so elegant. + +“Really you didn’t need to dress up for this thing, I certainly didn’t. I just made sure I didn’t have a tear in my trousers and polished my armor.” +“Maybe that’s because visiting the Emperor’s palace isn’t that big of a deal to you. For me however this is a new experience. Just glad my mother’s old dress fit me, since it’s practically the only fancy thing I own.” +Well, you look lovely and dangerous as usual. The rapier on your hip is a nice touch. Didn’t realize that’s what all the upper class ladies were accessorizing with nowadays.” +“Ha ha, I said I wanted to look presentable, I didn’t say I was going for high society. I’m still a soldier by nature, I’m not going anywhere without a weapon. “ +“That’s my girl, let’s be on our way.” You remark and the pair of you set off for the capital in a carriage. + +Alison’s mood is much better the closer you get to your destination. When you arrive, the capital is already pretty busy along with the surrounding countryside. The city guard and a few soldiers are busily trying to keep order and keep the path clear for the parade later. The palace is certainly less chaotic and you take the opportunity to show Alison some of it. She mostly enjoys the ancient armor and weapon displays along with some of the statues. You have to admit, before you came here with Alison, you never really admired them before. + +Doesn’t take long before someone who knows you approaches. It’s Jacob and a brunette woman who looks about your age. She must be a soldier of some sort because she’s dressed in armor. + +“There you are, I was wondering when you’d arrive! When did you get here?” +“I don’t know, a half hour ago I guess. I was showing Alison some of the palace since she’s never been here before.” +“Ah yes, Alison! It’s a pleasure to finally meet you face to face! Better known as Major Krozer for those of us that have only known her through her military deeds. I heard how you were instrumental during the Felkan War on the gnoll front! That was great work! Between you and your husband here you really paved the way to the destruction of those barbarians.” +“Thank you for the recognition.” Alison remarks politely. Ever the professional, she knows not to bring her personal feelings into a setting like this. +“Everyone should remember that even though a special parade is being held for General Roldan, all soldiers who did their duty during that terrible war are to be honored and respected. Actually scratch that, ALL soldiers of the Empire should be.” Jacob says as he looks over to the warrior woman. +“Oh I’m sure I didn’t do anything nearly as impressive as my husband or even the major and her husband here. But I suppose can be glad that the kobold and usksha population is a lot lower due to me.” the woman says. +“Brenda, don’t sell yourself short! You know you’ve done great things as well.” Jacob says. +“Brenda?” you ask. You didn’t even recognize her, but then it has been quite a while. +“Yep, it’s me. Been a long time. I figured you wouldn’t recognize me right away. Oh, sorry about all that y’know…back in class.” +“As I’ve told everyone else Brenda, all in the past. All in the past.” You say. + +The four of you speak for a moment exchanging general pleasantries. Jacob seems even happier than Brenda about Roldan’s celebration. In fact in the whole time you’ve known him, this has to be the happiest you’ve ever seen him. Eventually the four of you head to one of the palace’s large balconies where you can view the entire parade. + +Three of the five known Eternals are here, and it makes you wonder where your other classmates are since it seems like they would be important enough to be here. When you ask Jacob this question, Jacob says Warrick is indeed here, but is currently working as head of security for this celebration being Sightmaster of the Eyes and all. As for Kane, Jacob stumbles a bit over his words. + +“Well, erm…Kane is having personal problems…he’s been reassigned to Rask while he uh…works things out. They’re always having problems with the occasional giant lumbering down from the mountains and the stray feral ogre bands there anyway.” +“Jacob, I’m well aware of Kane’s condition, you know.” +“You are? Yes…I suppose you would, considering you’ve visited Gnome’s Home in the past. (Sigh) Well then you know its best that he’s not around other normal people, even other soldiers. He’s still loyal to the Empire, he just has to be isolated. So he’s at a very remote outpost at the edge of the northern Rask Mountains. He keeps a look out for potential attacks and if he…gets hungry he’s away from civilization and has the beasts from the mountains to prey upon.” + +You shake your head. + +“Jacob, I can appreciate that you’re trying to help Kane, but I wonder if his reassignment is really a good idea. What’s stopping Kane from losing complete control and wandering to a nearby village and slaughtering it?” +“He won’t. He’s extremely far away from the nearest civilized center and even Fort Defiance. The only victims of his will be giants and the like. And they’re enemies of the Empire anyway. Look, can we discuss this later? The celebration is starting.” Jacob says. + +You nod and return to Alison to watch the parade. It is indeed a lavish sight. You see soldiers in impression armor marching in complete unison performing drill techniques with perfect timing. You see wizards creating small extraordinary feats of magic to entertain. + +As you sit there watching you do sort of lose yourself in the moment and actually enjoy just being a “spectator”. Being there with Alison certainly helps make you feel normal for a while. + +Then comes the big moment. General Roldan arrives on a giant extravagant platform carried by a dozen or so elven slaves. He stands there in very shiny ornamental armor with an equally ornamental weapon by his side. He waves to the crowds on both sides and accepts their cheers. Brenda and Jacob are both smiling and Jacob is shouting louder than anyone else on the balcony. + +“Sheesh, you’d think he was the one married to Roldan.” Alison remarks. + +You snicker at her comment and then suddenly as you’re watching Roldan wave on the platform, you get a very bed feeling. You don’t know why or how, but all your instincts scream out at you that something very bad is going to happen… + +And then it does. + +A cloaked figure suddenly materializes right behind Roldan. From this distance you can’t be sure, but it doesn’t look entirely human. As the crowd’s cheers become sounds of horror, you see this figure draw two curved blades and in one quick move decapitates Roldan before he even knows there is an attacker behind him. + +His body and head don’t even hit the surface of the platform before the cloaked figure disappears again. The elven slaves at this point panic and drop the platform, this is soon followed by the rest of the citizens generally running all over the place and soldiers swarming the streets trying to maintain order. The city is in chaos. + +Jacob is just sitting there in shock. Alison has immediately ordered everyone on the balcony to get inside the palace. Brenda on the other hand has already left; you imagine she’s taken to the streets to go find her husband’s assassin herself. + +“That was a fucking shadow.” You say to yourself. +> Seek the assassin +The Emperor is probably the most secure person in the area and even though he’s not been well lately, you know that he’s still more than capable of defending himself against some shadows. + +Your best bet is to some how track down the assassin before he gets away, so you tell Alison that you’re going to follow Brenda’s lead and chase after the assassin. + +“Wait, how do you even know where to look?” Alison asks. +“I don’t, but I have to try. Just get Jacob inside, he’s still out on the balcony in shock.” You answer before leaving. + +As frantic as the palace is, the streets of the city are much worse. You have to literally fight your way through in order to get anywhere. After pushing several citizens out of the way, you stumble upon one of the Eyes. + +“Hey you! Where the hell is the rest of your unit? More importantly where the hell is Warrick?” you ask the Eye. +“My unit is trying to keep this area under control while searching the nearby buildings here. As far as I know, Sightmaster Warrick was last seen near the city gates.” +“Well the palace needs some extra protection, I want you to get the rest of your unit over there now. Your primary concern is supposed to be defending the Emperor anyway!” + +You make your way towards the city gates, which is a chore. You still wonder where Brenda went, but when you finally get a clear view of the gates, you find her and Warrick arguing with each in the middle of the chaos. + +“I’ve got Eyes scouring the city and mages casting detection spells to back them up, I’m doing all I can Brenda!” Warrick exclaims. +“Well you’re sure doing a bang up job of that eyeboy, considering you weren’t even able to prevent my husband from getting fucking decapitated in front of everyone! That was a fucking shadow Warrick! It probably already left the city already!” Brenda retorts. +“I’m well aware of what it was Brenda, I had to track down and fight them a lot more than you ever did!” +“And given that your group was supposed to have wiped them out, you fucked up on that job too!” +“Brenda if you want to go on your own personal manhunt, fine, you don’t need my permission to do it. Go find and grab the nearest mage and have at it! I don’t have time to argue with you, I’m having a hard enough time trying to coordinate everything in this chaos right now.” + +Warrick looks semi-relieved when he sees you arrive. + +“I’m glad you’re here, you’ve got magic abilities. Can you take Brenda with you?” + +Brenda turns to you though she isn’t as happy to see you either. + +“Great, the other fuck up who was supposed to have been responsible for the extermination of the shadows.” Brenda remarks. +“Brenda I know you’re angry right now and understandably upset, but I’m not going to tolerate the same sort of verbal abuse you’ve been heaping on Warrick. Now I’ll certainly help you, because I want this sonofabitch almost as bad as you do, but we’re going to do this without the arguing.” + +Your calm yet firm demeanor doesn’t quell the high emotions going through Brenda right now, but they do at least establish a behavior guideline. + +“Alright fine.” She remarks. +“Good, now let’s start checking the sewers.” +“The sewers? Are you sure?” Brenda asks. +“No, but I’m making a good guess that it being a shadow, it probably hasn’t gone far and is enjoying the whole idea of hiding right under our noses and possibly even planning the next step to cause further chaos. Besides, shit is often found in the sewers.” +“I’ve got people already searching the sewers.” Warrick pipes up. +“Yeah well, maybe if you had some stationed there and had a thorough search of the sewers before the parade none of this would be necessary now.” +“That’s not fair, Jacob said…” +“I don’t want to hear it Warrick. As far as I’m concerned Brenda’s got a right to be pissed at you considering you were supposed to be in charge of security for this thing.” + +Leaving Warrick behind, you and Brenda find the nearest manhole and descend into the smelly darkness. And it does smell pretty awful. Still not as bad as Gnome’s Home though, you don’t think anything will ever smell worse than that place. + +You keep a detection spell constantly on hoping it will catch something worthwhile, but you know this is a long shot and the equivalent of looking for a needle in a haystack. Still, you couldn’t just sit around doing nothing. Brenda might’ve been out of line speaking to you in such a manner, but in some ways you do feel a little responsible since you thought you’d wiped out all the shadows. + +Brenda and you are more or less silent the whole time you search the sewers. You never do run into any of Warrick’s people, but then the sewers are just as large as the city itself. It’s not surprising you aren’t having much luck finding a shadow, if one is even hiding down here in the first place. + +“Damn it. I’m sorry Brenda.” +“What?” +“I don’t know where to even look, the sewers were just a blind guess. I have no real idea where to look. You probably were right; the shadow probably already left the city and if that’s the case, who know where the hell it fled to.” + +Brenda doesn’t say anything at first and you fully expect her to go off on you, but she doesn’t, instead she starts crying. Or rather she fails in trying not to cry. It would appear that the fact that her husband is dead is finally hitting her hard. + +“Brenda I…” you start to say and then a faint whistling sound is heard and you feel a sharp pain going through your back. You look down long enough to see the head of a crossbow bolt. Blood spreads across your chest and you stagger around and stare at a grinning decaying face. You then feel two blades separate your head from your body. + +The good news is your hunch was correct. The bad news is your detection spell couldn’t work on something that was already dead and as a result so are you. + +You can only hope that Brenda gets her revenge and figures it all out, because you won’t.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 32 + +“It’s not just a celebration for Roldan, it’s the celebration of the victory over the Felkans.” You remark. +“I know that, but why is he getting a special parade? Roldan wasn’t the only one who brought down the Felkan Kingdom! He wasn’t even the only general!” Alison exclaims. +“He was involved in the brunt of the major conflicts, including most of the vital forts and cities and most importantly the last siege on the Felkan capital.” You reply. +“As I recall YOU played a major role along with several others!” +“Well Roldan’s also been making great progress in eliminating the gnolls tribes on our western borders too. We probably won’t be having any trouble with them anymore at the rate he’s going.” +“And as I recall YOU also played a major role in that during the Felkan War! Hell, so did I and continued to do so long after you got transferred to the frontlines! Shit, if it hadn’t been for us keeping those mongrel barbarians back who knows how the war would’ve turned out?” +“Alison why are you so angry about this?” +“I just don’t understand why you aren’t getting a big parade or accolades either.” Alison says as she finishes getting dressed. +“I dunno, I’m not really concerned about it though.” You reply apathetically. “Besides you know I don’t care for all this kind of pomp and flash that comes with these sorts of celebrations anyway. If I didn’t have to be here out of formality I wouldn’t even be attending.” +“Maybe, but it doesn’t seem fair that you’ve been getting punished just because you married me.” +“Here we go, this concept again…” + +Alison goes into her usual rant about how since you got married to her, you’ve been getting less important assignments. She feels that the Emperor has been punishing you by keeping you in the background while allowing Roldan to take more of a prominent role such as sending him to conquer the gnoll tribes of the west. + +You can see this argument, and you have even entertained it a bit from time to time, but ultimately you’ve dismissed it, mainly because despite everything you’re still reporting directly to the Emperor. You’re still his most trusted of all his advisors. + +You’re still his son. + +Besides its not like you’re sitting around doing nothing. The Emperor has just been keeping you closer to home because this is where you’re currently needed. With the recently acquired Felkan territory and the westward expansion, the Eyes are a little stretched so you’ve mostly been trying to eliminate the new bandit havens popping up in the old Felkan territory along with helping to fend off any desperate gnoll raids that attempt to sneak through. You’re also supposed to be making sure the new “citizens” aren’t planning to rebel, but given how badly they were beaten down, they’re just glad that you’re allowing them to live. So far no seditious activity has been detected. + +True, you’d rather be out there conquering new lands in his name and getting into the heat of battles rather than playing super sentinel, but at least you get to see Alison more often. It’s a good trade off as far as you’re concerned. + +As far as Roldan is concerned you aren’t worried about him being “favored.” This large celebration for Roldan is more Jacob’s idea mainly because Roldan has largely become well known along with being well liked throughout the Empire. Not just by the military, but by the normal citizens as well. He’s generally regarded as a hero of sorts. + +Jacob practically begged the Emperor for this special celebration because he felt it would be good for overall morale throughout the Empire. Well that, and the fact Jacob feels “vindicated” that his own influence on the Eternals has proved successful. Though you sort of had a major role in Jacob’s fortune in that endeavor as well, something else Alison mentions in her rant. + +“You know, I might be getting sent to the unexplored land east of Nalin. There’s been discussion about expansion in that direction.” You say to Alison in the hopes that it will calm her down a bit. +“Yeah? Well I certainly hope you’ll get your own special celebration when you conquer whoever lives there. I’m sorry. I don’t know why this is getting to me. This doesn’t bother you, so it shouldn’t bother me. You’re right anyway, I guess if you’d really fallen out of favor you would’ve been sent to go tame the inhospitable usksha desert south of Nalin alone in a loin cloth welding just a wooden sword.” + +You chuckle at Alison’s scenario. + +“Okay how do I look? Do I look presentable for the Emperor’s palace?” + +Alison stands before you in a black dress. It isn’t excessively fancy, but it’s certainly not something peasant would wear. While you’ve seen Alison in civilian clothing before, you’ve not seen her in something so elegant. + +“Really you didn’t need to dress up for this thing, I certainly didn’t. I just made sure I didn’t have a tear in my trousers and polished my armor.” +“Maybe that’s because visiting the Emperor’s palace isn’t that big of a deal to you. For me however this is a new experience. Just glad my mother’s old dress fit me, since it’s practically the only fancy thing I own.” +Well, you look lovely and dangerous as usual. The rapier on your hip is a nice touch. Didn’t realize that’s what all the upper class ladies were accessorizing with nowadays.” +“Ha ha, I said I wanted to look presentable, I didn’t say I was going for high society. I’m still a soldier by nature, I’m not going anywhere without a weapon. “ +“That’s my girl, let’s be on our way.” You remark and the pair of you set off for the capital in a carriage. + +Alison’s mood is much better the closer you get to your destination. When you arrive, the capital is already pretty busy along with the surrounding countryside. The city guard and a few soldiers are busily trying to keep order and keep the path clear for the parade later. The palace is certainly less chaotic and you take the opportunity to show Alison some of it. She mostly enjoys the ancient armor and weapon displays along with some of the statues. You have to admit, before you came here with Alison, you never really admired them before. + +Doesn’t take long before someone who knows you approaches. It’s Jacob and a brunette woman who looks about your age. She must be a soldier of some sort because she’s dressed in armor. + +“There you are, I was wondering when you’d arrive! When did you get here?” +“I don’t know, a half hour ago I guess. I was showing Alison some of the palace since she’s never been here before.” +“Ah yes, Alison! It’s a pleasure to finally meet you face to face! Better known as Major Krozer for those of us that have only known her through her military deeds. I heard how you were instrumental during the Felkan War on the gnoll front! That was great work! Between you and your husband here you really paved the way to the destruction of those barbarians.” +“Thank you for the recognition.” Alison remarks politely. Ever the professional, she knows not to bring her personal feelings into a setting like this. +“Everyone should remember that even though a special parade is being held for General Roldan, all soldiers who did their duty during that terrible war are to be honored and respected. Actually scratch that, ALL soldiers of the Empire should be.” Jacob says as he looks over to the warrior woman. +“Oh I’m sure I didn’t do anything nearly as impressive as my husband or even the major and her husband here. But I suppose can be glad that the kobold and usksha population is a lot lower due to me.” the woman says. +“Brenda, don’t sell yourself short! You know you’ve done great things as well.” Jacob says. +“Brenda?” you ask. You didn’t even recognize her, but then it has been quite a while. +“Yep, it’s me. Been a long time. I figured you wouldn’t recognize me right away. Oh, sorry about all that y’know…back in class.” +“As I’ve told everyone else Brenda, all in the past. All in the past.” You say. + +The four of you speak for a moment exchanging general pleasantries. Jacob seems even happier than Brenda about Roldan’s celebration. In fact in the whole time you’ve known him, this has to be the happiest you’ve ever seen him. Eventually the four of you head to one of the palace’s large balconies where you can view the entire parade. + +Three of the five known Eternals are here, and it makes you wonder where your other classmates are since it seems like they would be important enough to be here. When you ask Jacob this question, Jacob says Warrick is indeed here, but is currently working as head of security for this celebration being Sightmaster of the Eyes and all. As for Kane, Jacob stumbles a bit over his words. + +“Well, erm…Kane is having personal problems…he’s been reassigned to Rask while he uh…works things out. They’re always having problems with the occasional giant lumbering down from the mountains and the stray feral ogre bands there anyway.” +“Jacob, I’m well aware of Kane’s condition, you know.” +“You are? Yes…I suppose you would, considering you’ve visited Gnome’s Home in the past. (Sigh) Well then you know its best that he’s not around other normal people, even other soldiers. He’s still loyal to the Empire, he just has to be isolated. So he’s at a very remote outpost at the edge of the northern Rask Mountains. He keeps a look out for potential attacks and if he…gets hungry he’s away from civilization and has the beasts from the mountains to prey upon.” + +You shake your head. + +“Jacob, I can appreciate that you’re trying to help Kane, but I wonder if his reassignment is really a good idea. What’s stopping Kane from losing complete control and wandering to a nearby village and slaughtering it?” +“He won’t. He’s extremely far away from the nearest civilized center and even Fort Defiance. The only victims of his will be giants and the like. And they’re enemies of the Empire anyway. Look, can we discuss this later? The celebration is starting.” Jacob says. + +You nod and return to Alison to watch the parade. It is indeed a lavish sight. You see soldiers in impression armor marching in complete unison performing drill techniques with perfect timing. You see wizards creating small extraordinary feats of magic to entertain. + +As you sit there watching you do sort of lose yourself in the moment and actually enjoy just being a “spectator”. Being there with Alison certainly helps make you feel normal for a while. + +Then comes the big moment. General Roldan arrives on a giant extravagant platform carried by a dozen or so elven slaves. He stands there in very shiny ornamental armor with an equally ornamental weapon by his side. He waves to the crowds on both sides and accepts their cheers. Brenda and Jacob are both smiling and Jacob is shouting louder than anyone else on the balcony. + +“Sheesh, you’d think he was the one married to Roldan.” Alison remarks. + +You snicker at her comment and then suddenly as you’re watching Roldan wave on the platform, you get a very bed feeling. You don’t know why or how, but all your instincts scream out at you that something very bad is going to happen… + +And then it does. + +A cloaked figure suddenly materializes right behind Roldan. From this distance you can’t be sure, but it doesn’t look entirely human. As the crowd’s cheers become sounds of horror, you see this figure draw two curved blades and in one quick move decapitates Roldan before he even knows there is an attacker behind him. + +His body and head don’t even hit the surface of the platform before the cloaked figure disappears again. The elven slaves at this point panic and drop the platform, this is soon followed by the rest of the citizens generally running all over the place and soldiers swarming the streets trying to maintain order. The city is in chaos. + +Jacob is just sitting there in shock. Alison has immediately ordered everyone on the balcony to get inside the palace. Brenda on the other hand has already left; you imagine she’s taken to the streets to go find her husband’s assassin herself. + +“That was a fucking shadow.” You say to yourself. +> Secure the palace +If this is some sort of shadow attack then the first thing you need to do is keep the palace secure, in particular the Emperor. Besides the city streets are going to be mayhem, you doubt if you’ll be able to track down the assassin that killed Roldan. Hopefully others will get him though. + +Despite Alison getting most of the people back into the palace, Jacob is still sitting on the balcony in shock. + +“He…he…he’s not…he can’t…” Jacob stutters. +“Jacob get your ass inside now!” you shout and drag him inside. + +You and Alison both start taking control of the situation telling the guards to lock up every opening they can and the mages on duty to magically seal up the rest. Alison tells the guests to find some place safe to gather, but you don’t really care about any of them. Your number one concern is the safety of the Emperor. + +“Alison, I need to…” +“I know, the Emperor. Go. I can help with keeping shit together here.” + +You rush down to the Emperor’s den constantly looking around the whole time. You keep thinking that a shadow, or whatever that was that killed Roldan is going to suddenly materialize at anytime. + +When you get inside the Emperor’s chambers, he’s in bed asleep. You don’t want to wake him, but he needs to know the situation. + +“Huh? Mmmh? Oh hey…(cough cough) what’re you doing here? Are the festivities already over?” he asks. +“Emperor, there’s been an assassination. General Roldan was killed during the parade by what I think was a shadow. We’re currently trying to secure the palace just in case this is part of a greater attack.” +“Sounds like a lot happened while I was taking a nap. Shadow huh? Thought we killed all of them. Guess they were just playing a waiting game as usual. Always a few loose ends aren’t there? (cough) I imagine Jacob isn’t taking Roldan’s death too well.” +“Not at all, he’s pretty much in shock and was babbling the last time I saw him.” +“Hmm, well it is a shame. Roldan did turn out to be one of our best generals. I’ll have to make sure he gets a nice funeral. If we can’t celebrate his successes in life, at least we can honor him in death. (cough cough)…what’s wrong my son?” the Emperor asks when he notices that you’re looking slightly troubled. + +“I was one of the ones chiefly in charge of hunting down the shadows. The fact that I missed one or possibly several so that something like this could happen…I feel like I failed.” You explain. +“Nonsense, you did what you could to the best of your ability. I’ve always known that. Don’t even start playing what if for this situation, because it’s not worth it. While this event has certainly been tragic in that it ruined what was supposed to be a happy day, this really isn’t excessively serious in the scheme of things. (cough cough) If you were worried about me, don’t be. Even in my less than magnificent state, I’m more than able to handle a shadow or even a dozen of them. Assuming they could even get in here in the first place. Its probably just one crazed shadow that somehow hid under a rock all these years from our purges and thinks this one act is going to bring us down. Foolish of course, but what can you expect from such fanatics?” +“You don’t think this sort of thing could cause instability in the Empire?” +“Hardly. (cough cough) The citizens might panic about things for awhile, they’ll be fearful of the big bad shadows’ return for revenge or whatever stories they’ll make up, but ultimately it all works in our benefit I’m sure you know. (cough cough) We get to continue to display how without us they would be at the mercy of dangerous forces that would have destroyed them long ago.” +“So…what did you want me to do now?” you ask. + +The Emperor begins to sit up a bit more before answering you. + +“Nothing. In fact (cough cough) after things calm down a bit, you can return to your regular duties in the newly acquired Gan and Ibim provinces. I can handle things here in the palace and the city, just get Jacob down here and I’ll start hammering out the plans.” +“You really don’t need me to do anything?” +“No, your talents are far more useful doing what you’re doing right now. Besides, with Roldan dead you might be needed more than ever on that side of the Empire. Last I heard there were still gnolls running about. (cough cough) I of course appreciate your concern as always my son.” + +The Emperor begins to slowly get out of bed and you take your leave. When you get back upstairs everything is more or less peaceful. Alison and some of the other officers have been making sure the palace is secure. Alison tells you there have been no signs of any potential attackers. Reports from outside the palace are about the same, other than Roldan’s assassination the only other causalities have been from soldiers trying to maintain order or from people getting trampled in the initial chaos. No shadows or anything else like that. + +“So what’s the next move? What did the Emperor tell you?” Alison asks. +“He told me not to worry and when things calm down outside to just return to my normal duties.” You respond +“That’s it?!” +“That’s it. He wants to see Jacob though, is he in a more coherent mindset now?” +“Compared to before? Yeah, but he’s still pretty shaken up. I know he’s been crying.” + +You walk over to Jacob who is sitting quietly in a chair with his head in his hands. He’s still very upset. You have to repeat yourself twice when telling him that the Emperor wants to see him. + +You and Alison stay at the palace for a few more minutes, but when you get news that a carriage is able to take you back to Fort Stalwart you decide to leave immediately. Its hectic trying to leave at first since there is still a bit of turmoil in the streets as well as the surrounding countryside, but once you’re a few miles from the capital the ride becomes more relaxed. + +Alison asks you if you’re certain about leaving. + +“The Emperor told me to just return to more normal duties and not to worry, so that’s what I’m going to do. If he says he can handle this incident himself then I have no reason to doubt that. Besides, he also said with Roldan dead I might be needed more on the western borders anyway.” You say. +“Hmm. I guess all those times I worried about you being punished seem sort of silly now…sheesh…today was surreal. I mean I’ve seen a lot of stuff in my years of service, but nothing like this. The general consensus seems to be that it was a shadow that killed Roldan. Certainly looked like one from where I was sitting.” Alison replies. +“I don’t see what else it could’ve been. Similar style of clothing, invisibility, incredibly quick, sneak attack, the elements were all there. (Sigh) Damn.” +“You alright?” +“I just…well I dunno. I just can’t believe we…I missed a shadow. Really thought we got them all when I killed Cyrus. The Emperor said it wasn’t my fault and I know it really isn’t but I still feel like this is a major loss.” +“Yeah, I can imagine you’d feel that way having worked together with Roldan during the Felkan War.” +“Heh, well to be honest Roldan and I were never close. I mean we were professional and civil, but we never really did become what you’d call friends. Still though he didn’t deserve to die like that. He wasn’t just an excellent solder and general, he was an Eternal and I guess that bond was there to an extent even if it was faint. Now there’s one less of us.” +“I guess given that you all grew up together and were subjected more or less to the same training, the other Eternals are sort of like, your siblings?” +“Yeah, I suppose in some ways they are. Funny that I never thought of that before.” You remark. + +As you reflect on all that’s happened, Alison reaches out to touch your hand, you look over at her and return her smile with one of your own. Happy that you have her. + +Then your smile disappears when a bolt grazes your ear and hits Alison right in the eye. Her blood splatters on your face and her body slowly goes limp in your arms. + +You turn your head around just in time to see the assassin hanging outside the carriage window with one hand and his other arm reeling back from having launched his bolt from his armbow. + +It’s definitely a shadow, but from this range you can also see it’s also not human. The face is either severely burned or rotten. It grins at you with blacken teeth and before you can react, it rapidly climbs up which is followed by brief scream from the carriage driver and then the ride gets a lot bumpier really quick. + +The shadow has probably killed the driver and is probably in the process of detaching the horses. Meanwhile you’re still holding the body of you beloved Alison. +> Chase the assassin +With revenge filling every inch of your body you immediately open the carriage door with the intent of climbing up to meet your attacker. No sooner have you opened the door when a rotting hand from above attempts to stab you in the face with a dagger. + +The blade superficially wounds you as it slices across your cheek. Unfazed you immediately grab the hand and pull down as hard as you can. The moment you do so you suddenly feel an unnatural drain of energy. Magic is definitely at work here and it’s sapping your strength. Despite this, the shadow tumbles off of the roof, but on its way down it grabs your own arm with its other hand and the pair of you fall from the carriage. + +Unfortunately, when you’re pulled out of the carriage you don’t clear it completely and your ankle is run over by one of the back wheels of the carriage that is still in motion. The bone snaps and you know it’s broken along with your nose when you fell flat on your face on the hard road. + +The shadow has recovered from his own fall much better having landed on his feet. You push yourself up just in time for his foot to kick you in the ribs. You roll away struggling to put some distance between yourself and the attacker. + +“Y’know when I was brought back I was given very specific instructions not to kill you…but I believe I will ignore them. After all I’m already dead, what else can be done to me?” you hear the shadow hiss in a raspy tone. + +You attempt to raise your hand to cast a flame blast, but the shadow grabs your wrist and you feel an even greater drain on your strength than you did before. At this close range you can smell the rot more strongly. + +“Oh no, you burned me once before, not again.” The shadow hisses as it drains your energy. With its recent comments, you realize this isn’t just a shadow or even some undead horror possibly masquerading as one. It’s Cyrus. + +Your whole body feels like its been beaten with a stone pillar yet you manage to muster the strength to pull your dagger and stab Cyrus repeatedly. You aren’t even aware of where you’re aiming, you stab it in the arm, in the shoulder, in the chest, in the face and wherever else you can reach until it lets you go and staggers back with your dagger still in its body. + +You’re dizzy, weak, and have only one good foot, but try to stand up anyway. Cyrus pulls the dagger from his body and does his typical shadow speed tactic in an attempt to rush into you with the dagger. You barely manage to put up a small force shield to block the blade from going into your stomach. Still the impact of the hit knocks you back down to the ground breaking your concentration on the spell. Cyrus kneels down to grab your neck, he’s not even squeezing and you feel the life leaving your body. You start to fade in and out of consciousness. + +“Now I’m going to show you something truly eternal. Death. They say the dead feel nothing, but that’s not true. It’s a lie just like the lie I believed about Dendrin meeting me for the afterlife. You know what I experienced instead? A very dark place filled with pain until I was ripped out of it and put back here on this mortal realm. That’s where you’re going brother. You’re going to a very dark place filled with pain and I’m going enjoy every moment putting you there.” + +At this point you have no idea what the hell Cyrus is speaking about, all you know is he’s more talkative in death than he ever was in life and that if he’s going to kill you, you wish he’d just shut up and do it already. + +Things get fuzzy again just as Cyrus’ fingers release your neck. What happens next is a blur. You do hear familiar female voice though. + +“This one is not yours to take, revenant.” + +This is followed by an inhuman scream and a bright light which is piercing even with your eyes nearly closed. Between the screaming, the bright light and your weakened state it’s all too much for you and start to pass out. + +You see a female shape with long hair standing over you, but you can’t make out the face. + +“…Alison?” you struggle to whisper. +“(Sigh) Blind to your true allies and lovers as always.” The figure says and then lays your dagger on your body. “Here, I know how much you treasure this gift to you.” +“Oh…fuck…” you say as you pass out. + +You don’t know how long you’re out for, but when you come to you’re in a spare bed in the Emperor’s quarters. Your ankle and nose feel tender but they don’t feel broken anymore. + +You look to your left and see the Emperor standing nearby with a walking stick in hand. + +“Ah, you’re awake and looking much better too. You looked about as bad as I do when Jacob first dragged you in here.” The Emperor remarks, sitting in a chair near you. +“Jacob found me?” +“No, actually Warrick and some of the Eyes picked you up off the road when a travelling patrol reported coming across your body and an overturned carriage crashed into a tree a few feet away. I requested that you be brought to me personally when I heard the news. You were severely injured, and I was damned if I was going to let anyone else bumble in the attempt to help you get better.” +“Alison?” you ask. +“I’m sorry son, but she’s dead. If that bolt to the eye didn’t do it, her neck was broken in the crash.” The Emperor remarks. + +You want to cry out, but you just don’t have the energy right now. You still feel woozy for one thing, the other is you had little hope that she was still alive anyway. The moment you saw that bolt in her eye, the moment you felt her blood on your face, the moment you felt her body go completely limp in your arms…you knew then she was dead. + +“Did you need some time alone?” the Emperor asks. +“No…I suppose I already knew.” You respond. “I’m sort of overwhelmed by everything that happened. I imagine I will grieve later for her.” +“I know how much she meant to you. I know she was also a loyal soldier and officer. She will be missed not just by you, but also by the Empire as a whole. Whatever type of funeral you wish for her, you know you’ve got it. I mean if you want a holiday to…” +“That…isn’t necessary. I believe I will just have a simple funeral for her. She was like me, she didn’t seek out a lot of attention.” +“As you wish. Remember though, whatever you need. You got it.” +“Can you manage an execution for a certain svelk bitch?” + +The Emperor starts one of his coughing fits before answering. + +“I assume you’re talking about Mistress. Yes, I fear I did uncover some evidence that it was she that was behind all this chaos. How did you know about her involvement though? Is she the one that attacked your carriage?” + +You explain to the Emperor what happened. He seems surprised to hear that the shadow wasn’t alive and was in fact undead. He concludes that Mistress must’ve raised Cyrus from the dead since she certainly has the skill to do it. + +“Necromancy eh? Raising the dead is dangerous stuff to dabble in, especially when summoning something as powerful as a revenant. (cough cough) Very difficult to command something that’s dead, yet still control of most of the skills they possessed in their old life. Too willful. Still I didn’t think that even she would be insane enough to try something like this. Her obsession (cough) with you must be great indeed. I’m not even sure what she hoped to accomplish, other than more chaos and strife I suppose. Hmm, well I guess that does sound like a svelk.” +“All I know is she deliberately set this up. Her standing over me as if she was my savior. I’m not fucking fooled! Next time I see her, she’s dead!” +“Well unfortunately Miss Semra D’vessa has fled the Empire and who knows where she’s gone. There aren’t even many svelk mercs within borders of the Empire anymore. There still might be a few in Rask, (cough cough) if you’d like I could make that law to have all svelk executed on sight. Hell, I think I’ll do that anyway. Someone needs to take the blame for this and it’ll certainly make the citizens happy to have mass hangings of dark elves. I know the elves will love it.” + +While the Emperor’s attempts to cheer you up with small acts of genocide are kind, you begin to feel the need to be by yourself. Your silence and your eyes looking downward are all the signs that the Emperor needs to take his leave. + +“Don’t worry son. We’ll get her.” He says and then leaves you to your solitude. + +You sit in bed for a long time trying to take everything in. Alison is gone. You’ll never see her smile, you’ll never feel her touch, you’ll never hear her voice, you’ll never enjoy anything involving her ever again. You almost feel like you don’t want to go on living and you never thought you’d ever feel something like that especially since survival has been beat and ingrained into your very being. + +That isn’t the worst of it though. You didn’t even get revenge on the one that killed her. In fact her assassin would’ve killed you as well if you hadn’t been saved, but that’s still not the worst of it. + +Semra…Mistress…svelk bitch…whatever you call her. She saved your life. + +As far as you’re concerned that’s the worst of it. However you’ll get over it and grow stronger from this experience. You always do. + +All it takes is time. +> Years pass... +Year 35 + +While you’ve never been excessively fond of these important meetings because they take you away from the battlefield, you like them even less nowadays due to having to see the Emperor in such a weakened state. You remember when he first started displaying the signs of being unwell; you dismissed it and thought that he’d eventually get better. Five years have passed since you found out and he’s only gotten worse. + +He barely gets out of bed anymore. Most of these important meetings take place while he remains horizontal under his blankets. He’s still mobile, but he tries to conserve his strength for when it’s necessary. + +He’s never even told you what it is that’s causing his decline, though you’ve never thought to ask. (And Jacob certainly hasn’t) It may just be old age finally catching up with him which means there is nothing that can be done hence why he doesn’t bother bringing it up. + +Its funny how when you first met him that he looked so healthy. You thought he was immortal despite him telling you that he really wasn’t. Now you know he wasn’t just being humble. + +You and Jacob have been doing your best as usual in carrying out his most important orders. Though today the order is given specifically to you. You have to go meet with Marik. + +Marik’s been running a secret experiment for the last sixteen years and says that its finally ready. The Emperor knew about it and actually told him to abandon it on more than one occasion, but Marik insisted that it would be a good idea, so the Emperor relented as long as it didn’t interfere with project that would be of a more direct benefit for the Empire. + +When you arrive at Marik’s underground lab, he takes you through a metal door that opens up to a platformed level, which overlooks a huge room. It’s nearly the size of a small hamlet you think. There are several ladders that descend down to the lower level which contain translucent containers all hooked up with tubing and connected with each other and large strange machines. Even from this distance you can make out figures floating in liquid within the containers. + +This experiment: Breeding a new army of Eternals. The derro has been growing them in these tanks. Literally hundreds, possibly even a thousand. + +“So…this is what you were hiding behind this metal door when I came here over ten years ago. Knew something else was going on.” You say as you stand on a balcony overlooking all the rows of tanks. + +Unlike you and your siblings these Eternals were practically “made.” From your understanding they went from some woman’s womb to the tank immediately. (You can only hazard a guess what might’ve become of the mothers, but nothing good no doubt) From there they’ve been getting “grown” into the perfect soldiers. + +Marik has explained to you the “science” of what he’s done, but some of it is going over your head. Personally you don’t even think Marik understands all of it himself, he just believes it all works. While Marik did use human babies for this second generation of Eternals most would probably tell you that there isn’t anything human about them. Given what’s been said about you as well you can’t really disagree. You are better than the average or even above average human in every way. + +You watch as two of them are released from their tanks, already teenagers and able to understand everything that is told to them. They’re given weapons and display great skill with them when ordered to fight each other. Probably just as good as most Empire soldiers. + +Still, there’s something about these Eternals that doesn’t sit right with you. Maybe its because Marik was involved and that his experiments can be hit or miss. Maybe its because you feel that without the experiences of training they don’t truly know what its like to struggle and earn their place. + +Whatever the reason, you don’t feel like they are Eternals. As little in common as you have with your own siblings you still feel a small bond there. You have nothing in common with these tank babies. They’re something else as far as you’re concerned. + +However, none of this matters. What does matter is if these so called new Eternals are going to actually be an asset to the Empire. From what you’ve seen they aren’t without skill, but they’re going to need to be field tested along with drilling the concepts of loyalty and duty into them. + +“Sure, they look pretty, but can they fight?” you say after seeing the demonstration. This annoys Marik. He starts sputtering and stammering to the point where you think he’s going to go into a seizure. +“You just SAW what they’re capable of! How can you even say such a thing?” +“Yes, they were okay for children. I suppose we can find a place for them somewhere. Perhaps we can…” +“Bah! You’re just jealous!” Marik interrupts. +“Excuse me? Jealous?” you ask. +“Yes! They’re already the perfect warriors and didn’t need any training at all! They didn’t need all the hand holding nonsense that you had to go through to become a killing machine. Face it, these Eternals are the future!” + +You stare at Marik in disbelief that he dares to say such a thing to you. To his credit, Marik doesn’t back down, he stares back at you, ignoring your eyes burning through him. + +“You can give me that stare of death all you want Eternal.” Marik remarks. +“Alright…open up ten of the tanks. Let’s put them to a real test.” +“What? So you can incinerate them with your magic?” +“If they’re truly as good as you claim then my advantages shouldn’t matter, but since you seem to be unsure of your creations now. I’ll make it easy for you. Open up twenty of the tanks and I won’t use one damn cantrip.” + +Marik starts making that annoying high pitched laugh you hate so much then he suddenly gets very serious. + +“Were you planning on fighting them right now?” Marik asks. +“While I’m sure watching me slaughtering twenty naked teenagers would prove my point, I said I was going to make this easy. No, you go equip your twenty creations with whatever armor and weapons you wish. I’ll wait.” + +You wait as Marik orders twenty tanks opened up and has a few of his derro friends herd these children into another room presumably to get outfitted. Marik soon follows behind to oversee personally. + +While you wait, you reflect on the fact that they’re all the same age as you were when you first got to meet the Emperor. It was one of the greatest days of your life when that happened. This happy moment passes very quickly when you have to dwell on the fact that the Emperor is now on his deathbed. You have no idea what’s going to happen when the inevitable happens. Sometimes you look at the Emperor now and you wonder if that is what you have to look forward to when you get old. + +Is that the fate of everyone? No matter how powerful? What’s the point of it all? Will the Empire even survive when the Emperor dies? He doesn’t have a successor. You have often wondered if you would be it, but he’s never mentioned it. Even if you were, you can’t imagine ever doing the job better or even as well than he could. Leading armies is one thing, but an entire nation? You don’t know if you’d have the patience for it. You’re a soldier not a ruler and yet you couldn’t dream of serving any other ruler except the one you think of as father. + +Your mood starts getting worse because you also start dwelling on less pleasant aspects of your sixteenth year before you met the Emperor. It always comes back to her. Why the hell can’t you get her out of your head? + +Even now the woman hasn’t been seen in three years and yet she still comes back to fucking torment you. + +Alison’s dead, the Emperor’s dying, these new “eternals” are obviously meant to replace you, your own future is uncertain, Semra still haunts your thoughts… + +At this point you wonder if it wouldn’t just be best if you let these damn tank babies kill you. It would at least be a warrior’s death and you’d die when the Empire was going through a second golden age of sorts. + +You had some good times and saw several major threats to the Empire destroyed. Why stick around to see a man you have nothing but respect for continue to whither and die? Why see the potential slow decline of a nation you spent all your life trying to keep from the brink of chaos? + +Maybe it is time to step aside gracefully and be replaced… +> Continue your duty +Sometimes the most dangerous enemy you can have is the one in the mirror. You quickly snap out of your defeatism. + +All this self doubt and self-pity is for weaklings. What would the Emperor say if he knew? What would Alison say? You were trained better than that. You don’t have time to worry about a potential future; you have a duty to serve the Empire. And right now part of that job is to test these tank babies. + +The only death you should be focusing on right now is theirs. + +Doesn’t take long before twenty tank babies along with the other two that were involved in the first demonstration come out fully decked out in armor and weapons. Surprisingly the derro didn’t deck them all out in the heaviest body encasing armor they could give them, though there are at least half of them dressed in such a manner. You can’t help notice that the derro didn’t limit their weapons to close combat, you see some with firearms. + +“Well here they are. The future of the Empire. I imagine you’ll want to…” Marik says and then he realizes what you’re doing… +“Lying bastard! Get out of the way NOW!” he shouts and runs back into the room they just came out of and slams the door. The tank babies don’t entirely understand, but they soon do when you cast a bolt of chain lightning at the lot of them. The lightning arc easily fries the tank babies in the metal armor, even the ones dressed less conductive material are standing so close they suffer the shock as well. Combine this with the gunpowder weapons and you even get a couple of small explosions which take out a few of them. + +After you’re done with the spell a couple of them are crawling away desperately trying to find cover or escape. Bodies lie on the floor still sizzling and charred from your attack. You walk over to the carnage and put your sword through the chest of one still struggling to breathe. You stomp on the neck of another who is cursing you. Another one actually begs you for mercy; you show none when you hack the top of his head off. + +As you continue to check the twenty two bodies for signs of life, Marik finally emerges from behind the door along with some of the other derro. + +“Thought the derro didn’t fear death.” You remark. +“We don’t, but we’re not supposed to be the fucking targets today! You lied Eternal! You told me you weren’t going to use magic!” +‘Actually I think my exact words were I wasn’t going to use a single cantrip, and I didn’t use a cantrip.” +“Bah! Trickery!” +“I prefer to think of it as outmaneuvering your opponents assumptions. This was not a battle of honor. I have nothing to prove to these children and even less to you. I went into battle against superior numbers, I’d be a damned fool to not use all of the tools of killing that I have at my disposal. Whenever you go into a combat situation, you ALWAYS use whatever means to destroy your enemy. Fair play, rules and honor have nothing to do with any of it.” +“Hm, well you don’t need to tell me about it.” Marik responds. +“I wasn’t telling you, I was teaching this important lesson to this young girl here, trying to play dead.” You say suddenly grabbing the collar of one of the female tank babies. You lift her up by the collar and can smell the singed flesh and leather wafting from her body. She can barely keep her eyes open, but she’s definitely still alive. She’s the only one that is. + +“Now heed this lesson tank baby. You are NOT an Eternal. Nor are any of your siblings. You will NEVER be Eternals as long as I live. You only exist to serve the Empire and if you die in the process you will be grateful to do so. Remember this.” You say as you grab her face to look into her eyes. You see the fear. She understands. Good. + +You let the tank baby go and she falls back to the floor while you address Marik. + +“I believe I’m going to have trainer come in to teach these children properly. I’d do it myself, but I don’t have the time. Perhaps another Eternal like Brenda or Warrick can do it. Oh and make that one on the floor a squad or platoon leader of some sort. She obviously was strong enough to survive. She at least shows potential. Finally give them a different name as well. I don’t care what, but I meant what I said, they are not Eternals.” +“And you think you can presume to give me orders surfacer?” Marik says. +“I don’t presume nothing, I’m doing it right now! I was given orders by the Emperor himself to handle this the way I saw fit! And I’m telling you WHAT I want done! You don’t like it? Well, I can always go report to the Emperor about your unwillingness to follow the chain of command, unless you’d actually like to go see him yourself that is. Tell me when was the last time you actually took time out of your schedule to do that? While you sit around down here playing with your toys and walking experiments, I’m actually out there making a damn difference and serving the Emperor with ever fiber of my being!” +“Now listen here you fucking sun lover, I knew the man BEFORE he was the Emperor! We fought side by side together during the Troll Wars! I saved his life and he saved mine! You have no damn idea the bond WE share. You can’t tell me shit about how I should or shouldn’t act and you damn sure can’t tell me that I’m not helping the Empire! I’M HIS FUCKING FRIEND!” +“Friend? So what have you done for him lately?” +“Done? DONE? I just made a legion of soldiers for him, you little kobold shit!” + +You look over the tank baby bodies lying dead all over the place. You look at the female one unconscious on the floor and shake your head. + +“Yeah, as I said, what have you done for him lately? Maybe he’s your friend, but he’s my father. I’m not debating this anymore Marik.” You say and take your leave. + +Marik begins yelling at you in his deep guttural derro language. A slew of curses and other insults fly out of his mouth. While you’re semi-familiar with the derro language you can’t make out all of them. They’re probably pretty vicious though. + +Either way you’re hardly concerned, Marik will follow orders because he respects the chain of command and as he said he is the Emperor’s friend. The other reason is because he probably won’t even be angry in another ten minutes. He’ll probably be cackling about some joke he made up in his head. + +You’ve had a lot to ponder this day. You were once concerned about the future of the Empire and your own, but you see now that both will continue on even after the Emperor dies. You still have that zest of life within you and you are not ready or willing to just stand aside yet. + +You’ve come to the decision that when the Emperor dies you will be the one to take his place. While he’s never said it, he doesn’t have to, it’s just a situation that’s understood between a father and son. Still, you think you need to discuss this matter at some point with your father so that he knows that his legacy will live on after him and you will continue to make him proud. + +In the meantime you make your way back to the capital and the palace to report to him. What comes next is a bit of a shock. + +“F…father?” you ask. +“Yes, its me son. I believe that’s the first time you’ve called me that.” The Emperor says standing before you. + +He looks exactly like he did when you first met him; in fact he even looks a little younger. A fit fortyish man dressed in fine clothing. You just continue to stare in disbelief. + +“Ah, yes this. I suppose this would be a bit puzzling. As you well know I haven’t been feeling one hundred percent for oh…about five years now. Had to conserve my strength and power quite a bit to reinvigorate myself. This state I’m in right now isn’t going to last very long, but it’ll be enough for where I’m going.” +“What? Where are you going?” +“Home. And you’ll be coming with me.” +“I will?” +“Of course! This will be a momentous occasion when I return home and your presence will be necessary just as it has been here in the Empire!” +“Forgive me father, but I’m a little lost right now. What is going to happen to the Empire and where is home?” +“Nothing will happen to the Empire son, it can survive a couple days or so without us around I should think. We’ll let Jacob worry about it! Hah! As for my home? Well it’s very very far away. It’s an island to be exact. You can’t get there by any ship though…at least not any more. But you don’t need to worry about that, I know how to get us there. All you need to do is take a day to relax and prepare yourself for the journey.” + +This is all so overwhelming you don’t even know where to start or what to say so you just ask the first question that comes to mind and something you thought was inevitable. + +“Father, are you going home to die?” +“Die?” the Emperor says and then walks over to you. + +“No son, I’m going home to be reborn!” he says and then laughs slapping you on the shoulder. “I’m sorry son if I worried you, what with me coughing all the damn time and dragging my ass around like a dead man. (Sigh) We probably should’ve taken this trip sooner, but we still had to finish off those damn gnomes now didn’t we? Plus I wasn’t sure if it was going to be necessary yet and then you got married, then Semra’s bullshit, it just seemed like stuff kept cropping up. Well now is the perfect time for us to take this trip. I bet you’re glad though now that you know I won’t be dying anytime soon.” +“Yeah…” you answer + +The Emperor goes on to say that your report on Marik’s experiment can wait since this trip is much more important. He then tells you that should go rest up and to meet him here tomorrow. You agree and take your leave. + +As you make your way to your private quarters in the palace, you don’t know what to think now. You were so certain that the Emperor was dying. After years of denying it you at last came to accept it. You were ready to take his place. + +Part of you feels relieved that the Emperor is going to live. Part of you feels confused about this whole situation. And then there’s that part of you that feels cheated. That part of you that wishes the Emperor was still lying on his deathbed. + +You think back to what you said to Marik, YOU’VE been the one out there doing things for the Empire. YOU’VE been the one destroying its enemies and keeping it stable. What the hell has the Emperor been doing? Giving orders from his easy chair? Ranting about gnomes? Lying in his bed hacking up a lung? You should be running the Empire not him. + +“I can’t believe I’m thinking this. What is wrong with me? This man is my father!” You whisper to yourself. You didn’t want to “step aside” for those tank babies because your time wasn’t up. Why should the Emperor step aside for you? You begin to feel deeply ashamed of your thoughts + +While you’re having your moral quandary, Jacob is standing outside your quarters. + +“We need to talk.” He says. +> The reveal... +Jacob and you enter your room. Jacob looks almost as bad as the Emperor once did. He hasn’t been the same since Roldan died, but he’s also been overworked since the Emperor has been sick. The man is in his late sixties, but nowadays he looks more like he’s in his late eighties. The stress has been taking a toll. + +“Jacob, I really hope this is important because I’ve got a lot going through my mind right now.” You say. +“I’m sure you do, but you’ll have a lot more after you hear what I have to say. Though after you hear it you might just decide to kill me instead, but that’s a risk I’ll just have to take.” +“Can’t be anything worse than anything I haven’t thought myself today.” You say. +“I highly doubt that, but I just want you to at least hear me out before you make a decision.” + +You sit down and nod telling Jacob to go ahead. + +“Okay. I know you just came from a meeting with the Emperor and his revitalized condition. I’m also guessing he told you to that he wants you to go back home with him.” +“Yes.” You reply. +“Do you know where his original home is?” +“He said it was a very far away island that couldn’t even be reached by a boat. That was about it.” +“Figures he’d be cryptic. His home is Mortos, an island of necromancers. It’s not a well-known place to the average person. Most that have heard of it just believe it’s a myth, but it exists.” +“What?” +“The Emperor is a necromancer. I mean it makes sense doesn’t it? How else would he have the knowledge to extend his life for so long?” +“Okay, so what?” +“You are aware of what necromancers do don’t you?” +“I’m aware of the branch of magic. Most just believe it’s about raising the dead, but it deals with life force in general. Healing mages use it all time at a cost of course. Only the strongest of wizards can use the art, let alone master it. Hence why there aren’t many around and why stories about necromancers creeping about graveyards raising armies of undead horrors are mostly reserved for parents trying to scare their children.” You say. + +Jacob gets a little frustrated at your apathy at this revelation. + +“Perhaps I’m not making myself clear enough…the Emperor is a necromancer. Roldan was KILLED by a revenant. YOUR WIFE was KILLED by a revenant.” + +That got your attention. You stand up and Jacob can’t help but step back even though he knows you’d easily catch him if he tried to run. + +“You’re treading on very thin ice Jacob.” +“Believe me I’m well aware.” +“Then you must also be aware that you sound crazier than Marik right now. What you’re implying doesn’t even make sense.” +“Why not? It does if you really think about it.” +“Semra was responsible for my wife’s death and Roldan’s death! She is also a powerful sorceress that is more than capable of raising the dead!” +“Yes, and she’s also a perfect patsy for your wrath. The Emperor wanted you to think it was her, but it wasn’t. Think man, even if she did have your wife killed why would she bother having Roldan killed? She had no grudge. There was no profit in it. Chaos for the sake of chaos? Not Semra’s style and you know it. That woman didn’t do anything without purpose even if she was chaotic about it at times. Besides if she REALLY wanted to kill your wife, she would’ve just done it herself.” + +You think back to when Alison told you she met Semra face to face and entertain Jacob’s theory. + +“Even if Semra wasn’t responsible, why would the Emperor have Roldan and Alison killed?” +“Because of you. It’s all because of you.” +“Me? How? Why?” +“(Sigh) It’s a very long and complex plot. I’ve only been piecing some of it together myself. I’ll try to tell you what I know.” + +Jacob starts off by explaining that it all goes back to your birth and the Eternal Project. You and all of your “siblings” were picked for it for a reason. You weren’t just to become super soldiers for the Empire. One of you was going to be chosen to be the new vessel for the Emperor, but only if that Eternal showed promise. Apparently you did. Jacob explains that while the chosen needed to be a great warrior with magical skill and be put to the test, the Emperor didn’t want to risk your life excessively, hence why he initially wanted to keep you out of very heavy fighting. Also he didn’t want any of the potential vessels to complicate things by potentially producing offspring so sterility was something that ensured during your “enhancement” period as a baby. + +You were a perfect soldier that was utterly loyal, so much so that you saw the Emperor as your father. Then Alison came along. Alison was the only other person that you had a close relationship with and that distracted you from your duty. Or more precisely, it made your loyalties potentially divided. The Emperor couldn’t take a chance with another person turning your devotion elsewhere or corrupting his influence over you so she had to die. + +The assassination of Roldan was just a simple matter of taking out a potential future rival. Roldan’s fame was at least as much as your own, and he was probably better liked. Even if Roldan was loyal, the Emperor couldn’t take a chance of another potential domestic rebellion with a charismatic leader. Jacob also believes that the Emperor also just did it out of mean spiritedness since he knew how proud Jacob was of Roldan. + +On top of everything else he could lay all the blame on Semra. + +Jacob isn’t sure exactly how the Emperor plans to transfer himself into your body, but given that it involves a trip to the island of Mortos, he’s sure it can’t be good and that you as a person will cease to be so that the Emperor can continue his immortal reign. + +While this is all very interesting from a conspiracy point of view, you aren’t convinced. + +“So are you seriously telling me the Emperor has been molding me into some container that is to be filled? You’re telling me that this man who I see as my father and treats me as his son has been lying to me from the beginning about everything? Even if this were the case and I highly doubt it is, HOW do you know all this? What evidence do you have?” + +Jacob at this point is extremely nervous. + +“I…I have no hard evidence. I mean I’ve seen a few private writings, but I dared not to take them.” +“So what you’re telling me is that you’ve been snooping into the Emperor’s privacy and can’t even back up your accusations.” +“No! I also have another person who can back up these facts! She…” + +You stop Jacob. + +“She? Jacob, I really hope you aren’t talking about who I think you’re talking about.” + +Jacob ignores your warning and blurts out what he has to say as quickly as he can. + +“Look, I pieced together some of the assassination myself, but Semra told me about the true purpose of the Eternal Project. But this isn’t about just you. This is about a potential danger of world proportions! The Emperor isn’t just a ruler seeking everlasting life; Semra says he has a more sinister agenda that he’s been planning for centuries and given that I’ve recently learned his original homeland is Mortos I’m inclined to believe her.” +“Believe Semra? Really? Then you’re a damn fool along with being a traitor! Just how long have you been in contact with Semra? WHERE IS SHE?!” you ask and slam Jacob against the wall. + +“Please…I’m telling you the truth! I’m no traitor! I’m loyal to the Empire first and foremost and I see the Emperor’s actions as something that will harm it in the long run! The Emperor needs to be stopped, whatever it is he has planned. You can’t go to Mortos with him! You have to kill him!” +“I’ll kill YOU for speaking such treason!” and begin squeezing Jacob’s neck. + +“(Sigh) I told you this wasn’t going to work Jacob. He’s too hopelessly brainwashed to listen. Not even the death of his beloved Alison will cause him to believe that the Emperor means him ill. I guess I should’ve just killed him long ago, but as they say love makes you do stupid things.” + +You turn around and see Semra. You don’t think, you just lunge, only to pass through Semra and crash into some furniture. Its not really Semra, its just a magic projection of some sort. + +“I suppose I should be flattered that you still want to get your hands on me.” Semra remarks. +“After I’m done killing Jacob, I’m going to find and kill you, bitch.” You say getting back up. +“I’m sure, but I don’t have much time so I’m going to make this brief. Unlike our sniveling associate over there, I’m not going to appeal to your logic or reason, because its always been hampered by your warped sense of mindless duty. I’m going to appeal to your sense of desire and survival, because despite your warped sense of mindless duty, you can’t suppress those.” + +You draw your weapon and walk past Semra’s image to butcher Jacob who pleads with you to spare his life. + +“Okay here it is, you WANT to kill the Emperor. You WANT to rule the Empire. Don’t tell me you haven’t thought about it. I know your desires better than anyone else. Even if the Emperor isn’t planning on taking your body as his own and is going to just rejuvenate himself in some other way, why would you still want that? Isn’t it time for him to accept his demise and step aside for someone else? Who better than you? Are you truly happy just surviving and serving like a drone or are you going to finally step up and take what is rightfully yours? You’ve already had a major hand in expanding the Empire and holding it together, why not take the next natural step?” + +You stop yourself from killing Jacob and turn back to Semra. + +“You don’t have to like me, you don’t have to believe me, just listen to me lover. I’ve always known what’s best for you. Kill the Emperor now while he’s at his weakest, there has never been a better time. You were born to rule. Its in your blood, its in your heart, its in your soul. Seize your potential and do what’s meant to be.” Semra says. + +With Jacob’s damning accusations and Semra’s words appealing to your ambitious aspirations, you now don’t know what to do. Should you dismiss everything they say as lies and stay loyal or should you not take any chances with your own survival and kill the Emperor regardless of reasons? +> Serve +There’s no way you’d ever murder your father least of all over allegations from Semra and Jacob. None of this makes any damn sense anyway. + +Semra’s lying and trying to manipulate you as usual. She’s taken her treachery to its next logical level, attempting to overthrow the Emperor. As for Jacob, the man is just a weak willed traitor that’s easily fooled by her lies. He’s also probably harboring a petty grudge for the countless times the Emperor scolded him for his incompetence. + +Without another word you turn back to Jacob and quickly run him through. He looks at you with a mixture of pain and surprise as if he really though Semra’s words would reach you. He makes a slow groaning sound as the life drains from him. Meanwhile Semra’s image continues to look on at you shaking her head. + +“And now your subservience is complete. I believe I really am truly done with you now. I’ve tried to always make you see the truth, but you continue to insist on remaining ignorant. Even when you betrayed me with your little monkey shield maiden by marrying her I at least knew you weren’t completely a tool for the Emperor. I knew you at least had a modicum of free will and your own mind even if it was lost on some crude human trollop. Now? I can see I was just wasting my time and at your core, you’ll always be a mindless drone longing only to serve” +“Enjoy your taunts now Semra, because you won’t have time to run off at the mouth when I’m cutting out your tongue.” +“Chances are this will be the last time we ever see each other. Enjoy your trip to Mortos, perhaps there you will finally see the truth. Of course by that time it’ll be too late, but at last you will see it. Goodbye Eternal.” + +Semra’s magical projection disappears and you’re left alone in your quarters with Jacob’s dead body. After a bit of clean up, you go back to see the Emperor. + +“Hello son, is something wrong? You’re a bit early for our trip.” He remarks. + +You explain everything that just happened about Jacob and Semra. + +“Can’t trust anyone these days can you? I mean Semra, I knew she’d pop up again trying to cause trouble, but Jacob? The man could be so timid at times, though sometimes those are the ones you have to watch right? Still, I can’t believe he’d be foolish enough to actually try to talk you into siding against me. Guess Semra’s lies were good enough to convince even him, not you though it seems.” The Emperor replies. + +You don’t respond. Despite the fact that you’ve dismissed what was told you as lies, you can’t help but wonder. + +“I see… I guess maybe their words did convince you more than you’re letting on. So what is it that’s troubling you exactly?” +“Everything I suppose. I don’t even know where to begin and I know I shouldn’t even be entertaining anything that Semra says, but…(Sigh) Semra said something that I DO know to be true. She said that I harbored a desire to kill you and take over the Empire.” +“And is that what you want to do?” +“No! You’re my father. Other than Alison, you’re the only person in this world that’s always been there for me. I owe you a debt that can never be repaid other than my everlasting loyalty and servitude. However, I can’t deny there have been moments where I’ve felt negative feelings towards you. Granted they’ve been very fleeting, but they’ve become more frequent lately. As much as I don’t like it, Semra does know me and if she told the truth about that, then I can’t help but wonder if she has told the truth about other things as well.” +“Well the best liars do mix the truth with their lies. Svelk do it better than most and Semra is definitely a master. First of all with Mortos, I do intend on rejuvenating myself, but I need your help because you’re the only other person with magical aptitude that I trust and I’ll need your sword arm as well. Let’s just say when I left, it wasn’t on good terms and my return may be met with hostility.” +“Why didn’t you tell me that before?” +“I’ll admit I probably should’ve told you about my former homeland a long time ago. Honestly, I didn’t because its partly because I have my own feelings of shame tied to that place. Yes, there are things in my past I do regret. Not many, but what happened there is definitely one. Which bring me to one of your other concerns and believe me son; I had nothing to do with the murder of your wife. It is true I didn’t approve, but that was just because I’ve had my own experiences with love and loss and didn’t want you potentially going through the same pain. Pain that is greater than any wound that could come from a battlefield as I’m sure you know.” + +You nod silently in agreement and the Emperor continues. + +“That lost love of mine you might even say is one of my other regrets. You are special. Unique even. Its what makes someone like you or me powerful. But it’s also something that makes us doomed to follow a lonely solitary path. I knew that long ago, but I also knew you had to experience it first hand, so I let you do your own thing. Who knows though, if it hadn’t been for Semra, you may very well have had a long happy marriage or you may have grown out of love due to unforeseen differences. I know this is of very little consolation, but at least your Alison died knowing you loved her and she loved you. A lot better than what I experienced…but that’s a tale for another time.” + +The Emperor’s words make you feel a little better now that he’s explained himself and defended his position a bit. Still, he didn’t address your last concern. + +“And what of my other fear?” +“Oh, yes that. Your hidden desire to kill and replace me. Heh heh. Well I’m not too worried, not because I don’t think you couldn’t do it, but rather because that feeling is probably no different to what all children have felt towards their parents since the beginning of time. You’re not always going to think positive things about me, nor would I expect you to. As you said, Semra does know you and she just played upon your emotions. She forgot though, I also know you and I know you would never willingly harm me in any way. If you did hold that desire, you would’ve never killed Jacob and told me all this. You would’ve came busting down the door and challenging me instead. And you certainly wouldn’t have been troubled about your feelings over it.” + +Funny how the Emperor can make everything seem okay with just a few words. Maybe that’s why he’s right about you and that’s why he knows you’d never kill him. With this last concern put somewhat at ease, you feel much more at ease. You have to ask though… + +“Are Eternals really unable to have children?” +“Yes. An unfortunate side effect of your enhancement I’m afraid. Another regret I suppose. I do not know if you ever desired to have offspring with Alison, but if you did, you have my everlasting apologies.” + +With this last piece of information the matter is now at rest or at least you feel less apprehensive about going to Mortos now. The Emperor says that with Jacob’s death he’s going to have to promote another bean counter, but that it can wait until you get back. + +“The Empire isn’t going to suddenly collapse just because its ruler and second are gone for a day or so.” +“But who’s technically in charge then?” you ask +“Good question. I suppose Marik!” The Emperor laughs. + +The next morning you meet the Emperor in one of his preparation rooms where you used to practice the magic that he taught you. It is there you see a large glowing blue portal and the Emperor standing right next to it. He looks tired. + +“Glad you’re here, I’m anxious to make this trip. Whew. I really should’ve had you help me open up this portal; I underestimated how taxing it would be. No matter. Are you ready?” +“I suppose so, but is there anything I should really expect? I mean will there be a horde of undead horrors? Will there be ghosts trying to attack my mind? Will there be creatures as powerful like the one I faced during my wife’s murder?” +“I wish I could give you better information, but I don’t have any since I myself haven’t been there in centuries. I can only suggest to be prepared for all of the above. Though I will say there probably won’t be something like a revenant there. Unlike Semra, the necromancers of Mortos have enough sense to not go around creating powerful free willed undead. Well, usually anyway. You probably should just stick close to me the whole time; Mortos can be pretty unfriendly to the living.” +“Well I would imagine so.” +“No, I don’t just mean the undead roaming about, I’m talking about the very land itself. The entire island feeds on life energy, you step in the wrong area and you could suddenly find yourself transformed into a thousand year old skeleton. As you might expect the population’s life expectancy isn’t exactly a long one save for the necromancers.” +“Wait, there are living people that exist on the island?” +“Sure. Quite a lot of them. Mostly in magically protected enclaves thanks to the necromancers. Mostly humans, but eh…I’d hesitate to call a lot of them that anymore. Let’s just say living in an area filled with undead tends to make people either very pragmatic or bat shit insane or both.” +“So they’re basically tall derro that live on the surface?” +“Ha ha ha! Yes, I suppose is some ways they might be.” + +With this little joke to lighten a potentially very grim trip, you and the Emperor enter the portal. Before you know it your surroundings are very different. + +All around you land is dead. Dead trees, rocks, barren soil, cracked ground. Everything has a gray looking appearance mostly due to the unnatural sky. Its not night, its not day, its just a dull gray and you get the impression its always this way. On top of all this you have no idea where the Emperor is. He isn’t by your side and you’d start to worry, if you suddenly didn’t hear his voice in your head. + +“Son? Are you there?” +“Yes. I’m here. Where are you?” +“I’m at the location. I’m communicating to you psychically since my powers are enhanced here. Blasted portal still didn’t work properly though. I’m sorry son, but you’re going to have to walk over here. Your destination is a small isolated temple; you won’t miss it if you keep walking west from your location. You aren’t too far, but you’re going to have to walk through one of those inhabited settlements I was talking about earlier. Be on your guard. I’d tell you to go around it, but there’s a lot of harmful energy in the area. I wouldn’t want you to step into a negative zone. I’d also keep in contact with you, but I believe I’m about to be attacked by the guardians of this temple. Seems they upgraded the defenses since I was here last time. I can handle it, but do try to hurry.” + +Acknowledging the Emperor’s directions, you begin heading to the west + +You haven’t been here a few minutes and you start to understand what the Emperor was talking about as far as it being unfriendly to the living. You can feel a slight loss not just of endurance, or even mental fatigue, but almost like hope and zest. Like the place is slowly telling you lay down and die. While it’s certainly not a pleasant feeling, after years of mind fuckery from Semra, you’re more than capable of shrugging off the effects. + +Eventually you stand on the outskirts of a small deteriorating village. You don’t see anyone about at first, but then you do notice a few figures peeking out from the windows of nearby houses. Since your presence is most likely already known; you figure the best bet is to just run through as quickly as you can. + +You pass by several houses and begin to hear a combination of hisses, snarls and howls. Eventually the figures that you’ve glimpsed start to make their appearance and pour out of their homes. + +They look worse than you imagined. All of them have a sickly appearance with either grayish or yellowish skin and wearing either tattered rags or in some cases nothing at all. Deformities plague most of them; some have missing limbs or extra ones in the wrong places. Unsurprisingly they begin screaming at you in whatever bizarre language they speak and give chase. + +You don’t get unnerved too often about dangerous situations, but the combination of their disfigurements, their numbers, the unnatural sounds they make and how they lope after you is a bit unsettling. You need to stop or at least slow them down quickly. +> Cast a lightning blast +You attempt to stop the horde chasing you by casting a lightning strike at it. It fries a couple outright, but the chain lightning effect isn’t as effective as you’d like since none are wearing anything conductive and they aren’t even slowed down, let alone stopped. If anything they now seem to be more charged up (literally!) and excited. + +Not having any more time to cast something else, you turn and run. As you run through the village more of them are coming out their homes ahead of you. Several of the inhabitants attempt to grab you and while you manage to chop them up, they slow you down enough that the bulk of them chasing you catch up. + +Dozens of the damn things gibbering, slobbering, laughing and howling in your ear as you try to get free of their clutches. Several misshaped hands attempt to pull you down and deprive you of your weapon. Teeth sink into your armor and some even manage to find exposed bits of flesh. + +You fight the best you can and slay several of the creature, but for every one you kill it seems like two more take its place. Things don’t get any batter when another large group of the creatures come from the direction you were originally running towards show up as reinforcements. The sheer numbers are bad enough, but what’s really making things worse is the slight drain of your energy from the very air of this accursed place. + +Several of you fingers are bitten off, your armor is stripped off and eventually the creatures manage pile on you so much that you fall to the ground. In your last moments you scream out for the Emperor to help you, but nobody arrives and the creatures finish eating you alive.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There’s no way you’d ever murder your father least of all over allegations from Semra and Jacob. None of this makes any damn sense anyway. + +Semra’s lying and trying to manipulate you as usual. She’s taken her treachery to its next logical level, attempting to overthrow the Emperor. As for Jacob, the man is just a weak willed traitor that’s easily fooled by her lies. He’s also probably harboring a petty grudge for the countless times the Emperor scolded him for his incompetence. + +Without another word you turn back to Jacob and quickly run him through. He looks at you with a mixture of pain and surprise as if he really though Semra’s words would reach you. He makes a slow groaning sound as the life drains from him. Meanwhile Semra’s image continues to look on at you shaking her head. + +“And now your subservience is complete. I believe I really am truly done with you now. I’ve tried to always make you see the truth, but you continue to insist on remaining ignorant. Even when you betrayed me with your little monkey shield maiden by marrying her I at least knew you weren’t completely a tool for the Emperor. I knew you at least had a modicum of free will and your own mind even if it was lost on some crude human trollop. Now? I can see I was just wasting my time and at your core, you’ll always be a mindless drone longing only to serve” +“Enjoy your taunts now Semra, because you won’t have time to run off at the mouth when I’m cutting out your tongue.” +“Chances are this will be the last time we ever see each other. Enjoy your trip to Mortos, perhaps there you will finally see the truth. Of course by that time it’ll be too late, but at last you will see it. Goodbye Eternal.” + +Semra’s magical projection disappears and you’re left alone in your quarters with Jacob’s dead body. After a bit of clean up, you go back to see the Emperor. + +“Hello son, is something wrong? You’re a bit early for our trip.” He remarks. + +You explain everything that just happened about Jacob and Semra. + +“Can’t trust anyone these days can you? I mean Semra, I knew she’d pop up again trying to cause trouble, but Jacob? The man could be so timid at times, though sometimes those are the ones you have to watch right? Still, I can’t believe he’d be foolish enough to actually try to talk you into siding against me. Guess Semra’s lies were good enough to convince even him, not you though it seems.” The Emperor replies. + +You don’t respond. Despite the fact that you’ve dismissed what was told you as lies, you can’t help but wonder. + +“I see… I guess maybe their words did convince you more than you’re letting on. So what is it that’s troubling you exactly?” +“Everything I suppose. I don’t even know where to begin and I know I shouldn’t even be entertaining anything that Semra says, but…(Sigh) Semra said something that I DO know to be true. She said that I harbored a desire to kill you and take over the Empire.” +“And is that what you want to do?” +“No! You’re my father. Other than Alison, you’re the only person in this world that’s always been there for me. I owe you a debt that can never be repaid other than my everlasting loyalty and servitude. However, I can’t deny there have been moments where I’ve felt negative feelings towards you. Granted they’ve been very fleeting, but they’ve become more frequent lately. As much as I don’t like it, Semra does know me and if she told the truth about that, then I can’t help but wonder if she has told the truth about other things as well.” +“Well the best liars do mix the truth with their lies. Svelk do it better than most and Semra is definitely a master. First of all with Mortos, I do intend on rejuvenating myself, but I need your help because you’re the only other person with magical aptitude that I trust and I’ll need your sword arm as well. Let’s just say when I left, it wasn’t on good terms and my return may be met with hostility.” +“Why didn’t you tell me that before?” +“I’ll admit I probably should’ve told you about my former homeland a long time ago. Honestly, I didn’t because its partly because I have my own feelings of shame tied to that place. Yes, there are things in my past I do regret. Not many, but what happened there is definitely one. Which bring me to one of your other concerns and believe me son; I had nothing to do with the murder of your wife. It is true I didn’t approve, but that was just because I’ve had my own experiences with love and loss and didn’t want you potentially going through the same pain. Pain that is greater than any wound that could come from a battlefield as I’m sure you know.” + +You nod silently in agreement and the Emperor continues. + +“That lost love of mine you might even say is one of my other regrets. You are special. Unique even. Its what makes someone like you or me powerful. But it’s also something that makes us doomed to follow a lonely solitary path. I knew that long ago, but I also knew you had to experience it first hand, so I let you do your own thing. Who knows though, if it hadn’t been for Semra, you may very well have had a long happy marriage or you may have grown out of love due to unforeseen differences. I know this is of very little consolation, but at least your Alison died knowing you loved her and she loved you. A lot better than what I experienced…but that’s a tale for another time.” + +The Emperor’s words make you feel a little better now that he’s explained himself and defended his position a bit. Still, he didn’t address your last concern. + +“And what of my other fear?” +“Oh, yes that. Your hidden desire to kill and replace me. Heh heh. Well I’m not too worried, not because I don’t think you couldn’t do it, but rather because that feeling is probably no different to what all children have felt towards their parents since the beginning of time. You’re not always going to think positive things about me, nor would I expect you to. As you said, Semra does know you and she just played upon your emotions. She forgot though, I also know you and I know you would never willingly harm me in any way. If you did hold that desire, you would’ve never killed Jacob and told me all this. You would’ve came busting down the door and challenging me instead. And you certainly wouldn’t have been troubled about your feelings over it.” + +Funny how the Emperor can make everything seem okay with just a few words. Maybe that’s why he’s right about you and that’s why he knows you’d never kill him. With this last concern put somewhat at ease, you feel much more at ease. You have to ask though… + +“Are Eternals really unable to have children?” +“Yes. An unfortunate side effect of your enhancement I’m afraid. Another regret I suppose. I do not know if you ever desired to have offspring with Alison, but if you did, you have my everlasting apologies.” + +With this last piece of information the matter is now at rest or at least you feel less apprehensive about going to Mortos now. The Emperor says that with Jacob’s death he’s going to have to promote another bean counter, but that it can wait until you get back. + +“The Empire isn’t going to suddenly collapse just because its ruler and second are gone for a day or so.” +“But who’s technically in charge then?” you ask +“Good question. I suppose Marik!” The Emperor laughs. + +The next morning you meet the Emperor in one of his preparation rooms where you used to practice the magic that he taught you. It is there you see a large glowing blue portal and the Emperor standing right next to it. He looks tired. + +“Glad you’re here, I’m anxious to make this trip. Whew. I really should’ve had you help me open up this portal; I underestimated how taxing it would be. No matter. Are you ready?” +“I suppose so, but is there anything I should really expect? I mean will there be a horde of undead horrors? Will there be ghosts trying to attack my mind? Will there be creatures as powerful like the one I faced during my wife’s murder?” +“I wish I could give you better information, but I don’t have any since I myself haven’t been there in centuries. I can only suggest to be prepared for all of the above. Though I will say there probably won’t be something like a revenant there. Unlike Semra, the necromancers of Mortos have enough sense to not go around creating powerful free willed undead. Well, usually anyway. You probably should just stick close to me the whole time; Mortos can be pretty unfriendly to the living.” +“Well I would imagine so.” +“No, I don’t just mean the undead roaming about, I’m talking about the very land itself. The entire island feeds on life energy, you step in the wrong area and you could suddenly find yourself transformed into a thousand year old skeleton. As you might expect the population’s life expectancy isn’t exactly a long one save for the necromancers.” +“Wait, there are living people that exist on the island?” +“Sure. Quite a lot of them. Mostly in magically protected enclaves thanks to the necromancers. Mostly humans, but eh…I’d hesitate to call a lot of them that anymore. Let’s just say living in an area filled with undead tends to make people either very pragmatic or bat shit insane or both.” +“So they’re basically tall derro that live on the surface?” +“Ha ha ha! Yes, I suppose is some ways they might be.” + +With this little joke to lighten a potentially very grim trip, you and the Emperor enter the portal. Before you know it your surroundings are very different. + +All around you land is dead. Dead trees, rocks, barren soil, cracked ground. Everything has a gray looking appearance mostly due to the unnatural sky. Its not night, its not day, its just a dull gray and you get the impression its always this way. On top of all this you have no idea where the Emperor is. He isn’t by your side and you’d start to worry, if you suddenly didn’t hear his voice in your head. + +“Son? Are you there?” +“Yes. I’m here. Where are you?” +“I’m at the location. I’m communicating to you psychically since my powers are enhanced here. Blasted portal still didn’t work properly though. I’m sorry son, but you’re going to have to walk over here. Your destination is a small isolated temple; you won’t miss it if you keep walking west from your location. You aren’t too far, but you’re going to have to walk through one of those inhabited settlements I was talking about earlier. Be on your guard. I’d tell you to go around it, but there’s a lot of harmful energy in the area. I wouldn’t want you to step into a negative zone. I’d also keep in contact with you, but I believe I’m about to be attacked by the guardians of this temple. Seems they upgraded the defenses since I was here last time. I can handle it, but do try to hurry.” + +Acknowledging the Emperor’s directions, you begin heading to the west + +You haven’t been here a few minutes and you start to understand what the Emperor was talking about as far as it being unfriendly to the living. You can feel a slight loss not just of endurance, or even mental fatigue, but almost like hope and zest. Like the place is slowly telling you lay down and die. While it’s certainly not a pleasant feeling, after years of mind fuckery from Semra, you’re more than capable of shrugging off the effects. + +Eventually you stand on the outskirts of a small deteriorating village. You don’t see anyone about at first, but then you do notice a few figures peeking out from the windows of nearby houses. Since your presence is most likely already known; you figure the best bet is to just run through as quickly as you can. + +You pass by several houses and begin to hear a combination of hisses, snarls and howls. Eventually the figures that you’ve glimpsed start to make their appearance and pour out of their homes. + +They look worse than you imagined. All of them have a sickly appearance with either grayish or yellowish skin and wearing either tattered rags or in some cases nothing at all. Deformities plague most of them; some have missing limbs or extra ones in the wrong places. Unsurprisingly they begin screaming at you in whatever bizarre language they speak and give chase. + +You don’t get unnerved too often about dangerous situations, but the combination of their disfigurements, their numbers, the unnatural sounds they make and how they lope after you is a bit unsettling. You need to stop or at least slow them down quickly. +> Cast a flame blast +You take the logical approach that most things don’t like fire and cast a few quick flame bolts at the horde. This works to a small degree in that it sets a few on fire and causes them to fall to the ground trying to put the flames out, which stops the momentum a bit as the non flaming “villagers” trip over the burning ones. + +As you run through the village more of them are coming out their homes ahead of you. Several of the inhabitants attempt to grab you, but you cut them down instead. They’re tougher and stronger than they look and seemingly very resistant to the concept of pain. You sliced into the neck of one and the hideous thing actually began laughing. + +The end of the village is in sight and a little further in the distance you can see another structure, which you guess is the temple. Naturally your line of sight is quickly blocked by another horde of the villagers get in your way. With one group ahead and the other group still behind you, you’d actually be in danger of being trapped if you weren’t the quick thinking one. + +You quickly climb up the side of one of the houses up to its roof. It isn’t the climb that’s difficult, but rather the fact that the house is in such terrible condition that part of it starts crumbling. You nearly fall through the rotting roof when you get to the top. The villagers howl and moan at you as you stand out of their reach, but they begin to correct that by trying to climb up as well. + +You lob a couple of fireballs into the horde, but that soon turns out to be a bit of a mistake as the blast back (along with burning villagers running around on fire) end up setting the house on fire along with others nearby it. The only way you’re getting away from this madness is by rooftop jumping and hoping you don’t fall through them. + +You make your escape across the rooftops while a raging inferno starts to slowly envelop other houses and will most likely burn down the whole cursed village. The villagers don’t give up on you that easily, some of them actually make it up to the roofs as well and continue their pursuit, while the non burning ones start trying to pelt you with nearby stones. + +You get to the last house roof before you need to jump down and one of the bastards manages to grab you at the same time another hits you in the head with a rock. + +“Shit!” you utter as you fall off the roof taking the villager who grabbed your arm with you. + +With some quick moving you pull the villager so he lands on the ground first and all your weight lands on top of him. With your elbow in his neck when you both hit the ground you hear a satisfying snap. When you scramble to get up, you see that you’re out of the village, but not out of danger. + +You cut down a few more of the villagers that have caught up with you and distance yourself from the damned place by running towards the temple which is looking much closer now. You expect the villagers to chase you all the way there, but they don’t go much past the outskirts of their village, which continues to burn. + +Your journey to the temple isn’t far, but it certainly starts to feel like it is. The closer you get to the temple the more you start feel the effects of the island’s toxic environment. Soon each step is an effort and you can hardly concentrate on even walking towards the temple. + +“Give in…join ussssss…lay down…diiiiiiiiiiiiie…” you suddenly hear in your head. You hate these psychic spirit attacks. +“NO! The Emperor will give me strength to carry out my mission!” you yell out and redouble your efforts to shake off the mind assault. + +Eventually you reach the temple and the signs of battle are very obvious here. You see one of the silver doors blown off the hinges. Several large bones lie strewn about and from the looks of it; these weren’t from any ordinary skeleton. You also notice two ruined black statues on either side of the temple. While they have great large chunks missing from them, you notice that these statues resemble the ones the Emperor has just outside his chambers; they’re just on a smaller scale. + +“Son? Is that you outside?” you hear the Emperor ask from within. +“Yes, it’s me. Are you okay?” you answer. +“Yes! Just get in hear quickly, we don’t have much time!” + +You enter the temple which actually isn’t all that large inside. In fact it looks more like a shrine rather than a temple since the only thing inside is a small pedestal against the far wall. You see the Emperor who is holding an old looking book and he seems very excited. More excited than you’ve ever seen, even when all the gnomes were reportedly exterminated he wasn’t this excited. + +You notice he’s drawn several circles and symbols on the floor. + +“Good, good, you’re here! We have to begin immediately! Step into that circle…no I mean that one!” he exclaims. +“Erm, okay. You know I got attacked by a whole village of freaks?” +“I’m sure you did. Probably ghouls. Generations of inbreeding and cannibalism tends to make folks insane and unfriendly to outsiders. Please, now we have to begin, they’ll be here soon!” + +You step inside one of the circles and the Emperor steps into another one and obsessively fondles the book he has in his hand. + +“Who’ll be here? The ghouls?” +“No! The…nevermind, look I’ll explain everything to you afterwards, but right now I have to concentrate and you will have to as well. Now begin this chant with me.” + +The Emperor starts chanting and you try to follow along as best you can. The circles and symbols on the floor begin to glow. As much as you don’t want to interrupt, you’re a little lost on what exactly is going on. + +“Father, what is…” +“Silence!” the Emperor screams and then you hear a second voice, but this one is from no spirit. + +“Casimir, is that you? I see you’ve finally returned. Always knew you would. Have you come back because you’ve seen the error of your ways or is this just a visit for a mad dash of power? Judging by the mess, I’d say the latter.” You hear the voice shout from outside the temple. + +The Emperor suddenly looks very nervous. Worried even. You’ve never seen such an expression from him before. + +“Yes! It’s me, Nicodemus! And you’ll not be stopping me this time!” the Emperor shouts and then a red barrier materializes in the temple entryway. You see a robed figure walk up to it, but can’t make out much more than that. + +“Casimir, you have to know this cheap trick isn’t going to stop me. If you just let down the barrier we might be able to talk about this. “ +“Never! I wasn’t deterred then, and I won’t be deterred now! I have the book and after this rejuvenation ritual, you and the entire council won’t be able to stop me from my destiny!” The Emperor shouts and starts making elaborate hand gestures. +“Don’t you think over six hundred centuries of this nonsense is long enough? You’ve had your fun and now its time to realize you need to act your damn age. Casimir I’m coming in and I assure you if you attack me, you will be destroyed this time.” + +The Emperor ignores this threat and continues his spell. He begins to eminate a purple glow and you soon follow. + +“Am I supposed to have this purple glow?” you ask. +“Shhh! It’ll all be over soon. Just have to cast one last spell.” The Emperor quickly says before beginning another spell. + +About this time the barrier disappears and an ancient looking man in a black robe steps in. He doesn’t look very imposing, but it’s pretty apparent he exudes great power. He completely ignores you and looks directly at the Emperor. Its one of disapproval, but there’s no anger at all behind it. + +“Casimir, you have to know this isn’t even necessary. If you desire immortality so much, you could’ve just stayed here to begin with, you could still stay here if you’d just recognize the error of your ways.” + +The Emperor looks out the corner of his eye at Nicodemus, but doesn’t stop his spell. Meanwhile Nicodemus now looks over at you and begins studying you. He then closes his eyes and lifts up his own hand while mumbling something. + +You have no idea what he’s doing, but at this point you’re starting to feel like you’re genuinely threatened. The circle you’re in will probably protect you, but he broke through the other barrier with ease. Who’s to say he won’t do the same with the circle? + +There’s also the matter of risking ruining the elaborate ritual the Emperor is currently casting…which you’re also starting to have separate concerns about. + +Semra’s words: “You will learn the truth too late.” begin to ring in your mind. +> Defend yourself +While the Emperor may or may not being lying to you, your immediate concern is Nicodemus. He’s right in the room and casting a spell, if that isn’t an indication of dire threat, you don’t know what is. + +Summoning all your energy you unleash a double spray of frost at him in the hopes of freezing him into a block of ice. Its enough to interrupt him, but not for long. He merely turns his gaze towards you and you feel a sudden drain of your energy. Like when Cyrus was clutching your throat, but this is even faster. You fall to the floor instantly meanwhile the Emperor has to stop his own spell casting. + +“DAMN IT! You’ve ruined everything!” he shouts and casts some sort of green ray at Nicodemus. + +You crawl out of the way of the ensuing magic battle. You can’t even see who is winning; you’re just trying to get the hell out of the temple so you can gather your strength. The next few moments are a blur, though you manage to stand yourself up and make it to the doorway. You stagger outside and hear the final outcome of the battle. + +“Casimir, you’ve brought this fate upon yourself.” Nicodemus remarks and this followed by a long scream. The sound of it gives you the shivers as it’s an obvious sign the Emperor has lost his battle with Nicodemus and most certainly his life. + +You push past your lingering weakness and start running in a random direction, you don’t get far when you suddenly feel that all encompassing drain again. At first you think its Nicodemus, but its something less personal. Its one of those negative zones that the Emperor mentioned, you just ran into one. + +His comment that stepping into one could instantly turn you into a thousand year skeleton isn’t quite accurate. It takes you at least five minutes before something similar happens. The strange thing is you end up feeling every agonizing second of decomposition before you are no more.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You take the logical approach that most things don’t like fire and cast a few quick flame bolts at the horde. This works to a small degree in that it sets a few on fire and causes them to fall to the ground trying to put the flames out, which stops the momentum a bit as the non flaming “villagers” trip over the burning ones. + +As you run through the village more of them are coming out their homes ahead of you. Several of the inhabitants attempt to grab you, but you cut them down instead. They’re tougher and stronger than they look and seemingly very resistant to the concept of pain. You sliced into the neck of one and the hideous thing actually began laughing. + +The end of the village is in sight and a little further in the distance you can see another structure, which you guess is the temple. Naturally your line of sight is quickly blocked by another horde of the villagers get in your way. With one group ahead and the other group still behind you, you’d actually be in danger of being trapped if you weren’t the quick thinking one. + +You quickly climb up the side of one of the houses up to its roof. It isn’t the climb that’s difficult, but rather the fact that the house is in such terrible condition that part of it starts crumbling. You nearly fall through the rotting roof when you get to the top. The villagers howl and moan at you as you stand out of their reach, but they begin to correct that by trying to climb up as well. + +You lob a couple of fireballs into the horde, but that soon turns out to be a bit of a mistake as the blast back (along with burning villagers running around on fire) end up setting the house on fire along with others nearby it. The only way you’re getting away from this madness is by rooftop jumping and hoping you don’t fall through them. + +You make your escape across the rooftops while a raging inferno starts to slowly envelop other houses and will most likely burn down the whole cursed village. The villagers don’t give up on you that easily, some of them actually make it up to the roofs as well and continue their pursuit, while the non burning ones start trying to pelt you with nearby stones. + +You get to the last house roof before you need to jump down and one of the bastards manages to grab you at the same time another hits you in the head with a rock. + +“Shit!” you utter as you fall off the roof taking the villager who grabbed your arm with you. + +With some quick moving you pull the villager so he lands on the ground first and all your weight lands on top of him. With your elbow in his neck when you both hit the ground you hear a satisfying snap. When you scramble to get up, you see that you’re out of the village, but not out of danger. + +You cut down a few more of the villagers that have caught up with you and distance yourself from the damned place by running towards the temple which is looking much closer now. You expect the villagers to chase you all the way there, but they don’t go much past the outskirts of their village, which continues to burn. + +Your journey to the temple isn’t far, but it certainly starts to feel like it is. The closer you get to the temple the more you start feel the effects of the island’s toxic environment. Soon each step is an effort and you can hardly concentrate on even walking towards the temple. + +“Give in…join ussssss…lay down…diiiiiiiiiiiiie…” you suddenly hear in your head. You hate these psychic spirit attacks. +“NO! The Emperor will give me strength to carry out my mission!” you yell out and redouble your efforts to shake off the mind assault. + +Eventually you reach the temple and the signs of battle are very obvious here. You see one of the silver doors blown off the hinges. Several large bones lie strewn about and from the looks of it; these weren’t from any ordinary skeleton. You also notice two ruined black statues on either side of the temple. While they have great large chunks missing from them, you notice that these statues resemble the ones the Emperor has just outside his chambers; they’re just on a smaller scale. + +“Son? Is that you outside?” you hear the Emperor ask from within. +“Yes, it’s me. Are you okay?” you answer. +“Yes! Just get in hear quickly, we don’t have much time!” + +You enter the temple which actually isn’t all that large inside. In fact it looks more like a shrine rather than a temple since the only thing inside is a small pedestal against the far wall. You see the Emperor who is holding an old looking book and he seems very excited. More excited than you’ve ever seen, even when all the gnomes were reportedly exterminated he wasn’t this excited. + +You notice he’s drawn several circles and symbols on the floor. + +“Good, good, you’re here! We have to begin immediately! Step into that circle…no I mean that one!” he exclaims. +“Erm, okay. You know I got attacked by a whole village of freaks?” +“I’m sure you did. Probably ghouls. Generations of inbreeding and cannibalism tends to make folks insane and unfriendly to outsiders. Please, now we have to begin, they’ll be here soon!” + +You step inside one of the circles and the Emperor steps into another one and obsessively fondles the book he has in his hand. + +“Who’ll be here? The ghouls?” +“No! The…nevermind, look I’ll explain everything to you afterwards, but right now I have to concentrate and you will have to as well. Now begin this chant with me.” + +The Emperor starts chanting and you try to follow along as best you can. The circles and symbols on the floor begin to glow. As much as you don’t want to interrupt, you’re a little lost on what exactly is going on. + +“Father, what is…” +“Silence!” the Emperor screams and then you hear a second voice, but this one is from no spirit. + +“Casimir, is that you? I see you’ve finally returned. Always knew you would. Have you come back because you’ve seen the error of your ways or is this just a visit for a mad dash of power? Judging by the mess, I’d say the latter.” You hear the voice shout from outside the temple. + +The Emperor suddenly looks very nervous. Worried even. You’ve never seen such an expression from him before. + +“Yes! It’s me, Nicodemus! And you’ll not be stopping me this time!” the Emperor shouts and then a red barrier materializes in the temple entryway. You see a robed figure walk up to it, but can’t make out much more than that. + +“Casimir, you have to know this cheap trick isn’t going to stop me. If you just let down the barrier we might be able to talk about this. “ +“Never! I wasn’t deterred then, and I won’t be deterred now! I have the book and after this rejuvenation ritual, you and the entire council won’t be able to stop me from my destiny!” The Emperor shouts and starts making elaborate hand gestures. +“Don’t you think over six hundred centuries of this nonsense is long enough? You’ve had your fun and now its time to realize you need to act your damn age. Casimir I’m coming in and I assure you if you attack me, you will be destroyed this time.” + +The Emperor ignores this threat and continues his spell. He begins to eminate a purple glow and you soon follow. + +“Am I supposed to have this purple glow?” you ask. +“Shhh! It’ll all be over soon. Just have to cast one last spell.” The Emperor quickly says before beginning another spell. + +About this time the barrier disappears and an ancient looking man in a black robe steps in. He doesn’t look very imposing, but it’s pretty apparent he exudes great power. He completely ignores you and looks directly at the Emperor. Its one of disapproval, but there’s no anger at all behind it. + +“Casimir, you have to know this isn’t even necessary. If you desire immortality so much, you could’ve just stayed here to begin with, you could still stay here if you’d just recognize the error of your ways.” + +The Emperor looks out the corner of his eye at Nicodemus, but doesn’t stop his spell. Meanwhile Nicodemus now looks over at you and begins studying you. He then closes his eyes and lifts up his own hand while mumbling something. + +You have no idea what he’s doing, but at this point you’re starting to feel like you’re genuinely threatened. The circle you’re in will probably protect you, but he broke through the other barrier with ease. Who’s to say he won’t do the same with the circle? + +There’s also the matter of risking ruining the elaborate ritual the Emperor is currently casting…which you’re also starting to have separate concerns about. + +Semra’s words: “You will learn the truth too late.” begin to ring in your mind. +> Trust in your current defenses +You’ve believed in the Emperor this long and this far. You and he have overcome all obstacles and enemies together. This Nicodemus is just another in a long line of them. You don’t know all the history that he and the Emperor have, but all you know is he will fall like all others. If the Emperor’s next conquest is to be this island then that is what will be done. If it is you that will be needed to help in this mission, then you will gladly serve and die if necessary. + +And if… + +And if the Emperor has lied to you about everything, it doesn’t matter because you have been loyal to the end and have played your role perfectly. The Emperor gave you purpose so if you are to be his new vessel of destruction to accomplish his destiny then there can be no greater honor. You are ready to make that sacrifice. You were created for it. + +Nicodemus lowers his hand and stops mumbling. If he’s cast a spell it either hasn’t worked or it has no obvious effects. + +“Casimir, I know what you’re trying to do and this isn’t going to work. I urge you to stop before it’s too late.” +“Yes, it is too late FOR YOU!” the Emperor shouts and finishes his spell with a laugh. He then turns to you. + +“Goodbye my son, I’m sorry I lied to you, but know that your last sacrifice will help me achieve my destiny at last.” + +The Emperor suddenly looks unwell again. Like he did when he was sick except now it’s happening at an accelerated rate. You see him rapidly age before your eyes. + +“NO! WHAT’S HAPPENING TO ME?! THE SPELL! THE RITUAL! THE PREPARATION! I HAD THE PERFECT VESSEL! I WAS GOING TO RULE THE WORLD! I WAS GOING TO LIVE FOREVER!” + +At this point the Emperor collapses to the floor as his body continues to decay. Meanwhile nothing is happening to you though you’re in a state of shock watching the Emperor die in front of you. + +“Son…help….meeeee…” the Emperor says in a dying raspy tone. +“I don’t know how. I’m sorry father…I have failed you…” you reply sadly. + +“I…want…to live…foreverrrrrrrrr…” the Emperor says with his last dying breath before he completely decays into a skeletal corpse, then bones, then dust. + +And with that The Emperor, Casimir, your father is dead. + +You just continue to stare at the dust in disbelief; meanwhile Nicodemus walks over to the pile and picks up the book your father seemed to be so happy to have before he died. + +“(Sigh) I warned him it wouldn’t work. When I scanned you with my identify spell I learned all I ever had to about you. You were not a suitable vessel for a transference spell.” +“Impossible, I am an Eternal! I was born and bred for this purpose!” +“I’m well aware of what you believe, but that isn’t what is. Perhaps your breeding was incorrect or perhaps a mistake was made.” +‘No. My father doesn’t make mistakes.” +“Really? Recent events would dictate otherwise.” + +You have no response you just continue to stare at the dust. + +“Eternal, I can tell you are feeling a great sense of loss right now and you have my sympathies. Your life seems to be filled with nothing but pain, war and loss. And tragically one of your only stable foundations was Casimir and even he lied to you. Yet you’re so broken that you believe you’re the one that failed him. You must’ve been the perfect son.” + +You begin to gather your strength and thoughts as you are starting to become annoyed with this Nicodemus. + +“I still am.” You reply seriously. +"Hmm, I see even with Casimir dead, your indoctrination still holds. (Sigh) I hope for your sake that will fade in time lest you end up like he did or the power hungry ancestors of this place. This island was once lush and full of life you know. Makas as it once was called had a thriving civilization with a strong navy. Even the mighty Svelk Empire at the time didn’t dare attack us. Then this accursed book was created and changed everything. This is why Casimir was exiled.” Nicodemus says and lifts up the non-descript book while still clutching it his arm. + +“Did he create it?” you ask. +“Hah. Casimir could’ve only hoped to create something so powerful. No he was just another of our kind that thought he could achieve the impossible, to become a god. This book is just an ancient mistake of our predecessors and a reminder of why we were not meant to live forever.” +“So what is it, a powerful book of necromantic spells?” +“If it were only that, it might be less dangerous. The more dangerous part is the fact that it's not just a spellbook. It’s a gateway to another dimension. Of course we didn’t really realize that or what we were doing until it was nearly too late.” +"I don't understand." +“Our civilization couldn’t leave well enough alone. We had everything, but we still couldn’t stop the ravages of time and ultimately death. So we did the logical thing of exploring the necromantic arts. It was an exciting time to be sure; I was actually a young and eager researcher myself back then. It took decades, but eventually we managed to unlock everything we could about the art of necromancy. We could’ve very well taken over the world I believe with our power, but our goals were bigger. We wanted immortality. To be as gods. Nothing less would do. In this book lies the combined knowledge of every forbidden, obscure and even common necromantic arts. We planned on using it to cast off these fragile mortal shells and ascend to a new plane of existence.” +“So…what happened?” +“This. The ritual that was to give us immortality destroyed our civilization as we knew it and created what you see today. I was actually not involved in the ritual as at the time I was not as skilled of a wizard, but I saw the devastation that occurred. A black void opened up above the entire island and its very presence killed many weaker individuals instantly. It didn’t take long for the arch mages performing this ritual to realize that they weren’t being imbued with eternal life, they were opening a portal to death itself. Fortunately some of the mages weren’t quite so obsessed with immortality and realized that this was a bad idea and so managed to close the gate before it engulfed the entire island…possibly even the world.” +“That can’t be the end of it.” +“Oh no, it most certainly was not. The entire island had been infused with negative energy and necromantic magic to a point where it was oddly keeping those that lived a much increased life span. However it also made many mad with power. Some of the more obsessed mages were furious about the gate being closed. They desired that the gate remain open, still believing it would lead to immortality. Others settled for the lesser immortality, but desired more power. Thus began the war of the necromancers who marched armies of the dead to wage endless battles with each other and destroying the rest of the island in the process.” +“It was only when every inch of this place was cursed and forever tainted that the survivors finally stopped to recognize the folly of their ways. The folly that someone can have total control over death, let alone cheat it forever." +“My father obviously disagreed.” You say. +“Yes, though he wasn't the first and sadly he probably won't be the last. Every once in awhile one of our number gets a little power hungry. Usually it’s a phase and we exile them as we did with Casimir. Most soon learn that their powers gradually weaken and beg to come back, others vainly try to make it on their own and usually die expending all their energy as soon as they try to raise an army of the dead to conquer whatever it is they've set their eyes on. I have to admit though, Casimir proved to be a little more determined than most. He was smart to stop using his necromancy and rely on more traditional means to run a nation. Even his way of attempting to cheat death was rather clever. A shame he didn't focus his energy on something more worthwhile." +"He did." You answer defiantly. + +Nicodemus seems slightly exasperated now. + +"And again you defend a man who cared nothing for you and would've devoured your life force just to extend his life span a little longer. What did he do that was so worthwhile? Create his Empire? Lesser men than him have done similar things and with a lot less resources, he wasn't really special in that regard. Live for centuries? He could've stayed here and lived for a lot longer than that if he'd just abandoned his mad plans. Power is fleeting Eternal. LIFE is fleeting. No one lives forever and no one rules forever. Not on this world anyway. Even necromancers die. Just takes us a little longer than most and trust me, we aren't ruling anything so much as we’re doomed to act as guardians to this world’s life. Most of us know or learn that lesson, because after it's all said and done, this book teaches that important message." +"Message? You’ve been going on about how dangerous the book is. And if the book is so dangerous, why not just destroy or get rid of it?" you say. +"You don’t believe that’s been tried? Trust me, it has by every known ability to us and then some. Getting rid of it would be unwise for it could just fall into the hands of someone who does not know its true power and they may unleash its awfulness. Better we should remain its guardians and make sure nobody else ever has to suffer the same fate we do. So if one good thing comes from the book, then it is that lesson. A reminder of what hubris does. Sadly some just fail to learn the lesson. Not everything is black and white, contrary to your worldview of things Eternal. I hope that will fade in time as well. Speaking of time, I believe yours here should be coming to an end. Your master is dead and you have no further business here." + +Nicodemus mutters a small incantation and a portal opens up near you. + +"This will take you back to your Empire. Goodbye Eternal, and I hope for your sake you find your own way, you'll find yourself a lot better off." + +The Emperor is dead and while this man may not have caused it directly, you still feel he is somehow responsible. Part of you wants to attack Nicodemus, but you also know that may not be wise as it is obvious the man wields great power. Then there is the book he holds. You almost feel drawn to it… +> Attack Nicodemus +While the Emperor might’ve been afraid of this man, you have no such fear. You’re going to succeed where your father failed. You draw your weapon with one hand and cast a spray of ice at Nicodemus with the other. + +He’s not even fazed; he’s not even all that surprised. Ignoring the frost on his body he merely stares at you and suddenly you feel severe drain of your energy. Like when Cyrus was clutching your throat, but this is even faster. You drop like a rock in water, unable to stop Nicodemus from approaching you. + +“(Sigh) If I didn’t know better I’d think that Casimir had succeeded in transferring himself into you, but you are not Casimir. You’re not even half as powerful as he was. You are a confused child that’s desperately and misguidedly still trying to prove yourself to an uncaring father figure. Under different circumstances, you’d be a figure of pity and mercy. However you do have the potential to be very dangerous and I can see that you’ve not listened to a single thing I’ve tried to tell you today. You probably never will either. May you find some sort of peace in death that you obviously couldn’t find in life.” Nicodemus remarks. + +You can’t even respond back, your whole body is becoming lethargic and numb. Your heartbeat starts slowing down, and your vision begins to darken. Soon you can’t see anything at all and surrender to eternal sleep.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’ve believed in the Emperor this long and this far. You and he have overcome all obstacles and enemies together. This Nicodemus is just another in a long line of them. You don’t know all the history that he and the Emperor have, but all you know is he will fall like all others. If the Emperor’s next conquest is to be this island then that is what will be done. If it is you that will be needed to help in this mission, then you will gladly serve and die if necessary. + +And if… + +And if the Emperor has lied to you about everything, it doesn’t matter because you have been loyal to the end and have played your role perfectly. The Emperor gave you purpose so if you are to be his new vessel of destruction to accomplish his destiny then there can be no greater honor. You are ready to make that sacrifice. You were created for it. + +Nicodemus lowers his hand and stops mumbling. If he’s cast a spell it either hasn’t worked or it has no obvious effects. + +“Casimir, I know what you’re trying to do and this isn’t going to work. I urge you to stop before it’s too late.” +“Yes, it is too late FOR YOU!” the Emperor shouts and finishes his spell with a laugh. He then turns to you. + +“Goodbye my son, I’m sorry I lied to you, but know that your last sacrifice will help me achieve my destiny at last.” + +The Emperor suddenly looks unwell again. Like he did when he was sick except now it’s happening at an accelerated rate. You see him rapidly age before your eyes. + +“NO! WHAT’S HAPPENING TO ME?! THE SPELL! THE RITUAL! THE PREPARATION! I HAD THE PERFECT VESSEL! I WAS GOING TO RULE THE WORLD! I WAS GOING TO LIVE FOREVER!” + +At this point the Emperor collapses to the floor as his body continues to decay. Meanwhile nothing is happening to you though you’re in a state of shock watching the Emperor die in front of you. + +“Son…help….meeeee…” the Emperor says in a dying raspy tone. +“I don’t know how. I’m sorry father…I have failed you…” you reply sadly. + +“I…want…to live…foreverrrrrrrrr…” the Emperor says with his last dying breath before he completely decays into a skeletal corpse, then bones, then dust. + +And with that The Emperor, Casimir, your father is dead. + +You just continue to stare at the dust in disbelief; meanwhile Nicodemus walks over to the pile and picks up the book your father seemed to be so happy to have before he died. + +“(Sigh) I warned him it wouldn’t work. When I scanned you with my identify spell I learned all I ever had to about you. You were not a suitable vessel for a transference spell.” +“Impossible, I am an Eternal! I was born and bred for this purpose!” +“I’m well aware of what you believe, but that isn’t what is. Perhaps your breeding was incorrect or perhaps a mistake was made.” +‘No. My father doesn’t make mistakes.” +“Really? Recent events would dictate otherwise.” + +You have no response you just continue to stare at the dust. + +“Eternal, I can tell you are feeling a great sense of loss right now and you have my sympathies. Your life seems to be filled with nothing but pain, war and loss. And tragically one of your only stable foundations was Casimir and even he lied to you. Yet you’re so broken that you believe you’re the one that failed him. You must’ve been the perfect son.” + +You begin to gather your strength and thoughts as you are starting to become annoyed with this Nicodemus. + +“I still am.” You reply seriously. +"Hmm, I see even with Casimir dead, your indoctrination still holds. (Sigh) I hope for your sake that will fade in time lest you end up like he did or the power hungry ancestors of this place. This island was once lush and full of life you know. Makas as it once was called had a thriving civilization with a strong navy. Even the mighty Svelk Empire at the time didn’t dare attack us. Then this accursed book was created and changed everything. This is why Casimir was exiled.” Nicodemus says and lifts up the non-descript book while still clutching it his arm. + +“Did he create it?” you ask. +“Hah. Casimir could’ve only hoped to create something so powerful. No he was just another of our kind that thought he could achieve the impossible, to become a god. This book is just an ancient mistake of our predecessors and a reminder of why we were not meant to live forever.” +“So what is it, a powerful book of necromantic spells?” +“If it were only that, it might be less dangerous. The more dangerous part is the fact that it's not just a spellbook. It’s a gateway to another dimension. Of course we didn’t really realize that or what we were doing until it was nearly too late.” +"I don't understand." +“Our civilization couldn’t leave well enough alone. We had everything, but we still couldn’t stop the ravages of time and ultimately death. So we did the logical thing of exploring the necromantic arts. It was an exciting time to be sure; I was actually a young and eager researcher myself back then. It took decades, but eventually we managed to unlock everything we could about the art of necromancy. We could’ve very well taken over the world I believe with our power, but our goals were bigger. We wanted immortality. To be as gods. Nothing less would do. In this book lies the combined knowledge of every forbidden, obscure and even common necromantic arts. We planned on using it to cast off these fragile mortal shells and ascend to a new plane of existence.” +“So…what happened?” +“This. The ritual that was to give us immortality destroyed our civilization as we knew it and created what you see today. I was actually not involved in the ritual as at the time I was not as skilled of a wizard, but I saw the devastation that occurred. A black void opened up above the entire island and its very presence killed many weaker individuals instantly. It didn’t take long for the arch mages performing this ritual to realize that they weren’t being imbued with eternal life, they were opening a portal to death itself. Fortunately some of the mages weren’t quite so obsessed with immortality and realized that this was a bad idea and so managed to close the gate before it engulfed the entire island…possibly even the world.” +“That can’t be the end of it.” +“Oh no, it most certainly was not. The entire island had been infused with negative energy and necromantic magic to a point where it was oddly keeping those that lived a much increased life span. However it also made many mad with power. Some of the more obsessed mages were furious about the gate being closed. They desired that the gate remain open, still believing it would lead to immortality. Others settled for the lesser immortality, but desired more power. Thus began the war of the necromancers who marched armies of the dead to wage endless battles with each other and destroying the rest of the island in the process.” +“It was only when every inch of this place was cursed and forever tainted that the survivors finally stopped to recognize the folly of their ways. The folly that someone can have total control over death, let alone cheat it forever." +“My father obviously disagreed.” You say. +“Yes, though he wasn't the first and sadly he probably won't be the last. Every once in awhile one of our number gets a little power hungry. Usually it’s a phase and we exile them as we did with Casimir. Most soon learn that their powers gradually weaken and beg to come back, others vainly try to make it on their own and usually die expending all their energy as soon as they try to raise an army of the dead to conquer whatever it is they've set their eyes on. I have to admit though, Casimir proved to be a little more determined than most. He was smart to stop using his necromancy and rely on more traditional means to run a nation. Even his way of attempting to cheat death was rather clever. A shame he didn't focus his energy on something more worthwhile." +"He did." You answer defiantly. + +Nicodemus seems slightly exasperated now. + +"And again you defend a man who cared nothing for you and would've devoured your life force just to extend his life span a little longer. What did he do that was so worthwhile? Create his Empire? Lesser men than him have done similar things and with a lot less resources, he wasn't really special in that regard. Live for centuries? He could've stayed here and lived for a lot longer than that if he'd just abandoned his mad plans. Power is fleeting Eternal. LIFE is fleeting. No one lives forever and no one rules forever. Not on this world anyway. Even necromancers die. Just takes us a little longer than most and trust me, we aren't ruling anything so much as we’re doomed to act as guardians to this world’s life. Most of us know or learn that lesson, because after it's all said and done, this book teaches that important message." +"Message? You’ve been going on about how dangerous the book is. And if the book is so dangerous, why not just destroy or get rid of it?" you say. +"You don’t believe that’s been tried? Trust me, it has by every known ability to us and then some. Getting rid of it would be unwise for it could just fall into the hands of someone who does not know its true power and they may unleash its awfulness. Better we should remain its guardians and make sure nobody else ever has to suffer the same fate we do. So if one good thing comes from the book, then it is that lesson. A reminder of what hubris does. Sadly some just fail to learn the lesson. Not everything is black and white, contrary to your worldview of things Eternal. I hope that will fade in time as well. Speaking of time, I believe yours here should be coming to an end. Your master is dead and you have no further business here." + +Nicodemus mutters a small incantation and a portal opens up near you. + +"This will take you back to your Empire. Goodbye Eternal, and I hope for your sake you find your own way, you'll find yourself a lot better off." + +The Emperor is dead and while this man may not have caused it directly, you still feel he is somehow responsible. Part of you wants to attack Nicodemus, but you also know that may not be wise as it is obvious the man wields great power. Then there is the book he holds. You almost feel drawn to it… +> Enter the portal +This adventure has drained you physically, mentally and even emotionally. Attacking a powerful necromancer in his homeland might not be the best idea right now. Another day perhaps… + +You approach the portal and give one last look at Nicodemus who stands by watching you. You can't figure him out. A lot of what he said was very condescending yet he seemed to pity you rather than be angry. He was also very nihilistic in his views on how achievements don't matter, not even life, though at the same he seemed to be trying to give you advice and help you in some strange way. + +You step into the portal and find yourself transported back to the Emperor’s chambers. Chambers that seem so empty now. Empty as you feel. Something is bothering you and it’s a strange thing to worry about considering it would’ve lead to your death, but you can’t shake it. + +Why did the Emperor’s ritual fail? Nicodemus said you were not a suitable vessel for the transference spell, but if you weren’t, what does that mean? Would one of the other Eternals been a better choice, or was the plan always destined to fail? + +You believe there have to be some notes on the subject of your alterations somewhere. Jacob probably has several papers about the Eternal Project in his office, but you search the Emperor’s rooms first. + +After hours of searching you manage to find several bits of private writings about various subjects. You don’t have time to read all of them now, but you focus on anything to the Eternal Project. + +One of the major things you discover is that the pregnant mothers had a specific ritual cast over them while the Eternals to be were still in the womb. This ritual, while elaborate and probably quite frightening to the woman in question didn’t harm her in any way; it was more of a “prep” spell. (You also read that it took several attempts to get this ritual “right” too. The number of dead pregnant women is quite sizable) + +Apparently this initial ritual was a big key in whether or not the final ritual was going to be successful. You can’t find any other information besides how the Emperor was REALLY betting everything on this plan as he’d run out of ideas on to extend his life any further short of going back to Mortos and apologizing to Nicodemus for his behavior. + +Still wanting more information you go search through Jacob’s office. It is actually easy to find everything since he kept everything in immaculate order. Naturally he had everything locked, but you easily remove such annoyances. Nothing is going to stop you from seeking out your origins. + +And after hours more searching you find more than you ever wanted to know in Jacob’s journal… + +I can’t believe those idiots! Trent and Stravid grabbed the wrong fucking infant! We only found out just yesterday when I found their list on the floor of the privy room covered in piss! + +I went back to check the Empire nursery numbers hoping that MAYBE they grabbed the correct child anyway, but no such luck. The infant that was supposed to be selected was already disposed of as a rejected candidate. Meanwhile the wrong infant is already going through his magical alterations. + +I’m not exactly on the Emperor’s good side at the best of times, and I’m not getting into fucking trouble for this. Those two morons are going to be executed. As for the baby I’m going to have to grovel to get that svelk bitch to help me with this. She can probably perform the same ritual over this new brat so the Emperor won’t be able to detect anything is amiss with it. I don’t understand why the Emperor doesn’t just perform this ritual in person rather than relying on the svelk to do it anyway. + +And HOPEFULLY that will work. It has to work. Maybe I’m worrying about this too much, what are the chances that this kid will live through training and meet the Emperor anyway? + +And there it is, your “origins.” You weren’t even meant to be an Eternal. You were a clerical mistake, a bureaucratic mishap, and the Emperor’s death was caused by it. Hell, it’s almost like you went through with Jacob and Semra’s plan to assassinate the Emperor anyway. + +One might think something like this would cause you to doubt the meaning of your entire existence and drive you into depression. Possibly even suicide. An end to this life of misplaced duty, obedience and blind devotion to ultimately an ungrateful master. + +Just like Nicodemus said. + +But you don’t really think about any of that. Instead you start to laugh. You laugh for a very long time. + +“He…he didn’t even know I wasn’t originally chosen! What a fool! Why the hell did I ever follow this man? Because I’m an even bigger fool!” you say to yourself in between the guffaws. + +Perhaps you’re still being a fool. Casimir lied to you and deep down never really cared save for what he thought you were, but none of that nor his death invalidate your beliefs in the Empire. His idea that the world needs order, that the masses need to be kept in line, that some elements are better off exterminated for the overall good. + +Maybe part of you still can’t quite shake being the “dutiful” son, but you fully intend on continuing in your “father’s footsteps.” Of course the difference now being that your life is truly your own now. Since destiny has conspired to thrust you into the position of a ruler, you will play the role that it would have you play. + +Now you just have to convince everyone else. + +Within the week you call for a meeting of the most important leaders of the Empire. Ranging from generals to economists to advisors and other infrastructure types you’ve had little to no contact with before. Everyone is told to gather in the throne room, which is a room that hasn’t been used in centuries; or rather Casmir stopped using it after he decided to become a recluse. + +You won’t be doing that. You’ll be leading from the front rather than hiding in the shadows causing people to wonder if you exist at all. This is your time now. + +When everyone finally arrives they naturally all wonder what’s going on, you get right to the point. + +"The Emperor as most of us knew him has moved on from this world. As his only logical successor I will be taking his place. If anyone has a problem with this we can have a civilized discussion about it on the battlefield which I have no doubt I will be seeing a lot of when several pretenders, dissidents and outright anarchists attempt to dethrone me. They will fail. The Empire will not fall today or anytime soon. This is just a new era for it and one I fully intend on making successful. The Empire currently is doing well, but I'm confident that with your loyalty and obedience we can make it even stronger." + +You take a pause in your speech and scan your audience. None of them are interrupting. They all seem to be captivated, of course maybe some are just planning on trying to assassinate you later, but for now you’ll take their attention as a positive sign. + +"Join me and the Empire will live forever. YOU will live forever! Who's with me?" + +No sooner have you finished your statement, several of the advisors bend their knee and bow towards you. The soldiers draw their weapons and raise them in air pledging their loyalty. + +"Hail to the new Emperor!" +"Long live the Empire!" + +Well that went better than you expected. + +The only “important” person that didn’t attend your meeting was Marik though you didn’t really expect him to being a derro and all. Not to mention you didn’t invite him anyway and had planned on meeting with him personally. + +You have no idea how he’s going to react to the news and he’s erratic at the best of times. You and he weren’t exactly getting along the last time you saw him, so for all you know he may just attack you. Part of you hopes he does, just so you never have to deal with him anymore. Besides Semra, Marik was the next one you never liked dealing with just because his demeanor irritated you. + +When you get to his personal factory, it’s as silent and as empty as it was when you had to clean out those escaped trolls. You hope that isn’t the damn problem again. On your guard, you cautiously walk through the factory and make your way down to the underground portion and continue to find nobody around. + +“Marik! If this is an ambush, let’s just get this over with now because I don’t have time for it!” you shout. + +You see the door to the tank baby room open up, but it isn’t Marik, it’s a young girl. In fact it’s the tank baby that you spared before your trip to Mortos. She looks like she’s been healing well. + +“He…he’s not here sir. I mean my Emperor. I apologize for not addressing you properly.” She remarks nervously. +“That’s fine…so word of my ascension has reached down here eh? Wasn’t sure if it did, so where’s Marik? In fact where is everyone? I know there’s still usually a skeleton crew that works in the factory above and there are usually derro guards wandering around down here. In fact shouldn’t there be more of you tank babies running around training?” you ask. +“Marik killed them all. He shut down the machine that was keeping the rest alive inside the tanks. Said if the Emperor was gone then his debt was paid and he wasn’t going to spend the remainder of his years toiling for the likes of you and called you a…uh…um…” +“Oh just say it, I’m pretty sure it isn’t going to surprise me.” + +“He called you a svelk fucker.” +“Is that all?” +“Well then he sort of ranted. He said that you had a svelk lover that would strap on a…uh…sexual device and made you bend over like a woman when you would have relations.” +“Sheesh. Can’t say Marik didn’t have a colorful imagination.” You remark shaking your head. +“Then he said the pair of you fellated kobolds and ate the dung of…” +“Okay, I think I got the idea.” You say holding up your hand. +“He was very angry at you my Emperor.” +“Mmh, sounds like. So why did he kill all you tankies?” +“Oh, well he also said he wasn’t going to waste any more of his genius for you to use, so he decided to kill all of us in the tanks. He tried to kill me as well by having his men shoot at me and lob several firebombs at me.” She says and points over to a partially collapsed bit of the room where blacked equipment and fallen rock now lays. +“Guessing it didn’t work.” +“I managed to duck under one of the desks and made a blood curdling scream as the explosions went off and the rocks fell down around me. After they let up, I heard Marik laugh at how I feared death in my final moments and after a few minutes I heard them leave at which point I started digging myself out of the rubble.” +“Hrm, I see faking your own death actually worked for you this time, good. You shouldn’t disregard a tactic just because it fails in one instance.” You say as you glance over a pile of papers lying on another table in the room. + +“Marik was brilliant in some ways, but he was an idiot in others. The fool left all his notes behind. I can easily restart all the work he did.” You add. +“You’re going to restart the Eternal Project? But I thought you didn’t like…tankies as you call us.” +“Well, I was in a different state of mind at the time. Now that I’m Emperor, I’m thinking that I’m going to need dedicated loyal soldiers to help in the expansion of the Empire in the future. Just need to rebuild the factory, get some babies, throw them into the tanks and grow my new army. Of course I’ll be overseeing it and making my own alterations to whatever Marik’s original design was.” +“What about me, my Emperor?” The tank baby asks. + +“Yes, what about you? Well considering you managed to survive not one, but two major attempts on your life within weeks of being out of your little tank, I suppose you deserve a place somewhere. To be honest, I did spare you in the first place because you showed more promise and strength than your siblings by merely surviving my assault. You know I was singled out too, on several occasions. I grew stronger from the challenges. You will have the same opportunity I did and I’m going to personally train you. Then depending on how well you do, I’ll decide where you’re best needed.” You tell her. +“You’re…you’re too kind my Emperor.” She says with a gratuitous expression on her face. + +You start laughing. + +“You won’t be thinking that when we actually start training. Let’s go. By the way it’ll be useful to have something to call you other than tank baby, so what’s your name?” +“Name? I don’t have one, my Emperor. Marik never saw fit to give me one. I do have a number though. Ten.” +“No, I’m not going to call you ten. That’s silly, especially since there’s only one of you now. Let’s see…I’ll call you… Decena. You like that name?” +“I don’t have any objections to it, my Emperor.” +“Good. Let us be on our way.” + +With this last bit of business out of the way, you feel you’re getting off on a good start as the Empire’s new Emperor. + +You just wish Alison were here to share it with you. +> Years pass... +Chapter 3C2: Successor + + +Year 37 + +Ruling the Empire, it’s a thankless job, but somebody’s got to do it. + +With all the restructuring and consolidation of what holdings you do have, you haven’t gotten around to actually expanding the Empire yet. You have sent quite a few scouts out though. + +There were a few groups sent south of Nalin and into the Usksha Desert, but if there is anything past it, it must be a very long ways off. Every scout team has reported practically nothing but endless sands and hostile usksha nomads. To say nothing of giant sand worms and creatures that can turn people to stone with a mere gaze. + +Further east of Delerg leads to heavy jungle to the point of it being practically impassible. Scouts that survived have told you that it almost feels like the jungle is actively trying to prevent further exploration. Apparently it’s also inhabited by dark skinned Halfling like beings, but a lot more savage. (Though from what Casimir told you, Halflings could get rather savage themselves) They made no attempt to parlay and always attacked on sight. + +Someone mentioned that there was evidence of a few ancient ruins, but these weren’t explored much due the relentless pygmy attacks. Probably just remnants of a long dead civilization that the pygmies degenerated from anyway. + +You didn’t bother with sending scouts further north of Rask, it’s well known that it’s just more mountains and even if there is land past them, it would be so cold that nobody would want to live there, well not the average Empire citizen anyway. + +While the Empire has never really had a navy to speak of, you’ve been trying to make steps in correcting that problem. So far a few ships have been sent east, but there hasn’t been much news yet of any other major landmasses, just few remote islands that contain nothing of worth. (And none of them are Mortos either.) + +Only the Empire’s western borders hold any immediate promise for future expansion. + +Some of the scout reports have been interesting, as there seems to be a wide range of societies further west. + +The major one you’re already having minor skirmishes with are a group of beast like people similar to the now extinct gnolls, but more “multi-racial” in nature. They refer to themselves as the “Children of Tor.” (Who you assume is probably some god or ancestor figure to them.) They also call their territory “The Land” and are largely nomadic just like the usksha. As you might expect, they see the Empire as an affront to nature and the land and have been hostile at every turn. + +The Torites seem to consist of four major races. The most physically imposing being the great bull beings (The minotaurs). They’re reportedly as strong as an ogre and twice as vicious. They probably aren’t the greatest of thinkers, but to write them off as stupid would be a mistake. + +The second group is no less imposing. These are the ones that seem to be half human half horse (The centaurs). The horse beasts must train constantly with their bows considering how accurate they are with them. They are fairly deadly in open plains due to this and their maneuverability. + +The third group seems to be the most common and smaller than the other two, but no less dangerous. These are the “goat people” (The satyrs) They make up the majority of the population, but they also boast a number of wild mages, shaman and other types that tap into a natural elemental magic. + +The last group has only been rumored, but you can’t dismiss the possibility. Apparently there is also a group of these beast people that have wings like birds that lives in the western most mountain range. Other rumors abound about less sentient beast creatures ranging from large cat like creatures with spiked tails to abominations that are mixed with a multitude of animals. + +This is just one current enemy however. They are other more “civilized” groups too who may or may not be enemies in the future. Some of these range from hamlets that are fairly isolated from immediate dangers to small petty backwards kingdoms, which aren’t even as great as the one the Felkans had. There are other probably others as well, but it hardly matters since eventually ALL will be submitting to the Empire if you have anything to say about it. + +Of course you can’t do it all alone even if you do attempt to have a more hands on approach than your predecessor. This is why you have your own inner circle to help. + +Jacob’s replacement, Kivan pretty much takes care of all the things he did. Though to be honest, most of that stuff is dull administration duty that tends to bore you anyway. The funny thing is Kivan almost reminds you of a younger version of Jacob in some ways. You guess it must be the typical “bean counter” mindset those administrative types share. In retrospect it’s kind of a shame you killed Jacob as he ultimately was just looking out for the best interest of the Empire, but these things happen. + +Warrick is still head of the Eyes, who are more in control of internal security than ever. You didn’t even get a single uprising within the few months you took the throne, though there was a bit of civil unrest that had to be quelled when newborns were taken from families for the Eternal Project. Warrick is good at his job, though you get the impression that he’d like to be out there in the field sometimes. Something you can identify with since you’ve been growing bored due to the lack of battle due to the whole concentration on “ruling” thing. + +Brenda doesn’t seem to have this problem. She’s actually satisfied with more administrative duties, but then she’s never been at the forefront of war like the rest of the Eternals have. Still, she’s been instrumental in implementing some worthwhile domestic issues such as fully incorporating kobolds into the Empire (The little scalies are now some of the most loyal citizens and always willing to serve its armies!) and giving the remaining orcs their own land in Rask. Brenda reasoned that while their numbers were decimated in the Felkan War, they can probably build them back up within a couple of decades and the Empire will have a new generation of orc soldiers that can be relied upon. Not to mention the orcs are still serving in a good capacity by currently slaying the odd ogre tribe or giant that comes lumbering down from the Rask Mountains. + +Brenda still doesn’t really get along with Warrick however. She still holds him partially responsible for Roldan’s death. There really isn’t anything you can do about that though, despite your best efforts. You just give a reminder to the both of them to keep it professional and they do for the most part. Which is more than can be said for General Ackerson and Grand Mage Galen, who you try to keep far away from each other since they’d kill one another if they could help it. Fortunately they aren’t called to the meetings very often. Ackerson is mainly kept on the western borders (currently dealing with the Torites as of late) while Galen has been put on day-to-day duty of overseeing the magic side of things for the Eternal Project. (Though he was a great help last year in helping you banish the wendigo problem for good) + +He hates the job and would no doubt rather be serving as the dean at the mage academy, but you need someone there with competent magic skills when you aren’t available. You’ve actually made cut backs to the academy anyway, There just aren’t that many mages left and there haven’t been many new people to show the aptitude for it, especially after the Felkan War. With the rise of technology within the Empire you wonder if eventually magic will be displaced altogether, but in the scheme of things, its of little concern to you, since you still have all your powers after all. + +The other one in charge of the day-to-day duties of the Eternal Project is an odd fellow by the name of Elam. He takes care of the more technical matters. He’s basically the “new Marik” except that he’s human, which makes him a whole lot saner, but not by much. He was once training to be a physician, but was kicked out of the guild for…unnecessary experimentation. He then drifted and somehow his interests turned to technology. He was a human supervisor at Marik’s factory, but more than that, he actually was allowed into the derro portion of the factory on a regular basis. After Marik left, he became a recluse and lived in one of the more remote parts of Arat where he tinkered on things and tries to create new inventions. Kivan was the one that actually tracked him down when you stated that you needed someone who had a better grasp of all this “derro techie shit.” So far he’s worked out well, though Galen whines about having to keep an eye on him so he doesn’t do unnecessary tinkering on the Eternal tanks. + +Finally there is Decena. In between running the Empire and overseeing the new Eternal Project, you’ve been training her. So far she’s been showing steady improvement due to your harsh training lessons. Lately she has desired the need to go out on the battlefield to use what she has learned and bring glory to the Empire, which was part of your plan when you started training her. + +As you finish up, Decena moans in ecstasy when she climaxes. + +Bedding her on a regular basis really wasn’t part of the original plan however. + +“What the fuck am I doing?” you’ve often asked yourself. You certainly did when you first pushed your lips against hers and groped her body during a sparring lesson. She initially thought you were attempting some sort of new attack on her, which in a way you were. One that ended up being entirely successful. + +You sometimes think what you did (and why you continue doing it) was due to quelling a sort of loneliness that exists within you, which is partially true. The other reason is far darker. In some strange way you were re-enacting your own training lesson with Semra. Except now YOU were taking on the role of “Mistress.” (You really don’t like dwelling on what possible psychological ramifications that all means, you just buried deeper in your ever growing brain box of suppressed thoughts) + +Of course it isn’t exactly like the fucked up relationship you had with Semra, and Decena didn’t exactly resist you and seemed to give in fairly quickly. Of course you can never know if it was because she genuinely felt attraction or she knew that it would’ve been futile to resist. She claims she did feel something, but wasn’t quite sure what it was, which may or may not be true given that she spent most of her life in a fucking tank and isn’t exactly an expert on the whole feelings situation herself. + +As it stands Decena doesn’t ask questions such as if the pair of you are “husband and wife” or even a “couple.” From what you can tell she just sees your sexual encounters as a form of “approval” from her Emperor. Perhaps even as some sort of “reward” for all her duty and obedience. Still, given how much time you do spend with her, she might as well be your young bride at this point. + +You get up off the bed and take a long look at Decena as she starts to fall asleep from your round of passion. + +Do you have any sort of feelings for the girl? Perhaps some, but not in the way that you had for Alison. There probably isn’t a day that goes by that you don’t take a good long look at Alison’s portrait and mentally apologize to it. + +What you really need around here is a change. + +“Decena, get up.” You say and pull at one of her arms. +“Wha? Again?” she asks sleepily. +“No, not that. You’re not sleeping here tonight, I’m sending you away.” +“Did…did I do something wrong? I can do better, I…” she hastily begins to say, worrying about your reasons. +“No, you’ve done everything right. It’s just that it’s time. You’re not gaining anything more by staying here and the Empire needs to expand. I’m sending you to the western borders to oversee settling some military outposts out that way. Maybe start making major strides against those beast savages that have been giving us problems lately.” + +Decena’s eyes light up. + +“Wait, you mean you’re giving me my own command?” she asks. +“Yep, I’ll have everything set up in a day or so. You need to be out their gaining real experience, not stuck here training.” + +Decena at this point proceeds to leap out of bed and embrace you planting several kisses on your face. + +“Oh thank you Emperor! I’m so happy you’ve finally placed this much faith in me and believe I’m ready for this!” +“Hrm. Yes, well can’t let talent go to waste. I suggest you go get ready.” + +Decena excitedly gets dressed and leaves the room. Well that’s a temporary solution at least and it gets the ball rolling on expanding the Empire. Eventually though, you’re going to have to make a more personal decision about her. + +As for you, you need something else to do with yourself as well. You’d like to go back on the battlefield yourself, but there is still so much that requires your immediate attention, the most important still being the Eternal Project. There are also still a few plans and notes that Marik left behind that show some promise. His concept of an “airship” for example is very intriguing to you. You’d like to try to get one built and the only one that’s going to remotely know how to get them started is most likely Elam, so it’s a trip to the Eternal Factory… + +When you arrive Galen immediately walks over to you. + +“Emperor! I’m glad you’re here, I can’t put up with Elam’s eccentricities any longer! At this point I’d rather be working along side that idiot Ackerson! I humbly request that I MUST be transferred! One of the other mages here can easily take over for…” + +You grab Galen by the collar and then throw him to the floor. + +“Shut the hell up! Do you ever stop whining? I’ve known elven slaves that whimper far less.” You say while Galen continues to stare at you from his new vantage point. + +“I…I’m not whining for just my sake. Elam has been trying to make improvements to the tanks again and he damn near blew one up if I hadn’t managed to freeze the flames caused by whatever the hell he was doing.” Galen remarks. “Keeps saying he’s bored just monitoring the tanks, though I can’t say I disagree in that regard.” +“Well, looks like I better give him something else to do then since he’s so bored.” + +You leave Galen and go find Elam who is excitedly explaining something to a nervous looking man though you don’t know if he’s nervous because you’re here or because Elam’s talking to him waving some sort of tool that has flame emitting from it. + +“Elam we need to have a talk.” You say. +“Huh? Oh! Yes, yes, yes, Emperor! Indeed we do! I have figured out a way to improve…” + +You hold up your hand as a signal that Elam should stop talking. + +“Stop. Not another word or I’ll have your tongue removed. Just listen for a change. The tanks are fine; they don’t need any more improvements. They just need daily monitoring and maintenance if needed. However since you seem to need something more stimulating, here’s something you can do.” You say and hand Elam a bunch of diagrams and notes which causes his eyes to widen. + +“That is your new project. I want you to start building one of these things. If it proves successful, you can do all the improvements you like to future ones to make them deadlier and more efficient. Does that sound good to you? You may speak now.” +“Yes, definitely yes! Thank you my Emperor! I will not disappoint you in this endeavor!” +“I don’t expect you will. Of course while you will need a crew to help you, I still need some of your engineers here.” +“Oh, of course. In fact how about Gregory take over here for me?” Elam says and points over to the nervous man he was just speaking to. + +You wave Gregory over who walks over like he thinks he’s in trouble. + +“You, can you just do your damn job without the urge to fuck with the tanks unnecessarily?” you ask. +“Yes…yes sir. I mean yes my Emperor.” +“Good. That’s all I need from you. Now get back to work. And as for you Elam, you’ll be transferred over to another factory, preferably one with a lot of space and far away from populated areas. Oh and I’ll still be coming by to check on your progress. Both of you.” You say and leave the pair of engineers. + +You don’t leave the factory though as you want to make sure your future Eternals are still doing okay despite Elam’s over enthusiasm to improve their current dwellings. Of course while you’re doing this, once again Galen walks over to you. You swear he must have a death wish today or something. + +“So I overheard that you’re transferring Elam out of here.” Galen says. +“Your hearing is as sharp as ever Galen.” You answer. +“While it would be a blessing to continue to work here without having to deal with him again, I still believe that my own talents are going to waste here. I mean you hardly need a wizard of my stature to oversee these tanks. Another lesser mage could easily do this job.” +“(Sigh) After all your bitching about Elam, you’re really no better. You know what though, you’re right. Your talents are going to waste here. I’ll have you transferred to western borders.” You say. + +Not exactly what Galen had in mind by the look on his face. + +“What? We’ve got enemies that need taken care of so that the Empire may expand. Goat people with magic abilities of their own if the reports are correct. You said you wanted something that was suited to your talents; well you’ve got it. And don’t worry, I’m not sending you to Ackerson’s command. You’ll be assisting Decena.” +“Decena? You mean the young Eternal girl? When did she get a command?” +“Just recently. Now I expect you that you won’t have the same issues with her that you did with Ackerson AND Elam. Because if I hear about shit not running smoothly due to personality conflicts again, I’m going to be very displeased with you. Understand?” +“Yes, my Emperor.” Galen responds dejectedly. + +In the weeks to come, happily everyone seems to be doing well in their new assignments. Elam is already working hard to a degree where it’s actually not detrimental. The future Eternals are now under a more cautious, but still vigilant caretaker. And from her letters it appears that Decena and Galen are working well together or at least not to any degree where there are problems. + +Decena’s letters are always full of excitement. You get the impression she wishes she could tell you about her battles in person. It’s obvious she wants you to be proud of her victories. And you are or at least you’re happy to see that she’s effectively using the skills that you taught her. + +The most concerning thing about her reports though is that so far these beast people never engage in traditional battle. She mentions how they prefer to ambush or only attack when they have vast numerical superiority. The most difficult thing about combating them is their extensive knowledge of the land, which they live off of, as they have no towns or cities to conquer. Because of their nomadic nature you anticipate that they’re going to be a problem for quite awhile. + +Still, at least Decena seems to be handling the situation. You have a message sent back that you will send reinforcements soon. In the meantime, General Ackerson has also made strides in annexing several of the smaller isolated independent towns and villages. These places will become some of the staging areas of what will most likely be an extended conflict with the Torites. + +You’ll eventually win though and claim the land for the Empire; you have no doubt about that. +> Years pass... +Year 40 + +“I thought the plan was to keep them in the tanks until the sixteenth year.” Brenda says. +“No, those were Marik’s original plans for the last Eternals he worked on. We’re doing things differently. From Elam’s earlier calculations, and my own magic theories on this project we both came to the conclusion long ago that keeping them in the tanks for as long as Marik did is asking for trouble in the long term. While it certainly accelerates their skills and abilities there’s a risk for it to have a terrible affect on the mind. In fact it’s probably just as well that Marik killed them all, otherwise we might’ve had hundreds of mental cases.” You reply. + +“But Decena seems okay. I mean from what I know of the girl.” Brenda says. +“Decena’s an exception, but I’m not going to tempt fate with this group. Five years seems like a good stopping point.” +“So are you going to be training the rest of them?” +“No, you are.” You say to Brenda who is speechless for a second. + +“What?” Brenda says. +“You’re going to be responsible for these new Eternals Brenda. I know you’re going to need assistants, but it’s going to be chiefly your responsibility to train them and to make sure they become the best of the best. What Eternals should be. What WE are.” +“But, why me? I mean I’ve never been on the frontlines like the rest of us were.” +“True, but I know you’re no stranger to battle and you’re the only one I can trust with this task. Warrick’s job is to be the head of internal security and to directly oversee the Eyes, so he can’t do it. And I feel it would be best if another Eternal should be fully in charge of training these new ones. That leaves you and I know you to be an honorable woman who upholds the ideals of the Empire. Who could possibly be better?” +“You?” Brenda says. +“Heh, well it was a rhetorical question. But besides being too busy myself, I actually don’t believe I’d be the best trainer. I think due to our own experiences of how we were trained as well as our personalities, you will make a better teacher.” +“But we both had the same training up to our twelfth year.” +“Yes, and then our next four I guarantee was vastly different. And even during our twelve years together in Semra’s class, MY training experience was very different from yours. I think you’d agree.” + +Brenda nods, probably remembering that Semra took every opportunity to single you out in the class and subjecting you to the harshest punishments when it struck her fancy. + +“You had Captain Gruz as a teacher and from what I heard, he taught you all to fight as a team and to have a shared respect for each other and he did it without resorting to excessive measures. I know the common belief is that I’m cruel by nature, but I’m actually not. Ruthless perhaps, but not needlessly cruel. And because I’m not cruel, that’s why I’d rather have a more even-tempered person with at least a less hellish childhood experience than I train these children. They may be Eternals, but they’re still children that will have to be molded into good productive soldiers for the Empire with minimal problems to their mental state. I know you’ll be tough, but fair.” + +“Well, I don’t know what to say, except I appreciate your confidence in me in all this and I’ll do my best to carry out this task successfully. However, while I do understand that you don’t really have the time to train the new Eternals I’m still slightly puzzled to as why you believe you’d be a rotten teacher. I mean you trained Decena and from what I’ve heard she’s fanatically loyal as well as a great warrior bringing glory to the Empire.” + +“That’s right, I did. And she is.” You answer and don’t give any more elaboration, which prompts Brenda to just leave it alone. + +“Okay.” She responds. + +There’s a brief pause before Brenda decides to break up the silence by changing the subject. + +“So, what’s next on your agenda?” +“Me? Well after I go inspect the new airship that Elam is supposed to be finished with, I’m going back on the battlefield. I think its time; most of the internal reorganization and major projects have been dealt with and don’t require my immediate watchful eye anymore. I’m sure if any problems crop up, someone won’t hesitate to inform me. Besides, the Torites are causing all sorts of problem on Ackerson’s front. And I think he may even be having issues with that petty kingdom he recently made contact with. I don’t even remember what its name is, and if I have anything to say about it, neither will anyone else.” +“Well I’d tell you to be careful or wish you luck, but I know you’ll be fine. You always are. Are you going to stay for the grand opening though?” Brenda asks and points at the rows and rows of tanks. + +“No. Probably best if they don’t see me immediately. Keep me a semi-mysterious unapproachable figure for awhile.” You reply. +“Oh like what they told us?” Brenda says. +“Worked didn’t it? Still, when you’ve sufficiently got that idea into their heads, then I suppose I’ll make my appearance to them, most likely unannounced. I’ll want them to actually believe that I may very well pop up at any time. It’ll keep them on their toes.” +“Ha ha, that’s probably even more frightening than never seeing such a figure as I have to admit even at times I wondered if the Emperor was actually watching me all the time, though Roldan certainly thought so.” + +Brenda at this point temporarily spins off into a pleasant memory she has of Roldan. You’ve never told her it was actually Casimir that had Roldan assassinated for his own reasons. You’ve pondered if you should tell her the truth, but ultimately decided it wouldn’t do any good save for perhaps destroying her faith in the Empire, which you don’t want. + +You know Brenda is prone to bouts of depression ever since Roldan’s died, telling her that the government and its ruler that she served was directly involved in her husband’s death might push her into hopelessness. Maybe even suicide. As it stands, you’ve been working to try to keep her spirits up. + +Which is another reason why you picked her to train these new Eternals. Perhaps it will give her a better sense of purpose. + +“Sorry, I rambled a bit there. I guess I just still miss Roldan.” Brenda says. +“No need to apologize, I completely understand. Roldan was a dedicated soldier of the Empire and if he were here today he’d be proud of your accomplishments. Anyway, I have to go; if I’m lucky Elam hasn’t blown up this new machine he just built yet. I trust you have this?” +“Yes I do.” + +You leave Brenda to her task and make your way to your next stop, which should be very different… + +You look at the brand new airship you’ve poured money into. It certainly is as large as you thought it might be, though it is still strange to see such a machine that was only picture on a piece of parchment a few years ago. Elam is visibly anxious about what you’ll think about it. He’s surprisingly quiet though, which might be a good sign that he’s learned to not run off at the mouth all the time. + +“Hrm, its impressive looking, but does it actually work?” you ask Elam. +“Oh yes! We have tested its flight capabilities and it certainly works according to all the notes and plans Marik left. Had to make some adjustments of course, but I believe now that we’ve made one, we can easily improve upon it and make more.” Elam says. + +“Good, glad to hear it. What about weapons?” +“We’ve equipped it with the latest cannons and the prototype repeater. There are also firebombs that can be dropped from the sky.” Elam answers. +“Excellent work as always Elam.” +“Thank you, my Emperor. Will you be boarding it?” +“Boarding it? Hmm, hadn’t actually given it much thought. I mean is this final product? You don’t need to do anymore testing on it?” +“Well we were just going to do some weapons testing while it flying it, but the airship itself is fully operational. It won’t go crashing into the ground or anything like that.” + +While you prefer keeping your feet firmly on the ground, you have to admit you do like the idea of potentially floating through the sky towering over your enemies and all those that might oppose you. + +“Very well, but I still want you to go through a weapons test like you planned, before I get on it. Do another safety check as well.” +“As you wish, so about a week?” Elam asks. +“Fine, but no more than that.” You reply and leave. + +Seeing as you have a few more days to kick around before the airship is ready, you return to the mundane duties of rulership. A couple days later you decide to check up on Warrick to see if there is anything he’s uncovered that needs your attention. + +The Eye Headquarters is probably the safest place in the Empire other than the palace itself. The Eyes may not be Eternals, but they’re the next best thing and Warrick being both is certainly one of the best warriors at your command. + +That’s probably why he looks so bored behind his desk when you meet him. In fact your visit is probably the most exciting thing that’s happened in his life lately. + +“Emperor! Didn’t realize you were coming, I was just busy going through all these population lists. You know like who is a potential trouble maker, who is a loyal citizen, that sort of thing.” Warrick says getting up when you enter his office. +“Anything interesting I should know about?” you ask. +“Not really. I mean there are still some grumbles from citizens about when we took babies from some families for the Eternal Project and the free elven population is always unsatisfied with the way things are, but I’m not seeing any uprising material. Unless you want to have some dissenters whisked away in the night just to be safe.” Warrick says. +“I don’t think that’ll be necessary. They can’t all be kobolds.” You reply. +“Heh, got that right. Still can’t get over how Brenda was so successful in assimilating them the way she did. I still remember during our first major assignment in Nalin we had to wipe out caves of those vicious little bastards.” +“I just saw her a few days ago actually, she’s going to be in charge of the new Eternals, training and such.” +“Is that right? Well she’s probably the best candidate. I mean with you busy ruling and me busy being in charge of the Eyes and all. Um, is she still pissed at me?” +“She didn’t really say anything about you, but I imagine you’re still not her favorite person.” +“(Sigh) That’s a shame. You know I don’t harbor any ill will against her and if I could’ve I would’ve had even tighter security that fateful day. I mean I just…” + +You stop Warrick + +“Warrick, you don’t need to explain. You did everything you could that day. We all did. I mean hell even I didn’t see a shadow assassination coming. A dead one that I killed no less. Just don’t worry about it. Brenda will probably get over it one day, and if she doesn’t, well it’s still not your fault.” + +This reassuring statement seems to make Warrick calmer. You’ve obviously never told him the real truth about the assassination either and again you see no reason to stir up trouble by doing so. + +You and Warrick talk for a while, some it about the present, some of it about the future, and some of it about the past. During your conversation, it suddenly occurs to you that maybe you could hand a small honor over to Warrick for all his hard work. He certainly could use a break in the mundane paper work that he primarily does nowadays. + +You wonder if you should let him take command of the new airship and see some frontline combat. +> Let Warrick command the airship +You figure Warrick deserves something for all his hard work and loyalty, besides you’re still a little hesitant to go flying off into the sky. + +“Warrick, I also saw Elam a few days ago too. He told me that by the end of this week, it should be ready for flight as well as combat. Originally I was going to take the first official flight on it, but would you like to do the honors?” you ask. + +Warrick looks like he can’t believe his ears. + +“Are you serious?” +“Completely. I know you’re probably bored at times doing this job, trust me I sympathize. The day-to-day task of ruling isn’t exactly as exciting as being hip deep in the corpses of your enemies. So I’m giving you this chance to be on the frontlines for a while. I mean I assume you’ve got someone here that can take over for you while you’re gone for a little while right?” +“Sure! I’m got more than few very qualified Eyes that can do the job.” Warrick says. +“Okay, well it’s settled, you’ll report to Elam’s factory in Arat in about four days. Just tell him I sent you, I’m sure there won’t be any problems.” +“Thank you for this opportunity and this position Emperor. I won’t let it go to waste. Oh, what’s the name of this new vessel?” +“Name? Actually I don’t think it has been named yet. Or at least Elam didn’t give it one. Hrm…call it the Storm. I mean you’ll be floating through the sky raining death down upon your enemies in a spectacular fashion. Plus you’re an Eye. I mean Eye of the Storm. Play on words, I dunno, sounds clever to me.” +“Heh, sounds good to me too.” Warrick agrees. + +With Warrick obviously in better spirits, you leave the Eye headquarter and make your own preparations for heading out to the western front. You might not be riding on an airship to do it, but you’ll still be engaging in battle in some capacity. + +In a couple days you meet up with Ackerson’s company in one of the small towns that has recently been converted into army encampment. The new Empire “citizens” don’t look very happy about their recent occupation and change to their way of life, but they don’t have much choice in the matter and in time they’ll either get used to it, or they won’t and will have to be put down. No matter to you either way. + +General Ackerson himself looks very tired. Like he hasn’t been sleeping for days. In fact many of the soldiers have a weary looking appearance. While this is somewhat expected with long drawn out conflicts, you can’t imagine that they’ve had so much trouble that would cause them this much stress. Decena’s command has had more conflict activity, but she hasn’t given any reports of problems. (Though it’s possible that she’s not reporting such things, but given her idolization, you doubt if she’d lie, and even if she wasn’t telling, you’re pretty sure Galen would send you a complaining letter of sub standard conditions.) + +“What the hell is wrong with this camp Ackerson? Every man and woman here looks like they’re hung over due to partying for weeks on end, or they’ve been under going months of a siege. I don’t see any castles around here, so it better not be the former.” you demand. +“I…I don’t know my Emperor. Everything was fine until recently. I mean as fine as it could be with groups of sneaking beast people attempting to bushwhack our patrols every so often. Now it’s like most of us can’t get a restful sleep and a lot of us are just never fully awake anymore. Just a tired feeling even if we haven’t been doing much during a particular day. Some have even reported odd or bad dreams.” + +While you can’t be certain of what would cause such a thing, you feel you’re pretty safe in assuming one possibility. + +“Sounds like magic. Or some form of it. Why haven’t you had your mages check it out?” you ask. +“I would have, but they’re all dead my Emperor. If it isn’t the blasted centaurs with their deadly accuracy, it’s the damn satyrs with their own wild magic. It’s like they target our mages even if they lose more than half of their own numbers in the process.” +“That can’t be a coincidence. Seems like it’s the goat wizards doing this to your command. Better double your efforts and hunt them all down within the vicinity.” +“Well, I have since I thought that might be the case, but I don’t think it’s the Torites doing this. Their mages seem to focus on earth based or elemental magic, nothing to do with the mind or similar witchery. I think they’d be more likely to summon a tornado at us, which thankfully they haven’t done yet.” Ackerson explains. +“Perhaps, this is just a taste of their what their mages can also do, still if you don’t believe its them, who else? The people here don’t look happy about the Empire taking charge of this place. You sure there isn’t a hidden mage here?” +“No, don’t think so. The people of this town have also complained about feeling tired also. In fact that’s probably why they’re pissed at us. To them, we brought this curse as they call it to their town.” +“Okay, what about that new kingdom you said you made contact with? What’s the name of it?” +“Oh them. The Broki Kingdom. I’m not even sure they have any mages. The whole place is backwards. Its chaotic nature reminds me of Rask before the Empire enforced order to it. It’s barely even a kingdom and certainly not like the one the Felkans had. A single king runs the kingdom this is true, but he’s not a strong one. The only reason why he hasn’t been overthrown is because the rest of the barons are all too busy scheming against each other.” +“That sounds like a rather inefficient way to run a government.” You say. +“From what I can tell it is. Practically nothing gets accomplished other than minor civil wars over land by the barons. Some of the barons have seen our arrival as an opportunity to make a mighty friend for their own power grab. The king on the other hand has apparently been making speeches warning his subjects that they all need to put up a united front lest they all be swallowed up by the Empire.” +“Hmm. Sounds like this king isn’t an unintelligent fellow despite the fact that it’ll be a futile task to stop us even if he does manage to keep his kingdom united.” +“We haven’t made any major moves against the Broki yet since we’ve been still focusing on the Torites, then this wave of fatigue that’s been plaguing my command and that’s made things more difficult as well.” + +Just as you’re about to answer what the next move should be, a messenger who is panting heavily and ragged looking interrupts you. + +“(Gasp) Message…(pant) for the Emperor! Very (pant) important…” he says handing you a letter. +“Why are you out of so much breath, boy? Surely you rode a horse here?” Ackerson asks. +“Half way, (pant) horse died. Rode too hard (gasp) Ran rest of the way. Message from Sightmaster Warrick. (pant) Very important.” +“Shit, well I guess I better open it then. And someone get this boy some water before he collapses.” You say opening the letter. + +Emperor, + +As always I hate to be the bearer of troubling news, but it is best you know. + +While boarding the Storm, I took a little tour of the ship before it took flight. It is quite impressive and I’m sure it will be a mighty weapon in the service of the Empire when it has been inspected again. + +I say again, because unfortunately I found one of the crew was a saboteur. It was fairly subtle. He didn’t place a bomb on the ship, but instead had rigged the prototype repeater so that it would explode when used. The explosion would’ve caused much damage and most likely would’ve resulted in setting part of the ship aflame, which then would’ve caused an even bigger explosion by proxy and ultimately caused it to crash to the ground. + +I had a list of every member who was working under Elam and all of them save for this saboteur had been an Empire citizen from birth. This one apparently just showed up one day and proved he had engineering skills, so Elam hired him. I would’ve interrogated him, but he committed suicide by slitting his own throat with his dagger as soon as I had discovered the sabotage. Curious that he did not just simply try to quietly sneak off, but I can only assume he did not believe that he was going to get away with it since he was the main one who had last fired the prototype repeater during the weapon testing. Either that or he is working for an unforgiving master who would’ve killed him anyway for his failure. + +I’ve already questioned Elam and the rest of his staff, but I believe they genuinely didn’t know, though I wonder about Elam’s judgment skills. I highly recommend that he not screen any further employees he requires, at least not without an Eye present. + +I will return to my post as I now have wonder if there is some sort of conspiracy or possibly leaks in our security system. As much as I would’ve liked to have taken that ride to the western front and kill some Torites, the internal safety of the Empire comes first. I’m sure you would agree. + +Long Live the Empire, + +Sightmaster Warrick + +“Problems, Emperor?” Ackerson asks. +“As always, but Warrick’s got it under control for now. In the meantime we still need to solve your problem. I want your most skilled soldiers reporting to me tomorrow. Have you done a thorough check of that large nearby forest area? Don’t the goats prefer them over other terrain.” +“Somewhat, but its very vast my Emperor.” +“Well, I’m going to go over it again. Something is being missed. Maybe I should call in those new kobold commando units too. It’s possible the goats are hiding somewhere right underneath us and if there are, the kobolds can tunnel underground faster than any of us can and find out immediately.” + +While you’re taking charge of things, you tell Ackerson to go get some rest. You aren’t normally used to casting magic for beneficial reasons, quite frankly other than healing magic it wasn’t ever really part of your training. Still, you know enough to block out the affects of the Torite spell at least temporarily and it’s a welcome relief to your troops who manage to get well rested for once. + +You don’t waste time and begin your search of forest area immediately. It’s not an easy task and you’re attacked multiple times by satyrs along with their minotaur muscle. Your first encounter with them is exhilarating. It’s probably the first proper bit of personal combat you’ve had in years. + +The goats don’t put up that much of challenge for you, but the bulls, now there’s a suitable challenge. During your first encounter with Torite forces, a pair of the bovine monsters attack you with huge axes that a human would now doubt have to hold in one two hands, but for them the weapons are swung around easily with one. + +As you’re dodging their attacks and landing hits when you can, you can’t help but think the whole time that you hope you can at least tame some of these beasts somehow as they would make an excellent addition to your forces. + +Whether you eventually will or not doesn’t matter though, since these two in particular eventually fall to your blade after an extended battle. + +“Are you okay my Emperor?” one of your soldiers asks. +“Okay? Are you joking? I missed this shit. This is the best I’ve felt in a long time!” you exclaim. + +You spend another few days searching the forests and have a few more encounters with Torites, some of the groups even contain the goat wizards, but even with their elimination you don’t sense that the magic is gone. In fact the whole time you’re in the forest you get the feeling of being continually watched the entire time and you get the impression it isn’t just the average Torite lurking about. + +You aren’t the only one who feels that way. + +“There’s something out there…and it ain’t no man.” One of your soldiers says to you while you’re staring up at the trees. +“Of course it isn’t, it’s probably something fairly inhuman.” You respond. +“Well that too, but I meant literally that it’s female.” +“Oh, not this elven fairy tale shit again.” Another soldier remarks rolling his eyes. + +You probably didn’t notice due to the helmet and armor and the fact that you didn’t inspect every single soldier Ackerson sent with you, but the first soldier who addressed you isn’t actually human. He’s an elf. This is certainly a rarity since as far as you knew there weren’t any elves in the army or at least it isn’t a profession most of them choose. Assuming that they’re free of course. + +“Quiet. I want to hear this. What’s your name corporal?” you ask. +“Flevas, Emperor.” The elf answers. +“Surprised Ackerson didn’t point you out immediately, might’ve been nice to know I had someone with an affinity to forests and shit in my command.” +“The general…let’s just say doesn’t care for my kind very much and prefers to ignore my potential talents. I suppose even he couldn’t ignore my battle prowess though. So I was quietly slipped in. ” +“Okay, so what do you know?” +“Honestly? Probably nothing. I don’t even know why I spoke. After years of being in an army that barely tolerates my presence I don’t normally bother to speak at all.” +“Alright, alright, cut the oppressed elven routine, if you’ve got something important to say then just say it.” +“Very well Emperor.” Flevas remarks. + +“I can’t be certain and contrary to popular belief we sveld don’t have some magical all encompassing knowledge to nature. If we did, we most likely wouldn’t be in the current situation we are now. However, I suppose we do tend to have instinct and we do have lots of old stories. One of these stories is of dryads. They’re being that make their homes among the trees or within the trees. The stories aren’t really clear if they’re flesh and blood beings that tend to remain invisible or they’re some sort of spirit. Though from the stories they always appear in female form when they actually appear at all. They also never directly attack and rely on manipulating denizens of the forest and their magic. As I said I think there’s one in this forest, maybe even several. I don’t really know. What I do know is they do have access to magic that can affect the mind.” Flevas explains. +“And you didn’t think this was important enough to tell anyone until now?” +“As I said, my opinions are not highly regarded by the general or anyone else for that matter. I did mention it to him long before you arrived and it was dismissed as old elven nonsense.” +“Then the general is an idiot for dismissing the possibility given all the wonders in this world that have been seen and yet to be seen. But I’ll deal with that later, so in these stories how does one go about killing one of these dryads?” +“Killing? Heh, well in the sveld stories, dryads aren’t killed, they’re revered as protectors of nature. The only ones actively trying to kill them in stories are the svelk and as you might imagine they always fail in the stories.” +“Okay so how did the svelk try to kill them?” +“Oh usually by futilely attempting to destroy an entire forest. This can range from the predictable firestorm magic attempts to hilarious efforts of trying to cut down every tree.” +“Fire doesn’t work?” +“It works, but not fast enough. I mean even a fire takes time to destroy an entire normal forest assuming it doesn’t burn itself out. Dryads as you can imagine are a little more pro-active on saving their homes. Along with their magic, it would seem that the Torites are willing allies which would mean they’d probably help put out any fire we set. Assuming there are more in the forest.” +“Hrm, maybe the svelk in those stories just weren’t persistent enough.” You say. +“I dunno, svelk are pretty tenacious when it comes to killing.” + +Flevas has given you something to think about and it all involves destroying the forest. The fastest way would be to start building a few more catapults to fling flaming debris, and send for a few more mages to assist you in creating a larger firestorm. You have to believe that it would be more than enough to incinerate the forest within a matter of days. + +Of course the better way to ignite that forest is a way the svelk didn’t have, namely an airship that can drop firebombs from the sky. Of course given recent events, the Storm is going through yet another safety inspection then it has to get here, all of which is going to take time. Time which might cause the Torites to increase their defenses and who knows what else. +> Attack without the Storm +While Flevas has provided some useful intel, he’s still working off of stories. These dryads if they even are behind this, probably aren’t as powerful as the tales claim. And if they are, then it would be best to attack them as soon as possible without too much waiting around. + +“We’re going back to camp. We need to start constructing more catapults and I also need to send a message for more mage reinforcements, shouldn’t take more than a few days and then we can start burning out the Torites no matter what magic they hide behind. Still, you were very helpful Flevas, Ackerson shall be hearing of his idiocy of not seeing your full potential on this matter.” You say. +“Um, thank you Emperor.” Flevas says unsure of how to react. + +When you return, you give Ackerson an earful of his failure to use his resources wisely and not even informing you of the potential of certain soldiers who could come in useful. You also explain that the only reason why he isn’t being demoted is that he had the intelligence to at least see Flevas’ combat abilities and send him with you in the first place. + +You have the army start chopping down trees and constructing catapults while you await the arrival of the mage reinforcements. You attempt to shield the minds of the army as you did when you arrived, but it would seem you’ve definitely caught the attention of the dryads or satyr mages because it’s a little more taxing than it was last time. + +In a couple days the mages arrive and the bombarding of the forest with flaming rocks begins. You along with the help of the newly arrived mages begin casting a firestorm of the largest size. It takes a lot of energy and you can definitely feel resistance, but you break through it and soon a majority of the forest is in flames. + +You also order the army to wait around the outskirts of the forest as much as possible since there will no doubt be enemies running out of it in an effort to escape. So far the plan is going well, you just wish you weren’t so tired. + +As predicted forest creatures, but more importantly Torites eventually come running out of the forests, some manage to get away, others attempt to fight your army in an attempt to kill you and the other mages, but they naturally fail. However what isn’t predicted is the fact that the forest hasn’t completely burned down yet and it’s been more than a few days, in fact the flames have been extinguished completely in areas and somehow a few trees have completely regrown. + +Eventually some of the weaker mages collapse from exhaustion and even die completely drained of life. You attempt to redouble your efforts, but at this point the army is starting to feel the effects of unrest again and you are as well despite the mind shield. + +“Emperor, I don’t think the men can’t take much more of this. I think maybe we should…” Ackerson remarks. +“Don’t even make that suggestion Ackerson. We are NOT going to be beaten by some fairy magic. (Sigh) Just need to rethink this a moment…damn it my head…” you say to yourself while rubbing your temples. It’s getting harder to concentrate with all the energy you’ve expended and the short naps you’ve taken don’t seem to do any good at all. + +You see Flevas nearby, though he’s wise enough not to say anything. He’d probably like to say, “I told you so.” but values his life more. To be honest you might not blame him if he had the courage to do so since you basically ignored him just like Ackerson did. A mistake on your part and one you’re going to correct. + +“Alright fine. I didn’t want to use it so soon after the sabotage attempt, but I’m guessing Elam’s probably got the Storm straightened out by now. Have a message sent to his factory to have it sent with as many firebombs as it can carry. Fix these fucking forest fairies for good.” + +You know its going to take some time for the Storm to arrive so in the meantime you tell your people to just keep up the bombarding. You know everyone’s tired, but its necessary that this attack keeps going, you can’t afford to let up. + +Can’t afford to let up… + +“Shit…I’m going to my tent. I need to try to get some rest before attempting another firestorm again.” You say and stagger to your tent and lie down. + +It’s odd, but you actually feel sleepy. Before you felt tired but not actually sleepy (much like most of the troops here) maybe your attack is weakening the dryad’s magic. In any case you’re taking advantage of the situation and getting some much needed sleep. + +You drift off… + +“My love, wake up it’s time.” You hear a voice say. + +You wake up and find yourself in a lush green field. Nearby you see Alison though she’s dressed in civilian clothing. In fact so are you. + +“What the hell’s going on? I feel weird.” You say. +“You fell asleep shortly after our picnic, you looked so peaceful I didn’t want to wake you up, but it’s time, we have to go.” +“Go? Go where?” +“We have to attend the Emperor’s celebration silly! Everyone’s going remember?” +“Oh right. Yeah, I suppose he’d certainly want us to be there to provide security.” +“Security? Oh you must be having one of those dreams again! You certainly have a vivid imagination! While I’m sure the Emperor would be honored to have you as a bodyguard, I’m sure he’s just as glad to have you tilling the fields, now come on we have to go before the festivities begin!” + +Alison at this point takes your hand and you get up. You still don’t understand exactly what is going on, but something about Alison’s smile and the warmth of her hand makes you feel so at ease. + +“I…I thought you were dead…” you say and suddenly hug her. She hugs you back. +“That was a dream and it’s okay now I assure you. I’m here and you’re here and we’re both very much alive and living safely in the glory of the Empire. Could anything be better?” Alison says. +“No, of course not….I still feel weird though.” +“Well sounds like you had a nightmare. I’m not surprised you’re still disoriented. Come on, you can tell me all about it on our way to the celebration.” + +Something about this entire situation seems off to you, but it feels right somehow. You don’t question what’s going on any further and happily kiss Alison before walking off to the Emperor’s celebration with her hand in hand. + +Then the vision fades and everything goes dark… + +You never wake up from your slumber. + +Finding you dead with a faint smile on your face, Ackerson comes to the correct conclusion that the dryads must’ve somehow killed you in your sleep. Considering you aren’t the only one in the army to die in such a manner within the last twenty-four hours he orders a full retreat from the area.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You figure Warrick deserves something for all his hard work and loyalty, besides you’re still a little hesitant to go flying off into the sky. + +“Warrick, I also saw Elam a few days ago too. He told me that by the end of this week, it should be ready for flight as well as combat. Originally I was going to take the first official flight on it, but would you like to do the honors?” you ask. + +Warrick looks like he can’t believe his ears. + +“Are you serious?” +“Completely. I know you’re probably bored at times doing this job, trust me I sympathize. The day-to-day task of ruling isn’t exactly as exciting as being hip deep in the corpses of your enemies. So I’m giving you this chance to be on the frontlines for a while. I mean I assume you’ve got someone here that can take over for you while you’re gone for a little while right?” +“Sure! I’m got more than few very qualified Eyes that can do the job.” Warrick says. +“Okay, well it’s settled, you’ll report to Elam’s factory in Arat in about four days. Just tell him I sent you, I’m sure there won’t be any problems.” +“Thank you for this opportunity and this position Emperor. I won’t let it go to waste. Oh, what’s the name of this new vessel?” +“Name? Actually I don’t think it has been named yet. Or at least Elam didn’t give it one. Hrm…call it the Storm. I mean you’ll be floating through the sky raining death down upon your enemies in a spectacular fashion. Plus you’re an Eye. I mean Eye of the Storm. Play on words, I dunno, sounds clever to me.” +“Heh, sounds good to me too.” Warrick agrees. + +With Warrick obviously in better spirits, you leave the Eye headquarter and make your own preparations for heading out to the western front. You might not be riding on an airship to do it, but you’ll still be engaging in battle in some capacity. + +In a couple days you meet up with Ackerson’s company in one of the small towns that has recently been converted into army encampment. The new Empire “citizens” don’t look very happy about their recent occupation and change to their way of life, but they don’t have much choice in the matter and in time they’ll either get used to it, or they won’t and will have to be put down. No matter to you either way. + +General Ackerson himself looks very tired. Like he hasn’t been sleeping for days. In fact many of the soldiers have a weary looking appearance. While this is somewhat expected with long drawn out conflicts, you can’t imagine that they’ve had so much trouble that would cause them this much stress. Decena’s command has had more conflict activity, but she hasn’t given any reports of problems. (Though it’s possible that she’s not reporting such things, but given her idolization, you doubt if she’d lie, and even if she wasn’t telling, you’re pretty sure Galen would send you a complaining letter of sub standard conditions.) + +“What the hell is wrong with this camp Ackerson? Every man and woman here looks like they’re hung over due to partying for weeks on end, or they’ve been under going months of a siege. I don’t see any castles around here, so it better not be the former.” you demand. +“I…I don’t know my Emperor. Everything was fine until recently. I mean as fine as it could be with groups of sneaking beast people attempting to bushwhack our patrols every so often. Now it’s like most of us can’t get a restful sleep and a lot of us are just never fully awake anymore. Just a tired feeling even if we haven’t been doing much during a particular day. Some have even reported odd or bad dreams.” + +While you can’t be certain of what would cause such a thing, you feel you’re pretty safe in assuming one possibility. + +“Sounds like magic. Or some form of it. Why haven’t you had your mages check it out?” you ask. +“I would have, but they’re all dead my Emperor. If it isn’t the blasted centaurs with their deadly accuracy, it’s the damn satyrs with their own wild magic. It’s like they target our mages even if they lose more than half of their own numbers in the process.” +“That can’t be a coincidence. Seems like it’s the goat wizards doing this to your command. Better double your efforts and hunt them all down within the vicinity.” +“Well, I have since I thought that might be the case, but I don’t think it’s the Torites doing this. Their mages seem to focus on earth based or elemental magic, nothing to do with the mind or similar witchery. I think they’d be more likely to summon a tornado at us, which thankfully they haven’t done yet.” Ackerson explains. +“Perhaps, this is just a taste of their what their mages can also do, still if you don’t believe its them, who else? The people here don’t look happy about the Empire taking charge of this place. You sure there isn’t a hidden mage here?” +“No, don’t think so. The people of this town have also complained about feeling tired also. In fact that’s probably why they’re pissed at us. To them, we brought this curse as they call it to their town.” +“Okay, what about that new kingdom you said you made contact with? What’s the name of it?” +“Oh them. The Broki Kingdom. I’m not even sure they have any mages. The whole place is backwards. Its chaotic nature reminds me of Rask before the Empire enforced order to it. It’s barely even a kingdom and certainly not like the one the Felkans had. A single king runs the kingdom this is true, but he’s not a strong one. The only reason why he hasn’t been overthrown is because the rest of the barons are all too busy scheming against each other.” +“That sounds like a rather inefficient way to run a government.” You say. +“From what I can tell it is. Practically nothing gets accomplished other than minor civil wars over land by the barons. Some of the barons have seen our arrival as an opportunity to make a mighty friend for their own power grab. The king on the other hand has apparently been making speeches warning his subjects that they all need to put up a united front lest they all be swallowed up by the Empire.” +“Hmm. Sounds like this king isn’t an unintelligent fellow despite the fact that it’ll be a futile task to stop us even if he does manage to keep his kingdom united.” +“We haven’t made any major moves against the Broki yet since we’ve been still focusing on the Torites, then this wave of fatigue that’s been plaguing my command and that’s made things more difficult as well.” + +Just as you’re about to answer what the next move should be, a messenger who is panting heavily and ragged looking interrupts you. + +“(Gasp) Message…(pant) for the Emperor! Very (pant) important…” he says handing you a letter. +“Why are you out of so much breath, boy? Surely you rode a horse here?” Ackerson asks. +“Half way, (pant) horse died. Rode too hard (gasp) Ran rest of the way. Message from Sightmaster Warrick. (pant) Very important.” +“Shit, well I guess I better open it then. And someone get this boy some water before he collapses.” You say opening the letter. + +Emperor, + +As always I hate to be the bearer of troubling news, but it is best you know. + +While boarding the Storm, I took a little tour of the ship before it took flight. It is quite impressive and I’m sure it will be a mighty weapon in the service of the Empire when it has been inspected again. + +I say again, because unfortunately I found one of the crew was a saboteur. It was fairly subtle. He didn’t place a bomb on the ship, but instead had rigged the prototype repeater so that it would explode when used. The explosion would’ve caused much damage and most likely would’ve resulted in setting part of the ship aflame, which then would’ve caused an even bigger explosion by proxy and ultimately caused it to crash to the ground. + +I had a list of every member who was working under Elam and all of them save for this saboteur had been an Empire citizen from birth. This one apparently just showed up one day and proved he had engineering skills, so Elam hired him. I would’ve interrogated him, but he committed suicide by slitting his own throat with his dagger as soon as I had discovered the sabotage. Curious that he did not just simply try to quietly sneak off, but I can only assume he did not believe that he was going to get away with it since he was the main one who had last fired the prototype repeater during the weapon testing. Either that or he is working for an unforgiving master who would’ve killed him anyway for his failure. + +I’ve already questioned Elam and the rest of his staff, but I believe they genuinely didn’t know, though I wonder about Elam’s judgment skills. I highly recommend that he not screen any further employees he requires, at least not without an Eye present. + +I will return to my post as I now have wonder if there is some sort of conspiracy or possibly leaks in our security system. As much as I would’ve liked to have taken that ride to the western front and kill some Torites, the internal safety of the Empire comes first. I’m sure you would agree. + +Long Live the Empire, + +Sightmaster Warrick + +“Problems, Emperor?” Ackerson asks. +“As always, but Warrick’s got it under control for now. In the meantime we still need to solve your problem. I want your most skilled soldiers reporting to me tomorrow. Have you done a thorough check of that large nearby forest area? Don’t the goats prefer them over other terrain.” +“Somewhat, but its very vast my Emperor.” +“Well, I’m going to go over it again. Something is being missed. Maybe I should call in those new kobold commando units too. It’s possible the goats are hiding somewhere right underneath us and if there are, the kobolds can tunnel underground faster than any of us can and find out immediately.” + +While you’re taking charge of things, you tell Ackerson to go get some rest. You aren’t normally used to casting magic for beneficial reasons, quite frankly other than healing magic it wasn’t ever really part of your training. Still, you know enough to block out the affects of the Torite spell at least temporarily and it’s a welcome relief to your troops who manage to get well rested for once. + +You don’t waste time and begin your search of forest area immediately. It’s not an easy task and you’re attacked multiple times by satyrs along with their minotaur muscle. Your first encounter with them is exhilarating. It’s probably the first proper bit of personal combat you’ve had in years. + +The goats don’t put up that much of challenge for you, but the bulls, now there’s a suitable challenge. During your first encounter with Torite forces, a pair of the bovine monsters attack you with huge axes that a human would now doubt have to hold in one two hands, but for them the weapons are swung around easily with one. + +As you’re dodging their attacks and landing hits when you can, you can’t help but think the whole time that you hope you can at least tame some of these beasts somehow as they would make an excellent addition to your forces. + +Whether you eventually will or not doesn’t matter though, since these two in particular eventually fall to your blade after an extended battle. + +“Are you okay my Emperor?” one of your soldiers asks. +“Okay? Are you joking? I missed this shit. This is the best I’ve felt in a long time!” you exclaim. + +You spend another few days searching the forests and have a few more encounters with Torites, some of the groups even contain the goat wizards, but even with their elimination you don’t sense that the magic is gone. In fact the whole time you’re in the forest you get the feeling of being continually watched the entire time and you get the impression it isn’t just the average Torite lurking about. + +You aren’t the only one who feels that way. + +“There’s something out there…and it ain’t no man.” One of your soldiers says to you while you’re staring up at the trees. +“Of course it isn’t, it’s probably something fairly inhuman.” You respond. +“Well that too, but I meant literally that it’s female.” +“Oh, not this elven fairy tale shit again.” Another soldier remarks rolling his eyes. + +You probably didn’t notice due to the helmet and armor and the fact that you didn’t inspect every single soldier Ackerson sent with you, but the first soldier who addressed you isn’t actually human. He’s an elf. This is certainly a rarity since as far as you knew there weren’t any elves in the army or at least it isn’t a profession most of them choose. Assuming that they’re free of course. + +“Quiet. I want to hear this. What’s your name corporal?” you ask. +“Flevas, Emperor.” The elf answers. +“Surprised Ackerson didn’t point you out immediately, might’ve been nice to know I had someone with an affinity to forests and shit in my command.” +“The general…let’s just say doesn’t care for my kind very much and prefers to ignore my potential talents. I suppose even he couldn’t ignore my battle prowess though. So I was quietly slipped in. ” +“Okay, so what do you know?” +“Honestly? Probably nothing. I don’t even know why I spoke. After years of being in an army that barely tolerates my presence I don’t normally bother to speak at all.” +“Alright, alright, cut the oppressed elven routine, if you’ve got something important to say then just say it.” +“Very well Emperor.” Flevas remarks. + +“I can’t be certain and contrary to popular belief we sveld don’t have some magical all encompassing knowledge to nature. If we did, we most likely wouldn’t be in the current situation we are now. However, I suppose we do tend to have instinct and we do have lots of old stories. One of these stories is of dryads. They’re being that make their homes among the trees or within the trees. The stories aren’t really clear if they’re flesh and blood beings that tend to remain invisible or they’re some sort of spirit. Though from the stories they always appear in female form when they actually appear at all. They also never directly attack and rely on manipulating denizens of the forest and their magic. As I said I think there’s one in this forest, maybe even several. I don’t really know. What I do know is they do have access to magic that can affect the mind.” Flevas explains. +“And you didn’t think this was important enough to tell anyone until now?” +“As I said, my opinions are not highly regarded by the general or anyone else for that matter. I did mention it to him long before you arrived and it was dismissed as old elven nonsense.” +“Then the general is an idiot for dismissing the possibility given all the wonders in this world that have been seen and yet to be seen. But I’ll deal with that later, so in these stories how does one go about killing one of these dryads?” +“Killing? Heh, well in the sveld stories, dryads aren’t killed, they’re revered as protectors of nature. The only ones actively trying to kill them in stories are the svelk and as you might imagine they always fail in the stories.” +“Okay so how did the svelk try to kill them?” +“Oh usually by futilely attempting to destroy an entire forest. This can range from the predictable firestorm magic attempts to hilarious efforts of trying to cut down every tree.” +“Fire doesn’t work?” +“It works, but not fast enough. I mean even a fire takes time to destroy an entire normal forest assuming it doesn’t burn itself out. Dryads as you can imagine are a little more pro-active on saving their homes. Along with their magic, it would seem that the Torites are willing allies which would mean they’d probably help put out any fire we set. Assuming there are more in the forest.” +“Hrm, maybe the svelk in those stories just weren’t persistent enough.” You say. +“I dunno, svelk are pretty tenacious when it comes to killing.” + +Flevas has given you something to think about and it all involves destroying the forest. The fastest way would be to start building a few more catapults to fling flaming debris, and send for a few more mages to assist you in creating a larger firestorm. You have to believe that it would be more than enough to incinerate the forest within a matter of days. + +Of course the better way to ignite that forest is a way the svelk didn’t have, namely an airship that can drop firebombs from the sky. Of course given recent events, the Storm is going through yet another safety inspection then it has to get here, all of which is going to take time. Time which might cause the Torites to increase their defenses and who knows what else. +> Attack with the Storm +Whatever defenses the Torites are going to muster within the time you come back with the Storm as far as you’re concerned aren’t going to be enough to save them. Better you should come back prepared and your soliders better rested as well. + +“I think it’s time to leave. In fact I think it’ll be best if the entire army moves away from this area.” You say. +“We’re retreating?” Flevas asks. +“Call it a tactical withdraw. I’m not done with this place though. Not done with you either, your input on this was very useful.” +“Um, thank you Emperor.” Flevas says unsure of how to take the fact that he’s called attention to himself to the ruler of the Empire. + +When you return, you give Ackerson an earful of his failure to use his resources wisely and not even informing you of the potential of certain soldiers who could come in useful. You also explain that the only reason why he isn’t being demoted is that he had the intelligence to at least see Flevas’ combat abilities and send him with you in the first place. + +You have the army relocate to one of the towns closer to the Empire for resupplying and reinforcements. There is a bit of downtime, but there is also some routine patrolling which allows you to engage in battle against a group of those centaur creatures. Tedious foes. Constantly galloping away while firing their arrows. You appreciated the bull creatures’ attempts at caving your skull in with their axes a lot more. + +Eventually you get the message you’ve been waiting for and that’s when you make your way back to the vicinity of the forest. When you arrive, you and the back up mages begin to prepare for your assault on the entire forest. + +You call Flevas over, who you see nearby. + +“So what do you think to this plan? Be honest.” +“Well Emperor, as I said the svelk in the stories attempted something like this as well and while I know that you certainly have powerful magic at your command, I’m not certain that the rest of your mages having your same abilities.” +“I see. So you don’t believe Empire mages are up to the challenge of setting one measly forest on fire and completely burning it to the ground.” +“I didn’t say that…” +“Oh, well you must’ve also implied that even if our mages fail that I would not have the capacity to pick up their slack.” +“I definitely did not mean…” + +You start laughing. + +“Relax elf, I’m fucking with you. Beside this isn’t the entire plan, the rest of it is over there in the near distance.” You say and point over at the airship slowing making its way towards your position. Most of the army is looking in that direction too. + +“I heard the rumors, but is that the ship that can fly?” Flevas asks. +“That is indeed the Empire’s new pride in the skies. The Storm. And that’s exactly what it’s going to do over that forest. Those dryads might be expecting us to attempt a magic firestorm, but I guarantee they’re not going to be expecting one that involves a lot of explosions.” + +The Storm is indeed an impressive sight and you can imagine how it will terrify your future enemies. For right now though, you’re content on it just killing them. + +Along with the airship and your magic, you also have a row of catapults continually barrage the forest with flaming material. You and the army periodically move and keep on the outskirts of forest while the Storm works its assault within the center of the forest. Between the two, the decimation of the forest is certain even if it does take a few days. + +Forest creatures, but more importantly Torites eventually come running out of the forests, some manage to get away, others attempt to fight your army in an attempt to kill you and the other mages, but they naturally fail. + +You actually do lose a few of the weaker mages who can’t keep up their energy and collapse completely drained of life. Hardly matters since you accomplish your task with vicious efficiency. Eventually the forest goes from being an inferno to a blacked wasteland with only burnt tree husks and stumps left. Whatever is still alive, is going to be easy to find. + +You order a search and participate in it yourself, as you are eager to see if there might be some sort of evidence of this mysterious dryad or dryads. It might be that you just burned down an entire forest for no reason, but then it is one less area for the Torites to hide in. + +You do sense a faint bit of magic though. Very weak, but there none the less. You immediately follow the trail until it leads you to your goal. + +And there you see a naked, heavily burned female creature. Its limbs are slightly longer and thinner than even the average elf. It has a very delicate appearance and might even be considered pretty looking if it wasn’t covered in burns and struggling for life. + +It pathetically lays on the ground semi-curled up near a stump that is nearly completely burnt. It looks at you with its big eyes and then over nearby at some other bodies you didn’t even notice. They look like more dryads though, all dead. + +The dryad shakes and clutches tighter to the stump as you approach. It even begins making a few sounds, which causes you to immediately raise a force shield, expecting some sort of last attack. + +“She isn’t casting a spell Emperor. She’s whispering some sort of prayer. I think.” Flevas remarks. +“About what and how do you know what she’s saying?” +“I…don’t know! It’s like she’s in my head all of a sudden and I can understand some of her language. Something about…back to earth…child of nature…unnatural force of death…she’s very sad.” +“I would imagine so.” You reply. +“Yeah, but it’s not for herself, it’s for me.” Flevas says. + +Flevas at this point walks past you and over to the dying dryad. She looks up at him sorrowfully and stops whatever it was that she speaking about. He kneels down beside her and for a brief moment he looks at her sadly as well, but then his face then turns to one of anger and he ends her suffering with a knife to her neck. She gurgles a bit and then dies. + +“Another victory for the Empire.” Flevas says and walks past you. + +You stare at the dead dryad for a moment and survey the surrounding desolation. + +“Well, I guess we know they’re flesh and blood creatures now.” You remark and tell the rest of nearby soldiers to start heading back to the camp. + +When you get back, General Ackerson tells you that they’re holding a courier from the Broki Kingdom. The courier works for one of the opportunistic barons. Baron Divilak + +Apparently this Baron Divilak has heard much about the Empire and sees no reason to resist your inevitable annexation. He claims that he can make things simpler for you by giving out information of major strong points, security secrets, that sort of thing as well as providing his own military support. Of course he wants to meet in person before all this so that you may hammer out any other stipulations and agreements, but basically what he asks in return is to govern over the new Empire province and that he get to execute King Tiklov himself. + +It certainly would be easier with inside help and you were originally toying with the idea of taking advantage of the disorganized nature of the Broki Kingdom by having one or two of the barons side with you in the first place. Of course you never know with those scheming types after all if they’re willing to sell out everything for their own personal gain now, what’s stopping them from doing something similar to the Empire in the future? At the very least, the amount of corruption might tend to be higher than what is acceptable. + +With the recent display of power by the Storm, you’re wondering if you shouldn’t just make a gross display of force and cow them all into submission and dispense with any pretense of a “friendly” take over. Of course the problem with this plan, is you might actually unite the kingdom due to your brutality and it might take longer to conquer the place. +> Deal with the baron +The whole point of conquest is to not completely destroy the land you’re attempting to take over. Why decimate perfectly good territory when a better way presents itself? Besides its probably best to use a weapon like the Storm sparingly. The threat of it should be enough. + +“Tell your baron that I’ll meet him, but it’s going to have be at some sort of neutral ground and I’m not coming by myself. If he thinks I’m going to go walking into his land by myself he better just forget this meeting entirely and prepare his armies.” You tell the courier. +“Ah, yes I believe the Baron did expect that you’d say something like that, so he is fully prepared to make arrangements to meet you halfway at an abandoned inn by a crossroads a few miles south from here rather than having to go to him.” The courier replies. +“Hrm. Sounds like he really wants my help. Fine, but if I see an army marching with him, well you can guess what’s going to happen.” +“Oh no, that won’t happen mighty Emperor. He might arrive with some personal servants, but nothing more than that I assure you.” +“He better not. Alright then, off with you.” You say and wave away the courier who bows and takes his leave. + +With the courier gone you turn back to Ackerson. + +“I want you and the rest of the army to stay here until I get back. The troops could probably use the rest after this whole ordeal with the dryads. Obviously if I don’t get back within a day then I want you to annihilate the Broki Kingdom.” You say. +“My Emperor, aren’t you going to take some people with you? Surely you’ll want back up just in case.” +“Well of course, that’s why Flevas is going with me.” +“While I now see the error of not recognizing his potential sooner, I must insist that you take a few more. Not all the troops are so tired that they can’t help their Emperor!” +“Well I can honestly say I’m not particularly worried about anything this baron can throw at me even if it is a trap, I suppose it never hurts to have more people. Fine then, pick out ten for me and I’ll get going.” + +After the ten are picked, you all make your way south. Really you’re sort of wondering where the hell a road is even located, because all you’ve seen is mostly wilderness and long untamed grassy fields. Eventually though Flevas’ tracking skills come in handy and he locates the very faint remnants of one. + +The “road” hasn’t been upkept in years, probably decades. Only portions of stone in a semi straight line are evidence that one even existed. Still, it at least proves you’re going in the right direction and eventually a dilapidated building stands before you in the distance. + +“Must be the inn. Don’t see any signs of the baron or an army yet.” You say. +“Maybe they’re inside.” Flevas says. +“Well maybe the baron is, but I doubt if even he could fit an army in there.” +“Maybe not an army, but it only takes a few assassins to kill a man.” +“Glad to see you’re so suspicious Flevas, were you volunteering to scout out the place first?” +“If that is what you wish Emperor.” +“If you’re going to scout it out then don’t go alone, take some people with you….sheesh I sound like Ackerson.” + +Flevas and three of your other troops ride away towards the inn and you wait. Twenty minutes pass and you see one of your soldiers riding back towards you. + +“Well?” +“He’s dead my Emperor.” +“What?! Who?!” +“The baron. I mean at least we think its him, never having seen him before and all. He’s dressed pretty fancy. Doesn’t look like anyone else is around, but whether it’s the baron or not there’s still a dead man in there. Flevas is still doing some checking, he said he’d prefer it if you were there to see this for yourself.” +“(Sigh) Why can’t anything be simple? I knew I should’ve just used the Storm…” you say exasperated as you all ride off towards the inn. + +When you arrive you enter the inn and see your other two soldiers and on the floor you don’t see the baron or an unknown dead man, what you see is Flevas and before you can react, you feel a couple crossbow bolts hit you in the face. One just below one of your eyes and another into your cheek. A couple more hit you in your right arm and leg. You crumple to the floor on one knee groaning in pain. + +“SHIT, I missed his brain! Somebody get him quick before he starts casting magic!” you hear a voice say and several people tackle you forward to the ground. You attempt to get up, but several people are putting their entire weight on your back making it impossible. You attempt to cast a spell, but someone quickly gets the bright idea to repeatedly stomp on one of your hands with their foot while someone else just chops off the other one with an axe blow. + +“Hey asshole! You nearly hit me!” a soldier shouts. +“Fuck…ing traitors, I’ll kill all…” you start to utter and then a boot kicks you in the face sinking the bolt under your eye deeper. You begin to feel disoriented and unable to see properly. + +“Stop playing with the fool, just kill him! Like this!” you hear a familiar voice shout. + +Is that Eldolith? + +You’ll never know for sure as a well-placed bolt pierces your skull.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Whatever defenses the Torites are going to muster within the time you come back with the Storm as far as you’re concerned aren’t going to be enough to save them. Better you should come back prepared and your soliders better rested as well. + +“I think it’s time to leave. In fact I think it’ll be best if the entire army moves away from this area.” You say. +“We’re retreating?” Flevas asks. +“Call it a tactical withdraw. I’m not done with this place though. Not done with you either, your input on this was very useful.” +“Um, thank you Emperor.” Flevas says unsure of how to take the fact that he’s called attention to himself to the ruler of the Empire. + +When you return, you give Ackerson an earful of his failure to use his resources wisely and not even informing you of the potential of certain soldiers who could come in useful. You also explain that the only reason why he isn’t being demoted is that he had the intelligence to at least see Flevas’ combat abilities and send him with you in the first place. + +You have the army relocate to one of the towns closer to the Empire for resupplying and reinforcements. There is a bit of downtime, but there is also some routine patrolling which allows you to engage in battle against a group of those centaur creatures. Tedious foes. Constantly galloping away while firing their arrows. You appreciated the bull creatures’ attempts at caving your skull in with their axes a lot more. + +Eventually you get the message you’ve been waiting for and that’s when you make your way back to the vicinity of the forest. When you arrive, you and the back up mages begin to prepare for your assault on the entire forest. + +You call Flevas over, who you see nearby. + +“So what do you think to this plan? Be honest.” +“Well Emperor, as I said the svelk in the stories attempted something like this as well and while I know that you certainly have powerful magic at your command, I’m not certain that the rest of your mages having your same abilities.” +“I see. So you don’t believe Empire mages are up to the challenge of setting one measly forest on fire and completely burning it to the ground.” +“I didn’t say that…” +“Oh, well you must’ve also implied that even if our mages fail that I would not have the capacity to pick up their slack.” +“I definitely did not mean…” + +You start laughing. + +“Relax elf, I’m fucking with you. Beside this isn’t the entire plan, the rest of it is over there in the near distance.” You say and point over at the airship slowing making its way towards your position. Most of the army is looking in that direction too. + +“I heard the rumors, but is that the ship that can fly?” Flevas asks. +“That is indeed the Empire’s new pride in the skies. The Storm. And that’s exactly what it’s going to do over that forest. Those dryads might be expecting us to attempt a magic firestorm, but I guarantee they’re not going to be expecting one that involves a lot of explosions.” + +The Storm is indeed an impressive sight and you can imagine how it will terrify your future enemies. For right now though, you’re content on it just killing them. + +Along with the airship and your magic, you also have a row of catapults continually barrage the forest with flaming material. You and the army periodically move and keep on the outskirts of forest while the Storm works its assault within the center of the forest. Between the two, the decimation of the forest is certain even if it does take a few days. + +Forest creatures, but more importantly Torites eventually come running out of the forests, some manage to get away, others attempt to fight your army in an attempt to kill you and the other mages, but they naturally fail. + +You actually do lose a few of the weaker mages who can’t keep up their energy and collapse completely drained of life. Hardly matters since you accomplish your task with vicious efficiency. Eventually the forest goes from being an inferno to a blacked wasteland with only burnt tree husks and stumps left. Whatever is still alive, is going to be easy to find. + +You order a search and participate in it yourself, as you are eager to see if there might be some sort of evidence of this mysterious dryad or dryads. It might be that you just burned down an entire forest for no reason, but then it is one less area for the Torites to hide in. + +You do sense a faint bit of magic though. Very weak, but there none the less. You immediately follow the trail until it leads you to your goal. + +And there you see a naked, heavily burned female creature. Its limbs are slightly longer and thinner than even the average elf. It has a very delicate appearance and might even be considered pretty looking if it wasn’t covered in burns and struggling for life. + +It pathetically lays on the ground semi-curled up near a stump that is nearly completely burnt. It looks at you with its big eyes and then over nearby at some other bodies you didn’t even notice. They look like more dryads though, all dead. + +The dryad shakes and clutches tighter to the stump as you approach. It even begins making a few sounds, which causes you to immediately raise a force shield, expecting some sort of last attack. + +“She isn’t casting a spell Emperor. She’s whispering some sort of prayer. I think.” Flevas remarks. +“About what and how do you know what she’s saying?” +“I…don’t know! It’s like she’s in my head all of a sudden and I can understand some of her language. Something about…back to earth…child of nature…unnatural force of death…she’s very sad.” +“I would imagine so.” You reply. +“Yeah, but it’s not for herself, it’s for me.” Flevas says. + +Flevas at this point walks past you and over to the dying dryad. She looks up at him sorrowfully and stops whatever it was that she speaking about. He kneels down beside her and for a brief moment he looks at her sadly as well, but then his face then turns to one of anger and he ends her suffering with a knife to her neck. She gurgles a bit and then dies. + +“Another victory for the Empire.” Flevas says and walks past you. + +You stare at the dead dryad for a moment and survey the surrounding desolation. + +“Well, I guess we know they’re flesh and blood creatures now.” You remark and tell the rest of nearby soldiers to start heading back to the camp. + +When you get back, General Ackerson tells you that they’re holding a courier from the Broki Kingdom. The courier works for one of the opportunistic barons. Baron Divilak + +Apparently this Baron Divilak has heard much about the Empire and sees no reason to resist your inevitable annexation. He claims that he can make things simpler for you by giving out information of major strong points, security secrets, that sort of thing as well as providing his own military support. Of course he wants to meet in person before all this so that you may hammer out any other stipulations and agreements, but basically what he asks in return is to govern over the new Empire province and that he get to execute King Tiklov himself. + +It certainly would be easier with inside help and you were originally toying with the idea of taking advantage of the disorganized nature of the Broki Kingdom by having one or two of the barons side with you in the first place. Of course you never know with those scheming types after all if they’re willing to sell out everything for their own personal gain now, what’s stopping them from doing something similar to the Empire in the future? At the very least, the amount of corruption might tend to be higher than what is acceptable. + +With the recent display of power by the Storm, you’re wondering if you shouldn’t just make a gross display of force and cow them all into submission and dispense with any pretense of a “friendly” take over. Of course the problem with this plan, is you might actually unite the kingdom due to your brutality and it might take longer to conquer the place. +> Use the Storm +Negotiating has never been what the Empire has been about. You go in; you crush your enemies under heel and then sort out the details later. + +Without another word, you draw your sword and sever the head of the hapless courier. Blood splatters on the onlookers nearby as the head bounces once on the ground near your feet. You give it a small kick towards one of the soldiers. + +“Have that courier’s head sent back to the baron in a bag. That will be our answer to his proposals. Well actually the Storm will be the real answer, but for now his courier’s head will do.” You remark. +“Oh. The flying machine? Won’t that need time to resupply from bombing the dryad forest?” Ackerson asks. +“Yes, but it’ll be fine. Let them wait and sweat it out. When he receives his messenger’s head I’m sure he’ll mobilize all his little soldiers, ready for an attack. Won’t do him any good though when the Storm is laying waste to his castle. Then the rest of us will come in and clean up. After we’ve annihilated nearly everything within the baron’s territory, THEN we will give our own demands to the remainder of the Broki Kingdom. In the meantime, tell everyone to keep alert as usual and enjoy this little respite in what is going to be the shortest conflict of this western campaign.” + +You retire to your tent where you go through a couple of more traditional letters you’ve received since you were away destroying the dryads. Two of them are from Decena. One talks about how she’s confirmed the rumors of the winged Torites or harpies as they’re known. She explains that they’re even more tedious foe than the centaurs due to their flight ability. The standard practice is to fill the skies with arrows and bullets whenever possible. Galen has been pulling his weight, but as you’ve come to expect the Torites have been systematically targeting mages, he’s barely escaped death several times and is one of the few wizards Decena has left. Fortunately she doesn’t report anything close to the dryad activity Ackerson experienced, but you’ll have to send her a message back warning her about them. + +Her second letter is something you’re hesitant to open, since you know it’s going to be of a more personal nature. You sort of thought that maybe her time away from you and her apparent enjoyment of battle would slowly erode her feelings for you, but that hasn’t happened. + +In any case, you put aside the letter for later and turn your attention to another letter which is from Warrick giving you an update on his findings. He mentions that he’s uncovered nothing that would suggest an internal conspiracy yet, but just says that the elven population has been complaining more than usual as of late. So far there is no evidence that they’re planning anything from the ones he’s brought in, but that doesn’t mean that they aren’t. +This gets you wondering about something that occurred earlier and you have Felvas brought to you. + +“So…that was quite the show back there with the dryads.” You say. +“I’m afraid I don’t quite understand sir.” Flevas answers. +“Oh come on. You don’t need to hide it. You were upset to see dryads get killed. Hell, you probably were upset to see the forest burn to the ground.” +“It was necessary.” +“Of course it was necessary, but the point is you REALLY didn’t like it. Not only did you not like it, you were personally offended. Why something like could cause a man to habor ill feelings that fester underneath the skin and come out in ill advised ways.” + +Flevas is silent as you study his reaction to what you’re implying. + +“Emperor, I am not a traitor to Empire. I would never…” +“Yes, yes, yes, I know. You would never betray an Empire that oppresses your people…well if your people’s complaints are anything to go by.” +“But I finished off the dryad without your orders!” +“So? You’ve probably done a lot of things you don’t like doing. Hell, it was a mercy kill anyway. One might even think that you did it just for my benefit. Believing that you were the good loyal elf. Tell me, is that what your people are doing? Are they emulating the shadows and just biding their time?” +“What?! I don’t know! I mean no! Emperor, I…” +“Silence!” you shout and backhand Flevas to the face causing him to stagger. + +“Now then, you’ve got two options. One is bad, and one is to start telling me the truth.” + +Flevas rubs his face and then composes himself. He doesn’t display anger like he did with the dryad, but he does do that elf thing with his eyes, like they’re looking right through you and that you’re nothing at all. Semra was really good at it. + +“So what do you want me to say? Yes! I HATE the fucking Empire! Yes! I HATE every fucking human I have to work with and put up with their shit! I HATE the fact that my people are the lowest rung of society even though that includes fucking kobolds now! FUCKING KOBOLDS!” +“Kobolds are very loyal and eager to serve.” You respond. +“And they’re damn idiots! So are the brainless orcs and look at what you did to them! They’re nearly extinct because you have them soak up all the major fighting during the Felkan War!” +“They enjoyed the fighting. Besides, they’re building up their numbers now.” +“Yeah, so you can use them in the next big ass war! Well I’m fucking sorry we sveld don’t feel that way! We don’t enjoy conflict and bloodshed! We cherish freedom! Freedom we haven’t had for centuries! If it wasn’t the orcs hunting us down it was the accursed svelk massacring and torturing us!” +“Exactly, and you’d think that you’d be grateful for the Empire for saving you from such things like the orcs and svelk.” +“Right. Because humans are so much better? Humans fucking enslaved us.” +“Actually there are probably just as many human slaves than there are elven ones right now.” +“Yeah and all the human ones are criminals! And even if when the sveld aren’t outright slaves, they’re so destitute or desperate that they’re worked like slaves. It’s a fucking sorry existence, yet as much as we bitch and bitch and BITCH about our plight, we’ve got nobody to blame but ourselves.” +“You believe that?” you ask a little surprised at his claim +“Honestly? Yeah, I do. I believe the sveld have been kicked around so long by everyone and cowed into submission that we love playing the fucking victim. It’s actually gotten to the point where it’s more enjoyable than actually trying to DO something.” +“I dunno about that. There have been sveld rebellions in the past and a lot of them border on being dissidents to this day.” You say. +“The full blown rebellions consisting of nothing but sveld are a rarity and considering how badly we’ve been treated why there haven’t been more just confirms my belief that sveld prefer playing the victim. In fact the Empire has had more problems keeping humans in line. As for dissidents, I know the Empire frowns upon anyone who dares to look at it wrong, but I guarantee the main ones bitching probably aren’t doing anything other than just that, bitching.” +“Sort of like you are now?” +“Yes, damn it. Exactly like how I am right now! You asked me to tell you the truth, well that’s what I’m doing as ordered! Why? Because I’m that good loyal sveld! + +You stay silent and continue to listen to Flevas rant, other soldiers have entered your tent believing something amiss, but you wave them away signifying that everything is fine. + +“You know why I ultimately killed that dryad? It wasn’t out of mercy. It was out of anger that such a creature that attempted to know my thoughts and feelings and dared to feel sorry for me. Fuck that, we have enough of that shit going on in the sveld community. Even some of the so-called kind humans will occasionally do the same and it’s sickening every time. In the scheme of things, I’m not an old sveld, but I feel like I know a hell of a lot more how to deal with this shitty life I’ve been handed. Don’t complain and try to just do your job. The best way to do this is in the military. You never have a choice here; it’s kill or be killed. It’s follow orders and don’t think.” +“So is that why you joined the military?” you ask. +“I joined because I wasn’t going to have my wife blowing disgusting humans for coin or have my children begging on the street like paupers. I wasn’t going to clean privy holes for some human piece of shit who probably can’t even read, yet thinks that they’re somehow better just because they’re not sveld. I wasn’t going to fucking whine about my position in life and get my ass whisked away in the middle of the night by the Eyes or just killed on the spot. I was going to at least TRY to make the best of things even if I hate every damn moment of it.” + +Flevas’ at this point isn’t doing that elf eye thing anymore; he’s long since lost his calm demeanor and looking far more emotional. You get the impression that he’s probably wanted to say this to SOMEBODY for a very long time. And now he has the advantage of telling it directly to the Emperor. You know that has to feel good for him somewhere. + +“And with any luck… I’d get to kill some humans in the process. That’s why I joined. ” Flevas says ending his rant which causes a nod from you. + +“Well you’ll get your chance soon in the Broki Kingdom.” +“I thought you were using that flying ship.” +“I am, but it can’t do all the work can it? Besides, it’s just going to be there for added terror for the most part. As usual the regular army is going to do the clean up work. It’ll be grim business. Despite the civilian population, we aren’t going to be leaving much alive in this particular battle, but as you probably can guess, it’s necessary.” + +Flevas nods and continues to stand at attention unsure of what to expect next. + +“You’re dimissed.” You say. +“That’s it?” Flevas asks. +“For now at least. If anything else comes up that I think I need to talk to you about, you’ll be the first to know. Oh actually there is one more question. Is there anything that you do like about the Empire?” + +Flevas doesn’t think about it too long. + +“There was a law instituted to have svelk killed on sight.” +“Heh, yeah that is a good one.” You say and Flevas takes his leave. + +You make a mental note, that Flevas should be promoted in the future. His attitude and views are clear, but he’s no traitor. As you’ve always believed, you don’t need people to like you, you just need them to be loyal. + +In a couple of days the assault is in full force on the Broki Kingdom, or at least Baron Divilak’s land. You specifically tell your troops that only Divilak’s land and people are to be attacked. Of course if he gets any help from neighboring barons or the king himself then the order is to show them no mercy. + +Divilak doesn’t receive any help though, or if he was, his allies lost courage when they saw the Storm raining fire down upon Divilak’s castle. You can imagine that the Broki have never seen such a thing before and probably hope to never see something like that hovering above them. + +To their credit, Divilak’s soldiers hold their ground initially, but in the end your army scatters them. You imagine that Divilak probably had one of the stronger militaries in this dysfunctional kingdom given that they didn’t run immediately when they saw the Storm. Of course now, that has been reduced to nothing. + +While your first plan was going to be to utterly wipe out everyone within Divilak’s territory as a message of sorts to the rest of the Broki population to fall in line lest they suffer the same fate, you decide to hold back and the civilian population slaughter and come up with another plan. + +“Flevas, there you are. Got an important job for you.” You say stepping over several bodies on the battlefield. + +“Emperor.” He reports. +“You’re going to get to do something very important for your people. Hell, you may even go down in history as a hero to them. Would certainly be a more worthwhile story than about some tree hugging dryads. I want you to round up the remainder of the civilian population with this territory. For every one you bring in, you free one elf from his slave chains. We’ll work out the details later, but for now take whoever you think would be best to help you for this mission and if you get any trouble say this is a direct order from the Emperor. I’d also advise you to limit the casualties, but I imagine you already know that.” +“Yes, my Emperor.” Flevas says and instantly runs off to perform the task. + +With any luck, this is the sort of thing that MIGHT cause the elves to stop complaining so much. Maybe they’ll all start following Flevas’ example and not only accept their lot in life, but to stop complaining about it. In time maybe they won’t even be your “problem citizens” anymore. + +Of course the Divilak’s people aren’t going to enjoy their new designation, but then they’re not suppose to. You’re still sending a message to the rest of the Broki. Submit or this is what will happen. Your armies scattered, your buildings destroyed, and your citizens enslaved. + +Soon after the razing of the barony, you are visited by a very frightened Broki courier. He is escorted by your soldiers and nervously gives a message to you. It’s from the king and apparently he’s sending you this message even though his advisors have told him not to. He says for the good of his people and he hopes in your mercy that you will cease your attack as he is formally surrendering the Broki Kingdom to the Empire. + +A few days later you meet with King Tiklov who makes a formal showing in front of his people that the Broki Kingdom is now no more and that it now will be the Broki province of the Empire. Tiklov will still remain in power, but only as a figurehead and to be involved in the day to day governing, assisted by some of your own administrators of course. + +The annexation goes more or less smoothly, but you come to find out a disturbing discovery. You come to find out that some of the barons had secret dealings with svelk advisors. In fact Divilak was one of them. Certainly explains why the kingdom was involved in civil wars before you arrived. Hell, Divilak’s offer to meet with you might’ve been an attempt on your life. + +These svelk advisors of course have all fled to who knows where by now, but you definitely think you know who tried to have you killed aboard the Storm. You also know that it has to be Semra masterminding all this, wherever she is. You’ll have to keep alert, but then you always are. + +You have the barons that had such dealings with svelk executed. It wasn’t like they were necessary any longer anyway. +> Years pass... +Year 42 + +While you doubt this is going to be your last battle with the Torites, you’re at least hoping it’s going to be the one to break their spirit to the point where they become less of a problem. + +Still, the fact that they’ve finally unified their forces into armies shows you that they realize you aren’t going to just go away and their hit and run tactics and attempts to win through attrition aren’t going to succeed. It shows you that this is a concentrated effort to get rid of you once and for all. It won’t work either and really works to your benefit. It allows you the opportunity to kill a bunch of them in one large grouping now. + +Maybe there will always be pockets of Torites lurking in the untamed wilderness but one thing is certain. The territory WILL be the Empire’s and the Torites can either submit and see the light like the kobolds eventually did or slowly be driven into extinction like the gnolls. + +But that’s in the future, right now you’re drawing up the plans for this impeding battle. Considering how large the Torite horde is, you’ve combined your available forces with Decena’s army. It was quite the happy day for her seeing as she hasn’t seen you for five years. You still aren’t quite sure how you exactly feel about her, but she’s definitely been winning you over as far as her victories have been concerned. She remains professional always in front of everyone, but the first time she got you alone, she literally jumped on you and wrapped her legs around your waist, planting a kiss on you. + +But again, you can sort out your possible complications with Decena later. Now is the time to make sure the both of you come out of this alive. + +“We should have the second airship here before we begin our assault. Hopefully that will take some of the pressure off of the Storm to deal with the harpies.” You remark. +“Its isn’t just the bird bitches that flap about though. Don’t forget, there are still those manticores and those chimeras.” General Ackerson remarks. +“Yes, I’m well aware of both, Ackerson. Thank you for pointing out the obvious. However, I’m more inclined to believe the Torites will be relying on those beasts to attack our people on the ground. The beasts aren’t the most graceful of fliers and would most likely just be big target, which they will be for us anyway, but they’ll still do more damage to a group of soldiers on foot and horseback rather than a flying fortress before going down.” You remark. +“Those chimera things don’t even fly very high. The wings are almost so small that they’re just for show. Never had one swoop down on us.” Decena adds. +“Wouldn’t be best to have us mages together so that we can join our energy and create a shield for the majority of the army?” Galen remarks. He isn’t complaining, but he’s definitely trying to find a loop hole to possibly make himself safer and not have to do as much work.” +“Galen, you know that the Torites attempt to target spell slingers as soon as possible. If they actually get you in a group and strike lucky, well there goes a powerful chunk of our fighting force. It’ll make things harder for them if you’re all spread out. Besides, you’re personally going to be hiding behind a small contingent of golems and backed up by Captain Flevas’ men. You couldn’t be any safer.” +“Huh. So my backup lies in the hands of an elf? Might as well kill me now and get it over with.” Galen remarks. You just shake your head and ignore his last comment; he’s too valuable to punish right now. + +After hammering out the plan, you and the rest start setting things in motion and preparing everyone. You know the Torite horde is on the move not too far from your location. But they aren’t here yet and won’t be for at least a half-day’s time. It gives you a bit of time to at least get some rest since you’ve been running around attempting to take care of everything and haven’t slept. You didn’t even realize how tired you were until you lie down on your sleeping bag. + +Just as you lie down and close your eyes, someone enters your tent and you instinctively grab your sword. + +“No point in that, I’m not really here you know.” You hear a familiar voice whisper. + +You sit up and see Semra standing before you, or rather the image of her. She’s no doubt using the same kind of magic she did when she tried to convince you to kill Casimir. She’s probably nearby somewhere though. + +“I thought you said we weren’t going to see each other again.” You say. +“I didn’t think we would. I truly believed you would die on Mortos. I suppose I underestimated your ability to survive even there. Quite impressive and it’s no surprise that you assumed Casimir’s throne soon after. Everything worked out for you, but tell me how did you accomplish such a feat?” +“Just luck I guess. Look, if you came here to kill me, you’ll need to get behind the long line of Torites marching towards this place.” You say while lying back down and shutting your eyes. +“My, you’re quite confident to stay in such a vulnerable position if you really believe I’m here to kill you.” Semra says. +“No, I know this is just grand standing. If you were really going to kill me you’d have your underlings conspiring with little plots in the shadows.” +“Yes, I’m aware of the troubles you’ve been having lately and while I’m flattered you believe it to me, I’m actually here to clear my good name.” +“Hah!” you snort. +“Okay so just my name. In any event. I’m here to tell you that it isn’t me, though you do have enemies of the svelk persuasion.” +“I’ve got enemies of every persuasion and that’s not a very convincing argument that you’re somehow innocent.” +“Okay how about this then? It’s not me because I’ve been keeping an eye on you and so far you haven’t warranted anything that needs me to stop you yet. My daughter on the other hand disagrees. She claims that my…past with you is clouding my judgment.” +“We never had a past Semra. I don’t know what YOU think it is, but WE were and never will be an item.” +“Oh yes, that’s right. You’ve got that vicious little young thing on your dick now. Decena is her name? She is quite the warrior. Lot of those moves are familiar, they’re all the ones I taught you. Hey have you taught her any of my other moves when you’re bedding her?” + +At this point you sit back up, annoyed with Semra’s remark. + +“Is this going anywhere because I have a shitload of beast men to slaughter tomorrow and you’re keeping me awake!” You snap. +“Oooh! Struck a nerve did I? Haven’t been able to do that for quite awhile, I really missed it. Tell me though; is it very serious with this one like it was with Alison? Didn’t think you’d get over her so quickly. Really though I don’t know why you pick any of these females. This new one is just likely to wind up dead, if not by the sword then by age. Her youthful appearance with eventually wither and fade like it does with all of those lesser born.” + +At this point you lie back down and close your eyes again. You’re not playing this game. + +“You done already? Disappointed, you used to be so much more fun. Very well, just listen then Eternal. I know you have a hard time with that, but maybe you’ll actually heed what I have to say for once. I am not your enemy. As I have said, my daughter is your enemy and she makes her base of operations in a city-state called Ryglik and lies south of the former Broki Kingdom. Of course that whole area consists of several city-states and she may very well move around, but that’s the main one she’s operating from. + +You remain silent while Semra continues to talk. + +“Well I’ll take your silence that you’re at least taking it under consideration. Oh and while you’re at it, you still might want to consider giving up all this foolish nonsense. Perhaps you’re a better Emperor than Casimir ever was, but you’re still mindlessly following a path that you think has been laid out for you. It’s almost like Casimir is still barking orders at you.” +“I guarantee Casimir’s not saying much of anything anymore.” You answer. +“Be that as it may, I’d hate to see you follow in his horribly misguided footsteps and make the same mistakes he did.” +“Well, I don’t have you as an advisor, I’d say that already puts me ahead of the game.” +“Pfft, you’d be lucky to have me by your side. Not my fault you can’t see and accept the truth. Anyway, I’ll take my leave now. Perhaps we’ll see each other, perhaps we won’t. Perhaps we’ll even see each other in the flesh again, wouldn’t that be fun?” +“Sure would, I could give you your dagger back.” You remark. +“Mmmm, I bet you would. Well if that day ever comes, you make sure you give me a long hard kiss as you’re sticking it in me. Oh one last thing, your General Ackerson is planning to betray you at some point during tomorrow’s battle. Not sure when and how, but he’s got quite a few soldiers willing to work with him on it. More of my daughter’s work no doubt.” + +With those final words, you cease hearing Semra’s voice. You briefly open your eyes and find that her image is gone as well. + +“Fucking bitch.” You mutter, as now you’re never going to be able to sleep with this last bit of information she just gave you. + +The big problem is she may very well be telling the truth, because for the most part Semra has never really lied to you. You didn’t believe her at the time, but she told you the complete truth about Casimir and his intentions. She didn’t have Alison killed either. As usual in her own fucked up way that you still don’t understand she has attempted to help you. + +Of course that was in the past, she could be lying about everything right now. While she has confirmed your own beliefs that it’s been the svelk working against you, she’s also trying to put the blame all on her daughter. Granted you know they probably don’t get along, but still. + +There also has never been any evidence that Ackerson has shown signs of being a potential traitor. Doesn’t even make sense, but then again you can’t trust anyone nowadays. + +Now you have to play a guessing game to as whether or not someone on your own side is going to kill you in the middle of battle. You miss the days when all you ever concerned yourself with were the people on the other side trying to kill you. +> Deal with Ackerson +“Shit.” You grumble and get up. + +After getting dressed, you march out of your tent with sword in hand. Multiple soldiers on duty ask if you’re okay, but you just ignore them and head directly to where Ackerson’s camp located. + +When you arrive, you tell the soldiers on duty that you want to see Ackerson immediately. The general is of course still asleep and when he gets out of his tent he’s still slightly groggy. + +“Apologies my Emperor, but what can…” he begins to say and then you cleave his head in with your sword. His face displays a mixture of shock and confusion as the blood trickles down from his head. + +You pull the sword out with a sickly sound following it and strike again, this time practically chopping the general’s head in two. At this point the weight of Ackerson’s now lifeless body pulls downward off of your sword and you wipe your sword off in front of the astonished onlookers. + +“Alright, listen up because I’m only going to say this once. This man was a fucking traitor. He was planning to betray me at some point during tomorrow’s battle. Don’t ask me how I know, the important thing is I know because I’m the fucking Emperor and I know ALL.” + +You continue. + +“That being said, I also know he had some of you in on this plan because he was too damn cowardly to face me like a man. I KNOW who you all are and consider this your reprieve from your benevolent Emperor. Help bring us victory tomorrow against the beast folk scum and I’ll forget all about this. However, if I ever get the slightest hint that ANY of you are planning to assassinate me, betray me or be involved in any other type of treason, I WILL make sure that you do not suffer the quick death like I so graciously handed out to the late general here. Do I make myself clear?” + +“YES EMPEROR!” everyone shouts. + +“Good. Colonel Sini, you’re in charge of Ackerson’s command now. Have someone remove this traitor’s corpse from this camp. I don’t want the aura of his failure and cowardice to rub off on anyone else longer than necessary.” + +You take your leave and head back to your tent. You know what you did might not have been necessary since Semra very well might’ve been lying, however you’re fairly confident that you handled it in such a way that it doesn’t matter. You put so much fear into the rest of them that if they didn’t think you were all knowing before they certainly do now. + +If it is true though, it is sort of disturbing to you that Eldolith managed to somehow convince some of your own military to try to kill you. That’s the group you rely on the most and feel you have the most identification with, though perhaps you’re taking it for granted that most of them LIKE the military and battles like you do. A lot of them probably joined just to feed their families. Some of them were even conscripted. You can only imagine that she offered a shitload of gold as it doesn’t seem likely that she’d have anything else worthwhile to offer. + +You’ll be glad when the orcs have finally raised their numbers back up and the new Eternals are of age to fight. + +Despite everything that went on last night, you miraculously actually manage to get a little sleep before the arrival of the Torites. You’re still a little tired, but you think when you get into the thick of battle the thrill of it will kick in and you’ll be invigorated. You usually are. + +It seems word of what happened spread fairly quickly to the rest of the camps, even to Decena’s army. You imagine that will at least have to put Galen in a good mood, maybe he’ll whine less now. + +When the Torites arrive they certainly look like a chaotic rabble, but it’s no mistake that they mean business. The number of harpies fills the sky to the point where you hope that the Storm can take care of such a flock. The second airship is in far distance behind you. Hopefully by the time it gets to engage in battle it won’t be replacing the Storm so much that it’ll be supporting the Storm. + +The cannons and rifles fire as soon as the Torites are within range. Their centaurs return fire with their accurate arrows. The saytr wizards up the ante by casting their elemental magic which rips solid chunks of rock and earth out of the ground and goes flying at your army. It can’t be said that the Torites are any less dangerous just because they’re less technologically advanced. + +High above you the Storm takes on the harpy warriors. Even from here, it looks like a swarm of locusts descending on a single blade of wheat. Looks pretty damn grim for the Storm, you just hope if the crew does get overwhelmed they can keep the ship from crashing near your location. + +The bull creatures lead the charge along side their horse beast brethren. Another volley of shots takes out some, but they remain relentless in their charge. The satyr rank and file advance steadily behind. They WILL arrive and there will certainly be enough of them left to give your army a good fight. + +Your own cavalry meets them and while they have the best training, they can’t overcome the sheer savagery of the minotaurs and as for the centaurs, their very bodies are half horse. They already have the advantage over your own cavalry as far as maneuverability. + +Breaks in the Torite army form as they allow their war beasts participate in the charge. Several manticores and chimera of the largest size make their way straight towards you. At their pace, they’re going to be the first ones your people will have to fight. A cannon blast rips through one of the chimera and fireball from one of your mages brings down another, but before you know it, a manticore is shredding apart your front line with its talons and impaling others with its spike tail. + +What comes next is utter mayhem. Swords and axes cutting and stabbing. Fangs and claws tearing and biting. Magic on both sides destroying several lives in the blink of an eye. It’s all very glorious. + +Decena’s army is holding its own on her front, but then you never had any doubt about that. The only problem they do have is the blasted satyr magic manages to turn the golems against them. Hopefully, Flevas managed to get Galen’s ass out of there before they crushed him. The newly appointed General Sini seems to be doing well on his end. You’re glad to see that the reinforced fear in their ruler has motivated them. + +Still, the battle is far from over yet. The fact that you’re simultaneously facing down three bullheads by yourself and a chimera closing in is a great reminder. + +You cast a lightning blast at the bulls, which fells two of them, but the third fights through the pain of having his body fried from the inside out. You dodge his axe and follow up with your own sword swing to his meaty leg. The beast roars, but is still undeterred. Two nearby soldiers attempt to help, but are mauled by the chimera which has finally arrived. + +The minotaur swings again, but this time you cast a force shield to block the blow. This one has to be some sort of leader or hero or some great warrior to his people because when you swing your sword again to strike, the creature catches its blade and snaps it off leaving you with a broken sword. + +“Okay. I get it. A challenge.” You say and step backwards from the minotaur who ignores his deeply cut hand to solidly grip his axe once more. + +The bull will have to wait though since the chimera has finally gotten around to attack you. The clumsy beast attempts to pounce, but you leap out of its way and blast one of the its misshaped animal heads with a bolt of fire. Roaring in pain and anger, the creature desperately tries to put out the flames by rubbing the flaming head into the dirt. It hardly stops it from continuing to attack with its scorpion tail. While it misses with its tail, one of its other goat like heads spits a cloud of gas at you. You didn’t even know they could do such a thing, but then these chimeras are rather random beasts. + +The gas is certainly poisonous enough to kill the average person, but then you aren’t average. Unfortunately it’s still potent enough to make you feel sick and you gag and wheeze when you inhale a good bit of the stuff. + +A paw smashes into your side and you go crashing to the ground. You barely get out of the way of the stinger tail again. Then your old bull friend is there to help with his axe as usual, fortunately someone distracts the bull by attacking him from behind causing him to drop his axe. Unfortunately they fail to kill him and he turns around and breaks their neck with his bare hands, still it’s given you a temporary respite on what to do next. +> Pick up the axe and strike back +Despite being woozy from the gas attack, you grab the minotaur’s axe. The weapon is incredibly heavy, in fact a little heavier than you were expecting. The minotaur advances on you and you clumsily swing at it, but miss completely and you feel the smashing fist of the minotaur across your face which has quite likely broken your jaw. + +Sprawled to the ground, you attempt to cast a cone of frost, but the minotaur has already followed up its attack and picked you up off the ground with both hands. Then with one quick move he slams your back over his knee breaking it and throws you in front of the chimera, which has successfully put out the flames you bestowed upon its face earlier. + +Your last moments are the chimera’s lion head sinking its fangs into your throat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Shit.” You grumble and get up. + +After getting dressed, you march out of your tent with sword in hand. Multiple soldiers on duty ask if you’re okay, but you just ignore them and head directly to where Ackerson’s camp located. + +When you arrive, you tell the soldiers on duty that you want to see Ackerson immediately. The general is of course still asleep and when he gets out of his tent he’s still slightly groggy. + +“Apologies my Emperor, but what can…” he begins to say and then you cleave his head in with your sword. His face displays a mixture of shock and confusion as the blood trickles down from his head. + +You pull the sword out with a sickly sound following it and strike again, this time practically chopping the general’s head in two. At this point the weight of Ackerson’s now lifeless body pulls downward off of your sword and you wipe your sword off in front of the astonished onlookers. + +“Alright, listen up because I’m only going to say this once. This man was a fucking traitor. He was planning to betray me at some point during tomorrow’s battle. Don’t ask me how I know, the important thing is I know because I’m the fucking Emperor and I know ALL.” + +You continue. + +“That being said, I also know he had some of you in on this plan because he was too damn cowardly to face me like a man. I KNOW who you all are and consider this your reprieve from your benevolent Emperor. Help bring us victory tomorrow against the beast folk scum and I’ll forget all about this. However, if I ever get the slightest hint that ANY of you are planning to assassinate me, betray me or be involved in any other type of treason, I WILL make sure that you do not suffer the quick death like I so graciously handed out to the late general here. Do I make myself clear?” + +“YES EMPEROR!” everyone shouts. + +“Good. Colonel Sini, you’re in charge of Ackerson’s command now. Have someone remove this traitor’s corpse from this camp. I don’t want the aura of his failure and cowardice to rub off on anyone else longer than necessary.” + +You take your leave and head back to your tent. You know what you did might not have been necessary since Semra very well might’ve been lying, however you’re fairly confident that you handled it in such a way that it doesn’t matter. You put so much fear into the rest of them that if they didn’t think you were all knowing before they certainly do now. + +If it is true though, it is sort of disturbing to you that Eldolith managed to somehow convince some of your own military to try to kill you. That’s the group you rely on the most and feel you have the most identification with, though perhaps you’re taking it for granted that most of them LIKE the military and battles like you do. A lot of them probably joined just to feed their families. Some of them were even conscripted. You can only imagine that she offered a shitload of gold as it doesn’t seem likely that she’d have anything else worthwhile to offer. + +You’ll be glad when the orcs have finally raised their numbers back up and the new Eternals are of age to fight. + +Despite everything that went on last night, you miraculously actually manage to get a little sleep before the arrival of the Torites. You’re still a little tired, but you think when you get into the thick of battle the thrill of it will kick in and you’ll be invigorated. You usually are. + +It seems word of what happened spread fairly quickly to the rest of the camps, even to Decena’s army. You imagine that will at least have to put Galen in a good mood, maybe he’ll whine less now. + +When the Torites arrive they certainly look like a chaotic rabble, but it’s no mistake that they mean business. The number of harpies fills the sky to the point where you hope that the Storm can take care of such a flock. The second airship is in far distance behind you. Hopefully by the time it gets to engage in battle it won’t be replacing the Storm so much that it’ll be supporting the Storm. + +The cannons and rifles fire as soon as the Torites are within range. Their centaurs return fire with their accurate arrows. The saytr wizards up the ante by casting their elemental magic which rips solid chunks of rock and earth out of the ground and goes flying at your army. It can’t be said that the Torites are any less dangerous just because they’re less technologically advanced. + +High above you the Storm takes on the harpy warriors. Even from here, it looks like a swarm of locusts descending on a single blade of wheat. Looks pretty damn grim for the Storm, you just hope if the crew does get overwhelmed they can keep the ship from crashing near your location. + +The bull creatures lead the charge along side their horse beast brethren. Another volley of shots takes out some, but they remain relentless in their charge. The satyr rank and file advance steadily behind. They WILL arrive and there will certainly be enough of them left to give your army a good fight. + +Your own cavalry meets them and while they have the best training, they can’t overcome the sheer savagery of the minotaurs and as for the centaurs, their very bodies are half horse. They already have the advantage over your own cavalry as far as maneuverability. + +Breaks in the Torite army form as they allow their war beasts participate in the charge. Several manticores and chimera of the largest size make their way straight towards you. At their pace, they’re going to be the first ones your people will have to fight. A cannon blast rips through one of the chimera and fireball from one of your mages brings down another, but before you know it, a manticore is shredding apart your front line with its talons and impaling others with its spike tail. + +What comes next is utter mayhem. Swords and axes cutting and stabbing. Fangs and claws tearing and biting. Magic on both sides destroying several lives in the blink of an eye. It’s all very glorious. + +Decena’s army is holding its own on her front, but then you never had any doubt about that. The only problem they do have is the blasted satyr magic manages to turn the golems against them. Hopefully, Flevas managed to get Galen’s ass out of there before they crushed him. The newly appointed General Sini seems to be doing well on his end. You’re glad to see that the reinforced fear in their ruler has motivated them. + +Still, the battle is far from over yet. The fact that you’re simultaneously facing down three bullheads by yourself and a chimera closing in is a great reminder. + +You cast a lightning blast at the bulls, which fells two of them, but the third fights through the pain of having his body fried from the inside out. You dodge his axe and follow up with your own sword swing to his meaty leg. The beast roars, but is still undeterred. Two nearby soldiers attempt to help, but are mauled by the chimera which has finally arrived. + +The minotaur swings again, but this time you cast a force shield to block the blow. This one has to be some sort of leader or hero or some great warrior to his people because when you swing your sword again to strike, the creature catches its blade and snaps it off leaving you with a broken sword. + +“Okay. I get it. A challenge.” You say and step backwards from the minotaur who ignores his deeply cut hand to solidly grip his axe once more. + +The bull will have to wait though since the chimera has finally gotten around to attack you. The clumsy beast attempts to pounce, but you leap out of its way and blast one of the its misshaped animal heads with a bolt of fire. Roaring in pain and anger, the creature desperately tries to put out the flames by rubbing the flaming head into the dirt. It hardly stops it from continuing to attack with its scorpion tail. While it misses with its tail, one of its other goat like heads spits a cloud of gas at you. You didn’t even know they could do such a thing, but then these chimeras are rather random beasts. + +The gas is certainly poisonous enough to kill the average person, but then you aren’t average. Unfortunately it’s still potent enough to make you feel sick and you gag and wheeze when you inhale a good bit of the stuff. + +A paw smashes into your side and you go crashing to the ground. You barely get out of the way of the stinger tail again. Then your old bull friend is there to help with his axe as usual, fortunately someone distracts the bull by attacking him from behind causing him to drop his axe. Unfortunately they fail to kill him and he turns around and breaks their neck with his bare hands, still it’s given you a temporary respite on what to do next. +> Crawl away from the immediate area +You’re in the middle of a danger zone right now and you’re still feeling woozy from that gas, you need to get out as quick as you can. + +You crawl away just in time for the chimera to try to sting you again, though now that one of its faces isn’t on fire anymore the creature is advancing along with the bull. Summoning all your energy you cast a cone of frost at the pair of them. You actually get a few other enemies and several allies in the blast as well, but whatever gets the job done. + +The chimera and bull try to advance despite being slowly frozen solid and they actually make a few more steps, but you keep up the spell ignoring the drain its taking on you. You soon have several ice “statues” in front of your area. Grabbing the mace of a dead soilder nearby you take several swings at the frozen chimera smashing its body parts into frozen bloody chunks. You then turn your attention to the bull. + +“A shame this couldn’t have been a fair fight. You were certainly worthy of one.” You say and with one mighty swing you smash the bull’s head in and kick the rest of the body over. It’s going to be a mess when it all finally thaws out. + +A quick glance up displays several winged bodies falling out of the sky, some of them on fire. The Storm is holding so far, but you can tell by the thick black smoke emanating from it that it isn’t without damage. The second airship however is coming along and already engaging the enemy. + +In the distance ahead of you, you see that your kobold teams have successfully dug underneath the battlefield and started to flank the Torites. Even with the element of surprise most of them are probably going to end up getting stomped on by the minotaurs and centaurs, but they’ll at least be in a position to disrupt the satyr mages. + +The confrontation rages on for the remainder of the day and you find yourself all over the battlefield, either giving commands or doing battle. At one point you even find yourself fighting side by side with Decena. While it is no doubt a big thrill for her to actually fight along with you, you actually enjoy it as well. It reminds you of when you fought along side Alison as Decena also has that instinctive knowledge of complimenting your fighting style, but then again she should considering you trained her. + +Day becomes dusk and finally to night though the sky lights up spectacularly when the Storm gives out its final service when part of it explodes turning the entire ship into a blazing wreck dropping to the ground fast. Both sides run for cover and out of the area while attempting to avoid the burning shards already hitting the surface. + +Still even with this loss, your side is definitely winning. Most of the centaurs are dead, the one who aren’t, have long since galloped away. Most of the satyr troops are dead as well with the few remaining starting to retreat. All their large beasts such as the manticores and chimera have all been slain. The harpies still alive from their assault on the Storm have flapped away. The only ones still putting up any resistance are the minotaurs and that’s because they’re too stubborn to retreat, but eventually they’ll be overwhelmed. + +By the time the clash is finally over the moon is hanging high above the battlefield causing a minor luminescence over the numerous dead on the battlefield. This is definitely going to be one that the scholars and historians are going to write about. + +While you stepping over the dead and passing by soldiers taking well earned victory celebrations (or just taking well earned rests) Decena comes running up to you. + +“Hey, I’ve been looking for you. We got split up after those manticores attacked. I mean I knew you weren’t dead, but I just wanted to know you were okay.” Decena says. +“A few minor wounds, probably some new scars to look forward to, aching muscles and joints, extremely tired, but other than that I’m fine. How many in your army left?” you ask. +“Quite few. I don’t think my side recieved the brunt of the Torite attack though turning our golems against us was certainly a surprise. Galen managed to rectify that though, even if it did cost us the use of them.” +“Oh, survived did he?” +“Yeah, thanks to Captain Flevas. I know a lot of people don’t like elves, but he was invaluable on the battlefield.” +“I wouldn’t have promoted him and transferred him to your command if he wasn’t. So besides Galen did any of your other wizards survive?” +“Unfortunately none.” +“Same here. The Torites were successful in that regard. (Sigh) Successful in that endeavor as well.” You say pointing to the still flaming wreckage of the Storm in the distance. +“Well at least we still have the second airship.” Decena says. +“Oh we’ll have more of those, no doubt. Wizards, not so sure about. I’m thinking the age of using battle mages on any large scale might be coming to an end. Better keep what talent we still have left at home in case of an emergency.” You reply. +“I wanted to ask you about something else, did you ever find out more about the traitors in our ranks? Only a few hours before the conflict with the Torites and it was all over my own camp about how you executed General Ackerson in front of his command and warned everyone that you know others were involved in a conspiracy against you.” +“Oh that. No, but given that the only ones trying to kill me today were the Torites I’d say I squashed it, but I still will have Warrick do a full investigation to anyone close to Ackerson though I can guess a few of them now. I have to believe that Sini who I replaced Ackerson with was involved, being his second in command and all, however Sini has redeemed himself by dying in battle loyally. Saves his family the embarrassment and saves me the need for another execution later.” +“I’m just glad you’re okay, but then I shouldn’t have worried I suppose, you’re the Emperor and nothing can ever destroy you.” + +At this point the pair of you have entered your tent and Decena grabs your hand. Decena looks at you with a mixture of concern and adoration. The same adoration she’s had since you took her as your student. While it’s definitely true your actions and position have probably molded her into these feelings, she’s also not a naive babe in the woods. + +“Emperor, I need to ask. Now that we have this time together are we ever going to pick up where we left off or are those days over?” she asks. +“Did you want to continue that sort of relationship? I don’t want you to feel obligated that you have to because of a loss of self control on my part in the past.” You say. +“Do you regret it then?” +“I regret that I have made things unnecessarily complicated for you. I probably just should’ve had you enrolled into the Eye training camp or even the regular army. Would’ve made things a lot easier for the both of us.” +“But then I wouldn’t be as good as I am. I wouldn’t be able to serve to my fullest capabilities. You managed to bring out my full potential. I doubt if I would’ve survived this very battle without your personal training. You are my Emperor and I will loyally continue to serve the Empire no matter what. But I need to know how things are going to be in the future so that I may conduct myself accordingly towards you.” + +A reasonable request. + +“Decena, it would be a lie to say I don’t feel something for you, but those feelings are tainted with a lot of negative past experiences of my own. Most of which I don’t even want to get into right now, but rest assured my reasons for initiating the more intimate nature of our relationship was more than just simple loneliness and weren’t exactly positive motives. In fact they were downright twisted at times and I don’t think you’re quite aware of some of the things I thought about doing to you. This isn’t even counting the fact that you’re in competition with a ghost to a certain degree and that’s hardly fair to you.” + +Decena of course knows you’re referring to Alison. She’s probably always known that you still have never completely gotten over her. Not with the way she’s seen you stare at her portrait for long periods of time back when she was at the palace. + +Decena has her answer. + +“I…see. Very well my Emperor. I understand that it is time for me to grow up and put aside the silly emotions of a young girl. I shall no longer trouble you with my immature displays of affection or letters but… know I shall continue to… (sniffle) love you in the way that a…” + +Decena can’t even complete her sentence. She might’ve even known this was a long time coming, but it still doesn’t make things any easier. She reaches out to hug you and you embrace her. She tries to stop herself from completely crying, but she’s struggling with this a lot. + +“You’ll grow stronger from this and move past it Decena. I know you have it within you to do so.” You say in an attempt to be reassuring, she looks up at you with tears in her eyes. + +“Can I just make one request, (sniff) my Emperor?” she asks. +“What is it?” +“Can…for just tonight. I lie with you one last time? We…don’t even have to do anything…I just…if this is going to be it…I want to experience your body next to mine one last time.” + +While you’re not exactly sure if this is going to make things harder or easier for her, you don’t have it in you to say no at this point. + +“Of course Decena.” + +With those words the pair of you lie together one last time. + +The next day when you wake up Decena is already gone. Not gone from the area, just from your tent and back at her camp probably giving her soldiers orders to move out and head back to the nearest settlement for supplies. + +“She’ll be fine.” You say to yourself though you don’t know if you’re exactly convinced of it. You suppose you’ll see in the future. + +And while you know it probably was the “healthiest” thing to do, you’d also be lying to yourself if you aren’t going to miss that part of your relationship with her completely. + +Who knew that between an army of rampaging beastmen, traitors in your ranks, and a visit from Semra, breaking up with a young woman would be the most emotionally draining? +> Years pass... +Year 45 + +“…and even with your natural gifts and after your training is over in six years, your true service to the Empire will have only just begun. You will all be expected to perform to your fullest capabilities because as Eternals you are to be the very best that the Empire has to offer. And out there you will need to show that to our many enemies so that they never forget it. Duty, loyalty, valor and the will to survive, these are traits I expect to see in all of you for I am always watching. Remember this.” You say as your parting words to the new Eternals. + +“YES EMPEROR! LONG LIVE THE EMPIRE!” they all say in unison. + +Brenda tells them to take a brief break while she follows you out of the training center. + +“You’ve done a very good job with them Brenda.” You say. +“Thank you.” Brenda remarks. +“No, really. I know I sort of dropped this in your lap, but you’ve really taken the reins on this. I mean I couldn’t have done it better. From what I’ve seen they’re well on their way of becoming an effective fighting force AND you’ve managed to keep most of them alive in the process. Had it been me two thirds of that class probably would’ve been dead by now under my harsh training.” +“Ah, but those left alive would probably be more lethal than the ones I’ve trained.” Brenda points out. +“Perhaps, but they don’t need to be put through similar rigors that I faced, I just need them to be better than our enemies and loyal to the Empire. From what I’ve seen, I have no doubt that will be the case when they finally come of age.” +“Well despite my less unforgiving and more cooperative training methods, I can’t take all the credit for keeping most of them alive, their increased regeneration rates help in that regard. There was many times where I even thought a few of them had suffered fatal injuries only for them to get better given enough time. I believe whatever magic you infused during their tank time increased their regenerative abilities greater than our own.” +“Their reflexes are definitely better too. Even at this age, I could see that during the training demonstration. At the very least, they should be on par with Decena in that aspect when they grow up.” +“How is your one time pupil doing anyway?” Brenda asks. + +You hesitate a moment, since you’ve sort of wondered that yourself. You no longer get the letters you once did from Decena which were more expressive. Now she only sends you official battle reports. Obviously she’s dealing with the termination of your intimate relationship in a professional manner and is keeping your current relationship that way. + +That being the case, you give Brenda the safe answer because that’s genuinely all you know. + +“Oh, she’s still mostly combating the Torites. While the Battle of the Beasts three years ago pretty much broke their strength in the area, they still aren’t out of it yet. I’d push forward to eradicate them, but with the need for consolidation of our winnings as well as last years purges, we’ve had to halt expansion for the time being. That’s not even counting that the next place I want to turn my attention to are the city states south of the Broki province. I’ve had Eyes infiltrate most of them and they’re infested with svelk.” You say. +“Really? Like entire cities of them? I thought they were nomadic.” Brenda says. +“Not anymore apparently, but it isn’t actually entire cities, more like key positions of importance in the cities, but even one svelk is an infestation as far as I’m concerned.” You answer. +“Surprised you’re not just sending airships to bombard them.” +“I’m fairly sure I wouldn’t get them all if I did that. Airships while powerful are slow enough that any svelk would probably get the hell out of there before they even arrived. Besides, I’m not really looking to level the cities. Bombing one perhaps as an example, to get the rest to fall in line, but not all of them.” +“Assassination?” +“Assassinations would probably work better since the svelk direct such actions against each other on a semi-regular basis, would take a bit of time though since if a lot of them start dying suddenly, they’re going to know something is up and they’ll relocate from the cities. Still, I suppose if we timed it right…hmmm, maybe I’ll talk to Warrick about setting something up; in any case we still need to track down Eldolith. We know she is making her home in the cities, but she is proving to be completely elusive as far as pinning her down. Probably using a system of secret tunnels. Might be time to send in the kobold commandos to start digging around.” + +You and Brenda finish up your conversation with a couple of off topic subjects, but before you leave she says one last thing. + +“I know you already thanked me for my work with the new Eternals, but I wanted to take this opportunity to thank you. Thank you for giving me a new sense of purpose. I know these Eternals’ purpose is to loyally serve the Empire, but I feel like…I dunno…it’s silly.” +“No, what?” +“I sometimes feel like I’m their mother. I mean I’m not developing attachments to them or anything, but I feel like I’m doing all I can to make sure they survive in this world, because I really DO want most of them to survive. They represent the future of the Empire, and it will fall to them eventually to defend it.” + +You nod at Brenda’s remark and touch her arm. + +“And that, is why you were the best one for this job.” You say. +“I suppose another reason I’ve been feeling a little more positive lately is the fact that there are now more of us. Eternals, I mean. Our numbers were always so few, but now with these new ones, I don’t feel so alone I guess.” + +Brenda’s feelings on this are probably related to the loss of her husband as usual, but you can’t fault her for it. If this is something that helps her through the pain, then more power to her. Really you never gave it too much thought that there would be more of “you” around because as far as you’re concerned, “you” were always unique to begin with. You weren’t even supposed to be an Eternal, but here you are. + +The next bit surprises you though. + +“Oh and one more thing, the next time you see Warrick tell him, I’m sorry for being angry at him.” Brenda says. + +You smile. + +“I’m sure he’ll be glad to hear it.” You answer and leave. + +The next few days are actually spent working alongside Warrick to see if some sort of mass assassination attempt of the svelk would actually work. (You also relay Brenda’s message and just as you figured, he’s glad to hear it) + +“Wait, so some of the inhabitants in these cities are actually former Felkan citizens?” you ask Warrick. +“Yes and it looks like some of them have been willingly working with the svelk out of revenge. In fact I now believe that the saboteur that tried to destroy the old Storm was from one of these cities. A couple of the other tight-lipped dissidents we’ve had killed during the last purge I believe were from there too originally.” + +You shake your head. + +“Maybe I should just have the cities bombed out of existence after all.” You say with a sigh. +“What I don’t understand, is why we’re bumping into them only now. I mean these cities are so far away and the refugee Felkans would’ve not only had to travel through gnoll AND Torite territory at the time, but also the Broki Kingdom. Surely it would’ve been easier to put down roots there.” Warrick says. +“Well, who is to say some of them didn’t? You’re only coming across the more radical ones obviously. There may have very well been Felkans that just wanted to get away from the Empire and live a normal life. Granted if those individuals had just accepted Empire rule in the first, they could’ve done so anyway with little change, but that’s a different topic.” + +You continue. + +“Also the Broki Kingdom was fairly backwards and having strife of its own, I get the impression that the Felkans just wanted to get as far a way as possible from such things. This journey probably wasn’t without its hazards. Combine that with losing your homeland and anything else that might’ve been personal, it’s not hard to see where their hate would’ve festered to the point where the svelk took advantage of it. The ex Felkans are the tool that the svelk are manipulating. Maybe they don’t have a nation proper anymore, but it’s obvious that the svelk are definitely building the skeleton of one out of these cities states and they see us as the biggest threat to their new endeavors.” +“It isn’t just the svelk and these militant ex-Felkans we’ve discovered though, we recently came across something new. Something I know you’re going to want to hear before proceeding with any plan.” Warrick says. + +Warrick tell you that there is another community but far enough away to be fairly isolated from the rest of the city-states in the area, in fact the community makes its home in a lone mountain. + +“So…what they live in a cave?” +“Well not exactly. The Eyes have not been there, but apparently there is a whole city built into the mountain. Basically similar to what the derro do underground I guess, but they aren’t derro. They’re gnomes.” +“Gnomes?” +“Yes, and from what information we have gathered, they’re also from the former Felkan Kingdom. The funny thing is, they don’t seem to have much contact with the rest of the city states. We know that the gnomes trade with the various cities from time to time and we know that there must be humans living in this mountain since those are the ones that do the trading. The place is called New Dessle.” +“Hrm. Name of the former Felkan capital. So do you think they’re working with the svelk in this conspiracy?” you ask. +“We don’t know. Like I said, all we know is that they trade sometimes, it seems to be mostly minerals and it’s fairly infrequent. If they are in league, they’re keeping it fairly secret from anyone.” + +Gnomes. That puts a slightly different spin on everything. Between the svelk and the gnomes, you’ve got two of the most manipulative and smartest races working together to possibly destroy you. + +Regardless of whether or not the gnomes are actually involved, it still would be best to gather more information, perhaps even more so. + +“Until we’ve got more information, we’re going to assume the gnomes are just the occasional trading partners. While MAYBE they’re indirectly helping by trading material to these svelk influenced cities, I’d rather we deal with the immediate suspects first. Besides attacking a damn mountain isn’t exactly in the budget right now.” You say. + +So you proceed with your plan. You keep the Eyes spying and gathering information and keep your own internal security tight. You also start having kobolds digging tunnels under the cities. + +A few weeks pass and you receive a message. A human rider dropped off a box in a village in the Broki province. Before riding off he stated to the nearby peasants that they needed to deliver that to their Emperor. The box was obviously leaking blood and when one of the braver soldiers opened it, there were several eyes inside. A bloody note attached stated a warning from “Domina” Eldolith that all spies from the Empire will be killed and any further unwanted aggression on the “Confederacy of Free Cities” would be an act of war. + +Never mind the fact that Eldolith started this by trying to assassinate you in the first place. + +“She can’t possibly be serious in taking us on. She may have discovered some of our spies, but we already know full well what her strength is and even with our reduced manpower right now we could take on the entire force of this so called Confederacy of Free Cities.” Warrick remarks. +“Oh I’m sure she know that. She’s backed into a corner and is doing typical svelk grand standing hoping it will work. To be quite honest I figured she’d eventually discover some of our spies eventually. The svelk aren’t stupid, but they served their purpose in information gathering and they probably distracted the svelk from possibly discovering our kobolds running around underground. You can start pulling out the rest of your Eyes, we’ll be attacking the cities soon. With any luck we won’t let a single svelk escape and we can wipe out the remainder of the ex-Felkans as well.” You say. + +Kivan is nearby probably waiting to get your attention for some domestic issue. Normally he just waits patiently, but this time he speaks. + +“Forgive my presumption my Emperor as I know war is your area of expertise, but what about the gnomes?” he asks. +“What about them? Our spies still have not uncovered anything that would suggest that they’re helping. Even the material that they’re trading couldn’t be considered dangerous for the most part.” Warrick answers. +“The gnomes will be dealt with later, Kivan. No need to worry.” You say. + +Kivan puts aside his scrolls and addresses you directly. + +“I have no doubt that will be the case my Emperor, however it is my concern that the Empire not take any more potential unnecessary losses. The Felkan War took a heavy toll on the Empire. A toll that was not necessary had our former Emperor acted more quickly on the matter. The same could be said for the Shadow uprising.” +“Watch your tone! YOUR current Emperor AND I both served to quell those incidents! Where were you? Counting beans? I suggest you stick to what you know advisor!” Warrick says raising his voice. +“You are correct Sightmaster, I AM an advisor. And as I said it is true, I am more of an expert in the mundane domestic affairs that keep the Empire running, I also have to deal with the effects these wars have on such things. If you attack now there will be hardship on the people, BUT our people are used to such things. What is a little more troubling is when unexpected problems pop up or long drawn out affairs.” +“So what are you exactly saying Kivan?” you ask. +“I’m saying that the gnomes can’t be trusted to live. When they rebelled against the Empire and ran away they managed to manipulate a collection of simple villages and towns and turn it into the Felkan Kingdom. Not only that, but they managed to build it up to the point where it actually surpassed the Empire technology wise and all of this was done in a fairly short period of time.” + +You continue to listen while Kivan expresses his point of view on this matter. + +“Perhaps the gnomes aren’t working with the svelk, but that’s not to say they aren’t still working against us. I can’t believe that they wouldn’t harbor some sort of revenge. I mean the ex-Felkans obviously do and all they lost were their homeland. The gnomes were systematically exterminated. I just believe that leaving the gnomes for later is going to give them more time to build up their defenses and just make it harder for the Empire to wipe them out in the future. Why take the chance?” + +Kivan does actually make a pragmatic point. While taking the city-states isn’t going to be too much of a problem, it’s still going to take time and manpower. Your main concern with them is making sure you get all the svelk (especially Eldolith) inside. Consolidating, settling, and rooting out problem people will all take time as well. And while you’re doing all that, the gnomes could be sitting in their mountain building some weapon (or weapons) of imaginable power. + +They already built an entire city in a mountain, who knows what the escaped gnomes have been working on since their exodus? +> Attack the mountain +The gnomes do need to be dealt with, the sooner the better. You agree with Kivan. + +“Well Kivan, if this turns out successfully you may get promoted to be a war advisor.” You say. +“I’d certainly be honored, but I believe my talents are still better served on the domestic issues. This was just an extension of those concerns.” He says. +“Okay, so how do you want to handle this? Because if we are going to attack that mountain, we’re going to have to still deal with those city states.” Warrick asks you. +“Those are still going to be no problem, we’re going to overrun those and then move on to New Dessle. We probably won’t need the airships at all for the city-states; we’ll just handle it conventionally. And while we’re taking care of those, I’ll send the airships to attack New Dessle. Attacking a mountain is going to be no easy feat, but with the airships we could at least blow enough holes in it to cause not only external damage but more importantly internal structural damage that could hopefully cause portions of it to come crashing down on their heads. Soften them up at least until our armies to arrive.” + +Warrick goes on to ask which offensive you’re going to be personally overseeing and if you want Decena’s army called in to help. You tell Warrick that Decena still need to concentrate on mopping up Torite resistance lest they somehow regroup. And as you said, you don’t anticipate many problems from the city-states anyway. + +As for which offensive you’re going to oversee, you’re not sure. Before this gnome business came up you were going to just oversee the fall of the city-states, but with the gnomes now being attacked, you wonder if you shouldn’t be there to oversee that instead. + +You then remember Warrick wanting to be involved in some of the frontline stuff recently. + +“Well Warrick how would you like to over see the destruction of the city states? You’ve always said you wanted more work outside that office and get back in the middle of things, well here’s a big thing to get right in the middle of Warrick.” ” + +Warrick is surprised and honored by your decision. + +“I…I thank you my Emperor and it will be my honor to command such a task. Does this mean you’ll be travelling to New Dessel?” +“Yes, I mean as much as I’d like to personally see the destruction of the svelk and ex-Felkans I believe the gnomes are a bigger threat and as such my attendance in our first attack against them is in order. I do request however that if at all possible, bring that bitch Eldolith to me in chains if possible. If not, dead is just as good.” +“I think that can certainly be arranged, my Emperor.” + +Invasion of the Confederacy of the Free Cities. (Which you didn’t even know that’s what this little group of city-states was even called until Eldolith’s message) is prepared. You know Warrick has the skill to lead an army and will not falter at this task; you just hope that he will indeed be able to capture Eldolith alive. + +As for you, this will be your first time boarding one of these airships. Since you had that purge of traitors (and potential traitors) you’re not so apprehensive about boarding one of them now. + +The Storm II is a grand ship and equipped with the best and latest weapons. The other five ships coming with you are equipped in a similar manner. You figure while the gnomes will certainly have cannons of their own, you’ll at least be able to protect the Storm II with your magic somewhat. + +Eventually you are on your way and the first thing you fly over is your army on the march toward the Confederacy’s territory. The next thing you fly over is the Confederacy’s territory itself where you see small groups of troops desperately preparing for the invasion. + +When you fly overhead you can only imagine the excessive fear they must feel followed by the confusion when you by pass them entirely. The fact that you didn’t attack might even worry them more, since now they’ll wonder if you’ll be coming back. + +Your air fleet continues to fly towards New Dessel which looms in the distance. Part of you wonders just how much of a fight the gnomes will put up and how much damage you’ll actually be able to do. You have it set up though for the airships to signal each other on where to fire so coordination will not be a problem. + +When you arrive before the mountain, all the airships stop and prepare for your next command. To be quite honest, while the mountain is big enough that peak still looms above your fleet’s current height the mountain is far from being something as impressive as the ones you’ve seen in Rask. Concentrated fire in a few locations should probably have the desired effect you want, and if all goes well, you might get closer to drop a few bombs. + +“Well we didn’t come here to sight see this marvel of nature, let’s get on with it blowing it up.” You remark and tell your crew to start signaling the other ships. + +Within moments, all the airships are concentrating their fire on particular place on the mountain. Take a while, but you definitely start causing damage as boulders, dirt, rocks and debris all begin to rumble and fall causing the start of a rockslide in one area of the mountain. + +You manage to do this on two more sections of the mountain before you actually start encountering any kind of resistance. Several “windows” in the mountain open up revealing cannons, which fire upon your ships. It really isn’t too bad though. + +“Start telling the other ships to fire at the cannons. Even if their mountain city seems to be holding up from the inside, we can still deprive them of their defenses.” You command. + +A few minutes after you give this command you sense a change in the air. Almost like that of lightning storm. You even begin to feel a little static… + +Suddenly a flash of light eminates from the top of the peak and huge bolt of lightning hits one of your airships to the left causing it to explode spectacularly. + +It didn’t get hit and slowly make a fiery descent towards the ground, it actually exploded. + +“SHIT!” you suddenly shout, probably along with several of your crew. You then turn your attention to the shining piece of metal on top of the mountain peak where the lightning blast came from. + +“EVERYONE TURN AROUND! RETREAT!” you shout and tell your crew to signal the remaining airships to do likewise. + +You’re a sitting duck and you know it right now. You can’t put up a barrier large enough to cover the entire airship, so as your airship begins to turn you attempt to directly aim your own magic bolts in the direction of the gnome’s apparent “lightning rod” weapon. + +Your magic hits around and even directly on target, but it just isn’t enough to destroy it. You then have that feeling of electricity in the air again. Your hair begins to stand up and this time thanks to your attempt to destroy the rod, the gnomes direct their next blast towards the Storm II. + +You see a bright flash and feel a brief sizzle throughout your entire body and then nothing at all. + +And you never do get the pleasure of executing Eldolith yourself when Warrick captures her alive.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 45 + +“…and even with your natural gifts and after your training is over in six years, your true service to the Empire will have only just begun. You will all be expected to perform to your fullest capabilities because as Eternals you are to be the very best that the Empire has to offer. And out there you will need to show that to our many enemies so that they never forget it. Duty, loyalty, valor and the will to survive, these are traits I expect to see in all of you for I am always watching. Remember this.” You say as your parting words to the new Eternals. + +“YES EMPEROR! LONG LIVE THE EMPIRE!” they all say in unison. + +Brenda tells them to take a brief break while she follows you out of the training center. + +“You’ve done a very good job with them Brenda.” You say. +“Thank you.” Brenda remarks. +“No, really. I know I sort of dropped this in your lap, but you’ve really taken the reins on this. I mean I couldn’t have done it better. From what I’ve seen they’re well on their way of becoming an effective fighting force AND you’ve managed to keep most of them alive in the process. Had it been me two thirds of that class probably would’ve been dead by now under my harsh training.” +“Ah, but those left alive would probably be more lethal than the ones I’ve trained.” Brenda points out. +“Perhaps, but they don’t need to be put through similar rigors that I faced, I just need them to be better than our enemies and loyal to the Empire. From what I’ve seen, I have no doubt that will be the case when they finally come of age.” +“Well despite my less unforgiving and more cooperative training methods, I can’t take all the credit for keeping most of them alive, their increased regeneration rates help in that regard. There was many times where I even thought a few of them had suffered fatal injuries only for them to get better given enough time. I believe whatever magic you infused during their tank time increased their regenerative abilities greater than our own.” +“Their reflexes are definitely better too. Even at this age, I could see that during the training demonstration. At the very least, they should be on par with Decena in that aspect when they grow up.” +“How is your one time pupil doing anyway?” Brenda asks. + +You hesitate a moment, since you’ve sort of wondered that yourself. You no longer get the letters you once did from Decena which were more expressive. Now she only sends you official battle reports. Obviously she’s dealing with the termination of your intimate relationship in a professional manner and is keeping your current relationship that way. + +That being the case, you give Brenda the safe answer because that’s genuinely all you know. + +“Oh, she’s still mostly combating the Torites. While the Battle of the Beasts three years ago pretty much broke their strength in the area, they still aren’t out of it yet. I’d push forward to eradicate them, but with the need for consolidation of our winnings as well as last years purges, we’ve had to halt expansion for the time being. That’s not even counting that the next place I want to turn my attention to are the city states south of the Broki province. I’ve had Eyes infiltrate most of them and they’re infested with svelk.” You say. +“Really? Like entire cities of them? I thought they were nomadic.” Brenda says. +“Not anymore apparently, but it isn’t actually entire cities, more like key positions of importance in the cities, but even one svelk is an infestation as far as I’m concerned.” You answer. +“Surprised you’re not just sending airships to bombard them.” +“I’m fairly sure I wouldn’t get them all if I did that. Airships while powerful are slow enough that any svelk would probably get the hell out of there before they even arrived. Besides, I’m not really looking to level the cities. Bombing one perhaps as an example, to get the rest to fall in line, but not all of them.” +“Assassination?” +“Assassinations would probably work better since the svelk direct such actions against each other on a semi-regular basis, would take a bit of time though since if a lot of them start dying suddenly, they’re going to know something is up and they’ll relocate from the cities. Still, I suppose if we timed it right…hmmm, maybe I’ll talk to Warrick about setting something up; in any case we still need to track down Eldolith. We know she is making her home in the cities, but she is proving to be completely elusive as far as pinning her down. Probably using a system of secret tunnels. Might be time to send in the kobold commandos to start digging around.” + +You and Brenda finish up your conversation with a couple of off topic subjects, but before you leave she says one last thing. + +“I know you already thanked me for my work with the new Eternals, but I wanted to take this opportunity to thank you. Thank you for giving me a new sense of purpose. I know these Eternals’ purpose is to loyally serve the Empire, but I feel like…I dunno…it’s silly.” +“No, what?” +“I sometimes feel like I’m their mother. I mean I’m not developing attachments to them or anything, but I feel like I’m doing all I can to make sure they survive in this world, because I really DO want most of them to survive. They represent the future of the Empire, and it will fall to them eventually to defend it.” + +You nod at Brenda’s remark and touch her arm. + +“And that, is why you were the best one for this job.” You say. +“I suppose another reason I’ve been feeling a little more positive lately is the fact that there are now more of us. Eternals, I mean. Our numbers were always so few, but now with these new ones, I don’t feel so alone I guess.” + +Brenda’s feelings on this are probably related to the loss of her husband as usual, but you can’t fault her for it. If this is something that helps her through the pain, then more power to her. Really you never gave it too much thought that there would be more of “you” around because as far as you’re concerned, “you” were always unique to begin with. You weren’t even supposed to be an Eternal, but here you are. + +The next bit surprises you though. + +“Oh and one more thing, the next time you see Warrick tell him, I’m sorry for being angry at him.” Brenda says. + +You smile. + +“I’m sure he’ll be glad to hear it.” You answer and leave. + +The next few days are actually spent working alongside Warrick to see if some sort of mass assassination attempt of the svelk would actually work. (You also relay Brenda’s message and just as you figured, he’s glad to hear it) + +“Wait, so some of the inhabitants in these cities are actually former Felkan citizens?” you ask Warrick. +“Yes and it looks like some of them have been willingly working with the svelk out of revenge. In fact I now believe that the saboteur that tried to destroy the old Storm was from one of these cities. A couple of the other tight-lipped dissidents we’ve had killed during the last purge I believe were from there too originally.” + +You shake your head. + +“Maybe I should just have the cities bombed out of existence after all.” You say with a sigh. +“What I don’t understand, is why we’re bumping into them only now. I mean these cities are so far away and the refugee Felkans would’ve not only had to travel through gnoll AND Torite territory at the time, but also the Broki Kingdom. Surely it would’ve been easier to put down roots there.” Warrick says. +“Well, who is to say some of them didn’t? You’re only coming across the more radical ones obviously. There may have very well been Felkans that just wanted to get away from the Empire and live a normal life. Granted if those individuals had just accepted Empire rule in the first, they could’ve done so anyway with little change, but that’s a different topic.” + +You continue. + +“Also the Broki Kingdom was fairly backwards and having strife of its own, I get the impression that the Felkans just wanted to get as far a way as possible from such things. This journey probably wasn’t without its hazards. Combine that with losing your homeland and anything else that might’ve been personal, it’s not hard to see where their hate would’ve festered to the point where the svelk took advantage of it. The ex Felkans are the tool that the svelk are manipulating. Maybe they don’t have a nation proper anymore, but it’s obvious that the svelk are definitely building the skeleton of one out of these cities states and they see us as the biggest threat to their new endeavors.” +“It isn’t just the svelk and these militant ex-Felkans we’ve discovered though, we recently came across something new. Something I know you’re going to want to hear before proceeding with any plan.” Warrick says. + +Warrick tell you that there is another community but far enough away to be fairly isolated from the rest of the city-states in the area, in fact the community makes its home in a lone mountain. + +“So…what they live in a cave?” +“Well not exactly. The Eyes have not been there, but apparently there is a whole city built into the mountain. Basically similar to what the derro do underground I guess, but they aren’t derro. They’re gnomes.” +“Gnomes?” +“Yes, and from what information we have gathered, they’re also from the former Felkan Kingdom. The funny thing is, they don’t seem to have much contact with the rest of the city states. We know that the gnomes trade with the various cities from time to time and we know that there must be humans living in this mountain since those are the ones that do the trading. The place is called New Dessle.” +“Hrm. Name of the former Felkan capital. So do you think they’re working with the svelk in this conspiracy?” you ask. +“We don’t know. Like I said, all we know is that they trade sometimes, it seems to be mostly minerals and it’s fairly infrequent. If they are in league, they’re keeping it fairly secret from anyone.” + +Gnomes. That puts a slightly different spin on everything. Between the svelk and the gnomes, you’ve got two of the most manipulative and smartest races working together to possibly destroy you. + +Regardless of whether or not the gnomes are actually involved, it still would be best to gather more information, perhaps even more so. + +“Until we’ve got more information, we’re going to assume the gnomes are just the occasional trading partners. While MAYBE they’re indirectly helping by trading material to these svelk influenced cities, I’d rather we deal with the immediate suspects first. Besides attacking a damn mountain isn’t exactly in the budget right now.” You say. + +So you proceed with your plan. You keep the Eyes spying and gathering information and keep your own internal security tight. You also start having kobolds digging tunnels under the cities. + +A few weeks pass and you receive a message. A human rider dropped off a box in a village in the Broki province. Before riding off he stated to the nearby peasants that they needed to deliver that to their Emperor. The box was obviously leaking blood and when one of the braver soldiers opened it, there were several eyes inside. A bloody note attached stated a warning from “Domina” Eldolith that all spies from the Empire will be killed and any further unwanted aggression on the “Confederacy of Free Cities” would be an act of war. + +Never mind the fact that Eldolith started this by trying to assassinate you in the first place. + +“She can’t possibly be serious in taking us on. She may have discovered some of our spies, but we already know full well what her strength is and even with our reduced manpower right now we could take on the entire force of this so called Confederacy of Free Cities.” Warrick remarks. +“Oh I’m sure she know that. She’s backed into a corner and is doing typical svelk grand standing hoping it will work. To be quite honest I figured she’d eventually discover some of our spies eventually. The svelk aren’t stupid, but they served their purpose in information gathering and they probably distracted the svelk from possibly discovering our kobolds running around underground. You can start pulling out the rest of your Eyes, we’ll be attacking the cities soon. With any luck we won’t let a single svelk escape and we can wipe out the remainder of the ex-Felkans as well.” You say. + +Kivan is nearby probably waiting to get your attention for some domestic issue. Normally he just waits patiently, but this time he speaks. + +“Forgive my presumption my Emperor as I know war is your area of expertise, but what about the gnomes?” he asks. +“What about them? Our spies still have not uncovered anything that would suggest that they’re helping. Even the material that they’re trading couldn’t be considered dangerous for the most part.” Warrick answers. +“The gnomes will be dealt with later, Kivan. No need to worry.” You say. + +Kivan puts aside his scrolls and addresses you directly. + +“I have no doubt that will be the case my Emperor, however it is my concern that the Empire not take any more potential unnecessary losses. The Felkan War took a heavy toll on the Empire. A toll that was not necessary had our former Emperor acted more quickly on the matter. The same could be said for the Shadow uprising.” +“Watch your tone! YOUR current Emperor AND I both served to quell those incidents! Where were you? Counting beans? I suggest you stick to what you know advisor!” Warrick says raising his voice. +“You are correct Sightmaster, I AM an advisor. And as I said it is true, I am more of an expert in the mundane domestic affairs that keep the Empire running, I also have to deal with the effects these wars have on such things. If you attack now there will be hardship on the people, BUT our people are used to such things. What is a little more troubling is when unexpected problems pop up or long drawn out affairs.” +“So what are you exactly saying Kivan?” you ask. +“I’m saying that the gnomes can’t be trusted to live. When they rebelled against the Empire and ran away they managed to manipulate a collection of simple villages and towns and turn it into the Felkan Kingdom. Not only that, but they managed to build it up to the point where it actually surpassed the Empire technology wise and all of this was done in a fairly short period of time.” + +You continue to listen while Kivan expresses his point of view on this matter. + +“Perhaps the gnomes aren’t working with the svelk, but that’s not to say they aren’t still working against us. I can’t believe that they wouldn’t harbor some sort of revenge. I mean the ex-Felkans obviously do and all they lost were their homeland. The gnomes were systematically exterminated. I just believe that leaving the gnomes for later is going to give them more time to build up their defenses and just make it harder for the Empire to wipe them out in the future. Why take the chance?” + +Kivan does actually make a pragmatic point. While taking the city-states isn’t going to be too much of a problem, it’s still going to take time and manpower. Your main concern with them is making sure you get all the svelk (especially Eldolith) inside. Consolidating, settling, and rooting out problem people will all take time as well. And while you’re doing all that, the gnomes could be sitting in their mountain building some weapon (or weapons) of imaginable power. + +They already built an entire city in a mountain, who knows what the escaped gnomes have been working on since their exodus? +> Just focus on the city-states +Kivan may mean well, but you’ve got more experience in this matter. In fact you’re going to just find out what’s going on right now. + +“Warrick, we know where New Dessle is correct?” you ask. +“Yes, it’s the only large mountain south of the city states. I imagine the entrance is probably hidden, but I’m sure the kobolds could tunnel through with enough time.” +“That won’t be necessary. I’m sure the gnomes have several lookout points and will open up when they see me. I’m going to New Dessle.” + +At this point Kivan and Warrick are apprehensive about that idea. + +“Emperor, you can’t seriously mean going there by yourself!” Kivan exclaims. +“I agree, I mean if this is some sort of diplomatic mission you should at least take a retinue with you and even then I’d be against such a thing.” Warrick adds. +“I never said I was going alone, you’re coming with me, Warrick. I figure the two of us should be more than adequate to take on a mountain of gnomes if need be.” + +This remark is met with silence. + +“What? You’ve always said you wanted more work outside that office and get back in the middle of things, well here’s a big thing to get right in the middle of Warrick.” You say which causes Warrick to bow his head and put his fist to his chest. +“Apologies my Emperor. This offer was just very sudden and I was taken by surprise. Of course I shall accompany you and whatever we face shall be together. It will be an honor as always.” +“It is your choice my Emperor, but I still cannot encourage this idea.” Kivan remarks. +“Well your concern for my well being is noted. Come on Warrick we need to get underway as soon as possible.” You say. + +While you and Warrick prepare for your journey you also take the opportunity to start setting the stage for the attack on the Confederacy of the Free Cities. (Which you didn’t even know that’s what this little group of city-states was even called until Eldolith’s message). + +The only potential danger of the journey is the fact you’re going to have to ride through the Confederacy “territory” and while you’re fairly certain you’d be able to handle whatever they send at you, you don’t want to give them anymore reason to run off before you’re ready to attack, because you know that’s going to be the first thing the svelk do. They did with the Broki Kingdom after all. + +You and Warrick have a more or less uneventful journey however since you stick to the off beaten track and away from the cities patrol areas. The pair of you mostly pass the time speaking about matters of the Empire and this situation with the svelk and what to possibly expect with the gnomes. You do get the idea that Warrick is pretty happy about going on this trip. + +Eventually you get closer to the mountain, which no longer looms in the distance, but instead stands towering above you. It’s not the size of the ones in Rask, but it’s big enough that if the gnomes have built a city inside the thing, it would have to be quite large indeed. + +“Well, we’re here, any idea how to get inside?” Warrick asks. +“I figure I’d start shouting at the gnomes until they let me in.” you say. +“And if they don’t?” +“I guess I’ll start smashing holes into the side of the mountain with magic and let myself in.” + +“And maybe you better not, Eternal Emperor. Powerful you may be, I guarantee that even you would not take this mountain all by yourself, but I get the impression you’re not here for that.” A voice says coming from above you. + +You look up and see that several holes in the mountain have opened up with the barrels of rifles all pointing at you. And that’s just the ones you’re seeing, you imagine they probably got more. + +“Right you are gnome. I’m here to discuss the possible future of our relationship. So how about you open this mountain up and let us talk.” You shout. +“I have a better idea, how about you get the hell out of here before we blow your fucking head off!” a different voice shouts. +“We should just do it now! Why didn’t you let me shoot him as he approached!?” another voice says. +“Glenmore! Valen! Shut the hell up! Apologies Emperor, but as you might expect we’re not exactly trusting of the Empire given our history with it. In fact we’re not very trusting of anyone nowadays.” +“Well I can certainly understand that.” You remark. +“I thought you might. Hold on let me come to you.” The voice says which is followed by a lot of mumbling and whispering. + +“This isn’t exactly a good position we’re in.” Warrick says. +“Nonsense, we already got one to come out and talk. Probably a leader. We’re already making progress.” You say. + +You wait for about ten minutes still noticing that the rifles are still fixed on you. + +“Okay here I am, now we can talk.” A voice says and you turn around to see a gnome with a full face of gray facial hair. Typical of older examples of his race. He is dressed in fine (if dirty) clothing. + +“Hmmm, it would appear you must also have a system of tunnels and secret doors in the ground surrounding this mountain too.” You say. +“Indeed. Hate living like a derro at times, but with all the kobolds running around north lately…well best to be safe right?” +“Looks like you’ve thought of everything…” you say not knowing the gnome’s name. +“Oh, the name’s Klemto. Klemto Zookwinkle. But let’s get to it, I assume you’re here to see if we’re willing to surrender without a fight?” +“Not exactly, though that is a good subject to discuss later. What I was really here to ask is if you were in league with the svelk.” +“Oh goodness no! We trade with them at times, but only rarely and never anything they could use as a weapon! I believe we’d all sooner trust the Empire before we’d trust the dark elves. At least the Empire is up front about wanting to exterminate us.” + +You stop Klemto right there. + +“Okay, first of all there is no plan to exterminate the gnomes.” +“Could’ve fooled me given the information we’ve heard. Waging a genocidal war on the Torites. Even bombing other human nations into submission. Now you’re planning on annihilating the svelk, though I can’t say they’re the most sympathetic of beings. I know who you are Eternal. You were a general in the Felkan War. The old emperor’s right hand. In fact you even led captured gnomes and them to that infamous death camp called Gnome’s Home.” +“I did that once.” +“Oh, he did it once! And that makes everything better? Was that a bad attempt at an apology?” +“Of course not since I have nothing to apologize for. I was merely following orders. You want to know what I really think of your people? Nothing. You’re clever and you invent useful things. That’s it. I think your manipulation of the Felkans to protect yourselves was a useful survival strategy and one to be admired in some ways. Just like your mountain city here. I don’t have some burning great hatred for any of your kind. Personally I thought it was a waste of resources to ship you all off to Gnome’s Home just to go through the unnecessary process of banishing your souls to oblivion. But that’s what the Emperor wanted so that’s what happened.” + +Klemto lights up some sort of pipe as you talk and takes a puff before speaking. + +“So just following orders eh? Sounds about right. From what we know of you, you were and apparently still are an emotionless individual. That’s probably what makes you scarier than your former Emperor. At least he had an emotion. An irrational one, but it was something.” +“Oh he had a reason. And it wasn’t just the gnomes rebelling. Your last name, Zookwinkle isn’t unknown to me gnome.” You say. + +You stare at Klemto and he stares back. He instinctively knows that you know something concerning a female member of his family being involved with the Emperor in some way. Warrick just stands by looking a bit confused, but mostly more concerned about the guns overhead. + +“Heh, well grandma always did do what she thought was best for survival.” Klemto remarks. +“Well I suggest you follow in her footsteps then and do the same.” +“Don’t think you’re my type.” Klemto jokes nervously. +“Amusing, but you know what I mean.” You say seriously. + +Klemto wipes his forehead and begins puffing away again. + +“Look, we just want to be left alone. I mean do you really need us under your thumb too even with the countless slaves and subjects you already have?” +“Well since you bring it up, yes. If you’re under my rule, I can keep a closer eye on you. Not to mention your skills would be of great use to the Empire once again.” You answer. +“We were once under the old emperor’s rule too. You see how well that worked out.” Klemto remarks. +“He also was blinded by love at the time and as you pointed out, I am the emotionless one. His hatred of your people also caused him to make many mistakes. If you betray me in some way, rest assured I won’t bother going through some elaborate process of torturing you and destroying your souls. I’ll just have you run down and slaughtered wherever you may run to. Where you go in the afterlife is your own affair, but here in the land of the living, that’s my domain.” You say with a cold tone. + +Klemto is now contemplating the consequences of what may happen if he and his people try to resist when you eventually do come to stake claim on New Dessel. He’s pondering if they can kill you now before it even comes to that. It’s obviously that he doesn’t think they can or else they would’ve done it long before now. Klemto and the gnomes aren’t stupid, they know that the stories of what abilities you really possess are probably exaggerated, however that old fear that still lingers from their treatment by Casimir mixed with what they DO know what you’re capable of is still enough to stay their hand. + +And it is this fear that is making this all work in your favor. Just like you knew it would. Had the roles been reversed, you wouldn’t have hesitated. You would’ve killed yourself with a volley of rifle blasts and more as soon as you were in range. + +After pacing a bit, Klemto finally speaks again. + +“I’m going to have to talk this over with the rest of the council and while that’s more of a formality, most of them aren’t going to be happy... (Sigh) Okay, here it goes. We will capitulate to Empire rule and we’ll pay tribute. But we must remain in this mountain. Whatever it is that you need from us to serve the Empire, it will have to be here or at least within the area. Now if some individual wants to leave and help elsewhere in the Empire, then that’s his decision. But at no point will our people be forced to leave if they don’t want to. Also no other Empire citizens may enter this mountain either unless we allow it. This includes the army.” Klemto says. +“Hah! You must be joking.” You interrupt. +“I’m serious. Now I know you’ll need to keep an eye on us as you say, well your Eyes will be allowed in. As many as you want, but I assure you that it won’t be necessary since there will not be any attempts at betrayal.” + +While it would appear that Klemto is willing to capitulate, there are a lot of stipulations he’s making. Stipulations that imply he thinks he’s in the position to make. +> Walk away now +Without another word you cast a protective barrier around you and Warrick, which startles Klemto and definitely causes shouting from the other gnomes until Klemto waves them down. + +“Don’t worry gnome. My intention is not to attack you now as you are indeed correct that it would be stupid to attack a mountain all by myself. However your stipulations are presumptuous and foolish. I made this trip for YOUR benefit, not mine and you have squandered it with unreasonable demands.” + +Klemto stands silent. + +“I shall return to finish off the Confederacy of the Free Cities and then at some point we’ll pick this up again except I will not be so reasonable next time. Let us leave Warrick.” + +As Warrick and you leave, Warrick asks you a question. + +“I thought they’d be shooting at us by now.” +“They know it’s futile. Besides, even if they did, my barrier is more than enough to deflect bullets. Used it quite a bit during the Felkan War as you…” + +Before you can finish your sentence suddenly a huge blast of lightning from above hits the ground right near you. You’re protected of course by the barrier, but it’s so unexpected and startling that it actually causes you and Warrick to lose balance and unfortunately you to lose your concentration for a brief moment and your barrier goes down. + +“NOW!” you hear Klemto shout, while you’re still clearing the cobwebs. Several gnomes armed with repeating rifles pop up out of the ground and fire upon you. Warrick is struck in the head and killed instantly. + +You are hit in the body enough times to feel the pain of each bit of hot lead going in ripping up your insides and coming out the other end. Then much like your now dead brother in arms, you are hit in the head and killed leaving nothing behind but a bloody bullet ridden body with brains leaking out uselessly into the soil.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Kivan may mean well, but you’ve got more experience in this matter. In fact you’re going to just find out what’s going on right now. + +“Warrick, we know where New Dessle is correct?” you ask. +“Yes, it’s the only large mountain south of the city states. I imagine the entrance is probably hidden, but I’m sure the kobolds could tunnel through with enough time.” +“That won’t be necessary. I’m sure the gnomes have several lookout points and will open up when they see me. I’m going to New Dessle.” + +At this point Kivan and Warrick are apprehensive about that idea. + +“Emperor, you can’t seriously mean going there by yourself!” Kivan exclaims. +“I agree, I mean if this is some sort of diplomatic mission you should at least take a retinue with you and even then I’d be against such a thing.” Warrick adds. +“I never said I was going alone, you’re coming with me, Warrick. I figure the two of us should be more than adequate to take on a mountain of gnomes if need be.” + +This remark is met with silence. + +“What? You’ve always said you wanted more work outside that office and get back in the middle of things, well here’s a big thing to get right in the middle of Warrick.” You say which causes Warrick to bow his head and put his fist to his chest. +“Apologies my Emperor. This offer was just very sudden and I was taken by surprise. Of course I shall accompany you and whatever we face shall be together. It will be an honor as always.” +“It is your choice my Emperor, but I still cannot encourage this idea.” Kivan remarks. +“Well your concern for my well being is noted. Come on Warrick we need to get underway as soon as possible.” You say. + +While you and Warrick prepare for your journey you also take the opportunity to start setting the stage for the attack on the Confederacy of the Free Cities. (Which you didn’t even know that’s what this little group of city-states was even called until Eldolith’s message). + +The only potential danger of the journey is the fact you’re going to have to ride through the Confederacy “territory” and while you’re fairly certain you’d be able to handle whatever they send at you, you don’t want to give them anymore reason to run off before you’re ready to attack, because you know that’s going to be the first thing the svelk do. They did with the Broki Kingdom after all. + +You and Warrick have a more or less uneventful journey however since you stick to the off beaten track and away from the cities patrol areas. The pair of you mostly pass the time speaking about matters of the Empire and this situation with the svelk and what to possibly expect with the gnomes. You do get the idea that Warrick is pretty happy about going on this trip. + +Eventually you get closer to the mountain, which no longer looms in the distance, but instead stands towering above you. It’s not the size of the ones in Rask, but it’s big enough that if the gnomes have built a city inside the thing, it would have to be quite large indeed. + +“Well, we’re here, any idea how to get inside?” Warrick asks. +“I figure I’d start shouting at the gnomes until they let me in.” you say. +“And if they don’t?” +“I guess I’ll start smashing holes into the side of the mountain with magic and let myself in.” + +“And maybe you better not, Eternal Emperor. Powerful you may be, I guarantee that even you would not take this mountain all by yourself, but I get the impression you’re not here for that.” A voice says coming from above you. + +You look up and see that several holes in the mountain have opened up with the barrels of rifles all pointing at you. And that’s just the ones you’re seeing, you imagine they probably got more. + +“Right you are gnome. I’m here to discuss the possible future of our relationship. So how about you open this mountain up and let us talk.” You shout. +“I have a better idea, how about you get the hell out of here before we blow your fucking head off!” a different voice shouts. +“We should just do it now! Why didn’t you let me shoot him as he approached!?” another voice says. +“Glenmore! Valen! Shut the hell up! Apologies Emperor, but as you might expect we’re not exactly trusting of the Empire given our history with it. In fact we’re not very trusting of anyone nowadays.” +“Well I can certainly understand that.” You remark. +“I thought you might. Hold on let me come to you.” The voice says which is followed by a lot of mumbling and whispering. + +“This isn’t exactly a good position we’re in.” Warrick says. +“Nonsense, we already got one to come out and talk. Probably a leader. We’re already making progress.” You say. + +You wait for about ten minutes still noticing that the rifles are still fixed on you. + +“Okay here I am, now we can talk.” A voice says and you turn around to see a gnome with a full face of gray facial hair. Typical of older examples of his race. He is dressed in fine (if dirty) clothing. + +“Hmmm, it would appear you must also have a system of tunnels and secret doors in the ground surrounding this mountain too.” You say. +“Indeed. Hate living like a derro at times, but with all the kobolds running around north lately…well best to be safe right?” +“Looks like you’ve thought of everything…” you say not knowing the gnome’s name. +“Oh, the name’s Klemto. Klemto Zookwinkle. But let’s get to it, I assume you’re here to see if we’re willing to surrender without a fight?” +“Not exactly, though that is a good subject to discuss later. What I was really here to ask is if you were in league with the svelk.” +“Oh goodness no! We trade with them at times, but only rarely and never anything they could use as a weapon! I believe we’d all sooner trust the Empire before we’d trust the dark elves. At least the Empire is up front about wanting to exterminate us.” + +You stop Klemto right there. + +“Okay, first of all there is no plan to exterminate the gnomes.” +“Could’ve fooled me given the information we’ve heard. Waging a genocidal war on the Torites. Even bombing other human nations into submission. Now you’re planning on annihilating the svelk, though I can’t say they’re the most sympathetic of beings. I know who you are Eternal. You were a general in the Felkan War. The old emperor’s right hand. In fact you even led captured gnomes and them to that infamous death camp called Gnome’s Home.” +“I did that once.” +“Oh, he did it once! And that makes everything better? Was that a bad attempt at an apology?” +“Of course not since I have nothing to apologize for. I was merely following orders. You want to know what I really think of your people? Nothing. You’re clever and you invent useful things. That’s it. I think your manipulation of the Felkans to protect yourselves was a useful survival strategy and one to be admired in some ways. Just like your mountain city here. I don’t have some burning great hatred for any of your kind. Personally I thought it was a waste of resources to ship you all off to Gnome’s Home just to go through the unnecessary process of banishing your souls to oblivion. But that’s what the Emperor wanted so that’s what happened.” + +Klemto lights up some sort of pipe as you talk and takes a puff before speaking. + +“So just following orders eh? Sounds about right. From what we know of you, you were and apparently still are an emotionless individual. That’s probably what makes you scarier than your former Emperor. At least he had an emotion. An irrational one, but it was something.” +“Oh he had a reason. And it wasn’t just the gnomes rebelling. Your last name, Zookwinkle isn’t unknown to me gnome.” You say. + +You stare at Klemto and he stares back. He instinctively knows that you know something concerning a female member of his family being involved with the Emperor in some way. Warrick just stands by looking a bit confused, but mostly more concerned about the guns overhead. + +“Heh, well grandma always did do what she thought was best for survival.” Klemto remarks. +“Well I suggest you follow in her footsteps then and do the same.” +“Don’t think you’re my type.” Klemto jokes nervously. +“Amusing, but you know what I mean.” You say seriously. + +Klemto wipes his forehead and begins puffing away again. + +“Look, we just want to be left alone. I mean do you really need us under your thumb too even with the countless slaves and subjects you already have?” +“Well since you bring it up, yes. If you’re under my rule, I can keep a closer eye on you. Not to mention your skills would be of great use to the Empire once again.” You answer. +“We were once under the old emperor’s rule too. You see how well that worked out.” Klemto remarks. +“He also was blinded by love at the time and as you pointed out, I am the emotionless one. His hatred of your people also caused him to make many mistakes. If you betray me in some way, rest assured I won’t bother going through some elaborate process of torturing you and destroying your souls. I’ll just have you run down and slaughtered wherever you may run to. Where you go in the afterlife is your own affair, but here in the land of the living, that’s my domain.” You say with a cold tone. + +Klemto is now contemplating the consequences of what may happen if he and his people try to resist when you eventually do come to stake claim on New Dessel. He’s pondering if they can kill you now before it even comes to that. It’s obviously that he doesn’t think they can or else they would’ve done it long before now. Klemto and the gnomes aren’t stupid, they know that the stories of what abilities you really possess are probably exaggerated, however that old fear that still lingers from their treatment by Casimir mixed with what they DO know what you’re capable of is still enough to stay their hand. + +And it is this fear that is making this all work in your favor. Just like you knew it would. Had the roles been reversed, you wouldn’t have hesitated. You would’ve killed yourself with a volley of rifle blasts and more as soon as you were in range. + +After pacing a bit, Klemto finally speaks again. + +“I’m going to have to talk this over with the rest of the council and while that’s more of a formality, most of them aren’t going to be happy... (Sigh) Okay, here it goes. We will capitulate to Empire rule and we’ll pay tribute. But we must remain in this mountain. Whatever it is that you need from us to serve the Empire, it will have to be here or at least within the area. Now if some individual wants to leave and help elsewhere in the Empire, then that’s his decision. But at no point will our people be forced to leave if they don’t want to. Also no other Empire citizens may enter this mountain either unless we allow it. This includes the army.” Klemto says. +“Hah! You must be joking.” You interrupt. +“I’m serious. Now I know you’ll need to keep an eye on us as you say, well your Eyes will be allowed in. As many as you want, but I assure you that it won’t be necessary since there will not be any attempts at betrayal.” + +While it would appear that Klemto is willing to capitulate, there are a lot of stipulations he’s making. Stipulations that imply he thinks he’s in the position to make. +> Continue to negotiate +The fact remains; the full capabilities of New Dessle are still unknown and taking this mountain city would be extremely costly for the Empire, so you’re not going to dismiss Klemto’s stipulations yet, but you are going to come back with one of your own. + +“Very well, your terms are somewhat reasonable though we’re still going to have to hammer out some details, however I do want one thing from you right now.” You say. +“Oh? What’s that?” +“You will assist in attacking the Confederacy of the Free Cities.” +“...so you would call on our service already eh? Fine. We will assist, just let us know what exactly you want from us.” +“Nothing elaborate, I just want another army south of the cities in case some of the svelk try to escape that way. I don’t want a single one of them to get away. They’re a threat to the Empire and their constant manipulations need to cease being a thorn in my side. Too long they’ve gone unpunished for their treachery. Maybe I won’t be getting all of them on the world. But rest assured I WILL be getting ALL of them in this area.” +“I see. While you may not have any hatred for my race, you obviously do for the dark elves. It would seem the more things change, the more they stay same…(Sigh) Well better the svelk than us I suppose.” Klemto says. +“Glad you see the pragmatic side of this.” +“Oh I suspect I’ll be seeing the pragmatic side a lot in the future. Not how I wanted to spend the remainder of my years, but then this is really the only way. I’ve long since learned that opposing the Empire is futile. While it may eventually fall to internal or external forces, it probably isn’t going to be in my lifetime and I’m going to do everything within that time to make sure the gnomes stay out of harm’s way. If that means swallowing what little pride we might have left and willingly becoming the subjects of a nation that once enslaved us and then tried to systematically exterminate us, then that is what we will do.” + +Klemto finishes his little speech with another puff of his pipe. He looks defeated even though he’s come out fairly okay on this deal. Well at least you think so, obviously he feels differently. + +“You’ll be remembered as a savior to your people Klemto.” You say before you leave. +“I’ll probably be remembered as a collaborator, but I’m fine with it as long as they live to keep telling the tale of Klemto the traitor long after I’m dead.” + +At this point you and Warrick take your leave, the next time you look back, Klemto is gone and the mountain “windows” have all closed up as if everything was normal again. + +“You really think you can trust the gnomes?” Warrick asks. +“I trust them more now that we have a way in. I want as many Eyes as you can spare in that mountain. Perhaps over time we can pull some out if the gnomes do prove to be loyal and don’t complain too much, but we definitely want to at least gather every single bit of information we can on that place just in case the gnomes DO try to betray us in the future.” +“I’ll get on that, as soon as we return to the Empire. I shouldn’t have had the doubt, but I really thought this plan was going to go bad.” +“Don’t worry, I had the same feeling, but sometimes you just have to throw caution to the wind and attempt new strategies.” +“Well maybe I didn’t see any battle, but I was still glad to get out behind that desk. I thank you for that.” Warrick says. +“If you’d like we could always go try to take out one of the city states by ourselves. Has to be easier than an entire mountain.” + +You and Warrick laugh at this idea and head back to the Empire. + +A month passes and the war against the Confederacy of Free Cities is well underway. The odds are severely in your favor especially with the help of the gnomes who show up and you get a small indication of what exactly they have been working on. + +Some sort of powerful battle machine they call automatons. The best way to describe them is they’re golems except work under the power of steam, gears and technology rather than magic. A single automaton is an incredibly destructive force blowing holes in walls with their mounted cannons or just smashing them down with a hammer fist. + +The gnomes also bring out their lightning cannons that you remember during the Felkan War. It was a relatively new invention towards the end of that conflict, but it looks like the gnomes have perfected it their power. Your own inventors never could figure out how to create them though. (Even Elam was at a loss on how they did it without the use of magic) + +You’re sort of surprised they never created their own airships, but apparently they were in the process of doing so. In any case, whatever they’ve created and will create are yours to use now. + +The Confederacy of Free Cities doesn’t stand a chance and half of them are in ruins after it’s all said and done. That wasn’t the original intent, but at this point you’re not really concerned with conquering a few measly cities. You can always have new ones built now that you own the territory. What matters more is the eradication of the svelk menace. + +“We got her Emperor!” a soldier says running up to you in the middle of the burning ruins of Ryglik. +“Are you sure its her?” you ask +“Yes, Emperor. It’s Domina Eldolith. She was captured by the kobolds attempting to escape through a system of tunnels, she killed quite a few of them, but the little scalies managed to subdue her. She’s been yelling about being the grand domina of the free cities and a bunch of other stuff. Mostly demanding to be treated with the respect that a captured enemy of her stature deserves.” +“Unbelievable. Defiant and arrogant to the end. Wouldn’t be the svelk way otherwise. Well take me to her.” You say. + +You are lead to the former city hall and down into the basement where several kobolds are proding a bound Eldolith with sharp objects and laughing while she swears and curses at them. They see you and bow in reverence while excitedly looking for approval of their deed. + +“Capturr blak elf! For Emp! For Emp!” one of them says. +“Yes, and I will make sure you are awarded appropriately for your deeds. All of you, now leave I want to speak with this one alone. And do not interrupt me, no matter what you may hear. I will leave here when I’m ready.” + +The kobolds leave via the trapdoor in the floor, your human soldiers nearby head back upstairs. Eldolith looks at you as you approach her. It’s been a while since you’ve seen her, but she’s not looking her best right now. Her clothes are torn and wet, she’s covered in dirt and grime. She smells like she’s been running through a sewer. Superficial wounds are on her face and body. Her eyes are burning through you with an absolute hatred. + +And you love every moment of it. + +“If you think I’m going to beg for my life you’re sadly mistaken. I will NEVER give you that satisfaction. I am a svelk! My people…” + +You backhand Eldolith shutting her up. + +“Are dead. And if they aren’t, the ones we captured soon will be. You can stop playing the arrogant svelk Eldy. You’re scared of what is going to happen next. And you should be, because I’m going to revisit some old techniques your mother showed me once.” + +At this point Eldolith’s eyes widen and she tries to edge away when your hands start to touch her body. Suddenly you grip her throat. + +“Don’t move away from me bitch.” You say and look into her eyes. Gone is the hatred. Now you see the fear. + +“Now then, if you’re concerned that I meant a physical violation, I hate the break your dreams, but that won’t be happening. For one thing, your current stench is enough to give an orc pause. However after I’m done today, you will be wishing that I was displaying such a kindness to you. Begging. In fact I believe your earlier boast about not begging for your life was correct. You won’t be. You’ll be begging for your death. Now let us begin…” + +You pull out a small set of tools you brought for this occasion. To be honest you weren’t sure if you’d be lucky enough to capture Eldolith alive, but fortune smiled on you this day. + +You begin a brutal session of torture on Eldolith. You occasionally ask her for more information on where other svelk may be, but these are met with pathetic moans of denial of knowledge. + +“I DON’T KNOW ANYTHING!” Eldolith screams as another finger is cut off. +“At this point I actually believe you, but I don’t really care because this is amusing to me. Torturing a svelk. Not just any svelk though. One that tried to have me fucking assassinated on several occasions. Come on Eldy, you really can’t be surprised by my actions here. You svelk pride yourself on showing no mercy and revel in cruelty, I’d think you’d understand all this.” +“Who told you this? My mother?! And you believed her? What makes you think she wasn’t responsible and just put the blame on me?!” +“Well for one thing, your mother is a lot smarter than you and if she was planning to have me killed, I have to admit, she might’ve been successful. Fortunately that crazy bitch is obsessed with me, for some unknown reason…” + +At this point Eldolith starts coughing up blood while trying to laugh. + +“Something amusing? Have you finally gone mad from the pain?” you ask. +“Ha ha, (cough) you wish I was her right now. (cough) You’ll never get that satisfaction, she’s played you like a cheap lute since you’ve been born Eternal. Even now you’re doing her bidding. She just…” + +At this point Eldolith vomits a mixture of blood and bile on the floor. Some of it getting on your boots. + +“You were saying?” you ask, but Eldolith just breathes heavily not answering. + +“Well, you don’t really need this eye to tell me the rest of your thoughts.” You say and approach her again with a knife… + +By the time dawn comes, Eldolith is barely alive. She’s blind, missing an entire hand, her skin partially flayed, missing most of her teeth, she’s a bloody mess and her face doesn’t even resemble that of a svelk anymore. She’s long since proven your prediction correct and begged for death, which you’ve denied her. But even you have to move on some time. + +“I have to admit Eldy, I thought you would’ve been long dead by now. For someone begging for death, your body’s will to survive is strong. The funny thing is, I could easily heal most of you up and do this all over again, but honestly I think I’ve made my point. Besides I’d hate to shorten my own lifespan just for a little bit of amusement, which is getting boring now. Any last words?” + +Eldolith makes no sound, just shallow breathing. + +“Right then.” You say and put your mithral dagger to her throat. + +“You brought this on yourself.” You whisper in Eldolith’s hacked off ear and slash her throat at last putting her out of her living hell. + +When you exit the building, several officers say they’ve been wanting to speak with you about important matters of the aftermath of the war and similar matters concerning the newly acquired cities. Also the gnomes are wondering what your next orders are now since the enemy has been thoroughly eliminated. +While you certainly feel good about your victory and your recent indulgence, you can’t help but wonder now if Eldolith was just a convenient scapegoat. Eldolith and her sect of svelk obviously still had to die and you’re more than certain that she was involved in trying to have you killed, but who is to say that it wasn’t Semra pulling the strings all along? + +In any event, looks like playtime is over. Back to business as usual. +> Years pass... +Year 50 + +As you look at a large map of the known continent of Evigrus you realize that while its been fifteen years since you took the throne as Emperor you’ve already more than doubled the size of the original nation. You’ve also successfully managed to have your ships navigate most of its coastline as well. Even northern most Rask was mapped by your airships. + +Quite frankly that’s the main problem you have right now in general you’ve conquered most of what is worthwhile already on this continent. Anything remaining isn’t exactly inhabitable or worth the time to spend on conquest and even in some of those cases, kobold citizens have slowly been making small underground communities in places where nobody above ground would want to live such as the Delerg jungle. + +However there are always new lands to conquer. + +To the farthest part west lies the only nation on Evigrus left besides the Empire, the Kingdom of Nakol. Nakol has had the benefit of being relatively isolated from the rest of the continent due to the great mountain range that blocked it from the Children of Tor. Your people have only recently had formal contact with it shortly after the defeat of the Torites, though even that was by ship, though now that the Torites are no longer a true threat, small passes through the mountains have been found (Though they’re not exactly safe and Nakol certainly keeps their side very well guarded). + +The nation isn’t quite as large as the Empire, but its still bigger than the old Felkan Kingdom and certainly big enough to defend itself to make aggression very costly, so far however the limited contact you’ve had with said nation hasn’t been hostile. Oddly enough he’s wanted to meet you as he has heard so much about the “Great Emperor of the East” and very much wants to visit the Empire. + +Normally you probably wouldn’t consider such diplomatic meetings as it has never been your style, however this ruler is also known as the “Immortal Sorcerer King” and that is something that has gotten your attention. + +In any event, there are other matters that require your attention and this is where the “other land” to conquer comes in… + +Last year your ships finally found a large landmass to the east. Up until then, only a few islands of little worth had been discovered. This new territory from what you’ve been told is similar to Delerg in some ways as there are large portions of jungle. However there are several primitive civilizations living on this land mass. While they are similar to humans in some ways, they have features that certainly aren’t such as having four arms and multiple sets of eyes like an insect. Even their language is a bit insect like as you’ve been told it’s more a “chittering” sound. The most prominent of these groups are known as the Iznac. + +The Iznac like most that seem to inhabit this world before the Empire enlightens them are a superstitious lot that worship their backwards gods by sacrificing others to them. Sometimes this is their own people, but most of the time its captives of the weaker tribes that live on the same continent. Barbarians they may be, they have built cities where their temples seem to be the biggest and most important buildings in them. It would appear they are a theocracy. + +The Iznac so far have been actively hostile towards your people though perhaps wise enough not to attack them outright. Your own people have not made much progress towards the inner part of the new continent due to this fact and they don’t have enough manpower to do so anyway. The only thing they can do is hold up in the newly built outpost and hope they aren’t attacked by an overwhelming number of Iznac (or any other tribe since it isn’t as if the frog like people called the Glip that also inhabit the continent are any friendlier) + +You might be inclined to leave this new continent and its inhabitants alone until you can focus more attention on them, however it’s also been reported that the continent has a seriously unexploited resource potential of valuable minerals and that’s something you could always use more of especially if you’re going to have to fund another war with Nakol in the near future. + +There is also the matter of the orc and kobold population to think about. Both are becoming a problem. The orcs have finally increased their numbers to a point where they can become a viable fighting unit like they were in old days. In fact you planned for that to happen anyway. What you didn’t plan for is that you’d have a period of peace with no major wars to fight! Reports of increased orc criminals or just general chaotic misconduct in Rask are becoming more common. You need to start giving them something to go fight. + +The kobolds aren’t so much of a problem as they tend to live underground and generally stay out of the way due to that fact. But with no war to whittle down their numbers they’re breeding at a rate that’s starting to worry your human subjects. You admit that with as many as the little bastards around they could become a serious threat if they ever became rebellious. Fortunately they’re actually less of a problem than any of your other subjects so you’re actually not worried about them yet. + +Still, it seems like a logical solution to start sending large portions of both populations to tame this new continent. Of course if events dictate that you need to war with Nakol soon, then that leaves you with less soldiers on the home front and you’re also fighting a two front war. + +There’s also another factor to consider that the new Eternals will be ready next year. Brenda’s training has ensured that most of them survived and they are already displaying the eagerness to serve the Empire. Elam’s also been working with the gnomes to perfect the automatons. + +You make your decision that with these other factors in play that you’re relatively safe in sending your orcs and kobolds to this new continent. However, you’re going to need disciplined leaders though for this task. + +For the orcs you look for the highest ranked and most respected by his people. The only name that catches your attention when looking through the records is Flog. Flog apparently served most of his military career in Rask fighting ogres, giants and the old barbarian tribes even during the Felkan War. He also served under Kane and was spoken highly of in a few old reports. Kane mentioned that besides Captain Gruz he never encountered an orc almost as intelligent. Apparently he’s been doing a lot of breeding after the Felkan War. He has many children. + +As for kobolds, the records are much sketchier. Kobolds may be loyal and contributing members of Empire society, but none of them really seem to stand out much and if they do, they all died in battle. Plus due to their numbers they probably have many of their kind that could be considered “leaders” within various circles. Eventually you settle on one that distinguished herself during the Tor War. Snilkez’ka managed to take out a manticore all by herself and lead a successful underground sneak attack against a band of minotaurs with only a few casualties. Given the size difference in both cases not to mention that even human officers had problems accomplishing such things, its safe to say that she comes the closest to being a hero among her people. In fact you’re wondering why she was never brought to your attention before. + +Of course you can’t just send these two races out on ships to a new continent, which you barely have any control over so you’re going to need at least one company of “normal” humans to keep a semblance of order or rather someone better than a human. + +The only choice would be Decena. She’s a well-respected leader by all and more than proven herself. While not having Decena immediately available here will be something you’ll have to compensate for, you’ll at least have confidence that she’ll keep things orderly on this new continent. + +Having made your decision you meet up with the three to explain the situation, their reactions are varied. + +“Flog will serve all powerful Emperor, but not fooled by intentions. You trying to get rid of orcs again, just like in Felkan War.” Flog says. +“Flog if I was trying to get rid of the orcs, I’d just have you all strung up and be done with it. I’m sure you’re aware that’s within my power to do so. I’m not even sending all of the orcs anyway, just most of them. I need tough soldiers that can withstand this harsher continent and its equally harsh inhabitants. I already sent humans and you see how well that worked out. Quite frankly I think your people would be best suited for this type of thing. You get to prove just how orcly you actually are. You are an orc aren’t you? Are you not looking forward to the possibility of killing several enemies or dying in a glorious battle?” you say. +“Killing enemies yes, dying not so much. It is a misconception that orcs deliberately seek death in battle. Flog however is getting old, so death is close anyway. Either death in battle, death by children who will inevitably challenge Flog, or death by old age. The last is the least preferable, so perhaps this will be an opportunity. Not sure about the little scaly runts you’re sending. Never fought along side them before, but Flog has heard of their great viciousness in battle. Also heard many glorious things of General Decena and her many victories. Will be an honor to fight along side her.” + +At this point the kobold leader, Snilkez’ka makes a small hissing growl like sound at Flog, probably due to his runt comment. + +“Don’t worry about us orc. Small we may be, but we’ll be here long after the enemy has already butchered your old greenskin ass.” Snilkez’ka remarks, which causes a chuckle from Flog who merely states that perhaps he’ll enjoy fighting alongside her people after all. + +Snilkez’ka doesn’t look as amused, but says nothing else other than to directly address you and say that she will make sure that she will bring the fear of the Empire into the hearts of the enemy. You nod and say you know that she will. Always nice to have loyalty and enthusiasm. She’s very well spoken for a kobold. + +The latter one of those traits seems to be lost on your last leader, Decena who isn’t saying anything and only succeeds in looking slightly troubled by her new assignment. + +“Decena, is there anything you’d like to say? You’re going to be in charge of this campaign.” You ask. +“No. Nothing except I look forward to leading the Empire into victory and claiming this new continent in your name, my Emperor.” + +That sounded very… formal. Granted that’s a good thing, especially in front of the other two leaders to keep it professional. Still, you know something is wrong and you know it has something to do with your past relationship. If you were the cautious sort you’d just leave it be, but if something is going to be a major problem you need to know now. + +“Good, you’ll all be shipping out in about a week. Everyone is dismissed, though I want to speak to you Decena about something.” You say calmly and wait for the other two leave. + +Now it’s just you and Decena alone in the room. This hasn’t occurred in years, and this situation is very different. Decena however maintains a very formal stance and does not falter from it. + +“I sense something is wrong.” You say. +“There is nothing wrong my Emperor.” Decena remarks. +“Okay stop with the stiff soldier act, it’s just us here.” + +This remark breaks Decena’s facade of being “okay.” + +“I don’t understand what you want from me my Emperor. You told me we were to remain just subordinate and master. I am carrying out this order to the best of my abilities.” +“Oh no, do not attempt to play word games, you know what I mean. You’re obviously upset about this assignment.” +“…I’m obeying orders aren’t I? Isn’t that all that is required of me?” Decena says with an exasperated tone. +“For you? No. I need you to do more than just obey, I need you to be thrilled with this assignment. Like you USED to be. Remember?” +“Apologies, but I don’t think I can given the situation.” +“What situation? Us? Look Decena I know you’re still upset about that, but you’re going to have to be an Eternal and get over it.” +“Oh yes, I’m an Eternal alright, at least until next year. Might as well sweep me away to a far off land now and be done with it.” Decena remarks. +“What are you talking about?” +“I’m talking about the new Eternals that are scheduled to be ready next year! They’ll be the new thing and I’ll just be old news off in some forsaken land surrounded by scalies and green skinned idiots. In the meantime perhaps you’ll even find another young girl like I was and take her under your guidance too…” +“Decena…” +“Well I suppose at least she’ll be happy for a few years even if she’ll be a naïve fool the entire time.” + +“Decena STOP! Just stop right now!” you say. + +Decena does so, but her eyes say it all. You knew she was probably going to be upset for a while, but it’s turned into bitterness. + +You pace a bit and exhale rubbing your hand over your face. + +“Decena, your beliefs that you’re going to be somehow replaced next year are far from the truth. First of all, I’m not giving any of them any extra training because obviously I’m a lousy teacher given what happened between us.” + +Decena stays silent. + +“Second of all I picked you for this mission because you’re the only one I trust to carry it out. Just like I trusted you to continue your battles against the Torites and you saw to their practical extinction. I know you can get this job done and you’re not going to be over there forever you know. I anticipate war with the Nakol Kingdom at some point and when that happens who do you think is going to have to lead all the baby eternals into battle? You of course. For now though I need you where you’re going to be the most invaluable and that’s in this new land.” + +You reach out to Decena and lift her face up to look into her eyes. + +“I need you for this just like I’m always going to need you. You will never be replaced.” + +Decena’s expression turns back to one of sorrow. Her eyes water, but she does not cry out. + +“I…I’m sorry my Emperor…I shouldn’t…have…” +“Forget it Decena you don’t need to apologize. (Sigh) If anything I should be apologizing to you. As I said, I still feel you’re the best person for this mission, but if you wish, you may decline this mission and I will find someone else. And there is no need to worry, this will not be a bad reflection on you in any way. If it’s going to make you happier to stay here, then I’d rather you be happy since it’ll make you a better leader. Won’t do anyone any good if you don’t have the best mindset.” + +Decena shakes her head. + +“No, I’ll go. For the good of the Empire I’ll go. Staying here would serve no purpose for what I really want is not to be no matter what the situation. I suppose I just overreacted. And you weren’t a lousy teacher. Anyone would be lucky to learn under you. I was.” Decena says. +“Yes, well as I said, nobody ever will again. You were my first and last pupil. You’ll always be special in that regard. Now are you absolutely sure, you’re going to be okay with this assignment?” you ask. +“I will my Emperor. And I will bring glory to the Empire.” Decena remarks. +“Good. I knew you were strong enough to see this through and I know you’ll do the Empire and me proud.” + +You end you comment with a small kiss to her cheek. It’s only a shadow of what she really desires, but it’ll be enough to get her through this. + +After Decena leaves, you think about how you’ve permanently damaged that girl due to your poor judgment and lack of willpower all those years ago. You then think about how easy it is to convince her into anything due to that same lack of willpower years ago. She still worships and loves you and probably always will no matter what. Despite everything, your conditioning was successful. + +By the end of the week your fleet to the new continent (you’re calling it Nyttrus) is on its way to properly claim it for the Empire. You don’t know how long the Iznac are going to be able to stand up against your forces, but hopefully if your people break them, the other tribes will fall in line. +> Years pass... +Year 52 + +“The Sorcerer King still wants to meet with you my Emperor, he says he really wants to visit Empire lands and wishes to reassure you that there doesn’t need to be any increasing animosity between the two nations.” Kivan says. +“(Sigh) Again? That’s what like the sixth letter he’s sent? Never have I known a leader whose country isn’t on the verge of destruction so eager to be friends. And even when said countries have been on that verge of destruction some have preferred death over surrender. Makes me suspicious of him on general principle.” You say. +“Yes, I can see where you would be apprehensive my Emperor. Nevertheless I believe you should at least give a response this time rather than ignoring him. Uh, just a suggestion though. You may of course do what you wish as is your will.” + +Kivan’s right in that you probably should respond; it’s been long enough. You just wonder if its time to respond with force. The time is starting to feel right. The new Eternals are finally done with their training and are eager to be given their purpose. Elam and the gnomes have just finished working on their new inventions. It would seem now would be as good as time as any to strike. It’s just unfortunate that Decena is still in Nyttrus since you could use her here. + +However you’re still somewhat intrigued by this Sorcerer King who also claims “immortality” in his official title. + +You wonder if he is like Casimir in some way. Perhaps another necromancer from Mortos? You haven’t thought about it for a while, but age is starting to catch up to you. While you’re still fit and stronger than the average person your age, you’re starting to feel the aches at times. The idea of “immortality” is starting to appeal to you especially considering you’ve accomplished so much. Are you to just lose it all due to the ravages of old age? You don’t even have the benefit of a long life span, you might be a powerful wizard in your own right and you might be more than human, but when it comes down to it, you’re going to have much limited life span than Casimir did. + +Of course he most certainly won’t be forth coming with any such secret to extending one’s life span, but maybe you can at the very least get a good idea of who you’re dealing with. (And it may just be a “boastful” title anyway and he’s not actually immortal which would be good to know as well) + +“Kivan, let the sorcerer king know that I’ll be making arrangements to meet with him and allowing him safe passage to visit, but there are going to be some stipulations…” + +Basically you tell the sorcerer king that he can bring some of his personal guard, as well as whatever belongings he feels is necessary. + +The sorcerer king returns your message with a gleeful acceptance and states that he wishes to come by ship within the week and dock at your biggest port in Nalin, from there he will meet you and you can travel to the capital together. You return that message and state that will be fine. + +With this meeting underway you get things prepared for extra defense. Naturally Warrick and the Eyes work hard to make sure everything vital is extra secured, but you also have Galen and what few mages remain posted in various areas to act as magic monitors since your visitor is supposed to be a powerful wizard and all. + +To be quite honest you aren’t sure what to expect yourself, as you have no real knowledge of the man or what he’s capable of save for rumors. You spend some time honing your own spell abilities just in case. + +On the day of the arrival, you have Brenda and Warrick (And several soldiers) accompany you near the docks in the Nalin city of Pivod. It’s probably the first time all three of you have been together since the new eternals completed their training. + +“I’m surprised you’re agreeing to this meeting. When the new Eternals were done with their training last year I thought for sure we’d be going to war with Nakol soon.” Brenda remarks. +“I probably would have, but Nakol isn’t going to be an easy conquest. It’s going to be costly. I wanted to make sure we had that extra resource influx and gold income coming from Nyttrus. Plus the gnomes were working on their new inventions, which would contribute greatly to an upcoming war effort. Thought it might be best to wait until we had all our forces brought to the table. This meeting though, well might as well get a good idea of who we’ll be dealing with.” +“But won’t he be doing the same thing?” +“True, but it hardly matters. He’s not going to have access to anything sensitive. All that stuff is in New Dessel. He already knows he’s potentially facing a losing situation. The fact remains that even if the war was costly for us, we’d still win. He may be a wizard of great power. Perhaps even as great as the old Emperor, but there is nothing implying that the rest of his nation is anything else than average at best. As I’ve heard, he’s the only wizard he even allows in his nation. Smart in some ways I suppose as it prevents anyone else from becoming as powerful as him, but it cripples his resources in the long run and displays to me a man who is very fearful of losing his advantage. They’ve only just recently created their own gunpowder weapons. They have no airships, they have nothing like any of our technological wonders.” +“Hrm, what about their fleet?” Warrick says and points to a large ship approaching which can only be the Sorcerer King. It is much bigger than the sea going ships you have. Even the ones you sent to Nyttrus weren’t as large. This “King’s Ship” is ridiculous. You don’t think it’s going to fit in the damn harbor. + +As it gets closer, the ship is also well armed with cannons, but also lavishly decorated. You don’t really see the point in decorating a ship, which is obviously designed with war in mind. Then again you’ve also heard of how Nakol tends to place visual aesthetics over practical ones most of the time. Truly a sign of frivolousness and decadence. + +Fortunately the giant ship manages to dock without destroying them and the gangplank lowers. You can’t even see who is aboard the ship due to its great height, but a fancy dressed individual walks down with two trumpeters behind him. + +“And now it is your privledge and honor to receive the Immortal Sorcerer King of the Great Nation of Nakol and all his glory!” the man shouts and the trumpeters begin to play. + +A line of people begins to march down the plank. First it’s the guards who are dressed in some sort of ceremonial armor that is obviously for show. Then some other people come down. They don’t look like soldiers or even advisors, they’re barely dressed and they consist of young males and females. They even down a little dance in front of the lot of you. + +“What the hell? Who are all these people?” Warrick asks. +“If I had to guess, probably some sort of pleasure girls and boys.” You say. +“I thought you told him to keep his entourage light?” Brenda asks. +“I did, but as you can see, the fool has got to have his fun. The man himself better come out soon, because I’m not waiting around here for my health.” + +Sure enough right after you make that statement a figure appears at the edge of the ship. He’s a swarthy man wearing a very luxurious looking robe and a crown encrusted with jewels. A pair of servants hold his robe as he makes his way down the plank. + +He certainly carries an air of self-importance and royalty about him. When he approaches, you get a closer look at him. You imagine that he has to be at least as old or maybe even older than you, but his face does not display any signs of age. The only outwardly strange thing about him is that his eyes are an odd purple color. He may or may not be immortal, but he’s certainly using some sort of magic to make himself look young. + +And here you are looking almost the exact opposite. You’re wearing practical armor, have a sword hanging by your side and absolutely no frills. When you and the Sorcerer King finally come face to face, he looks you up and down in a way that almost implies he’s attracted to you. + +“Well, Emperor of the East at last we meet. So stoic and rugged! I heard that about you. I like it. Not my taste, but I believe it works for you. And my, look at all your little soldiers set out just for my arrival. I also detect a few…yes three mages in the nearby area. Guess you want to make sure I don’t secretly cast any aggressive spells eh? Smart. I’m flattered that you believe me so dangerous, but all of this was hardly necessary, as I said I only wish for peace between our two nations.” The Sorcerer King says while using a lot of flamboyant hand gestures. + +He hasn’t been here a few seconds and already he’s starting to irritate you. + +“Yes, well we’ll speak on that later, right now you’re going to have all your little concubines and some of your soldiers to get right back aboard that ship. I told you that you could have a personal guard not a small company and a few personal belongings.” You say. +“But these lovelies ARE my personal belongings. Was I wrong in believing that the Empire does not engage in such institutions?” the sorcerer king asks holding on to one of his young male “belongings.” +“If you’re referring to slavery, we’ve reserved it to criminal scum and prisoners of war nowadays as punishment for defying or insulting the Empire with their dissention or outright hostility. In any case I’m not having extra people running around and having to worry about them being a security risk, they stay on board your ship.” + +The Sorcerer King frowns a bit. + +“(Sigh) Very well I understand your concerns for security, but I must say you’re being a terribly dull and inflexible host right now. What about my two closest servants? Surely you would not deny me them?” +“You are seriously testing my already uncharacteristic hospitality. (Sigh) Fine, you can have your two robe carriers, or whatever they are to you.” +“Well I thank you for your permissiveness in this regard.” + +At this point the Sorcerer King tells most of his people to get back on the ship and reassuring them that he’ll make it up to all of them later. You on the other hand tell Warrick that you want that ship closely watched and if anyone is seen trying to exit it, they’re to be shot immediately. Both Warrick and Brenda leave your company to attend to their other duties. No reason for all of you to suffer this fop. + +What transpires for the rest of the day is putting up with the Sorcerer King’s annoying demeanor. He speaks and acts in a way that you dislike intensely. The man only seems to primarily discuss his sexual habits and you have to keep the conversation back on topic many times. + +Despite his evasiveness (or rather his obsession with his sex life) you do manage to get something out of him. He says that he’s never been to the “mythical” Island of Mortos having lived in Nakol all his life. (After you mention a bit about it, he says it sounds like an awful place that he hopes to never set foot on) He also admits that he knows the Empire is much stronger than his own nation, but still hopes that it doesn’t come to war as he claims he’s a lover not a fighter. He even says he’s willing to work out some sort of agreement as long as he can stay in power of Nakol. + +“Perhaps, if we paid some sort of tribute? I heard that you worked out a similar agreement with what are those adorable little mustached men that build all sorts of strange gadgets? Oh yes, the gnomes.” The sorcerer king says. +“Hrmm. Well one thing you need to take into consideration. New Dessel is a single city. Granted it’s a mountain, but its still a single location that we keep a very close eye on. There is also the fact that there aren’t many of them. However the most important thing in their favor is that they have a useful trade that contributes to the Empire greatly. Great enough that I’m willing to let them have a little extra autonomy.” + +The Sorcerer King listens with apprehension, as he knows you’re going to now explain why you’re less willing to make the same deal with Nakol. + +“Nakol on the other hand is a very large nation with a very large population. Call me paranoid, but I’m far from comfortable from giving something that much freedom. And your nation despite being large offers nothing really save for your resources, territory and obviously fat treasury. And I’d rather have those without having to ask at all. Face it, this is beginning of the end for Nakol independence. However there is one thing that stands out that would at least save your own skin and let you keep your position in this upcoming new order.” +“Oh? And what is that?” +“Your immortality, well at least your supposed immortality. I have my doubts. I imagine the only way to truly test such a thing would be to well…kill you.” + +With a few eye glances to your own soldiers and a couple of swift punches and kicks, you get the sorcerer king to the floor and hold your dagger to his throat. His personal guard are slaughtered and two Eyes hold the sorcerer king’s arms just in case he tries to cast a spell. + +“Utter anything that remotely sounds like an incantation and your tongue is the first thing I cut off.” You say. +“Stop! Stop! Please don’t kill me!” the sorcerer king exclaims. +“The fear on you is overwhelming. You’re not immortal. Guess I have just been wasting my time…” you say. +“No! Wait! (gasp) Maybe (wheeze) I’m not immortal, but I do have knowledge of obscure arts that can keep you young! I mean surely that must be worth something?” + +You relax your blade a bit. + +“Speak quickly sorcerer.” +“Thank you. (Whew) Yes, it’s true that I do not have proper immortality, but I do have eternal youth and what commoners really know the difference right? It’s a very complex ritual though. The type of magic involved hasn’t been practiced in who knows when. When I was genuinely a younger man a century ago, and first found the scrolls in some forgotten cave I only half believed of the power they would bring. I nearly died in the process and I paid a price, but it was worth it as you can see the results.” + +You’re still a little leery… + +“Please! I’m telling the truth! Look, we can perform the ritual right here if you want! I can tell you what to do and get, but we’re still going to have to wait until tomorrow at least since the ritual must be done at a certain time of night and that time has currently past unfortunately.” +“All right, you’ve bought yourself a little time, but I’m not going into this blind. Tomorrow you are going to tell me EVERYTHING about this ritual and the price you had to pay, because let’s just say I’m not a stranger to complex rituals and the repercussions involved.” + +You have the sorcerer king shown to his room. You also have him bound, gagged AND watched by several Eyes and a couple of mages. You are not taking any chances. + +You don’t get to sleep that night in your own room; you’re still pondering what this eternal youth ritual might entail. Casimir knew something similar to it, but that was due to necromantic magic and that obviously still had its limits. This apparently is different, you wonder how though. + +“Mmm, there he is, my ambitious little Eternal desperately trying to unlock the secret to immortality so that he may truly live up to his name. If you wanted to know so bad, you should’ve just asked mommy.” You hear a voice say behind you, which causes you to freeze. + +It’s Semra, and she’s in your room. + +This isn’t an “illusion” either. You know it isn’t because you just felt her hot breath in your ear followed by a gentle lick. + +How she managed to actually sneak in here is irrelevant. You’re in an unsafe position and you can only imagine that this has something to do with the sorcerer king. This whole visit might finally be showing its true colors… +> Attack quickly +You’ve got one chance… + +You move your slam the back of your head into Semra’s face. You’re fairly certain you at least hurt the side of her face even if you didn’t manage to break her nose. + +You pull out your dagger and attempt to follow up your attack, but Semra has already jumped back out of your reach. + +“Foreplay is it? Okay then!” Semra says and pulls out her own weapon. + +The pair of you clash which results in several light scratches and superficial wounds for both of you all within the course of a few minutes. Semra is playing with you, but you’re not playing anymore, and the next time you’re able, you cast a lightning bolt at her, though she blocks it with her own magic field. + +“Enough! I’m not here to kill you, you id…” Semra starts to say, but you’re done listening to her and press forward with another attack. Semra casts a holding spell at you in attempt to stop your advance, but you’re not a sixteen-year-old apprentice anymore. You feel the affects and it slows you down, but with your own magic you shake off the affects and tackle Semra to the floor. + +“Nice to see you’ve learned, but you still don’t know shit compared to me!” Semra exclaims and she drops her guard completely which results in you stabbing her in the stomach, however she puts her hands to her mouth and with a blowing motion some sort of gas emanates and you are hit directly in the face with it.” + +Poisonous gas always has been something you’ve been a little susceptible to, even if the poison itself isn’t enough to kill you, it’s still enough to cause you discomfort and gag. This is no exception, but it’s a little worse this time. + +You roll off of Semra gagging. You start coughing up blood, though you can’t see that you are, because the gas has completely blinded you. In between the coughing you go back to trying to grab at Semra who is having her own problems with a dagger in her stomach. + +“Let me go you fucking crazy…” Semra starts to say, but your wild swings and grabs connect with her mouth, unfortunately this also results in a bite from her. You manage to avoid losing a couple of fingers completely by blindly (and luckily) connecting your other fist with her face. You’re blind and still having breathing difficulties but you manage to wrap your hands around Semra’s neck. + +“Get OFF of me!” Semra says and you feel a burning heat engulf your head. You scream and futilely try to beat the flames out that are now destroying your face. + +“And I’m sure that will have alerted the guards.” You hear Semra say as she manages to crawl away from you at last. + +“I came here to fucking help you! As I ALWAYS do! (Sigh) Fuck…my stom…(groan) y’know what? I’m done with trying to help you, you’ve never been grateful and I can see you never will be. You’ll always be short sighted and never learn from your mistakes. I can do this without your help and you wouldn’t be much good in your current condition anyway. Might as well carry out Mortimer’s original assignment. Hope that effeminate little fop has gotten away by now.” + + +You are still howling in pain and making incoherent groans, but you try to focus on healing yourself. It isn’t to be however. Healing such grievous wounds would take time and that isn’t time you have right now. + +Semra finishes you off by giving her dagger back to you, which results in it going through your neck.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 52 + +“The Sorcerer King still wants to meet with you my Emperor, he says he really wants to visit Empire lands and wishes to reassure you that there doesn’t need to be any increasing animosity between the two nations.” Kivan says. +“(Sigh) Again? That’s what like the sixth letter he’s sent? Never have I known a leader whose country isn’t on the verge of destruction so eager to be friends. And even when said countries have been on that verge of destruction some have preferred death over surrender. Makes me suspicious of him on general principle.” You say. +“Yes, I can see where you would be apprehensive my Emperor. Nevertheless I believe you should at least give a response this time rather than ignoring him. Uh, just a suggestion though. You may of course do what you wish as is your will.” + +Kivan’s right in that you probably should respond; it’s been long enough. You just wonder if its time to respond with force. The time is starting to feel right. The new Eternals are finally done with their training and are eager to be given their purpose. Elam and the gnomes have just finished working on their new inventions. It would seem now would be as good as time as any to strike. It’s just unfortunate that Decena is still in Nyttrus since you could use her here. + +However you’re still somewhat intrigued by this Sorcerer King who also claims “immortality” in his official title. + +You wonder if he is like Casimir in some way. Perhaps another necromancer from Mortos? You haven’t thought about it for a while, but age is starting to catch up to you. While you’re still fit and stronger than the average person your age, you’re starting to feel the aches at times. The idea of “immortality” is starting to appeal to you especially considering you’ve accomplished so much. Are you to just lose it all due to the ravages of old age? You don’t even have the benefit of a long life span, you might be a powerful wizard in your own right and you might be more than human, but when it comes down to it, you’re going to have much limited life span than Casimir did. + +Of course he most certainly won’t be forth coming with any such secret to extending one’s life span, but maybe you can at the very least get a good idea of who you’re dealing with. (And it may just be a “boastful” title anyway and he’s not actually immortal which would be good to know as well) + +“Kivan, let the sorcerer king know that I’ll be making arrangements to meet with him and allowing him safe passage to visit, but there are going to be some stipulations…” + +Basically you tell the sorcerer king that he can bring some of his personal guard, as well as whatever belongings he feels is necessary. + +The sorcerer king returns your message with a gleeful acceptance and states that he wishes to come by ship within the week and dock at your biggest port in Nalin, from there he will meet you and you can travel to the capital together. You return that message and state that will be fine. + +With this meeting underway you get things prepared for extra defense. Naturally Warrick and the Eyes work hard to make sure everything vital is extra secured, but you also have Galen and what few mages remain posted in various areas to act as magic monitors since your visitor is supposed to be a powerful wizard and all. + +To be quite honest you aren’t sure what to expect yourself, as you have no real knowledge of the man or what he’s capable of save for rumors. You spend some time honing your own spell abilities just in case. + +On the day of the arrival, you have Brenda and Warrick (And several soldiers) accompany you near the docks in the Nalin city of Pivod. It’s probably the first time all three of you have been together since the new eternals completed their training. + +“I’m surprised you’re agreeing to this meeting. When the new Eternals were done with their training last year I thought for sure we’d be going to war with Nakol soon.” Brenda remarks. +“I probably would have, but Nakol isn’t going to be an easy conquest. It’s going to be costly. I wanted to make sure we had that extra resource influx and gold income coming from Nyttrus. Plus the gnomes were working on their new inventions, which would contribute greatly to an upcoming war effort. Thought it might be best to wait until we had all our forces brought to the table. This meeting though, well might as well get a good idea of who we’ll be dealing with.” +“But won’t he be doing the same thing?” +“True, but it hardly matters. He’s not going to have access to anything sensitive. All that stuff is in New Dessel. He already knows he’s potentially facing a losing situation. The fact remains that even if the war was costly for us, we’d still win. He may be a wizard of great power. Perhaps even as great as the old Emperor, but there is nothing implying that the rest of his nation is anything else than average at best. As I’ve heard, he’s the only wizard he even allows in his nation. Smart in some ways I suppose as it prevents anyone else from becoming as powerful as him, but it cripples his resources in the long run and displays to me a man who is very fearful of losing his advantage. They’ve only just recently created their own gunpowder weapons. They have no airships, they have nothing like any of our technological wonders.” +“Hrm, what about their fleet?” Warrick says and points to a large ship approaching which can only be the Sorcerer King. It is much bigger than the sea going ships you have. Even the ones you sent to Nyttrus weren’t as large. This “King’s Ship” is ridiculous. You don’t think it’s going to fit in the damn harbor. + +As it gets closer, the ship is also well armed with cannons, but also lavishly decorated. You don’t really see the point in decorating a ship, which is obviously designed with war in mind. Then again you’ve also heard of how Nakol tends to place visual aesthetics over practical ones most of the time. Truly a sign of frivolousness and decadence. + +Fortunately the giant ship manages to dock without destroying them and the gangplank lowers. You can’t even see who is aboard the ship due to its great height, but a fancy dressed individual walks down with two trumpeters behind him. + +“And now it is your privledge and honor to receive the Immortal Sorcerer King of the Great Nation of Nakol and all his glory!” the man shouts and the trumpeters begin to play. + +A line of people begins to march down the plank. First it’s the guards who are dressed in some sort of ceremonial armor that is obviously for show. Then some other people come down. They don’t look like soldiers or even advisors, they’re barely dressed and they consist of young males and females. They even down a little dance in front of the lot of you. + +“What the hell? Who are all these people?” Warrick asks. +“If I had to guess, probably some sort of pleasure girls and boys.” You say. +“I thought you told him to keep his entourage light?” Brenda asks. +“I did, but as you can see, the fool has got to have his fun. The man himself better come out soon, because I’m not waiting around here for my health.” + +Sure enough right after you make that statement a figure appears at the edge of the ship. He’s a swarthy man wearing a very luxurious looking robe and a crown encrusted with jewels. A pair of servants hold his robe as he makes his way down the plank. + +He certainly carries an air of self-importance and royalty about him. When he approaches, you get a closer look at him. You imagine that he has to be at least as old or maybe even older than you, but his face does not display any signs of age. The only outwardly strange thing about him is that his eyes are an odd purple color. He may or may not be immortal, but he’s certainly using some sort of magic to make himself look young. + +And here you are looking almost the exact opposite. You’re wearing practical armor, have a sword hanging by your side and absolutely no frills. When you and the Sorcerer King finally come face to face, he looks you up and down in a way that almost implies he’s attracted to you. + +“Well, Emperor of the East at last we meet. So stoic and rugged! I heard that about you. I like it. Not my taste, but I believe it works for you. And my, look at all your little soldiers set out just for my arrival. I also detect a few…yes three mages in the nearby area. Guess you want to make sure I don’t secretly cast any aggressive spells eh? Smart. I’m flattered that you believe me so dangerous, but all of this was hardly necessary, as I said I only wish for peace between our two nations.” The Sorcerer King says while using a lot of flamboyant hand gestures. + +He hasn’t been here a few seconds and already he’s starting to irritate you. + +“Yes, well we’ll speak on that later, right now you’re going to have all your little concubines and some of your soldiers to get right back aboard that ship. I told you that you could have a personal guard not a small company and a few personal belongings.” You say. +“But these lovelies ARE my personal belongings. Was I wrong in believing that the Empire does not engage in such institutions?” the sorcerer king asks holding on to one of his young male “belongings.” +“If you’re referring to slavery, we’ve reserved it to criminal scum and prisoners of war nowadays as punishment for defying or insulting the Empire with their dissention or outright hostility. In any case I’m not having extra people running around and having to worry about them being a security risk, they stay on board your ship.” + +The Sorcerer King frowns a bit. + +“(Sigh) Very well I understand your concerns for security, but I must say you’re being a terribly dull and inflexible host right now. What about my two closest servants? Surely you would not deny me them?” +“You are seriously testing my already uncharacteristic hospitality. (Sigh) Fine, you can have your two robe carriers, or whatever they are to you.” +“Well I thank you for your permissiveness in this regard.” + +At this point the Sorcerer King tells most of his people to get back on the ship and reassuring them that he’ll make it up to all of them later. You on the other hand tell Warrick that you want that ship closely watched and if anyone is seen trying to exit it, they’re to be shot immediately. Both Warrick and Brenda leave your company to attend to their other duties. No reason for all of you to suffer this fop. + +What transpires for the rest of the day is putting up with the Sorcerer King’s annoying demeanor. He speaks and acts in a way that you dislike intensely. The man only seems to primarily discuss his sexual habits and you have to keep the conversation back on topic many times. + +Despite his evasiveness (or rather his obsession with his sex life) you do manage to get something out of him. He says that he’s never been to the “mythical” Island of Mortos having lived in Nakol all his life. (After you mention a bit about it, he says it sounds like an awful place that he hopes to never set foot on) He also admits that he knows the Empire is much stronger than his own nation, but still hopes that it doesn’t come to war as he claims he’s a lover not a fighter. He even says he’s willing to work out some sort of agreement as long as he can stay in power of Nakol. + +“Perhaps, if we paid some sort of tribute? I heard that you worked out a similar agreement with what are those adorable little mustached men that build all sorts of strange gadgets? Oh yes, the gnomes.” The sorcerer king says. +“Hrmm. Well one thing you need to take into consideration. New Dessel is a single city. Granted it’s a mountain, but its still a single location that we keep a very close eye on. There is also the fact that there aren’t many of them. However the most important thing in their favor is that they have a useful trade that contributes to the Empire greatly. Great enough that I’m willing to let them have a little extra autonomy.” + +The Sorcerer King listens with apprehension, as he knows you’re going to now explain why you’re less willing to make the same deal with Nakol. + +“Nakol on the other hand is a very large nation with a very large population. Call me paranoid, but I’m far from comfortable from giving something that much freedom. And your nation despite being large offers nothing really save for your resources, territory and obviously fat treasury. And I’d rather have those without having to ask at all. Face it, this is beginning of the end for Nakol independence. However there is one thing that stands out that would at least save your own skin and let you keep your position in this upcoming new order.” +“Oh? And what is that?” +“Your immortality, well at least your supposed immortality. I have my doubts. I imagine the only way to truly test such a thing would be to well…kill you.” + +With a few eye glances to your own soldiers and a couple of swift punches and kicks, you get the sorcerer king to the floor and hold your dagger to his throat. His personal guard are slaughtered and two Eyes hold the sorcerer king’s arms just in case he tries to cast a spell. + +“Utter anything that remotely sounds like an incantation and your tongue is the first thing I cut off.” You say. +“Stop! Stop! Please don’t kill me!” the sorcerer king exclaims. +“The fear on you is overwhelming. You’re not immortal. Guess I have just been wasting my time…” you say. +“No! Wait! (gasp) Maybe (wheeze) I’m not immortal, but I do have knowledge of obscure arts that can keep you young! I mean surely that must be worth something?” + +You relax your blade a bit. + +“Speak quickly sorcerer.” +“Thank you. (Whew) Yes, it’s true that I do not have proper immortality, but I do have eternal youth and what commoners really know the difference right? It’s a very complex ritual though. The type of magic involved hasn’t been practiced in who knows when. When I was genuinely a younger man a century ago, and first found the scrolls in some forgotten cave I only half believed of the power they would bring. I nearly died in the process and I paid a price, but it was worth it as you can see the results.” + +You’re still a little leery… + +“Please! I’m telling the truth! Look, we can perform the ritual right here if you want! I can tell you what to do and get, but we’re still going to have to wait until tomorrow at least since the ritual must be done at a certain time of night and that time has currently past unfortunately.” +“All right, you’ve bought yourself a little time, but I’m not going into this blind. Tomorrow you are going to tell me EVERYTHING about this ritual and the price you had to pay, because let’s just say I’m not a stranger to complex rituals and the repercussions involved.” + +You have the sorcerer king shown to his room. You also have him bound, gagged AND watched by several Eyes and a couple of mages. You are not taking any chances. + +You don’t get to sleep that night in your own room; you’re still pondering what this eternal youth ritual might entail. Casimir knew something similar to it, but that was due to necromantic magic and that obviously still had its limits. This apparently is different, you wonder how though. + +“Mmm, there he is, my ambitious little Eternal desperately trying to unlock the secret to immortality so that he may truly live up to his name. If you wanted to know so bad, you should’ve just asked mommy.” You hear a voice say behind you, which causes you to freeze. + +It’s Semra, and she’s in your room. + +This isn’t an “illusion” either. You know it isn’t because you just felt her hot breath in your ear followed by a gentle lick. + +How she managed to actually sneak in here is irrelevant. You’re in an unsafe position and you can only imagine that this has something to do with the sorcerer king. This whole visit might finally be showing its true colors… +> Slowly talk your way out +As crazy as it is to believe, if Semra’s actually here then it might not be an entirely bad thing. So far she’s always attempted to help you, and you imagine if she really wanted to kill you, you wouldn’t have heard a thing. + +“Semra. why am I not entirely surprised to find out you’re somehow mixed up in this?” you say not turning your head. +“Because while you may be a fool obsessed conquest and order, you’re not an idiot.” +“Obsessed eh? And what would you call your being here?” +“A mother’s concern…mmmm” Semra says as both of her hands rub your chest. Her face is now side by side yours and you feel a small kiss on your cheek. + +“Do you know how fucked up you sound whenever you address us as mother and son?” +“Oh you know you like it. I trust by the fact that you have not immediately attacked and that you’re actually enjoying my company that you’re willing to hear me out?” +“I wouldn’t say I’m actually enjoying your company, but you did come all this way…you might as well speak your piece while I’m in a diplomatic mood.” You respond and slowly turn around at which point Semra backs away. + +“So was your clumsy plan always to invite Mortimer and kill him thus chopping off the head of the Nakol Kingdom immediately, or were you actually trying to learn how he became infamously immortal?” Semra asks. +“Mortimer?” +“Yes, you know the lurid little king that you have captive right now? His real name is Mortimer Fudwick. Sounds almost like one of those silly gnome names doesn’t it? If you thought he was annoying within the short time you spent with him, just think if you had to listen to the shit on a regular basis as his advisor.” + +Advisor. Well this is starting to make some more sense. + +“So is that where you’ve been all this time? Hiding out in the Nakol Kingdom as the sorc…as Mortimer’s advisor?” you ask. +“I wouldn’t say I’ve been hiding. I’ve merely been securing my future. I’ll admit it’s not been easy and Mortimer’s ongoing sexual talk has long since gotten past the point of being boring. He’s not nearly as good as he thinks he is…” + +This last implication shouldn’t surprise you but that twisted part of you that apparently still hasn’t disappeared completely nearly causes you to say something. You manage to stop yourself, however Semra smiles at your momentary lapse in stoicism. + +“Why…you’re jealous!” Semra says nearly laughing. +“No I’m not. You’re being delusional again.” You say trying to maintain your calm demeanor. +“Deny it all you want, I know the truth. See, I KNEW I would ALWAYS be the only real woman for you. You never forget your first eh? Don’t worry, no matter how many times I lay with that effeminate fop he’ll never be anything the man you are.” Semra says totally enjoying this situation. +“I don’t need your reassurance to tell me that, what I was going to say is that I’m a little surprised that a proud svelk woman like yourself has resorted to thinly veiled whoredom for survival. To a monkey no less.” +“Look, if this is really bothering you, we can always go discuss this on your bed over there. Doesn’t look like it’s been used in years and I’m sure despite your age you could still give it to me in a way that only you can…” +“Semra, will you get to the fucking point of your visit, before I stop entertaining the idea that you aren’t a complete fucking selfish backstabbing bitch who ultimately only looks out for her own best interests?” you say in a raised tone of voice. + +Semra chuckles a bit at your outburst. + +“Oh I did miss that anger of yours. Sexy. That passion. That hate that bubbles underneath. Mortimer has none of that. His demon does, but he’s rather useless in the physical aspect due to being trapped in a crystal and all. +“Okay I heard the word demon. Let’s focus on that.” +“(Sigh) Very well, to business…” + +Semra goes on to explain that Mortimer’s reign over the Nakol Kingdom solely hinges on a deal he made with a demon named Zelvix over a century ago. He got youth, power, magic abilities and all the sex he could ever want in exchange for his soul. However Morty wasn’t a complete fool, he managed to trap the demon in a crystal prison of some sort which has made the deal unable to be completed properly which now has made Mortimer “semi-immortal”. Now the demon just sits biding its time, waiting for the day it’s released or when Mortimer actually dies so it can claim what it was owed. + +“So basically what you’re telling me is that Mortimer doesn’t know shit about eternal youth let alone immortality other than what this demon gave him.” You say. +“Basically.” +“Knew it was too good to be true.” You say and get your sword. +“What’re you doing?” +“Well there’s no point in keeping him alive no is there? Might as well go ahead and be done with it…” +“Wait! That’s another thing I wanted to talk to you about! You can’t just kill him, I mean you could, but it would be extremely…bad. Killing Mortimer is also going to release Zelvix and trust me, you don’t want to do that, he’s a demon lord of great power.” +“If he’s so great how the hell did he get tricked by some hedge wizard?” +“Probably due to typical arrogance like all of his kind. Look I’m just telling you that it’s not going to be a simple matter of just cutting his head off. If it was, I would’ve done it years ago on general principle of being a bad lay. You go in and kill him now and it’s going to be bad in the long term not just for you, but for the entire world.” +“The world? Aren’t you being just a little overly dramatic? And since when are you so altruistic?” +“Since unleashing a demon army would not be in my best interest that’s why. Contrary to popular belief, we svelk aren’t all looking to see the world burn, but that’s definitely what will happen if you kill Mortimer. Personally I was trying to find a way to banish the demon, I think I might be on the right path, but it’s going to take a few decades still I think.” +“A few decades? Fuck that, I’m not waiting that long and I know you’re not telling me the entire truth anyway; you’ve got another angle in this. Now get the hell out of my way before I forget that you’re actually an enemy of mine.” +“(Sigh) Fine. You know, usually as people get older they learn to become more patient. I can see though your growing fixation on living long enough to conquer the world is becoming a major flaw. Of course what else do you really have right? You have no master any longer. You have no significant other. You can’t have children. You have nothing except your Empire, which will undoubtedly fall soon after you die and you KNOW it. So you’re now starting to seek out a way to conquer death. You’re getting more like Casimir everyday. Congratulations, you are your father’s son.” +“I don’t fear death Semra, never have.” +“Never said you did, I taught you not to. I believe though…bah nevermind. Further discussion on this subject would be wasted on you. Go then, kill little pathetic Mortimer. Perhaps if you’re lucky when the demon army is unleashed by Zelvix and eventually overruns the world, you will get that warrior’s death rather than the old man in bed death where you are decrepit lying in your own filth and too weak to even lift yourself up.” + +“You done?” you ask as you advance towards the door and Semra with sword in hand. + +“Just one more thing. I hope you remember this day as one of the many that I could’ve killed you and didn’t. Mortimer wanted me to assassinate you, you know. Now I’ll take my leave. Until next time lover.” Semra says and disappears. You still hear the faint patter of footsteps so you figure she’s only turned invisible rather than some sort of teleportation. You call for soldiers, Eyes, mages and whoever else who will listen, since you have a feeling Mortimer’s escaped. + +When you enter the cell he was being held in, you find the Eyes and mages that were watching him burned from the inside out. You’re not sure how he did it without other soldiers and such being alerted and him being bound and gagged, but Mortimer’s obviously escaped and Semra was running interference for him while he did so. + +Several of your soldiers and others begin apologizing for not knowing what had occurred, but you wave them all away saying that you’re not angry at anyone. When they ask if you want a general search and alarm sounded you decline. + +“No. There would be no point, however I’m fairly certain that he’ll be leaving his ship behind. Sightmaster Warrick is probably still in the area having it watched. Someone go inform him to have everyone killed aboard and start having it refitted according to Empire standards.” + +Just as you’re finished giving that order, your advisor Kivan has arrived in a hurried fashion. + +“Emperor, I just heard! Are you okay? Has the Sorcerer King really escaped?” +“Escaped, is a relative term, Kivan. Let’s just say he’s temporarily eluded my immediate clutches. If his situation is anything like I was just told, he’s got bigger problems than the likes of me. In any case, we’re officially at war with the Kingdom of Nakol now.” +“I see…is there anything you need right now?” + +You briefly think for a moment. + +The only thing that comes to mind is getting your best general back to Evigrus. Decena from what you know has more or less pushed back the Iznac and at least established a good foothold on the continent where your people aren’t on the verge of being annihilated. Flog and Snilkez’ka will still be there along with whoever is Decena’s second. + +Of course you’ve been regularly receiving much needed resources and riches from Nyttrus thanks to Decena’s presence there. You don’t necessarily worry that the Iznac are going to suddenly be a problem due to her not being around, you’re just a little concerned that without a strong leadership presence, the orcs are going to run wild and fuck up the regular shipments or disregard them altogether. And you can’t afford for that to happen if you’re going to be going to war with Nakol. +> Keep Decena in Nyttrus +Decena might be a good general, but without the extra resources from Nyttrus, your war machine efforts are not going to run as smoothly. You need her to keep on top of things there. + +Which means you’ll be leading the new Eternals into battle and that’s fine by you. + +You don’t waste any time getting the rest of your plans underway. You figure a four-pronged attack will work suitably for the initial assault. + +You have your fleet attack south Nakol from the sea and land troops there. You have the rest of your airships fly over the mountain range and bombard northern Nakol. Your kobold forces can dig under the large mountain range as usual. Finally you have the majority of your forces march through the mountain passes. You’ll hold back your Eternals until the passes are completely under your control and no longer contested. It would probably be best to “test” the Nakol defenses located in the pass choke points anyway. + +This is going to be a bit different from the conflicts in the past, your armies aren’t going to be relying on any magic support at all. What few mages you have left are either overseeing the next Eternal tanks or are part of the Eyes now (Aside from the ones that Mortimer killed recently). You don’t know just exactly how powerful Mortimer’s own magic is, but you do know he’s the only wizard in his kingdom so you’re not anticipating any problems, if technology has proven anything its that the lowliest unskilled peasant can figure it out and use it with great efficiency. A sign of the times you suppose. + +In any case you have no doubt that when the time comes, it’ll probably be up to you personally to take down Mortimer in a magic showdown and if Semra is in your way then you’ll deal with her as well. + +A few months pass and just as you figured, Mortimer does have other tricks up his sleeve to make the invasion go a lot more difficult. You don’t know if he always had an agreement with them or perhaps they’re just siding with him out of spite, but the satyr and harpy clan survivors that fled to the Nakol mountains after the Tor War rear their ugly head again. This mainly involves their usual ambush tactics in the various mountain passes, but apparently there are still enough of the harpies to mount full assaults on your airships. + +Apparently Mortimer doesn’t have a problem with their mages either since they still have a few left and they’re using their elemental magic to a great degree causing rockslides in the mountain passes, strong damaging winds against your airships and even violent tidal waves against your fleet. You don’t remember them having quite that much magical strength before so you imagine Mortimer must be enhancing their abilities with his own. + +There are also reports of svelk mercenaries among the normal Nakol army. You knew that not ALL of them threw in their lot with Eldolith. These must be the ones that followed Semra. Well you can finish that job too. + +All of this might not be a problem if you weren’t suddenly experiencing a problem that you thought you wouldn’t be experiencing. There’s been a slow down in the shipments of resources from Nyttrus, meaning they’ve stopped completely. You also haven’t received any letters from Decena either. No ships have come back from Nyttrus at all and you don’t know why. The only answer you can come to the conclusion to though is that the Iznac have completely overrun your forces on Nyttrus, or have at least destroyed all your ships sent there. + +It’s a worrying enough thought that you think that maybe you’ll need to go there yourself to handle it, but that’s problematic due to your conflict with the Nakol Kingdom and you feel like victory will be close at hand. + +The alternative of course is to send someone else to Nyttrus who you really feel will get the job done. The only who comes to mind is Warrick and he’ll have to take his own contingent of Eyes with him. That of course means less of them overseeing the Empire, but that might be what has to be done because you’re in the middle of putting an end to a potentially dangerous foe on your own continent and you can’t drop that to go do something else. + +You do however; take a temporary leave from the field to speak with Warrick who is more than happy to help. + +“I was wondering when we were going to look into that. Do you think Decena has been killed?” +“It’s a very real possibility and it would indeed be a loss, but I can’t imagine that the Iznac could’ve just wiped out all of our forces there. I mean the last letter I got from Decena was a fairly positive one. Said we had just destroyed another Iznac town and the kobolds were already in the process of digging their way into another one. I mean its possible the Iznac had their own tricks we didn’t know about, it seems very strange and concerning that we’ve heard nothing at all and even the couple of ships that were sent a few months ago have not returned. Somebody is deliberately making sure nobody leaves Nyttrus.” +“Can’t we send an airship?” Warrick asks. +“Still don’t have the long range capabilities to travel to Nyttrus, though the gnomes and Elam are still working on that. So we’re still using boats for now. What I want from you though is to find out what exactly the hell is going on over there. Solve the problem if necessary, but if it really looks bad, then don’t risk it and return home as soon as possible. No good in losing you as well.” +“Understood, I’ll take mage support and I’ll have my second, Kristopher, fully prepared to take care of things while I’m gone. And once again I’m honored you’ve chosen me for this task.” Warrick says. + +In a few days Warrick is on his way to Nyttrus and you’re already anxious to hear what is going on over there. Lacking anything else to do, you return to your war with the Nakol Kingdom. + +A few more months pass and you finally receive news and it’s definitely not the good kind. + +Warrick manages to return in a small rowboat, half dead from dehydration and malnutrition, but also from whatever his experience on Nyttrus was, fortunately he’s not so far gone that he isn’t able to tell you after he’s taken care of a bit. + +Later you speak with Warrick privately and in a relaxed setting. + +He tells you that the situation is worse than you thought. It isn’t the Iznac that are the problem, or at least they aren’t the major problem anymore. It’s Decena. She’s gone rogue. Warrick says he doesn’t know all the details of how this came to be, but he believes that the Iznac had something to do with it, possibly with magic, but it sort of backfired on them. + +Decena’s turned herself into a “queen” over there and has not only the remaining orc and kobold forces still under her command, but even has some of the Glip and Iznac following her as well. She’s actually still fighting the “loyalist” Iznac hold outs that aren’t accepting her leadership. In any case, she’s not acting under the orders of the Empire any more and has declared herself independent. + +He then goes on to say how they were attacked nearly immediately after they disembarked from the ship. He says that probably should’ve turned back when it was realized that the Empire had lost complete control of Nyttrus to the point that it no longer even had a friendly harbor, but he wanted to do some more investigating. + +He mentions he only managed to escape after weeks of ongoing torture. The scars (and a couple of missing fingers) prove that. + +“Looks like I didn’t get to solve the problem, Emperor.” Warrick says. +“I’m just glad you made it back to explain what the problem was exactly. We can take of it later…(Sigh) Shit… I guess I shouldn’t have sent Decena there after all. She didn’t really want to go in the first place, she only wanted to be close to home. Honestly she probably would’ve been a lot more useful here as well. I just didn’t think that…tell me Warrick, you have seen here correct? Is she truly gone?” +“I have seen her. But I do not think this entirely due to magic. I mean perhaps the Iznac magic caused a change in her, but whenever I was in her presence, it felt like…well more was in play.” +“What do you mean?” +“Her attitude was all her own. Her actions were all here own. Her curses about you and the Empire were all her own. I mean keeping the orcs under her command after splitting from the Empire? That doesn’t surprise me, the greenskins will take any opportunity to split away. Keeping the kobolds under her command? Now that probably took some doing. We both know how loyal the little scalies are when they respect a strong leader greatly. It’s just unfortunate for the Empire that she managed to convince them somehow that she was greater than you. I can only guess the fact that they fought side by side with her for so long helped. Well that and the fact that I didn’t see Snilkez’ka around. She probably killed her long ago to prove a point.” + +Warrick continues. + +“The orcs and even the kobolds are not surprising, but the Glip and especially some of the Iznac themselves? Now that is what surprised me. Neither group were even willing to work with us before, yet Decena managed to recruit entire villages into helping her. I doubt if whatever Iznac magic was cast on her was supposed to make her into a ruler of their own people. This is all her. She has a confidence now that exceeds what she had before.” +“She has an arrogance now you mean, if she believes she can take me on. After I’m done with putting the Nakol Kingdom out its misery, I’ll be paying a visit to Decena and she’ll regret her decision to become a traitor.” You say. +“I don’t think she will. Despite her curses at you, I believe deep down she still can’t face you.” +“Well she isn’t going to have a choice if I personally get a hold of her, but what do you mean?” you ask. +“Well isn’t it obvious?” Warrick asks. + +At first you don’t understand his question, but then comes the split moment you understand all too well… + +But you don’t react in time since your guard was entirely down in the company of an old comrade in arms who has shown nothing but loyalty up until this point. Perhaps the same Iznac magic is in play here, but it hardly matters. + +Warrick suddenly pulls his pistol and shoots you in the chest twice, before you can react. You aren’t dead yet, but you’re down and struggling to breath. You try to hit Warrick with a flame bolt, but he’s still quick enough to dodge as he runs over to you. + +“She still loves you…that’s why she sent me! Long live the new regime!” Warrick yells and shoots you again in the head. + +You’re already dead when the rest of your soldiers come running and find Warrick cackling about Decena will be coming soon to wipe away the rest of the corrupt Empire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As crazy as it is to believe, if Semra’s actually here then it might not be an entirely bad thing. So far she’s always attempted to help you, and you imagine if she really wanted to kill you, you wouldn’t have heard a thing. + +“Semra. why am I not entirely surprised to find out you’re somehow mixed up in this?” you say not turning your head. +“Because while you may be a fool obsessed conquest and order, you’re not an idiot.” +“Obsessed eh? And what would you call your being here?” +“A mother’s concern…mmmm” Semra says as both of her hands rub your chest. Her face is now side by side yours and you feel a small kiss on your cheek. + +“Do you know how fucked up you sound whenever you address us as mother and son?” +“Oh you know you like it. I trust by the fact that you have not immediately attacked and that you’re actually enjoying my company that you’re willing to hear me out?” +“I wouldn’t say I’m actually enjoying your company, but you did come all this way…you might as well speak your piece while I’m in a diplomatic mood.” You respond and slowly turn around at which point Semra backs away. + +“So was your clumsy plan always to invite Mortimer and kill him thus chopping off the head of the Nakol Kingdom immediately, or were you actually trying to learn how he became infamously immortal?” Semra asks. +“Mortimer?” +“Yes, you know the lurid little king that you have captive right now? His real name is Mortimer Fudwick. Sounds almost like one of those silly gnome names doesn’t it? If you thought he was annoying within the short time you spent with him, just think if you had to listen to the shit on a regular basis as his advisor.” + +Advisor. Well this is starting to make some more sense. + +“So is that where you’ve been all this time? Hiding out in the Nakol Kingdom as the sorc…as Mortimer’s advisor?” you ask. +“I wouldn’t say I’ve been hiding. I’ve merely been securing my future. I’ll admit it’s not been easy and Mortimer’s ongoing sexual talk has long since gotten past the point of being boring. He’s not nearly as good as he thinks he is…” + +This last implication shouldn’t surprise you but that twisted part of you that apparently still hasn’t disappeared completely nearly causes you to say something. You manage to stop yourself, however Semra smiles at your momentary lapse in stoicism. + +“Why…you’re jealous!” Semra says nearly laughing. +“No I’m not. You’re being delusional again.” You say trying to maintain your calm demeanor. +“Deny it all you want, I know the truth. See, I KNEW I would ALWAYS be the only real woman for you. You never forget your first eh? Don’t worry, no matter how many times I lay with that effeminate fop he’ll never be anything the man you are.” Semra says totally enjoying this situation. +“I don’t need your reassurance to tell me that, what I was going to say is that I’m a little surprised that a proud svelk woman like yourself has resorted to thinly veiled whoredom for survival. To a monkey no less.” +“Look, if this is really bothering you, we can always go discuss this on your bed over there. Doesn’t look like it’s been used in years and I’m sure despite your age you could still give it to me in a way that only you can…” +“Semra, will you get to the fucking point of your visit, before I stop entertaining the idea that you aren’t a complete fucking selfish backstabbing bitch who ultimately only looks out for her own best interests?” you say in a raised tone of voice. + +Semra chuckles a bit at your outburst. + +“Oh I did miss that anger of yours. Sexy. That passion. That hate that bubbles underneath. Mortimer has none of that. His demon does, but he’s rather useless in the physical aspect due to being trapped in a crystal and all. +“Okay I heard the word demon. Let’s focus on that.” +“(Sigh) Very well, to business…” + +Semra goes on to explain that Mortimer’s reign over the Nakol Kingdom solely hinges on a deal he made with a demon named Zelvix over a century ago. He got youth, power, magic abilities and all the sex he could ever want in exchange for his soul. However Morty wasn’t a complete fool, he managed to trap the demon in a crystal prison of some sort which has made the deal unable to be completed properly which now has made Mortimer “semi-immortal”. Now the demon just sits biding its time, waiting for the day it’s released or when Mortimer actually dies so it can claim what it was owed. + +“So basically what you’re telling me is that Mortimer doesn’t know shit about eternal youth let alone immortality other than what this demon gave him.” You say. +“Basically.” +“Knew it was too good to be true.” You say and get your sword. +“What’re you doing?” +“Well there’s no point in keeping him alive no is there? Might as well go ahead and be done with it…” +“Wait! That’s another thing I wanted to talk to you about! You can’t just kill him, I mean you could, but it would be extremely…bad. Killing Mortimer is also going to release Zelvix and trust me, you don’t want to do that, he’s a demon lord of great power.” +“If he’s so great how the hell did he get tricked by some hedge wizard?” +“Probably due to typical arrogance like all of his kind. Look I’m just telling you that it’s not going to be a simple matter of just cutting his head off. If it was, I would’ve done it years ago on general principle of being a bad lay. You go in and kill him now and it’s going to be bad in the long term not just for you, but for the entire world.” +“The world? Aren’t you being just a little overly dramatic? And since when are you so altruistic?” +“Since unleashing a demon army would not be in my best interest that’s why. Contrary to popular belief, we svelk aren’t all looking to see the world burn, but that’s definitely what will happen if you kill Mortimer. Personally I was trying to find a way to banish the demon, I think I might be on the right path, but it’s going to take a few decades still I think.” +“A few decades? Fuck that, I’m not waiting that long and I know you’re not telling me the entire truth anyway; you’ve got another angle in this. Now get the hell out of my way before I forget that you’re actually an enemy of mine.” +“(Sigh) Fine. You know, usually as people get older they learn to become more patient. I can see though your growing fixation on living long enough to conquer the world is becoming a major flaw. Of course what else do you really have right? You have no master any longer. You have no significant other. You can’t have children. You have nothing except your Empire, which will undoubtedly fall soon after you die and you KNOW it. So you’re now starting to seek out a way to conquer death. You’re getting more like Casimir everyday. Congratulations, you are your father’s son.” +“I don’t fear death Semra, never have.” +“Never said you did, I taught you not to. I believe though…bah nevermind. Further discussion on this subject would be wasted on you. Go then, kill little pathetic Mortimer. Perhaps if you’re lucky when the demon army is unleashed by Zelvix and eventually overruns the world, you will get that warrior’s death rather than the old man in bed death where you are decrepit lying in your own filth and too weak to even lift yourself up.” + +“You done?” you ask as you advance towards the door and Semra with sword in hand. + +“Just one more thing. I hope you remember this day as one of the many that I could’ve killed you and didn’t. Mortimer wanted me to assassinate you, you know. Now I’ll take my leave. Until next time lover.” Semra says and disappears. You still hear the faint patter of footsteps so you figure she’s only turned invisible rather than some sort of teleportation. You call for soldiers, Eyes, mages and whoever else who will listen, since you have a feeling Mortimer’s escaped. + +When you enter the cell he was being held in, you find the Eyes and mages that were watching him burned from the inside out. You’re not sure how he did it without other soldiers and such being alerted and him being bound and gagged, but Mortimer’s obviously escaped and Semra was running interference for him while he did so. + +Several of your soldiers and others begin apologizing for not knowing what had occurred, but you wave them all away saying that you’re not angry at anyone. When they ask if you want a general search and alarm sounded you decline. + +“No. There would be no point, however I’m fairly certain that he’ll be leaving his ship behind. Sightmaster Warrick is probably still in the area having it watched. Someone go inform him to have everyone killed aboard and start having it refitted according to Empire standards.” + +Just as you’re finished giving that order, your advisor Kivan has arrived in a hurried fashion. + +“Emperor, I just heard! Are you okay? Has the Sorcerer King really escaped?” +“Escaped, is a relative term, Kivan. Let’s just say he’s temporarily eluded my immediate clutches. If his situation is anything like I was just told, he’s got bigger problems than the likes of me. In any case, we’re officially at war with the Kingdom of Nakol now.” +“I see…is there anything you need right now?” + +You briefly think for a moment. + +The only thing that comes to mind is getting your best general back to Evigrus. Decena from what you know has more or less pushed back the Iznac and at least established a good foothold on the continent where your people aren’t on the verge of being annihilated. Flog and Snilkez’ka will still be there along with whoever is Decena’s second. + +Of course you’ve been regularly receiving much needed resources and riches from Nyttrus thanks to Decena’s presence there. You don’t necessarily worry that the Iznac are going to suddenly be a problem due to her not being around, you’re just a little concerned that without a strong leadership presence, the orcs are going to run wild and fuck up the regular shipments or disregard them altogether. And you can’t afford for that to happen if you’re going to be going to war with Nakol. +> Call Decena back +You made a promise that you wouldn’t keep her any longer than necessary and that if war broke out here, you’d want her to lead the new eternals into battle. Your word is still your bond as far as those close to you go. + +Seeing as you want her to get back as quickly as possible, you tell Kivan to have one of the new longer range airships that can travel a lot further than their predecessors sent. (Another recent improvement courtesy of Elam’s work with the gnomes) Maybe it’ll even instill a little fear into the natives of Nyytrus if they happen to catch sight of it. + +While you’re waiting for her arrival back, you aren’t wasting any time getting the rest of your plans underway. You figure a four-pronged attack will work suitably for the initial assault. + +You’ll have your fleet attack south Nakol from the sea and land troops there. You’ll have the rest of your airships fly over the mountain range and bombard northern Nakol. Your kobold forces can dig under the large mountain range as usual. Finally you’ll have the majority of your forces march through the mountain passes. You’ll hold back your Eternals until Decena arrives, besides it would probably be best to “test” the Nakol defenses located in the pass choke points anyway. + +This is going to be a bit different from the conflicts in the past, your armies aren’t going to be relying on any magic support at all. What few mages you have left are either overseeing the next Eternal tanks or are part of the Eyes now (Aside from the ones that Mortimer killed recently). You don’t know just exactly how powerful Mortimer’s own magic is, but you do know he’s the only wizard in his kingdom so you’re not anticipating any problems, if technology has proven anything its that the lowliest unskilled peasant can figure it out and use it with great efficiency. A sign of the times you suppose. + +In any case you have no doubt that when the time comes, it’ll probably be up to you personally to take down Mortimer in a magic showdown and if Semra is in your way then you’ll deal with her as well. + +By the time Decena arrives your invasion of Nakol is well on its way and going more or less as planned though there have been a few hiccups here and there. You meet Decena when she gets off the Storm II. She’s much more “weathered” looking from when you sent her to Nyytrus. Granted as a warrior she will collect battle scars and such, but she almost is unrecognizable. She has a “stare” that you’ve seen in more than a few soldiers that have broke under the strain of battle, but this seems impossible for someone of Decena’s training and experience. + +Still, she manages a smile when she sees you. + +“General Decena reporting for duty my Emperor.” She says. +“No need for the formalities, I’m just glad to have you back.” You reply. +“It’s good to be back. Just show me to my next assignment.” +“Well we do have a little time before that…are you okay? I mean how is everything Nyttrus?” +“When I left everything was fine. If I seem a bit off, I’m just a little tired I suppose. Apologies Emperor.” +“Hrm, maybe you should rest first before running off into battle again. This war doesn’t need you right this minute.” +“If that is what you wish…um can I talk to you in private?” +“Erm, of course.” You answer unsure of what to expect. + +You and Decena find some place secluded and no sooner have you asked her what’s on her mind; she’s wrapped her arms around you and buried her head in your chest. + +“Please never send me away for that long again.” She says. +“Decena…what…” you sputter unsure of what this is about exactly, but she’s obviously upset. “What the hell happened over there?” +“I dunno…I just…I dunno. I was fine for the first year. I missed you, but I was fine. After that though I started feeling a crushing emptiness. I think it was some sort of Iznac magic. I got hit by a black cloud of some sort by a priest. Haven’t felt right until I got the news I was coming back here.” +“You never said anything in the letters.” +“I didn’t want to worry you, I wanted to stay strong for you…I guess I’m failing again though…” +“You’re fine Decena, just come with me, maybe I can figure out what the hell these Iznac did to you.” + +When you get Decena back to the palace you check to see if she’s under some sort of curse or something similar. Decena insists that you don’t make a fuss and definitely not use any sort of healing magic on her since it will shorten your own lifespan. You reassure her that whatever you need to do probably isn’t going to do anything major to you. + +“It’s more important that you’re in the best physical condition and the right frame of mind before I send you back into another major conflict. Besides, if I lose a few days, weeks or even months, what’s the difference? It’s not like I’m going to live forever anyway.” You say. +“Don’t say that.” Decena says. +“Why not? It’s true.” +“But I don’t want to believe that it’s true. I want to believe that you’ll somehow live forever and ever. In fact I know you will!” + +You flash a quick smile and shake your head a bit. Decena still retains an image of you being “invincible.” To be fair, probably most people do (Even the cynical probably just believe you’re too “tough” or “magical” to die), but then they don’t really know you as closely as Decena does. And the way she believes it is more of a childlike hope that she never really grew out of. Funny considering that she never really had a proper childhood. + +After a few magical incantations, you discover that Iznac magic is indeed still affecting her, but its rather easy to get rid of, in fact it seemed to prey upon the fears in her mind. Not surprisingly that involved being away from you and that started to gradually mess with her head. It’s a testament to her willpower that she managed to fight it off for as long as she did. Being actually around you probably weakened the magic. + +It’s actually a good thing you called her back when you did, who knows what might’ve happened had you not done so. It is a bit alarming though since you weren’t aware of what powers the Iznac had other than the letters Decena sent. + +“You should be fine now, but you said that everything is okay in Nyttrus? I mean did anyone else get hit with this type of Iznac magic?” you ask. +“Yes it has happened, but Iznac priests aren’t that common. I mean I saw orcs and kobolds get hit with the same spell, but it didn’t seem to affect them. I mean at least nothing I noticed. They seemed to continue to act like…well orcs and kobolds. There were a few instances of my human soldiers committing suicide though.” +“Well, I guess I won’t concern myself too much about it then since orcs and kobolds are the main ones over there. Guess their more simplistic minds are a good defense against the magic. Orcs don’t really fear anything except perhaps looking weak, and kobolds only fear failing the Empire and myself. I imagine if the magic affects them at all it might only entice them to fight harder. Bad for the Iznac, good for us. In any case as soon as this Nakol business is over with, I might just have to take a personal trip over to Nyttrus.” +“How long do you anticipate that this conflict might last?” Decena asks. +“Hard to say, I assumed that it might be a costly war and that the sorcerer king would have powerful opposition, but so far nothing of major consequence. I wonder if there will actually be anything left by the time you lead the new eternals into the thick of it. Hell, I’m starting to wonder if it won’t be overkill, but I’d rather it be overkill than underestimation. Besides I’m sure he’s going to pull out a few tricks that we haven’t seen yet.” + +With a few more brief bits banter, words of encouragement and some rest, Decena seems back to her old self and is eager to lead the new eternals (who are just as eager to get into battle seeing as they’ve been training their whole lives for a moment like this. + +Just as you figured, Mortimer does have other tricks up his sleeve to make the invasion go a lot more difficult. You don’t know if he always had an agreement with them or perhaps they’re just siding with him out of spite, but the satyr and harpy clan survivors that fled to the Nakol mountains after the Tor War rear their ugly head again. This mainly involves their usual ambush tactics in the various mountain passes, but apparently there are still enough of the harpies to mount full assaults on your airships. + +Apparently Mortimer doesn’t have a problem with their mages either since they still have a few left and they’re using their elemental magic to a great degree causing rockslides in the mountain passes, strong damaging winds against your airships and even violent tidal waves against your fleet. You don’t remember them having quite that much magical strength before so you imagine Mortimer must be enhancing their abilities with his own. + +There are also reports of svelk mercenaries among the normal Nakol army. You knew that not ALL of them threw in their lot with Eldolith. These must be the ones that followed Semra. Well you can finish that job too. + +It doesn’t matter what the sorcerer king does though, nothing is going to save him as far as you’re concerned. When Decena breaks through into Nakol lands with all your new eternals under her commands they prove that point by completely razing several major settlements. Between her leadership and their skill, his soldiers aren’t standing a chance against them. + +This war might be far from over, but its not going to take as long as you thought it might. +> Years pass... +Year 54 + +Nakol’s existence as a nation is coming to an end. You’ve seized most of its territory. Its armies have practically been wiped out, and you’ve even eliminated most of Mortimer’s allies. + +The only major objective that’s left is Dequilet, the capital and currently the only thing saving it is a large magical barrier completely surrounding the city. So far it’s proven impenetrable to conventional means, which means you’re going to have to resort to magical ones, which unfortunately despite your own best efforts you’ve failed to bring it down, though you feel as if you’ve gotten close. + +You doubt if Mortimer is doing it himself, you imagine that Semra is probably helping him upkeep the barrier. He might even have a couple of satyr mages still left, though you doubt it. In any case, he’s got help and you’re probably going to have to resort to a bit of help as well if you want to bring the barrier down. + +“Galen’s a given, as are the Eye mages, but I’m going to have to take mages off overseeing the Eternal tanks for this project as well. Don’t want to, but it’ll be necessary.” You say while explaining the next course of action in your command tent to Decena. +“We’re going to have to wait for those mages to come here, that’s at least a few days. I hate this sitting around, is it truly the only way?” Decena asks. +“Unfortunately. Last time I tried to bring it down, I nearly fell unconscious. With enough magic energy though I’m certain it can be brought down, as soon as it is, I want you and rest to blow apart those walls and rush in as quick as you can. Don’t worry I won’t be far behind no matter how woozy I feel afterwards.” + +Just as Decena is about to acknowledge your plan, that old familiar voice is heard. + +“You know none of that is necessary if you listen to my plan.” Semra remarks. + +The instant Decena sees Semra she raises her voice and attempts to attack her, though you hold her back from doing so. + +“Don’t bother Decena, she’s not really there. It’s an illusionary image. Right on time too. You’re starting to get predictable Semra.” You say. +“Semra? Is this that svelk bitch you’ve told me about?” Decena asks. +“Oh so he did talk about me to you. I’m not surprised. Never could get me completely out of his mind…” +“Fuck you svelk! He told me about all the hell you put him through!” + +Semra does her usual gleeful smile at Decena’s anger. + +“My, she IS the aggressively territorial one. Isn’t she? Almost sad that her feelings for you are so strong when your own for her are…limited. Trust me dear, he can’t ever love you back. How could he? You’re not even young looking anymore…” + +At this point you have to restrain Decena again. + +“Decena, don’t pay attention to her. She’s just enjoying making you miserable. It’s what she does. Semra, what the hell do you want? Shouldn’t you be making plans to escape or something?” +“Who said I wasn’t? But right now I’m actually here for you. Need your help in killing Mortimer, well what’s left of him anyway. It’s getting harder to figure out when he’s completely all there or not. Zelvix is starting to gain mental control over him due to his shattered confidence and willpower. This war has been very stressful on him as you might expect.” + +Decena asks what she’s talking about and you quickly mention about the supposed demon army that will be unleashed when Mortimer dies, though with the way Semra’s telling it, it sounds like this Zelvix is already getting loose…assuming she’s telling the truth. + +“Semra, didn’t YOU claim that it would take you about a decade to properly banish this demon?” you ask. +“Well with you rushing head long into attacking Nakol, I had to step up my research now didn’t I? Don’t worry though, as I said, I’ve got it figured out, just need your help in doing so. Remember how we linked our energy together when we were extinguishing all those little gnome souls? Well we need to do something like that again, but this is going to require a slightly deeper connection. Namely we’d have to link our very minds together so as to make the magical connection strong enough to face the demon.” + +“Here we go…” You think. + +“You can’t seriously trust this woman!” Decena shouts. +“He most certainly should trust me considering how many times I’ve warned him about shit and indirectly AND directly saved his life. After all if he’d trusted me all those years ago, he might’ve saved himself a lot of bother on a certain island. Y’know you still have never told me how you exactly came out of Mortos relatively unscathed. Perhaps you can after we take care of this mess?” Semra remarks. + +You don’t answer immediately. You’ve been put in this position several times before and it’s the same old thing. Semra tells you something, you distrust her, you usually follow her advice against your better judgment and while things don’t necessarily go entirely your way, you can never deny that had you not acted things would be much worse. + +But on the other hand… it’s the same old thing. You know she’s not telling you the whole truth and something about this demon situation seems even more suspicious especially since she’s actually encouraging a linking of your minds. Even if she’s telling the entire truth about the demon and this being the only way she feels is the way to defeat it, would it really be a victory if Semra had magical access to your mind? Who the hell knows what she might be able to do. + +“All of this is pointless anyway, we can’t get in unless that barrier goes down.” You say. +“Oh that thing? I can make a small opening in it for a small period of time. Of course when I do so, Mortimer will probably instantly know I’m working against him and it’s possible he’ll completely lose himself to Zelvix, but we should have enough time to do what we have to do.” Semra remarks. +“Or I could just wait for my mages to help me bring the barrier down. Then when I do get that barrier down, I assault the city with so much firepower that nothing of this world or another is going to survive it. I don’t care how powerful this demon is.” You say. + +“Optimistic that you believe that, but I tell you sincerely that won’t be enough to stop Zelvix. He’s in a weakened state now due to his long imprisonment, but as soon as Mortimer’s dead, it won’t take him long to regain his full strength and when that happens, count on several magical gates opening up. Now MAYBE you’ll be able to even repel the demons that will undoubtedly come screaming out of said gates, but quite frankly, YOU are not the young Eternal you used to be and your odds will not be good. And your Empire’s odds if you should fall in battle? Even worse. You already survived one trip that you very well shouldn’t have…actually you’ve survived many things you probably shouldn’t have, but those days are becoming more unlikely as you approach your twilight years. I understand that you’d rather die a warrior’s death, however I doubt very seriously that you wish to die a fool’s death. It is one thing to die in a battle that has been properly planned. It’s entirely another when you die because you purposely ignore all your information and don’t take advantage of the tools and resources that allow you to win efficiently. I’M giving you this chance to win this war now in the most efficient way possible.” + +You continue to listen. + +“We’ve been in this all too familiar position before Eternal. Why take the chance of making the same mistake twice?” Semra asks. + +Decena looks at you as you seriously begin to consider Semra’s offer. + +“Emperor?” she asks. +> Join with Semra +“Fuck it, let’s do it.” You say. +“That’s my boy.” Semra remarks. +“What?! Emperor you…you can’t…” Decena reacts. +“Are you still here? Hush tank child, the adults are speaking.” Semra snidely comments, this time though Decena ignores her and focuses all her attention on you. + +“Emperor…I don’t understand why you would trust this woman after all the terrible things you’ve told me about her, but maybe it isn’t my place to understand. Maybe I am unable to understand the ways of a living god. And that IS what you are. At least to me. I will always love you no matter what. I will always serve you faithfully no matter what. Now if YOU believe that this svelk’s plan is what is necessary to win, then I will trust your judgment. However I still cannot trust her and if you’re entering this city, you aren’t going alone. I insist that I go with you.” + +Decena has dropped her formal stance at this point and is looking into your eyes while holding one of your hands with both of hers. She still believes so much in you… + +You nod which causes Semra to roll her eyes. + +“(Sigh) Very well if you want to bring your former tank baby fuck toy fine. Maybe she’ll come in handy as demon fodder, but that’s it. I don’t have the power to keep an opening in the barrier for very long, now hurry up and meet me at the city gates.” Semra remarks and her image disappears. + +“Well I guess I better make a general announcement before we leave.” You say and exit your command tent. + +Your announcement to your soldiers is brief though their response is one of encouragement of course. They’re probably inspired by the fact that you’re willing to do a “one on one” confrontation with the leader of the enemy. Whatever their own private thoughts on your policies and rulership, nobody can ever claim that you’ve never been willing to put yourself in the same amount of danger. + +Of course with you and Decena entering the barrier, thee is the question of who is going to be in charge of the main attack force just in case something should go wrong. + +“Colonel Flevas, you’re in charge of the army.” +“I am?” he asks surprised. +“Sure, you’ve more than proven yourself time and time again. You’ve earned the respect of the troops just as much as anyone else. You have the rank. If anything does happen, get Galen and the rest of the mages here to take down the barrier and then hit the city with everything you got. Though if that barrier comes down and we aren’t out of there within a twenty minutes, bombard the place, and if you start seeing anything that doesn’t look like it belongs from this world coming out of the city, start hitting it with everything anyway.” + +With that last command you and Decena approach Dequilet. As soon as you get to the barrier a small opening appears and the pair of you enter. The city gates then open and once again you and Decena enter. + +Two things are immediately noticeable. One is how very ornate and elaborate the buildings are, even compared to other Nakol cities you’ve been to (Granted those were mostly half in ruins at the time) You’ve never been one for pointless decoration, but you have to admit the city is quite a sight. + +The second thing you notice. There are no people at all. Nothing. It’s like the entire city was evacuated, but you’re fairly certain that didn’t happen. Considering how desperate Mortimer has been to save his own skin, you can’t imagine that he did something so selfless. Besides nobody reported an exodus of people leaving the city and there were no such sightings. + +“Beautiful isn’t it? Nothing compared to svelk architecture to be sure, but fairly good for the lesser-born monkeys. Especially without any of them around anymore dirtying up the place.” Semra shouts as she walks towards you. + +Decena grips her weapon, but makes no other move. + +“So where is everyone?” +“Oh most of them are inside the big palace just up ahead. In these last few weeks ol’ Morty’s had himself a non-stop orgy. Takes the edge off. I have to admit such things are an amusing distraction, but when it comes to you monkeys even I can only stand one at a time. Anyway, shall we prepare for our…merging?” + +At this point Decena grabs your arm. + +“Emperor are you sure abut this? I mean we could still just chop this bitch’s head off then go in and finish off the sorcerer king and whatever demons we may face. Just me and you.” +“Its okay Decena. This svelk bitch has always been inside my head in one way or another, what’s one more? Besides, my life has always been an open book. I have no hidden secrets of any worth. She’s already know all my combat techniques considering she taught me most of them. As much as I might hate to admit it, she’s a far more skilled magic user than I will most likely ever be so there is nothing to learn there. Anything she might use against me psychologically she’s already tried and failed.” + +You turn to Semra, who stands silently listening. You walk towards her still talking. + +“So she can access my mind because I KNOW I’m strong enough to resist whatever the hell she might attempt. Because ultimately it isn’t me who needs to be worried about this joining, it’s her. This will work both ways, and who knows what secrets might she hold in that svelk brain of hers. Secrets that she doesn’t want ME to know and I’m sure there are quite a lot. Now are YOU prepared for this?” you ask Semra face to face and you notice that there is a brief show of concern, then she answers. + +“I can handle it if you can, lover.” She answers confidently. +“Well let’s get on with it then.” You say. +“Stare into my eyes and focus.” she says and begins the process. + +Suddenly your mind goes to another place. + +You see what’s in Semra’s mind or at least a glimpse of it. Images are coming at you so fast you can’t make out all of it, but you see a mixture of the horrifying and impressive at the same time. + +You see what must’ve been during the time of when the svelk ruled. Everything is very regal and elegant looking, though much like the svelk themselves, it radiates a certain coldness. You also see the svelk treating their subjects (Most of which are of races you’ve never even seen before) worse than the Empire ever could. They also have greater control too thanks to their magic. + +What you aren’t seeing is any images of Semra herself and you’re even sensing that she’s experiencing pain during this process. Semra is obviously blocking some of her more private thoughts. She’s showing you a general history of her life, yet somehow only telling you half the story. Meanwhile she’s probably trying to scour through your mind of everything. + +However, while you may not have the magic skills she does, your powers have grown considerably over the years. Her attempts to keep portions of her own mind shielded fail and you see even more… + +You see the image of a young svelk girl. You aren’t sure how old, but by human standards she would definitely be considered a child. It’s Semra and she is holding the hand of an adult male svelk. + +They are both in a city where a large crowd of svelk are gathered having a good time throwing what looks to be sveld babies against a nearby wall which has a big target on it. Semra looks very happy and cheers whenever one splats into a bloody mess in the center. + +It would seem that Semra’s entertainment preferences didn’t change much for her. Several images of her enjoying similar activities with the same adult male flood your mind. The adult male is her father. + +In any case, the idea that she was once a child is bizarre, but then everyone starts as one at some point right? + +You see many images of her father. He was obviously a warrior mage of great skill that enjoyed violent battle and crushing the enemies of his empire though you also get a sense of “honor” about him. In that regard he must’ve been unusual for a svelk. He also was much different around Semra who apparently brought out the “lighter side” of him. + +You then see more…intimate moments with her father. Namely sexual in nature. You can’t say you’re surprised to see this given her own personality. This relationship apparently went on for years. + +You’re loathed to think it, but her father seems very much like…well you. His face even vaguely resembles your own if you had the dark skin and pointy ears. This must just be another piece of the sick puzzle of why Semra has a bit of an obsession for you. + +It’s obvious that Semra is really trying to do her best in blocking all of this from you, but she continues to fail. + +Then you see a black spot. Like a pit of endless despair. + +The next images are brutal and violent. You see war, specifically a civil war. The svelk are warring with their own kind, or rather the “impure offshoot” of their own kind, the sveld. Dark elf against elf in a war to the death. + +Then you see images of svelk cities burning to the ground and falling into ruin followed by hordes of svelk scattering and becoming the nomadic mercenary society you’ve always known them to be. + +You see Semra’s father in battle with a mob of demonic beings. They also have a much older Semra on the ground. This must all be during the fall of the svelk Empire. + +The demons are doing their best in trying to rape Semra, but she manages to get the upper hand and fight them off. Then you see Semra’s father being brutally ripped apart by the demons before Semra can do anything to help him. One demon even runs off with his head. A great sense of sorrow floods your mind. + +And then you suddenly feel yourself being pushed away. The contact is broken and Semra immediately turns away from you and some sniffling sounds can be heard. + +“(Sniffle) There. It’s done. Let’s go.” She remarks while rubbing her eyes and walking briskly towards the palace. + +You stand silent for a moment somewhat in shock by what has just happened. Never thought you’d see AND actually believe Semra having feelings of loss and genuine sadness. + +“What…what the hell happened?” Decena asks. +“I think I saw something she thought she could hide from me and failed spectacularly.” You answer. +“What did you see?” +“A lot, but probably not everything. All I’ll say right now is the woman has serious daddy issues.” You say. + +Decena pauses for a moment before speaking again. + +“Don’t we all?” she says looking directly at you and walks towards the palace leaving you standing alone. + +“Alison didn’t.” you mumble to yourself and follow. + +As soon as you set foot in the palace a horrible stench fills your lungs. It smells like all manner of bodily fluids, waste and then some. Vermin of all kind run about what looked to be a picturesque palace at one time, but now is home to well, filth. + +“Ugh! That’s really awful! I actually feel sick! Not even sections of the jungles in Nyytrus smelled this bad!” Decena remarks. +“I can honestly say I’ve only encountered a stench this bad once before and it wasn’t an orgy that caused it.” you say remembering Gnome’s Home. + +You point up ahead into the large chamber that Semra is waiting for the pair of you. And there lies what is causing the majority of the smell. The dead. + +Hundreds of filthy naked bloody bodies must be piled up in the center of the chamber like some grisly pillar. Other bodies lie about on the floor. Really you can’t really walk into the place without stepping over one. + +“It would appear that the orgy has been cancelled.” Semra remarks. +“I take it that this is a sign that Morty’s gotten worse?” you ask. +“It’s a safe bet. I don’t know if you can feel it, but I’m definitely feeling more of an infernal presence. Zelvix may have very well completely taken over Mortimer’s body by now.” + +“Sadly the little fucker is still making squeaking pleading sounds for his freedom, though his voice is starting to dim. His torment while delicious now, will be even more so in hell when he finally shuffles off his mortal coil. But I ramble, please come in with your friends Semra. I’m sure all of us can come to some sort of deal…” a dark booming voice says behind the doors up ahead. Probably the throne room. + +Semra turns to you. + +“Whatever you do, don’t listen to Zelvix. Demons have a way of persuading you into doing things you’d never consider.” +“What like linking your mind with them?” you say. +“I’m serious! If you think that I’M a manipulative untrustworthy bitch, think of me five times worse and you still haven’t even begun to understand just how bad demons can be. Now as soon as we go in, he’s not going to attack us directly at least not immediately. He’ll try to get us into a deal first. What we need to do is perform my banishment ritual on him. You actually don’t need to do anything; I’ll do the work. I just need your extra magical energy as well as your inner willpower. Together we can do this.” + +Maybe its because your minds are linked now, you get the sense that Semra is telling the entire truth about this. Usually you always have suspicion or doubt about her words, but not this time. + +“Hey what about me?” Decena asks. “Both of you are wizards with all kinds of mind protection, what the hell am I going to do when the demon starts attacking mine?” +“Don’t worry Decena, I’ll cast a powerful mind shield spell on you, but I’m more than confident that you’ve got the inner strength to resist any demon lies.” You say. +“I’d highly advise against that! You need to stay focused! Upkeeping a spell on her is just going to divide your energy. She probably should just wait outside.” Semra snaps. +“Semra, she’s here to help me just like I’m here to help YOU. I’m not going to deprive her of something she wants to do. You say its going to divide my energy, I say let me worry about that and you worry about your role in this. We’re all in this together remember?” + +Semra throws up a hand in exasperation. + +“Fine.” She remarks. + +You tell Decena that she just needs to deal with any threats other than Mortimer since you know at some point he’s probably going to have minions running in to help him. You also remind Decena to NOT kill Mortimer since the whole point is to keep the demon in weakened form while Semra banishes it. + +Each one of you knowing your roles, you all enter the throne room… +> The confrontation +Upon entering the throne room, Mortimer paces near his throne, looking up when you arrive. He certainly doesn’t look like the fop you remember, his clothes are now partly torn and dirty. He doesn’t look like he’s bathed in days making his hair to stand up in a way that would almost be laughable if he wasn’t currently possessed by a demon. His eyes give off an unearthly red glow. + +The throne room itself is in shambles and pieces of dead bodies, entrails and blood are practically everywhere. A large broken crystal lies nearby, you can only guess that’s Zelvix’s former prison. + +Semra says nothing. She just looks at you nodding, and reaches out for your hand. You give it to her and she grabs it. She then begins chanting. You take the opportunity to cast your mind shield spell on Decena who stands nearby watching every direction. + +“So, THIS is what you’ve brought to beat me with Semra? I would’ve expected better from the likes of you. I don’t know why you’re even chanting that nonsense, it isn’t going to work on me you know.” Zelvix says. (It certainly isn’t Mortimer anymore just on how deep the voice is alone) + +While the three of you stay silent, Zelvix continues to talk. + +“I have no idea why you continue to blame me for your father’s death. Even I can’t control my underlings all the time. Your people made a deal with me and I collected, what’s so wrong about that?” + +Semra continues to chant. + +“You believe this woman? She holds a grudge longer than some hell lords do and at least they do for something reasonable like a stolen soul or something. She’s just whining. Bah, I’m done with her anyway, I offered another deal when she first arrived here for old time’s sake, but she refused.” + +Zelvix’s banter is still met by silence. + +“Anyway, how about you two? Oh no. No, I don’t think you’ll do. You’re too much in love with this one. While I think under different circumstances twisting your mind would probably be child’s play, I believe your master’s presence makes it a bit too much of an effort to even try. You want his approval so much that you’d probably strip naked, get down on all fours and open your ass, pussy and mouth at the same time to an entire company of orcs if you thought it would please him. Blind loyalty is such a beautiful thing at times. Shit, I should be so lucky to instill such devotion. Oh well, guess that’s why there’s torture.” Zelvix says to Decena. + +Everyone continues to remain silent, but Zelvix now turns his attention to you. You didn’t feel it before, but you start to feel an oppressive presence within your mind. + +“Now you I can work with. Can’t work with bitches anyway, too fucking emotional am I right? I’m sure you know what I’m talking about considering the company you’re keeping. You think a svelk female is bad? Heh, try a demon girl. Your dark elves don’t have shit on them. Lots of fun at parties though!” + +You redouble your efforts to block out Zelvix’s words… + +“I have to say, you’re quite skilled for a mortal. I’ll even admit, I like your style, showing no mercy to your enemies, ruling your territory with an iron fist, I can appreciate a mortal that rises above his slug like station. And you were quite low weren’t you? You were practically an abortion waiting to happen then through a minor mistake you got kicked upstairs. Good thing bureaucracy sucks doesn’t it? It’s okay though, you made the most of it and that’s what really counts. I mean here you are talking to me, one of the greatest demon lords in the infernal realms…” + +At this point you’d almost make a deal with him just so he’d shut the fuck up. He continues to pace, but you notice he holds his head for a brief moment. + +“Hrmm, starting to feel something…no it’s gone now. Nice try Semra, but you’re not getting anywhere. Now who was I talking to? Oh yes, the Eternal.” + +You suddenly feel an even greater oppressive feeling on your mind. Between trying to support Semra, protecting Decena and fighting off Zelvix, you’re starting to feel the burden. + +“Not easy is it? Protecting everyone? (Sigh) I don’t even know why you’re helping Semra anyway. You know she’d backstab you if it ultimately served her purpose. You’re not a stupid man, you have to know that she’s just using you right now and it’s not even for petty revenge. Well some of it is I suppose, but there’s something greater here at stake and she’s trying to achieve it. Let me tell you…” + +Zelvix’s deep voice fills your mind despite your best efforts to block it out. + +“She’s trying to revive the svelk Empire. Y’see she actually thinks by somehow killing me that the so called curse I put on the svelk will disappear. It’s complete shit of course. The reason for the svelk downfall is their own doing and none of my own. I didn’t cause their civilization to suddenly descend into civil war and rebellion, that had been coming for centuries long before I arrived. All I did was provide a service. A world saving one in fact. Why in certain circles one might even consider me a hero!” + +You feel a greater drain on your energy as Zelvix continues. + +“I bet she even told you that I’m planning on unleashing an army of demons on this world didn’t she? Pfft. Please as if I need to worry about such things, I have my own kingdom in the infernal realm with millions of subjects and even more souls to torment! If its one thing I’ve learned as a demon lord, it’s that you should only conquer what you can actually hold. I had a brother once who learned that lesson the hard way. Got his head chopped off by a mortal for his troubles. Hahahahaha! My brother was a fucking idiot!” + +Zelvix laughs at his last statement, which is then followed by a roar of pain. Mortimer’s body falls to the ground and he begins twitching and convulsing. + +“FUCKING BITCH! I’LL RIP YOUR SOUL APART! RAAAAARGH!” Zelvix shouts while Semra keeps chanting. If anything it’s given you a bit of temporary relief, but only for a little while. + +“Well, it seems our little dark skinned whore has been doing her research. I may have underestimated her. The flaw of arrogance comes with being a demon lord I suppose…(Sigh) Very well then, as much as I’ve enjoyed chatting with you, I can see I’ll have to cut to the chase….” + +You try to think of pleasant thoughts to block out Zelvix, such as ones with your time with Alison, but Zelvix won’t be ignored. + +“Look, here’s the deal and it’s not even going to cost you your soul because I know you’re too smart for that. What it is going to cost is a little bloodshed and that shouldn’t be a problem for the likes of you, especially considering you never liked ol’ Morty anyway. Just kill Morty, I’ll take care of Semra and then I’ll be heading back to the infernal plane because honestly I’ve had enough of this world.” + +You give no response, but you can feel your willpower getting to the point where you almost want to give in… + +“Hey wait a minute. Maybe YOU want to kill Semra? She’s in the middle of her spell right now and you’re so close, there’s never been a more perfect time! You’d catch her completely off guard. You could easily take that dagger that she once stabbed you with and at last do what you’ve always wanted to do with it. Remember just like the time when you two were exterminating gnomes? Don’t you wish you could’ve taken that opportunity instead of following your orders? Well you have no one giving you orders right now. What is stopping you? You know you want to and all I want is to be free from this world. Kill Semra and I’ll happily open up a gate and return home.” + +Zelvix deep melodic tone begins to make your mind succumb to his persuasion attempts. Never before have you experienced such a powerful force of raw will. Even in a few other instances where you faced a psychic assault it’s never been quite like this. Granted it’s in his favor that what he’s proposing isn’t anything you’d object to doing either. The ONLY thing that’s giving you pause is the fact that it’s a demon lord telling you to do this. + +“Ah…I see you don’t trust me…smart. Tell you what, I’ll sweeten the deal. You seek to conquer and bring order to this miserable world do you not? You have the skill and ability, what you lack is time. So you seek immortality do you not? An immortality that even eluded your old master, and wouldn’t you like to succeed where he failed? Your answer lies where you’ve always known it to be. The Isle of Mortos. I know you’ve made a halfhearted attempt at trying to locate it again. Would you like to know where it is exactly located? I can tell you right now if you just kill that…ARRGH!” + +Zelvix once again feel the effects of Semra’s ritual. At this point Morty’s body is desperately crawling over to Semra in an attempt to reach her. Also just as you suspected Zelvix uses some sort of magic to bring the bodies from the room behind you back to life, except these aren’t singular walking corpses. The pile of bodies have melded into each other creating a giant mass of flesh slowly rolling towards all of you howling and moaning while arms, legs and heads twitch about from it. It might be too big to get through the doorway, but you imagine that its sheer weight and girth will just break through the sides of the walls. + +You’re still staggering from your recent mind assault, but now that you’re no longer being mentally attacked, you take a quick assessment of the situation. + +Decena prepares to hold off the abomination by herself, Semra is still in her semi-trance and Zelvix continues to drag himself over to Semra. +> Help Decena +Maybe you’re not going to help Zelvix, but you’re not going leave Decena to fight off that monstrosity by herself. Semra will just have to hope Zelvix doesn’t have the strength to reach her before you can get back over there. + +You let go of Semra’s hand though you still feel a link with her allowing the transfer of energy. You can tell she’s somewhat angry though that you’re being distracted. + +Decena is busily trying to hack away the flailing limbs of the massive blob of flesh trying to squeeze through the doorway. You see the sides of the walls begin to crack. + +“Decena, get out of the way that thing is going to grab you!” you say and shove her aside. You follow up by casting a cone of ice at the thing in an attempt to slow it down. +“Why not fire?” Decena shouts. +“If I set this blob on fire, it’s going to still come at us except it’ll be burning as well. Better that we should freeze it in place. I’ll take care of this thing, you go over to Morty or Zelvix, or whoever the fuck he is and prevent him from reaching Semra, remember don’t kill him!” + +Decena nods and runs over to Morty’s body which has nearly reached Semra, that is until Decena pulls his leg, drags him away and kicks him in the face. Zelvix bellows in anger and emanates unnatural hissing noises. + +Meanwhile you’re still attempting to freeze his “pet” in place. You periodically smash chunks of it off, but it’s a losing battle. It continues to roll its bulk into the doorway and the sides of the walls now successfully begin to give way. You jump back to avoid being crushed. + +“Semra, you better hurry the fuck up before this thing crushes us all!” you say smashing another bloody frozen chunk off of the mass. + +Another unearthly wail from Zelvix and it’s a sign that the end of this conflict is near. + +“SSSSSSSSS NO! IT CANNOT END LIKE THIS! I WILL NOT BE DEFEATED BY MORTAL SHIT! I CURSE YOU ALL! NONE OF YOU SHALL AAAARRRRGH!” + +Morimer’s body twitches and convulses one last time and you manage to turn your head just in time from your own battle to see a red spirit like mist rise from his body. An angry demonic face can be seen briefly followed by the red mist completely dissipating. In front of you, the mass of flesh you’ve been fighting goes completely lifeless. Mortimer’s body is also lifeless. Whatever spark that was keeping him alive was only due to Zelvix’s magic and he’s truly gone now. + +You walk over to Decena who is near Mortimer’s body. She looks okay, but she’s rubbing her head. + +“You all right?” you ask. +“Yeah, I just…damn. Towards the end there, the demon was trying to get into my mind. It wasn’t even that long, but shit was it intense. I’m glad you had that spell protecting me.” +“I’d never abandon you.” You say and embrace her. + +“Well isn’t that just sickeningly sweet? I do all the damn work and you hug her? Not even a thank you to me, but then you’ve never been grateful for anything I’ve done for you.” Semra remarks who is looking a little exhausted herself. + +“Semra, if I were you, I’d be thankful that I’m letting you live.” You remark. +“Oh you just say such things. We both know that you could never kill me. We’re mentally linked now you know. I KNOW you still desire me! Even now that you’re turning into a feeble old man I STILL dwell within your thoughts. I will ALWAYS be within your thoughts somewhere.” Semra snaps. + +“Then you also know what you just said isn’t entirely true. While before you could at least lie to yourself and make the assumption that in your twisted mind that somehow we were a couple. You now have complete access to my own thoughts and you know what you’ve seen? You’ve seen that my mind has been always honest with you. Would I like to fuck you? Yeah, and then I’d like to slit your fucking throat. I’m not going to pretend to be a completely well adjusted person, in fact I never have. Honestly given everything I’ve gone through, it’s amazing that I’m not completely fucking insane.” + +Semra remains silent as you continue your rant. + +“In fact given that we’re so linked now there is less that YOU can actually hide from me now. I’d think you’d like to remember that fact. You know what you are deep down inside Semra? You’re a scared little girl who misses her daddy. I’m not even going to get into your completely fucked up relationship with him, because honestly I’m not in a position to judge. But the fact remains you saw the man you loved and possibly only held any sort of true feelings for get ripped apart by demons before your eyes and you couldn’t do anything to stop it. Just like you saw your entire civilization and way of life get torn apart and couldn’t do anything to stop it.” + +Semra’s eyes narrow at your attack on her tragic childhood. + +“Y’know. You’d be a rotting infant corpse right now if it wasn’t for me. You weren’t even meant to be an Eternal.” She says coldly. +“And? What the hell does all that matter, I’ve made the most of my mistaken life now. And yes, Semra I’m well aware of ALL the times you’ve saved my life or trained me, or graced me with your magical svelk vaginia. It doesn’t matter, I’ve put up with your shit and then some. Your whole weird obsessive relationship with me is some sort of twisted attempt to re-create what you lost. Well as I’ve told you time and time again, I’m not the one and I’ll never be the one. Time to grow up and face that fact. You’re always telling me that I need to stop worrying about keeping the Empire alive and how I should just move on with my life. Well take your own damn advice.” + +Semra says nothing and the two of you just stare at one another for a moment. Even though you’re mentally fatigued you begin to prove your point by attempting to access deeper reaches of her mind. She easily stops you, but your point is made. + +“Very well Eternal. You’ve made your feelings and your mind quite clear to me. Possibly the clearest they’ve ever been. And as for moving on with my life? After what has happened to today, I’ll certainly be able to do that with better purpose. Unfortunately for you, there are svelk elsewhere in the world and that is where I shall go and unite the svelk properly once again. Oh don’t worry though lover. That won’t likely happen in your pitifully short lifetime. Heh. It probably won’t even happen in my lifetime, but I will plant the seeds and build the foundation. And KNOW that once again WE will be the rulers of this world. I will be remembered long after you’ve been forgotten like the lesser born you are.” + +Well the love is gone, if she’s calling you lesser born again. + +Semra begins to walk over towards you once again causing Decena to grip her weapon, but you know that she doesn’t intend to attack. + +“And now I shall take my leave which I’m sure you’ll be most thankful of. I know we’ve said goodbye many times before, but I believe this shall be the real one. I can see that your path is ultimately one of predictability and eventually obscurity. Perhaps good enough for you, but not for me. Never for me. I will say this though, I’m proud of you. You saw my weakness and you pounced. I taught you well. Goodbye Eternal.” + +Semra nearly moves closer as if to kiss you, but she takes a look at Decena instead. + +“He’s all yours tank baby.” She says and begins to walk away. + +You watch her walk past the mass of bloody flesh and through the doorway hoping that this will indeed be the last time you have to put up with her. + +She can’t help but say one last thing though. + +“Better get a good look while you can, because it’ll be the last time you get to stare at my ass again.” Semra laughs and in a few more seconds she’s walked out the palace completely. + +There is a silence for a moment and then Decena begins to speak. + +“So what now?” she asks. +“Well let’s start with this for one thing.” You say and swing your sword downward severing Mortimer’s head from his dead body. Never hurts to be sure. + +“Come on, we should leave the city too before Flevas starts having it blown to pieces with us inside it.” You remark. + +Decena nods and you make your way out of the palace and towards the city gates. The barrier is completely down now and there is no sign of Semra. She’s probably long gone and on her way to who knows where now. Though you do wonder about this location she mentioned where there are still svelk. Can’t be anywhere on this continent and from what you know there aren’t any on Nyytrus. Another undiscovered land mass perhaps? To be quite honest you’re not sure if you’d even want to bother finding it if it’s full of svelk. + +But if the day ever came where they appear on your shores, you’ll be sure to make certain that none leave to go back to it. + +Decena and you are quiet as you leave the city, but just as you see your army banners in sight she has to ask. + +“Why didn’t you try to kill her?” +“Heh. Good question. I was sort of wondering why myself. (Sigh) The reasons are a bit complicated I guess.” +“You…you didn’t really love her…did you?” +“Hah! No, of course not. Everything I said was true and she knew it, that’s why she left and I could tell she meant it this time. Mind connection and all. Hell, if I knew it was going to be advantage to get her to leave me alone, I might’ve agreed to it a lot sooner.” +“So what were your reasons for not killing her?” +“Well for one thing it wouldn’t have ended that way had I initiated hostilities. First of all we were all fatigued and in no position to effectively fight one another. Even with you helping me, she would’ve just escaped and probably bothered me in the future. At least this way I won’t have to deal with her again. Not as good as her death I suppose, but I’ll take it. Second? I made a promise that I’d help her and I was going to keep my word. Call it foolish honor or a foolish sense of gratitude that she did save my life many times in the past. Whatever. I made the choice and it’s done now.” + +Decena seems to accept your response even if she doesn’t entirely understand it, but then you give a third reason. + +“One reason I suppose…and I never EVER expected to feel this way…but I actually felt a twinge of pity for her. What I saw in her mind…shit…it’s no wonder why she’s so fucked up even for a svelk. Almost seemed more like a punishment to keep her alive so she can still live with all that emotional burden she tries so desperately to keep locked up tight. I dunno. Maybe I’m just growing soft and weak in my old age. I mean every step I’m taking right now is painful. There was a time when I could’ve taken on two of those abominations and not even have been tired. Guess Semra was right about that. I will grow old like everyone else and eventually I’ll be forgotten.” + +“Not to me you won’t. Not to me.” Decena says touching your arm, you touch her hand with your own. + +“I know Decena. I know…and I’m sorry for what I did to you.” You reply. + +Decena of course doesn’t exactly know why you’d be apologizing to her. In her mind she doesn’t ever think you did anything excessively negative to her. And even the times you did, she’s ultimately written it off as something that was “for the good of the Empire” in the long term or probably made her own mental excuses for you. + +And of course that’s the lasting damage you’re apologizing for. + +Smiling again at Decena and giving a few words of praise for her deeds during the fight, the pair of you meet up with the rest of your army where Flevas says he’s glad to see you both since he was planning on carrying out an airship bombardment just in case. + +“Fuck it. Let’s bombard the city anyway and let the wilderness reclaim it.” You say. +“You sure? It’s practically intact.” Flevas asks. +“Yeah. I don’t like the architecture. Too…pretty.” You answer. +> Years pass... +Year 56 + +You enter Brenda’s office where upon the pair of your smile at each other. + +“So, how’s the new bride?” you ask. +“Wonderful, of course. I’m happier than I’ve been in a long time. Thank you for performing the wedding personally.” Brenda remarks. +“No problem. Glad to do it, but I said it before and I’ll say it again. Never did I EVER believe that you’d remarry. Let alone to Warrick of all people! I remember when you hated his guts!” +“Ha ha, yeah…that seems so long ago now. I was too full of misplaced anger and hate. Glad I moved past it and reconnected with Warrick again.” +“Sure, but I just never knew how well you two were reconnecting. When you both told me, I was completely taken by surprise.” You chuckle. +“Well of course you were unaware. You were too busy fighting demons, monsters and sorcerer kings. Yeah, I know it still seems strange, but Warrick and I have a lot more in common than not, you know? I mean we grew up together, we trained together, and we served together. We’re both Eternals. We’re just always going to have that special connection. I mean I will always love Roldan, but why spend the remainder of my life alone if it feels right with another? We both came to that conclusion.” +“Hey, you don’t need to explain to me. I understand and I’m happy for the pair of you. Anyway I just came here to let you know that the new Eternals have been released from their tanks.” +“So did they meet with your standards?” Brenda asks. +“Yes, most of them seem to be very much like the third generation though perhaps with signs of displaying higher intelligence overall. I’d definitely say they’re ready for your training.” You reply. +“So you do still want me to train them?” +“Sure, you did well enough with the third generation didn’t you? I’m just wondering where the hell we’re going to send them when they’re all grown up. It’s likely that Nyttrus will be completely under our control by that time.” +“Maybe we’ll discover a new continent?” +“Maybe, I’m certain they’re out there, though I’ve cut down on spending for exploration for awhile. I’m trying to focus on rebuilding the destruction that was caused to the Nakol and getting Nyttrus under our control as well +“How is it going over there anyway?” +“Better than I expected, worse than I hoped. We’ve got more than a few strongholds there now, but the Iznac are far from being beaten, unfortunately most of the humans there are sick or dead due to disease and Iznac magic. Flog’s also dead and the orcs have become slightly less disciplined as of late without his calmer leadership. There have been a few reports of deserters running off into the jungles and forming their own communities. (Sigh) Going to have to do something about them of course.” +“What about the kobolds?” +“Heh, Dedicated as always. The original leader I sent, Snilkez’ka is still alive and kickin’. She and the rest of them are the main ones holding down the forts. Never thought I’d be so glad of their high birth rates. The third generation Eternals are getting shipped over there soon, so hopefully things will get better.” +“Will you be going over there?” +“I dunno. I might, if only to keep myself busy. There are no more major challenges here on Evigrus anymore and I’d rather not send Decena there. Wasn’t a pleasant experience for her and its not necessary for her to go through that again.” + +Brenda nods and you suddenly go into a brief speech about Decena and how proud you are of her and engage in general praising of Decena’s accomplishments. + +“You know…and I’ve never addressed this because I didn’t think it was my place to do so, but I still don’t understand why the two of you split up…I mean granted the age difference might normally cause difficulties in being able to relate to one another, but considering that you’re both warriors, you both have an unwavering dedication to preserving the Empire and more importantly you are both Eternals, you have a lot more in common than most people. I mean she is your protégée is she not? It only seems natural that the pair of you would be an item.” + +Brenda’s bluntness takes you a bit off guard. She normally isn’t so confrontational. + +“It’s complicated.” You answer. +“No, it really isn’t. Look I don’t know the whole story, but I DO know at one time you and Decena were together even if you didn’t make it public knowledge. I also know that you DO care for her and its not just in an average friendly way or a master-subordinate way. You love her and for some reason you’re denying yourself of it.” +“I’m not denying myself of anything.” +“Well what then? I know it wasn’t Decena’s idea, that girl still worships the ground you walk on. Probably more than anyone in the entire Empire.” +“Look Brenda, I understand you’re still on a positivity trip due to your own newfound marital bliss, but my situation is different. It will ALWAYS be different all right? +“It’s not that much different…” + +At this point you slam your hands down on Brenda’s desk and get in her face, knocking over a few things on her desk. + +“IT IS DIFFERENT. You can’t understand and be glad that you don’t.” you remark. Brenda is silent at your aggressive stance. You stare at her for a few seconds and then back away. + +“Now then, the new eternals will be transported here in a few days, I suggest you prepare yourself.” You say and turn to leave. + +Brenda though is in rare form and can’t help but continue. + +“Emperor?” she says. +“What?” you answer. +“You didn’t do to Decena, what that svelk bitch did to you and I don’t think Alison would want you spending the rest of your life mourning her.” + +You stand in the doorway for a moment with your back to Brenda. + +“I know I didn’t do what Semra did. I was hideously more successful…and as for Alison…she doesn’t want anything. She’s dead.” You reply and leave the office. + +Well you’re in a shitty mood now. + +You spend the rest of the day doing a lot of introspection, weighing pros and cons, taking into consideration every side and all your personal feelings on the matter. Every once in awhile you speak to Alison’s portrait as if she’s going to answer. All of which ends up pissing you off even more because you find it to be a pointless endeavor when you should be focusing on more important matters. + +You’ve got a damn Empire to run and here you are struggling on what to do about a girl (Or actually a full grown woman now, that has a bit of an arrested development) that likes you. What the hell are you an idiotic hormonal teenager? You thought you settled this a long time ago. + +You begin to mentally blame everything and everyone. You blame Brenda and Warrick for their new happy marriage. You especially blame Brenda for bringing this up to you. You blame Decena for becoming so attached to you. You blame Semra for…well everything. You blame Alison for dying on you. You blame Cyrus for killing her. You blame Casimir for setting up the assassination. You even blame Marik for having a hand in creating Decena and then not successfully killing her. + +Ultimately though you’ve got nobody to blame, but yourself and you know it and you need to just make a final decision on what to do about Decena. +> Go to her now +You’ve played the brooding tortured loner for too long. You’re the damned Emperor, why the hell are you putting yourself through this unnecessary restriction and misguided attempt at “morality?” + +The “damage” was done a long time ago and it isn’t like Decena is special in this regard. You routinely have propaganda pumped out to keep thousands of people brainwashed throughout the Empire. Decena just had the luxury of a personal lesson. + +So you took advantage of her youth and your position of power. So what? You still trained her to be the best. Would she have grown to love you if you hadn’t done what you did? Doesn’t matter. It’s done. She loves you and you do love her. The years that have passed between the pair of you not being together have proven that your own feelings for her are genuine. They always were even if your approach wasn’t quite conventional. + +You’ve done far worse things than the “corruption” of one young girl who has done nothing but thrive because of your guidance. No, it is a far crueler thing to deprive her of what she wants the most. And it’s a far more intelligent thing for you to accept her fully into your life as an equal. + +And as for the long shadow of Alison…well… even Brenda moved on with her life. It’s been long enough. + +You take look at Alison’s portrait. + +“It’s true that I’ll always love you in some way. If it weren’t for you, I wouldn’t have known about how good such a crippling emotion can feel.” You chuckle. + +“Thank you.” You say and leave your room. + +Decena is currently still stationed in Nakol mostly keeping the potential chaos down while you rebuild and continue to establish order there. You have a message sent to her to return to the palace at once. + +When she returns she’s in for quite the surprise when you immediately go to embrace her. + +“Erm…not that I’m complaining, but what’s all this about my Emperor?” she remarks. +“It’s about us. Once and for all I see what was meant to be. We were meant to be together.” You answer. + +Decena’s reaction is one of silent shock rather than the overwhelming happiness you believed. + +“Are you serious?” Decena asks calmly. +“Yes, why wouldn’t I be?” you reply. +“…I…just…” Decena stumbles over her words. +“What? What’s wrong? Aren’t you happy with this news?” +“Well…yes…but…” +“Did you find someone else?” you ask believing that could be the only reason for her hesitation. +“No! There could never be anyone else! It’s just…I have to know…” +“What?! What is it?! Spit it out!” you exclaim. +“I have to know if this is real. I mean REALLY real. You’ll always be my Emperor, but I have known you in a more intimate way once before and you dismissed me, and I accepted it. In time I have even become used to that fact. But if we are to become intimate once more… I can’t go through losing you in that way again. I just can’t…so if this is just a flight of fancy or something I’d rather not…” + +At this point Decena is getting upset, and you have to reassure her. + +“Decena, this is real. No bullshit. I’m serious. I’ve searched my mind, body and what might be a soul about this and I know there’s nobody else I would rather become my wife.” + +Now Decena is struck again with surprise. She probably figured you two were just going to start bedding each other again. + +“Wife? You’re serious? But wouldn’t that make me…” +“Empress. Yes, it would. You would have an equal say in the Empire. Possibly more than anyone else besides myself.” You answer. +“Oh…I don’t know…I mean…I’m a soldier. I don’t understand all the intricacies of running a country like you do.” Brenda says. +“Pfft. You think I agonize over all of it? I let Kivan and other bean counters handle most of the boring stuff anyway. I’m just saying you would no longer have to feel subordinate or subservient. We would be equal. We would rule together. You understand?” + +Decena nods and a smile forms across her face. + +“I do.” And she leans in to kiss you. + +In the weeks that follow, “I do.” is said by the both of you again at the ceremony when you finally make your joining official. There is celebration and merriment, though the wedding itself is not an excessively fancy one. It certainly has more security than normal however and is held in the palace. + +Later as the night goes on, Warrick and Brenda sit at the table with you Decena. The pair of them have been in rare form the entire event with their intake of alcohol. While they aren’t drunk, they’re certainly less formal than usual, but then this isn’t exactly a time for formalities. + +“See? Didn’t I tell you Brenda? I told you he’d marry her.” Warrick says. +“Warrick you said no such thing! In fact you kept telling me that I shouldn’t have opened up my mouth about it!” Brenda remarks. +“Bah, you must’ve misunderstood me. I always knew it was inevitable.” Warrick says refusing to acknowledge his mistake. +“Glad to know you had faith in me Warrick.” You say causing Warrick to raise his glass before taking a drink. +“Heh, well I’m certainly glad you said something Brenda.” Decena says. + +Brenda leans in on the table speaking directly to Decena. You can smell the alcohol; she’s definitely been drinking more than Warrick tonight. + +I just want to say, you’re fucking beautiful in that dress. Seriously I mean it. I dunno how you still look so young. Must be all those years you spent in that fucking tank.” +“Erm…I guess…” Decena answers. +“I’m telling you right now. HE’S the lucky one.” Brenda says pointing to you. Without you he’d just be moping about this palace all lonely and still pining over that human girl…” + +This remark causes a bit of silence from everyone, and Warrick starts to tell Brenda to be quiet while Decena just looks at you. + +“Erm, Brenda I think you’ve really had too much to drink now…” Warrick says. +“Now no disrespect to Alison…I mean she was a warrior. Certainly someone to be respected…but…” +“Brenda! Shut. Up!” + +You wave your hand in downward fashion to Warrick. + +“No, it’s fine. Brenda spoke her mind once to me before and this all turned out fairly well, so I’m sort of interested in where this is heading.” You say. + +“Apologies. I’m a little intoxicated…” Brenda says. +“Brenda. Seriously. You obviously got something to say. So say it.” +“All right…Emp…I will.” + +Brenda takes another drink. + +“I’m just saying that you and Decena belong together for several reasons, but most of which is because you’re both Eternals! Doesn’t matter if you’re not from the same generation or not, you’ve got more in common than anyone could possibly know. All of us do. We NEED to stick together. I mean it’s not like we can breed…” + +Well this is an unexpected twist and now a few bystanders are trying their best not to look like they’re listening. + +“Why can’t we breed anyway? Have you figured that out yet, mighty emp? I mean we’re fucking superior to…like everyone! So why the hell can’t we breed?” + +At this point Brenda’s voice is getting louder and Warrick keeps apologizing and begins to motion Brenda towards an exit. You reassure Warrick that he needn’t worry about himself or Brenda and to just get her to sleep it off somewhere. Kivan runs over to ask if everything is okay and you tell him yes, but that you and Decena are going to retire and the rest of the guests can continue enjoying themselves if they wish. + +When you and Decena get back to your room, she addresses the situation that just transpired. + +“What exactly was THAT all about? What was all that about us Eternals having to stick together, asking why we can’t breed and such?” Decena asks. +“I have no idea. Really. Brenda’s usually always been calm minded about things. I’d say it was the drink, but that was only the spark. It’s obvious she’s had these feelings for a while though. Maybe, I dunno. Maybe she wishes she could’ve had her own children. I know she’s thought of the third generation and now the fourth generation of Eternals as her children sometimes. She’s seen them all grown up and directly trained most of them. I guess a maternal instinct has kicked in.” you reply. + +“You know…I do wonder too though sometimes. Why is it that we’re sterile?” +“Well the process isn’t exactly the safest. There’s bound to be a sacrifice somewhere. When the original emperor had us created, he probably did it on purpose or wasn’t concerned about such a sacrifice. When Marik created your group, he probably didn’t care about the sacrifice as well. And to be honest, I’ve never looked into the problem too closely either. I was more focused on potential combat ability rather than fertility.” +“Hm, perhaps you should.” +“You saying you would’ve wanted children? Barefoot and pregnant? Taking care of little monsters instead of out there on the battlefield brining glory to the Empire?” you ask. + +Decena laughs. + +“Well maybe not, but I dunno…I mean if you and I were able to have children, I might not mind it. I mean we would be bringing in another Eternal into this world. Certainly a worthwhile endeavor and still serving the Empire. I mean Brenda might’ve been drunk, but she was correct that we ARE superior to the other races. I mean I know we look human, but you know, and I’ll bet every other Eternal out there knows that we are ultimately better than humans. I know you’ve HAD to think it on several occasions. I mean you’re the best of all of us! If we could actually breed, we’d eventually replace humanity as the dominant race. You’d also be able to have heirs.” +“You’re my heir.” +“Well obviously, but I’m going to die too someday. The Empire needs a strong ruler to hold it together.” +“Wait a minute! I thought you always said I was going to live forever.” You say with some amusement. +“I said I WANT to believe you will, not that it’s actually going to happen. I guess even though I’ve never said it out loud, I am sometimes concerned about the Empire’s potential future.” + +Never before have you heard Decena speak in such a manner. Oh you’ve heard her talking like a soldier or a general about ruthless battlefield tactics and strategy. But this…is a little bit different. She’s speaking with a prospective plan for the future of the nation. + +She’s speaking like a ruler. Like an Empress. + +Brenda was correct, she is right for you. + +“Well, that is all certainly something to think about, but who knows maybe we’ll defy nature tonight.” You say and start moving Decena towards the bed. + +The pair of you proceed to enjoy your wedding night. + +The next day you’re informed of the latest problems on Nyttrus by Kivan who received a message about it in the middle of the night. The Iznac have apparently unleashed a powerful “secret weapon” in the form of three very large flying lizards. And these aren’t wyverns either. They are creatures that Casimir once told you were rare even back in his day. They’re dragons and apparently they’ve already destroyed one of your forts on the continent. + +Looks like you and Decena will be taking your honeymoon on Nyttrus. +> Years pass... +Year 60 + +Eighteen years ago the Children of Tor launched an all out assault on you and while it was a fierce battle, it was the beginning of the end for them as an effective fighting force. + +You hope that the Iznac are going to suffer a similar situation here today, because if not, it’s going to be the beginning of the end for the Empire. Only one civilization is going to come out of this alive from this conflict. + +You’re currently holding the line at Fort Canopy, but it isn’t the only major battle going on right now. You know only a few miles away Decena is undoubtedly doing his best to defend Fort Tangle and General Flevas is taking the fight to the Iznac in the jungles. + +High in the air through the rain and in the near distance you see a multi-colored dragon unleash a gout of flame from its mouth, which engulfs the Tornado. Already heavily damaged the flying fortress can’t take anymore and begins to explode. Minor ones at first, then one large one. Flaming pieces of the machine fall from the sky. + +The Storm II fires another volley of cannon fire at the dragon wounding the great beast, but it isn’t enough to kill it. The dragon bellows and turns its great body around to focus its attack on the Storm II. It isn’t going to die easy like its two siblings did over the past few years. It’s going to fight with everything it has. + +You look over the battlements and see several Iznacs climbing the walls of the fort like an army of ants. They aren’t even using ladders, they’re just scaling the fort with their bare hands. It’s actually rather impressive, until you unleash a chain of lightning to zap all of them. The shock is enough to at least cause most of them to fall off if not outright kill them immediately. + +“Slaughter the four armed spider eyed bastards! Make them realize that their domination of this continent has passed! This is the time of the Empire!” you shout to the Eternals defending the fort. + +Your people are doing their best though they can’t stop every Iznac from scaling the fort. Soon the gunfire is replaced by sounds of close combat weaponry. No matter how far the advances in technology, it always eventually comes down to looking your opponent in the eye and feeling their blood splatter as you end their life. + +While you’re busy hacking off the limbs of an Iznac warrior, another loud explosion in the distance is heard followed by a bright flash in the sky. It’s not lightning from the storm, but rather the demise of your Storm. The Storm II joins the Tornado in crashing to the ground after losing its skirmish with the dragon. Hopefully the rain is making the jungle wet enough or else the flames from the wreckage of these downed airships are going to cause an inferno throughout the jungle. + +Several small frog like beings eventually make their way in by scaling the walls with their masters. They’re generally just referred to as “frogs” but their formal name is the Glip. The Glip almost remind you of the kobolds. Despite being under the harsh dominion of the Iznac for who knows how long, none of the villages ever joined the Empire when the war broke out. Didn’t matter that the Iznac used to (and probably still do) sacrifice and eat the Glip, they ultimately still remained loyal to them. + +While they’ve certainly had their moments, mostly due to ambushes with blowguns and poisonous darts and their camouflage abilities. The Glip are not close combat warriors by any means. It isn’t surprising that you’ve not had to fight many of them. Even the Iznac know their skills are better suited elsewhere. The fact that you’ve started to face a lot of them does give you an indication of how desperate the Iznac have become. + +A group of orcs smash through the barricades of the fort. You sometimes shake your head at the stupidity of that situation. You have no idea how the Iznac managed to come to accept the rebellious orcs as allies, but you guarantee it wasn’t for any reasons other than convenience. Did the greenskins actually believe that Iznac saw them as anything than handy fodder for this conflict? If they broke away from the Empire because they didn’t like being used in such a way, then they completely missed the point. + +Then again being orcs they probably didn’t think that far ahead or perhaps they just wanted to fight the Empire and didn’t care about the reasons. In any case, no matter who wins this conflict, the orcs lose. The Iznac have a habit of ritually sacrificing their “neighbors and allies” to their gods. + +It doesn’t matter in the scheme of things because even with overwhelming odds, your Eternals are still holding their own against all attackers. The only thing that concerns you slightly is… + +You hear a roaring sound getting closer to your position and the sounds of great wings flapping. + +It would appear your concerns will be arriving soon. You just hope that the Storm II and the Tornado did enough damage to it before they both went down. You don’t have the advantage of Decena helping you take it down like you did with the last two dragons. + +You shout a general command for the still working cannons to be pointed towards the dragon and to prepare to fire when the beast is in range. In the meantime you try to keep that side of the fort relatively free of invading forces. + +The dragon gets closer and you give the order to fire and unleash your own magic bolts at the creature. It’s definitely wounded from its ordeal with the two airships, but given your experience with the other two dragons, you know it’s far from being out the fight. + +In fact it’s so determined that it doesn’t distinguish friend from foe when it blasts its flame breath on the fort. You manage to protect most of your people with a magic barrier, but for those outside its protection, most are set on fire if not incinerated immediately. On the positive side, it reduces your enemies, on the negative it ignites the gunpowder barrels for the cannons causing a massive explosion and completely destroying one side of the fort. + +While the barrier still protects you and everyone within initially, its still a lot of strain on your energy and you begin to feel the fatigue setting in. + +“No! Damnit! Fight through it!” you mutter to yourself hating your weakness. + +When the dragon passes you temporarily put down the barrier to take a small breather seeing as you aren’t immediately being attacked by Iznac ground forces anymore (Which have mostly been killed or broke and run by this point) + +Several soldiers point up and announce that the dragon is slowly turning around for a second pass. + +“Everyone spread out and find your own cover! Shoot the overgrown lizard when in range!” you shout and make your way back up to the battlements (Those that are still intact that is). + +You stand on top of the battlements and see the dragon coming straight at you. Almost as if it was personal and who knows maybe it is. This creature may very well want you dead for killing its only two companions. Or perhaps it’s just intelligent enough to recognize you as a genuine threat. + +You summon up all your energy and unleash a stream of lightning at the dragon just as it’s beginning to open its mouth to breath fire. It doesn’t stop. It doesn’t even slow down despite the fact that you’ve undoubtedly just shocked the hell of its brain. + +A gout of flame comes directly at you. + +“Shit!” you shout and put up your own personal barrier to block the flames. Which succeeds, but it does nothing to stop the dragon’s approach. It’s fully intent on ramming you at this point. + +You no idea what would happen if you just stood there with your barrier up. It’s possible the dragon would severely smash its own face in from the force, maybe even breaking its neck, however its also possible that it would hit with enough force that it could actually move you. In this case, right off the battlements on to the ground several feet behind you. + +Your Eternals unleash gunfire as the dragon gets closer and you’re left to wonder if this high-risk plan could potentially end this dragon threat once and for all. +> Keep the barrier up +Probably one of the crazier things you’ve done and its entirely possible you’re either trying to prove something to yourself or you just want this battle to be over with win or lose because you’re getting very tired. Probably a little bit of both. + +“Okay, you fucking overgrown flying lizard, it’s either going to be me or you today.” You say and expend more energy to reinforce your barrier. + +For a brief moment you see the dragon’s face get closer and closer and then… + +There’s a great smashing force that causes you to fly off the battlements. + +You don’t actually fall straight to the ground, but instead you actually sail backwards in the air for a moment and into one of the many decimated tree trunks of the nearby jungle. You feel a cracking sound as your back and head slams hard into the solid wood of the tree and then you begin to fall straight down. Even if you weren’t completely knocked senseless by this terrific force you don’t have anything that could slow your decent. The best you can do is shield your face with your forearms as you crash to the ground. + +Another cracking sound is heard when you hit the ground and you’re in more physical pain than you’ve been in awhile. You’re not dead, but when you try to move, you find that you’re unable. At least not your legs, which are completely numb. You’ve broken your back and the bones in your arms are probably broken too, though you’re definitely feeling the pain from that injury. + +While you’re lying half paralyzed away from the fort, you can hear the audible sounds of battle coming from it. You aren’t sure what happened to the dragon, but apparently it didn’t manage to ram straight through you and keep going. It’s in the fort thrashing about and roaring in pain. Pieces of stone from the fort go flying in different directions; you just hope one of those stone blocks doesn’t hit you since you’re in no position to move right now. + +There’s nothing you can do save for one thing. Heal yourself with magic. You focus all the magic you got on mending your spine first and then your other wounds next. The dragon, gunfire, clanging of weapons and shouting can all be heard while you do this. + +By the time you’re finished, you can barely stand up. You don’t know if it’s due to your drained state or if the magic still needs time to take affect completely. In any case you start to limp back to the fort, which has started to become much quieter. + +When you enter, the fort is practically destroyed, several Eternals lie dead (or in pieces) and right in the center lays the dragon with severe wounds all over its body, exposed bones, torn wings and bleeding profusely. + +“Emperor! You’re alive!” one of the eternals shouts when he sees you. +“Glory to the Empire! We feared the worst when we saw you fall from the battlements. It was a great show of bravery on your part to face down the dragon in the way you did! Never before have I seen something so inspiring! It also caused the creature to crash to the ground where upon all of us took advantage of the situation. As you can see we have brought honor in your name by finishing off the beast!” another boasts. + +“Oh really? Is that why it’s still breathing?” you point out causing the eternals standing around to back off suddenly. + +The dragon is indeed still breathing, but it’s very weak. It’s dying. Your eternals go to strike, but you tell them to hold and shake your head at them not being observant enough to see that the dragon is still alive in the first place. You walk towards the dragon’s head and grab a nearby axe on the ground. + +The beast manages to look at you with one eye and does nothing. You wonder if it still actually has some strength left in it, but is just too tired and old to continue fighting. Maybe it’s ready for it all to end. To join its fellows. + +You have no idea what dragon’s think or even if they do think in such complex terms, but when you take a look at this creature you can’t help but think how old it probably is. What has it seen? Did it once have its own civilization of sorts? What was it like at its peak? What caused it to ally with the Iznac? Was the arrangement some sort of compromise to avoid possible extinction? + +Extinction that has come anyway at your hands. + +You get closer to the dragon and ready your axe. The dragon still makes no move. It just closes its one good eye. + +“Y’know… sometimes I feel like you. Old and broken down, just wanting to lie down and let the sleep take me. Perhaps, I’ll even find myself in the same position one day…(sigh) anyway, on your way dragon. Looks like it was you today.” You say and swing the axe at the dragon’s neck. + +You have to hack away several times before you manage to sever its head. A cheer goes up from the eternals who survived the battle. + +“No cheering yet. This was barely a victory given all of our casualties and the condition of this fort. We also still have no word on Flevas’ company or how my wife is doing at Fort Tangle. Now let’s get organized and find out.” You say. + +The next few days still see a lot of combat. Decena was a lot more successful at Fort Tangle, but then she didn’t have a dragon attacking it. She congratulates you on your victory though and is glad to see you’re still alive from your ordeal. + +Eventually her and Snilkez’ka’s troops push forward and attack Iznac cities. Without their dragons anymore, it’s a lot easier to go faster on the attack. + +Unfortunately Flevas’ suffered an ignoble fate. He was killed fighting off a mixture of Glip and Iznac troops in the jungles and he was unlucky to be felled by several poisonous darts that the Glip love to use. His company fought on and won, but you’ve lost a good commander. Such are the ways of war. You and those who served under him will at least remember Flevas’ deeds. He certainly proved that elves could be an asset to the Empire rather than just whine all the time. + +It is truly the beginning of the end for the Iznac civilization and it is now in sight. You predict perhaps at least one more year of heavy fighting maximum, then maybe three more years of random raiding from the hold outs and survivors. + +After that? The Iznac will either be hiding in the farthest reaches of wilderness, will have completely submitted to your rule (Unlikely) or completely exterminated. You’re betting on that last one, as it seems to be the way of things. + +In any case you’ll soon be ruler of two continents. What comes next is unknown, but you know that you’re going to have some downtime to think about it. In fact you have somewhat of an idea of what to pursue next. + +Its something Brenda and Decena mentioned the day you got married. The Eternals and their inability to reproduce. You’re thinking that will be your next goal. You nearly died in your battle with the dragon and by healing yourself in the way you did, you probably just shortened your life span anyway. It’s time to start thinking about your potential legacy and future of the Empire. + +The current eternals have proven their worth and then some, but they could still be better. The next generation that Brenda is training will undoubtedly be better still, but the fifth…that’s the group you want to break the mold with. + +There’s got to be a way. Maybe you, Elam and possibly Galen can figure it out if you put your heads together. Hell, maybe even the gnomes might have some insight on the science side of things. + +The time for simple conquest of territory is coming to an end at least perhaps for now. +> Years pass... +Year 67 + +Peace is a good thing for most people and in your elderly years you can even sort of appreciate it a little more, but the problem is, you’ve got hundreds of new Eternals who have been bred and trained for war and nobody to send them up against. + +To be honest you thought maybe that Semra would make good on her claim of resurrecting the “Svelk Empire” again and perhaps invade with an armada filled with svelk warriors, but haven’t heard or seen a svelk since you last spoke to her. Then again she did say it wouldn’t happen in your lifetime. + +While you haven’t put as much time and money into exploration any more, there are still efforts being made by private expeditions, but nobody has had much luck in finding any new lands worthwhile. + +In any event you’re going to have to have them do something with them soon, just maybe not today. You also have to meet with Elam, since apparently he’s come up with a possible solution to the sterility problem of the eternals. + +“Well, I’m sure we’ll find something for them to do, but let me just say you’ve done a fine job with them as usual.” You say to Brenda. +“Thank you, but I don’t think I’ll be able to effectively train the next batch. At least not full time. Getting sort of…” +“You don’t need to say it. Trust me, we’re all getting that way, don’t worry I’m going to have Decena training the fifth gen. Training’s definitely going to go a little differently, but then if my meeting with Elam is going to be a positive one then these next Eternals are going to be different anyway.” +“So the rumors are true? Elam’s figured out a way?” +“So he says. Trust me, I’m just as surprised as you are. In any case, I’m off to meet him.” + +You bid Brenda goodbye and head to the location where new eternals are “born.” When you arrive a couple of workers and ask if the children will be arriving today to which you reply no and ask if Elam has arrived yet. They tell you that Elam has indeed arrived and is waiting in Chief Supervisor Gregory’s office. They also mention that a woman came with him. You have no idea who that could be. Girlfriend perhaps? If so, you honestly didn’t know Elam even paid any attention to anything that wasn’t scientifically related. + +You enter the office just in time to see Elam criticizing Gregory’s lack of adventure in his chosen profession. + +“Bah! You’ve always been too cautious Gregory! Even the gnomes with all their needless safety pre-cautions aren’t as timid! That’s why you’re still here watching tanks and I’m creating new and better things for the Empire!” Elam boasts. +“Really…I’m fine…I like it here…” Gregory says quietly and then looks in your direction and straightens up in his chair. +“See? What did I tell you Zana? Same ol’ Gregory! Hah! Oh Emperor! Didn’t see you there! Apologies.” + +You tell everyone to dismiss the formalities and tell Gregory to leave as you have important business with Elam. He nods, and leaves. The woman though does not. You have no idea who she except she looks to be in her thirties, wears spectacles, has long curly red hair and is dressed in technician’s clothing similar to Elam. + +“I trust this woman is somehow important to what we have to discuss, otherwise you would not have her here?” you say sitting down. +“Oh! Yes, apologies once again. This is Zana, and she’s been invaluable in helping me on not just this project, but on several others in the past.” Elam says. +“Zana? Why have I not heard of her before? I know the gnomes let Elam into their city on my insistence, but I didn’t realize we had another human inventor there.” You say. +“Oh, she was born there, Emperor.” +“What?” + +At this point Zana speaks for herself. + +“Actually Elam as I’ve told you once before, I wasn’t born in New Dessle I was just raised there. Sometimes I wonder how you invent so well with your memory as foggy as it is. At least our Emperor has a good reason for not remembering me. He has an entire Empire to rule.” Zana says playfully pushing his shoulder. +“Wait. We’ve met?” you ask. +“Oh yes. We briefly met when you first incorporated New Dessle into the Empire. I’m Klemto’s adopted daughter.” + +That was so long ago, you barely remember, though you’re starting to now. Yes, she was only a teenager then. + +“Ah yes…starting to remember. I remember you ran up to Klemto telling him that you wanted to help fix your lighting system. Klemto gave you permission, but was slightly embarrassed that you interrupted his meeting with me and then only briefly greeted me before running off.” +“Good memory. I know it’s late, but I apologize for my impetuous youthful ways.” +“None necessary. Wasn’t offended then either, in fact I remember applauding Klemto for raising such a child that wished to serve their community in a meaningful way.” +“I thank you my Emperor. And I have continued to serve the Empire in the same way.” +“I believe it, otherwise Elam wouldn’t have you here, so I’m guessing you both must have come up with a solution to our problem. So let’s discuss that, shall we?” + +Elam begins to excitedly tell you about all the tests they did and a lot of scientific talk without actually getting to the point. He particularly enjoys talking about how some of the fourth generation eternals you granted him permission to take for testing years ago, managed to reproduce under the right conditions. He mentions it was only the one girl and she died in the process, but the child she gave birth too managed to actually survive for a few minutes. + +When this doesn’t exactly fill you with confidence, Zana speaks up again. + +“What Elam means to say, that despite the limited success, we have definitely found a way to make the next set of Eternals fertile. The magical process is what is causing the problem. At first we thought it was too much magic, but in actuality it’s too little.” Zana explains. +“Really?” +“Yes, despite enhancing many of the traits of the eternals with each generation, the magical energy has been too specific in its task. The Eternal’s body should be completely immersed in the energy while in the tank and then the appropriate chemical mixtures can be added, and then…well I won’t bore you again with technical talk. Rest assured though we both believe very strongly that it will work. +“So…what? Do we need to sacrifice an entire mage for a single fertile Eternal?” you ask. +“Well…that would work, if you had the numbers, but from what I do know, magic has been on the decline for some time now. There are…what? Like twenty mages in the whole Empire now? Most of which are old men and women and none of them particularly very powerful. Not powerful enough for our purposes even if we did completely drain them. Honestly we would need someone with at least the power that Galen had, but unfortunately as you know we used him as a test subject, which ended up helping us come to this conclusion in the first place. Not all is lost and we can still accomplish this, but…” + +Zana hesitates to even speak it and even Elam who is usually in an excited state is very somber looking. You get the impression you already know where they’re going to go with this… + +“Let me guess. I have to sacrifice myself.” You say. + +Elam and Zana don’t answer. + +“Well?” +“Yes, but we still aren’t sure about the results, I mean this isn’t an exact science… I mean…” +“Not an exact science? Then what the fuck are we talking about Elam? Zana just said she was certain it would work! Now you’re telling me it might not and I’m supposed to kill myself in the process?” +“No! That’s not what I mean! (Exhale) Look what I mean is I believe we can set it up so you’ll be able to survive the process. I mean you’re so powerful and your magical abilities are vast. I mean even for a man your age you’re in good physical condition and you can withstand more pain than most. I can’t believe I’m saying this, but…I THINK if we take the necessary safety precautions, you’ll be able to survive this process, but the downside is we’re not going to be able to do this with a thousand or even half that number of potential eternal candidates. We can do it with a hundred maximum and you will definitely lose all your magical abilities in the process.” Elam says and is beginning to sweat. + +“And what do you say about this Zana? Do you believe this could be done?” +“I won’t lie. I don’t know. I mean yes it is possible if we were very careful and severely lowered the amount of Eternal candidates, you might survive, but I just don’t know. I do know that the process will still result in the desired outcome for the Eternals though.” +“However, there is another process that Zana and I have discussed that may be more desirable to you.” Elam suddenly exclaims. + +Elam takes a deep breath and asks you. + +“How would you like to be immortal?” +“This is a joke right?” +“No joke my Emperor. I’m very serious.” Elam says and you have no doubt that he is, though Zana looks skeptical. +“Elam, the Emperor wants to hear real solutions, not theories.” +“It’s no theory! I’m starting to get results! In fact I dare say I’m even more certain about this approach than the one with the Eternals! Emperor, if you give me a little more time to perfect the…” +“Elam, will you explain from the beginning for once?!” you shout. +“Yes. Apologies my Emperor. Okay. It’s going to sound crazy, but then I’m sure the concept of a ship that flies in the air did once too right? I believe I’ve found a way to keep a person alive long after their body has died.” + +Already you’re joining Zana in your skepticism. + +“Sounds like magic to me. Specifically necromancy. Last I remember you weren’t a necromancer Elam and I have no intention on being some mindless walking corpse.” +“No it’s not raising the dead, it’s science! No magic involved at all! In fact YOU wouldn’t have to do much of anything. Y’see, all I need is your brain.” Elam says with a creepy grin. + +Well this conversation has taken an interesting turn. + +“Elam I don’t know if you’re aware, but I sort of need that to live in the first place.” +“(Sigh) What my over zealous colleague is trying to say is he’s been doing experiments in his spare time on various human subjects. Well, not ALL human subjects, but specifically the brain. He’s managed to remove entire brains and keep the subject alive.” Zana interjects. +“WHAT?! I just said I have no intention on walking around like a mindless corpse!” you exclaim. +“No, he’s not keeping the subject’s bodies alive. He’s been able to keep the brains alive. At least for a little while…” +“I’ll be able to keep them alive indefinitely with a little more time!” Elam exclaims. + +Now this conversation has just gotten weird. You rub your face and head with your hands and try to assess the situation. + +“Okay wait. Let me get this straight. You’re saying you can remove my brain and keep me alive? How? Where the hell would I be? How would I do anything?” +“Well that’s why I need a little more time. However, YOU would be floating in a tank filled with certain chemicals.” +“Floating in a tank?” +“Yes, well at least temporarily. I mean I believe we could in time hook you up to a machine system so that perhaps your brain waves could control something like the automatons that we create in New Dessel. I believe with your innate magic powers you could probably tap into some sort of telepathic ability with the right jolts of electricity to the tank. You’d be able to give orders to people through their minds so communication might not be a problem…” Elam says and continues speaking, but you’re starting to get overwhelmed. + +This is absolutely insane what you’re hearing. And not just the brain part, you mean all of it. Even the way to make the Eternals fertile sounds crazy. Especially given some of the experiments that were performed in order to explore the possibility in the first place. Now Elam’s telling you he’s been cutting brains out of people and keeping them alive and he’s suggesting on putting YOU in a tank. You can’t help but see the irony of being in a tank for the rest of your life. + +And the strangest part about all this? You’re more than willing to entertain both ideas. + +If you sacrifice yourself so that the new eternals can breed then it won’t be one in vain. Quite frankly how many more worthwhile years do you have left anyway? Maybe it would be better to die so that a legacy of sorts can live forever. Besides, there is always the possibility that you could survive the process. Of course there’s always the chance it could all fail horribly. Elam and Zana may seem very certain that it will work, but you still have your reservations. + +As crazy as Elam’s idea sounds, part of it intrigues you. Immortality would give you that time you always wanted in past. Time enough to conquer the world. With immortality, you wouldn’t need to worry about some sort of legacy, you would always be. He says he needs more time to work on it though which is a concern, then there’s the fact that you’d be floating in a tank. Would you grow bored? Would you go mad? Would you even be “you?” Elam said there would be the possibility of setting something up so you could interact with the outside world, but again who knows if that will even work? + +You’ve got a decision and you need to make one or the other. +> Children +Elam’s always had wild ideas, but this “immortality” plan just sounds too far-fetched and quite frankly more than a little risky. You’d be sacrificing the original plan entirely just to what? Live forever as a brain in a tank? What kind of life is that? + +Even if something were set up so you could interact with the outside world, you’d still be very limited. Never again could you lift a weapon or cast a spell and face your enemies in battle. Never again could you enjoy the company of Decena in a meaningful way. And what of other potential mates when you eventually outlive her? You can’t imagine how you could be satisfied with the existence even if you did manage to conquer the rest of the world. Who knows what the long-term effects would be. You still think you’d probably go mad eventually. + +If the immortality involved your current body, you’re not even sure you’d accept it. Not with how much you ache on a regular basis. No, immortality was never in the cards for you. This “life” wasn’t even supposed to happen, so why entertain an impossible dream? You’ve achieved much in this life and if the end is coming soon then so be it. + +“I’m not spending the rest of my life as a disembodied brain for any reason. We’re sticking with the original plan regardless of the consequences. However, I’m also not quite eager to shuffle off this mortal coil just yet, so we’re going to take the safety precautions and try to keep me alive. So when are we to start?” +“Uh...well, whenever you are of course my Emperor. I mean you’ll have to collect the babies for this project first, then after that’s done, we can get started.” Elam says. +“Okay then, I’ll have the Eyes gather candidates right away. In fact, given the nature of this project, I’m going to tell them to get an equal amount of males and females. As for you two I want you to gather whatever staff and equipment you need.” + +Elam and Zana both acknowledge your command and leave when you dismiss them. Elam makes one last attempt at asking if you’re sure you don’t want to be immortal to which you tell him you’ve made your decision. + +Now all you have to do is tell Decena which you do so later that night. + +“…so that’s the process. If it succeeds spectacularly I’ll still be alive and we’ll have fertile new eternals. If it fails spectacularly then none of that will be true.” You finish explaining to her. +“And you’re sure this is what you want to do?” Decena asks. +“Of course I am. Why wouldn’t I be?” +“Well I wasn’t aware that Elam had found a potential way to keep you alive forever.” +“As a brain in a jar or tank or whatever? You really think I’d want to live like that? He needs more time to perfect the process anyway and who know how long that would be if ever?” +“No, I suppose you’re right. I wouldn’t like to live like that either. Who wants to live forever right? But about this other process, you’ll be putting your life in danger, are you certain it will work?” +“Elam and this Zana are both confident that it will. While Elam’s always been a bit on the eccentric side and prone to take risks, he’s always come through on his projects and Zana’s likely to err on the cautious side anyway due to being raised by gnomes. In any case I’m more than willing to take this risk if it’s going to bring about what we’ve been talking about for the last few years.” + +Decena smiles at your response. + +“I think that’s one of many the things that I’ve always loved about you. Your willingness to put yourself at risk for the good of the Empire. You’ve never been one of those rulers that has shied away from potential danger. There is one thing I ask though. I mean regardless of whether or not the process is successful, if you don’t survive it. I mean if this indeed it, I want to be with you during this moment.” Decena says holding your hand. +“Of course. You’ll always be by my side.” You answer and kiss her. + +After a bit more discussion, it’s also agreed upon that Brenda and Warrick should probably be there as well. + +Over the next few days, the Eyes acquire the Eternal candidates and soon everything is ready. You arrive at the Eternal factory with Decena, Brenda and Warrick. Elam, Zana, and several technician and physician types run around hooking up strange machinery and placing the babies in the tanks. Gregory is also here and goes up to you nervously telling you that he’s very concerned, as none of this extra equipment looks very safe. + +Eventually Elam and Zana approach. + +“Everything is ready my Emperor! One hundred candidates all hooked up in the tanks, all we need is to strap you in to that chair over there and we can get started.” Elam points to a chair that looks more like a torture device you’ve had used on enemies before…in fact you think it IS and Elam’s just modified it! + +“I have to say you’re a braver man than I.” Warrick says clapping you on the shoulder. +“Yeah, I mean I’m just looking at that thing and it looks painful.” Brenda says. +“Well I have faith that you’ll laugh off any pain and come out of this alive.” Decena exclaims. +“Glad to hear someone that’s optimistic about this. Well no point in drawing this out, let’s do this.” You say and walk towards the chair. + +Sit in the chair and get strapped in. This is followed by several painful needles being stuck in your arms, legs and chest with rubber tubes hooked up to a large machine, which in turn is hooked up to the tanks. Decena stands close by the entire time. + +“Don’t worry my Emperor. I’ll make sure Elam doesn’t push the controls too hard. Unlike him, I actually was born with a sense of safety.” Zana says checking on your lines. +“Well glad to have you working on this then.” You respond. +“I’m glad just to have this chance to work on this my Emperor. You don’t know how long I’ve waited for the opportunity to work so closely on something directly involving you. It is a very great honor. One that I shall never forget for as long as I live.” Zana says and leaves smiling at you and Decena to check on what Elam is doing. + +As you’re mentally attempting to prepare yourself, suddenly Decena whispers in your ear. + +“I don’t trust her.” Decena says. +“What?” you answer. +“Zana. I don’t trust her. Something doesn’t feel right about her.” +“Like what? Did she say or do something? Because I rechecked her file that the Eyes had on her and she’s nothing but clean. Well maybe except a lack of judgment in sexing up Elam on occasion, but I can’t imagine there are a lot of choices in human males in New Dessel.” +“I dunno. It’s her tone. The way she’s being so eager to please. It’s almost as if she’s trying too hard and has a hidden agenda.” +“So what are you saying?” +“I don’t want her on this project. I feel you’re in direct danger with her at the helm of those controls.” + +Decena is quite serious in this accusation and you have no idea how to respond. + +“Decena, Zana worked on this right along side Elam.” +“Well I don’t know, maybe they’re in it together! Or just have Elam perform this procedure, I don’t care, but I DON’T want that woman involved in this procedure any longer!” + +At this point Decena has made enough noise to call the attention of several people, including Zana and Elam who come over. + +“What seems to be the problem my Emperor? Are you having last minute concerns? If so, we can call a halt to this…” Elam asks. +“No, Elam. I’m fine. Decena is just having I believe some last minute concerns.” +“My Empress, as I said, I will make sure that your beloved…” Zana starts to say before being interrupted. + +“Silence bitch!” Decena snaps and everyone is silent. + +“I don’t know what you have planned exactly, but let me make this clear. I DON’T TRUST YOU. And I don’t want YOU working on this project any longer!” Decena says. +“My Emperor, with all due respect, I need Zana to help me with this!” Elam exclaims. + +At this point Zana begins to protest her innocence in a polite way, trying very hard not to sound out of line, but Decena isn’t hearing any of it and even draws her pistol. + +“Decena, are you sure you’re not just scared that I’m going to die and deep down you don’t want me to go through with this because you want me around a little longer?” you ask. + +Decena grabs your hand and looks straight at you. + +“My love, there are many times you could’ve died and while it was always a concern, I always accepted it as a possibility. If you died in battle, then it would have purpose at least. You would have been serving the Empire. Even if you died of old age or some other natural cause I could accept it because you would have still died serving the Empire. And IF you die in this process then I can accept it, because you will be dying to secure the future of the Empire.” + +Decena pauses and takes a deep breath and turns to everyone else while pointing at Zana. + +“But I cannot accept you going helplessly into danger like this. THIS woman has ill intent. I FEEL it in my heart. I FEEL it in what I guess would be my soul. EVERY warning, EVERY instinct about her is telling me that she is wishing you unwell. All of us perhaps. I can’t even prove it, but I don’t need to when I FEEL it.” + +Decena then turns back to you. + +“My love, if you genuinely believe this woman has no ill intent then I will as always defer to your judgment, however if you trust my judgment on this matter even a little bit, then I beg of you to let me kill her where she stands.” + +At this point both Zana and Elam’s eyes widen. The nearby technicians almost shuffle back as if not wishing to get caught in the fallout. Even Brenda and Warrick are a little surprised by this. + +Elam at this point once again begs you not to kill Zana as he needs her for this project to work. Zana stays silent, though she probably believes that anything she’d say at this point might cause Decena to shoot her anyway. + +And here you thought the only thing you were going to have to worry about today was trying to stay alive long enough to create some fertile Eternals… +> Believe Decena +She might be completely wrong, but if she really feels this strongly on this matter you’ll honor her judgment. + +“Warrick. Brenda.” You say and with a glance they know and walk towards Zana who continues to remain in shock. + +“No…no!” she shouts and before she can run, Warrick and Brenda both restrain her. She struggles a bit, but then stops. +“Elam, can you do this yourself? Honestly answer the question!” you demand and stare at him. + +Elam begins to stammer and stutter, but with your eyes piercing him, he looks sadly over at Zana, who looks on helplessly and can’t believe that even he would turn against her. + +“ELAM! NO!” she shouts. + +“Yes…I can my Emperor, but I do need someone to watch the gauges, and levels…” Elam says in defeat. You think this is the first time you’ve ever seen him in such a mood. He must’ve had deeper feelings for the girl and she wasn’t just the occasional fling. +“Good. Gregory! You’re doing that now.” +“Um, I am my Emperor?” + +While Gregory is pondering his new position, you turn back to Zana. + +“My apologies Zana, but this is your ruler’s final judgment on the matter. Take solace in the fact that you’ve served the Empire well and that any family you may have will be…” +“FUCK YOU TYRANT!” Zana shouts, nearly causing Decena to shoot her, but you tell her to hold fire. +“Decena, stop. Zana has at least earned herself a proper execution rather than being shot like a rabid dog. I’ll look past her current outburst since I understand that she…” +“I said FUCK YOU. You don’t know SHIT about me! And if it wasn’t for your bitch queen here, this would’ve went smoothly. Oh how sweet that would’ve been to have seen the look of shock on your face as you and all your dreams of fertile Eternals was destroyed before your eyes.” Zana exclaims with her face turning into an angry sneer. + +Now everyone is looking at Zana and Decena’s gut instinct has been vindicated. + +“Who are you? I mean who are you really? Did Semra put you up to this?” you demand. +“I’m nobody. Nobody of importance at least not until YOU came around and killed my entire family!” Zana says. +“Do you have any idea how little that narrows it down?” you ask. +“I was going to be a princess! I would’ve ruled a kingdom one day! YOU and YOUR EMPIRE destroyed all that before I even had a chance to enjoy a taste of such a life! Klemto didn’t just save a random Felkan baby, he saved an HEIR TO THE FELKAN FUCKING KINGDOM!” Zana shouts. + +It was a very long time ago. Almost a different life even, but you vaguely remember seeing a crib in the Felkan royal palace, yet no baby or even signs of a dead one. You never thought too much of it at the time, but apparently even though Zana was just an infant, Klemto must’ve told her about her real heritage. He probably lied to you thinking that you would’ve had her killed. + +“Because of YOU, I’ve had to live a miserable existence working on machinery surrounded by fucking GNOMES! You know what that’s like? Being the only human in community of damn gnomes? It SUCKS! Then when some humans do fucking arrive, they’re from the same nation that destroyed my birthright! It almost sickened me to even sleep with this crazy fool!” + +This news causes Elam to collapse on the floor. He can’t believe the woman he’s worked with so closely and shared a bed with is admitting to trying to assassinate you. (As well as having a low opinion of him) + +“You really think I was going to let you breed a set of new Empire abominations that could possibly keep it going even longer? Possibly even forever? Never! + +How long must she have been waiting for the right time to strike? Was it always this way or did it slowly gnaw at her? A life that was stolen from her. Did Klemto or the gnomes put her up to this? Was this their plan in some weird way? + +“Okay, since you’re in a talkative mood, did Klemto or any gnome put you up to this?” you ask. +“What? So you’ll have an excuse to round them all up and destroy their souls again? I heard about what you did to them. And maybe I might find them to be timid, tiresome unattractive little know it alls, I find it deplorable what the Empire did to them. I can’t believe they allowed themselves to be dominated by a nation that systematically exterminated them from not just this life, but the next as well!” +“So did they help or not?” you ask again. +“No! No they did not! My father would’ve probably had me jailed if he knew what I was planning. Those cowards wouldn’t dare stand against the Empire, but I fucking would! And did! Not that this will save them. After you’re done killing me, you’ll probably have them all killed as well for any excuse will serve a tyrant!” +“It’s amusing that you keep calling me that. What did you think your parents were? They were a KING and QUEEN. You think they ruled by popular decision? Do you think YOU would have if you became queen? My actions that day weren’t even personal. I was just following orders like a soldier. Your actions however today are misguided and fatal. Such a waste. Even had I known your origins, I would not have had you killed if you had remained true to serving the Empire. Your quest for vengeance was as pointless as your entire life. Take her away.” + +As Brenda and Warrick begin to drag Zana off, she struggles once again and this time manages to get free of Brenda’s grip. Then she presses some sort of device underneath her sleeve and an electric shock zaps Warrick causing him to also lose his grip and fall backwards. + +“Not how I wanted to do it, but just as good!” Zana says grinning and reveals a bomb strapped under her clothes. + +She takes one step towards you and Decena shoots her in the head. She falls backwards and before the bomb explodes, you raise your hands up (ripping the straps and ripping out some of your attachments in the process) and create a barrier protecting Decena, Elam and yourself. + +The bomb explodes and you look on sadly as you see Brenda and Warrick caught in the immediate blast. A few of the other technicians are killed too. (Gregory fled and hid as soon as things started looking hostile!) + +After its all said and done, many of the tanks have been destroyed, though not completely a problem since you had a thousand of them. Some of the hundred you were using were unfortunately damaged, but new babies can be acquired. Some of the equipment was damaged, but again not too much of a problem since it can be fixed, rebuilt or replaced and the main piece was protected by the barrier. + +While Decena unhooks your from all your attachments, Elam is silent the whole time. He’s utterly in shock by everything that’s happened. + +“I had no idea…I mean…” he utters and then turns to you. +“I swear my Emperor I didn’t know!” +“Calm yourself Elam, nobody’s executing you, especially when you’ve still got a job to do. Besides, nobody apparently knew, well except my lovely wife here.” You say and look at Decena. +“I’m just glad you’re all right, but this sets our goals back! And Brenda and Warrick! (sniff)” Decena remarks getting a little upset over their deaths and hugs you. +“I know…I know. It was no way for them to die. There almost isn’t anything left to…well give a funeral. (sigh) I’ll sort out what’s left of them put them in the same coffin and burn it. They can least be sent on their way together. We can have a formal memorial for them both later. As for our plans, they may be set back, but not by much. + +You turn to Elam. + +“Elam I want all the damaged equipment fixed as soon as possible. Gregory and the rest can help with that. Also catch Gregory up to speed on what his role will be on this project, because we WILL be doing it as soon as possible. In the meantime, I’ll have to appoint a new Sightmaster and have the Eyes get all new candidates again, but before they do that, going to have to purge New Dessel.” +“You are?” Decena asks. +“Do you really see any choice? You didn’t trust Zana on pure instinct and you were correct. How can I trust that she was telling the truth that the gnomes didn’t have anything to do with this? Maybe not even all of them knew. Maybe Klemto anticipated she’d eventually seek revenge and just took a hands off approach so that he couldn’t be directly implemented. Maybe they’re all genuinely innocent. Doesn’t matter. We’re trying to secure the future of the Empire and its obvious the gnomes are a potential threat.” + +You chuckle at that last remark. + +“I can’t believe it. I sounded just like Casimir. Guess dad would be proud.” You say. +“Okay, so how do you want to handle that? As you know that mountain city is a fairly well defended fortress.” Decena asks +“Yes, and things have changed severely since then. We’ve already got a large number of Eyes positioned in that city. All we have to do is send in another large group, telling the gnomes that it’s a routine changing of the guard and when they’re in, they unleash the death. Make no mistake this isn’t going to be an honorable action and it will be ugly, but it will be the easiest way to do it and the fact that it will get done is the important thing.” +“Agreed. Long live the Empire.” Decena says. + +The project is set back at least a couple of months. The purging of New Dessel takes awhile due to the gnomes locking themselves in hard to reach sections of the city, but eventually the entire city is purged. You at last finished what Casimir started though really you wish it hadn’t been necessary. You never hated them. Klemto just saved the wrong baby and brought death on them all because of it. + +In any event, mostly technicians, inventors and other human families with members that have similar mechanical or scientific skills will resettle New Dessel. + +A giant memorial is held for Brenda and Warrick. Heroes of the Empire that shall never be forgotten, right along side Roldan and Kane. Even though Decena is by your side, you can’t help but feel a great sense of loss. They were the last of your “siblings” and now you are alone. In fact you may even be joining them soon. You weep privately for them both. + +Eventually Elam and Gregory have all the equipment fixed and ready again and the Eyes have the suitable candidates ready. You return with Decena to complete the task you originally set out to do. + +Once again you’re strapped and hooked up to the modified torture chair. Elam is remarkably subdued. You’re guessing he’s still taking Zana’s betrayal hard. Still, perhaps its good, it will give him more focus on what is important, serving the Empire. + +As you prepare you and Decena exchange one kiss for what might be the last time. + +Elam pulls the lever and the process begins. Lights, buzzing, rumbling, and all manner of machinery noises can be heard throughout the room. + +The oddest thing is you’re not feeling as much pain as you thought you would. There is definitely a tingling sensation and it feels as if all your hair is standing on end, but you’ve felt things a lot more painful. + +You are however feeling very tired and it is all very draining. Eventually you can’t fight it anymore and you fall unconscious… + +Hours later you wake up on a bed still hooked up to a machine. You feel very weak, but apparently you’ve survived the process. Decena, Elam and several physicians stand around you. + +“I’m…I’m…alive?” you say. +“Shhh. Don’t speak too much. You really need to conserve your strength.” Decena remarks. +“Did…did it work?” you ask. +“Well I suppose we won’t really know until several years from now, but Elam says he feels the results are very positive. He says there’s been a side effect he didn’t anticipate.” Decena says. +“Side effect?” +“Yes, my Emperor. Your magical energy actually gave all the candidates an innate magic ability. I mean again, obviously we can’t see exactly what that means now, but I fully anticipate that these Eternals are also going to have magic abilities. Possibly on par with your own. It’s almost as if your own DNA rewrote their genetic code.” + +Elam just said something that no one except he understood. + +“Erm. It’s something I’ve been theorizing about. It’s uh…technical talk, don’t worry about it. Basically though what it means is its almost as if you personally created all these children the old fashioned way. You’re the father of a hundred children. I… uh guess congratulations are in order.” Elam says and shakes your hand which is still weak. +“Sheesh. Thanks I guess.” You say. +“There is one thing I really should tell you though, Emperor. It’s your condition. While you’ve survived the process, I fear it has taken a toll on your body. Your life span has probably shortened quite a bit. I mean I dunno how much, but…” +“Elam, I didn’t even anticipate living through this process so whatever I got left will be just a bonus. Really I didn’t even expect to live this long and if events had gone a certain way, I wouldn’t have even made it out of the crib. I’ll tell you this though, I’m going to TRY to live long enough to make sure this process worked. And if it didn’t well you can strap me to the chair and try again!” + +Elam smiles and says that he’ll try to do everything he can to extend your lifespan a little longer and reassures you that you won’t be dying tomorrow. At this point Elam excuses himself saying he and Gregory should make a routine check on the tanks again. The others follow his lead. + +As the others leave Decena stays by your side. She says nothing and just looks lovingly at you though you feel a bit sad. + +“I’m sorry, you’ll have to take care of a feeble old man now.” You say. +“Shh, that doesn’t matter. I love you.” +“I’m also sorry that…well…I just had one hundred children and you weren’t directly involved.” +“Ha ha! You think I care about that? I’m THRILLED that you did! It means that you’ll live forever after all! I knew you’d find a way somehow.” +“But what about you?” +“I always expected to die someday and I’m fine with that. What matters is that YOU live forever. Because as long as you live forever, then the Empire lives forever and if the Empire lives forever then I live forever. As do all those that have served it loyally. As will all Eternals. This is just the beginning my love. You have created a new race. One superior to all those before it.” + +Decena proceeds to give you a kiss and hug you. You enjoy her warmth and realize even if you did die right now, it would be a perfect death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Elam’s always had wild ideas, but this “immortality” plan just sounds too far-fetched and quite frankly more than a little risky. You’d be sacrificing the original plan entirely just to what? Live forever as a brain in a tank? What kind of life is that? + +Even if something were set up so you could interact with the outside world, you’d still be very limited. Never again could you lift a weapon or cast a spell and face your enemies in battle. Never again could you enjoy the company of Decena in a meaningful way. And what of other potential mates when you eventually outlive her? You can’t imagine how you could be satisfied with the existence even if you did manage to conquer the rest of the world. Who knows what the long-term effects would be. You still think you’d probably go mad eventually. + +If the immortality involved your current body, you’re not even sure you’d accept it. Not with how much you ache on a regular basis. No, immortality was never in the cards for you. This “life” wasn’t even supposed to happen, so why entertain an impossible dream? You’ve achieved much in this life and if the end is coming soon then so be it. + +“I’m not spending the rest of my life as a disembodied brain for any reason. We’re sticking with the original plan regardless of the consequences. However, I’m also not quite eager to shuffle off this mortal coil just yet, so we’re going to take the safety precautions and try to keep me alive. So when are we to start?” +“Uh...well, whenever you are of course my Emperor. I mean you’ll have to collect the babies for this project first, then after that’s done, we can get started.” Elam says. +“Okay then, I’ll have the Eyes gather candidates right away. In fact, given the nature of this project, I’m going to tell them to get an equal amount of males and females. As for you two I want you to gather whatever staff and equipment you need.” + +Elam and Zana both acknowledge your command and leave when you dismiss them. Elam makes one last attempt at asking if you’re sure you don’t want to be immortal to which you tell him you’ve made your decision. + +Now all you have to do is tell Decena which you do so later that night. + +“…so that’s the process. If it succeeds spectacularly I’ll still be alive and we’ll have fertile new eternals. If it fails spectacularly then none of that will be true.” You finish explaining to her. +“And you’re sure this is what you want to do?” Decena asks. +“Of course I am. Why wouldn’t I be?” +“Well I wasn’t aware that Elam had found a potential way to keep you alive forever.” +“As a brain in a jar or tank or whatever? You really think I’d want to live like that? He needs more time to perfect the process anyway and who know how long that would be if ever?” +“No, I suppose you’re right. I wouldn’t like to live like that either. Who wants to live forever right? But about this other process, you’ll be putting your life in danger, are you certain it will work?” +“Elam and this Zana are both confident that it will. While Elam’s always been a bit on the eccentric side and prone to take risks, he’s always come through on his projects and Zana’s likely to err on the cautious side anyway due to being raised by gnomes. In any case I’m more than willing to take this risk if it’s going to bring about what we’ve been talking about for the last few years.” + +Decena smiles at your response. + +“I think that’s one of many the things that I’ve always loved about you. Your willingness to put yourself at risk for the good of the Empire. You’ve never been one of those rulers that has shied away from potential danger. There is one thing I ask though. I mean regardless of whether or not the process is successful, if you don’t survive it. I mean if this indeed it, I want to be with you during this moment.” Decena says holding your hand. +“Of course. You’ll always be by my side.” You answer and kiss her. + +After a bit more discussion, it’s also agreed upon that Brenda and Warrick should probably be there as well. + +Over the next few days, the Eyes acquire the Eternal candidates and soon everything is ready. You arrive at the Eternal factory with Decena, Brenda and Warrick. Elam, Zana, and several technician and physician types run around hooking up strange machinery and placing the babies in the tanks. Gregory is also here and goes up to you nervously telling you that he’s very concerned, as none of this extra equipment looks very safe. + +Eventually Elam and Zana approach. + +“Everything is ready my Emperor! One hundred candidates all hooked up in the tanks, all we need is to strap you in to that chair over there and we can get started.” Elam points to a chair that looks more like a torture device you’ve had used on enemies before…in fact you think it IS and Elam’s just modified it! + +“I have to say you’re a braver man than I.” Warrick says clapping you on the shoulder. +“Yeah, I mean I’m just looking at that thing and it looks painful.” Brenda says. +“Well I have faith that you’ll laugh off any pain and come out of this alive.” Decena exclaims. +“Glad to hear someone that’s optimistic about this. Well no point in drawing this out, let’s do this.” You say and walk towards the chair. + +Sit in the chair and get strapped in. This is followed by several painful needles being stuck in your arms, legs and chest with rubber tubes hooked up to a large machine, which in turn is hooked up to the tanks. Decena stands close by the entire time. + +“Don’t worry my Emperor. I’ll make sure Elam doesn’t push the controls too hard. Unlike him, I actually was born with a sense of safety.” Zana says checking on your lines. +“Well glad to have you working on this then.” You respond. +“I’m glad just to have this chance to work on this my Emperor. You don’t know how long I’ve waited for the opportunity to work so closely on something directly involving you. It is a very great honor. One that I shall never forget for as long as I live.” Zana says and leaves smiling at you and Decena to check on what Elam is doing. + +As you’re mentally attempting to prepare yourself, suddenly Decena whispers in your ear. + +“I don’t trust her.” Decena says. +“What?” you answer. +“Zana. I don’t trust her. Something doesn’t feel right about her.” +“Like what? Did she say or do something? Because I rechecked her file that the Eyes had on her and she’s nothing but clean. Well maybe except a lack of judgment in sexing up Elam on occasion, but I can’t imagine there are a lot of choices in human males in New Dessel.” +“I dunno. It’s her tone. The way she’s being so eager to please. It’s almost as if she’s trying too hard and has a hidden agenda.” +“So what are you saying?” +“I don’t want her on this project. I feel you’re in direct danger with her at the helm of those controls.” + +Decena is quite serious in this accusation and you have no idea how to respond. + +“Decena, Zana worked on this right along side Elam.” +“Well I don’t know, maybe they’re in it together! Or just have Elam perform this procedure, I don’t care, but I DON’T want that woman involved in this procedure any longer!” + +At this point Decena has made enough noise to call the attention of several people, including Zana and Elam who come over. + +“What seems to be the problem my Emperor? Are you having last minute concerns? If so, we can call a halt to this…” Elam asks. +“No, Elam. I’m fine. Decena is just having I believe some last minute concerns.” +“My Empress, as I said, I will make sure that your beloved…” Zana starts to say before being interrupted. + +“Silence bitch!” Decena snaps and everyone is silent. + +“I don’t know what you have planned exactly, but let me make this clear. I DON’T TRUST YOU. And I don’t want YOU working on this project any longer!” Decena says. +“My Emperor, with all due respect, I need Zana to help me with this!” Elam exclaims. + +At this point Zana begins to protest her innocence in a polite way, trying very hard not to sound out of line, but Decena isn’t hearing any of it and even draws her pistol. + +“Decena, are you sure you’re not just scared that I’m going to die and deep down you don’t want me to go through with this because you want me around a little longer?” you ask. + +Decena grabs your hand and looks straight at you. + +“My love, there are many times you could’ve died and while it was always a concern, I always accepted it as a possibility. If you died in battle, then it would have purpose at least. You would have been serving the Empire. Even if you died of old age or some other natural cause I could accept it because you would have still died serving the Empire. And IF you die in this process then I can accept it, because you will be dying to secure the future of the Empire.” + +Decena pauses and takes a deep breath and turns to everyone else while pointing at Zana. + +“But I cannot accept you going helplessly into danger like this. THIS woman has ill intent. I FEEL it in my heart. I FEEL it in what I guess would be my soul. EVERY warning, EVERY instinct about her is telling me that she is wishing you unwell. All of us perhaps. I can’t even prove it, but I don’t need to when I FEEL it.” + +Decena then turns back to you. + +“My love, if you genuinely believe this woman has no ill intent then I will as always defer to your judgment, however if you trust my judgment on this matter even a little bit, then I beg of you to let me kill her where she stands.” + +At this point both Zana and Elam’s eyes widen. The nearby technicians almost shuffle back as if not wishing to get caught in the fallout. Even Brenda and Warrick are a little surprised by this. + +Elam at this point once again begs you not to kill Zana as he needs her for this project to work. Zana stays silent, though she probably believes that anything she’d say at this point might cause Decena to shoot her anyway. + +And here you thought the only thing you were going to have to worry about today was trying to stay alive long enough to create some fertile Eternals… +> Let Zana live +As much as Decena is just trying to look out for you, you can’t imagine that if Zana was up to something you wouldn’t have caught it by now. Actually you’d be more worried if she wasn’t on this project considering that she’s been assisting Elam from day one. She’s pretty much vital. + +“Decena, I tell you with absolute certainty that I trust this woman and do not believe she means any ill intent. I understand that you’re concerned about my safety, but Zana is needed for this project and has proven her dedication to it from the beginning. Honestly, I’d rather have her around if only to keep Elam’s tendency towards…overenthusiasm in check.” +“Emperor, I assure you, I will be…” Elam starts to say, but you interrupt him. +“Yes, yes, I know. But as I said, I’d still feel comfortable with Zana assisting you. In any case, that is my decision Decena.” + +Decena looks very apprehensive; she probably didn’t think you’d side against her. She nearly starts to say “but…” however she stops herself and just gives you a nod. + +“Very well, as I said, I will defer to your judgement on this matter, but if anything starts going wrong, you know who’s head is going to roll first.” She says looking at Zana. + +“Well, I guess nothing better go wrong Zana.” You say. +“Nothing will go wrong, my Emperor. Everything will go according as planned, that I promise.” Zana remarks. + +With that out of the way the procedure continues and you and Decena exchange one kiss for what might be the last time. + +Elam pulls the lever and the process begins. Lights, buzzing, rumbling, and all manner of machinery noises can be heard throughout the room. + +The oddest thing is you’re not feeling as much pain as you thought you would. There is definitely a tingling sensation and it feels as if all your hair is standing on end, but you’ve felt things a lot more painful. + +You are however feeling very tired and it is all very draining. Eventually you can’t fight it anymore and you start to fall unconscious… + +Then all of a sudden you feel a surge running all through your body, which wakes you back up. Your body begins to go into convulsions and you start to foam from the mouth. Basically you’re being electrocuted. + +“Zana! There’s something wrong! Turn down those dials!” Elam shouts, but Zana does nothing of the sort, instead she uses some sort of device that fries the controls and runs off pushing a technician out of the way. + +“SHIT! I KNEW IT! GET HER!” Decena shouts and attempts to untie your straps, but the electric pulse running through your body is so strong that the charge knocks her down and even stuns her. Elam runs attempt to turn off the machine from another source. + +Zana doesn’t get far, as Warrick and Brenda easily catch her, but it’s for naught as she reveals a bomb hidden on her person, blowing herself and them up as well. The blast also manages to destroy several tanks, machinery and kill several staff along with Elam. On the plus side, it stops the electrical current frying your body inside out, unfortunately its too late and you’re well on your way to death. Your mind isn’t even functioning anymore save for a faint sense that you’re still alive. + +The secondary explosions from other machinery on fire finishes you off, along with Decena who doesn’t recover fast enough to get out of the blast, though perhaps when she saw your own condition in those moments, she didn’t want to go on. + +With the death of you and all the other top Eternals, the Empire soon descends into factions of the newer third and fourth generation Eternals fighting over who is the rightful “heir.” The other races either get caught in the middle or break off into their own factions. + +This massive civil war would be the final days of the Empire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 67 + +Peace is a good thing for most people and in your elderly years you can even sort of appreciate it a little more, but the problem is, you’ve got hundreds of new Eternals who have been bred and trained for war and nobody to send them up against. + +To be honest you thought maybe that Semra would make good on her claim of resurrecting the “Svelk Empire” again and perhaps invade with an armada filled with svelk warriors, but haven’t heard or seen a svelk since you last spoke to her. Then again she did say it wouldn’t happen in your lifetime. + +While you haven’t put as much time and money into exploration any more, there are still efforts being made by private expeditions, but nobody has had much luck in finding any new lands worthwhile. + +In any event you’re going to have to have them do something with them soon, just maybe not today. You also have to meet with Elam, since apparently he’s come up with a possible solution to the sterility problem of the eternals. + +“Well, I’m sure we’ll find something for them to do, but let me just say you’ve done a fine job with them as usual.” You say to Brenda. +“Thank you, but I don’t think I’ll be able to effectively train the next batch. At least not full time. Getting sort of…” +“You don’t need to say it. Trust me, we’re all getting that way, don’t worry I’m going to have Decena training the fifth gen. Training’s definitely going to go a little differently, but then if my meeting with Elam is going to be a positive one then these next Eternals are going to be different anyway.” +“So the rumors are true? Elam’s figured out a way?” +“So he says. Trust me, I’m just as surprised as you are. In any case, I’m off to meet him.” + +You bid Brenda goodbye and head to the location where new eternals are “born.” When you arrive a couple of workers and ask if the children will be arriving today to which you reply no and ask if Elam has arrived yet. They tell you that Elam has indeed arrived and is waiting in Chief Supervisor Gregory’s office. They also mention that a woman came with him. You have no idea who that could be. Girlfriend perhaps? If so, you honestly didn’t know Elam even paid any attention to anything that wasn’t scientifically related. + +You enter the office just in time to see Elam criticizing Gregory’s lack of adventure in his chosen profession. + +“Bah! You’ve always been too cautious Gregory! Even the gnomes with all their needless safety pre-cautions aren’t as timid! That’s why you’re still here watching tanks and I’m creating new and better things for the Empire!” Elam boasts. +“Really…I’m fine…I like it here…” Gregory says quietly and then looks in your direction and straightens up in his chair. +“See? What did I tell you Zana? Same ol’ Gregory! Hah! Oh Emperor! Didn’t see you there! Apologies.” + +You tell everyone to dismiss the formalities and tell Gregory to leave as you have important business with Elam. He nods, and leaves. The woman though does not. You have no idea who she except she looks to be in her thirties, wears spectacles, has long curly red hair and is dressed in technician’s clothing similar to Elam. + +“I trust this woman is somehow important to what we have to discuss, otherwise you would not have her here?” you say sitting down. +“Oh! Yes, apologies once again. This is Zana, and she’s been invaluable in helping me on not just this project, but on several others in the past.” Elam says. +“Zana? Why have I not heard of her before? I know the gnomes let Elam into their city on my insistence, but I didn’t realize we had another human inventor there.” You say. +“Oh, she was born there, Emperor.” +“What?” + +At this point Zana speaks for herself. + +“Actually Elam as I’ve told you once before, I wasn’t born in New Dessle I was just raised there. Sometimes I wonder how you invent so well with your memory as foggy as it is. At least our Emperor has a good reason for not remembering me. He has an entire Empire to rule.” Zana says playfully pushing his shoulder. +“Wait. We’ve met?” you ask. +“Oh yes. We briefly met when you first incorporated New Dessle into the Empire. I’m Klemto’s adopted daughter.” + +That was so long ago, you barely remember, though you’re starting to now. Yes, she was only a teenager then. + +“Ah yes…starting to remember. I remember you ran up to Klemto telling him that you wanted to help fix your lighting system. Klemto gave you permission, but was slightly embarrassed that you interrupted his meeting with me and then only briefly greeted me before running off.” +“Good memory. I know it’s late, but I apologize for my impetuous youthful ways.” +“None necessary. Wasn’t offended then either, in fact I remember applauding Klemto for raising such a child that wished to serve their community in a meaningful way.” +“I thank you my Emperor. And I have continued to serve the Empire in the same way.” +“I believe it, otherwise Elam wouldn’t have you here, so I’m guessing you both must have come up with a solution to our problem. So let’s discuss that, shall we?” + +Elam begins to excitedly tell you about all the tests they did and a lot of scientific talk without actually getting to the point. He particularly enjoys talking about how some of the fourth generation eternals you granted him permission to take for testing years ago, managed to reproduce under the right conditions. He mentions it was only the one girl and she died in the process, but the child she gave birth too managed to actually survive for a few minutes. + +When this doesn’t exactly fill you with confidence, Zana speaks up again. + +“What Elam means to say, that despite the limited success, we have definitely found a way to make the next set of Eternals fertile. The magical process is what is causing the problem. At first we thought it was too much magic, but in actuality it’s too little.” Zana explains. +“Really?” +“Yes, despite enhancing many of the traits of the eternals with each generation, the magical energy has been too specific in its task. The Eternal’s body should be completely immersed in the energy while in the tank and then the appropriate chemical mixtures can be added, and then…well I won’t bore you again with technical talk. Rest assured though we both believe very strongly that it will work. +“So…what? Do we need to sacrifice an entire mage for a single fertile Eternal?” you ask. +“Well…that would work, if you had the numbers, but from what I do know, magic has been on the decline for some time now. There are…what? Like twenty mages in the whole Empire now? Most of which are old men and women and none of them particularly very powerful. Not powerful enough for our purposes even if we did completely drain them. Honestly we would need someone with at least the power that Galen had, but unfortunately as you know we used him as a test subject, which ended up helping us come to this conclusion in the first place. Not all is lost and we can still accomplish this, but…” + +Zana hesitates to even speak it and even Elam who is usually in an excited state is very somber looking. You get the impression you already know where they’re going to go with this… + +“Let me guess. I have to sacrifice myself.” You say. + +Elam and Zana don’t answer. + +“Well?” +“Yes, but we still aren’t sure about the results, I mean this isn’t an exact science… I mean…” +“Not an exact science? Then what the fuck are we talking about Elam? Zana just said she was certain it would work! Now you’re telling me it might not and I’m supposed to kill myself in the process?” +“No! That’s not what I mean! (Exhale) Look what I mean is I believe we can set it up so you’ll be able to survive the process. I mean you’re so powerful and your magical abilities are vast. I mean even for a man your age you’re in good physical condition and you can withstand more pain than most. I can’t believe I’m saying this, but…I THINK if we take the necessary safety precautions, you’ll be able to survive this process, but the downside is we’re not going to be able to do this with a thousand or even half that number of potential eternal candidates. We can do it with a hundred maximum and you will definitely lose all your magical abilities in the process.” Elam says and is beginning to sweat. + +“And what do you say about this Zana? Do you believe this could be done?” +“I won’t lie. I don’t know. I mean yes it is possible if we were very careful and severely lowered the amount of Eternal candidates, you might survive, but I just don’t know. I do know that the process will still result in the desired outcome for the Eternals though.” +“However, there is another process that Zana and I have discussed that may be more desirable to you.” Elam suddenly exclaims. + +Elam takes a deep breath and asks you. + +“How would you like to be immortal?” +“This is a joke right?” +“No joke my Emperor. I’m very serious.” Elam says and you have no doubt that he is, though Zana looks skeptical. +“Elam, the Emperor wants to hear real solutions, not theories.” +“It’s no theory! I’m starting to get results! In fact I dare say I’m even more certain about this approach than the one with the Eternals! Emperor, if you give me a little more time to perfect the…” +“Elam, will you explain from the beginning for once?!” you shout. +“Yes. Apologies my Emperor. Okay. It’s going to sound crazy, but then I’m sure the concept of a ship that flies in the air did once too right? I believe I’ve found a way to keep a person alive long after their body has died.” + +Already you’re joining Zana in your skepticism. + +“Sounds like magic to me. Specifically necromancy. Last I remember you weren’t a necromancer Elam and I have no intention on being some mindless walking corpse.” +“No it’s not raising the dead, it’s science! No magic involved at all! In fact YOU wouldn’t have to do much of anything. Y’see, all I need is your brain.” Elam says with a creepy grin. + +Well this conversation has taken an interesting turn. + +“Elam I don’t know if you’re aware, but I sort of need that to live in the first place.” +“(Sigh) What my over zealous colleague is trying to say is he’s been doing experiments in his spare time on various human subjects. Well, not ALL human subjects, but specifically the brain. He’s managed to remove entire brains and keep the subject alive.” Zana interjects. +“WHAT?! I just said I have no intention on walking around like a mindless corpse!” you exclaim. +“No, he’s not keeping the subject’s bodies alive. He’s been able to keep the brains alive. At least for a little while…” +“I’ll be able to keep them alive indefinitely with a little more time!” Elam exclaims. + +Now this conversation has just gotten weird. You rub your face and head with your hands and try to assess the situation. + +“Okay wait. Let me get this straight. You’re saying you can remove my brain and keep me alive? How? Where the hell would I be? How would I do anything?” +“Well that’s why I need a little more time. However, YOU would be floating in a tank filled with certain chemicals.” +“Floating in a tank?” +“Yes, well at least temporarily. I mean I believe we could in time hook you up to a machine system so that perhaps your brain waves could control something like the automatons that we create in New Dessel. I believe with your innate magic powers you could probably tap into some sort of telepathic ability with the right jolts of electricity to the tank. You’d be able to give orders to people through their minds so communication might not be a problem…” Elam says and continues speaking, but you’re starting to get overwhelmed. + +This is absolutely insane what you’re hearing. And not just the brain part, you mean all of it. Even the way to make the Eternals fertile sounds crazy. Especially given some of the experiments that were performed in order to explore the possibility in the first place. Now Elam’s telling you he’s been cutting brains out of people and keeping them alive and he’s suggesting on putting YOU in a tank. You can’t help but see the irony of being in a tank for the rest of your life. + +And the strangest part about all this? You’re more than willing to entertain both ideas. + +If you sacrifice yourself so that the new eternals can breed then it won’t be one in vain. Quite frankly how many more worthwhile years do you have left anyway? Maybe it would be better to die so that a legacy of sorts can live forever. Besides, there is always the possibility that you could survive the process. Of course there’s always the chance it could all fail horribly. Elam and Zana may seem very certain that it will work, but you still have your reservations. + +As crazy as Elam’s idea sounds, part of it intrigues you. Immortality would give you that time you always wanted in past. Time enough to conquer the world. With immortality, you wouldn’t need to worry about some sort of legacy, you would always be. He says he needs more time to work on it though which is a concern, then there’s the fact that you’d be floating in a tank. Would you grow bored? Would you go mad? Would you even be “you?” Elam said there would be the possibility of setting something up so you could interact with the outside world, but again who knows if that will even work? + +You’ve got a decision and you need to make one or the other. +> Immortality +It’s surely a mad plan that sounds impossible, but yet the appeal is there. Even you can’t believe you’re actually going for it, but deep down this is something you feel you need to do. + +This idea of having fertile Eternals to “carry on” your legacy is a nice idea, but ultimately it isn’t “you.” Only you can lead the Empire to world order. Not to mention there is a risk of you dying in the process of creating said Eternals and then you’d have wait at least twelve or thirteen years just to see if the process literally produced positive results. + +If you’re going to have to risk your life and wait around, you’d rather do it for the chance at immortality. + +And given all the other wonders and feats you’ve seen or even done in this world who is to say this isn’t possible? Like Elam said, the concept of a machine like an airship was impossible at one time as well. + +“How long would I have to wait for you to perfect this process you’re proposing?” you ask Elam, who gives a big grin at your willingness to choose his new plan. +“Not long a assure you my Emperor! As I said, I’ve already had limited success on a few test subjects already! In your case though, I will need to build a suitable containment for when…well you ascend to a higher state of being.” + +Zana is shaking her head at this idea. + +“My Emperor, while I know the desire for immortality is tempting, I really have to advise against this. Elam’s enthusiasm is far exceeding what is reality! While it is true he’s managed to keep a few animal brains alive for a few minutes, I’m fairly sure that that will be the extent of it. This isn’t even taking all the other risks and unforeseen problems that there will surely be. There is only so much science can do, it can’t conquer death.” Zana says. +“Your concerns are dully noted Zana. Elam, you will have any and all resources available to you for this project.” You say. +“I won’t fail you my Emperor. This will work I guarantee it!” +“Hrm. Well let’s sure hope so, because I’m putting my trust behind it and throwing away a plan that will not get the chance to be implemented again. In any event, I want to keep very close eye on this project. You said you’re going to have to build a container for me, well if I am going to spend the rest of my life in a tank, then it needs to be at my home. So I’m going to have the entire under palace cleared and open for this project to go down there. There should be more than enough room and if not, we’ll make additions. But you’ll be becoming a permanent fixture at the palace.” You say. +“I understand. Again, I thank you for this opportunity my Emperor.” Elam responds. + +You tell Elam for him to get all of his equipment, staff and whatever else he currently needs together and arrangements will be made to have it hauled to the palace. Zana says she’s still skeptical of this plan, but if this is what you wish and if Elam still wants her help, then she will of course serve. Naturally Elam wants her working with him on this project. + +Having settled on a new plan, all you have to do now is inform Decena… + +“You’re going to have your what put in a what?” she exclaims. +“My brain would be placed in a tank of special chemicals. Elam says that due to my magic powers I could still communicate mentally with people with the proper electrical charges attached…” you don’t even get to finish, Decena is too overwhelmed by this information. + +“This…this…can’t work? Can it? I mean…it sounds so impossible!” +“I know. Trust me, when Elam explained it, I thought the same thing, but…I have to try. I mean the other plan was nice and all, but really the risks were just as great and still involved an uncertain success as far as I was concerned.” +“Yeah I know you explained that plan, but…it sounded at least like they were ready to enact it. This one is going to involve more testing and who know how much more time? You’ll still have to risk your life and…” + +You stop Decena. + +“Decena, weren’t you the one that always believed I could find a way to be immortal?” +“Well yes, but I dunno…a brain in a tank? Is that really living?” +“Well Elam said that perhaps arrangements and improvements could be made in the future and that perhaps I could actually leave the tank via one of those automatons that we used in the Nakol and Iznac Wars. Look, the idea of being a disembodied brain isn’t exactly ideal, but at this point I’m starting to feel so much pain in my body on a daily basis that I’d almost be relieved to shed this old shell at this point. And what’s the alternative? Hope that a generation of Eternals can follow in my, or even your footsteps just because they can reproduce? Can’t do it. I have to shoulder the majority of the burden of keeping the Empire running. Nobody else. I have to attempt this plan and this is a worthwhile risk in my mind that I can take.” + +“But…what about us? I mean…if this is all successful and everything goes well. How will our relationship remain as it is now?” + +Decena touches your hand and then your face as if it’ll be the last time she’ll get to do it. You return her closeness, as you understand her concern. + +“Decena, I know it will be difficult. Honestly if this process goes through successfully, you’re right our relationship will be very different, and perhaps you will be unable to love me in such a form, but… + +Now Decena stops you. + +“My glorious Emperor, don’t you know by now that I will always love you no matter what your form? That will never change. It’s just that I would miss the warmth of your body next to mine, our lips touching when we embrace. I can’t say that I am entirely sure of this plan, but I will as always defer and respect your judgment on this matter. If you believe this is possible, then I can think of nothing greater than your everlasting ruler ship over this world.” + +And with this validation, you feel slightly better about your decision. Even though you never doubted that Decena wouldn’t be behind you, it’s still good to hear. + +Your “siblings” on the other hand are a lot less supportive on the matter however. + +“What?! I thought you were going through with the plan to create fertile Eternals!” Brenda exclaims. +“Yeah, I mean granted that plan sounded a little far fetched, but it seemed like it might be plausible. This just sounds well…insane.” Warrick adds. + +The conversation doesn’t get any better from there. Brenda is probably more upset because of your plans to abandon the Eternal project entirely and place all resources into this immortality plan. You explain that for right now there isn’t any need for more Eternals due to having nowhere to really send the current fourth gens a place to fight anyway. No point in creating more super soldiers when you’ve already got more than enough right now and no war to which to send them. + +Naturally Brenda sees this a sort of betrayal. She has grown attached to the younger Eternals and does see them as successors or in her case her surrogate children. You remind her though that they are neither. They are tools to the Empire just as you all were when you all were created. This doesn’t go over well with Brenda. + +“So what, are we ALL just your tools too then?” Brenda asks. +“Brenda, I didn’t say you…” you start to say, but are interrupted. +“No, you said we’re all just tools for the Empire. That includes all of us. Look, maybe YOU got the chance to be the right hand of our old Emperor, and you have become his successor, but YOU also started out just like Warrick and I did!” +“Brenda, I think you need to calm down, I’m sure he didn’t…” Warrick says, but she won’t hear him. +“No Warrick, this needs to be said.” She says and turns back to you. You don’t say anything you’re content on listening to her rant. + +“This plan of yours is vanity, pure and simple. Is your ego such that you cannot even accept your own WIFE taking over after you die? Would you really throw away a good chance of creating fertile Eternals who will carry on the Empire for a remote chance of living forever? You may rule the Empire, but do you really consider yourself bigger than it?” + +You’ve heard enough and put up your hand. + +“Brenda. I’ve allowed your outburst because you’re right, we three did start out together. I even see you as siblings of a sort and of course as friends. We all trained under that sadistic svelk bitch until the two of you were lucky enough to be separated. And yes you two were the lucky ones, because quite frankly sometimes I envy your ignorance on everything you’re STILL in the dark about. But shall I tell you? Seems like a perfect time.” + +You start off by telling Brenda that Roldan wasn’t killed by a simple undead shadow assassin and in fact Semra had nothing to do with it like the Emperor’s propaganda said. You explain that the Emperor had Roldan killed just like he had your wife Alison killed AND was planning to kill you. + +The reveal is definitely a shock to both Brenda and Warrick. + +You continue by admitting that you weren’t even meant to be an Eternal in the first place. That you were a candidate by a red tape mistake and it was that same mistake that ultimately resulted in Casimir’s death. + +“So Brenda, as you can see, perhaps I’m not entirely attached to the Eternals, because I wasn’t meant to be one in the first place. Yet here I am. Perhaps I seek immortality because I took it from Casimir. Casimir ruled the Empire for centuries and what did he do with it? Nothing much. I’ve ruled it for significantly less time and look at what it’s become. THINK what I could do if I had more time. I’ve built this nation to be better than it was. I’ve expanded its glory. I’ve defended its honor. I’ve sacrificed for it. I’ve done everything short of DIE for it and if I thought it would secure its continual future, then yes I would do that too.” + +You move closer to Brenda and Warrick who sit in silence listening to your speech. + +“You ask if I think I’m bigger than the Empire. No, I don’t…I AM the fucking Empire.” + +You stare at them both very intensely. + +“And only I can live forever.” + +You end your speech telling them both that this is the way things are going to be and that they are welcome to be part of it as always. + +And if they aren’t willing, then they had best stay out of the way. +> Years pass... +Year 72 + +You have to admit as the years passed by on this project, you’d wondered if you were just chasing a dream, but it looks like that dream will soon be a reality. + +Research has been tested, advancements have been made, test subjects have been used and hypotheses have been confirmed. Everything is coming together; the only thing that will be needed soon is you. + +Still, despite you always stating how much your body aches and how much weaker and slower you are now, there is a part of you that is a little afraid of what this procedure will entail, namely an end to your life as you know it, but still living. It’s funny but how this is a little scary to you, even if simple death is not. + +In fact Elam is probably more excited to see this through than even you are. + +“My Emperor, we may begin the procedure any time you wish. Just let me know when we can get started.” Elam says. +“Does it have to be right now?” you ask. +“No, of course not my Emperor. I just thought you were eager to see this through.” +“You don’t need to push our Emperor, Elam. I’m sure he’d like to take care of some affairs before going through with this.” Zana remarks. +“Is all the machinery and equipment in working order? Has everything been inspected?” you ask. +“Of course my Emperor, I inspected everything myself. I figured you’d want someone that has a background with safety procedures doing that rather than Elam here.” Zana remarks with a teasing smile at Elam. +“Bah. YOU didn’t even think this was going to be possible!” Elam exclaims. +“Well I have to admit, it did sound very unlikely, but I suppose I never should’ve doubted your genius Elam.” Zana says and gives him a quick peck on the cheek. + +While Zana and Elam are engaging in playfulness, you’re involved in making a life changing choice. + +“Okay. We’ll do this in three days. That will give me time to take care of a few things I need to take care of, just in case the worst should happen. No point in drawing this out any longer than that. Everyone is dismissed until that time.” you say. + +Elam and Zana both acknowledge your command and soon they and their staff all begin to leave. You however continue to stick around. When you’re finally all alone, you begin to walk closer to the giant tank in the room, which is hooked up to a system of machines. As you lean against your walking stick you can’t help marvel at the work that went into all this. + +Gears, cogs, wires, levers, buttons, mechanical arms …you wonder how the hell some of this works. You’ve actually tried to keep up on the research since this project started, and while you understand a lot of the basic concepts, some of it just goes over your head. Though you aren’t sure if its because you’ve got so much on your mind that you can’t retain the information or if you just don’t have a knack for the technical stuff, or maybe you just find it all well…boring. + +A speaker of sorts is attached to the tank and there are three specialized automatons standing nearby. You imagine that these are intended for you to be able to interact with the outside world in some fashion. Elam has admitted though that despite the very technical nature of this project he believes that this wouldn’t be as easy without your own magical abilities that will be able to tap the power of your mind. He’s gone on to say that this will be the ultimate successful blending of science and magic as far as he’s concerned. He better be right considering that all the testing took away most of your remaining mages. + +In any event, this is where you’re going to spend the rest of your life. + +“So, are you ready for immortality?” a voice says behind you. It’s Decena. It’s surprising to see her down here considering she’s only made one or two visits down here before since the project got underway. She’s told you that the less she knows about the project the less likely she’s libel to get worried about your safety and try to talk you out of it hence the lack of visits. + +“I guess so.” You answer. +“You guess so? That doesn’t sound like the usual certainty you’ve always had about this plan.” Decena remarks. +“Oh, I’m certain. Just trying to take all of this in and get myself used to this room I suppose. Not sure why I’m even concerned about it really, I mean Casimir spent several centuries in a room practically by himself. This very room in fact or at least part of it before I had all the remodeling and expansion done to accommodate all the machinery. Its really surreal sometimes how I’m actually starting to follow in his footsteps. I sometimes wonder if he’d be proud of what I’ve managed to accomplish or if he’d just be very jealous.” + +Decena walks over and puts her arm around you while you both stare at the giant tank. + +“Well, I’m proud of everything you’ve accomplished and everything you will accomplish after this procedure. So when will it be?” +“In three days, then Elam and Zana will be back here to perform it.” +“Hrm, I don’t care for that woman.” Decena remarks. +“So you’ve said during the times you wandered down here.” +“I dunno. Something about her just doesn’t sit right with me in the short moments I’ve spoken with her. She seems phony at times. Even the fact that she’s been concerned with this plan from the beginning and worried about your well being doesn’t seem genuine to me. If it hadn’t already been in the middle of the project when I first met her, I probably would’ve told you to have her removed from it.” +“Didn’t realize she had gotten under your skin so much. As you know though I rechecked her file that the Eyes had on her long before she started working on this project. She’s nothing but clean except maybe for a lack of judgment in sexing up Elam on occasion, but I can’t imagine there were a lot of choices in human males when they worked together in New Dessel.” +“As I said, I can’t place my finger on it, but there is something about her that doesn’t seem right with her. Does she need to be there for this procedure?” +“Well I don’t know. I mean she’s the main one that’s been working with Elam so I imagine so to some degree. She already did an inspection on the machinery without me even needing to tell her to do so.” + +Decena doesn’t immediately respond to your answer instead she just walks forward towards the tank and touches it. + +“Nothing can go wrong with this plan…” she says softly then she turns around. + +“Can you have someone else inspect everything again?” she asks. +“What?!” you respond. +“I just want everything to go well, don’t you? I just think it would be best if everything was given a second look.” +“But…you realize that might very well take more than three days? You realize how complex all this stuff is? I told Zana and Elam that…” +“No, I don’t want either of them to do it. Pick someone else that worked on the project.” +“Pick someone…Decena what is this all about?” +“Look I would just feel more comfortable if someone else did an inspection of the machine that’s going to be your new home okay? I already said how I feel about Zana, so I don’t want her doing it again. And as for Elam we all know he has a tendency to overlook safety protocol even under the strictest supervision. Can’t you get someone else?” +“Not really, I mean those are the main two who worked on this thing! Decena, I’m as concerned about the success of this procedure more than anyone, but I’d rather not extend my waiting period any longer than necessary. I mean I don’t think I will and I’d only admit this to you, but I don’t want to lose my nerve.” +“You won’t lose your nerve my love, but don’t you see this is why another inspection should be done? I mean I guess if you don’t think it’s necessary then I’ll of course respect your wishes and we can spend the next three days not worrying about this until the time comes.” + +On one hand you suppose Decena’s just looking out for you as usual, but on the other you really don’t want to risk losing your nerve on this situation. The longer you think about it, and how it could all go wrong, or even how it can all go right, is enough to possibly change your mind on the whole situation. Then there’s the fact that Zana and Elam were the main ones involved on building the machine, they’d know it the best and if you got someone else to look at it, who is to say they won’t screw something up? +> Have a second inspection done +If Decena feels this strongly about your safety then you’re not going to deny it. Besides another way of looking at it isn’t more time to rethink the situation, but instead more time to spend with Decena. + +“Very well, if you feel a second inspection should be done, then that’s what will be done. (Sigh) I’m just wondering who had as much experience as Zana and Elam did with the machine that they could inspect it without wondering what certain parts did or accidently make things worse.” You respond +“What about that nervous fellow I saw sometimes in the palace? Didn’t he work on the Eternal Project?” Decena asks. +“Oh…you mean Gregory? Yeah, he did. I transferred him over here as a general supervisor when that project got shut down. Sometimes I even forget he’s here, since he’s such a wallflower sometimes. Still you’re probably on to something, because if anyone is a stickler for safety and thoroughness its him and while he wasn’t involved in the building process, he has familiarized himself with the machine probably just as much due to being a safety supervisor for the rst of the technical staff. He’s probably annoyed the hell out of Elam on several occasions because of it.” +“Good, he’s sounds perfect.” + +The next day you summon Gregory to the palace, when he arrives he’s nervous as usual. The man must think you’re going to have him executed, but then he thinks that any time you look at him. You tell him that you just need another inspection done on the tank and the machine (It’s really going to have to be given a better name at some point). He of course complies. + +While he gets started you plan on informing Elam and Zana that there may be a slight delay in the project, but you figure it can wait until tomorrow and you spend some quality time with Decena for the rest of the day. + +On the second day, Kivan tells you that Gregory really needs to speak with you and says it’s incredibly important. When you go to speak with him, he’s very apologetic, but explains that he’s already found some possible problems with the machine. + +“Apologies my Emperor as I know you want to get this procedure underway as soons as possible, but well I just think I found some possible problems. I mean they seem very minor, but they aren’t. In time some vital parts could break down. In fact I’m very surprised that Zana did not catch the worn tubing and slightly frayed wires on the inside. Besides myself, she’s the only one that has a good eye for that detail.” + +Decena who happens to be with you, immediately exclaims about this being proof that she knew that something wasn’t on the up and up with Zana. + +“She tried to make her assassination attempt look like an accident! I KNEW there wasn’t something right about her!” + +You tell Gregory to keep doing his inspection to see if there are any more flaws he can find. While it’s very possible Zana didn’t see these potential dangers, you’re still not pleased with her right now and plan on having the Eyes bring her in. Elam will have to be brought in too. + +When you arrive at the Eye headquarters, Warrick tells you that they haven’t interrogated to any great length yet, but the pair of them don’t know why they’ve been brought in by the Eyes. + +Your main concern is Zana at first so you personally go to see her with the Eye interrogators. What is surprising is that when you see her she’s completely calm. Most people (including Elam) when brought in by the Eyes are scared shitless. + +And that’s what starts to make you suspicious. You’ve found that the people who are the most calm under pressure are probably the most capable of ruthlessness and plots… + +Zana explains her inspection step by step and steadily asserts her dedication to the Empire and her loyalty. It probably would’ve been better had she just not spoken at all, because the more you hear the more your own suspicion rises. If Decena was here, she probably would’ve just shot her for lying, and while her fate is definitely sealed as far as you’re concerned, you still want to know the reason. + +“Zana, I’ll admit, you had even me fooled, but the problem is the more you talk the worse it gets for you. Gregory has already found more flaws in the machine since you were brought in. He’s even said that even he doesn’t think that they could be anything other than sabotage. Even if I assume you’re telling the truth, it displays a gross amount of incompetence on your part. So either you were trying to kill me on purpose or you’re a lot less competent than I believed. And quite honestly I do not believe that from your past experience that YOU are capable of that level of incompetence.” + +Zana’s calm demeanor begins to change to one of uncertainty. It’s hitting her that she might not make it out of here. + +“So tell me why Zana. Was this something you just came up with, had you been planning this for years? Who else is involved? Did someone put you up to this…did a svelk woman by the name of Semra put you up to this?” you ask. + +Zana’s face now has dropped to one of fear. She looks like she’s about to cry. + +“Zana, you know how this is going to end for you. If you ever had any loyalty toward the Empire then at least tell me everything. If you do, I can at least promise you a quick execution.” You say. + +Zana’s expression now changes to one of absolute rage. + +“Like the same quick death you’ve given so many others? The fact is I’ve NEVER had ANY loyalty to the Empire let alone you, murderer. Tyrant. But I’ll tell you everything anyway, because you don’t know shit about me. You think I’m upset because I’m about to die? I’m upset because I won’t get to kill you and spare the world of your future domination and cruelty!” + +This outburst causes the Eyes nearby to move closer towards Zana and grab her wrists just in case she attempts something, though at this point there isn’t much she could do to you now. + +“Who are you? I mean who are you really?” +“I’m nobody. Nobody of importance at least not until YOU came around and killed my entire family!” Zana says. +“Do you have any idea how little that narrows it down?” you ask. +“I was going to be a princess! I would’ve ruled a kingdom one day! YOU and YOUR EMPIRE destroyed all that before I even had a chance to enjoy a taste of such a life! Klemto didn’t just save a random Felkan baby, he saved an HEIR TO THE FELKAN FUCKING KINGDOM!” Zana shouts. + +It was a very long time ago. Almost a different life even, but you vaguely remember seeing a crib in the Felkan royal palace, yet no baby or even signs of a dead one. You never thought too much of it at the time, but apparently even though Zana was just an infant, Klemto must’ve told her about her real heritage. He probably lied to you thinking that you would’ve had her killed. + +“Because of YOU, I’ve had to live a miserable existence working on machinery surrounded by fucking GNOMES! You know what that’s like? Being the only human in community of damn gnomes? It SUCKS! Then when some humans do fucking arrive, they’re from the same nation that destroyed my birthright! It almost sickened me to even sleep with that crazy fool Elam!” + +You continue to listen to Zana’s rant. + +“When I heard of your plan to create a fertile version of those abominations called Eternals I already saw my opportunity to get my revenge. Imagine my surprise when you actually took Elam up on his insane plan. To be quite honest I thought it would be a failure and I wouldn’t need to do anything except watch you eventually die of old age having missed your opportunity to carry on some monstrous legacy in the quest for immortality instead.” +“So why didn’t you attempt to sabotage the attempt long before now? Hell, why not even go the direct route and try to kill me? Not like you didn’t have plenty of opportunity.” You ask. +“Hah, kill you? The Eternal Emperor? I wouldn’t have stood a chance. No matter how quick, clever or young I might be, even I know that you have more lives than a cat. No, I would’ve never been able to kill you myself. As for sabotage, that might’ve been an option had you not been lingering around as much or Gregory not constantly doing inspections after every new part had been added. I knew I should’ve had him killed. I nearly thought about killing Elam when he started making progress with the project…but what can I say, I’d grown to like the old fool too much. Weakness on my part and a fatal one obviously.” + +Zana’s confession now has a tone of regret, not because of what she did, but more of what she failed to do. Right now you can see her thinking about the methods she could’ve went through with this plan a better way. So close, yet so far. + +“Okay, since you’re in a talkative mood, did Klemto or any gnome put you up to this?” you ask. +“What? So you’ll have an excuse to round them all up and destroy their souls again? I heard about what you did to them. And maybe I might find them to be timid, tiresome unattractive little know it alls, I find it deplorable what the Empire did to them. I can’t believe they allowed themselves to be dominated by a nation that systematically exterminated them from not just this life, but the next as well!” +“So did they help or not?” you ask again. +“No! No they did not! My father would’ve probably had me jailed if he knew what I was planning. Those cowards wouldn’t dare stand against the Empire, but I fucking would! And did! Not that this will save them. After you’re done killing me, you’ll probably have them all killed as well for any excuse will serve a tyrant!” +“It’s amusing that you keep calling me that. What did you think your parents were? They were a KING and QUEEN. You think they ruled by popular decision? Do you think YOU would have if you became queen? My actions that day weren’t even personal. I was just following orders like a soldier. Your actions however today are misguided and as you already admitted, fatal. Such a waste. Even had I known your origins, I would not have had you killed if you had remained true to serving the Empire. Your quest for vengeance was as pointless as your entire life. But I am a man of my word and I believe everything you’ve told me.” + +Without another word, you nod at the Eyes restraining her who back off. You then raise your hand and flash of lightning emanates from your fingers blasting Zana directly in the heart. She shakes for a few seconds and then slumps forward dead on the table. + +“Funny. She’ll probably be the last person I’ll ever kill directly. Well in this body anyway. Who’s to say what the future will bring? Anyway, I’ll need to speak with Warrick again.” + +You tell Warrick that you want the Eyes to purge New Dessel. Despite the fact that Zana most likely worked alone, you can’t take that chance. Maybe Klemto anticipated she’d eventually seek revenge and just took a hands off approach so that he couldn’t be directly implemented. Maybe they’re all genuinely innocent. Doesn’t matter. You’re trying to secure the future of the Empire and its obvious the gnomes are a potential threat. + +You chuckle to yourself realizing that you’re even more like Casimir than you ever thought. You have to believe even if he would be jealous of all your other accomplishments, he’d definitely be proud of this one. + +“Very well, we’ve already got a large number of Eyes positioned in that city. All we have to do is send in another large group, telling the gnomes that it’s a routine changing of the guard and when they’re in, they’ll purge the city. What about Elam?” Warrick asks. +“Oh, him I need. Besides I’m fairly certain the only thing he’s guilty of is thinking with his dick. Catch him up to speed on the situation and release him. Also let him know that the project will have to be set back until I’m satisfied with the machine’s replacement parts and Gregory’s inspection of every little detail.” +“Understood. Long live the Empire.” Warrick says. + +The project is set back at least a couple of months. The purging of New Dessel takes awhile due to the gnomes locking themselves in hard to reach sections of the city, but eventually the entire city is purged. You at last finished what Casimir started though really you wish it hadn’t been necessary. You never hated them. Klemto just saved the wrong baby and brought death on them all because of it. + +In any event, mostly technicians, inventors and other human families with members that have similar mechanical or scientific skills will resettle New Dessel. + +Eventually Elam and Gregory have all the equipment fixed and ready again and you return with Decena to complete the task you originally set out to do. + +You’re strapped to a table. Elam is remarkably subdued. You’re guessing he’s still taking Zana’s betrayal hard. Still, perhaps its good, it will give him more focus on what is important, serving the Empire. + +As you are prepared, you and Decena exchange one kiss for what will be the last time. + +“Know that whatever happens, I’ll always love you.” She says. +“And I will always love you.” You respond. + +Elam injects you with a powerful reagent that knocks you out and the process begins. + +The blackness takes you experience absolute nothingness… + +Hours later you wake up or at least you believe you’re “awake.” All around you, you feel as if you’re floating and every so often a tingling electrical charge can be felt. Your mind…or rather “you” are in the tank. The procedure worked. + +It’s a very strange sensation, you can “see” though you don’t have eyes. It’s almost as if the images you see outside the tank are being displayed directly into your brain. Though it isn’t like proper vision. You can only “see” them as blurs in your mind, however you can fill in those gaps due to your real memories of said people. + +Elam was right, the magic energy within you has allowed you vision, and it has also allowed you to speak. You focus on the female image…on Decena who still stands near your now empty shell of a body on a table. + +“Decena…do not cry…it worked…I am…alive.” You say with a bit of effort. + +This statement is followed by some shouts of joy from Decena who starts speaking out loud asking if its really you. When Elam sees what’s going on, he begins to jump up and down exclaiming that the process worked. + +“Decena, speak to me with your mind. It is the best way to directly communicate with me now.” You say to which she does so. +“My love, I’m so happy to see that this has worked! I was about to have Elam killed if it didn’t! So how is it? How do you feel?” +“It is an odd sensation, though not an unpleasant one. Indeed I do not feel the pain I once did any more. Perhaps, I shall get used to this form after all.” + +At this point you hear Elam’s mind and he’s asking you five hundred questions, all of which you will get to in time, but you tell him for now you just want to rest and converse with Decena alone. + +He gets it and says he’ll be back in an hour to check on you since there are still many tests that need to be done, such as the ability to move the automaton bodies and such. + +After Elam and his staff leave, Decena sits next to the tank touching the glass and looking in on you. It’s the closest she’ll ever be with you ever again, and she begins to sniffle and sob a bit. At first you think its out of sadness, but then you sense her thoughts and its due to happiness. + +“You’ll live forever and so will the Empire now. You did it, my love I always knew you would.” + +You are filled with a sense of bliss that seems stronger than you’ve ever felt before. You wonder if it’s due to your new form. Perhaps without a body, emotions and senses are stronger in some way? + +In any case you know now that this is just the beginning. You’ll have to make special arrangements due to your new form, but that’s all part of running an Empire. Now with your immortality secured, you can get back to expansion and possibly even get the Eternal project back up and running with alterations. Your plans to unite the entire world under Empire world has not changed and you know there are still places out there left to conquer. + +Still, when you look on at Decena’s hand on the glass you wish you could just touch her again. If only for a moment.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 72 + +You have to admit as the years passed by on this project, you’d wondered if you were just chasing a dream, but it looks like that dream will soon be a reality. + +Research has been tested, advancements have been made, test subjects have been used and hypotheses have been confirmed. Everything is coming together; the only thing that will be needed soon is you. + +Still, despite you always stating how much your body aches and how much weaker and slower you are now, there is a part of you that is a little afraid of what this procedure will entail, namely an end to your life as you know it, but still living. It’s funny but how this is a little scary to you, even if simple death is not. + +In fact Elam is probably more excited to see this through than even you are. + +“My Emperor, we may begin the procedure any time you wish. Just let me know when we can get started.” Elam says. +“Does it have to be right now?” you ask. +“No, of course not my Emperor. I just thought you were eager to see this through.” +“You don’t need to push our Emperor, Elam. I’m sure he’d like to take care of some affairs before going through with this.” Zana remarks. +“Is all the machinery and equipment in working order? Has everything been inspected?” you ask. +“Of course my Emperor, I inspected everything myself. I figured you’d want someone that has a background with safety procedures doing that rather than Elam here.” Zana remarks with a teasing smile at Elam. +“Bah. YOU didn’t even think this was going to be possible!” Elam exclaims. +“Well I have to admit, it did sound very unlikely, but I suppose I never should’ve doubted your genius Elam.” Zana says and gives him a quick peck on the cheek. + +While Zana and Elam are engaging in playfulness, you’re involved in making a life changing choice. + +“Okay. We’ll do this in three days. That will give me time to take care of a few things I need to take care of, just in case the worst should happen. No point in drawing this out any longer than that. Everyone is dismissed until that time.” you say. + +Elam and Zana both acknowledge your command and soon they and their staff all begin to leave. You however continue to stick around. When you’re finally all alone, you begin to walk closer to the giant tank in the room, which is hooked up to a system of machines. As you lean against your walking stick you can’t help marvel at the work that went into all this. + +Gears, cogs, wires, levers, buttons, mechanical arms …you wonder how the hell some of this works. You’ve actually tried to keep up on the research since this project started, and while you understand a lot of the basic concepts, some of it just goes over your head. Though you aren’t sure if its because you’ve got so much on your mind that you can’t retain the information or if you just don’t have a knack for the technical stuff, or maybe you just find it all well…boring. + +A speaker of sorts is attached to the tank and there are three specialized automatons standing nearby. You imagine that these are intended for you to be able to interact with the outside world in some fashion. Elam has admitted though that despite the very technical nature of this project he believes that this wouldn’t be as easy without your own magical abilities that will be able to tap the power of your mind. He’s gone on to say that this will be the ultimate successful blending of science and magic as far as he’s concerned. He better be right considering that all the testing took away most of your remaining mages. + +In any event, this is where you’re going to spend the rest of your life. + +“So, are you ready for immortality?” a voice says behind you. It’s Decena. It’s surprising to see her down here considering she’s only made one or two visits down here before since the project got underway. She’s told you that the less she knows about the project the less likely she’s libel to get worried about your safety and try to talk you out of it hence the lack of visits. + +“I guess so.” You answer. +“You guess so? That doesn’t sound like the usual certainty you’ve always had about this plan.” Decena remarks. +“Oh, I’m certain. Just trying to take all of this in and get myself used to this room I suppose. Not sure why I’m even concerned about it really, I mean Casimir spent several centuries in a room practically by himself. This very room in fact or at least part of it before I had all the remodeling and expansion done to accommodate all the machinery. Its really surreal sometimes how I’m actually starting to follow in his footsteps. I sometimes wonder if he’d be proud of what I’ve managed to accomplish or if he’d just be very jealous.” + +Decena walks over and puts her arm around you while you both stare at the giant tank. + +“Well, I’m proud of everything you’ve accomplished and everything you will accomplish after this procedure. So when will it be?” +“In three days, then Elam and Zana will be back here to perform it.” +“Hrm, I don’t care for that woman.” Decena remarks. +“So you’ve said during the times you wandered down here.” +“I dunno. Something about her just doesn’t sit right with me in the short moments I’ve spoken with her. She seems phony at times. Even the fact that she’s been concerned with this plan from the beginning and worried about your well being doesn’t seem genuine to me. If it hadn’t already been in the middle of the project when I first met her, I probably would’ve told you to have her removed from it.” +“Didn’t realize she had gotten under your skin so much. As you know though I rechecked her file that the Eyes had on her long before she started working on this project. She’s nothing but clean except maybe for a lack of judgment in sexing up Elam on occasion, but I can’t imagine there were a lot of choices in human males when they worked together in New Dessel.” +“As I said, I can’t place my finger on it, but there is something about her that doesn’t seem right with her. Does she need to be there for this procedure?” +“Well I don’t know. I mean she’s the main one that’s been working with Elam so I imagine so to some degree. She already did an inspection on the machinery without me even needing to tell her to do so.” + +Decena doesn’t immediately respond to your answer instead she just walks forward towards the tank and touches it. + +“Nothing can go wrong with this plan…” she says softly then she turns around. + +“Can you have someone else inspect everything again?” she asks. +“What?!” you respond. +“I just want everything to go well, don’t you? I just think it would be best if everything was given a second look.” +“But…you realize that might very well take more than three days? You realize how complex all this stuff is? I told Zana and Elam that…” +“No, I don’t want either of them to do it. Pick someone else that worked on the project.” +“Pick someone…Decena what is this all about?” +“Look I would just feel more comfortable if someone else did an inspection of the machine that’s going to be your new home okay? I already said how I feel about Zana, so I don’t want her doing it again. And as for Elam we all know he has a tendency to overlook safety protocol even under the strictest supervision. Can’t you get someone else?” +“Not really, I mean those are the main two who worked on this thing! Decena, I’m as concerned about the success of this procedure more than anyone, but I’d rather not extend my waiting period any longer than necessary. I mean I don’t think I will and I’d only admit this to you, but I don’t want to lose my nerve.” +“You won’t lose your nerve my love, but don’t you see this is why another inspection should be done? I mean I guess if you don’t think it’s necessary then I’ll of course respect your wishes and we can spend the next three days not worrying about this until the time comes.” + +On one hand you suppose Decena’s just looking out for you as usual, but on the other you really don’t want to risk losing your nerve on this situation. The longer you think about it, and how it could all go wrong, or even how it can all go right, is enough to possibly change your mind on the whole situation. Then there’s the fact that Zana and Elam were the main ones involved on building the machine, they’d know it the best and if you got someone else to look at it, who is to say they won’t screw something up? +> Leave it alone +Decena’s heart is in the right place, but you’d rather not waste anymore time. You can’t imagine that if Zana was up to something sinister that you wouldn’t have caught it by now, let alone that she wouldn’t have acted by now. There are countless times she probably could’ve made an attempt on your life since she’s been here. + +However you do agree to Decena’s insistence that she at least not be involved in the final process. If it’ll make her a little less worried about the situation then you don’t see the harm. + +While Elam tells you up and down that he can’t perform the procedure without Zana’s assistance, Zana is actually fine with not being there and tells you that she understands that the Empress is just concerned for her husband’s well being. Zana also says that despite Elam’s insistence, she isn’t excessively needed for the procedure. She says that for the final procedure; her main job was going to be reading gauges, monitoring dials and such. She says that the other safety supervisor Gregory can take over for her since he should be familiar with everything as well. + +With everything settled, you spend your remaining two days enjoying your time with Decena who seems a little more at ease with the upcoming procedure due to your compromise about Zana. The time you spend with Decena, puts you in a more relaxed mood as well and you’re definitely feeling more positive about it. You almost don’t even know why you were concerned to begin with. + +Eventually the day comes and Elam has everything ready (With Gregory standing by to monitor the machine and you return with Decena to complete the task you originally set out to do. + +You’re strapped to a table. Elam still says he’d feel more comfortable with Zana helping him, but reassures you that everything will go smoothly. + +As you are prepared, you and Decena exchange one kiss for what will be the last time. + +“Know that whatever happens, I’ll always love you.” She says. +“And I will always love you.” You respond. + +Elam injects you with a powerful reagent that knocks you out and the process begins. + +The blackness takes you experience absolute nothingness… + +And that is the last thing you ever experience for you never wake up from the procedure, which was successful at least for a moment. + +When your brain was transferred everything was going well at first and steps were being taken to gradually wake you back up, but unfortunately it was during this process that the machine began to fail, break down and eventually explode. + +The initial explosion killed Gregory who was already freaking out when the machine started acting outside the safety parameters. It also killed most of the supporting staff; including Elam who was desperately attempting to fix what he thought was wrong. + +Decena survived the initial explosion, but only at a great cost. She ended up losing a part of her arm, a foot and most of her body and face heavily injured. She managed to hang on long enough to declare that Warrick and Brenda were officially in charge of the Empire when Kivan and others found her dying. + +With her last breath to Kivan she told him: + +“Have that…(cough wheeze) bitch Zana executed…I know…(wheeze) she did this…” + +Warrick and Brenda’s first course of action was to indeed track down Zana, who by this time had long escaped. Klemto and all the other gnomes insisted they knew nothing of this plan, but someone had to pay and unfortunately it was them. + +The gnomes of New Dessel didn’t go without a fight however and it took months before the mountain city was finally taken and even then groups of gnomes had managed to escape or even lock themselves in secret passages within the mountain to conduct guerilla attacks. Eventually Warrick had the airship fleet continually blast the mountain until it collapsed on itself making it useless to all and killing anyone still hiding inside. + +As for Zana, she never was caught, but that was the least of the Empire’s problems. + +Her success of killing you (and Decena) along with New Dessel’s extended siege inspired another rebellion. Warrick and Brenda might’ve been up to the task had they been a little younger, but when Warrick died of natural causes suddenly a few years later, it was a great blow to both the Empire and Brenda who took the death of a second husband hard. She eventually joined him a year later via suicide. + +From there the downward spiral of the Empire was inevitable and in time records of the old regime were erased from history.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Probably one of the crazier things you’ve done and its entirely possible you’re either trying to prove something to yourself or you just want this battle to be over with win or lose because you’re getting very tired. Probably a little bit of both. + +“Okay, you fucking overgrown flying lizard, it’s either going to be me or you today.” You say and expend more energy to reinforce your barrier. + +For a brief moment you see the dragon’s face get closer and closer and then… + +There’s a great smashing force that causes you to fly off the battlements. + +You don’t actually fall straight to the ground, but instead you actually sail backwards in the air for a moment and into one of the many decimated tree trunks of the nearby jungle. You feel a cracking sound as your back and head slams hard into the solid wood of the tree and then you begin to fall straight down. Even if you weren’t completely knocked senseless by this terrific force you don’t have anything that could slow your decent. The best you can do is shield your face with your forearms as you crash to the ground. + +Another cracking sound is heard when you hit the ground and you’re in more physical pain than you’ve been in awhile. You’re not dead, but when you try to move, you find that you’re unable. At least not your legs, which are completely numb. You’ve broken your back and the bones in your arms are probably broken too, though you’re definitely feeling the pain from that injury. + +While you’re lying half paralyzed away from the fort, you can hear the audible sounds of battle coming from it. You aren’t sure what happened to the dragon, but apparently it didn’t manage to ram straight through you and keep going. It’s in the fort thrashing about and roaring in pain. Pieces of stone from the fort go flying in different directions; you just hope one of those stone blocks doesn’t hit you since you’re in no position to move right now. + +There’s nothing you can do save for one thing. Heal yourself with magic. You focus all the magic you got on mending your spine first and then your other wounds next. The dragon, gunfire, clanging of weapons and shouting can all be heard while you do this. + +By the time you’re finished, you can barely stand up. You don’t know if it’s due to your drained state or if the magic still needs time to take affect completely. In any case you start to limp back to the fort, which has started to become much quieter. + +When you enter, the fort is practically destroyed, several Eternals lie dead (or in pieces) and right in the center lays the dragon with severe wounds all over its body, exposed bones, torn wings and bleeding profusely. + +“Emperor! You’re alive!” one of the eternals shouts when he sees you. +“Glory to the Empire! We feared the worst when we saw you fall from the battlements. It was a great show of bravery on your part to face down the dragon in the way you did! Never before have I seen something so inspiring! It also caused the creature to crash to the ground where upon all of us took advantage of the situation. As you can see we have brought honor in your name by finishing off the beast!” another boasts. + +“Oh really? Is that why it’s still breathing?” you point out causing the eternals standing around to back off suddenly. + +The dragon is indeed still breathing, but it’s very weak. It’s dying. Your eternals go to strike, but you tell them to hold and shake your head at them not being observant enough to see that the dragon is still alive in the first place. You walk towards the dragon’s head and grab a nearby axe on the ground. + +The beast manages to look at you with one eye and does nothing. You wonder if it still actually has some strength left in it, but is just too tired and old to continue fighting. Maybe it’s ready for it all to end. To join its fellows. + +You have no idea what dragon’s think or even if they do think in such complex terms, but when you take a look at this creature you can’t help but think how old it probably is. What has it seen? Did it once have its own civilization of sorts? What was it like at its peak? What caused it to ally with the Iznac? Was the arrangement some sort of compromise to avoid possible extinction? + +Extinction that has come anyway at your hands. + +You get closer to the dragon and ready your axe. The dragon still makes no move. It just closes its one good eye. + +“Y’know… sometimes I feel like you. Old and broken down, just wanting to lie down and let the sleep take me. Perhaps, I’ll even find myself in the same position one day…(sigh) anyway, on your way dragon. Looks like it was you today.” You say and swing the axe at the dragon’s neck. + +You have to hack away several times before you manage to sever its head. A cheer goes up from the eternals who survived the battle. + +“No cheering yet. This was barely a victory given all of our casualties and the condition of this fort. We also still have no word on Flevas’ company or how my wife is doing at Fort Tangle. Now let’s get organized and find out.” You say. + +The next few days still see a lot of combat. Decena was a lot more successful at Fort Tangle, but then she didn’t have a dragon attacking it. She congratulates you on your victory though and is glad to see you’re still alive from your ordeal. + +Eventually her and Snilkez’ka’s troops push forward and attack Iznac cities. Without their dragons anymore, it’s a lot easier to go faster on the attack. + +Unfortunately Flevas’ suffered an ignoble fate. He was killed fighting off a mixture of Glip and Iznac troops in the jungles and he was unlucky to be felled by several poisonous darts that the Glip love to use. His company fought on and won, but you’ve lost a good commander. Such are the ways of war. You and those who served under him will at least remember Flevas’ deeds. He certainly proved that elves could be an asset to the Empire rather than just whine all the time. + +It is truly the beginning of the end for the Iznac civilization and it is now in sight. You predict perhaps at least one more year of heavy fighting maximum, then maybe three more years of random raiding from the hold outs and survivors. + +After that? The Iznac will either be hiding in the farthest reaches of wilderness, will have completely submitted to your rule (Unlikely) or completely exterminated. You’re betting on that last one, as it seems to be the way of things. + +In any case you’ll soon be ruler of two continents. What comes next is unknown, but you know that you’re going to have some downtime to think about it. In fact you have somewhat of an idea of what to pursue next. + +Its something Brenda and Decena mentioned the day you got married. The Eternals and their inability to reproduce. You’re thinking that will be your next goal. You nearly died in your battle with the dragon and by healing yourself in the way you did, you probably just shortened your life span anyway. It’s time to start thinking about your potential legacy and future of the Empire. + +The current eternals have proven their worth and then some, but they could still be better. The next generation that Brenda is training will undoubtedly be better still, but the fifth…that’s the group you want to break the mold with. + +There’s got to be a way. Maybe you, Elam and possibly Galen can figure it out if you put your heads together. Hell, maybe even the gnomes might have some insight on the science side of things. + +The time for simple conquest of territory is coming to an end at least perhaps for now. +> Test Subjects (Year 63) +Year 63 + +“And you’re sure this is the only way?” you ask. +“My Emperor if I thought there was another, I wouldn’t even be bothering you with this. I’m going to need these test subjects if I am going to pursue these theories.” Elam remarks. + +Elam’s request really isn’t unreasonable and it is for a good cause, its just one part of it isn’t exactly going to be nice for Brenda to hear. + +“Alright, I’ll talk to Brenda and I’ll get some of the Eternals that she’s been training. She’s probably not going to be happy about it though.” You say. +“I do not understand my Emperor, does she not see some of them die in training?” +“Surprisingly not as many as you think. It’s not like the old days back when I was an Eternal and only a few us survived the process. These kids today have several natural advantages along with accelerated healing abilities. They’re hard to kill even when they’re shooting each other in vital organs.” You say. +“I didn’t realize this new group was so resilient. That’s good to hear though. I need them to survive this process, at least until they reach the age of puberty when I can see if they can reproduce.” +“Hrm. Well in any case, Brenda’s also gotten a bit too attached to our younger Eternal generations in her years of training. Sort of sees them as her children in a way. It won’t be a problem of course because ultimately she doesn’t have a choice in the matter and she’ll see that this is best for the Empire anyway.” + +Just before you leave to break the news to Brenda, Elam asks another question. + +“Before you leave my Emperor. What about the other test subject?” +“Oh, right. The magic source you need. Well despite Galen’s whining, he’s been a valuable asset to the Empire many times. This time shall be no different. So if you need him incapacitated, I’ll see to that business as well.” +“I thank you my Emperor.” +“Don’t thank me, just get me positive results.” You remark before leaving.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 60 + +Eighteen years ago the Children of Tor launched an all out assault on you and while it was a fierce battle, it was the beginning of the end for them as an effective fighting force. + +You hope that the Iznac are going to suffer a similar situation here today, because if not, it’s going to be the beginning of the end for the Empire. Only one civilization is going to come out of this alive from this conflict. + +You’re currently holding the line at Fort Canopy, but it isn’t the only major battle going on right now. You know only a few miles away Decena is undoubtedly doing his best to defend Fort Tangle and General Flevas is taking the fight to the Iznac in the jungles. + +High in the air through the rain and in the near distance you see a multi-colored dragon unleash a gout of flame from its mouth, which engulfs the Tornado. Already heavily damaged the flying fortress can’t take anymore and begins to explode. Minor ones at first, then one large one. Flaming pieces of the machine fall from the sky. + +The Storm II fires another volley of cannon fire at the dragon wounding the great beast, but it isn’t enough to kill it. The dragon bellows and turns its great body around to focus its attack on the Storm II. It isn’t going to die easy like its two siblings did over the past few years. It’s going to fight with everything it has. + +You look over the battlements and see several Iznacs climbing the walls of the fort like an army of ants. They aren’t even using ladders, they’re just scaling the fort with their bare hands. It’s actually rather impressive, until you unleash a chain of lightning to zap all of them. The shock is enough to at least cause most of them to fall off if not outright kill them immediately. + +“Slaughter the four armed spider eyed bastards! Make them realize that their domination of this continent has passed! This is the time of the Empire!” you shout to the Eternals defending the fort. + +Your people are doing their best though they can’t stop every Iznac from scaling the fort. Soon the gunfire is replaced by sounds of close combat weaponry. No matter how far the advances in technology, it always eventually comes down to looking your opponent in the eye and feeling their blood splatter as you end their life. + +While you’re busy hacking off the limbs of an Iznac warrior, another loud explosion in the distance is heard followed by a bright flash in the sky. It’s not lightning from the storm, but rather the demise of your Storm. The Storm II joins the Tornado in crashing to the ground after losing its skirmish with the dragon. Hopefully the rain is making the jungle wet enough or else the flames from the wreckage of these downed airships are going to cause an inferno throughout the jungle. + +Several small frog like beings eventually make their way in by scaling the walls with their masters. They’re generally just referred to as “frogs” but their formal name is the Glip. The Glip almost remind you of the kobolds. Despite being under the harsh dominion of the Iznac for who knows how long, none of the villages ever joined the Empire when the war broke out. Didn’t matter that the Iznac used to (and probably still do) sacrifice and eat the Glip, they ultimately still remained loyal to them. + +While they’ve certainly had their moments, mostly due to ambushes with blowguns and poisonous darts and their camouflage abilities. The Glip are not close combat warriors by any means. It isn’t surprising that you’ve not had to fight many of them. Even the Iznac know their skills are better suited elsewhere. The fact that you’ve started to face a lot of them does give you an indication of how desperate the Iznac have become. + +A group of orcs smash through the barricades of the fort. You sometimes shake your head at the stupidity of that situation. You have no idea how the Iznac managed to come to accept the rebellious orcs as allies, but you guarantee it wasn’t for any reasons other than convenience. Did the greenskins actually believe that Iznac saw them as anything than handy fodder for this conflict? If they broke away from the Empire because they didn’t like being used in such a way, then they completely missed the point. + +Then again being orcs they probably didn’t think that far ahead or perhaps they just wanted to fight the Empire and didn’t care about the reasons. In any case, no matter who wins this conflict, the orcs lose. The Iznac have a habit of ritually sacrificing their “neighbors and allies” to their gods. + +It doesn’t matter in the scheme of things because even with overwhelming odds, your Eternals are still holding their own against all attackers. The only thing that concerns you slightly is… + +You hear a roaring sound getting closer to your position and the sounds of great wings flapping. + +It would appear your concerns will be arriving soon. You just hope that the Storm II and the Tornado did enough damage to it before they both went down. You don’t have the advantage of Decena helping you take it down like you did with the last two dragons. + +You shout a general command for the still working cannons to be pointed towards the dragon and to prepare to fire when the beast is in range. In the meantime you try to keep that side of the fort relatively free of invading forces. + +The dragon gets closer and you give the order to fire and unleash your own magic bolts at the creature. It’s definitely wounded from its ordeal with the two airships, but given your experience with the other two dragons, you know it’s far from being out the fight. + +In fact it’s so determined that it doesn’t distinguish friend from foe when it blasts its flame breath on the fort. You manage to protect most of your people with a magic barrier, but for those outside its protection, most are set on fire if not incinerated immediately. On the positive side, it reduces your enemies, on the negative it ignites the gunpowder barrels for the cannons causing a massive explosion and completely destroying one side of the fort. + +While the barrier still protects you and everyone within initially, its still a lot of strain on your energy and you begin to feel the fatigue setting in. + +“No! Damnit! Fight through it!” you mutter to yourself hating your weakness. + +When the dragon passes you temporarily put down the barrier to take a small breather seeing as you aren’t immediately being attacked by Iznac ground forces anymore (Which have mostly been killed or broke and run by this point) + +Several soldiers point up and announce that the dragon is slowly turning around for a second pass. + +“Everyone spread out and find your own cover! Shoot the overgrown lizard when in range!” you shout and make your way back up to the battlements (Those that are still intact that is). + +You stand on top of the battlements and see the dragon coming straight at you. Almost as if it was personal and who knows maybe it is. This creature may very well want you dead for killing its only two companions. Or perhaps it’s just intelligent enough to recognize you as a genuine threat. + +You summon up all your energy and unleash a stream of lightning at the dragon just as it’s beginning to open its mouth to breath fire. It doesn’t stop. It doesn’t even slow down despite the fact that you’ve undoubtedly just shocked the hell of its brain. + +A gout of flame comes directly at you. + +“Shit!” you shout and put up your own personal barrier to block the flames. Which succeeds, but it does nothing to stop the dragon’s approach. It’s fully intent on ramming you at this point. + +You no idea what would happen if you just stood there with your barrier up. It’s possible the dragon would severely smash its own face in from the force, maybe even breaking its neck, however its also possible that it would hit with enough force that it could actually move you. In this case, right off the battlements on to the ground several feet behind you. + +Your Eternals unleash gunfire as the dragon gets closer and you’re left to wonder if this high-risk plan could potentially end this dragon threat once and for all. +> Get out of the way +Even behind a barrier there is no way you’re going to withstand the full force of a dragon flying directly at you, you need to get the hell out of the way. + +As the dragon approaches you run to one of the battlement towers, unfortunately in your haste, you temporarily drop your barrier and that’s all the time the dragon needs to sense your vulnerability, even worse your expended fatigue doesn’t allow you to react quick enough to get to the shelter you need. + +The dragon unleashes another great blast of fire, which completely envelops the top of the battlements and you along with it. The fire causes your flesh to burn, bubble and literally melt off your bones. You’re already dead by the time the dragon’s open maw swallows you whole as it continue to glide in your direction.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 56 + +You enter Brenda’s office where upon the pair of your smile at each other. + +“So, how’s the new bride?” you ask. +“Wonderful, of course. I’m happier than I’ve been in a long time. Thank you for performing the wedding personally.” Brenda remarks. +“No problem. Glad to do it, but I said it before and I’ll say it again. Never did I EVER believe that you’d remarry. Let alone to Warrick of all people! I remember when you hated his guts!” +“Ha ha, yeah…that seems so long ago now. I was too full of misplaced anger and hate. Glad I moved past it and reconnected with Warrick again.” +“Sure, but I just never knew how well you two were reconnecting. When you both told me, I was completely taken by surprise.” You chuckle. +“Well of course you were unaware. You were too busy fighting demons, monsters and sorcerer kings. Yeah, I know it still seems strange, but Warrick and I have a lot more in common than not, you know? I mean we grew up together, we trained together, and we served together. We’re both Eternals. We’re just always going to have that special connection. I mean I will always love Roldan, but why spend the remainder of my life alone if it feels right with another? We both came to that conclusion.” +“Hey, you don’t need to explain to me. I understand and I’m happy for the pair of you. Anyway I just came here to let you know that the new Eternals have been released from their tanks.” +“So did they meet with your standards?” Brenda asks. +“Yes, most of them seem to be very much like the third generation though perhaps with signs of displaying higher intelligence overall. I’d definitely say they’re ready for your training.” You reply. +“So you do still want me to train them?” +“Sure, you did well enough with the third generation didn’t you? I’m just wondering where the hell we’re going to send them when they’re all grown up. It’s likely that Nyttrus will be completely under our control by that time.” +“Maybe we’ll discover a new continent?” +“Maybe, I’m certain they’re out there, though I’ve cut down on spending for exploration for awhile. I’m trying to focus on rebuilding the destruction that was caused to the Nakol and getting Nyttrus under our control as well +“How is it going over there anyway?” +“Better than I expected, worse than I hoped. We’ve got more than a few strongholds there now, but the Iznac are far from being beaten, unfortunately most of the humans there are sick or dead due to disease and Iznac magic. Flog’s also dead and the orcs have become slightly less disciplined as of late without his calmer leadership. There have been a few reports of deserters running off into the jungles and forming their own communities. (Sigh) Going to have to do something about them of course.” +“What about the kobolds?” +“Heh, Dedicated as always. The original leader I sent, Snilkez’ka is still alive and kickin’. She and the rest of them are the main ones holding down the forts. Never thought I’d be so glad of their high birth rates. The third generation Eternals are getting shipped over there soon, so hopefully things will get better.” +“Will you be going over there?” +“I dunno. I might, if only to keep myself busy. There are no more major challenges here on Evigrus anymore and I’d rather not send Decena there. Wasn’t a pleasant experience for her and its not necessary for her to go through that again.” + +Brenda nods and you suddenly go into a brief speech about Decena and how proud you are of her and engage in general praising of Decena’s accomplishments. + +“You know…and I’ve never addressed this because I didn’t think it was my place to do so, but I still don’t understand why the two of you split up…I mean granted the age difference might normally cause difficulties in being able to relate to one another, but considering that you’re both warriors, you both have an unwavering dedication to preserving the Empire and more importantly you are both Eternals, you have a lot more in common than most people. I mean she is your protégée is she not? It only seems natural that the pair of you would be an item.” + +Brenda’s bluntness takes you a bit off guard. She normally isn’t so confrontational. + +“It’s complicated.” You answer. +“No, it really isn’t. Look I don’t know the whole story, but I DO know at one time you and Decena were together even if you didn’t make it public knowledge. I also know that you DO care for her and its not just in an average friendly way or a master-subordinate way. You love her and for some reason you’re denying yourself of it.” +“I’m not denying myself of anything.” +“Well what then? I know it wasn’t Decena’s idea, that girl still worships the ground you walk on. Probably more than anyone in the entire Empire.” +“Look Brenda, I understand you’re still on a positivity trip due to your own newfound marital bliss, but my situation is different. It will ALWAYS be different all right? +“It’s not that much different…” + +At this point you slam your hands down on Brenda’s desk and get in her face, knocking over a few things on her desk. + +“IT IS DIFFERENT. You can’t understand and be glad that you don’t.” you remark. Brenda is silent at your aggressive stance. You stare at her for a few seconds and then back away. + +“Now then, the new eternals will be transported here in a few days, I suggest you prepare yourself.” You say and turn to leave. + +Brenda though is in rare form and can’t help but continue. + +“Emperor?” she says. +“What?” you answer. +“You didn’t do to Decena, what that svelk bitch did to you and I don’t think Alison would want you spending the rest of your life mourning her.” + +You stand in the doorway for a moment with your back to Brenda. + +“I know I didn’t do what Semra did. I was hideously more successful…and as for Alison…she doesn’t want anything. She’s dead.” You reply and leave the office. + +Well you’re in a shitty mood now. + +You spend the rest of the day doing a lot of introspection, weighing pros and cons, taking into consideration every side and all your personal feelings on the matter. Every once in awhile you speak to Alison’s portrait as if she’s going to answer. All of which ends up pissing you off even more because you find it to be a pointless endeavor when you should be focusing on more important matters. + +You’ve got a damn Empire to run and here you are struggling on what to do about a girl (Or actually a full grown woman now, that has a bit of an arrested development) that likes you. What the hell are you an idiotic hormonal teenager? You thought you settled this a long time ago. + +You begin to mentally blame everything and everyone. You blame Brenda and Warrick for their new happy marriage. You especially blame Brenda for bringing this up to you. You blame Decena for becoming so attached to you. You blame Semra for…well everything. You blame Alison for dying on you. You blame Cyrus for killing her. You blame Casimir for setting up the assassination. You even blame Marik for having a hand in creating Decena and then not successfully killing her. + +Ultimately though you’ve got nobody to blame, but yourself and you know it and you need to just make a final decision on what to do about Decena. +> Forget about her +You’re not going down that route again, you broke it off for a reason and while there have been relapses of that reason; you’re not just going to give up completely on it. + +In fact the best way to put all this behind you is to involve yourself in the Nyttrus campaign. You figure immersing yourself in what you excel at is a good way to get your mind off this. Namely killing lots of things. + +You prepare for your journey to Nyttrus and leave orders to Decena that she has full authority to act in your stead while you’re in Nytrrus. + +“I don’t anticipate anything going severely wrong while I’m gone, but you never know of course. In any event, I’m sure everyone will accept your authority and if you have any problems Warrick and Kivan are probably your best people to ask advice if you need it. I don’t expect you’ll need to though.” You say. +“I thank you my Emperor and as always I am honored that you would place this much faith in my ability to oversee an entire continent.” +“You are the best suited and this is what you were ultimately trained for in case the worst should happen.” +“That won’t happen.” Decena says. +“Well, let’s hope that is indeed the case.” You reply. + +Leaving Decena in charge you finish preparing for your trip to Nyttrus and soon leave with several hundred third generation Eternals. + +When you eventually do arrive in Nyttrus the place does indeed remind you a bit of Delerg though even hotter. The kobold leader Snilkez’ka is the first one to greet you and exclaim that now that you’re here, the war will go much quicker and victory should come swiftly. + +The first few weeks are indeed very successful ones, and it does appear that victory will come quickly if the Iznac are falling as quickly as they do, but as always not everything is so clear cut… + +The Iznac realizing that they are facing a power that they’ve never encountered before resort to unleashing a powerful “secret weapon” in the form of three very large flying lizards. And these aren’t wyverns either. They are creatures that Casimir once told you were rare even back in his day. They’re dragons and the first thing they do is completely obliterate one of your forts. + +To make matters even more complicated the orcs that abandoned their duty have somehow come to an agreement with the Iznac and are now allied with them. The Iznac have also rallied the other major race inhabiting the island, the Glip against you, though some of their villages were already hostile anyway. + +You fall back a bit on the advance and regroup realizing that the conquest of this continent is going to take a lot longer than anticipated. + +Year 60 + +“We’ll hold the line at Fort Canopy and Fort Tangle, then after they’ve expended all their energy on this massive assault of theirs, we can make our own advance and wipe them out for good.” You say and then promptly stagger a bit away from the table in pain. + +General Flevas and Captain Snilkez’ka move towards you and ask if you need help, but you of course decline. Though the truth is, you could use some help, just not in the way they are offering. + +Ever since the dragons reared their ugly heads this campaign has been one struggle after another and taken a great toll on your body. While you’ve managed to kill two of the giant lizards already, it’s almost been at the cost of your own life. Your last battle with one of the creatures practically cost you half of the left side of your face given that you’re missing an eye and an ear now. You’re even missing part of your non-dominant hand. While healing magic is powerful, even you can’t regenerate completely lost limbs or other organs and you’ve been pushing it to the limit as it is. You might be holding off death in the in the short term, but you’ve probably been shortening your life span just by using it as much as you have. + +You’ve been in contact with Decena who has been giving updates via letters on what’s been going on in Evigrus since your absence and the general reports are always fairly boring. No major problems or anything, in fact Decena on several occasions has requested that she come help you on the Nyttrus campaign and while she would’ve been of great help you still want to keep yourself separate from her. Not really because of any possible feelings between the pair of you anymore, but more because you want to keep her safe. + +Quite honestly, you don’t think you’re going to survive this campaign and even if you do win, how many years do you really have left anymore? Or years WORTH living? + +Decena is your successor. While you sometimes briefly thought that you might find a way to live forever, deep down you always knew that it was always going to be Decena to take your place when you died. It’s probably why you’ve wanted to be away from her. She’ll be able to take your death with less pain when it does inevitably occur. She also needs to be alive and while you have no doubt in her abilities, there is no point in playing with her life. Perhaps your own, but not hers. + +You dismiss Flevas and Snikez’ka and tell them you’ll be fine defending Fort Canopy by yourself and that they should focus on Fort Tangle’s defenses and with any luck the airships will take out the dragon. + +Days pass and you and your troops prepare for the inevitable assault, which comes in excessive force just as predicted. Perhaps even a little more. + +You look over the battlements and see several Iznacs climbing the walls of the fort like an army of ants. They aren’t even using ladders, they’re just scaling the fort with their bare hands. It’s actually rather impressive, until you unleash a chain of lightning to zap all of them. The shock is enough to at least cause most of them to fall off if not outright kill them immediately. + +Your people are doing their best though they can’t stop every Iznac from scaling the fort. Soon the gunfire is replaced by sounds of close combat weaponry. No matter how far the advances in technology, it always eventually comes down to looking your opponent in the eye and feeling their blood splatter as you end their life. + +While you’re busy hacking off the limbs of an Iznac warrior, another loud explosion in the distance is heard followed by a bright flash in the sky. It’s the destruction of your last airship from the dragon. Flaming wreckage crashes down in the distance. Won’t be long before the dragon turns its attention towards one of the forts. + +Iznac, glip and orcs all attack the fort and while it’s a brutal affair, your Eternals are holding their own in the face of overwhelming odds. + +You then hear a roaring sound getting closer and the sounds of great wings approaching. + +You shout a general command for the still working cannons to be pointed towards the dragon and to prepare to fire when the beast is in range. In the meantime you try to keep that side of the fort relatively free of invading forces. + +The dragon gets closer and you give the order to fire and unleash your own magic bolts at the creature. It’s definitely wounded from its ordeal with the airships, but given your experience with the other two dragons, you know it’s far from being out the fight. + +In fact it’s so determined that it doesn’t distinguish friend from foe when it blasts its flame breath on the fort. You manage to protect most of your people with a magic barrier, but for those outside its protection, most are set on fire if not incinerated immediately. On the positive side, it reduces your enemies, on the negative it ignites the gunpowder barrels for the cannons causing a massive explosion and completely destroying one side of the fort. + +While the barrier still protects you and everyone within initially, it’s still a lot of strain on your energy and you begin to feel the fatigue setting in. and you can’t hold out any longer… + +Your strength falters and the barrier goes down and the flames envelop you and several of your troops. + +In the last moments of your flesh melting off your bones you only regret that this fort will fall.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Upon entering the throne room, Mortimer paces near his throne, looking up when you arrive. He certainly doesn’t look like the fop you remember, his clothes are now partly torn and dirty. He doesn’t look like he’s bathed in days making his hair to stand up in a way that would almost be laughable if he wasn’t currently possessed by a demon. His eyes give off an unearthly red glow. + +The throne room itself is in shambles and pieces of dead bodies, entrails and blood are practically everywhere. A large broken crystal lies nearby, you can only guess that’s Zelvix’s former prison. + +Semra says nothing. She just looks at you nodding, and reaches out for your hand. You give it to her and she grabs it. She then begins chanting. You take the opportunity to cast your mind shield spell on Decena who stands nearby watching every direction. + +“So, THIS is what you’ve brought to beat me with Semra? I would’ve expected better from the likes of you. I don’t know why you’re even chanting that nonsense, it isn’t going to work on me you know.” Zelvix says. (It certainly isn’t Mortimer anymore just on how deep the voice is alone) + +While the three of you stay silent, Zelvix continues to talk. + +“I have no idea why you continue to blame me for your father’s death. Even I can’t control my underlings all the time. Your people made a deal with me and I collected, what’s so wrong about that?” + +Semra continues to chant. + +“You believe this woman? She holds a grudge longer than some hell lords do and at least they do for something reasonable like a stolen soul or something. She’s just whining. Bah, I’m done with her anyway, I offered another deal when she first arrived here for old time’s sake, but she refused.” + +Zelvix’s banter is still met by silence. + +“Anyway, how about you two? Oh no. No, I don’t think you’ll do. You’re too much in love with this one. While I think under different circumstances twisting your mind would probably be child’s play, I believe your master’s presence makes it a bit too much of an effort to even try. You want his approval so much that you’d probably strip naked, get down on all fours and open your ass, pussy and mouth at the same time to an entire company of orcs if you thought it would please him. Blind loyalty is such a beautiful thing at times. Shit, I should be so lucky to instill such devotion. Oh well, guess that’s why there’s torture.” Zelvix says to Decena. + +Everyone continues to remain silent, but Zelvix now turns his attention to you. You didn’t feel it before, but you start to feel an oppressive presence within your mind. + +“Now you I can work with. Can’t work with bitches anyway, too fucking emotional am I right? I’m sure you know what I’m talking about considering the company you’re keeping. You think a svelk female is bad? Heh, try a demon girl. Your dark elves don’t have shit on them. Lots of fun at parties though!” + +You redouble your efforts to block out Zelvix’s words… + +“I have to say, you’re quite skilled for a mortal. I’ll even admit, I like your style, showing no mercy to your enemies, ruling your territory with an iron fist, I can appreciate a mortal that rises above his slug like station. And you were quite low weren’t you? You were practically an abortion waiting to happen then through a minor mistake you got kicked upstairs. Good thing bureaucracy sucks doesn’t it? It’s okay though, you made the most of it and that’s what really counts. I mean here you are talking to me, one of the greatest demon lords in the infernal realms…” + +At this point you’d almost make a deal with him just so he’d shut the fuck up. He continues to pace, but you notice he holds his head for a brief moment. + +“Hrmm, starting to feel something…no it’s gone now. Nice try Semra, but you’re not getting anywhere. Now who was I talking to? Oh yes, the Eternal.” + +You suddenly feel an even greater oppressive feeling on your mind. Between trying to support Semra, protecting Decena and fighting off Zelvix, you’re starting to feel the burden. + +“Not easy is it? Protecting everyone? (Sigh) I don’t even know why you’re helping Semra anyway. You know she’d backstab you if it ultimately served her purpose. You’re not a stupid man, you have to know that she’s just using you right now and it’s not even for petty revenge. Well some of it is I suppose, but there’s something greater here at stake and she’s trying to achieve it. Let me tell you…” + +Zelvix’s deep voice fills your mind despite your best efforts to block it out. + +“She’s trying to revive the svelk Empire. Y’see she actually thinks by somehow killing me that the so called curse I put on the svelk will disappear. It’s complete shit of course. The reason for the svelk downfall is their own doing and none of my own. I didn’t cause their civilization to suddenly descend into civil war and rebellion, that had been coming for centuries long before I arrived. All I did was provide a service. A world saving one in fact. Why in certain circles one might even consider me a hero!” + +You feel a greater drain on your energy as Zelvix continues. + +“I bet she even told you that I’m planning on unleashing an army of demons on this world didn’t she? Pfft. Please as if I need to worry about such things, I have my own kingdom in the infernal realm with millions of subjects and even more souls to torment! If its one thing I’ve learned as a demon lord, it’s that you should only conquer what you can actually hold. I had a brother once who learned that lesson the hard way. Got his head chopped off by a mortal for his troubles. Hahahahaha! My brother was a fucking idiot!” + +Zelvix laughs at his last statement, which is then followed by a roar of pain. Mortimer’s body falls to the ground and he begins twitching and convulsing. + +“FUCKING BITCH! I’LL RIP YOUR SOUL APART! RAAAAARGH!” Zelvix shouts while Semra keeps chanting. If anything it’s given you a bit of temporary relief, but only for a little while. + +“Well, it seems our little dark skinned whore has been doing her research. I may have underestimated her. The flaw of arrogance comes with being a demon lord I suppose…(Sigh) Very well then, as much as I’ve enjoyed chatting with you, I can see I’ll have to cut to the chase….” + +You try to think of pleasant thoughts to block out Zelvix, such as ones with your time with Alison, but Zelvix won’t be ignored. + +“Look, here’s the deal and it’s not even going to cost you your soul because I know you’re too smart for that. What it is going to cost is a little bloodshed and that shouldn’t be a problem for the likes of you, especially considering you never liked ol’ Morty anyway. Just kill Morty, I’ll take care of Semra and then I’ll be heading back to the infernal plane because honestly I’ve had enough of this world.” + +You give no response, but you can feel your willpower getting to the point where you almost want to give in… + +“Hey wait a minute. Maybe YOU want to kill Semra? She’s in the middle of her spell right now and you’re so close, there’s never been a more perfect time! You’d catch her completely off guard. You could easily take that dagger that she once stabbed you with and at last do what you’ve always wanted to do with it. Remember just like the time when you two were exterminating gnomes? Don’t you wish you could’ve taken that opportunity instead of following your orders? Well you have no one giving you orders right now. What is stopping you? You know you want to and all I want is to be free from this world. Kill Semra and I’ll happily open up a gate and return home.” + +Zelvix deep melodic tone begins to make your mind succumb to his persuasion attempts. Never before have you experienced such a powerful force of raw will. Even in a few other instances where you faced a psychic assault it’s never been quite like this. Granted it’s in his favor that what he’s proposing isn’t anything you’d object to doing either. The ONLY thing that’s giving you pause is the fact that it’s a demon lord telling you to do this. + +“Ah…I see you don’t trust me…smart. Tell you what, I’ll sweeten the deal. You seek to conquer and bring order to this miserable world do you not? You have the skill and ability, what you lack is time. So you seek immortality do you not? An immortality that even eluded your old master, and wouldn’t you like to succeed where he failed? Your answer lies where you’ve always known it to be. The Isle of Mortos. I know you’ve made a halfhearted attempt at trying to locate it again. Would you like to know where it is exactly located? I can tell you right now if you just kill that…ARRGH!” + +Zelvix once again feel the effects of Semra’s ritual. At this point Morty’s body is desperately crawling over to Semra in an attempt to reach her. Also just as you suspected Zelvix uses some sort of magic to bring the bodies from the room behind you back to life, except these aren’t singular walking corpses. The pile of bodies have melded into each other creating a giant mass of flesh slowly rolling towards all of you howling and moaning while arms, legs and heads twitch about from it. It might be too big to get through the doorway, but you imagine that its sheer weight and girth will just break through the sides of the walls. + +You’re still staggering from your recent mind assault, but now that you’re no longer being mentally attacked, you take a quick assessment of the situation. + +Decena prepares to hold off the abomination by herself, Semra is still in her semi-trance and Zelvix continues to drag himself over to Semra. +> Help Semra +Decena’s a good warrior, you’re sure she’ll be able to handle the abomination trying squeeze through the doorway. Plus the quicker Zelvix gets banished, the quicker this all stops. Now that you’ve been given a temporary relief from the mental attacks, you run over to Morty’s body and drag it away from Semra. You also hold him down and begin repeatedly punching him in the face. + +Morty’s possessed body struggles against you and while it’s certainly stronger than it should be, it can’t break free of your grip and won’t be reaching Semra anytime soon. + +Zelvix’s power is fading, but he’s not out of it yet and in between trying to break free he establishes contact with you mentally again. + +“Ragh! Argh! Fool! You would deny your destiny of immortality? I told you I would tell you how to find the Isle of Mortos! Is that not what you want? You think…ARRRGH!” Zelvix’s bargaining is interrupted by the agony of his impending banishment. + +Soon Zelvix will be gone and this will all be over, yet isn’t there a way to get what you want as well. + +You think so and respond back to Zelvix. + +“Zelvix, you’ve got little time left, so I’m proposing a deal to YOU. Tell me the location of the island now and I’ll kill the svelk bitch myself. You don’t have any options here.” + +You hear a deep chortle inside your head. + +“Mortal, we ALL have choices. I know you and I know this game. You phrased your proposal in such a way that you didn’t specify WHEN you were going to kill Semra…actually you didn’t even say Semra. You just said svelk bitch. That could be any of them. No deal, I’m not telling you shit. A good attempt, but I’d rather die than have my last moments be one of being outwitted by a pathetic mortal!” Zelvix says +“Considering you’re still stuck in Morty’s body and going to be BANISHED in it, I’d say that’s already happened.” + +Zelvix doesn’t respond, instead you just hear a great bellowing inside your head, this is also followed by a scream nearby, you turn your head and see half of Decena underneath the mass of murderous flesh that has finally managed to break through some of the wall in an effort to reach you all. Decena still struggles to fight, but she’s overwhelmed by the writhing mass of limbs striking her and the horrible rows of sharp teeth biting into her flesh. + +“NO!” you shout and run over to help her by hacking away at the disgusting flesh blob. It has little effect other depriving it of a few less flailing limbs. You only succeed in chopping off a few chunks even when you attempt to freeze it in place (Which only slows it down rather than properly freezing it completely) You try to pull Decena away, but she’s stuck and her lower half being devoured, shredded and crushed all at the same time. The strength in her is already leaving. + +“I’m sorry my…Emper…” She manages to utter during the chaos of this situation. +“Don’t talk! You’ll get out of this, I’ll think of something! I’ll…FUCK!” you shout in frustration and still hacking away at the mass. + +The whole time you’ve been distracted, you haven’t paid any attention to the main conflict which is that of Zelvix who fortunately was still too weak to reach Semra. + +A final unearthly wail from Zelvix and it’s a sign that the end of this conflict is near. + +“SSSSSSSSS NO! IT CANNOT END LIKE THIS! I WILL NOT BE DEFEATED BY MORTAL SHIT! I CURSE YOU ALL! NONE OF YOU SHALL AAAARRRRGH!” + +Morimer’s body twitches and convulses one last time and you manage to turn your head just in time from your own battle to see a red spirit like mist rise from his body. An angry demonic face can be seen briefly followed by the red mist completely dissipating. In front of you, the mass of flesh you’ve been fighting goes completely lifeless. Mortimer’s body is also lifeless. Whatever spark that was keeping him alive was only due to Zelvix’s magic and he’s truly gone now. + +And then the blob of flesh you were fighting becomes lifeless as well and you are able to pull Decena away with some effort. It’s too bad though, she’s missing parts of her legs and even some of her innards, you can’t even imagine how much blood she’s lost. + +“Oh shit, I’m sorry. I should’ve been there for you, I’ll make this better, I’ll make this better…” you start to say and begin to cast your healing magic, though surprisingly Decena manages to interrupt you by weakly grabbing at your hand. +“No…don’t…let me die a warrior’s death. Don’t shorten your life span for me…the Empire needs you…” + +You hold Decena closer to you, it won’t be long now. + +“Emperor…I love you…” she says looking up at you. +“I…love you Decena.” You respond back. + +These words causes a brief smile in Decena’s final moments. It’s all she ever wanted, your love. + +The funny thing is, it’s at this very moment that you realize that you could’ve probably had a real relationship with her. She was more than just a lovesick student that you thought you were re-enacting your experiences with Semra with. She was a worthy mate and potentially your successor. + +And now that’s all gone. + +You wipe your eyes and get up off the floor, pondering your great loss today. In fact you’ve completely forgotten about Semra, though she hasn’t forgotten about you, and she’s been watching you the entire time. + +“While I hate to disturb your moment of introspection, we need to get the hell out of here before your army starts bombarding this place now that the barrier is down. I imagine that you probably gave that order or something similar to your army correct?” + +You ignore Semra. + +“Hey are you listening to me? Look, I know you’re upset about losing your little warrior girl and I’m sure she was a lot of fun in bed, but you need to get over that now. I mean utter devotion is a beautiful thing, but really at least Alison was her own woman and not someone looking for constant approval.” Semra says as she walks over to you. + +“Well I guess that’s why you’ll always be the true woman for me, right Semra?” you answer and grab her hand. +“What?” Semra says. +“That’s what you’re always telling me isn’t it? I mean any woman I have any sort of feelings for seems to die. You on the other hand survive everything…heh…just like I survive everything…it would seem you’re right we ARE meant to be together…” + +At this point you put both of your arms around Semra’s waist. You can sense that she’s genuinely surprised by this sudden show of affection for her. You can also feel her attempting to read your mind, but she’ll see nothing there but a strong desire to take her right there on the floor. + +“Hmmm, while I don’t mind this sudden enthusiasm lover, we really should…” Semra starts to say before you shut her up with a kiss. She tastes exactly like you remember and it’s intoxicating. + +You waste no time in stripping off your bloody sweat drenched clothing, and Semra despite her concern that your army will start bombarding the city, loses that worry as well as losing herself in the moment. + +Then soon the pair of you are naked on blood stained floor and as you thrust into Semra, you try to ignore your aches and pains from your earlier battle. + +It’s almost like your first time… + +Well other than the fact that a rotting mound of dead bodies lies nearby, along with Decena’s corpse which probably hasn’t even gone completely cold yet. + +This is wrong in so many ways, but after your great loss today, you’re going to get something out of it. And that something ISN’T Semra’s magical svelk vagina even though you’ve convinced her that it is. + +Semra has to know something about the Isle of Mortos or at least how to get back there. She’s been around long enough and given her relationship with Casimir who was a former “citizen” there, the chances that she knows something is very likely. + +“Mmmm yes! Yes! Ravish me! Ravage me you fucking abomination of nature!” Semra exclaims and slaps you hard in the face. + +Semra’s having so much fun that she doesn’t seem to realize you’re getting to know her in an intimate way that you’re sure she didn’t want you to. It’s difficult trying to hide your true intentions to Semra, but you manage to do so by filling you own thoughts with a mixture of lust and hatred. You also think about how much you want to slit her throat. It’s certainly enough to be convincing since it isn’t exactly untrue. + +In her state of arousal Semra’s mind is much less guarded, as her focus is no longer one of defense, but one mostly of pleasure. While part of her is expecting you to try to kill her and she’s certainly prepared for it, that’s not your goal at least not today. It’s the perfect cover as far as you’re concerned. + +You see many things about Semra’s life, some very interesting, some rather mundane, and some even sort of surprising to you. + +For example, just before Semra pushed you away during your first mental joining, there was another she was upset about losing, though you didn’t see it the first time, namely an infant son. Apparently demons had killed and consumed part of it before Semra and her father could save it (Which then soon lead to her father’s death). You can only imagine it was their baby together. + +This loss explains a few other things you see which must take place later on in her life, such as a bored one night casual sexual encounter with some svelk warrior that also resulted in pregnancy. This must’ve been Eldolith’s father since she was born soon after. + +Her relationship with her daughter was never a good one and it’s apparent she saw her daughter as something barely better than…well “the lesser born” as most svelk would say. Perhaps Eldy was a constant reminder that she was NOT Semra father’s offspring and never would be. + +But you’re not here to delve into the tragic past of a very broken woman, you’re here to find out vital information that you know she must have. + +And you think you’ve just found it. + +You see a continent that you’ve never seen before. It isn’t Evigrus and while you’ve never been there, it’s not Nyttrus either as there is no trace of jungle. The place has large tracks of forests and several ruined cities. Inside such ruined areas you see groups of svelk fighting each other. Other groups wander the countryside in the usual nomadic manner that you’ve traditionally known them to do. + +Oddly there doesn’t seem to be any other race living on the continent, or at least no other sentient creature. (Strange beasts you’ve never seen still seem to exist though) Another thing that stands out though are these large circular structure made out of mithral. They seem to be all over the continent though it looks like most are damaged in some way. + +This has to be the svelk “home.” It is. You gain all this information from Semra’s mind which is like an open book at this point. And these circular structures are portals, or they used to be. They probably lead all over to different parts of the world and that includes… + +“DECIEVER!” Semra suddenly shouts and tries to punch you, but you hold her down her arms. She’s on to your plan now. + +“Don’t fight it Semra, just lay back and enjoy it.” You mockingly say and try to probe her mind again, but she’s already taken steps to block you out more effectively. You’ve learned all you can, but it might be enough. + +Finished with Semra mentally, you “finish up” with her physically as well before letting her go. Predictably she punches you in the face and crawls backwards from underneath you. + +“So was it good for you?” you say, holding your face. + +Your continued mocking is met with a blast of fire that you just barely block with a magic field. + +“I know where you’re going Semra. You’re going back home to Dokkrus to ironically try to do something you were criticizing me for. You’re going to try to resurrect the Svelk Empire again. Try to unite the tribes as it were. That’s good. We all should have a goal. I know what mine is.” +“You think yourself so clever, but if you try to pursue what we both know what you’re trying to pursue, be prepared to suffer considerable losses.” Semra warns. +“What could I possibly lose Semra? Tell me, because I’d truly love to know. I have no more loved ones for you to kill. The Empire? You told me I’ll lose that when I die anyway. My life? You think I fear death? You know I don’t. I only seek to MASTER it.” + +You pick up your pants and start to dress as you continue your monologue to Semra. + +“In the past you’ve mentioned about how my efforts of world domination and expanding the Empire are all in vain because I’ll eventually grow old and die anyway just like Casimir. Well congratulations Semra, you motivated me to avoid his fate because unlike him, I will succeed. I WILL become truly immortal and NOTHING is going to stop me.” +“Well, then its good we had one last tryst because I can see now you’re leaving me no choice!” Semra shouts and resumes her magical attack. + +You block the magical bolts and try to run for some sort of cover. Semra casts a poisonous cloud, you remember that one, but this time you’re able to get out of its range, though in doing so you are hit by her follow up attack, which involves throwing a dead body into you. You fall to the floor face first as the body slams into you a fairly fast speed. + +“Shit!” you groan and turn around with the body still on top of you, and that’s when you see that it’s Decena’s. Her dead eyes stare into your own and then you feel a kick to your face that probably would’ve taken out your eye had Semra been wearing her sharp toed boots rather than her current state of undress. + +“It’s been fun lover, but you need to learn the last lesson and that’s no one lives forever.” Semra says…and then the roof of the palace starts collapsing on the pair of you. It would seem the bombarding of the city has begun. + +Seizing the opportunity, you push Decena’s body off of you and try to stab Semra with your dagger. Unfortunately between your exhaustion, the crumbling ceiling and Semra’s alertness you miss, but instead of trying to attack back, she takes the survival approach instead. + +“Next time Eternal.” She says and runs out the entryway +“Next time Semra.” You mutter and pick up Decena’s body before making haste for the exit yourself. + +It’s difficult carrying Decena’s body while tired and trying to avoid being blown up by the bombarding. Doesn’t help that you start seeing airships approaching. + +“Sheesh, Flevas. Glad to see you’re not fucking around, but this isn’t helping me!” you mutter and quicken your pace. + +Fortunately, you manage to get out of Dequilet before it’s completely decimated and fortunately there is a pause in the bombarding when someone with a telescope spots you just outside the destroyed city walls. You make it back to camp in one piece. + +“Emperor! My apologies, but I thought…” Flevas starts to say, but you’re not in the mood to hear anything. +“Forget it Flevas, you were doing your job…just (sigh) here…” you say and lay Decena down. +“Have her body shipped back to the capital, she will receive a war heroes’ funeral.” +“Certainly my Emperor.” Flevas says and snaps his fingers to have some other troops move her body. + +“I’ll be in my tent. Don’t disturb me.” You say and retire to your bedroll. As you allow your body to at last embrace the rest it needs, you think about Decena’s last words to you. + +“Don’t worry Decena, your sacrifice wasn’t in vain. The Empire will always have me because it IS me and I will live forever. I promise.” You say as you close your eyes. +> Years pass… +Year 56 + +You enter Brenda’s office where upon she smiles briefly at you, though with everything you have on your mind, you don’t return the gesture instead you just nod. + +“Hello Brenda, I trust you and Warrick are still enjoying your new marital status.” You say guessing that what’s put her in better spirits as of late. +“Yes, Emperor. I’m happier than I’ve been in a long time. Thank you for performing the wedding personally.” +“Think nothing of it. Though I didn’t think you’d ever remarry, let alone Warrick. But if you two are happy then that’s good. You should hold on to that as long as possible for one never knows when it will suddenly be taken away from you.” +“Um…of course my Emperor. We certainly do cherish our time together.” Brenda responds at your rather grim comment. + +“Anyway, I came here to let you know that the new Eternals have been released from their tanks. You’ll be training them soon.” You say. +“I’ll be looking forward to it. I trust they met with your standards?” +“Yes, most of them seem to be very much like the third generation though perhaps with signs of displaying higher intelligence overall. Under your guidance, I have no doubt that they’ll be just as effective as the third gens.” You reply with a sigh. +“Is there something wrong my Emperor?” Brenda asks. + +“Yes, it’s Nyttrus. The place is becoming a pain in my side that I don’t want to be bothered with, but I find that it might become necessary to step in personally soon. We’ve got more than a few strongholds there now, but the Iznac are far from being beaten, unfortunately most of the humans there are sick or dead due to disease and Iznac magic. Flog’s also dead and the orcs have become slightly less disciplined as of late without his calmer leadership. There have been a few reports of deserters running off into the jungles and forming their own communities. Just glad Snilkez’ka is still alive and the kobolds are holding down the forts there until the third gens arrive.” +“Couldn’t you send airships to bomb Nyttrus to speed things up? +“They don’t really have the range to travel across the vast oceans yet though Elam’s working on fixing that with the gnomes. In any event if they did have that sort of range I might be inclined to have them try to find Dokkrus first since that’s my real goal.” + +Brenda tries to give you some words of encouragement, but they don’t improve your mood. Instead you just leave Brenda, once again wishing her well on her new happy marriage. + +You spend a few days wondering whether or not you should head to Nyttrus with the third gens. Ultimately you decide not to as you’re still hoping to hear something soon about Dokkrus. As soon as you get word about that, you want to be on the next ship going there. You don’t want to be in the middle of a conflict that you know you’ll be compelled to complete if you directly get involved. + +In the meantime you go back to more mundane matters such as ensuring that the rebuilding of the new Nakol province remains on schedule. You also take time to hone your magic abilities; in fact since your “intimate” mind connection with Semra, you actually feel a little more powerful or rather you gained a brief insight into spells she never taught you during training. + +A few weeks pass and still no word about Dokkrus, however you do get bothersome news about Nyttrus again. + +You’re informed of the latest problems on Nyttrus by Kivan who received a message about it in the middle of the night. The Iznac have apparently unleashed a powerful “secret weapon” in the form of three very large flying lizards. And these aren’t wyverns either. They are creatures that Casimir once told you were rare even back in his day. They’re dragons and apparently they’ve already destroyed one of your forts on the continent. + +This isn’t news you wanted to hear. Now you’re going to have no choice, but to go over there. + +You still can’t do all this alone though, you still want to wrap this war up as quick as you can and you’ll need some competent tacticians and strategists to do that. Snilkez’ka has her way of doing things you’re sure, but they probably work best with other kobolds she commands. + +The third gens are good warriors, and a select few of them are indeed leaders, but most of them are rather…well unimaginative sometimes. You don’t think that’s the fault of Brenda’s training, but perhaps just a tendency towards conformity due to their creation. In fact you can’t even think of a single one that has stood out to you during the war with Nakol. Hopefully the fourth won’t have that problem when they’re ready. + +So you make up your mind that General Flevas should accompany you. The elf is pretty much the best one you have right now and you believe his vast scouting skills should come in handy. Given that all the orcs ran off and rebelled, you also won’t have to worry about Flevas not being respected as a leader. The third gens and kobolds seem fairly neutral towards him. + +You go back and forth on whether or not to bring Galen. His magic would most certainly help against the dragons, but you’re wondering if you want to put up with his tendency to complain. True he’s much better at not doing it, but he always manages to find a way. + +Who you really wish you had is Decena. She would’ve been perfect for this mission since she already worked well with the third gens. Just another reminder of your loss. + +Maybe though you just need another Eternal. An Eternal who always likes “vacations” away from his usual duties, namely Warrick. + +He certainly commands respect amongst the Eyes and besides you he’s probably the next most feared name in the Empire. As Sightmaster he’s also skilled in less traditional forms of warfare, which will come in handy in the jungle filled continent. Of course the only concern with bringing him is that leaves the “mainland” of the Empire, relatively… well the word isn’t undefended, but without a major figure to oversee any possible problems that may crop up. You suppose Brenda and Kivan can handle things if something really gets out of hand. + +Which brings you to another problem and that’s taking Warrick into a war in the first place. Warrick’s job at one time was probably a bit more dangerous, but as you’ve established order over the continent, stomped out dissension and all of those other necessary things, it’s become even more like a “desk job.” Warrick still keeps up on his training and such, and you know if you called for him to assist he’d jump at the chance not just out of loyalty, but because he always has a bit of desire to get in the middle of things again. + +He could very well get killed and a better head of internal security, as far as you’re concerned there is none. His loss would be even greater than Decena’s you believe. Though it’s the more “moral” problem that surprisingly has you rethinking this. + +Warrick just married Brenda, the pair of them don’t see each other every day, but they’re able to do so when they can. It’s the happiest Brenda’s been since she was married to Roldan. If Warrick was to die, well you can only imagine what that might do to her. So if you lost Warrick, you might be “losing” Brenda as well. + +Of course that’s all speculation. You don’t intend on losing Warrick at all, but you have to prepare for that possibility and the repercussions of such things. +> Take Warrick with you +You need to take care of this situation on Nyttrus and the only way you’re going to do that is with people you know that are going to be vital for the task. (Which also why you decide to leave Galen here.) + +You go to see Warrick at the Eye Headquarters, he’s a little surprised at your sudden visit, but happy to see you as always. He’s even more excited when you tell him you want him to come with you to Nyttrus. + +“Of course Emperor! I have to say I’m glad for this opportunity again. The last time was when we went to New Dessel together and while I’m glad it worked out anyway, I was always a bit disappointed we never got to fight along side each other.” Warrick says. +“Well I’m fairly certain that will definitely happen in Nyttrus. Anyway, I’ll be leaving in a few days, will that be enough time to get your affairs in order and delegate various responsibilities here?” you ask. +“Should be, I’ll get started on that right now.” +“Good, then I’ll see you in three days.” + +Thinking nothing more of this, you return to get your own affairs in order, explaining to Kivan that you want regular reports on the Empire sent to you in Nyttrus. The second day comes around and it is you who gets a sudden visitor although perhaps not totally unexpected. + +“Emperor, I told her you were busy, but…argh!” Kivan says as Brenda pushes him aside and into the wall. She looks very upset, but apparently she knows better than to come in armed while in such a state of agitation. (Not that doesn’t mean she still isn’t potentially dangerous) + +“Kivan, I’d suggest you leave us alone.” You say, to which he nods wincing at his aches and closes your door. Brenda continues to stare at you. + +“Well? I know you didn’t come all this way to wish me well in Nyttrus, say what you need to say.” +“You know that my loyalty to the Empire is absolute. You also know that Warrick’s loyalty to the Empire is absolute as well. We were trained to do everything in our power to ensure its survival and success. I TRAIN all those new Eternals so that they learn that lesson as well. To know that the good of the Empire is above ALL, no matter what.” +“And I know this Brenda. Your actions everyday are proof of your dedication. Yours and Warrick’s.” + +Brenda begins nodding her head in agreement in a rapid motion while breathing hard. + +“Yeah…SO WHY THE HELL ARE WE BEING FUCKING PUNISHED?” she shouts. +“I wasn’t aware I was punishing Warrick, has he said he doesn’t like the new assignment he’ll be accompanying me on?” +“Hah oh…oh of course not! Not good old loyal Warrick! He of course feels honored by this assignment. He doesn’t even know I’m here, because if he did, he’d try and stop me from getting himself killed!” +“You seem to lack faith in your husband, I know him to be a skilled warrior.” +“Of course he’s a fucking skilled warrior! He’s also not a young man anymore! He’s not as fast as he used to be, he’s not as strong as he used to be and you want him to fight fucking dragons? And unlike you he doesn’t have the advantage of powerful magic abilities to help keep him alive!” +“Brenda if you haven’t noticed I’m not exactly young myself, why the hell do you think I want his help? Because I greatly increase my chances of survival against three flying lizards and an army of savages! And contrary to popular belief magic is just another tool for battle, it’s not some wonder solution to win wars. If it was and I actually had that power, I’d certainly be using it.” + +Brenda now starts shaking her head and sighing. + +“You don’t get it. You don’t understand.” +“Yeah, I think I do Brenda. I get it better than you think. I lost Alison the same day you lost Roldan remember? You just found happiness with Warrick, happiness that you never thought that you’d ever experience again since Roldan died. Now that happiness is in jeopardy because there is the possibility that Warrick may fall in battle. Well you know what? Death is a possibility anywhere.” +“Except by going to Nyttrus you’re increasing his chances tenfold! And you’re right you do know about loss, so why the hell would you want to put ME of all people through it again.” +“Brenda if there was another way, don’t you think I would? You believe I actually WANT to potentially cause you distress? No, I don’t. You and Warrick are pretty much the only ones now that I can identify with on any level anymore and quite frankly losing either one of you would deeply wound me as well. I don’t pretend to say it would be as strong as you feel for each other, but I would feel the sorrow.” +“(Sob) but why…must he…we just got married…we…(sob).” + +Brenda at this point can’t quite keep it together. You have no real comforting words for her. Just cold facts of duty. + +“(Sigh) He’s needed Brenda. His Emperor has called him. He has to do his duty and serve his role as we all must for the good of the Empire. It was not my intention to upset you Brenda, but you know that as unfair as this all seems Warrick has a job to do. You worry that your happiness and time with him will be cut too short like it was with Roldan, well even if that does happen, count yourself lucky that you managed to enjoy the moments you DID have with him.” + +You pause for a moment, reflecting on Decena. + +“At least you managed to realize a good thing before it was too late.” + +Brenda stops sniffling and manages to compose herself. Still upset, but resigned to fate. + +“Very well, I’ve had my say, and I accept your decision my Emperor. Apologies for my momentary lapse in judgment and falling victim to emotions.” Brenda says and starts to turn away. + +“Brenda wait.” You say before she leaves. + +Brenda turns back around and you exhale deeply. + +“I still need Warrick’s help in Nyttrus, however I believe I can get by without him for awhile. Nyttrus is a large continent and I’m going to try to fortify our current holdings and retake our recent losses. So while I’m doing that, you’ve got Warrick for another year. Make the most of it.” + +Brenda’s sad expression turns to one of a smile. + +“Thank you my Emperor.” +“Hm, well just remember you both STILL have your duties here that you need to perform. I expect Warrick to still take care of Eye business just like I expect you to continue training the fourth gens.” +“Of course. Again I thank you.” +“Okay then, inform your husband that his trip to Nyttrus is postponed for a year.” + +Brenda again thanks you and leaves. + +You finish packing what personal belongings you feel you’ll need for Nyttrus and the next day you get ready to leave for the docks and board the ship to take you to Nyttrus. + +The next day you take a long look at Alison’s portrait before your journey. + +“I’ll be back Alison… I always come back to you.” You say and leave. + +Year 57 + +Within the short time Warrick has arrived, your spirits have picked up a little. It’s been a frustrating time here especially since the dragons have so far still eluded death. Though with Warrick now here you hope to correct that problem, but more importantly Warrick has brought with him very good news. + +“So Dokkrus has been found at last?” you ask. +“Yes, my Emperor. Received word just as I was preparing to leave for here and since I was already on my way I figured I’d deliver this news to you in person.” +“Ha ha! This is great! I’ll have to send another message of how I want to proceed. I don’t want any engagement on there yet, just some spying and exploration.” You say. +“Did you want a message sent to the Eyes to handle this? My second is more than capable of carrying out these tasks. Wouldn’t have picked the person otherwise.” +“Yes, good idea. I want a ship with Eyes sent to Dokkrus, we’ll send that message to the homeland later, right now though you and I have business with killing one of these flying lizards. I believe we’ve finally managed to track one to where it makes its home in between its attacks.” You say. + +“You mean you haven’t slain all three yourself yet?” Warrick asks. +“I wish. But now that you’re here I’m confident that their continued existence will no longer be a problem, so you ready?” +“Sure am, Emperor. It’ll be just like the old days!” Warrick exclaims. + +In high spirits and a positive outlook for the future, you, Warrick and a company of Eternals set out to kill one of the dragons. +> Years pass... +Year 60 + +“Well, looks like we’ve lost the Tornado.” Warrick says as the pair of you see through in the near distance a multi-colored dragon unleash a gout of flame from its mouth, which engulfs the airship. Already heavily damaged the flying fortress can’t take anymore and begins to explode. Minor ones at first, then one large one. Flaming pieces of the machine fall from the sky. + +“It’s all right. It’s all right. The Storm II is still there and hopefully it’ll kill that damn thing or at least wound it enough for us to do so. Either way that flying lizard dies today. This war will be all but won with its death. It’s the last one and I’m glad it’s finally decided to come to us this time, because I’m sick of chasing it all over this damn continent. I want to get the invasion of Dokkrus underway properly and I can’t very well do that if I’m stuck in this damn jungle continent.” You say preparing for the large group of Iznac approaching Fort Canopy. + +“Hrm. Certainly is a lot of them. Better get on with this.” Warrick says and orders the cannons to fire upon the multitude, which puts a dent in their numbers, but doesn’t stop their advancing. + +You look over the battlements and see several Iznacs climbing the walls of the fort like an army of ants. They aren’t even using ladders, they’re just scaling the fort with their bare hands. It’s actually rather impressive, until you unleash a chain of lightning to zap all of them. The shock is enough to at least cause most of them to fall off if not outright kill them immediately. + +“Slaughter the four armed spider eyed bastards! Make them realize that their domination of this continent has passed! This is the time of the Empire!” you shout to the Eternals defending the fort. + +Your people are doing their best though they can’t stop every Iznac from scaling the fort. Soon the gunfire is replaced by sounds of close combat weaponry. No matter how far the advances in technology, it always eventually comes down to looking your opponent in the eye and feeling their blood splatter as you end their life. + +While you’re busy hacking off the limbs of an Iznac warrior, another loud explosion in the distance is heard followed by a bright flash in the sky. It’s not lightning from the storm, but rather the demise of your Storm. The Storm II joins the Tornado in crashing to the ground after losing its skirmish with the dragon. Hopefully the rain is making the jungle wet enough or else the flames from the wreckage of these downed airships are going to cause an inferno throughout the jungle. + +“Damn! The Iznac brought their little frog slaves and the remainder of those orc traitors!” Warrick says and cuts down several Glip before helping the rest of the soldiers fend off the orcs smashing through the fortress’ gates. + +It doesn’t matter in the scheme of things because even with overwhelming odds, your Eternals are still holding their own against all attackers. You then hear a roaring sound getting closer to your position and the sounds of great wings flapping. + +You shout a general command for the still working cannons to be pointed towards the dragon and to prepare to fire when the beast is in range. In the meantime you and Warrick try to keep that side of the fort relatively free of invading forces. + +“Hey, you think maybe I can get the chance to kill the dragon this time? I know you’re the Emperor and all, but you don’t need to prove your superiority all the damn time.” Warrick jokes. +“Yeah? Well maybe you’ll get your chance if you aren’t as slow like you were the last two times.” You retort. +“Slow? Well excuse me Mr. lightning fingers, but we all don’t have the ability to blast something out of the sky with a thought.” +“Well that’s why I’m the Emperor.” You snicker. + +The dragon gets closer and you give the order to fire and unleash your own magic bolts at the creature. It’s definitely wounded from its ordeal with the two airships, but given your experience with the other two dragons, you know it’s far from being out the fight. + +In fact it’s so determined that it doesn’t distinguish friend from foe when it blasts its flame breath on the fort. You manage to protect most of your people with a magic barrier, but for those outside its protection, most are set on fire if not incinerated immediately. On the positive side, it reduces your enemies, on the negative it ignites the gunpowder barrels for the cannons causing a massive explosion and completely destroying one side of the fort. + +While the barrier still protects you and everyone within initially, its still a lot of strain on your energy and you begin to feel the fatigue setting in. + +“No! Damnit! Fight through it!” you mutter to yourself hating your weakness. + +While you’re busily trying to fight through your fatigue, you don’t notice where Warrick went and that was to the highest point he could get to on the fort and some how JUMPING on the damn dragon when it made its pass! + +You almost can’t believe your eyes as you see the dragon flying away from the fort with Warrick desperately trying to hold on to one of its legs. You can see him hacking at the dragon’s underbelly. The dragon bellows in pain and begins to turn to make a second pass, but Warrick’s assault makes another attack on the fort a non-priority for it. + +You see the beast twist and squirm in an effort to shake Warrick free and then eventually the beast makes another loud screech and the both of them go crashing into the jungle no doubt destroying several trees in the process. You can still hear the dragon in the distance, so you know it isn’t dead yet (Though probably badly wounded), but who knows about Warrick’s fate. + +In the meantime Fort Canopy isn’t immediately being attacked anymore as most of the Iznac have fled or been killed at this point. You quickly order your remaining troops to secure the fort and take a small group with you to head towards the dragon’s roaring noises. + +Fortunately the jungle isn’t thick here and the noises make tracking pretty easy, though by the time you reach your target, you see the severely wounded dragon with Warrick in its mouth and shaking its head from side to side. Then with one more shake, Warrick goes flying out of the dragon’s mouth and slams into a nearby tree. You can’t quite make out all the damage, but it looks like he’s missing an arm at this point. Who knows what other grievous wounds he’s suffered. + +In any case the dragon has now turned its attention towards your direction, but its not exactly in the best condition itself. It makes a coughing noise and a pitifully short burst of flame and a large amount of blood emanates from its mouth. It even tries to flap its wings perhaps in an attempt to escape, but one wing is so torn up that it can’t lift off even if it had the strength to do so. +> Focus a full attack on the dragon +As regrettable as it is, Warrick’s condition is secondary; killing this beast is top priority. + +Despite the dragon’s weakened state, you don’t take any chances and unleash a blast of cold on the creature, which slows it down even more. Eventually its skin starts to frost over until parts become as ice. + +“Fire at its head!” you shout and the troops with you do so immediately with chunks of the dragon’s frozen head breaking off as bullets go into it. You finish up with a couple of magic bolts to shatter it completely. The headless dragon flails slowly about for a moment though you don’t really stand around to be mesmerized by its death twitches as you suddenly find yourself attacked by Iznac warriors who had fled from the fort, but apparently were still lurking in the jungle. + +They down a couple of your people, but they’re really no match for you and are quickly dispatched. With all enemies beaten, you finally go over to where Warrick’s body lies. As you predicted, he’s already dead. + +“Shit. How the hell am I going to explain this to Brenda?” Is about the only thing you can utter at this point. + +Warrick isn’t the only loss as you soon to come find out. Flevas also died during his own battle in the jungles with the Iznac (Though the battle was successful). Fortunately Captain Snilkez’ka lived and was also successful in defending Fort Tangle against the Iznac hordes. + +With the dragons dead and this large Iznac offensive repelled, its safe to say that Nyttrus is yours. The Iznac will probably linger with petty raids for awhile, but eventually much like the Torites they will become only a memory. After assigning new orders and giving out a few field promotions, you return to Evigrus with Warrick’s body. + +When you arrive, you waste little time to give the sad news to Brenda though as soon as she sees you enter the training room by yourself, her face already displays the look of someone who already knows what you’re going to tell her. + +“Brenda, I think you can stop training the eternals for the day, I’ve got…” +“He’s dead isn’t he?” Brenda interrupts. +“Yes.” You answers. + +Brenda is silent and pauses a moment before telling the fourth gens to stop training for the day and to return to their barracks. They comply though most of them take a moment to stare at you and whisper, presumably in awe that their Emperor has paid another visit. + +With the two of you remaining in the room, Brenda addresses you again. + +“It was a death fitting for an Eternal I trust?” Brenda asks. +“Oh yes. Yes it was. He died in battle with a dragon. I cannot think of a more glorious death.” + +Brenda inhales and exhales, rubbing a hand over her face, trying to hold back tears. + +“Good. That’s good. (Sniffle) That’s more than Roldan got at least. Was there enough of his body left for a proper funeral?” +“Yes, I’ve brought his body back from Nyttrus. The arrangements for a heroes’ funeral will be made as soon as you’re ready.” +“Okay. Well I’ll see you tomorrow to make the arrangements, now I believe I should get my students back in here, don’t want them to get lazy and make any reckless mistakes when the time comes.” +“Brenda you can take as much time as you need, you…” +“No. I have a duty to train these Eternals and I will see to that task. Warrick did his duty for the Empire and so I will continue to do mine for the Empire. These Eternals are going to help ensure the Empire’s continued survival one day and the Empire must survive for as long as the Empire lives on, Warrick will live on as his sacrifices will not have been in vain.” + +You nod at Brenda’s decision. + +“Okay, well I shall take my leave now.” You say not having much more to add. +“Thank you my Emperor.” Brenda says before you leave. +“What for?” +“Giving me that extra year. I’ll cherish it for as long as I live.” + +You leave Brenda to morn in her own way, which apparently is immersing herself in her work despite feeling horrible. To be honest, you’re not exactly feeling great yourself. Warrick wasn’t just a vital member of your command, he was one of your “siblings” and now it’s just you and Brenda. + +Warrick’s funeral isn’t a spectacle. Brenda’s requests a quieter and much more private one. He of course is still placed in a grave next to other honored Empire heroes, but for the most part only you, Brenda and a few of his closest subordinates attend. It is here you get to meet the one Warrick appointed to be in charge when he left for Nyttrus, Cassandra. + +Warrick mentioned her a couple times during your time in Nyttrus, though he neglected to mention she was an elf. Actually you didn’t even realize there had been any elves recruited into the Eyes and you’re sort of curious of when this happened and how she rose through the ranks, so its just as well that she makes a point of wanting to speak with you after the funeral. + +Later the pair of you go to talk in your meeting room. + +“So…Cassandra is it. You’re my new Sightmaster eh? Warrick never mentioned you being an elf.” you say. +“I didn’t think that was a problem, my Emperor.” +“No. No problem. Warrick just never mentioned recruiting any elves into the Eyes actually. He did mention you to me a few times during our time in Nyttrus though. Assured me you were very competent at your job and had complete trust in you. Considering I’ve come back to a serene Empire, I’d say his judgment was correct.” +“Thank you my Emperor.” +“Hrm. So seeing as that was about all Warrick mentioned about you and I’ve only just come back from Nyttrus and have not yet had time to look up your paperwork, tell me a little about yourself and why you wanted to see me immediately.” + +Cassandra mentions that she grew up in Rask where her family endured a lot of suspicion due to their being a group of separatist elves that were giving the Empire a bit of grief there before Captain Kane’s effort’s solved that problem. Though some humans that lived in her village at the time still murdered her brother one night. Of course nobody said they saw who did it, but it was known. Of course her family being elven, nothing much was done about it. + +Cassandra said she was angry about it for a while, but then realized that that sort of thinking wouldn’t get her anywhere in the long term, so made a vow to try to work within the system. Her first step was to join up with an Empire militia, which was used more back then in Rask due to most of the regular troops fighting in the Felkan War and the fact that ogres and giants were still a nuisance. These militia groups were also made up of some of the lower class rabble that were either poor, patriotic, looking to fight or a combination of all three. As such there weren’t any restrictions for the most part. + +Of course she had to struggle to be accepted the entire time and was practically disowned by her parents who while law abiding citizens, couldn’t believe she’d willingly join an “injust” system. She held her own though and learned a lot during that time though it wasn’t really until Warrick became Sightmaster for the Eyes, that she came into her own. + +He was looking for new recruits in Rask and she signed up for Eye training. She nearly didn’t even get in, but fortunately Warrick intervened and allowed her to prove herself, which she did. She goes on to say she kept a relatively low profile since it made life easier in general among her peers. + +“Not so low profile now, you’re the Sightmaster.” You say. +“Yes, and believe me I wasn’t even expecting it when Warrick assigned me to take the position. Though as an Eye, I still prefer to keep a low profile.” +“Understandable. I trust you are not having problems with any of your subordinates?” +“Oh, you mean being an elf that’s in charge? Oh no. Actually I haven’t had any of those sorts of problems for quite some time. Really after you had all elves still in slavery freed and promoting a man like Flevas to eventually be a general, I’ve encountered less hostility overall…though I imagine being an Eye might make the average person pause before insulting me.” Cassandra says with a slight smile. + +Sounds like Cassandra enjoys the little power trip she has over most humans, sort of like Flevas in that regard actually. No matter, as long as she does her job, you don’t care. Warrick was confident in her abilities and you have no reason to distrust his judgment and after your little discussion about her past, she addresses the original point of wanting to see you. + +“I wanted to talk to you about Dokkrus. It is my understanding that you plan on invading it?” +“That is a major agenda in the near future, yes.” +“I see. Well since its discovery I have kept apprised of its situation via Eye agents as you requested. Granted this intel is limited due to the distance, but here is what we’ve learned.” Cassandra as this point hands you a large folder filled with reports of what has been discovered about Dokkrus. She then gives you a brief run down on her own thoughts of it. + +“Now, I’ve never been to Nyttrus, but from what I’ve heard of the place the situation you’d encounter at Dokkrus would be much the same. Heavy resistance mixed with non-traditional tactics. Perhaps worse given that these are svelk we’re talking about.” +“I didn’t expect it to be a walk in flower fields. Besides aren’t the svelk fighting each other most of the time?” +“Well, most of them are, but last reports state that one group is starting to show more signs of unity. Its not a stable thing mind you, but its there nonetheless. There has also been a lot of sudden efforts in mining and metal working. Oddly though, the group of svelk don’t seem to be focusing on building weapons though, it seems to involve these giant metal structures that are in locations all over Dokkrus.” + +Semra. This has to be her doing. She’s already preparing and if you had to hazard a guess, she’s trying to repair some of those portals. Is she planning to use them to teleport directly somewhere in the Empire? + +Cassandra says that this unified groups isn’t very large. It’s not even an army, but then maybe Semra’s just planning a precise strike against you, like say a sudden assassination attempt so she might not need a lot of people. With those portals working, she might be able to just drop in anywhere. + +Something has to be done now. Cassandra has already said she believes an all out invasion is going to encounter problems, but doesn’t everything involving dark elves? +> Try a different approach +While the temptation to just send your forces and invade the place is the logical choice, you have a feeling Semra is probably expecting you to do just that. While your current military situation isn’t the worst, you’ve still got most your Eternals locked up in Nyttrus right now and you definitely want them to be sent in if you’re going to invade Dokkrus. + +“Okay, I’m thinking no invasion for now, however the svelk need to be stopped on what they’re planning to do, or rather at least what this group is planning to do.” You say. +“You’ll hear no argument from me on messing up svelk plans, but given your tone you sound like you already know what they’re planning which is something I was no able to gain knowledge of unfortunately.” Cassandra says. +“Those metal structures that have been mentioned in reports? Those are portals. You’re aware of the svelk named Semra aren’t you?” +“Yes, I am familiar with that name as Warrick mentioned her a few times. Former advisor to the former Emperor, former trainer to the first Eternals and all around treacherous bitch?” +“Yeah, basically. Well without going into a long story about it, I know that she’s trying to unify the numerous bands of nomadic svelk into another svelk empire. From what you’ve told me, she’s already busy doing that and as I said those metal structures are portals leading to who knows where. Probably all over the world. It’s probably how the svelk used to run their empire in fact. Obviously Semra’s trying to get the things working again as another step in rebuilding her overall goal.” +“If that’s the case then maybe you should invade.” +“No, I imagine Semra already is expecting that and you’re right in that it’ll be a nightmare to hold territory there. We just need to sabotage what she’s doing, and I’m thinking this is going to be more of a job for the Eyes since they’ve already been doing a good job there and I want you to lead this operation in Dokkrus personally.” + +Cassandra wasn’t expecting that order. + +“Of course I will obey my Emperor, but I’m going to need more details on this plan of yours and I’m concerned about the internal security here if I’m gone along with…well however many Eyes you intend to send.” +“Don’t worry about the security here, I mean its important as always, but the days of civil unrest seem to be behind us a bit. As for how many of your Eyes you want to take, well that’s up to you. I’d suggest that you take only the best and get by with as few as possible. You’re going to be relying on a lot of stealth and hit and run. Basically I want you to multiply the chaos there. Cause these little nomadic bands to remain at each others’ throats. Shouldn’t be too hard, but try to make sure it seems like Semra’s group is the one doing it. It’ll definitely make them pause before joining her.” +“So use their own nature against them. Got it. What about the portals?” +“Since Semra is the only one trying to get them to work, focus on stopping those efforts as well. Obviously that means sabotaging the mine, mines, or wherever the hell she’s getting the material to rebuild them. Killing the miners works too obviously. The best thing to do is to destroy whatever portal Semra is trying to fix completely. I imagine magic is going to be involved so it would probably be best if you took your Eye mages with you.” +“We don’t have too many of those left you know.” Cassandra says. +“Hrm, well if you need to, take non-Eye mages with you. There aren’t many of them left either, but it should be enough…in fact take Galen with you. Lazy whiner needs to be useful for a change. And he WILL whine, but other than myself, he’s the most powerful mage the Empire has, so don’t get him killed unless it’s absolutely necessary to the overall mission.” +“Is the overall mission to kill this Semra?” + +You chuckle a bit. + +“Heh, well if you have a good opportunity to do so, I certainly won’t condemn you for it. In fact if you DO manage to kill her and bring me her head I’ll grant you whatever you want within my means and that’s quite a large list I assure you. However I’d advise you NOT to even attempt to engage her if possible. She’s extremely dangerous and quite frankly will probably know as soon as we start hampering her mining operations that the Empire is involved and will make adjustments to her plans. Even with Galen, you most likely are not going to match an encounter with her so my advice is don’t fight her unless you have no choice.” +“So our main mission is just to sabotage her portal fixing attempts?” +“That’s only part of it yes. However the other part is just as important, if not more so. I WANT one of those portal structures.” + +Now Cassandra looks at you as if you’ve given her the impossible. + +“Emperor, from what I’ve heard those structures are…huge! I don’t see how we’re going to be able to move such things.” +“That’s because you won’t be, at least not initially. I’ll be travelling to Dokkrus at some point to oversee that part of the plan but I need to discuss with the engineers for a way to extend the airships’ distance so they can reach Dokkrus as well as carry one of those structures back here. Hmmm, I suppose it probably would be best to send a few engineers with you so they can report back and give an idea of exactly how best to move this thing without damaging it. I’d send Elam, but I’d rather keep him here to work on improving the airships. Maybe I’ll just send some gnomish engineers…of course the gnomes won’t like that, but fuck ‘em they get more than enough special treatment.” + +You finish up telling what else you require of Cassandra and then make your next stop to speak with Klemto about getting some gnome engineers to go on this trip… + +“But…can’t you just use Empire engineers?” Klemto asks. +“Last time I remember New Dessel was incorporated into the Empire decades ago. Your engineers ARE Empire engineers. If you’re asking why I don’t use human engineers, well let’s just say other than Elam, I still have more faith in gnomish ones. A testament to your peoples’ fine works. You really should be flattered.” + +Klemto doesn’t know how to respond to such a remark so he continue to try to plead with you. + +“But Emperor, please be reasonable! Most of my people ever really leave this city anymore and most have no desire to, and you’re asking them to go to a far away land with where sadistic svelk roam all over the place? We’re not fighters, I think our history shows that.” Klemto remarks. +“Heh, I dunno if that’s entirely true of a race that makes the deadliest weapons outside of the most powerful of magic. Not to mention you’re the only group that ever rebelled from the Empire at one time AND lived. I assure you though your peoples’ safety will be top concern. I need them the most for this part of the mission to succeed. They will have the best protection. As soon as it’s over, they’re coming back immediately. You have my word on that.” +“I…just don’t know.” +“Klemto, this is more of a courtesy visit as well as giving you the option of sending those who are…less resistant to the idea. You know the deal Klemto, you’re part of the Empire and you have to obey its leader regardless of how much freedom and leniency he gives this place.” + +Klemto looks at you knowing that those words are more than just a polite threat. He sighs heavily and gives no more struggle. + +“(Sigh) Very well, let me…” Klemto starts to say before he’s interrupted by a red haired woman dressed in a slightly dirty work outfit. She’s human to your surprise and doesn’t look like one of your Eyes (Let alone Elam). + +“Hey uncle I’m just, oh!” the woman says when she sees you. +“Zana! I thought someone told you not to disturb me! I’m in a very important meeting with the Emperor!” +“Apologies uncle Klemto, but I left my lucky hammer over here when I visited yesterday and I don’t like being without it.” Zana says while smiling and nodding at you. “Apologies to you as well Emperor.” + +You aren’t terribly offended of course, but you’re wondering why a non-Eye human is running around New Dessel until you suddenly remember meeting Zana a long time ago, she was just a teenager then. + +“Emperor, uh you remember my adopted daughter don’t you?” Klemto asks. +“Yes, first time I made my visit to New Dessel. As I recall she interrupted that meeting to ask if she could fix some lighting problem you had at the time.” You say. +“Good memory! I’m surprised you remembered someone as unimportant as me!” Zana beams. +“Mm, well when you’re the Emperor, you have to try to remember everyone no matter what their status because under certain circumstances a peasant can rise to become a general. Besides, I also remember commending Klemto on raising a young lady with respect for dedication and hard work. Glad to see that you’re still at it.” +“Oh yes my Emperor. I work primarily with Elam, do you know him?” +“Elam? Oh yes, I definitely know him.” You answer. + +At this point Klemto begins to get nervous and tries to push his niece out the door. + +“Okay, Zana you’ve found your hammer, now the Emperor and I still have important business to discuss.” +“What kind?” Zana asks. +“Oh just something concerning engineers and a rather adventurous mission.” You say. + +Klemto’s fears have just come true. + +“Emperor…please I beg you…not Zana! I mean I’LL even go if you need me to! I’ll send ALL of New Dessel!” +“Relax Klemto, if Zana here is skilled enough to work next to Elam, I’d hate to break up the team. She won’t be going to Dokkrus.” You say. +“You mean the dark elf continent? Yikes. As much I want to serve the Empire, I do believe I’d be a liability at such a hostile place! I’m no fighter!” Zana remarks. +“Well you and your uncle don’t have to worry, your skills will be better served here working on the new airships I want Elam to build.” You say before Zana leaves. + +After getting over his initial worry, Klemto says he’ll get that list of engineers to you immediately. You leave Klemto’s office and head to where Elam’s workshop is located. When you enter he doesn’t appear to be working on anything important, he just seems to be watching some rodents run around in a container, though they look like they have a small piece of metal on their heads with wires connected to them. + +“What the hell are you doing Elam?” you ask completely startling him. +“Emperor! Apologies, but I get very engrossed in my experiments sometimes. I’ve been coming up with some theories on brains and how they work. Figured I should test animals first and then work my way up to more sentient subjects.” Elam answers. +“For what purpose? I thought you were building new weapons in here.” +“I am…but…forgive me my Emperor, I’m getting bored with just engineering technological devices and weapons. Lately I’ve been feeling a pull towards my old love of biology. I mean yes we can create machines and other wondrous devices to make life easier, but what about making a LIFE? Y’know when I was young and before I worked under Marik, I was kicked out of the physician’s guild by short sighted fools who couldn’t appreciate my ideas.” Elam says. +“Yes, I believe Kivan mentioned that to me when you were promoted to the Eternal Project.” You says. +“Sometimes I miss working on the Eternal Project. I think we could really make advances there.” Elam says. +“Hm, didn’t know you felt that way Elam. Did you have any particular ideas in mind for the next new batch of Eternals?” +“Oh several. For one, I was thinking of how to go about curing that sterility problem you all seem to suffer from…no offense my Emperor.” +“None taken. Your idea is certainly a worthy one, but I believe the magical process that’s necessary to create Eternals is the cause of that one flaw.” +“Yes, but I’m wondering if there isn’t a way to eliminate the magical process altogether.” +“I don’t see how.” You say. +“Well I didn’t say I had all the answers yet, but I really believe if I could focus my studies, maybe I could find a way we could create Eternals just using the technology and medical aspect.” +“Okay, sounds intriguing. Might be good given how few mages there are around nowadays. If you do come up with anything important feel free to let me know, but ONLY if you come up with something solid AND you don’t let it get in the way of your other work here.” +“Of course my Emperor. So what was it that you wanted to see me about?” +“Oh, I need you to make the airships travel a longer distance. Namely to Dokkrus.” +“I guess we’re bombing the hell out of that place next eh? Okay, I’m sure its possible; we’ll just have to go through our routine tests and that is still going to take time. Hope you don’t need them anytime soon though.” +“I’d prefer if this was done as soon as possible, but given the vital importance of the mission these airships are going to be going on I DO want it done right. Namely they’re going to be lifting up a large metal portal and carrying it back to Evigrus.” +“How big are these metal portals and what are they made out of?” +“Mithril I believe. At least those were the latest reports. As far as size, well they’re about as big as the front gates to the capital. Maybe bigger.” +“That large huh? You sure you can’t just put them on a ship?” Elam asks. +“That would require digging up their base and dragging the damn things across hostile territory and THEN loading them on to a mostly wooden ship which is at the whims of the ocean and the occasional large denizens that lurk within it. The only ship we’ve got that might be able to carry it without danger of sinking or capsizing is that giant vessel we captured from Mortimer before the Nakol War. And even then I’d still have my doubts.” + +Elam glances at his rats again before continuing. + +“Well you don’t actually think we’d be able to load one on an airship do you?” Elam asks. +“No, of course not, but the airships could carry the portal underneath it with strong chains and hooks. Also saves the problem of dragging it across hostile territory since it could just be pulled straight up off the ground. I’m thinking maybe even TWO airships could carry it while flying abreast each other.” You say. +“Well, that would definitely stabilize and help distribute the weight, it also means the airships are going to have to be smaller so they can even share airspace so close together…” Elam exhales. “But…it’s certainly doable. Like I said, I just hope you don’t need these immediately. I’ll need specific schematics of the portal as well, I mean exact size, dimensions and weight if possible.” +“I’m sending gnome engineers to Dokkrus, I’m sure after a suitable portal is found they will report such findings.” +“Okay. Good. Well I suppose my side experiments will have to wait a little longer. I’ll get to work immediately on this my Emperor.” Elam says. + +After a few more words with Elam, you leave New Dessel trying to feel positive about the plan you’ve set in motion. You know there is going to be something that will inevitably try to hamper your plans, but you just try to keep in mind that this is one more step closer to immortality. +> Years pass... +Year 62 + +“The transport airships have made their test run to the outskirts of Dokkrus and returned. They’re ready for the real mission now, my Emperor.” Elam remarks. +“Good, because we’re sending them and a couple of the upgraded regular airships.” You say. + +This is a major step closer to your goals. Cassandra, Galen and the rest have managed to locate and hold a fairly intact portal for you. The base around it has already been dug out for easier lifting and they haven’t suffered many svelk attacks, well not many concentrated svelk attack at least. The svelk that are attacking are just the regular xenophobic type that doesn’t want outsiders on their territory. They have no real grasp of the greater plans that are going on. + +Semra’s actions have been surprisingly minimal though apparently she’s been too busy defending her own territory (and portal and mines) from not just your sabotage attempts (Which unfortunately haven’t been too successful), but from other svelk warbands. It would seem that Cassandra and your Eyes have at least successfully managed to keep up the ongoing chaos there. + +Won’t be long now. + +“Emperor, may I accompany you on this mission?” Zana asks. +“Huh?” you say being interrupted by your private thoughts. +“May I accompany you on this mission, my Emperor? I know I sounded a little afraid the last time Dokkrus was mentioned, but I admit part of me still wanted to go. I’d like to join you on this mission. Besides, I did have a hand in building these airships, it might be best if someone with that knowledge came along.” +“I imagine Klemto might have some objections to that.” You say. +“I love him, but he’s too over protective. Besides, you’re the Emperor if you want me to come with you then he has no choice but to comply right?” Zana says almost in a flirtatious way. You’re not exactly sure how to take that, but Elam definitely looks surprised. Maybe even a little jealous. + +“Well, that is correct…okay fine you can come with me.” +“This will be a great honor my Emperor! I’m looking forward to this!” Zana says. +“You will be accompanying me aboard the Storm III.” You say. +“You’re going to be on the Storm III?” +“That was the plan given that it’s the flagship, why where did you think I was going to be?” you ask. +“Well I assumed that you’d want to be aboard one of the transport airships to better oversee the process as well as to better defend it from attack in case the svelk try something.” +“That’s sort of why I have the Storm III and company going with them. They will be defending against possible svelk attacks, though barring Semra’s meddling; I don’t see any major threat to any of the airships themselves. The svelk are remarkably still stuck in the dark ages when it comes to weaponry.” +“True, but I know you have the ability to cast those large barriers for defense. I dunno I just don’t see your own extra protection on a transport airship as such a bad idea. It would allow the escorts to focus a little more on protecting the other.” +“Hrm. Never hurts to be sure I guess. Duly noted, I’ll think about it.” + +With Zana’s brief suggestion she excuses herself to get her things prepared for the mission, leaving you alone with Elam who realizes his glances of faint jealousy have caught your attention and he is now trying to not make eye contact. + +“Elam you’re acting like a teenager. I’m not remotely interested in your woman so you can stop worrying that I’m going to start fucking her on the airship.” You blurt out. +“Uh…um…thank you my Emperor…I uh…” Elam stutters a bit at a lost for how to respond. +“How long have you two been an item anyway? It doesn’t really show much when you two are together.” +“We try to keep it professional my Emperor. Human women here aren’t in big supply here in New Dessel and I can’t identify with any of the Eyes, but Zana…she’s something special…never have I encountered a woman with such a magnificent intellect for science!” +“Mm, I’m sure that the only thing…” you smirk. +“Well her physical attributes are nice as well.’ Elam says. + +Elam goes on to ask if he can discuss his desire to work more in the medical and biology field when you return. You tell him that he may continue his experiments as usual, but you’re going to need his help with the portal when it’s brought back most likely. + +Your don’t bother talking with Klemto about Zana. You figure she can tell him herself, assuming she even bothers and decides to just make it a surprise for him. + +You do take the opportunity to look at the new airships. It’s odd, but as many times as you’ve seen them up close this will be the first time you’ll actually be on one of these things. Even on your return trip from Nyttrus you went by boat rather than waiting for another airship. + +When the day arrives Klemto approaches you. You’re guessing he must’ve heard the news by now. He comes to you hat in hand looking pitiful. + +“Emperor…I understand my daughter is going with you…I just beg of one thing and that’s that you see that she’s safe.” +“You make a lot of demands of your Emperor…(sigh) She’ll be fine Klemto, you worry too much. I doubt if the svelk are even going to be able hit us if they even attack. Besides, she’s going to be aboard the Storm III and given that it’s the heaviest armed airship we have right now, she’ll be one of the safest people there.” +“Well that’s good to hear. At least she’ll be close to you.” +“Not necessarily. I might be flying on one of the transports. Zana suggested that it might be best if I was aboard one to better defend it in case the unexpected should happen.” + +As Klemto’s mind fills with worry again, you wonder if you should take Zana’s advice or not. +> Board the Storm III +The transports are going to have enough protection with the escorts. Besides you’d rather be on the biggest, most well armed thing in the sky. + +Zana seems a little surprised to see you aboard the Storm III when you’re about to lift off, but says that it’ll be an honor to be so close to you on this mission. She then says she’s going to be walking around the Storm III making sure everything is running smoothly. You see this as reasonable so you think nothing more of it and tell her to carry on. + +After about a half hour you finally get used to the idea of being so high in the air and less paranoid. You didn’t think it possible for you to be, but somewhere in the back of your mind, you had the concern of this thing falling out of the sky which is probably why you haven’t stayed in one place on the ship for very long and have felt the need to pace about it. + +You also have been bumping into Zana every so often. Not on purpose, but you seem to just be appearing in the same places she happens to be. This wouldn’t be a problem, but each time you do, Zana seems increasingly agitated whenever she sees you and it’s obvious that she attempts to leave the area as soon as possible. + +The next time you see her she’s coming out of a door on the top deck of the ship wearing a heavy jacket with some sort of backpack on her back. Once again you completely surprise her. + +“Hey Zana, once again we meet again.” you say. +“Heh! Um yeah, my Emperor. Still following me I see.” Zana replies. +“Not on purpose, but should I be following you?” +“No. I mean, there’s no reason to of course, it’s just what I’ve been doing is so boring and not very interesting.” +“Probably, but there isn’t much to do on here anyway…so what’s that on your back?” +“Oh this? Uh, just a back pack full of stuff…” +“Zana, why the hell are you so nervous? Every time we’ve bumped into each other you’ve run off like your ass is on fire.” +“Have I? My apologies then my Emperor. I suppose your presence is just a little unnerving at times. We all want to do our best in front of you, you know.” + +You give a sideways glance at Zana. You’ve NEVER known Zana to ever be nervous around you. In fact she’s always been very casual to the point that most rulers would probably find it disrespectful. + +“Okay…I understand…so what’s in the backpack?” +“Um…as I said nothing of important my Emperor, just tools…” +“Okay so let me see inside.” + +And it’s at this point Zana goes silent for a moment and her nervous facial expression turns into one of complete desperation before she turns around to run from you. + +“STOP ZANA! STOP HER!” you shout and go after her. + +You have no idea where she thinks she can run to until you see her attempting to climb the railing of the Storm III in an attempt to jump off it. Fortunately you and another crew member grab her before she’s able to. She then tries to fumble with something inside her jacket, but you wrestle it away from her. It’s some sort of black rectangular device with a button on it. + +“What the hell is this Zana?” you say while your crewmembers keep her from getting up. +“Why don’t you press it and find out TYRANT!” Zana shouts and now her expression has changed again, but to one of complete hatred. + +You’ve never been the most technologically inclined, but if you had to guess, Zana has planted a bomb aboard this ship and this thing is going to detonate it. You immediately tell crewmembers in your vicinity to spread the word and to look for it while you hang on to the detonation device for safekeeping. + +You then tell your crew to take off Zana’s backpack. It’s odd as it really isn’t a bkacpack at all so much as it’s a large sheet of canvas with reinforced rope attached. You’ve never seen anything like it before, but you again if you had to guess, it was supposed to decrease the speed of Zana’s fall. + +“Interesting invention. I’m guessing one of your own design? I’m just wondering though we’re quite far from any land mass. Even had this invention worked, were you really planning on swimming all the way back to Evigrus?” you say. +“I calculated the distance, maybe I would’ve made it, maybe not, but either way it would’ve been better than allowing your continued existence! Murderer! Tyrant!” +“So who put you up to this? Semra?” +“Nobody put me up to this tyrant! I have my OWN reasons as I’m sure countless people would have for wanting you dead! The only difference is that I had the guts to actually try to kill you. YOU MURDERED MY FAMILY! YOU STOLE MY LIFE!” Zana screams with her mouth spitting saliva in anger. + +“Zana you’ve lost me. You claim I murdered your family, but from what I know I wasn’t even in the vicinity of the destroyed village of where Klemto found you.” +“I didn’t grow up in a village! I was going to be a princess! I would’ve ruled a kingdom one day! YOU and YOUR I EMPIRE destroyed all that before I even had a chance to enjoy a taste of such a life! Klemto didn’t just save a random Felkan baby, he saved a HEIR TO THE FELKAN FUCKING KINGDOM!” Zana shouts. + +It was a very long time ago. Almost a different life even, but you vaguely remember seeing a crib in the Felkan royal palace, yet no baby or even signs of a dead one. You never thought too much of it at the time, but apparently even though Zana was just an infant, Klemto must’ve told her about her real heritage. He probably lied to you thinking that you would’ve had her killed. + +“Because of YOU, I’ve had to live a miserable existence working on machinery surrounded by fucking GNOMES! You know what that’s like? Being the only human in community of damn gnomes? It SUCKS! Then when some humans do fucking arrive, they’re from the same nation that destroyed my birthright! It almost sickened me to even sleep with that crazy fool Elam!” + +How long must she have been waiting for the right time to strike? Was it always this way or did it slowly gnaw at her? A life that was stolen from her. Did Klemto or the gnomes put her up to this? Was this their plan in some weird way? + +“Okay, since you’re in a talkative mood, did Klemto or any gnome put you up to this?” you ask. +“What? So you’ll have an excuse to round them all up and destroy their souls again? I heard about what you did to them. And maybe I might find them to be timid, tiresome unattractive little know it alls, I find it deplorable what the Empire did to them. I can’t believe they allowed themselves to be dominated by a nation that systematically exterminated them from not just this life, but the next as well!” +“So did they help or not?” you ask again. +“No! No they did not! My father would’ve probably had me jailed if he knew what I was planning. Those cowards wouldn’t dare stand against the Empire, but I fucking would! And did! Not that this will save them. After you’re done killing me, you’ll probably have them all killed as well for any excuse will serve a tyrant!” +“It’s amusing that you keep calling me that. What did you think your parents were? They were a KING and QUEEN. You think they ruled by popular decision? Do you think YOU would have if you became queen? My actions that day weren’t even personal. I was just following orders like a soldier. Your actions however today are misguided and fatal. Such a waste. Even had I known your origins, I would not have had you killed if you had remained true to serving the Empire. You probably would’ve even replaced Elam as top engineer when such a time came. Your quest for vengeance was as pointless as your entire life.” + +Zana says nothing else, she just continues to look at you with hatred in her eyes. At this point a few of your crew has come back saying that they found a bomb near the spare gunpowder barrels and another one near some vital machinery. They were disarmed and disposed of by dropping them over the side of the Storm. + +“Well, I guess there’s only one more thing to dispose of.” You say and then nod to your crew still restraining Zana. + +To her credit she doesn’t beg for her life and continues to curse you even as she’s falling over the side of the Storm to her death. Considering some of crew from the other nearby ships may be wondering what’s going on if they’ve seen someone being thrown overboard, you make an announcement that you want the crew to signal the other ships to let them know everything is fine and that the mission is going to continue as expected. + +As for the mission, that goes off relatively quietly without much trouble. The portal is hooked and lifted up without any problems. There doesn’t even to be any weight concerns, though given that you had two transport ships just in case it isn’t too surprising. + +There aren’t any svelk attacks either. When you bring Galen, Cassandra and the remaining Eyes aboard the Storm via rope ladder, Cassandra says if you’d arrived a few days before it might’ve been a different matter since they suffered a very large attack accompanied by mages. In fact Cassandra mentions that they were encountering a lot more mage types among the ranks of the svelk. She goes on to say that Semra’s group has disappeared completely meaning they stopped working on the portal and abandoned all their mining operations. + +“Knowing Semra she’s probably changed her plans slightly again.” You say. +“Did you want us to stay then? I mean we might need some reinforcements, but I think the remainder of us can survive on our own a little longer out here.” Cassandra asks. +“No. You’re all needed back home. Dokkrus will be invaded properly at some point in the future, but for now I’ve got more important things on my mind and I need all the security that I can get on the homefront right now. If the svelk suddenly start teleporting an invasion force then so be it. We’ll be prepared, I’m going to start calling the third gen Eternals back from Nyttrus anyway. Besides, we’ve got one of these portals now and if we get it working like how I want to get it working, then we’ll be fine.” You say and then turn to Galen. + +“I want to talk to you about your findings, I assume you studied this one and several others while on your vacation.” +“Vacation? Dokkrus was the worst assignment that…” Galen starts to say until you glare at him. +“Uh, nevermind my Emperor. Yes, I’ll speak with you about what I found. Of course.” + +With your mission accomplished and all your people aboard, you return to Evigrus where the airships land in the fields near New Dessel. The portal itself is moved into the mountain city. + +From there you bump into Elam AND Klemto together. Good, this will save you time. + +“Where is my daughter?” Klemto asks. +“Yeah, where is Zana my Emperor?” Elam says. + +You snort and shake your head at this question. + +“Well there’s no easy way to tell either of you this, so here it is. Zana was a traitor that tried to kill me while she was aboard the Storm. So I had her thrown overboard where I assume she died.” + +Klemto and Elam’s jaws just about drop. + +“WHAT?!” the pair of them exclaim. +“You heard me. She’s dead and that’s it.” + +Klemto’s face displays the first signs of tears, but also of anger. He’s about to speak, but you stop him before he can do so. + +“Klemto. I’d advise you to think VERY carefully the next words you say to me, because there are only a few reasons why I’m not going to have New Dessel purged of every gnome in here. Number one, I still believe I’ll need the help of gnomish engineers for this next project and two Zana made it very clear that her plans were all her own and not the result of some gnomish conspiracy. Given how passionate her hatred of me was, I have no reason to disbelieve her.” + +Klemto says nothing. + +“That being said, I’m ALSO going to forget the fact that YOU lied to me and that she was the daughter of the ex-Felkan royalty. I understand the lie, but this might’ve been avoided had you not lied to me in the first place…or failing that you needed to lie to her about her true heritage. Either way, I’ll let the knowledge of your OWN poor judgment be your punishment.” + +Klemto continues to say nothing, the man is overcome with grief and can’t even be in your prescence, he just leaves holding his head in hands. Elam is still a bit in shock. + +“Was…was there no other way?” he asks. +“Are you kidding me Elam? (Sigh) No. There was no other way. If it’s any consolation, she never loved or had any real affection for you. She even called you a fool that she only slept with due to the lack of other available humans that didn’t completely disgust her. Well that and I imagine she probably saw a possible opportunity to get closer to assassinate me by being closer to you.” + +Elam just listens on in silence. + +“And you, like Klemto, should count yourself lucky that I need you to work on this project because this incident wasn’t the first time you mistakenly placed your trust in an assassin. Or have we forgotten the OTHER bomb attempt on the first Storm that Warrick managed to stop?” +“Um, no your Emperor. Apologies. I…have no excuses and thank you for your mercy.” +“Hrm. Get that portal working and it will be a start.” + +Elam leaves your presence and you’re left to rethink the “independence” policies on New Dessel. That time has now passed. + +A few hours later during a discussion with Elam and Galen about how to get the portal working again, an emergency goes up throughout New Dessel. At first you think its some sort of sudden gnome uprising that Klemto has stirred up, but the event is much less urgent though perhaps a little tragic. + +Klemto apparently went home, drank a lot of ale and then calmly shot himself in the head. He wasn’t always well liked by his people due to his decisions, but enough of them thought highly enough of him to immediately go into mourning due to his death. There is probably a fear of what will come next too since he was their leader for so long; in fact none of the gnomes of their little council even steps up to replace him. + +Hardly matter though, since as far as you’re concerned this is as good as time as any to completely do away with the “era” of New Dessel “independence.” It was a long time coming anyway. Maybe Klemto even realized that and with the death of his daughter he saw no more point in seeing the “bad times” again. + +In any event, things are starting to look up for you and you’re one step closer to your ultimate goals. +> Years pass... +Year 65 + +“It…it was horrible, my Emperor! The place was so dead. Like I could feel it everywhere…my…my hands…my skin…wrinkled with age! How could I have aged so quickly? It’s an evil place! Don’t send me back! I beg of you!” the test subject pleads while groveling at your boots, but all you do smile. + +“WE FOUND IT! WE’VE FINALLY FOUND IT!” you shout in glee. + +After Elam’s tinkering with machinery to repair the portal, sacrificing several lesser mages to fuel the portal with magical energy again, you and Galen trying to channel the energy to get the right location and after sending in several “test subjects” with ropes tied around them, you’ve at last discovered the way to reach the Isle of Mortos. + +The Island of Mortos seems to be so heavily disguised by magic that it’s impossible to actually find through normal means. Basically the necromancers only allow access if they want it to or in your case, meddling with a magic portal for so long that you eventually found it through trial and error. + +Now that you’ve found it, the current problem is that it’s a one-way trip. Hence the ropes you tied to the test subjects so you could pull them back through. (Though that still didn’t always ensure their return) + +There’s also the fact that “dialing” the way to get to Mortos in the first place has been fairly taxing on you and Galen who isn’t looking so great nowadays. + +“A testament to your persistence, my Emperor…can I go lay down? I feel sort of weak.” Galen remarks. +“Galen you’re a wizard, you of all people besides myself should be happy to discover a new mystery of the arcane! I mean with magic apparently dying out, I’d think this would be fairly interesting to you.” +“Emperor, in all honesty I’d rather just be back home using charm spells on young girls.” +“That’s your problem Galen, you have no true ambition!” you say. +“Yes, you’re right my Emperor. I’m a lowly worm before your greatness.” Galen says. +“I’ll let that remark pass since I KNOW you’re intelligent enough to NOT use sarcasm on me. And I’m not going to let your whining and depression annoy me today as this is a great break through.” + +At this point Galen says nothing and just shuffles off to find some place to lie down. You also ignore the test subject who has already been taken away by nearby Eyes to who knows where. + +You continue to stare at the portal, which will now lead you to Mortos. You almost want to enter right now, but you know that it will still have to wait. You call Elam over who normally isn’t a nervous sort, but is when he gets near the portal. + +“So…this is it then?” Elam asks. +“This is it Elam. Have you finished building that other smaller portal for me?” you say. +“It’s almost finished, though it took a lot of mithril to build it. Good thing Nyttrus had several deposits, because it’s not like we had much of it. Also it’s going to need magical energy of course for it to be fully powered. I imagine you’ve still got mages left?” +“Maybe a few still locked up, but I question if it’ll be enough…well there’s always Galen. Should work.” +“You’re going to sacrifice Galen?” +“He’s served his purpose and he’ll serve it one last time for the greater good of the Empire. He’s getting old and weak anyway, how many years does he really have left? Wasn’t aware that you held any fondness for him.” +“No, I don’t really. Still though…what about your Eternal Project?” +“What about it?” +“Well without any more mages you won’t be able to continue it correct?” +“If this plan goes the way I hope it does, it won’t matter, besides I thought you were coming up with an idea to take the Eternal Project in a new direction without the use of magic.” You say. +“I was, but then I had to focus my efforts on this project and as I know it was of great importance to you, I didn’t want to divert my attention.” Elam responds. +“Probably was wise of you. Well, after we get the second portal up and running, you’ll be able to pursue your desire for more biological experiments and find a new way of creating Eternals.” + +Elam nods and excuses himself to go back to work on finishing the other portal. The smaller one is going to be the “return” portal back here after its power up, “calibrated” and dragged through the Mortos portal. + +The test subject didn’t say anything about any ghoul creatures or other undead around, just a dead feeling everywhere so it looks like you go lucky as far as the location is concerned. Though you still have no idea where you’ll be located on Mortos. After all you only visited the place once and that was thirty years ago. You were so different back then. The trusting, loyal, good soldier that never questioned anything. + +You’ve been thinking more about those last few days with Casimir recently, your trip to Mortos and the days immediately afterwards. The big lie that Casimir perpetrated just to secure his own immortality was still nothing compared to the one that nobody except Jacob and Semra knew about. It’s still odd to think about how you were never truly meant to be an Eternal. + +Still, it’s often been said the bigger the lie; the more people are willing to believe it. Maybe its because your entire life is a “lie” that you managed to achieve so much within it. Maybe that’s why you managed to become a successful Emperor and maybe that’s why you intend to succeed where your “father” failed. + +Nicodemus, the necromancer that you encountered during your last trip to Mortos, tried to convince you to not pursue the same path as Casimir. Semra has tried to do the same on several occasions. As far as you know, they’re still the only two that are going to be your major obstacles between you and your goals. You aren’t sure what Semra’s been up to as there has been no sign of her or any indication of an attack from Dokkrus, but rest assured when she does pop up again, you have no doubt its going to be at the most inopportune time. + +As for Nicodemus, you imagine you’ll have quite a fight on your hands with him and that’s not even counting other necromancers that must live on the island and their undead. You haven’t been idle though. You’ve been practicing and strengthening your own magic abilities. + +Eventually you stop your reminiscing and decide you need to get on with your plans, you aren’t getting any younger. + +In another few weeks, Elam tells you that the second portal is ready, so you gather up Galen and the remaining mages to go about its activation. Galen repeatedly tells you that he doesn’t think there’s going to be enough energy within the captive mages power up the second portal, but you assure him that there will be. The fool doesn’t even consider the possibility that HE is going to be joining them. Well not until the last moment when he’s grabbed by Eyes and strapped down to the draining chair hooked up to the portal. + +“Emperor?! What is this?! No! I was loyal! You can’t! You…” Galen shouts before you punch him in the face and have him gagged. +“Stop whining Galen.” You say motioning Elam to hit the switch and watch the last of your mages being drained of their energy and life. + +When the portal is powered and you finish your calibrations, you have the smaller portal ready to be dragged through the larger one. Several Eyes, several third gen Eternals and some very nervous engineers all prepare to enter, plus one. + +“Emperor, you’re going with them?” Elam asks. +“I’m confident that this is going to work and if not, well then I don’t deserve to be Emperor any longer. Let’s get going.” You say. + +You enter the portal and you have that old familiar feeling… + +A deadness all around you. The land is still dead, everything is still drab and gray. Same way it was when you last were here. The others with you all begin to complain about not feelings quite right. + +“It’ll pass if you keep your mind focused, the key is to not let this place cause you to spiral into a depression. Come on we need to get this portal into a good place…that large rock structure in the ground over there looks as good as any. I want the engineers to embed this portal in it, don’t want it just standing out here in the open wasteland. Follow me and DON’T stray too far. There are magic areas or what are called negative zones. You step into one and you could be an old man or even a corpse before you knew what was going on. I’ll be able to detect them, just follow me.” + +Your small march to the rock destination is uneventful other than some of your people still saying how this all feels so hopeless. Unfortunately most of it is from the engineers who are less accustomed to this sort of thing. + +As you wait for the portal to be embedded in the rock, you begin to ponder if you still shouldn’t wait awhile before marching an army into Mortos. It might be this place sapping your “enthusiasm” but the grim reality of how difficult this is really going to be is starting to set in the closer you get to your goals. It does occur to you that Nicodemus was powerful enough to destroy Casimir with barely any effort. +> Do some scouting now +You decide that the best way to keep your mind off things is to keep yourself occupied. So you tell some of the Eyes to accompany you and tell the Eternals to keep a good watch over the engineers. + +You remind the Eyes to follow you, as the danger of stepping into a negative zone is great. They all acknowledge your order apathetically and follow. + +A few moments after the portals are both out of sight, you start to hear more complaining, bitching and overall whining. You’d swear you were travelling with Galen or several copies of him. + +“Damn it, what the hell is wrong with you all? You’re supposed to be Eyes! Start acting like it before I have to make an example out of one you!” +“Oh what’s the point? We’re all dead men anyway!” one of the Eyes exclaims. + +You travel a little longer and eventually you encounter a ruined structure. Probably not where the book is located, but no point in not checking it out since you’re already here. + +You all approach the structure slowly. You because you’re cautious, the rest well because they’re all still suffering from the effects of the oppressive aura of Mortos. + +When you get close enough an ugly head pops out from around the corner of the ruins. When it sees you it makes an inhuman scream and comes loping at you. + +“Shit, ghoul. Quick, there will be a multitude of them!” you exclaim backing off and blasting the ghoul with a fireball. + +As more ghouls come pouring out of the ruin, you motion the Eyes to prepare themselves for combat, which they do so but only reluctantly. + +“COME ON! These fuckers are going to eat you!” you shout. + +There aren’t as many ghouls like when you walked into that town of them last time, but there’s enough to be dangerous. You fight the ghouls with blade and spell, but your Eyes are barely putting up a fight despite you yelling at them and the very real threat of death the ghouls pose. + +Pretty soon the ghouls begin to get the upper hand over your Eyes, some of whom have given up completely and practically laid down to die. + +Frustrated by this place altogether you begin flinging fireballs at the ghouls regardless if the Eyes are in the vicinity or not. If the weak willed fools wish to die then so be it. Eventually the only thing left is you and many charred bodies. + +You sit and rest for a moment from the battle. You realize that you’re going to have to train your people to endure this place. It’s obvious that this place is going to affect your people more than you realized… + +Then suddenly a panic wells up inside you and you make haste back to the portal. + +At first your major concern is that you’ll find everyone not doing their job or at worst dead by their own hand, the reality is much worse however. + +The portal lies on the ground and partially broken, magic still powers it, but its highly unstable now and its changing different colors quickly. All the engineers are dead and some of your Eternals are too, but it doesn’t look like everyone took their own life. It looks more like a slaughter. + +Two of the Eternals still live and have a deranged look in their eye; in fact they’re eating one of the engineers. It would appear that the negative aura of Mortos may have another side effect other than severe depression. + +Upon seeing you, they both attack like a pair of ghouls. You easily put them down with a couple of magic bolts, but the damage is done. + +You look at the portal and you ponder if you should risk going through it or possibly continue searching Mortos for the book and hope that maybe you could find a way out of here that way. + +You also ponder if you just stayed put that maybe someone from Evigrus would try to send someone else with a rope tied to them through the portal and you could get home that way. + +You ultimately do decide to wait for what you think is a few days but nobody shows up. You’re actually a little surprised, but then they might think that if going through killed you that what chance would any of them have? + +This doesn’t have a good effect on your own morale which has been diminishing by the day due to the oppressive aura of Mortos and your current hopeless situation. You also haven’t eaten or drank anything for quite some time, you’re starting to feel those effects as well. + +Lacking any other options, you decide that you’ll have to take a chance on the portal because you don’t think you’ll have the strength to find the book in your current condition, even if you had any idea where it might be located. + +You stare into the portal, which still changes different colors rapidly. You don’t have a good feeling about this. You’re fairly certain in fact that you’ll wind up on the other side in pieces, but there is little choice in this matter. + +“Well better an unknown risk than a certain death.” you say and you jump in… + +The good news is you do make it out of Mortos in one piece. + +The bad news is you reappear several miles under water in the middle of one of the oceans. Taken completely by surprise by this you gasp for air and your body cannot handle such crushing pressure. + +Your dead body falls to the bottom ocean where it provides nourishment for the creatures that live there.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 65 + +“It…it was horrible, my Emperor! The place was so dead. Like I could feel it everywhere…my…my hands…my skin…wrinkled with age! How could I have aged so quickly? It’s an evil place! Don’t send me back! I beg of you!” the test subject pleads while groveling at your boots, but all you do smile. + +“WE FOUND IT! WE’VE FINALLY FOUND IT!” you shout in glee. + +After Elam’s tinkering with machinery to repair the portal, sacrificing several lesser mages to fuel the portal with magical energy again, you and Galen trying to channel the energy to get the right location and after sending in several “test subjects” with ropes tied around them, you’ve at last discovered the way to reach the Isle of Mortos. + +The Island of Mortos seems to be so heavily disguised by magic that it’s impossible to actually find through normal means. Basically the necromancers only allow access if they want it to or in your case, meddling with a magic portal for so long that you eventually found it through trial and error. + +Now that you’ve found it, the current problem is that it’s a one-way trip. Hence the ropes you tied to the test subjects so you could pull them back through. (Though that still didn’t always ensure their return) + +There’s also the fact that “dialing” the way to get to Mortos in the first place has been fairly taxing on you and Galen who isn’t looking so great nowadays. + +“A testament to your persistence, my Emperor…can I go lay down? I feel sort of weak.” Galen remarks. +“Galen you’re a wizard, you of all people besides myself should be happy to discover a new mystery of the arcane! I mean with magic apparently dying out, I’d think this would be fairly interesting to you.” +“Emperor, in all honesty I’d rather just be back home using charm spells on young girls.” +“That’s your problem Galen, you have no true ambition!” you say. +“Yes, you’re right my Emperor. I’m a lowly worm before your greatness.” Galen says. +“I’ll let that remark pass since I KNOW you’re intelligent enough to NOT use sarcasm on me. And I’m not going to let your whining and depression annoy me today as this is a great break through.” + +At this point Galen says nothing and just shuffles off to find some place to lie down. You also ignore the test subject who has already been taken away by nearby Eyes to who knows where. + +You continue to stare at the portal, which will now lead you to Mortos. You almost want to enter right now, but you know that it will still have to wait. You call Elam over who normally isn’t a nervous sort, but is when he gets near the portal. + +“So…this is it then?” Elam asks. +“This is it Elam. Have you finished building that other smaller portal for me?” you say. +“It’s almost finished, though it took a lot of mithril to build it. Good thing Nyttrus had several deposits, because it’s not like we had much of it. Also it’s going to need magical energy of course for it to be fully powered. I imagine you’ve still got mages left?” +“Maybe a few still locked up, but I question if it’ll be enough…well there’s always Galen. Should work.” +“You’re going to sacrifice Galen?” +“He’s served his purpose and he’ll serve it one last time for the greater good of the Empire. He’s getting old and weak anyway, how many years does he really have left? Wasn’t aware that you held any fondness for him.” +“No, I don’t really. Still though…what about your Eternal Project?” +“What about it?” +“Well without any more mages you won’t be able to continue it correct?” +“If this plan goes the way I hope it does, it won’t matter, besides I thought you were coming up with an idea to take the Eternal Project in a new direction without the use of magic.” You say. +“I was, but then I had to focus my efforts on this project and as I know it was of great importance to you, I didn’t want to divert my attention.” Elam responds. +“Probably was wise of you. Well, after we get the second portal up and running, you’ll be able to pursue your desire for more biological experiments and find a new way of creating Eternals.” + +Elam nods and excuses himself to go back to work on finishing the other portal. The smaller one is going to be the “return” portal back here after its power up, “calibrated” and dragged through the Mortos portal. + +The test subject didn’t say anything about any ghoul creatures or other undead around, just a dead feeling everywhere so it looks like you go lucky as far as the location is concerned. Though you still have no idea where you’ll be located on Mortos. After all you only visited the place once and that was thirty years ago. You were so different back then. The trusting, loyal, good soldier that never questioned anything. + +You’ve been thinking more about those last few days with Casimir recently, your trip to Mortos and the days immediately afterwards. The big lie that Casimir perpetrated just to secure his own immortality was still nothing compared to the one that nobody except Jacob and Semra knew about. It’s still odd to think about how you were never truly meant to be an Eternal. + +Still, it’s often been said the bigger the lie; the more people are willing to believe it. Maybe its because your entire life is a “lie” that you managed to achieve so much within it. Maybe that’s why you managed to become a successful Emperor and maybe that’s why you intend to succeed where your “father” failed. + +Nicodemus, the necromancer that you encountered during your last trip to Mortos, tried to convince you to not pursue the same path as Casimir. Semra has tried to do the same on several occasions. As far as you know, they’re still the only two that are going to be your major obstacles between you and your goals. You aren’t sure what Semra’s been up to as there has been no sign of her or any indication of an attack from Dokkrus, but rest assured when she does pop up again, you have no doubt its going to be at the most inopportune time. + +As for Nicodemus, you imagine you’ll have quite a fight on your hands with him and that’s not even counting other necromancers that must live on the island and their undead. You haven’t been idle though. You’ve been practicing and strengthening your own magic abilities. + +Eventually you stop your reminiscing and decide you need to get on with your plans, you aren’t getting any younger. + +In another few weeks, Elam tells you that the second portal is ready, so you gather up Galen and the remaining mages to go about its activation. Galen repeatedly tells you that he doesn’t think there’s going to be enough energy within the captive mages power up the second portal, but you assure him that there will be. The fool doesn’t even consider the possibility that HE is going to be joining them. Well not until the last moment when he’s grabbed by Eyes and strapped down to the draining chair hooked up to the portal. + +“Emperor?! What is this?! No! I was loyal! You can’t! You…” Galen shouts before you punch him in the face and have him gagged. +“Stop whining Galen.” You say motioning Elam to hit the switch and watch the last of your mages being drained of their energy and life. + +When the portal is powered and you finish your calibrations, you have the smaller portal ready to be dragged through the larger one. Several Eyes, several third gen Eternals and some very nervous engineers all prepare to enter, plus one. + +“Emperor, you’re going with them?” Elam asks. +“I’m confident that this is going to work and if not, well then I don’t deserve to be Emperor any longer. Let’s get going.” You say. + +You enter the portal and you have that old familiar feeling… + +A deadness all around you. The land is still dead, everything is still drab and gray. Same way it was when you last were here. The others with you all begin to complain about not feelings quite right. + +“It’ll pass if you keep your mind focused, the key is to not let this place cause you to spiral into a depression. Come on we need to get this portal into a good place…that large rock structure in the ground over there looks as good as any. I want the engineers to embed this portal in it, don’t want it just standing out here in the open wasteland. Follow me and DON’T stray too far. There are magic areas or what are called negative zones. You step into one and you could be an old man or even a corpse before you knew what was going on. I’ll be able to detect them, just follow me.” + +Your small march to the rock destination is uneventful other than some of your people still saying how this all feels so hopeless. Unfortunately most of it is from the engineers who are less accustomed to this sort of thing. + +As you wait for the portal to be embedded in the rock, you begin to ponder if you still shouldn’t wait awhile before marching an army into Mortos. It might be this place sapping your “enthusiasm” but the grim reality of how difficult this is really going to be is starting to set in the closer you get to your goals. It does occur to you that Nicodemus was powerful enough to destroy Casimir with barely any effort. +> Wait +Whether this place is a cause of disillusionment or not, the fact does remain that you still need to take this goal step by step. While it’s true that you want to get this on with quickly, you can’t afford to rush headlong into things. + +Speaking of which, you also can’t allow hopelessness to take over the mindset of your people so you begin to yell words of encouragement to everyone. You talk about tales of former glories. Not just your own, but those also containing people resembling your current crew. Meaning you remind the third gens of their glorious deeds during the war against Nakol and the hated Iznac of Nyttrus. You remind the Eyes of their important work of maintain order throughout the Empire and how they’ve often they’ve played vital roles in undermining the enemy. + +And while the engineers have never usually directly participated in battle, you remind them of their contributions to building the weapons and machines of war that have repeatedly brought the Empire’s enemies low. Even now the skill of the engineers may possibly be one of the most important roles in achieving this mission. + +Sometimes words really can go a long way to motivation even when in an accursed place like this. Everyone more or less snaps out of their low spirits and gets on with their tasks. + +When the job is done, several people are still eager to leave this place and are more than willing to enter the portal regardless of whether its going to work or not. You still go first however, and taking a deep breath you enter the portal, which should go back to your previous location in Evigrus… + +And suddenly you do indeed find yourself back at Elam workshop in New Dessel. + +“You’re back!” Elam exclaims as the rest of your people suddenly appear beside you as well. Everyone is certainly happier to be back too. + +“The next time I get the chance to go in, I think I need to re-adjust the location of where its going to send returning people. The last thing I want is a bunch of undead wandering into New Dessel.” You say. +“Sounds like a plan. So…when are you invading?” Elam asks. +“I’m holding off, or rather re-thinking the approach just like I did with Dokkrus. Honestly this recent visit has put a few things in perspective. Tell me, have we made any advancement in those gnome automatons?” +“Automatons? Uh, not much since the end of the Nakol War. Nyttrus wasn’t the best environment for them and you wanted to keep a low profile in Dokkrus.” +“Yeah, well as much as I’d like to keep a low profile in Mortos, I don’t think its going to be possible for long and more importantly automatons don’t suffer morale problems. I know I said you were going to be able to work on your biological experiments, but you might need to hold off still and start making not only improvements on the automatons, but making A LOT of them.” + +Elam seems a little disappointed that once again his own ideas are going to be placed on hold again, but he doesn’t argue since it would be pointless anyway. + +You decide that you’re going to have to condition your people to steel their minds against the oppressive atmosphere of Mortos by having regular scouting missions and guard duty for the “return portal” on Mortos. You’re fairly certain that most, if not all the third gen Eternals are going to be able to achieve this without too many problems. The Eyes are mostly made up of “normal” humans (and a few elves) though they’re certainly trained for difficult conditions. As for anyone else you need to send in, you’re going to have to limit their time in Mortos and have them supervised by someone that has already proven themselves to be resistant to the debilitating effects. + +All the while, the new automatons will act as good support troops in case conflict should arise and you have no doubt that it will. You need to find that book that Casimir desired so badly and that’s going to require tracking it down first. This all may take a while, which brings you to the idea that the fourth gen Eternals are going to be ready in a couple years. Assuming you haven’t achieved your goals by then, you’ll be able to start sending them in as well, but then why wait? They’re going to have to get resilient to Mortos sometime. + +You’re next visit is to Brenda who has been looking more than a little worn and tired nowadays. She still does her job like the loyal Empire soldier she’s always been, but underneath is a lot of heartache from another lost love. You imagine the only thing that keeps her going nowadays is her love of training the Eternals. She’s always seen them as her “children” of sorts. Though today she’d going to lose them a few years early… + +“Now? They’re still two years away from proper training.” Brenda remarks. +“Well, there is a new war coming and they’re not only going to have to be prepared for it physically, but mentally as well. They’re going to start their first assignment in Mortos and they need to start getting accustomed to the horrors of the place because trust me, as good as you think you’ve prepared them, there is nothing that is going to prepare them for this experience short of going their personally.” You say. +“But…(sigh) nevermind. Take who you need.” +“Something wrong Brenda?” +“Of course something is wrong, you’ve come to me yet again asking me to hand over something I hold dear.” Brenda says starting to get upset. +“Brenda, I really don’t understand why the hell you’re getting upset with me, whether they go now or in two years either way, they’re going to leave here and you know this. I know you see them as your children, but as any parent knows, you’ve got to let them go eventually.” You say, but Brenda’s not really listening. +“Everytime you see me, it’s just to ask me for something, not even to exchange pleasantries. Years ago it was Warrick, now it’s the fourth gens, I’m fully expecting you to come in here one day and ask me to go sacrifice myself for the greater good of the Empire. I mean why not right? I already heard how you’ve recently sacrificed all the remaining mages in the Empire, which means no more Eternal Project. Won’t be much need for me anymore.” +“Now you’re being overly dramatic. I think you know that isn’t true.” You say. + +Brenda puts her head in her hands and then makes a rubbing motion at her temples. + +“Apologies. I’m just…tired. Tired of all this. I continual question why I’m even doing this anymore. I’m losing my passion for it and just counting down the days for death it seems. I know you’ll say that I should be doing this for the greater good of the Empire and all of that, but I just don’t believe it anymore. I mean obviously I’d never be a traitor and I’m too old to do anything else with my life, but quite honestly I’m not seeing much to look forward to in the future.” + +Given Brenda’s state of mind, you’d almost think she’d taken a trip to Mortos. You probably could come up with something inspiring, but this is Brenda and she’d see right through it, or even if she didn’t she wouldn’t be in the mood to here it, so you take a gamble and try a different approach. + +“Brenda, I’m going to tell you something that I’ve NEVER told anyone. I wasn’t even supposed to BE an Eternal. I’m a fucking mistake. A bureaucratic mistake that was covered up so the Emperor wouldn’t get pissed off. Oh and here’s another kicker. The Emperor? He died because of me.” + +This information certainly gets Brenda’s attention. + +“That’s right, I’m partially responsible for killing our old Emperor Casimir, but if its any consolation, he fucking deserved it because not only was he responsible for Alison’s death, but he was ALSO the one that had your husband assassinated.” + +Brenda’s face now turns to shock as you reveal secrets that you’ve kept hidden for so long. + +“I wasn’t even supposed to be here and I saw everything I believed in nearly destroyed with a single action and one of the people I grew up completely trusting to be the worst liar of all. Even that fucking svelk bitch didn’t lie to me like Casimir did. And yet like an idiot I still blindly trusted him all the way up until his spell failed and resulted in his death.” + +You pause for a moment to allow Brenda to ask any questions, but she has none. She still continues to remain in silent shock. + +“So if you think that the institution you were bred, raised and trained to loyally serve all your life has somehow resulted in you feeling underappreciated, well…that’s partially true. The Empire is unforgiving. It demands everything and YOU as an Eternal are one of its top servants, which means the most is expected of you. As Emperor everything is expected of me. Quite honestly, I get tired too. Even when I’m winning, there’s some sort of catch, or problem, or something that makes it less fun than it could be. Getting old doesn’t help. In fact if I wasn’t Emperor, I might be questioning my future as well. I’d probably march into Dokkrus or Mortos by myself and just fight and fight until I was eventually overwhelmed and killed, but that isn’t an option for me. I AM the Empire and if its going to survive, I can’t fucking die. It’s that simple. If there was any other way, I’d probably take it, because the journey that has lead me up to this point hasn’t been easy and it’s resulted in considerable losses.” + +You touch Brenda’s hand. + +“So all that being said, if I as a mistake who should’ve been killed at birth can shoulder the weight of the entire Empire, I believe YOU as a TRUE Eternal, can handle the sacrifices that are asked of you. Look, I won’t need all of the fourth gens right now…just give me your best leaders. They’ll be going in with the third gens anyway, so they won’t get too overwhelmed.” You say. +“I’ll get a list and get back to you as soon as possible my Emperor.” Brenda answers. +“Okay…and thank you Brenda for all your hard work for the Empire. I appreciate it.” +“I live to serve. Long live the Empire.” + +With those last few words, you leave Brenda’s presence feeling more exhausted than you did when you visited Mortos. In fact you think you’d rather be back there. +> Years pass... +Year 67 + +“Svelk? And you’re sure about this?” you ask. +“Absolutely sure my Emperor. We fought off a band of them just the other day. There have also been other sightings of them roaming about the wastes of Mortos.” General Damon responds. + +You silently curse to yourself about this news. You knew the svelk were going to show up at the most inopportune time and sure enough they have. You didn’t expect them on Mortos though. Is this what Semra was planning? Is she trying to get the book herself? + +General Damon goes on to report that the fourth gens have been proving themselves very well in battle and showing good resistance against the negative effects of Mortos. + +“They’re a true credit to the name Eternal, my Emperor.” Damon remarks. +“Hrm. Well I’d expect nothing less, especially after having the best trainer.” You say. +“Mentor Brenda was indeed a very good teacher, I will always be grateful for her lessons when she taught me the rest of the third gens.” Damon says with a bit of pride. + +Cassandra speaks up next and tells you that the Eyes have still not yet located the temple you last remember the book being at, but they have located more than a few ghouls towns and mapped out where some negative zones are located. + +“Just glad we’ve got a relatively large population of Sul Monkeys to use as testing for such zones. It certainly cuts down on our own casualties.” Cassandra says and then starts to say something else before stopping. +“What is it?” you ask. +“Oh nothing my Emperor, it’s just a silly thought, nevermind.” +“You were going to ask me if humans are related to Sul Monkeys somehow, weren’t you?” +“How did you know?” Cassandra asks. +“Given that I had to hear Semra and several other svelk refer to humans as monkeys on more than one occasion, I’ve heard the theories before.” +“Oh. So is it true? I mean my parents said it was and most others of my kind believe it, but I always wondered and I figured you being the Emperor and all might know for certain…” + +You nearly laugh. + +“As much as I might like the idea of being all knowing, I have no idea nor do I really care. You’d probably be better off asking Elam, he knows more about all that stuff. Speaking of which I need to go talk with him about increasing automaton production.” + +As you’re about to make your way to do just that, you receive an urgent message. + +“Message from Kivan, Emperor. Very urgent.” The courier says. +“Everything is urgent according to Kivan, let’s see…” you say and then begin to read. + +Then you feel a small sinking feeling when you see the news. It’s a short message, but one of great impact. + +“I have to go.” You say and leave New Dessel. + +Brenda has killed herself. Her body was found by an Eye who was going to pick her up for her re-assignment as a trainer for them. She was in her bathtub with slashed wrists. Her body has already been taken for preparation; Kivan decided it would be best to keep this incident relatively quiet and contact you immediately. + +When you arrive at the capital, Kivan is already outside waiting for you and trying to apologize for disturbing you. + +“Nevermind all that, where is she?” +“The mortuary, of course. She’ll be ready for the hero’s funeral that…” +“No. No, we aren’t going to have all that. She wouldn’t want it. We’ll do what we did with Warrick. A simple private funeral.” You say still trying to wrap your head around the fact that Brenda’s dead. +“As you wish Emperor. Uh…this was also found on the site of her death. It hasn’t been opened and it was addressed to you.” + +Kivan hands you an envelope, which you take and read alone. + +My Emperor + +By the time you read this, you no doubt will know I have decided to move on from this world. I just can’t go on any longer. I’ve given all that I have and anymore that I do have left isn’t worth much anyway. + +I thank you for not taking all the fourth gen Eternals immediately and giving me those last two years with most of them, just as you gave me that one last year with Warrick. + +I did try to heed your words that you spoke to me a couple years ago and I almost even convinced myself, but ultimately they just weren’t enough. I hope that I haven’t disappointed you too much. I always tried not to; all of us did and still do. + +You told me that you were a “mistake” that wasn’t supposed to be an Eternal. I don’t believe that’s true. Whatever the nature of events that occurred; there is no denying that you aren’t a TRUE Eternal. You are the best of all of us and I have no doubt that you won’t accomplish your goals in achieving immortality to keep the Empire alive. + +I always had a feeling you’d outlive all of us, even when that svelk bitch tried to break your spirit on the first day of training. Personally I believe you’d outlive the Empire itself if you and it weren’t so intrinsically linked. + +I die knowing that not just the Empire will live on, but that the name Eternal also lives on. + +It was an honor to serve under you. I go now to join our fallen siblings. + +Brenda + +Not much moves you emotionally nowadays, but this has certainly done it. You aren’t disappointed by Brenda’s actions. You understand them from her point of view, you just wish you could’ve convinced her that her life did still have purpose. Brenda may not have been the traditional Eternal bringing glory on the battlefield, but her role was nevertheless an important one and like the loss of Warrick, Roldan, Kane and Decena, the Empire is just a little worse off because she’s no longer part of it. + +Brenda is eventually placed where the other great heroes of the Empire are entombed. Her deeds will forever be remembered and when the news of her death is made public to the Eternals she trained you remind them all that she would want them to not falter in their assignments nor spend time lingering over her passing. + +Life goes on and so do your goals. + +Getting back to the current problem at hand, the recent incursions of svelk are growing to become more frequent, still no real confirmation on what they’re doing there exactly. It hardly matters you suppose since whatever they’re there for it’s only to hinder you. + +Knowing Semra, part of her plan is to try to divide your attention. She wants you to attack Dokkrus so you’ll get tied up in a land war there and lose your edge in Mortos. Better that you should keep to your plan. If Semra wants to open up another front, she’s going to have to come to you and you’re more than ready for that. + +In fact you probably can do more to damage her if you start capturing some of her people. Granted svelk aren’t necessarily the most talkative captives, but if you can capture some of her mages to power up a second portal or even more, well that would at least allow you have more entryways in and out of Mortos. You also could hamper the svelk by destroying or capturing their own portals. Either way, your best decision is to keep your efforts focused on Mortos. You’ve still got a book to track down and you haven’t even begun to face the full power of the necromancers yet. In fact you’re starting to wonder when that shoe is going to drop. + +Year 70 + +Ignoring the stench and claws of your nearby zombie attackers, your Eternals make quick work of them while you put down the necromancer with a lightning bolt to his baldhead. He’s not coming back and the last of his minions fall uselessly into piles of putrid mush. +If there’s one thing that’s sure to stop an undead army, it’s taking out the necromancer. + +The undead in general are vastly outclassed, not just in the face of your highly skilled soldiers, but also due your superior weaponry. Guns have advanced drastically since they were introduced to the battlefield and such power easily rips through the relatively weak and slow moving undead. Your automatons are the perfect foil against them. + +Really the only advantage the dead have over your own people is numbers and their annoying tendency to not stay down. But eliminate the necromancer and a shambling rotting horde goes down quicker than a house of cards. True, there is still enough negative energy here to keep some of the corpses still standing, but not enough to be a threat and certainly not as organized. + +Still, fighting the necromancers on their own home isn’t completely easy. If it were, you wouldn’t still be at war with them. The insane Mortos ghoul “citizens” actually give you more trouble besides the necromancers themselves. Something about the fact that they’re actually “living” makes them somehow worse than the undead. Their gibbering, howling and just general unpleasantness is still enough to make you shudder at the fact that you nearly once got caught by a pack of them on your first visit here. + +Of course the group that has been the biggest thorn in your side are the svelk, which as you’ve come to learn through captives is that they are actually allied with the necromancers. + +You have no idea how this ever came to be, something about a very old “agreement” which you never knew the svelk as a collective group could be so honorable about. Of course maybe its just Semra’s doing, but either way it doesn’t change the fact that they’ve been making things difficult for you. + +So far you’ve found none of their portals back to Dokkrus, so it appears that the svelk are sending their people on a one way trip. Of course if they’re allies, they might have an easier time of heading back through the necromancers’ magic. + +You haven’t found the book yet either despite actually locating the temple where it was last time. Figures it would be moved and you have an idea that it’s probably with Nicodemus who still hasn’t made an appearance or tried to contact you at all like you almost expected he would. + +A few “cities” have been scouted out on Mortos, but none of them seem like places of major importance. Given the utter ruin of every population center its hard to know exactly where it might be kept, so you’re going to just go through the tedious process of search every corner of this dismal island if you have to. + +“Emperor, Sightmaster Cassandra has just sent word that they’ve managed to capture another svelk mage.” A fourth gen comes up to report to you while you’re making double sure that the necromancer is dead. + +“Not surprised, Cass loves capturing svelk more than she loved intimidating humans.” You respond. + +You imagine Flevas would’ve enjoyed the chance as well if he were still alive. You sometimes wish the elf were still around, as he’d definitely be an asset right now, but then you wish a lot of people were still around. Even your top advisor Kivan died a few years ago of natural causes. That’s a rarity nowadays, at least for people that know you on a personal basis. His replacement is capable, but honestly you barely remember what his replacement’s name is since you’ve been spending most of your time in Mortos. + +Some probably believe you shouldn’t push yourself so hard, and they may very well have a point since you’re not in your twenties anymore and you’re in pain most of the time due to a combination of age, old wounds, and just general exertion. You can’t afford to stop though, not when you’re so close to your goal. The funny thing is, your time here in Mortos somewhat envigorates you. It’s probably just a mindset as it certainly can’t be physically. Still, you haven’t been involved in a real war since Nyttrus and getting back into battle again, even to your limited degree (mostly relying on magic) almost makes you feel “young” again. But then, you always were one to embrace the call of war and the personal glories of direct combat. Something about killing your enemies directly has always been a lot more satisfying. If you weren’t weakened and slowed by your age, you’d be tempted to go wading in with a sword in hand again. + +Only you could find a zest for “life” in a literal land of the dead. + +“Should I tell the messenger any new orders you may have for her?” the fourth gen asks. +“No, just tell him the message has been received and approved of. Cassandra knows what to do with the dark elven bastard. She’s probably already hauling him away back to Evigrus. We should have enough of them soon.” You say. + +You’ve already been going through with your plan of using the svelk mages that you’ve managed to capture to “power up” new portals…bigger portals. Portals large enough that will allow a large new weapon of destruction to enter Mortos. + +These weapons are called the juggernauts; large heavily armored wheeled machines mounted with a cannon and repeater rifles on their sides. A crew apparently operates them from the inside. You have no idea how Elam came up with the concept, but you’re glad he did. He must be channeling his creative energy back into technological advances since he hasn’t had the time to work on his desire to his biological experiments. (Every once in awhile he still tells you that he’d like to restart a new Eternal Project) + +They might not be airships, but if you can get them rolling into Mortos, it would definitely give an advantage or at least even the playing field, because deep down you know you still haven’t seen the worst this place has to offer. At some point when the necromancers start getting desperate and realize that you aren’t going to just go away, they’re going to start bringing out their own “big guns” and you’re going to have to be ready for whatever those may be. +> Years pass... +Year 75 + +The longer you spend in this place, the more you’re starting to like it and that is somewhat of a worrying thought to you, because it certainly isn’t a thought shared by anyone under your command. The last five years have probably been a nightmare to most. + +You’ve had to rotate your “normal” military personnel fairly regularly. Most of them can only handle the psychological impact of the powerful undead horrors the necromancers have unleashed a limited amount of times before they become more of a liability rather than an asset. You can only imagine how full the asylums are getting back home. For the most part you’ve regulated most of your military to defend Evigrus since the svelk in last two years have tried to open up a new front by transporting groups of elite via portals. They’ve been relatively unsuccessful and even less so when they attempted to do the same thing on Nyttrus where your kobolds easily overwhelmed them and used the land to their advantage. The svelk for the most part have seemingly pulled out of Mortos though altogether. + +You’ve had to pull back your Eyes as well. Well trained they may be, most of them are still human and with that they suffer the same failings of the mind. It’s just as well, since things are starting to get a little unstable back home. It’s probably a combination of several things (Some of which might be all the new asylum patients) so Cassandra and the Eyes are back to their primary job of maintaining order. + +Even the Eternals are starting to get weary of this war and most of them have aged several years than normal. Still, they are Eternals, and whether they are third or fourth generation, they stand by your side…even in death. + +Since your time here, you’ve learned how to use the necromancer’s magic against them. You’ve managed to unlock the secrets of necromancy. You’re no master at it, and it takes great concentration on your part, but its come in handy at times. The odd thing is you seem to only be able to maintain control over fallen Eternals. Attempting to raise others has only resulted in them eventually turning against you. You wonder if its because of the way Eternals are “made” or their conditioned loyaty from birth, or maybe a combination of both that seems to result in their dedication to you and resist the overpowering will of the necromancers. + +As far as your own concerns about your state of mind you’ve been trying to hold it together. You sometimes think you’re living on borrowed time and that if you don’t achieve your goal soon, this place will eventually consume you. Maybe that’s why you’re starting to like it here, because you feel so close to death and this place is basically a home to the dead. + +But you’re not dying here if you can help it; in fact the whole point to this is so you don’t die at all. You’ve already begun to unlock the talents of the necromantic arts by yourself. As soon as you get that book, you KNOW you’ll be able to master them completely and become immortal. + +And that goal is now closer than ever because you’ve finally tracked it down. + +You stand on a slightly elevated bit of land with what remains of your army of Eternals (both living and dead) and a few juggernauts filled with crews of half mad engineers. In the distance a ruined fortress lies before you. It is a non-descript thing and has no real defenses since its walls are mostly broken or gone completely, but THAT is where your goal lies. Inside it somewhere. + +And that is also where Nicodemus must be. + +You need to attack now, because you know it’ll be only a matter of time before reinforcements to help him show up. There are ALWAYS undead, no matter how many you put down in this place. + +“General Damon, today the Empire assures its mastery over death itself.” You say. +“We are all prepared my Emperor, we just await your word.” + +You nod and for a moment there is complete silence. + +“ATTACK!” you shout and then in unison, you and your Eternals advance towards the target. You lead from the front, just like the old days… + +Your juggernauts rumble past the sides of your army and then that’s when you finally hear him in your head… + +“This will not end well for you, Eternal. Turn back from this path now, or suffer the same fate as your father Casimir.” + +Naturally you ignore this pitiful attempt at stopping you, so Nicodemus finally unleashes his defenses. + +Several undead rise up out of the ground. Not just the normal type either, these are the remains of some sort of long dead gigantic beasts that must’ve once roamed this island. They are accompanied by the appearance of several ghostly forms. Wraiths and spectres with their ability to drain life with a mere touch. + +To your far left and far right, hordes of skeletons and zombies come popping up out of the ground. Nicodemus probably believes that you’ve foolishly walked into an obvious trap, but honestly you knew something like this would happen. Your goal here is to get the book at all costs. + +“Death will not stop us today! But then some of you personally already know that! Destroy these abominations and take the fortress!” you shout. + +One of your juggernauts is already moving far ahead of your army and firing off its canon, blowing away bits of the gigantic bone horrors. Under the right circumstances you believe it would easily finish up the task, but it isn’t those undead giants that are the problem, the problem lies with the wraiths and spectres who easily glide through the machine and turning it into a steel coffin by killing the crew within. + +Your other juggernaut decides not to engage such ghostly creatures and instead turns off to fend off the approaching undead horde to your left. Hopefully it can destroy a good chunk of them. + +The undead giants still intact begin to lumber forward to meet your army while throwing large pieces of stone lying nearby. You cast a barrier in front of your army to protect against the projectiles and then throw your own projectiles in the form of fire at the giants while your army opens fire at their legs until the bone and rotting flesh that are allowing them to still stand is finally severed to a degree that the rest of their bulk goes crashing to the ground. Most of them splinter into pieces from the fall, but other continue to come at you, dragging themselves toward you with their arms. These are dispatched with a few well places magic bolts and more gunfire. + +With the giants mostly taken care of, you notice the spectres and wraiths steadily approaching. You immediately drop the barrier and redirect your energy to cast an enchantment over your soldiers’ hand weapons. Guns are useless against things like spectres and wraiths, but with some skill they can still be overcome by an enchanted melee weapon. + +“Prepare for melee and don’t let them touch you!” you shout. + +The unearthly howls and shrieks by the ghostly assaliants fill your ears as you blast them with your magic bolts. Your dead Eternals come in very handy here as they directly engage the spectres and wraiths and try to shield their living brethren (and you) from being touched. It isn’t without some casualties though and the problems increase when the horde on your right finally reaches you. Fortunately the left side seems to be preoccupied with overwhelming the juggernaut, which has now resorted to its inside mounted repeater rifles, and just trying to run them over though its wheels are starting to get jammed with body parts. + +“FIGHT THROUGH THESE ROTTING BAGS, WE’RE NEARLY THERE!” you shout just in time to see several necromancers appear on the battlements and begin doing some sort of chant. + +Suddenly there’s an aura of death around you, and it isn’t just becase you’re surrounded by zombies. You feel like you just walked into one of those negative zones, except this one is being forced on you. + +You’re old enough as it is, you can’t afford to age anymore. You have to do something now because you won’t even make it to the broken fortress gates at this point. + +You call your Eternals to surround you and you begin to cast a spell of your own. Your living Eternals are suffering the affects of the necromancers’ spell, but trying to cancel their spell through your willpower isn’t going to help because they’re too strong collectively. + +So you rely on your traditional blast everything in the nearby area and hope it kills everything. + +You bring down an inferno on not just your enemies, but you and your people as well. Though you attempt to protect some with a surrounding barrier, but you just don’t have the strength to protect everyone. + +Most of the horde to your right are incinerated as are most of your people. There isn’t even much left to “raise.” + +To your left, there is a similar sight with a pile of burned undead no longer in any condition to pose a threat, though the juggernaut sits still and completely blackened by the rain of fire. The crew inside has no doubt cooked to death. + +Most importantly are the effects you see in front of you. You no longer see the row of necromancers and no longer feel the effects of their spell. The ruined fortess is also partially on fire, but it being made of stone it isn’t doing much more than cracking the already damaged structure. + +You’re incredibly drained however. This battle has really taken it out of you and you’ve still got Nicodemus and who knows what else to deal with. General Damon still by your side helps you from falling down. The Eternals that are still alive are finishing up putting down the undead that managed to survive by being within your protective barrier when you cast it. + +“Come on, my Emperor. As you said, we’re almost there.” He says. + +There are other necromantic arts that you’ve learned besides raising your Eternals, though you haven’t really pondered using them since there wasn’t any need or you still didn’t really have mastery over them. + +One of these was emulating the life drain of some of the undead here. + +And suddenly you’re actually pondering draining your own Eternals of their lifeforce to sustain your own. The thought does not give you any pleasure to do so, but you just aren’t sure if you’re going to make it otherwise. +> Drain the living +If there were any other way, you’d do it, but there isn’t. You set out on this task with the mindset of achieving it at all costs. And if this task involves the death of ALL your troops, then so be it. They will have died in honor of the Empire and their Emperor. + +The irony isn’t lost on you that you’ll be essentially doing something similar to what Casimir was planning on doing with you. + +“Damon, your service to me will always be remembered.” You say and then tighten your grip on him as he continues to prop you up. Before he can reply, you begin the process. It happens so quick that he doesn’t even have time to struggle or cry out. His body falls to the ground a drained husk. + +You feel a little better, but far from full strength. Your remaining Eternals stand nearby in utter shock. You know several of them were always a little uncomfortable with the fact that you could raise the dead, all of them accept the idea that they are to die in battle for you…but this a little different. They aren’t sure what to think. + +“Eternals! My children! An Eternal’s life is dedicated utterly to the Empire and by proxy it’s Emperor! Do not hesitate before your Emperor! Your FATHER. In order for me to defeat my enemies, I need you! I need you all as I always have! I cannot do this alone and I willingly admit it for there is no shame in a father needing the help of his children! It is true your bodies will die today, but all of you will LIVE on through me. Are YOU not willing to fulfill your oaths to make the ultimate sacrifice for me? Are you not deserving of the name ETERNAL?” you shout. + +There is a slight silence after your speech and for a moment you believe you’re going to have to take what you need by force, but just as you foolishly did when Casimir asked it of you, all your remaining Eternals willing step forward and bow to you on one knee accepting their fate. + +“If it is your will my Emperor that we die to today so that you may achieve victory, then we accept our fates with dignity.” + +Blind loyalty, it’s a beautiful thing… + +Without another word you proceed to drain the life force of your Eternals. To their credit, most of them make a minimum of sound as they die. One by one they fall to the ground as husks. + +You on the other hand begin to feel a lot better in fact you believe you’ve actually turned back the clock a bit! You don’t have a mirror to look at your face, but your hands aren’t as wrinkled anymore and when you go to touch your face, you feel less wrinkles there as well. You don’t even feel all normal aches and pains you’ve gained through old age. (They’re still there though) + +While you’re marveling at this magic feat, you hear that voice in your head again… + +“You didn’t heed anything I tried to tell you, did you Eternal? If Casimir were still here, I’m sure he’d be proud that he molded a near perfect copy of himself. Enter then…let us get this over with so that you may learn how futile all your plans have been. It will be the black trap door to the far left once your enter the fortress. I think the fire from your little inferno rain has died down around it by now. Down the ladder and straight ahead to the large room. Can’t miss it.” Nicodemus says. + +The tone in Nicodemus’ voice is almost one of boredom. He either doesn’t believe you’ll be any serious threat against him or either that he’s just as eager to put an end to this conflict once and for all. + +You’re not going down there completely alone though. With a little effort, you raise a few of your recently drained Eternals back from the dead. As usual, they no longer retain any “personality” they just exist to follow your commands. Sort of how they were trained to do in life actually. + +While you’re doing all this, you can’t help but feel like you’re still being watched or there is another presence here and you don’t mean Nicodemus. + +You enter the ruined fortress, which still has a few minor fires burning, but nothing dangerous. You see the trapdoor where Nicodemus mentioned it and go a few more steps before stopping. + +“Semra…I know you’re here thanks to our little mind link.” You say looking up and around for her. + +Semra materializes between you and the trapdoor and your dead Eternals stand ready. + +“So let me guess, you’re here to distract me or waste my time while Nicodemus sneaks away to take the book elsewhere?” you ask. +“Actually I’m here to stop you from taking it period since I’m the only one who seems to actually care about this world anymore.” +“You care about the world? Since when?” +“My dear Eternal, I care about the world when it’s about to be destroyed by a short sighted mistake that has delusions of grandeur and a serious case of megalomania.” +“When you say mistake, do you mean me specifically or your actions that allowed me to live in the first place?” +“Both I suppose. I know I should just try to kill you, but somehow the maternal instinct in me just makes it difficult sometimes…” Semra steps forward, but when she sees that you (and your Eternals) are not about to let her get any closer she backs away again. + +“Oh right, that’s why you’ve been sending svelk warbands to continually try to kill me.” You say. +“Pfft. You know as well as I do, you were never in any real danger…well no danger you couldn’t handle anyway. If I really wanted to kill you, I would’ve made a better effort don’t you think?” +“Not really. I know you Semra, and you like playing games. Perhaps you didn’t so call try hard enough because it would be more amusing to you to watch me struggle. So you did just enough to make things difficult, and figured I’d either give up or if your people got lucky, then great. If not, well there was always the entire island of Mortos doing a good enough job of trying to kill me.” + +Semra smiles a bit at your theory. + +“Well, I suppose you do know me a little better now that our minds are so closely linked. To be fair though, I never thought you’d give up. I knew you’d die first if it came down to it.” +“Whatever, I’m tired of talking…” you say raising your hands to cast a spell. +“Wait!” Semra says backing up towards the trapdoor and getting into a defensive position. +“WHAT!?” +“Just... Just hear me out okay?” +“Hear you…Are you drunk or something?” you say in exasperation. +“Look you can see into my mind that I have no trickery planned. This is just me here. I don’t even have any reinforcements.” + +Semra at this point relaxes her stance by opening her arms wide. She has completely let her guard down, physically and mentally. + +She’s telling the truth. There is no trickery and this isn’t a delaying tactic, Nicodemus is still waiting for you. You also sense a little concern within her. You have to admit that’s somewhat surprising. + +“You’ve got a few seconds. Better make them good.” You say. +“Okay. Look, don’t do this. That book nearly destroyed the world before, it may or may not hold the secrets to immortality, but it also opens up a gate to the realm of the dead! You think Mortos is bad? Think about when that gate is opened up!” +“Yes, yes, I’ve heard this horror story before. Nicodemus told me about it right after he killed Casimir. If I’d had any sense, I would’ve tried to take the book then and saved me all this trouble in the first place.” you answer. + +Semra shakes her head. + +“If you had any sense, you’d turn back right now.” +“Hm. I’ll be sure to have that written on your tombstone, unless you’re planning on running off and letting Nicodemus shoulder the responsibility of trying to kill me.” +“Nicodemus doesn’t even give a shit anymore what you do. I’m sure he’s contacted you. Haven’t you detected a tone of apathy in his voice?” + +You chuckle. + +“Are you serious? You’re saying Nicodemus has no intention of stopping me?” +“No, he doesn’t. At least not anymore. He claims he’s tired of life, so he’s effectively given up.” +“I don’t believe it.” +“Believe that or don’t, but one thing you better believe is that book is bad for you, me, and everyone on this fucking world. It already turned Mortos into a permanent graveyard and it eventually resulted in the destruction of my own Empire because we svelk had to make a pact with the infernal realm just to combat the utter annihilation that would’ve consumed everyone. We even made a deal with the necromancers that should this problem ever get this bad again, we would assist to prevent it if possible. Never thought we’d have to actually honor it though just because we didn’t think anyone get close enough and be foolish enough to try again.” Semra says. +“Yeah…the destruction of your Empire doesn’t sound like a bad thing. And it wasn’t the book that caused that; it was your own government’s idiocy with dealing with demons in the first place. So once again, you lot were your own worst enemy.” You say. + +Semra rubs her head in an attempt to continue to try to “get through” to you. + +“Look, you won. I mean think about it, you’ve unlocked some of the secrets of necromancy and even mastered some of its spells. I just saw you drain the lives of these now dead Eternals standing near you. You drained their lives and made yourself even a little younger. Think about that for a moment. You’ve already ACHIEVED immortality. I mean yes, it isn’t perfect and you’re going to need an ongoing supply of people to sustain you, but you’re the ruler of the Empire. How hard is it going to be to just shuffle in a bunch of worthless peasants, criminals, sveld, or whoever every so often to be feasted on like cattle?” +“I’m not a wendigo or ghoul you know.” You say establishing the fact that you are a lot of things, but cannibal isn’t one of them. +“I don’t mean literally of course, but the premise is the same.” + +You continue to listen while also continuing to read Semra’s mind. You still sense no lying and nothing but sincerity. Unless she’s found a way to lie so convincingly that she herself believes everything…which you wouldn’t put past her. She does have somewhat of a point about draining the life force of people being able to sustain you theoretically indefinitely. + +“We of course are never going to have a relationship in the way I’d desire us to. We aren’t even going to be friends. And one day you and I are going to finally meet on the battlefield and one of us is going to die, but I tell you…no I BEG you…DO NOT do this thing. This path will lead to all of our ruin and nobody will win save for death itself.” + +Semra looks on at you expecting your response. +> Turn back +Maybe it’s due to sensing no deception and hearing Semra actually beg you for something that does it, but she actually manages to convince you. + +“Okay.” You reply. +“…Really?” Semra says with a little shock. +“You’ve never lied to me Semra. You’ve always had an ulterior motive, but you’ve never lied. I can’t even sense a hidden motive either and given your genuine concern I have to believe that there must be something to what you’re saying.” +“Okay…so where does that leave us?” +“Same as always. However since I know if I engage you in combat right now you’ll just run away as soon as you start losing, so I suggest we leave this place and just chalk this up as a sign of things to come on Dokkrus.” +“I’ll be waiting.” Semra says. + +The pair of you linger a few seconds looking at each other before you back away releasing control of your dead Eternals and allowing them to fall to the ground. As you leave the fortress, you half expect a comment from Nicodemus in your head again, but you hear nothing though perhaps he knows you’re planning on leaving because you aren’t attacked by anything on your long trek back to safe territory. + +When you arrive at “Home camp” you’re immediately seen to by the Eternal detachment that constantly guard the portals back home. + +“Emperor are you all right?” one of the Eternals asks. +“I’m fine. Start telling people to pull out of here, I got what I came for.” You say and return to Evigrus where the aura is a lot livelier and a lot less oppressive. + +You have a kind of immortality now. It isn’t perfect, but you believe that it should work for your purposes. Having solved the problem of dying via old age, you decide to set up your next major plan. Invading Dokkrus. + +Year 80 + +“So you’re sure Semra is in this fortress you speak of?” you ask Cassandra. +“Yes Emperor. We’ve seen her going into and out of the place several times now.” +“Good, hopefully we can get her before this time before she runs off again. Let’s try to capture more svelk this time as well, I think I’ll need a bit of a recharge after this is over. The life force of the svelk is so… invigorating.” +“If you say so my Emperor.” Cassandra answers shuffling a bit nervously. + +Since you’ve been here on Dokkrus you’ve been killing two harpies with one stone by draining svelk to sustain yourself. They’re a great target for your purposes. They’re your enemy for one, but due to their long life spans they sustain you a lot longer than a shorter lived race like humans for example. + +Still even with this advantage, as the years have gone on you’ve noticed a need to drain more svelk with more frequency just to sustain yourself. It is probably this past time that has Cassandra a bit nervous given that she’s an elf herself. It is a bit of a slight concern for yourself as well because you didn’t think this was going to be quite the problem it currently is becoming. + +In any event, you’re fine for now and even after you go kill Semra there are more than enough svelk to round up, a whole continent full of them. Maybe you could even do something similar to them like what Casimir did with the gnomes. + +Wasting no more time, you order an assault upon the fortress where Semra was last located. The siege goes fairly quickly, Semra must be running out of powerful svelk mages to give you a challenge anymore. + +When you get inside the fortress, you attempt to follow your inherent sense of where she might be, eventually you get to her private chambers where you’re beginning to sense her very strongly. Meanwhile a few of your Eternals catch up to you saying that they and the rest have been tearing the place up looking for Semra but say she’s nowhere to be found. + +“No…she’s here. I can sense her. In fact she’s so close I can almost touch her. Go search again, I’ll stay here and have a look around.” You say to your Eternals who immediately follow your commands and leave. + +Closing the door behind you make your next move. + +“Okay Semra, you can show yourself now. Come on now I know you’re here. No need to be shy, it’s just me and you. We won’t be disturbed and it won’t take long.” You say. + +At that moment Semra does indeed show herself and she materializes in front of you sitting on her bed. + +“I’m guessing you don’t mean sex.” She says. +“Oh no, the only penetration you’re going to feel today is this.” You say and brandish the mithril dagger. + +“My gift to you. I’m still surprised you have it.” Semra remarks. +“I made a promise I was going to one day stick this inside you and I aim to keep it.” You say and start approaching her. Semra still makes no attempt at aggression you can’t even detect any such thoughts in her head. In fact from what you can tell from her body language and her mind she’s resigned herself into giving herself up to you. + +“I thought you’d put up more of a fight than this.” You remark now in front of her. +“What for? At this point your power has grown to be greater than mine. I can’t beat you. You’ve already destroyed a portion of Dokkrus and made it hard enough for me to ever build up another force to oppose you again. And as you might have been able to tell I’m tired of running. You’ll just hunt me down again and since our minds have been linked its much easier for you now.” + +At this point Semra stands up from the bed. + +“So kill me now and fulfill all your desires since the day I first tormented you in class. Carry out all the revenge you’ve ever wanted due to my action…I only have one request.” +“Oh?” +“You told me that you’d give me one last kiss as you stuck the knife in. That’s my last wish.” + +Same old Semra. + +“Very well, as you wish then…Mistress.” + +You and Semra look at each for a moment in silence perhaps even wondering if things had been different…just maybe you two would have been an item in some strange way. + +Your lips press against Semra’s own and your dagger plunges into her stomach. As she stifles calling out in pain, you begin draining her life force. She manages to put both arms around you at this point. + +With the pair of you still embraced in a death kiss and your knife still being twisted inside her, you begin to feel her life force reinvigorating you. + +And then you don’t and then you begin to feel the exact opposite… + +Semra is starting to drain you! You attempt to pull away, but Semra squeezes on to you tighter and jumps up to wrap her legs around your waist as well. + +You don’t know how this is possible, you detected no malicious intent and Semra never had this sort of ability, she didn’t having any necromantic powers. + +Or at least she didn’t when you last met her. + +“Oh my dear sweet trusting Eternal, there were a few tricks that Nicodemus taught me before I took my own leave of Mortos. I have to admit though neither one of us expected you to listen to me back then. Even with extensively training myself to block you out of my deepest thoughts despite our link, I still didn’t think you’d listen to me having always been mistrustful of me in the past. Funny that the one time that you believed me to be completely truthful is the one time you should’ve trusted your suspicious nature.” + +You attempt to slam Semra into a wall and furniture, but it doesn’t get her off of you. You try to twist the dagger deeper inside her, but she bears the pain. You even try to punch her in the head, but by that time your punches aren’t enough to stop her. + +Eventually you lose enough energy that you fall to the floor with Semra still on top of you. Feeling very dizzy you see Semra pull the dagger out of her stomach. + +“Ah shit, (pant) that’s going to require some healing…glad I just recharged. Still could use a bit more though…shhhhh just let this happen lover.” + +You weakly try to get her off of you, but Semra easily pins both of your hands down on the floor. Semra then moves her body downward on to yours. Face to face, you lay helplessly before her. + +“Remember this.” She says and kisses you one last time and soon you are utterly drained to a husk and Semra has once again escaped long before anyone arrives to help you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>If there were any other way, you’d do it, but there isn’t. You set out on this task with the mindset of achieving it at all costs. And if this task involves the death of ALL your troops, then so be it. They will have died in honor of the Empire and their Emperor. + +The irony isn’t lost on you that you’ll be essentially doing something similar to what Casimir was planning on doing with you. + +“Damon, your service to me will always be remembered.” You say and then tighten your grip on him as he continues to prop you up. Before he can reply, you begin the process. It happens so quick that he doesn’t even have time to struggle or cry out. His body falls to the ground a drained husk. + +You feel a little better, but far from full strength. Your remaining Eternals stand nearby in utter shock. You know several of them were always a little uncomfortable with the fact that you could raise the dead, all of them accept the idea that they are to die in battle for you…but this a little different. They aren’t sure what to think. + +“Eternals! My children! An Eternal’s life is dedicated utterly to the Empire and by proxy it’s Emperor! Do not hesitate before your Emperor! Your FATHER. In order for me to defeat my enemies, I need you! I need you all as I always have! I cannot do this alone and I willingly admit it for there is no shame in a father needing the help of his children! It is true your bodies will die today, but all of you will LIVE on through me. Are YOU not willing to fulfill your oaths to make the ultimate sacrifice for me? Are you not deserving of the name ETERNAL?” you shout. + +There is a slight silence after your speech and for a moment you believe you’re going to have to take what you need by force, but just as you foolishly did when Casimir asked it of you, all your remaining Eternals willing step forward and bow to you on one knee accepting their fate. + +“If it is your will my Emperor that we die to today so that you may achieve victory, then we accept our fates with dignity.” + +Blind loyalty, it’s a beautiful thing… + +Without another word you proceed to drain the life force of your Eternals. To their credit, most of them make a minimum of sound as they die. One by one they fall to the ground as husks. + +You on the other hand begin to feel a lot better in fact you believe you’ve actually turned back the clock a bit! You don’t have a mirror to look at your face, but your hands aren’t as wrinkled anymore and when you go to touch your face, you feel less wrinkles there as well. You don’t even feel all normal aches and pains you’ve gained through old age. (They’re still there though) + +While you’re marveling at this magic feat, you hear that voice in your head again… + +“You didn’t heed anything I tried to tell you, did you Eternal? If Casimir were still here, I’m sure he’d be proud that he molded a near perfect copy of himself. Enter then…let us get this over with so that you may learn how futile all your plans have been. It will be the black trap door to the far left once your enter the fortress. I think the fire from your little inferno rain has died down around it by now. Down the ladder and straight ahead to the large room. Can’t miss it.” Nicodemus says. + +The tone in Nicodemus’ voice is almost one of boredom. He either doesn’t believe you’ll be any serious threat against him or either that he’s just as eager to put an end to this conflict once and for all. + +You’re not going down there completely alone though. With a little effort, you raise a few of your recently drained Eternals back from the dead. As usual, they no longer retain any “personality” they just exist to follow your commands. Sort of how they were trained to do in life actually. + +While you’re doing all this, you can’t help but feel like you’re still being watched or there is another presence here and you don’t mean Nicodemus. + +You enter the ruined fortress, which still has a few minor fires burning, but nothing dangerous. You see the trapdoor where Nicodemus mentioned it and go a few more steps before stopping. + +“Semra…I know you’re here thanks to our little mind link.” You say looking up and around for her. + +Semra materializes between you and the trapdoor and your dead Eternals stand ready. + +“So let me guess, you’re here to distract me or waste my time while Nicodemus sneaks away to take the book elsewhere?” you ask. +“Actually I’m here to stop you from taking it period since I’m the only one who seems to actually care about this world anymore.” +“You care about the world? Since when?” +“My dear Eternal, I care about the world when it’s about to be destroyed by a short sighted mistake that has delusions of grandeur and a serious case of megalomania.” +“When you say mistake, do you mean me specifically or your actions that allowed me to live in the first place?” +“Both I suppose. I know I should just try to kill you, but somehow the maternal instinct in me just makes it difficult sometimes…” Semra steps forward, but when she sees that you (and your Eternals) are not about to let her get any closer she backs away again. + +“Oh right, that’s why you’ve been sending svelk warbands to continually try to kill me.” You say. +“Pfft. You know as well as I do, you were never in any real danger…well no danger you couldn’t handle anyway. If I really wanted to kill you, I would’ve made a better effort don’t you think?” +“Not really. I know you Semra, and you like playing games. Perhaps you didn’t so call try hard enough because it would be more amusing to you to watch me struggle. So you did just enough to make things difficult, and figured I’d either give up or if your people got lucky, then great. If not, well there was always the entire island of Mortos doing a good enough job of trying to kill me.” + +Semra smiles a bit at your theory. + +“Well, I suppose you do know me a little better now that our minds are so closely linked. To be fair though, I never thought you’d give up. I knew you’d die first if it came down to it.” +“Whatever, I’m tired of talking…” you say raising your hands to cast a spell. +“Wait!” Semra says backing up towards the trapdoor and getting into a defensive position. +“WHAT!?” +“Just... Just hear me out okay?” +“Hear you…Are you drunk or something?” you say in exasperation. +“Look you can see into my mind that I have no trickery planned. This is just me here. I don’t even have any reinforcements.” + +Semra at this point relaxes her stance by opening her arms wide. She has completely let her guard down, physically and mentally. + +She’s telling the truth. There is no trickery and this isn’t a delaying tactic, Nicodemus is still waiting for you. You also sense a little concern within her. You have to admit that’s somewhat surprising. + +“You’ve got a few seconds. Better make them good.” You say. +“Okay. Look, don’t do this. That book nearly destroyed the world before, it may or may not hold the secrets to immortality, but it also opens up a gate to the realm of the dead! You think Mortos is bad? Think about when that gate is opened up!” +“Yes, yes, I’ve heard this horror story before. Nicodemus told me about it right after he killed Casimir. If I’d had any sense, I would’ve tried to take the book then and saved me all this trouble in the first place.” you answer. + +Semra shakes her head. + +“If you had any sense, you’d turn back right now.” +“Hm. I’ll be sure to have that written on your tombstone, unless you’re planning on running off and letting Nicodemus shoulder the responsibility of trying to kill me.” +“Nicodemus doesn’t even give a shit anymore what you do. I’m sure he’s contacted you. Haven’t you detected a tone of apathy in his voice?” + +You chuckle. + +“Are you serious? You’re saying Nicodemus has no intention of stopping me?” +“No, he doesn’t. At least not anymore. He claims he’s tired of life, so he’s effectively given up.” +“I don’t believe it.” +“Believe that or don’t, but one thing you better believe is that book is bad for you, me, and everyone on this fucking world. It already turned Mortos into a permanent graveyard and it eventually resulted in the destruction of my own Empire because we svelk had to make a pact with the infernal realm just to combat the utter annihilation that would’ve consumed everyone. We even made a deal with the necromancers that should this problem ever get this bad again, we would assist to prevent it if possible. Never thought we’d have to actually honor it though just because we didn’t think anyone get close enough and be foolish enough to try again.” Semra says. +“Yeah…the destruction of your Empire doesn’t sound like a bad thing. And it wasn’t the book that caused that; it was your own government’s idiocy with dealing with demons in the first place. So once again, you lot were your own worst enemy.” You say. + +Semra rubs her head in an attempt to continue to try to “get through” to you. + +“Look, you won. I mean think about it, you’ve unlocked some of the secrets of necromancy and even mastered some of its spells. I just saw you drain the lives of these now dead Eternals standing near you. You drained their lives and made yourself even a little younger. Think about that for a moment. You’ve already ACHIEVED immortality. I mean yes, it isn’t perfect and you’re going to need an ongoing supply of people to sustain you, but you’re the ruler of the Empire. How hard is it going to be to just shuffle in a bunch of worthless peasants, criminals, sveld, or whoever every so often to be feasted on like cattle?” +“I’m not a wendigo or ghoul you know.” You say establishing the fact that you are a lot of things, but cannibal isn’t one of them. +“I don’t mean literally of course, but the premise is the same.” + +You continue to listen while also continuing to read Semra’s mind. You still sense no lying and nothing but sincerity. Unless she’s found a way to lie so convincingly that she herself believes everything…which you wouldn’t put past her. She does have somewhat of a point about draining the life force of people being able to sustain you theoretically indefinitely. + +“We of course are never going to have a relationship in the way I’d desire us to. We aren’t even going to be friends. And one day you and I are going to finally meet on the battlefield and one of us is going to die, but I tell you…no I BEG you…DO NOT do this thing. This path will lead to all of our ruin and nobody will win save for death itself.” + +Semra looks on at you expecting your response. +> Press forward +Semra’s words aren’t entirely lost on you. However, she either has overlooked one thing or again, managed to lie so convincingly that she’s allowed her mind to believe it to be the truth. + +“Nice idea Semra, very nice idea. I think perhaps even you believe it. There’s just one problem with it. I lose most of my necromantic powers as soon as I leave Mortos. The whole reason for Casimir’s return here was because the necromantic energy weakened the longer he stayed away from Mortos. He was a resident here and master necromancer and he only used his own powers sparingly in order to keep himself alive for so long.” You say. + +Semra’s expression changes to one of disappointed as you continue to speak. + +“I on the other hand have only just begun to dabble in the necromantic arts and I’m no native to this land. Currently the necromantic energy is sustaining me, but I know I’m going to start aging again perhaps even more rapidly now that I’ve abused its power to keep myself alive. Even if I DO manage to sustain myself through necromancy, it’s a habit of diminishing returns. Nicodemus told me that and Casimir certainly knew it. That’s why he wanted that book. It was the answer to everything.” + +Realizing how this is going to end, Semra prepares to defend herself. + +“If I turn back now, I’ll live maybe a few decades longer perhaps? Maybe even a hundred after draining a few thousand people maybe? And while I have no qualms about such a thing, it’s not really going to solve my problem now is it? If anything it might cause rebellions and eventually I’ll still weaken and die to the ravages of time. So why turn back now? What have I got to lose?” + +You begin to cast a spell and Semra does likewise. Your undead Eternals move forward towards her. + +“I’ve already got one foot in the grave.” + +You unleash a blast of frost towards Semra, who blocks with a magical barrier. Your undead eternals are undeterred by the frost and move within range to attack. She has to temporary drop the barrier in order to defend herself effectively as they attempt to surround her. + +Somehow despite suffering a semi-hit from your frost spell, she dodges and weaves enough to avoid your Eternal’s attacks. She cuts down one of your Eternals and tries to lob a piece of heavy stone at you via telekinesis, but to her surprise you manage to stop it in mid air where upon it falls uselessly to the ground. + +“There are so many things I’ve learned since our minds have grown closer…” you say and then produce a poisonous cloud at her. It catches her just enough to make her gag and cough before jumping and climbing to the top of the broken wall behind her. + +“Open that trapdoor!” you command one of your Eternals to do while you try to blast Semra with fireballs as she jumps from crumbling piece of block to crumbling piece of block. + +She returns fire with a lightning bolt, but you quickly put up a barrier and focus your energy to that the barrier actually repells the bolt back. It misses her, but in her effort to dodge, she loses her balance and falls backwards off the piece of wall she was standing on. She’s most likely still alive, but you’re not wasting any more time with her. Seeing that the gas cloud has disapated, you rush down into the now open trapdoor and order your Eternals to follow. When you get to the bottom, you tell them to shut it and to wait and kill anything that tries to enter. + +You run down the long dark corridor, ignoring the several alcoves to your left and right. You half expect something to attack you like a ghoul, but nothing does and eventually you reach the large room that Nicodemus told you about. + +The room is dimly lit and furnished in a similar style that Casimir had his room furnished. You even see smaller versions of the two large skeleton warrior statues that still exist outside his old chambers. It’s actually fairly nice looking compared to well…almost anything in Mortos. + +To your left you see Nicodemus sitting in a very luxurious looking chair. The man looks older, though he was old looking when you first met him, but this “old” definitely looks like tired accompanies the status. In fact he almost looks like he’s asleep, he stirs awake when you walk acouple more steps in the room. + +“Oh, it’s you. Apologies. I was just resting my eyes. Hrm. Took you long enough to get here, I imagine Semra tried to stop you. I told her not to bother and just let the inevitable happen. I mean she’s a svelk, she’s lived and enjoyed more lifetimes than most beings have anyway. Sometimes you just have to know when to let go.” Nicodemus says. +“From what she told me, that’s what you’ve decided to do.” You reply. +“Yes, I imagine I have. It surprised me as well having kept such a close protection of this book for centuries. Granted most of those were from other necromancers similar to Casimir. You’re the first outsider to attempt it. You’re also the only one who is about to succeed as well. I guess congratulations is in order.” +“And I’m expected to believe you just changed your mind? That you’re just going to let me take the book? You just had a small army try to stop me.” +“Eh, not really my idea. I mean I wasn’t opposed to it, but my fellow necromancers thought that they’d make the effort to stop you. They all were a little younger than me, so I can’t blame their dedication to protecting the book. As for me, I’ve gotten to the point where I’m tired and no longer care. I’d lecture you again, but I did that the first time you visited and given your determination, there is nothing I can say now that would change your mind. I could kill you with little effort, but I’m done with trying to stop you and your type from taking it. I think by the time you started rolling in those large steel machines of yours that was the point where I began to think what’s the use? This man isn’t going to stop short of his own personal death and even then someone like him will try again eventually. If this is the type of world where nobody can ever learn the simplest of lessons then maybe its better off dead.” + +Nicodemus shifts a bit in his chair and relaxes a bit more. Nearby you see the infamous book on a table near him. You approach cautiously forward. + +“Yes, there it is. Take it. Kill me first if it makes you feel any safer, I won’t put up any resistance.” + +You hesistate at Nicodemus’ willingness to let you have the book. It has to be a trick. + +“Well what are you waiting for Eternal? Why do you hesitate? Kill me, take the book and leave! That’s the goal right? Well do it!” Nicodemus demands with a raised voice. + +Seeing not much else to do, you oblige him. You blast Nicodemus with a lightning bolt to his head exploding it like a ripe melon. His headless body remains slumped in its seat motionless. + +You briskly walk over to the table and grab the book. You half expect something horrible to befall you, but nothing happens. You glance through the book and it appears to be the same one that Casimir had. You definitely feel a faint surge of power just by handling it. + +With nothing else to do, you leave this room and head back the way you came. You find that your Eternals still waiting for you, you’re somewhat surprised that Semra didn’t make another attempt to stop you. + +Though that thought soon goes away when one of your Eternals pops up from the trapdoor and from the bottom of the ladder you see him blasted to pieces by a magic bolt. + +Shielding yourself from the falling pieces of your undead soldier you rapidly ascend the ladder where you cast a barrier to block Semra’s attempts at sniping you. Blocking her magic, you scramble to a better location so you can allow the rest of you Eternals to climb up to help you. + +“You were right Semra, Nicodemus didn’t try to stop me. This seems like destiny to me. Like I was meant to have this book! Why do you hate destiny?” you shout in a taunting fashion. + +Semra makes no response back; she just continues to try to kill you. Looks like she’s gotten over her whole “maternal” feeling towards you. You return the favor and the pair of you must combat each other for several minutes running and dodging and flinging spells at one another. + +Honestly you’d try to end your feud with her right then and there, but during the battle you notice another army approaching in the distance. Not one of your own either, it’s another undead horde and you can’t fight Semra AND an entire undead army practically all by yourself. + +So you decide that escape is the order of the day and Semra’s death will have to be another. After all you have your prize, better you should leave with it now. + +You collapse a small tower within the fortress with a well placed lightning bolt. Semra happens to be standing nearby it fortunately causing her to focus on saving her own life. In the meantime you order your Eternals to stay behind and find her to finish her off. You know that they will fail, but it will give you time to make a hasty retreat from the advancing undead horde. + +It is a long journey back to “safe” territory. You try to keep a low profile most of the way, though no matter how well you try to avoid attention, inevitably a pack of hungry gibbering ghouls always seems to find you. Fortunately they’re in manageable numbers and you manage to make it back without major problems. + +When you arrive at “Home camp” you’re immediately seen to by the Eternal detachment that constantly guard the portals back home. They make a fuss, but you assure them that you’re fine and that you just need to get back home right now. + +Without too many more words, you enter the portal back home and you’re suddenly back in Evigrus where the aura is much more lively and a lot less oppressive. + +And with you now is the book that Casimir wanted so badly and several others tried to prevent you from having. The same book that you have clutched under your arm. The key to immortality. + +You begin to glance through it and while you don’t understand all of it, you feel the power contained within. It’s almost as if the book wants you to master it. + +A challenge you will gladly undertake. +> Years pass... +Year 80 + +“So you’re really going to do it?” Cassandra asks while lying in bed next to you. +“That was sort of the point of going to Mortos in the first place.” You answer. +“True I suppose. I really hated it there. I mean killing and capturing svelk was about the only thing that was remotely enjoyable. I was pretty glad you eventually sent all the Eyes back home.” + +You get up out of bed to get your day started. + +“Ah, shit.” You say feeling an ache in your back. +“Are you alright? I thought you…um…replenished yourself recently.” +“If by replenished you mean drained the lives of twenty of my citizens last month then yes I did, but as I’ve told you before, it doesn’t last long and it wears out quicker as the years have gone on. Not to mention humans don’t exactly have the most sustaining life forces to begin with so it takes more of them just to turn back the clock a few decades.” + +As you look in the mirror at yourself trying to determine if you need to “recharge” today, Cassandra doesn’t pursue that line of questioning anymore. She knows that elves being long-lived creatures would probably require less effort on your part and sustain you longer. In fact that’s probably why she started to show “attraction” towards you a few years ago. She’d never admit it, but she fears that you’ll suddenly start rounding up elves and draining them instead. + +While it definitely had occurred to you to do so, you tended to limit it to just a few since they still don’t have the largest of populations and you had no idea how long you’d have to “ration out” the lives of your citizens before you could unlock all the secrets of the book. Cassandra probably believes she’s “swaying” you through sex though. + +Gnomes probably REALLY feared being rounded up, but fortunately for them you still respect their engineering skills and you don’t have a gnome fetish like Casimir did. Besides, ever since your human engineer losses in Mortos and Elam dying last year (Another rarity via natural causes), you need all the skilled engineers you can get. + +As for your “relationship” with Cassandra you have no love for her, a mild fondness, a respect for her abilities and her usefulness, but nothing more. You’re fairly certain Cassandra has no true love for you either. Respect and loyalty sure, a desire to place herself in a higher and “safer” position, most definitely, but she does not love you. + +Part of you has wondered if you reciprocated her advances in the first place was because she was an elf. Besides the natural attractiveness common to their race, she very faintly reminds you of Semra. Not in personality or even looks, but she’s an elf and it’s close enough. + +“I am seriously fucked up.” You mumble to yourself as you think about that again. +“What did you say?” Cassandra asks. +“Nothing, just thinking about something. You better get dressed, I’m going to need you and the Eyes on full alert for this thing.” You say which stirs Cassandra to get up and follow your lead in getting dressed. + +“Emperor, the…subjects are currently all being held at the ritual pyramid in the Usksha Desert, all ten thousand of them are still alive and restrained. I know I’ve told you this before, but Empire citizens’ have not been calm about this. Most don’t even know exactly what you’re planning, but they’re already coming up with stories and most of which are not too far off from the truth. The Eyes have been working overtime in keeping the peace, but I fear that a rebellion of some sort will be inevitable. Most likely in Rask and Nakol province, perhaps even in the Tral province.” +“The citizens’ would like it even less if I continued to just drain random people at a greater rate eventually exceeding ten thousand. This ritual is going to prevent having to do that anymore. After it’s done, we can deal with the civil unrest and in time Dokkrus as well.” + +Cassandra smiles a bit when she hears that, you know she’s probably been eager to go kill more svelk again. + +“I always meant to ask, but why is this to be performed in Usksha?” Cassandra says. +“No major settlements nearby and it isn’t like the usksha nomads are a problem anymore. Haven’t even had a sandworm pop up in decades. I thought about the plains of Tor, since there was nice flat land there to build the pyramid, but the Usksha desert works just as well. Besides, this is only going to be necessary once. No need to have the pyramid any more afterwards and it’ll be cheaper to just let the sands consume everything rather than having to tear it down and having crews to dispose of all the bodies.” +“Couldn’t you just animate them to walk into the ocean or something?” +“Hah, I’m sure a dead march to the ocean is just what the already agitated citizens’ would want to see.” You chuckle. + +“No, this is a better way. To be honest raising the dead takes a great deal of willpower and I find it to be a waste of the time and energy. I mean I did it to a limited degree in Mortos with the fallen Eternals because it bolstered the ranks and using the dead negated some of the advantages the necromancers had. Personally though I’d rather just cast a rain of fire down or chain lightning to directly harm my enemies. I don’t need unreliable rotting corpses to do my work.” You say. + +Cassandra nods at your answer and the pair of you are off to the Usksha Desert. + +Even before your carriage reaches the desert the black pyramid is visible from the Nalin border. The closer you get the more it looms ominously. + +There are grim deeds going to be performed this day and night and well…until the ritual is complete. + +The necromancers of Mortos didn’t need as many sacrifices when they attempted this ritual since there were a lot more of them to perform it and support each other’s magical energy. They were also more skilled. You are just one man that has tried to shove as much necromantic knowledge into your head in just a few years. You sometimes wonder if this is indeed a fool’s errand. + +But you’ve gone over the rites, you’ve gone over the symbols, the steps, made allowances for your unique situation, and of course had a big ass pyramid built just to accomplish all this. You don’t think you could be any more ready. + +When you arrive at the ritual pyramid, several Eternals stand ready for your commands. There are so few of them left now and they’re all fourth gens. It wasn’t but a decade ago that together with the third gens, Eternals were nearly two thousand strong. When this is all over, you really need to get that project back on track again. Too bad Elam isn’t still around to carry out some of his theories, but maybe he left some notes in that now abandoned workshop of his. + +“The sacrifices are inside the pyramid, my Emperor. All we await is you to take your place and begin.” An Eternal says when you exit the carriage. +“Very good, we will begin soon.” You reply as you shield your eyes to look up at the pyramid which does look pretty impressive this close up.” + +Cassandra begins to leave the carriage, but you stop her from doing so. + +“Cassandra, why don’t you head back. I don’t think you’re going to want to be here for this. Not because I don’t think you can’t handle it, but because it’s going to take awhile and I’d rather have you keeping a check on the potential civil unrest situation you’ve been concerned about. I mean other than my Eternals here, you’re about the only person I can truly trust and rely on anymore.” +“Very well, and thank you my Emperor.” Cassandra says and kisses you before getting back inside the carriage. + +With Cassandra on her way back, you begin to make the long climb up the pyramid feeling the aches the entire time. You’ll be glad to put an end to that soon. When you finally get to the top, you take a short breather and accept the water that a nearby Eternal hands you. + +“Shit, that sun is a killer. Maybe I should’ve had this built on the Tor plains after all. (Whew) All right then let’s get on with this. Bring out the first sacrifice.” You say and a couple of your Eternals nod and go through the entryway to carry out your orders. + +While you wait you place the ritual book on a nearby stone podium and examine the sacrificial altar and the symbols you had etched into it. The altar itself was designed to be sturdy, but also has a slight elegance to it. The craftsman really put some artistic touches to it. You aren’t normally one to admire something like that, but in this case you do. + +As the screams of your first sacrifice get closer you draw out your mithril dagger. Ah this dagger has certainly been with you a long time. Saved your life more than a few times too. + +Still, you only keep it for one reason. As a reminder to end Semra’s life with it one day. (Yet another thing on the to do list after achieving immortality) + +Your Eternals bring out your first sacrifice. A young elven girl. She’s terrified, crying and begging for her life. + +“Well, it’s a good thing I sent Cassandra home. Pretty sure she wouldn’t have wanted to see this. How many elves are there in there anyway?” you ask one of the Eternals ignoring the girl’s screams. +“Apologies, but I’m not exactly sure my Emperor. I know we brought in a lot, but we’re not sure how many the Eyes brought in.” +“They most likely didn’t bring in any. Probably primarily stuck to humans. So…who do we have in there anyway?” +“Mostly humans as you might expect. They’re from all over the Empire. Some elves, some kobolds, some orcs, some usksha, I know we even dragged a few ogres down here. All of them are of varying ages, colors, occupations and gender. You said the more variety from walks of life the better.” +“That’s true. For some reason this will work better with more variety of life. Not exactly sure why, but I’m following the instructions. Just out curiosity, any gnomes?” +“We did get a few. Tried to limit them to criminals though.” +“As long as we got a few, okay throw her on the altar and let’s get started.” You say. + +As the girl continues to scream for her life, your Eternals place her on the altar. + +“Did you want us to gag these people in the future?” one of your Eternals asks. +“No, apparently the terror and fear they outwardly display helps this ritual too, again don’t ask me why, I’m just following what was in this book…shhhh…I’ll make this quick.” You say and then chant as you bring the dagger down. + +When the deed is done and the girl’s life has indeed been exstinguished, her body is thrown down the steps on the left side of the pyramid. That pile is going to get very big before this over. + +Time passes from day and night as one by one people are dragged for you to kill. You have to take breaks every so often and after a few days of this you even resort to draining the life of some of your Eternals just to keep your strength up. + +You know its working though, you can feel it. By the time you’ve passed the five thousand mark the daytime sky no has a sun beating down on you and a constant overcast hangs in the air. A sandstorm whips up and at one point it even begins to rain, which it practically never does in this desert. + +You preserve through the sand and the rain as you did with the sun. The closer you get, the more you can feel your success. Eventually you don’t even begin feeling tired after killing a few hundred people, you’re starting to feel energized by it. Eventually you stop taking breaks and start dragging victims out yourself since your Eternals are certainly tired. + +By the time you hit over nine thousand your surrounding area is in a permanent state of unnatural darkness. A blackness has covered a wide area of the desert and you’re not even seeing the stars at this point, its just black like a void. + +And then finally the last victim is brought out. A miserable looking malnourished kobold who looks like he’s on his last legs anyway. He’s so weak that one of your Eternals picks him up by one hand and places him on the altar. + +You speak the last parts of the spell and bring down the knife ending the kobold’s life instantly and that’s when it happens. + +You feel a surge of energy like you’ve never felt before. It’s like when you drain the life of someone, but this is different, like a feeling of completeness. You believe its working. You don’t have a mirror handy, but your hands are certainly deprived of wrinkles now and you don’t have any aches or pains from age anymore. + +“I feel it! It’s working! It’s…” you shout and then suddenly you fall to the ground and a large rumbling sound from above is heard almost to the point to it being deafening. + +You are helped up by your Eternals, who begin to ask you what to do next. You look up and see several ghostly forms screaming out of the black void above. They don’t attack, they just seem to hang there and float around, but that doesn’t mean they won’t soon. + +“Emperor! Watch out!” an Eternal shouts and hacks down the kobold you just killed. + +Just as Nicodemus told you what the necromancers did, just as Semra warned you, you’ve opened up a gate to the Realm of the Dead. +> Run over to the ritual book +“I can close it! I need to get over to the book!” you shout and quickly run over to it and flick through the pages. + +You find the page and begin to speak the words only for several of those ghostly forms to suddenly swoop down and take it. Before your eyes they rip it to pieces laughing the entire time. Pieces of the book either fly off never to be seen again or fall before you completely useless. + +“NO!” you shout helplessly and try to blast them with magic bolts. You hit some of them causing those to dissipate, but the damage is done. + +“The end will come soon…this world has been marked on the list for a long time…you have welcomed death back to it because of your hubrissssssss….” One of the ghosts mocks. + +The ghosts continue to taunt you as you desperately try to pick up some of the pieces that actually landed near you in the meantime your Eternals are urging that you all need to get away from the pyramid as more of these ghostly forms are starting to appear and one of them has noticed that the large pile of bodies on the left side of the pyramid is starting to animate. + +“Emperor! We must go!” +“NO! I won’t be beaten! Not when I have achieved my goal, I…Aaaagh!” you start to say when all of a sudden you begin to feel very weak. It’s not just you either; it’s your Eternals too. The feeling is similar to the draining effect by undead creatures or the negative zones of Mortos. You might not be aging, but you definitely don’t feel well, in fact you feel like you’re going to die and given how close to death you’ve been on several occasions, you’re very familiar with what that feels like. In fact, you’re reminded of the time when Cyrus nearly killed you. Feels like that. + +Realizing that standing to fight isn’t going to work, you listen to your Eternals and begin down the pyramid steps to your right. Though you make sure to be careful since you’re dizzy and feel like you’re going to tumble at any time. + +When you get to the bottom, you see more spirits and the like pour out of the black void above the pyramid and the pile of bodies that were one dead have now begun to shuffle around their original area to the other side where you are currently at. You attempt to control the slowly advancing horde in perhaps an effort to turn some against each other, but your spell has absolutely no effect and it’s like some greater force is controlling them. It’s Mortos all over again. + +After dispatching the closest ones by the more traditional sword, gunYou and your remaining Eternals make haste through the desert towards the Nalin border. The more distance you put between you and the pyramid makes you feel a little better, but you’re also concerned. You’re supposed to be immortal now, and while you know that doesn’t mean you can’t feel pain, you wonder if the spell actually even worked at all because you had the very real feeling that you were going to die back there. You may have very well doomed the word for nothing. + +You try not to not to think about it for now, you’ll have plenty of time to dwell on it when you get back to civilization. + +When you do reach the closest village in Nalin, the peasants there are so far unaware of the impending danger, but many of them have begun feeling scared since even from this distance they can see the large blackness that has unnaturally gathered above the pyramid in the distance. You make a short announcement in the middle of the village. + +“People of this village, listen to your Emperor. There is a darkness coming in this direction and it will consume you and everything within if you stay here. I’d advise you all to move on to one of the larger cities for safety if you can. Do not give into fear and stay strong and you will survive this. The Empire WILL survive this.” + +Having little else to say, you move on leaving the villagers to heed your advice. You proceed to do this with every settlement you move through on your way back to the capital and urge the bigger ones to start sending out messengers to other settlements to warn people as well. + +When you get to the capital, you’re immediately giving orders to make this situation news throughout the Empire. If there was civil unrest before there probably will be more of it, but keeping people in the dark until the dead are beating down their door is likely to result in unreadiness and lead to more causalities which will in turn…result in more undead. + +Steps are taken to completely eradicate the dangers of the dead rising up when you have the graveyards ordered to be dug up in all major cities and the bodies burned immediately (The kobolds are the main ones that take care of this task) + +It is a grim day indeed though when you have the cemetery of Empire heroes cleansed. The final resting place of some of your closest former companions is broken open and their bodies destroyed. In those cases you do the job yourself, because well they deserve that much. + +But better it should be this way than for them to rise up as some undead monster that will no longer the person you knew any more. + +Despite these steps, the Empire is a large place and not every small village or hamlet can be accounted for and that’s not even counting Nyttrus which only gets the news weeks later when the first reports of the dead rising up from their graves starts. + +Worse is the fact that another large void similar to the one in the Usksha Desert has opened up near New Dessel. When it did, the effect was sudden and instant. Several airships were destroyed in the area. This so far hasn’t happened anywhere else (yet) but you wonder if its due to the portals to Mortos being located there. Perhaps some sort of thinner barrier between the dead and living there or something. + +Whatever the reason New Dessel itself has gone silent. It can be assumed everyone there has decided to lock themselves up in the mountain, but all attempts to send people to investigate have failed. Either the hostile spirits screaming out of the void are too overwhelming or the investigators don’t come back at all. The ones have managed to come back also report of a life draining effect they feel as soon as they enter the area. Their description is similar to what you felt back at the pyramid. + +It’s a major loss considering the importance of New Dessel. You were considering making a trip to Mortos to ask the necromancers for help since only they might know how to stop this, but with the portals either destroyed or inaccessible now that’s no longer an option. (And given your last visit it’s probably unlikely they would’ve helped anyway) + +While you initially believed that more civil unrest would follow this catastrophe, you’ve surprisingly found that hasn’t been the case, if anything this event has caused people to band together. While you don’t doubt that a lot blame you for this there remains a greater fear of this undead plague and a slight hope that you MIGHT be the only one to save from it. In short, they don’t really have many other options, because going it alone without the help of the Empire would surely be suicide. + +With few options of your own, you rally a general state of emergency and the war against the dead begins in full swing. You can’t be everywhere at once, but you try your best and fend off major attacks personally when you can. + +Year 90 + +You stare at the portrait of your beloved Alison. As much as you’ve always missed her, a part of you is glad that she perhaps isn’t still around to see what you’ve done. + +Would she have still stood by your side? Would she have tried to stop you? Would you have even bothered with any of this had she still been alive? + +Like many questions that rely on “what if” the answers are irrelevant because what they are is not reality. + +You tear yourself away from Alison’s portrait for a moment to glance into the mirror to your left. + +A young face stares back at you. An Eternal in his prime ready to conquer the world. The problem is you’re no longer in any position to do so, for something else is doing it better than you ever could. + +You think about all you’ve lost within the short time you’ve achieved “immortality.” + +You lost contact with Nyttrus years ago, and you don’t know what’s going on there now. Who knows if anything still lives on that jungle continent. + +Several more voids in the sky began appearing, releasing more undead into your realm and draining the life energy of the living. Entire provinces at this point have now been depopulated leaving only the dead behind, some provinces like Nakol have been cut off from you. Rask and Delerg are the only places left of the Empire and you imagine even that won’t be true for very long. Even now a void hangs over part of Quala and everyday it grows bigger. It’s only a matter of time before the entire world is completely enveloped by death. + +All your Eternals are dead, along with most your Eyes and military. Cassandra herself was killed last year in the last desperate struggle to hang on to the Arat province, but it was a futile task when the enemy is literally without end. + +As for you, you’ve never given up the fight even though you know you’re going to lose. It’s inevitable, but you can’t just lie down and die. You have to fight, you have to survive…but you’re also so tired. And it’s not just from the effects of death slowly creeping up on you. There’s a part of you that just wants to put away your instincts and training for a moment and do what Nicodemus did. Let nature take its inevitable course. + +Your introspection is cut short when one of your advisors knocks on your door rapidly. + +“EMPEROR! EMPEROR! THE UNDEAD ARE HERE! THEY’RE AT THE GATES! THEY’RE ACK!” a voice says being suddenly cut short and several grinning specters come through the closed door. + +“Hm, looks like they’re already past the gates.” You say and then unleash magic bolts at the specters sending them back to wherever they came from. + +This is somewhat unexpected. While it is true there is a large amount of undead currently in Quala, there wasn’t any sign of an army anywhere near the capital yet, let alone the palace. You heard no signs of battle outside or even any yelling that would denote an alarm or call to arms. And you certainly would’ve been alerted long before an army was at the gates. + +In fact other than this interruption, its dead quiet. + +And then a feeling of oppressive dread swarms over you followed by that draining experience. This isn’t good. + +You open your chamber door and see a desiccated husk in front of it. It’s not animating so that’s the good thing. The bad thing is when you start exploring the rest of the palace; you’re finding everyone like that. Several of those specters float about the palace, which you dispatch as quick as you can, but you’re still feeling weaker by the second. + +You don’t know what is causing this sudden drain, but it’s not the specters and the void isn’t near enough yet. It’s something else. + +And by the time you drag yourself outside your palace you see it with your own eyes. + +You see a black-cloaked figure standing in your courtyard with several bodies lying all over the place. The trees and the other plant life are completely dead as well. This thing is giving off a negative energy that is sapping you at an alarming rate. You struggle to keep standing. + +When it glides over to you, you try to cast a spell, but it fails. You draw your sword only to end up using it as a crutch to prop yourself up on. + +This is it. This is death itself and you’re now right in front of it. + +“Do your worst.” you say trying to prepare yourself for it to attack. + +To your surprise, you get a response. + +“Oh trust me, you wouldn’t like that. My worst makes your worst look like a kindness.” The being says in a slightly deep voice. + +You have no answer, but once again to your surprise the being speaks again. + +“But this is no time for threats or boasts, I have come to talk mortal.” +“Talk? Are you…fucking with me?” you ask. +“Not at all, however I feel it would be in your best interest to listen. It would seem you have a slight difficulty in doing that at times, but then again it’s never too late to change. Even in your final hour.” +“I guess…I don’t have much of a choice…” you wheeze. +“Good. I understand your current condition, so I’ll try to be brief. Don’t worry though I’ll keep you alive until we’re finished.” +> Last choice +“Before we begin, if you have any major questions, now is the time.” The being says. + +You have to admit, this situation is so unique that you can’t help but be curious so you do decide to ask questions. (As well and somehow holding out the futile hope that you might find an advantage) + +“Are you a god?” you ask. +“I suppose I am, but in the scheme of things I am more of a collector and caretaker. Gods typically get to do fun irresponsible things like torment mortals and encouraging holy wars. Strange though, this world wasn’t really high on any deity influences, the only record I can find of major divine influence here is a powerful yet non-divine being masquerading as a so called god of shadows and going by the name Dendrin and that thing left this world when you eradicated the shadows long ago.” It answers. +“Isn’t killing the world considered tormenting mortals?” you ask. +“To you and most others I suppose it would be, but this is really more of a necessary service. A reminder that death can’t be cheated. In reality, the divine don’t really want immortal types running about since it tends to threaten the status quo. If someone achieves immortality on a world then potentially someone else can do it too. Before you know it, you’ve got a whole new set of beings achieving godhood and believe me; we’ve got more than enough of them now. Too many really.” +“How the hell is that fair? I mean as you said these gods haven’t even been paying attention to this world and yet now they do?” +“Well as I said, you’re a potential threat. And of course you’re right. It isn’t fair, but there are strict laws on this matter. Certain conditions have to apply, has to be an opening, and a bunch of boring diety debating. I didn’t make them up either, they were long in place before I got this job so don’t blame me. Really though your world was marked a long time ago when the Mortos necromancers attempted the same thing several centuries ago. I was so busy though with other things at the time that wasn’t paying attention to just how close they were at closing the gate back up. Needless to say nobody was pleased about it and I got bitched at, but considering there wasn’t any danger of someone becoming truly immortal anymore on your world I just had it marked and kept a closer eye on it.” + +You helplessly listen to the death god’s words as the life continues to ebb from your body. + +“Knew it wouldn’t be long before someone here tried it again and then I’d get this world. Figured it would be one of those Mortos necromancers, but I have to admit I didn’t see someone like you doing the deed. Then again given your background maybe I shouldn’t be too surprised. For a mortal you’re somewhat interesting and I don’t say that lightly.” +“Thanks…I guess. Is that why you wanted to speak to me?” you ask starting to feel very frail and tired. + +“For the most part yes, but more than that. You see despite my assigned duty, I genuinely respect mortals who have a desire to endure at all costs. I always have had an admiration for those that have a strong survival instinct and you Eternal, definitely have one of the strongest. So…I am going to make a few offers to you. Unique offers that I have never given any living being before. And trust me, I’ve been through this process quite a few times.” + +You struggle to keep standing and use your sword as a crutch to prop yourself up. + +“Wha…what…are…my choices…” you weakly ask. +“Well, your first choice is obvious. You pathetically continue to oppose me. You’ll inevitably lose of course. I highly recommend that you do not take this option. While I may respect a strong survival instinct, I do not respect foolishness and if you continue to fight me, that’s what you’ll be, a complete and utter fool. I do not think you are, but then again you just might prove me wrong. Besides dying in a fairly inglorious way your assigned afterlife will not be a pleasant one.” +“I…I…suppose I haven’t really been a good guy.” You say. + +“That’s a severe understatement. In fact you alone have contributed to the deaths of so many either directly or indirectly on this world that I almost wondered if I even needed to bother showing up. But honestly your brutal politics and such aside, that isn’t really what got you into trouble. Indeed there are many deities that admire and reward such behavior. Your complete and total obliteration of gnome souls however was severely frowned upon by certain deities. Those gnomes were supposed to go to a happy friendly afterlife, not get completely annihilated. Personally I don’t really give a shit since I know at the time you were just following your own orders, but I like to keep the rest of the deities off my back so if you continue to piss me off by opposing me, well I’ll be throwing you into that very dark painful place of which there is no hope, myself.” + +The death god pauses before announcing your next choice. + +“Your second choice is a very simple one, but probably not as obvious to the likes of you. Your second choice is to simply die. Lay your burdens down and rest. I realize that something like this would be hard for a warrior such as yourself, but I can assure you that if you do, I will guarantee you a place with your long lost love Alison.” + +You feel a slight surge of energy within you when you hear that name. + +“Al…Alison?” you utter. +“Yes, Alison. Granted, you probably don’t belong where she currently is, but fortunately for you I can pull a few strings to get you there. You and her will re-united at last. You will get to exist for the rest of eternity with her in perfect happiness.” + +The chance to be reunited with Alison does sound like a good deal, but you can’t help but wonder if it’s a lie or maybe there’s a catch just to lay down and die without struggle. Is this a trick? And if it is a trick, does that mean the death god believes you’re more powerful than he’s letting on and you could potentially defeat it? + +In any case you still haven’t heard your third choice, which the death god begins speaking on. + +“But perhaps your long lost love isn’t the true love that died. Perhaps your true love has always been with you in your heart. Perhaps you could potentially wish for that love affair to continue forever.” +“I…certainly hope you…aren’t talking about…a certain svelk…” you remark. + +Surprisingly this causes a dark chortle from the death god. + +“Oh no…not that one, Eternal. I am referring to a mistress of a more abstract nature. Your love of battle, war and bloodshed in general. That has always been a constant for you. As I have already mentioned your actions alone have either directly or indirectly caused multitudes of souls pour into my realm. I can also admire and respect a mortal that dedicated to death whether they realize it or not. Such a being could be of great use to me.” +“Use?” +“Yes. As you may have somewhat gathered from our pleasant chat here I am an incredibly busy deity. Mortals die all the time and I have a duty to collect souls, assign them and even completely obliterate a few sometimes. This is in addition to the periods where I have a whole world to purge and when the appointed time comes, I have to personally oversee its harvest. It breaks up the monotony to be sure, but it also takes time especially when I’ve got stubborn little mortals like yourself opposing me to the bitter end. Also people on other worlds don’t stop dying just because I’m purging another one. Souls stack up and then I get complaints from other deities saying they’re missing this and that soul. The complaints don’t really matter of course in the grand scheme of things, but it’s not something I need to hear when I’m already doing the thankless job that nobody else wants.” + +You never realized being a deity was so bureaucratic. You still don’t quite grasp how this is your problem though. Your only problem right now is struggling to live. + +“Tell me Eternal, how would you like to be truly eternal?” +“What…do you mean?” +“You have a gift. A gift that I wouldn’t mind putting to good use and this is your third choice. Beg me to make you my avatar on these world purging assignments.” +“What?!” +“I said beg me to make you my herald of death. Instead of me having to slog through a marked world, I’d send you in my place. Naturally I’d give you a little of my power to help you along, but I trust command over literally legions of the dead is more than enough for you to get the job done. Just think, you’d get to enjoy what you truly love over and over again. Battle, war, death, and everything else that goes along with it. Best of all, you never have to worry about silly things like troop morale or morality in general, because the goal will always be the same and you will never run out of willing soldiers.” + +Now this offer sounds really too good to be true. You can’t even believe that the death god is practically offering you a place by his side. + +“So, wait…you’re saying I can join…” +“No. I didn’t say join…I said beg. There’s a difference.” The death god interrupts. +“I… don’t understand.” You answer. +“It’s a test. A simple one really, but a test nevertheless. You are a proud being. Even when you served your Emperor with utter devotion, you were still a proud being. Again I can respect your pride. However, I can’t have you believing that you’re equal to me, because you aren’t. Not by a long shot. I also can’t have you thinking that somehow you’re going to try to turn this opportunity into a way to destroy me and take over, because you can’t. If this association is going to happen, I need you to humble yourself before me. Only then can I fully trust you because an oath will have been made. Such things are impossible to break when the gods are watching.” +“But…if I don’t stand a chance anyway then why do I need to…humble myself?” +“Let’s just say it’s a formality and the principle of it. Plus I’m suspicious by nature especially with a resourceful one such as yourself. Still, it is entirely up to you. I won’t force you to do something you may find repulsive to your nature. But I don’t think pride is in your nature. I believe war and battle is. And I believe the desire for those is a lot stronger than any pride you may have. Again though, you may prove me wrong.” + +And there you have it, you’ve been given your three choices, such as they are. + +You’ve been through a lot in your life and you never could’ve imagined it would end like this. You’re going to die no matter what you do that fact is certain. + +And yet this death god respects you enough to give you choices. Choices that you could’ve never dreamed of, but at the same time are somewhat familiar. + +You remember the very first time you had to make this choice… +> Struggle +All you life the odds have been against you and you’ve always struggled against them. +As weak as you are right now, you’re not going to give in or lay down for the whims of some so-called “god.” + +The fact that he’s giving you a “choice” indicates that perhaps he isn’t as all-powerful as he claims. You’re going to take your chance while you can. + +Mustering up all your strength you attempt to cast another spell at the death god. This time you actually manage to get a flicker of flame appear in your hand before it goes out. Between the combination of attempting such a feat and your life energy already draining at a rapid rate, you collapse face first to the ground. + +“Shit…” you say feeling like you’re going to lose consciousness. + +As you lie helpless on the ground, the death god floats over to you. You can’t stop him. + +“That was a very silly thing to do mortal, looks like I severely misjudged your character and you are indeed a fool. Ah well can’t be right all the time.” + +Continuing to be defiant you struggle to reach into your side sheath where you keep your dagger. You manage to pull it out half way before your strength completely fails you and you can’t even move any longer. + +“See now you’re just embarrassing yourself.” The death god replies. +“Fuck…y…” + +You don’t even get to finish that last comment when suddenly your body experiences unimaginable pain. Whatever injuries or tortures you may have experienced pale in comparison to this. You are experiencing death, but not just your own. You are experiencing the death of everyone you ever killed all at the same time. + +As you go through this agony the death god speaks. + +“You know under normal circumstances a person like you goes to the Infernal Realm. Land of demons and such. Can’t stand ‘em myself, most sensible beings don’t, but if there’s one thing they do well that’s torture the shit out of people for all eternity. Well…normally that happens anyway…” + +You aren’t even paying attention to what the death god is saying to you, the image of every single death is filling your mind and you can’t shut out the physical, emotional or spiritual anguish you’re experiencing. You can’t even cry out and you’re bordering on madness. + +“However that’s not what is going to happen to you. Oh no. I know you. You’d thrive in such a place of adversity. You’d probably find a way to break free and even give those demons a run for their money. You were already involved in killing one demon lord after all. I have to admit, that was a nice one, but I ramble…” + +At this point the words “pain” and “agony” are no longer adequate words to describe what you’re feeling. “Living Hell MIGHT come close, but the death god continues to speak. + +“No Eternal, you are going to a place where your suffering will be legendary even compared to the infernal realm. Where the laws of the universe don’t even apply. It is a rarity that is usually saved for immortals, gods and other such beings of power when they really fuck up. I suppose it is impressive that as a mere mortal you’ve managed to achieve such a thing. However this is no reward, this is your own doing Eternal.” + +At last scream out and suddenly everything goes black for a split moment and your surroundings change severely. + +Everything around you is wrong. Your mind cannot comprehend the utterly bizarre things about you. In fact you’re not even standing on the ground, you’re floating throughout some sort of fluid space. + +You see grisly parodies of various people you’ve known. They all taunt and hurt you in ways that you never thought possible. These mimics then will melt into disgusting things like hordes of oversized worms and maggots which will proceed to crawl all over you. As you float helplessly you can feel vileness, enter every orifice of your body. All of your senses are assaulted at the same time and the smell, the taste, the feeling, the sight and the sounds are all indescribably awful. + +Every once in a while strange tentacle creatures float nearby and assault your body and your mind even worse than the mimics. Other times the very plane seems to do the same thing. Sometimes you are completely ripped apart only to be reformed again and not always in the correct way. You go completely insane, but never to a point where you no longer care or are bothered by the horrific experiences you are enduring. + +There is no defense, no hope, and no escape from this living nightmare. Your mind shattered, your body broken, and your spirit crushed, you continue screaming having no other choice but to suffer your eternal torment.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Before we begin, if you have any major questions, now is the time.” The being says. + +You have to admit, this situation is so unique that you can’t help but be curious so you do decide to ask questions. (As well and somehow holding out the futile hope that you might find an advantage) + +“Are you a god?” you ask. +“I suppose I am, but in the scheme of things I am more of a collector and caretaker. Gods typically get to do fun irresponsible things like torment mortals and encouraging holy wars. Strange though, this world wasn’t really high on any deity influences, the only record I can find of major divine influence here is a powerful yet non-divine being masquerading as a so called god of shadows and going by the name Dendrin and that thing left this world when you eradicated the shadows long ago.” It answers. +“Isn’t killing the world considered tormenting mortals?” you ask. +“To you and most others I suppose it would be, but this is really more of a necessary service. A reminder that death can’t be cheated. In reality, the divine don’t really want immortal types running about since it tends to threaten the status quo. If someone achieves immortality on a world then potentially someone else can do it too. Before you know it, you’ve got a whole new set of beings achieving godhood and believe me; we’ve got more than enough of them now. Too many really.” +“How the hell is that fair? I mean as you said these gods haven’t even been paying attention to this world and yet now they do?” +“Well as I said, you’re a potential threat. And of course you’re right. It isn’t fair, but there are strict laws on this matter. Certain conditions have to apply, has to be an opening, and a bunch of boring diety debating. I didn’t make them up either, they were long in place before I got this job so don’t blame me. Really though your world was marked a long time ago when the Mortos necromancers attempted the same thing several centuries ago. I was so busy though with other things at the time that wasn’t paying attention to just how close they were at closing the gate back up. Needless to say nobody was pleased about it and I got bitched at, but considering there wasn’t any danger of someone becoming truly immortal anymore on your world I just had it marked and kept a closer eye on it.” + +You helplessly listen to the death god’s words as the life continues to ebb from your body. + +“Knew it wouldn’t be long before someone here tried it again and then I’d get this world. Figured it would be one of those Mortos necromancers, but I have to admit I didn’t see someone like you doing the deed. Then again given your background maybe I shouldn’t be too surprised. For a mortal you’re somewhat interesting and I don’t say that lightly.” +“Thanks…I guess. Is that why you wanted to speak to me?” you ask starting to feel very frail and tired. + +“For the most part yes, but more than that. You see despite my assigned duty, I genuinely respect mortals who have a desire to endure at all costs. I always have had an admiration for those that have a strong survival instinct and you Eternal, definitely have one of the strongest. So…I am going to make a few offers to you. Unique offers that I have never given any living being before. And trust me, I’ve been through this process quite a few times.” + +You struggle to keep standing and use your sword as a crutch to prop yourself up. + +“Wha…what…are…my choices…” you weakly ask. +“Well, your first choice is obvious. You pathetically continue to oppose me. You’ll inevitably lose of course. I highly recommend that you do not take this option. While I may respect a strong survival instinct, I do not respect foolishness and if you continue to fight me, that’s what you’ll be, a complete and utter fool. I do not think you are, but then again you just might prove me wrong. Besides dying in a fairly inglorious way your assigned afterlife will not be a pleasant one.” +“I…I…suppose I haven’t really been a good guy.” You say. + +“That’s a severe understatement. In fact you alone have contributed to the deaths of so many either directly or indirectly on this world that I almost wondered if I even needed to bother showing up. But honestly your brutal politics and such aside, that isn’t really what got you into trouble. Indeed there are many deities that admire and reward such behavior. Your complete and total obliteration of gnome souls however was severely frowned upon by certain deities. Those gnomes were supposed to go to a happy friendly afterlife, not get completely annihilated. Personally I don’t really give a shit since I know at the time you were just following your own orders, but I like to keep the rest of the deities off my back so if you continue to piss me off by opposing me, well I’ll be throwing you into that very dark painful place of which there is no hope, myself.” + +The death god pauses before announcing your next choice. + +“Your second choice is a very simple one, but probably not as obvious to the likes of you. Your second choice is to simply die. Lay your burdens down and rest. I realize that something like this would be hard for a warrior such as yourself, but I can assure you that if you do, I will guarantee you a place with your long lost love Alison.” + +You feel a slight surge of energy within you when you hear that name. + +“Al…Alison?” you utter. +“Yes, Alison. Granted, you probably don’t belong where she currently is, but fortunately for you I can pull a few strings to get you there. You and her will re-united at last. You will get to exist for the rest of eternity with her in perfect happiness.” + +The chance to be reunited with Alison does sound like a good deal, but you can’t help but wonder if it’s a lie or maybe there’s a catch just to lay down and die without struggle. Is this a trick? And if it is a trick, does that mean the death god believes you’re more powerful than he’s letting on and you could potentially defeat it? + +In any case you still haven’t heard your third choice, which the death god begins speaking on. + +“But perhaps your long lost love isn’t the true love that died. Perhaps your true love has always been with you in your heart. Perhaps you could potentially wish for that love affair to continue forever.” +“I…certainly hope you…aren’t talking about…a certain svelk…” you remark. + +Surprisingly this causes a dark chortle from the death god. + +“Oh no…not that one, Eternal. I am referring to a mistress of a more abstract nature. Your love of battle, war and bloodshed in general. That has always been a constant for you. As I have already mentioned your actions alone have either directly or indirectly caused multitudes of souls pour into my realm. I can also admire and respect a mortal that dedicated to death whether they realize it or not. Such a being could be of great use to me.” +“Use?” +“Yes. As you may have somewhat gathered from our pleasant chat here I am an incredibly busy deity. Mortals die all the time and I have a duty to collect souls, assign them and even completely obliterate a few sometimes. This is in addition to the periods where I have a whole world to purge and when the appointed time comes, I have to personally oversee its harvest. It breaks up the monotony to be sure, but it also takes time especially when I’ve got stubborn little mortals like yourself opposing me to the bitter end. Also people on other worlds don’t stop dying just because I’m purging another one. Souls stack up and then I get complaints from other deities saying they’re missing this and that soul. The complaints don’t really matter of course in the grand scheme of things, but it’s not something I need to hear when I’m already doing the thankless job that nobody else wants.” + +You never realized being a deity was so bureaucratic. You still don’t quite grasp how this is your problem though. Your only problem right now is struggling to live. + +“Tell me Eternal, how would you like to be truly eternal?” +“What…do you mean?” +“You have a gift. A gift that I wouldn’t mind putting to good use and this is your third choice. Beg me to make you my avatar on these world purging assignments.” +“What?!” +“I said beg me to make you my herald of death. Instead of me having to slog through a marked world, I’d send you in my place. Naturally I’d give you a little of my power to help you along, but I trust command over literally legions of the dead is more than enough for you to get the job done. Just think, you’d get to enjoy what you truly love over and over again. Battle, war, death, and everything else that goes along with it. Best of all, you never have to worry about silly things like troop morale or morality in general, because the goal will always be the same and you will never run out of willing soldiers.” + +Now this offer sounds really too good to be true. You can’t even believe that the death god is practically offering you a place by his side. + +“So, wait…you’re saying I can join…” +“No. I didn’t say join…I said beg. There’s a difference.” The death god interrupts. +“I… don’t understand.” You answer. +“It’s a test. A simple one really, but a test nevertheless. You are a proud being. Even when you served your Emperor with utter devotion, you were still a proud being. Again I can respect your pride. However, I can’t have you believing that you’re equal to me, because you aren’t. Not by a long shot. I also can’t have you thinking that somehow you’re going to try to turn this opportunity into a way to destroy me and take over, because you can’t. If this association is going to happen, I need you to humble yourself before me. Only then can I fully trust you because an oath will have been made. Such things are impossible to break when the gods are watching.” +“But…if I don’t stand a chance anyway then why do I need to…humble myself?” +“Let’s just say it’s a formality and the principle of it. Plus I’m suspicious by nature especially with a resourceful one such as yourself. Still, it is entirely up to you. I won’t force you to do something you may find repulsive to your nature. But I don’t think pride is in your nature. I believe war and battle is. And I believe the desire for those is a lot stronger than any pride you may have. Again though, you may prove me wrong.” + +And there you have it, you’ve been given your three choices, such as they are. + +You’ve been through a lot in your life and you never could’ve imagined it would end like this. You’re going to die no matter what you do that fact is certain. + +And yet this death god respects you enough to give you choices. Choices that you could’ve never dreamed of, but at the same time are somewhat familiar. + +You remember the very first time you had to make this choice… +> Die +It takes you a few seconds, but you soon yield to the inevitable. + +You’re tired of conflict. While it is true that war, bloodshed and the like are the very core of your essence and you do enjoy such things, you have to wonder is that what you really want? Do you wish to be nothing but destruction personified forever? (Or at least until the Death God has no further use for you?) + +You don’t know. Part of it has its appeal to you and if things were different maybe you’d choose such a role. + +However the Death God has offered you a chance to be with your first and only true love, Alison. Your time with her was STILL the happiest you ever were during your life. How can you possibly pass up such a chance? A chance to be with her forever. + +You smile at this prospect and with this idea in mind you collapse to the floor before the Death God. + +“I…am done…take…me…back to my…Alison…” you struggle to say as you feel all life leaving your body. + +The Death God hovers above you. + +“As you wish Eternal. I admit I did not expect you to make this choice. It is a difficult thing for most to deny their nature and pursue another path…but then I also understand the desire to be reunited with that one true love. Many should be so lucky to experience such a thing one day.” + +With the Death God’s last words to you, your life force ends and everything goes black. + +When you wake up you find yourself in a much different place. You’re lying in a bed first of all. Upon sitting up and looking about the room, it appears that you’re in some sort of house. A single closed door leads out, but before you even get out of the bed, you hear footsteps coming towards you. + +Instinctively you reach for a weapon, but you have none, instead you ready yourself to cast a spell. + +The door opens and a blonde woman in casual clothing with a sword in hand appears. + +It’s Alison. + +“Who are…wait…I feel like I should know you…do I know you?” she asks. +“It’s me! Alison, surely you know who I am?” you remark. +“I’m not sure.” + +You begin to slightly panic and get up off the bed to approach her, she doesn’t sheath her weapon, but she’s no longer holding it up in a threatening manner. + +“Alison, I’m your husband. We met while serving the Empire.” +“Empire? Husband? I’m sorry, but I’m just not quite placing you…what are you doing in my house and how do you know my name?” +“I came here to be with you! We fought in the Felkan War together! We loved one another and were married! You died while on a carriage ride back home from an assassin! Please! Listen to me, you have to remember!” + +You begin to wonder if this was the Death God’s elaborate joke on you. Putting you with your true love only for her to not remember you. You’re just about to curse the god, you hear hope. + +“Wait…I vaguely remember. Yes, we do know each other...” +“Yes! We were together! We were married!” +“I’m still not sure, but you seem very sincere and I can’t deny that you aren’t familiar to me. I’m not sure about all the other stuff you’re talking about though. It sounds very interesting though, why don’t you tell me all about it, I don’t get many visitors out here so I’m happy for the company. Try not to talk so fast this time; I didn’t even catch most of what you said before. I could’ve sworn you told me I died and that’s just ridiculous of course!” Alison chuckles, puts away her sword and tells you to follow her to the kitchen. + +What was supposed to be a happy occasion is turning out to be a frustrating one, but at least Alison is being friendly with you. You’re wondering what exactly is going on here. Why can’t she remember anything? + +In the brief time between walking from the bedroom to the kitchen you try to come up with some sort of explanation. She doesn’t even know she’s dead or you’re dead for that matter. Is this some sort of “new life” for her? Seems sort of an odd one; you never pictured Alison living in a place like this, which while a nice home it’s seemingly too peaceful. And that’s far from the type of military background that she came from, though she still has a sword for protection you guess, so some things must not have changed. + +While she’s pouring some water from a pitcher into a mug, you decide that maybe you should ask some questions. + +“Alison, how long have you lived here?” +“Oh, I dunno. I feel like I’ve lived here all my life, it’s a nice place though so no point in moving.” +“Where does the food come from? Do you farm or something?” +“Me? No, I wouldn’t know how. Sometimes I do a little hunting in the woods nearby, plenty of wildlife to provide meat. Got a garden outback too and sometimes I tend it, but the funny thing is it doesn’t seem to need it. Always has fresh vegetables and fruit available. Guess I just got strong healthy plants.” +“I see. So what about people? Have you ever seen anyone else?” +“Not really. There has been the occasional traveller passing through, usually they just smile and wave. Most are very friendly. In fact I believe you’re the first person besides myself that’s ever set foot inside my home. Here’s some water, you look a bit thirsty.” +“Uh, thanks…” you say and take the water. + +Upon drinking it, it’s some of the best water you’ve tasted in…well you don’t know whenever you’ve appreciated water or food for that matter. You just ate and drank because you had to usually. Never got any sort of enjoyment out of it. + +“Where does this water come from? No, wait let me guess a sparkling stream.” You say. +“Ha ha! No, it comes from a well out front, but there is a river that runs through the woods nearby. Doesn’t sparkle though.” Alison says smiling at what she believes is a small joke on your part. +“Well, I guess not everything is perfect.” You say. +“Well of course not everything is perfect, sometimes I even have problems with gnolls.” +“Gnolls?” +“Yeah sometimes a few of them pop up and harass me. Nothing major though, I usually just chop some of their heads off and the rest go running off. I’m pretty good with my sword, so they’re more comical and annoying than actually dangerous. + +You touch Alison’s hand from across the table. She gives you a look of confusion, but doesn’t pull away. + +“Alison listen to me. You used to fight gnolls while serving in the Empire army. We even fought many together. Don’t you remember any of that?” +“No…no can’t say that I do. Don’t remember ever being in any sort of army either, but sounds pretty exciting. You say we fought together? Tell me all about it. In fact why don’t you tell me all that stuff you were talking about before? It isn’t like I have anything better to do and I’m enjoying your company.” + +Seeing no better option you do just that. You focus on when you first met and everything involving her. You try to stick to major events hoping that those will spur her memory the most, but mostly because you’re having trouble remembering all the details yourself. + +Alison hangs on your every word and is enjoying your story. You have to admit even though you’re not entirely sure you’re getting through to her, you’re appreciating the time you’re spending with her. + +After you’re done you’re almost feeling a bit dizzy. + +“Wow, that’s some tale. And you say that was us huh? Wish I could remember it. Hey, wait didn’t you say I died earlier? What was that all about?” Alison asks. + +You look at Alison as she waits for your answer. You are about to explain again, but then realize that it won’t do any good. + +“…nothing. I was just saying something outlandish to get your attention because I really wanted you to remember me.” +“Well I suppose it did get my attention. Hmm seems to be getting dark outside, guess you better stay here for the night. Let me…” Alison suddenly gets up from her chair and stops speaking and stares off into the distance. +“Alison?” + +Her head turns toward you. + +“I…I think I remember…” +“You do?” you say standing up hopefully. +“Yes…I…mean not all of it. But I DO remember YOU. I remember that we were married! I loved you! Why were we apart? What…what…happened?” Alison asks. +“We were separated for many years due to forces beyond our control, but none of that matters, what matters now is that I’ve found you and we can be together again. I have come home and we will be together for all eternity now!” you remark. + +You open up your arms to hug her and within that moment tears well up in her eyes and she embraces you. + +Once again you feel the warmth of her body and the taste of her lips. A feeling you missed so much, but now that has changed forever. + +Alison and you hold each other for a long time as if the pair of you are going to be split from each other again even though that will never be the case again. + +The pair of you then retire to the bedroom and reunite in the way that lovers do. + +The next morning you wake up beside Alison who smiles sweetly to you and kisses you on the cheek. You enjoy her affection, but you feel a bit strange. + +“Good morning my love. Did you sleep well?” Alison asks. +“Yeah, but I feel a little weird.” You say. +“How do you mean? Like sick?” +“No, I feel fine. I dunno, I can’t explain it. I do know I’m happy to be with you though.” + +This comment earns you another kiss and the pair of you get up to start the day, though to be honest you aren’t sure what you’ll do with yourself. Everything seems to be taken care of already; maybe you could hunt you suppose. (Or kill gnolls if they show up) + +A little later when you’re still pondering on what to do with your day, Alison asks you some more about the stories you told her. She says that maybe she’ll remember more stuff if you tell them again. She also asks what you’ve been doing since you lost contact with her. + +And the strangest thing is you don’t know. Your mind is completely blank. In fact you barely remember the stories you did tell Alison. + +“That’s odd. I can’t remember.” You say. +“Really? You seemed to tell them in great detail yesterday considering you spent the whole day telling me the stories. Oh well I’m sure if they are really important you’ll remember again. Just like I remembered you!” Alison says. + +You smile at her comment and tell Alison that you’re taking her bow to hunt and will be back later. + +Another day and night passes and when you wake up this time you remember nothing of your old life at all. Alison doesn’t remember anything you told her either and the pair of you are unaware of the last two days even occurring. + +The only constant is that the pair of you know that you’re married and you love one another and that this has always been the case for as long as you both can remember. + +And so you and Alison live together in eternal bliss.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Before we begin, if you have any major questions, now is the time.” The being says. + +You have to admit, this situation is so unique that you can’t help but be curious so you do decide to ask questions. (As well and somehow holding out the futile hope that you might find an advantage) + +“Are you a god?” you ask. +“I suppose I am, but in the scheme of things I am more of a collector and caretaker. Gods typically get to do fun irresponsible things like torment mortals and encouraging holy wars. Strange though, this world wasn’t really high on any deity influences, the only record I can find of major divine influence here is a powerful yet non-divine being masquerading as a so called god of shadows and going by the name Dendrin and that thing left this world when you eradicated the shadows long ago.” It answers. +“Isn’t killing the world considered tormenting mortals?” you ask. +“To you and most others I suppose it would be, but this is really more of a necessary service. A reminder that death can’t be cheated. In reality, the divine don’t really want immortal types running about since it tends to threaten the status quo. If someone achieves immortality on a world then potentially someone else can do it too. Before you know it, you’ve got a whole new set of beings achieving godhood and believe me; we’ve got more than enough of them now. Too many really.” +“How the hell is that fair? I mean as you said these gods haven’t even been paying attention to this world and yet now they do?” +“Well as I said, you’re a potential threat. And of course you’re right. It isn’t fair, but there are strict laws on this matter. Certain conditions have to apply, has to be an opening, and a bunch of boring diety debating. I didn’t make them up either, they were long in place before I got this job so don’t blame me. Really though your world was marked a long time ago when the Mortos necromancers attempted the same thing several centuries ago. I was so busy though with other things at the time that wasn’t paying attention to just how close they were at closing the gate back up. Needless to say nobody was pleased about it and I got bitched at, but considering there wasn’t any danger of someone becoming truly immortal anymore on your world I just had it marked and kept a closer eye on it.” + +You helplessly listen to the death god’s words as the life continues to ebb from your body. + +“Knew it wouldn’t be long before someone here tried it again and then I’d get this world. Figured it would be one of those Mortos necromancers, but I have to admit I didn’t see someone like you doing the deed. Then again given your background maybe I shouldn’t be too surprised. For a mortal you’re somewhat interesting and I don’t say that lightly.” +“Thanks…I guess. Is that why you wanted to speak to me?” you ask starting to feel very frail and tired. + +“For the most part yes, but more than that. You see despite my assigned duty, I genuinely respect mortals who have a desire to endure at all costs. I always have had an admiration for those that have a strong survival instinct and you Eternal, definitely have one of the strongest. So…I am going to make a few offers to you. Unique offers that I have never given any living being before. And trust me, I’ve been through this process quite a few times.” + +You struggle to keep standing and use your sword as a crutch to prop yourself up. + +“Wha…what…are…my choices…” you weakly ask. +“Well, your first choice is obvious. You pathetically continue to oppose me. You’ll inevitably lose of course. I highly recommend that you do not take this option. While I may respect a strong survival instinct, I do not respect foolishness and if you continue to fight me, that’s what you’ll be, a complete and utter fool. I do not think you are, but then again you just might prove me wrong. Besides dying in a fairly inglorious way your assigned afterlife will not be a pleasant one.” +“I…I…suppose I haven’t really been a good guy.” You say. + +“That’s a severe understatement. In fact you alone have contributed to the deaths of so many either directly or indirectly on this world that I almost wondered if I even needed to bother showing up. But honestly your brutal politics and such aside, that isn’t really what got you into trouble. Indeed there are many deities that admire and reward such behavior. Your complete and total obliteration of gnome souls however was severely frowned upon by certain deities. Those gnomes were supposed to go to a happy friendly afterlife, not get completely annihilated. Personally I don’t really give a shit since I know at the time you were just following your own orders, but I like to keep the rest of the deities off my back so if you continue to piss me off by opposing me, well I’ll be throwing you into that very dark painful place of which there is no hope, myself.” + +The death god pauses before announcing your next choice. + +“Your second choice is a very simple one, but probably not as obvious to the likes of you. Your second choice is to simply die. Lay your burdens down and rest. I realize that something like this would be hard for a warrior such as yourself, but I can assure you that if you do, I will guarantee you a place with your long lost love Alison.” + +You feel a slight surge of energy within you when you hear that name. + +“Al…Alison?” you utter. +“Yes, Alison. Granted, you probably don’t belong where she currently is, but fortunately for you I can pull a few strings to get you there. You and her will re-united at last. You will get to exist for the rest of eternity with her in perfect happiness.” + +The chance to be reunited with Alison does sound like a good deal, but you can’t help but wonder if it’s a lie or maybe there’s a catch just to lay down and die without struggle. Is this a trick? And if it is a trick, does that mean the death god believes you’re more powerful than he’s letting on and you could potentially defeat it? + +In any case you still haven’t heard your third choice, which the death god begins speaking on. + +“But perhaps your long lost love isn’t the true love that died. Perhaps your true love has always been with you in your heart. Perhaps you could potentially wish for that love affair to continue forever.” +“I…certainly hope you…aren’t talking about…a certain svelk…” you remark. + +Surprisingly this causes a dark chortle from the death god. + +“Oh no…not that one, Eternal. I am referring to a mistress of a more abstract nature. Your love of battle, war and bloodshed in general. That has always been a constant for you. As I have already mentioned your actions alone have either directly or indirectly caused multitudes of souls pour into my realm. I can also admire and respect a mortal that dedicated to death whether they realize it or not. Such a being could be of great use to me.” +“Use?” +“Yes. As you may have somewhat gathered from our pleasant chat here I am an incredibly busy deity. Mortals die all the time and I have a duty to collect souls, assign them and even completely obliterate a few sometimes. This is in addition to the periods where I have a whole world to purge and when the appointed time comes, I have to personally oversee its harvest. It breaks up the monotony to be sure, but it also takes time especially when I’ve got stubborn little mortals like yourself opposing me to the bitter end. Also people on other worlds don’t stop dying just because I’m purging another one. Souls stack up and then I get complaints from other deities saying they’re missing this and that soul. The complaints don’t really matter of course in the grand scheme of things, but it’s not something I need to hear when I’m already doing the thankless job that nobody else wants.” + +You never realized being a deity was so bureaucratic. You still don’t quite grasp how this is your problem though. Your only problem right now is struggling to live. + +“Tell me Eternal, how would you like to be truly eternal?” +“What…do you mean?” +“You have a gift. A gift that I wouldn’t mind putting to good use and this is your third choice. Beg me to make you my avatar on these world purging assignments.” +“What?!” +“I said beg me to make you my herald of death. Instead of me having to slog through a marked world, I’d send you in my place. Naturally I’d give you a little of my power to help you along, but I trust command over literally legions of the dead is more than enough for you to get the job done. Just think, you’d get to enjoy what you truly love over and over again. Battle, war, death, and everything else that goes along with it. Best of all, you never have to worry about silly things like troop morale or morality in general, because the goal will always be the same and you will never run out of willing soldiers.” + +Now this offer sounds really too good to be true. You can’t even believe that the death god is practically offering you a place by his side. + +“So, wait…you’re saying I can join…” +“No. I didn’t say join…I said beg. There’s a difference.” The death god interrupts. +“I… don’t understand.” You answer. +“It’s a test. A simple one really, but a test nevertheless. You are a proud being. Even when you served your Emperor with utter devotion, you were still a proud being. Again I can respect your pride. However, I can’t have you believing that you’re equal to me, because you aren’t. Not by a long shot. I also can’t have you thinking that somehow you’re going to try to turn this opportunity into a way to destroy me and take over, because you can’t. If this association is going to happen, I need you to humble yourself before me. Only then can I fully trust you because an oath will have been made. Such things are impossible to break when the gods are watching.” +“But…if I don’t stand a chance anyway then why do I need to…humble myself?” +“Let’s just say it’s a formality and the principle of it. Plus I’m suspicious by nature especially with a resourceful one such as yourself. Still, it is entirely up to you. I won’t force you to do something you may find repulsive to your nature. But I don’t think pride is in your nature. I believe war and battle is. And I believe the desire for those is a lot stronger than any pride you may have. Again though, you may prove me wrong.” + +And there you have it, you’ve been given your three choices, such as they are. + +You’ve been through a lot in your life and you never could’ve imagined it would end like this. You’re going to die no matter what you do that fact is certain. + +And yet this death god respects you enough to give you choices. Choices that you could’ve never dreamed of, but at the same time are somewhat familiar. + +You remember the very first time you had to make this choice… +> Beg +It takes you a few seconds, but you soon yield to the truth. + +The death god is right. War is in your nature. It always has been. Whether it was bred into you or you grew into it is irreverent. It’s yours now and you’re going to embrace it. + +You fall to your knees and bow before the death god. Humbling yourself and disregarding whatever foolish pride you may have had. + +“I beg you oh great god of death, make me your herald of destruction. Let me be the bringer of doom to a thousand worlds. Let me unleash the endless war on the heavens.” You say with all your remaining strength. +“Take it easy there, we aren’t going to be doing all that. Just the worlds appointed for death. However, I do appreciate the enthusiasm.” The death god remarks. + +The death god hovers before you and a skeletal hand reaches out towards your head. + +“Hold still, this may hurt…a lot.” + +The death god clutches your head with its fingers and suddenly your body experiences unimaginable pain. Whatever injuries or tortures you may have experienced pale in comparison to this. You are experiencing death, but not just your own. You are experiencing the death of everyone you ever killed all at the same time. + +The image of every single death fills your mind and you can’t shut out the physical, emotional or spiritual anguish you’re experiencing. You can’t even cry out. For a brief moment you think you’ve made a horrible mistake before you go utterly insane as your mind is completely destroyed by the dreadful experience. + +And then you feel nothing at all and everything goes black. + +You don’t know how long time passes, but suddenly you are awakened by the death god’s voice: + +“Arise, harbinger. Your glorious work and new purpose begins now on this very world.” + +You stand up and notice that you are no longer breathing. You do not feel the essence of life flowing through your system. You walk outside the city gates and before you stand legions of undead awaiting your command to purge the rest of this world of life. You stare at them and they stare at you with the same dead eyes. + +And something about it is beautiful to you. You didn’t know that the dead could experience anything like feelings, but you can feel a thrill of anticipation of the death and destruction you’re going unleash on this world. Nothing in your old mortal life can compare to this moment. + +“And to think, I hesitated.” You whisper.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 80 + +“So you’re really going to do it?” Cassandra asks while lying in bed next to you. +“That was sort of the point of going to Mortos in the first place.” You answer. +“True I suppose. I really hated it there. I mean killing and capturing svelk was about the only thing that was remotely enjoyable. I was pretty glad you eventually sent all the Eyes back home.” + +You get up out of bed to get your day started. + +“Ah, shit.” You say feeling an ache in your back. +“Are you alright? I thought you…um…replenished yourself recently.” +“If by replenished you mean drained the lives of twenty of my citizens last month then yes I did, but as I’ve told you before, it doesn’t last long and it wears out quicker as the years have gone on. Not to mention humans don’t exactly have the most sustaining life forces to begin with so it takes more of them just to turn back the clock a few decades.” + +As you look in the mirror at yourself trying to determine if you need to “recharge” today, Cassandra doesn’t pursue that line of questioning anymore. She knows that elves being long-lived creatures would probably require less effort on your part and sustain you longer. In fact that’s probably why she started to show “attraction” towards you a few years ago. She’d never admit it, but she fears that you’ll suddenly start rounding up elves and draining them instead. + +While it definitely had occurred to you to do so, you tended to limit it to just a few since they still don’t have the largest of populations and you had no idea how long you’d have to “ration out” the lives of your citizens before you could unlock all the secrets of the book. Cassandra probably believes she’s “swaying” you through sex though. + +Gnomes probably REALLY feared being rounded up, but fortunately for them you still respect their engineering skills and you don’t have a gnome fetish like Casimir did. Besides, ever since your human engineer losses in Mortos and Elam dying last year (Another rarity via natural causes), you need all the skilled engineers you can get. + +As for your “relationship” with Cassandra you have no love for her, a mild fondness, a respect for her abilities and her usefulness, but nothing more. You’re fairly certain Cassandra has no true love for you either. Respect and loyalty sure, a desire to place herself in a higher and “safer” position, most definitely, but she does not love you. + +Part of you has wondered if you reciprocated her advances in the first place was because she was an elf. Besides the natural attractiveness common to their race, she very faintly reminds you of Semra. Not in personality or even looks, but she’s an elf and it’s close enough. + +“I am seriously fucked up.” You mumble to yourself as you think about that again. +“What did you say?” Cassandra asks. +“Nothing, just thinking about something. You better get dressed, I’m going to need you and the Eyes on full alert for this thing.” You say which stirs Cassandra to get up and follow your lead in getting dressed. + +“Emperor, the…subjects are currently all being held at the ritual pyramid in the Usksha Desert, all ten thousand of them are still alive and restrained. I know I’ve told you this before, but Empire citizens’ have not been calm about this. Most don’t even know exactly what you’re planning, but they’re already coming up with stories and most of which are not too far off from the truth. The Eyes have been working overtime in keeping the peace, but I fear that a rebellion of some sort will be inevitable. Most likely in Rask and Nakol province, perhaps even in the Tral province.” +“The citizens’ would like it even less if I continued to just drain random people at a greater rate eventually exceeding ten thousand. This ritual is going to prevent having to do that anymore. After it’s done, we can deal with the civil unrest and in time Dokkrus as well.” + +Cassandra smiles a bit when she hears that, you know she’s probably been eager to go kill more svelk again. + +“I always meant to ask, but why is this to be performed in Usksha?” Cassandra says. +“No major settlements nearby and it isn’t like the usksha nomads are a problem anymore. Haven’t even had a sandworm pop up in decades. I thought about the plains of Tor, since there was nice flat land there to build the pyramid, but the Usksha desert works just as well. Besides, this is only going to be necessary once. No need to have the pyramid any more afterwards and it’ll be cheaper to just let the sands consume everything rather than having to tear it down and having crews to dispose of all the bodies.” +“Couldn’t you just animate them to walk into the ocean or something?” +“Hah, I’m sure a dead march to the ocean is just what the already agitated citizens’ would want to see.” You chuckle. + +“No, this is a better way. To be honest raising the dead takes a great deal of willpower and I find it to be a waste of the time and energy. I mean I did it to a limited degree in Mortos with the fallen Eternals because it bolstered the ranks and using the dead negated some of the advantages the necromancers had. Personally though I’d rather just cast a rain of fire down or chain lightning to directly harm my enemies. I don’t need unreliable rotting corpses to do my work.” You say. + +Cassandra nods at your answer and the pair of you are off to the Usksha Desert. + +Even before your carriage reaches the desert the black pyramid is visible from the Nalin border. The closer you get the more it looms ominously. + +There are grim deeds going to be performed this day and night and well…until the ritual is complete. + +The necromancers of Mortos didn’t need as many sacrifices when they attempted this ritual since there were a lot more of them to perform it and support each other’s magical energy. They were also more skilled. You are just one man that has tried to shove as much necromantic knowledge into your head in just a few years. You sometimes wonder if this is indeed a fool’s errand. + +But you’ve gone over the rites, you’ve gone over the symbols, the steps, made allowances for your unique situation, and of course had a big ass pyramid built just to accomplish all this. You don’t think you could be any more ready. + +When you arrive at the ritual pyramid, several Eternals stand ready for your commands. There are so few of them left now and they’re all fourth gens. It wasn’t but a decade ago that together with the third gens, Eternals were nearly two thousand strong. When this is all over, you really need to get that project back on track again. Too bad Elam isn’t still around to carry out some of his theories, but maybe he left some notes in that now abandoned workshop of his. + +“The sacrifices are inside the pyramid, my Emperor. All we await is you to take your place and begin.” An Eternal says when you exit the carriage. +“Very good, we will begin soon.” You reply as you shield your eyes to look up at the pyramid which does look pretty impressive this close up.” + +Cassandra begins to leave the carriage, but you stop her from doing so. + +“Cassandra, why don’t you head back. I don’t think you’re going to want to be here for this. Not because I don’t think you can’t handle it, but because it’s going to take awhile and I’d rather have you keeping a check on the potential civil unrest situation you’ve been concerned about. I mean other than my Eternals here, you’re about the only person I can truly trust and rely on anymore.” +“Very well, and thank you my Emperor.” Cassandra says and kisses you before getting back inside the carriage. + +With Cassandra on her way back, you begin to make the long climb up the pyramid feeling the aches the entire time. You’ll be glad to put an end to that soon. When you finally get to the top, you take a short breather and accept the water that a nearby Eternal hands you. + +“Shit, that sun is a killer. Maybe I should’ve had this built on the Tor plains after all. (Whew) All right then let’s get on with this. Bring out the first sacrifice.” You say and a couple of your Eternals nod and go through the entryway to carry out your orders. + +While you wait you place the ritual book on a nearby stone podium and examine the sacrificial altar and the symbols you had etched into it. The altar itself was designed to be sturdy, but also has a slight elegance to it. The craftsman really put some artistic touches to it. You aren’t normally one to admire something like that, but in this case you do. + +As the screams of your first sacrifice get closer you draw out your mithril dagger. Ah this dagger has certainly been with you a long time. Saved your life more than a few times too. + +Still, you only keep it for one reason. As a reminder to end Semra’s life with it one day. (Yet another thing on the to do list after achieving immortality) + +Your Eternals bring out your first sacrifice. A young elven girl. She’s terrified, crying and begging for her life. + +“Well, it’s a good thing I sent Cassandra home. Pretty sure she wouldn’t have wanted to see this. How many elves are there in there anyway?” you ask one of the Eternals ignoring the girl’s screams. +“Apologies, but I’m not exactly sure my Emperor. I know we brought in a lot, but we’re not sure how many the Eyes brought in.” +“They most likely didn’t bring in any. Probably primarily stuck to humans. So…who do we have in there anyway?” +“Mostly humans as you might expect. They’re from all over the Empire. Some elves, some kobolds, some orcs, some usksha, I know we even dragged a few ogres down here. All of them are of varying ages, colors, occupations and gender. You said the more variety from walks of life the better.” +“That’s true. For some reason this will work better with more variety of life. Not exactly sure why, but I’m following the instructions. Just out curiosity, any gnomes?” +“We did get a few. Tried to limit them to criminals though.” +“As long as we got a few, okay throw her on the altar and let’s get started.” You say. + +As the girl continues to scream for her life, your Eternals place her on the altar. + +“Did you want us to gag these people in the future?” one of your Eternals asks. +“No, apparently the terror and fear they outwardly display helps this ritual too, again don’t ask me why, I’m just following what was in this book…shhhh…I’ll make this quick.” You say and then chant as you bring the dagger down. + +When the deed is done and the girl’s life has indeed been exstinguished, her body is thrown down the steps on the left side of the pyramid. That pile is going to get very big before this over. + +Time passes from day and night as one by one people are dragged for you to kill. You have to take breaks every so often and after a few days of this you even resort to draining the life of some of your Eternals just to keep your strength up. + +You know its working though, you can feel it. By the time you’ve passed the five thousand mark the daytime sky no has a sun beating down on you and a constant overcast hangs in the air. A sandstorm whips up and at one point it even begins to rain, which it practically never does in this desert. + +You preserve through the sand and the rain as you did with the sun. The closer you get, the more you can feel your success. Eventually you don’t even begin feeling tired after killing a few hundred people, you’re starting to feel energized by it. Eventually you stop taking breaks and start dragging victims out yourself since your Eternals are certainly tired. + +By the time you hit over nine thousand your surrounding area is in a permanent state of unnatural darkness. A blackness has covered a wide area of the desert and you’re not even seeing the stars at this point, its just black like a void. + +And then finally the last victim is brought out. A miserable looking malnourished kobold who looks like he’s on his last legs anyway. He’s so weak that one of your Eternals picks him up by one hand and places him on the altar. + +You speak the last parts of the spell and bring down the knife ending the kobold’s life instantly and that’s when it happens. + +You feel a surge of energy like you’ve never felt before. It’s like when you drain the life of someone, but this is different, like a feeling of completeness. You believe its working. You don’t have a mirror handy, but your hands are certainly deprived of wrinkles now and you don’t have any aches or pains from age anymore. + +“I feel it! It’s working! It’s…” you shout and then suddenly you fall to the ground and a large rumbling sound from above is heard almost to the point to it being deafening. + +You are helped up by your Eternals, who begin to ask you what to do next. You look up and see several ghostly forms screaming out of the black void above. They don’t attack, they just seem to hang there and float around, but that doesn’t mean they won’t soon. + +“Emperor! Watch out!” an Eternal shouts and hacks down the kobold you just killed. + +Just as Nicodemus told you what the necromancers did, just as Semra warned you, you’ve opened up a gate to the Realm of the Dead. +> Run down the pyramid steps +Realizing the immediate danger you’re in, you waste no time in running down the steps of the pyramid. The ghostly forms begin to mock you. + +“Why do you fear death mortal? Did you not ssssummon it here?” one of the ghosts says nearly causing you to lose your footing on the steps when it suddenly floats in front of you. + +You blast the ghost with a magic bolt and then proceed to do the same thing to others that fly near you. Several of them dissipate instantly. + +“Undead bastards! You won’t….AGH!” you start to say when all of a sudden you begin to feel very weak. It’s not just you either; it’s your Eternals too. The feeling is similar to the draining effect by undead creatures or the negative zones of Mortos. You might not be aging, but you definitely don’t feel well, in fact you feel like you’re going to die and given how close to death you’ve been on several occasions, you’re very familiar with what that feels like. In fact, you’re reminded of the time when Cyrus nearly killed you. Feels like that. + +And unfortunately due to this sudden weakness you do lose your footing on the pyramid steps, as do a couple of your Eternals. You end up tumbling down the rest of the steps smacking your head against the hard stone several times. By the time you hit the bottom you have most certainly broken your neck. You aren’t dead, but you’re definitely not in a good position. + +Having little option you attempt to mend your broken neck through healing magic. It’s requiring all your focus which is already weak due to the negative energy in the area. The spell is working, but it’s going much slower than normal. + +In the meantime more spirits and the like pour out of the black void above the pyramid and the pile of bodies that were one dead have now begun to shuffle around their original area to the other side where you are currently at. Your Eternals that didn’t manage to kill themselves falling down the pyramid try to slow down the horde, but ultimately they fall before the sheer numbers and the unnatural magic affecting them. + +Soon it is only you who are left and your broken neck still isn’t quite mended, you only manage to sit up just in time for the newly risen bodies of your sacrificial victims to eat you alive.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 75 + +The longer you spend in this place, the more you’re starting to like it and that is somewhat of a worrying thought to you, because it certainly isn’t a thought shared by anyone under your command. The last five years have probably been a nightmare to most. + +You’ve had to rotate your “normal” military personnel fairly regularly. Most of them can only handle the psychological impact of the powerful undead horrors the necromancers have unleashed a limited amount of times before they become more of a liability rather than an asset. You can only imagine how full the asylums are getting back home. For the most part you’ve regulated most of your military to defend Evigrus since the svelk in last two years have tried to open up a new front by transporting groups of elite via portals. They’ve been relatively unsuccessful and even less so when they attempted to do the same thing on Nyttrus where your kobolds easily overwhelmed them and used the land to their advantage. The svelk for the most part have seemingly pulled out of Mortos though altogether. + +You’ve had to pull back your Eyes as well. Well trained they may be, most of them are still human and with that they suffer the same failings of the mind. It’s just as well, since things are starting to get a little unstable back home. It’s probably a combination of several things (Some of which might be all the new asylum patients) so Cassandra and the Eyes are back to their primary job of maintaining order. + +Even the Eternals are starting to get weary of this war and most of them have aged several years than normal. Still, they are Eternals, and whether they are third or fourth generation, they stand by your side…even in death. + +Since your time here, you’ve learned how to use the necromancer’s magic against them. You’ve managed to unlock the secrets of necromancy. You’re no master at it, and it takes great concentration on your part, but its come in handy at times. The odd thing is you seem to only be able to maintain control over fallen Eternals. Attempting to raise others has only resulted in them eventually turning against you. You wonder if its because of the way Eternals are “made” or their conditioned loyaty from birth, or maybe a combination of both that seems to result in their dedication to you and resist the overpowering will of the necromancers. + +As far as your own concerns about your state of mind you’ve been trying to hold it together. You sometimes think you’re living on borrowed time and that if you don’t achieve your goal soon, this place will eventually consume you. Maybe that’s why you’re starting to like it here, because you feel so close to death and this place is basically a home to the dead. + +But you’re not dying here if you can help it; in fact the whole point to this is so you don’t die at all. You’ve already begun to unlock the talents of the necromantic arts by yourself. As soon as you get that book, you KNOW you’ll be able to master them completely and become immortal. + +And that goal is now closer than ever because you’ve finally tracked it down. + +You stand on a slightly elevated bit of land with what remains of your army of Eternals (both living and dead) and a few juggernauts filled with crews of half mad engineers. In the distance a ruined fortress lies before you. It is a non-descript thing and has no real defenses since its walls are mostly broken or gone completely, but THAT is where your goal lies. Inside it somewhere. + +And that is also where Nicodemus must be. + +You need to attack now, because you know it’ll be only a matter of time before reinforcements to help him show up. There are ALWAYS undead, no matter how many you put down in this place. + +“General Damon, today the Empire assures its mastery over death itself.” You say. +“We are all prepared my Emperor, we just await your word.” + +You nod and for a moment there is complete silence. + +“ATTACK!” you shout and then in unison, you and your Eternals advance towards the target. You lead from the front, just like the old days… + +Your juggernauts rumble past the sides of your army and then that’s when you finally hear him in your head… + +“This will not end well for you, Eternal. Turn back from this path now, or suffer the same fate as your father Casimir.” + +Naturally you ignore this pitiful attempt at stopping you, so Nicodemus finally unleashes his defenses. + +Several undead rise up out of the ground. Not just the normal type either, these are the remains of some sort of long dead gigantic beasts that must’ve once roamed this island. They are accompanied by the appearance of several ghostly forms. Wraiths and spectres with their ability to drain life with a mere touch. + +To your far left and far right, hordes of skeletons and zombies come popping up out of the ground. Nicodemus probably believes that you’ve foolishly walked into an obvious trap, but honestly you knew something like this would happen. Your goal here is to get the book at all costs. + +“Death will not stop us today! But then some of you personally already know that! Destroy these abominations and take the fortress!” you shout. + +One of your juggernauts is already moving far ahead of your army and firing off its canon, blowing away bits of the gigantic bone horrors. Under the right circumstances you believe it would easily finish up the task, but it isn’t those undead giants that are the problem, the problem lies with the wraiths and spectres who easily glide through the machine and turning it into a steel coffin by killing the crew within. + +Your other juggernaut decides not to engage such ghostly creatures and instead turns off to fend off the approaching undead horde to your left. Hopefully it can destroy a good chunk of them. + +The undead giants still intact begin to lumber forward to meet your army while throwing large pieces of stone lying nearby. You cast a barrier in front of your army to protect against the projectiles and then throw your own projectiles in the form of fire at the giants while your army opens fire at their legs until the bone and rotting flesh that are allowing them to still stand is finally severed to a degree that the rest of their bulk goes crashing to the ground. Most of them splinter into pieces from the fall, but other continue to come at you, dragging themselves toward you with their arms. These are dispatched with a few well places magic bolts and more gunfire. + +With the giants mostly taken care of, you notice the spectres and wraiths steadily approaching. You immediately drop the barrier and redirect your energy to cast an enchantment over your soldiers’ hand weapons. Guns are useless against things like spectres and wraiths, but with some skill they can still be overcome by an enchanted melee weapon. + +“Prepare for melee and don’t let them touch you!” you shout. + +The unearthly howls and shrieks by the ghostly assaliants fill your ears as you blast them with your magic bolts. Your dead Eternals come in very handy here as they directly engage the spectres and wraiths and try to shield their living brethren (and you) from being touched. It isn’t without some casualties though and the problems increase when the horde on your right finally reaches you. Fortunately the left side seems to be preoccupied with overwhelming the juggernaut, which has now resorted to its inside mounted repeater rifles, and just trying to run them over though its wheels are starting to get jammed with body parts. + +“FIGHT THROUGH THESE ROTTING BAGS, WE’RE NEARLY THERE!” you shout just in time to see several necromancers appear on the battlements and begin doing some sort of chant. + +Suddenly there’s an aura of death around you, and it isn’t just becase you’re surrounded by zombies. You feel like you just walked into one of those negative zones, except this one is being forced on you. + +You’re old enough as it is, you can’t afford to age anymore. You have to do something now because you won’t even make it to the broken fortress gates at this point. + +You call your Eternals to surround you and you begin to cast a spell of your own. Your living Eternals are suffering the affects of the necromancers’ spell, but trying to cancel their spell through your willpower isn’t going to help because they’re too strong collectively. + +So you rely on your traditional blast everything in the nearby area and hope it kills everything. + +You bring down an inferno on not just your enemies, but you and your people as well. Though you attempt to protect some with a surrounding barrier, but you just don’t have the strength to protect everyone. + +Most of the horde to your right are incinerated as are most of your people. There isn’t even much left to “raise.” + +To your left, there is a similar sight with a pile of burned undead no longer in any condition to pose a threat, though the juggernaut sits still and completely blackened by the rain of fire. The crew inside has no doubt cooked to death. + +Most importantly are the effects you see in front of you. You no longer see the row of necromancers and no longer feel the effects of their spell. The ruined fortess is also partially on fire, but it being made of stone it isn’t doing much more than cracking the already damaged structure. + +You’re incredibly drained however. This battle has really taken it out of you and you’ve still got Nicodemus and who knows what else to deal with. General Damon still by your side helps you from falling down. The Eternals that are still alive are finishing up putting down the undead that managed to survive by being within your protective barrier when you cast it. + +“Come on, my Emperor. As you said, we’re almost there.” He says. + +There are other necromantic arts that you’ve learned besides raising your Eternals, though you haven’t really pondered using them since there wasn’t any need or you still didn’t really have mastery over them. + +One of these was emulating the life drain of some of the undead here. + +And suddenly you’re actually pondering draining your own Eternals of their lifeforce to sustain your own. The thought does not give you any pleasure to do so, but you just aren’t sure if you’re going to make it otherwise. +> Continue onward +You can’t do it. While you’ve sacrificed many in several different ways, you’re not going to start draining the life force of your own Eternals like some undead horror. You’ve crossed many lines and all its done is brought you to this ruined state. + +You struggle towards the fortress, but even with Damon helping you, you don’t think you’re going to make it, let alone have the strength to face Nicodemus. + +“Take…take me back home…” you order Damon. You don’t even need to tell him twice, he sees how pale and weak you are and all of you are making a hasty retreat. + +Unfortunately between your age, your wounds, your exhaustion and the general negative energy in Mortos, you don’t make back home alive and you unceremoniously pass away just before you get to the home portal.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 62 + +“The transport airships have made their test run to the outskirts of Dokkrus and returned. They’re ready for the real mission now, my Emperor.” Elam remarks. +“Good, because we’re sending them and a couple of the upgraded regular airships.” You say. + +This is a major step closer to your goals. Cassandra, Galen and the rest have managed to locate and hold a fairly intact portal for you. The base around it has already been dug out for easier lifting and they haven’t suffered many svelk attacks, well not many concentrated svelk attack at least. The svelk that are attacking are just the regular xenophobic type that doesn’t want outsiders on their territory. They have no real grasp of the greater plans that are going on. + +Semra’s actions have been surprisingly minimal though apparently she’s been too busy defending her own territory (and portal and mines) from not just your sabotage attempts (Which unfortunately haven’t been too successful), but from other svelk warbands. It would seem that Cassandra and your Eyes have at least successfully managed to keep up the ongoing chaos there. + +Won’t be long now. + +“Emperor, may I accompany you on this mission?” Zana asks. +“Huh?” you say being interrupted by your private thoughts. +“May I accompany you on this mission, my Emperor? I know I sounded a little afraid the last time Dokkrus was mentioned, but I admit part of me still wanted to go. I’d like to join you on this mission. Besides, I did have a hand in building these airships, it might be best if someone with that knowledge came along.” +“I imagine Klemto might have some objections to that.” You say. +“I love him, but he’s too over protective. Besides, you’re the Emperor if you want me to come with you then he has no choice but to comply right?” Zana says almost in a flirtatious way. You’re not exactly sure how to take that, but Elam definitely looks surprised. Maybe even a little jealous. + +“Well, that is correct…okay fine you can come with me.” +“This will be a great honor my Emperor! I’m looking forward to this!” Zana says. +“You will be accompanying me aboard the Storm III.” You say. +“You’re going to be on the Storm III?” +“That was the plan given that it’s the flagship, why where did you think I was going to be?” you ask. +“Well I assumed that you’d want to be aboard one of the transport airships to better oversee the process as well as to better defend it from attack in case the svelk try something.” +“That’s sort of why I have the Storm III and company going with them. They will be defending against possible svelk attacks, though barring Semra’s meddling; I don’t see any major threat to any of the airships themselves. The svelk are remarkably still stuck in the dark ages when it comes to weaponry.” +“True, but I know you have the ability to cast those large barriers for defense. I dunno I just don’t see your own extra protection on a transport airship as such a bad idea. It would allow the escorts to focus a little more on protecting the other.” +“Hrm. Never hurts to be sure I guess. Duly noted, I’ll think about it.” + +With Zana’s brief suggestion she excuses herself to get her things prepared for the mission, leaving you alone with Elam who realizes his glances of faint jealousy have caught your attention and he is now trying to not make eye contact. + +“Elam you’re acting like a teenager. I’m not remotely interested in your woman so you can stop worrying that I’m going to start fucking her on the airship.” You blurt out. +“Uh…um…thank you my Emperor…I uh…” Elam stutters a bit at a lost for how to respond. +“How long have you two been an item anyway? It doesn’t really show much when you two are together.” +“We try to keep it professional my Emperor. Human women here aren’t in big supply here in New Dessel and I can’t identify with any of the Eyes, but Zana…she’s something special…never have I encountered a woman with such a magnificent intellect for science!” +“Mm, I’m sure that the only thing…” you smirk. +“Well her physical attributes are nice as well.’ Elam says. + +Elam goes on to ask if he can discuss his desire to work more in the medical and biology field when you return. You tell him that he may continue his experiments as usual, but you’re going to need his help with the portal when it’s brought back most likely. + +Your don’t bother talking with Klemto about Zana. You figure she can tell him herself, assuming she even bothers and decides to just make it a surprise for him. + +You do take the opportunity to look at the new airships. It’s odd, but as many times as you’ve seen them up close this will be the first time you’ll actually be on one of these things. Even on your return trip from Nyttrus you went by boat rather than waiting for another airship. + +When the day arrives Klemto approaches you. You’re guessing he must’ve heard the news by now. He comes to you hat in hand looking pitiful. + +“Emperor…I understand my daughter is going with you…I just beg of one thing and that’s that you see that she’s safe.” +“You make a lot of demands of your Emperor…(sigh) She’ll be fine Klemto, you worry too much. I doubt if the svelk are even going to be able hit us if they even attack. Besides, she’s going to be aboard the Storm III and given that it’s the heaviest armed airship we have right now, she’ll be one of the safest people there.” +“Well that’s good to hear. At least she’ll be close to you.” +“Not necessarily. I might be flying on one of the transports. Zana suggested that it might be best if I was aboard one to better defend it in case the unexpected should happen.” + +As Klemto’s mind fills with worry again, you wonder if you should take Zana’s advice or not. +> Board one of the transports +Zana had a good idea; the transports could use a little extra protection so you decide to get on one of them. + +After about a half hour you finally get used to the idea of being so high in the air and less paranoid. You didn’t think it possible for you to be, but somewhere in the back of your mind, you had the concern of this thing falling out of the sky which is probably why you haven’t stayed in one place on the ship for very long and have felt the need to pace about it. + +Just as you’re getting used to the long flight over the ocean, you are suddenly in for something extremely unexpected. + +The a few of the Storm III’s cannons suddenly fire upon your transport ship! The transport you’re on is hit severely and is set ablaze along with several of the crew killed. More than that though is from this distance you can also see the Storm III suffering its own explosions in several places. You have no idea what is going on, but it’s obvious some sort of treachery has occurred. The only other thing you see is a figure jumping off the Storm and then a large odd piece of what you guess is white fabric comes out of the figure that jumped, slowing the descent. + +Meanwhile your ship slowly starts veering towards the other transport while continuing to burn around you. Between the collision, the fire and the other explosions going on aboard the ship you are caught in this disaster and even your magic can’t save you. One explosion knocks you unconscious and you aren’t awake when the wreckage finally hits the ocean.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 60 + +“Well, looks like we’ve lost the Tornado.” Warrick says as the pair of you see through in the near distance a multi-colored dragon unleash a gout of flame from its mouth, which engulfs the airship. Already heavily damaged the flying fortress can’t take anymore and begins to explode. Minor ones at first, then one large one. Flaming pieces of the machine fall from the sky. + +“It’s all right. It’s all right. The Storm II is still there and hopefully it’ll kill that damn thing or at least wound it enough for us to do so. Either way that flying lizard dies today. This war will be all but won with its death. It’s the last one and I’m glad it’s finally decided to come to us this time, because I’m sick of chasing it all over this damn continent. I want to get the invasion of Dokkrus underway properly and I can’t very well do that if I’m stuck in this damn jungle continent.” You say preparing for the large group of Iznac approaching Fort Canopy. + +“Hrm. Certainly is a lot of them. Better get on with this.” Warrick says and orders the cannons to fire upon the multitude, which puts a dent in their numbers, but doesn’t stop their advancing. + +You look over the battlements and see several Iznacs climbing the walls of the fort like an army of ants. They aren’t even using ladders, they’re just scaling the fort with their bare hands. It’s actually rather impressive, until you unleash a chain of lightning to zap all of them. The shock is enough to at least cause most of them to fall off if not outright kill them immediately. + +“Slaughter the four armed spider eyed bastards! Make them realize that their domination of this continent has passed! This is the time of the Empire!” you shout to the Eternals defending the fort. + +Your people are doing their best though they can’t stop every Iznac from scaling the fort. Soon the gunfire is replaced by sounds of close combat weaponry. No matter how far the advances in technology, it always eventually comes down to looking your opponent in the eye and feeling their blood splatter as you end their life. + +While you’re busy hacking off the limbs of an Iznac warrior, another loud explosion in the distance is heard followed by a bright flash in the sky. It’s not lightning from the storm, but rather the demise of your Storm. The Storm II joins the Tornado in crashing to the ground after losing its skirmish with the dragon. Hopefully the rain is making the jungle wet enough or else the flames from the wreckage of these downed airships are going to cause an inferno throughout the jungle. + +“Damn! The Iznac brought their little frog slaves and the remainder of those orc traitors!” Warrick says and cuts down several Glip before helping the rest of the soldiers fend off the orcs smashing through the fortress’ gates. + +It doesn’t matter in the scheme of things because even with overwhelming odds, your Eternals are still holding their own against all attackers. You then hear a roaring sound getting closer to your position and the sounds of great wings flapping. + +You shout a general command for the still working cannons to be pointed towards the dragon and to prepare to fire when the beast is in range. In the meantime you and Warrick try to keep that side of the fort relatively free of invading forces. + +“Hey, you think maybe I can get the chance to kill the dragon this time? I know you’re the Emperor and all, but you don’t need to prove your superiority all the damn time.” Warrick jokes. +“Yeah? Well maybe you’ll get your chance if you aren’t as slow like you were the last two times.” You retort. +“Slow? Well excuse me Mr. lightning fingers, but we all don’t have the ability to blast something out of the sky with a thought.” +“Well that’s why I’m the Emperor.” You snicker. + +The dragon gets closer and you give the order to fire and unleash your own magic bolts at the creature. It’s definitely wounded from its ordeal with the two airships, but given your experience with the other two dragons, you know it’s far from being out the fight. + +In fact it’s so determined that it doesn’t distinguish friend from foe when it blasts its flame breath on the fort. You manage to protect most of your people with a magic barrier, but for those outside its protection, most are set on fire if not incinerated immediately. On the positive side, it reduces your enemies, on the negative it ignites the gunpowder barrels for the cannons causing a massive explosion and completely destroying one side of the fort. + +While the barrier still protects you and everyone within initially, its still a lot of strain on your energy and you begin to feel the fatigue setting in. + +“No! Damnit! Fight through it!” you mutter to yourself hating your weakness. + +While you’re busily trying to fight through your fatigue, you don’t notice where Warrick went and that was to the highest point he could get to on the fort and some how JUMPING on the damn dragon when it made its pass! + +You almost can’t believe your eyes as you see the dragon flying away from the fort with Warrick desperately trying to hold on to one of its legs. You can see him hacking at the dragon’s underbelly. The dragon bellows in pain and begins to turn to make a second pass, but Warrick’s assault makes another attack on the fort a non-priority for it. + +You see the beast twist and squirm in an effort to shake Warrick free and then eventually the beast makes another loud screech and the both of them go crashing into the jungle no doubt destroying several trees in the process. You can still hear the dragon in the distance, so you know it isn’t dead yet (Though probably badly wounded), but who knows about Warrick’s fate. + +In the meantime Fort Canopy isn’t immediately being attacked anymore as most of the Iznac have fled or been killed at this point. You quickly order your remaining troops to secure the fort and take a small group with you to head towards the dragon’s roaring noises. + +Fortunately the jungle isn’t thick here and the noises make tracking pretty easy, though by the time you reach your target, you see the severely wounded dragon with Warrick in its mouth and shaking its head from side to side. Then with one more shake, Warrick goes flying out of the dragon’s mouth and slams into a nearby tree. You can’t quite make out all the damage, but it looks like he’s missing an arm at this point. Who knows what other grievous wounds he’s suffered. + +In any case the dragon has now turned its attention towards your direction, but its not exactly in the best condition itself. It makes a coughing noise and a pitifully short burst of flame and a large amount of blood emanates from its mouth. It even tries to flap its wings perhaps in an attempt to escape, but one wing is so torn up that it can’t lift off even if it had the strength to do so. +> Order your troops to do it and help Warrick +You can’t let Warrick die, not with how much he’s helped you. You’d almost be at a loss on how to tell Brenda if it happened. + +“Kill the dragon!” you shout at your troops and run over Warrick’s bloody body. + +Ignoring everything else, you quickly turn Warrick over who isn’t even conscious. He’s still alive, because you can see his heart still beating from the open wound in his chest. + +“Hang on, you’re not dying today!” you say and begin to focus on healing Warrick’s fatla wounds. + +In the meantime your soldiers are doing a fairly good job at combating the dragon, which is distracted with them. Had this been the only obstacle, you probably would’ve been able to save Warrick’s life. Unfortunately there are enemies in this jungle other than wounded dragons. + +Several Iznac who retreated from the fort earlier were lurking nearby and taking advantage of your soldier’s preoccupation with the dragon and your preoccupation with healing Warrick one of them throws a spear right into your back. The force is such that the head of it actually protrudes a bit from your abdomen. + +Losing complete concentration you yell out in pain and your own body slumps over Warrick’s. You struggle to crawl to a safer location and attempt to heal yourself, but the ambushing Iznac manage to cut you down before you are able.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 56 + +You enter Brenda’s office where upon she smiles briefly at you, though with everything you have on your mind, you don’t return the gesture instead you just nod. + +“Hello Brenda, I trust you and Warrick are still enjoying your new marital status.” You say guessing that what’s put her in better spirits as of late. +“Yes, Emperor. I’m happier than I’ve been in a long time. Thank you for performing the wedding personally.” +“Think nothing of it. Though I didn’t think you’d ever remarry, let alone Warrick. But if you two are happy then that’s good. You should hold on to that as long as possible for one never knows when it will suddenly be taken away from you.” +“Um…of course my Emperor. We certainly do cherish our time together.” Brenda responds at your rather grim comment. + +“Anyway, I came here to let you know that the new Eternals have been released from their tanks. You’ll be training them soon.” You say. +“I’ll be looking forward to it. I trust they met with your standards?” +“Yes, most of them seem to be very much like the third generation though perhaps with signs of displaying higher intelligence overall. Under your guidance, I have no doubt that they’ll be just as effective as the third gens.” You reply with a sigh. +“Is there something wrong my Emperor?” Brenda asks. + +“Yes, it’s Nyttrus. The place is becoming a pain in my side that I don’t want to be bothered with, but I find that it might become necessary to step in personally soon. We’ve got more than a few strongholds there now, but the Iznac are far from being beaten, unfortunately most of the humans there are sick or dead due to disease and Iznac magic. Flog’s also dead and the orcs have become slightly less disciplined as of late without his calmer leadership. There have been a few reports of deserters running off into the jungles and forming their own communities. Just glad Snilkez’ka is still alive and the kobolds are holding down the forts there until the third gens arrive.” +“Couldn’t you send airships to bomb Nyttrus to speed things up? +“They don’t really have the range to travel across the vast oceans yet though Elam’s working on fixing that with the gnomes. In any event if they did have that sort of range I might be inclined to have them try to find Dokkrus first since that’s my real goal.” + +Brenda tries to give you some words of encouragement, but they don’t improve your mood. Instead you just leave Brenda, once again wishing her well on her new happy marriage. + +You spend a few days wondering whether or not you should head to Nyttrus with the third gens. Ultimately you decide not to as you’re still hoping to hear something soon about Dokkrus. As soon as you get word about that, you want to be on the next ship going there. You don’t want to be in the middle of a conflict that you know you’ll be compelled to complete if you directly get involved. + +In the meantime you go back to more mundane matters such as ensuring that the rebuilding of the new Nakol province remains on schedule. You also take time to hone your magic abilities; in fact since your “intimate” mind connection with Semra, you actually feel a little more powerful or rather you gained a brief insight into spells she never taught you during training. + +A few weeks pass and still no word about Dokkrus, however you do get bothersome news about Nyttrus again. + +You’re informed of the latest problems on Nyttrus by Kivan who received a message about it in the middle of the night. The Iznac have apparently unleashed a powerful “secret weapon” in the form of three very large flying lizards. And these aren’t wyverns either. They are creatures that Casimir once told you were rare even back in his day. They’re dragons and apparently they’ve already destroyed one of your forts on the continent. + +This isn’t news you wanted to hear. Now you’re going to have no choice, but to go over there. + +You still can’t do all this alone though, you still want to wrap this war up as quick as you can and you’ll need some competent tacticians and strategists to do that. Snilkez’ka has her way of doing things you’re sure, but they probably work best with other kobolds she commands. + +The third gens are good warriors, and a select few of them are indeed leaders, but most of them are rather…well unimaginative sometimes. You don’t think that’s the fault of Brenda’s training, but perhaps just a tendency towards conformity due to their creation. In fact you can’t even think of a single one that has stood out to you during the war with Nakol. Hopefully the fourth won’t have that problem when they’re ready. + +So you make up your mind that General Flevas should accompany you. The elf is pretty much the best one you have right now and you believe his vast scouting skills should come in handy. Given that all the orcs ran off and rebelled, you also won’t have to worry about Flevas not being respected as a leader. The third gens and kobolds seem fairly neutral towards him. + +You go back and forth on whether or not to bring Galen. His magic would most certainly help against the dragons, but you’re wondering if you want to put up with his tendency to complain. True he’s much better at not doing it, but he always manages to find a way. + +Who you really wish you had is Decena. She would’ve been perfect for this mission since she already worked well with the third gens. Just another reminder of your loss. + +Maybe though you just need another Eternal. An Eternal who always likes “vacations” away from his usual duties, namely Warrick. + +He certainly commands respect amongst the Eyes and besides you he’s probably the next most feared name in the Empire. As Sightmaster he’s also skilled in less traditional forms of warfare, which will come in handy in the jungle filled continent. Of course the only concern with bringing him is that leaves the “mainland” of the Empire, relatively… well the word isn’t undefended, but without a major figure to oversee any possible problems that may crop up. You suppose Brenda and Kivan can handle things if something really gets out of hand. + +Which brings you to another problem and that’s taking Warrick into a war in the first place. Warrick’s job at one time was probably a bit more dangerous, but as you’ve established order over the continent, stomped out dissension and all of those other necessary things, it’s become even more like a “desk job.” Warrick still keeps up on his training and such, and you know if you called for him to assist he’d jump at the chance not just out of loyalty, but because he always has a bit of desire to get in the middle of things again. + +He could very well get killed and a better head of internal security, as far as you’re concerned there is none. His loss would be even greater than Decena’s you believe. Though it’s the more “moral” problem that surprisingly has you rethinking this. + +Warrick just married Brenda, the pair of them don’t see each other every day, but they’re able to do so when they can. It’s the happiest Brenda’s been since she was married to Roldan. If Warrick was to die, well you can only imagine what that might do to her. So if you lost Warrick, you might be “losing” Brenda as well. + +Of course that’s all speculation. You don’t intend on losing Warrick at all, but you have to prepare for that possibility and the repercussions of such things. +> Leave Warrick behind +Warrick is possibly the closest thing now you have to a “right hand” anymore. True there is still Brenda, but if Warrick died, what were her state of mind be? It took her a long time to get over Roldan’s death. You don’t think she’d be able to handle another great loss, which is another reason why you’ll leave Warrick here. + +Besides, with him overseeing things here you won’t have to be concerned about the homeland getting out of hand while you’re away. + +Leaving Warrick in charge you finish preparing for your trip to Nyttrus and soon leave with several hundred third generation Eternals and Flevas. (But not Galen since you don’t feel he’ll be necessary) + +When you eventually do arrive in Nyttrus the place does indeed remind you a bit of Delerg though even hotter. The kobold leader Snilkez’ka is the first one to greet you and exclaim that now that you’re here, the war will go much quicker and victory should come swiftly. + +The first few weeks are indeed very successful ones, and it does appear that victory will come quickly if the Iznac are falling as quickly as they do, but as always not everything is so clear cut when you have dragons involved. You first encounter with one of the great beasts results in you losing half your company at the time and the dragon flying away. + +After this experience you fall back a bit on the advance and regroup realizing that the conquest of this continent is going to take a lot longer than anticipated. + +Year 60 + +“We’ll hold the line at Fort Canopy and Fort Tangle, then after they’ve expended all their energy on this massive assault of theirs, we can make our own advance and wipe them out for good.” You say and then promptly stagger a bit away from the table in pain. + +General Flevas and Captain Snilkez’ka move towards you and ask if you need help, but you of course decline. Though the truth is, you could use some help, just not in the way they are offering. + +Ever since the dragons reared their ugly heads this campaign has been one struggle after another and taken a great toll on your body. While you’ve managed to kill two of the giant lizards already, it’s almost been at the cost of your own life. Your last battle with one of the creatures practically cost you half of the left side of your face given that you’re missing an eye and an ear now. You’re even missing part of your non-dominant hand. While healing magic is powerful, even you can’t regenerate completely lost limbs or other organs and you’ve been pushing it to the limit as it is. You might be holding off death in the in the short term, but you’ve probably been shortening your life span just by using it as much as you have. + +You’ve been in contact with Warrick who has been giving the occasional updates via letters on what’s been going on in Evigrus since your absence and the general reports are always fairly boring. The only thing that has been of major importance is the discovery of Dokkrus. Warrick says he’s already sent Eyes there to spy on things as you requested, but not to engage yet. + +Quite honestly, sometimes you question if you’re even going to survive this campaign and even if you do win, how many years do you really have left anymore? You need to speed this up if you intend on invading Dokkrus and reaching Mortos. + +You dismiss Flevas and Snikez’ka and tell them you’ll be fine defending Fort Canopy by yourself and that they should focus on Fort Tangle’s defenses and with any luck the airships will take out the dragon. + +Days pass and you and your troops prepare for the inevitable assault, which comes in excessive force just as predicted. Perhaps even a little more. + +You look over the battlements and see several Iznacs climbing the walls of the fort like an army of ants. They aren’t even using ladders, they’re just scaling the fort with their bare hands. It’s actually rather impressive, until you unleash a chain of lightning to zap all of them. The shock is enough to at least cause most of them to fall off if not outright kill them immediately. + +Your people are doing their best though they can’t stop every Iznac from scaling the fort. Soon the gunfire is replaced by sounds of close combat weaponry. No matter how far the advances in technology, it always eventually comes down to looking your opponent in the eye and feeling their blood splatter as you end their life. + +While you’re busy hacking off the limbs of an Iznac warrior, another loud explosion in the distance is heard followed by a bright flash in the sky. It’s the destruction of your last airship from the dragon. Flaming wreckage crashes down in the distance. Won’t be long before the dragon turns its attention towards one of the forts. + +Iznac, glip and orcs all attack the fort and while it’s a brutal affair, your Eternals are holding their own in the face of overwhelming odds. + +You then hear a roaring sound getting closer and the sounds of great wings approaching. + +You shout a general command for the still working cannons to be pointed towards the dragon and to prepare to fire when the beast is in range. In the meantime you try to keep that side of the fort relatively free of invading forces. + +The dragon gets closer and you give the order to fire and unleash your own magic bolts at the creature. It’s definitely wounded from its ordeal with the airships, but given your experience with the other two dragons, you know it’s far from being out the fight. + +In fact it’s so determined that it doesn’t distinguish friend from foe when it blasts its flame breath on the fort. You manage to protect most of your people with a magic barrier, but for those outside its protection, most are set on fire if not incinerated immediately. On the positive side, it reduces your enemies, on the negative it ignites the gunpowder barrels for the cannons causing a massive explosion and completely destroying one side of the fort. + +While the barrier still protects you and everyone within initially, it’s still a lot of strain on your energy and you begin to feel the fatigue setting in. and you can’t hold out any longer… + +Your strength falters and the barrier goes down and the flames envelop you and several of your troops. + +In the last moments of your flesh melting off your bones you only regret that this fort will fall.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 54 + +Nakol’s existence as a nation is coming to an end. You’ve seized most of its territory. Its armies have practically been wiped out, and you’ve even eliminated most of Mortimer’s allies. + +The only major objective that’s left is Dequilet, the capital and currently the only thing saving it is a large magical barrier completely surrounding the city. So far it’s proven impenetrable to conventional means, which means you’re going to have to resort to magical ones, which unfortunately despite your own best efforts you’ve failed to bring it down, though you feel as if you’ve gotten close. + +You doubt if Mortimer is doing it himself, you imagine that Semra is probably helping him upkeep the barrier. He might even have a couple of satyr mages still left, though you doubt it. In any case, he’s got help and you’re probably going to have to resort to a bit of help as well if you want to bring the barrier down. + +“Galen’s a given, as are the Eye mages, but I’m going to have to take mages off overseeing the Eternal tanks for this project as well. Don’t want to, but it’ll be necessary.” You say while explaining the next course of action in your command tent to Decena. +“We’re going to have to wait for those mages to come here, that’s at least a few days. I hate this sitting around, is it truly the only way?” Decena asks. +“Unfortunately. Last time I tried to bring it down, I nearly fell unconscious. With enough magic energy though I’m certain it can be brought down, as soon as it is, I want you and rest to blow apart those walls and rush in as quick as you can. Don’t worry I won’t be far behind no matter how woozy I feel afterwards.” + +Just as Decena is about to acknowledge your plan, that old familiar voice is heard. + +“You know none of that is necessary if you listen to my plan.” Semra remarks. + +The instant Decena sees Semra she raises her voice and attempts to attack her, though you hold her back from doing so. + +“Don’t bother Decena, she’s not really there. It’s an illusionary image. Right on time too. You’re starting to get predictable Semra.” You say. +“Semra? Is this that svelk bitch you’ve told me about?” Decena asks. +“Oh so he did talk about me to you. I’m not surprised. Never could get me completely out of his mind…” +“Fuck you svelk! He told me about all the hell you put him through!” + +Semra does her usual gleeful smile at Decena’s anger. + +“My, she IS the aggressively territorial one. Isn’t she? Almost sad that her feelings for you are so strong when your own for her are…limited. Trust me dear, he can’t ever love you back. How could he? You’re not even young looking anymore…” + +At this point you have to restrain Decena again. + +“Decena, don’t pay attention to her. She’s just enjoying making you miserable. It’s what she does. Semra, what the hell do you want? Shouldn’t you be making plans to escape or something?” +“Who said I wasn’t? But right now I’m actually here for you. Need your help in killing Mortimer, well what’s left of him anyway. It’s getting harder to figure out when he’s completely all there or not. Zelvix is starting to gain mental control over him due to his shattered confidence and willpower. This war has been very stressful on him as you might expect.” + +Decena asks what she’s talking about and you quickly mention about the supposed demon army that will be unleashed when Mortimer dies, though with the way Semra’s telling it, it sounds like this Zelvix is already getting loose…assuming she’s telling the truth. + +“Semra, didn’t YOU claim that it would take you about a decade to properly banish this demon?” you ask. +“Well with you rushing head long into attacking Nakol, I had to step up my research now didn’t I? Don’t worry though, as I said, I’ve got it figured out, just need your help in doing so. Remember how we linked our energy together when we were extinguishing all those little gnome souls? Well we need to do something like that again, but this is going to require a slightly deeper connection. Namely we’d have to link our very minds together so as to make the magical connection strong enough to face the demon.” + +“Here we go…” You think. + +“You can’t seriously trust this woman!” Decena shouts. +“He most certainly should trust me considering how many times I’ve warned him about shit and indirectly AND directly saved his life. After all if he’d trusted me all those years ago, he might’ve saved himself a lot of bother on a certain island. Y’know you still have never told me how you exactly came out of Mortos relatively unscathed. Perhaps you can after we take care of this mess?” Semra remarks. + +You don’t answer immediately. You’ve been put in this position several times before and it’s the same old thing. Semra tells you something, you distrust her, you usually follow her advice against your better judgment and while things don’t necessarily go entirely your way, you can never deny that had you not acted things would be much worse. + +But on the other hand… it’s the same old thing. You know she’s not telling you the whole truth and something about this demon situation seems even more suspicious especially since she’s actually encouraging a linking of your minds. Even if she’s telling the entire truth about the demon and this being the only way she feels is the way to defeat it, would it really be a victory if Semra had magical access to your mind? Who the hell knows what she might be able to do. + +“All of this is pointless anyway, we can’t get in unless that barrier goes down.” You say. +“Oh that thing? I can make a small opening in it for a small period of time. Of course when I do so, Mortimer will probably instantly know I’m working against him and it’s possible he’ll completely lose himself to Zelvix, but we should have enough time to do what we have to do.” Semra remarks. +“Or I could just wait for my mages to help me bring the barrier down. Then when I do get that barrier down, I assault the city with so much firepower that nothing of this world or another is going to survive it. I don’t care how powerful this demon is.” You say. + +“Optimistic that you believe that, but I tell you sincerely that won’t be enough to stop Zelvix. He’s in a weakened state now due to his long imprisonment, but as soon as Mortimer’s dead, it won’t take him long to regain his full strength and when that happens, count on several magical gates opening up. Now MAYBE you’ll be able to even repel the demons that will undoubtedly come screaming out of said gates, but quite frankly, YOU are not the young Eternal you used to be and your odds will not be good. And your Empire’s odds if you should fall in battle? Even worse. You already survived one trip that you very well shouldn’t have…actually you’ve survived many things you probably shouldn’t have, but those days are becoming more unlikely as you approach your twilight years. I understand that you’d rather die a warrior’s death, however I doubt very seriously that you wish to die a fool’s death. It is one thing to die in a battle that has been properly planned. It’s entirely another when you die because you purposely ignore all your information and don’t take advantage of the tools and resources that allow you to win efficiently. I’M giving you this chance to win this war now in the most efficient way possible.” + +You continue to listen. + +“We’ve been in this all too familiar position before Eternal. Why take the chance of making the same mistake twice?” Semra asks. + +Decena looks at you as you seriously begin to consider Semra’s offer. + +“Emperor?” she asks. +> Carry out your original plan +Semra’s agendas have never always been completely clear with you, but you’re sure that whenever it is that you do listen to her, it somehow advances them to an end that will ultimately be no good for you in the long run. + +This is one of those times where she’s going to have fall back to her plan “b” because you’re not helping her in this instance. + +“Sorry Semra, I’m going with my own agenda this time. And you’re seriously underestimating my abilities if this so called demon invasion does take place. True, I might not be young anymore, but I guarantee I’ll be able to handle whatever is going to come next after we destroy Dequilet which is probably nothing anyway.” +“Then you’re a damn fool. A stubborn old fool who just doesn’t want to look weak in front of his devoted…” Semra starts to say, but Decena suddenly cuts her off. +“Shut the fuck up, svelk cunt! You’ve spun enough of your bullshit lies today! You got your fucking answer from the Emperor, now scuttle back to whatever fucking hole you’ll hide in before I hunt you down and I slice that venomous tongue out and shove it up your ass!” + +Semra merely smirks at Decena’s threat. + +“And you used to kiss him with that mouth? Okay, I can see my efforts are going to wasted here. I hoped for a different way, but perhaps this will still work out. Goodbye Eternal, I don’t think we’ll meet again.” +“You said that before.” You answer. +“So I did…well perhaps you’ll surprise me again. You always did have that special way about you.” + +With those final words, Semra’s image disappears and you can get back to your original plan. Decena is certainly happier about the situation. You execute the order to have mages sent here to help bring down the barrier. You can imagine how upset Galen will be when he’s been taken away from whatever less dangerous task he’s doing at the moment. + +In a few days, your mages arrive and you all focus to bring the barrier down. You tell your army as soon as it’s down, to bombard with every catapult, cannon, lightning gun, ballista, and trebuchet they’ve got and the airships nearby have the same orders to open fire. + +When everyone is in place you begin the spell to break down the barrier. It’s similar to the time you were focusing on casting the continual firestorm on the dryad forest, but this is actually taking even more focus and energy. It’s apparent that Mortimer or possibly the demon inside him doesn’t want you getting in. + + +At some point during the spell, Galen flips out and starts babbling about hearing a voice inside his head. It’s enough to cause a temporary break in focus and you try to calm him down, but he exclaims that bringing the barrier down is going to unleash something worse. You have no patience for this and he begins to worry the other mages. You blast him with a lightning bolt while he’s in mid-babble and have his body removed from your sight. + +“Now then, I want the rest of you to FOCUS! That so-called sorcerer in there is just playing mind tricks in order to save his worthless hide! Whatever voice any of you may hear is just a mere parlor trick and the only voice you should be concerned about is mine and what command it is giving!” you say to the remaining mages. + +Going back to the spell there are no more interruptions, but as to be expected a couple of your weaker mages also collapse from the strain of the spell. The barrier however is definitely gone and the bombardment of Dequilet starts immediately. + +The utter destruction of Dequilet is loud and full of explosions. You continue to have it bombarded until you’re satisfied that nothing is going to be left alive. Eventually though you do call a stop to it. + +“Alright, that will do for now. We’ll let the fires die down a bit and then send in some squads to rummage through the ruins of that place. I’m fairly certain we killed everything, but never hurts to be sure.” You say. +“Hopefully that svelk bitch was in there too.” Decena remarks. +“We could only hope, but my guess is she probably fled when she realized I wasn’t going to help her.” +“I’m glad you didn’t. Are you okay though?” +“Me? Yeah, just need to rest a bit. (Whew) Bringing that barrier took it out of me a little. More than I expected I guess. That needn’t have been the case had Galen not lost his shit. Bah, no matter. The man did nothing but complain anyway.” You remark. + +Just as Decena is about to respond, you suddenly feel a change in the air. One brimming with magical energy and a malevolent presence. + +A large portal opens up just above the ruins of Dequilet and a red flying creature comes out and then another, and another, and then… + +While seemingly hordes of demons are pouring out of this one portal, another portal opens up nearby and then another, and then another and then… + +While your army is shocked and scrambling to prepare for this unexpected attack, you just curse silently to yourself. + +“Damnit…she was fucking right…AGAIN…” you say. +“Emperor! There are demons everywhere! What are your orders?!” Decena asks in between telling nearby officers to adopt a defensive position. + +Your orders are of course to fall back because right now you’re starting to become heavily outnumbered as more and more demons come pouring out of the portals. Unfortunately you’re also starting to become surrounded. It doesn’t help that most of your siege machine ammunition is gone due to your bombardment of Dequilet. The airships are still functioning fortunately, but a good number of flying demons are already making their way to try to solve that situation. + +“We’re going to have to fight our way of this mess and regroup at the nearest fortress! In the meantime kill anything red with hooves and horns!” you shout. You really wish you weren’t as tired as you are, but you’re going to have to just fight through it. + +A few minutes in and the retreat is definitely looking grim. You got separated from Decena and you have no idea if your other general Flevas is even still alive. Your Eternals are doing their best as always, but the rest of your troops are suffering from a severe drop in morale and mostly screaming in terror desperately trying to get away rather than an organized defensive retreat. You don’t know if it’s due to fighting otherworldly beings and a seemingly endless supply of them, or if its some sort of unnatural fear aura that the demons themselves are causing. Probably a bit of both. + +Your kobold troops however are ever resourceful and in the middle of slicing off the head of a demon, a single kobold tugs at your scabbard. You almost kill him thinking him another attacker before he holds up his arms in panic. + +“No! No! Emp! Emp! Help! Hole! Over here here! Scape scape!” the kobold says and points to a hole that one of his people have no doubt made. + +Escaping through the tunnel would probably be a good idea since its starting to look like the demons are attempting to cut off your path of retreat, but then you are also concerned about Decena’s whereabouts. If your next war is going to be against these otherworldly monsters, you’re going to need all the skilled leaders you can get. +> Go with the kobolds +Decena’s a big girl and can handle herself Chances are she’s already making a path towards the nearest fort. You’re sure she’s fine…well you hope she is. + +In any event, you aren’t going to be much good if you don’t survive this assault so you follow the kobold soldier down the hole. + +The tunnel as you expect is smaller than the average human size, but you’re able to walk even if you do have to crouch a bit and keep your head down. Several kobolds enter the tunnel after you in an effort to keep the back of you better protected just in case some demons come wandering down. + +The kobold who lead you here in the first place continues to runs just a bit ahead of you and repeat directions of where he’s heading next. You have to cast a dark vision spell just so you can see since its pitch black. + +You follow the tunnels for a bit and there aren’t even any demon attacks from behind (or ahead for that matter) and you begin to think that this was probably the best idea, but unfortunately events take an unexpected turn. + +With the battle still raging above ground, the tunnels do suffer from minor damage as bits of dirt periodically fall from the ceiling of them. It doesn’t get bad until one of your airships which had been destroyed by the demon onslaught comes crashing down right above the tunnels you’re in right now. + +You hear a loud crash from above and then a louder rumble as massive amounts of dirt fall around and upon you. The kobolds you’re travelling with yelp in panic and try to get away either by retreating back the way you came or forward to where you’re going. You however can’t move quite as fast in the cramped tunnels and you become buried alive under rock and dirt. + +Not even a glorious warriors death, just a convenient burial.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Semra’s agendas have never always been completely clear with you, but you’re sure that whenever it is that you do listen to her, it somehow advances them to an end that will ultimately be no good for you in the long run. + +This is one of those times where she’s going to have fall back to her plan “b” because you’re not helping her in this instance. + +“Sorry Semra, I’m going with my own agenda this time. And you’re seriously underestimating my abilities if this so called demon invasion does take place. True, I might not be young anymore, but I guarantee I’ll be able to handle whatever is going to come next after we destroy Dequilet which is probably nothing anyway.” +“Then you’re a damn fool. A stubborn old fool who just doesn’t want to look weak in front of his devoted…” Semra starts to say, but Decena suddenly cuts her off. +“Shut the fuck up, svelk cunt! You’ve spun enough of your bullshit lies today! You got your fucking answer from the Emperor, now scuttle back to whatever fucking hole you’ll hide in before I hunt you down and I slice that venomous tongue out and shove it up your ass!” + +Semra merely smirks at Decena’s threat. + +“And you used to kiss him with that mouth? Okay, I can see my efforts are going to wasted here. I hoped for a different way, but perhaps this will still work out. Goodbye Eternal, I don’t think we’ll meet again.” +“You said that before.” You answer. +“So I did…well perhaps you’ll surprise me again. You always did have that special way about you.” + +With those final words, Semra’s image disappears and you can get back to your original plan. Decena is certainly happier about the situation. You execute the order to have mages sent here to help bring down the barrier. You can imagine how upset Galen will be when he’s been taken away from whatever less dangerous task he’s doing at the moment. + +In a few days, your mages arrive and you all focus to bring the barrier down. You tell your army as soon as it’s down, to bombard with every catapult, cannon, lightning gun, ballista, and trebuchet they’ve got and the airships nearby have the same orders to open fire. + +When everyone is in place you begin the spell to break down the barrier. It’s similar to the time you were focusing on casting the continual firestorm on the dryad forest, but this is actually taking even more focus and energy. It’s apparent that Mortimer or possibly the demon inside him doesn’t want you getting in. + + +At some point during the spell, Galen flips out and starts babbling about hearing a voice inside his head. It’s enough to cause a temporary break in focus and you try to calm him down, but he exclaims that bringing the barrier down is going to unleash something worse. You have no patience for this and he begins to worry the other mages. You blast him with a lightning bolt while he’s in mid-babble and have his body removed from your sight. + +“Now then, I want the rest of you to FOCUS! That so-called sorcerer in there is just playing mind tricks in order to save his worthless hide! Whatever voice any of you may hear is just a mere parlor trick and the only voice you should be concerned about is mine and what command it is giving!” you say to the remaining mages. + +Going back to the spell there are no more interruptions, but as to be expected a couple of your weaker mages also collapse from the strain of the spell. The barrier however is definitely gone and the bombardment of Dequilet starts immediately. + +The utter destruction of Dequilet is loud and full of explosions. You continue to have it bombarded until you’re satisfied that nothing is going to be left alive. Eventually though you do call a stop to it. + +“Alright, that will do for now. We’ll let the fires die down a bit and then send in some squads to rummage through the ruins of that place. I’m fairly certain we killed everything, but never hurts to be sure.” You say. +“Hopefully that svelk bitch was in there too.” Decena remarks. +“We could only hope, but my guess is she probably fled when she realized I wasn’t going to help her.” +“I’m glad you didn’t. Are you okay though?” +“Me? Yeah, just need to rest a bit. (Whew) Bringing that barrier took it out of me a little. More than I expected I guess. That needn’t have been the case had Galen not lost his shit. Bah, no matter. The man did nothing but complain anyway.” You remark. + +Just as Decena is about to respond, you suddenly feel a change in the air. One brimming with magical energy and a malevolent presence. + +A large portal opens up just above the ruins of Dequilet and a red flying creature comes out and then another, and another, and then… + +While seemingly hordes of demons are pouring out of this one portal, another portal opens up nearby and then another, and then another and then… + +While your army is shocked and scrambling to prepare for this unexpected attack, you just curse silently to yourself. + +“Damnit…she was fucking right…AGAIN…” you say. +“Emperor! There are demons everywhere! What are your orders?!” Decena asks in between telling nearby officers to adopt a defensive position. + +Your orders are of course to fall back because right now you’re starting to become heavily outnumbered as more and more demons come pouring out of the portals. Unfortunately you’re also starting to become surrounded. It doesn’t help that most of your siege machine ammunition is gone due to your bombardment of Dequilet. The airships are still functioning fortunately, but a good number of flying demons are already making their way to try to solve that situation. + +“We’re going to have to fight our way of this mess and regroup at the nearest fortress! In the meantime kill anything red with hooves and horns!” you shout. You really wish you weren’t as tired as you are, but you’re going to have to just fight through it. + +A few minutes in and the retreat is definitely looking grim. You got separated from Decena and you have no idea if your other general Flevas is even still alive. Your Eternals are doing their best as always, but the rest of your troops are suffering from a severe drop in morale and mostly screaming in terror desperately trying to get away rather than an organized defensive retreat. You don’t know if it’s due to fighting otherworldly beings and a seemingly endless supply of them, or if its some sort of unnatural fear aura that the demons themselves are causing. Probably a bit of both. + +Your kobold troops however are ever resourceful and in the middle of slicing off the head of a demon, a single kobold tugs at your scabbard. You almost kill him thinking him another attacker before he holds up his arms in panic. + +“No! No! Emp! Emp! Help! Hole! Over here here! Scape scape!” the kobold says and points to a hole that one of his people have no doubt made. + +Escaping through the tunnel would probably be a good idea since its starting to look like the demons are attempting to cut off your path of retreat, but then you are also concerned about Decena’s whereabouts. If your next war is going to be against these otherworldly monsters, you’re going to need all the skilled leaders you can get. +> Seek out Decena +You’re not leaving Decena behind. In fact with the way things are looking, you’re not even sure you’re going to be able to escape anyway. The demons have already started cutting off your escape paths and getting stuck in a cramped tunnel is going to make you a perfect target if they wander down there. Hell they might just try to collapse the tunnel on you from above. + +If this is going to be the day you die, better that it be in battle than buried alive. + +You tell the kobolds to escape on their own if they wish, but you need to stay and at least see if Decena’s still alive. The kobold tries to convince you to leave again, but sees that you are unconvinced, so he wishes you luck and runs off. + +“Pfft. Scaly little bastard could’ve at least offered to stay.” You mumble, and start your search for Decena admist all this chaos. + +While you’re starting to search several explosions from above catch your attention. It’s your airships. They’ve finally been overrun and destroyed to the point where flaming wreckage will be hitting the ground at any moment. You hastily move to a point where you’ll at least be far enough away from the next explosion when they land. + +You cut and zap your way through more demons and then you hear the voice you were hoping for. + +“EMPEROR! Over here!” Decena shouts and you see her with several eternals and Flevas trying to hold their ground surrounded by a growing pile of demon bodies. You run over to help with a cone of cold freezing several demons in place. Decena and the rest follow up by smashing their frozen bodies and giving all of you a temporary breather in the middle of the battle. + +“I’m so glad to see you!” Decena exclaims. “But why haven’t you escaped?! These portals are just continually spitting out more demons! You were right, we have to fall back!” +“Because I was thinking about it and I was wrong. What we need to do is go chop off that demon lord’s head Zelvix, or whatever the hell Semra called him. Because the sooner we end him, the sooner this invasion ends.” You say. +“Demon lord? Wait? Is that what caused this? I didn’t know anything about a demon lord.” Flevas says. +“Well you do now and if you’re lucky enough you’ll get to be involved in killing him as well.” You say. +“I don’t think I have much of a choice at this point given that the demons have surrounded us from escape. So where is he?” Flevas asks. +“My guess is somewhere within the ruins of the city, let’s get going now!” + +You, Decena, Flevas and only four of the new Eternals make your way towards the ruins of Dequilet. Surprisingly the demon count is a lot lower the closer you, but then that’s probably because most of them are focused on slaughtering your retreating army and rampaging across the countryside. Not much fun to be had in a city where everyone is already dead. + +The flames, rubble and wandering demons all make your search more lively, but eventually you find what you believe to be Zelvix. He looks like the typical demon from all the stories you’ve ever heard and indeed probably most have heard. Great big wings, cloven hooves, furry lower half, muscular upper body, redish skin tone and two large horns on his head. He’s the biggest thing in the city and he’s certainly bigger than any of those minotaurs or chimeras you fought during the Tor War. + +When you make your noisy arrival by killing his immediate underlings, he still doesn’t move from his position, which seems to be one of concentration. Only when you cast several ice bolts at him does he move. He raises his hand and absorbs the bolts and turns his attention to you. + +“And now you’ve gone and broke my concentration. Do you realize that keeping these portals open to my home isn’t as easy as I make it look? (Sigh) No matter, so I imagine you must be the Eternal that Semra has mentioned in the past…hrm I thought you’d be taller. I hardly see how she expected you to defeat me.” +“I’m not here because of Semra and honestly I don’t give a shit what sort of dispute you and her had. I’m here on my own to kill you, because NOBODY threatens my Empire!” you say and advance upon Zelvix who doesn’t move from his spot, he doesn’t even react. + +“Ah how I love mortal arrogance. Really I could use someone like you on my side, why not join me? Why not all of you join me?” Zelvix’s deep voice exclaims which seems to penetrate your mind. The presence is strong. Stronger than you were expecting really. It’s even worse than the time you had to listen to hundreds of gnome souls all at once. + +And you aren’t the only one, a quick glance to your left and right shows that your companions have stopped in their tracks as well and are holding on to their heads trying to fight Zelvix’s mental attack. + +The deep voice of “Join me.” continues to echo throughout your own mind and despite your best efforts you can’t block it out. + +And that when you feel an arrow go into your side. You barely manage to block the second one with a force shield. Flevas is gone, he’s given in completely and he’s not the only one. Two of the Eternals have turned and already killed one of their siblings. The last one is one the ground screaming for Zelvix’s voice to get out of his head. + +Flevas attacks you again with his bow, but you manage to keep up your protection. You return fire with a blast of magical energy. Flevas stands no chance against it and falls dead. It’s enough to make you collapse though. The combination of your expended energy, your wounds and Zelvix’s mental assault is becoming overwhelming. + +“Why are you fighting me Eternal? If you just join me, you can expand your Empire to the entire world! All I require is a tribute. Why, we could even track down Semra together and have our way with her. Doesn’t that sound fun Eternal? Wouldn’t you like that? Just JOIN ME…” + +The tone, the voice is so convincing…part of you just wants to give in… + +You feel a blade go into the upper left side of your back. One of the Eternals has attacked you while you’re struggling to retain your mind. The second one would probably land the killing blow, but you’re saved by someone who loves you so much that turning against you is completely unthinkable to her. + +“NO!” Decena yells and cuts down both of the Eternals attacking you. The third Eternal who had finally succumbed to the mind control makes a half hearted attack, but Decena takes care of him as well. + +“Now this one shows promise!” Zelvix says and suddenly more demon reinforcements arrive to defend their master. + +Decena holds her own against the demons that attack her, though some of them attack you instead, believing that you’re an easier target. While it’s true you’re in a more weakened state, you’re far from being an easy target. + +“Tch. Tch. Can’t having you help her, wouldn’t be fair now would it?” you hear Zelvix say and see the big demon lord standing over you. You feel a smashing blow to your face by his fist, which sends you falling back to the ground. The inside of your face feels like every bone in it has been broken and the exterior feels like its on fire. + +Spitting out a few bloody teeth, you cast an enchantment on your weapon and try to strike at Zelvix’s leg, but he dodges and manages to step on your sword breaking it with his cloven hoof. + +“That was pathetic, did you really think…” + +Zelvix’s taunt is interrupted by the fact that he wasn’t paying attention to the attack that you were really planning. A stream of lightning hits Zelvix in the chest and you don’t let up even though you’re feeling the effects of such a strong spell at this close range. + +Zelvix roars in pain and the spell has definitely had an effect, but Zelvix is made of stronger stuff and bulls his way through and kicks you in the body breaking several ribs and causing you to fly into a nearby pile of rubble. You smack your head against several jagged rocks adding an open head wound to your list of injuries. + +Zelvix attempts to finish you off by breathing fire at you, but you still have enough energy to block it with a force shield. You don’t think you can keep it up, but fortunately you don’t have to when Decena steps in and runs one sword into Zelvix’s back and cuts through one of his wings with another one. Zelvix feels the damage but it still isn’t enough to stop this monster. He swings around and backhands Decena to the ground. He then picks her up and smashes her entire body several times to the ground again. Her body battered, she hangs limply as he picks her up by one arm. + +“Bitch! You think your pathetic love for this fool will save either one of you?! I’ve destroyed greater beings with less effort! You both should’ve joined me when you had the chance, but that time has passed. Time to die! Who wants to watch first?” + +Zelvix is definitely more powerful than either one of you, but his weakness is he talks way too much. While he’s pontificating on who to kill first, you summon all the energy you have and cast a concentrated frost ray at Zelvix’s feet. It’s enough to startle the demon and drop Decena. + +“Still wanting to play eh? Fine, you’re first then!” Zelvix says and throws a fireball at you. You’re hit full force and the flames engulf you, but you refuse to die. You flesh burns, but you’re expending so much energy into your frost beam, that your body is actually growing colder and forms frost, which is enough to keep you from burning to death. + +Meanwhile Zelvix realizes his own body isn’t just being encased in ice, its actually starting to become ice. + +“DECENA ATTACK HIS LEGS! NOW!” + +You didn’t even need to give the word though, Decena was already on it. Seizing the biggest rock she could grab and wield effectively. She smashes it into one of Zelvix’s legs causing it to shatter. An unearthly wail eminates from the demon lord as he falls to the ground, which in turn snaps off his other leg. + +With Zelvix on the ground, you continue your freezing assault on him, only this time his position allows you to aim straight for his face. You see your hands going blue and starting to age. You’re not going to survive this, but someone else needs to because someone else has to lead the Empire… + +Zelvix desperately tries to crawl in an attempt to reach you, but eventually he’s frozen to a point where he’s barely moving at all. + +“Decena…finish…it…” you say and you at last run out of energy of any and all kind. You collapse backwards and begin to drift in and out of consciousness. + +You don’t see it, but Decena does indeed manage to take advantage of the situation and smashes Zelvix’s frozen head into several pieces. The demon lord’s body convulses and tries to move (and even attack) but death is certain. + +With Zelvix dead, it seems like the portals have closed as well as there haven’t been anymore demons attacking you or Decena, though it can safely be guessed that the ones that are already scattered and causing havok will still need to be dealt with. + +Decena comes over to your dying body and holds you in her arms. You can imagine how cold you must feel to her, but it’s not going to deter Decena. + +“Did…did we win?” you ask. +“Yes…we won my Emperor.” Decena says. +“Good…good…(wheeze) but you’re the Emperor now…” +“Emperor don’t…” +“It’s done. I’m not making this one…(wheeze) just be a strong ruler. The ruler…I always knew you could be. I’m so proud…of you…” + +Decena at this point doesn’t answer. She’s desperately trying not to cry. Maybe it’s a little late, but in these final moments you realize that you could’ve probably had a real relationship with Decena. She proved that she was more than a worthy mate for you. She had long since grown from being just your student with a crush. She is a true warrior and will be a worthy successor. + +“Decena…I…love you...” you whisper to her as your final words. + +As your vision goes dark you sense a brief kiss on your lips, which is the last bit of warmth you ever feel. + +And then you feel nothing at all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 50 + +As you look at a large map of the known continent of Evigrus you realize that while its been fifteen years since you took the throne as Emperor you’ve already more than doubled the size of the original nation. You’ve also successfully managed to have your ships navigate most of its coastline as well. Even northern most Rask was mapped by your airships. + +Quite frankly that’s the main problem you have right now in general you’ve conquered most of what is worthwhile already on this continent. Anything remaining isn’t exactly inhabitable or worth the time to spend on conquest and even in some of those cases, kobold citizens have slowly been making small underground communities in places where nobody above ground would want to live such as the Delerg jungle. + +However there are always new lands to conquer. + +To the farthest part west lies the only nation on Evigrus left besides the Empire, the Kingdom of Nakol. Nakol has had the benefit of being relatively isolated from the rest of the continent due to the great mountain range that blocked it from the Children of Tor. Your people have only recently had formal contact with it shortly after the defeat of the Torites, though even that was by ship, though now that the Torites are no longer a true threat, small passes through the mountains have been found (Though they’re not exactly safe and Nakol certainly keeps their side very well guarded). + +The nation isn’t quite as large as the Empire, but its still bigger than the old Felkan Kingdom and certainly big enough to defend itself to make aggression very costly, so far however the limited contact you’ve had with said nation hasn’t been hostile. Oddly enough he’s wanted to meet you as he has heard so much about the “Great Emperor of the East” and very much wants to visit the Empire. + +Normally you probably wouldn’t consider such diplomatic meetings as it has never been your style, however this ruler is also known as the “Immortal Sorcerer King” and that is something that has gotten your attention. + +In any event, there are other matters that require your attention and this is where the “other land” to conquer comes in… + +Last year your ships finally found a large landmass to the east. Up until then, only a few islands of little worth had been discovered. This new territory from what you’ve been told is similar to Delerg in some ways as there are large portions of jungle. However there are several primitive civilizations living on this land mass. While they are similar to humans in some ways, they have features that certainly aren’t such as having four arms and multiple sets of eyes like an insect. Even their language is a bit insect like as you’ve been told it’s more a “chittering” sound. The most prominent of these groups are known as the Iznac. + +The Iznac like most that seem to inhabit this world before the Empire enlightens them are a superstitious lot that worship their backwards gods by sacrificing others to them. Sometimes this is their own people, but most of the time its captives of the weaker tribes that live on the same continent. Barbarians they may be, they have built cities where their temples seem to be the biggest and most important buildings in them. It would appear they are a theocracy. + +The Iznac so far have been actively hostile towards your people though perhaps wise enough not to attack them outright. Your own people have not made much progress towards the inner part of the new continent due to this fact and they don’t have enough manpower to do so anyway. The only thing they can do is hold up in the newly built outpost and hope they aren’t attacked by an overwhelming number of Iznac (or any other tribe since it isn’t as if the frog like people called the Glip that also inhabit the continent are any friendlier) + +You might be inclined to leave this new continent and its inhabitants alone until you can focus more attention on them, however it’s also been reported that the continent has a seriously unexploited resource potential of valuable minerals and that’s something you could always use more of especially if you’re going to have to fund another war with Nakol in the near future. + +There is also the matter of the orc and kobold population to think about. Both are becoming a problem. The orcs have finally increased their numbers to a point where they can become a viable fighting unit like they were in old days. In fact you planned for that to happen anyway. What you didn’t plan for is that you’d have a period of peace with no major wars to fight! Reports of increased orc criminals or just general chaotic misconduct in Rask are becoming more common. You need to start giving them something to go fight. + +The kobolds aren’t so much of a problem as they tend to live underground and generally stay out of the way due to that fact. But with no war to whittle down their numbers they’re breeding at a rate that’s starting to worry your human subjects. You admit that with as many as the little bastards around they could become a serious threat if they ever became rebellious. Fortunately they’re actually less of a problem than any of your other subjects so you’re actually not worried about them yet. + +Still, it seems like a logical solution to start sending large portions of both populations to tame this new continent. Of course if events dictate that you need to war with Nakol soon, then that leaves you with less soldiers on the home front and you’re also fighting a two front war. + +There’s also another factor to consider that the new Eternals will be ready next year. Brenda’s training has ensured that most of them survived and they are already displaying the eagerness to serve the Empire. Elam’s also been working with the gnomes to perfect the automatons. + +You make your decision that with these other factors in play that you’re relatively safe in sending your orcs and kobolds to this new continent. However, you’re going to need disciplined leaders though for this task. + +For the orcs you look for the highest ranked and most respected by his people. The only name that catches your attention when looking through the records is Flog. Flog apparently served most of his military career in Rask fighting ogres, giants and the old barbarian tribes even during the Felkan War. He also served under Kane and was spoken highly of in a few old reports. Kane mentioned that besides Captain Gruz he never encountered an orc almost as intelligent. Apparently he’s been doing a lot of breeding after the Felkan War. He has many children. + +As for kobolds, the records are much sketchier. Kobolds may be loyal and contributing members of Empire society, but none of them really seem to stand out much and if they do, they all died in battle. Plus due to their numbers they probably have many of their kind that could be considered “leaders” within various circles. Eventually you settle on one that distinguished herself during the Tor War. Snilkez’ka managed to take out a manticore all by herself and lead a successful underground sneak attack against a band of minotaurs with only a few casualties. Given the size difference in both cases not to mention that even human officers had problems accomplishing such things, its safe to say that she comes the closest to being a hero among her people. In fact you’re wondering why she was never brought to your attention before. + +Of course you can’t just send these two races out on ships to a new continent, which you barely have any control over so you’re going to need at least one company of “normal” humans to keep a semblance of order or rather someone better than a human. + +The only choice would be Decena. She’s a well-respected leader by all and more than proven herself. While not having Decena immediately available here will be something you’ll have to compensate for, you’ll at least have confidence that she’ll keep things orderly on this new continent. + +Having made your decision you meet up with the three to explain the situation, their reactions are varied. + +“Flog will serve all powerful Emperor, but not fooled by intentions. You trying to get rid of orcs again, just like in Felkan War.” Flog says. +“Flog if I was trying to get rid of the orcs, I’d just have you all strung up and be done with it. I’m sure you’re aware that’s within my power to do so. I’m not even sending all of the orcs anyway, just most of them. I need tough soldiers that can withstand this harsher continent and its equally harsh inhabitants. I already sent humans and you see how well that worked out. Quite frankly I think your people would be best suited for this type of thing. You get to prove just how orcly you actually are. You are an orc aren’t you? Are you not looking forward to the possibility of killing several enemies or dying in a glorious battle?” you say. +“Killing enemies yes, dying not so much. It is a misconception that orcs deliberately seek death in battle. Flog however is getting old, so death is close anyway. Either death in battle, death by children who will inevitably challenge Flog, or death by old age. The last is the least preferable, so perhaps this will be an opportunity. Not sure about the little scaly runts you’re sending. Never fought along side them before, but Flog has heard of their great viciousness in battle. Also heard many glorious things of General Decena and her many victories. Will be an honor to fight along side her.” + +At this point the kobold leader, Snilkez’ka makes a small hissing growl like sound at Flog, probably due to his runt comment. + +“Don’t worry about us orc. Small we may be, but we’ll be here long after the enemy has already butchered your old greenskin ass.” Snilkez’ka remarks, which causes a chuckle from Flog who merely states that perhaps he’ll enjoy fighting alongside her people after all. + +Snilkez’ka doesn’t look as amused, but says nothing else other than to directly address you and say that she will make sure that she will bring the fear of the Empire into the hearts of the enemy. You nod and say you know that she will. Always nice to have loyalty and enthusiasm. She’s very well spoken for a kobold. + +The latter one of those traits seems to be lost on your last leader, Decena who isn’t saying anything and only succeeds in looking slightly troubled by her new assignment. + +“Decena, is there anything you’d like to say? You’re going to be in charge of this campaign.” You ask. +“No. Nothing except I look forward to leading the Empire into victory and claiming this new continent in your name, my Emperor.” + +That sounded very… formal. Granted that’s a good thing, especially in front of the other two leaders to keep it professional. Still, you know something is wrong and you know it has something to do with your past relationship. If you were the cautious sort you’d just leave it be, but if something is going to be a major problem you need to know now. + +“Good, you’ll all be shipping out in about a week. Everyone is dismissed, though I want to speak to you Decena about something.” You say calmly and wait for the other two leave. + +Now it’s just you and Decena alone in the room. This hasn’t occurred in years, and this situation is very different. Decena however maintains a very formal stance and does not falter from it. + +“I sense something is wrong.” You say. +“There is nothing wrong my Emperor.” Decena remarks. +“Okay stop with the stiff soldier act, it’s just us here.” + +This remark breaks Decena’s facade of being “okay.” + +“I don’t understand what you want from me my Emperor. You told me we were to remain just subordinate and master. I am carrying out this order to the best of my abilities.” +“Oh no, do not attempt to play word games, you know what I mean. You’re obviously upset about this assignment.” +“…I’m obeying orders aren’t I? Isn’t that all that is required of me?” Decena says with an exasperated tone. +“For you? No. I need you to do more than just obey, I need you to be thrilled with this assignment. Like you USED to be. Remember?” +“Apologies, but I don’t think I can given the situation.” +“What situation? Us? Look Decena I know you’re still upset about that, but you’re going to have to be an Eternal and get over it.” +“Oh yes, I’m an Eternal alright, at least until next year. Might as well sweep me away to a far off land now and be done with it.” Decena remarks. +“What are you talking about?” +“I’m talking about the new Eternals that are scheduled to be ready next year! They’ll be the new thing and I’ll just be old news off in some forsaken land surrounded by scalies and green skinned idiots. In the meantime perhaps you’ll even find another young girl like I was and take her under your guidance too…” +“Decena…” +“Well I suppose at least she’ll be happy for a few years even if she’ll be a naïve fool the entire time.” + +“Decena STOP! Just stop right now!” you say. + +Decena does so, but her eyes say it all. You knew she was probably going to be upset for a while, but it’s turned into bitterness. + +You pace a bit and exhale rubbing your hand over your face. + +“Decena, your beliefs that you’re going to be somehow replaced next year are far from the truth. First of all, I’m not giving any of them any extra training because obviously I’m a lousy teacher given what happened between us.” + +Decena stays silent. + +“Second of all I picked you for this mission because you’re the only one I trust to carry it out. Just like I trusted you to continue your battles against the Torites and you saw to their practical extinction. I know you can get this job done and you’re not going to be over there forever you know. I anticipate war with the Nakol Kingdom at some point and when that happens who do you think is going to have to lead all the baby eternals into battle? You of course. For now though I need you where you’re going to be the most invaluable and that’s in this new land.” + +You reach out to Decena and lift her face up to look into her eyes. + +“I need you for this just like I’m always going to need you. You will never be replaced.” + +Decena’s expression turns back to one of sorrow. Her eyes water, but she does not cry out. + +“I…I’m sorry my Emperor…I shouldn’t…have…” +“Forget it Decena you don’t need to apologize. (Sigh) If anything I should be apologizing to you. As I said, I still feel you’re the best person for this mission, but if you wish, you may decline this mission and I will find someone else. And there is no need to worry, this will not be a bad reflection on you in any way. If it’s going to make you happier to stay here, then I’d rather you be happy since it’ll make you a better leader. Won’t do anyone any good if you don’t have the best mindset.” + +Decena shakes her head. + +“No, I’ll go. For the good of the Empire I’ll go. Staying here would serve no purpose for what I really want is not to be no matter what the situation. I suppose I just overreacted. And you weren’t a lousy teacher. Anyone would be lucky to learn under you. I was.” Decena says. +“Yes, well as I said, nobody ever will again. You were my first and last pupil. You’ll always be special in that regard. Now are you absolutely sure, you’re going to be okay with this assignment?” you ask. +“I will my Emperor. And I will bring glory to the Empire.” Decena remarks. +“Good. I knew you were strong enough to see this through and I know you’ll do the Empire and me proud.” + +You end you comment with a small kiss to her cheek. It’s only a shadow of what she really desires, but it’ll be enough to get her through this. + +After Decena leaves, you think about how you’ve permanently damaged that girl due to your poor judgment and lack of willpower all those years ago. You then think about how easy it is to convince her into anything due to that same lack of willpower years ago. She still worships and loves you and probably always will no matter what. Despite everything, your conditioning was successful. + +By the end of the week your fleet to the new continent (you’re calling it Nyttrus) is on its way to properly claim it for the Empire. You don’t know how long the Iznac are going to be able to stand up against your forces, but hopefully if your people break them, the other tribes will fall in line. +> Eternals United (Year 51) +Year 51 + +You stand with Brenda and Warrick in front of hundreds of third generation Eternals. The day has finally come. They’re trained and ready for war. Whether that means they’ll get sent to Nyttrus or sent to attack the Nakol Kingdom that still remains to be seen, but wherever it is, you’re sure they’ll be a formidable force. + +You give a rousing speech that encourages and reinforces the sort of loyalty that has already been drummed into their heads since they were born. They probably don’t need it, but words directly from their Emperor are never a bad thing. + +“This is way things should be.” Brenda says. +“What’s that, Brenda?” Warrick asks. +“This. You, me, the Emperor and all these new Eternals standing together united as a single force. I can’t wait to train the next generation.” Brenda says. +“Well you’ll definitely get that chance Brenda. As I’ve said before, you did an excellent job with these.” You say. +“We Eternals are the true rulers and defenders of this great Empire. And while I hold nothing but repsect to our former Emperor, I have to say that I feel that YOU have already proven that Eternals are the future. (Sigh) If there were only more of us…” +“There will be eventually.” Warrick says. +“Oh I know. I just wish Roldan was here to see this.” Brenda says. +“Mm, he would’ve certainly approved. I think Kane would have too.” Warrick remarks. +“Yes, to fallen siblings and to reunited ones who spent too long angry at one another.” Brenda says and looks at Warrick. The pair of them hug for a moment. + +You remain silent at their display of affection. Seemed almost unbelievable at one time, you’re just glad they get along now. + +With the new Eternals dispersing and on their way to their assignments, you just sort of start off into the distance until Warrick and Brenda cease their hugging to ask you what’s going on with you. + +“Is there something wrong my Emperor?” +“Oh, nothing really wrong. I was just thinking, not every Eternal is here in this grand unification. Decena’s still over in Nyttrus.” You say. +“Oh yes, that’s correct. I can’t believe I forgot about her.” Warrick says. +“Yeah well, Decena’s always felt like a bit of an outsider in some ways I think.” +“What? That’s silly.” Brenda says. +“Is it? Think about it, there never were a bunch of us to begin with, but there are still three of us first ones. Then there are these third gens. Hundreds. And the fourth gens and beyond will probably be in the hundreds as well. But Decena? She’s the only second gen left. All her siblings were killed. Most by a mad derro and a few of them even by me when I got tested against them.” + +Warrick and Brenda continue to listen. + +“I dunno, I was just thinking of something she was worried about before I sent her to Nyttrus. Her concerns that she was somehow obsolete. Of course I explained that she wasn’t, but still sometimes in her letters I detect a bit of lonesomeness in tone.” +“Emperor, Decena was trained by you. I think she’s probably the luckiest Eternal since…well since you got the chance to be trained by the former Emperor.” Brenda remarks. + +“Hrm. Yes, lucky.” You say nearly snorting at both of those conclusions. Brenda and Warrick still don’t know the whole story and you hope for their sake they never have to learn the truth. + +“Well I have to go attend to a rather mundane matter that I can’t just assign to Kivan. I trust you both can handle the rest of the matters here?” +“Of course, my Emperor.” Warrick says. + +You nod at Brenda and Warrick and return to your private quarters in the palace. You sit down at your desk and spend the rest of the night writing an encouraging letter to have sent to Decena in Nyttrus. + +Maybe she couldn’t be here for the “Eternal unification” but you still want her to know that in your eyes she is the most cherished of all of them.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The fact remains; the full capabilities of New Dessle are still unknown and taking this mountain city would be extremely costly for the Empire, so you’re not going to dismiss Klemto’s stipulations yet, but you are going to come back with one of your own. + +“Very well, your terms are somewhat reasonable though we’re still going to have to hammer out some details, however I do want one thing from you right now.” You say. +“Oh? What’s that?” +“You will assist in attacking the Confederacy of the Free Cities.” +“...so you would call on our service already eh? Fine. We will assist, just let us know what exactly you want from us.” +“Nothing elaborate, I just want another army south of the cities in case some of the svelk try to escape that way. I don’t want a single one of them to get away. They’re a threat to the Empire and their constant manipulations need to cease being a thorn in my side. Too long they’ve gone unpunished for their treachery. Maybe I won’t be getting all of them on the world. But rest assured I WILL be getting ALL of them in this area.” +“I see. While you may not have any hatred for my race, you obviously do for the dark elves. It would seem the more things change, the more they stay same…(Sigh) Well better the svelk than us I suppose.” Klemto says. +“Glad you see the pragmatic side of this.” +“Oh I suspect I’ll be seeing the pragmatic side a lot in the future. Not how I wanted to spend the remainder of my years, but then this is really the only way. I’ve long since learned that opposing the Empire is futile. While it may eventually fall to internal or external forces, it probably isn’t going to be in my lifetime and I’m going to do everything within that time to make sure the gnomes stay out of harm’s way. If that means swallowing what little pride we might have left and willingly becoming the subjects of a nation that once enslaved us and then tried to systematically exterminate us, then that is what we will do.” + +Klemto finishes his little speech with another puff of his pipe. He looks defeated even though he’s come out fairly okay on this deal. Well at least you think so, obviously he feels differently. + +“You’ll be remembered as a savior to your people Klemto.” You say before you leave. +“I’ll probably be remembered as a collaborator, but I’m fine with it as long as they live to keep telling the tale of Klemto the traitor long after I’m dead.” + +At this point you and Warrick take your leave, the next time you look back, Klemto is gone and the mountain “windows” have all closed up as if everything was normal again. + +“You really think you can trust the gnomes?” Warrick asks. +“I trust them more now that we have a way in. I want as many Eyes as you can spare in that mountain. Perhaps over time we can pull some out if the gnomes do prove to be loyal and don’t complain too much, but we definitely want to at least gather every single bit of information we can on that place just in case the gnomes DO try to betray us in the future.” +“I’ll get on that, as soon as we return to the Empire. I shouldn’t have had the doubt, but I really thought this plan was going to go bad.” +“Don’t worry, I had the same feeling, but sometimes you just have to throw caution to the wind and attempt new strategies.” +“Well maybe I didn’t see any battle, but I was still glad to get out behind that desk. I thank you for that.” Warrick says. +“If you’d like we could always go try to take out one of the city states by ourselves. Has to be easier than an entire mountain.” + +You and Warrick laugh at this idea and head back to the Empire. + +A month passes and the war against the Confederacy of Free Cities is well underway. The odds are severely in your favor especially with the help of the gnomes who show up and you get a small indication of what exactly they have been working on. + +Some sort of powerful battle machine they call automatons. The best way to describe them is they’re golems except work under the power of steam, gears and technology rather than magic. A single automaton is an incredibly destructive force blowing holes in walls with their mounted cannons or just smashing them down with a hammer fist. + +The gnomes also bring out their lightning cannons that you remember during the Felkan War. It was a relatively new invention towards the end of that conflict, but it looks like the gnomes have perfected it their power. Your own inventors never could figure out how to create them though. (Even Elam was at a loss on how they did it without the use of magic) + +You’re sort of surprised they never created their own airships, but apparently they were in the process of doing so. In any case, whatever they’ve created and will create are yours to use now. + +The Confederacy of Free Cities doesn’t stand a chance and half of them are in ruins after it’s all said and done. That wasn’t the original intent, but at this point you’re not really concerned with conquering a few measly cities. You can always have new ones built now that you own the territory. What matters more is the eradication of the svelk menace. + +“We got her Emperor!” a soldier says running up to you in the middle of the burning ruins of Ryglik. +“Are you sure its her?” you ask +“Yes, Emperor. It’s Domina Eldolith. She was captured by the kobolds attempting to escape through a system of tunnels, she killed quite a few of them, but the little scalies managed to subdue her. She’s been yelling about being the grand domina of the free cities and a bunch of other stuff. Mostly demanding to be treated with the respect that a captured enemy of her stature deserves.” +“Unbelievable. Defiant and arrogant to the end. Wouldn’t be the svelk way otherwise. Well take me to her.” You say. + +You are lead to the former city hall and down into the basement where several kobolds are proding a bound Eldolith with sharp objects and laughing while she swears and curses at them. They see you and bow in reverence while excitedly looking for approval of their deed. + +“Capturr blak elf! For Emp! For Emp!” one of them says. +“Yes, and I will make sure you are awarded appropriately for your deeds. All of you, now leave I want to speak with this one alone. And do not interrupt me, no matter what you may hear. I will leave here when I’m ready.” + +The kobolds leave via the trapdoor in the floor, your human soldiers nearby head back upstairs. Eldolith looks at you as you approach her. It’s been a while since you’ve seen her, but she’s not looking her best right now. Her clothes are torn and wet, she’s covered in dirt and grime. She smells like she’s been running through a sewer. Superficial wounds are on her face and body. Her eyes are burning through you with an absolute hatred. + +And you love every moment of it. + +“If you think I’m going to beg for my life you’re sadly mistaken. I will NEVER give you that satisfaction. I am a svelk! My people…” + +You backhand Eldolith shutting her up. + +“Are dead. And if they aren’t, the ones we captured soon will be. You can stop playing the arrogant svelk Eldy. You’re scared of what is going to happen next. And you should be, because I’m going to revisit some old techniques your mother showed me once.” + +At this point Eldolith’s eyes widen and she tries to edge away when your hands start to touch her body. Suddenly you grip her throat. + +“Don’t move away from me bitch.” You say and look into her eyes. Gone is the hatred. Now you see the fear. + +“Now then, if you’re concerned that I meant a physical violation, I hate the break your dreams, but that won’t be happening. For one thing, your current stench is enough to give an orc pause. However after I’m done today, you will be wishing that I was displaying such a kindness to you. Begging. In fact I believe your earlier boast about not begging for your life was correct. You won’t be. You’ll be begging for your death. Now let us begin…” + +You pull out a small set of tools you brought for this occasion. To be honest you weren’t sure if you’d be lucky enough to capture Eldolith alive, but fortune smiled on you this day. + +You begin a brutal session of torture on Eldolith. You occasionally ask her for more information on where other svelk may be, but these are met with pathetic moans of denial of knowledge. + +“I DON’T KNOW ANYTHING!” Eldolith screams as another finger is cut off. +“At this point I actually believe you, but I don’t really care because this is amusing to me. Torturing a svelk. Not just any svelk though. One that tried to have me fucking assassinated on several occasions. Come on Eldy, you really can’t be surprised by my actions here. You svelk pride yourself on showing no mercy and revel in cruelty, I’d think you’d understand all this.” +“Who told you this? My mother?! And you believed her? What makes you think she wasn’t responsible and just put the blame on me?!” +“Well for one thing, your mother is a lot smarter than you and if she was planning to have me killed, I have to admit, she might’ve been successful. Fortunately that crazy bitch is obsessed with me, for some unknown reason…” + +At this point Eldolith starts coughing up blood while trying to laugh. + +“Something amusing? Have you finally gone mad from the pain?” you ask. +“Ha ha, (cough) you wish I was her right now. (cough) You’ll never get that satisfaction, she’s played you like a cheap lute since you’ve been born Eternal. Even now you’re doing her bidding. She just…” + +At this point Eldolith vomits a mixture of blood and bile on the floor. Some of it getting on your boots. + +“You were saying?” you ask, but Eldolith just breathes heavily not answering. + +“Well, you don’t really need this eye to tell me the rest of your thoughts.” You say and approach her again with a knife… + +By the time dawn comes, Eldolith is barely alive. She’s blind, missing an entire hand, her skin partially flayed, missing most of her teeth, she’s a bloody mess and her face doesn’t even resemble that of a svelk anymore. She’s long since proven your prediction correct and begged for death, which you’ve denied her. But even you have to move on some time. + +“I have to admit Eldy, I thought you would’ve been long dead by now. For someone begging for death, your body’s will to survive is strong. The funny thing is, I could easily heal most of you up and do this all over again, but honestly I think I’ve made my point. Besides I’d hate to shorten my own lifespan just for a little bit of amusement, which is getting boring now. Any last words?” + +Eldolith makes no sound, just shallow breathing. + +“Right then.” You say and put your mithral dagger to her throat. + +“You brought this on yourself.” You whisper in Eldolith’s hacked off ear and slash her throat at last putting her out of her living hell. + +When you exit the building, several officers say they’ve been wanting to speak with you about important matters of the aftermath of the war and similar matters concerning the newly acquired cities. Also the gnomes are wondering what your next orders are now since the enemy has been thoroughly eliminated. +While you certainly feel good about your victory and your recent indulgence, you can’t help but wonder now if Eldolith was just a convenient scapegoat. Eldolith and her sect of svelk obviously still had to die and you’re more than certain that she was involved in trying to have you killed, but who is to say that it wasn’t Semra pulling the strings all along? + +In any event, looks like playtime is over. Back to business as usual. +> The Grand Tour (Inside New Dessel) +As you walk through the halls of New Dessel with Klemto, you have to admit to being impressed with the place. The gnomes have once again succeeded in the face of adversity. This city inside a mountain not only has comfortable living arrangements and external defense measures, but is also self sufficient in food and other resources. + +It helps that the mountain had a large system of natural caverns already inside which allowed the gnomes to take advantage of the layout. Edible fungus and an underground water source were definitely bonuses. Klemto remarks that they probably would not have put that much effort into making the mountain into a “city” had none of these things been available. + +Now that you’ve gotten a good look at the inside of the place, it’s a very good thing you didn’t attack this place like Kivan suggested. You might’ve very well gotten fried on the spot. Besides their numerous cannons mounted in the rock to defend New Dessel, the gnomes have what can only be described as a giant metal lightning rod except they can shoot lightning from it AND direct its attack. It runs from the bottom of a water source, which has some sort of strange machine in it (It generates “electricity” as Klemto calls it) and the pole goes all the way up to the top of mountain peak where it can direct a blast of lightning powerful enough to probably destroy one of your airships. + +Definitely very useful though Klemto says its really only good for nearby defense as they can’t hit something, as far away as say where the former City State Confederacy was located. This puts you at ease since you did wonder if such a weapon could hit your capital! + +The gnomes have also managed to create something else you lack in the Empire. Lighting without any sort of fire. + +“How do you produce light like that with no fire? It seems similar to the lightning that comes from the sky or from magic spells.” You ask. +“Oh yes. Electricity again. We were trying to harness that into something less destructive even during the last days of the Felkan War when we were using our lightning guns. In fact had the war not come about the Felkans might’ve had electrical lighting by now. Well, at least we solved the mystery I guess.” Klemto says. +“Hrm.” You answer. +“Erm, I suppose you probably would like your own engineers to implement such things in the Empire. We can certainly give the method on how to do it.” +“Eh. Perhaps in time. To be quite honest it isn’t a pressing concern, I’d rather they learn the methods on how to create those lightning guns of yours, and those things.” You say pointing at an automaton being fixed by a group of gnomes. + +“Oh yes, I imagine your interests do place military matters first. Well of course we’ll be willing to oblige. As I said great Emperor, New Dessel is at your service.” +“Indeed.” You respond. + +Just as you are about to bring up the subject of stationing Eyes in New Dessel to Klemto a young girl with red hair comes running up to him. She looks to be a teenager and is dressed in a slightly dirty work uniform. + +“Uncle Klemto! Uncle Klemto! The lightning has gone out in section eight again! Can I go assist this time?” she says which causes Klemto to look very embarrassed. +“Zana! I told you not to disturb me today! This is the Emperor I’m speaking with right now and his time is very precious!” +“Oh. Well can I go help fix the lighting then? I’ll be out of your hair!” She says thinking nothing more of Klemto’s words causing him even more concern that you’re getting angry. + +You aren’t really angry so much as you’re intrigued. To your knowledge only gnomes live in New Dessel, so you’re wondering how this human got here. And calling Klemto uncle no less. + +“Zana! If you’re going to interrupt my important meeting the least you can do is show the proper respect for the Emperor. OUR Emperor. We’re part of the Empire now as I mentioned to you, remember?” Klemto says. +“Oh. Okay.” Zana turns to you and raises a dirty hand for you to shake. “Hello Mr. Emperor.” + +Klemto is cringing the entire time, but you return her attempt at being friendly by shaking her hand. + +“Zana, you can go help with fixing the lighting in section eight, just get out of here!” Klemto orders. +“Alright! Thank you uncle!” Zana beams and gives the old gnome a little peck on the cheek before running off. + +At this point Klemto is as red as a tomato which is actually making you chuckle a bit at this point. + +“Klemto, relax. I’m not the unreasonable head-chopping tyrant everyone thinks I am. I do have to ask though, how is it that a human came to be here and calls you uncle no less?” + +Klemto does relax a little, but only a little. + +“Heh, oh that. Well during our…evacuation of the Felkan Kingdom, a group of us travelled through one of the many ruined Felkan towns. As we travelled through, I heard the mewling of a baby. I investigated and sure enough I found one. The house was in shambles and I had already passed the body of a man and woman in the room before I found the baby. I can only guess it was the baby’s mother and father. Several of my fellow gnomes told me I should just leave it as we had enough to worry about, without a baby possibly giving away our position, but I just didn’t feel right doing such a thing. So I took her, named her Zana and over the years I raised as if she was my own.” +“Hrm, that’s unusual.” +“What do you mean?” +“Well the Empire was fairly thorough about going through towns. Seems odd that a crying baby would’ve been missed. Oh and contrary to popular belief we didn’t always kill everything in sight if we razed a town. Sometimes children and infants were taken to be wards of the Empire. Still, if you were on the run, I imagine you had to at least be going through the area where General Alison Krozer was stationed with her army. One of the best I have ever known, as were those under her command. I mean I suppose its possible something like that was missed but…” + +Klemto quickly interrupts you. + +“Well uh, the gnolls were a problem on that side of the Felkan Kingdom too remember? Probably was gnolls.” +“Well that seems even less likely then.” You answer. +“Why?” +“Well for one thing Alison had pretty much taken care of the separate gnoll invaders by the time you lot start seeing that the Felkan Kingdom was dying and start abandoning it. I mean sure there were still some here and there, but they weren’t really focusing their attacks on Felkans anymore, they were focusing on Empire forts and our patrols. Besides, these are gnolls we’re talking about. Those savages used to steal everything they thought valuable and destroy the rest. A crying baby? They probably would’ve eaten such a thing while it was still in its crib! They’re worse than svelk when it comes to stuff like that.” You say. +“Yeah…uh well whoever it was I guess she was just…lucky?” +“I guess so. Well in any event you’re certainly to be commended on raising a child that learned the importance of serving the good of her community.” You answer though you feel like something about Klemto’s story doesn’t add up. + +“Yes, well I thank you for your kind words my Emperor. Shall we get back to your proposal on your Eyes? As I said before, you can station as many as you feel are needed here!” Klemto says almost eager to stop discussing his adopted daughter. +“Sure, let’s get back to that.” You respond.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 42 + +While you doubt this is going to be your last battle with the Torites, you’re at least hoping it’s going to be the one to break their spirit to the point where they become less of a problem. + +Still, the fact that they’ve finally unified their forces into armies shows you that they realize you aren’t going to just go away and their hit and run tactics and attempts to win through attrition aren’t going to succeed. It shows you that this is a concentrated effort to get rid of you once and for all. It won’t work either and really works to your benefit. It allows you the opportunity to kill a bunch of them in one large grouping now. + +Maybe there will always be pockets of Torites lurking in the untamed wilderness but one thing is certain. The territory WILL be the Empire’s and the Torites can either submit and see the light like the kobolds eventually did or slowly be driven into extinction like the gnolls. + +But that’s in the future, right now you’re drawing up the plans for this impeding battle. Considering how large the Torite horde is, you’ve combined your available forces with Decena’s army. It was quite the happy day for her seeing as she hasn’t seen you for five years. You still aren’t quite sure how you exactly feel about her, but she’s definitely been winning you over as far as her victories have been concerned. She remains professional always in front of everyone, but the first time she got you alone, she literally jumped on you and wrapped her legs around your waist, planting a kiss on you. + +But again, you can sort out your possible complications with Decena later. Now is the time to make sure the both of you come out of this alive. + +“We should have the second airship here before we begin our assault. Hopefully that will take some of the pressure off of the Storm to deal with the harpies.” You remark. +“Its isn’t just the bird bitches that flap about though. Don’t forget, there are still those manticores and those chimeras.” General Ackerson remarks. +“Yes, I’m well aware of both, Ackerson. Thank you for pointing out the obvious. However, I’m more inclined to believe the Torites will be relying on those beasts to attack our people on the ground. The beasts aren’t the most graceful of fliers and would most likely just be big target, which they will be for us anyway, but they’ll still do more damage to a group of soldiers on foot and horseback rather than a flying fortress before going down.” You remark. +“Those chimera things don’t even fly very high. The wings are almost so small that they’re just for show. Never had one swoop down on us.” Decena adds. +“Wouldn’t be best to have us mages together so that we can join our energy and create a shield for the majority of the army?” Galen remarks. He isn’t complaining, but he’s definitely trying to find a loop hole to possibly make himself safer and not have to do as much work.” +“Galen, you know that the Torites attempt to target spell slingers as soon as possible. If they actually get you in a group and strike lucky, well there goes a powerful chunk of our fighting force. It’ll make things harder for them if you’re all spread out. Besides, you’re personally going to be hiding behind a small contingent of golems and backed up by Captain Flevas’ men. You couldn’t be any safer.” +“Huh. So my backup lies in the hands of an elf? Might as well kill me now and get it over with.” Galen remarks. You just shake your head and ignore his last comment; he’s too valuable to punish right now. + +After hammering out the plan, you and the rest start setting things in motion and preparing everyone. You know the Torite horde is on the move not too far from your location. But they aren’t here yet and won’t be for at least a half-day’s time. It gives you a bit of time to at least get some rest since you’ve been running around attempting to take care of everything and haven’t slept. You didn’t even realize how tired you were until you lie down on your sleeping bag. + +Just as you lie down and close your eyes, someone enters your tent and you instinctively grab your sword. + +“No point in that, I’m not really here you know.” You hear a familiar voice whisper. + +You sit up and see Semra standing before you, or rather the image of her. She’s no doubt using the same kind of magic she did when she tried to convince you to kill Casimir. She’s probably nearby somewhere though. + +“I thought you said we weren’t going to see each other again.” You say. +“I didn’t think we would. I truly believed you would die on Mortos. I suppose I underestimated your ability to survive even there. Quite impressive and it’s no surprise that you assumed Casimir’s throne soon after. Everything worked out for you, but tell me how did you accomplish such a feat?” +“Just luck I guess. Look, if you came here to kill me, you’ll need to get behind the long line of Torites marching towards this place.” You say while lying back down and shutting your eyes. +“My, you’re quite confident to stay in such a vulnerable position if you really believe I’m here to kill you.” Semra says. +“No, I know this is just grand standing. If you were really going to kill me you’d have your underlings conspiring with little plots in the shadows.” +“Yes, I’m aware of the troubles you’ve been having lately and while I’m flattered you believe it to me, I’m actually here to clear my good name.” +“Hah!” you snort. +“Okay so just my name. In any event. I’m here to tell you that it isn’t me, though you do have enemies of the svelk persuasion.” +“I’ve got enemies of every persuasion and that’s not a very convincing argument that you’re somehow innocent.” +“Okay how about this then? It’s not me because I’ve been keeping an eye on you and so far you haven’t warranted anything that needs me to stop you yet. My daughter on the other hand disagrees. She claims that my…past with you is clouding my judgment.” +“We never had a past Semra. I don’t know what YOU think it is, but WE were and never will be an item.” +“Oh yes, that’s right. You’ve got that vicious little young thing on your dick now. Decena is her name? She is quite the warrior. Lot of those moves are familiar, they’re all the ones I taught you. Hey have you taught her any of my other moves when you’re bedding her?” + +At this point you sit back up, annoyed with Semra’s remark. + +“Is this going anywhere because I have a shitload of beast men to slaughter tomorrow and you’re keeping me awake!” You snap. +“Oooh! Struck a nerve did I? Haven’t been able to do that for quite awhile, I really missed it. Tell me though; is it very serious with this one like it was with Alison? Didn’t think you’d get over her so quickly. Really though I don’t know why you pick any of these females. This new one is just likely to wind up dead, if not by the sword then by age. Her youthful appearance with eventually wither and fade like it does with all of those lesser born.” + +At this point you lie back down and close your eyes again. You’re not playing this game. + +“You done already? Disappointed, you used to be so much more fun. Very well, just listen then Eternal. I know you have a hard time with that, but maybe you’ll actually heed what I have to say for once. I am not your enemy. As I have said, my daughter is your enemy and she makes her base of operations in a city-state called Ryglik and lies south of the former Broki Kingdom. Of course that whole area consists of several city-states and she may very well move around, but that’s the main one she’s operating from. + +You remain silent while Semra continues to talk. + +“Well I’ll take your silence that you’re at least taking it under consideration. Oh and while you’re at it, you still might want to consider giving up all this foolish nonsense. Perhaps you’re a better Emperor than Casimir ever was, but you’re still mindlessly following a path that you think has been laid out for you. It’s almost like Casimir is still barking orders at you.” +“I guarantee Casimir’s not saying much of anything anymore.” You answer. +“Be that as it may, I’d hate to see you follow in his horribly misguided footsteps and make the same mistakes he did.” +“Well, I don’t have you as an advisor, I’d say that already puts me ahead of the game.” +“Pfft, you’d be lucky to have me by your side. Not my fault you can’t see and accept the truth. Anyway, I’ll take my leave now. Perhaps we’ll see each other, perhaps we won’t. Perhaps we’ll even see each other in the flesh again, wouldn’t that be fun?” +“Sure would, I could give you your dagger back.” You remark. +“Mmmm, I bet you would. Well if that day ever comes, you make sure you give me a long hard kiss as you’re sticking it in me. Oh one last thing, your General Ackerson is planning to betray you at some point during tomorrow’s battle. Not sure when and how, but he’s got quite a few soldiers willing to work with him on it. More of my daughter’s work no doubt.” + +With those final words, you cease hearing Semra’s voice. You briefly open your eyes and find that her image is gone as well. + +“Fucking bitch.” You mutter, as now you’re never going to be able to sleep with this last bit of information she just gave you. + +The big problem is she may very well be telling the truth, because for the most part Semra has never really lied to you. You didn’t believe her at the time, but she told you the complete truth about Casimir and his intentions. She didn’t have Alison killed either. As usual in her own fucked up way that you still don’t understand she has attempted to help you. + +Of course that was in the past, she could be lying about everything right now. While she has confirmed your own beliefs that it’s been the svelk working against you, she’s also trying to put the blame all on her daughter. Granted you know they probably don’t get along, but still. + +There also has never been any evidence that Ackerson has shown signs of being a potential traitor. Doesn’t even make sense, but then again you can’t trust anyone nowadays. + +Now you have to play a guessing game to as whether or not someone on your own side is going to kill you in the middle of battle. You miss the days when all you ever concerned yourself with were the people on the other side trying to kill you. +> Dismiss the accusation +There is no proof and indeed it would be incredibly stupid even for a traitor to attempt to kill you while there’s a rampaging army of beastmen that could very well kill everyone if you weren’t around. + +You roll over and salvage some sleep. + +Despite everything that went on last night, you miraculously actually manage to get a little sleep before the arrival of the Torites. You’re still a little tired, but you think when you get into the thick of battle the thrill of it will kick in and you’ll be invigorated. You usually are. + +It seems word of what happened spread fairly quickly to the rest of the camps, even to Decena’s army. You imagine that will at least have to put Galen in a good mood, maybe he’ll whine less now. + +When the Torites arrive they certainly look like a chaotic rabble, but it’s no mistake that they mean business. The number of harpies fills the sky to the point where you hope that the Storm can take care of such a flock. The second airship is in far distance behind you. Hopefully by the time it gets to engage in battle it won’t be replacing the Storm so much that it’ll be supporting the Storm. + +The cannons and rifles fire as soon as the Torites are within range. Their centaurs return fire with their accurate arrows. The saytr wizards up the ante by casting their elemental magic which rips solid chunks of rock and earth out of the ground and goes flying at your army. It can’t be said that the Torites are any less dangerous just because they’re less technologically advanced. + +High above you the Storm takes on the harpy warriors. Even from here, it looks like a swarm of locusts descending on a single blade of wheat. Looks pretty damn grim for the Storm, you just hope if the crew does get overwhelmed they can keep the ship from crashing near your location. + +The bull creatures lead the charge along side their horse beast brethren. Another volley of shots takes out some, but they remain relentless in their charge. The satyr rank and file advance steadily behind. They WILL arrive and there will certainly be enough of them left to give your army a good fight. + +Your own cavalry meets them and while they have the best training, they can’t overcome the sheer savagery of the minotaurs and as for the centaurs, their very bodies are half horse. They already have the advantage over your own cavalry as far as maneuverability. + +Breaks in the Torite army form as they allow their war beasts participate in the charge. Several manticores and chimera of the largest size make their way straight towards you. At their pace, they’re going to be the first ones your people will have to fight. A cannon blast rips through one of the chimera and fireball from one of your mages brings down another, but before you know it, a manticore is shredding apart your front line with its talons and impaling others with its spike tail. + +What comes next is utter mayhem. Swords and axes cutting and stabbing. Fangs and claws tearing and biting. Magic on both sides destroying several lives in the blink of an eye. It’s all very glorious. + +Decena’s army is holding its own on her front, but then you never had any doubt about that. The only problem they do have is the blasted satyr magic manages to turn the golems against them. Hopefully, Flevas managed to get Galen’s ass out of there before they crushed him. General Ackerson seems to be struggling a bit, but is hanging in there. + +Still, the battle is far from over yet. The fact that you’re simultaneously facing down three bullheads by yourself and a chimera closing in is a great reminder. + +You cast a lightning blast at the bulls, which fells two of them, but the third fights through the pain of having his body fried from the inside out. You dodge his axe and follow up with your own sword swing to his meaty leg. The beast roars, but is still undeterred. + +Two nearby soldiers from General Ackerson’s army see you and they both pull out their pistols. At first you think they’re just trying to shoot the chimera, but then you realize they’re going to shoot you. You mutter a curse about Semra being right. + +While you manage to block the shots with a quick force shield, you are also being attacked by a very vicious chimera, which takes advantage of your distraction. You feel a large singer impaling you through the leg followed up by the chimera’s goat head breathing poisonous gas in your face. + +Disoriented, hobbled and half blind, you don’t even see the minotaur that you temporarily fried with your lightning blast come at you with a great axe, cleaving half of head off.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 40 + +“I thought the plan was to keep them in the tanks until the sixteenth year.” Brenda says. +“No, those were Marik’s original plans for the last Eternals he worked on. We’re doing things differently. From Elam’s earlier calculations, and my own magic theories on this project we both came to the conclusion long ago that keeping them in the tanks for as long as Marik did is asking for trouble in the long term. While it certainly accelerates their skills and abilities there’s a risk for it to have a terrible affect on the mind. In fact it’s probably just as well that Marik killed them all, otherwise we might’ve had hundreds of mental cases.” You reply. + +“But Decena seems okay. I mean from what I know of the girl.” Brenda says. +“Decena’s an exception, but I’m not going to tempt fate with this group. Five years seems like a good stopping point.” +“So are you going to be training the rest of them?” +“No, you are.” You say to Brenda who is speechless for a second. + +“What?” Brenda says. +“You’re going to be responsible for these new Eternals Brenda. I know you’re going to need assistants, but it’s going to be chiefly your responsibility to train them and to make sure they become the best of the best. What Eternals should be. What WE are.” +“But, why me? I mean I’ve never been on the frontlines like the rest of us were.” +“True, but I know you’re no stranger to battle and you’re the only one I can trust with this task. Warrick’s job is to be the head of internal security and to directly oversee the Eyes, so he can’t do it. And I feel it would be best if another Eternal should be fully in charge of training these new ones. That leaves you and I know you to be an honorable woman who upholds the ideals of the Empire. Who could possibly be better?” +“You?” Brenda says. +“Heh, well it was a rhetorical question. But besides being too busy myself, I actually don’t believe I’d be the best trainer. I think due to our own experiences of how we were trained as well as our personalities, you will make a better teacher.” +“But we both had the same training up to our twelfth year.” +“Yes, and then our next four I guarantee was vastly different. And even during our twelve years together in Semra’s class, MY training experience was very different from yours. I think you’d agree.” + +Brenda nods, probably remembering that Semra took every opportunity to single you out in the class and subjecting you to the harshest punishments when it struck her fancy. + +“You had Captain Gruz as a teacher and from what I heard, he taught you all to fight as a team and to have a shared respect for each other and he did it without resorting to excessive measures. I know the common belief is that I’m cruel by nature, but I’m actually not. Ruthless perhaps, but not needlessly cruel. And because I’m not cruel, that’s why I’d rather have a more even-tempered person with at least a less hellish childhood experience than I train these children. They may be Eternals, but they’re still children that will have to be molded into good productive soldiers for the Empire with minimal problems to their mental state. I know you’ll be tough, but fair.” + +“Well, I don’t know what to say, except I appreciate your confidence in me in all this and I’ll do my best to carry out this task successfully. However, while I do understand that you don’t really have the time to train the new Eternals I’m still slightly puzzled to as why you believe you’d be a rotten teacher. I mean you trained Decena and from what I’ve heard she’s fanatically loyal as well as a great warrior bringing glory to the Empire.” + +“That’s right, I did. And she is.” You answer and don’t give any more elaboration, which prompts Brenda to just leave it alone. + +“Okay.” She responds. + +There’s a brief pause before Brenda decides to break up the silence by changing the subject. + +“So, what’s next on your agenda?” +“Me? Well after I go inspect the new airship that Elam is supposed to be finished with, I’m going back on the battlefield. I think its time; most of the internal reorganization and major projects have been dealt with and don’t require my immediate watchful eye anymore. I’m sure if any problems crop up, someone won’t hesitate to inform me. Besides, the Torites are causing all sorts of problem on Ackerson’s front. And I think he may even be having issues with that petty kingdom he recently made contact with. I don’t even remember what its name is, and if I have anything to say about it, neither will anyone else.” +“Well I’d tell you to be careful or wish you luck, but I know you’ll be fine. You always are. Are you going to stay for the grand opening though?” Brenda asks and points at the rows and rows of tanks. + +“No. Probably best if they don’t see me immediately. Keep me a semi-mysterious unapproachable figure for awhile.” You reply. +“Oh like what they told us?” Brenda says. +“Worked didn’t it? Still, when you’ve sufficiently got that idea into their heads, then I suppose I’ll make my appearance to them, most likely unannounced. I’ll want them to actually believe that I may very well pop up at any time. It’ll keep them on their toes.” +“Ha ha, that’s probably even more frightening than never seeing such a figure as I have to admit even at times I wondered if the Emperor was actually watching me all the time, though Roldan certainly thought so.” + +Brenda at this point temporarily spins off into a pleasant memory she has of Roldan. You’ve never told her it was actually Casimir that had Roldan assassinated for his own reasons. You’ve pondered if you should tell her the truth, but ultimately decided it wouldn’t do any good save for perhaps destroying her faith in the Empire, which you don’t want. + +You know Brenda is prone to bouts of depression ever since Roldan’s died, telling her that the government and its ruler that she served was directly involved in her husband’s death might push her into hopelessness. Maybe even suicide. As it stands, you’ve been working to try to keep her spirits up. + +Which is another reason why you picked her to train these new Eternals. Perhaps it will give her a better sense of purpose. + +“Sorry, I rambled a bit there. I guess I just still miss Roldan.” Brenda says. +“No need to apologize, I completely understand. Roldan was a dedicated soldier of the Empire and if he were here today he’d be proud of your accomplishments. Anyway, I have to go; if I’m lucky Elam hasn’t blown up this new machine he just built yet. I trust you have this?” +“Yes I do.” + +You leave Brenda to her task and make your way to your next stop, which should be very different… + +You look at the brand new airship you’ve poured money into. It certainly is as large as you thought it might be, though it is still strange to see such a machine that was only picture on a piece of parchment a few years ago. Elam is visibly anxious about what you’ll think about it. He’s surprisingly quiet though, which might be a good sign that he’s learned to not run off at the mouth all the time. + +“Hrm, its impressive looking, but does it actually work?” you ask Elam. +“Oh yes! We have tested its flight capabilities and it certainly works according to all the notes and plans Marik left. Had to make some adjustments of course, but I believe now that we’ve made one, we can easily improve upon it and make more.” Elam says. + +“Good, glad to hear it. What about weapons?” +“We’ve equipped it with the latest cannons and the prototype repeater. There are also firebombs that can be dropped from the sky.” Elam answers. +“Excellent work as always Elam.” +“Thank you, my Emperor. Will you be boarding it?” +“Boarding it? Hmm, hadn’t actually given it much thought. I mean is this final product? You don’t need to do anymore testing on it?” +“Well we were just going to do some weapons testing while it flying it, but the airship itself is fully operational. It won’t go crashing into the ground or anything like that.” + +While you prefer keeping your feet firmly on the ground, you have to admit you do like the idea of potentially floating through the sky towering over your enemies and all those that might oppose you. + +“Very well, but I still want you to go through a weapons test like you planned, before I get on it. Do another safety check as well.” +“As you wish, so about a week?” Elam asks. +“Fine, but no more than that.” You reply and leave. + +Seeing as you have a few more days to kick around before the airship is ready, you return to the mundane duties of rulership. A couple days later you decide to check up on Warrick to see if there is anything he’s uncovered that needs your attention. + +The Eye Headquarters is probably the safest place in the Empire other than the palace itself. The Eyes may not be Eternals, but they’re the next best thing and Warrick being both is certainly one of the best warriors at your command. + +That’s probably why he looks so bored behind his desk when you meet him. In fact your visit is probably the most exciting thing that’s happened in his life lately. + +“Emperor! Didn’t realize you were coming, I was just busy going through all these population lists. You know like who is a potential trouble maker, who is a loyal citizen, that sort of thing.” Warrick says getting up when you enter his office. +“Anything interesting I should know about?” you ask. +“Not really. I mean there are still some grumbles from citizens about when we took babies from some families for the Eternal Project and the free elven population is always unsatisfied with the way things are, but I’m not seeing any uprising material. Unless you want to have some dissenters whisked away in the night just to be safe.” Warrick says. +“I don’t think that’ll be necessary. They can’t all be kobolds.” You reply. +“Heh, got that right. Still can’t get over how Brenda was so successful in assimilating them the way she did. I still remember during our first major assignment in Nalin we had to wipe out caves of those vicious little bastards.” +“I just saw her a few days ago actually, she’s going to be in charge of the new Eternals, training and such.” +“Is that right? Well she’s probably the best candidate. I mean with you busy ruling and me busy being in charge of the Eyes and all. Um, is she still pissed at me?” +“She didn’t really say anything about you, but I imagine you’re still not her favorite person.” +“(Sigh) That’s a shame. You know I don’t harbor any ill will against her and if I could’ve I would’ve had even tighter security that fateful day. I mean I just…” + +You stop Warrick + +“Warrick, you don’t need to explain. You did everything you could that day. We all did. I mean hell even I didn’t see a shadow assassination coming. A dead one that I killed no less. Just don’t worry about it. Brenda will probably get over it one day, and if she doesn’t, well it’s still not your fault.” + +This reassuring statement seems to make Warrick calmer. You’ve obviously never told him the real truth about the assassination either and again you see no reason to stir up trouble by doing so. + +You and Warrick talk for a while, some it about the present, some of it about the future, and some of it about the past. During your conversation, it suddenly occurs to you that maybe you could hand a small honor over to Warrick for all his hard work. He certainly could use a break in the mundane paper work that he primarily does nowadays. + +You wonder if you should let him take command of the new airship and see some frontline combat. +> Take command of the airship yourself +Everyone’s got his or her place and Warrick is needed where he is. Perhaps another time. + +You bid Warrick goodbye and in a week you make your way over to Elam’s factory where you can board the new airship. + +It does look rather impressive. Just looking at all the cannons stick out of the sides, makes you wonder how the hell it lifts off the ground with all that weight, but then someone probably also wondered how the hell a regular ship can float with the same amount of weight on it at one time too. + +“This is a minor thing my Emperor, but I was wondering what did you want to name this ship? I figured you’d want the honor of doing that.” Elam asks. +“Name? Oh yes, I suppose a name would come in handy. Let’s see…call it the Storm I guess. Raining down destruction on our enemies and all that. Sounds good to me.” You reply to which Elam agrees. + +You board the Storm with Elam and meet the crew who will be flying this thing. All of them stand at attention when you arrive. a man dressed in a standard Empire engineer uniform walks up to you and salutes. It looks like his uniform has been crudely altered. + +“Emperor on deck! It is an honor to meet you in person! My name is Tavis…” he starts to say before you interrupt. +“Why the hell do you have small metal cogs on your shoulders?” you ask. +“Oh…yeah that well when we started this project nobody knew anything about flying so Elam picked me for a lot of first tests. It was dangerous, but exhilarating at the same time! In time I became the most proficient at commandeering this technological marvel, so Elam made me captain.” +“Glad to see Elam’s taken it upon himself to completely ignore all military protocol and just arbitrarily assign ranks and such. So I’m guessing those little cogs you put on yourself are supposed to represent your new status?” +“Erm...uh…yes my Emperor. I meant no offense!” +“Calm down, I don’t care that much. In the future though, assuming this turns out well. We really need to get you proper uniforms for airship crew rather than this poor attempt of altering old ones. Anyway, take me on the grand tour before we lift off.” + +Elam and Tavis both take you to various parts of the airship and explain various things mostly involving technical talk, eventually you grow bored and decide you just want to get on with getting this thing to the battlefield where you can see its destructive capabilities. + +“Alright I get the picture, let’s get this thing to the front lines and blow up some Torites.” You say. +“As you wish my Emperor, I’ll leave you in the hands of Captain Tavis here, uh he’s still a captain isn’t he?” +“Yes, since it’s as good as a designation as any for now. If he proves competent, he may very well keep the rank.” You respond. + +Elam and some of the other engineers that were testing the safety of the airship soon leave it so that the rest of you can get on your way. The airship takes a moment to warm up, but soon you’re lifting off and high in the air. The experience isn’t that bad and a fairly smooth ride. You honestly half thought you’d go crashing down to the ground, but it really looks like your engineers came through. You give some praising comments which seems to put the crew and Tavis in good spirits. + +You explain you’ll be head towards the south where General Ackerson’s command is located. You figure you can meet up and see what the situation is and have the Storm assist accordingly. + +Along the way one of the lookouts see a group of the centaur Torites galloping across the plains. There are actually quite a few of them. Enough to be a raiding party probably. When asked if the Storm should try to take them out, you say of course. + +“We’re too far away to use bombs and the cannons aren’t angled in a position to fire at them yet. We could use the repeater prototype though. It’s located over there and it has terrific range! Would you like to do the honors my Emperor?” Tavis asks. +“Well I don’t usually use firearms and I could probably hit some of those horse beasts from here with a few fireballs, but what the hell.” You say and walk over to the repeater prototype. + +You turn the mounted gun towards the centaurs who are now quite away that the “big machine” in the sky is heading toward them and means to do them harm. They begin to scatter and you press the trigger… + +And the gun promptly explodes spectacularly. Enough so that it sets a large part of the ship on fire which then in turn causes more minor explosions. + +As the surviving crew runs around attempting to put out fires and move away gunpowder, you find that you are several feet away from your original location and your arms have become bloody stumps. Your body is in bad condition as well considering you can see out of your one remaining eye that your organs are exposed to the air now. + +Healing magic wouldn’t be of too much help even if you could concentrate to use it. The explosions aboard the airship are deafening and you’re barely conscious as it is. Someone goes over to help you and then you pass out. + +You are not awake to experience the Storm’s fiery crash to the ground.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This adventure has drained you physically, mentally and even emotionally. Attacking a powerful necromancer in his homeland might not be the best idea right now. Another day perhaps… + +You approach the portal and give one last look at Nicodemus who stands by watching you. You can't figure him out. A lot of what he said was very condescending yet he seemed to pity you rather than be angry. He was also very nihilistic in his views on how achievements don't matter, not even life, though at the same he seemed to be trying to give you advice and help you in some strange way. + +You step into the portal and find yourself transported back to the Emperor’s chambers. Chambers that seem so empty now. Empty as you feel. Something is bothering you and it’s a strange thing to worry about considering it would’ve lead to your death, but you can’t shake it. + +Why did the Emperor’s ritual fail? Nicodemus said you were not a suitable vessel for the transference spell, but if you weren’t, what does that mean? Would one of the other Eternals been a better choice, or was the plan always destined to fail? + +You believe there have to be some notes on the subject of your alterations somewhere. Jacob probably has several papers about the Eternal Project in his office, but you search the Emperor’s rooms first. + +After hours of searching you manage to find several bits of private writings about various subjects. You don’t have time to read all of them now, but you focus on anything to the Eternal Project. + +One of the major things you discover is that the pregnant mothers had a specific ritual cast over them while the Eternals to be were still in the womb. This ritual, while elaborate and probably quite frightening to the woman in question didn’t harm her in any way; it was more of a “prep” spell. (You also read that it took several attempts to get this ritual “right” too. The number of dead pregnant women is quite sizable) + +Apparently this initial ritual was a big key in whether or not the final ritual was going to be successful. You can’t find any other information besides how the Emperor was REALLY betting everything on this plan as he’d run out of ideas on to extend his life any further short of going back to Mortos and apologizing to Nicodemus for his behavior. + +Still wanting more information you go search through Jacob’s office. It is actually easy to find everything since he kept everything in immaculate order. Naturally he had everything locked, but you easily remove such annoyances. Nothing is going to stop you from seeking out your origins. + +And after hours more searching you find more than you ever wanted to know in Jacob’s journal… + +I can’t believe those idiots! Trent and Stravid grabbed the wrong fucking infant! We only found out just yesterday when I found their list on the floor of the privy room covered in piss! + +I went back to check the Empire nursery numbers hoping that MAYBE they grabbed the correct child anyway, but no such luck. The infant that was supposed to be selected was already disposed of as a rejected candidate. Meanwhile the wrong infant is already going through his magical alterations. + +I’m not exactly on the Emperor’s good side at the best of times, and I’m not getting into fucking trouble for this. Those two morons are going to be executed. As for the baby I’m going to have to grovel to get that svelk bitch to help me with this. She can probably perform the same ritual over this new brat so the Emperor won’t be able to detect anything is amiss with it. I don’t understand why the Emperor doesn’t just perform this ritual in person rather than relying on the svelk to do it anyway. + +And HOPEFULLY that will work. It has to work. Maybe I’m worrying about this too much, what are the chances that this kid will live through training and meet the Emperor anyway? + +And there it is, your “origins.” You weren’t even meant to be an Eternal. You were a clerical mistake, a bureaucratic mishap, and the Emperor’s death was caused by it. Hell, it’s almost like you went through with Jacob and Semra’s plan to assassinate the Emperor anyway. + +One might think something like this would cause you to doubt the meaning of your entire existence and drive you into depression. Possibly even suicide. An end to this life of misplaced duty, obedience and blind devotion to ultimately an ungrateful master. + +Just like Nicodemus said. + +But you don’t really think about any of that. Instead you start to laugh. You laugh for a very long time. + +“He…he didn’t even know I wasn’t originally chosen! What a fool! Why the hell did I ever follow this man? Because I’m an even bigger fool!” you say to yourself in between the guffaws. + +Perhaps you’re still being a fool. Casimir lied to you and deep down never really cared save for what he thought you were, but none of that nor his death invalidate your beliefs in the Empire. His idea that the world needs order, that the masses need to be kept in line, that some elements are better off exterminated for the overall good. + +Maybe part of you still can’t quite shake being the “dutiful” son, but you fully intend on continuing in your “father’s footsteps.” Of course the difference now being that your life is truly your own now. Since destiny has conspired to thrust you into the position of a ruler, you will play the role that it would have you play. + +Now you just have to convince everyone else. + +Within the week you call for a meeting of the most important leaders of the Empire. Ranging from generals to economists to advisors and other infrastructure types you’ve had little to no contact with before. Everyone is told to gather in the throne room, which is a room that hasn’t been used in centuries; or rather Casmir stopped using it after he decided to become a recluse. + +You won’t be doing that. You’ll be leading from the front rather than hiding in the shadows causing people to wonder if you exist at all. This is your time now. + +When everyone finally arrives they naturally all wonder what’s going on, you get right to the point. + +"The Emperor as most of us knew him has moved on from this world. As his only logical successor I will be taking his place. If anyone has a problem with this we can have a civilized discussion about it on the battlefield which I have no doubt I will be seeing a lot of when several pretenders, dissidents and outright anarchists attempt to dethrone me. They will fail. The Empire will not fall today or anytime soon. This is just a new era for it and one I fully intend on making successful. The Empire currently is doing well, but I'm confident that with your loyalty and obedience we can make it even stronger." + +You take a pause in your speech and scan your audience. None of them are interrupting. They all seem to be captivated, of course maybe some are just planning on trying to assassinate you later, but for now you’ll take their attention as a positive sign. + +"Join me and the Empire will live forever. YOU will live forever! Who's with me?" + +No sooner have you finished your statement, several of the advisors bend their knee and bow towards you. The soldiers draw their weapons and raise them in air pledging their loyalty. + +"Hail to the new Emperor!" +"Long live the Empire!" + +Well that went better than you expected. + +The only “important” person that didn’t attend your meeting was Marik though you didn’t really expect him to being a derro and all. Not to mention you didn’t invite him anyway and had planned on meeting with him personally. + +You have no idea how he’s going to react to the news and he’s erratic at the best of times. You and he weren’t exactly getting along the last time you saw him, so for all you know he may just attack you. Part of you hopes he does, just so you never have to deal with him anymore. Besides Semra, Marik was the next one you never liked dealing with just because his demeanor irritated you. + +When you get to his personal factory, it’s as silent and as empty as it was when you had to clean out those escaped trolls. You hope that isn’t the damn problem again. On your guard, you cautiously walk through the factory and make your way down to the underground portion and continue to find nobody around. + +“Marik! If this is an ambush, let’s just get this over with now because I don’t have time for it!” you shout. + +You see the door to the tank baby room open up, but it isn’t Marik, it’s a young girl. In fact it’s the tank baby that you spared before your trip to Mortos. She looks like she’s been healing well. + +“He…he’s not here sir. I mean my Emperor. I apologize for not addressing you properly.” She remarks nervously. +“That’s fine…so word of my ascension has reached down here eh? Wasn’t sure if it did, so where’s Marik? In fact where is everyone? I know there’s still usually a skeleton crew that works in the factory above and there are usually derro guards wandering around down here. In fact shouldn’t there be more of you tank babies running around training?” you ask. +“Marik killed them all. He shut down the machine that was keeping the rest alive inside the tanks. Said if the Emperor was gone then his debt was paid and he wasn’t going to spend the remainder of his years toiling for the likes of you and called you a…uh…um…” +“Oh just say it, I’m pretty sure it isn’t going to surprise me.” + +“He called you a svelk fucker.” +“Is that all?” +“Well then he sort of ranted. He said that you had a svelk lover that would strap on a…uh…sexual device and made you bend over like a woman when you would have relations.” +“Sheesh. Can’t say Marik didn’t have a colorful imagination.” You remark shaking your head. +“Then he said the pair of you fellated kobolds and ate the dung of…” +“Okay, I think I got the idea.” You say holding up your hand. +“He was very angry at you my Emperor.” +“Mmh, sounds like. So why did he kill all you tankies?” +“Oh, well he also said he wasn’t going to waste any more of his genius for you to use, so he decided to kill all of us in the tanks. He tried to kill me as well by having his men shoot at me and lob several firebombs at me.” She says and points over to a partially collapsed bit of the room where blacked equipment and fallen rock now lays. +“Guessing it didn’t work.” +“I managed to duck under one of the desks and made a blood curdling scream as the explosions went off and the rocks fell down around me. After they let up, I heard Marik laugh at how I feared death in my final moments and after a few minutes I heard them leave at which point I started digging myself out of the rubble.” +“Hrm, I see faking your own death actually worked for you this time, good. You shouldn’t disregard a tactic just because it fails in one instance.” You say as you glance over a pile of papers lying on another table in the room. + +“Marik was brilliant in some ways, but he was an idiot in others. The fool left all his notes behind. I can easily restart all the work he did.” You add. +“You’re going to restart the Eternal Project? But I thought you didn’t like…tankies as you call us.” +“Well, I was in a different state of mind at the time. Now that I’m Emperor, I’m thinking that I’m going to need dedicated loyal soldiers to help in the expansion of the Empire in the future. Just need to rebuild the factory, get some babies, throw them into the tanks and grow my new army. Of course I’ll be overseeing it and making my own alterations to whatever Marik’s original design was.” +“What about me, my Emperor?” The tank baby asks. + +“Yes, what about you? Well considering you managed to survive not one, but two major attempts on your life within weeks of being out of your little tank, I suppose you deserve a place somewhere. To be honest, I did spare you in the first place because you showed more promise and strength than your siblings by merely surviving my assault. You know I was singled out too, on several occasions. I grew stronger from the challenges. You will have the same opportunity I did and I’m going to personally train you. Then depending on how well you do, I’ll decide where you’re best needed.” You tell her. +“You’re…you’re too kind my Emperor.” She says with a gratuitous expression on her face. + +You start laughing. + +“You won’t be thinking that when we actually start training. Let’s go. By the way it’ll be useful to have something to call you other than tank baby, so what’s your name?” +“Name? I don’t have one, my Emperor. Marik never saw fit to give me one. I do have a number though. Ten.” +“No, I’m not going to call you ten. That’s silly, especially since there’s only one of you now. Let’s see…I’ll call you… Decena. You like that name?” +“I don’t have any objections to it, my Emperor.” +“Good. Let us be on our way.” + +With this last bit of business out of the way, you feel you’re getting off on a good start as the Empire’s new Emperor. + +You just wish Alison were here to share it with you. +> Tilda Zookwinkle (Casimir’s dark secret) +You must have spent a lot of your down time searching through Casimir’s libraries and personal items in an attempt to possibly find some sort of magic or treasure or secret that could increase your own power, but you haven’t had much luck in that regard. Most of Casimir’s power came from his own magic strength along with his mind and had little reason to have such trinkets lying around. + +Surprisingly most of his notes and journals are of the more mundane sort. You don’t find the discovery of some powerful spell he didn’t teach you or anything. Again, such things would’ve probably been locked up in his own mind, which of course is inaccessible now. + +Still, one thing that you found stands out and it’s something that completely surprised you. + +Dearest Tilda, + +In all my years, I have never met a woman that makes me feel the way you do and I’ve met many in my travels. Never did I think that I would find paradise in the arms of a gnome woman. + +It’s like you’ve known me all my life, I don’t need to explain myself to you. You just know and understand. If I didn’t know better I’d swear you were some sort of trickster demon. Of course I know that cannot be the case, because you have such a kind and gentle spirit despite also being grounded in realism. + +I am not ashamed to tell you that I love you. I never thought I could experience such a wonderful emotion. I know your people are not magical by nature, but I cannot help think that you must’ve cast a powerful spell over me! + +I vow from here on out, that you will always be major factor in my future goals. I want to share everything with you. + +You find several, no a multitude of these sorts of love letters. Apparently Casimir once loved a gnome woman by the name of Tilda. Many of these letters were obviously sent and read, but you wonder how he got them back. + +After scanning through a few more of them, you find one letter that answers more questions to this mystery. It’s not Casimir’s writing, its Tilda’s. + +Casimir, + +When you find this letter, it will be on my dead body and hopefully most of my people will have escaped your bloody purge. You are a man of unspeakable evil, I always knew this, but within these last few months you proved it tenfold when you committed genocide on our Halfling cousins. + +Why? They wanted nothing more than equality, yet you would rather kill them all rather than grant that tiny bit of dignity. There will be a day of reckoning for all your evil, mark my words and when that day comes, I shall be watching and laughing at your downfall in the afterlife. + +You claimed that you loved me with all your heart, but you proved time and time again that you have no heart. You did not truly love me. You wished to possess me as a favored toy. Someone to pat you on the head whenever you whined about how the people just “don’t understand” why you have to do the terrible things you do. You’re pathetic, and I curse the day your eyes set their sights on me. + +Do you know how much I rolled my eyes at your sorry attempts of writing me love letters? + +Do you know how it made my skin crawl every time I had to lay with you? + +Do you know how much I utterly hated you from the moment you enslaved my people? Yes, ENSLAVED. No matter how “favored” our position we were still SLAVES. And you made me your personal one. + +I go to my grave happily knowing that I did everything I could to distract you from realizing the truth of our exodus before you could act in time. Know how a simple gnome woman fooled the mighty Emperor. + +And if by some bizarre twist that you actually did have genuine feelings of love for me in that black heart of yours, then my revenge is even sweeter. Live with a broken heart, and may it hurt as much as all the pain you’ve ever inflicted onto others. + +You will also find all the worthless letters you wrote to me. Take them back, and keep them as a reminder of your utter failure. + +Tilda Zookwinkle: Proud gnome woman + +Wow. This letter isn’t even addressed to you and you can feel the viciousness dripping from it. Good enough to rival the cruel ruthlessness of a svelk you think. It’s very apparent now why Casimir hated gnomes so much. You always knew it had to be more than what he told you. + +She obviously was still having an effect on him for centuries as he kept his grudge and the letters rather than destroying them. Makes you think back to when he was trying to tell you that he knew about love and loss and how he was trying to guide you away from such things. + +Of course you know the main reason was due to his own agenda, but now upon reading these letters, you can’t help but think a small portion was truthful and him speaking from this experience. + +Casimir certainly kept his promise in one of his letters though; he did say Tilda would always be a major factor in his future goals. While Tilda may have gotten a little revenge, she didn’t exactly do her people any favors given what happened. + +You wonder if she knew what lengths Casimir would ultimately go to utterly destroy her people, would she have done it anyway?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Jacob and you enter your room. Jacob looks almost as bad as the Emperor once did. He hasn’t been the same since Roldan died, but he’s also been overworked since the Emperor has been sick. The man is in his late sixties, but nowadays he looks more like he’s in his late eighties. The stress has been taking a toll. + +“Jacob, I really hope this is important because I’ve got a lot going through my mind right now.” You say. +“I’m sure you do, but you’ll have a lot more after you hear what I have to say. Though after you hear it you might just decide to kill me instead, but that’s a risk I’ll just have to take.” +“Can’t be anything worse than anything I haven’t thought myself today.” You say. +“I highly doubt that, but I just want you to at least hear me out before you make a decision.” + +You sit down and nod telling Jacob to go ahead. + +“Okay. I know you just came from a meeting with the Emperor and his revitalized condition. I’m also guessing he told you to that he wants you to go back home with him.” +“Yes.” You reply. +“Do you know where his original home is?” +“He said it was a very far away island that couldn’t even be reached by a boat. That was about it.” +“Figures he’d be cryptic. His home is Mortos, an island of necromancers. It’s not a well-known place to the average person. Most that have heard of it just believe it’s a myth, but it exists.” +“What?” +“The Emperor is a necromancer. I mean it makes sense doesn’t it? How else would he have the knowledge to extend his life for so long?” +“Okay, so what?” +“You are aware of what necromancers do don’t you?” +“I’m aware of the branch of magic. Most just believe it’s about raising the dead, but it deals with life force in general. Healing mages use it all time at a cost of course. Only the strongest of wizards can use the art, let alone master it. Hence why there aren’t many around and why stories about necromancers creeping about graveyards raising armies of undead horrors are mostly reserved for parents trying to scare their children.” You say. + +Jacob gets a little frustrated at your apathy at this revelation. + +“Perhaps I’m not making myself clear enough…the Emperor is a necromancer. Roldan was KILLED by a revenant. YOUR WIFE was KILLED by a revenant.” + +That got your attention. You stand up and Jacob can’t help but step back even though he knows you’d easily catch him if he tried to run. + +“You’re treading on very thin ice Jacob.” +“Believe me I’m well aware.” +“Then you must also be aware that you sound crazier than Marik right now. What you’re implying doesn’t even make sense.” +“Why not? It does if you really think about it.” +“Semra was responsible for my wife’s death and Roldan’s death! She is also a powerful sorceress that is more than capable of raising the dead!” +“Yes, and she’s also a perfect patsy for your wrath. The Emperor wanted you to think it was her, but it wasn’t. Think man, even if she did have your wife killed why would she bother having Roldan killed? She had no grudge. There was no profit in it. Chaos for the sake of chaos? Not Semra’s style and you know it. That woman didn’t do anything without purpose even if she was chaotic about it at times. Besides if she REALLY wanted to kill your wife, she would’ve just done it herself.” + +You think back to when Alison told you she met Semra face to face and entertain Jacob’s theory. + +“Even if Semra wasn’t responsible, why would the Emperor have Roldan and Alison killed?” +“Because of you. It’s all because of you.” +“Me? How? Why?” +“(Sigh) It’s a very long and complex plot. I’ve only been piecing some of it together myself. I’ll try to tell you what I know.” + +Jacob starts off by explaining that it all goes back to your birth and the Eternal Project. You and all of your “siblings” were picked for it for a reason. You weren’t just to become super soldiers for the Empire. One of you was going to be chosen to be the new vessel for the Emperor, but only if that Eternal showed promise. Apparently you did. Jacob explains that while the chosen needed to be a great warrior with magical skill and be put to the test, the Emperor didn’t want to risk your life excessively, hence why he initially wanted to keep you out of very heavy fighting. Also he didn’t want any of the potential vessels to complicate things by potentially producing offspring so sterility was something that ensured during your “enhancement” period as a baby. + +You were a perfect soldier that was utterly loyal, so much so that you saw the Emperor as your father. Then Alison came along. Alison was the only other person that you had a close relationship with and that distracted you from your duty. Or more precisely, it made your loyalties potentially divided. The Emperor couldn’t take a chance with another person turning your devotion elsewhere or corrupting his influence over you so she had to die. + +The assassination of Roldan was just a simple matter of taking out a potential future rival. Roldan’s fame was at least as much as your own, and he was probably better liked. Even if Roldan was loyal, the Emperor couldn’t take a chance of another potential domestic rebellion with a charismatic leader. Jacob also believes that the Emperor also just did it out of mean spiritedness since he knew how proud Jacob was of Roldan. + +On top of everything else he could lay all the blame on Semra. + +Jacob isn’t sure exactly how the Emperor plans to transfer himself into your body, but given that it involves a trip to the island of Mortos, he’s sure it can’t be good and that you as a person will cease to be so that the Emperor can continue his immortal reign. + +While this is all very interesting from a conspiracy point of view, you aren’t convinced. + +“So are you seriously telling me the Emperor has been molding me into some container that is to be filled? You’re telling me that this man who I see as my father and treats me as his son has been lying to me from the beginning about everything? Even if this were the case and I highly doubt it is, HOW do you know all this? What evidence do you have?” + +Jacob at this point is extremely nervous. + +“I…I have no hard evidence. I mean I’ve seen a few private writings, but I dared not to take them.” +“So what you’re telling me is that you’ve been snooping into the Emperor’s privacy and can’t even back up your accusations.” +“No! I also have another person who can back up these facts! She…” + +You stop Jacob. + +“She? Jacob, I really hope you aren’t talking about who I think you’re talking about.” + +Jacob ignores your warning and blurts out what he has to say as quickly as he can. + +“Look, I pieced together some of the assassination myself, but Semra told me about the true purpose of the Eternal Project. But this isn’t about just you. This is about a potential danger of world proportions! The Emperor isn’t just a ruler seeking everlasting life; Semra says he has a more sinister agenda that he’s been planning for centuries and given that I’ve recently learned his original homeland is Mortos I’m inclined to believe her.” +“Believe Semra? Really? Then you’re a damn fool along with being a traitor! Just how long have you been in contact with Semra? WHERE IS SHE?!” you ask and slam Jacob against the wall. + +“Please…I’m telling you the truth! I’m no traitor! I’m loyal to the Empire first and foremost and I see the Emperor’s actions as something that will harm it in the long run! The Emperor needs to be stopped, whatever it is he has planned. You can’t go to Mortos with him! You have to kill him!” +“I’ll kill YOU for speaking such treason!” and begin squeezing Jacob’s neck. + +“(Sigh) I told you this wasn’t going to work Jacob. He’s too hopelessly brainwashed to listen. Not even the death of his beloved Alison will cause him to believe that the Emperor means him ill. I guess I should’ve just killed him long ago, but as they say love makes you do stupid things.” + +You turn around and see Semra. You don’t think, you just lunge, only to pass through Semra and crash into some furniture. Its not really Semra, its just a magic projection of some sort. + +“I suppose I should be flattered that you still want to get your hands on me.” Semra remarks. +“After I’m done killing Jacob, I’m going to find and kill you, bitch.” You say getting back up. +“I’m sure, but I don’t have much time so I’m going to make this brief. Unlike our sniveling associate over there, I’m not going to appeal to your logic or reason, because its always been hampered by your warped sense of mindless duty. I’m going to appeal to your sense of desire and survival, because despite your warped sense of mindless duty, you can’t suppress those.” + +You draw your weapon and walk past Semra’s image to butcher Jacob who pleads with you to spare his life. + +“Okay here it is, you WANT to kill the Emperor. You WANT to rule the Empire. Don’t tell me you haven’t thought about it. I know your desires better than anyone else. Even if the Emperor isn’t planning on taking your body as his own and is going to just rejuvenate himself in some other way, why would you still want that? Isn’t it time for him to accept his demise and step aside for someone else? Who better than you? Are you truly happy just surviving and serving like a drone or are you going to finally step up and take what is rightfully yours? You’ve already had a major hand in expanding the Empire and holding it together, why not take the next natural step?” + +You stop yourself from killing Jacob and turn back to Semra. + +“You don’t have to like me, you don’t have to believe me, just listen to me lover. I’ve always known what’s best for you. Kill the Emperor now while he’s at his weakest, there has never been a better time. You were born to rule. Its in your blood, its in your heart, its in your soul. Seize your potential and do what’s meant to be.” Semra says. + +With Jacob’s damning accusations and Semra’s words appealing to your ambitious aspirations, you now don’t know what to do. Should you dismiss everything they say as lies and stay loyal or should you not take any chances with your own survival and kill the Emperor regardless of reasons? +> Rule +Click. + +That’s the sound of everything in your head finally coming together. + +Jacob’s right. + +Semra’s right. + +YOU’RE right. + +The Emperor needs to die and at this point the reasons are overwhelming and you can’t deny it any longer. You lower your sword causing Jacob to breathe a sigh of relief. + +“Okay…so the Emperor needs to die. Any advice on how I should accomplish this task, because I’m fairly certain it’s not going to just be a matter of storming in and chopping his head off.” You ask Semra who is surprised by your response. +“Semra? You listening?” you repeat. +“Yeah…I just…I didn’t actually think you’d listen to me…I’m glad you finally have though. Yes, you’re right of course it won’t be just a matter of chopping his head off, he’ll most likely detect your intent as soon as you enter his chambers. At which point he’d melt your brain with just a thought and your mind shield spells wouldn’t even help you. Fortunately you will have me along to help you in this task. He can’t do that little trick on me, svelk brains work differently.” +“Don’t I know it.” You mumble. “I still don’t see how that is going to help me though.” +“Easy, I’m going to shield you by joining our minds together. It’ll come in handy during the fight as well since we’ll be more in sync with our attacks…” + +You immediately interrupt. + +“Wait a minute, I don’t know about this plan. Linking our minds and you having access to mine? That sounds like I’d be at your complete mercy.” +“(Sigh) You’ve trusted me this far, why not a little further? You already know I’ve been trying to help you from the start. Besides, we’ve done this to a minor degree already when we were destroying gnome souls in Gnome’s Home. Also it works both ways you know. You’d have access to my mind as well.” +“You make that sound like that’s a good thing.” +“Oh trust me lover, it’ll be a very good thing. Just think our minds in harmony and knowing each other greater than we could ever express in words. We’d have a level of intimacy that most beings can’t even comprehend. Doesn’t that sound just so… invigorating?” +“It sounds like something all right. Look, I don’t know if I’m going for this. Maybe I’ll just take my chances with getting my brain melted.” +“I highly suggest you don’t. I know you think you are strong of mind, but this is something you are not going to have any defense for without my help. I’m going to meet you down in the hall just before you enter the Emperor’s chambers. I suggest you reconsider my generous offer by the time you get there.” + +At this point Semra’s image disappears and its just you and Jacob left in the room. He’s still very nervous. + +“Jacob, you can stop shaking I’m not going to kill you. In fact since you’re partly responsible for this power grab in process, what are you going to be doing?” +“Me? I don’t know. I wouldn’t be much good in a fight as you well know. I guess I’ll be packing a few bags just in case I need to make a hasty getaway, not that it’ll probably do me much good.” +“Way to have confidence in me, Jacob.” +“I do have confidence, but I have to maintain a pragmatic attitude too. You understand.” +“Yeah, I get it…so what about Semra? You think I should let her invade my head?” +“You’re asking me?” +“Sure, why not? You and her have been plotting this whole thing. You obviously trusted her enough to work up the courage to try to bring me into this. So what’s your opinion?” +“I don’t know. And I’m not saying that to be evasive or frustrating, I really don’t know. I mean if you were anyone else I’d say go for it because you wouldn’t have anything to lose because quite frankly I don’t think anyone BUT you would have a chance of coming out of this alive.” +“But…?” +“But since you DO have a chance of surviving this, who knows what Semra might pull after the Emperor is dead? And if she can get in your head…well…I just don’t know.” +“Great.” +“But didn’t she say you’d be in hers as well? Maybe she wouldn’t try anything, because she’d be just as vulnerable.” +“So she says…shit, just wish this was clear cut. You know? This isn’t where I envisioned where my life was heading. In fact I never envisioned this.” +“I don’t think any of us did, but here we are never the less. The only other thing I can tell you is given how obsessed she is with you, she probably won’t kill you.” +“There are things worse than death, Jacob. (Sigh) I guess I’ll figure it out soon.” You reply and turn to leave before you do though, Jacob calls out to you. + +“Just in case we don’t get to speak again…I just want to say thank you for the times you helped me out.” +“Just doing my part in serving the Empire.” You say and leave. + +“Serving the Empire.” You chuckle at that dark joke. You’re about to try to kill the man who created it. You might be inclined to rationalize such an act by thinking you’re serving the Empire by killing a leader that is no longer good at ruling it. + +Of course that would be complete bullshit. You’re killing the Emperor for your own personal reasons first and foremost. Some of that is your own desire for power, but a lot of it is for revenge of Alison’s murder. In fact the more you think about it, the angrier you get and that’s good, because it’s keeping out the fear you do have about facing the Emperor. + +Eventually you reach the large hall before the Emperor’s chambers and just as she promised, Semra is there waiting. + +“What took you so long lover? The Emperor is probably aware I’m here by now and possibly even suspecting something is amiss with you as well.” +“What’s the difference? You said he’d know I was going to kill him as soon as I enter the chambers.” +“I suppose so, but I was at least hoping that maybe we’d have a slight chance at a surprise attack. Those are always the most efficient. Killing your enemy before they even get a chance to strike. Less messy, don’t you agree?” +“Maybe, but personally I don’t mind getting messy.” +“Mmmm, yes I imagine you don’t. Anyway come to me so we can merge our minds and get this task underway.” + +You cautiously step towards Semra who gives a faint smile as you do so. Her attempts at being friendly and inviting are probably more disturbing to you than when she used to beat and verbally abuse you. When you get within range, her arms reach out and around you. + +“Hey, what are you doing?!” you ask backing up. +“Will you relax? This is part of the spell. We need to be looking at each other and focusing. Now here, just put your hands around me like this…” Semra says and starts to position your hands though you can’t help but notice she initially positioned your hands so they were temporarily on her ass before she slowly moved them up around her waist. Her hands find their way on your shoulders and at this point you feel like you’re in a compromising embrace rather than preparing for some spell. + +“Now stare into my eyes and focus.” Semra remarks as her own face is only a few inches away from your own. Your eyes don’t immediately focus on her eyes though, you stare at her full blood red lips. You think about how you want to press your own lips against hers. + +And then she suddenly does and your mind goes to another place. + +You see what’s in Semra’s mind or at least a glimpse of it. Images are coming at you so fast you can’t make out all of it, but you see a mixture of the horrifying and impressive at the same time. + +You see what must’ve been during the time of when the svelk ruled. Everything is very regal and elegant looking, though much like the svelk themselves, it radiates a certain coldness. You also see the svelk treating their subjects (Most of which are of races you’ve never even seen before) worse than the Empire ever could. They also have greater control too thanks to their magic. + +What you aren’t seeing is any images of Semra herself and you’re even sensing that she’s experiencing pain during this process. Semra is obviously blocking some of her more private thoughts. She’s showing you a general history of her life, yet somehow only telling you half the story. Meanwhile she’s probably trying to scour through your mind of everything. + +With this moment of clarity during the spell, you wonder if you shouldn’t break off this link given that she’s intending this to be a one-way affair. She might have ill intent for you once this is over after all. +> Break the link +Something about this is suspicious and you aren’t risking it. You push yourself away from Semra. + +“What are you doing?! I’m not done yet!” Semra exclaims. +“Well I am. I’m not going to be put in a position where you can access my brain.” +“You damn well better, because when the Emperor has access to it, he’s not going to be nice about it like me.” +“Look, let’s just get this over with.” You say. + +Semra wants to argue more, but she sees she isn’t going to convince you. + +“Fine.” She replies. + +After speaking the password, the door opens and you both enter the Emperor’s chambers. You cast your magical shield spells and distance yourself from Semra. Almost immediately you hear the voice of the Emperor, though he hasn’t made an appearance yet. + +“So it’s come to this has it? After all I’ve done for you. After all I’ve given you. You turn traitor for a piece of svelk tail?” + +The Emperor steps out from his bedroom. + +“Son, I am disappointed.” He says and then just stares immediately in your direction. You feel a slight pain in your head, which then gets much worse nearly immediately. + +Semra casts a spray of acid, and while it sizzles and melts objects within the designated direction, the Emperor’s own defenses absorb it. Meanwhile you’re collapsing on the floor clutching your head in extreme pain. + +You bleed from your nose, from your ears and finally your eyes. Your death screams are ignored as Semra attempts to defend herself against the Emperor’s overwhelming lightning blasts. + +Your brain liquefies inside your skull and you are no longer a factor in this attempted grab for the throne.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Click. + +That’s the sound of everything in your head finally coming together. + +Jacob’s right. + +Semra’s right. + +YOU’RE right. + +The Emperor needs to die and at this point the reasons are overwhelming and you can’t deny it any longer. You lower your sword causing Jacob to breathe a sigh of relief. + +“Okay…so the Emperor needs to die. Any advice on how I should accomplish this task, because I’m fairly certain it’s not going to just be a matter of storming in and chopping his head off.” You ask Semra who is surprised by your response. +“Semra? You listening?” you repeat. +“Yeah…I just…I didn’t actually think you’d listen to me…I’m glad you finally have though. Yes, you’re right of course it won’t be just a matter of chopping his head off, he’ll most likely detect your intent as soon as you enter his chambers. At which point he’d melt your brain with just a thought and your mind shield spells wouldn’t even help you. Fortunately you will have me along to help you in this task. He can’t do that little trick on me, svelk brains work differently.” +“Don’t I know it.” You mumble. “I still don’t see how that is going to help me though.” +“Easy, I’m going to shield you by joining our minds together. It’ll come in handy during the fight as well since we’ll be more in sync with our attacks…” + +You immediately interrupt. + +“Wait a minute, I don’t know about this plan. Linking our minds and you having access to mine? That sounds like I’d be at your complete mercy.” +“(Sigh) You’ve trusted me this far, why not a little further? You already know I’ve been trying to help you from the start. Besides, we’ve done this to a minor degree already when we were destroying gnome souls in Gnome’s Home. Also it works both ways you know. You’d have access to my mind as well.” +“You make that sound like that’s a good thing.” +“Oh trust me lover, it’ll be a very good thing. Just think our minds in harmony and knowing each other greater than we could ever express in words. We’d have a level of intimacy that most beings can’t even comprehend. Doesn’t that sound just so… invigorating?” +“It sounds like something all right. Look, I don’t know if I’m going for this. Maybe I’ll just take my chances with getting my brain melted.” +“I highly suggest you don’t. I know you think you are strong of mind, but this is something you are not going to have any defense for without my help. I’m going to meet you down in the hall just before you enter the Emperor’s chambers. I suggest you reconsider my generous offer by the time you get there.” + +At this point Semra’s image disappears and its just you and Jacob left in the room. He’s still very nervous. + +“Jacob, you can stop shaking I’m not going to kill you. In fact since you’re partly responsible for this power grab in process, what are you going to be doing?” +“Me? I don’t know. I wouldn’t be much good in a fight as you well know. I guess I’ll be packing a few bags just in case I need to make a hasty getaway, not that it’ll probably do me much good.” +“Way to have confidence in me, Jacob.” +“I do have confidence, but I have to maintain a pragmatic attitude too. You understand.” +“Yeah, I get it…so what about Semra? You think I should let her invade my head?” +“You’re asking me?” +“Sure, why not? You and her have been plotting this whole thing. You obviously trusted her enough to work up the courage to try to bring me into this. So what’s your opinion?” +“I don’t know. And I’m not saying that to be evasive or frustrating, I really don’t know. I mean if you were anyone else I’d say go for it because you wouldn’t have anything to lose because quite frankly I don’t think anyone BUT you would have a chance of coming out of this alive.” +“But…?” +“But since you DO have a chance of surviving this, who knows what Semra might pull after the Emperor is dead? And if she can get in your head…well…I just don’t know.” +“Great.” +“But didn’t she say you’d be in hers as well? Maybe she wouldn’t try anything, because she’d be just as vulnerable.” +“So she says…shit, just wish this was clear cut. You know? This isn’t where I envisioned where my life was heading. In fact I never envisioned this.” +“I don’t think any of us did, but here we are never the less. The only other thing I can tell you is given how obsessed she is with you, she probably won’t kill you.” +“There are things worse than death, Jacob. (Sigh) I guess I’ll figure it out soon.” You reply and turn to leave before you do though, Jacob calls out to you. + +“Just in case we don’t get to speak again…I just want to say thank you for the times you helped me out.” +“Just doing my part in serving the Empire.” You say and leave. + +“Serving the Empire.” You chuckle at that dark joke. You’re about to try to kill the man who created it. You might be inclined to rationalize such an act by thinking you’re serving the Empire by killing a leader that is no longer good at ruling it. + +Of course that would be complete bullshit. You’re killing the Emperor for your own personal reasons first and foremost. Some of that is your own desire for power, but a lot of it is for revenge of Alison’s murder. In fact the more you think about it, the angrier you get and that’s good, because it’s keeping out the fear you do have about facing the Emperor. + +Eventually you reach the large hall before the Emperor’s chambers and just as she promised, Semra is there waiting. + +“What took you so long lover? The Emperor is probably aware I’m here by now and possibly even suspecting something is amiss with you as well.” +“What’s the difference? You said he’d know I was going to kill him as soon as I enter the chambers.” +“I suppose so, but I was at least hoping that maybe we’d have a slight chance at a surprise attack. Those are always the most efficient. Killing your enemy before they even get a chance to strike. Less messy, don’t you agree?” +“Maybe, but personally I don’t mind getting messy.” +“Mmmm, yes I imagine you don’t. Anyway come to me so we can merge our minds and get this task underway.” + +You cautiously step towards Semra who gives a faint smile as you do so. Her attempts at being friendly and inviting are probably more disturbing to you than when she used to beat and verbally abuse you. When you get within range, her arms reach out and around you. + +“Hey, what are you doing?!” you ask backing up. +“Will you relax? This is part of the spell. We need to be looking at each other and focusing. Now here, just put your hands around me like this…” Semra says and starts to position your hands though you can’t help but notice she initially positioned your hands so they were temporarily on her ass before she slowly moved them up around her waist. Her hands find their way on your shoulders and at this point you feel like you’re in a compromising embrace rather than preparing for some spell. + +“Now stare into my eyes and focus.” Semra remarks as her own face is only a few inches away from your own. Your eyes don’t immediately focus on her eyes though, you stare at her full blood red lips. You think about how you want to press your own lips against hers. + +And then she suddenly does and your mind goes to another place. + +You see what’s in Semra’s mind or at least a glimpse of it. Images are coming at you so fast you can’t make out all of it, but you see a mixture of the horrifying and impressive at the same time. + +You see what must’ve been during the time of when the svelk ruled. Everything is very regal and elegant looking, though much like the svelk themselves, it radiates a certain coldness. You also see the svelk treating their subjects (Most of which are of races you’ve never even seen before) worse than the Empire ever could. They also have greater control too thanks to their magic. + +What you aren’t seeing is any images of Semra herself and you’re even sensing that she’s experiencing pain during this process. Semra is obviously blocking some of her more private thoughts. She’s showing you a general history of her life, yet somehow only telling you half the story. Meanwhile she’s probably trying to scour through your mind of everything. + +With this moment of clarity during the spell, you wonder if you shouldn’t break off this link given that she’s intending this to be a one-way affair. She might have ill intent for you once this is over after all. +> Keep focused +In for a silver, in for a sack as they say. If this spell is going to protect you from the Emperor, you’d best stick with it and worry about Semra’s intentions later. Though at this point you don’t even feel any pain on your side of things, but maybe that’s because you aren’t trying to hide anything from her. + +Your life has more or less always been an open book. You’ve never really hidden anything because you’ve usually come clean eventually anyway. You’re not even going to be hiding your desires to kill the Emperor pretty soon. If Semra’s hoping to learn something to use against you, she’s in for disappointment. + +She already knows most of your combat techniques having taught most of them to you. She already knows your mindset well enough that she has more influence over you than you’d like. She already is well aware of your feelings towards her. There is quite literally nothing she is going to find out that won’t give her any advantage that she doesn’t already have. + +Yet you can sense she STILL wants more, its almost as if she’s insecure about not having total control over you. You sense a lot of that actually. She can’t comprehend why you can have a sexual desire for her, yet not desire her in the way you did with Alison. She’s at a loss on what to do about it. And that confusion is a big ball of anger, frustration and pain. + +Suddenly you see the image of a young svelk girl. You aren’t sure how old, but by human standards she would definitely be considered a child. It’s Semra and she is holding the hand of an adult male svelk though you can never quite make out his face. + +They are both in a city where a large crowd of svelk are gathered having a good time throwing what looks to be sveld babies against a nearby wall which has a big target on it. Semra looks very happy and cheers whenever one splats into a bloody mess in the center. + +It would seem that Semra’s entertainment preferences didn’t change much for her. Several images of her enjoying similar activities with the same adult male flood your mind. You can only guess that the adult male might be her father, but Semra must be blocking you from confirming that. + +In any case, the idea that she was once a child is bizarre, but then everyone starts as one at some point right? She had a twisted childhood to be sure, but she had more of a childhood than you ever did. + +Just as think you’re starting to see more images of a personal nature, the contact is broken off and Semra pushes you away. + +“There. It’s done. Let’s get this over with.” She remarks while rubbing the sides of her head. She also starts rubbing her eyes and is sniffling a bit. + +You’re silent for a moment, just staring at her. You know that she must be hiding loads of whatever unhappy memories she does have. And she certainly can’t have you seeing them, she can’t trust you enough to believe you wouldn’t mock her in some way or exploit a weakness. + +“WHAT?!” she shouts when she notices you staring. +“Nothing. Keep your secrets. Like you said, let’s get this over with.” + +As you make your way to the door to the Emperor’s chamber, you do feel the connection of your mind to Semra’s. Its not like you can read her thoughts, but its rather a sixth sense kind of feeling. You’re curious how this will play out during battle. + +After speaking the password, the door opens and you both enter the Emperor’s chambers. You look at each other, simultaneously cast your magical shield spells and spread out. Almost immediately you hear the voice of the Emperor, though he hasn’t made an appearance yet. + +“So it’s come to this has it? After all I’ve done for you. After all I’ve given you. You turn traitor for a piece of svelk tail?” + +The Emperor steps out from his bedroom. + +“Son, I am disappointed.” He says and then just stares immediately in your direction. You feel a slight pain in your head, but its muted. Semra’s shielding spell must be working. + +The Emperor looks genuinely shocked. Its an expression you don’t think you’ve ever seen before on him. + +“You…you let this…creature into your mind?! Have you gone mad?!” +“Probably.” You remark and cast a lightning blast at the Emperor, but he easily deflects it back at you causing it to hit your force shield and knocking you to the floor. + +Semra casts a spray of acid, and while it sizzles and melts objects within the designated direction, the Emperor’s own defenses absorb it. Realizing he can’t just explode your brain, he casts a spell, which starts to turn the room very cold. You’re reminded of the time you cast this spell on Cyrus’ crew and you immediately cast a ring of fire around yourself in the hopes the heat will be enough to keep you from freezing. You follow up with a volley of small fireballs, which set the many bookshelves in the room ablaze. + +“You’ve made a dire mistake son, trusting this svelk whore. Even if you could defeat me, do you really think she’d allow you to live? She’s lying to you son. She always has and I thought you were stronger than that.” The Emperor remarks as sheets of ice cover the room extinguishing some of the flames. +“And you weren’t lying to me?! You had Alison murdered and you planned to kill me as well!” you shout back as you release your feet from the ice that has managed to encase around them. + +The Emperor sends a flash of light that blinds you and Semra. You stumble around to the left since you remember there being a solid stone table you can take cover behind. + +“(Sigh) Even if any of that was true my son, what of it? I was your father! Your master! Your life was mine to do with as I saw fit! Of course none it matters now. You’ve decided to stand against me and now your life is most certainly mine to take.” You hear the Emperor say and then suddenly hear loud lighting blast followed by a yelp sound to your far right. Must be Semra, but you’re still half blind from that flash of light. + +“Ha ha! Not as strong as we thought eh Semra? You always were an overconfident bitch. Won’t be long before I break through your pathetic force shield.” + +Your eyes clear up enough and see Semra across the room struggling to maintain her shield from a steady blast of lightning unleashed by the Emperor. Seeing that trading magic isn’t going to work, you put up your own shield and try to make your way over to the Emperor to just butcher him, but the combination of your hampered eyesight and icy floor are enough to slow you down. + +“Ever the warrior aren’t we son? Here, play with these!” the Emperor shouts and stops his attack on Semra, waves his hands and suddenly five hovering undead figures appear. You cast an enchantment spell on your sword and press forward to battle. Meanwhile Semra has taken advantage of her second wind and cast a telekinesis spell throwing a table directly into the Emperor. She follows this up with smacking him with several other smaller objects. He falls to the floor and re-establishes his own magic shield. + +“Keep up the pressure!” Semra shouts. + +You’d love to, but right now you’re trying to destroy the undead creatures in from of you. While you’ve never faced such things before, you keep your cool and successfully cut down three of them. + +“You fools know nothing of the power you face! Now face the true supremacy of a necromancer!” the Emperor shouts and the entire room gets even colder, but this isn’t even like the cold of ice or snow, this is something unnatural. You start to feel the tips of your fingers go numb and feel your energy starting to be drained. It’s like when Cyrus touched you, but this is all around you. + +You nearly get your head cleaved in by one of the wraiths as you start feel dizzy. You dodge the attack and slash the thing in two. The last one is taken down with a blast of fire from Semra who you sense is feeling the affects of the Emperor’s magic too. + +You stagger and prop yourself up on a burned lab desk. The Emperor stands only a few feet away, but he seems so far for you to do anything. You look over and see Semra staggers towards him, but collapses and begins screaming. You aren’t sure what the Emperor’s doing, but his eyes are glowing red. + +“A scared little girl still crying about her lost birthright. That’s all you are and all you ever will be. You svelk think you know about pain and death, but you know nothing! I’ll show you true pain and soon I’ll show you death and the endless torture that can come after it!” + +Semra’s confidence that the Emperor couldn’t do anything to her mind because of her race has proven false. While he’s not exploding her brain you do sense he’s creating some sort of waking nightmare in her mind. She’s literally crying and begging for him to stop, she even looks over to you reaching out with both hands telling you she’s sorry. She pleads with you to help her and that she needs your strength. + +You never thought you’d ever feel a slight twinge of sympathy for her. + +In any event, you’re not exactly doing so well yourself. You aren’t even sure if you could help Semra even if you wanted to given how weak you feel. Though your chances of making a lunging attack to kill the Emperor are equally as slim. +> Help Semra +Under any other circumstances you’d probably be rejoicing in Semra’s misery, but on this she is your ally and as your ally you’re not going to leave her in the lurch. + +With your remaining strength you stumble over to Semra and then promptly collapse near her and grab her hand. This act causes the Emperor to laugh. + +“Ha ha ha ha! What would your beloved Alison say if she saw you rolling on the floor with your svelk harlot? Let’s ask her!” the Emperor says and then another ghost appears. It’s Alison. + +“I see that you’ve already forgotten me and found comfort in the arms of Semra. Now you and her make your grab for power. Why was I not worthy enough for your plan to kill the Emperor? Did you always feel that I was so weak and you ultimately held no respect for my skills?” the undead parody of Alison remarks. + +“No. No. No. I’m not seeing this and even if I am, this isn’t Alison. She wouldn’t say such things. Away spirit, I will not play your games!” you shout. + +“Now you dismiss me in death? I have returned and you have no loving words? You do not even make the attempt? It’s the least you could do for your failure to SAVE MY LIFE!” Alison says and she begins to utter an unearthly wail. It’s horrible and despite your best efforts, it’s starting to demoralize you. A depression begins to set in, followed by guilt, but you can’t let it get to you, because you’re too busy trying to shake Semra out of her own hell. + +“Semra! Concentrate! You are Semra D’vessa! Mistress of torture and pain! You are the scourge of the lesser born and one of the greatest examples of your superior race! You don’t fear anything! You have no frailties for such things are the attributes of the weak! You have my hand! You have my strength, you…” + +You breathe in and exhale hard. You never thought you’d say this, but if it’ll help… + +“…have my love. Always and forever.” You say. + +This last declaration causes her to snap out of her nightmare and look over at you. She breaks free of her nightmare. Meanwhile the ghostly abomination of Alison shrieks even louder at your statement before completely dissipating. Apparently your complete disregard of your true feelings for your late wife was enough to destroy it. + +You and Semra begin to recover from your ordeal and get up, but this is followed by the pair of you being hit by some sort of black ray. Semra tries to cast a spell, but she’s still too weak. + +You look up at the Emperor who is now standing over both of you still hitting you with the black ray. He doesn’t look young at all anymore. He doesn’t even look like how did when he was sick. He’s nearly skeletal looking. It’s obvious this battle has taken its toll on him, but it doesn’t matter because he’s still got more fight in him than either of you. + +“Now look at the pair of you. On the floor writhing like the maggots you truly are. You’ve both set my plans back severely, but you’ll not stop me. The pair of you will supply me with enough energy to do what I need to do! Argh!” + +You stab the Emperor in the foot with your dagger; unfortunately it doesn’t distract or give you any breathing space and instead kicks your hand away. He increases the intensity of the ray on you and Semra. + +“BASTARD! YOU THINK YOUR PATHETIC WEAPONS CAN STOP ME? I AM CASIMIR OF MORTOS! EMPEROR! NECROMANCER! RULER OF THE…” + +“You’re an asshole, Casimir.” Jacob remarks who stands in the entry way of the chamber and the shot from his flintlock breaches the chest of the Emperor who watches it explode in a gout of blood before his eyes. He falls backwards to the floor struggling to breathe. + +“No…not…(wheeze) like this…taken down…by a (cough) fucking bean counter…(wheeze)…” the Emperor gasps and coughing up blood. + +You get up as fast you’re able, retrieve your dagger from the floor and draw your sword to finish off the Emperor. Semra is still trying to gather her own strength. + +You stare down at the Emperor who is already on his way to death, but intend to quicken that journey. You hold the sword to his throat and stare him in the eyes. + +“Do it then… (cough) finish me off…but know this son…your will not get to enjoy your victory. (wheeze) You’ve won…nothing.” + +You don’t even reply you just press the sword through his throat causing him to gurgle one last time and twitch slightly before he dies. It’s over at last. + +Or at least you thought it was. + +No sooner have you turned around to check on your allies, when Jacob and Semra shout at you to watch out. + +You turn around just into time to see the corpse of the Emperor lift up off the ground glowing a dark red color. His eyes are rolled up into his head and his mouth drops open and a deep voice emanates from it even though it isn’t moving. + +“THIS EMPIRE WILL DIE WITH ME AS WILL ALL WHO DWELL WITHIN IT. THIS IS MY FINAL CURSE FOR YOUR TREACHERY.” The corpse says and then it disintegrates before your eyes. + +A great rumbling starts and parts of the ceiling start collapsing along with the floor starting to crack and break. + +“You gotta be kidding me…” you remark. +“Come on we need to get the hell out of here!” Jacob exclaims. + +Jacob, Semra, and you immediately run out of the Emperor’s chambers trying to avoid falling debris and big holes in the floor at the same time. Jacob manages to reach the stairs just in time for them to start crumbling. + +“Come on, quickly before…” +“JACOB ABOVE YOU!” you shout, but it’s too late. Jacob is struck by a large piece of concrete followed by an even bigger piece, which crushes him completely. It also blocks off your only escape. + +“Shit! Fuck! Damn it!” you curse. “Semra you can move those large slabs of stone if I join my magic with yours can’t you?” +“Not in my current drained state and not fast enough even with your help.” Semra remarks. +“Shields! We still got enough to do that!” you say. +“We’re going to have an entire palace and possibly even a whole city collapsing in on our heads. Even if our magic was strong enough to deflect such massive weight, we still have the problem of being buried alive. We’d just suffocate instead of being crushed.” + +The rumbles and shakes continue to get worse and knock you and Semra to the floor. You both try to find a spot where the falling debris isn’t life threatening. Things are looking mighty bleak. + +“I don’t believe it. Here I was worrying about you betraying me, but instead I’m going to die from a stupid final curse!” +“Don’t be so sure, there’s still time for me to betray you.” + +Normally you wouldn’t laugh, but in this hopeless situation you can’t help but to do so. + +“Heh, well hurry it up then because the rocks are going to get us both soon. This is a hell of way to die, I almost would’ve rather had the Emperor kill me. At least there would’ve been a certain honor in that.” +“What honor? You were a traitor. He probably would’ve had your name stricken from all records.” Semra says. +“Yeah…well at least it would’ve been better than being buried and crushed.” + +Semra doesn’t reply to that, but what she does instead is ask you a question. + +“Since we don’t have much time left, I have to ask you…did you mean it?” + +Thanks your mind merge, you already know what she’s asking with that question. You also know you can’t lie to her because she’ll sense that immediately. However, you also sense it doesn’t matter if you do. + +“Sure. Why not?” you say with a smile. Semra returns the smile and gives you a kiss on the cheek. + +“No, you didn’t, but maybe you will for this.” She whispers in your ear. You give her strange look when she says this as she stands up. She pulls a ring out of a small bag from around her waist and puts it on. + +“Hey wait, what are you doing…” you ask and then you’re suddenly struck with a paralysis from the ring and then a strange purple field envelops you. You see everything going on, but are unable to do anything about it. A sizable rock even hits you, but you feel nothing. The field is protecting you. + +“Mommy loves you…always and forever. Remember this.” You hear Semra say before sound becomes muted completely and your vision goes completely black. You are able to breathe normally, but you don’t see how you can survive. You’d probably panic a lot more if a strong wave of sleep didn’t suddenly take you. + +As the continuous falling rubble buries you, you sleep. + +You sleep for a very long time. +> Years pass... +Chapter 3C1: Relic + + +Year ??? + +“What the hell is that thing?” +“I dunno, it’s about time we found something worthwhile in this old rubble though, because this whole expedition has been pretty pointless. Looks like some sort of weird magic shell. It also looks like something is inside, guess we’ll finally get to use this old dispel staff after all.” +“Hey wait! We don’t know what’s in there!” + +… + +“Shit! It’s a body!” +“Yeah. Damn, I was hoping it was treasure.” +“You think he’s dead?” +“Well he ain’t moving is he? Probably been here for who know how long, but I assume the shell preserved the corpse. Hey, check out that neat dagger he’s got. Is that mithral? Shit, that IS mithral! +“Hey you shouldn’t be doing that! You know what Calvin said!” +“Fuck Calvin, I’m taking this for myself. Not like he’s going to know, and don’t act like you’ve never done it before. I saw you pilfering some old ring in the debris back there.” +“It’s not that, I just don’t have a good feeling about this.” +“What you think he’s gonna just wake up or something?” +“Maybe…I mean like a zombie.” +“(Sigh) You and your zombies. I swear you think we’re going to unearth a tomb of undead horrors on every expedition and in all our years have we ever even encountered something remotely like that? You read too many damn bad copper dreadfuls about necromancers.” +“I dunno, I still say you should be careful. We’ve never found a body so intact before, let alone preserved in some magic shell. Maybe there was a reason for that.” +“Maybe, but that’s Calvin’s job to figure out. Right now I’m just getting my hands on this dagger…ULK!” + +You sit up immediately and thrust your dagger in the throat of your assailant. Blood gushes from the fatal wound and you throw him to the side. + +“Oh shit! Oh shit! Oh fuck!” you hear another attacker shout and see him fumble with some sort of pistol only to drop the weapon entirely before attempting to make his escape. + +He doesn’t get far. You stand up and blast him in the back with a lightning bolt. He screams and falls making a few death twitches when his sizzling body hits the ground. + +You have no idea who these people were, but that scream was loud enough to attract more enemies if they’re in the area and judging by the large sound of foot steps coming in your direction there are. + +You quickly scan your surroundings and see quite a few shovels, picks and lanterns nearby, but no way out other than the one entryway that the fried fellow on the ground was trying to run to. + +What happened? Last thing you remember is Semra casting a spell on you and you fell asleep as the palace was collapsing in on your heads. You don’t even know how much time has passed. The two men that were hovering around you aren’t dressed in the typical Empire style. They carry no weapons other than pistols and those are different from the ones you’ve ever seen. The pistols are more complex looking. + +How much time has passed? Has the Empire fallen? What happened to everyone? Hell, at this point you’re even wondering what happened to Semra. + +As the sound of footsteps get even closer you draw your sword out of its scabbard and prepare for a fight. + +A group of men and women appear in the entryway. A some of them carry gunpowder weapons, but most of them are completely unarmed. Again, their style of dress isn’t familiar. + +“Stop! You point those weapons at me and I can easily incinerate the lot of you! Don’t believe me? Watch!” you remark and throw a small fireball on the ground nearby. It’s enough to cause them all to back off and even cause a couple of them to run away. One of them demands to be let through so he can see exactly what’s going on. + +The man that shoves his way through looks about in his fifties with thinning hair and is dressed in a fancy suit. You’ve never seen this man before, but something about him looks vaguely familiar. + +When he sees you, he’s more in awe than he is scared. In fact he doesn’t seem to care at all about the two dead men on the ground. + +“I can’t believe it! It’s you! I mean it’s gotta be! The way you’re dressed, the magic abilities, the location...I just can’t…” + +Suddenly a higher female voice shouts from behind the crowd. + +“Dad! What’s going on?! I heard all this…by the...gods…is that…” +“Yes, Jennifer it is! We’ve made the find of a lifetime! Quintus will be so pleased!” + +The woman is on the younger side with raven black hair. Probably early twenties. Unlike her father her clothes are covered in dirt and more practical in nature. You also notice she’s carrying a pistol as well. + +“Who the hell are all you people?! Were you sent to dig me up?! What’s happened to the Empire? Someone better explain what’s been going on!” you demand. +“Forgive us. I’m sure this must all be very confusing for you, but we don’t go on these digs to find living people, let alone someone like you. I just…wow…I can’t believe it’s you. I mean you’re the Eternal right?” +“I’m an Eternal. Yes. But you still haven’t answered and I’m starting to get impatient!” you exclaim. + +“Okay, okay! My name is Calvin Mol. I am head of this archeological dig for the Nalin Republic and Senator Quintus Arillicus in particular. This is my daughter Jennifer…” Calvin begins to say before you interrupt him. + +“Wait. Mol? Are you related to Jacob?” you ask because it would explain the very vague likeness. When you ask this question both he and his daughter’s eyes light up. + +“Yes! He was one of my ancestors! Did you know him?! I have so many questions!” +“And your fucking questions are going to have to wait! You said Nalin Republic, what’s that? The only Nalin I know of is a province of the Empire! You also said Jacob was your ancestor, how much time has passed?!” + +At this point Calvin and his daughter look a bit nervous at each other. Everyone else behind them who hasn’t already backed away entirely, does so now. + +“Well…taking into the consideration of the age of these ruins and what we already know about when the cataclysm occurred…um…I’d say about five hundred…give or take a few years.” Calvin remarks. + +Your heart almost skips a beat and now you’re the one in shock. + +Year 535 + +“Five…hundred years…” you slowly utter. + +You almost hesitate to ask. + +“And… the Empire?” + +Calvin and Jennifer look a bit nervous again. + +“It’s…um…gone. Been gone for centuries. It never recovered from the unknown cataclysm that struck the land. Most of it was outright destroyed. By the time most of the pieces were picked up, those areas that weren’t hit as hard had become their own nations.” Calvin explains. + +This news causes you to sit down on a nearby stone. + +“I caused this…” you whisper to yourself. + +Jennifer and Calvin don’t quite hear what you say, but Jennifer sensing that you’re more than a little troubled by this news attempts to cheer you up. + +“What my father should’ve said, is while the Empire as you know it is gone, its spirit lives on in the Nalin Republic! Seriously, Nalin was probably the only portion of the Empire that managed to hold on to a few of its traditions and culture during those dark ages. Even the language didn’t change too much. That’s probably why you can understand us so well, even if our accents and a few of our words are slightly different to yours.” + +This has no effect on your mood. You are at a complete loss of what to do. You were supposed to rule the Empire, but instead your actions were part of its destruction. You never wanted that to happen. + +Maybe you should’ve believed the Emperor or at least just followed his orders. Who knows what might’ve happened? Maybe he would’ve killed you or maybe he wouldn’t have, but at least you wouldn’t be in the situation you’re in now. A man out of time. A relic of the past. You have no nation to rule or serve. You don’t even have a home or a master any more. What are you going to do with yourself? + +You have no idea. The only good thing about any of this is you have a minor support base here. Jacob’s descendants are obviously very taken with you. You’ve only been half listening to what they’ve been babbling about, but they keep mentioning that they want you to return to the Nalin Republic with them so you can meet this Quintus character that apparently is going to be glad to see you as well. It would seem that you are somewhat known in the few old writings they’ve found about the old Empire. + +Jennifer’s brief description of this Nalin Republic sounds at least like a good place to familiarize yourself with this new world and you could go with them if only to get some bearings before you decide what to do next. +> Go to the Nalin Republic +You don’t have much else to do at this point. You might as well go to Nalin. If you decide you don’t like it there, you can always leave. + +“Okay, okay, I’ll go with you. Just both of you stop going on about it!” +“You will? That’s wonderful! Hey would you…” +“Calvin, I told you to shut up already!” you snap. + +Calvin shuts up and backs away. He starts telling his daughter that he has to stay here with most of the crew because there is still a lot of digging that needs to be done, but that he wants her to take you to Quintus right away. She nods and tells a few of the expedition crew to start loading up a few wagons to leave soon. + +Jennifer herself on the other hand starts walking along side you and staring a lot. + +“Shouldn’t you be helping load up the wagons?” you say implying that you’d like her to leave you be. +“No, they got it. Hey, so how well did you know my ancestor?” she asks ignoring or oblivious to your wishes. +“Not as well as I thought, considering he never mentioned having a family to me.” +“Oh I do not believe he had one of his own. But from what I’ve seen of my father’s family tree diagrams, Jacob had a couple of brothers that were just normal civil servants. Record keepers, that sort of thing. Obviously they had families though, otherwise my father and I wouldn’t be here. He never mentioned siblings?” +“Nope. Perhaps he wasn’t on good terms with them. I dunno. I only interacted with him on things concerning important Empire business. He was pretty immersed in his work most the time. I suppose I can say, he was a dedicated servant of the Empire.” + +This remark makes Jennifer display a big grin. + +“Hah, I knew it. We Mols have always been patriots to our nations!” +“Hm, well he definitely would do anything to save his nation. Unfortunately that seems to have been for naught given that it no longer exists.” + +“So…um, why were you in that magic shell?” Jennifer asks changing her line of questioning. +“Why do you ask so many questions?” +“Because we could’ve never believed that we’d discover a living person from the old Empire, yet here you are! I mean we know about the Empire only from a few tattered incomplete writings or mostly oral stories. Now we’ve finally got someone who lived during those glorious times! Someone who can give us the truth about what happened. I mean the cataclysm for example. All anyone knows is it was a great disaster of a magical nature that occurred five centuries ago. Nobody really knows how or why it happened. You had to have been there for that. Do you know what happened?” +“Oh…I have an idea…” You say. +“And?!” Jennifer asks. +“And I’m not going to tell you.” You remark. +“What?!” Jennifer exclaims in total disbelief. She actually is at a loss for words, but unfortunately not for long. + +“But why aren’t you going to tell me?!” +“Don’t take it personal. I’m not planning to tell anyone. It’s very apparent that you folks want something from me, which I can provide. History, information, and the truth. If I just give all that shit away, who’s to say you won’t just toss me aside and try to have me killed after you’ve milked me for all of it?” +“That…that wouldn’t happen! How could you even think we’d do such a thing?” +“How could I NOT think such a thing? Besides, I’m fairly certain you wouldn’t want the real truth anyway.” +“Of course we want the truth!” +“No, I don’t believe you do. Not really, I think you just want to hear what you want to hear. You want the truth? Here’s one for you. The Empire existed, and then it didn’t. End of history lesson.” + +This cynical comment causes Jennifer to again briefly shut up which you hope will send her away, but she’s not going to be deterred so easily. + +“Look, I realize you’re probably a little upset about your situation. I get that, but you don’t need to take it out on me. I’m just saying you’re living history. And more specifically you’re a very important part of my nation’s past. You could fill in so many blanks. You’re more than just some old magical weapon that we found in the dirt.” + +You snort at that last statement. + +“No. That’s exactly what you found, an old magical weapon that was buried in the dirt. Not even buried, but sealed away. And like most old magical weapons found sealed away and buried for centuries, sometimes the smartest thing you can do is leave them alone. I would think the dead bodies of two of your crew would be a good example of that.” + +Jennifer perceives your comment as a threat, as well she should. She makes no smart comment back; she just shuts up like her father and continues walks along side of you. Glad to see these Mols have as much sense as their ancestor did. + +Eventually you make it out of this dig site and into the open air. And what you see before you is severely different from what you remember. + +Where you once knew a great city once stood is gone. These explorers have uncovered a few pieces of it, but by and large it’s gone. Even the surrounding area where you once knew farmland and even lush fields would’ve been is gone. Everything has been replaced by sickly undergrowth. A wasteland. + +Jennifer remarks to everyone needing to keep an extra eye out for orc raiders. Jennifer looks over at you briefly again, but casts her eyes down and tries to get on with packing up the front wagon. You shake your head and walk over to Jennifer. + +“Look, Jennifer is it? I apologize for my remarks earlier, but as you said all of this IS a shock to me. I’ve seen a lot during my time, but I don’t think anything could’ve prepared me for this.” +“I can only imagine. I guess overwhelming you with questions was inconsiderate of us.” +“Well I suppose your curiosity is natural, but let’s just say I’m not quite ready to discuss everything. At least not yet.” +“I understand. Your last memories of the Empire were during the cataclysm and you’re only just now seeing the results. It must’ve been a terrible time!” +“Yes, you could say that it was.” + +Jennifer nods and you help her with loading the last bags on the head wagon. When you step aboard it, you’re on your way. For a while there’s silence between the pair of you as you ride through the wasteland, but you decide to be social and break the silence. + +“So orcs huh? They’re a threat? I would’ve thought they’d all be extinct by now. There weren’t even many left in the Empire during my time.” you say. +“Sadly, that is no longer the case. I imagine without the Empire around, they reverted back to their chaotic natures and they bred unchecked. Now they’re all over the Qualan Badlands and elsewhere too. They probably were one of the few races to thrive during the dark ages. I’m not too worried about that happening today though now that we’ve got powerful Eternal travelling with us!” +“You shouldn’t be too overconfident of that. Under the right circumstances, anyone, no matter how powerful they appear to be can be brought down sometime by the humblest of things. Still, I see the reputation of the Eternals has still survived. So are there any in Nalin?” +“Ha ha ha ha! No, of course not! Before we found you, the last one died over four hundred years ago. First Matriarch Brenda of the Nalin Dominion. She was probably the main one responsible for keeping the fledging remnants of the Empire together during the cataclysm.” +“Glad to know someone was trying to uphold order. Good for her.” +“Did you know her well?” +‘Not excessively, but we did have dealings on a few matters, like during the taming of the lands east of Nalin for example. There was another major event too, but I’d care not to discuss that at this time.” +“Understood…well anyway that was back then. Things have changed a lot since her time, our government being just one of those things, but for all intents and purposes she sort of laid the foundations for the Nalin Republic by keeping the country safe in the first place.” +“You’re going to have to explain what the hell a republic is. Never heard of it before.” You say causing Jennifer to smile a bit. + +“Well, nowadays a single leader doesn’t rule our government. It’s run by a senate, which consists of a group of politicians that are chosen by the people. They ultimately decide on the laws and such by discussing and debating them.” + +You are completely baffled by this concept. + +“That sounds like an inefficient way of running things. How does anything get accomplished?” +“Well, sometimes things do take time, but the citizens are a lot freer and happier by choosing their leaders.” + +Now you’re really lost. + +“Why the hell would people want to be free and happy? They should just be grateful for the protection and order that the government provides for their miserable lives! One strong leader to rule over them with an iron fist is only thing the citizens really need. And if they grumble too much they get executed, problem solved. Hell, it’s not like slaves cost that much if they need an extra hand in the fields.” + +Jennifer chuckles at your totalitarian views. + +“Yes, I imagine that it would be a bit strange to you. I’m sure it might also surprise you that we don’t have slavery anymore either; it actually became less cost effective. Still, you’ll see that it isn’t all bad. In fact you’ll probably get along with Quintus, he’s a very big admirer of old Empire history and culture. He’s the one been privately funding all these expeditions.” + +Just as you’re about to ask Jennifer who this Quintus is, you hear war cries and howling in the distance. It might have been five hundred years, but you know the sounds of orcs when you hear them. + +Not long after the general warning, you soon see them coming from the far left and the far right. They look every bit as big, mean and green as you remember them. No heavy armor, but the giant boar creatures they’re riding and the willingness to use bows are new. + +Jennifer orders everyone to ride faster and ready their firearms. While readying the firearms is always a good idea, there is no way you’re going to outpace the orcs at the speed you’re going, the wagons are just not fast enough and are weighed down by equipment. There are also enough orcs that some of them are going reach you before they get shot off their pigs and that’s assuming everyone in this caravan is a crack shot that can hit them in the head. + +Meanwhile you feel like you’re a sitting kobold on your own wagon. Part of you would rather just get on one of the horses and unhook the wagon, so you’ve got a little more maneuverability. Of course you could just start flinging magic spells at the orcs. +> Cast spells +No need to endanger yourself unnecessarily you think, so you start focusing on flinging fireballs at the orcs. + +Maybe it’s the unstableness of the wagon as it runs over uneven land, maybe the orcs are much better pig riders than you thought, maybe you’re just out of practice or maybe it’s a combination of all three factors, but whatever the reason you don’t actually hit many of them. + +Doesn’t take long before the orcs return fire with their bows. You immediately cast a personal shield to prevent being shot to death. Jennifer on the other hand isn’t quite as lucky as she is caught by several arrows. Her face is one of shock as she stares at the arrow shafts now inside her body puncturing vital organs. + +She begins to fall, but in doing so she grabs on to your arm, perhaps in some sort of last attempt of begging for someone to help her. This catches you off guard and your arm is pulled away from your next spell gesture. Before you can pull away from her death grip, orcs on the other side of the wagon have unleashed their own volley of arrows and since you’re distracted you don’t manage to put up your shield spell in time. + +You’re relatively “lucky” in that you only catch three arrows in the back. A grievous wound that would probably kill most, but under the right circumstances you’d pull through. + +Unfortunately after getting with three arrows in the back, and already slightly off by your footing when Jennifer grabbed you, you lose complete balance due to the wagon going over bumpy land. Doesn’t help that arrows also hit the horses and collapse from their wounds which all results in you getting thrown to the ground and smacking your head on a rock when the wagon abruptly stops. + +Again though, even with something as bad as this, you’d probably pull through if you had time to heal yourself through magic. + +The problem is you don’t have that luxury and after you finally manage to shake off the cobwebs of your head wound, you look up just in time to see one of the orc boars galloping towards you and then OVER you. A hoof crushes your skull and the rest break your bones. + +Your body broken and bloody is eventually stripped clean by the orcs and left to rot in the wasteland. + +Your “return” was a short and ignoble one.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You don’t have much else to do at this point. You might as well go to Nalin. If you decide you don’t like it there, you can always leave. + +“Okay, okay, I’ll go with you. Just both of you stop going on about it!” +“You will? That’s wonderful! Hey would you…” +“Calvin, I told you to shut up already!” you snap. + +Calvin shuts up and backs away. He starts telling his daughter that he has to stay here with most of the crew because there is still a lot of digging that needs to be done, but that he wants her to take you to Quintus right away. She nods and tells a few of the expedition crew to start loading up a few wagons to leave soon. + +Jennifer herself on the other hand starts walking along side you and staring a lot. + +“Shouldn’t you be helping load up the wagons?” you say implying that you’d like her to leave you be. +“No, they got it. Hey, so how well did you know my ancestor?” she asks ignoring or oblivious to your wishes. +“Not as well as I thought, considering he never mentioned having a family to me.” +“Oh I do not believe he had one of his own. But from what I’ve seen of my father’s family tree diagrams, Jacob had a couple of brothers that were just normal civil servants. Record keepers, that sort of thing. Obviously they had families though, otherwise my father and I wouldn’t be here. He never mentioned siblings?” +“Nope. Perhaps he wasn’t on good terms with them. I dunno. I only interacted with him on things concerning important Empire business. He was pretty immersed in his work most the time. I suppose I can say, he was a dedicated servant of the Empire.” + +This remark makes Jennifer display a big grin. + +“Hah, I knew it. We Mols have always been patriots to our nations!” +“Hm, well he definitely would do anything to save his nation. Unfortunately that seems to have been for naught given that it no longer exists.” + +“So…um, why were you in that magic shell?” Jennifer asks changing her line of questioning. +“Why do you ask so many questions?” +“Because we could’ve never believed that we’d discover a living person from the old Empire, yet here you are! I mean we know about the Empire only from a few tattered incomplete writings or mostly oral stories. Now we’ve finally got someone who lived during those glorious times! Someone who can give us the truth about what happened. I mean the cataclysm for example. All anyone knows is it was a great disaster of a magical nature that occurred five centuries ago. Nobody really knows how or why it happened. You had to have been there for that. Do you know what happened?” +“Oh…I have an idea…” You say. +“And?!” Jennifer asks. +“And I’m not going to tell you.” You remark. +“What?!” Jennifer exclaims in total disbelief. She actually is at a loss for words, but unfortunately not for long. + +“But why aren’t you going to tell me?!” +“Don’t take it personal. I’m not planning to tell anyone. It’s very apparent that you folks want something from me, which I can provide. History, information, and the truth. If I just give all that shit away, who’s to say you won’t just toss me aside and try to have me killed after you’ve milked me for all of it?” +“That…that wouldn’t happen! How could you even think we’d do such a thing?” +“How could I NOT think such a thing? Besides, I’m fairly certain you wouldn’t want the real truth anyway.” +“Of course we want the truth!” +“No, I don’t believe you do. Not really, I think you just want to hear what you want to hear. You want the truth? Here’s one for you. The Empire existed, and then it didn’t. End of history lesson.” + +This cynical comment causes Jennifer to again briefly shut up which you hope will send her away, but she’s not going to be deterred so easily. + +“Look, I realize you’re probably a little upset about your situation. I get that, but you don’t need to take it out on me. I’m just saying you’re living history. And more specifically you’re a very important part of my nation’s past. You could fill in so many blanks. You’re more than just some old magical weapon that we found in the dirt.” + +You snort at that last statement. + +“No. That’s exactly what you found, an old magical weapon that was buried in the dirt. Not even buried, but sealed away. And like most old magical weapons found sealed away and buried for centuries, sometimes the smartest thing you can do is leave them alone. I would think the dead bodies of two of your crew would be a good example of that.” + +Jennifer perceives your comment as a threat, as well she should. She makes no smart comment back; she just shuts up like her father and continues walks along side of you. Glad to see these Mols have as much sense as their ancestor did. + +Eventually you make it out of this dig site and into the open air. And what you see before you is severely different from what you remember. + +Where you once knew a great city once stood is gone. These explorers have uncovered a few pieces of it, but by and large it’s gone. Even the surrounding area where you once knew farmland and even lush fields would’ve been is gone. Everything has been replaced by sickly undergrowth. A wasteland. + +Jennifer remarks to everyone needing to keep an extra eye out for orc raiders. Jennifer looks over at you briefly again, but casts her eyes down and tries to get on with packing up the front wagon. You shake your head and walk over to Jennifer. + +“Look, Jennifer is it? I apologize for my remarks earlier, but as you said all of this IS a shock to me. I’ve seen a lot during my time, but I don’t think anything could’ve prepared me for this.” +“I can only imagine. I guess overwhelming you with questions was inconsiderate of us.” +“Well I suppose your curiosity is natural, but let’s just say I’m not quite ready to discuss everything. At least not yet.” +“I understand. Your last memories of the Empire were during the cataclysm and you’re only just now seeing the results. It must’ve been a terrible time!” +“Yes, you could say that it was.” + +Jennifer nods and you help her with loading the last bags on the head wagon. When you step aboard it, you’re on your way. For a while there’s silence between the pair of you as you ride through the wasteland, but you decide to be social and break the silence. + +“So orcs huh? They’re a threat? I would’ve thought they’d all be extinct by now. There weren’t even many left in the Empire during my time.” you say. +“Sadly, that is no longer the case. I imagine without the Empire around, they reverted back to their chaotic natures and they bred unchecked. Now they’re all over the Qualan Badlands and elsewhere too. They probably were one of the few races to thrive during the dark ages. I’m not too worried about that happening today though now that we’ve got powerful Eternal travelling with us!” +“You shouldn’t be too overconfident of that. Under the right circumstances, anyone, no matter how powerful they appear to be can be brought down sometime by the humblest of things. Still, I see the reputation of the Eternals has still survived. So are there any in Nalin?” +“Ha ha ha ha! No, of course not! Before we found you, the last one died over four hundred years ago. First Matriarch Brenda of the Nalin Dominion. She was probably the main one responsible for keeping the fledging remnants of the Empire together during the cataclysm.” +“Glad to know someone was trying to uphold order. Good for her.” +“Did you know her well?” +‘Not excessively, but we did have dealings on a few matters, like during the taming of the lands east of Nalin for example. There was another major event too, but I’d care not to discuss that at this time.” +“Understood…well anyway that was back then. Things have changed a lot since her time, our government being just one of those things, but for all intents and purposes she sort of laid the foundations for the Nalin Republic by keeping the country safe in the first place.” +“You’re going to have to explain what the hell a republic is. Never heard of it before.” You say causing Jennifer to smile a bit. + +“Well, nowadays a single leader doesn’t rule our government. It’s run by a senate, which consists of a group of politicians that are chosen by the people. They ultimately decide on the laws and such by discussing and debating them.” + +You are completely baffled by this concept. + +“That sounds like an inefficient way of running things. How does anything get accomplished?” +“Well, sometimes things do take time, but the citizens are a lot freer and happier by choosing their leaders.” + +Now you’re really lost. + +“Why the hell would people want to be free and happy? They should just be grateful for the protection and order that the government provides for their miserable lives! One strong leader to rule over them with an iron fist is only thing the citizens really need. And if they grumble too much they get executed, problem solved. Hell, it’s not like slaves cost that much if they need an extra hand in the fields.” + +Jennifer chuckles at your totalitarian views. + +“Yes, I imagine that it would be a bit strange to you. I’m sure it might also surprise you that we don’t have slavery anymore either; it actually became less cost effective. Still, you’ll see that it isn’t all bad. In fact you’ll probably get along with Quintus, he’s a very big admirer of old Empire history and culture. He’s the one been privately funding all these expeditions.” + +Just as you’re about to ask Jennifer who this Quintus is, you hear war cries and howling in the distance. It might have been five hundred years, but you know the sounds of orcs when you hear them. + +Not long after the general warning, you soon see them coming from the far left and the far right. They look every bit as big, mean and green as you remember them. No heavy armor, but the giant boar creatures they’re riding and the willingness to use bows are new. + +Jennifer orders everyone to ride faster and ready their firearms. While readying the firearms is always a good idea, there is no way you’re going to outpace the orcs at the speed you’re going, the wagons are just not fast enough and are weighed down by equipment. There are also enough orcs that some of them are going reach you before they get shot off their pigs and that’s assuming everyone in this caravan is a crack shot that can hit them in the head. + +Meanwhile you feel like you’re a sitting kobold on your own wagon. Part of you would rather just get on one of the horses and unhook the wagon, so you’ve got a little more maneuverability. Of course you could just start flinging magic spells at the orcs. +> Get on one of the horses +While it’s entirely possibly that you’d come out of this thing alive, (You’ve certainly been through worse) there’s little guarantee that anyone else will. If you’re going to keep your “rescuers” alive, you’ll need to be unhindered. + +“What’re you doing?!” Jennifer asks as you leap on a horse. +“I’m getting off this thing, and I suggest if you don’t want to be a big target you will too, there’s another horse here, jump on it and we’ll unhitch the wagon!” + +Sensing that you’re going to do this whether she likes it or not, she realizes that she doesn’t really have a choice. She jumps on a horse and you take your sword and cut the harness. You tell Jennifer that she should order everyone else to concentrate their gunfire to the left. + +“Where are you going now?!” +“I’m going to take care of the ones on the right!” you shout and ride in their direction. + +The orcs are so agitated about you heading directly towards them, they practically stop focusing on the caravan and begin firing arrows at you. Of course you anticipated such a thing and cast a shield to protect you and your horse. With your other hand you spray a cone of cold on the orcs closest to you, freezing them quite literally in their tracks. + +This feat of magic is enough to cause the orcs to attempt to rear up their boars and change direction back towards attacking the caravan. Others are undeterred and continue to head toward you with large weapons in hand. You aim your next spell at their boars, which consists of a couple fire blasts. The pigs go up in a blaze and soon so do their riders who end up dropping their weapons in an attempt to beat out the flames. + +You turn your attention at the orcs who decided to attack the caravan instead. At first glance the expedition crew have held their own fairly well considering none of them seem to be warriors and they seem to have fended off most of the orcs on the left side. However you see orcs getting the best of a couple of them when they close the gap and begin jumping onto the wagons. + +You ride back to the caravan and put your own combat skills good use. Orcs may be fierce and unrelenting fighters sometimes, but without the heavy armor that you remember they used to wear for the Empire, they get killed as easily as anyone else if you’re skilled enough, and you’re more than skilled enough. As you battle the orcs, the remaining expedition crew tries to help, though you’re nearly shot a couple of times in the process. You end up yelling at them to stop “helping” you before you start firing at them with something a lot more accurate. + +Soon after you’ve killed your last orc after hopping from wagon to wagon, you hear Jennifer shouts to everyone that you’ve won and the rest have rode off. The caravan stops for a moment to take some time to clean up dead bodies on the wagons, and gather up any equipment that fell off during the fight. + +Jennifer comes up to you as you’re cleaning off your own sword. + +“Well that was exciting to see a real Eternal in action! I knew we were going to be safe with you!” +“Hmm, yeah well I almost wasn’t safe with your people, because I nearly got shot a couple times!” +“Yeah, sorry about that. Fear of the orcs actually on the wagons was probably causing higher nervousness than usual.” +“You should get some soldiers on these trips. Then at least you’d have some people who actually know how to fight when things get a little close.” +“We do have soldiers, can’t you tell by the uniforms?” + +Honestly you hadn’t really paid much attention to the fact that several of the people on this expedition crew do have similar outfits. It’s just regular clothing though, none of it is proper armor, light or heavy. You also now notice that the firearms are much different too, namely they can fire multiple shots before being reloaded. A very handy improvement indeed. + +You realize that time has definitely marched on, it would seem that shooting someone with a rifle or pistol is the order of the day. Not much use for the old armor if that’s indeed the case. Still, you’re also reminded of the Felkans and their over reliance of such weapons. It would seem the Nalin Republic has the same technological disease. And these people are the supposed “successors” of the Empire. + +“Guns.” You say shaking your head. +“What’s wrong with guns? You don’t think they’re honorable or something?” Jennifer asks. +“No, I believe they are very useful and it would be foolish to not employ such weapons of fantastic destruction during battle and war. I just have a problem with the reliance of them in place of natural combat skill, because one day you’re going to run out of bullets and then you see who the real soldier is.” +“How is using a gun any different from casting down lightning from your fingers or throwing fireballs around?” +“It isn’t in the scheme of things. I just said I don’t have a problem with gunpowder weapons. However you also noticed I didn’t just toss around magic like I had unlimited energy either. I used it when it was needed and engaged in close combat for the rest of them. I could’ve easily just rained down a firestorm and wiped out all of the orcs, but that would’ve taken out the caravan too. Something I’m sure nobody wanted. The Empire used firearms AND magic during the Felkan War, but individually the soldiers were still some of the toughest warriors you’d ever want to face. The Felkans soon learned that fatal fact. Perhaps if their soldiers still had the formidable close combat skills of an Empire soldier, they might not have lost so many battle when physical prowess was needed.” + +Jennifer doesn’t debate your views or experience, she just thanks you again for your help and you’re soon underway. The rest of the journey is relatively silent. + +Eventually you arrive in the Nalin Republic. The landscape here is more like you remember, though it isn’t until you get towards the capital of Dalt that you start seeing a resemblance to civilization, but even that’s different when it comes to the architecture and such. You get a few stares from passing citizens. + +Jennifer and you disembark from the wagons when you arrive at Quintus’ house, or rather his very large mansion, which has guards posted at the gates. Honestly it’s the closest thing resembling the Empire you’ve seen since you got here. + +“You wait here, I’ll have to speak with Quintus about all this first. While I’m sure he’ll really want to see you, there is protocol to follow.” +“Sure, do whatever it is you have to do, I’m not going anywhere, but who is this Quintus anyway?” +“Quintus Arillicus is one of the most influential leaders in the senate and as I’ve already mentioned an admirer of old Empire history, but he’ll tell you more when you meet him.” + +As Jennifer walks through the gates, you’re left standing around with a few guards who give you the stares that you’ve come to expect from everyone. You wait for about ten minutes before you begin to wonder why you’re even entertaining this again. + +Then you remember, it’s because you don’t have much else to do right now. Though you’re wondering what place you’re going to have in this new world. You imagine that maybe you could be a soldier again though it doesn’t look like there’s a war going on. Doesn’t even look like this place is suffering from any discontent from the citizens, but then looks can be deceiving. + +Jennifer eventually comes back to the front gate and waves to come with her. + +“You can come in now. Quintus is very excited to see you!” + +At this point this Quintus better be just as impressive, because from what little you know of this guy, you’re not nearly as excited to see him. + +You and Jennifer walk into the mansion and while it’s certainly fancy and has a design style similar to Empire architecture, it isn’t nearly as extraordinary as the first time you saw the Emperor’s palace. Of course you’re a harder sell from those old days. Jennifer and you enter what is apparently a conference room. She says that he shouldn’t be long and you both take a seat at the table. + +Soon a middle-aged man walks into the room with some guards, but he dismisses them at the door so that you three can be alone. He’s dressed in an older style suit that looks more like those you remember Empire bureaucrats wearing and carries a staff of some sort with him. He also wears several rings. You sense that they all might be magical. + +Either way you fail to be impressed, just as you suspected you would be. Quintus on the other hand, now that he sees you in person, he’s very impressed. + +“I never believed in all these years…all the digging…all the research…everything. And none of what I’ve found compares to this! Yes! This is indeed a glorious day! A real live Eternal! Not just any Eternal either, but the one who served the Emperor himself!” Quintus exclaims as he sits down across from you. + +“Now let me stop you right there. I know you’re all excited and shit, but for me this is going into unknown territory. Possibly even enemy territory. I have no idea WHAT exactly you want with me. I’m going to tell you right now though if you’re thinking of putting me in some sort of museum or some weird aristocratic version of a sideshow like they have at the fairs peasants go to you better get that idea out of your head right now.” + +Jennifer tries to temper your words, but Quintus raises his hands as if no offense was taken. + +“It’s alright. Our Eternal friend is quite right to be suspicious of me, but I can honestly tell him there is no reason for him to be because I think my goals will fit his honorable ideals. I’m still sure there is much he wants to know and questions that he has, but I will say that it is my hope that he and I will change history together!” + +Quintus and Jennifer try to get you fully up to speed on everything first… +> Time passes... +After sitting here for about an hour or so listening to the sorry state the republic is in, let alone the rest of the area that used to be part of the old Empire, you’ve had enough of it all. + +“Stop. I’ve heard enough about your wretched country. I can already tell what YOU want. You want the Empire back.” +“Yes! I want to resurrect the Empire!” Quintus exclaims. +“And that’s a lovely thought, but sorry to tell you this, it’s dead. Long buried and resigned to the trash heap of history.” You remark. + +This comment is definitely not what Quintus expected. Jennifer on the other hand isn’t quite surprised you’d say such a thing given your own cynical remarks to her. + +“But…you’re here now…a symbol! A symbol of the old ways! Proof of honor! Proof of strength! Proof of power! You’re an Eternal!” +“And? I obviously couldn’t prevent the destruction of the Empire. Am I supposed to just resurrect it with my mere presence? Am I to just kill the entire senate and establish perhaps you as an emperor? Do you think the people would accept that?” +“Well maybe not so direct…” Quintus remarks. +“No? Because that might be the only way to get things done around here. And what makes YOU think you’d even be a good emperor? You do not even have the support of the people.” +“I do have the support of my constituents! I even have a few allies in the senate!” Quintus protests. +“Well you still don’t have enough for what you desire. I’d say that I’d have a better chance of being accepted as an emperor before you would just due to the fear factor and raw power, and I’d still have to be looking over my shoulder constantly before I finally got run out by a complete rebellion or I destroyed so much of Nalin in the process of maintaining order. Given what you’ve told me of the average citizen it sounds like they’re perfectly happy with the way things are. Happy with their hedonistic freedom. Do you really think they’re going to listen to a relic of a time when the strong just ruled over the weak and the weak not only accepted it as a way of life, but some were even happy about it? The sheep have been let out of their pens and do not wish to return. Do you believe your people, even those that apparently keep voting for you to represent them are ready to accept a more restrictive and harsher culture? Do you believe you can foster such an environment?” + +Quintus remains silent and you throw up your hands at his inability to answer. + +“Well you see my problem with your plan. You probably thought when you dug me up; you’d have a powerful tool that would be your key to reforming a parody of the old Empire. And it would be a parody, because even if you were successful, it would NEVER be like the old Empire. You can read all the lore and books you want about the old days and nothing is stopping you from holding fantasies about such days. But make no mistake those good old days aren’t EVER coming back. You’re about five hundred years too late. I haven’t been awake one complete day yet, and even I’ve come to accept that hard truth…but then I’ve had to accept so many hard truths. This is just another one to me.” + +Quintus nods solemnly. The spark that was in him is gone, but you can tell he isn’t completely defeated. Jennifer just tries to look away from both of you and shuffles some papers she has with her. + +“You…you aren’t how I expected you to be…” Quintus says. +“Nobody ever is. Another hard truth I learned a long time ago.” You answer. +“Mm…well I seem to be at a loss of what to say. Which is rare considering they often complain that I never shut up in the senate.” + +“Look, Quintus. I won’t deny that your ideals and goals aren’t admirable ones. However, I had to drag you back to reality. You still have a long way to go before even bringing something resembling the Empire back. As much as it might be fun to send me to just kill the senate with a firestorm and then establish martial law across the land, it’s not going to be that simple. At least not yet.” +“Yes, I suppose you’re right. It’s just I’ve read about some of your deeds, scraps of parchments really and I guess when I found out you were alive and in my house I just figured all of my country’s problem were solved.” +“Well, they may still be eventually. Now despite what I’ve said, I will help you. Because personally, I’d like to see you succeed if only so I could live in a place that didn’t seem so damn strange and it’s not like I have anywhere else to go.” +“So you are going to help bring back the Empire?” +“Well, something like it anyway. I can’t promise anything, but I’ll try. Now then, with me on your side, you shouldn’t worry about the military side of things. I can take care of those matters when they arise, and they most certainly will. You’re going to have to take the lead on the political matters obviously, but I can still advise you in this capacity. All my years of working side by side with the Emperor contributed to such skills despite being on the battlefield most of the time.” + +Quintus seems to have that spark of life again when you agree to help him after all. He happily asks where you should get started. Jennifer at this point is glad to also see things have worked out and says she should leave you two alone to talk more and get back to the dig site. Before she leaves Quintus calls out to thank her. + +“And tell your father he has my thanks as well! If it weren’t for you two, we would not be in the better position we are now. Expect a bonus in pay this week.” Quintus says. +“Thank you senator. I was wondering though and I hate to ask, but it just came to me. Do you think our new friend here could come back up to the dig site when he has the time? It’s just that he was buried there and it might be of great help if he could at least perhaps give us a good indication on where it might be beneficial to dig.” +“Well we’ve got a lot to go over first, but afterwards if he wants to, I have no objections.” + +Doesn’t take you long to agree. You briefly remark that where they were digging was near the Emperor’s main chambers and you’d like to see if anything survived yourself. This new revelation causes a bit of excitement from Jennifer and Quintus wondering what other magical treasures that might be of use in the coming days of change or even some scraps of history that can enlighten them more about such glorious days. + +You just wonder if you can find the remains of Semra. Call it curiosity; call it a sense of closure. + +The first thing you and Quintus talk about is the military. You explain that it is of vital importance to get them to support him the most, but it’s also of great importance to get them be more vicious warriors. You say you understand that battles are probably fought a little differently nowadays, but the intense training isn’t necessarily just to make them expert fighters. It’s also to instill discipline and hopefully a warrior’s mindset. Make it so that they want to go to war, that they long for it. + +Quintus says that he does already have some pull with the military. A little more than most find comfortable, but of course it’s nowhere near absolute. You’re glad since that cuts down on a little extra work. + +You tell him to track down the most spirited and skilled warriors that are in the military and have them gather somewhere secluded just outside the northern borders of Nalin. You say you need to get started on training as soon as possible, you just hope you don’t have too many wash outs (or casualties). You then say you also need to get started on an outside threat. + +“What do you mean?” +“I mean you need an outside threat that genuinely scares people. Makes it so people are more supportive of a strong military. Makes it so eventually people prioritize their safety so much that they’re willing to give up their freedom just to be safe. I mean I know you’ve been warning the senate and the people about all the scary things out there and you’re right, but people don’t believe it until its beating down their door with a battle axe.” +“Yes, but how exactly are we going to do that?” +“Well YOU aren’t going to do anything except going about your usual business. I on the other hand am going to incite one of those threats you’ve told me about. Obviously one of the closest ones.” +“The usksha immigrants?” Quintus asks. +“Heh, well maybe in due time, but that’s bit more on the…political side. Plus its not a large enough threat and the follow through of invading the desert is a logistics nightmare that we are nowhere near in a position to carry out at this time. No, I was thinking something much simpler. Something much easier to incite violence in and a lot easier to get people to fear, namely orcs.” +“Oh, do you think you can do it?” +“Encouraging an orc to attack isn’t a challenge at all. Herding them to all attack in a specific direction takes a little more skill, but I can do it. It’ll just take a little time and we have to make a balancing act of it. Going to have to let the orcs win a few major battles in the beginning at least. It won’t be pretty, but it’ll also serve to purge some of the less than skilled soldiers you have around here. Some villages on the borders are going to have to burn as well.” +“Villages? Are you sure?” +“The problem with the Nalinites is they’ve never really been under a true threat for a very long time. When the people experience the loss of a couple border villages and see the bloody aftermath, trust me they’ll be begging for more protection. When they see the brutality of what an orc horde can do they’ll be screaming for justice and for us to march into the Quala Badlands to wipe out every last green skin. The first steps to expansion and the first steps to resurrecting the Empire.” + +Quintus understands and says it sounds like a good plan. You and he talk a little more about some of the specifics before he eventually says he has a big day tomorrow of arguing against some silly law that one of his opponents is trying to have passed and needs to get some sleep. He says that you may have a bed in one of his spare rooms, as it isn’t like the rest of his family is going to complain about you being here. You agree but say that you intend on heading back to the dig site like you promised Jennifer tomorrow and also to get started on that orc situation you spoke on. Quintus remarks that you can take one of his horses and says he hopes to see you within a weeks time. + +The next day you ride off to your destination and you feel somewhat calmer than you did when you first woke up. You also feel like you have a worthy purpose now. You know you’re going to have a big task ahead of you trying to reform the Empire, but at least it gives you something to do. Who knows, you might even be successful. + +Or you might be instrumental in the downfall of yet another nation… +> Years pass... +Year 537 + +“Ah, there’s nothing better than when a plan comes together! Your actions of stirring up the orcs have been paying off and I’ve finally managed to get the public to become in favor of a strong army and your training has been producing much tougher and disciplined soldiers to create that stronger army.” Quintus remarks to you while he sips his wine. +“I’m certainly glad someone you finally found someone more competent than yourself. Makes all your years of failure totally worth it.” Quintus’ wife Nalia remarks in a bored tone lying on a couch. She’s already on her second bottle of wine and it’s not even the afternoon yet. + +While Quintus dismisses his wife’s usual emasculating remarks, you’re wondering why you’re here when you could be doing something more important to keep this plan in motion because its nowhere near coming together like Quintus seems to think it is. The orcs haven’t even made a major attack yet. They’ve just been harassing a few patrols, but it’s just as well since you’re still trying to whip the paltry number of spirited soldiers you do have into shape so that they the orcs do attack they’ll be ready for them. + +You can’t really complain, because you are doing something you’re familiar with and good at, but the main thing that’s been nagging at you is Quintus himself. You don’t respect him and it’s starting to become a problem sometimes. + +It’s not anything he’s done to you either. He’s practically bent over backwards to accommodate you in anyway he can. You wondered at first if it’s his overly smarmy demeanor with you which at times seems fake, but that isn’t it. Part of that is that he’s a politician and he probably can’t help but be that way as part of his personality, not to mention you’ve become quite a good judge of character and you believe his admiration for you is genuine. + +Regardless of what his wife claims, Quintus is extremely ambitious and a hard worker which you can appreciate. He’s just been hampered by the social and political climate. If he’d been born during the time of the Empire, he would’ve fit right in. Might’ve even been one of the Emperor’s advisors. + +Despite all this, you’ve been developing an increasing lack of respect for the man. Not to the point that you’re ready to kill him or anything, but taking orders from him has got you questioning why? Of course you know the reasons why, because the republic is still a pussy whipped place that has long since abandoned the ideals of people like yourself and trying to take power like a strong man would ultimately only result in chaos and collapse. Ironically, you’d probably be more at home in one of the city-states in Arat where they still favor a single ruler. + +What it all comes down to you think is Quintus’ family. Something about Quintus’ lack of admiration from his own family bothers you. If he can’t reach the people that are supposed to be closest to him, how the hell can you respect him? Gets harder to when you have to be subjected to these meetings and see his family walk over him first hand. They all either criticize him or belittle him even though he’s been trying to make life better for them. + +His wife is a slothful alcoholic that has never a word of encouragement for him. She looks much older than she actually is mainly due to hitting the bottle so much. She’s never truly addressed you directly, but her attitude seems apathetic at best. + +His teenage daughter Yollanda is a red headed trollop that routinely sleeps with the sons of his senate rivals and in some cases the rivals themselves. And those are the “classier” encounters. Quintus once complained that if there was a good purpose for her bed hopping like say for gathering important information on his enemies it could be acceptable, but she has no higher purpose other than the pleasure of her girl parts. You try to stay away from her as her outright sexual advances that’s she’s made towards you in the past is a complication you don’t desire or need. Makes Jennifer’s obvious minor crush on you downright subtle by comparison. + +Then there’s his younger son Gelo who is an idiot. Not in the traditional sense that he does stupid things without thinking them through, no he’s a dyed in the wool, born and bred moron. You imagine that his mother might’ve drank while she was carrying him, but who knows? By and large he’s harmless, but extremely annoying. He yells a lot, breaks things and is generally obnoxious mainly because he doesn’t even have a stable structure to mold him into something at least somewhat useful. You don’t understand why he wasn’t killed at birth. Such defective babies were usually either put to death by the family or at least sold into slavery so that they could be productive to the Empire on a minor level. It was a good policy. The only positive thing is he seems to be afraid of you and thus stays away (Often screaming his head off and runs away if you’re ever in the same room.) + +And that’s just Quintus’ immediate family, it’s not even counting the other in laws and extended family that basically mooch off of him. For a man that has ruthless ideals he’s a doormat when it comes to his family. Fortunately for Quintus, he seems to have a lot more luck with the general population and has been getting more support just like he’s been bragging about lately. If you were Quintus, you might crave the respect of strangers as well. + +“Quintus, why am I here? I’d like to get back to my job.” You remark. +“But that’s precisely why you’re here my Eternal friend! Your job! Since the army problem is well on its way to being taken care of, I think its time to move on to our navy.” +“Navy?” +“Yes, you do remember we have one such as it is. I’d like you to have a hand in making it stronger as well.” +“And just how the hell am I supposed to do that?” +“I dunno, you told me you were the military expert. Just do it the same way you did with our army I suppose. Stir up the pirates of the Delerg islands so they start attacking our costal towns en masse and the people demand a stronger navy.” +“Quintus, I’m glad you’re excited about the plan, but the first part of it isn’t even ready yet. I don’t feel the soldiers are even ready yet. They’ve been in a few skirmishes, but nothing that is really going to test them. And there’s still the matter of the orcs. They’re riled and I have noticed large tribal gatherings as if they’re preparing for a large attack against a bigger foe, but by and large they’re still disorganized and in some cases still attacking one another.” +“But surely you’ve trained some of the soldiers enough that they can perform these duties in your stead? Delegate responsibility to the more talented ones?” +“I have, but its a slow process from them to train their fellows as well as I trained them and I still wouldn’t trust any of them to do what I’m doing with the orcs, or at least not do it and live. Quite frankly I need more time with them and diverting my attention to your navy is just a distraction.” +“But the senate is going to dismantle it!” Quintus exclaims. + +“Oh please will you stop whining in front of the help Quintus. It is soooo undignified. You don’t have to try to impress me anyway; I always knew you weren’t man enough to help my brother out with his shipyard. If the senate does dismantle the navy and his shipyard goes under because of less business, well he can always live here. No big deal.” Nalia remarks taking another long swig out of her wine bottle. + +Quintus has no words he just throws his hands up and looks to you for help, but what can you do short of killing his wife? And you’re fairly certain he doesn’t want that no matter how much she gives him grief. + +You suppose you could see what you could do with the naval situation, but the main problem is you have practically no experience in such seafaring things. You dare say the average sailor has much more experience than you do about such matters. Sure you’ll be assisted, but without the actual experience you’ll still have a disadvantage that you don’t feel comfortable with. + +On the other hand what exactly does the republic need with a powerful navy anyway? As far as you know they don’t have an enemy trying to invade them from sea and they don’t have contact with a big nautical trading partner. They just send merchant ships to travel along the southern coast to the Usksha Emirates. If the pirates got too out of control, they could just send large shipments through the desert. +> Focus on the land military +You’re not going to change the plan just because Quintus is trying to please his drunken bitch of a wife. If he really wants this to happen he’s going to have to follow your lead. + +“Quintus the navy isn’t important at this time, we need land strength if we’re going to get anywhere. We’ll need it to fight the orcs, we’ll need it to keep the unhappy citizens in line when we finally get rid of this damn republic and we’re going to really need it when we have to expand and annex more territory. Now I understand you’ve got a pirate problem, but really other than trade with the usksha we don’t even need to send many ships out anyway other than small fishing boats for food. Start sending trade caravans directly through the desert. The usksha do it all the time.” +“Yeah because the sand savages are used to it! The merchant’s guild is going to pitch a fit.” +“Well fuck, I dunno what to tell you. The merchants are either going to have to tough it out in the desert or risk getting attacked by pirates. Shit’s tough all over. Come to think of it, you don’t even like the damn usksha and want them out of the country anyway. Seems to me you could start working on that policy now that you’ve been getting a little more of the public on your side. If all goes well, Nalin won’t have to trade with the usksha at all in the future. No trade with the usksha, no need for merchant ships. No merchant ships, no pirates, unless they get crazy desperate and start attacking the coastal towns, but that’s why we’ve going to protect against such invasions.” + +Quintus thinks about your proposal for a moment and of course he sees the wisdom in it. + +“Yes, and the funds that are being spent on the navy can be used for other things. Hm, I suppose if I support the senate majority to dismantle the navy anyway I’ll look a little more agreeable, I imagine that’ll be good too. The question is where all the displaced sailors are going to do and go. I suppose some will just become fishers.” +“Yes, and if not, well there’s always more room in the army. I’ll let you worry about that, I need to get back to it.” + +Quintus bids you goodbye and you’re glad to leave his mansion before you run into his slutty daughter. You’re in no mood for her tiresome attempts at seduction right now. + +Over the next few months you continue getting Nalin’s “best” into shape and start launching your own raids into known orc territory. You always make sure not to do too much damage of course, but you’re not yielding the results you want. You’re not getting orc counter raids or attacks. In fact you think they’ve lessened! + +This is somewhat discouraging, because while you’re succeeding in creating a stronger army, you’re failing in the second half of your plan. You think you might have to do something else. + +On you way back from a raid, you and your men stop off at Calvin’s excavation site to rest. Two years have passed since you got dug up and they’re still digging through the ruins of the old capital. It’s actually impressive how much they have managed to find. Calvin even found a few of the flattened broken bones of his ancestor Jacob. (Never did find Semra’s though) + +Calvin and his crew are always glad to have more soldiers around so you’re naturally awarded all the hospitality they have to offer. While you sit by yourself pondering your next move with this situation, Jennifer suddenly pops up to speak with you. + +“I see you’re your usual brooding self.” Jennifer says coming up to you. +“Hm, that took awhile. Usually when I make stops here, you’re here a lot sooner. I was beginning to worry.” You remark. +“Well you did looked worried, but I doubt if it was about me hovering around you. So what’s wrong this time?” + +Over the years Jennifer has probably become the closest thing you have to a friend. Granted you never had many before in your old life, but you at least had a few people to speak with about your own troubles. So far Jennifer is about the only one you feel comfortable with speaking about your own private concerns. + +“It’s just the orcs. I thought for sure they’d be attacking en mass by now.” +“And an orc horde would be a good thing?” +“If we want Quintus’ dreams of reviving the Empire it would be. Guess I’m going to have to redouble my efforts on antagonizing the orcs.” +“Have you ever considered that you’re scaring them more than you’re angering them?” +“That seems unlikely. Orcs are nearly immune to fear. Most of them are too stupid and the rest are too bold.” +“Maybe that was true during your time, but I’m sure you’ve noticed things have changed.” +“They’re orcs Jennifer, how much could they have changed? Well besides the war paint I mean.” +“Surely you’ve noticed on your raids and travels that these orcs are still very different than the ones you knew. They’re tribal for one, but not just that, they’re also superstitious. Tends to come with tribal societies.” +“So?” +“So, over the centuries they’ve probably built their own tales, taboos and lore based on the ruins of the old Empire alone. That’s a lot of symbols and icons that they’ve probably incorporated into their society. Then you pop up and you’re still dressed in your old Empire armor and who know what stories that might cause because of the similar symbols and insignia on them. Think about it, for about two years now you’ve been mostly acting alone in attacking them. You’re shooting lightning and fire from your fingers as if it was nothing and you’ve probably slain more of them with your sword than the whole Nalin army ever has with bullets. They probably think you’re some immortal warrior spirit of old.” Jennifer explains. +“Well, I was dug up from a kind of grave.” +“Exactly, so in the scheme of things orcs have every reason in the world to fear you just like most people with a lick of sense do.” +“Heh, you don’t fear me.” +“Of course I don’t. I’m your friend.” Jennifer says and grabs your hand. You clasp your other hand on top of hers. +“Yes. Yes you are. Well I guess I need to find out if I am indeed something special to these orcs or not.” +“What’re you going to do?” +“Well I know the biggest tribe in the Quala Badlands is the Floggers. Maybe if I can bring them under heel, I can just make them DO what I want. I probably should go alone.” +“Hold on, the Floggers are pretty damn big and are positioned near Rask which is monster haven, you sure you shouldn’t have some sort of back up? I know you’re a big tough Eternal and all, but maybe you should take some of the soldiers you’ve been training.” +“Nah, I’d be better off doing this by myself.” You say. + +“Ever the loner eh? Well I figured as much. I know it’s silly to worry after all you’ve survived, but just be careful okay?” Jennifer says and she briefly moves her face closer to yours, but then stops and then awkwardly excuses herself. + +You tell your soldiers that they can either stay here or return to their posts and say you have your own business to take care of. Since they’re used to you going off by yourself, they acknowledge your orders and you think no more of it. + +Just as you’re about to leave you get a surprising visit from Calvin. + +“Hey, I’m glad I caught you before you left.” He says. +“Calvin? You don’t normally want to speak with me.” +“Well, as my daughter has probably no doubt told you I’m a little afraid of you, but I’m having one of those infamous brave Mol moments. It’s actually about my daughter.” +“What about her?” +“You are aware that she’s fond of you right?” +“Yeeeah…I think she just tried to kiss me but stopped herself from doing so. It was sort of uncomfortable.” +“I see…so I trust you do not feel the same way.” +“Well…(Sigh) it’s not that, its just…look it’s not my area of expertise and I’ve got a lot else on my mind right now.” +“Hm, understandable.” Calvin remarks. +“There are also some other feelings that involve the past that I don’t wish to discuss right now. That being said, I can honestly say I enjoy her company. She’s the only real friend I have.” +“That’s good. That’s good. I only bring this up because I know that great change is ever looming and most likely that change is going to be violent no matter how you and Quintus are going to go about it. I’d just like to make sure my daughter’s safe and I figure if she was with you then that safety is guaranteed, along with her happiness of course.” +“Hm, don’t be so sure of that. I imagine I’ll be drawing a lot of fire no matter what happens.” +“Better that she be with a strong shield that draws a lot of fire than with no shield at all.” +“Ha ha ha! So I’m a shield am I?” you chuckle. +“Aren’t we all before the chaos?” Calvin remarks and tells you to just think about your own feelings towards his daughter. + +You’ve never had someone trying to pair you up with their daughter before. Something about it makes you feel a little strange. You decide to get on with your task to intimidate some orcs into submission, at least that’s more familiar to you. + +You make your way north. You haven’t had too many run ins with the Flogger tribe, due to their far away location, but you did ambush a few of their kind a couple times. You don’t know how the survivors have described you, hopefully it is as Jennifer suggested, and it’s with awe. + +Along the way you don’t encounter much trouble, you get attacked by a few half mad bandits, but that’s about it. Eventually you know you’re coming to the Flogger territory since you see the dead bodies of other orcs, humans, and even a few elves and ogres stretched across various wooden frames with their backs completely flayed of all skin. Down to the bone actually. Crows and other scavenger types gnaw at the rotting carcasses. The gruesome sight stretches from east to west as far as your eyes can see. + +You notice two orcs standing look out on a crude watchtower just behind the wall of bodies. When you get closer they call out to you and raise their bows. + +“Oi! What you doin’ ‘ere ‘uman?” one of them asks. You didn’t expect such civility, let alone coherence. +“I’m here to see your chieftain!” you answer. +“Wez gots no chieftain! Wez stronger than dat! Wez got shaman! Other tribes jealous! Ha ha ha ha ha ha!” +“Great, so let me see your shaman. I have something to discuss with him.” + +The two orcs look at you and then whisper to each other a bit. This is all a bit strange, you fully expected to get attacked when you arrived or failing that the orcs running away in fear. They haven’t done either yet. + +“Mm, yeah youz look like him, but need to be sure…um Bilge what waz we spose to ask again?” one orc asks the other. +“Youz forgot? Youz an idjit Fatbelly! You said youz remember! Me dunno either!” Bilge says. +“Okay, okay, shaddup! Me member now. Are youz dah ‘ternal man?” Fatbelly asks you. +“Yes.” You answer assuming he means eternal. +“Okay, youz can go troo, Shaman Trog been ‘spectin you. Just keep goin straight ahead an’ he should meet youz.” +“Wait, expecting me? How?” you ask. +“Dreams. Vishuns. Sumthin. Dunno, he magik. Ugh, brain hurt thinkin’ bout it. Go away now.” + +There doesn’t seem to be much else to do, so you proceed to follow Fatbelly’s instructions. You pass through the line of flayed corpses and the watchtower. In the distance you see what looks to be enough simple huts to be considered a village. However you aren’t going to have to walk that far because a single orc dressed in tribal garb stands between you and it. He holds a decorated staff in hand and looks old for an orc. This must be Shaman Trog. + +You aren’t sure what to expect, but you draw your weapon just in case. + +“Ah, you here finally. Trog saw that you come and Trog’s visions always right…well most of time.” +“You can see into the future eh? Well then I suppose you know why I’m here then.” You remark. +“No Trog not know. Cannot predict future. Just see that Eternal man come. The last true remnant of the long dead Empire that enslaved all within its shadow. So why you here? You here to finally kill us all?” +“Well, that’s up to you Trog. I have a proposal.” +“Huh, can’t be good if you here. Very well, Trog shall hear your proposal.” + +You explain to Trog what the situation is though at first you wonder if he’s going to understand all of it, but it would seem he’s one of the smart ones, then again he is a shaman so he can’t be entirely dim in the first place. + +“Trog see…so it’s worse than Trog feared, you seek to make slaves of all of us again.” +“No, I just need you to attack the Nalin Republic.” +“Yes, you seek to manipulate us into doing your dirty work. How is that not slavery? Worse, your plan seeks to bring back the power that nearly lead us all into extinction. Only after centuries we are strong and free again.” +“You know, orcs didn’t fare so badly under the Empire. They were some of the best soldiers.” +“They were used as expendable shields for the weaker human troops.” +“And how do you know all this?” +“Ha ha! Writings! You think orcs not write, but we do! Maybe just pictures, but we do! We also tell stories! After Empire fall to big bang, orcs of old pass down tales. Tribe’s founder and my great ancestor, Flog pass down first stories. We never forget. That’s why we orcs know you. You wear the mark of the old days. Not know how you still alive. Maybe you really eternal, but if we are to die, then we die free, not die slow as slaves.” + +You can’t believe it. You’re arguing with an orc about civil liberties! Still, if he is up on the history as he says then there is surely mention of one orc in particular and it might just convince him to change his mind. + +“Captain Gruz did not consider himself to be a slave.” You remark, which causes Trog’s eyes to widen. +“You…you knew the Warmaster?” Trog asks. +“Oh yes, I met him and he even gave me a little insight to be a better soldier during my first assignment. I only regret I didn’t get to serve with him during the Felkan War. I heard of his many magnificent deeds though.” +“He slew many enemies on the day of his death. The entire story of that day is a glorious tale.” +“Yes, and he was hailed as one of the greatest heroes of the Empire. He did his duty as a soldier of the Empire and had no shame about it. He was no slave, let me tell you. He was a proud soldier who loved that he served the Empire. His only wish was to die a glorious death in its service and he did. Because he served the Empire with distinction even now the knowledge of his deeds are still known. Help me bring it back and your deeds may become as well known as his own, possibly even more so.” + +Trog studies you as if to determine if you’re just trying to sweet talk him. He looks tired though, as if he doesn’t really want to fight you even if you are lying to him. + +“Trog…cannot completely determine your ultimate intentions Eternal, however Trog sense your words about the Warmaster to be respectful and truthful. Trog suppose if great Warmaster Gruz taught you to be a better warrior then you would not speak lies about him. (Sigh) Very well, Trog shall do what Trog can to help you, but Trog can’t promise that Trog will be able to unite all of the tribes in the Quala Badlands.” +“Don’t need them all, just enough to cause a lot of damage.” +“Hm, well if there’s anything we’re good at, it’s that. Trog suppose a lot of my people are going to die in the process of this scheme, Trog only hope that in the long run we will be in a better position.” +“I promise you that your people will always remember what you have done today.” +“Trog not sure if that good yet.” Trog remarks and shuffles off towards the village in the distance. + +You guess your work is done here. Now only time will tell if this is going to be successful or not. +> Years pass... +Year 540 + +It’s not there yet, but the political and social climate in the republic is finally getting to a point that’s a little more recognizable to you. Thanks to Trog’s actions the orcs have been attacking the Nalin just like you wanted. After a couple of burned down massacred villages, the Nalinites are a lot more supportive of military endeavors (Kobold citizens especially, but that’s hardly surprising given their nature). + +The citizens are also becoming more fearful and suspicious of other “foreign threats” like the usksha. Highlighting the sandman drug epidemic and the crime due to it, Quintus has managed to get restrictions on the southern borders of Nalin. The usksha that used to live within Nalin are starting to go back to their desert due to the increasingly hostile population. Trade hasn’t completely stopped, but the relationship between the republic and the emirates is very strained now. + +Of course some of this still wouldn’t be possible without senate support, however that’s become more in Quintus’ favor due to a combination of several factors. Some are just like the peasants, they’re getting scared because their comfortable lifestyle are at risk and want to protect themselves. Some were weak from the start and vote depending on which way the majority is heading. + +There are still holdouts that don’t agree with the more militant policies however. Even the “will of the people” does not sway them to fall in line. The most vocal of these is Senator Batalimus Ventis who has been a long time rival of Quintus. He’s stated that this trend towards militarism is going lead back to the dark days of when Matriarch Tarna ruled the land. He has also stated quite openly that Quintus is a warmongering fool that is only a puppet for his “mysterious Eternal” advisor. + +Quintus hates the man more than he hates the usksha and feels he’s the main cause of all his woes. Apparently he’s also decided that even if it isn’t quite time to dismantle the senate, it is time to get rid of Batalimus and has tried to have the man assassinated on a few occasions. All attempts have failed so far though and all it’s done is served to make Batalimus more cautious and legitimize his accusations about Quintus (Even if he can’t quite connect Quintus to the actual assassins). + +You’re going to have to speak with Trog soon about the attacks having served their purpose and that he needs to ease up. Trog is under the impression that after all this is over; he or at least his people will have a place within the new order when it finally comes about. In truth, you’d like to have a few orc legions if only for the intimidation factor of keeping the citizenry in line. However, you aren’t exactly sure how likely that’s going to be since orcs are increasingly becoming hated by the average citizen and are unlikely to want them to be incorporated into the new order no matter what. Let alone as soldiers. + +Another problem for another day you suppose. Right now though you’re on your way back from another visit with Quintus (who basically did nothing but bitch about Bartalimus) and on your way back to Quala. You’re a lot better known now and as you pass through you mostly get a lot of respectful nods from the military and worried glances from citizens. Your reputation within the republic has grown and it’s much like it was back in the old Empire days. There’s a certain familiar comfort in that. + +Before you leave Dalt you decide to pay a visit to Calvin’s museum to see Jennifer. Since the orc war, expeditions to the Quala Badland have been put on hold so Calvin and Jennifer have returned to work at their museum to study what they have found in more detail and ultimately put it on display. + +When you enter, you see a sign that tells people to be sure to visit their brand new Empire exhibits. Naturally you wander over to where these displays are, so you can see how much they actually got right. + +When you get to the exhibit its currently empty of visitors. You’re impressed with what you see though. They’ve managed to recreate a small portion of the Emperor’s palace and fill it with the old stuff they found. Some of the things are just replicas, but they’re very good replicas and in the correct locations. They even managed to restore one of the Emperor’s big black statues. + +Just looking at all this stuff makes you feel like you’re back where you should be. When you close your eyes you can almost imagine that you are where you WANT to be. If only things had been different, you wouldn’t have to be starting all over again… + +“We tried to make it look like what we thought it looked like in the past and based on writings we found.” You hear Jennifer’s voice say and you open your eyes to see her stand to the right of you. +“You did a good job, almost feels like home. That big ass black statue wasn’t in the throne room though. In fact the Emperor never even used the throne room when I knew him.” You say. +“Yeah, but we did have any place else to put it. I think its impressive looking where we did put it though. Should draw in a lot of people. So did you come here to revisit old memories?” +“Not at first, but this is was a nice distraction.” +“Glad to hear it, well I’ll leave you to your thoughts.” Jennifer says and begins to leave. +“No, stay here with me, I came here to see you in first place. Besides, no point in reliving past glories when I don’t have anyone to share said glories with.” You say and grab her hand. + +Jennifer’s reaction is a positive one in that she doesn’t let go and moves closer to you. + +“So since you’ve got the time, how about you tell me about some of those old glories?” Jennifer asks. + +You gladly do so. + +You talk with Jennifer for hours until it starts getting late at which point you say you have to get back to your mission in Quala. Jennifer understands and wishes you luck on it. + +“If you’re going wish me luck, how about you do it with a kiss?” you ask which takes Jennifer by surprise. +“That’s certainly new. What brought this on?” +“I thought you liked me. You do don’t you?” +“Of course, I’m sure I was pretty obvious about it.” +“Well why ask why? I’m fond of you as well. I like your company and you’re the only person I’ve ever considered my friend since I got dug up. You’re independent, you’re physically attractive and you listen to all my stories. What’s not to like?” You say which causes a small chuckle from Jennifer. +“Okay…we’ll talk more about this later, but for right now, here’s that kiss.” + +Jennifer moves in to kiss you and the pair of you embrace. + +After your minor amorous interlude, you take your leave of the museum. You briefly wonder if pursuing a relationship with Jennifer is a good idea, but what’s done is done and you’ll just have to figure it out. Once again, another problem for another day you suppose. + +Just as you get out of the gates of Dalt, two guards approach you. They’re not military or domestic security, they look like private guards, probably those of a senator. + +“You the Eternal?” one of them asks. +“Yes.” You answer. +“Senator Batalimus wants to see you. If you would accompany us to his home please, it’s just a few miles west of this city.” + +Well this is an interesting turn of events, though perhaps not entirely unexpected. If you had to guess, Batalimus either plans to have you killed when you arrive to meet him or he’s going to try to convince you to be on his side. You doubt he has the means to do either. + +You don’t know if you should even bother entertaining him at all, but then you think if he does try to kill you, then you’ll have eliminated the need to kill him later. Hell, even if he doesn’t try to kill you, maybe you should just do it anyway. + +You agree to follow the guards and eventually you reach Batalimus’ estate. His home isn’t much bigger than Quintus’ home, though there are a lot more trees and gardens on his grounds. As you expect there are a lot of guards patrolling about. When you step through the front door you feel like you’ve stepped into a barracks rather than a senator’s mansion due to all the guards standing around. + +Soon an older balding man dressed in a purple robe comes down the grandiose staircase. It’s Batalimus. + +“Ah the Eternal, at last we meet face to face.” Batalimus says. +“Yes, I’m surprised that you didn’t confiscate my weapons though.” You answer. +“Whatever for? We all know you can just incinerate or fry everyone in the room with the snap of your fingers. It’s not like you actually need a sword or even a pistol. You’re a walking weapon without such things.” +“So? Why risk bringing me here then?” +“Because I have nothing to lose. Your associate, Quintus seems quite determined to have me killed. Granted he always has harbored ill feelings, but now that the little reprobate has the advantage his confidence has reached an all time high. I suppose the fool has to have his fun though given the family he has. In any case I figure its only a matter of time before he sends you to do the deed and while I could increase my security even further, I quite frankly doubt if it would stop the likes of you. At best you might get mad.” + +You have to appreciate someone who knows exactly where they stand. + +“So…you brought me here to kill you?” +“Hah, I hope not, but I suppose that is a strong possibility. No, what I’d like to do is try to convince you to perhaps not kill the republic because that is what you and Quintus are striving to do, though I believe I actually have a shot with getting through to you. You aren’t saddled with any emotions of hatred towards me. To you, I’m just another potential obstacle in your goals. If I have to be killed then you will, but if it isn’t necessary you won’t.” + +Well it looks like Batalimus has opted to try to get you on his side, just like you thought he might. He is over estimating your willingness to kill him though. True you don’t have any hatred for the man and quite honestly you probably already respect him more than Quintus within the short time you’ve met him, but you’ve been known to kill folks even if you believe that they will be potential obstacles in the future. + +Still, killing Batalimus right now isn’t exactly part of the plan, so you’ll most likely just leave unless he tries to stop you. Then again you did come all this way so there is no harm in hearing him out. +> Stay +“Okay, I’ll listen to your pleas, but I doubt that you will be able to convince me of anything.” You remark. +“You seem so certain.” Batalimus says. +“Of course I am. For one I am not some scared citizen or greedy senator that can be bribed or frightened into submission. I am not an ignorant peasant either that can be merely swayed by lies.” +“Never thought you were.” +“Second and more importantly, I was not impressed with your republic when I was first dug up and I continue to be unimpressed with it now. It is an inefficient form of government that allows too much power to the people and it doesn’t even do that right, considering all the corruption.” +“Oh I wouldn’t say that. Within the last few years the people have been making demands for more security and defense and Quintus has been delivering appeasement to them. It would seem that you’ve managed make the system work for you.” Batalimus says. +“And don’t you think that’s proof that your system is broken? If YOU were the ruler of this country you wouldn’t be in the situation you are now. You’d be able to have Quintus executed along with everyone that didn’t fall in line.” +“You may be right.” +“Of course I’m right, because the masses are by and large weak-willed fools that actually desire a strong hand to rule them and do the thinking for them. Honestly I don’t know how your system lasted as long as it did.” +“Because it worked or at least it did before you came around.” +“So…you’re going to blame me for your system’s weaknesses? Seems to me it should’ve been strong enough to weather the presence of one man.” + +Batalimus begins laughing. + +“One man? Yes. It’s done that for quite some time. Do you think Quintus is the ONLY one who has ever wanted to bring back the so called good old days? His kind has always existed in some form or another since the infancy of the republic. Sometimes there were even whole groups of his type. The difference is, there was never any incentive for the rest of the population to actually listen to them before. There was never a living god on their side defending everyone from vicious foreign attacks like those of the orcs, let alone scaring the hell out of everyone by his mere presence.” +“I’m not a god.” +“For all intents and purposes you might as well be. The rumors alone are enough to cause most to think you are, but even without such rumors, the facts are still enough to impress what you would call the masses. Quintus isn’t the only one who has access to old Empire history at the Mol Museum. You were the right hand man of a supposedly near omnipotent emperor, you survived the cataclysm that destroyed the old empire, you’re certainly the most skilled warrior that anyone has ever seen and you command the use of magic, which is an incredibly rare thing nowadays. Other than the few exceptional svelk in Lenay, wizards just don’t exist anymore let alone any of your power. I doubt with even all the magic trinkets Quintus has dug up, he’ll be able to protect himself when you finally decide to kill him.” + +Granted you haven’t given that possibility much serious thought, Batalimus is probably right about that outcome. + +“While all this is very interesting, you’ve still failed to make your case and you’re beginning to waste my time.” You say. +“Yes, forgive me. I’m used to droning on in the senate, I forget that someone like you would rather get right to the point. Right then, here it is, the Republic is better in the long term for the people than your Empire.” + +You’re silent. + +“I certainly hope that isn’t your only argument Batalimus.” +“No, but it should be the only one that matters. Even if you succeed in all your endeavors, you have to know that this revived Empire isn’t going to last. At best it’ll last a century after your own death and given that you’re constantly walking in its shadow who knows how quick that might come.” +“Choose your next words carefully, one could perceive that as a threat.” +“A threat? No. Poorly worded, I’ll agree. Mainly because I doubt you’ll actually die violently despite your particular lifestyle. I’d almost be willing to wager that you’ll die an old man in your sleep. A great irony I suppose. Anyway, the point still remains, you have to know that your Empire will not last long after your death, it didn’t even last long during your life.” +“It only fell because of…” you nearly say because of your actions, but you stop yourself. +“Because of what?” Batalimus asks. +“Because of the cataclysm. It would’ve still been standing today if that hadn’t been the case.” +“You’re guessing. Even if the cataclysm hadn’t occurred it would’ve been something else. Despite the fact that you belonged to a repressive system, I do know that in your way you served the concept of the greater good. You believe that you’re actually helping the people by keeping them in line. And maybe you even are to a certain extent, but it’s at the cost of liberty and freedom and that is an anathema to me. I’m watching all of what was built being slowly destroyed before my eyes. We as a people came out from the chaos of cataclysm and eventually found a better way to live. One that didn’t submit to the whims of a single ruler or is at the mercy of a tyrant. No, it wasn’t a perfect system, but we were always working to fix the problems for the people and they were happy. I don’t see any joy when I look at people nowadays; all I see is fear, paranoia and suspicion. Can’t you see that all you’re doing is throwing the people to a backwards age and ultimately it will do nobody any good?” +“Good thing I’m not trying to please you then and I’d argue that I’ve already fixed a few of the major problems with the recent changes. For one, crime is down and you’re no longer a potential doormat if anyone stronger should suddenly appear. Even the pirate attacks are much lower now.” You answer. +“Yes, military strength the backbone of all proper dictators. Let me guess, after this place is completely under your thumb your next step will be to send it forth and conquer land right? How are you going to do that for the Qualan Badlands? You going to force thousands of people to settle on inhospitable land where it’s near impossible to farm? And how do your orc friends figure into all this? I know that you probably have some sort of conspiracy going on with them, because they never attacked us like they have been recently. You going to somehow force the Nalin citizens with their newfound xenophobia to live with them or are you going to just commit genocide on the orcs and chalk them up to expendable losses? Then what after? You going to waste countless lives conquering the six cities of Arat? The Usksha Emirates? The Redcap Kingdom? Where is it going to end? Tell me, what do you personally hope to gain by re-establishing an empire? A need for familiarity? A simple power grab? Is it all because of an outdated sense of duty? Whatever the reason, none of them are really good ones for what you’re doing. Your time was the PAST and you can’t recapture what you lost. Your Empire as you knew it is long dead because all things eventually end. All of this, what you’re doing is proof that you just can’t accept that fact.” + +You’ve heard enough. + +“Funny that you said that Bata, because I’d say that it’s the opposite.” +“What?” +“You. Your republic is dying and this desperate attempt to try to convince me to not continue my actions is proof that YOU can’t accept that all things eventually end.” +“I know somewhere within you that you can see my side of this! I mean I won’t deny that your presence hasn’t been positive for the country in some ways. You could still have a place here in the Republic. You have so much power. Power that could be used to help people in a positive way! Wouldn’t you rather be known as a loved hero rather than a figure of fear?” Batalimus exclaims. +“I’ve known several heroes in the past. Some of them fellow Eternals and all of them were figures of fear. Look, I’ve already pointed out the weakness of your inferior system and you’ve failed to convince me otherwise. Doesn’t matter if I do or don’t see your side of things. Whatever motivations you think I’m doing this for don’t matter. I’m fairly certain whatever other arguments you may have aren’t going to convince me either, so this has just been a waste of both of our time.” + +It takes a moment for Batalimus to gather his thoughts. + +“I had hoped and perhaps naively thought that you were a reasonable man, but I was wrong. Apparently I did bring you here to kill me. Maybe not in the physical sense, but I see now that there will be no stopping what is to come. It’s a bitter thing seeing what you love the most die before your eyes.” +“Join the club Bata. And I’m not talking about the Empire.” You answer and take that as your cue to leave. + +You half expect Batalimus to have his guards attack you in some last attempt to save his republic, but he just sits there impotently in defeat. + +And that’s exactly why his republic is dying. Nobody cares enough about it to fight for it. This man is probably the only one left who does care and he used words as his weapons. Better that he should’ve tried to have you assassinated as soon as you walked in the door. + +But this isn’t your problem, your problems are elsewhere and after you leave Batalimus’ home, you head back to the Qualan Badlands. + +A few days later while at your patrol camp, you receive a letter from a messenger. At first you think it’s from Quintus with another request to help him with some task that is too difficult for him, but you’re surprised when you find out it’s from Batalimus. + +Eternal, + +By the time you read this, I will be dead. I want to thank you for I believe our little talk finally gave me the courage to just end it all. The funny thing is I had the idea to have Quintus assassinated before I spoke with you thinking that even if I couldn’t kill you, I would at least have taken away your partner on the public relations side of things, making the transition from republic to empire a little more difficult for you. Perhaps you would’ve even gotten so frustrated that you would’ve left. + +Then I realized I can’t save the republic by destroying it or my ideals. And it wouldn’t have stopped you anyway. The days of the republic are indeed numbered and I’d rather remember it as it was rather than continuing to see its own death throes. It is my time that has passed. Your time is now. + +Still, I can’t help being an idealist. Perhaps if your Empire can live again, then perhaps one day so will my republic. I can have faith in that as I pass on to the other world. + +Good luck Eternal in your pursuit of war and conquest, though I should like to think that maybe my words still got through to you a little bit. That maybe you will realize that the people are important and not just resources to be used on a battlefield or wherever else. That a government can exist that doesn’t require repressive domestic methods or the subjugation of foreign lands. + +But then as I said, I am an idealist. + +Batalimus Ventis + +After reading the letter you toss it in the fire. One of the soldiers asks you if it’s another order from Quintus. + +“No, just news that another obstacle is no longer an issue.” You remark. + +A few days pass and you have been thinking about Batalimus’ words a lot more since there isn’t much going on in the way of action in camp. While he ended up agreeing with you that the republic is coming to an end no matter what, you’re still struggling with the idea that what is going to replace it, since it won’t truly be the Empire as you knew it. Ol’ Batty was right even you did change his mind. Your time is STILL the past. + +You’ve had five years to get “used” to the changes and while you have and are even thriving, you’re never going to feel comfortable. Even if you kill Quintus and seize power and everything goes well with that, you still have to go through the process of reconquering everything again. Something you really shouldn’t have to do. + +You should’ve had a your “birthright” over five hundred years ago. Now you feel like you’re having to play catch up for a much lesser prize. Most of the old lands are indeed ruined to a degree that you can’t imagine anyone wanting to live there even if you did conquer it. Pushing people into doing so is libel to cause a revolt at worst or just flat out attrition at best…ugh…shit you don’t want to even ponder yet. + +And what’s the alternative? Not killing Quintus and serving as his loyal right hand goon? Continuing to watch that fool take ALL the credit for stuff you will no doubt have a hand in? No, you did that already and at least with the Emperor you didn’t have to put up with any sort of dysfunctional family every time you visited him. + +You think back to when you spent time in the museum with Jennifer talking about that past. That’s still the happiest you’ve been since you woke up. You even wonder if you shouldn’t just abandon all these desires and ambitions. What has it really gotten you in the scheme of things? You made the big gamble the first time and it didn’t work out maybe that was a sign. + +You wonder if you shouldn’t just settle down with Jennifer and try to live a normal life. +> Dismiss such thoughts +This is silly, here you are with the Empire so close to resurrection and you’re sitting here wondering if it’s all worth it. Of course it’s worth it! It’s what your whole life has been about and it doesn’t matter what time period it is. + +Whether you’re ruling it, or someone else is, it doesn’t matter. The Empire must live on. If you just give up now, then what was the point of any of it? And as for Jennifer, you probably should just put an end to that disaster waiting to happen as soon as you can. + +She’s a nice girl and everything, but she’s not Alison and she never will be. Not to mention with you by her side she’s likely to wind up dead just like Alison. You have no doubt that you’ll eventually acquire some powerful enemies looking to take advantage of any possible weakness you might have. + +You return to your duties without another thought. + +After about a couple of weeks of your regular rounds in Quala, you decide its time to go visit Trog about your arrangement and how it needs to be altered. With Batalimus’ suicide, Quintus’ larger influence and the army now stronger than it ever has been, you don’t really need orcs as a terror distraction anymore, especially if you want to incorporate them into this new Empire one day. Of course that plan may still fail, but your current deal is a deal and you and Trog have dealt straight with each other so far. + +You travel the Flogger tribe’s territory and just like last time, Trog was already expecting your visit. + +“So once again the Eternal visits Trog. Is our arrangement going as planned?” +“Yes, but that’s why I’m here. We’ve gotten what we need from the war. You no longer have to play any role in it, that is stirring up the other orc tribes.” +“Trog see. Very well we did have an agreement and the Floggers have benefitted greatly from this arrangement, so it is done for now. However, Trog cannot promise that other minor tribes will not still attack. Can only promise that Floggers will no longer play any part in such attacks.” +“That’s fine, probably for the best that we still get a few attacks. Well that was all I had to say, I’ll see you around…” + +You’re about to leave, but Trog speaks up. + +“Are you not also here about your people that went up to explore Rask?” Trog asks. +“No. What people?” +“Trog surprised that you did not know. Two weeks ago a group came here attempting to seek passage through Flogger territory. They were lead by a woman with black hair. Trog assumed you knew about this because the woman certainly knew enough about our arrangement to attempt such a thing in the first place.” +“Wait, was this woman’s name Jennifer Mol?” +“Trog believe that it was. Said she was trying to explore Rask for some warrior’s guild or something. Even Trog not sure if it exists, just heard the rumors at times.” +“So did you let her through?” +“No. She refused to pay the toll which was to leave a couple of her people here for good will.” +“So she went back home then.” +“No. She said she’d go around, but then she attempted to sneak through our territory at a weakly guarded area during the night instead.” + +You almost don’t want to hear what is going to come next. + +“Trog see that this woman is someone important to you? If it helps, Floggers did not kill her. She managed to hide and escape before we could. Floggers did however capture and kill some of her crew though. Floggers cannot just have people coming through territory without permission. Cannot show weakness. Trog hopes you understand this. Trog even had guards that were supposed to be watching that area killed for their lack of attention.” + +Strangely enough you do understand. You can’t really be angry at Trog and the rest of his tribe for being territorial. It was actually pretty civilized of them to offer a toll option in the first place. Really you can’t believe Jennifer would be so foolhardy to attempt something like this, but then she has been braving the dangers of Quala long before you even showed up, so maybe this isn’t too out of character for her, especially when she’s got her mind set on an expedition. + +“So…do you know where she went?” +“North, past Flogger territory. That was two weeks ago though, Trog doubts that she still alive. Rask is very harsh, even more than Quala, also the dreaded wendigo live there. She has not tried to sneak back through Flogger territory and Flogger’s would know because we’ve increased the guards since her break through.” + +Part of you almost wants to go try to find her; despite the fact you just recently believed that the two of you shouldn’t attempts any sort of relationship. Now you start to wonder if you could’ve prevented all this if you HAD gone to see her two weeks ago. You resist the urge though. For one thing, it’s been two weeks. Any way of tracking her is going to be poor at best given all the snowstorms Rask endures. Second, her group isn’t the most battle ready. They’re going to mostly consist of scholar types that can’t fight worth shit. While she probably took a few soldiers with her, even they’re going to be fucked when they encounter something like a wendigo or even a giant. + +She’s dead and that’s it. Just eliminates the need for you to worry about one more decision. It doesn’t put you in the best of moods though. + +It’s that mood that has you return to Nalin and the capital where you see Quintus. + +“Good, I’m glad you’re back, we need to…” Quintus begins to say when you come through the front door of his house and then he notices the fresh blood on your sword and his guards nowhere to be seen. His eyes widen when you raise your hand up to cast a lightning bolt to his face. + +You find however that the spell fails to work on him and one of his rings glows brightly. + +“I figured one of those rings protected you from magic. Pity, I was trying to give you a quick and less painful death.” You say and advance upon him with your sword in hand. +“No! What’re you doing?! We’re on the same side! We were going to revive the Empire!” Quintus exclaims backing up on the stairway and attempts to rub one of his rings. You aren’t exactly sure what he’s attempting to do, but you’re not going to let him do it. + +You making a lunging rush at him and he nearly disappears before you, but you’ve already stuck him like a pig. His brief attempt at invisibility fades as his dying face stares at you. + +“Wh…why? I…helped…I…was going…to be…emperor…” +“Plans change.” you say and throw Quintus over the stair railing where his body falls to the floor in a bloody heap. + +Afterwards you take care of Quintus’ family. As dysfunctional as they all are, the last thing you need is for any of them to attempt revenge for whatever reason. + +The day after, you gather as many soldiers as you can, march into the senate and officially dissolve it in a very violent way. Every senator is killed and the floors of the senate hall run red with blood that day. Most beg for mercy, but you’re not in a mercy-giving mood. + +A few days later and it’s official. You make your announcement that the Republic is dead and that the Empire now lives again. The general public doesn’t know quite what to make of everything. You’re sure that there will be some sort of misguided rebellion, but with the military behind you’re confident that you won’t have too much trouble. + +Year 542 + +You’re so damn tired you don’t even know when the last time you had any proper sleep. It’s just been one rebellion after another and ongoing strife. You haven’t even had thoughts of expansion mainly because you’ve been attempting to maintain order on what you do have. + +You have attempted to recreate a secret police in a similar style of the Emperor’s Eyes, but efforts haven’t proved too successful mainly because you’re too busy using the military to keep direct order. + +It isn’t that the people don’t fear you, it’s that they hate you more than they fear. Even after you’ve destroyed entire towns that have dared defy you, you still get pockets of resistance running off into the wilderness to cause ongoing problems. + +Your methods in the beginning months were probably too harsh in retrospect, but your mind wasn’t in the best place then due to Jennifer’s death, which you took a little harder than you imagined you would. Killing everyone in the senate certainly didn’t help as perhaps some of those experienced fools might’ve still been useful in swaying public opinion and dealing with the more mundane issues of running the government. Combine this with the fact that the idea of things like “liberty” still lingered within the people, your brutal actions only proved to them what happens when a single tyrant takes power. Instead of cowing them into submission, you ended up lighting a fire of freedom that you still haven’t put out yet and at this point you wonder if you ever will. + +Even portions of your military have turned against you, if not outright treason then desertion. Some have fled to find work within the six cities of Arat or even joined up with the pirate groups in Delerg. + +Between the steady attrition of loyal soldiers, the ongoing defiance of the people, external threats like the Flogger tribe hearing of your struggles and taking advantage of your lightly defended outposts in Quala (And certainly have no intention of joining your Empire now) you are pushed to the brink and beyond. + +You decide if the fools won’t submit to your rule, you’ll burn the whole damn thing down. You unleash a terrible force of magic the likes most have never seen. You begin destroying entire cities and farmland. It gets to the point where even the most loyal won’t even follow you into destroying their homeland. + +Your reign of terror eventually comes to an end through a combined effort of the citizens of Nalin. Even your powerful magic can’t stop an entire nation out for your blood and near the end you’re exhausted and half crazed from bloodlust anyway. + +“Bah, I don’t need magic to do my work!” are your last words before you slaughter a few dozen men and women and are shot with several bullets and stabbed repeatedly by a mob. + +You might’ve still went down in history as reminder to the people of Nalin of why they should value freedom and never submit to a totalitarian state… + +But then the Flogger tribe rampaged through the decimated nation, which had practically depleted all of its resources in its war against you. The orcs leave no evidence of an Empire or a Republic ever having existed.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Okay, I’ll listen to your pleas, but I doubt that you will be able to convince me of anything.” You remark. +“You seem so certain.” Batalimus says. +“Of course I am. For one I am not some scared citizen or greedy senator that can be bribed or frightened into submission. I am not an ignorant peasant either that can be merely swayed by lies.” +“Never thought you were.” +“Second and more importantly, I was not impressed with your republic when I was first dug up and I continue to be unimpressed with it now. It is an inefficient form of government that allows too much power to the people and it doesn’t even do that right, considering all the corruption.” +“Oh I wouldn’t say that. Within the last few years the people have been making demands for more security and defense and Quintus has been delivering appeasement to them. It would seem that you’ve managed make the system work for you.” Batalimus says. +“And don’t you think that’s proof that your system is broken? If YOU were the ruler of this country you wouldn’t be in the situation you are now. You’d be able to have Quintus executed along with everyone that didn’t fall in line.” +“You may be right.” +“Of course I’m right, because the masses are by and large weak-willed fools that actually desire a strong hand to rule them and do the thinking for them. Honestly I don’t know how your system lasted as long as it did.” +“Because it worked or at least it did before you came around.” +“So…you’re going to blame me for your system’s weaknesses? Seems to me it should’ve been strong enough to weather the presence of one man.” + +Batalimus begins laughing. + +“One man? Yes. It’s done that for quite some time. Do you think Quintus is the ONLY one who has ever wanted to bring back the so called good old days? His kind has always existed in some form or another since the infancy of the republic. Sometimes there were even whole groups of his type. The difference is, there was never any incentive for the rest of the population to actually listen to them before. There was never a living god on their side defending everyone from vicious foreign attacks like those of the orcs, let alone scaring the hell out of everyone by his mere presence.” +“I’m not a god.” +“For all intents and purposes you might as well be. The rumors alone are enough to cause most to think you are, but even without such rumors, the facts are still enough to impress what you would call the masses. Quintus isn’t the only one who has access to old Empire history at the Mol Museum. You were the right hand man of a supposedly near omnipotent emperor, you survived the cataclysm that destroyed the old empire, you’re certainly the most skilled warrior that anyone has ever seen and you command the use of magic, which is an incredibly rare thing nowadays. Other than the few exceptional svelk in Lenay, wizards just don’t exist anymore let alone any of your power. I doubt with even all the magic trinkets Quintus has dug up, he’ll be able to protect himself when you finally decide to kill him.” + +Granted you haven’t given that possibility much serious thought, Batalimus is probably right about that outcome. + +“While all this is very interesting, you’ve still failed to make your case and you’re beginning to waste my time.” You say. +“Yes, forgive me. I’m used to droning on in the senate, I forget that someone like you would rather get right to the point. Right then, here it is, the Republic is better in the long term for the people than your Empire.” + +You’re silent. + +“I certainly hope that isn’t your only argument Batalimus.” +“No, but it should be the only one that matters. Even if you succeed in all your endeavors, you have to know that this revived Empire isn’t going to last. At best it’ll last a century after your own death and given that you’re constantly walking in its shadow who knows how quick that might come.” +“Choose your next words carefully, one could perceive that as a threat.” +“A threat? No. Poorly worded, I’ll agree. Mainly because I doubt you’ll actually die violently despite your particular lifestyle. I’d almost be willing to wager that you’ll die an old man in your sleep. A great irony I suppose. Anyway, the point still remains, you have to know that your Empire will not last long after your death, it didn’t even last long during your life.” +“It only fell because of…” you nearly say because of your actions, but you stop yourself. +“Because of what?” Batalimus asks. +“Because of the cataclysm. It would’ve still been standing today if that hadn’t been the case.” +“You’re guessing. Even if the cataclysm hadn’t occurred it would’ve been something else. Despite the fact that you belonged to a repressive system, I do know that in your way you served the concept of the greater good. You believe that you’re actually helping the people by keeping them in line. And maybe you even are to a certain extent, but it’s at the cost of liberty and freedom and that is an anathema to me. I’m watching all of what was built being slowly destroyed before my eyes. We as a people came out from the chaos of cataclysm and eventually found a better way to live. One that didn’t submit to the whims of a single ruler or is at the mercy of a tyrant. No, it wasn’t a perfect system, but we were always working to fix the problems for the people and they were happy. I don’t see any joy when I look at people nowadays; all I see is fear, paranoia and suspicion. Can’t you see that all you’re doing is throwing the people to a backwards age and ultimately it will do nobody any good?” +“Good thing I’m not trying to please you then and I’d argue that I’ve already fixed a few of the major problems with the recent changes. For one, crime is down and you’re no longer a potential doormat if anyone stronger should suddenly appear. Even the pirate attacks are much lower now.” You answer. +“Yes, military strength the backbone of all proper dictators. Let me guess, after this place is completely under your thumb your next step will be to send it forth and conquer land right? How are you going to do that for the Qualan Badlands? You going to force thousands of people to settle on inhospitable land where it’s near impossible to farm? And how do your orc friends figure into all this? I know that you probably have some sort of conspiracy going on with them, because they never attacked us like they have been recently. You going to somehow force the Nalin citizens with their newfound xenophobia to live with them or are you going to just commit genocide on the orcs and chalk them up to expendable losses? Then what after? You going to waste countless lives conquering the six cities of Arat? The Usksha Emirates? The Redcap Kingdom? Where is it going to end? Tell me, what do you personally hope to gain by re-establishing an empire? A need for familiarity? A simple power grab? Is it all because of an outdated sense of duty? Whatever the reason, none of them are really good ones for what you’re doing. Your time was the PAST and you can’t recapture what you lost. Your Empire as you knew it is long dead because all things eventually end. All of this, what you’re doing is proof that you just can’t accept that fact.” + +You’ve heard enough. + +“Funny that you said that Bata, because I’d say that it’s the opposite.” +“What?” +“You. Your republic is dying and this desperate attempt to try to convince me to not continue my actions is proof that YOU can’t accept that all things eventually end.” +“I know somewhere within you that you can see my side of this! I mean I won’t deny that your presence hasn’t been positive for the country in some ways. You could still have a place here in the Republic. You have so much power. Power that could be used to help people in a positive way! Wouldn’t you rather be known as a loved hero rather than a figure of fear?” Batalimus exclaims. +“I’ve known several heroes in the past. Some of them fellow Eternals and all of them were figures of fear. Look, I’ve already pointed out the weakness of your inferior system and you’ve failed to convince me otherwise. Doesn’t matter if I do or don’t see your side of things. Whatever motivations you think I’m doing this for don’t matter. I’m fairly certain whatever other arguments you may have aren’t going to convince me either, so this has just been a waste of both of our time.” + +It takes a moment for Batalimus to gather his thoughts. + +“I had hoped and perhaps naively thought that you were a reasonable man, but I was wrong. Apparently I did bring you here to kill me. Maybe not in the physical sense, but I see now that there will be no stopping what is to come. It’s a bitter thing seeing what you love the most die before your eyes.” +“Join the club Bata. And I’m not talking about the Empire.” You answer and take that as your cue to leave. + +You half expect Batalimus to have his guards attack you in some last attempt to save his republic, but he just sits there impotently in defeat. + +And that’s exactly why his republic is dying. Nobody cares enough about it to fight for it. This man is probably the only one left who does care and he used words as his weapons. Better that he should’ve tried to have you assassinated as soon as you walked in the door. + +But this isn’t your problem, your problems are elsewhere and after you leave Batalimus’ home, you head back to the Qualan Badlands. + +A few days later while at your patrol camp, you receive a letter from a messenger. At first you think it’s from Quintus with another request to help him with some task that is too difficult for him, but you’re surprised when you find out it’s from Batalimus. + +Eternal, + +By the time you read this, I will be dead. I want to thank you for I believe our little talk finally gave me the courage to just end it all. The funny thing is I had the idea to have Quintus assassinated before I spoke with you thinking that even if I couldn’t kill you, I would at least have taken away your partner on the public relations side of things, making the transition from republic to empire a little more difficult for you. Perhaps you would’ve even gotten so frustrated that you would’ve left. + +Then I realized I can’t save the republic by destroying it or my ideals. And it wouldn’t have stopped you anyway. The days of the republic are indeed numbered and I’d rather remember it as it was rather than continuing to see its own death throes. It is my time that has passed. Your time is now. + +Still, I can’t help being an idealist. Perhaps if your Empire can live again, then perhaps one day so will my republic. I can have faith in that as I pass on to the other world. + +Good luck Eternal in your pursuit of war and conquest, though I should like to think that maybe my words still got through to you a little bit. That maybe you will realize that the people are important and not just resources to be used on a battlefield or wherever else. That a government can exist that doesn’t require repressive domestic methods or the subjugation of foreign lands. + +But then as I said, I am an idealist. + +Batalimus Ventis + +After reading the letter you toss it in the fire. One of the soldiers asks you if it’s another order from Quintus. + +“No, just news that another obstacle is no longer an issue.” You remark. + +A few days pass and you have been thinking about Batalimus’ words a lot more since there isn’t much going on in the way of action in camp. While he ended up agreeing with you that the republic is coming to an end no matter what, you’re still struggling with the idea that what is going to replace it, since it won’t truly be the Empire as you knew it. Ol’ Batty was right even you did change his mind. Your time is STILL the past. + +You’ve had five years to get “used” to the changes and while you have and are even thriving, you’re never going to feel comfortable. Even if you kill Quintus and seize power and everything goes well with that, you still have to go through the process of reconquering everything again. Something you really shouldn’t have to do. + +You should’ve had a your “birthright” over five hundred years ago. Now you feel like you’re having to play catch up for a much lesser prize. Most of the old lands are indeed ruined to a degree that you can’t imagine anyone wanting to live there even if you did conquer it. Pushing people into doing so is libel to cause a revolt at worst or just flat out attrition at best…ugh…shit you don’t want to even ponder yet. + +And what’s the alternative? Not killing Quintus and serving as his loyal right hand goon? Continuing to watch that fool take ALL the credit for stuff you will no doubt have a hand in? No, you did that already and at least with the Emperor you didn’t have to put up with any sort of dysfunctional family every time you visited him. + +You think back to when you spent time in the museum with Jennifer talking about that past. That’s still the happiest you’ve been since you woke up. You even wonder if you shouldn’t just abandon all these desires and ambitions. What has it really gotten you in the scheme of things? You made the big gamble the first time and it didn’t work out maybe that was a sign. + +You wonder if you shouldn’t just settle down with Jennifer and try to live a normal life. +> Go to Jennifer +You may have lost your mind thinking that you can even attempt living a normal life, but then you’re the same guy who actually listened to a twisted abusive svelk bitch that convinced you it was a good idea to attack the Emperor too. + +And what’s this decision compare to something like that? + +You tell your second to take command of the camp, when he asks for how long, you just tell him until further notice. He’s at a loss of how to respond as you leave. + +When you arrive back at the museum, you find that Calvin, Jennifer and several others are packing up a lot of equipment. + +“Hey, what’re you doing here?” Jennifer asks. +“I had to talk to you…what’s all this?” +“Another expedition! After all these years, Quintus is funding another one.” +“What? He’s sending you to dig around in Quala again?” +“No, we’re going to Rask!” Jennifer says excitedly. +“Rask!?” +“Yes! Remember when I mentioned there were rumors of a warrior’s guild up there? Well over the years I’ve been studying old maps and the newer charts created by the few adventurers that came back alive from there and I think I’ve managed to pin point the location. See?” + +Jennifer suddenly unfolds a map and points to a circled spot on it. You know a lot of time has passed, but if your knowledge of Rask geography is still remotely relevant at all, that looks like where Fort Defiance would’ve been located. + +“That looks like where Fort Defiance was located.” You remark. +“There was a fort there?” Jennifer says. +“Yeah, it was the furthest military outpost in the north of the Empire, well save for one other, but that was more like a small watchtower.” You answer. +“I didn’t know you served in Rask.” +“I didn’t actually, but I did carry out one personal favor there for a fellow Eternal, the one manning that watch tower I just mentioned actually.” +“Oh. Well still, this would be one of those times I wish you could come with us. Your knowledge of the area even if it is out of date would probably be useful.” +“Believe me, I’m tempted to. I can’t believe Quintus is just sending you out there like this. The dangerous journey TO Rask is bad enough, but the weather in Rask is just as treacherous as the inhabitants and I can only imagine after centuries without any order there its probably only gotten worse since.” +“Well he probably wouldn’t have if I hadn’t went to him about the information I found. Plus he was in a good mood about senator’s Batalimus’ recent suicide. Did you hear about that?” +“Uh, yeah another lucky break for our side, look I better go with you.” You say. +“But don’t you have orcs to slay or defending our borders or…” +“All of that can be done without me, I think the army is competent enough now that I don’t need to hold their hands and if they still do then you’re REALLY going to need me to come with you because that means the soldiers you are taking won’t be worth shit in a fight. In fact if you even want to get to Rask, you’re going to need me to negotiate with the Flogger tribe. Not to mention there’s much worse things in Rask than ogres and giants.” +“What about Quintus? Don’t you have to report this to him?” +“Fuck Quintus, he’s not my master. He could stand without me holding his hand every five minutes too. Nobody tells me what to do.” + +Jennifer takes a pause from your remark, before continuing. + +“Well, alright then, as long as you don’t think it’s going to cause any problems I’d be very happy for you to join us. So what was it that you wanted to talk to me about?” +“Huh? Oh…that. Uh, nevermind now.” +“Oh come on, you obviously had something pretty important if you left your post in Quala to tell me. + +This expedition to Rask business sort of distracted you from your original intent of coming here in the first place, but nevertheless you haven’t really abandoned your previous thoughts of settling down with Jennifer so you take her to one side and tell her. Her reaction is mixed though not one of any negativity. + +“Sounds like you’ve given this some thought and this decision couldn’t have just been on a whim for you.” Jennifer says. +“It wasn’t, that’s why I had to see you. I mean I know there’s something between us and why shouldn’t I focus on that?” you reply. +“What about reviving the Empire?” +“Yeah, originally after I woke up and got a bit more of my bearings, the concept of doing that did sound appealing and move me into the direction I’ve been currently going in, but that’s been my whole life! I mean my original purpose is gone. MY Empire is gone. Why shouldn’t I try something else? What could it hurt?” +“Nothing I suppose, but have you thought about what else you would do with your time? I mean no offense, but battle and war are pretty much your best skills.” +“Yes, I know. I wasn’t talking about abandoning such things completely though, I mean I could go with you on expeditions and guard your museum.” +“Guard the museum?!” Jennifer says followed by laughter. +“What’s so funny?” +“The idea that we’d need a warrior mage to guard my father’s museum is hilarious to me. I think the word overkill comes to mind. While the expedition protection would no doubt be of help, it isn’t like that’s what we do all the time as you well know. We’re in the museum most of the time and you’d get bored. Very bored. Besides, it isn’t like we get people trying to steal anything on a regular basis. The last time was ten years ago and the thief in question only managed to grab the tooth of an old Usksha sand worm before he was apprehended.” +“Well I could talk about the old Empire when people come through or something…” +“So you want to be part of the tour? Yeah, I don’t see that working in the long term either. Look I think you’re just feeling home sick or time sick or something again. Why don’t you think about this decision more after our trip to Rask, and if you still feel the same way when we come back, we can make arrangements for your future plans I suppose.” + +You agree to Jennifer’s proposal since she does have some good points and now you’re a little less worried about your future so much as you’re more concerned with this expedition. When Calvin hears that you’re accompanying the expedition he looks relieved. He mentions that he actually tried to talk his daughter out of going on this thing, but she wouldn’t be swayed so he was going to go with her knowing that he’d probably die in the process. Since you’re going now, he’s going to stay at the museum stating that he’s completely confident that she’ll come back alive now. + +Along the way to Rask you warn everyone about the wendigo. Other than Jennifer nobody else seems to know anything about them and she’s only heard stories. Apparently they’re just “myths” nowadays, but you assure everyone that they’re very real and if anyone begins to feel like an unnatural force trying to gain control over their mind, they need to see you immediately and fight the mental attack as if they’re life depended on it because it does. This information probably makes everyone a bit more paranoid and on edge, but quite frankly they should be. + +Eventually you get to the Flogger tribe territory, which seems to have moved further south from when you last remember. Apparently Trog has indeed been taking advantage of uniting the other tribes under his banner. The decor hasn’t changed though; they’re still favoring the hundreds of dead bodies stretched across various wooden frames with their backs completely flayed of all skin to mark their turf. + +Naturally everyone (especially the soldiers) are expecting a fight given that you’re technically at war with the orcs in general, but you tell them you can handle this and tell them to stay put. + +“Oy! Youz that Ternal man!” an orc shouts from the crude watchtower. Not that you’re an expert, but this orc is familiar, if only because of his great fat belly. +“Fatbelly wasn’t it? Where’s your comrade?” + +It takes awhile for Fatbelly to process this question at first, but he eventually he knows who you’re talking about. + +“Oh, youz must mean Bilge. He dead. Idjit got ‘imself killed by gettin’ into scrap wit an ogre. ‘Ead got popped off an lived for awhile. Won bet on how long! Hah! Anywayz Trog spectin’ you again. ‘Ead on in.” +“He knew I was coming?” +“Geez, maybe youz powerful, but yooz stooped as Bilge. Trog Shaman! He haz vishuns member?” +“Hmm, how could I forget.” You say ignoring the rest of Fatbelly’s insult and heading past the dead bodies. Trog isn’t far ahead.” + +“So once again the Eternal visits Trog. And once again Trog see that you come, but not know the reason. Is our arrangement going as planned?” +“Yes, in fact while I’m here I might as well address that too. We’ve gotten what we need from the war. You no longer have to play any role in it, that is stirring up the other orc tribes.” +“Trog see. Very well we did have an agreement and the Floggers have benefitted greatly from this arrangement, so it is done for now. However, Trog cannot promise that other minor tribes will not still attack. Can only promise that Floggers will no longer play any part in such attacks.” +“That’s fine, probably for the best that we still get a few attacks. The other reason that brings me here, is that I and my group need to get through to Rask.” +“Trog see. Can you not just go around us?” +“From what I can tell Trog, that isn’t even possible anymore. Your territory was probably blocking the easiest route to Rask to begin with, now it looks like you’re blocking it entirely. We have to go through your territory.” + +Trog doesn’t look enthused by your suggestion, but ponders it a bit. + +“Very well, but you cannot just pass for free. Need to extract some sort of payment or security of goodwill.” +“We aren’t really carrying any valuables Trog.” +“Do not want things. Want people. Give us two. One for your passage through and one for the return trip.” +“Okay…so what are you going to do with them?” +“Nothing. Just keep here so you do not pull any tricks.” +“What tricks would I play, I’ve always dealt straight with you. And you do realize that if I was going to play any sort of trick, I’d be more than willing sacrifice whoever I did leave behind and do it anyway?” +“Hmm, true. But still, cannot just let you pass for free. Tribe would perceive as weakness. Those are the terms. More than fair.” + +Trog IS being more than fair. He’s downright civilized compared to most humans you’ve known. Under normal circumstances you’d do it without a blink, but you’re fairly certain the group is going to be VERY resistant to this idea and you can’t say you’d blame them. + +It’s this or just pushing your way through. +> Make the deal +“Alright, you’ll have your two Trog, I need to go back and speak with my people about which two though.” + +Trog nods and you return to the group to explain the situation, it goes about as well as you expected. + +“You can’t expect us to stay with these savages! They’ll kill us!” one of the workers exclaims. +“We’re at war with these monsters!” a soldier remarks. +“I’d have to agree that leaving anyone here is tantamount to leaving them to die.” Jennifer adds. +“Look, this is the ONLY way we’re getting into Rask without a fight. And I guarantee we’re in no position to be fighting hundreds of orcs.” You remark and then point at the soldiers in the group. “Now you lot are soldiers which technically puts you under my command and if I order any of you to stay you better damn well do it or else you’re going to have me to deal with and I assure you if that happens you’d rather have orcs.” + +“That being said, I’d rather NOT leave any soldiers behind, because we’re going to need every competent fighter we can get when we do get in Rask.” You say and then point to the civvies in the group. “You lot on the other hand, I can afford to leave any one of you behind.” + +This remark is met with more protest and exclamations of how which one of them is a valuable member of the group. You’re unimpressed and simply say if there’s any digging or carrying to be done, anyone can do that and if its for some intellectual purpose, Jennifer is still going to be the most knowledgeable one on whatever it is you do find in Rask, so again the rest are superfluous. + +This statement is met with more protests until Jennifer suddenly tells them all to shut up. + +“I don’t like this, but he’s right. I’ll take volunteers first.” Jennifer remarks. + +Predictably more begging, protests and threats follow, which Jennifer addresses that it’s either stay with the orcs or try to head back to Nalin without any escort protection. Eventually one brave soul volunteers, muttering that if he’s lucky maybe they won’t eat him and he can learn more about their culture. The second one loses a lot draw. She’s not happy about her bad luck and the situation, but resigns herself to her fate. + +“I’m glad you backed me up.” You say. +“I didn’t really want to and I’m sure I’m going to get a lot of backlash from my workers, but the potential for this discovery is too important and I trust you. I just hope you trust this orc as much.” Jennifer remarks. +“I don’t, but he’s been reliable on matters much greater than this one. The worst that could happen is that he plans on killing us on the return trip when we’re exhausted from the dangers of Rask, but we’ll deal with that when the time comes.” You answer. +“Well I guess this is all worth it then.” + +After the two “sacrificial lambs” are presented to Trog, he promises once again that no harm will come to them and the rest of you cautiously pass through Flogger territory, which actually overlaps partially into Rask. In fact you pass by an area where you believe Fort Destiny once stood. There’s no evidence of it anymore though, it’s just wilderness now. You wonder if was destroyed during the cataclysm or if it was time that ultimately took it over. + +Eventually you clear Flogger territory and you’re in the true wilderness of Rask. + +You, Jennifer and a couple of others go over the maps deciding which way would be the best. Using your memory, you point out that despite the long passage of time, there are still evidence of old Empire roads and that you should use those as a basic guide to head north. If you’re lucky, it may very well take you all the way to Fort Defiance, or at least where the fort used to stand. + +The journey north is as miserable as you remember when you first came to this unforgiving land. If anything it seems worse now that it’s no longer tamed by the Empire. Still, you travel quite a distance before you catch sight of figures moving about in the surrounding forests. + +“Stop. We’re being watched and we’re going to be attacked soon. In fact, we’re probably surrounded, I suggest everyone prepare themselves.” You say. + +The group forms a protective circle as best they can while you try to keep an eye on all the possible directions of attack. + +Eventually a few orcs and ogres emerge from the trees. However, something doesn’t look quite right about them. They’re savage looking like you’d expect, but even for their kind they’re moving a fashion that isn’t typical. It’s more like how an animal would move. They don’t make any usual taunts or threats either, but you do hear some loud guttural growling sounds. + +It probably isn’t surprising that some of the soldiers decide they aren’t going to wait around to be attacked and go ahead and fire. Two or three of the attackers are wounded, but then the rest make a horrible wailing sound which causes everyone to clutch their ears in pain. + +Then they move in for the attack, but it’s more like a loping gait rather than running. Ogres don’t typically run either… + +“Oh shit, WENDIGOS!” you shout and start casting your mind shield spell, but before you can complete it a possessed orc is already upon you. + +“Meat!” the orc hisses with its fang filled mouth right in front of your face. You feel a claw dig through your armor and puncture your skin just before you stab the monster through the neck with your dagger. Blood spurts all over you before manage to get the thing off of you and stomp it repeatedly in the throat, crushing it completely. + +You then hear a voice in your mind. + +“Sssssss! I sense power…great power…you’re an Eye! Hated Eye! Eyes! Away! Away my fellows! Before this they destroy us all!” the voice exclaims. + +Before you know it, the possessed orcs and ogres cease their attack and begin backing away. Everyone is a bit confused and quite frankly you are too. + +“Why’d they stop attacking?” Jennifer asks. +“Because we were kicking their asses! Hah! So much for the dreaded wendigos!” a soldier remarks, several of the other soldiers cheer in agreement and press forward to attack the retreating wendigos. + +You aren’t exactly sure what’s going on, but apparently this wendigo knows you have the capability to destroy it. However, nobody else here can and if the wendigos figure that out, you’re going to be in trouble when the spirits are released from their dead hosts. + +You’re not about to give away the fact that everyone else is defenseless by shouting verbal commands to stop attacking, so the best thing you can do is cast your spell. Which is going to be a brand new experience for you since you’ve never actually cast a mind shield spell over other people before. + +Ignoring the sounds of gunshots and shouting around you, you concentrate on your spell and try to focus it on the group. It takes a lot more energy than you anticipated. Meanwhile you’re getting questions on what you’re doing. + +“Shut up! All of you! I’m trying to protect our lives and it’s taking all my concentration! Now does anyone hear any voices? And I’m not taking about my own right now. I’m taking about raspy sounding voices going on about giving up or something similar.” + +This question is followed by the group all-stating that they don’t hear anything like that. You breathe a sigh of relief and while you still can’t sense any wendigo spirits lurking about, you’re not going to take your guard down yet. + +“Okay, good. Like I said before we got here, if anyone does hear voices let me know immediately. I heard one of them in my head and it thought we were eyes, or they thought I was. It got scared and told the rest to retreat before I destroyed them all.” +“An eye? What does that mean?” someone asks. +“If I had to guess? They thought I was part of an elite military branch force of the old Empire.” You say. +“We’ve only found a bit of information on the Eyes, but I didn’t know they actively hunted wendigos.” Jennifer says. +“They didn’t. In fact other than some stealth operations during the Felkan War their primary function was internal security after the shadows were disposed of. They didn’t have any magic abilities to destroy creatures like wendigos.” +“Something must’ve changed then.” +“I’ll say. The only time I’ve ever heard fear in a wendigo’s voice is just before I banished it. I’m guessing it sensed I had that ability and figured I was an eye, which leads me to believe that this mythical warrior’s guild we’re trying to find must be run by the eyes or decendents of them. Heh. Glad you held something together ol’ friend.” You say with a smile. +“What’s that?” Jennifer asks not knowing what you’re thinking about. +“Warrick. He was head of the Eyes. A Sightmaster. I can only imagine that if the Eyes did survive to this day, he must’ve had a hand in it somehow. Come on, I’m actually just as anxious as you to find this place now.” + +After patching up some of the wounded you’re soon on your way again. You hate dispelling the protection, but if you keep it going constantly, you’ll be running out of stamina when you might need it for more physical foes. You just hope that the wendigos continue to believe that you’re all Eyes. + +As it turns out, the rest of your journey is plagued by horrible weather conditions instead. There’s also debate on which way to go when the remnants of the Empire roads disappear to wilderness and can no longer provide a base guideline of where to travel. + +Jennifer and most of her workers want to follow the maps, but you’re convinced that you should continue in the direction of where you last remember Fort Defiance to stand. +> Follow the maps +As much as you hate to go against your instincts, you were only here once and it was over five hundred years ago. Your memory of things isn’t going to be correct due to the changes in the landscape alone. Even if the maps aren’t giving the exact location, they’re at least a more reliable guideline brought back by people who managed to survive this land. + +“Okay, we’ll use the maps. We’re going to have to endure this weather either way I suppose and we’ll be less likely to get lost.” You remark. + +You continue your journey using the maps. It turns out to be a good idea, but nothing is stopping the cold and freezing ice storm that hits hard within a couple hours. + +What remaining horses and other pack animals you had left end up either panicking or outright collapse from the exhaustion. Your group ends up having to dig out a shelter and hunker down for the storm to pass. Food isn’t much of a problem since you just butcher the animals that are dying any way. Fire isn’t either since you can conjure it up. Still, it’s not an ideal situation and others in the group are starting to experience minor frostbite and argue with one another. + +You tell everyone to shut up and listen when you hear a rumbling sound approaching close by. Some think it’s just the sounds of the storm, but you point out that it must be something else since the ground is vibrating a bit. + +“Giant! Get the hell up and move!” you exclaim and the group scrambles to run out of the make shift shelter. Some of you even make it out before a large foot crushes it. + +Now the term giant has never been used lightly, they’re called that for a reason. However, this one is certainly larger than average. In fact, you don’t even think it noticed you when it squashed some of your group. Well it didn’t at first at least, when it feel the gushiness of flattened humans on its foot along with seeing several scattering about the snow, it comes to the conclusion that a giant could only logically come to, namely flatten the rest of you as well. + +“Spread out! Spread out! He’s going to swing that damn club!” you shout. Meanwhile, the giant successfully crushes a couple of the soldiers with his club and at this point you don’t know where the hell anyone else is because their fear has caused them to run out of your line of sight which is small enough with the ice storm hindering long range viewing. + +You roll out of the way of a club slam and run up to the giant’s foot and begin hacking at the back tendon. It isn’t easy since the giant’s skin is calloused to the point where it acts like armor. You only manage to cause a superficial wound before He nearly crushes you again. Realizing you aren’t getting anywhere with that approach, you resort to magic and literally give the giant a hot foot, burning the skin enough to cause a roar of pain. The giant starts moving his foot to sooth the injury in the cold snow. + +You look up and can barely make out the top half of this monster through the storm. You aren’t sure if it’s going to work with the storm being as bad as it is, but you’re going to try anyway. You cast more fire at the giant, not at his foot though, but at his loincloth which is undoubtedly made of some sort of fur. You don’t stop flinging fire until you’re confident that the flames aren’t going out any time soon. + +Predictably the giant starts beating its own flaming crotch in an effort to stop the burning sensation, bellowing so loudly that you image all of Rask can hear. The giant runs away from the combat area grabbing snow and ice around it and throwing it on the still burning fur loincloth. + +“Sheesh, that brings a whole new meaning to the term fireballs.” A voice shouts behind you. You turn around and see a figure completely bundled up in snow gear standing with others dressed in a similar manner. Naturally you’re ready for a fight, but the one who spoke holds up his hands. + +“Hold on there! Are you part of the expedition group? We just bumped into a few of them running from the giant. Said one of you was actually insane enough to fight the damn thing.” +“Yes, what have you done with them?!” +“Nothing! We were on patrol, got caught in the storm and then we heard all the screaming and came to investigate. Your people are right over this small hill here with some more of us. Normally, we’d just send you all on your way and tell you that you were fools to come to Rask in the first place, but now that we’ve seen you in action, I can’t help but think the Vision Lord would want to meet you.” + +Vision Lord? + +“Are you the Eyes?” you ask. +“We are from the Order of the Eye and I’m Sightmaster Crowley but if we’re going to talk, I’d prefer it if we’d do it at Fort Everwatch. You and the others can rest up there.” +“And if we don’t want to go with you?” +“Then you don’t go and you all can return to wherever it is you came from. We’re not holding anyone prisoner, though the lady of your group, a Miss Mol I believe, says you’ve been looking for us. As I said normally we try to keep to ourselves and turn away most visitors, but given that we’re inviting you in with open arms I should think you wouldn’t turn down this opportunity. Besides, I’m fairly certain that none of us here wants to tangle with the guy that just chased away ol’ Snowtop single handedly.” +“What, that giant?” +“If you hadn’t noticed, he’s not just any giant, if he was, he’d be dead by now. He’s probably the oldest living frost giant that we know of and he’s tougher than a troll steak and almost taller than some of the smaller mountains in this area. Fortunately he seems to only wander about during these bad ice storms that usually no idiot would be caught in, but then here we are.” + +And here you are. You insist that you want to see Jennifer before going anywhere. Crowley takes you to see her and the few survivors. She’s glad to see you’re alive and hugs you. Her enthusiasm for this trip hasn’t diminished and she definitely wants to go see the Eyes’ home, despite the fact that you all were nearly crushed to death by a giant, though that can’t be said for some of her employees. You’re just glad she’s all right and you’re within reach of your destination. + +It doesn’t take too long to get to Fort Everwatch. It wasn’t anywhere near Fort Defiance once stood though so its just as well that you didn’t go that way. Everwatch isn’t particularly large or fancy, but it does look like it was built to stand the test of time. The interior is just as utilitarian Other than symbols of an eye adorning various parts of the fort, it actually reminds you of an old Empire fort. You can’t help but feel at home here despite only just entering the place. + +You are brought to a great hall area and Crowley says he’s going to fetch the Vision Lord. In the meantime he’s tells you all to stay here, but feel free to look around. + +“This is pretty exciting, I hope they’ll let us take something back from this place.” Jennifer says while looking at the various plaques. +“Anything’s possible I suppose, but they don’t look like they’re much into luxuries. The only decorations here seem to be dedicated to their fallen like these plaques or those eye symbols…oh wait, they seem to have battle trophies as well, check out that giant’s skull hanging high on the left wall.” You remark still feeling a little wary of things. + +Eventually Crowley comes back with who you guess to be the Vision Lord. The Vision Lord doesn’t look particularly impressive despite his name though it is certain by the scars on his face he is no stranger to battle. You were expecting him to be a lot older though as it stands he looks about your age…well not counting your five-century nap of course. + +He stares at you, Jennifer and the rest for a moment and then he points to Jennifer. + +“I’m guessing you and this lot come from the Nalin Republic.” +“How did you know?” Jennifer asks. +“Where else would you come from? You’re certainly not from one of the six cities of Arat. They’re too busy with their petty squabbles. Besides, we’ve come across some of your type before wandering up here. A few of them even joined our group rather than head back down.” +“You recruited our explorers?!” Jennifer says. +“Yes, if they showed promise and desired to join. I’m sure you might even bump into a couple of them in this place assuming you haven’t already. Now you on the other hand…you are very interesting. Your armor looks as if it comes from another time, you can cast magic with ease and I heard you fended off Snowtop all by yourself. That’s a feat so impressive I can’t imagine you are native to the Republic.” the Vision Lord remarks and points to you. +“What I find interesting is this place and from what I can tell by your commemorations of the your fallen, you feel keeping history is important. So tell me, did Warrick have this fort built or was it sometime after his death?” you say causing some eyebrows to raise. +“You know of Vision Lord Warrick then? Not many outside our order know our founder. How did you come across this information?” +“Easy. We were practically siblings. He was an Eternal, just like I am. He wasn’t a Vision Lord back then, just a Sightmaster, though I guess he felt the need to assign himself a higher title. Doesn’t matter. I’m just glad to see another piece of the old Empire still alive, even if it has taken a very different form.” + +With this response the Vision Lord steps back and the other Eyes now begin whispering amongst themselves. + +“So, the rumors are true. An Eternal does walk the earth again and it is indeed the one Vision Lord Warrick mentions in his writings. As you might expect we don’t get much news this way and we don’t venture too far from here, let alone Rask. In fact the few recruits we manage to get are probably our biggest source of new information. Tell me, how is it that you live?” + +You explain the exact situation as vaguely as you did to Jennifer and Quintus. The cataclysm struck suddenly, you were encased in a magic shell, etc. etc. and eventually Jennifer’s crew dug you up. + +“I see. How unfortunate that you came in contact with the Republic first, but then I suppose it’s better than being stuck in a magic coffin. Still, you’re here now and I believe you will find a better home here.” The Vision Lord remarks. +“What?” +“I’m inviting you to stay with us. Come now. This Order was founded by an Eternal I’m somewhat familiar with their mindset based on the writings of Vision Lord Warrick. I can only imagine the dull tedium you’ve endured in the Republic. How have you managed to occupy your time?” +“Do not presume you know me based on the writings of Warrick. Truth be told, he didn’t exactly create the Eyes, at least not in their original form. The Eyes were originally created by this woman’s great ancestor Jacob Mol.” You say pointing to Jennifer. + +The Vision Lord nods his head a bit. + +“Apologies. I did not mean to offend. And if as you say this lady’s ancestor had a hand in creating the Eyes then we’ve been doubly blessed by the presence of her as well. However, I do believe that you were and still are a man of battle and war. And again I can’t imagine those things being in great supply in the Republic. Surely you would enjoy living here instead. You would be great asset in our own war of extermination of the wendigo. We could certainly use the help.” + +This is a sudden offer and certainly one you weren’t expecting. The strange thing is it isn’t out of the question either. A few days ago you were just going on about to Jennifer about how you were restless in the Republic even with your efforts to help restructure it into a new empire. A glorious undertaking to be sure, but one you’ve had doubts about recently. + +Now this opportunity is certainly less impressive, but there’s something alluring about its simplicity. All you would have to concern yourself with is the battle. The war. The victories over your enemies in melee combat. You’d even live in a place that’s much comfortable to you. + +Of course there’s also Jennifer to think about, but while your relationship with her is blooming into something more romantic what future do you have with her really? She’s not even like Alison in that she’s a warrior and can truly connect with you on some level even if she does make the attempts. + +There’s also the fact that you’ve been worried about her the whole trip. Will you continue to worry about her and allow that to be a weakness to be exploited? If she’s killed will you go through the same emotional ruin you did when Alison was murdered? Do you even want to deal with any of that again? + +You tell the Vision Lord that you and he are going to have to discuss this all in more detailed before you make a decision. Jennifer looks concerned when you say this, but doesn’t say anything. The Vision Lord says that while you and he talk, the rest of your group can rest up or feel free to explore as there is nothing of major value and he trusts nobody would be foolish enough to steal anything. + +You speak with the Vision Lord (who reveals his name is Kells) for quite awhile on the current situation of his order as well as the history of this place and Rask in general. He also remarks about how the Eyes are so hated and feared by the wendigo. As you might’ve guessed magic is in play, but only to a minor degree. Over the centuries the Eyes have managed to focus their minds to create shields against wendigo mental attacks along with being able to banish them to oblivion. (Still vulnerable to normal death through wendigo hosts obviously though) + +After your discussion he tells you that he’ll leave you to your decision, but that he hopes you’ll stay. You then speak with Jennifer about your situation; naturally she wants you to return with her and explains all reasons why. You end up sleeping on the offer and pondering everything some more, but ultimately the decision is up to you. +> Stay at Fort Everwatch +Since you’ve been dug up, you’ve been trying to make a go of your new life and while it hasn’t been all bad, you feel like ultimately you’re just living a shell of your old life that’s been gone a long time. + +You don’t belong to this time, even the new “empire” you’re trying to help re-establish isn’t going to be the one you knew. Maybe some things should just stay in the past. + +If you stayed here at least you’d be doing something you actually felt somewhat connected to. Really the only thing you’re going to possibly miss is Jennifer, but she’s not enough for you to stay and she’ll be better off without you in her life anyway. + +No point in second guessing your decision. You’re going to stay. You go tell Vision Lord Kells immediately. He’s very happy. + +“Excellent! Your presence here will be a great asset to the Eyes! Together we’ll wipe out the wendigo completely from this land!” Kells exclaims. +“I’m sure. However, I’ve got one more thing to do before I join. I have to explain all this to my companion Jennifer and escort her back to Quala.” +“Of course, I understand. Your official ceremony will begin when you return.” + +You approach Jennifer who is already packed and ready to go, but when she sees your face she already knows what you’ve chosen to do. + +“No…no, you’re not really staying are you?” she asks. +“I’m sorry Jennifer, but I just can’t deal with your time anymore. I don’t know maybe it’s all the complicated politics or the new technology or I just feel constantly out of place, or a combination of several things, but I feel more at home here than I ever did at Nalin.” +“But what about the Empire?! You’re helping it live again! How can you leave now?” +“It’s not my Empire and it never will be. I believe I have helped Quintus enough in getting the foundations in place if he really wants to go forth with the plan he has. If anything I’m doing him a favor by bowing out now. I probably would’ve only ended up killing him anyway.” +“But…but…what about…” +“Us? (Sigh) I think you’d be better off with someone…well more your age for one thing, but also someone with similar interests as you. I believe you’re more enamored by the idea of me.” +“I’m not some idiot with a school girl crush you know! I have genuine feelings for you!” Jennifer exclaims. +“Look, I know and I have feelings for you as well, but it’s just not enough and you’ll be better off in the long run anyway.” + +Jennifer looks at you with a mixture of sadness, frustration and anger. + +“…fine. You’ve obviously made up your mind about this. And I know how stubborn your Eternal mind works, so let’s not argue about this any longer. You might be right anyway, but I think this decision of yours sucks and is ultimately selling yourself out of a good future. And I’m not talking about just us. I’m talking about all the work you put into trying to resurrect the Empire and now just walking away from it all. I thought you were a man of greatness, but I see now that you are just a man…just like the rest.” + +You try to tell Jennifer that you’ll escort her out of Rask, but she tells you she’ll be fine. Seeing that you aren’t going to take no for an answer she reluctantly agrees. + +Your journey out of Rask is a quiet and uneventful one. If you weren’t already feeling the cold from the weather, you’d most certainly be feeling it from Jennifer who says nothing to you the whole time. + +When you eventually get to the Flogger tribe borders, you part company with Jennifer and the rest. You tell your soldiers to let command know that you won’t be returning and not to bother to come find you. + +You try to say goodbye to Jennifer one last time, but she’s already walking towards Quala with her crew. Having nothing else to do, you return to Everwatch to begin your new life. + +The Eyes have a big ceremony for you and you’re appointed as a Sightmaster immediately due to your vast years of experience and magic. Kells catches you up on all the procedures and a little more history, but for the most part you’re still wondering if you have made the right decision. + +After a month of slaying creatures and banishing wendigos you get in the swing of things and your thoughts about anything connected to Nalin start to lessen. + +Within the year, you feel completely at home with only the occasional fleeting thoughts of concerns outside of Rask. Sometimes you half expect someone from Nalin to come, but nobody does. You imagine Quintus is glad to have you conveniently out of his life now (assuming he succeeded with his Empire idea without you) and Jennifer has gotten over you. + +Just proves that you weren’t really missed or wanted after all and you did make the right decision. At least here you feel genuinely respected and wanted. + +Years go by and you settle into your routine. It’s a very simple one and in time when Vision Lord Kells dies of natural causes, it’s very evident that you are the one to take up the mantle. + +Years become decades and Rask continues to remain fairly isolated. You sometimes wonder if Quintus was ever successful and if he’s still emperor or if he failed and Nalin is still a republic. You sometimes also wonder what Jennifer is doing. One time you walked all the way to the Rask borders only to turn back, resisting the sudden urge to revisit that life. + +This is your life now and you’re going to stick with this one. + +You do begin to have some concerns about the potential future of the Eyes. You’re essentially an isolated “monk” order dedicated to wiping out dangerous monsters. Attrition through combat is not only taking its toll, but age is as well. A discussion about a potential remedy like say actively trying to go outside Rask to recruit new members is held, but ultimately nothing is done. + +So ultimately you continue until eventually all that’s left of the order is a few old men and yourself, also of old age by that time. + +You all go out one day and never come back.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As much as you hate to go against your instincts, you were only here once and it was over five hundred years ago. Your memory of things isn’t going to be correct due to the changes in the landscape alone. Even if the maps aren’t giving the exact location, they’re at least a more reliable guideline brought back by people who managed to survive this land. + +“Okay, we’ll use the maps. We’re going to have to endure this weather either way I suppose and we’ll be less likely to get lost.” You remark. + +You continue your journey using the maps. It turns out to be a good idea, but nothing is stopping the cold and freezing ice storm that hits hard within a couple hours. + +What remaining horses and other pack animals you had left end up either panicking or outright collapse from the exhaustion. Your group ends up having to dig out a shelter and hunker down for the storm to pass. Food isn’t much of a problem since you just butcher the animals that are dying any way. Fire isn’t either since you can conjure it up. Still, it’s not an ideal situation and others in the group are starting to experience minor frostbite and argue with one another. + +You tell everyone to shut up and listen when you hear a rumbling sound approaching close by. Some think it’s just the sounds of the storm, but you point out that it must be something else since the ground is vibrating a bit. + +“Giant! Get the hell up and move!” you exclaim and the group scrambles to run out of the make shift shelter. Some of you even make it out before a large foot crushes it. + +Now the term giant has never been used lightly, they’re called that for a reason. However, this one is certainly larger than average. In fact, you don’t even think it noticed you when it squashed some of your group. Well it didn’t at first at least, when it feel the gushiness of flattened humans on its foot along with seeing several scattering about the snow, it comes to the conclusion that a giant could only logically come to, namely flatten the rest of you as well. + +“Spread out! Spread out! He’s going to swing that damn club!” you shout. Meanwhile, the giant successfully crushes a couple of the soldiers with his club and at this point you don’t know where the hell anyone else is because their fear has caused them to run out of your line of sight which is small enough with the ice storm hindering long range viewing. + +You roll out of the way of a club slam and run up to the giant’s foot and begin hacking at the back tendon. It isn’t easy since the giant’s skin is calloused to the point where it acts like armor. You only manage to cause a superficial wound before He nearly crushes you again. Realizing you aren’t getting anywhere with that approach, you resort to magic and literally give the giant a hot foot, burning the skin enough to cause a roar of pain. The giant starts moving his foot to sooth the injury in the cold snow. + +You look up and can barely make out the top half of this monster through the storm. You aren’t sure if it’s going to work with the storm being as bad as it is, but you’re going to try anyway. You cast more fire at the giant, not at his foot though, but at his loincloth which is undoubtedly made of some sort of fur. You don’t stop flinging fire until you’re confident that the flames aren’t going out any time soon. + +Predictably the giant starts beating its own flaming crotch in an effort to stop the burning sensation, bellowing so loudly that you image all of Rask can hear. The giant runs away from the combat area grabbing snow and ice around it and throwing it on the still burning fur loincloth. + +“Sheesh, that brings a whole new meaning to the term fireballs.” A voice shouts behind you. You turn around and see a figure completely bundled up in snow gear standing with others dressed in a similar manner. Naturally you’re ready for a fight, but the one who spoke holds up his hands. + +“Hold on there! Are you part of the expedition group? We just bumped into a few of them running from the giant. Said one of you was actually insane enough to fight the damn thing.” +“Yes, what have you done with them?!” +“Nothing! We were on patrol, got caught in the storm and then we heard all the screaming and came to investigate. Your people are right over this small hill here with some more of us. Normally, we’d just send you all on your way and tell you that you were fools to come to Rask in the first place, but now that we’ve seen you in action, I can’t help but think the Vision Lord would want to meet you.” + +Vision Lord? + +“Are you the Eyes?” you ask. +“We are from the Order of the Eye and I’m Sightmaster Crowley but if we’re going to talk, I’d prefer it if we’d do it at Fort Everwatch. You and the others can rest up there.” +“And if we don’t want to go with you?” +“Then you don’t go and you all can return to wherever it is you came from. We’re not holding anyone prisoner, though the lady of your group, a Miss Mol I believe, says you’ve been looking for us. As I said normally we try to keep to ourselves and turn away most visitors, but given that we’re inviting you in with open arms I should think you wouldn’t turn down this opportunity. Besides, I’m fairly certain that none of us here wants to tangle with the guy that just chased away ol’ Snowtop single handedly.” +“What, that giant?” +“If you hadn’t noticed, he’s not just any giant, if he was, he’d be dead by now. He’s probably the oldest living frost giant that we know of and he’s tougher than a troll steak and almost taller than some of the smaller mountains in this area. Fortunately he seems to only wander about during these bad ice storms that usually no idiot would be caught in, but then here we are.” + +And here you are. You insist that you want to see Jennifer before going anywhere. Crowley takes you to see her and the few survivors. She’s glad to see you’re alive and hugs you. Her enthusiasm for this trip hasn’t diminished and she definitely wants to go see the Eyes’ home, despite the fact that you all were nearly crushed to death by a giant, though that can’t be said for some of her employees. You’re just glad she’s all right and you’re within reach of your destination. + +It doesn’t take too long to get to Fort Everwatch. It wasn’t anywhere near Fort Defiance once stood though so its just as well that you didn’t go that way. Everwatch isn’t particularly large or fancy, but it does look like it was built to stand the test of time. The interior is just as utilitarian Other than symbols of an eye adorning various parts of the fort, it actually reminds you of an old Empire fort. You can’t help but feel at home here despite only just entering the place. + +You are brought to a great hall area and Crowley says he’s going to fetch the Vision Lord. In the meantime he’s tells you all to stay here, but feel free to look around. + +“This is pretty exciting, I hope they’ll let us take something back from this place.” Jennifer says while looking at the various plaques. +“Anything’s possible I suppose, but they don’t look like they’re much into luxuries. The only decorations here seem to be dedicated to their fallen like these plaques or those eye symbols…oh wait, they seem to have battle trophies as well, check out that giant’s skull hanging high on the left wall.” You remark still feeling a little wary of things. + +Eventually Crowley comes back with who you guess to be the Vision Lord. The Vision Lord doesn’t look particularly impressive despite his name though it is certain by the scars on his face he is no stranger to battle. You were expecting him to be a lot older though as it stands he looks about your age…well not counting your five-century nap of course. + +He stares at you, Jennifer and the rest for a moment and then he points to Jennifer. + +“I’m guessing you and this lot come from the Nalin Republic.” +“How did you know?” Jennifer asks. +“Where else would you come from? You’re certainly not from one of the six cities of Arat. They’re too busy with their petty squabbles. Besides, we’ve come across some of your type before wandering up here. A few of them even joined our group rather than head back down.” +“You recruited our explorers?!” Jennifer says. +“Yes, if they showed promise and desired to join. I’m sure you might even bump into a couple of them in this place assuming you haven’t already. Now you on the other hand…you are very interesting. Your armor looks as if it comes from another time, you can cast magic with ease and I heard you fended off Snowtop all by yourself. That’s a feat so impressive I can’t imagine you are native to the Republic.” the Vision Lord remarks and points to you. +“What I find interesting is this place and from what I can tell by your commemorations of the your fallen, you feel keeping history is important. So tell me, did Warrick have this fort built or was it sometime after his death?” you say causing some eyebrows to raise. +“You know of Vision Lord Warrick then? Not many outside our order know our founder. How did you come across this information?” +“Easy. We were practically siblings. He was an Eternal, just like I am. He wasn’t a Vision Lord back then, just a Sightmaster, though I guess he felt the need to assign himself a higher title. Doesn’t matter. I’m just glad to see another piece of the old Empire still alive, even if it has taken a very different form.” + +With this response the Vision Lord steps back and the other Eyes now begin whispering amongst themselves. + +“So, the rumors are true. An Eternal does walk the earth again and it is indeed the one Vision Lord Warrick mentions in his writings. As you might expect we don’t get much news this way and we don’t venture too far from here, let alone Rask. In fact the few recruits we manage to get are probably our biggest source of new information. Tell me, how is it that you live?” + +You explain the exact situation as vaguely as you did to Jennifer and Quintus. The cataclysm struck suddenly, you were encased in a magic shell, etc. etc. and eventually Jennifer’s crew dug you up. + +“I see. How unfortunate that you came in contact with the Republic first, but then I suppose it’s better than being stuck in a magic coffin. Still, you’re here now and I believe you will find a better home here.” The Vision Lord remarks. +“What?” +“I’m inviting you to stay with us. Come now. This Order was founded by an Eternal I’m somewhat familiar with their mindset based on the writings of Vision Lord Warrick. I can only imagine the dull tedium you’ve endured in the Republic. How have you managed to occupy your time?” +“Do not presume you know me based on the writings of Warrick. Truth be told, he didn’t exactly create the Eyes, at least not in their original form. The Eyes were originally created by this woman’s great ancestor Jacob Mol.” You say pointing to Jennifer. + +The Vision Lord nods his head a bit. + +“Apologies. I did not mean to offend. And if as you say this lady’s ancestor had a hand in creating the Eyes then we’ve been doubly blessed by the presence of her as well. However, I do believe that you were and still are a man of battle and war. And again I can’t imagine those things being in great supply in the Republic. Surely you would enjoy living here instead. You would be great asset in our own war of extermination of the wendigo. We could certainly use the help.” + +This is a sudden offer and certainly one you weren’t expecting. The strange thing is it isn’t out of the question either. A few days ago you were just going on about to Jennifer about how you were restless in the Republic even with your efforts to help restructure it into a new empire. A glorious undertaking to be sure, but one you’ve had doubts about recently. + +Now this opportunity is certainly less impressive, but there’s something alluring about its simplicity. All you would have to concern yourself with is the battle. The war. The victories over your enemies in melee combat. You’d even live in a place that’s much comfortable to you. + +Of course there’s also Jennifer to think about, but while your relationship with her is blooming into something more romantic what future do you have with her really? She’s not even like Alison in that she’s a warrior and can truly connect with you on some level even if she does make the attempts. + +There’s also the fact that you’ve been worried about her the whole trip. Will you continue to worry about her and allow that to be a weakness to be exploited? If she’s killed will you go through the same emotional ruin you did when Alison was murdered? Do you even want to deal with any of that again? + +You tell the Vision Lord that you and he are going to have to discuss this all in more detailed before you make a decision. Jennifer looks concerned when you say this, but doesn’t say anything. The Vision Lord says that while you and he talk, the rest of your group can rest up or feel free to explore as there is nothing of major value and he trusts nobody would be foolish enough to steal anything. + +You speak with the Vision Lord (who reveals his name is Kells) for quite awhile on the current situation of his order as well as the history of this place and Rask in general. He also remarks about how the Eyes are so hated and feared by the wendigo. As you might’ve guessed magic is in play, but only to a minor degree. Over the centuries the Eyes have managed to focus their minds to create shields against wendigo mental attacks along with being able to banish them to oblivion. (Still vulnerable to normal death through wendigo hosts obviously though) + +After your discussion he tells you that he’ll leave you to your decision, but that he hopes you’ll stay. You then speak with Jennifer about your situation; naturally she wants you to return with her and explains all reasons why. You end up sleeping on the offer and pondering everything some more, but ultimately the decision is up to you. +> Return to the Republic +Retreating from the world and living a simple life dedicated to battle would be a kind of escape from any major responsibilities or headaches. You’d just engage in one battle to the next until you finally fell. At worst, you might become the “Vision Lord” (Which would probably be very likely) but even then you wouldn’t have much responsibility or cares. + +Basically staying here would be like your form of “retirement” for all your years to ungrateful master and an unforgiving system that demanded everything from you and gave next to nothing in return. + +Yeah, you’re too young to retire and you’ve always been the type to do things the hard way even at your own expense. You’re going back to the Republic, you’ll be damned if Quintus is going to take credit for all your hard work. Even now he’s probably making preparations for doing just that, assuming he hasn’t made a complete mess of things. + +Still, if you have it your way you aren’t going back alone. No point in coming all this way for nothing. First thing you do is go to Jennifer. + +“It may please you to know that I’ll be coming back with you to Nalin…” you say. +“I sense a but in there somewhere.” Jennifer remarks. +“It’s actually a however. Anyway I’m going to try to convince the Eyes to come back with us.” +“What? I know I wanted to bring something back, but I don’t think the entire order is what I had in mind.” +“I doubt if I’ll convince everyone, in fact I’ll consider it a victory if they don’t try to lynch me when I suggest it, but I have to try. If only to rebuild the Empire properly.” +“So are we in any danger?” +“Always. Don’t worry it probably won’t be that bad.” + +Jennifer gives you an apprehensive look, but says she’ll trust you in this matter. You tell her that everyone should pack up and get ready to run just in case though. + +Breaking whatever rules the Eyes have in place for decorum you begin to call whoever is nearby to listen to you. + +“I’m only going to say this once because if I can’t convince you the first time, I’m not going to waste my time doing it again. Now I know you’re all very proud warriors. That’s good, you should be, but your talents are going to waste rotting in this dreary little fort. This isn’t what Warrick would’ve wanted for the lot of you.” +“And how do YOU know that?! What do you know of the first Vision Lord?!” an Eye angrily shouts. You’re guessing he hasn’t heard the news on you yet. + +“I knew Warrick a hell of a lot better than any of you for one thing seeing as I actually interacted with the man! He was a dedicated soldier of the Empire first and foremost! I’ve read some of his writings and that was true up until the day he died! He never wanted the Eyes to devolve into some strange monastery. He intended for the Eyes to hold what little of the Empire was left together and eventually rebuild if possible. Now I don’t know what exactly changed after he died, but it’s obvious that the Eyes or whoever took charge of them changed that mission. Well I’m here to tell you all that your original mission can be restored…” your speech is sudden interrupted by Kells who comes storming into the room. + +“What is the meaning of this?! We have shown you courtesy and respect and THIS is how you repay us? You attempt to use us as puppets…” Kells speech is interrupted with a lightning blast to his face. No mental shield in the world is going to protect against that. Kells falls backwards with his blackened head still sizzling and making popping sounds. + +Most of the Eyes are unsure of what to do, though four of them immediately make their good attempt to kill you. You dodge and weave the attacks of the first two and successfully run the pair of them through. The third you freeze to the spot and grab the fourth one’s arm, breaking it before snapping his neck. Seeing that nobody else is willing to attack, you kick the frozen third attack so that he falls over and shatters into multiple pieces. + +“Now as I was saying your mission can be restored. What you just witnessed here, I took no pleasure in doing, but I would hate for any of you to pass up an opportunity because of an old system that is leading this great order into extinction. Besides the random worthy adventurer that decides the join, how do you replenish your numbers at a reasonable rate? I don’t see many women in your ranks. I don’t even see any children. You may be putting dread fear into the wendigo and other denizens of Rask, but your order is slowly dying. Within another fifty years, I’d say the Eyes will at best consist of a few old men. The Empire is going to live again and you can be part of it. You were meant to be part of it. Come with me, and the Eyes will NEVER die.” + +Your speech is met with silence. + +“Or stay here and die a slow lingering death. The choice is yours, I hope you make the right decision.” You say and walk past the crowd. + +You head towards the exit of the fort and see Jennifer standing there alone. + +“Where’s everyone else?” you ask. +“They started running when they heard the sounds of battle even the two remaining soldiers. I assume they’re already on their way to Nalin by now.” +“And you didn’t run?” +“No, I figured you’d either win, and I’d be safer travelling with you anyway, or you’d die and I’d get killed trying run back to Nalin because if the Eyes didn’t get me, the wendigo or giants probably would. So did it work?” +“I don’t know. I mean I made my point, but there’s a lot of indoctrination there. Centuries worth, it was a long shot I guess.” +“Even after you killed some of them?” +“A show of force isn’t always as effective as we want it to be, but like I told them, if I wasn’t going to convince them this first time, I’ll never be able to. Oh well, let’s get going.” + +You and Jennifer exit the fort and make your way back to Nalin, fortunately the ice storm has let up. For a while you try to track where the others of your group ran, but unfortunately it looks like they ran in the wrong direction or at least not the way you came. Jennifer wonders if you should make the attempt to look for them, but you say that you’ll just be in danger of getting lost yourself and say they’re on their own. + +As you and Jennifer trudge through the snow you get a sense that you’re being followed. You turn around and your stalkers make no attempt to hide. They’re Eyes. One of them walks towards you alone. It’s Crowley. + +“I can’t say you convinced everyone, but if it’s any consolation you convinced the smart ones. We’re ready for something new and I was getting tired of this weather anyway.” He says. + +With a new group to travel with and better supplies, you continue on your way. The Eyes also know of several short cuts so it decreases your travelling time. Eventually you make it back to Quala and Flogger territory. To be honest, you’re glad to have some people that can actually fight now. Your more formidable force is met by Trog and just as he promised Jennifer’s two people are still alive and unharmed. In fact one of them excitedly tells Jennifer everything he’s learned about orc culture since he’s been here. + +“Trog see that you return with an army from the north. Always heard there were humans living in Rask, never knew for sure though. Your two people have not been harmed as you can see and I trust after you leave our arrangement of non-hostilities will continue in the future.” +“Well that’ll be up to you.” +“Indeed.” +“Who is this orc?” Crowley asks in a semi-hostile tone. +“He’s a great leader to his people and more worthy to be called a vision lord than Kells was given that he can actually see the future sometimes. Let’s go.” + +You continue your journey with no more major stops, other than a couple of times to rest. + +“So what happens when we reach Nalin?” Jennifer asks coming into your tent. +“I’ll assess the situation of course, but I can’t imagine much has changed. I mean there’s possibility Quintus has dissolved the senate and declared himself Emperor already in my absence, but it’s hard to tell if he hasn’t just freaked out without me around.” +“You’re going to kill Quintus aren’t you?” Jennifer says. + +“Well it is looking that way. I doubt if he’s going to just step aside and even if he did I don’t think I could trust him to stay out of the picture. I take it, you’d rather I didn’t?” +“(Sigh) At one time I might’ve said that would be true, but now things are so different. Still, he is the only one that funded and supported my father’s expeditions and museum. He’s also the main reason why the Empire is a possibility. I mean it is true he couldn’t have done this without you, but you might not have been dug up at all had it not been for him. I don’t know, it just seems fairly ruthless to do to someone that’s been alright with you.” +“It is and I won’t argue that it isn’t, but unfortunately I’ve found that when it comes to power, ruthlessness is what keeps you from getting killed and getting shit done. I mean that was pretty apparent with getting the Eyes to join us.” +“I mean if you’re going to I can’t stop you and it won’t change my feelings for you, but I also wonder about that as well. I mean call it keeping my head in the sand, but I’m not sure if I’d be able to walk that same path as you even if I’m not actively involved in the darker side of things. I mean I’m can you really see me as an Empress or something similar?” + +By the look on your face Jennifer sees that you hadn’t even pondered it. + +“Look, let’s forget about this tonight. Right now let’s just consummate our relationship, whatever that might be in the future. If this trip has taught me anything it’s that life is too damn short to worry about the future. You’d think I would’ve learned that lesson a long time ago, but better late than never.” + +When you embrace Jennifer, you notice a big difference in the act. Namely you don’t engage in the forceful roughness that you have in the past. Even though you learned to control during your time with Alison you still always had that urge of aggressiveness. You can only imagine that centuries of being encased in a magic coffin and with Mistress long dead, you don’t have that fucked up hang up any more. You certainly have larger concerns nowadays. + +One of which is what you’re going to do exactly when you go marching into Dalt with a bunch of Eyes… + +One day later + +“Where have you been? When I heard you weren’t at your usual post and…” Quintus begins to ask when you come through the front door of his house and then he notices the fresh blood on your sword and his guards nowhere to be seen. His eyes widen when you raise your hand up to cast a lightning bolt to his face. + +You find however that the spell fails to work on him and one of his rings glows brightly. + +“I figured one of those rings protected you from magic. Pity, I was trying to give you a quick and less painful death.” You say and advance upon him with your sword in hand. +“No! What’re you doing?! We’re on the same side! We were going to revive the Empire!” Quintus exclaims backing up on the stairway and attempts to rub one of his rings. You aren’t exactly sure what he’s attempting to do, but you’re not going to let him do it. + +You making a lunging rush at him and he nearly disappears before you, but you’ve already stuck him like a pig. His brief attempt at invisibility fades as his dying face stares at you. + +“Wh…why? I…helped…I…was going…to be…emperor…” +“Yeah, well I never told you something Quintus. I was involved in killing the last Emperor and NOW I’m finally going to take MY rightful place!” you say and throw Quintus over the stair railing where his body falls to the floor in a bloody heap. + +Afterwards you take care of Quintus’ family. As dysfunctional as they all are, the last thing you need is for any of them to attempt revenge for whatever reason. + +The day after, you and the Eyes march into the senate and officially dissolve it. This actually involves much less bloodshed as none of them want to oppose you. Indeed some of them offer to be “advisors.” You’re sure some of the fools will be useful so you stay your hand. + +A few days later and it’s official. You make your announcement that the Republic is dead and that the Empire now lives again. The general public doesn’t know quite what to make of everything. You’re sure that there will be some sort of misguided rebellion, but with the military behind you and with the support of the Eyes you’re confident that you won’t have too much trouble. + +This is it. You’ve finally achieved what was always meant to be. + +Now all you have to do is hold it. +> Years pass... +Year 545 + +It isn’t what you would’ve inherited had things been different, but you achieved what many said couldn’t be done. You tamed Quala badlands and have successfully incorporated it into the Empire. It certainly helped that you and Trog already had an understanding long before hand, but encouraging more kobolds citizens to settle the area worked out a lot better than you hoped. The eager little scalies seem to like the wilder and more untamed lands and it also got them out of the more “civilized” Nalin too, making more than a few rural human populations happier that their homes weren’t suddenly collapsing from over dug kobold tunnels. + +The Eyes have been doing a good job of being the imposing internal security you wanted them to be and you’ve already attempted to re-establish a training center for the magic arts. Besides you, the Eyes are the only source of magic in the Empire, if they can strengthen their abilities and train others in such things, you’ll have magic might on your side which can only help in the long run. + +Of course all this expansion has made your neighbors nervous mostly the six cities of Arat, but the Usksha Emirates as well (Though they’ve been wary about you even before the republic fell thanks to Quintus kicking them all out) There’s also the Island League of Delerg to contend with now. The pirates and other ne’er-do-wells had to give up their first profession and actually start putting down roots on their dreary little island hideouts, thanks to the fact that Nalin started cutting back on its naval and seafaring endeavors. + +None of this really matters though, because you know none of them are strong enough to actually do anything to you. Your neighbors form petty alliances with each other in the hopes that if you did decide to strike that somehow they could stand against you. Though in some cases they’d rather join you, Regnik being one of the city states that sees the writing on the wall. Governor Daniel Tivas has requested several meetings with you and surprisingly you’ve also gotten a message from an emissary of Lenay. Seems that Domina Eldolith D’vessa wants to also speak with you, though you can’t imagine that it has anything to do with joining forces. One of your newer advisors David (former senator) has suggested that it wouldn’t hurt to speak with them. Of course most of your military is in favor of just crushing the cities and not talking at all. General Ingrid being the most vocal about it. (Ah the joys of having an enthusiastic military once again under your command.) + +Sightmaster Crowley has suggested in shutting the doors to any talks and instead retaking Rask since it still contains lots of valuable resources that could be used in the future. While not completely out of the question you imagine that’s his former life influencing that advice. He probably hopes that there might be reconciliation between the ones that stayed as well as wiping out the rest of the wendigo. + +Finally there’s Jennifer. She’s not an empress, she’s not even formal advisor, but you still have a close enough relationship with her that you still speak with her from time to time. The two of you realized that your “paths” were indeed different and parted ways amicably. While certainly a supporter of the Empire, she decided that her place was still archeology, exploration and looking after the museum (Even more so after her father Calvin died of natural causes four years ago). Still, as was mentioned, you do correspond with her and lately she’s been expressing an interest in the islands of Delerg and even the great ocean past them. + +Of course with the Island League there, that makes her desire to mount any kind of expedition non-existent. Then again if you were more active there that wouldn’t be the case. You could rebuild the navy again to do more exploration properly and possibly claim those islands for yourself along with eliminating a potential danger in the future (and a pain in Nalin’s side even before you were dug up). + +One direction you’re not looking is south though. The Usksha desert is still a formidable environment and sending an army that way you believe would be a waste as there is literally nothing to hold. Nothing of worth anyway since the usksha are still largely nomadic and have no real cities. As long as the Usksha keep to themselves, you have no problem leaving it alone. + +Whatever you decide, you know you’re going to take a prominent role in it. It’s time to lead from the front again to keep everyone remembering that you’re no throne bound ruler. + +In the meantime you decide to listen to David’s advice and set up a meeting with two of the rulers from Arat. At first you think neither ruler will agree to meet you in Nalin, but surprisingly both do rather than insisting on neutral or even their own territory. + +In a few days both rulers arrive in Dalt with their respective entourage. Neither one is happy about the other one being here, and the presence of svelk probably puts everyone in Dalt on edge. The Eyes are on extra alert. + +Daniel obviously isn’t a warrior by any means. He’s a skinny man with a goatee and a few lines on his face due to the stress of ruling. As for Eldolith, she looks about the same as you last remember, though perhaps slightly older looking. Well as “old looking” as svelk get anyway. + +“When I first heard that an Eternal appeared in Nalin, I had hoped it wasn’t you.” Eldolith says when she sees you again. +“Mm, I’m sure you’ll have to explain yourself to all the other svelk now about how you attempted to seduce me by sucking on my finger.” You retort which causes her entire entourage to react with shock and a particular female svelk gives Eldolith a dirty look. Daniel and his people on the other hand are just as surprised, but find it more amusing. + +“Watch yourself and your slander! I am no longer a lowly merc following the whims of my delusional bitch mother. I am the ruler of my people and we are not about to be conquered by your so called renewed empire!” Eldolith exclaims. +“We’ll see.” You remark with a smile and tell everyone to sit down at the meeting table. + +“First, I’m glad you both felt the need to come see me in person. This makes what we will discuss here so much more personal, though I know there are six cities. Do you know why none of the other rulers have desired to see me?” you ask. +“I can answer that.” Daniel says. “The rulers of Atinil and Valizza are already under the influence of Eldolith so by her being here they already have their master to speak for them.” +“Daniel, you’re just frustrated that YOU could not sway them into becoming whores for the Empire like you seem to desire.” Eldolith remarks. +“Okay, so what of the other two?” +“Well since you decided to incorporate those stinking greenskins into your society, the people of Zo want nothing to do with you and I can’t say as I blame them. As for Telis, who the hell knows? There hasn’t been word from them for almost a decade. The entire city could be dead for all anyone knows.” Eldolith says in a bored tone. + +After hearing this, you ask why both of them wanted to see you in the first place. Daniel tells you that he is basically seeking protection for his city-state. He says that he realizes that Regnik can no longer afford to be independent and that he is willing to become a vassal of the Empire. He doesn’t care if half the citizens are against it; he says it’s the best thing for the survival of Regnik. He does make it clear though that he is not asking to be annexed completely. He still wants Regnik to be independent on a day-to-day basis, just that it will be paying you money in exchange for protection. + +Eldolith sneers at Daniel and begins to call him a weakling raising the hostilities of both sides of the table until you demand that everyone calm down. + +“Alright Eldy, what the hell is it that you want to say, because I know damn well it isn’t an alliance let alone vassalhood.” +“You’re right. It isn’t being subserviant, but rather a setting of boundaries right now. The svelk people are independent AND strong. We will NOT bend to your will and if you doubt this then send your armies to invade and see them slaughtered by the thousands!” +“So, I’m supposed to just sit back and watch you get stronger until you attack us eh? And I’d watch your next words Eldolith, in case you’ve forgotten you’re not exactly in friendly company right now.” +“You think I care about your threats? Attempt to kill me if you wish, but I will not grovel like this weak human here.” + +Eldolith is certainly going all out to be confrontational, though you wonder how much of it is an act for her people because you embarrassed her with the finger comment. Still, you know svelk and they aren’t all bluff. She’s probably being very serious with her grandstanding which makes you also wonder what power is it that she holds that could potentially stand against you. You’re aware that the svelk do have mages, which does put them above most people, but even you can match that now. + +If Daniel is correct then she does have the support of two other city-states and will probably have Zo as well seeing as they hate orcs. Still even with the extra military help it still wouldn’t be enough. Might take awhile, but you’d conquer eventually. + +Either Eldolith is got something else up her sleeve or she’s being overconfident. Could go either way. + +The temptation to indulge her threats is great, but maybe some caution might be in order. You decide to take Daniel up on his offer and use his city as a launching zone for spies and other possible intelligence gathering plans before you make a final decision on Eldolith. That would also give you time to bring your attention to other potential areas of conquest like Rask or Delerg. +> Make Regnik a vassal and retake Rask +Having extra resources to fund a potential war in the future isn’t a bad idea so Rask is probably the better choice in that you don’t have to worry about building a bunch of ships to take it. Not to mention you’ve already got a presence of sorts there with Trog’s Flogger tribe that makes up most of the population in Quala and spilling over into Rask. + +The only main concern you have is that you’re going to have to transfer more Eyes to that front due to the wendigo danger there which will take away from internal security as well as magic training, but there’s nothing else for it. + +As for Daniel and Eldolith you’ll indulge both of their requests for now. You tell Daniel that he can consider his city now under the protection of the Empire and that any foreign invasion attempts in any form with be met with force. + +“Why are you looking at me when you say that?” Eldolith asks. +“Because I know your kind and Daniel’s already mentioned you have your influence in two other cities. Now you can have your little territory for now, but make no mistake, you’re going to be watched from here on in and if I sense ANYTHING that could be a potential danger to the Empire you’re going to wish that you never managed to unite the svelk to begin with.” +“We’ll do as we please and nobody is going to stop us!” +“Okay then, as you said just send an invasion force in my direction and see if I’m not being serious.” + +At this point Eldolith just rolls her eyes, but shuts up. Obviously she knows anymore antagonism might result in war which its apparent now that she doesn’t truly want if she can help it. + +Daniel profusely thanks you for heeding his request and will make sure to accommodate your people in anyway he can. You almost shake your head at the man’s naivety if he actually believes his city is going to remain autonomous in the way he believes it will. He’s going to allow your military there, it won’t be long before you’ve got complete control and any “independence” the city thinks it has is only because you’re allowing it. Of course maybe he knows what is probably going to happen and he’s just trying to convince himself otherwise. + +In any event you’re glad when the svelk leave (everyone is no doubt), it was a reminder of less happy times in your life. + +You tell Crowley that you are planning to retake Rask and steps will have to be made to steadily start transferring Eyes up there to combat the wendigo threat. Since there isn’t any real centralized government to conquer in Rask, the bigger concern is getting folks to settle up there though you’re sure more than a few enterprising sort or people desperate for work will eventually pour into the area when establishing the first towns. If nothing else you’ve always got orcs who are probably going to be doing most of the fighting anyway since with less Eyes around in Nalin, you’re going to have to rely on normal military to keep the plebs in line. (Or rather keep them from getting ideas about getting out of line) + +Within the first few months you have the basics of a town up and running along with a fort. As you predicted orcs are making up most of your fighting force up here and are being lead by Eyes. As for the regular work force surprisingly most of it consists of elves who have been finding Nalin less friendly to their kind in recent years and prefer the “less human/more wilderness” much more to their liking. You take part in the “retaming” of Rask. + +For the most part the campaign is successful though not without its struggles. With less Eyes around in Rask, it seems the wendigo took advantage of the situation and made a concentrated attack on Fort Everwatch and they managed to massacre the remaining Eyes or in some unfortunate cases possess them. The fort itself is found in a destroyed state. + +Crowley naturally is furious by this, as even though he disagreed with his fellow Eyes that stayed, he didn’t wish this on them. He becomes so zealous in his vow to wipe out every single wendigo in Rask, you actually have to rein him in a bit so he doesn’t go get himself killed by going off by alone on some revenge mission. + +Within six months you’ve got the wendigos on the run again more and other dangerous denizens of Rask are becoming even less of a problem or at least retreating away from the slow encroachment of civilization. Fort Sentinel is finally finished along with the new town Tiblik. + +During this “taming” of Rask you get a message from David telling you in a letter that so far things are going smoothly in Arat, at least on your end of things. The governor is reportedly having some problems with protestors taking umbrage with your troops being in the city. The commanding officer of your soldiers has offered to deal with the problem, but Daniel has said that will only confirm their fears and insists on having his own people deal with the protests. + +David also tells you that things are also going well in Nalin though there has been a slight increase in crime due to there being less Eyes around. Nothing major, but he felt he should let you know. + +You throw away the letter and grumble a bit at the realization that you’ll have to return to Nalin soon. Even though these concerns aren’t big ones, you can’t help but believe that if you stay away too long, more problems will crop up and existing ones will get worse. + +You look at the snowy scenery from the battlements of Fort Sentinel and take a moment to bask in your accomplishment before making that trudge back to Nalin. The cold air actually feels good to you right now. + +You hear Crowley coming up to find you. + +“There you are, I was wondering if you knew about the messenger that was looking for you.” +“Yeah, I got the message. You know people probably thought Rask would never be tamed again, but the first steps are being taken and eventually it’ll be part of the Empire again proper, just like Quala.” You remark. +“I’m certainly glad to see it my Emperor. Just wish all of my brothers had joined me when I first left Everwatch.” +“A tragic loss for you I’m sure, but do not dwell on them too much, for you are here and they are not. You saw a chance for the Eyes to live forever and took it. And because you did, the Eyes are destined to live as long as the Empire exists. Those that fell in Everwatch will live on in a way.” +“I suppose you’re right. I’m a little surprised to hear you say so though. I might’ve thought you considered them traitors.” +“At the time I asked you to join me, the Empire was not even yet reborn. They couldn’t be traitors to something that didn’t exist. I thought them shortsighted fools perhaps, but not traitors and certainly not cowards. To be honest I was sort of hoping when we did come back here that maybe some of them might’ve changed their minds.” +“As did I. I swear I’m going to make sure the wendigo are exterminated from Rask.” +“Hm, well that would be a blessing, but as I said before don’t get too caught up in revenge. Especially since you’re going to have to be in charge of this place.” + +Crowley gives you a quizzical look. + +“What do you mean?” +“I mean as much fun as I’ve had slaughtering the wendigo, ogres, uncivilized orcs and those...(sigh) shit I forgot the name of those little vicious furry things with big teeth…” +“Auravraxes, my Emperor.” +“Yeah those things. Anyway as much fun as I’ve had doing that and overseeing the first flags being replanted here, I know I have to get back to Nalin. The boring duty of being in charge calls. So I need someone competent to look after stuff here in Rask and since you already know the landscape, probably better than I do, you might as well do the job.” + +Crowley gives a faint smile and a nod. + +“I won’t fail you in this task, my Emperor.” +“I should hope not, but I’m sure you’ll have a handle on things. Really it’s not going to get really tough until more citizens start settling up here. I imagine you probably won’t have too much problem with the orcs since strength of arms is always respected. The elves on the other hand, well they tend to bitch about anything. You’d think the pointy ears would be grateful that I didn’t bring back slavery. Anyway, just don’t kill too many unruly citizens if it comes to it, we’re trying to keep people up here.” +“Don’t worry, remember I’m a sightmaster, part of my job is keeping the citizenry in line.” +“Okay, well then I’ll leave you to it. You’ll find all the latest reports and such in your office.” + +With this final command, you take your leave of Rask and return to Nalin. +> Years pass... +Year 550 + +More and more each year your nation is starting to resemble the Empire of old. More and more each year you’re also starting to feel old too. The aches and pains of battles long past (and not too long past) are starting to catch up with you. + +You never tried to think about getting “old” too much, except during the years of when the Emperor was “sick.” Recently you’ve begun thinking about what his plans were again. How he was going to defeat death by transferring his essence or spirit or mind or whatever into your own body. Well at least that’s what Semra and Jacob told you and what ultimately lead to the situation you’re in now. + +Unfortunately, you haven’t really the means to go about such a thing. Your knowledge of magic is better than most, but the Emperor never showed you that trick let alone how to get to the Isle of Mortos. You wouldn’t even know about how to go about “creating” another one of your kind either which was also required…again so Semra and Jacob told you. + +Makes you wonder what happened to the “eternals” Marik created. You wonder if they survived the initial cataclysm and if so, what became of them? Did they plan any major role during or after it? It’s apparent that the technique to create an eternal like you or Marik’s tank babies was lost too. + +Well it doesn’t matter much now anyway, you can assume they’re all certainly dead now, along with crazy ol’ Marik. Still, you wonder about his factory, as it was located in Arat. + +In fact there have been a lot of events going on in Arat lately according to your spies. + +The major thing being that there have been sightings of the Xi Hive in Arat, not many and certainly no major attacks, but the insectoid creatures have been attacking anyone they see as usual. It won’t be long before they become a major threat in this area. Right now it isn’t your problem at all, but you imagine they will be eventually. + +From what you’ve heard the Xi have been really putting the Redcap Kingdom on the defensive, but the gnomes are still holding out and not even losing any ground. You certainly can admire that, and you’d even try to send an emissary to go speak with them if only to get a better feel of the Xi threat, but you’ve also heard the gnomes have also ordered a kill on sight to well…anyone. + +Your best shot at learning more about the Xi would probably be Eldolith, but she’s also been her usual antagonistic self, especially ever since you officially annexed Regnik into the Empire. Pointing to you and the Xi as a threat she managed to unify the other city-states of Zo, Valizza and Atnil into something called the Arat Confederacy. In reality it’s a new nation with four cities rather than a true alliance where everyone is supposedly still autonomous. + +The only other city-state that doesn’t belong to Eldy’s little alliance is Telis, which as usual, nobody seems to know anything about. Still, it seems like it’s probably in the most danger of the Xi considering its proximity to where Xi territory is starting to expand. You never really gave it much thought until now, but according to the maps and if your memory isn’t completely off, Telis isn’t too far away from where Marik’s factory was located. Now you’re starting to wonder if its “mysterious” nature isn’t due to that factor. + +In a perfect world Arat would be your next and only priority, but there have been concerns about the Delerg islands as well. There has nearly been no reports about the Island League’s activities for years, it’s almost as if they all just disappeared, but more concerning is the fact that strange humanoid creatures have been sighted off the coasts of Quala at night. While Quala is still mostly home to your orc population and the place is still the poorest of your territories, you still don’t want a potential invasion to occur. It might be time to start exploring and possibly conquering the islands at last. + +Seeing as the orcs will have the most familiarity with this potential coastal threat, you decide to go speak with Trog about it. You might as well anyway if only to see who his potential successor is going to be seeing as you know Trog is supposed to be dying. + +When you arrive to meet with him, you see just how true that is. The old orc is lying prone on fur skin bedding with two younger female orcs attending to him. It’s very strange to see orcs behave in this manner. Orcs don’t tend to have a long life span to begin with due to all their fighting, but to see one being actually cared for rather than taken to the wilderness and left to die (at best) is unusual. Then again Trog was a very respected leader. He’s obviously weak, but when he notices you he tries to sit up and waves away his attendants. + +“Ah…the Eternal… dreams told Trog that we would see each other one last time before the end. Now that you’re here Trog now know death coming soon for me. Sad that Trog could not die as a warrior, but still a good life with many children to carry on name.” Trog says. +“And who would be that successor Trog?” you ask. +“Trog believe that Sprog take over next. Already killed several of his siblings, others too scared to oppose. Was a great contest, only well enough to see some of it, but very good. Very bloody.” +“Sorry I missed it.” +“Trog warn you though, Sprog not quite as accepting of our current situation as Trog. Believes orcs should be independent. Might be right, might be wrong, not care. Trog too tired to care anymore.” +“Am I going to have to kill him?” +“Do not know. Perhaps, perhaps not. Do as you wish. You always have. As Trog has said, too tired to care anymore.” +“So I take it that I probably should ask this Sprog about the reports of the humanoid interlopers off Quala’s coast?” +“Hrm. That. Trog can still help a little… Yes, there have been sightings, but nothing human about them. Fellow orcs tell me they look more like fish than anything else. Appear on land sometimes, but never for very long. Not sure if they are able or if they are just scouting. Orcs ready for a fight as always if they do decide to invade. Kobolds too. Was not sure about the little scalies living here at first, but enjoy their antics. Respect our strength too…” + +Trog begins to drift off to sleep, but you aren’t done with him yet. + +“While I hate to interrupt your journey to the afterlife, you have any last visions for me?” +“Hrm…yes…Trog did actually. War is coming.” +“That’s a given Trog, war is always coming.” +“True, but this one will be against an enemy that you’ve never faced the likes of before. They will be relentless, they will not stop and even as strong as the Empire is, I fear that it will not be enough. Worse is the fact that you are approaching your own twilight years as this terrible threat comes. You will no longer be able to just march in like the great warrior you once were…” +“Trog, I might be getting old, but I’m not ready for the damn grave yet.” +“True, but you acknowledge that you ARE getting old. Still…perhaps that is a good sign. Knowing your limitations. Trog knew his…” + +At this point Trog falls unconscious and despite your prodding and nudging him, he isn’t waking from it. From his breathing patterns, you know he’ll be dead soon. + +“Damn it Trog, you could’ve at least told me who this relentless enemy was going to be. Guess that was your last little joke on me. Good one Trog.” You remark and exit Trog’s tent. You tell the group standing outside that he’ll be soon passing on, if anyone wants to see the final moments. Several female orcs go in, but the male orcs just give a solemn look downward save for the very large one standing nearby with an equally huge battle axe. When he approaches you, your entourage of guards stands ready to defend you, but judging by his appearance he’d give them a good fight all by himself. + +“So is the old man dead?” the orc asks gruffly. +“Well if he isn’t yet, he soon will be…I’m guessing you’re Sprog.” +“Right. Guess you da Emp. Huh. Thought you’d be bigger. Old man say you powerful though. Guess cause of magic abilities like old man. Feh.” +“I take it, you don’t like magic?” +“Magic give unfair advantage even more than shooty weapons. Orcs have no more magic types now. Least none Sprog know of. No chance to rebel now.” +“You’re telling me you’d rebel?” +“Yes, I’d lead a rebellion if we had magic to even up odds. Told old man that he should challenge you long time ago, but said you were too powerful for him. Scared to die like proper warrior, now he die like old man that he is and we still have to serve the Empire.” +“Who says? You could still rebel. You’re standing right here in front of me surrounded by your fellow orcs, I’ve only got five men with me. I’d say right now is the best chance you got of killing me and making your people free again.” + +Sprog grips his axe a bit and gives you a suspicious look pondering if you’re being serious or not. You are of course, but even though Sprog eventually senses that, he’s not taking you up on that offer. + +“Bah, want to be free, but still stand no chance of killing you. At best might get lucky and wound you before you set Sprog on fire or somethin’. Dying in battle one thing, but Sprog not suicidal. Most orcs too comfortable now with livin’ under the Empire anyway. Half would probably attack me, the idjits.” +“Always did appreciate you orcs and your honesty. Now that I know I don’t need to kill you anytime soon, what can you tell me about these sightings off the coasts of Quala?” + +Sprog tells you much of the same things you’ve already heard. Fishmen sighted skulking around the coasts and then disappearing. He says he’s already got patrols marching up and down the coasts, but no sign of them again. + +For all you know these fish people are this relentless force that’s going to be coming at you, of course it also could be the Xi Hive which is the only other force you could think of, at worst it could be both. Could even be the usksha or someone you haven’t even met yet. + +In any case, you still need to do something about this potential aquatic threat. This has really been a long time coming. Whatever the hell is living out on those islands, be they human or otherwise is going to feel the full might of the Empire. + +Thanks to having all the extra resources in Rask now your task of getting a proper fleet up and running isn’t a drain on the Empire and gets done a lot quicker. Training sailors takes a little longer, but fortunately your people aren’t completely ignorant of seafaring ways. + +Within months you have a sizable armada that should do the job. The only thing you’re unsure of is whether or not you should go along on this conquest. + +Maybe because you’re older and beginning to realize you aren’t as fast or as strong as you once were, or maybe because you have uneasiness about being on the open water and possibly even an slight fear of it (A fear you weren’t even aware of), or maybe it’s a combination of the two, you don’t know. + +What was it that Trog said before he died? Knowing your limitations? +> Lead from the front +There might be a day where you’re going to have to command all your armies from bed as a sick old man, but today is not that day. As long as you can wield a weapon and move reasonably well, nobody is stopping you from fighting. As far as being on open water, well this is the perfect chance to get over that possible phobia. + +Since your own intelligence reports on Delerg have always been hazy at best, you gather your information from less reputable places, namely some of the prisons. Nalin sailors as a rule stayed away from Delerg waters due to the Island League, Still there were always the occasional forays into it for illegal smuggling purposes and you specifically have these types give you any and all information as well as a chance to earn their freedom by enlisting in the navy. + +While getting the information on island details isn’t too much of a problem due to the threat of violence, you don’t get a lot of takers to enlist even with the promise of freedom (or implied threats of conscription); at first you believe it’s just a criminal attitude of not wishing to be part of the government, but one fellow by the name of Len tells you it’s a little more than that. Len is about your age, probably a little older and is the embodiment of an “old sea dog” with his untidy white hair and beard. + +Len says he stopped smuggling years ago when he started to feel uneasy sailing in the waters, let alone dealing with some of the people who had become enamored with a weird religion. + +“Religion? What kind of religion?” you ask. +“Not exactly sure, but I’m pretty sure it involved the worship of some water god. I remember finding it strange since it wasn’t like any of the inhabitants of Delerg were particularly religious before. When one of my friends came into the docks one night babbling a mad tale about how he barely escaped from an ambush of screaming cultists that was around the time I decided to stop making smuggling runs and go into something less dangerous like burglary, obviously I wasn’t as good at that since I got caught.” Len replies. +“So where is this friend of yours and what did he see?” +“Not in a jail cell if that’s what you’re wondering. Last I heard he was committed into an asylum. I think he may have very well killed himself. He never did quite get over it and had a hard time talking about the details, but I do remember him saying that the cultists weren’t quite human looking and fully intent on sacrificing him, like they did with the others who weren’t so lucky to escape I guess.” +“What, like the recent fishmen descriptions?” +“Perhaps not quite that far, but he did say they had unnatural eyes and their skin was slimy looking. The reason why you’re not getting many enlistees is probably either due to these stories or from personal experience and I imagine the personal experience is rare given that my own friend went completely mad from his own experience. To be quite honest, I’m sort of surprised the Empire never knew any of this before.” +“Wasn’t an issue before. A few rumors and tales from mad sailors and criminals isn’t going to catch serious attention. In fact before people starting seeing fishmen on the coasts I didn’t even know about any of this. Delerg was considered low priority, though that may have been a mistake, then again we’re probably in a better position to handle this now. So what is your answer on enlistment?” + +Len pauses for a moment. + +“Well, I’ve been a criminal nearly all my life and never had much use for following orders. But as much as I like living, I like freedom a lot more. So if enlistment means possibly getting killed by a bunch of fish monsters but the chance of getting out of those hellholes you call prisons, then I’ll take the risk. Besides, I’d say my odds are a lot better now seeing as I’ll be travelling with the Empire’s navy. I figure I can’t get any safer than that.” +“Sure you can, you’re going to be aboard my own personal ship.” +“I am?” +“You were a captain weren’t you? According to your record you’re probably one of the more experienced ones in the damn Empire. Criminal or otherwise. You’re going to be navigator of my personal ship, because I sure as hell don’t know anything about steering a ship. Plus you have better knowledge of the area, so you’re coming with me directly.” + +Len isn’t sure how to respond except with a hesitant thank you. He probably thought he was going to be able to sneak away at some point, but that will be next to impossible now with him being aboard your ship. + +When the time comes, you board your personal ship, which is decked out in the best gear available. Actually it’s much slower than the rest of the ships due to its size, but then its meant to fight and take punishment, not outmaneuver a possible enemy. Honestly, you aren’t even sure what you’ll encounter. If the Island League is indeed completely gone, then you may face no opposition at all as far as other ships are concerned. Maybe you’ll have strange fishmen scaling your ships in an attempt to kill you. Whatever you face, you’ll be ready. + +Since the occupation of the islands is the main priority, you’re taking a strong force of orcs with you. Sprog himself has volunteered to come, possibly to prove to the rest of his people of how much of a warrior he is. Crowley sent a letter asking if you needed his assistance or the assistance of any of the Eyes as things are much calmer in Rask nowadays, but you tell him the Eyes are needed at home as they always are. + +Within a few days you’re in Delerg waters, but you’ve come across no islands yet. Len remarks about how strange this is since according to his memory you should’ve come across a couple by now. Even the information you received from others with knowledge of the area would dictate that you would’ve encountered some sort of landmass by now. + +When you sail further out to sea, you still don’t find any major landmass. There are small patches of land, but nothing that would support a town or other settlement. At best you might be able to build a small guard tower on them and that would be only if the land was relatively flat and solid, which it doesn’t appear to be. + +“This is damn odd, that small patch of land right there where the Island League’s biggest island was! It even had their largest settlement, Barnacle! It’s like the waters just swallowed everything up!” Len remarks. +“I’m getting a vague impression I know what happened to this place. All of Delerg in fact. There’s nothing here worth conquering now, we might as well…” + +Before you can complete your sentence there is a sudden rumble in the water. + +“EVERYONE BRACE THEMSELVES!” you shout and then you see several of your ships fly up off of the waters when a large sea monster spectacularly arises from below. Your own ship is rocked severely with water crashing everywhere. For a moment you think night has fallen, but it’s just the sea creature blotting out the sun. + +The creature is bigger than anything you’ve ever faced. Even “Snowtop” would be the size of a gnome compared to this thing. Doesn’t help that the creature has two heads and several tentacles already crushing some of your ships that weren’t destroyed when it ascended in the first place. + +“FIRE EVERYTHING AND DON’T STOP UNTIL THAT THING IS DEAD!” you shout and the cannons roar desperately trying to harm the creature. Fortunately the ships that you have left don’t seem to be losing their courage and presumably their captains have the same idea of attacking since you can see cannon fire coming from them. Though given their proximity to the creature, they wouldn’t be able to retreat in time for it to crush them anyway. + +The beast isn’t as invulnerable as it would seem as the cannon fire does its work and delivers wounds but the main problem is, it’s just too damn big. You cast frost bolts at its tentacles that are attempting to wrap around the ship, you then order your troops to shatter them while they’re still frozen. This works well enough that it keeps your ship afloat, but there’s more than just the sea monster to worry about and you fully expected something like this to happen even before you met the leviathan. + +Several of the fishmen begin scaling your ship. While your ship is well defended and has the skilled manpower it needs to repel the attack, you get the impression that some of the aquatic attackers are probably trying to put holes in it from underneath. + +“Sprog take some of your people, get in the water and kill everything!” you shout. Sprog doesn’t argue, he just nods at your command. Assuming if the both of you manage to get out of this alive, you at least know you’ve got his complete loyalty now. Nothing like fighting side by side against impossible odds to gain respect. + +Stripping off what little armor he was wearing in the first place, Sprog goes into full bezerker orc battle frenzy while ordering some of his best to follow him down into the water. You know orcs are tough, but you hope they’ll be able to fight these fishmen in their own environment. It is a severe disadvantage after all. + +Meanwhile the beast is continuing to destroy the rest of your fleet. You can see people in the water desperately attempting to cling to floating wreckage, only to be pulled underneath the waves by the fishmen who are picking them off. Your own ship has slowly changed direction thanks to Len taking command of the steering wheel. + +“We can’t fight this monster! We have to retreat!” he shouts pulling the wheel of the ship as hard as he can. + +He’s probably right and who knows, if you tried right now, you might actually manage to get away while the beast is still primarily occupied. That certainly would be the most sensible thing to do; of course something about this whole experience is making you feel well…good. Your heart is pumping, you’re full of energy and you’re determined to show this undersea abomination that you’re not ready to lie down and accept the fact that you’re getting older. + +“NO! I can’t let this beast beat me! I never lose!” you shout and knock Len off of the wheel who looks at you like you’re insane and scurries off to find a hiding spot. + +With battle and bloodshed all around you, with the sounds of cannons and swords filling your eardrums, you make your way to the crow’s nest to gain the highest vantage point you can. From there you get your best look at the sea monster. The large holes in its body where cannons have blown off chunks of it convince you that it can be defeated. It’s just going to take a little magic that’s all… or rather a lot of it. + +You begin to focus… +> Create an ice storm +Frost has been doing a good job at freezing the beast’s tentacles, so you decide to try to freeze the entire thing. + +You concentrate and as you do you begin to feel little the air grow colder and colder. The wind begins to pick up and soon ice pellets begin to rain down on the area. + +You directly unleash a blast of frost right at one of the creature’s heads and while ice does indeed start to form around it and movement begins to get sluggish. It isn’t quite enough to stop it completely from moving. + +Instead the creature bashes its own head against a nearby ship in an attempt to break the ice shell now around its frozen head, destroying it and cracking the ice in the process. The beast’s other head completely submerges under water, followed by the rest of its body. + +In the meantime the fishmen that are scaling your ship are having a bit of difficulty with the cold which is slowing them down, unfortunately it isn’t the best thing for your own crew either, but they’re doing better than the fish at least. + +You help your crew by continuing to cast ice bolts from the crow’s nest, but this is soon cut short when a large tentacle whips out of the water and heads directly towards your position. You attempt to freeze the tentacle and you succeed, but you fail to stop its momentum. The frozen tentacle smashes into the crow’s nest and the mast, destroying both along with part of the tentacle shattering in several pieces in the process. + +As for you, you’re hit with such a great force that all the wind is knocked out of you and you go flying into the ocean and hit the water quite hard. You barely manage to swim back up to the water’s surface and you’re still feeling quite woozy and having trouble breathing normally. You’re fairly certain you’ve got cracked or broken ribs. + +Floating in the middle of the ocean with pieces of your once great fleet drifting nearby, you struggle to swin to some nearby debris before you pass out. You don’t get far however, when all of a sudden you feel several claws grabbing your legs, this is soon followed by the feeling of teeth sinking into your legs. You attempt to kick away, but you can’t shake them. + +A fish person rises up from the water to grab your upper body in an attempt to drag you under for good. The smell of saltwater fills your nostril along with the foul smell of sea life in general. Already struggling to catch your breath, you soon succumb to watery death by the hands of the fish people.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There might be a day where you’re going to have to command all your armies from bed as a sick old man, but today is not that day. As long as you can wield a weapon and move reasonably well, nobody is stopping you from fighting. As far as being on open water, well this is the perfect chance to get over that possible phobia. + +Since your own intelligence reports on Delerg have always been hazy at best, you gather your information from less reputable places, namely some of the prisons. Nalin sailors as a rule stayed away from Delerg waters due to the Island League, Still there were always the occasional forays into it for illegal smuggling purposes and you specifically have these types give you any and all information as well as a chance to earn their freedom by enlisting in the navy. + +While getting the information on island details isn’t too much of a problem due to the threat of violence, you don’t get a lot of takers to enlist even with the promise of freedom (or implied threats of conscription); at first you believe it’s just a criminal attitude of not wishing to be part of the government, but one fellow by the name of Len tells you it’s a little more than that. Len is about your age, probably a little older and is the embodiment of an “old sea dog” with his untidy white hair and beard. + +Len says he stopped smuggling years ago when he started to feel uneasy sailing in the waters, let alone dealing with some of the people who had become enamored with a weird religion. + +“Religion? What kind of religion?” you ask. +“Not exactly sure, but I’m pretty sure it involved the worship of some water god. I remember finding it strange since it wasn’t like any of the inhabitants of Delerg were particularly religious before. When one of my friends came into the docks one night babbling a mad tale about how he barely escaped from an ambush of screaming cultists that was around the time I decided to stop making smuggling runs and go into something less dangerous like burglary, obviously I wasn’t as good at that since I got caught.” Len replies. +“So where is this friend of yours and what did he see?” +“Not in a jail cell if that’s what you’re wondering. Last I heard he was committed into an asylum. I think he may have very well killed himself. He never did quite get over it and had a hard time talking about the details, but I do remember him saying that the cultists weren’t quite human looking and fully intent on sacrificing him, like they did with the others who weren’t so lucky to escape I guess.” +“What, like the recent fishmen descriptions?” +“Perhaps not quite that far, but he did say they had unnatural eyes and their skin was slimy looking. The reason why you’re not getting many enlistees is probably either due to these stories or from personal experience and I imagine the personal experience is rare given that my own friend went completely mad from his own experience. To be quite honest, I’m sort of surprised the Empire never knew any of this before.” +“Wasn’t an issue before. A few rumors and tales from mad sailors and criminals isn’t going to catch serious attention. In fact before people starting seeing fishmen on the coasts I didn’t even know about any of this. Delerg was considered low priority, though that may have been a mistake, then again we’re probably in a better position to handle this now. So what is your answer on enlistment?” + +Len pauses for a moment. + +“Well, I’ve been a criminal nearly all my life and never had much use for following orders. But as much as I like living, I like freedom a lot more. So if enlistment means possibly getting killed by a bunch of fish monsters but the chance of getting out of those hellholes you call prisons, then I’ll take the risk. Besides, I’d say my odds are a lot better now seeing as I’ll be travelling with the Empire’s navy. I figure I can’t get any safer than that.” +“Sure you can, you’re going to be aboard my own personal ship.” +“I am?” +“You were a captain weren’t you? According to your record you’re probably one of the more experienced ones in the damn Empire. Criminal or otherwise. You’re going to be navigator of my personal ship, because I sure as hell don’t know anything about steering a ship. Plus you have better knowledge of the area, so you’re coming with me directly.” + +Len isn’t sure how to respond except with a hesitant thank you. He probably thought he was going to be able to sneak away at some point, but that will be next to impossible now with him being aboard your ship. + +When the time comes, you board your personal ship, which is decked out in the best gear available. Actually it’s much slower than the rest of the ships due to its size, but then its meant to fight and take punishment, not outmaneuver a possible enemy. Honestly, you aren’t even sure what you’ll encounter. If the Island League is indeed completely gone, then you may face no opposition at all as far as other ships are concerned. Maybe you’ll have strange fishmen scaling your ships in an attempt to kill you. Whatever you face, you’ll be ready. + +Since the occupation of the islands is the main priority, you’re taking a strong force of orcs with you. Sprog himself has volunteered to come, possibly to prove to the rest of his people of how much of a warrior he is. Crowley sent a letter asking if you needed his assistance or the assistance of any of the Eyes as things are much calmer in Rask nowadays, but you tell him the Eyes are needed at home as they always are. + +Within a few days you’re in Delerg waters, but you’ve come across no islands yet. Len remarks about how strange this is since according to his memory you should’ve come across a couple by now. Even the information you received from others with knowledge of the area would dictate that you would’ve encountered some sort of landmass by now. + +When you sail further out to sea, you still don’t find any major landmass. There are small patches of land, but nothing that would support a town or other settlement. At best you might be able to build a small guard tower on them and that would be only if the land was relatively flat and solid, which it doesn’t appear to be. + +“This is damn odd, that small patch of land right there where the Island League’s biggest island was! It even had their largest settlement, Barnacle! It’s like the waters just swallowed everything up!” Len remarks. +“I’m getting a vague impression I know what happened to this place. All of Delerg in fact. There’s nothing here worth conquering now, we might as well…” + +Before you can complete your sentence there is a sudden rumble in the water. + +“EVERYONE BRACE THEMSELVES!” you shout and then you see several of your ships fly up off of the waters when a large sea monster spectacularly arises from below. Your own ship is rocked severely with water crashing everywhere. For a moment you think night has fallen, but it’s just the sea creature blotting out the sun. + +The creature is bigger than anything you’ve ever faced. Even “Snowtop” would be the size of a gnome compared to this thing. Doesn’t help that the creature has two heads and several tentacles already crushing some of your ships that weren’t destroyed when it ascended in the first place. + +“FIRE EVERYTHING AND DON’T STOP UNTIL THAT THING IS DEAD!” you shout and the cannons roar desperately trying to harm the creature. Fortunately the ships that you have left don’t seem to be losing their courage and presumably their captains have the same idea of attacking since you can see cannon fire coming from them. Though given their proximity to the creature, they wouldn’t be able to retreat in time for it to crush them anyway. + +The beast isn’t as invulnerable as it would seem as the cannon fire does its work and delivers wounds but the main problem is, it’s just too damn big. You cast frost bolts at its tentacles that are attempting to wrap around the ship, you then order your troops to shatter them while they’re still frozen. This works well enough that it keeps your ship afloat, but there’s more than just the sea monster to worry about and you fully expected something like this to happen even before you met the leviathan. + +Several of the fishmen begin scaling your ship. While your ship is well defended and has the skilled manpower it needs to repel the attack, you get the impression that some of the aquatic attackers are probably trying to put holes in it from underneath. + +“Sprog take some of your people, get in the water and kill everything!” you shout. Sprog doesn’t argue, he just nods at your command. Assuming if the both of you manage to get out of this alive, you at least know you’ve got his complete loyalty now. Nothing like fighting side by side against impossible odds to gain respect. + +Stripping off what little armor he was wearing in the first place, Sprog goes into full bezerker orc battle frenzy while ordering some of his best to follow him down into the water. You know orcs are tough, but you hope they’ll be able to fight these fishmen in their own environment. It is a severe disadvantage after all. + +Meanwhile the beast is continuing to destroy the rest of your fleet. You can see people in the water desperately attempting to cling to floating wreckage, only to be pulled underneath the waves by the fishmen who are picking them off. Your own ship has slowly changed direction thanks to Len taking command of the steering wheel. + +“We can’t fight this monster! We have to retreat!” he shouts pulling the wheel of the ship as hard as he can. + +He’s probably right and who knows, if you tried right now, you might actually manage to get away while the beast is still primarily occupied. That certainly would be the most sensible thing to do; of course something about this whole experience is making you feel well…good. Your heart is pumping, you’re full of energy and you’re determined to show this undersea abomination that you’re not ready to lie down and accept the fact that you’re getting older. + +“NO! I can’t let this beast beat me! I never lose!” you shout and knock Len off of the wheel who looks at you like you’re insane and scurries off to find a hiding spot. + +With battle and bloodshed all around you, with the sounds of cannons and swords filling your eardrums, you make your way to the crow’s nest to gain the highest vantage point you can. From there you get your best look at the sea monster. The large holes in its body where cannons have blown off chunks of it convince you that it can be defeated. It’s just going to take a little magic that’s all… or rather a lot of it. + +You begin to focus… +> Create a lightning storm +As high as you currently are, the beast is still several times higher and should easily be a perfect target. + +You concentrate and as you do you begin to feel little charges and sparks around you and the air begins to have a faint smell of electricity. As dark as the sky is with the beast blocking the sun with its size, the sky gets even darker when storm cloud gather. + +You directly unleash a blast of lightning right at one of the creature’s heads. It must be enough to addle what passes for brains in the creature, because the serpentine head begins to flail back and forth making an incredibly loud bellow and knocking into the other head and taking it off its concentrated effort to destroy your fleet. Then a rumbling comes from the sky and you’re nearly blinded by the light show that occurs next. + +With the storm clouds, the creature takes several lightning strikes to both of its heads. If the creature wasn’t in pain or addled before, it certainly is now. Its roaring of pain is so great that it’s practically deafening. You don’t let up though, you continue to summon the lightning and that’s when you learn that you only have so much control over nature. The lightning strikes begin going all over the place. Some hit your ships, so hit the water and some continue to hit the beast. + +You struggle to direct the lightning, but your energy ebbs quickly as you fail to do so and you take a direct bolt yourself. It’s a quick and odd feeling. You feel a great deal of pain, followed by a warm sensation and then you briefly realize you’ve fallen from the crow’s nest, which was completely destroyed by the blast. + +You then feel extreme agony when you not only crash onto the deck of the ship, but also through it. You land on some barrels though all you know is when you land you heard a snap and a numbness wash over your body. + +And that’s when you know; you’re paralyzed from the neck down. + +You hear the sounds of battle continue all around you, some of the crew that were manning the cannons on the lower deck call for help when they see you, but there’s nothing anyone can do to help you. Everything’s blurry, you’ve probably got a concussion, and death has never been so close to you since you fought the Emperor. + +You’re going to fall asleep and your body will sink under the water when the ship is inevitably destroyed. There the fish will eat you or possibly the creatures you’re fighting will eat you. Its possible Crowley might step up and take command of the Empire, but after him? You don’t see it lasting very long. Your own legacy will eventually be forgotten and that will be the story of you. + +That is if you had any intention on dying today. + +“Get away from me and get back to fighting, you’re not done yet!” You weakly command the crewmembers that are standing around gawking at you. + +You remember the lessons the Emperor taught you about healing yourself. At this point you’re in dire need of A LOT of healing and you imagine you’ll easily be shortening your life span quite a bit in the process, but then you aren’t supposed to be alive right now anyway. + +You focus again. You will your body to mend itself together. In your weakened state you’re drifting in and out of consciousness already, but somehow you manage to push through it and feel the magic doing its work. + +You start to feel your body again. You’re wracked with pain, but you can feel again. You try to get up, but you’re still just too weak and drained. You see a fishman coming down the ship’s stairway and alert your crew with a shout. The last thing you see is the thing coming at you before you pass out. + +“Lover? Have you finally come to join me?” you hear a voice ask. +“Huh? Who is that?” +“It’s me, of course.” + +You open your eyes and see Semra hovering over you. She looks exactly like you remember well except she happens to be completely naked right now. (Though you remember that too) + +“Shit, I’m dead after all.” You say. “And given that you’re here I must be in some sort of hell.” +“Ah, I missed that dry sense of humor. I also missed this.” Semra remarks and you feel a hand on your crotch. + +Normally you’d probably push her away, but given everything you just went through you figure that if this is your personal hell, you could certainly do worse. Just as you’re about to give in completely, Semra’s head is cleaved in with a single sword blow. Blood splatters all over you and her body slumps lifelessly onto your own. + +“Is this what you fucking want? I thought you were stronger than that! The man I married never gave up!” another familiar voice says. + +After pushing Semra’s dead body off of you, you look up and see Alison in all her warrior maiden glory. You never thought you’d ever see her again though you wish she were in a happier mood. + +“Alison I…” +“Nope, don’t even try to make an excuse! I caught you and you’re not getting off that easy. I’m doing this for your own good!” + +You see Alison’s sword coming straight at your head, but you don’t attempt to dodge, instead you sit up to meet the sword half way… + +And you wake up with a splitting headache and your body still hurting all over. + +“Hah, told you he was going to wake up. He’s not called an Eternal for no reason you know. You owe me two gold pieces Sprog!” Len exclaims. +“Sprog owes you what?” +“Erm, nevermind. Welcome back to the living Emperor. Everyone wasn’t sure if you were going to make it or not, but I had a feeling you might.” +“Bah, should’ve died. Was a glorious battle. Be great honor to die in such a battle.” Sprog remarks. +“Oh really? Then why didn’t you make more of an effort to die then?” Len asks. +“Sprog still need to produce more children first, now more than ever since three sons died on other ships. Must ensure legacy!” Sprog says and walks away. + +You look around and find yourself still on the lower deck of your personal ship. You guess that nobody wanted to move you for fear of doing more damage to you body. It’s a mess on the lower deck and there’s still a hole from where you crashed through, but obviously the ship survived the battle. As you sit up, you nearly lay back down due to the pain. A volley of expletives soon follows. + +“Easy there! While I know you just survived something no man should have, I’m pretty sure taking a direct hit from a lightning bolt and crashing through the deck of a ship from a great height still has to be painful. In fact its odd, but you even look a little older because of the experience.” + +“You have no idea…” you remark. +“Insisting on fighting that beast had to be the single most insane things I’ve ever seen, but while I was personally afraid I can’t help but admire it. Despite him believing you were going to die, I know Sprog certainly admired it.” Len says. +“He probably hoped I was going to die. Still glad to see he’s honorable enough that he didn’t try to take advantage and kill me while I was unconscious though. Glad to see you didn’t either.” +“I was a smuggler, not a murderer. Besides I don’t think anything I could do would actually kill you anyway after seeing what you just survived.” +“So did we win? I can only assume us still being afloat means we won…unless we’ve retreated…” + +Len gives an apprehensive look before answering. + +“Well…yes and no. Technically we won, though I’m not sure if we actually killed that sea monster. After you crashed through the deck of the ship, the fishmen continued to scale the ship, but the sea monster continued to be hit by lightning. It eventually sank back beneath the waters, but like I said, I dunno if we killed it or it just swam away. Soon after that happened the fishmen stopped attacking too.” +“But?” +“But, other than this ship and a couple of others straggling along side us your fleet is gone, along with all of your people aboard them. We had patch up several holes they managed to put in this ship and we’re only sailing at half speed due to all the broken masts, but we’ll make it back to Nalin okay barring any other attacks of course.” + +You curse again, but this time it’s more at yourself rather than the pain you’re in. You wasted a lot of troops and resources on this endeavor for no real prize. You didn’t even acquire any new territory. You think back to Trog’s words again about getting old and knowing your limitations, well you certainly learned that lesson today hard. + +“Well I suppose it isn’t all bad, you did teach those fish creatures that you’re not to be trifled with. It was like a battle between gods when you unleashed lightning on that beast’s heads. They might think twice about popping up on your shores now.” Len says in an attempt to cheer you up. +“We can only hope I suppose.” You answer. + +The first thing you do when you get back home is try to rest. You do so for as much as you’re able for weeks and while you do eventually recover, you’re never quite the same again. You’ve visibly gotten older due to the healing magic and it only did so much, you’re still experiencing dull aches and pains on a daily basis. Worse than you did before you went on the mission. You’ll never be like you were. Those days are long gone. + +On the bright side, there have been no more sightings of fish people on the coasts, so perhaps your venture was fruitful after all, unless they’re biding their time and trying to regroup which is exactly what you’d do, so naturally you’ve ordered the building of a new fleet along with proper naval training for potential sailors. + +Of course if the fishy people are no longer a threat that still means Trog’s vision of a relentless enemy still looms. Which means it’s either the Xi Hive or an as of yet unknown enemy. + +More things to look forward to as you approach your twilight years. +> Years pass... +Year 555 + +“Reports as usual say that the Xi have been becoming more frequent in the Arat region and that they have been sighted close to Empire borders, specifically near the city of Regnik.” David remarks. +“Well that would be the most logical place for them to attack first seeing as it’s the closest. Seeing as the Xi like to attack from underground, have all of our kobold units on alert and have the seventh scaly brigade stationed in Arat. I know they’re the best of those little vicious bastards and I’m confident that they can slow down or repel such a Xi attack before the rest of the armies get mobilized. Probably can do some tunnel scouting and digging as well.” You remark. +“Very well, but I also have a report stating that the Xi have mostly been focusing on the Arat Confederacy. All four cities have been attacked and apparently Eldolith wants to speak with us about coordinating forces to destroy the threat. Apparently she’s also been sending people to speak with the Redcap Kingdom too. No idea if that was successful.” +“So Eldy’s having a bug problem and now she’s begging for help. I’m a little surprised that she swallowed her pride enough that she’s willing to talk at all. So when is she due to arrive?” +“She isn’t, she claims that if you want to talk that you should meet her on neutral ground between Lenay and Regnik.” +“Typical svelk arrogance. Call for help and then insist that it be on their terms. (Sigh)” +“You’re aren’t thinking about going are you?! Surely it will be some sort of trap.” +“Of course it will be a trap. But if I did go I could probably learn more about what she’s been up to if I go and in the off chance that this isn’t a trap and completely on the up and up then I can still better assess what her situation is and the Xi Hive threat.” +“But Emperor, your condition…I mean not to say your aren’t a fit man for your um…age…but that battle with the sea beast five years ago…well I just mean I don’t want to see you walk into something a tad overwhelming for you again. The Empire needs you.” + +These are some pretty bold words, though David was as diplomatic as he could’ve possibly been. Really brave on his part, though he didn’t need to fear anything from you. He’s right, you’re still feeling that battle to this day and will continue to until the day you die. + +David’s actually been a bit of a surprise to you. When he first groveled for the job of being your top advisor you assumed that like most of the senators of the old Nalin republic he was just looking to save his skin while also looking for the best possible position he could get in the new order of things. He got it because he seemed to be competent and the least annoying at the time. Since then though he’s proven himself to be good at his job and genuinely care about his work and the good of the Empire. + +“While your concern is noted, I’m not going anywhere. Send a message to her stating that if she really wants to discuss terms of an alliance or something similar she’s going to have to drag her svelk ass here.” + +David nods and leaves your presence. + +Seeing as all your major business is concluded today you head back to your personal chambers. You spend a little time reading a new book that Jennifer has written with her new husband. It’s all about the old Empire and called “The Glory Before the Fall” Fairly accurate, but then again she did have your input on the thing. Still never told her (or anyone for that matter) about you her ancestor being involved in killing the Emperor which indirectly caused the Cataclysm. You suppose that’ll just be one of those secrets lost to history when you die. + +As you’re reading you begin reflecting on your old relationship with Jennifer. It sometimes seems strange that the two of you have remained friends despite not being romantically involved anymore. Of course the two of you just see one another as much anymore either so that might help. + +Really your relationship with her was more due to a young crush on her part and perhaps a bit of loneliness on your own. She saw you as a “pillar of strength” and the pinnacle of a “warrior.” Basically someone who got things done which was somewhat lacking with most of the leaders and citizens of the republic. You were different and it was attractive, then she slowly grew out of it. + +Now she’s happily married to someone more similar to her. A scholar interested in history. She even had a son a couple years ago. And that’s all okay with you. You’re happy for her. You’ve got so many more concerns nowadays that you can’t be bothered to feel pangs of regret of “what could’ve been.” + +Besides, Jennifer was and will always be nice and one of the few people you could consider a friend, but she was no Alison. Nobody ever will be. + +All this self-reflection and thoughts about Jennifer’s family makes you ponder your own lack of one though. Not so much due to an overwhelming desire to have one, but more of what’s going to happen to the Empire after you die? + +You’ve been thinking about that on and off ever since your last brush with death actually. To be quite honest you never really thought about a successor mainly because for a long time you were focused on actually being the Emperor rather than passing the title on. It would be easier of course if you could have children, and then just pass it on that way, but then even if you could, that wouldn’t be a guarantee they’d be worthy or show the desire or interest. You were unnaturally molded into the way you were, who is to say how your imaginary children would’ve turned out even if you attempted to mold them into mirror images of yourself. + +That of course just leaves passing the Empire on to someone worthy. You’ve briefly entertained the idea before and believed that Crowley would potentially be the best candidate. Of course given that he’s around your age, he’s not likely to live any longer than you are, assuming you die of natural causes which isn’t necessarily a given even if you are taking less risks nowadays. + +You begin thinking that perhaps you should get some sort of list of the Empire’s best and brightest and subject them to a series of tests to see if they’re worthy enough to be an apprentice of sorts. Basically what the Emperor did with you except without all the magical alteration and the sadistic svelk taskmasters. + +You spend the next few days going over records of various soldiers, Eyes, administrators, technicians, politicians and others, though being a warrior yourself you can’t help but be biased toward the military types, but you don’t want to overlook anything. + +During this time David reports to you that Eldolith is actually in Dalt and demanding an audience. That didn’t take long though you’re a little surprised she actually showed up in person, you figured she’d send a flunky of some sort. + +When you go to meet her she’s standing with her personal guard and looking around as if just being in a room full of humans is tainting her svelk “purity.” + +“Hello Eldy, I’m sure you’re anxious to get this over with…” +“Don’t address me by a shortened version of my name in an attempt to be condescending, I am Domina Eldolith D’vessa of the Arat Confederacy!” +“Hrm, and I’m sure that sounds very impressive when you tell your subjects in that little nation of yours.” +“Yes, a little nation that stood strong against the Xi for years and managed to survive your expansion efforts. A testament that it’s the QUALITY of the nation rather than the size.” + +You chuckle. + +“Eldy, the only reason your nation is still around is because I’ve allowed it and I suggest that YOU do not come here grand standing when you are in no position to do so. We all know you’re here to beg for my help with the Xi because they’re kicking your ass. Now we can make this as easy OR as humbling as possible. Your choice.” + +Eldolith gives you a look of absolute burning hatred and is silent. Her personal guards shift uncomfortably and your own soldiers are fondling their rifles looking for an excuse to open fire. + +“You’re enjoying this aren’t you?” Eldolith remarks. +“Actually not as much as you’d think, mainly because I don’t want you here anymore than you want to be here, so how about we get to the point like I originally suggested?” +“Fine, here it is. The Xi are beating on the Confederacy’s doors. We’ve been your buffer zone between them and you. If we fall then you’re going to have to face them in full force.” +“And? You seem to believe that we aren’t going to be able to handle that. Not a very compelling argument Eldy.” +“Because you’re a short sighted f…” Eldolith stops herself. “What I mean is you haven’t let me finish. We have an ancient magic weapon at our disposal that could end this threat completely, but the problem is…(sigh) none of our own mages are powerful enough to tap its full potential. As much as I hate to inflate your ego any more than it is, I believe you magical abilities would be able to. So as you can see, you don’t need to marshal armies to our defense or waste any resources. All that is required of you is to get up off your throne for one moment and take a trip to Lenay and we can get started…” + +You burst out laughing. + +“Oh yes, let me just go walking into a city filled with svelk! That won’t be a death sentence at all! You expect me to just trust you at your word? Even if you do have this so called powerful weapon, I still have a hard time believing that there isn’t some sort of trick or catch or angle that doesn’t involve me dead in some way.” +“I thought you were the Emperor? Mr. invincible and fearless? Have you gotten so cow…cautious in your old age that you can’t handle being alone?” +“Eldy, if you think this pathetic attempt of character assassination is going to suddenly cause me to behave in some erratic manner and go to Lenay you’re sadly mistaken. You never were any good in the art of persuasion. The only way you’re going to see me in Lenay is if I’m leading a conquering army through it which given your continued insolence is starting to look more appealing, so who knows maybe you will see me there soon. Now get out of my sight before I put an end to your miserable life before the Xi do!” + +“Fuck this, I told her this was futile!” Eldolith exclaims and her personal guards surround her with a magic shield. Bullets from your soldiers are absorbed into the barrier. + +“Congratulations, you just made this easier.” You say and focus on bringing down the shield, while your soldiers advance with their weapons. +“I think not, a lot of time has passed since I was a mercenary captain and you were an Empire puppet who had not yet cut his master’s strings!” Eldolith says and suddenly she floats above her own personal guards followed by a red glow of light from her. Her personal guards at this point all begin screaming in pain. Whatever it is she’s doing she’s sacrificing her own people to do it. Then a super blast of telekinetic energy repels all of your troops back. You even have a hard time not falling over. + +Eldolith casts some sort of spell that literally starts melting your soldiers’ weapons. Some manage to drop them before the hot metal scalds them too much. Your own Eye mages lob offensive spells at her, but they aren’t penetrating the shield. Some aim for her soldiers, but they aren’t moved despite some of them even being on fire. They’re already in a living death state anyway. + +Eldolith never had any magic abilities, and while its possible she studied and trained herself, but something seems off about all this, not to mention her odd comments. + +Just as you bring her shield down, a portal opens up behind you. You have no idea where it’s going, but you can feel it pulling you in slightly. + +“Time to be reunited!” Eldolith shouts and a red beam of magical energy is thrown in your direction. +> Dodge the beam +If you were twenty years younger and not saddled with countless old wounds that cause your body to react much slower nowadays, you’d probably easily dodge the beam, hell if you were just ten or five years younger even. + +However, you aren’t and your agility isn’t what it used to be. When you attempt to duck and roll out of the way, you just succeed in spraining your back with your sudden move, but that’s the least of your concerns when Eldolith’s red beam hits you directly in the head. You feel a crushing pressure all around your skull for a moment and then a “pop” sound is heard inside our head before your brain is completely scrambled by an overload of…well whatever the hell Eldolith hit you with. All you know is it hurts a lot in the few moments you’re actually conscious to experience the pain. + +With your brain fried and blood leaking out of your ears you collapse to the floor. + +If Eldolith’s goal was to get you into that portal, she’s going to have to drag your corpse in there now.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 555 + +“Reports as usual say that the Xi have been becoming more frequent in the Arat region and that they have been sighted close to Empire borders, specifically near the city of Regnik.” David remarks. +“Well that would be the most logical place for them to attack first seeing as it’s the closest. Seeing as the Xi like to attack from underground, have all of our kobold units on alert and have the seventh scaly brigade stationed in Arat. I know they’re the best of those little vicious bastards and I’m confident that they can slow down or repel such a Xi attack before the rest of the armies get mobilized. Probably can do some tunnel scouting and digging as well.” You remark. +“Very well, but I also have a report stating that the Xi have mostly been focusing on the Arat Confederacy. All four cities have been attacked and apparently Eldolith wants to speak with us about coordinating forces to destroy the threat. Apparently she’s also been sending people to speak with the Redcap Kingdom too. No idea if that was successful.” +“So Eldy’s having a bug problem and now she’s begging for help. I’m a little surprised that she swallowed her pride enough that she’s willing to talk at all. So when is she due to arrive?” +“She isn’t, she claims that if you want to talk that you should meet her on neutral ground between Lenay and Regnik.” +“Typical svelk arrogance. Call for help and then insist that it be on their terms. (Sigh)” +“You’re aren’t thinking about going are you?! Surely it will be some sort of trap.” +“Of course it will be a trap. But if I did go I could probably learn more about what she’s been up to if I go and in the off chance that this isn’t a trap and completely on the up and up then I can still better assess what her situation is and the Xi Hive threat.” +“But Emperor, your condition…I mean not to say your aren’t a fit man for your um…age…but that battle with the sea beast five years ago…well I just mean I don’t want to see you walk into something a tad overwhelming for you again. The Empire needs you.” + +These are some pretty bold words, though David was as diplomatic as he could’ve possibly been. Really brave on his part, though he didn’t need to fear anything from you. He’s right, you’re still feeling that battle to this day and will continue to until the day you die. + +David’s actually been a bit of a surprise to you. When he first groveled for the job of being your top advisor you assumed that like most of the senators of the old Nalin republic he was just looking to save his skin while also looking for the best possible position he could get in the new order of things. He got it because he seemed to be competent and the least annoying at the time. Since then though he’s proven himself to be good at his job and genuinely care about his work and the good of the Empire. + +“While your concern is noted, I’m not going anywhere. Send a message to her stating that if she really wants to discuss terms of an alliance or something similar she’s going to have to drag her svelk ass here.” + +David nods and leaves your presence. + +Seeing as all your major business is concluded today you head back to your personal chambers. You spend a little time reading a new book that Jennifer has written with her new husband. It’s all about the old Empire and called “The Glory Before the Fall” Fairly accurate, but then again she did have your input on the thing. Still never told her (or anyone for that matter) about you her ancestor being involved in killing the Emperor which indirectly caused the Cataclysm. You suppose that’ll just be one of those secrets lost to history when you die. + +As you’re reading you begin reflecting on your old relationship with Jennifer. It sometimes seems strange that the two of you have remained friends despite not being romantically involved anymore. Of course the two of you just see one another as much anymore either so that might help. + +Really your relationship with her was more due to a young crush on her part and perhaps a bit of loneliness on your own. She saw you as a “pillar of strength” and the pinnacle of a “warrior.” Basically someone who got things done which was somewhat lacking with most of the leaders and citizens of the republic. You were different and it was attractive, then she slowly grew out of it. + +Now she’s happily married to someone more similar to her. A scholar interested in history. She even had a son a couple years ago. And that’s all okay with you. You’re happy for her. You’ve got so many more concerns nowadays that you can’t be bothered to feel pangs of regret of “what could’ve been.” + +Besides, Jennifer was and will always be nice and one of the few people you could consider a friend, but she was no Alison. Nobody ever will be. + +All this self-reflection and thoughts about Jennifer’s family makes you ponder your own lack of one though. Not so much due to an overwhelming desire to have one, but more of what’s going to happen to the Empire after you die? + +You’ve been thinking about that on and off ever since your last brush with death actually. To be quite honest you never really thought about a successor mainly because for a long time you were focused on actually being the Emperor rather than passing the title on. It would be easier of course if you could have children, and then just pass it on that way, but then even if you could, that wouldn’t be a guarantee they’d be worthy or show the desire or interest. You were unnaturally molded into the way you were, who is to say how your imaginary children would’ve turned out even if you attempted to mold them into mirror images of yourself. + +That of course just leaves passing the Empire on to someone worthy. You’ve briefly entertained the idea before and believed that Crowley would potentially be the best candidate. Of course given that he’s around your age, he’s not likely to live any longer than you are, assuming you die of natural causes which isn’t necessarily a given even if you are taking less risks nowadays. + +You begin thinking that perhaps you should get some sort of list of the Empire’s best and brightest and subject them to a series of tests to see if they’re worthy enough to be an apprentice of sorts. Basically what the Emperor did with you except without all the magical alteration and the sadistic svelk taskmasters. + +You spend the next few days going over records of various soldiers, Eyes, administrators, technicians, politicians and others, though being a warrior yourself you can’t help but be biased toward the military types, but you don’t want to overlook anything. + +During this time David reports to you that Eldolith is actually in Dalt and demanding an audience. That didn’t take long though you’re a little surprised she actually showed up in person, you figured she’d send a flunky of some sort. + +When you go to meet her she’s standing with her personal guard and looking around as if just being in a room full of humans is tainting her svelk “purity.” + +“Hello Eldy, I’m sure you’re anxious to get this over with…” +“Don’t address me by a shortened version of my name in an attempt to be condescending, I am Domina Eldolith D’vessa of the Arat Confederacy!” +“Hrm, and I’m sure that sounds very impressive when you tell your subjects in that little nation of yours.” +“Yes, a little nation that stood strong against the Xi for years and managed to survive your expansion efforts. A testament that it’s the QUALITY of the nation rather than the size.” + +You chuckle. + +“Eldy, the only reason your nation is still around is because I’ve allowed it and I suggest that YOU do not come here grand standing when you are in no position to do so. We all know you’re here to beg for my help with the Xi because they’re kicking your ass. Now we can make this as easy OR as humbling as possible. Your choice.” + +Eldolith gives you a look of absolute burning hatred and is silent. Her personal guards shift uncomfortably and your own soldiers are fondling their rifles looking for an excuse to open fire. + +“You’re enjoying this aren’t you?” Eldolith remarks. +“Actually not as much as you’d think, mainly because I don’t want you here anymore than you want to be here, so how about we get to the point like I originally suggested?” +“Fine, here it is. The Xi are beating on the Confederacy’s doors. We’ve been your buffer zone between them and you. If we fall then you’re going to have to face them in full force.” +“And? You seem to believe that we aren’t going to be able to handle that. Not a very compelling argument Eldy.” +“Because you’re a short sighted f…” Eldolith stops herself. “What I mean is you haven’t let me finish. We have an ancient magic weapon at our disposal that could end this threat completely, but the problem is…(sigh) none of our own mages are powerful enough to tap its full potential. As much as I hate to inflate your ego any more than it is, I believe you magical abilities would be able to. So as you can see, you don’t need to marshal armies to our defense or waste any resources. All that is required of you is to get up off your throne for one moment and take a trip to Lenay and we can get started…” + +You burst out laughing. + +“Oh yes, let me just go walking into a city filled with svelk! That won’t be a death sentence at all! You expect me to just trust you at your word? Even if you do have this so called powerful weapon, I still have a hard time believing that there isn’t some sort of trick or catch or angle that doesn’t involve me dead in some way.” +“I thought you were the Emperor? Mr. invincible and fearless? Have you gotten so cow…cautious in your old age that you can’t handle being alone?” +“Eldy, if you think this pathetic attempt of character assassination is going to suddenly cause me to behave in some erratic manner and go to Lenay you’re sadly mistaken. You never were any good in the art of persuasion. The only way you’re going to see me in Lenay is if I’m leading a conquering army through it which given your continued insolence is starting to look more appealing, so who knows maybe you will see me there soon. Now get out of my sight before I put an end to your miserable life before the Xi do!” + +“Fuck this, I told her this was futile!” Eldolith exclaims and her personal guards surround her with a magic shield. Bullets from your soldiers are absorbed into the barrier. + +“Congratulations, you just made this easier.” You say and focus on bringing down the shield, while your soldiers advance with their weapons. +“I think not, a lot of time has passed since I was a mercenary captain and you were an Empire puppet who had not yet cut his master’s strings!” Eldolith says and suddenly she floats above her own personal guards followed by a red glow of light from her. Her personal guards at this point all begin screaming in pain. Whatever it is she’s doing she’s sacrificing her own people to do it. Then a super blast of telekinetic energy repels all of your troops back. You even have a hard time not falling over. + +Eldolith casts some sort of spell that literally starts melting your soldiers’ weapons. Some manage to drop them before the hot metal scalds them too much. Your own Eye mages lob offensive spells at her, but they aren’t penetrating the shield. Some aim for her soldiers, but they aren’t moved despite some of them even being on fire. They’re already in a living death state anyway. + +Eldolith never had any magic abilities, and while its possible she studied and trained herself, but something seems off about all this, not to mention her odd comments. + +Just as you bring her shield down, a portal opens up behind you. You have no idea where it’s going, but you can feel it pulling you in slightly. + +“Time to be reunited!” Eldolith shouts and a red beam of magical energy is thrown in your direction. +> Put up your own shield +Given that your reflexes aren’t what they used to be, you don’t risk physical avoidance and instead put up your hands to create a shield for the oncoming beam of magic. At first you assume that the beam will either absorb into the shield or deflect completely, instead the force of it knocks you back much more than you were expecting. + +And right into the portal. + +You don’t feel any pain or anything really other than a minor fall on your back, which hits a stone floor. You’re not in your palace anymore, but what catches your attention immediately is what is in the room with you. + +A fancy chair with an old withered looking body in it. You can tell its svelk, but you’ve never seen an “old” svelk before, or at least not one that displayed this great deal of age. At this distance you can’t even be sure if its alive or not. + +Surrounding the chair are several tall rods, which emanate a magical field. The rods are embedded in the floor, they look like they’re made of adamantium. Very strong material usually used by the derro. Nearby there are several orbs mounted on similar shorter rods, they aren’t glowing or anything, but you assume that they’re also magical. + +Other than this sight, there isn’t anything else in the room, which is made of solid looking stone. The other notable feature is the fact there aren’t any doors or any other apparent way out… + +“I knew one day, you would return to me.” You hear a voice utter in your head. The voice is familiar and for a brief moment you think you’re dreaming, but a closer look at the withered body in the room and you know this is all too real. + +“So you survived after all. Explains why there was no svelk body nearby when I got dug up.” You say. +“Not without a price as you can see.” Semra says. Apparently she can only communicate through your mind. The magical field prevents you from getting too close, but Semra’s face looks like it’s in a permanent slack jaw state. It would also appear that some magic never dies as you can sense Semra’s “emotions” right now thanks in part to that little spell she cast on you before you faced the Emperor. + +Right now Semra’s probably gathering all the information of what you’ve been more or less up to since you were freed. As always, your own ability is limited and you can’t read what she’s been up to, however given her current state you don’t imagine it’s involved much physical activity. + +You can sense a faint sign of…happiness(?) from her because you’re here, but then you never did quite understand her unnatural obsession for you. You also sense a slight feeling of shame for appearing the way she does (Though she’s trying really hard to block it from you). Vanity of course. Really though you’re more concerned with how you’re going to escape from here. You doubt that you can destroy the field surrounding Semra, if you could, you wouldn’t have been brought here in the first place. It’s obvious that Semra really wants to talk with you. + +“Do you have no desire at all for a brief discussion with me after all we’ve been through?” Semra asks. +“Not particularly, though since I can see no apparent way out at this time, I suppose I’ll indulge you for now.” +“Don’t worry, unlike me, you are not a prisoner here. (Sigh) You don’t know how good it is to see you again, even if you are a little older…ha ha like I’m in a position to judge.” Semra remarks. +“ Yeaah, about that…so…what is this? Are you dead? Are you alive?” + +“Oh I’m alive, but thanks to my daughter’s treachery I have been reduced to this pathetic shell.” +“When did that happen and how?” +“How, why and when it happened isn’t important. The fault is mine for not being more observant and allowing myself to still hold a torch for you which contributed to my weakness. I cannot blame Eldolith for her actions that lead me to this fate. She only did what a true svelk daughter would do.” +“So I take it you’re proud of her for turning you into a wizened invalid?” +“I was for a time, however despite a few shining moments she has ultimately proven to be a failure in her ambitions. She could’ve expanded the svelk so that we had our own Empire once again, but she was too busy bedding and torturing her slave girl lovers or indulging in other petty pleasures. She ultimately has no real confidence in her own abilities, if she did she wouldn’t keep me around.” +“I figured she kept you around as some sort of torture for you.” You remark. +“While you’re partially correct, the other reason is she still needs me around to hold her hand and tell her what to do next. She claims that she keeps me around because she enjoys mocking my decrepit impotent form while occasionally tapping my powers, but without me advising her, she wouldn’t have even held on to THIS city for as long as she did. If she’s trying to torture me by continuing to display her idiocy and making foolish decisions, while I can’t actively do anything about them, then it’s working. I urged her that she should’ve sought you out as soon as I sensed your active presence, but she just ignored me, claiming I was just being a sentimental fool. She never saw the big picture until it was too late, but I did. I still do. Which is why I wanted to see you.” +“What, the Xi threat?” +“That is indeed a threat, but it is perhaps just the catalyst for what is going to come.” +“And I suppose you can see into the future? I don’t remember you ever having that ability.” +“I didn’t, but after Casimir’s death, or the Cataclysm as most call it, many things were unleashed. Large waves of wild magic being one. Wish I had developed the ability BEFORE I was reduced to this husk, but then I suppose my current state allows for such dormant powers to manifest themselves due to being unable to do anything else except sit and think. Another thing that was unleashed was the Xi. Did you know they’ve lived far underground for millennia? Even further than the Derro or any other known subterranean race. Practically unknown to the surface world. It was only due to the massive upheaval of the earth due to the Cataclysm that they slowly started to make their way up to the surface. I believe they thought it was an attack, and now they’ve finally amassed their numbers to a point where they can overrun the surface world. Took them a few centuries, but here they are and they will be very difficult to stop.” +“But you said they weren’t the only danger.” +“They aren’t. The old Empire may have died, but its actions are going to be the destruction of the new one you have forged one way or another. The Xi are just one way, the other way is much more personal and the wound still runs deep. Wounds that we were also both were responsible for.” + +You think back and you can only think of one thing… + +“The gnomes?” you ask. +“Correct. My daughter has clumsily acquired info on the Redcap Kingdom over the years, but I trust my visions more. And if any of this is remotely accurate, they plan on committing mass genocide to everything in the area. This apparently will be done with a combination of weapons only their expertise in technology could’ve brought forth, it will also be done far above the ground.” +“What from the air? What did they figure out how to fly or something?” + +You hear a small chuckle in your head from Semra. + +“I see that you have not been very observant of the gnomes. You probably just heard that they had become less peaceable creatures, but the reality is much much more than that. In their war of survival against the Xi, they have been developing technology that can kill as quickly if not as elegantly as battle magic. Their most recent inventions have been strange flying machines. Airships for the lack of a better word, from these they rain down explosive death on the Xi.” + +This is a lot of information to assess, but thanks to your link to Semra, you can sense no trickery from her. She has indeed been having visions similar to how Trog had them, except perhaps stronger. + +“Okay, so basically I should just let the Xi and gnomes continue fighting until they wipe each other out to a point where neither one is a threat.” +“You can’t afford to do that, lover. Letting them battle it out hasn’t worked. That’s what my fool daughter thought and it’s proven to be a failure. The Xi AND the gnomes have managed to avoid extinction despite being at each other’s throats for decades now. The Xi has just expanded towards our direction and the gnomes have just developed more powerful weapons. If it keeps going, the war is going to ultimately engulf the entire area and chaos will ensue. The line needs to be held here in Arat if only to prevent the spread and that’s why you’re needed here.” +“So I’ve heard. Your daughter mentioned an ancient magical weapon that would only work if I helped charge it or something.” + +Semra’s voice chuckles again. + +“Yes, that was her way of insolently describing me, though I suppose it isn’t too far off as a description. Really though it isn’t a true solution. Basically you and I would join our energy together and form a protective barrier over this city. Something great enough that I doubt if even gnome weapons could penetrate it and I know the Xi wouldn’t be able to dig through it.” + +You can’t believe that would be an option. + +“This sounds pretty sketchy that some how I would be the convenient answer to the problem. I mean you’ve got other mages here and your daughter…” +“My daughter is a fucking charlatan. She has learned no real magic herself. As I’ve said she only taps my own powers which is why she can cast magic in the first place. As for other svelk, most of them are pretenders as well. The few that do actually have magical talent they wouldn’t be able to handle the full might of my magic either. But you. You are different. YOU actually have the ability. The power. I know because I trained you myself and what I didn’t teach you, Casimir certainly did. YOU and I could join together and survive the coming destruction like we did before.” +“Yeah because that turned out so well right? I was in stasis for five hundred years and you…well just look at yourself. You’d be better off dead. Am I to join your fate when I join with you in this magic spell that is supposedly going to save this city? And why would I want to save a city full of svelk?” +“Because you could be their ruler? What difference does it make when in the scheme of things you do not really care about your subjects so much as you care about the power you wield over them? I have seen your thoughts. Lately you have been dwelling on your own death and who will be worthy to take your place. Let me answer both questions. Nobody will EVER be worthy to take your place. Your Empire, what you have built will fall even if you do manage to save it from the Xi invasion or the inevitable revenge of the gnomes. You WILL be forgotten in time. But I’m offering you a chance at avoiding that fate. I’m offering you a kind of immortality and the chance to be in power FOREVER. Yes it is true, you would be confined to a state similar to mine, but you do not know the true power of the mind. Your body might be in a prison, but your mind would never be. I could teach you if you just join with me.” + +As strange as it may seem, Semra’s words do hold a little weight. Immortality is appealing and lording it over the svelk would probably be amusing, but at what cost? Semra claims that her mind allows her freedom in a way that her physical body never could, but you just can’t see living like that voluntarily. You might be facing your own mortality soon, but if that is going to happen then that’s how it shall be. The future hasn’t been written yet as far as you’re concerned. + +Plus there’s also the fact that Semra just wants someone to join in her living death misery, who better than you? + +“Semra, I’ve listened to your offer and indulged you long enough. I decline and will deal with the threats to my Empire on my own terms. Now then, I trust you have the ability to let me go?” + +Semra says nothing, for a moment you think you’re going to have to make a threat. While you aren’t sure if you’d actually be able to take down the magical field around her, you’d give it a good try. It doesn’t come to that though and soon another portal open up. + +“Go then. You will see that I’m right though and you will come back to me. You know we were meant to be together.” Semra remarks. +“Well thanks to your daughter, your nation has officially declared war. So perhaps you’re right, maybe I will be back with an entire army.” You answer. +“I will be looking forward to that day, lover.” + +You step through the portal and find yourself back in your palace where things are in turmoil. Your return quells things down though. Unfortunately Eldolith got away. Apparently she escaped through another portal. You aren’t worried though; she’ll pay for what she did. The svelk won’t have to wait for the Xi to overrun them; you’ll get there first. +> Years pass... +Year 557 + +Arat is nearly yours...well what’s left of it anyway and even after you take it completely there is still the matter of holding it. And that will certainly be a great task, one you even wonder if you’ll live to see. The aches and pains in your body continue to get worse with age, you tire a lot easier and you get short of breath at times. Everyone tells you that you shouldn’t be anywhere close to the battlefield, but you can’t help it. It’s the only place you feel you truly belong and gives you a thrill even if you’re not doing a lot of active fighting nowadays. + +To be quite honest this war has been a blessing for you as there is no end in sight. It allows you to focus on something other than mundane things like the economy or civics. It’s also allowed you to put off the task of finding your “successor” and you don’t even care anymore. You’ve come to the conclusion that when your days are done in this world whoever gets the Empire is whoever is strong enough to hold it. If that means it disintegrates and falls into the abyss then so be it. The Empire fell once before and you revived it. It can do it again. + +Only four major cities to conquer and the Arat Confederacy would be resigned to the history books, but they proved to be much harder to crack mainly because of Xi AND Redcap interference. Arat is a massive warzone and now all the major players are involved. + +Zo was the toughest nut to crack in terms of fighting, but perhaps the easiest in some ways as there were no other elements to make things complicated. It was a straight up battle and it only defied you mainly due to its hatred of orcs, which make up a large part of your armies. It is almost unfortunate that the entire city population had to be practically eradicated because its citizens were certainly the bravest and had the best soldiers in this war. + +Valizza was next. The crimelords there practically opened the gates for you. If it was a choice between suffering Zo’s fate or being ruled by the Empire, there was no choice at all. After all crime always exists somewhere in societies no matter how hard a government tries to stomp it out. The crimelords there no doubt assumed that they could just switch sides and slither into the underworld that exists in the Empire. + +Most of them were wrong. You couldn’t be worrying about petty gang violence between warring factions you needed another city on the frontlines contributing to the war effort. You immediately had all the “leaders” sized up, determined which one was the most efficient and made him “governor” while the rest were executed. “Hand Cannon” Harry was grateful and now knows that the city is ultimately run for Empire purposes FIRST. And whatever criminal activity he has going on comes second. You’re the “Boss.” + +Atinil, ever the bootlicking city to Lenay of course fought back, though not very well. The only reason why it posed any problems is due to Lenay’s forces attempting to bail them out and Xi incursions which had started to become more of a problem by this point. It was during this battle that your armies had begun facing any sort of heavy Xi opposition. Semra was right, there are an awful lot of them and they attack in waves with no regard for their own lives. They also make their first strikes mainly from below; in fact that’s what ultimately ended the siege of Atinil. Towards the end, its citizens threw open the gates begging you to destroy the Xi who had managed to enter the city before you did. By the time it was all said and done the Xi had destroyed half of the city before you managed to beat back the infiltration. + +Your kobold commando units have been doing a good job at blocking off tunnels or creating new ones to form counter attacks, but again there are just so many of them that for every ten you kill it seems like a hundred take their place. + +To make matters worse, the Redcaps have been making excursions into Arat via their airships. You’ve only manages to catch sight of a few from a distance, but others have described them to you in greater detail. Great big oval shaped contraptions that seem to move by propellers and some sort of gas that keeps them aloft. (At least that’s how someone tried to explain it to you, really you still never got all that “science” stuff) + +And just as Semra had mentioned in your visit with her, they’ve been bombing indiscriminately on the Xi AND your own troops. You’ve yet to take one of these airships down mainly because they never stay around long enough in a battle (and certainly not in any battle that you’ve personally participated in. They float in to cause destruction and then leave, though you have noticed that they’ve all been going in a particular direction. Namely towards the city-state that has always remained a mystery, Telis. + +Now Lenay is all that remains of the Arat Confederacy and it’s making sure that all attackers will not stomp out its presence with ease. A magic barrier has formed around the city, and probably extends far below the earth as well otherwise the Xi would’ve gone under it. + +The barrier has proven impenetrable to all known weapons and magic or at least anything your soldiers can throw at it. Given how strong it is you can only guess that Semra is having a direct hand in the matter. So much for her claims that “you” were needed to create the barrier in the first place, then again she did imply that she merely needed your help to keep her from using up all her power. + +Usually a “siege” mentality isn’t very successful (certainly didn’t work for the Felkans) but the svelk seem to be content on “waiting” everything out while you and the Xi slaughter each other, they may even be building up something that will change the tide of the war. (And probably are) + +So once again it’s all falling onto you. You’re the only one that has magic remotely powerful enough to bring down that barrier and even then you might need help. You half wonder if taking the barrier down is going to kill you, but if it comes to that then so be it, but there might be a more pressing concern. + +The recent appearances of the gnomes and their travels towards Telis make you wonder if you shouldn’t direct your attention toward them. Semra did warn you about them and their recent actions of bombing your own troops haven’t exactly proven her wrong. + +It’s just a question of what you want to spend your time and resources on. Making a long trip to Telis probably through Xi occupied territory and then face whatever the gnomes have there (which you have no sort of intel on) or bring down the barrier (And continuing to fend off the Xi in the meantime). + +Both of those are probably going to result in considerable losses. +> Bring down the barrier +You aren’t going to wait around and marching your troops off to Telis seems like a waste of time when you’re so close to finishing off the Arat Confederacy. Most of all you want to get your revenge on Eldolith for her attack on you in your own palace years ago. + +You gather all the mages that are currently within your war camp and explain that you’re going to bring down that barrier. It’s going to require a great deal of energy and that it’s completely possible that some won’t even survive the process, but once that barrier is down, Lenay will be ripe for the taking. + +In the meantime, the regular army is going to have to deal without magic back up for awhile when repelling Xi incursions. + +You and your mages focus on the massive barrier protecting Lenay. You envision it coming down and staying that way. Doesn’t take long before you begin to feel a force combating your efforts. With a personalized touch that only Semra can do. + +“What do you think you’re doing my eager eternal? If you wanted me to let you in, you could’ve just asked you know.” You hear her voice inside your head. + +You try to block it out, but that’s a losing task. You and Semra are locked in more than just a battle of the wills right now. Your minds are still linked. + +“This is a useless endeavor eternal. Even with your little followers you aren’t going to bring down this barrier. I can keep this up forever.” + +One good thing about having a linked mind, is you can sometimes tell an outright lie, though in Semra’s case it’s always better to assume that she’s lying anyway. However, you know she can’t keep this up forever, her power is nowhere near how it used to be, otherwise she wouldn’t have wanted you to “join her” years ago. + +“Very well, continue if you must…” Semra’s voice says and thankfully you’re just left with silence. + +Five days pass and your army is fending off the Xi well enough, but the barrier still stands strong. You have not eaten, slept or drank anything and are really starting to feel those effects even if you are in a trance like state right now. The only thing that’s managed to sustain you is…well leeching off the energy of your other mages of which you’ve lost seven at this point. + +Still, you really feel that you’re making progress. You can sense that the barrier is weakening, perhaps only a little, but it’s still something. + +Unfortunately you may never know if you would’ve succeeded eventually because something occurs that interrupts everything. Something big and something you and probably nobody else could’ve ever envisioned… + +An incredibly large object hovers high above the earth and moves slowly towards the city of Lenay. It’s high enough that it’s fairly safe from conventional weapons. It isn’t an airship either; it’s something much more. + +It’s Telis. + +The gnomes have somehow managed to uproot an entire city and have it floating in the fucking air. + +While your army is certainly panicking about this, you’re nearly completely oblivious due to your continued spell focus on bringing down the barrier. You hear some of your officers shout at you about a flying city or something similar, but you’re more or less out of the loop. + +Even when Telis begins to unleash a volley of mortar rockets in your area you still aren’t completely entirely cognizant of the situation. Loud explosions strike all around you and it’s amazing you aren’t killed in the blast, you do finally lose focus though and fall to the ground. + +It is then when you realize how much danger you’re in. The gnomes are continuing their vicious bombardment of the area, probably hoping to wipe everyone out and they’re doing a fairly good job all things considering. + +You look around and see your army completely panicked and running away. They are some of the bravest men and women from all walks of races, but they’ve never had to face something so large and massively destructive before. In fact you don’t even know if you’re going to be able to make it, you feel so weak and the most recent blast just killed or severely maimed the soldiers that were trying to carry you away from danger. + +Dizzy, tired and very drained, you struggle to retreat from the area as your legs feel very wobbly. + +“Can’t let it end like this. Argh! Hate this fucking weakness!” you exclaim as pain shoots all through your body and you collapse. It shames you, but you almost feel like just giving up and letting the gnome weapons finish you off. + +“You see what happened my darling eternal? You were so focused on revenge on my idiot daughter that you completely neglected keeping up on what those red cap miscreants were up to. Now look at you, you’re all spent, just like when we first made love. Remember that?” you hear Semra’s voice say in your head. Apparently she’s still in contact with you. You make an audible groan when you believe that mocking voice of Semra is going to be the last thing you hear in your final moments. + +However, as usual her mysterious and still baffling obsession with you might be your salvation…again. + +“Fear not, lover. Mommy can save you. It will have to involve me lowering the barrier for just the briefest moment, but I can open a portal to your safety. Enter it and you’ll be back with me, right where you should’ve been all this time.” + +No sooner do you hear these words uttered when you see a portal open up not far in front of you. + +“Come to me, let us embrace again. You know it was always meant to be. We are the survivors. We did it once and we can do it again.” + +Semra’s creepy attempt at temptation aside, you don’t have much time to react to your situation. The gnomes are undoubtedly going to unleash another volley of explosives and who knows if you’re going to be lucky enough to avoid a direct hit this time. + +Then again, if you enter that portal who knows what the hell is in store for you. +> Enter the portal +You know this probably isn’t going to end well, but if you jump into the portal you at least know you’ll buy yourself a little time and a chance at survival. Staying out here is probably going to result in your getting blown to pieces. + +You don’t think anymore about it and you take a crawling tumble into the portal. When you go through you’re instantly transported before Semra again. Same withered body, same chair, same plain room without any doors and the portal behind you is gone. You then hear an incredibly loud noise coming from above. It’s enough to even shake your surroundings a little. + +“Glad you finally decided to listen to me again. Those little redcap assholes nearly managed to hit Lenay with their crude explosive weapons. If I had held that portal open any longer for you, they might’ve even destroyed this city. I hope you appreciate the sacrifices I make for you.” Semra says. +“Right…so what now? What’s your plan?” you ask getting up off the floor. +“Plan? I assumed you knew that by now. I mean you did come through my portal.” +“Yeah, I only took your escape route because I would’ve been a dead man had I not. That doesn’t mean I’m siding with you and I’m still not done with your daughter or this city.” + +“I see…well perhaps we can arrange something to appease you better.” +“I doubt it.” +“Your faith in my capacity to see what you desire wounds me, especially since you have stated it so plainly here. Now if you give me a few moments, I can give you what you want, but I suggest you prepare yourself.” + +At first you’re about to ask what she means, but even if you couldn’t get a glimmer of her mind, you believe you’d guess correctly fairly quickly. + +And within a few moments another portal opens up and soon after that Eldolith steps through. + +“Mother, the barrier went down for a few seconds and those gnomes nearly killed us all! You’ve got one job to do and you failed to do it! What the fuck are you doing down here? It’s bad enough that we had to stop the annual sveld infant hurling competition because…” + +Eldolith suddenly stops her complaining when she notices you in the room. Her eyes grow wide and she says nothing, but instead tries to re-enter the portal, but Semra has closed it. Having chosen to unsuccessfully run rather than attempt to defend herself properly, you easily give her a large shock with lightning. She falls to the floor, her body convulsing from the jolt, but not dead yet. + +You sort of expected that when you finally faced her, she’d put up more of a fight and inevitably you’d either kill her with a powerful magic strike or perhaps a quick sword thrust if you managed to get that close. + +But now that she’s more or less at your mercy, something comes over you. A desire for cruelty. It’s strange, but you haven’t felt that way towards…well anyone for quite sometime. In fact the last time you felt this way was when you stopped yourself from giving in to such feelings when Eldolith was smarting off to you in Alison’s war camp. You remember some of the things you wanted to do to her. + +Maybe this is some sort of repressed emotion that’s been coming for a very long time… + +“We’re not finished Eldy. We’re not finished by a long shot. This has been a long time coming.” You say and kick her in the stomach and chest several times as hard as you can. You then get on top of her and begin to just punching her in the face. Her svelk “beauty” quickly starts to diminish as teeth become broken and her nose follows suit. + +“Moth…ARGH!” Eldolith cries out as she desperately attempts to call for a maternal figure that just looks on in sadistic pleasure. + +Eldolith weakly tries to claw at your eyes with her hands, but you easily grab them both and break her wrists. Eldolith screams at this point, begging you to stop and just kill her already. + +“Apologies, but this is too much fun, in fact don’t you feel my…excitement?” you whisper in her bloodied ear and then slam the back of her head on the stone floor. + +Aches and pains shoot through your joints, your hands, arms, your legs and your feet, but such things are overridden by the enjoyment you’re getting by beating the shit out the Eldolith. + +Eventually Eldolith’s breathing becoming very “automatic.” It’s getting near the end where her body is just “functioning” and higher brainpower is quickly fading. Even through the blood all over her face, you notice the tears coming from Eldolith’s eyes. + +“Oh no, not yet. I’m going to take you up on that offer you once gave me so long ago.” You say and roll Eldolith’s body over… + +“Yes! YES! Do it! Do it my lovely eternal! Do it for mommy! Teach her that you are the master and that she is to be utterly destroyed!” you hear Semra’s voice in your head exclaim. + +These calls of encouragement are followed by Semra’s real sounds of excitement made by her own withered body. The wheezing sickly noises are only drowned out by your half crazy rants of pure hate and grunting sounds. + +After a short but brutal process later you end it by shoving your dagger through Eldolith’s skull, cracking through bone and brain. You even enjoy the sound it makes as you slowly pull it back out. + +Painting heavily and covered in blood, you don’t feel nearly as bad as you usually do from such energetic activity. You almost feel…invigorated. + +“There now. Don’t you feel better? Don’t you see this is how it should’ve always been? And just think you can enjoy this sort of thing all the time if you stay here with me. You think what you just experienced was revitalizing? When you fully embrace the power of your mind, you will truly know freedom.” + +You just stare at Semra’s disgusting wizened body in a semi-trance as you listen to her alluring voice. + +“You will have an entire city to rule and defile! To torture and humiliate! Let the gnomes burn the outside world to a crisp! Let the Xi overrun the land with their hives! WE will be still here LONG after their time in the sun has gone! We will be like the GODS of old here FOREVER.” + +Semra’s personal barrier that surrounds her body goes down and another chair materializes next to her own. + +“Join me my love and we can have everything…” + +Semra’s voice is so entrancing. She’s making a lot of sense. You don’t detect any lying and you can even see into her mind more clearly. She’s letting you in. You still don’t quite understand a lot of it or see all of it, but you catch a glimpse of perhaps why Semra harbors “romantic” feelings for you. + +You see the image of another svelk. A male, obviously a soldier, but a mage as well. You also see images of him battling creatures and conquering foes all in the name of his Empire. He obviously enjoys the violence and takes great pleasure in battle, but there’s a certain “honorable” trait about him though too. + +It’s odd and you’re loathed to admit such a thing, but despite being a svelk he seems very similar to…well you. He even looks vaguely like you in your younger years if you had black skin and the pointy ears. + +You think you’re about to see more, but Semra finally shuts you out. You guess she’s decided you’ve seen enough. Whether that means she’s trying to hide something or just merely unwilling to because the memories are too painful, you cannot be sure. + +Is this why Semra’s been so obsessed with you? Was it really that simple? You reminded her of a long dead lover? + +She could’ve just said something, but then of course that wouldn’t be the svelk way, let alone Semra’s. + +Maybe this is all a trick. Maybe she’s making you see something that isn’t real to make you more sympathetic towards her despite all the rotten things she’s done. + +Maybe she intends on killing you. Maybe the spell she cast on you over five hundred years ago was all part of some incomprehensible long range plan that only she understands and you’re finally falling under her complete influence. + +Or maybe she’s just scared of dying alone. + +You don’t know. What you do know that you’re probably never getting out of here. (Wherever “here” actually is, though you assume its somewhere under Lenay) Even if you kill Semra, you don’t have the ability to create magical portals or anything like that so you’ll essentially be in a living tomb waiting to die. + +Of course you probably won’t be waiting too long. Considering she’s currently the only thing up keeping the protective barrier over Lenay as soon as you kill her, you’d wager that the gnomes are going to bomb the shit out of this place and you’ll die in a cave in and that’s assuming the Xi don’t come digging through and overwhelming you first. +> Kill Semra +Maybe you aren’t going to defeat the gnomes and maybe you aren’t going to defeat the Xi. + +Maybe either one or both of those races will eventually destroy the Empire you resurrected. + +Maybe you’ll be completely forgotten. + +And that’s all okay, because what you’re about to do is going to be completely worth it. + +You walk slowly towards the chair that Semra has provided for you. You keep your mind completely clear of any murderous thoughts. + +“You’re right. This is destiny…” you say with a smile. + +You are soon in front of Semra’s husk of a body. It’s even worse looking up close, not to mention the smell, but you continue to smile as you put your face in front of hers. + +“But before I take my place by your side my lover, let me give you one last thing…” + +You see Semra’s face, as slack jawed as it is, manages to make a disturbing grin. + +“Yes, my eternal, kiss me...” you hear her voice say in your head. + +And at that moment you grab your dagger…the very dagger you just killed her daughter with while you fucked her. The very dagger Semra stabbed you with and gave to you as a gift when you were just sixteen years. + +It has at last been returned to its owner when you stab Semra in the chest with it. + +“HHHAAAAGGGHHHH…” Semra’s desiccated vocal cords gasp. The foul odor of her breath invades your nostrils and the scent of death has never smelled so sweet to you. + +“Smmaahhh! Lovely.” You remark and step back to watch Semra soon expire from her mortal wound. When her body slumps downward in her chair you know she won’t be healing her way out of this one. + +And soon you’re alone and feeling very tired. You take a rest in the chair Semra created for you and dwell on your life in general. + +You think back mostly on your old life before you were dug up five centuries later. The good old days when you knew exactly who was always by your side. + +Alison. + +You think back to your wedding day and how happy you were then and how you thought the glory days would never end. + +But everything ends eventually, just a question of when. If anything, your life has been running on borrowed time for the last twenty some odd years. When you think about it, you did pretty good all things considering. + +Your introspection is put to an end when you hear several large explosions above you and this time, its not just shaking, the ceiling to the room is beginning to crack and stone begins to fall. + +Looks like it will be the gnomes that get you even if they’re unaware of it. In fact nobody is going to be aware of what happened to you. You just disappeared off the battlefield. You imagine you’ll be presumed dead though. + +It doesn’t matter really, but perhaps it is fitting that you die the same way you were originally meant to, buried and crushed by dirt and rubble. + +In your last moments as the ceiling comes crashing down on your head, you surprisingly grab on to Semra’s cold dead hand. + +Perhaps in some strange way you were meant to be together after all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know this probably isn’t going to end well, but if you jump into the portal you at least know you’ll buy yourself a little time and a chance at survival. Staying out here is probably going to result in your getting blown to pieces. + +You don’t think anymore about it and you take a crawling tumble into the portal. When you go through you’re instantly transported before Semra again. Same withered body, same chair, same plain room without any doors and the portal behind you is gone. You then hear an incredibly loud noise coming from above. It’s enough to even shake your surroundings a little. + +“Glad you finally decided to listen to me again. Those little redcap assholes nearly managed to hit Lenay with their crude explosive weapons. If I had held that portal open any longer for you, they might’ve even destroyed this city. I hope you appreciate the sacrifices I make for you.” Semra says. +“Right…so what now? What’s your plan?” you ask getting up off the floor. +“Plan? I assumed you knew that by now. I mean you did come through my portal.” +“Yeah, I only took your escape route because I would’ve been a dead man had I not. That doesn’t mean I’m siding with you and I’m still not done with your daughter or this city.” + +“I see…well perhaps we can arrange something to appease you better.” +“I doubt it.” +“Your faith in my capacity to see what you desire wounds me, especially since you have stated it so plainly here. Now if you give me a few moments, I can give you what you want, but I suggest you prepare yourself.” + +At first you’re about to ask what she means, but even if you couldn’t get a glimmer of her mind, you believe you’d guess correctly fairly quickly. + +And within a few moments another portal opens up and soon after that Eldolith steps through. + +“Mother, the barrier went down for a few seconds and those gnomes nearly killed us all! You’ve got one job to do and you failed to do it! What the fuck are you doing down here? It’s bad enough that we had to stop the annual sveld infant hurling competition because…” + +Eldolith suddenly stops her complaining when she notices you in the room. Her eyes grow wide and she says nothing, but instead tries to re-enter the portal, but Semra has closed it. Having chosen to unsuccessfully run rather than attempt to defend herself properly, you easily give her a large shock with lightning. She falls to the floor, her body convulsing from the jolt, but not dead yet. + +You sort of expected that when you finally faced her, she’d put up more of a fight and inevitably you’d either kill her with a powerful magic strike or perhaps a quick sword thrust if you managed to get that close. + +But now that she’s more or less at your mercy, something comes over you. A desire for cruelty. It’s strange, but you haven’t felt that way towards…well anyone for quite sometime. In fact the last time you felt this way was when you stopped yourself from giving in to such feelings when Eldolith was smarting off to you in Alison’s war camp. You remember some of the things you wanted to do to her. + +Maybe this is some sort of repressed emotion that’s been coming for a very long time… + +“We’re not finished Eldy. We’re not finished by a long shot. This has been a long time coming.” You say and kick her in the stomach and chest several times as hard as you can. You then get on top of her and begin to just punching her in the face. Her svelk “beauty” quickly starts to diminish as teeth become broken and her nose follows suit. + +“Moth…ARGH!” Eldolith cries out as she desperately attempts to call for a maternal figure that just looks on in sadistic pleasure. + +Eldolith weakly tries to claw at your eyes with her hands, but you easily grab them both and break her wrists. Eldolith screams at this point, begging you to stop and just kill her already. + +“Apologies, but this is too much fun, in fact don’t you feel my…excitement?” you whisper in her bloodied ear and then slam the back of her head on the stone floor. + +Aches and pains shoot through your joints, your hands, arms, your legs and your feet, but such things are overridden by the enjoyment you’re getting by beating the shit out the Eldolith. + +Eventually Eldolith’s breathing becoming very “automatic.” It’s getting near the end where her body is just “functioning” and higher brainpower is quickly fading. Even through the blood all over her face, you notice the tears coming from Eldolith’s eyes. + +“Oh no, not yet. I’m going to take you up on that offer you once gave me so long ago.” You say and roll Eldolith’s body over… + +“Yes! YES! Do it! Do it my lovely eternal! Do it for mommy! Teach her that you are the master and that she is to be utterly destroyed!” you hear Semra’s voice in your head exclaim. + +These calls of encouragement are followed by Semra’s real sounds of excitement made by her own withered body. The wheezing sickly noises are only drowned out by your half crazy rants of pure hate and grunting sounds. + +After a short but brutal process later you end it by shoving your dagger through Eldolith’s skull, cracking through bone and brain. You even enjoy the sound it makes as you slowly pull it back out. + +Painting heavily and covered in blood, you don’t feel nearly as bad as you usually do from such energetic activity. You almost feel…invigorated. + +“There now. Don’t you feel better? Don’t you see this is how it should’ve always been? And just think you can enjoy this sort of thing all the time if you stay here with me. You think what you just experienced was revitalizing? When you fully embrace the power of your mind, you will truly know freedom.” + +You just stare at Semra’s disgusting wizened body in a semi-trance as you listen to her alluring voice. + +“You will have an entire city to rule and defile! To torture and humiliate! Let the gnomes burn the outside world to a crisp! Let the Xi overrun the land with their hives! WE will be still here LONG after their time in the sun has gone! We will be like the GODS of old here FOREVER.” + +Semra’s personal barrier that surrounds her body goes down and another chair materializes next to her own. + +“Join me my love and we can have everything…” + +Semra’s voice is so entrancing. She’s making a lot of sense. You don’t detect any lying and you can even see into her mind more clearly. She’s letting you in. You still don’t quite understand a lot of it or see all of it, but you catch a glimpse of perhaps why Semra harbors “romantic” feelings for you. + +You see the image of another svelk. A male, obviously a soldier, but a mage as well. You also see images of him battling creatures and conquering foes all in the name of his Empire. He obviously enjoys the violence and takes great pleasure in battle, but there’s a certain “honorable” trait about him though too. + +It’s odd and you’re loathed to admit such a thing, but despite being a svelk he seems very similar to…well you. He even looks vaguely like you in your younger years if you had black skin and the pointy ears. + +You think you’re about to see more, but Semra finally shuts you out. You guess she’s decided you’ve seen enough. Whether that means she’s trying to hide something or just merely unwilling to because the memories are too painful, you cannot be sure. + +Is this why Semra’s been so obsessed with you? Was it really that simple? You reminded her of a long dead lover? + +She could’ve just said something, but then of course that wouldn’t be the svelk way, let alone Semra’s. + +Maybe this is all a trick. Maybe she’s making you see something that isn’t real to make you more sympathetic towards her despite all the rotten things she’s done. + +Maybe she intends on killing you. Maybe the spell she cast on you over five hundred years ago was all part of some incomprehensible long range plan that only she understands and you’re finally falling under her complete influence. + +Or maybe she’s just scared of dying alone. + +You don’t know. What you do know that you’re probably never getting out of here. (Wherever “here” actually is, though you assume its somewhere under Lenay) Even if you kill Semra, you don’t have the ability to create magical portals or anything like that so you’ll essentially be in a living tomb waiting to die. + +Of course you probably won’t be waiting too long. Considering she’s currently the only thing up keeping the protective barrier over Lenay as soon as you kill her, you’d wager that the gnomes are going to bomb the shit out of this place and you’ll die in a cave in and that’s assuming the Xi don’t come digging through and overwhelming you first. +> Join Semra +You realize you don’t want to die yet. + +You also realize that events have conspired against you to lead up to this moment, so perhaps maybe you should just give in to fate. + +You hate Semra. You’ve always hated her. And whenever she’s helped you’ve resented it even more. And when she’s right that’s when you hate her the most. + +But you can’t deny her appeal. Even after all these centuries, that part of you, that sick twisted part of you that thought was gone forever is still there and as strong as it ever was. + +So you give in. You take your place by Semra’s side and sit in the chair that Semra has provided for you. You can sense the delight in her mind. + +“So…now what?” you ask. +“Now the fun begins, lover! Just close your eyes and relax. As always mommy will take care of everything…” + +You feel your magical essence join with Semra’s own and together you both feel stronger. Most of the energy goes towards the barrier protecting Lenay, but the rest goes towards your own whims, which are now endless at least within your mind, and the city is concerned. + +You and Semra take a more direct control over Lenay now without Eldolith in charge. You both instill fear into the populace and give commands via your mind to the next highest in rank. (Who just happens to be Eldolith’s latest ambitious girlfriend who gladly accepts the position of Domina). + +For the most part you just let the city run itself and enjoy watching the excess the city has to offer. Semra herself says things like gladiator matches, the torturing of sveld slaves and the baby throwing competitions are much more enjoyable now that she has someone close to share them with. + +And when you aren’t doing that, you engage in an activity that’s more common. Of course seeing that your bodies are in no longer suitable for that activity, you engage intimately on a whole mental level. Semra was right about this too, it is somehow more intense than you imagined that could be. Your mind is not limited like the body and you and Semra indulge in many twisted fantasies. + +You have to admit though, you don’t ever really see baby throwing as a “sport”, but more like an activity. You and Semra constantly have debates over this issue… + +“But there’s a target and points and everything! How the hell is it not a sport?!” Semra asks. +“Just doesn’t seem like one to me. Gladiator matches I can see. There’s clearly skill and training involved.” +“You think there isn’t any training or skill with baby throwing? Do you realize how much sveld babies squirm about before your throw them? It’s not like just lobbing a nice round rock you know. They don’t tend to fly straight, you have to practice and adjust for wind and all kinds of other little factors. Like whether or not the baby has eaten within the last couple of hours or so.” +“What? If you’re going to kill them anyway why the hell would you even feed them so close before throwing them?” +“It shouldn’t surprise you, but baby throwing is taken VERY seriously in svelk society. So much so that some like to cheat by secretly feeding their opponent’s babies before hand. Nothing worse than a baby-spraying diarrhea all over you while you’re swinging it around to throw. Even the smell could distract you from your throw and cause you to lose valuable points.” +“I dunno, still just seems like a celebrated svelk activity to me. I mean why don’t you consider torturing elves a sport? Surely the torturers have practiced their trade enough to keep victims alive long enough to give a good show.” you ask. +“Because that’s not a sport, that’s a fucking art! (Sigh) You humans are such uncultured barbarians.” + +While you and Semra remain safely inside the barrier of Lenay, the world outside goes on, but not in a good way. The Empire suffers greatly without your leadership. The Xi begin overrunning the borders and the gnomes continue to bomb the hell out of both. + +Doesn’t take long before holdings in Arat fall completely and Quala is well on its way. Sightmaster Crowley does his best to fill your shoes, but it just isn’t enough when the gnomes come out with an even deadlier weapon than their airships. + +They develop a plague of some sort to kill the Xi and it works spectacularly. The Xi die off by the thousands. Then the citizens of the Empire start to die off as well. Whether it’s from the same disease or a different one the gnomes created, it doesn’t matter. Elves, humans and even orcs begin to sicken and die. The only ones with somewhat of a resistance are the kobolds and they quickly abandon their duties and scurry back to the safety of their underground dwellings when the gnomes start fire bombing the dying husk of the Empire. + +The gnomes don’t give up on Lenay either. They attempt to use different weapons to breach the barrier and continue to use the old ones in the hopes that eventually the magic on the barrier will weaken, after all you had the same idea that even Semra couldn’t keep it up forever. + +And it’s true she can’t by herself. With your help though it isn’t quite as much of a problem. Unfortunately even with the two of you, you can’t keep it up forever either, especially you when you realize that Semra’s been slowly draining all your energy little bit by little bit. You were so wrapped up in enjoying decadence that you didn’t think about how Semra was ultimately using you and eventually killing you. + +You try to free yourself, but her spell that melded your minds keeps you in place and too weak to resist her. + +You try to reason with Semra by stating that if you die, it’ll only buy her a bit more time and the gnomes will eventually break through anyway. + +“Perhaps, my sweet eternal, but not today…I will miss you…” Semra says sounding genuinely sad. + +You curse yourself for being so weak as you have nobody to blame but yourself. Semra was just being true to herself, something you should’ve done. You were so afraid of death that you ran from it only to die a slave rather than a warrior or even as a free man. + +You lament your poor judgment as your mind begins to fade into the ever-lasting darkness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren’t going to wait around and marching your troops off to Telis seems like a waste of time when you’re so close to finishing off the Arat Confederacy. Most of all you want to get your revenge on Eldolith for her attack on you in your own palace years ago. + +You gather all the mages that are currently within your war camp and explain that you’re going to bring down that barrier. It’s going to require a great deal of energy and that it’s completely possible that some won’t even survive the process, but once that barrier is down, Lenay will be ripe for the taking. + +In the meantime, the regular army is going to have to deal without magic back up for awhile when repelling Xi incursions. + +You and your mages focus on the massive barrier protecting Lenay. You envision it coming down and staying that way. Doesn’t take long before you begin to feel a force combating your efforts. With a personalized touch that only Semra can do. + +“What do you think you’re doing my eager eternal? If you wanted me to let you in, you could’ve just asked you know.” You hear her voice inside your head. + +You try to block it out, but that’s a losing task. You and Semra are locked in more than just a battle of the wills right now. Your minds are still linked. + +“This is a useless endeavor eternal. Even with your little followers you aren’t going to bring down this barrier. I can keep this up forever.” + +One good thing about having a linked mind, is you can sometimes tell an outright lie, though in Semra’s case it’s always better to assume that she’s lying anyway. However, you know she can’t keep this up forever, her power is nowhere near how it used to be, otherwise she wouldn’t have wanted you to “join her” years ago. + +“Very well, continue if you must…” Semra’s voice says and thankfully you’re just left with silence. + +Five days pass and your army is fending off the Xi well enough, but the barrier still stands strong. You have not eaten, slept or drank anything and are really starting to feel those effects even if you are in a trance like state right now. The only thing that’s managed to sustain you is…well leeching off the energy of your other mages of which you’ve lost seven at this point. + +Still, you really feel that you’re making progress. You can sense that the barrier is weakening, perhaps only a little, but it’s still something. + +Unfortunately you may never know if you would’ve succeeded eventually because something occurs that interrupts everything. Something big and something you and probably nobody else could’ve ever envisioned… + +An incredibly large object hovers high above the earth and moves slowly towards the city of Lenay. It’s high enough that it’s fairly safe from conventional weapons. It isn’t an airship either; it’s something much more. + +It’s Telis. + +The gnomes have somehow managed to uproot an entire city and have it floating in the fucking air. + +While your army is certainly panicking about this, you’re nearly completely oblivious due to your continued spell focus on bringing down the barrier. You hear some of your officers shout at you about a flying city or something similar, but you’re more or less out of the loop. + +Even when Telis begins to unleash a volley of mortar rockets in your area you still aren’t completely entirely cognizant of the situation. Loud explosions strike all around you and it’s amazing you aren’t killed in the blast, you do finally lose focus though and fall to the ground. + +It is then when you realize how much danger you’re in. The gnomes are continuing their vicious bombardment of the area, probably hoping to wipe everyone out and they’re doing a fairly good job all things considering. + +You look around and see your army completely panicked and running away. They are some of the bravest men and women from all walks of races, but they’ve never had to face something so large and massively destructive before. In fact you don’t even know if you’re going to be able to make it, you feel so weak and the most recent blast just killed or severely maimed the soldiers that were trying to carry you away from danger. + +Dizzy, tired and very drained, you struggle to retreat from the area as your legs feel very wobbly. + +“Can’t let it end like this. Argh! Hate this fucking weakness!” you exclaim as pain shoots all through your body and you collapse. It shames you, but you almost feel like just giving up and letting the gnome weapons finish you off. + +“You see what happened my darling eternal? You were so focused on revenge on my idiot daughter that you completely neglected keeping up on what those red cap miscreants were up to. Now look at you, you’re all spent, just like when we first made love. Remember that?” you hear Semra’s voice say in your head. Apparently she’s still in contact with you. You make an audible groan when you believe that mocking voice of Semra is going to be the last thing you hear in your final moments. + +However, as usual her mysterious and still baffling obsession with you might be your salvation…again. + +“Fear not, lover. Mommy can save you. It will have to involve me lowering the barrier for just the briefest moment, but I can open a portal to your safety. Enter it and you’ll be back with me, right where you should’ve been all this time.” + +No sooner do you hear these words uttered when you see a portal open up not far in front of you. + +“Come to me, let us embrace again. You know it was always meant to be. We are the survivors. We did it once and we can do it again.” + +Semra’s creepy attempt at temptation aside, you don’t have much time to react to your situation. The gnomes are undoubtedly going to unleash another volley of explosives and who knows if you’re going to be lucky enough to avoid a direct hit this time. + +Then again, if you enter that portal who knows what the hell is in store for you. +> Run for it +Mustering up all the strength you can, you pull yourself up off the ground and run around the portal rather than through it. + +“Stop! What’re you doing!? I’m your only chance! Don’t you remember last time?!” you hear Semra’s voice exclaim in your head. + +You answer back in your head, hoping Semra hears the message. + +“Semra, I was an idiot to listen to you five hundred years ago, not repeating that mistake again.” + +Whether or not she heard you, you’ll never know because several large explosions occur behind you and the force of the blast even from this distance causes you to fall again. + +With the barrier temporarily taken down, the gnome rockets were able to hit Lenay quite hard, you turn over to see the portal disappear and Lenay in flames. What you don’t see is the barrier going up again. + +While you temporarily sit there looking at the destruction, some of your troops see you and rush to your aid. You’re carried away and you survive this day, but you know it’s definitely no victory. + +Year 560 + +The Empire that you resurrected from the ashes is now returning to that state. Maybe not quite yet, but it will be soon. + +It wasn’t the increased overwhelming Xi attacks on your borders. You were managing them. + +It wasn’t the superior technological machines of the gnomes. Even the mass fire bombings of Arat and Quala from their airships weren’t enough. In time you would’ve caught up and crushed them. + +It was however another gnomish “invention” that has lead to your ruin. Biological warfare of the likes nobody had even seen. + +They created a disease to wipe out the Xi and it worked spectacularly. The Xi began dying off almost immediately when it took affect. Unfortunately this plague also affected your people as well. Or perhaps maybe they engineered another one for other races, you don’t know, it doesn’t matter because people started getting sick and dying. Elves, humans, even orcs. The only ones with somewhat of a resilience were the kobolds of all races. Well them and yourself. Despite your physical frailties and age, it would seem your Eternal roots have protected you from the disease. + +Everyone you knew who was close to you has died of the plague. Your top advisor David, Sightmaster Crowley, even Jennifer. Your citizens are dead or sick. Your workforce is non-existent and all you’ve got left for a military force are fucking kobolds and quite frankly they aren’t going to be enough to stop the gnomes from finishing everyone off. And you know they’ll be coming soon. + +You’re tired though and you don’t have the fight left in you to oppose the red-capped bastards anymore. Indeed there isn’t much left to fight for. Your own life doesn’t even mean much to you any more, you doubt if you’d live much longer anyway given how much your body is in pain and much weaker than you used to be. + +It’s no kind of life. Not for an Eternal. + +That’s why you aren’t going to run. When the gnomes come in their flying machines to bomb Nalin to cinders, you’ll be right here to go along with it. + +And in a few months, you meet your fate.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 557 + +Arat is nearly yours...well what’s left of it anyway and even after you take it completely there is still the matter of holding it. And that will certainly be a great task, one you even wonder if you’ll live to see. The aches and pains in your body continue to get worse with age, you tire a lot easier and you get short of breath at times. Everyone tells you that you shouldn’t be anywhere close to the battlefield, but you can’t help it. It’s the only place you feel you truly belong and gives you a thrill even if you’re not doing a lot of active fighting nowadays. + +To be quite honest this war has been a blessing for you as there is no end in sight. It allows you to focus on something other than mundane things like the economy or civics. It’s also allowed you to put off the task of finding your “successor” and you don’t even care anymore. You’ve come to the conclusion that when your days are done in this world whoever gets the Empire is whoever is strong enough to hold it. If that means it disintegrates and falls into the abyss then so be it. The Empire fell once before and you revived it. It can do it again. + +Only four major cities to conquer and the Arat Confederacy would be resigned to the history books, but they proved to be much harder to crack mainly because of Xi AND Redcap interference. Arat is a massive warzone and now all the major players are involved. + +Zo was the toughest nut to crack in terms of fighting, but perhaps the easiest in some ways as there were no other elements to make things complicated. It was a straight up battle and it only defied you mainly due to its hatred of orcs, which make up a large part of your armies. It is almost unfortunate that the entire city population had to be practically eradicated because its citizens were certainly the bravest and had the best soldiers in this war. + +Valizza was next. The crimelords there practically opened the gates for you. If it was a choice between suffering Zo’s fate or being ruled by the Empire, there was no choice at all. After all crime always exists somewhere in societies no matter how hard a government tries to stomp it out. The crimelords there no doubt assumed that they could just switch sides and slither into the underworld that exists in the Empire. + +Most of them were wrong. You couldn’t be worrying about petty gang violence between warring factions you needed another city on the frontlines contributing to the war effort. You immediately had all the “leaders” sized up, determined which one was the most efficient and made him “governor” while the rest were executed. “Hand Cannon” Harry was grateful and now knows that the city is ultimately run for Empire purposes FIRST. And whatever criminal activity he has going on comes second. You’re the “Boss.” + +Atinil, ever the bootlicking city to Lenay of course fought back, though not very well. The only reason why it posed any problems is due to Lenay’s forces attempting to bail them out and Xi incursions which had started to become more of a problem by this point. It was during this battle that your armies had begun facing any sort of heavy Xi opposition. Semra was right, there are an awful lot of them and they attack in waves with no regard for their own lives. They also make their first strikes mainly from below; in fact that’s what ultimately ended the siege of Atinil. Towards the end, its citizens threw open the gates begging you to destroy the Xi who had managed to enter the city before you did. By the time it was all said and done the Xi had destroyed half of the city before you managed to beat back the infiltration. + +Your kobold commando units have been doing a good job at blocking off tunnels or creating new ones to form counter attacks, but again there are just so many of them that for every ten you kill it seems like a hundred take their place. + +To make matters worse, the Redcaps have been making excursions into Arat via their airships. You’ve only manages to catch sight of a few from a distance, but others have described them to you in greater detail. Great big oval shaped contraptions that seem to move by propellers and some sort of gas that keeps them aloft. (At least that’s how someone tried to explain it to you, really you still never got all that “science” stuff) + +And just as Semra had mentioned in your visit with her, they’ve been bombing indiscriminately on the Xi AND your own troops. You’ve yet to take one of these airships down mainly because they never stay around long enough in a battle (and certainly not in any battle that you’ve personally participated in. They float in to cause destruction and then leave, though you have noticed that they’ve all been going in a particular direction. Namely towards the city-state that has always remained a mystery, Telis. + +Now Lenay is all that remains of the Arat Confederacy and it’s making sure that all attackers will not stomp out its presence with ease. A magic barrier has formed around the city, and probably extends far below the earth as well otherwise the Xi would’ve gone under it. + +The barrier has proven impenetrable to all known weapons and magic or at least anything your soldiers can throw at it. Given how strong it is you can only guess that Semra is having a direct hand in the matter. So much for her claims that “you” were needed to create the barrier in the first place, then again she did imply that she merely needed your help to keep her from using up all her power. + +Usually a “siege” mentality isn’t very successful (certainly didn’t work for the Felkans) but the svelk seem to be content on “waiting” everything out while you and the Xi slaughter each other, they may even be building up something that will change the tide of the war. (And probably are) + +So once again it’s all falling onto you. You’re the only one that has magic remotely powerful enough to bring down that barrier and even then you might need help. You half wonder if taking the barrier down is going to kill you, but if it comes to that then so be it, but there might be a more pressing concern. + +The recent appearances of the gnomes and their travels towards Telis make you wonder if you shouldn’t direct your attention toward them. Semra did warn you about them and their recent actions of bombing your own troops haven’t exactly proven her wrong. + +It’s just a question of what you want to spend your time and resources on. Making a long trip to Telis probably through Xi occupied territory and then face whatever the gnomes have there (which you have no sort of intel on) or bring down the barrier (And continuing to fend off the Xi in the meantime). + +Both of those are probably going to result in considerable losses. +> Divert your forces towards Telis +You’re not wasting any more time on Lenay and as much as you’d love to put a blade into Eldolith from your last encounter, she’s not worth the time either. The Arat Confederacy is no longer a concern. Let the Xi have Lenay if they want to continue throwing bodies at it. The gnomes are the greater threat; they’ve already got ships that fly in the air and who knows what the hell they have planned. Maybe if you take Telis, you can also gain the knowledge of how to build such machines because so far the experiments by your inventors haven’t had much success. + +The first thing you have to do is order a withdraw from the Lenay area. This confuses your officers, but other than General Ingrid who insists that the city can be taken, they all just follow your commands. (As does Ingrid after a bit of arguing) + +The next thing you do is have the major wounded transferred back to Velizza or Atnil. The Xi are still a major concern in the area and hopefully the wounded will get well before the Xi start advancing on those cities because they’re going to need all the extra protection they can get. + +You also send a message to Sightmaster Crowley to send a full battalion of Eyes. You tell him to even take them away from security positions if he has to, because you anticipate that you’re going to need the extra magic power. + +You also tell Crowley that if you fall in battle that he’s officially the successor of the Empire. A bit of an abrupt way of passing this decision on, but there it is at last. If he decides to use this as an excuse to stage a coup later, you’ll have to deal with it later, but again, you doubt if you’ve really got much time anymore for “later.” + +The next step is making the long march to Telis. You know where it is, but even if you didn’t you could just follow the occasional airship in the far distance. Unfortunately you have a feeling that if you’re close enough to see them at all, the crews aboard such things can probably see your massive forces heading their way as well. There’s nothing for it though, Arat has always been pretty open and there’s no real way to hide a force as large as yours. You half hope some of those airships make a detour towards you, so you can call down a lightning storm on them the same way you did on that sea monstrosity years ago, but none of them do. + +The Xi however give you more than enough trouble on your journey. You continued to be impressed by the Xi’s tenacity to completely abandon any sense of self-preservation. They exceed orcs even in that regard and that’s something you thought you’d never see. + +If only there was a way you could’ve had them fighting for you instead, you wouldn’t have had to waste so many years rebuilding the Empire in the first place. You could’ve just had it immediately. + +You watch in the distance as some of the kobolds take down a single Xi warrior. That’s something you never thought you’d see either. Fighting along side kobolds of all creatures and them actually being some of your best soldiers within their limited capabilities. Funny that you should respect or find a certain affinity to such non-human races like orcs, kobolds or even the Xi than you do with humans. Then again maybe it’s because you’ve never really truly been human. You’re just masquerading as one. + +After a week of marching through Xi infested territory Telis is finally in sight. And from where you’re standing, you see it being besieged by the Xi. Unlike Lenay however, Telis doesn’t have the benefit of an impenetrable magic barrier defending it. It does however have several airships launching all manner of explosions and gunfire to the area around the city. + +It would seem the gnomes are reluctant to damage Telis itself (though some of that is probably unavoidable), but the reason isn’t clear. Are the gnomes Telis’ allies? From what you’ve heard Telis did have a human population, so it seems unusual that the gnomes would be helping them given their new outlook on life. Unless they’re invaders as well and just don’t want their potential prize destroyed. + +In any event you’re somewhat glad that the Xi are involved. Gives the gnomes another target and divides the attention from you. + +Seeing as the gnomes are less willing to blow up Telis itself, you figure your best course of action is to get your army into the city right away. Actually getting in doesn’t look like it will be a large problem thanks to the efforts of the Xi, the problem lies more with fighting your way through the Xi while avoid potential bombings from the gnomes. + +All available mages are ordered to put up shields and all soldiers are ordered to protect them while making the long march towards Telis or else nobody is going to make it to the city at all. + +It’s not a long distance, but it feels like one. Explosion after explosion crashes down on the magical shields. Since your shields are simple ones the Xi simply dig under them and attack that way, but the soldiers do a good enough job of keeping them from killing your mages. You do your part by supporting the magical energy required for this feat. It’s a great strain on you, but you try to block out the pain. + +You can see the Telis gate wide open and it reminds you of the day when the Felkan capital fell to your forces. What a glorious victory that was. + +“Advance! Kill everything! They can’t stop us! Not the Xi and not the gnomes and their machines! We will be the last ones standing and remembered long after worms have eaten all their corpses! Long live the Empire! Long live the Emperor!” you shout. + +While it’s a simple speech meant to encourage the surrounding troops, your last line was probably a little strange since you’re the Emperor and it sounds odd. Of course you realize this soon after you said it because you temporary forgot what the hell time period you were in. + +“Shit, get focused…” you mumble. + +Memory lapses aside, your army continues to battle its way into the city. Some of your people have already reached the entryway and that’s when a large rumbling noise is heard from the city and then the ground begins to shake. The shaking soon becomes more violent tremors to the point that the ground starts to crack and that’s not from Xi digging… + +Many of your people have a hard time keeping their footing and during this time some of the mages lose their concentration. This is a fatal mistake, which soon results in entire companies being blown to bloody pieces by the airships continuing to dump bombs from above. + +The airships aren’t the only things that are flying now though. + +The loud rumbling continues along with the earth shaking and you soon see what is going on. It’s Telis. The city is rising off the ground. Whatever the hell the gnomes have been doing, this has to be part of it. They’ve created a flying city! + +The gnomes have already displayed a significant amount of power with their airships. With this city they could very well be unstoppable. + +Questions about how and when they did this will have to wait, what matters now is that you have to stop them. The city has only just started to rise and its taking a long enough time that you see several Xi and your own troops grabbing on to what they can before its completely out of reach. + +You’re either going to have to destroy it or capture it. + +If you were younger you’d just unleash a firestorm or something similar without another thought, but that’s a risky endeavor in your condition for several reasons. + +Capturing it is probably going to be even harder, especially since you’re going to have to board the damn thing. You MIGHT reach it in time if you make a full dash towards it now, but that would mean no longer supporting the mages to defend the rest of your army. +> Destroy the city +You’re not going to reach it in time, but you can’t allow the gnomes to wield such power. If this spell kills you then so be it, still maybe you won’t need to summon a firestorm so large. The airships are close enough to the city that if you could damage them, they’ll probably crash into the city themselves and bring it down. + +You concentrate on flames, fire, and the entire sky burning. Doesn’t take long before the sky around you goes red. Your soldiers aren’t quite sure what’s going on, but when it’s obvious that you’re casting something, multiple officers shout to their subordinates to find shelter within mage barriers if they aren’t there already. + +Then it comes. Fire from the sky. + +Airships are hit with a rain of fire. There is no shelter or escape for the machines and the gnome crews are equally helpless. Attempts to fly out of the area of danger fail as they catch fire and soon turn into a crashing inferno of metal, wood and the incinerated crew and sure enough some of those go crashing into the city which has also been catching fireballs. + +On the ground, it looks like a vision of hell. Large sections of torn up fields and plains are burning, and the only thing protecting your soldiers are your mage barriers and a general retreat has been sounded now that airships are falling out of the sky and it soon looks like the city will too. Even the Xi have chosen to retreat at this point, making their escapes by burrowing back under the earth. + +“Emperor, we have to go!” you hear a voice shout. You aren’t quite sure who it is though because you’re woozy after casting your spell. In fact you’d be completely exposed by the rain of fire, if you weren’t being dragged away by your loyal soldiers within the cover of Eye mages. + +Eventually you regain your bearings and tell your soldiers to let you go and that you can make it yourself. They’re hesitant to do so at first, but comply. You’re drained, but you’ve still got the energy to move clear of the inevitable spectacular explosion that occurs when Telis finally come crashing down from the sky. + +The amount of destruction is actually quite impressive, but as you look at the burning wreckage from the distance you curse the fact that you could not utilize such a powerful weapon for yourself. + +After a few days pass the fires finally die down enough that you order a full search of the wreckage of anything that might be useful, but there isn’t much left. At best you have some of the debris carried away so that your inventors might figure out how to re-create at least the airships, but that doesn’t seem very likely to occur anytime soon. + +In the meantime, the Xi slowly begins to re-invade the area and continue to press forward towards your territory. They’ve also managed to completely cover the area surrounding Lenay despite still not being able to get into the city. Having no more wish to waste anymore manpower on capturing the city yourself, you decide to have your forces to hold the line at your own territory in Arat. Lenay is just going to be one target that you won’t get to eliminate any time soon, if at all. + +Year 559 + +“Arat has completely fallen, Quala is starting to suffering an influx of Xi troops and reports say that there have even been sighting of Xi in Rask.” David remarks. +“(Sigh) What kind of fools…(sigh) have three more armies reinforce the forces in Quala. Send another one up to Rask and have Sightmaster Crowley mobilize everything he has there to combat the threat. Have him recruit ogre if he can!” +“Very well my Emperor, I uh…should let you know that our people have still made no progress on re-creating an airship.” +“Didn’t think they would. The little gnome bastards took that secret to their little graves when the Xi finally wiped out the Redcap Kingdom a year ago. Even they couldn’t hold out against them forever, just like Semra couldn’t keep her barrier up forever to protect Lenay and also got resigned to the box of now extinct cultures. Which is something we’ll eventually be at this rate. (Sigh) Cancel the project; have them go back to working on perfecting our existing weapons or something.” + +David leaves without saying another word and you’re left to ponder this increasingly grim scenario. A scenario that you’re not entirely sure you’re going to win, in fact you’re almost certain you won’t. + +The odd thing is you’re okay with it, mainly because you’re also fairly certain you don’t have long to live anyway. You tire a lot easier and your body hurts all the time now, you might have five or six years left tops and that’s assuming the Xi don’t overrun Nalin first. + +The only question that remains for you is how you want to handle this. You’re going to continue to fight to the bitter end no matter what, but you wonder if that fate shouldn’t necessarily include your people. + +You wonder if maybe you should have an “escape” plan for your people. Unfortunately there aren’t too many places to run to, a mass exodus through the Usksha desert is likely to result in death for several reasons and you imagine the Xi would easily just invade there as well. Heading further north through the mountains of Rask has similar problems. + +That only leaves one major “safe” option, the ocean. + +There haven’t really been any major efforts to explore the open seas to see if new land does indeed exist, but you figure if there is an “Isle of Mortos” there must be other lands. (Hopefully) Still this is going to be very short notice and a massive undertaking of building ships big enough to carry not just people, but supplies as well for this uncertain journey. + +However, if it worked and there was land, then the survivors would definitely be free of the Xi threat, even the Xi can’t cross the ocean. + +If you’re going to enact this escape plan though, you’re going to have to do it soon because time is not on your side. + +Of course the other side of you still believes that maybe, just maybe if you concentrate your efforts you could still win this war. +> Prepare for the exodus +You already made the mistake of believing you were more important than the Empire before and it lead to its destruction, you’re not making it again. The Empire must live on in some form even if you do not and that means your subjects must live. + +You make the preparations; you call your advisors who are all very surprised by this plan as it involves the mindset that you have already been defeated. When you quickly remind them that most of the ones that are going to have first dibs on having a seat on one of those ships are most likely those in the upper part of the hierarchy, they don’t argue too much about it. They suggest that you don’t announce the plan as it’ll cause a great lowering of morale, but you see no reason to hide it and rumors are going to abound anyway which may cause some trouble anyway, so you make a grand speech about your plan to the people. + +You explain that despite the dark days ahead, the Empire is not going to die as long as some of them live. You tell them that you won’t lie about the escape possibly being just as dangerous as staying and fighting, but for those that want to leave there will be a merit system. Those that work the hardest towards making this plan feasible will get first consideration for getting aboard a ship. This doesn’t mean just building a ship, it could mean being a soldier and defending said workers of the ships and other helpful positions. + +Ship builders and all other manner of laborers are assigned right away to work on building the arks. You realize that considering the time its going to take to build these things, you’ll need to hold off the Xi for as long as possible, so you consolidate the majority of your forces back to the borders of Nalin. This leaves Quala and Rask to fend for themselves and while you urge citizens that if they want protection they need to make their way back to Nalin. However, some people are stubborn and the orcs that live in Quala are the most stubborn. In fact most of them outright say you’re abandoning them and see now that the late Warlord Sprog was right and that orcs don’t need the Empire. You wash your hands of such insubordination. You figure the Xi will sort them out. Kobolds on the other hand are a bit more compliant and since most of them used to live in Nalin before, they return. + +Sightmaster Crowley doesn’t agree with this decision, but thankfully he pulls most of his forces out of Rask (The ones that didn’t insist on staying) and returns to Nalin. + +Admiral Len is overwhelmed by the fact that you’ll be saddling him with so much responsibility of commanding this exodus plan. He states that he doesn’t even know if land exists past the vast eastern ocean. Your response is “Find some.” Len says he’ll send out scout ships while the arks are being made, but he isn’t hopeful. + +Finally you contact Jennifer. You reassure her that her family will definitely have a seat on one of the ships. She of course is grateful, but asks if there is nothing that can be done to defeat the Xi. You say you wish you had a more combative solution, but you still feel this is the best chance of the Empire continuing to exist. She understands, but is upset by it and hugs you one last time, before you never see her again. + +After it’s all said and done, Nalin is slightly more crowded than before, but is very well protected now with its entire military in one area. The Empire has shrunk, but it isn’t dead yet. + +Year 564 + +“Have all the arks left?” you ask. +“Reports are sketchy at this point, but I believe yes, the last of them have departed. Our forces were successful in holding off the Xi in that regard.” David remarks. +“Well that’s something at least. So I’m guessing the rest of the struggle for Nalin isn’t going well?” +“I’m uh…afraid not Emperor.” +“Figured as much.” You reply. + +You and David are both silent for a while. In fact your palace has been fairly silent in general now that many either died or left on the arks. + +“David, tell me. Why did you stay?” you ask. +“Me? Well, I’m so old now I don’t think I’d survive the journey on the open seas anyway.” David says. +“Hmm, you too huh?” you say. +“Besides, my place is here and you need at least one of your staff still here seeing as you sent Sightmaster Crowley away on an ark.” David continues. +“Heh, yeah I thought we were going to have to knock him out and have him dragged aboard one those things. Still when I explained that the new Empire is going to need the Eyes and their leader to defend it he got the point.” +“He always was a duty bound soldier.” +“Yes, yes he was.” + +Another moment of silence passes and then you get your aching body off of your throne. + +“Well, I guess I might as well get this over with.” You say. +“Get what over with?” +“I’m not going to wait around for the Xi to come get me. I’m going to go out there and kill the first ones I see and repeat that process until they finally bring me down. I’m thinking I might be able to last a few days at least.” +“Oh. Well, erm you might increase your chances if you meet up with one of our units. There are still many out there and…” +“No, I’m going to meet death alone. That’s how we all die in the end anyway.” You reply. +“Very well…it was an honor serving you my Emperor.” David says and you nod silently before making your way out of the palace. + +In your last days of fighting the Xi (and through your own physical pain) you wonder if those ships will find a new place to settle. You did your best and really given the circumstances, that was all you could’ve done. + +Eventually you are struck down by the Xi and your last thoughts are wondering if you’ll be reunited with Alison.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’re not going to reach it in time, but you can’t allow the gnomes to wield such power. If this spell kills you then so be it, still maybe you won’t need to summon a firestorm so large. The airships are close enough to the city that if you could damage them, they’ll probably crash into the city themselves and bring it down. + +You concentrate on flames, fire, and the entire sky burning. Doesn’t take long before the sky around you goes red. Your soldiers aren’t quite sure what’s going on, but when it’s obvious that you’re casting something, multiple officers shout to their subordinates to find shelter within mage barriers if they aren’t there already. + +Then it comes. Fire from the sky. + +Airships are hit with a rain of fire. There is no shelter or escape for the machines and the gnome crews are equally helpless. Attempts to fly out of the area of danger fail as they catch fire and soon turn into a crashing inferno of metal, wood and the incinerated crew and sure enough some of those go crashing into the city which has also been catching fireballs. + +On the ground, it looks like a vision of hell. Large sections of torn up fields and plains are burning, and the only thing protecting your soldiers are your mage barriers and a general retreat has been sounded now that airships are falling out of the sky and it soon looks like the city will too. Even the Xi have chosen to retreat at this point, making their escapes by burrowing back under the earth. + +“Emperor, we have to go!” you hear a voice shout. You aren’t quite sure who it is though because you’re woozy after casting your spell. In fact you’d be completely exposed by the rain of fire, if you weren’t being dragged away by your loyal soldiers within the cover of Eye mages. + +Eventually you regain your bearings and tell your soldiers to let you go and that you can make it yourself. They’re hesitant to do so at first, but comply. You’re drained, but you’ve still got the energy to move clear of the inevitable spectacular explosion that occurs when Telis finally come crashing down from the sky. + +The amount of destruction is actually quite impressive, but as you look at the burning wreckage from the distance you curse the fact that you could not utilize such a powerful weapon for yourself. + +After a few days pass the fires finally die down enough that you order a full search of the wreckage of anything that might be useful, but there isn’t much left. At best you have some of the debris carried away so that your inventors might figure out how to re-create at least the airships, but that doesn’t seem very likely to occur anytime soon. + +In the meantime, the Xi slowly begins to re-invade the area and continue to press forward towards your territory. They’ve also managed to completely cover the area surrounding Lenay despite still not being able to get into the city. Having no more wish to waste anymore manpower on capturing the city yourself, you decide to have your forces to hold the line at your own territory in Arat. Lenay is just going to be one target that you won’t get to eliminate any time soon, if at all. + +Year 559 + +“Arat has completely fallen, Quala is starting to suffering an influx of Xi troops and reports say that there have even been sighting of Xi in Rask.” David remarks. +“(Sigh) What kind of fools…(sigh) have three more armies reinforce the forces in Quala. Send another one up to Rask and have Sightmaster Crowley mobilize everything he has there to combat the threat. Have him recruit ogre if he can!” +“Very well my Emperor, I uh…should let you know that our people have still made no progress on re-creating an airship.” +“Didn’t think they would. The little gnome bastards took that secret to their little graves when the Xi finally wiped out the Redcap Kingdom a year ago. Even they couldn’t hold out against them forever, just like Semra couldn’t keep her barrier up forever to protect Lenay and also got resigned to the box of now extinct cultures. Which is something we’ll eventually be at this rate. (Sigh) Cancel the project; have them go back to working on perfecting our existing weapons or something.” + +David leaves without saying another word and you’re left to ponder this increasingly grim scenario. A scenario that you’re not entirely sure you’re going to win, in fact you’re almost certain you won’t. + +The odd thing is you’re okay with it, mainly because you’re also fairly certain you don’t have long to live anyway. You tire a lot easier and your body hurts all the time now, you might have five or six years left tops and that’s assuming the Xi don’t overrun Nalin first. + +The only question that remains for you is how you want to handle this. You’re going to continue to fight to the bitter end no matter what, but you wonder if that fate shouldn’t necessarily include your people. + +You wonder if maybe you should have an “escape” plan for your people. Unfortunately there aren’t too many places to run to, a mass exodus through the Usksha desert is likely to result in death for several reasons and you imagine the Xi would easily just invade there as well. Heading further north through the mountains of Rask has similar problems. + +That only leaves one major “safe” option, the ocean. + +There haven’t really been any major efforts to explore the open seas to see if new land does indeed exist, but you figure if there is an “Isle of Mortos” there must be other lands. (Hopefully) Still this is going to be very short notice and a massive undertaking of building ships big enough to carry not just people, but supplies as well for this uncertain journey. + +However, if it worked and there was land, then the survivors would definitely be free of the Xi threat, even the Xi can’t cross the ocean. + +If you’re going to enact this escape plan though, you’re going to have to do it soon because time is not on your side. + +Of course the other side of you still believes that maybe, just maybe if you concentrate your efforts you could still win this war. +> Prepare for the final war +You’re not going to waste time on a possibility that doesn’t even have any proof behind it. There is no knowledge of land west of the ocean and there just isn’t time to mobilize a half cocked plan to evacuate people who might die a slower death on the open sea anyway. Better to stay and fight. + +You continue organizing your forces and mobilizing them in the best way that you’ll think that they will be the most effective. + +Year 566 + +As you lie on your deathbed weakened by your own physical frailties the war with the Xi still carries on and not in the Empire’s favor. + +You struggled as best you could, but it just wasn’t enough. The Xi are indeed a relentless force that even you cannot stop. Quala has completely fallen. Rask has been cut off, you have no idea if it’s been overrun as well, but it hardly matters by this point. Your last report states that possibly within a year or even six months the Xi will completely overrun Nalin. + +Anyone who was remotely close to you is gone. David was taken by natural causes, Sightmaster Crowley in battle, even Jennifer was killed along with her entire family by a surprise Xi attack on Dalt. + +You believe there were some last ditch efforts of escape via ships. Some have successfully done so, but it’s hard to imagine where they will go. Makes you wonder if setting up an escape plan might’ve been a better idea to at least save some people to possibly keep the Empire alive, but you dismiss such thoughts. + +No, you are the last of a dying Empire. The old one and now this one. When you die, it will die with you. + +Your only regret is that you didn’t decide to face death in battle when you at least still had the strength to do so. Your body hurts so much right now that you almost wish the Xi were here just to put you out of your misery. + +Eventually your pain comes to a quiet end when you manage to drift into unconsciousness and finally death. + +And just as you believed, the Empire follows you in death soon after, though perhaps not quite as quietly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’re not wasting any more time on Lenay and as much as you’d love to put a blade into Eldolith from your last encounter, she’s not worth the time either. The Arat Confederacy is no longer a concern. Let the Xi have Lenay if they want to continue throwing bodies at it. The gnomes are the greater threat; they’ve already got ships that fly in the air and who knows what the hell they have planned. Maybe if you take Telis, you can also gain the knowledge of how to build such machines because so far the experiments by your inventors haven’t had much success. + +The first thing you have to do is order a withdraw from the Lenay area. This confuses your officers, but other than General Ingrid who insists that the city can be taken, they all just follow your commands. (As does Ingrid after a bit of arguing) + +The next thing you do is have the major wounded transferred back to Velizza or Atnil. The Xi are still a major concern in the area and hopefully the wounded will get well before the Xi start advancing on those cities because they’re going to need all the extra protection they can get. + +You also send a message to Sightmaster Crowley to send a full battalion of Eyes. You tell him to even take them away from security positions if he has to, because you anticipate that you’re going to need the extra magic power. + +You also tell Crowley that if you fall in battle that he’s officially the successor of the Empire. A bit of an abrupt way of passing this decision on, but there it is at last. If he decides to use this as an excuse to stage a coup later, you’ll have to deal with it later, but again, you doubt if you’ve really got much time anymore for “later.” + +The next step is making the long march to Telis. You know where it is, but even if you didn’t you could just follow the occasional airship in the far distance. Unfortunately you have a feeling that if you’re close enough to see them at all, the crews aboard such things can probably see your massive forces heading their way as well. There’s nothing for it though, Arat has always been pretty open and there’s no real way to hide a force as large as yours. You half hope some of those airships make a detour towards you, so you can call down a lightning storm on them the same way you did on that sea monstrosity years ago, but none of them do. + +The Xi however give you more than enough trouble on your journey. You continued to be impressed by the Xi’s tenacity to completely abandon any sense of self-preservation. They exceed orcs even in that regard and that’s something you thought you’d never see. + +If only there was a way you could’ve had them fighting for you instead, you wouldn’t have had to waste so many years rebuilding the Empire in the first place. You could’ve just had it immediately. + +You watch in the distance as some of the kobolds take down a single Xi warrior. That’s something you never thought you’d see either. Fighting along side kobolds of all creatures and them actually being some of your best soldiers within their limited capabilities. Funny that you should respect or find a certain affinity to such non-human races like orcs, kobolds or even the Xi than you do with humans. Then again maybe it’s because you’ve never really truly been human. You’re just masquerading as one. + +After a week of marching through Xi infested territory Telis is finally in sight. And from where you’re standing, you see it being besieged by the Xi. Unlike Lenay however, Telis doesn’t have the benefit of an impenetrable magic barrier defending it. It does however have several airships launching all manner of explosions and gunfire to the area around the city. + +It would seem the gnomes are reluctant to damage Telis itself (though some of that is probably unavoidable), but the reason isn’t clear. Are the gnomes Telis’ allies? From what you’ve heard Telis did have a human population, so it seems unusual that the gnomes would be helping them given their new outlook on life. Unless they’re invaders as well and just don’t want their potential prize destroyed. + +In any event you’re somewhat glad that the Xi are involved. Gives the gnomes another target and divides the attention from you. + +Seeing as the gnomes are less willing to blow up Telis itself, you figure your best course of action is to get your army into the city right away. Actually getting in doesn’t look like it will be a large problem thanks to the efforts of the Xi, the problem lies more with fighting your way through the Xi while avoid potential bombings from the gnomes. + +All available mages are ordered to put up shields and all soldiers are ordered to protect them while making the long march towards Telis or else nobody is going to make it to the city at all. + +It’s not a long distance, but it feels like one. Explosion after explosion crashes down on the magical shields. Since your shields are simple ones the Xi simply dig under them and attack that way, but the soldiers do a good enough job of keeping them from killing your mages. You do your part by supporting the magical energy required for this feat. It’s a great strain on you, but you try to block out the pain. + +You can see the Telis gate wide open and it reminds you of the day when the Felkan capital fell to your forces. What a glorious victory that was. + +“Advance! Kill everything! They can’t stop us! Not the Xi and not the gnomes and their machines! We will be the last ones standing and remembered long after worms have eaten all their corpses! Long live the Empire! Long live the Emperor!” you shout. + +While it’s a simple speech meant to encourage the surrounding troops, your last line was probably a little strange since you’re the Emperor and it sounds odd. Of course you realize this soon after you said it because you temporary forgot what the hell time period you were in. + +“Shit, get focused…” you mumble. + +Memory lapses aside, your army continues to battle its way into the city. Some of your people have already reached the entryway and that’s when a large rumbling noise is heard from the city and then the ground begins to shake. The shaking soon becomes more violent tremors to the point that the ground starts to crack and that’s not from Xi digging… + +Many of your people have a hard time keeping their footing and during this time some of the mages lose their concentration. This is a fatal mistake, which soon results in entire companies being blown to bloody pieces by the airships continuing to dump bombs from above. + +The airships aren’t the only things that are flying now though. + +The loud rumbling continues along with the earth shaking and you soon see what is going on. It’s Telis. The city is rising off the ground. Whatever the hell the gnomes have been doing, this has to be part of it. They’ve created a flying city! + +The gnomes have already displayed a significant amount of power with their airships. With this city they could very well be unstoppable. + +Questions about how and when they did this will have to wait, what matters now is that you have to stop them. The city has only just started to rise and its taking a long enough time that you see several Xi and your own troops grabbing on to what they can before its completely out of reach. + +You’re either going to have to destroy it or capture it. + +If you were younger you’d just unleash a firestorm or something similar without another thought, but that’s a risky endeavor in your condition for several reasons. + +Capturing it is probably going to be even harder, especially since you’re going to have to board the damn thing. You MIGHT reach it in time if you make a full dash towards it now, but that would mean no longer supporting the mages to defend the rest of your army. +> Capture the city +Probably a fool’s task, but if you survive this you’re going to have to still deal with the Xi. A flying fortress would give a significant advantage. + +You stop using your own energy to support your mages and refocus on a creating a personal shield around yourself. You give the order for everyone to get out of your way or grab on to Telis if they can. + +It isn’t too bad, most of your mages hold their own, and continue to protect a majority of the army, but its yourself that you’re concerned about as you attempt to reach Telis which is slowly becoming completely airborn. You ride your horse as hard to the point where it probably isn’t going to survive after you intend to make a leap forward off of it. + +You pass your soldiers, you pass the Xi fighting them, you pass over the torn up ground from the battle and bombs and you look up and see Telis escaping your reach. + +“No, I’ve come too far!” you say and you stand on top of your horse, nearly falling off in the process while still attempt to upkeep your shield… + +You make the jump towards the city and manage to grab ahold of one half of Telis’ front gate doors which is currently hanging off its hinges. Your shield is down, your body hurts and you’re practically deaf from all the explosions going on around you. + +You hang on for dear life as the ground gets further away and attempt to climb up, but your strength is failing you and even if it wasn’t the door is slowly loosing its weak attachment to the rest of the city. + +“Shit! Shit! No! No! No! Not like this! Fuck! Hate this weakness!” you exclaim as you prepare to either lose your grip or for the door comes loose. And you doubt you’ll be in any condition to “repair” yourself when you take this long fall. + +Fortunately it doesn’t come to that. + +“Emperor! Take my hand!” a human soldier shouts and reaches over the side. You waste no time in accepting his help and soon a couple of other soldiers help him lift you up just in time for the door to fall to the ground. + +After catching your breath and assuring the soldiers that helped you that you’re fine, you get a better assessment of your surroundings. + +“Okay first things first, what’s your name so I know what to call you.” +“Lieutenant Renly, my Emperor and this what’s left of my platoon.” Renly says and waves his arm to six other soldiers. “We’re not the only ones here, I believe there’s a couple of orc platoons further in the city. They’re probably fighting the Xi that managed to get in or combating the gnome clockwork golems. Hell even the teams of gnomes with their rapid repeaters isn’t something you want to deal with and that’s not even counting the ones probably trying to spot us from the nearby airships.” +“So wait, are there no humans or regular citizens in this place?” you ask. +“Not from what anyone can tell. It’s like the whole place is empty other than the Xi, the gnomes and us. Unless the Telis citizens are all hiding somewhere.” +“Or maybe the gnomes did something to them all. Well it doesn’t matter we need to figure out where the hell the controls are for this thing. We get control and we can get rid of those airships with a lot more ease.” +“Not sure where something like that would be located Emperor.” +“That’s easy, we keep moving towards the areas that have most of the little bastards and their damned contraptions. It’s going to be the most heavily defended place because it’s the most important thing in the world to them.” +“Well then I believe we should take a left down that street over here. Saw a gnome patrol accompanied by two clockworks not long ago.” +“Okay, but when possible we should probably stick to the back alleys. Don’t need one of those airships floating by and spotting us. In fact our best chance is to do this as stealthily as possible. A rare tactic for us I know, but our main task is getting control of this thing.” + +You, Renly and the rest of his platoon make your way towards where you hope some sort of master control is located. Along the way, you see the remnants of where small skirmishes have already taken place. Bodies riddled with bullets or in some cases chopped up. They’re mostly bodies of the Xi, but some of your soldiers as well. You don’t see any gnome casualties other than pieces of their golems. + +The sounds of battle can still be heard throughout the city, but it gets concerning when the sounds get less infrequent, since that means the gnomes are probably mopping up invaders to their city, which means less distraction for them. + +Your attempts at sneaking around are fairly successful. As you stealthily avoid these patrols, you finally see the gnomes and you can’t get over how radically they’ve changed. With their dark red caps, goggles and stylish leather uniforms, they couldn’t look anymore different than their pathetic ancestors that you helped round up centuries ago to have their souls utterly obliterated. + +Really though, after an event like that and who knows what else during the Cataclysm you suppose it shouldn’t be surprising that the gnomes decided they wouldn’t be victims and became hostile towards other races. Let alone rely on other societies to defend them any longer. + +They shaped their own destiny and you can certainly respect and even admire that; after all you never hated them. That was the Emperor. You were just following orders at the time. + +Eventually the gnome patrols are getting too thick and you can’t really properly proceed without engaging the enemy. Just as well, you were getting sick of acting like a shadow. + +“Alright, everyone get ready, because it’s going to be killing time from here on in. I’ll take the lead on this.” You say. +“Emperor, shouldn’t you stay behind us so we can better protect you?” Renly replies. +“While I appreciate the sentiment, I’ve been doing this a lot longer than you have, if anything you all should try to stay behind me and in cover until I clear out most of the rabble. Don’t worry, I may be old, but I’m not out of this yet. And if you all survive this, you’ll all be getting promotions and whatever else I think might be an appropriate reward, so it behooves you all to listen to me if you want to reap the benefits of this situation.” + +With this understanding, Renly and his platoon follow your lead. Still unseen, you take advantage of a group of gnomes tanding around with their clockwork creations. + +You unleash a flurry of fireballs, which not only has the desired effect of killing some of the gnomes outright, but also causing an explosion due to their hand thrown bombs they carry on them The explosion takes care of the golems. + +“That’s one group down, but the rest aren’t going to be as easy!” you say and advance with a shield up. + +Not easy is correct because the little bastards start coming out in full force. You just try not to get surrounded. The unrelenting repeater weapons are bad enough, but the gnomes also come out with weapons that emulate some of your spells! A single gnome who managed to sneak up on two of Renly’s men blasts them with some sort of weapon that emits flames. Renly shoots the gnome in the head before turning his attention to grab one of the repeaters from a nearby dead gnome. + +“They’re all coming out of that big red building, that’s probably where we need to go! Come on!” you shout and take out another golem.” + +During the carnage you think back to how you used to mainly use your sword during battles. During this one, you haven’t even used it yet. In fact you haven’t done so for so long, you wonder if you’d even be able to use it effectively anymore. Granted in this situation like this you’ve practically got no choice but to rely on your magic, still though you miss the good old days. + +The closer you get to the building, the waves of gnomes lessens, until you see one of them close the door just as the last few golems are shot to pieces. The sky above you grows darker and you notice an airship looming overhead. They don’t throw bombs at you, but they certainly unleash a volley of gunfire, which manages to kill another one of Renley’s platoon before he and the rest can get into cover. + +As for you, your shield is working just fine, but you need to get into that building which is probably locked and barricaded. You aren’t going to be able to blast it open with that airship firing at you. +> Refocus the shield to repel the bullets back +Normally you don’t do this, because repelling projectiles actually takes more focus than flinging fireballs or putting up a shield in the first place, but if you can take out all the guns firing on you with their own bullets then you’ll get the breather you need. + +You refocus the shield and sure enough the bullets are repelled back towards the guns that are firing on you. It isn’t an exact hit, but enough of them hit their own guns (or in some cases the gunner) enough that it puts them out of commission, other bullets either go flying off wildly into the air or into other parts of the airship. In any case you hit something that causes problem since you see and hear minor explosions, which the gnomes are probably busily trying to contain. The airship shudders in the sky a bit, but it isn’t falling out of sky, which it probably would have done if you’d lobbed hunks of fire at it. + +Taking advantage of the respite, your soldiers take what explosives they’ve found on the bodies of the gnomes, pile them up against the building’s door and you hurl a ball of fire at it. Naturally it not only explodes spectacularly, but it also succeeds in destroying a couple of golems that were waiting to ambush you. You and the other run inside, before the airship above you manages to get its guns working again. + +When you get inside you see that the building consists of a lot of desks and generally laid out like a bureaucratic office. You briefly think that maybe this was all for nothing and your hunch was wrong, but sure enough when an automated repeated pops up out of the floor and puts several holes into one of Renly’s platoon and more golems appear from other trapdoors in the floor you’re fairly certain you’re still on the right track. + +You and Renly’s ever dwindling platoon take care of your assailants though at this point they’re probably hoping there aren’t too many more. + +“Glad this building doesn’t have multiple floors.” One soldier remarks. +“It still might, those golems came out of the floor. There might be several basement levels.” Renly points out. +“It can’t go too far down, the city is flying in the air now. It’s not going to be a Derro complex.” You say peering door one of the trapdoors. +“Derro?” Renly asks. +“Oh. Before your time I suppose. They were a subterranean race that were primarily hostile isolationists and had a knack for technology. Sort of like the current gnomes I suppose. I always wondered if they were related in some way to be honest.” You answer. +“And they were enemies?” +“Allies actually. Well… such as they were. Anyway I imagine whatever is causing this city to fly would be located right under it, so we might as well start searching there especially since the rest of this building looks more like an oversized office rather than any example of engineering. + +You all descend down one of the trap doors and find yourself in some small narrow corridors. Not so small that you can’t move around, but certainly small enough that you all have to crouch down. Even at the best of times your body aches, this bending and stooping routine just makes it worse for you. The corridors are also filled with a light steam with gears, pumps and other manner of machinery that you assume are keeping this city afloat. A noisy hum and the occasional jarring metal on metal screeches also surround you and you briefly wonder just how much solid stone floor is between you and the sky right now. + +“Guess the gnomes designed this part of the city.” Renly says. +“Never thought I’d say this, but I wish we were kobolds right about now.” Another soldier remarks. +“Alright let’s focus. The good thing about this corridor is I can easily shield us from any attack from the front or the back but you’re all going to have to fire upon on any enemy that attacks us. If I start throwing magic bolts or whatever around here I’m libel to damage something severely and send this thing crashing to the ground with us in it. + +You travel the corridors for what you believe to be an hour at least. It twists and turns, but you remain convinced that SOMEWHERE down here is a control room. In the meantime more gnomes attempt to stop you and while they have better maneuverability your shield continues to protect everyone and you fend off attacks. + +“At least they’re just sticking with guns now.” One of the soldiers says. +“They don’t really have choice, explosives or those flame weapons would damage all these gears that are involved in holding up the place.” Renly remarks. + +While your followers make minor comments about the situation, you begin to notice a slight change in surroundings. The mist that fills the corridors is dissipating, the floors have become steel and now there are actual walls coving the previously exposed engineering. It suddenly occurs to you that the gnomes hadn’t actually finished this place up yet and you are now seeing the areas that took priority. + +“We’re near the control room.” You say. +“We are?” Renly says. +“I’m sure of it.” +“Wouldn’t there be more defenses?” +“I said I think we’re near it, we’re not actually there yet. For all we know the actual control room has shit we’ve never seen before.” You answer. + +“Oh it does, Eternal. It does. Come on in and see.” You hear a voice say nearby. You and the others look around and at each other. + +“Just continue a little bit forward and turn the corner. Don’t worry, you’ve killed all of my people, but then you always were an expert at such things weren’t you?” the voice says. + +When you follow the voice you enter a room filled with a bunch of technical equipment and machines. You no idea what any of it does, but its certainly a technological feat that you’ve only seen matched by Marik when he was growing tank babies. + +Also in the room a single gnome sitting in a chair dressed in the traditional leather uniform you’ve seen others of his kind wearing. He also sports the same bushy facial hair and red cap they all seem to favor. The only main thing that causes him to stand out is that he’s obviously older than the ones you’ve been fighting and he’s wearing explosives around his waist with a wire attached to another device he’s gripping tightly in his hand. + +The other thing that stands out is that he is completely unconcerned about you or your soldiers pointing their weapons at him. + +“You know, this really was one of our greatest works. (Sigh) It’s going to be a shame to destroy it, but anything is better than letting it fall into your hands. Can’t let a gnome killer like you have it can we?” the gnome remarks. +“You speak as if you know me and I don’t mean by my present reputation. You speak as if you know me from the past.” You say. +“Oh not personally, but my family’s ancestors told me stories about you. Yeah, great ancestor Klemto made sure the story got passed down so that something like Gnome’s Home could never happen again. One of the few gnomes you didn’t manage to round up and have systematically slaughtered.” +“Well I see your mind is made up, no point in debating the issue.” You answer. +“Oh no, please I’d LOVE to hear your defense on the matter. I could use a good laugh before I blow us all up.” + +At this point having one of your soldiers shoot him would be counter productive, he’d just release the switch when he died. Rushing the gnome would likely have the same result + +Your only option is to cast a freeze spell and encase his hand in a solid block of ice. The problem with that right now is you’re exhausted. You’d have to stall for a little time so you could muster up the energy to do it right now. + +So you stall for time and engage the gnome in conversation. + +“I was just following orders.” You say. +“Really now? That’s your defense?” the gnome asks. +“It’s not a defense because I don’t think I have anything to defend against. The Emperor…Casimir hated your kind. Not I. Why he hated your people so intensely I cannot say because I never fully understood the depths of it. He gave reasons, but as I said I believe there was more to it. It doesn’t matter though, since I merely acted on his orders.” +“So you were just a blindly loyal soldier just doing your duty eh?” +“At the time yes. Look, if you want me to beg for my life, you’ll not get it here. I didn’t begin my life as an Eternal begging so I’m certainly not going to end my life begging.” + +“I see…I suppose I should’ve known your arrogance and lack of emotions would prevent you from such actions…” the gnome remarks, but you cut him off. +“Funny you should say that. Since I would think someone with the same arrogance and lack of emotions would understand.” You say. +“What?!” +“THIS! This flying fortress! And all your airships! You really expect me to believe you designed them for peaceful purposes?” +“We had to protect ourselves!” +“Against the Xi, yes I can see that, but you’ve been bombing us as well and we didn’t even declare war on you!” +“Bah! You would have eventually! And your pathetic attempt at comparing us bombing your soldiers and you rounding up gnome civilians for slaughter is laughable.” +“I wasn’t actually, I’d say that would be closer to what you did to the original citizens of this city. So what did you do with Telis’ original citizens?” + +The gnome begins to get annoyed. + +“Nothing. This city was always ours!” +“Bullshit. Maybe this place was wrapped in mystery, but not to such a degree that it wasn’t known that humans lived here. Or at least they USED to live here. Just looking at the buildings and one can tell that this place was originally designed for humans rather than the smaller architecture that make up these corridors. So how did you go about it? I’m actually curious how you managed to wipe out an entire city without anyone getting a hint of what was going on. I know from your reputation that you don’t associate with other races any longer so I can only assume that you had the citizens of this city done away with long before you actually moved in and started making this place into a flying city. Perhaps maybe like something similar that was done to the gnomes?” + +The gnome now actually gets off his chair and both of his hands are balled up in anger, which is good since you want him to grip that kill switch as tight as possible. + +“It was a completely different situation!” the gnome exclaims. +“Was it? Your ancestor said we rounded gnomes up to be slaughtered, what he probably didn’t know since he avoided capture is HOW we did it. We didn’t just kill them. We completely obliterated their souls. It’s what the Emperor wanted. Then again, you lot probably didn’t go that far…no magical skill to speak of, I guess that’s why you like your mechanical toys so much…” +“You’re going to pay for your crimes you evil bastard. When I release this switch my only regret is going to be that you won’t suffer!” +“No doubt. But it’s a shame that the real culprit won’t taste your justice after you blow us all up.” +“What’re you talking about?” +“I’m talking about the main executioner. Maybe I rounded some up and killed a few and the Emperor gave the orders, but there was one in particular who was enjoying the job around the clock. She’s still alive too you know, or maybe you didn’t. She isn’t very mobile or social these days. All I’ll say is she’s a svelk and she’s the mother of that bitch that currently runs Lenay, well assuming Lenay hasn’t been overrun by the Xi…” +“ENOUGH! This ends now!” the gnome yells getting ready to release the switch. + +“Truer words have never been spoken.” You say and cast a blast of frost at the gnome’s left hand and fortunately you encase his whole arm in ice before he can release his hand from the switch. You collapse on the floor just from that small feat of magic. You really need to rest. + +The gnome desperately tries to break the ice, but the remaining two soldiers from the platoon restrain and knock him out. + +“Take this little shit topside and throw him off the city. Renly and I will try to figure out the controls to this thing. And do it quickly, that arm won’t stay frozen and there still might be some gnomes running around.” You say and drag yourself to sit up against a nearby wall. + +“Emperor are you okay?!” Renly asks. +“I’m fine. Just very very tired. And unfortunately my work isn’t even done yet…” you answer. + +“But just maybe this thing will make it easier at least.” +> Years pass... +Year 560 + +“Emperor, the Xi have made their first incursions into Quala.” David remarks. +“(Sigh) It was only a matter of time I suppose. The damn bugs just can’t seem to be wiped out. Even with this floating fortress and the new airships we created. Have we lost Arat completely?” +“No, but the only city left is Regnik and its slowly in danger of becoming overrun. It probably won’t last another week despite the carpet-bombing we’ve done around the area. Quala is having problems as well and last reports stated that Warlord Sprog fell in battle.” + +You sometimes wonder if the Xi are some sort force of nature taking everything back from the others races that have caused so much turmoil and strife. Like the other races had their day in the sun at some point and now it is the time of the Xi to rise to power. Of course you’ve never been one for giving into fate or “destiny”, so your main concern is how to deal with this seemingly unstoppable foe. + +Fortunately after you took Telis (Now called Apex) from the gnomes, you found some rather interesting notes on how it might be possible and your brightest and best have been attempting to decipher them. + +Technology wasn’t the only thing the gnomes were working on; they were also working on a bunch of stuff to do with biology. Apparently they had plans to design and release some sort of germ that would kill all the Xi. + +Sounds like a blessing, but the problem is you have no idea how long that’s going to take. You have your inventors and doctors and wise people, but honestly they’re only going by a few found pieces of scraps and half thought out plans from a race of people now no longer around. Nobody has even had this sort of idea before; using unseen organism as weapons. But then nobody had the idea to create weapons that could destroy entire buildings or allow one unskilled peasant to murder an entire squad of swordsmen at one time either. + +In the meantime, you’re still left with the same problem. You have to fend off the Xi from destroying the Empire. You’re doing your best, but you have to admit, the outlook is grim. Just as you’re about to give David your list of commands for the day and retire to your private abode, David tells you that you have an audience today. + +“Audience? With who? I’m the only ruler left in the land and I doubt very seriously the Xi are wanting to speak with me about peace negotiations.” You say. +“No, it’s a regular citizen Emperor and know normally you don’t hold such audiences, but I thought in her case you might. It’s Jennifer.” David replies. +“Really? Well what does she want?” +“She didn’t say, other than wanting to see you. Should I tell her to reschedule?” +“No, I suppose I can spare the time to see what she wants and I could use a diversion from this Xi situation anyway.” + +David nods and fetches Jennifer from the next room. You haven’t seen her in a while, but she still looks about the same, just a few extra gray hairs. You have to admit you’re mildly glad to see her after dealing with the Xi day in day out. After a few pleasant greetings you both go back to your private chambers to speak. + +“So…it’s been a long time.” You say. +“It’s been about ten years since we were in the same room together.” Jennifer answers. +“Has it? Time really flies. As you probably know I’ve been a little busy. Apologies for not keeping in better contact.” +“No, it’s fine. Seriously, you’re the Emperor and keeping us all safe from hostile forces is a full time job. I always knew better than to expect that you’d be able to stay on constant contact.” +“Glad you understand. So where’s your family?” +“They are on the surface, my son really wanted to see the flying city, but his father…well let’s just say he wasn’t fond of the idea.” Jennifer says with a bit of hesitancy. It’s apparent that not everything is well with her marriage, but you don’t want to pry. +“I see…well tell your son that the Emperor has said he can see it any time its convenient. It isn’t like the place is off limits, just difficult to get to I suppose.” +“Indeed. Tickets for an airship here are expensive and not many have that sort of money to throw around anymore. Anyway about why I’m here, I’ve been working on another book.” +“Another one? So what is this one about?” +“About you actually. I need your input with it obviously considering you’re the main subject.” +“A book about me huh? Any reason why you wanted to write such a book?” +“Why wouldn’t I? You’re only one of the most important people in history. I mean there needs to be records of this for when…I mean so people don’t forget your deeds. I mean sometimes I have to argue with idiots at the museum who don’t know how good you’ve made things for them! At one time people used to view the Old Empire exhibit with wonder and questions. Now it seems all some of them want to do is criticize it and claim it’s nothing more than a pile of falsehoods and lies! Some of these dissidents have even been claiming this flying city is just an example of how you believe you’re so much better than they are!” +“Hmm, haven’t heard about too much dissident activity for quiet some time, but then the Eyes are stretched pretty thin these days.” +“Well some of these morons that enter the museum need to be rounded up! You’re not better than them because of a flying city; you’re better than them for a whole bunch of other reasons! Being a strong leader and making the tough decisions that in the long run are best for all of us! I intend for my book to reinforce the needed understanding of why the things you do are completely necessary. I’ve already managed to interview some people that have seen your greatness in action like Captain Renly and Admiral Len. Their testimony and others will make great additions, but the words from your own lips will be what’s most important!” + +You’ve seen Jennifer get excited and fired up about things in the past, but you sort of figured such excitement would never be reserved for anything related to you ever again. You had thought that Jennifer had long since outgrown her “worship” of you when she got married and had a family, but either it never left and had been dormant or something has changed to cause it to revive such feelings again. + +And if you had to guess you imagine it might have something to do with her marriage. + +“Jennifer, while I’ve always appreciated your support, I doubt if any book is going to change a lot of minds. You even said not many people have disposable income these days to buy luxury items. You can’t let every loudmouth with an opinion get you so upset. I mean I’m glad you told me, and I’ll even get Crowley to have some Eyes look into matter and see if it’s a potential larger problem, but I think you’re really upset about something else.” +“Of course I am! I’m upset because I made the wrong choice! I followed some silly notion of wanting a normal life! I’m married to a man who has successfully sickened me with his criticism of the government and you to the point where I cannot even stand his touch anymore! I should’ve tried harder to serve you! I should’ve stayed with you! By your side! That’s where I belonged! I was a Mol and a Mol has always served their ruler loyally in whatever capacity they can!” Jennifer exclaims + +You have no words. Even if you the whole story you probably still wouldn’t have the words. How can you condemn someone who obviously thinks so highly of you? + +If you had more of an ego you’d just take advantage of the situation and let Jennifer write her book and fill it with propaganda and have the book be distributed for free, but you can’t help being a little grounded in reality even if it means shooting yourself in the foot. + +While you don’t scold Jennifer for her slightly misguided loyalty, you do feel she has the right to know the whole truth so you start by telling the thing you never told anyone before. + +“You know, Jacob Mol was loyal to the Empire, but not to the Emperor. Well at least not towards the end.” You say. +“What?” Jennifer asks. +“He personally killed the Emperor Casimir. Shot him in the back actually.” + +Jennifer is speechless. + +“Oh don’t judge your ancestor too harshly, he was only helping me at the time since I was doing a miserable job of attempting to kill the Emperor. Me and the true late svelk ruler of Lenay, Semra. It was a group effort I suppose and to be fair, Casimir was planning to have me killed despite my lifetime of loyalty.” + +Jennifer continues to remain speechless. + +“When we killed the Emperor, he unleashed a magic curse when he died which fucked up the rest of the land in various ways, regular folks know that event best as the Cataclysm.” + +Jennifer is finally about to speak, but you put up your hand to let her know one more thing. + +“The kicker of all this? A few years before Semra died she even told me the Xi were living undisturbed deep underground and it was only because of all the violent earthquakes that they turned their attention to the surface. ALL of what’s going on right now is my fault. Hell, even the fact that the gnomes were also planning to bomb us into oblivion is my fault. I can tell you more about that gruesomeness though and you could even get Renly to confirm it since he was there when one of those red capped bastards confronted me about it. I’m an usurper. A tyrant. A killer. And worse. And you know what? I’m perfectly fine with that.” + +You move closer to Jennifer. + +“Now then…how do you THINK the citizens would REALLY feel about their strong leader if they knew the truth from my own lips?” + +Jennifer moves her own face closer to yours. + +“It doesn’t matter, because I’m writing the damn thing how I want to.” Jennifer remarks. +“So true history doesn’t matter to you despite being dedicated to it?” +“History is written by those in power and the winners. Perhaps some of what you told me was a surprise, but do you think I didn’t have my suspicions that you probably had something to do with the death of the old Emperor? Your continued vagueness of the topic even years later was a give away. I’m not stupid. I know what you think of me. You probably believe me to be a mindless fanatic at worst or a misguided loyalist at best, but you couldn’t be more wrong. I am a true patriot. My family always has been. You even said it yourself my ancestor Jacob was loyal to the Empire, but he obviously saw its ruler as lacking to its greatness. He saw that greatness in YOU, otherwise he wouldn’t have helped you overthrow the Republic or even warn Quintus that you were going to kill him.” + +Jennifer grabs your hand. + +“I still see that greatness in you. I always have. If I didn’t, I wouldn’t be here. Let me be by your side again. Like I should’ve been. Don’t send me back down to the surface. Let me stay and help.” + +Jennifer looks at you hopefully and preying upon that small part of you that actually does have feelings. It’s just too bad; you don’t feel the same strong feelings as she does for you. +> Let Jennifer stay +Again you think: How can you really punish such dedication? Casimir tried to kill you for similar loyalty and while you wouldn’t kill Jennifer, sending her away would most certainly be the same thing to her. + +While you are lucky to have someone so dedicated and even though she explained herself somewhat, you don’t really understand why. Then again, you never fully understood Semra’s obsession for you either. Some motives only make sense to the mind that creates them. + +“Very well. I will find a place for you, but what of your son? Surely you want your son don’t you?” you ask. +“Yes! Yes of course I do. It’s just if I left him he probably wouldn’t care at this point, but he’d make things difficult and probably try to stop me if I tried to take our son Marcus with me. Then there’s Marcus to think about, I can’t reasonably whisk him away from his father. He still loves him. So um, can you arrange for something to happen to my husband? +“Wait…you want me to kill him?” You ask. +“Well…I mean…(Sigh) I dunno…” +“You better make up your mind Jennifer, because once its done, its permanent you know.” +“I know! I know! Alright…” Jennifer says and starts mumbling to herself and staring upward as if she’s weighing all the pros and cons. After a few seconds, she gives you her answer. + +“Okay, do it. Kill him.” +“Very well. He must’ve really pissed you off.” +“It’s for the best in the long run. He poisons my son’s mind with anti-Empire ideology at times. He’s practically a dissident, he might as well die.” Jennifer says with absolute certainty. + +Though you can tell in her eyes that while she’s successfully convinced herself of that, there’s still some tiny part of her that is sad her marriage has come to this. + +Strangely, you feel a little odd doing this too. You can’t even begin to count how many deaths you’ve inflicted or ordered and yet this one feels weird to you. You’ve never even met the guy, but you’re essentially you’re going to be murdering him and “taking” his wife and son. On the scale of things its a far cry from orchestrated genocide of an entire race, and granted you aren’t struggling with it like before you decided to kill Casimir, but its just something that makes you feel a little off. + +You have an Eye take care of the situation and to make it look like an accident for the boy’s sake. It naturally all goes off fairly quickly and successfully. It’s barely even noticed, after all what’s one “accidental” death of an average citizen compared to the thousands dying on the front lines with the Xi every day? + +After a funeral (again, to keep up appearances for the boy) and a trip back to the surface, Jennifer returns to Apex with Marcus who is taking his father’s death pretty well, though you imagine Jennifer has probably been trying to mold the boy to her liking. + +As for your other promise to Jennifer, you aren’t really sure how to proceed, mainly because you don’t really have much for her to do. You already have your official advisors and generals and the like. To be honest Jennifer was probably serving you well enough as a propaganda outlet with her museum constantly promoting Empire values, history and such. + +So you leave her to continue such work. She still owns the museum of course, but has someone else run it now. In the meantime she works on the thing that originally brought her back to you in the first place, her new book. + +Of course this involves several sessions of her asking you some questions and going over the book’s content. And sure enough, you and Jennifer do experience a bit of rekindled closeness during such time. + +It’s not the same as it was, and you’ll never feel as strongly for her as you did for Alison, but you’ve learned to enjoy the moments again if only because the Xi problem dominates the most of your thoughts and blocking out the constant pain your body is in makes up the rest. + +In a couple weeks you receive word from one of your scientists that in order to work on the disease to kill the Xi, experiments are going to have to be done on captured Xi. Naturally you agree that a few forces can be set-aside for capture missions and think nothing more of it. + +When you briefly mention this to Jennifer she has another perspective on the situation. + +“Experiments on the Xi huh? Sure that’s a good idea?” Jennifer asks. +“Well I’d rather that our armies just focused on killing them, but if capturing a few of them is going to lead to something that will eventually kill all of them, then I’m all for it. Don’t worry, every precaution is going to be in place for our scientists.” +“That’s not what I mean. I mean are you sure they should just be experimenting on the Xi?” +“Who else would they be experimenting on?” +“Well, our own people for one. How do we know this germ or whatever is going to just affect the Xi? I’ve had an opportunity to read copies of some of those notes that the gnomes left while I’ve been up here in Apex and maybe your other people missed something, but I got the impression that the gnomes were planning to design something that wasn’t going to just wipe out the Xi.” + +It’s odd, but that had completely slipped your mind. You figured the gnomes were just going to bomb you out of existence or something similar. Makes sense that if they planned biological warfare on a grand scale for the Xi, they’d do it to the Empire as well. + +“That’s good thinking…so you believe we should what? Round up some folks for experimentation?” you ask. +“Well it couldn’t hurt. I mean we don’t want to release something that’s going to kill us all.” Jennifer replies. +“Okay, well I’ll let them know immediately to start emptying out the prisons for this project. Pretty sure there’s more than enough for a good diverse mix of our population.” +“You think?” +“Well mostly humans, but thanks to their violent personalities, there’s more than enough kobold and orc criminals in the prison system.” +“What about elves?” +“Dunno. They don’t tend to last long in prison from what I’ve heard. I guess we’ll take our chances if we don’t have a lot. I’m sure it’ll be fine.” + +You thank Jennifer who is very happy that you’re pleased with her and begins discussing some parts of her book again. + +Year 564 + +You look over your balcony and stare at the grand view of the surface below. The Xi have been starting to establish great hills of earth where a central hive is located. This is a good thing since it makes targeting key locations a lot easier. + +Small porcelain bombs of infection meant for the Xi are going to be dropped from Airships anywhere the Xi are greatly located. There are even kobold commandos that will be doing their best to deliver the disease more directly. (Turned out the little scalies were the most resistant to the disease in the first place) + +It all rides on this plan and you certainly hope it will work. + +Jennifer comes to see you and holds your hand. As gentle as she is you still feels a sharp ache going up your arm causing slight recoil of it. + +“Damn it. I used to be so young and strong once. Now I’m just this…old bag of broken bones.” You remark. +“You’re the Emperor.” Jennifer says. +“Well for now anyway. Won’t be long before that won’t be the case. Just hope this plan works so I’ll be remembered if only for a little while longer.” +“Of course it will work.” + +You flash a smile at Jennifer who smiles back. In silence, the pair of you watches an airship in the distance drop its plague bombs onto a Xi hill before returning back inside. + +Weeks pass and you continue to receive steady reports of large numbers of dead Xi bodies being found and Xi attacks dropping off completely in places. The plague has worked. + +Better yet, you’re not getting reports of mass sickness from your own people. Well there have been reports of your elven citizens suddenly getting sick, but you can’t save everyone. + +It’s still a long road ahead to rebuild the massive damage the Xi did, but this is a positive step in the right direction. Jennifer’s book “Eternal Leader”, which had been released shortly before the bug bombing suddenly sees an increase in popularity and sales. + +Celebrating good fortune all around, you officially make Jennifer your consort making her very happy. Which technically makes her son your heir. You don’t have much time to teach him the ins and outs of rulership. In fact in your condition you can’t even teach him the art of combat or magic, but Jennifer had him enrolled in a military school shortly after she made her home in Apex (You’ve barely even seen the boy), so you’re guessing he’ll be okay in that department. After all, it isn’t like the old days now. Combat is becoming an increasingly non-personal affair. How you’ve defeated the Xi is proof of that. + +Plus Jennifer will probably do her best to guide him. She’s already proven adept in the advisory role. + +You don’t know how long you have left in this world, but you think you’ll be taking it easy for a while. + +And why the hell not? You’re the Emperor.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 560 + +“Emperor, the Xi have made their first incursions into Quala.” David remarks. +“(Sigh) It was only a matter of time I suppose. The damn bugs just can’t seem to be wiped out. Even with this floating fortress and the new airships we created. Have we lost Arat completely?” +“No, but the only city left is Regnik and its slowly in danger of becoming overrun. It probably won’t last another week despite the carpet-bombing we’ve done around the area. Quala is having problems as well and last reports stated that Warlord Sprog fell in battle.” + +You sometimes wonder if the Xi are some sort force of nature taking everything back from the others races that have caused so much turmoil and strife. Like the other races had their day in the sun at some point and now it is the time of the Xi to rise to power. Of course you’ve never been one for giving into fate or “destiny”, so your main concern is how to deal with this seemingly unstoppable foe. + +Fortunately after you took Telis (Now called Apex) from the gnomes, you found some rather interesting notes on how it might be possible and your brightest and best have been attempting to decipher them. + +Technology wasn’t the only thing the gnomes were working on; they were also working on a bunch of stuff to do with biology. Apparently they had plans to design and release some sort of germ that would kill all the Xi. + +Sounds like a blessing, but the problem is you have no idea how long that’s going to take. You have your inventors and doctors and wise people, but honestly they’re only going by a few found pieces of scraps and half thought out plans from a race of people now no longer around. Nobody has even had this sort of idea before; using unseen organism as weapons. But then nobody had the idea to create weapons that could destroy entire buildings or allow one unskilled peasant to murder an entire squad of swordsmen at one time either. + +In the meantime, you’re still left with the same problem. You have to fend off the Xi from destroying the Empire. You’re doing your best, but you have to admit, the outlook is grim. Just as you’re about to give David your list of commands for the day and retire to your private abode, David tells you that you have an audience today. + +“Audience? With who? I’m the only ruler left in the land and I doubt very seriously the Xi are wanting to speak with me about peace negotiations.” You say. +“No, it’s a regular citizen Emperor and know normally you don’t hold such audiences, but I thought in her case you might. It’s Jennifer.” David replies. +“Really? Well what does she want?” +“She didn’t say, other than wanting to see you. Should I tell her to reschedule?” +“No, I suppose I can spare the time to see what she wants and I could use a diversion from this Xi situation anyway.” + +David nods and fetches Jennifer from the next room. You haven’t seen her in a while, but she still looks about the same, just a few extra gray hairs. You have to admit you’re mildly glad to see her after dealing with the Xi day in day out. After a few pleasant greetings you both go back to your private chambers to speak. + +“So…it’s been a long time.” You say. +“It’s been about ten years since we were in the same room together.” Jennifer answers. +“Has it? Time really flies. As you probably know I’ve been a little busy. Apologies for not keeping in better contact.” +“No, it’s fine. Seriously, you’re the Emperor and keeping us all safe from hostile forces is a full time job. I always knew better than to expect that you’d be able to stay on constant contact.” +“Glad you understand. So where’s your family?” +“They are on the surface, my son really wanted to see the flying city, but his father…well let’s just say he wasn’t fond of the idea.” Jennifer says with a bit of hesitancy. It’s apparent that not everything is well with her marriage, but you don’t want to pry. +“I see…well tell your son that the Emperor has said he can see it any time its convenient. It isn’t like the place is off limits, just difficult to get to I suppose.” +“Indeed. Tickets for an airship here are expensive and not many have that sort of money to throw around anymore. Anyway about why I’m here, I’ve been working on another book.” +“Another one? So what is this one about?” +“About you actually. I need your input with it obviously considering you’re the main subject.” +“A book about me huh? Any reason why you wanted to write such a book?” +“Why wouldn’t I? You’re only one of the most important people in history. I mean there needs to be records of this for when…I mean so people don’t forget your deeds. I mean sometimes I have to argue with idiots at the museum who don’t know how good you’ve made things for them! At one time people used to view the Old Empire exhibit with wonder and questions. Now it seems all some of them want to do is criticize it and claim it’s nothing more than a pile of falsehoods and lies! Some of these dissidents have even been claiming this flying city is just an example of how you believe you’re so much better than they are!” +“Hmm, haven’t heard about too much dissident activity for quiet some time, but then the Eyes are stretched pretty thin these days.” +“Well some of these morons that enter the museum need to be rounded up! You’re not better than them because of a flying city; you’re better than them for a whole bunch of other reasons! Being a strong leader and making the tough decisions that in the long run are best for all of us! I intend for my book to reinforce the needed understanding of why the things you do are completely necessary. I’ve already managed to interview some people that have seen your greatness in action like Captain Renly and Admiral Len. Their testimony and others will make great additions, but the words from your own lips will be what’s most important!” + +You’ve seen Jennifer get excited and fired up about things in the past, but you sort of figured such excitement would never be reserved for anything related to you ever again. You had thought that Jennifer had long since outgrown her “worship” of you when she got married and had a family, but either it never left and had been dormant or something has changed to cause it to revive such feelings again. + +And if you had to guess you imagine it might have something to do with her marriage. + +“Jennifer, while I’ve always appreciated your support, I doubt if any book is going to change a lot of minds. You even said not many people have disposable income these days to buy luxury items. You can’t let every loudmouth with an opinion get you so upset. I mean I’m glad you told me, and I’ll even get Crowley to have some Eyes look into matter and see if it’s a potential larger problem, but I think you’re really upset about something else.” +“Of course I am! I’m upset because I made the wrong choice! I followed some silly notion of wanting a normal life! I’m married to a man who has successfully sickened me with his criticism of the government and you to the point where I cannot even stand his touch anymore! I should’ve tried harder to serve you! I should’ve stayed with you! By your side! That’s where I belonged! I was a Mol and a Mol has always served their ruler loyally in whatever capacity they can!” Jennifer exclaims + +You have no words. Even if you the whole story you probably still wouldn’t have the words. How can you condemn someone who obviously thinks so highly of you? + +If you had more of an ego you’d just take advantage of the situation and let Jennifer write her book and fill it with propaganda and have the book be distributed for free, but you can’t help being a little grounded in reality even if it means shooting yourself in the foot. + +While you don’t scold Jennifer for her slightly misguided loyalty, you do feel she has the right to know the whole truth so you start by telling the thing you never told anyone before. + +“You know, Jacob Mol was loyal to the Empire, but not to the Emperor. Well at least not towards the end.” You say. +“What?” Jennifer asks. +“He personally killed the Emperor Casimir. Shot him in the back actually.” + +Jennifer is speechless. + +“Oh don’t judge your ancestor too harshly, he was only helping me at the time since I was doing a miserable job of attempting to kill the Emperor. Me and the true late svelk ruler of Lenay, Semra. It was a group effort I suppose and to be fair, Casimir was planning to have me killed despite my lifetime of loyalty.” + +Jennifer continues to remain speechless. + +“When we killed the Emperor, he unleashed a magic curse when he died which fucked up the rest of the land in various ways, regular folks know that event best as the Cataclysm.” + +Jennifer is finally about to speak, but you put up your hand to let her know one more thing. + +“The kicker of all this? A few years before Semra died she even told me the Xi were living undisturbed deep underground and it was only because of all the violent earthquakes that they turned their attention to the surface. ALL of what’s going on right now is my fault. Hell, even the fact that the gnomes were also planning to bomb us into oblivion is my fault. I can tell you more about that gruesomeness though and you could even get Renly to confirm it since he was there when one of those red capped bastards confronted me about it. I’m an usurper. A tyrant. A killer. And worse. And you know what? I’m perfectly fine with that.” + +You move closer to Jennifer. + +“Now then…how do you THINK the citizens would REALLY feel about their strong leader if they knew the truth from my own lips?” + +Jennifer moves her own face closer to yours. + +“It doesn’t matter, because I’m writing the damn thing how I want to.” Jennifer remarks. +“So true history doesn’t matter to you despite being dedicated to it?” +“History is written by those in power and the winners. Perhaps some of what you told me was a surprise, but do you think I didn’t have my suspicions that you probably had something to do with the death of the old Emperor? Your continued vagueness of the topic even years later was a give away. I’m not stupid. I know what you think of me. You probably believe me to be a mindless fanatic at worst or a misguided loyalist at best, but you couldn’t be more wrong. I am a true patriot. My family always has been. You even said it yourself my ancestor Jacob was loyal to the Empire, but he obviously saw its ruler as lacking to its greatness. He saw that greatness in YOU, otherwise he wouldn’t have helped you overthrow the Republic or even warn Quintus that you were going to kill him.” + +Jennifer grabs your hand. + +“I still see that greatness in you. I always have. If I didn’t, I wouldn’t be here. Let me be by your side again. Like I should’ve been. Don’t send me back down to the surface. Let me stay and help.” + +Jennifer looks at you hopefully and preying upon that small part of you that actually does have feelings. It’s just too bad; you don’t feel the same strong feelings as she does for you. +> Turn her away +While you might have some sympathy for Jennifer, honestly you don’t see any benefit of her being by your side. Are you supposed to just kill her husband and marry her or something? If Jennifer is having marital problems or going through a mid life crisis of some sort she’s going to have to work it out herself because you really haven’t the time or the patience for any of this sort of drama, you’ve got so much more on your mind right now. You don’t have a place for her in your cabinet and you don’t feel the same way that she feels about you and you’re not going to pretend otherwise. + +“Jennifer, I appreciate your loyalty and your honesty. You will always be someone I have a certain fondness for, but you’re already serving the Empire and me well enough with your museum. I have no place for you here. Go home. Go back to your family and work it out with your husband or divorce him, whatever you wish.” + +Jennifer is shocked by your response. She probably was so sure that you wouldn’t turn her away due to your history together. + +“You…you’re turning me away?” Jennifer asks. +“I’m turning your proposal away. Look, we had our time together, but that time has passed and there is no point in going back to that. Nowadays, my mind is preoccupied with the Xi, my body is in constant pain, and to be honest I’m probably not going to live too much longer. You still have a long life ahead of you, enjoy it while you can. Don’t squander it with some delusional concept of loyalty and duty. I know you’re probably surprised to hear someone like me say that, but I’m speaking from personal experience. I spent a good chunk of my life serving a man and a system that ultimately cared nothing for me. Then I was locked in a fucking magical coffin for five centuries. Now towards the end of my life, I’ve got all the freedom and choice in the world as Emperor, yet I can’t really enjoy any of it because I’m an ancient pile of broken bones. Can’t even hold a sword for very long anymore, let alone practice with one.” +“I could…” Jennifer starts to say, but you interrupt. +“No. You CAN’T help. Not with this. What I want isn’t obtainable. I want my youth back. I want MY Empire back. I want my Alison back. You can’t provide any of these. Everything I know is dead and has been for quite some time and the only thing keeping me going is my stubborn innate will to survive and to win. I can’t let the Xi beat me, so I will see this through for as long as I can. But you can’t help me with that either. So as I have said, go back Jennifer. Live your own life. You did it before I came into your life and you were doing it after we parted ways years ago. You can easily do it again. I know you’re strong enough to do so.” + +Jennifer’s eyes are watered up with tears, she’s trying very hard not to cry, but she’s failing. You touch her shoulder. + +“Even Jacob knew when to stop serving his ruler.” You say. + +Jennifer wipes away her tears and sniffles a bit. It takes her a moment to compose herself, but eventually she does and gives you a serious look. You expect her to either start cussing you out or telling you that she understands. She surprises you again. + +“I will go my Emperor. (sniffle) If you say I have no place here, then I shall redouble my efforts to prove myself.” Jennifer says. +“Jennifer, that’s not what I meant…” +“No, I understand. My place is at the museum and educating the ignorant masses and making them see the light of your greatness. I will continue to work on my book and I will distribute it throughout the Empire so that everyone will know of your hardships and the sacrifices you made and continue to make to keep us all safe.” + +You don’t really have a response. You can see she isn’t going to be swayed despite your best efforts to get through to her. + +“Thank you, my Emperor. I see what must be done now.” Jennifer says, grabs your hand one last time and kisses it before leaving. + +And you are alone again. + +For a while you ponder what Jennifer will do or what she has planned. You wonder if maybe you should’ve just indulged the girl and allowed her to stay. Would it really have been an inconvenience? Maybe, maybe not, in any case it’s done and after a short rest you return to the business of combating the Xi. + +A few weeks later you receive word from one of your scientists that in order to work on the disease to kill the Xi, experiments are going to have to be done on captured Xi. Naturally you agree that a few forces can be set-aside for capture missions and think nothing more of it. + +Life continues much as it always has for you. + +Year 563 + +You look over your balcony and stare at the grand view of the surface below. Complete and utter desolation of what remains of your Empire. + +You had the plague released to kill the Xi a year ago and its affects are still being felt. Small porcelain bombs of infection meant for the Xi dropped from airships ended up doing their job well enough, but unfortunately your scientists failed to take extra precautions. + +The plague mutated or evolved, or whatever it did, it spread and infected your people as well. It wasn’t noticeable at first, but eventually hundreds followed by thousands of Empire citizens were sick and eventually dying. Rask, Quala, Nalin, nowhere was safe even a small case hit Apex. Your closest advisor David died of it just recently. Oddly you haven’t got sick despite suffering from your increasing frailties of old age. Not even a symptom. Perhaps you have your Eternal roots to thank for such immunities. + +Elves were hit the hardest by the disease whenever they caught it. There almost aren’t even many left now. Even as resilient as orcs normally are, they’ve been suffering from the plague as well. The only ones who seem to be doing okay are the kobolds of all beings. If the plague continues to be as effective as it has been, that’s all your Empire will consist of. + +If the plague wasn’t enough, a lot of those that haven’t fallen ill have decided to blame you personally for all this. You’ve got mass riots all across the Empire, despite the Eyes valiantly attempting to maintain control of the situation. You’re just glad Sightmaster Crowley didn’t succumb to the plague (yet). + +And to top it all a small group of your citizens have taken it upon themselves to enact their own brand of vigilante justice on dissidents. This group is lead by Jennifer of all people. She finished her book called “Eternal Defender” and distributed it for free throughout the Empire, well as much as it could be under the circumstances. It doesn’t really matter though since the group actively goes around like religious missionaries preaching about your “virtues” and even that the plague is evidence of how the unworthy are being culled from the true believers. From what you’ve heard, the museum she once ran is now practically a temple and her husband is dead. (You have no idea how) + +You do nothing to stop her delusions or her group. It wouldn’t matter and on a practical level she’s helping contain the chaos. That’s all she ever wanted, to help. You can imagine that she’s out there night and day preaching fanaticism in your name and hoping that it will somehow please you and invite her back to Apex and “ascend to the heavens.” + +That won’t happen though. Nowadays you just want to live out the rest of your years in solitude. You did everything you could to resurrect the Empire, and just as you did over five centuries ago, you’ve practically destroyed it again. Makes you wonder what the hell the point was. + +You look forward to the day when you’re free of this damn broken down old body and this world. You’re tired of being Emperor. It hasn’t been any fun, but then maybe it wasn’t supposed to be. Maybe your “quest” to be Emperor was a lot more desirable than the actual goal. Which makes your decision to help assassinate Casimir an example of complete foolishness on your part. Perhaps it would’ve been better for the Empire if you had just let Casimir kill you…if that is indeed what he had in store for you. You’ve allowed yourself believe that was the case and it probably was, but still…there’s that one part of you that has always wondered if Semra wasn’t just lying and you fell for it. + +If she was lying, then she got the last laugh on you. + +“Wait a minute…no she didn’t. She’s fucking dead and I’m still here. She got eaten by the damn Xi.” You say to yourself then you think about that a little longer. + +You think about how they must’ve easily eviscerated her withered old helpless body. Probably dissolving her insides, sucking them up and then taking the bloody slop back to their Xi maggot babies to feed on via regurgitation. Leaving nothing more than a husk behind. Everything she was just gone, and in such an undignified manner and how she must’ve suffered the entire time. + +Then you start to laugh. + +You laugh for a long time…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Normally you don’t do this, because repelling projectiles actually takes more focus than flinging fireballs or putting up a shield in the first place, but if you can take out all the guns firing on you with their own bullets then you’ll get the breather you need. + +You refocus the shield and sure enough the bullets are repelled back towards the guns that are firing on you. It isn’t an exact hit, but enough of them hit their own guns (or in some cases the gunner) enough that it puts them out of commission, other bullets either go flying off wildly into the air or into other parts of the airship. In any case you hit something that causes problem since you see and hear minor explosions, which the gnomes are probably busily trying to contain. The airship shudders in the sky a bit, but it isn’t falling out of sky, which it probably would have done if you’d lobbed hunks of fire at it. + +Taking advantage of the respite, your soldiers take what explosives they’ve found on the bodies of the gnomes, pile them up against the building’s door and you hurl a ball of fire at it. Naturally it not only explodes spectacularly, but it also succeeds in destroying a couple of golems that were waiting to ambush you. You and the other run inside, before the airship above you manages to get its guns working again. + +When you get inside you see that the building consists of a lot of desks and generally laid out like a bureaucratic office. You briefly think that maybe this was all for nothing and your hunch was wrong, but sure enough when an automated repeated pops up out of the floor and puts several holes into one of Renly’s platoon and more golems appear from other trapdoors in the floor you’re fairly certain you’re still on the right track. + +You and Renly’s ever dwindling platoon take care of your assailants though at this point they’re probably hoping there aren’t too many more. + +“Glad this building doesn’t have multiple floors.” One soldier remarks. +“It still might, those golems came out of the floor. There might be several basement levels.” Renly points out. +“It can’t go too far down, the city is flying in the air now. It’s not going to be a Derro complex.” You say peering door one of the trapdoors. +“Derro?” Renly asks. +“Oh. Before your time I suppose. They were a subterranean race that were primarily hostile isolationists and had a knack for technology. Sort of like the current gnomes I suppose. I always wondered if they were related in some way to be honest.” You answer. +“And they were enemies?” +“Allies actually. Well… such as they were. Anyway I imagine whatever is causing this city to fly would be located right under it, so we might as well start searching there especially since the rest of this building looks more like an oversized office rather than any example of engineering. + +You all descend down one of the trap doors and find yourself in some small narrow corridors. Not so small that you can’t move around, but certainly small enough that you all have to crouch down. Even at the best of times your body aches, this bending and stooping routine just makes it worse for you. The corridors are also filled with a light steam with gears, pumps and other manner of machinery that you assume are keeping this city afloat. A noisy hum and the occasional jarring metal on metal screeches also surround you and you briefly wonder just how much solid stone floor is between you and the sky right now. + +“Guess the gnomes designed this part of the city.” Renly says. +“Never thought I’d say this, but I wish we were kobolds right about now.” Another soldier remarks. +“Alright let’s focus. The good thing about this corridor is I can easily shield us from any attack from the front or the back but you’re all going to have to fire upon on any enemy that attacks us. If I start throwing magic bolts or whatever around here I’m libel to damage something severely and send this thing crashing to the ground with us in it. + +You travel the corridors for what you believe to be an hour at least. It twists and turns, but you remain convinced that SOMEWHERE down here is a control room. In the meantime more gnomes attempt to stop you and while they have better maneuverability your shield continues to protect everyone and you fend off attacks. + +“At least they’re just sticking with guns now.” One of the soldiers says. +“They don’t really have choice, explosives or those flame weapons would damage all these gears that are involved in holding up the place.” Renly remarks. + +While your followers make minor comments about the situation, you begin to notice a slight change in surroundings. The mist that fills the corridors is dissipating, the floors have become steel and now there are actual walls coving the previously exposed engineering. It suddenly occurs to you that the gnomes hadn’t actually finished this place up yet and you are now seeing the areas that took priority. + +“We’re near the control room.” You say. +“We are?” Renly says. +“I’m sure of it.” +“Wouldn’t there be more defenses?” +“I said I think we’re near it, we’re not actually there yet. For all we know the actual control room has shit we’ve never seen before.” You answer. + +“Oh it does, Eternal. It does. Come on in and see.” You hear a voice say nearby. You and the others look around and at each other. + +“Just continue a little bit forward and turn the corner. Don’t worry, you’ve killed all of my people, but then you always were an expert at such things weren’t you?” the voice says. + +When you follow the voice you enter a room filled with a bunch of technical equipment and machines. You no idea what any of it does, but its certainly a technological feat that you’ve only seen matched by Marik when he was growing tank babies. + +Also in the room a single gnome sitting in a chair dressed in the traditional leather uniform you’ve seen others of his kind wearing. He also sports the same bushy facial hair and red cap they all seem to favor. The only main thing that causes him to stand out is that he’s obviously older than the ones you’ve been fighting and he’s wearing explosives around his waist with a wire attached to another device he’s gripping tightly in his hand. + +The other thing that stands out is that he is completely unconcerned about you or your soldiers pointing their weapons at him. + +“You know, this really was one of our greatest works. (Sigh) It’s going to be a shame to destroy it, but anything is better than letting it fall into your hands. Can’t let a gnome killer like you have it can we?” the gnome remarks. +“You speak as if you know me and I don’t mean by my present reputation. You speak as if you know me from the past.” You say. +“Oh not personally, but my family’s ancestors told me stories about you. Yeah, great ancestor Klemto made sure the story got passed down so that something like Gnome’s Home could never happen again. One of the few gnomes you didn’t manage to round up and have systematically slaughtered.” +“Well I see your mind is made up, no point in debating the issue.” You answer. +“Oh no, please I’d LOVE to hear your defense on the matter. I could use a good laugh before I blow us all up.” + +At this point having one of your soldiers shoot him would be counter productive, he’d just release the switch when he died. Rushing the gnome would likely have the same result + +Your only option is to cast a freeze spell and encase his hand in a solid block of ice. The problem with that right now is you’re exhausted. You’d have to stall for a little time so you could muster up the energy to do it right now. + +So you stall for time and engage the gnome in conversation. + +“I was just following orders.” You say. +“Really now? That’s your defense?” the gnome asks. +“It’s not a defense because I don’t think I have anything to defend against. The Emperor…Casimir hated your kind. Not I. Why he hated your people so intensely I cannot say because I never fully understood the depths of it. He gave reasons, but as I said I believe there was more to it. It doesn’t matter though, since I merely acted on his orders.” +“So you were just a blindly loyal soldier just doing your duty eh?” +“At the time yes. Look, if you want me to beg for my life, you’ll not get it here. I didn’t begin my life as an Eternal begging so I’m certainly not going to end my life begging.” + +“I see…I suppose I should’ve known your arrogance and lack of emotions would prevent you from such actions…” the gnome remarks, but you cut him off. +“Funny you should say that. Since I would think someone with the same arrogance and lack of emotions would understand.” You say. +“What?!” +“THIS! This flying fortress! And all your airships! You really expect me to believe you designed them for peaceful purposes?” +“We had to protect ourselves!” +“Against the Xi, yes I can see that, but you’ve been bombing us as well and we didn’t even declare war on you!” +“Bah! You would have eventually! And your pathetic attempt at comparing us bombing your soldiers and you rounding up gnome civilians for slaughter is laughable.” +“I wasn’t actually, I’d say that would be closer to what you did to the original citizens of this city. So what did you do with Telis’ original citizens?” + +The gnome begins to get annoyed. + +“Nothing. This city was always ours!” +“Bullshit. Maybe this place was wrapped in mystery, but not to such a degree that it wasn’t known that humans lived here. Or at least they USED to live here. Just looking at the buildings and one can tell that this place was originally designed for humans rather than the smaller architecture that make up these corridors. So how did you go about it? I’m actually curious how you managed to wipe out an entire city without anyone getting a hint of what was going on. I know from your reputation that you don’t associate with other races any longer so I can only assume that you had the citizens of this city done away with long before you actually moved in and started making this place into a flying city. Perhaps maybe like something similar that was done to the gnomes?” + +The gnome now actually gets off his chair and both of his hands are balled up in anger, which is good since you want him to grip that kill switch as tight as possible. + +“It was a completely different situation!” the gnome exclaims. +“Was it? Your ancestor said we rounded gnomes up to be slaughtered, what he probably didn’t know since he avoided capture is HOW we did it. We didn’t just kill them. We completely obliterated their souls. It’s what the Emperor wanted. Then again, you lot probably didn’t go that far…no magical skill to speak of, I guess that’s why you like your mechanical toys so much…” +“You’re going to pay for your crimes you evil bastard. When I release this switch my only regret is going to be that you won’t suffer!” +“No doubt. But it’s a shame that the real culprit won’t taste your justice after you blow us all up.” +“What’re you talking about?” +“I’m talking about the main executioner. Maybe I rounded some up and killed a few and the Emperor gave the orders, but there was one in particular who was enjoying the job around the clock. She’s still alive too you know, or maybe you didn’t. She isn’t very mobile or social these days. All I’ll say is she’s a svelk and she’s the mother of that bitch that currently runs Lenay, well assuming Lenay hasn’t been overrun by the Xi…” +“ENOUGH! This ends now!” the gnome yells getting ready to release the switch. + +“Truer words have never been spoken.” You say and cast a blast of frost at the gnome’s left hand and fortunately you encase his whole arm in ice before he can release his hand from the switch. You collapse on the floor just from that small feat of magic. You really need to rest. + +The gnome desperately tries to break the ice, but the remaining two soldiers from the platoon restrain and knock him out. + +“Take this little shit topside and throw him off the city. Renly and I will try to figure out the controls to this thing. And do it quickly, that arm won’t stay frozen and there still might be some gnomes running around.” You say and drag yourself to sit up against a nearby wall. + +“Emperor are you okay?!” Renly asks. +“I’m fine. Just very very tired. And unfortunately my work isn’t even done yet…” you answer. + +“But just maybe this thing will make it easier at least.” +> Mysteries revealed (Notes on Telis and Gnome Plans) +After successfully bringing Telis under control and eliminating the gnomes still in the city and either driving off or destroying the nearby airships, several notes, books and journals are found and it’s a veritable treasure trove of information solving more than a few mysteries and indeed confirming some of your own suspicions. + +Telis was mostly inhabited by humans (and perhaps a few elves) and it’s technological bent was due to its proximity to Marik’s old factory. Apparently during the initial days of the Cataclysm, many managed to take refuge in the place and the survivors in time founded Telis. + +One of the journals is extremely old, nearly destroyed and barely legible, but you manage to make out that the writing is derro on the few pages it has left. And to your surprise its must be Marik’s. There’s no name, but the type of language used and some of the references signify that it could only be him. + +One of the more… coherent entries catches your attention. + +Entry 101 + +Fuck! Fuck! Fuck! Fuck! Fuck! Fuck! I do everything around here and those ignorant fucking surfacers appreciate nothing! I don’t need this shit! I’m a fucking shit king! I mean I’m king of shit! I don’t have to play third fiddle to some fucking eternal and his svelk bitch! I’M the damn fucker! The KING OF THE FUCKERS! + +I need to remember to eat today. + +Who the fuck does he think he is telling me my creations are no match for him? Fuck him! Fuck him with a fucking horse dick! Dick! Dick! DICK! I know what I’ll do! I’ll slaughter them all! Drown ‘em in their tanks! That’ll teach them for failing me! And then I’m leaving this shithole and then the Emperor will see his lack of vision for listening to his idiotic so called son! FUCK THAT SVELK FUCKER! + +Perhaps I should work on dirt golems. Why not? There are stone ones and iron ones. Why not dirt? There’s a bunch of dirt! I could create a fuckload of them! And then I could be a FUCKING MASTER! + +Must remember to take this journal with me. This is good stuff. + +The remaining pages contain a lot of drawings of schematics and similar things that you guess went through Marik’s insane mind, but nothing more about the “tank babies” who you assume Marik had killed like he mentions he would. + +You can only assume Marik himself must’ve died during the initial chaos of the Cataclysm due to the fact that his journal was found by the survivors hiding out there. Probably killed during the violent earthquakes and shockwaves that caused cave-ins and tunnel collapses. + +Getting back to Telis, the place managed to maintain a better standing due to not falling into the dark ages so easily and by staying closely guarded. When the svelk founded Lenay, Telis became even more unwelcoming to strangers and effectively closed its doors too all. + +Or at least it did until the gnomes founded the Redcap Kingdom. + +Despite the gnome’s new outlook on life they noticed that due to Telis being the only other closed society that embraced technology they secretly made contact with them. Telis was suspicious at first, but due to similarities, in time the rulers of the city became more open to the idea of trade and even visits. + +It would be a grave mistake on their part. The population of Telis was indeed annihilated by the gnomes, though apparently it was an insidious process. Worthy of a svelk actually. + +They slowly and gradually poisoned the water supply. Not to a degree that people were dying instantly either. Just to a point where apparently they couldn’t reproduce anymore and in many cases a lowering of intelligence as well. Over the decades, eventually when the population was low enough, the gnomes offered “help” and then proceeded to exterminate the rest in a more traditional fashion. From there, they worked on turning the entire city into a flying fortress. You wonder why they just didn’t do this with one of their own cities, but if you had to guess, their own cities were under constant attack by the Xi (especially underground) making ongoing work problematic (Hence their hasty attempt to get this one up and running when the Xi started becoming more of a problem in Arat) + +From what you can tell this all started before you were even dug up. At least according to Flemto Zookwinkle’s journal here. (What a silly name) You’re guessing he’s the one that confronted you and is now nothing more than a bloody red spot on the ground. + +You’ve found some other plans and scraps of info about what the gnomes were up to recently as well, but a lot of it is pretty technical and some of it looks biological. Specifically Xi. Maybe they were looking to poison the Xi somehow too. + +In any event, you decide to let your inventors and doctors take a closer look at the mess and maybe they can figure out how to apply it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Normally you don’t do this, because repelling projectiles actually takes more focus than flinging fireballs or putting up a shield in the first place, but if you can take out all the guns firing on you with their own bullets then you’ll get the breather you need. + +You refocus the shield and sure enough the bullets are repelled back towards the guns that are firing on you. It isn’t an exact hit, but enough of them hit their own guns (or in some cases the gunner) enough that it puts them out of commission, other bullets either go flying off wildly into the air or into other parts of the airship. In any case you hit something that causes problem since you see and hear minor explosions, which the gnomes are probably busily trying to contain. The airship shudders in the sky a bit, but it isn’t falling out of sky, which it probably would have done if you’d lobbed hunks of fire at it. + +Taking advantage of the respite, your soldiers take what explosives they’ve found on the bodies of the gnomes, pile them up against the building’s door and you hurl a ball of fire at it. Naturally it not only explodes spectacularly, but it also succeeds in destroying a couple of golems that were waiting to ambush you. You and the other run inside, before the airship above you manages to get its guns working again. + +When you get inside you see that the building consists of a lot of desks and generally laid out like a bureaucratic office. You briefly think that maybe this was all for nothing and your hunch was wrong, but sure enough when an automated repeated pops up out of the floor and puts several holes into one of Renly’s platoon and more golems appear from other trapdoors in the floor you’re fairly certain you’re still on the right track. + +You and Renly’s ever dwindling platoon take care of your assailants though at this point they’re probably hoping there aren’t too many more. + +“Glad this building doesn’t have multiple floors.” One soldier remarks. +“It still might, those golems came out of the floor. There might be several basement levels.” Renly points out. +“It can’t go too far down, the city is flying in the air now. It’s not going to be a Derro complex.” You say peering door one of the trapdoors. +“Derro?” Renly asks. +“Oh. Before your time I suppose. They were a subterranean race that were primarily hostile isolationists and had a knack for technology. Sort of like the current gnomes I suppose. I always wondered if they were related in some way to be honest.” You answer. +“And they were enemies?” +“Allies actually. Well… such as they were. Anyway I imagine whatever is causing this city to fly would be located right under it, so we might as well start searching there especially since the rest of this building looks more like an oversized office rather than any example of engineering. + +You all descend down one of the trap doors and find yourself in some small narrow corridors. Not so small that you can’t move around, but certainly small enough that you all have to crouch down. Even at the best of times your body aches, this bending and stooping routine just makes it worse for you. The corridors are also filled with a light steam with gears, pumps and other manner of machinery that you assume are keeping this city afloat. A noisy hum and the occasional jarring metal on metal screeches also surround you and you briefly wonder just how much solid stone floor is between you and the sky right now. + +“Guess the gnomes designed this part of the city.” Renly says. +“Never thought I’d say this, but I wish we were kobolds right about now.” Another soldier remarks. +“Alright let’s focus. The good thing about this corridor is I can easily shield us from any attack from the front or the back but you’re all going to have to fire upon on any enemy that attacks us. If I start throwing magic bolts or whatever around here I’m libel to damage something severely and send this thing crashing to the ground with us in it. + +You travel the corridors for what you believe to be an hour at least. It twists and turns, but you remain convinced that SOMEWHERE down here is a control room. In the meantime more gnomes attempt to stop you and while they have better maneuverability your shield continues to protect everyone and you fend off attacks. + +“At least they’re just sticking with guns now.” One of the soldiers says. +“They don’t really have choice, explosives or those flame weapons would damage all these gears that are involved in holding up the place.” Renly remarks. + +While your followers make minor comments about the situation, you begin to notice a slight change in surroundings. The mist that fills the corridors is dissipating, the floors have become steel and now there are actual walls coving the previously exposed engineering. It suddenly occurs to you that the gnomes hadn’t actually finished this place up yet and you are now seeing the areas that took priority. + +“We’re near the control room.” You say. +“We are?” Renly says. +“I’m sure of it.” +“Wouldn’t there be more defenses?” +“I said I think we’re near it, we’re not actually there yet. For all we know the actual control room has shit we’ve never seen before.” You answer. + +“Oh it does, Eternal. It does. Come on in and see.” You hear a voice say nearby. You and the others look around and at each other. + +“Just continue a little bit forward and turn the corner. Don’t worry, you’ve killed all of my people, but then you always were an expert at such things weren’t you?” the voice says. + +When you follow the voice you enter a room filled with a bunch of technical equipment and machines. You no idea what any of it does, but its certainly a technological feat that you’ve only seen matched by Marik when he was growing tank babies. + +Also in the room a single gnome sitting in a chair dressed in the traditional leather uniform you’ve seen others of his kind wearing. He also sports the same bushy facial hair and red cap they all seem to favor. The only main thing that causes him to stand out is that he’s obviously older than the ones you’ve been fighting and he’s wearing explosives around his waist with a wire attached to another device he’s gripping tightly in his hand. + +The other thing that stands out is that he is completely unconcerned about you or your soldiers pointing their weapons at him. + +“You know, this really was one of our greatest works. (Sigh) It’s going to be a shame to destroy it, but anything is better than letting it fall into your hands. Can’t let a gnome killer like you have it can we?” the gnome remarks. +“You speak as if you know me and I don’t mean by my present reputation. You speak as if you know me from the past.” You say. +“Oh not personally, but my family’s ancestors told me stories about you. Yeah, great ancestor Klemto made sure the story got passed down so that something like Gnome’s Home could never happen again. One of the few gnomes you didn’t manage to round up and have systematically slaughtered.” +“Well I see your mind is made up, no point in debating the issue.” You answer. +“Oh no, please I’d LOVE to hear your defense on the matter. I could use a good laugh before I blow us all up.” + +At this point having one of your soldiers shoot him would be counter productive, he’d just release the switch when he died. Rushing the gnome would likely have the same result + +Your only option is to cast a freeze spell and encase his hand in a solid block of ice. The problem with that right now is you’re exhausted. You’d have to stall for a little time so you could muster up the energy to do it right now. + +So you stall for time and engage the gnome in conversation. + +“I was just following orders.” You say. +“Really now? That’s your defense?” the gnome asks. +“It’s not a defense because I don’t think I have anything to defend against. The Emperor…Casimir hated your kind. Not I. Why he hated your people so intensely I cannot say because I never fully understood the depths of it. He gave reasons, but as I said I believe there was more to it. It doesn’t matter though, since I merely acted on his orders.” +“So you were just a blindly loyal soldier just doing your duty eh?” +“At the time yes. Look, if you want me to beg for my life, you’ll not get it here. I didn’t begin my life as an Eternal begging so I’m certainly not going to end my life begging.” + +“I see…I suppose I should’ve known your arrogance and lack of emotions would prevent you from such actions…” the gnome remarks, but you cut him off. +“Funny you should say that. Since I would think someone with the same arrogance and lack of emotions would understand.” You say. +“What?!” +“THIS! This flying fortress! And all your airships! You really expect me to believe you designed them for peaceful purposes?” +“We had to protect ourselves!” +“Against the Xi, yes I can see that, but you’ve been bombing us as well and we didn’t even declare war on you!” +“Bah! You would have eventually! And your pathetic attempt at comparing us bombing your soldiers and you rounding up gnome civilians for slaughter is laughable.” +“I wasn’t actually, I’d say that would be closer to what you did to the original citizens of this city. So what did you do with Telis’ original citizens?” + +The gnome begins to get annoyed. + +“Nothing. This city was always ours!” +“Bullshit. Maybe this place was wrapped in mystery, but not to such a degree that it wasn’t known that humans lived here. Or at least they USED to live here. Just looking at the buildings and one can tell that this place was originally designed for humans rather than the smaller architecture that make up these corridors. So how did you go about it? I’m actually curious how you managed to wipe out an entire city without anyone getting a hint of what was going on. I know from your reputation that you don’t associate with other races any longer so I can only assume that you had the citizens of this city done away with long before you actually moved in and started making this place into a flying city. Perhaps maybe like something similar that was done to the gnomes?” + +The gnome now actually gets off his chair and both of his hands are balled up in anger, which is good since you want him to grip that kill switch as tight as possible. + +“It was a completely different situation!” the gnome exclaims. +“Was it? Your ancestor said we rounded gnomes up to be slaughtered, what he probably didn’t know since he avoided capture is HOW we did it. We didn’t just kill them. We completely obliterated their souls. It’s what the Emperor wanted. Then again, you lot probably didn’t go that far…no magical skill to speak of, I guess that’s why you like your mechanical toys so much…” +“You’re going to pay for your crimes you evil bastard. When I release this switch my only regret is going to be that you won’t suffer!” +“No doubt. But it’s a shame that the real culprit won’t taste your justice after you blow us all up.” +“What’re you talking about?” +“I’m talking about the main executioner. Maybe I rounded some up and killed a few and the Emperor gave the orders, but there was one in particular who was enjoying the job around the clock. She’s still alive too you know, or maybe you didn’t. She isn’t very mobile or social these days. All I’ll say is she’s a svelk and she’s the mother of that bitch that currently runs Lenay, well assuming Lenay hasn’t been overrun by the Xi…” +“ENOUGH! This ends now!” the gnome yells getting ready to release the switch. + +“Truer words have never been spoken.” You say and cast a blast of frost at the gnome’s left hand and fortunately you encase his whole arm in ice before he can release his hand from the switch. You collapse on the floor just from that small feat of magic. You really need to rest. + +The gnome desperately tries to break the ice, but the remaining two soldiers from the platoon restrain and knock him out. + +“Take this little shit topside and throw him off the city. Renly and I will try to figure out the controls to this thing. And do it quickly, that arm won’t stay frozen and there still might be some gnomes running around.” You say and drag yourself to sit up against a nearby wall. + +“Emperor are you okay?!” Renly asks. +“I’m fine. Just very very tired. And unfortunately my work isn’t even done yet…” you answer. + +“But just maybe this thing will make it easier at least.” +> The Fall of Lenay and the Redcap Kingdom (Year 558) +Year 558 + +“No sign of any survivors?” you ask. +“Well scouts say that Lenay is crawling with Xi. If anyone has escaped, they’d have to be incredibly lucky. There aren’t any svelk suddenly running to our borders either which would be the closest safe haven. None of their elven slaves either.” David remarks. + +And so Lenay has finally fallen. You knew as soon as that magic barrier went down; it would be the end for the city. Even Semra couldn’t keep it up forever. And so ends the last living link to your past. The funny thing is, you didn’t even know she was still alive until a few years ago. + +You look at the mithril dagger she nearly killed you with when you were in your sixteenth year. At the time Semra mockingly gave it to you as some sort of twisted gift. Perhaps as a reminder of your failure to kill her. You kept it of course as a reminder of your failure as well, but also with every intension of killing her with it one day. Of course that personal goal was given up long ago and even if you did still harbor the motive for revenge, the Xi have deprived you of that. You’re more disappointed that you didn’t get to kill Eldolith, but you guess she got hers as well. + +As you study the dagger and fondle it, you ask David if there has been an activity by the gnomes. + +“Well, after we destroyed all their airships, I don’t believe any of them managed to escape the Xi either. The Xi have finally completely overrun the Redcap Kingdom. If they aren’t all dead already, then they soon will be. We are the last hope against the Xi my Emperor.” +“Hm.” You acknowledge. + +“Last hope” isn’t quite a term you’ve been successful with. You were supposed to be a “last hope” for the Empire too, and you ended up destroying it. So much has turned out differently from what you expected. + +You have another realization which is you just indirectly carried out the elimination of the gnomes due to your actions. Over five hundred years later, Casimir’s wish has finally been fulfilled. Feels odd that you managed to serve him in this last capacity. + +Casimir and Semra; the closest thing to “parents” that you’ve ever known and everything you are today is partly due to their influence in one way or another. + +Snapping out of your introspection, you address David more directly. + +“Begin moving our reserve armies toward Arat. Regnik will be our main hub of operations in the area and we’ll start sending out those new airships of ours to start bombing the Xi as soon as possible. Can’t just rely on this oversized flying fortress to do all the work.” You say. +“Very well, it shall be done.” David replies and turns to leave. + +“Oh David, here take this.” You say hold out the mithril dagger for him to take. +“What’s this for?” David asks taking the dagger. + +“To dispose of, I have no more need of it.” You answer.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Probably a fool’s task, but if you survive this you’re going to have to still deal with the Xi. A flying fortress would give a significant advantage. + +You stop using your own energy to support your mages and refocus on a creating a personal shield around yourself. You give the order for everyone to get out of your way or grab on to Telis if they can. + +It isn’t too bad, most of your mages hold their own, and continue to protect a majority of the army, but its yourself that you’re concerned about as you attempt to reach Telis which is slowly becoming completely airborn. You ride your horse as hard to the point where it probably isn’t going to survive after you intend to make a leap forward off of it. + +You pass your soldiers, you pass the Xi fighting them, you pass over the torn up ground from the battle and bombs and you look up and see Telis escaping your reach. + +“No, I’ve come too far!” you say and you stand on top of your horse, nearly falling off in the process while still attempt to upkeep your shield… + +You make the jump towards the city and manage to grab ahold of one half of Telis’ front gate doors which is currently hanging off its hinges. Your shield is down, your body hurts and you’re practically deaf from all the explosions going on around you. + +You hang on for dear life as the ground gets further away and attempt to climb up, but your strength is failing you and even if it wasn’t the door is slowly loosing its weak attachment to the rest of the city. + +“Shit! Shit! No! No! No! Not like this! Fuck! Hate this weakness!” you exclaim as you prepare to either lose your grip or for the door comes loose. And you doubt you’ll be in any condition to “repair” yourself when you take this long fall. + +Fortunately it doesn’t come to that. + +“Emperor! Take my hand!” a human soldier shouts and reaches over the side. You waste no time in accepting his help and soon a couple of other soldiers help him lift you up just in time for the door to fall to the ground. + +After catching your breath and assuring the soldiers that helped you that you’re fine, you get a better assessment of your surroundings. + +“Okay first things first, what’s your name so I know what to call you.” +“Lieutenant Renly, my Emperor and this what’s left of my platoon.” Renly says and waves his arm to six other soldiers. “We’re not the only ones here, I believe there’s a couple of orc platoons further in the city. They’re probably fighting the Xi that managed to get in or combating the gnome clockwork golems. Hell even the teams of gnomes with their rapid repeaters isn’t something you want to deal with and that’s not even counting the ones probably trying to spot us from the nearby airships.” +“So wait, are there no humans or regular citizens in this place?” you ask. +“Not from what anyone can tell. It’s like the whole place is empty other than the Xi, the gnomes and us. Unless the Telis citizens are all hiding somewhere.” +“Or maybe the gnomes did something to them all. Well it doesn’t matter we need to figure out where the hell the controls are for this thing. We get control and we can get rid of those airships with a lot more ease.” +“Not sure where something like that would be located Emperor.” +“That’s easy, we keep moving towards the areas that have most of the little bastards and their damned contraptions. It’s going to be the most heavily defended place because it’s the most important thing in the world to them.” +“Well then I believe we should take a left down that street over here. Saw a gnome patrol accompanied by two clockworks not long ago.” +“Okay, but when possible we should probably stick to the back alleys. Don’t need one of those airships floating by and spotting us. In fact our best chance is to do this as stealthily as possible. A rare tactic for us I know, but our main task is getting control of this thing.” + +You, Renly and the rest of his platoon make your way towards where you hope some sort of master control is located. Along the way, you see the remnants of where small skirmishes have already taken place. Bodies riddled with bullets or in some cases chopped up. They’re mostly bodies of the Xi, but some of your soldiers as well. You don’t see any gnome casualties other than pieces of their golems. + +The sounds of battle can still be heard throughout the city, but it gets concerning when the sounds get less infrequent, since that means the gnomes are probably mopping up invaders to their city, which means less distraction for them. + +Your attempts at sneaking around are fairly successful. As you stealthily avoid these patrols, you finally see the gnomes and you can’t get over how radically they’ve changed. With their dark red caps, goggles and stylish leather uniforms, they couldn’t look anymore different than their pathetic ancestors that you helped round up centuries ago to have their souls utterly obliterated. + +Really though, after an event like that and who knows what else during the Cataclysm you suppose it shouldn’t be surprising that the gnomes decided they wouldn’t be victims and became hostile towards other races. Let alone rely on other societies to defend them any longer. + +They shaped their own destiny and you can certainly respect and even admire that; after all you never hated them. That was the Emperor. You were just following orders at the time. + +Eventually the gnome patrols are getting too thick and you can’t really properly proceed without engaging the enemy. Just as well, you were getting sick of acting like a shadow. + +“Alright, everyone get ready, because it’s going to be killing time from here on in. I’ll take the lead on this.” You say. +“Emperor, shouldn’t you stay behind us so we can better protect you?” Renly replies. +“While I appreciate the sentiment, I’ve been doing this a lot longer than you have, if anything you all should try to stay behind me and in cover until I clear out most of the rabble. Don’t worry, I may be old, but I’m not out of this yet. And if you all survive this, you’ll all be getting promotions and whatever else I think might be an appropriate reward, so it behooves you all to listen to me if you want to reap the benefits of this situation.” + +With this understanding, Renly and his platoon follow your lead. Still unseen, you take advantage of a group of gnomes tanding around with their clockwork creations. + +You unleash a flurry of fireballs, which not only has the desired effect of killing some of the gnomes outright, but also causing an explosion due to their hand thrown bombs they carry on them The explosion takes care of the golems. + +“That’s one group down, but the rest aren’t going to be as easy!” you say and advance with a shield up. + +Not easy is correct because the little bastards start coming out in full force. You just try not to get surrounded. The unrelenting repeater weapons are bad enough, but the gnomes also come out with weapons that emulate some of your spells! A single gnome who managed to sneak up on two of Renly’s men blasts them with some sort of weapon that emits flames. Renly shoots the gnome in the head before turning his attention to grab one of the repeaters from a nearby dead gnome. + +“They’re all coming out of that big red building, that’s probably where we need to go! Come on!” you shout and take out another golem.” + +During the carnage you think back to how you used to mainly use your sword during battles. During this one, you haven’t even used it yet. In fact you haven’t done so for so long, you wonder if you’d even be able to use it effectively anymore. Granted in this situation like this you’ve practically got no choice but to rely on your magic, still though you miss the good old days. + +The closer you get to the building, the waves of gnomes lessens, until you see one of them close the door just as the last few golems are shot to pieces. The sky above you grows darker and you notice an airship looming overhead. They don’t throw bombs at you, but they certainly unleash a volley of gunfire, which manages to kill another one of Renley’s platoon before he and the rest can get into cover. + +As for you, your shield is working just fine, but you need to get into that building which is probably locked and barricaded. You aren’t going to be able to blast it open with that airship firing at you. +> Launch a fireball at the airship +Best way to get them to stop shooting at you is to return the favor with superior firepower literally. + +You unleash a torrent of fireballs at the airship, which land all over the place. Some hit the gun shooting at you, which causes it to explode. In fact other your hits cause several explosions and then one large one creating a blast that knocks you down on the ground even from you were standing. + +The airship is in flames and falling out of the sky, unfortunately since it was directly hovering over the city that means it’s crashing into it. You scramble off your feet and hope to find some sort of cover and maybe at least get away from where the major impact is going to be. + +You keep your barrier up to protect yourself from the falling debris, but Renly and the others have no chance at all especially when the airship begins hitting the larger buildings causing them to collapse and setting what looks to you like the whole sky ablaze. + +When the airship finally hits the city surface it is engulfed by fire and the impact strikes your barrier so hard that even you are pushed away by the force. Your entire body hits the ground and you lose concentration of your spell. Fire is all around you and you pass out. + +You never wake up to experience Telis falling out the sky and causing an even greater explosion on the surface.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As high as you currently are, the beast is still several times higher and should easily be a perfect target. + +You concentrate and as you do you begin to feel little charges and sparks around you and the air begins to have a faint smell of electricity. As dark as the sky is with the beast blocking the sun with its size, the sky gets even darker when storm cloud gather. + +You directly unleash a blast of lightning right at one of the creature’s heads. It must be enough to addle what passes for brains in the creature, because the serpentine head begins to flail back and forth making an incredibly loud bellow and knocking into the other head and taking it off its concentrated effort to destroy your fleet. Then a rumbling comes from the sky and you’re nearly blinded by the light show that occurs next. + +With the storm clouds, the creature takes several lightning strikes to both of its heads. If the creature wasn’t in pain or addled before, it certainly is now. Its roaring of pain is so great that it’s practically deafening. You don’t let up though, you continue to summon the lightning and that’s when you learn that you only have so much control over nature. The lightning strikes begin going all over the place. Some hit your ships, so hit the water and some continue to hit the beast. + +You struggle to direct the lightning, but your energy ebbs quickly as you fail to do so and you take a direct bolt yourself. It’s a quick and odd feeling. You feel a great deal of pain, followed by a warm sensation and then you briefly realize you’ve fallen from the crow’s nest, which was completely destroyed by the blast. + +You then feel extreme agony when you not only crash onto the deck of the ship, but also through it. You land on some barrels though all you know is when you land you heard a snap and a numbness wash over your body. + +And that’s when you know; you’re paralyzed from the neck down. + +You hear the sounds of battle continue all around you, some of the crew that were manning the cannons on the lower deck call for help when they see you, but there’s nothing anyone can do to help you. Everything’s blurry, you’ve probably got a concussion, and death has never been so close to you since you fought the Emperor. + +You’re going to fall asleep and your body will sink under the water when the ship is inevitably destroyed. There the fish will eat you or possibly the creatures you’re fighting will eat you. Its possible Crowley might step up and take command of the Empire, but after him? You don’t see it lasting very long. Your own legacy will eventually be forgotten and that will be the story of you. + +That is if you had any intention on dying today. + +“Get away from me and get back to fighting, you’re not done yet!” You weakly command the crewmembers that are standing around gawking at you. + +You remember the lessons the Emperor taught you about healing yourself. At this point you’re in dire need of A LOT of healing and you imagine you’ll easily be shortening your life span quite a bit in the process, but then you aren’t supposed to be alive right now anyway. + +You focus again. You will your body to mend itself together. In your weakened state you’re drifting in and out of consciousness already, but somehow you manage to push through it and feel the magic doing its work. + +You start to feel your body again. You’re wracked with pain, but you can feel again. You try to get up, but you’re still just too weak and drained. You see a fishman coming down the ship’s stairway and alert your crew with a shout. The last thing you see is the thing coming at you before you pass out. + +“Lover? Have you finally come to join me?” you hear a voice ask. +“Huh? Who is that?” +“It’s me, of course.” + +You open your eyes and see Semra hovering over you. She looks exactly like you remember well except she happens to be completely naked right now. (Though you remember that too) + +“Shit, I’m dead after all.” You say. “And given that you’re here I must be in some sort of hell.” +“Ah, I missed that dry sense of humor. I also missed this.” Semra remarks and you feel a hand on your crotch. + +Normally you’d probably push her away, but given everything you just went through you figure that if this is your personal hell, you could certainly do worse. Just as you’re about to give in completely, Semra’s head is cleaved in with a single sword blow. Blood splatters all over you and her body slumps lifelessly onto your own. + +“Is this what you fucking want? I thought you were stronger than that! The man I married never gave up!” another familiar voice says. + +After pushing Semra’s dead body off of you, you look up and see Alison in all her warrior maiden glory. You never thought you’d ever see her again though you wish she were in a happier mood. + +“Alison I…” +“Nope, don’t even try to make an excuse! I caught you and you’re not getting off that easy. I’m doing this for your own good!” + +You see Alison’s sword coming straight at your head, but you don’t attempt to dodge, instead you sit up to meet the sword half way… + +And you wake up with a splitting headache and your body still hurting all over. + +“Hah, told you he was going to wake up. He’s not called an Eternal for no reason you know. You owe me two gold pieces Sprog!” Len exclaims. +“Sprog owes you what?” +“Erm, nevermind. Welcome back to the living Emperor. Everyone wasn’t sure if you were going to make it or not, but I had a feeling you might.” +“Bah, should’ve died. Was a glorious battle. Be great honor to die in such a battle.” Sprog remarks. +“Oh really? Then why didn’t you make more of an effort to die then?” Len asks. +“Sprog still need to produce more children first, now more than ever since three sons died on other ships. Must ensure legacy!” Sprog says and walks away. + +You look around and find yourself still on the lower deck of your personal ship. You guess that nobody wanted to move you for fear of doing more damage to you body. It’s a mess on the lower deck and there’s still a hole from where you crashed through, but obviously the ship survived the battle. As you sit up, you nearly lay back down due to the pain. A volley of expletives soon follows. + +“Easy there! While I know you just survived something no man should have, I’m pretty sure taking a direct hit from a lightning bolt and crashing through the deck of a ship from a great height still has to be painful. In fact its odd, but you even look a little older because of the experience.” + +“You have no idea…” you remark. +“Insisting on fighting that beast had to be the single most insane things I’ve ever seen, but while I was personally afraid I can’t help but admire it. Despite him believing you were going to die, I know Sprog certainly admired it.” Len says. +“He probably hoped I was going to die. Still glad to see he’s honorable enough that he didn’t try to take advantage and kill me while I was unconscious though. Glad to see you didn’t either.” +“I was a smuggler, not a murderer. Besides I don’t think anything I could do would actually kill you anyway after seeing what you just survived.” +“So did we win? I can only assume us still being afloat means we won…unless we’ve retreated…” + +Len gives an apprehensive look before answering. + +“Well…yes and no. Technically we won, though I’m not sure if we actually killed that sea monster. After you crashed through the deck of the ship, the fishmen continued to scale the ship, but the sea monster continued to be hit by lightning. It eventually sank back beneath the waters, but like I said, I dunno if we killed it or it just swam away. Soon after that happened the fishmen stopped attacking too.” +“But?” +“But, other than this ship and a couple of others straggling along side us your fleet is gone, along with all of your people aboard them. We had patch up several holes they managed to put in this ship and we’re only sailing at half speed due to all the broken masts, but we’ll make it back to Nalin okay barring any other attacks of course.” + +You curse again, but this time it’s more at yourself rather than the pain you’re in. You wasted a lot of troops and resources on this endeavor for no real prize. You didn’t even acquire any new territory. You think back to Trog’s words again about getting old and knowing your limitations, well you certainly learned that lesson today hard. + +“Well I suppose it isn’t all bad, you did teach those fish creatures that you’re not to be trifled with. It was like a battle between gods when you unleashed lightning on that beast’s heads. They might think twice about popping up on your shores now.” Len says in an attempt to cheer you up. +“We can only hope I suppose.” You answer. + +The first thing you do when you get back home is try to rest. You do so for as much as you’re able for weeks and while you do eventually recover, you’re never quite the same again. You’ve visibly gotten older due to the healing magic and it only did so much, you’re still experiencing dull aches and pains on a daily basis. Worse than you did before you went on the mission. You’ll never be like you were. Those days are long gone. + +On the bright side, there have been no more sightings of fish people on the coasts, so perhaps your venture was fruitful after all, unless they’re biding their time and trying to regroup which is exactly what you’d do, so naturally you’ve ordered the building of a new fleet along with proper naval training for potential sailors. + +Of course if the fishy people are no longer a threat that still means Trog’s vision of a relentless enemy still looms. Which means it’s either the Xi Hive or an as of yet unknown enemy. + +More things to look forward to as you approach your twilight years. +> Jennifer’s visit (A friendly face for once) +“I told you I don’t want any visitors and I’m not dealing with anything today, I’m resting!” you tell David as you wince from the aches all over your body. +“I know, but under the circumstances, I thought you might make an exception for this person. It’s Jennifer Mol, my Emperor.” +“Really? Well what does she want?” you ask. +“I think she heard what happened and just wants to see you.” + +Despite your pain, you suppose you can spare the time for Jennifer. + +“Alright send her in.” + +You take a seat and mumble about the sharp pain in your back when Jennifer enters your room. She notices your discomfort immediately and walks briskly towards you. + +“Are you okay?” she asks. +“Not really, but there’s nothing you can do. Don’t worry about it. Good to see you.” +“I had to come to see if you were as wounded as I had heard. I also heard that you had a great battle with a sea monster?” +“Well, I did have a battle with a sea monster and I also managed to paralyze myself in the process, fortunately magic has its advantages.” You say. +“Paralyze?!” +“Yes, but as I said magic has its benefits. Look, its all been taken care of. I’ll just have to put up with a few more aches and pains now, but I’m alive and still functional and that’s the important thing.” +“I suppose so. I’m guessing you succeeded against those fish people then?” +“Well there haven’t been any more sightings, so I certainly hope that’s the case. I regret to inform you that Delerg no longer exists in any form though, its nothing but water now. I remember you once expressed a desire to explore the islands at one time.” You say. +“Oh yes, I did. I sort of gave up on that idea though when I realized it wasn’t possible. Sometimes you just realize those sorts of things you know?” + +Jennifer says that like she’s talking about something more than just Delerg. Like your former relationship. + +“Heh, but then of course in your case I suppose everything is possible for you.” Jennifer adds. +“Not getting severely injured seems to still elude me as well as getting old…bah I don’t want to dwell on this shit anymore. Tell me about what you’ve been up to.” + +“Oh! Well nothing important, I mean certainly nothing as exciting as protecting the Empire from external threats.” Jennifer remarks. +“Doesn’t matter. It’s important to me, I’m genuinely interested.” You say. + +This comment garners a smile from Jennifer who begins to tell you what has been going on in her life. The big thing she mentions is the book she’s working on. She hasn’t thought of a title for it yet, but it’s going to be all about the old Empire or at least from what she’s pieced together from what she’s found and from what you’ve told her. + +While she’s explaining the process, you notice a male name keeps popping up when she discusses having another person helping her put it together. You can’t help but wonder… + +“So your partner, is this the one?” you ask. +“One?” +“Your new boyfriend of course. I might not be an expert on these matters, but I do notice a bit of extra excitement when you speak his name and how much he’s supported and helped in putting together the book.” + +Jennifer doesn’t know how to react; you reassure her that she’s done nothing wrong. + +“Jennifer, what we had ended amicably and years ago, I certainly didn’t expect you to continue your life alone. I’m certainly not uncomfortable or going to be angry about it.” +“Okay.” Jennifer says as if a weight has lifted off of her. +“So anyone I know? Tell me about him.” you ask. + +Jennifer says, that he isn’t anyone you would know. He’s a historian that started working at the museum about a year ago, but that they got along almost immediately. She says that they are already talking about getting married and maybe starting a family. You are a little surprised by that news, but not displeased. You’re glad she found someone that’s probably a little more “stable.” + +Still, when she explains all this, you can sense almost an apologetic tone at times. Like she feels in some way that she’s betrayed you even though logic dictates otherwise and you’ve even said as much. + +“Well that sounds very good, I’m glad life is working out for you and you’re doing well. And if you need more information for your book you’re free to ask me at anytime…well assuming I’m not fighting any more sea monsters or whatever else the world decides to throw at me.” +“Ha ha, If I need more information I will certainly ask you. Well…I guess I better leave you to your rest. I know you’ve got an Empire to run and you need all your strength for that.” + +Jennifer starts to leave, but turns around. + +“I just want to say I will always be a loyal citizen to you and the Empire. I have always believed in you and appreciate how you ascended this nation to greatness. Maybe people tell you these things all the time, but I want to reinforce the fact that I respect and appreciate the sacrifices you make to protect us all.” + +You certainly weren’t expecting all that. + +“Well I thank you very much Jennifer. I never doubted your loyalty for a second, you didn’t need to tell me.” You reply. + +Jennifer smiles again, but her eyes look slightly watery like she’s going to cry. + +“I…know. I just wanted to say it to you.” She remarks and then nods silently and walks out of your room, leaving you alone. + +You get out of the chair you were sitting in slowly and make your way to the bed ignoring all the pains the whole time. When you finally get horizontal you actually feel a little relief. + +“Ah…better.” You say as the pain in your back lessens. “She’ll get over those lingering feelings eventually. Everything fades in time.” + +You say that, knowing that isn’t necessarily true when you begin thinking about Alison as you drift off to sleep.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 550 + +More and more each year your nation is starting to resemble the Empire of old. More and more each year you’re also starting to feel old too. The aches and pains of battles long past (and not too long past) are starting to catch up with you. + +You never tried to think about getting “old” too much, except during the years of when the Emperor was “sick.” Recently you’ve begun thinking about what his plans were again. How he was going to defeat death by transferring his essence or spirit or mind or whatever into your own body. Well at least that’s what Semra and Jacob told you and what ultimately lead to the situation you’re in now. + +Unfortunately, you haven’t really the means to go about such a thing. Your knowledge of magic is better than most, but the Emperor never showed you that trick let alone how to get to the Isle of Mortos. You wouldn’t even know about how to go about “creating” another one of your kind either which was also required…again so Semra and Jacob told you. + +Makes you wonder what happened to the “eternals” Marik created. You wonder if they survived the initial cataclysm and if so, what became of them? Did they plan any major role during or after it? It’s apparent that the technique to create an eternal like you or Marik’s tank babies was lost too. + +Well it doesn’t matter much now anyway, you can assume they’re all certainly dead now, along with crazy ol’ Marik. Still, you wonder about his factory, as it was located in Arat. + +In fact there have been a lot of events going on in Arat lately according to your spies. + +The major thing being that there have been sightings of the Xi Hive in Arat, not many and certainly no major attacks, but the insectoid creatures have been attacking anyone they see as usual. It won’t be long before they become a major threat in this area. Right now it isn’t your problem at all, but you imagine they will be eventually. + +From what you’ve heard the Xi have been really putting the Redcap Kingdom on the defensive, but the gnomes are still holding out and not even losing any ground. You certainly can admire that, and you’d even try to send an emissary to go speak with them if only to get a better feel of the Xi threat, but you’ve also heard the gnomes have also ordered a kill on sight to well…anyone. + +Your best shot at learning more about the Xi would probably be Eldolith, but she’s also been her usual antagonistic self, especially ever since you officially annexed Regnik into the Empire. Pointing to you and the Xi as a threat she managed to unify the other city-states of Zo, Valizza and Atnil into something called the Arat Confederacy. In reality it’s a new nation with four cities rather than a true alliance where everyone is supposedly still autonomous. + +The only other city-state that doesn’t belong to Eldy’s little alliance is Telis, which as usual, nobody seems to know anything about. Still, it seems like it’s probably in the most danger of the Xi considering its proximity to where Xi territory is starting to expand. You never really gave it much thought until now, but according to the maps and if your memory isn’t completely off, Telis isn’t too far away from where Marik’s factory was located. Now you’re starting to wonder if its “mysterious” nature isn’t due to that factor. + +In a perfect world Arat would be your next and only priority, but there have been concerns about the Delerg islands as well. There has nearly been no reports about the Island League’s activities for years, it’s almost as if they all just disappeared, but more concerning is the fact that strange humanoid creatures have been sighted off the coasts of Quala at night. While Quala is still mostly home to your orc population and the place is still the poorest of your territories, you still don’t want a potential invasion to occur. It might be time to start exploring and possibly conquering the islands at last. + +Seeing as the orcs will have the most familiarity with this potential coastal threat, you decide to go speak with Trog about it. You might as well anyway if only to see who his potential successor is going to be seeing as you know Trog is supposed to be dying. + +When you arrive to meet with him, you see just how true that is. The old orc is lying prone on fur skin bedding with two younger female orcs attending to him. It’s very strange to see orcs behave in this manner. Orcs don’t tend to have a long life span to begin with due to all their fighting, but to see one being actually cared for rather than taken to the wilderness and left to die (at best) is unusual. Then again Trog was a very respected leader. He’s obviously weak, but when he notices you he tries to sit up and waves away his attendants. + +“Ah…the Eternal… dreams told Trog that we would see each other one last time before the end. Now that you’re here Trog now know death coming soon for me. Sad that Trog could not die as a warrior, but still a good life with many children to carry on name.” Trog says. +“And who would be that successor Trog?” you ask. +“Trog believe that Sprog take over next. Already killed several of his siblings, others too scared to oppose. Was a great contest, only well enough to see some of it, but very good. Very bloody.” +“Sorry I missed it.” +“Trog warn you though, Sprog not quite as accepting of our current situation as Trog. Believes orcs should be independent. Might be right, might be wrong, not care. Trog too tired to care anymore.” +“Am I going to have to kill him?” +“Do not know. Perhaps, perhaps not. Do as you wish. You always have. As Trog has said, too tired to care anymore.” +“So I take it that I probably should ask this Sprog about the reports of the humanoid interlopers off Quala’s coast?” +“Hrm. That. Trog can still help a little… Yes, there have been sightings, but nothing human about them. Fellow orcs tell me they look more like fish than anything else. Appear on land sometimes, but never for very long. Not sure if they are able or if they are just scouting. Orcs ready for a fight as always if they do decide to invade. Kobolds too. Was not sure about the little scalies living here at first, but enjoy their antics. Respect our strength too…” + +Trog begins to drift off to sleep, but you aren’t done with him yet. + +“While I hate to interrupt your journey to the afterlife, you have any last visions for me?” +“Hrm…yes…Trog did actually. War is coming.” +“That’s a given Trog, war is always coming.” +“True, but this one will be against an enemy that you’ve never faced the likes of before. They will be relentless, they will not stop and even as strong as the Empire is, I fear that it will not be enough. Worse is the fact that you are approaching your own twilight years as this terrible threat comes. You will no longer be able to just march in like the great warrior you once were…” +“Trog, I might be getting old, but I’m not ready for the damn grave yet.” +“True, but you acknowledge that you ARE getting old. Still…perhaps that is a good sign. Knowing your limitations. Trog knew his…” + +At this point Trog falls unconscious and despite your prodding and nudging him, he isn’t waking from it. From his breathing patterns, you know he’ll be dead soon. + +“Damn it Trog, you could’ve at least told me who this relentless enemy was going to be. Guess that was your last little joke on me. Good one Trog.” You remark and exit Trog’s tent. You tell the group standing outside that he’ll be soon passing on, if anyone wants to see the final moments. Several female orcs go in, but the male orcs just give a solemn look downward save for the very large one standing nearby with an equally huge battle axe. When he approaches you, your entourage of guards stands ready to defend you, but judging by his appearance he’d give them a good fight all by himself. + +“So is the old man dead?” the orc asks gruffly. +“Well if he isn’t yet, he soon will be…I’m guessing you’re Sprog.” +“Right. Guess you da Emp. Huh. Thought you’d be bigger. Old man say you powerful though. Guess cause of magic abilities like old man. Feh.” +“I take it, you don’t like magic?” +“Magic give unfair advantage even more than shooty weapons. Orcs have no more magic types now. Least none Sprog know of. No chance to rebel now.” +“You’re telling me you’d rebel?” +“Yes, I’d lead a rebellion if we had magic to even up odds. Told old man that he should challenge you long time ago, but said you were too powerful for him. Scared to die like proper warrior, now he die like old man that he is and we still have to serve the Empire.” +“Who says? You could still rebel. You’re standing right here in front of me surrounded by your fellow orcs, I’ve only got five men with me. I’d say right now is the best chance you got of killing me and making your people free again.” + +Sprog grips his axe a bit and gives you a suspicious look pondering if you’re being serious or not. You are of course, but even though Sprog eventually senses that, he’s not taking you up on that offer. + +“Bah, want to be free, but still stand no chance of killing you. At best might get lucky and wound you before you set Sprog on fire or somethin’. Dying in battle one thing, but Sprog not suicidal. Most orcs too comfortable now with livin’ under the Empire anyway. Half would probably attack me, the idjits.” +“Always did appreciate you orcs and your honesty. Now that I know I don’t need to kill you anytime soon, what can you tell me about these sightings off the coasts of Quala?” + +Sprog tells you much of the same things you’ve already heard. Fishmen sighted skulking around the coasts and then disappearing. He says he’s already got patrols marching up and down the coasts, but no sign of them again. + +For all you know these fish people are this relentless force that’s going to be coming at you, of course it also could be the Xi Hive which is the only other force you could think of, at worst it could be both. Could even be the usksha or someone you haven’t even met yet. + +In any case, you still need to do something about this potential aquatic threat. This has really been a long time coming. Whatever the hell is living out on those islands, be they human or otherwise is going to feel the full might of the Empire. + +Thanks to having all the extra resources in Rask now your task of getting a proper fleet up and running isn’t a drain on the Empire and gets done a lot quicker. Training sailors takes a little longer, but fortunately your people aren’t completely ignorant of seafaring ways. + +Within months you have a sizable armada that should do the job. The only thing you’re unsure of is whether or not you should go along on this conquest. + +Maybe because you’re older and beginning to realize you aren’t as fast or as strong as you once were, or maybe because you have uneasiness about being on the open water and possibly even an slight fear of it (A fear you weren’t even aware of), or maybe it’s a combination of the two, you don’t know. + +What was it that Trog said before he died? Knowing your limitations? +> Lead from the back +While you may still have many years ahead of you, the days of your prime are starting to fade. Perhaps you need to start accepting the fact that your days of charging first into battle are gone and probably should be. Your mind is more important for running the Empire than your sword arm or even your battle magic at this point. + +There’s also the fact that it’s true, you don’t relish the idea of being on a boat. You decide to that you’re going to sit this one out. + +A week goes by and business in the Empire continues as usual, but you hear nothing from the large fleet that you sent out. One of the faster messenger ships should’ve at least come back to give a report by now. + +Another week goes by and you know something is terribly wrong. There has been no word back from your fleet. Naturally the families of the soldiers and sailors that left on this mission are very upset. True, that their lives are always in potential danger, but everyone labored under the impression that it would be a quick mix up with the Island League and then heading back home. Even if there were losses it would be acceptable, but as it stands nobody knows exactly what happened. They’re just gone, all of them. + +Like the waters just swallowed them all up, and for all anyone knows, maybe it has. + +Such mystery is frightening especially when you’re getting more sightings of fish people now off the coasts of Nalin. These fish people have also started outright attacking orcish settlements near the shores in Quala. It’ll only be a matter of time before they start attacking Nalin as well. + +Doesn’t take long before you’ve not only got on going raids from the coast, but also rabble rousing from the orcs. Warlord Sprog has been actively condemning you for failing to eliminate this threat like you were supposed to and begins claiming that the orcs have been taking the brunt of the attacks. He also openly says to any and all who will listen that they would be better off on their own. Naturally when you hear about this treason talk you have several Eyes sent to go bring him in. + +He succeeds in slaying five of them before escaping into the Arat wilderness with several followers. With your inability to fend off the fish people properly, the loss of your entire fleet, a panicked population and now an orc rebellion in the making, you know you have dark days ahead. + +Year 552 + +Being a tyrant is one thing, but being one who can’t protect his territory and is inefficient is even worse so when the troubles started piling up, you decided you couldn’t afford to just sit back and command anymore. You had to take direct action and lead from the front like you did before. + +Getting the population back in line took a bit of doing from the Eyes, but it was done. + +The orcs were a bigger problem and a costly one. Warlord Sprog continued to incite your orc population to the point where Quala and parts of Rask were hostile territory. It about a year before you personally slew Sprog in combat. The damage was done however, they razed several towns, even Regnik in Arat was destroyed. Though you suspect that Eldolith might’ve had something to do with that. Probably secretly funding or helping Sprog somehow or got spies into the city to lower the gates. + +You also had no more orc population to use as soldiers anymore and those that lived took to the wilderness and continue to be a nuisance. It was a waste of resources and manpower that quite frankly you couldn’t afford to lose. + +During the whole time this was happening you couldn’t really effectively combat the fish people threat who continued to raid the coasts and in much greater force. Some have been so bold to even create camps along the shores of Quala. Most of Nalin’s port towns were still fairly well defended in the beginning, but then the sea beast arrived and completely destroyed most of them. The leviathan has two heads and countless tentacles. You believe it is the “god” of the fish people, or at least leading them. + +Unfortunately the beast never stays near the coast and retreats back to the deeper water when it’s done rampaging. There’s nothing for it except to go out there and kill it. + +You have another fleet built in the southern most port town in Nalin since the fish people haven’t attacked that far yet. Building the fleet take awhile though due to the decreased labor force and having to practically restart from scratch again. The whole time you’re building the fleet you’re anticipating an attack from the fish people, you half expect the usksha to attack you with claims that you’re planning to invade them. Thankfully that doesn’t happen. + +When it’s all said and done, you’ve got a new fleet, though much smaller than before, but you can’t afford to wait too much longer. The quick you kill the monster the better. You have to win back your considerable losses. You’ve been made to look foolish and sometimes weak these past couple of years. Time to put an end to that once and for all. + +And after you kill this thing, your next order of business will be to invade Arat. + +No more than a day has passed and your fleet is already attacked by fish people. They were never the best fighters, but they aren’t worst either and being on their territory as well as being outnumbered certainly gives them an advantage as some don’t even bother to scale your ships and just bore holes in the ships with whatever tools they’re using for such a task. You’ve lost half of your fleet by the time the sea monster makes its presence known and now having seen it first hand with your own eyes, you feel incredibly small in comparison. Stories about how it “blotted out the sun” weren’t exaggerations. It is just that huge and you’re surrounded by water with no where to run. + +You try to cast a lightning storm, but the ship is being so overrun with the aquatic invaders that you can’t possibly concentrate on such a spell. Your crew fights bravely, but they’re just so outnumbered that they can’t defeat the numbers or keep from completely panicking that they’re going to die on the water this day. + +A large tentacle smashes the deck of the ship and also succeeds in smashing three of your increasingly dwindling crew. You run your sword through another fishman and dodge the other tentacle coming from the other side. + +Even if you do survive this, you’re not sure if you’ll even be able to get back to land within a reasonable amount of time. You’ve lost every ship and your own is now in danger of becoming driftwood if it takes any more punishment, which it most certainly will. + +You blast a group of the fishmen with lightning which gives you a breather, but only so you’re just in time to see another tentacle come sweeping towards you. Unfortunately you don’t quite get out of the way in time and the hefty blow shatters your legs. This also has enough force to knock you off the boat and into the water. + +You struggle a bit in the water desperately trying to keep above it, but soon the claws of several fish men grab at your broken legs and torso. Your struggling is put to a complete end when one of them rises up out the water to sink his teeth into your throat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 545 + +It isn’t what you would’ve inherited had things been different, but you achieved what many said couldn’t be done. You tamed Quala badlands and have successfully incorporated it into the Empire. It certainly helped that you and Trog already had an understanding long before hand, but encouraging more kobolds citizens to settle the area worked out a lot better than you hoped. The eager little scalies seem to like the wilder and more untamed lands and it also got them out of the more “civilized” Nalin too, making more than a few rural human populations happier that their homes weren’t suddenly collapsing from over dug kobold tunnels. + +The Eyes have been doing a good job of being the imposing internal security you wanted them to be and you’ve already attempted to re-establish a training center for the magic arts. Besides you, the Eyes are the only source of magic in the Empire, if they can strengthen their abilities and train others in such things, you’ll have magic might on your side which can only help in the long run. + +Of course all this expansion has made your neighbors nervous mostly the six cities of Arat, but the Usksha Emirates as well (Though they’ve been wary about you even before the republic fell thanks to Quintus kicking them all out) There’s also the Island League of Delerg to contend with now. The pirates and other ne’er-do-wells had to give up their first profession and actually start putting down roots on their dreary little island hideouts, thanks to the fact that Nalin started cutting back on its naval and seafaring endeavors. + +None of this really matters though, because you know none of them are strong enough to actually do anything to you. Your neighbors form petty alliances with each other in the hopes that if you did decide to strike that somehow they could stand against you. Though in some cases they’d rather join you, Regnik being one of the city states that sees the writing on the wall. Governor Daniel Tivas has requested several meetings with you and surprisingly you’ve also gotten a message from an emissary of Lenay. Seems that Domina Eldolith D’vessa wants to also speak with you, though you can’t imagine that it has anything to do with joining forces. One of your newer advisors David (former senator) has suggested that it wouldn’t hurt to speak with them. Of course most of your military is in favor of just crushing the cities and not talking at all. General Ingrid being the most vocal about it. (Ah the joys of having an enthusiastic military once again under your command.) + +Sightmaster Crowley has suggested in shutting the doors to any talks and instead retaking Rask since it still contains lots of valuable resources that could be used in the future. While not completely out of the question you imagine that’s his former life influencing that advice. He probably hopes that there might be reconciliation between the ones that stayed as well as wiping out the rest of the wendigo. + +Finally there’s Jennifer. She’s not an empress, she’s not even formal advisor, but you still have a close enough relationship with her that you still speak with her from time to time. The two of you realized that your “paths” were indeed different and parted ways amicably. While certainly a supporter of the Empire, she decided that her place was still archeology, exploration and looking after the museum (Even more so after her father Calvin died of natural causes four years ago). Still, as was mentioned, you do correspond with her and lately she’s been expressing an interest in the islands of Delerg and even the great ocean past them. + +Of course with the Island League there, that makes her desire to mount any kind of expedition non-existent. Then again if you were more active there that wouldn’t be the case. You could rebuild the navy again to do more exploration properly and possibly claim those islands for yourself along with eliminating a potential danger in the future (and a pain in Nalin’s side even before you were dug up). + +One direction you’re not looking is south though. The Usksha desert is still a formidable environment and sending an army that way you believe would be a waste as there is literally nothing to hold. Nothing of worth anyway since the usksha are still largely nomadic and have no real cities. As long as the Usksha keep to themselves, you have no problem leaving it alone. + +Whatever you decide, you know you’re going to take a prominent role in it. It’s time to lead from the front again to keep everyone remembering that you’re no throne bound ruler. + +In the meantime you decide to listen to David’s advice and set up a meeting with two of the rulers from Arat. At first you think neither ruler will agree to meet you in Nalin, but surprisingly both do rather than insisting on neutral or even their own territory. + +In a few days both rulers arrive in Dalt with their respective entourage. Neither one is happy about the other one being here, and the presence of svelk probably puts everyone in Dalt on edge. The Eyes are on extra alert. + +Daniel obviously isn’t a warrior by any means. He’s a skinny man with a goatee and a few lines on his face due to the stress of ruling. As for Eldolith, she looks about the same as you last remember, though perhaps slightly older looking. Well as “old looking” as svelk get anyway. + +“When I first heard that an Eternal appeared in Nalin, I had hoped it wasn’t you.” Eldolith says when she sees you again. +“Mm, I’m sure you’ll have to explain yourself to all the other svelk now about how you attempted to seduce me by sucking on my finger.” You retort which causes her entire entourage to react with shock and a particular female svelk gives Eldolith a dirty look. Daniel and his people on the other hand are just as surprised, but find it more amusing. + +“Watch yourself and your slander! I am no longer a lowly merc following the whims of my delusional bitch mother. I am the ruler of my people and we are not about to be conquered by your so called renewed empire!” Eldolith exclaims. +“We’ll see.” You remark with a smile and tell everyone to sit down at the meeting table. + +“First, I’m glad you both felt the need to come see me in person. This makes what we will discuss here so much more personal, though I know there are six cities. Do you know why none of the other rulers have desired to see me?” you ask. +“I can answer that.” Daniel says. “The rulers of Atinil and Valizza are already under the influence of Eldolith so by her being here they already have their master to speak for them.” +“Daniel, you’re just frustrated that YOU could not sway them into becoming whores for the Empire like you seem to desire.” Eldolith remarks. +“Okay, so what of the other two?” +“Well since you decided to incorporate those stinking greenskins into your society, the people of Zo want nothing to do with you and I can’t say as I blame them. As for Telis, who the hell knows? There hasn’t been word from them for almost a decade. The entire city could be dead for all anyone knows.” Eldolith says in a bored tone. + +After hearing this, you ask why both of them wanted to see you in the first place. Daniel tells you that he is basically seeking protection for his city-state. He says that he realizes that Regnik can no longer afford to be independent and that he is willing to become a vassal of the Empire. He doesn’t care if half the citizens are against it; he says it’s the best thing for the survival of Regnik. He does make it clear though that he is not asking to be annexed completely. He still wants Regnik to be independent on a day-to-day basis, just that it will be paying you money in exchange for protection. + +Eldolith sneers at Daniel and begins to call him a weakling raising the hostilities of both sides of the table until you demand that everyone calm down. + +“Alright Eldy, what the hell is it that you want to say, because I know damn well it isn’t an alliance let alone vassalhood.” +“You’re right. It isn’t being subserviant, but rather a setting of boundaries right now. The svelk people are independent AND strong. We will NOT bend to your will and if you doubt this then send your armies to invade and see them slaughtered by the thousands!” +“So, I’m supposed to just sit back and watch you get stronger until you attack us eh? And I’d watch your next words Eldolith, in case you’ve forgotten you’re not exactly in friendly company right now.” +“You think I care about your threats? Attempt to kill me if you wish, but I will not grovel like this weak human here.” + +Eldolith is certainly going all out to be confrontational, though you wonder how much of it is an act for her people because you embarrassed her with the finger comment. Still, you know svelk and they aren’t all bluff. She’s probably being very serious with her grandstanding which makes you also wonder what power is it that she holds that could potentially stand against you. You’re aware that the svelk do have mages, which does put them above most people, but even you can match that now. + +If Daniel is correct then she does have the support of two other city-states and will probably have Zo as well seeing as they hate orcs. Still even with the extra military help it still wouldn’t be enough. Might take awhile, but you’d conquer eventually. + +Either Eldolith is got something else up her sleeve or she’s being overconfident. Could go either way. + +The temptation to indulge her threats is great, but maybe some caution might be in order. You decide to take Daniel up on his offer and use his city as a launching zone for spies and other possible intelligence gathering plans before you make a final decision on Eldolith. That would also give you time to bring your attention to other potential areas of conquest like Rask or Delerg. +> Make Regnik a vassal and retake Delerg +While not a true threat in the scheme of things, the Island League of Delerg is still a hostile “power” on your borders. If you have to go to war with the Arat Confederacy in the near future, you don’t want to be worrying about getting possibly attacked from another side. Rask can wait for now. + +As for Daniel and Eldolith you’ll indulge both of their requests for now. You tell Daniel that he can consider his city now under the protection of the Empire and that any foreign invasion attempts in any form with be met with force. + +“Why are you looking at me when you say that?” Eldolith asks. +“Because I know your kind and Daniel’s already mentioned you have your influence in two other cities. Now you can have your little territory for now, but make no mistake, you’re going to be watched from here on in and if I sense ANYTHING that could be a potential danger to the Empire you’re going to wish that you never managed to unite the svelk to begin with.” +“We’ll do as we please and nobody is going to stop us!” +“Okay then, as you said just send an invasion force in my direction and see if I’m not being serious.” + +At this point Eldolith just rolls her eyes, but shuts up. Obviously she knows anymore antagonism might result in war which its apparent now that she doesn’t truly want if she can help it. + +Daniel profusely thanks you for heeding his request and will make sure to accommodate your people in anyway he can. You almost shake your head at the man’s naivety if he actually believes his city is going to remain autonomous in the way he believes it will. He’s going to allow your military there, it won’t be long before you’ve got complete control and any “independence” the city thinks it has is only because you’re allowing it. Of course maybe he knows what is probably going to happen and he’s just trying to convince himself otherwise. + +In any event you’re glad when the svelk leave (everyone is no doubt), it was a reminder of less happy times in your life. + +You tell everyone that your next move is taking the islands of Delerg which means you have to rebuild the navy. Crowley is a little disappointed that you aren’t retaking Rask, but he understands your desire to eliminate the Island League first. + +Since building the fleet and having more sailors trained is going to take awhile, you spend the next few months trying to gather more intelligence on the League since your information on them has been spotty at best. Nalin sailors as a general rule have avoided the islands for obvious reasons, but there’s always illegal smuggling so you get some of the information from the prisons. + +Most of the information you get is fairly basic though perhaps more than you had. You find out that the League in general has started to become more introverted over the years, which might also explain why you don’t have much conflict with them anymore. + +Their capital Barnacle is on the largest island and still more or less a pirate haven, but the other islands have no major settlements and those that do tend to just be small groups of people not wanting to share anything with the ruler who lives in Barnacle. + +When the time comes you have what you hope to be a sizable fleet assembled. You doubt if your ships are going to be more maneuverable, but you’re hoping that their size and firepower will be enough to out power any resistance you may have. You also decide to accompany the fleet. Part of you has always been a little uneasy about being on the water, but you figure this would be the perfect time to get over that possible phobia. + +Within a few days you’re in Delerg waters, but you encounter no other ships. You pass by a few small islands, but you decide to make your way to where Barnacle is located. You figure if that’s the largest settlement, you need to take that one first and possible launch more attacks from that point. + +When you sail further towards your destination, you at last encounter a flotilla of ships surrounding a large island. You have an order issued to all of your ships to prepare for battle, but as you get closer a single smaller sailboat with a raised white flag approaches your fleet. + +The crew of the sailboat is taken aboard your own ship when it is confirmed that the boat isn’t containing a bomb or some other trick. The sailboat crew only consists of two people and neither one is armed. They are disheveled and unkempt looking, but apparently one of them is the ruler of Barnacle. + +“Um…hello great Emperor of the…uh Empire. My name is Jon, mayor of Barnacle and this is my first mate Corino.” Jon remarks. +“I’m surprised you were brave enough to parley, or perhaps just foolish. You may speak your mind, but know that we aren’t not leaving until these islands are under my rule.” You say. +“Yes, I already assumed such a thing. That’s why I’m graciously opening up his town to you without conflict.” + +You weren’t expecting much of a fight, but you weren’t expecting this. + +“Truly? You’re surrendering?” +“Well, I’d prefer to think of it as negotiating a better deal, but if you prefer to think of it as a surrender, then we are in no position to argue. I know that in the long run he will not be able to defeat you. Even if we fought today and won, you would only come with more ships later. We only have limited resources, while you have much much more.” +“So…that’s it? The Island League is officially capitulating to the Empire?” + +Jon laughs a bit at your question. + +“Well, let’s just say that I’m capitulating. I’m not sure if the Island League as a whole is, and that’s assuming you even considering a semi-cohesive unit nowadays. Barnacle is yours, and whatever that entails. I just hope that I can continue on as mayor. I believe my experience can…” +“Yeah, yeah, you’re looking to save your own ass. Got it.” You interrupt. “We’ll see, but what’s all this about the rest of the Island League?” + +Jon goes on to tell you that much like the Arat Confederacy, the Island League is not a single entity, but rather an alliance of several groups. Barnacle just happens to be the biggest and most powerful. Jon says that despite the size of the other groups, they may not wish to join and will have to be eliminated completely. He also states that some of the groups have disappeared completely, he says he doesn’t even know what happened to them. + +“Perhaps the environment just swallowed them up. Strange things have been found on the less explored islands after all.” Jon says. +“Hmm, well I suppose if you want to keep your current job, you’ll be providing me of good maps of what you have.” +“Of course. Anything you need! So, shall you be coming to Barnacle now to claim it?” +“Well it is one of the goals of this journey.” You reply. + +When you get to Barnacle, the place is fairly well kept despite being a haven for disreputable criminals. The funny thing is, you don’t really get a sense of resentment as you pass through with platoons of soldiers. It’s early yet though. Jon himself is very accommodating, providing you and your people whatever they want or need. You don’t know though if this is because he really wants to please you so he can keep his job, or he’s planning on tricking you some how. While deceit is always a possibility you sense it’s almost more like…relief? Maybe he was having problems with the rest of the Island League leaders and now with you here he sees it as a way for him to eliminate them while still keeping his position. + +In any case you tell everyone to keep alert and be prepared as usual. + +After a few days, you think you’ve seen everything you need to and gotten all the information you need from Jon and Barnacle in general. After a bit of thinking about it, you decide that you’ll just go to all the inhabited locations that Jon has provided for you and either wipe out the groups or incorporate them into the Empire if they prove to be cooperative. Rather simple plan really. + +You decide that Jon can go ahead and stay mayor of Barnacle, but you’ll be keeping troops here of course as well as your own ships. Now you’re just wondering if you need to stick around for this rather mundane search and destroy mission, or go back to the Empire. +> Stay in Barnacle +Considering that you’re not really going to launch any other major operation until these islands have been tamed, you might as well oversee the process. + +Jon warns you that you’ll probably be doing more fighting than diplomacy. He mentions that some of the other groups living on the islands have become very odd and more isolated, some of them to the point where they attack anyone on sight. + +In the next few days you see what Jon was talking about when you come in contact with your first group of islanders. They don’t even speak other than war cries and in some cases complete gibberish. Other groups, while not as wild they’re still just as hostile and need to be eliminated. It’s a fairly time consuming process sometimes due to their intimate knowledge of their own islands, but it doesn’t matter in the end, because well where are they going to run? + +There is the rare occasion you’re met by hostile ships, but these are much rarer. Jon apparently had the biggest fleet in the League so you easily outnumber and out power any such encounters. + +While you’ve got more than enough ships and troops to split up and search the numerous islands, it still takes months. You do start getting friendlier islander encounters however. Jon figures what you’ve been doing to everyone else is beginning to get around and people are finally waking up to the idea that you mean business and aren’t going away. Seems like a likely conclusion. + +Jon tells you that your search and destroy missions should probably be coming to an end soon as he’s dug around his office and found some of the older maps that haven’t been used in a long time. + +“Not sure if it’s necessary, but I know the Empire likes to be thorough. There’s an island cluster far out to the northwest that you probably haven’t searched yet.” Jon says handing you a dusty old map. +“What, are these like so called lost islands or something?” you ask. +“Heh, not really lost so much as not visited too much anymore. They used to be used more when piracy was more lucrative, but as time went on, they got used a lot less. Also they’ve actually drifted further out to open sea as well so those maps are more of a guide than a precise location. Just another reason why they became less visited or used. Still, who know who might be living out there.” + +With this in mind you set off on what will hopefully be the last mission on these islands. You’ve had enough of ships and water for a long time. + +The journey to the island cluster takes about a week, but the maps weren’t too inaccurate. Jon was right though they have drifted from what the locations were on the charts. You wonder what caused such a thing to these, but not the other islands. Then again you’re not an expert on geology or the ways of the sea, you’re just here to claim the damn islands and be done with it. + +There are no signs of ships, so these islands probably are empty, but you don’t need any possible surprises later. As usual you have some of your fleet split up to have their crews search the other islands. + +When you land on the island that you’ve chosen to search you find that the island’s ground is fairly soft and water seems to seep through it every step you take. You wonder if this place is in the beginning stages of sinking completely. + +The island shows no signs of any life, though upon a bit more exploration, you do come across something you thought was lost to time long ago. + +A ruined structure lies half above the ground, half submerged under water. Its worn and crumbling from age, water and other elements, but it’s the old shadow temple. You’re actually surprised to find it, considering it was leveled when the shadows were eliminated back during the old Empire days. + +Not exactly the most pleasant of memories for you considering they were your enemy and your experience with Cyrus, but you get the impression Jennifer would love to dig around this place for the history value. + +Just as you’re about to call it quits, you hear a loud explosion coming from the direction of where your ship was. You and the rest of your soldiers waste no time in running back it. + +When you arrive you see it on flames and slowly sinking into the sea. You also see some of the crew that stayed aboard dead on the ground nearby, but more disturbing, is that you see some of the same crew cheering at the fact the ship on fire and sinking. You don’t know what exactly the hell is going on here, but you know this is a very bad situation. + +The first thing you do is order the soldiers with you to open fire on the traitors. After that’s done you try to keep morale up. + +“Don’t worry, we’re not going to be stranded here. We’ve got a whole fleet out there and I’m sure several of our ships saw that explosion.” You say. + +Naturally no sooner do you calm everyone’s immediate fears when new ones crop up… all around you. + +Several humanoid creatures begin popping up from the water. They have fishlike qualities and weld weapons made out of coral or bone. It’s obvious what their intent is as they advance on your position. + +You order your troops to form a defensive circle. You lob a couple of fireballs at the fish people group in an effort to thin out their ranks. + +More of them emerge from the water and you realize out severely outnumbered you are. Your soldiers only have so many bullets and eventually they manage to start closing the ranks. You focus on casting an area effect spell in the hopes of eliminating more of them. + +You rain fire and ice down on the island and kill multitudes of the fish people, but it’s at a terrible cost. Most of your troops are wiped out as well. Those that aren’t are severely wounded and yet, you STILL haven’t stopped the fishman horde. + +“What the fuck, it’s like they knew I was…” you don’t even complete that sentence as you mumble it to yourself. + +You suddenly come to the realization that this whole thing, from Barnacle to this island has been one big trap. There’s an island league all right, but the only thing the humans around here are in league with are these aquatic monsters. The worst thing is somehow they got to some of your people and turned them against you. + +Probably managed to do it when groups split up and then came back to report that they didn’t encounter any hostiles, only “friendly islanders.” Who knows how many they managed to brainwash or mind control, or well you don’t know exactly how they got to your people, but it hardly matters right now. + +You spend the better part of the day personally slaying fish monsters. Eventually the rest retreat, but that doesn’t stop the fact that you’re stranded on here. You wait another couple days for the hope of rescue from one of your other ships, but you get none. Instead you see and hear several explosions in the distance, probably from battle or sabotage no doubt. + +You attempt to build a raft, but the wood on this island is scarce and in any case, you don’t have time to finish it as another horde of fishmen come back to attack you again. You manage to fend them off, but they actively destroy what bit of raft you did create. + +They continue this cycle every few days and you’re successful in driving them back despite the odds. You manage to survive on fish person meat to survive, but the problem is a lack of fresh water (And as for fishman blood, well you might as well be drinking sea water). You just can’t keep up your strength to survive the ongoing assault and again, there is no rescue in sight. + +Eventually after a week of holding out, you eventually succumb to a combination of dehydration and the fishman attacks. Soon after your bloody death, your body is mostly consumed and some of your bones used to make new weapons.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While not a true threat in the scheme of things, the Island League of Delerg is still a hostile “power” on your borders. If you have to go to war with the Arat Confederacy in the near future, you don’t want to be worrying about getting possibly attacked from another side. Rask can wait for now. + +As for Daniel and Eldolith you’ll indulge both of their requests for now. You tell Daniel that he can consider his city now under the protection of the Empire and that any foreign invasion attempts in any form with be met with force. + +“Why are you looking at me when you say that?” Eldolith asks. +“Because I know your kind and Daniel’s already mentioned you have your influence in two other cities. Now you can have your little territory for now, but make no mistake, you’re going to be watched from here on in and if I sense ANYTHING that could be a potential danger to the Empire you’re going to wish that you never managed to unite the svelk to begin with.” +“We’ll do as we please and nobody is going to stop us!” +“Okay then, as you said just send an invasion force in my direction and see if I’m not being serious.” + +At this point Eldolith just rolls her eyes, but shuts up. Obviously she knows anymore antagonism might result in war which its apparent now that she doesn’t truly want if she can help it. + +Daniel profusely thanks you for heeding his request and will make sure to accommodate your people in anyway he can. You almost shake your head at the man’s naivety if he actually believes his city is going to remain autonomous in the way he believes it will. He’s going to allow your military there, it won’t be long before you’ve got complete control and any “independence” the city thinks it has is only because you’re allowing it. Of course maybe he knows what is probably going to happen and he’s just trying to convince himself otherwise. + +In any event you’re glad when the svelk leave (everyone is no doubt), it was a reminder of less happy times in your life. + +You tell everyone that your next move is taking the islands of Delerg which means you have to rebuild the navy. Crowley is a little disappointed that you aren’t retaking Rask, but he understands your desire to eliminate the Island League first. + +Since building the fleet and having more sailors trained is going to take awhile, you spend the next few months trying to gather more intelligence on the League since your information on them has been spotty at best. Nalin sailors as a general rule have avoided the islands for obvious reasons, but there’s always illegal smuggling so you get some of the information from the prisons. + +Most of the information you get is fairly basic though perhaps more than you had. You find out that the League in general has started to become more introverted over the years, which might also explain why you don’t have much conflict with them anymore. + +Their capital Barnacle is on the largest island and still more or less a pirate haven, but the other islands have no major settlements and those that do tend to just be small groups of people not wanting to share anything with the ruler who lives in Barnacle. + +When the time comes you have what you hope to be a sizable fleet assembled. You doubt if your ships are going to be more maneuverable, but you’re hoping that their size and firepower will be enough to out power any resistance you may have. You also decide to accompany the fleet. Part of you has always been a little uneasy about being on the water, but you figure this would be the perfect time to get over that possible phobia. + +Within a few days you’re in Delerg waters, but you encounter no other ships. You pass by a few small islands, but you decide to make your way to where Barnacle is located. You figure if that’s the largest settlement, you need to take that one first and possible launch more attacks from that point. + +When you sail further towards your destination, you at last encounter a flotilla of ships surrounding a large island. You have an order issued to all of your ships to prepare for battle, but as you get closer a single smaller sailboat with a raised white flag approaches your fleet. + +The crew of the sailboat is taken aboard your own ship when it is confirmed that the boat isn’t containing a bomb or some other trick. The sailboat crew only consists of two people and neither one is armed. They are disheveled and unkempt looking, but apparently one of them is the ruler of Barnacle. + +“Um…hello great Emperor of the…uh Empire. My name is Jon, mayor of Barnacle and this is my first mate Corino.” Jon remarks. +“I’m surprised you were brave enough to parley, or perhaps just foolish. You may speak your mind, but know that we aren’t not leaving until these islands are under my rule.” You say. +“Yes, I already assumed such a thing. That’s why I’m graciously opening up his town to you without conflict.” + +You weren’t expecting much of a fight, but you weren’t expecting this. + +“Truly? You’re surrendering?” +“Well, I’d prefer to think of it as negotiating a better deal, but if you prefer to think of it as a surrender, then we are in no position to argue. I know that in the long run he will not be able to defeat you. Even if we fought today and won, you would only come with more ships later. We only have limited resources, while you have much much more.” +“So…that’s it? The Island League is officially capitulating to the Empire?” + +Jon laughs a bit at your question. + +“Well, let’s just say that I’m capitulating. I’m not sure if the Island League as a whole is, and that’s assuming you even considering a semi-cohesive unit nowadays. Barnacle is yours, and whatever that entails. I just hope that I can continue on as mayor. I believe my experience can…” +“Yeah, yeah, you’re looking to save your own ass. Got it.” You interrupt. “We’ll see, but what’s all this about the rest of the Island League?” + +Jon goes on to tell you that much like the Arat Confederacy, the Island League is not a single entity, but rather an alliance of several groups. Barnacle just happens to be the biggest and most powerful. Jon says that despite the size of the other groups, they may not wish to join and will have to be eliminated completely. He also states that some of the groups have disappeared completely, he says he doesn’t even know what happened to them. + +“Perhaps the environment just swallowed them up. Strange things have been found on the less explored islands after all.” Jon says. +“Hmm, well I suppose if you want to keep your current job, you’ll be providing me of good maps of what you have.” +“Of course. Anything you need! So, shall you be coming to Barnacle now to claim it?” +“Well it is one of the goals of this journey.” You reply. + +When you get to Barnacle, the place is fairly well kept despite being a haven for disreputable criminals. The funny thing is, you don’t really get a sense of resentment as you pass through with platoons of soldiers. It’s early yet though. Jon himself is very accommodating, providing you and your people whatever they want or need. You don’t know though if this is because he really wants to please you so he can keep his job, or he’s planning on tricking you some how. While deceit is always a possibility you sense it’s almost more like…relief? Maybe he was having problems with the rest of the Island League leaders and now with you here he sees it as a way for him to eliminate them while still keeping his position. + +In any case you tell everyone to keep alert and be prepared as usual. + +After a few days, you think you’ve seen everything you need to and gotten all the information you need from Jon and Barnacle in general. After a bit of thinking about it, you decide that you’ll just go to all the inhabited locations that Jon has provided for you and either wipe out the groups or incorporate them into the Empire if they prove to be cooperative. Rather simple plan really. + +You decide that Jon can go ahead and stay mayor of Barnacle, but you’ll be keeping troops here of course as well as your own ships. Now you’re just wondering if you need to stick around for this rather mundane search and destroy mission, or go back to the Empire. +> Return to the Empire +Seeing as you’ve taken care of the major problem here, you don’t see any need to stick around for the mundane search destroy missions that will undoubtedly take months. You could be focusing on more important things. + +So you return to the Empire giving Jon a warning that while you’ve graciously allowed him to keep his position, any signs of possible betrayal or anything similar will be met with a complete cleansing of Barnacle and his painful drawn out demise. + +When you get back to the Empire, you make the announcement that the Delerg Islands are now currently being incorporated into the Empire and what remains of the so called Island League is being hunted down as you speak. Sightmaster Crowley seems to be happier than anyone as he suggests once again that retaking Rask should be the next priority. + +You tell Crowley that the retaking of Rask will definitely be next on the agenda, but you know it’s going to take a lot more manpower than Delerg. You’d rather wait until you’ve completely tamed those islands first before launching another major operation. Still you can make the preparations in the meantime. + +As the months pass you get a few reports about how things are going in Delerg and so far there have been no major troubles. While there have been a few skirmishes, for the most part your soldiers have found most Delerg inhabitants to willingly surrender to Empire law. + +It is also around this time that you get a letter from Jennifer. She asks you about your recent visit to the Delerg islands and if it might be safe to launch an expedition to the islands. You write back and tell her that its probably “safer” but considering there are still hostile League members and who knows what sort of dangerous wild life on those islands you tell her that she probably shouldn’t go. However, you follow up with if she does insist on going like you know she probably will, then to at least stop at Barnacle first and to take your seal that you’re sending with the letter you’re writing to the nearest officer or even the mayor and she’ll have an armed escort to protect the expedition. + +And just as you suspected, Jennifer goes off on her expedition. She never was one to play it too safe, but you’re pretty sure she’ll be fine. + +Year 547 + +“Trouble, my Emperor?” Crowley asks. +“(Sigh) It looks like. David just sent a message saying that there’s some weird religion that’s been cropping up in Nalin. He says there hasn’t been any real trouble yet, but he felt I should know due to my stance on organized religion. Ugh, I’m going to have to return to the Empire and straighten all this shit out. You know when we brought most of the Eyes with us here to Rask so we could effectively fight the wendigo, I was concerned about perhaps an increase in crime or possibly even a bit of rabble rousing in Nalin. Not this shit. We’re finally making good progress and I don’t need religious fanatics to possibly fuck up my plans.” + +You explain to Crowley that you’ll be leaving him in charge of all operations in Rask. Seeing as he’s very familiar with the territory already you have confidence that he’ll be fine here. Of course he’s been slightly revenge driven on the wendigo when you found out Everwatch was overrun and destroyed by them. + +When you arrive at your palace in Dalt, you’re anxious to get down to this new religion business. David greets you immediately and states that Jennifer is also here and wanting to see you. + +“Jennifer? I thought she was still digging up shit in Delerg and trying find lost islands. She’s finally back?” you say. +“Yes, I just sent her into your private chambers. I thought due to your history, you wouldn’t mind seeing her.” +“Normally I wouldn’t mind, but I’d like to get down to this new religion you mentioned in your message. Can’t afford to waste any time with it.” +“Apologies, Emperor.” +“(Sigh) Very well, she’s already here, I might as well see her…what the hell is that on your arm?” you ask David, pointing at the skin on left forearm. It’s almost scaly looking. + +He reacts rather sheepishly and tries to pull his sleeve back down. + +“Oh that. Just a bad skin rash. I need to make a quick trip to the apothecary.” +“I’ll say, its pretty nasty looking.” You remark and head on to see Jennifer. + +When you arrive to see Jennifer, she’s fiddling with a box of some sort. She closes it up when you walk in. + +“Hey if it isn’t the conquering Emperor of Rask! How is everything going up there?” Jennifer asks. +“Better than expected I suppose, what’s that box?” +“Oh this? Just something I found while digging around Delerg. Y’know you really should’ve stuck around that place longer. It has a lot of fascinating historical things relating to the old Empire.” +“Hmm, well I’m more concerned with the new one myself, but I trust you haven’t had any problems during your time there.” +“No, none at all. My expedition there went very well.” +“Good, good. Look Jennifer, I’d like to play catch up and all that with you, but you’ve caught me at a bad time right now. David has told me there’s a new religion starting to take root in Nalin, and I want to stomp that out, before it becomes a problem.” +“You mean like the shadows caused for the old Empire?” +“Exactly like that.” +“You know one of our discoveries was an old shadow temple located on one of more remote islands. Most of it was underwater, but it was still very interesting.” Jennifer says. +“Hrm. They did have their original temple located in Delerg. Surprised its still around, we had it demolished even back when we finished off their seditious religion for good.” +“I think the problem with the shadows is that they waited too long to strike.” +“What?!” you exclaim. +“Oh don’t get me wrong, I’m glad the Empire defeated them. Its just that from what you’ve told me about the shadows and from what I’ve learned from my findings, its that the shadows waited too long to strike out against a powerful enemy.” + +You’re about to ask Jennifer what the hell is she getting at, when all of a sudden the doors to your private chambers are kicked open and four soldiers fire at you. You’re taken completely by surprise and most of their shots hit you. You fall to the floor wheezing and in pain, but you muster up enough strength to cast a fireball at your assailants who are all set ablaze due to their proximity to each other. + +While they scream and flail about in the hallway trying to put the flames out, you realize you need to heal yourself immediately before you succumb to your mortal wounds. You being to concentrate, but are suddenly kicked in the side of the head and shot again, this time in the neck. You still aren’t dead yet, but you most certainly will be soon. + +You stare up from the floor at Jennifer who holds a smoking pistol in her hand. Probably what she had in the box she was messing with earlier. + +“I wish things could’ve been different, but I knew you would’ve never accepted the glory that is to come when Hukleev rises from his underwater kingdom and submerges the Empire, transforming all into his subjects.” + +You can’t even reply or react to Jennifer’s words let alone her treachery. You just bleed out and start to lose consciousness. The last thing you see is Jennifer moving in closer to you where upon she gives you one last kiss, which tastes faintly of brine.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As much as you hate to go against your instincts, you were only here once and it was over five hundred years ago. Your memory of things isn’t going to be correct due to the changes in the landscape alone. Even if the maps aren’t giving the exact location, they’re at least a more reliable guideline brought back by people who managed to survive this land. + +“Okay, we’ll use the maps. We’re going to have to endure this weather either way I suppose and we’ll be less likely to get lost.” You remark. + +You continue your journey using the maps. It turns out to be a good idea, but nothing is stopping the cold and freezing ice storm that hits hard within a couple hours. + +What remaining horses and other pack animals you had left end up either panicking or outright collapse from the exhaustion. Your group ends up having to dig out a shelter and hunker down for the storm to pass. Food isn’t much of a problem since you just butcher the animals that are dying any way. Fire isn’t either since you can conjure it up. Still, it’s not an ideal situation and others in the group are starting to experience minor frostbite and argue with one another. + +You tell everyone to shut up and listen when you hear a rumbling sound approaching close by. Some think it’s just the sounds of the storm, but you point out that it must be something else since the ground is vibrating a bit. + +“Giant! Get the hell up and move!” you exclaim and the group scrambles to run out of the make shift shelter. Some of you even make it out before a large foot crushes it. + +Now the term giant has never been used lightly, they’re called that for a reason. However, this one is certainly larger than average. In fact, you don’t even think it noticed you when it squashed some of your group. Well it didn’t at first at least, when it feel the gushiness of flattened humans on its foot along with seeing several scattering about the snow, it comes to the conclusion that a giant could only logically come to, namely flatten the rest of you as well. + +“Spread out! Spread out! He’s going to swing that damn club!” you shout. Meanwhile, the giant successfully crushes a couple of the soldiers with his club and at this point you don’t know where the hell anyone else is because their fear has caused them to run out of your line of sight which is small enough with the ice storm hindering long range viewing. + +You roll out of the way of a club slam and run up to the giant’s foot and begin hacking at the back tendon. It isn’t easy since the giant’s skin is calloused to the point where it acts like armor. You only manage to cause a superficial wound before He nearly crushes you again. Realizing you aren’t getting anywhere with that approach, you resort to magic and literally give the giant a hot foot, burning the skin enough to cause a roar of pain. The giant starts moving his foot to sooth the injury in the cold snow. + +You look up and can barely make out the top half of this monster through the storm. You aren’t sure if it’s going to work with the storm being as bad as it is, but you’re going to try anyway. You cast more fire at the giant, not at his foot though, but at his loincloth which is undoubtedly made of some sort of fur. You don’t stop flinging fire until you’re confident that the flames aren’t going out any time soon. + +Predictably the giant starts beating its own flaming crotch in an effort to stop the burning sensation, bellowing so loudly that you image all of Rask can hear. The giant runs away from the combat area grabbing snow and ice around it and throwing it on the still burning fur loincloth. + +“Sheesh, that brings a whole new meaning to the term fireballs.” A voice shouts behind you. You turn around and see a figure completely bundled up in snow gear standing with others dressed in a similar manner. Naturally you’re ready for a fight, but the one who spoke holds up his hands. + +“Hold on there! Are you part of the expedition group? We just bumped into a few of them running from the giant. Said one of you was actually insane enough to fight the damn thing.” +“Yes, what have you done with them?!” +“Nothing! We were on patrol, got caught in the storm and then we heard all the screaming and came to investigate. Your people are right over this small hill here with some more of us. Normally, we’d just send you all on your way and tell you that you were fools to come to Rask in the first place, but now that we’ve seen you in action, I can’t help but think the Vision Lord would want to meet you.” + +Vision Lord? + +“Are you the Eyes?” you ask. +“We are from the Order of the Eye and I’m Sightmaster Crowley but if we’re going to talk, I’d prefer it if we’d do it at Fort Everwatch. You and the others can rest up there.” +“And if we don’t want to go with you?” +“Then you don’t go and you all can return to wherever it is you came from. We’re not holding anyone prisoner, though the lady of your group, a Miss Mol I believe, says you’ve been looking for us. As I said normally we try to keep to ourselves and turn away most visitors, but given that we’re inviting you in with open arms I should think you wouldn’t turn down this opportunity. Besides, I’m fairly certain that none of us here wants to tangle with the guy that just chased away ol’ Snowtop single handedly.” +“What, that giant?” +“If you hadn’t noticed, he’s not just any giant, if he was, he’d be dead by now. He’s probably the oldest living frost giant that we know of and he’s tougher than a troll steak and almost taller than some of the smaller mountains in this area. Fortunately he seems to only wander about during these bad ice storms that usually no idiot would be caught in, but then here we are.” + +And here you are. You insist that you want to see Jennifer before going anywhere. Crowley takes you to see her and the few survivors. She’s glad to see you’re alive and hugs you. Her enthusiasm for this trip hasn’t diminished and she definitely wants to go see the Eyes’ home, despite the fact that you all were nearly crushed to death by a giant, though that can’t be said for some of her employees. You’re just glad she’s all right and you’re within reach of your destination. + +It doesn’t take too long to get to Fort Everwatch. It wasn’t anywhere near Fort Defiance once stood though so its just as well that you didn’t go that way. Everwatch isn’t particularly large or fancy, but it does look like it was built to stand the test of time. The interior is just as utilitarian Other than symbols of an eye adorning various parts of the fort, it actually reminds you of an old Empire fort. You can’t help but feel at home here despite only just entering the place. + +You are brought to a great hall area and Crowley says he’s going to fetch the Vision Lord. In the meantime he’s tells you all to stay here, but feel free to look around. + +“This is pretty exciting, I hope they’ll let us take something back from this place.” Jennifer says while looking at the various plaques. +“Anything’s possible I suppose, but they don’t look like they’re much into luxuries. The only decorations here seem to be dedicated to their fallen like these plaques or those eye symbols…oh wait, they seem to have battle trophies as well, check out that giant’s skull hanging high on the left wall.” You remark still feeling a little wary of things. + +Eventually Crowley comes back with who you guess to be the Vision Lord. The Vision Lord doesn’t look particularly impressive despite his name though it is certain by the scars on his face he is no stranger to battle. You were expecting him to be a lot older though as it stands he looks about your age…well not counting your five-century nap of course. + +He stares at you, Jennifer and the rest for a moment and then he points to Jennifer. + +“I’m guessing you and this lot come from the Nalin Republic.” +“How did you know?” Jennifer asks. +“Where else would you come from? You’re certainly not from one of the six cities of Arat. They’re too busy with their petty squabbles. Besides, we’ve come across some of your type before wandering up here. A few of them even joined our group rather than head back down.” +“You recruited our explorers?!” Jennifer says. +“Yes, if they showed promise and desired to join. I’m sure you might even bump into a couple of them in this place assuming you haven’t already. Now you on the other hand…you are very interesting. Your armor looks as if it comes from another time, you can cast magic with ease and I heard you fended off Snowtop all by yourself. That’s a feat so impressive I can’t imagine you are native to the Republic.” the Vision Lord remarks and points to you. +“What I find interesting is this place and from what I can tell by your commemorations of the your fallen, you feel keeping history is important. So tell me, did Warrick have this fort built or was it sometime after his death?” you say causing some eyebrows to raise. +“You know of Vision Lord Warrick then? Not many outside our order know our founder. How did you come across this information?” +“Easy. We were practically siblings. He was an Eternal, just like I am. He wasn’t a Vision Lord back then, just a Sightmaster, though I guess he felt the need to assign himself a higher title. Doesn’t matter. I’m just glad to see another piece of the old Empire still alive, even if it has taken a very different form.” + +With this response the Vision Lord steps back and the other Eyes now begin whispering amongst themselves. + +“So, the rumors are true. An Eternal does walk the earth again and it is indeed the one Vision Lord Warrick mentions in his writings. As you might expect we don’t get much news this way and we don’t venture too far from here, let alone Rask. In fact the few recruits we manage to get are probably our biggest source of new information. Tell me, how is it that you live?” + +You explain the exact situation as vaguely as you did to Jennifer and Quintus. The cataclysm struck suddenly, you were encased in a magic shell, etc. etc. and eventually Jennifer’s crew dug you up. + +“I see. How unfortunate that you came in contact with the Republic first, but then I suppose it’s better than being stuck in a magic coffin. Still, you’re here now and I believe you will find a better home here.” The Vision Lord remarks. +“What?” +“I’m inviting you to stay with us. Come now. This Order was founded by an Eternal I’m somewhat familiar with their mindset based on the writings of Vision Lord Warrick. I can only imagine the dull tedium you’ve endured in the Republic. How have you managed to occupy your time?” +“Do not presume you know me based on the writings of Warrick. Truth be told, he didn’t exactly create the Eyes, at least not in their original form. The Eyes were originally created by this woman’s great ancestor Jacob Mol.” You say pointing to Jennifer. + +The Vision Lord nods his head a bit. + +“Apologies. I did not mean to offend. And if as you say this lady’s ancestor had a hand in creating the Eyes then we’ve been doubly blessed by the presence of her as well. However, I do believe that you were and still are a man of battle and war. And again I can’t imagine those things being in great supply in the Republic. Surely you would enjoy living here instead. You would be great asset in our own war of extermination of the wendigo. We could certainly use the help.” + +This is a sudden offer and certainly one you weren’t expecting. The strange thing is it isn’t out of the question either. A few days ago you were just going on about to Jennifer about how you were restless in the Republic even with your efforts to help restructure it into a new empire. A glorious undertaking to be sure, but one you’ve had doubts about recently. + +Now this opportunity is certainly less impressive, but there’s something alluring about its simplicity. All you would have to concern yourself with is the battle. The war. The victories over your enemies in melee combat. You’d even live in a place that’s much comfortable to you. + +Of course there’s also Jennifer to think about, but while your relationship with her is blooming into something more romantic what future do you have with her really? She’s not even like Alison in that she’s a warrior and can truly connect with you on some level even if she does make the attempts. + +There’s also the fact that you’ve been worried about her the whole trip. Will you continue to worry about her and allow that to be a weakness to be exploited? If she’s killed will you go through the same emotional ruin you did when Alison was murdered? Do you even want to deal with any of that again? + +You tell the Vision Lord that you and he are going to have to discuss this all in more detailed before you make a decision. Jennifer looks concerned when you say this, but doesn’t say anything. The Vision Lord says that while you and he talk, the rest of your group can rest up or feel free to explore as there is nothing of major value and he trusts nobody would be foolish enough to steal anything. + +You speak with the Vision Lord (who reveals his name is Kells) for quite awhile on the current situation of his order as well as the history of this place and Rask in general. He also remarks about how the Eyes are so hated and feared by the wendigo. As you might’ve guessed magic is in play, but only to a minor degree. Over the centuries the Eyes have managed to focus their minds to create shields against wendigo mental attacks along with being able to banish them to oblivion. (Still vulnerable to normal death through wendigo hosts obviously though) + +After your discussion he tells you that he’ll leave you to your decision, but that he hopes you’ll stay. You then speak with Jennifer about your situation; naturally she wants you to return with her and explains all reasons why. You end up sleeping on the offer and pondering everything some more, but ultimately the decision is up to you. +> Voices of the past (Writings of Vision Lord Warrick) +While you’re trying to make up your decision on whether or not to stay here or not, you end up walking around fort and bumping into Kells again. He holds a small old worn book in his hand and holds it out to you. + +“What’s this?” you ask. +“This is the journal of the first Vision Lord Warrick and your fellow Eternal.” Kells says. + +You have a sudden feeling that you’ve done this before… + +You take the book and it would seem that at least the Eyes took better care of Warrick’s private journal than the numerous collectors (including Quintus) did with Brenda’s since the pages aren’t falling out. + +“Normally only the Vision Lord is allowed to read through it, but under the circumstances, I believe you have just as much right seeing as you knew the man. You’re probably thinking that I’m trying to influence you with nostalgia and you’d be right, but I think if you read through the book, you’d see how the Eyes have kept the spirit of the Empire alive and that ultimately you belong here with us. I’ll leave you to your decision.” Kells remarks and leaves you alone. + +Seeing as you could take your mind off of your current dilemma you figure you might as well scan through the journal. You don’t quite have the feeling of “snooping” through Warrick’s privacy like you did with Brenda. Perhaps because you’ve gotten used to the fact that they’ve been dead for centuries and they aren’t going to care what you do. + +While Warrick’s journal is in much better condition than Brenda’s, it still displays a lot of wear and tear probably from too much handling. Honestly if these people really honored their predecessors so much you’d think they’d take better care of these things! + +Apparently Warrick was “lucky” enough to be near the Rask border when the cataclysm hit. He mentions that he barely survived the magic acid storms that engulfed the northern part of Quala. Rask wasn’t doing too much better, but at least severe ice storms were better than acid falling out of the sky. + +He goes on to mention that during the cataclysm the magic barrier that contained the wendigo was destroyed and the evil spirits ran amok throughout Rask. Entire towns were cannibalizing each other before Warrick could scrap together what remained of the military and the Eyes. He mentions being fortunate that several Empire mages escaped to Rask and they were able to combat the wendigo menace. + +Still, it was never enough, even driving the hungry spirits away was only a temporary solution, there were only a few mages to outright banish them and that always took a lot of energy. And wendigos weren’t the only threat. Ogres and giants also took advantage of the chaos. + +Still Warrick wasn’t going to be deterred in his mission to hold together Rask since for all he knew it was all that remained of the Empire. Quala was still too dangerous to travel through and he had heard no news. + +One passage gets your attention. + +Entry 34 + +Another wendigo attack and lost another good soldier today. Still the fact that I only lost one makes it a good day. The fact that the mages actually managed to banish the bastard makes it even better. + +I have still heard no news from any higher command. I was hoping that my Eternal brother who serves by the Emperor’s side would have contacted me by now, but sadly I fear that he along with the Emperor may not have survived this terrible disaster. I can hardly believe it. I always thought he’d outlive all of us. At this point I’d even tolerate Brenda’s hostile condemnations towards me, at least then I’d know she was still alive. + +I may very well be the last Eternal, but I will not be the last Eye and if I can help it, Rask will not be the last bastion of the Empire. We’ve lost too much already. Even now several towns have fallen here and only a handful of huddled masses remain in the more secured ones. + +The Eyes have always been the ones to keep the Empire together and if they’re going to continue doing that they are going to have to change to combat the wendigo threat more effectively. They are going to have to learn magic and fortunately we have mages to teach them. It isn’t going to be easy, and most are probably not going to be able to learn at all, but I do know if one has the potential, then it can be done. + +This task, this great work, this VISION is going to take years, possibly even more than I have, but someone will take over for me and that person after that and so forth. + +We will live on for as long as the Eyes survive, the Empire will survive. + +You close the book and reflect upon the words within.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Alright, you’ll have your two Trog, I need to go back and speak with my people about which two though.” + +Trog nods and you return to the group to explain the situation, it goes about as well as you expected. + +“You can’t expect us to stay with these savages! They’ll kill us!” one of the workers exclaims. +“We’re at war with these monsters!” a soldier remarks. +“I’d have to agree that leaving anyone here is tantamount to leaving them to die.” Jennifer adds. +“Look, this is the ONLY way we’re getting into Rask without a fight. And I guarantee we’re in no position to be fighting hundreds of orcs.” You remark and then point at the soldiers in the group. “Now you lot are soldiers which technically puts you under my command and if I order any of you to stay you better damn well do it or else you’re going to have me to deal with and I assure you if that happens you’d rather have orcs.” + +“That being said, I’d rather NOT leave any soldiers behind, because we’re going to need every competent fighter we can get when we do get in Rask.” You say and then point to the civvies in the group. “You lot on the other hand, I can afford to leave any one of you behind.” + +This remark is met with more protest and exclamations of how which one of them is a valuable member of the group. You’re unimpressed and simply say if there’s any digging or carrying to be done, anyone can do that and if its for some intellectual purpose, Jennifer is still going to be the most knowledgeable one on whatever it is you do find in Rask, so again the rest are superfluous. + +This statement is met with more protests until Jennifer suddenly tells them all to shut up. + +“I don’t like this, but he’s right. I’ll take volunteers first.” Jennifer remarks. + +Predictably more begging, protests and threats follow, which Jennifer addresses that it’s either stay with the orcs or try to head back to Nalin without any escort protection. Eventually one brave soul volunteers, muttering that if he’s lucky maybe they won’t eat him and he can learn more about their culture. The second one loses a lot draw. She’s not happy about her bad luck and the situation, but resigns herself to her fate. + +“I’m glad you backed me up.” You say. +“I didn’t really want to and I’m sure I’m going to get a lot of backlash from my workers, but the potential for this discovery is too important and I trust you. I just hope you trust this orc as much.” Jennifer remarks. +“I don’t, but he’s been reliable on matters much greater than this one. The worst that could happen is that he plans on killing us on the return trip when we’re exhausted from the dangers of Rask, but we’ll deal with that when the time comes.” You answer. +“Well I guess this is all worth it then.” + +After the two “sacrificial lambs” are presented to Trog, he promises once again that no harm will come to them and the rest of you cautiously pass through Flogger territory, which actually overlaps partially into Rask. In fact you pass by an area where you believe Fort Destiny once stood. There’s no evidence of it anymore though, it’s just wilderness now. You wonder if was destroyed during the cataclysm or if it was time that ultimately took it over. + +Eventually you clear Flogger territory and you’re in the true wilderness of Rask. + +You, Jennifer and a couple of others go over the maps deciding which way would be the best. Using your memory, you point out that despite the long passage of time, there are still evidence of old Empire roads and that you should use those as a basic guide to head north. If you’re lucky, it may very well take you all the way to Fort Defiance, or at least where the fort used to stand. + +The journey north is as miserable as you remember when you first came to this unforgiving land. If anything it seems worse now that it’s no longer tamed by the Empire. Still, you travel quite a distance before you catch sight of figures moving about in the surrounding forests. + +“Stop. We’re being watched and we’re going to be attacked soon. In fact, we’re probably surrounded, I suggest everyone prepare themselves.” You say. + +The group forms a protective circle as best they can while you try to keep an eye on all the possible directions of attack. + +Eventually a few orcs and ogres emerge from the trees. However, something doesn’t look quite right about them. They’re savage looking like you’d expect, but even for their kind they’re moving a fashion that isn’t typical. It’s more like how an animal would move. They don’t make any usual taunts or threats either, but you do hear some loud guttural growling sounds. + +It probably isn’t surprising that some of the soldiers decide they aren’t going to wait around to be attacked and go ahead and fire. Two or three of the attackers are wounded, but then the rest make a horrible wailing sound which causes everyone to clutch their ears in pain. + +Then they move in for the attack, but it’s more like a loping gait rather than running. Ogres don’t typically run either… + +“Oh shit, WENDIGOS!” you shout and start casting your mind shield spell, but before you can complete it a possessed orc is already upon you. + +“Meat!” the orc hisses with its fang filled mouth right in front of your face. You feel a claw dig through your armor and puncture your skin just before you stab the monster through the neck with your dagger. Blood spurts all over you before manage to get the thing off of you and stomp it repeatedly in the throat, crushing it completely. + +You then hear a voice in your mind. + +“Sssssss! I sense power…great power…you’re an Eye! Hated Eye! Eyes! Away! Away my fellows! Before this they destroy us all!” the voice exclaims. + +Before you know it, the possessed orcs and ogres cease their attack and begin backing away. Everyone is a bit confused and quite frankly you are too. + +“Why’d they stop attacking?” Jennifer asks. +“Because we were kicking their asses! Hah! So much for the dreaded wendigos!” a soldier remarks, several of the other soldiers cheer in agreement and press forward to attack the retreating wendigos. + +You aren’t exactly sure what’s going on, but apparently this wendigo knows you have the capability to destroy it. However, nobody else here can and if the wendigos figure that out, you’re going to be in trouble when the spirits are released from their dead hosts. + +You’re not about to give away the fact that everyone else is defenseless by shouting verbal commands to stop attacking, so the best thing you can do is cast your spell. Which is going to be a brand new experience for you since you’ve never actually cast a mind shield spell over other people before. + +Ignoring the sounds of gunshots and shouting around you, you concentrate on your spell and try to focus it on the group. It takes a lot more energy than you anticipated. Meanwhile you’re getting questions on what you’re doing. + +“Shut up! All of you! I’m trying to protect our lives and it’s taking all my concentration! Now does anyone hear any voices? And I’m not taking about my own right now. I’m taking about raspy sounding voices going on about giving up or something similar.” + +This question is followed by the group all-stating that they don’t hear anything like that. You breathe a sigh of relief and while you still can’t sense any wendigo spirits lurking about, you’re not going to take your guard down yet. + +“Okay, good. Like I said before we got here, if anyone does hear voices let me know immediately. I heard one of them in my head and it thought we were eyes, or they thought I was. It got scared and told the rest to retreat before I destroyed them all.” +“An eye? What does that mean?” someone asks. +“If I had to guess? They thought I was part of an elite military branch force of the old Empire.” You say. +“We’ve only found a bit of information on the Eyes, but I didn’t know they actively hunted wendigos.” Jennifer says. +“They didn’t. In fact other than some stealth operations during the Felkan War their primary function was internal security after the shadows were disposed of. They didn’t have any magic abilities to destroy creatures like wendigos.” +“Something must’ve changed then.” +“I’ll say. The only time I’ve ever heard fear in a wendigo’s voice is just before I banished it. I’m guessing it sensed I had that ability and figured I was an eye, which leads me to believe that this mythical warrior’s guild we’re trying to find must be run by the eyes or decendents of them. Heh. Glad you held something together ol’ friend.” You say with a smile. +“What’s that?” Jennifer asks not knowing what you’re thinking about. +“Warrick. He was head of the Eyes. A Sightmaster. I can only imagine that if the Eyes did survive to this day, he must’ve had a hand in it somehow. Come on, I’m actually just as anxious as you to find this place now.” + +After patching up some of the wounded you’re soon on your way again. You hate dispelling the protection, but if you keep it going constantly, you’ll be running out of stamina when you might need it for more physical foes. You just hope that the wendigos continue to believe that you’re all Eyes. + +As it turns out, the rest of your journey is plagued by horrible weather conditions instead. There’s also debate on which way to go when the remnants of the Empire roads disappear to wilderness and can no longer provide a base guideline of where to travel. + +Jennifer and most of her workers want to follow the maps, but you’re convinced that you should continue in the direction of where you last remember Fort Defiance to stand. +> Follow your instinct +Maybe things have somewhat since you were here last time, but the fact remains, you were actually in Rask once, nobody else here has and who knows if those maps are accurate. You’re going to trust your gut and head towards where you remember Fort Defiance was located. Nobody in Jennifer’s expedition crew is exactly pleased with that decision, but Jennifer calms them down and says she trusts you. + +You continue your journey and it’s a miserable experience as a freezing ice storm hits hard within a couple of hours. + +What remaining horses and other pack animals you had left end up either panicking or outright collapse from the exhaustion. Your group ends up having to dig out a shelter and hunker down for the storm to pass. Food isn’t much of a problem since you just butcher the animals that are dying any way. Fire isn’t either since you can conjure it up. Still, it’s not an ideal situation and others in the group are starting to experience minor frostbite and argue with one another. + +A couple more days of this and you’re still not at your goal and the cold is even worse. Either you’ve gotten lost or Fort Defiance has long since fallen to the wilderness. More arguing occurs and blame is placed on you. + +“I told you we should’ve followed the maps!” one of Jennifer’s crew remarks. “Why the hell are we listening this guy for? He’s also the one that insisted on leaving two of our people with blood thirsty orcs!” +“I’m also the guy that’s keeping you alive, but that situation can be changed…” you answer. + +Surprisingly the man doesn’t back down. + +“Oh sure, threaten me with violence, that’s your solution to everything isn’t it?” +“It’s worker pretty well so far and suggest you back off if you don’t want a demonstration to see just how well.” +“Go ahead Mr. badass eternal! We’re already fucking dead anyway now that you’ve gotten us lost! Of course you probably don’t give a shit because you’ll just survive by eating our bodies after we all…” + +You can’t hold back any longer, you punch the man in the face breaking his nose. He falls to the ground in a daze. You step forward to give him more of a thrashing, but Jennifer gets in your way. + +“Alright that’s enough! I think you’ve proven your point to Kevin. We’re already fighting the elements and the hostile creatures that live here, we don’t need to fight each other as well.” +“(Sigh) Fine, but this asshole better not step out of line again, otherwise I might not be as reasonable!” you remark and then gesture to your soldiers to help Kevin up. + +As they do so, it would seem that Kevin isn’t quite through with you yet. He grabs a pistol from one of your soldiers and fires it right at you. He’s not accurate enough to get a kill shot, but he’s close enough that he doesn’t miss. You feel a hot burning sensation go right through your stomach and pass through your back. + +“Shit! Fuck…” you utter and fall to the ground. While you’re bleeding internally and externally, your soldiers make quick work of Kevin causing remainder of Jennifer’s people to either look on in horror or scream and yell. + +Jennifer rushes to your aid, but she isn’t quite sure what to do. + +“Damn it, should’ve…get off me!” you exclaim. Your body is partially in shock, but you manage to catch a breath long enough to gather your thoughts. You need to heal yourself quickly. + +With you attempting to concentrate, Jennifer’s crew screaming, your soldiers threatening to subdue them and Jennifer trying to reason with everyone, nobody is paying attention to their surroundings. at least not until an ogre comes loping out from the trees and rips off one of your soldier’s heads. + +More ogres come out of the trees as well and they aren’t normal kind… + +“Fucking wendigos!” you shout. + +The wendigos must have been watching you and finally figured out you aren’t Eyes at all and given that you’re somewhat incapacitated now, they also figured now would be good time to strike and they were correct. + +You can’t even get up, because the bullet ripped through your spine paralyzing you from the waist up, the bet you can do is wave your sword around in an attempt to slash at the wendigos nearby. + +It doesn’t take long for them to easily kill Jennifer and her crew, followed by your soldiers and by the time they get to you, you’re still weak from blood loss and having limited mobility. + +You manage to kill one of them before one puts its fist through your chest and rips off the top half of your torso for a feast.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You may have lost your mind thinking that you can even attempt living a normal life, but then you’re the same guy who actually listened to a twisted abusive svelk bitch that convinced you it was a good idea to attack the Emperor too. + +And what’s this decision compare to something like that? + +You tell your second to take command of the camp, when he asks for how long, you just tell him until further notice. He’s at a loss of how to respond as you leave. + +When you arrive back at the museum, you find that Calvin, Jennifer and several others are packing up a lot of equipment. + +“Hey, what’re you doing here?” Jennifer asks. +“I had to talk to you…what’s all this?” +“Another expedition! After all these years, Quintus is funding another one.” +“What? He’s sending you to dig around in Quala again?” +“No, we’re going to Rask!” Jennifer says excitedly. +“Rask!?” +“Yes! Remember when I mentioned there were rumors of a warrior’s guild up there? Well over the years I’ve been studying old maps and the newer charts created by the few adventurers that came back alive from there and I think I’ve managed to pin point the location. See?” + +Jennifer suddenly unfolds a map and points to a circled spot on it. You know a lot of time has passed, but if your knowledge of Rask geography is still remotely relevant at all, that looks like where Fort Defiance would’ve been located. + +“That looks like where Fort Defiance was located.” You remark. +“There was a fort there?” Jennifer says. +“Yeah, it was the furthest military outpost in the north of the Empire, well save for one other, but that was more like a small watchtower.” You answer. +“I didn’t know you served in Rask.” +“I didn’t actually, but I did carry out one personal favor there for a fellow Eternal, the one manning that watch tower I just mentioned actually.” +“Oh. Well still, this would be one of those times I wish you could come with us. Your knowledge of the area even if it is out of date would probably be useful.” +“Believe me, I’m tempted to. I can’t believe Quintus is just sending you out there like this. The dangerous journey TO Rask is bad enough, but the weather in Rask is just as treacherous as the inhabitants and I can only imagine after centuries without any order there its probably only gotten worse since.” +“Well he probably wouldn’t have if I hadn’t went to him about the information I found. Plus he was in a good mood about senator’s Batalimus’ recent suicide. Did you hear about that?” +“Uh, yeah another lucky break for our side, look I better go with you.” You say. +“But don’t you have orcs to slay or defending our borders or…” +“All of that can be done without me, I think the army is competent enough now that I don’t need to hold their hands and if they still do then you’re REALLY going to need me to come with you because that means the soldiers you are taking won’t be worth shit in a fight. In fact if you even want to get to Rask, you’re going to need me to negotiate with the Flogger tribe. Not to mention there’s much worse things in Rask than ogres and giants.” +“What about Quintus? Don’t you have to report this to him?” +“Fuck Quintus, he’s not my master. He could stand without me holding his hand every five minutes too. Nobody tells me what to do.” + +Jennifer takes a pause from your remark, before continuing. + +“Well, alright then, as long as you don’t think it’s going to cause any problems I’d be very happy for you to join us. So what was it that you wanted to talk to me about?” +“Huh? Oh…that. Uh, nevermind now.” +“Oh come on, you obviously had something pretty important if you left your post in Quala to tell me. + +This expedition to Rask business sort of distracted you from your original intent of coming here in the first place, but nevertheless you haven’t really abandoned your previous thoughts of settling down with Jennifer so you take her to one side and tell her. Her reaction is mixed though not one of any negativity. + +“Sounds like you’ve given this some thought and this decision couldn’t have just been on a whim for you.” Jennifer says. +“It wasn’t, that’s why I had to see you. I mean I know there’s something between us and why shouldn’t I focus on that?” you reply. +“What about reviving the Empire?” +“Yeah, originally after I woke up and got a bit more of my bearings, the concept of doing that did sound appealing and move me into the direction I’ve been currently going in, but that’s been my whole life! I mean my original purpose is gone. MY Empire is gone. Why shouldn’t I try something else? What could it hurt?” +“Nothing I suppose, but have you thought about what else you would do with your time? I mean no offense, but battle and war are pretty much your best skills.” +“Yes, I know. I wasn’t talking about abandoning such things completely though, I mean I could go with you on expeditions and guard your museum.” +“Guard the museum?!” Jennifer says followed by laughter. +“What’s so funny?” +“The idea that we’d need a warrior mage to guard my father’s museum is hilarious to me. I think the word overkill comes to mind. While the expedition protection would no doubt be of help, it isn’t like that’s what we do all the time as you well know. We’re in the museum most of the time and you’d get bored. Very bored. Besides, it isn’t like we get people trying to steal anything on a regular basis. The last time was ten years ago and the thief in question only managed to grab the tooth of an old Usksha sand worm before he was apprehended.” +“Well I could talk about the old Empire when people come through or something…” +“So you want to be part of the tour? Yeah, I don’t see that working in the long term either. Look I think you’re just feeling home sick or time sick or something again. Why don’t you think about this decision more after our trip to Rask, and if you still feel the same way when we come back, we can make arrangements for your future plans I suppose.” + +You agree to Jennifer’s proposal since she does have some good points and now you’re a little less worried about your future so much as you’re more concerned with this expedition. When Calvin hears that you’re accompanying the expedition he looks relieved. He mentions that he actually tried to talk his daughter out of going on this thing, but she wouldn’t be swayed so he was going to go with her knowing that he’d probably die in the process. Since you’re going now, he’s going to stay at the museum stating that he’s completely confident that she’ll come back alive now. + +Along the way to Rask you warn everyone about the wendigo. Other than Jennifer nobody else seems to know anything about them and she’s only heard stories. Apparently they’re just “myths” nowadays, but you assure everyone that they’re very real and if anyone begins to feel like an unnatural force trying to gain control over their mind, they need to see you immediately and fight the mental attack as if they’re life depended on it because it does. This information probably makes everyone a bit more paranoid and on edge, but quite frankly they should be. + +Eventually you get to the Flogger tribe territory, which seems to have moved further south from when you last remember. Apparently Trog has indeed been taking advantage of uniting the other tribes under his banner. The decor hasn’t changed though; they’re still favoring the hundreds of dead bodies stretched across various wooden frames with their backs completely flayed of all skin to mark their turf. + +Naturally everyone (especially the soldiers) are expecting a fight given that you’re technically at war with the orcs in general, but you tell them you can handle this and tell them to stay put. + +“Oy! Youz that Ternal man!” an orc shouts from the crude watchtower. Not that you’re an expert, but this orc is familiar, if only because of his great fat belly. +“Fatbelly wasn’t it? Where’s your comrade?” + +It takes awhile for Fatbelly to process this question at first, but he eventually he knows who you’re talking about. + +“Oh, youz must mean Bilge. He dead. Idjit got ‘imself killed by gettin’ into scrap wit an ogre. ‘Ead got popped off an lived for awhile. Won bet on how long! Hah! Anywayz Trog spectin’ you again. ‘Ead on in.” +“He knew I was coming?” +“Geez, maybe youz powerful, but yooz stooped as Bilge. Trog Shaman! He haz vishuns member?” +“Hmm, how could I forget.” You say ignoring the rest of Fatbelly’s insult and heading past the dead bodies. Trog isn’t far ahead.” + +“So once again the Eternal visits Trog. And once again Trog see that you come, but not know the reason. Is our arrangement going as planned?” +“Yes, in fact while I’m here I might as well address that too. We’ve gotten what we need from the war. You no longer have to play any role in it, that is stirring up the other orc tribes.” +“Trog see. Very well we did have an agreement and the Floggers have benefitted greatly from this arrangement, so it is done for now. However, Trog cannot promise that other minor tribes will not still attack. Can only promise that Floggers will no longer play any part in such attacks.” +“That’s fine, probably for the best that we still get a few attacks. The other reason that brings me here, is that I and my group need to get through to Rask.” +“Trog see. Can you not just go around us?” +“From what I can tell Trog, that isn’t even possible anymore. Your territory was probably blocking the easiest route to Rask to begin with, now it looks like you’re blocking it entirely. We have to go through your territory.” + +Trog doesn’t look enthused by your suggestion, but ponders it a bit. + +“Very well, but you cannot just pass for free. Need to extract some sort of payment or security of goodwill.” +“We aren’t really carrying any valuables Trog.” +“Do not want things. Want people. Give us two. One for your passage through and one for the return trip.” +“Okay…so what are you going to do with them?” +“Nothing. Just keep here so you do not pull any tricks.” +“What tricks would I play, I’ve always dealt straight with you. And you do realize that if I was going to play any sort of trick, I’d be more than willing sacrifice whoever I did leave behind and do it anyway?” +“Hmm, true. But still, cannot just let you pass for free. Tribe would perceive as weakness. Those are the terms. More than fair.” + +Trog IS being more than fair. He’s downright civilized compared to most humans you’ve known. Under normal circumstances you’d do it without a blink, but you’re fairly certain the group is going to be VERY resistant to this idea and you can’t say you’d blame them. + +It’s this or just pushing your way through. +> Push your way through +Trog is being fair, but there is always the chance that Trog is outright lying and he’ll have them for breakfast or something. It isn’t likely, but it’s still a possibility. Plus he needs to realize that he’s gained a lot with your alliance. + +“Trog, I understand your position, but I can’t just leave two people with you. Now our deal was pretty good for you, so I’d say letting us through is the least you can do.” You remark. + +Trog continues to remain stoic and unmoved by your remark. + +“This offer is not negotiable, Eternal. Perhaps you are mistaking Trog’s civility for weakness, but Trog urge you not to make such a mistake. You either pay price or you can find another to Rask.” Trog says. +“Erm…maybe we should do that. Surely we could find another way around and…” Jennifer begins to say, but you’re only half paying attention. You’re too annoyed with Trog right now. + +“Look, we’re not going to waste time going around your shitty barren territory. It’s not like you’ve got anything worth while here that we’re going to disturb anyway. YOU seem to forget who the fuck I am Trog. I could slaughter you right now and you know it! We’re going through and that’s it!” +“Eternal you kill Trog and you’ll bring down the entire wrath of the Floggers down on your head! And even if you get away, Floggers will turn their eyes towards your precious nation and never stop waging war until it has completely been burned to the ground.” +“Given some recent events I’ve experienced, you seem to think I actually care about Nalin…but perhaps killing you isn’t the solution.” You say and then suddenly grab Trog. He attempts to struggle, but after a couple of hard punches to his face you knock him the ground and tell one someone to hand you a rope. + +“What…what the hell are you doing?! Isn’t this going to bring every orc here down on our head?!” Jennifer exclaims. +“Nope. Trog here is going to be our safe passage. Now gimme some damn rope!” you order. + +One of the Jennifer’s crew nervously throws one to you, meanwhile everyone including your soldiers are looking around anticipating an attack. + +“You…you fool. Eternal, you believe Floggers will not attack just because you have Trog hostage? You think Trog cares about life?” +“Nice try Trog, but it’s all bullshit. If you were a regular simple-minded orc, I’d agree, but you aren’t are you? You’re a fucking shaman, I’d wager that even most of the Floggers know how advantageous that is and they won’t risk your death. As for your life, well like I said, if you were the average orc I’d say no you don’t care, but you’re not average. You have a sense of self-preservation. If you didn’t you wouldn’t have made a deal with me in the first place. Now let’s go!” you say and pull Trog up from the ground after tying him up. + +“You will rue this day Eternal.” Trog says, but complies with your commands. +“I’m really afraid, this seems really dangerous, maybe we should just go back.” Jennifer says. +“What the fuck did you think this was going to be Jennifer? A walk through the flower fields? If you think this is dangerous, what the hell do you think Rask is going to be like? It’s a pitiless land filled with fucking monsters that will eat your fucking heart! Now this is YOUR expedition, I suggest you get comfortable with the fact that unexpected things like this might happen!” you yell. + +Jennifer is taken back by your response. Granted she’s been on the receiving end of your vitriol before, but not for quite some time and at the time you weren’t putting everyone in danger. + +“Come on, we’re getting the hell out of here.” Jennifer remarks to her crew. “This is just insanely dangerous.” Jennifer remarks and begins to walk in the opposite direction. Her crew slowly follows her. +“Are you fucking kidding me?” you say. “After all I’ve done for you?!” +“Done for me? You ruined this expedition by taking an orc shaman hostage! Even if we DO make it through, did you think about how we were going to make it back? I dunno what the hell happened with you recently, but you are not thinking shit through. You just told Trog that you didn’t even care if orcs burned down Nalin! I highly suggest you get your…” + +Jennifer’s speech is cut short with an arrow through her back and out her chest. She stares down briefly to see the head of the arrow still dripping blood and piece of her heart on it. She then falls to the ground dead. + +The weird thing is you don’t even see any orcs in the direction where the arrow came from. In fact there aren’t any around, yet another arrow hits one of your soldiers. + +You turn to Trog who just stands there silent and still tied up. + +“Call off your fucking greenskins Trog! You turned them invisible or whatever you did, I don’t care, call them off or your life ends here!” you command. +“You were right Eternal, Trog do value life. That’s why Trog not even really here.” Trog says and before your eyes you see Trog’s image completely disappear. An illusion. All along you were talking to an illusion. Who knows where the real Trog is. + +You have little time to find out as more arrows from invisible orcs rain down on your position killing whoever is still left. Had you been paying more attention, you could’ve just cast a barrier around yourself and avoided them, but while you were threatening illusionary Trog, several arrows puncture your internal organs. + +You fall to the ground and begin coughing up blood. You desperately try to heal yourself before you succumb to your wounds, but there isn’t enough time. You start to lose consciousness before the orcs finally materialize and finish you off in a more up close and personal way. + +Your last moments are being beaten and chopped to a bloody unrecognizable pulp by several clubs and blunt axes.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 540 + +It’s not there yet, but the political and social climate in the republic is finally getting to a point that’s a little more recognizable to you. Thanks to Trog’s actions the orcs have been attacking the Nalin just like you wanted. After a couple of burned down massacred villages, the Nalinites are a lot more supportive of military endeavors (Kobold citizens especially, but that’s hardly surprising given their nature). + +The citizens are also becoming more fearful and suspicious of other “foreign threats” like the usksha. Highlighting the sandman drug epidemic and the crime due to it, Quintus has managed to get restrictions on the southern borders of Nalin. The usksha that used to live within Nalin are starting to go back to their desert due to the increasingly hostile population. Trade hasn’t completely stopped, but the relationship between the republic and the emirates is very strained now. + +Of course some of this still wouldn’t be possible without senate support, however that’s become more in Quintus’ favor due to a combination of several factors. Some are just like the peasants, they’re getting scared because their comfortable lifestyle are at risk and want to protect themselves. Some were weak from the start and vote depending on which way the majority is heading. + +There are still holdouts that don’t agree with the more militant policies however. Even the “will of the people” does not sway them to fall in line. The most vocal of these is Senator Batalimus Ventis who has been a long time rival of Quintus. He’s stated that this trend towards militarism is going lead back to the dark days of when Matriarch Tarna ruled the land. He has also stated quite openly that Quintus is a warmongering fool that is only a puppet for his “mysterious Eternal” advisor. + +Quintus hates the man more than he hates the usksha and feels he’s the main cause of all his woes. Apparently he’s also decided that even if it isn’t quite time to dismantle the senate, it is time to get rid of Batalimus and has tried to have the man assassinated on a few occasions. All attempts have failed so far though and all it’s done is served to make Batalimus more cautious and legitimize his accusations about Quintus (Even if he can’t quite connect Quintus to the actual assassins). + +You’re going to have to speak with Trog soon about the attacks having served their purpose and that he needs to ease up. Trog is under the impression that after all this is over; he or at least his people will have a place within the new order when it finally comes about. In truth, you’d like to have a few orc legions if only for the intimidation factor of keeping the citizenry in line. However, you aren’t exactly sure how likely that’s going to be since orcs are increasingly becoming hated by the average citizen and are unlikely to want them to be incorporated into the new order no matter what. Let alone as soldiers. + +Another problem for another day you suppose. Right now though you’re on your way back from another visit with Quintus (who basically did nothing but bitch about Bartalimus) and on your way back to Quala. You’re a lot better known now and as you pass through you mostly get a lot of respectful nods from the military and worried glances from citizens. Your reputation within the republic has grown and it’s much like it was back in the old Empire days. There’s a certain familiar comfort in that. + +Before you leave Dalt you decide to pay a visit to Calvin’s museum to see Jennifer. Since the orc war, expeditions to the Quala Badland have been put on hold so Calvin and Jennifer have returned to work at their museum to study what they have found in more detail and ultimately put it on display. + +When you enter, you see a sign that tells people to be sure to visit their brand new Empire exhibits. Naturally you wander over to where these displays are, so you can see how much they actually got right. + +When you get to the exhibit its currently empty of visitors. You’re impressed with what you see though. They’ve managed to recreate a small portion of the Emperor’s palace and fill it with the old stuff they found. Some of the things are just replicas, but they’re very good replicas and in the correct locations. They even managed to restore one of the Emperor’s big black statues. + +Just looking at all this stuff makes you feel like you’re back where you should be. When you close your eyes you can almost imagine that you are where you WANT to be. If only things had been different, you wouldn’t have to be starting all over again… + +“We tried to make it look like what we thought it looked like in the past and based on writings we found.” You hear Jennifer’s voice say and you open your eyes to see her stand to the right of you. +“You did a good job, almost feels like home. That big ass black statue wasn’t in the throne room though. In fact the Emperor never even used the throne room when I knew him.” You say. +“Yeah, but we did have any place else to put it. I think its impressive looking where we did put it though. Should draw in a lot of people. So did you come here to revisit old memories?” +“Not at first, but this is was a nice distraction.” +“Glad to hear it, well I’ll leave you to your thoughts.” Jennifer says and begins to leave. +“No, stay here with me, I came here to see you in first place. Besides, no point in reliving past glories when I don’t have anyone to share said glories with.” You say and grab her hand. + +Jennifer’s reaction is a positive one in that she doesn’t let go and moves closer to you. + +“So since you’ve got the time, how about you tell me about some of those old glories?” Jennifer asks. + +You gladly do so. + +You talk with Jennifer for hours until it starts getting late at which point you say you have to get back to your mission in Quala. Jennifer understands and wishes you luck on it. + +“If you’re going wish me luck, how about you do it with a kiss?” you ask which takes Jennifer by surprise. +“That’s certainly new. What brought this on?” +“I thought you liked me. You do don’t you?” +“Of course, I’m sure I was pretty obvious about it.” +“Well why ask why? I’m fond of you as well. I like your company and you’re the only person I’ve ever considered my friend since I got dug up. You’re independent, you’re physically attractive and you listen to all my stories. What’s not to like?” You say which causes a small chuckle from Jennifer. +“Okay…we’ll talk more about this later, but for right now, here’s that kiss.” + +Jennifer moves in to kiss you and the pair of you embrace. + +After your minor amorous interlude, you take your leave of the museum. You briefly wonder if pursuing a relationship with Jennifer is a good idea, but what’s done is done and you’ll just have to figure it out. Once again, another problem for another day you suppose. + +Just as you get out of the gates of Dalt, two guards approach you. They’re not military or domestic security, they look like private guards, probably those of a senator. + +“You the Eternal?” one of them asks. +“Yes.” You answer. +“Senator Batalimus wants to see you. If you would accompany us to his home please, it’s just a few miles west of this city.” + +Well this is an interesting turn of events, though perhaps not entirely unexpected. If you had to guess, Batalimus either plans to have you killed when you arrive to meet him or he’s going to try to convince you to be on his side. You doubt he has the means to do either. + +You don’t know if you should even bother entertaining him at all, but then you think if he does try to kill you, then you’ll have eliminated the need to kill him later. Hell, even if he doesn’t try to kill you, maybe you should just do it anyway. + +You agree to follow the guards and eventually you reach Batalimus’ estate. His home isn’t much bigger than Quintus’ home, though there are a lot more trees and gardens on his grounds. As you expect there are a lot of guards patrolling about. When you step through the front door you feel like you’ve stepped into a barracks rather than a senator’s mansion due to all the guards standing around. + +Soon an older balding man dressed in a purple robe comes down the grandiose staircase. It’s Batalimus. + +“Ah the Eternal, at last we meet face to face.” Batalimus says. +“Yes, I’m surprised that you didn’t confiscate my weapons though.” You answer. +“Whatever for? We all know you can just incinerate or fry everyone in the room with the snap of your fingers. It’s not like you actually need a sword or even a pistol. You’re a walking weapon without such things.” +“So? Why risk bringing me here then?” +“Because I have nothing to lose. Your associate, Quintus seems quite determined to have me killed. Granted he always has harbored ill feelings, but now that the little reprobate has the advantage his confidence has reached an all time high. I suppose the fool has to have his fun though given the family he has. In any case I figure its only a matter of time before he sends you to do the deed and while I could increase my security even further, I quite frankly doubt if it would stop the likes of you. At best you might get mad.” + +You have to appreciate someone who knows exactly where they stand. + +“So…you brought me here to kill you?” +“Hah, I hope not, but I suppose that is a strong possibility. No, what I’d like to do is try to convince you to perhaps not kill the republic because that is what you and Quintus are striving to do, though I believe I actually have a shot with getting through to you. You aren’t saddled with any emotions of hatred towards me. To you, I’m just another potential obstacle in your goals. If I have to be killed then you will, but if it isn’t necessary you won’t.” + +Well it looks like Batalimus has opted to try to get you on his side, just like you thought he might. He is over estimating your willingness to kill him though. True you don’t have any hatred for the man and quite honestly you probably already respect him more than Quintus within the short time you’ve met him, but you’ve been known to kill folks even if you believe that they will be potential obstacles in the future. + +Still, killing Batalimus right now isn’t exactly part of the plan, so you’ll most likely just leave unless he tries to stop you. Then again you did come all this way so there is no harm in hearing him out. +> Leave +You know what this is going to be, his attempt to convince you of why you shouldn’t be helping Quintus. You’re not interested in anything he has to say, and it will be pointless to do so. + +“I’m going to just leave now and stop wasting both of our time, Batty. I suggest you don’t try to stop me.” You remark and begin walking towards the door. +“But, you’re already here! You can’t just listen?” Batalimus says. +“No. This was a lapse in judgement on my part I suppose. Still, I guess I got a good idea of the layout of this place when I eventually have to kill you.” +“Very well then, but I had hoped you’d be reasonable about this Eternal.” + +With those last words you leave Batalimus’ house and return to your duties in Quala. Just as you’re thinking about how you need to go see Trog soon about your little arrangement you get an urgent message from a republic messenger. + +“He’s fucking dead?!” you exclaim. +“Yes sir, as I said he was found dead in his home, poisoned. His assets are all being seized due to him owing various people, though his wife is contesting…” + +As the messenger drones on about this, you realize you’re in position that you really should’ve considered. Namely, you have no “patron” anymore. Sure, you’re somewhat popular with the military, but Quintus’ influence on the population and his fellow senators were a big deal. Batalimus must be behind this and even if he isn’t, he’s going to be the main one taking advantage of the situation. + +Without another word you ride off to Nalin and you don’t stop until you arrive at Batalimus’ place. Batalimus’ personal guards are surprised to see you and even more surprised when you start chopping them down with your sword. Despite killing everyone in his home, you don’t find Batalimus so you go to the next logical place to look, the senate building. + +You don’t have any more luck there, all you manage to do is interrupt some of the senators debating something or other. + +“Where is Batalimus?!” you demand. +“I don’t know! We don’t know!” the senator that has the floor answers, but it really isn’t the answer you want to hear. +“Lies!” you say and fry the senator with a lightning bolt. + +“You really think your republic is going to survive? Most of you were already supporting Quintus’ ideas, now I bet you’re ready to turn your back on those same ideas just because he’s dead. Well Batty killed the wrong man. I will see the Empire return even if the rest of you are too cowardly to do so!” you shout and begin throwing fireballs at the rest of the senators. You don’t stop until you leave the senate house in flames. + +By this time the military is on the scene, but they’re unsure of what to do for several reasons. So you give them the reasons. + +You take immediate control of the military and tell them to start hunting for Batalimus and to maintain order. A few days later and it’s official. You make your announcement that the Republic is dead and that the Empire now lives again. The general public doesn’t know quite what to make of everything. You’re sure that there will be some sort of misguided rebellion especially with Batalimus still on the run probably stirring up dissent, but with the military behind you’re confident that you won’t have too much trouble. + +Year 541 + +“You really think this is going to change anything? Look at the nation! Despite your attempts to crush its spirit with your outdated concepts of order it still resists you! Face it, you’ve already lost and my death will not save you!” Batalimus screams defiantly. + +You break a couple more of his ribs with a few stomps to his chest. The older man wheezes and gasps in pain. He won’t show fear though; he’s fully willing to die. + +“It may not change anything, but keep this in mind before I send you on your way. Your actions did NOT save the republic; it only increased the chaos and strife. You may have fucked up my plans, but you have completely destroyed and betrayed your own.” +“(Wheeze) Perhaps…Eternal…(gasp) but better the people should live in anarchy than under your brutal order!” + +You shake your head at his answer and crush his windpipe with your boot. At last the thorn in your side has been removed, but the damage he’s done has not. In fact you’re not even certain that you can repair it. Even with Jennifer doing her best with the propaganda machine, it’s still not enough. +You have attempted to recreate a secret police in a similar style of the Emperor’s Eyes, but efforts haven’t proved too successful mainly because you’re too busy using the military to keep direct order. + +Even portions of your military have turned against you, if not outright treason then desertion. Some have fled to find work within the six cities of Arat or even joined up with the pirate groups in Delerg. + +It isn’t that the people don’t fear you, it’s that they hate you more than they fear. Even after you’ve destroyed entire towns that have dared defy you, you still get pockets of resistance running off into the wilderness to cause ongoing problems. + +Your methods in the beginning months were probably too harsh in retrospect. Killing everyone in the senate certainly didn’t help as perhaps some of those experienced fools might’ve still been useful in swaying public opinion and dealing with the more mundane issues of running the government. Combine this with the fact that the idea of things like “liberty” still lingered within the people, your brutal actions only proved to them what happens when a single tyrant takes power. Instead of cowing them into submission, you ended up lighting a fire of freedom that you still haven’t put out yet and at this point you wonder if you ever will. Batalimus of course took advantage of that fact too. + +Between the steady attrition of loyal soldiers, the ongoing defiance of the people, external threats like the Flogger tribe hearing of your struggles and taking advantage of your lightly defended outposts in Quala (And certainly have no intention of joining your Empire now) you are pushed to the brink and beyond. + +You decide if the fools won’t submit to your rule, you’ll burn the whole damn thing down. Jennifer however talks you out of it saying that it won’t solve anything. She also tries to convince you that maybe you should consolidate what holdings you do have and build from there. + +It’s a nice thought and it’s certainly logical, but you’re so exasperated at the entire situation that you decide to just give up. You realize that your time has come and gone. The people don’t want you around and at this point you don’t even care to rule them anymore. In fact you don’t even care about ruling anything anymore. All you really ever wanted to do was serve the Emperor and the Empire and enjoy your time with Alison. + +Things were so much simpler back then. + +You shouldn’t have ever listened to Semra. Even if the Emperor had killed you, at least you wouldn’t exist in a time where the Empire doesn’t. You would’ve died at least knowing the Empire would still be around. + +Not being able to go on and unwilling to stick around, you suddenly leave Nalin forever. Where, nobody knows. Some say you found death in the Usksha Desert, others say you found it in the cold mountains of Rask, but ultimately what happened to you is lost to time.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 537 + +“Ah, there’s nothing better than when a plan comes together! Your actions of stirring up the orcs have been paying off and I’ve finally managed to get the public to become in favor of a strong army and your training has been producing much tougher and disciplined soldiers to create that stronger army.” Quintus remarks to you while he sips his wine. +“I’m certainly glad someone you finally found someone more competent than yourself. Makes all your years of failure totally worth it.” Quintus’ wife Nalia remarks in a bored tone lying on a couch. She’s already on her second bottle of wine and it’s not even the afternoon yet. + +While Quintus dismisses his wife’s usual emasculating remarks, you’re wondering why you’re here when you could be doing something more important to keep this plan in motion because its nowhere near coming together like Quintus seems to think it is. The orcs haven’t even made a major attack yet. They’ve just been harassing a few patrols, but it’s just as well since you’re still trying to whip the paltry number of spirited soldiers you do have into shape so that they the orcs do attack they’ll be ready for them. + +You can’t really complain, because you are doing something you’re familiar with and good at, but the main thing that’s been nagging at you is Quintus himself. You don’t respect him and it’s starting to become a problem sometimes. + +It’s not anything he’s done to you either. He’s practically bent over backwards to accommodate you in anyway he can. You wondered at first if it’s his overly smarmy demeanor with you which at times seems fake, but that isn’t it. Part of that is that he’s a politician and he probably can’t help but be that way as part of his personality, not to mention you’ve become quite a good judge of character and you believe his admiration for you is genuine. + +Regardless of what his wife claims, Quintus is extremely ambitious and a hard worker which you can appreciate. He’s just been hampered by the social and political climate. If he’d been born during the time of the Empire, he would’ve fit right in. Might’ve even been one of the Emperor’s advisors. + +Despite all this, you’ve been developing an increasing lack of respect for the man. Not to the point that you’re ready to kill him or anything, but taking orders from him has got you questioning why? Of course you know the reasons why, because the republic is still a pussy whipped place that has long since abandoned the ideals of people like yourself and trying to take power like a strong man would ultimately only result in chaos and collapse. Ironically, you’d probably be more at home in one of the city-states in Arat where they still favor a single ruler. + +What it all comes down to you think is Quintus’ family. Something about Quintus’ lack of admiration from his own family bothers you. If he can’t reach the people that are supposed to be closest to him, how the hell can you respect him? Gets harder to when you have to be subjected to these meetings and see his family walk over him first hand. They all either criticize him or belittle him even though he’s been trying to make life better for them. + +His wife is a slothful alcoholic that has never a word of encouragement for him. She looks much older than she actually is mainly due to hitting the bottle so much. She’s never truly addressed you directly, but her attitude seems apathetic at best. + +His teenage daughter Yollanda is a red headed trollop that routinely sleeps with the sons of his senate rivals and in some cases the rivals themselves. And those are the “classier” encounters. Quintus once complained that if there was a good purpose for her bed hopping like say for gathering important information on his enemies it could be acceptable, but she has no higher purpose other than the pleasure of her girl parts. You try to stay away from her as her outright sexual advances that’s she’s made towards you in the past is a complication you don’t desire or need. Makes Jennifer’s obvious minor crush on you downright subtle by comparison. + +Then there’s his younger son Gelo who is an idiot. Not in the traditional sense that he does stupid things without thinking them through, no he’s a dyed in the wool, born and bred moron. You imagine that his mother might’ve drank while she was carrying him, but who knows? By and large he’s harmless, but extremely annoying. He yells a lot, breaks things and is generally obnoxious mainly because he doesn’t even have a stable structure to mold him into something at least somewhat useful. You don’t understand why he wasn’t killed at birth. Such defective babies were usually either put to death by the family or at least sold into slavery so that they could be productive to the Empire on a minor level. It was a good policy. The only positive thing is he seems to be afraid of you and thus stays away (Often screaming his head off and runs away if you’re ever in the same room.) + +And that’s just Quintus’ immediate family, it’s not even counting the other in laws and extended family that basically mooch off of him. For a man that has ruthless ideals he’s a doormat when it comes to his family. Fortunately for Quintus, he seems to have a lot more luck with the general population and has been getting more support just like he’s been bragging about lately. If you were Quintus, you might crave the respect of strangers as well. + +“Quintus, why am I here? I’d like to get back to my job.” You remark. +“But that’s precisely why you’re here my Eternal friend! Your job! Since the army problem is well on its way to being taken care of, I think its time to move on to our navy.” +“Navy?” +“Yes, you do remember we have one such as it is. I’d like you to have a hand in making it stronger as well.” +“And just how the hell am I supposed to do that?” +“I dunno, you told me you were the military expert. Just do it the same way you did with our army I suppose. Stir up the pirates of the Delerg islands so they start attacking our costal towns en masse and the people demand a stronger navy.” +“Quintus, I’m glad you’re excited about the plan, but the first part of it isn’t even ready yet. I don’t feel the soldiers are even ready yet. They’ve been in a few skirmishes, but nothing that is really going to test them. And there’s still the matter of the orcs. They’re riled and I have noticed large tribal gatherings as if they’re preparing for a large attack against a bigger foe, but by and large they’re still disorganized and in some cases still attacking one another.” +“But surely you’ve trained some of the soldiers enough that they can perform these duties in your stead? Delegate responsibility to the more talented ones?” +“I have, but its a slow process from them to train their fellows as well as I trained them and I still wouldn’t trust any of them to do what I’m doing with the orcs, or at least not do it and live. Quite frankly I need more time with them and diverting my attention to your navy is just a distraction.” +“But the senate is going to dismantle it!” Quintus exclaims. + +“Oh please will you stop whining in front of the help Quintus. It is soooo undignified. You don’t have to try to impress me anyway; I always knew you weren’t man enough to help my brother out with his shipyard. If the senate does dismantle the navy and his shipyard goes under because of less business, well he can always live here. No big deal.” Nalia remarks taking another long swig out of her wine bottle. + +Quintus has no words he just throws his hands up and looks to you for help, but what can you do short of killing his wife? And you’re fairly certain he doesn’t want that no matter how much she gives him grief. + +You suppose you could see what you could do with the naval situation, but the main problem is you have practically no experience in such seafaring things. You dare say the average sailor has much more experience than you do about such matters. Sure you’ll be assisted, but without the actual experience you’ll still have a disadvantage that you don’t feel comfortable with. + +On the other hand what exactly does the republic need with a powerful navy anyway? As far as you know they don’t have an enemy trying to invade them from sea and they don’t have contact with a big nautical trading partner. They just send merchant ships to travel along the southern coast to the Usksha Emirates. If the pirates got too out of control, they could just send large shipments through the desert. +> Try to strengthen the navy +While the military definitely still needs your attention, you’ve got the ball rolling on that aspect already. You can see that Quintus really wants this navy build up to happen for several reasons and there are still pirate troubles after all, so you might as well see what you can do on this front. + +“Alright, we’ll get the navy strong again, or whatever it was before I showed up.” You remark. +“Good, good! I’m sure we’ll make improvements so quickly that I’ll be able to convince the senate that the navy shouldn’t be dismantled. So, I guess you’ll want to get started immediately, so you should make your way to Waveview, it’s the largest of our port towns where our most experienced sailors are and most of the shipbuilding takes place. In fact Admiral Jarred Plickus should be there right now.” Quintus says. +“Wheeee! My incompetent husband finally managed to convince one of his goons to actually do what he wants for a change. This calls for a drink!” Nalia says and finishes off her bottle and grabs another one nearby. + +You leave before you insult Quintus’ wife, well actually you leave before you do something worse than just insult her. + +You make your way to Waveview and then to seek out this Admiral Plickus. After asking a few passing sailors and shipwrights they direct you towards one of the larger ships and say he’s aboard that one. The admiral apparently likes to spend all his time aboard his favorite ship. + +From afar the ship looks impressive, but when you’re up close it looks less so. You expected the pride of the Nalin fleet with the admiral aboard it would at least look more presentable. With as many noticeable “patches” they’ve nailed into the hull, they might as well have just built a new ship. + +The rest of the crew direct you to Admiral Plickus’ cabin when you finally board the ship where upon you find him fast asleep. He looks so damn old, you half wonder if he was alive during the time of the old Empire. (He’s human though so you know that isn’t the case) When you finally manage to wake him up to interact with him, he’s not exactly young of mind either. You honestly don’t know why this man is still commanding anything, let alone a fleet. + +Frustrated you leave the cabin call for the captain of the ship. + +“Yeah, I’m here.” A bearded man little older than you replies. +“I’m here? What the hell kind of answer is that?” you answer back in a threatening manner. + +The captain suddenly realizes who you are exactly and makes more of an effort. + +“”Oh shit, you’re that Eternal. Apologies sir. We didn’t know you were coming. My name’s Len.” The captain says desperately attempting to straighten himself up. +“By the status of the admiral it seems like he still doesn’t know I’m here, let alone who I am.” +“Yes, well the admiral is getting on in years, but the senate doesn’t seem to care. I believe two of his sons are on the senate in fact.” +“Figures. If he’s here, then they don’t have to take care of him at their own home. (Sigh) If this is supposed to be the best the fleet has to offer, I’d hate to see the other ships up close.” You say. +“It’s um, well I dunno what to tell you sir, except the truth. It’s true, the fleet isn’t given much attention; in fact you’ll probably find our cargo ships kept in better condition because of our trade with the usksha.” +“And that’s fucking stupid for the sole fact that you need to defend those same ships from pirates. That means warships that don’t look like they’re on the verge of sinking themselves!” +“I agree sir, and I’ve tried to make due with what I can, but spending on the navy has been cut a lot over the years. In fact I heard a rumor that the senate was going to dismantle the navy altogether.” +“Well not now they aren’t. I’ve been told to try to get something done with this sorry excuse for a fleet.” +“Oh? Well I suppose that would be a blessing, sir.” +“Glad you think so, because as of right now, you’re the new admiral of the fleet.” +“I am?” +“Well I assume you’re the next most competent and experienced sailor if you’re commanding this wreck. Is that not the case?” +“Well I don’t like to boast sir, but I am indeed the best captain that the Nalin fleet has to offer…such as it is. But trust me sir, that I routinely make forays into the Delerg islands in the hopes of whittling down some of those pirate bastards.” +“Good, shows you’re at least proactive.” + +After a bit of explanation of what you want done to shape up the navy, you tell Len that you’re going to go talk with the shipyards and have them to start concentrating on building new warships. + +“Didn’t you want a demonstration?” Len asks before you leave. +“Demonstration of what?” +“Of whether I’m really up to this task. I mean I think it’s a great honor that you’ve placed so much responsibility on me, but I’d still like to prove myself to you. Come with me on a patrol. I mean this might be my last time in a long time since I’ll have to be organizing stuff for a while.” + +You think about it for a while and you can appreciate the fact that Len wants to show you that he’s up to the tasks you’ve set before him. + +“Okay, but what about the ex-admiral?” you ask. +“Him? Bah, we patrol with him on board all time, he never even wakes up despite the cannons. Let’s set sail.” Len says. + +Soon you’re on your way towards the islands of Delerg. That still seems odd to you. Wasn’t a place you visited a lot, but the idea that that swampy landmass is now just a cluster of islands is still a little weird. + +You find that being on the open water isn’t quite as bad as you thought either. You sort of had a minor concern about this whole navy thing at first, but going into battle on the water will certainly be a new thing you can experience and you’re sure this crew will appreciate the extra magical firepower you can bring. + +You do ask Len about going on patrol alone and wouldn’t it be better to bring more ships, but he mentions how half of them are being repaired and some are pulling shore defense duty elsewhere. He mentions that pirates usually try to run rather than fight anyway and that while this ship looks horrible, it’s a lot more durable than it looks and certainly more than anything the pirates have. + +“The major handicap is speed and maneuverability, usually they can outsail us if they really want to get away, but our firepower prevents most from escaping before they get that far.” Len laughs. + +A few days pass and you’re finally in Delerg waters. You see several islands nearby, but the fog is making it harder to make out anything in the far distance. + +“Is it always this foggy?” you ask looking out across the limited foggy view. +“Not always, but this is actually a good thing. This will allow us to sneak up on the pirates.” +“Or allow them to sneak up on us if we aren’t careful.” You say. + +“Funny you should say that…” Len says and then two gunshots are heard and a painful sensation in two parts of your back. You gasp and your upper half falls over the side of the ship. + +“Damnit, I told you idiots to aim for the fucking head!” Len says +“Sorry sir, can’t see for this fucking fog.” A sailor answers. +“Nevermind all that, help me throw him overboard!” Len replies. + +As you’re gasping for air and trying to move to do something to defend yourself, captain Len and his treacherous crew grab your limbs and throw you overboard. + +“Sorry Eternal, but the smuggling business is too profitable for me to start making enemies out of my business partners. And with you around breathing down my neck with this navy shit, I’d never get anything accomplished.” Len says as you plunge into the water below. + +Under normal circumstances, you might’ve been able to heal yourself of the two big bullet holes in your back that also caused severe internal damage, but floating in cold water, with limited mobility and a profuse loss of blood is a deadly combination. + +You eventually lose consciousness and the merciless sea does the rest.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After sitting here for about an hour or so listening to the sorry state the republic is in, let alone the rest of the area that used to be part of the old Empire, you’ve had enough of it all. + +“Stop. I’ve heard enough about your wretched country. I can already tell what YOU want. You want the Empire back.” +“Yes! I want to resurrect the Empire!” Quintus exclaims. +“And that’s a lovely thought, but sorry to tell you this, it’s dead. Long buried and resigned to the trash heap of history.” You remark. + +This comment is definitely not what Quintus expected. Jennifer on the other hand isn’t quite surprised you’d say such a thing given your own cynical remarks to her. + +“But…you’re here now…a symbol! A symbol of the old ways! Proof of honor! Proof of strength! Proof of power! You’re an Eternal!” +“And? I obviously couldn’t prevent the destruction of the Empire. Am I supposed to just resurrect it with my mere presence? Am I to just kill the entire senate and establish perhaps you as an emperor? Do you think the people would accept that?” +“Well maybe not so direct…” Quintus remarks. +“No? Because that might be the only way to get things done around here. And what makes YOU think you’d even be a good emperor? You do not even have the support of the people.” +“I do have the support of my constituents! I even have a few allies in the senate!” Quintus protests. +“Well you still don’t have enough for what you desire. I’d say that I’d have a better chance of being accepted as an emperor before you would just due to the fear factor and raw power, and I’d still have to be looking over my shoulder constantly before I finally got run out by a complete rebellion or I destroyed so much of Nalin in the process of maintaining order. Given what you’ve told me of the average citizen it sounds like they’re perfectly happy with the way things are. Happy with their hedonistic freedom. Do you really think they’re going to listen to a relic of a time when the strong just ruled over the weak and the weak not only accepted it as a way of life, but some were even happy about it? The sheep have been let out of their pens and do not wish to return. Do you believe your people, even those that apparently keep voting for you to represent them are ready to accept a more restrictive and harsher culture? Do you believe you can foster such an environment?” + +Quintus remains silent and you throw up your hands at his inability to answer. + +“Well you see my problem with your plan. You probably thought when you dug me up; you’d have a powerful tool that would be your key to reforming a parody of the old Empire. And it would be a parody, because even if you were successful, it would NEVER be like the old Empire. You can read all the lore and books you want about the old days and nothing is stopping you from holding fantasies about such days. But make no mistake those good old days aren’t EVER coming back. You’re about five hundred years too late. I haven’t been awake one complete day yet, and even I’ve come to accept that hard truth…but then I’ve had to accept so many hard truths. This is just another one to me.” + +Quintus nods solemnly. The spark that was in him is gone, but you can tell he isn’t completely defeated. Jennifer just tries to look away from both of you and shuffles some papers she has with her. + +“You…you aren’t how I expected you to be…” Quintus says. +“Nobody ever is. Another hard truth I learned a long time ago.” You answer. +“Mm…well I seem to be at a loss of what to say. Which is rare considering they often complain that I never shut up in the senate.” + +“Look, Quintus. I won’t deny that your ideals and goals aren’t admirable ones. However, I had to drag you back to reality. You still have a long way to go before even bringing something resembling the Empire back. As much as it might be fun to send me to just kill the senate with a firestorm and then establish martial law across the land, it’s not going to be that simple. At least not yet.” +“Yes, I suppose you’re right. It’s just I’ve read about some of your deeds, scraps of parchments really and I guess when I found out you were alive and in my house I just figured all of my country’s problem were solved.” +“Well, they may still be eventually. Now despite what I’ve said, I will help you. Because personally, I’d like to see you succeed if only so I could live in a place that didn’t seem so damn strange and it’s not like I have anywhere else to go.” +“So you are going to help bring back the Empire?” +“Well, something like it anyway. I can’t promise anything, but I’ll try. Now then, with me on your side, you shouldn’t worry about the military side of things. I can take care of those matters when they arise, and they most certainly will. You’re going to have to take the lead on the political matters obviously, but I can still advise you in this capacity. All my years of working side by side with the Emperor contributed to such skills despite being on the battlefield most of the time.” + +Quintus seems to have that spark of life again when you agree to help him after all. He happily asks where you should get started. Jennifer at this point is glad to also see things have worked out and says she should leave you two alone to talk more and get back to the dig site. Before she leaves Quintus calls out to thank her. + +“And tell your father he has my thanks as well! If it weren’t for you two, we would not be in the better position we are now. Expect a bonus in pay this week.” Quintus says. +“Thank you senator. I was wondering though and I hate to ask, but it just came to me. Do you think our new friend here could come back up to the dig site when he has the time? It’s just that he was buried there and it might be of great help if he could at least perhaps give us a good indication on where it might be beneficial to dig.” +“Well we’ve got a lot to go over first, but afterwards if he wants to, I have no objections.” + +Doesn’t take you long to agree. You briefly remark that where they were digging was near the Emperor’s main chambers and you’d like to see if anything survived yourself. This new revelation causes a bit of excitement from Jennifer and Quintus wondering what other magical treasures that might be of use in the coming days of change or even some scraps of history that can enlighten them more about such glorious days. + +You just wonder if you can find the remains of Semra. Call it curiosity; call it a sense of closure. + +The first thing you and Quintus talk about is the military. You explain that it is of vital importance to get them to support him the most, but it’s also of great importance to get them be more vicious warriors. You say you understand that battles are probably fought a little differently nowadays, but the intense training isn’t necessarily just to make them expert fighters. It’s also to instill discipline and hopefully a warrior’s mindset. Make it so that they want to go to war, that they long for it. + +Quintus says that he does already have some pull with the military. A little more than most find comfortable, but of course it’s nowhere near absolute. You’re glad since that cuts down on a little extra work. + +You tell him to track down the most spirited and skilled warriors that are in the military and have them gather somewhere secluded just outside the northern borders of Nalin. You say you need to get started on training as soon as possible, you just hope you don’t have too many wash outs (or casualties). You then say you also need to get started on an outside threat. + +“What do you mean?” +“I mean you need an outside threat that genuinely scares people. Makes it so people are more supportive of a strong military. Makes it so eventually people prioritize their safety so much that they’re willing to give up their freedom just to be safe. I mean I know you’ve been warning the senate and the people about all the scary things out there and you’re right, but people don’t believe it until its beating down their door with a battle axe.” +“Yes, but how exactly are we going to do that?” +“Well YOU aren’t going to do anything except going about your usual business. I on the other hand am going to incite one of those threats you’ve told me about. Obviously one of the closest ones.” +“The usksha immigrants?” Quintus asks. +“Heh, well maybe in due time, but that’s bit more on the…political side. Plus its not a large enough threat and the follow through of invading the desert is a logistics nightmare that we are nowhere near in a position to carry out at this time. No, I was thinking something much simpler. Something much easier to incite violence in and a lot easier to get people to fear, namely orcs.” +“Oh, do you think you can do it?” +“Encouraging an orc to attack isn’t a challenge at all. Herding them to all attack in a specific direction takes a little more skill, but I can do it. It’ll just take a little time and we have to make a balancing act of it. Going to have to let the orcs win a few major battles in the beginning at least. It won’t be pretty, but it’ll also serve to purge some of the less than skilled soldiers you have around here. Some villages on the borders are going to have to burn as well.” +“Villages? Are you sure?” +“The problem with the Nalinites is they’ve never really been under a true threat for a very long time. When the people experience the loss of a couple border villages and see the bloody aftermath, trust me they’ll be begging for more protection. When they see the brutality of what an orc horde can do they’ll be screaming for justice and for us to march into the Quala Badlands to wipe out every last green skin. The first steps to expansion and the first steps to resurrecting the Empire.” + +Quintus understands and says it sounds like a good plan. You and he talk a little more about some of the specifics before he eventually says he has a big day tomorrow of arguing against some silly law that one of his opponents is trying to have passed and needs to get some sleep. He says that you may have a bed in one of his spare rooms, as it isn’t like the rest of his family is going to complain about you being here. You agree but say that you intend on heading back to the dig site like you promised Jennifer tomorrow and also to get started on that orc situation you spoke on. Quintus remarks that you can take one of his horses and says he hopes to see you within a weeks time. + +The next day you ride off to your destination and you feel somewhat calmer than you did when you first woke up. You also feel like you have a worthy purpose now. You know you’re going to have a big task ahead of you trying to reform the Empire, but at least it gives you something to do. Who knows, you might even be successful. + +Or you might be instrumental in the downfall of yet another nation… +> Voices of the past (Matriarch Brenda’s writings) +Before you prepare to get some rest for the night, Quintus hands you an old small worn book. + +“What’s this?” you ask. +“Something I thought maybe you might find interesting. It’s the old journal of Matriarch Brenda, first ruler of Nalin and your fellow Eternal.” Quintus answers. + +When you handle the book, the spine cracks and some of the pages nearly come falling out. + +“Yeah, be careful, as you might imagine it’s very old and sadly missing quite a few pages already. For centuries nobody even knew she kept one, but this was found about three hundred years ago when the builders were tearing down her old home to make room for the new senate forum. Such a loss really, tearing down the home of a woman who did so much for this country. I can tell you one thing, had I been alive during those days, I would’ve made every effort to keep the house as an important historical site.” +“So who had this before you?” +“Oh several people. Mostly collectors that didn’t really do anything with it save not really keeping good care of it. For a while I do believe it was actually lost, but eventually it popped up again and found its way into that museum run by the Mols. Finally through a mutually beneficial deal I acquired the book from that family.” +“I see, well I’m not sure if I feel comfortable reading something that was Brenda’s private thoughts.” +“Oh. Well, you can just put it on that table over there if you feel that way. Just thought maybe you’d be interested in it. No harm done. Anyway goodnight.” Quintus says and leaves the room. + +You begin to settle down for sleep, but find you that you can’t. You are tired, but not sleepy, probably because you’ve been sleeping for the past five hundred years! + +You explore the room a bit, but there isn’t anything much of interest that’s going to keep you occupied, well except Brenda’s journal. It probably seems silly, but in your mind Brenda hasn’t been dead for centuries. In your mind, the last time you saw her was only a few years ago and reading her journal would be an invasion of her privacy. + +However Brenda has been dead for centuries and under the circumstances you can’t help, but be a little interested. + +“Apologies Brenda, but I fear my curiosity has gotten the better of me.” You say and start flipping through the journal trying to be a careful as you can since last time it nearly fell apart in your hands. + +Really it seems like the journal shouldn’t even be handled anymore, it’s missing more than a few pages and the writing has faded as well. For all Quintus’ claims of respecting historical items of the old Empire, he hasn’t even bothered to put the loose pages back in proper order. Still, you manage to make out some of it. + +One entry in particular stands out for you mainly because you get the best sense of Brenda’s frustration of her situation, but then realizing that she has to do something about it. + +Entry 51 + +Sometimes I wonder why I even keep this stupid thing. I think I had some weird idea that someone needed to keep a record of events after the cataclysm. Still don’t know what caused it, nobody does. In another two hundred years is anyone even going to care? + +Chaos hasn’t completely overtaken Nalin, but I need to keep some sort of order. I don’t want to use extreme measures, but it’s getting to the point where I’m going to have no choice. They aren’t bad people, they’re just panicking and scared more than anything else. It’s understandable, I am too. + +I know who wouldn’t be scared, that paragon of Eternalhood. The Emperor’s Weapon of Terrible Justice or whatever it is they used to call him. Can’t remember all the nics and titles he had. If he were here, he’d probably already be rebuilding the Empire. Alas, I have heard no word of him or much word of anything past Quala really and it’s been months. I can only believe he must be dead along with millions of others. Warrick too, though I shed no tears for his passing. It was his bumbling that resulted in my husband’s death. + +It would seem I am the last of the Eternals. It is a strange sad thing being the last of something. Everyone looks to me like I’m supposed to solve this problem with the snap of a finger, but I’m just one woman even if everyone somehow believes I’m this superior being just because I’m an Eternal. + +I honestly wish I wasn’t most of the time. I certainly don’t feel any more powerful or smarter because of it and nowadays I feel like I’m got a huge target on my back and I have to constantly look over my shoulder because some idiot thinks I’m being a repressive tyrant. People either hate me, fear me, worship me, or a combination of all three. + +What the hell do these people want? I’m doing the best I fucking can! Not only am I trying to maintain civilization and order in these dark days, I’m also trying to keep some semblance of the Empire alive. We can’t just abandon our way of life because of a terrible disaster. + +Or maybe I’m just holding on to something that I know because I’ve lost everything else. I don’t know, but it doesn’t matter. + +Starting tomorrow, I’m going to make some major changes. I’m not even sure what exactly, but changes are going to be made if only so civilization and order can go on and damn what the people think. History can be the final judge. + +I just wish Roldan was here. + +“I wish you all were here.” You say to yourself and close the book.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After sitting here for about an hour or so listening to the sorry state the republic is in, let alone the rest of the area that used to be part of the old Empire, you’ve had enough of it all. + +“Stop. I’ve heard enough about your wretched country. I can already tell what YOU want. You want the Empire back.” +“Yes! I want to resurrect the Empire!” Quintus exclaims. +“And that’s a lovely thought, but sorry to tell you this, it’s dead. Long buried and resigned to the trash heap of history.” You remark. + +This comment is definitely not what Quintus expected. Jennifer on the other hand isn’t quite surprised you’d say such a thing given your own cynical remarks to her. + +“But…you’re here now…a symbol! A symbol of the old ways! Proof of honor! Proof of strength! Proof of power! You’re an Eternal!” +“And? I obviously couldn’t prevent the destruction of the Empire. Am I supposed to just resurrect it with my mere presence? Am I to just kill the entire senate and establish perhaps you as an emperor? Do you think the people would accept that?” +“Well maybe not so direct…” Quintus remarks. +“No? Because that might be the only way to get things done around here. And what makes YOU think you’d even be a good emperor? You do not even have the support of the people.” +“I do have the support of my constituents! I even have a few allies in the senate!” Quintus protests. +“Well you still don’t have enough for what you desire. I’d say that I’d have a better chance of being accepted as an emperor before you would just due to the fear factor and raw power, and I’d still have to be looking over my shoulder constantly before I finally got run out by a complete rebellion or I destroyed so much of Nalin in the process of maintaining order. Given what you’ve told me of the average citizen it sounds like they’re perfectly happy with the way things are. Happy with their hedonistic freedom. Do you really think they’re going to listen to a relic of a time when the strong just ruled over the weak and the weak not only accepted it as a way of life, but some were even happy about it? The sheep have been let out of their pens and do not wish to return. Do you believe your people, even those that apparently keep voting for you to represent them are ready to accept a more restrictive and harsher culture? Do you believe you can foster such an environment?” + +Quintus remains silent and you throw up your hands at his inability to answer. + +“Well you see my problem with your plan. You probably thought when you dug me up; you’d have a powerful tool that would be your key to reforming a parody of the old Empire. And it would be a parody, because even if you were successful, it would NEVER be like the old Empire. You can read all the lore and books you want about the old days and nothing is stopping you from holding fantasies about such days. But make no mistake those good old days aren’t EVER coming back. You’re about five hundred years too late. I haven’t been awake one complete day yet, and even I’ve come to accept that hard truth…but then I’ve had to accept so many hard truths. This is just another one to me.” + +Quintus nods solemnly. The spark that was in him is gone, but you can tell he isn’t completely defeated. Jennifer just tries to look away from both of you and shuffles some papers she has with her. + +“You…you aren’t how I expected you to be…” Quintus says. +“Nobody ever is. Another hard truth I learned a long time ago.” You answer. +“Mm…well I seem to be at a loss of what to say. Which is rare considering they often complain that I never shut up in the senate.” + +“Look, Quintus. I won’t deny that your ideals and goals aren’t admirable ones. However, I had to drag you back to reality. You still have a long way to go before even bringing something resembling the Empire back. As much as it might be fun to send me to just kill the senate with a firestorm and then establish martial law across the land, it’s not going to be that simple. At least not yet.” +“Yes, I suppose you’re right. It’s just I’ve read about some of your deeds, scraps of parchments really and I guess when I found out you were alive and in my house I just figured all of my country’s problem were solved.” +“Well, they may still be eventually. Now despite what I’ve said, I will help you. Because personally, I’d like to see you succeed if only so I could live in a place that didn’t seem so damn strange and it’s not like I have anywhere else to go.” +“So you are going to help bring back the Empire?” +“Well, something like it anyway. I can’t promise anything, but I’ll try. Now then, with me on your side, you shouldn’t worry about the military side of things. I can take care of those matters when they arise, and they most certainly will. You’re going to have to take the lead on the political matters obviously, but I can still advise you in this capacity. All my years of working side by side with the Emperor contributed to such skills despite being on the battlefield most of the time.” + +Quintus seems to have that spark of life again when you agree to help him after all. He happily asks where you should get started. Jennifer at this point is glad to also see things have worked out and says she should leave you two alone to talk more and get back to the dig site. Before she leaves Quintus calls out to thank her. + +“And tell your father he has my thanks as well! If it weren’t for you two, we would not be in the better position we are now. Expect a bonus in pay this week.” Quintus says. +“Thank you senator. I was wondering though and I hate to ask, but it just came to me. Do you think our new friend here could come back up to the dig site when he has the time? It’s just that he was buried there and it might be of great help if he could at least perhaps give us a good indication on where it might be beneficial to dig.” +“Well we’ve got a lot to go over first, but afterwards if he wants to, I have no objections.” + +Doesn’t take you long to agree. You briefly remark that where they were digging was near the Emperor’s main chambers and you’d like to see if anything survived yourself. This new revelation causes a bit of excitement from Jennifer and Quintus wondering what other magical treasures that might be of use in the coming days of change or even some scraps of history that can enlighten them more about such glorious days. + +You just wonder if you can find the remains of Semra. Call it curiosity; call it a sense of closure. + +The first thing you and Quintus talk about is the military. You explain that it is of vital importance to get them to support him the most, but it’s also of great importance to get them be more vicious warriors. You say you understand that battles are probably fought a little differently nowadays, but the intense training isn’t necessarily just to make them expert fighters. It’s also to instill discipline and hopefully a warrior’s mindset. Make it so that they want to go to war, that they long for it. + +Quintus says that he does already have some pull with the military. A little more than most find comfortable, but of course it’s nowhere near absolute. You’re glad since that cuts down on a little extra work. + +You tell him to track down the most spirited and skilled warriors that are in the military and have them gather somewhere secluded just outside the northern borders of Nalin. You say you need to get started on training as soon as possible, you just hope you don’t have too many wash outs (or casualties). You then say you also need to get started on an outside threat. + +“What do you mean?” +“I mean you need an outside threat that genuinely scares people. Makes it so people are more supportive of a strong military. Makes it so eventually people prioritize their safety so much that they’re willing to give up their freedom just to be safe. I mean I know you’ve been warning the senate and the people about all the scary things out there and you’re right, but people don’t believe it until its beating down their door with a battle axe.” +“Yes, but how exactly are we going to do that?” +“Well YOU aren’t going to do anything except going about your usual business. I on the other hand am going to incite one of those threats you’ve told me about. Obviously one of the closest ones.” +“The usksha immigrants?” Quintus asks. +“Heh, well maybe in due time, but that’s bit more on the…political side. Plus its not a large enough threat and the follow through of invading the desert is a logistics nightmare that we are nowhere near in a position to carry out at this time. No, I was thinking something much simpler. Something much easier to incite violence in and a lot easier to get people to fear, namely orcs.” +“Oh, do you think you can do it?” +“Encouraging an orc to attack isn’t a challenge at all. Herding them to all attack in a specific direction takes a little more skill, but I can do it. It’ll just take a little time and we have to make a balancing act of it. Going to have to let the orcs win a few major battles in the beginning at least. It won’t be pretty, but it’ll also serve to purge some of the less than skilled soldiers you have around here. Some villages on the borders are going to have to burn as well.” +“Villages? Are you sure?” +“The problem with the Nalinites is they’ve never really been under a true threat for a very long time. When the people experience the loss of a couple border villages and see the bloody aftermath, trust me they’ll be begging for more protection. When they see the brutality of what an orc horde can do they’ll be screaming for justice and for us to march into the Quala Badlands to wipe out every last green skin. The first steps to expansion and the first steps to resurrecting the Empire.” + +Quintus understands and says it sounds like a good plan. You and he talk a little more about some of the specifics before he eventually says he has a big day tomorrow of arguing against some silly law that one of his opponents is trying to have passed and needs to get some sleep. He says that you may have a bed in one of his spare rooms, as it isn’t like the rest of his family is going to complain about you being here. You agree but say that you intend on heading back to the dig site like you promised Jennifer tomorrow and also to get started on that orc situation you spoke on. Quintus remarks that you can take one of his horses and says he hopes to see you within a weeks time. + +The next day you ride off to your destination and you feel somewhat calmer than you did when you first woke up. You also feel like you have a worthy purpose now. You know you’re going to have a big task ahead of you trying to reform the Empire, but at least it gives you something to do. Who knows, you might even be successful. + +Or you might be instrumental in the downfall of yet another nation… +> Picking through the past (The dig site) +You’ve spent the past two days with Calvin’s crew, which has been fumbling about trying to dig up the rest of the Emperor’s chambers. So far they haven’t found much of consequence though, mostly just pieces of the Emperor’s belongings that were made of stone or metal, like a bed frame or one of his many work tables. The biggest things were broken pieces of the two large statues that stood outside the door and the half destroyed door itself. Any books that have been found have mostly been destroyed over the passage of time. Between insects, small subterranean rodents and centuries of gradual decay it would seem the earth has consumed most of the important stuff. While Calvin still appreciates what has been found, he was really hoping to find a treasure trove of magical items, but you told him he wouldn’t have had much luck anyway. The Emperor himself never really kept much of that around, probably because as a powerful wizard himself he didn’t need to rely on such things + +You on the other hand haven’t found what you were looking for and that’s the remains of a svelk. You and Semra were in the immediate area yet no bones have been found. But then Jacob wasn’t too far from the same location and his bones haven’t been found either. (You still haven’t mentioned to Calvin or Jennifer about knowing the specifics about their ancestor’s death.) At this point you can’t do too much more lingering you need to get on with your more important assignment. You decide to make one more quick look though so you grab a shovel and start digging. + +Of course you can’t be left alone while doing this, Jennifer decides to come up and bother you in her usual way. You swear the girl insists on trying to hang around you whenever possible. You certainly hope she doesn’t have a crush or something, because you don’t really have time for such things. + +“Hey, you shouldn’t just be digging haphazardly like that near the support beam! One wrong dig and you could fall into a sinkhole or cause part of this excavation to collapse! You don’t want to be buried alive again do you?” Jennifer says. +“I dunno, I’m still wondering if I wouldn’t be better off.” You remark. +“Oh you don’t mean that. I thought you said you and Quintus had big plans that gave you a sense of purpose now.” +“Yeah, but that doesn’t mean I can’t ponder if it’s worth it or not. (Sigh) Damn it, what am I doing? I’ve never going to find anything. I need to just get started on that business I spoke about with Quintus.” +“Wait, what ARE you looking for anyway? I’ve noticed you before looking through piles of dirt and overturning stones since you got here. If you told us, perhaps we could help you. I mean we do do this for a living and all.” +“It’s nothing. Don’t worry about it.” +“Look if it’s personal, you don’t need to tell me or anyone else the significance, but if we know what to look for surely it could help couldn’t it? Maybe we already found it and it’s in our pile of ever-growing objects. + +Sensing that Jennifer isn’t going to let this go you give in and tell her. + +“(Sigh) I’m looking for bones.” +“Bones? Well we found a bunch a few feet higher up…” +“No, the bones I’m looking for would be at least approximately in the same area that you found me. They would be elven in nature, specifically svelk, if that makes a difference.” +“Dark elven? What was a dark elf doing down here near the Emperor? You know, you still haven’t told us anything about how you came to be in your situation. I mean we’ve all been wondering if the Emperor was down here during the cataclysm, though we haven’t found any trace of his remains.” + +Now you wish you hadn’t told her. + +“Look! Let’s just focus on one thing at a time! Now I’m looking for svelk bones, unless you’ve found anything like that, then we have nothing more to discuss.” You snap and start to leave. +“Okay, okay! No need to snap like that, but can you at least tell me who this svelk was? Obviously they must’ve been important to you or else you would not be trying to find the remains. I’m really just trying to help!” + +Well that’s true and you can’t necessarily fault her for it. + +“Alright, I’ll tell you a little bit. The svelk’s name was Semra and believe or not she was a top advisor to the Emperor. And since we’re on the topic, yes all of us were down here when the cataclysm hit. As the palace was collapsing in on our heads, Semra was the one who put me in that little magical box you all found me in. Basically she saved my life when certain doom was imminent.” + +This bit of information predictably gets a big reaction out of Jennifer. + +“Wow! I can’t believe it. The Emperor had a svelk advisor? She must’ve been an outcast from her people. I thought they were only nomadic mercenaries back in those days.” +“They were, but Semra was a bit more ambitious than that. Make no mistake she was no outcast. She was every bit as ruthless and treacherous as any of her people. Probably more so. She always had an angle.” +“Hm, surprised the Emperor trusted such a creature, but still she saved your life. A self sacrificing svelk; never thought such a thing existed. The two of you must’ve been close surely? Were you friends or um…” +“No we weren’t friends, and don’t even suggest we had a romantic affiliation.” You say before she even completes that sentence. “Our relationship was…complex. Let’s just say she played a big role in who I am today and despite whatever differences I did have with her I do owe her my life.” +“So, it’s kind of like a paying last respects thing?” +“Something like that. I mean she was literally the last person I saw before I went into my big sleep. My last moment during the old days were with her. Guess I felt like seeing her bones would be a kind of closure, but I guess it doesn’t matter anyway right?” +“No, I understand. Well, we’ll keep an eye out I guess for svelk bones. So… you said the Emperor was down here too?” +“Yeah, but before you even ask. There’s no point in trying to look for his remains. He disintegrated before my eyes.” + +Jennifer is in shock. + +“He…he disintegrated?! How?!” +“Well, it was the cataclysm. Hit pretty suddenly and hard. One moment he was there, then he wasn’t.” + +Your vague explanation isn’t exactly untrue. You’re just glad it seems to be sufficient for now. + +“Sheesh, no wonder you didn’t want to talk about it. Must’ve been stressful even for you. I have to tell my father about this. He’ll be very interested in learning more about this mystery.” Jennifer says. +“I’m sure you will. You know I’m very surprised he doesn’t speak to me more often given that he’s the one in charge of this expedition and his extreme interest in the history aspect.” +“I would imagine he would if your personality was different. You’re a bit intimidating and he still fears you a bit, so as it stands I think he believes it would be better if I spoke to you.” +“Why? Does he think I am easily swayed by a pretty face?” +“Er…no…what I was going to say is that I am a little more willing to take risks like interacting with you for example. You’re more likely to respect someone that’s brave and thus open up to them. I love my father, but he’s not exactly the bravest of men, though he has his moments.” +“Hm, sounds like someone I used to know.” You say thinking about Jacob, which makes you add a bit more to your story. + +“Before I leave there are a few other bones you might want to look for while you’re down here.” You say. +“Oh? I thought it was just you and Semra.” +“It was in the end, but there was another top advisor to the Emperor here that died shortly before that.” +“Wait, you don’t mean…” +“Yes, your ancestor Jacob. Though his remains might be a bit…crushed. A large falling stone block fell on him.” + +Your news once again renders Jennifer silent for a moment. + +“We always did wonder what happened to him exactly. I mean it was always assumed he got killed during the cataclysm, but never knew the specifics. Well at he didn’t suffer long.” She remarks. +“No it was pretty quick and sudden. Just like everything else when the cataclysm hit. Still, if it’s any consolation, Jacob had his own moment of bravery before his life ended. He actually saved Semra and I from getting immediately killed during that dark time.” +“He did?” +“Yes. Anyway, as I said, I’ve got other things to do, so I’ll leave you to it.” + +Before you leave, Jennifer thanks you for the information and hopes in time that you’ll open up more information about the past. You don’t make any promises, but you know you probably will eventually. + +You leave the dig site and think about what you originally went there for in first place. Closure. Since you didn’t really get that, you do it yourself. + +“Well Semra, I don’t really know why you saved me. Then again I didn’t understand your twisted obsession for me either. Whether it was genuine love, svelk psychological torture, your own personal fucked up mind or a combination of the three I’ll never know. And I guess now, I never will. But for what it’s worth. Thank you.” + +After your monologue to yourself, you ride off in search of orcs to antagonize.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While it’s entirely possibly that you’d come out of this thing alive, (You’ve certainly been through worse) there’s little guarantee that anyone else will. If you’re going to keep your “rescuers” alive, you’ll need to be unhindered. + +“What’re you doing?!” Jennifer asks as you leap on a horse. +“I’m getting off this thing, and I suggest if you don’t want to be a big target you will too, there’s another horse here, jump on it and we’ll unhitch the wagon!” + +Sensing that you’re going to do this whether she likes it or not, she realizes that she doesn’t really have a choice. She jumps on a horse and you take your sword and cut the harness. You tell Jennifer that she should order everyone else to concentrate their gunfire to the left. + +“Where are you going now?!” +“I’m going to take care of the ones on the right!” you shout and ride in their direction. + +The orcs are so agitated about you heading directly towards them, they practically stop focusing on the caravan and begin firing arrows at you. Of course you anticipated such a thing and cast a shield to protect you and your horse. With your other hand you spray a cone of cold on the orcs closest to you, freezing them quite literally in their tracks. + +This feat of magic is enough to cause the orcs to attempt to rear up their boars and change direction back towards attacking the caravan. Others are undeterred and continue to head toward you with large weapons in hand. You aim your next spell at their boars, which consists of a couple fire blasts. The pigs go up in a blaze and soon so do their riders who end up dropping their weapons in an attempt to beat out the flames. + +You turn your attention at the orcs who decided to attack the caravan instead. At first glance the expedition crew have held their own fairly well considering none of them seem to be warriors and they seem to have fended off most of the orcs on the left side. However you see orcs getting the best of a couple of them when they close the gap and begin jumping onto the wagons. + +You ride back to the caravan and put your own combat skills good use. Orcs may be fierce and unrelenting fighters sometimes, but without the heavy armor that you remember they used to wear for the Empire, they get killed as easily as anyone else if you’re skilled enough, and you’re more than skilled enough. As you battle the orcs, the remaining expedition crew tries to help, though you’re nearly shot a couple of times in the process. You end up yelling at them to stop “helping” you before you start firing at them with something a lot more accurate. + +Soon after you’ve killed your last orc after hopping from wagon to wagon, you hear Jennifer shouts to everyone that you’ve won and the rest have rode off. The caravan stops for a moment to take some time to clean up dead bodies on the wagons, and gather up any equipment that fell off during the fight. + +Jennifer comes up to you as you’re cleaning off your own sword. + +“Well that was exciting to see a real Eternal in action! I knew we were going to be safe with you!” +“Hmm, yeah well I almost wasn’t safe with your people, because I nearly got shot a couple times!” +“Yeah, sorry about that. Fear of the orcs actually on the wagons was probably causing higher nervousness than usual.” +“You should get some soldiers on these trips. Then at least you’d have some people who actually know how to fight when things get a little close.” +“We do have soldiers, can’t you tell by the uniforms?” + +Honestly you hadn’t really paid much attention to the fact that several of the people on this expedition crew do have similar outfits. It’s just regular clothing though, none of it is proper armor, light or heavy. You also now notice that the firearms are much different too, namely they can fire multiple shots before being reloaded. A very handy improvement indeed. + +You realize that time has definitely marched on, it would seem that shooting someone with a rifle or pistol is the order of the day. Not much use for the old armor if that’s indeed the case. Still, you’re also reminded of the Felkans and their over reliance of such weapons. It would seem the Nalin Republic has the same technological disease. And these people are the supposed “successors” of the Empire. + +“Guns.” You say shaking your head. +“What’s wrong with guns? You don’t think they’re honorable or something?” Jennifer asks. +“No, I believe they are very useful and it would be foolish to not employ such weapons of fantastic destruction during battle and war. I just have a problem with the reliance of them in place of natural combat skill, because one day you’re going to run out of bullets and then you see who the real soldier is.” +“How is using a gun any different from casting down lightning from your fingers or throwing fireballs around?” +“It isn’t in the scheme of things. I just said I don’t have a problem with gunpowder weapons. However you also noticed I didn’t just toss around magic like I had unlimited energy either. I used it when it was needed and engaged in close combat for the rest of them. I could’ve easily just rained down a firestorm and wiped out all of the orcs, but that would’ve taken out the caravan too. Something I’m sure nobody wanted. The Empire used firearms AND magic during the Felkan War, but individually the soldiers were still some of the toughest warriors you’d ever want to face. The Felkans soon learned that fatal fact. Perhaps if their soldiers still had the formidable close combat skills of an Empire soldier, they might not have lost so many battle when physical prowess was needed.” + +Jennifer doesn’t debate your views or experience, she just thanks you again for your help and you’re soon underway. The rest of the journey is relatively silent. + +Eventually you arrive in the Nalin Republic. The landscape here is more like you remember, though it isn’t until you get towards the capital of Dalt that you start seeing a resemblance to civilization, but even that’s different when it comes to the architecture and such. You get a few stares from passing citizens. + +Jennifer and you disembark from the wagons when you arrive at Quintus’ house, or rather his very large mansion, which has guards posted at the gates. Honestly it’s the closest thing resembling the Empire you’ve seen since you got here. + +“You wait here, I’ll have to speak with Quintus about all this first. While I’m sure he’ll really want to see you, there is protocol to follow.” +“Sure, do whatever it is you have to do, I’m not going anywhere, but who is this Quintus anyway?” +“Quintus Arillicus is one of the most influential leaders in the senate and as I’ve already mentioned an admirer of old Empire history, but he’ll tell you more when you meet him.” + +As Jennifer walks through the gates, you’re left standing around with a few guards who give you the stares that you’ve come to expect from everyone. You wait for about ten minutes before you begin to wonder why you’re even entertaining this again. + +Then you remember, it’s because you don’t have much else to do right now. Though you’re wondering what place you’re going to have in this new world. You imagine that maybe you could be a soldier again though it doesn’t look like there’s a war going on. Doesn’t even look like this place is suffering from any discontent from the citizens, but then looks can be deceiving. + +Jennifer eventually comes back to the front gate and waves to come with her. + +“You can come in now. Quintus is very excited to see you!” + +At this point this Quintus better be just as impressive, because from what little you know of this guy, you’re not nearly as excited to see him. + +You and Jennifer walk into the mansion and while it’s certainly fancy and has a design style similar to Empire architecture, it isn’t nearly as extraordinary as the first time you saw the Emperor’s palace. Of course you’re a harder sell from those old days. Jennifer and you enter what is apparently a conference room. She says that he shouldn’t be long and you both take a seat at the table. + +Soon a middle-aged man walks into the room with some guards, but he dismisses them at the door so that you three can be alone. He’s dressed in an older style suit that looks more like those you remember Empire bureaucrats wearing and carries a staff of some sort with him. He also wears several rings. You sense that they all might be magical. + +Either way you fail to be impressed, just as you suspected you would be. Quintus on the other hand, now that he sees you in person, he’s very impressed. + +“I never believed in all these years…all the digging…all the research…everything. And none of what I’ve found compares to this! Yes! This is indeed a glorious day! A real live Eternal! Not just any Eternal either, but the one who served the Emperor himself!” Quintus exclaims as he sits down across from you. + +“Now let me stop you right there. I know you’re all excited and shit, but for me this is going into unknown territory. Possibly even enemy territory. I have no idea WHAT exactly you want with me. I’m going to tell you right now though if you’re thinking of putting me in some sort of museum or some weird aristocratic version of a sideshow like they have at the fairs peasants go to you better get that idea out of your head right now.” + +Jennifer tries to temper your words, but Quintus raises his hands as if no offense was taken. + +“It’s alright. Our Eternal friend is quite right to be suspicious of me, but I can honestly tell him there is no reason for him to be because I think my goals will fit his honorable ideals. I’m still sure there is much he wants to know and questions that he has, but I will say that it is my hope that he and I will change history together!” + +Quintus and Jennifer try to get you fully up to speed on everything first… +> The Cataclysm (Fall of Civilization) +One of the first questions you ask is to be caught up to speed on what the current situation is on the land. Jennifer fills you in on most of this topic though Quintus interjects when it comes to more political matters on the subject. + +Jennifer starts off by stating that the cataclysm that destroyed the Empire not only led to a dark age, but as you might’ve been able to tell it changed the very landscape. Quala, which was once the heartland of the Empire, is now a wasteland. She mentions that besides the numerous orc tribes that live there, the place is also home for outlaw types. + +Quintus remarks that the Nalin Republic has made a bit of an attempt to tame the southern most portion of it along the borders and says that he would like it to do more, but then complains that his hands are tied due to pacifistic fools in the senate. + +Jennifer tells you Delerg got it even worse than Quala as most of the land just fell into the ocean! Delerg consists little more as an archipelago though a small portion of it is still attached to the mainland. She says there are rumors of horrors that were awakened and now dwell on several of the islands, but the main danger is that the place is now a haven for pirates. + +Quintus remarks that the Nalin navy has problems dealing with them on their eastern coast. Again, he’d like to do more about it, but once again most of the senate claims it isn’t in the budget and is thinking about dismantling the navy altogether. + +When you ask about Rask, Jennifer states that there isn’t too much to tell other than wilderness has reclaimed most of it. She says all that’s known is that it’s now infested with orcs, ogres, giants and worse. There are rumors of a warrior “guild” of some sort, but she can’t imagine that they’d be sane living in such a hostile environment. + +Quintus doesn’t have much to add other than he’s sent a few adventurer types up there to explore, but none of them have come back alive. He’d like to send a full expedition up there, but he barely gets approval from the senate about the one he sends to dig up the Quala Badlands. You’re sensing a pattern here… + +Jennifer next moves on to the more “civilized” areas of what once was the old Empire. She uses the term loosely though. + +Arat is fairly lawless though it currently consists of six city-states which supposedly have an agreement of mutual protection (The Arat Alliance, but in practice they’re all out for themselves or at the very least concerned with their own problems. In some cases that means attempting to gain control over the rest. Particularly Lenay, which is the most powerful of the cities and is run by svelk. + +You interrupt Jennifer. + +“Excuse me? Svelk? They finally managed to settle down?” +“Oh yes, for quite a while now. Sovereign Eldolith has been running it for…” +“Wait, Eldolith?!” you interrupt again. +“Yes, do you know her?” +“We were acquainted. She was only a mercenary captain when I knew her.” You answer. +“Interesting…well she’s come a long way from a simple leader of mercenaries. She’s currently ruling Lenay unopposed and has influence over those weak willed idiots in Atinil and the criminal dominated Valizza.” Quintus interjects. “As you might expect the svelk treat the non-svelk little better than slaves, if they aren’t already.” + +Quintus goes on to tell you that he’s been warning the senate that having a strong unified svelk dominated power nearby would not be a good thing, but as usual his warnings are mostly going unheard. He says that at the very least there should be steps to support more independence amongst the cities if only to keep Eldolith from gaining more power. He says one of the cities, Regnik is fairly friendly towards the republic and basically the most reliable source of information of what’s going on in the region. + +Telis is the most isolationist of the bunch, but at least it isn’t under the influence of Eldolith. Not much is known about it save that it seems to be very well defended. + +The last city is Zo. Though Zo is currently in such dire straits that the six cities may soon become known as the five cities. Zo constantly suffers attacks from orcs. How it remains standing is certainly a testament to its citizens’ resolve, but if the frequency of the attacks keep going the way they are, it won’t matter how stalwart the citizens are. + +Jennifer finally comes to what was the newest edition to the Empire during your time, the territory consisting of the Felkan Kingdom. Jennifer says that it mostly consists of small hamlets and even a few towns, but none of them are united like a nation or even as big as one of the six cities of Arat. There is one small nation though that calls itself the Red Cap Kingdom. + +The Red Cap Kingdom is a small nation of militant gnomes. Only gnomes live within its borders and they are fiercely independent and hostile to anyone who isn’t a gnome. They are extremely well defended too and probably the most technologically advanced. They call themselves the Red Caps due to being so merciless in battle that they supposedly dip their hats into the blood of their fallen enemies. + +“Bloodthirsty gnomes…now I’ve heard everything…” you say nearly laughing. “Well considering all that happened to them, I can’t say I’d blame them for abandoning their pacifism. Always knew we didn’t get all of them. Surprised they came back to the area though.” + +Jennifer is a bit confused by your statement, obviously not really knowing the whole story, though Quintus seems a little more up on the topic. + +“My dear Miss Mol, during the time of the Empire, the Felkan Kingdom was secretly run by gnomes who did everything in their power to destroy the Empire. Gnomes as you might imagine were specifically targeted to ensure the safety of the Empire.” Quintus explains to Jennifer. +“Yeah…something like that. Though to be quite honest I believe the Emperor just really hated gnomes. He explained his reasons, but I always thought there might be another deeper personal motive. In any case never did learn it, and I didn’t need to. His will was mine and I followed orders.” You remark. This causes an outburst by Quintus who bangs his fist on the table startling Jennifer. +“You see that Miss Mol!? Utter dedication! A ruler gave orders and his soldiers carried them out! This why I wish the old Empire still existed! Shit got done back in those days!” + +Considering how much Quintus bitches about the senate he’s certainly right about the Empire getting shit done. Jennifer continues. + +“Well the gnomes may have re-entered the area due to being on the run from the other new nation that has reportedly arrived in the area, the Xi Hive.” +“Now who the hell are they?!” you ask. +“A great danger if the sources are even only half correct.” Quintus interjects. “And a perfect reason for the senate to get their shit together, but will they listen? No of course not! I just get accusations of being a warmongering troublemaker when in fact I’m trying to save all of their ungrateful asses!” Quintus shouts causing you and Jennifer and you to stare at him. + +Quintus hasn’t really told you what his goals are yet and what role you might play in them, but you can already make a good guess at what one of them might be. + +“Sorry. Please continue explaining the Xi Hive to our guest, Miss Mol.” Quintus says. +“So, the Xi Hive is apparently ruled by a race of insectoid creatures. Almost ant like in nature, they’re probably even directed by a queen. They don’t really have any proper settlements. We think they might be primarily subterranean, but that doesn’t stop them from attacking the humble villages that are on the surface. They don’t leave anyone alive and take survivors as captives; presumably underground where I can only guess they might eat or enslave them. They haven’t attacked any of the major powers yet like the Red Cap Kingdom or one of the six cities, but they have been slowly moving east, so it’s only a matter of time.” + +You sit there taking all of this in. Orcs running amok, a new gnome nation, united svelk, ant people…and you haven’t even heard the whole sad story on the Nalin Republic yet. + +“Tell me something is there ANYTHING that didn’t go to fucking hell when the Empire fell?” you ask. + +Quintus and Jennifer aren’t sure how to respond. They think for a moment and then Quintus thinks of something. + +“Um…before the cataclysm, Empire was in the process with wiping up gnoll rabble on its western borders wasn’t it?” +“Yes.” +“Well, they must’ve never recovered from it, because there hasn’t been a gnoll seen in nearly five centuries!” +“Gee…well thank the Empire for small victories.” You say shaking your head with your hand on your forehead.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While it’s entirely possibly that you’d come out of this thing alive, (You’ve certainly been through worse) there’s little guarantee that anyone else will. If you’re going to keep your “rescuers” alive, you’ll need to be unhindered. + +“What’re you doing?!” Jennifer asks as you leap on a horse. +“I’m getting off this thing, and I suggest if you don’t want to be a big target you will too, there’s another horse here, jump on it and we’ll unhitch the wagon!” + +Sensing that you’re going to do this whether she likes it or not, she realizes that she doesn’t really have a choice. She jumps on a horse and you take your sword and cut the harness. You tell Jennifer that she should order everyone else to concentrate their gunfire to the left. + +“Where are you going now?!” +“I’m going to take care of the ones on the right!” you shout and ride in their direction. + +The orcs are so agitated about you heading directly towards them, they practically stop focusing on the caravan and begin firing arrows at you. Of course you anticipated such a thing and cast a shield to protect you and your horse. With your other hand you spray a cone of cold on the orcs closest to you, freezing them quite literally in their tracks. + +This feat of magic is enough to cause the orcs to attempt to rear up their boars and change direction back towards attacking the caravan. Others are undeterred and continue to head toward you with large weapons in hand. You aim your next spell at their boars, which consists of a couple fire blasts. The pigs go up in a blaze and soon so do their riders who end up dropping their weapons in an attempt to beat out the flames. + +You turn your attention at the orcs who decided to attack the caravan instead. At first glance the expedition crew have held their own fairly well considering none of them seem to be warriors and they seem to have fended off most of the orcs on the left side. However you see orcs getting the best of a couple of them when they close the gap and begin jumping onto the wagons. + +You ride back to the caravan and put your own combat skills good use. Orcs may be fierce and unrelenting fighters sometimes, but without the heavy armor that you remember they used to wear for the Empire, they get killed as easily as anyone else if you’re skilled enough, and you’re more than skilled enough. As you battle the orcs, the remaining expedition crew tries to help, though you’re nearly shot a couple of times in the process. You end up yelling at them to stop “helping” you before you start firing at them with something a lot more accurate. + +Soon after you’ve killed your last orc after hopping from wagon to wagon, you hear Jennifer shouts to everyone that you’ve won and the rest have rode off. The caravan stops for a moment to take some time to clean up dead bodies on the wagons, and gather up any equipment that fell off during the fight. + +Jennifer comes up to you as you’re cleaning off your own sword. + +“Well that was exciting to see a real Eternal in action! I knew we were going to be safe with you!” +“Hmm, yeah well I almost wasn’t safe with your people, because I nearly got shot a couple times!” +“Yeah, sorry about that. Fear of the orcs actually on the wagons was probably causing higher nervousness than usual.” +“You should get some soldiers on these trips. Then at least you’d have some people who actually know how to fight when things get a little close.” +“We do have soldiers, can’t you tell by the uniforms?” + +Honestly you hadn’t really paid much attention to the fact that several of the people on this expedition crew do have similar outfits. It’s just regular clothing though, none of it is proper armor, light or heavy. You also now notice that the firearms are much different too, namely they can fire multiple shots before being reloaded. A very handy improvement indeed. + +You realize that time has definitely marched on, it would seem that shooting someone with a rifle or pistol is the order of the day. Not much use for the old armor if that’s indeed the case. Still, you’re also reminded of the Felkans and their over reliance of such weapons. It would seem the Nalin Republic has the same technological disease. And these people are the supposed “successors” of the Empire. + +“Guns.” You say shaking your head. +“What’s wrong with guns? You don’t think they’re honorable or something?” Jennifer asks. +“No, I believe they are very useful and it would be foolish to not employ such weapons of fantastic destruction during battle and war. I just have a problem with the reliance of them in place of natural combat skill, because one day you’re going to run out of bullets and then you see who the real soldier is.” +“How is using a gun any different from casting down lightning from your fingers or throwing fireballs around?” +“It isn’t in the scheme of things. I just said I don’t have a problem with gunpowder weapons. However you also noticed I didn’t just toss around magic like I had unlimited energy either. I used it when it was needed and engaged in close combat for the rest of them. I could’ve easily just rained down a firestorm and wiped out all of the orcs, but that would’ve taken out the caravan too. Something I’m sure nobody wanted. The Empire used firearms AND magic during the Felkan War, but individually the soldiers were still some of the toughest warriors you’d ever want to face. The Felkans soon learned that fatal fact. Perhaps if their soldiers still had the formidable close combat skills of an Empire soldier, they might not have lost so many battle when physical prowess was needed.” + +Jennifer doesn’t debate your views or experience, she just thanks you again for your help and you’re soon underway. The rest of the journey is relatively silent. + +Eventually you arrive in the Nalin Republic. The landscape here is more like you remember, though it isn’t until you get towards the capital of Dalt that you start seeing a resemblance to civilization, but even that’s different when it comes to the architecture and such. You get a few stares from passing citizens. + +Jennifer and you disembark from the wagons when you arrive at Quintus’ house, or rather his very large mansion, which has guards posted at the gates. Honestly it’s the closest thing resembling the Empire you’ve seen since you got here. + +“You wait here, I’ll have to speak with Quintus about all this first. While I’m sure he’ll really want to see you, there is protocol to follow.” +“Sure, do whatever it is you have to do, I’m not going anywhere, but who is this Quintus anyway?” +“Quintus Arillicus is one of the most influential leaders in the senate and as I’ve already mentioned an admirer of old Empire history, but he’ll tell you more when you meet him.” + +As Jennifer walks through the gates, you’re left standing around with a few guards who give you the stares that you’ve come to expect from everyone. You wait for about ten minutes before you begin to wonder why you’re even entertaining this again. + +Then you remember, it’s because you don’t have much else to do right now. Though you’re wondering what place you’re going to have in this new world. You imagine that maybe you could be a soldier again though it doesn’t look like there’s a war going on. Doesn’t even look like this place is suffering from any discontent from the citizens, but then looks can be deceiving. + +Jennifer eventually comes back to the front gate and waves to come with her. + +“You can come in now. Quintus is very excited to see you!” + +At this point this Quintus better be just as impressive, because from what little you know of this guy, you’re not nearly as excited to see him. + +You and Jennifer walk into the mansion and while it’s certainly fancy and has a design style similar to Empire architecture, it isn’t nearly as extraordinary as the first time you saw the Emperor’s palace. Of course you’re a harder sell from those old days. Jennifer and you enter what is apparently a conference room. She says that he shouldn’t be long and you both take a seat at the table. + +Soon a middle-aged man walks into the room with some guards, but he dismisses them at the door so that you three can be alone. He’s dressed in an older style suit that looks more like those you remember Empire bureaucrats wearing and carries a staff of some sort with him. He also wears several rings. You sense that they all might be magical. + +Either way you fail to be impressed, just as you suspected you would be. Quintus on the other hand, now that he sees you in person, he’s very impressed. + +“I never believed in all these years…all the digging…all the research…everything. And none of what I’ve found compares to this! Yes! This is indeed a glorious day! A real live Eternal! Not just any Eternal either, but the one who served the Emperor himself!” Quintus exclaims as he sits down across from you. + +“Now let me stop you right there. I know you’re all excited and shit, but for me this is going into unknown territory. Possibly even enemy territory. I have no idea WHAT exactly you want with me. I’m going to tell you right now though if you’re thinking of putting me in some sort of museum or some weird aristocratic version of a sideshow like they have at the fairs peasants go to you better get that idea out of your head right now.” + +Jennifer tries to temper your words, but Quintus raises his hands as if no offense was taken. + +“It’s alright. Our Eternal friend is quite right to be suspicious of me, but I can honestly tell him there is no reason for him to be because I think my goals will fit his honorable ideals. I’m still sure there is much he wants to know and questions that he has, but I will say that it is my hope that he and I will change history together!” + +Quintus and Jennifer try to get you fully up to speed on everything first… +> The Nalin Republic (Successor to the Empire) +After hearing about the terrible state the rest of the former Empire is in, you ask about the land that managed to somewhat keep it together thanks to Brenda. + +Jennifer says that the cataclysm did hit Nalin, but it didn’t change the landscape so much as it changed the weather patterns. For the longest time, Nalin was about as wet as Delerg was before most of that place just submerged under water. It got so rainy that the Usksha Desert actually started receding. After a hundred years of this, Nalin’s territory grew just due to weather as the usksha nomads retreated deeper into their desert and border raids became non-existent. + +Meanwhile Nalin continued to slowly evolve. After Brenda’s death, her second in command, Tarna, took power. She ruled much in the same way Brenda did, but not as wisely. She was considered far too authoritarian to an unreasonable degree and she did not have the charisma or respect to pull it off. There were even accusations that she had Brenda assassinated. + +Whatever the case, after a few decades of her rule, the general public had had enough her. There was a rebellion and she was violently disposed. At first an attempt to rule the Nalin Dominion by a small council of leaders, this worked for a while, but there were still problems with this. In time it was decided that the people wanted to be even better represented, it was around this time that the beginnings of the republic were truly born. + +The republic in its current form has lasted about two centuries, with alterations in certain procedures and laws here and there. During that time slavery has been completely done away with and there is trade with some of the more reasonable city-states in Arat. There is also trade with the recently re-emerged usksha nomads who apparently have formed their own new government of sorts called the Usksha Emirates. + +Population here is mostly human, though there are elves here as well. In fact it’s about the only area where they’re treated as full equals now. While kobolds were “assimilated” even during Brenda’s time, they’re still not entirely accepted by everyone despite most of them now being productive members of society. There are even a few usksha that have set up permanent shops and live within the republic. These oddities mostly live on the desert borders and are viewed with suspicion even if there is a peace with their people now. Quintus in particular believes they should go back to their desert and doesn’t like the idea of them not being proper members of the republic since they don’t adopt the language or customs. + +“Look, I don’t have any problem with the sand savages on a personal level. I’m just saying that if they want to live in the republic, they should learn the language and adopt OUR culture! Even the kobolds make the effort! Of course most of those fat bastards in the senate are just concerned about is maintaining a good relation with the Usksha Emirates so they can line their pockets with the coin made from trade kickbacks. Not to mention all the drugs they allow to go through.” Quintus +“Drugs?” you ask. +“Oh yes. You haven’t been here long enough to see it, but despite the republic’s veneer of peace there lies a very serious drug problem. The sand savages trade more than just their crystal trinkets and cloth. They deal in a drug known as sandman and make it out of a type of lizard creature that only exists in that desert of theirs. A basilisk I believe. It puts people in a sleep state to the point of near paralysis. I mean it’s almost impossible to wake them up while they’re under the influence. I guess it gives people really intense dreams that most really enjoy, because a lot of people get addicted. Of course a lot don’t wake up either. It’s a major problem yet it’s not the only instance of the senate turning a blind eye to illegal substances coming into the country.” +“What else do the usksha bring in?” +“Oh it isn’t just the sand savages. It’s also the pirates and smugglers from the Delerg islands. Besides attacking our pathetic excuse for a navy they sneak in that foul brew that makes people go blind. I have no idea why people even want the damn stuff when we have our own superior alcoholic beverages right here. It’s this kind of moral degeneracy and apathy that’s going to lead to our demise if we don’t start doing something about it!” +“Can’t the military do something about this or maybe a police force? You ask. +“Hah. Jennifer told me of your opinion on our military, and you’re absolutely right. Most of them are not up to the task. They’re not disciplined like they should be and they certainly don’t have the most intensive training. I’ve read about how the Empire used to train its average ground troops. Our soldiers wouldn’t last one day in that form of basic training. As for a police force, we do have the peacekeepers, but they’re even less effective than the military mainly because they have limits on what they’re allowed to do to citizens. Even if said citizen is behaving in a suspicious manner they can’t do anything unless they’ve already slit the throat of some old woman for coin so they can go buy more sandman.” + +You can certainly understand Quintus’ frustration. The Empire had its share of problems, but maintaining order over the plebs wasn’t one of them. + +“The senate is made up of a bunch of corrupt plutocrats who aren’t interested in making Nalin better. As I said most of them are only in it for money. Others are just weak willed and go along with the crowd. A few are genuinely dangerous idealistic fools who want to introduce even more liberty amongst the populace! Can you believe that? This place needs more order not less!” + +You knew this “republic” concept sounded terrible when Jennifer first explained it to you. Looks like you were right. + +“We’ve become lax and complacent! The orcs of the Quala Badlands are only going to grow in numbers. How long before their numbers become too unmanageable? How long before the Usksha decide to backstab us while we allow them to infiltrate our borders? How long before the svelk unite the six cities and become a power to be feared? How long before the Xi Hive consumes us all?” + +Quintus continues ranting, you get the impression he’s given a similar speech to the senate on many occasions. + +“We should be growing stronger by expanding! Instead we’re just rotting on the inside! Even our research in new technology has become stagnant! The gnomes are ahead of us in this way and if the rumors are true, so is the city state of Telis!”’ +“What about magic power?” you ask. +“Well, even since the cataclysm, magic isn’t very common anywhere anymore. In fact as far as I know the only place that does have it is the city state of Lenay and even then the svelk only have it to a limited degree. If it weren’t for me, we wouldn’t have anything at all. I’ve been funding all these expeditions in the hopes of unearthing powerful magic weapons of the old Empire, but other than the few personal rings you see me wearing, this staff and a few other things I have locked away, I haven’t had much luck. I’ve even tried getting a magic school started in the hopes that perhaps there are some latent mages or perhaps a hedge wizard out there, but the idea was dismissed as a waste of public funds.” + +Quintus goes on about the failings of the republic for quite some time, but it all is sort of boring you. The republic is a weak inefficient state that coddles its citizens and is run by corrupt fools. You got it the first time. Jennifer told you Quintus was influential, but so far all you’ve heard is a lot of his failures to get things accomplished. + +You certainly hope he’s got a better plan of action than just whining.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>In for a silver, in for a sack as they say. If this spell is going to protect you from the Emperor, you’d best stick with it and worry about Semra’s intentions later. Though at this point you don’t even feel any pain on your side of things, but maybe that’s because you aren’t trying to hide anything from her. + +Your life has more or less always been an open book. You’ve never really hidden anything because you’ve usually come clean eventually anyway. You’re not even going to be hiding your desires to kill the Emperor pretty soon. If Semra’s hoping to learn something to use against you, she’s in for disappointment. + +She already knows most of your combat techniques having taught most of them to you. She already knows your mindset well enough that she has more influence over you than you’d like. She already is well aware of your feelings towards her. There is quite literally nothing she is going to find out that won’t give her any advantage that she doesn’t already have. + +Yet you can sense she STILL wants more, its almost as if she’s insecure about not having total control over you. You sense a lot of that actually. She can’t comprehend why you can have a sexual desire for her, yet not desire her in the way you did with Alison. She’s at a loss on what to do about it. And that confusion is a big ball of anger, frustration and pain. + +Suddenly you see the image of a young svelk girl. You aren’t sure how old, but by human standards she would definitely be considered a child. It’s Semra and she is holding the hand of an adult male svelk though you can never quite make out his face. + +They are both in a city where a large crowd of svelk are gathered having a good time throwing what looks to be sveld babies against a nearby wall which has a big target on it. Semra looks very happy and cheers whenever one splats into a bloody mess in the center. + +It would seem that Semra’s entertainment preferences didn’t change much for her. Several images of her enjoying similar activities with the same adult male flood your mind. You can only guess that the adult male might be her father, but Semra must be blocking you from confirming that. + +In any case, the idea that she was once a child is bizarre, but then everyone starts as one at some point right? She had a twisted childhood to be sure, but she had more of a childhood than you ever did. + +Just as think you’re starting to see more images of a personal nature, the contact is broken off and Semra pushes you away. + +“There. It’s done. Let’s get this over with.” She remarks while rubbing the sides of her head. She also starts rubbing her eyes and is sniffling a bit. + +You’re silent for a moment, just staring at her. You know that she must be hiding loads of whatever unhappy memories she does have. And she certainly can’t have you seeing them, she can’t trust you enough to believe you wouldn’t mock her in some way or exploit a weakness. + +“WHAT?!” she shouts when she notices you staring. +“Nothing. Keep your secrets. Like you said, let’s get this over with.” + +As you make your way to the door to the Emperor’s chamber, you do feel the connection of your mind to Semra’s. Its not like you can read her thoughts, but its rather a sixth sense kind of feeling. You’re curious how this will play out during battle. + +After speaking the password, the door opens and you both enter the Emperor’s chambers. You look at each other, simultaneously cast your magical shield spells and spread out. Almost immediately you hear the voice of the Emperor, though he hasn’t made an appearance yet. + +“So it’s come to this has it? After all I’ve done for you. After all I’ve given you. You turn traitor for a piece of svelk tail?” + +The Emperor steps out from his bedroom. + +“Son, I am disappointed.” He says and then just stares immediately in your direction. You feel a slight pain in your head, but its muted. Semra’s shielding spell must be working. + +The Emperor looks genuinely shocked. Its an expression you don’t think you’ve ever seen before on him. + +“You…you let this…creature into your mind?! Have you gone mad?!” +“Probably.” You remark and cast a lightning blast at the Emperor, but he easily deflects it back at you causing it to hit your force shield and knocking you to the floor. + +Semra casts a spray of acid, and while it sizzles and melts objects within the designated direction, the Emperor’s own defenses absorb it. Realizing he can’t just explode your brain, he casts a spell, which starts to turn the room very cold. You’re reminded of the time you cast this spell on Cyrus’ crew and you immediately cast a ring of fire around yourself in the hopes the heat will be enough to keep you from freezing. You follow up with a volley of small fireballs, which set the many bookshelves in the room ablaze. + +“You’ve made a dire mistake son, trusting this svelk whore. Even if you could defeat me, do you really think she’d allow you to live? She’s lying to you son. She always has and I thought you were stronger than that.” The Emperor remarks as sheets of ice cover the room extinguishing some of the flames. +“And you weren’t lying to me?! You had Alison murdered and you planned to kill me as well!” you shout back as you release your feet from the ice that has managed to encase around them. + +The Emperor sends a flash of light that blinds you and Semra. You stumble around to the left since you remember there being a solid stone table you can take cover behind. + +“(Sigh) Even if any of that was true my son, what of it? I was your father! Your master! Your life was mine to do with as I saw fit! Of course none it matters now. You’ve decided to stand against me and now your life is most certainly mine to take.” You hear the Emperor say and then suddenly hear loud lighting blast followed by a yelp sound to your far right. Must be Semra, but you’re still half blind from that flash of light. + +“Ha ha! Not as strong as we thought eh Semra? You always were an overconfident bitch. Won’t be long before I break through your pathetic force shield.” + +Your eyes clear up enough and see Semra across the room struggling to maintain her shield from a steady blast of lightning unleashed by the Emperor. Seeing that trading magic isn’t going to work, you put up your own shield and try to make your way over to the Emperor to just butcher him, but the combination of your hampered eyesight and icy floor are enough to slow you down. + +“Ever the warrior aren’t we son? Here, play with these!” the Emperor shouts and stops his attack on Semra, waves his hands and suddenly five hovering undead figures appear. You cast an enchantment spell on your sword and press forward to battle. Meanwhile Semra has taken advantage of her second wind and cast a telekinesis spell throwing a table directly into the Emperor. She follows this up with smacking him with several other smaller objects. He falls to the floor and re-establishes his own magic shield. + +“Keep up the pressure!” Semra shouts. + +You’d love to, but right now you’re trying to destroy the undead creatures in from of you. While you’ve never faced such things before, you keep your cool and successfully cut down three of them. + +“You fools know nothing of the power you face! Now face the true supremacy of a necromancer!” the Emperor shouts and the entire room gets even colder, but this isn’t even like the cold of ice or snow, this is something unnatural. You start to feel the tips of your fingers go numb and feel your energy starting to be drained. It’s like when Cyrus touched you, but this is all around you. + +You nearly get your head cleaved in by one of the wraiths as you start feel dizzy. You dodge the attack and slash the thing in two. The last one is taken down with a blast of fire from Semra who you sense is feeling the affects of the Emperor’s magic too. + +You stagger and prop yourself up on a burned lab desk. The Emperor stands only a few feet away, but he seems so far for you to do anything. You look over and see Semra staggers towards him, but collapses and begins screaming. You aren’t sure what the Emperor’s doing, but his eyes are glowing red. + +“A scared little girl still crying about her lost birthright. That’s all you are and all you ever will be. You svelk think you know about pain and death, but you know nothing! I’ll show you true pain and soon I’ll show you death and the endless torture that can come after it!” + +Semra’s confidence that the Emperor couldn’t do anything to her mind because of her race has proven false. While he’s not exploding her brain you do sense he’s creating some sort of waking nightmare in her mind. She’s literally crying and begging for him to stop, she even looks over to you reaching out with both hands telling you she’s sorry. She pleads with you to help her and that she needs your strength. + +You never thought you’d ever feel a slight twinge of sympathy for her. + +In any event, you’re not exactly doing so well yourself. You aren’t even sure if you could help Semra even if you wanted to given how weak you feel. Though your chances of making a lunging attack to kill the Emperor are equally as slim. +> Attack the Emperor +Semra’s just going to have to suffer a bit longer because you need to kill the Emperor. Besides, if you do kill him, you will have helped her anyway. + +You stagger towards the Emperor and raise your sword in an effort to strike him, but it’s a clumsy attack that he easily evades. He instead grabs your sword hand and you feel an even greater drain on your energy than you did before. + +“Tch. Tch. What were you thinking son? I guess you weren’t otherwise you wouldn’t have tried to kill me in the first place.” + +The Emperor continues to drain you of your life and it doesn’t take long before you see your hand shrivel and wizen before your eyes. Your entire body soon follows this sequence until your organs fail and death is instantaneous though definitely not painless.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 35 + +While you’ve never been excessively fond of these important meetings because they take you away from the battlefield, you like them even less nowadays due to having to see the Emperor in such a weakened state. You remember when he first started displaying the signs of being unwell; you dismissed it and thought that he’d eventually get better. Five years have passed since you found out and he’s only gotten worse. + +He barely gets out of bed anymore. Most of these important meetings take place while he remains horizontal under his blankets. He’s still mobile, but he tries to conserve his strength for when it’s necessary. + +He’s never even told you what it is that’s causing his decline, though you’ve never thought to ask. (And Jacob certainly hasn’t) It may just be old age finally catching up with him which means there is nothing that can be done hence why he doesn’t bother bringing it up. + +Its funny how when you first met him that he looked so healthy. You thought he was immortal despite him telling you that he really wasn’t. Now you know he wasn’t just being humble. + +You and Jacob have been doing your best as usual in carrying out his most important orders. Though today the order is given specifically to you. You have to go meet with Marik. + +Marik’s been running a secret experiment for the last sixteen years and says that its finally ready. The Emperor knew about it and actually told him to abandon it on more than one occasion, but Marik insisted that it would be a good idea, so the Emperor relented as long as it didn’t interfere with project that would be of a more direct benefit for the Empire. + +When you arrive at Marik’s underground lab, he takes you through a metal door that opens up to a platformed level, which overlooks a huge room. It’s nearly the size of a small hamlet you think. There are several ladders that descend down to the lower level which contain translucent containers all hooked up with tubing and connected with each other and large strange machines. Even from this distance you can make out figures floating in liquid within the containers. + +This experiment: Breeding a new army of Eternals. The derro has been growing them in these tanks. Literally hundreds, possibly even a thousand. + +“So…this is what you were hiding behind this metal door when I came here over ten years ago. Knew something else was going on.” You say as you stand on a balcony overlooking all the rows of tanks. + +Unlike you and your siblings these Eternals were practically “made.” From your understanding they went from some woman’s womb to the tank immediately. (You can only hazard a guess what might’ve become of the mothers, but nothing good no doubt) From there they’ve been getting “grown” into the perfect soldiers. + +Marik has explained to you the “science” of what he’s done, but some of it is going over your head. Personally you don’t even think Marik understands all of it himself, he just believes it all works. While Marik did use human babies for this second generation of Eternals most would probably tell you that there isn’t anything human about them. Given what’s been said about you as well you can’t really disagree. You are better than the average or even above average human in every way. + +You watch as two of them are released from their tanks, already teenagers and able to understand everything that is told to them. They’re given weapons and display great skill with them when ordered to fight each other. Probably just as good as most Empire soldiers. + +Still, there’s something about these Eternals that doesn’t sit right with you. Maybe its because Marik was involved and that his experiments can be hit or miss. Maybe its because you feel that without the experiences of training they don’t truly know what its like to struggle and earn their place. + +Whatever the reason, you don’t feel like they are Eternals. As little in common as you have with your own siblings you still feel a small bond there. You have nothing in common with these tank babies. They’re something else as far as you’re concerned. + +However, none of this matters. What does matter is if these so called new Eternals are going to actually be an asset to the Empire. From what you’ve seen they aren’t without skill, but they’re going to need to be field tested along with drilling the concepts of loyalty and duty into them. + +“Sure, they look pretty, but can they fight?” you say after seeing the demonstration. This annoys Marik. He starts sputtering and stammering to the point where you think he’s going to go into a seizure. +“You just SAW what they’re capable of! How can you even say such a thing?” +“Yes, they were okay for children. I suppose we can find a place for them somewhere. Perhaps we can…” +“Bah! You’re just jealous!” Marik interrupts. +“Excuse me? Jealous?” you ask. +“Yes! They’re already the perfect warriors and didn’t need any training at all! They didn’t need all the hand holding nonsense that you had to go through to become a killing machine. Face it, these Eternals are the future!” + +You stare at Marik in disbelief that he dares to say such a thing to you. To his credit, Marik doesn’t back down, he stares back at you, ignoring your eyes burning through him. + +“You can give me that stare of death all you want Eternal.” Marik remarks. +“Alright…open up ten of the tanks. Let’s put them to a real test.” +“What? So you can incinerate them with your magic?” +“If they’re truly as good as you claim then my advantages shouldn’t matter, but since you seem to be unsure of your creations now. I’ll make it easy for you. Open up twenty of the tanks and I won’t use one damn cantrip.” + +Marik starts making that annoying high pitched laugh you hate so much then he suddenly gets very serious. + +“Were you planning on fighting them right now?” Marik asks. +“While I’m sure watching me slaughtering twenty naked teenagers would prove my point, I said I was going to make this easy. No, you go equip your twenty creations with whatever armor and weapons you wish. I’ll wait.” + +You wait as Marik orders twenty tanks opened up and has a few of his derro friends herd these children into another room presumably to get outfitted. Marik soon follows behind to oversee personally. + +While you wait, you reflect on the fact that they’re all the same age as you were when you first got to meet the Emperor. It was one of the greatest days of your life when that happened. This happy moment passes very quickly when you have to dwell on the fact that the Emperor is now on his deathbed. You have no idea what’s going to happen when the inevitable happens. Sometimes you look at the Emperor now and you wonder if that is what you have to look forward to when you get old. + +Is that the fate of everyone? No matter how powerful? What’s the point of it all? Will the Empire even survive when the Emperor dies? He doesn’t have a successor. You have often wondered if you would be it, but he’s never mentioned it. Even if you were, you can’t imagine ever doing the job better or even as well than he could. Leading armies is one thing, but an entire nation? You don’t know if you’d have the patience for it. You’re a soldier not a ruler and yet you couldn’t dream of serving any other ruler except the one you think of as father. + +Your mood starts getting worse because you also start dwelling on less pleasant aspects of your sixteenth year before you met the Emperor. It always comes back to her. Why the hell can’t you get her out of your head? + +Even now the woman hasn’t been seen in three years and yet she still comes back to fucking torment you. + +Alison’s dead, the Emperor’s dying, these new “eternals” are obviously meant to replace you, your own future is uncertain, Semra still haunts your thoughts… + +At this point you wonder if it wouldn’t just be best if you let these damn tank babies kill you. It would at least be a warrior’s death and you’d die when the Empire was going through a second golden age of sorts. + +You had some good times and saw several major threats to the Empire destroyed. Why stick around to see a man you have nothing but respect for continue to whither and die? Why see the potential slow decline of a nation you spent all your life trying to keep from the brink of chaos? + +Maybe it is time to step aside gracefully and be replaced… +> Retire +You think back to when you had to “retire” Kane. Different circumstances of course, but he knew when it was time. You know when its time too and the time is now. + +However, you aren’t going to accept death so easily. It’s going to have to be earned. + +Doesn’t take long before twenty tank babies along with the other two that were involved in the first demonstration come out fully decked out in armor and weapons. Surprisingly the derro didn’t deck them all out in the heaviest body encasing armor they could give them, though there are at least half of them dressed in such a manner. You can’t help notice that the derro didn’t limit their weapons to close combat, you see some with firearms. + +“Well here they are! Where the hell are you? Hehehehehehe! Did you lose your nerve and run away already?” Marik says calling out for you. + +Then you jump from the top of one of the tanks you climbed up on and bring your sword down on one of the tank babies, and quickly stab another in the throat with your dagger. You take advantage of their confusion by dispatching the ones with gunpowder weapons first. After snatching one of their flintlocks and blowing the head off of one, Marik tries to rally the tank babies with a simple instruction. + +“Don’t just stand there letting him massacre the lot of you, kill him!” + +You cut down another three and begin to get into battle mode. + +“Marik, release more of them!” you shout ducking a mace at your head. +“What?!” +“I said release more of these tank babies! If they’re going to replace me, they need to learn and these aren’t going to be enough to teach that lesson!” you shout back and dispatch the mace wielding tank baby. + +You’re too busy fighting to pay too much attention to what Marik is doing, but the sound of several tanks opening up followed by the sound several new footsteps are an indication that he listened to you. + +You slay more of them and demand that Marik keep throwing more at you. The tank babies aren’t without skill, but you’re proving to be a little too much for them to handle. Thoughts of “retirement” begin to leave your mind, and this thrill of battle is giving you that renewed incentive to live. + +Unfortunately you don’t anticipate your derro host to take matters into his own hands. Seems Marik isn’t pleased with you easily killing off his experiments. + +“Svelk loving bastard!” you hear Marik shout and then followed by a shot from a high platform above. The bullet hits you in the side and causes you to fall to the floor. The tank babies that you were currently fighting take advantage of the situation and gleefully stab at you or bludgeon you with maces and clubs. + +You try to get back up, but you’re overwhelmed and too badly wounded. Boots stomp and kick your body followed by several blades through your internal organs. You’re finally finished off by another gunshot to your head. + +Later on Marik explains to the Emperor that you insisted on fighting fifty of the new eternals to test them and that despite his warnings you were killed in the ensuing melee. If you were still alive you probably would be honored that the Emperor had Marik killed soon afterwards.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With revenge filling every inch of your body you immediately open the carriage door with the intent of climbing up to meet your attacker. No sooner have you opened the door when a rotting hand from above attempts to stab you in the face with a dagger. + +The blade superficially wounds you as it slices across your cheek. Unfazed you immediately grab the hand and pull down as hard as you can. The moment you do so you suddenly feel an unnatural drain of energy. Magic is definitely at work here and it’s sapping your strength. Despite this, the shadow tumbles off of the roof, but on its way down it grabs your own arm with its other hand and the pair of you fall from the carriage. + +Unfortunately, when you’re pulled out of the carriage you don’t clear it completely and your ankle is run over by one of the back wheels of the carriage that is still in motion. The bone snaps and you know it’s broken along with your nose when you fell flat on your face on the hard road. + +The shadow has recovered from his own fall much better having landed on his feet. You push yourself up just in time for his foot to kick you in the ribs. You roll away struggling to put some distance between yourself and the attacker. + +“Y’know when I was brought back I was given very specific instructions not to kill you…but I believe I will ignore them. After all I’m already dead, what else can be done to me?” you hear the shadow hiss in a raspy tone. + +You attempt to raise your hand to cast a flame blast, but the shadow grabs your wrist and you feel an even greater drain on your strength than you did before. At this close range you can smell the rot more strongly. + +“Oh no, you burned me once before, not again.” The shadow hisses as it drains your energy. With its recent comments, you realize this isn’t just a shadow or even some undead horror possibly masquerading as one. It’s Cyrus. + +Your whole body feels like its been beaten with a stone pillar yet you manage to muster the strength to pull your dagger and stab Cyrus repeatedly. You aren’t even aware of where you’re aiming, you stab it in the arm, in the shoulder, in the chest, in the face and wherever else you can reach until it lets you go and staggers back with your dagger still in its body. + +You’re dizzy, weak, and have only one good foot, but try to stand up anyway. Cyrus pulls the dagger from his body and does his typical shadow speed tactic in an attempt to rush into you with the dagger. You barely manage to put up a small force shield to block the blade from going into your stomach. Still the impact of the hit knocks you back down to the ground breaking your concentration on the spell. Cyrus kneels down to grab your neck, he’s not even squeezing and you feel the life leaving your body. You start to fade in and out of consciousness. + +“Now I’m going to show you something truly eternal. Death. They say the dead feel nothing, but that’s not true. It’s a lie just like the lie I believed about Dendrin meeting me for the afterlife. You know what I experienced instead? A very dark place filled with pain until I was ripped out of it and put back here on this mortal realm. That’s where you’re going brother. You’re going to a very dark place filled with pain and I’m going enjoy every moment putting you there.” + +At this point you have no idea what the hell Cyrus is speaking about, all you know is he’s more talkative in death than he ever was in life and that if he’s going to kill you, you wish he’d just shut up and do it already. + +Things get fuzzy again just as Cyrus’ fingers release your neck. What happens next is a blur. You do hear familiar female voice though. + +“This one is not yours to take, revenant.” + +This is followed by an inhuman scream and a bright light which is piercing even with your eyes nearly closed. Between the screaming, the bright light and your weakened state it’s all too much for you and start to pass out. + +You see a female shape with long hair standing over you, but you can’t make out the face. + +“…Alison?” you struggle to whisper. +“(Sigh) Blind to your true allies and lovers as always.” The figure says and then lays your dagger on your body. “Here, I know how much you treasure this gift to you.” +“Oh…fuck…” you say as you pass out. + +You don’t know how long you’re out for, but when you come to you’re in a spare bed in the Emperor’s quarters. Your ankle and nose feel tender but they don’t feel broken anymore. + +You look to your left and see the Emperor standing nearby with a walking stick in hand. + +“Ah, you’re awake and looking much better too. You looked about as bad as I do when Jacob first dragged you in here.” The Emperor remarks, sitting in a chair near you. +“Jacob found me?” +“No, actually Warrick and some of the Eyes picked you up off the road when a travelling patrol reported coming across your body and an overturned carriage crashed into a tree a few feet away. I requested that you be brought to me personally when I heard the news. You were severely injured, and I was damned if I was going to let anyone else bumble in the attempt to help you get better.” +“Alison?” you ask. +“I’m sorry son, but she’s dead. If that bolt to the eye didn’t do it, her neck was broken in the crash.” The Emperor remarks. + +You want to cry out, but you just don’t have the energy right now. You still feel woozy for one thing, the other is you had little hope that she was still alive anyway. The moment you saw that bolt in her eye, the moment you felt her blood on your face, the moment you felt her body go completely limp in your arms…you knew then she was dead. + +“Did you need some time alone?” the Emperor asks. +“No…I suppose I already knew.” You respond. “I’m sort of overwhelmed by everything that happened. I imagine I will grieve later for her.” +“I know how much she meant to you. I know she was also a loyal soldier and officer. She will be missed not just by you, but also by the Empire as a whole. Whatever type of funeral you wish for her, you know you’ve got it. I mean if you want a holiday to…” +“That…isn’t necessary. I believe I will just have a simple funeral for her. She was like me, she didn’t seek out a lot of attention.” +“As you wish. Remember though, whatever you need. You got it.” +“Can you manage an execution for a certain svelk bitch?” + +The Emperor starts one of his coughing fits before answering. + +“I assume you’re talking about Mistress. Yes, I fear I did uncover some evidence that it was she that was behind all this chaos. How did you know about her involvement though? Is she the one that attacked your carriage?” + +You explain to the Emperor what happened. He seems surprised to hear that the shadow wasn’t alive and was in fact undead. He concludes that Mistress must’ve raised Cyrus from the dead since she certainly has the skill to do it. + +“Necromancy eh? Raising the dead is dangerous stuff to dabble in, especially when summoning something as powerful as a revenant. (cough cough) Very difficult to command something that’s dead, yet still control of most of the skills they possessed in their old life. Too willful. Still I didn’t think that even she would be insane enough to try something like this. Her obsession (cough) with you must be great indeed. I’m not even sure what she hoped to accomplish, other than more chaos and strife I suppose. Hmm, well I guess that does sound like a svelk.” +“All I know is she deliberately set this up. Her standing over me as if she was my savior. I’m not fucking fooled! Next time I see her, she’s dead!” +“Well unfortunately Miss Semra D’vessa has fled the Empire and who knows where she’s gone. There aren’t even many svelk mercs within borders of the Empire anymore. There still might be a few in Rask, (cough cough) if you’d like I could make that law to have all svelk executed on sight. Hell, I think I’ll do that anyway. Someone needs to take the blame for this and it’ll certainly make the citizens happy to have mass hangings of dark elves. I know the elves will love it.” + +While the Emperor’s attempts to cheer you up with small acts of genocide are kind, you begin to feel the need to be by yourself. Your silence and your eyes looking downward are all the signs that the Emperor needs to take his leave. + +“Don’t worry son. We’ll get her.” He says and then leaves you to your solitude. + +You sit in bed for a long time trying to take everything in. Alison is gone. You’ll never see her smile, you’ll never feel her touch, you’ll never hear her voice, you’ll never enjoy anything involving her ever again. You almost feel like you don’t want to go on living and you never thought you’d ever feel something like that especially since survival has been beat and ingrained into your very being. + +That isn’t the worst of it though. You didn’t even get revenge on the one that killed her. In fact her assassin would’ve killed you as well if you hadn’t been saved, but that’s still not the worst of it. + +Semra…Mistress…svelk bitch…whatever you call her. She saved your life. + +As far as you’re concerned that’s the worst of it. However you’ll get over it and grow stronger from this experience. You always do. + +All it takes is time. +> Empire Expansion (Year 33) +Year 33 + +While the Emperor may be physically sick, his ambition remains perfectly fine and the Empire continues to grow thanks to you leading its armies. + +Shortly after the death of Roldan, you were assigned to the eastern frontier of Nalin just as you thought you might. Though with Roldan dead, you also thought you might immediately get reassigned to take care of the gnolls, but expansion westward was put on hold since there was no longer an immediate danger. + +You worked with Brenda for some of the campaign. She was most familiar with the region east of Nalin and had scouts sent that way many times. You remember during Roldan’s funeral you wondered if she might be angry with you for your inability to kill the assassin that killed her husband, but apparently what really happened was made a secret. You got credit for killing Cyrus and then Semra ambushed you and left you for dead. As a result, Brenda has always treated you with a lot of respect and gratitude. She may even feel a certain kinship with you since you both experienced loss of a significant other. + +Brenda however has never forgiven Warrick who she felt was supposed to be in charge of security that day. Indeed he and several Eyes might’ve normally been executed for incompetence or even suspicion of treason, however he swore up and down that he believed everything to be secure. As upset as Jacob was, he said Warrick was not at fault and surprisingly neither did the Emperor. Besides you all know it was really the work of Semra anyway. + +In any case, Brenda’s scout information proved most useful. There was a small tribal war going on between four separate groups, though all of them are hostile save for one of the and that’s mainly because the other three have come in contact with the Empire before. Two of them are human barbarian tribes, one them is elven, but much wilder than what you know of them and the last one is a race you’re not familiar with called the Slin. They’re reptilian in nature though, similar to the kobolds, but much larger and meaner. The fools obviously thought they could escape the reach of the Empire by hiding, they soon learn that they cannot hide from the Emperor’s wrath. + +The Belkaz were one of the human barbarian tribes. Since they had no prior hostilities to the Empire, they were dealt with first diplomatically. Of course your version of diplomacy meant that their most argumentative and hostile members were executed as an example and the rest were given warning that if they do not submit then the rest of them will be put in chains at best or follow their executed brethren at worst. Doesn’t take long for them to submit and provide further intelligence on their rivals. + +The other human tribe, the Fleg were the next to fall. The Emperor told you that he vaguely remembered the Fleg. Said they were a very minor cult that cropped up and became disruptive in the Nalin province about a century ago. The Emperor doesn’t quite remember what the hell they worshipped, but that like most religions it was subversive to the proper order of things. The Empire stomped it out, but it can be assumed that some of the members fled here and these were their descendants. They didn’t provide much of a challenge despite their fanatical beliefs in whatever gods they worshipped. Ultimately their cult was finally wiped out for good when you got to their last village you found that they all committed ritual suicide. + +The wild elf tribe was next. They were fierce fighters at first, but after you wiped out the Fleg and started making great progress against the Slin, something in them must’ve changed. It’s as if all their courage left them. These elves were all former slaves that managed to run away from the Empire during the chaos of the Halfling rebelling long ago. The elder that lead them actually called for a white flag parley with you and spoke of how he should’ve known it was folly to run away and that the Empire would eventually find them again even if it took them hundreds of years. You told him that it was indeed foolish, but that his realization of this reality wouldn’t be enough to save the remainder of his people. + +You have all the elves slaughtered like the cowering dogs they are. Their begging and pleas fall on deaf ears and sicken you. Part of you briefly wonders if you should spare the children and take them back as slaves, but then you think, why run that risk again in another couple decades? They’re already tainted with the idea of “freedom” and will only repeat the mistakes of their parents and grandparents. + +Finally, the last to fall are the Slin. The Emperor told you that he remembered the Slin and thought he’d made a point of making them extinct centuries ago. They originally dwelled in the swamps of Delerg and were once at hostilities with the Shadows that lived there as well. Wasn’t long after the Shadows made their convenient alliance with the Empire that the Slin started taking heavy losses against them. It was thought to be the case that the shadows were successful in killing them all, but it seems they were not and the Slin ultimately had the last laugh of outliving their former foes. Though not for long. + +Still, they fought to the last, giving no quarter and showing none themselves, they were about the only worthy enemy you fought against in this region. In many ways to be admired. + +With the four major inhabitants subdued, the region was claimed and it will only be a matter of time before proper Empire citizens settle it. Further east leads to vast open sea. You predict that in time as the coast is settled the Empire will eventually have a navy to rival its army and who know, new lands may be conquered across the ocean. There are certainly tales of other such lands. + +After this victory, the next bit of business was finishing off the gnolls. You were put in charge of this as well and it didn’t really take too long. You and Alison had broken most of the might of the gnoll tribes long ago. Roldan was just mopping up the remnants and you complete the task at last. + +With the last major gnoll lair destroyed the Empire expanded its western borders even further. What lies beyond is a little bit of a mystery as there are no major reports of any organized societies, though there are certainly reports of other civilizations beyond the immediate western wilderness, they are very far away. Whatever they may be you’re confident that they will be no match for the Empire. + +Of course these thoughts of future victories are all you have now to keep yourself in a positive mood nowadays. Your recent success has basically ensured that further major expansion and conquest won’t be necessary for quite some time. Alison’s gone and the Emperor’s health is still poor and showing no signs of improving. + +It is no wonder that your mind drifts into possible better days ahead.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With revenge filling every inch of your body you immediately open the carriage door with the intent of climbing up to meet your attacker. No sooner have you opened the door when a rotting hand from above attempts to stab you in the face with a dagger. + +The blade superficially wounds you as it slices across your cheek. Unfazed you immediately grab the hand and pull down as hard as you can. The moment you do so you suddenly feel an unnatural drain of energy. Magic is definitely at work here and it’s sapping your strength. Despite this, the shadow tumbles off of the roof, but on its way down it grabs your own arm with its other hand and the pair of you fall from the carriage. + +Unfortunately, when you’re pulled out of the carriage you don’t clear it completely and your ankle is run over by one of the back wheels of the carriage that is still in motion. The bone snaps and you know it’s broken along with your nose when you fell flat on your face on the hard road. + +The shadow has recovered from his own fall much better having landed on his feet. You push yourself up just in time for his foot to kick you in the ribs. You roll away struggling to put some distance between yourself and the attacker. + +“Y’know when I was brought back I was given very specific instructions not to kill you…but I believe I will ignore them. After all I’m already dead, what else can be done to me?” you hear the shadow hiss in a raspy tone. + +You attempt to raise your hand to cast a flame blast, but the shadow grabs your wrist and you feel an even greater drain on your strength than you did before. At this close range you can smell the rot more strongly. + +“Oh no, you burned me once before, not again.” The shadow hisses as it drains your energy. With its recent comments, you realize this isn’t just a shadow or even some undead horror possibly masquerading as one. It’s Cyrus. + +Your whole body feels like its been beaten with a stone pillar yet you manage to muster the strength to pull your dagger and stab Cyrus repeatedly. You aren’t even aware of where you’re aiming, you stab it in the arm, in the shoulder, in the chest, in the face and wherever else you can reach until it lets you go and staggers back with your dagger still in its body. + +You’re dizzy, weak, and have only one good foot, but try to stand up anyway. Cyrus pulls the dagger from his body and does his typical shadow speed tactic in an attempt to rush into you with the dagger. You barely manage to put up a small force shield to block the blade from going into your stomach. Still the impact of the hit knocks you back down to the ground breaking your concentration on the spell. Cyrus kneels down to grab your neck, he’s not even squeezing and you feel the life leaving your body. You start to fade in and out of consciousness. + +“Now I’m going to show you something truly eternal. Death. They say the dead feel nothing, but that’s not true. It’s a lie just like the lie I believed about Dendrin meeting me for the afterlife. You know what I experienced instead? A very dark place filled with pain until I was ripped out of it and put back here on this mortal realm. That’s where you’re going brother. You’re going to a very dark place filled with pain and I’m going enjoy every moment putting you there.” + +At this point you have no idea what the hell Cyrus is speaking about, all you know is he’s more talkative in death than he ever was in life and that if he’s going to kill you, you wish he’d just shut up and do it already. + +Things get fuzzy again just as Cyrus’ fingers release your neck. What happens next is a blur. You do hear familiar female voice though. + +“This one is not yours to take, revenant.” + +This is followed by an inhuman scream and a bright light which is piercing even with your eyes nearly closed. Between the screaming, the bright light and your weakened state it’s all too much for you and start to pass out. + +You see a female shape with long hair standing over you, but you can’t make out the face. + +“…Alison?” you struggle to whisper. +“(Sigh) Blind to your true allies and lovers as always.” The figure says and then lays your dagger on your body. “Here, I know how much you treasure this gift to you.” +“Oh…fuck…” you say as you pass out. + +You don’t know how long you’re out for, but when you come to you’re in a spare bed in the Emperor’s quarters. Your ankle and nose feel tender but they don’t feel broken anymore. + +You look to your left and see the Emperor standing nearby with a walking stick in hand. + +“Ah, you’re awake and looking much better too. You looked about as bad as I do when Jacob first dragged you in here.” The Emperor remarks, sitting in a chair near you. +“Jacob found me?” +“No, actually Warrick and some of the Eyes picked you up off the road when a travelling patrol reported coming across your body and an overturned carriage crashed into a tree a few feet away. I requested that you be brought to me personally when I heard the news. You were severely injured, and I was damned if I was going to let anyone else bumble in the attempt to help you get better.” +“Alison?” you ask. +“I’m sorry son, but she’s dead. If that bolt to the eye didn’t do it, her neck was broken in the crash.” The Emperor remarks. + +You want to cry out, but you just don’t have the energy right now. You still feel woozy for one thing, the other is you had little hope that she was still alive anyway. The moment you saw that bolt in her eye, the moment you felt her blood on your face, the moment you felt her body go completely limp in your arms…you knew then she was dead. + +“Did you need some time alone?” the Emperor asks. +“No…I suppose I already knew.” You respond. “I’m sort of overwhelmed by everything that happened. I imagine I will grieve later for her.” +“I know how much she meant to you. I know she was also a loyal soldier and officer. She will be missed not just by you, but also by the Empire as a whole. Whatever type of funeral you wish for her, you know you’ve got it. I mean if you want a holiday to…” +“That…isn’t necessary. I believe I will just have a simple funeral for her. She was like me, she didn’t seek out a lot of attention.” +“As you wish. Remember though, whatever you need. You got it.” +“Can you manage an execution for a certain svelk bitch?” + +The Emperor starts one of his coughing fits before answering. + +“I assume you’re talking about Mistress. Yes, I fear I did uncover some evidence that it was she that was behind all this chaos. How did you know about her involvement though? Is she the one that attacked your carriage?” + +You explain to the Emperor what happened. He seems surprised to hear that the shadow wasn’t alive and was in fact undead. He concludes that Mistress must’ve raised Cyrus from the dead since she certainly has the skill to do it. + +“Necromancy eh? Raising the dead is dangerous stuff to dabble in, especially when summoning something as powerful as a revenant. (cough cough) Very difficult to command something that’s dead, yet still control of most of the skills they possessed in their old life. Too willful. Still I didn’t think that even she would be insane enough to try something like this. Her obsession (cough) with you must be great indeed. I’m not even sure what she hoped to accomplish, other than more chaos and strife I suppose. Hmm, well I guess that does sound like a svelk.” +“All I know is she deliberately set this up. Her standing over me as if she was my savior. I’m not fucking fooled! Next time I see her, she’s dead!” +“Well unfortunately Miss Semra D’vessa has fled the Empire and who knows where she’s gone. There aren’t even many svelk mercs within borders of the Empire anymore. There still might be a few in Rask, (cough cough) if you’d like I could make that law to have all svelk executed on sight. Hell, I think I’ll do that anyway. Someone needs to take the blame for this and it’ll certainly make the citizens happy to have mass hangings of dark elves. I know the elves will love it.” + +While the Emperor’s attempts to cheer you up with small acts of genocide are kind, you begin to feel the need to be by yourself. Your silence and your eyes looking downward are all the signs that the Emperor needs to take his leave. + +“Don’t worry son. We’ll get her.” He says and then leaves you to your solitude. + +You sit in bed for a long time trying to take everything in. Alison is gone. You’ll never see her smile, you’ll never feel her touch, you’ll never hear her voice, you’ll never enjoy anything involving her ever again. You almost feel like you don’t want to go on living and you never thought you’d ever feel something like that especially since survival has been beat and ingrained into your very being. + +That isn’t the worst of it though. You didn’t even get revenge on the one that killed her. In fact her assassin would’ve killed you as well if you hadn’t been saved, but that’s still not the worst of it. + +Semra…Mistress…svelk bitch…whatever you call her. She saved your life. + +As far as you’re concerned that’s the worst of it. However you’ll get over it and grow stronger from this experience. You always do. + +All it takes is time. +> Kane's Retirement (Year 34) +Year 34 + +Through the extreme cold, the wailing the winds and the relentless snow, you look up and finally see your destination in sight; A lonely outpost which consist of a small watch hut on a hill near the Rask Mountains. + +How the hell such a structure continues to exist is amazing. The rough weather around here is bad enough, but the fact that it exists on the very edge of ogre and giant territory and who knows what else living in those mountains is almost impossible to believe. + +Yet the very fact it continues to exist is a testament to the man who lives inside it. A man who has been doing his best to serve loyally despite his condition. + +A condition that has at last become too unbearable for him. You received the letter a week ago. As far as you know, you’re the only one who knows this. He apparently hasn’t even told this to Jacob. + +This has been a long time coming. You knew it was only a matter of time, you just hope it isn’t too late. + +You wake your way up the long winding path up to the hut. There are signs that a battle occurred here weeks ago. Fresh ogre skulls have been put on several sharpened wooden poles like a grisly totem pole. A frozen giant head lies nearby the poles, some of it looks like its been eaten. This is a good sign at least. Kane has probably still managed to contain his hunger to his enemies and hasn’t been thinking about other potential victims. + +The closer you get to the hut, the more cautious you become. You have no idea what Kane’s state of mind is right now. Has he completely lost it? Is he still relatively in control? Will he attack you as soon as you enter the hut? + +You’re about to find out when you open the door up with sword in hand. + +Kane sits by a kettle making some sort of stew; you can guess what it might be. He looks up and you can see in his face that he is much different than when you last saw him. The beast within is taking over. His mouth is wider and exposing his teeth which are now fangs. His hands have become more like claws. Just like you saw him temporarily during your visit at Gnome’s Home. + +Despite his appearance, he doesn’t seem hostile or out of control. + +“Got my letter I see. Glad you could make it. Wasn’t sure if you were busy, I don’t get much news this way.” He says testing his soup. +“Actually I don’t have much to do nowadays. The Empire has stopped its period of expansion for now and all of its enemies are inconsequential.” +“Huh, tell that to the giants that lumber down from the mountains around here. You know how hard it is to instill a fearsome reputation among creatures that are twice or three times your size? It isn’t easy.” +“I would imagine it isn’t, but given that Rask doesn’t suffer as many giant or ogre raids anymore I’d say you’ve done a good job.” + +Kane gives you an unsettling toothy smile. + +“That’s all I’ve ever wanted to hear, you know? However, I’m not entirely successful since there are still attacks I have to stop. I don’t think there’s much for it though, some are just too plain stupid to know the meaning of fear. When I’m gone make sure Fort Defiance gets extra troops. I know we’ve since invented all these great killing machines and new weapons that can kill a lot faster, but extra manpower can’t hurt.” +“Is it really that bad now?” you ask. +“What do you think?” Kane answers as if his appearance is enough to prove his condition is indeed getting to the point of no return. + +“I can’t take the hunger pains any longer. Each day I grow closer to giving in completely. The funny thing is, this… creature inside me is probably the closest thing I’ve ever had to a friend. It sometimes even speaks to me as if it is a comrade in arms. In some ways it is. I don’t believe I could keep up some of the things I do without its great strength helping me. It has allowed me to serve the Empire longer than I probably would have otherwise.” + +You almost want to say that the abomination that has possessed Kane’s body is not his friend and has only been using him to help feed its unending hunger, but Kane is probably struggling to find some measure of peace in his situation, so you do not lecture. + +“Perhaps it was meant to be.” You say. +“I like to think so…but I also know it is time. As much as I would like to continue serving my duty forever, I know I cannot. So I called upon you. The only one I know that could take me down if need be. The only one worthy to. I know even though we never spoke much, those moments we did talk in Gnome’s Home I knew you to be a man of honor. You found out the truth about my situation, yet you saw that I was still an Eternal at heart. You will always have my thanks for that brother.” + +Kane continues to sit focusing on his stew. At this point you feel as if it would be best to get this over with quickly. You walk over to him with your weapon still drawn. He makes no effort to defend himself and even puts his head down so as to expose the back of his neck to you for a better cut. + +“I was sorry to hear about your wife. Major Krozer was an excellent warrior. It was also a loss to the Empire. So was the death of Roldan, as will the death me, but I know the Empire will survive. And because it will survive, I will survive along with all others who died within its duty. Just promise me two things brother.” +“Yes?” you ask preparing to strike. +“Tell them I died in battle with ogres and giants.” +“And the second?” +“Steel your mind. The demon will attempt to possess you, but I imagine you’ll be stronger to resist it than I. You always were the best of us. Perhaps the only true Eternal.” + +“You’re an Eternal Kane, you always will be.” You remark and bring your blade down on his neck. It isn’t a quick death mainly because Kane isn’t himself. The wendigo inside is finally unleashed and Kane begins howling and snarling as he writhes on the floor with his neck half severed. + +“You will torment this honorable man no longer, demon.” You say and finish the decapitation. Kane’s body still twitches on the floor even with his head now detached. It even manages to weakly kick at you. The deed is done, but now you do indeed feel the invading presence of the wendigo. + +“I remember you from that wonderful place where all those delicious gnomes and that obnoxious svelk woman were. You are strong and powerful, but just think how much more powerful you could be if you just let me in…” the wendigo remarks. +“If you do remember me, then you also know that I’ve been psychically assaulted by hundreds of angry gnome souls at the same time. Do you really think you stand a chance?” +“Ssssss! I am no weak gnome soul! I am wendigo! I am hunger everlasting and forever yearning! And soon YOU will share that desire!” the wendigo hisses. + +The wendigo’s threats are in vain however. You are more than equipped to take care of one now. You’ve long since strengthened your mind from psychic attacks and you also took the time to study wendigo lore before even coming here. You begin chanting. + +“What…what are you doing?” the wendigo asks, but you ignore it and concentrate on banishing it. In the middle of this process you sense that the wendigo halts its pathetic attempts to possess you and instead attempts to escape back to the land that it was originally bound to, but you aren’t letting it get away. + +“No! Not oblivion! Stop or I’ll make you suffer mortal!” + +More empty threats. Funny how even a demonic spirit like this one when faced with the possibility of ultimate death it still pleads for its “life” just like…well a mortal would. + +Eventually its voice disappears along with its very essence. The wendigo is gone and you’re left with another dead “sibling.” + +After a bit of clean up you report the incident to Jacob, who while not as upset when Roldan died, is still visibly saddened. + +“I didn’t know it had gotten that bad. He never said…” Jacob remarks. +“I don’t think he wanted you to know. Probably thought you’d keep trying to protect him, especially since Roldan died two years ago. And he knew I’d take care of it. Not just killing him, but killing the demon within him too.” + +Jacob begins looking through his paperwork for a blank piece of paper and starts writing. It’s probably some decree to give Kane a proper military funeral along with the usual accolades about how he died gloriously in battle with several giants. + +“His duty to the Empire won’t be forgotten. I’m going to make sure of that.” Jacob says. +“That’s all he ever wanted.” You reply and take your leave.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>If this is some sort of shadow attack then the first thing you need to do is keep the palace secure, in particular the Emperor. Besides the city streets are going to be mayhem, you doubt if you’ll be able to track down the assassin that killed Roldan. Hopefully others will get him though. + +Despite Alison getting most of the people back into the palace, Jacob is still sitting on the balcony in shock. + +“He…he…he’s not…he can’t…” Jacob stutters. +“Jacob get your ass inside now!” you shout and drag him inside. + +You and Alison both start taking control of the situation telling the guards to lock up every opening they can and the mages on duty to magically seal up the rest. Alison tells the guests to find some place safe to gather, but you don’t really care about any of them. Your number one concern is the safety of the Emperor. + +“Alison, I need to…” +“I know, the Emperor. Go. I can help with keeping shit together here.” + +You rush down to the Emperor’s den constantly looking around the whole time. You keep thinking that a shadow, or whatever that was that killed Roldan is going to suddenly materialize at anytime. + +When you get inside the Emperor’s chambers, he’s in bed asleep. You don’t want to wake him, but he needs to know the situation. + +“Huh? Mmmh? Oh hey…(cough cough) what’re you doing here? Are the festivities already over?” he asks. +“Emperor, there’s been an assassination. General Roldan was killed during the parade by what I think was a shadow. We’re currently trying to secure the palace just in case this is part of a greater attack.” +“Sounds like a lot happened while I was taking a nap. Shadow huh? Thought we killed all of them. Guess they were just playing a waiting game as usual. Always a few loose ends aren’t there? (cough) I imagine Jacob isn’t taking Roldan’s death too well.” +“Not at all, he’s pretty much in shock and was babbling the last time I saw him.” +“Hmm, well it is a shame. Roldan did turn out to be one of our best generals. I’ll have to make sure he gets a nice funeral. If we can’t celebrate his successes in life, at least we can honor him in death. (cough cough)…what’s wrong my son?” the Emperor asks when he notices that you’re looking slightly troubled. + +“I was one of the ones chiefly in charge of hunting down the shadows. The fact that I missed one or possibly several so that something like this could happen…I feel like I failed.” You explain. +“Nonsense, you did what you could to the best of your ability. I’ve always known that. Don’t even start playing what if for this situation, because it’s not worth it. While this event has certainly been tragic in that it ruined what was supposed to be a happy day, this really isn’t excessively serious in the scheme of things. (cough cough) If you were worried about me, don’t be. Even in my less than magnificent state, I’m more than able to handle a shadow or even a dozen of them. Assuming they could even get in here in the first place. Its probably just one crazed shadow that somehow hid under a rock all these years from our purges and thinks this one act is going to bring us down. Foolish of course, but what can you expect from such fanatics?” +“You don’t think this sort of thing could cause instability in the Empire?” +“Hardly. (cough cough) The citizens might panic about things for awhile, they’ll be fearful of the big bad shadows’ return for revenge or whatever stories they’ll make up, but ultimately it all works in our benefit I’m sure you know. (cough cough) We get to continue to display how without us they would be at the mercy of dangerous forces that would have destroyed them long ago.” +“So…what did you want me to do now?” you ask. + +The Emperor begins to sit up a bit more before answering you. + +“Nothing. In fact (cough cough) after things calm down a bit, you can return to your regular duties in the newly acquired Gan and Ibim provinces. I can handle things here in the palace and the city, just get Jacob down here and I’ll start hammering out the plans.” +“You really don’t need me to do anything?” +“No, your talents are far more useful doing what you’re doing right now. Besides, with Roldan dead you might be needed more than ever on that side of the Empire. Last I heard there were still gnolls running about. (cough cough) I of course appreciate your concern as always my son.” + +The Emperor begins to slowly get out of bed and you take your leave. When you get back upstairs everything is more or less peaceful. Alison and some of the other officers have been making sure the palace is secure. Alison tells you there have been no signs of any potential attackers. Reports from outside the palace are about the same, other than Roldan’s assassination the only other causalities have been from soldiers trying to maintain order or from people getting trampled in the initial chaos. No shadows or anything else like that. + +“So what’s the next move? What did the Emperor tell you?” Alison asks. +“He told me not to worry and when things calm down outside to just return to my normal duties.” You respond +“That’s it?!” +“That’s it. He wants to see Jacob though, is he in a more coherent mindset now?” +“Compared to before? Yeah, but he’s still pretty shaken up. I know he’s been crying.” + +You walk over to Jacob who is sitting quietly in a chair with his head in his hands. He’s still very upset. You have to repeat yourself twice when telling him that the Emperor wants to see him. + +You and Alison stay at the palace for a few more minutes, but when you get news that a carriage is able to take you back to Fort Stalwart you decide to leave immediately. Its hectic trying to leave at first since there is still a bit of turmoil in the streets as well as the surrounding countryside, but once you’re a few miles from the capital the ride becomes more relaxed. + +Alison asks you if you’re certain about leaving. + +“The Emperor told me to just return to more normal duties and not to worry, so that’s what I’m going to do. If he says he can handle this incident himself then I have no reason to doubt that. Besides, he also said with Roldan dead I might be needed more on the western borders anyway.” You say. +“Hmm. I guess all those times I worried about you being punished seem sort of silly now…sheesh…today was surreal. I mean I’ve seen a lot of stuff in my years of service, but nothing like this. The general consensus seems to be that it was a shadow that killed Roldan. Certainly looked like one from where I was sitting.” Alison replies. +“I don’t see what else it could’ve been. Similar style of clothing, invisibility, incredibly quick, sneak attack, the elements were all there. (Sigh) Damn.” +“You alright?” +“I just…well I dunno. I just can’t believe we…I missed a shadow. Really thought we got them all when I killed Cyrus. The Emperor said it wasn’t my fault and I know it really isn’t but I still feel like this is a major loss.” +“Yeah, I can imagine you’d feel that way having worked together with Roldan during the Felkan War.” +“Heh, well to be honest Roldan and I were never close. I mean we were professional and civil, but we never really did become what you’d call friends. Still though he didn’t deserve to die like that. He wasn’t just an excellent solder and general, he was an Eternal and I guess that bond was there to an extent even if it was faint. Now there’s one less of us.” +“I guess given that you all grew up together and were subjected more or less to the same training, the other Eternals are sort of like, your siblings?” +“Yeah, I suppose in some ways they are. Funny that I never thought of that before.” You remark. + +As you reflect on all that’s happened, Alison reaches out to touch your hand, you look over at her and return her smile with one of your own. Happy that you have her. + +Then your smile disappears when a bolt grazes your ear and hits Alison right in the eye. Her blood splatters on your face and her body slowly goes limp in your arms. + +You turn your head around just in time to see the assassin hanging outside the carriage window with one hand and his other arm reeling back from having launched his bolt from his armbow. + +It’s definitely a shadow, but from this range you can also see it’s also not human. The face is either severely burned or rotten. It grins at you with blacken teeth and before you can react, it rapidly climbs up which is followed by brief scream from the carriage driver and then the ride gets a lot bumpier really quick. + +The shadow has probably killed the driver and is probably in the process of detaching the horses. Meanwhile you’re still holding the body of you beloved Alison. +> Try to heal Alison +Ignoring the increasingly bumpy ride and still holding Alison in your arms, you concentrate as hard as you can trying to heal her. + +“Hang on Alison. I can bring you back. I know I can. Just hold on…” you say. + +The carriage doesn’t hold on however and soon its bumpy ride comes to a sudden stop when it crashes into a tree and turns over. You and Alison are thrown about causing you to lose focus. + +“SHIT!” you shout followed by several other curses as you scramble back to Alison’s body which is now starting to grow cold. + +Once again you attempt to heal her, trying not to break down emotionally, but once again you are interrupted. This time by her killer who appears above you standing on the outside of the now ruined carriage. You don’t react in time to avoid the bolt he shoots at you which pierces your skull. Your body falls on top of Alison’s though you’re not quite dead yet. The brain is a funny thing when damaged in a very specific way. Instead of dying immediately, your body is twitching involuntarily and you’re helpless to defend yourself against any further attack. + +In your final moments the assassin jumps in the carriage with you and grabs you by your neck. You feel a great drain on your remaining strength. You can’t see very well at this point, but the assassin’s face even in this rotten form looks somewhat familiar. It almost looks like Cyrus. + +But it couldn’t be him…could it? + +The assassin’s grinning expression seems to say it all. + +But why or how he came to this state will remain a mystery to you along with whoever it was that raised him in the first place.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’re sure the Emperor means well and he probably does have more knowledge on these things. But he doesn’t know Alison the way you know her. You also can’t and won’t spend your life in fear that something might occur that will cause strife between you and Alison. + +That’s why you’re going to tell her what happened two years ago and face whatever the consequences may be. + +You leave the palace and the capital to make your way to where Alison is currently stationed, which means a long ride back to the new eastern frontier of the Empire. You eventually arrive at Fort Stalwart, which is actually just a renamed and rebuilt fort once held by the ex-Felkan Kingdom. + +Given your reputation, the gates are immediately opened for you. A few of the older soldiers are also probably aware of your relationship with their commanding officer so orders are already given to alert Alison of your sudden arrival. She meets you even before you make it to her office. + +She flashes a smile when she sees you and goes to put her arms around you presumably to kiss you. While you’d love for her to do so, you stop Alison, which confuses the hell out her. + +“What’s this? Oh. The other soldiers around. You and your insistence on keeping protocol. Very well let’s get to my quarters so we can get you back into your comfort zone, because its been too damn long.” +“It has and we should get back to your quarters, but I’m not sure if you’re going to be in the mood for what you probably had in mind after I tell you what I have to tell you.” + +Alison steps back and gives you a tilted look. + +“Hmm, sounds serious. You look even more grim than usual. Well let’s get this over with.” Alison says and the pair of you head towards her quarters. + +Her private quarters are neat and clean, as you’d expect, on the right wall you see your portrait, which is right across from her bed. Placed in such a way so the first thing she sees when she wakes up is you. + +“Alright. Out with it and let’s see exactly how mad you think I’m going to be at you.” Alison remarks closing her door. You sit on the bed and take a deep breath then exhale giving her a look on your face which contains a mixture of shame and guilt. + +“Geez…this must be bad. I don’t think I’ve ever seen you like this. Its almost like you’re afraid to tell me. Shit, maybe I better sit down too.” Alison says taking a seat in one her chairs. +“Alison…I love you. I want you to know that before I say anything else. I never thought I could ever feel this way at all about anyone. It just wasn’t something I was taught or even learned. (whew) Okay enough stalling. Here it is…” + +You tell Alison everything that happened two years ago at Gnome’s Home and afterwards. You also explain that you didn’t want to tell her in a letter because you felt something like this should be face to face. You expect Alison to show some sign of anger at this point, but she remains stoically silent just listening to everything. + +Lastly, and you weren’t planning on telling her this either, but you mention that the Emperor suggested that you break up with her and how you obviously ignored this advice because your feelings are just that strong for her. This one causes her eyes to widen a little. + +“Wow, obsessed svelk, rape through magic trickery, warnings from the Emperor, defying orders…sheesh. Bet you never thought you’d have to deal with things like this.” +“Rape?” you say. +“Well, yes. Its not like you willingly had sex with her, you willingly had sex with what you THOUGHT was me. It might’ve been a civilized form of it, but it still was rape since you wouldn’t have had sex with who it really was. What else would you call what that svelk bitch did to you? The act doesn’t always include a bunch of men holding down a hapless young girl and ramming their dicks into her you know.” + +Hell, you never even thought about that. For a brief moment you feel slightly…violated. + +“And here I thought she was just making up shit and posturing.” Alison continues. +“Wait a minute. You…knew? When?” you ask. +“For about two years now. Though as you might expect she told things a little differently. Never mentioned about disguising herself as me.” +“So she visited you? You never mentioned it in your letters.” +“Well hey guess what, neither did you. Though in your case I can understand why. In my case it was more I thought she was just so full of shit that I didn’t believe her in the first place and in the second place I knew you were so busy with the Felkans that I didn’t want to distract you with unpleasant thoughts of her in my letters. Figured it would be best to keep her out of them.” + +“What did she tell you exactly?” +“She appeared in my office one night claiming that she would always be the main woman in your life. And how I didn’t stand chance against her and that I should just give up now. She said this along with the predictable insults of monkey and my general appearance. Then she mentioned how she easily seduced you into having sex with her and that you would always be hers. Like I said she was so overly dramatic about everything I thought she had to be lying.” +“So what did you do?” +“Nothing, I mostly just shrugged my shoulders and told her I thought she was lying. I also mentioned that I found it pretty sad that for all her superior svelk talent and beauty she was still jealous of a mere monkey like myself and obsessed with a man who obviously did not share the strong feelings she obviously has for you. Then to finish up my retort I also told her that even if what she said was true, that even if you did have sex with her it would only make you appreciate me all the more.” +“Yikes. I can imagine she didn’t like that.” +“Oh no, she did not like it at all. Her face turned from a smug sneer to one of frothing anger. I thought she was going to attack me, some flames started emanating from her fingers and for a moment it felt like a force was keeping me from drawing my own weapon. I couldn’t even call out for other soldiers to help. I guess she thought better of it though because she just stood there for a moment staring at me and then made her way out the window. Wasn’t long after that incident the svelk merc support was transferred out of here, which was fine by me and everyone else of course. Not like we needed them against gnoll attacks anymore anyway.” + +“I can’t believe all this happened and you aren’t mad.” You say. +“Oh trust me I’m mad, but if you think its with you, you’re mistaken. I can’t do much about it though I suppose. I’m not really concerned with your little svelk stalker. I’m a little more troubled with what you just told me about the Emperor. I get the impression he doesn’t care for my influence, not that I think I really have any over you.” +“Oh that? I wouldn’t worry about him. I believe he’s just overly concerned with my well-being again. He’s always been a little over protective at times, like a father with an only son I suppose. Right now though I’m just wondering how you feel about me after all is said and done.” +“I don’t feel anything. Ha ha ha …wait that came out wrong. What I mean is I still feel the same way I always have about you. I love you. Nothing has changed.” +“Good, then let’s get married. Let’s take our relationship to its next logical step.” +“Married? You serious?” +“Well sure. I mean don’t people who feel the way we do get married?” +“Usually I guess…but I dunno…seems like there some forces against us, and that’s not even including one of us dying violently in battle. I mean in some ways the Emperor might be right. You might save yourself some pain if you ended our relationship now.” +“Perhaps, but I won’t get to experience the good stuff if I did that.” +“Good stuff eh? Is that what you’re calling it now?” Alison jokes. “Well, you sure you’re ready for the pain of possibly losing me on some forsaken battlefield somewhere?” +“How do you know you’ll die first? You could outlive me.” +“Pfft, please. You’ll outlive everyone. You’d outlast this entire world, if you had the time.” Alison laughs. +“So will you marry me?” +“Yes, of course I will.” + +As fitting for two soldiers, you and Alison don’t have a fancy wedding; in fact you get married the next day in some small town in the Arat province by a local bureaucrat. Alison is still on duty for the next week so you return to her post and spend your wedding night in her quarters at Fort Stalwart. She tells you though as soon as she has time off, the pair of you are going to spend quality time doing something fun which doesn’t involve the bedroom. You don’t see the need since the bedroom is just fine with you, but you agree. + +While waiting for Alison’s time off, you take it upon yourself to have a pair of proper rings made for you and Alison. You also have what possessions you actually own sent to Fort Stalwart since you don’t know where you’ll be stationed next and there is as good of place as any. + +After you’ve taken care of all that, you still have a day left to wait for Alison, so you go back to see the Emperor, you figure he should know what you’ve done and he’ll know eventually anyway. + +When you see him again, he’s still coughing a lot and moving slowly when he walks. He seems happy to see you though. + +“My (cough cough) son. This is an unexpected (cough) visit. I would’ve thought you would’ve been off enjoying your down time.” He says. +“I am, but I have also come to tell you something. I have married Alison.” +“Oh. I see. Well (cough cough) whatever makes you happy son. I trust she makes you happy.” +“Yes.” +“Then I’m happy for you. (cough cough) Heh, that was quick. Have to admit I didn’t expect you to marry her. You should’ve told me though (cough cough) I could’ve ordered a big city celebration like what (cough cough) we’re doing for the victory over the Felkans. You two could’ve walked down the streets with fancy guard and everything.” +“That would’ve been very generous, but I don’t think that would’ve been either of our style.” +“I suppose not. Well as I (cough cough) have said, I’m happy for you, enjoy your time together and cherish it. So was there anything else?” +“No, nothing of any note.” +“Very well…(cough cough) ugh…I’m still afflicted as you can tell. I need to just rest, so if you’ll excuse me.” + +Again, you feel like asking if he needs help, but you resist. Instead you just quietly start to leave. The Emperor speaks to you as he makes his way back to his bedroom. + +“Oh. Don’t (cough cough) worry about Semra. I spoke with her earlier a couple days ago about bothering you again.” +“Semra?” +“Yeah, you know (cough cough) Mistress. I made it quite clear to her if she did do it again that she’d be executed, along with every other svelk in the Empire. (cough cough) Funny thing is, she went into a complete breakdown exclaiming that I didn’t need to worry about that ever again, because as far she was concerned she never wanted to see you ever again. Then she (cough) proceeded to swear in common tongue as well as her own language. Mostly about you. Then she stormed off. If I didn’t know better I thought she was going to cry. I actually wondered what it was that caused all that. Now I know. I guess you had a hidden witness (cough cough) to your wedding.” + +“Shit.” You say quietly to yourself in amazement. Then you address the Emperor. + +“Thank you, sir.” +“No problem. (cough cough) Think of it as my wedding gift to you.” + +Well you couldn’t have asked for a better one, assuming she really does stay away. +> Married without children (Year 31) +Year 31 + +You didn’t mean to get into a minor argument about this, but you like to be prepared for all eventualities, so you had to ask the question… + +“Alison, I actually don’t care if you’ve been drinking stillness potions to avoid unwanted burdens, because I’d understand. I just wanted to know if you were drinking them.” You explain. +“No, I haven’t. I used to before I met you and I did even in the beginnings of our relationship, but I stopped taking them years ago.” +“Really? I would’ve thought you would’ve waited until after marriage.” +“What for? It wasn’t like I had any intimate encounters after you got transferred, well other than my hand.” + +You quickly start counting up the times in your head when you’ve had sex with Alison since you’ve been married. + +“Yes dear, it’s been MORE than enough times for an accidental burden as you put it to have occurred.” Alison remarks. “I’m not sure why you’re even concerned about this, I’ve never known you to want kids. Is this something you want?” +“Well no…(Sigh) I just wanted to know if it was something you wanted because I think…and I don’t know this for certain, but I believe I am unable to provide you children. I probably should’ve told you this before, but honestly you’re right in that I’ve never gave children much consideration before. In fact, I’ve probably only been pondering this more because I’ve had more downtime than I ever had since we defeated the Felkans. + +Alison gets silent for a moment. + +“I see. But why do you think this? I mean do you have any proof? It can’t be an equipment problem because we both know that works. You might take into consideration that sex doesn’t always lead to a screaming infant. Just most of the time.” +“Yeah, but as you pointed out, once is all it takes. I guess I’m just thinking about Roldan and his own marriage with Brenda. He once told me they’ve genuinely tried to have children on several occasions. Even to the point of both of them imbibing fertility potions. Nothing worked.” +“So? Just because Roldan or Brenda sterile that means you are too?” +“Quite possibly. You forget, we’re all Eternals. Roldan told me that he and Brenda came to that conclusion. He believes that it might have something to do with all the enhancements that are made on us when we were still babies. I mean its not like Warrick or Kane have any children either.” +“I’d hate to think about Kane having any offspring given what I knew of him and what you’ve told me since you saw him again. Look, I think you might be worrying over nothing.” +“I’m not worrying for me, so much as I’m worrying for you. I mean I don’t know if you’ve ever wanted children. You’ve never mentioned it much. But I don’t know if you’re going to change your mind one day and if that’s the case then you’re going to be mighty upset with me.” +“Funny enough, I thought you bringing up the subject was going to result in you being upset with me.” +“Why the hell would I be upset with you?” +“Well, I don’t know if you’re aware of this, but stillness potions aren’t exactly the best thing for your lady parts. I mean they don’t do any fatal damage to the drinker as far as I know, but given that they are designed to kill potential offspring, it can make it a bit hard for future pregnancies. I guess it’s the mixture that stays in your body or something. So for all we know, the problem might lie with me.” +“Oh. Didn’t know that. Um…are you okay?” +“Sure. I mean I knew the risks every time I drank the foul tasting potions. That’s why I don’t even think you should concern yourself with this. I mean if we create a future hell spawn then we do, if not well that’s fine too. I didn’t marry you for the idea of hanging up my sword so I could pop out kids. And as far as your potential sterility problem it’s not like you’ve got much to test that theory on. If you were some super stud that fucked multiple women and didn’t get any of them pregnant I could see your concern. You’ve had at exactly two women in your life and in my case we’ve already explored the possibility that it could be me. And as for the other…well she’s a svelk. It isn’t like elves and humans can produce offspring.” +“Thank the Emperor for that.” You say. +“Although as you’ve pointed out, you’re not quite the average human are you? So for all you know you’ve got some half svelk bastard running about that your obsessive stalker hasn’t told you about.” Alison jokes. +“That’s not funny Alison.” +“Hey it would explain why she’s still carrying a bit of a torch for you. Okay, I’ll stop I can see you’re getting grumpy. Let’s get off the subject entirely.” + +At this point you’re more than willing to do just that rather than dwell on very unlikely yet very depressing possibilities.<|endoftext|> <|startoftext|>Dead Man Walking! (Zombie Survival) Can you survive the Zombie Apocalypse? While challenging, it's not as hard as the movies would have you believe - where they always make the worst possible decisions for the sake of drama. Here, at least, you will be offered logical choices amid the foolhardy and your character cares about survival even more than you do. A serious game with gory detail. @@ -124425,3 +164796,81096 @@ The man stands there, with a broken nose and blood streaming down his face, skin You gasp, as the steel pierces and cuts through flesh and guts, and the Thrall precedes to repeatedly and aggressively penetrate your stomach. Blood, stomach acid and the remains of food begin pouring out of your open wound and running down your stomach as death quickly drags you into the endless darkness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wake up in your cabin in the woods. You sit up and scratch some fleas that have infested your body. You also realize its still daylight. You hate waking up early. + +You lope into the bathroom and look in the mirror where you see a canine face covered in gray fur, you remember a time when your fur was completely brown. + +“You’re getting old Wolf” you say to yourself like you always do while trying to look on the bright side that at least you don’t have the mange. You think you’d just put a silver bullet in your head if you ever started to go bald. + +After eating some left over mutton in the fridge and some Gummy Blobs (for the sugar “pick me up”) you ponder how you’re going to pay this month’s rent on your cabin. You call your agent Erik and see if that little pissant has found any work for you. Hopefully it’s an actual job and not just a guest speaker spot at a comic convention. + +“Erik! It’s me Wolf! Pick up the fucking phone! I know you’re there!” you say when you get the answering machine. + +“Erik! Get on the phone NOW, or I’m gonna go over there and shove a pipe organ up your ass!” + +That got his attention. + +“Wolf, I’m sorry, but I fear I’m in a deep depression.” +“What else is new? Look I need some work, got anything? I don’t even care if it’s straight to video. I just need some of the green stuff!” +“Sadly, I don’t think I do, but then I haven’t really checked…I’m so depressed. I’ve been wondering if I made the right decisions in my life…and now it’s too late for me to do anything about it, because I’m old…” +“Join the fucking club Erik! Look do you…” +“But my art, my music, that is my love and its failing me again. My latest opera isn’t doing well. I wonder if I chose the wrong thing to love and pursue. Just like I did with Christine. Oh Christine WHY couldn’t you have loved me? I loved you…” + +Wonderful, he’s in full blown tortured artist mode. He can go on like this forever. You can either give up, or persist in getting something out of him. +> Persist +“Oh boo fucking hoo, your latest Opera hasn’t been doing too well lately. At least people are paying to see the goddamn thing! As bad of a composer, and musician you are, you oughta be glad anyone’s even paying to see the goddamn thing! People don’t want to see anything with me in it! And at least you’ve got another job to fall back on LIKE BEING AN AGENT THAT’S SUPPOSED TO BE GETTING ME A FUCKING JOB!” you snarl. + +There’s some dead air briefly and then Erik begins talking again. + +“You’re right. I shouldn’t be complaining about my problems to you. You of course know all about torment. A war that wages within you, a beast that…” +“Erik I’ve got no time and I’m in no mood to hear how we’re supposed to be kindred spirits, you just better tell me you found something for me and it better not be another guest speaker spot at a comic convention!” +“Well let’s see…I dunno. Werewolves aren’t popular anymore you know…there might be something…here it is! It’s called Wolf Pack.” +“Pack? That implies more than one wolf on the set there Erik. Well I suppose I can share the spotlight with some others. As long as I’m in charge of course.” You say. +“Er…well according to this, you’d be the old cranky grandpa wolf that makes a bunch of rude remarks.” +“What?! What kind of stupid shit is that?” +“Yeah that’s the stuff.” Erik replies not catching on. +“I mean what the hell kind of movie is this?” +“Its uh…let’s see…oh here. It’s a horror comedy about a werewolf family and how they +adjust to human society. Looks like you’ll be playing with a lot of young pups as you’d call them.” +“WHAT?! NO! What the fuck Erik? I’m a fucking monster not something to be fucking laughed at! And they already did a movie like that a long time ago and it sucked!” +“Well that’s all I got. Maybe you could talk to the director to make changes since they also wrote it. I’m sure you and her are familiar with each other. You had an affair with her for quite some time.” +“Uh, you wanna narrow that list down Erik?” +“It’s Mary. You know, the one who used to be married to Frankie, until your affair broke up both of your marriages?” + +Erik’s new information didn’t exactly make you any more enthusiastic to want to take the job. +> Take the job anyway +“Alright I’ll take the job, just tell me where its at.” You say. + +After Erik gives you the information, you ride your Harley to the studio. + +When you arrive on the set, you see a bunch of snot nosed wolflings hanging around trying to look “tough”. Some of them are in human form, but you can smell them for who they truly are though. These cubs today, you swear they would’ve never lasted back in the old days. All flash and nothing to back it up. (Though you don’t mind looking at the young females that are there) That’s why they hang out in packs. You never did that even when you were young. You were always a lone wolf. + +“Hey who’s the fossil?” one of them asks. +“Hey Grandpa, the remake of Old Yellow is next door!” + +This causes a howl of laughter from all of them, until you confront the one who said it. Probably the leader no doubt. Not even in wolf form. Pathetic. + +“I’m going to give you time to transform into a more adequate fighting form before I neuter you.” You calmly explain. +“You? You’re like 300 years old! I could take…” + +Can’t say you didn’t give him a chance. + +You immediately pounce on him, knocking him down while clamping your jaws on his face and digging your fangs in. + +“HOLY SHIT DUDE!” one of them shouts. +“Oh my god he’s killing him!” a female screams. +“Get him off of him, get him off of him!” + +While them all attempt to pull you off of their leader you hear a familiar voice that gets your attention. + +“Well, I see Erik passed my script over to you, good. I’m also glad to see you’re still as anti-social as usual Wolf.” Mary says as you finally get off of your misguided heckler and approach her. She still looks the same, though she looks a lot better now that she got rid of that hair style she used to have and dyed it blonde. +“Just re-establishing the proper hierarchy, nothing more.” +“Hmm, always the Alpha Male, that was what I always loved about you. So primal. Maybe later I can dress in a little red cloak and we can reenact a fairy tale.” +“Some fairy tale, as I remember you loved a lot of beings.” +“Hey I can’t help who I am. I was created this way.” +“Just like Frankie eh?” +“Don’t you compare me to that sicko! Yes we are controlled by our genetics to a certain degree, but as you damn well know I rose above them! I made my own identity. I’m a successful director and writer now, so what if I have a healthy sexual appetite? There’s nothing wrong with that, I’m sure you’d agree given all the beings you had your way with before, after and DURING your marriage!” +“Look never mind all that. I got a real problem with this film.” You say side stepping her correct accusation. +“What’s wrong with it?” +“What’s wrong with it? Are you kidding me? It sucks! It makes a mockery of werewolves! You even named one of them fucking Benji!” +“Well comedy is popular now. Plus children like monsters just as long as they aren’t too scary, so I was hoping to make it a family film.” +“ARRGH! I don’t DO family films! This is insulting and demeaning!” +“How? Come on Wolf. In most horror movies you’ve made you always got killed in the end by a human, how was that any less demeaning?” +“Because at least I was portrayed as feared monster that killed a bunch of people! I can play ball with the humans and their idealistic notion of good always having to overcome evil and all that…but THIS! This makes me into a fucking joke! I can’t even believe you of all people wrote this…no wait I can. You fucking undead don’t have any consideration for anyone, but yourselves.” +“You know I’m technically not even undead, I’m created from several dead bodies. I’m more of a golem.” Mary attempts to correct you. +“Who gives a shit, you’re still basically a walking corpse, and your flesh is dead. You’re Undead in my book.” +“You know for someone who hasn’t been able to find a job in months and is basically just rotting away in his little cabin, you’d think that you’d be a little more appreciative. I wrote this with you in mind you hairy bigoted asshole!” + +You don’t know whether to take that as an insult or as an attempt for her to try to make amends for the past. +> Take it as an insult +“So you had me in mind eh? Well that proves it. You think I’m a joke because that’s how you wrote the character.” +“What? No! I just…” +“I see your time with that bloodsucker was well spent. Learning how to exploit and leech right? Look maybe you can pull this shit with those puppies over there, but I ain’t fucking one! I don’t need the money that badly. I’ll go fucking live my twilight years in the forest and DIE there as nature probably intended. I don’t need this shit.” + +As you turn to leave, Mary shouts at you. + +“Yeah, that’s right go on leave Mr. Lone Wolf! You’ll fucking die alone, you stubborn bastard! I tried to help you! Erik tried to help you and you don’t appreciate any of it! That’s why none of your children speak to you and…” + +You run back over to her and slam her into the wall. You stare at her face to face as she struggles to get free. She’s strong, but you manage to keep her pinned. She really pissed you off and you were already pissed off to begin with. + +“Fuck you, and fuck Erik! You two don’t know shit about me, never did. I’m through with the pair of you! In fact I think I’ll be taking something with me since you’re so worried about me being alone…” + +You release Mary and go over to the wolflings who look a little worried that you’re going to cause harm to them. Many of them cast their eyes downward. + +“Hey, you want to be REALLY tough? You want to really raise some hell? Come with me. If you want to stay under the thumb of this patchwork dead bitch and be exploited and mocked, stay here. + +Your statement alone convinces all of them. They all follow you, even the one you made an example of. Mary attempts to call everyone back, but it’s useless, you’ve taken control of the pack and they’ll do what you want now. + +And right now you want to get into a fight. You think about all the people and creatures that wronged you in some way and only two of them keep coming to mind consistently. + +One is that fucking Dr. Victor Frankenstein. If it wasn’t for him, Frankie and Mary wouldn’t have been created in the first place which also means you wouldn’t have gotten yourself into trouble all those years ago. You wouldn’t have had to put up with his “children” taking jobs away from you. Not to mention he sued you once. + +But the one who you REALLY despise, is that bisexual bloodsucker. Fucking Dracula or Vlad, or whatever the hell he’s calling himself these days. The disgust you have for him and the reasons are too numerous to list here. +> Go kick Victor's ass +Your recent dealings with Mary, have made you think about all the shit you’ve had to put up with from that no talent dickhead. No human has ever given you such trouble. You know he’s still alive. (Mad scientists always find ways of prolonging their lives somehow) That won’t be true for long though, if you get your way. You killed him once before. This time you’re going to make sure he stays that way. + +He’s probably got whatever crappy inventions and experiments protecting his castle and from what you know, Frankie’s still living with his “Dad” as well. + +You don’t give a fuck, you’ll kill him too. You figure you’ll be doing the world a favor as well as getting some satisfaction. Besides, you’ve got to show these wolflings what being a werewolf is all about. + +“All right you cubs! We’re going to go raise some fucking hell. We’re going to Frankenstein’s Castle. We’re going to rip the place apart brick by brick, and I’M going to rip Victor apart limb from limb.” +“Erm…Castle Frankenstien? Isn’t that where Frankie lives?” one of the wolflings asks. +“I heard he’s really powerful, didn’t he fight Dracula and win?” +‘I dunno if we should mess with him.” + +You can’t believe your ears! These snot nosed pups know nothing of their heritage! Back in the old days they would’ve been killed and eaten for such cowardice! + +“Goddammit are you Wolves or fucking Chihuahuas? Frankie’s a fucking pussy! I personally kicked his ass before and I’ll do it again all by myself if I have too! Now are you going to run with me and be a fucking Wolf or are you going to go back home with your tails tucked between your legs?” + +After looking at each other for awhile they all agree to go with you. + +“Good! Now I want all of you to transform into your wolf form too! I’m traveling with fellow wolves not humans!” + +Just before one of the females begins to transform, you stop her. She’s dressed in a short leather skirt and a tight white t-shirt that’s tied in the center and has long flowing brown hair. You can smell that she’s in heat. You hate to coin a pun, but she literally is one hot l’il bitch. + +“Erm, not you. You stay in your human form; I kind of like the whole teenage slut look you got going on. In fact you come here right now; you’ll be traveling on my bike with me.” You say. + +As she slides in behind you and holds on, you ask her one more question. + +“So what’s your name?” +“Ginger. What’s your name, you never did tell us.” +“Wolf. Just Wolf baby. Remember it. You’ll be screaming it later.” + +Damn you’re so fucking cool, you think as you start up your Harley and ride ahead of the pack. + +(You’d probably be even cooler if these pups weren’t all riding those Japanese “crotch rocket” bikes, but that’ll have to be another lesson for another day) + +After a couple of days of riding, and a few “pit stops” with Ginger, you all eventually reach Castle Frankenstein. You park your bikes at the gate, and size the place up, which now looks a lot different. It looks like a damn Nazi fortress now, there’s guard towers and everything. It seems Victor has been keeping himself very busy in recent years. + +As it begins to rain, a familiar voice calls to you from one of the towers. + +“Its you. Vic always knew you’d return one day. I never believed him though. I guess I owe him fifty bucks.” + +You look up and see Igor, he looks different too. He has a lot of clumsy cybernetic implants, one of them being some sort of gun in place of an arm. More of Vic’s “handy work” no doubt. He’s still got that damn hump on his back though. + +“Igor? You still alive? I thought your ungrateful master would’ve just let you die of old age and get himself another assistant. I see he did a real good job of improving you though. Tell me, how’s it feel to be the real brains, never getting the credit and continuing to be a doormat?” +“I’m happy with my lot in life. How’s it feel to be broke ass overgrown dog who’s trying to relive his lost youth?” Igor retorts back. +“Don’t know yet. I’ll tell you before I shove that metal arm up your ass.” + +Well looks like the fight’s starting here. +> Attempt to climb over the gate before Igor can get off a shot +In your prime you would’ve been able to scale the gate, climb the tower and rip Igor’s head off all without getting hit. + +Unfortunately you aren’t in your prime anymore. Igor’s having trouble aiming his awkward arm-gun, but with as many bullets as it pumps out he doesn’t need to be completely accurate. While you’re attempting to climb over the gate he hits you several times. + +Naturally those bullets are silver. + +You crash to the wet ground with a loud CLANK! sound, as the rest of the pack go running away with their tails between their legs.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your recent dealings with Mary, have made you think about all the shit you’ve had to put up with from that no talent dickhead. No human has ever given you such trouble. You know he’s still alive. (Mad scientists always find ways of prolonging their lives somehow) That won’t be true for long though, if you get your way. You killed him once before. This time you’re going to make sure he stays that way. + +He’s probably got whatever crappy inventions and experiments protecting his castle and from what you know, Frankie’s still living with his “Dad” as well. + +You don’t give a fuck, you’ll kill him too. You figure you’ll be doing the world a favor as well as getting some satisfaction. Besides, you’ve got to show these wolflings what being a werewolf is all about. + +“All right you cubs! We’re going to go raise some fucking hell. We’re going to Frankenstein’s Castle. We’re going to rip the place apart brick by brick, and I’M going to rip Victor apart limb from limb.” +“Erm…Castle Frankenstien? Isn’t that where Frankie lives?” one of the wolflings asks. +“I heard he’s really powerful, didn’t he fight Dracula and win?” +‘I dunno if we should mess with him.” + +You can’t believe your ears! These snot nosed pups know nothing of their heritage! Back in the old days they would’ve been killed and eaten for such cowardice! + +“Goddammit are you Wolves or fucking Chihuahuas? Frankie’s a fucking pussy! I personally kicked his ass before and I’ll do it again all by myself if I have too! Now are you going to run with me and be a fucking Wolf or are you going to go back home with your tails tucked between your legs?” + +After looking at each other for awhile they all agree to go with you. + +“Good! Now I want all of you to transform into your wolf form too! I’m traveling with fellow wolves not humans!” + +Just before one of the females begins to transform, you stop her. She’s dressed in a short leather skirt and a tight white t-shirt that’s tied in the center and has long flowing brown hair. You can smell that she’s in heat. You hate to coin a pun, but she literally is one hot l’il bitch. + +“Erm, not you. You stay in your human form; I kind of like the whole teenage slut look you got going on. In fact you come here right now; you’ll be traveling on my bike with me.” You say. + +As she slides in behind you and holds on, you ask her one more question. + +“So what’s your name?” +“Ginger. What’s your name, you never did tell us.” +“Wolf. Just Wolf baby. Remember it. You’ll be screaming it later.” + +Damn you’re so fucking cool, you think as you start up your Harley and ride ahead of the pack. + +(You’d probably be even cooler if these pups weren’t all riding those Japanese “crotch rocket” bikes, but that’ll have to be another lesson for another day) + +After a couple of days of riding, and a few “pit stops” with Ginger, you all eventually reach Castle Frankenstein. You park your bikes at the gate, and size the place up, which now looks a lot different. It looks like a damn Nazi fortress now, there’s guard towers and everything. It seems Victor has been keeping himself very busy in recent years. + +As it begins to rain, a familiar voice calls to you from one of the towers. + +“Its you. Vic always knew you’d return one day. I never believed him though. I guess I owe him fifty bucks.” + +You look up and see Igor, he looks different too. He has a lot of clumsy cybernetic implants, one of them being some sort of gun in place of an arm. More of Vic’s “handy work” no doubt. He’s still got that damn hump on his back though. + +“Igor? You still alive? I thought your ungrateful master would’ve just let you die of old age and get himself another assistant. I see he did a real good job of improving you though. Tell me, how’s it feel to be the real brains, never getting the credit and continuing to be a doormat?” +“I’m happy with my lot in life. How’s it feel to be broke ass overgrown dog who’s trying to relive his lost youth?” Igor retorts back. +“Don’t know yet. I’ll tell you before I shove that metal arm up your ass.” + +Well looks like the fight’s starting here. +> Duck for cover! +You tell everyone to get the hell out of Igor’s range and take cover. Fortunately Igor’s gun-arm isn’t the best design and he’s having problems aiming and standing still due to the recoil, so you all manage to hide behind some nearby rocks + +Still, there’s no way you’re going to be able to scale the front gate with Igor on that damn tower. + +“See I knew this was a bad idea!” one of the wolflings says. +“How are we supposed to get past that? I’m pretty sure he’s firing silver bullets at us.” +“Oh I KNOW he is. Hence the reason why I told everyone to get out of the way. Okay so we’re not going through the front gate, the castle’s a big place right? Igor’s only guarding the front. I say we split up and scale the walls on the sides and around the back. We’ll meet up inside the castle.” +“Yeah, but won’t there be other defenses?” +“Probably. So you better be fucking prepared! This ain’t no damn game. You cubs think you’re really tough when in fact you’ve probably never had a real challenge. This is it. Don’t think about backing out now. This is where we truly test the idea of survival of the fittest. Damn, my blood is starting to feel that rush! Don’t you all feel it? I haven’t felt this way since they sent a group of ten “werewolf assassins” to put me down. Shit. They never tried that again! Ha ha ha ha ha!” + +While you’re reveling in gruesome nostalgia, your pack is looking at you like you’ve completely lost it. And they’re probably right. However, your speech seems to have stirred something in them. + +“The crazy old fossil’s right! I remember having to hear about similar stuff my grandfather used to talk about all the damn time. I never really paid any attention to it before. Now I think I understand. We need to prove our skills to truly be proud to call ourselves werewolves!” one of them states. +“Now that’s the attitude I’m talking about!” + +You all huddle in the rain and make a howling noise in unison to the moon and proceed with your plan. You all split up into a couple of groups and begin to scale the side and back walls, which really isn’t all that difficult. You know Igor’s probably ran off to warn Vic though. All you can think is, he better have something better than just Igor and Frankie defending him. + +As you prowl around in the courtyard, you hear moaning and the clomping of several footsteps. You and your group turn to see some of Vic’s defenses. + +“Zombies? Are you fucking kidding me Vic? I thought you’d at least have some robots or something!” you say to yourself. Though upon a second look, you see that the horde of corpses aren’t actually zombies. Zombies are complete corpses brought back to life. These things look more like Frankie, except designed even worse. A lot of them have arms and legs in odd places. Some have a couple of heads or extra limbs. Most aren’t even stitched together neatly, there are just giant rivets and spikes sticking out, holding them together. These are probably some of his “failed” experiments. + +Doesn’t matter, they’re close enough to be Undead for you. +> Fight them +Damn straight! That’s what you’re here for! + +You take out the nearest pile of shit with ease and your pack follows suit. They’re a little tougher than you thought, but limbs are flying everywhere. Needless to say you’re really enjoying yourself, and you can see your pack is too. (Well the ones that haven’t gotten themselves killed) + +You attack one large experiment with four arms, it catches a few heavy hits on you, before you rip them off. It’s relentless and begins smashing its head (Which contains a lot of jagged metal bits) into you, knocking you down. As you shake it off, Ginger (Who’s now in wolf form) and a couple of other wolflings comes to your aid and finish off the large abomination. + +“Godammit! I had that! Don’t EVER come to help me! I can handle myself!” you snarl angrily. +“We were just helping…” Ginger says casting her eyes downward and lowering her ears. + +“…yeah…well…just don’t let it happen again…” you say understanding they weren’t really trying to embarrass you. “Come on, we’re done here, let’s get in the castle.” + +You meet up with the ones remaining in your pack at the front door of the castle. You put all your muscle into it and rip the doors of their hinges. When you step inside, you narrowly dodge a laser beam of some sort. + +“He’s got the whole place trapped, be careful where you…” + +A wolfling steps on some floor stone that releases yet another beam trap, reducing him to ashes. + +“Step.” You say completing the sentence. That’s when you hear a loud speaker. + +“Wolf! Igor informed me you had arrived with some friends! I’m actually glad you’re here I get to test out my new experiment on you! Assuming you survive long enough to get to me of course!” + +At this point he does his typical Mad Scientist laugh. If he thinks you’re going to waste your time in his castle of death traps he’s sadly mistaken. He seems to have forgotten you have an excellent sense of smell and tracking in general. + +Of course the smell of dead bodies seems to be emanating everywhere. You try to sniff out a human scent, but you aren’t getting anything solid. The dead body smell is too overpowering. You’re catching a couple of different ones though. One of them is a very faint sweet smell. The other is a burning type smell. +> Follow the burning smell +Knowing that Vic works with electricity a lot, you figure he’s in that direction. You and the wolflings that are still with you follow, carefully avoiding traps. You travel further to higher levels of the castle where the burning smell is getting stronger. You KNOW you’re getting closer to him. You can feel it. You just hope his “experiment” is as great as he claims. It would suck if there wasn’t a real battle to fight after all this. + +You burst into the room with strong burning smell and see big globes of energy, conduits, generators and a big ass corpse with cybernetic implants lying on the table. It’s Frankie with some modifications and absorbing more electricity than lightning rod. + +You half expect to see Victor somewhere, but all you hear is the loudspeaker disturbing your ears again. + +“You see Wolf! You see! While you’ve been wasting away in that shitty cabin, I’ve been preparing for my son’s come back! You stole his woman! You ended his career! You didn’t just damage him physically, you damaged his mind! Scarred him emotionally! It’s taken me YEARS to undo the damage!” +“Damaged his mind? He was a psychopathic serial pedophile made of corpses! What the fuck kind of damage could I have done? And Mary never liked him anyway!” +“She could’ve learned! He could’ve too! They just needed more time! But YOU! You prevented all that! You and your dog dick!” +“For fuck’s sake, I wasn’t the only one fucking her!” +“Yes, but you’re the one who did it the longest and destroyed my poor boy’s career! You’re going to pay! Ha ha ha ha! He’s up! HE’S ALIVE! HE’S ALIVE! HE’S ALIVE! Frankie look who we have here! And old friend, why don’t you go and give him a big hug?” + +Victor goes into his mad scientist laugh yet again, as Frankie “2.0” gets up from the table. He opens his eyes and looks directly at you. + +“FRANKIE BEAT YOUR HEAD IN NOW.” He says with a booming voice. + +Still as verbal and articulate as ever. +> Have the pack surround Frankie +You order everyone to surround Frankie to try to keep him off guard. Frankie watches as the wolfling encircle him, but he’s still slowly moving towards you. + +He charges! A couple of the wolfling dive for his legs in an effort to stop him, but he’s like a juggernaut and keeps charging. Fortunately you’re still nimble and get out of his way as he smashes through the wall. The wolflings that dived for his legs, follow up and begin attack him with tooth and claw. It’s not having that great of an effect though, he’s got metal plating on that dead flesh now. Frankie kills the pair of them by smashing their heads together until there is nothing left except mush. + +“Everyone grab a weapon! Don’t fight him head on!” you bark at the survivors while attempting to find something. You find a large metal pole, though you’re reluctant to take it, with all the electricity in the damn room. + +“It’s useless! You’ll never defeat my boy Frankie!” Victor says. + +Frankie begins to approach you again. +> Throw the pole at him +Just as Frankie charges you again, you throw the pole as hard as you can at him like a spear. Bullseye! Literally. The pole slams into his left eye and straight through his head. It still doesn’t slow him down though and you just barely get out his way. + +Frankie stops his attack for a moment and attempts to remove the pole, but you and another wolfling don’t miss the opportunity. The pole is quite long and you grab it from the front, while the other grabs it from the back and you both run clockwise around Frankie. All the titanium plating in the world isn’t going to protect him from massive head trauma. + +“RARRRRGH! BRAIN!” Frankie yells as half of his head comes apart. As he attempts to keep his brains from falling out, and that’s when the rest of the pack begins to beat his head in even more with various blunt objects. He’s still putting up a fight though. + +“NO! STOP! FRANKIE! MY SON!” you hear Victor scream over the loudspeaker. + +Victor’s voice sounds like its very close. You see another door in the lab, and you’ve got a really good feeling that he’s behind it. + +You leave the wolflings to finish off Frankie, and run to open the door. + +And there he is, Victor Frankenstein… + +Or what’s left of him at least, he’s just a brain in a jar, hooked up to various machines now. + +“Wow, Vic. I always knew you were a terrible mad scientist, but I would’ve thought you’d be able to at least create a robot body for yourself, or a youth elixir or something!” +“Shut up Wolf! You haven’t won! I’ve still got…” +“What? What’ve you got? Nothing! Unless you’re a giant space brain from Venus or some shit, you can’t do anything to me. And you ain’t, so…” +”Wait! Wolf! Can’t we talk about this?” +“Oh like you wanted to talk to me, when you fed me drugged meat?” +“Oh yeah…you’re not still mad about that are you? I mean you did kill me for it…” +”Yeah, and I should’ve stuck around to make sure you stayed dead. Well no mistakes this time.” + +You take Victor’s brain out of the jar. + +“NOOOOOOOO……” are the last words to come out of the loud speakers before you step back into the lab where Frankie is flailing wildly at the wolflings who are carefully standing out of harms way as they continue to make quick strikes as him. He’s badly damaged and blind. Not deaf though. You call over to Frankie who turns around when he recognizes your voice. + +“Hey Frankie, your Dad wants to talk to you, he’s got a lot on his mind.” You say and then throw Victor’s brain into what remains of Frankie’s face. The brain splatters into bloody pieces, while you follow up with a quick and vicious attack. + +You sink your fangs deep into Frankie’s shoulder until it hits the bone, where upon you rip off the arm at the socket. The rest of the pack follows your lead and help you rip Frankie apart, until he’s reduced to the pieces that made him up in the first place. + +“Damn, I think I broke a tooth on that fucking metal plating.” You say breathing heavily. +“We won Wolf! You were right! This was fun! I felt the primal instinct and everything!” one of the wolflings exclaims. +“Yeah and right now all of you are going to be feeling silver burning through your bodies.” Igor says standing in the lab door exit, pointing that infernal arm weapon at you all. +> Rush him +You take one look at your pack and nod at them. You all make a howl in unison. Igor realizes he’s in deep shit. + +“No wait you dumb ass dogs! I got a fucking weapon here! Stop!” + +You all charge at him and Igor opens fire, he can’t stop you all before you overwhelm him. Unfortunately he does get some… including you. You eviscerate Igor as the silver begins to take its toll on your system. He dies coughing up blood, apologizing for not being able to defend Victor in his death throws. + +“I’m sorry Victor…I’m sorry my brother…gurgle…” + +The rest of the pack attempts to carry you out, but you refuse their help and stagger to the outside of the castle where you finally collapse on the ground. It seems so comfortable you figure you’ll just rest for awhile. You’re not surprised to see Mary standing over you. + +“I take it you killed my whole family.” She says unemotionally. +“Yeah, even Igor. Never knew he was Vic’s brother. That explains a lot.” +“Why? Why’d you do it? What was the point?! You could’ve just done my movie and still been alive! Or even if you didn’t want anything to do with me, you could’ve just went back to your cabin instead! You could’ve been alive!” +“You’ll never understand Mary. You don’t get old. I did and I wasn’t meant to. I outlived my place in this world. No point in going on. Just had to get in one last monster fight and damn it felt good.” +Mary shakes her head, you think she might even shed a tear if she was capable. +“Go on now Mary, there’s nothing for you here. Don’t morn your family. You were always better than the rest of them anyway. Don’t morn me either, I don’t want it. Go. The pack is coming.” + +Mary gives you one last look and runs off before the rest of the pack arrives. When they do they begin howling loudly. + +“Goddammit shut the fuck up! I’m trying to die with a little peace and quiet here!” you snarl. +“You have to lead us! You can’t die!” one wolfling says +“The hell I can’t! Look I showed you what it means to truly be a Wolf tonight. It’s up to you to do something with it.” + +Ginger kneels down and tries to sit you up hoping that you’re not really dying. She’s very upset. + +“You can’t die! I want you with me…I…” +“Stop Ginger. Don’t say it. Don’t give yourself anymore unnecessary pain, especially when I don’t deserve it. It’s just as well as I die now, I probably would’ve only broken your heart later. Just remember me how I was in the short time you knew me and every time you look at your litter.” + +You touch her stomach. + +“How do you know? I mean it’s too early, we can’t be sure if…” Ginger exclaims. +“Please. I’m the Alpha Wolf. I never fucking miss. I got kids everywhere. None of them ever listened to me or talk to me, but I got ‘em.” +“What do you want me to tell our litter about you?” +“Whatever you want, you’ll be the one raising them and I’ll be too dead to do anything about it… just teach them what I taught all of you here tonight…hopefully they’ll listen. Damn willful pups…mmm…getting sleepy…one more thing…” +“What’s that Wolf?” +“Burn my damn body, I don’t want some fucker trying to bring me back to life! I hate the Undead!” + +You close your eyes and feel the darkness envelop you. + +After a brief period of howling, the remaining pack members take your body and burn it just like you asked, then they all part ways, each to pursue their own destinies in their own way just like you did. A few months later, Ginger does indeed give birth to a new litter and teaches them about you and how you lived. (This is tempered by some common sense on her part though). + +At last, a legacy worthy of an Alpha Wolf.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just as Frankie charges you again, you throw the pole as hard as you can at him like a spear. Bullseye! Literally. The pole slams into his left eye and straight through his head. It still doesn’t slow him down though and you just barely get out his way. + +Frankie stops his attack for a moment and attempts to remove the pole, but you and another wolfling don’t miss the opportunity. The pole is quite long and you grab it from the front, while the other grabs it from the back and you both run clockwise around Frankie. All the titanium plating in the world isn’t going to protect him from massive head trauma. + +“RARRRRGH! BRAIN!” Frankie yells as half of his head comes apart. As he attempts to keep his brains from falling out, and that’s when the rest of the pack begins to beat his head in even more with various blunt objects. He’s still putting up a fight though. + +“NO! STOP! FRANKIE! MY SON!” you hear Victor scream over the loudspeaker. + +Victor’s voice sounds like its very close. You see another door in the lab, and you’ve got a really good feeling that he’s behind it. + +You leave the wolflings to finish off Frankie, and run to open the door. + +And there he is, Victor Frankenstein… + +Or what’s left of him at least, he’s just a brain in a jar, hooked up to various machines now. + +“Wow, Vic. I always knew you were a terrible mad scientist, but I would’ve thought you’d be able to at least create a robot body for yourself, or a youth elixir or something!” +“Shut up Wolf! You haven’t won! I’ve still got…” +“What? What’ve you got? Nothing! Unless you’re a giant space brain from Venus or some shit, you can’t do anything to me. And you ain’t, so…” +”Wait! Wolf! Can’t we talk about this?” +“Oh like you wanted to talk to me, when you fed me drugged meat?” +“Oh yeah…you’re not still mad about that are you? I mean you did kill me for it…” +”Yeah, and I should’ve stuck around to make sure you stayed dead. Well no mistakes this time.” + +You take Victor’s brain out of the jar. + +“NOOOOOOOO……” are the last words to come out of the loud speakers before you step back into the lab where Frankie is flailing wildly at the wolflings who are carefully standing out of harms way as they continue to make quick strikes as him. He’s badly damaged and blind. Not deaf though. You call over to Frankie who turns around when he recognizes your voice. + +“Hey Frankie, your Dad wants to talk to you, he’s got a lot on his mind.” You say and then throw Victor’s brain into what remains of Frankie’s face. The brain splatters into bloody pieces, while you follow up with a quick and vicious attack. + +You sink your fangs deep into Frankie’s shoulder until it hits the bone, where upon you rip off the arm at the socket. The rest of the pack follows your lead and help you rip Frankie apart, until he’s reduced to the pieces that made him up in the first place. + +“Damn, I think I broke a tooth on that fucking metal plating.” You say breathing heavily. +“We won Wolf! You were right! This was fun! I felt the primal instinct and everything!” one of the wolflings exclaims. +“Yeah and right now all of you are going to be feeling silver burning through your bodies.” Igor says standing in the lab door exit, pointing that infernal arm weapon at you all. +> Stall for time +You briefly entertain the idea of rushing Igor, he wouldn’t be able to get all of you, but you’re not ready to risk death at the hands of some deformed assistant after you already killed Victor and Frankie. You need to buy some time. + +“Alright Igor, just calm down. It’s over Vic and Frankie are dead. You don’t have to get pushed around by either one anymore and you got this whole castle as inheritance! I just did you a favor.” +“A favor? A favor? You killed my younger brother you ASSHOLE!” + +You quickly put two and two together. + +“Vic? Victor was your brother? Your younger brother?” +“He damn well better have been, after all the abuse I took from him! You know what it’s like being abused by your younger brother on a daily basis for YEARS?” +“Not really, I killed all my brothers soon after we were born. I wasn’t sharing. Survival of the fittest and all.” You say dryly. +“Really? Well I envy you. I wish I had that option. But nooo. Mom liked Vic best. Vic was handsome. Vic wasn’t deformed, Vic this. Vic that! Look after Vic, Igor. Make sure he doesn’t get into trouble Igor. He’s your younger brother and you have to protect him Igor. I was the first born! Why didn’t Igor get any love?! I was the smart one!” +“Yes you were. I mean if it hadn’t been for you Vic wouldn’t have even created Frankie.” You say. +“Damn straight! I was the one who kept his ass alive! I’m the one that corrected all his idiot ideas when it came to updating Frankie! I’m not stupid like everyone says! I’m smart! And I demand respect! And I never fucking got it! I just got a fucking whip to the hump!” + +At this point Igor is ranting so much about hating his brother and his self-pity, he’s not aiming his weapon at you any longer. You take advantage of the situation and rush at him, he’s not quick enough to react and you knock him to the ground before eviscerating him. Oddly after all that ranting, he dies gurgling an apology. + +“I’m sorry Vic…I tried…gurgle…” + +You shake your head at Igor’s misguided loyalty, while the Pack surrounds you. + +“We won! You rule Wolf! What now?” one of them asks. +“Dunno, didn’t expect to survive really…so did you get all this on camera Mary?” you ask out loud, startling the wolflings. + +Mary comes out of hiding, with a camcorder. + +“How did you know I was here?” she asks +“Please, I don’t forget a scent, especially one that I know quite intimately. So let me guess. You’re going to exploit this footage for financial gain right?” +“Well yeah. When you left the studio I followed you a bit and found out you were heading here. At first I wanted to protect and help my family so I got here before you.” +“What changed your mind?” +“I realized what a bunch of miscreants and fuck ups they all were! What was I supposed to do? Be like Igor and stay loyal to a bunch of reprobates that wouldn’t appreciate it anyway? It’s not like they’re REALLY my family. So I just decided to film the epic battle since you ruined my original movie by taking this lot with you.” +“I take it you didn’t care who won though.” +“Not really, but if it makes you feel warm and squishy inside I suppose I was rooting for you more. You were the underdog after all…hey! That’s a great title for the movie!” Mary exclaims. + +The Wolflings get a little restless about all this. +“Hey shouldn’t we do something, I mean she’s part of this fucked up family, and she’s trying to exploit us!” +“Ah see now this is another lesson I can teach you guys. You don’t need to be an asshole all the time, especially when there’s some benefit for not doing so. A lesson I probably should’ve obeyed more when I was your age. Mary’s little movie is made purely for exploitation, but its GOOD exploitation. It’ll show everyone who we are and that we’re NOT to be fucked with! This isn’t some shitty family movie. This is raw footage of werewolves doing what they do best, kicking ass! We couldn’t ask for better publicity. AND I assume we’ll be getting some money for this right Mary?” + +Mary looks a little reluctant, but she realizes she has to give you something. +“Right Wolf.” +“That’s what I thought. Now the battle is good and all, but you’ll need to pad it out more, I say you start doing interviews with us. We can make this into a documentary! If you need more footage, we can always go bust up a bar…” + +And so it happens, Mary releases “Underdogs: The Inner Mind of the Wolf” in a bunch of pansy art theatres at first where it’s critically acclaimed. Later it gets released it regular theatres where most people like it mainly due to the brutal violence and your “colorful” interviews. You even win an award. + +The movie makes Werewolves “cool” again and you’re never out of work anymore, which is a good thing since Ginger gave birth to a litter of cubs which YOU have to pay to support! You come home every day to the little nippers biting your ankles for your attention. + +Still, life is good and you once again have achieved the fame and fear you deserve.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You order everyone to surround Frankie to try to keep him off guard. Frankie watches as the wolfling encircle him, but he’s still slowly moving towards you. + +He charges! A couple of the wolfling dive for his legs in an effort to stop him, but he’s like a juggernaut and keeps charging. Fortunately you’re still nimble and get out of his way as he smashes through the wall. The wolflings that dived for his legs, follow up and begin attack him with tooth and claw. It’s not having that great of an effect though, he’s got metal plating on that dead flesh now. Frankie kills the pair of them by smashing their heads together until there is nothing left except mush. + +“Everyone grab a weapon! Don’t fight him head on!” you bark at the survivors while attempting to find something. You find a large metal pole, though you’re reluctant to take it, with all the electricity in the damn room. + +“It’s useless! You’ll never defeat my boy Frankie!” Victor says. + +Frankie begins to approach you again. +> Stand firm and wait for him to charge +You hold the pole like a medieval pike waiting to skewer Frankie when he comes charging at you. It’s like throwing rocks at a tank. + +The pole certainly impales Frankie, but it barely slows him down, he continues his rush even as the pole breaks off into him and he slams his heavy body into you hard. You go flying into the wall and collapse on to the floor. Frankie follows up with stomping your head into mush. Werewolves do have regenerative powers, but you won’t be regenerating this severe damage since your brains have leaked out of your head.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Knowing that Vic works with electricity a lot, you figure he’s in that direction. You and the wolflings that are still with you follow, carefully avoiding traps. You travel further to higher levels of the castle where the burning smell is getting stronger. You KNOW you’re getting closer to him. You can feel it. You just hope his “experiment” is as great as he claims. It would suck if there wasn’t a real battle to fight after all this. + +You burst into the room with strong burning smell and see big globes of energy, conduits, generators and a big ass corpse with cybernetic implants lying on the table. It’s Frankie with some modifications and absorbing more electricity than lightning rod. + +You half expect to see Victor somewhere, but all you hear is the loudspeaker disturbing your ears again. + +“You see Wolf! You see! While you’ve been wasting away in that shitty cabin, I’ve been preparing for my son’s come back! You stole his woman! You ended his career! You didn’t just damage him physically, you damaged his mind! Scarred him emotionally! It’s taken me YEARS to undo the damage!” +“Damaged his mind? He was a psychopathic serial pedophile made of corpses! What the fuck kind of damage could I have done? And Mary never liked him anyway!” +“She could’ve learned! He could’ve too! They just needed more time! But YOU! You prevented all that! You and your dog dick!” +“For fuck’s sake, I wasn’t the only one fucking her!” +“Yes, but you’re the one who did it the longest and destroyed my poor boy’s career! You’re going to pay! Ha ha ha ha! He’s up! HE’S ALIVE! HE’S ALIVE! HE’S ALIVE! Frankie look who we have here! And old friend, why don’t you go and give him a big hug?” + +Victor goes into his mad scientist laugh yet again, as Frankie “2.0” gets up from the table. He opens his eyes and looks directly at you. + +“FRANKIE BEAT YOUR HEAD IN NOW.” He says with a booming voice. + +Still as verbal and articulate as ever. +> Fight him head on +Um…no. + +Even in your prime you would’ve had problems taking on Frankie in his current updated state. At your age it’s just unthinkable. + +You attempt to bite his neck in an effort to tear his head off, but he crushes his strong metallic arms around you squeezing with all his might. Your pack attempts to help, but Frankie is too focused on his revenge. Even when you tear out his eyes, he continues to squash your internal organs until he finally breaks your back and throws you blindly into one of those electric generators. + +Your limp corpse fries for a little while, but unlike Frankie, it doesn’t bring you back to life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Damn straight! That’s what you’re here for! + +You take out the nearest pile of shit with ease and your pack follows suit. They’re a little tougher than you thought, but limbs are flying everywhere. Needless to say you’re really enjoying yourself, and you can see your pack is too. (Well the ones that haven’t gotten themselves killed) + +You attack one large experiment with four arms, it catches a few heavy hits on you, before you rip them off. It’s relentless and begins smashing its head (Which contains a lot of jagged metal bits) into you, knocking you down. As you shake it off, Ginger (Who’s now in wolf form) and a couple of other wolflings comes to your aid and finish off the large abomination. + +“Godammit! I had that! Don’t EVER come to help me! I can handle myself!” you snarl angrily. +“We were just helping…” Ginger says casting her eyes downward and lowering her ears. + +“…yeah…well…just don’t let it happen again…” you say understanding they weren’t really trying to embarrass you. “Come on, we’re done here, let’s get in the castle.” + +You meet up with the ones remaining in your pack at the front door of the castle. You put all your muscle into it and rip the doors of their hinges. When you step inside, you narrowly dodge a laser beam of some sort. + +“He’s got the whole place trapped, be careful where you…” + +A wolfling steps on some floor stone that releases yet another beam trap, reducing him to ashes. + +“Step.” You say completing the sentence. That’s when you hear a loud speaker. + +“Wolf! Igor informed me you had arrived with some friends! I’m actually glad you’re here I get to test out my new experiment on you! Assuming you survive long enough to get to me of course!” + +At this point he does his typical Mad Scientist laugh. If he thinks you’re going to waste your time in his castle of death traps he’s sadly mistaken. He seems to have forgotten you have an excellent sense of smell and tracking in general. + +Of course the smell of dead bodies seems to be emanating everywhere. You try to sniff out a human scent, but you aren’t getting anything solid. The dead body smell is too overpowering. You’re catching a couple of different ones though. One of them is a very faint sweet smell. The other is a burning type smell. +> Follow the sweet smell +Even though you’re sure that the burning smell is probably where Vic is at, the sweet smell is so out of place here, you’re compelled to follow it. You tell the wolflings to follow the burning smell while you investigate the other one. They look a little unsure of being without you leading them, but they follow your instructions. Carefully avoiding traps, you travel further to different parts of the castle where the sweet smell starts getting so strong it’s almost sickening, until you finally get to a closed door. + +You open the door to an elegant bedroom. The smell pervades the entire area. Someone soaked this place in perfume and there you see Mary standing there in a see-through nightgown. You’re genuinely surprised to see her here. + +“I knew you wouldn’t be able to resist. I knew you’d follow this scent. it’s the very perfume I used to wear when we had our affair.” +“Mary? What the hell are you doing here and why the hell did you douse the room in the shit?” +“I know you don’t like the dead smell, I don’t like it either. I makes me remember that I’m not alive…I never was.” +“Yeah, well this smell isn’t too pleasant either. Whew!” +“You know out the many, many…many lovers I had, you know you’re the only one that made me feel alive? Like a real woman, instead of collection of parts as you’ve pointed out so accurately so many times.” + +Mary begins to get closer to you. + +“Look Mary I ain’t got time for this reminiscing bullshit, I’m on a mission of kicking ass right now and you’d do well to stay out of my way. Why are you here anyway?” you ask again. +“I figured after you left the studio, you’d be in a wicked mood. I thought you’d probably just take your pack and smash up a bar or something. I followed you for a bit and found out you were planning on coming here. Look. I understand that my family has wronged you in many ways. My dad has, Frankie has, and I know I have, but I can’t let you kill them. I know they’re all fucked up and even I don’t like them, but they’re still my family such as they are. Wolf you already got your revenge a long time ago. I mean you beat the hell out of Frankie and ended his career and I heard tales about how you even killed my Dad once before he created either of us. What’s this all going to prove? My dad isn’t any match for you now. He’s barely alive. Frankie has been just lying on a slab for years. Dad took him apart in an effort to fix him. That’s the only experiment he’s talking about and he’s nowhere completed. Dad spends all his time with the insane idea of revitalizing Frankie for a come back. I tell him that it isn’t going to happen, but he continues anyway. There’s no battle here Wolf. Just a lot of empty dreams and delusions.” + +At this point she takes your paw and brushes her other hand against your fur. + +“Please Wolf, just let my family live. If you have any lingering feelings for me that I know you once did, just call off your attack.” +> Call off the attack +Mary’s plea for you to spare her family has gotten to you. Maybe she’s right. Maybe you did do a lot of damage to them already. Maybe you were just trying to relive your own youth. + +Maybe you’re a complete fucking idiot. + +As soon as you embrace Mary, you feel multiple shots to the back and extreme pain. You collapse to the floor, as Mary stands back from you angrily shouting. + +“Igor, you humped backed fucker! Those bullets went through him and hit me! Asshole!” +“Hey, I can’t control the damn power of this thing. So is he dead?” +“Not quite.” + +Mary heftily kicks you over as you struggle to breathe. + +“Poor Wolf. You of all people forgot the cardinal rule. Blood is always thicker and you abandoned your own kind over silly nostalgic feelings for me. I am touched though. I shall always remember you as your pelt covers my body as a new coat. Time to put this doggie down Igor.” +“I’m on it.” + +Igor raises his weapon once more and blasts your head off in a hail of silver.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Even though you’re sure that the burning smell is probably where Vic is at, the sweet smell is so out of place here, you’re compelled to follow it. You tell the wolflings to follow the burning smell while you investigate the other one. They look a little unsure of being without you leading them, but they follow your instructions. Carefully avoiding traps, you travel further to different parts of the castle where the sweet smell starts getting so strong it’s almost sickening, until you finally get to a closed door. + +You open the door to an elegant bedroom. The smell pervades the entire area. Someone soaked this place in perfume and there you see Mary standing there in a see-through nightgown. You’re genuinely surprised to see her here. + +“I knew you wouldn’t be able to resist. I knew you’d follow this scent. it’s the very perfume I used to wear when we had our affair.” +“Mary? What the hell are you doing here and why the hell did you douse the room in the shit?” +“I know you don’t like the dead smell, I don’t like it either. I makes me remember that I’m not alive…I never was.” +“Yeah, well this smell isn’t too pleasant either. Whew!” +“You know out the many, many…many lovers I had, you know you’re the only one that made me feel alive? Like a real woman, instead of collection of parts as you’ve pointed out so accurately so many times.” + +Mary begins to get closer to you. + +“Look Mary I ain’t got time for this reminiscing bullshit, I’m on a mission of kicking ass right now and you’d do well to stay out of my way. Why are you here anyway?” you ask again. +“I figured after you left the studio, you’d be in a wicked mood. I thought you’d probably just take your pack and smash up a bar or something. I followed you for a bit and found out you were planning on coming here. Look. I understand that my family has wronged you in many ways. My dad has, Frankie has, and I know I have, but I can’t let you kill them. I know they’re all fucked up and even I don’t like them, but they’re still my family such as they are. Wolf you already got your revenge a long time ago. I mean you beat the hell out of Frankie and ended his career and I heard tales about how you even killed my Dad once before he created either of us. What’s this all going to prove? My dad isn’t any match for you now. He’s barely alive. Frankie has been just lying on a slab for years. Dad took him apart in an effort to fix him. That’s the only experiment he’s talking about and he’s nowhere completed. Dad spends all his time with the insane idea of revitalizing Frankie for a come back. I tell him that it isn’t going to happen, but he continues anyway. There’s no battle here Wolf. Just a lot of empty dreams and delusions.” + +At this point she takes your paw and brushes her other hand against your fur. + +“Please Wolf, just let my family live. If you have any lingering feelings for me that I know you once did, just call off your attack.” +> Continue the attack +For a moment you almost believed her. For a moment she almost displayed real emotions and feelings. + +For a moment you almost were a complete idiot, except you remember the old prejudice that you’ve never forgotten: + +“No matter how much the Undead try to mimic feelings, they have none.” + +You hear a click of a wall opening up. You see a metal arm point out and run out of the room, pushing Mary in the way. Igor opens fire and Mary takes king’s ransom in silver to her body, toppling her over with a heavy thud. She’s not dead, but she’ll need some new parts and a major stitch job. + +“Igor, you fucking idiot!” she yells from the floor attempting to get up. “Go help Dad! Wolf’s probably on his way there!” + +If Mary knew you were coming back, she probably wouldn’t have dismissed Igor so quickly. She manages to stand up just as you stand in the doorway…with a torch. + +“You know what I like about these old castles? They always have torches and candles lighting the corridors.” You say. +“Even in my present condition, you won’t get close enough to use that thing!” Mary says with defiance. +“Save your feeble threats, but I don’t need to get close, you doused your room with perfume in your overly elaborate and dramatic attempt to trick me. Bye bye baby.” + +Mary’s eyes widen as you dump the torch on the floor which lights up the room spectacularly. Mary attempts to get out of flames, but all the silver in her body makes her too heavy and she falls over again. + +“Hmm, maybe the undead do have emotions. She certainly looked scared and sounds like she’s in pain.” You say as you leave to catch up with the rest of the pack. + +You don’t get far when you see the wolflings running towards you. Many of them are wounded, some badly. + +“What’s going on?” you ask, stopping one of them. +“It’s too damn big! It’s unstoppable! We really tried! Honest!” +“What?!” +“Frankie! He’s been heavily modified. He doesn’t look at all like he did the old pictures I’ve ever seen of him!” + +No sooner have you been informed when you hear that damn loud speaker again, the remaining wolflings run past you. + +“You see Wolf! You see! While you’ve been wasting away in that shitty cabin, I’ve been preparing for my son’s come back! You stole his woman! You ended his career! You didn’t just damage him physically, you damaged his mind! Scarred him emotionally! It’s taken me YEARS to undo the damage!” +“Damaged his mind? He was a psychopathic serial pedophile made of corpses! What the fuck kind of damage could I have done? And Mary never liked him anyway!” you retort. +“She could’ve learned! He could’ve too! They just needed more time! But YOU! You prevented all that! You and your dog dick!” +“For fuck’s sake I wasn’t the only one fucking her!” +“Yes, but you’re the one who did it the longest and destroyed my poor boy’s career! You’re going to pay! Frankie look who we have here! And old friend, why don’t you go and give him a big hug?” + +Victor goes into his mad scientist laugh yet again, and Frankie “2.0” comes lumbering down the hallway, he’s definitely got that cybernetic look now. + +“FRANKIE BEAT YOUR HEAD IN.” He says with a booming voice. + +Still as verbal and articulate as ever. +> Grab a torch and burn him +The problem with this tactic, is you’ve neglected to remember that Frankie has been vastly updated whereas Mary wasn.’t. Titanium plating doesn’t burn very well, as you find this out the hard way when you grab a nearby torch and shove it into Frankie’s body. It doesn’t do any notable damage. Frankie does some notable damage to you though. + +He grabs your arm, breaking it in several places, and then takes the torch and sets YOU on fire, by shoving the flaming torch right through your body. + +Fur seems to burn very well.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For a moment you almost believed her. For a moment she almost displayed real emotions and feelings. + +For a moment you almost were a complete idiot, except you remember the old prejudice that you’ve never forgotten: + +“No matter how much the Undead try to mimic feelings, they have none.” + +You hear a click of a wall opening up. You see a metal arm point out and run out of the room, pushing Mary in the way. Igor opens fire and Mary takes king’s ransom in silver to her body, toppling her over with a heavy thud. She’s not dead, but she’ll need some new parts and a major stitch job. + +“Igor, you fucking idiot!” she yells from the floor attempting to get up. “Go help Dad! Wolf’s probably on his way there!” + +If Mary knew you were coming back, she probably wouldn’t have dismissed Igor so quickly. She manages to stand up just as you stand in the doorway…with a torch. + +“You know what I like about these old castles? They always have torches and candles lighting the corridors.” You say. +“Even in my present condition, you won’t get close enough to use that thing!” Mary says with defiance. +“Save your feeble threats, but I don’t need to get close, you doused your room with perfume in your overly elaborate and dramatic attempt to trick me. Bye bye baby.” + +Mary’s eyes widen as you dump the torch on the floor which lights up the room spectacularly. Mary attempts to get out of flames, but all the silver in her body makes her too heavy and she falls over again. + +“Hmm, maybe the undead do have emotions. She certainly looked scared and sounds like she’s in pain.” You say as you leave to catch up with the rest of the pack. + +You don’t get far when you see the wolflings running towards you. Many of them are wounded, some badly. + +“What’s going on?” you ask, stopping one of them. +“It’s too damn big! It’s unstoppable! We really tried! Honest!” +“What?!” +“Frankie! He’s been heavily modified. He doesn’t look at all like he did the old pictures I’ve ever seen of him!” + +No sooner have you been informed when you hear that damn loud speaker again, the remaining wolflings run past you. + +“You see Wolf! You see! While you’ve been wasting away in that shitty cabin, I’ve been preparing for my son’s come back! You stole his woman! You ended his career! You didn’t just damage him physically, you damaged his mind! Scarred him emotionally! It’s taken me YEARS to undo the damage!” +“Damaged his mind? He was a psychopathic serial pedophile made of corpses! What the fuck kind of damage could I have done? And Mary never liked him anyway!” you retort. +“She could’ve learned! He could’ve too! They just needed more time! But YOU! You prevented all that! You and your dog dick!” +“For fuck’s sake I wasn’t the only one fucking her!” +“Yes, but you’re the one who did it the longest and destroyed my poor boy’s career! You’re going to pay! Frankie look who we have here! And old friend, why don’t you go and give him a big hug?” + +Victor goes into his mad scientist laugh yet again, and Frankie “2.0” comes lumbering down the hallway, he’s definitely got that cybernetic look now. + +“FRANKIE BEAT YOUR HEAD IN.” He says with a booming voice. + +Still as verbal and articulate as ever. +> Retreat +You jump out of Frankie’s way as he smashes into the wall behind you. You make your way quickly down the stairs, where you here Frankie getting back up and following you down them like a freight train. +You’re still a good ways from the bottom, but you see Igor appear at the bottom. You can’t stop or Frankie will slam into you and probably kill you by breaking every bone in your body and tearing you apart. You can keep going and attempt to jump towards Igor hoping you’ll land on him before he can fire accurately or you could jump over the banister and get out of the way altogether. The only problem with this is you’re still pretty high up. You wouldn’t die from such a fall, but you could break something if you land wrong and you certainly don’t want that disadvantage. +> Jump over the banister +You jump over the banister. Frankie goes flying past you unable to stop himself. You hear gunfire and some sounds of bullets plinking off of metal and burying themselves into flesh. + +“OH SHIT!” you hear Igor shout. This term is followed by your own, when you see that you were a lot higher than you thought. You go crashing through a solid wooden dining table. It hurts...A LOT. + +You don’t get up right away and you half expect Frankie or Igor to come and finish you off, but fortunately that doesn’t happen. You painfully rise and prepare yourself for the final battle, which doesn’t occur. + +You go over to the bottom of the stairs and see the wolflings taking advantage of Frankie’s weakened prone state and getting revenge for the beating he gave them all earlier. As for Igor he’s lying under Frankie crushed and dying. He’s bleeding from his ears, mouth, nose and eyes. + +“(Gurgle) (sputter) I’m sorry…Vic…Sorry brother…(Gurgle)” he says before dying. +“Well I guess that explains his loyalty.” You say to yourself. + +“Hey Wolf you want to get in on this?” A wolfling says ripping a hand off of Frankie. +“Nah, you’ve earned this. I’m just going to go back upstairs and finish off Victor.” +“Need any of us to come up with you?” +“No, you just make sure you do a good job of killing Frankie there.” + +You head back up stairs and head to the lab that Frankie came bursting out of, it’s empty, but there’s another door in the room and you’ve got the impression that a certain doctor is behind it. + +You open the door to a small room with a bunch of big computers hooked up to a brain in a jar… + +“Dr. Frankenstein I presume?” you say. “Wow Vic, I would’ve thought you would’ve at least made a clone body or something.” +“Frankie! Igor! Get in here! NOW!” +‘They’re dead just like you’ll be soon and should’ve been before.” +“Erm…Wolf! Hold on! Come on, I can’t do anything to you! This isn’t fair! Hold on how about…” +“How about you shut up and die?” you say and take Victor’s brain out of the jar. + +“NOOOOOO….” Is the last thing that comes out of the loud speakers as you crush the brain under your foot. + +Its over. You won, and you fucking hurt like hell. You stagger back downstairs where you find Frankie completely in pieces. The wolflings look at you expectantly. + +“Did you kill him?’ +“Yeah, and it was hardly worth the effort.” You reply. +“What are we going to do now?” another asks. +“Well I don’t know about you, but I’m going back home to rest.” +“But aren’t you taking us to raise hell somewhere else?” +“Maybe some other day. Look I’m not here to lead you around by the paw. If you want to raise hell you can certainly do it without me. I showed you the way of the wolf tonight, it’s up to you to do something with it. Just remember you’re fucking werewolves, live up to the name.” + +You get back on your Harley and head home. Hopefully you taught the new generation something so tonight wasn’t a complete bust. You didn’t really get to have the epic battle you were looking for, but you survived and in the end that’s what it’s all about.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You jump out of Frankie’s way as he smashes into the wall behind you. You make your way quickly down the stairs, where you here Frankie getting back up and following you down them like a freight train. +You’re still a good ways from the bottom, but you see Igor appear at the bottom. You can’t stop or Frankie will slam into you and probably kill you by breaking every bone in your body and tearing you apart. You can keep going and attempt to jump towards Igor hoping you’ll land on him before he can fire accurately or you could jump over the banister and get out of the way altogether. The only problem with this is you’re still pretty high up. You wouldn’t die from such a fall, but you could break something if you land wrong and you certainly don’t want that disadvantage. +> Jump towards Igor +What happens next is so quick it’s amazing you survive it. + +You leap up in the air in an effort to land on Igor before he fires. Frankie is still charging behind you, but that changes when you leap up into the air, because he ends up being underneath you when gains more momentum. + +Meanwhile Igor is attempting to lift that heavy arm weapon of his to accurately shoot you. The weight and the recoil makes it difficult and he’s not very accurate and begins firing everywhere randomly in your AND Frankie’s direction. + +You’re still airborn heading towards Igor and now Frankie as well who’s somehow gotten in front of you due to him being unable to stop himself at this point. This is fortunate since this causes Frankie to block most of the randomly fired bullets with his body. You still take a couple in the leg though. + +“OH SHIT! Igor yells as Frankie slams into him and the floor at terrific speed. You don’t fair much better since you crash into the back of Frankie which is pretty hard due to the metal plating. It hurts like hell and you crawl off as quickly as possible while Frankie attempts to recover. Igor isn’t recovering as quickly; he’s bleeding from every orifice and whatever cybernetic parts he had can go to the scrap yard. + +You’re in great pain and you got some silver bullets in your leg, but you need to act. +> Finish off Igor +You’ll never be able to fight Frankie in this condition and in his updated status, you get an idea. + +You go over to Igor who pathetically attempts to point his weapon at you. You easily grab his arm weapon and begin to pull the thing out its weakened socket. Blood spurts all over you and Igor finally dies from the loss of it. + +“I’m sorry Vic…my brother… (gurgle)” he sputters. +“Hm, that explains his loyalty I guess.” You say to yourself. + +Frankie’s is attempting to recover from his own wounds, but you’re not going to give him a chance to do it. You point Igor’s arm at Frankie and manipulate the tendons inside. + +The gun fires and you blast half of Frankie’s head off with a rain of silver bullets. The recoil causes you to fall to the ground and the heat from it burns the fur on your hands. + +“Holy shit that was fucking cool.” You say impressed. + +Frankie’s not dead yet though, he tries to get back up, so you just take the weapon and club him in what remains of his head with it until he stays down for good. You then tear him apart to make sure. You stand over Frankie’s body parts panting heavily. You can’t even give a victory howl. You’re too tired. The rest of the pack comes in, somewhat surprised to see you alive. + +“You’re alive!” +“Of course I’m alive! No thanks to you! Where the hell were you assholes?” +“Um…well we didn’t know if we should help since you got mad when we did it last time…” + +You can’t even argue with them, you’re too tired to do even that. You only have the strength to do one more thing… + +You head upstairs by yourself, back to the lab Frankie came bursting out of, its empty, but there’s another door in the room and you’ve got the impression that a certain doctor is behind it. + +You open the door to a small room with a bunch of big computers hooked up to a brain in a jar… + +“Vic, you really are a shitty Mad Scientist, you couldn’t even come up with a better way to prolong your life.” +“Frankie! Igor! Get in here! NOW!” +‘They’re dead just like you’ll be soon and should’ve been before.” +“Erm…Wolf! Hold on! Come on, I can’t do anything to you! Hasn’t there been enough killing for one day!? +“Not yet.” you say and take Victor’s brain out of the jar. + +“NOOOOOO….” Is the last thing that comes out of the loud speakers as you crush the brain under your foot. +“NOW there’s been enough killing for one day.” You say. + +Its over. You won, and you fucking hurt like hell. You stagger back downstairs. Where the wolflings look at you expectantly. + +“Did you kill him?’ +“Yeah, and it was hardly worth the effort.” You reply. +“What are we going to do now?” another asks. +“Well I don’t know about you, but I’m going back home to rest.” +“But aren’t you taking us to raise hell somewhere else? We want to do more werewolf stuff!” +“Raise hell? You fuckers made ME do all the damn work! I killed every single member of this fucked up family all by my damn self! As far as I’m concerned I’M the only werewolf here! The rest of you are fucking lapdogs at best! I’m not leading any of you anywhere until you go prove otherwise…no fuck that. I don’t want to see ANY of you again! Well except Ginger. You know where I live baby. When you don’t want to hang around with these neutered pups, come see me.” + +Unsurprisingly Ginger comes with you immediately. + +You and Ginger get back on your Harley and head home. You’re now convinced that you’re the last of a dying breed. Today’s youth are fucking spoiled. Still, you got to prove that you’re still the baddest ass Alpha Wolf this world is ever going to see, and it’ll be a long time before the world sees an Alpha Wolf like you again. + +That is until Ginger has a litter of cubs…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>What happens next is so quick it’s amazing you survive it. + +You leap up in the air in an effort to land on Igor before he fires. Frankie is still charging behind you, but that changes when you leap up into the air, because he ends up being underneath you when gains more momentum. + +Meanwhile Igor is attempting to lift that heavy arm weapon of his to accurately shoot you. The weight and the recoil makes it difficult and he’s not very accurate and begins firing everywhere randomly in your AND Frankie’s direction. + +You’re still airborn heading towards Igor and now Frankie as well who’s somehow gotten in front of you due to him being unable to stop himself at this point. This is fortunate since this causes Frankie to block most of the randomly fired bullets with his body. You still take a couple in the leg though. + +“OH SHIT! Igor yells as Frankie slams into him and the floor at terrific speed. You don’t fair much better since you crash into the back of Frankie which is pretty hard due to the metal plating. It hurts like hell and you crawl off as quickly as possible while Frankie attempts to recover. Igor isn’t recovering as quickly; he’s bleeding from every orifice and whatever cybernetic parts he had can go to the scrap yard. + +You’re in great pain and you got some silver bullets in your leg, but you need to act. +> Finish off Frankie +You limp over to Frankie while he’s recovering and land a few well placed strikes, even ripping off some of the back plating. It’s no good though; Frankie’s still got a lot of fight in him. He turns around, grabs you by the throat and begins to squeeze the shit out of it, raising you off the ground. Igor who’s dying makes one last effort to avenge his last blunder. + +“For my brother Vic!” he yells and fires his weapon at you one last time. He can’t miss at this range and your death is instantaneous.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You tell everyone to get the hell out of Igor’s range and take cover. Fortunately Igor’s gun-arm isn’t the best design and he’s having problems aiming and standing still due to the recoil, so you all manage to hide behind some nearby rocks + +Still, there’s no way you’re going to be able to scale the front gate with Igor on that damn tower. + +“See I knew this was a bad idea!” one of the wolflings says. +“How are we supposed to get past that? I’m pretty sure he’s firing silver bullets at us.” +“Oh I KNOW he is. Hence the reason why I told everyone to get out of the way. Okay so we’re not going through the front gate, the castle’s a big place right? Igor’s only guarding the front. I say we split up and scale the walls on the sides and around the back. We’ll meet up inside the castle.” +“Yeah, but won’t there be other defenses?” +“Probably. So you better be fucking prepared! This ain’t no damn game. You cubs think you’re really tough when in fact you’ve probably never had a real challenge. This is it. Don’t think about backing out now. This is where we truly test the idea of survival of the fittest. Damn, my blood is starting to feel that rush! Don’t you all feel it? I haven’t felt this way since they sent a group of ten “werewolf assassins” to put me down. Shit. They never tried that again! Ha ha ha ha ha!” + +While you’re reveling in gruesome nostalgia, your pack is looking at you like you’ve completely lost it. And they’re probably right. However, your speech seems to have stirred something in them. + +“The crazy old fossil’s right! I remember having to hear about similar stuff my grandfather used to talk about all the damn time. I never really paid any attention to it before. Now I think I understand. We need to prove our skills to truly be proud to call ourselves werewolves!” one of them states. +“Now that’s the attitude I’m talking about!” + +You all huddle in the rain and make a howling noise in unison to the moon and proceed with your plan. You all split up into a couple of groups and begin to scale the side and back walls, which really isn’t all that difficult. You know Igor’s probably ran off to warn Vic though. All you can think is, he better have something better than just Igor and Frankie defending him. + +As you prowl around in the courtyard, you hear moaning and the clomping of several footsteps. You and your group turn to see some of Vic’s defenses. + +“Zombies? Are you fucking kidding me Vic? I thought you’d at least have some robots or something!” you say to yourself. Though upon a second look, you see that the horde of corpses aren’t actually zombies. Zombies are complete corpses brought back to life. These things look more like Frankie, except designed even worse. A lot of them have arms and legs in odd places. Some have a couple of heads or extra limbs. Most aren’t even stitched together neatly, there are just giant rivets and spikes sticking out, holding them together. These are probably some of his “failed” experiments. + +Doesn’t matter, they’re close enough to be Undead for you. +> Out run them and get into the castle +You don’t have time to fight some half ass experiments, the wolflings can handle that. You’re after a bigger prize. You leave the pack behind and run to the front door of the castle where upon you rip it off the hinges. + +You’re in such a hurry to kill Victor; you don’t proceed cautiously enough and forget that he’s probably trapped the place. You step on a floor panel and a laser beam suddenly shoots out, incinerating you into ash.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your recent dealings with Mary, have made you think about all the shit you’ve had to put up with from that no talent dickhead. No human has ever given you such trouble. You know he’s still alive. (Mad scientists always find ways of prolonging their lives somehow) That won’t be true for long though, if you get your way. You killed him once before. This time you’re going to make sure he stays that way. + +He’s probably got whatever crappy inventions and experiments protecting his castle and from what you know, Frankie’s still living with his “Dad” as well. + +You don’t give a fuck, you’ll kill him too. You figure you’ll be doing the world a favor as well as getting some satisfaction. Besides, you’ve got to show these wolflings what being a werewolf is all about. + +“All right you cubs! We’re going to go raise some fucking hell. We’re going to Frankenstein’s Castle. We’re going to rip the place apart brick by brick, and I’M going to rip Victor apart limb from limb.” +“Erm…Castle Frankenstien? Isn’t that where Frankie lives?” one of the wolflings asks. +“I heard he’s really powerful, didn’t he fight Dracula and win?” +‘I dunno if we should mess with him.” + +You can’t believe your ears! These snot nosed pups know nothing of their heritage! Back in the old days they would’ve been killed and eaten for such cowardice! + +“Goddammit are you Wolves or fucking Chihuahuas? Frankie’s a fucking pussy! I personally kicked his ass before and I’ll do it again all by myself if I have too! Now are you going to run with me and be a fucking Wolf or are you going to go back home with your tails tucked between your legs?” + +After looking at each other for awhile they all agree to go with you. + +“Good! Now I want all of you to transform into your wolf form too! I’m traveling with fellow wolves not humans!” + +Just before one of the females begins to transform, you stop her. She’s dressed in a short leather skirt and a tight white t-shirt that’s tied in the center and has long flowing brown hair. You can smell that she’s in heat. You hate to coin a pun, but she literally is one hot l’il bitch. + +“Erm, not you. You stay in your human form; I kind of like the whole teenage slut look you got going on. In fact you come here right now; you’ll be traveling on my bike with me.” You say. + +As she slides in behind you and holds on, you ask her one more question. + +“So what’s your name?” +“Ginger. What’s your name, you never did tell us.” +“Wolf. Just Wolf baby. Remember it. You’ll be screaming it later.” + +Damn you’re so fucking cool, you think as you start up your Harley and ride ahead of the pack. + +(You’d probably be even cooler if these pups weren’t all riding those Japanese “crotch rocket” bikes, but that’ll have to be another lesson for another day) + +After a couple of days of riding, and a few “pit stops” with Ginger, you all eventually reach Castle Frankenstein. You park your bikes at the gate, and size the place up, which now looks a lot different. It looks like a damn Nazi fortress now, there’s guard towers and everything. It seems Victor has been keeping himself very busy in recent years. + +As it begins to rain, a familiar voice calls to you from one of the towers. + +“Its you. Vic always knew you’d return one day. I never believed him though. I guess I owe him fifty bucks.” + +You look up and see Igor, he looks different too. He has a lot of clumsy cybernetic implants, one of them being some sort of gun in place of an arm. More of Vic’s “handy work” no doubt. He’s still got that damn hump on his back though. + +“Igor? You still alive? I thought your ungrateful master would’ve just let you die of old age and get himself another assistant. I see he did a real good job of improving you though. Tell me, how’s it feel to be the real brains, never getting the credit and continuing to be a doormat?” +“I’m happy with my lot in life. How’s it feel to be broke ass overgrown dog who’s trying to relive his lost youth?” Igor retorts back. +“Don’t know yet. I’ll tell you before I shove that metal arm up your ass.” + +Well looks like the fight’s starting here. +> Memories (Igor) +The Assistant: Igor + +You’ve never really had much contact with Igor, other than knowing he’s Victor’s assistant. For awhile you thought he and Vic had something ELSE going on, (Much like Vlad and Renfield) but that’s not the case. Igor’s just a loyal henchman. + +You always wondered why he is though. Despite general public perception, he’s not stupid. In fact, he’s been the one that’s given Vic most of his “successful” experiment ideas. Vic wouldn’t even be around if it hadn’t been for Igor. Vic doesn’t seem to appreciate any of his help though and doesn’t treat him very well. He treats his experiments better than he treats Igor. You can only guess Igor is a masochist, or has some severe self-esteem problems. + +Probably both.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“So you had me in mind eh? Well that proves it. You think I’m a joke because that’s how you wrote the character.” +“What? No! I just…” +“I see your time with that bloodsucker was well spent. Learning how to exploit and leech right? Look maybe you can pull this shit with those puppies over there, but I ain’t fucking one! I don’t need the money that badly. I’ll go fucking live my twilight years in the forest and DIE there as nature probably intended. I don’t need this shit.” + +As you turn to leave, Mary shouts at you. + +“Yeah, that’s right go on leave Mr. Lone Wolf! You’ll fucking die alone, you stubborn bastard! I tried to help you! Erik tried to help you and you don’t appreciate any of it! That’s why none of your children speak to you and…” + +You run back over to her and slam her into the wall. You stare at her face to face as she struggles to get free. She’s strong, but you manage to keep her pinned. She really pissed you off and you were already pissed off to begin with. + +“Fuck you, and fuck Erik! You two don’t know shit about me, never did. I’m through with the pair of you! In fact I think I’ll be taking something with me since you’re so worried about me being alone…” + +You release Mary and go over to the wolflings who look a little worried that you’re going to cause harm to them. Many of them cast their eyes downward. + +“Hey, you want to be REALLY tough? You want to really raise some hell? Come with me. If you want to stay under the thumb of this patchwork dead bitch and be exploited and mocked, stay here. + +Your statement alone convinces all of them. They all follow you, even the one you made an example of. Mary attempts to call everyone back, but it’s useless, you’ve taken control of the pack and they’ll do what you want now. + +And right now you want to get into a fight. You think about all the people and creatures that wronged you in some way and only two of them keep coming to mind consistently. + +One is that fucking Dr. Victor Frankenstein. If it wasn’t for him, Frankie and Mary wouldn’t have been created in the first place which also means you wouldn’t have gotten yourself into trouble all those years ago. You wouldn’t have had to put up with his “children” taking jobs away from you. Not to mention he sued you once. + +But the one who you REALLY despise, is that bisexual bloodsucker. Fucking Dracula or Vlad, or whatever the hell he’s calling himself these days. The disgust you have for him and the reasons are too numerous to list here. +> Go kick Vlad's ass +Its long over due and its time. You need to go fucking kill that bloodsucker or die trying. You need to prove that you are and always will be the baddest of the monsters. You also need to prove to these wolflings that they need to be proud of their fucking heritage and not play second fiddle to some overgrown leeches. + +“All right you cubs! We’re going to go raise some fucking hell. We’re going to Dracula’s Castle. We’re going to rip the place apart brick by brick, and every fucking bloodsucker in the goddamned place and I’M going to rip Fagula apart limb from limb, drive a stake in his heart, cut his head off and then shove his dick in his mouth!” + +The Wolflings look very apprehensive about your suggestion, in fact they outright refuse. + +“You’re a fucking crazy old coot; if you think we’re gonna follow you to Dracula’s Castle! Fuck that, he’s got an army of bloodsuckers and ghouls and who knows what the hell else! We can’t win that Wolf! Can’t we just bust up a bar or something?” one of them exclaims + +You can’t believe your ears! These snot nosed pups know nothing of their heritage! Back in the old days they would’ve been killed and eaten for such cowardice! + +“Goddammit are you Wolves or fucking Chihuahuas? Vampires have been taking OUR rightful place in the monster hierarchy for centuries! We need to set the fucking record straight on this shit! Now are you going to run with me and be a fucking Wolf or are you going to go back home with your tails tucked between your legs?” + +After looking at each other for awhile they all begin to leave and head back to the studio. + +“Oh fuckin’ fine then, play werewolf in a movie, but I can see I’m the only fuckin’ REAL Werewolf here, the rest of you are just goddamn overgrown dingos! Fuck this, I don’t give a shit, I’ll kill Dracula my own goddamned self. I don’t need anybody’s help!” + +You get on your Harley and ride. You only make a few stops on your way; you’re completely driven to have your final showdown with Vlad. Finally after a few days of riding you reach Dracula’s Castle. The place looks exactly the same. You get off your bike and scale the high iron gate. As you jump down into the courtyard you half expect yourself to be overwhelmed by vampires, or even ghouls, but nothing happens. This is weird, there aren’t even any guards patrolling or even at the door. In fact it sounds like a party is going on inside. You hear lots of laughter and music. Suddenly someone comes outside and sees you. It’s some Vampire chick. + +“Ohhh, a Werewolf! Wow, I didn’t know any of you types were invited to the party; I thought Drac hated you guys. Well what’re you doing standing outside? Come on in the party’s just starting!” she says waving you in. + +A bit of a different approach than you were preparing for, but you enter. You entrance to the ballroom is immediately a big event. You’re the only Werewolf there. Everyone else is either a Vampire, a ghoul, or even a human “servant”. Everyone is staring at you, some with wonder and interest, most with hatred, a few in awe. Most probably haven’t encountered a Werewolf like you before. The staring would probably continue if another slightly out of place being didn’t come shuffling up to you to talk you in a friendly manner causing the bloodsuckers to go back to partying. It’s Im-Ho-Tep. You’re surprised to see him here. + +“Wolf?! YOU got an invitation to this thing? I can’t believe it! What the hell did you and Dracula kiss and make up?” he remarks with his scratchy sounding voice. +“Not in this life time Teppy. What’re you doing here?” +”Me? Oh you know Vlad, he’s always gotta put on a show. Likes to play up the whole royalty thing to the other bloodsuckers, so he always invites me to these things to prove he’s got connections or something since I was a Prince. I always keep telling him, it’s a meaningless title since the Egyptian Empire fell thousands of years ago, but he insists on flying me out here, making a big fuss and everything so what the hell, it’s not like I got anything better to do plus I get a kick out of watching the bloodsuckers get drunk and make idiots out of themselves, well that and I like to look at some of these Vamp chicks. Heh, guess that makes me a voyeur, but again what the hell, its one of the few pleasures I get in this world anymore. But enough about this dirty old man, what brings you here if you weren’t invited? Just randomly crashing the party?” +“Sort of…I didn’t even know there was one…I’m here to kill Fagula.” You whisper quietly. + +Tep’s eyes widen a bit under his bandages. He isn’t entirely surprised (At his age barely anything surprises him anymore) but he was caught a little off guard by your statement. + +“Wow Wolf…I can tell you’re really not joking about this. All I can say is… what took you so long? I thought this day would come long before now. Lost some bets because of it, oh well easy come easy go. Well you know your secret’s safe with me, though I suppose it won’t be a secret for too much longer! You’re still the craziest sonofabitch I know, but then you always did know how to liven up a party! Ha ha! Ol’ Vlad will probably be making his grand entrance soon, so just wait awhile. He threw this party for some kind of special announcement he has to make. I still got a bet with Erik that you would win if you and Drac ever got into a battle to the death. I’ll be hoping to collect that bet from Erik. Good luck!” Tep then shuffles off back to where he sitting. + +Erik bet against you? Fucking little depressed shit! You’re going to have a little talk with him after all this. + +You put your back against the wall, watching everyone while waiting for Dracula to arrive. An hour passes and you’re fucking sick of waiting, you don’t feel like waiting for him to make “an entrance”. You’re here to commit major mayhem on him, not listen to anything he has to say. While you’re surveying the place, you see a disheveled man peek out from a corner across the room and then slink back. That was Renfield, you’d know Fagula’s sycophantic bitch boy anywhere. +> Wait a little longer +You figure he really can’t be that long now, and decide to wait. Soon you see Renfield come back, he tells everyone to quiet down on orders of his master. + +“Excuse me everyone, I know you’re all anxious to hear what my master has to say, but I have been informed that he will not step into this room until a certain infestation has been taken care of first. Namely THAT ONE OVER THERE!” + +Suddenly all the Vampires, Ghouls and Human servants look at you and advance! You’re beyond out numbered. You put up a good fight for someone in your position, but ultimately you are scratched, bitten and sucked dry. And not in the good way either. You are then skinned where your pelt is hung up over Drac’s fireplace, where he always brags about how he defeated you single handedly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Paradise... + +That must've been the Empire's idea of an ironic joke when they were assigning a name to this sweltering hell hole of a planet. The heat wouldn't be so bad if the planet wasn't also a jungle nightmare teaming with poisonous flora and dangerous fauna. + +The "primitive" natives aren't exactly friendly either. Your team medic had to find that out the hard way. Oh sure sometimes you'll come across a tribe that's friendly, but most of the time the lizards see you as food. Soft, fleshy pink food that's invading their territory. Which means you usually end up having to torch an entire village. + +Fuckin' waste of ammo. + +Of course if the planet and its inhabitants weren't enough, there's always the other major powers laying claim to the planet. The Krik Collective, the Mazatt Dominion, and the Elojin Alliance have all laid claims to plunder whatever riches this planet may have and that's why you're here: To make sure this planet is plundered by the Terran Empire instead. + +The next Empire supply ship won't be here for a long time, let alone anymore troops. You're on your own. Ah the joys of being part of the Empire's expeditionary force. + +You and your team have currently set up base in one of those "friendly" lizard villages. + +Well its a brand new day in Paradise, what's first on the agenda? +> Check on your team's activities +Well you guess you’d better check on your team. Not doing so would certainly look irresponsible of you, hardly becoming of an officer of the Empire. + +You step out of your tent and peruse your team, who are all going about their duties as they should. They’re a good team, sure sometimes they complain, but on this planet its very understandable. + +Your Indoctrinator is busily going about his usual brainwashing fanaticism as he tries to instill the values of the Empire to the reptilian natives that live in this village. Salo’s ranting and raving like a mad man as he is apt to do when preaching. The Lizards look at him with a blank expression in a vain attempt to understand what the hell he’s talking about, but you can tell they’re getting agitated. + +Meanwhile your inept second in command Lieutenant LaFleur is pointlessly scolding some of the other team members for not setting up their tents by regulation standard. They look annoyed. You swear you think he’s probably come closer to death by his own team members than by any enemy involvement you’d ever engaged in. + +Well you should probably intervene somewhere before someone gets killed. +> Approach your Indoctrinator +That overzealous fool is going to turn the entire village against you, and that’s the last thing you need right now. You stop Salo before the Lizards make dinner out of him. + +“What are you doing?! It’s my job to teach these savages the ways of the Empire, and bring them into the fold, even if they aren’t worthy enough to serve HIM.” +“Well you’re not gonna do that by antagonizing the poor scaly bastards! Just leave them alone, its not like we’re leaving anytime soon, and we’ll have a lot easier time of it, if we aren’t fighting every last lizard on this fuckin’ planet!” +“If they don’t accept the ways of the Empire, then they deserve to be purged by it!” Salo says predictably. +“Yeah, well if you haven’t noticed we’re a LONG way from the Empire, new supplies won’t be here for months and I’d like to currently supply of ammo to last until then. That won’t happen if we’re blowing away every lizard we come across. Its easier to just work with them when they aren’t actively hostile.” + +Salo looks unconvinced and disturbed by your words. +“As an Indoctrinator of the Empire it’s also up to me to make sure its servants are not falling astray to alien influences! And you my dear Captain have been displaying suspect behavior as of late! I hope for your sake you haven’t forgotten the values of the Empire!” +Salo warns and storms off to his tent. + +As the Lizards disperse and go back to their simple village life, you also return to your tent, shaking your head, and thinking about what a short sighted, narrow minded idiot Salo is. You go back to studying the maps of the territory you’ve explored so far and pondering where you should go next, soon one of your men comes in to tell you that the Sergeant has come back from a recon mission and she looks like she’s faced some hostiles. He also tells you they’ve captured an interesting prisoner, an Elojin. +> Tell him to send the Sergeant in to report +Delegating any responsibility to LaFleur is never a good idea, you tell him to send in Sergeant Alyssa. Sergeant Alyssa walks in and reports to you in her usual no nonsense manner; you’ve always admired her race’s stoic nature. + +“Captain, we discovered a Mazatt encampment, we killed all twenty of them with only two casualties. There was no useful information to be found, all their data was no different than ours. The only thing of interest was the prisoner they were holding.” +“Ah the one that is now ours. The Elojin.” You reply +“He kept saying he had some important information. I wasn’t sure if we should kill him or you’d want to question him first. If it’s the former I’d be glad to do it, his constant chattering was…annoying.” + +Alyssa’s people aren’t known for their small talk. +> Question the Elojin +“Send him in, you can kill him afterwards if he proves to be useless.” + +Alyssa nods and brings the Elojin in roughly. + +“Ow! Watch it you, blue Empire whore!” he says which is followed by a kick to his back by Alyssa before she leaves. The Elojin brushes himself off and stands up. +“I swear you humans will allow any primitive race into your club nowadays. What planet did you pick that one up from? +“You had something important to tell me?” you ask, but the Elojin completely ignores you. +“Mind you, she is a pretty primitive; her pointy ears almost make me want to laugh though.” +“I suggest you stop talking about my Sergeant and start talking about what you know.” +He still doesn’t listen. +“You know I’ve always been impressed by you humans. I’ve read a lot about your species. We have more in common than you might think. Why if it wasn’t for your lack of spots and disgusting hairy body, we could be brothers!” + +Your patience has run out, you grab him by his scrawny throat. + +“Look you hairless spotty freak, you better start talking before I let my Sergeant blast a big hole in you and that’s AFTER I turn you over to my Indoctrinator who’ll be only to happy to get his hands on the likes of you.” + +Well that got his attention, and apparently he does know something of humans because, Indoctrinator widened his eyes a bit. He keeps his cool though. + +“See now you humans know how to instill fear. Not like those idiot Mazatts that were trying to get information from me. I don’t know how those brainless brutes even mastered the wheel, let alone achieve space travel. Anyway, there’s an old Xont building on this planet.” +Now your eyes widen. +“WHAT?! Impossible! The Xont are a myth! The only knowledge that ANYONE has of them is from stories, there’s never been any hard evidence of this race found by any of the major or minor powers and that’s from centuries of searching.” +“Well perhaps we weren’t looking hard enough. The galaxy is a big place you know.” the Elojin sniffs. +“Don’t bother asking me where it’s at though, I won’t tell you where it’s at, no matter what you do. However I’d be willing to SHOW you, if you’d consider this a joint venture between our two governments. Just think this could bring about a new age of cooperation between our two species!” + +Translation: “I’m going to use you for my own gain, until I can find a way to fuck you over.” +> Humour him +“You’ll forgive me if I don’t share your optimistic vision of utopia, even if I was inclined to believe that you were being serious. However, seeing as we haven’t found anything else of importance on this forsaken planet, I’m willing to entertain this idea, but you’re going to have to patch some holes up in your story before I even consider letting you live.” +“What holes?” +“Well let’s start with the whole building idea. If you found this Xont building, why didn’t you and your team make off with the stuff already? And don’t tell me that you were ambushed by the Mazatt because if you had been, they would’ve taken your findings, OR if the technology was as powerful as everyone claims, you would’ve been able to destroy them with it. Sounds like typical Elojin shit to me…” +“Ha ha ha! Who said I had a team? You see, unlike the rest of you galaxy conquerors we Elojin don’t feel the need to send an army to scout a planet, when one or two of us can accomplish the same thing when deployed in strategic areas.” +“Hmm, so there are more of you here.” +“Perhaps. It wouldn’t matter though since we’re deployed in completely separate parts of a planet, even if we were all together, we wouldn’t be able to stand up to a force the size of yours.” +“That brings me to the next question, if you found this building already, how come you just didn’t stay there? What the hell do you need us for?” you ask. +“Excellent question. Well there are some rather nasty things lurking in there. Much too powerful for me, but I’m sure you’d have no problem dealing with them. I didn’t get too far without them chasing me out. I even tried recruiting a nearby tribe of those silly little reptile creatures to use as cannon fodder, but they refused to go in. From what I can gather they consider the place to be haunted and seem to hold the place in awe and fear. I suppose I should’ve known better to ask the Mazatt for help when I discovered their encampment, but I figured they’d at least listen to reason. Things seem to work out though; your blue concubine came in with full guns blazing and brought me back here.” +“Okay last question, what proof do you have that it’s a Xont structure, and not just ruins of some other alien species.” +“This!” The Elojin quickly pulls out some weird coins out of his pocket and puts them on the table. +“The Mazatt never even took these from me. Idiots. These are genuine Xont coins though! The metal is like nothing I’ve ever seen on this anywhere else, let alone this planet. It’s obviously not from here. The writing on it looks similar to what many stories have described. And this symbol. Tentacles wrapped around a planet. This is supposed to be what the Xont emblem was.” +“Yeah, yeah, a writhing mass of tentacles. I’ve heard that description too. Several of them. Proves nothing.” +“But this is the closest anyone’s come to finding something directly relating to the stories! One of the more common stories I might add! Look we Elojin have done the most research in this than anyone, and I’m convinced what I’ve seen IS a Xont building!” + +Well it might all be a lie, but he certainly looks convinced, and you have to admit you are a bit curious now. You’re just not sure you want or need him to be with you, when you get to the building. +> Agree to a partnership but ask what's in it for him +“Alright, you’ve got a deal for now, but what’s in it for you?” +“Well the technology of course.” +“Ha ha! You can’t be serious! Assuming all this bullshit is real, and we get through all this alive, what makes you think we’d give anything that might benefit you?” +“But we have a partnership. You agreed.” +“I agreed to not kill you, in exchange for you to play guide, we might even let you go afterwards.” +“I hardly see you taking advantage of me as an equal partnership.” +”Well you see correct then. Think of it this way, you owe us for saving your life from the Mazatt, and this is your payment.” +The Elojin, looks at you for awhile in silence before speaking again. +“Very well, it would appear that I have no choice, but surely since I found this place and leading you there, I should get something out of it.” +“Well you got those coins. I wouldn’t call that nothing, oh wait, they’re mine now. Tell ya what; if we find super advanced cooking utensils we’ll let you have those. Now, if you’ll excuse me, I have to go convince my team that we’re going to be look for a mythical building with only an Elojin to guide us. You will be under guard at all times and any attempt to escape will be frowned upon with excessive force. Understand me?” +“Of course.” The Elojin says obediently. You can’t help but to think he’s going to try to betray you at some point, and in this case he’d have good reason to do so, but you’ll have to worry about that later. + +You and the Elojin exit your quarters and you address your team. Alyssa verbally tells the more unruly ones to shut up. + +“Alright team, we’re finally going to do something worthwhile on this planet, we’re going on a treasure hunt of sorts, guided by this spotty freak here. He’s claiming there’s a Xont structure here, yes the Xont, I’m sure you’ve all heard the legends over and over, and while it might just be Elojin bullshit, we don’t have anything better to do, so we might as we check it out. And if he’s lying we’ll make sure he’s the first one to die if he’s trying to lead us into a trap.” + +Most of the team looks a bit hesitant. Alyssa is stoic as always, but you can tell she’s not entirely happy about this idea. They’ll follow you though. A few of the lizards heard the word “Xont” and went running back into their huts, seems they aren’t the only ones you scared, since LeFleur looks down right petrified. Finally you get the predictable reaction from Salo. + +“WHAT!?!! Captain I’ve held my tongue for too long about your liberal views on aliens, but now I must speak! You are treading the dangerous road of heresy by consorting with Elojin trash! Their types are nothing but liars and deceivers and you would allow one to guide us to who knows where? He has twisted your mind, and I won’t let this blasphemy continue!" + +Indoctrinator Salo pulls his weapon out and aims it at the Elojin. +> Reason with Salo +You step in front of Salo’s weapon, he just barely keeps from firing, and he still may do so. The rest of the team seems to be unsure of what to do, except for Alyssa who pulls her weapon out and aims it at Salo. The only one who’s calm is the Elojin, who seems to be getting a kick out of this. + +“Get out of the way Captain, I’ve got to kill him, he’ll lead us all to death with his lies!” +“Easy there Salo. Look I don’t trust the sonofabitch either, but if we got a chance at finding this Xont building…” +“LIES! And so what if it is true? The Xont were an alien race that raped countless worlds, and fell due to their decadence! What use has the Terran Empire have for the ruins of an utterly evil civilization?” + +While Salo is strong in his convictions about hating to work with aliens, you know he also can’t pass up the opportunity to kill more of them. You decide to appeal to that side of him. + +“Well think about the technology could be used to help humanity fight its enemies. The Xont as you say subjugated many worlds, and they did it with minimal effort. Perhaps we’ll find something that could destroy those who would oppose us instantly. The Order might promote you for our finds and use it for the good of the Empire. We could possibly bring in a new Golden Age of Humanity!” + +Salo’s eyes start to glaze over as he takes your words into consideration, he then lowers his weapon. You then whisper to him. +“We can always kill the Elojin when he isn’t useful anymore.” +Salo seems to REALLY like that idea, and agrees to your plan. He still has to get the last word in though. +“Very well, we’ll do things your way, you are my Captain and I will follow you, but if I see this expedition not following the best interests of the Empire I WILL step in.” + +Salo goes and prepares himself for the journey ahead and Alyssa tells everyone else to do the same, since LeFleur apparently went and hid in a tent while this “showdown” happened. + +Soon the team is all packed and ready to go; the Lizards seem to be happy to see you to leave, especially with the mention of the Xont. You wonder if you shouldn’t try to get more information from them before you leave, their fear would indicate they know something of them. +> Get information +You start to question the Lizards but won’t say anything, they just give you a cold reptilian stare, start to get agitated and begin hissing at you. +“Ssssak Sakkeekeessss!” +You begin to get angry. How dare these lower life forms withhold information from you! + +As your voice raises, the Lizard you’re questioning says something in his native tongue “Sliiisssthelisk!” and swipes his claw across your face. You immediately shoot him. This results in further carnage. + +The battle is quick and bloody, you round up the demoralized survivors and question them further, but most of them don’t know anything and just repeat some prayer to their gods in their language. Salo is eager to kill them, but you decide they will be useful to carry your excess belongings. You begin to use them as “pack animals” and head off. + +The Elojin begins to lead your team deep further into the jungle, keeping up his usual chatty demeanor. + +“Oh yes, it’s this way, now we may run into more of those reptiles, but I’m sure you’ll have no trouble handling them, like you handled these fellows here.” +“Quiet Elojin! Your constant prattle is annoying and serves no purpose!” Alyssa snaps. +“One could say the same about your presence here. At least I’m serving a useful purpose, of leading you to what could be the find of the millennium, you on the other hand are just an expendable soldier of an Empire slave race. Any fool that knows how to use a weapon could replace you.” The Elojin retorts. +Alyssa smashes the Elojin in the back of the head with her weapon; he falls to the ground in pain. You immediately intervene. + +“Sergeant! What the hell do you think you’re doing?! He has to lead us to the Xont city!” +“His words dishonored me! I will not put up with his disrespect!” +”You WILL follow my orders sergeant! Don’t do that again!” +“Yes sir!” Alyssa says and falls in line, but she stays as far as way possible from the Elojin. That blue bitch better remember whose boss around here if she knows what’s good for her. + +“I guess my thanks goes to you again Captain. This is the second time you’ve personally saved me from your overzealous team. I admire your domination over them.” +”Shut up Elojin and do your fucking job! Speak disrespectfully like that again to any of my team and I’m sure Salo can find a way to cause you great discomfort without hampering you from your appointed task.” + +The Elojin looks genuinely worried for the first time, and shuts up. He leads on with less talk, until you get to another Lizard village. + +“Now this is the Lizard village I tried to recruit to help me, the first time I found the structure. The Xont building isn’t far now, but we’ll get to it quicker if we go through the village." +> Destroy the village +For some reason you’ve steadily been over come with the idea human of superiority. In fact, you’ve been thinking a lot like Indoctrinator Salo and at this point your transformation is pretty much complete. You don’t even think about going into the village peacefully anymore, you fully intend to destroy it and enslave the survivors, just like you did last time. Humanity is destined to rule. + +“No prisoners.” You tell your team and charge into battle, it isn’t as easy as you thought though. +The Lizards somehow knew you were coming and they ambushed you and your team. Several of them fall into pits with either sharpened spikes or poisonous creatures at the bottom. While you’re temporarily caught off guard, you and Salo’s fanaticism rally your remaining troops to fight on shouting how the Lizards are no match for humanity. + +“ONWARD! FOR HUMANITY THE RIGHTFUL RULERS OF THE GALAXY! OUR DESTINY WILL NOT BE DENIED!” + +It works for the most part, the team begins to become inspired, except for two, Alyssa who didn’t need any encouragement to fight harder, but is showing signs of unhappiness at your new outlook on life. Tough. The other being LeFleur who finally broke down and ran. + +“TRAITOR!!!” Salo shouts and shoots LeFleur in the back like the coward he was. + +After the battle you have significantly less people with you. The entire Lizard village has been wiped out; the Lizards that were enslaved either ran off or were killed in the ensuing mayhem. Strangely the Elojin is still around. You half expected him to try to escape. He looks at the carnage that you wrought upon the village, and looks over at Salo, who’s busily pulling teeth from the dead Lizards to make some sort of necklace no doubt. + +“Well if you’re done playing with your scaly friends, the Xont building awaits.” + +The Elojin takes you and your remaining team a short distance, and there it is in all its glory. Its like nothing you’ve ever seen before, this is definitely Xont. You can feel it in your heart and the technology within shall be the Empire’s. You briefly daydream about finally being able to live out your original purpose of joining the Empire in the first place: To bring glory in HIS name. With this find, you’ll be able to do just that. Unfortunately that annoying Elojin begins talking again. + +“Well we’re here, now remember there’s some dangerous things lurking in there, I can tell you where I ran into them, and some of the interesting rooms I found that you should explore before I got chased out.” +> Kill the Elojin +“You’re services are no longer required Elojin trash.” You say and shoot him. +He falls to the ground clutching his chest, and laughs before dying. +“Hahahaha, I knew this was coming. It’s what I would’ve done. You haven’t won though human, you’ll see.” +Obviously he thinks you won’t be able to handle whatever is in there. Of course maybe one puny Elojin couldn’t, but humanity is made of stronger stuff. You and your team enter the building ready for anything. + +At least you thought you were. Once again your increased arrogance, has lead you to overestimate the worth of humanity, and underestimate your enemies. You don’t get far before you encounter the “things” that the Elojin was talking about. The Elojin wasn’t kidding when he said there were “things” in here. There are simply no other ways to describe the abominations you face. Writhing mass of tentacles comes to mind again though. The creatures are large, utterly mindless and brutally start tearing your team apart with ease, gobbling bloody limbs in one gulp. No amount of ranting and raving rallies the troops on this one. Soon, you, Salo, and Alyssa are the only ones left. Salo seems oblivious to the fact that this fight is hopeless, and continues to fight on, still screaming his usual doctrine. Alyssa fights on as well, but more out of a sense of self preservation rather than fanaticism. + +Within the chaos, you see an opening that could allow you to escape. +> Fight on +Stubborn to the last, you continue to fight the abominations, having an interesting last conversation with Salo as you reload what is surely your last clip. + +“Salo they’re going to remember this day of what we’ve done! Our sacrifice won’t be in vain! The Empire will find this and use the power within to destroy its enemies!” +“Yes! And our bones will be found, and we’ll be remembered as the ones who paved the way and our names will live on forever!” Salo, replies. + +This last bit of wishful thinking of “immortality” after your death at least makes you feel better before you feel a tentacle plunge through your stomach and another wrap around your head, popping it off like a dandelion. + +Fortunately you weren’t alive to see what happened afterwards… + +First off your bones wouldn’t have been found, the abominations ate everything. So your “sacrifice” wouldn’t have been known by the Empire at all, even if they had found the Xont structure, which they didn’t. + +Thanks to you, wiping out the nearby Lizard village as well as killing some of abominations in the structure (and severely wounding several of them) you made things a lot easier for the small Elojin team that had been lurking nearby. After it’s pretty clear that your team was destroyed, they took the opportunity to take advantage of the situation, mopping up the now weakened abominations inside and thoroughly looting the place. + +In typical Elojin fashion, they end up using the technology to keep everyone fighting each other and maintain the “status quo” except with them in an even better position than before, so they aren’t attacked as often. Effectively becoming the “puppet masters” of the galaxy. + +The Elojin was right, you didn’t win.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“You’re services are no longer required Elojin trash.” You say and shoot him. +He falls to the ground clutching his chest, and laughs before dying. +“Hahahaha, I knew this was coming. It’s what I would’ve done. You haven’t won though human, you’ll see.” +Obviously he thinks you won’t be able to handle whatever is in there. Of course maybe one puny Elojin couldn’t, but humanity is made of stronger stuff. You and your team enter the building ready for anything. + +At least you thought you were. Once again your increased arrogance, has lead you to overestimate the worth of humanity, and underestimate your enemies. You don’t get far before you encounter the “things” that the Elojin was talking about. The Elojin wasn’t kidding when he said there were “things” in here. There are simply no other ways to describe the abominations you face. Writhing mass of tentacles comes to mind again though. The creatures are large, utterly mindless and brutally start tearing your team apart with ease, gobbling bloody limbs in one gulp. No amount of ranting and raving rallies the troops on this one. Soon, you, Salo, and Alyssa are the only ones left. Salo seems oblivious to the fact that this fight is hopeless, and continues to fight on, still screaming his usual doctrine. Alyssa fights on as well, but more out of a sense of self preservation rather than fanaticism. + +Within the chaos, you see an opening that could allow you to escape. +> Run +In a brief moment of clarity and sanity you realize you’ve been making a horrible mistake. You need to get away from this place as soon as possible. You beat a hasty retreat telling Alyssa and Salo to do like wise. Alyssa follows, but Salo looks betrayed and yells at you, followed by a scream as the abominations make quick work of him. + +Unfortunately your escape is short lived as when you get out of the structure, you’re ambushed by a small Elojin team who were lurking outside. A pulse blast hits your chest, and you fall immediately to the ground. Alyssa, who was following close behind, sees you fall and comes out with guns blazing making quick work of the Elojin bushwhackers. + +Alyssa attempts to help you, but it’s too late. Before you die, you smile and tell her that you’re sorry, she doesn’t show it, but you can tell she forgives you. She didn’t like how you transformed though. The legacy of the Xont didn’t help you at all, the mere thought consumed you and Alyssa sees that only bad can come if anyone gets a hold of whatever may lay inside. + +Being the survivor she is, Alyssa makes her way back to the Lizard village that you so recently turned into a graveyard, and spends the rest of her stay there. She makes short distanced explorations to break up the monotony, but never ventures back to the Xont structure. When the Empire supply ship comes she is taken back and reports that the planet has diseases that wreak havoc on the humans, thus the reason why she’s the only survivor and there’s nothing of value on the planet. She continues with her lie that the Elojin were trying to use it as a base, she then suggests that the planet be bombarded with mass drivers so at least they can’t use it. The Empire hardly ever needs a reason to bombard a planet, and so it is done, and the Xont structure is unknowingly destroyed and its secrets along with it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For some reason you’ve steadily been over come with the idea human of superiority. In fact, you’ve been thinking a lot like Indoctrinator Salo and at this point your transformation is pretty much complete. You don’t even think about going into the village peacefully anymore, you fully intend to destroy it and enslave the survivors, just like you did last time. Humanity is destined to rule. + +“No prisoners.” You tell your team and charge into battle, it isn’t as easy as you thought though. +The Lizards somehow knew you were coming and they ambushed you and your team. Several of them fall into pits with either sharpened spikes or poisonous creatures at the bottom. While you’re temporarily caught off guard, you and Salo’s fanaticism rally your remaining troops to fight on shouting how the Lizards are no match for humanity. + +“ONWARD! FOR HUMANITY THE RIGHTFUL RULERS OF THE GALAXY! OUR DESTINY WILL NOT BE DENIED!” + +It works for the most part, the team begins to become inspired, except for two, Alyssa who didn’t need any encouragement to fight harder, but is showing signs of unhappiness at your new outlook on life. Tough. The other being LeFleur who finally broke down and ran. + +“TRAITOR!!!” Salo shouts and shoots LeFleur in the back like the coward he was. + +After the battle you have significantly less people with you. The entire Lizard village has been wiped out; the Lizards that were enslaved either ran off or were killed in the ensuing mayhem. Strangely the Elojin is still around. You half expected him to try to escape. He looks at the carnage that you wrought upon the village, and looks over at Salo, who’s busily pulling teeth from the dead Lizards to make some sort of necklace no doubt. + +“Well if you’re done playing with your scaly friends, the Xont building awaits.” + +The Elojin takes you and your remaining team a short distance, and there it is in all its glory. Its like nothing you’ve ever seen before, this is definitely Xont. You can feel it in your heart and the technology within shall be the Empire’s. You briefly daydream about finally being able to live out your original purpose of joining the Empire in the first place: To bring glory in HIS name. With this find, you’ll be able to do just that. Unfortunately that annoying Elojin begins talking again. + +“Well we’re here, now remember there’s some dangerous things lurking in there, I can tell you where I ran into them, and some of the interesting rooms I found that you should explore before I got chased out.” +> Keep him around +Despite Salo’s insistence, you make the decision that you shouldn’t kill the Elojin just yet. The Elojin looks at you in silence almost expecting to get shot, but quickly becomes talkative again when he realizes his life is going to be spared a few moments longer. + +“Okay be ABSOLUTELY quiet, those things are still in there, if you have to fight them let’s at least get into one of the rooms where you can shoot at them with less danger, a lot of them have narrow doorways for some reason.” +“Hold on there spot boy, what exactly are these things?” you ask +“I don’t know, but they’re large, vicious, and mindless and have a lot of tentacles.” +“Could they be Xont?” +“I doubt that, they’re far too animalistic. Maybe they’re some sort of genetic Xont experiment, who know? Let’s just not run into them!” + +With the Elojin in the lead you and your team follow as quietly as possible, soon the Elojin leads you to a room with a lot of strange looking computers. They have a look of being incredibly archaic yet very advanced. Buttons with bizarre symbols are all over the machines + +“Now I think this is a control room of some sort, I was meaning to come back here to study it more, but I was trying to map out the place first.” +“So what the hell do these things do?” +“You humans have those huge audio organs hanging from your heads, yet you seem to be unable to hear. I just said, I didn’t study the room, I was meaning to come back to it!” +“Enough of this Elojin’s insults! We have no further use for him!” Salo yells at the top of his lungs. + +“Look you can certainly kill me if you want, but I am somewhat familiar with Xont legends and such. I probably could figure out what all this exactly does, if you let me. You start pushing buttons at random and you could be asking for trouble.” + +The Elojin is obviously attempting to prolong his miserable life a little longer, despite the fact that he knows the inevitable is coming soon. Of course he also could be trying to set you up some how. He looks at you expectantly. +> Have the Elojin killed +You sense the treachery that lurks within this alien. He’s setting you up; well his silver tongue has only gotten him so far. + +“We humans have been learning things through trial and error for centuries, no reason to change now. Salo, shoot this spotty freak!” you say. +“Wa…” the Elojin doesn’t even finish before Salo melts half of his head with his plasma pistol. The Elojin slumps to the floor lifelessly. + +“Okay, now does anyone here know about Xont legends or read about any of that shit?” you ask your team. A relatively young trooper steps forward. It’s Private Dobbs. + +“Um, I read a few things when I was a kid, but I don’t know anything about this sir.” +“Well can’t you remember anything? Like what these symbols mean?” +“I suppose I could guess.” +“Dammit soldier, I can fucking guess! I’m asking you can you do better than guess?!” + +Before he can answer it appears that one of the inhabitants has finally tracked you down, and its as horrible looking as the Elojin described it. Tentacles, teeth, large and hungry. +It makes an ear piecing roar and attempts to enter the room, but is unable to get through, that doesn’t stop it attempting to lash at your team with its tentacles, who immediately open fire on it. + +Well you could help and let Dobbs study the computer, or you could just do it yourself and order Dobbs to help fight the abomination instead. +> Let Dobbs do it +“Figure out that machine, Dobbs!” you shout and go help the rest of your team. The creature’s tentacles are surprisingly long and are still doing a number on your team, its fortunate that being stuck in the doorway makes it a lot easier to fight, you’d hate to be surrounded by more than one of these things. After a combined effort of bullets, lasers, and plasma, the creature finally dies. Now you’ve got new problems, first of all the creature’s dead body is completely blocking the doorway, but worse, all the sound of battle only attracted more of its kind. + +You’re temporarily safe for now, as you know the creatures can’t get through the doorway, let alone with a corpse of one their own blocking it. They won’t go away though. In fact it sounds like they’ve started eating their dead buddy; eventually they’ll be able to make enough of an opening to attack again. + +Meanwhile Dobbs seems to have activated something. A wall slides open revealing a small line of silver robots. Their metallic glean is almost blinding even in this low lighting. Judging by their build and the wicked looking weapons they’re carrying, they were designed for battle, it also looks like they’ve never been used. They stand silent awaiting instructions. +> Ask Dobbs what he did +“Dobbs! What did you do?” +“Um I don’t really know, I just started pressing buttons and that happened.” +“Well turn them on and tell them to start blasting those tentacle monsters out there!” +“I don’t know how! I mean even if I do turn them on, what makes you think they won’t attack us? ” + +Dobb’s behavior begins to make Salo angry. + +“So you think it’s better to stay in here, trapped? You disgust me; your cowardice is that of an Elojin! Out of the way, the Emperor’s Will guides my hand!” + +Before you can stop Salo, he starts randomly pushing buttons. One of those buttons turns on the robots. Red lights flicker on in their eye sockets. + +Red lights then flicker on you and your team… + +“INTRUDERS!” metallic voice echo in unison. + +The battle is quick and bloody as the Silver Sentinels mow all of you down into a bloody mess. The last thing you see as you struggle to breathe is one of the Sentinels pointing its weapon at your head which against all odds, seems to be smiling.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Figure out that machine, Dobbs!” you shout and go help the rest of your team. The creature’s tentacles are surprisingly long and are still doing a number on your team, its fortunate that being stuck in the doorway makes it a lot easier to fight, you’d hate to be surrounded by more than one of these things. After a combined effort of bullets, lasers, and plasma, the creature finally dies. Now you’ve got new problems, first of all the creature’s dead body is completely blocking the doorway, but worse, all the sound of battle only attracted more of its kind. + +You’re temporarily safe for now, as you know the creatures can’t get through the doorway, let alone with a corpse of one their own blocking it. They won’t go away though. In fact it sounds like they’ve started eating their dead buddy; eventually they’ll be able to make enough of an opening to attack again. + +Meanwhile Dobbs seems to have activated something. A wall slides open revealing a small line of silver robots. Their metallic glean is almost blinding even in this low lighting. Judging by their build and the wicked looking weapons they’re carrying, they were designed for battle, it also looks like they’ve never been used. They stand silent awaiting instructions. +> Examine the robots closer +“Alyssa you and the rest keep an eye on that doorway, if those things try to get in again, you know what to do. Dobbs, don’t touch anything else in here.” You say and inspect the robots closer. +“Yes sir, but I should tell you, that we’re running out of ammo.” Alyssa remarks. +“Dammit, you heard the Captain! He didn’t ask you for your opinion you alien bitch! You should be lucky you’re even allowed to serve the Empire, and not destroyed like the non-human trash you are!” Salo rants. +“Salo, I serve the Captain, I’m loyal to him, not the Empire, and I’ve had just about all the abuse I’m going to take from you!” Alyssa says and points her weapon at Salo, catching him off guard. There’s no way he’ll be able to react in time, the rest of the team stands frozen, they’re trying to watch the doorway and this new situation at the same time. +You’ve never seen Alyssa lose her “cool” like this before. Granted this whole expedition has made everyone extremely irritable, but even under worse conditions than this, Alyssa has always been very calm. +> Let Alyssa shoot him +Salo, raises his weapon, and is struck down with a single bullet to the head. His fanatical rants end immediately as his body hits the floor. Alyssa looks at you, and you just nod. The rest of the team relaxes a little knowing that at least this situation has been diffused. + +You immediately pull out the coins you took from the Elojin earlier and inspect them, put them on the floor, take Salo’s plasma pistol and melt them into nothingness. This damn Xont quest you’ve been on has fucked up your mind, between the Elojin’s syrupy words, Salo’s rants, and the overall strange feeling you had since you first got those coins, not to mention this PLACE itself, you only now are starting feel like yourself. + +There’s still the matter of getting out of here though, fortunately Dobbs may have found a way to do that. + +“Um, sir? I think I remembered what some of these symbols were supposed to mean, I think I can figured out how we can turn them on without them attacking us. I remember a Xont legend about “Silver Sentinels”, and that’s what these things look like. I guess they were created by the Xont primarily to act as guards for scientists, if we don’t look like a threat then they shouldn’t attack us. In fact they’ll probably start attacking those things lurking outside.” +“Yeah, but we aren’t Xont, won’t they attack us anyway?” +“I don’t know, but didn’t the Xont supposedly have a lot of different races working for them? Maybe the Sentinels will think we’re just a harmless subject race of the Xont” +“So what do we do to look harmless?” +“Drop all our guns.” + +Everyone isn’t too enthusiastic about that idea! However, it sounds somewhat plausible. Scientists aren’t usually known for their combat abilities and they probably weren’t running around with guns because of the Sentinels, and thus weren’t considered a threat. You can only hope the Sentinels still don’t perceive you as a threat even without guns. Alyssa is particularly skilled in unarmed combat. +“Let’s do it. It might be our only chance. Drop your weapons everyone. We’ll either live or die, either way; it’ll be quicker than waiting in here for certain death.” + +Your team reluctantly drops their weapons as Dobbs presses a few buttons on the computer. Red lights flicker on in the Sentinels’ eye sockets. + +“SCANNING…SCANNING…ALERT! GENETIC EXPERIMENTS FROM LAB 4 HAVE ESCAPED! THREAT LEVEL 10! TERMINATE HOSTILES!” their metallic voices say in unison. + +The Sentinels move quickly to the doorway and begin to open fire on the feeding creatures. You can see the creatures fight back, but whatever the Sentinels are made out of must be strong indeed. Soon the battle moves far enough from the doorway, and you can hear the Sentinels hunting down the rest of the beasts. You climb over the dead creature in the doorway and take a quick look only to see more dead monsters. The Sentinels do their jobs very efficiently. + +You could take this opportunity to try to escape or explore a bit more. +> Escape +Having just shaken the strange feelings that have been plaguing you (And to a certain extent your team) you don’t want to tempt fate and order everyone to grab their weapons and get the hell out of here before the Sentinels start hunting you. + +You and your team hastily run back to the entrance, hoping not to run into anything on the way. As it turns out, you do run into something when you get outside, namely an Elojin ambush. + +You get shot in the shoulder before taking one of them out. The rest of your team not far behind comes out firing; the Elojin team is small and wasn’t expecting to meet such heavy resistance, when they see they don’t have the advantage they thought they would they start to run. It doesn’t help them though; they’re cut down in flight. +“Fucking Elojin, I knew he was going to try to set us up somehow!” you mutter, clutching your arm. +Still eager to put as much distance as you can between you and the Xont structure, you order everyone to head back to the Lizard village you destroyed earlier. + +After everyone is settled in and bandaged up, you decide to make a speech. + +“Alright, what happened today was a major fuck up, and we did a bunch unnecessary reckless shit, but worst of all I ended up getting a lot of you killed for no good reason. I could blame it on a lot of factors, but I won’t, I take full responsibility for it. All I can ask is that you forgive me somehow.” + +Your team looks a little bewildered by your speech. + +“Sir, how was today any different than any other day? You’re always ordering us to do dangerous shit. Today a lot of us just were unlucky. It happens. But you were still there along with us the entire way just like always, and you got the rest of us out alive.” a trooper remarks. + +The rest of your team agrees, with that remark. You’re a little surprised, but then not really. You continue your speech. + +“Well then I’m glad you’re all behind me, because we’re going to have to make up a story when the Empire comes here in a few months. Now this is what’s going to happen…” + +Having experienced the temporary weird hold the Xont had on you, you decide that using anything that may lie inside the building won’t do anyone any good. You tell your team that the Xont structure must be destroyed, and it’ll be reported that the planet is useless and too hostile for humans to be of any long term use, it will also be reported that the Elojin are attempting to use the planet as a secret weapons developing base and should be bombarded into atoms. You feel slightly bad about LaFleur’s needless death, so you propose that it be mentioned that he died valiantly against the Elojin who had ambushed him. Salo’s death will also be attributed to the Elojin. + +The rest of the time goes by without incident, you basically stay in the village until the Empire ship comes, at which point you tell your story. Considering you blame everything on the Elojin, your story really isn’t questioned. The Empire never needs that much of an excuse to bombard entire planets with mass drivers, so the Xont structure along with everything else on the planet is destroyed. You and the rest of your team are sent on your next mission, where you’ll also meet your replacements for the people you lost. + +On your way, you think about what exactly made you break your temporary madness and it was Alyssa’s words of how her loyalty was to you and not the Empire. These words struck home, making you realize that your own loyalty is to your team, not the Empire. Of course you “serve” the Empire, but the people under your command…that’s who matter.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Salo, raises his weapon, and is struck down with a single bullet to the head. His fanatical rants end immediately as his body hits the floor. Alyssa looks at you, and you just nod. The rest of the team relaxes a little knowing that at least this situation has been diffused. + +You immediately pull out the coins you took from the Elojin earlier and inspect them, put them on the floor, take Salo’s plasma pistol and melt them into nothingness. This damn Xont quest you’ve been on has fucked up your mind, between the Elojin’s syrupy words, Salo’s rants, and the overall strange feeling you had since you first got those coins, not to mention this PLACE itself, you only now are starting feel like yourself. + +There’s still the matter of getting out of here though, fortunately Dobbs may have found a way to do that. + +“Um, sir? I think I remembered what some of these symbols were supposed to mean, I think I can figured out how we can turn them on without them attacking us. I remember a Xont legend about “Silver Sentinels”, and that’s what these things look like. I guess they were created by the Xont primarily to act as guards for scientists, if we don’t look like a threat then they shouldn’t attack us. In fact they’ll probably start attacking those things lurking outside.” +“Yeah, but we aren’t Xont, won’t they attack us anyway?” +“I don’t know, but didn’t the Xont supposedly have a lot of different races working for them? Maybe the Sentinels will think we’re just a harmless subject race of the Xont” +“So what do we do to look harmless?” +“Drop all our guns.” + +Everyone isn’t too enthusiastic about that idea! However, it sounds somewhat plausible. Scientists aren’t usually known for their combat abilities and they probably weren’t running around with guns because of the Sentinels, and thus weren’t considered a threat. You can only hope the Sentinels still don’t perceive you as a threat even without guns. Alyssa is particularly skilled in unarmed combat. +“Let’s do it. It might be our only chance. Drop your weapons everyone. We’ll either live or die, either way; it’ll be quicker than waiting in here for certain death.” + +Your team reluctantly drops their weapons as Dobbs presses a few buttons on the computer. Red lights flicker on in the Sentinels’ eye sockets. + +“SCANNING…SCANNING…ALERT! GENETIC EXPERIMENTS FROM LAB 4 HAVE ESCAPED! THREAT LEVEL 10! TERMINATE HOSTILES!” their metallic voices say in unison. + +The Sentinels move quickly to the doorway and begin to open fire on the feeding creatures. You can see the creatures fight back, but whatever the Sentinels are made out of must be strong indeed. Soon the battle moves far enough from the doorway, and you can hear the Sentinels hunting down the rest of the beasts. You climb over the dead creature in the doorway and take a quick look only to see more dead monsters. The Sentinels do their jobs very efficiently. + +You could take this opportunity to try to escape or explore a bit more. +> Explore +Despite the weird feelings you’ve just shaken loose, you still think that this shouldn’t be a total loss; there are still things you could use and find for the Empire; however you realize you should minimize the risk. + +“Alright there’s no sense in all of us getting killed. So, me, Alyssa and Dobbs we’ll stay and explore the rest of this place. The rest of you take your guns and head back to exit as quickly as possible and wait at that Lizard village. If the Sentinels see you walking around with weapons, you know they’ll attack, so don’t linger.” +“But what about you sir? The Sentinels will attack you, if you stay!” a trooper asks. +“Well WE aren’t going to be carrying them; if we come across something else that’s hostile we’ll just have to rely on what we learned in boot camp and our trusty combat knife. Now get out of here, that’s an order!” + +As the rest of your team leaves, you, Dobbs, and Alyssa are left to ponder what to do next. +> Explore this room more +There’s plenty in this room that still needs to be examined, besides you’ll probably be a lot safer here. Alyssa watches the doorway for anything that might come through. You look around the room, but other than the machinery and computers already in the room, you don’t find anything else. You decide to go see if Dobbs has found out anymore information. + +“So, you remember anything else from reading all those Xont legends?” you ask Dobbs. +“Not really sir. The only thing I can determine is room is obviously a control room of some sort, and this entire building was some sort of research facility. I managed to turn on the computer screens, looked at a bunch of schematics and maps and gone through these logs, but I can’t read any of the language. I can guess on some things, but I’m still nervous about pressing more buttons at random, I don’t think we’re getting any further in here.” +> Go explore the rest of the structure +“Alright, let’s explore the rest of this place, let’s try to avoid any confrontation with anything though, we’re walking around without any firepower.” + +You, Alyssa, and Dobbs go back into the darkened hallways, trying to remain quiet as possible. You can still hear sounds of battle echo, as the Sentinels are still trying to hunt down whatever left over failed experiments those tentacle things are. + +Most of the rooms you encounter seem to be normal quarters, presumably where the scientists here slept. Most the rooms are either in disarray or almost bare, you don’t find anything of interest. It looks like this structure was abandoned while it was probably still in use, you get the impression it was due to those experiments that the Sentinels are currently exterminating. Looks like someone didn’t activate them in time, makes you wonder why this structure just wasn’t re-taken though. + +“Sir, I don’t think there’s anything of any importance here, we should just leave.” Dobbs continues to advise. + +Dobbs must really not like it here; you don’t think you’ve ever heard him complain like this before, seeing as you know he keeps his opinions to himself for the most part as far as personal “comfort” is concerned. Alyssa of course is willing to do whatever you’re up for doing. +> Continue to explore +“Dobbs you’re starting to sound like Lieutenant LaFleur, now come on; we’ve still got some ground to cover.” +“Sir with all due respect, I am not. And using LaFleur as a reference to compare me to, so close after his death which you were responsible for makes me suspicious.” +“Watch your mouth private!” Alyssa reprimands. +“Excuse me private!?” you add. +“I’m sorry sir perhaps that was out of line I know it was Salo who directly shot LaFleur, but sir you HAVE been acting erratically ever since we’ve been on this damn mission! I guess we all have. I thought you’d shaken it after you shot Salo, but you’re still acting a little obsessed with this whole Xont thing. This place still emanates some sort of weird power. Maybe some things are better left unexplored; we need to get the hell out of here for all our sakes!” + +Dobbs does make a few good points. +> Ignore Dobbs +“While I guess it’s good that you’re speaking your mind, and looking out for our well being, I feel fine Dobbs, I’m well aware of the stuff you’re talking about, but…” +“FOOL! I tried to warn you!” Dobbs yells, pulls out his knife and attacks! + +Dobbs catches you off guard and tackles you to the floor raising his knife to thrust down on your head. Alyssa immediately stabs him repeatedly in the back, but whatever the hell is driving him, has made him unfazed by normal pain. He temporary takes his attention off of you and slams Alyssa into the wall. You take the advantage and with one quick twist you snap his neck. As his head flops like a dead fish, his body soon follows. You get up panting. + +“Shit. Well someone was being influenced by something!” you remark. “Sergeant, have you been feeling anything strange, because if you have, let me know!” +“Not really sir, I felt a heighten state of irritability earlier, but that dissipated after you shot Salo. My thoughts have basically been the same though; my people have very disciplined minds as you’re well aware.” +You smile a bit at this remark, which you know wasn’t made out arrogance, but merely fact. Alyssa continues. “Whatever took a hold of Dobbs seems to have been trying to guide us to leave. Maybe we’re getting close to finding something.” +“Maybe, but even if we’re okay now, maybe we should get out of here.” You say. +> Play it safe and leave +You decide to play it safe and leave. Alyssa doesn’t show it, but you can tell she looks a bit relieved. You manage to leave the building without any incident. There are lots of dead tentacle creatures, but where the Sentinels are you have no idea, and you’re not really in any hurry to find out. When you get outside you see some dead bodies of Elojin and a few of your own team members. Apparently the Elojin were waiting in ambush and underestimated your numerical advantage. You hope the rest of your team made it back to the village safe. + +When you get there, they look relieved to see you. You all begin to exchange information. You all are pretty much in agreement, that you all were overcome by something during this whole “quest”, whether it was some sort of ancient mind control device that is still operational, or the Xont themselves, you don’t know. You do know that you were driven there, yet when you broke the “hold” you were being driven away, as if you were perceived to be more of a threat. Something in there is important and the place does bear more exploration, but its not going to be your team that does it. Too much has been lost and it’s obvious you aren’t really equipped to explore the place without placing yourselves in unnecessary danger. + +You and your team spend the remaining time in the village, where you can stay within a safe proximity to the Xont structure, without getting too close. The rest of your stay passes relatively quietly. When the Empire ship comes, you explain everything to your superiors, with the exception of shooting Salo which you change the story a little bit. You state he was over come by whatever madness the structure was emanating and drew his weapon on you, causing you to have to defend yourself. You go on to explain Xont structure and severely warn of the dangers of the place. + +Your superiors have a mixed reaction to your tale. On one hand they’re pleased that you discovered this find of the millennium, but are suspicious of this “mind control business” you’re reporting. Some wonder if you still could be influenced, and shooting an Empire Indoctrinator doesn’t really help either. They don’t really want to execute you for mere suspicion though, not to mention you still might have questions they need answering. + +Ultimately you’re taken off duty and put in a military hospital under observation for months. The rest of your team is as well, but they make sure to keep you all separated from each other. It’s a relatively unpleasant time for you. While you spend your time under going tests and interrogation, the Empire sent a better prepared team to the Xont structure to extract whatever they could find inside. Unfortunately even with the preparation, something still goes wrong. Chaos starts to ensue throughout the Empire, and how it spreads so quickly is unknown. You hear things every now and then, but you’re kept mainly in the dark, but even you hear about the civil war that erupts. + +It’s during this time that someone comes for you as you sit in your cell. It’s Alyssa! + +“Sir, the place has been abandoned we should get out of here and try to find a ship, I’ve located a few of the other members of our team as well.” She says as if you’ve never lost contact. +“Well I can see you’ve thought out the escape plan. You have any idea what to do afterwards though? I’m sure you’ve heard that there’s a civil war going on.” +“That’s up to you Captain, I’m just here to set you free and follow you.” +“Well I don’t know if I’m still a captain, Alyssa, you can probably call me by my given name. No need for formalities anymore. As for what we’re going to do, well I suppose we can figure that out on the escape, maybe we should just go find a quiet part of the galaxy and get the hell away from all this shit.” +“Whatever you decide, I’ll be there.” Alyssa says. There’s something definitely comforting about that. + +As you make your way to your first steps to escape, you think if the Empire had had more soldiers like Alyssa there wouldn’t have been a civil war.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“While I guess it’s good that you’re speaking your mind, and looking out for our well being, I feel fine Dobbs, I’m well aware of the stuff you’re talking about, but…” +“FOOL! I tried to warn you!” Dobbs yells, pulls out his knife and attacks! + +Dobbs catches you off guard and tackles you to the floor raising his knife to thrust down on your head. Alyssa immediately stabs him repeatedly in the back, but whatever the hell is driving him, has made him unfazed by normal pain. He temporary takes his attention off of you and slams Alyssa into the wall. You take the advantage and with one quick twist you snap his neck. As his head flops like a dead fish, his body soon follows. You get up panting. + +“Shit. Well someone was being influenced by something!” you remark. “Sergeant, have you been feeling anything strange, because if you have, let me know!” +“Not really sir, I felt a heighten state of irritability earlier, but that dissipated after you shot Salo. My thoughts have basically been the same though; my people have very disciplined minds as you’re well aware.” +You smile a bit at this remark, which you know wasn’t made out arrogance, but merely fact. Alyssa continues. “Whatever took a hold of Dobbs seems to have been trying to guide us to leave. Maybe we’re getting close to finding something.” +“Maybe, but even if we’re okay now, maybe we should get out of here.” You say. +> Soldier on +You’re in it this far, might as well explore the rest. Soon you come to an elevator; you and Alyssa look at each other and enter it. Anything could be lurking down there. You start to breathe in and out trying to calm yourself, while Alyssa employs a quieter calming technique of closing her eyes and preparing herself. + +The elevator door opens and you both exit. + +After much exploration, there’s nothing down here! In fact there’s no indication that anything is living down here, just a bunch of devices, and research notes that you don’t understand, but would be useful to the Empire if they ever got there hands on it. You don’t really want to mess around with anything down here, not after all the mind control shit you were putting up with before. You and Alyssa leave for the ground floor again. + +Upon reaching it, you see the Silver Sentinels, but fortunately they don’t attack since you still aren’t carrying your guns. They just patrol right past you, but you don’t want to risk it, so you hurry out as fast as you can. The outside of the structure has the scenes of a small skirmish, dead Elojin lie on the ground as well as a few of your team. Apparently they figured you all would get killed inside and they’d pick up the pieces. + +Reaching the village your team looks relieved to see you come back. You take the opportunity to say a few words. + +“Alright team, all of us and me especially were under some fucked up influence, not sure what it was, but it wasn’t good. Now there was a lot of stuff done, that doesn’t need to be reported, so I’m hoping you’re all willing to back me up on the story.” +“We’re with you sir.” one of them pipes up. +“We always will be.” Alyssa adds. +“Alright this is what we’re going to do…” + +When the Empire ships arrive, you explain a story about Paradise being a hostile world holding only death. You feel bad about LaFleur’s needless death so you also add that he died bravely in combat and should be posthumously rewarded. You also say the Elojin were attempting to use the place as a secret spy training camp, and state that mass driver bombardment of the planet should be in order. Your superiors have no reason to disbelieve you, and take your advice. Paradise is laid to waste and the Xont structure will never be discovered. You’re sent on your next mission where replacements will meet you. + +On your way there, Alyssa as approaches you. + +“Why’d you do it Captain? Why didn’t you reveal the Xont structure? You might’ve gotten promoted or even better, assigned to a different command. + +“Because it would’ve just made things worse. The Empire’s survived this long, it’s not going to fall anytime soon. I’d rather live with the way things are, than risk an uncertain future. Besides I don’t want to leave you anymore than you want to leave me.” + +Alyssa smiles at this comment, a rarity that you wish she’d do more often. + +Of course in time you do see it a lot more.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Dobbs you’re starting to sound like Lieutenant LaFleur, now come on; we’ve still got some ground to cover.” +“Sir with all due respect, I am not. And using LaFleur as a reference to compare me to, so close after his death which you were responsible for makes me suspicious.” +“Watch your mouth private!” Alyssa reprimands. +“Excuse me private!?” you add. +“I’m sorry sir perhaps that was out of line I know it was Salo who directly shot LaFleur, but sir you HAVE been acting erratically ever since we’ve been on this damn mission! I guess we all have. I thought you’d shaken it after you shot Salo, but you’re still acting a little obsessed with this whole Xont thing. This place still emanates some sort of weird power. Maybe some things are better left unexplored; we need to get the hell out of here for all our sakes!” + +Dobbs does make a few good points. +> Listen to Dobbs +You decide to listen to Private Dobbs, exploring this place probably isn’t the safest thing to do given that you’ve only just shaken the weird mind control you were experiencing earlier. You all head for the exit, which is fortunately without incident. You encounter some dead bodies of Elojin and some of your team when you get outside. Looks like your team won, you guess the Elojin were hoping you’d be easy pickings after coming out of the place. + +When you get to the Lizard village the rest of the team looks relieved to see you. You all exchange information. You’re unsure what to do about the Xont structure though, you’re tempted to go back in, but you decide that you should probably just stick around and just report your findings to the Empire which can send in a better prepared team. In the mean time, you spend the rest of your stay at the Lizard village. It’s uneventful until one day Dobbs comes up missing for roll call, this is followed by a huge explosion later during a search for him. The shockwave of it, makes you almost think you’re being bombarded from above, but after it dies down you realize it was the Xont structure. + +You and your team immediately head over to where it stood and it is completely gone. Nothing but a gigantic crater exists. Whatever useful information it contained will remain a mystery. + +The disappearance of Dobbs makes you come to the conclusion of either one of two things, either he was under the influence of something that didn’t want you uncover any Xont secrets and he snuck off to activate some sort of self-destruct mechanism. Or less likely, he wasn’t under any influence, but decided that for the good of the Empire, the Xont structure needed to be destroyed so it couldn’t possibly cause any trouble like it did with you and your team. + +When the Empire ship arrives you decide to leave out the whole incident with the Xont structure, your superiors would only be mad at you for losing such a find. You report that you suffered casualties with Elojin and native forces. You also add that Private Dobbs should be honored post humorously for his bravery in battle. Finally you go on to report you didn’t find anything of any use for the Empire on the planet. + +Your superiors nod and dismiss you. They write Paradise off as a low priority and not worth colonizing or even keeping an outpost on. Eventually you’re sent on your next mission, which is far away from Paradise. You wonder though if you’ll get another chance to discover something on this planet though. It is a big galaxy after all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Dobbs you’re starting to sound like Lieutenant LaFleur, now come on; we’ve still got some ground to cover.” +“Sir with all due respect, I am not. And using LaFleur as a reference to compare me to, so close after his death which you were responsible for makes me suspicious.” +“Watch your mouth private!” Alyssa reprimands. +“Excuse me private!?” you add. +“I’m sorry sir perhaps that was out of line I know it was Salo who directly shot LaFleur, but sir you HAVE been acting erratically ever since we’ve been on this damn mission! I guess we all have. I thought you’d shaken it after you shot Salo, but you’re still acting a little obsessed with this whole Xont thing. This place still emanates some sort of weird power. Maybe some things are better left unexplored; we need to get the hell out of here for all our sakes!” + +Dobbs does make a few good points. +> Feeling different? (Current thoughts) +You don’t feel any different, actually you feel like yourself, more so than you were previously. True being in this place gives you a feeling of unease, but you’re not really having any strange thoughts, like you were before, at least you don’t think you are.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There’s plenty in this room that still needs to be examined, besides you’ll probably be a lot safer here. Alyssa watches the doorway for anything that might come through. You look around the room, but other than the machinery and computers already in the room, you don’t find anything else. You decide to go see if Dobbs has found out anymore information. + +“So, you remember anything else from reading all those Xont legends?” you ask Dobbs. +“Not really sir. The only thing I can determine is room is obviously a control room of some sort, and this entire building was some sort of research facility. I managed to turn on the computer screens, looked at a bunch of schematics and maps and gone through these logs, but I can’t read any of the language. I can guess on some things, but I’m still nervous about pressing more buttons at random, I don’t think we’re getting any further in here.” +> Continue pressing buttons +You can tell Dobbs is getting skittish about messing around with the machine, so you decide to take over. +“Um sir, I really don’t think you should start pressing buttons…” +“Quiet private, I’m taking the risks here…well what’s this?” + +Your ingenious process of pressing buttons until something happens has activated a hologram of some sort. The hologram image is that of a humanoid. You’ve never seen what race it’s based on though. + +“Xgeehti! Sathayi egawah tylageti!” the hologram says. You don’t know what that means, but it looks agitated though. +“Sir, we should get out of here, this hologram might be activating self defense systems!” +“Lagxet… Language process identified….Who are you people? I don’t recognize your species, are you yet another genetically designed slave for the Xont? They must be losing their touch, because you look pretty unimpressive. Though that blue female looks like she shows promise. And why have I been off line for so long? Wasn’t the outbreak under control?” +“Outbreak?” you ask. +“Yes! The outbreak! I told them that they should take special precautions with the new germ weapon they were working on, but do they listen? No! They’re the galaxy rulers, they think they’re invincible, they know better than some hologram. Hey what happened to this place?” the hologram scans the dead bodies in the room and the carcass in the doorway and starts to realize that things have changed. “Erm, are the Xont still in charge of this facility?” +“No, this is an ancient ruin for all intents and purposes. The Xont have long since disappeared. And up until now, they were considered a legend of some sort.” You reply. +“Oh I assure you they were very real. Though I can honestly say, they were hardly worthy of legend status. Hmm, I guess now I know why I was off line for so long then.” The hologram states seemingly unworried about how much time has passed. “What race are you?” the hologram asks. +“I’m human.” +“What a dreadful name.” +“SIR, we need to get out of here NOW!” Dobbs says and grabs you. +“Private Dobbs, you will calm down this instant!” Alyssa shouts back at him. +He looks very distressed; he’s convinced that staying here will result in something very bad.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Despite the weird feelings you’ve just shaken loose, you still think that this shouldn’t be a total loss; there are still things you could use and find for the Empire; however you realize you should minimize the risk. + +“Alright there’s no sense in all of us getting killed. So, me, Alyssa and Dobbs we’ll stay and explore the rest of this place. The rest of you take your guns and head back to exit as quickly as possible and wait at that Lizard village. If the Sentinels see you walking around with weapons, you know they’ll attack, so don’t linger.” +“But what about you sir? The Sentinels will attack you, if you stay!” a trooper asks. +“Well WE aren’t going to be carrying them; if we come across something else that’s hostile we’ll just have to rely on what we learned in boot camp and our trusty combat knife. Now get out of here, that’s an order!” + +As the rest of your team leaves, you, Dobbs, and Alyssa are left to ponder what to do next. +> Explore elsewhere +"Let's explore the rest of this place and come back here later." you say. + +Just as you exit the room you suddenly feel several sharp pains in your back! Dobbs has just stabbed you repeatedly! + +"YOU'll NEVER LEARN THE SECRETS OF THE XONT! HAHAHAHA!" he screams, before Alyssa breaks his neck. + +You'll never exactly know what happened, but all you do know is Dobbs was right, you'll never learn the secrets of the Xont as the adventure is over for you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Alyssa you and the rest keep an eye on that doorway, if those things try to get in again, you know what to do. Dobbs, don’t touch anything else in here.” You say and inspect the robots closer. +“Yes sir, but I should tell you, that we’re running out of ammo.” Alyssa remarks. +“Dammit, you heard the Captain! He didn’t ask you for your opinion you alien bitch! You should be lucky you’re even allowed to serve the Empire, and not destroyed like the non-human trash you are!” Salo rants. +“Salo, I serve the Captain, I’m loyal to him, not the Empire, and I’ve had just about all the abuse I’m going to take from you!” Alyssa says and points her weapon at Salo, catching him off guard. There’s no way he’ll be able to react in time, the rest of the team stands frozen, they’re trying to watch the doorway and this new situation at the same time. +You’ve never seen Alyssa lose her “cool” like this before. Granted this whole expedition has made everyone extremely irritable, but even under worse conditions than this, Alyssa has always been very calm. +> Shoot Alyssa +You don’t hesitate, you shoot Alyssa. She falls, grabbing on to a nearby table and looks at you once in disbelief with a hurt expression, one you’ve never seen her display before. +“I…never…thought that you’d…” + +A second shot is fired by Salo killing her and ending whatever last words she was going to say. + +“Captain, my apologies for questioning your loyalty to humanity before. I see I was wrong, I thank you for saving my life.” Salo remarks. + +You immediately shake the strange feelings that have been invading your mind again. Something was attempting to make you weak. Alyssa was the last alien influence holding you back from achieving complete confidence in human superiority. By getting rid of her, you no longer have any impediments of your goal. The Xont technology WILL be taken for the Empire! + +There’s still the matter of getting out of here though, fortunately Dobbs may have found a way to do that. + +“Um, sir? I think I remembered what some of these symbols were supposed to mean, I think I can figured out how we can turn them on without them attacking us. I remember a Xont legend about “Silver Sentinels”, and that’s what these things look like. I guess they were created by the Xont primarily to act as guards for scientists, if we don’t look like a threat then they shouldn’t attack us. In fact they’ll probably start attacking those things lurking outside.” +“Then DO IT!” +“We have to look harmless, if they detect us holding guns, we’ll be perceived as a threat as well.” +“So what do we do to look harmless?” +“Drop all our guns.” + +You aren’t enthusiastic about that idea, but Salo displaying a slightly different side of himself, says as long as the will of the Emperor is guiding you all, you have nothing to fear. The destiny of humanity is inevitable. You acknowledge that indeed humanity is going to succeed this day. + +“Let’s do it, drop your weapons everyone, and the Emperor’s Will, will protect us.” + +Your team reluctantly drops their weapons as Dobbs presses a few buttons on the computer. Red lights flicker on in the Sentinels’ eye sockets. + +“SCANNING…SCANNING…ALERT! GENETIC EXPERIMENTS FROM LAB 4 HAVE ESCAPED! THREAT LEVEL 10! TERMINATE HOSTILES!” their metallic voices say in unison. + +The Sentinels move quickly to the doorway and begin to open fire on the feeding creatures. You can see the creatures fight back, but whatever the Sentinels are made out of must be strong indeed. Soon the battle moves far enough from the doorway, and you can hear the Sentinels hunting down the rest of the abominations. You climb over the dead creature in the doorway and take a quick look only to see more dead monsters. The Sentinels do their jobs very efficiently. + +You could take this opportunity to try to escape or explore a bit more. +> Escape +You decide that this place would be better explored with a better equipped team. You’ll secure it from anyone else attempting to go inside, but you don’t have the manpower or firepower to best serve the Empire’s interests. When the pick up ship comes you’ll report your findings. + +In the mean time you tell your team to pick up their weapons, head for the exit as quickly as possible and spend the rest of your time here back at the Lizard village nearby. When you get outside you’re ambushed by a small Elojin team, but they aren’t any match for you, the cowards run as soon as they realize they’re outnumbered. Their running doesn’t help them, Salo takes special care to shoot crippling shots, rather than outright killing them, he then takes special delight of dragging them back to the Lizard village to extract more information out of them. He doesn’t get too much as they don’t know too much, you don’t think that matters to him though. + +After all the Elojin have finally died of their wounds, the rest of your stay here passes without incident, you order patrols around the structure, but nothing ever tries to enter it and nothing ever comes out. + +When the Empire ship comes, you report your findings. Your superiors are pleased and say they will take it from here. You’re a little disappointed, you thought maybe they’d let you lead another team in seeing as you found it, but they say you’re needed elsewhere, and the Empire always knows best. They give you a medal and some accolades, but that’s about it. + +The Xont technology that’s extracted from the building is eventually applied in fantastic ways. The Empire easily begins to turn the balance to their favor. A gripping xenophobia runs rampant throughout the Empire as it becomes even less tolerant of alien species, seeing them as being unfit to even exist. This eventually leads to the unprecedented alliance between the Krik, Mazatt and Elojin who attempt to fight back, other aliens start rallying to their banner as well. The Human Empire becomes the most feared and hated galactic superpower since…well the Xont. + +As for you, after your tour on Paradise, the rest of your career was unspectacular. You remained a glorified Empire scout, until the some worlds started revolting against the Empire’s policy of exterminating aliens. At that time you’re relegated to a counter-terrorist command. It’s on one of these worlds where you meet a suitable fate. + +While storming a terrorist hideout, you’re shot in the back by one of its leaders by surprise; you look up and see a blue girl that looks similar to Alyssa. You almost think it is her, but then again they all look alike to you. + +“You can’t win…the Empire will survive…” you say and then she fires another shot ensuring that you won’t.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You don’t hesitate, you shoot Alyssa. She falls, grabbing on to a nearby table and looks at you once in disbelief with a hurt expression, one you’ve never seen her display before. +“I…never…thought that you’d…” + +A second shot is fired by Salo killing her and ending whatever last words she was going to say. + +“Captain, my apologies for questioning your loyalty to humanity before. I see I was wrong, I thank you for saving my life.” Salo remarks. + +You immediately shake the strange feelings that have been invading your mind again. Something was attempting to make you weak. Alyssa was the last alien influence holding you back from achieving complete confidence in human superiority. By getting rid of her, you no longer have any impediments of your goal. The Xont technology WILL be taken for the Empire! + +There’s still the matter of getting out of here though, fortunately Dobbs may have found a way to do that. + +“Um, sir? I think I remembered what some of these symbols were supposed to mean, I think I can figured out how we can turn them on without them attacking us. I remember a Xont legend about “Silver Sentinels”, and that’s what these things look like. I guess they were created by the Xont primarily to act as guards for scientists, if we don’t look like a threat then they shouldn’t attack us. In fact they’ll probably start attacking those things lurking outside.” +“Then DO IT!” +“We have to look harmless, if they detect us holding guns, we’ll be perceived as a threat as well.” +“So what do we do to look harmless?” +“Drop all our guns.” + +You aren’t enthusiastic about that idea, but Salo displaying a slightly different side of himself, says as long as the will of the Emperor is guiding you all, you have nothing to fear. The destiny of humanity is inevitable. You acknowledge that indeed humanity is going to succeed this day. + +“Let’s do it, drop your weapons everyone, and the Emperor’s Will, will protect us.” + +Your team reluctantly drops their weapons as Dobbs presses a few buttons on the computer. Red lights flicker on in the Sentinels’ eye sockets. + +“SCANNING…SCANNING…ALERT! GENETIC EXPERIMENTS FROM LAB 4 HAVE ESCAPED! THREAT LEVEL 10! TERMINATE HOSTILES!” their metallic voices say in unison. + +The Sentinels move quickly to the doorway and begin to open fire on the feeding creatures. You can see the creatures fight back, but whatever the Sentinels are made out of must be strong indeed. Soon the battle moves far enough from the doorway, and you can hear the Sentinels hunting down the rest of the abominations. You climb over the dead creature in the doorway and take a quick look only to see more dead monsters. The Sentinels do their jobs very efficiently. + +You could take this opportunity to try to escape or explore a bit more. +> Explore +There’s no way you’re going to not explore this place! It’s your duty, and one you are going to fulfill! You order all your team to pick up their weapons, and that you’re going to explore this place. + +“But sir! The Silver Sentinels are still wandering around, and they’ll attack us if they perceive us as a threat!” Dobbs exclaims. +“And what the fuck of it? We’ll blow those archaic Xont automatons back to the junkheap if they attack us. Besides we’ll be better prepared for them now, they’ll likely be weakened by fighting with those abominations and as servants of the Empire our cause is just and our destiny is certain. Now no more of this cowardice soldier, we’ve got a job to do!” +> Explore this room more +You order your team to start searching every inch of this room. They all comply except for Dobbs who for some reason is still questioning your orders. +“Sir I really think we should leave. This place is having a strange affect on all of us and you in general.” +“Private, your lack of bravery sickens me! Everyone else is doing what they’re supposed to except you! Perhaps it is YOU, who is under a strange influence!” +“Let me kill this unbeliever Captain! Its obvious his heart is not with the Empire!” Salo adds. + +The rest of your team starts calling for Dobb’s blood as well, sensing he’s outnumbered and in immediate danger, he quickly changes his tune. + +“Forgive my weakness sir; I was just concerned about your welfare and the team.” +“Let ME worry about that Dobbs! Now figure out the rest of those controls on that fucking machine!” you snarl. + +Dobbs complies and begins pressing buttons; it looks like he’s doing it randomly, but your heightened state of paranoia causes you to be suspicious again. He’s up to something, you know he is! + +“Dobbs what the hell are you doing, over there?” +“Oh just trying to figure out how to TURN THE PEST CONTROL SYSTEM ON! DIE IN THE NAME OF THE XONT! YOU LOWLY INSECTS!” +“Oh shit!” you say as you see some sort of turret come out of the ceiling! It starts swiveling around and firing on all in its path! Some of your team members are killed in this cowardly sneak attack. You duck for cover along with many of your team, Private Dobbs runs for the exit laughing manically. You’re all too busy shooting at the turret, to fire at him. After destroying it, you assess the situation. All the gunplay ended up destroying the machine Dobbs activated, so that’s useless now. + +“The damn heretic must be brought to justice!” Salo exclaims. +“He will.” You say. “Alright we got a new mission, everyone pair up and hunt the bastard down, he’s probably still in here somewhere. Don’t forget though, we’re still exploring this place, so make a note of what you find. Kill anything not human.” + +You pair up with Salo and start searching. Most of the rooms you find seem to be normal quarters, presumably for whatever aliens slept here. Most the rooms are either in disarray or almost bare, you don’t find anything of interest or Dobbs. You can still hear sounds of battle echoing though, the Sentinels are being very efficient of hunting those tentacle beasts, you know it won’t be long before they start attacking you, but you’re confident you’ll be able to take them. + +Eventually you come to some sort of elevator; it looks like it only goes down. You doubt if Dobbs went down there seeing as the elevator would’ve still been on the lower level if he’d used it, but you’ve got others looking for him, perhaps you should attempt to check out the other level. +> Continue to hunt for Dobbs +You shake the odd feelings you have and decide to continue looking for Dobbs. You and Salo continue to hunt down the heretic. You then start hearing gunfire, followed by the screams of your troops. The Silver Sentinels have finished their extermination of the tentacled beasts and have now started on your team. Scream after scream echo throughout the empty halls. + +“Weaklings! They dishonor the Empire by dying so easily!” you mutter to yourself. After this mission you vow to have all their names stricken from the records as they are unfit to have their names engraved in the Halls of the Honored Fallen. + +You don’t see any sign of Dobbs, but the Sentinels finally track you and Salo down. Despite all your bravado earlier about blasting them back to the scrapheap, you don’t fair any better than the rest of your team. Whatever they’re made out of, your weapons just don’t have any effect. As you attempt to take cover in a nearby room, Salo is blasted into cinders. + +After seeing this, your faith betrays you, you throw your gun away, survival is more important. You think they won’t see you as a threat anymore if you don’t have your gun. + +Your thinking is wrong. The Sentinels have already locked on you and perceived you as a hostile. They enter the room and see you cowering in the corner. They mercilessly finish you off, putting an end to your last remaining thoughts of how you dishonored the Empire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You order your team to start searching every inch of this room. They all comply except for Dobbs who for some reason is still questioning your orders. +“Sir I really think we should leave. This place is having a strange affect on all of us and you in general.” +“Private, your lack of bravery sickens me! Everyone else is doing what they’re supposed to except you! Perhaps it is YOU, who is under a strange influence!” +“Let me kill this unbeliever Captain! Its obvious his heart is not with the Empire!” Salo adds. + +The rest of your team starts calling for Dobb’s blood as well, sensing he’s outnumbered and in immediate danger, he quickly changes his tune. + +“Forgive my weakness sir; I was just concerned about your welfare and the team.” +“Let ME worry about that Dobbs! Now figure out the rest of those controls on that fucking machine!” you snarl. + +Dobbs complies and begins pressing buttons; it looks like he’s doing it randomly, but your heightened state of paranoia causes you to be suspicious again. He’s up to something, you know he is! + +“Dobbs what the hell are you doing, over there?” +“Oh just trying to figure out how to TURN THE PEST CONTROL SYSTEM ON! DIE IN THE NAME OF THE XONT! YOU LOWLY INSECTS!” +“Oh shit!” you say as you see some sort of turret come out of the ceiling! It starts swiveling around and firing on all in its path! Some of your team members are killed in this cowardly sneak attack. You duck for cover along with many of your team, Private Dobbs runs for the exit laughing manically. You’re all too busy shooting at the turret, to fire at him. After destroying it, you assess the situation. All the gunplay ended up destroying the machine Dobbs activated, so that’s useless now. + +“The damn heretic must be brought to justice!” Salo exclaims. +“He will.” You say. “Alright we got a new mission, everyone pair up and hunt the bastard down, he’s probably still in here somewhere. Don’t forget though, we’re still exploring this place, so make a note of what you find. Kill anything not human.” + +You pair up with Salo and start searching. Most of the rooms you find seem to be normal quarters, presumably for whatever aliens slept here. Most the rooms are either in disarray or almost bare, you don’t find anything of interest or Dobbs. You can still hear sounds of battle echoing though, the Sentinels are being very efficient of hunting those tentacle beasts, you know it won’t be long before they start attacking you, but you’re confident you’ll be able to take them. + +Eventually you come to some sort of elevator; it looks like it only goes down. You doubt if Dobbs went down there seeing as the elevator would’ve still been on the lower level if he’d used it, but you’ve got others looking for him, perhaps you should attempt to check out the other level. +> Go to the lower level +You feel compelled to explore the underground part of this structure, let the others find that fool Dobbs, you have more important things to discover. Salo’s a little perturbed by your decision. + +“Sir! We need to find that heretic and bring him to justice!” +”We will! But we’re also here to explore this place and unlock the secrets and POWER that are held here.” +“For the Empire to use!” Salo reminds. +“Yeah…for the Empire.” You say half heartedly + +Salo’s going to have to be gotten rid of soon, you think as you take the elevator down. + +You reach the new level, it looks almost untouched. There are no signs of anything lurking down here. You and Salo begin to explore the rooms and you see wonders you’ve never seen before. You find research notes and papers that are incomprehensible to you, but you can sense they contain information that could provide you with power. All you would need is time… + +When you come across what looks to be a genetics lab, you see diagrams displaying transformations. Judging by the pictures, it looks like genetic enhancement, but without all the surgery. Apparently the Xont built a machine to simplify the process. + +The machine is right in this room. + +All one has to do is step inside and be reborn… +> Don't enter the machine +Your courage to grab destiny fails you, and you resist temptation to become reborn as a higher being. You decide the Empire would best know what to do with all this stuff, such power isn’t for you. You tell Salo that you should go back to the upper level; he looks a little less suspicious of you now. On your way back up, you continue to try to shake this overwhelming feeling of superiority to everything; you have to get out of this place, your will is too weak, you feel like you’ll be unable to resist temptation. + +You don’t need to worry though, when you arrive on the ground floor, you’re met by Silver Sentinels which have finished off all the tentacled beasts as well as everyone remaining in your team. When they see you holding your guns they instantly blast you and Salo. A maniacal laugh emerges, and it’s Dobbs. + +He finishes you off with a kick to your head. + +You were fortunate in some ways, you were spared the horrors he later unleashed on the galaxy with the power from the Xont.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You feel compelled to explore the underground part of this structure, let the others find that fool Dobbs, you have more important things to discover. Salo’s a little perturbed by your decision. + +“Sir! We need to find that heretic and bring him to justice!” +”We will! But we’re also here to explore this place and unlock the secrets and POWER that are held here.” +“For the Empire to use!” Salo reminds. +“Yeah…for the Empire.” You say half heartedly + +Salo’s going to have to be gotten rid of soon, you think as you take the elevator down. + +You reach the new level, it looks almost untouched. There are no signs of anything lurking down here. You and Salo begin to explore the rooms and you see wonders you’ve never seen before. You find research notes and papers that are incomprehensible to you, but you can sense they contain information that could provide you with power. All you would need is time… + +When you come across what looks to be a genetics lab, you see diagrams displaying transformations. Judging by the pictures, it looks like genetic enhancement, but without all the surgery. Apparently the Xont built a machine to simplify the process. + +The machine is right in this room. + +All one has to do is step inside and be reborn… +> Be Reborn +You approach the machine, but Salo stops you. + +“Sir I can’t let you do this! Who know’s what that machine will do to you! It wasn’t created by humans. What changes it will make won’t be natural!” +“Out of my way! Perhaps you can’t grab destiny when it appears before you, but I can!” you snarl. + +Salo decides to use force, but you anticipated that. You knock his weapon out of his hand, and throw him down on the floor. Before he can get up you shoot him. You then don’t waste anytime entering the machine. You press a few buttons, having a brief moment wondering if you’re making the right decision. + +The machine rumbles, and you feel it working. You also feel pain like you’ve never imagined All this new alien information is being shoved into your brain and your body is undergoing a vast transformation, its not just like you’re getting stronger or smarter, you’re becoming something not human. You scream in torment. + +Eventually it stops and you collapse. You manage to catch a reflection of yourself in a nearby shiny surface. Your face is no longer your own, you look like a hybrid of human and something else. Your skin has a purplish hue. You know languages and things you’ve never even pondered or heard of before. Your strength and reflexes have also increased, not to unearthly proportions, but you can safely say better than you were. + +“And to think, I had a fleeting moment of doubt…” you say. + +Thoughts of the Empire leave you. You have no intention of going back, you have other plans. You’re going to learn everything you can here and use this knowledge to control the planet, and eventually spread from there…you immediately get to work. + +A few days pass and Dobbs wanders down. You’d forgotten all about him, the rest of your team is dead, killed by the Silver Sentinels. Dobbs sees you however and is in awe. He believes you to be the Xont returned, and he might be right. He swears to serve you which you take advantage of. The Silver Sentinels are then reprogrammed to serve you as well and soon power is restored to the entire structure. + +A few more days later some Elojin interlopers arrive; they were setting you up and presumably thought you were all killed. When they reach your level, they’re very surprised, and you make them pay for disturbing you. + +More time passes and you manage to get a few surrounding Lizard tribes to follow you. They tend to see you as the “Giant Purple God” who sends his Silver Demons to punish those who disobey. You begin to do experiments on the Lizards enhancing them as well, they make excellent soldiers, and you expand your underground facility even more. The notes on mind control are extremely interesting to you as well. + +Eventually Empire ships come and you send Dobbs to meet them, you tell him he needs to convince the Empire set up a base here. He doesn’t completely understand, but obeys. Dobbs is somehow successful. A base is set up, and gradually over time you gain control over it using a variety of means at your disposal. Some of these Empire troops eventually transfer, and spread your poison to other portions of the Empire. + +By the time the Empire figures out what’s going on, you’ve taken control of the fleet stationed at Paradise, and several other ships in other parts of the Empire as well. A civil war breaks out. You eventually drag the other Major Powers into it, and more chaos is created. World after world falls before your armies of genetically enhanced super Lizard soldiers and Silver Death Machines, before your advancement is finally put to a definite halt. You have enemies everywhere. All right thinking beings hate the destruction you’ve caused. You never sleep, you cannot rest, you have no friends, you trust no one, and assassins from all worlds have been sent to kill you. You rule a portion of the galaxy, and yet are a prisoner. You stay in your now sprawling deep underground complex plotting and scheming for galaxy domination like some sort of brooding dark god. + +Sometimes you wonder if this was all worth it, but then you remember an ancient quote from a place you used to call home… + +“Tis better to rule in hell than to serve in heaven” + +And then you smile.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You order your team to start searching every inch of this room. They all comply except for Dobbs who for some reason is still questioning your orders. +“Sir I really think we should leave. This place is having a strange affect on all of us and you in general.” +“Private, your lack of bravery sickens me! Everyone else is doing what they’re supposed to except you! Perhaps it is YOU, who is under a strange influence!” +“Let me kill this unbeliever Captain! Its obvious his heart is not with the Empire!” Salo adds. + +The rest of your team starts calling for Dobb’s blood as well, sensing he’s outnumbered and in immediate danger, he quickly changes his tune. + +“Forgive my weakness sir; I was just concerned about your welfare and the team.” +“Let ME worry about that Dobbs! Now figure out the rest of those controls on that fucking machine!” you snarl. + +Dobbs complies and begins pressing buttons; it looks like he’s doing it randomly, but your heightened state of paranoia causes you to be suspicious again. He’s up to something, you know he is! + +“Dobbs what the hell are you doing, over there?” +“Oh just trying to figure out how to TURN THE PEST CONTROL SYSTEM ON! DIE IN THE NAME OF THE XONT! YOU LOWLY INSECTS!” +“Oh shit!” you say as you see some sort of turret come out of the ceiling! It starts swiveling around and firing on all in its path! Some of your team members are killed in this cowardly sneak attack. You duck for cover along with many of your team, Private Dobbs runs for the exit laughing manically. You’re all too busy shooting at the turret, to fire at him. After destroying it, you assess the situation. All the gunplay ended up destroying the machine Dobbs activated, so that’s useless now. + +“The damn heretic must be brought to justice!” Salo exclaims. +“He will.” You say. “Alright we got a new mission, everyone pair up and hunt the bastard down, he’s probably still in here somewhere. Don’t forget though, we’re still exploring this place, so make a note of what you find. Kill anything not human.” + +You pair up with Salo and start searching. Most of the rooms you find seem to be normal quarters, presumably for whatever aliens slept here. Most the rooms are either in disarray or almost bare, you don’t find anything of interest or Dobbs. You can still hear sounds of battle echoing though, the Sentinels are being very efficient of hunting those tentacle beasts, you know it won’t be long before they start attacking you, but you’re confident you’ll be able to take them. + +Eventually you come to some sort of elevator; it looks like it only goes down. You doubt if Dobbs went down there seeing as the elevator would’ve still been on the lower level if he’d used it, but you’ve got others looking for him, perhaps you should attempt to check out the other level. +> Feeling different? (Current thoughts) +You’re feeling weird again, you thought that killing Alyssa would shake this feeling, but it hasn’t. It’s like something is still trying to get inside your head. You don’t know what to think anymore. You’re thoughts of the Empire are in flux, you’re starting to wonder why you should worry about bringing “glory” to the Empire. Maybe you should be bringing “glory” to yourself instead…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There’s no way you’re going to not explore this place! It’s your duty, and one you are going to fulfill! You order all your team to pick up their weapons, and that you’re going to explore this place. + +“But sir! The Silver Sentinels are still wandering around, and they’ll attack us if they perceive us as a threat!” Dobbs exclaims. +“And what the fuck of it? We’ll blow those archaic Xont automatons back to the junkheap if they attack us. Besides we’ll be better prepared for them now, they’ll likely be weakened by fighting with those abominations and as servants of the Empire our cause is just and our destiny is certain. Now no more of this cowardice soldier, we’ve got a job to do!” +> Explore other parts of the structure +“Come on, we can come back to this room later, let’s explore the rest of this place. Shoot anything not human.” +You don’t get far when Dobbs starts talking again. + +“Sir I think we should leave this place entirely, I think…” you interrupt private Dobbs before he can complete his sentence. +“Stop thinking! You will fall in line right now! I’m tired of your insubordination!” +“AND I’M TIRED OF FOLLOWING A LOWER LIFE FORM LIKE YOU! DIE IN THE NAME OF THE XONT!” Dobbs screams and attempts to shoot you, but he’s shot by everyone else before he can even raise his weapon. + +After witnessing such treachery, you make a small speech. + +“Alright people, it’s obvious this place stinks of alien influence, influences that would attempt to lead us astray from our righteous path. We must keep our minds pure for the Empire!” +“I couldn’t have said that better myself, Captain.” Salo says. + +After inspiring the team with more Empire doctrine, you continue to search the facility. You don’t really come across anything of any note, most of the rooms are either stripped bare or are in shambles as if battle occurred there a long time ago. You eventually discover an elevator of some sort. It looks like it only goes down. You can only imagine what might be underground. While you have faith that you can easily defeat anything hostile down there, you’re not so sure about your team. Whatever made Dobbs into a heretic could be stronger down there, they aren’t as strong willed as you or Salo are, you don’t want to have your entire team suddenly turn against you, just because they’re all weak minded fools. +> Go down +You and your team all just barely fit into the elevator. You feel like someone could slip a knife into your side at any time. You know they’re all out to get you. They all want to betray the Empire. You’re the only loyal one here, they’ve all fallen under alien influence just like Dobbs, they’re just being more subtle about it. +When you reach the underground level you see nothing that indicates anything is lurking down here, it’s almost untouched. There are a lot of devices, and research notes you don’t understand, but you know all this stuff can be used for the good of the Empire, but THESE heretics want it for themselves! Even Salo. He may hide behind the guise of an Indoctrinator but you know something more sinister lies beneath. You’re going to have to do something soon, before they all decide to attack. +> Open fire +Your paranoia overwhelms you and you open fire on your team members catching them all by surprise. + +“DIE DIE DIE HERETICS!” you scream. + +Salo’s a little bewildered by this statement and even madder that you would accuse him of being one! He and a few others manage to get out of the way of your onslaught and return fire killing you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and your team all just barely fit into the elevator. You feel like someone could slip a knife into your side at any time. You know they’re all out to get you. They all want to betray the Empire. You’re the only loyal one here, they’ve all fallen under alien influence just like Dobbs, they’re just being more subtle about it. +When you reach the underground level you see nothing that indicates anything is lurking down here, it’s almost untouched. There are a lot of devices, and research notes you don’t understand, but you know all this stuff can be used for the good of the Empire, but THESE heretics want it for themselves! Even Salo. He may hide behind the guise of an Indoctrinator but you know something more sinister lies beneath. You’re going to have to do something soon, before they all decide to attack. +> Sneak away +While the others are exploring, you quietly slip away and head back to the elevator. They realize just in time for the door to close and you to be on your way up back to the ground level. + +You can hear yelling as you leave, but that won’t be anything compared to what you have planned. You giggle to yourself insanely, when the door opens, the Silver Sentinels are there to greet you, they’ve finished exterminating the tentacled beasts and now they’ve detected more threats. + +You’re still carrying your weapon… + +They blast you and take the elevator down to finish off your team, in your final moments you die believing you’ve served the Empire by killing these heretics, but with nobody left, the Empire never knows about the Xont structure and the mission is considered an absolute failure with all personnel lost. + +Mass driver bombardment is recommended and implemented.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Come on, we can come back to this room later, let’s explore the rest of this place. Shoot anything not human.” +You don’t get far when Dobbs starts talking again. + +“Sir I think we should leave this place entirely, I think…” you interrupt private Dobbs before he can complete his sentence. +“Stop thinking! You will fall in line right now! I’m tired of your insubordination!” +“AND I’M TIRED OF FOLLOWING A LOWER LIFE FORM LIKE YOU! DIE IN THE NAME OF THE XONT!” Dobbs screams and attempts to shoot you, but he’s shot by everyone else before he can even raise his weapon. + +After witnessing such treachery, you make a small speech. + +“Alright people, it’s obvious this place stinks of alien influence, influences that would attempt to lead us astray from our righteous path. We must keep our minds pure for the Empire!” +“I couldn’t have said that better myself, Captain.” Salo says. + +After inspiring the team with more Empire doctrine, you continue to search the facility. You don’t really come across anything of any note, most of the rooms are either stripped bare or are in shambles as if battle occurred there a long time ago. You eventually discover an elevator of some sort. It looks like it only goes down. You can only imagine what might be underground. While you have faith that you can easily defeat anything hostile down there, you’re not so sure about your team. Whatever made Dobbs into a heretic could be stronger down there, they aren’t as strong willed as you or Salo are, you don’t want to have your entire team suddenly turn against you, just because they’re all weak minded fools. +> Leave +You decide that a better equipped team would be better suited for this job. Those who are more loyal to the Empire, perhaps even a whole squad of Indoctrinators who have been trained to focus their minds against alien influences. You order your team to leave, and state that you’ll just be securing it until the next ship comes where upon your superiors can decide what to do next. + +Upon reaching the exit, you’re ambushed by some Elojin scum who apparently thought you’d be weakened or perhaps outright killed by the Xont facility, but they didn’t count on the strength and resolve of humanity. They try to flee when they realize they’re outnumbered, but you and your team easily makes mince meat out of them. A couple still manage to survive, you and Salo take them prisoner back to the Lizard village where you both torture them for information until they die. Salo is impressed, he states that should be working as an Indoctrinator instead. + +The rest of your time on Paradise passes without incident, when the Empire ship comes, you give a complete and thorough report of all that occurred. Your superiors are pleased and say they will take it from here. Salo also reports to his superiors suggesting that you should be considered for Indoctrinator training. Due to his high prestige within the order and your relatively good military record, they take you in where you begin. + +The training is grueling but the Emperor requires its Indoctrinators to be strong, so you take it all in stride and persevere, and eventually you pass through the training and become a fully fledged Indoctrinator. Due to your already extensive military training and experience your request to be stationed on the front lines is granted. + +While you were going through training, the Xont technology was extracted from the building and was applied in fantastic ways. The Empire easily begins to turn the balance to their favor. A new found wave of human pride grips the Empire and unites it even stronger than before. This eventually leads to a pathetic alliance between the Krik, Mazatt and Elojin who attempt to fight back, other aliens start rallying to their banner as well, but they will lose. It is inevitable that all aliens must fall before the might of the Empire. + +And now you are one of those who leads the charge, conquering, killing and most importantly bringing glory in HIS name.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Come on, we can come back to this room later, let’s explore the rest of this place. Shoot anything not human.” +You don’t get far when Dobbs starts talking again. + +“Sir I think we should leave this place entirely, I think…” you interrupt private Dobbs before he can complete his sentence. +“Stop thinking! You will fall in line right now! I’m tired of your insubordination!” +“AND I’M TIRED OF FOLLOWING A LOWER LIFE FORM LIKE YOU! DIE IN THE NAME OF THE XONT!” Dobbs screams and attempts to shoot you, but he’s shot by everyone else before he can even raise his weapon. + +After witnessing such treachery, you make a small speech. + +“Alright people, it’s obvious this place stinks of alien influence, influences that would attempt to lead us astray from our righteous path. We must keep our minds pure for the Empire!” +“I couldn’t have said that better myself, Captain.” Salo says. + +After inspiring the team with more Empire doctrine, you continue to search the facility. You don’t really come across anything of any note, most of the rooms are either stripped bare or are in shambles as if battle occurred there a long time ago. You eventually discover an elevator of some sort. It looks like it only goes down. You can only imagine what might be underground. While you have faith that you can easily defeat anything hostile down there, you’re not so sure about your team. Whatever made Dobbs into a heretic could be stronger down there, they aren’t as strong willed as you or Salo are, you don’t want to have your entire team suddenly turn against you, just because they’re all weak minded fools. +> Feeling different? (Current thoughts) +You’re starting to feel very paranoid; you’re starting to see treachery everywhere. The Empire has many enemies and the most insidious ones are the ones from within. You’re going to be watching everyone very carefully from now on.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Alyssa you and the rest keep an eye on that doorway, if those things try to get in again, you know what to do. Dobbs, don’t touch anything else in here.” You say and inspect the robots closer. +“Yes sir, but I should tell you, that we’re running out of ammo.” Alyssa remarks. +“Dammit, you heard the Captain! He didn’t ask you for your opinion you alien bitch! You should be lucky you’re even allowed to serve the Empire, and not destroyed like the non-human trash you are!” Salo rants. +“Salo, I serve the Captain, I’m loyal to him, not the Empire, and I’ve had just about all the abuse I’m going to take from you!” Alyssa says and points her weapon at Salo, catching him off guard. There’s no way he’ll be able to react in time, the rest of the team stands frozen, they’re trying to watch the doorway and this new situation at the same time. +You’ve never seen Alyssa lose her “cool” like this before. Granted this whole expedition has made everyone extremely irritable, but even under worse conditions than this, Alyssa has always been very calm. +> Feeling different? (Current thoughts) +Your mind seems to be shifting focus again, or is in some sort of transition phase. Your previous thoughts of human superiority are in flux. You wonder why you even had them in the first place, since you’ve never been like that. And while they still occupy you somewhat, what seems to be replacing them is unknown.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sense the treachery that lurks within this alien. He’s setting you up; well his silver tongue has only gotten him so far. + +“We humans have been learning things through trial and error for centuries, no reason to change now. Salo, shoot this spotty freak!” you say. +“Wa…” the Elojin doesn’t even finish before Salo melts half of his head with his plasma pistol. The Elojin slumps to the floor lifelessly. + +“Okay, now does anyone here know about Xont legends or read about any of that shit?” you ask your team. A relatively young trooper steps forward. It’s Private Dobbs. + +“Um, I read a few things when I was a kid, but I don’t know anything about this sir.” +“Well can’t you remember anything? Like what these symbols mean?” +“I suppose I could guess.” +“Dammit soldier, I can fucking guess! I’m asking you can you do better than guess?!” + +Before he can answer it appears that one of the inhabitants has finally tracked you down, and its as horrible looking as the Elojin described it. Tentacles, teeth, large and hungry. +It makes an ear piecing roar and attempts to enter the room, but is unable to get through, that doesn’t stop it attempting to lash at your team with its tentacles, who immediately open fire on it. + +Well you could help and let Dobbs study the computer, or you could just do it yourself and order Dobbs to help fight the abomination instead. +> Do it yourself +You sigh in annoyance and push Dobbs aside, and begin pressing buttons at random. +A rumbling sound is made as the entire room seems to be powering up. You think you’ve accomplished something, but unfortunately the years of disuse have made the machinery a bit flakey. The console that you were standing by explodes spectacularly, embedding metal shards into your body and head, while the heat burns most of your skin off. + +You die unexpectedly and unceremoniously.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sense the treachery that lurks within this alien. He’s setting you up; well his silver tongue has only gotten him so far. + +“We humans have been learning things through trial and error for centuries, no reason to change now. Salo, shoot this spotty freak!” you say. +“Wa…” the Elojin doesn’t even finish before Salo melts half of his head with his plasma pistol. The Elojin slumps to the floor lifelessly. + +“Okay, now does anyone here know about Xont legends or read about any of that shit?” you ask your team. A relatively young trooper steps forward. It’s Private Dobbs. + +“Um, I read a few things when I was a kid, but I don’t know anything about this sir.” +“Well can’t you remember anything? Like what these symbols mean?” +“I suppose I could guess.” +“Dammit soldier, I can fucking guess! I’m asking you can you do better than guess?!” + +Before he can answer it appears that one of the inhabitants has finally tracked you down, and its as horrible looking as the Elojin described it. Tentacles, teeth, large and hungry. +It makes an ear piecing roar and attempts to enter the room, but is unable to get through, that doesn’t stop it attempting to lash at your team with its tentacles, who immediately open fire on it. + +Well you could help and let Dobbs study the computer, or you could just do it yourself and order Dobbs to help fight the abomination instead. +> Would you like to know more? (Private Dobbs) +Private Dobbs… + +Private Dobbs is a typical soldier under your command; he does his job and doesn’t ask too many questions. He does keep a lower profile than some, but one thing about him that really stands out though is his wide spread knowledge of seemingly useless trivia. He’s been known to talk about things from the time it takes a Casitian Spider to drain its victims of blood, to the bizarre mating habits of the inhabitants of Tinok 3. Usually people “blessed” with trivia annoy other people around them by constantly spouting it, but thankfully Dobbs doesn’t do that. He usually only mentions such information when its somewhat related to a topic on hand. He tends to be reading when not interacting with anyone else, no doubt learning more random information. + +It’s probably his way of still staying somewhat unique despite being just a name and number.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Despite Salo’s insistence, you make the decision that you shouldn’t kill the Elojin just yet. The Elojin looks at you in silence almost expecting to get shot, but quickly becomes talkative again when he realizes his life is going to be spared a few moments longer. + +“Okay be ABSOLUTELY quiet, those things are still in there, if you have to fight them let’s at least get into one of the rooms where you can shoot at them with less danger, a lot of them have narrow doorways for some reason.” +“Hold on there spot boy, what exactly are these things?” you ask +“I don’t know, but they’re large, vicious, and mindless and have a lot of tentacles.” +“Could they be Xont?” +“I doubt that, they’re far too animalistic. Maybe they’re some sort of genetic Xont experiment, who know? Let’s just not run into them!” + +With the Elojin in the lead you and your team follow as quietly as possible, soon the Elojin leads you to a room with a lot of strange looking computers. They have a look of being incredibly archaic yet very advanced. Buttons with bizarre symbols are all over the machines + +“Now I think this is a control room of some sort, I was meaning to come back here to study it more, but I was trying to map out the place first.” +“So what the hell do these things do?” +“You humans have those huge audio organs hanging from your heads, yet you seem to be unable to hear. I just said, I didn’t study the room, I was meaning to come back to it!” +“Enough of this Elojin’s insults! We have no further use for him!” Salo yells at the top of his lungs. + +“Look you can certainly kill me if you want, but I am somewhat familiar with Xont legends and such. I probably could figure out what all this exactly does, if you let me. You start pushing buttons at random and you could be asking for trouble.” + +The Elojin is obviously attempting to prolong his miserable life a little longer, despite the fact that he knows the inevitable is coming soon. Of course he also could be trying to set you up some how. He looks at you expectantly. +> Let him study the machinery +“Hold on Salo, this harmless inferior can still prove useful, go ahead spot boy inspect the computer, and play out this futile game of prolonging your life for a few minutes longer.” You say. +“Well it is our nature for self preservation Captain.” The Elojin says. +“If he tries anything shoot him.” You add. + +While the Elojin starts inspecting the machine, he does his usual chattering, this time about Xont legends. To be quite honest you aren’t really listening, and you’re eager to get rid of him at this point. Your thoughts are on how you’ll be promoted to a command of more importance after this, where you can actually do more to bring glory to the Empire. + +An intrusion disrupts your daydream however. One of the inhabitants that the Elojin was referring to before seems to have heard the noise coming from this room and is trying to get in, the creature is too big to fit in the doorway, but it manages to grab a few of your team with its tentacles. + +“Open fire!” you yell. Blasting the thing into a green slimy mess causes it to bellow, alerting more of its fellows to your location. + +While you and your team are fighting the alien horror, the Elojin is still busily studying the machine, he ends up pressing a few buttons, and a wall opens up revealing a small row of robots. You turn to the Elojin and see just in time for him to smile and press another button that turns the robots on. + +As red lights flicker on in their eye sockets, they immediately perceive you as a threat. + +“INTRUDERS!” they say in unison and open fire on you and your team. Your attempts to fight back are in vain. They completely annihilate you. After they’re done with you they start attacking the creatures trying to get in the room. The Elojin stands over you as you lay dying. + +“They…didn’t…fire…on you…” you wheeze. +“I guess they perceived me as a harmless inferior as well.” The Elojin says and kicks you in the head bringing eternal darkness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You start to question the Lizards but won’t say anything, they just give you a cold reptilian stare, start to get agitated and begin hissing at you. +“Ssssak Sakkeekeessss!” +You begin to get angry. How dare these lower life forms withhold information from you! + +As your voice raises, the Lizard you’re questioning says something in his native tongue “Sliiisssthelisk!” and swipes his claw across your face. You immediately shoot him. This results in further carnage. + +The battle is quick and bloody, you round up the demoralized survivors and question them further, but most of them don’t know anything and just repeat some prayer to their gods in their language. Salo is eager to kill them, but you decide they will be useful to carry your excess belongings. You begin to use them as “pack animals” and head off. + +The Elojin begins to lead your team deep further into the jungle, keeping up his usual chatty demeanor. + +“Oh yes, it’s this way, now we may run into more of those reptiles, but I’m sure you’ll have no trouble handling them, like you handled these fellows here.” +“Quiet Elojin! Your constant prattle is annoying and serves no purpose!” Alyssa snaps. +“One could say the same about your presence here. At least I’m serving a useful purpose, of leading you to what could be the find of the millennium, you on the other hand are just an expendable soldier of an Empire slave race. Any fool that knows how to use a weapon could replace you.” The Elojin retorts. +Alyssa smashes the Elojin in the back of the head with her weapon; he falls to the ground in pain. You immediately intervene. + +“Sergeant! What the hell do you think you’re doing?! He has to lead us to the Xont city!” +“His words dishonored me! I will not put up with his disrespect!” +”You WILL follow my orders sergeant! Don’t do that again!” +“Yes sir!” Alyssa says and falls in line, but she stays as far as way possible from the Elojin. That blue bitch better remember whose boss around here if she knows what’s good for her. + +“I guess my thanks goes to you again Captain. This is the second time you’ve personally saved me from your overzealous team. I admire your domination over them.” +”Shut up Elojin and do your fucking job! Speak disrespectfully like that again to any of my team and I’m sure Salo can find a way to cause you great discomfort without hampering you from your appointed task.” + +The Elojin looks genuinely worried for the first time, and shuts up. He leads on with less talk, until you get to another Lizard village. + +“Now this is the Lizard village I tried to recruit to help me, the first time I found the structure. The Xont building isn’t far now, but we’ll get to it quicker if we go through the village." +> Go through the village +You reign in your temper and intolerance, and decide that you shouldn’t waste any more ammo if possible, after all who knows what lies in the Xont structure. You state you’re going to march through the village “peacefully” but if the Lizards attack then you shall respond in kind. + +When you get to the village, it’s empty. You certainly weren’t expecting that. The Elojin begins talking again. + +“Hey how about we rest here before continuing on? The creatures in that Xont building are going to require you guys to be at the top of your game.” He says. +“Presumptuous alien trash! The Empire can face any challenge, unlike you Elojin who are weak and cowardly and run at the first sign of danger.” Salo retorts. +“You mean like now?” the Elojin says and quickly pushes Salo to the ground and runs off into one of the huts. Two of your team give chase and immediately fall into a pit! Arrows begin flying with deadly accuracy. It’s a Lizard ambush! + +Taking advantage of your temporary unalert state, the Lizards manage to severely wound many of your team, before you can launch a suitable defense. Your enslaved Lizards either run off or join your attackers. Even under all these conditions you probably still would’ve been able to defeat them, if an Elojin team didn’t come out of nowhere to help them. + +You fight on, but suddenly feel a blow to the back of your head, knocking you out. + +Time passes… + +You wake up tied to a post, you see Alyssa and a few of your other team members tied to others, you see what looks to be the head of Salo on a spike. Nearby are some Lizards eating, you draw your own conclusions. You see many of the Lizards holding your guns, and shooting them and examining your other equipment with curiosity. + +There are a few Elojin arguing amongst themselves, but the one who lead you into this trap in the first place comes up to you with a big grin, he’s also flipping his coins that you had taken from him earlier. + +“Ah, you’re up. Good. I was tired of talking with natives, let alone my fellow Elojin. I swear we can’t agree on anything. One of them says we should kill you right now; another says we should get information out of you first then kill you. Yet another says we should keep you all to sell into slavery. (Sigh) why can’t we ever be single minded for once?” +“I suggest you kill us, because if we get out of this, I guarantee we’ll kill you.” You say grimly. +“Hmm, yes I suppose you would and that would be the wisest course of action, but we’re in a bit of a bind of our own doing I fear. You see, these natives seem to be a little different than the others on this planet, they’re very curious about technology. When we first made contact with them they actually agreed they would enter the structure and help us explore it if we gave them ours, of course we weren’t going to do that. So that’s where I came in, my disastrous attempt to try to trick the Mazatt turned out to be lucky a break when you humans came along with all your lovely equipment. Now we have their help, so I thank you.” +“Look just put a fucking bullet in my brain now, but don’t fucking bore me to death with your constant blather.” +“I just said there are problems with that course of action. Apparently you’re considered prisoners of these reptiles and as you were captured in battle, you have to be sacrificed to their idols to appease whatever weird gods they worship. This of course is annoying to us, as we would rather not risk leaving you to the natives whom you may escape from, but as I tried to reason with my fellow Elojin we obviously can’t go against them now that we have their help and especially since they have heavier fire power, as well as still outnumbering us. Oh the tangled web we’ve weaved. (Sigh) I guess we’ll all just agree to wait until they sacrifice the lot of you before we can explore without worrying about vengeful humans sneaking up on us. I guess we can wait until morning. See you then.” +The Elojin leaves you to fester with rage, but it’s more at yourself, for allowing yourself to get caught up in this whole fool quest to begin with. You’ve acted recklessly and irrationally. You vow to make this right if you get a chance. + +And fortunately you’re getting a chance now. In the form of Lieutenant LaFleur of all things. You see him lurking nearby one of the huts, trying his best not to be seen. He must’ve ran off and hid during the attack. He sees you and looks around to see if anyone’s watching. +> Wait for him to untie you +After seeing that the coast is clear, Lieutenant LaFleur makes his move…and promptly runs off into the jungle! + +“YOU COWARDLY SONOFABITCH!” You shout, causing the Lizards to come and shut you up in a physical way until you’re knocked unconscious again. + +The next time you wake up, is just in time for you to see a sharp knife plunge into your chest.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You reign in your temper and intolerance, and decide that you shouldn’t waste any more ammo if possible, after all who knows what lies in the Xont structure. You state you’re going to march through the village “peacefully” but if the Lizards attack then you shall respond in kind. + +When you get to the village, it’s empty. You certainly weren’t expecting that. The Elojin begins talking again. + +“Hey how about we rest here before continuing on? The creatures in that Xont building are going to require you guys to be at the top of your game.” He says. +“Presumptuous alien trash! The Empire can face any challenge, unlike you Elojin who are weak and cowardly and run at the first sign of danger.” Salo retorts. +“You mean like now?” the Elojin says and quickly pushes Salo to the ground and runs off into one of the huts. Two of your team give chase and immediately fall into a pit! Arrows begin flying with deadly accuracy. It’s a Lizard ambush! + +Taking advantage of your temporary unalert state, the Lizards manage to severely wound many of your team, before you can launch a suitable defense. Your enslaved Lizards either run off or join your attackers. Even under all these conditions you probably still would’ve been able to defeat them, if an Elojin team didn’t come out of nowhere to help them. + +You fight on, but suddenly feel a blow to the back of your head, knocking you out. + +Time passes… + +You wake up tied to a post, you see Alyssa and a few of your other team members tied to others, you see what looks to be the head of Salo on a spike. Nearby are some Lizards eating, you draw your own conclusions. You see many of the Lizards holding your guns, and shooting them and examining your other equipment with curiosity. + +There are a few Elojin arguing amongst themselves, but the one who lead you into this trap in the first place comes up to you with a big grin, he’s also flipping his coins that you had taken from him earlier. + +“Ah, you’re up. Good. I was tired of talking with natives, let alone my fellow Elojin. I swear we can’t agree on anything. One of them says we should kill you right now; another says we should get information out of you first then kill you. Yet another says we should keep you all to sell into slavery. (Sigh) why can’t we ever be single minded for once?” +“I suggest you kill us, because if we get out of this, I guarantee we’ll kill you.” You say grimly. +“Hmm, yes I suppose you would and that would be the wisest course of action, but we’re in a bit of a bind of our own doing I fear. You see, these natives seem to be a little different than the others on this planet, they’re very curious about technology. When we first made contact with them they actually agreed they would enter the structure and help us explore it if we gave them ours, of course we weren’t going to do that. So that’s where I came in, my disastrous attempt to try to trick the Mazatt turned out to be lucky a break when you humans came along with all your lovely equipment. Now we have their help, so I thank you.” +“Look just put a fucking bullet in my brain now, but don’t fucking bore me to death with your constant blather.” +“I just said there are problems with that course of action. Apparently you’re considered prisoners of these reptiles and as you were captured in battle, you have to be sacrificed to their idols to appease whatever weird gods they worship. This of course is annoying to us, as we would rather not risk leaving you to the natives whom you may escape from, but as I tried to reason with my fellow Elojin we obviously can’t go against them now that we have their help and especially since they have heavier fire power, as well as still outnumbering us. Oh the tangled web we’ve weaved. (Sigh) I guess we’ll all just agree to wait until they sacrifice the lot of you before we can explore without worrying about vengeful humans sneaking up on us. I guess we can wait until morning. See you then.” +The Elojin leaves you to fester with rage, but it’s more at yourself, for allowing yourself to get caught up in this whole fool quest to begin with. You’ve acted recklessly and irrationally. You vow to make this right if you get a chance. + +And fortunately you’re getting a chance now. In the form of Lieutenant LaFleur of all things. You see him lurking nearby one of the huts, trying his best not to be seen. He must’ve ran off and hid during the attack. He sees you and looks around to see if anyone’s watching. +> Call over to him +You know LaFleur too well; you call over to him as quietly as you can. + +“LaFleur untie me!” +“Shhhh!” he says, getting all nervous and still looking around, he really doesn’t want you calling attention to him. +“LaFleur if you don’t untie me right now, I’m gonna yell so loud that the entire village will come, so don’t be getting any ideas to escape without untying us first!” you warn. +Seeing that he has no choice he looks one more time and quickly runs over to you and starts untying you. +“We gotta get out of here!” he says. +“Not yet, we got unfinished business. Besides we ain’t gonna last long in the jungle without our equipment.” You say as you get free just when another Elojin sees what’s going on. + +“They’re escaping! Kill them!” +“Kill the rest of the prisoners too!” another shouts, and shoots one of your team members killing him. +“NO! You idiot!” the Elojin you first met shouts. + +Upon killing a designated sacrifice to their gods, the Elojin have angered the rest of the Lizards. + +“Ssss! Sekeeseekhh! Kishhesss!” one of them hisses. One group of Lizards comes after you and LaFleur and another after the Elojin. +> Attempt to untie the rest of your team +You run over to the other posts to free your team, oblivious to the fact that the Lizards now have guns to shoot at you, they aren’t very good at aiming, but actually they aren’t trying to kill you, at least not yet, they want you for sacrifice. A plasma blot hits your foot melting it off. You scream in pain as you crash to the ground. The Lizards quickly knock you out with a heavy blow to the head again. + +When you wake up, you’re tied to an altar ready to be ritually sacrificed. Your only comforting thoughts in your last few moments are that you see the dead bodies of some Elojin stacked near the altar. + +The gods of the Lizards will certainly be appeased today.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know LaFleur too well; you call over to him as quietly as you can. + +“LaFleur untie me!” +“Shhhh!” he says, getting all nervous and still looking around, he really doesn’t want you calling attention to him. +“LaFleur if you don’t untie me right now, I’m gonna yell so loud that the entire village will come, so don’t be getting any ideas to escape without untying us first!” you warn. +Seeing that he has no choice he looks one more time and quickly runs over to you and starts untying you. +“We gotta get out of here!” he says. +“Not yet, we got unfinished business. Besides we ain’t gonna last long in the jungle without our equipment.” You say as you get free just when another Elojin sees what’s going on. + +“They’re escaping! Kill them!” +“Kill the rest of the prisoners too!” another shouts, and shoots one of your team members killing him. +“NO! You idiot!” the Elojin you first met shouts. + +Upon killing a designated sacrifice to their gods, the Elojin have angered the rest of the Lizards. + +“Ssss! Sekeeseekhh! Kishhesss!” one of them hisses. One group of Lizards comes after you and LaFleur and another after the Elojin. +> Run into one of the huts +You run into one of the huts, as projectiles of all types come flying at you. LaFleur runs off into the jungle. You quickly look for a weapon in the hut and grab a spear lying on the floor. The first Lizard that sticks its head in the doorway gets it skewered by you dropping the plasma gun he was carrying You give a hefty shove to the body causing the Lizards behind it to fall to the ground. While they attempt to pick themselves up, you pick up the plasma gun and fire at them. At this close range you can’t miss. + +You easily manage to win the fire fight with the remaining Lizards since their aim is terrible. You leave the cover of the hut and run to the posts where your remaining team members are tied. Fortunately the rest of the Lizards have their claws full with dealing with the Elojin, but only one remains now. Of course it turns out to be your old “friend”. +Your team re-arms themselves quickly and finish off the Lizards. Even LaFleur comes back out of hiding to help out. Only the Elojin remains, he raises his arms but still holds his weapon. + +“Hey! It’s a good thing you escaped! This all wasn’t my idea actually; I would’ve preferred to just work with you, than these savage natives. But my now dead peers were so insistant…well you understand I’m sure. So you ready to go explore the Xont structure?” +“You’ve gotta be fucking kidding.” One of your team members says. +‘Not at all! The way I see it, mistakes were made on both sides, no sense on dwelling in the past, let’s just try to salvage the situation so we can all get…” +“You know something, you’re right, mistakes were made on both sides, yours was betraying us, but mine was trusting a fucking Elojin in the first place. But I’m about correct both of this mistakes.” You interrupt and blast the Elojin, putting an end to his lies once and for all. + +The village is completely decimated, it resembles a graveyard now. + +“Captain, are we still going to look for the Xont structure? The Elojin said it wasn’t too far from here.” One member asks you. +“No, we’re going to spend the rest of our time on this hellhole planet in this village until the next ship arrives. Even if the Elojin was telling the truth, we’re probably not equipped to handle what’s in there and enough of us have been killed due to my recklessness.” + +The rest of your time on Paradise passes without incident. You still wonder why you were temporarily over come with a kind of madness. Was it the idea of bringing glory to the Empire? Being stuck on this planet for so long? Or something else? Whatever the reason, being captured by the Lizards snapped you back to reality. You decide that it’ll always remain a bit of a mystery. + +When the Empire ship comes, you give a sketchy report to your superiors about being ambushed and how you suffered heavy losses. You don’t go into great detail and you don’t even bother to mention the Xont rumor. They dismiss you with a bored expression, and write Paradise off as a low priority. This was just another ho-hum routine mission report to them and you’re sent to another planet where you receive replacement troops for your next mission. + +And this time, you give an order to have all Elojin shot on sight!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You start to question the Lizards but won’t say anything, they just give you a cold reptilian stare, start to get agitated and begin hissing at you. +“Ssssak Sakkeekeessss!” +You begin to get angry. How dare these lower life forms withhold information from you! + +As your voice raises, the Lizard you’re questioning says something in his native tongue “Sliiisssthelisk!” and swipes his claw across your face. You immediately shoot him. This results in further carnage. + +The battle is quick and bloody, you round up the demoralized survivors and question them further, but most of them don’t know anything and just repeat some prayer to their gods in their language. Salo is eager to kill them, but you decide they will be useful to carry your excess belongings. You begin to use them as “pack animals” and head off. + +The Elojin begins to lead your team deep further into the jungle, keeping up his usual chatty demeanor. + +“Oh yes, it’s this way, now we may run into more of those reptiles, but I’m sure you’ll have no trouble handling them, like you handled these fellows here.” +“Quiet Elojin! Your constant prattle is annoying and serves no purpose!” Alyssa snaps. +“One could say the same about your presence here. At least I’m serving a useful purpose, of leading you to what could be the find of the millennium, you on the other hand are just an expendable soldier of an Empire slave race. Any fool that knows how to use a weapon could replace you.” The Elojin retorts. +Alyssa smashes the Elojin in the back of the head with her weapon; he falls to the ground in pain. You immediately intervene. + +“Sergeant! What the hell do you think you’re doing?! He has to lead us to the Xont city!” +“His words dishonored me! I will not put up with his disrespect!” +”You WILL follow my orders sergeant! Don’t do that again!” +“Yes sir!” Alyssa says and falls in line, but she stays as far as way possible from the Elojin. That blue bitch better remember whose boss around here if she knows what’s good for her. + +“I guess my thanks goes to you again Captain. This is the second time you’ve personally saved me from your overzealous team. I admire your domination over them.” +”Shut up Elojin and do your fucking job! Speak disrespectfully like that again to any of my team and I’m sure Salo can find a way to cause you great discomfort without hampering you from your appointed task.” + +The Elojin looks genuinely worried for the first time, and shuts up. He leads on with less talk, until you get to another Lizard village. + +“Now this is the Lizard village I tried to recruit to help me, the first time I found the structure. The Xont building isn’t far now, but we’ll get to it quicker if we go through the village." +> Feeling different? (Current thoughts) +You’re starting to feel a lot different, a lot more impatient and hostile in general, especially towards aliens. The Xont building is getting closer and you can’t wait to unlock its secrets. These Lizard creatures know nothing of the power that exists on their own planet, they fear it. Well not you, you will embrace it and bring glory to the Empire and if anyone stands in the way of your goal they will be dealt with.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You step in front of Salo’s weapon, he just barely keeps from firing, and he still may do so. The rest of the team seems to be unsure of what to do, except for Alyssa who pulls her weapon out and aims it at Salo. The only one who’s calm is the Elojin, who seems to be getting a kick out of this. + +“Get out of the way Captain, I’ve got to kill him, he’ll lead us all to death with his lies!” +“Easy there Salo. Look I don’t trust the sonofabitch either, but if we got a chance at finding this Xont building…” +“LIES! And so what if it is true? The Xont were an alien race that raped countless worlds, and fell due to their decadence! What use has the Terran Empire have for the ruins of an utterly evil civilization?” + +While Salo is strong in his convictions about hating to work with aliens, you know he also can’t pass up the opportunity to kill more of them. You decide to appeal to that side of him. + +“Well think about the technology could be used to help humanity fight its enemies. The Xont as you say subjugated many worlds, and they did it with minimal effort. Perhaps we’ll find something that could destroy those who would oppose us instantly. The Order might promote you for our finds and use it for the good of the Empire. We could possibly bring in a new Golden Age of Humanity!” + +Salo’s eyes start to glaze over as he takes your words into consideration, he then lowers his weapon. You then whisper to him. +“We can always kill the Elojin when he isn’t useful anymore.” +Salo seems to REALLY like that idea, and agrees to your plan. He still has to get the last word in though. +“Very well, we’ll do things your way, you are my Captain and I will follow you, but if I see this expedition not following the best interests of the Empire I WILL step in.” + +Salo goes and prepares himself for the journey ahead and Alyssa tells everyone else to do the same, since LeFleur apparently went and hid in a tent while this “showdown” happened. + +Soon the team is all packed and ready to go; the Lizards seem to be happy to see you to leave, especially with the mention of the Xont. You wonder if you shouldn’t try to get more information from them before you leave, their fear would indicate they know something of them. +> Leave +You shake your head of all these strange new thoughts entering your head, and decide to go, the Lizards begin hissing amongst themselves as you begin to leave. They’ve been more agitated ever since the word “Xont” came up. The village is becoming a lot less friendly for some reason and the Lizards begin to crowd around you as if to prevent you from leaving; someone throws a rock at your head! + +You fall to the ground, a battle breaks out immediately, you’re out of it for the most part, You eventually regain consciousness, but you’re still woozy. The battle is still going on as you pick up your pistol and see a blurry figure coming at you. +> Shoot at it +Better to be safe than sorry, you blast the figure, which turned out to be a Lizard. You regain your faculties and help fight the Lizards. + +After all is said and done, your team wins, but the Elojin’s dead, you see a spear in his chest. You don’t really have much to go on to find the Xont structure now, even if you still wanted to look for it, which you don’t. Whatever desire that possessed you before to want to find it is gone. The coins you took from the Elojin are gone too; you must’ve dropped them when you got hit in the head. Shame, you would’ve liked something as proof. + +Alyssa, and Salo survived, as did LaFleur, and none of them are eager to go looking for the Xont structure either. Salo, seems even distraught for wanting to find it in the first place, like he broke some sort of rule. He spends a lot of his time mumbling to himself about forgiveness for falling to alien influences. + +As for you and the rest of your team, you spend the rest of your time on Paradise exploring as usual, you don’t run into anymore major powers, but there are a few more battles with the local fauna and a few more Lizard tribes. Still, you don’t find anything of any importance. + +When the Empire ships come, you give your report to your superiors, which is pretty mundane and lack luster. You don’t mention the Xont rumor, since you don’t even have any proof and you might get reprimanded for believing an Elojin anyway. Your superiors write Paradise off as low priority and send you on your next mission. You’ll always wonder though, if the Elojin was telling the truth or even correct about a Xont structure being on the planet.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You shake your head of all these strange new thoughts entering your head, and decide to go, the Lizards begin hissing amongst themselves as you begin to leave. They’ve been more agitated ever since the word “Xont” came up. The village is becoming a lot less friendly for some reason and the Lizards begin to crowd around you as if to prevent you from leaving; someone throws a rock at your head! + +You fall to the ground, a battle breaks out immediately, you’re out of it for the most part, You eventually regain consciousness, but you’re still woozy. The battle is still going on as you pick up your pistol and see a blurry figure coming at you. +> Wait for it +You think it might be one of your team members coming to help you, and you don’t want to risk shooting one of them. + +This is one of those times when it’s better to be safe than sorry, and when you feel the spear hit your chest, you’re very sorry you didn’t shoot…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You step in front of Salo’s weapon, he just barely keeps from firing, and he still may do so. The rest of the team seems to be unsure of what to do, except for Alyssa who pulls her weapon out and aims it at Salo. The only one who’s calm is the Elojin, who seems to be getting a kick out of this. + +“Get out of the way Captain, I’ve got to kill him, he’ll lead us all to death with his lies!” +“Easy there Salo. Look I don’t trust the sonofabitch either, but if we got a chance at finding this Xont building…” +“LIES! And so what if it is true? The Xont were an alien race that raped countless worlds, and fell due to their decadence! What use has the Terran Empire have for the ruins of an utterly evil civilization?” + +While Salo is strong in his convictions about hating to work with aliens, you know he also can’t pass up the opportunity to kill more of them. You decide to appeal to that side of him. + +“Well think about the technology could be used to help humanity fight its enemies. The Xont as you say subjugated many worlds, and they did it with minimal effort. Perhaps we’ll find something that could destroy those who would oppose us instantly. The Order might promote you for our finds and use it for the good of the Empire. We could possibly bring in a new Golden Age of Humanity!” + +Salo’s eyes start to glaze over as he takes your words into consideration, he then lowers his weapon. You then whisper to him. +“We can always kill the Elojin when he isn’t useful anymore.” +Salo seems to REALLY like that idea, and agrees to your plan. He still has to get the last word in though. +“Very well, we’ll do things your way, you are my Captain and I will follow you, but if I see this expedition not following the best interests of the Empire I WILL step in.” + +Salo goes and prepares himself for the journey ahead and Alyssa tells everyone else to do the same, since LeFleur apparently went and hid in a tent while this “showdown” happened. + +Soon the team is all packed and ready to go; the Lizards seem to be happy to see you to leave, especially with the mention of the Xont. You wonder if you shouldn’t try to get more information from them before you leave, their fear would indicate they know something of them. +> Feeling different? (Current thoughts) +You feel a bit surprised about what just transpired. You actually didn’t expect Salo to agree so readily, and you didn’t even plan to say most of the things you told him, it just came out of your mouth. You didn’t even believe all that “Golden Age of Humanity” stuff, you just wanted to say anything that would cause him to still follow you. Still it’s possible that you could, if the technology is as powerful as the legends say. + +Your interest in finding the Xont building is starting to increase and you can’t wait to see it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Alright, you’ve got a deal for now, but what’s in it for you?” +“Well the technology of course.” +“Ha ha! You can’t be serious! Assuming all this bullshit is real, and we get through all this alive, what makes you think we’d give anything that might benefit you?” +“But we have a partnership. You agreed.” +“I agreed to not kill you, in exchange for you to play guide, we might even let you go afterwards.” +“I hardly see you taking advantage of me as an equal partnership.” +”Well you see correct then. Think of it this way, you owe us for saving your life from the Mazatt, and this is your payment.” +The Elojin, looks at you for awhile in silence before speaking again. +“Very well, it would appear that I have no choice, but surely since I found this place and leading you there, I should get something out of it.” +“Well you got those coins. I wouldn’t call that nothing, oh wait, they’re mine now. Tell ya what; if we find super advanced cooking utensils we’ll let you have those. Now, if you’ll excuse me, I have to go convince my team that we’re going to be look for a mythical building with only an Elojin to guide us. You will be under guard at all times and any attempt to escape will be frowned upon with excessive force. Understand me?” +“Of course.” The Elojin says obediently. You can’t help but to think he’s going to try to betray you at some point, and in this case he’d have good reason to do so, but you’ll have to worry about that later. + +You and the Elojin exit your quarters and you address your team. Alyssa verbally tells the more unruly ones to shut up. + +“Alright team, we’re finally going to do something worthwhile on this planet, we’re going on a treasure hunt of sorts, guided by this spotty freak here. He’s claiming there’s a Xont structure here, yes the Xont, I’m sure you’ve all heard the legends over and over, and while it might just be Elojin bullshit, we don’t have anything better to do, so we might as we check it out. And if he’s lying we’ll make sure he’s the first one to die if he’s trying to lead us into a trap.” + +Most of the team looks a bit hesitant. Alyssa is stoic as always, but you can tell she’s not entirely happy about this idea. They’ll follow you though. A few of the lizards heard the word “Xont” and went running back into their huts, seems they aren’t the only ones you scared, since LeFleur looks down right petrified. Finally you get the predictable reaction from Salo. + +“WHAT!?!! Captain I’ve held my tongue for too long about your liberal views on aliens, but now I must speak! You are treading the dangerous road of heresy by consorting with Elojin trash! Their types are nothing but liars and deceivers and you would allow one to guide us to who knows where? He has twisted your mind, and I won’t let this blasphemy continue!" + +Indoctrinator Salo pulls his weapon out and aims it at the Elojin. +> Shoot Salo +You act too rashly. + +Salo, already suspicious of you and pointing his weapon in your direction easily anticipates your move for your own pistol. He doesn’t hesitate to shoot to kill, which he does so quite easily. + +Your death has a domino effect however. + +After you fall, Alyssa shoots Salo and kills him. Lieutenant LaFleur finding himself suddenly in command is unsure of what to do, so he goes by what he remembers in the book, and orders that Alyssa be “arrested” for treason. Of course he still hasn’t caught on to the idea that the “book” doesn’t really translate in the field so well. + +Most of the team doesn’t like LaFleur, and they REALLY didn’t like Salo, so they aren’t very inclined to obey LaFleur’s orders. While a heated argument between LaFleur and some team members goes on, the Lizards are disturbed by all this gunplay in their village and decide to defend themselves by attacking your team. During this attack, LaFleur suddenly becomes familiar with the term, “friendly fire.” and at this point Alyssa takes command, only to be shot in the back by the Elojin who slinked away soon after you were killed. He doesn’t get away with it, as a Lizard spear finds its way into his neck. + +After everything is said and done, a single member of your team survives the entire battle, then after about three days of subsisting on Lizard meat, he suddenly goes mad for no apparent reason and runs off into the jungle never to be heard from again. + +When the Empire ships arrive, they write the mission off as a failure and decide to just bombard the planet with mass drivers so it can’t be used by anyone else.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“You’ll forgive me if I don’t share your optimistic vision of utopia, even if I was inclined to believe that you were being serious. However, seeing as we haven’t found anything else of importance on this forsaken planet, I’m willing to entertain this idea, but you’re going to have to patch some holes up in your story before I even consider letting you live.” +“What holes?” +“Well let’s start with the whole building idea. If you found this Xont building, why didn’t you and your team make off with the stuff already? And don’t tell me that you were ambushed by the Mazatt because if you had been, they would’ve taken your findings, OR if the technology was as powerful as everyone claims, you would’ve been able to destroy them with it. Sounds like typical Elojin shit to me…” +“Ha ha ha! Who said I had a team? You see, unlike the rest of you galaxy conquerors we Elojin don’t feel the need to send an army to scout a planet, when one or two of us can accomplish the same thing when deployed in strategic areas.” +“Hmm, so there are more of you here.” +“Perhaps. It wouldn’t matter though since we’re deployed in completely separate parts of a planet, even if we were all together, we wouldn’t be able to stand up to a force the size of yours.” +“That brings me to the next question, if you found this building already, how come you just didn’t stay there? What the hell do you need us for?” you ask. +“Excellent question. Well there are some rather nasty things lurking in there. Much too powerful for me, but I’m sure you’d have no problem dealing with them. I didn’t get too far without them chasing me out. I even tried recruiting a nearby tribe of those silly little reptile creatures to use as cannon fodder, but they refused to go in. From what I can gather they consider the place to be haunted and seem to hold the place in awe and fear. I suppose I should’ve known better to ask the Mazatt for help when I discovered their encampment, but I figured they’d at least listen to reason. Things seem to work out though; your blue concubine came in with full guns blazing and brought me back here.” +“Okay last question, what proof do you have that it’s a Xont structure, and not just ruins of some other alien species.” +“This!” The Elojin quickly pulls out some weird coins out of his pocket and puts them on the table. +“The Mazatt never even took these from me. Idiots. These are genuine Xont coins though! The metal is like nothing I’ve ever seen on this anywhere else, let alone this planet. It’s obviously not from here. The writing on it looks similar to what many stories have described. And this symbol. Tentacles wrapped around a planet. This is supposed to be what the Xont emblem was.” +“Yeah, yeah, a writhing mass of tentacles. I’ve heard that description too. Several of them. Proves nothing.” +“But this is the closest anyone’s come to finding something directly relating to the stories! One of the more common stories I might add! Look we Elojin have done the most research in this than anyone, and I’m convinced what I’ve seen IS a Xont building!” + +Well it might all be a lie, but he certainly looks convinced, and you have to admit you are a bit curious now. You’re just not sure you want or need him to be with you, when you get to the building. +> Get some more info then have him killed +You examine the coins in more detail, and a sense of certainty overcomes you. You know this place exists. You can feel it in your heart. You have to find it, but you refuse to have this Elojin lead you. For all you know he could still be trying to trick you somehow. You decide to passively gain information out of him and hope he gives away his knowledge accidentally. + +“Well I suppose we could check it out…but how far is it? I don’t want to be dragging my team halfway across the planet. It’s dangerous enough just staying in one place.” You say in a non-prying manner. +“Oh you needn’t worry about that. Its not that far, it’s just to the east, there’s a native village near it, and a river too.” Calmly assures. +“That was easier than I expected. Thank you.” You say and pull a pistol and shoot the Elojin. +Before finishing him off, he speaks. +“You idiot…you’ll never find it…without me…” +“Wrong my spotty friend, you given us a vital clue, we can just follow the river to the east until it leads us there. You thought I was going to let you actually lead us?” + +Sergeant Alyssa comes running in and sees the Elojin dead on the ground. + +“Sir! We made sure he didn’t have any weapons!” +“Relax Sergeant, he didn’t attack me, I just found him to be no longer useful. Gather up the team, we’re heading out.” + +You and Alyssa leave the tent while she calls everyone to gather around. She has such a strong commanding presence. You never realized how alluring that was. + +“Alright team, thanks to our recently departed spotty friend, he has provided us with the location of a genuine Xont structure. Yes, the mythical Xont, but I have proof that it exists and the directions! Besides we were put on here to explore this forsaken planet anyway, so we might as well check it out. Who’s with me?” + +Your team looks a little unsure, but they trust you. Alyssa looks stoic as usual, but a slight twinge of apprehensiveness crosses her face, but you’ll make her see that this was a good idea. LaFleur looks craven, but typically is too scared to voice his opinion. Finally you hear the voice of dissention. + +“Captain, how can we trust what that alien scum told you? The Elojin are notorious liars!” +“Ah, but I have proof!” you hold up the coins. “See the Elojin thought he was going to trick us and use us but instead I have taken the advantage! We won’t be sharing this find with anyone, but us!” +Salo gives you a suspicious look. He doesn’t mind that you wasted the Elojin, but he’s a little disturbed by this new found excitement. + +“Very well, I suppose our duty to the Empire is to explore this planet, but I fail to see how the archaic ruins of some alien civilization which may not exist will benefit it.” + +You dismiss Salo’s xenophobia, and get ready to leave. The Lizards have been overhearing parts of your conversation, and have also gotten agitated every time the word “Xont” was mentioned. They don’t attack, but it’s obvious that you’ve worn out your welcome. + +You and your team leave for the jungle, after some time later, you reach a river. You make camp for the night, telling everyone that it’ll be faster to actually travel on the river, so tomorrow a raft of sorts is going to be made. There’s certainly no shortage of trees. After assigning some people for watch duty, you ponder your next move. +> Go to sleep +You resist the temptation, and go to sleep in your tent. In the middle of the night your camp is attacked by Lizards! You’re still groggy, when some of the Lizards enter your tent, putting an end to your dreams of greatness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You examine the coins in more detail, and a sense of certainty overcomes you. You know this place exists. You can feel it in your heart. You have to find it, but you refuse to have this Elojin lead you. For all you know he could still be trying to trick you somehow. You decide to passively gain information out of him and hope he gives away his knowledge accidentally. + +“Well I suppose we could check it out…but how far is it? I don’t want to be dragging my team halfway across the planet. It’s dangerous enough just staying in one place.” You say in a non-prying manner. +“Oh you needn’t worry about that. Its not that far, it’s just to the east, there’s a native village near it, and a river too.” Calmly assures. +“That was easier than I expected. Thank you.” You say and pull a pistol and shoot the Elojin. +Before finishing him off, he speaks. +“You idiot…you’ll never find it…without me…” +“Wrong my spotty friend, you given us a vital clue, we can just follow the river to the east until it leads us there. You thought I was going to let you actually lead us?” + +Sergeant Alyssa comes running in and sees the Elojin dead on the ground. + +“Sir! We made sure he didn’t have any weapons!” +“Relax Sergeant, he didn’t attack me, I just found him to be no longer useful. Gather up the team, we’re heading out.” + +You and Alyssa leave the tent while she calls everyone to gather around. She has such a strong commanding presence. You never realized how alluring that was. + +“Alright team, thanks to our recently departed spotty friend, he has provided us with the location of a genuine Xont structure. Yes, the mythical Xont, but I have proof that it exists and the directions! Besides we were put on here to explore this forsaken planet anyway, so we might as well check it out. Who’s with me?” + +Your team looks a little unsure, but they trust you. Alyssa looks stoic as usual, but a slight twinge of apprehensiveness crosses her face, but you’ll make her see that this was a good idea. LaFleur looks craven, but typically is too scared to voice his opinion. Finally you hear the voice of dissention. + +“Captain, how can we trust what that alien scum told you? The Elojin are notorious liars!” +“Ah, but I have proof!” you hold up the coins. “See the Elojin thought he was going to trick us and use us but instead I have taken the advantage! We won’t be sharing this find with anyone, but us!” +Salo gives you a suspicious look. He doesn’t mind that you wasted the Elojin, but he’s a little disturbed by this new found excitement. + +“Very well, I suppose our duty to the Empire is to explore this planet, but I fail to see how the archaic ruins of some alien civilization which may not exist will benefit it.” + +You dismiss Salo’s xenophobia, and get ready to leave. The Lizards have been overhearing parts of your conversation, and have also gotten agitated every time the word “Xont” was mentioned. They don’t attack, but it’s obvious that you’ve worn out your welcome. + +You and your team leave for the jungle, after some time later, you reach a river. You make camp for the night, telling everyone that it’ll be faster to actually travel on the river, so tomorrow a raft of sorts is going to be made. There’s certainly no shortage of trees. After assigning some people for watch duty, you ponder your next move. +> Visit Alyssa's tent +You feel a desire within you that you’ve had for too long. You must act upon it, and to hell with the Empire’s “policy” of getting involved with members of your own team. You enter Alyssa’s tent. + +She immediately awakens fully armed for combat, until she realizes it’s you, at which point she relaxes. + +“Sir, what’s wrong? Is there something you need my assistance with?” she asks. +“Oh yes…but right now I want to know, do you believe that you were meant for something greater?” +“I don’t understand.” + +You touch her hand, its pleasingly cool to the touch in this unbearable heat. + +“I’m saying you…like me, were meant for something more grand. I feel it. We were brought together through destiny, and then finally here to achieve it at last. Serving the Empire was just a means to an end.” + +“Sir, you’re acting strangely.” Alyssa says, giving a funny look at you touching her hand, she doesn’t remove it though. It’s a sign, a sign that you’re right. + +“You don’t need to call me sir, you…” + +Suddenly you hear firing, and a member of your team barges in the tent. + +“Sir, we’re under attack! It’s the Lizards!” + +You and Alyssa quickly rush out to the battle which is already in progress. You fight like you never have before; nothing is going to get in the way of you and your destiny! + +The battle is short and in the end you are the victor, some of the Lizards have uncharacteristically surrendered. Something they don’t often do. Perhaps this is another sign. +> Kill the Lizards +Showing no mercy you decide to kill the Lizards. Nobody has any objections; they did attack you after all. Salo is certainly pleased. + +The next day your team begins building the rafts, there’s a lot of grumbling and dissension as the work isn’t pleasant. Salo reminds everyone of their duty to the Empire and all that rhetoric. You realize you’re going to have to get rid of Salo eventually; his loyalty to the Empire is too strong, and he’ll interfere with your plans. When you find the Xont technology, you’ll use it and make a break from the corrupt Empire; perhaps you could even make a change in the galaxy… + +Eventually rafts are finally finished and you are anxious to be on your way. You make sure Alyssa is on your raft, you put LaFleur in charge of the other one. You don’t know if you want Salo traveling so close to you though. +> Have Salo on your raft +Keep your friends close and your enemies closer, you think. You decide its best if you keep an eye on Salo. Perhaps he’ll even meet with an accident… + +During your journey you notice Alyssa has seemed a bit preoccupied, you go up to talk to her. + +“What’s wrong?” +“Oh nothing Captain.” +“As I said before you don’t need to be so formal, you can call me by my name.” you say and gently grasp her hand and embrace her. The cool sensation makes you forget how damn hot this planet is. + +While Alyssa is left speechless by you obvious continued attraction, Salo has been watching you and is very vocal on the matter. + +“Sir! You can’t do this! You know Empire policy! And an alien on top of all of it? You’re showing a blatant disregard for rules and regulations! Don’t think I didn’t see you a few days ago exiting this blue whore’s tent! I can’t let this continue!” +“You’re out of line Salo!” +“No YOU’RE out of line! Maybe you outrank me, but I’m here to make sure this team doesn’t fall to alien influences! And between your lust for this alien bitch and this quest to find this mythical…” + +Excellent! He’s getting riled up, now to press the issue. + +“Salo, you’re not in charge of anything. I’m giving the orders here! And I’m telling you that you WILL fall in line right now!” + +This sets Salo off, he goes for his pistol, but you anticipate this and grab your own and fire before he does. Your aim is dead on the mark, but Salo still manages to lunge at you, causing the both of you to fall into the water. Salo, in his death throws attempts to drown you by holding on to while you struggle for air. Your realize that your lungs filling with water isn’t a pleasant experience, as you blackout. + +However your next experience is a lot better. Alyssa dives in to save you and you awaken on the raft with Alyssa breathing life into your body. A cold icy wave runs through it. You just wish you were in a better condition to appreciate it a lot more. As it is, you feel disorientated and a lot different. Your previous thoughts of leaving the Empire, finding the Xont ruins and all those other weird thoughts that suddenly filled your head are gone. + +“Is he okay?” LaFleur shouts. +“Yes!” Alyssa shouts back to him. + +You suddenly get up, and tell everyone to abandon this quest. You don’t want to get everyone killed trying to find something that might not exist anyway. Once again nobody has any objections. Everyone’s always in favor of living. Alyssa seems to show a sign of relief. You eventually dock and make camp on land, during this time you notice the coins you had are gone, you ask around if anyone has seen them, but nobody has. You go into Alyssa’s tent and ask her. + +“No Captain, I haven’t maybe you lost them when you were underwater.” +“I guess, but I had them on me pretty securely, I still don’t see how I could’ve lost them.” +“Oh well, what’s done is done, don’t worry about it.” +“Yeah, but even though we might not have found a Xont building, those coins could’ve still been proof that its here, maybe we could go back and I could dive in to try to find…” + +Alyssa looks into your eyes very seriously. + +“Captain…don’t worry about it.” She says and kisses you. + +What follows next makes you REALLY not worry about it. + +When the Empire ships finally arrive, a report about Salo’s death is made out to be due to extreme heat fever. The Xont rumor isn’t mentioned and Paradise is written off as a low priority. You and your team are sent on your next mission. Your relationship with Alyssa is kept secret of course, but you always wonder if you really lost those coins or Alyssa got rid of them when she rescued you. + +If she did, then she may have saved you in more ways than one.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Showing no mercy you decide to kill the Lizards. Nobody has any objections; they did attack you after all. Salo is certainly pleased. + +The next day your team begins building the rafts, there’s a lot of grumbling and dissension as the work isn’t pleasant. Salo reminds everyone of their duty to the Empire and all that rhetoric. You realize you’re going to have to get rid of Salo eventually; his loyalty to the Empire is too strong, and he’ll interfere with your plans. When you find the Xont technology, you’ll use it and make a break from the corrupt Empire; perhaps you could even make a change in the galaxy… + +Eventually rafts are finally finished and you are anxious to be on your way. You make sure Alyssa is on your raft, you put LaFleur in charge of the other one. You don’t know if you want Salo traveling so close to you though. +> Have Salo on Lafleur's raft +You don’t want Salo near you trying to discover your plans. You spend a lot of time talking with Alyssa, and telling her how you’re destined for greatness and this journey is going to allow you and her to break away from the Empire. She doesn’t look convinced though. She’ll soon see though, you know she will. + +On your journey Salo shouts over stating you should dock for awhile, which is actually a good idea, since it might be an opportunity to get rid of him. Soon after docking you suggest that you and Salo should explore a bit to see if the Xont structure is nearby, he agrees and goes with you. + +When you make sure you’re far enough away, you make your move, unfortunately so does Salo. In fact he’s even more organized. He’s had a few team members from the raft that he was on secretly following you. He must’ve been poisoning the minds of your team members the whole time. You feel several shots hit your body. Salo makes a speech while standing over you. + +“So, I was right, you WERE under alien influence. Your girlfriend will be next when we get back to camp. Did you not think I couldn’t see how close you were getting with that blue concubine of yours? Did you not think I could not SEE the treachery in your heart? This “quest” of yours is at an end. All traitors must die. Long live the Empire!” + +Indoctrinator Salo then ends your quest.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You feel a desire within you that you’ve had for too long. You must act upon it, and to hell with the Empire’s “policy” of getting involved with members of your own team. You enter Alyssa’s tent. + +She immediately awakens fully armed for combat, until she realizes it’s you, at which point she relaxes. + +“Sir, what’s wrong? Is there something you need my assistance with?” she asks. +“Oh yes…but right now I want to know, do you believe that you were meant for something greater?” +“I don’t understand.” + +You touch her hand, its pleasingly cool to the touch in this unbearable heat. + +“I’m saying you…like me, were meant for something more grand. I feel it. We were brought together through destiny, and then finally here to achieve it at last. Serving the Empire was just a means to an end.” + +“Sir, you’re acting strangely.” Alyssa says, giving a funny look at you touching her hand, she doesn’t remove it though. It’s a sign, a sign that you’re right. + +“You don’t need to call me sir, you…” + +Suddenly you hear firing, and a member of your team barges in the tent. + +“Sir, we’re under attack! It’s the Lizards!” + +You and Alyssa quickly rush out to the battle which is already in progress. You fight like you never have before; nothing is going to get in the way of you and your destiny! + +The battle is short and in the end you are the victor, some of the Lizards have uncharacteristically surrendered. Something they don’t often do. Perhaps this is another sign. +> Spare them +Yes of course! These creatures can sense the greatness in you, that’s why they wish to join you! This is just the first step, after you gain the power of the Xont, you’ll be able to unite this entire planet under your command! These Lizard creatures are not unintelligent and would make excellent servants. + +“Where’s our best Lizard translator?” you ask. +“Um, that would be me sir.” Corporal Higgins steps up and says. +“Good, you’re still alive, tell these Lizards that they’ll be coming with us. They can also have the honor of carrying some of our equipment.” + +While corporal Higgins follows your orders, Indoctrinator Salo stops you from going back to your tent protesting severely and very vocally. + +“Captain! These creatures need to be exterminated! They attacked us! The will of the Emperor demands no less!” +“The Emperor isn’t here.” + +This callus remark doesn’t endear you to Salo. + +“You would DARE say such a thing? You are walking the line of heresy Captain! Perhaps you have allowed yourself to be contaminated too much by alien influences!” +“Out of my way Salo, I don’t want to hear this shit right now.” +“Oh what would you rather do? Fornicate with your blue alien whore? Don’t think I didn’t notice you going into Sergeant Alyssa’s tent earlier! I am the eyes of the Empire!” +“Last chance Salo, to get out my way…” +Salo, is right in your face at this point. “No Captain, this is YOUR last chance! You need to…” + +Before Salo can go on another tirade, you push him back, pull out your pistol and blast him in the face! The rest of your team watches in silence as you stand over his body ranting. + +“YOU WILL NOT GET IN THE WAY OF MY DESTINY! NOT YOU, NOT THE EMPIRE, NOTHING!” + +The next morning work begins on the rafts; they’re built relatively quickly with the extra help of the Lizards and the fact that nobody seems to want to piss you off after what happened to Salo. Soon the two large rafts are shoved into the river. Success, they float, but you never really had any doubt. You make sure Alyssa and Higgins are on your raft. You assign Lieutenant LaFleur to the other, and continue on your journey. You have some canopies set up during the trip, so you can at least take shade from the infernal sun beating down on you during the trip. It seems like it got even hotter, how you long for the cool touch of Alyssa’s skin again. + +As you think about this, you notice a strange rodent like creature running past your feet making squeaking noises. + +“What the hell is that?!” you ask you team. +“Oh, that’s a Slink Slink. Or at least that’s what the Lizards call them. I believe they eat them sir.” Corporal Higgins replies. +“Well how the hell did it get on here?” +“I dunno they live in this area I guess and one snuck on board, they’re harmless sir, one of the Lizards will probably eat it later, nothing to worry about.” + +You don’t have time to worry about such trivial matters, you wonder if you should reassure your team that this IS the right path. You’ve noticed that ever since the incident with Salo, your team has been edgy and looking a little less confident in you. +> Make a speech +You decide that you need to put the team’s minds at ease by giving an inspiring speech. You order that you make a landing at the nearest clearing, when both of the rafts land you gather everyone and begin to speak. + +“I know everyone here feels a little uneasy after what I did to Salo, and this exploration we’re going on. Some of you may be wondering if I’m still following the Empire. Well let me say right now, no.” + +This revelation is met with shocked silence. + +“What has the Empire done for us? Any of us? We’re expected to just die and follow orders. Look at where they sent us! This hellhole of a planet to find resources to support it. We’re like fucking drones sent from the hive to find food to support some great bloated queen. Well I say no more! I see a greater destiny for me, for all of us! With the Xont technology, we could make our own way and break away from the Empire! Others would join us in time. All of you could share in this utopia I see before us! I’ve trusted you all with my life at one time, and I’m asking you to trust me in this. I know this might be scary to break away from the Empire, but I’m asking you not to blindly follow a corrupt system anymore, but to embrace destiny instead. Who’s with me?” + +Various members of your team begin to speak amongst themselves and look at each other, but you know they’ll follow you, you can sense they recognize greatness when they see it. One of the solidiers begins to speak. + +“You’ve never lead us wrong before sir, and we’ve followed you this long. You’re right, it hasn’t been the Empire that’s looked out for us, it’s been you. We’re with you!” + +A cheer goes up, yet still you see two that aren’t so sure. Alyssa and LaFleur. LaFleur you know is a victim of his own cowardice. He is unable to grab destiny when it’s presented before him, but Alyssa…you don’t understand why she feels the way she does. You’re about to talk to her, but LaFleur runs up to you very anxiously. + +“Sir! We can’t abandon the Empire! They’ll hunt us down and kill us for treason! They might even have the Indoctrinator Order torture us first! Oh man! Oh man! I can’t take this! I can’t be part of this!” LaFleur start hyperventilating and is nearly in tears at this point. + +Something’s going to have to be done, you can’t have this. +> Calmly convince LaFleur +“Lieutenant, calm yourself. That’s your fear talking. Fear that was instilled in you by the Empire. Think about it. You of ALL people should want to leave it. You never really wanted to serve anyway did you? You were forced to by your family’s tradition. You basically were born into slavery. I’m telling you to break the chains. Be the first one in your family to finally be free.” + +You words seem to have an effect on LaFleur. He begins to tear up. + +“I’m going to do it! You’re right! I never wanted to be part of the Empire! Hah! You hear that Dad? I’m not following your footsteps anymore! Hahahahaha! I’m free! I’m fucking free! YEAH!” LaFleur follows up his sudden outburst with a couple of shots to the air. + +Unfortunately LaFleur’s enthusiasm has attracted some rather interesting predators which immediately reveal themselves by uncamouflaging themselves and savagely biting chunks of flesh out of one of your soldiers! + +“Fire!” you shout, and your soldiers obey, the fauna proves to be more difficult than you think though, they resemble snakes with little legs, but are a whole lot quicker and blink in and out of sight. You must be by a nest because they seem endless; you’ll lose a lot of people at this rate. + +“Back to the river! Destiny awaits!” you shout while you all run back the rafts while firing. + +Soon you’re on your way again. You shoo away a Slink Slink which is squeaking underfoot. In fact there are a few more of them now. More must’ve wandered on while you were briefly docked. You can’t be concerned about that now. You have other important matters on your mind. You know that the Xont structure must be getting close, and you need to be prepared. You look over at Alyssa who doesn’t show it, but you can tell she’s still troubled by all this. You walk over to her. + +“Alyssa.” +“Sir.” +“You don’t need to call me that, you can address me by my name.” you say and touch her face. There’s that cool feeling again. +“I…don’t know, I don’t feel comfortable addressing you as common, you’re always going to be the Captain to me.” +“Are you scared of leaving the Empire?” +“Of course not, my loyalty has always been to you. I’d follow you anywhere. You saved my life, I’m indebted to you but… it’s just…never mind.” + +You make a bold move and put your arms around Alyssa, she doesn’t resist, but you see a slight hint of sadness in her face. You wish you could make her see that this will all work out. She will see eventually. You know she will. As you’re holding her, you’re interrupted again. + +“Sir. There’s a Lizard village up ahead, should we stop?” Higgins asks + +Ah ha! You knew you weren’t crazy! The Elojin said there was a Lizard village near the Xont structure, this must be it! You’re very close now. Perhaps you should stop though, the Lizards may know something. Besides you’re going to eventually unite this planet under your rule, you should start making allies. +> Stop +You order your team to get ready to dock again. As you approach the village, the Lizards see you and go running to a big hut and quickly run back out. They don’t attack, but eye you warily with spears and bows drawn. + +“Higgins we’re probably going to have to deal with the chieftain, I want these Lizards to help us if possible, so I want you on top of your game!” +“I will sir, but what if they attack us anyway?” +“Well then we crush them as always, but usually Lizards either attack immediately or not at all, so we’re probably safe…they probably recognize greatness when they see it, just like these Lizards did.” You say pointing to your Lizard porters. + +This village is a little bigger than the ones you’ve come across before, the Lizards seem more organized as well. You even see a few of them marching and doing some sort of drill routine. All you questions are soon answered, when the chieftain emerges from his hut. + +“I am Chief Kruz. Do you seek my wisdom?” he asks. + +Holy shit, it’s a Mazatt! Well that explains why the Lizards are so organized. + +“I can see by your face that you were not expecting to see a Mazatt, in charge of this village. So tell me why has the Terran Empire come to this place? Is it the same reason as my own government? To plunder its resources? (Sigh) Such short sightness. I was much like the rest of my race until I found a different way, after I was sent to this planet.” + +He speaks very well for a Mazatt, usually they don’t even bother, except to shout warcries. From the sound of it, he also has left his government. Perhaps you may have a common interest, but then again perhaps not. +> Speak with Kruz +“Actually Chief, we’re no longer part of the Terran Empire. I have seen the corruption of it and want no more part of it.” +“Hmmm, yes. I did sense something slightly different about you. I am glad that you have seen the futility of the current power structure in the galaxy. However, if you are here for what I believe you to be, then we still have problems. I cannot allow you to steal my destiny.” +“And what destiny might that be?” you say, fully knowing what the answer will be. +“The same you believe yours to be. To gain the power of the ancient Xont. Still, I do not wish to kill you right off hand, perhaps we can come to some sort of agreement.” +“How about I just kill you right now?” +“You could try I suppose, but you would not make it out of here alive. Besides, you would fail, destiny cannot be changed. I have been chosen to bring order to the galaxy. I cannot die before my mission is completed.” +“And you are sure of this? How do you not know it is ME, who is meant to do this?” +“Hahahaha! If I really thought that, I would step aside without hesitation, but you are not…but perhaps this is a test? Is it possible that destiny has chosen two worthy candidates?” +“Impossible. I have been chosen, you are merely delusional.” You say confidently. +“Perhaps you would like to convince me? I guarantee that is the only way you shall make it out of here without a fight, or perhaps you’re still looking for a fight, but a fight between only us. A fight to the death, destiny will choose the winner.” + +Actually he makes sense, if you ARE chosen for this destiny, then you will win no matter what. +> Convince Kruz +“Ah good I prefer to debate. So many are always willing to solve problems with violence, this will be a nice change. We can talk in my hut, whoever convinces the other shall take control of the other’s followers.” +You realize that gaining an army of Lizards would help immensely. +“Agreed.” +You both enter the hut sit across from each other, alone. Kruz speaks first. + +“Shall I tell you my tale of how I found my destiny? My team was deployed on this planet probably much like yours. We went through the usual motions, until we encountered these natives. Of course as you probably know, they’re mostly hostile, but somehow I sensed a certain honor in these scaly natives. They are like the Mazatt. A race of warriors, and they’re completely trustworthy unlike all the other races we’ve encountered. Yes, they were primitive, but they do not deserve enslavement. I wanted to try to do something new, make peace with them and perhaps eventually incorporate them into the Dominion, but not as a slave race.” + +Interesting point of view for a Mazatt, the Empire of course does this when possible, but the Dominion never does. The Lizards are shorter than the Mazatt, perhaps that’s why Kruz had an affinity for them. + +“Of course others in my team felt I was being soft. A few tried to challenge my position as leader, I had to slay them, but soon my entire squad rose up against me, not content to just shoot me and get it over with, they beat me, and threw me over a small cliff. They thought me dead I suppose, but I was not out of it yet. Even with my head bad head wound I struggled to get up and I crawled inside a nearby cave, and that’s when destiny found me, and I found THIS! + +The Mazatt brandishes a coin! One exactly like the ones you obtained from the Elojin. + +“I knew what it was; I had heard the legends of the Xont before. I never paid too much attention to them before, but somehow I knew this was real. I just had to find the ruins of the Xont, but then I fell into unconsciousness. That’s when the scalies found me. The fact they never ate me and brought me back to full health only confirmed that I had been spared for something greater. When they saw that I held this coin, they made me their leader. My old life was gone; I was discarded by a system that is bound for ultimate destruction anyway. These scalies are my new people, this planet my new home. I have visions that confirm what I know in my heart, that I am destined to find and use the Xont technology on this planet and bring about a new age in the galaxy.” + +Well you can see he’s convinced himself, now see if you can convince him that he’s entirely wrong and this is all in his head. +> Explain your story in full detail and stand by it +After explaining your story, Kruz is unconvinced, and begins to drill holes in your own belief. + +“All you’ve been doing is wandering on a delusional thought!” +“What?!” you exclaim +“You’ve done nothing to prove yourself! Look at what I’ve accomplished; I have an entire village of scalies following me, because they believe! You haven’t proven yourself to anyone else but your own people, which was easy to do since you already held command over them. They already trusted in you and you stated you still had to kill one of them. Convincing outsiders is far more difficult. The only way you could get the scalies that you have now to follow you, is by beating them in battle. I didn’t have to do that, they saw me and instantly knew I was chosen for a greater destiny.” + +You haven’t had your belief challenged like this, you begin to sweat and raise your voice. + +“I HAVE THESE!” you say and slam your coins on the table. + +“So? Quantity doesn’t signify quality. And how did you obtain them? You said you took them from an Elojin! You didn’t find them, like I found mine. You basically stole them and as I said before, destiny cannot be stolen. And you are attempting to steal it. + +You realize Kruz has spoken the truth. Your belief in being chosen has been shattered, all your actions have been for nothing. +> Accept it +You weep as you accept this revelation, but you realize you can’t go on. You take out your pistol, Kruz doesn’t even stop you. He knows he’s not in any danger. + +You point it at your head. + +“This is my destiny.” You say. + +And then you meet it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After explaining your story, Kruz is unconvinced, and begins to drill holes in your own belief. + +“All you’ve been doing is wandering on a delusional thought!” +“What?!” you exclaim +“You’ve done nothing to prove yourself! Look at what I’ve accomplished; I have an entire village of scalies following me, because they believe! You haven’t proven yourself to anyone else but your own people, which was easy to do since you already held command over them. They already trusted in you and you stated you still had to kill one of them. Convincing outsiders is far more difficult. The only way you could get the scalies that you have now to follow you, is by beating them in battle. I didn’t have to do that, they saw me and instantly knew I was chosen for a greater destiny.” + +You haven’t had your belief challenged like this, you begin to sweat and raise your voice. + +“I HAVE THESE!” you say and slam your coins on the table. + +“So? Quantity doesn’t signify quality. And how did you obtain them? You said you took them from an Elojin! You didn’t find them, like I found mine. You basically stole them and as I said before, destiny cannot be stolen. And you are attempting to steal it. + +You realize Kruz has spoken the truth. Your belief in being chosen has been shattered, all your actions have been for nothing. +> Refuse it +Even though you know that you haven’t been destined for anything, even though your mind tells you that what Kruz says is the truth, you can’t accept it. You revert back to your own base human behavior and that’s: If you can’t have it then nobody will. + +You pull out your pistol, Kruz doesn’t even try to stop you, he believes you’re going to kill yourself, besides destiny won’t let him die…he finds that he was wrong about that. + +He clutches the blast wound to his chest and falls in disbelief. + +“The betrayal… the betrayal…” he says and then dies. + +Neither of you were correct. There’s no meaning in anything, it’s all been just a random choice of actions and coincidences, you can’t change things. You see that now, you throw the coins to the floor. + +You exit the hut in a daze. You don’t notice anything going around you. One of the Lizards looks in the hut and begins making hissing noises, which causes the rest of the Lizards to talk amongst themselves. They don’t attack though, they just stare at you as you walk back to the rafts Your own team wonders what’s going on, and attempt to speak to you, but Alyssa tells them all to back off. She knows what happened. + +She helps you to the raft where you collapse. She kneels down to pick you up. + +“I want to go home.” You say looking up at her, and fall unconscious. +“We will.” She says. + +During your unconscious state, a few things happen. First of all the rest of your team is completely confused about what to do next. Granted they were all not really feeling like themselves either, but they were basically following you in an ill-conceived plan of treason, and now that plan’s been abandoned. Alyssa tells them everyone’s just as guilty so it’s in everyone’s best interest they all forget what happened. The Empire needn’t know about any of this incident. Lieutenant LaFleur disagrees; he doesn’t want to go back! He sneers and says if you’re too weak to accept destiny then he will! He demands to stay, Alyssa attempts to reason with him, but he won’t hear of it. He states how he’s going to find the Xont structure and crush the Empire. + +Alyssa shrugs and states whoever wants to go back to the Empire, can go with her, anyone who wants to stay can stay with LaFleur. Even with his new found “courage” people still don’t care for him, with only the Lizard porters staying with him. He remains behind while everyone else leaves on the rafts and head back to the area where you were first exploring. LaFleur makes a few ranting remarks as they leave. + +When you awaken Alyssa tells you all of what happened. The remaining time on Paradise is relatively uneventful, though the rest of your team members are a little wary of you. When the Empire ships come, a story is made up about the planet being used as a secret Mazatt training camp and how you were attacked. The Empire never needs too much of a reason to bombard a planet. Paradise is decimated by mass drivers. Most of your team members request a transfer, such a sudden mass transfer request, raises a few eyebrows by your superiors, of, but nobody says anything. A few stay, but you mainly wind up with a whole new team on your next mission. + +The important thing to you though, is Alyssa still remains by your side. And that’s much more important than gaining power or overthrowing the government.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Ah good I prefer to debate. So many are always willing to solve problems with violence, this will be a nice change. We can talk in my hut, whoever convinces the other shall take control of the other’s followers.” +You realize that gaining an army of Lizards would help immensely. +“Agreed.” +You both enter the hut sit across from each other, alone. Kruz speaks first. + +“Shall I tell you my tale of how I found my destiny? My team was deployed on this planet probably much like yours. We went through the usual motions, until we encountered these natives. Of course as you probably know, they’re mostly hostile, but somehow I sensed a certain honor in these scaly natives. They are like the Mazatt. A race of warriors, and they’re completely trustworthy unlike all the other races we’ve encountered. Yes, they were primitive, but they do not deserve enslavement. I wanted to try to do something new, make peace with them and perhaps eventually incorporate them into the Dominion, but not as a slave race.” + +Interesting point of view for a Mazatt, the Empire of course does this when possible, but the Dominion never does. The Lizards are shorter than the Mazatt, perhaps that’s why Kruz had an affinity for them. + +“Of course others in my team felt I was being soft. A few tried to challenge my position as leader, I had to slay them, but soon my entire squad rose up against me, not content to just shoot me and get it over with, they beat me, and threw me over a small cliff. They thought me dead I suppose, but I was not out of it yet. Even with my head bad head wound I struggled to get up and I crawled inside a nearby cave, and that’s when destiny found me, and I found THIS! + +The Mazatt brandishes a coin! One exactly like the ones you obtained from the Elojin. + +“I knew what it was; I had heard the legends of the Xont before. I never paid too much attention to them before, but somehow I knew this was real. I just had to find the ruins of the Xont, but then I fell into unconsciousness. That’s when the scalies found me. The fact they never ate me and brought me back to full health only confirmed that I had been spared for something greater. When they saw that I held this coin, they made me their leader. My old life was gone; I was discarded by a system that is bound for ultimate destruction anyway. These scalies are my new people, this planet my new home. I have visions that confirm what I know in my heart, that I am destined to find and use the Xont technology on this planet and bring about a new age in the galaxy.” + +Well you can see he’s convinced himself, now see if you can convince him that he’s entirely wrong and this is all in his head. +> Concentrate on pointing out flaws in his story +“It proves nothing! If anything you haven’t displayed anything that would convince even me!” +“What?!” Kruz exclaims. +“First of all, where are you? You’re in a village of primitives! And so they saved you instead of eating you, big deal! We’ve come across peaceful tribes before. So you’ve managed to impress them that they made you their chieftain, that’s not that big of an accomplishment. I myself have Lizards following me. They’re primitives, they can be impressed by the simplest of things, and a strong personality can take advantage of that, BUT one truly destined for greatness can convince his peers!” + +Kruz listens intently. + +“Look at me; I have managed to convince my own people, as well as Lizards that I have a destiny! What did your people do when you merely tried to change their way of thinking a little bit? They attempted to kill you! They saw nothing within you that indicates greatness, they didn’t respect you enough.” +“You do not understand Mazatt society! We are not as open to change as you humans are!” +“Oh? Then how do you explain yourself? You certainly were open to change. No, do not blame your team for your own failings. Why I have just convinced a life long coward who used to do everything by the book to cast off the shackles of Empire slavery to believe in me. Why? Because he saw the destiny within me and he knew I was right! Your team didn’t see it in you; otherwise they wouldn’t have tried to kill you!” + +Kruz has never had his belief challenged before, he begins to sweat and raise his voice. + +“I found THIS! Proof that I am chosen! I have visions of what is to be!” he shouts and holds up the coin in desperation. + +You pull out the five coins you have and slam them on the table. Kruz is surprised. You hold on to one of them and speak. + +“If these prove anything, then the fact that I have five, proves that destiny still favors me more in quantity as well as quality. And as for your visions, you said you smacked your head pretty good when you were thrown off the cliff. It’s more likely you’ve been suffering from delusions from a closed head injury.” + +Kruz looks down, you’ve shattered some of his confidence, now to finish it. + +“And why did you not order me killed right away? If you really thought you were the chosen one, you would’ve killed me right away as either an imposter or a threat. But no, you wanted me to convince you, because deep down, you don’t even believe you’ve been chosen. When you saw me, you knew I was the one.” You stare hard at Kruz into his eyes enforcing your will. + +He breaks down and falls to the floor and looks up at you. + +“You are the chosen…” +> Kill him +Kruz is a broken Mazatt. He accepts his fate as you shoot him in the head. You emerge from the hut proving that you have been the one chosen for destiny. You take control of the village and begin ordering the Lizards to perform searches for the Xont structure immediately. + +They follow, but they aren’t enthusiastic like they should be. Higgins reports that they miss Kruz and felt he was a better leader. This news makes you furious! You proved yourself to be better than that pretender! This irritation only grows as time passes. Days pass and the Xont structure still hasn’t been found, and worse, other surrounding Lizard tribes have been attacking despite attempts to make alliances. Old fashioned conquest works, but the Lizards constantly resist and just don’t have the man power to keep your holdings even through fear. Eventually the Lizard tribes do start uniting…against YOU. + +A coalition of tribes marches on your position, and while your Lizards are definitely more organized, better trained and better equipped, you’re severely out numbered. You remain confident. You remember reading about an ancient battle on Earth called Rorke’s Drift, and using this as inspiration you try to motivate your people with a speech about how you’ll be able to stand against so many because destiny has chosen you. + +The attack comes, it’s a massacre, your followers are overwhelmed, and it’s beginning to look like another ancient Earth battle…Little Big Horn. You begin ranting like a madman, screaming at them all for failing you. During the battle you see Alyssa fall, you rush over to her, but she’s dying. You feel her heavenly caress across your face before she finally drifts into eternal sleep. You wipe a tear from your eye. + +“Don’t worry I’ll be with you soon.” You say to her, and set her down. + +You fly into a rage; you’re the last one left. You begin killing Lizards, ignoring the fatal blows they land upon you. You laugh saying how they can’t kill you. And then finally the adrenaline wears off and you finally succumb to your wounds. You look at the coins that lead you to this end. A fleeting thought crosses your mind in your last moments of life, you never actually found these coins, you stole them from the Elojin who found them. + +“Destiny… didn’t choose… me.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“It proves nothing! If anything you haven’t displayed anything that would convince even me!” +“What?!” Kruz exclaims. +“First of all, where are you? You’re in a village of primitives! And so they saved you instead of eating you, big deal! We’ve come across peaceful tribes before. So you’ve managed to impress them that they made you their chieftain, that’s not that big of an accomplishment. I myself have Lizards following me. They’re primitives, they can be impressed by the simplest of things, and a strong personality can take advantage of that, BUT one truly destined for greatness can convince his peers!” + +Kruz listens intently. + +“Look at me; I have managed to convince my own people, as well as Lizards that I have a destiny! What did your people do when you merely tried to change their way of thinking a little bit? They attempted to kill you! They saw nothing within you that indicates greatness, they didn’t respect you enough.” +“You do not understand Mazatt society! We are not as open to change as you humans are!” +“Oh? Then how do you explain yourself? You certainly were open to change. No, do not blame your team for your own failings. Why I have just convinced a life long coward who used to do everything by the book to cast off the shackles of Empire slavery to believe in me. Why? Because he saw the destiny within me and he knew I was right! Your team didn’t see it in you; otherwise they wouldn’t have tried to kill you!” + +Kruz has never had his belief challenged before, he begins to sweat and raise his voice. + +“I found THIS! Proof that I am chosen! I have visions of what is to be!” he shouts and holds up the coin in desperation. + +You pull out the five coins you have and slam them on the table. Kruz is surprised. You hold on to one of them and speak. + +“If these prove anything, then the fact that I have five, proves that destiny still favors me more in quantity as well as quality. And as for your visions, you said you smacked your head pretty good when you were thrown off the cliff. It’s more likely you’ve been suffering from delusions from a closed head injury.” + +Kruz looks down, you’ve shattered some of his confidence, now to finish it. + +“And why did you not order me killed right away? If you really thought you were the chosen one, you would’ve killed me right away as either an imposter or a threat. But no, you wanted me to convince you, because deep down, you don’t even believe you’ve been chosen. When you saw me, you knew I was the one.” You stare hard at Kruz into his eyes enforcing your will. + +He breaks down and falls to the floor and looks up at you. + +“You are the chosen…” +> Spare him +“Get up, you shall follow me.” +“But…” +“No I am not going to kill you, perhaps you were not chosen, but I still see use for you.” + +You immediately take control of the village and order for the search of the Xont structure. Your team gets a much needed break and spends most of its time in the village, now that you have Lizards to do the searching. Your new command consists of Alyssa, LaFleur, Higgins and Kruz who turns out to be very helpful and the most enthusiastic of your followers. Diplomatic missions to other Lizard villages are accomplished while others are conquered. New Lizard troops are trained immediately; soon you have a REAL army. Still, you haven’t found the Xont structure, but it hardly matters, you are accomplishing your destiny even without the technology, you just can’t wait for the day that you find it, your power will increase tenfold. + +Everyone is pretty much behind you, and is enthusiastic about your goal. Only Alyssa seems troubled the entire time. You almost think that she won’t become your wife, but she accepts. While you try to always reassure her and make her see the destiny that you see, she never does. She’s loyal, but she always has a saddened expression on her face whenever she looks at you. An expression her people almost never show accept in times of great sorrow. + +When the Empire ships come, you have many of the Lizard tribes united under your banner. You make contact with the Empire saying that you’ve made a lot of progress and wait for a shuttle to land, at which point you immediately capture it and take it back to the main ship with your team and a few of your elite Lizard warriors. You catch the Empire off guard for the most part, and capture the main ship without too much trouble, but the battle cruisers that were assigned to it are alerted and begin firing at you. You fight back, but your team isn’t experienced with ship to ship combat and your captured ship is vitally damaged. You refuse to run though; you have a destiny to crush the Empire. + +But as the ship explodes and your followers die around you, you finally have a moment of clarity: + +There was never any way you could fight the Empire. You were just as delusional as Kruz. Alyssa saw this; she was the only one who ever did. You look over at her and she sees that you finally understand. + +“Why did you follow me?” you ask. +“Don’t you know?” she asks back. + +You know the answer. + +You squeeze her hand one last time as you both see the bright blinding light of a proton torpedo blast through the bridge.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Actually Chief, we’re no longer part of the Terran Empire. I have seen the corruption of it and want no more part of it.” +“Hmmm, yes. I did sense something slightly different about you. I am glad that you have seen the futility of the current power structure in the galaxy. However, if you are here for what I believe you to be, then we still have problems. I cannot allow you to steal my destiny.” +“And what destiny might that be?” you say, fully knowing what the answer will be. +“The same you believe yours to be. To gain the power of the ancient Xont. Still, I do not wish to kill you right off hand, perhaps we can come to some sort of agreement.” +“How about I just kill you right now?” +“You could try I suppose, but you would not make it out of here alive. Besides, you would fail, destiny cannot be changed. I have been chosen to bring order to the galaxy. I cannot die before my mission is completed.” +“And you are sure of this? How do you not know it is ME, who is meant to do this?” +“Hahahaha! If I really thought that, I would step aside without hesitation, but you are not…but perhaps this is a test? Is it possible that destiny has chosen two worthy candidates?” +“Impossible. I have been chosen, you are merely delusional.” You say confidently. +“Perhaps you would like to convince me? I guarantee that is the only way you shall make it out of here without a fight, or perhaps you’re still looking for a fight, but a fight between only us. A fight to the death, destiny will choose the winner.” + +Actually he makes sense, if you ARE chosen for this destiny, then you will win no matter what. +> Fight Kruz +You choose to fight Kruz, he sighs heavily. + +“So be it.” He says. + +The center of the village is cleared as you square off, both of your followers cheering for their respective leaders. + +You’re a good hand to hand fighter, but Kruz has the advantage, on top of being a Mazatt which already makes him stronger than you, he also has been training himself vigorously during his time in the village. Eventually he overpowers you. He even says he’ll spare your life, if you swear alliegence. You refuse to give in, death is preferable than serving him. + +He makes good on your inflexibility. The rest of your team is then killed as well.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You order your team to get ready to dock again. As you approach the village, the Lizards see you and go running to a big hut and quickly run back out. They don’t attack, but eye you warily with spears and bows drawn. + +“Higgins we’re probably going to have to deal with the chieftain, I want these Lizards to help us if possible, so I want you on top of your game!” +“I will sir, but what if they attack us anyway?” +“Well then we crush them as always, but usually Lizards either attack immediately or not at all, so we’re probably safe…they probably recognize greatness when they see it, just like these Lizards did.” You say pointing to your Lizard porters. + +This village is a little bigger than the ones you’ve come across before, the Lizards seem more organized as well. You even see a few of them marching and doing some sort of drill routine. All you questions are soon answered, when the chieftain emerges from his hut. + +“I am Chief Kruz. Do you seek my wisdom?” he asks. + +Holy shit, it’s a Mazatt! Well that explains why the Lizards are so organized. + +“I can see by your face that you were not expecting to see a Mazatt, in charge of this village. So tell me why has the Terran Empire come to this place? Is it the same reason as my own government? To plunder its resources? (Sigh) Such short sightness. I was much like the rest of my race until I found a different way, after I was sent to this planet.” + +He speaks very well for a Mazatt, usually they don’t even bother, except to shout warcries. From the sound of it, he also has left his government. Perhaps you may have a common interest, but then again perhaps not. +> Kill him +You can sense it as sure as he probably can; you’ve both been searching for the same thing. You don’t even need to say anything to each other. Well nobody is going to steal your destiny. The predictable occurs… + +You attack. +He attacks. +Both of your respective followers attack. +You all die.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Lieutenant, calm yourself. That’s your fear talking. Fear that was instilled in you by the Empire. Think about it. You of ALL people should want to leave it. You never really wanted to serve anyway did you? You were forced to by your family’s tradition. You basically were born into slavery. I’m telling you to break the chains. Be the first one in your family to finally be free.” + +You words seem to have an effect on LaFleur. He begins to tear up. + +“I’m going to do it! You’re right! I never wanted to be part of the Empire! Hah! You hear that Dad? I’m not following your footsteps anymore! Hahahahaha! I’m free! I’m fucking free! YEAH!” LaFleur follows up his sudden outburst with a couple of shots to the air. + +Unfortunately LaFleur’s enthusiasm has attracted some rather interesting predators which immediately reveal themselves by uncamouflaging themselves and savagely biting chunks of flesh out of one of your soldiers! + +“Fire!” you shout, and your soldiers obey, the fauna proves to be more difficult than you think though, they resemble snakes with little legs, but are a whole lot quicker and blink in and out of sight. You must be by a nest because they seem endless; you’ll lose a lot of people at this rate. + +“Back to the river! Destiny awaits!” you shout while you all run back the rafts while firing. + +Soon you’re on your way again. You shoo away a Slink Slink which is squeaking underfoot. In fact there are a few more of them now. More must’ve wandered on while you were briefly docked. You can’t be concerned about that now. You have other important matters on your mind. You know that the Xont structure must be getting close, and you need to be prepared. You look over at Alyssa who doesn’t show it, but you can tell she’s still troubled by all this. You walk over to her. + +“Alyssa.” +“Sir.” +“You don’t need to call me that, you can address me by my name.” you say and touch her face. There’s that cool feeling again. +“I…don’t know, I don’t feel comfortable addressing you as common, you’re always going to be the Captain to me.” +“Are you scared of leaving the Empire?” +“Of course not, my loyalty has always been to you. I’d follow you anywhere. You saved my life, I’m indebted to you but… it’s just…never mind.” + +You make a bold move and put your arms around Alyssa, she doesn’t resist, but you see a slight hint of sadness in her face. You wish you could make her see that this will all work out. She will see eventually. You know she will. As you’re holding her, you’re interrupted again. + +“Sir. There’s a Lizard village up ahead, should we stop?” Higgins asks + +Ah ha! You knew you weren’t crazy! The Elojin said there was a Lizard village near the Xont structure, this must be it! You’re very close now. Perhaps you should stop though, the Lizards may know something. Besides you’re going to eventually unite this planet under your rule, you should start making allies. +> Keep going +You can’t stop now, not when your destination is so close! + +“Keep going!” you say. “We’ll come back later as gods.” + +As you pass by the village, a few Lizards see your rafts float by and begin hissing at you, they start throwing spears and shooting arrows! You respond by ordering your team to fire back at them. + +More Lizards come pouring out of village to help attack you, to make matters worse they’re moving out their own canoe like vessels to reach you! Some are even swimming + +“Kill them! Kill them all! Our destiny awaits! Let nothing stop us!” you yell blasting the brains out of some Lizard attempting to board the raft. + +You look over to LaFleur’s raft, and he’s not doing so well. The Lizards have decimated most of them with their well placed arrows and spears and have now completely overwhelmed the few remaining, LaFleur is fighting harder than you’ve ever since him before. He’s like a whole new man. + +“You can’t kill me you Lizard bastards! Hahahahaha! I’m free!” are LaFleur’s last words before falling to the Lizards. You order everyone to fire upon the raft and everything on it, effectively sinking it. + +Eventually your own raft drifts far enough away from the village that the attack stops. Your remaining team is in pretty bad shape. Some are dying, and at this point many are completely demoralized. All your Lizard followers are dead. You start looking at your coins again, while more Slink Slinks squeak past you. + +“We’ve survived. This planet is trying to destroy us, but it won’t. I will find the Xont ruins, and then we shall smite all those that oppose us. Who’s with me?” You say. + +Alyssa comes up to you; she’s wounded, but still able to walk around. She touches your hand and looks into your eyes. + +“Captain?... Let it go.” She says. +> Let it go +You look down, fall to your knees and weep. You realize Alyssa is right. This was a fool’s quest. There probably isn’t a Xont ruin here, and if there is, you aren’t anywhere near it. The Elojin might’ve even given you wrong directions on purpose. You’ve gotten everyone killed for no good reason. You weren’t any better than the Empire. +“I’m sorry.” + +Alyssa holds you for awhile, and takes the coins from you and throws them into the river. + +“Its okay Captain, it wasn’t your fault.” She says. As you welcome her cold body next to yours, you collapse from exhaustion. + +You drift in an out of consciousness, you know you’re moving, but it’s like you’re being dragged, eventually you fully wake up with all your capabilities. You see Alyssa. + +“What’s going on? What happened?” +“You probably shouldn’t be up and around yet.” Alyssa tells you. +“But what’s happened?” +“Well after you passed out, me and few of the remaining team members that were still alive, took the raft apart and used some of it to make a stretcher instead, which we put you on. Unfortunately, we got attacked again by some more Lizards. I was the only one who survived, so I had to drag you the rest of the way and abandon the rest of the equipment. I would’ve gone back for some of it, but I didn’t want to leave you alone.” +“Well I’m up now, so we should go back for it, we’re going to need what little supplies we have left, because the Empire ships still aren’t going to be here for awhile.” +“So we are going back to the Empire?” +“Well, I can’t think of anything else. I mean what’s the alternative? Hide and live on this planet?” +“It’s up to you Captain.” +“No, I want to be off this planet as soon as possible. I hate this place and what happened to me. Even facing an Empire tribunal and execution sounds better than spending one more day here.” +“Why would that happen?” +“Well come on, I was speaking treason before. I shot an Empire Indoctrinator. I’d say I’m in pretty big trouble.” +“Who saw it? Who heard it? I didn’t see or hear any of those things. When I told you my loyalty was to you and not the Empire, I meant that Captain.” + +You realize you nearly lost everything in trying to gain nothing. Alyssa’s willingness to say nothing and her loyalty is more than payment for whatever she thinks her debt is to you for saving her life. If anything, you’re indebted to her. And even though Alyssa thinks you were under some sort of mind control, you still vow that you’ll never act that reckless ever again. + +When the Empire ships come, you both back each other up about a story of Elojin ambushes, and hostile Lizard natives everywhere. You suggest there’s nothing of any worth on the planet except death. Your superiors nod and decide to bombard the place with mass drivers so nobody else can use it as a secret base of some sort, and you’re sent on your next mission where you’ll find your new replacements. + +You and Alyssa always keep what happened on Paradise a secret, and not just the Xont incident, but the OTHER thing that occurred a few days after the incident. + +Well okay maybe the other thing occurred more than a few times, and still occurs from time to time…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You can’t stop now, not when your destination is so close! + +“Keep going!” you say. “We’ll come back later as gods.” + +As you pass by the village, a few Lizards see your rafts float by and begin hissing at you, they start throwing spears and shooting arrows! You respond by ordering your team to fire back at them. + +More Lizards come pouring out of village to help attack you, to make matters worse they’re moving out their own canoe like vessels to reach you! Some are even swimming + +“Kill them! Kill them all! Our destiny awaits! Let nothing stop us!” you yell blasting the brains out of some Lizard attempting to board the raft. + +You look over to LaFleur’s raft, and he’s not doing so well. The Lizards have decimated most of them with their well placed arrows and spears and have now completely overwhelmed the few remaining, LaFleur is fighting harder than you’ve ever since him before. He’s like a whole new man. + +“You can’t kill me you Lizard bastards! Hahahahaha! I’m free!” are LaFleur’s last words before falling to the Lizards. You order everyone to fire upon the raft and everything on it, effectively sinking it. + +Eventually your own raft drifts far enough away from the village that the attack stops. Your remaining team is in pretty bad shape. Some are dying, and at this point many are completely demoralized. All your Lizard followers are dead. You start looking at your coins again, while more Slink Slinks squeak past you. + +“We’ve survived. This planet is trying to destroy us, but it won’t. I will find the Xont ruins, and then we shall smite all those that oppose us. Who’s with me?” You say. + +Alyssa comes up to you; she’s wounded, but still able to walk around. She touches your hand and looks into your eyes. + +“Captain?... Let it go.” She says. +> Embrace Destiny +“We can’t stop now Alyssa. We’re almost there! All our dreams will come true!” + +Alyssa just shakes her head in dismay, which is suddenly followed up by a look of shock and pain, you both look down and see yet another of one those snake things. This one has just bitten Alyssa deep in the leg. You immediately grab it and squeeze the life out of it, but its too late, whatever deadly poison it injected in her works fast. She falls; you hold on to her and whisper that everything will be alright. She looks at you one last time with sad eyes and then shuts them. + +“It’s okay Alyssa, I’ll bring you back to life, the Xont will have technologies that bring the dead back, I heard that story before. Its gotta be true!” + +You carry Alyssa’s body back to the raft and launch it back down the river, still convinced that you’ll find the Xont structure. You make sure to keep her body under the canopy; she still looks as beautiful in death as she did in life. Most of your team is dead or unconscious and after a few days pass, all of them are dead, only the Slink Slinks remain on your raft, running and squeaking about. The sun beats down relentlessly on your boat of death. You feel so hot, you wish you could feel the coolness of Alyssa’s body again, but it no longer generates such temperature anymore. + +You walk around, observing your dead team members, the Slink Slinks hastily attempt to get out of your way. You manage to pick up one of the Slink Slinks and look at it in curiosity. You let it go as it desperately squeaks in fear. You stand at the edge of the raft and look off into the distance as the sun continues to destroy what’s left of you. + +“I will achieve my destiny. I will find the Xont ruins, and plunder the ancient technology and secrets within. I will bring my beloved Alyssa back to life. I will unite the Lizards on this planet to follow my commands, and build an army. When the Empire ships come, we shall take them over and begin to build a fleet. Others shall join me when they see that the old Empire is corrupt and stagnant. I shall destroy and replace it with a stronger one. I shall found a dynasty with my beloved Alyssa, and form a pure bloodline of strong future rulers. All that oppose us, shall be crushed, the Elojin, the Mazatt, and the Krik. The galaxy shall be ours. For I have been chosen by destiny, and I shall meet it.” + +You turn around one last time and address your team. + +“Who’s with me?”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide that you need to put the team’s minds at ease by giving an inspiring speech. You order that you make a landing at the nearest clearing, when both of the rafts land you gather everyone and begin to speak. + +“I know everyone here feels a little uneasy after what I did to Salo, and this exploration we’re going on. Some of you may be wondering if I’m still following the Empire. Well let me say right now, no.” + +This revelation is met with shocked silence. + +“What has the Empire done for us? Any of us? We’re expected to just die and follow orders. Look at where they sent us! This hellhole of a planet to find resources to support it. We’re like fucking drones sent from the hive to find food to support some great bloated queen. Well I say no more! I see a greater destiny for me, for all of us! With the Xont technology, we could make our own way and break away from the Empire! Others would join us in time. All of you could share in this utopia I see before us! I’ve trusted you all with my life at one time, and I’m asking you to trust me in this. I know this might be scary to break away from the Empire, but I’m asking you not to blindly follow a corrupt system anymore, but to embrace destiny instead. Who’s with me?” + +Various members of your team begin to speak amongst themselves and look at each other, but you know they’ll follow you, you can sense they recognize greatness when they see it. One of the solidiers begins to speak. + +“You’ve never lead us wrong before sir, and we’ve followed you this long. You’re right, it hasn’t been the Empire that’s looked out for us, it’s been you. We’re with you!” + +A cheer goes up, yet still you see two that aren’t so sure. Alyssa and LaFleur. LaFleur you know is a victim of his own cowardice. He is unable to grab destiny when it’s presented before him, but Alyssa…you don’t understand why she feels the way she does. You’re about to talk to her, but LaFleur runs up to you very anxiously. + +“Sir! We can’t abandon the Empire! They’ll hunt us down and kill us for treason! They might even have the Indoctrinator Order torture us first! Oh man! Oh man! I can’t take this! I can’t be part of this!” LaFleur start hyperventilating and is nearly in tears at this point. + +Something’s going to have to be done, you can’t have this. +> Shoot LaFleur +“I WON’T HAVE COWARDS GET IN THE WAY OF MY DESTINY!” you suddenly scream and shoot LaFleur the same way you shot Salo. + +Loyalty is a fickle thing. As quickly as you inspired your team, you quickly just destroyed their confidence in you with this unnecessary act. You don’t look like a visionary anymore you look like a delusional, power mad leader who just wants everyone to follow him. You’re no better than the Empire. + +An argument breaks out, which degenerates into a fire fight. During this chaos a nest of weird snake like creatures are attracted to the noise and attack everyone. Their ability to blink in and out of sight makes them hard to defend against, let alone the fact that you’re also fighting members of your own team. Eventually you feel some fangs sink into your arm and a painful sensation throughout your body, and within moments it’s all over.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Yes of course! These creatures can sense the greatness in you, that’s why they wish to join you! This is just the first step, after you gain the power of the Xont, you’ll be able to unite this entire planet under your command! These Lizard creatures are not unintelligent and would make excellent servants. + +“Where’s our best Lizard translator?” you ask. +“Um, that would be me sir.” Corporal Higgins steps up and says. +“Good, you’re still alive, tell these Lizards that they’ll be coming with us. They can also have the honor of carrying some of our equipment.” + +While corporal Higgins follows your orders, Indoctrinator Salo stops you from going back to your tent protesting severely and very vocally. + +“Captain! These creatures need to be exterminated! They attacked us! The will of the Emperor demands no less!” +“The Emperor isn’t here.” + +This callus remark doesn’t endear you to Salo. + +“You would DARE say such a thing? You are walking the line of heresy Captain! Perhaps you have allowed yourself to be contaminated too much by alien influences!” +“Out of my way Salo, I don’t want to hear this shit right now.” +“Oh what would you rather do? Fornicate with your blue alien whore? Don’t think I didn’t notice you going into Sergeant Alyssa’s tent earlier! I am the eyes of the Empire!” +“Last chance Salo, to get out my way…” +Salo, is right in your face at this point. “No Captain, this is YOUR last chance! You need to…” + +Before Salo can go on another tirade, you push him back, pull out your pistol and blast him in the face! The rest of your team watches in silence as you stand over his body ranting. + +“YOU WILL NOT GET IN THE WAY OF MY DESTINY! NOT YOU, NOT THE EMPIRE, NOTHING!” + +The next morning work begins on the rafts; they’re built relatively quickly with the extra help of the Lizards and the fact that nobody seems to want to piss you off after what happened to Salo. Soon the two large rafts are shoved into the river. Success, they float, but you never really had any doubt. You make sure Alyssa and Higgins are on your raft. You assign Lieutenant LaFleur to the other, and continue on your journey. You have some canopies set up during the trip, so you can at least take shade from the infernal sun beating down on you during the trip. It seems like it got even hotter, how you long for the cool touch of Alyssa’s skin again. + +As you think about this, you notice a strange rodent like creature running past your feet making squeaking noises. + +“What the hell is that?!” you ask you team. +“Oh, that’s a Slink Slink. Or at least that’s what the Lizards call them. I believe they eat them sir.” Corporal Higgins replies. +“Well how the hell did it get on here?” +“I dunno they live in this area I guess and one snuck on board, they’re harmless sir, one of the Lizards will probably eat it later, nothing to worry about.” + +You don’t have time to worry about such trivial matters, you wonder if you should reassure your team that this IS the right path. You’ve noticed that ever since the incident with Salo, your team has been edgy and looking a little less confident in you. +> Continue on your journey +As you progress, your team begins taking amongst themselves, your outburst and killing of Salo was a little over the top. Eventually an argument breaks out on your raft and results in a fight. Some of your team disagrees with your recent actions, even if they didn’t like Salo. They think you’re acting irrationally and are leading them on a suicide mission. Hostilities increase and shots are fired. The mutineers out number you and only Alyssa and Higgins remain by your side and both of them are killed in the ensuing battle. As you kill the last mutineers, you’re hit a few times and fall into the water. LaFleur has been watching the entire time and ordered the people on his raft to stay out of the fight. Upon seeing that you’re unable to swim properly in your wounded state, he lets his raft drifts away and allows you to drown. + +When the Empire ships arrive back to the planet he states how he had to take command after you went mad, and is promoted. He also manages to achieve what he always wanted, transference to a safe desk command.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Yes of course! These creatures can sense the greatness in you, that’s why they wish to join you! This is just the first step, after you gain the power of the Xont, you’ll be able to unite this entire planet under your command! These Lizard creatures are not unintelligent and would make excellent servants. + +“Where’s our best Lizard translator?” you ask. +“Um, that would be me sir.” Corporal Higgins steps up and says. +“Good, you’re still alive, tell these Lizards that they’ll be coming with us. They can also have the honor of carrying some of our equipment.” + +While corporal Higgins follows your orders, Indoctrinator Salo stops you from going back to your tent protesting severely and very vocally. + +“Captain! These creatures need to be exterminated! They attacked us! The will of the Emperor demands no less!” +“The Emperor isn’t here.” + +This callus remark doesn’t endear you to Salo. + +“You would DARE say such a thing? You are walking the line of heresy Captain! Perhaps you have allowed yourself to be contaminated too much by alien influences!” +“Out of my way Salo, I don’t want to hear this shit right now.” +“Oh what would you rather do? Fornicate with your blue alien whore? Don’t think I didn’t notice you going into Sergeant Alyssa’s tent earlier! I am the eyes of the Empire!” +“Last chance Salo, to get out my way…” +Salo, is right in your face at this point. “No Captain, this is YOUR last chance! You need to…” + +Before Salo can go on another tirade, you push him back, pull out your pistol and blast him in the face! The rest of your team watches in silence as you stand over his body ranting. + +“YOU WILL NOT GET IN THE WAY OF MY DESTINY! NOT YOU, NOT THE EMPIRE, NOTHING!” + +The next morning work begins on the rafts; they’re built relatively quickly with the extra help of the Lizards and the fact that nobody seems to want to piss you off after what happened to Salo. Soon the two large rafts are shoved into the river. Success, they float, but you never really had any doubt. You make sure Alyssa and Higgins are on your raft. You assign Lieutenant LaFleur to the other, and continue on your journey. You have some canopies set up during the trip, so you can at least take shade from the infernal sun beating down on you during the trip. It seems like it got even hotter, how you long for the cool touch of Alyssa’s skin again. + +As you think about this, you notice a strange rodent like creature running past your feet making squeaking noises. + +“What the hell is that?!” you ask you team. +“Oh, that’s a Slink Slink. Or at least that’s what the Lizards call them. I believe they eat them sir.” Corporal Higgins replies. +“Well how the hell did it get on here?” +“I dunno they live in this area I guess and one snuck on board, they’re harmless sir, one of the Lizards will probably eat it later, nothing to worry about.” + +You don’t have time to worry about such trivial matters, you wonder if you should reassure your team that this IS the right path. You’ve noticed that ever since the incident with Salo, your team has been edgy and looking a little less confident in you. +> Would you like to know more? (Corporal Higgins) +Corporal Higgins… + +Corporal Higgins isn’t too much different from the rest of your team. He basically just does what is asked of him. He’s more than proven himself in battle though. For whatever reason, he seems to be able to communicate with the Lizards better than anyone else. He says it’s because he used to own lizards back on Earth as pets when he was a kid, and these are just big versions of them.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You examine the coins in more detail, and a sense of certainty overcomes you. You know this place exists. You can feel it in your heart. You have to find it, but you refuse to have this Elojin lead you. For all you know he could still be trying to trick you somehow. You decide to passively gain information out of him and hope he gives away his knowledge accidentally. + +“Well I suppose we could check it out…but how far is it? I don’t want to be dragging my team halfway across the planet. It’s dangerous enough just staying in one place.” You say in a non-prying manner. +“Oh you needn’t worry about that. Its not that far, it’s just to the east, there’s a native village near it, and a river too.” Calmly assures. +“That was easier than I expected. Thank you.” You say and pull a pistol and shoot the Elojin. +Before finishing him off, he speaks. +“You idiot…you’ll never find it…without me…” +“Wrong my spotty friend, you given us a vital clue, we can just follow the river to the east until it leads us there. You thought I was going to let you actually lead us?” + +Sergeant Alyssa comes running in and sees the Elojin dead on the ground. + +“Sir! We made sure he didn’t have any weapons!” +“Relax Sergeant, he didn’t attack me, I just found him to be no longer useful. Gather up the team, we’re heading out.” + +You and Alyssa leave the tent while she calls everyone to gather around. She has such a strong commanding presence. You never realized how alluring that was. + +“Alright team, thanks to our recently departed spotty friend, he has provided us with the location of a genuine Xont structure. Yes, the mythical Xont, but I have proof that it exists and the directions! Besides we were put on here to explore this forsaken planet anyway, so we might as well check it out. Who’s with me?” + +Your team looks a little unsure, but they trust you. Alyssa looks stoic as usual, but a slight twinge of apprehensiveness crosses her face, but you’ll make her see that this was a good idea. LaFleur looks craven, but typically is too scared to voice his opinion. Finally you hear the voice of dissention. + +“Captain, how can we trust what that alien scum told you? The Elojin are notorious liars!” +“Ah, but I have proof!” you hold up the coins. “See the Elojin thought he was going to trick us and use us but instead I have taken the advantage! We won’t be sharing this find with anyone, but us!” +Salo gives you a suspicious look. He doesn’t mind that you wasted the Elojin, but he’s a little disturbed by this new found excitement. + +“Very well, I suppose our duty to the Empire is to explore this planet, but I fail to see how the archaic ruins of some alien civilization which may not exist will benefit it.” + +You dismiss Salo’s xenophobia, and get ready to leave. The Lizards have been overhearing parts of your conversation, and have also gotten agitated every time the word “Xont” was mentioned. They don’t attack, but it’s obvious that you’ve worn out your welcome. + +You and your team leave for the jungle, after some time later, you reach a river. You make camp for the night, telling everyone that it’ll be faster to actually travel on the river, so tomorrow a raft of sorts is going to be made. There’s certainly no shortage of trees. After assigning some people for watch duty, you ponder your next move. +> Feeling different? (Current thoughts) +You feel very confident about this “quest”. It’s like this is a whole new beginning for you. You even have fleeting thoughts of going AWOL, with all the power that the Xont structure could hold, who says you have to do this for the Empire? The Empire hasn’t done anything for you except allow you to stagnate, with this find, you could change all that. Make your own way for once, and not be just faceless drone, and you could have Alyssa by your side still…you’ve been noticing how lovely she is as of late. You don’t know why you haven’t before. Perhaps it’s because you now have a clarity that you’ve never felt before.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Send him in, you can kill him afterwards if he proves to be useless.” + +Alyssa nods and brings the Elojin in roughly. + +“Ow! Watch it you, blue Empire whore!” he says which is followed by a kick to his back by Alyssa before she leaves. The Elojin brushes himself off and stands up. +“I swear you humans will allow any primitive race into your club nowadays. What planet did you pick that one up from? +“You had something important to tell me?” you ask, but the Elojin completely ignores you. +“Mind you, she is a pretty primitive; her pointy ears almost make me want to laugh though.” +“I suggest you stop talking about my Sergeant and start talking about what you know.” +He still doesn’t listen. +“You know I’ve always been impressed by you humans. I’ve read a lot about your species. We have more in common than you might think. Why if it wasn’t for your lack of spots and disgusting hairy body, we could be brothers!” + +Your patience has run out, you grab him by his scrawny throat. + +“Look you hairless spotty freak, you better start talking before I let my Sergeant blast a big hole in you and that’s AFTER I turn you over to my Indoctrinator who’ll be only to happy to get his hands on the likes of you.” + +Well that got his attention, and apparently he does know something of humans because, Indoctrinator widened his eyes a bit. He keeps his cool though. + +“See now you humans know how to instill fear. Not like those idiot Mazatts that were trying to get information from me. I don’t know how those brainless brutes even mastered the wheel, let alone achieve space travel. Anyway, there’s an old Xont building on this planet.” +Now your eyes widen. +“WHAT?! Impossible! The Xont are a myth! The only knowledge that ANYONE has of them is from stories, there’s never been any hard evidence of this race found by any of the major or minor powers and that’s from centuries of searching.” +“Well perhaps we weren’t looking hard enough. The galaxy is a big place you know.” the Elojin sniffs. +“Don’t bother asking me where it’s at though, I won’t tell you where it’s at, no matter what you do. However I’d be willing to SHOW you, if you’d consider this a joint venture between our two governments. Just think this could bring about a new age of cooperation between our two species!” + +Translation: “I’m going to use you for my own gain, until I can find a way to fuck you over.” +> Let Salo take care of him +You don’t have time for mind games, if this Elojin actually has something important then he can tell it to Salo. He’s been itching to torture something anyway, might as well be an Elojin. This’ll kill two birds with one stone. + +“Sergeant Alyssa!” you yell, and she enters immediately. +“Yes sir?” +“Take this Elojin to Indoctrinator Salo.” You say, the Elojin looks genuinely surprised. +”WHAT!? Hold on now, there’s no need for that!” +“Oh? Well are you going to tell me where the Xont structure is at then?” +“I…can’t do that! You’ll just kill me after I told you! Are you really ready to risk losing a chance at gaining the most important find of the millennium? You have to keep me alive! It’s the only way you’ll find it!” +“You think so? So you really think you’ll be able to withstand the interrogation? And trust me, Salo really likes his work.” +The Elojin doesn’t look scared anymore; in fact he’s downright defiant. “Fine, turn me over to your narrow minded torturer! He’ll get nothing from me! We Elojin are a lot tougher than you humans give us credit for. We were exploring space while your race was still throwing bones in the air and fighting over pieces of yellow fruit and we’ll be here long after your so called “Empire” falls to the ravages of time, and history forgets you!” +“Maybe,.. but not today. Take him away, and tell Salo to keep the screams to a minimum.” + +As Alyssa takes the Elojin away, he looks at her and speaks again. + +“Huh. It must be nice to be a slave to such an enlightened society.” +“Move it, Elojin.” Alyssa replies. + +Time passes and there hasn’t been a peep from Salo’s tent. You know you said for him to keep it quiet, but you didn’t think he’d actually do it. + +You wonder if you should check on him, the rest of your team is pretty much going through their usual routines, so there’s not much to do right now. You could always relax. +> Go check on Salo +Well you might as well see what that sadist got out of his victim. You head over and enter Salo’s tent. + +“I TOLD YOU NOT TO DISTURB ME!” Salo screams. +“What?!” +“Oh…its you. Forgive my outburst Captain. I’ve been a little on edge.” +“I…see…” you say as you notice that Salo has dismembered the Elojin. Body parts and blood are covering the floor of the tent. Salo sees your reaction to the sight and tries to explain. +“Sorry for this mess, I got a little carried away, the Elojin proved to be particularly defiant. I was surprised, most Elojins squeal even without the threat of torture. This one wouldn’t say anything, at least nothing that he hadn’t already told you. I guess I got a little angry…” +“I’d say you got a little more than angry.” +Salo begins to suddenly weep. +“I’m sorry Captain! I couldn’t get any more information out of him! I failed you and as an Indoctrinator of the Empire!” + +Okay this is really weird, you’ve never seen any side of Salo that indicates any like for you, let alone any feelings that would result in tears. + +“Uh, its okay Salo, I’m sure you did your best. Don’t worry about it, the Elojin was probably talking bullshit anyway about the Xont, we all know that’s just a myth. Maybe you should take it easy for awhile, and make sure you clean up this tent, who knows what the hell this mess this will attract.” +“I will.” Salo says looking off into space. + +You slowly exit Salo’s tent, and call LaFleur and Alyssa to your tent to talk about this. + +“What’s going on sir?” +“Salo’s gone off his fucking rocker that’s what. He’s always been walking that line, but I think he’s finally gone over this time. He completely dismembered that Elojin and he’s just acting creepy in general and not the usual type of creepy either. He’s definitely not entirely sane anymore.” +“So he’s a threat then? We kill him?” Alyssa asks. +“Whoa, hold on there! As much as I can’t stand him, we ARE still following Empire law here; we can’t just shoot him, at least not without reason.” You say. +“Well in situations like this, the procedure is to immediately have him checked out by a doctor…” LaFleur comments. +“Uh duh, Doc got killed trying to communicate with some Lizards remember? Besides I don’t need a professional to tell me that he’s crazy, I saw it with my own eyes.” +“Well then the next step would be to have him shipped off to an Empire mental facility…but since we aren’t anywhere near one of those and won’t be for a long time, we’re suppose to keep him isolated, and under guard like a prisoner, until such time that he can be transferred to the proper facility.” LaFleur says. +“Wonderful. We can’t move effectively around with a madman in tow. (Sigh) Well I guess we could just spend the rest of our time in this village. Make sure everyone’s extra nice to the Lizards, we don’t need them rising up against us now. We can do exploratory missions of the surrounding area. Salo will be restricted to his tent and kept under guard at all times. Alyssa, inform the rest of the team. LaFleur we’re going into Salo’s tent.” +“Um, erm, what for?” +“To take away his weapons! We can’t have him armed.” +“Sir maybe you should let Sergeant Alyssa…” +“I said me and YOU, Lieutenant! Besides, he might attack Alyssa, he didn’t like non-humans before, he’s probably only gotten more intolerant since then. Its apparent the only thing he’s ever really respected is rank, even if it hasn’t been us personally. Now come on!” + +You and LaFleur approach Salo’s tent cautiously. +> Enter first +You shake off the violent thoughts you’re having and enter the tent first. You see Salo, rubbing blood on himself and looking at some sort of coins. He looks up when you approach. +“I TOLD YOU…oh it’s you Captain…” +“Hello Salo.” You say and then slowly take his gun that’s lying on the floor. You pass it to LaFleur who’s petrified. + +“What’s that you got there?” you ask, still being careful of the fact that Salo still has his knife. +“Oh this? I found these on the Elojin, after I interrogated him. Strange things they are…I’ve never seen anything like them…almost hypnotic…” + +You’re going to take a wild guess but you’ve got a hunch that those things are causing the weirdness. You don’t see how you’re going to resolve this without physical confrontation. You get into a better position to lunge at him. + +“So Salo…” you say, and then you strike! + +You and Salo wrestle for awhile, LaFleur runs off, but he at least goes and gets Alyssa to help you. Eventually you both knock out Salo, and you take all the coins and melt them with a plasma pistol. Crisis averted. You wonder what the coins were though. Were they some sort of Elojin mind weapon, or maybe the Elojin was speaking the truth about finding a Xont structure? If they were Xont in origin then you’re just as glad not to have looked for the place. This planet is hazardous as it is and you don’t need to add that kind of danger. + +Later Salo feels more like him self, and is completely apologetic and thanks you for saving his life. Actually he’s nothing like his old self; you almost think he’s still under some sort of control, but he’s not. In fact he pretty much leaves everyone alone for the rest of your time on Paradise, he spends a lot of his time in some sort of penance. + +When the Empire ships arrive you give a relatively mundane report, and leave out the trouble with Salo, in exchange for your silence, he transfers out of your squad and back to the Order. + +You and your team get sent on your next mission infinitely a lot happier without an Indoctrinator watching over you constantly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Well you might as well see what that sadist got out of his victim. You head over and enter Salo’s tent. + +“I TOLD YOU NOT TO DISTURB ME!” Salo screams. +“What?!” +“Oh…its you. Forgive my outburst Captain. I’ve been a little on edge.” +“I…see…” you say as you notice that Salo has dismembered the Elojin. Body parts and blood are covering the floor of the tent. Salo sees your reaction to the sight and tries to explain. +“Sorry for this mess, I got a little carried away, the Elojin proved to be particularly defiant. I was surprised, most Elojins squeal even without the threat of torture. This one wouldn’t say anything, at least nothing that he hadn’t already told you. I guess I got a little angry…” +“I’d say you got a little more than angry.” +Salo begins to suddenly weep. +“I’m sorry Captain! I couldn’t get any more information out of him! I failed you and as an Indoctrinator of the Empire!” + +Okay this is really weird, you’ve never seen any side of Salo that indicates any like for you, let alone any feelings that would result in tears. + +“Uh, its okay Salo, I’m sure you did your best. Don’t worry about it, the Elojin was probably talking bullshit anyway about the Xont, we all know that’s just a myth. Maybe you should take it easy for awhile, and make sure you clean up this tent, who knows what the hell this mess this will attract.” +“I will.” Salo says looking off into space. + +You slowly exit Salo’s tent, and call LaFleur and Alyssa to your tent to talk about this. + +“What’s going on sir?” +“Salo’s gone off his fucking rocker that’s what. He’s always been walking that line, but I think he’s finally gone over this time. He completely dismembered that Elojin and he’s just acting creepy in general and not the usual type of creepy either. He’s definitely not entirely sane anymore.” +“So he’s a threat then? We kill him?” Alyssa asks. +“Whoa, hold on there! As much as I can’t stand him, we ARE still following Empire law here; we can’t just shoot him, at least not without reason.” You say. +“Well in situations like this, the procedure is to immediately have him checked out by a doctor…” LaFleur comments. +“Uh duh, Doc got killed trying to communicate with some Lizards remember? Besides I don’t need a professional to tell me that he’s crazy, I saw it with my own eyes.” +“Well then the next step would be to have him shipped off to an Empire mental facility…but since we aren’t anywhere near one of those and won’t be for a long time, we’re suppose to keep him isolated, and under guard like a prisoner, until such time that he can be transferred to the proper facility.” LaFleur says. +“Wonderful. We can’t move effectively around with a madman in tow. (Sigh) Well I guess we could just spend the rest of our time in this village. Make sure everyone’s extra nice to the Lizards, we don’t need them rising up against us now. We can do exploratory missions of the surrounding area. Salo will be restricted to his tent and kept under guard at all times. Alyssa, inform the rest of the team. LaFleur we’re going into Salo’s tent.” +“Um, erm, what for?” +“To take away his weapons! We can’t have him armed.” +“Sir maybe you should let Sergeant Alyssa…” +“I said me and YOU, Lieutenant! Besides, he might attack Alyssa, he didn’t like non-humans before, he’s probably only gotten more intolerant since then. Its apparent the only thing he’s ever really respected is rank, even if it hasn’t been us personally. Now come on!” + +You and LaFleur approach Salo’s tent cautiously. +> Let Lafleur enter first +“Get in there you fucking coward!” you say and shove LaFleur in first. Salo, surprised by LaFleur sudden appearance, immediately attacks him by stabbing him in the neck. +“I TOLD YOU NOT TO DISTURB ME!” he screams. +As LaFleur falls, Salo continues to stab him, completely ignoring you. + +You take advantage of Salo’s preoccupation and shoot him in the head, you start laughing and continue firing. You feel a rush of pleasure that you’ve never felt before when killing someone. You quickly try to regain your composure. Alyssa and a few others enter the tent. + +“Sir! Are you alright?” +“Ugh yeah. I…I don’t know what the hell’s happening, I feel weird. Salo killed LaFleur so I reacted…Is anyone feeling strange?” + +A couple of the other team members say they haven’t exactly been feeling themselves, Alyssa says she doesn’t feel any different, but something’s definitely going on. A few of the Lizards have been noticing what’s been going on, and its making them nervous it seems. You might be wearing out your welcome. +> Stay in the village +You decide to stay to figure out what the hell’s going on; you feel the need to rest though first. In the meantime, nobody is to enter Salo’s tent. You want a couple of guards to watch it, and in the morning it’s going to be searched thoroughly. + +You go to sleep and have violent nightmares, except they aren’t nightmares; you find them to be very comforting. The next day, you insist on searching Salo’s tent yourself, Alyssa says she’s been experiencing some insubordination from team members, you snarl at her and tell her, if someone steps out of line then to shoot the bastards. She’s a little shocked by your comment, then you tell her not to disturb you while you search Salo’s tent. + +You enter Salo’s tent and search, but you have a hard time concentrating, you’re having those thoughts again, they’re almost primal… + +You stop searching and get angry from not readily finding an answer to your questions. +Exiting the tent, you see some of your team getting mad at the Lizards, who are hissing back. Alyssa tries to calm people down, but you undermine her authority, by pushing her aside and shooting a Lizard. + +“KILL THE OTHER TRIBE!” you yell. + +A small battle occurs, it’s bloody and short. Your side wins, but not just content on killing the Lizards, they butcher them. A few even start cooking them up. A couple of the male and female soldiers start stripping off their clothing and have sex right in front of everyone. There is no shame; it’s almost as if the concepts of civilization have been erased from all your memories over night. Alyssa’s disappeared but you’re not even thinking about her. + +However you still manage to maintain a higher brain function of authority. You quickly establish yourself as the “Alpha Male”, you immediately smash one of your tribesmen over the head and take his woman. + +As time passes, you all have lost all ideas of your previous lives. You’ve all effectively reverted back to the Stone Age, hunting for your food and fighting over the smallest things. None of you are wearing your uniforms anymore; your equipment has been all thrown into a pile in Salo’s old tent. (You kept your rank bars though, because they were shiny) You are the Chieftain and make sure everyone remembers that fact, by displaying your prowess in battle with those Lizard creatures that attack every now and then, and by keeping the other members of your tribe in line. + +One day you wander from the village, and come across a secluded waterfall, you see a blue woman with long white hair, bathing naked in it with an odd looking spear like weapon strapped to her back. She’s beautiful; you immediately bow down before her in complete awe. She sees you, and approaches. A glimmer in her eye meets yours…somehow you two know each other…but that’s impossible, she must surely be a goddess of battle sent from the heavens. She blesses you with her cool touch. Only a goddess could generate such a sensation in this heat. + +During your time together, the blue woman’s raw unbridled passion overwhelms you, she begins to claw and bite you and your entire body becomes as ice. You realize your actions as a warrior have been rewarded. You feel darkness approach; you’re ascending back to the heavens with her. + +And with one last kiss you finally reach Paradise.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Get in there you fucking coward!” you say and shove LaFleur in first. Salo, surprised by LaFleur sudden appearance, immediately attacks him by stabbing him in the neck. +“I TOLD YOU NOT TO DISTURB ME!” he screams. +As LaFleur falls, Salo continues to stab him, completely ignoring you. + +You take advantage of Salo’s preoccupation and shoot him in the head, you start laughing and continue firing. You feel a rush of pleasure that you’ve never felt before when killing someone. You quickly try to regain your composure. Alyssa and a few others enter the tent. + +“Sir! Are you alright?” +“Ugh yeah. I…I don’t know what the hell’s happening, I feel weird. Salo killed LaFleur so I reacted…Is anyone feeling strange?” + +A couple of the other team members say they haven’t exactly been feeling themselves, Alyssa says she doesn’t feel any different, but something’s definitely going on. A few of the Lizards have been noticing what’s been going on, and its making them nervous it seems. You might be wearing out your welcome. +> Leave the village +Not wanting to fight yet another battle with Lizards right now, you order everyone to quickly pack up and get ready to leave immediately. You leave the village much to the contentment of the Lizards. As you get further away, the weird feelings you and some of your team were feeling start disappearing. A few days later and they’re completely gone. You don’t know what the hell was going on, but you’re glad you didn’t stick around in that village. + +The rest of your time on Paradise is routine. You get attacked every now and then, you fight, and you still don’t find anything of importance. That Elojin was probably lying about finding a Xont ruin. + +When the Empire ships arrive you give a report of the planet, and decide to leave out what happened with Salo, and just say he was killed by Lizards. Your superiors write Paradise off as low priority and send you on your next mission. + +Same as it ever was.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Well you might as well see what that sadist got out of his victim. You head over and enter Salo’s tent. + +“I TOLD YOU NOT TO DISTURB ME!” Salo screams. +“What?!” +“Oh…its you. Forgive my outburst Captain. I’ve been a little on edge.” +“I…see…” you say as you notice that Salo has dismembered the Elojin. Body parts and blood are covering the floor of the tent. Salo sees your reaction to the sight and tries to explain. +“Sorry for this mess, I got a little carried away, the Elojin proved to be particularly defiant. I was surprised, most Elojins squeal even without the threat of torture. This one wouldn’t say anything, at least nothing that he hadn’t already told you. I guess I got a little angry…” +“I’d say you got a little more than angry.” +Salo begins to suddenly weep. +“I’m sorry Captain! I couldn’t get any more information out of him! I failed you and as an Indoctrinator of the Empire!” + +Okay this is really weird, you’ve never seen any side of Salo that indicates any like for you, let alone any feelings that would result in tears. + +“Uh, its okay Salo, I’m sure you did your best. Don’t worry about it, the Elojin was probably talking bullshit anyway about the Xont, we all know that’s just a myth. Maybe you should take it easy for awhile, and make sure you clean up this tent, who knows what the hell this mess this will attract.” +“I will.” Salo says looking off into space. + +You slowly exit Salo’s tent, and call LaFleur and Alyssa to your tent to talk about this. + +“What’s going on sir?” +“Salo’s gone off his fucking rocker that’s what. He’s always been walking that line, but I think he’s finally gone over this time. He completely dismembered that Elojin and he’s just acting creepy in general and not the usual type of creepy either. He’s definitely not entirely sane anymore.” +“So he’s a threat then? We kill him?” Alyssa asks. +“Whoa, hold on there! As much as I can’t stand him, we ARE still following Empire law here; we can’t just shoot him, at least not without reason.” You say. +“Well in situations like this, the procedure is to immediately have him checked out by a doctor…” LaFleur comments. +“Uh duh, Doc got killed trying to communicate with some Lizards remember? Besides I don’t need a professional to tell me that he’s crazy, I saw it with my own eyes.” +“Well then the next step would be to have him shipped off to an Empire mental facility…but since we aren’t anywhere near one of those and won’t be for a long time, we’re suppose to keep him isolated, and under guard like a prisoner, until such time that he can be transferred to the proper facility.” LaFleur says. +“Wonderful. We can’t move effectively around with a madman in tow. (Sigh) Well I guess we could just spend the rest of our time in this village. Make sure everyone’s extra nice to the Lizards, we don’t need them rising up against us now. We can do exploratory missions of the surrounding area. Salo will be restricted to his tent and kept under guard at all times. Alyssa, inform the rest of the team. LaFleur we’re going into Salo’s tent.” +“Um, erm, what for?” +“To take away his weapons! We can’t have him armed.” +“Sir maybe you should let Sergeant Alyssa…” +“I said me and YOU, Lieutenant! Besides, he might attack Alyssa, he didn’t like non-humans before, he’s probably only gotten more intolerant since then. Its apparent the only thing he’s ever really respected is rank, even if it hasn’t been us personally. Now come on!” + +You and LaFleur approach Salo’s tent cautiously. +> Feeling different? (Current thoughts) +Something weird is coming over you, you don’t feel quite yourself. For some reason you’re having these thoughts of how LaFleur’s cowardice disgusts you. Granted you’ve never thought highly of him, but you’ve never had thoughts of strangling him until his eyes pop out…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You don’t have time for mind games, if this Elojin actually has something important then he can tell it to Salo. He’s been itching to torture something anyway, might as well be an Elojin. This’ll kill two birds with one stone. + +“Sergeant Alyssa!” you yell, and she enters immediately. +“Yes sir?” +“Take this Elojin to Indoctrinator Salo.” You say, the Elojin looks genuinely surprised. +”WHAT!? Hold on now, there’s no need for that!” +“Oh? Well are you going to tell me where the Xont structure is at then?” +“I…can’t do that! You’ll just kill me after I told you! Are you really ready to risk losing a chance at gaining the most important find of the millennium? You have to keep me alive! It’s the only way you’ll find it!” +“You think so? So you really think you’ll be able to withstand the interrogation? And trust me, Salo really likes his work.” +The Elojin doesn’t look scared anymore; in fact he’s downright defiant. “Fine, turn me over to your narrow minded torturer! He’ll get nothing from me! We Elojin are a lot tougher than you humans give us credit for. We were exploring space while your race was still throwing bones in the air and fighting over pieces of yellow fruit and we’ll be here long after your so called “Empire” falls to the ravages of time, and history forgets you!” +“Maybe,.. but not today. Take him away, and tell Salo to keep the screams to a minimum.” + +As Alyssa takes the Elojin away, he looks at her and speaks again. + +“Huh. It must be nice to be a slave to such an enlightened society.” +“Move it, Elojin.” Alyssa replies. + +Time passes and there hasn’t been a peep from Salo’s tent. You know you said for him to keep it quiet, but you didn’t think he’d actually do it. + +You wonder if you should check on him, the rest of your team is pretty much going through their usual routines, so there’s not much to do right now. You could always relax. +> Relax +You decide to do something you’ve rarely had the privilege of doing on here, relax. + +This isn’t “Real” Paradise however. Those that remain inattentive in this hostile world are likely to be victims of it. You are no exception. + +As you relax you end up falling asleep, you awaken in the night only to see Salo standing over you covered in blood, with a crazed look on his face. He’s also holding his combat knife, which he uses on you repeatedly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Send him in, you can kill him afterwards if he proves to be useless.” + +Alyssa nods and brings the Elojin in roughly. + +“Ow! Watch it you, blue Empire whore!” he says which is followed by a kick to his back by Alyssa before she leaves. The Elojin brushes himself off and stands up. +“I swear you humans will allow any primitive race into your club nowadays. What planet did you pick that one up from? +“You had something important to tell me?” you ask, but the Elojin completely ignores you. +“Mind you, she is a pretty primitive; her pointy ears almost make me want to laugh though.” +“I suggest you stop talking about my Sergeant and start talking about what you know.” +He still doesn’t listen. +“You know I’ve always been impressed by you humans. I’ve read a lot about your species. We have more in common than you might think. Why if it wasn’t for your lack of spots and disgusting hairy body, we could be brothers!” + +Your patience has run out, you grab him by his scrawny throat. + +“Look you hairless spotty freak, you better start talking before I let my Sergeant blast a big hole in you and that’s AFTER I turn you over to my Indoctrinator who’ll be only to happy to get his hands on the likes of you.” + +Well that got his attention, and apparently he does know something of humans because, Indoctrinator widened his eyes a bit. He keeps his cool though. + +“See now you humans know how to instill fear. Not like those idiot Mazatts that were trying to get information from me. I don’t know how those brainless brutes even mastered the wheel, let alone achieve space travel. Anyway, there’s an old Xont building on this planet.” +Now your eyes widen. +“WHAT?! Impossible! The Xont are a myth! The only knowledge that ANYONE has of them is from stories, there’s never been any hard evidence of this race found by any of the major or minor powers and that’s from centuries of searching.” +“Well perhaps we weren’t looking hard enough. The galaxy is a big place you know.” the Elojin sniffs. +“Don’t bother asking me where it’s at though, I won’t tell you where it’s at, no matter what you do. However I’d be willing to SHOW you, if you’d consider this a joint venture between our two governments. Just think this could bring about a new age of cooperation between our two species!” + +Translation: “I’m going to use you for my own gain, until I can find a way to fuck you over.” +> Would you like to know more? (The Xont) +The Xont… + +The Xont civilization has been discussed, and debated, by other races for centuries. To humans they’re considered the galactic equivalent of the ancient earth myth of “Atlantis”. Some believe their might’ve been a Xont race at one time, but wasn’t nearly as all powerful as they’re made out to be. Supposedly the Xont had vast knowledge and technology before any other race. It was said that only a few Xont could control an entire world. Other than a few oral stories passed down by some races and speculative writings based on those stories, there hasn’t been any hard evidence. A lot of stories sound the same, but are conflicting. For example some say they were balls of light while others say they were a race of machines. One story even suggests that they were bacteria with psionic powers. These could all just be accounts of several different spacefarring races that had made contact with different planets in the past, just as things go on today. The method of conquest might vary, but it usually always has the same results. Stories are bound to have similar tones about them. The fall of the Xont civilization also varies, some say they became decadent and were overthrown by their slaves, others say they succumbed to a disease that wiped out the entire race, others say they just disappeared. Nobody knows. A Xont home planet has never been found, but then again the universe is a big place. + +Despite all this conjecture, an eye is still kept out by all for signs of Xont technology since surely whatever kept them in control must be powerful indeed. + +Personally you don’t really buy the idea of any of it, not until you see some solid proof.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Delegating any responsibility to LaFleur is never a good idea, you tell him to send in Sergeant Alyssa. Sergeant Alyssa walks in and reports to you in her usual no nonsense manner; you’ve always admired her race’s stoic nature. + +“Captain, we discovered a Mazatt encampment, we killed all twenty of them with only two casualties. There was no useful information to be found, all their data was no different than ours. The only thing of interest was the prisoner they were holding.” +“Ah the one that is now ours. The Elojin.” You reply +“He kept saying he had some important information. I wasn’t sure if we should kill him or you’d want to question him first. If it’s the former I’d be glad to do it, his constant chattering was…annoying.” + +Alyssa’s people aren’t known for their small talk. +> Have him killed +“An Elojin eh? Kill him. Anything he’s going to say is going to be bullshit anyway. I don’t have time to decipher what’s the truth and what isn’t.” +“You could turn him over to the Indoctrinator sir. He is very efficient at that sort of thing.” Alyssa points out. +“Salo? Yeah, I could, but I don’t feel like doing him a favor. Just shoot the Elojin. We’re heading out, I’m sick of this village.” +“Yes sir.” + +Alyssa leaves and you shortly hear a gun blast and a body fall. She certainly doesn’t waste time. Speaking of wasting time, that’s what this mission feels like to you. If you’re stuck here for months, you’d at least like to be able to find something worthwhile. + +As you leave and march through more jungle, you eventually come across some dead Lizards. + +“Sir, we got some dead Lizards here.” Alyssa tells you. +“Damn, I do so like putting the righteous fury to these reptile heathens.” Salo says. + +You examine the bodies, they’re pretty sliced up. Could be another tribe, but usually there’s more signs of arrow and spear wounds, these are more like cuts with a sword like weapon. Might be some sort of predator you haven’t encountered yet, but then you find something embedded in one of the Lizard’s heads: A black piece of chitineous material. + +“Great, there are Krik nearby.” You say. “Everyone on extra alert, and start watching and listening carefully.” +“K…kkrik?” LaFleur asks in a scared voice. +“Ah ha! The most demonic of the Empire’s enemies! I shall take great delight in slaying them!” Salo says in anticipation. + +Alyssa doesn’t say anything, you know out of everyone she came the closest to being killed by them, when they attempted to take over her home world. Her usual emotionless demeanor changes, as you see her eyes narrow displaying her hatred for them. + +The rest of your team stands ready, it’s not like you haven’t fought them many times before, it’s just that you know they never come in small groups. They’re going to have numerical superiority over you and they are excellent warriors. + +You continue on your way and soon you come across another village. And that’s it. The Krik are here in full force. They’ve effectively taken it over, You see piles of Lizard bones, and some other Lizards being lead to a nearby cave by a few Krik Taskmasters. It looks like they’re using them for some sort of labor, but you can’t tell what, you don’t see anyone carrying out of the cave yet, but if it’s the Krik in has to be important. + +Well this would qualify as something “worthwhile.” +> Attack the village +Thinking like the Krik is the surest way to be defeated by them; while they can get away with a swarm assault mentality, you cannot. + +Your clumsy frontal assault on the village proves futile. The Krik are taken by surprise at first, but sheer numbers eventually overwhelm you and your team, you provide a change of pace from the Lizard meat the Krik were eating.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“An Elojin eh? Kill him. Anything he’s going to say is going to be bullshit anyway. I don’t have time to decipher what’s the truth and what isn’t.” +“You could turn him over to the Indoctrinator sir. He is very efficient at that sort of thing.” Alyssa points out. +“Salo? Yeah, I could, but I don’t feel like doing him a favor. Just shoot the Elojin. We’re heading out, I’m sick of this village.” +“Yes sir.” + +Alyssa leaves and you shortly hear a gun blast and a body fall. She certainly doesn’t waste time. Speaking of wasting time, that’s what this mission feels like to you. If you’re stuck here for months, you’d at least like to be able to find something worthwhile. + +As you leave and march through more jungle, you eventually come across some dead Lizards. + +“Sir, we got some dead Lizards here.” Alyssa tells you. +“Damn, I do so like putting the righteous fury to these reptile heathens.” Salo says. + +You examine the bodies, they’re pretty sliced up. Could be another tribe, but usually there’s more signs of arrow and spear wounds, these are more like cuts with a sword like weapon. Might be some sort of predator you haven’t encountered yet, but then you find something embedded in one of the Lizard’s heads: A black piece of chitineous material. + +“Great, there are Krik nearby.” You say. “Everyone on extra alert, and start watching and listening carefully.” +“K…kkrik?” LaFleur asks in a scared voice. +“Ah ha! The most demonic of the Empire’s enemies! I shall take great delight in slaying them!” Salo says in anticipation. + +Alyssa doesn’t say anything, you know out of everyone she came the closest to being killed by them, when they attempted to take over her home world. Her usual emotionless demeanor changes, as you see her eyes narrow displaying her hatred for them. + +The rest of your team stands ready, it’s not like you haven’t fought them many times before, it’s just that you know they never come in small groups. They’re going to have numerical superiority over you and they are excellent warriors. + +You continue on your way and soon you come across another village. And that’s it. The Krik are here in full force. They’ve effectively taken it over, You see piles of Lizard bones, and some other Lizards being lead to a nearby cave by a few Krik Taskmasters. It looks like they’re using them for some sort of labor, but you can’t tell what, you don’t see anyone carrying out of the cave yet, but if it’s the Krik in has to be important. + +Well this would qualify as something “worthwhile.” +> Sneak into the caves +You aren’t going to defeat them head on, this requires a little subtlety. You notice the cave is far enough away from the village that you could probably sneak in without raising an alarm. The plan is to silently kill the few Krik watching over the Lizards and see what’s so important in those caves. If it’s anything truly worthwhile you can ponder your next move, if it not, you can get the hell out and put a bunch of distance between you and this place. + +Salo isn’t too enthusiastic with this plan, he wants to attack head on. + +“The Emperor will protect us! This creeping and sneaking is for Elojin!” +“I’m still in charge Salo, and I’ll decide what’s going to work! We aren’t all going anyway, I’ll be going, Alyssa, and two other team members. Lieutenant, you hold down the fort here, and dammit I NEED you to fucking muster up ALL your courage for this alright? If something goes wrong you need to get in there and help us.” +“Um, I’ll do m…my best sir.” LaFleur says unconvincingly. + +You shake your head and hope for the best. You aren’t worried so much that he’ll run, Salo will make sure he doesn’t, but you’re more worried that Salo will act like the xenophobic hothead he is and start an attack without LaFleur’s orders. + +You, Alyssa, and your other two team members stealthily sneak into the cave. There’s a weird fungus in here that causes a glow allowing you to barely see, but at least its light. The cave seems to descend lower the deeper you go, eventually you reach where the Krik and Lizards are, you keep hidden on an upper level and observe what they’re up to. + +You see the Lizards being forced to enter some strange doorway; it looks like they really don’t want to either. A few go in, and some don’t come back out. The ones that do are holding some shining crystals. They’re Baz crystals. Figures the Krik would be able to find something of worth on this planet. You wonder how they found it though and what the danger is through the doorway that they’re sending Lizards in there, let alone the fact that some of them aren’t coming back. + +Time to ponder your next move. +> Leave +You decide to leave, there’s not much you can do, even if you kill these Krik, sooner or later the others outside will suspect something wrong and come running. As you get ready to leave, Alyssa can’t believe you! + +“Sir! We have to kill these…things!” +“Shhh, keep it down. We can’t do anything we…” +“The hell we can’t sir! I’m sorry but I can’t stand here and do nothing!” Alyssa says and opens fire on the Krik killing one of them instantly. The rest of them are alerted and begin to fire back. One of them makes a high pitched squealing sound however, in an attempt to alert his fellows. + +You kill all the Krik, but you hear a bunch of them running down the tunnel, and it sounds like a lot. You free the Lizards in the hopes that they’ll help, but they don’t understand you, and they’re too demoralized to fight. You try to withstand the onslaught, but they overwhelm you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren’t going to defeat them head on, this requires a little subtlety. You notice the cave is far enough away from the village that you could probably sneak in without raising an alarm. The plan is to silently kill the few Krik watching over the Lizards and see what’s so important in those caves. If it’s anything truly worthwhile you can ponder your next move, if it not, you can get the hell out and put a bunch of distance between you and this place. + +Salo isn’t too enthusiastic with this plan, he wants to attack head on. + +“The Emperor will protect us! This creeping and sneaking is for Elojin!” +“I’m still in charge Salo, and I’ll decide what’s going to work! We aren’t all going anyway, I’ll be going, Alyssa, and two other team members. Lieutenant, you hold down the fort here, and dammit I NEED you to fucking muster up ALL your courage for this alright? If something goes wrong you need to get in there and help us.” +“Um, I’ll do m…my best sir.” LaFleur says unconvincingly. + +You shake your head and hope for the best. You aren’t worried so much that he’ll run, Salo will make sure he doesn’t, but you’re more worried that Salo will act like the xenophobic hothead he is and start an attack without LaFleur’s orders. + +You, Alyssa, and your other two team members stealthily sneak into the cave. There’s a weird fungus in here that causes a glow allowing you to barely see, but at least its light. The cave seems to descend lower the deeper you go, eventually you reach where the Krik and Lizards are, you keep hidden on an upper level and observe what they’re up to. + +You see the Lizards being forced to enter some strange doorway; it looks like they really don’t want to either. A few go in, and some don’t come back out. The ones that do are holding some shining crystals. They’re Baz crystals. Figures the Krik would be able to find something of worth on this planet. You wonder how they found it though and what the danger is through the doorway that they’re sending Lizards in there, let alone the fact that some of them aren’t coming back. + +Time to ponder your next move. +> Kill the Krik Taskmasters +The only thing you’ve found on this planet that’s useful and you’ll be dammed if you’ll let the Krik have it. You don’t think you could leave anyway, Alyssa looks pretty focused on killing them. + +“Now we have to kill them all at the same time, we don’t want one of them alerting the others with those sonic screams they do. Head shots, and aim like a damn sniper.” + +You all take aim at the Krik taskmasters, there’s only two, but their bodies are naturally resilient. Hell, you’re hoping the headshots will kill them instantly. And this dim “fungus light” doesn’t exactly make it easy. + +Squeeze…squeeze… + +Alyssa fires twice, hitting both of them in the head! As they fall, she jumps down to the lower level and takes out her knife and stabs them both in the neck! They make twitching movements for a moment and then finally die. The Lizards look at Alyssa in wonder, they are certainly grateful to all of you, but you think she impressed them the most. + +They don’t understand you, of course, but they do understand that you just saved them. You free the remaining Lizards of their chains, and look willing to follow you. + +You could slip out of the cave and escape with the Baz crystals that were already gathered, or you could go through the doorway they were sending the Lizards through. +> Escape +Sticking around wouldn’t be the best idea, for the main reason that the Krik will probably send some more soldiers in here wondering what’s going on eventually. You decide to leave and come back in force. + +You all escape the cave without being seen, when you make your way back, you’re almost surprised to see that Salo, hasn’t overrode LaFleur’s command and gotten everyone killed. He doesn’t look too happy to see more Lizards though. + +“Captain what is this? You bring more of these aliens into our midst?” +“These Lizards were going to be killed by the Krik.” +“And what of it? Let the alien scum kill each other I say!” +“You would. Look there’s a Baz crystal deposit in that cave, (You show everyone some crystals) and we can’t possibly take out all those Krik, it might help to have some allies.” +“Bah, your liberal policies concerning aliens will lead to your ruin Captain. You can trust in them, but I’m not. I trust in the Will of the Emperor, and that’s all a good Empire soldier needs to believe in.” + +Alyssa gives Salo a colder stare than usual, while you ignore Salo’s tiresome tirades, and decide your next course of action; you could start laying out a plan with who you have, OR you could try an even more radical plan and get the Lizards from the village you just left to help you. +> Make a plan now +The other village is too far away and you have reason to believe they’d follow you, sure they were friendly, but that doesn’t mean they’re ready to help you fight a battle that doesn’t directly concern them. + +You need to act now. You plan out an attack, and explain it to everyone. The Lizards fashion some weapons with some nearby trees, and after a few attempts they grasp the plan to retake their village, but mostly they’re going to follow Alyssa into battle, seeing as they feel indebted to her for saving their lives. Everyone agrees with the plan and gets into position. Salo grumbles about having to fight along side Lizards, but he’s dislikes the Krik more, so he doesn’t protest too much more. + +You see some of Krik approaching the cave, looks like they got suspicious, you wait for them to enter and then direct some of your team to ambush them. As soon as the sounds of Krik being shot in the back are heard, the Krik encampment is alerted. + +The rest of the Krik converge on the caves and you direct another detachment from the other side to start firing. The Krik realizing they’re being attacked from two sides split up, and that’s when you lead the rest of your team to attack straight down the middle. Alyssa fights like she’s possessed with a rage you could never understand. + +This simple tactic works surprisingly better than you thought, eventually you kill the last Krik, but the cost was high, many of your team members are dead, as well as all of the Lizards. All the high command survived though, Salo, LaFleur, and Alyssa. + +But you’ve secured the Baz crystal deposit; you don’t want to really risk going through the doorway in the cave though. You’ve already risked enough, if the Krik weren’t enthusiastic about going in, and the Lizards weren’t either, then you’re guessing they had a good reason. Let someone else go in. + +Other than keeping Salo and Alyssa from killing each other and reassuring LaFleur that getting wounded by a Krik doesn’t mean eggs were laid in him, the rest of your time on Paradise is relatively uneventful. + +When the Empire ships arrive you report everything to your superiors who are very pleased. They have plans to start setting up a base immediately. As a reward, you’re given a medal, and some accolades, but nothing too special. You were just doing your job as far as the Empire’s concerned. However you suggest that Alyssa be able to be promoted, seeing as she displayed exemplarily in the battle with the Krik. Your superiors frown a bit, since you should realize that non-humans can’t achieve rank past Sergeant. However they say they’ll take it under consideration and maybe some exception can be made. + +They dismiss you and you’re shipped off to your next mission, where you’ll get replacements for your team. As time passes Alyssa becomes the first non-human to be promoted to an officer rank, much to the annoyance of Salo, and to the delight of LaFleur who transfers out of your team for a nice desk command instead. She actually receives another few promotion offer later, but she always remains with your team though; she never forgets how you were the one who spoke out for her. +Eventually you and she grow even closer. + +Another interesting effect that you didn’t expect was this one exception eventually becomes a “rule” as the Empire relaxes its policies on its alien citizens a bit. + +Perhaps you are just a glorified scout, but you made a major difference in the Empire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Sticking around wouldn’t be the best idea, for the main reason that the Krik will probably send some more soldiers in here wondering what’s going on eventually. You decide to leave and come back in force. + +You all escape the cave without being seen, when you make your way back, you’re almost surprised to see that Salo, hasn’t overrode LaFleur’s command and gotten everyone killed. He doesn’t look too happy to see more Lizards though. + +“Captain what is this? You bring more of these aliens into our midst?” +“These Lizards were going to be killed by the Krik.” +“And what of it? Let the alien scum kill each other I say!” +“You would. Look there’s a Baz crystal deposit in that cave, (You show everyone some crystals) and we can’t possibly take out all those Krik, it might help to have some allies.” +“Bah, your liberal policies concerning aliens will lead to your ruin Captain. You can trust in them, but I’m not. I trust in the Will of the Emperor, and that’s all a good Empire soldier needs to believe in.” + +Alyssa gives Salo a colder stare than usual, while you ignore Salo’s tiresome tirades, and decide your next course of action; you could start laying out a plan with who you have, OR you could try an even more radical plan and get the Lizards from the village you just left to help you. +> Get more help +You decide to take a risk, and go back to the village. It’s not a popular option. Many of the team are annoyed by the fact that you dragged them away from there only to take them back (And presumably back here) For once Salo and Alyssa are in agreement that you should attack the Krik NOW. And the Lizards you rescued are a little confused by this whole situation. + +Eventually you get back to the village, the Lizards there, didn’t expect to see you again, and their previous friendship turns to anger! The Lizards traveling with you are their mortal foes! You forgot to take into consideration that ALL LIZARDS DO NOT GET ALONG! They think you’ve come back as an invasion force! + +An unnecessary battle is waged, causing you to lose several members. There’s no way you could attack the Krik now, you’d be even more outnumbered than you would before and you’re severely low on ammo now. You stay in the decimated Lizard village for the remainder of your time on Paradise, with a barely civilized attitude towards you from the rest of your team. + +You really screwed the pooch on this one. + +When the Empire ships arrive you explain the situation, and they immediately make plans to invade and take the Baz crystal deposit, of course the Krik have been in contact with their “government” as well. Krik ships soon arrive to help protect their investment. + +A battle is waged over Paradise, you and your team were assigned permanently on Paradise when the invasion first took place since the Empire decided you knew the terrain the best. A base is set up and you’re put in charge of it. Everyday more troops come and more die, nobody seems to make any headway, until it comes to your attention that this “little” battle for Paradise has escalated into a full-scale intergalactic war, and the Krik decide they REALLY want this planet. + +Hundreds of Krik transports come swarming out of the sky and all are consumed.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The only thing you’ve found on this planet that’s useful and you’ll be dammed if you’ll let the Krik have it. You don’t think you could leave anyway, Alyssa looks pretty focused on killing them. + +“Now we have to kill them all at the same time, we don’t want one of them alerting the others with those sonic screams they do. Head shots, and aim like a damn sniper.” + +You all take aim at the Krik taskmasters, there’s only two, but their bodies are naturally resilient. Hell, you’re hoping the headshots will kill them instantly. And this dim “fungus light” doesn’t exactly make it easy. + +Squeeze…squeeze… + +Alyssa fires twice, hitting both of them in the head! As they fall, she jumps down to the lower level and takes out her knife and stabs them both in the neck! They make twitching movements for a moment and then finally die. The Lizards look at Alyssa in wonder, they are certainly grateful to all of you, but you think she impressed them the most. + +They don’t understand you, of course, but they do understand that you just saved them. You free the remaining Lizards of their chains, and look willing to follow you. + +You could slip out of the cave and escape with the Baz crystals that were already gathered, or you could go through the doorway they were sending the Lizards through. +> Explore the doorway +The doorway is strange; it doesn’t look natural, like someone created it. The Lizards get nervous as you approach it though, and even seem to hiss warnings at you. One even tries to stop you physically. You push him aside though and motion Alyssa and the other two to enter. + +You creep through the cave, and the glow of Baz crystals glow in the walls of it. The place is filled with them. Of course they’re mostly embedded in rock, but still this obviously a big deposit. You still haven’t seen any sight of whatever is lurking in here. + +Of course that’s probably because you can’t see it at all until it rips apart one of your team members! Something invisible or camouflaged or something is attacking! +> Attack! +You open fire immediately, you know you hit it a few times, but due to its invisibility, it manages to easily get away and sneak up behind you and you feel its fist go through your back and out your chest.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The doorway is strange; it doesn’t look natural, like someone created it. The Lizards get nervous as you approach it though, and even seem to hiss warnings at you. One even tries to stop you physically. You push him aside though and motion Alyssa and the other two to enter. + +You creep through the cave, and the glow of Baz crystals glow in the walls of it. The place is filled with them. Of course they’re mostly embedded in rock, but still this obviously a big deposit. You still haven’t seen any sight of whatever is lurking in here. + +Of course that’s probably because you can’t see it at all until it rips apart one of your team members! Something invisible or camouflaged or something is attacking! +> Run! +You can’t fight this thing, you gotta get out of here! You also remember that this “thing” doesn’t seem to go past the doorway. You all run back out, but you can still hear grunting behind you, its following you! So much for that plan! The Lizards see you running and do like wise, whatever this thing is its quick, because it’s keeping up the pace. Finally you exit the cave and you get an idea. You tell Alyssa to take everyone else and head back to Salo and LaFleur and get ready to attack, you’re going to do something. + +As Alyssa follows your command, the thing is almost on you, and you run straight for the Krik camp. + +The Krik are initially surprised that a lone human would dare do something like this, but after shooting a few of them they realize you’re attacking them. You narrowly avoid being shot and sliced up several times. And then that’s when it happens, your invisible friend starts ripping up the Krik. + +During this chaos, you manage to slip away and call for your own team to start attacking. The Krik are in disarray between concentrating on you and this invisible beast. +Soon when it looks like the Krik are no longer a threat you tell your team to start concentrating their fire in the direction of whatever’s tearing up the latest bug. + +It can’t get out of the way of all the firepower and is brought down, you finish up the last of the Krik resistance. + +You’ve managed to secure the Baz crystal deposit; you spend the rest of your time on Paradise at the village, which is relatively uneventful. + +When the Empire ships arrive, you give your report and your superiors are very pleased, they order a base set up immediately. You’re given a medal and some accolades but that’s about it. You were just doing your duty to the Empire as far as they’re concerned. +You’re sent on your next mission with replacements awaiting you. + +Just another mission completed.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“An Elojin eh? Kill him. Anything he’s going to say is going to be bullshit anyway. I don’t have time to decipher what’s the truth and what isn’t.” +“You could turn him over to the Indoctrinator sir. He is very efficient at that sort of thing.” Alyssa points out. +“Salo? Yeah, I could, but I don’t feel like doing him a favor. Just shoot the Elojin. We’re heading out, I’m sick of this village.” +“Yes sir.” + +Alyssa leaves and you shortly hear a gun blast and a body fall. She certainly doesn’t waste time. Speaking of wasting time, that’s what this mission feels like to you. If you’re stuck here for months, you’d at least like to be able to find something worthwhile. + +As you leave and march through more jungle, you eventually come across some dead Lizards. + +“Sir, we got some dead Lizards here.” Alyssa tells you. +“Damn, I do so like putting the righteous fury to these reptile heathens.” Salo says. + +You examine the bodies, they’re pretty sliced up. Could be another tribe, but usually there’s more signs of arrow and spear wounds, these are more like cuts with a sword like weapon. Might be some sort of predator you haven’t encountered yet, but then you find something embedded in one of the Lizard’s heads: A black piece of chitineous material. + +“Great, there are Krik nearby.” You say. “Everyone on extra alert, and start watching and listening carefully.” +“K…kkrik?” LaFleur asks in a scared voice. +“Ah ha! The most demonic of the Empire’s enemies! I shall take great delight in slaying them!” Salo says in anticipation. + +Alyssa doesn’t say anything, you know out of everyone she came the closest to being killed by them, when they attempted to take over her home world. Her usual emotionless demeanor changes, as you see her eyes narrow displaying her hatred for them. + +The rest of your team stands ready, it’s not like you haven’t fought them many times before, it’s just that you know they never come in small groups. They’re going to have numerical superiority over you and they are excellent warriors. + +You continue on your way and soon you come across another village. And that’s it. The Krik are here in full force. They’ve effectively taken it over, You see piles of Lizard bones, and some other Lizards being lead to a nearby cave by a few Krik Taskmasters. It looks like they’re using them for some sort of labor, but you can’t tell what, you don’t see anyone carrying out of the cave yet, but if it’s the Krik in has to be important. + +Well this would qualify as something “worthwhile.” +> Would you like to know more? (The Krik) +The Krik Collective… + +So named, due to the noise they make with their mandibles. + +You remember when you were young your mother would sit you in front of the vid screen and let you watch old Earth movies (Mostly from the 20th and 21st century) and years later when you saw your first Krik up close and personal, you wondered if some of those directors weren’t time travelers from the future because all those old Earth movie stereotypes of a hostile hive minded insectoid alien race wouldn’t be too far off when applying them to the Krik. They look like big bipedal bugs; there simply isn’t any other way to put it. While they aren’t exactly “devour all life for the queen” they come close. They do have a sense of individuality, but they always work in unison and for the common good of their race. A way of thinking that has served them well. As warriors they tend to use very effective bio-engineered weapons that only they can use. They’re fierce fighters, but sometimes tactics can fail them, due to their likeminded thinking. They aren’t very innovative, but then again it tends not to matter when they usually outnumber their enemies. One mind, a thousand “bullets” would be the ideology here. + +Due to their hive mindset they spread out on every world they can live on, and woe to those already living on it. They tend to enslave other races, but also use them as food. Life under the Krik is to be used and ultimately consumed. + +They treat the other Major races little better, but they have enough intelligence to realize that a major all out war would be costly though. (Nothing prevents “little wars” though every now and then) Ultimately the Krik WILL go to war with everyone; it’s just a matter of time, so diplomacy is limited and only when it’s something they wouldn’t normally be able to achieve themselves. While they typically don’t really have anything that would be considered “feelings” they do tend to show what could be classified as “dislike” in regards to humans for some reason. + +Perhaps it due to the stories they hear of how humanity has been killing billions of “little kriks” for centuries on Earth.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Delegating any responsibility to LaFleur is never a good idea, you tell him to send in Sergeant Alyssa. Sergeant Alyssa walks in and reports to you in her usual no nonsense manner; you’ve always admired her race’s stoic nature. + +“Captain, we discovered a Mazatt encampment, we killed all twenty of them with only two casualties. There was no useful information to be found, all their data was no different than ours. The only thing of interest was the prisoner they were holding.” +“Ah the one that is now ours. The Elojin.” You reply +“He kept saying he had some important information. I wasn’t sure if we should kill him or you’d want to question him first. If it’s the former I’d be glad to do it, his constant chattering was…annoying.” + +Alyssa’s people aren’t known for their small talk. +> Would you like to know more? (Sergeant Alyssa) +Sergeant Alyssa… + +Not her real name, since that’s basically unpronounceable, but what you did make out sounded like “Alyssa” when she first told you, so that’s the name you kept calling her. It stuck. + +Her race lives on a world much different than Paradise. It’s a harsh frozen ice ball. How she can stand the infernal temperature here, is thanks to her race’s unique body temperature regulation. Even in this heat, she remains comfortably cool. It’s as if their home planet is always with them. Such a brutal environment created a very survivalistic race. Humans often jokingly refer to them as “Ice Elves” since their pale blue skin and physical features resemble the ancient earth stereotype of those mythical beings. Surprisingly they accepted the Empire when it came, even offering some of their young warriors to serve. Ever since that first contact, they have been a consistent source of troops for the Empire. + +Alyssa wasn’t one of those recruits, she pledged her allegiance to you when you saved her town from a Krik raiding party. Actually you were just trying to hold the territory because of the Baz crystal deposit there. Never the less, when you personally decapitated the Krik warrior who was ready to kill her, you gained a life long ally. + +Her loyalty is based more on you rather than Empire doctrine, but she’s proven to be more of a soldier of the Empire than anyone else you’ve commanded. If she was human she probably would’ve been an officer by now, but the Empire has “rules” against that. You doubt if she’d leave even if she could get promoted further though. + +The fact that Inquistor Salo can’t stand her, only makes you like her even more.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Delegating any responsibility to LaFleur is never a good idea, you tell him to send in Sergeant Alyssa. Sergeant Alyssa walks in and reports to you in her usual no nonsense manner; you’ve always admired her race’s stoic nature. + +“Captain, we discovered a Mazatt encampment, we killed all twenty of them with only two casualties. There was no useful information to be found, all their data was no different than ours. The only thing of interest was the prisoner they were holding.” +“Ah the one that is now ours. The Elojin.” You reply +“He kept saying he had some important information. I wasn’t sure if we should kill him or you’d want to question him first. If it’s the former I’d be glad to do it, his constant chattering was…annoying.” + +Alyssa’s people aren’t known for their small talk. +> Would you like to know more? (The Mazatt) +The Mazatt Dominion… + +There was an old earth saying of humanity’s life expectancy in ancient times: “Ugly, brutal and short.” + +Apply this saying to the Mazatt and you pretty much have an accurate physical description of them. The entire race has been infected with a Napoleon Complex, as they absolutely see anything bigger than themselves as a threat, which pretty much means they are at perpetual war with every race they come across. Their average height is about five feet or slightly shorter. Despite being short they are incredibly strong and very skilled in combat. Their Heavy G home planet might account for this. The Mazatt Dominion achieved space travel later than all the other galactic powers, but made up for it quickly by conquering worlds and enslaving entire races. Unlike the Empire which “enlightens” worlds and “assimilates” other races, they never allow slave races to serve in their armies however, their distrust is far too great and given the number of uprisings they have to put down, it’s just as well. + +While they excel in combat, they fall short in other areas, most notably in medical research and spy networking, which they sneer at as being crutches for the weak. For a vertically challenged race their ships are the largest things flying around in space. Their concept of ship building basically consists of building the biggest fucking hull that will support triple plated armor, gauss cannons, plasma missiles, and a navigation system that has one big red button saying “GO TO THE ENEMY.” Actually this simple design works surprisingly well. + +All diplomatic attempts with them have met with no or limited success, the Krik and humans are just too tall to be trusted. They find the Elojin to be utterly detestable and will have nothing to do with the spotty freaks. + +And who could blame them.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>That overzealous fool is going to turn the entire village against you, and that’s the last thing you need right now. You stop Salo before the Lizards make dinner out of him. + +“What are you doing?! It’s my job to teach these savages the ways of the Empire, and bring them into the fold, even if they aren’t worthy enough to serve HIM.” +“Well you’re not gonna do that by antagonizing the poor scaly bastards! Just leave them alone, its not like we’re leaving anytime soon, and we’ll have a lot easier time of it, if we aren’t fighting every last lizard on this fuckin’ planet!” +“If they don’t accept the ways of the Empire, then they deserve to be purged by it!” Salo says predictably. +“Yeah, well if you haven’t noticed we’re a LONG way from the Empire, new supplies won’t be here for months and I’d like to currently supply of ammo to last until then. That won’t happen if we’re blowing away every lizard we come across. Its easier to just work with them when they aren’t actively hostile.” + +Salo looks unconvinced and disturbed by your words. +“As an Indoctrinator of the Empire it’s also up to me to make sure its servants are not falling astray to alien influences! And you my dear Captain have been displaying suspect behavior as of late! I hope for your sake you haven’t forgotten the values of the Empire!” +Salo warns and storms off to his tent. + +As the Lizards disperse and go back to their simple village life, you also return to your tent, shaking your head, and thinking about what a short sighted, narrow minded idiot Salo is. You go back to studying the maps of the territory you’ve explored so far and pondering where you should go next, soon one of your men comes in to tell you that the Sergeant has come back from a recon mission and she looks like she’s faced some hostiles. He also tells you they’ve captured an interesting prisoner, an Elojin. +> Delegate the responsibility to Lieutenant LaFleur +You tell the soldier to let Lieutenant LaFleur take care of it, since you’re busy. You’re really sick of having to do everything yourself around here anyway. You go back to examining your maps. You wonder if you’ll ever find anything of any importance on here, when all of a sudden you hear yelling and gun fire outside your tent! You rush out with your own gun drawn. + +“What the hell is…” you start to say as you come out of the tent and are fatally hit by a blast in the chest by an Elojin holding an Empire pistol, it’s LaFleur’s. The incompetent idiot allowed his weapon to be taken. + +But you were the incompetent idiot for delegating an important task to him in the first place.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>That overzealous fool is going to turn the entire village against you, and that’s the last thing you need right now. You stop Salo before the Lizards make dinner out of him. + +“What are you doing?! It’s my job to teach these savages the ways of the Empire, and bring them into the fold, even if they aren’t worthy enough to serve HIM.” +“Well you’re not gonna do that by antagonizing the poor scaly bastards! Just leave them alone, its not like we’re leaving anytime soon, and we’ll have a lot easier time of it, if we aren’t fighting every last lizard on this fuckin’ planet!” +“If they don’t accept the ways of the Empire, then they deserve to be purged by it!” Salo says predictably. +“Yeah, well if you haven’t noticed we’re a LONG way from the Empire, new supplies won’t be here for months and I’d like to currently supply of ammo to last until then. That won’t happen if we’re blowing away every lizard we come across. Its easier to just work with them when they aren’t actively hostile.” + +Salo looks unconvinced and disturbed by your words. +“As an Indoctrinator of the Empire it’s also up to me to make sure its servants are not falling astray to alien influences! And you my dear Captain have been displaying suspect behavior as of late! I hope for your sake you haven’t forgotten the values of the Empire!” +Salo warns and storms off to his tent. + +As the Lizards disperse and go back to their simple village life, you also return to your tent, shaking your head, and thinking about what a short sighted, narrow minded idiot Salo is. You go back to studying the maps of the territory you’ve explored so far and pondering where you should go next, soon one of your men comes in to tell you that the Sergeant has come back from a recon mission and she looks like she’s faced some hostiles. He also tells you they’ve captured an interesting prisoner, an Elojin. +> Would you like to know more? (The Lizards) +The Lizards… + +While there are many hostile creatures on Paradise, the only sentient ones you’ve come across are known as the Lizards, mainly because nobody has been inventive enough to assign them another name. They look like four foot tall bi-pedal lizards, so it’s an appropriate name. + +The Lizards are basically hunters, and are still living in the Stone Age. They employ spears, clubs, blow guns and bows as weapons, but are completely capable of using their natural teeth and claws in combat as well. They aren’t united as a race, and there are many tribes actively at war with one another, which is good since they get distracted from attacking you. + +You have come across peaceful tribes, but unfortunately this is still a rarity, most of the time the Lizards see you as potential prey. They don’t seem to have any fear despite the fact you severely outgun them. Then again they seem to worship various weird idols, so perhaps they believe in some sort of better afterlife. Communication with them is hard since they have difficulty speaking your language and humanity is not known for even bothering to learn other alien languages. Some progress has been made though. + +They’re primitive, but not stupid. Many times they’ve set up traps and ambushes that have killed your team members on more than one occasion. Your limited communications with the friendly ones have proven they can learn rather quickly. + +If they ever got organized they’d probably be even more dangerous.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>That overzealous fool is going to turn the entire village against you, and that’s the last thing you need right now. You stop Salo before the Lizards make dinner out of him. + +“What are you doing?! It’s my job to teach these savages the ways of the Empire, and bring them into the fold, even if they aren’t worthy enough to serve HIM.” +“Well you’re not gonna do that by antagonizing the poor scaly bastards! Just leave them alone, its not like we’re leaving anytime soon, and we’ll have a lot easier time of it, if we aren’t fighting every last lizard on this fuckin’ planet!” +“If they don’t accept the ways of the Empire, then they deserve to be purged by it!” Salo says predictably. +“Yeah, well if you haven’t noticed we’re a LONG way from the Empire, new supplies won’t be here for months and I’d like to currently supply of ammo to last until then. That won’t happen if we’re blowing away every lizard we come across. Its easier to just work with them when they aren’t actively hostile.” + +Salo looks unconvinced and disturbed by your words. +“As an Indoctrinator of the Empire it’s also up to me to make sure its servants are not falling astray to alien influences! And you my dear Captain have been displaying suspect behavior as of late! I hope for your sake you haven’t forgotten the values of the Empire!” +Salo warns and storms off to his tent. + +As the Lizards disperse and go back to their simple village life, you also return to your tent, shaking your head, and thinking about what a short sighted, narrow minded idiot Salo is. You go back to studying the maps of the territory you’ve explored so far and pondering where you should go next, soon one of your men comes in to tell you that the Sergeant has come back from a recon mission and she looks like she’s faced some hostiles. He also tells you they’ve captured an interesting prisoner, an Elojin. +> Would you like to know more? (The Elojin) +The Elojin Alliance… + +If there was a race more duplicitous than humans, it would be the Elojin. They look similar to humans, except they are completely hairless and are covered in spots. They’ve had the ability to travel space before humans. It’s rumored that they had even made visits to earth in the past, mostly to cause trouble. This cannot be completely confirmed, yet the Elojin never flat out deny these accusations. Indeed they find it more amusing to keep humans guessing on the situation. If the rumors of early abductions are true, one wonders why they did not try to invade humanity when they could. However it’s been proven the Elojin are not a race of conquerors. They prefer to avoid open conflict and remain in the shadows. It’s partly why (Despite being technologically advanced) they are considered the “weakest” of the major galactic powers. With all the inner political turmoil that goes on in the Elojin High Council, it’s amazing they’ve been able to even hold it together. They have no loyalty to race, government, or even family. Each one is out for themselves. Several times in the past an Elojin defector has backstabbed its own government for personal gain. Of course within the same day, they’ve been known to backstab their benefactor as well, leading to the idea that ALL Elojin are potential spies, assassins or double agents. Their favorite past time is dealing in misinformation, half-truths and out right lies. + +The Elojin will deal with anyone, but seem to prefer dealing with humans, since the Mazatt and Krik usually have less patience with them, this might explain why they prefer to side with humanity when the need arises, but rest assured this is only to save their own spotty asses. It’s in the Elojin’s best interest that NOBODY becomes the sole galactic power. As long as everyone is fighting everyone else, the Elojin are winning as far as they’re concerned. + +And they’re probably right.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Well you guess you’d better check on your team. Not doing so would certainly look irresponsible of you, hardly becoming of an officer of the Empire. + +You step out of your tent and peruse your team, who are all going about their duties as they should. They’re a good team, sure sometimes they complain, but on this planet its very understandable. + +Your Indoctrinator is busily going about his usual brainwashing fanaticism as he tries to instill the values of the Empire to the reptilian natives that live in this village. Salo’s ranting and raving like a mad man as he is apt to do when preaching. The Lizards look at him with a blank expression in a vain attempt to understand what the hell he’s talking about, but you can tell they’re getting agitated. + +Meanwhile your inept second in command Lieutenant LaFleur is pointlessly scolding some of the other team members for not setting up their tents by regulation standard. They look annoyed. You swear you think he’s probably come closer to death by his own team members than by any enemy involvement you’d ever engaged in. + +Well you should probably intervene somewhere before someone gets killed. +> Approach your Lieutenant +You go over to LaFleur to tell him to lay off with the “by the book” shit. You’d think by now he’d know what looks good on paper doesn’t work in the field. + +Unfortunately, while LaFleur was only causing a minor annoyance, Salo was inciting a riot. With his rants he angered the previously peaceful Lizards to the point of hostility. As you’re telling LaFleur to stop being so uptight, a spear goes flying into your back.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Well you guess you’d better check on your team. Not doing so would certainly look irresponsible of you, hardly becoming of an officer of the Empire. + +You step out of your tent and peruse your team, who are all going about their duties as they should. They’re a good team, sure sometimes they complain, but on this planet its very understandable. + +Your Indoctrinator is busily going about his usual brainwashing fanaticism as he tries to instill the values of the Empire to the reptilian natives that live in this village. Salo’s ranting and raving like a mad man as he is apt to do when preaching. The Lizards look at him with a blank expression in a vain attempt to understand what the hell he’s talking about, but you can tell they’re getting agitated. + +Meanwhile your inept second in command Lieutenant LaFleur is pointlessly scolding some of the other team members for not setting up their tents by regulation standard. They look annoyed. You swear you think he’s probably come closer to death by his own team members than by any enemy involvement you’d ever engaged in. + +Well you should probably intervene somewhere before someone gets killed. +> Would you like to know more? (Indoctrinator Salo) +Indoctrinator Salo… + +Salo is an Empire Indoctrinator: Loyal, dedicated, intolerant, and utterly fanatical. It’s his job to make sure humanity doesn’t fall to alien influences and to shove humanity’s influences down aliens’ throats or failing that, to annihilate aliens that insist on holding on to their own cultures and humans that question the Empire. + +Salo like most of his kind, sees heresy everywhere, he’s even accused you of being too “soft” on the natives on several occasions. What he fails to understand (Or refuses to) is you’re NOT an assault force, you’re scouts. Sometimes in order to survive, you have to work with the population that may live on the planets you’re exploring. In fact, it’s usually easier that way, since you aren’t fighting a battle every five minutes. (Let the marines worry about that when they invade) Indoctrinators though are known for their inflexibility, and Salo has been bending far too much for his taste. He doesn’t even really like the idea of assimilating alien cultures; he’d rather just exterminate them. So far the general hostility of the Lizards has been appeasing his xenophobia. He gets a perverse kick out of chanting Empire doctrine as he’s killing them. You’ve had to stop him a few times from going overboard. While killing native populations is fun for him, he always hopes to meet one of the sworn enemies of the Empire though, he particularly hates Elojin. + +You and Salo have never really gotten along, but you’re getting the impression that you and he are going to really have it out soon and the outcome probably won’t be good. You don’t understand why he didn’t just ask to be assigned to an Empire Assault Legion instead, he’d still be serving the same purpose of “moral officer” and he’d be able to kill all the aliens he wanted on a regular basis. + +Knowing your luck though, he specifically asked to be assigned to you personally just because the nature of the universe seems to like fucking with you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Well you guess you’d better check on your team. Not doing so would certainly look irresponsible of you, hardly becoming of an officer of the Empire. + +You step out of your tent and peruse your team, who are all going about their duties as they should. They’re a good team, sure sometimes they complain, but on this planet its very understandable. + +Your Indoctrinator is busily going about his usual brainwashing fanaticism as he tries to instill the values of the Empire to the reptilian natives that live in this village. Salo’s ranting and raving like a mad man as he is apt to do when preaching. The Lizards look at him with a blank expression in a vain attempt to understand what the hell he’s talking about, but you can tell they’re getting agitated. + +Meanwhile your inept second in command Lieutenant LaFleur is pointlessly scolding some of the other team members for not setting up their tents by regulation standard. They look annoyed. You swear you think he’s probably come closer to death by his own team members than by any enemy involvement you’d ever engaged in. + +Well you should probably intervene somewhere before someone gets killed. +> Would you like to know more? (Lieutenant LaFleur) +Lieutenant LaFleur… + +If there was anyone who wants to be here less than you, it’s Lieutenant LaFleur. He doesn’t really even want to be serving in the military at all. The only reason why he joined was due to the fact he comes from a military family and it was pretty much tradition that he HAD to join. + +You’ve come across these types several times before, and they usually fall into two categories; spoiled and not spoiled. The spoiled military brats usually get their high ranking fathers to get them a desk job away from any real fighting of any sort and thus keeping the tradition alive in their family of being an “Armchair General”. + +Unfortunately for LaFleur, he came from the unspoiled kind. His father purposely made things even rougher, since he expected more out of him. LaFleur is just not cut out for combat activity though, despite doing well in the classroom. Sensing this flaw, his father was determined to make him worthy of the LaFleur name by assigning him to a scout force. He would either learn how to adapt or die. Either one would be considered honorable to the family name. + +While LaFleur can memorize rules and regulation and perform administration with the best of them, he’s absolutely pitiful out on the field. He hasn’t actually run away yet, but he’s come close. Only Salo’s constant rants of how he’ll personally capture and torture anyone who runs away in battle are probably what keep him around. As it is, he mostly hangs in the back and fires a shot every once in a while. + +You would almost feel sorry for him, if he wasn’t so annoying.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Paradise... + +That must've been the Empire's idea of an ironic joke when they were assigning a name to this sweltering hell hole of a planet. The heat wouldn't be so bad if the planet wasn't also a jungle nightmare teaming with poisonous flora and dangerous fauna. + +The "primitive" natives aren't exactly friendly either. Your team medic had to find that out the hard way. Oh sure sometimes you'll come across a tribe that's friendly, but most of the time the lizards see you as food. Soft, fleshy pink food that's invading their territory. Which means you usually end up having to torch an entire village. + +Fuckin' waste of ammo. + +Of course if the planet and its inhabitants weren't enough, there's always the other major powers laying claim to the planet. The Krik Collective, the Mazatt Dominion, and the Elojin Alliance have all laid claims to plunder whatever riches this planet may have and that's why you're here: To make sure this planet is plundered by the Terran Empire instead. + +The next Empire supply ship won't be here for a long time, let alone anymore troops. You're on your own. Ah the joys of being part of the Empire's expeditionary force. + +You and your team have currently set up base in one of those "friendly" lizard villages. + +Well its a brand new day in Paradise, what's first on the agenda? +> Stay in your quarters +Avoiding your problems won’t solve anything and it certainly doesn’t solve anything here. + +You fall asleep, and you don’t check on your team and they get into trouble without you looking over them. So it shouldn’t be all that much of a shock when a Lizard spear to your stomach wakes you up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Paradise... + +That must've been the Empire's idea of an ironic joke when they were assigning a name to this sweltering hell hole of a planet. The heat wouldn't be so bad if the planet wasn't also a jungle nightmare teaming with poisonous flora and dangerous fauna. + +The "primitive" natives aren't exactly friendly either. Your team medic had to find that out the hard way. Oh sure sometimes you'll come across a tribe that's friendly, but most of the time the lizards see you as food. Soft, fleshy pink food that's invading their territory. Which means you usually end up having to torch an entire village. + +Fuckin' waste of ammo. + +Of course if the planet and its inhabitants weren't enough, there's always the other major powers laying claim to the planet. The Krik Collective, the Mazatt Dominion, and the Elojin Alliance have all laid claims to plunder whatever riches this planet may have and that's why you're here: To make sure this planet is plundered by the Terran Empire instead. + +The next Empire supply ship won't be here for a long time, let alone anymore troops. You're on your own. Ah the joys of being part of the Empire's expeditionary force. + +You and your team have currently set up base in one of those "friendly" lizard villages. + +Well its a brand new day in Paradise, what's first on the agenda? +> Would you like to know more? (Your story) +The Empire and You. + +Sure sounded like a good idea at the time when you first saw those commercials and heard all the propaganda about how humanity needed you most. You pretty much bought it hook line and sinker, just like they planned. + +Were you REALLY that bored on your backwater planet? + +Well yeah you were actually. You were raised on a relatively unsettled world, barely colonized, just a few farming communities basically. Your world wasn’t dangerous at all; the Empire had long since exterminated a native species living on it before humans came to settle it. Yep, nice and orderly. + +You always felt stuck on your insignificant planet, you felt like you should be doing something greater, something more important. When the recruiters came you saw it as a way out of the intergalactic boonies and joined up right away. No longer would you be some drone, you’d be making a difference for humanity and gaining all the accolades that go with it. Since then you’re almost regretting that decision. + +It’s not really the danger that bothers you, or the suicide like missions they give you. It’s the mood of still feeling insignificant. You thought this would all be different somehow. You thought you’d have a command of legions of troops, bringing glory to the Empire, and conquering worlds in HIS name. + +As it is, you’re a glorified scout, because the Empire decided your skills would be better put to use there and of course the Empire is ALWAYS right. + +Sure there’s adventure, but no fame, no adoration, there’s barely any acknowledgement for what you do, despite the fact that you’ve gotten pretty good at it and reached the rank of Captain. But if you were to get killed, you’d be replaced easy enough. The average grunt is probably more valued, you’re a canary in the coal mine. + +Sometimes you think there’s gotta be a way out of this mess you’ve gotten yourself into… +> Back to the story +Paradise... + +That must've been the Empire's idea of an ironic joke when they were assigning a name to this sweltering hell hole of a planet. The heat wouldn't be so bad if the planet wasn't also a jungle nightmare teaming with poisonous flora and dangerous fauna. + +The "primitive" natives aren't exactly friendly either. Your team medic had to find that out the hard way. Oh sure sometimes you'll come across a tribe that's friendly, but most of the time the lizards see you as food. Soft, fleshy pink food that's invading their territory. Which means you usually end up having to torch an entire village. + +Fuckin' waste of ammo. + +Of course if the planet and its inhabitants weren't enough, there's always the other major powers laying claim to the planet. The Krik Collective, the Mazatt Dominion, and the Elojin Alliance have all laid claims to plunder whatever riches this planet may have and that's why you're here: To make sure this planet is plundered by the Terran Empire instead. + +The next Empire supply ship won't be here for a long time, let alone anymore troops. You're on your own. Ah the joys of being part of the Empire's expeditionary force. + +You and your team have currently set up base in one of those "friendly" lizard villages. + +Well its a brand new day in Paradise, what's first on the agenda?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You were really starting to get tired of the color green. The forests were green, the grass was green, even your damn Realm's emblem was green. It made already boring guard duty even worse. You would pace back and forth staring at the dreadfully large expanse of forest ahead of you, but nothing would ever happen. You might see the occasional kobold walk along the edge of the forest, but they never did anything. They just watched and waited. If you weren't on a fifty foot high wall you might actually be worried, but, as it happens, you were. There was no kobold in all of the Lost Realm that could scale these walls, and even if there was it, and its disgusting green skin would get peppered with arrows before it had the chance to. Yes, this was simply the easiest most boring place to guard in all of the Realm of Men. + + +It was because of this fact that your lieutenant was thoroughly confused when you requested to be transferred here. You were his most reliable soldier, and you knew that. You used his fondness of you to get him to give you this transfer. He'd asked why, and you'd simply replied that you needed time to get over what happened to Liliana. Your wife. She was assumed dead by everyone. The night of your wedding you and her were cornered in an alley by thugs. You were beaten to a pulp, and she was taken, in more than one sense of the word, right before your eyes. Her parting words to you before you blacked out from the pain were, "I'm lost!" + + +I'm lost. + + +You take off your wedding ring and examine it. It's a beautiful piece. Solid gold encrusted with an emerald gem. It is the only green you find yourself being able to stand, and only then because it was from Liliana. Guard duty wasn't paying you enough for you to be able to get rings for the both of you, so instead you blew all of your money on her ring. That one was polished iron inlaid with golden patterns, and it wasn't much, but it represented more than money. Liliana accepted your proposal, and when she found out you hadn't gotten yourself a ring she gave you her mother's ring. It was a little too girly for you, but the smile on her face turned you into an emotional sob, so you accepted. She was taken that same night. Presumed dead, and with you chosen as her closest 'relative' it was up to you to bury her coffin. You did so quickly. Many people, including your lieutenant, suggested you take things slower, but you were adamant. + + +You didn't tell them why you were in such a hurry, and even if you did, you doubt they would've believed you. You were the closest person to Liliana and consequently the only one whom she would trust with her secrets. + + +I'm lost. + + +Those words could only mean one thing. They were a confirmation to a question you asked her years ago, when the two of you first met... +> Memory: Meeting Liliana +Year 366 of the Second Era + + +At the age of ten, you were average. Your height, weight, disposition, and, well, pretty much everything about you was average. Never the last one chosen for capture the emblem, but never the first one either. Your life then was a monotonous slog: Go to your rundown academy, try to do well in your academic work, fail, and return home only to have your drunkard of a father beat you. You didn't realize how miserable your life was until the fateful day when Liliana joined your class at school. + + +Like the rest of the girls in the class, she wore a dress. Unlike the rest of the girls in the class, her dress was obviously of fine make. The embroidery on her dress had no faults. No drops of blood from clumsy mothers who pricked themselves on their needle. No lazy patches sewn in to cover up holes. No, her dress was flawless. Her hair was onyx black, and fell down in waves around her face. Her glittering blue eyes were filled with anticipation, and maybe a little fear. She clearly wasn't used to being in these kinds of situations, and she kept glancing around as if someone else was going to introduce her to the other classmates. + + +Your teacher, a hag of a woman, prompted her to introduce herself. "Go ahead and introduce yourself to the class, dear." + + +She widened her eyes in surprise, but followed the teacher's command. "My name is Liliana, I'm ten years of age, and..," she looked to the teacher for instruction. She had an accent, and one that you'd never heard before at that. Not northern, or even like those from the eastern realm. No, this was decidedly different from any other accent you'd heard before. + + +"Go on," the teacher prompted again. + + +"I don't know what else to say," Liliana responded. + + +The teacher frowned disappointedly. "Surely you have more things to tell us about yourself than your name?" When Liliana didn't respond, the teacher spoke again. "Where are you from? Or, what do you like to do in your spare time? Tell us things like that." + + +Liliana hesitated once more. + + +"Come now. We don't judge people here," the hag patted her comfortingly on the shoulder, but failed to notice the snickering in the back. + + +Liliana, it seemed, found her words comforting, and finally started to open up. "I was born in Arboribus. My father is the king there, and it's an amazing place. There are trees larger than castles there! Oh, and I like to go stag riding with my father if he has the ti-" + + +The teacher interrupted. "Excuse me. Where?" The teacher sounded somewhat confused, but definitely disappointed. The snickering in the back increased, but Liliana still hadn't noticed. + + +"Arboribus," she said this clearly, and with an expression of incredulity fixed upon her face. The teacher simply stared at her blankly, until Liliana continued. "You know, in The Lost Realm..." + + +The boys in the back, try as they might, couldn't contain themselves any longer. They busted out into raucous laughter that spread to the rest of the students that were typically thought of as nice. Everyone gave into the laughter, and even the teacher hag was chuckling. + + +You were on the edge of laughter as well, but something kept you there. Stories of The Lost Realm, and rumors of a ancient city of humans therein. Your mother, before she died of disease, would tell you fairy tales of the ancient land, and how it used to be as prosperous as the Realm of Men is now. You'd always harbored the secret thought, hope, that the stories were true, and here was a person who claimed to hail from that very place. This, and the expression on Liliana's face, caused you to hesitate. Her expression was that of someone hurt , and a genuine expression at that. + + +You held the laughter off, and waited for everyone else to do the same. They eventually quieted down, but only after tears started streaming down Liliana's face. Silence took the place of laughter, and all joy was replaced with the sad sound of sobbing. + + +The old hag had the decency to attempt to comfort her by giving her a hug, but Liliana jerked away. Apparently she didn't like the idea of hugging the old hag. Especially since she'd promised no ridicule would come, but then turned around and gloried in it herself. + + +"It's true!" Liliana yelled after she managed to control her sobbing. "I'm not a liar! And, and ,and..." She starts crying again, but instead of staying in the classroom for everyone to see, she ran through the door and out of the classroom. + + +The silence continued for a moment longer, before you made your first life changing decision. You got up from your designated chair and followed after Liliana. + + +You were no expert at dealing with girls. Let alone crying ones, and you weren't the most... +> ...charismatic... +Year 366 of the Second Era + + +...charismatic of people, but you were smart enough to know that, when crying, a girl needs a comforting shoulder. Not a questioning voice. + + +You follow the sound of sobbing through the worn wooden hallways of the school, and outside, until you find the source of the crying. Liliana sits on the steps to the main door of the school. Her well crafted dress is ruffled in places and her body constantly shifts under the pressure of her tears. Her hair comes down in waves around her head, effectively cutting off any view of her face. + + +She doesn't notice you there at first, but when the main door closes behind you she jumps and turns towards you. Tears and snot cover her face with her eyes both sad and angry at the same time, and for a moment you find yourself regretting coming here. That moment passes, and the impulse you followed earlier propels you toward her. + + +"Are you going to laugh at me again?" + + +Her voice reflects what she is feeling. Sadness, despair, anger, and, you think, a bit of hope color her voice. You decide to concentrate on her hopefulness. + + +"I didn't laugh." + + +"Everyone laughed. I saw." + + +Clearly she hadn't been paying attention to you when in the classroom. "Not me." + + +You sit down on the same step as her, and she glares at you. Silence ensues, and you turn away and gaze out in front of you. You want to ask her about the Realm of the Lost, but the question dies in your throat. Wouldn't it be at least a little insensitive to ask her prying questions now? + + +Your question is answered when you hear her start to sob again. This time it's less intense, but it's still crying all the same. Maybe it's the memory of her excited face when she was in front of the classroom, or maybe you just didn't like the sound of crying. Whatever the reason, you decide to wrap your arm around her shoulders in a half hug. Liliana turns to stone beneath your touch, and you think she'll pull away, but she doesn't. She stays still, but continues her crying. You feel absurdly awkward in this position, but she doesn't seem to mind. She even leans into your hug after a while. + + +In between holding her and listening to her crying, you find yourself staring at her wondering how in all the realms this girl was from the Lost Realm. You might be tainted by the knowledge of fairytales, but you were still aware that the Lost Realm was crawling with kobold and others of that ilk. It was a very dangerous place. At the end of the first era was when the Lost Realm was supposedly at the height of its power, but that ended when a dragon led a massive host of kobold and wyverns and sacked the entirety of the realm. Well, that's how the stories went. So how then, could a delicate being such as this come from such a dangerous place? + + +Then a brilliant idea came over you. There was a story your mother once told you. One about the faerie, a race of beings native to the Lost Realm. When they were in the Lost Realm they were humanoid creatures of a similar height humans, but with pointed ears and a slender build. In the story, a faerie wandered over the border of the Realm of Men and the Realm of the Lost, (Before the border walls were constructed) but the faerie were tied to their own realm. Whenever they left, they became as humans. This particular faerie panicked when they realized they left their home for another realm, and immediately tried to go back, but every time he tried to re-enter his homeland, he would get lost, turned around. He could never find his way back. Once the faerie willingly left the Realm of the Lost, they weren't allowed back. He was left in the Realm of Men to fend for himself, but he desired that no their faerie would feel like he did. Alone, confused and afraid. So the faerie came up with a code. If he thought there was another faerie, he would ask them a simple question. + + +You ask that question now. "Are you lost?" + + +Liliana immediately pulls from you and stares at you in disbelief. She suddenly wipes all of the tears from her face with her sleeve before asking you a question. "Will you help me fit in here?" + + +Kinda shocked that your plan worked you only nod in response. + + +A hint of a smile breaches her face. "What's your name?" + + +You briefly wonder what you've gotten yourself into, but you answer regardless. "My name is..." +> End of Memory +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You pull yourself from the memory. That was happening way too often since Liliana was captured. And she was captured. There was no doubt in your mind about that. Captured by people who obviously knew what they were doing. Otherwise they wouldn't be able to make it through the forests of the Lost Realm without being captured, killed, or raped by horny kobold. That means there's a way to make it through that forest. You just have to find it. + + +That was the reason you spent your time here on the wall watching, waiting, planning your route through that kobold infested place. Of course you could just leave on your own and hope for the best, but th- + + +Your thoughts are interrupted when the roar of some beast sounds throughout the air. You jerk your head immediately towards the sound. It came from somewhere over the tops of the trees, and still must've been miles out. Every guard on the wall peels their eyes to the forest, and it isn't long before one of your fellow guardsmen spots something. + + +"There! Above the forest!" The guard sounds quite panicked. + + +You look where he indicated and spot several grey blots in the distance. They look like birds at first, but as they get closer you can tell they're much larger and have several more rows of teeth than a bird. + + +"Wyverns." The guard right beside you breathes out. + + +You turn back to look at the beasts. They're still a few miles out, but you can hear the beat of their leathery wings drawing closer every second. The guards in your platoon stand on the wall in stunned silence. Nothing happens here, ever. Why now of all times? + + +Your lieutenant, an older fellow named Byron, calls everyone to order. "This is what we're here for men! This is why..." + + +Byron's voice fades into the depths of your mind. It is replaced by a different voice. One that's mocking, provoking. The memory of your first fight calls back to you. +> Remember +Year 368 of the Second Era + + +"Are you listening bitch?" + + +A hand is shoved into your back and you're sent tumbling to the ground. Grass presses against your face, and you even feel some dirt in your mouth. That was fine. You didn't care very much. These guys could push you around all they wanted. They'd never be able to beat you as bad as your father did. + + +"Stop it, Daniel!" Liliana's voice sounds from behind you. Apparently she didn't like Daniel pushing you. + + +You slowly pick yourself up and off of the ground as Daniel replies. "What? You didn't like me pushing your bitch around?" That remark is followed by some laughter. + + +"He hasn't done anything to you." Liliana replies readily. "Leave and go hit your mom if you're looking for a bitch to hit. Don't touch him." There's a moment of silence before you hear a smack. That sound reverberates around the academy yard, and for a moment you think Liliana finally slapped the guy like she said she'd been wanting to do, but when you turn around you find it's the complete opposite. Liliana is on the grass now, clutching her face. You see tears start to come to her eyes, but she doesn't sob. Not anymore. + + +You've never been the most violent person. Your mother instilled that into you, so you let others push you around. You didn't give a damn either way, but when you see Liliana on the ground you don't hesitate. + + +You lunge forward and shove Daniel hard in the chest, and you do it hard enough to send him flying to the ground as well, but unlike you and Liliana he gets back up to his feet quickly. His reaction is also quick. He immediately rushes toward you and raises his fist back. You can tell a punch is coming. + + +You've grown in the past couple years, and are easily one of the tallest guys in class. Aside from Daniel, that is. You might not be taller than Daniel, but you'd bet your mother's corpse (Muse bless her soul) that you can take more hits than he can. That being said, you don't particularly fancy getting punched if you can avoid it. +> Let him hit you +Year 368 of the Second Era + + +Despite what others think of him, Daniel is weak. And you're going to prove just that. + + +His punch comes directly into your right cheek. It has a hell of a lot of power. Certainly more than you anticipated, but you don't allow yourself to stumble. Your head snaps back as it hits, and there's a lot of pain, but you ignore it. Instead you revel in the shock displayed upon Daniel's face. He's thoroughly surprised, and you doubt someone has ever lasted past the first punch against him. Let alone be barely affected by it. + + +You look him dead in the eyes and smile just before returning his punch with one of your own. He doesn't get away in time, and is hammered by your punch. He stumbles backward, and you take a step forward and shove him to the ground once more. There's no time for him to react as you pounce on top of him and lay punch after punch into his face. His 'friends' don't rise to stop you, and the courtyard is silent save for the sound of your fist pounding his face. + + +After several more punches you feel a hand on your shoulder. You nearly jerk away from it, but, despite your frenzied mind, you are able to recognize that it is a distinctly feminine hand. Liliana, you think and stop punching. Daniel doesn't stop his groaning as you rise to your feet to face her. + + +There's less baby fat on her face now than when you first saw her, and is beginning to be quite the knockout. Her eyes are still slightly red and the right side of her face is still red, but she isn't crying any more. + + +"Enough," she whispers to you. + + +You only nod in response. You start to walk away from the scene when you realize that you'd gathered quite the crowd. You think about saying something, but instead you reach for Liliana's hand and glare at everyone in the crowd. Your look says it all. + + +You leave the scene with Liliana in tow. +> Return from the memory +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +The memory fades away, and Byron's voice returns. "I need one person to light the signal light over by the watchtower. Everyone in division two stay here and support us with arrows. Everyone in division one follow me!" + + +The wyverns are still racing to the wall, and a fight seems inevitable. + + +Byron leads the way as he and division one head down to the ground to support the rest of the group. Everyone else stays and prepares their bows. + + +You were assigned to division two upon your transfer here, and so your orders are abundantly clear. +> Stay with division two +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +The signal fire will get lit by someone else, so you don't need to worry about that. After that your decision becomes even easier. You aren't a fool. Leaving the safety of the wall when it's under attack, and of your own volition at that, would be utter foolishness. You stay right where you are and string your bow with the rest of division two. + + +The distinctive sounds of the wyverns approaching doesn't change, but as you wait for them to draw near, you hear another set of noises. Several sets of hooves pound against the ground just beyond the edge of the forest, and before too long you see the culprits of the noise bursting through the edge of the wood. Five horses, mounted by at least one person apiece, ride from out of the forest. They ride at a very fast speed, and the horses themselves seem to be running more from fear rather than their rider's instructions. A few moments after they come out of the woods almost twenty giant lizards come out of the forest. The beasts are generally green, but many, if not, all, have blue or purple scales scattered across their hide. Three kobold ride atop each of the lizards. + + +If your division wasn't silent before, then they certainly are now. The math is easy. There are around sixty kobold, and that is discounting the wyverns and their riders still on their way. You briefly wonder what in the four realms this group of less than ten individuals did to anger this many kobold, but the thought is dashed from your mind as the kobold come into range. + + +You aren't the best shot out there, but you are far from the worst, and today is a good day for you. Nearly every one of your arrows finds its mark, and many an enemy dies at your hand. You continue this up until the very moment division one clashes with the kobold host. After that you slow down, and pick your shots. You don't want to accidentally hit a fellow guard after all. + + +You're so focused on the battle below you that you nearly miss it when the wyverns make their first approach. The beasts, although much larger than the giant lizards, only carry two kobold apiece. The wyverns themselves are a leathery grey color with razor sharp teeth, and hind legs that could tear guards apart. there are only five, but you have trouble thinking about how you and division two are supposed to bring down one of these monstrosities. Let alone five. + + +The fear in division two is palpable as you and your fellow guardsmen switch your attention from the kobold below to the wyverns above. Almost as if they could sense the fear in your comrades, three of the wyverns barrel past the battle below and head straight towards the portion of the wall your division is centered on. + + +Specifically, and unluckily so, one of the wyverns seem to be coming straight toward you. You find yourself in the midst of a decision that could cost you your life, and you only have a second to act. +> Dodge to the side +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You act on impulse and throw yourself to the side as the wyvern makes its pass, but you don't throw yourself nearly far enough away to avoid its claws. While it doesn't manage to grab you and fling you off the wall, its claws do manage to carve your stomach to pieces. If that wasn't enough, the sheer momentum of the beast flying at you at breakneck speed and hitting you is enough to send you flying off the wall. + + +Your body can't even keep itself together as you plummet to your death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +The signal fire will get lit by someone else, so you don't need to worry about that. After that your decision becomes even easier. You aren't a fool. Leaving the safety of the wall when it's under attack, and of your own volition at that, would be utter foolishness. You stay right where you are and string your bow with the rest of division two. + + +The distinctive sounds of the wyverns approaching doesn't change, but as you wait for them to draw near, you hear another set of noises. Several sets of hooves pound against the ground just beyond the edge of the forest, and before too long you see the culprits of the noise bursting through the edge of the wood. Five horses, mounted by at least one person apiece, ride from out of the forest. They ride at a very fast speed, and the horses themselves seem to be running more from fear rather than their rider's instructions. A few moments after they come out of the woods almost twenty giant lizards come out of the forest. The beasts are generally green, but many, if not, all, have blue or purple scales scattered across their hide. Three kobold ride atop each of the lizards. + + +If your division wasn't silent before, then they certainly are now. The math is easy. There are around sixty kobold, and that is discounting the wyverns and their riders still on their way. You briefly wonder what in the four realms this group of less than ten individuals did to anger this many kobold, but the thought is dashed from your mind as the kobold come into range. + + +You aren't the best shot out there, but you are far from the worst, and today is a good day for you. Nearly every one of your arrows finds its mark, and many an enemy dies at your hand. You continue this up until the very moment division one clashes with the kobold host. After that you slow down, and pick your shots. You don't want to accidentally hit a fellow guard after all. + + +You're so focused on the battle below you that you nearly miss it when the wyverns make their first approach. The beasts, although much larger than the giant lizards, only carry two kobold apiece. The wyverns themselves are a leathery grey color with razor sharp teeth, and hind legs that could tear guards apart. there are only five, but you have trouble thinking about how you and division two are supposed to bring down one of these monstrosities. Let alone five. + + +The fear in division two is palpable as you and your fellow guardsmen switch your attention from the kobold below to the wyverns above. Almost as if they could sense the fear in your comrades, three of the wyverns barrel past the battle below and head straight towards the portion of the wall your division is centered on. + + +Specifically, and unluckily so, one of the wyverns seem to be coming straight toward you. You find yourself in the midst of a decision that could cost you your life, and you only have a second to act. +> Duck behind the ramparts +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You know you won't have enough time to get entirely out of the range of the wyvern's claws. It's better to duck and hope for the best than to definitely die. + + +You follow this thought and duck behind the ramparts. The wyvern makes its pass, and perhaps from sheer luck, you pass between its hind legs. Stones from the ramparts on either side of you crumble and fall away, but you remain fairly unscathed. + + +You thought you were going to die for sure, and, after finding out you managed to scrape by, you stand up in a fit of pure relief. You celebrate too early, however, for a kobold archer from the battle below takes the opportunity and releases an arrow at you. The arrow pierces through your jugular, and you bleed out in mere moments.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +The memory fades away, and Byron's voice returns. "I need one person to light the signal light over by the watchtower. Everyone in division two stay here and support us with arrows. Everyone in division one follow me!" + + +The wyverns are still racing to the wall, and a fight seems inevitable. + + +Byron leads the way as he and division one head down to the ground to support the rest of the group. Everyone else stays and prepares their bows. + + +You were assigned to division two upon your transfer here, and so your orders are abundantly clear. +> Go light the signal fire +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +When you first transferred here, Byron was telling you about all of the duties that you might have here as a wall guard. One of these duties, should the need arise, was to light the signal fire. Byron didn't expound upon the why, and said only that it was an important duty. You didn't find out until later that this was the signal fire for the Griffin Knights. The Griffin Knights, or at least the patrol of them that stood at the ready in case the walls were attacked. + + +You assume most guards forget this fact. Otherwise they'd simply be fools. Griffin knights were among the best warriors in all of the Realm of Men, and that was when they weren't atop their chosen steed. With their griffins these knights surpassed all other units in their usefulness in battle. + + +That was the way to win this battle. Not through grit, and a hell of a lot of grit. No, in order to win, to live to see Liliana again, the Griffin Knights needed to be here. The wyverns would tear apart everyone otherwise. + + +You run along the ramparts to the signal fire. It's quite the distance from where the battle is taking place, and you start to hear the sound of swords clashing and wyverns roaring as you make your way. Upon arriving, you find straw and oil ready to be used in case of an emergency. You waste no time in starting the fire. Before long you tend the fire to maximum intensity, or at least as intense as you can get it on such short notice. + + +Having finished your job, you gaze back in the direction of the battle. Five wyverns patrol the skies with each occasionally taking dives at the top of the wall where division two was stationed. You feel a pang of guilt that you should've stayed there to help, but you dismiss it. If the Griffin Knights come to support you in the battle, then your efforts will have been well worth it. + + +That being said, there isn't much of an excuse for you now. +> Return to the battle +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You start a light jog to the wyvern infested ramparts, but you stop before you get there and string your bow. What is the point in throwing yourself into the middle of danger for nothing? Chances are that you would die a gruesome death for no reason other than your eagerness for battle. An inexperienced fool's death. + + +With your bow stringed and the wyverns attention away from you, you start taking shots at the beasts. You aim your first few shots at the wyverns themselves, but when they bounce harmlessly off of their scaly hides, you shift your focus. There are two kobold atop each of the five wyverns present, and while they are certainly dwarfed by the sheer size of the wyverns they are riding, you don't let that distract you. Each of the kobold atop the wyvern has a critical purpose. The one in the front is to steer and control the mount while the one in the back holds a bow in its hands. It's job is to fire at anyone attempting to kill the former type of kobold. Such as you. + + +The wyvern you'd been concentrating on turns its attention toward you, as does the kobold archer atop it, but it never gets a chance to loose its arrow at you. Instead your own arrow pierces its chest sending it tumbling from its mount and into the open air. Unfortunately, the other kobold still sits atop the wyvern, and after your display of accuracy, you've become a prime target. That wyvern and its rider come flying toward you, which is bad, but away from the battle, which is good. You take the last opportunity you'll get and loose one more arrow at the other kobold. Your aim is off on this, so your arrow only ends up bouncing off of the wyvern's body. You start to draw another arrow, but as you do, the wyvern takes on a burst of speed and is on you before you know it. Your life flashes before your eyes, and an image of Liliana's beautiful face plants itself at the forefront of your mind. You simply don't have enough time to react to the wyvern's speed, and you just close your eyes in acceptance. + + +Then you feel a large claw grab your waist. Its touch is surprising gentle. Nothing of what you would expect of a wyvern, and you keep waiting for it to hurl you from its grip, but that doesn't happen. Hesitantly, you open your eyes to find yourself suspended in the air, and not in the grasp of a wyvern. Rather, you find yourself in the grip of a griffin. The relief you feel is instantaneous, but that is quickly replaced by terror. You quickly reach your hands and grip onto the cold claws of the griffin. + + +You take stock of the situation. Including the griffin carrying you, there are at least seven Griffin Knights combating the wyverns in the air. It's an amazing scene, and your breath catches. Griffins are much smaller than the wyverns, but this makes them significantly faster, so the wyverns seeme clumsy by comparison. The griffin knights themselves wear gleaming silver armor and cast a perfect picture of the word 'knight.' On the ground, the fight continues. The kobold outnumber division one, by nearly two to one, and that is discounting the giant lizards they brought with them to the battle. You start wondering why so many kobold came to mount an attack on the wall, but are soon distracted from that with what happens next. + + +You feel a sudden change in direction as the griffin carrying you heads back to the walls. You realize that it, and the rider, must want to drop you back off at the wall before returning to the melee. You are quite okay with this, but then a scene just below you unfolds in the span of a moment. + + +A wyvern, with just the rider left to guide it, chases a griffin just below you. For that moment it seems the entire world slows down in order for you to see and understand what's happening. The wyvern is gaining, and it opens its mouth in anticipation for the coming chomp on the griffin's lower half. It isn't some beast's wild hope that it'll manage to bite the griffin either. No, you can very clearly see that this wyvern will be able to catch the griffin. Thus leading to both the griffin's and its rider's death. + + +In this same moment, an utterly absurd idea crosses your mind. The griffin holding you wasn't trying to keep you prisoner. It was merely keeping you from falling, and you think you could pry yourself open from its grip if you really tried. If you did, then you should land just as the wyvern's saddle passes beneath you. Your weight might even be enough to cause the wyvern to lose the edge its gained on the griffin. You left your bow back on the ramparts when the griffin saved you from the wyvern, but you do still have your standard short sword strapped to your waist. If you did go through with such a ridiculous plan, you could maybe even take out the rider and wyvern. + + +Maybe. +> Follow that plan +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +This won't be the first time you've done something crazy, though it is likely the one with the most at stake. + + +You pry yourself from the claws of the griffin and fall into the open air. Your plan... +> Fails! +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +Your timing was horribly off. You jump much too early and find yourself face to face with the open mouth of a wyvern. It must think you're the griffin, for as soon as you even near its mouth it snaps its mouth shut on top of you. Your midsection is torn to pieces, and you die instantly. + + +At least you can die well knowing that you saved that Griffin Knight.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You start a light jog to the wyvern infested ramparts, but you stop before you get there and string your bow. What is the point in throwing yourself into the middle of danger for nothing? Chances are that you would die a gruesome death for no reason other than your eagerness for battle. An inexperienced fool's death. + + +With your bow stringed and the wyverns attention away from you, you start taking shots at the beasts. You aim your first few shots at the wyverns themselves, but when they bounce harmlessly off of their scaly hides, you shift your focus. There are two kobold atop each of the five wyverns present, and while they are certainly dwarfed by the sheer size of the wyverns they are riding, you don't let that distract you. Each of the kobold atop the wyvern has a critical purpose. The one in the front is to steer and control the mount while the one in the back holds a bow in its hands. It's job is to fire at anyone attempting to kill the former type of kobold. Such as you. + + +The wyvern you'd been concentrating on turns its attention toward you, as does the kobold archer atop it, but it never gets a chance to loose its arrow at you. Instead your own arrow pierces its chest sending it tumbling from its mount and into the open air. Unfortunately, the other kobold still sits atop the wyvern, and after your display of accuracy, you've become a prime target. That wyvern and its rider come flying toward you, which is bad, but away from the battle, which is good. You take the last opportunity you'll get and loose one more arrow at the other kobold. Your aim is off on this, so your arrow only ends up bouncing off of the wyvern's body. You start to draw another arrow, but as you do, the wyvern takes on a burst of speed and is on you before you know it. Your life flashes before your eyes, and an image of Liliana's beautiful face plants itself at the forefront of your mind. You simply don't have enough time to react to the wyvern's speed, and you just close your eyes in acceptance. + + +Then you feel a large claw grab your waist. Its touch is surprising gentle. Nothing of what you would expect of a wyvern, and you keep waiting for it to hurl you from its grip, but that doesn't happen. Hesitantly, you open your eyes to find yourself suspended in the air, and not in the grasp of a wyvern. Rather, you find yourself in the grip of a griffin. The relief you feel is instantaneous, but that is quickly replaced by terror. You quickly reach your hands and grip onto the cold claws of the griffin. + + +You take stock of the situation. Including the griffin carrying you, there are at least seven Griffin Knights combating the wyverns in the air. It's an amazing scene, and your breath catches. Griffins are much smaller than the wyverns, but this makes them significantly faster, so the wyverns seeme clumsy by comparison. The griffin knights themselves wear gleaming silver armor and cast a perfect picture of the word 'knight.' On the ground, the fight continues. The kobold outnumber division one, by nearly two to one, and that is discounting the giant lizards they brought with them to the battle. You start wondering why so many kobold came to mount an attack on the wall, but are soon distracted from that with what happens next. + + +You feel a sudden change in direction as the griffin carrying you heads back to the walls. You realize that it, and the rider, must want to drop you back off at the wall before returning to the melee. You are quite okay with this, but then a scene just below you unfolds in the span of a moment. + + +A wyvern, with just the rider left to guide it, chases a griffin just below you. For that moment it seems the entire world slows down in order for you to see and understand what's happening. The wyvern is gaining, and it opens its mouth in anticipation for the coming chomp on the griffin's lower half. It isn't some beast's wild hope that it'll manage to bite the griffin either. No, you can very clearly see that this wyvern will be able to catch the griffin. Thus leading to both the griffin's and its rider's death. + + +In this same moment, an utterly absurd idea crosses your mind. The griffin holding you wasn't trying to keep you prisoner. It was merely keeping you from falling, and you think you could pry yourself open from its grip if you really tried. If you did, then you should land just as the wyvern's saddle passes beneath you. Your weight might even be enough to cause the wyvern to lose the edge its gained on the griffin. You left your bow back on the ramparts when the griffin saved you from the wyvern, but you do still have your standard short sword strapped to your waist. If you did go through with such a ridiculous plan, you could maybe even take out the rider and wyvern. + + +Maybe. +> Let yourself be brought back to the ramparts +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +Sure you've done crazy things in the past, but this is no time to try and accomplish the utterly insane. Especially when the chances of success are so very low. Better to live and keep your chance of saving Liliana alive rather than to throw it away on the unlikely chance that you'll be able to save some random nobody. + + +Despite this fact, you still wince when you see the wyvern's mouth snap down on the griffins hindquarters. The scene turns into a bloody mess, and you can't help but look away as the griffin (or at least what's left of it) and its rider plummet down to the battle below. + + +You feel a pang of guilt, but you push it away by telling yourself you couldn't have done anything anyway. Yet, somewhere in the back of your mind, you don't believe this. + + +Not too long after that you are dropped off on the ramparts you were originally guarding. Much is different. Several chunks of the wall are missing, and many soldiers lie dead on the ramparts. The wall you once guarded no longer carries that symbol of boredom and ease in your mind. It is readily replaced with the memory of blood spilt, and comrades dying. + + +Over half of division two is either dead or incapacitated. Division on was doing better, but the griffin that was killed only moments before plummeted right into their line. That turned out to be the turning point in the kobold's favor, and now division one is slowly being pushed back against the wall. The griffins are locked in a very deadly battle with the rest of the wyverns, and don't seem at all in a position to help the human forces on the ground. + + +You aren't sure what you could do to help in this situation, for it looks like your defeat is inevitable. The griffins won't be able to kill the wyverns fast enough to help division one avoid getting slaughtered, which division one is mere minutes away from. This leaves you with a few honorable choices and one dishonorable choice. +> Join division one on the ground +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You're no griffin knight. You can't contend with wyverns on an equal level, and firing a few arrows won't make any difference in the fight on the ground. No, if you're going to win this fight, then you need to go right into the thick of it. If you can manage to help division stay alive for even five minutes longer, then the chances of the griffin knights helping out are significantly higher. + + +You still have your sword strapped to your waist, and you don't usually carry a shield on you for guard duty, so you pick one up from the dead and strap it to your back. Following this you jog to the closest tower and go down the stairwell. Inside the tower it is eerily quiet compared to the roars and clangs of battle outside, and the sound of your steel boots hitting the stone stairs reverberates throughout. Moments later, you come to the bottom of the stairs. A large iron gate-like door greets you. It is quite the durable piece, and nothing less than a battering ram would be able to break through it. Or perhaps a wyvern flying at breakneck speed... You push that foreboding thought from your head and walk through the iron doors. + + +What greets you outside is a scene of bloodshed and death. Division one has been pushed back nearly all the way to the walls, but their line still holds. Currently the division is organized in a semi-circle formation with the flat of the circle pressed against the wall. Everywhere else is a place for fighting, and nearly every soldier fights for their lives. There is one soldier, however, that does not fight, You see him sitting against the wall with the shaft of a crude arrow of kobold make protruding from his stomach. It's Byron, and it looks like he's lost a lot of blood. + + +Almost instinctively, you approach him. As you near, a spurt of blood comes out of his mouth and splatter against your chest-piece. "Lieutenant Byron?" You ask this fairly loudly, but he doesn't respond, so you repeat it. "Lieutenant Byron?" + + +This time he turns his pain and regret filled eyes toward you. He focuses on you and reaches his arm up and grips your forearm in his. A sign of comradery and trust. "I know not who you are, nor from where you came, but I need you now soldier. We are losing. My men die at every turn, and the kobold do not let up. Even still, there is hope. If we can keep the line, then they," he looks up to the sky, "will save us." + + +He coughs up some more blood, but his grip on your arm stays strong. "Your name escapes me soldier, and I feel bad for laying this burden upon you, but someone must keep these soldier together. Will you do this for me brother? See to it that some of these men survive this battle." + + +With this last request his grip loosens and falls limp at his side. His breaths cease, and you're left in the presence of a dead man. Numbly, you stand back up and gaze at the fight. You knew you needed to help in this battle in the first place, but speaking with Byron has strengthened your resolve. The only thing left to decide is where you will help. +> Help the left flank +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You aren't Byron. You won't be able to lead these men better than him, or lead them at all. You're just another soldier, so what does it matter where you go? So you head to the flank closest to you. The left one. + + +The fighting over here doesn't seem nearly as intense as the fighting near the middle. You pull out your sword and shield, and immediately get to work. Most of the people fighting are beginning to get tired, so the addition of a fresh, well equipped soldier vastly improves the line. So much, in fact, that it seems that the entirety of the left flank almost molds around your fighting. Which strikes you as odd, because of the way you're fighting. You don't rush in and throw yourself at the enemy in a fit of battlefield rage, or anything of that sort. No, you're calm in the heat of battle. You have a focused determination, and because of this you don't make any brash moves. Your goal is to stay alive while keeping everyone else alive as well. Defense is the best offense, and it happens to make the fight last a hell of a lot longer. Maybe this will buy enough time for the griffin knights to take care of the wyverns. + + +With this thought in mind, you fight. Not for glory, nor for yourself. You fight for Liliana, and the chance to see her alive and well again. + + +"Retreat!" The sound of a despairing voice breaks you out of your focus, and a kobold nearly guts you because of it, but you quickly block the flimsy attack and return it with one of your own. It dies before you, and you have a sacred moment of rest before another kobold comes to fill its spot in the line. It gives you time to think about what the guy meant by retreating. Your line was doing so well, and retreating now would be suicide. The kobold would have a field day with chasing down and killing everyone on the ground. It was a cowardly, foolish mistake. Hopefully no one would listen to the fool's order, but, to your chagrin, they do. Soldiers from your left and right start disappearing, and, soon enough, there is no longer even the semblance of a line. You're quickly surrounded by kobold, and while you make a valiant effort to stay alive, it isn't enough.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You're no griffin knight. You can't contend with wyverns on an equal level, and firing a few arrows won't make any difference in the fight on the ground. No, if you're going to win this fight, then you need to go right into the thick of it. If you can manage to help division stay alive for even five minutes longer, then the chances of the griffin knights helping out are significantly higher. + + +You still have your sword strapped to your waist, and you don't usually carry a shield on you for guard duty, so you pick one up from the dead and strap it to your back. Following this you jog to the closest tower and go down the stairwell. Inside the tower it is eerily quiet compared to the roars and clangs of battle outside, and the sound of your steel boots hitting the stone stairs reverberates throughout. Moments later, you come to the bottom of the stairs. A large iron gate-like door greets you. It is quite the durable piece, and nothing less than a battering ram would be able to break through it. Or perhaps a wyvern flying at breakneck speed... You push that foreboding thought from your head and walk through the iron doors. + + +What greets you outside is a scene of bloodshed and death. Division one has been pushed back nearly all the way to the walls, but their line still holds. Currently the division is organized in a semi-circle formation with the flat of the circle pressed against the wall. Everywhere else is a place for fighting, and nearly every soldier fights for their lives. There is one soldier, however, that does not fight, You see him sitting against the wall with the shaft of a crude arrow of kobold make protruding from his stomach. It's Byron, and it looks like he's lost a lot of blood. + + +Almost instinctively, you approach him. As you near, a spurt of blood comes out of his mouth and splatter against your chest-piece. "Lieutenant Byron?" You ask this fairly loudly, but he doesn't respond, so you repeat it. "Lieutenant Byron?" + + +This time he turns his pain and regret filled eyes toward you. He focuses on you and reaches his arm up and grips your forearm in his. A sign of comradery and trust. "I know not who you are, nor from where you came, but I need you now soldier. We are losing. My men die at every turn, and the kobold do not let up. Even still, there is hope. If we can keep the line, then they," he looks up to the sky, "will save us." + + +He coughs up some more blood, but his grip on your arm stays strong. "Your name escapes me soldier, and I feel bad for laying this burden upon you, but someone must keep these soldier together. Will you do this for me brother? See to it that some of these men survive this battle." + + +With this last request his grip loosens and falls limp at his side. His breaths cease, and you're left in the presence of a dead man. Numbly, you stand back up and gaze at the fight. You knew you needed to help in this battle in the first place, but speaking with Byron has strengthened your resolve. The only thing left to decide is where you will help. +> Help the right flank +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You aren't Byron. You won't be able to lead these men better than him, or lead them at all. You're just another soldier, but you do think it matters where you go. You happen to be right handed, so you'll likely fight better in the right flank. With this hope in mind, you go over to your destination. + + +The fighting over here doesn't seem nearly as intense as the fighting near the center. You pull out your sword and shield, and immediately get to work. Most of the people fighting are beginning to get tired, so the addition of a fresh, well equipped soldier vastly improves the line. So much, in fact, that it seems that the entirety of the right flank almost molds around your fighting. Which strikes you as odd specifically because of the way you're fighting. You don't rush in and throw yourself at the enemy in a fit of battlefield rage, or anything of that sort. No, you're calm in the heat of battle. You have a focused determination, and because of this you don't make any brash moves. Your goal is to stay alive while keeping everyone else alive as well. Defense is the best offense, and it happens to make the fight last a hell of a lot longer. Maybe this will buy enough time for the griffin knights to take care of the wyverns. + + +With this thought in mind, you fight. Not for glory, nor for yourself. You fight for Liliana, and the chance to see her alive and well again. + + +"Retreat!" The sound of a despairing voice breaks you out of your focus, and a kobold nearly guts you because of it, but you quickly block the flimsy attack and return it with one of your own. It dies before you, and you have a sacred moment of rest before another kobold comes to fill its spot in the line. It gives you time to think about what the guy meant by retreating. Your line was doing so well, and retreating now would be suicide. The kobold would have a field day with chasing down and killing everyone on the ground. It was a cowardly, foolish mistake. + + +Hopefully no one would listen to the fool's order, but, to your chagrin, they do. Soldiers from your left and right start disappearing, and, soon enough, there is no longer even the semblance of a line. You're quickly surrounded by kobold, and while you make a valiant effort to stay alive, it isn't enough.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +Sure you've done crazy things in the past, but this is no time to try and accomplish the utterly insane. Especially when the chances of success are so very low. Better to live and keep your chance of saving Liliana alive rather than to throw it away on the unlikely chance that you'll be able to save some random nobody. + + +Despite this fact, you still wince when you see the wyvern's mouth snap down on the griffins hindquarters. The scene turns into a bloody mess, and you can't help but look away as the griffin (or at least what's left of it) and its rider plummet down to the battle below. + + +You feel a pang of guilt, but you push it away by telling yourself you couldn't have done anything anyway. Yet, somewhere in the back of your mind, you don't believe this. + + +Not too long after that you are dropped off on the ramparts you were originally guarding. Much is different. Several chunks of the wall are missing, and many soldiers lie dead on the ramparts. The wall you once guarded no longer carries that symbol of boredom and ease in your mind. It is readily replaced with the memory of blood spilt, and comrades dying. + + +Over half of division two is either dead or incapacitated. Division on was doing better, but the griffin that was killed only moments before plummeted right into their line. That turned out to be the turning point in the kobold's favor, and now division one is slowly being pushed back against the wall. The griffins are locked in a very deadly battle with the rest of the wyverns, and don't seem at all in a position to help the human forces on the ground. + + +You aren't sure what you could do to help in this situation, for it looks like your defeat is inevitable. The griffins won't be able to kill the wyverns fast enough to help division one avoid getting slaughtered, which division one is mere minutes away from. This leaves you with a few honorable choices and one dishonorable choice. +> Stay here and support division one with arrows +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +The Griffin knights are living legends. They don't need your 'support,' and they definitely don't need you shooting stray arrows and accidentally hitting one of them. Division one, however, does need your help, but leaving the wall at this point would be foolish. You'd likely be an easy target for a kobold archer in the back. Instead you decide that your best option is to stay on the ramparts and pick your shots. + + +Thus, you act. You find a bow lying beside a dead body, along with a few arrows, and immediately set to work. You focus on the easy targets, the ones away from the forefront of the battle. Those, and the kobold archers. You loose arrow after arrow into the enemy force, and bring many a kobold down, but it simply isn't enough. Your contribution isn't enough to turn the tide of battle at all, but, unfortunately for you, it is enough to garner the attention of the kobold archers. You manage to keep from being hit for quite a while, but eventually a kobold gets a lucky shot and you fall dead onto the ramparts with an arrow lodged in your throat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +Sure you've done crazy things in the past, but this is no time to try and accomplish the utterly insane. Especially when the chances of success are so very low. Better to live and keep your chance of saving Liliana alive rather than to throw it away on the unlikely chance that you'll be able to save some random nobody. + + +Despite this fact, you still wince when you see the wyvern's mouth snap down on the griffins hindquarters. The scene turns into a bloody mess, and you can't help but look away as the griffin (or at least what's left of it) and its rider plummet down to the battle below. + + +You feel a pang of guilt, but you push it away by telling yourself you couldn't have done anything anyway. Yet, somewhere in the back of your mind, you don't believe this. + + +Not too long after that you are dropped off on the ramparts you were originally guarding. Much is different. Several chunks of the wall are missing, and many soldiers lie dead on the ramparts. The wall you once guarded no longer carries that symbol of boredom and ease in your mind. It is readily replaced with the memory of blood spilt, and comrades dying. + + +Over half of division two is either dead or incapacitated. Division on was doing better, but the griffin that was killed only moments before plummeted right into their line. That turned out to be the turning point in the kobold's favor, and now division one is slowly being pushed back against the wall. The griffins are locked in a very deadly battle with the rest of the wyverns, and don't seem at all in a position to help the human forces on the ground. + + +You aren't sure what you could do to help in this situation, for it looks like your defeat is inevitable. The griffins won't be able to kill the wyverns fast enough to help division one avoid getting slaughtered, which division one is mere minutes away from. This leaves you with a few honorable choices and one dishonorable choice. +> Stay here and support the griffin knights with arrows +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You aren't going to flatter yourself. You firing a few arrows into the kobold horde below won't change anything, except perhaps where you die. Fighting on the forefront of the battle won't change anything either, and will almost definitely lead to your gruesome death. No, you aren't that powerful of an individual. + + +There is only one thing left. If you can manage to hit even just one of your shots on one of the kobold riders, then you could very well change the course of this battle. Killing a few kobold on the ground won't make that much of a difference, but if you can manage to help take down the wyverns, then the griffin knights will be free to help division one on the ground. At this point, victory relies on those knights. You only hope that you can help expedite that process. + + +You find a bow lying among the dead on the ramparts, along with a few arrows. The only thing left to decide is what you will aim at. +> Aim at the kobold riders +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +Wyverns are beasts of terrible power, and their hides, while not as thick as dragon hide, will easily block your arrows. Better to aim at the riders, and have the wyverns panic with their riders dead. This would make the wyverns much easier to kill. + + +In theory. + + +The situation casts you into a state of wonderment. You never would have though that you'd be in a battle this large, let alone one with aerial combat, and you don't want it all to end here. You take your first arrow, notch it, and pull it back. You wouldn't get many decent shots here, and when the opportunity arises, you don't want to miss it, so you wait. The kobold riders ride low in their saddles, for some among their numbers (including the one you killed) have felt the sting of mankind's arrows. This makes finding a decent shot all the more difficult, but you're patient. After all, you only need one good shot to turn the tide in this battle. + + +You're left waiting for nearly a full minute before such an opportunity arises, and what the opportunity it is. One of the griffin riders, having been separated from the rest, rides past the wall only several feet away from you. A wyvern and its pair of riders give chase, and their passing by the wall gives you the perfect chance. You take aim at the kobold rider steering the beast, and release. + + +The Muses must have seen it fit to bless you this day, for your arrow strikes true. it hits the kobold rider and it goes flying from the saddle. You're about to leap with joy when an arrow pierces you through the chest, and you immediately fall to the ramparts wounded. It isn't a shot that kills you immediately, but blood is pouring out of your chest at an alarming rate, so you know you're about to die. + + +You only wish you could've seen Liliana one last time.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You aren't going to flatter yourself. You firing a few arrows into the kobold horde below won't change anything, except perhaps where you die. Fighting on the forefront of the battle won't change anything either, and will almost definitely lead to your gruesome death. No, you aren't that powerful of an individual. + + +There is only one thing left. If you can manage to hit even just one of your shots on one of the kobold riders, then you could very well change the course of this battle. Killing a few kobold on the ground won't make that much of a difference, but if you can manage to help take down the wyverns, then the griffin knights will be free to help division one on the ground. At this point, victory relies on those knights. You only hope that you can help expedite that process. + + +You find a bow lying among the dead on the ramparts, along with a few arrows. The only thing left to decide is what you will aim at. +> Aim at the wyverns +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +Wyverns are beasts bred for killing and war. You don't think they'll simply abandon this instinct just because their riders die. No, if you're going to attempt to help the griffin knights, then the best way to do so is to take out a wyvern. Even if you only manage to take out one of them, it would help a significant amount. + + +You cast your thoughts back to your youth. Your mother would tell you stories of the beasts in the Lost Realm, and of the heroes whom bested those beasts. You're sure you remember something about a wyvern being vulnerable in its underbelly? Or maybe it was its wings? You can't remember for sure, but you don't have any other ideas. +> Aim for the stomach +Year 378 of the Second Era + + + Maybe you're certain that wyverns are weak in the stomach, or maybe it's just a wild guess. Whatever the reason, you decide to try hitting the wyverns' stomach. + + +Sweat forms on your brow as you notch an arrow and take aim. You raise your bow at the wyvern closest to you, whom is being chased by a pair of griffin knights, and loose your arrow. Your aim is true, but the arrow merely glances off the strong hide. Apparently your hunch was wrong. The stomach is not a weak point for a wyvern. This fact, however, doesn't keep you from trying. + + +You enter a state of pure focus. Arrow after arrow is loosed from your bow, and when you run out of arrows you search for more. You will kill one of these blasted beasts even if it takes every arrow in this realm, this wyvern will fall. Fortunately for you, you don't have to wait too long before one of your arrows finds a weak point in the wyverns scales. The wyvern roars in pain, and for a moment you think you've succeeded, but the wyvern keeps flying. + + +There is one thing that changes, however, and that is that the wyvern now targets you. Apparently it didn't appreciate your lucky shot. The griffin knights are not quick enough to save you this time, and you end up learning how sharp a wyvern's teeth are firsthand.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +Wyverns are beasts bred for killing and war. You don't think they'll simply abandon this instinct just because their riders die. No, if you're going to attempt to help the griffin knights, then the best way to do so is to take out a wyvern. Even if you only manage to take out one of them, it would help a significant amount. + + +You cast your thoughts back to your youth. Your mother would tell you stories of the beasts in the Lost Realm, and of the heroes whom bested those beasts. You're sure you remember something about a wyvern being vulnerable in its underbelly? Or maybe it was its wings? You can't remember for sure, but you don't have any other ideas. +> Aim for the wings +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You can't remember for certain if their wings are vulnerable, but you doubt the stomach is, as you can think of no viable reason for it to be. The wings, on the other hand, if damaged enough can cause a wyvern to lose its flight abilities. + + +Sweat forms on your brow as you notch an arrow and take aim. You raise your bow at the wyvern closest to you, whom is being chased by a pair of griffin knights, and loose your arrow. Your aim is true, but the arrow is merely gusted away by the draft the flapping its wings create. Apparently your hunch was wrong. The wings are not a weak point for a wyvern. This fact, however, doesn't keep you from trying. + + +You enter a state of pure focus. Arrow after arrow is loosed from your bow, and when you run out of arrows you search for more. You will kill one of these blasted beasts even if it takes every arrow in this realm, this wyvern will fall. Fortunately for you, you don't have to wait too long before you time your arrow just right. You let your arrow go just before the wyvern flaps his wings, and it sails true piercing the softer scales of the wing. The wyvern roars in pain, and for a moment you think you've succeeded, but you only hit one arrow, and that wyvern's wings are quite large. + + +There is one thing that changes, however, and that is that the wyvern now targets you. Apparently it didn't appreciate your lucky shot. The griffin knights are not quick enough to save you this time, and you end up learning how sharp a wyvern's teeth are firsthand.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +Sure you've done crazy things in the past, but this is no time to try and accomplish the utterly insane. Especially when the chances of success are so very low. Better to live and keep your chance of saving Liliana alive rather than to throw it away on the unlikely chance that you'll be able to save some random nobody. + + +Despite this fact, you still wince when you see the wyvern's mouth snap down on the griffins hindquarters. The scene turns into a bloody mess, and you can't help but look away as the griffin (or at least what's left of it) and its rider plummet down to the battle below. + + +You feel a pang of guilt, but you push it away by telling yourself you couldn't have done anything anyway. Yet, somewhere in the back of your mind, you don't believe this. + + +Not too long after that you are dropped off on the ramparts you were originally guarding. Much is different. Several chunks of the wall are missing, and many soldiers lie dead on the ramparts. The wall you once guarded no longer carries that symbol of boredom and ease in your mind. It is readily replaced with the memory of blood spilt, and comrades dying. + + +Over half of division two is either dead or incapacitated. Division on was doing better, but the griffin that was killed only moments before plummeted right into their line. That turned out to be the turning point in the kobold's favor, and now division one is slowly being pushed back against the wall. The griffins are locked in a very deadly battle with the rest of the wyverns, and don't seem at all in a position to help the human forces on the ground. + + +You aren't sure what you could do to help in this situation, for it looks like your defeat is inevitable. The griffins won't be able to kill the wyverns fast enough to help division one avoid getting slaughtered, which division one is mere minutes away from. This leaves you with a few honorable choices and one dishonorable choice. +> Abandon them +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +There isn't anything left for you here but death. And you cannot die. Your goal is to save your beloved. Liliana. You don't have time to be caught up in border battles where death is a likely possibility. Your life is not your own anymore, for if you die, then Liliana will as well. + + +With most of division two destroyed and with what's left of division one, there is no one to see you leave. You jog along the ramparts, and away from the battle. You pass the signal fire you lit and head to the next watchtower over. They keep food and water storage in the towers, and if you were to have any hope of deserting and living then you would need supplies. You move quickly, and gather food, water, flint and steel, extra arrows, a shield and everything else you could possibly need. After gathering it all, you head to the very bottom of the stairwell and tower. A large iron gate-like door greets you. It is quite the durable piece, and nothing less than a battering ram would be able to break through it. Or perhaps a wyvern flying at breakneck speed... You push that foreboding thought from your head and walk through the iron doors. + + +A slight breeze pushes against your face. You're far enough from the battle that you can only barely hear the roar of the wyverns fighting. you take a breath and look at your next destination. The green of the forest is all that will greet your eyes for an indeterminate amount of time in the future. This is the only way to go. The penalty for desertion is death, so there is no way you are going to stay here. Your only option is to move forward in your search for Liliana. + + +You take a deep breath, ready yourself mentally, then enter into the Lost Realm. You don't get very far in there, however, before you run into kobold reinforcements. They number over ten, and you are no god though you do manage to take a few out before succumbing to multiple stab wounds.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +The memory fades away, and Byron's voice returns. "I need one person to light the signal light over by the watchtower. Everyone in division two stay here and support us with arrows. Everyone in division one follow me!" + + +The wyverns are still racing to the wall, and a fight seems inevitable. + + +Byron leads the way as he and division one head down to the ground to support the rest of the group. Everyone else stays and prepares their bows. + + +You were assigned to division two upon your transfer here, and so your orders are abundantly clear. +> Abandon the fight +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You didn't come here for a fight. This was supposed to be the easiest place to guard in all the realm. No wyverns or kobold were supposed to come here, and certainly not in the numbers that actually threaten your wall occupation. Your goal is to save your beloved. Liliana. You don't have time to be caught up in border battles where you might die. Your life is not your own anymore, for if you die, then Liliana will as well. + + +You pretend to be lighting the signal fire, but when you are out of sight of the other soldiers you find one of the many towers and make your way down it. They keep food and water storage in the towers, and if you were to have any hope of deserting and living then you would need supplies. You move quickly, and gather anything that you might need: Food, water, flint and steel, extra arrows, a shield. Everything you could possibly need. After gathering it all, you head to the very bottom of the stairwell and tower. A large iron gate-like door greets you. It is quite the durable piece, and nothing less than a battering ram would be able to break through it. Or perhaps a wyvern flying at breakneck speed... You push that foreboding thought from your head and walk through the iron doors. + + +A slight breeze pushes against your face. You're far enough from the battle that you can only barely hear the roar of the wyverns fighting. you take a breath and look at your next destination. The green of the forest is all that will greet your eyes for an indeterminate amount of time in the future. This was the only way to go. The penalty for desertion is death, so there was no way you were going to stay there. Your only option was to move forward in your search for Liliana. + + +You take a deep breath, ready yourself mentally, then enter into the Lost Realm. You don't get very far in there, however, before you run into kobold reinforcements. They number over ten, and you are no god though you do manage to take a few out before succumbing to multiple stab wounds.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 368 of the Second Era + + +"Are you listening bitch?" + + +A hand is shoved into your back and you're sent tumbling to the ground. Grass presses against your face, and you even feel some dirt in your mouth. That was fine. You didn't care very much. These guys could push you around all they wanted. They'd never be able to beat you as bad as your father did. + + +"Stop it, Daniel!" Liliana's voice sounds from behind you. Apparently she didn't like Daniel pushing you. + + +You slowly pick yourself up and off of the ground as Daniel replies. "What? You didn't like me pushing your bitch around?" That remark is followed by some laughter. + + +"He hasn't done anything to you." Liliana replies readily. "Leave and go hit your mom if you're looking for a bitch to hit. Don't touch him." There's a moment of silence before you hear a smack. That sound reverberates around the academy yard, and for a moment you think Liliana finally slapped the guy like she said she'd been wanting to do, but when you turn around you find it's the complete opposite. Liliana is on the grass now, clutching her face. You see tears start to come to her eyes, but she doesn't sob. Not anymore. + + +You've never been the most violent person. Your mother instilled that into you, so you let others push you around. You didn't give a damn either way, but when you see Liliana on the ground you don't hesitate. + + +You lunge forward and shove Daniel hard in the chest, and you do it hard enough to send him flying to the ground as well, but unlike you and Liliana he gets back up to his feet quickly. His reaction is also quick. He immediately rushes toward you and raises his fist back. You can tell a punch is coming. + + +You've grown in the past couple years, and are easily one of the tallest guys in class. Aside from Daniel, that is. You might not be taller than Daniel, but you'd bet your mother's corpse (Muse bless her soul) that you can take more hits than he can. That being said, you don't particularly fancy getting punched if you can avoid it. +> Use his strength against him +Year 368 of the Second Era + + +Despite what others think of him, Daniel is weak. And you're going to prove just that. + + +His punch comes directly at your right cheek. It has a hell of a lot of power. Certainly more than you anticipated, but you don't allow yourself to hesitate. He might be powerful, but he was predictable. You dodge his punch by stepping in towards him, and then follow up his punch with one of your own. It hits right below his sternum, and he starts to keel over. You act on instinct now. You grip the top of his head and bring your knee up into his face, and there's a distinct crunch noise. You then push him slightly away from you. + + + He stumbles backward, and you take a step forward and shove him to the ground once more. There's no time for him to react as you pounce on top of him and lay punch after punch into his face. His 'friends' don't rise to stop you, and the courtyard is silent save for the sound of your fist pounding his face. + + +After several more punches you feel a hand on your shoulder. You nearly jerk away from it, but, despite your frenzied mind, you are able to recognize that it is a distinctly feminine hand. Liliana, you think and stop punching. Daniel doesn't stop his groaning as you rise to your feet to face her. + + +There's less baby fat on her face now than when you first saw her, and is beginning to be quite the knockout. Her eyes are still slightly red and the right side of her face is still red, but she isn't crying any more. + + +"Enough," she whispers to you. + + +You only nod in response. You start to walk away from the scene when you realize that you'd gathered quite the crowd. You think about saying something, but instead you reach for Liliana's hand and glare at everyone in the crowd. Your look says it all. + + +You leave with Liliana in tow.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 378 of the Second Era + + +You pull yourself from the memory. That was happening way too often since Liliana was captured. And she was captured. There was no doubt in your mind about that. Captured by people who obviously knew what they were doing. Otherwise they wouldn't be able to make it through the forests of the Lost Realm without being captured, killed, or raped by horny kobold. That means there's a way to make it through that forest. You just have to find it. + + +That was the reason you spent your time here on the wall watching, waiting, planning your route through that kobold infested place. Of course you could just leave on your own and hope for the best, but th- + + +Your thoughts are interrupted when the roar of some beast sounds throughout the air. You jerk your head immediately towards the sound. It came from somewhere over the tops of the trees, and still must've been miles out. Every guard on the wall peels their eyes to the forest, and it isn't long before one of your fellow guardsmen spots something. + + +"There! Above the forest!" The guard sounds quite panicked. + + +You look where he indicated and spot several grey blots in the distance. They look like birds at first, but as they get closer you can tell they're much larger and have several more rows of teeth than a bird. + + +"Wyverns." The guard right beside you breathes out. + + +You turn back to look at the beasts. They're still a few miles out, but you can hear the beat of their leathery wings drawing closer every second. The guards in your platoon stand on the wall in stunned silence. Nothing happens here, ever. Why now of all times? + + +Your lieutenant, an older fellow named Byron, calls everyone to order. "This is what we're here for men! This is why..." + + +Byron's voice fades into the depths of your mind. It is replaced by a different voice. One that's mocking, provoking. The memory of your first fight calls back to you. +> Push the memory back +Year 378 of the Second Era + + +This isn't the time for idle thoughts. No, you need to focus on the situation at hand. + + +The memory fades away, and Byron's voice returns. "This is why we guard this wall! No wyverns, kobold, or other filth will cross this wall! Gather your weap-" Byron is interrupted by another voice. + + +"Help! There are kobold chasing us on the ground. The rest of my party is coming with the kobold hot on their tail." The voice comes from all the way at the bottom of the wall. You can barely make out what he's saying, but someone does and repeats it to Byron, who then continues speaking. + + +"I need one person to light the signal light over by the watchtower. Everyone in division two stay here and support us with arrows. Everyone in division one follow me!" + + +Byron leads the way as he and division one head down to the ground to support the rest of the group. Everyone else stays and prepares their bows. + + +You were assigned to division two upon your transfer here, and so your orders are abundantly clear. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Year 366 of the Second Era + + +At the age of ten, you were average. Your height, weight, disposition, and, well, pretty much everything about you was average. Never the last one chosen for capture the emblem, but never the first one either. Your life then was a monotonous slog: Go to your rundown academy, try to do well in your academic work, fail, and return home only to have your drunkard of a father beat you. You didn't realize how miserable your life was until the fateful day when Liliana joined your class at school. + + +Like the rest of the girls in the class, she wore a dress. Unlike the rest of the girls in the class, her dress was obviously of fine make. The embroidery on her dress had no faults. No drops of blood from clumsy mothers who pricked themselves on their needle. No lazy patches sewn in to cover up holes. No, her dress was flawless. Her hair was onyx black, and fell down in waves around her face. Her glittering blue eyes were filled with anticipation, and maybe a little fear. She clearly wasn't used to being in these kinds of situations, and she kept glancing around as if someone else was going to introduce her to the other classmates. + + +Your teacher, a hag of a woman, prompted her to introduce herself. "Go ahead and introduce yourself to the class, dear." + + +She widened her eyes in surprise, but followed the teacher's command. "My name is Liliana, I'm ten years of age, and..," she looked to the teacher for instruction. She had an accent, and one that you'd never heard before at that. Not northern, or even like those from the eastern realm. No, this was decidedly different from any other accent you'd heard before. + + +"Go on," the teacher prompted again. + + +"I don't know what else to say," Liliana responded. + + +The teacher frowned disappointedly. "Surely you have more things to tell us about yourself than your name?" When Liliana didn't respond, the teacher spoke again. "Where are you from? Or, what do you like to do in your spare time? Tell us things like that." + + +Liliana hesitated once more. + + +"Come now. We don't judge people here," the hag patted her comfortingly on the shoulder, but failed to notice the snickering in the back. + + +Liliana, it seemed, found her words comforting, and finally started to open up. "I was born in Arboribus. My father is the king there, and it's an amazing place. There are trees larger than castles there! Oh, and I like to go stag riding with my father if he has the ti-" + + +The teacher interrupted. "Excuse me. Where?" The teacher sounded somewhat confused, but definitely disappointed. The snickering in the back increased, but Liliana still hadn't noticed. + + +"Arboribus," she said this clearly, and with an expression of incredulity fixed upon her face. The teacher simply stared at her blankly, until Liliana continued. "You know, in The Lost Realm..." + + +The boys in the back, try as they might, couldn't contain themselves any longer. They busted out into raucous laughter that spread to the rest of the students that were typically thought of as nice. Everyone gave into the laughter, and even the teacher hag was chuckling. + + +You were on the edge of laughter as well, but something kept you there. Stories of The Lost Realm, and rumors of a ancient city of humans therein. Your mother, before she died of disease, would tell you fairy tales of the ancient land, and how it used to be as prosperous as the Realm of Men is now. You'd always harbored the secret thought, hope, that the stories were true, and here was a person who claimed to hail from that very place. This, and the expression on Liliana's face, caused you to hesitate. Her expression was that of someone hurt , and a genuine expression at that. + + +You held the laughter off, and waited for everyone else to do the same. They eventually quieted down, but only after tears started streaming down Liliana's face. Silence took the place of laughter, and all joy was replaced with the sad sound of sobbing. + + +The old hag had the decency to attempt to comfort her by giving her a hug, but Liliana jerked away. Apparently she didn't like the idea of hugging the old hag. Especially since she'd promised no ridicule would come, but then turned around and gloried in it herself. + + +"It's true!" Liliana yelled after she managed to control her sobbing. "I'm not a liar! And, and ,and..." She starts crying again, but instead of staying in the classroom for everyone to see, she ran through the door and out of the classroom. + + +The silence continued for a moment longer, before you made your first life changing decision. You got up from your designated chair and followed after Liliana. + + +You were no expert at dealing with girls. Let alone crying ones, and you weren't the most... +> ...intelligent... +Year 366 of the Second Era + + +...intelligent of people, but you were outgoing enough to provide a suitable person for her to talk to. + + +You follow the sound of sobbing through the worn wooden hallways of the school, and outside, until you find the source of the crying. Liliana sits on the steps to the main door of the school. Her well crafted dress is ruffled in places and her body constantly shifts under the pressure of her tears. Her hair comes down in waves around her head, effectively cutting off any view of her face. + + +She doesn't notice you there at first, but when the main door closes behind you she jumps and turns towards you. Tears and snot cover her face with her eyes both sad and angry at the same time, and for a moment you find yourself regretting coming here. That moment passes, and the impulse you followed earlier propels you toward her. + + +"Are you going to laugh at me again?" + + +Her voice reflects what she is feeling. Sadness, despair, anger, and, you think, a bit of hope color her voice. You decide to concentrate on her hopefulness. + + +"I didn't laugh." + + +"Everyone laughed. I saw." + + +Clearly she hadn't been paying attention to you when in the classroom. "Not me." + + +You sit down on the same step as her, and she glares at you. Silence ensues, and you turn away and gaze out in front of you. You want to ask her about the Realm of the Lost, but the question dies in your throat. Wouldn't it be at least a little insensitive to ask her prying questions now? + + +Your question is answered when you hear her start to sob again. This time it's less intense, but it's still crying all the same. Maybe it's the memory of her excited face when she was in front of the classroom, or maybe you just didn't like the sound of crying. Whatever the reason, you decide to wrap your arm around her shoulders in a half hug. Liliana turns to stone beneath your touch, and you think she'll pull away, but she doesn't. She stays still, but continues her crying. You feel absurdly awkward in this position, but she doesn't seem to mind. She even leans into your hug after a while. + + +In between holding her and listening to her crying, you find yourself staring at her wondering how in all the realms this girl was from the Lost Realm. You might be tainted by the knowledge of fairytales, but you were still aware that the Lost Realm was crawling with kobold and others of that ilk,. It was a very dangerous place. At the end of the first era was when the Lost Realm was supposedly at the height of its power, but that ended when a dragon led a massive host of kobold and wyverns and sacked the entirety of the realm. Well, that's how the stories went. So how then, could a delicate being such as this come from such a dangerous place? + + +Then a brilliant idea came over you. There was a story your mother once told you. One about the faerie, a race of beings native to the Lost Realm. When they were in the Lost Realm they were humanoid creatures of a similar height humans, but with pointed ears and a slender build. In the story, a faerie wandered over the border of the Realm of Men and the Realm of the Lost, (Before the border walls were constructed) but the faerie were tied to their own realm. Whenever they left, they became as humans. This particular faerie panicked when they realized they left their home for another realm, and immediately tried to go back, but every time he tried to re-enter his homeland, he would get lost, turned around. He could never find his way back. Once the faerie willingly left the Realm of the Lost, they weren't allowed back. He was left in the Realm of Men to fend for himself, but he desired that no their faerie would feel like he did. Alone, confused and afraid. So the faerie came up with a code. If he thought there was another faerie, he would ask them a simple question. + + +You ask that question now. "Are you lost?" + + +Liliana immediately pulls from you and stares at you in disbelief. She suddenly wipes all of the tears from her face with her sleeve before asking you a question. "Will you help me fit in here?" + + +Kinda shocked that your plan worked you only nod in response. + + +A hint of a smile breaches her face. "What's your name?" + + +You briefly wonder what you've gotten yourself into, but you answer regardless. "My name is..."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When you first laid eyes on her she was unconscious. And underwater. But, she was still an amazing sight. + +You had been snorkeling off the coast of your seclude island you live on, in taking the beauty of the multi colored fish and billowing sea plants. You see fish wandering over to a part of the ocean you hadn’t snorkeled near before. Curious, you followed them and were shocked to find a girl lying unconscious on the ocean floor. You immediately plunge down and grab the girl, pulling her to the shore. + +You didn’t know much about CPR, with living alone on an island and all, but luckily you didn’t need to. As soon as she reached the surface she started breathing. You carry her from the soft sand to your hut made out of sticks and palm leaves and you laid her on your couch. Years before you lived on the island you had packed up everything you owned in your house that didn’t need electricity and basically moved to the seclude island. You were fed up with all the noise of the city and you decided you wanted to become a hermit—with the basic comforts of modern day like a bed, couch, and other furniture. + +As she lay on your couch, you were able to get a good look at her. Her brown hair was like a waterfall on her shoulders and she wore a silk blue satin dress that flowed on her legs like a mermaid tail. She obviously wasn’t dressed for swimming. You thought that maybe she just fell overboard from a boat and the crash knocked her out. Though why she was so close to shore, you didn’t know. + +Hours later, she comes to. She opens her marble blue eyes and looks around, looking quite scared. She spots you and her eyes widen and she tenses up. You have to calm her down. + + +> Soothe like a mother +“It’s okay, it’s okay,” you soothe, putting a hand on her shoulder. She flinches and drew back, looking more frightened. “Really, you don’t have to be afraid. You’re safe now.” She obviously has no idea what you are talking about. “You were underwater, and I pulled you up. Really, I’m a good person.” You scoot a little closer and she stands up abruptly and slips. You reach out to grab her as she falls and you catch her hand just before she hits the ground. You pull her up and she falls into your arms. She looks into your eyes and blushes, pushing you away. She crosses the room and sits down into a single wooden chair and looks away. She refuses to even look at you for days. She doesn’t talk either. +> Her smile +A few days after the rescue, you are getting fed up with the girl. She looks around your age, twenty or so, and is stunning. But she won't smile. + +She won't talk, will barely look at you, and she won't show any emotion to you. Every morning is the same routine--wake her up, eat a small breakfast, and try to get her to do something. Unfortunately, she never does anything but gaze out the window and watches the waves of the ocean. + +Finally the day comes when you are determined to make her smile. You sit down next to her at the window and she glances at you. + +"Hi," you greet softly. She keeps her gaze locked on the ocean. "Um . . ." +> Tell a cheesy joke +"Why did the chicken cross the road?" She looks at you and raises her eyebrow. "To show the possum it could be done." Her lips curled up a bit into a smile. You grin and say, "You wanna hear another joke?" She nods. +> Musical joke +"Why did Mozart sell his chickens?" she looks at you, confused. "Because they kept going 'Bach, Bach, Bach'." She snorts a laugh and shakes her head slightly, looking into your eyes. She smiles warmly puts a light hand on your shoulder. She looks deep into your eyes and you look into hers, entranced by the blue and green swirling around her pupils. After a moment she looks away and pulls her hand away, then went back to staring out the window. +> Thoughtful Times +After a month, better things started to happen between you two . . . +> Speech +The mysterious girl one day takes notice of your painting. Years ago a paint set washed up on shore along with a drenched canvas. You spent days trying to dry it well enough to use and slowly, but surely, it did and you spent even more days painting a beautiful masterpiece of the ocean shore that can be seen during the sunset with a couple of mermaids and wildlife swimming in the ocean. + +The girl starts staring at the painting rather than through the window, day after day. You find yourself starting to watch her everyday as well, studying her features, adoring her body, and wondering so hard what her voice sounds like. You imagine every tone you can that could fit the beautiful body of the girl, but you can't decide which would fit her best. + +I don't even know her name, you realize. I have to get her to talk. But how . . .? +> Ask her name +"What's your name?" you ask as you come up behind her. She flinches and snaps her head toward you. Her eyes twinkle in fright and she shakes her head. "Why not?" + +"I-I'm not ready," she stutters quietly, not looking away from you. + +"You talked," you whisper, leaning lightly against the wall. "If you can talk at all, I think you're ready to tell me your name." + +She looks down at the floor. "Marina." + +"Marina?" You almost laugh. "I've never heard of any name like that." + +"My parents were from Spain, so they wanted to give me a Spanish name. They named me after part of the word 'seasalt' in Spanish. Sal marina is seasalt in Spanish. Sal wasn't a very suitable name, so they went with Marina." + +"Well, it's very beautiful, once you get used to it." You pat her on the head like she's a child and she laughs, swatting your hand away. "I'll leave you to your painting gazing." She stares at the painting for three more days.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The mysterious girl one day takes notice of your painting. Years ago a paint set washed up on shore along with a drenched canvas. You spent days trying to dry it well enough to use and slowly, but surely, it did and you spent even more days painting a beautiful masterpiece of the ocean shore that can be seen during the sunset with a couple of mermaids and wildlife swimming in the ocean. + +The girl starts staring at the painting rather than through the window, day after day. You find yourself starting to watch her everyday as well, studying her features, adoring her body, and wondering so hard what her voice sounds like. You imagine every tone you can that could fit the beautiful body of the girl, but you can't decide which would fit her best. + +I don't even know her name, you realize. I have to get her to talk. But how . . .? +> Talk about the painting +"You like the painting, I'm guessing?" you ask as you come up behind her. She nods without looking away. "I painted it myself, you know." She glances at you skeptically. "No, really. It took me days to get everything just right. The sunset, the water, the mermaids . . ." You smile at her. "What do you think . . . err, what should I call you, anyway?" + +The girl smiles. "It's a great picture," she whispers, barely audible. "And you can call me Marina." + +"Marina?" You almost laugh. "I've never heard of any name like that." + +"My parents were from Spain, so they wanted to give me a Spanish name. They named me after part of the word 'seasalt' in Spanish. Sal marina is seasalt in Spanish. Sal wasn't a very suitable name, so they went with Marina." + +"Well, it's very beautiful, once you get used to it." You pat her on the head like she's a child and she laughs, swatting your hand away. "I'll leave you to your painting gazing." But she no longer looks at the painting. She looks at you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After a month, better things started to happen between you two . . . +> Ocean +"Do you want to go down to the ocean? You've sure seen it enough from the window," you offered, appearing from your bedroom with your swim trunks on and an old T-shirt you wore in the water. She looks up at you from the window and looks at her own attire. She hasn't changed her clothes at all since you rescued her. Even she can tell that her clothes are starting to stink, and swimming in the ocean won't help the smell. You hold up a long dress that once floated on shore. It seems to be much like one a woman would wear to the pool side or beach. Swimming in it shouldn't be a problem. + +Within minutes she's changed into the dress and the two of you are walking down the sandy path to the main beach. The sun is beating down on the two of you and she is practically skipping towards the ocean. You smile to yourself as she almost laughs in joy at the fresh air after being stuck in your hut for over a month. + +As soon as she reaches the beach, she sprints toward the cool waters of the ocean. She shrieks a little as the cold seawater splashes her, but giggles at the tickle of seaweed under her toes. You sit down on the sand and watch her as she wades around in the water. She occasionally will go underwater and a couple seconds later appear several yards away from where she was originally. + +You are a tad worried about her, considering she was unconscious in the water when you found her. Whenever she goes under you search around for where she is to make sure she comes up. You relax more when she does. + +At one point she looks over to you and waves you over. +> Go in with her +You spring up and run into the water. Her face lights up and she greets you with a hug. She quickly pulls away, blushing. She takes your hand and leads you further out. The ground drops beneath you and you have to kick your feet to keep afloat. She smiles and turns violently, making you spin with her. You yelp at the sudden jerk, but laugh when she keeps spinning you in circles. + +"You're very fun," you giggle when she stops spinning you. She smiles wide and goes under, pulling your legs down a second later. You call out when you go tumbling into the cold water and when you come up you're laughing and sputtering at the same time. "Fun, fun, fun." She snickers and swims away, making great progress. You try to go after her, but she's too fast. "I will catch up with you!" you vow. She just laughs louder.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Do you want to go down to the ocean? You've sure seen it enough from the window," you offered, appearing from your bedroom with your swim trunks on and an old T-shirt you wore in the water. She looks up at you from the window and looks at her own attire. She hasn't changed her clothes at all since you rescued her. Even she can tell that her clothes are starting to stink, and swimming in the ocean won't help the smell. You hold up a long dress that once floated on shore. It seems to be much like one a woman would wear to the pool side or beach. Swimming in it shouldn't be a problem. + +Within minutes she's changed into the dress and the two of you are walking down the sandy path to the main beach. The sun is beating down on the two of you and she is practically skipping towards the ocean. You smile to yourself as she almost laughs in joy at the fresh air after being stuck in your hut for over a month. + +As soon as she reaches the beach, she sprints toward the cool waters of the ocean. She shrieks a little as the cold seawater splashes her, but giggles at the tickle of seaweed under her toes. You sit down on the sand and watch her as she wades around in the water. She occasionally will go underwater and a couple seconds later appear several yards away from where she was originally. + +You are a tad worried about her, considering she was unconscious in the water when you found her. Whenever she goes under you search around for where she is to make sure she comes up. You relax more when she does. + +At one point she looks over to you and waves you over. +> Stay on the beach +You shake your head at her and her face drops a little, but she smiles again sadly and wades some more in the water. At one point she screams and falls into the water. You jump up and search for her to come back up, but after ten seconds she doesn't, which takes longer than she did before. You run into the water and to where she was moments ago. You look around, not finding any sign of her. + +SPLASH! + +You get pulled underwater and you come back up, sputtering and wiping saltwater out of your eyes. When you are finally able to see, you find her right in front of you, covering her mouth to keep from breaking out in laughter. + +"What the heck . . .?" you trail off. You open your mouth wide and stare at her in disbelief. "You little trickster! You didn't really fall!" She shakes her head and chuckles escape her lips. "You scared me half to death!" She laughs out loud and dives back into the water, appearing yards away in seconds.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Why did the chicken cross the road?" She looks at you and raises her eyebrow. "To show the possum it could be done." Her lips curled up a bit into a smile. You grin and say, "You wanna hear another joke?" She nods. +> Love joke +"A woman's husband had been slipping in and out of a coma for several months, yet she stayed by his bedside every single day. When he came to, he motioned for her to come nearer. + +"As she sat by him, he said, 'You know what? You have been with me all through the bad times. When I got fired, you were there to support me. When my business failed, you were there. When I got shot, you were by my side. When we lost the house, you gave me support. When my health started failing, you were still by my side... You know what?' + +"'What dear?' she asked gently. + +"'I think you bring me bad luck.'" + +She laughs before she can stop herself and she covers her mouth. You grin wildly and chuckle a little yourself. You carefully take her hand and she doesn't recoil, but looks into your eyes. You look back and see the blue and slight green roll around in her iris, surrounding her pupils. "You have wonderful eyes," you whisper. She rolls her eyes, but gives you another peek and smile before she loses emotion and turns away to the window. Her hand goes limp and it feels like you're holding a rock. You sigh and drop her hand. + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A few days after the rescue, you are getting fed up with the girl. She looks around your age, twenty or so, and is stunning. But she won't smile. + +She won't talk, will barely look at you, and she won't show any emotion to you. Every morning is the same routine--wake her up, eat a small breakfast, and try to get her to do something. Unfortunately, she never does anything but gaze out the window and watches the waves of the ocean. + +Finally the day comes when you are determined to make her smile. You sit down next to her at the window and she glances at you. + +"Hi," you greet softly. She keeps her gaze locked on the ocean. "Um . . ." +> Tell a musical joke +"Why did Mozart sell his chickens?" she gives you a confused glance. "Because they kept going 'Bach, Bach, Bach'." Her lip twitched into a quick half smile. You grin and say, "Do you want to hear another joke?" She raises her eyebrow. +> Cheesy joke +"Why did the chicken cross the road?" She looks at you and raises her eyebrow. "To show the possum it could be done." Her lips curled up a bit into a smile and she snickers lightly. She glances at you again and turns back to the window.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When you first laid eyes on her she was unconscious. And underwater. But, she was still an amazing sight. + +You had been snorkeling off the coast of your seclude island you live on, in taking the beauty of the multi colored fish and billowing sea plants. You see fish wandering over to a part of the ocean you hadn’t snorkeled near before. Curious, you followed them and were shocked to find a girl lying unconscious on the ocean floor. You immediately plunge down and grab the girl, pulling her to the shore. + +You didn’t know much about CPR, with living alone on an island and all, but luckily you didn’t need to. As soon as she reached the surface she started breathing. You carry her from the soft sand to your hut made out of sticks and palm leaves and you laid her on your couch. Years before you lived on the island you had packed up everything you owned in your house that didn’t need electricity and basically moved to the seclude island. You were fed up with all the noise of the city and you decided you wanted to become a hermit—with the basic comforts of modern day like a bed, couch, and other furniture. + +As she lay on your couch, you were able to get a good look at her. Her brown hair was like a waterfall on her shoulders and she wore a silk blue satin dress that flowed on her legs like a mermaid tail. She obviously wasn’t dressed for swimming. You thought that maybe she just fell overboard from a boat and the crash knocked her out. Though why she was so close to shore, you didn’t know. + +Hours later, she comes to. She opens her marble blue eyes and looks around, looking quite scared. She spots you and her eyes widen and she tenses up. You have to calm her down. + + +> Soothe like a friend +“Hey, it’s all right,” you say. You sit down on the ground in front of the couch and she eyes you suspiciously. You tilt your head and look at her curiously. She didn’t know what happened, you know for sure. “You were underwater out by the shore. I pulled you up. Do you know what happened?” She shakes her head cautiously. “Okay. It’s all right, though. You’re safe now. Don’t worry.” Her eyes flicker, but she trusts you enough to let you make her food and give her a place to sleep for a few nights without fuss. But she still doesn’t speak.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Welcome to Magus: Betrayal! + + +You are known as Uriel, master elementalist and accomplished magician of the Acadamy of Alzur. +The Spark, the talent to manipulate the essence of the elements in everything, has enabled you to live a youth far away from the spears of the soldiers, or the toils of the peasants. +A findling you are, born to unknown parents and found on the steps of the Academy, but this is not a fate unusual, for the times are harsh for those without the privilige of noble heritage, and few can spare the resources to feed yet another crying mouth. +If the Magi of the Academy had not found the Spark in you, they would have turned you over to one of the servants to grow up as one of them, a practice that comes closest to local charity, and ensures that the servants are loyal to the Academy. +But this fate was spared to you. +From earliest childhood you learned the arts of the scribe, the arts of the rune and the arts of the Elements. +Your life has been one of scholarship, and learning, and even though your thoughts sometimes turned towards the parents you never had, you soon accepted that the Academy was your family, never knowing anything different. + +However, a restlessness in your soul worried your teachers. You were sharper than most of your classmates, and thus began to find the lectures boring, often huddling alone in your study with an ancient tome borrowed from the library with the librarian's grudging permission, learning on your own faster than your teachers could hope to achieve. + +Finally, the master magicians admitted defeat. They no longer could teach you anything, and thus it came as a relief to them, that you were chosen, with two other magicians, to fortify the guard of an Alzuran emissary on the dangerous, bandit-infested road to Khofte, a coastal city in the far south. + +The council of magicians apparently thought that a bit of adventure would help to dull your restlessness and sharpen your practical skills. + + +To begin with, you must choose to specialize in one of the five elements: Fire, Air, Water, Ice and Earth. +You may still manipulate the other four, but you can only hope to access the powerful effects with the element of your specialization. +Furthermore, specializing in one element also slightly affects your character. Ice elementalists are known for the cool and logical mind, while Earth magicians tend to be protective of their charges. + +Choose your Specialization. +> I choose to specialize in Fire, the element of Passion, Heat and Destruction. +You quickly, and with passion, learned everything you can from your chosen element, regarding little else. + +You especially have disregarded the lessons of Water and of Ice, having nothing but contempt for those who have to think through every situation when, obviously, there is need for speed. + +You possess a greater physical prowess than most of your classmates, and since your inborn arrogance left your without many friends but quite some enemies, you had to use your quickness and strength to avoid being the target of constant ridicule - noone dared to ridicule you after a while. +Instead, you became something of a loner. You simply know you are a better magician than the others, and you are willing to prove it. + +The specialization of Fire enables you to aquire a deadly arsenal of combat spells, far superior to that of other magicians. You are also able to command the element of elements, the Flames themselves, to do your bidding. Also, you are somewhat resistant to their heat. + + +Make a note somewhere that you have specialized in Fire. +> I am ready to begin my journey! +It is early summer in the world of Thyr, and the smell of spring has not yet left the air. + +The emmissary's trek consists of two coaches, one for the magicians, of which there are two more on board, and one for the emissary and his bodyguard himself. Furthermore, there are two dozens warriors on horse accompanying the trek, some of which are scouting ahead. + +It has been two days since you left the Academy of Alzur, and by now you have left the city's military influence, as can be witnessed by the steady growing worse of the road. + +You know close to nothing about Fahan Brownhand's - the emissary of Alzur - orders, or about the man himself, save that he is known to be a devious mind and a quick judge of character, abilities well received within a politician. + +Also you know that your trek is carrying valuable gifts in jewels and gold for Khalar, the citystate you are destined to reach within the week. + +Your two magician-companions are no strangers to you. Opposite of you is sitting J'Arel Whitefang, a young man emitting an aura of arrogance that is barely to bear in the confines of the coach. He is, as you know, a capable Fire elementalist. + +Currently on top of the coach, unable to bear the presence of J'Arel any longer, is Lucius Tarchild, an Air mage of some renown. Unfortunately, Lucius is somewhat senior to you, and thus he has the right of first choice, as he explained to you with a wink. +Already weary by the long trip so far, you did not argue. +> I wish to pass the time and speak with J'Arel. +J'Arel looks up from some thought in surprise, as you cough to catch his attention. His cruel eyes narrow themselves, and he pierces you with his look. + +"What is it that you want?" +> "Do you know anything about the road ahead?" +His eyes narrow even further as you ask him about the road ahead. Then he snorts, and shakes his head, while saying: + +"Only as much as you, I suppose. The road will be getting a lot worse the next days, and when we reach the outskirts of Thalun Forest in two days, who knows what will await us in these ancient, dark and magical woods..." His voice is getting dark and foreboding, and then he suddenly breaks into laughter. + +"Peasants' superstition. Likely some bandits roam the Woods, and that's the reason why lone travellers sometimes are never seen again." + +He grins, and forms a magical gesture with his left palm, upon which a blueish flame appears there, a ball of pure energy powerful enough to burn through a tree when hurled with enough force. + +"However, we are no lone travellers", he adds, his malicious grin broadening. Then, he claps his hands together, and the flame vanishes. + +"I doubt that some ragged band of bandits is going to choose us as our target anyway," he says, sounding disappointed. "Those soldiers look like excellent fighters, and I am certain the bandits will see this as well." +> Continue... +Suddenly, the coach shudders to a halt. Voices call out, but your first reaction of worrying is soothed as you recognize them as your scouts' voices. + +The captain of the scouts, a burly man in leather armor, approaches the second coach, which is occupied by Master Brownhand, the emissary of Alzura. The captain dismounts his gelding, and appears to speak agitatedly with someone inside the coach - which is all you can make out. Unfortunately, they are too far away to understand a word. +> I will do nothing but wait. +The captain of the scouts is arguing agitated with someone inside the other coach, but you cannot make out the words, nor interpret the gestures. Probably nothing important. + +You lean back against the hard wooden seat of the coach, wishing for something to break the monotony of the trip. Already you wonder when you will arrive at your destination. Or at least return to the comfort of the Academy. + +Suddenly the door is opened by Lucius, who had been riding the top of the coach. +> Continue... +Lucius is a tall, slender man. There is always the sly grin on his face, and his hair looks like he has been in a tornado. + +Right now, looking at J'Arel and you, his grin nearly splits his face, causing J'Arel to scowl back. + +"Well, look who's here. Not suffocated yet, I hope", Lucius grins. J'Arel only snorts with disdain, throwing you a meaningful look as if the journey would have been quite pleasant without your companionship inside the coach. + +Before you can think of how to answer that challenge, Lucius continues as if not noticing the tension between the two of you: "Looks like we got ourselves some trouble coming. The captain of the scouts just raced his horse nearly to death coming here, then barely pauses to take a breath before arguing with old Farhan. Seems like they want us to make camp here, instead of driving on, but Farhan doesn't sound too happy about that." + +Lucius gives the countryside an appraising glance. + +"Can't say I blame them. It's a good position here, with the hills in front and the plains at the back. At least if anyone's sneaking up on us, they're doing so from only one direction." + +J'Arel interrupts: "Phah, let them come, so we can finally have some use. I don't see why..." + +Lucius holds up a hand to silence J'Arel, cocking his head to one side and closing his eyes, as if listening intently. + +As you strain to hear anything untowards yourself, you notice it... the silence is unnatural. Where the journey was accompanied by the rustling of leaves and grass, the chirping and buzzing of insects and the caws of birds, there is now silence... even the horses of the guards seem to hold their breath. + +Then suddenly the first volley of arrows hit the group. Lucius curses and hurls himself into the relative but crowded safety of the coach, but a few of the guards do not have as much luck. +The air is filled with the rearing of horses and the screams of the wounded. The captain of the scouts turns to face the enemy, but gives only a gurgle, as you can see the black arrow protruding from his neck. + +Blood runs out of his mouth, and for a horrifying second, he seems to stare at you with the paincrazed eyes of the already dead, before falling from his horse only to be gored by the panicking beast. + +When you catch yourself again, you see that J'Arel and Lucius are already preparing spells, even if they cannot yet see who is attacking you. +> I will wait until it becomes clear who is attacking us and wherefrom. +You decide to stay in the relative safety of the coach. + +J'Arel, suddenly engulfed in an aura of sizzling flames, jumps out of the coach and hurls a ball of fire in the general direction of the assault. + +Lucius leaves the coach on through the other door, and immediatley the carriage is rocked by gusts of wind, which also cause the arrows to stray. + +One arrow, however, flies straight at J'Arel's head - but it bursts into flame upon touching his aura. + +Someone bellows a command over the screams of the guards, and those that survived the initial deadly onslaught charge off into the direction where the volleys came from. + +You are considering your options, when suddenly a lightning strike that turns you blind and deaf turns J'Arel into a cinder, but not before you hear his piercing death scream and see, in minuite detail how the fire mage's skin peels off under the tremendous energy of the lightning. + +Shocked, you decide to join the combat as quickly as possible, before the next strike perhaps hits the coach. +> Continue... +Desperately, you attempt to get your bearing. + +From the twoscore warriors that accompanied the emissary's treck, only one dozen survived the initial deadly volley of black arrows. +However, the guards are rallied and charge the enemy, apparently a group of about half a hundredship ragged looking beings you immediatley recognize as large goblins, led by a couple of their shamans. While a single goblin is no match for a human warrior, the shamans double the goblins' threat, and they make up in numbers what they lack in size. + +Lucius is using his powers over the wind to make arrows useless, and most goblins have thrown their bows away and now wield evil looking barbed knives. + +One guard, trying to charge through the goblins to strike down a shaman, is dragged from his horse, and both the guard and the poor beast soon disappear und the goblin's small twisted bodies. +> I am an adept of Fire. +The flame of the Spark is strong within you today, and your fingers itch with the desire to channel your magic. + +This is it... this is how it feels to have an adventure! If not for the seriousness of the situation, you would laugh with delight. +> I will use my powers over Fire to rain destruction down the goblins! +You climb up the coach to get a better overview of the battle, trusting Lucius to do what he's best at, and turn away any stray arrows from you. + +You close your eyes, drawing deep from the burning energies within you provided by the Spark. +When you open them again, they seem to be ablaze. + +In your hands, a powerful ball of flame forms, and you hurl it directly where the goblins' throng is thickest, where it explodes with a deafening noise. + +About twenty goblins remain on the ground, charred. + +Another ball of flame takes out a dozen more of the wicked creatures, and this is sufficent to break their morale, and they turn to flee. + +The soldiers cheer, and strike down the fleeing goblins as they run back to the hills from where they came. + +Suddenly, Lucius screams in pain. With another ball of flame formed in your hand, intended to speed the goblin's flight, you turn to see that Farhan Brownhand, emissary of Alzur, has stabbed Lucius in the back with an evil looking sword that protrudes from the Air adept's chest. + +He grins wickedly at you and makes a gesture with his offhand. Instinctively you hurl your fireball into his general direction, and throw yourself from the coach. + +Just in time, as it explodes under you, smouldering splinters burying themselves into your robes and into your flesh. + +Shaking, you stand up, turning to Farhan and the spitted Lucius, and prepare another spell... +> Continue... +You stare disbelieving at Master Brownhand, and before you can launch a spell at him, he uses your hesitation to weave a quick strand of fire at you. + +You barely dodge the small bolt of fire that jumps from his fingers and flies past you. + +Seeing he missed you, he curses and prepares another spell. You have to act quick. +> I attempt to sever or unravel the spell's weave when Farhan casts it, thus countering it. +You concentrate, and your mental eyes follow the Farhan's weaving. He uses Fire, and mixes Earth in it, but when he leashes it out, you already took hold of one of the strands of magic with your mental touch, and the spell already unravels itself as it is cast. + +When it reaches you, it is nothing more than a gust of warm wind that ruffles your hair. + +Infuriated, sensing what you have done, Farhan pulls the black blade out of Lucius' body, and, brandishing it, charges you. + +Out of the corners of your eyes you see that the guards are approaching the obviously crazed emissary. +> I flee towards the guards, hoping that they will overpower the Magus. +Seeing Farhan approaching you with the evil-looking dark blade in his hand that is still glistening with Lucius' blood, you jump down from the top of the coach and hurry towards the surviving guards, knowing that you do not stand a chance against the master Magus alone. + +Farhan laughs, and you hear behind your back the incantations as he prepares another spell. + +He is only a precious few steps behind you, but the remaining guards, led by a scarred and blackbearded bear of a man, already charge at Farhan with swords drawn. + +Suddenly, you hear a sizzle, and it is only instinct that saves your life. You throw yourself on the ground in midrun, just as the first guards pass you in the other direction, and, accompanied by a loud crackle, a searing pain blazes across your back, just before one of the guards in front of you emits a loud scream, and something bright hits him in the chest. + +As you quickly jump to your feet again, bloodied and dirty, with a singed back, you hear another sizzle, a crackle, and then a double scream, as two guards that are running at Farhan are hit by more lightning. + +You turn around, and the four remaining guards are about to swing their swords at the emissary, when suddenly, out of the shadow of the coach, Farhan's bodyguard, a bulky man that moves with the gracefulness of a cat, launches himself at the group of guards. + +Farhan turns to flee towards the hills, as his bodyguard snaps the neck of a guard with his bare hands. You shudder involuntarily as you hear the sickening sound. + +Before you can react, the burly man is spitted on the sword of the black bearded soldier, and Farhan, weaving a last spell, disappears in a clap of thunder. +> Continue... +Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, is gone and his bodyguard is dead. + +Only three guards - and yourself - survived his treachery and the goblin attack. All agree that Master Brownhand had been probably in league with the goblins, but why he would attack the trek himself, noone knows. + +The situation looks grim, reports Kor, the scarred and blackbearded bear of a man who led the charge against the emissary. He is a seasoned veteran, and you can see in his eyes the disgust for this treachery. + +The horses drawing the coach are all either dead or have fled. Night is coming soon, and the road through the hills is known to be a dangerous way even in daylight. Bandits and bands goblins roam the area, as you were forced to experience yourself. + +The plains are not much better. Any camp made on the way would be like a beacon to anyone searching for them, and neither Kor nor you have no doubts that Farhan will likely return - with or without help - to finish what the goblins had begun. + +As a Magus, even a rather inexperienced one, the duty of leadership is on you, but Kor is ready with advice. + +Basically, you have only few options. You might attempt to travel back to the Acadamy and report of Farhan's treachery. +Or, you might attempt to find him before he finds you. Teleport weaves, as Farhan has used to escape, are tricky: They are dangerous to pull off, because inexperienced adepts attempting to move their essence to somewhere else usually unravel themselves and get no second try. Also, the further away the destination is, the more difficult the spell becomes, and you know that even a master magician like Farhan Brownhand must have been tired after the spells he crafted during the battle. +Your guess is, that he fled to somewhere in the hills, and Kor agrees with you on this, for in the plains, there is nowhere to hide for several miles around, not even a light wood or a small village. + +The only thing you know for certain is, that it would be wise to leave this place as soon as possible, as long as the enemy Magus is still weakened from his spellcasting. +> We will turn back and attempt to make our way to the Academy to report Master Brownhand's treachery. +The guards pack their gear with some relief about the decision, and, lightly packed, you abandon the coaches in the coming twilight. + +Happy to leave the scene of the slaughter, an invisible tension leaves the men you did not notice before. + +Noone is happy to have Master Brownhand now in his back, but all of you are glad that he's not right in front of you. + +The guards march at a good speed, and you, not really used to such sports, wondered whatever must have ridden you to ever complain about riding inside a coach. + +Soon, night falls, and the clear sky would be a beautiful sight were you in a mood for it. However, the moon is young, and there is not much light to see by. + +Kor asks if you are capable of lighting a globe, and wearily, you agree. + +Concentrating briefly, although much, much longer than you would usually need, you create a shining sphere between your hands and command it to float over your group. + +Kor reaches out to you as you stagger, your mental exhaustion nearly complete, but you catch yourself, and although your dignity as a Magus takes quite a scratch by stumbling because of such a simple spell, you are too tired to rightly care. + +Soon, the guards go off the road, and you just fall over on the ground when you hear that everyone agrees that now, you are far enough away from the place of the ambush to rest a while. + +You are already asleep before you hit the ground and do not notice that someone wraps a blanket around you. +> Continue... +The smell of fried bacon and spiced tea wakens you, and, although bleary-eyed because of a rest that was too short by far, you stand up to face a barely rising sun. + +You are greeted by the guards, and handed a wooden mug of the hot water as well as a small plate of food, and then, it is already time to break camp. You agree to to travel with all haste back towards the Academy. + +The day passes uneventful, although you find yourself in a very bad shape. You wonder why you could have ever complained about riding inside a coach, stuffy as it might have been. The guards march a fast tempo, and you are barely able to keep up, even though your packing is somewhat lighter than that of the others. + +The next day, your back feels like a wooden plank... even despite the blankets that are part of your travel gear, sleeping on the ground is never going to be your preferred method of rest, and you already long for the comforts of life at the Academy. + +Kor reports that you are likely to reach Alzur by midevening the next day, and you are happy to hear so. + +The next two days pass uneventfully also, although tension grew because everyone was expecting Farhan to return, or another goblin attack. Suspicions rose when you noticed the increased military patrols around, but they ignored a group of travellers and your desire to reach the council of the Academy was too great to become entangled with the military. + +Finally, after a journey you are glad to forget about, the sight of the walls of Alzur is very welcome to you. + +But something is wrong. The gates, usually open all day and night, are barred, and the military presence has been more than doubled. + +Kor apparently recognizes one of the guards and approaches him. The guard obviously expresses surprise and worry at seeing you return so early, but before you can question him what happened, you are immediatley led to the quickly roused council... it is past nightfall, after all. +> Continue... +You are lead into the heart of the city, and something definitely feels wrong here. The atmosphere is tense unlike the teeming, bustling city you left only five days ago. + +The huge ironwrought gates of the Academy are opened for you, and your group enters. Without even given the chance to refresh yourself, much to your dismay, you are led before the council's chambers and bidden entry. + +The chambers themselves are somewhat in disarray, as if there had been a meeting recently and yet no time for the personell to clean, and three of the five High Magi look like indeed they have been roused from sleep. They stare at you, some with unhidden contempt, until finally Tharain Ironweave, highest of the Magi, steps forward and explains the situation to you. + +There had been an assassination attempt on the wedding night of princess Jessamin of Khalar, the very city your treck was initially heading. This was exactly two days before. +And, apparently, evidences point towards Master Farhan Brownhand, Alzur's very own emissary sent there, as the assassin. + +You begin to remark that this is not possible, your treck barely left Alzur's lands, but the High Magus interrupts you, that they knew this very well. + +Yet attempts to explain that to the Khalifat of Khalar met only disbelief, understandingly so. They want some sort of proof. + +You briefly relay to the council what happened to you on your treck, the attack of the goblins and Farhan's treachery, and are met by stoic silence. + +"Do you, then, have any proof that could convince the Khalifat to take back their declaration of war?", you are asked. + +Numbly, you shake your head. + +"Then", Thalain sighs and suddenly appears much older than he is, "this war cannot be turned away..." + + +Wishing your first adventure would have turned out to be more successful, you retire into your room, but the longing for comfort leaves a bitter aftertaste when you think that Farhan Brownhand, the traitorous emissary of Alzur, escaped your grasp...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, is gone and his bodyguard is dead. + +Only three guards - and yourself - survived his treachery and the goblin attack. All agree that Master Brownhand had been probably in league with the goblins, but why he would attack the trek himself, noone knows. + +The situation looks grim, reports Kor, the scarred and blackbearded bear of a man who led the charge against the emissary. He is a seasoned veteran, and you can see in his eyes the disgust for this treachery. + +The horses drawing the coach are all either dead or have fled. Night is coming soon, and the road through the hills is known to be a dangerous way even in daylight. Bandits and bands goblins roam the area, as you were forced to experience yourself. + +The plains are not much better. Any camp made on the way would be like a beacon to anyone searching for them, and neither Kor nor you have no doubts that Farhan will likely return - with or without help - to finish what the goblins had begun. + +As a Magus, even a rather inexperienced one, the duty of leadership is on you, but Kor is ready with advice. + +Basically, you have only few options. You might attempt to travel back to the Acadamy and report of Farhan's treachery. +Or, you might attempt to find him before he finds you. Teleport weaves, as Farhan has used to escape, are tricky: They are dangerous to pull off, because inexperienced adepts attempting to move their essence to somewhere else usually unravel themselves and get no second try. Also, the further away the destination is, the more difficult the spell becomes, and you know that even a master magician like Farhan Brownhand must have been tired after the spells he crafted during the battle. +Your guess is, that he fled to somewhere in the hills, and Kor agrees with you on this, for in the plains, there is nowhere to hide for several miles around, not even a light wood or a small village. + +The only thing you know for certain is, that it would be wise to leave this place as soon as possible, as long as the enemy Magus is still weakened from his spellcasting. +> I am specialized in the powers of Ice, and will attempt to divine the target of the emissary's teleportation spell. +It should be not difficult to find such a powerful weave as a teleportation spell. + +You close your eyes and enhance your trained mental senses to a point where you can feel the pattern of the world around you. + +But although you search the point where Farhan has disappeared, you do not find any traces of the weave. You ponder this fact, and come to the conclusion that Master Brownhand must have masked the weave. This is a very difficult to achieve while casting or maintaining a spell, and your respect for the other Magus grows, whatever he might have done. + +Yet your insight does not help you, and you are unsure of how to go on - a state which you, as an Ice Magus deeply dislike. +> It is only logical that someone should report the treason, but such a powerful Magus must be stopped. Thus I venture alone into the hills, and send the men back to the Academy to report. +Kor expresses worry about your shape, but you assure him that you do not intend to face down Farhan Brownhand in hand to hand battle right now, but it is important that you find out what Farhan is up to, and eventually, the warrior agrees. + +You are handed a flask of some of the strong smelling brew with healing powers, and set up with light gear into the hills, with the best wishes of the guards and a short sword from one of the fallen - you usally carry no weapons with you, but your mental exhaustion is too great to be certain that you are able to defend yourself if attacked. + + +Keeping slightly away from the main road, you travel crosscountry, following the trail of the fled goblins from the foiled ambush as best as you can. + +Wearily, you walk on, although twilight slowly gives way to the starfilled darkness. Suddenly, you notive some movement in the distance... a goblin patrol! + +Confidence that you are still on the right track gives away to fear as they appear to have seen you. +> I am a Magus of Air, and an illusion will certainly divert them. +Gathering your last mental resources, you conjure the image of a powerful warrior. + +Once finished, it looks indeed a bit like Kor, the scarred leader of the guards, and you wonder if you have overdone it a bit when it charges the goblins with deadly silence. + +The goblins however break at the sight of the charging giant of a man, and dropping their assorted weaponry, they cry something in their own gutural language and flee. +> I will pursue them, hoping they will lead me to their hideout. +The goblins flee before you, and after ten minutes in pursuit - your lungs are about to give away - you arrive at a spooky scenery: Apparently the goblins' camp is under attack by wolves! + +Their howl fills the night and make it seem even more dark. The goblins, under attack from all sides, fight with uncommon valor, but even the surprise reinforcements that fled before you are cut down by the powerful jaws of the wolves within seconds. + +A black, wolfformed shape is within their midst, and the goblins fight back in terror, but hopelessly, against its devastating power. + +The camp is situated near a steep hill, and has a caveentrance. And out of that, a creature of your nightmares comes... it is the ugliest, and hugest goblin you have ever seen, with sharp claws like that of a troll. And beside it, stands Farhan Brownhand, the man you came to search for, wielding his dark blade. + +Farhan moves like a dancer between the goblins and the wolves, and whenever he swings his blades, a wolf falls down motionless. The big creature swings its long arms, regardless of hitting friend or foe, and whenever it hits, the victim is flung into the air. + +Farhan alone would suffice to turn the tide of battle in favour for the goblins, and with the strange creature against them, the wolves do not stand a chance. + +Even though you know the next spell might cost you your conciousness, you have to act fast. +> I am a Magus of Ice. +As you concentrate your magical powers, you suddenly realize what the creature is, as you notice its goblin resemblance. + +You have heared of this long forgotten lore of magically melding one being into another, and clearly the creature is a meld between a goblin and a troll. Since it obviously obeys Farhan's commands, he must be its master... and that makes him an abomination to any Magi: a nethermancer, trained in the arts of the Dark Empire of Lôrn, someone who does not weave with the Patterns of the world, but rather against them, destroying, not creating, feeding of the world's natural order like a vampire feeds of blood. + +So this is why you found no traces of the teleportation weave that Farhan used to flee, and obvious if you think about it now, though it must have been at great risk for Master Brownhand to reveal himself like that. + +You snap yourself out of following your thoughts in that direction, and with uncharacteristic determination launch a devastating attack against the troll-goblin, or goblin-troll, knowing that before you can harm Farhan, who is likely feeding of its life energy, you must destroy his creature first. + +A column of pure elemental ice erupts from the earth below the twisted being, and spiked upon the sharp crystals, it twists in agony and emits a horrifying scream of death before it is finally still. + +Farhan curses madly at the death of his creature. +> Continue... +With the creature destroyed, Farhan's fighting prowess also seems to have suffered. You now see sweat on his face as he attempts to fight through the wolves, who now take the upper hand, to reach you. + +His blade still seems to be thirsty for wolfblood, and whenever he strikes one, it remains still. You grip your blade as he appears to make his way through the now encircling wolves which attack him with all their fury, now that most of the goblins are slain, but then his way is bared by the giant black wolf. + +It growls, and Farhan takes a step back, for the first time emitting fear. The wolf's growl seems to stop the others attack, and they circle Farhan, forcing him against the wall of the steep hill, next to the cave. + +The wolf, apparently content to have trapped the emissary, appears to wait for something. Unsure what is expected from you, you approach Farhan. + +When he sees that the wolf seems to wait for you, fear is somewhat replaced with a mixture of grudging respect and hope. + +"This is a nice pet you have there", he speaks in that pleasant voice of his, straining to keep it straight. "It won't do me any harm, will it? I can explain..." + +But you interrupt him. "It is not my pet, and I have no command over it." + +"But... but...", he begins... +> I am a Magus of Air. +"But", you interrupt him in your smoothest voice, "I might convince it not to harm you, if you tell me enough to satisfy my curiousity." + +You wonder for a moment if he calls your bluff, but either your social skills are too developed or, as you rather suspect, he is too frightened. + +"It wasn't my idea, you see", he begins flustered, always nervously eyeing the black wolf, "It wasn't my plan. It just had to look like an accident. You know, the princess... I mean, when the masters said... but..." + +You have no idea what he is talking about, but you made the experience that its best to let madmen and drunk talk, as they get to the point in their own time. + +"The masters... the blood, all the blood, and... it was their idea! I am just a tool, and you... you won't hold a tool responsible, will you?", he begs, and pleads to you in his mad ravings. + +Then, the hunted, mad look in his eyes clears. He calmly salutes with the blade, speaks calmly: "My masters will save me." + +Farhan is obviously about to plunge the evil looking blade into his heart, as the black wolf growls and leaps. + +You turn away in disgust, but the screams of the dying and the sickening sound of teeth tearing at the flesh of the dying man will haunt your nightmares for quite some time to come. +> Continue... +It takes you the better part of to two weeks to reach the city of Alzur again. When you arrive at the gates, the first thing you notice is that obviously, the patrols have increased. The guards at first turn you away, but then you show the documents you found searching the cave you faced Farhan and his goblins, and they, recognizing the seal of the High Council, immediatley call upon the High Magi. + +While you wait in the antechamber, you reflect your voyage so far. When the wolves finished with Farhan's body, there was not much left of it. After they had done this, the wolves, completely ignoring you, slunk away, many with a bloodied snout. + +The large black wolf only raised his head to meet your eyes once, and it appeared as if it winked at you from the depth of those golden eyes. You do not know what kind of animal this creature was, but you were happy enough that it, too, ignored you and vanished with the rest of the pack. + +Feeling obliged to them, for some reasons, you spent a few hours piling the dead bodies of the wolves and burn them, leaving the goblins' corpses to rot. + +Then, you searched the cave. It appeared as if Farhan had quite a comfortable living hole there, filled with the goblins' plunder. You have also secured the documents Farhan was to bring to Khalar, as well as a note in a writing you were unable to decipher. + +Despite the risks, you decided to sleep the night there - exhaustion and the excitement of the last hours finally taking its toll. Undisturbed, you woke the next morning, and hurried to leave this place of carnage. + +Then, you hurried to catch up with Kor and his men, but you have not found them. Instead, the journey took much longer than you anticipated, and more than once you wished that this would remain your last adventure forever. Perhaps a life of devoted study and teachings in the Academy was not as bad a choice at that. At least the beds there consisted more than heaps of hay, if you could find any at all. + + +Before admitted before the Council, you are bathed and clothed new, and for the first time in two weeks, you feel moderately human again, though it will take some more time for the bruises to heal. You make plans to sleep through the whole next week. + +Then, finally, you are, accompanied by two guards, led into the Council chambers. +> Continue... +You are led into a rather gloomy room, and face the five most powerful Magi of the Academy. + +Ancient Tharain Oakweave is the one to stand and greet you, and you have to recount your tale in full before he continues to speak. + +"These are dire news indeed, but then, these are dire times. The Khalifat of Khalar has declared war upon us, for an assassination attempt was made on princess Jessamin during her wedding night." + +Ah, so this must be the princess Farhan spoke about... but who are the "masters"? + +"Unfortunately", Tharain continues, "evidence was apparently found that points to our emissary as the assassin, and the princess has been seen neither dead nor alive since then." + +You try to interrupt and explain that this could hardly be, for Farhan has barely left Alzur, but you are silenced by a gesture of the old High Magus. + +"We know, but we have no way to dismiss their evidences, which, to our own surprise, appear to be real." + +You wonder what a war between the two most powerful states in Thyr would mean to your plans of living in comfort for the rest of your life, and you do not like the results you come to. + +Then, with a smile, you remember something, and produce the documents you found in the goblin cave. + +Tharain takes them, and reads through them briefly. Then he inspects the strange note you found, and his bushy eyebrows rise. + +"This, indeed, is a hint we might take into consideration." Without saying more, he looks at you, and smiles. "Welcome back, young Magus Uriel. You might have done more than your share to reveal a dark plot indeed. Now, if only the princess could be found..." + + + +Congratulations! You have beaten the part one of "Tides Of War". Part two will feature the story of Princess Jessamin, so stay tuned. :)<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With the creature destroyed, Farhan's fighting prowess also seems to have suffered. You now see sweat on his face as he attempts to fight through the wolves, who now take the upper hand, to reach you. + +His blade still seems to be thirsty for wolfblood, and whenever he strikes one, it remains still. You grip your blade as he appears to make his way through the now encircling wolves which attack him with all their fury, now that most of the goblins are slain, but then his way is bared by the giant black wolf. + +It growls, and Farhan takes a step back, for the first time emitting fear. The wolf's growl seems to stop the others attack, and they circle Farhan, forcing him against the wall of the steep hill, next to the cave. + +The wolf, apparently content to have trapped the emissary, appears to wait for something. Unsure what is expected from you, you approach Farhan. + +When he sees that the wolf seems to wait for you, fear is somewhat replaced with a mixture of grudging respect and hope. + +"This is a nice pet you have there", he speaks in that pleasant voice of his, straining to keep it straight. "It won't do me any harm, will it? I can explain..." + +But you interrupt him. "It is not my pet, and I have no command over it." + +"But... but...", he begins... +> I will question him about his plans. +"My plans? MY plans?", Farhan cackles. "They are not my plans. And if I tell you, then what? You'll call of this beast? You will?" + +You try to answer, but he does not let you: "No, I can see my death in its eyes. But I tell you one thing. It wasn't my plan, I was just my masters' tool. The princess... hah... it was a good plan, though... it would have worked, if not for..." His voice trails off and his eyes suddenly have a glazed over look. + +Then, he smiles a half crazed smile, and raises his blade as if to salute to you. When he turns it around as if to impale himself, the black wolf leaps. + +You turn away in disgust, but the screams of the dying man and the sounds of wolfteeth tearing into living flesh will haunt your nightmares for a long time to come.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With the creature destroyed, Farhan's fighting prowess also seems to have suffered. You now see sweat on his face as he attempts to fight through the wolves, who now take the upper hand, to reach you. + +His blade still seems to be thirsty for wolfblood, and whenever he strikes one, it remains still. You grip your blade as he appears to make his way through the now encircling wolves which attack him with all their fury, now that most of the goblins are slain, but then his way is bared by the giant black wolf. + +It growls, and Farhan takes a step back, for the first time emitting fear. The wolf's growl seems to stop the others attack, and they circle Farhan, forcing him against the wall of the steep hill, next to the cave. + +The wolf, apparently content to have trapped the emissary, appears to wait for something. Unsure what is expected from you, you approach Farhan. + +When he sees that the wolf seems to wait for you, fear is somewhat replaced with a mixture of grudging respect and hope. + +"This is a nice pet you have there", he speaks in that pleasant voice of his, straining to keep it straight. "It won't do me any harm, will it? I can explain..." + +But you interrupt him. "It is not my pet, and I have no command over it." + +"But... but...", he begins... +> I will accuse him of treachery and call him to justice. +You accuse him of treachery, and tell him you will personally bring him back to the Academy for the council to do justice. + +He just stares at you in disbelief, and then with a crooked smile at the black wolf. + +"I do not think you will bring me anywhere, my young friend. I see my death in its eyes." Then, his grimace turns into a snarl. "But for your insolence, I will first get you!" + +Surprised by the sudden change, you raise your own blade to deflect his sudden lunge, but you are too slow, and the blade bites deep into your flesh. + +You scream in agony as you feel your very soul drawn from your living body through the wound to feed the hungry sword. Your pain in the last seconds of your life is so great that you do not even hear the madman's dying screams as the wolves tear him apart. +> You have died... +An eternity passes in the wake of a second. + +You are floating in an emptiness even your bodiless mind fails to grasp. It appears as both a darkness so dark as to blind your mental eyes and a light so bright that it is already black at the same time. + +You see, with eyes not your own, the strands of raw magic that weave the pattern of the universe. There is the searing strand of Fire wherever the pattern forms a living soul, filling it with passion and emotion to differ it from the animals. Air lights up, with light blue strand of magic, whenever joy is felt or beauty grasped. Earth, a rich brown and green, gives life to plants and animals and all things that breathe. Water, the purest of elements, a deep blue that fills life in the hulls Earth is creating. Ice, most mysterious element of all, shines with a bright white, and you grasp that it forms the underlying logic of the pattern, directing all other strands into their destined form. + +And suddenly you understand. + +The secrets of life, the wisdom of existence, the riddle of the creation. It is all so easy, so clear. + +You see the forces of magic, and you also see the other forces, directing them, ordering them. And you see the forces that are directing those. + +You see what has happened, what will happen, what must happen. The future is just another pattern in the great weave of what you unknowingly called existence, which is yet just the dream of an illusion and at the same time reality. + +Now you know you can read the pattern, now you know the choices that led you to your doom, and why they did so. You know, you would not choose again wrongly, not this time, if you just had another chance... + +another chance... + + +And the Fire that is Passion burns brightly within you and engulfs your soul, forming you into the essence that is. +> Restart the Game. +Welcome to Magus: Betrayal! + + +You are known as Uriel, master elementalist and accomplished magician of the Acadamy of Alzur. +The Spark, the talent to manipulate the essence of the elements in everything, has enabled you to live a youth far away from the spears of the soldiers, or the toils of the peasants. +A findling you are, born to unknown parents and found on the steps of the Academy, but this is not a fate unusual, for the times are harsh for those without the privilige of noble heritage, and few can spare the resources to feed yet another crying mouth. +If the Magi of the Academy had not found the Spark in you, they would have turned you over to one of the servants to grow up as one of them, a practice that comes closest to local charity, and ensures that the servants are loyal to the Academy. +But this fate was spared to you. +From earliest childhood you learned the arts of the scribe, the arts of the rune and the arts of the Elements. +Your life has been one of scholarship, and learning, and even though your thoughts sometimes turned towards the parents you never had, you soon accepted that the Academy was your family, never knowing anything different. + +However, a restlessness in your soul worried your teachers. You were sharper than most of your classmates, and thus began to find the lectures boring, often huddling alone in your study with an ancient tome borrowed from the library with the librarian's grudging permission, learning on your own faster than your teachers could hope to achieve. + +Finally, the master magicians admitted defeat. They no longer could teach you anything, and thus it came as a relief to them, that you were chosen, with two other magicians, to fortify the guard of an Alzuran emissary on the dangerous, bandit-infested road to Khofte, a coastal city in the far south. + +The council of magicians apparently thought that a bit of adventure would help to dull your restlessness and sharpen your practical skills. + + +To begin with, you must choose to specialize in one of the five elements: Fire, Air, Water, Ice and Earth. +You may still manipulate the other four, but you can only hope to access the powerful effects with the element of your specialization. +Furthermore, specializing in one element also slightly affects your character. Ice elementalists are known for the cool and logical mind, while Earth magicians tend to be protective of their charges. + +Choose your Specialization.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With the creature destroyed, Farhan's fighting prowess also seems to have suffered. You now see sweat on his face as he attempts to fight through the wolves, who now take the upper hand, to reach you. + +His blade still seems to be thirsty for wolfblood, and whenever he strikes one, it remains still. You grip your blade as he appears to make his way through the now encircling wolves which attack him with all their fury, now that most of the goblins are slain, but then his way is bared by the giant black wolf. + +It growls, and Farhan takes a step back, for the first time emitting fear. The wolf's growl seems to stop the others attack, and they circle Farhan, forcing him against the wall of the steep hill, next to the cave. + +The wolf, apparently content to have trapped the emissary, appears to wait for something. Unsure what is expected from you, you approach Farhan. + +When he sees that the wolf seems to wait for you, fear is somewhat replaced with a mixture of grudging respect and hope. + +"This is a nice pet you have there", he speaks in that pleasant voice of his, straining to keep it straight. "It won't do me any harm, will it? I can explain..." + +But you interrupt him. "It is not my pet, and I have no command over it." + +"But... but...", he begins... +> I want him to surrender his blade - it looks like a powerful object of magic. +"My... my blade? Yes, here, have it", he quickly burbles and throws it on the ground. + +You move to pick it up, concious of the giant wolf next to you. But when you bend down to touch it, it snakes upwards as if moved by a ghostly hand. + +You scream in pain as the blade bites deep into your flesh, and you feel your soul drawn from your body into its hungry metal. + +Your agony is so great that you do not even hear Farhan's mad laughter as the wolves rip him to pieces.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The goblins flee before you, and after ten minutes in pursuit - your lungs are about to give away - you arrive at a spooky scenery: Apparently the goblins' camp is under attack by wolves! + +Their howl fills the night and make it seem even more dark. The goblins, under attack from all sides, fight with uncommon valor, but even the surprise reinforcements that fled before you are cut down by the powerful jaws of the wolves within seconds. + +A black, wolfformed shape is within their midst, and the goblins fight back in terror, but hopelessly, against its devastating power. + +The camp is situated near a steep hill, and has a caveentrance. And out of that, a creature of your nightmares comes... it is the ugliest, and hugest goblin you have ever seen, with sharp claws like that of a troll. And beside it, stands Farhan Brownhand, the man you came to search for, wielding his dark blade. + +Farhan moves like a dancer between the goblins and the wolves, and whenever he swings his blades, a wolf falls down motionless. The big creature swings its long arms, regardless of hitting friend or foe, and whenever it hits, the victim is flung into the air. + +Farhan alone would suffice to turn the tide of battle in favour for the goblins, and with the strange creature against them, the wolves do not stand a chance. + +Even though you know the next spell might cost you your conciousness, you have to act fast. +> I am an Adept of Water. +When you reach out for your mental powers, you suddenly realize that the creature is a magical construct, a being created and twisted from its natural form into a mindless killing machine, and quite likely insane. + +You also realize what Farhan must be... a nethermancer, a Magus trained in the arts of the Lôrn, the Dark Empire. Master Brownhand weaves not with the Patterns of the world to create his spells, but rather against them - an abominable thought to any thinking Magus. He does not work with the essence of the world, he destroys it, like a vampire living from the blood of others. + +Shuddering, you prepare to unravel the magical being's antipattern, knowing that if you wish to harm Farhan, you have to destroy his creature first. + +Patiently, and hoping he does not notice you yet, you mentally search the creature's being for a point of attack. It is difficult to do so without getting closer, but you do not dare to. + +You are no priest, but you remember once having a spirited discussion with one, and you know that what you have in mind is not unlike the banishing of undeath the priests of Thyr are able to perform. + +Patiently, you seek on, and there, you find it... a scar in the weave of the being, like a twisted, cancerous knot. You feel for it, and then, with determination to end this miserable creature's unlife, you give it a sharp mental pull. + +The creature screams in rage and pain, and flails blindly with those long arms of it, felling both goblin and wolf. Then, after a brief struggle, it falls down to the ground, the twisted pulsating knot and weave that gave it its unnatural life gone. + +Farhan screams in rage as he sees his creature destroyed.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The goblins flee before you, and after ten minutes in pursuit - your lungs are about to give away - you arrive at a spooky scenery: Apparently the goblins' camp is under attack by wolves! + +Their howl fills the night and make it seem even more dark. The goblins, under attack from all sides, fight with uncommon valor, but even the surprise reinforcements that fled before you are cut down by the powerful jaws of the wolves within seconds. + +A black, wolfformed shape is within their midst, and the goblins fight back in terror, but hopelessly, against its devastating power. + +The camp is situated near a steep hill, and has a caveentrance. And out of that, a creature of your nightmares comes... it is the ugliest, and hugest goblin you have ever seen, with sharp claws like that of a troll. And beside it, stands Farhan Brownhand, the man you came to search for, wielding his dark blade. + +Farhan moves like a dancer between the goblins and the wolves, and whenever he swings his blades, a wolf falls down motionless. The big creature swings its long arms, regardless of hitting friend or foe, and whenever it hits, the victim is flung into the air. + +Farhan alone would suffice to turn the tide of battle in favour for the goblins, and with the strange creature against them, the wolves do not stand a chance. + +Even though you know the next spell might cost you your conciousness, you have to act fast. +> I will launch a barrage of magical missiles against the goblins. +Knowing this is the final facedown, you summon up all the energy left within to create a hail of tiny magical missiles that strike their targets with deadly accuracy. The goblins fall under your precise hail, and even Farhan and the ugly creature are subject to your attack, although both appear to shrug of the magical assault. + +You feel you are beginning to blacken out, and the last thing you see is how the ugly goblinoid creature is brought down under three wolves. Then, your vision fades to black. + + +You awake, unsure how long you were asleep, to the feeling of something breathing in your face. You open your eyes and stare into those of the giant black wolf. + +You tense in shock for a moment, but the wolf seems unaware. There is something strange about its eyes... it looks dead. + +A pleasant voice calls out to you: "Ah, I see you made acquaintance with my new friend. I admit, it took a while to tame him, but in the end, he was willing enough." + +A shiver runs down your spine as you recognize it as Farhan's. + +"A brave show of you, indeed. You slew many a goblin. But I no longer require them, now that I have a more powerful ally. So I might thank you for getting rid of them for me." + +Farhan pauses a moment, then adds: "Please understand that my gratitude has its limits, though. Blackfang, feed." + +Before you can react, the jaws of the black beast close around your throat, and not even a dying scream escapes your lips.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The goblins flee before you, and after ten minutes in pursuit - your lungs are about to give away - you arrive at a spooky scenery: Apparently the goblins' camp is under attack by wolves! + +Their howl fills the night and make it seem even more dark. The goblins, under attack from all sides, fight with uncommon valor, but even the surprise reinforcements that fled before you are cut down by the powerful jaws of the wolves within seconds. + +A black, wolfformed shape is within their midst, and the goblins fight back in terror, but hopelessly, against its devastating power. + +The camp is situated near a steep hill, and has a caveentrance. And out of that, a creature of your nightmares comes... it is the ugliest, and hugest goblin you have ever seen, with sharp claws like that of a troll. And beside it, stands Farhan Brownhand, the man you came to search for, wielding his dark blade. + +Farhan moves like a dancer between the goblins and the wolves, and whenever he swings his blades, a wolf falls down motionless. The big creature swings its long arms, regardless of hitting friend or foe, and whenever it hits, the victim is flung into the air. + +Farhan alone would suffice to turn the tide of battle in favour for the goblins, and with the strange creature against them, the wolves do not stand a chance. + +Even though you know the next spell might cost you your conciousness, you have to act fast. +> I will cast a minor shield on myself and join the fray with my short sword. +Not daring to cast more than a minor charm in your current mental state, you weave a protective shield designed to turn the knives and spears of your enemies away without so much as penetrating your skin. + +Then, you grab your sword, and jump into the battle. A couple of wolves are startled by your appearance, and one snaps at you, but his teeth are deflected by your protection. + +You ignore the startled wolf, and throw yourself on the next goblin, which is as startled. Piercing him with your blade, you move on to the next target, when Farhan notices you. + +A pile of dead wolves surround him, and he laughs a madman's laugh in that pleasant voice of his. Then, he utters a command to the giant goblinoid creature, and it ignores the wolves hanging from him and charges you. + +You dodge its first blow, as it sweeps aside goblins and wolves to reach you, and make a bold stab against its chest. But its arms are somewhat longer than your blade, and like a hammer, his backhand swing hits you on the head. You feel lifted up and hurtled through the air, and as ground closes in again, you hear the sickening crunch of your right leg before you pass out into a darkness you will never again wake from...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The goblins flee before you, and after ten minutes in pursuit - your lungs are about to give away - you arrive at a spooky scenery: Apparently the goblins' camp is under attack by wolves! + +Their howl fills the night and make it seem even more dark. The goblins, under attack from all sides, fight with uncommon valor, but even the surprise reinforcements that fled before you are cut down by the powerful jaws of the wolves within seconds. + +A black, wolfformed shape is within their midst, and the goblins fight back in terror, but hopelessly, against its devastating power. + +The camp is situated near a steep hill, and has a caveentrance. And out of that, a creature of your nightmares comes... it is the ugliest, and hugest goblin you have ever seen, with sharp claws like that of a troll. And beside it, stands Farhan Brownhand, the man you came to search for, wielding his dark blade. + +Farhan moves like a dancer between the goblins and the wolves, and whenever he swings his blades, a wolf falls down motionless. The big creature swings its long arms, regardless of hitting friend or foe, and whenever it hits, the victim is flung into the air. + +Farhan alone would suffice to turn the tide of battle in favour for the goblins, and with the strange creature against them, the wolves do not stand a chance. + +Even though you know the next spell might cost you your conciousness, you have to act fast. +> I will concentrate my magical assault on the ugly creature. +Somehow you feel more threatened by the presence of the twisted being than of Farhan Brownhand himself, though both leave tremendous damage among the remaining wolves. + +You form a powerful weave to destroy the creature, and, still unseen by Farhan or the goblins below, you launch it at the giant goblinoid, going for speed rather than for finesse. + +The mental strain hits you like a hammer, and you sway, but it is worth it as you see the big ugly thing implode with a deafening scream. The goblins, already panicking, are going frenzy and stab themselves as much as the wolves, and Farhan screams in rage at the death of the creature.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The goblins flee before you, and after ten minutes in pursuit - your lungs are about to give away - you arrive at a spooky scenery: Apparently the goblins' camp is under attack by wolves! + +Their howl fills the night and make it seem even more dark. The goblins, under attack from all sides, fight with uncommon valor, but even the surprise reinforcements that fled before you are cut down by the powerful jaws of the wolves within seconds. + +A black, wolfformed shape is within their midst, and the goblins fight back in terror, but hopelessly, against its devastating power. + +The camp is situated near a steep hill, and has a caveentrance. And out of that, a creature of your nightmares comes... it is the ugliest, and hugest goblin you have ever seen, with sharp claws like that of a troll. And beside it, stands Farhan Brownhand, the man you came to search for, wielding his dark blade. + +Farhan moves like a dancer between the goblins and the wolves, and whenever he swings his blades, a wolf falls down motionless. The big creature swings its long arms, regardless of hitting friend or foe, and whenever it hits, the victim is flung into the air. + +Farhan alone would suffice to turn the tide of battle in favour for the goblins, and with the strange creature against them, the wolves do not stand a chance. + +Even though you know the next spell might cost you your conciousness, you have to act fast. +> I will focus my magical attack on Farhan. +You summon your mental forces and prepare to unleash a weave of raw magica against Farhan. He apparently has not noticed you yet. + +Knowing you have to go for speed rather than for finesse, you just hope that your mental strength suffices for you not to black out. Then, you banish those distracting thoughts from your mind and concentrate at the work on hand. + +Within seconds, the weave is completed, and you hurl it with a single word of power against the emissary who dances among the wolves, cutting them down. + +Your magical force hits him straight into the chest. +> I am a Magus of Fire. +To your brief surprise, Farhan merely shrugs off the mental assault, and turns into your direction with a wicked grin, brandishing that evil looking blade of his. + +You notice out of the corner of your eyes that the ugly creature cringed in pain when your spell hit Master Brownhand, and without thinking, you unleash the powers of Fire within you at the creature. + +As it turns to ashes within a split second, much faster than you would have anticipated, Farhan screams in rage.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You summon your mental forces and prepare to unleash a weave of raw magica against Farhan. He apparently has not noticed you yet. + +Knowing you have to go for speed rather than for finesse, you just hope that your mental strength suffices for you not to black out. Then, you banish those distracting thoughts from your mind and concentrate at the work on hand. + +Within seconds, the weave is completed, and you hurl it with a single word of power against the emissary who dances among the wolves, cutting them down. + +Your magical force hits him straight into the chest. +> This is not the case. +But Farhan simply shrugs off your mental assault. + +You are shocked by this, and he turns towards you with an evil grin on his face, and cuts his way through the wolves towards you. + +Horrified, and knowing your mental reserves are depleted entirely, you brandish your own sword, slowly giving way to Farhan. Unrelentlessly, he comes towards you. + +You turn to flee, knowing you cannot face him in hand to hand combat, and make a run for it, but he is faster. + +You utter an inhuman scream as the wicked blade he wields bites into your flesh, and you feel your very soul being drawn into the very weapon, feeding both its wielder and its own hunger...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Gathering your last mental resources, you conjure the image of a powerful warrior. + +Once finished, it looks indeed a bit like Kor, the scarred leader of the guards, and you wonder if you have overdone it a bit when it charges the goblins with deadly silence. + +The goblins however break at the sight of the charging giant of a man, and dropping their assorted weaponry, they cry something in their own gutural language and flee. +> Happy to have survived the encounter without much effort, I will rest to gain strength before continuing... before something worse than the goblins appears out of the darkness. +You decide that rest is what you need right now, for you cannot go on, your mental resources completely depleted and your physical condition is not much better. + +Telling yourself an hour rest will suffice, you feel weariness like you never knew before creeping up to you. +The cool air and the ground, not quite chilling yet no longer containing the sun's warmth ever help to keep you awake, yet you feel your eyes closing themselves involuntarily. +> I am a Magus specialized in Water. +You feel sleep threatening to overtake you, but you embrace the feeling and turn it into restful energy, knowing that falling asleep right now would probably be the last thing you would ever do. + +Instead, you use a ritual like that of meditation, only the other way around, and you draw the tiredness out of your body and into the surrounding Pattern of the magic weaves. + +You close your eyes and reach a state like slumber, only at full awareness, while thinking through the situation so far. + +Suddenly you sense movement nearby. With a quickness that would surprise anyone taking your for someone asleep you jump up, your short sword in your hand. + +Sneaking up to you were three goblins, each armed with barbed spears, and they are more surprised than you at seeing them. With a quick thrust, you end the first goblin's life, and the others, expecting a defenseless human instead of one awake and capable of killing them, turn to flee. +> I need to regain more strength before I face more enemies. +You feel like drowning in your weariness. The day has been more than taxing so far. Casting spells never felt so tiring, but then again, the conditions under which you wove your spells so far never had been so demanding. + +Once you yearned for adventure, but right now, you yearn for a soft bed like you had when studying in the Academy. + +The thought of a bed is a dangerous one, and you cannot hold sleep off any longer. With a sigh, you close your eyes and give in to the drowning darkness. + + +Your dreams are vivid and colorful. You dream of the Patterns of the world, and how a different Pattern feeds into it. You sense a dark presence swirling the weaves, twisting them with fingers unseen. You somehow feel threatened by the presence, and will yourself to wake up - yet to no avail. + +Another dark presence approaches the first... it is less human, more like an animal, but as dark and... you cannot put a finger to it... somehow out of place. + +You feel the presences clash together, in your mind, and all the colors turn to black and white, and then vice versa. + + +With an incredibly intense, stabbing pain you awake, briefly, and, pierced through your chest is the barbed spear of a grinning goblin.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide that rest is what you need right now, for you cannot go on, your mental resources completely depleted and your physical condition is not much better. + +Telling yourself an hour rest will suffice, you feel weariness like you never knew before creeping up to you. +The cool air and the ground, not quite chilling yet no longer containing the sun's warmth ever help to keep you awake, yet you feel your eyes closing themselves involuntarily. +> I am an Adept of Ice. +Your drowsiness threatens to take over, but it would be most unlogical to give in to the desire to sleep, for it would be much likely to be the last thing you would ever do. + +Instead, you use the cool air and the cold ground to refresh your body and your mind. This is your type of energy, after all. + +Suddenly, you notice movement at the corner of your vision, and immediatley, your senses clear and you are full awake. Remaining still as to pretend being still asleep, you notice that three goblins are sneaking up to you. + +Without further hesitation, you lash out your right hand into the direction of one, and with a simple yet effective weave freeze his heart. The goblins' companions gasp in surprise as their comrade simply falls over without another sound at your gesture, and they turn to flee immediatley. + +Not pausing, you stand up and run after them in pursuit, before they fetch more companions.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Kor expresses worry about your shape, but you assure him that you do not intend to face down Farhan Brownhand in hand to hand battle right now, but it is important that you find out what Farhan is up to, and eventually, the warrior agrees. + +You are handed a flask of some of the strong smelling brew with healing powers, and set up with light gear into the hills, with the best wishes of the guards and a short sword from one of the fallen - you usally carry no weapons with you, but your mental exhaustion is too great to be certain that you are able to defend yourself if attacked. + + +Keeping slightly away from the main road, you travel crosscountry, following the trail of the fled goblins from the foiled ambush as best as you can. + +Wearily, you walk on, although twilight slowly gives way to the starfilled darkness. Suddenly, you notive some movement in the distance... a goblin patrol! + +Confidence that you are still on the right track gives away to fear as they appear to have seen you. +> I will rely on my magic to defend against them. +As you tap into your mental forces to prepare a weave to defend yourself against the goblins, you notice that your mental exhaustion is quite advanced... casting a spell to slay the four goblins will tax you dangerously. +> I am a Magus of Fire, and its destructive powers are my speciality. +Any other Magus would likely have a problem with the drain that comes with weaving destructive spells, but to you, it is rather refreshing. + +As the goblins charge, you simply smile and spread your hands, which burst into a blueish flame which casts spooky shadows on the nightly hills. + +Seeing this, the goblins' charge falters slightly, but the two archers are unfathomed by this and nock arrows into their bows. + +Deftly, a small weave of fire turns the bows in their hands to cinders, and they yelp in pain as the skin on their hands turns to blisters. + +Confused by the cries of pain behind them, the two remaining goblins stop and turn, and when you hurl the blueish flame around your hands at one of the archers, he explodes in a ghostly fire without a sound before their eyes. + +This is enough to convince the goblins that bravety is uncalled for, and they turn and flee.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you tap into your mental forces to prepare a weave to defend yourself against the goblins, you notice that your mental exhaustion is quite advanced... casting a spell to slay the four goblins will tax you dangerously. +> I will take out as many goblins as it feels safe to do, then face the rest with my sword. +As one of the archers comes in range and launches an arrow at you, you pick it up with a thin strand of air and redirect it to hit the other archer in the throat, which dies gurgling in a foul language you do not understand. + +Thrusting your left hand forward and uttering a single syllable of power, you focus what power remains for you to safely use, and thrust it into a powerful weave that rips one of the remaining goblins apart from the inside. + +Shocked by the display of power, the goblins are close to breaking point. You draw your short blade and charge them, and the darkness and their fear hides your exhaustion well from them. + +Before you reach them, your blade glimmering in the starlight like the sword of an avenging angel - at least in the goblins' eyes -, they drop their weapons and flee. + +Too exhausted to pursue them, you slump down on the ground and decide to rest for a while.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you tap into your mental forces to prepare a weave to defend yourself against the goblins, you notice that your mental exhaustion is quite advanced... casting a spell to slay the four goblins will tax you dangerously. +> I will use my mental reserves instead to camouflage myself, so that the goblin patrol will not find me. +You throw yourself flat on the ground the moment the goblins begin moving into your direction. There, concentrating, you weave a small charm that blends your Pattern into that of the surrounding, effectively becoming invisible to the casual eye. + +You have a good view of the goblin patrol, and as they approach, you use what little power remains within you to handle safely to mask your breathing and movements. + +The goblins still approach, to the point where you can smell their sickening stench and hear their gutural language, which you do not understand. But obviously they are searching for someone, or something, and are not too happy about it. + +You cannot stop yourself to breathe a sigh of relief as they pass you, unseeing, and vanish into the darkness of the hills below. + +You wait for another quarter of an hour, and then you release your magic, slumping on the ground, mentally completely exhausted.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you tap into your mental forces to prepare a weave to defend yourself against the goblins, you notice that your mental exhaustion is quite advanced... casting a spell to slay the four goblins will tax you dangerously. +> Using magic would be too taxing - it is of no help if I fall unconcious because of weaving a spell - so I trust on my swordblade on this encounter instead. +Brandishing your short sword, you bellow a battlecry and charge the goblins, hoping that this will break their morale. + +The two archers loose their arrows at you, but you do not even have to dodge them... goblins are not known for their aim, and indeed, their arrows go stray. + +One of them manages to fire another arrow at you before you reach them, but that one misses you also. + +Your first blow, unexperienced as you are, is deflected by the goblin's shield. Using your weight and the force of the blow, your followup stab pierces his stomach. + +With a cry of pain in a foul language you do not understand, the goblin falls to the ground. + +However, as you are about to free your blade from the goblin's body, one of the archers shoots an arrow at point blank at you, and as you cry out from pain as the wooden shaft bores into your flesh, the other goblin with the morning star smashes it into your skull, and after a brief pain, there is only darkness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Kor expresses worry about your shape, but you assure him that you do not intend to face down Farhan Brownhand in hand to hand battle right now, but it is important that you find out what Farhan is up to, and eventually, the warrior agrees. + +You are handed a flask of some of the strong smelling brew with healing powers, and set up with light gear into the hills, with the best wishes of the guards and a short sword from one of the fallen - you usally carry no weapons with you, but your mental exhaustion is too great to be certain that you are able to defend yourself if attacked. + + +Keeping slightly away from the main road, you travel crosscountry, following the trail of the fled goblins from the foiled ambush as best as you can. + +Wearily, you walk on, although twilight slowly gives way to the starfilled darkness. Suddenly, you notive some movement in the distance... a goblin patrol! + +Confidence that you are still on the right track gives away to fear as they appear to have seen you. +> Cowardice is preferable to death... I will hide myself! +You know that your magic is too weakened to rely upon, and while a trained warrior could probably handle those four goblins, you realize your swordskill is mediocre at best. + +They appear to have spotted you, but you throw yourself flat on the ground - careful enough neither to break the flask you are carrying with you not to spike yourself on your sword - and roll down a hill, more away from the road. + +There, you keep down, knowing that in your state you are unlikely to outrun them. The hand on your swordhilt, you cower in darkness, thankful that the young moon does not give off much light. + +An eternity passes, and you are about to raise your head, as you hear the shuffling feet and the gutural language of the goblin patrol approaching. In the darkness, you briefly consider weaving a minor charm to make you unseen, but you are afraid that even the tiniest motion of a hand would betray you, so you hold your breath and remain still. + +Another eternity passes - probably barely more than a minute - and the sounds of the patrol fade away again - obviously they were not intent on searching too hard, after the beating they took at the ambush. + +Breathing a sigh of relief, you sit down to gather your strength again before continuing.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It should be not difficult to find such a powerful weave as a teleportation spell. + +You close your eyes and enhance your trained mental senses to a point where you can feel the pattern of the world around you. + +But although you search the point where Farhan has disappeared, you do not find any traces of the weave. You ponder this fact, and come to the conclusion that Master Brownhand must have masked the weave. This is a very difficult to achieve while casting or maintaining a spell, and your respect for the other Magus grows, whatever he might have done. + +Yet your insight does not help you, and you are unsure of how to go on - a state which you, as an Ice Magus deeply dislike. +> We are not in the possession of all the facts, and thus need to find out more about Master Brownhand. So we attempt to find him together, for eight eyes see more than two, and it is logical to have protection. +Kor and the guards do not like your decision, and express clearly so, but they accept your status as the group's leader. + +Quickly, you are packed with light gear, and, abandoning the coaches, you head into the hills in the approaching nightfall. + +The moon is young, and the ground is not easy to see, yet you march through the hills slightly away from the road, as not to be so easy a target. + +An hour passes, and nightfall becomes a beautiful starspangled sky, were you in a mood to appreciate this. + +Suddenly, Kor stops and points towards an approaching goblin patrol. They have spotted you too, and seeing that you equal their size, decide to make a run for it after the disaster of the ambush earlier. + +"Get 'em 'fore they gets to their fellows!", Kor bellows, and, axe drawn, charges them. +> I will attempt to strike down the goblins from afar, using the meager mental resources remaining to me. +You close your eyes and focus your mental view on the goblins' Patterns. You weave a few simple strands of air and fire, to keep low the strain on your already overtaxed mind, and cause one of the goblin's chest to explode. + +Shocked by this display of power, the remaining goblins stop approaching you and appear to discuss what to do now - they are obviously not very bright. + +This distraction is all the guards need to reach them, and the goblins fall under the blows of the men. + +Seeing you have been victorious, you gently fall over, already fast asleep, as the spell takes its toll from you despite your rigid concentration. +> Continue... +You awake when someone shakes your shoulder. + +With an aching head, you stretch and stand up to face Kor, who woke you. + +"Quickly", he hisses. "I know yer in no shape, but we need ya here. Dem's buggers found out bout us somehow, and dere's about two dozens creeping all 'round us, closin' in. We're trapped like rabbits!" + +With that, he thrusts a short sword into your hand. You do not feel in any shape to weave spells at the moment, and this is bad as you realize what Kor just said. + +The goblins are approaching, and you see them... indeed, at least two dozens of them encircle the tiny camp the men made. You're uphill, but there's too many of them to really use that advantage. + +The men, and you, form a square, each one guarding one side. The blade in your hand is unfamiliar, but you feel that it would be a good idea to become familiar with it rather quickly. + +There is a moment of silence, and then, the goblins charge with cries in a gutural language you do not - and if the accompanying gestures are any indication, you are glad that this is so - understand. + +With an answering battlecry that you join in, you intercept the first wave of the attack. Kor's great axe slices through the goblins' bodies, and the man to your right spits two goblins at once on his sword. + +You are barely capable of deflecting the wicked spears and knives of the creatures, but you manage to bring in a well placed kick that causes one of the foul beings to yelp in pain, loose the balance and roll back down the hill, taking another one with him. + +Although the four of you manage to hold the goblins at bay, it is clear that you cannot do so for very long, and after a minute of frenzied fighting, a scream of pain indicates the guard in your back going down. + +Quickly, the square becomes a triangle, as you move to protect your fallen comrade, yet the battle appears to be without hope. + +Determined not to be the next to fall, you fight on, and it is by sheer luck that you survive the next minutes. + +Suddenly, a spooky howl fills the night, and the goblins cower in fear for a moment, then abruptly the break of their assault and turn to flee. + +Kor caughs something, and you notice that the giant of a man is wounded, as is the other guard. You, by none less than a miracle, are the only one not seriously wounded. + +"After em, lad," Kor cries and throws you a bottle of that evil smelling medicine the guards use. You drink a gulp, pocketing the last remains, and the fire within refreshes you sufficently to grab your sword and hurry after the fleeing goblins alone in the dark, towards the source of that ghostly howl that has now ceased...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Kor and the guards do not like your decision, and express clearly so, but they accept your status as the group's leader. + +Quickly, you are packed with light gear, and, abandoning the coaches, you head into the hills in the approaching nightfall. + +The moon is young, and the ground is not easy to see, yet you march through the hills slightly away from the road, as not to be so easy a target. + +An hour passes, and nightfall becomes a beautiful starspangled sky, were you in a mood to appreciate this. + +Suddenly, Kor stops and points towards an approaching goblin patrol. They have spotted you too, and seeing that you equal their size, decide to make a run for it after the disaster of the ambush earlier. + +"Get 'em 'fore they gets to their fellows!", Kor bellows, and, axe drawn, charges them. +> This is a fighter's job, not mine... I am too exhausted, and the goblins should be no match for the guards. +While Kor and his men charge the goblins, and gaining, you slowly walk after them. + +You are weary to the bones, and your mental resources are nearly depleted due to the exhaustion earlier. It would be of no use to anyone if you fell unconcious by trying to slay a few goblins. + +A couple of minutes later, and the guards are engaged with the goblins. Indeed, the goblins do not stand a chance against the trained fighters, but one of them manages to escape. +> I am a Magus of Fire. +Your instincts take over. + +With a pleased grin, like that of a cat on a chase, you deftly weave a small knot of fire and hurl it after the goblin. + +It hits him in the back, and within split seconds, only ashes remain of the creature, but even that tiny spell was too much for you, and you gently fall over.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While Kor and his men charge the goblins, and gaining, you slowly walk after them. + +You are weary to the bones, and your mental resources are nearly depleted due to the exhaustion earlier. It would be of no use to anyone if you fell unconcious by trying to slay a few goblins. + +A couple of minutes later, and the guards are engaged with the goblins. Indeed, the goblins do not stand a chance against the trained fighters, but one of them manages to escape. +> I launch a magical attack against him. +You focus what remains of your mental resources into a ball of pure energy and cast it after the fleeing goblin, striking him from behind. + +The magical energy discharges into the goblin's body, and he falls down lifeless. + +You, however, having reached your limits, fall down into a deep, dreamless sleep...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While Kor and his men charge the goblins, and gaining, you slowly walk after them. + +You are weary to the bones, and your mental resources are nearly depleted due to the exhaustion earlier. It would be of no use to anyone if you fell unconcious by trying to slay a few goblins. + +A couple of minutes later, and the guards are engaged with the goblins. Indeed, the goblins do not stand a chance against the trained fighters, but one of them manages to escape. +> I do nothing. What harm can one single goblin do? +You judge your mental resources too low to be able to weave a spell that would do more than tickle the goblin, and thus you let him escape. + +The guards have finished dealing with the other three, but the fleeing goblin is too far away. + +Kor curses, when he notices that one got away, but everyone agrees that he's too far away. + +"The bugger's probably goin' ta get his friends on our heels within the hour", he mutters. "Let's get away from here." + + +You agree on this, and you head away from the road, to make camp somewhere safe. + +You are in no shape for guard duty, and so the three men share it among themselves. Food is scarce, but sleep is all you need. Before you hit your blanket, you are already fast asleep. + + +A battlecry wakes you in the middle of the night. Bleary-eyed you need a few seconds to get your bearing, and that is all the goblin standing behind you needs to ram a barbed spear through your body. + +A pain you never knew before fills you, and you faint the moment you see the spearhead protruding from your chest, falling into a darkness from where there is no awakening...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, is gone and his bodyguard is dead. + +Only three guards - and yourself - survived his treachery and the goblin attack. All agree that Master Brownhand had been probably in league with the goblins, but why he would attack the trek himself, noone knows. + +The situation looks grim, reports Kor, the scarred and blackbearded bear of a man who led the charge against the emissary. He is a seasoned veteran, and you can see in his eyes the disgust for this treachery. + +The horses drawing the coach are all either dead or have fled. Night is coming soon, and the road through the hills is known to be a dangerous way even in daylight. Bandits and bands goblins roam the area, as you were forced to experience yourself. + +The plains are not much better. Any camp made on the way would be like a beacon to anyone searching for them, and neither Kor nor you have no doubts that Farhan will likely return - with or without help - to finish what the goblins had begun. + +As a Magus, even a rather inexperienced one, the duty of leadership is on you, but Kor is ready with advice. + +Basically, you have only few options. You might attempt to travel back to the Acadamy and report of Farhan's treachery. +Or, you might attempt to find him before he finds you. Teleport weaves, as Farhan has used to escape, are tricky: They are dangerous to pull off, because inexperienced adepts attempting to move their essence to somewhere else usually unravel themselves and get no second try. Also, the further away the destination is, the more difficult the spell becomes, and you know that even a master magician like Farhan Brownhand must have been tired after the spells he crafted during the battle. +Your guess is, that he fled to somewhere in the hills, and Kor agrees with you on this, for in the plains, there is nowhere to hide for several miles around, not even a light wood or a small village. + +The only thing you know for certain is, that it would be wise to leave this place as soon as possible, as long as the enemy Magus is still weakened from his spellcasting. +> I am specialized in the powers of Earth, and thus I attempt to question the animals of the area whether they know of Farhan's whereabouts. +You sit down on the ground and close your eyes, sending out a mental call to all the animals around you. + +You probe into their minds and send your image, a human friend in need of help, and already you hear their answers. + +Dominating the mental images that answer is that of a huge, black shadow, and you know it must be the most powerful animal around - a natural leader, as you will. + +You feel its presence approaching, and the remaining guards gasp aloud as suddenly a huge black wolf jumps into your mid without so much of a sound. Swords and axes are drawn, but you command them to drop their weapons. + +The wolf, with the natural grace of a killer, ignores them as lesser prey - you see them through his eyes - and approaches them. + +You are about to lay down on the ground and bare your throat, not as a gesture of fear but as a token of respect, when you sense that something is not quite right about this wolf. You hesitate, but the wolf does neither appear to notice nor to care. + +He sits down on his hindlegs in front of you, staring at you with uncanny yellow eyes that seem to hide an intelligence much more than mere animal. + +Covering your nervousness, that might as well bring you death, you frame a mental picture of Master Brownhand and send it to the wolf. + +The reply is a flurry of images that nearly knock you out of your concentration. Blood, hatred, the scent of blood dominating the whole scene, slain cubs, a dark entrance into a cavern, the scent of goblins, the sickening taste of their foul flesh, and at the core of this, the being you knew as Farhan, and also something different, something dark, you cannot quite point your finger on. + +Hastily you break your concentration before the hatred you feel overpowers you, and it is only then that you notice the deep, dark growling of the wolf as it simply looks at you, and the nervousness of the guards, which already have drawn their blades again despite your command. + +But then, the huge animals simply stops, stands up and leaves towards the hills, ignoring the guards again as it strides through their midst. + +At the edge of the battlefield, it turns its head to look at you, as if to see whether you follow, then turns again and trots into the hills. +> I will follow the wolf, with or without the others - it appears to want to lead me to somewhere specific. +You know that it is your duty to follow the wolf, and perhaps your destiny. + +You have asked a favour from it, and it is now time for you to repay that favour. Kor presses a short sword into your hand and a flask containing one sip of that evil smelling brew with healing powers the guards used, but the men make it clear that they will not follow you. + +You have no time to argue with them, for the wolf is already out of sight, and so you hurry on, into nightfall, falling the huge black shape. + +The wolf waits for you just out of sight of the guards, and, seeing that you follow, turns to walk on again. + +Like in trance, you follow it. At least two hours, straight through the hills, slightly away from the road, the two of you march on. At one time, he sniffed the air, and lay low on the ground, and you did it likewise, wondering briefly about what kind of intelligence this uncanny animal possesses. + +Then, when you see a campfire shining at the horizon, the wolf emits a low growl. Then, suddenly, he raises his head and howls towards the young moon, a deafening sound that wakes primal instincts of fear deep within you. The howl is picked up through the surrounding hills, and the black wolf charges towards the fire. + +Fascinated, and worried, you follow. +> Continue... +When you arrive at the campfire, there is a battle going on between silvergrey shapes and the twisted humanoids. The black wolf has launched itself into the fray, and the goblins, having nowhere to flee as they are under attack from all sides, fight with uncommon valor, but you can see that the odds are not in their favor. + +The camp is situated against a steep hill, and you see a cave entrance out of which a nightmarish creature appears. + +It is without doubt the largest goblin you have ever seen, larger than many a human, sporting huge claws. And, standing next to it, is Farhan Brownhand, wielding that dark blade of his. + +He moves with the grace of a dancer amidst the goblins and wolves alike, and whenever he makes a cut with his sword, a wolf falls down motionless. + +Farhan alone might turn the tide of battle in favour for the goblins, and the goblinoid creature simply swipes those clawlike arms of it around, uncaring whether it hurts friend or foe. Even the powerful black wolf keeps its distance from it. + +While you are not exactly mentally fit, and afraid that even a single spell will be the last one you cast before falling down unconcious, you know you have to act.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You concentrate, and your mental eyes follow the Farhan's weaving. He uses Fire, and mixes Earth in it, but when he leashes it out, you already took hold of one of the strands of magic with your mental touch, and the spell already unravels itself as it is cast. + +When it reaches you, it is nothing more than a gust of warm wind that ruffles your hair. + +Infuriated, sensing what you have done, Farhan pulls the black blade out of Lucius' body, and, brandishing it, charges you. + +Out of the corners of your eyes you see that the guards are approaching the obviously crazed emissary. +> I launch a quick spell against him, intend on stoping him long enough for the guards to reach him. +You raise your arms, quickly contemplating the type of weave to throw against Master Brownhand, but decide for simplicity. + +A few minor strands of Air flow from your mind and wrap themselves around the emissary's arms, and, tightening, you attempt to hold him. + +His eyes widen in fury as he realizes what you are about to do, and he attempts to sever the weaves that surround his arms with his own magic. + +Surprised at the deftness and skill of his magical counterattack against your spell, you cannot do anything but admire the man's finesse as he unravels your spell with his mind. + +Within a split second, your spell falls to pieces beyond repair, and Farhan, unhindered again, charges the coach you are standing upon. +> I will jump down the coach and grab the sword of a fallen soldier to face Farhan in close combat. +Infuriated by the sight of your fallen friend, and by the treachery that you have witnessed, you jump down from the coach and grab the heavy, unfamiliar blade of a goblinslain soldier. + +You see, from the corners of your eyes, that the guards are approach Farhan Brownhand with drawn weapons, but you ignore them. + +The emissary grins a wicked grin and makes a fast and elegant move, that closes the distance to you and your blade much faster than you could have anticipated. + +By sheer luck, you manage to parry the first of Farhan's blows, but he anticipated the move and brings his blade back in a small circle, cutting deep into your unprotected side. + +As the black, evil-looking blade enters your body, you feel a pain you have never felt before. It is as if your soul itself is torn and shredded by the cold metal, and you utter an inhuman scream. + +Feebly, knowing that you are doomed, you wave your own blade towards Farhan, but he nimbly evades the clumsy blow and twists the sword in your side one more. + +Unable to bear the pain, you scream once again, and then, feeling your soul drawn out of your body through the wound, everything first fades from red to black to a chilling emptiness...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You stare disbelieving at Master Brownhand, and before you can launch a spell at him, he uses your hesitation to weave a quick strand of fire at you. + +You barely dodge the small bolt of fire that jumps from his fingers and flies past you. + +Seeing he missed you, he curses and prepares another spell. You have to act quick. +> I quickly launch a spell at him to disrupt his casting. +Quickly, you close your eyes and stretch your fingers towards Farhan, hurling a small amount of raw magic against him. This is without finesse, and rather taxing, but effective enough. + +Master Brownhand gasps as the pure energy you launched at him hits him, and snarls a curse at you. Obviously, you successfully broke his concentration. + +Then, he grabs the dark blade still sticking in Lucius' body, hefts it in his right hand, weaves a protective gesture with his left and advances to the coach you stand upon. + +Out of the corner of your eyes, you see the surviving guards, with drawn swords, approach the emissary.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You stare disbelieving at Master Brownhand, and before you can launch a spell at him, he uses your hesitation to weave a quick strand of fire at you. + +You barely dodge the small bolt of fire that jumps from his fingers and flies past you. + +Seeing he missed you, he curses and prepares another spell. You have to act quick. +> I try to work a dangerous spell against Farhan, trusting my skill to complete it before him. +You close your eyes, concentrating feverishly on a weave that you know will destroy Farhan Brownhand. + +Only seconds pass, as you prepare to launch the last patterns at your opponent, but he is faster, and a bright light errupts from the emissary's fingers, and hits you in the chest, just as you are about to complete your spell. + +With a searing pain in the chest, Farhan's spell throws you backward from the coach you were standing upon, and you hit the ground below head first, just as you hear a bellow of rage coming from the remaining guards... +> Continue... +You are not dead, and you are quite sure of it, because you always heared of death being somewhat of a peaceful slumber. Instead, your head feels like it is going to explode every second now, the world appears to be one of those carroussels you have visited once on a fair near the Academy, and if your stomach wasn't empty already, it would soon be. + +With a groan you open one of your eyes, only to find that the world not only spins like a carroussel, but the flashing lights that dance before your vision also appear to be like the fireworks that often accompany the fairs. + +You have no idea how long you were left there lieing, but when you open your eyes again, you stare into a horrific face, swollen and blurred like a nightmare come true. + +You gasp and wrench from the hands that suddenly grasp your shoulders, only to find that the sudden movement brings an explosion of pain so far unknown to you into your head, and you cannot help but twist to one side, assisted by the hands, and empty your stomach for good, even though all that comes from it is blood and bile, each spasm calling forth another explosion of pain that makes you wish you were, in fact, dead. + +A voice calls something you do not understand, and something cold splashes your face. + +When the spasms stop and the pain subside to barely above tolerable levels again, someone holds a wineskin to your mouth, and greedily you take a gulp, only to choke at the brandy that is now in your mouth. + +Coughing, and wincing, you try to sit up, and are assisted once again by the strong hands. You look at who is holding you, and finally, through the tears of pain, your vision clears and you recognize the scarred and bearded face of one of the soldiers who looks at you with some concern. + +"Some concussion y'got there, lad", he greets you. + +An hour later, when you feel well enough to stand up again, though somewhat shaky - the brandy helped greatly to settle your stomach, there must have been something in it - you take in the scenery. + +Only three guards - and yourself - survived, but the goblins were nearly decimated, and the few survivors fled. + +Lucius Tarchild and J'Arel Whitefang are both dead, J'Arel obviously the luckier of the two. + +Both were apparently killed by Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, the scarred guard that woke you reports with a scowl. He interrupts his talking, and turns to spit on the ground. + +Master Whitefang was slain by a bolt of lightning summoned by Master Brownhand, and Master Tarchild was slain by a darkly enchanted sword the emissary wielded when he attacked the magus. + +For some reason, the emissary obviously was in league with the goblin horde, and wanted the trek to be exterminated. However, the guards managed to overcome the goblins in time, and faced by the remaining guards, Farhan slew most of them with his magic and then turned to flee. + +Why he did this, the scarred man, who is named Kor, the guards never knew, but they suspect some dark treachery. + + +You have been unconcious for more than three hours, and it is high time to break the camp, in case Farhan, rested, returns to finish the work the goblins began. + +The animals that drew the coaches are either dead or fled during the ambush, and you have little choice but to leave the place by foot in the twilight that announces nightfall. + +Kor, obviously a seasoned veteran, is about to order the remaining guards to pack, when he hesitates a moment to look at you. +> As a Magus, it is on me to lead the group. +You explain that the duty of leadership is on you, as a Magus. + +Kor's eyes show quite clearly what he thinks of this, seeing that you're in no shape, but then nods in agreement. + +He grunts something, then hands you some of the evilsmelling brew you were forced to drink earlier, but remembering its healing powers, you eagerly take another swallow. + +Feeling the soothing warmth running down your throat, you already feel a lot better, though by no way yourself again. + +Kor is ready with advice on how to proceed, and you gladly take it. + +You agree that you have to break camp as soon as possible, before Farhan - undoubtedly in a better shape than you - returns to finish his work. + +Basically, you only have two choices. You either return to the Academy of Alzur, reporting of Farhan's strange betrayal, or attempt to follow him into the hills, where he likely has fled - Kor reports that he teleported away when the guards charged him, and you know that teleport weaves are hard to pull off and very exhausting, and not even a master Magus could travel very far. And since there is not even a small village or a forest in the near vincinity, it is only sensible to assume Farhan must have fled into the hills. + +Kor suggests going back to the Academy, reporting the emissary's betrayal and counsel then what to do about it. A sideglance towards you either means that he is concerned about your weakened state and too polite to say so, or that he thinks you too young and inexperienced to even stand the smallest chance against Farhan Brownhand. + +But you are the leader, as you made quite clear, and so the decision is upon you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are not dead, and you are quite sure of it, because you always heared of death being somewhat of a peaceful slumber. Instead, your head feels like it is going to explode every second now, the world appears to be one of those carroussels you have visited once on a fair near the Academy, and if your stomach wasn't empty already, it would soon be. + +With a groan you open one of your eyes, only to find that the world not only spins like a carroussel, but the flashing lights that dance before your vision also appear to be like the fireworks that often accompany the fairs. + +You have no idea how long you were left there lieing, but when you open your eyes again, you stare into a horrific face, swollen and blurred like a nightmare come true. + +You gasp and wrench from the hands that suddenly grasp your shoulders, only to find that the sudden movement brings an explosion of pain so far unknown to you into your head, and you cannot help but twist to one side, assisted by the hands, and empty your stomach for good, even though all that comes from it is blood and bile, each spasm calling forth another explosion of pain that makes you wish you were, in fact, dead. + +A voice calls something you do not understand, and something cold splashes your face. + +When the spasms stop and the pain subside to barely above tolerable levels again, someone holds a wineskin to your mouth, and greedily you take a gulp, only to choke at the brandy that is now in your mouth. + +Coughing, and wincing, you try to sit up, and are assisted once again by the strong hands. You look at who is holding you, and finally, through the tears of pain, your vision clears and you recognize the scarred and bearded face of one of the soldiers who looks at you with some concern. + +"Some concussion y'got there, lad", he greets you. + +An hour later, when you feel well enough to stand up again, though somewhat shaky - the brandy helped greatly to settle your stomach, there must have been something in it - you take in the scenery. + +Only three guards - and yourself - survived, but the goblins were nearly decimated, and the few survivors fled. + +Lucius Tarchild and J'Arel Whitefang are both dead, J'Arel obviously the luckier of the two. + +Both were apparently killed by Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, the scarred guard that woke you reports with a scowl. He interrupts his talking, and turns to spit on the ground. + +Master Whitefang was slain by a bolt of lightning summoned by Master Brownhand, and Master Tarchild was slain by a darkly enchanted sword the emissary wielded when he attacked the magus. + +For some reason, the emissary obviously was in league with the goblin horde, and wanted the trek to be exterminated. However, the guards managed to overcome the goblins in time, and faced by the remaining guards, Farhan slew most of them with his magic and then turned to flee. + +Why he did this, the scarred man, who is named Kor, the guards never knew, but they suspect some dark treachery. + + +You have been unconcious for more than three hours, and it is high time to break the camp, in case Farhan, rested, returns to finish the work the goblins began. + +The animals that drew the coaches are either dead or fled during the ambush, and you have little choice but to leave the place by foot in the twilight that announces nightfall. + +Kor, obviously a seasoned veteran, is about to order the remaining guards to pack, when he hesitates a moment to look at you. +> Kor is a seasoned veteran, and I follow his lead. +As Kor looks at you with the question of leadership in his eyes, you only nod your head to him, and wince at the burst of pain this small movement causes. + +Noting it with some concern, one of the other two guards hands you a flask with the same evilsmelling stuff you were forced to drink earlier. Remembering its healing powers, though, you eagerly take a swallow, and the pain clears away nearly immediatley - although the taste remains, and you still not feel yourself. + +Seeing you recovered somewhat, Kor speaks to you: "We'll be headin' back to Alzur, the Academy needs ta know 'bout what happen' here." + +You cannot but agree, and although the thought of leaving Farhan behind makes you uncomfortable, you know that you at least are in no position to weave powerful spells at the moment. + +Within the hour, you are packed and prepared for the long journey back to Alzur.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The flame of the Spark is strong within you today, and your fingers itch with the desire to channel your magic. + +This is it... this is how it feels to have an adventure! If not for the seriousness of the situation, you would laugh with delight. +> I will single out the most powerful looking enemies and turn them into cinder. +You quickly climb upon the coach, to get a better view of the battle. + +Decisively, you summon the powers of Fire to channel thin strands of elemental flame into the bodies of the three goblin shamans, which turn immediatley into cinder. + +One goblin has not dropped his bow, and fires an arrow at you, but another thin strand of fire takes care of both the arrow and the archer. + +Another goblin is about to plunge his wicked looking knife into the neck of a soldier, but yelps in pain and drops it as its hilt suddenly glows bright red, which gives the soldier time to dispatch the goblin with a backhand stroke. + +With their shamans dead, the goblins offer little resistance, and their morale is close to breaking point when you notice that Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, is sneaking up behind Lucius, making strange gestures as if invoking a spell. + +You do not know exactly what to think of this, but then again, you are not a pesky Ice adept who needs to think through everything before reaching a decision. + +Invoking the Fire again, you settle for a warning shot, and the earth in front of Master Brownhand explodes into flame. + +Lucius turns around in surprise, but before you can react, Farhan has a slender, evil looking sword out and runs it through the Air adept, who's look turns from surprise to pain. + +Farhan lets go off his sword and turns towards you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The flame of the Spark is strong within you today, and your fingers itch with the desire to channel your magic. + +This is it... this is how it feels to have an adventure! If not for the seriousness of the situation, you would laugh with delight. +> I will weave minor protective charms to support the guards. +Earth is not your strongest element, but nevertheless you know of charms that prevent blows and knives to find their target. + +You climb up on the coach you rode in to get a better overview, and concentrate on channelling the energies out of the ground, and into the armor and bodies of the soldiers. +A few twicht uncomfortably as you know they must feel a tingling sensation, but those you enchant this way react surprised when the wicked knives of the goblins glance of their armor and skin without leaving a scratch. + +The weaving of so many minor enchantments costs you a lot of concentration, and after a minute of holding the spell up, you are about to collapse. + +The soldiers, however, have made the best of uses of your spells, and only a few of the goblins are left alive. + +Suddenly, Lucius, who has been preventing accidental arrows to break your concentration, screams in pain, breaking your concentration. + +Before the whiplash of the dozens of suddenly broken spells wipe out your mind and cause you to fall into a deep blackness, you see Fahan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, standing behind Lucius, spitting him with an evil looking sword...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The flame of the Spark is strong within you today, and your fingers itch with the desire to channel your magic. + +This is it... this is how it feels to have an adventure! If not for the seriousness of the situation, you would laugh with delight. +> I will weave a minor charm to slow down the goblins. +Water is not your most powerful element, but nevertheless you know enough about how to manipulate the fluids in a being to slow it down, hoping that this will give the guards enough advantage to slay the wicked creatures. + +You close your eyes, concentrating, and hoping that Lucius can keep any stray arrows away from you, and channel the unaccustomed energies of Water through your body. +Gently but unstoppable, like the tide, the powers flow into the bodies of your enemies, burdening them, slowing them, and one by one you feel, through your bondage with Water, how the life form of one after the other is destroyed by the soldiers, who use the turn of events. + +So absorbed are you in the unfamiliar enchantment, however, that you do not even hear the warning that Lucius screams to you, and the last memory of living that your soul carries to the netherworld is that of a blinding light and a searing pain, melting your skin and flesh and bones...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The flame of the Spark is strong within you today, and your fingers itch with the desire to channel your magic. + +This is it... this is how it feels to have an adventure! If not for the seriousness of the situation, you would laugh with delight. +> I will grab a sword from a fallen soldier and join them into the fray. +Some strange fever grips you, and you grab a heavy looking sword from one of the fallen. + +Brandishing it in both hands, you roar out a challenge that comes from the heart, and charge the goblins. Suprised by your fierceness, the goblins shrink back from you, and you cut down two of them before they realize it. + + +However, your clothings offer little protection against the barbed knives, and you are soon swarmed by the evil beings. One goblin cuts your sinews from behind, bringing you down to the ground with a scream of rage, and it is only a matter of time before one of the wicked, barbed knives finds the way to your throat and to your heart.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Desperately, you attempt to get your bearing. + +From the twoscore warriors that accompanied the emissary's treck, only one dozen survived the initial deadly volley of black arrows. +However, the guards are rallied and charge the enemy, apparently a group of about half a hundredship ragged looking beings you immediatley recognize as large goblins, led by a couple of their shamans. While a single goblin is no match for a human warrior, the shamans double the goblins' threat, and they make up in numbers what they lack in size. + +Lucius is using his powers over the wind to make arrows useless, and most goblins have thrown their bows away and now wield evil looking barbed knives. + +One guard, trying to charge through the goblins to strike down a shaman, is dragged from his horse, and both the guard and the poor beast soon disappear und the goblin's small twisted bodies. +> I am a magus of Air. +The torrents of Air flow freely through your spirit, and you are determined to use them. + +Strangely, you are rather excited than frightened by the prospect of fighting your very first battle. So this is what adventure feels like! +> I will combine my powers with Lucius, creating gusts of wind to knock down the goblins. +You step beside Lucius, and begin to channel the energies of Air through your body. + +Lucius looks at you, and you nod when he takes control of the flows of magic through your body, adding them to his own. + +With no more archers shooting, Lucius forms a giant fist of air from the winds, and pummeling the group of goblins mercilessly. +Where the two of you strike with your combined magic, the goblins do not stand up again. + +A shaman attempts to cast a counterspell, wrenching the control of the Air around you from Lucius, but he is swatted like a fly, for combined, your magic is too strong to be redirected that easily. + +Lucius is drawing more and more power through you, and you feel the strain of it. + +Suddenly, the bond snaps, and you stare in horror at Lucius' chest, from where an evil looking slender sword is protruding. + +Then, something hits your head, and, added by the strain of working powerful magic, you slip into a thoughtless darkness...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The torrents of Air flow freely through your spirit, and you are determined to use them. + +Strangely, you are rather excited than frightened by the prospect of fighting your very first battle. So this is what adventure feels like! +> will attempt to use my knowledge of illusion to confuse the goblins, so that they turn upon each other. +Swiftly you climb up the coach, to get a better view of the battle. + +Trusting your fellow Air magus Lucius to protect you from the archers, you begin to delve into the minds of the goblins, twisting the images they see until they appear to each other as their enemies. + +Great is the sudden confusion as the goblins, suddenly panicked by the turning of their former companions into more soldiers, begin to hack and claw at each other. + +One shaman, trying to counter your illusions' effects, is stabbed just in time by a panicking goblin. + +The strain to maintain so many, albeit small, illusions is great for you, and after a minute of the frenzied fighting, you sink to your knees, sweatsoaked. + +Suddenly, your concentration is broken by a scream next to you. + +With horror, you see that Lucius has been spitted on an evil looking sword wielded by Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur. + +He lets go of the sword, and turns to you, grinning wickedly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Desperately, you attempt to get your bearing. + +From the twoscore warriors that accompanied the emissary's treck, only one dozen survived the initial deadly volley of black arrows. +However, the guards are rallied and charge the enemy, apparently a group of about half a hundredship ragged looking beings you immediatley recognize as large goblins, led by a couple of their shamans. While a single goblin is no match for a human warrior, the shamans double the goblins' threat, and they make up in numbers what they lack in size. + +Lucius is using his powers over the wind to make arrows useless, and most goblins have thrown their bows away and now wield evil looking barbed knives. + +One guard, trying to charge through the goblins to strike down a shaman, is dragged from his horse, and both the guard and the poor beast soon disappear und the goblin's small twisted bodies. +> I wield the powers of Water. +Water, filling you with peace even in the middle of a bloody battle and allowing you to calmly assess the situation, flows strongly in you. + +Life will be and has been shed, but this is nothing that you can prevent anylonger. You can only hope that it will not be your life, or that of your allies, though that hope already has been betrayed. + +You briefly wonder about J'Arel's death. The goblin shamans cannot be possibly capable of wielding such magic. But the thought quickly eludes you, for you know you have to act fast and decisively if this battle is to be won. +> I will use my healing powers to revive the wounded soldiers. +You scramble up on the coach, to get a better view of the battle. + +To your left, on the ground, is Lucius, protecting you from stray arrows with his power over the winds. + +Closing your eyes, you search for the hidden power in yourself, and, finding it, channel it gently out of your body. + +Touching the soldiers with the invisible strands of magic you invoke, you revive them and draw their pains away. A few of the wounded ones gasp in surprise, as their wounds close themselves, then they notice you, give you a curt nod of thanks, and launch themselves into the fray. + +Whenever the goblins cut down one of the guards, you channel the pure life back into the body of the wounded one. Slowly, the goblins notice that they cannot harm the men, and start to panic. + +However, the strain of keeping the spells flowing through you is tiring, and so you do not manage to keep your concentration when suddenly, Lucius screams in pain. + +Horrified, you see that behind him, Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, has stabbed Lucius in the back with an evil looking sword. +You reach for the strands of Water again to channel life back into the Air adepts' body, but it is already devoid of life... you shiver at the implication of that, for the sword must hold terrible and dark powers to vanquish a life with only a casual thrust. + +Grinning, Farhan lets go of the sword, and turns towards you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Water, filling you with peace even in the middle of a bloody battle and allowing you to calmly assess the situation, flows strongly in you. + +Life will be and has been shed, but this is nothing that you can prevent anylonger. You can only hope that it will not be your life, or that of your allies, though that hope already has been betrayed. + +You briefly wonder about J'Arel's death. The goblin shamans cannot be possibly capable of wielding such magic. But the thought quickly eludes you, for you know you have to act fast and decisively if this battle is to be won. +> I will attempt to strike the enemies with a barrage of magical missiles. +You quickly climb up the coach to get a better view of the battle. + +There, you concentrate briefly and hurl tiny bolts of pure magicka with deadly precision into the horde of goblins. When struck, the goblins fall down never to get up again. + +As the channeling of combat magic is not exactly your specialization, the feat proves to be very taxing. +However, dozens of goblins fall to your small but deadly precise hail. + +The goblins are close to breaking and turn to flee, when suddenly you are distracted by a scream. Lucius, having prevented that you become the target of those goblin archers that have not yet dropped their bow, is spitted on an evil looking sword. + +You give a start when you realize that it is Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, that wields the blade that has stabbed Lucius into the back. + +Grimly, you prepare to channel another two bolts of pure magicka into Farhan's direction, as you remember too late that his bodyguard is always close to him. + +A blow on your head drives thoughts of magic away for quite some time, and darkness engulfs you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Desperately, you attempt to get your bearing. + +From the twoscore warriors that accompanied the emissary's treck, only one dozen survived the initial deadly volley of black arrows. +However, the guards are rallied and charge the enemy, apparently a group of about half a hundredship ragged looking beings you immediatley recognize as large goblins, led by a couple of their shamans. While a single goblin is no match for a human warrior, the shamans double the goblins' threat, and they make up in numbers what they lack in size. + +Lucius is using his powers over the wind to make arrows useless, and most goblins have thrown their bows away and now wield evil looking barbed knives. + +One guard, trying to charge through the goblins to strike down a shaman, is dragged from his horse, and both the guard and the poor beast soon disappear und the goblin's small twisted bodies. +> I am specialized in Ice. +The Spark, for you a crystallized snowflake, burns brightly with cool reassurance deep within you. + +Quickly you assess the situation. + +The goblins outnumber the surviving soldiers four to one, and even without the goblin's magical assistance in form of the their shamans, your guards will not stand a chance. + +The shamans. Hmm. You would be surprised if one of them was capable of casting such a bolt of lightning as struck down J'Arel, and you are rarely surprised by facts. + +So, there must be another magician close by, and someone quite powerful. +> I will attempt to divine the source of the lightning bolt that struck down J'Arel. +Closing your eyes, and trusting that Lucius' winds will shield you from stray arrows, you invoke the ancient runes of Divination, trying to make the magic tell you where the strands of woven magicka, of which the lightning bolt that charred the Fire magus undoubtedly consist, lead to. + +This is a task that requires great concentration for several seconds, but your rigid training helps to fade out the screams of the wounded and dying and the clash of weapons. + +In what is a split second but which feels like an hour to you, your mind picks up the magical weaves of the spell that had been cast, and unravels them. + +You admire the precision and the masterwork, a great lot of energy must have been used up to strike such a powerful bolt of lightning at such precision. + +Your mental fingers follow the invisible strands of magic, and you are suprised to find that the origin of the lightning bolt seems to come from the emissary's coach. + +You open your eyes again and break your spell, unsure as how to deal with this piece of information. Looking towards the battle, you see that the guards are in serious trouble dealing with the goblins. + +You have to act quick. +> I ignore the information, and hurl shards of ice towards the goblins. +With cold fury upon witnessing the slaughter of the guards, you cast out your arms and hands, and hurl shards of ice into the goblin horde, where they explode into tiny slivers that burn with unnatural cold. + +Those goblins that are hit by the large shards themselves fall down never to get up again. Those burned by the cold splinters scream in pain and are swiftly dispatched by the soldiers which have been looking for just an opportunity. + +Two more shards of ice strike down the shamans busily trying to heal their goblin fighters. + +They goblins are close to routing, as suddenly, you sense someone behind you. You turn, and the last thing you hear before your vision fades to black is Lucius' inhuman scream on the other side of the coach...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Closing your eyes, and trusting that Lucius' winds will shield you from stray arrows, you invoke the ancient runes of Divination, trying to make the magic tell you where the strands of woven magicka, of which the lightning bolt that charred the Fire magus undoubtedly consist, lead to. + +This is a task that requires great concentration for several seconds, but your rigid training helps to fade out the screams of the wounded and dying and the clash of weapons. + +In what is a split second but which feels like an hour to you, your mind picks up the magical weaves of the spell that had been cast, and unravels them. + +You admire the precision and the masterwork, a great lot of energy must have been used up to strike such a powerful bolt of lightning at such precision. + +Your mental fingers follow the invisible strands of magic, and you are suprised to find that the origin of the lightning bolt seems to come from the emissary's coach. + +You open your eyes again and break your spell, unsure as how to deal with this piece of information. Looking towards the battle, you see that the guards are in serious trouble dealing with the goblins. + +You have to act quick. +> I ignore the information, and cause the ground under the goblins' feet to turn to ice, so that they stumble and fall. +You climb up on the coach, which is the best strategical position you can hope to achieve. + +Lucius is protecting you from any stray arrows with his command over Air, and from here, you have the best overview. + +You study the patterns of the goblin horde for a second, and then reach into yourself to draw out the powers that the Spark grants you. + +Mumbling the necessary incantations and pointing your fingers at the fight, you allow the magical energies to escape your body and channel them to the ground below. + +Your efforts are rewarded by a cry out outrage, as the first goblin slips and stabs itself on the knife of a companion. This causes a chainreaction, from which the guards of the treck unfortunately are not unaffected, yet their armor protects them from the flailing, now unprecise stings of the goblins' knives. + +Lucius, seeing what you have done, directs his winds to topple the remaining standing goblins, and keeping those down that try to righten themselves again, and the guards begin to easily dispatch their smaller enemies. + +But suddenly, Lucius' screams in anguish, louder than the shrieks of the panicking goblins, and as you turn to him in surprise, you see that Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, has stabbed Lucius in the back with an evil looking sword. + +You are unsure of the meaning of this, a situation you are not used to, but you decide to prepare a spell against Farhan when you see his malicious grin as he turns towards you, leaving his sword sticking in Lucius' crumpled body.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Closing your eyes, and trusting that Lucius' winds will shield you from stray arrows, you invoke the ancient runes of Divination, trying to make the magic tell you where the strands of woven magicka, of which the lightning bolt that charred the Fire magus undoubtedly consist, lead to. + +This is a task that requires great concentration for several seconds, but your rigid training helps to fade out the screams of the wounded and dying and the clash of weapons. + +In what is a split second but which feels like an hour to you, your mind picks up the magical weaves of the spell that had been cast, and unravels them. + +You admire the precision and the masterwork, a great lot of energy must have been used up to strike such a powerful bolt of lightning at such precision. + +Your mental fingers follow the invisible strands of magic, and you are suprised to find that the origin of the lightning bolt seems to come from the emissary's coach. + +You open your eyes again and break your spell, unsure as how to deal with this piece of information. Looking towards the battle, you see that the guards are in serious trouble dealing with the goblins. + +You have to act quick. +> I will investigate the emissary's coach. +As you approach the coach, oblivious to the screams for mercy from the battle, the coach's door is openend. + +Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, exits the coach, brandishing an evil looking, black sword. Directly behind him is his bodyguard, a nondescript man you would not give a second glance on a street, who looks startled at you. + +Behind you, you hear Lucius scream, as a small group of goblins throw themselves at the magus, and as you are about to turn, Farhan's bodyguard is behind you with three quick steps, and then, with a stinging pain on your neck, your senses fade to darkness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Desperately, you attempt to get your bearing. + +From the twoscore warriors that accompanied the emissary's treck, only one dozen survived the initial deadly volley of black arrows. +However, the guards are rallied and charge the enemy, apparently a group of about half a hundredship ragged looking beings you immediatley recognize as large goblins, led by a couple of their shamans. While a single goblin is no match for a human warrior, the shamans double the goblins' threat, and they make up in numbers what they lack in size. + +Lucius is using his powers over the wind to make arrows useless, and most goblins have thrown their bows away and now wield evil looking barbed knives. + +One guard, trying to charge through the goblins to strike down a shaman, is dragged from his horse, and both the guard and the poor beast soon disappear und the goblin's small twisted bodies. +> The powers of Earth are mine to command. +The rythm of nature, which for you manifests in the Spark, is strong in you. + +The Earth will be watered with blood, and there is nothing you can do to prevent this. +However, you can still protect those of your allies that have not yet fallen, and you are determined to see that victory, even against the odds, is yours. +> I will enchant the guards with the protection of Earth. +Trusting Lucius to deflect the stray arrows directed at you with his command over Air, you scramble clumsily up the top of the coach, to get a better overview of the battlefield. + +The fighting looks grim, all of the remaining handful of guards are bleeding from dozens of wounds, while the goblin shamans take care that many of those goblins cut down leap back on their feet. + +Determined, you act quickly, closing your eyes and drawing the powers from the bowels of the +Earth herself, channeling it gently up the guards' bodies, turning their skin hard as iron. + +The guards, at first surprised that the goblins' knives seem to be deflected by their suddenly hard skin, renew the ferocity of their attacks, and the goblin shamans cannot heal their companions quick enough. + +It is rather difficult for you to command so many weaves at once, for every time one of your fellow soldiers is hit, it saps a bit of your mental powers to upkeep the enchantment, but you are determined not to let another of your companions fall to the wicked goblin blades. + +The goblins, suddenly facing an enemy they cannot hope to defeat, are close to breaking point, when suddenly, your concentration is broken by a terrible scream. + +You turn your attention towards Lucius, and see, to your horror, that your companion and friend is spitted on a black and evil looking sword wielded by Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur. + +With the sword's tip coming through his chest, Lucius falls openmouthed and -eyed on the ground, and Master Brownhand lets go of the blade, and turns with a wicked grin towards you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The rythm of nature, which for you manifests in the Spark, is strong in you. + +The Earth will be watered with blood, and there is nothing you can do to prevent this. +However, you can still protect those of your allies that have not yet fallen, and you are determined to see that victory, even against the odds, is yours. +> I will send a call to the animals of the hills and plains to come and assist us. +Leaning against one side of the coach, you close your eyes and send out a call of help to all things attuned to Earth. + +You project your own image, and that off the goblins, stinking, poisoning the earth with their mere foul existence. + +And your call is answered. + +Suddenly, a howl errupts from the hills, a group of wolves coming for a brother in need. Both the goblins and the guards, engulfed in deadly close combat, appear to be startled by the cries of the wolves, but they quickly catch themselves again. + +Then, the first goblin shaman is brought down with a single, powerful bite in the neck by a large, black wolf, who you easily identify as the leader of the pack. + +You channel your powers of earth to deflect the goblins' knives from the hides of your friends, both animal and human, and the few surviving goblins turn to flee after a mere minute, as more and more wolves join the battle. + +The wolves turn to pursuit the foul creatures, but not before the large black wolf catches your eyes and emits a deep growl. You understand perfectly: Brothers are there for each other, but this is a mutual responsibility. With this, the pack leader turns off to follow the rest of the pack, leaving the dazzled guards behind. + +You move towards the fallen, seeing if you can do anything about their wounds, when suddenly Lucius screams with pain, and suddenly, your vision fades to black when something hard and heavy hits your head... from behind... +> Continue... +You are not dead, and you are quite sure of it, because you always heared of death being somewhat of a peaceful slumber. Instead, your head feels like it is going to explode every second now, the world appears to be one of those carroussels you have visited once on a fair near the Academy, and if your stomach wasn't empty already, it would soon be. + +With a groan you open one of your eyes, only to find that the world not only spins like a carroussel, but the flashing lights that dance before your vision also appear to be like the fireworks that often accompany the fairs. + +You have no idea how long you were left there lieing, but when you open your eyes again, you stare into a horrific face, swollen and blurred like a nightmare come true. + +You gasp and wrench from the hands that suddenly grasp your shoulders, only to find that the sudden movement brings an explosion of pain so far unknown to you into your head, and you cannot help but twist to one side, assisted by the hands, and empty your stomach for good, even though all that comes from it is blood and bile, each spasm calling forth another explosion of pain that makes you wish you were, in fact, dead. + +A voice calls something you do not understand, and something cold splashes your face. + +When the spasms stop and the pain subside to barely above tolerable levels again, someone holds a wineskin to your mouth, and greedily you take a gulp, only to choke at the brandy that is now in your mouth. + +Coughing, and wincing, you try to sit up, and are assisted once again by the strong hands. You look at who is holding you, and finally, through the tears of pain, your vision clears and you recognize the scarred and bearded face of one of the soldiers who looks at you with some concern. + +"Some concussion y'got there, lad", he greets you. + +An hour later, when you feel well enough to stand up again, though somewhat shaky - the brandy helped greatly to settle your stomach, there must have been something in it - you take in the scenery. + +Only three guards - and yourself - survived, but the goblins were nearly decimated, and the few survivors fled, followed by the wolves you summoned, the scarred man adds with a sideglance at you. + +Lucius Tarchild and J'Arel Whitefang are both dead, J'Arel obviously the luckier of the two. + +Both were apparently killed by Farhan Brownhand, the emissary of Alzur, the scarred guard that woke you reports with a scowl. He interrupts his talking, and turns to spit on the ground. + +Master Whitefang was slain by a bolt of lightning summoned by Master Brownhand, and Master Tarchild was slain by a darkly enchanted sword the emissary wielded when he attacked the magus. + +For some reason, the emissary obviously was in league with the goblin horde, and wanted the trek to be exterminated. However, the guards - with the help of the black wolf's pack - managed to overcome the goblins in time, and faced by the remaining guards, Farhan slew most of them with his magic and then turned to flee. + +Why he did this, the scarred man, who is named Kor, the guards never knew, but they suspect some dark treachery. + + +You have been unconcious for more than three hours, and it is high time to break the camp, in case Farhan, rested, returns to finish the work the goblins began. + +The animals that drew the coaches are either dead or fled during the ambush, and you have little choice but to leave the place by foot in the twilight that announces nightfall. + +Kor, obviously a seasoned veteran, is about to order the remaining guards to pack, when he hesitates a moment to look at you. + +Suddenly, a growl makes both of you look around. + +The black wolf, a majestic animal, is standing at the corner of the battlefield. + +One of the guards warily raises his weapon, but you call him to drop it. Ignoring the guard, the wolf casually and gracefully steps up to you. + +He sniffs the air, then turns and heads of to the hills, turning his head just once to see if you follow him, then turns again to walk away. + +Kor and the other two stare after him with distrust in their eyes.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Lucius is a tall, slender man. There is always the sly grin on his face, and his hair looks like he has been in a tornado. + +Right now, looking at J'Arel and you, his grin nearly splits his face, causing J'Arel to scowl back. + +"Well, look who's here. Not suffocated yet, I hope", Lucius grins. J'Arel only snorts with disdain, throwing you a meaningful look as if the journey would have been quite pleasant without your companionship inside the coach. + +Before you can think of how to answer that challenge, Lucius continues as if not noticing the tension between the two of you: "Looks like we got ourselves some trouble coming. The captain of the scouts just raced his horse nearly to death coming here, then barely pauses to take a breath before arguing with old Farhan. Seems like they want us to make camp here, instead of driving on, but Farhan doesn't sound too happy about that." + +Lucius gives the countryside an appraising glance. + +"Can't say I blame them. It's a good position here, with the hills in front and the plains at the back. At least if anyone's sneaking up on us, they're doing so from only one direction." + +J'Arel interrupts: "Phah, let them come, so we can finally have some use. I don't see why..." + +Lucius holds up a hand to silence J'Arel, cocking his head to one side and closing his eyes, as if listening intently. + +As you strain to hear anything untowards yourself, you notice it... the silence is unnatural. Where the journey was accompanied by the rustling of leaves and grass, the chirping and buzzing of insects and the caws of birds, there is now silence... even the horses of the guards seem to hold their breath. + +Then suddenly the first volley of arrows hit the group. Lucius curses and hurls himself into the relative but crowded safety of the coach, but a few of the guards do not have as much luck. +The air is filled with the rearing of horses and the screams of the wounded. The captain of the scouts turns to face the enemy, but gives only a gurgle, as you can see the black arrow protruding from his neck. + +Blood runs out of his mouth, and for a horrifying second, he seems to stare at you with the paincrazed eyes of the already dead, before falling from his horse only to be gored by the panicking beast. + +When you catch yourself again, you see that J'Arel and Lucius are already preparing spells, even if they cannot yet see who is attacking you. +> I will leave the coach, weaving offensive magic to support the guards. +As J'Arel, suddenly engulfed in a flaming aura, leaps out of the coach, you take the exit on the other side. + +Immediatley you find yourself dodging panicked horses and stray arrows. Before you get your bearing, a loud crackle is heared, and something like lightning seems to strike nearby. A piercing scream barely recognizable as human tells you that the lightning must have found a target - it came from J'Arel's side of the coach.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Lucius is a tall, slender man. There is always the sly grin on his face, and his hair looks like he has been in a tornado. + +Right now, looking at J'Arel and you, his grin nearly splits his face, causing J'Arel to scowl back. + +"Well, look who's here. Not suffocated yet, I hope", Lucius grins. J'Arel only snorts with disdain, throwing you a meaningful look as if the journey would have been quite pleasant without your companionship inside the coach. + +Before you can think of how to answer that challenge, Lucius continues as if not noticing the tension between the two of you: "Looks like we got ourselves some trouble coming. The captain of the scouts just raced his horse nearly to death coming here, then barely pauses to take a breath before arguing with old Farhan. Seems like they want us to make camp here, instead of driving on, but Farhan doesn't sound too happy about that." + +Lucius gives the countryside an appraising glance. + +"Can't say I blame them. It's a good position here, with the hills in front and the plains at the back. At least if anyone's sneaking up on us, they're doing so from only one direction." + +J'Arel interrupts: "Phah, let them come, so we can finally have some use. I don't see why..." + +Lucius holds up a hand to silence J'Arel, cocking his head to one side and closing his eyes, as if listening intently. + +As you strain to hear anything untowards yourself, you notice it... the silence is unnatural. Where the journey was accompanied by the rustling of leaves and grass, the chirping and buzzing of insects and the caws of birds, there is now silence... even the horses of the guards seem to hold their breath. + +Then suddenly the first volley of arrows hit the group. Lucius curses and hurls himself into the relative but crowded safety of the coach, but a few of the guards do not have as much luck. +The air is filled with the rearing of horses and the screams of the wounded. The captain of the scouts turns to face the enemy, but gives only a gurgle, as you can see the black arrow protruding from his neck. + +Blood runs out of his mouth, and for a horrifying second, he seems to stare at you with the paincrazed eyes of the already dead, before falling from his horse only to be gored by the panicking beast. + +When you catch yourself again, you see that J'Arel and Lucius are already preparing spells, even if they cannot yet see who is attacking you. +> I will stay in the coach, preparing defensive spells before joining the fray. +Lucius and J'Arel both leap out of the coach, the Air magus to the left, and J'Arel to the right. + +You prepare to cast a minor enchantment to ward blows and strayed arrows on yourself, feeling that you do not have the time for more. + +J'Arel is already hurling fiery balls of flame into the general direction the surviving soldiers are charging, and when sudden gusts of wind rock the coach, you know that Lucius is busy trying to prevent the arrows finding their targets. + +As you close your eyes to murmur the final incantation, something incredible bright strikes close to you with loud thunder and a pierced scream, and when you open your eyes again, you see that where J'Arel stood, the ground is charred. + +Not waiting any longer, you leap out of the coach.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Suddenly, the coach shudders to a halt. Voices call out, but your first reaction of worrying is soothed as you recognize them as your scouts' voices. + +The captain of the scouts, a burly man in leather armor, approaches the second coach, which is occupied by Master Brownhand, the emissary of Alzura. The captain dismounts his gelding, and appears to speak agitatedly with someone inside the coach - which is all you can make out. Unfortunately, they are too far away to understand a word. +> I will cast a minor spell which allows the air to carry the sound to my ear. [You can do that even without being specialized in Air.] +You mouth the charm to cause the wind carrying the syllables of the captain to your ear. + +"...tracks! But did no follow 'em. 's gettin' dark in four hours, now jez be campin now, afore we getta beatin", the captain of the scouts says. +You cannot make out the full reply, only catching a few words: "...plan... alliance with... no harm come... not bandits..." + +Then you notice that J'Arel is staring at you with unhidden curiousity, and are just about to comment, when Lucius, who had been riding on the top of the coach, opens the door and breaks your concentration sufficently to drop the spell.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>J'Arel looks up from some thought in surprise, as you cough to catch his attention. His cruel eyes narrow themselves, and he pierces you with his look. + +"What is it that you want?" +> "I don't think I like your attitude, J'Arel." +"I don't think I like your attidue, J'Arel", you reply. + +J'Arel only snorts, and answers: +"And this would be your problem, or mine?" + +You choke back the angry answer that lies on your tongue. After all, you are supposed to guard the emissary in case of an attack, and not squabble with a fellow magician. + +With a dirty glance towards J'Arel, you decide to let the point rest for now.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>J'Arel looks up from some thought in surprise, as you cough to catch his attention. His cruel eyes narrow themselves, and he pierces you with his look. + +"What is it that you want?" +> "Can you tell me anything about the emissary?" +"Less than you, I suppose," J'Arel answers, then sighs and shakes his head. +"I heared he's a powerful mage himself. I don't know why we're to accompany him, Master Brownhand is said to be capable of taking care of himself." + +"If I were you, I would rather worry about the road that lies ahead than about or passengers. The road will be getting a lot worse the next days, and when we reach the outskirts of Thalun Forest in two days, who knows what will await us in these ancient, dark and magical woods..." His voice is getting dark and foreboding, and then he suddenly breaks into laughter. + +"Peasants' superstition. Likely some bandits roam the Woods, and that's the reason why lone travellers sometimes are never seen again." + +He grins, and forms a magical gesture with his left palm, upon which a blueish flame appears there, a ball of pure energy powerful enough to burn through a tree when hurled with enough force. + +"However, we are no lone travellers", he adds, his malicious grin broadening. Then, he claps his hands together, and the flame vanishes. + +"I doubt that some ragged band of bandits is going to choose us as our target anyway," he says, sounding disappointed. "Those soldiers look like excellent fighters, and I am certain the bandits will see this as well."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It is early summer in the world of Thyr, and the smell of spring has not yet left the air. + +The emmissary's trek consists of two coaches, one for the magicians, of which there are two more on board, and one for the emissary and his bodyguard himself. Furthermore, there are two dozens warriors on horse accompanying the trek, some of which are scouting ahead. + +It has been two days since you left the Academy of Alzur, and by now you have left the city's military influence, as can be witnessed by the steady growing worse of the road. + +You know close to nothing about Fahan Brownhand's - the emissary of Alzur - orders, or about the man himself, save that he is known to be a devious mind and a quick judge of character, abilities well received within a politician. + +Also you know that your trek is carrying valuable gifts in jewels and gold for Khalar, the citystate you are destined to reach within the week. + +Your two magician-companions are no strangers to you. Opposite of you is sitting J'Arel Whitefang, a young man emitting an aura of arrogance that is barely to bear in the confines of the coach. He is, as you know, a capable Fire elementalist. + +Currently on top of the coach, unable to bear the presence of J'Arel any longer, is Lucius Tarchild, an Air mage of some renown. Unfortunately, Lucius is somewhat senior to you, and thus he has the right of first choice, as he explained to you with a wink. +Already weary by the long trip so far, you did not argue. +> I will use the time to study the landscape, as I have never been so far from Alzura before. +There are fewer and fewer fields with toiling peasants, this far away from Alzur's protecting arms. The road snakes through terrain that is, plain spoken, rather boring. + +Your thirst for adventure is already seriously dampened - the coach, while preferable to a day on horseback, simply does not beat walking. Anyhow, through the smallish windows, you cannot see much anyway. + +Sighing, you turn away from the plain fields, and wish for a book. However, the librarians of the Academy, while usually rather lenient when it came to you, were firm on the fact that no books would leave Alzur. Most likely, they were worried that in foreign lands, people would eat books. + +You cannot stiffle your curiousity how the city of Khofte looks like. But that is still a good week ahead, and you suppose that you are dead by boredom until then.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This is no way to live. + +Working on a barely profitable rundown farm with far too many family members to feed. It’s a damn good thing you’re an excellent hunter. However, lately there’s even been a shortage of game to thwart your efforts. + +You didn’t really want to be working on the farm your whole life in the first place, you wanted to see the world but when dad died, things got a lot harder for the family and you had to take over as “man” of the house and stay put. + +Something is going to have to change. + +While you’d like nothing more than to go through with your childhood dreams of becoming a traveling bard without any responsibility you don’t have that luxury. Hell, you barely have time to play your lute anymore in the small amount of free time you do have. You doubt if you’d even be good enough to make a living for just yourself doing it. + +But you need to get away, but what can you do that won’t allow you to completely abandon your mom and all your brothers and sisters? + +You suddenly think of the choice that many in your desperate position have thought of many times before. + +The army. + +Its not exactly ideal, but you be traveling and seeing the world so to speak. You’d also be making enough money that you could send to your family. Your own living expenses would be provided for by the army. + +Of course there’s all that fighting that usually goes along with it that you’re not to keen on. Not that you aren’t a stranger to battle as their have been the occasional bandits or kobold thieves that have attempted to steal from the farm in the past, but you prefer not to fight if possible, especially not up close. The bow has always been your weapon of choice. There’s also the matter of mass combat on a grand scale that usually accompanies army life. A lot different than chasing away some thieves in the chicken coop. + +As you’re thinking about this, you also realize that there is another option. There’s a small mercenary company passing through the area. They’ve been hanging out at the local tavern for a couple days. They don’t seem to be the noblest sort from what you can tell, but fortunately they seem to have kept their revelry confined to the tavern. Who knows how they act away from “civilization” though. + +Still, it’s something to consider. There probably is less attention to discipline and a little more relaxed on rules and regulations. You probably wouldn’t be fighting in some mass land war that governments are fond of waging. Mercenaries travel a lot and tend to make more, however they tend to get hired for a lot weirder jobs, usually ones that the employer doesn’t want people to know about or ones that nobody else seems to be able to handle. +> Enlist in the army +Well, as much as you’re going to hate the whole uniform thing, you’d rather there be some sort of guidelines. The mercenaries look like a rough bunch. You get the impression +you’d have to be watching your back as much as your enemies if you signed up with them. + +You explain your decision to join the army to the family one night at dinner. Your revelation comes as a shock. Your smaller brothers and sisters don’t want you to go, your +brother Mallack really doesn’t want you to leave since he’ll be next in line to take the brunt of the manual labor! + +Your mother surprises you as much as you surprised everyone else. You expected her to be the most vocal about you not leaving, but she sees that this would help out the family. She gives her blessing. + +Before you leave the next day with your packed belongings, your whole family comes to say goodbye to you. You almost hesitate to leave, wondering if it would actually be better for you to stay, but your mother urges you on. + +“Don’t worry! Mallack is old enough to take over your responsibilities on the farm. He’s not quite as skilled of a hunter, but he’ll be able to do it. I’ve always known that you’ve had a desire to travel. The army isn’t an ideal life I hope you realize though.” Your mom says. +“Yeah, I know, but I’ve thought it through.” +“Very well, you’re old enough to make your own decisions and live your own life, though I’m glad to see that you still want to help the family as opposed to just leaving in the middle of the night.” +“I’ll start sending money as soon as possible. I’ll also try to write and visit when I can.” +“I know…okay, you best get going. It’s still quite a walk to the capitol.” + +You begin to leave the farm as your family wave goodbye to you in the distance. + +Soon you’re on the road to your nation’s capitol. You’ve been to Zal once before a long time ago with your dad when he was trying to sell some kobold eyes to an alchemist there. You remember being overwhelmed with how many people lived there and how big it was. You always did want to go there again one day; you just didn’t think it would be to enlist in the army. + +Eventually you arrive at Zal. The place is even bigger than the last time you came here. So much has changed and you’re a little overwhelmed. You don’t have any knowledge of the city so you ask the gate guard who is giving a watchful look to everyone coming in and out. + +“Excuse me…” +”Whadda ya want peasant? I’m busy! Market square is three blocks down as soon as you get inside the gate here!” The guard snaps. +“No, I was wondering where I could enlist in the army.” + +The guard seems to change his tone to a somewhat more cordial tone. + +“Oh I see. Well, as soon as you go through the gate, take a left, and walk two blocks. The recruiting office is on the right hand side across from a general store.” + +You thank him and proceed, but you can’t help overhearing the guard laughing to his buddy as you walk away. You don’t make out all of it, but “Dumb fucking hayseed peasant.” was definitely in there. + +At last you arrive at the recruiting office. The man sitting at the desk looks bored at first, but perks up a bit when he sees you. + +“Well now, this is a nice break in the monotony. Have a seat.” +“I want to enlist in the army.” +“Well of course you do son, why else would you be here? To join the Zalan Empire’s best right? Okay, but before we start I need to ask you some questions just so we can get a feel of where we think you’ll best serve in the Emperor’s glorious army.” +“Uh, okay.” +“Good, so where are you from son? You certainly don’t look like you’re from the city here. You look like a farmer.” +“Well I sort of am sir. My family owns a farm a couple miles from the city, I decided to enlist to help my family monetarily. Times are hard on the farm.” +“Mmm, noble of you. Your sense of duty will also serve you well too. Any combat experience?” +“Some, but nothing major I’m afraid. A few bandits. Kobolds in the chicken coop. That’s about it.” +“Don’t worry you’ll learn to be a killing machine, but your past experience are more than some we’ve recruited. Any other talents?” +“Besides farming? Um…I’m a good hunter, I use this bow all the time!” you say and show the recruiter your worn bow. +“Good. Good. We can always use good marksmen. But you’ll get the chance to use a better bow than that old thing you’ve been carrying around. What’s that other thing on your back?” +“Oh this? Well this is my uh lute.” +“Lute? Ha ha! You a bard or something?” +“Well not really, but…” +“You planning on charming the enemies with your music?” +“Uh…” you say begin to get a little anxious. +“Hah! Settle down son, I’m just messing with you. But I’m afraid whatever your musical hobbies may be you’ll most likely be abandoning them. Can’t be picking your lute while an angry ogre is charging at you or you’re storming a castle. This is the army, not an entertainment company!” + +The recruiter at this point begins to look through some papers and grabs one after looking it over. + +“Ah. Here it is…you know how to read and write?” +“YES!” you say indignantly for the first time. +“Okay, okay, don’t get testy. Its just most of you peasant farmer types don’t. Anyway just sign here and we’ll get you started on your basic training.” + +You take the paper, and give it a pointless look over like you actually understand all the legal mumbo jumbo and sign. The recruiter takes the paper from you and then shakes your hand. + +“Congratulations son! You’re in the Zalan Army now! The best damn one in this world!” + +Somehow he’s more enthusiastic than you are… +> It's boot camp for you! +6 months pass… + +Six months of the most grueling physical training you’ve ever had the misfortune of dealing with! However you fared better than some of your fellow cadets. Guess all that farm living paid off. + +You’ve certainly improved what combat skills you had, but your marksmanship has improved greatly. You know that Drill Sergeant Kosser has been paying special attention to your abilities. You’re not sure if that’s a good thing of not. + +In any event you’re being told where your first assignment is going to be. Most of those in your group are being sent to Tulan border. Not the most pleasant assignment. The fighting is getting worse there. + +What started as a minor border dispute has turned into a series of battles with neither side making too much progress. Even before you joined the military you’d heard stories of the greedy king who runs the Tulan Kingdom. You heard from traveling merchants about how he allows a few demons to walk around in his lands! Utter madness in your opinion. The Zalan Empire might be a little strict on the rules and regulations, but better that than demons letting walking around, in your opinion they should all be killed on sight regardless on whether they’re obeying the “law” or not, they’re evil. + +You sit anxious on your bed in the barracks as name after name gets called off. Finally Kosser calls off your name, and you fully expect to get sent to the Tulan border. + +“I want to talk to you in private.” Is what you hear instead. + +This makes you even more nervous. What’s he going to do? Send you on? A mission to assassinate the Tulan King? + +After everyone else has gotten there assignments you follow Kosser back to his office. He sits down and speaks direct. + +“Alright farmboy, I’m sure you’ve noticed me watching your marksmanship skills. You’re one of the best ones that have come in here for awhile. You have a natural talent and you’ve only improved it through training. It would be a blessing to have someone like you up at the Tulan border. The gods know we could use anything to help break the stalemate there.” +“…but?” you ask hoping that there is one. +“But…your skills might be better served in a place that has a better mortality rate, yet still needs taking care of.” +“Where’s that sir?” +“Here.” Kosser points to a map to a nearby location. It’s the Retlad Kingdom. You can’t imagine what’s going on there, since as far as you know, you’re Zalan is at peace with them. +“Retlad? I thought we’re at peace with them?” +“We are…in fact rumors are saying we’ll probably incorporate them into the empire in the near future. I dunno how much you know about politics out there on the farm, but Retlad is basically a bankrupt kingdom. Their dumb ass royalty spent a shitload of their treasury on building ships in some vain attempt to find more land mass on this world. Hah! Doesn’t exist! We learned than centuries ago! Anyway now they don’t have enough to pay for a proper military and their kingdom is being overrun by hostile Quillar tribes. They want us to help. Begging us practically and we have, but it’s a pain in the ass. Quillars are fast and as their name suggests shoot multiple sharp quills at their enemies. I’ve seen them go through plate armor.” +“That doesn’t sound good.” +“No, it’s not good. The Retlad knight orders got decimated within two months of the first invasion wave. We’re taking a better approach. We need to have equally quick troops that can at least match the fire power. We’ve sent a couple of war wizards, but most of them are serving on the Tulan border. Gunpower weapons are a little too slow for this sort of thing, so we’re looking for people good with a bow. Quick enough to at least get a few shots off from a distance and run. Because hit and run tactics are what the Quillars excel at, so you’ll have to do likewise.” + +Kosser pauses his talking for a moment. You take this opportunity to interject a question. + +“And this assignment you say has a lower mortality rate?” +“Well, we haven’t sent as many people there yet, but so far we’ve made a little more progress there than at the Tulan border. But of course I won’t say it’s a safe assignment. Those Quillar bastards are vicious and merciless. Up to you farmboy. You’re getting a bonus here. You’re actually getting to choose your assignment. Not many that get out of boot camp get that privilege.” + +Some “privilege” +> Go to the Tulan Border +You don’t like the sound of the Quillars and it doesn’t really sound all that much safer. You decide that at the Tulan border you’ll at least be with a few people you already know from boot camp and you’ll be fighting something less scary. (Or at least human) + +“I’ll take the Tulan Border assignment sir.” +“Hm, I’m surprised. Hope your skills come in of some use there. Here’s your first month’s pay, I suggest you live it up here in Zal, for the couple of days you have off before you leave.” + +You take the small bag and look inside. This will certainly help your family. You take a few coins for yourself and then ask if arrangements can be made to have your payment sent to your family from now on. He tells you yes, but asks that surely that you will still want some of it. You agree to just taking 10% of it. You don’t need much. + +“Sheesh, living bare minimum huh? Don’t you want to eat anything other than military rations every once in awhile?” Kosser questions again. +“Nah. If I need extra food, I’ll just hunt.” +“You know there aren’t many luxuries on the border, but when a traveling merchant shows up, you might regret not having enough money. You sure you don’t want more?” +“Nope. I’ll be fine. My family needs that money more than I do.” +“Alright then, family man.” + +You exit the barracks and wander the city a bit. You find it very interesting. You sort of wish you could stay longer to take in more sights. However one thing catches your eye. A small store and in the window is a lute. Looks almost like the one you had before it was taken away from you in basic training. You haven’t gotten a chance to play in six months and you’d really like to… + +Hey you’re a soldier now, you’ve proven yourself. You figure you can take one personal belonging with you to Tulan as long as you keep them packed properly. You enter the store and with the little money you have you buy the lute. You spend the most of the day and the next practicing it. You didn’t forget as much as you thought. You also finish up writing a letter to your family and give it to a Zalan messenger carrier. + +Finally the third day arrives for you to move out. A couple of officers arrive to take all of you. You’re stopped though as you’re picked out. + +“Hold up you. What’s that?” +“It’s a lute sir.” +“A lute? What the fuck do you think this is? An acting company? Get rid of that thing, you won’t be needing that where you’re going!” +“But…” +“You disobeying me soldier?” +“No sir!” +“Alright then, get rid of it!” + +You sadly get rid of your lute which you never got to play and basically wasted your money on. You don’t know what you were thinking anyway. You’re in the damn army. You’re going to be doing a lot of fighting and all of that, not playing some stupid instrument. You should’ve realized that the first time it was taken away from you in boot camp. + +You’ve made this choice; you need to just put these dreams of being a “musician” out of your head right now. You weren’t meant to be one, and all those years of deluding yourself in between real work were just fleeting dreams of a teenager. Time to grow up. + +While you resign yourself to this mindset, you aren’t particularly happy with it. When you get to the Tulan Border you’re even less happy. Your first battle is filled with all the bad stuff that usually accompanies such things. It’s definitely not a fun assignment and your only consolation is that you know your family is getting more financial aid for you doing this. + +After a few months, you’re absolutely miserable. You don’t have your music to keep your mind off of the conditions and everything is bad here. The fort you’re currently stationed at supplies only the bare minimum of living, no magical back up, the captain is a real asshole and the rest of those you serve with aren’t too much better. Though so many are killed everyday that you never really grow to dislike (or like) anyone that much in that department. More are sent in and more die, it’s like an ongoing cycle, everyone’s so expendable in this ongoing border war that gets worse with each passing month. + +It doesn’t even come to your surprise when the day comes that you’re mortally wounded while on patrol. One of the new soldiers tells you to hold on and that he’ll get help, but you know he won’t get any in time and it wouldn’t matter anyway. + +As you lay dying, your only regret is that you didn’t get to play music like you always wanted to, and now you never will.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>6 months pass… + +Six months of the most grueling physical training you’ve ever had the misfortune of dealing with! However you fared better than some of your fellow cadets. Guess all that farm living paid off. + +You’ve certainly improved what combat skills you had, but your marksmanship has improved greatly. You know that Drill Sergeant Kosser has been paying special attention to your abilities. You’re not sure if that’s a good thing of not. + +In any event you’re being told where your first assignment is going to be. Most of those in your group are being sent to Tulan border. Not the most pleasant assignment. The fighting is getting worse there. + +What started as a minor border dispute has turned into a series of battles with neither side making too much progress. Even before you joined the military you’d heard stories of the greedy king who runs the Tulan Kingdom. You heard from traveling merchants about how he allows a few demons to walk around in his lands! Utter madness in your opinion. The Zalan Empire might be a little strict on the rules and regulations, but better that than demons letting walking around, in your opinion they should all be killed on sight regardless on whether they’re obeying the “law” or not, they’re evil. + +You sit anxious on your bed in the barracks as name after name gets called off. Finally Kosser calls off your name, and you fully expect to get sent to the Tulan border. + +“I want to talk to you in private.” Is what you hear instead. + +This makes you even more nervous. What’s he going to do? Send you on? A mission to assassinate the Tulan King? + +After everyone else has gotten there assignments you follow Kosser back to his office. He sits down and speaks direct. + +“Alright farmboy, I’m sure you’ve noticed me watching your marksmanship skills. You’re one of the best ones that have come in here for awhile. You have a natural talent and you’ve only improved it through training. It would be a blessing to have someone like you up at the Tulan border. The gods know we could use anything to help break the stalemate there.” +“…but?” you ask hoping that there is one. +“But…your skills might be better served in a place that has a better mortality rate, yet still needs taking care of.” +“Where’s that sir?” +“Here.” Kosser points to a map to a nearby location. It’s the Retlad Kingdom. You can’t imagine what’s going on there, since as far as you know, you’re Zalan is at peace with them. +“Retlad? I thought we’re at peace with them?” +“We are…in fact rumors are saying we’ll probably incorporate them into the empire in the near future. I dunno how much you know about politics out there on the farm, but Retlad is basically a bankrupt kingdom. Their dumb ass royalty spent a shitload of their treasury on building ships in some vain attempt to find more land mass on this world. Hah! Doesn’t exist! We learned than centuries ago! Anyway now they don’t have enough to pay for a proper military and their kingdom is being overrun by hostile Quillar tribes. They want us to help. Begging us practically and we have, but it’s a pain in the ass. Quillars are fast and as their name suggests shoot multiple sharp quills at their enemies. I’ve seen them go through plate armor.” +“That doesn’t sound good.” +“No, it’s not good. The Retlad knight orders got decimated within two months of the first invasion wave. We’re taking a better approach. We need to have equally quick troops that can at least match the fire power. We’ve sent a couple of war wizards, but most of them are serving on the Tulan border. Gunpower weapons are a little too slow for this sort of thing, so we’re looking for people good with a bow. Quick enough to at least get a few shots off from a distance and run. Because hit and run tactics are what the Quillars excel at, so you’ll have to do likewise.” + +Kosser pauses his talking for a moment. You take this opportunity to interject a question. + +“And this assignment you say has a lower mortality rate?” +“Well, we haven’t sent as many people there yet, but so far we’ve made a little more progress there than at the Tulan border. But of course I won’t say it’s a safe assignment. Those Quillar bastards are vicious and merciless. Up to you farmboy. You’re getting a bonus here. You’re actually getting to choose your assignment. Not many that get out of boot camp get that privilege.” + +Some “privilege” +> Go to the Retlad Kingdom +You’ve never even heard of Quillars before, but they still sound less dangerous than the Tulan Border, that place is only going to get worse, you know it. + +“I’ll take the Retlad assignment sir.” +“Hm. Smart. Here’s your first month’s pay, I suggest you live it up here in Zal, for the couple of days you have off before you leave.” + +You take the small bag and look inside. This will certainly help your family. You take a few coins for yourself and then ask if arrangements can be made to have your payment sent to your family from now on. He tells you yes, but asks that surely that you will still want some of it. You agree to just taking 10% of it. You don’t need much. + +“Sheesh, living bare minimum huh? Don’t you want to eat anything other than military rations every once in awhile?” Kosser questions again. +“Nah. If I need extra food, I’ll just hunt.” +“You know even the booze and brothel girls in Retlad aren’t THAT cheap. You sure you don’t want more?” +“Nope. I’ll be fine. My family needs that money more than I do.” +“Alright then, family man.” + +You exit the barracks and wander the city a bit. You find it very interesting. You sort of wish you could stay longer to take in more sights. However one thing catches your eye. A small store and in the window is a lute. Looks almost like the one you had before it was taken away from you in basic training. You haven’t gotten a chance to play in six months and you’d really like to… + +Hey you’re a soldier now, you’ve proven yourself. You figure you can take one personal belonging with you to Retlad as long as you keep them packed properly. You enter the store and with the little money you have you buy the lute. You spend the most of the day and the next practicing it. You didn’t forget as much as you thought. You also finish up writing a letter to your family and give it to a Zalan messenger carrier. + +Finally the third day arrives for you to move out. A couple of officers arrive to take most of your other fellow cadets. Mostly to the Tulan border, however, it would appear you have a different escort. A young man in loose robe approaches you. He looks like a wizard, but you wonder for how long since he seems about your age. + +“Hey, are you the one going to the Retlad Kingdom?” he asks +“Yeah, who are you?” +“I’m Wessel. And don’t you dare get cute and call me weasel, or I’ll have to blast you with a lightning bolt.” +“I wasn’t planning on it.” You say which causes Wessel to start laughing. +“Geez, I was just fucking with you. Don’t be so serious! So you ready to go?” +“Yeah I guess, are you my superior officer?” +“Huh? Oh no. Look I got our horses waiting outside; we can do all this getting to know you stuff on the way.” + +You and Wessel get on the horses and ride towards your destination. It would appear that you’re the only one from your group to be going, but of course you were the only expert marksman. + +Wessel begins to tell you more about why he’s with you. In fact he doesn’t really let you do much talking at all. He says he’s a native citizen of the Zalan Empire, but he just graduated from the esteemed magic university in the city state of Nuro. Wessel goes on to and says that when he heard they needed a few wizard over in Retlad, he decided to volunteer to test his skills and get paid while doing it. He explains that the pair of you will be following the orders of a Captain Vhalat. + +Everyone knows about Nuro. It’s very famous, and you always wondered what kind of magical wonders existed there, so you’re eager to hear more and he’s all too happy to tell you. Despite Wessel’s primary focus on himself, it sounds like a place you’d want to visit one day. + +Eventually you arrive at the border and so far the Retlad Kingdom doesn’t look very well kept. The road begins to show evidence of disrepair and the sign posts are broken. You begin to keep your eye out for a possible attack at any second. + +“Look! Over there! It’s a village and it’s under attack! Come on!” Wessel yells and rides towards the village in the distance. You try to tell him to wait, but he’s already well on his way, so you ride after him. + +You’ve never seen a Quillar before, but the closer you get to the village, you start seeing humanoid creatures covered in sharp spikes running around at a fast speed which could only be them. They are indeed fearsome looking. You also see a lot of the people running from them, and even a few people dressed in protective gear similar to yours…not that its doing them much good. + +“Alright you prickly bastards here’s something for ya!” Wessle shouts riding into the village with one hand raised in the air for a lightning blast attack. He shows no fear. You have no idea if all wizards are like this, but he’s either got to be brave, stupid or just suicidal. Of course he could be all three. Up until now you always thought wizards were supposed to be meek types that didn’t charge into battle and preferred to kill from afar. You guess you were wrong. +> Stay with him to back him up +This reckless idiot is probably going to get himself killed if you don’t stick by his side. You ride quickly to catch up with him in the village, and draw your bow. + +Surprisingly for your first battle, you manage to keep calm and focused on the enemy. Hard to do considering the Quillars aren’t the easiest of foes. They’re quick and they’re firing their quills faster than you’re firing your bow. + +The problem though isn’t the Quillars, its Wessel. He’s having such a “good time” blasting the Quillars, that he’s causing a lot more collateral damage in the process. During one of these moments, your own horse gets spooked by the incredibly close fireball blast and rears back causing you to fall off of it. + +You’re still shaking the cobwebs when one of the Quillars unleashes more quills and hits you with several of them. You collapse in pain, as the Quillar charges at you. It doesn’t kill you though. Wessel makes sure of that when he throws a bolt of lightning at it. + +Unfortunately the Quillar happens to have grabbed you just as its hit by the lightning. Your current pain is increased severely as the electrical current passes through your body, but not for long and your fried body eventually stops its deaths throes. + +Wessel has a hard time explaining that the other transfer was hit by “friendly” fire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’ve never even heard of Quillars before, but they still sound less dangerous than the Tulan Border, that place is only going to get worse, you know it. + +“I’ll take the Retlad assignment sir.” +“Hm. Smart. Here’s your first month’s pay, I suggest you live it up here in Zal, for the couple of days you have off before you leave.” + +You take the small bag and look inside. This will certainly help your family. You take a few coins for yourself and then ask if arrangements can be made to have your payment sent to your family from now on. He tells you yes, but asks that surely that you will still want some of it. You agree to just taking 10% of it. You don’t need much. + +“Sheesh, living bare minimum huh? Don’t you want to eat anything other than military rations every once in awhile?” Kosser questions again. +“Nah. If I need extra food, I’ll just hunt.” +“You know even the booze and brothel girls in Retlad aren’t THAT cheap. You sure you don’t want more?” +“Nope. I’ll be fine. My family needs that money more than I do.” +“Alright then, family man.” + +You exit the barracks and wander the city a bit. You find it very interesting. You sort of wish you could stay longer to take in more sights. However one thing catches your eye. A small store and in the window is a lute. Looks almost like the one you had before it was taken away from you in basic training. You haven’t gotten a chance to play in six months and you’d really like to… + +Hey you’re a soldier now, you’ve proven yourself. You figure you can take one personal belonging with you to Retlad as long as you keep them packed properly. You enter the store and with the little money you have you buy the lute. You spend the most of the day and the next practicing it. You didn’t forget as much as you thought. You also finish up writing a letter to your family and give it to a Zalan messenger carrier. + +Finally the third day arrives for you to move out. A couple of officers arrive to take most of your other fellow cadets. Mostly to the Tulan border, however, it would appear you have a different escort. A young man in loose robe approaches you. He looks like a wizard, but you wonder for how long since he seems about your age. + +“Hey, are you the one going to the Retlad Kingdom?” he asks +“Yeah, who are you?” +“I’m Wessel. And don’t you dare get cute and call me weasel, or I’ll have to blast you with a lightning bolt.” +“I wasn’t planning on it.” You say which causes Wessel to start laughing. +“Geez, I was just fucking with you. Don’t be so serious! So you ready to go?” +“Yeah I guess, are you my superior officer?” +“Huh? Oh no. Look I got our horses waiting outside; we can do all this getting to know you stuff on the way.” + +You and Wessel get on the horses and ride towards your destination. It would appear that you’re the only one from your group to be going, but of course you were the only expert marksman. + +Wessel begins to tell you more about why he’s with you. In fact he doesn’t really let you do much talking at all. He says he’s a native citizen of the Zalan Empire, but he just graduated from the esteemed magic university in the city state of Nuro. Wessel goes on to and says that when he heard they needed a few wizard over in Retlad, he decided to volunteer to test his skills and get paid while doing it. He explains that the pair of you will be following the orders of a Captain Vhalat. + +Everyone knows about Nuro. It’s very famous, and you always wondered what kind of magical wonders existed there, so you’re eager to hear more and he’s all too happy to tell you. Despite Wessel’s primary focus on himself, it sounds like a place you’d want to visit one day. + +Eventually you arrive at the border and so far the Retlad Kingdom doesn’t look very well kept. The road begins to show evidence of disrepair and the sign posts are broken. You begin to keep your eye out for a possible attack at any second. + +“Look! Over there! It’s a village and it’s under attack! Come on!” Wessel yells and rides towards the village in the distance. You try to tell him to wait, but he’s already well on his way, so you ride after him. + +You’ve never seen a Quillar before, but the closer you get to the village, you start seeing humanoid creatures covered in sharp spikes running around at a fast speed which could only be them. They are indeed fearsome looking. You also see a lot of the people running from them, and even a few people dressed in protective gear similar to yours…not that its doing them much good. + +“Alright you prickly bastards here’s something for ya!” Wessle shouts riding into the village with one hand raised in the air for a lightning blast attack. He shows no fear. You have no idea if all wizards are like this, but he’s either got to be brave, stupid or just suicidal. Of course he could be all three. Up until now you always thought wizards were supposed to be meek types that didn’t charge into battle and preferred to kill from afar. You guess you were wrong. +> Circle around the village +Just because he’s acting reckless doesn’t mean you’re going to, you’re going to play upon your strengths and keep as far away as you can. + +You ride your horse around the outskirts of the village, readying your bow the whole time. When you can, you fire at the Quillar attackers. As quick as they are, they aren’t really paying attention to you and you manage to get in some good shots. A couple of head shots even. + +At first they don’t realize where the all the arrows are coming from, since Wessel is giving them a hard enough time with the chain lightning. You’re sort of glad you decided to stay on the outskirts. Wessel is having such a “good time” blasting the Quillars, he’s probably causing a lot more collateral damage in the process. + +Eventually the Quillars start to retreat. This is when you get into a little more trouble as you happen to be right in the direction of where they’re running! They still look scary and they get even moreso as they get closer. The worst has to be their shrieks. It’s unpleasant to hear to say the least. + +You ride out of the way, but your horse isn’t fast enough and is peppered by quills. You catch a few in the leg yourself and you’re thrown from the horse as it reels in pain, before collapsing. + +Feeling the pain you scramble for cover behind a nearby rock. Fortunately the quills don’t penetrate that. Most of them are content on just running away, but one straggler decides to try to get one more kill before leaving. That kill of course happens to be you. + +The Quillar makes its high pitch shriek as it runs towards the rock. You don’t have time to ready your bow before its high jumped over the rock and on the other side of you. You quickly draw your weapon and swing it blindly as you turn around. Luckily your blade catches the side of its head, killing it. At last you collapse from the pain in your leg. + +While you’re pulling out quills, Wessel and another Zalan soldier come to meet you. Wessel doesn’t look any worse for wear, but the soldier looks very tired and obviously has wounds of his own. + +“There you are, lying down on the job I see.” Wessel mocks. +“Are you alright?” the other soldier asks. +“Yeah…Agh. I’ve gotten bitten in the leg by a Kobold before. Feels nearly the same except these quills go in a lot deeper.” +“Glad you guys came when you did. We were just doing a routine patrol when these quill bastards came out of nowhere! They’re getting bolder and attacking in greater number, we need more reinforcements.” +“Yeah, well good luck with that. The Tulan border is the primary concern. Besides I’m here now, I predict that this infestation will be over soon now.” Wessel boasts. + +“Any…way. My name’s Tylir. I’d introduce you to the rest of my squad, but they’re all dead now. Even though it was the heat of battle, I couldn’t help notice how well you picked off several of those Quillars with one shot. That was pretty impressive.” +“Thanks.” +“Hey! What about me? I’m the one who noticed you getting attacked in the first place! I’m also the one who saved your ass!” Wessel interrupts again, he’s starting to get annoying at this point, but Tylir doesn’t seem bothered by him. + +“Everyone did their part. Okay, since I’m here I’ll take you to see Captain Vhalat, I’m sure that’s who you were sent to report to, oh and wizard while your skills may be appreciated here, I’d advise you to cut down on the boasting. Captain Vhalat isn’t fond of it, and to be quite honest the other two wizards we had here were more experienced and they still got killed.” +“Hmm, well perhaps they lacked the natural skill that I of course possess.” + +At this point you and Tylir just roll your eyes and get moving. + +You travel through a couple of other villages and it’s pretty depressing. You see stacks of bodies being buried in mass graves while most of other Retlad citizens look thoroughly defeated. A few look in your direction, but don’t look too much, it’s like they don’t really expect you to succeed. Not exactly inspiring. + +Soon you arrive in the town of Glaf. It would appear that the Zalan contingency sent here is staying in one of the bigger Retlad towns rather than the capitol. Ryan also says that the Quillar infestation is worse around here too, so the captain suspects that whatever lair they’re crawling out of is nearby and can hopefully located and cleansed. + +The town itself resembles a small Zalan fort rather than a proper Retlad town, as a sturdy wall has been erected around it. The people seem to look a little more hopeful though. Tylir goes on to say that he thinks that the Retlad citizens are actually starting to prefer Zalan presence especially since their on government has been pretty ineffectual about the whole invasion. The Retlad army has only focused on defending the capitol. The Retlad royals appear to find their lives more important than anyone else’s. + +Eventually you’re brought before Captain Vahlat himself. He looks up from the map he’s inspecting and addresses you and Wessel. + +“Ah, I see the Empire has seen fit to send me reinforcements…wow, twice as many as I thought I’d get. Private Tylir where’s the rest of your squad?” +“Um…dead sir.” +“Of course. (sigh) So what’s your problem private? Why is your leg wrapped up?” Vahlat asks you. +“Got into a fight with the Quillars sir.” You answer. +“Oh?” + +Tylir at this point interrupts and tells of what happened. Wessel looks like he wants to expand upon his deeds, but Vahlat’s appearance is a little imposing and he was already warned once, so he keeps his mouth shut. Vahlat soon addresses you again. + +“Well it would seem you two have already proven yourselves useful. A lot more useful that what passes for the Retlad army, but of course that isn’t hard. Wizard, I certainly hope you don’t intend to use this place as a chance to show off all the skills you learned in your fancy Nuro college. One of your predecessors did that as well, and as you can see he’s no longer here. As for you, I hope that you can do a better job of keeping out of the way of the quills next time. Most don’t get a second chance. Alright that’s all for now. Our group is being housed for free at the Inn down the street. Free food as well, but don’t go overboard, its being rationed. You want more food or anything else you’ll have to pay like everyone else. I suggest though that you don’t do any heavy carousing. This is a high alert situation and we could be going to battle at anytime. Dismissed.” + +You, Wessel and Tylir all leave at this point. Tylir goes on to show you where the Inn is and a couple of other places, but after today you just want to rest and retire to your room early. You rest your leg and begin practicing your lute. This puts you in better spirits. + +6 months pass… + +The Quillar invasion has nearly been eradicated. Most of the major lairs have been located and cleansed and you certainly contributed greatly to this effort. Besides your combat abilities, your tracking skills definitely came in handy a lot. + +You’ve become somewhat recognized among Retlad citizens due to your actions and the lives you’ve saved. The word “hero” has been used a few times though you definitely don’t think of yourself as one. In your free time you spoke with the citizens, a lot more than your fellow soldiers though. A few of them even convinced you to play for them when they noticed your lute. It took a little prodding, but eventually you gave in fully expecting to get booed, but to your surprise, you got applauded instead. Your playing didn’t just boost your spirits it seemed. Whenever you could you played a little bit for people in what little free time you had. Never did you think that you’d be playing for any kind of audience, let alone an appreciative one. + +It definitely hasn’t been all sunshine though; you’ve seen a lot of people die. More than you ever wanted to actually. You’d made friends with Tylir shortly after your first meeting and he died only a couple months later. You’ll be glad when every one of these Quillar creatures are all dead though, all they’ve done is cause misery. + +You’ve got them on the run now though. You’re preparing for an attack on another one of their lairs, when Captain Vahlat calls everyone to see him, he doesn’t look enthusiastic about whatever it is he has to tell you. + +“All right I’ll be brief. As much as I hate leaving a mission unfinished, we’re getting pulled out of here effective immediately. Major news is that Nuro has undergone a fucking disaster that needs to be put down like yesterday! All governments friendly to the City State of Nuro that can spare the manpower are to send help. We would be one of those. I hope the Retlad army is just competent enough to finish up what we started in their own country.” + +Wessel immediately pipes up upon hearing about this revelation. + +“What happened in Nuro? What’s going on?!” +“What’s going on? From what I’ve been told a whole bunch of your kind raised a shitload of undead and unleashed a bunch of hostile demons on the place! The entire city was overrun. Reports are already stating that small packs of demons are running around the nearby countryside. Most likely in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom. Not sure what that means with our border war with them, but I only see it getting bloodier around there. In any case, our job is to head to Nuro, before the undead start following suit. I hope you’re all ready for this, because this is going to be a lot different that fighting Quillars.” + +You look around and see a lot of fear wash over faces and rightly so. Necromancers have a bad history on your world. When you were little you still remember hearing the tales of the Great Lich Lord that existed centuries before you were even born. He almost took over the world. Those stories gave you nightmares as a kid. The possibility of having to face something remotely similar even on much smaller scale doesn’t make you feel too well. +> Desert the army +You don’t want to die and you know if you go, you will. You regret that you won’t be able to help your family out financially anymore, but you really don’t want to die. + +You pack up all your stuff in the middle of the night and sneak away from the town your company is stationed in. You figure their orders are urgent enough that your desertion won’t immediately cause a full scale hunt, at least not by them. + +The first order of business is to change your identity as much as you can. And head to a place where you can play for an audience, but the probability of someone ratting you out is low if you’re recognized. + +The question though is where to go. You can’t linger in the Retlad Kingdom too long, in fact you’ll probably have to move around. + +You decide your first stop will be at the Garwold Confederacy. It’s a relatively peaceful nation made up mostly of Halflings and Gnomes, with lush green fields and flowers. They tend to stay out of wars and they’re also known to appreciate the simpler things in life. + +Eventually you make a place for yourself there in one of the small villages. You make a living playing at the local tavern there. Most of the patrons sense that you have some sort of past that you’re trying to hide from. But just like you thought, they don’t bring it up or say anything about it and just enjoy your music. + +A few months pass and you’re happy. You even meet a pretty Halfling girl to be with, and now you’re even thinking about just settling down here, since nobody’s come looking for you; however there are alarming events occurring in the rest of the world. + +The assault on Nuro was a complete failure. Everyone was killed from your company. It makes you glad you didn’t go, but the fact that there is now an undead city state has everyone worried. It doesn’t help that there was also an outbreak of demons. One particularly nasty one called Velzix has conquered the Tulan Kingdom. + +Due to these events a Grand Alliance of nations has been created to stop these threats. The Garwold Confederacy normally stays out of such things, but they have agreed to send a militia as part of the aiding effort. + +You don’t worry too much about it at first, but as a couple more years go on, the war gets worse and more and more Zalan Empire troops are passing through the area. Normally you’d move on, but now you’re married and you can’t bear to abandon yet another one you love. You still haven’t completely forgiven yourself for the first time. + +You attempt to keep a low profile, but one day a Grand Alliance solider passing through, sees you in a tavern and recognizes you. Apparently he’s a citizen of Retlad and remembers you when you were stationed there. + +“HEY! I know you! Man, it’s good to see ya! How did you get out of the army? I thought the Zalan Empire had a twenty year requirement plan! You still play that lute really well?” he bellows for all inside to hear. Unfortunately one of the other Grand Alliance members with him is from the Zalan Empire who’s a real stickler for rules and regulations. +“I know who you are too! You’re wanted for desertion! I’m placing you under arrest!” + +You try to escape, but you don’t get far. You haven’t been keeping up on your physical training since you deserted, and coupled with your Halfling wife’s rich cooking you’re not in great shape anymore. The Zalan soldier on the other hand has been battle hardened in the recent months. He easily catches you and beats you into submission. + +You’re taken back to the Zalan Empire in chains much to the protest of your wife, but its no use, you’re going to trial. + +Your family is made aware of your discovery, but none of them come to try to help you. You abandoned them long ago and didn’t even try to contact them; as far as they’re concerned you died years ago. You attempt to explain things in letters to them, but you’re never answered. Eventually you give up. + +The trial is brief and the judgment final. You’re sentenced to death as an example of all those who would attempt to desert their duty during war. + +As you sit in your cell counting the days for your hanging, you find out from sad visits from your wife that things are getting really bad. Dead armies conquering kingdoms, demons running amok. You almost wonder if your execution isn’t a blessing from the horror that seems to be eclipsing the world. + +The day comes when the noose is placed around your neck… + +“Any last words?” + +You have none; you just hum a little tune and close your eyes before the trapdoor swings open, and your neck snaps.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just because he’s acting reckless doesn’t mean you’re going to, you’re going to play upon your strengths and keep as far away as you can. + +You ride your horse around the outskirts of the village, readying your bow the whole time. When you can, you fire at the Quillar attackers. As quick as they are, they aren’t really paying attention to you and you manage to get in some good shots. A couple of head shots even. + +At first they don’t realize where the all the arrows are coming from, since Wessel is giving them a hard enough time with the chain lightning. You’re sort of glad you decided to stay on the outskirts. Wessel is having such a “good time” blasting the Quillars, he’s probably causing a lot more collateral damage in the process. + +Eventually the Quillars start to retreat. This is when you get into a little more trouble as you happen to be right in the direction of where they’re running! They still look scary and they get even moreso as they get closer. The worst has to be their shrieks. It’s unpleasant to hear to say the least. + +You ride out of the way, but your horse isn’t fast enough and is peppered by quills. You catch a few in the leg yourself and you’re thrown from the horse as it reels in pain, before collapsing. + +Feeling the pain you scramble for cover behind a nearby rock. Fortunately the quills don’t penetrate that. Most of them are content on just running away, but one straggler decides to try to get one more kill before leaving. That kill of course happens to be you. + +The Quillar makes its high pitch shriek as it runs towards the rock. You don’t have time to ready your bow before its high jumped over the rock and on the other side of you. You quickly draw your weapon and swing it blindly as you turn around. Luckily your blade catches the side of its head, killing it. At last you collapse from the pain in your leg. + +While you’re pulling out quills, Wessel and another Zalan soldier come to meet you. Wessel doesn’t look any worse for wear, but the soldier looks very tired and obviously has wounds of his own. + +“There you are, lying down on the job I see.” Wessel mocks. +“Are you alright?” the other soldier asks. +“Yeah…Agh. I’ve gotten bitten in the leg by a Kobold before. Feels nearly the same except these quills go in a lot deeper.” +“Glad you guys came when you did. We were just doing a routine patrol when these quill bastards came out of nowhere! They’re getting bolder and attacking in greater number, we need more reinforcements.” +“Yeah, well good luck with that. The Tulan border is the primary concern. Besides I’m here now, I predict that this infestation will be over soon now.” Wessel boasts. + +“Any…way. My name’s Tylir. I’d introduce you to the rest of my squad, but they’re all dead now. Even though it was the heat of battle, I couldn’t help notice how well you picked off several of those Quillars with one shot. That was pretty impressive.” +“Thanks.” +“Hey! What about me? I’m the one who noticed you getting attacked in the first place! I’m also the one who saved your ass!” Wessel interrupts again, he’s starting to get annoying at this point, but Tylir doesn’t seem bothered by him. + +“Everyone did their part. Okay, since I’m here I’ll take you to see Captain Vhalat, I’m sure that’s who you were sent to report to, oh and wizard while your skills may be appreciated here, I’d advise you to cut down on the boasting. Captain Vhalat isn’t fond of it, and to be quite honest the other two wizards we had here were more experienced and they still got killed.” +“Hmm, well perhaps they lacked the natural skill that I of course possess.” + +At this point you and Tylir just roll your eyes and get moving. + +You travel through a couple of other villages and it’s pretty depressing. You see stacks of bodies being buried in mass graves while most of other Retlad citizens look thoroughly defeated. A few look in your direction, but don’t look too much, it’s like they don’t really expect you to succeed. Not exactly inspiring. + +Soon you arrive in the town of Glaf. It would appear that the Zalan contingency sent here is staying in one of the bigger Retlad towns rather than the capitol. Ryan also says that the Quillar infestation is worse around here too, so the captain suspects that whatever lair they’re crawling out of is nearby and can hopefully located and cleansed. + +The town itself resembles a small Zalan fort rather than a proper Retlad town, as a sturdy wall has been erected around it. The people seem to look a little more hopeful though. Tylir goes on to say that he thinks that the Retlad citizens are actually starting to prefer Zalan presence especially since their on government has been pretty ineffectual about the whole invasion. The Retlad army has only focused on defending the capitol. The Retlad royals appear to find their lives more important than anyone else’s. + +Eventually you’re brought before Captain Vahlat himself. He looks up from the map he’s inspecting and addresses you and Wessel. + +“Ah, I see the Empire has seen fit to send me reinforcements…wow, twice as many as I thought I’d get. Private Tylir where’s the rest of your squad?” +“Um…dead sir.” +“Of course. (sigh) So what’s your problem private? Why is your leg wrapped up?” Vahlat asks you. +“Got into a fight with the Quillars sir.” You answer. +“Oh?” + +Tylir at this point interrupts and tells of what happened. Wessel looks like he wants to expand upon his deeds, but Vahlat’s appearance is a little imposing and he was already warned once, so he keeps his mouth shut. Vahlat soon addresses you again. + +“Well it would seem you two have already proven yourselves useful. A lot more useful that what passes for the Retlad army, but of course that isn’t hard. Wizard, I certainly hope you don’t intend to use this place as a chance to show off all the skills you learned in your fancy Nuro college. One of your predecessors did that as well, and as you can see he’s no longer here. As for you, I hope that you can do a better job of keeping out of the way of the quills next time. Most don’t get a second chance. Alright that’s all for now. Our group is being housed for free at the Inn down the street. Free food as well, but don’t go overboard, its being rationed. You want more food or anything else you’ll have to pay like everyone else. I suggest though that you don’t do any heavy carousing. This is a high alert situation and we could be going to battle at anytime. Dismissed.” + +You, Wessel and Tylir all leave at this point. Tylir goes on to show you where the Inn is and a couple of other places, but after today you just want to rest and retire to your room early. You rest your leg and begin practicing your lute. This puts you in better spirits. + +6 months pass… + +The Quillar invasion has nearly been eradicated. Most of the major lairs have been located and cleansed and you certainly contributed greatly to this effort. Besides your combat abilities, your tracking skills definitely came in handy a lot. + +You’ve become somewhat recognized among Retlad citizens due to your actions and the lives you’ve saved. The word “hero” has been used a few times though you definitely don’t think of yourself as one. In your free time you spoke with the citizens, a lot more than your fellow soldiers though. A few of them even convinced you to play for them when they noticed your lute. It took a little prodding, but eventually you gave in fully expecting to get booed, but to your surprise, you got applauded instead. Your playing didn’t just boost your spirits it seemed. Whenever you could you played a little bit for people in what little free time you had. Never did you think that you’d be playing for any kind of audience, let alone an appreciative one. + +It definitely hasn’t been all sunshine though; you’ve seen a lot of people die. More than you ever wanted to actually. You’d made friends with Tylir shortly after your first meeting and he died only a couple months later. You’ll be glad when every one of these Quillar creatures are all dead though, all they’ve done is cause misery. + +You’ve got them on the run now though. You’re preparing for an attack on another one of their lairs, when Captain Vahlat calls everyone to see him, he doesn’t look enthusiastic about whatever it is he has to tell you. + +“All right I’ll be brief. As much as I hate leaving a mission unfinished, we’re getting pulled out of here effective immediately. Major news is that Nuro has undergone a fucking disaster that needs to be put down like yesterday! All governments friendly to the City State of Nuro that can spare the manpower are to send help. We would be one of those. I hope the Retlad army is just competent enough to finish up what we started in their own country.” + +Wessel immediately pipes up upon hearing about this revelation. + +“What happened in Nuro? What’s going on?!” +“What’s going on? From what I’ve been told a whole bunch of your kind raised a shitload of undead and unleashed a bunch of hostile demons on the place! The entire city was overrun. Reports are already stating that small packs of demons are running around the nearby countryside. Most likely in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom. Not sure what that means with our border war with them, but I only see it getting bloodier around there. In any case, our job is to head to Nuro, before the undead start following suit. I hope you’re all ready for this, because this is going to be a lot different that fighting Quillars.” + +You look around and see a lot of fear wash over faces and rightly so. Necromancers have a bad history on your world. When you were little you still remember hearing the tales of the Great Lich Lord that existed centuries before you were even born. He almost took over the world. Those stories gave you nightmares as a kid. The possibility of having to face something remotely similar even on much smaller scale doesn’t make you feel too well. +> Stay in the army +Despite your fears, you’ve always had a sense of duty and responsibility, something that probably won’t ever completely go away due to how you grew up. You’re not running away, you did join to help provide for your family after all. + +Before your company packs up and leaves Retlad, you write a quick letter to your family and hand it off to a messenger. Many of the Retlad citizens aren’t too pleased to see you leave, but they don’t really have any say in the matter, just like you don’t. There isn’t much talking on the trip, though, everyone is pretty silent. Wessel however is doing enough for everyone. + +“I can’t believe something like this happened! Nuro was a beacon of enlightenment and well prepared for situations like this! I…can’t believe this didn’t occur without some sort of demonic influence. I’ll bet that Mr. Demar had something to do with this! I remember taking his class and he was always a creepy bastard. Before I could graduate I had to take his conjuration 101 class and he didn’t like me because I had made several logical arguments to as why that branch of magic should be outlawed altogether. And it’s obvious by what happened recently that I was right! Nevertheless I did all the required work in the class and I still got a B! Way to fuck up my perfect record! I get the same grade as some bumbling idiot who summoned up a Nurk Beast that he lost control over and bit off someone’s hand! Where is the fucking justice?” + +Once again, Wessel has turned the topic to focus on himself. Happily Captain Vahlat tells him to shut the fuck up. + +You’ll be near Nuro soon and your company makes camp for the night. While all of you are on edge from what will come tomorrow, someone finally says something. + +“Hey farmboy, play us a song on that thing.” +“…what did you want to hear?” you ask, not expecting to be called to play under these circumstances. In fact it just occurred to you that you’ve never played for anyone in your company! You assume that they all knew that you did, but they just were never interested enough to stick around and listen to you before. + +“I dunno, play whatever it was you used to play for the Retlad citizens…it seemed to make them happy.” + +You pull out your lute and take a deep breath and start playing. At first you’re just concentrating on the strings and making sure you don’t mess anything up, but when you look up, you can see that everyone in the camp is listening intently to your music, even Wessel. Tensions seem to have decreased. It’s like a wave of calmness has struck the camp. You never believed your playing could have that much of an effect on people. Eventually the song ends and the Captain tells everyone who isn’t on watch to get some sleep. He then takes you aside. + +“Heard your playing…damn shame that you’re here. You really should be doing that instead.” Valhlat remarks. +“I know.” +“Hm. I know you joined mainly to help support your family.” +“Yeah, I just hope I get to see them again.” +“Bah, don’t start talking like that. I’ve seen you with a bow, you pluck that thing even better than that lute. You’ve been in battle before and survived, I see you doing it again.” +“I sure hope so, its just I dunno…the undead…I’ve heard stories.” +“Yeah, everyone’s heard the stories, but stories tend to be exaggerated. Now I dunno about what happened centuries ago, since I wasn’t there, but I HAVE fought the undead before. One of my first assignments was taking care of some minor undead incursion in a little village. Some asshole stumbled upon an ancient scroll and started reading the goddamn words on it out loud. They look a lot worse than they actually are. Most of the time they’re incredibly slow, and easily dispatched. Its mainly a psychological advantage from all the stories people have told about them that cause this quaking fear in most folks.” +“Well I suppose, but what about the necromancers?” +“Feh, they’re wizards and just like all the rest their arrogance is their undoing. Most of these so-called necromancers are half-assed ones that get killed by their own undead troops. Anyway, get to sleep; you want to be fully alert for tomorrow’s battle. It still won’t be a walk in the park, but it’s not going to be a death sentence.” + +You take the Captain’s words into consideration, but in the back of your mind before you go to sleep, you’re thinking “But they can’t be that half-assed, they successfully took over Nuro…” + +The next day arrives and you finish your trip to Nuro and that’s when you see the city for the first time. You always wanted to visit it after hearing about it from Wessel, but even from this distance it doesn’t look like anything he described. + +“By the gods…what…” Wessel slowly whispers. + +The stench of death is thick in the air. You see thousands of bodies outside the city gates and they aren’t lying down either. They aren’t advancing either though. There just standing there like…well zombies. + +Your company isn’t the only one here though, there are a few others awaiting orders. You see one from the Brot Kingdom and another from the Azi Republic. Thankfully there’s another Zalan one as well to boost your numbers. + +The respective captains acknowledge each other’s presence, a short meeting is made and then the inevitable comes. The attack. + +At first things seem to go well. All ranged troops are ordered to fire upon the enemy who are still just standing there. Arrows pierce zombie brains, gunshots destroy skeleton bones, spells blast at walls and it seems very easy. + +Then from the battlements of Nuro a few figures begin casting a few offensive spells of their own. It’s at this point a charge is made towards the city. + +“When you get in range aim for the fucking wizards! Don’t fear these rotting meat sacks! We’re the fucking Zalan army! We don’t lose!” Captain Valhlat shouts. + +Fine words, but they do little to uplift your impending sense of doom. It doesn’t help that the sky goes completely dark while you’re marching towards a bunch of undead and at the same time hoping you don’t get hit by a wizard’s spell. In the distance you briefly see a cleric from the Azi Republic riding a horse by himself. He appears to be calling upon some sort of holy might from whatever god he worships since a blue protective sphere appears around him. The next moment he’s hit by a black ray that goes straight through the sphere and his life is gone. Not even his god could protect him. + +As you get closer, you see that the undead soldiers still haven’t moved, but there are significantly less of them as they continue to fall from ranged attacks. However, now other undead pop up on the walls of Nuro holding bows of their own. + +“SHIELDS!” Captain Valhlat shouts. + +More of your side falls and now you’re so close you can smell the death in the air. The undead troops are now finally moving to do battle with your side. You attempt to target the robed figures on the battlements, but of course it’s very difficult in all this chaos and your fear. + +You mostly only get the undead archers. Wessel is a little more successful is downing an enemy wizard. + +“Ha ha! Don’t you realize I graduated top of my class?!” you hear him shout. + +The gates of Nuro are being broken down and despite the horror you’ve already seen, this battle still seems hopeful. + +Then a black cloaked hooded figure sudden appears on the battlements. You see him merely raise his arms briefly and that’s when you get the very real feeling that hope is lost. + +Ghostly spirits come through the walls of Nuro making worse shrieks than when you fought the Quillars. At least they were living creatures. These drain lives at but a touch and there isn’t enough magic to fight the incorporeal creatures properly. You see the Brot Kingdom’s company break and run, but unfortunately for them and you, your possible retreat has been blocked. All the soldiers on your side that fell have now suddenly been raised, the undead soldiers that were killed have been raised as well. You’re fighting in the front, from behind and in some cases from within. It’s chaos. + +“Shit, I’m going to die today…” you whisper to yourself. + +Captain Valhlat is knee deep in the dead, but this figure who’s apparently changed the tide of battle hasn’t escaped his attention. He points to the figure and barks orders at the top of his lungs. + +“KILL HIM! SHOOT THE FUCKER! DO IT! NOW!” +> Attempt to shoot the figure +You’re scared shitless, but somehow you manage to maintain your composure and aim for the hooded figure on top of the battlements. + +You let an arrow fly and your aim is straight and true, but unfortunately it’s blocked by some sort of magical shield. Even Wessel’s spell dissipates before it. + +Now you see that all hope is lost and you attempt to escape, but the precious few seconds you spent aiming your bow on a fruitless killing attempt has resulted in you being surrounded and overwhelmed. + +You feel the rusty steel of a sword plunge into your side, followed by extreme pain. You turn to strike down the grinning skeleton warrior who’s just limited your life span. You strike a couple more corpses before you’re brought down by an axe to the skull, splitting your head open and causing your brains to leak out uselessly into the now blood soaked battlefield. + +You fall and die, only to rise again as just another zombie drone for the growing undead army.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Despite your fears, you’ve always had a sense of duty and responsibility, something that probably won’t ever completely go away due to how you grew up. You’re not running away, you did join to help provide for your family after all. + +Before your company packs up and leaves Retlad, you write a quick letter to your family and hand it off to a messenger. Many of the Retlad citizens aren’t too pleased to see you leave, but they don’t really have any say in the matter, just like you don’t. There isn’t much talking on the trip, though, everyone is pretty silent. Wessel however is doing enough for everyone. + +“I can’t believe something like this happened! Nuro was a beacon of enlightenment and well prepared for situations like this! I…can’t believe this didn’t occur without some sort of demonic influence. I’ll bet that Mr. Demar had something to do with this! I remember taking his class and he was always a creepy bastard. Before I could graduate I had to take his conjuration 101 class and he didn’t like me because I had made several logical arguments to as why that branch of magic should be outlawed altogether. And it’s obvious by what happened recently that I was right! Nevertheless I did all the required work in the class and I still got a B! Way to fuck up my perfect record! I get the same grade as some bumbling idiot who summoned up a Nurk Beast that he lost control over and bit off someone’s hand! Where is the fucking justice?” + +Once again, Wessel has turned the topic to focus on himself. Happily Captain Vahlat tells him to shut the fuck up. + +You’ll be near Nuro soon and your company makes camp for the night. While all of you are on edge from what will come tomorrow, someone finally says something. + +“Hey farmboy, play us a song on that thing.” +“…what did you want to hear?” you ask, not expecting to be called to play under these circumstances. In fact it just occurred to you that you’ve never played for anyone in your company! You assume that they all knew that you did, but they just were never interested enough to stick around and listen to you before. + +“I dunno, play whatever it was you used to play for the Retlad citizens…it seemed to make them happy.” + +You pull out your lute and take a deep breath and start playing. At first you’re just concentrating on the strings and making sure you don’t mess anything up, but when you look up, you can see that everyone in the camp is listening intently to your music, even Wessel. Tensions seem to have decreased. It’s like a wave of calmness has struck the camp. You never believed your playing could have that much of an effect on people. Eventually the song ends and the Captain tells everyone who isn’t on watch to get some sleep. He then takes you aside. + +“Heard your playing…damn shame that you’re here. You really should be doing that instead.” Valhlat remarks. +“I know.” +“Hm. I know you joined mainly to help support your family.” +“Yeah, I just hope I get to see them again.” +“Bah, don’t start talking like that. I’ve seen you with a bow, you pluck that thing even better than that lute. You’ve been in battle before and survived, I see you doing it again.” +“I sure hope so, its just I dunno…the undead…I’ve heard stories.” +“Yeah, everyone’s heard the stories, but stories tend to be exaggerated. Now I dunno about what happened centuries ago, since I wasn’t there, but I HAVE fought the undead before. One of my first assignments was taking care of some minor undead incursion in a little village. Some asshole stumbled upon an ancient scroll and started reading the goddamn words on it out loud. They look a lot worse than they actually are. Most of the time they’re incredibly slow, and easily dispatched. Its mainly a psychological advantage from all the stories people have told about them that cause this quaking fear in most folks.” +“Well I suppose, but what about the necromancers?” +“Feh, they’re wizards and just like all the rest their arrogance is their undoing. Most of these so-called necromancers are half-assed ones that get killed by their own undead troops. Anyway, get to sleep; you want to be fully alert for tomorrow’s battle. It still won’t be a walk in the park, but it’s not going to be a death sentence.” + +You take the Captain’s words into consideration, but in the back of your mind before you go to sleep, you’re thinking “But they can’t be that half-assed, they successfully took over Nuro…” + +The next day arrives and you finish your trip to Nuro and that’s when you see the city for the first time. You always wanted to visit it after hearing about it from Wessel, but even from this distance it doesn’t look like anything he described. + +“By the gods…what…” Wessel slowly whispers. + +The stench of death is thick in the air. You see thousands of bodies outside the city gates and they aren’t lying down either. They aren’t advancing either though. There just standing there like…well zombies. + +Your company isn’t the only one here though, there are a few others awaiting orders. You see one from the Brot Kingdom and another from the Azi Republic. Thankfully there’s another Zalan one as well to boost your numbers. + +The respective captains acknowledge each other’s presence, a short meeting is made and then the inevitable comes. The attack. + +At first things seem to go well. All ranged troops are ordered to fire upon the enemy who are still just standing there. Arrows pierce zombie brains, gunshots destroy skeleton bones, spells blast at walls and it seems very easy. + +Then from the battlements of Nuro a few figures begin casting a few offensive spells of their own. It’s at this point a charge is made towards the city. + +“When you get in range aim for the fucking wizards! Don’t fear these rotting meat sacks! We’re the fucking Zalan army! We don’t lose!” Captain Valhlat shouts. + +Fine words, but they do little to uplift your impending sense of doom. It doesn’t help that the sky goes completely dark while you’re marching towards a bunch of undead and at the same time hoping you don’t get hit by a wizard’s spell. In the distance you briefly see a cleric from the Azi Republic riding a horse by himself. He appears to be calling upon some sort of holy might from whatever god he worships since a blue protective sphere appears around him. The next moment he’s hit by a black ray that goes straight through the sphere and his life is gone. Not even his god could protect him. + +As you get closer, you see that the undead soldiers still haven’t moved, but there are significantly less of them as they continue to fall from ranged attacks. However, now other undead pop up on the walls of Nuro holding bows of their own. + +“SHIELDS!” Captain Valhlat shouts. + +More of your side falls and now you’re so close you can smell the death in the air. The undead troops are now finally moving to do battle with your side. You attempt to target the robed figures on the battlements, but of course it’s very difficult in all this chaos and your fear. + +You mostly only get the undead archers. Wessel is a little more successful is downing an enemy wizard. + +“Ha ha! Don’t you realize I graduated top of my class?!” you hear him shout. + +The gates of Nuro are being broken down and despite the horror you’ve already seen, this battle still seems hopeful. + +Then a black cloaked hooded figure sudden appears on the battlements. You see him merely raise his arms briefly and that’s when you get the very real feeling that hope is lost. + +Ghostly spirits come through the walls of Nuro making worse shrieks than when you fought the Quillars. At least they were living creatures. These drain lives at but a touch and there isn’t enough magic to fight the incorporeal creatures properly. You see the Brot Kingdom’s company break and run, but unfortunately for them and you, your possible retreat has been blocked. All the soldiers on your side that fell have now suddenly been raised, the undead soldiers that were killed have been raised as well. You’re fighting in the front, from behind and in some cases from within. It’s chaos. + +“Shit, I’m going to die today…” you whisper to yourself. + +Captain Valhlat is knee deep in the dead, but this figure who’s apparently changed the tide of battle hasn’t escaped his attention. He points to the figure and barks orders at the top of his lungs. + +“KILL HIM! SHOOT THE FUCKER! DO IT! NOW!” +> Run away +There’s undead all around you, fear coursing through your body and all you can think of is escape. You see a few others following orders, but their shots do nothing. Apparently the Necromancer has protected himself behind a more powerful magic shield than the cleric you saw die had. Even Wessel’s spell dissipates before it. + +You ignore your orders, you ignore your fellow soldiers, you ignore the attack on Nuro, and you run and you’re not a bit ashamed to put your survival first. + +The chaos of the fighting is bewildering and you don’t really pay attention to what direction you’re heading, you’re just making a beeline to any destination not completely filled with zombies, ghosts, and skeletons. You look back, only to see more death. The hooded figure on top of the battlements calls down some sort of death cloud that begins to envelop the area you were previously in. The screams of the distant victims are horrible. + +You feel like you’re living a nightmare as you constantly bump into corpses, both moving and unmoving. Defensive chops with your sword do nothing to kill the unnatural creatures and only temporarily push them out of your way. It is only by sheer luck that you get away without getting killed. + +You run further, leaving the carnage behind. You look back again to see if anything is in pursuit, but nothing is to your relief. Still, you’re not comfortable and you continue to distance yourself until you can run no further and you must stop to rest. + +It is at this point, you wonder what you’re going to do. You wonder if going back to report to the nearest Zalan commander would be wise. Will they punish you for running away? The situation was hopeless, surely they couldn’t...could they? And even if they don’t, then what? Send you back in? That’s definitely not appealing given what you’ve seen. + +At this point you’re really regretting your decision to join the army. You wish you could just leave. You want to go home. + +Going AWOL back in Retlad wasn’t really an option; you would’ve been hunted down. But now? You probably would be listed as a casualty. You could theoretically disappear and attempt to live anonymously and do what you wanted to do in the first place. Just travel and play. Your family would even be compensated for your death, but still…you’d hate to put them through the grief of it, if it isn’t true. + +Before you ponder your future options any further, you suddenly feel a pain in your side…you look down and see that you’re bleeding. Apparently you were stabbed and didn’t even realize it due to the adrenaline. You’re feeling the pain now though and you attempt to stop the bleeding as much as you can. + +Regardless of what you’re going to do in the future, right now you have to find civilization to at least get fixed up. The problem is that you don’t know where the hell you are. You look around for some possible landmarks, but you’re not seeing anything familiar. Lacking any other ideas, you start walking in the general direction of where you think the Zalan Empire is located. + +You walk for a few hours and the pain is getting worse. You start thinking that you might not get the chance to worry anymore about your potential future, but a farm house in the distance gives you a little hope and you press on. + +You get close to the front porch and that’s when you stop. The front door is broken off its hinges and a few windows are also broken. You also notice a leg lying in the grass near you. Worse, whatever did this is apparently still around judging by the loud voices you’re hearing from inside. + +“Ha ha! Human women are such squealers! Not as much fun as elven women though!” +“Oh that’s real original. Why is everyone always got such a fucking hard on for elven women? Too damn fragile if you ask me.” +“Go fucking rape a troll girl then.” +“Huh. Easier said than done my unimaginative friend. I tried that once and almost got married.” +“HAHAHAHA! See I told you this would be more fun than following Velzix…hey you smell that?” +“Yes, I did sense the smell of fresh human blood in the air. Do you suppose we missed one?” +“Only one way to find out!” + +At this point you start to back away as quickly as you can. You can’t even run due to the pain, but you try your best. Your best isn’t good enough though, as the dwellers of the farmhouse have exited and seen you. + +And as with everything that’s been fucked up today, the ones that just exited the farmhouse happen to be demons. One is a bigger brutish looking sort, while the other is smaller yet definitely still more muscular than you. + +“Well what do we have here? Wounded meat? I say he gets to that rock before you can catch him and pull out his heart.” +“Hah! I’ll take that bet!” + +The bigger one starts to walk towards you, but will undoubtedly quicken his pace soon. +> Try to outrun the demon +Fear griping your heart, you struggle and push yourself to run as fast as you can in your condition. + +Soon something else is gripping your heart. + +You look down at your chest and see your bloody still beating heart outside of where it is normally supposed to be. The demon fist holding it squeezes your heart a bit first before crushing it completely before your eyes. You die soon afterwards. + +“Hah! I told you I could reach him before he got to the rock!” the demon laughs as he lets his arm slide out of your dead slumping body.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There’s undead all around you, fear coursing through your body and all you can think of is escape. You see a few others following orders, but their shots do nothing. Apparently the Necromancer has protected himself behind a more powerful magic shield than the cleric you saw die had. Even Wessel’s spell dissipates before it. + +You ignore your orders, you ignore your fellow soldiers, you ignore the attack on Nuro, and you run and you’re not a bit ashamed to put your survival first. + +The chaos of the fighting is bewildering and you don’t really pay attention to what direction you’re heading, you’re just making a beeline to any destination not completely filled with zombies, ghosts, and skeletons. You look back, only to see more death. The hooded figure on top of the battlements calls down some sort of death cloud that begins to envelop the area you were previously in. The screams of the distant victims are horrible. + +You feel like you’re living a nightmare as you constantly bump into corpses, both moving and unmoving. Defensive chops with your sword do nothing to kill the unnatural creatures and only temporarily push them out of your way. It is only by sheer luck that you get away without getting killed. + +You run further, leaving the carnage behind. You look back again to see if anything is in pursuit, but nothing is to your relief. Still, you’re not comfortable and you continue to distance yourself until you can run no further and you must stop to rest. + +It is at this point, you wonder what you’re going to do. You wonder if going back to report to the nearest Zalan commander would be wise. Will they punish you for running away? The situation was hopeless, surely they couldn’t...could they? And even if they don’t, then what? Send you back in? That’s definitely not appealing given what you’ve seen. + +At this point you’re really regretting your decision to join the army. You wish you could just leave. You want to go home. + +Going AWOL back in Retlad wasn’t really an option; you would’ve been hunted down. But now? You probably would be listed as a casualty. You could theoretically disappear and attempt to live anonymously and do what you wanted to do in the first place. Just travel and play. Your family would even be compensated for your death, but still…you’d hate to put them through the grief of it, if it isn’t true. + +Before you ponder your future options any further, you suddenly feel a pain in your side…you look down and see that you’re bleeding. Apparently you were stabbed and didn’t even realize it due to the adrenaline. You’re feeling the pain now though and you attempt to stop the bleeding as much as you can. + +Regardless of what you’re going to do in the future, right now you have to find civilization to at least get fixed up. The problem is that you don’t know where the hell you are. You look around for some possible landmarks, but you’re not seeing anything familiar. Lacking any other ideas, you start walking in the general direction of where you think the Zalan Empire is located. + +You walk for a few hours and the pain is getting worse. You start thinking that you might not get the chance to worry anymore about your potential future, but a farm house in the distance gives you a little hope and you press on. + +You get close to the front porch and that’s when you stop. The front door is broken off its hinges and a few windows are also broken. You also notice a leg lying in the grass near you. Worse, whatever did this is apparently still around judging by the loud voices you’re hearing from inside. + +“Ha ha! Human women are such squealers! Not as much fun as elven women though!” +“Oh that’s real original. Why is everyone always got such a fucking hard on for elven women? Too damn fragile if you ask me.” +“Go fucking rape a troll girl then.” +“Huh. Easier said than done my unimaginative friend. I tried that once and almost got married.” +“HAHAHAHA! See I told you this would be more fun than following Velzix…hey you smell that?” +“Yes, I did sense the smell of fresh human blood in the air. Do you suppose we missed one?” +“Only one way to find out!” + +At this point you start to back away as quickly as you can. You can’t even run due to the pain, but you try your best. Your best isn’t good enough though, as the dwellers of the farmhouse have exited and seen you. + +And as with everything that’s been fucked up today, the ones that just exited the farmhouse happen to be demons. One is a bigger brutish looking sort, while the other is smaller yet definitely still more muscular than you. + +“Well what do we have here? Wounded meat? I say he gets to that rock before you can catch him and pull out his heart.” +“Hah! I’ll take that bet!” + +The bigger one starts to walk towards you, but will undoubtedly quicken his pace soon. +> Stand and fight +Demons are a lot faster than the undead and you’re wounded, no way are you going to be able to outrun them. You turn around and draw your bow, trying to ignore your pain which is overriding any fear you have at this point. Your weakened state is causing you to have a hard time aiming. + +“Uh oh, better be careful, looks like this one is going to put up a fight. I’d say by his uniform that he’s a soldier.” +“Hur hur. Good. Hey human, better stop wobbling if you’re going to aim that thing properly.” + +You miss the demon completely. + +“Hah! You want me to walk slower human?” +”You sure you should be playing with him like that? Don’t you remember what happened earlier today?” +“Shut up! I told ya, that bitch musta had some magical powers because…OW!” + +You hit the demon in the chest, but it doesn’t seem much damage. He pulls out the arrow and now begins to quicken his pace. The other demon starts to walk towards you as well. + +“See, I told you to pay attention.” +“Bah! If this is the extent of what his little pig sticker can do, I’m not concerned. Hey human, don’t you know they’re doing great things with gunpower these days? RAAAAGH!” + +The big demon suddenly charges you, and you let your arrow fly. Right in the eye. + +“Perfect.” You whisper. + +The demon bellows, but it doesn’t slow him down. You narrowly dodge his charge. You roll on the ground and shoot two more arrows in his back. He turns around snarling and bellowing for your blood. More arrows fly into the creature, but at last the demon has reached you and smacks you to the ground. Your bow flies from your hand, and while crawling on the ground you try to draw your sword, but a crushing blow hits you on the back. This might’ve caused a lot more damage, but miraculously the lute that’s still in your pack “softens” the blow. The crunching of wood signifies that it’s broken though. + +“What the fuck, that’s a weird noise…what is this? HA HA HA! Hey! You gotta be shittin’ me! A fuckin’ lute? Check this out! He’s carrying a fuckin’ lute! What’s a fucking soldier doin’ with a lute?” the big demon shouts to his acquaintance while he holds up your broken instrument. +“Don’t talk you idiot! LOOK OUT!” his acquaintance shouts, just as you recover long enough to shove your sword straight into the demon’s groin. You push the sword upward in an attempt to do more damage and you succeed. Blood is flying everywhere and the demon howls in pain from the grievous wound. You pull your sword out and then proceed to repeatedly stab the demon until it falls backwards on the ground, dead. + +You’re exhausted; you used all your remaining strength killing the thing. Unfortunately the other demon grabs you by the scruff like a helpless kitten and lifts you up off the ground a few inches. He knocks your sword out of your hand and looks at his fallen comrade. +“Hmm, can’t say I didn’t warn him. Oh well, more meat for me. This may hurt a lot…” + +Fully expecting the death that you’ve managed to avoid for so long, you once again evade it when a gunshot rings out and part of the demon’s head splatters in your face. You’re dropped immediately. The demon’s body is still standing though. + +“Shoot the bastard again!” you hear a gruff voice shout and this time the next shot hits chest and the demon falls. + +You lay motionless on the ground, looking up in the sky when your saviors come up to you. It’s a group of dwarves armed with gun powder weapons. + +“By the gods, get doc out here! We need to fix this man up! Hey lad, you’ll be alright, don’t worry…are you a Zalan soldier?” one of the dwarves asks you. +“…yeah…Nuro…lost…all dead…” is all you utter before fall into unconsciousness. + +A few days pass before you’re somewhat back to a coherent state. You find yourself in a military outpost and at this point you don’t care. You’re just happy to be alive. + +It would seem that during your escape from Nuro, you ran in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom, the dwarven scouts that found you were from a small neutral kingdom trying its best to stay out of the dispute between Tulan and Zalan, but the new threat of demons running all over the nearby countryside caused them to increase patrols. They fixed you up, but dropped you off at the closest Zalan Fort. The Zalan fort that you’re in right now is called Virtue and it’s on the Tulan border. It seems relatively calm though. Not at all what you thought it would be. + +When one of the healers comes in to check on you, you begin to ask questions which she tries to answer to get you up to speed. + +The Tulan Kingdom is currently under attack from the demons now. They’ve been assaulting the place and even gaining help from some of the evil populace there. The demon citizens there have reverted back to their “bad behavior” and thrown their lot in with the invaders as well. That doesn’t surprise you. The Tulan Kingdom pulled back some of their military from the borders so the fighting hasn’t been as bad and Zalan’s made a little more progress during this time, but the military minds are being cautious not to over extend. There is extreme concern over the recent demon invasion, not to mention the incident at Nuro. Word has already spread about the unsuccessful siege there. + +The healer also tells you that a few Zalan “high ups” are eager to speak to you soon, as they want to know what exactly happened at Nuro. You’re somewhat of an important survivor since as far as anyone knows; you were the only one to successfully escape that killing zone. There’s also talk of a “Grand Alliance” being created to counter these new threats. + +While the healer talks you end up drifting back to sleep wishing you could just escape it all. + +One year passes… + +You’re still at Fort Virtue and it doesn’t look like you’ll be leaving the army anytime soon. + +You couldn’t have been more wrong on your belief that you’d get executed for cowardice. You got promoted to sergeant instead, which in light of the current situation, is nearly the same thing. + +Your promotion came after several Zalan officers spoke to you about Nuro. You even got a medal. + +Stories and rumors creep around about how against all odds you survived an undead onslaught and fought off a bunch of demons as well. Your past “reputation” from your time in Retlad is exaggerated as well. It doesn’t help that the citizens there remember you and are all willing to add to the exaggeration. + +All of these stories have been woven together in such an elaborate way to make you seem like some kind of hero most likely for propaganda purposes. And you know you’re not hero. In fact you try to explain you aren’t a hero to people, but they think you’re just being modest, eventually you give up. + +Your assignment at Virtue hasn’t been uneventful. There’s fighting, but now it’s mainly demon commanded enemies rather than Tulan ones. Some demon lord called Velzix killed the royalty there, completely conquered the area and made it his realm. The border war continues under new management except now it’s more than just a border that the enemy is looking to take. Your superior, Captain Eckard reminds you of Valhlat except with a different name. You suppose there is a certain “cookie cutter” that occurs within the Zalan army that causes people to act the same. You’ve briefly wondered if you ever make that rank, you’ll act the same way. You then usually laugh at the very fact that you ever would. + +Fort Virtue hasn’t suffered a really bad attack yet, and it’s mostly skirmishes, but it’s like waiting for the other shoe to drop. You routinely go on patrols and give orders which you didn’t think you’d be good at, but you think back to how you used to order your brothers and sisters around and perhaps you always had a bit a leadership skill, you just didn’t want it. + +You thought that you’d be able to at least visit your family, but of course due to recent events, you’re ordered to stay put. Your family at least is getting more money from your pay increase. They even send a new lute for you after you told them of the unfortunate event that resulted in the destruction of your last one. This gives you a little pleasure in a relatively joyless assignment. + +All in all, you still prefer it compared to being in the unsuccessful assaults on Nuro. The Grand Alliance that was formed hasn’t been too successful as every one has been a slaughter from what you’ve heard. You already went through that once. You don’t relish the idea of going through it again. + +One day while you’re spending your free time practicing a new song, some new soldiers come into the fort. They look like they’ve just seen a vicious battle and are here to restock. One of them sees you and gives you a disapproving look. It’s a woman with striking good looks, but definitely carrying an air of leadership about her. Her rank signifies her as a captain…yep same cookie cutter, just a little prettier. + +“You there! What are you doing playing an instrument? Shouldn’t you be on watch or doing something more constructive with your time soldier? And you’re a sergeant? You should know better!” +“I’m not on watch duty right now and…” + +The woman doesn’t even let you finish your explanation. Other soldiers that were sitting in your area are now slowly creeping out of the fray. Even her own soldiers are creeping away. They probably know all too well of how she acts. + +“So? You think evil is going to wait around for you to be ready for battle? Where is your superior officer? I can’t believe they would allow such a relaxed attitude around here considering the importance of this fort! If you were serving under me, I’d have you flogged for your lack of discipline!” +> Point her in the direction of your captain +Shrugging your shoulders you point her in the direction of Captain Eckard to which she immediately marches off to. You don’t think anything will come of it though. You do your job and Eckard’s always been alright with you for the most part. At most you’ll get him yelling at you for getting into a conflict with a superior officer. + +Your thoughts are wrong however. + +When the female captain confronts Eckard, she and he end up getting into a greater argument. Apparently they’ve been minor rivals in the past and this “lack of discipline” displayed by you just fuels her arguments that he isn’t a fit for commanding a fort. + +She eventually leaves in a huff with her men, but still arguing with Eckard and saying that she’ll see that he’s relieved of his command and replaced with someone more competent. + +Captain Eckard is also now pissed at you for bringing this on him, he takes your lute away, breaks it and tells you that you won’t be playing anymore and if he catches you doing it again he’ll have you whipped. + +A few months pass as normal, but then the other boot finally drops. Whatever connections the female Captain had she’s used them, and Captain Eckard is demoted and transferred out of the fort along with some of the others who seemed to be “disciplinary problems”. Guess who’s name showed up on that list? + +You’re all transferred to areas where the fighting is a lot worse. You are sent to the Nuro front much to your dismay. Once again you’re fighting hordes of undead on a mass scale. Never having fully gotten over your first conflict at Nuro, your nerves and well being in general is always on the verge of breaking with each skirmish and battle. You don’t even have your music to keep you in a calm state of mind anymore either. It’s actually amazing you survive. + +You soon hear about how the Grand Alliance outsted a necromancer called Trelik from the Brot Kingdom. That makes you feel somewhat better, but that hopefulness is soon brought low when you hear about the successful attack on Brot that happens soon afterwards. A Necromancer from Nuro reportedly conquered the entire Kingdom with undead giants. + +Your morale is further lowered when you hear that your company is being sent to help the Grand Alliance take it back again. + +When you actually see the dead monstrosities, your fragile will shatters completely. + +When the battle commences, you’re just about useless in battle. Your dumb luck also runs out and you’re unable to fight or even retreat your way out of this one. The undead giants might be big, but they’re also faster than what they appear to be. + +One of them charges into your company line which at this point is trying to get out of the way and swings his club striking several. You being among them. + +You eventually land several feet away from the main part of the fighting, broken and bloody. You’re unable to move and just quietly moan in pain until you bleed out and die from your extensive wounds. You’re not even useful for the Necromancer to raise for his ever growing army.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Demons are a lot faster than the undead and you’re wounded, no way are you going to be able to outrun them. You turn around and draw your bow, trying to ignore your pain which is overriding any fear you have at this point. Your weakened state is causing you to have a hard time aiming. + +“Uh oh, better be careful, looks like this one is going to put up a fight. I’d say by his uniform that he’s a soldier.” +“Hur hur. Good. Hey human, better stop wobbling if you’re going to aim that thing properly.” + +You miss the demon completely. + +“Hah! You want me to walk slower human?” +”You sure you should be playing with him like that? Don’t you remember what happened earlier today?” +“Shut up! I told ya, that bitch musta had some magical powers because…OW!” + +You hit the demon in the chest, but it doesn’t seem much damage. He pulls out the arrow and now begins to quicken his pace. The other demon starts to walk towards you as well. + +“See, I told you to pay attention.” +“Bah! If this is the extent of what his little pig sticker can do, I’m not concerned. Hey human, don’t you know they’re doing great things with gunpower these days? RAAAAGH!” + +The big demon suddenly charges you, and you let your arrow fly. Right in the eye. + +“Perfect.” You whisper. + +The demon bellows, but it doesn’t slow him down. You narrowly dodge his charge. You roll on the ground and shoot two more arrows in his back. He turns around snarling and bellowing for your blood. More arrows fly into the creature, but at last the demon has reached you and smacks you to the ground. Your bow flies from your hand, and while crawling on the ground you try to draw your sword, but a crushing blow hits you on the back. This might’ve caused a lot more damage, but miraculously the lute that’s still in your pack “softens” the blow. The crunching of wood signifies that it’s broken though. + +“What the fuck, that’s a weird noise…what is this? HA HA HA! Hey! You gotta be shittin’ me! A fuckin’ lute? Check this out! He’s carrying a fuckin’ lute! What’s a fucking soldier doin’ with a lute?” the big demon shouts to his acquaintance while he holds up your broken instrument. +“Don’t talk you idiot! LOOK OUT!” his acquaintance shouts, just as you recover long enough to shove your sword straight into the demon’s groin. You push the sword upward in an attempt to do more damage and you succeed. Blood is flying everywhere and the demon howls in pain from the grievous wound. You pull your sword out and then proceed to repeatedly stab the demon until it falls backwards on the ground, dead. + +You’re exhausted; you used all your remaining strength killing the thing. Unfortunately the other demon grabs you by the scruff like a helpless kitten and lifts you up off the ground a few inches. He knocks your sword out of your hand and looks at his fallen comrade. +“Hmm, can’t say I didn’t warn him. Oh well, more meat for me. This may hurt a lot…” + +Fully expecting the death that you’ve managed to avoid for so long, you once again evade it when a gunshot rings out and part of the demon’s head splatters in your face. You’re dropped immediately. The demon’s body is still standing though. + +“Shoot the bastard again!” you hear a gruff voice shout and this time the next shot hits chest and the demon falls. + +You lay motionless on the ground, looking up in the sky when your saviors come up to you. It’s a group of dwarves armed with gun powder weapons. + +“By the gods, get doc out here! We need to fix this man up! Hey lad, you’ll be alright, don’t worry…are you a Zalan soldier?” one of the dwarves asks you. +“…yeah…Nuro…lost…all dead…” is all you utter before fall into unconsciousness. + +A few days pass before you’re somewhat back to a coherent state. You find yourself in a military outpost and at this point you don’t care. You’re just happy to be alive. + +It would seem that during your escape from Nuro, you ran in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom, the dwarven scouts that found you were from a small neutral kingdom trying its best to stay out of the dispute between Tulan and Zalan, but the new threat of demons running all over the nearby countryside caused them to increase patrols. They fixed you up, but dropped you off at the closest Zalan Fort. The Zalan fort that you’re in right now is called Virtue and it’s on the Tulan border. It seems relatively calm though. Not at all what you thought it would be. + +When one of the healers comes in to check on you, you begin to ask questions which she tries to answer to get you up to speed. + +The Tulan Kingdom is currently under attack from the demons now. They’ve been assaulting the place and even gaining help from some of the evil populace there. The demon citizens there have reverted back to their “bad behavior” and thrown their lot in with the invaders as well. That doesn’t surprise you. The Tulan Kingdom pulled back some of their military from the borders so the fighting hasn’t been as bad and Zalan’s made a little more progress during this time, but the military minds are being cautious not to over extend. There is extreme concern over the recent demon invasion, not to mention the incident at Nuro. Word has already spread about the unsuccessful siege there. + +The healer also tells you that a few Zalan “high ups” are eager to speak to you soon, as they want to know what exactly happened at Nuro. You’re somewhat of an important survivor since as far as anyone knows; you were the only one to successfully escape that killing zone. There’s also talk of a “Grand Alliance” being created to counter these new threats. + +While the healer talks you end up drifting back to sleep wishing you could just escape it all. + +One year passes… + +You’re still at Fort Virtue and it doesn’t look like you’ll be leaving the army anytime soon. + +You couldn’t have been more wrong on your belief that you’d get executed for cowardice. You got promoted to sergeant instead, which in light of the current situation, is nearly the same thing. + +Your promotion came after several Zalan officers spoke to you about Nuro. You even got a medal. + +Stories and rumors creep around about how against all odds you survived an undead onslaught and fought off a bunch of demons as well. Your past “reputation” from your time in Retlad is exaggerated as well. It doesn’t help that the citizens there remember you and are all willing to add to the exaggeration. + +All of these stories have been woven together in such an elaborate way to make you seem like some kind of hero most likely for propaganda purposes. And you know you’re not hero. In fact you try to explain you aren’t a hero to people, but they think you’re just being modest, eventually you give up. + +Your assignment at Virtue hasn’t been uneventful. There’s fighting, but now it’s mainly demon commanded enemies rather than Tulan ones. Some demon lord called Velzix killed the royalty there, completely conquered the area and made it his realm. The border war continues under new management except now it’s more than just a border that the enemy is looking to take. Your superior, Captain Eckard reminds you of Valhlat except with a different name. You suppose there is a certain “cookie cutter” that occurs within the Zalan army that causes people to act the same. You’ve briefly wondered if you ever make that rank, you’ll act the same way. You then usually laugh at the very fact that you ever would. + +Fort Virtue hasn’t suffered a really bad attack yet, and it’s mostly skirmishes, but it’s like waiting for the other shoe to drop. You routinely go on patrols and give orders which you didn’t think you’d be good at, but you think back to how you used to order your brothers and sisters around and perhaps you always had a bit a leadership skill, you just didn’t want it. + +You thought that you’d be able to at least visit your family, but of course due to recent events, you’re ordered to stay put. Your family at least is getting more money from your pay increase. They even send a new lute for you after you told them of the unfortunate event that resulted in the destruction of your last one. This gives you a little pleasure in a relatively joyless assignment. + +All in all, you still prefer it compared to being in the unsuccessful assaults on Nuro. The Grand Alliance that was formed hasn’t been too successful as every one has been a slaughter from what you’ve heard. You already went through that once. You don’t relish the idea of going through it again. + +One day while you’re spending your free time practicing a new song, some new soldiers come into the fort. They look like they’ve just seen a vicious battle and are here to restock. One of them sees you and gives you a disapproving look. It’s a woman with striking good looks, but definitely carrying an air of leadership about her. Her rank signifies her as a captain…yep same cookie cutter, just a little prettier. + +“You there! What are you doing playing an instrument? Shouldn’t you be on watch or doing something more constructive with your time soldier? And you’re a sergeant? You should know better!” +“I’m not on watch duty right now and…” + +The woman doesn’t even let you finish your explanation. Other soldiers that were sitting in your area are now slowly creeping out of the fray. Even her own soldiers are creeping away. They probably know all too well of how she acts. + +“So? You think evil is going to wait around for you to be ready for battle? Where is your superior officer? I can’t believe they would allow such a relaxed attitude around here considering the importance of this fort! If you were serving under me, I’d have you flogged for your lack of discipline!” +> Argue with her +You’ve served in this army well and always done your job regardless of the shitty situations you’ve been in. You might not like a lot of it, but you’ve never complained. Lately you’ve been on edge about a possible all out assault of some big ass demon army that’s going to attack any day now, and playing is one of the few pleasures you have to put your mind at ease. + +Perhaps it’s a combination of this and a combination of this unwanted and unnecessary scolding that causes you to speak out of turn. + +“With all due respect ma’am, I am fully prepared to battle at a moment’s notice and so are those under my direct command. But even soldiers need to rest, if only for a minute.” + +The woman looks very surprised you didn’t comply with her demand to see your superior officer. + +“…you DARE speak out of turn like that to me? I’ll see you sent to the Nuro Front for that sort of insubordination! Then we’d see just how battle ready you are! How would you like that?” +“I wouldn’t like it at all. I barely survived the first time.” You say trying not to express any fear. +“…What? What are you talking about? First time?” + +Now you’re a little surprised she doesn’t know who you are considering how some of the high ups exaggerated about how you managed to survive. You explain yourself briefly and she doesn’t quite believe you at first, a couple of your troops hiding nearby at least back up your claims before slinking off. + +“That was YOU? What the hell are you doing here? You should be leading from the front not languishing in some fort that barely sees battle!” +“Doesn’t see battle? We suffered a small demon raid last week! We see plenty of battle!” +“What I mean is, somebody of your obvious combat and survival skills should be assigned on the front lines where you can do more good. Normally I don’t question Zalan command, but this is really an oversight on their part.” +“Well maybe they know better than the both of us, besides this assignment isn’t a walk in the fairy fields. I think we’ll be suffering a grand scale attack any day now.” +“Doubt it. Velzix has been having a hard time keeping his unruly mob together. If it wasn’t for a lot of the sycophantic Tulan citizens, he’d probably be confined to pure defense, though something will have to be done soon, reports say he’s attempting to gate in more demons everyday. Not to mention that supposedly civilized demons from other nations are starting to display their true colors and flock to his banner. Like I always said the only good demon is a dead one!” + +This causes you to smile a bit and she very faintly smiles back when she sees that you feel the same way. This smile disappears quickly though as she continues her rant. + +“I wish I wasn’t assigned to the Tulan Border though. I’d rather be taking Nuro back. THAT’S the more dangerous threat. The demons will kill themselves with their own chaotic and violent natures, but the undead…they’ve almost taken over the world before just because of one bastard that lead them. I never thought I’d see a serious threat like this in my lifetime, especially not…” + +The female captain at this point stops. She even looks away from you as if whatever she was going to say was just too much even for her. She seems to be a lot more battle hardened than you and probably ten times braver. You can’t imagine what horror she experienced that would be worse than your own, but you don’t find out since she changes the subject. + +“…Bah! Maybe you’re right; a soldier does need to keep their mind occupied on other things every now and then. We aren’t undead after all. So what’s with the lute? You also a bard or something?” she laughs. +“No, I think those dreams are long gone, but my playing seems to boost spirits around here a little, which can only be a good thing in this situation.” +“Hm. My mother was elven and she used to sing this song to me and my…brother when we were very young. It was very smooth and calming. Beautiful melody.” +“Yeah, most elven music is like that. When I was assigned in Retlad I learned a few elven songs from a few of the citizens there, you wouldn’t happen to know the song would you?” + +She tells you the name of the song and you know it immediately. One of the first new songs you learned while stationed in Retlad actually. This seems cause her to momentarily revert to a less stand offish behavior. You’re about to play it for her, but then a messenger comes running up handing her a note. She reads it and she’s all business again. + +“Alright men! We’re moving out!” she shouts and leaves without saying another word to you. You didn’t even learn her name. + +Perhaps it’s just as well; you’ll most likely never meet again due to one of you dying on the battlefield. You go back to doing what you were doing. + +Two years pass… + +Three years since the Nuro Incident and this struggle still continues. + +You’re still stationed Fort Virtue and you’ve repelled more demon attacks than you would care to count. Velzix has finally gotten his shit together completely. A unified demonic front is in full swing here and its taking its toll. Once again your skills have come in very handy in defense. You are certainly known as a demon slayer, but you still don’t feel like a hero of any kind. You’re just trying to do your job and survive. You save lives when you can, but you know ultimately it’s a futile task as death seems to be everywhere nowadays. + +As bad as it is on the demon front, its nothing compared to what’ve you’ve heard on the undead front. The Necromancer has finally broken out from Nuro, and successfully attacked the Kingdom of Brot. Several undead giants demolished the area. You’ve never even seen a living giant and they sound intimidating. You can’t even imagine an undead one. The power to raise one, let alone several is sort of scary. The Grand Alliance army didn’t get there in time to stop him and as usual they were repelled when they arrived. + +You worry about the Grand Alliance failing to stop the undead horde. You hope it doesn’t get any closer to the Zalan Empire where your family might be in danger. + +Sometimes you worry so much that you can’t sleep, not that you do much of that nowadays anyway. Normally you play to keep your mind at ease, but tonight you go to the archery range to keep yourself focused. + +For a long time you’re by yourself, but suddenly you feel a creeping suspicion someone is watching you… + +You turn around with your bow and see a pale man. He holds up his hands. + +“Hey now! Don’t shoot! Sorry for creeping around like that. Professional habit.” He says. +“What? Who are you?” you demand. +“Warnov. Zalan Intelligence.” +“You’re a spy?” +“Well I suppose you could put it that way. I was here to give some info to your Captain Eckard, and I also wanted to take a look around the fort. Didn’t think anyone would be on the range though. Nice shooting, I know who you are and heard about your marksmanship with a bow. You’re certainly doing your part with the demons around here.” + +Despite the fact that you’re talking to a spy, you feel the need to vent your feelings. + +“Yeah, well I hope the Grand Alliance starts doing its part. I mean what the fuck are they doing? Weren’t they created to put a stop to all this shit? I mean am I supposed to worry every day if that undead horde is going to get closer to the Zalan Empire where it can threaten my family?” + +Warnov doesn’t look offended by your words, if anything he looks intrigued. + +“Well, I can understand why you’re venting. Trust me I sympathize. But as part of intel, I can tell you its not that easy…there were a lot of surprises that weren’t accounted for. We’re doing our best to rectify this situation by gathering as much info as possible. In fact, you could help us…” +“Excuse me? How?” + +Warnov looks around and gets closer before speaking. + +“Look, as I said, I know all about you and your skills, why you joined, all of it. I know you don’t much care for some of the propaganda made about some of your exploits. But it’s important to realize that deeds like yours must be blown up a little to give common people hope that ultimately good will win the day. You may not consider yourself a hero of any kind, but your actions aren’t without some of those qualities. You obviously care very much about your family, and I’ve heard how you try to keep the people under your command alive. Sound like heroic qualities to me. Perhaps they’re on a smaller scale, but they’re there. I’m betting that there’s a BIGGER hero in there somewhere, just itching to get out. You think the Grand Alliance isn’t doing a good job? Perhaps we can arrange something for you to be transferred into it, or maybe you’d like to take an even more direct approach.” +“What do you mean?” + +Warnov suddenly backs away. + +“Before we go any further. I need to know are you willing to take up the mantle of being a hero. Because if you aren’t, then we have nothing more to discuss. I shall require an answer now.” +> Decline the offer +You have to admit, the idea has crossed your mind a bit. A small part of you does wonder about embracing the whole hero image and deliberately doing grand deeds that go beyond the call of your duty. You suppose that you’d at least really feel like one if you did that. + +However, more often than not real heroes don’t live long. You’re wondering what exactly this Mr. Warnov has in mind for you and given his demeanor, his appearance and just your own feelings of uncertainty about him, you decline. You know your limitations even if others don’t see them. So, no you won’t be hunting down some artifact of unlimited power and then single handedly taking out a Demon Lord or Necromancer Lord in their own throne room. + +“No, I don’t think so Mr. Warnov. As I’ve often said, I’m no hero. I’m just doing my job and providing for my family.” + +Mr. Warnov looks disappointed and sighs, but accepts your decision. + +“Very well. This is a shame though. Despite your humble birth you seem to have lots of potential. You could’ve made an excellent addition to our…organization. I’ve also heard your lute playing wasn’t bad either, we don’t have any musically talented types anymore…oh well.” + +Mr. Warnov leaves rather quickly after his last statement. Something about him seemed very odd and you’re sort of glad you didn’t take his offer. You go back to your target practice for awhile when you suddenly hear an alarm cry out loudly through the fort about a small demon army being sighted over the hill. + +“Well back to work…” you say and prepare for battle once again. + +Two years pass… + +It’s been five years since the Nuro Incident and things have gotten worse. + +Both the Necromancer Lord and Velzix have made progress. Too much. The Grand Alliance hasn’t been able to do anything except fight them to a stalemate. All three sides are looking to gain an advantage and somehow you don’t think it’ll be yours. + +The Zalan Empire has become increasingly totalitarian. It’s been increasing its influence over how the Grand Alliance should be run and its strategies. Some of Zalan’s officers have been transferred to become more prominent in leading and commanding the bulk of the Grand Alliance army. You’re not sure if this isn’t a bad idea. Bullying or not, one final voice in matters would probably help the Grand Alliance at this point. There’s been some grumbling by other nations though. + +However it’s also begun several repressive internal measures to keep itself safe. Your mom has mentioned in letters back to you of seeing routine patrols now near the farm. Talks of seizing private property for the good of the Empire are being discussed. You don’t really like the sound of that, but it’s not really like you can do anything about it. You can only take solace in the fact that being part of the Zalan army will at least result in your family not becoming homeless. They would probably still be able to live and work on the farm…it just wouldn’t be your family’s anymore. There’s also talk of a draft. You don’t like the sound of that either. Your brother Mallack would certainly be conscripted now. You can’t imagine him dealing with the things you’ve had to face. You hope it doesn’t come to that. + +Your position at Virtue is looking worse and worse each day. Parts of the fort are severely damaged, you’re short on man power and you don’t even have any decent wizards or healers. You’ve attempted to talk to Captain Eckard about withdrawing and falling back to a safer position, but he won’t hear of it. This fort is NOT to be abandoned. + +The only good thing is that there’s apparently been a small contingent of mercenaries severely messing up things for Velzix in his own territory. They must be incredibly brave or completely mad for Zalan gold to perform such a task. You can’t help but think that maybe YOU would be there right along side them, if you’d joined up with that mercenary company years ago. A sobering thought. + +Time to go on patrol again. You gather up some soldiers and get ready. You look at all of them and wonder which ones won’t be coming back this time. You look at yourself and wonder if you will. A few years ago, everyone coming back alive was at least a possibility, but now it’s not even certain. + +You go out and change up your routine path again. Always have to be different, can’t become predictable. + +A couple of imps attack. Nothing to worry about. Easily dispatched. You know you’ll encounter worse before the day is over though. + +A group of Tulan “citizens” led by their demon overseer attacks you next. Made up of hapless slaves and misguided idiots who think serving the demons is going to pan out in the long run. + +Finally you come across something a little more unusual. A small group of dwarves fighting off a large demon ambush. They look ragged, wounded and in dire need of help. So you help them. + +You unleash five arrows into the head of an Eviscerator before two of your number are fried by a hellfire blast from a Flame Child. The fighting doesn’t get any cleaner from there. You see another one of your members getting shredded, before a path is cleared for the dwarves to follow you back to the fort. One of their own chooses to stay behind to give the rest a chance to escape. As all of you run, a large explosion is heard followed by several yelps, howls and screams. The dwarf has blown himself up with whatever explosives the dwarves are fond of making. + +Finally you get back to the fort where it’s relatively safe, and all you’re thinking about is how you’ll have to do this all over again tomorrow. You retire to your private room where you play your lute and hope you aren’t disturbed by another attack on the fort. Happily, that doesn’t happen, but you are disturbed by one of the dwarves you rescued earlier instead. He’s come to thank you. + +“Hey lad, I just want to say thanks to your actions at least a few of us survived from our clan. Such as it is now. Something about you looks very familiar. Normally you humans all look the same but…ah hah! You’re that lad who I saved near that farm five years ago! Looks like you returned the favor! Stagir’s the name.” + +You didn’t realize it either, but then with all the fighting and the chaos you’d barely survived during that particular day, you weren’t really paying attention to faces. You were just glad someone came along when they did. + +“Yeah…small world I guess. So what happened to your clan?” +“Wiped out lad.” Stagir says mournfully. “At least when you humans were fighting each other you didn’t mess with us, but getting caught between the undead and demons…well it’s a bit different.” +“The undead are that far now?” you ask. +“Aye. They and the demons have been involved in skirmishes here and there. Got no problem with evil fighting evil, but it was just our bad luck that my clan was caught in the middle. The demons are evil incarnate to be sure, but the undead…I dunno. Something worse about them. In the final days, I had to kill clan members who I once called friends and family because of the fucking necromancers raising them from the dead. Some stayed behind to fight since they refused to run. They’d rather die than run from their home. Normally I’d agree, but after seeing that this was a losing battle, some of us decided that it would be better to run. After all we would just be raised again to be used as puppets of the necromancers when we die. Not even free will to choose, or the threat of a demon’s whip. You just become one of them. Can’t let that happen to me. Never.” + +You know something of it, having had to do a little of that five years ago at Nuro, but actually killing undead parodies of family members would be pretty horrific. + +Stagir attempts to lighten the mood a bit by asking you about what you were playing before he interrupted. When you tell him, he tiches and says something about how elven songs are nothing compared to dwarven ones. You never really thought of dwarves having a musical interest before, but Stagir boasts about how they have quite an extensive musical history. + +He takes the lute from you and shows you a couple of dwarven songs, breaking strings in the process. His insistent singing accompanying the songs isn’t exactly pleasant either. He complains about the human made strings not being strong enough to play the songs properly, but thanks you again for saving his life before leaving. + +Every now and then you play these songs for your new dwarven allies who have taken it upon themselves to strengthen and rebuild the fort the “proper dwarf way”. They seem to appreciate it. You’re a little more careful with the strings and don’t indulge in the singing though. (But unfortunately for the rest of the fort, the dwarves do) + +A few months pass and the demon attacks seem to decrease. The strengthened fort certainly helps, but something else is going on. Eventually you’re seeing less and less of them. Eventually some ragged refugees come to the fort and after a bit of babbling and thanking the gods, a few of them explain. + +There are a couple of conflicting stories, but it would seem Velzix is dead! He was killed by something or someone. Consensus seems to be that the mercenary leader died in battle with him though. Without Velzix’s leadership the demons are fighting amongst themselves and the realm is in complete disarray. The Grand Alliance is taking steps to retake the land immediately before the Necromancer Lord gets it. The Zalan Empire in particular is closer though, so naturally YOUR nation is going to get that land first! + +While things may be looking up somewhat, they aren’t necessarily looking up for you. Captain Eckard has orders to begin an attack immediately. You aren’t looking forward to it mainly because you’ll probably encounter an undead army in the process. + +You don’t have a choice though except for what role you can serve. Thanks to your skills and rank. You can either lead troops as normal, or be part of a scouting party. +> Choose to lead rank and file +If its undead you’re going to face you decide you don’t want to get caught fighting them with only a few men to help you. Captain Eckard is a little surprised by your decision, but chooses a few others to be the reconnaissance group. + +Your replacements aren’t as good as you might’ve been however. Many times they fuck up and miss a few demon bands that were fleeing from the Tulan Kingdom and ambushing whoever passed by. It’s not too bad at first, but the closer you get to the capital, the more powerful these little groups are. The losses get more severe, but Captain Eckard insists on continuing. + +By the time you get to the capital during most of the citizens there have been so corrupted or beat down by the demons at this point that they’ve either sold their own souls to Hell or gone completely mad. You’re attacked by them and a few of the demon hold outs. Your own ranks have been severely weakened by this point. + +It’s during an ambush that you’re suddenly hit by a fireball from a flame demon who was sitting on top of a nearby rooftop. You run around screaming and trying to put out the flames, but a couple of flying imps throw spears into your back ensuring that you lie still as you finish burning to death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have to admit, the idea has crossed your mind a bit. A small part of you does wonder about embracing the whole hero image and deliberately doing grand deeds that go beyond the call of your duty. You suppose that you’d at least really feel like one if you did that. + +However, more often than not real heroes don’t live long. You’re wondering what exactly this Mr. Warnov has in mind for you and given his demeanor, his appearance and just your own feelings of uncertainty about him, you decline. You know your limitations even if others don’t see them. So, no you won’t be hunting down some artifact of unlimited power and then single handedly taking out a Demon Lord or Necromancer Lord in their own throne room. + +“No, I don’t think so Mr. Warnov. As I’ve often said, I’m no hero. I’m just doing my job and providing for my family.” + +Mr. Warnov looks disappointed and sighs, but accepts your decision. + +“Very well. This is a shame though. Despite your humble birth you seem to have lots of potential. You could’ve made an excellent addition to our…organization. I’ve also heard your lute playing wasn’t bad either, we don’t have any musically talented types anymore…oh well.” + +Mr. Warnov leaves rather quickly after his last statement. Something about him seemed very odd and you’re sort of glad you didn’t take his offer. You go back to your target practice for awhile when you suddenly hear an alarm cry out loudly through the fort about a small demon army being sighted over the hill. + +“Well back to work…” you say and prepare for battle once again. + +Two years pass… + +It’s been five years since the Nuro Incident and things have gotten worse. + +Both the Necromancer Lord and Velzix have made progress. Too much. The Grand Alliance hasn’t been able to do anything except fight them to a stalemate. All three sides are looking to gain an advantage and somehow you don’t think it’ll be yours. + +The Zalan Empire has become increasingly totalitarian. It’s been increasing its influence over how the Grand Alliance should be run and its strategies. Some of Zalan’s officers have been transferred to become more prominent in leading and commanding the bulk of the Grand Alliance army. You’re not sure if this isn’t a bad idea. Bullying or not, one final voice in matters would probably help the Grand Alliance at this point. There’s been some grumbling by other nations though. + +However it’s also begun several repressive internal measures to keep itself safe. Your mom has mentioned in letters back to you of seeing routine patrols now near the farm. Talks of seizing private property for the good of the Empire are being discussed. You don’t really like the sound of that, but it’s not really like you can do anything about it. You can only take solace in the fact that being part of the Zalan army will at least result in your family not becoming homeless. They would probably still be able to live and work on the farm…it just wouldn’t be your family’s anymore. There’s also talk of a draft. You don’t like the sound of that either. Your brother Mallack would certainly be conscripted now. You can’t imagine him dealing with the things you’ve had to face. You hope it doesn’t come to that. + +Your position at Virtue is looking worse and worse each day. Parts of the fort are severely damaged, you’re short on man power and you don’t even have any decent wizards or healers. You’ve attempted to talk to Captain Eckard about withdrawing and falling back to a safer position, but he won’t hear of it. This fort is NOT to be abandoned. + +The only good thing is that there’s apparently been a small contingent of mercenaries severely messing up things for Velzix in his own territory. They must be incredibly brave or completely mad for Zalan gold to perform such a task. You can’t help but think that maybe YOU would be there right along side them, if you’d joined up with that mercenary company years ago. A sobering thought. + +Time to go on patrol again. You gather up some soldiers and get ready. You look at all of them and wonder which ones won’t be coming back this time. You look at yourself and wonder if you will. A few years ago, everyone coming back alive was at least a possibility, but now it’s not even certain. + +You go out and change up your routine path again. Always have to be different, can’t become predictable. + +A couple of imps attack. Nothing to worry about. Easily dispatched. You know you’ll encounter worse before the day is over though. + +A group of Tulan “citizens” led by their demon overseer attacks you next. Made up of hapless slaves and misguided idiots who think serving the demons is going to pan out in the long run. + +Finally you come across something a little more unusual. A small group of dwarves fighting off a large demon ambush. They look ragged, wounded and in dire need of help. So you help them. + +You unleash five arrows into the head of an Eviscerator before two of your number are fried by a hellfire blast from a Flame Child. The fighting doesn’t get any cleaner from there. You see another one of your members getting shredded, before a path is cleared for the dwarves to follow you back to the fort. One of their own chooses to stay behind to give the rest a chance to escape. As all of you run, a large explosion is heard followed by several yelps, howls and screams. The dwarf has blown himself up with whatever explosives the dwarves are fond of making. + +Finally you get back to the fort where it’s relatively safe, and all you’re thinking about is how you’ll have to do this all over again tomorrow. You retire to your private room where you play your lute and hope you aren’t disturbed by another attack on the fort. Happily, that doesn’t happen, but you are disturbed by one of the dwarves you rescued earlier instead. He’s come to thank you. + +“Hey lad, I just want to say thanks to your actions at least a few of us survived from our clan. Such as it is now. Something about you looks very familiar. Normally you humans all look the same but…ah hah! You’re that lad who I saved near that farm five years ago! Looks like you returned the favor! Stagir’s the name.” + +You didn’t realize it either, but then with all the fighting and the chaos you’d barely survived during that particular day, you weren’t really paying attention to faces. You were just glad someone came along when they did. + +“Yeah…small world I guess. So what happened to your clan?” +“Wiped out lad.” Stagir says mournfully. “At least when you humans were fighting each other you didn’t mess with us, but getting caught between the undead and demons…well it’s a bit different.” +“The undead are that far now?” you ask. +“Aye. They and the demons have been involved in skirmishes here and there. Got no problem with evil fighting evil, but it was just our bad luck that my clan was caught in the middle. The demons are evil incarnate to be sure, but the undead…I dunno. Something worse about them. In the final days, I had to kill clan members who I once called friends and family because of the fucking necromancers raising them from the dead. Some stayed behind to fight since they refused to run. They’d rather die than run from their home. Normally I’d agree, but after seeing that this was a losing battle, some of us decided that it would be better to run. After all we would just be raised again to be used as puppets of the necromancers when we die. Not even free will to choose, or the threat of a demon’s whip. You just become one of them. Can’t let that happen to me. Never.” + +You know something of it, having had to do a little of that five years ago at Nuro, but actually killing undead parodies of family members would be pretty horrific. + +Stagir attempts to lighten the mood a bit by asking you about what you were playing before he interrupted. When you tell him, he tiches and says something about how elven songs are nothing compared to dwarven ones. You never really thought of dwarves having a musical interest before, but Stagir boasts about how they have quite an extensive musical history. + +He takes the lute from you and shows you a couple of dwarven songs, breaking strings in the process. His insistent singing accompanying the songs isn’t exactly pleasant either. He complains about the human made strings not being strong enough to play the songs properly, but thanks you again for saving his life before leaving. + +Every now and then you play these songs for your new dwarven allies who have taken it upon themselves to strengthen and rebuild the fort the “proper dwarf way”. They seem to appreciate it. You’re a little more careful with the strings and don’t indulge in the singing though. (But unfortunately for the rest of the fort, the dwarves do) + +A few months pass and the demon attacks seem to decrease. The strengthened fort certainly helps, but something else is going on. Eventually you’re seeing less and less of them. Eventually some ragged refugees come to the fort and after a bit of babbling and thanking the gods, a few of them explain. + +There are a couple of conflicting stories, but it would seem Velzix is dead! He was killed by something or someone. Consensus seems to be that the mercenary leader died in battle with him though. Without Velzix’s leadership the demons are fighting amongst themselves and the realm is in complete disarray. The Grand Alliance is taking steps to retake the land immediately before the Necromancer Lord gets it. The Zalan Empire in particular is closer though, so naturally YOUR nation is going to get that land first! + +While things may be looking up somewhat, they aren’t necessarily looking up for you. Captain Eckard has orders to begin an attack immediately. You aren’t looking forward to it mainly because you’ll probably encounter an undead army in the process. + +You don’t have a choice though except for what role you can serve. Thanks to your skills and rank. You can either lead troops as normal, or be part of a scouting party. +> Choose to scout +If you’ve learned one thing, numbers doesn’t necessarily imply safety. With all the years of patrolling you’ve done along with your previous actions in Retlad so long ago, you actually feel more comfortable in smaller groups at this point. Your one and only rank and file battle didn’t go well. + +Your choice isn’t surprising, if anything more people feel comfortable with you scouting ahead. + +As you journey further into former Tulan territory, you don’t encounter too much resistance. A few demons and crazed followers here and there, but nothing you can’t take care of. It also occurs to you how “planted” you’ve been for the past five years. While it’s true you did leave the fort a lot, you never ventured far from it. This is first time you’ve actually traveled. Ironic, since one of the reasons why you joined the army was the possibility of traveling to interesting places. + +However, it seems like you only visit these interesting places after they’re already destroyed. You’re basically seeing the aftermath of the demon occupation. It sort of reminds you of what you’d seen back in Retlad when the Quillars were killing folks except the landscape is in even worse condition. The demons weren’t content on just corrupting their mortal slaves; they were attempting to turn the entire land into their infernal realm. You can only imagine what sort of hell was going on while they were actually here. + +You get to a small town that’s completely wrecked and seemingly deserted. Its night time and normally you’d go back and wait until morning to scout it, but Captain Eckard is insistent on getting to the former Tulan capital as quick as possible. You split up into small groups to scout the town quicker and tell everyone that if they come across anything more then they can handle, to run and alert everyone else. + +You go building to building not really encountering much of anything. Not even survivors. Lots of half eaten dead bodies in various states of torment though. You expect when Velzix was killed the whole realm descended into anarchy pretty quickly and the demons reverted back to their chaotic natures causing as much mayhem as possible without too much repercussion. + +You enter a shop with two of your other team members. You hear a creaking sound, which doesn’t sound good. One of your team members goes a little further in, and it gets louder. + +“Step back! The floors is…” you utter and then a large portion of the floor collapses underneath him. You attempt to grab his hand, but fail and the rest of the floor collapses underneath you as well. + +You don’t fall too far, but you definitely feel it. You recover as quick as you can and hear your other subordinate who managed to avoid falling through the floor. + +“Sarge! Are you alright?” Private Ramusen shouts. +“Yeah, yeah private. I’m just a little bruised.” +“What about Gannon? Is he alright?” + +You take your tinder box and make a small light. You look around and see that you must be in the basement of some sort of music shop from all the instruments you see. You didn’t even notice when you first entered the place, it just looked like any other ransacked shop. + +Upon further inspection you see a body lying on the floor. It’s Private Gannon and he’s dead. He didn’t land in the “good way” you did and broke his neck. + +“He’s dead.” You call up to Ramusen. +“Shit! He’s fuckin’ dead?” +“Yeah private, I just said he was! Now let me get the hell out of here…fuck! The damn stairs are completely destroyed. I can’t climb up, or even attempt a jump. Ramusen, throw down a rope and make sure you really secure it!” + +While you wait for Ramusen to complete this task, you take a look at some of the instruments. Lots of flutes and other wind instruments that don’t interest you. You grab an old looking mandolin. It’s definitely human design, but it seems very ornate though, must’ve been a specialty piece that wasn’t for sale. + +You pluck at the strings and despite the dirt, grime, and neglect of the instrument; it still manages to produce a fairly pleasing tone. You play for a good five minutes before you realize that Ramusen hasn’t thrown down the rope yet. + +“Private?” is all you utter, when you hear the slumping of a lifeless body, followed by a low voice. + +“Beautiful…” + +You grab your bow, when you see a dark figure loom above you. You fire, but miss due to the figure dodging quicker than anything you’ve ever encountered before. It doesn’t help that this same figure has jumped down the hole beside you before you can blink. + +You’re standing right before the figure now. He has a pale, but familiar face, though the blood around the mouth is new and not encouraging. He knocks the bow out of your hand, but does nothing else to you. You wouldn’t be quick enough to draw your sword given what you’ve seen. In fact right now, all you’re feeling is fear. + +“Almost hit me…you would’ve made a good addition. Maybe you could’ve even…no. Nobody can. This world is lost now and soon my kind won’t even be around to guide your kind to combat the inevitable anymore…” Warnov says. +“What…what are you talking about?” you ask unsure what’s going to happen next. Warnov looks as if he could tell you more than you’d ever want to know about lots of things, but instead he just shakes his head. + +“Nevermind human. Telling you the whole story would not help you anyway. Perhaps it’s best you hadn’t joined us, seeing as I have been marked now. It won’t be long before the rest of my kind are hunted down. He’s really quite pissed at us, and worse, he can sense us you see…(sigh) I can only imagine what he did to poor Count Rostov…” +“Who’s pissed?” +“Who do you think human? The Necro…I mean the Great Lich Lord of course. Oh yes. He’s back…and this one isn’t going to lose like the last one did so long ago.” + +You’re not following all of Warnov’s cryptic speak, but if the last bit he’s said is true, he’s scared the hell out of you more than he has with his actions. Warnov grabs your shoulder and looks into your eyes. + +“I do not envy your fate human…the extinction of your species will soon follow my own. My advice to you? Live human! Live while you can, for eventually this whole world will be dead and under his complete control.” + +Sensing that he’s brought enough doom and gloom to you, he relents and steps back. + +“Play me a song human.” He says catching you off guard. +“…what did you want to hear?” you ask shakily. +“I don’t know…anything. Play what you were playing before.” + +You slowly pick up the dropped mandolin and begin playing the song that you were playing before and you play as if your life depended on it, though you get the impression that Warnov has no intention on killing you. + +He sits quietly listening in the darkness, after finishing the song; he leaps back up through the hole. + +“Beautiful…such talent…such a waste…” + +A rope is thrown down and the sounds of feet running off are then heard. You wait a minute and then climb up the rope, taking the mandolin with you. You see private Ramusen lying nearby with his throat ripped out and thoroughly drained of blood. + +You’re also just in time to hear other members of your group coming to your position when you exit the shop. + +What the hell are you supposed to tell them? Death to the world, reborn lich lords…you start thinking, what’s the point of all this? Maybe Warnov was right, maybe you should LIVE while there’s still time. Granted his information is spotty, but you can’t help but thinking he’s probably more informed on the situation than most people. + +You’ve pondered it several times before, and you’ve even attempted it once, but deserting is looking very desirable again. In this day and age, who’s going to know if were killed or not? +> Stay and inform your squad of the situation +If the information that the vampire said was true, you think it might be better to inform your superiors of it so that something can be done now. It won’t do any good to run off with this vital info and let them find out when it’s too late and your “freedom” won’t mean anything as death takes over the world. + +You meet up with the rest of your men who are calling out your name. They ask if you’re okay and you reply you are, but you need to inform the captain of the new info you learned. + +When you return, you tell Captain Eckard exactly what happened, but instead of stopping to assess this new info or taking it immediately to his superior, he dismisses it! He said the vampire was probably just fucking around with you. + +“That vampire was probably toying with you like a cat would a mouse. He probably has your scent now, so he’ll hunt and attack you later. The stories he’s told you are probably just to keep your mind occupied with nonsense as well as to give us misinformation. Hell, he’s fucking undead! He’s probably WORKING with the Lich Lord!” +“But…but it was an agent of the Zalan Empire. Agent Warnov. He…” +“NO! He LOOKED like Warnov. Vampire can change their form you know! And even if it was the real Warnov, he’s undead now and working for the enemy!” +“Well if that’s the case shouldn’t we still inform head quarters immediately? He probably had lots of vital information that…” +“Look, the only thing we need to do is take the territory of the former Tulan Kingdom before the undead do! THAT’S our primary concern! So I’ll have no more discussion about it sergeant! Get ready to march tomorrow! We’re heading for the former capitol!” + +You leave Eckard’s tent and shake your head at his stupidity, but there’s not much you can do about it now. You do decide that you’re going to inform another high ranking officer when you can though. + +Soon the company is on the move to its destination. It gets more dangerous the closer you get though. You’re getting ambushed by demon bands of them all the time. Not enough to destroy you of course, but certainly enough to whittle your numbers down. Captain Eckard gives you more troops to supply your losses, but by the time you get to the capitol, the whole company has lost at least a third of its original strength. + +Things don’t get any better at the capital. Most of the citizens there have been so corrupted or beat down by the demons at this point that they’ve either sold their own souls to Hell or gone completely mad. You’re attacked by them and a few of the demon hold outs. + +By the time you subdue and hold the territory, you’re down to half of the company’s original strength. + +Then after a few days the undead arrive. + +Captain Eckard’s rather inept handling of things don’t get any better. Instead of shoring up the defenses of the capital’s gates and walls and waiting for reinforcements which were going to arrive soon, he orders an open attack on the battlefield! + +You are very reluctant to do this, but again you don’t have any choice now. You fight and barely survive long enough to fallback when Captain Eckard calls for a retreat after finally realizing he’s hopelessly outmatched. Unfortunately he’s just provided more troops for the undead army, as the necromancers in charge raise the recent dead. They also start raising the dead citizens IN the city which haven’t been cleared out! + +It’s an ignoble death as you’re eventually surrounded, overwhelmed and cut down by zombies and skeletons. You join their ranks soon afterwards.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>If you’ve learned one thing, numbers doesn’t necessarily imply safety. With all the years of patrolling you’ve done along with your previous actions in Retlad so long ago, you actually feel more comfortable in smaller groups at this point. Your one and only rank and file battle didn’t go well. + +Your choice isn’t surprising, if anything more people feel comfortable with you scouting ahead. + +As you journey further into former Tulan territory, you don’t encounter too much resistance. A few demons and crazed followers here and there, but nothing you can’t take care of. It also occurs to you how “planted” you’ve been for the past five years. While it’s true you did leave the fort a lot, you never ventured far from it. This is first time you’ve actually traveled. Ironic, since one of the reasons why you joined the army was the possibility of traveling to interesting places. + +However, it seems like you only visit these interesting places after they’re already destroyed. You’re basically seeing the aftermath of the demon occupation. It sort of reminds you of what you’d seen back in Retlad when the Quillars were killing folks except the landscape is in even worse condition. The demons weren’t content on just corrupting their mortal slaves; they were attempting to turn the entire land into their infernal realm. You can only imagine what sort of hell was going on while they were actually here. + +You get to a small town that’s completely wrecked and seemingly deserted. Its night time and normally you’d go back and wait until morning to scout it, but Captain Eckard is insistent on getting to the former Tulan capital as quick as possible. You split up into small groups to scout the town quicker and tell everyone that if they come across anything more then they can handle, to run and alert everyone else. + +You go building to building not really encountering much of anything. Not even survivors. Lots of half eaten dead bodies in various states of torment though. You expect when Velzix was killed the whole realm descended into anarchy pretty quickly and the demons reverted back to their chaotic natures causing as much mayhem as possible without too much repercussion. + +You enter a shop with two of your other team members. You hear a creaking sound, which doesn’t sound good. One of your team members goes a little further in, and it gets louder. + +“Step back! The floors is…” you utter and then a large portion of the floor collapses underneath him. You attempt to grab his hand, but fail and the rest of the floor collapses underneath you as well. + +You don’t fall too far, but you definitely feel it. You recover as quick as you can and hear your other subordinate who managed to avoid falling through the floor. + +“Sarge! Are you alright?” Private Ramusen shouts. +“Yeah, yeah private. I’m just a little bruised.” +“What about Gannon? Is he alright?” + +You take your tinder box and make a small light. You look around and see that you must be in the basement of some sort of music shop from all the instruments you see. You didn’t even notice when you first entered the place, it just looked like any other ransacked shop. + +Upon further inspection you see a body lying on the floor. It’s Private Gannon and he’s dead. He didn’t land in the “good way” you did and broke his neck. + +“He’s dead.” You call up to Ramusen. +“Shit! He’s fuckin’ dead?” +“Yeah private, I just said he was! Now let me get the hell out of here…fuck! The damn stairs are completely destroyed. I can’t climb up, or even attempt a jump. Ramusen, throw down a rope and make sure you really secure it!” + +While you wait for Ramusen to complete this task, you take a look at some of the instruments. Lots of flutes and other wind instruments that don’t interest you. You grab an old looking mandolin. It’s definitely human design, but it seems very ornate though, must’ve been a specialty piece that wasn’t for sale. + +You pluck at the strings and despite the dirt, grime, and neglect of the instrument; it still manages to produce a fairly pleasing tone. You play for a good five minutes before you realize that Ramusen hasn’t thrown down the rope yet. + +“Private?” is all you utter, when you hear the slumping of a lifeless body, followed by a low voice. + +“Beautiful…” + +You grab your bow, when you see a dark figure loom above you. You fire, but miss due to the figure dodging quicker than anything you’ve ever encountered before. It doesn’t help that this same figure has jumped down the hole beside you before you can blink. + +You’re standing right before the figure now. He has a pale, but familiar face, though the blood around the mouth is new and not encouraging. He knocks the bow out of your hand, but does nothing else to you. You wouldn’t be quick enough to draw your sword given what you’ve seen. In fact right now, all you’re feeling is fear. + +“Almost hit me…you would’ve made a good addition. Maybe you could’ve even…no. Nobody can. This world is lost now and soon my kind won’t even be around to guide your kind to combat the inevitable anymore…” Warnov says. +“What…what are you talking about?” you ask unsure what’s going to happen next. Warnov looks as if he could tell you more than you’d ever want to know about lots of things, but instead he just shakes his head. + +“Nevermind human. Telling you the whole story would not help you anyway. Perhaps it’s best you hadn’t joined us, seeing as I have been marked now. It won’t be long before the rest of my kind are hunted down. He’s really quite pissed at us, and worse, he can sense us you see…(sigh) I can only imagine what he did to poor Count Rostov…” +“Who’s pissed?” +“Who do you think human? The Necro…I mean the Great Lich Lord of course. Oh yes. He’s back…and this one isn’t going to lose like the last one did so long ago.” + +You’re not following all of Warnov’s cryptic speak, but if the last bit he’s said is true, he’s scared the hell out of you more than he has with his actions. Warnov grabs your shoulder and looks into your eyes. + +“I do not envy your fate human…the extinction of your species will soon follow my own. My advice to you? Live human! Live while you can, for eventually this whole world will be dead and under his complete control.” + +Sensing that he’s brought enough doom and gloom to you, he relents and steps back. + +“Play me a song human.” He says catching you off guard. +“…what did you want to hear?” you ask shakily. +“I don’t know…anything. Play what you were playing before.” + +You slowly pick up the dropped mandolin and begin playing the song that you were playing before and you play as if your life depended on it, though you get the impression that Warnov has no intention on killing you. + +He sits quietly listening in the darkness, after finishing the song; he leaps back up through the hole. + +“Beautiful…such talent…such a waste…” + +A rope is thrown down and the sounds of feet running off are then heard. You wait a minute and then climb up the rope, taking the mandolin with you. You see private Ramusen lying nearby with his throat ripped out and thoroughly drained of blood. + +You’re also just in time to hear other members of your group coming to your position when you exit the shop. + +What the hell are you supposed to tell them? Death to the world, reborn lich lords…you start thinking, what’s the point of all this? Maybe Warnov was right, maybe you should LIVE while there’s still time. Granted his information is spotty, but you can’t help but thinking he’s probably more informed on the situation than most people. + +You’ve pondered it several times before, and you’ve even attempted it once, but deserting is looking very desirable again. In this day and age, who’s going to know if were killed or not? +> Sneak off +Last time you were wounded and had the misfortune of running into demons. Well you aren’t wounded this time and you’re pretty sure you won’t be running into too many more demons. You’ll be able to pull it off this time. You can’t do this army shit anymore, as much as you want to help your family out, you’ve got to live your own life regardless of what the future holds. You aren’t even worried about committing an executionable offense. + +You easily sneak away as you hear your men call out your name looking for you. You’re glad you didn’t leave too much back at the fort, except your lute, but you’ve got your newly acquired mandolin to make up for it. Eventually you’re away from civilization altogether. + +While you’re out in the wilderness you think about your family again, and you have to at least let them know you’re still alive. Maybe you can still do something about them, after all it doesn’t sound like the Zalan Empire is becoming a great place to live anymore. Perhaps you could convince them to move? + +It takes a week of sneaking around and keeping out of sight, but eventually you make it back home. Zalan looks a lot different; hell home looks a lot different. There was a small wooded area near your farm, but most of the trees have been cut down now. You also remember fewer patrols. Your house looks in better condition however. You guess at least your family seems a lot safer, but for how long? + +You knock on the door in the middle of the night and your sister Randi answers, Not too surprising as she always was a night owl when she was little. At least she used to be little. The passing of the years and she’s now a teenager and grown quite a bit. You’ve been away so long. + +What does surprise you is the flintlock pistol that she’s currently pointing at you! + +“Whoa! Hold on! It’s me, your brother!” you say. +“…it is? It is you!” she exclaims and puts down the gun before hugging you. +“What the hell are you doing with a pistol?” +“The money you sent us allowed to buy new things you know and a traveling merchant was selling this for cheap!” +“No I mean, what are YOU doing with one? You’ll blow your damn head off with that thing! Those things are unstable.” You scold. +“What are you doing home? Are you on leave?” +“Uh…that’s a long story. Wake up the rest of the family; I have to talk to you all.” + +Randi complies while you step inside the house and take in its new look. Eventually your Mom enters, followed by your brother Mallack and finally your youngest brother Calwin and sister Makana. + +You all sit down at the dining room table. (You realize you haven’t done that with your family in years) and you tell them everything. You get a lot of worried reactions. More for you than the other world impending doom stuff though. At least you know that they care. + +“You gotta get back to the army right now! Say you got captured by something and it took you awhile to escape!” Mallack exclaims. +“While I’m sure that MAY work, I just don’t want to do it…I can’t take this anymore. The whole time I’ve been in the damn army, my music has kept me sane. I’ve noticed it have an effect on others as well. Never thought it would. I mean I have talent and…” +“…you feel like you’ve wasted your life?” your mother replies. + +You pause for a moment. You almost want to say yes, but you can’t even if you wanted to. You haven’t wasted it, its just you’ve never really had the chance to do what you’ve ever wanted to do. + +“No…I guess I haven’t… it’s just…” + +Your mother takes your hand and speaks to you. + +“I know. It’s not fair. It’s not right. Life isn’t fair and it’s starting to get a whole lot less fair. I know I’ve mentioned it in letters to you, but the Zalan Empire WILL be taking the farm…and it’s looking like Mallack’s going to be drafted if things are going the way they seem to be.” +“But…see that’s what I’m saying! We could all move! I mean of course I have to go into hiding, maybe Mallack could come with me. And the rest of you could use what money you have left and move to Retlad! It’s a nice place. It’s away from most of the fighting, and there aren’t anymore Quillars there!” + +Your mother shakes her head. + +“You must be behind in the news, because Retlad is finally going to become part of the Zalan Empire soon, so going there to live wouldn’t make any difference. The Empire can take this farm, but in spirit this will ALWAYS be ours. The Empire has said they will allow us to continue working it and living on the land and even if they didn’t they’d have have to drag us all out and stick our heads on pikes before we’d leave. Your father and his father build this farm up to what it is. Our family is going to be here until the end.” +“That’s what I’m afraid of…what about you Mallack? You’re probably going to be drafted. You aren’t worried about that?” +“Sure I am. But what am I going to do, run? Where? From what you described you practically think the whole world is doomed anyway! I might as well take some of the undead bastards out before I go. I was getting bored of the farm anyway. Let Randi take over! Ha ha!” + +Your mother addresses you again. + +“Son, you know our family. We’ve always done the right thing, even if it doesn’t coincide with what we want…I think you know what you have to do.” + +And so you do. So you do. + +You spend one night with your family and make the most of it. You all laugh and joke, trying to put all the problems of the world out of your mind and of course before you leave you play a song for them. + +Eventually you hug them all goodbye and take your leave. More than a few tears are shed on both sides. +> Head back to the army +Now you have to figure out a plan that’s going to prevent you from getting executed. You figure your brother’s plan isn’t exactly a bad one. Your record is good enough that you’d probably be believed. You think up a lie explaining that you were captured by a particularly sadistic vampire who was planning on draining you slowly to keep you as ongoing food. He took you to a cave in the hills where you barely killed him and escaped with your life. You would’ve made your way back sooner, but there were large groups of marauding orc raiders and demons escaping the ruins of the former Tulan kingdom that caused you to be extra cautious and forced you to hide for a few days. + +Yep, that sounds good. You head out with the plan of meeting up with Captain Eckard’s company which is surely at the Tulan Kingdom now. + +Eventually you reach the same town you were at when you made your decision to try to leave. You find it occupied right now, it’s not your company, so you’re about to press on, but someone on patrol sees you. + +“HALT! Where are you supposed to be soldier?!” +“Oh…uh…” you say getting caught off guard. You mentally curse yourself for not being more aware. +“Speak up! Wow, you look a little worse for wear…what company are you with?” +“I was with Captain Eckard…but…” + +“Captain Eckard’s company? Holy shit! We thought they all got killed! The undead reached the Tulan capital first and ambushed them! But why am I telling you? You were there! You must’ve just barely escaped! Don’t worry; you can avenge your friends, we’re gathering strength to attack soon!” + +You don’t believe this… + +The guard begins speaking to you excitedly and asking you how you escaped. You just continue to say you don’t know, it all became a blur when the ambush occurred and how you attempted to fight, but it was just too much. The guard sympathizes and tells you that you can explain more to his captain. You notice he isn’t wearing Zalan armor, he’s wearing Azi Republic armor. You can only assume that perhaps this is a Grand Alliance company. + +Your ideas come true when you do indeed notice several kinds of troop types, though the Zalan Empire soldiers seem to be leading, as the captain is wearing the armor. Your heart sinks when you recognize her and she recognizes you. It was years ago, but you both remember. + +“…what are you doing here?” the female captain asks. “Last I heard you were in Captain Eckard’s company. A company that was reported to be wiped out completely. Have you managed to avoid death once again? You are the lucky one aren’t you?” + +Suddenly surrounding soldiers start to recognize you more closely. The Zalan ones especially. + +“Holy shit it’s him! You fuckin’ survived not one but TWO overwhelming undead hordes! We gotta take him captain, he’s obviously good luck!” the guard says a little misguidedly. +“Good luck? If you haven’t noticed, only HE seems to be getting out alive on these things! I’d say he’s bad luck!” someone else says. +“Nonsense! I heard how he’s killed countless demons with his bow! We could use someone like that in our next attack.” another says. +“Isn’t he the guy that plays the lute really well?” + +A few people start arguing until the female captain speaks again. + +“ENOUGH! I’ll handle this. You in my office now, I’ll speak with you in private. And for the rest of you, get ready to move out. We’re attacking tomorrow.” + +She turns away and enters a building; you slowly follow, while everyone else disperses. + +When you enter the wrecked “office” she closes the door and tells you to sit down, but she doesn’t. Instead she stares at you hard at you and draws her sword. + +“Okay Mr. Survivor. Convince me.” +“Convince you of what?” +“Convince me that you aren’t some fucking undead spy!” +“WHAT?! How? I mean…” +“Easy! In the two encounters you had with the undead on any major scale, you’ve been the only one to survive. Once, maybe. But twice? Mighty suspicious…” +“But I mean…I’m not undead! Look I even walk around in the daylight, I’m not even pale!” +“I didn’t say you were undead, I said you were a spy. There are few of those misguided traitors that think their necromancer overlords will be kind to them, by killing them last. Madness.” +“But I’m not a spy! I killed…” you begin to stutter under pressure. +”Yeah, yeah, you killed demons. Big deal. The undead and demons weren’t friends either. What better way to be a spy than to make yourself a hero?” +“But I’m not…” +“You’re not what?” +“I’m not…” +“What? More lies? Spit out the truth spy!” she demands pointing her sword at your throat. +> Blurt out the truth +You can’t take it anymore. + +“I’M NOT A FUCKING HERO! OKAY!? I NEVER WAS AND I NEVER WANTED TO BE! (sob)… I just wanted to go home…(sob)” + +You weep for a few minutes before the captain speaks again. + +“Alright then what happened? Tell me the entire truth and maybe you’ll avoid the executioner’s axe.” + +At this point you have little choice. You’re too distraught to say anything else. You give a relatively condensed version of what happened. At Nuro and what happened recently. Your encounter with Warnov seems to surprise her quite a bit. You also go on to explain that it was high ranking Zalan officers that insisted on this hero nonsense. She believes you, like she knows something of it. + +“(sigh) Yeah there’s a statue of my dad in the Zalan capitol…but I know better…” + +You don’t question anymore about this quiet outburst from her since you’re still too worried about what’s going to happen to you. + +“So why did you come back? You probably could’ve gotten away with it.” +“The same reason why I joined. My family. I guess I just needed a reminder of that first hand. And if there’s any hope of changing the tide of this war with the undead then I need to stand by my decision of joining the Zalan Army and making the world safer for them.” + +Once again the captain seems to soften. She almost looks like she’s going to tear up as well, but she turns away. + +“My family…I…” are all she says before taking a deep breath and turning back towards you, with a serious mindset again. + +“Alright, I shall trust your word for now sergeant, but I will be watching you VERY carefully! Consider yourself lucky for evading death once again, perhaps you do have knack for avoiding it. Let us hope that luck rubs off on the rest of us in the upcoming battle. I’m putting you in charge of the Retlad archery platoon. They’ll probably like you. Dismissed.” + +Before you leave she says one last thing. + +“And sergeant, don’t listen to what that bizarre vampire said. We’re not going to become extinct. We’re going to win and survive a long time. Besides you still have to play that song for me.” + +As you leave you feel a sigh of relief that you won’t be dying just yet, but given that you’re heading into battle soon with the undead, you’re wondering if you just didn’t postpone the inevitable. + +Two years pass… + +Seven years since the Nuro Incident changed the world into this living hell. + +Your time served in the Grand Alliance has not really changed much. The Grand Alliance and the Zalan Empire are basically one of the same now thanks to the complete embrace of a totalitarian system. Might makes right. Nations like the Azi Republic protested, but there was little that they could, after all Zalan has been practically defending the world by itself for the past few years. You get the impression that if this war is won; the Zalan Empire is going to throw its hat in to be a one world government. + +Amazing how power and conspiracy is plotted even when it probably won’t happen. “Probably won’t” because your superiors and political leaders are a lot more “optimistic” about winning than you are, but then they haven’t had to face the horrors you’ve faced. + +And horrors are a completely accurate word. You’ve gotten over your fear of the undead, but it doesn’t make it any easier. You’re starting to lose ground. Everyday the living lose someone, the Great Lich Lord gains. It’s a question of numbers and quite frankly your side doesn’t have them. + +You sort of wish your old captain was here. She was a very good leader and inspirational, but then again that’s why she was made a general and sent elsewhere. She asked you to play that song before she left though. Somehow it seemed to make her sadder afterwards. + +“Captain, undead are on the move, they won’t be long now.” One of your messengers says. +“Yes, I can sense it. Here. You head back to my home. You know where it is by now, and give this message to my family. If you get back here and see undead, well get the fuck out and run back to Zalan territory.” + +Being a captain hasn’t really turned you into a copy of the captains you served in the past, but then again you didn’t even think you’d ever be promoted to one. Your reign as one has been a little unorthodox as you’ve applied more guerilla tactics than traditional ones, but given your assignment and your background it makes a hell of a lot more sense. + +You’re currently stationed on what remains of the Garwold Confederacy. It was a relatively peaceful nation made up mostly of Halflings and Gnomes, with lush green fields and flowers. Now it’s just slowly becoming another massive graveyard and example of genocide. + +You’ve gotten to know quite a few of them and you’re always amazed of how they can keep their sense of humor in the face of utter destruction. One of them actually gives you an answer. + +“To keep from crying.” + +Indeed. You’ve been playing quite a bit when you’re not battling the undead. (The Garwold citizens enjoy your playing a lot) It’s gotten to the point where you don’t just play anymore to keep your mind off of things, it’s like it transports you to a different world. A better world. + +If only. + +You often wonder how your brother Mallack is doing. He’s been stationed in a relatively safer location back in Zalan territory. You’re guessing that it lowers the odds of having your mom lose both of her sons at the same time. Like it makes it any better if she lost them within any length on time of each other. You wonder if the war is going to go on long enough that by the time Calwin grows up he’ll be drafted as well. + +If he even gets the chance to grow up. + +You can’t think about it now. A massive undead horde is coming and there’s no where left to hide. There will be open battle and you need to stay focused. + +You go through the whole order thing, and making sure your strategy is sound. You wish you had more wizards, but they seem to be in shorter supply these days. It’s almost like they’re being targeted deliberately sometimes…actually you don’t think it, you KNOW that they are. + +You see the undead horde approach. You look through some new fangled dwarven invention called an eye piece and see something makes your job a hell of a lot worse. + +You don’t just see the usual undead. You see fully armored Death Knights. Harder to kill than even a zombie giant. You see Blood Specters. Dark crimson spirits that can cause their victims to bleed from every orifice with their shrieks. Both of those are at the head of this horde, and this isn’t even counting that you’re severely outnumbered by just the regular zombies, skeletons, ghosts and the like. +> Break off into a smaller skirmishing force +You know that this is most likely a losing battle, but some hope might be gained, if you can somehow draw out the knights and specters and get them by themselves. As powerful as they are, they’re very hard to control even by necromancers and get easily agitated by living creatures. + +You can’t do it alone though. You take your best archers and a couple of your best wizards and mention your plan. You don’t ask for volunteers, you just assign. You’re in charge and you have to make the hard decisions, even if it might mean you’ll die. They don’t look enthused, but you aren’t either. + +You tell everyone else to hold their ground while you and your small platoon ride towards the horde. + +“Ready those blessed silvers men, and you robe wearers melt those dead tin cans!” + +You get close enough and you unleash as many blessed silver arrows as you can at the Blood Specters. You kill a few. The wizards don’t do quite as well with the knights. However, both attacks are enough. + +You see the Specters and Knights making whatever unearthly noises they do and begin to advance towards you far ahead of the slower yet steady moving horde. It apparent that the necromancer controlling them is attempting to bring them back under control, because they begin to squirm back and forth which gives you some more time to kill a few more during their confusion. Eventually the necromancer must give up total control because they stop squirming and advance upon you once again. + +You ride back as quickly as possible with the Specters and Knights in full pursuit. You didn’t expect those Specters to be so fast. A few of them manage to catch up to some of your men with grisly results. You yourself almost get smacked upside the head by a Death Knight mace. When you get back in range the rest of your awaiting army deals with your pursuers. More blessed arrows fly into the Blood Specters before they can do anymore harm, and eventually the Death Knights are brought down as well. + +There is no time for a reprieve though, as the main horde is now almost upon you. You order a regrouping as best you can, and face the enemy, telling if possible for someone to aim for the necromancer in all of this rotting mess. + +Bones and limbs from both sides are broken and hacked off. A zombie skull is smashed, splashing maggots, blood and brains all over you and you’re not even thinking about it. You just have a tune in your head to take yourself away from the massacre. Somehow in all of the chaos, you single out the necromancer leading this army, he stands a far piece away from the main fighting, but he’s arrogant enough to be close enough for you to hit him with an arrow. + +And you have to hit him now. You see a Grand Alliance soldier who just took a fatal blow to the chest begin to rise… + +Not many arrows left and not much time, you just load up and shoot, hoping you hit the bastard. + +Your shot is straight and true. It strikes the necromancer in the stomach, causing him to fall back, which in turn causes the undead horde to momentarily stop their vicious attacks, giving your side a chance to turn the tide a bit. + +Then you shoot another arrow when you see the necromancer attempt to get back up, which turns the tide completely in your favor. Zombies and skeletons fall. Ghouls flee at the loss of leadership and any remaining undead are quickly dispatched. You don’t take chances though. You walk up to the corpse of the necromancer and shoot your last arrow directly into his head and stab him a few times. + +You then start laughing. + +“If this was the Great Lich Lord, I’d be a real hero right now!” + +You quickly sober up from this macabre outburst when you hear shouting from some of your men and you look up. + +It’s another horde. Just as big. You look behind you and see that your own numbers are completely insufficient. The Garwold citizens are either mostly dead or demoralized at this point. + +Even when you win…you lose. + +Having no real options, you sound a retreat to fall back to the Zalan border and suggest that the Garwold citizens do likewise as there is nothing more for them here. + +The Garwold Confederacy is now just one more loss for the living. The Zalan Empire won’t be far behind. + +Three years pass… + +Ten years since the Nuro incident and The Grand Alliance is nearly just consisting of the Zalan Empire now, which in turn has had to adapt a siege mentality. There is no “going on the offensive” anymore. You’re purely on defense. + +Your brother Mallack died two years ago. Transferred to a location with more fighting due to lack of manpower. Like it matters. Didn’t even get to say goodbye. You can only hope he didn’t become one of those things…but you know he probably did. + +You’ve been urging your family to run where it’s safer, but of course they won’t budge. The undead have been penetrating deeper into Zalan territory, you know it’s only a matter of time before the Great Lich Lord decides to stop toying with you and makes his full scale attack. + +Sure enough it happens. Town after town is taken; you’re pushed back further and further, and you know there’s nothing you can do to stop it. + +An order is given to everyone to fallback to the capital and help defend it from an upcoming attack, but at this point you’re just wondering if the rest of your family is still alive. +> Report to the captial +Everything tells you that you should go to your family, but you question if they are even still alive. You don’t want to think about it really since it’s starting to upset you. The thought of your remaining family being killed and turned into undead parodies of themselves, makes you not want to know if that’s what happened. + +You wonder if they might’ve even fled already like you’ve been telling them to in your letters. It’s certainly possible, even as stubborn as your Mom is, she might’ve taken your advice at least for the sake of the rest of your brother and sisters. + +You mind suddenly goes elsewhere… + +…Yeah…they left already. There’s no point in going to your home. It’s been abandoned. They’re probably all safe in Retlad by now. No need to worry. You’ll see them later. Surely this attack on the capitol won’t be that bad. You’ve survived a lot worse. You’ve got orders and you need to follow them, because if there is any chance at stopping this dead plague, this is going to be a crucial battle. You did join the army to help your family after all, and what better way to help them, then to ensure their future? + +After having this little delusion, you feel calm again. Oddly so. Even a little hopeful. You head off to the capitol with your troops. + +When you get there, the general attitude is pessimistic. Most people don’t seem to think they’re going to win. You’re getting that vibe even from the generals of the Grand Alliance. You don’t see why. Surely the Great Lich Lord has finally overextended all his resources now. This attack will be a failure and from here you will be able to make a counter attack! Sure it won’t be easy, but it can be done. + +People are finding your optimism a little weird, especially those that have served under you since they know how that really isn’t your personality. You don’t think you’ve changed at all though. You just go about following your orders of making sure your troops are prepared in their defense of the south wall, humming little tunes as happy music fills your head. + +A few days pass and you’re visited by your old commanding officer who’s constantly making sure everything is in place. She looks very tired; you tell her she needs to think positive. When she asks if you’re feeling alright, you just laugh and ask if she’d like to hear a song. + +She tells you no with a grim look. She also tells you point blank that she wants to get laid one last time before this battle. Being in the somewhat scattered mind frame that you’re in right now, you ask who the candidate is. + +A couple hours later, you have your answer. Before you leave her room, she asks you to play a song for her after all. It’s the one she asked to play before. The one her mother sang to her. + +As you play she noticeably begins to weep. She doesn’t attempt to hide it. You stop playing and hold her until she calms down which eventually she does and composes herself. + +She gives no further information and simply tells you to go back to your post and to carry on as if nothing happened. You do so without pressing the issue. + +A week passes and the undead horde arrives. It’s much bigger than anyone expected, and even worse, the Great Lich Lord himself is leading this attack. + +Now your mind suddenly comes back to grips with reality. + +The undead horde surrounds and storms the city. An attempt is made to kill the Great Lich Lord, but he merely gets back up from the hail of gunfire and arrows that strike him. + +Soon the gates are compromised. You order your troops to take to the streets and fight off the invading hordes with the rest of the soldiers. You do likewise, though now you’re really wondering about a way to try to escape. Its no use though, the dead are everywhere butchering anything alive. You kill one walking corpse and five more take its place. + +In one particular brutal sneak attack, a ghoul jumps from a rooftop and tackles you. You feel a paralyzing bite as it sinks its teeth into you. Darkness soon takes you and you begin you new mindless undead life afterwards.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know that this is most likely a losing battle, but some hope might be gained, if you can somehow draw out the knights and specters and get them by themselves. As powerful as they are, they’re very hard to control even by necromancers and get easily agitated by living creatures. + +You can’t do it alone though. You take your best archers and a couple of your best wizards and mention your plan. You don’t ask for volunteers, you just assign. You’re in charge and you have to make the hard decisions, even if it might mean you’ll die. They don’t look enthused, but you aren’t either. + +You tell everyone else to hold their ground while you and your small platoon ride towards the horde. + +“Ready those blessed silvers men, and you robe wearers melt those dead tin cans!” + +You get close enough and you unleash as many blessed silver arrows as you can at the Blood Specters. You kill a few. The wizards don’t do quite as well with the knights. However, both attacks are enough. + +You see the Specters and Knights making whatever unearthly noises they do and begin to advance towards you far ahead of the slower yet steady moving horde. It apparent that the necromancer controlling them is attempting to bring them back under control, because they begin to squirm back and forth which gives you some more time to kill a few more during their confusion. Eventually the necromancer must give up total control because they stop squirming and advance upon you once again. + +You ride back as quickly as possible with the Specters and Knights in full pursuit. You didn’t expect those Specters to be so fast. A few of them manage to catch up to some of your men with grisly results. You yourself almost get smacked upside the head by a Death Knight mace. When you get back in range the rest of your awaiting army deals with your pursuers. More blessed arrows fly into the Blood Specters before they can do anymore harm, and eventually the Death Knights are brought down as well. + +There is no time for a reprieve though, as the main horde is now almost upon you. You order a regrouping as best you can, and face the enemy, telling if possible for someone to aim for the necromancer in all of this rotting mess. + +Bones and limbs from both sides are broken and hacked off. A zombie skull is smashed, splashing maggots, blood and brains all over you and you’re not even thinking about it. You just have a tune in your head to take yourself away from the massacre. Somehow in all of the chaos, you single out the necromancer leading this army, he stands a far piece away from the main fighting, but he’s arrogant enough to be close enough for you to hit him with an arrow. + +And you have to hit him now. You see a Grand Alliance soldier who just took a fatal blow to the chest begin to rise… + +Not many arrows left and not much time, you just load up and shoot, hoping you hit the bastard. + +Your shot is straight and true. It strikes the necromancer in the stomach, causing him to fall back, which in turn causes the undead horde to momentarily stop their vicious attacks, giving your side a chance to turn the tide a bit. + +Then you shoot another arrow when you see the necromancer attempt to get back up, which turns the tide completely in your favor. Zombies and skeletons fall. Ghouls flee at the loss of leadership and any remaining undead are quickly dispatched. You don’t take chances though. You walk up to the corpse of the necromancer and shoot your last arrow directly into his head and stab him a few times. + +You then start laughing. + +“If this was the Great Lich Lord, I’d be a real hero right now!” + +You quickly sober up from this macabre outburst when you hear shouting from some of your men and you look up. + +It’s another horde. Just as big. You look behind you and see that your own numbers are completely insufficient. The Garwold citizens are either mostly dead or demoralized at this point. + +Even when you win…you lose. + +Having no real options, you sound a retreat to fall back to the Zalan border and suggest that the Garwold citizens do likewise as there is nothing more for them here. + +The Garwold Confederacy is now just one more loss for the living. The Zalan Empire won’t be far behind. + +Three years pass… + +Ten years since the Nuro incident and The Grand Alliance is nearly just consisting of the Zalan Empire now, which in turn has had to adapt a siege mentality. There is no “going on the offensive” anymore. You’re purely on defense. + +Your brother Mallack died two years ago. Transferred to a location with more fighting due to lack of manpower. Like it matters. Didn’t even get to say goodbye. You can only hope he didn’t become one of those things…but you know he probably did. + +You’ve been urging your family to run where it’s safer, but of course they won’t budge. The undead have been penetrating deeper into Zalan territory, you know it’s only a matter of time before the Great Lich Lord decides to stop toying with you and makes his full scale attack. + +Sure enough it happens. Town after town is taken; you’re pushed back further and further, and you know there’s nothing you can do to stop it. + +An order is given to everyone to fallback to the capital and help defend it from an upcoming attack, but at this point you’re just wondering if the rest of your family is still alive. +> Go to your family +Really, it’s the only thing that makes any kind of sense anymore. This war is lost there’s not even any doubt about it. Hope is fleeting and if this is truly it, then it’s going to be with the ones you did this for in the first place. + +Your small groups of soldiers wonder where you’re going and you flat out tell them, in fact you tell them more than that. + +“I’m going home, and I suggest if any of you have any family you go to them as well. This is it folks, there’s no happy ending here. It’s been a pleasure serving with all of you.” + +You then ride home as quickly as possible. + +The farm is scattered with undead. They attack and in some cases eat the livestock, while attempting to get into your house. Dead Zalan soldiers can be seen, except they aren’t properly dead like they should be. The farmhouse is being attacked and you can see your sister firing her pistol at the zombies from one of the broken windows. You trample a couple of the zombies with your horse and kill couple more with your bow, but eventually you dismount and chop up the remaining ones near the farm house, since you want to save your arrows for anything potentially more dangerous. + +“Quick get inside through this window, the door is barricaded.” your sister Randi shouts when she sees you. +“No! It’s a death trap to stay now! This place is lost! You all have to come with me!” you shout back, keeping an eye on the advancing zombies. +“Can’t Mom’s hurt pretty bad. Got stabbed by one those corpses. We can’t move her. Help’s gotta come soon…” +“NO, it won’t Randi! The capitol of Zalan is being attacked as we speak! I came home to get your guys! This is the fucking end! We’ve lost! We just gotta…” + +You’re interrupted when you have to cut down an advancing zombie. Your sister fires a shot at another one. Suddenly a scream from the house is heard, followed by another. That has to be Calwin, and Makana. Randi rushes from the window and you cut down another zombie before bashing the door down with relative ease. + +More screaming is heard along with growling this time. You look around and run down the hallway where Randi is standing motionless. She’s dropped her pistol. + +You push her aside and see your other sister Makana dead on the floor and then a quick scan to the left and you see your mother eating Calwin. + +She’s one of those things… + +You act where Randi failed and give a killing blow to the thing that was once your mother. + +“I’m sorry.” You whisper and her blood splashes across your face. + +Now you’re ready to get the hell out of the house, but Randi is still standing there motionless. + +“COME ON! WE GOTTA GET THE FUCK OUTTA HERE!” you shout. +“Yeah...okay…” Randi says and begins to move like she’s in slow motion and picks up her flintlock. + +You run past Randi in the hallway who’s still moving slowly. + +“Randi get your ass mov…” + +You hear a gunshot behind you. Followed by the slumping of a lifeless body. You don’t even turn around, you don’t want to see. + +When you get outside, surprisingly the undead haven’t become unmanageable yet, and you cut down another couple with relative ease. Your horse unfortunately has run off, you’re on foot from here. + +You don’t even know where to go. Where is it going to be safe? Nowhere, but you lack any other ideas, so you just head for unclaimed wilderness. + +After about a day of running, hiding and maneuvering, you’re in a relatively safe location and that’s when you finally allow yourself to grieve for the loss of your family. You weep. + +You’ve lost everything now. Everything you did was basically for them, and now they’re all gone. You don’t know if you can even continue. What would be the point? The world seems to be doomed anyway. + +But then after you think about it, you decide that if death is taking over the world, you’re not going to make it easy. Death has already taken everything away from you except your life, and you’re going to hold on to that as long as possible. You’re going to live for your family and all the others that can’t any longer. + +You’re going to survive, because ultimately that’s what you’ve always done. You’ve cheated death more than once already and you’ll continue to do it. Death itself is going to have to hunt you down if it wants your life. + +After reaching this conclusion, you try to think of where you should go next. Going to any type of centers of civilization is out of the question now. You’d only have to move again, them being targets now. + +So it’s the life of wanderer now. The question is where would be best? The forests aren’t exactly safe, but you’re more familiar with surviving in them. The mountains might be a little safer, but living in them is going to be a lot harsher. +> Stick to the forests +Running from the undead, only to die of starvation and the cold in the mountains isn’t your idea of survival. You’re sticking to familiar terrain. You travel further away from civilization and ultimately deeper into a large forest. You’re not exactly sure of where you’re at, but you know you’ve left the Zalan borders. You’re probably in the unclaimed area north of the Retlad province. You never patrolled that far when you were stationed there, so you’re unsure of what to expect. You’ll certainly have to be alert though. + +A few weeks pass and you’ve got the hang of it. A few close calls with an Eberaw Hunter, but you’ve managed to make somewhat of a home for yourself. You mainly sleep in the trees. You get water from springs and small streams and as for food, well you always were good at hunting. + +You pass the time playing your mandolin and just basically keeping watch. As the days pass by though, you get the impression that someone is watching YOU. + +It’s not any undead though. You haven’t seen any in weeks. You haven’t come across any living creatures of higher intelligence either, but then again that doesn’t mean they aren’t around… + +“Hello stranger. Do you like our forest?” you hear a small voice say. + +You look around, but see nothing. You guess who ever it is, is invisible, and you nearly go for your weapon. + +“Please, no need for that. You are among friends here, musical one.” The voice says and then you see your unseen host appears before you. She’s very small and probably only comes up to ankle. You’ve heard of fairies before, but you’ve never seen one. + +“Are you a fairy?” you ask. +“We go by many different names. Technically I am a pixie, but if you prefer, fairy will do. We heard you playing over the weeks and I thought it was about time we told you our appreciation for it. We didn’t know you big people had gifts for it. You are human are you not?” +“Yes, and thanks.” +“So, what brings you out here? Are you a ranger perhaps? You seem to have skills about you that are useful in this environment.” +“No, not a ranger. Just trying to escape death like everyone else I suppose.” +“Hmm, you realize as beautiful as this forest is, it’s not without its dangers. Death is here as well, but I’m sure you know that.” +“Yes, but its at least reasonable. There aren’t zombies and wraiths terrorizing the place…well at least not yet…” +“What are you talking about stranger?” the pixie asks quizzically, you look a little surprised yourself. + +“The Great Lich Lord of course. He’s destroying everything, and I dunno how he’s going to be stopped. I don’t think he can.” + +Your words immediately make the pixie’s cheerful demeanor change immediately. + +“…he’s returned?! But he was killed centuries ago! My clan has told the stories for generations!” +“Well, he’s back, or someone like him…you really didn’t know? I mean this war with him has been going on for years now. Ten to be precise. Don’t you leave this forest?” +“You must understand stranger, we have everything we want here. There is no need to leave. We also live in illusions, what you see now, is not necessarily what is. We remain hidden in our illusions so nobody may ever harm us and we can live our lives in relative isolation. It is only on rare occasions that we reveal ourselves.” +“But I’ve heard stories about your kind being elsewhere or even in cities.” You say. +“Well we are not the only fairy folk you know! Perhaps the others you heard of were sprites, or brownies or even a different clan of pixies. I can only speak for my clan and as far as I know we are the only fairy folk that live in this particular forest. There are other denizens of course, but thanks to our illusions we stay safely hidden. Even the occasional human or goblinoid that has wandered in here has not disturbed us. Quite frankly, you’d be the first person in centuries that we’ve revealed ourselves to.” +“There aren’t any elves in this forest?” you ask, sort of figuring that some might have retreated or made a home here, forests being their natural homes and all. Your question is met with slight annoyance. + +“Most certainly not! This place has been elf free for millennia and hopefully stays that way! I’ll speak no more of this elven nonsense!” + +You don’t press the issue, but up until now you figured fairy folk and elves were all friends, guess not. The pixie changes the subject since she wants to know more about this Great Lich Lord business and says her name is Qweet. Qweet tells you that she will return with the rest of her clan, as she will not reveal their home of course. In a somewhat playful yet firm tone she also warns you not to try to follow her, though as good of a tracker you are you doubt if you could anyway since she turns invisible again. + +While you wait, you still can’t believe she and the rest of her clan don’t know anything about what’s going on; you almost envy them for living in blissful ignorance for the last ten years. You also feel like you’ve ruined things for them. + +Eventually more pixies return and you tell them what’s been going on. They are saddened, but maintain a confident demeanor. They are certain that they will survive this plague due to their illusions. They explain that if need be they can hide the entire forest, which with the new grim information you gave them they are very inclined to do. They still have to discuss it. + +In the meantime they say they hope you’ll stick around for awhile as they still enjoy your playing and you aren’t destroying the forest. You’re just glad you’ve met some friendly people that aren’t trying to kill you. It’s a nice change and after what you’ve been through recently, you welcome it. + +One year passes… + +Your time in the pixie forest has been relatively safe. Other than the occasional aggressive forest beasts, you haven’t had to do much combat. It’s been a relief. You’ve enjoyed the company of the pixies as well. + +However, your natural curiosity has gotten the better of you on occasion and you have made a few trips outside of the forest. + +You travel as far as the Retlad province and the first obscure village you stumble across is completely decimated, with undead roaming around. The scary part about it is this is very recent looking, which means they’re starting to head your way. + +It’ll start with the occasional zombie or skeleton wandering in. Then more will come. How long before an army arrives? Again due to your information, Qweet and the rest of her clan have made the final decision to hide their forest entirely. They tell you that they would like you to stay. You would even be allowed to see their true home. The only stipulation is that you would not be able to leave. The illusion wouldn’t just hide the forest, but it would create a barrier preventing entry or exit. You can’t imagine how it would look to those on the outside of the forest. + +Appealing to be sure, but as much as you like the company of the pixies, you don’t think it will be safe to dwell in their forest for too much longer, illusions or not. The Gnomes back in the Garwold Confederacy had some excellent illusionists as well, and it didn’t help them. +> Stay in the forest +This is probably the most satisfied you’ve been in a long time. Why bother running anymore? You’re not going to be any happier elsewhere as you eek out an existence. This is a place where you can play your music and have a regular appreciative audience. Perhaps the pixie illusion will fail, perhaps it won’t, but this is your home now. + +“Queet, I’m staying.” +“That’s wonderful!” she squeaks. + +The pixies go through with their plan of hiding the entire forest. They explain that for everyone else it will look like a rock mass and the magic shield will prevent entry in case someone bumps into the “rock”. Creatures inside will only see more forest outside the barrier and will probably be baffled to as why they can’t go any further, but will probably not make any serious attempt to do so even if they could. + +The pixies also allow you to enter their little village. Naturally you’re much bigger, but a special arrangement is made so that you can stay nearby and they build you a tree-house of sorts and provide meals and drink for you. + +Life with the pixies full time is relatively nice. Of course a few are prone to play jokes on you sometimes, you don’t get mad about it and they usually make up for it later. A few years pass and it gets to the point where you almost forget about what’s going on outside the forest since almost everyday is a pixie party filled with merriment and music. There’s one particular time when there was a brief magical disturbance in the illusion, but the pixies managed to correct it. It does cause you to get concerned, but the pixies still insist that you not worry. + +After fifteen some odd years pass, the forest begins to signs of unnatural decay, and forest creatures seem to be dying way before their time. + +Some of the pixies have made comments of not feeling themselves, which is very odd since being fairy creatures they don’t normally get sick. You haven’t been feeling up to your usual standards either. You at first chalked it up to age, but you know that it’s more than that. The Great Lich Lord’s influence has finally penetrated the illusion. Death is creeping in. + +The months pass and the illusion begins to break down despite attempts to keep it up. At last for the first time in years you see the “outside world” again. It’s desolate and bleak. The Great Lich Lord has been thorough in his conquest of the world and with this new found green patch, it won’t be long before it becomes as dead as the rest of the landscape. + +Perhaps because they’re magical creatures of nature, the pixies cannot withstand this death aura as well as you can, and they begin dying. Their illusions and happy lush world utterly destroyed. + +“Wh…why is this happening?” are Queet’s last delirious words before she expires. + +One by one they all die. You weep as you can do nothing for them. Nobody can. Once again you’ve lost another family. You wish you’d left the damn forest long ago just so you hadn’t deluded yourself and gotten so attached to the pixies only to watch them die. + +However, you decide that this place will be your last stand as well and you’re too tired to run even if there was anywhere safe to run to anyway. You fight off undead creatures for a couple months as you attempt to survive in this now dying forest, but ultimately you’re overwhelmed and killed. + +Sadly, unlike your pixie friends, you are not allowed to rest in peace as you wander the landscape in search of the last remnants of life to destroy in the Great Lich Lord’s service.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Running from the undead, only to die of starvation and the cold in the mountains isn’t your idea of survival. You’re sticking to familiar terrain. You travel further away from civilization and ultimately deeper into a large forest. You’re not exactly sure of where you’re at, but you know you’ve left the Zalan borders. You’re probably in the unclaimed area north of the Retlad province. You never patrolled that far when you were stationed there, so you’re unsure of what to expect. You’ll certainly have to be alert though. + +A few weeks pass and you’ve got the hang of it. A few close calls with an Eberaw Hunter, but you’ve managed to make somewhat of a home for yourself. You mainly sleep in the trees. You get water from springs and small streams and as for food, well you always were good at hunting. + +You pass the time playing your mandolin and just basically keeping watch. As the days pass by though, you get the impression that someone is watching YOU. + +It’s not any undead though. You haven’t seen any in weeks. You haven’t come across any living creatures of higher intelligence either, but then again that doesn’t mean they aren’t around… + +“Hello stranger. Do you like our forest?” you hear a small voice say. + +You look around, but see nothing. You guess who ever it is, is invisible, and you nearly go for your weapon. + +“Please, no need for that. You are among friends here, musical one.” The voice says and then you see your unseen host appears before you. She’s very small and probably only comes up to ankle. You’ve heard of fairies before, but you’ve never seen one. + +“Are you a fairy?” you ask. +“We go by many different names. Technically I am a pixie, but if you prefer, fairy will do. We heard you playing over the weeks and I thought it was about time we told you our appreciation for it. We didn’t know you big people had gifts for it. You are human are you not?” +“Yes, and thanks.” +“So, what brings you out here? Are you a ranger perhaps? You seem to have skills about you that are useful in this environment.” +“No, not a ranger. Just trying to escape death like everyone else I suppose.” +“Hmm, you realize as beautiful as this forest is, it’s not without its dangers. Death is here as well, but I’m sure you know that.” +“Yes, but its at least reasonable. There aren’t zombies and wraiths terrorizing the place…well at least not yet…” +“What are you talking about stranger?” the pixie asks quizzically, you look a little surprised yourself. + +“The Great Lich Lord of course. He’s destroying everything, and I dunno how he’s going to be stopped. I don’t think he can.” + +Your words immediately make the pixie’s cheerful demeanor change immediately. + +“…he’s returned?! But he was killed centuries ago! My clan has told the stories for generations!” +“Well, he’s back, or someone like him…you really didn’t know? I mean this war with him has been going on for years now. Ten to be precise. Don’t you leave this forest?” +“You must understand stranger, we have everything we want here. There is no need to leave. We also live in illusions, what you see now, is not necessarily what is. We remain hidden in our illusions so nobody may ever harm us and we can live our lives in relative isolation. It is only on rare occasions that we reveal ourselves.” +“But I’ve heard stories about your kind being elsewhere or even in cities.” You say. +“Well we are not the only fairy folk you know! Perhaps the others you heard of were sprites, or brownies or even a different clan of pixies. I can only speak for my clan and as far as I know we are the only fairy folk that live in this particular forest. There are other denizens of course, but thanks to our illusions we stay safely hidden. Even the occasional human or goblinoid that has wandered in here has not disturbed us. Quite frankly, you’d be the first person in centuries that we’ve revealed ourselves to.” +“There aren’t any elves in this forest?” you ask, sort of figuring that some might have retreated or made a home here, forests being their natural homes and all. Your question is met with slight annoyance. + +“Most certainly not! This place has been elf free for millennia and hopefully stays that way! I’ll speak no more of this elven nonsense!” + +You don’t press the issue, but up until now you figured fairy folk and elves were all friends, guess not. The pixie changes the subject since she wants to know more about this Great Lich Lord business and says her name is Qweet. Qweet tells you that she will return with the rest of her clan, as she will not reveal their home of course. In a somewhat playful yet firm tone she also warns you not to try to follow her, though as good of a tracker you are you doubt if you could anyway since she turns invisible again. + +While you wait, you still can’t believe she and the rest of her clan don’t know anything about what’s going on; you almost envy them for living in blissful ignorance for the last ten years. You also feel like you’ve ruined things for them. + +Eventually more pixies return and you tell them what’s been going on. They are saddened, but maintain a confident demeanor. They are certain that they will survive this plague due to their illusions. They explain that if need be they can hide the entire forest, which with the new grim information you gave them they are very inclined to do. They still have to discuss it. + +In the meantime they say they hope you’ll stick around for awhile as they still enjoy your playing and you aren’t destroying the forest. You’re just glad you’ve met some friendly people that aren’t trying to kill you. It’s a nice change and after what you’ve been through recently, you welcome it. + +One year passes… + +Your time in the pixie forest has been relatively safe. Other than the occasional aggressive forest beasts, you haven’t had to do much combat. It’s been a relief. You’ve enjoyed the company of the pixies as well. + +However, your natural curiosity has gotten the better of you on occasion and you have made a few trips outside of the forest. + +You travel as far as the Retlad province and the first obscure village you stumble across is completely decimated, with undead roaming around. The scary part about it is this is very recent looking, which means they’re starting to head your way. + +It’ll start with the occasional zombie or skeleton wandering in. Then more will come. How long before an army arrives? Again due to your information, Qweet and the rest of her clan have made the final decision to hide their forest entirely. They tell you that they would like you to stay. You would even be allowed to see their true home. The only stipulation is that you would not be able to leave. The illusion wouldn’t just hide the forest, but it would create a barrier preventing entry or exit. You can’t imagine how it would look to those on the outside of the forest. + +Appealing to be sure, but as much as you like the company of the pixies, you don’t think it will be safe to dwell in their forest for too much longer, illusions or not. The Gnomes back in the Garwold Confederacy had some excellent illusionists as well, and it didn’t help them. +> Leave +The pixies have almost made you forget about what’s really going on in the rest of the world…but you still know it’s going on. Perhaps it’s easier for them, as they have not had to experience the tragedies you’ve faced, but you know the destruction that’s eventually going to come. You don’t see any hope in their plan and if you stayed, and you still would never be able to completely relax. You could possibly be trapped as well. + +However, you have no wish to bring more despair to these people. Let them live in illusions for as long as they can, + +You wish you could. + +It is with great regret that you tell them that you cannot stay. They attempt to convince you to do otherwise, but you’ve already made up your mind. Finally they accept your decision, but insist on repaying you for all your musical entertainment. They give you a small magical amulet. They tell you it can make you invisible for short periods of time. + +You thank them and assure them that it will most definitely come in handy. + +You leave the forest and head further away from the undead plague. + +Nine years pass… + +Twenty years of surviving this living hell. + +Living in a cave in the mountains isn’t as easy as it was in the Pixie forest, but it’s probably a lot safer as far as undead are concerned. The biggest threats you’ve had to face are a few Cragmaws and Mountain Trolls. Once you ran into a couple of dwarves, so you assume that there may be an underground settlement somewhere in the area. You attempted to speak, but they just shot at you with their crossbows and told you to go away, saying that humans were the cause of the problem going on right now. + +Your use your amulet when you can as it seems that the living have been just as willing to kill you as the undead. Then again, that’s nothing new. + +Every now and then you travel and scout around the area taking in the untainted countryside. You figure you should do it now before it’s claimed eventually. The living exist here, which means death can only eventually follow. You just wonder how long it will take. + +Sometimes you walk along the shore that’s nearby. You look out past the vast blue and begin to wonder if there are any other places out there. You briefly entertain the idea of building a boat. You know that the globe was thoroughly charted centuries ago and that this is the only continent, but still you wonder if something wasn’t missed. Of course you’re probably just holding on to the false hope that you could theoretically go someplace else where death wasn’t everywhere. + +But there isn’t such a place. + +Lately something very odd has been happening and you have no idea what it is. You could swear that the landscape has been subtlety altering itself from time to time. Not permanently, but it seems to look “wavy” or “warped” briefly. + +You initially chalk it up to your prolonged isolation and seeing things because of it, however you soon find out that it’s more than just your mind playing tricks on you. + +One day after you’ve done some hunting and bringing your catch back to your cave, you start noticing a severe slow down in your actions. + +“What the fuck…” you say to yourself, except it comes out a lot slower. You don’t experience for long, but the worst is yet to come. + +A portal opens up in the sky and you immediately feel ill. You see a creature that you’ve never seen before and it’s huge but it feels incredibly unnatural and it definitely isn’t of this world. The dead animal that you’re carrying suddenly melts into a black goo like substance. You jump back and nearly fall off the side of the mountain, which now feels like jelly under your feet rather than sturdy rock. + +You don’t know what’s going here and you don’t want to know. All you know is reality is starting to be seriously warped and you’re ready to puke. + +The tentacled creature doesn’t seem to notice you, it’s just surveying and floating in the air as the area around and beneath it changes. That still doesn’t mean it won’t attack eventually when it does notice you. + +You immediately attempt to use your amulet, but nothing is happening. The creature or something else is nullifying your magic item. + +Right now you’re caught out in the open, your cave is close, but you’re still not sure if you can get there in time and even if you do, would you be any safer? The other alternative is to make you way back down the mountain and try to escape that way. The problem with that plan is that everything is very wobbly right now and you’re not feeling very steady. +> Run to your cave +The creature is too big to fit in the cave if it tries to attack and you need to hide as soon as possible. + +You make a run for it, gagging and stumbling the whole time. Eventually you do get to the cave. You don’t think the creature even saw you. + +You continue to fumble around in the dark cave that you call home. You can still hear weird noises coming from outside and you’re desperate to drown them out as you feel like its doing something to your mind. In fact, you’re feeling a little deranged. + +“WHAT?! WHAT?! UNDEAD WEREN’T ENOUGH?! NOW THIS?! HAHAHAHA! YOU CAN’T KILL ME! I’LL SURVIVE! I SURVIVE EVERYTHING! Who am I here? Who goes there?” + +You look around the cave and start seeing the rocky walls transform into writhing masses of worms. You grab your sword and start hacking away, only to fall to the ground half laughing and half crying. + +“You don’t understand…I’ve lost it all…(sob) why? WHERE ARE THE GODS? WHY HAVEN’T YOU STOPPED THIS?! DAMN YOU FUCKING ALL! Ha ha ha ha!” + +You look into the small fire that lights your cave and see it change into a blue color. You begin to think you see faces in it. + +“Randi? Is that you? I’m sorry…I could still save…” + +You burn your hand badly when you shove it into the flames in some misguided attempt to save your sister who is not there. It’s at this point; you realize you’re losing your mind. You didn’t survive this long just to lose that. You start trying to block out the sounds, but it’s relentless. + +And that’s when you see your mandolin on the floor nearby. Music. It always takes you to another place. A better place. You can’t play it right now with your burned hand, but your music is always with you. In your mind. + +You begin to focus on one particular song in your head. You close your eyes think of yourself playing. The tune is nearly drowned out by the noise, but eventually the music gets louder and the creature’s noise is getting quieter, until finally that’s all you can hear. + +You have no idea how long you do this for, but eventually you open your eyes again, and everything is normal. The walls are rock, the fire is red. Your hand still hurts, but it will heal. + +You stay in the cave for days, unsure of what to make of all this. Ultimately you leave to explore cautiously, and everything outside seems normal as well. There is no sign that the creature was ever around. You don’t know if it moved on, disappeared, or what. + +Did you go temporarily insane? Did all of this really happen? You do know you burned your hand, so you’re pretty sure it did on some level. In any event, you never want to encounter anything like that ever again. Death almost seems preferable than complete madness. + +You’re still shaken up by the experience for months to come but eventually you get over it. Just like you have with every other hardship you’ve faced. + +Twenty years pass… + +Forty years have passed and you feel death closer than ever. Old age has been taking its toll and while you’re somewhat fit for your age you can’t stop the ravages of time. + +Still, it’s not just that. It’s the world in general. The place has slowly become a dead world, quite literally from what you’ve seen during your travels. + +Eventually you abandoned your cave in the mountain when the dead began to congregate in the area. The dwarven settlement was probably attacked. You don’t know, you didn’t stick around. You continued to stay on the move. + +After a few years of wandering, you noticed dead trees. Not unusual in the lands of the Great Lich Lord, but you were sticking to places at least on the outskirts of his domain. But it didn’t seem to matter. His influence was obviously extending. The magic in your amulet no longer works, and you briefly thought of the pixies. You know they didn’t survive. + +Soon grass was no longer growing. Hunting was becoming scarce. Animals were dying out. It almost reminded you of when the farm was going through a rough patch, but this time there would be no recovery. You walked along another shoreline and saw fish and other sea creatures washed up dead in massive quantities. + +You’ve had to fight undead monsters at almost every turn, always having to stay one step ahead before you’re overwhelmed. + +Even the air itself feels like it’s harder to breathe no matter where you go. + +Right now you’re very far north, where nothing ever existed save ice and snow. You’re living in yet another cave, but you’re pretty sure this one is going to be your tomb. You haven’t eaten in days, as you haven’t spotted a living creature in days. You haven’t seen another intelligent living creature in years. + +It’s very cold, and all you want to do is sleep now. You think you might have one or two more days left tops. + +However, you’re not allowed to leave just yet… + +While you’re drifting in and out of consciousness in your weakened state, you suddenly see a dark hooded figure by the fire. You know who it is. + +“So…you’ve come for me personally? I didn’t think I was important enough.” you ask. +“You aren’t really. Let’s just say that I have a lot of free time and with less and less living now, I take a more personal approach whenever I can. Besides, given how remote this place is, I doubt if any of my necromancers could’ve found you anyway. That is if I hadn’t killed them all.” + +The Great Lich Lord’s voice doesn’t sound anything like you thought it might. It’s actually not very scary at all. Almost calm. + +“Heh. I killed a necromancer once…” you say. +“You have my thanks then, one less treacherous fool that I didn’t have to deal with.” +“You didn’t really need to come all this way you know, I think I was dying before you got here.” + +At this point the Great Lich Lord begins walking around your cave looking at your meager possessions. He immediately notices your very worn mandolin and picks it up. + +“Please feel free to take it. I won’t be needing it anymore.” You say. +“Not sure what I’d do with it. I’m not musically inclined at all. I’m pretty much only good at killing things as you can tell.” +“Yeah, you’re great at that.” +“My mistress Catalina likes music though; perhaps she might find it interesting. This looks very old, where did you get it?” +“Oh in a town that the demons destroyed when they lost their leader Velzix.” +“Hah. Demons. I think everyone was glad when I got rid of those assholes.” The Great Lich Lord remarks. +“That thing probably saved my life when I found it. Some weird ass vampire called Warnov wanted me to play for him. Said you were after him or something…” +“Yes. Vampires weren’t my favorite people. Arrogant creatures. Well they’re dead now. Excuse me, but did you say Warnov?” +“That was his name. Yes.” + +The Great Lich Lord is silent for a moment and then speaks again. + +“I know who you are. I can’t believe it’s you, but I know who you are. I remember before I tracked down and killed old Warnov, he stated that he was glad he heard you play before he died. He also said that if I ever encountered you that I should insist that you play for me before I killed you. Something about your playing being beautiful or something. You also served in the Zalan Empire army. Weren’t you supposed to be a hero or something?” + +You laugh weakly. + +“Mostly or something.” You reply. +“Hm. I wonder if you ever met…” the Great Lich Lord then pauses for a moment. “…nevermind. It’s the past and that no longer matters. So can you still play this thing?” +“Well of course, but…” +“Good. We’re leaving this place then, got a job for you.” +Before you can speak another word, you feel yourself teleported. +> One last song... +You find yourself in a very ornate yet definitely dark chamber. All manner of symbols related to death exist here. You could only be in the Great Lich Lord’s tower in Nuro. You never thought you’d ever be here. The last time you were anywhere near Nuro was forty years ago and things were much different. + +“Welcome to Aftermath, my musical guest. As I said, I’m not much for music, but Catalina is and I’m sure she would love to hear you play. She…” The Great Lich Lord pauses again. “She hasn’t been feeling well lately and I think this would help out. Just take seat in that chair over there. Here’s your mandolin.” + +This almost surreal. You didn’t expect your last moments on this world to be like this. Lacking any other ideas you slowly go over to sit on the chair, while the Great Lich Lord goes to get his mistress Catalina. They better hurry up because you feel like you’ve done more than knocking on death’s door; you’re quite literally in his home. The proximity of being so close to the Great Lich Lord is speeding up your death. + +The Great Lich Lord soon arrives with Catalina and you look upon her. She’s very beautiful. You had heard stories about her before decades ago when you were still serving in the army. She looks young, though she has to be much older. However, you can tell she’s not exactly moving very fast and taking her time. It’s apparent that despite her skill in necromancy that she’s suffering from the effects of the Great Lich Lord’s death aura. She must be powerful indeed to be able to withstand his proximity everyday. She must also love him very much to do it. + +You briefly think of how someone could ever love such a being, or how such a being is even capable of love. But given how you see them interact, there it is. + +This also starts to make you angry. Why are they allowed such a thing? They’re the bad guys here. You never did anything wrong and you lost everyone you ever loved or cared about. You begin to tear up, but it’s in frustration rather than sadness. All the past pain and suffering that you’ve ever experienced has come back to hurt you one last time. + +“Okay, start playing.” The Great Lich Lord says. +“No.” you remark. +“What?” +“You heard me. No.” +“I don’t think you’re in any position to defy me.” +“Oh I think I’m in every position. What the hell are you going to do to me? I’m fuckin’ dead already! You’ve already taken everything away from me! My friends and acquaintances died because of you! I lost my home because of you! My family and loved ones died because of you! I had to kill my own mother because she became one of your undead minions! My siblings, all fuckin’ dead! All I have left is my music! And now you want me to give that away to you too? NO! I’ll DIE with it!” + +After this outburst the Great Lich Lord replies in kind. + +“Insolent mortal! Do you forget who I am? You think dying will save you? Think again! I will kill you and raise you as a fucking zombie and MAKE you play for us in a pink dress if it so amuses me! Now play and perhaps that won’t be your fate!” + +The Great Lich Lord’s voice now sounds more menacing. More like what you thought, but you don’t care, you’ve got nothing to lose at this juncture. It is at this point Catalina steps in. + +“I don’t think that will be necessary dear. You just let me handle this. You go in the next room and cool off or something.” + +The Great Lich Lord agrees to this and hugs Catalina, before walking off. Catalina now walks towards you. + +“You’ll have to forgive my beloved’s outburst. He goes a little over the top when it comes to me. Especially now. So much has happened. He’s changed so much and continues to change even now. He doesn’t express it, but I think it’s always gotten to him.” +“I don’t have to forgive shit. Am I supposed to feel sympathy? He’s caused all this…and you too! How can you stand by him? You’re still alive! You could probably kill him and stop this before the entire world is dead!” +“Oh I doubt if I could, even if I so desired, which I don’t. My feelings for him and the reasons…well the heart wants, what the heart wants. I sometimes worry about what he will do after I’m gone though. He’s in great denial. He knows I cannot fight off his overwhelming aura forever. I suppose in some ways, bringing you here to play for me was some vain hope of making me feel better. And it will, in its own way…” + +You still can’t believe that she’s trying to make them out to be the victims. + +“Look I don’t care about what the hell you two death freaks want, I know what the hell I’ve gone through and it’s all your fault. Fuck the both of you. You haven’t had to deal with the pain I’ve gone through.” +“Perhaps not. But do you think you are the only one on this world who’s suffered? What makes your life and those close to you so special? Nothing. You and everyone else whoever lived on this dying world are equal. You, your family, even me. The only person who isn’t equal, is in the next room. We’ve all lost those close to us at some point. Yes, even my beloved and he’ll lose another when I’m gone. We’ll all be long dead and he’ll probably still be on this world by himself with nothing to do. And that, I’m convinced will be the greatest suffering of all. Life without end? No thank you. When my time comes, I will embrace it.” + +You’re very surprised to hear a necromancer say that. + +“My beloved cannot help what he is. For whatever reason, he was gifted with the art of death. He’s become it. It’s his nature. You can’t be angry with a force of nature. It has to simply be.” + +You want to argue, you want to fight, you want to bring up every moral debate you can think of, but to be quite honest you can’t. Part of it is it wouldn’t make any difference. Part of it is you’re tired of fighting, you can’t do it anymore and you don’t have strength at this point. The other part is that in a way what she’s said makes some sense and is correct. + +It also makes you think about your “nature”. It was to play music. You never got to live the life you wanted, but during your lifetime, music always seeped in somehow. It always found a way. + +Catalina continues to speak. + +“Now you certainly don’t have to play. That’s your choice. I will make sure that my beloved does not turn you into dress wearing zombie though. It would be a shame though. You are not completely unfamiliar to me. I do have some knowledge of who you are and I have heard stories of your playing. I would like to hear it played while you still had the passion and energy behind it. The living spark that can only invoke such things.” +“…I’ll play…” you say with a heavy breath that took some effort for you. +“You will?” +“Yes…what did you want to hear?” + +Catalina smiles. + +“I don’t know, whatever you like I suppose. Just as long as it has a nice soothing melody.” +“Okay then.” +“Hold on, I must get my beloved before you start. I must ask though, what changed your mind to play?” +“Nothing. It’s my nature.” + +Catalina soon returns with the Great Lich Lord and they both sit in their respective thrones. Catalina tells you to play, which you do so. + +You watch the pair of them look at each other as you play. You would appear that Catalina is pleased with her “gift”. You don’t know about the Great Lich Lord, since you can’t see his face, but you assume that if she’s happy, then he’s happy. + +You see them hold hands and look at each other as you enter the second verse of the song. At this point you begin to close your eyes and just let the music and instinct guide your fingers. You can feel your life slip away, but it doesn’t matter. You’ve been taken to a different place. A better place. + +You smile and wave to your family. You can see them all so clearly. All of them are there. You’re getting closer. They’re ready to accept you with open arms. + +Last verse. Not much energy left, but you’re nearly there. You won’t have to worry about anything anymore. Heart slowing down. You’re with them now. Everything will be so good again. Your music has saved you one last time. + +One last note. +One last breath. +You’re home. + + + +“Well, he certainly looked happier than he did earlier.” +“Yes, yes he did. Set his body on fire dear.” +“You don’t want him around to play for you later?” +“No, I don’t think that performance could ever be replicated.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The pixies have almost made you forget about what’s really going on in the rest of the world…but you still know it’s going on. Perhaps it’s easier for them, as they have not had to experience the tragedies you’ve faced, but you know the destruction that’s eventually going to come. You don’t see any hope in their plan and if you stayed, and you still would never be able to completely relax. You could possibly be trapped as well. + +However, you have no wish to bring more despair to these people. Let them live in illusions for as long as they can, + +You wish you could. + +It is with great regret that you tell them that you cannot stay. They attempt to convince you to do otherwise, but you’ve already made up your mind. Finally they accept your decision, but insist on repaying you for all your musical entertainment. They give you a small magical amulet. They tell you it can make you invisible for short periods of time. + +You thank them and assure them that it will most definitely come in handy. + +You leave the forest and head further away from the undead plague. + +Nine years pass… + +Twenty years of surviving this living hell. + +Living in a cave in the mountains isn’t as easy as it was in the Pixie forest, but it’s probably a lot safer as far as undead are concerned. The biggest threats you’ve had to face are a few Cragmaws and Mountain Trolls. Once you ran into a couple of dwarves, so you assume that there may be an underground settlement somewhere in the area. You attempted to speak, but they just shot at you with their crossbows and told you to go away, saying that humans were the cause of the problem going on right now. + +Your use your amulet when you can as it seems that the living have been just as willing to kill you as the undead. Then again, that’s nothing new. + +Every now and then you travel and scout around the area taking in the untainted countryside. You figure you should do it now before it’s claimed eventually. The living exist here, which means death can only eventually follow. You just wonder how long it will take. + +Sometimes you walk along the shore that’s nearby. You look out past the vast blue and begin to wonder if there are any other places out there. You briefly entertain the idea of building a boat. You know that the globe was thoroughly charted centuries ago and that this is the only continent, but still you wonder if something wasn’t missed. Of course you’re probably just holding on to the false hope that you could theoretically go someplace else where death wasn’t everywhere. + +But there isn’t such a place. + +Lately something very odd has been happening and you have no idea what it is. You could swear that the landscape has been subtlety altering itself from time to time. Not permanently, but it seems to look “wavy” or “warped” briefly. + +You initially chalk it up to your prolonged isolation and seeing things because of it, however you soon find out that it’s more than just your mind playing tricks on you. + +One day after you’ve done some hunting and bringing your catch back to your cave, you start noticing a severe slow down in your actions. + +“What the fuck…” you say to yourself, except it comes out a lot slower. You don’t experience for long, but the worst is yet to come. + +A portal opens up in the sky and you immediately feel ill. You see a creature that you’ve never seen before and it’s huge but it feels incredibly unnatural and it definitely isn’t of this world. The dead animal that you’re carrying suddenly melts into a black goo like substance. You jump back and nearly fall off the side of the mountain, which now feels like jelly under your feet rather than sturdy rock. + +You don’t know what’s going here and you don’t want to know. All you know is reality is starting to be seriously warped and you’re ready to puke. + +The tentacled creature doesn’t seem to notice you, it’s just surveying and floating in the air as the area around and beneath it changes. That still doesn’t mean it won’t attack eventually when it does notice you. + +You immediately attempt to use your amulet, but nothing is happening. The creature or something else is nullifying your magic item. + +Right now you’re caught out in the open, your cave is close, but you’re still not sure if you can get there in time and even if you do, would you be any safer? The other alternative is to make you way back down the mountain and try to escape that way. The problem with that plan is that everything is very wobbly right now and you’re not feeling very steady. +> Run back down the mountain +You’re having difficulty concentrating, but you decide that it would be better to distance yourself from the creature rather than trapping yourself in a cave. + +You attempt to head down the mountain, but you really are feel very sick and dizzy, in fact you’re beginning to feel worse. The ground underneath you doesn’t even feel like jelly now, you’re actually sinking into it like quicksand! + +“What the fu…” you say before a sudden powerful wave of nausea that hits you causes you to vomit immediately. + +You try to stop the sinking, but it’s futile and soon you’ve sank all the way it. Oddly you can still breathe; but the terrain has turned to worms and maggots. You can feel them crawling all over you, in your ears and every other orifice of your body. + +You begin to laugh insanely (while the maggots crawl all in it) since your mind has become severely warped at this point and madness has overtaken you as you sink further through the maggot mountain. + +You’re unsure of how long this goes on for since you’ve lost your mind, but whatever was going on eventually stops and everything returns to normal. Unfortunately that doesn’t really help you since you’re still in the mountain which has returned to solid rock where you are now completely embedded in. You die instantly, putting an end to your madness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Really, it’s the only thing that makes any kind of sense anymore. This war is lost there’s not even any doubt about it. Hope is fleeting and if this is truly it, then it’s going to be with the ones you did this for in the first place. + +Your small groups of soldiers wonder where you’re going and you flat out tell them, in fact you tell them more than that. + +“I’m going home, and I suggest if any of you have any family you go to them as well. This is it folks, there’s no happy ending here. It’s been a pleasure serving with all of you.” + +You then ride home as quickly as possible. + +The farm is scattered with undead. They attack and in some cases eat the livestock, while attempting to get into your house. Dead Zalan soldiers can be seen, except they aren’t properly dead like they should be. The farmhouse is being attacked and you can see your sister firing her pistol at the zombies from one of the broken windows. You trample a couple of the zombies with your horse and kill couple more with your bow, but eventually you dismount and chop up the remaining ones near the farm house, since you want to save your arrows for anything potentially more dangerous. + +“Quick get inside through this window, the door is barricaded.” your sister Randi shouts when she sees you. +“No! It’s a death trap to stay now! This place is lost! You all have to come with me!” you shout back, keeping an eye on the advancing zombies. +“Can’t Mom’s hurt pretty bad. Got stabbed by one those corpses. We can’t move her. Help’s gotta come soon…” +“NO, it won’t Randi! The capitol of Zalan is being attacked as we speak! I came home to get your guys! This is the fucking end! We’ve lost! We just gotta…” + +You’re interrupted when you have to cut down an advancing zombie. Your sister fires a shot at another one. Suddenly a scream from the house is heard, followed by another. That has to be Calwin, and Makana. Randi rushes from the window and you cut down another zombie before bashing the door down with relative ease. + +More screaming is heard along with growling this time. You look around and run down the hallway where Randi is standing motionless. She’s dropped her pistol. + +You push her aside and see your other sister Makana dead on the floor and then a quick scan to the left and you see your mother eating Calwin. + +She’s one of those things… + +You act where Randi failed and give a killing blow to the thing that was once your mother. + +“I’m sorry.” You whisper and her blood splashes across your face. + +Now you’re ready to get the hell out of the house, but Randi is still standing there motionless. + +“COME ON! WE GOTTA GET THE FUCK OUTTA HERE!” you shout. +“Yeah...okay…” Randi says and begins to move like she’s in slow motion and picks up her flintlock. + +You run past Randi in the hallway who’s still moving slowly. + +“Randi get your ass mov…” + +You hear a gunshot behind you. Followed by the slumping of a lifeless body. You don’t even turn around, you don’t want to see. + +When you get outside, surprisingly the undead haven’t become unmanageable yet, and you cut down another couple with relative ease. Your horse unfortunately has run off, you’re on foot from here. + +You don’t even know where to go. Where is it going to be safe? Nowhere, but you lack any other ideas, so you just head for unclaimed wilderness. + +After about a day of running, hiding and maneuvering, you’re in a relatively safe location and that’s when you finally allow yourself to grieve for the loss of your family. You weep. + +You’ve lost everything now. Everything you did was basically for them, and now they’re all gone. You don’t know if you can even continue. What would be the point? The world seems to be doomed anyway. + +But then after you think about it, you decide that if death is taking over the world, you’re not going to make it easy. Death has already taken everything away from you except your life, and you’re going to hold on to that as long as possible. You’re going to live for your family and all the others that can’t any longer. + +You’re going to survive, because ultimately that’s what you’ve always done. You’ve cheated death more than once already and you’ll continue to do it. Death itself is going to have to hunt you down if it wants your life. + +After reaching this conclusion, you try to think of where you should go next. Going to any type of centers of civilization is out of the question now. You’d only have to move again, them being targets now. + +So it’s the life of wanderer now. The question is where would be best? The forests aren’t exactly safe, but you’re more familiar with surviving in them. The mountains might be a little safer, but living in them is going to be a lot harsher. +> Head to the mountains +Better to get accustomed to them now, since you figure you might have to live in them in the future anyway. + +You head further north and traverse the harsh terrain. As far as undead are concerned you’re in no danger, however the mountain trolls and cragmaws living there are just as dangerous. You eventually find a suitable cave to live in. To keep yourself entertained you play your music in between your survival. + +It’s a rough life, but you persevere for a few years. Unfortunately the day comes when a particularly large mountain troll tribe decides to finally get organized enough to eliminate you from being a nuisance. + +You awaken one night to see several large figures enter your cave. You spring to action immediately, which causes the trolls to laugh. This buys you time to kill at least one of them, but only one. You’re outnumbered, trapped and there’s nowhere to hide. + +The trolls savagely butcher you and even smash your mandolin over your head before you head to permanent unconsciousness. + +The only good thing is that trolls do such a thorough job of eating your body that not even your bones are left to be reanimated when the Great Lich Lord’s influence reaches the area.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know that this is most likely a losing battle, but some hope might be gained, if you can somehow draw out the knights and specters and get them by themselves. As powerful as they are, they’re very hard to control even by necromancers and get easily agitated by living creatures. + +You can’t do it alone though. You take your best archers and a couple of your best wizards and mention your plan. You don’t ask for volunteers, you just assign. You’re in charge and you have to make the hard decisions, even if it might mean you’ll die. They don’t look enthused, but you aren’t either. + +You tell everyone else to hold their ground while you and your small platoon ride towards the horde. + +“Ready those blessed silvers men, and you robe wearers melt those dead tin cans!” + +You get close enough and you unleash as many blessed silver arrows as you can at the Blood Specters. You kill a few. The wizards don’t do quite as well with the knights. However, both attacks are enough. + +You see the Specters and Knights making whatever unearthly noises they do and begin to advance towards you far ahead of the slower yet steady moving horde. It apparent that the necromancer controlling them is attempting to bring them back under control, because they begin to squirm back and forth which gives you some more time to kill a few more during their confusion. Eventually the necromancer must give up total control because they stop squirming and advance upon you once again. + +You ride back as quickly as possible with the Specters and Knights in full pursuit. You didn’t expect those Specters to be so fast. A few of them manage to catch up to some of your men with grisly results. You yourself almost get smacked upside the head by a Death Knight mace. When you get back in range the rest of your awaiting army deals with your pursuers. More blessed arrows fly into the Blood Specters before they can do anymore harm, and eventually the Death Knights are brought down as well. + +There is no time for a reprieve though, as the main horde is now almost upon you. You order a regrouping as best you can, and face the enemy, telling if possible for someone to aim for the necromancer in all of this rotting mess. + +Bones and limbs from both sides are broken and hacked off. A zombie skull is smashed, splashing maggots, blood and brains all over you and you’re not even thinking about it. You just have a tune in your head to take yourself away from the massacre. Somehow in all of the chaos, you single out the necromancer leading this army, he stands a far piece away from the main fighting, but he’s arrogant enough to be close enough for you to hit him with an arrow. + +And you have to hit him now. You see a Grand Alliance soldier who just took a fatal blow to the chest begin to rise… + +Not many arrows left and not much time, you just load up and shoot, hoping you hit the bastard. + +Your shot is straight and true. It strikes the necromancer in the stomach, causing him to fall back, which in turn causes the undead horde to momentarily stop their vicious attacks, giving your side a chance to turn the tide a bit. + +Then you shoot another arrow when you see the necromancer attempt to get back up, which turns the tide completely in your favor. Zombies and skeletons fall. Ghouls flee at the loss of leadership and any remaining undead are quickly dispatched. You don’t take chances though. You walk up to the corpse of the necromancer and shoot your last arrow directly into his head and stab him a few times. + +You then start laughing. + +“If this was the Great Lich Lord, I’d be a real hero right now!” + +You quickly sober up from this macabre outburst when you hear shouting from some of your men and you look up. + +It’s another horde. Just as big. You look behind you and see that your own numbers are completely insufficient. The Garwold citizens are either mostly dead or demoralized at this point. + +Even when you win…you lose. + +Having no real options, you sound a retreat to fall back to the Zalan border and suggest that the Garwold citizens do likewise as there is nothing more for them here. + +The Garwold Confederacy is now just one more loss for the living. The Zalan Empire won’t be far behind. + +Three years pass… + +Ten years since the Nuro incident and The Grand Alliance is nearly just consisting of the Zalan Empire now, which in turn has had to adapt a siege mentality. There is no “going on the offensive” anymore. You’re purely on defense. + +Your brother Mallack died two years ago. Transferred to a location with more fighting due to lack of manpower. Like it matters. Didn’t even get to say goodbye. You can only hope he didn’t become one of those things…but you know he probably did. + +You’ve been urging your family to run where it’s safer, but of course they won’t budge. The undead have been penetrating deeper into Zalan territory, you know it’s only a matter of time before the Great Lich Lord decides to stop toying with you and makes his full scale attack. + +Sure enough it happens. Town after town is taken; you’re pushed back further and further, and you know there’s nothing you can do to stop it. + +An order is given to everyone to fallback to the capital and help defend it from an upcoming attack, but at this point you’re just wondering if the rest of your family is still alive. +> Letters to home (Last letter...) +Dear Mom, + +We’re falling back again. No surprise there. I’ve had a lot on my mind lately, but not for any of reasons you’d know, so I’ll tell you. + +Normally this would be something I would’ve told Mallack, but since he’s dead, I feel like I should tell you. I really miss Mallack. + +I was in contact with a woman by the name of Helena. She was a traveling merchant who I met years ago during my tour in Retlad. We had a relationship of sorts I suppose. We met whenever she was in the area I was stationed in. Dunno why I never told you about her, I guess I just felt weird about telling you. Silly now that I think about it. + +Anyway, she was in the city of Edat a few months ago when it was utterly destroyed. I suggested that she should just stay in the Retlad province since the fighting wasn’t as bad there, but she said there was a big deal to be made in Edat, so she went. Reports say there were no survivors. Of course reports have been wrong before and I have used some of my connections to find out for certain but considering the carnage that occurred I hold little hope. + +I’ll miss her. I can only hope that like Mallack, she wasn’t turned into one of those things. + +The word “hero” gets thrown around far too much and I should know first hand, but I’ll use it here: Where are the “heroes” to stop this? Shouldn’t some party of adventurers been able to slip through the Great Lich Lord’s defenses and chop his head off by now? Wasn’t that how the first one was stopped? Isn’t that how it’s supposed to go? Where are the gods? Why aren’t the good ones doing something to stop the utter destruction of their worshippers?! Hell, the evil ones would even suffice at this point! I mean just to know that SOMETHING is looking out for us in some fashion! + +If they haven’t abandoned this world, they better do something quick, because I feel like we’re in the last hours here. Actually I think we’re on borrowed time. + +We’re getting a report that we might have to fall back to the heart of the empire soon. At this point I’m not sure if I’m even going to do it. I know I’ve been duty bound this long with only a few falters along the way, but now? In the face of extinction? What’s the point? + +Sure there may be nowhere to run from death, but perhaps I can evade him for as long as possible. + +But I haven’t forgotten about all of you. I’d never do that. Even if I have to drag you all out of that infernal farmhouse kicking and screaming. + +Leave a light on for me, I may be coming home. + +I love you all. + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You can’t take it anymore. + +“I’M NOT A FUCKING HERO! OKAY!? I NEVER WAS AND I NEVER WANTED TO BE! (sob)… I just wanted to go home…(sob)” + +You weep for a few minutes before the captain speaks again. + +“Alright then what happened? Tell me the entire truth and maybe you’ll avoid the executioner’s axe.” + +At this point you have little choice. You’re too distraught to say anything else. You give a relatively condensed version of what happened. At Nuro and what happened recently. Your encounter with Warnov seems to surprise her quite a bit. You also go on to explain that it was high ranking Zalan officers that insisted on this hero nonsense. She believes you, like she knows something of it. + +“(sigh) Yeah there’s a statue of my dad in the Zalan capitol…but I know better…” + +You don’t question anymore about this quiet outburst from her since you’re still too worried about what’s going to happen to you. + +“So why did you come back? You probably could’ve gotten away with it.” +“The same reason why I joined. My family. I guess I just needed a reminder of that first hand. And if there’s any hope of changing the tide of this war with the undead then I need to stand by my decision of joining the Zalan Army and making the world safer for them.” + +Once again the captain seems to soften. She almost looks like she’s going to tear up as well, but she turns away. + +“My family…I…” are all she says before taking a deep breath and turning back towards you, with a serious mindset again. + +“Alright, I shall trust your word for now sergeant, but I will be watching you VERY carefully! Consider yourself lucky for evading death once again, perhaps you do have knack for avoiding it. Let us hope that luck rubs off on the rest of us in the upcoming battle. I’m putting you in charge of the Retlad archery platoon. They’ll probably like you. Dismissed.” + +Before you leave she says one last thing. + +“And sergeant, don’t listen to what that bizarre vampire said. We’re not going to become extinct. We’re going to win and survive a long time. Besides you still have to play that song for me.” + +As you leave you feel a sigh of relief that you won’t be dying just yet, but given that you’re heading into battle soon with the undead, you’re wondering if you just didn’t postpone the inevitable. + +Two years pass… + +Seven years since the Nuro Incident changed the world into this living hell. + +Your time served in the Grand Alliance has not really changed much. The Grand Alliance and the Zalan Empire are basically one of the same now thanks to the complete embrace of a totalitarian system. Might makes right. Nations like the Azi Republic protested, but there was little that they could, after all Zalan has been practically defending the world by itself for the past few years. You get the impression that if this war is won; the Zalan Empire is going to throw its hat in to be a one world government. + +Amazing how power and conspiracy is plotted even when it probably won’t happen. “Probably won’t” because your superiors and political leaders are a lot more “optimistic” about winning than you are, but then they haven’t had to face the horrors you’ve faced. + +And horrors are a completely accurate word. You’ve gotten over your fear of the undead, but it doesn’t make it any easier. You’re starting to lose ground. Everyday the living lose someone, the Great Lich Lord gains. It’s a question of numbers and quite frankly your side doesn’t have them. + +You sort of wish your old captain was here. She was a very good leader and inspirational, but then again that’s why she was made a general and sent elsewhere. She asked you to play that song before she left though. Somehow it seemed to make her sadder afterwards. + +“Captain, undead are on the move, they won’t be long now.” One of your messengers says. +“Yes, I can sense it. Here. You head back to my home. You know where it is by now, and give this message to my family. If you get back here and see undead, well get the fuck out and run back to Zalan territory.” + +Being a captain hasn’t really turned you into a copy of the captains you served in the past, but then again you didn’t even think you’d ever be promoted to one. Your reign as one has been a little unorthodox as you’ve applied more guerilla tactics than traditional ones, but given your assignment and your background it makes a hell of a lot more sense. + +You’re currently stationed on what remains of the Garwold Confederacy. It was a relatively peaceful nation made up mostly of Halflings and Gnomes, with lush green fields and flowers. Now it’s just slowly becoming another massive graveyard and example of genocide. + +You’ve gotten to know quite a few of them and you’re always amazed of how they can keep their sense of humor in the face of utter destruction. One of them actually gives you an answer. + +“To keep from crying.” + +Indeed. You’ve been playing quite a bit when you’re not battling the undead. (The Garwold citizens enjoy your playing a lot) It’s gotten to the point where you don’t just play anymore to keep your mind off of things, it’s like it transports you to a different world. A better world. + +If only. + +You often wonder how your brother Mallack is doing. He’s been stationed in a relatively safer location back in Zalan territory. You’re guessing that it lowers the odds of having your mom lose both of her sons at the same time. Like it makes it any better if she lost them within any length on time of each other. You wonder if the war is going to go on long enough that by the time Calwin grows up he’ll be drafted as well. + +If he even gets the chance to grow up. + +You can’t think about it now. A massive undead horde is coming and there’s no where left to hide. There will be open battle and you need to stay focused. + +You go through the whole order thing, and making sure your strategy is sound. You wish you had more wizards, but they seem to be in shorter supply these days. It’s almost like they’re being targeted deliberately sometimes…actually you don’t think it, you KNOW that they are. + +You see the undead horde approach. You look through some new fangled dwarven invention called an eye piece and see something makes your job a hell of a lot worse. + +You don’t just see the usual undead. You see fully armored Death Knights. Harder to kill than even a zombie giant. You see Blood Specters. Dark crimson spirits that can cause their victims to bleed from every orifice with their shrieks. Both of those are at the head of this horde, and this isn’t even counting that you’re severely outnumbered by just the regular zombies, skeletons, ghosts and the like. +> Stand your ground +You need to have a fully cohesive unit you think. + +“Ready those blessed silvers men, and you robe wearers melt those dead tin cans!” you order. + +Arrows fly towards the Blood Specters first seeing as they’re your greatest threat, the wizards unleash magic attack on the Death Knights. Your side manages to eliminate most of them before the horde reaches you. + +Unfortunately this isn’t enough. While your side fights valiantly, you’re outnumbered as usual and don’t really have the raw power to at least fight them off properly. Indeed that’s been the whole problem with the Garwold defense. Gnomes and Halflings have never been the best fighters in a straight up battle. + +Doesn’t take long before your dead are rising to join the enemy. You attempt to target the enemy necromancer, but you can’t get a clear shot, and it won’t help with the second dead army that is now heading over the hill now. + +You sound a retreat, but you won’t be joining few survivors left as a Death Knight smashes you in the side of the head with a swing of his fail. You fall to the ground dazed and bloody. As you attempt to get up, your mind begins to fill music. A little tune to take you away from this place… + +You look up just in time to see a blurry outline of the Death Knight who finishes the job and crushes your skull completely.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You can’t take it anymore. + +“I’M NOT A FUCKING HERO! OKAY!? I NEVER WAS AND I NEVER WANTED TO BE! (sob)… I just wanted to go home…(sob)” + +You weep for a few minutes before the captain speaks again. + +“Alright then what happened? Tell me the entire truth and maybe you’ll avoid the executioner’s axe.” + +At this point you have little choice. You’re too distraught to say anything else. You give a relatively condensed version of what happened. At Nuro and what happened recently. Your encounter with Warnov seems to surprise her quite a bit. You also go on to explain that it was high ranking Zalan officers that insisted on this hero nonsense. She believes you, like she knows something of it. + +“(sigh) Yeah there’s a statue of my dad in the Zalan capitol…but I know better…” + +You don’t question anymore about this quiet outburst from her since you’re still too worried about what’s going to happen to you. + +“So why did you come back? You probably could’ve gotten away with it.” +“The same reason why I joined. My family. I guess I just needed a reminder of that first hand. And if there’s any hope of changing the tide of this war with the undead then I need to stand by my decision of joining the Zalan Army and making the world safer for them.” + +Once again the captain seems to soften. She almost looks like she’s going to tear up as well, but she turns away. + +“My family…I…” are all she says before taking a deep breath and turning back towards you, with a serious mindset again. + +“Alright, I shall trust your word for now sergeant, but I will be watching you VERY carefully! Consider yourself lucky for evading death once again, perhaps you do have knack for avoiding it. Let us hope that luck rubs off on the rest of us in the upcoming battle. I’m putting you in charge of the Retlad archery platoon. They’ll probably like you. Dismissed.” + +Before you leave she says one last thing. + +“And sergeant, don’t listen to what that bizarre vampire said. We’re not going to become extinct. We’re going to win and survive a long time. Besides you still have to play that song for me.” + +As you leave you feel a sigh of relief that you won’t be dying just yet, but given that you’re heading into battle soon with the undead, you’re wondering if you just didn’t postpone the inevitable. + +Two years pass… + +Seven years since the Nuro Incident changed the world into this living hell. + +Your time served in the Grand Alliance has not really changed much. The Grand Alliance and the Zalan Empire are basically one of the same now thanks to the complete embrace of a totalitarian system. Might makes right. Nations like the Azi Republic protested, but there was little that they could, after all Zalan has been practically defending the world by itself for the past few years. You get the impression that if this war is won; the Zalan Empire is going to throw its hat in to be a one world government. + +Amazing how power and conspiracy is plotted even when it probably won’t happen. “Probably won’t” because your superiors and political leaders are a lot more “optimistic” about winning than you are, but then they haven’t had to face the horrors you’ve faced. + +And horrors are a completely accurate word. You’ve gotten over your fear of the undead, but it doesn’t make it any easier. You’re starting to lose ground. Everyday the living lose someone, the Great Lich Lord gains. It’s a question of numbers and quite frankly your side doesn’t have them. + +You sort of wish your old captain was here. She was a very good leader and inspirational, but then again that’s why she was made a general and sent elsewhere. She asked you to play that song before she left though. Somehow it seemed to make her sadder afterwards. + +“Captain, undead are on the move, they won’t be long now.” One of your messengers says. +“Yes, I can sense it. Here. You head back to my home. You know where it is by now, and give this message to my family. If you get back here and see undead, well get the fuck out and run back to Zalan territory.” + +Being a captain hasn’t really turned you into a copy of the captains you served in the past, but then again you didn’t even think you’d ever be promoted to one. Your reign as one has been a little unorthodox as you’ve applied more guerilla tactics than traditional ones, but given your assignment and your background it makes a hell of a lot more sense. + +You’re currently stationed on what remains of the Garwold Confederacy. It was a relatively peaceful nation made up mostly of Halflings and Gnomes, with lush green fields and flowers. Now it’s just slowly becoming another massive graveyard and example of genocide. + +You’ve gotten to know quite a few of them and you’re always amazed of how they can keep their sense of humor in the face of utter destruction. One of them actually gives you an answer. + +“To keep from crying.” + +Indeed. You’ve been playing quite a bit when you’re not battling the undead. (The Garwold citizens enjoy your playing a lot) It’s gotten to the point where you don’t just play anymore to keep your mind off of things, it’s like it transports you to a different world. A better world. + +If only. + +You often wonder how your brother Mallack is doing. He’s been stationed in a relatively safer location back in Zalan territory. You’re guessing that it lowers the odds of having your mom lose both of her sons at the same time. Like it makes it any better if she lost them within any length on time of each other. You wonder if the war is going to go on long enough that by the time Calwin grows up he’ll be drafted as well. + +If he even gets the chance to grow up. + +You can’t think about it now. A massive undead horde is coming and there’s no where left to hide. There will be open battle and you need to stay focused. + +You go through the whole order thing, and making sure your strategy is sound. You wish you had more wizards, but they seem to be in shorter supply these days. It’s almost like they’re being targeted deliberately sometimes…actually you don’t think it, you KNOW that they are. + +You see the undead horde approach. You look through some new fangled dwarven invention called an eye piece and see something makes your job a hell of a lot worse. + +You don’t just see the usual undead. You see fully armored Death Knights. Harder to kill than even a zombie giant. You see Blood Specters. Dark crimson spirits that can cause their victims to bleed from every orifice with their shrieks. Both of those are at the head of this horde, and this isn’t even counting that you’re severely outnumbered by just the regular zombies, skeletons, ghosts and the like. +> Letters to home (Grand Alliance...) +Dear Mom, + +Well I’m sure you’ve heard by now that I’m officially part of the Grand Alliance. I don’t know just how to feel about it either. + +How I even got roped into it, is all by chance and luck. That seems to be a staple in my life. I tried to desert the army once and I ended up getting promoted. I do it again, and even get called on it and I get even more responsibility! The world has gone completely mad. I’m sure of it now. Though who knows for how long. The woman responsible for putting me in my new position says we’re going to win, but as each day wears on, I lose faith that we will. I’ve gotten over my fear of death and the undead, but now it’s been replaced by a numbness to it. I don’t know if that’s worse. + +I heard about Mallack getting drafted. I sure hope he’ll be okay. And I hope you’ll be able to manage the farm without him, but I guess you’ll be alright now that the government has taken control of the farm. I really wish that hadn’t happened, but what can we do right? At least you won’t need to protect the livestock anymore with all the guard patrolling it though. It would seem the Zalan Empire is everywhere nowadays though. Well, everywhere there isn’t undead of course. + +We’re going to try to retake the Brot Kingdom soon, dunno if it’ll be successful. + +Give my love to the rest of the family. + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You can’t take it anymore. + +“I’M NOT A FUCKING HERO! OKAY!? I NEVER WAS AND I NEVER WANTED TO BE! (sob)… I just wanted to go home…(sob)” + +You weep for a few minutes before the captain speaks again. + +“Alright then what happened? Tell me the entire truth and maybe you’ll avoid the executioner’s axe.” + +At this point you have little choice. You’re too distraught to say anything else. You give a relatively condensed version of what happened. At Nuro and what happened recently. Your encounter with Warnov seems to surprise her quite a bit. You also go on to explain that it was high ranking Zalan officers that insisted on this hero nonsense. She believes you, like she knows something of it. + +“(sigh) Yeah there’s a statue of my dad in the Zalan capitol…but I know better…” + +You don’t question anymore about this quiet outburst from her since you’re still too worried about what’s going to happen to you. + +“So why did you come back? You probably could’ve gotten away with it.” +“The same reason why I joined. My family. I guess I just needed a reminder of that first hand. And if there’s any hope of changing the tide of this war with the undead then I need to stand by my decision of joining the Zalan Army and making the world safer for them.” + +Once again the captain seems to soften. She almost looks like she’s going to tear up as well, but she turns away. + +“My family…I…” are all she says before taking a deep breath and turning back towards you, with a serious mindset again. + +“Alright, I shall trust your word for now sergeant, but I will be watching you VERY carefully! Consider yourself lucky for evading death once again, perhaps you do have knack for avoiding it. Let us hope that luck rubs off on the rest of us in the upcoming battle. I’m putting you in charge of the Retlad archery platoon. They’ll probably like you. Dismissed.” + +Before you leave she says one last thing. + +“And sergeant, don’t listen to what that bizarre vampire said. We’re not going to become extinct. We’re going to win and survive a long time. Besides you still have to play that song for me.” + +As you leave you feel a sigh of relief that you won’t be dying just yet, but given that you’re heading into battle soon with the undead, you’re wondering if you just didn’t postpone the inevitable. + +Two years pass… + +Seven years since the Nuro Incident changed the world into this living hell. + +Your time served in the Grand Alliance has not really changed much. The Grand Alliance and the Zalan Empire are basically one of the same now thanks to the complete embrace of a totalitarian system. Might makes right. Nations like the Azi Republic protested, but there was little that they could, after all Zalan has been practically defending the world by itself for the past few years. You get the impression that if this war is won; the Zalan Empire is going to throw its hat in to be a one world government. + +Amazing how power and conspiracy is plotted even when it probably won’t happen. “Probably won’t” because your superiors and political leaders are a lot more “optimistic” about winning than you are, but then they haven’t had to face the horrors you’ve faced. + +And horrors are a completely accurate word. You’ve gotten over your fear of the undead, but it doesn’t make it any easier. You’re starting to lose ground. Everyday the living lose someone, the Great Lich Lord gains. It’s a question of numbers and quite frankly your side doesn’t have them. + +You sort of wish your old captain was here. She was a very good leader and inspirational, but then again that’s why she was made a general and sent elsewhere. She asked you to play that song before she left though. Somehow it seemed to make her sadder afterwards. + +“Captain, undead are on the move, they won’t be long now.” One of your messengers says. +“Yes, I can sense it. Here. You head back to my home. You know where it is by now, and give this message to my family. If you get back here and see undead, well get the fuck out and run back to Zalan territory.” + +Being a captain hasn’t really turned you into a copy of the captains you served in the past, but then again you didn’t even think you’d ever be promoted to one. Your reign as one has been a little unorthodox as you’ve applied more guerilla tactics than traditional ones, but given your assignment and your background it makes a hell of a lot more sense. + +You’re currently stationed on what remains of the Garwold Confederacy. It was a relatively peaceful nation made up mostly of Halflings and Gnomes, with lush green fields and flowers. Now it’s just slowly becoming another massive graveyard and example of genocide. + +You’ve gotten to know quite a few of them and you’re always amazed of how they can keep their sense of humor in the face of utter destruction. One of them actually gives you an answer. + +“To keep from crying.” + +Indeed. You’ve been playing quite a bit when you’re not battling the undead. (The Garwold citizens enjoy your playing a lot) It’s gotten to the point where you don’t just play anymore to keep your mind off of things, it’s like it transports you to a different world. A better world. + +If only. + +You often wonder how your brother Mallack is doing. He’s been stationed in a relatively safer location back in Zalan territory. You’re guessing that it lowers the odds of having your mom lose both of her sons at the same time. Like it makes it any better if she lost them within any length on time of each other. You wonder if the war is going to go on long enough that by the time Calwin grows up he’ll be drafted as well. + +If he even gets the chance to grow up. + +You can’t think about it now. A massive undead horde is coming and there’s no where left to hide. There will be open battle and you need to stay focused. + +You go through the whole order thing, and making sure your strategy is sound. You wish you had more wizards, but they seem to be in shorter supply these days. It’s almost like they’re being targeted deliberately sometimes…actually you don’t think it, you KNOW that they are. + +You see the undead horde approach. You look through some new fangled dwarven invention called an eye piece and see something makes your job a hell of a lot worse. + +You don’t just see the usual undead. You see fully armored Death Knights. Harder to kill than even a zombie giant. You see Blood Specters. Dark crimson spirits that can cause their victims to bleed from every orifice with their shrieks. Both of those are at the head of this horde, and this isn’t even counting that you’re severely outnumbered by just the regular zombies, skeletons, ghosts and the like. +> Letters to home (Battle at Garwold...) +Dear Mom, + +I’m still in Garwold and each day I see more of this once beautiful land die under the hordes of the Great Lich Lord. I wish I could’ve seen this place before all of this. I think I probably could’ve made a living here as a bard under different circumstances. Playing for the downtrodden militias and fleeing refugees during the few free moments is one of the few pleasures I get anymore. + +We’re expecting a big undead push soon, and I don’t see how we can hold on to the remaining territory we have left here. + +I know you probably won’t, but if we lose Garwold, I want you and the rest of the family to SERIOUSLY consider abandoning the farm. It’s not even ours anymore. Why stay there in the face of oncoming danger? + +But I know you’ll probably stay regardless. Maybe it doesn’t matter, because at this point where is there to run? + +Give my love to the rest of the family. + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Now you have to figure out a plan that’s going to prevent you from getting executed. You figure your brother’s plan isn’t exactly a bad one. Your record is good enough that you’d probably be believed. You think up a lie explaining that you were captured by a particularly sadistic vampire who was planning on draining you slowly to keep you as ongoing food. He took you to a cave in the hills where you barely killed him and escaped with your life. You would’ve made your way back sooner, but there were large groups of marauding orc raiders and demons escaping the ruins of the former Tulan kingdom that caused you to be extra cautious and forced you to hide for a few days. + +Yep, that sounds good. You head out with the plan of meeting up with Captain Eckard’s company which is surely at the Tulan Kingdom now. + +Eventually you reach the same town you were at when you made your decision to try to leave. You find it occupied right now, it’s not your company, so you’re about to press on, but someone on patrol sees you. + +“HALT! Where are you supposed to be soldier?!” +“Oh…uh…” you say getting caught off guard. You mentally curse yourself for not being more aware. +“Speak up! Wow, you look a little worse for wear…what company are you with?” +“I was with Captain Eckard…but…” + +“Captain Eckard’s company? Holy shit! We thought they all got killed! The undead reached the Tulan capital first and ambushed them! But why am I telling you? You were there! You must’ve just barely escaped! Don’t worry; you can avenge your friends, we’re gathering strength to attack soon!” + +You don’t believe this… + +The guard begins speaking to you excitedly and asking you how you escaped. You just continue to say you don’t know, it all became a blur when the ambush occurred and how you attempted to fight, but it was just too much. The guard sympathizes and tells you that you can explain more to his captain. You notice he isn’t wearing Zalan armor, he’s wearing Azi Republic armor. You can only assume that perhaps this is a Grand Alliance company. + +Your ideas come true when you do indeed notice several kinds of troop types, though the Zalan Empire soldiers seem to be leading, as the captain is wearing the armor. Your heart sinks when you recognize her and she recognizes you. It was years ago, but you both remember. + +“…what are you doing here?” the female captain asks. “Last I heard you were in Captain Eckard’s company. A company that was reported to be wiped out completely. Have you managed to avoid death once again? You are the lucky one aren’t you?” + +Suddenly surrounding soldiers start to recognize you more closely. The Zalan ones especially. + +“Holy shit it’s him! You fuckin’ survived not one but TWO overwhelming undead hordes! We gotta take him captain, he’s obviously good luck!” the guard says a little misguidedly. +“Good luck? If you haven’t noticed, only HE seems to be getting out alive on these things! I’d say he’s bad luck!” someone else says. +“Nonsense! I heard how he’s killed countless demons with his bow! We could use someone like that in our next attack.” another says. +“Isn’t he the guy that plays the lute really well?” + +A few people start arguing until the female captain speaks again. + +“ENOUGH! I’ll handle this. You in my office now, I’ll speak with you in private. And for the rest of you, get ready to move out. We’re attacking tomorrow.” + +She turns away and enters a building; you slowly follow, while everyone else disperses. + +When you enter the wrecked “office” she closes the door and tells you to sit down, but she doesn’t. Instead she stares at you hard at you and draws her sword. + +“Okay Mr. Survivor. Convince me.” +“Convince you of what?” +“Convince me that you aren’t some fucking undead spy!” +“WHAT?! How? I mean…” +“Easy! In the two encounters you had with the undead on any major scale, you’ve been the only one to survive. Once, maybe. But twice? Mighty suspicious…” +“But I mean…I’m not undead! Look I even walk around in the daylight, I’m not even pale!” +“I didn’t say you were undead, I said you were a spy. There are few of those misguided traitors that think their necromancer overlords will be kind to them, by killing them last. Madness.” +“But I’m not a spy! I killed…” you begin to stutter under pressure. +”Yeah, yeah, you killed demons. Big deal. The undead and demons weren’t friends either. What better way to be a spy than to make yourself a hero?” +“But I’m not…” +“You’re not what?” +“I’m not…” +“What? More lies? Spit out the truth spy!” she demands pointing her sword at your throat. +> Attempt to lie +Quickly remembering the lie you thought up on the way, you sputter it out with some stress. + +“I…I was captured by a vampire! A really fucking sadistic one! He killed my scouting party and took me to say he was going to drain me slowly for fun! He took me to some cave in the hills and it was only by luck that I managed to kill him and escape! I would’ve made my way back sooner, but their were large groups of marauding orc raiders and demons escaping the ruins of the former Tulan Kingdom, so I was extra cautious and…” + +At this point the Captain bashes you in the head with the hilt of her sword. You fall off the chair and onto the floor. + +“LIAR! You expect me to believe this horse shit? I’ve had patrols going all through this area and there aren’t any orcs in the damn area. They all fled further north long ago and the remaining demons mostly ran to the west! Not to mention the closest hills have no caves! You obviously think so low of me that you thought you could fool me OR you’re just a complete idiot as well as a coward! Either way you haven’t convinced me, and you’re fit only for execution! You’re a deserter at best and a spy at worst!” + +“No…wait…” are your last words before the Captain severs your head from your body.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Last time you were wounded and had the misfortune of running into demons. Well you aren’t wounded this time and you’re pretty sure you won’t be running into too many more demons. You’ll be able to pull it off this time. You can’t do this army shit anymore, as much as you want to help your family out, you’ve got to live your own life regardless of what the future holds. You aren’t even worried about committing an executionable offense. + +You easily sneak away as you hear your men call out your name looking for you. You’re glad you didn’t leave too much back at the fort, except your lute, but you’ve got your newly acquired mandolin to make up for it. Eventually you’re away from civilization altogether. + +While you’re out in the wilderness you think about your family again, and you have to at least let them know you’re still alive. Maybe you can still do something about them, after all it doesn’t sound like the Zalan Empire is becoming a great place to live anymore. Perhaps you could convince them to move? + +It takes a week of sneaking around and keeping out of sight, but eventually you make it back home. Zalan looks a lot different; hell home looks a lot different. There was a small wooded area near your farm, but most of the trees have been cut down now. You also remember fewer patrols. Your house looks in better condition however. You guess at least your family seems a lot safer, but for how long? + +You knock on the door in the middle of the night and your sister Randi answers, Not too surprising as she always was a night owl when she was little. At least she used to be little. The passing of the years and she’s now a teenager and grown quite a bit. You’ve been away so long. + +What does surprise you is the flintlock pistol that she’s currently pointing at you! + +“Whoa! Hold on! It’s me, your brother!” you say. +“…it is? It is you!” she exclaims and puts down the gun before hugging you. +“What the hell are you doing with a pistol?” +“The money you sent us allowed to buy new things you know and a traveling merchant was selling this for cheap!” +“No I mean, what are YOU doing with one? You’ll blow your damn head off with that thing! Those things are unstable.” You scold. +“What are you doing home? Are you on leave?” +“Uh…that’s a long story. Wake up the rest of the family; I have to talk to you all.” + +Randi complies while you step inside the house and take in its new look. Eventually your Mom enters, followed by your brother Mallack and finally your youngest brother Calwin and sister Makana. + +You all sit down at the dining room table. (You realize you haven’t done that with your family in years) and you tell them everything. You get a lot of worried reactions. More for you than the other world impending doom stuff though. At least you know that they care. + +“You gotta get back to the army right now! Say you got captured by something and it took you awhile to escape!” Mallack exclaims. +“While I’m sure that MAY work, I just don’t want to do it…I can’t take this anymore. The whole time I’ve been in the damn army, my music has kept me sane. I’ve noticed it have an effect on others as well. Never thought it would. I mean I have talent and…” +“…you feel like you’ve wasted your life?” your mother replies. + +You pause for a moment. You almost want to say yes, but you can’t even if you wanted to. You haven’t wasted it, its just you’ve never really had the chance to do what you’ve ever wanted to do. + +“No…I guess I haven’t… it’s just…” + +Your mother takes your hand and speaks to you. + +“I know. It’s not fair. It’s not right. Life isn’t fair and it’s starting to get a whole lot less fair. I know I’ve mentioned it in letters to you, but the Zalan Empire WILL be taking the farm…and it’s looking like Mallack’s going to be drafted if things are going the way they seem to be.” +“But…see that’s what I’m saying! We could all move! I mean of course I have to go into hiding, maybe Mallack could come with me. And the rest of you could use what money you have left and move to Retlad! It’s a nice place. It’s away from most of the fighting, and there aren’t anymore Quillars there!” + +Your mother shakes her head. + +“You must be behind in the news, because Retlad is finally going to become part of the Zalan Empire soon, so going there to live wouldn’t make any difference. The Empire can take this farm, but in spirit this will ALWAYS be ours. The Empire has said they will allow us to continue working it and living on the land and even if they didn’t they’d have have to drag us all out and stick our heads on pikes before we’d leave. Your father and his father build this farm up to what it is. Our family is going to be here until the end.” +“That’s what I’m afraid of…what about you Mallack? You’re probably going to be drafted. You aren’t worried about that?” +“Sure I am. But what am I going to do, run? Where? From what you described you practically think the whole world is doomed anyway! I might as well take some of the undead bastards out before I go. I was getting bored of the farm anyway. Let Randi take over! Ha ha!” + +Your mother addresses you again. + +“Son, you know our family. We’ve always done the right thing, even if it doesn’t coincide with what we want…I think you know what you have to do.” + +And so you do. So you do. + +You spend one night with your family and make the most of it. You all laugh and joke, trying to put all the problems of the world out of your mind and of course before you leave you play a song for them. + +Eventually you hug them all goodbye and take your leave. More than a few tears are shed on both sides. +> Go into hiding +As much as you still want to help out your family, you have to live your own life while there is still time. They’ll still get money from your supposed death and they know you’re still alive. You figure this will be the last time you see them though, as you can’t risk contacting them anymore. + +The first order of business is to change your identity as much as you can. And head to a place where you can play for an audience, but the probability of someone ratting you out is low if you’re recognized. + +You head to the Garwold Confederacy. It’s a relatively peaceful nation made up mostly of Halflings and Gnomes, with lush green fields and flowers. They’ve surprisingly managed to stay out of most of the fighting; only volunteering a few of their militia and illusionists to the Grand Alliance. They’re also known to appreciate the simpler things in life. + +Eventually you make a place for yourself there in one of the small villages. You make a living playing at the local tavern there. Most of the patrons know that you have some sort of past that you’re trying to hide from. Some of them and the owner know that you’re that Zalan “hero” that they’ve heard about. But just like you thought, they don’t bring it up or say anything about it and just enjoy your music. + +A year passes and you’re happy. Nobody from the Zalan Empire comes looking for you, as it’s assumed you’re dead and everyone’s too busy fighting the undead for the most part. When the Grand Alliance armies pass through, you keep a low profile though. You even meet a pretty Halfling girl to be with. + +The next year isn’t so pretty however. The Great Lich Lord’s armies have been defeating the Grand Alliance’s attempts to stop them and now those armies finally turn their attention to the Garwold Confederacy. + +Within a month half of Garwold has been turned into a graveyard. The Grand Alliance as well as the Garwold militia have been doing their best, but it’s not going to be enough. You help defend the little village that you’ve made your home in and you can’t afford to keep a low profile anymore despite the Grand Alliance presence (Which is now mainly made up of Zalan Empire troops) but it hardly matters at this point. Survival of the living is + +You make plans to leave, and to try to convince your girlfriend and your other new friends that you’ve made here to leave as well. You know they’re all very home bound, but tomorrow you’re going to really try. + +Unfortunately a group of Blood Specters attacks the village that night. You awaken to hear blood curling screams ring throughout the village. You look out the window and see the vile red ghosts stalking the streets. + +You’ve become too attached to these people to not help; you immediately grab your weapons and prepare for battle. + +You head to your girlfriend’s home first, but sadly she’s already been killed and completely drained of blood. You don’t have time to morn as you’re immediately attacked by the Blood Specter that was still lingering in the house. You manage to kill it with a couple silver arrows, but its dying shrieks alert others to your area. + +You slay a couple more of them as you try to look for the necromancer who has to be in the area to even control these creatures, but you can’t keep your eye on all the incorporeal creatures and you suddenly feel a slight pain in your back which reaches forward into your heart as one of them thrusts its hand into you to drain your blood. + +You collapse soon after, only to rise later to join the ranks of the ever growing undead armies.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>If you’ve learned one thing, numbers doesn’t necessarily imply safety. With all the years of patrolling you’ve done along with your previous actions in Retlad so long ago, you actually feel more comfortable in smaller groups at this point. Your one and only rank and file battle didn’t go well. + +Your choice isn’t surprising, if anything more people feel comfortable with you scouting ahead. + +As you journey further into former Tulan territory, you don’t encounter too much resistance. A few demons and crazed followers here and there, but nothing you can’t take care of. It also occurs to you how “planted” you’ve been for the past five years. While it’s true you did leave the fort a lot, you never ventured far from it. This is first time you’ve actually traveled. Ironic, since one of the reasons why you joined the army was the possibility of traveling to interesting places. + +However, it seems like you only visit these interesting places after they’re already destroyed. You’re basically seeing the aftermath of the demon occupation. It sort of reminds you of what you’d seen back in Retlad when the Quillars were killing folks except the landscape is in even worse condition. The demons weren’t content on just corrupting their mortal slaves; they were attempting to turn the entire land into their infernal realm. You can only imagine what sort of hell was going on while they were actually here. + +You get to a small town that’s completely wrecked and seemingly deserted. Its night time and normally you’d go back and wait until morning to scout it, but Captain Eckard is insistent on getting to the former Tulan capital as quick as possible. You split up into small groups to scout the town quicker and tell everyone that if they come across anything more then they can handle, to run and alert everyone else. + +You go building to building not really encountering much of anything. Not even survivors. Lots of half eaten dead bodies in various states of torment though. You expect when Velzix was killed the whole realm descended into anarchy pretty quickly and the demons reverted back to their chaotic natures causing as much mayhem as possible without too much repercussion. + +You enter a shop with two of your other team members. You hear a creaking sound, which doesn’t sound good. One of your team members goes a little further in, and it gets louder. + +“Step back! The floors is…” you utter and then a large portion of the floor collapses underneath him. You attempt to grab his hand, but fail and the rest of the floor collapses underneath you as well. + +You don’t fall too far, but you definitely feel it. You recover as quick as you can and hear your other subordinate who managed to avoid falling through the floor. + +“Sarge! Are you alright?” Private Ramusen shouts. +“Yeah, yeah private. I’m just a little bruised.” +“What about Gannon? Is he alright?” + +You take your tinder box and make a small light. You look around and see that you must be in the basement of some sort of music shop from all the instruments you see. You didn’t even notice when you first entered the place, it just looked like any other ransacked shop. + +Upon further inspection you see a body lying on the floor. It’s Private Gannon and he’s dead. He didn’t land in the “good way” you did and broke his neck. + +“He’s dead.” You call up to Ramusen. +“Shit! He’s fuckin’ dead?” +“Yeah private, I just said he was! Now let me get the hell out of here…fuck! The damn stairs are completely destroyed. I can’t climb up, or even attempt a jump. Ramusen, throw down a rope and make sure you really secure it!” + +While you wait for Ramusen to complete this task, you take a look at some of the instruments. Lots of flutes and other wind instruments that don’t interest you. You grab an old looking mandolin. It’s definitely human design, but it seems very ornate though, must’ve been a specialty piece that wasn’t for sale. + +You pluck at the strings and despite the dirt, grime, and neglect of the instrument; it still manages to produce a fairly pleasing tone. You play for a good five minutes before you realize that Ramusen hasn’t thrown down the rope yet. + +“Private?” is all you utter, when you hear the slumping of a lifeless body, followed by a low voice. + +“Beautiful…” + +You grab your bow, when you see a dark figure loom above you. You fire, but miss due to the figure dodging quicker than anything you’ve ever encountered before. It doesn’t help that this same figure has jumped down the hole beside you before you can blink. + +You’re standing right before the figure now. He has a pale, but familiar face, though the blood around the mouth is new and not encouraging. He knocks the bow out of your hand, but does nothing else to you. You wouldn’t be quick enough to draw your sword given what you’ve seen. In fact right now, all you’re feeling is fear. + +“Almost hit me…you would’ve made a good addition. Maybe you could’ve even…no. Nobody can. This world is lost now and soon my kind won’t even be around to guide your kind to combat the inevitable anymore…” Warnov says. +“What…what are you talking about?” you ask unsure what’s going to happen next. Warnov looks as if he could tell you more than you’d ever want to know about lots of things, but instead he just shakes his head. + +“Nevermind human. Telling you the whole story would not help you anyway. Perhaps it’s best you hadn’t joined us, seeing as I have been marked now. It won’t be long before the rest of my kind are hunted down. He’s really quite pissed at us, and worse, he can sense us you see…(sigh) I can only imagine what he did to poor Count Rostov…” +“Who’s pissed?” +“Who do you think human? The Necro…I mean the Great Lich Lord of course. Oh yes. He’s back…and this one isn’t going to lose like the last one did so long ago.” + +You’re not following all of Warnov’s cryptic speak, but if the last bit he’s said is true, he’s scared the hell out of you more than he has with his actions. Warnov grabs your shoulder and looks into your eyes. + +“I do not envy your fate human…the extinction of your species will soon follow my own. My advice to you? Live human! Live while you can, for eventually this whole world will be dead and under his complete control.” + +Sensing that he’s brought enough doom and gloom to you, he relents and steps back. + +“Play me a song human.” He says catching you off guard. +“…what did you want to hear?” you ask shakily. +“I don’t know…anything. Play what you were playing before.” + +You slowly pick up the dropped mandolin and begin playing the song that you were playing before and you play as if your life depended on it, though you get the impression that Warnov has no intention on killing you. + +He sits quietly listening in the darkness, after finishing the song; he leaps back up through the hole. + +“Beautiful…such talent…such a waste…” + +A rope is thrown down and the sounds of feet running off are then heard. You wait a minute and then climb up the rope, taking the mandolin with you. You see private Ramusen lying nearby with his throat ripped out and thoroughly drained of blood. + +You’re also just in time to hear other members of your group coming to your position when you exit the shop. + +What the hell are you supposed to tell them? Death to the world, reborn lich lords…you start thinking, what’s the point of all this? Maybe Warnov was right, maybe you should LIVE while there’s still time. Granted his information is spotty, but you can’t help but thinking he’s probably more informed on the situation than most people. + +You’ve pondered it several times before, and you’ve even attempted it once, but deserting is looking very desirable again. In this day and age, who’s going to know if were killed or not? +> Letters to home (Moving out from Virtue...) +Dear Mom, + +This will be a quick letter, we’re moving out and I can’t say I’m thrilled with it. + +Last time I wrote, I was talking about how bad the recent demon attacks were, well I’m sure you already heard about the demon lord Velzix being killed. I suppose this is a good thing, since its one less enemy to worry about, but I’m being sent to retake the lands previously owned by him and reports say the Necromancer is as well. + +I still haven’t gotten completely over what happened at Nuro. I need to be strong though since I’m probably going to be doing a lot of combat with the undead in the future. + +Oddly I’m not even worried about myself so much right now; I’m more concerned about you guys. I know the Zalan Empire has been creating a lot of rules lately. Talks of seizing private property and drafts cause me to worry about you all. Never thought that on the eve of possibly facing undead hordes again, it’s our own government that I have concerns about. + +Argh! This is something I’d rather discuss with you in person, of course if I ever got a chance to visit every once in awhile! + +Okay, the Captain’s starting to call everyone. + +Give my love to the rest of the family. + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have to admit, the idea has crossed your mind a bit. A small part of you does wonder about embracing the whole hero image and deliberately doing grand deeds that go beyond the call of your duty. You suppose that you’d at least really feel like one if you did that. + +However, more often than not real heroes don’t live long. You’re wondering what exactly this Mr. Warnov has in mind for you and given his demeanor, his appearance and just your own feelings of uncertainty about him, you decline. You know your limitations even if others don’t see them. So, no you won’t be hunting down some artifact of unlimited power and then single handedly taking out a Demon Lord or Necromancer Lord in their own throne room. + +“No, I don’t think so Mr. Warnov. As I’ve often said, I’m no hero. I’m just doing my job and providing for my family.” + +Mr. Warnov looks disappointed and sighs, but accepts your decision. + +“Very well. This is a shame though. Despite your humble birth you seem to have lots of potential. You could’ve made an excellent addition to our…organization. I’ve also heard your lute playing wasn’t bad either, we don’t have any musically talented types anymore…oh well.” + +Mr. Warnov leaves rather quickly after his last statement. Something about him seemed very odd and you’re sort of glad you didn’t take his offer. You go back to your target practice for awhile when you suddenly hear an alarm cry out loudly through the fort about a small demon army being sighted over the hill. + +“Well back to work…” you say and prepare for battle once again. + +Two years pass… + +It’s been five years since the Nuro Incident and things have gotten worse. + +Both the Necromancer Lord and Velzix have made progress. Too much. The Grand Alliance hasn’t been able to do anything except fight them to a stalemate. All three sides are looking to gain an advantage and somehow you don’t think it’ll be yours. + +The Zalan Empire has become increasingly totalitarian. It’s been increasing its influence over how the Grand Alliance should be run and its strategies. Some of Zalan’s officers have been transferred to become more prominent in leading and commanding the bulk of the Grand Alliance army. You’re not sure if this isn’t a bad idea. Bullying or not, one final voice in matters would probably help the Grand Alliance at this point. There’s been some grumbling by other nations though. + +However it’s also begun several repressive internal measures to keep itself safe. Your mom has mentioned in letters back to you of seeing routine patrols now near the farm. Talks of seizing private property for the good of the Empire are being discussed. You don’t really like the sound of that, but it’s not really like you can do anything about it. You can only take solace in the fact that being part of the Zalan army will at least result in your family not becoming homeless. They would probably still be able to live and work on the farm…it just wouldn’t be your family’s anymore. There’s also talk of a draft. You don’t like the sound of that either. Your brother Mallack would certainly be conscripted now. You can’t imagine him dealing with the things you’ve had to face. You hope it doesn’t come to that. + +Your position at Virtue is looking worse and worse each day. Parts of the fort are severely damaged, you’re short on man power and you don’t even have any decent wizards or healers. You’ve attempted to talk to Captain Eckard about withdrawing and falling back to a safer position, but he won’t hear of it. This fort is NOT to be abandoned. + +The only good thing is that there’s apparently been a small contingent of mercenaries severely messing up things for Velzix in his own territory. They must be incredibly brave or completely mad for Zalan gold to perform such a task. You can’t help but think that maybe YOU would be there right along side them, if you’d joined up with that mercenary company years ago. A sobering thought. + +Time to go on patrol again. You gather up some soldiers and get ready. You look at all of them and wonder which ones won’t be coming back this time. You look at yourself and wonder if you will. A few years ago, everyone coming back alive was at least a possibility, but now it’s not even certain. + +You go out and change up your routine path again. Always have to be different, can’t become predictable. + +A couple of imps attack. Nothing to worry about. Easily dispatched. You know you’ll encounter worse before the day is over though. + +A group of Tulan “citizens” led by their demon overseer attacks you next. Made up of hapless slaves and misguided idiots who think serving the demons is going to pan out in the long run. + +Finally you come across something a little more unusual. A small group of dwarves fighting off a large demon ambush. They look ragged, wounded and in dire need of help. So you help them. + +You unleash five arrows into the head of an Eviscerator before two of your number are fried by a hellfire blast from a Flame Child. The fighting doesn’t get any cleaner from there. You see another one of your members getting shredded, before a path is cleared for the dwarves to follow you back to the fort. One of their own chooses to stay behind to give the rest a chance to escape. As all of you run, a large explosion is heard followed by several yelps, howls and screams. The dwarf has blown himself up with whatever explosives the dwarves are fond of making. + +Finally you get back to the fort where it’s relatively safe, and all you’re thinking about is how you’ll have to do this all over again tomorrow. You retire to your private room where you play your lute and hope you aren’t disturbed by another attack on the fort. Happily, that doesn’t happen, but you are disturbed by one of the dwarves you rescued earlier instead. He’s come to thank you. + +“Hey lad, I just want to say thanks to your actions at least a few of us survived from our clan. Such as it is now. Something about you looks very familiar. Normally you humans all look the same but…ah hah! You’re that lad who I saved near that farm five years ago! Looks like you returned the favor! Stagir’s the name.” + +You didn’t realize it either, but then with all the fighting and the chaos you’d barely survived during that particular day, you weren’t really paying attention to faces. You were just glad someone came along when they did. + +“Yeah…small world I guess. So what happened to your clan?” +“Wiped out lad.” Stagir says mournfully. “At least when you humans were fighting each other you didn’t mess with us, but getting caught between the undead and demons…well it’s a bit different.” +“The undead are that far now?” you ask. +“Aye. They and the demons have been involved in skirmishes here and there. Got no problem with evil fighting evil, but it was just our bad luck that my clan was caught in the middle. The demons are evil incarnate to be sure, but the undead…I dunno. Something worse about them. In the final days, I had to kill clan members who I once called friends and family because of the fucking necromancers raising them from the dead. Some stayed behind to fight since they refused to run. They’d rather die than run from their home. Normally I’d agree, but after seeing that this was a losing battle, some of us decided that it would be better to run. After all we would just be raised again to be used as puppets of the necromancers when we die. Not even free will to choose, or the threat of a demon’s whip. You just become one of them. Can’t let that happen to me. Never.” + +You know something of it, having had to do a little of that five years ago at Nuro, but actually killing undead parodies of family members would be pretty horrific. + +Stagir attempts to lighten the mood a bit by asking you about what you were playing before he interrupted. When you tell him, he tiches and says something about how elven songs are nothing compared to dwarven ones. You never really thought of dwarves having a musical interest before, but Stagir boasts about how they have quite an extensive musical history. + +He takes the lute from you and shows you a couple of dwarven songs, breaking strings in the process. His insistent singing accompanying the songs isn’t exactly pleasant either. He complains about the human made strings not being strong enough to play the songs properly, but thanks you again for saving his life before leaving. + +Every now and then you play these songs for your new dwarven allies who have taken it upon themselves to strengthen and rebuild the fort the “proper dwarf way”. They seem to appreciate it. You’re a little more careful with the strings and don’t indulge in the singing though. (But unfortunately for the rest of the fort, the dwarves do) + +A few months pass and the demon attacks seem to decrease. The strengthened fort certainly helps, but something else is going on. Eventually you’re seeing less and less of them. Eventually some ragged refugees come to the fort and after a bit of babbling and thanking the gods, a few of them explain. + +There are a couple of conflicting stories, but it would seem Velzix is dead! He was killed by something or someone. Consensus seems to be that the mercenary leader died in battle with him though. Without Velzix’s leadership the demons are fighting amongst themselves and the realm is in complete disarray. The Grand Alliance is taking steps to retake the land immediately before the Necromancer Lord gets it. The Zalan Empire in particular is closer though, so naturally YOUR nation is going to get that land first! + +While things may be looking up somewhat, they aren’t necessarily looking up for you. Captain Eckard has orders to begin an attack immediately. You aren’t looking forward to it mainly because you’ll probably encounter an undead army in the process. + +You don’t have a choice though except for what role you can serve. Thanks to your skills and rank. You can either lead troops as normal, or be part of a scouting party. +> Letters to home (She's still alive!) +Hey Mallack! + +This letter is directly for you again. Glad you’ve been keeping these between us. + +Anyway, I know it seemed silly to worry about a girl I just had a brief encounter with years ago for one night. But when I heard about the Brot Kingdom being destroyed by the Necromancer, I did wonder about Helena. + +Well, I found out she’s still alive! She stopped off in Fort Virtue not too long ago! She wasn’t in Brot when all that shit went down. She was trading in the Azi Republic at the time. + +When she arrived in Fort Virtue to trade, I recognized her and she seemed pleased to see me. She mentioned that she was pleased to see a familiar face for once and we spent a lot of time together for as long as she stayed. (And yes, we did THAT several times too.) + +I wish things were different, or at least not the way they are right now. I definitely would want to pursue a more permanent relationship with her because we get along really well, but alas that’s not to be. At least not at this time. + +She told me she was heading to the Retlad Kingdom next; I hope she stays there because there’s less fighting going on. Definitely no more Quillars there anymore. I dunno, I know it’s minor and doesn’t really make sense, but this little bit of info sort of put me in a better mood. I guess I’ll be writing Mom a more upbeat letter as well soon. + +Okay, well I hope everything’s going good with you too. Keep watching out for the Kobolds and keep ‘em out of that chicken coop! + +Your brother<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have to admit, the idea has crossed your mind a bit. A small part of you does wonder about embracing the whole hero image and deliberately doing grand deeds that go beyond the call of your duty. You suppose that you’d at least really feel like one if you did that. + +However, more often than not real heroes don’t live long. You’re wondering what exactly this Mr. Warnov has in mind for you and given his demeanor, his appearance and just your own feelings of uncertainty about him, you decline. You know your limitations even if others don’t see them. So, no you won’t be hunting down some artifact of unlimited power and then single handedly taking out a Demon Lord or Necromancer Lord in their own throne room. + +“No, I don’t think so Mr. Warnov. As I’ve often said, I’m no hero. I’m just doing my job and providing for my family.” + +Mr. Warnov looks disappointed and sighs, but accepts your decision. + +“Very well. This is a shame though. Despite your humble birth you seem to have lots of potential. You could’ve made an excellent addition to our…organization. I’ve also heard your lute playing wasn’t bad either, we don’t have any musically talented types anymore…oh well.” + +Mr. Warnov leaves rather quickly after his last statement. Something about him seemed very odd and you’re sort of glad you didn’t take his offer. You go back to your target practice for awhile when you suddenly hear an alarm cry out loudly through the fort about a small demon army being sighted over the hill. + +“Well back to work…” you say and prepare for battle once again. + +Two years pass… + +It’s been five years since the Nuro Incident and things have gotten worse. + +Both the Necromancer Lord and Velzix have made progress. Too much. The Grand Alliance hasn’t been able to do anything except fight them to a stalemate. All three sides are looking to gain an advantage and somehow you don’t think it’ll be yours. + +The Zalan Empire has become increasingly totalitarian. It’s been increasing its influence over how the Grand Alliance should be run and its strategies. Some of Zalan’s officers have been transferred to become more prominent in leading and commanding the bulk of the Grand Alliance army. You’re not sure if this isn’t a bad idea. Bullying or not, one final voice in matters would probably help the Grand Alliance at this point. There’s been some grumbling by other nations though. + +However it’s also begun several repressive internal measures to keep itself safe. Your mom has mentioned in letters back to you of seeing routine patrols now near the farm. Talks of seizing private property for the good of the Empire are being discussed. You don’t really like the sound of that, but it’s not really like you can do anything about it. You can only take solace in the fact that being part of the Zalan army will at least result in your family not becoming homeless. They would probably still be able to live and work on the farm…it just wouldn’t be your family’s anymore. There’s also talk of a draft. You don’t like the sound of that either. Your brother Mallack would certainly be conscripted now. You can’t imagine him dealing with the things you’ve had to face. You hope it doesn’t come to that. + +Your position at Virtue is looking worse and worse each day. Parts of the fort are severely damaged, you’re short on man power and you don’t even have any decent wizards or healers. You’ve attempted to talk to Captain Eckard about withdrawing and falling back to a safer position, but he won’t hear of it. This fort is NOT to be abandoned. + +The only good thing is that there’s apparently been a small contingent of mercenaries severely messing up things for Velzix in his own territory. They must be incredibly brave or completely mad for Zalan gold to perform such a task. You can’t help but think that maybe YOU would be there right along side them, if you’d joined up with that mercenary company years ago. A sobering thought. + +Time to go on patrol again. You gather up some soldiers and get ready. You look at all of them and wonder which ones won’t be coming back this time. You look at yourself and wonder if you will. A few years ago, everyone coming back alive was at least a possibility, but now it’s not even certain. + +You go out and change up your routine path again. Always have to be different, can’t become predictable. + +A couple of imps attack. Nothing to worry about. Easily dispatched. You know you’ll encounter worse before the day is over though. + +A group of Tulan “citizens” led by their demon overseer attacks you next. Made up of hapless slaves and misguided idiots who think serving the demons is going to pan out in the long run. + +Finally you come across something a little more unusual. A small group of dwarves fighting off a large demon ambush. They look ragged, wounded and in dire need of help. So you help them. + +You unleash five arrows into the head of an Eviscerator before two of your number are fried by a hellfire blast from a Flame Child. The fighting doesn’t get any cleaner from there. You see another one of your members getting shredded, before a path is cleared for the dwarves to follow you back to the fort. One of their own chooses to stay behind to give the rest a chance to escape. As all of you run, a large explosion is heard followed by several yelps, howls and screams. The dwarf has blown himself up with whatever explosives the dwarves are fond of making. + +Finally you get back to the fort where it’s relatively safe, and all you’re thinking about is how you’ll have to do this all over again tomorrow. You retire to your private room where you play your lute and hope you aren’t disturbed by another attack on the fort. Happily, that doesn’t happen, but you are disturbed by one of the dwarves you rescued earlier instead. He’s come to thank you. + +“Hey lad, I just want to say thanks to your actions at least a few of us survived from our clan. Such as it is now. Something about you looks very familiar. Normally you humans all look the same but…ah hah! You’re that lad who I saved near that farm five years ago! Looks like you returned the favor! Stagir’s the name.” + +You didn’t realize it either, but then with all the fighting and the chaos you’d barely survived during that particular day, you weren’t really paying attention to faces. You were just glad someone came along when they did. + +“Yeah…small world I guess. So what happened to your clan?” +“Wiped out lad.” Stagir says mournfully. “At least when you humans were fighting each other you didn’t mess with us, but getting caught between the undead and demons…well it’s a bit different.” +“The undead are that far now?” you ask. +“Aye. They and the demons have been involved in skirmishes here and there. Got no problem with evil fighting evil, but it was just our bad luck that my clan was caught in the middle. The demons are evil incarnate to be sure, but the undead…I dunno. Something worse about them. In the final days, I had to kill clan members who I once called friends and family because of the fucking necromancers raising them from the dead. Some stayed behind to fight since they refused to run. They’d rather die than run from their home. Normally I’d agree, but after seeing that this was a losing battle, some of us decided that it would be better to run. After all we would just be raised again to be used as puppets of the necromancers when we die. Not even free will to choose, or the threat of a demon’s whip. You just become one of them. Can’t let that happen to me. Never.” + +You know something of it, having had to do a little of that five years ago at Nuro, but actually killing undead parodies of family members would be pretty horrific. + +Stagir attempts to lighten the mood a bit by asking you about what you were playing before he interrupted. When you tell him, he tiches and says something about how elven songs are nothing compared to dwarven ones. You never really thought of dwarves having a musical interest before, but Stagir boasts about how they have quite an extensive musical history. + +He takes the lute from you and shows you a couple of dwarven songs, breaking strings in the process. His insistent singing accompanying the songs isn’t exactly pleasant either. He complains about the human made strings not being strong enough to play the songs properly, but thanks you again for saving his life before leaving. + +Every now and then you play these songs for your new dwarven allies who have taken it upon themselves to strengthen and rebuild the fort the “proper dwarf way”. They seem to appreciate it. You’re a little more careful with the strings and don’t indulge in the singing though. (But unfortunately for the rest of the fort, the dwarves do) + +A few months pass and the demon attacks seem to decrease. The strengthened fort certainly helps, but something else is going on. Eventually you’re seeing less and less of them. Eventually some ragged refugees come to the fort and after a bit of babbling and thanking the gods, a few of them explain. + +There are a couple of conflicting stories, but it would seem Velzix is dead! He was killed by something or someone. Consensus seems to be that the mercenary leader died in battle with him though. Without Velzix’s leadership the demons are fighting amongst themselves and the realm is in complete disarray. The Grand Alliance is taking steps to retake the land immediately before the Necromancer Lord gets it. The Zalan Empire in particular is closer though, so naturally YOUR nation is going to get that land first! + +While things may be looking up somewhat, they aren’t necessarily looking up for you. Captain Eckard has orders to begin an attack immediately. You aren’t looking forward to it mainly because you’ll probably encounter an undead army in the process. + +You don’t have a choice though except for what role you can serve. Thanks to your skills and rank. You can either lead troops as normal, or be part of a scouting party. +> Letters to home (Random thoughts...) +Dear Mom, + +I meant to tell you this weird man from Zalan Intelligence offered me a job, a few months ago. Said I could be a “real” hero and a bunch of other stuff. Part of it sounded appealing, but something about him made me feel really uncomfortable. + +I wonder if I’m just avoiding my “potential.” Like perhaps I am supposed to be some great general or warrior, or whatever. But I just don’t feel that desire within me. Now if I had been offered to give up all this army stuff and play at the Emperor’s Palace as a regular job then I might’ve accepted! + +Over these years as I’ve played for others and mainly for myself, I truly believe I really was meant to play music in this world. Just events didn’t work out for me I guess, but even within this situation, I’ve still found a way to indulge in my passion and I suppose it’s better than never being able to at all. + +Who knows? Perhaps one day all of this will be over and I’ll come out of this alive and manage to pursue music without hindrance. + +I know that sounds a little uncharacteristically optimistic from me, but I guess I still have a little hope left after all. + +Give my love to the rest of the family + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’ve served in this army well and always done your job regardless of the shitty situations you’ve been in. You might not like a lot of it, but you’ve never complained. Lately you’ve been on edge about a possible all out assault of some big ass demon army that’s going to attack any day now, and playing is one of the few pleasures you have to put your mind at ease. + +Perhaps it’s a combination of this and a combination of this unwanted and unnecessary scolding that causes you to speak out of turn. + +“With all due respect ma’am, I am fully prepared to battle at a moment’s notice and so are those under my direct command. But even soldiers need to rest, if only for a minute.” + +The woman looks very surprised you didn’t comply with her demand to see your superior officer. + +“…you DARE speak out of turn like that to me? I’ll see you sent to the Nuro Front for that sort of insubordination! Then we’d see just how battle ready you are! How would you like that?” +“I wouldn’t like it at all. I barely survived the first time.” You say trying not to express any fear. +“…What? What are you talking about? First time?” + +Now you’re a little surprised she doesn’t know who you are considering how some of the high ups exaggerated about how you managed to survive. You explain yourself briefly and she doesn’t quite believe you at first, a couple of your troops hiding nearby at least back up your claims before slinking off. + +“That was YOU? What the hell are you doing here? You should be leading from the front not languishing in some fort that barely sees battle!” +“Doesn’t see battle? We suffered a small demon raid last week! We see plenty of battle!” +“What I mean is, somebody of your obvious combat and survival skills should be assigned on the front lines where you can do more good. Normally I don’t question Zalan command, but this is really an oversight on their part.” +“Well maybe they know better than the both of us, besides this assignment isn’t a walk in the fairy fields. I think we’ll be suffering a grand scale attack any day now.” +“Doubt it. Velzix has been having a hard time keeping his unruly mob together. If it wasn’t for a lot of the sycophantic Tulan citizens, he’d probably be confined to pure defense, though something will have to be done soon, reports say he’s attempting to gate in more demons everyday. Not to mention that supposedly civilized demons from other nations are starting to display their true colors and flock to his banner. Like I always said the only good demon is a dead one!” + +This causes you to smile a bit and she very faintly smiles back when she sees that you feel the same way. This smile disappears quickly though as she continues her rant. + +“I wish I wasn’t assigned to the Tulan Border though. I’d rather be taking Nuro back. THAT’S the more dangerous threat. The demons will kill themselves with their own chaotic and violent natures, but the undead…they’ve almost taken over the world before just because of one bastard that lead them. I never thought I’d see a serious threat like this in my lifetime, especially not…” + +The female captain at this point stops. She even looks away from you as if whatever she was going to say was just too much even for her. She seems to be a lot more battle hardened than you and probably ten times braver. You can’t imagine what horror she experienced that would be worse than your own, but you don’t find out since she changes the subject. + +“…Bah! Maybe you’re right; a soldier does need to keep their mind occupied on other things every now and then. We aren’t undead after all. So what’s with the lute? You also a bard or something?” she laughs. +“No, I think those dreams are long gone, but my playing seems to boost spirits around here a little, which can only be a good thing in this situation.” +“Hm. My mother was elven and she used to sing this song to me and my…brother when we were very young. It was very smooth and calming. Beautiful melody.” +“Yeah, most elven music is like that. When I was assigned in Retlad I learned a few elven songs from a few of the citizens there, you wouldn’t happen to know the song would you?” + +She tells you the name of the song and you know it immediately. One of the first new songs you learned while stationed in Retlad actually. This seems cause her to momentarily revert to a less stand offish behavior. You’re about to play it for her, but then a messenger comes running up handing her a note. She reads it and she’s all business again. + +“Alright men! We’re moving out!” she shouts and leaves without saying another word to you. You didn’t even learn her name. + +Perhaps it’s just as well; you’ll most likely never meet again due to one of you dying on the battlefield. You go back to doing what you were doing. + +Two years pass… + +Three years since the Nuro Incident and this struggle still continues. + +You’re still stationed Fort Virtue and you’ve repelled more demon attacks than you would care to count. Velzix has finally gotten his shit together completely. A unified demonic front is in full swing here and its taking its toll. Once again your skills have come in very handy in defense. You are certainly known as a demon slayer, but you still don’t feel like a hero of any kind. You’re just trying to do your job and survive. You save lives when you can, but you know ultimately it’s a futile task as death seems to be everywhere nowadays. + +As bad as it is on the demon front, its nothing compared to what’ve you’ve heard on the undead front. The Necromancer has finally broken out from Nuro, and successfully attacked the Kingdom of Brot. Several undead giants demolished the area. You’ve never even seen a living giant and they sound intimidating. You can’t even imagine an undead one. The power to raise one, let alone several is sort of scary. The Grand Alliance army didn’t get there in time to stop him and as usual they were repelled when they arrived. + +You worry about the Grand Alliance failing to stop the undead horde. You hope it doesn’t get any closer to the Zalan Empire where your family might be in danger. + +Sometimes you worry so much that you can’t sleep, not that you do much of that nowadays anyway. Normally you play to keep your mind at ease, but tonight you go to the archery range to keep yourself focused. + +For a long time you’re by yourself, but suddenly you feel a creeping suspicion someone is watching you… + +You turn around with your bow and see a pale man. He holds up his hands. + +“Hey now! Don’t shoot! Sorry for creeping around like that. Professional habit.” He says. +“What? Who are you?” you demand. +“Warnov. Zalan Intelligence.” +“You’re a spy?” +“Well I suppose you could put it that way. I was here to give some info to your Captain Eckard, and I also wanted to take a look around the fort. Didn’t think anyone would be on the range though. Nice shooting, I know who you are and heard about your marksmanship with a bow. You’re certainly doing your part with the demons around here.” + +Despite the fact that you’re talking to a spy, you feel the need to vent your feelings. + +“Yeah, well I hope the Grand Alliance starts doing its part. I mean what the fuck are they doing? Weren’t they created to put a stop to all this shit? I mean am I supposed to worry every day if that undead horde is going to get closer to the Zalan Empire where it can threaten my family?” + +Warnov doesn’t look offended by your words, if anything he looks intrigued. + +“Well, I can understand why you’re venting. Trust me I sympathize. But as part of intel, I can tell you its not that easy…there were a lot of surprises that weren’t accounted for. We’re doing our best to rectify this situation by gathering as much info as possible. In fact, you could help us…” +“Excuse me? How?” + +Warnov looks around and gets closer before speaking. + +“Look, as I said, I know all about you and your skills, why you joined, all of it. I know you don’t much care for some of the propaganda made about some of your exploits. But it’s important to realize that deeds like yours must be blown up a little to give common people hope that ultimately good will win the day. You may not consider yourself a hero of any kind, but your actions aren’t without some of those qualities. You obviously care very much about your family, and I’ve heard how you try to keep the people under your command alive. Sound like heroic qualities to me. Perhaps they’re on a smaller scale, but they’re there. I’m betting that there’s a BIGGER hero in there somewhere, just itching to get out. You think the Grand Alliance isn’t doing a good job? Perhaps we can arrange something for you to be transferred into it, or maybe you’d like to take an even more direct approach.” +“What do you mean?” + +Warnov suddenly backs away. + +“Before we go any further. I need to know are you willing to take up the mantle of being a hero. Because if you aren’t, then we have nothing more to discuss. I shall require an answer now.” +> Accept the offer +You have to admit, the idea has crossed your mind a bit. A small part of you does wonder about embracing the whole hero image and deliberately doing grand deeds that go beyond the call of your duty. You suppose that you’d at least really feel like one if you did that. + +“Okay Mr. Warnov. I’ll do it.” You exclaim. +“You sure?” +“Not really, but if I’m already in the shit, I might as well go all the way with it. What do I do next?” + +Warnov looks around again to see if anyone is about before answering. + +“Well just take a deep breath, relax and uh… brace yourself!” +“Huh?” + +Before you can react Warnov moves faster than you’ve ever seen anything move. In fact you don’t really see him move at all before he’s biting your neck! He puts his other hand over your mouth so you can’t yell out and easily knocks your hand away from feebly attempting to draw a weapon. + +You fall into unconsciousness as your blood is drained from you at a rapid rate. Death soon follows… + +A few minutes later you wake up outside the fort. + +“Ah you’re up. Sorry about surprising you like that, but I had to work quickly. Someone else could’ve popped up and that would’ve gotten complicated…” + +You quickly check your neck which is completely healed now, but you know what’s just occurred! You feel a cold numbness throughout your body and you freak out. + +“I’M DEAD! I’M FUCKIN DEAD! And you’re a vampire!” +“Shhhh! Keep your voice down! Yeah, you figured it out. Nice detective work, now let’s get down to this hero business. Though we should really get to Rostov’s and talk about all this.” +“I’m…I’m dead! I’m one of you! I don’t want to be an undead thrall for the Necromancer Lord!” +“What? No, no, no, we’re not… look I’ll explain later, let’s just…” + +You pull away from Warnov when he tries to help you up. You feel your reflexes are much quicker. This temporary curiousity in your new found abilities allows Warnov to calm you down. + +“WAIT! Just stop! (Sigh) Okay look I’ll try to give you the condensed version right now. We vampires aren’t on the side of the Necromancer Lord. If anything he’s fucking things up for us. We like to keep a balanced order as it were. The last time we sided with some megalomaniacal necromancer it nearly resulted in our extinction. Never again. In fact we’ve been manipulating shit for centuries just to make sure something like this didn’t happen. Somebody really fucked up in the observation department on this one!” + +Warnov goes on to explain that his superior, Lord Rostov will be able to explain better and in more detail, but that you have to come with him now. +> Go with Warnov +While this is all a lot to take in, you manage to calm down. + +“Okay. Okay. I’m calm, but…man this is a lot of shit.” You reply. +“Heh, well you did say you might as well go with it! Don’t worry; it’ll all be second nature soon. Okay let’s go see Lord Rostov.” + +Warnov pulls out a black cube and teleports you to what seems to be the inside of a castle. + +“Alright, YOU stay right here in the foyer! Don’t go wandering around, I’m serious! You’re not quite in the fold yet, I have to go straighten this out and explain all this to Lord Rostov. I’ll be back to come get you later. Everything will be explained in full detail soon.” + +Not wishing to piss off anyone and being completely out of your element you stay put. The foyer has enough to keep you occupied though, you begin examining many of the paintings and statues to pass the time. + +Soon, Warnov returns with a very regal looking vampire. You can only assume that this is Lord Rostov. + +“Welcome, I’m sure you have ask many questions for me as I have for you, so we’ll just get right to it. We’ll walk and talk on the way to the throne room. Don’t worry about anyone listening. There are no secrets here.” Lord Rostov says. +“Okay…I…” +“BUT! Remember to address me as Lord Rostov if you are going to address me by name.” Lord Rostov adds with authority. + +You take notice and obey, though Lord Rostov has such a commanding presence that you would be hard pressed not to obey him. + +Your questions are typical for someone brought into the fold. Rostov goes on about how his kind have been manipulating the mortal world for centuries just like Warnov said before. Several of the known governments have at least one vamp keeping an eye on things. Apparently many high ranking political types in your own Zalan Empire are vampires! The Grand Alliance is even a tool of the vampires. + +While Lord Rostov goes on about this fascinating history lesson, you look at some of his “court” as you walk through his castle. Some of them are more “mortal looking” than others. Some look down right hideous. You always thought vampires were supposed to be ultra attractive, but you can see that isn’t necessarily the case. When you get to his throne room Lord Rostov stops and turns to you. + +“So I hear you want to be a real hero eh? Well this is the place where they’re made.” +“What do you mean?” +“Why do you think most heroes are always storming dungeons and doing impossible things? They don’t get those abilities without some help. The supernatural skill comes into play and dungeons aren’t exactly beacons of light!” Lord Rostov laughs. + +“Y…you mean ALL the heroes in the world are vampires?!” +“Hah! I wish that was the case. No, there are many regular mortal heroes that do their part I suppose, but if you want the really legendary ones that have done impossible deeds, well chances are there was a vampire involved. Sadly we haven’t been too much more successful than the mortals in the heroics department lately.” +“What’s been going on exactly?” +“That little annoying necromancer lord, or whatever he thinks he is, has been proving to be a lot cleverer than what was previously believed. His armies have been growing in strength and I’m sure you know about the undead giant business and crushing the Brot Kingdom. What isn’t commonly known is how he accomplished it. He had help from one of our kind. A loathsome outcast known as the Ghoul King. (Sigh) Should’ve killed him long ago really, but…bah, it’s a long story. We’ll deal with him when the time comes. What’s more alarming is that we’ve sent assassins…or heroes to kill the necromancer lord and his bitch and he’s somehow managed to kill all of them. I mean I can somewhat understand them being killed by that brutish demon tyrant Velzix, but a fucking necromancer? He’s a fucking mortal! And from what we know of him, he wasn’t even that good of a wizard to begin with!” + +Suddenly Lord Rostov flies into a rage, yelling and punches a hole into the solid brick wall. Many of his court, as well as you and Warnov back away. He then stops and composes himself. + +“My apologies to you all. It’s been a trying time with upstart mortals and traitors and other annoyances. And to you, the newest member of our fold.” +“Uh, no need to apologize to me Lord Rostov. It’s your home after all” You say which causes him to smile. +“Carefully chosen words. Not overly sycophantic, yet still displaying the right subservient mindset. You should fit in very well here.” +“But I meant it…” +“Ha ha! And honest too! You’re more interesting than how Warnov described you. I have heard that you were one of those minor mortal heroes I was talking about earlier, but more interesting to me, is apparently you have talent in the musical field?” +“So I’ve been told.” +“Well, play something for me! All of us!” +“What did you want to hear?” +“Surprise me, if you’re able!” + +Lord Rostov sits on his throne while his court whispers among themselves and then go quiet waiting for you to play. You pull out your lute and try to think of a song that they might like. You think of an old song that once was very popular among the aristocracy. Seems like a perfect crowd… + +You begin to concentrate on the music and nothing but the music. You play as if your life was in danger, which you’re somewhat certain that it isn’t, but it doesn’t hurt to play your best right now. + +Your new supernatural reflexes certainly come in handy as you’re able to hit notes and play faster than you normally would’ve been able to as a mortal. + +When you’re finished you look around the room which is still silence until Lord Rostov gets off his throne and begins clapping. Everyone else follows suit. + +“That was magnificent! I heard the original bard who performed that piece three hundred years ago and even he couldn’t have done a better job! Warnov, this man is too valuable to make into a hero!” +“Lord Rostov?” +“While this man may have combat skills as you described, he is obviously a musician! Such talent such not be wasted in battle! Beautiful playing!” +“While I agree he is a good musician Lord Rostov, I think we should consider the matter of the necromancer…” +“(Sigh) Warnov, I was feeling good until you mentioned that mortal again! Nevertheless you are right. But still, this shall be HIS choosing. Not ours.” + +Lord Rostov turns to you. + +“The decision shall be yours broodling. You may if you wish under go extensive training to prepare yourself for an encounter with that little necromancer lord. If you succeed, your name will be known, and you will become a legend. However, I can sense that such things are probably not your nature. Music is. I can see that you would be content to just play your music for an appreciative crowd. You could do that here. You could also learn songs that I have possession of, but sadly unable to play with the same spirit that you obviously have.” +“What about my family? And my job and all that?” +“Ah, your mortal life. I’m sure Warnov will already be taking steps to explain that you have been transferred from your current assignment. Considering he’s part of intelligence, nobody will ask too many questions, even if they bothered to. As for your family, they will be taken care of as you will still officially be part of the Zalan army. If you wish you may stay in contact with them through letters. Possibly arrangements can be made for you to visit them. During the night of course. But under NO circumstances will you tell them about any of this. Doing so would ruin my generous offer and be extremely bad for you. I don’t think we need to dwell on such depressing things because I know you’re smarter than that right?” +“Yes Lord Rostov.” +“Good, now what is it that you would like to do?” +> Be a hero +While the offer of playing for what could possibly be eternity is tempting, part of you has been affected by world events and the war going on. You have come to realize that the Necromancer (and the demons) need to be stopped. If you can take an active role in that, then you’ll know for sure that your family will be safe in the near future. You did do all this for your family after all, and while your path has definitely undergone a change, you’re still going to put them first. + +Besides, you’re a vampire now, you’re sure that you’ll have tons of time to play later if all goes well. You’re definitely nervous about this decision, but you’re going to make it. + +“Lord Rostov, I wish to begin your advanced combat training.” You say. +“Very well, though I almost hoped that you wouldn’t. Your playing was just divine and you won’t be able to play again for a long time during your extensive training time. Possibly never if you fail…but let us hope that you do not fail! It would be a loss for all of us. Warnov escourt him to the lower dungeons.” +“Yes, Lord Rostov.” + +Warnov takes you into the lower dungeons of the castle just as Lord Rostov commanded. Warnov tells you that this isn’t going to be easy and that you better condition your mind to almost a pure instinctive level because you could very well die in training! + +Finally you reach a large barren room with a pair of large doors on the far end. + +“This is it. Just keep an eye on the large door over there and well, brace yourself!” + +You half expect to get bitten again after hearing those words, but instead Warnov quickly steps out of the room and locks the door leaving you alone. The large doors on the other side of the room start to open. + +And you just realized that you don’t have a weapon… + +A year passes… + +You survive your rigorous training. You have fought all manner of dangerous beasts with and without weapons. (And feasting on their blood for survival) You have undergone pain you didn’t think possible even in your new undead state. You’re definitely a better killing machine than you were. + +You were allowed to write letters to your family which were overlooked first by Lord Rostov of course to make sure you weren’t saying something you shouldn’t. You barely know what to tell them except keeping your lies to a minimum about your supposed new job with Zalan intelligence. You have dedicated and conditioned yourself to combat so much that you don’t even think about music. You briefly wonder if you’ve “lost” something, but you then dismiss such things as you must focus on battle. + +During this time you have been informed that the Necromancer Lord as well as Velzix have grown in power. Lord Rostov says though that he believes the demons will pose no serious threat if a concentrated effort can be made on them by the mortals. However, for that to happen, the Necromancer Lord must die and that’s where you come in and what you’ve been training for. + +However, you won’t be going in by yourself. A band of “heroes” will be necessary for a job like this. You are told you will meet the others in a small abandoned village bordering on the Necromancer’s Domain. + +Another vampire takes you there with the aid of a black teleportation cube. This is a one way trip. You’re not coming back unless you win. That and the fact that the black cubes can’t possibly be allowed to fall into enemy hands. + +There you meet the others. They look unimpressed with you, but you’re a little surprised to see one of them. She’s very well known…a “hero”. + +“You’re Deliah the Deathdealer! You fought at the battle of Azark and you also retrieved the Celestial Sword! You’re a hero! I didn’t know you were…” +“Didn’t they tell you all this shit when you started training? Sheesh, we gotta get paired up with some broodling…” a brutish vampire interrupts. +“Quiet Gorax! I’m sure he was, but meeting a legend is a lot different from basking in their glory in person.” Deliah replies. +“Gorax!? Gorax the Mighty? You were a barbarian king that held back the orc hordes over a hundred years ago!” you say in amazement. +“Huh, fat lot good that did me. I can’t take any credit for of my deeds today and barely anyone remembers my past deeds except some useless tribal shamen that now cower from the undead hordes in the Drozz Plains. Feh! Back in my day such men would not allow mere ghouls run them off their lands! I don’t know why Rostov won’t allow me to go in, seek out, and just chop off that retched Ghoul King’s head! He’s partially to blame for this mess!” +“Oh you know Rostov, he has his reasons. Besides, if we take out the Necromancer lord, the Ghoul King will probably be our next assignment.” Another vampire says in a bored tone. This one looks like he was once a Halfling. It almost makes you laugh to think of a vampire Halfling, but there he is. You don’t know who he is or was, but given the other two, he was probably important at one time. + +“So are you ready to go broodling? Or are you going to stand there with a dumb look on your face?” Delilah asks. +“Uh sure, let’s go!” + +The trip into the Necromancer’s Domain is surprisingly quick and uneventful. You attempt to make conversation as you can’t help now but be curious about your companions, but all of them are less than talkative and forthcoming. Deliah eventually takes you aside harshly. + +“Look broodling, we’ve got a job to do. A fucking dangerous one at that! We all need to be in focus and not concentrating on anything else! So keep your damn questions to yourself and if you happen to survive this encounter THEN perhaps you may get a little more information from us and our fascinating history. Until then, stay in the fucking dark!” + +The rest of the trip is silent. + +At last you reach the city of Nuro and easily scale its walls and onto the battlements while remaining undetected the whole time. This is a lot different from what it was when you arrived here as a mortal. That memory still gives you a bit of pause. You remember how scared you were back then. + +“Hurry up broodling! These walking corpses might not be able to detect us, but the Necromancer will soon! We need to get the advantage as soon as possible! Gorax, Wally you go through the front of the main tower. I’m sure you two can handle that. While whatever guards rush to defend their master, me and the broodling will scale the tower and go in through one of the top windows. + +“You sure about that Delilah? Would you rather I go with you than some broodling?” Wally asks. +“Yeah, but if I leave him with Gorax he’ll probably get killed in the fighting and be useless. At least if he’s with me, he can serve as an extra body for the Necromancer Lord to draw his attention to.” +“HEY! I’m right here y’know!” you exclaim indignantly which causes Deliah to smack you in the face hard. You didn’t even see it coming. +“Shut the fuck up! You’ll draw attention! Look if we pull this off just maybe you’ll come out of this alive. I need you to take care of the Necromancer’s bitch anyway. She’s probably up there with him. Now let’s do this!” + +The plan is set into action. Gorax and Wally make their presence known immediately jumping off the battlements and into the courtyard while yelling at the top of their lungs. + +“Intruder! Protect the master!” you hear a scratchy voice yell in the distance, while you and Delilah sneak around, jumping onto the rooftops and attempting to avoid the main fighting force. A few flying shadows try to stop you, but they’re easily dispatched with your bow and silver arrows. Delilah looks glad that you aren’t entirely useless and you and her proceed to scale the walls. + +“I can’t believe this place isn’t more protected.” You say while climbing. +“Heh, he’s got his troops all spread out and mostly on his borders, plus he’s grown more arrogant and confident. That will be his undoing.” She replies quickly. + +“Funny I was about to say the same for you bloodsuckers.” A voice says causing the both of you to look up. + +A raven haired female leans over the nearby window above Delilah and blast her directly in the face burning it off with a beam of light. You certainly weren’t expecting a necromancer to cast any sort of spell like that! You then see Delilah fall…and get impaled through the chest by a weathervane. A fucking weathervane. Unbelievable. + +You attempt to scale the wall to the nearest window under you and just barely get out of the way of the lady necromancer’s next spell. + +You have no idea where you are in the tower, but you can hear fighting going on outside and a couple of hearty roars which you can only guess is Gorax. + +A quick scan would indicate that you’re in some sort of library. You cautiously proceed and decide that finding stairs that lead up would be the way to go. You just hope you’re ready to take him on and his mistress. + +As you make your way through, you fight all manner of undead sentries: Wraiths, ghosts, skeletal warriors, etc. During one of your moments of hiding a couple of wight guards run by talking in a hoarse tone. + +“The big one and little one are dead! We must find the last one! Quick Quick!” +“Yes Yes! The master must be protected!” + +You come to the very real feeling of having been in the position before…all alone, surrounded by hostile undead, and in Nuro… + +Your resolve breaks a little and you wish that you weren’t here. You want to go home. + +Eventually you push yourself forward, but somehow fear has crept back into your own dead heart. To your credit you do reach the top of the tower, but the Necromancer’s mistress once again surprises you. A ray of light sears your face off and destroys your vision. You fall to the cold stone floor in extreme pain and can only make out blurry images. + +You see a blurred black hooded figure approach. You can’t see his face, but this could only be who you think it is. You attempt to reach for your sword. + +“More assassins? I swear something is going to have to be done about these bloodsuckers. The Ghoul King’s kin are really starting to get on my nerves. These ones weren’t even a challenge. What are you doing bloodsucker? Don’t you know that’s futile?” + +The Necromancer Lord unleashes a ball of flame that engulfs your body, putting an end to your undead existence.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While this is all a lot to take in, you manage to calm down. + +“Okay. Okay. I’m calm, but…man this is a lot of shit.” You reply. +“Heh, well you did say you might as well go with it! Don’t worry; it’ll all be second nature soon. Okay let’s go see Lord Rostov.” + +Warnov pulls out a black cube and teleports you to what seems to be the inside of a castle. + +“Alright, YOU stay right here in the foyer! Don’t go wandering around, I’m serious! You’re not quite in the fold yet, I have to go straighten this out and explain all this to Lord Rostov. I’ll be back to come get you later. Everything will be explained in full detail soon.” + +Not wishing to piss off anyone and being completely out of your element you stay put. The foyer has enough to keep you occupied though, you begin examining many of the paintings and statues to pass the time. + +Soon, Warnov returns with a very regal looking vampire. You can only assume that this is Lord Rostov. + +“Welcome, I’m sure you have ask many questions for me as I have for you, so we’ll just get right to it. We’ll walk and talk on the way to the throne room. Don’t worry about anyone listening. There are no secrets here.” Lord Rostov says. +“Okay…I…” +“BUT! Remember to address me as Lord Rostov if you are going to address me by name.” Lord Rostov adds with authority. + +You take notice and obey, though Lord Rostov has such a commanding presence that you would be hard pressed not to obey him. + +Your questions are typical for someone brought into the fold. Rostov goes on about how his kind have been manipulating the mortal world for centuries just like Warnov said before. Several of the known governments have at least one vamp keeping an eye on things. Apparently many high ranking political types in your own Zalan Empire are vampires! The Grand Alliance is even a tool of the vampires. + +While Lord Rostov goes on about this fascinating history lesson, you look at some of his “court” as you walk through his castle. Some of them are more “mortal looking” than others. Some look down right hideous. You always thought vampires were supposed to be ultra attractive, but you can see that isn’t necessarily the case. When you get to his throne room Lord Rostov stops and turns to you. + +“So I hear you want to be a real hero eh? Well this is the place where they’re made.” +“What do you mean?” +“Why do you think most heroes are always storming dungeons and doing impossible things? They don’t get those abilities without some help. The supernatural skill comes into play and dungeons aren’t exactly beacons of light!” Lord Rostov laughs. + +“Y…you mean ALL the heroes in the world are vampires?!” +“Hah! I wish that was the case. No, there are many regular mortal heroes that do their part I suppose, but if you want the really legendary ones that have done impossible deeds, well chances are there was a vampire involved. Sadly we haven’t been too much more successful than the mortals in the heroics department lately.” +“What’s been going on exactly?” +“That little annoying necromancer lord, or whatever he thinks he is, has been proving to be a lot cleverer than what was previously believed. His armies have been growing in strength and I’m sure you know about the undead giant business and crushing the Brot Kingdom. What isn’t commonly known is how he accomplished it. He had help from one of our kind. A loathsome outcast known as the Ghoul King. (Sigh) Should’ve killed him long ago really, but…bah, it’s a long story. We’ll deal with him when the time comes. What’s more alarming is that we’ve sent assassins…or heroes to kill the necromancer lord and his bitch and he’s somehow managed to kill all of them. I mean I can somewhat understand them being killed by that brutish demon tyrant Velzix, but a fucking necromancer? He’s a fucking mortal! And from what we know of him, he wasn’t even that good of a wizard to begin with!” + +Suddenly Lord Rostov flies into a rage, yelling and punches a hole into the solid brick wall. Many of his court, as well as you and Warnov back away. He then stops and composes himself. + +“My apologies to you all. It’s been a trying time with upstart mortals and traitors and other annoyances. And to you, the newest member of our fold.” +“Uh, no need to apologize to me Lord Rostov. It’s your home after all” You say which causes him to smile. +“Carefully chosen words. Not overly sycophantic, yet still displaying the right subservient mindset. You should fit in very well here.” +“But I meant it…” +“Ha ha! And honest too! You’re more interesting than how Warnov described you. I have heard that you were one of those minor mortal heroes I was talking about earlier, but more interesting to me, is apparently you have talent in the musical field?” +“So I’ve been told.” +“Well, play something for me! All of us!” +“What did you want to hear?” +“Surprise me, if you’re able!” + +Lord Rostov sits on his throne while his court whispers among themselves and then go quiet waiting for you to play. You pull out your lute and try to think of a song that they might like. You think of an old song that once was very popular among the aristocracy. Seems like a perfect crowd… + +You begin to concentrate on the music and nothing but the music. You play as if your life was in danger, which you’re somewhat certain that it isn’t, but it doesn’t hurt to play your best right now. + +Your new supernatural reflexes certainly come in handy as you’re able to hit notes and play faster than you normally would’ve been able to as a mortal. + +When you’re finished you look around the room which is still silence until Lord Rostov gets off his throne and begins clapping. Everyone else follows suit. + +“That was magnificent! I heard the original bard who performed that piece three hundred years ago and even he couldn’t have done a better job! Warnov, this man is too valuable to make into a hero!” +“Lord Rostov?” +“While this man may have combat skills as you described, he is obviously a musician! Such talent such not be wasted in battle! Beautiful playing!” +“While I agree he is a good musician Lord Rostov, I think we should consider the matter of the necromancer…” +“(Sigh) Warnov, I was feeling good until you mentioned that mortal again! Nevertheless you are right. But still, this shall be HIS choosing. Not ours.” + +Lord Rostov turns to you. + +“The decision shall be yours broodling. You may if you wish under go extensive training to prepare yourself for an encounter with that little necromancer lord. If you succeed, your name will be known, and you will become a legend. However, I can sense that such things are probably not your nature. Music is. I can see that you would be content to just play your music for an appreciative crowd. You could do that here. You could also learn songs that I have possession of, but sadly unable to play with the same spirit that you obviously have.” +“What about my family? And my job and all that?” +“Ah, your mortal life. I’m sure Warnov will already be taking steps to explain that you have been transferred from your current assignment. Considering he’s part of intelligence, nobody will ask too many questions, even if they bothered to. As for your family, they will be taken care of as you will still officially be part of the Zalan army. If you wish you may stay in contact with them through letters. Possibly arrangements can be made for you to visit them. During the night of course. But under NO circumstances will you tell them about any of this. Doing so would ruin my generous offer and be extremely bad for you. I don’t think we need to dwell on such depressing things because I know you’re smarter than that right?” +“Yes Lord Rostov.” +“Good, now what is it that you would like to do?” +> Be a musician +This is all you’ve ever wanted. Just play music. You’ll be able to do it now for all eternity if possible. You’d be a fool to turn down such a chance. + +“Lord Rostov, I wish to play music.” + +Lord Rostov smiles at your response. + +“Ah yes, I was hoping you’d chose the way of the artiste rather than the warrior. Your talents will be better served here. In the meantime you will be shown to your new room. Ladies, I think you two should escort our new bard. Don’t have too much fun, you’ve got a performance tomorrow!” + +You are escorted by a couple of female vampires to your room. They say their names are Glasya and Natasha. They seem to make a fuss over you on your way there which you don’t find completely unwelcome, but you’re still getting used to the whole idea that you’re a vampire just like one of them now, despite also being excited over getting to play music on a steady basis with no hindrances. + +The two vampiresses get even friendlier with you when you get to the room. Natasha begins to take a more aggressive stance and kisses you as the pair of you get on the bed. As the two of you are undressing, Natasha who is on top of you nods to Glasya who leaves the room. + +Ten minutes later as you’re fully engaged in physical pleasure, Glasya enters the room again with what looks to be a captive human girl. She doesn’t look very old either. Probably a teenager. Her mouth is gagged so she can’t scream out properly. + +“Wha…what’s all this?” +“Shhhh, your passage to true vampirehood…” the Natasha says continuing to grind into you. + +The human girl is dragged over to the bed with fear and tears in her eyes the whole time. Glasya draws out a blade and holds it to her throat. + +“Would you like me to cut now or would you prefer I prolong the fear? Perhaps remove her gag first so that you may hear her screams? Or maybe you’d even like to sink your teeth into her yourself?” Glasya asks and licks the side of the young girl’s face. +“What? Shit! No wait!” you say stopping Natasha, and sitting up. “I thought we were just having some fun here! Not killing young girls!” +“Why do the two need to be mutually exclusive? Broodling, you have been favored by Lord Rostov, I suggest you count yourself lucky and get with the program…besides you’re one of us now, you will need to feed on blood to survive.” Glasya says with a frown. + +You look at the girl and you shake you head briefly realizing what else it means to be a vampire. + +“Alright, alright, I got it. But can’t I like feed on animals first and uh work my way up or something?” +“Squeamish broodling! You will take the blood of this girl or Lord Rostov will hear of this weakness! While he may be impressed with your music abilities, he will not tolerate weaklings!” Glasya continues to scold. +“Besides, why do you care whether this…mortal lives or dies now? You do not know her and you are now superior to her in everyway. It’s your right…” Natasha says while kissing on your body.” + +You don’t really have any choice in the matter. You almost curse yourself for getting yourself into this situation. You stay silent for awhile and then speak. + +“Very well. Slit her throat, but do it quickly.” You say. +“(Sigh) Very well.” Glasya replies disappointedly. + +The young girl’s throat is slashed and blood sprays over you and Natasha who greedily opens her mouth to catch it. Glaysa tosses the girl’s dying body onto your chest and begins to undress as well to join you and Natasha in this blood feast. + +The night is definitely long, memorable and decadent. A little piece of you has “died” namely the vestiges of morality. + +A few months pass and you don’t even hesitate anymore. You enjoy the blood as well as your playing for Lord Rostov’s court. + +A year passes and you’ve become completely oblivious to the worsening of the “outside world”. (Which you don’t even think about since you’re so rapped up in your own pleasures) Each day the Necromancer Lord and Velzix get stronger and you stopped worrying about your family’s future. You don’t even write to them anymore. You’ve become so corrupted in such a short amount of time its actually amazing. + +Another year passes and you’re basically a hedonist. This is what Lord Rostov’s “secret fortress” is all about for the most part. Sure there’s discussion on what should be done about the outside problems, but pleasures of the flesh and blood are mainly the orders of the night. You don’t even realize it, but you ARE literally a “leech” now. All vampires have ever done is leech off of the mortal world. Sure there are the “active ones” but there are far more hedonists. Ironic that the ones who choose to be professional killers, assassins or “heroes” tend to still retain more of their mortalhood. + +Lord Rostov eventually mentions in passing that he’s finally come up with a perfect plan to kill the Necromancer Lord. He’s managed to come to some sort of deal with that old outcast The Ghoul King to betray him sometime in the near future. The goal is to lure the Necromancer Lord to the fortress itself and kill him directly. + +Again you could really care less, and you’ve become little more than just another hedonist in Lord Rostov’s court. Lord Rostov has it all figured out, you don’t need to worry. You’re safe in this little “world.” + +A few months pass and the plan swings into action. One night while you’re playing for the court as usual a loud noise is heard in the foyer and the sounds of shouting and crashing is heard. Lord Rostov takes a few of his concubines and tell everyone else to stay put, though everyone is a little curious. Even you. + +You go back to playing a little bit and things are starting to return to their “original state” since everyone figures Lord Rostov has the matter well in hand. + +Soon another noise is heard which sounds like the shrieking and screaming of multiple people. + +“AAAAAARRRGH!” +“LORD ROSTOV! NO!” +“GET HIM!” +“KILL THE NECROMANCER!” + +Everyone for once goes into a battle mode to rush to Lord Rostov’s aid. A deformed and ugly creature runs into you, while you’re trying to wrap your mind around this chaos. + +“Get outta my way broodling! He’s gonna kill us all! I’ve fucked up…heh, but at least the rest of you fuckers are going to die!” he growls at you while desperately looking for a place to hide. + +You don’t know what to do, but suddenly you feel a presence overcome you. Like someone is controlling your mind. This isn’t even like Lord Rostov, its even more powerful and its growing stronger… + +You continue to hear the screams of vampires as you can’t help but approach the way to the slaughter. You see vampires killing each other in the hallway! How is this possible? But you know why, it’s HIM… + +The Necromancer…or whatever he is now has managed to enforce his will even over vampires. You see him in the distance. He’s not even dirtying his hands killing all of you himself. You can feel his loathing for your kind and then you’re completely pulled into his domination. + +“And now little blood leech you shall join your brethren…” you hear him whisper in your mind. + +Another vampire suddenly punches you in the back of the head. You attempt to get up, but then feel a foot to the face followed by a sword going through your back. At this point you feel a something you haven’t felt in a long time, fear. + +Then your head is ripped off in the ensuing bloodbath. Later after total victory has been achieved, the Great Lich Lord burns your body along with the rest of the truly dead vampires.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have to admit, the idea has crossed your mind a bit. A small part of you does wonder about embracing the whole hero image and deliberately doing grand deeds that go beyond the call of your duty. You suppose that you’d at least really feel like one if you did that. + +“Okay Mr. Warnov. I’ll do it.” You exclaim. +“You sure?” +“Not really, but if I’m already in the shit, I might as well go all the way with it. What do I do next?” + +Warnov looks around again to see if anyone is about before answering. + +“Well just take a deep breath, relax and uh… brace yourself!” +“Huh?” + +Before you can react Warnov moves faster than you’ve ever seen anything move. In fact you don’t really see him move at all before he’s biting your neck! He puts his other hand over your mouth so you can’t yell out and easily knocks your hand away from feebly attempting to draw a weapon. + +You fall into unconsciousness as your blood is drained from you at a rapid rate. Death soon follows… + +A few minutes later you wake up outside the fort. + +“Ah you’re up. Sorry about surprising you like that, but I had to work quickly. Someone else could’ve popped up and that would’ve gotten complicated…” + +You quickly check your neck which is completely healed now, but you know what’s just occurred! You feel a cold numbness throughout your body and you freak out. + +“I’M DEAD! I’M FUCKIN DEAD! And you’re a vampire!” +“Shhhh! Keep your voice down! Yeah, you figured it out. Nice detective work, now let’s get down to this hero business. Though we should really get to Rostov’s and talk about all this.” +“I’m…I’m dead! I’m one of you! I don’t want to be an undead thrall for the Necromancer Lord!” +“What? No, no, no, we’re not… look I’ll explain later, let’s just…” + +You pull away from Warnov when he tries to help you up. You feel your reflexes are much quicker. This temporary curiousity in your new found abilities allows Warnov to calm you down. + +“WAIT! Just stop! (Sigh) Okay look I’ll try to give you the condensed version right now. We vampires aren’t on the side of the Necromancer Lord. If anything he’s fucking things up for us. We like to keep a balanced order as it were. The last time we sided with some megalomaniacal necromancer it nearly resulted in our extinction. Never again. In fact we’ve been manipulating shit for centuries just to make sure something like this didn’t happen. Somebody really fucked up in the observation department on this one!” + +Warnov goes on to explain that his superior, Lord Rostov will be able to explain better and in more detail, but that you have to come with him now. +> Try to escape +All of this is too much for you to handle. You know you’re dead, but you still feel afraid. You don’t know what to make of any of the shit Warnov just said and you don’t care, all you want to do is run away from all of this. + +You take off running in a random direction with a confused stated of mind, not really knowing what is going to come next. You’re so overwhelmed by confusion and fear that you don’t even notice how much faster you’re actually moving. + +You aren’t paying attention to too much of anything until you feel Warnov tackle you to the ground. + +Warnov quickly snaps your neck so you can’t move and looks a little mournful as he crouches near you. + +“I’m sorry human. I should’ve known better. Not everyone is meant for the gift. It is with great regret that I must now kill you. Such a loss…for both races.” + +Warnov pulls out a silver blade and jams it into your heart before cutting your head off and putting an end to your short undead life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’ve served in this army well and always done your job regardless of the shitty situations you’ve been in. You might not like a lot of it, but you’ve never complained. Lately you’ve been on edge about a possible all out assault of some big ass demon army that’s going to attack any day now, and playing is one of the few pleasures you have to put your mind at ease. + +Perhaps it’s a combination of this and a combination of this unwanted and unnecessary scolding that causes you to speak out of turn. + +“With all due respect ma’am, I am fully prepared to battle at a moment’s notice and so are those under my direct command. But even soldiers need to rest, if only for a minute.” + +The woman looks very surprised you didn’t comply with her demand to see your superior officer. + +“…you DARE speak out of turn like that to me? I’ll see you sent to the Nuro Front for that sort of insubordination! Then we’d see just how battle ready you are! How would you like that?” +“I wouldn’t like it at all. I barely survived the first time.” You say trying not to express any fear. +“…What? What are you talking about? First time?” + +Now you’re a little surprised she doesn’t know who you are considering how some of the high ups exaggerated about how you managed to survive. You explain yourself briefly and she doesn’t quite believe you at first, a couple of your troops hiding nearby at least back up your claims before slinking off. + +“That was YOU? What the hell are you doing here? You should be leading from the front not languishing in some fort that barely sees battle!” +“Doesn’t see battle? We suffered a small demon raid last week! We see plenty of battle!” +“What I mean is, somebody of your obvious combat and survival skills should be assigned on the front lines where you can do more good. Normally I don’t question Zalan command, but this is really an oversight on their part.” +“Well maybe they know better than the both of us, besides this assignment isn’t a walk in the fairy fields. I think we’ll be suffering a grand scale attack any day now.” +“Doubt it. Velzix has been having a hard time keeping his unruly mob together. If it wasn’t for a lot of the sycophantic Tulan citizens, he’d probably be confined to pure defense, though something will have to be done soon, reports say he’s attempting to gate in more demons everyday. Not to mention that supposedly civilized demons from other nations are starting to display their true colors and flock to his banner. Like I always said the only good demon is a dead one!” + +This causes you to smile a bit and she very faintly smiles back when she sees that you feel the same way. This smile disappears quickly though as she continues her rant. + +“I wish I wasn’t assigned to the Tulan Border though. I’d rather be taking Nuro back. THAT’S the more dangerous threat. The demons will kill themselves with their own chaotic and violent natures, but the undead…they’ve almost taken over the world before just because of one bastard that lead them. I never thought I’d see a serious threat like this in my lifetime, especially not…” + +The female captain at this point stops. She even looks away from you as if whatever she was going to say was just too much even for her. She seems to be a lot more battle hardened than you and probably ten times braver. You can’t imagine what horror she experienced that would be worse than your own, but you don’t find out since she changes the subject. + +“…Bah! Maybe you’re right; a soldier does need to keep their mind occupied on other things every now and then. We aren’t undead after all. So what’s with the lute? You also a bard or something?” she laughs. +“No, I think those dreams are long gone, but my playing seems to boost spirits around here a little, which can only be a good thing in this situation.” +“Hm. My mother was elven and she used to sing this song to me and my…brother when we were very young. It was very smooth and calming. Beautiful melody.” +“Yeah, most elven music is like that. When I was assigned in Retlad I learned a few elven songs from a few of the citizens there, you wouldn’t happen to know the song would you?” + +She tells you the name of the song and you know it immediately. One of the first new songs you learned while stationed in Retlad actually. This seems cause her to momentarily revert to a less stand offish behavior. You’re about to play it for her, but then a messenger comes running up handing her a note. She reads it and she’s all business again. + +“Alright men! We’re moving out!” she shouts and leaves without saying another word to you. You didn’t even learn her name. + +Perhaps it’s just as well; you’ll most likely never meet again due to one of you dying on the battlefield. You go back to doing what you were doing. + +Two years pass… + +Three years since the Nuro Incident and this struggle still continues. + +You’re still stationed Fort Virtue and you’ve repelled more demon attacks than you would care to count. Velzix has finally gotten his shit together completely. A unified demonic front is in full swing here and its taking its toll. Once again your skills have come in very handy in defense. You are certainly known as a demon slayer, but you still don’t feel like a hero of any kind. You’re just trying to do your job and survive. You save lives when you can, but you know ultimately it’s a futile task as death seems to be everywhere nowadays. + +As bad as it is on the demon front, its nothing compared to what’ve you’ve heard on the undead front. The Necromancer has finally broken out from Nuro, and successfully attacked the Kingdom of Brot. Several undead giants demolished the area. You’ve never even seen a living giant and they sound intimidating. You can’t even imagine an undead one. The power to raise one, let alone several is sort of scary. The Grand Alliance army didn’t get there in time to stop him and as usual they were repelled when they arrived. + +You worry about the Grand Alliance failing to stop the undead horde. You hope it doesn’t get any closer to the Zalan Empire where your family might be in danger. + +Sometimes you worry so much that you can’t sleep, not that you do much of that nowadays anyway. Normally you play to keep your mind at ease, but tonight you go to the archery range to keep yourself focused. + +For a long time you’re by yourself, but suddenly you feel a creeping suspicion someone is watching you… + +You turn around with your bow and see a pale man. He holds up his hands. + +“Hey now! Don’t shoot! Sorry for creeping around like that. Professional habit.” He says. +“What? Who are you?” you demand. +“Warnov. Zalan Intelligence.” +“You’re a spy?” +“Well I suppose you could put it that way. I was here to give some info to your Captain Eckard, and I also wanted to take a look around the fort. Didn’t think anyone would be on the range though. Nice shooting, I know who you are and heard about your marksmanship with a bow. You’re certainly doing your part with the demons around here.” + +Despite the fact that you’re talking to a spy, you feel the need to vent your feelings. + +“Yeah, well I hope the Grand Alliance starts doing its part. I mean what the fuck are they doing? Weren’t they created to put a stop to all this shit? I mean am I supposed to worry every day if that undead horde is going to get closer to the Zalan Empire where it can threaten my family?” + +Warnov doesn’t look offended by your words, if anything he looks intrigued. + +“Well, I can understand why you’re venting. Trust me I sympathize. But as part of intel, I can tell you its not that easy…there were a lot of surprises that weren’t accounted for. We’re doing our best to rectify this situation by gathering as much info as possible. In fact, you could help us…” +“Excuse me? How?” + +Warnov looks around and gets closer before speaking. + +“Look, as I said, I know all about you and your skills, why you joined, all of it. I know you don’t much care for some of the propaganda made about some of your exploits. But it’s important to realize that deeds like yours must be blown up a little to give common people hope that ultimately good will win the day. You may not consider yourself a hero of any kind, but your actions aren’t without some of those qualities. You obviously care very much about your family, and I’ve heard how you try to keep the people under your command alive. Sound like heroic qualities to me. Perhaps they’re on a smaller scale, but they’re there. I’m betting that there’s a BIGGER hero in there somewhere, just itching to get out. You think the Grand Alliance isn’t doing a good job? Perhaps we can arrange something for you to be transferred into it, or maybe you’d like to take an even more direct approach.” +“What do you mean?” + +Warnov suddenly backs away. + +“Before we go any further. I need to know are you willing to take up the mantle of being a hero. Because if you aren’t, then we have nothing more to discuss. I shall require an answer now.” +> Letters to home (War continues...) +Dear Mom, + +Just another letter from me, letting you know I’m still alive. Though I’m sure with my newest title of “Demon Slayer” you probably knew I was. + +More exaggerations of course. I do my job to be sure, but there are plenty of other men and women my age or even younger that doing just as much as I am and they don’t seem to get any credit. Of course many of them have also been killed. I’ve always tried to keep everyone alive under my command, but I know it’s a futile endeavor. + +The fighting has been getting worse up here, the demons I think have finally gotten more organized. Though what alarms me more is hearing that the Necromancer Lord has finally broken out of Nuro and taken over the Brot Kingdom. I thought the Grand Alliance was supposed to stop this sort of thing. + +I’m tired of all this. I feel like playing right now, sorry for the short letter. + +Give my love to the rest of the family + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Demons are a lot faster than the undead and you’re wounded, no way are you going to be able to outrun them. You turn around and draw your bow, trying to ignore your pain which is overriding any fear you have at this point. Your weakened state is causing you to have a hard time aiming. + +“Uh oh, better be careful, looks like this one is going to put up a fight. I’d say by his uniform that he’s a soldier.” +“Hur hur. Good. Hey human, better stop wobbling if you’re going to aim that thing properly.” + +You miss the demon completely. + +“Hah! You want me to walk slower human?” +”You sure you should be playing with him like that? Don’t you remember what happened earlier today?” +“Shut up! I told ya, that bitch musta had some magical powers because…OW!” + +You hit the demon in the chest, but it doesn’t seem much damage. He pulls out the arrow and now begins to quicken his pace. The other demon starts to walk towards you as well. + +“See, I told you to pay attention.” +“Bah! If this is the extent of what his little pig sticker can do, I’m not concerned. Hey human, don’t you know they’re doing great things with gunpower these days? RAAAAGH!” + +The big demon suddenly charges you, and you let your arrow fly. Right in the eye. + +“Perfect.” You whisper. + +The demon bellows, but it doesn’t slow him down. You narrowly dodge his charge. You roll on the ground and shoot two more arrows in his back. He turns around snarling and bellowing for your blood. More arrows fly into the creature, but at last the demon has reached you and smacks you to the ground. Your bow flies from your hand, and while crawling on the ground you try to draw your sword, but a crushing blow hits you on the back. This might’ve caused a lot more damage, but miraculously the lute that’s still in your pack “softens” the blow. The crunching of wood signifies that it’s broken though. + +“What the fuck, that’s a weird noise…what is this? HA HA HA! Hey! You gotta be shittin’ me! A fuckin’ lute? Check this out! He’s carrying a fuckin’ lute! What’s a fucking soldier doin’ with a lute?” the big demon shouts to his acquaintance while he holds up your broken instrument. +“Don’t talk you idiot! LOOK OUT!” his acquaintance shouts, just as you recover long enough to shove your sword straight into the demon’s groin. You push the sword upward in an attempt to do more damage and you succeed. Blood is flying everywhere and the demon howls in pain from the grievous wound. You pull your sword out and then proceed to repeatedly stab the demon until it falls backwards on the ground, dead. + +You’re exhausted; you used all your remaining strength killing the thing. Unfortunately the other demon grabs you by the scruff like a helpless kitten and lifts you up off the ground a few inches. He knocks your sword out of your hand and looks at his fallen comrade. +“Hmm, can’t say I didn’t warn him. Oh well, more meat for me. This may hurt a lot…” + +Fully expecting the death that you’ve managed to avoid for so long, you once again evade it when a gunshot rings out and part of the demon’s head splatters in your face. You’re dropped immediately. The demon’s body is still standing though. + +“Shoot the bastard again!” you hear a gruff voice shout and this time the next shot hits chest and the demon falls. + +You lay motionless on the ground, looking up in the sky when your saviors come up to you. It’s a group of dwarves armed with gun powder weapons. + +“By the gods, get doc out here! We need to fix this man up! Hey lad, you’ll be alright, don’t worry…are you a Zalan soldier?” one of the dwarves asks you. +“…yeah…Nuro…lost…all dead…” is all you utter before fall into unconsciousness. + +A few days pass before you’re somewhat back to a coherent state. You find yourself in a military outpost and at this point you don’t care. You’re just happy to be alive. + +It would seem that during your escape from Nuro, you ran in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom, the dwarven scouts that found you were from a small neutral kingdom trying its best to stay out of the dispute between Tulan and Zalan, but the new threat of demons running all over the nearby countryside caused them to increase patrols. They fixed you up, but dropped you off at the closest Zalan Fort. The Zalan fort that you’re in right now is called Virtue and it’s on the Tulan border. It seems relatively calm though. Not at all what you thought it would be. + +When one of the healers comes in to check on you, you begin to ask questions which she tries to answer to get you up to speed. + +The Tulan Kingdom is currently under attack from the demons now. They’ve been assaulting the place and even gaining help from some of the evil populace there. The demon citizens there have reverted back to their “bad behavior” and thrown their lot in with the invaders as well. That doesn’t surprise you. The Tulan Kingdom pulled back some of their military from the borders so the fighting hasn’t been as bad and Zalan’s made a little more progress during this time, but the military minds are being cautious not to over extend. There is extreme concern over the recent demon invasion, not to mention the incident at Nuro. Word has already spread about the unsuccessful siege there. + +The healer also tells you that a few Zalan “high ups” are eager to speak to you soon, as they want to know what exactly happened at Nuro. You’re somewhat of an important survivor since as far as anyone knows; you were the only one to successfully escape that killing zone. There’s also talk of a “Grand Alliance” being created to counter these new threats. + +While the healer talks you end up drifting back to sleep wishing you could just escape it all. + +One year passes… + +You’re still at Fort Virtue and it doesn’t look like you’ll be leaving the army anytime soon. + +You couldn’t have been more wrong on your belief that you’d get executed for cowardice. You got promoted to sergeant instead, which in light of the current situation, is nearly the same thing. + +Your promotion came after several Zalan officers spoke to you about Nuro. You even got a medal. + +Stories and rumors creep around about how against all odds you survived an undead onslaught and fought off a bunch of demons as well. Your past “reputation” from your time in Retlad is exaggerated as well. It doesn’t help that the citizens there remember you and are all willing to add to the exaggeration. + +All of these stories have been woven together in such an elaborate way to make you seem like some kind of hero most likely for propaganda purposes. And you know you’re not hero. In fact you try to explain you aren’t a hero to people, but they think you’re just being modest, eventually you give up. + +Your assignment at Virtue hasn’t been uneventful. There’s fighting, but now it’s mainly demon commanded enemies rather than Tulan ones. Some demon lord called Velzix killed the royalty there, completely conquered the area and made it his realm. The border war continues under new management except now it’s more than just a border that the enemy is looking to take. Your superior, Captain Eckard reminds you of Valhlat except with a different name. You suppose there is a certain “cookie cutter” that occurs within the Zalan army that causes people to act the same. You’ve briefly wondered if you ever make that rank, you’ll act the same way. You then usually laugh at the very fact that you ever would. + +Fort Virtue hasn’t suffered a really bad attack yet, and it’s mostly skirmishes, but it’s like waiting for the other shoe to drop. You routinely go on patrols and give orders which you didn’t think you’d be good at, but you think back to how you used to order your brothers and sisters around and perhaps you always had a bit a leadership skill, you just didn’t want it. + +You thought that you’d be able to at least visit your family, but of course due to recent events, you’re ordered to stay put. Your family at least is getting more money from your pay increase. They even send a new lute for you after you told them of the unfortunate event that resulted in the destruction of your last one. This gives you a little pleasure in a relatively joyless assignment. + +All in all, you still prefer it compared to being in the unsuccessful assaults on Nuro. The Grand Alliance that was formed hasn’t been too successful as every one has been a slaughter from what you’ve heard. You already went through that once. You don’t relish the idea of going through it again. + +One day while you’re spending your free time practicing a new song, some new soldiers come into the fort. They look like they’ve just seen a vicious battle and are here to restock. One of them sees you and gives you a disapproving look. It’s a woman with striking good looks, but definitely carrying an air of leadership about her. Her rank signifies her as a captain…yep same cookie cutter, just a little prettier. + +“You there! What are you doing playing an instrument? Shouldn’t you be on watch or doing something more constructive with your time soldier? And you’re a sergeant? You should know better!” +“I’m not on watch duty right now and…” + +The woman doesn’t even let you finish your explanation. Other soldiers that were sitting in your area are now slowly creeping out of the fray. Even her own soldiers are creeping away. They probably know all too well of how she acts. + +“So? You think evil is going to wait around for you to be ready for battle? Where is your superior officer? I can’t believe they would allow such a relaxed attitude around here considering the importance of this fort! If you were serving under me, I’d have you flogged for your lack of discipline!” +> Letters to home (Escape from Nuro) +Dear Mom, + +I dunno if they informed you, but I AM still alive! I don’t know how long you may have been worrying, but I’m sure you already heard about the failed siege at Nuro. It was horrible. + +I’ve spoken little about it as I’ve been attempting to recuperate in Fort Virtue. I really don’t want to, but I know I have to. Some of the high ranking people in the Zalan military apparently want to talk to me directly about it too. Apparently I was the only survivor. I still can’t believe it. I mean is it possible the god of luck rolled the dice and I was spared that day? + +It’s the only possible explanation. I mean the dead were all around me and I somehow escaped. My troubles didn’t even end there, since I might’ve died of blood loss or marauding demons had I not been found by a Dwarven patrol. + +I’ve never seen so much death in my life even during my assignment in Retlad and I wish I didn’t have to again, but I know I will. I just wish I could get my mind on the awful things I saw that day. Normally I’d play my music, but I don’t even have my lute anymore to do that. I miss it. + +I can’t believe I’m even obsessing about a stupid instrument when I should really be thankful that I’m still alive! Nobody else is. Captain Valhlat, Wessel, all of them. All those people in my company are dead or worse, probably raised as zombies by now. + +I dread what the future holds. Will I be sent back? + +I wish I had my lute. + +Give my love to the rest of the family + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Demons are a lot faster than the undead and you’re wounded, no way are you going to be able to outrun them. You turn around and draw your bow, trying to ignore your pain which is overriding any fear you have at this point. Your weakened state is causing you to have a hard time aiming. + +“Uh oh, better be careful, looks like this one is going to put up a fight. I’d say by his uniform that he’s a soldier.” +“Hur hur. Good. Hey human, better stop wobbling if you’re going to aim that thing properly.” + +You miss the demon completely. + +“Hah! You want me to walk slower human?” +”You sure you should be playing with him like that? Don’t you remember what happened earlier today?” +“Shut up! I told ya, that bitch musta had some magical powers because…OW!” + +You hit the demon in the chest, but it doesn’t seem much damage. He pulls out the arrow and now begins to quicken his pace. The other demon starts to walk towards you as well. + +“See, I told you to pay attention.” +“Bah! If this is the extent of what his little pig sticker can do, I’m not concerned. Hey human, don’t you know they’re doing great things with gunpower these days? RAAAAGH!” + +The big demon suddenly charges you, and you let your arrow fly. Right in the eye. + +“Perfect.” You whisper. + +The demon bellows, but it doesn’t slow him down. You narrowly dodge his charge. You roll on the ground and shoot two more arrows in his back. He turns around snarling and bellowing for your blood. More arrows fly into the creature, but at last the demon has reached you and smacks you to the ground. Your bow flies from your hand, and while crawling on the ground you try to draw your sword, but a crushing blow hits you on the back. This might’ve caused a lot more damage, but miraculously the lute that’s still in your pack “softens” the blow. The crunching of wood signifies that it’s broken though. + +“What the fuck, that’s a weird noise…what is this? HA HA HA! Hey! You gotta be shittin’ me! A fuckin’ lute? Check this out! He’s carrying a fuckin’ lute! What’s a fucking soldier doin’ with a lute?” the big demon shouts to his acquaintance while he holds up your broken instrument. +“Don’t talk you idiot! LOOK OUT!” his acquaintance shouts, just as you recover long enough to shove your sword straight into the demon’s groin. You push the sword upward in an attempt to do more damage and you succeed. Blood is flying everywhere and the demon howls in pain from the grievous wound. You pull your sword out and then proceed to repeatedly stab the demon until it falls backwards on the ground, dead. + +You’re exhausted; you used all your remaining strength killing the thing. Unfortunately the other demon grabs you by the scruff like a helpless kitten and lifts you up off the ground a few inches. He knocks your sword out of your hand and looks at his fallen comrade. +“Hmm, can’t say I didn’t warn him. Oh well, more meat for me. This may hurt a lot…” + +Fully expecting the death that you’ve managed to avoid for so long, you once again evade it when a gunshot rings out and part of the demon’s head splatters in your face. You’re dropped immediately. The demon’s body is still standing though. + +“Shoot the bastard again!” you hear a gruff voice shout and this time the next shot hits chest and the demon falls. + +You lay motionless on the ground, looking up in the sky when your saviors come up to you. It’s a group of dwarves armed with gun powder weapons. + +“By the gods, get doc out here! We need to fix this man up! Hey lad, you’ll be alright, don’t worry…are you a Zalan soldier?” one of the dwarves asks you. +“…yeah…Nuro…lost…all dead…” is all you utter before fall into unconsciousness. + +A few days pass before you’re somewhat back to a coherent state. You find yourself in a military outpost and at this point you don’t care. You’re just happy to be alive. + +It would seem that during your escape from Nuro, you ran in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom, the dwarven scouts that found you were from a small neutral kingdom trying its best to stay out of the dispute between Tulan and Zalan, but the new threat of demons running all over the nearby countryside caused them to increase patrols. They fixed you up, but dropped you off at the closest Zalan Fort. The Zalan fort that you’re in right now is called Virtue and it’s on the Tulan border. It seems relatively calm though. Not at all what you thought it would be. + +When one of the healers comes in to check on you, you begin to ask questions which she tries to answer to get you up to speed. + +The Tulan Kingdom is currently under attack from the demons now. They’ve been assaulting the place and even gaining help from some of the evil populace there. The demon citizens there have reverted back to their “bad behavior” and thrown their lot in with the invaders as well. That doesn’t surprise you. The Tulan Kingdom pulled back some of their military from the borders so the fighting hasn’t been as bad and Zalan’s made a little more progress during this time, but the military minds are being cautious not to over extend. There is extreme concern over the recent demon invasion, not to mention the incident at Nuro. Word has already spread about the unsuccessful siege there. + +The healer also tells you that a few Zalan “high ups” are eager to speak to you soon, as they want to know what exactly happened at Nuro. You’re somewhat of an important survivor since as far as anyone knows; you were the only one to successfully escape that killing zone. There’s also talk of a “Grand Alliance” being created to counter these new threats. + +While the healer talks you end up drifting back to sleep wishing you could just escape it all. + +One year passes… + +You’re still at Fort Virtue and it doesn’t look like you’ll be leaving the army anytime soon. + +You couldn’t have been more wrong on your belief that you’d get executed for cowardice. You got promoted to sergeant instead, which in light of the current situation, is nearly the same thing. + +Your promotion came after several Zalan officers spoke to you about Nuro. You even got a medal. + +Stories and rumors creep around about how against all odds you survived an undead onslaught and fought off a bunch of demons as well. Your past “reputation” from your time in Retlad is exaggerated as well. It doesn’t help that the citizens there remember you and are all willing to add to the exaggeration. + +All of these stories have been woven together in such an elaborate way to make you seem like some kind of hero most likely for propaganda purposes. And you know you’re not hero. In fact you try to explain you aren’t a hero to people, but they think you’re just being modest, eventually you give up. + +Your assignment at Virtue hasn’t been uneventful. There’s fighting, but now it’s mainly demon commanded enemies rather than Tulan ones. Some demon lord called Velzix killed the royalty there, completely conquered the area and made it his realm. The border war continues under new management except now it’s more than just a border that the enemy is looking to take. Your superior, Captain Eckard reminds you of Valhlat except with a different name. You suppose there is a certain “cookie cutter” that occurs within the Zalan army that causes people to act the same. You’ve briefly wondered if you ever make that rank, you’ll act the same way. You then usually laugh at the very fact that you ever would. + +Fort Virtue hasn’t suffered a really bad attack yet, and it’s mostly skirmishes, but it’s like waiting for the other shoe to drop. You routinely go on patrols and give orders which you didn’t think you’d be good at, but you think back to how you used to order your brothers and sisters around and perhaps you always had a bit a leadership skill, you just didn’t want it. + +You thought that you’d be able to at least visit your family, but of course due to recent events, you’re ordered to stay put. Your family at least is getting more money from your pay increase. They even send a new lute for you after you told them of the unfortunate event that resulted in the destruction of your last one. This gives you a little pleasure in a relatively joyless assignment. + +All in all, you still prefer it compared to being in the unsuccessful assaults on Nuro. The Grand Alliance that was formed hasn’t been too successful as every one has been a slaughter from what you’ve heard. You already went through that once. You don’t relish the idea of going through it again. + +One day while you’re spending your free time practicing a new song, some new soldiers come into the fort. They look like they’ve just seen a vicious battle and are here to restock. One of them sees you and gives you a disapproving look. It’s a woman with striking good looks, but definitely carrying an air of leadership about her. Her rank signifies her as a captain…yep same cookie cutter, just a little prettier. + +“You there! What are you doing playing an instrument? Shouldn’t you be on watch or doing something more constructive with your time soldier? And you’re a sergeant? You should know better!” +“I’m not on watch duty right now and…” + +The woman doesn’t even let you finish your explanation. Other soldiers that were sitting in your area are now slowly creeping out of the fray. Even her own soldiers are creeping away. They probably know all too well of how she acts. + +“So? You think evil is going to wait around for you to be ready for battle? Where is your superior officer? I can’t believe they would allow such a relaxed attitude around here considering the importance of this fort! If you were serving under me, I’d have you flogged for your lack of discipline!” +> Letters to home (Thanks for the lute!) +Dear Mom + +Thanks for the lute! I received it just a few days ago. It plays very well, its even better than the one I lost. It’s certainly made what little free time I have at least tolerable now. + +I really wish I could get a chance to visit you guys though. I thought I would’ve been able to by now, but I suppose given the current situation, nobody’s getting any kind of leave for quite some time. + +I’m sure you’ve also heard all about how I’m supposed to be some kind of hero after surviving the failed attack on Nuro, but I don’t see how. I mean I guess praise is better than being insulted, but at this point I feel like a fraud. Like I’m getting too much credit for something that was pure luck in the first place. + +I dunno, I know you and the rest of the family are proud of me so that’s all that really matters. I’m just trying to keep all this in perspective. You and Dad always told me not to get a big head about things. At least they raised my pay so I can send you guys more money. That’s why I joined the first place after all. + +This new rank gives me a few more responsibilities, but I can handle it. So far this assignment hasn’t been too bad. Demons aren’t a picnic to fight though and I’m dreading the day when they start attacking in a more organized manner. + +Until then, I’ll just be enjoying your gift when I can. + +Give my love to the rest of the family. + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Despite your fears, you’ve always had a sense of duty and responsibility, something that probably won’t ever completely go away due to how you grew up. You’re not running away, you did join to help provide for your family after all. + +Before your company packs up and leaves Retlad, you write a quick letter to your family and hand it off to a messenger. Many of the Retlad citizens aren’t too pleased to see you leave, but they don’t really have any say in the matter, just like you don’t. There isn’t much talking on the trip, though, everyone is pretty silent. Wessel however is doing enough for everyone. + +“I can’t believe something like this happened! Nuro was a beacon of enlightenment and well prepared for situations like this! I…can’t believe this didn’t occur without some sort of demonic influence. I’ll bet that Mr. Demar had something to do with this! I remember taking his class and he was always a creepy bastard. Before I could graduate I had to take his conjuration 101 class and he didn’t like me because I had made several logical arguments to as why that branch of magic should be outlawed altogether. And it’s obvious by what happened recently that I was right! Nevertheless I did all the required work in the class and I still got a B! Way to fuck up my perfect record! I get the same grade as some bumbling idiot who summoned up a Nurk Beast that he lost control over and bit off someone’s hand! Where is the fucking justice?” + +Once again, Wessel has turned the topic to focus on himself. Happily Captain Vahlat tells him to shut the fuck up. + +You’ll be near Nuro soon and your company makes camp for the night. While all of you are on edge from what will come tomorrow, someone finally says something. + +“Hey farmboy, play us a song on that thing.” +“…what did you want to hear?” you ask, not expecting to be called to play under these circumstances. In fact it just occurred to you that you’ve never played for anyone in your company! You assume that they all knew that you did, but they just were never interested enough to stick around and listen to you before. + +“I dunno, play whatever it was you used to play for the Retlad citizens…it seemed to make them happy.” + +You pull out your lute and take a deep breath and start playing. At first you’re just concentrating on the strings and making sure you don’t mess anything up, but when you look up, you can see that everyone in the camp is listening intently to your music, even Wessel. Tensions seem to have decreased. It’s like a wave of calmness has struck the camp. You never believed your playing could have that much of an effect on people. Eventually the song ends and the Captain tells everyone who isn’t on watch to get some sleep. He then takes you aside. + +“Heard your playing…damn shame that you’re here. You really should be doing that instead.” Valhlat remarks. +“I know.” +“Hm. I know you joined mainly to help support your family.” +“Yeah, I just hope I get to see them again.” +“Bah, don’t start talking like that. I’ve seen you with a bow, you pluck that thing even better than that lute. You’ve been in battle before and survived, I see you doing it again.” +“I sure hope so, its just I dunno…the undead…I’ve heard stories.” +“Yeah, everyone’s heard the stories, but stories tend to be exaggerated. Now I dunno about what happened centuries ago, since I wasn’t there, but I HAVE fought the undead before. One of my first assignments was taking care of some minor undead incursion in a little village. Some asshole stumbled upon an ancient scroll and started reading the goddamn words on it out loud. They look a lot worse than they actually are. Most of the time they’re incredibly slow, and easily dispatched. Its mainly a psychological advantage from all the stories people have told about them that cause this quaking fear in most folks.” +“Well I suppose, but what about the necromancers?” +“Feh, they’re wizards and just like all the rest their arrogance is their undoing. Most of these so-called necromancers are half-assed ones that get killed by their own undead troops. Anyway, get to sleep; you want to be fully alert for tomorrow’s battle. It still won’t be a walk in the park, but it’s not going to be a death sentence.” + +You take the Captain’s words into consideration, but in the back of your mind before you go to sleep, you’re thinking “But they can’t be that half-assed, they successfully took over Nuro…” + +The next day arrives and you finish your trip to Nuro and that’s when you see the city for the first time. You always wanted to visit it after hearing about it from Wessel, but even from this distance it doesn’t look like anything he described. + +“By the gods…what…” Wessel slowly whispers. + +The stench of death is thick in the air. You see thousands of bodies outside the city gates and they aren’t lying down either. They aren’t advancing either though. There just standing there like…well zombies. + +Your company isn’t the only one here though, there are a few others awaiting orders. You see one from the Brot Kingdom and another from the Azi Republic. Thankfully there’s another Zalan one as well to boost your numbers. + +The respective captains acknowledge each other’s presence, a short meeting is made and then the inevitable comes. The attack. + +At first things seem to go well. All ranged troops are ordered to fire upon the enemy who are still just standing there. Arrows pierce zombie brains, gunshots destroy skeleton bones, spells blast at walls and it seems very easy. + +Then from the battlements of Nuro a few figures begin casting a few offensive spells of their own. It’s at this point a charge is made towards the city. + +“When you get in range aim for the fucking wizards! Don’t fear these rotting meat sacks! We’re the fucking Zalan army! We don’t lose!” Captain Valhlat shouts. + +Fine words, but they do little to uplift your impending sense of doom. It doesn’t help that the sky goes completely dark while you’re marching towards a bunch of undead and at the same time hoping you don’t get hit by a wizard’s spell. In the distance you briefly see a cleric from the Azi Republic riding a horse by himself. He appears to be calling upon some sort of holy might from whatever god he worships since a blue protective sphere appears around him. The next moment he’s hit by a black ray that goes straight through the sphere and his life is gone. Not even his god could protect him. + +As you get closer, you see that the undead soldiers still haven’t moved, but there are significantly less of them as they continue to fall from ranged attacks. However, now other undead pop up on the walls of Nuro holding bows of their own. + +“SHIELDS!” Captain Valhlat shouts. + +More of your side falls and now you’re so close you can smell the death in the air. The undead troops are now finally moving to do battle with your side. You attempt to target the robed figures on the battlements, but of course it’s very difficult in all this chaos and your fear. + +You mostly only get the undead archers. Wessel is a little more successful is downing an enemy wizard. + +“Ha ha! Don’t you realize I graduated top of my class?!” you hear him shout. + +The gates of Nuro are being broken down and despite the horror you’ve already seen, this battle still seems hopeful. + +Then a black cloaked hooded figure sudden appears on the battlements. You see him merely raise his arms briefly and that’s when you get the very real feeling that hope is lost. + +Ghostly spirits come through the walls of Nuro making worse shrieks than when you fought the Quillars. At least they were living creatures. These drain lives at but a touch and there isn’t enough magic to fight the incorporeal creatures properly. You see the Brot Kingdom’s company break and run, but unfortunately for them and you, your possible retreat has been blocked. All the soldiers on your side that fell have now suddenly been raised, the undead soldiers that were killed have been raised as well. You’re fighting in the front, from behind and in some cases from within. It’s chaos. + +“Shit, I’m going to die today…” you whisper to yourself. + +Captain Valhlat is knee deep in the dead, but this figure who’s apparently changed the tide of battle hasn’t escaped his attention. He points to the figure and barks orders at the top of his lungs. + +“KILL HIM! SHOOT THE FUCKER! DO IT! NOW!” +> Letters to home (Assault on Nuro) +Dear Mom, + +I’m writing this just before we head off to Nuro. I’m sort of scared. I know I shouldn’t, but I can’t help it. I also know I’ve been in danger several times before, but I have a bad feeling about this mission. + +I remember those old stories Dad told about the Dead War that occurred centuries ago. Those used to scare the hell out of me. I was usually thankful when you told him to stop telling me and Mallack about it. + +Still he always said that he told those stories so that we could better appreciate the relatively “safe” time we live in now even if it isn’t perfect. I’d hate to think that he was wrong about that, because I certainly wouldn’t want to live during the years of the Great Lich Lord’s reign of terror. + +I’ve been told that this “outbreak” is still small enough to be contained and eliminated, but that doesn’t make me feel any better. + +Nuro is a place of strong magic! If they couldn’t handle this problem, how are we going to be able to? What manner of undead are going to face us? What of the evil wizards that caused this in the first place? As far as my company goes, the only really powerful one we have is Wessel. I hope they aren’t just sending us, or that we’ll at least have much more magical back up by the time we arrive there. + +I’ve been trying to not worry about this, but this doesn’t feel right. In my heart it doesn’t feel right. I just hope and pray to all the gods that I survive this. + +Give my love to the rest of the family. + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just because he’s acting reckless doesn’t mean you’re going to, you’re going to play upon your strengths and keep as far away as you can. + +You ride your horse around the outskirts of the village, readying your bow the whole time. When you can, you fire at the Quillar attackers. As quick as they are, they aren’t really paying attention to you and you manage to get in some good shots. A couple of head shots even. + +At first they don’t realize where the all the arrows are coming from, since Wessel is giving them a hard enough time with the chain lightning. You’re sort of glad you decided to stay on the outskirts. Wessel is having such a “good time” blasting the Quillars, he’s probably causing a lot more collateral damage in the process. + +Eventually the Quillars start to retreat. This is when you get into a little more trouble as you happen to be right in the direction of where they’re running! They still look scary and they get even moreso as they get closer. The worst has to be their shrieks. It’s unpleasant to hear to say the least. + +You ride out of the way, but your horse isn’t fast enough and is peppered by quills. You catch a few in the leg yourself and you’re thrown from the horse as it reels in pain, before collapsing. + +Feeling the pain you scramble for cover behind a nearby rock. Fortunately the quills don’t penetrate that. Most of them are content on just running away, but one straggler decides to try to get one more kill before leaving. That kill of course happens to be you. + +The Quillar makes its high pitch shriek as it runs towards the rock. You don’t have time to ready your bow before its high jumped over the rock and on the other side of you. You quickly draw your weapon and swing it blindly as you turn around. Luckily your blade catches the side of its head, killing it. At last you collapse from the pain in your leg. + +While you’re pulling out quills, Wessel and another Zalan soldier come to meet you. Wessel doesn’t look any worse for wear, but the soldier looks very tired and obviously has wounds of his own. + +“There you are, lying down on the job I see.” Wessel mocks. +“Are you alright?” the other soldier asks. +“Yeah…Agh. I’ve gotten bitten in the leg by a Kobold before. Feels nearly the same except these quills go in a lot deeper.” +“Glad you guys came when you did. We were just doing a routine patrol when these quill bastards came out of nowhere! They’re getting bolder and attacking in greater number, we need more reinforcements.” +“Yeah, well good luck with that. The Tulan border is the primary concern. Besides I’m here now, I predict that this infestation will be over soon now.” Wessel boasts. + +“Any…way. My name’s Tylir. I’d introduce you to the rest of my squad, but they’re all dead now. Even though it was the heat of battle, I couldn’t help notice how well you picked off several of those Quillars with one shot. That was pretty impressive.” +“Thanks.” +“Hey! What about me? I’m the one who noticed you getting attacked in the first place! I’m also the one who saved your ass!” Wessel interrupts again, he’s starting to get annoying at this point, but Tylir doesn’t seem bothered by him. + +“Everyone did their part. Okay, since I’m here I’ll take you to see Captain Vhalat, I’m sure that’s who you were sent to report to, oh and wizard while your skills may be appreciated here, I’d advise you to cut down on the boasting. Captain Vhalat isn’t fond of it, and to be quite honest the other two wizards we had here were more experienced and they still got killed.” +“Hmm, well perhaps they lacked the natural skill that I of course possess.” + +At this point you and Tylir just roll your eyes and get moving. + +You travel through a couple of other villages and it’s pretty depressing. You see stacks of bodies being buried in mass graves while most of other Retlad citizens look thoroughly defeated. A few look in your direction, but don’t look too much, it’s like they don’t really expect you to succeed. Not exactly inspiring. + +Soon you arrive in the town of Glaf. It would appear that the Zalan contingency sent here is staying in one of the bigger Retlad towns rather than the capitol. Ryan also says that the Quillar infestation is worse around here too, so the captain suspects that whatever lair they’re crawling out of is nearby and can hopefully located and cleansed. + +The town itself resembles a small Zalan fort rather than a proper Retlad town, as a sturdy wall has been erected around it. The people seem to look a little more hopeful though. Tylir goes on to say that he thinks that the Retlad citizens are actually starting to prefer Zalan presence especially since their on government has been pretty ineffectual about the whole invasion. The Retlad army has only focused on defending the capitol. The Retlad royals appear to find their lives more important than anyone else’s. + +Eventually you’re brought before Captain Vahlat himself. He looks up from the map he’s inspecting and addresses you and Wessel. + +“Ah, I see the Empire has seen fit to send me reinforcements…wow, twice as many as I thought I’d get. Private Tylir where’s the rest of your squad?” +“Um…dead sir.” +“Of course. (sigh) So what’s your problem private? Why is your leg wrapped up?” Vahlat asks you. +“Got into a fight with the Quillars sir.” You answer. +“Oh?” + +Tylir at this point interrupts and tells of what happened. Wessel looks like he wants to expand upon his deeds, but Vahlat’s appearance is a little imposing and he was already warned once, so he keeps his mouth shut. Vahlat soon addresses you again. + +“Well it would seem you two have already proven yourselves useful. A lot more useful that what passes for the Retlad army, but of course that isn’t hard. Wizard, I certainly hope you don’t intend to use this place as a chance to show off all the skills you learned in your fancy Nuro college. One of your predecessors did that as well, and as you can see he’s no longer here. As for you, I hope that you can do a better job of keeping out of the way of the quills next time. Most don’t get a second chance. Alright that’s all for now. Our group is being housed for free at the Inn down the street. Free food as well, but don’t go overboard, its being rationed. You want more food or anything else you’ll have to pay like everyone else. I suggest though that you don’t do any heavy carousing. This is a high alert situation and we could be going to battle at anytime. Dismissed.” + +You, Wessel and Tylir all leave at this point. Tylir goes on to show you where the Inn is and a couple of other places, but after today you just want to rest and retire to your room early. You rest your leg and begin practicing your lute. This puts you in better spirits. + +6 months pass… + +The Quillar invasion has nearly been eradicated. Most of the major lairs have been located and cleansed and you certainly contributed greatly to this effort. Besides your combat abilities, your tracking skills definitely came in handy a lot. + +You’ve become somewhat recognized among Retlad citizens due to your actions and the lives you’ve saved. The word “hero” has been used a few times though you definitely don’t think of yourself as one. In your free time you spoke with the citizens, a lot more than your fellow soldiers though. A few of them even convinced you to play for them when they noticed your lute. It took a little prodding, but eventually you gave in fully expecting to get booed, but to your surprise, you got applauded instead. Your playing didn’t just boost your spirits it seemed. Whenever you could you played a little bit for people in what little free time you had. Never did you think that you’d be playing for any kind of audience, let alone an appreciative one. + +It definitely hasn’t been all sunshine though; you’ve seen a lot of people die. More than you ever wanted to actually. You’d made friends with Tylir shortly after your first meeting and he died only a couple months later. You’ll be glad when every one of these Quillar creatures are all dead though, all they’ve done is cause misery. + +You’ve got them on the run now though. You’re preparing for an attack on another one of their lairs, when Captain Vahlat calls everyone to see him, he doesn’t look enthusiastic about whatever it is he has to tell you. + +“All right I’ll be brief. As much as I hate leaving a mission unfinished, we’re getting pulled out of here effective immediately. Major news is that Nuro has undergone a fucking disaster that needs to be put down like yesterday! All governments friendly to the City State of Nuro that can spare the manpower are to send help. We would be one of those. I hope the Retlad army is just competent enough to finish up what we started in their own country.” + +Wessel immediately pipes up upon hearing about this revelation. + +“What happened in Nuro? What’s going on?!” +“What’s going on? From what I’ve been told a whole bunch of your kind raised a shitload of undead and unleashed a bunch of hostile demons on the place! The entire city was overrun. Reports are already stating that small packs of demons are running around the nearby countryside. Most likely in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom. Not sure what that means with our border war with them, but I only see it getting bloodier around there. In any case, our job is to head to Nuro, before the undead start following suit. I hope you’re all ready for this, because this is going to be a lot different that fighting Quillars.” + +You look around and see a lot of fear wash over faces and rightly so. Necromancers have a bad history on your world. When you were little you still remember hearing the tales of the Great Lich Lord that existed centuries before you were even born. He almost took over the world. Those stories gave you nightmares as a kid. The possibility of having to face something remotely similar even on much smaller scale doesn’t make you feel too well. +> Letters to home (Retlad assignment) +Dear Mom, + +This assignment is almost coming to a close I believe. We’ve got the Quillars on the run and wiped out most of their lairs. I’ve said it before and I’ll say it again, I’d rather be fighting Kobolds! + +Lately I’ve been able to play a lot more thanks to our severe lowering of the Quillar population. The people here are pretty nice, they seem to always want me to play for them. Didn’t think I’d actually ever play for a proper audience! + +I’m happy to do it though, it sort of keeps my mind off of the nastier things I’ve seen. I know I told you about how my friend Tylir died, a few months ago, but it still seems a little unreal. I mean other than Dad, I’ve never known anyone who I knew personally dying. And certainly not as violently as he did. I’ve seen a lot more violence in general though. + +However, I guess I should’ve expected stuff like this to happen. I mean I am in the army! Sometimes the people call us heroes and stuff for killing the Quillars. Some guys like that annoying Wessel get a thrill out of it, but I dunno. I don’t really feel like one. I just want to do my job and survive. And play if possible. + +Well I guess that’s it for now, give my love to the rest of the family. + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just because he’s acting reckless doesn’t mean you’re going to, you’re going to play upon your strengths and keep as far away as you can. + +You ride your horse around the outskirts of the village, readying your bow the whole time. When you can, you fire at the Quillar attackers. As quick as they are, they aren’t really paying attention to you and you manage to get in some good shots. A couple of head shots even. + +At first they don’t realize where the all the arrows are coming from, since Wessel is giving them a hard enough time with the chain lightning. You’re sort of glad you decided to stay on the outskirts. Wessel is having such a “good time” blasting the Quillars, he’s probably causing a lot more collateral damage in the process. + +Eventually the Quillars start to retreat. This is when you get into a little more trouble as you happen to be right in the direction of where they’re running! They still look scary and they get even moreso as they get closer. The worst has to be their shrieks. It’s unpleasant to hear to say the least. + +You ride out of the way, but your horse isn’t fast enough and is peppered by quills. You catch a few in the leg yourself and you’re thrown from the horse as it reels in pain, before collapsing. + +Feeling the pain you scramble for cover behind a nearby rock. Fortunately the quills don’t penetrate that. Most of them are content on just running away, but one straggler decides to try to get one more kill before leaving. That kill of course happens to be you. + +The Quillar makes its high pitch shriek as it runs towards the rock. You don’t have time to ready your bow before its high jumped over the rock and on the other side of you. You quickly draw your weapon and swing it blindly as you turn around. Luckily your blade catches the side of its head, killing it. At last you collapse from the pain in your leg. + +While you’re pulling out quills, Wessel and another Zalan soldier come to meet you. Wessel doesn’t look any worse for wear, but the soldier looks very tired and obviously has wounds of his own. + +“There you are, lying down on the job I see.” Wessel mocks. +“Are you alright?” the other soldier asks. +“Yeah…Agh. I’ve gotten bitten in the leg by a Kobold before. Feels nearly the same except these quills go in a lot deeper.” +“Glad you guys came when you did. We were just doing a routine patrol when these quill bastards came out of nowhere! They’re getting bolder and attacking in greater number, we need more reinforcements.” +“Yeah, well good luck with that. The Tulan border is the primary concern. Besides I’m here now, I predict that this infestation will be over soon now.” Wessel boasts. + +“Any…way. My name’s Tylir. I’d introduce you to the rest of my squad, but they’re all dead now. Even though it was the heat of battle, I couldn’t help notice how well you picked off several of those Quillars with one shot. That was pretty impressive.” +“Thanks.” +“Hey! What about me? I’m the one who noticed you getting attacked in the first place! I’m also the one who saved your ass!” Wessel interrupts again, he’s starting to get annoying at this point, but Tylir doesn’t seem bothered by him. + +“Everyone did their part. Okay, since I’m here I’ll take you to see Captain Vhalat, I’m sure that’s who you were sent to report to, oh and wizard while your skills may be appreciated here, I’d advise you to cut down on the boasting. Captain Vhalat isn’t fond of it, and to be quite honest the other two wizards we had here were more experienced and they still got killed.” +“Hmm, well perhaps they lacked the natural skill that I of course possess.” + +At this point you and Tylir just roll your eyes and get moving. + +You travel through a couple of other villages and it’s pretty depressing. You see stacks of bodies being buried in mass graves while most of other Retlad citizens look thoroughly defeated. A few look in your direction, but don’t look too much, it’s like they don’t really expect you to succeed. Not exactly inspiring. + +Soon you arrive in the town of Glaf. It would appear that the Zalan contingency sent here is staying in one of the bigger Retlad towns rather than the capitol. Ryan also says that the Quillar infestation is worse around here too, so the captain suspects that whatever lair they’re crawling out of is nearby and can hopefully located and cleansed. + +The town itself resembles a small Zalan fort rather than a proper Retlad town, as a sturdy wall has been erected around it. The people seem to look a little more hopeful though. Tylir goes on to say that he thinks that the Retlad citizens are actually starting to prefer Zalan presence especially since their on government has been pretty ineffectual about the whole invasion. The Retlad army has only focused on defending the capitol. The Retlad royals appear to find their lives more important than anyone else’s. + +Eventually you’re brought before Captain Vahlat himself. He looks up from the map he’s inspecting and addresses you and Wessel. + +“Ah, I see the Empire has seen fit to send me reinforcements…wow, twice as many as I thought I’d get. Private Tylir where’s the rest of your squad?” +“Um…dead sir.” +“Of course. (sigh) So what’s your problem private? Why is your leg wrapped up?” Vahlat asks you. +“Got into a fight with the Quillars sir.” You answer. +“Oh?” + +Tylir at this point interrupts and tells of what happened. Wessel looks like he wants to expand upon his deeds, but Vahlat’s appearance is a little imposing and he was already warned once, so he keeps his mouth shut. Vahlat soon addresses you again. + +“Well it would seem you two have already proven yourselves useful. A lot more useful that what passes for the Retlad army, but of course that isn’t hard. Wizard, I certainly hope you don’t intend to use this place as a chance to show off all the skills you learned in your fancy Nuro college. One of your predecessors did that as well, and as you can see he’s no longer here. As for you, I hope that you can do a better job of keeping out of the way of the quills next time. Most don’t get a second chance. Alright that’s all for now. Our group is being housed for free at the Inn down the street. Free food as well, but don’t go overboard, its being rationed. You want more food or anything else you’ll have to pay like everyone else. I suggest though that you don’t do any heavy carousing. This is a high alert situation and we could be going to battle at anytime. Dismissed.” + +You, Wessel and Tylir all leave at this point. Tylir goes on to show you where the Inn is and a couple of other places, but after today you just want to rest and retire to your room early. You rest your leg and begin practicing your lute. This puts you in better spirits. + +6 months pass… + +The Quillar invasion has nearly been eradicated. Most of the major lairs have been located and cleansed and you certainly contributed greatly to this effort. Besides your combat abilities, your tracking skills definitely came in handy a lot. + +You’ve become somewhat recognized among Retlad citizens due to your actions and the lives you’ve saved. The word “hero” has been used a few times though you definitely don’t think of yourself as one. In your free time you spoke with the citizens, a lot more than your fellow soldiers though. A few of them even convinced you to play for them when they noticed your lute. It took a little prodding, but eventually you gave in fully expecting to get booed, but to your surprise, you got applauded instead. Your playing didn’t just boost your spirits it seemed. Whenever you could you played a little bit for people in what little free time you had. Never did you think that you’d be playing for any kind of audience, let alone an appreciative one. + +It definitely hasn’t been all sunshine though; you’ve seen a lot of people die. More than you ever wanted to actually. You’d made friends with Tylir shortly after your first meeting and he died only a couple months later. You’ll be glad when every one of these Quillar creatures are all dead though, all they’ve done is cause misery. + +You’ve got them on the run now though. You’re preparing for an attack on another one of their lairs, when Captain Vahlat calls everyone to see him, he doesn’t look enthusiastic about whatever it is he has to tell you. + +“All right I’ll be brief. As much as I hate leaving a mission unfinished, we’re getting pulled out of here effective immediately. Major news is that Nuro has undergone a fucking disaster that needs to be put down like yesterday! All governments friendly to the City State of Nuro that can spare the manpower are to send help. We would be one of those. I hope the Retlad army is just competent enough to finish up what we started in their own country.” + +Wessel immediately pipes up upon hearing about this revelation. + +“What happened in Nuro? What’s going on?!” +“What’s going on? From what I’ve been told a whole bunch of your kind raised a shitload of undead and unleashed a bunch of hostile demons on the place! The entire city was overrun. Reports are already stating that small packs of demons are running around the nearby countryside. Most likely in the direction of the Tulan Kingdom. Not sure what that means with our border war with them, but I only see it getting bloodier around there. In any case, our job is to head to Nuro, before the undead start following suit. I hope you’re all ready for this, because this is going to be a lot different that fighting Quillars.” + +You look around and see a lot of fear wash over faces and rightly so. Necromancers have a bad history on your world. When you were little you still remember hearing the tales of the Great Lich Lord that existed centuries before you were even born. He almost took over the world. Those stories gave you nightmares as a kid. The possibility of having to face something remotely similar even on much smaller scale doesn’t make you feel too well. +> Letters to home (There was this girl...) +Hey Mallack! + +I paid the messenger a little extra to give this one to you personally, don’t show it to Mom or anyone else! I’m serious! + +I finally did it! + +I didn’t even expect it either. I was off duty and taking a break from destroying a Quillar lair, so as usual I went down to the tavern to go play for the locals a bit. + +While it is true there have been several “offers” from some of tavern girls before due to my lute playing ability, I dunno I just never felt comfortable about going with one of them. + +However, I didn’t get to the tavern; I bumped into some traveling merchant woman from the Brot Kingdom. I apologized and helped pick up her belongings and she noticed the lute I carried. She began to ask me about it since she said she really liked music and soon the pair of us were deep in conversation and going back to the Inn on the other side of town that she was currently staying at. I learned that her name was Helena. + +We continued to talk in her room and I played for Helena a bit and before I knew it, we were on the bed naked! + +I’m still not exactly sure how it started, but it sure felt good! I really liked her too, but I guess it was just a one time thing, because she left a couple days later. Though she did say if I was ever stationed in Brot, I should look her up again. + +Anyway, I guess I felt like I just had to tell someone. I suppose I could’ve told the guys in my company, but I didn’t really want to be sweated down for more detailed information constantly. + +Okay that’s it, and like I said, don’t show this to Mom or anyone else! In fact you should probably just destroy it. + +Your brother<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’ve never even heard of Quillars before, but they still sound less dangerous than the Tulan Border, that place is only going to get worse, you know it. + +“I’ll take the Retlad assignment sir.” +“Hm. Smart. Here’s your first month’s pay, I suggest you live it up here in Zal, for the couple of days you have off before you leave.” + +You take the small bag and look inside. This will certainly help your family. You take a few coins for yourself and then ask if arrangements can be made to have your payment sent to your family from now on. He tells you yes, but asks that surely that you will still want some of it. You agree to just taking 10% of it. You don’t need much. + +“Sheesh, living bare minimum huh? Don’t you want to eat anything other than military rations every once in awhile?” Kosser questions again. +“Nah. If I need extra food, I’ll just hunt.” +“You know even the booze and brothel girls in Retlad aren’t THAT cheap. You sure you don’t want more?” +“Nope. I’ll be fine. My family needs that money more than I do.” +“Alright then, family man.” + +You exit the barracks and wander the city a bit. You find it very interesting. You sort of wish you could stay longer to take in more sights. However one thing catches your eye. A small store and in the window is a lute. Looks almost like the one you had before it was taken away from you in basic training. You haven’t gotten a chance to play in six months and you’d really like to… + +Hey you’re a soldier now, you’ve proven yourself. You figure you can take one personal belonging with you to Retlad as long as you keep them packed properly. You enter the store and with the little money you have you buy the lute. You spend the most of the day and the next practicing it. You didn’t forget as much as you thought. You also finish up writing a letter to your family and give it to a Zalan messenger carrier. + +Finally the third day arrives for you to move out. A couple of officers arrive to take most of your other fellow cadets. Mostly to the Tulan border, however, it would appear you have a different escort. A young man in loose robe approaches you. He looks like a wizard, but you wonder for how long since he seems about your age. + +“Hey, are you the one going to the Retlad Kingdom?” he asks +“Yeah, who are you?” +“I’m Wessel. And don’t you dare get cute and call me weasel, or I’ll have to blast you with a lightning bolt.” +“I wasn’t planning on it.” You say which causes Wessel to start laughing. +“Geez, I was just fucking with you. Don’t be so serious! So you ready to go?” +“Yeah I guess, are you my superior officer?” +“Huh? Oh no. Look I got our horses waiting outside; we can do all this getting to know you stuff on the way.” + +You and Wessel get on the horses and ride towards your destination. It would appear that you’re the only one from your group to be going, but of course you were the only expert marksman. + +Wessel begins to tell you more about why he’s with you. In fact he doesn’t really let you do much talking at all. He says he’s a native citizen of the Zalan Empire, but he just graduated from the esteemed magic university in the city state of Nuro. Wessel goes on to and says that when he heard they needed a few wizard over in Retlad, he decided to volunteer to test his skills and get paid while doing it. He explains that the pair of you will be following the orders of a Captain Vhalat. + +Everyone knows about Nuro. It’s very famous, and you always wondered what kind of magical wonders existed there, so you’re eager to hear more and he’s all too happy to tell you. Despite Wessel’s primary focus on himself, it sounds like a place you’d want to visit one day. + +Eventually you arrive at the border and so far the Retlad Kingdom doesn’t look very well kept. The road begins to show evidence of disrepair and the sign posts are broken. You begin to keep your eye out for a possible attack at any second. + +“Look! Over there! It’s a village and it’s under attack! Come on!” Wessel yells and rides towards the village in the distance. You try to tell him to wait, but he’s already well on his way, so you ride after him. + +You’ve never seen a Quillar before, but the closer you get to the village, you start seeing humanoid creatures covered in sharp spikes running around at a fast speed which could only be them. They are indeed fearsome looking. You also see a lot of the people running from them, and even a few people dressed in protective gear similar to yours…not that its doing them much good. + +“Alright you prickly bastards here’s something for ya!” Wessle shouts riding into the village with one hand raised in the air for a lightning blast attack. He shows no fear. You have no idea if all wizards are like this, but he’s either got to be brave, stupid or just suicidal. Of course he could be all three. Up until now you always thought wizards were supposed to be meek types that didn’t charge into battle and preferred to kill from afar. You guess you were wrong. +> Letters to home (First assignment) +Dear Mom, + +Well I got my first assignment. I’m heading to the Retlad Kingdom. Unlike most of my fellow cadets I was given the choice to go there instead of the Tulan Border. Thank the gods for my excellent bow skills. + +Still it’s not going to be an easy assignment, but I’m probably not as worried about it as I might normally be since I finally got paid and managed to buy myself another lute! I’ve been practicing it again to help me keep my mind off things. I made arrangements for most of my pay to be sent to you. You should be receiving it at the end of each month, I hope it’ll help. + +Anyway, tomorrow is the big day, so I better get some early sleep tonight. I have no idea what to expect. + +Give my love to the rest of the family. + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>6 months pass… + +Six months of the most grueling physical training you’ve ever had the misfortune of dealing with! However you fared better than some of your fellow cadets. Guess all that farm living paid off. + +You’ve certainly improved what combat skills you had, but your marksmanship has improved greatly. You know that Drill Sergeant Kosser has been paying special attention to your abilities. You’re not sure if that’s a good thing of not. + +In any event you’re being told where your first assignment is going to be. Most of those in your group are being sent to Tulan border. Not the most pleasant assignment. The fighting is getting worse there. + +What started as a minor border dispute has turned into a series of battles with neither side making too much progress. Even before you joined the military you’d heard stories of the greedy king who runs the Tulan Kingdom. You heard from traveling merchants about how he allows a few demons to walk around in his lands! Utter madness in your opinion. The Zalan Empire might be a little strict on the rules and regulations, but better that than demons letting walking around, in your opinion they should all be killed on sight regardless on whether they’re obeying the “law” or not, they’re evil. + +You sit anxious on your bed in the barracks as name after name gets called off. Finally Kosser calls off your name, and you fully expect to get sent to the Tulan border. + +“I want to talk to you in private.” Is what you hear instead. + +This makes you even more nervous. What’s he going to do? Send you on? A mission to assassinate the Tulan King? + +After everyone else has gotten there assignments you follow Kosser back to his office. He sits down and speaks direct. + +“Alright farmboy, I’m sure you’ve noticed me watching your marksmanship skills. You’re one of the best ones that have come in here for awhile. You have a natural talent and you’ve only improved it through training. It would be a blessing to have someone like you up at the Tulan border. The gods know we could use anything to help break the stalemate there.” +“…but?” you ask hoping that there is one. +“But…your skills might be better served in a place that has a better mortality rate, yet still needs taking care of.” +“Where’s that sir?” +“Here.” Kosser points to a map to a nearby location. It’s the Retlad Kingdom. You can’t imagine what’s going on there, since as far as you know, you’re Zalan is at peace with them. +“Retlad? I thought we’re at peace with them?” +“We are…in fact rumors are saying we’ll probably incorporate them into the empire in the near future. I dunno how much you know about politics out there on the farm, but Retlad is basically a bankrupt kingdom. Their dumb ass royalty spent a shitload of their treasury on building ships in some vain attempt to find more land mass on this world. Hah! Doesn’t exist! We learned than centuries ago! Anyway now they don’t have enough to pay for a proper military and their kingdom is being overrun by hostile Quillar tribes. They want us to help. Begging us practically and we have, but it’s a pain in the ass. Quillars are fast and as their name suggests shoot multiple sharp quills at their enemies. I’ve seen them go through plate armor.” +“That doesn’t sound good.” +“No, it’s not good. The Retlad knight orders got decimated within two months of the first invasion wave. We’re taking a better approach. We need to have equally quick troops that can at least match the fire power. We’ve sent a couple of war wizards, but most of them are serving on the Tulan border. Gunpower weapons are a little too slow for this sort of thing, so we’re looking for people good with a bow. Quick enough to at least get a few shots off from a distance and run. Because hit and run tactics are what the Quillars excel at, so you’ll have to do likewise.” + +Kosser pauses his talking for a moment. You take this opportunity to interject a question. + +“And this assignment you say has a lower mortality rate?” +“Well, we haven’t sent as many people there yet, but so far we’ve made a little more progress there than at the Tulan border. But of course I won’t say it’s a safe assignment. Those Quillar bastards are vicious and merciless. Up to you farmboy. You’re getting a bonus here. You’re actually getting to choose your assignment. Not many that get out of boot camp get that privilege.” + +Some “privilege” +> Letters to home (Boot Camp) +Dear Mom, + +I’m glad I’ve finally had some free time to write to you. Would you believe that when I first joined up, the recruiter thought I didn’t know how? Sometimes these city folk got a lot of nerve making assumptions about people that grew up on farms, I’ve had to learn that first hand just by the folks I’m currently bunking with. They’re all mostly from the capitol or another Zalan city. I think I’m the only one here from a small village, so I’ve been saddled with the nickname “farmboy”. Ha ha. + +Despite this nick, I get along with most of the people here. The drill sergeant is mean, but luckily I haven’t had to suffer the full brunt of his wrath, which is more than can be said for a few of the people here. That’s never pretty. + +Boot camp is very tough. Even tougher than working on the farm. I’m just glad its half-way over. They took my lute away as soon as I entered. I really should’ve known better to take it with me…but I dunno I thought I’d be able to practice it on what few breaks I have. Oh well, I guess I wasn’t ever going to be that traveling bard anyway. Just foolish dreams I suppose. + +Anyway we’re going to start bow training tomorrow. I think I should do very well in that. + +Okay, I can’t think of anything else. I hope everything is going well on the farm. I know you’ve always kept an eye on all of us, but make sure that Mallack pays extra attention on the chicken coop this month. The Kobolds come out a lot around this time! + +Give my love to the rest of the family. + +Your son<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This is no way to live. + +Working on a barely profitable rundown farm with far too many family members to feed. It’s a damn good thing you’re an excellent hunter. However, lately there’s even been a shortage of game to thwart your efforts. + +You didn’t really want to be working on the farm your whole life in the first place, you wanted to see the world but when dad died, things got a lot harder for the family and you had to take over as “man” of the house and stay put. + +Something is going to have to change. + +While you’d like nothing more than to go through with your childhood dreams of becoming a traveling bard without any responsibility you don’t have that luxury. Hell, you barely have time to play your lute anymore in the small amount of free time you do have. You doubt if you’d even be good enough to make a living for just yourself doing it. + +But you need to get away, but what can you do that won’t allow you to completely abandon your mom and all your brothers and sisters? + +You suddenly think of the choice that many in your desperate position have thought of many times before. + +The army. + +Its not exactly ideal, but you be traveling and seeing the world so to speak. You’d also be making enough money that you could send to your family. Your own living expenses would be provided for by the army. + +Of course there’s all that fighting that usually goes along with it that you’re not to keen on. Not that you aren’t a stranger to battle as their have been the occasional bandits or kobold thieves that have attempted to steal from the farm in the past, but you prefer not to fight if possible, especially not up close. The bow has always been your weapon of choice. There’s also the matter of mass combat on a grand scale that usually accompanies army life. A lot different than chasing away some thieves in the chicken coop. + +As you’re thinking about this, you also realize that there is another option. There’s a small mercenary company passing through the area. They’ve been hanging out at the local tavern for a couple days. They don’t seem to be the noblest sort from what you can tell, but fortunately they seem to have kept their revelry confined to the tavern. Who knows how they act away from “civilization” though. + +Still, it’s something to consider. There probably is less attention to discipline and a little more relaxed on rules and regulations. You probably wouldn’t be fighting in some mass land war that governments are fond of waging. Mercenaries travel a lot and tend to make more, however they tend to get hired for a lot weirder jobs, usually ones that the employer doesn’t want people to know about or ones that nobody else seems to be able to handle. +> Sign up with the mercenaries +You’re not sure if the formal military life is for you. If you joined up you wouldn’t be able to readily leave. You figure if you don’t like life as a mercenary or it isn’t working out for you, you can leave freely. + +You explain your decision to join up with the mercenary company that’s currently passing through. Your revelation comes as a shock. Your smaller brothers and sisters don’t want you to go, your brother Mallack really doesn’t want you to leave since he’ll be next in line to take the brunt of the manual labor! + +Your mother is a little apprehensive about your decision. You half expect her to say no, but she understands that you’re doing this for the good of the family. She gives her blessing. + +Before you leave the next day with your packed belongings, your whole family comes to say goodbye to you. You almost hesitate to leave, wondering if it would actually be better for you to stay. Your mother approaches you. + +“You don’t have to do this you know. We’re doing just fine.” +“Yeah, but things would be easier if this family had more money.” +“Hah. Things are always easier with more money son, but you don’t need to go and get yourself killed for it.” +“Yeah, I know, but I’ve thought it through.” +“Very well, you’re old enough to make your own decisions and live your own life, though I’m glad to see that you still want to help the family as opposed to just leaving in the middle of the night.” +“I’ll visit and return with whatever my pay is whenever I can.” +“I know…okay, you best get going. I think the mercenary company was leaving today.” + +You make you way to the local tavern and catch them just as they’re getting ready leave. A lot of them look hung over. + +“Hey wait up…” you say in a slightly loud tone, causing one mean looking mercenary to snarl at you. +“Shut the fuck up yokel! Shit, I got a splitting headache and it hurts like a sonofabitch.” +“Sorry. Are you the leader of this company?” +“Leader of these dickheads? Naw. The Boss is actually visiting his family in the Zalan capital. We’re going to meet up with him now and I suggest you get the fuck outta our way and not waste anymore of our time!” +“But I want to join you guys.” + +The mercenary you were speaking to looks at you then looks at a few of his buddies and begins to laugh louder than your voice which previously annoyed him. + +“HAHAHA HAHAHA! Y’hear that fellas? This yokel wants to join us! Thanks a lot, I needed a good laugh, now go fuck your pigs or whatever it is you farm types do.” +“But I’m serious…” +“Serious? Farmboy, this is a man’s job and not for the fuckin’ weak. You ever even use a damn weapon?” +“Yeah! I got this bow and this sword! I’m a really good shot!” + +The mercenary still looks unimpressed. + +“Uh huh, yeah well you ever kill anyone, hell you ever kill ANYTHING? And I’m not talkin’ about any of your livestock you might’ve slaughtered. I mean something sentient.” +“Well yeah, I’ve killed Kobolds that were trying to steal chickens from the…” + +The mercenaries begin to laugh again. + +“Oh shit, you are priceless boy! My sister can kill fuckin’ Kobolds and her only talent is whoring.” +“Haha got that one right, Dimitri.” Another one of the mercenaries agrees. + +Suddenly the laughing stops. + +“What the fuck did you just say Fermeli?” +“Uh, I was just agreeing with you…c’mon don’t take it like that! I mean you said…” +“Ain’t about what I said, it’s about what YOU said! You called my fucking sister a whore! You ain’t getting’ away with that shit.” + +Dimitri draws his sword and stomps over to Fermeli who is trying to get one of his buddies to help him, but everyone else is backing away from the fight. Dimitri takes advantage of Fermeli’s state of panic and slashes him good with his sword. + +Fermeli cries out in pain and begs for forgiveness. Dimitri looks like he’s going to finish him off, but then turns to you. + +“You want to join hayseed? Kill this piece of shit then.” +“Huh? I mean…” you utter in confusion. +“Did I stutter pig farmer? Kill this… AARGH FUCK!” + +Fermeli has now taken advantage of Dimitri by shoving a dagger into his leg and scrambling to get up + +“Yeah! Take that! How’s that feel?” Fermeli taunts and draws his own sword in an attempt to kill Dimitri + +At this point you unwisely step into the middle of this fight. + +“Hey hold on, the pair of you are even now…” +“Fuck off pig farmer! You want some of this now? Yeah, let’s see how much of a killer you are!” Fermeli says who doesn’t look frightened of you at all and heads in your direction. + +“Hey wait I don’t wanna…” + +You barely dodge his sword swipe to your head. You roll out of the way and quickly grab an arrow and shoot it at Fermeli with your bow, hitting him square in the neck. Some blood spurts out and a surprised look on his face is displayed and then he falls dead. You’ve killed him. You’ve never killed anything before that wasn’t a Kobold or livestock. You feel weird. + +In the meantime Dimitri gets up and pulls the dagger out of his leg and looks over at Formeli’s body. + +“Heh, maybe you are a killer after all pig farmer. Well it seems we got an opening now. Take whatever he had as your own. You killed him, you earned it. Welcome to the Chimera Mercenary Company!” + +While you MAY be in, you’re not necessarily sure if you want in. This may be a bit too much for you. +> Join anyway +You know this isn’t going to be easy and you’re going to have to be tough, but you remember that you’re doing this for your family. You quickly search Formeli’s body, which didn’t have that much to begin with. + +“Heh, he always was a broke bastard. Spent all his money on gambling, I’ll miss taking his money that’s for sure. Alright then, you’ll probably be wantin’ to take that sword of his since it looks in way better condition than your rusted hunk of iron. Your bow seems to do the job just fine though. His armor too, and hurry up, we gotta meet the Boss! He’s got another job for us no doubt.” + +As you’re stripping off some of the armor, Dimitri notices something on your back. + +“What…what the hell is that boy? Is that a fuckin’ lute? Haw haw! What the fuck are you doin’ with a damn lute? You think that you’re some sort of bard or something? We ain’t got need for such things boy! Get rid of it!” +“No, it’s mine.” You defiantly say. +You wonder if this show of “courage” has gotten you into a whole mess of trouble that you don’t want, but fortunately it doesn’t. + +“Heh, he kills one shithead and now he thinks he’s a tough guy! Alright pig farmer keep your sissy lute. But its just more weight for you to carry and you better not be falling behind! Come on men let’s go, the Boss is waiting for us. You too lute boy!” Dimitri exclaims and limps off. You briefly thought about telling him that he better keep up with his wounded leg and all, but you know when to stop. + +And so your mercenary life begins. + +A year passes… + +You’re currently back in the Zalan Empire on a break in between missions. While most of your “buddies” are drinking up their pay and spending it on whores you take this opportunity to visit your family and give them your payment and spoils of battle as usual. + +You think about how much you’ve traveled and experienced. Not all of it good, but then killing is never pretty. Some of the jobs are very straight forward: “There are some orc barbarians on the borders that have been pillaging our lands, kill them.” And you don’t have a problem with it. Other missions start falling into the “gray” area. + +Your last job involved some Azi Republic senator hiring the company to take out some secessionists that wanted to form their own country. It wasn’t clean and it definitely wasn’t fun. The secessionists actually had a reasonable complaint about leaving the Republic, saying that it was corrupt and that their representatives didn’t care about them. But being a mercenary means you don’t take sides for moral or ideological reasons, you do it for money. + +It’s not just that though, some of the things that have been done…well you can’t say you’re too proud of it. Granted, you’ve never actively engaged in some of the less moral and outright criminal things that your mercenary comrades have, but you certainly know about them and it almost makes you feel like you’re guilty of it as well. + +As for how you cope with some of this stuff, you tend to keep to yourself and play your lute which has oddly made you a little more accepted. Seems there are more than a few music lovers in the company. Even the Captain doesn’t mind you indulging in your little hobby. The Captain is a huge man who you know gets a pleasure from killing and mayhem. He’s spent a lifetime doing it. In fact you have a hard time believing he even has a family that he goes to visit. Who knows though? Perhaps he is different with them. + +(You’ve been working for the Chimera Company for a year and you still don’t know what the hell his real name is, mainly because everyone only seems to address him as “The Boss” or “Chief” or in a more formal tone “Captain”) + +You spend the time with your family and tell them of some of the things you’ve seen and exciting places you’ve been to, of course never going into too much detail about the darker side of things. Your brothers and sisters enjoy the tales as usual. Your Mom senses that there is probably more to them, but she doesn’t ask too many questions. She does always asks if you’re okay and says that you don’t have to keep doing it, but you always reply that you’re fine and that you’re just a little tired that’s all. + +When your time is done you say goodbye to them and meet with the rest of your company at the Zalan capital this time. Its odd, but things seem to be even more chaotic than usual around here. People are rushing around and an air of concern seems to be pervading the city. + +The guards are telling people to calm down our there will be martial law and you hear something in passing about an attack on a city. You don’t really listen because you’re in a hurry to meet up with your company which you find mostly hanging out in a tavern as usual. + +Dimitri sees you and speaks. + +“Ah, it’s our own fuckin’ bard ! How’s my favorite string plucker? (Hic!) You have trouble getting into the city? Heard the guards have been cracking down on security.” +“No, but what’s going on? The city seems to be in a state of panic.” +“Fuck yeah it is! What you didn’t hear?” +“No. What happened?” +“Fuckin’ undead happened my pig farming friend! A whole shitload of them took over the the city of Nuro! Can you believe it? Fuckin’ Nuro! That place was supposed to be unconquerable! Heh! (Burp!)” Dimitri says without the slightest bit of worry. +“UNDEAD?! What the fuck? Nuro!? How?!” +“Fuck if I know, guess some rogue wizards got hooked up in that necromancy shit hardcore. Musta been some demonologists there too since we heard reports of demons too. Not the supposedly civilized type either, they’re the rip off your head and shit down your neck kind.” +“…there’s fuckin’ rogue demons in Nuro too?” +“Of course not, they all escaped and are now running around in the countryside, heard they’re heading for the Tulan Kingdom.” Dimitri says taking another drink. + +You’re having a hard time digesting all this yet the rest of your comrades are still drinking and partying like nothing is wrong. Your Dad had once told you tales of a being called the Great Lich Lord that existed many centuries ago who nearly killed the world. Scared the hell out of you then and it doesn’t make you feel too good now. + +“Isn’t this concerning to you?” +“What? Shit no! Just means more work for us and that also means more loot! Ha ha! You could get more loot to buy a new lute! Ha ha ha! (Hic!)” +“But this is the fuckin’ undead! I mean…” +“So? Stop bein a pussy! I’ve fought some undead before, when I was lootin’ a dwarven tomb. You just chop their heads off like everything else, shit ain’t that hard. They just tend to smell worse…well maybe not worse than trolls. Anyway I’m sure the fucking governments will take care of this shit as quick as possible, you know how politicians don’t like dead taxpayers, in the meantime we need to take advantage now while the conflict is hot!” + +No sooner has Dimitri said this little bit of wisdom, when the Boss steps in the doorway. He’s as nasty looking as always, but this time he looks even moreso than usual. + +“Alright you useless sacks of goblin shit. We got a new job. This one just came across rather unexpectedly. Ran into a Dwarven representative and we’re now in the employ of a Dwarven Clan, near the southern Tulan Borders. With the occurrence of this Nuro incident, they’re expecting some shit to spill over into their lands and they want some extra help. This is pretty surprising since Dwarves aren’t known to pay for mercenaries, let alone the likes of us.” The Boss tell you all. +“The Tulan Border? Oh fuck that place is a meat grinder! There’s no profit to be had anywhere near there!” Cal pipes up. +“Well you can just pick up your panties and get your pansy ass back home and stay there then! The dwarves are paying well and that’s the job. Take it or get the fuck outta my company!” +“Excuse me Captain, but weren’t there reports of demons running through that area?” you ask. +“Yeah so? That’s why we’re going over there most likely, but be fucking prepared for any damn thing. Maybe even undead…who knows if my…if those necromancer bastards started spreading their plague yet. We leave tomorrow.” + +You think on this fucked up situation and seriously reconsidering your career choice. +> Leave the mercenary company +Nope, you’re not doing this. This is suicide in your opinion. You have no idea what to expect and it sound a lot more dangerous than anything you’ve ever faced. + +Instead of leaving with them the next day, you go back home. You don’t worry about anyone coming after you, but you know you won’t be welcomed back into the company again, and you wouldn’t want to anyway. + +When you get back home, your family and mom in particular ask what happened, you explain it and say you don’t want any part of that life. You apologize that you couldn’t go through with it, but your mom looks more relieved than anything. + +“Well son, I’m just as glad you didn’t go get yourself killed over there anyway. You’ll be helping us out plenty just by working on the farm like always.” + +You’re glad to hear that. Over the next couple days you fall back into routine again. You still wonder about the future though and you briefly consider the army plan again, but given your short lived experience with mercenary “life” you don’t think you’re cut out with battle on a regular basis. Plus the Zalan Empire is currently on heightened alert and battle ready status with this Nuro Incident and all. + +You resign yourself to the farm life. You play your lute to yourself (and family) when you have the time to do so. It’s a simple life. + +Two years pass and things have gotten worse. The Necromancer Lord (as he’s become to be known) has expanded, even to the point of taking over the Brot Kingdom. The Tulan Kingdom has been totally conquered by a demon army. A Grand Alliance of nations has been formed, but so far they don’t seem to be making much progress. + +Meanwhile life on the farm is a little harder. Your youngest sister Makana becomes gravely ill during the winter months, but there’s not enough money to pay for a healer and most of the clerics have been summoned to battle with the undead or demon hordes. Sadly she dies making the overall mood of the farm a little more depressing. You don’t even play anymore, your enthusiasm for music died along with the grim realities setting in. + +Another three years pass and things are down right miserable. War is everywhere. The Demons have been taken care of, (You heard your former mercenary captain died in battle with their leader Velzix) but the undead are stronger than ever. Reports even speak of the Necromancer Lord becoming The Great Lich Lord “reborn”. + +To make things worse, the Zalan Empire has been becoming increasingly tyrannical. In order to help with the war effort they’ve started bringing back the draft and the talk of ceasing private property to be used for the good of the government. While they say owners will be able to live and still work on their lands and businesses, it will be owned by the Empire. + +You know it’s only a matter of time when you get a knock on the door by Zalan army troops coming to take you and your brother Mallack away to the army and your family’s farm. + +Another two year pass…. + +You’re on the eve of battle in a land known as the Garwold Confederacy although it’s steadily becoming a giant graveyard now. The undead hordes have been sweeping relentlessly across the entire landscape. Your own company has had to fall back several times. Morale is low. Not that yours was high to begin with. You don’t even know how you’ve survived this long. While you had some battle experience during your time with the mercenary company, it still hasn’t prepared you for the horrors you’ve seen. The undead…you’ll never get used to fighting such emotionless creatures that are the embodiment of death and all that’s unnatural. + +You briefly wonder if your brother Mallack is alright where he’s stationed, but it hardly matters at this point. + +Battle comes as it always does and you are not so lucky this time. Horrible and powerful creatures known as Blood Specters and Death Knights utterly destroy your side. + +You fall to undead blades and chilling touches only rise up and join them in their goal of global genocide.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know this isn’t going to be easy and you’re going to have to be tough, but you remember that you’re doing this for your family. You quickly search Formeli’s body, which didn’t have that much to begin with. + +“Heh, he always was a broke bastard. Spent all his money on gambling, I’ll miss taking his money that’s for sure. Alright then, you’ll probably be wantin’ to take that sword of his since it looks in way better condition than your rusted hunk of iron. Your bow seems to do the job just fine though. His armor too, and hurry up, we gotta meet the Boss! He’s got another job for us no doubt.” + +As you’re stripping off some of the armor, Dimitri notices something on your back. + +“What…what the hell is that boy? Is that a fuckin’ lute? Haw haw! What the fuck are you doin’ with a damn lute? You think that you’re some sort of bard or something? We ain’t got need for such things boy! Get rid of it!” +“No, it’s mine.” You defiantly say. +You wonder if this show of “courage” has gotten you into a whole mess of trouble that you don’t want, but fortunately it doesn’t. + +“Heh, he kills one shithead and now he thinks he’s a tough guy! Alright pig farmer keep your sissy lute. But its just more weight for you to carry and you better not be falling behind! Come on men let’s go, the Boss is waiting for us. You too lute boy!” Dimitri exclaims and limps off. You briefly thought about telling him that he better keep up with his wounded leg and all, but you know when to stop. + +And so your mercenary life begins. + +A year passes… + +You’re currently back in the Zalan Empire on a break in between missions. While most of your “buddies” are drinking up their pay and spending it on whores you take this opportunity to visit your family and give them your payment and spoils of battle as usual. + +You think about how much you’ve traveled and experienced. Not all of it good, but then killing is never pretty. Some of the jobs are very straight forward: “There are some orc barbarians on the borders that have been pillaging our lands, kill them.” And you don’t have a problem with it. Other missions start falling into the “gray” area. + +Your last job involved some Azi Republic senator hiring the company to take out some secessionists that wanted to form their own country. It wasn’t clean and it definitely wasn’t fun. The secessionists actually had a reasonable complaint about leaving the Republic, saying that it was corrupt and that their representatives didn’t care about them. But being a mercenary means you don’t take sides for moral or ideological reasons, you do it for money. + +It’s not just that though, some of the things that have been done…well you can’t say you’re too proud of it. Granted, you’ve never actively engaged in some of the less moral and outright criminal things that your mercenary comrades have, but you certainly know about them and it almost makes you feel like you’re guilty of it as well. + +As for how you cope with some of this stuff, you tend to keep to yourself and play your lute which has oddly made you a little more accepted. Seems there are more than a few music lovers in the company. Even the Captain doesn’t mind you indulging in your little hobby. The Captain is a huge man who you know gets a pleasure from killing and mayhem. He’s spent a lifetime doing it. In fact you have a hard time believing he even has a family that he goes to visit. Who knows though? Perhaps he is different with them. + +(You’ve been working for the Chimera Company for a year and you still don’t know what the hell his real name is, mainly because everyone only seems to address him as “The Boss” or “Chief” or in a more formal tone “Captain”) + +You spend the time with your family and tell them of some of the things you’ve seen and exciting places you’ve been to, of course never going into too much detail about the darker side of things. Your brothers and sisters enjoy the tales as usual. Your Mom senses that there is probably more to them, but she doesn’t ask too many questions. She does always asks if you’re okay and says that you don’t have to keep doing it, but you always reply that you’re fine and that you’re just a little tired that’s all. + +When your time is done you say goodbye to them and meet with the rest of your company at the Zalan capital this time. Its odd, but things seem to be even more chaotic than usual around here. People are rushing around and an air of concern seems to be pervading the city. + +The guards are telling people to calm down our there will be martial law and you hear something in passing about an attack on a city. You don’t really listen because you’re in a hurry to meet up with your company which you find mostly hanging out in a tavern as usual. + +Dimitri sees you and speaks. + +“Ah, it’s our own fuckin’ bard ! How’s my favorite string plucker? (Hic!) You have trouble getting into the city? Heard the guards have been cracking down on security.” +“No, but what’s going on? The city seems to be in a state of panic.” +“Fuck yeah it is! What you didn’t hear?” +“No. What happened?” +“Fuckin’ undead happened my pig farming friend! A whole shitload of them took over the the city of Nuro! Can you believe it? Fuckin’ Nuro! That place was supposed to be unconquerable! Heh! (Burp!)” Dimitri says without the slightest bit of worry. +“UNDEAD?! What the fuck? Nuro!? How?!” +“Fuck if I know, guess some rogue wizards got hooked up in that necromancy shit hardcore. Musta been some demonologists there too since we heard reports of demons too. Not the supposedly civilized type either, they’re the rip off your head and shit down your neck kind.” +“…there’s fuckin’ rogue demons in Nuro too?” +“Of course not, they all escaped and are now running around in the countryside, heard they’re heading for the Tulan Kingdom.” Dimitri says taking another drink. + +You’re having a hard time digesting all this yet the rest of your comrades are still drinking and partying like nothing is wrong. Your Dad had once told you tales of a being called the Great Lich Lord that existed many centuries ago who nearly killed the world. Scared the hell out of you then and it doesn’t make you feel too good now. + +“Isn’t this concerning to you?” +“What? Shit no! Just means more work for us and that also means more loot! Ha ha! You could get more loot to buy a new lute! Ha ha ha! (Hic!)” +“But this is the fuckin’ undead! I mean…” +“So? Stop bein a pussy! I’ve fought some undead before, when I was lootin’ a dwarven tomb. You just chop their heads off like everything else, shit ain’t that hard. They just tend to smell worse…well maybe not worse than trolls. Anyway I’m sure the fucking governments will take care of this shit as quick as possible, you know how politicians don’t like dead taxpayers, in the meantime we need to take advantage now while the conflict is hot!” + +No sooner has Dimitri said this little bit of wisdom, when the Boss steps in the doorway. He’s as nasty looking as always, but this time he looks even moreso than usual. + +“Alright you useless sacks of goblin shit. We got a new job. This one just came across rather unexpectedly. Ran into a Dwarven representative and we’re now in the employ of a Dwarven Clan, near the southern Tulan Borders. With the occurrence of this Nuro incident, they’re expecting some shit to spill over into their lands and they want some extra help. This is pretty surprising since Dwarves aren’t known to pay for mercenaries, let alone the likes of us.” The Boss tell you all. +“The Tulan Border? Oh fuck that place is a meat grinder! There’s no profit to be had anywhere near there!” Cal pipes up. +“Well you can just pick up your panties and get your pansy ass back home and stay there then! The dwarves are paying well and that’s the job. Take it or get the fuck outta my company!” +“Excuse me Captain, but weren’t there reports of demons running through that area?” you ask. +“Yeah so? That’s why we’re going over there most likely, but be fucking prepared for any damn thing. Maybe even undead…who knows if my…if those necromancer bastards started spreading their plague yet. We leave tomorrow.” + +You think on this fucked up situation and seriously reconsidering your career choice. +> Stick with it +You’re in this now and you can’t stop just because it’s looking tough. You got your family to think about. You’re staying. + +However you do, do something slightly out of character, you spend what little money you have on a whore for the night, mainly because you’re a lot less sure if you’re going to come back from this mission. + +The next day you’re on the job. The march to the dwarven lands is mostly uneventful, though the fighting between the Zalan Empire and the Tulan Kingdom is still going on their borders which even skirting around, still manages to find your company. The Boss takes advantage of straggling Tulan soldiers that have fled battle. The butchery isn’t uncommon, after all, nobody will know and the Zalan Empire will just be blamed anyway. + +Arrival in the Dwarven lands is met with caution, the Dwarves obviously know of the Chimera Company’s reputation and a small group of them motion the Boss to just talk to him directly. A deal seems to be made and the Dwarves leave to go back to their underground home. + +The Captain now addresses all of you. + +“Alright, apparently there HAVE been demons running all up and down and through the area. The Dwarves are preparing defenses in case they try to invade underground; apparently they consider their underground city takes precedence so their main force is there. However they still have plenty of mines above ground and not nearly enough dwarves to defend them all. Now its been said the demons have been heading toward the Tulan Kingdom, but a lot of them still have been fucking around here and generally wrecking shit for the fun of it. Collapsing even the sturdy mines of the dwarves on their heads seems to be amusing to them. So our goal is to make things bothersome enough for them that they’ll leave the dwarves alone and go elsewhere.” + +The Captain spits on the ground before continuing. + +“We’re going to split up for this assignment and take different mines in the area. Watch your fucking ass. I don’t think any of you eunuchs have fought any demons before, but I have and they’re utterly fucking ruthless. Forget all that shit about some of them being civilized. They’re about as civilized as damn Quillar, but a lot more intelligent. The chaos that is in their hearts is always there and these ones are the complete embodiment of it. And for fuck’s sake DON’T stay near any explosives! The dwarves are always using shit like that in their mines and demons have a tendency to have fire throwing abilities. It’s probably the reason for all the easy mine collapses.” + +The Captain takes out a map. + +“One more thing. While I know the common thing to do on our assignments is to take advantage of things. We need to play this one completely fucking straight! Do NOT fucking do anything that’s going to piss off the dwarves! If you do, we don’t get paid. We don’t get paid. I’m going to get pissed, because we’re getting a lot for this one. And assuming the dwarves don’t kill you, I certainly fucking will. Alright now I’m going to assign you according to this map.” + +You and a few others (Including Dimitri) are assigned to the Karzac Mines where you make your way to after some climbing which fortunately isn’t too far off ground level. The dwarves there regard you with suspicion immediately. + +“Oh great they’re here. Alright, let’s set the ground rules. I’m head miner Morri and I’m in charge of this place! Don’t even think about trying to steal some loose bars of silver that you might find lying around. You do it, and your skull meets an axe or mining pick! Got me?” +“Stand up when you speak to me.” Dimitri laughs. +“Yeah, make yer jokes human, we’ll see if the demons will appreciate that humor when you’re meeting them face to face.” +“Demon, pah! Just one more thing for me to kill, people make a big deal about them. I’ve seen how they fall in line and become law abiding citizens just like anyone else when beaten down.” +“Yeah and those same civilized ones will kill you when they get the chance. Didn’t you hear the Captain?” you say. +“Yeah well he’s got a tendency to be over dramatic; he probably picked that up from that fine ass elven bitch he’s married to. Besides who DOESN’T try to kill you when they get the chance? They aren’t anything special. Their race just has a tendency to have assholiness come natural to them.” + +Morri interrupts the pair of you. + +“Hey if you two morons are finished, I’m about to tell you the fun part of this job. There are demons already in this mine.” +“What?!” +“Oh yeah, bunch of those fuckers as we speak. Seems we got the fortune of one sneaking in here and decided to have her spawn in the deep reaches of this mine. The only good thing is these types don’t seem to be interested in collapsing the mine, however they’re trying to turn this place into some sort of fucking demon hive or something. We’ve been trying to eliminate them, but of course it’s slow going. We need to get them before they start breeding more though. So we’re splitting up…” +“Here we go again…” Dimitri says. + +Morri assigns at least a few dwarves with each mercenary. You, Morri and Dimitri make up the last one. + +The demon hunting in the mines is actually a very “mundane” job. They certainly are horrible looking creatures and very vicious, but after the first few times, you get used to it. These particular demons have an insect like appearance so maybe that’s why these behave the way they do. They aren’t very tough in the scheme of things, but like Morri said there do seem to be a lot. You can’t use your bow like you want to either due to the cramped mine conditions. + +Demons aren’t really the problem though, the problem is Dimitri. + +After one of the harder battles, Morri is attempting to catch his breath. Dimitri notices the very large silver deposit you’re next to and the silver that’s just there for the taking. He quietly whispers to you that you and he should waylay Morri and take some of the silver. Leave his body to be munched on by a wandering demon. Who’s going to know? + +You’re not really for this plan and you say no, but Dimitri begins to argue and Morri notices the both of you. + +“I’m not doing it! The Captain said…” you exclaim. +“Fuckin’ pussy!” Dimitri says pushing you. +“Hey hey hey! Not doing what? What are you two on abo…” + +Dimitri takes the opportunity of distraction and hits Morri in the face with silver bar that he lifted off the ground earlier. + +“ Ugh! Bastard dog you’ll pay for this treachery!” Morri utters falling to the ground. +“Come on, this is your last chance to be a man and help me pig farmer!” Dimitri says as he goes to finish off Morri. +> Help Dimitri +You hate yourself for this, but you feel you don’t have much choice, if Morri lives he’ll certainly tell everyone and then you won’t get paid which will probably result in your death by the hands of the Boss. You raise your own weapon and help kill Morri. He doesn’t die easy, but Dimitri finishes him off before he can put up any sort of meaningful defense. + +Breathing hard and smiling at you with blood on his face, Dimitri laughs a bit. + +“Heh heh, knew you’d see the light, lute boy! Now come on, let’s throw his body in that left passage. I think I heard some of those demon roaches chittering down that way. Let’s just make sure we’re not around eh? We got a lot of silver to load up on!” + +You don’t take any of the silver actually, you’re still worrying and not feeling right about this whole situation, of course that just means more for Dimitri. + +You don’t even think this half assed plan of Dimitri’s is going to work. You and Dimitri are going to look mighty suspicious meeting up with the other dwarves without Morri, and trying to conceal a shitload of silver, though Dimitri claims everything will be fine. + +Everything goes less fine when you start to realize that Morri was the one who was leading you through this mine maze. Neither you or Dimitri were paying attention to the directions mainly because you were on the look out for demon attacks and fighting them off. + +Eventually you’re attacked by more of the demons as you proceed to get lost. You and Dimitri get into an argument and begin to blame each other (Though it really is his fault) You both get angry and come to blows, you however get the advantage, not being weighed down by silver. You leave his body for the demons. + +You however don’t get too much further. The demons seem to be coming out in more force and you’re wounded many times. You get scared and confused and you know you’re a dead man when you see Morri’s body being eaten by several of demons. You’ve gone in a complete circle and now you’re hearing that demon chittering from everywhere. + +A valiant effort is made by you, but you can’t fight them all. Eventually you are overwhelmed and eaten.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’re in this now and you can’t stop just because it’s looking tough. You got your family to think about. You’re staying. + +However you do, do something slightly out of character, you spend what little money you have on a whore for the night, mainly because you’re a lot less sure if you’re going to come back from this mission. + +The next day you’re on the job. The march to the dwarven lands is mostly uneventful, though the fighting between the Zalan Empire and the Tulan Kingdom is still going on their borders which even skirting around, still manages to find your company. The Boss takes advantage of straggling Tulan soldiers that have fled battle. The butchery isn’t uncommon, after all, nobody will know and the Zalan Empire will just be blamed anyway. + +Arrival in the Dwarven lands is met with caution, the Dwarves obviously know of the Chimera Company’s reputation and a small group of them motion the Boss to just talk to him directly. A deal seems to be made and the Dwarves leave to go back to their underground home. + +The Captain now addresses all of you. + +“Alright, apparently there HAVE been demons running all up and down and through the area. The Dwarves are preparing defenses in case they try to invade underground; apparently they consider their underground city takes precedence so their main force is there. However they still have plenty of mines above ground and not nearly enough dwarves to defend them all. Now its been said the demons have been heading toward the Tulan Kingdom, but a lot of them still have been fucking around here and generally wrecking shit for the fun of it. Collapsing even the sturdy mines of the dwarves on their heads seems to be amusing to them. So our goal is to make things bothersome enough for them that they’ll leave the dwarves alone and go elsewhere.” + +The Captain spits on the ground before continuing. + +“We’re going to split up for this assignment and take different mines in the area. Watch your fucking ass. I don’t think any of you eunuchs have fought any demons before, but I have and they’re utterly fucking ruthless. Forget all that shit about some of them being civilized. They’re about as civilized as damn Quillar, but a lot more intelligent. The chaos that is in their hearts is always there and these ones are the complete embodiment of it. And for fuck’s sake DON’T stay near any explosives! The dwarves are always using shit like that in their mines and demons have a tendency to have fire throwing abilities. It’s probably the reason for all the easy mine collapses.” + +The Captain takes out a map. + +“One more thing. While I know the common thing to do on our assignments is to take advantage of things. We need to play this one completely fucking straight! Do NOT fucking do anything that’s going to piss off the dwarves! If you do, we don’t get paid. We don’t get paid. I’m going to get pissed, because we’re getting a lot for this one. And assuming the dwarves don’t kill you, I certainly fucking will. Alright now I’m going to assign you according to this map.” + +You and a few others (Including Dimitri) are assigned to the Karzac Mines where you make your way to after some climbing which fortunately isn’t too far off ground level. The dwarves there regard you with suspicion immediately. + +“Oh great they’re here. Alright, let’s set the ground rules. I’m head miner Morri and I’m in charge of this place! Don’t even think about trying to steal some loose bars of silver that you might find lying around. You do it, and your skull meets an axe or mining pick! Got me?” +“Stand up when you speak to me.” Dimitri laughs. +“Yeah, make yer jokes human, we’ll see if the demons will appreciate that humor when you’re meeting them face to face.” +“Demon, pah! Just one more thing for me to kill, people make a big deal about them. I’ve seen how they fall in line and become law abiding citizens just like anyone else when beaten down.” +“Yeah and those same civilized ones will kill you when they get the chance. Didn’t you hear the Captain?” you say. +“Yeah well he’s got a tendency to be over dramatic; he probably picked that up from that fine ass elven bitch he’s married to. Besides who DOESN’T try to kill you when they get the chance? They aren’t anything special. Their race just has a tendency to have assholiness come natural to them.” + +Morri interrupts the pair of you. + +“Hey if you two morons are finished, I’m about to tell you the fun part of this job. There are demons already in this mine.” +“What?!” +“Oh yeah, bunch of those fuckers as we speak. Seems we got the fortune of one sneaking in here and decided to have her spawn in the deep reaches of this mine. The only good thing is these types don’t seem to be interested in collapsing the mine, however they’re trying to turn this place into some sort of fucking demon hive or something. We’ve been trying to eliminate them, but of course it’s slow going. We need to get them before they start breeding more though. So we’re splitting up…” +“Here we go again…” Dimitri says. + +Morri assigns at least a few dwarves with each mercenary. You, Morri and Dimitri make up the last one. + +The demon hunting in the mines is actually a very “mundane” job. They certainly are horrible looking creatures and very vicious, but after the first few times, you get used to it. These particular demons have an insect like appearance so maybe that’s why these behave the way they do. They aren’t very tough in the scheme of things, but like Morri said there do seem to be a lot. You can’t use your bow like you want to either due to the cramped mine conditions. + +Demons aren’t really the problem though, the problem is Dimitri. + +After one of the harder battles, Morri is attempting to catch his breath. Dimitri notices the very large silver deposit you’re next to and the silver that’s just there for the taking. He quietly whispers to you that you and he should waylay Morri and take some of the silver. Leave his body to be munched on by a wandering demon. Who’s going to know? + +You’re not really for this plan and you say no, but Dimitri begins to argue and Morri notices the both of you. + +“I’m not doing it! The Captain said…” you exclaim. +“Fuckin’ pussy!” Dimitri says pushing you. +“Hey hey hey! Not doing what? What are you two on abo…” + +Dimitri takes the opportunity of distraction and hits Morri in the face with silver bar that he lifted off the ground earlier. + +“ Ugh! Bastard dog you’ll pay for this treachery!” Morri utters falling to the ground. +“Come on, this is your last chance to be a man and help me pig farmer!” Dimitri says as he goes to finish off Morri. +> Help Morri +You’ve had enough. You’re not going to help OR stand by for another immoral act performed by your “co-workers”. It’s bad enough that it goes on, but that doesn’t mean you need to let it, if you can do something about it. + +You run Dimitri through the back with your sword, he yells out in pain, but still manages to swing his armored fist to strike you in the face. You fall to the ground. + +“Fuck…lute boy…goin…down…pig fucker…” he wheezes as he attempts to step towards you only to fall to his knees. At this point Morri has recovered and cleaves Dimitri’s skull in with his axe. + +“Bastard.” Morri then looks at you. “Heh, I guess you must be one of the few with a conscious in the company eh?” +“I guess so.” You reply. +“Or perhaps you knew it would be better if I lived so you could find your way out this maze?” +“…Actually I hadn’t even thought about that. I just…just couldn’t let him kill and rob you like that. Seen it too many times.” +“That a fact? Well tell me son, why the hell are you hooked up with these bunch for then?” +“Money to help the family…besides it’s not that bad.” +“Okay, if you say so. However, this little incident is going to cost your company. We warned your captain that if any evidence of treachery occurred, we weren’t paying him shit and this deal was off!” +“But can’t we just keep this secret? I mean…” +“Secret? Fuck no! Look, you’re not a bad person, but you’re hanging out with bad people. The only reason why we hired you in the first place is because you ARE effective and you’re about the only mercenary company insane enough to do a job like this. But a deal’s a deal. You captain apparently doesn’t have control over his men like he thinks, because I’m sure he warned you all.” +“Yeah, but everyone will probably blame me and my life will be in danger!” +“…well…I’m sorry about that, but that’s the price you pay for the company you keep…look I’ll tell you what, because you helped me, I’ll take you back to the entrance and you can leave. Should at least give you a head start. Hell, maybe I’ll even tell them you died before this happened. You could then just hide out and stay out of sight without even anyone looking for you.” + +Not knowing what to say next you just agree and ponder your possible future. + +The way back to the entrance is uneventful as far as demon attacks are concerned. You don’t know what you’re going to do. You’ll have to go on the run or at least relocate regardless of what Morri tells everyone. And if he mentions the truth, then your family may well be in danger. You imagine that if the Boss couldn’t get to you, he may very well take it out on your family. + +You feel sick and upset. You wish you hadn’t chosen this path. All you ever really wanted to do was play your lute, not fight demons or anything else really. + +You follow behind Morri in a daze. You’re surprised that he doesn’t insist that you walk in front of him, but then that’s probably because he trusts that you’re not a murderer. You also realize you recognize this part of the mine and could probably find your way back from here… + +You shake your head and take a deep breath. + +“Hey Morri.” +“Wha…glagh! + +An arrow goes right through Morri’s mouth and out the other side of his head. He gurgles obscenities while trying to raise his axe towards you. Another arrow goes through his eye. He ceases his struggle. + +While you solved the problem of Morri telling anyone, now you have to cover your own tracks, then you hear a sound you never thought you’d be glad to hear. The chittering of those insect demons and a bunch of them are coming right behind you. + +You pull the arrows out and run as quickly as you can to the entrance leaving the demons to feed upon Morri’s body. The thought crosses your mind to just leave anyway. Maybe they’d think all three of you got eaten. However, you run into another group during your dash to the mine entrance. + +“Where the hell are you running off to?” a mercenary asks. It’s Cal. You come up with a lie quick. + +“(pant) Shit! We got fucking ambushed! (pant) Barely fucking escaped! (pant) Dimitri and Morri are dead! Probably eaten! And the rest of those demon fuckers are heading this way!” +“What?! You cowardly fucker, you just let Morri die?” one the dwarves says angrily. +“It wasn’t my idea! I tried to help him and Dimitri, but they just came in force, I don’t even know how I escaped!” + +Your story is a little suspicious, but thanks to the demons, you’re covered. They didn’t leave much for the dwarves to find. However, you’re not looked favorably on by the rest of the dwarves for the rest of the mission. Your fellow mercenaries don’t really care one way or another. It’s part of the job and Dimitri wasn’t well liked so they could care less if he died or lived. + +You on the other hand are still not feeling so great about yourself. The longer you’re part of this company the more you’re starting to think or be more like them. You hate it and you’ll be glad when this job is over. + +A few months pass and the contract is over. The “problem” isn’t completely gone, in fact there’s reports of some undead wandering in the area now, but the Dwarves are growing more weary of your presence, hand over your payment and tell you to leave. They say they can handle anything else themselves. + +It’s quite a lot this time. Best job you’ve had. Upon your return to the Zalan Empire you buy yourself a new lute. It’s your “reward”. The rest of it goes to your family who of course are eager to hear about your tales as usual. You don’t tell them that many this time. You just try to take your mind off your “job” by asking them more questions this time around. When you’re alone you play your new lute, trying to emulate a couple of the songs you overheard the Dwarves engage in when you were there. You never knew they were musically inclined; it’s a shame you had to kill one to protect your future. You’re still debating on whether or not to give up the mercenary life, but you see how much it’s helping the family out, so you decide to stay and put up with it. + +After your “break is over” you go back to the job as usual. + +Three years pass… + +Four years have passed since the “Nuro Incident” and things have gotten much worse in the world. The Necromancer Lord conquered the Brot Kingdom, A demon lord called Velzix conquered the Tulan Kingdom, both are expanding and a so called Grand Alliance of nations doesn’t seem to be doing much good against either of them. + +The Chimera Company was recently hired by the Zalan government. Due to your past battles with demons, they decided you would be good to put on Tulan Border which is still a bloodbath, but instead of fighting the Tulan Kingdom, the Zalan Empire is fighting Velzix’s hordes. + +It’s not an easy assignment or very pleasant, in fact it’s got to be the worst job you’ve been on. You company is assigned to make commando raids and sabotage shit to keep the demons fairly unfocused, while the Zalan Empire’s real armies try to make progress into Velzix’s realm. Currently you’re making your “camp” in small abandoned village in enemy territory where you have to fight the occasional demon patrols. + +Why the Captain took this job on for the company is beyond you. Nobody really knows why. The company in general has been taking more dangerous jobs in recent years. Ever since the Nuro Incident actually. While it’s always been known he’s not a man to shy away from danger and has a love of battle, there’s a lot of talk within ranks that he’s got a death wish. + +The only “good thing” about this assignment, is that the chance for usual Chimera Company wicked acts are much lower. There’s not many “innocents” in a demon realm. + +As you think about things, strumming your lute in an abandoned general store by yourself. You hear someone speak. + +“Pretty good playing. Wish my kind appreciated some of the more subtle things in life sometimes.” + +You turn your head and see a demon! He’s not very tall and is “dressed up”. He must be one of the “civilized” demons who realigned themselves with their demonic natures and flocked to Velzix when he took over the Tulan Kingdom. He doesn’t seem hostile, but you drop your lute and draw your weapon, before you can yell a warning, he speaks again. + +“Wait! Before you go warning your friends, I should warn you that there is a very large group of my fellow kin surrounding this village. You kill me and they’ll attack and quite frankly I don’t fancy your chances. However I got a deal for you that can be worth your while. What can it hurt to listen to me? You can always kill me afterwards.” +> Listen to the demon +You aren’t sure about this, but you let him speak. + +“Speak demon, but make it quick!” you demand. +“Ah, glad you’re willing to be reasonable. Name’s Big Red by the way.” +“Get on with it!” +“Very well. Your company and everyone in it is doomed to the infernal planes when they die I’m afraid. You captain’s deeds alone make him one of the most sought after souls in Hell. He used to be much worse before he got married, but ah well; women often make men weak like that.” +“Yeah? Well not me.” +“Heh, yeah you too. I understand that you’re probably the most moral person in it, but this whole company has been targeted by Hell and Hell gets what it wants.” +“Well Velzix isn’t…” +“Velzix? I’m not talking about Velzix! Velzix is just another demon with big dick complex. If I trust my judgment he’s not going to last another year in his current status, he’ll probably either be dead by one of you mortals or that little Necromancer. (Sigh) Wish I’d known about him sooner, things could’ve been a lot…different.” + +Big Red sees that you’re getting antsy so he gets to the point again. + +“Anyway, seeing as you’re all doomed to Hell, I figured it would be nice if I got direct credit for bringing you there. Bringing in evil souls yourself is one of the few things makes Hell all worth it. You get all sorts of perks. However, if I just call in the reinforcements now to have you guys get ripped from limb to limb, I won’t get direct credit. The souls will just be gathered wily nily and then I gotta argue with the fucking collectors and lawyers and all that other shit about who killed who and who gets credit which will probably just result in nobody getting credit and doesn’t help me out at all.” +“Barring that you’re saying that I’m doomed in any case, I fail to see why I should help you.” +“Well that’s why I’m coming to you with a deal. I can see you’re not a bad person, you just serve a bad master, and he’s the one I really want direct credit for. The rest of you are just a bonus and you in particular aren’t even worth that much given your tendency towards good.” +“So what is it you want from me exactly?” +“I want you to take out the sentries and distract your fellows for as long as possible while my boys sneak up on this village and strike with as little resistance as possible. To sweeten this deal, I’ll try to tell my boys to not target you while you try to escape the mayhem. I’m not making any promises though, killing rampages among my kind encourage indiscriminate killing. You’ll be on your own; however it gives you a small chance for survival and by agreeing to this plan it gives me direct credit as the mastermind of this cunning plan. Getting other demons to kill isn’t any kind of feat, but employing a mortal to help is looked upon as more favorable. So do we have a deal?” + +Big Red offers his hand… +> Make the deal +It sounds like your only chance for survival, slim though it may be. In some ways you’d like to be out of this company and who are you really betraying? From what you’ve seen the company is little better than the demons. You’re sick of all of this, the fighting, the demons, the company, all of it. + +“It’s a deal, but make a damn good effort for your kin NOT to target me, AND not to go chasing me either!” +“Okay! Sheesh, you’re mistrustful. You just make sure you do your part.” Big Red says and shakes your hand. + +You both exit the abandoned store and you look for where most of your fellows are located. The village square of course. You know there are look outs in each of “corners” of the village. You sneak about the village like an assassin and ready your bow. + +You take out each sentry in relative silence with your skillful bow shots and drag their bodies into a nearby house. Now nobody will raise an alarm too soon. You then head to the village square and begin interacting with some of them. They find it odd since you’re usually keeping to yourself, but they enjoy your playing so they don’t mind it when you do that. + +Your Captain on the other hand comes out from the house he’s set up in and is wondering what all the commotion is. He gets angry. + +“What the fuck are you idiots doing? We’re fucking deep in demon territory and you’re all making enough noise to attract a damn army of them.” +“What difference does it make? They got patrols that have come across our location before, so they know where we’re at.” You remark.” +“The difference is that I want you fuckers to be alert and focused if we get attacked, not getting drunk and dancing to music like some fucking sissy elf!” +“Aren’t you married to an elf?” you say still playing and backing away from the Captain’s reach. He’s almost in shock that you’d speak to him in such manner especially since you never usually speak too much in the first place. + +“You, pig farmer are really pushing my patience tonight. If I didn’t need all the people I can get for this job, I’d kill you myself!” +“Shhh! I think you better shut the fuck up lute boy.” One of the other mercenaries whispers. +“Why? We’re already in fucking Hell, who gives a shit how much noise we make?” + +You defiance gets worse and finally the Captain draws his weapon to shut you up. At this point you call him a pile of orc shit and run. This causes the rest of the mercenaries to get out his way as he charges at you. Some of them also give chase, but most just stay out of it. + +Fortunately at this point the demons have finally gotten into position and strike. Most of the company is so bewildered by what has occurred between you and the Captain that they’re unprepared. Your Captain immediately stops his pursuit of you when a particularly large demon jumps on top of him from one of the rooftops. He fights it off with the help of some of his men, but you see more coming and continue to make your escape. + +As you run away from the village, a few demons pass you by and don’t attack, looks like Big Red kept his word. + +To a point. + +Big Red suddenly appears in front of you. + +“Thanks friend, now for your reward!” he says and then puts his fist through your chest which kills you instantly. + +You don’t know how much time has passed, but you eventually hear Big Red speaking to you. + +“Get up, I need your word.” +“Huh?” you say in a daze. +“Did I not get you to distract the Chimera Company in an effort to collect all their souls?” +“Huh? Yeah…” you continue to say in a daze. + +You start shaking the cobwebs and see that you’re in a completely different place. A very bad place. Big Red and another much bigger demon are talking. You see the rest of your Company in the distance, naked and in chains. The entire landscape is very barren, has a reddish hue and its uncomfortably hot. + +“Okay, you’ll get credit for all these souls.” +“Hang on, I want to keep this one, he has certain talents and he did allow all this to happen.” Big Red says pointing to you. +“Very well…that’s your right. Just sign there, and there, okay. Let’s load these sorry souls up!” + +Big Red looks pleased with himself as the souls are taken away. + +“Come on, I’m going to take a break.” + +You feel compelled to join him, but you still have questions obviously. + +“What the fuck man?! I’m in Hell!” +“Got it in one. Excellent detective work.” +“But…But the deal! You broke the fucking deal! I don’t belong here!” +“No I didn’t. I said my fellows wouldn’t harm you, not that I wouldn’t. Besides YOU made a deal with me, which damned you in the first place. You definitely belong here.” + +The reality of this situation has now caused a massive amount of fear within you. You’re in Hell and there’s no escape from it! You can’t even attack Big Red, he’s got a permanent magical hold on you from causing him any sort of harm, though you probably wouldn’t be a match for him anyway. You collapse on the ground and feel defeated. Big Red stops, but he doesn’t get angry. + +“Now what is your problem? I just saved YOUR soul from being eternally tormented by my superiors. They’ll probably be eating them and shitting them out only to eat them again for who knows how long. Not a pleasant process.” +“But…but what are you going to do to me?” you ask. +“You? You’re going to play for me at my home in the Blood Hills. Trust me, its not nearly as bloody as the name makes out.” +“Play?” +“Sure. I said you played pretty well, and I do appreciate such things. Music is one of my hobbies other than the whole soul collection thing of course. I’ve got sheets of music from lots of places; I can’t play worth a shit though. The claws don’t help either. Now come on let’s go.” + +You are finding this very odd, but you don’t feel as bad now. You’re Big Red’s slave, but given where you’re at, things could be a lot worse. You’ll at least get to do something you’ve always wanted to do. Play music without hindrance. You wonder about your family, but there’s little that you can do for them now. You just hope things work out for them in the living world. + +Big Red’s home isn’t some giant castle, but a moderate sized house. The inside is decorated with grisly trophies, which you guess can only be considered demonic art. + +“Sinthinia! I know you’re here! I can smell your scent!” he calls out. + +A sexy female demon comes out of one of the rooms. You can’t help but stare, she barely acknowledges you at all though. + +“I’ve been waiting for you Big Red, so did the deal go down well?” +“Well, it could’ve gone better, but it was still a good haul. So how is it really going with Velzix?” +“(Sigh) He’s probably going to lose as predicted. I can sense it, anyone with half a brain can. That whole world is going to eventually become a graveyard, I know it. And the undead are no fun. That’s why I’ve come back here.” +“Well my house is your house. Let’s put some music on shall we?” Big Red points to you. “You, go pick up that mandolin over there and start playing that something on those music sheets I got set up. Sit over there and continue playing until I say stop which won’t be anytime soon.” + +Once again you feel the need to comply. You do exactly as Big Red commands as he and Sinthinia head to a bedroom. He then stops to turn to you. + +“Oh, I don’t know if you realized it at the soul market, but your Captain was NOT there. You know why? Because he somehow managed to fucking escape death! Now I could blame the idiots that were working for me for allowing him to escape, but I figured since I got you anyway, it would be more fun to blame you. Enjoy playing music for all eternity!” he says as Sinthinia giggles and they close the door. + +You don’t quite understand that remark until you begin playing the mandolin. You begin to feel excruciating pain all over. Your mind is tormented with negative emotions causing you great distress as well. + +Big Red has made it so your greatest love which is music causes you pain. + +And you can never stop playing. + +All you can do is suffer.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren’t sure about this, but you let him speak. + +“Speak demon, but make it quick!” you demand. +“Ah, glad you’re willing to be reasonable. Name’s Big Red by the way.” +“Get on with it!” +“Very well. Your company and everyone in it is doomed to the infernal planes when they die I’m afraid. You captain’s deeds alone make him one of the most sought after souls in Hell. He used to be much worse before he got married, but ah well; women often make men weak like that.” +“Yeah? Well not me.” +“Heh, yeah you too. I understand that you’re probably the most moral person in it, but this whole company has been targeted by Hell and Hell gets what it wants.” +“Well Velzix isn’t…” +“Velzix? I’m not talking about Velzix! Velzix is just another demon with big dick complex. If I trust my judgment he’s not going to last another year in his current status, he’ll probably either be dead by one of you mortals or that little Necromancer. (Sigh) Wish I’d known about him sooner, things could’ve been a lot…different.” + +Big Red sees that you’re getting antsy so he gets to the point again. + +“Anyway, seeing as you’re all doomed to Hell, I figured it would be nice if I got direct credit for bringing you there. Bringing in evil souls yourself is one of the few things makes Hell all worth it. You get all sorts of perks. However, if I just call in the reinforcements now to have you guys get ripped from limb to limb, I won’t get direct credit. The souls will just be gathered wily nily and then I gotta argue with the fucking collectors and lawyers and all that other shit about who killed who and who gets credit which will probably just result in nobody getting credit and doesn’t help me out at all.” +“Barring that you’re saying that I’m doomed in any case, I fail to see why I should help you.” +“Well that’s why I’m coming to you with a deal. I can see you’re not a bad person, you just serve a bad master, and he’s the one I really want direct credit for. The rest of you are just a bonus and you in particular aren’t even worth that much given your tendency towards good.” +“So what is it you want from me exactly?” +“I want you to take out the sentries and distract your fellows for as long as possible while my boys sneak up on this village and strike with as little resistance as possible. To sweeten this deal, I’ll try to tell my boys to not target you while you try to escape the mayhem. I’m not making any promises though, killing rampages among my kind encourage indiscriminate killing. You’ll be on your own; however it gives you a small chance for survival and by agreeing to this plan it gives me direct credit as the mastermind of this cunning plan. Getting other demons to kill isn’t any kind of feat, but employing a mortal to help is looked upon as more favorable. So do we have a deal?” + +Big Red offers his hand… +> Decline the deal +Fuck this. He’s lying and even if he isn’t, making a deal with a demon is never a good idea. You’ve heard the stories and you’ve seen the former Tulan “citizens” that debased themselves just in order to live to serve their demon masters. It never ends well. + +If you are going to the infernal realm when you die, you’re still not going to be helping anyone to take you there! + +“Well, let me think about it….HEY THERE’S A FUCKING DEMON ATTACK COMING!” you shout at the top of your lungs. You’re pretty sure at least one person heard you. +“You asshole!” Big Red growls and lunges at you which you dodge out of the way and just focus on getting back to where most of your company is making camp, yelling the whole time. + +Upon hearing your warning, everyone scrambles for battle. You can hear the demons bellowing in the distance. They’ll be here in force soon. You quickly climb on to the village rooftops and ready your bow as the demon hordes advance all around you. + +The battle wasn’t as hopeless as Big Red made it seem like it would be (He must’ve ran off as there was no sign of him) however, the Company does take more than the usual casualties. One of the mercenaries starts to openly complain. + +“This is just fucking retarded! Why the hell are we doing this shit?” Cal complains. +“You know the score; you don’t like it you can leave.” The Captain says calmly cleaning off his sword. +“Yeah and then I don’t get paid, which is when by the way? We’d all like to know when this contract is over! You never did tell us!” +“Oh that…indefinitely.” +“WHAT?!” almost everyone exclaims. +“Look, would you sissies calm the fuck down? We got a break coming up in a few weeks. We go back to the Zalan Empire to get paid, rest, re-equip and whatever else they got there, but after the break we go right back out here. Possibly even deeper.” + +At this point the whole company is turning against the Captain, he doesn’t look worried though. + +“Are you fuckin’ kidding me? You’re expecting us to go deeper into this shit? You’re practically asking us to stand in the middle of Hell!” +“Dunno why you’re protesting, we’re all going to the real infernal plane anyway when we die, might as well get used to it. Look, take it or leave it, I don’t give a shit. If you want to stay, go ahead. If you want to leave now, go ahead. If you want to leave after you get your pay, go ahead. But I’m sure you know by now, if you leave don’t come back ever.” The Captain says and goes back to the abandoned home he was staying in. + +This comment by the Captain makes you think back to Big Red’s little speech, you start wondering about your future while everyone begins talking amongst themselves about what to do next. A lot of them are saying the Boss has lost his mind and is being suicidal. You can’t say you disagree. In fact you’re not sure you want part of this anymore. Your family might need the money, but what good are you dead to them? + +A few weeks pass and your company makes its way back to the Zalan Empire. You get your payment. Almost feels like you’re in the “real army” given the formal nature of it. After you get your pay, you’re on your way home where you intend to stay, much like many others are planning to do. However, you bump into the Captain who speaks to you. There’s a hint of alcohol on his breath. + +“So can I expect you to stay on lute boy?” he asks bluntly. +“Erm…well, no Captain. I’m sorry, but going deeper into demon territory is suicide.” you reply.. +“Probably right, but who wants to live forever?” +“Well I’d like to at least live past the next year.” +“Hah! So you wish to die an old man in your bed?” +“Sounds about right.” +“Then why did you take on such a dangerous line of work in the first place?” +“My family needed the money.” +“Ah yes, you are one of the few in the company that has one. One of the fewer still that actually takes care of them…an honorable pursuit. I can respect that.” + +You’re surprised to hear the Captain praise anything that seems honorable. + +“I have a family that I take care of too you know.” +“Yes, I know you are married.” +“Yeah…but my daughter is a captain in the Zalan army. She’s stationed on the Tulan border as a matter of fact. She might even get transferred to the Grand Alliance army. Don’t know yet.” He says with a hint of pride in his voice, though he tries his best to conceal it. + +The Captain is just full of surprises. You now know that this isn’t some simple death wish, but that he’s taken the job to help her out in a way. You don’t know, but can only imagine what growing up with a dad like him was like. You unsure of how to reply so you just follow up with something. + +“Um, that’s great Captain.” +“Yeah, it’s great. Got a son too…he’s…a wizard. He’s a fuckin’ disappointment… y’know you look back on your life and you wonder what you’ve accomplished and it doesn’t mean shit in the scheme of things, at least not when the world has one foot in Hell and the other in the grave. But still you struggle and fight right? You still remain true to your nature.” +“Sure I guess so.” You say wondering where the Captain going with this. + +The Captain sighs heavily. + +“I guess I’m lucky…killing and battle are in my nature. I get to do it every fuckin’ day and it never seems to be enough, even after all the years and changes… but I bet you didn’t want this shit right? You probably wanted to just play that fuckin’ lute of yours right? You got a gift and its being wasted due to events out of your control…but you still play that thing when you can. It’s in your nature. It’s also in your nature to help out your family because you care about them.” +“I suppose it is.” +“Yeah, nature…it’s a fuckin’ bitch.” + +The Captain now looks directly at you. + +“Look I’m not gonna beg ya, but you’re one of the best men I got in the damn company, and I’d rather not lose you, so I’ll appeal to your nature. What’s going on in the world today is some fucked up shit. Quite honestly I don’t think it’s going to end well for any of us, but you struggle and fight anyway. The financial aid that you’re providing for your family pales in comparison to what you’re doing in the long term. You’re making the world safer for them so that they might be able to live. We got the Gates of Hell on one side and Death’s Door on the other and both of them need to be fucking closed. I don’t know if that makes us the so called good guys now, but all I know is if there’s an active way I can protect my wife and even help my daughter then I’m gonna do it. What are you going to do?” + +The Captain then leaves you without saying another word. + +Some pretty deep words for a man who you never saw as compassionate in anyway. He does make a point though. Lately what has been going in the world is pretty bad and you wonder if not fighting today will just mean putting off fighting tomorrow. +> Stay in the company +You might be a fool, but the possibility that the Captain knows what the fuck he’s talking about can’t be ruled out. If killing demons now is going to make life a little safer for your family in the future, then you probably should be apart of that. Same with the undead if it comes to that, though you’re hoping that you don’t need to. Fighting demons is bad enough, you haven’t even fought any undead and the stories that your dad told you and that you’ve overheard others tell still makes you dread the day that you’ll actually have to. + +For now though you’re going home to spend time with your family and tell them all how much you love them. + +One year passes… + +Five years since the Nuro Incident and you’re deep in the heart of Velzix’s Realm. Guerrilla hit and run tactics and sabotage have greatly angered Velzix causing him to divert forces where he might use elsewhere. You’ve even managed to sneak into his fortress a few times to sabotage his goals of creating a permanent open portal to the Infernal Planes. Something nobody wants except the demons. + +It’s odd, but the Chimera Company has been turned from an example of “thugs for hire” to “Heroic warriors” by the Zalan government, but then the Zalan Empire has always been a bit heavy on propaganda. The fact that the company is directly working for it, makes any politician that was remotely involved with the idea of hiring you in the first place to milk it for all its worth. + +The real truth however is what’s currently of the company is made up of the suicidal, desperate or the insane. You’re not sure which one you are at this point, but in the eyes of the public, you’re a hero. (Surprisingly Cal is still there for all his past complaining) + +The Captain has been telling tales of his past life a lot more lately when sitting around the campfire. He talks about the people he’s killed, the women he’s raped, and the treasures he’s plundered. Most of the stories you’ve only heard about in rumor from others in your Company, but hearing them come from the Captain himself makes him sound even more rotten. You’re sure glad you didn’t know him back in the “old days”. He doesn’t seem to show any remorse, though he doesn’t really talk about it gloriously either. He just tells them as a story to pass the time between fighting, much like you do with playing your lute. + +Every now and then he tells you to play something specific. Some elven song that you’ve never heard before, though apparently he really wants you to play it since he gives you a crumpled piece of sheet music containing its notes. + +It’s a not a complex song for an Elven one, but it still takes you a few weeks to learn it completely. It would probably take you less time, but there’s the demon fighting that sort of gets in the way of practice. + +The first time you play it, the Captain, closes his eyes and begins to smile. You think that’s the first time you’ve ever seen him do that. Others in the Company are amazed as well. + +With his eyes still closed he begins to speak of his family and how beautiful his wife is and how when he first met her it was love at first sight. + +He then speaks of his daughter, and how proud he is of her. Her battle skills have gotten her a captain’s position in Grand Alliance army. He hopes that she has many victorious battles and kills all those that stand before her without mercy. + +He is silent for awhile as you play…then he speaks of his son is much harsher tone. + +“A disappointment…a fucking disappointment. Fucked up somewhere…wasn’t hard enough on him. Now look at this shit we’re in…demons, undead…fuck it. If I’m bound for the Infernal Plane for bringing destruction to the world then I’m gonna give those bastard demons a good reason for torturing the shit outta me when I get there. Namely by killing a shitload of them and fucking up their plans as much as possible. Just hope my necromancer spawn is eventually there right beside me getting tortured as well.” + +You temporarily stop playing at this outburst by the Captain. Others in the Company are looking and whispering to each other. Did he just allude to what you think he did? + +“What he fuck are you doin’? I didn’t say stop playing!” + +You quickly return to playing and nothing more is spoken of it. As it happens the song is one of the last things you play. Your lute is destroyed in a battle a couple days later. You curse as one of the few things that took your mind off this shitty place is gone. You just hope you live long enough to buy a new one. + +A few more weeks pass and what wasn’t spoken of, makes an appearance… + +Two of the lookouts run back to the main camp one day and rush into the Captain’s tent. You can hear them babbling something about son, and death and doomed. You then hear him yelling at them to shut the fuck up and speak clearly. The rest of the Company starts to pick up there weapons as if expecting something to go down and you follow suit and that’s when you look in the direction where the sentries ran from and see a lone hooded figure. + +None of you don’t know how to react. Every instinct in everyone is telling them to attack, but the aura of power and fear he’s giving off is very strong. Almost paralyzing. + +Just then the Captain comes out of his tent and speaks. + +“Boy, you gotta a lot of balls showing up here before me. Didn’t think you had ‘em either. Figured you’d be hiding in some tower somewhere.” +“Yeah, well sometimes you have to do things yourself.” + +Weird. He doesn't sound at all like you thought he would. +> Attack now +You know who the hell this is, it’s the Necromancer Lord. You’re never going to get a better chance than now to kill him and put an end to some of the madness that’s going on. You muster up all your courage and quickly raise your bow. + +“No! Wait you dumbfuck…” the Captain yells trying to stop you. + +You arrow flies straight towards the Necromancer Lord, but it doesn’t even reach him, a magical shield causes it to bounce off harmlessly. However your actions cause the Necromancer Lord to react defensively and he unleashes a ray of pure black energy which drains you of your life force entirely.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You might be a fool, but the possibility that the Captain knows what the fuck he’s talking about can’t be ruled out. If killing demons now is going to make life a little safer for your family in the future, then you probably should be apart of that. Same with the undead if it comes to that, though you’re hoping that you don’t need to. Fighting demons is bad enough, you haven’t even fought any undead and the stories that your dad told you and that you’ve overheard others tell still makes you dread the day that you’ll actually have to. + +For now though you’re going home to spend time with your family and tell them all how much you love them. + +One year passes… + +Five years since the Nuro Incident and you’re deep in the heart of Velzix’s Realm. Guerrilla hit and run tactics and sabotage have greatly angered Velzix causing him to divert forces where he might use elsewhere. You’ve even managed to sneak into his fortress a few times to sabotage his goals of creating a permanent open portal to the Infernal Planes. Something nobody wants except the demons. + +It’s odd, but the Chimera Company has been turned from an example of “thugs for hire” to “Heroic warriors” by the Zalan government, but then the Zalan Empire has always been a bit heavy on propaganda. The fact that the company is directly working for it, makes any politician that was remotely involved with the idea of hiring you in the first place to milk it for all its worth. + +The real truth however is what’s currently of the company is made up of the suicidal, desperate or the insane. You’re not sure which one you are at this point, but in the eyes of the public, you’re a hero. (Surprisingly Cal is still there for all his past complaining) + +The Captain has been telling tales of his past life a lot more lately when sitting around the campfire. He talks about the people he’s killed, the women he’s raped, and the treasures he’s plundered. Most of the stories you’ve only heard about in rumor from others in your Company, but hearing them come from the Captain himself makes him sound even more rotten. You’re sure glad you didn’t know him back in the “old days”. He doesn’t seem to show any remorse, though he doesn’t really talk about it gloriously either. He just tells them as a story to pass the time between fighting, much like you do with playing your lute. + +Every now and then he tells you to play something specific. Some elven song that you’ve never heard before, though apparently he really wants you to play it since he gives you a crumpled piece of sheet music containing its notes. + +It’s a not a complex song for an Elven one, but it still takes you a few weeks to learn it completely. It would probably take you less time, but there’s the demon fighting that sort of gets in the way of practice. + +The first time you play it, the Captain, closes his eyes and begins to smile. You think that’s the first time you’ve ever seen him do that. Others in the Company are amazed as well. + +With his eyes still closed he begins to speak of his family and how beautiful his wife is and how when he first met her it was love at first sight. + +He then speaks of his daughter, and how proud he is of her. Her battle skills have gotten her a captain’s position in Grand Alliance army. He hopes that she has many victorious battles and kills all those that stand before her without mercy. + +He is silent for awhile as you play…then he speaks of his son is much harsher tone. + +“A disappointment…a fucking disappointment. Fucked up somewhere…wasn’t hard enough on him. Now look at this shit we’re in…demons, undead…fuck it. If I’m bound for the Infernal Plane for bringing destruction to the world then I’m gonna give those bastard demons a good reason for torturing the shit outta me when I get there. Namely by killing a shitload of them and fucking up their plans as much as possible. Just hope my necromancer spawn is eventually there right beside me getting tortured as well.” + +You temporarily stop playing at this outburst by the Captain. Others in the Company are looking and whispering to each other. Did he just allude to what you think he did? + +“What he fuck are you doin’? I didn’t say stop playing!” + +You quickly return to playing and nothing more is spoken of it. As it happens the song is one of the last things you play. Your lute is destroyed in a battle a couple days later. You curse as one of the few things that took your mind off this shitty place is gone. You just hope you live long enough to buy a new one. + +A few more weeks pass and what wasn’t spoken of, makes an appearance… + +Two of the lookouts run back to the main camp one day and rush into the Captain’s tent. You can hear them babbling something about son, and death and doomed. You then hear him yelling at them to shut the fuck up and speak clearly. The rest of the Company starts to pick up there weapons as if expecting something to go down and you follow suit and that’s when you look in the direction where the sentries ran from and see a lone hooded figure. + +None of you don’t know how to react. Every instinct in everyone is telling them to attack, but the aura of power and fear he’s giving off is very strong. Almost paralyzing. + +Just then the Captain comes out of his tent and speaks. + +“Boy, you gotta a lot of balls showing up here before me. Didn’t think you had ‘em either. Figured you’d be hiding in some tower somewhere.” +“Yeah, well sometimes you have to do things yourself.” + +Weird. He doesn't sound at all like you thought he would. +> Wait +You know who the hell this is, it’s the Necromancer Lord. Even if you are fast enough to get a shot at him, you doubt the arrow is going to connect. He’s probably got all kinds of magical shields to protect him for whatever it is he’s here for. You begin looking for your best route of escape and slowly start backing away. + +The Captain on the other hand speaks directly to his son. He doesn’t even show any fear. They speak for a moment and things get very tense, you’re about ready to run, but things take a sudden turn for the very strange. + +The Necromancer Lord has proposed a temporary alliance to assassinate Velzix. The Captain is hesitant about this at first, but an agreement is made on payment and he accepts. + +The Captain then informs all of you in more detail of what’s going on. + +“Alright men, we’re gonna go storm the Gates of Hell and close those fuckers for good. My…son there is going to provide magical support. He’s also going to be providing a shitload of money for this job. The stipulation is we can’t tell ANYBODY about this shit. I’m fucking serious. Word gets out that we were working with the fucking Necromancer Lord, we’ll all be hanged, regardless of so called heroic deeds of killing demons. We’re all in this together and there ain’t no backing out, because this deal is made. And if you think you’re gonna step out on me now, that ain’t in the plan. I’ll just kill you and have my son raise your undead ass to help us anyway!” +“What?! You just decided this for us?” Cal exclaims. +“Yeah? What of it? I’ve ALWAYS made all the decisions for your dumb ass! It’s why YOU’RE still working for me, because it’s lucrative! This ain’t gonna be any different. Plus we get to take fucking credit for killing a damn demon lord. Think of all the pussy you’ll get from that fucking fame eh? Now stop bitching and let’s go!” + +You can’t say you’re enthusiastic about this, but it would appear you have little choice in the matter. + +As you travel to Velzix’s fortress you overhear some of the conversations the Captain is having with his son. A strained relationship to be sure. They make a lot of cutting barbs to each other, each criticizing the other for various things. It’s obvious that they can’t stand each other, but are a lot more alike than either one wants to admit. + +It makes you glad when you encounter the occasional demon skirmish on the way, since it at least it decreases the tension and possibility that the Captain’s son is going to finally lose his temper and kill everyone due to his father’s words. Eventually you arrive without any more problems. You enter Velzix’s fortress through the secret way that was discovered long ago. + +“Dumb ass demons, we’ve been using this entrance for like a year now and they still haven’t caught on!” the Captain remarks to his son. + +You make good progress in the fortress and then… + +“There they are, just like Velzix said they would be!” a demon guard shouts. + +“Haven’t caught on yet huh?” the Necromancer Lord says, looking at the Captain. +“Quit yer bitchin’ and start doin that death magic thing!” + +You proceed to do battle with the demon and mortal guards that attempt to stop you. The Necromancer Lord starts to raise the mortal guards after they’re killed, but it begins to unnerve you though when the Necromancer Lord starts raising your own fallen dead. + +Pretty soon it’s just the Necromancer Lord, the Captain, you, Cal and a bunch of corpses fighting off what seems to be an endless supply of Hell’s own. You begin to wonder if Velzix already got that portal working. + +As you get closer to Velzix’s inner sanctum even the undead troops are being decimated at an alarming rate. You’ve been wounded several times and extremely tired. You don’t want to think about any of this, even in the heat of battle you start to take your mind elsewhere with a tune inside your head. + +“Fuck man! We’re gonna die here!” Cal screams as he attempts to fight a horned demon which has obviously got the advantage over him. You feel a demon blade in your back causing you to fall to the floor. At this point nothing but music fills your mind; bloodshed and battle surround your prone body. + +“Fuckers are without end! Come on! Raise these fuckers and let’s go!” you hear the Captain yell followed by “Hah, no lying down on the job anymore Cal!” + +You’re not quite dead yet though, and the Necromancer Lord and his dad aren’t waiting around so they continue on quickly leaving you behind. + +As your life force ebbs and more demon guards run past your body, you don’t know if what you did was worth it or even the right thing. All you know is you did what you could and hope your actions may have made some sort of difference and increased the chances of your family’s future well being. + +You then smile. You’ll see them again someday. + +“Yeah…I believe that…” you allow yourself to think as you die. + +Big Red was wrong about your fate. There was no Hell, just peace.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Fuck this. He’s lying and even if he isn’t, making a deal with a demon is never a good idea. You’ve heard the stories and you’ve seen the former Tulan “citizens” that debased themselves just in order to live to serve their demon masters. It never ends well. + +If you are going to the infernal realm when you die, you’re still not going to be helping anyone to take you there! + +“Well, let me think about it….HEY THERE’S A FUCKING DEMON ATTACK COMING!” you shout at the top of your lungs. You’re pretty sure at least one person heard you. +“You asshole!” Big Red growls and lunges at you which you dodge out of the way and just focus on getting back to where most of your company is making camp, yelling the whole time. + +Upon hearing your warning, everyone scrambles for battle. You can hear the demons bellowing in the distance. They’ll be here in force soon. You quickly climb on to the village rooftops and ready your bow as the demon hordes advance all around you. + +The battle wasn’t as hopeless as Big Red made it seem like it would be (He must’ve ran off as there was no sign of him) however, the Company does take more than the usual casualties. One of the mercenaries starts to openly complain. + +“This is just fucking retarded! Why the hell are we doing this shit?” Cal complains. +“You know the score; you don’t like it you can leave.” The Captain says calmly cleaning off his sword. +“Yeah and then I don’t get paid, which is when by the way? We’d all like to know when this contract is over! You never did tell us!” +“Oh that…indefinitely.” +“WHAT?!” almost everyone exclaims. +“Look, would you sissies calm the fuck down? We got a break coming up in a few weeks. We go back to the Zalan Empire to get paid, rest, re-equip and whatever else they got there, but after the break we go right back out here. Possibly even deeper.” + +At this point the whole company is turning against the Captain, he doesn’t look worried though. + +“Are you fuckin’ kidding me? You’re expecting us to go deeper into this shit? You’re practically asking us to stand in the middle of Hell!” +“Dunno why you’re protesting, we’re all going to the real infernal plane anyway when we die, might as well get used to it. Look, take it or leave it, I don’t give a shit. If you want to stay, go ahead. If you want to leave now, go ahead. If you want to leave after you get your pay, go ahead. But I’m sure you know by now, if you leave don’t come back ever.” The Captain says and goes back to the abandoned home he was staying in. + +This comment by the Captain makes you think back to Big Red’s little speech, you start wondering about your future while everyone begins talking amongst themselves about what to do next. A lot of them are saying the Boss has lost his mind and is being suicidal. You can’t say you disagree. In fact you’re not sure you want part of this anymore. Your family might need the money, but what good are you dead to them? + +A few weeks pass and your company makes its way back to the Zalan Empire. You get your payment. Almost feels like you’re in the “real army” given the formal nature of it. After you get your pay, you’re on your way home where you intend to stay, much like many others are planning to do. However, you bump into the Captain who speaks to you. There’s a hint of alcohol on his breath. + +“So can I expect you to stay on lute boy?” he asks bluntly. +“Erm…well, no Captain. I’m sorry, but going deeper into demon territory is suicide.” you reply.. +“Probably right, but who wants to live forever?” +“Well I’d like to at least live past the next year.” +“Hah! So you wish to die an old man in your bed?” +“Sounds about right.” +“Then why did you take on such a dangerous line of work in the first place?” +“My family needed the money.” +“Ah yes, you are one of the few in the company that has one. One of the fewer still that actually takes care of them…an honorable pursuit. I can respect that.” + +You’re surprised to hear the Captain praise anything that seems honorable. + +“I have a family that I take care of too you know.” +“Yes, I know you are married.” +“Yeah…but my daughter is a captain in the Zalan army. She’s stationed on the Tulan border as a matter of fact. She might even get transferred to the Grand Alliance army. Don’t know yet.” He says with a hint of pride in his voice, though he tries his best to conceal it. + +The Captain is just full of surprises. You now know that this isn’t some simple death wish, but that he’s taken the job to help her out in a way. You don’t know, but can only imagine what growing up with a dad like him was like. You unsure of how to reply so you just follow up with something. + +“Um, that’s great Captain.” +“Yeah, it’s great. Got a son too…he’s…a wizard. He’s a fuckin’ disappointment… y’know you look back on your life and you wonder what you’ve accomplished and it doesn’t mean shit in the scheme of things, at least not when the world has one foot in Hell and the other in the grave. But still you struggle and fight right? You still remain true to your nature.” +“Sure I guess so.” You say wondering where the Captain going with this. + +The Captain sighs heavily. + +“I guess I’m lucky…killing and battle are in my nature. I get to do it every fuckin’ day and it never seems to be enough, even after all the years and changes… but I bet you didn’t want this shit right? You probably wanted to just play that fuckin’ lute of yours right? You got a gift and its being wasted due to events out of your control…but you still play that thing when you can. It’s in your nature. It’s also in your nature to help out your family because you care about them.” +“I suppose it is.” +“Yeah, nature…it’s a fuckin’ bitch.” + +The Captain now looks directly at you. + +“Look I’m not gonna beg ya, but you’re one of the best men I got in the damn company, and I’d rather not lose you, so I’ll appeal to your nature. What’s going on in the world today is some fucked up shit. Quite honestly I don’t think it’s going to end well for any of us, but you struggle and fight anyway. The financial aid that you’re providing for your family pales in comparison to what you’re doing in the long term. You’re making the world safer for them so that they might be able to live. We got the Gates of Hell on one side and Death’s Door on the other and both of them need to be fucking closed. I don’t know if that makes us the so called good guys now, but all I know is if there’s an active way I can protect my wife and even help my daughter then I’m gonna do it. What are you going to do?” + +The Captain then leaves you without saying another word. + +Some pretty deep words for a man who you never saw as compassionate in anyway. He does make a point though. Lately what has been going in the world is pretty bad and you wonder if not fighting today will just mean putting off fighting tomorrow. +> Leave the company +Whatever the Captain is “going through” doesn’t involve you. You’ve got your own concerns. If the world events get so bad that they reach your doorstep, then you deal with it then, but risking your life to the extent of going deep into the heart of demon territory isn’t what you signed up for. + +You head home and tell your family that it’s permanent this time. You explain your reasons and apologize that you won’t be bringing in all the extra money like you used to. They aren’t mad though, your mom is actually relieved. + +“Well son, I’m just as glad you didn’t go get yourself killed over there anyway. You’ll be helping us out plenty just by working on the farm like always.” + +You’re glad to hear that. Over the next couple days you fall back into routine again. You still wonder about the future though and you briefly consider the army, but you’re a little weary of battle on a regular basis now. + +You resign yourself to the farm life. You play your lute to yourself (and family) when you have the time to do so. It’s a simple life. + +Another year passes and things are getting bad. War is everywhere. The Demons have been taken care of, (You heard your former mercenary captain died in battle with their leader Velzix) but the undead are stronger than ever. Reports even speak of the Necromancer Lord becoming The Great Lich Lord “reborn”. + +To make things worse, the Zalan Empire has been becoming increasingly tyrannical. In order to help with the war effort they’ve started bringing back the draft and the talk of ceasing private property to be used for the good of the government. While they say owners will be able to live and still work on their lands and businesses, it will be owned by the Empire. + +You know it’s only a matter of time when you get a knock on the door by Zalan army troops coming to take you (Especially you given your prior battle experience) and your brother Mallack away to the army and your family’s farm. + +Another two year pass… + +You’re on the eve of battle in a land known as the Garwold Confederacy although it’s steadily becoming a giant graveyard now. The undead hordes have been sweeping relentlessly across the entire landscape. Your own company has had to fall back several times. Morale is low. Not that yours was high to begin with. You don’t even know how you’ve survived this long. While you had lots of battle experience during your time with the mercenary company, you’ll never get used to fighting the undead. They are such emotionless creatures that are the embodiment of death and all that’s unnatural. + +You briefly wonder if your brother Mallack is alright where he’s stationed, but it hardly matters at this point. + +Battle comes as it always does and you are not so lucky this time. Horrible and powerful creatures known as Blood Specters and Death Knights utterly destroy your side. + +You put up a more valiant effort than most, but eventually you fall to undead blades and chilling touches only rise up and join them in their goal of global genocide.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’ve had enough. You’re not going to help OR stand by for another immoral act performed by your “co-workers”. It’s bad enough that it goes on, but that doesn’t mean you need to let it, if you can do something about it. + +You run Dimitri through the back with your sword, he yells out in pain, but still manages to swing his armored fist to strike you in the face. You fall to the ground. + +“Fuck…lute boy…goin…down…pig fucker…” he wheezes as he attempts to step towards you only to fall to his knees. At this point Morri has recovered and cleaves Dimitri’s skull in with his axe. + +“Bastard.” Morri then looks at you. “Heh, I guess you must be one of the few with a conscious in the company eh?” +“I guess so.” You reply. +“Or perhaps you knew it would be better if I lived so you could find your way out this maze?” +“…Actually I hadn’t even thought about that. I just…just couldn’t let him kill and rob you like that. Seen it too many times.” +“That a fact? Well tell me son, why the hell are you hooked up with these bunch for then?” +“Money to help the family…besides it’s not that bad.” +“Okay, if you say so. However, this little incident is going to cost your company. We warned your captain that if any evidence of treachery occurred, we weren’t paying him shit and this deal was off!” +“But can’t we just keep this secret? I mean…” +“Secret? Fuck no! Look, you’re not a bad person, but you’re hanging out with bad people. The only reason why we hired you in the first place is because you ARE effective and you’re about the only mercenary company insane enough to do a job like this. But a deal’s a deal. You captain apparently doesn’t have control over his men like he thinks, because I’m sure he warned you all.” +“Yeah, but everyone will probably blame me and my life will be in danger!” +“…well…I’m sorry about that, but that’s the price you pay for the company you keep…look I’ll tell you what, because you helped me, I’ll take you back to the entrance and you can leave. Should at least give you a head start. Hell, maybe I’ll even tell them you died before this happened. You could then just hide out and stay out of sight without even anyone looking for you.” + +Not knowing what to say next you just agree and ponder your possible future. + +The way back to the entrance is uneventful as far as demon attacks are concerned. You don’t know what you’re going to do. You’ll have to go on the run or at least relocate regardless of what Morri tells everyone. And if he mentions the truth, then your family may well be in danger. You imagine that if the Boss couldn’t get to you, he may very well take it out on your family. + +You feel sick and upset. You wish you hadn’t chosen this path. All you ever really wanted to do was play your lute, not fight demons or anything else really. + +You follow behind Morri in a daze. You’re surprised that he doesn’t insist that you walk in front of him, but then that’s probably because he trusts that you’re not a murderer. You also realize you recognize this part of the mine and could probably find your way back from here… + +You shake your head and take a deep breath. + +“Hey Morri.” +“Wha…glagh! + +An arrow goes right through Morri’s mouth and out the other side of his head. He gurgles obscenities while trying to raise his axe towards you. Another arrow goes through his eye. He ceases his struggle. + +While you solved the problem of Morri telling anyone, now you have to cover your own tracks, then you hear a sound you never thought you’d be glad to hear. The chittering of those insect demons and a bunch of them are coming right behind you. + +You pull the arrows out and run as quickly as you can to the entrance leaving the demons to feed upon Morri’s body. The thought crosses your mind to just leave anyway. Maybe they’d think all three of you got eaten. However, you run into another group during your dash to the mine entrance. + +“Where the hell are you running off to?” a mercenary asks. It’s Cal. You come up with a lie quick. + +“(pant) Shit! We got fucking ambushed! (pant) Barely fucking escaped! (pant) Dimitri and Morri are dead! Probably eaten! And the rest of those demon fuckers are heading this way!” +“What?! You cowardly fucker, you just let Morri die?” one the dwarves says angrily. +“It wasn’t my idea! I tried to help him and Dimitri, but they just came in force, I don’t even know how I escaped!” + +Your story is a little suspicious, but thanks to the demons, you’re covered. They didn’t leave much for the dwarves to find. However, you’re not looked favorably on by the rest of the dwarves for the rest of the mission. Your fellow mercenaries don’t really care one way or another. It’s part of the job and Dimitri wasn’t well liked so they could care less if he died or lived. + +You on the other hand are still not feeling so great about yourself. The longer you’re part of this company the more you’re starting to think or be more like them. You hate it and you’ll be glad when this job is over. + +A few months pass and the contract is over. The “problem” isn’t completely gone, in fact there’s reports of some undead wandering in the area now, but the Dwarves are growing more weary of your presence, hand over your payment and tell you to leave. They say they can handle anything else themselves. + +It’s quite a lot this time. Best job you’ve had. Upon your return to the Zalan Empire you buy yourself a new lute. It’s your “reward”. The rest of it goes to your family who of course are eager to hear about your tales as usual. You don’t tell them that many this time. You just try to take your mind off your “job” by asking them more questions this time around. When you’re alone you play your new lute, trying to emulate a couple of the songs you overheard the Dwarves engage in when you were there. You never knew they were musically inclined; it’s a shame you had to kill one to protect your future. You’re still debating on whether or not to give up the mercenary life, but you see how much it’s helping the family out, so you decide to stay and put up with it. + +After your “break is over” you go back to the job as usual. + +Three years pass… + +Four years have passed since the “Nuro Incident” and things have gotten much worse in the world. The Necromancer Lord conquered the Brot Kingdom, A demon lord called Velzix conquered the Tulan Kingdom, both are expanding and a so called Grand Alliance of nations doesn’t seem to be doing much good against either of them. + +The Chimera Company was recently hired by the Zalan government. Due to your past battles with demons, they decided you would be good to put on Tulan Border which is still a bloodbath, but instead of fighting the Tulan Kingdom, the Zalan Empire is fighting Velzix’s hordes. + +It’s not an easy assignment or very pleasant, in fact it’s got to be the worst job you’ve been on. You company is assigned to make commando raids and sabotage shit to keep the demons fairly unfocused, while the Zalan Empire’s real armies try to make progress into Velzix’s realm. Currently you’re making your “camp” in small abandoned village in enemy territory where you have to fight the occasional demon patrols. + +Why the Captain took this job on for the company is beyond you. Nobody really knows why. The company in general has been taking more dangerous jobs in recent years. Ever since the Nuro Incident actually. While it’s always been known he’s not a man to shy away from danger and has a love of battle, there’s a lot of talk within ranks that he’s got a death wish. + +The only “good thing” about this assignment, is that the chance for usual Chimera Company wicked acts are much lower. There’s not many “innocents” in a demon realm. + +As you think about things, strumming your lute in an abandoned general store by yourself. You hear someone speak. + +“Pretty good playing. Wish my kind appreciated some of the more subtle things in life sometimes.” + +You turn your head and see a demon! He’s not very tall and is “dressed up”. He must be one of the “civilized” demons who realigned themselves with their demonic natures and flocked to Velzix when he took over the Tulan Kingdom. He doesn’t seem hostile, but you drop your lute and draw your weapon, before you can yell a warning, he speaks again. + +“Wait! Before you go warning your friends, I should warn you that there is a very large group of my fellow kin surrounding this village. You kill me and they’ll attack and quite frankly I don’t fancy your chances. However I got a deal for you that can be worth your while. What can it hurt to listen to me? You can always kill me afterwards.” +> Attack him +You don’t waste time, you just attack! Unfortunately the demon is more than he appears and easily dodges your attack. You don’t have time to turn and react again when he’s tripped you up and put his fist in your face causing your nose to explode into a mass of blood. You’re dazed. + +“(Sigh) And here I thought you were the reasonable one of this bunch. Nevermind.” The demon says. + +He follows up with another fist to your face. This one goes through your head killing you instantly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’re not sure if the formal military life is for you. If you joined up you wouldn’t be able to readily leave. You figure if you don’t like life as a mercenary or it isn’t working out for you, you can leave freely. + +You explain your decision to join up with the mercenary company that’s currently passing through. Your revelation comes as a shock. Your smaller brothers and sisters don’t want you to go, your brother Mallack really doesn’t want you to leave since he’ll be next in line to take the brunt of the manual labor! + +Your mother is a little apprehensive about your decision. You half expect her to say no, but she understands that you’re doing this for the good of the family. She gives her blessing. + +Before you leave the next day with your packed belongings, your whole family comes to say goodbye to you. You almost hesitate to leave, wondering if it would actually be better for you to stay. Your mother approaches you. + +“You don’t have to do this you know. We’re doing just fine.” +“Yeah, but things would be easier if this family had more money.” +“Hah. Things are always easier with more money son, but you don’t need to go and get yourself killed for it.” +“Yeah, I know, but I’ve thought it through.” +“Very well, you’re old enough to make your own decisions and live your own life, though I’m glad to see that you still want to help the family as opposed to just leaving in the middle of the night.” +“I’ll visit and return with whatever my pay is whenever I can.” +“I know…okay, you best get going. I think the mercenary company was leaving today.” + +You make you way to the local tavern and catch them just as they’re getting ready leave. A lot of them look hung over. + +“Hey wait up…” you say in a slightly loud tone, causing one mean looking mercenary to snarl at you. +“Shut the fuck up yokel! Shit, I got a splitting headache and it hurts like a sonofabitch.” +“Sorry. Are you the leader of this company?” +“Leader of these dickheads? Naw. The Boss is actually visiting his family in the Zalan capital. We’re going to meet up with him now and I suggest you get the fuck outta our way and not waste anymore of our time!” +“But I want to join you guys.” + +The mercenary you were speaking to looks at you then looks at a few of his buddies and begins to laugh louder than your voice which previously annoyed him. + +“HAHAHA HAHAHA! Y’hear that fellas? This yokel wants to join us! Thanks a lot, I needed a good laugh, now go fuck your pigs or whatever it is you farm types do.” +“But I’m serious…” +“Serious? Farmboy, this is a man’s job and not for the fuckin’ weak. You ever even use a damn weapon?” +“Yeah! I got this bow and this sword! I’m a really good shot!” + +The mercenary still looks unimpressed. + +“Uh huh, yeah well you ever kill anyone, hell you ever kill ANYTHING? And I’m not talkin’ about any of your livestock you might’ve slaughtered. I mean something sentient.” +“Well yeah, I’ve killed Kobolds that were trying to steal chickens from the…” + +The mercenaries begin to laugh again. + +“Oh shit, you are priceless boy! My sister can kill fuckin’ Kobolds and her only talent is whoring.” +“Haha got that one right, Dimitri.” Another one of the mercenaries agrees. + +Suddenly the laughing stops. + +“What the fuck did you just say Fermeli?” +“Uh, I was just agreeing with you…c’mon don’t take it like that! I mean you said…” +“Ain’t about what I said, it’s about what YOU said! You called my fucking sister a whore! You ain’t getting’ away with that shit.” + +Dimitri draws his sword and stomps over to Fermeli who is trying to get one of his buddies to help him, but everyone else is backing away from the fight. Dimitri takes advantage of Fermeli’s state of panic and slashes him good with his sword. + +Fermeli cries out in pain and begs for forgiveness. Dimitri looks like he’s going to finish him off, but then turns to you. + +“You want to join hayseed? Kill this piece of shit then.” +“Huh? I mean…” you utter in confusion. +“Did I stutter pig farmer? Kill this… AARGH FUCK!” + +Fermeli has now taken advantage of Dimitri by shoving a dagger into his leg and scrambling to get up + +“Yeah! Take that! How’s that feel?” Fermeli taunts and draws his own sword in an attempt to kill Dimitri + +At this point you unwisely step into the middle of this fight. + +“Hey hold on, the pair of you are even now…” +“Fuck off pig farmer! You want some of this now? Yeah, let’s see how much of a killer you are!” Fermeli says who doesn’t look frightened of you at all and heads in your direction. + +“Hey wait I don’t wanna…” + +You barely dodge his sword swipe to your head. You roll out of the way and quickly grab an arrow and shoot it at Fermeli with your bow, hitting him square in the neck. Some blood spurts out and a surprised look on his face is displayed and then he falls dead. You’ve killed him. You’ve never killed anything before that wasn’t a Kobold or livestock. You feel weird. + +In the meantime Dimitri gets up and pulls the dagger out of his leg and looks over at Formeli’s body. + +“Heh, maybe you are a killer after all pig farmer. Well it seems we got an opening now. Take whatever he had as your own. You killed him, you earned it. Welcome to the Chimera Mercenary Company!” + +While you MAY be in, you’re not necessarily sure if you want in. This may be a bit too much for you. +> Go back home +If this how it was on your first day, you’d hate to think about if you had to deal with this on a regular basis. + +“Uh…no, maybe I was wrong. Bye.” You say and quickly take off. +“Heh, pig farmer don’t have no stomach for it…Dibs on Foremeli’s shit!” you hear Dimitri yell. + +When you get back home, your family and mom in particular ask what happened, you explain it and say you don’t want any part of that life. You apologize that you couldn’t go through with it, but your mom looks more relieved than anything. + +“Well son, I’m just as glad you didn’t join up with that lot anyway. You’ll be helping us out plenty just by working on the farm like always.” + +You’re glad to hear that. Over the next couple days you fall back into routine again. You still wonder about the future though and you briefly consider the army plan again, but given your short lived experience with mercenary “life” you don’t think you’re cut out with battle on a regular basis. Plus the Zalan Empire is currently having really bad border skirmish with the Tulan Kingdom right now. + +You resign yourself to the farm life. You play your lute to yourself (and family) when you have the time to do so. It’s a simple life. + +A year passes and a terrible incident occurs at a far away city known as Nuro. A group of rogue wizards summoned an army of the dead to take it over. They also summoned a lot of demons that have broken free and running rampant now in the Tulan Kingdom. It’s all far away from you, but something like this is pretty serious. Necromancy and Demon summoning is strictly forbidden throughout the land. + +Meanwhile life on the farm is going the same as it ever did. Hard sometimes, but manageable. + +Another two years pass and things have gotten worse. The Necromancer Lord (as he’s become to be known) has expanded, even to the point of taking over the Brot Kingdom. The Tulan Kingdom has been totally conquered by a demon army. A Grand Alliance of nations has been formed, but so far they don’t seem to be making much progress. + +Meanwhile life on the farm is a little harder. Your youngest sister Makana becomes gravely ill during the winter months, but there’s not enough money to pay for a healer and most of the clerics have been summoned to battle with the undead or demon hordes. Sadly she dies making the overall mood of the farm a little more depressing. You don’t even play anymore, your enthusiasm for music died along with the grim realities setting in. + +Another three years pass and things are down right miserable. War is everywhere. The Demons have been taken care of, but the undead are stronger than ever. Reports even speak of the Necromancer Lord becoming The Great Lich Lord “reborn”. You remember hearing tales by your father of such a being that existed centuries ago. They scared the hell out of you then and the fact that you’re living in a time where he’s returned makes you feel doomed. + +To make things worse, the Zalan Empire has been becoming increasingly tyrannical. In order to help with the war effort they’ve started bringing back the draft and the talk of ceasing private property to be used for the good of the government. While they say owners will be able to live and still work on their lands and businesses, it will be owned by the Empire. + +You know it’s only a matter of time when you get a knock on the door by Zalan army troops coming to take you and your brother Mallack away to the army and your family’s farm. + +Another two year pass… + +You’re on the eve of battle in a land known as the Garwold Confederacy although it’s steadily becoming a giant graveyard now. The undead hordes have been sweeping relentlessly across the entire landscape. Your own company has had to fall back several times. Morale is low. Not that yours was high to begin with. You don’t even know how you’ve survived this long. You didn’t even have that much military training when they threw you into you first battle a year ago. It was a terrifying experience and you still have nightmares about it. The undead…you’ll never get used to fighting such emotionless creatures that are the embodiment of death and all that’s unnatural. + +You briefly wonder if your brother Mallack is alright where he’s stationed, but it hardly matters at this point. + +Battle comes as it always does and you are not so lucky this time. Horrible and powerful creatures known as Blood Specters and Death Knights utterly destroy your side. + +You fall to undead blades and chilling touches only rise up and join them in their goal of global genocide.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Please read this disclaimer before continuing ... + +DISCLAIMER +The Fairview Highschool Game is pure fiction. The name "Fairview" was chosen as it is a very popular name for high schools and is not intended to represent any one high school. Also, all of the situations, locations, and characters in the game are fictional. Any likeness or resemblance to persons, places, or anything else is strictly coincidental. +> Play The Game! +*BEEP*BEEP*BEEP*BEEP* + +It's 6:30am. What are you going to do: +> Wake up and go to school +You decide to wake up and go to school. + +You arrive at school, and, of course, it is first period. Thanks to the wonderfully logical F.H.S. scheduling, you have a study hall. What would you like to do: +> Stay in study hall +You decide to stay in study hall. +As you sit innocently in study hall, some one wearing a "Fairview Cult" tee-shirt slips you the Fairview Cult Bulletin. After you read it, he asks you if you would like to join the Fairview Cult. What do you do: +> Say "Hook me up!" +You decide to join the Fairview Cult. +As you say the words, "Yeah, I'll join," you feel the air part around you and it seems as if a very heavy burden is just lifted off of your shoulders. + +Moments later, the second period bell rings. You pick up your things and leave for your next class. +> Continue ... +Congratulations! You made it to second period! Acording to your schedule, you have Foreign Language Class now. + +During the first few minutes of second period, the highschool morning annoucments are played. The morning anouncers comes on the TV and give the usual, boring announcments. They remind everyone that today is a pep-rally and that the student council ellection winners will be officially crowned today. + +The announcments end, and class begins. What would you like to do? +> Pay Attention +You decide to pay attention. + +The teacher starts off by teaching some foreign language: "Das es muy bueno y par le vue." + +After a few minutes of that, he tells the class a cool story about how he was almost involved in a drive-by shooting. Then, he goes on about civil issues, such as gun control. + +What do you do: +> Disagree and start an argument +You decide to disagree because your a pansy liberal. + +You infuriate the teacher, and he procedes to rip down the overhead projection screen. He then cracks you upside the head with it, breaking your cranium. + +Never Argue with a language teacher. +> Click here to end the game +Well, it loos like you just couldn't cut it as an FHS student. Better luck next time. +Your final score is: 017<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to pay attention. + +The teacher starts off by teaching some foreign language: "Das es muy bueno y par le vue." + +After a few minutes of that, he tells the class a cool story about how he was almost involved in a drive-by shooting. Then, he goes on about civil issues, such as gun control. + +What do you do: +> Agree and nod your head and go to sleep +You decide to go to sleep. +The teacher wakes you up with a note to go to the office. Mr. Greenwall, the associate principal, wants to talk to you. + +What do you do: +> Go down to the office +You decide to go to the office. +What would you like to do: +> Take the direct route +You decide to take the direct route. + +As you walk down the hall, worried about what the Associate Principal could possibly want, you are trampled by a herd of junior high swine passing through the highschool, going to their music class. You lie there bloody and gasping for help. You fade away and die. + +You should have taken the scenic route, retard.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to go to the office. +What would you like to do: +> Take the scenic route +You decide to take the scenic route. +What would you like to do on your way to the office: +> Look in the costume room +You decide to look in the costume room. + +Looking through all the various clothes, you see this dress that reminds you of your mother's wedding dress. You think it looks really cool and it seems to be your size, so you try it on. + +As you are putting it on, Adam O'Mallady opens the door to the costume room sees you in the dress. Mistaking you for a queer, he starts bashing your head in with his Marine Corp boots. As your life fades to black, you hear death metal in the backround. + +Man, you suck.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to take the scenic route. +What would you like to do on your way to the office: +> Look in the janitors' closet +You decide to look in the janitor's closet + +You open up the door labeled "JANITOR" and walk in. You see some brooms, dustpans, a coffe mug that says "Mmmmm Janitor Java", and a large, black void is sucking you in. As you enter the void, you pass through time, forward and backward in an endless loop for eternity. You see E=MC2 and melting clocks. + +So what exactly did you think you would find in a janitors' closet?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to take the scenic route. +What would you like to do on your way to the office: +> Stop by the art room +You decide to stop by the art room. + +You see a few people you know hanging out in the art room: Joe Barney (the All-American of Fairview Park), Number 2, and Number 3 (both from the Fairview Cult). What do you do: +> Say hi to the All-American of Fairview Park, Joe Barney +You decide to say hi to the All-American of Fairview Park, Joe Barney. + +As you do that, Number 3 of the Fairview Cult hands you the Fairview Cult Bulletin. What you do? +> Say "Thanks, I've already seen it" and go on your way +You walk in the office and are told to take a seat and wait. While sitting and waiting, you give the hot student office aide a wink. Finally, the secretary tells you that Mr. Greenwall will see you now. +> Continue ... +Mr. Greenwall gives you a stern look and tells you to take a seat. As you sit down and put your arms on the armrests, cold metal cuffs pop out and lock your hands and feet to the chair. Mr Greenwall begins to speak: + +"I know that you are a member of the Fairview Cult. First, you need to sign this form. Here, you don't need to read it, all it states is that you understand that you are down in the office." + +He twitches his neck and one of the clamps on your arm releases so you can sign the form. + +What do you do: +> Sign the form +The moment after you put your John Handcock on the carbon-copy form, you hear a demonic laughter coming from behind you, and see Mrs. Fuddmeadow and a few other teachers walking in. + +You read the form you just signed and realize you just agreed to a 15-day "special" in-school suspension. Mr. Greenwall says: + +"You have given up all of your human rigts to me. I will destroy you and your precious Fairview Cult and turn you all in to drones!" + +Then, he twitches his neck again and the chair you are strapped to falls through a trap door in the floor. As you crash on the level below, you hear Mr. Greenwall say "Let the Brainwashing begin." + +Moments later, FHS drones tie you up and tape your eyes open to force you to watch propoganda prom and football videos. + +You are dead, but only on the inside. You are now an FHS drone. Have fun setting up the cafeteria for dances ... for eternity.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Mr. Greenwall gives you a stern look and tells you to take a seat. As you sit down and put your arms on the armrests, cold metal cuffs pop out and lock your hands and feet to the chair. Mr Greenwall begins to speak: + +"I know that you are a member of the Fairview Cult. First, you need to sign this form. Here, you don't need to read it, all it states is that you understand that you are down in the office." + +He twitches his neck and one of the clamps on your arm releases so you can sign the form. + +What do you do: +> Refuse to sign the form +Mr. Greenwall grunts and says: + +"Fine. We can take care of this form later. So tell me, I keep hearing things about this "Fairview Cult." Please, fill me in. I want to know more." + +What do you do: +> Tell him everything, but say you aren't a member +You start explain to Mr. Greenwall what the Fairview Cult is, but that say you are not a member. He nods his head and the restraints open to let you go. As you walk out of the office, Dominic Republican and The Scarecrow, both from the 440 rap group, gang up on you for ratting out the Fairview Cult. + +The Scarecrow grabs both of your arms and rips them right off your body, then uses them for himeself, tossing his old arms on the floor. Next, Dominic rips out your soul, laughing, and puts it in a jar. You spend the next 10,000 years alone in this small, dark jar until the rubber seal finally decomposes. + +Sniff Sniff. I smell a rat! +> Click here to end the game +Please read this disclaimer before continuing ... + +DISCLAIMER +The Fairview Highschool Game is pure fiction. The name "Fairview" was chosen as it is a very popular name for high schools and is not intended to represent any one high school. Also, all of the situations, locations, and characters in the game are fictional. Any likeness or resemblance to persons, places, or anything else is strictly coincidental.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Mr. Greenwall grunts and says: + +"Fine. We can take care of this form later. So tell me, I keep hearing things about this "Fairview Cult." Please, fill me in. I want to know more." + +What do you do: +> Say "A cult in Fairview? That sounds terrible!" +Mr. Greenwall gives a stern look and shouts: + +"You know exactly what the Fairview Cult is! DO NOT WASTE MY TIME! TELL ME ABOUT THE CULT, NOW!" + +You feel the cuffs around your hands and feet tightening. What do you do:<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to stop by the art room. + +You see a few people you know hanging out in the art room: Joe Barney (the All-American of Fairview Park), Number 2, and Number 3 (both from the Fairview Cult). What do you do: +> Ignore Joe and continue to the office +You decide to ignore Joe and contiue down to the office. + +As you are leaving the art room, Number 2 yells at you for not giving respect where respect is due. Shocked at this comment, you start to walk backward and accidentaly walk into a spinning clay wheel. + +The clay wheel digs into your side, causing you to fall right on top it. The clay on the wheel has an exacto knife stuck in it, blade side up, so the exato knife goes right through your eye. Plus, since it's spinning around, it moves all around in your head, causing blood to start pouring out of all of your gaping wounds. + +Of course, the clay gets all bloody. The art student working on his clay project gets mad you for ruining his clay project and stomps you to death. + +Tsk Tsk Tsk. You should have said hi to The All American of Fairview Park, Joe Barney<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to go to sleep. +The teacher wakes you up with a note to go to the office. Mr. Greenwall, the associate principal, wants to talk to you. + +What do you do: +> Refuse to go to the office +You decide to refuse to go to the office. + +Your language teacher shrugs and says, "okay, you can go at the end of class." He then tells you to go to the office for violating the "12 inch" rule of sleeping in class. + +What do you do:<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Congratulations! You made it to second period! Acording to your schedule, you have Foreign Language Class now. + +During the first few minutes of second period, the highschool morning annoucments are played. The morning anouncers comes on the TV and give the usual, boring announcments. They remind everyone that today is a pep-rally and that the student council ellection winners will be officially crowned today. + +The announcments end, and class begins. What would you like to do? +> Do homework for another class +You decide to do homework for another class + +The teacher catches you doing other homework and laughs, saying, "thank goodness for the right to bear arms!" He then lifts up his shirt sleeves and beats you to a bloody pulp. + +Your classmates find this hysterical and promise not to tell on the teacher because he is so cool. + +Well hey, atleast you got your math homework done.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to stay in study hall. +As you sit innocently in study hall, some one wearing a "Fairview Cult" tee-shirt slips you the Fairview Cult Bulletin. After you read it, he asks you if you would like to join the Fairview Cult. What do you do: +> Ignore him +You decide to ignore him. + +The cult guy keeps trying to convince you to join. The study hall monitor hears the whispers and yells at you for talking. When you try to explain that you weren't talking, you get sent down to the office. As you walk in his office, the Principal Schillick grabs the paddle on his wall and says, with an evil sneer, "I've been looking for an excuse to use this." He then beats you to death with it. + +What a loser. YOU DIED +> Click here to end the game +Well, I gues you couldn't cut it in the life of a FHS student. Better luck next time. +Your final score is: 000<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to wake up and go to school. + +You arrive at school, and, of course, it is first period. Thanks to the wonderfully logical F.H.S. scheduling, you have a study hall. What would you like to do: +> Sign up as an A/V Aide +You decide to become an aide for the A/V department. +You can do whatever you want. What would you like to do: +> Roam around the halls +You decide to roam the halls. + +You are walking around the quiet, musky smelling halls of FHS, loving your ability to roam freely as an A/V aide. While looking for things to do, you run into a roving band of suburban gangster wannabes - middle class, white teenagers dressed and talking as if they were born in the ghetto. The start beating you up for "Roamin' Der Hallz!" You call out for the nearest teacher, Doc Shaver, but he is nowhere in sight. + +Damn suburban gangster wannabes!. YOU DIED<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to become an aide for the A/V department. +You can do whatever you want. What would you like to do: +> Stay In the A/V Office +You decide to stay. + +While chilling in the A/V office, watching daytime court dramas, Number 4 from the Fairview Cult passes through and hands you the Fairview Cult Bulletin. Then, he asks you if you would like to join the cult. What do you say:<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to wake up and go to school. + +You arrive at school, and, of course, it is first period. Thanks to the wonderfully logical F.H.S. scheduling, you have a study hall. What would you like to do: +> Go to the library +You decide to go to the library. + +As you walk in, Mrs. Rollings, the school librarian yells at you and tells you to go back to study hall. Only half of the study hall is allowed in the library, and today is not your alphebetically designated day. What would you like to do:<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>*BEEP*BEEP*BEEP*BEEP* + +It's 6:30am. What are you going to do: +> Stay home and sleep +You decide to stay home and sleep. +Mr. GreenWall, the assistant principal, calls home and alerts your mother that you are not at school. What are you going to do: +> Talk it out with your mom +You decided to try to talk it out with your mom. +Your talking does not work, so your mom grabs your dad's shotgun from under her mattress and **BOOM** she shoots you. + +Stay home in a game about school? How lame!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to stay home and sleep. +Mr. GreenWall, the assistant principal, calls home and alerts your mother that you are not at school. What are you going to do: +> Run away from your mom +You decide to run away from your mom. +Your mom chases you outside and catches up with you. She then proceeds to beat your head against the curb. + +Stay home in a game about school? How lame!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Born in 1900 you were a prosperous lawyer in Ohio. You had a wife, a good job and a good salary. + +In 1929 the banks went bust, money became worthless and the Great Depression destroyed America. Your life savings were lost and your world destroyed. Many banks closed, dollars weren't worth the ink to print them, lenders demanded their money back and your life changed forever. First you were sacked, your office closed and unable to find work you were forced to watch as your personal belongings were sold one by one. Your wife, pregnant with your first child, caught pneumonia which worsened and on Christmas Day she died. + +Your last dollars were spent on her funeral and tombstone. + +Days later your house was repossessed; destitute and desperate you joined the millions travelling from town to town seeking work but there was nothing: one in three Americans were unemployed and there were no jobs available. Crime became the answer for many, including you. + +One desperate night you broke into a shop and stole food, drink and the money in the till: thirteen Dollars. The robbery was noticed by a passing policeman and though you tried to flee on foot you were cornered in an alley and arrested by several armed policemen. Taken to prison you were swiftly put on trial, convicted and sentenced to three years imprisonment. Locked in a cell you were forgotten. + +It is in prison that you met John Dillinger and his friends. + +John Dillinger, a handsome joker with an addiction for chewing gum, came to befriend you. He was in prison for a small-time robbery as well but because he used a gun he received a ten year sentence. He has been forgotten too: betrayed by his friends, rejected by his family and divorced by his wife. Over the years you became close friends with him and several other criminals, all convicted bank robbers. Over time you befriend Pete Pierpont, Red Hamilton, Charlie Makley, Russell Clark and Homer Van Meter, except for Homer all are surving lengthy sentences. + +Finally your day comes: in the spring of 1933 you and John are paroled on the same day, a short while later Homer is released from prison as well and moves away, drifting in and out of contact. On the day of your release Pete, Charlie, Red and Russell give you and John two lists: one of banks that they know would be easy to rob and one of fellow criminals you could team up with if you do plan a robbery. You throw away your lists, return to your hometown in Ohio and determined to go straight you try to get a legitimate job. + +Prison did not give you any money when you were released, make any arrangements to help you or even keep track of you. After three years the Depression still holds America in its terrible grip as strongly as ever - you only survive at all thanks to Soup Kitchens and Homeless Shelters and all your desperate attempts to get a job end in failure. Day after miserable day you sit on the streets or stand in the bread lines thinking about your friends in prison. + +Finally one summer day you have had enough: you travel to John's home in Mooresville, Indiana where you find your friend glad to see you. He has been planning a bank robbery of his own with two kids called William Shaw and Paul Parker that he met in a pool hall and he is glad to have you join them. One summer's day you drive out to begin your fateful outlaw career... +> Click here to begin your Outlaw Career +One morning you drive up outside the New Carlisle National Bank and leaving Paul in the car you, John and William walk into the bank. You approach the lone cashier and draw your guns. + +"Alright buddy, open the safe," John tells him with a smile. + +The cashier takes some keys, crosses to the safe and tries to open it but he is nervous and fumbles with the lock. + +"He's stalling," William snaps to you and John. "Let me drill him." + +You shake your head. "Take your time," you tell the cashier encouragingly. + +Finally he gets the safe door open, as he does a female bank teller walks in. John turns and trains his gun on her. + +"I don't want to hurt you," he tells her and indicates with his gun that she should get over by the wall. "You hadn't ought to come in the bank so early," he tells her with a smile. + +You make the tellers fill a sack with money and then lock them in the vault, walk out of the bank and hurry inside the car with Paul. As you drive away towards the state border to Indiana you count the money and find you have stolen $11,000, making each person's share $2,700. Your first crime taking you down the outlaw road has been a lucrative one. +> No going back now +After the New Carlisle bank robbery you, John and the teenagers drive down to Kansas where you hide out in the town of Muncie at the apartment of a hard-drinking friend of William's called Harry Copeland. You lie low at the apartment while Harry and John commit a few local robberies and then begin planning to rob a bank in the little town of Daleville, Indiana. + +The night before the robbery Harry, William and Paul all drink heavily and on the morning of the planned robbery Harry is alright but William and Paul are too hung-over to go on the robbery. John decides to go ahead and rob the bank with just you and Harry but you are worried if three people are enough to pull the job off. +> Join John and Harry in robbing the Daleville Bank +You, John and Harry stroll out of the apartment, round to the back of it and get into Harry's car. As you start to pull down an alleyway towards the front you are startled to see several policemen armed with pistols running into the apartment - they don't even see you. Calmly John steers the car right onto the road and drives away from the raid. + +Fleeing to a hotel in a nearby town you lie low until the next morning when you read in newspapers how William and Paul were arrested in their beds during the raid on the apartment. The three of you have some discussion and decide to go ahead with your plans to rob the Daleville Bank the next morning. + +Just two days after the raid you and John stroll into the bank, draw your pistols and train them on the sole bank teller behind the counter. + +"This is a stickup," John tells her. "Get me the money honey." + +John leaps over the counter, strides into the open safe and quickly scoops up the money inside before you both lock the teller inside, stroll outside and jump in the back of Harry's car. As you drive out of town you count the money and find you have gotten away with $3,500, making your share of the money $1,100, not bad for a dishonest day's work. +> Another Bank Job +Two weeks after the Daleville Robbery the three of you drive into the little town of Montpelier, while Harry stays in the car you and John stroll into the bank, draw your pistols on the customers and tellers inside and announce this is a stick-up. Almost immediately a female teller reaches towards a button on the wall and John trains his gun on her. + +"What are you trying to do, set off that alarm?" he asks, chewing his gum. + +"I would if I could," the woman snaps back. + +John herds the prisoners up against a wall while you stride into the vault and shove all the money you can find inside into a bag before locking the customers inside the vault. As you walk out of the bank you encounter an old man standing outside who has obviously been watching what has happened through the windows. + +"Looks like the bank's being held up again," he comments to the pair of you. + +"It's so easy, I'm not surprised," you tell him with a smile. Climbing in the car you drive off with Harry and count the money in the back. You have stolen $10,000, making your share $3,300. Soon after the robbery you get word that your old prison friend Homer Van Meter wants to meet so the three of you drive up to Chicago, Illinois to see him. + +Homer, a skinny, cold character who in prison was something as a loner greets the three of you looking happier than you remember seeing him looking before. + +"Hello pals," he says shaking hands with you all. "I've been reading about your bank jobs in Indiana and Ohio, they're great stuff. I've teamed up with an outfit myself led by Baby Face Nelson. You know him right, used to lead a gang three years ago and escaped from prison last year? He's a real tough character." + +"I heard he was gun-crazy and a killer," Harry says frowning. + +"Well maybe a little but he's a guy you want on your side in a gun-battle," Homer says cheerfully. "He's put together a nice little crew, there's me, a former boxer called Tommy Carroll, Eddie Green of the Barker-Karpis Gang, that old veteran masterthief Eddie Bentz and two Chicago gangsters called Earl Doyle and Chuck Fisher. We're looking at a bank job in Grand Haven, Michigan later this month if you are interested." + +"Thanks Homer but Harry and I have some scores of our own lined up," John tells him. "I've got a mind to try and get some guns smuggled into Michigan State Pen to help Pete, Charles, Red and Russell bust out. If I can get them out we can start up our own gang." + +"Well the offer is always there if you want it," Homer tells John before turning to you. "What do you reckon? You want to join the Nelson Gang?" +> Join Homer in the Nelson Gang +You agree to go with Homer who assures you on the journey to the town of Grand Haven, Michigan that your experience robbing three banks more than qualifies you to join Nelson's group - most of the gang except Nelson and Bentz have less experience. In Grand Haven Homer goes off for a few days to arrange an introduction between you, Nelson and the rest of the gang. + +Nelson lives up to his nickname (which he despises, preferring people call him Jimmy), he is a baby-faced youthful little man but with a distinct air of menace. Eddie Green is a red-haired veteran stick-up man, Tommy Carroll is a handsome ex-boxer while the two recruits Earl Doyle and Chuck Fisher are typical grim-faced gangsters. Eddie Bentz is blond-haired and capable, he has a long history of pulling off some of the most successful bank robberies of the last ten years. + +One summer's day you, Eddie Bentz and Jimmy walk into the bank while Homer and Earl guard the doors, Eddie Green and Tommy wait on the streets and Chuck sits in the escape car. The three of you walk up to the counter and draw your pistols while Jimmy whips a machine gun out from under his coat. + +"Hands up," he barks. + +Eddie Green and Tommy hurry inside as planned and help you take the customers and bank staff hostage while Eddie and Jimmy begin emptying the contents of the vault into sacks. + +Outside you hear Homer shout "Hurry, the alarm's been raised!" + +"Don't shoot unless they start shooting first," Eddie B cautions Jimmy. + +With the sack of money in hand you all run out on the street as a man with a shotgun fires at you from the other side of the road, blasting a hole in a bank window - Jimmy returns fire wit his machine gun making the man dive for cover as the bullets blast through car windows and glass store fronts. The others run out onto the street as well. + +At that point you notice something. + +"Our car, where is it?" you demand. + +"Chuck panicked and drove off," Homer yells back to you. + +For a moment you are all stunned and then Eddie B runs into the road and waving his pistol he forces an approaching car to stop. As the woman inside scrambles out Eddie stands by the open door and yells for you all to get in. Most of your fellow gang members start running towards him. + +"We all won't fit in that little car," Earl shouts back. "We should run for it." +> Run towards the car +You join the others in running towards the car, there isn't enough room for everybody inside the compact car so while Eddie B drives and Jimmy, Tommy and Eddie G pile in you and Homer have to stand on the running boards as you drive out of town - looking back you see Earl Doyle tackled to the ground and captured by townsfolk. Once you are out of town you are able to hijack a second car out of town and drive on across the state. + +Counting the money you find you have stolen just $3,500, making your share $500. Eddie B is furious at the poorly executed robbery and derides all of you as a gang of amateurs. He plans to go to New York and essentially retire from crime. Jimmy is not much perturbed and is quickly putting together plans to rob another bank, this time in Minnesota. +> Go into retirement with Eddie B in New York +You decide to go into hiding with Eddie Bentz, relying on the wily veteran to keep you both out of trouble. This he largely manages: while your fellow gang members are all robbing banks, getting arrested or shot you two live quietly in hotels in New York, rarely venturing outside. You read in papers of Harry Copeland's arrest, of the arrest of Chuck Fisher and the shooting deaths of Eddie Green and Tommy Carroll. Soon of your friends only John Dillinger, Baby Face Nelson and Homer Van Meter remain at large and the whole country is looking for them. + +Finally one day, more to relieve the boredom than anything else, you and Eddie drive up to Vermont where you sit in the car while Eddie goes into the bank. He emerges five minutes later with a sack of money and the two of you drive back down south. You have both stolen $8,500, making your share of the money $4,200. + +You return to New York and continue to live quietly for the rest of the year: by the end of the year John, Homer and Baby Face have all been tracked down and killed by local lawmen or the FBI. You and Eddie are the only members of the Dillinger or Nelson Gangs still at large and now the FBI are focusing all their resources on finding you two... you begin to question whether it is safe to remain in New York. +> Leave America and go to Cuba +You elect to go to Cuba at the start of 1935, a year later Eddie is tracked down and arrested by FBI Agents. In Cuba you are able to purchase a small house at Varadero Beach and live the life of a retired criminal. Perhaps your career was not as exciting as John Dillinger's or Baby Face Nelson's or some of your other contemporaries but at least you survived to enjoy your stolen money. +> Retirement +For many decades you live in peaceful retirement in Cuba while policemen and FBI Agents across America continue to search for you for decades. Eventually interest in your winds down and completely fades away when World War 2 breaks out. The troubles of that War, and the Cuban Revolution, do not affect you in your little paradise, carefully investing your stolen money in businesses you make enough money to live in comfort for the rest of your life. + +Alone of the members of the Dillinger Gang you have triumphed and enjoy a life of ease and luxury after so many dangers. The FBI never discover your identity and you live out your days in peace, always keeping fresh the memory of your companions and the terrible gunfights and robberies you survived that they didn't. + +You have triumphed. +> The End +This is a Hidden Bonus page that rewards anyone who survived the story with extra Score points - if you want others to see your Score please leave a comment after you have finished reading this story. + +If you survived the story but served a lengthy prison sentence you receive a bonus of 50,000. + +If you survived the story and served no lengthy prison sentence you receive a bonus of 100,000. + +Finally thank you for taking the time to read my story. +> Your Outlaw Career is over +This lists the Names, Gunfights, Injured, Killed, Robberies, Score and Fates of your fellow Outlaws so you can see how well you compare to them. + +1: John Dillinger, Gunfights: 12, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 11, Score: $62,000 - KILLED + +2: Red Hamilton - Gunfights: 9, Injured: 1, Killed: 1, Robberies: 6, Score: $37,600 - KILLED + +3: Homer Van Meter - Gunfights: 9, Injured: 2, Killed: 3, Robberies: 6, Score: $29,500 - KILLED + +4: Baby Face Nelson, Gunfights: 7, Injured: 5, Killed: 5, Robberies: 5, Score: $25,300 - KILLED + + +5: Tommy Carroll - Gunfights: 6, Injured: 1, Killed: 1, Robberies: 5, Score: $23,900 - KILLED + +6: Eddie Green - Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 4, Score: $19,700 - KILLED + +7: Pete Pierpont - Gunfights: 4, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 3, Score: $17,100 - KILLED + +8: Charles Makley - Gunfights: 4, Injured: 2, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: $17,100 - KILLED + +9: Russell Clark - Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: $17,100 - ARRESTED + +10: Harry Copeland - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: $12,400 - ARRESTED + +11: Chuck Fisher - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 2, Score: $5,800 - ARRESTED + +12: John Chase - Gunfights: 5, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: $5,600 - ARRESTED + +13: Eddie Bentz - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 2, Score: $4,700 - ARRESTED + +14: William Shaw - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: $2,700 - ARRESTED + +15: Paul Parker - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: $2,700 - ARRESTED + +16: Earl Doyle - Gunfights: 0, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: $500 - ARRESTED +> Click here to see some information about how I wrote this +John Dillinger was described by his friend Harry Pierpont as "the kind of guy you would want for a brother". He was an easy-going, friendly and charismatic person who chewed gum through his robberies, said things like "Attaboy sport" and avoided unnecessary killings and shootings (except one time) throughout his career. + +In contrast to this his fellow outlaw Baby Face Nelson could fairly be described as a murderous psychopath who laughed on multiple occasions as he sprayed machine gun bullets towards innocent civilians including women and children. Dillinger's fellow outlaws were usually murderous too, to a lesser or greater extent, and most paid the price for their lives of crime. + +I am hugely indebted to Bryan Burrough's fantastic book Public Enemies (which was turned into a film starring a strangely charmless Johnny Depp as Dillinger), the FBI Reading Room Files about their manhunt of Dillinger and Baby Face Nelson Journal which is a great little website full of little bits of information about the Gang. + +This story is part of the larger American Outlaws series, a set of books that are based mainly around the robberies, gunfights and shootings that various Outlaw gangs in American History were involved in. After heavy research these stories become incredibly easy to write as they are 90% based on true history, hence a 100 page story in a month becomes no major challenge once the research is done. + +These non-fiction story-games are not choose your own adventures in the traditional sense of the term but it is a new approach to the genre that I hope will prove popular. In the future I want to experiment with new formats for the whole choose your own adventure concept and I want to sincerely thank any readers who have been patient or curious enough to read this far - their feedback good or bad really encourages and assists my writing so thank you. + +John once said "all my life I wanted to be a bank robber, carry a gun and wear a mask. Now that it's happened I guess I'm just about the best bank robber they ever had and I sure am happy." + +Those last four words are pretty much how I feel about writing. :D<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to go into hiding with Eddie Bentz, relying on the wily veteran to keep you both out of trouble. This he largely manages: while your fellow gang members are all robbing banks, getting arrested or shot you two live quietly in hotels in New York, rarely venturing outside. You read in papers of Harry Copeland's arrest, of the arrest of Chuck Fisher and the shooting deaths of Eddie Green and Tommy Carroll. Soon of your friends only John Dillinger, Baby Face Nelson and Homer Van Meter remain at large and the whole country is looking for them. + +Finally one day, more to relieve the boredom than anything else, you and Eddie drive up to Vermont where you sit in the car while Eddie goes into the bank. He emerges five minutes later with a sack of money and the two of you drive back down south. You have both stolen $8,500, making your share of the money $4,200. + +You return to New York and continue to live quietly for the rest of the year: by the end of the year John, Homer and Baby Face have all been tracked down and killed by local lawmen or the FBI. You and Eddie are the only members of the Dillinger or Nelson Gangs still at large and now the FBI are focusing all their resources on finding you two... you begin to question whether it is safe to remain in New York. +> Stay in New York with Eddie +You remain in hiding with Eddie in New York for most of another two years until, inevitably, the FBI tracks you down. The first thing you know about what is happening is when, in the middle of the night, your hotel door is smashed open and within seconds FBI Agents are hauling you from your bed and clasping handcuffs on you. Eddie is taken into custody as well and the two of you receive long prison sentences. +> Alcatraz +You are sentenced to life imprisonment on charges of bank robbery and in 1936 you are sent to Alcatraz Penitentiary where Baby Face Nelson's companion John Paul Chase is already serving time. You remain there until it closes in 1963, seven years later you are paroled. By this time you are an old man and no longer deemed a threat to society. + +One by one your old friends pass on, many indeed are already gone. Harry Pierpont and Charles Makley are sentenced to be executed for murder, when they try to escape from prison in 1934 Charles is shot dead and Harry is badly wounded, he is executed a month later. Russell Clark dies of cancer in 1968, John Chase dies of the same thing in 1973. The last of your fellow outlaws, William Shaw, dies in a hotel fire in 1977. + +You continue, retiring to Washington to live out your remaining days. Your life is quiet and peaceful now. The rat-tat-tat of the machine guns, booms of the shotguns and pops of the pistol are quiet now, the screams of the dying and injured have been replaced by birdsong in the trees. The only money now you have are a few dimes in your pocket. + +When you reflect back on your crimes and punishment you do wonder if it was really all worth it?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You join the others in running towards the car, there isn't enough room for everybody inside the compact car so while Eddie B drives and Jimmy, Tommy and Eddie G pile in you and Homer have to stand on the running boards as you drive out of town - looking back you see Earl Doyle tackled to the ground and captured by townsfolk. Once you are out of town you are able to hijack a second car out of town and drive on across the state. + +Counting the money you find you have stolen just $3,500, making your share $500. Eddie B is furious at the poorly executed robbery and derides all of you as a gang of amateurs. He plans to go to New York and essentially retire from crime. Jimmy is not much perturbed and is quickly putting together plans to rob another bank, this time in Minnesota. +> Join the Nelson Gang in robbing the Minnesota bank +You stick with the Nelson Gang and two months after the Grand Haven fiasco you drive into Brainerd, Minnesota. This time Jimmy leaves you in the car while he leads Homer, Tommy, Eddie and Chuck into the bank. You sit tight for ten minutes drumming your fingers impatiently on the dashboard until finally your companions emerge. There is no sign that the alarm has been raised. + +Suddenly Jimmy does an inexplicable thing. He raises his machine gun and fires a burst of bullets into a shop front across the street, making the people inside dive for cover. Striding towards the car he continues to fire at shop fronts and cars grinning before jumping in the car after the others and all of you drive out of town. You are not convinced Jimmy is completely mentally stable. + +The Gang has escaped with $32,000, making your share $5,300. Jimmy decides that you should all split up: Chuck and Tommy will drive down to San Antonio, Texas and hide out while Jimmy, Eddie and Homer will go to St Paul, Minnesota. In the papers you read how John and Harry succeeded in busting your friends out of prison where they have formed a gang and started robbing banks but as you have no idea where they are or how to find them you'll have to hide out with one of the halves of the Nelson Gang for now. +> Hide out with Chuck and Tommy in San Antonio +You drive south with Chuck and Tommy to San Antonio where you hide out for a few months and enjoy yourself relaxing in the city's bars and nightclubs. Occasionally you get the feeling that people are watching you but you can't be sure. One afternoon Tommy announces he intends to go visit a local bar and invites Chuck to join him but Chuck prefers to stay at the apartment so Tommy invites you. +> Stay in the apartment with Chuck +You relax at the apartment, reading a book in your bedroom while Chuck listens to the radio in the living room. When there is a knock on the door you hear Chuck go to answer it. A second later you hear "FBI! You're under arrest!" and the sound of several mean stampeding into the house. Springing to your feet you have only moments to make a decision. Your only possible escape route is to scramble out the window but it is a very long way to the ground... +> Climb out the window +Crossing to the window you throw it open and quickly climb out. Taking a deep breath you jump and land on the roof of a building below. Hearing a shout from the open window of your room you have no time to rest but race across that roof to a door leading back into your apartment building but two floors below your apartment. Bursting through it you jump down several flights of stairs as you hear voices shouting above you and running feet on the stairs. + +You race out of your apartment building and quickly flag down a passing taxi. Jumping inside you order it to take you to the train station where you quickly book the next train out of town. Making your way back to St Paul you reunite with Jimmy, Homer, Eddie and Tommy, who also escaped San Antonio after shooting two policemen in a gunfight. Chuck was arrested but told the FBI nothing. + +The five of you pass a quiet winter and begin to make plans for more bank jobs next spring. However that spring you hear how John Dillinger, recently escaped from prison and his friend Red Hamilton want to join forces with the Nelson Gang. A meeting is soon arranged between you all. +> The Terror Gang +Seven men meet in Minneapolis: you, John Dillinger, Red Hamilton, Baby Face Nelson, Homer Van Meter, Tommy Carroll and Eddie Green. You are all experienced bank robbers, most of you are killers and together you form one of the deadliest gangs of Outlaws in American History. You, John, Red and Homer are old friends and it is through this connection with Homer that John and Red are accepted into the Nelson Gang after their respective prison escapes and recovery from gunshot wounds. + +Baby Face Nelson is a youthful, dangerous little man with great ambitions that contrast sharply with John's more easy-going demeanour and Red's more absent-minded loyalty. Homer remains a skinny loner while Tommy, a handsome and deadly ex-boxer and Eddie, a red-haired veteran criminal, make up the rest of the gang. + +You already have your targets picked: two banks at Sioux Falls, South Dakota and Mason City, Iowa. You plan to hit the first bank the next day, meanwhile Nelson (everyone calls him Jimmy), who considers himself the leader of the gang, wants to drive down and check out the bank with his friend petty criminal John Chase while the rest of you go over your plans and make ready for the robbery. +> Join Jimmy and John in checking out the bank +While the rest of the gang stay at the hideout and make ready you, Jimmy and John start driving towards South Dakota but almost immediately a car cuts in front of you. Irritated Jimmy, who is at the wheel, cuts ahead of him and the car cuts in front of him again. Jimmy loses his temper and rams his car against the other, trying to force it onto the kerb. The other car breaks and the man inside jumps out. + +Jimmy jumps out with his pistol in his hand and you can tell he means to shoot the angry driver. +> Join him in shooting the other driver +You join Jimmy in jumping out and together you both shoot the man in the chest, he falls to the ground. A woman screams, jumps out of the car and runs to his side. + +"You've killed him," she wails. + +"Keep your damned mouth shut or I'll let you have it too," Jimmy snarls at her. You both jump back inside your car and speed off back to the hideout. The next day you prepare to set off with the gang to rob the Sioux Falls Bank. +> The Sioux Falls Raid +Snow lies thickly on the ground as you and your companions drive into the little town of Sioux Falls, South Dakota. Eddie stays in the car, Tommy and Red take positions at the door while Jimmy leads the rest of you into the busy bank. Jimmy pulls a machine gun out from under his coat and the rest of you draw your pistols. + +"This is a hold up!" Jimmy shouts. "Everyone on the floor!" + +Almost immediately an alarm starts ringing, John and Homer ignore it as they head into the vault while you and Jimmy guard the terrified hostages. + +"I'd like to know who set the alarm off," Jimmy yells, striding up and down the bank angrily and pointing his machine gun at people. "Who did it? Who? If you want to get killed just make some move! Go on, just make some move!" + +Looking out the window you see a policeman on a motorbike stop just outside the bank. + +"Shoot him," Jimmy yells at you. +> Shoot the cop +Raising your pistol you fire several shots through the window: the cop is hit four times and falls to the ground. Jimmy laughs. Moments later John and Homer are finished in the vault and hurrying outside surrounded by hostages you all scramble into the car. A few stray shots are fired at you, Jimmy fires bursts from his machine gun in reply. On the drive out of town you count the money and find you have stolen $46,000, making your share $6,500. + +A week later you all drive into Mason City, Iowa for your next bank job. Tommy stays in the car and Jimmy and John guard the doors while you lead Homer, Eddie and Tommy into the large First National Bank. Upon entering Eddie fires a burst of bullets from his machine gun into the ceiling. + +"Hands up! Hands up!" you shout. "Everybody on the floor!" + +Homer strides towards the counter, one of the teller runs from the counter into an office and tries to slams the door. Homer fires a burst of bullets through the thin wooden door and you hear a shout of pain. Suddenly there is a strange whumping noise and something hits Eddie in the back. It is a tear gas canister and it quickly begins leaking out clouds of gas. + +Looking up you see a blue-uniformed guard sitting in a cage lined with bulletproof glass, he has just fired the tear gas through a narrow gun slit and is hastily trying to reload the tear gas gun. + +"Get that son of a bitch with the tear gas!" Eddie yells at you, rubbing his back angrily. +> Fire at the guard +You fire several shots at the guard cage, mostly hitting the bulletproof glass but one shot goes through the narrow gun port and grazes the side of the guard's head. At that moment you hear a burst of machine gun fire outside. Leaving Eddie and Homer to control the lobby while Red deals with the vault you hurry outside. John is immediately outside the doors surrounded by hostages but Jimmy is further down the street, firing his machine gun wildly and laughing. You watch as he shoots an unarmed old man in the leg, knocking him to the ground. You jog over. + +"I thought you were a cop you son of a bitch," Jimmy yells at him. + +"I'm not a cop," the man moans. + +"Did you have to do that?" you ask Jimmy wearily. + +"I thought he was a cop," Jimmy snaps at you. + +You turn around as a gunshot rings out: a man firing from a window has clipped John in the shoulder. You and John fire your pistols at the window and the man inside jumps back. John shouts to those in the bank that you're all leaving a moment later Red, Eddie and Homer come jogging out. As they do the man in the window fires again, this time grazing Red's shoulder. + +Surrounded by hostages you all pile into the car and drive out of town surrounded by hostages. You are all in a bad mood, John and Red's wounds are painful but not serious and you had to leave before you could get all the money. Even so you discover that you have stolen $52,000, making your share $7,400. + +Your latest bank robbery has made you all the most wanted criminals in America and it is agreed that you should all split up. Jimmy and his friend John Chase are going out to Reno, Nevada, about Jimmy has been recruited by the Mob to kill an informer. John and Homer are going to St Paul, Minnesota to rent apartments, Eddie is going to Indianapolis, Indiana to lie low and Red and Tommy plan to hide out in Chicago, Illinois. You will have to hide out with until the heat wears off. +> Go with Jimmy to Reno to kill a guy +You drive to Reno with Jimmy and John Chase and once you arrive Jimmy meets with a man who gives him the address of the Mob Informer Roy Fritsch. You drive out to his house and ring the doorbell - as soon as Fritch opens the door you and Jimmy train your guns on him and order him into the car. The terrified man obeys and you all drive out of town and park next to an abandoned mine shaft. Jimmy orders John to take Fritsch out of the car over to the mine shaft - once the two are out of the car he glances at you. + +"Do you want to drop him or shall I?" he asks. +> Kill the man +You and Jimmy get out of the car and walk up to the man. He looks terrified and stares at you with pleading eyes but you hardly glance at him. Raising your pistol you shoot him once in the head and he falls to the ground. Jimmy pumps several more bullets into his motionless back before dragging him over to the abandoned mine shaft and dropping him in. + +For most of the next month you remain around Reno, Nevada and read about the search for you and your friends. At the start of April John and Homer escape St Paul after a shootout with FBI Agents, days later Eddie is killed in the same area. Eddie's death is the trigger that prompts you and the rest of the gang to reunite in the second half of April. +> Back Together +In Chicago the Gang comes back together in a sombre mood: Eddie's death has hit you all hard and while Jimmy is keen to continue robbing banks the rest of the Gang are in low spirits (even John) and you decide what you need is a holiday so you all make plans to have a rest in a little inn called Little Bohemia Lodge in the middle of a wood in Wisconsin. + +This planned holiday doesn't do much to relax you all, you soon get the feeling that the staff and guests of the Lodge recognize you all as the notorious outlaws that you are and begin making plans to leave the Lodge. One night you are all in your rooms in the Lodge packing when suddenly you hear gunshots outside. + +It is not a little gunfire either but a storm: the boom of a shotgun, the rattle of a machine gun and the pops of pistols all fill the night air, glancing out the window you see several men hiding in the trees are shooting the hell out of a car. Instinctively most of the gang begin making for a back window except Jimmy who characteristically grabs a pistol and runs for the front door. +> Follow Jimmy out the front door +You and Jimmy throw open the front door, fire several shots with your pistols at the men in the trees and run off to the right. Racing through the trees you finally make it to a brightly-lit house and run inside, startling an old man. + +"Now don't get excited," Jimmy tells him. "I won't harm you but this is a matter of life and death. We need your car." + +As he is speaking a car pulls up outside. + +"Who does that car belong to?" you ask the old man. + +"I don't know," he replies. + +Pistols held ready you cautiously approach the car to find it is full of men, you recognize three of them as staff from the Lodge. You order most of them out, leaving three inside as hostages. Jimmy gets in the front while you get in the back and order the driver to drive. Before he can start yet another car, this one with three men in it, pulls up next to you. + +"We're FBI, who's in that car?" the man asks. + +Immediately Jimmy jumps out of the car, pistol in his hand, and approaches the car of FBI Agents. +> Follow him +"I know you bastards are wearing bulletproof vests," Jimmy declares. "So I'll give it to you high and low." + +You both raise your pistols and open fire. + +Your first shot grazes the driver in the head, panicking he throws open the car's passenger door and tumbles out onto the ground, the men in the back seat doing likewise. They both spring to their feet to run and you open up on them, hitting one of the men in the neck and the other man in the back. The men in the car behind you start running and Jimmy turns and fires at them too. + +You and Jimmy jump into the FBI car and drive away. Behind you one of the FBI Agents fires his pistol at you but misses. As you drive away you notice another car full of FBI Agents driving towards you - finding a flashlight under the dashboard you click it on and shine the light full in the face of the approaching car, temporarily blinding the people inside until you safely pass. + +You and Jimmy escape from Wisconsin after a series of difficult adventures and it takes you two months to reunite with the rest of the gang: in that time Red and Tommy are both killed by lawmen in separate gun battles and only your friends John and Homer are left. It is a very depleted gang that arranges a rendezvous in Indiana at the end of June. +> The Gang back together again +It is a weary and hunted group of men who gather in Indiana at the end of June. By this point you and John have survived being part of two outlaw gangs who have all been arrested or killed and now the members of your third gang are being hunted down and killed one by one. The writing is on the wall and while you and Homer are downcast and depressed John and Jimmy, who is never afraid of anything, remain upbeat and optimistic. + +Jimmy brings his friend John Chase with him and the five of you discuss robbing a bank in the town of South Bend. You are worried about lack of members but Jimmy persuades the rest of you to let his friend John, a handsome and loyal but not over-intelligent individual, to join your Gang. You accept and that sunny day drive into South Bend to pull off your latest robbery. + +You park the car and all climb out, Jimmy stays next to the car while you and Homer take up positions outside the bank while the two John's go inside. You hear gunshots inside. There is a policeman further down the street and at the sound of the shots he starts walking towards the bank. At your side Homer raises his rifle. +> Shoot the cop +You raise your rifle and fire a single shot into the policeman's chest, fatally wounding him. At the sounds of the gunshots Jimmy opens fire with his machine gun after a civilian shot him in his bullet proof vest - you see a teenager sprint across the street and jump on Jimmy's back, Jimmy manages to throw him off through a shop window. + +Your companions emerge from the bank surrounded by several hostages, together you move towards the car. Policemen are running to the scene and despite the hostages they open fire on you all anyway. Two hostages are hit in the legs and suddenly Homer falls, a bullet in his head. The wound looks serious but to your amazement Homer manages to struggle into the getaway car. You all drive out of town. + +Sitting in the back you count the money and find you have stolen $28,000, making your share $5,400. Homer's wound is bleeding a lot but turns out to be little more than a flesh wound. After some quick discussion you agree it is best if you all split up, John is going to hide out with friends in Chicago, Jimmy and John Chase are going to rent an apartment just outside Chicago while Homer is driving down to St Paul to lie low. You need to choose who to accompany. +> Hide out in Chicago with John +You go with John to Chicago where you lie low at the apartment of some lady friends of his for a few weeks. In the newspapers you read about how Jimmy and John Chase shoot two policemen and evade capture outside town. John talks about a major train robbery he is thinking of pulling off before fleeing to South America, you like the idea. + +After three weeks in hiding you both go to check out at a movie at the Biograph Theatre called Manhattan Melodrama with John's two lady friends. The movie is a good one, featuring Clark Gable as a petty criminal turned killer called Blakie. At the end of the movie he is executed for a murder and says "Die the way you live, all of a sudden. Don't drag it out, living like that doesn't mean a thing." + +After the movie ends John turns to you and says quietly "It is time to go." + +The two of you, together with your lady companions, all stand up and walk out of the cinema. As you walk down the street you notice men in suits walking rapidly towards you from the right, glancing back you see three more men in suits walking quickly up behind you. They can only be FBI Agents. John has seen them too: he slips his hand in his pocket for his pistol and at the same time steps forward to run towards an alley that opens up just ahead of you to the left. +> Go for your gun +You reach into your pocket for your pistol, as you do the three FBI Agents behind you open fire with your own guns. You and John are both hit several times, staggering forward you make it to the mouth of the alley before collapsing dead in the street, your gun in your hand. John dies at your side: two legendary outlaws finally cut down in one last blaze of gunfire...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You go with John to Chicago where you lie low at the apartment of some lady friends of his for a few weeks. In the newspapers you read about how Jimmy and John Chase shoot two policemen and evade capture outside town. John talks about a major train robbery he is thinking of pulling off before fleeing to South America, you like the idea. + +After three weeks in hiding you both go to check out at a movie at the Biograph Theatre called Manhattan Melodrama with John's two lady friends. The movie is a good one, featuring Clark Gable as a petty criminal turned killer called Blakie. At the end of the movie he is executed for a murder and says "Die the way you live, all of a sudden. Don't drag it out, living like that doesn't mean a thing." + +After the movie ends John turns to you and says quietly "It is time to go." + +The two of you, together with your lady companions, all stand up and walk out of the cinema. As you walk down the street you notice men in suits walking rapidly towards you from the right, glancing back you see three more men in suits walking quickly up behind you. They can only be FBI Agents. John has seen them too: he slips his hand in his pocket for his pistol and at the same time steps forward to run towards an alley that opens up just ahead of you to the left. +> Run for the alley +You concentrate on running and break ahead of John as pistol shots ring out behind you. The Agents are focusing on shooting John, giving you the precious few seconds you need to make it to the alley and race down it. Luck is on your side: there is an open side door to the Biograph Cinema immediately on your left. You dart through it and slam it shut, as you do your last sight is John collapsing dead to the ground at the mouth of the alley. + +You race through the cinema, fists pounding on the locked door behind you: the Biograph has an opening onto two different streets and you race through to the one that opens into the street on the other side of the building from the first exit you used. Hailing a passing taxi you order the driver to take you downtown as fast as possible. + +John Dillinger is dead and you are now the most hunted man in America: you have no choice but to hide out with Jimmy. +> Your last gunfight +You hide out with Jimmy, known throughout America now as Baby Face Nelson, and his loyal friend John Paul Chase for the autumn months, moving from one campsite to another. Finally at the end of November you all decide to seek shelter with a friend of Jimmy's in Wisconsin. You drive up to his home and are startled when a man in a suit comes out to meet you. + +"Is Eddie here?" Jimmy asks him. + +"No," the man replies. "He went downtown to do some shopping." + +"Thank you," Jimmy replies, reverses the car and drives away. As you drive down the road Jimmy glances at you. + +"Sure as hell that was a G man and we caught him with his pants down," Jimmy says with a grim smile. You continue to drive south, crossing the state border into Illinois. As you do you notice a car with two men in it pass you, make a U turn and follow you. Nelson frowns. + +"What the hell is this?" he demands. "Let's see who those birds are." + +Jimmy pulls two U turns of his own to put you all behind the car with the two men in it, accelerating he pulls alongside. + +"Pull over," Jimmy yells. + +In response the other car accelerates ahead. + +"Let them have it," Jimmy shouts to you and John. + +Suddenly one of the men in the other car begins firing pistol shots back at your car. Startled you and John return fire with automatic rifles, the other car accelerates even more and quickly surges ahead out of sight. Your car is slowing down: one of the shots fired at your car has hit the motor. Suddenly a second car passing you in the other lane, again with two men in it pulls a U-Turn and begins following you. Cursing Jimmy pulls his car to the right and brakes, the other car brakes sharply ahead of you on the other side of the road. + +You, Jimmy and John all jump out of your car and open fire with automatic rifles and machine guns on the two men in the other car. You can see one of the men is armed towards a machine gun, moving towards the back of the car, and the other man is armed with a shotgun as he moves towards the front of the car. You and John fire at them both. + +At that moment Jimmy does something incredible: leaving the shelter of your own car which you have all been using as cover he begins to stride directly across the road, advancing in plain sight on the two rival gunmen who are almost certainly FBI Agents. +> Follow Jimmy +You follow Jimmy out from cover and advance on the other lawmen. The man with the machine gun runs out from behind the car, shooting several bullets into your chest. Wincing but still standing you shoot him twice in the chest, fatally wounding him. The other man races from around the front of the car and fires a shotgun blast into your legs. Somehow you remain standing and as the lawman throws aside his shotgun and draws a pistol you raise your machine gun and shoot him once in the head. He falls dead to the ground. + +Both of your opponents are down but you have been fatally wounded: Jimmy is lying motionless on the road, dead as well. You sink to the ground as John Chase stops firing and runs over but it is too late. As you stare up at the sky you succumb to your wounds, slain in this last great gunfight that has brought a dramatic end to your remarkable career.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You hide out with Jimmy, known throughout America now as Baby Face Nelson, and his loyal friend John Paul Chase for the autumn months, moving from one campsite to another. Finally at the end of November you all decide to seek shelter with a friend of Jimmy's in Wisconsin. You drive up to his home and are startled when a man in a suit comes out to meet you. + +"Is Eddie here?" Jimmy asks him. + +"No," the man replies. "He went downtown to do some shopping." + +"Thank you," Jimmy replies, reverses the car and drives away. As you drive down the road Jimmy glances at you. + +"Sure as hell that was a G man and we caught him with his pants down," Jimmy says with a grim smile. You continue to drive south, crossing the state border into Illinois. As you do you notice a car with two men in it pass you, make a U turn and follow you. Nelson frowns. + +"What the hell is this?" he demands. "Let's see who those birds are." + +Jimmy pulls two U turns of his own to put you all behind the car with the two men in it, accelerating he pulls alongside. + +"Pull over," Jimmy yells. + +In response the other car accelerates ahead. + +"Let them have it," Jimmy shouts to you and John. + +Suddenly one of the men in the other car begins firing pistol shots back at your car. Startled you and John return fire with automatic rifles, the other car accelerates even more and quickly surges ahead out of sight. Your car is slowing down: one of the shots fired at your car has hit the motor. Suddenly a second car passing you in the other lane, again with two men in it pulls a U-Turn and begins following you. Cursing Jimmy pulls his car to the right and brakes, the other car brakes sharply ahead of you on the other side of the road. + +You, Jimmy and John all jump out of your car and open fire with automatic rifles and machine guns on the two men in the other car. You can see one of the men is armed towards a machine gun, moving towards the back of the car, and the other man is armed with a shotgun as he moves towards the front of the car. You and John fire at them both. + +At that moment Jimmy does something incredible: leaving the shelter of your own car which you have all been using as cover he begins to stride directly across the road, advancing in plain sight on the two rival gunmen who are almost certainly FBI Agents. +> Cover him from behind your own car +You watch in amazement as Jimmy strides towards the two FBI Agents. One of them runs from the back of the car and fires several shots into Jimmy chest with his machine gun, Jimmy shoots him twice in return, fatally wounding him. The second Agent runs ahead of the car and fires a shotgun blast into Jimmy's legs. Jimmy sways but doesn't fall and as the FBI man throws aside his shotgun and draws a pistol Jimmy shoots him in the head with his machine gun killing him. + +Jimmy staggers on to the FBI car and climbs in. You and John run forward and jump into the car as well, driving away from the two dead lawmen you have left at the scene. You can tell from looking at him that Jimmy is fatally wounded, you manage to get him to the safe house of some friend of his and lie him on the bed but it is too late. + +"It's getting dark," Jimmy rasps to you. "I can't see you anymore." + +Minutes later Jimmy dies. You and John make arrangements for the body to be dumped someplace where it can be found and discuss what to do. John has had enough of all this shooting: he has seen the other six members of the Dillinger Gang die now and though the newest recruit he has no wish to share their fate. + +"I'm going back to California to surrender," he tells you. + +You consider your options: Cuba doesn't seem like a bad idea... +> Go back to California with John to surrender +You and John drive back to California to surrender, John gets in touch with local law officers to arrange an arrest. In the last days of 1934, after a year and a half of running, you and John arrange to meet law officers in a peaceful park. Unarmed you are both peacefully taken into custody, the last of the Dillinger Gang. You can expect a very long prison sentence...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You watch in amazement as Jimmy strides towards the two FBI Agents. One of them runs from the back of the car and fires several shots into Jimmy chest with his machine gun, Jimmy shoots him twice in return, fatally wounding him. The second Agent runs ahead of the car and fires a shotgun blast into Jimmy's legs. Jimmy sways but doesn't fall and as the FBI man throws aside his shotgun and draws a pistol Jimmy shoots him in the head with his machine gun killing him. + +Jimmy staggers on to the FBI car and climbs in. You and John run forward and jump into the car as well, driving away from the two dead lawmen you have left at the scene. You can tell from looking at him that Jimmy is fatally wounded, you manage to get him to the safe house of some friend of his and lie him on the bed but it is too late. + +"It's getting dark," Jimmy rasps to you. "I can't see you anymore." + +Minutes later Jimmy dies. You and John make arrangements for the body to be dumped someplace where it can be found and discuss what to do. John has had enough of all this shooting: he has seen the other six members of the Dillinger Gang die now and though the newest recruit he has no wish to share their fate. + +"I'm going back to California to surrender," he tells you. + +You consider your options: Cuba doesn't seem like a bad idea... +> Flee to Cuba +Surrender is not for you and you part ways with John: him heading west and you heading east. While he is surrendering in California you are taking a boat out of America: you make it to Cuba where you purchase a small house at Varadero Beach. There you can live peacefully after your years of robberies and danger, the last of the Dillinger Gang. + +You have done it. You have fought the law and won.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You raise your rifle and fire a single shot into the policeman's chest, fatally wounding him. At the sounds of the gunshots Jimmy opens fire with his machine gun after a civilian shot him in his bullet proof vest - you see a teenager sprint across the street and jump on Jimmy's back, Jimmy manages to throw him off through a shop window. + +Your companions emerge from the bank surrounded by several hostages, together you move towards the car. Policemen are running to the scene and despite the hostages they open fire on you all anyway. Two hostages are hit in the legs and suddenly Homer falls, a bullet in his head. The wound looks serious but to your amazement Homer manages to struggle into the getaway car. You all drive out of town. + +Sitting in the back you count the money and find you have stolen $28,000, making your share $5,400. Homer's wound is bleeding a lot but turns out to be little more than a flesh wound. After some quick discussion you agree it is best if you all split up, John is going to hide out with friends in Chicago, Jimmy and John Chase are going to rent an apartment just outside Chicago while Homer is driving down to St Paul to lie low. You need to choose who to accompany. +> Hide out near Chicago with Jimmy and John +You go with Jimmy and John Chase to hide out in a small cabin in a wooded area outside Chicago. You manage to stay hidden for a few weeks until one night the three of you are standing around talking when suddenly a police car pulls down the drive, stops and a police officer gets out. You all tense. + +"What's the trouble here?" the policeman asks. + +"No trouble at all," you call back to him. + +Jimmy raises his machine gun. +> Open fire on the cops +You fire a blast of bullets at the policemen, hitting both of them. With the two lawmen down you, Jimmy and John hastily run to John's car, jump in and drive away. You quickly flee the Chicago area and it is a good thing that you do: a week later you are stunned to read in newspapers that your friend John Dillinger was shot dead by FBI Agents while leaving a cinema with two friends in Chicago. A month later Homer Van Meter is tracked down and killed to. + +You are now the most wanted man in America.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You go with Jimmy and John Chase to hide out in a small cabin in a wooded area outside Chicago. You manage to stay hidden for a few weeks until one night the three of you are standing around talking when suddenly a police car pulls down the drive, stops and a police officer gets out. You all tense. + +"What's the trouble here?" the policeman asks. + +"No trouble at all," you call back to him. + +Jimmy raises his machine gun. +> Leave it to Jimmy +Jimmy fires a blast of bullets at the policemen, hitting both of them. With the two lawmen down you, Jimmy and John hastily run to John's car, jump in and drive away. You quickly flee the Chicago area and it is a good thing that you do: a week later you are stunned to read in newspapers that your friend John Dillinger was shot dead by FBI Agents while leaving a cinema with two friends in Chicago. A month later Homer Van Meter is tracked down and killed to. + +You are now the most wanted man in America.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You raise your rifle and fire a single shot into the policeman's chest, fatally wounding him. At the sounds of the gunshots Jimmy opens fire with his machine gun after a civilian shot him in his bullet proof vest - you see a teenager sprint across the street and jump on Jimmy's back, Jimmy manages to throw him off through a shop window. + +Your companions emerge from the bank surrounded by several hostages, together you move towards the car. Policemen are running to the scene and despite the hostages they open fire on you all anyway. Two hostages are hit in the legs and suddenly Homer falls, a bullet in his head. The wound looks serious but to your amazement Homer manages to struggle into the getaway car. You all drive out of town. + +Sitting in the back you count the money and find you have stolen $28,000, making your share $5,400. Homer's wound is bleeding a lot but turns out to be little more than a flesh wound. After some quick discussion you agree it is best if you all split up, John is going to hide out with friends in Chicago, Jimmy and John Chase are going to rent an apartment just outside Chicago while Homer is driving down to St Paul to lie low. You need to choose who to accompany. +> Hide out in St Paul with Homer +You and Homer go to hide out in an apartment in St Paul, leaving only to buy food and newspapers. One morning you step outside, buy a newspaper and read to your horror that your friend John Dillinger was shot dead by FBI Agents the night before while leaving a cinema with two female companions. You take the news to Homer in shock. + +You are now the most wanted man in America. + +After John's death you and Homer continue to hide in St Paul, not even trying to make contact with Jimmy. One afternoon you and Homer go to meet a friend of Homer's in a car dealership in St Paul. Going inside the car dealership you find the building completely deserted. Sensing trouble you both leave the building to find yourself confronted by four policemen. + +"Stick them up!" one of the officers yells. + +You and Homer immediately draw your pistols and fire at the policemen, prompting them to scatter for cover. The two of you sprint down the street, the lawmen initially firing you but then giving chase, fearful of accidentally shooting other people on the street. There is an alley to your left and Homer darts down it. +> Follow Homer down the alleyway +You follow Homer down the alleyway but you are both out of luck: it is a dead end. As you turn you find the four lawmen blocking the entrance of the alley, before you can react they all open fire on you. Homer is blasted off his feet by a shotgun blast, you are shot several times through the chest and riddled with bullets as you raise your pistol. You both collapse to the ground and die, cut down in one final gunfight. + +Jimmy is killed three months later, bringing an end to the Dillinger Gang.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Homer go to hide out in an apartment in St Paul, leaving only to buy food and newspapers. One morning you step outside, buy a newspaper and read to your horror that your friend John Dillinger was shot dead by FBI Agents the night before while leaving a cinema with two female companions. You take the news to Homer in shock. + +You are now the most wanted man in America. + +After John's death you and Homer continue to hide in St Paul, not even trying to make contact with Jimmy. One afternoon you and Homer go to meet a friend of Homer's in a car dealership in St Paul. Going inside the car dealership you find the building completely deserted. Sensing trouble you both leave the building to find yourself confronted by four policemen. + +"Stick them up!" one of the officers yells. + +You and Homer immediately draw your pistols and fire at the policemen, prompting them to scatter for cover. The two of you sprint down the street, the lawmen initially firing you but then giving chase, fearful of accidentally shooting other people on the street. There is an alley to your left and Homer darts down it. +> Keep running +You ignore Homer and keep running, reaching the corner of the street and racing around it. Homer has run into a dead-end alley and the fact that he is trapped distracts all four of your pursuers: they fire more than fifty bullets into his body. You make it down the street, hijack a passing car and make your escape from St Paul. + +You are now the most wanted man in America and have no choice but to hide out with Jimmy.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It is a weary and hunted group of men who gather in Indiana at the end of June. By this point you and John have survived being part of two outlaw gangs who have all been arrested or killed and now the members of your third gang are being hunted down and killed one by one. The writing is on the wall and while you and Homer are downcast and depressed John and Jimmy, who is never afraid of anything, remain upbeat and optimistic. + +Jimmy brings his friend John Chase with him and the five of you discuss robbing a bank in the town of South Bend. You are worried about lack of members but Jimmy persuades the rest of you to let his friend John, a handsome and loyal but not over-intelligent individual, to join your Gang. You accept and that sunny day drive into South Bend to pull off your latest robbery. + +You park the car and all climb out, Jimmy stays next to the car while you and Homer take up positions outside the bank while the two John's go inside. You hear gunshots inside. There is a policeman further down the street and at the sound of the shots he starts walking towards the bank. At your side Homer raises his rifle. +> Leave him to Homer +Homer raises his rifle and fire a single shot into the policeman's chest, fatally wounding him. At the sounds of the gunshots Jimmy opens fire with his machine gun after a civilian shot him in his bullet proof vest - you see a teenager sprint across the street and jump on Jimmy's back, Jimmy manages to throw him off through a shop window. + +Your companions emerge from the bank surrounded by several hostages, together you move towards the car. Policemen are running to the scene and despite the hostages they open fire on you all anyway. Two hostages are hit in the legs and suddenly Homer falls, a bullet in his head. The wound looks serious but to your amazement Homer manages to struggle into the getaway car. You all drive out of town. + +Sitting in the back you count the money and find you have stolen $28,000, making your share $5,400. Homer's wound is bleeding a lot but turns out to be little more than a flesh wound. After some quick discussion you agree it is best if you all split up, John is going to hide out with friends in Chicago, Jimmy and John Chase are going to rent an apartment just outside Chicago while Homer is driving down to St Paul to lie low. You need to choose who to accompany.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Jimmy throw open the front door, fire several shots with your pistols at the men in the trees and run off to the right. Racing through the trees you finally make it to a brightly-lit house and run inside, startling an old man. + +"Now don't get excited," Jimmy tells him. "I won't harm you but this is a matter of life and death. We need your car." + +As he is speaking a car pulls up outside. + +"Who does that car belong to?" you ask the old man. + +"I don't know," he replies. + +Pistols held ready you cautiously approach the car to find it is full of men, you recognize three of them as staff from the Lodge. You order most of them out, leaving three inside as hostages. Jimmy gets in the front while you get in the back and order the driver to drive. Before he can start yet another car, this one with three men in it, pulls up next to you. + +"We're FBI, who's in that car?" the man asks. + +Immediately Jimmy jumps out of the car, pistol in his hand, and approaches the car of FBI Agents. +> Stay in the car +"I know you bastards are wearing bulletproof vests," Jimmy declares. "So I'll give it to you high and low." + +You watch as he raises his pistol and opens fire. + +His first shot grazes the driver in the head, panicking he throws open the car's passenger door and tumbles out onto the ground, the men in the back seat doing likewise. They both spring to their feet to run and Jimmy opens up on them too, hitting one of the men in the neck and the other man in the back. The men in the car behind you start running and Jimmy turns and fires at them too. + +You and Jimmy jump into the FBI car and drive away. Behind you one of the FBI Agents fires his pistol at you but misses. As you drive away you notice another car full of FBI Agents driving towards you - finding a flashlight under the dashboard you click it on and shine the light full in the face of the approaching car, temporarily blinding the people inside until you safely pass. + +You and Jimmy escape from Wisconsin after a series of difficult adventures and it takes you two months to reunite with the rest of the gang: in that time Red and Tommy are both killed by lawmen in separate gun battles and only your friends John and Homer are left. It is a very depleted gang that arranges a rendezvous in Indiana at the end of June.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>In Chicago the Gang comes back together in a sombre mood: Eddie's death has hit you all hard and while Jimmy is keen to continue robbing banks the rest of the Gang are in low spirits (even John) and you decide what you need is a holiday so you all make plans to have a rest in a little inn called Little Bohemia Lodge in the middle of a wood in Wisconsin. + +This planned holiday doesn't do much to relax you all, you soon get the feeling that the staff and guests of the Lodge recognize you all as the notorious outlaws that you are and begin making plans to leave the Lodge. One night you are all in your rooms in the Lodge packing when suddenly you hear gunshots outside. + +It is not a little gunfire either but a storm: the boom of a shotgun, the rattle of a machine gun and the pops of pistols all fill the night air, glancing out the window you see several men hiding in the trees are shooting the hell out of a car. Instinctively most of the gang begin making for a back window except Jimmy who characteristically grabs a pistol and runs for the front door. +> Follow John, Homer, Red and Tommy out the back window +You join the others in running towards the back window - as you do you hear a voice yell "Police! Stop!" John fires a burst of machine gun bullets out of the window and jumps back as a lawman outside fires three blasts from a shotgun in return. Glancing cautiously outside John sees the coast is clear and one by one you all quickly jump out of the window. Landing on a pile of snow you race through the trees, down a flight of steps that lead down to a beach on the edge of a Lake. + +There the party splits: John, Red and Homer run right while Tommy runs left. You need to decide who to follow. +> Run right after John, Red and Homer +You follow John, Red and Homer and race down the beach and through trees before reaching a house where you force the owner to surrender the keys of his car. Driving through the night you head south towards St Paul - the next morning you are just approaching St Paul when suddenly men in a car behind you open fire on your car with machine guns, missing. They are police who recognized your car from stolen car reports. + +Homer is at the wheel and immediately guns down the accelerator while John leans out of a side window and fires back at the car of the lawmen with a machine gun. You are sitting in the other passenger seat while Red is in the middle seat, John yells for you to lean out of the window and fire at the lawmen as well. +> Lean out of the other window and fire at them too. +You smash out your window, lean out and fire with your pistol at the pursuing police car. Suddenly Red yells, a bullet has passed through the car and hit him in the back. Homer manages to lose the cops after a curve by pulling right down a road, braking and waiting for the lawmen to shoot past and then reversing back out onto the road and driving back the way you came. + +You seek assistance from fellow criminals in St Paul but there is nothing you can do for Red: his wound is mortal. For three days he lingers in great agony before dying from his wound: you, John and Homer bury your friend in an unmarked grave. Sadness and anger in your hearts you reunite with Tommy in St Paul (there is no sign of Jimmy although he definitely escaped Little Bohemia Lodge, killing an FBI Agent in the process) and plan another bank robbery. +> Another Bank Job +One spring afternoon the four of you drive into the little town of Fostoria, Ohio where Tommy stays in the car while you, John and Homer stride into the bank. You all pull machine guns out from under your coats. + +"Stick them up," Homer yells. The staff raise their arms, one of the female tellers starts to cry. + +"Don't kill me," she pleads to Homer. + +"You be quiet and I won't," he tells her. + +While John empties the vault you and Homer remain in the lobby, watching the customers. As you do a policeman suddenly bursts through the bank's front doors, a pistol in his hand. + +"Shoot him," Homer yells, raising his own gun. +> Shoot the policeman +You raise your machine gun and fire a single shot, hitting the policeman in the chest. He staggers back out of the bank's doors. John is soon finished and the pair of you sprint out of the bank and into the car, which Tommy has parked just outside. Roaring out of town you find you have stolen $17,000, of which your share is $4,200. + +You all talk and decide it would be a good idea to split up again, you still have no idea where Jimmy is and you are all the most wanted men in the country. John and Homer have the bright idea of buying a truck in Chicago and living in the back of that while Tommy plans to go to lie low in little towns in Iowa. You need to choose who to accompany. +> Go with John and Homer to hide out in Chicago +You, John and Homer head to Chicago where you buy a red truck, put mattresses in the back and essentially live in it for a month. In the evenings you sit in the large cabin at the front and talk: it's not much of a way to live but at least it is keeping you alive. One evening you are sitting in the front of the truck talking when a police car pulls up alongside you with two men in it. One of them orders you all out of the truck. + +Homer picks up a machine gun. +> Join Homer in opening fire at the cops +Before Homer can react you raise your machine gun and fire twenty bullets into the police car, hitting both policemen several times and killing them. You promptly drive away from the scene of the crime and flee Chicago. You continue to drive around on the run, hearing on the radio that Tommy was recognized by lawmen in Iowa and killed in a gunfight. With the gang dwindling you reluctantly re-establish contact with Jimmy and arrange a rendezvous in Indiana.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You, John and Homer head to Chicago where you buy a red truck, put mattresses in the back and essentially live in it for a month. In the evenings you sit in the large cabin at the front and talk: it's not much of a way to live but at least it is keeping you alive. One evening you are sitting in the front of the truck talking when a police car pulls up alongside you with two men in it. One of them orders you all out of the truck. + +Homer picks up a machine gun. +> Sit tight +As you watch Homer raises his machine gun and fires twenty bullets into the police car, hitting both policemen several times and killing them. You promptly drive away from the scene of the crime and flee Chicago. You continue to drive around on the run, hearing on the radio that Tommy was recognized by lawmen in Iowa and killed in a gunfight. With the gang dwindling you reluctantly re-establish contact with Jimmy and arrange a rendezvous in Indiana.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You raise your machine gun and fire a single shot, hitting the policeman in the chest. He staggers back out of the bank's doors. John is soon finished and the pair of you sprint out of the bank and into the car, which Tommy has parked just outside. Roaring out of town you find you have stolen $17,000, of which your share is $4,200. + +You all talk and decide it would be a good idea to split up again, you still have no idea where Jimmy is and you are all the most wanted men in the country. John and Homer have the bright idea of buying a truck in Chicago and living in the back of that while Tommy plans to go to lie low in little towns in Iowa. You need to choose who to accompany. +> Go with Tommy to hide out in Iowa +You and Tommy drive up to the little town of Waterloo in Iowa and lie low for a month, reading in newspapers that John and Homer killed two policemen in Chicago and escaped after yet another gunfight. One afternoon you and Tommy are walking towards your car to go for a drive when two men suddenly approach you. + +"Hey, just a minute," one of them calls. "Who are you?" + +"Who are you?" Tommy replies. + +"Police officers," one of the men says. +> Go for your gun +You reach for your pistol in your pocket but the second policeman already has his drawn - raising it he shoots you in the chest. You fall backwards to the ground, a moment later Tommy is shot as well. You die on the sidewalk, Tommy an hour later. In time the rest of the Dillinger Gang will be killed as well but your crimes have already been enough to make your name infamous long after you are gone.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Tommy drive up to the little town of Waterloo in Iowa and lie low for a month, reading in newspapers that John and Homer killed two policemen in Chicago and escaped after yet another gunfight. One afternoon you and Tommy are walking towards your car to go for a drive when two men suddenly approach you. + +"Hey, just a minute," one of them calls. "Who are you?" + +"Who are you?" Tommy replies. + +"Police officers," one of the men says. +> Run +Without hesitation you turn and dart left down an alleyway - because Tommy actually has his pistol in his hand he is the bigger threat now: one of the detectives shoots him and fatally wounds him. You hear the gunshot and the yell of one of the lawmen for you to halt but you make it to the end of the alley and race around the corner a second before the lawman fires after you. Emerging onto a busy road you quickly flag down a passing car, jump inside and taking the driver hostage you order him to get you out of Iowa. + +You make your escape, heart pounding, and drive down to Indiana to meet up with the rest of the gang.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>One spring afternoon the four of you drive into the little town of Fostoria, Ohio where Tommy stays in the car while you, John and Homer stride into the bank. You all pull machine guns out from under your coats. + +"Stick them up," Homer yells. The staff raise their arms, one of the female tellers starts to cry. + +"Don't kill me," she pleads to Homer. + +"You be quiet and I won't," he tells her. + +While John empties the vault you and Homer remain in the lobby, watching the customers. As you do a policeman suddenly bursts through the bank's front doors, a pistol in his hand. + +"Shoot him," Homer yells, raising his own gun. +> Let Homer deal with him +Homer raises his machine gun and fires a single shot, hitting the policeman in the chest. He staggers back out of the bank's doors. John is soon finished and the pair of you sprint out of the bank and into the car, which Tommy has parked just outside. Roaring out of town you find you have stolen $17,000, of which your share is $4,200. + +You all talk and decide it would be a good idea to split up again, you still have no idea where Jimmy is and you are all the most wanted men in the country. John and Homer have the bright idea of buying a truck in Chicago and living in the back of that while Tommy plans to go to lie low in little towns in Iowa. You need to choose who to accompany.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You follow John, Red and Homer and race down the beach and through trees before reaching a house where you force the owner to surrender the keys of his car. Driving through the night you head south towards St Paul - the next morning you are just approaching St Paul when suddenly men in a car behind you open fire on your car with machine guns, missing. They are police who recognized your car from stolen car reports. + +Homer is at the wheel and immediately guns down the accelerator while John leans out of a side window and fires back at the car of the lawmen with a machine gun. You are sitting in the other passenger seat while Red is in the middle seat, John yells for you to lean out of the window and fire at the lawmen as well. +> Stay in your seat +You remain in your seat but it is a fateful decision: bullets fired by the pursuing lawmen punch through the rear of the car. One hits Red in the back, a moment later one hits you in the back of the head, killing you instantly. Perhaps you are the more fortunate one: Red lingers for days in agony before dying of his wound. In time all the members of the Dillinger Gang will be killed by lawmen, though your crimes will at least ensure your name remains infamous after you are gone.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You join the others in running towards the back window - as you do you hear a voice yell "Police! Stop!" John fires a burst of machine gun bullets out of the window and jumps back as a lawman outside fires three blasts from a shotgun in return. Glancing cautiously outside John sees the coast is clear and one by one you all quickly jump out of the window. Landing on a pile of snow you race through the trees, down a flight of steps that lead down to a beach on the edge of a Lake. + +There the party splits: John, Red and Homer run right while Tommy runs left. You need to decide who to follow. +> Run left after Tommy +You and Tommy run left, stumbling through the woods for an hour before reaching a house where you steal a car and drive to St Paul. You reach safety ahead of the rest of the Gang and learn that John, Red and Homer were in another high-speed gunfight while driving into St Paul during which Red was hit and killed. Jimmy also managed to escape Little Bohemia Lodge, killing an FBI Agent in the process. You manage to reunite with John and Homer in St Paul, both are in a grim mood after seeing your friend Red die and having to bury him. The four of you quickly plan another bank robbery.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You drive to Reno with Jimmy and John Chase and once you arrive Jimmy meets with a man who gives him the address of the Mob Informer Roy Fritsch. You drive out to his house and ring the doorbell - as soon as Fritch opens the door you and Jimmy train your guns on him and order him into the car. The terrified man obeys and you all drive out of town and park next to an abandoned mine shaft. Jimmy orders John to take Fritsch out of the car over to the mine shaft - once the two are out of the car he glances at you. + +"Do you want to drop him or shall I?" he asks. +> Let Jimmy do it +You remain in the car staring at the dashboard while Jimmy gets out of the car and walks away. There is silence for a second then a gunshot, a pause and several more gunshots. After that you hear the sound of a body being dragged along the ground as Jimmy drops Fritsch's corpse down the mine shaft then he and John Chase get back in the car and you all drive away. + +For most of the next month you remain around Reno, Nevada and read about the search for you and your friends. At the start of April John and Homer escape St Paul after a shootout with FBI Agents, days later Eddie is killed in the same area. Eddie's death is the trigger that prompts you and the rest of the gang to reunite in the second half of April.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You fire several shots at the guard cage, mostly hitting the bulletproof glass but one shot goes through the narrow gun port and grazes the side of the guard's head. At that moment you hear a burst of machine gun fire outside. Leaving Eddie and Homer to control the lobby while Red deals with the vault you hurry outside. John is immediately outside the doors surrounded by hostages but Jimmy is further down the street, firing his machine gun wildly and laughing. You watch as he shoots an unarmed old man in the leg, knocking him to the ground. You jog over. + +"I thought you were a cop you son of a bitch," Jimmy yells at him. + +"I'm not a cop," the man moans. + +"Did you have to do that?" you ask Jimmy wearily. + +"I thought he was a cop," Jimmy snaps at you. + +You turn around as a gunshot rings out: a man firing from a window has clipped John in the shoulder. You and John fire your pistols at the window and the man inside jumps back. John shouts to those in the bank that you're all leaving a moment later Red, Eddie and Homer come jogging out. As they do the man in the window fires again, this time grazing Red's shoulder. + +Surrounded by hostages you all pile into the car and drive out of town surrounded by hostages. You are all in a bad mood, John and Red's wounds are painful but not serious and you had to leave before you could get all the money. Even so you discover that you have stolen $52,000, making your share $7,400. + +Your latest bank robbery has made you all the most wanted criminals in America and it is agreed that you should all split up. Jimmy and his friend John Chase are going out to Reno, Nevada, about Jimmy has been recruited by the Mob to kill an informer. John and Homer are going to St Paul, Minnesota to rent apartments, Eddie is going to Indianapolis, Indiana to lie low and Red and Tommy plan to hide out in Chicago, Illinois. You will have to hide out with until the heat wears off. +> Hide out with John and Homer in St Paul +You, Homer and John go to St Paul where you rent an apartment with John. The weeks after the Mason City Robbery initially pass quietly but one morning you are disturbed by a knock on the door. + +"This is Henry Cummings, St Pauls Police," a voice calls out. "Is Carl Hellman there?" + +Carl Hellman is the name you used to book the apartments. + +"He's just left and won't be back till this afternoon," you tell the man as John springs to his feet. "Come back then." + +"We'll talk to you then," the policeman on the other side of the door says. + +"I'm not dressed," you reply. + +"We'll wait until you dress." + +"It's the cops," you tell John quietly. John nods, he has already fetched his machine gun from the wardrobe. Suddenly you hear the pop-pop-pop of pistol shots outside. Without hesitation John raises his machine gun and fires a burst of bullets through the door, throws it open and fires down the corridor. A policeman sheltering in a doorway fires back, one of his shots hits John's leg making him wince. The two of you flee down the corridor and stairs, out the back door and jump in your car. John's wound is painful but not dangerous. + +You later learn the gunshots you heard outside was Homer who encountered FBI Agents as he entered the building to visit you, recognized them as lawman and opened fire. Apart from John no one else was hit in the gunfight but a few days later Eddie is ambushed and killed by FBI Agents. His death saddens you and prompts the remainder of the gang to reunite in the second half of April.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You fire several shots at the guard cage, mostly hitting the bulletproof glass but one shot goes through the narrow gun port and grazes the side of the guard's head. At that moment you hear a burst of machine gun fire outside. Leaving Eddie and Homer to control the lobby while Red deals with the vault you hurry outside. John is immediately outside the doors surrounded by hostages but Jimmy is further down the street, firing his machine gun wildly and laughing. You watch as he shoots an unarmed old man in the leg, knocking him to the ground. You jog over. + +"I thought you were a cop you son of a bitch," Jimmy yells at him. + +"I'm not a cop," the man moans. + +"Did you have to do that?" you ask Jimmy wearily. + +"I thought he was a cop," Jimmy snaps at you. + +You turn around as a gunshot rings out: a man firing from a window has clipped John in the shoulder. You and John fire your pistols at the window and the man inside jumps back. John shouts to those in the bank that you're all leaving a moment later Red, Eddie and Homer come jogging out. As they do the man in the window fires again, this time grazing Red's shoulder. + +Surrounded by hostages you all pile into the car and drive out of town surrounded by hostages. You are all in a bad mood, John and Red's wounds are painful but not serious and you had to leave before you could get all the money. Even so you discover that you have stolen $52,000, making your share $7,400. + +Your latest bank robbery has made you all the most wanted criminals in America and it is agreed that you should all split up. Jimmy and his friend John Chase are going out to Reno, Nevada, about Jimmy has been recruited by the Mob to kill an informer. John and Homer are going to St Paul, Minnesota to rent apartments, Eddie is going to Indianapolis, Indiana to lie low and Red and Tommy plan to hide out in Chicago, Illinois. You will have to hide out with until the heat wears off. +> Hide out with Eddie in Indianapolis +You and Eddie hide out in Indianapolis for a few weeks until you get word that John and Homer were approached by FBI Agents at John's apartment and fled town after a gunfight. Much of Homer's stuff is still at his apartment but he doesn't dare go back for it in case the FBI is watching it, Eddie decides to pay a woman he knows to go to the apartment, collect up all the stuff and then drop by her apartment to pick it up. You are nervous about the idea but Eddie asks you to accompany him. +> Go with Eddie to pick up Homer's stuff in St Paul +You go with Eddie to his friend's apartment, park the car and walk up the drive to the door. As you approach the door opens, the woman inside shoves a suitcase out to Eddie and closes the door without a word. Exchanging glances the two of you turn and start walking back to your car. + +At that point the kitchen window next to the door behind you explodes in a hail of machine gun fire. There is a burst of light as you are hit in the back of the head by a bullet and killed instantly. Eddie is not so lucky, hit in the head too he will linger for three days in great agony. You die on the sidewalk, slain by the FBI Agents waiting in ambush.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Eddie hide out in Indianapolis for a few weeks until you get word that John and Homer were approached by FBI Agents at John's apartment and fled town after a gunfight. Much of Homer's stuff is still at his apartment but he doesn't dare go back for it in case the FBI is watching it, Eddie decides to pay a woman he knows to go to the apartment, collect up all the stuff and then drop by her apartment to pick it up. You are nervous about the idea but Eddie asks you to accompany him. +> Stay in Indianapolis +It is a good thing you do not go with Eddie to St Paul, when he doesn't return you get nervous and clear out of Indianapolis. The next day you read how Eddie was ambushed and killed by waiting FBI Agents, you were lucky not to share the same fate. Unnerved by your narrow escape you arrange a reunion with the rest of the Gang in the second half of the month.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You fire several shots at the guard cage, mostly hitting the bulletproof glass but one shot goes through the narrow gun port and grazes the side of the guard's head. At that moment you hear a burst of machine gun fire outside. Leaving Eddie and Homer to control the lobby while Red deals with the vault you hurry outside. John is immediately outside the doors surrounded by hostages but Jimmy is further down the street, firing his machine gun wildly and laughing. You watch as he shoots an unarmed old man in the leg, knocking him to the ground. You jog over. + +"I thought you were a cop you son of a bitch," Jimmy yells at him. + +"I'm not a cop," the man moans. + +"Did you have to do that?" you ask Jimmy wearily. + +"I thought he was a cop," Jimmy snaps at you. + +You turn around as a gunshot rings out: a man firing from a window has clipped John in the shoulder. You and John fire your pistols at the window and the man inside jumps back. John shouts to those in the bank that you're all leaving a moment later Red, Eddie and Homer come jogging out. As they do the man in the window fires again, this time grazing Red's shoulder. + +Surrounded by hostages you all pile into the car and drive out of town surrounded by hostages. You are all in a bad mood, John and Red's wounds are painful but not serious and you had to leave before you could get all the money. Even so you discover that you have stolen $52,000, making your share $7,400. + +Your latest bank robbery has made you all the most wanted criminals in America and it is agreed that you should all split up. Jimmy and his friend John Chase are going out to Reno, Nevada, about Jimmy has been recruited by the Mob to kill an informer. John and Homer are going to St Paul, Minnesota to rent apartments, Eddie is going to Indianapolis, Indiana to lie low and Red and Tommy plan to hide out in Chicago, Illinois. You will have to hide out with until the heat wears off. +> Hide out with Red and Tommy in Chicago +You hide out with Red and Tommy in Chicago and have a peaceful month, unlike your friends. You read in newspapers how John and Homer shoot their way out of an FBI ambush in St Paul, a short time later Eddie is killed in a second FBI ambush. With Jimmy back from Nevada and John and Homer in Chicago you decide it is time for another reunion.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Raising your pistol you fire several shots through the window: the cop is hit four times and falls to the ground. Jimmy laughs. Moments later John and Homer are finished in the vault and hurrying outside surrounded by hostages you all scramble into the car. A few stray shots are fired at you, Jimmy fires bursts from his machine gun in reply. On the drive out of town you count the money and find you have stolen $46,000, making your share $6,500. + +A week later you all drive into Mason City, Iowa for your next bank job. Tommy stays in the car and Jimmy and John guard the doors while you lead Homer, Eddie and Tommy into the large First National Bank. Upon entering Eddie fires a burst of bullets from his machine gun into the ceiling. + +"Hands up! Hands up!" you shout. "Everybody on the floor!" + +Homer strides towards the counter, one of the teller runs from the counter into an office and tries to slams the door. Homer fires a burst of bullets through the thin wooden door and you hear a shout of pain. Suddenly there is a strange whumping noise and something hits Eddie in the back. It is a tear gas canister and it quickly begins leaking out clouds of gas. + +Looking up you see a blue-uniformed guard sitting in a cage lined with bulletproof glass, he has just fired the tear gas through a narrow gun slit and is hastily trying to reload the tear gas gun. + +"Get that son of a bitch with the tear gas!" Eddie yells at you, rubbing his back angrily. +> Leave it to someone else +You ignore Eddie and watch as Red fires a burst of bullets at the gun case, most hitting the bulletproof glass but one goes through the narrow gun port and grazes the side of the guard's head. At that moment you hear a burst of machine gun fire outside. Leaving Eddie and Homer to control the lobby while Red deals with the vault you hurry outside. John is immediately outside the doors surrounded by hostages but Jimmy is further down the street, firing his machine gun wildly and laughing. You watch as he shoots an unarmed old man in the leg, knocking him to the ground. You jog over. + +"I thought you were a cop you son of a bitch," Jimmy yells at him. + +"I'm not a cop," the man moans. + +"Did you have to do that?" you ask Jimmy wearily. + +"I thought he was a cop," Jimmy snaps at you. + +You turn around as a gunshot rings out: a man firing from a window has clipped John in the shoulder. You and John fire your pistols at the window and the man inside jumps back. John shouts to those in the bank that you're all leaving a moment later Red, Eddie and Homer come jogging out. As they do the man in the window fires again, this time grazing Red's shoulder. + +Surrounded by hostages you all pile into the car and drive out of town surrounded by hostages. You are all in a bad mood, John and Red's wounds are painful but not serious and you had to leave before you could get all the money. Even so you discover that you have stolen $52,000, making your share $7,400. + +Your latest bank robbery has made you all the most wanted criminals in America and it is agreed that you should all split up. Jimmy and his friend John Chase are going out to Reno, Nevada, about Jimmy has been recruited by the Mob to kill an informer. John and Homer are going to St Paul, Minnesota to rent apartments, Eddie is going to Indianapolis, Indiana to lie low and Red and Tommy plan to hide out in Chicago, Illinois. You will have to hide out with until the heat wears off.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Snow lies thickly on the ground as you and your companions drive into the little town of Sioux Falls, South Dakota. Eddie stays in the car, Tommy and Red take positions at the door while Jimmy leads the rest of you into the busy bank. Jimmy pulls a machine gun out from under his coat and the rest of you draw your pistols. + +"This is a hold up!" Jimmy shouts. "Everyone on the floor!" + +Almost immediately an alarm starts ringing, John and Homer ignore it as they head into the vault while you and Jimmy guard the terrified hostages. + +"I'd like to know who set the alarm off," Jimmy yells, striding up and down the bank angrily and pointing his machine gun at people. "Who did it? Who? If you want to get killed just make some move! Go on, just make some move!" + +Looking out the window you see a policeman on a motorbike stop just outside the bank. + +"Shoot him," Jimmy yells at you. +> Ignore Jimmy +You ignore Jimmy and a moment later he fires a burst of bullets through the bank window, hitting the cop several times. As the policeman falls to the floor Nelson laughs. + +"I got one," he yells. "I got one!" + +Moments later John and Homer are finished in the vault and hurrying outside surrounded by hostages you all scramble into the car. A few stray shots are fired at you, Jimmy fires bursts from his machine gun in reply. On the drive out of town you count the money and find you have stolen $46,000, making your share $6,500. + +A week later you all drive into Mason City, Iowa for your next bank job. Tommy stays in the car and Jimmy and John guard the doors while you lead Homer, Eddie and Tommy into the large First National Bank. Upon entering Eddie fires a burst of bullets from his machine gun into the ceiling. + +"Hands up! Hands up!" you shout. "Everybody on the floor!" + +Homer strides towards the counter, one of the teller runs from the counter into an office and tries to slams the door. Homer fires a burst of bullets through the thin wooden door and you hear a shout of pain. Suddenly there is a strange whumping noise and something hits Eddie in the back. It is a tear gas canister and it quickly begins leaking out clouds of gas. + +Looking up you see a blue-uniformed guard sitting in a cage lined with bulletproof glass, he has just fired the tear gas through a narrow gun slit and is hastily trying to reload the tear gas gun. + +"Get that son of a bitch with the tear gas!" Eddie yells at you, rubbing his back angrily.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While the rest of the gang stay at the hideout and make ready you, Jimmy and John start driving towards South Dakota but almost immediately a car cuts in front of you. Irritated Jimmy, who is at the wheel, cuts ahead of him and the car cuts in front of him again. Jimmy loses his temper and rams his car against the other, trying to force it onto the kerb. The other car breaks and the man inside jumps out. + +Jimmy jumps out with his pistol in his hand and you can tell he means to shoot the angry driver. +> Hang back +You watch as Jimmy shoots the man twice in the chest and he falls to the ground. A woman screams, jumps out of the car and runs to his side. + +"You've killed him," she wails. + +"Keep your damned mouth shut or I'll let you have it too," Jimmy snarls at her. You both jump back inside your car and speed off back to the hideout. The next day you prepare to set off with the gang to rob the Sioux Falls Bank.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You relax at the apartment, reading a book in your bedroom while Chuck listens to the radio in the living room. When there is a knock on the door you hear Chuck go to answer it. A second later you hear "FBI! You're under arrest!" and the sound of several mean stampeding into the house. Springing to your feet you have only moments to make a decision. Your only possible escape route is to scramble out the window but it is a very long way to the ground... +> Surrender +Unwilling to take the risk you raise your hands and surrender to the FBI Agents. You and Chuck are taken into custody and tell the FBI exactly nothing but it does you no good: identified as participants in the Grand Haven and Brainerd Bank Robberies you both receive lengthy prison sentences. When John is arrested the following month you are transferred to Crown Point Prison in Indiana to be interviewed - in prison you are reunited with John. + +John does not intend to stay in prison however... +> John's greatest trick +One morning a civilian cleaner comes in to clean the cells when John, brandishing a wooden gun, jumps forwards and takes him prisoner. Using the cleaner to summon four guards from the guardroom outside the cell block one by one you and John take them all prisoner and lock them in the cells. Once that is accomplished you take one of the guards hostage and order him in front of you. + +"I'll be goddamned if I'll help you get out of here," he snaps at you. "Shoot and be goddamned." + +"I have everything to gain and nothing to lose," John warns him icily. "You can either be a dead hero or a live coward. You have a wife and baby that you love dearly and would like to see again haven't you?" + +The guard gives in. Using the guard as a prisoner you go down to the guardroom where you and John arm yourselves with two machine guns. Moving into the jail's kitchen you capture three more guards. One of the guards, a giant of a man, takes one look at your machine gun and declares "I'll take that thing and shove it up your ass!" + +"My god Bill," your hostage guard exclaims. "Don't! They mean business." + +You quickly disarm your new prisoners and herd them down to the prison's garage where two mechanics are at work. Taking them prisoner you choose a car, pile in with two hostages and drive out of town. John is so happy he stars singing on the way. After dropping your two prisoners off you speed on, elated to be free once again. + +Through Red you arrange a meeting with Homer Van Meter and his gang.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You drive south with Chuck and Tommy to San Antonio where you hide out for a few months and enjoy yourself relaxing in the city's bars and nightclubs. Occasionally you get the feeling that people are watching you but you can't be sure. One afternoon Tommy announces he intends to go visit a local bar and invites Chuck to join him but Chuck prefers to stay at the apartment so Tommy invites you. +> Head out with Tommy +You and Tommy go outside, flag down a taxi and order it to take you to a bar. You can't help noticing that as you pull away from the apartment a black car behind you does likewise and everywhere you go the black car, with two men inside, remains steadfastly behind you. + +"Tommy, I think that car is following us," you mutter to your companion. + +"Stop the car," Tommy orders the taxi driver. + +As the taxi screeches to a halt you both jump out and race around the corner of the street to find yourselves in a dead-end alley. Tommy turns, draws his pistol and trains it on the corner you have just run around. You draw your pistol and follow suit, wondering if you should open fire on the next people to come around the corner. +> Fire at any pursuers +As soon as the two lawmen come around the corner, one holding a shotgun and one holding a pistol you open fire, hitting the detective with the shotgun in the head. As he falls to the ground Tommy shoots the other man twice in the arm, making him drop his pistol. The wounded detective cradles his wounded arm and looks at the pair of you. You train your gun on him and watch him while Tommy runs out into the street and stops a pickup truck at gunpoint. Scooping up the wounded and dead lawmens' weapons you run to the truck, join him and drive out of town. + +You flee across the country to St Paul, reading in newspapers along the way that Chuck Fisher was arrested at the apartment in San Antonio but told the police nothing. Finally you re-join Jimmy, Homer and Eddie in St Paul where they are shocked to learn about what has happened. The five of you lie low for the rest of the winter before making plans for new robberies next spring. + +However that spring you hear how John Dillinger, recently escaped from prison and his friend Red Hamilton want to join forces with the Nelson Gang. A meeting is soon arranged between you all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Tommy go outside, flag down a taxi and order it to take you to a bar. You can't help noticing that as you pull away from the apartment a black car behind you does likewise and everywhere you go the black car, with two men inside, remains steadfastly behind you. + +"Tommy, I think that car is following us," you mutter to your companion. + +"Stop the car," Tommy orders the taxi driver. + +As the taxi screeches to a halt you both jump out and race around the corner of the street to find yourselves in a dead-end alley. Tommy turns, draws his pistol and trains it on the corner you have just run around. You draw your pistol and follow suit, wondering if you should open fire on the next people to come around the corner. +> Leave the shooting to Tommy +You wait and do nothing as two lawmen, one holding a shotgun and one holding a pistol, run around the corner. Tommy opens fire at them, shooting the first lawmen in the head and the second in the arm. The wounded lawman drops his pistol and cradles his arm while the dead lawman lies on the ground motionless - while Tommy covers the remaining man with his gun you run out into the street, hijack a pickup truck at gunpoint and the two of you make your escape on it. + +You flee across the country to St Paul, reading in newspapers along the way that Chuck Fisher was arrested at the apartment in San Antonio but told the police nothing. Finally you re-join Jimmy, Homer and Eddie in St Paul where they are shocked to learn about what has happened. The five of you lie low for the rest of the winter before making plans for new robberies next spring. + +However that spring you hear how John Dillinger, recently escaped from prison and his friend Red Hamilton want to join forces with the Nelson Gang. A meeting is soon arranged between you all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You stick with the Nelson Gang and two months after the Grand Haven fiasco you drive into Brainerd, Minnesota. This time Jimmy leaves you in the car while he leads Homer, Tommy, Eddie and Chuck into the bank. You sit tight for ten minutes drumming your fingers impatiently on the dashboard until finally your companions emerge. There is no sign that the alarm has been raised. + +Suddenly Jimmy does an inexplicable thing. He raises his machine gun and fires a burst of bullets into a shop front across the street, making the people inside dive for cover. Striding towards the car he continues to fire at shop fronts and cars grinning before jumping in the car after the others and all of you drive out of town. You are not convinced Jimmy is completely mentally stable. + +The Gang has escaped with $32,000, making your share $5,300. Jimmy decides that you should all split up: Chuck and Tommy will drive down to San Antonio, Texas and hide out while Jimmy, Eddie and Homer will go to St Paul, Minnesota. In the papers you read how John and Harry succeeded in busting your friends out of prison where they have formed a gang and started robbing banks but as you have no idea where they are or how to find them you'll have to hide out with one of the halves of the Nelson Gang for now. +> Go with Jimmy, Eddie and Homer to St Paul +You decide to hide out with Jimmy, Homer and Eddie and the four of you check into apartments in St Paul. In December you are joined by Tommy Carroll who fled San Antonio after being tracked down and shooting two lawmen in a gunfight - Chuck Fisher was not so lucky and was arrested at his apartment. You and the other four remaining members of the Nelson Gang agree that you should lie low and wait to pull off more bank robberies next spring. + +The following spring you read how John Dillinger and all his gang have been arrested, happily he soon escapes from prison and together with his friend Red Hamilton want to join forces with the Nelson Gang. A meeting is soon arranged between you all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You agree to go with Homer who assures you on the journey to the town of Grand Haven, Michigan that your experience robbing three banks more than qualifies you to join Nelson's group - most of the gang except Nelson and Bentz have less experience. In Grand Haven Homer goes off for a few days to arrange an introduction between you, Nelson and the rest of the gang. + +Nelson lives up to his nickname (which he despises, preferring people call him Jimmy), he is a baby-faced youthful little man but with a distinct air of menace. Eddie Green is a red-haired veteran stick-up man, Tommy Carroll is a handsome ex-boxer while the two recruits Earl Doyle and Chuck Fisher are typical grim-faced gangsters. Eddie Bentz is blond-haired and capable, he has a long history of pulling off some of the most successful bank robberies of the last ten years. + +One summer's day you, Eddie Bentz and Jimmy walk into the bank while Homer and Earl guard the doors, Eddie Green and Tommy wait on the streets and Chuck sits in the escape car. The three of you walk up to the counter and draw your pistols while Jimmy whips a machine gun out from under his coat. + +"Hands up," he barks. + +Eddie Green and Tommy hurry inside as planned and help you take the customers and bank staff hostage while Eddie and Jimmy begin emptying the contents of the vault into sacks. + +Outside you hear Homer shout "Hurry, the alarm's been raised!" + +"Don't shoot unless they start shooting first," Eddie B cautions Jimmy. + +With the sack of money in hand you all run out on the street as a man with a shotgun fires at you from the other side of the road, blasting a hole in a bank window - Jimmy returns fire wit his machine gun making the man dive for cover as the bullets blast through car windows and glass store fronts. The others run out onto the street as well. + +At that point you notice something. + +"Our car, where is it?" you demand. + +"Chuck panicked and drove off," Homer yells back to you. + +For a moment you are all stunned and then Eddie B runs into the road and waving his pistol he forces an approaching car to stop. As the woman inside scrambles out Eddie stands by the open door and yells for you all to get in. Most of your fellow gang members start running towards him. + +"We all won't fit in that little car," Earl shouts back. "We should run for it." +> Try fleeing on foot +You and Earl start running down the street but you don't get far: two policemen sheltering in a doorway who you didn't even know were there burst from cover and crash-tackle you and Earl to the ground. Your gun goes flying and you try to struggle but a pistol is shoved in your face quickly convincing you to stop. You are both taken into custody and within days found guilty of bank robbery. + +You have only been out of prison for five months when you are sent back to Michigan State Penitentiary to serve your time - there you are reunited with your friends Pete Pierpont, Charles Makley, Red Hamilton and Russell Clark. + +Fortunately John does not intend for you to stay in prison for long... +> Escape! +That afternoon you are all working in the prison workshop when you and your friends are handed a box of thread by a guard. Hidden inside the box is several pistols; unseen by the guards you and your companions pull them out and hand them out amongst yourselves until seven you are armed. At a nod to each other you move through the workshop and without morning you quickly take several guards hostage - altogether eleven prisoners are in the plan to escape including you. + +The ambush is going well and forming the guards into a circle around you and have them much you at gunpoint through the prison before using your hostages to force the guards to open the gates to the administration centre. There you capture a further eight clerks and order them all into the vault. Some of the clerks appear to be deliberately going slow and someone yells for someone to shoot them. +> Shoot one of the civilians in the leg as a warning to the others +Irritated you raise your pistol and shoot one of the men in the leg. He falls to the floor but it does well in getting the others moving faster, grabbing their wounded colleague under the arms they help drag him into the vault, leaving a trail of blood. With the alarm raised you all run outside and split into two groups, six of the prisoners go one way while you, Harry, Charles, Russell and Red steal a car and start driving to Indianapolis. + +Reaching Indianapolis you are able to reunite with Harry Copeland, John's friend, and from him you learn that John has been arrested and is being held in Lima Prison. Harry is keen for you to rescue John right away but the others would rather rob a bank in nearby St Mary's, Ohio first to raise some funds. Harry, who doesn't know your companions very well, decides to go and hide out in Chicago for a few months. +> Join Harry, Charles, Red and Russell in the bank job +On the chosen day the five of you drive into the little town of St Mary's in Ohio. While you and Russell wait in the car the others walk into the town's bank and quickly rob it. They emerge minutes later having locked the staff in the vault after a straight-forward robbery and you all drive out of town. The take from the bank is $11,000, making your share $2,200. + +Nine days after the St Mary's Bank Job you are ready to make your raid on Lima Prison to rescue John Dillinger. The plan is for you all to drive to the prison and while Russell waits in the car Harry, Red and Charles will pretend to be lawmen and ask to see John. They will draw their guns, take the lawmen in the little jail hostage and free him. You need to choose which part of the plan you join. +> Enter the prison with Harry, Red and Charles +You and your companions drive up to Lima Prison that night and knock on the door. It is opened by a portly and friendly-looking Sheriff. + +"What do you need?" he asks cheerfully. + +"We're from Michigan City," you tell him. "We want to see John Dillinger." + +"Let me see your credentials," the Sheriff says. + +"Here's out credentials," you say and you and your companions draw your pistols. The Sheriff takes one look and grabs for your gun. Shocked you instinctively squeeze the trigger and shoot him in the chest. The Sheriff falls to the ground, as he does his wife across the room screams. + +"Give us the keys to the cells," Harry shouts at her and frightened she fetches the keys for him. You see John standing in a jail cell smiling as Harry gets the keys and hurries up to free him. Next to you the Sheriff lies on the floor gasping. + +"Oh men, why did you have to do this to me?" he moans. "My love, I believe I am going to have to leave you," he tells his wife. You say nothing and avoid looking at the Sheriff as John grabs his hat and coat and joins the rest of you in hurrying out of the bank. John is elated by the rescue and together you are all swiftly making plans for your next bank job. +> Your Biggest Bank Job +One autumn afternoon you all drive into Greencastle, Indiana. While Russell sits in the car you and Charles take up positions at the door while John, Harry and Red go straight into the bank. The robbery unfolds seamlessly, they emerge minutes later clutching sacks bulging with cash. In the drive out of town you count it: $75,000! It is the biggest amount you have ever stolen and each person's share is $12,500. + +You initially flee to Chicago but there is soon some bad news: you and John's friend Harry Copeland is arrested after foolishly getting into a drunken fight. You all decide to clear out of town and with your crimes now making national headlines you decide to rob a bank in Racine, Wisconsin, expecting it to be an easy job. +> Another Bank Job +One winter's day you all drive into Racine, leaving Russell in the car and Red at the doors you, John, Harry and Charles stride into the bank. You stride right up to the teller's windows where the man inside is talking on the phone. + +"Stick them up," Charles orders. + +"Next window please," the man replies tersely without looking up. + +Charles raises his pistol and shoots the man in the arm, knocking him off his chair. Moments later a loud alarm siren starts blaring out, you and your companions glance at each other. Leaving you and Charles in the lobby John and Harry run into the vault to begin stealing the contents. As you are standing by the doors a policeman comes wandering through and you grab him. Moments later a second policeman steps through the doors holding a machine gun. + +"Get that cop with the machine gun," Harry shouts from over by the vault. +> Shoot the policeman +Raising your pistol you shoot the policeman in the hand, while he is stunned you step forward, wrench the machine gun from his grasp and order him to join his companions. Moments later a third policeman wanders in through the doors. + +"Well come right in and join us," John calls to him and points his gun at him. + +Holding several hostages around you all leave the bank in a close group and move down towards the car. There are some lawmen on the street and Charles opens fire on them with his machine gun twice, prompting them to dive for cover. Reaching the car you all pile inside with two hostages on the running boards. + +You drive out of town, release the hostages and count the money to find you have stolen $25,000, making your share $4,100. The Gang decides after this robbery it is time for you all to lie low and decide to head to Daytona Beach, Florida for the Christmas Vacation, except Red who wants to go to Chicago to look over some banks first. You need to choose who to accompany. +> Go with Red to Chicago to look at banks +You and Red drive into Chicago where you spend a few weeks checking out banks in East Chicago for a good target. One morning you are walking down to the garage to get your car where you are startled to see three policemen standing around the car examining it and making notes. As you approach the lawmen turn to face you. + +"Excuse me gentlemen, is this your car?" one asks. + +Red draws his pistol. +> Open fire on the lawmen +Drawing your pistol you raise it and shoot one of the lawmen through the chest. As he falls to the ground mortally wounded you and Red open fire on the other two lawmen, who dive for cover. Sprinting out of the garage you hijack a passing car and speed out of town, you don't stop driving until you join the rest of the gang at Daytona Beach. + +That Christmas and New Year you celebrate with barbecues and presents with your friends, clever Harry, reliable Charles, gregarious Russell, absent-minded Red and of course the charismatic John who is the life and soul of the party. You have had a tumultuous but generally successful year, in papers you read that the Baby Face Nelson Gang, who Homer Van Meter has joined, is likewise prospering. + +After the New Year most of the gang intend to continue their vacation in Tucson, Arizona while John and Red want to rob one of the banks in East Chicago Red has been checking out. It is agreed that the gang will split up and reunite in a few days, you need to choose which half of the gang you will accompany. +> Rob a bank with John and Red +Parting from the rest of the gang you and your two companions drive up to the First National Bank and leaving the car unoccupied you all enter the bank. + +"This is a stick-up," John calls out, chewing his gum. "Raise your hands everybody." + +The customers and staff raise their hands, one man glancing at a small amount of his money he has left lying on a counter. + +"Go ahead and take your money," John tells him. "We don't want your money, just the bank's." + +You guard the door while John watches the hostages and Red empties the safe, one policeman comes through the door and you quickly capture him. Through the window you can see more policemen running to take cover behind cars further down the street. + +"Cops outside," you warn John. + +"Don't let those coppers worry you," John calls back cheerfully. "Take your time Red and be sure you get all the dough. We'll take care of them birds on the outside when we get there." John grabs the captured policeman by the arm and pushes him in front of him. "You go first," he tells him. "They might as well shoot you as me. We love you guys anyway." + +Sheltering behind hostages you, John and Red all emerge from the bank and move in a tight scrum towards your escape car, several policemen watching you with their guns trained on you all but not daring to fire. Suddenly one of the policemen sees an opening and fires his pistol several times, hitting John in his bullet-proof vest. For the first time you've known him John loses his temper. + +"I'll get that son of a bitch," he snarls and raises his machine gun. +> Fire at the policeman +Raising your own machine gun you fire a burst of bullets into the policeman who shot at John, he crumples to the ground dead. There's a moment's pause and then the other six policemen open fire as you, John and Red break from your hostages and sprint towards your getaway car. Red is shot through the stomach and the shoulder and stumbles but keeps running, somehow you all make it to the car and throw yourselves inside. With John at the wheel and windows exploding all around you lurch away from the kerb and speed down the street, turn the corner and escape. + +You have made it away with $25,000, making your share $6,600 but Red is seriously wounded, breathing with a hollow, rasping sound. There is no way he can make a long-distance journey now so it is decided he will stay with friends in Chicago while John drives down and joins the rest of the gang in Tucson. You need to choose who to go with. +> Help take care of Red in Chicago +You decide to go with Red to Chicago and help nurse him into health: it is a good thing that you do because just ten days after you split off from him John, Harry, Charles and Russell are all arrested by Tucson Police after they were recognized from wanted posters. With all four of your friends in prison you and Red remain the only two members of the Dillinger Gang still at large. + +You are unsure what to do and as two months pass you focus on helping Red get better until one morning in the newspapers you read incredible news: John has managed to escape prison at Crown Point, Indiana by using a wooden gun to take some twenty people hostage. You and Red are both elated and now your friend has recovered enough to be able to move around you both set off to meet up with John and some new friends.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Raising your own machine gun you fire a burst of bullets into the policeman who shot at John, he crumples to the ground dead. There's a moment's pause and then the other six policemen open fire as you, John and Red break from your hostages and sprint towards your getaway car. Red is shot through the stomach and the shoulder and stumbles but keeps running, somehow you all make it to the car and throw yourselves inside. With John at the wheel and windows exploding all around you lurch away from the kerb and speed down the street, turn the corner and escape. + +You have made it away with $25,000, making your share $6,600 but Red is seriously wounded, breathing with a hollow, rasping sound. There is no way he can make a long-distance journey now so it is decided he will stay with friends in Chicago while John drives down and joins the rest of the gang in Tucson. You need to choose who to go with. +> Drive down to Tucson with John +You and John join the others in Arizona where you tell them about the bank robbery and what has happened to Red, the others are downcast but not overly-concerned. You all agree you will relax in the city for a month or two and when Red is better you'll all hit some more banks together in the Midwest. + +Everything seems to be going well until one evening you and John are heading over to Russell's apartment to see if he wants to join you all for a drink. As you approach the cottage door you notice blood on the step. Turning around you are startled to find yourself facing two lawmen, guns in their hands. + +"Put up those hands or we'll shoot you," one of the men threatens. + +This time you get no chance to run. You and John slowly raise your hands. The Tucson Police take you into custody, it later transpires there was a fire at the hotel some of the gang was staying at, a fireman recognized them from wanted pictures and warned the police. In one day you, John, Harry, Charles and Russell are all arrested after brief struggles. + +You and John and transferred to Crown Point, Indiana for trial where you are both suspected of taking part in the East Chicago Bank Robbery ten days before your arrest where a policeman was shot and killed. If convicted you could face the electric chair. You are downcast but John remains upbeat, he has no intention of staying in jail for long...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Parting from the rest of the gang you and your two companions drive up to the First National Bank and leaving the car unoccupied you all enter the bank. + +"This is a stick-up," John calls out, chewing his gum. "Raise your hands everybody." + +The customers and staff raise their hands, one man glancing at a small amount of his money he has left lying on a counter. + +"Go ahead and take your money," John tells him. "We don't want your money, just the bank's." + +You guard the door while John watches the hostages and Red empties the safe, one policeman comes through the door and you quickly capture him. Through the window you can see more policemen running to take cover behind cars further down the street. + +"Cops outside," you warn John. + +"Don't let those coppers worry you," John calls back cheerfully. "Take your time Red and be sure you get all the dough. We'll take care of them birds on the outside when we get there." John grabs the captured policeman by the arm and pushes him in front of him. "You go first," he tells him. "They might as well shoot you as me. We love you guys anyway." + +Sheltering behind hostages you, John and Red all emerge from the bank and move in a tight scrum towards your escape car, several policemen watching you with their guns trained on you all but not daring to fire. Suddenly one of the policemen sees an opening and fires his pistol several times, hitting John in his bullet-proof vest. For the first time you've known him John loses his temper. + +"I'll get that son of a bitch," he snarls and raises his machine gun. +> Concentrate on making it to the car +John fires a burst of bullets into the policeman who shot at him, the lawman crumples to the ground dead. There's a moment's pause and then the other six policemen open fire as you, John and Red break from your hostages and sprint towards your getaway car. Red is shot through the stomach and the shoulder and stumbles but keeps running, somehow you all make it to the car and throw yourselves inside. With John at the wheel and windows exploding all around you lurch away from the kerb and speed down the street, turn the corner and escape. + +You have made it away with $25,000, making your share $6,600 but Red is seriously wounded, breathing with a hollow, rasping sound. There is no way he can make a long-distance journey now so it is decided he will stay with friends in Chicago while John drives down and joins the rest of the gang in Tucson. You need to choose who to go with.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Drawing your pistol you raise it and shoot one of the lawmen through the chest. As he falls to the ground mortally wounded you and Red open fire on the other two lawmen, who dive for cover. Sprinting out of the garage you hijack a passing car and speed out of town, you don't stop driving until you join the rest of the gang at Daytona Beach. + +That Christmas and New Year you celebrate with barbecues and presents with your friends, clever Harry, reliable Charles, gregarious Russell, absent-minded Red and of course the charismatic John who is the life and soul of the party. You have had a tumultuous but generally successful year, in papers you read that the Baby Face Nelson Gang, who Homer Van Meter has joined, is likewise prospering. + +After the New Year most of the gang intend to continue their vacation in Tucson, Arizona while John and Red want to rob one of the banks in East Chicago Red has been checking out. It is agreed that the gang will split up and reunite in a few days, you need to choose which half of the gang you will accompany. +> Continue hiding out with Harry, Charles and Russell +You and the others all drive down to Tucson and settle yourselves comfortably in that desert town, you are soon joined by a rather shaken John. He pulled off the bank robbery in East Chicago but Red was shot and seriously wounded, John has left him in Chicago to recover. The five of you do your best to enjoy yourselves in the city without him. + +Everything seems to be going well until one evening you and John are heading over to Russell's apartment to see if he wants to join you all for a drink. As you approach the cottage door you notice blood on the step. Turning around you are startled to find yourself facing two lawmen, guns in their hands. + +"Put up those hands or we'll shoot you," one of the men threatens. + +This time you get no chance to run. You and John slowly raise your hands. The Tucson Police take you into custody, it later transpires there was a fire at the hotel some of the gang was staying at, a fireman recognized them from wanted pictures and warned the police. In one day you, John, Harry, Charles and Russell are all arrested after brief struggles. + +You and John and transferred to Crown Point, Indiana for trial where you are both suspected of taking part in the East Chicago Bank Robbery ten days before your arrest where a policeman was shot and killed. If convicted you could face the electric chair. You are downcast but John remains upbeat, he has no intention of staying in jail for long...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Red drive into Chicago where you spend a few weeks checking out banks in East Chicago for a good target. One morning you are walking down to the garage to get your car where you are startled to see three policemen standing around the car examining it and making notes. As you approach the lawmen turn to face you. + +"Excuse me gentlemen, is this your car?" one asks. + +Red draws his pistol. +> Run +You start running while Red shoots one of the lawmen. The other two dive for cover and both of you sprint out of the garage. Flagging down a passing car you and Red pile in and speed out of town, you don't stop driving until you join the rest of the gang at Daytona Beach. + +That Christmas and New Year you celebrate with barbecues and presents with your friends, clever Harry, reliable Charles, gregarious Russell, absent-minded Red and of course the charismatic John who is the life and soul of the party. You have had a tumultuous but generally successful year, in papers you read that the Baby Face Nelson Gang, who Homer Van Meter has joined, is likewise prospering. + +After the New Year most of the gang intend to continue their vacation in Tucson, Arizona while John and Red want to rob one of the banks in East Chicago Red has been checking out. It is agreed that the gang will split up and reunite in a few days, you need to choose which half of the gang you will accompany.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Raising your pistol you shoot the policeman in the hand, while he is stunned you step forward, wrench the machine gun from his grasp and order him to join his companions. Moments later a third policeman wanders in through the doors. + +"Well come right in and join us," John calls to him and points his gun at him. + +Holding several hostages around you all leave the bank in a close group and move down towards the car. There are some lawmen on the street and Charles opens fire on them with his machine gun twice, prompting them to dive for cover. Reaching the car you all pile inside with two hostages on the running boards. + +You drive out of town, release the hostages and count the money to find you have stolen $25,000, making your share $4,100. The Gang decides after this robbery it is time for you all to lie low and decide to head to Daytona Beach, Florida for the Christmas Vacation, except Red who wants to go to Chicago to look over some banks first. You need to choose who to accompany. +> Go with John, Harry, Charles and Russell to Florida for your holidays +You and the rest of the gang drive down to Daytona Beach where you book several apartments and make yourselves comfortable. Red joins you in the second half of December after killing a policeman in a gunfight in Chicago. You all agree to lie low over the holiday season. + +That Christmas and New Year you celebrate with barbecues and presents with your friends, clever Harry, reliable Charles, gregarious Russell, absent-minded Red and of course the charismatic John who is the life and soul of the party. You have had a tumultuous but generally successful year, in papers you read that the Baby Face Nelson Gang, who Homer Van Meter has joined, is likewise prospering. + +After the New Year most of the gang intend to continue their vacation in Tucson, Arizona while John and Red want to rob one of the banks in East Chicago Red has been checking out. It is agreed that the gang will split up and reunite in a few days, you need to choose which half of the gang you will accompany.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>One winter's day you all drive into Racine, leaving Russell in the car and Red at the doors you, John, Harry and Charles stride into the bank. You stride right up to the teller's windows where the man inside is talking on the phone. + +"Stick them up," Charles orders. + +"Next window please," the man replies tersely without looking up. + +Charles raises his pistol and shoots the man in the arm, knocking him off his chair. Moments later a loud alarm siren starts blaring out, you and your companions glance at each other. Leaving you and Charles in the lobby John and Harry run into the vault to begin stealing the contents. As you are standing by the doors a policeman comes wandering through and you grab him. Moments later a second policeman steps through the doors holding a machine gun. + +"Get that cop with the machine gun," Harry shouts from over by the vault. +> Let Charles deal with him +Charles raises his pistol and shoots shoot the policeman in the hand, while he is stunned you step forward, wrench the machine gun from his grasp and order him to join his companions. Moments later a third policeman wanders in through the doors. + +"Well come right in and join us," John calls to him and points his gun at him. + +Holding several hostages around you all leave the bank in a close group and move down towards the car. There are some lawmen on the street and Charles opens fire on them with his machine gun twice, prompting them to dive for cover. Reaching the car you all pile inside with two hostages on the running boards. + +You drive out of town, release the hostages and count the money to find you have stolen $25,000, making your share $4,100. The Gang decides after this robbery it is time for you all to lie low and decide to head to Daytona Beach, Florida for the Christmas Vacation, except Red who wants to go to Chicago to look over some banks first. You need to choose who to accompany.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>On the chosen day the five of you drive into the little town of St Mary's in Ohio. While you and Russell wait in the car the others walk into the town's bank and quickly rob it. They emerge minutes later having locked the staff in the vault after a straight-forward robbery and you all drive out of town. The take from the bank is $11,000, making your share $2,200. + +Nine days after the St Mary's Bank Job you are ready to make your raid on Lima Prison to rescue John Dillinger. The plan is for you all to drive to the prison and while Russell waits in the car Harry, Red and Charles will pretend to be lawmen and ask to see John. They will draw their guns, take the lawmen in the little jail hostage and free him. You need to choose which part of the plan you join. +> Wait in the car with Russell +You and Russell wait nervously in the car while your companions enter the prison. Moments later there is a shot followed by silence, you and Russell glance at each other nervously. A few minutes late your friends come jogging out of the prison, John is with them! They all pile into the car and you drive off. + +"What happened back there?" Russell asks. + +"Harry shot the sheriff," Charles says shortly. + +John is elated and his rescue and together you all determine to rob a large bank as soon as possible.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Irritated you raise your pistol and shoot one of the men in the leg. He falls to the floor but it does well in getting the others moving faster, grabbing their wounded colleague under the arms they help drag him into the vault, leaving a trail of blood. With the alarm raised you all run outside and split into two groups, six of the prisoners go one way while you, Harry, Charles, Russell and Red steal a car and start driving to Indianapolis. + +Reaching Indianapolis you are able to reunite with Harry Copeland, John's friend, and from him you learn that John has been arrested and is being held in Lima Prison. Harry is keen for you to rescue John right away but the others would rather rob a bank in nearby St Mary's, Ohio first to raise some funds. Harry, who doesn't know your companions very well, decides to go and hide out in Chicago for a few months. +> Hide out with Harry in Chicago +You and Harry move to Chicago where you lie low, reading in papers how your friends first busted John out of prison and then pulled off a major bank raid together. You are keen to re-join them but Harry is not so eager, he does not know any of the others and is now drinking more than ever. One night you are drinking in a bar together when Harry gets into a heated argument with a woman. Drunk and irritable he pulls a pistol out of his pocket and threatens her with it. +> Try to get him to calm down +You try to intervene but before you can several off-duty policeman, who were also having a drink in the bar, quickly draw their guns and move in to arrest you both. Surrounded there is nothing you can do but curse Harry's stupidity as the two of you are hauled off to jail. Once in custody you are swiftly identified as wanted bank robbers. + +You both refuse to say nothing about your companions, are convicted and both receive long prison terms. Two months later John and the rest of the gang except Red Hamilton are arrested and you are transferred to Crown Point, Indiana where John is being held so you can both be tried on robberies you committed together. + +Fortunately you and John have no intention of staying in jail...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Harry move to Chicago where you lie low, reading in papers how your friends first busted John out of prison and then pulled off a major bank raid together. You are keen to re-join them but Harry is not so eager, he does not know any of the others and is now drinking more than ever. One night you are drinking in a bar together when Harry gets into a heated argument with a woman. Drunk and irritable he pulls a pistol out of his pocket and threatens her with it. +> Leave the bar immediately +You leave the bar quickly and head home, the next morning you are shocked to read in newspapers that Harry was arrested at the bar by off-duty police officers and identified as a wanted bank robber. You quickly make contact with John, Harry, Charles, Red and Russell and flee Chicago, heading to Racine, Wisconsin to rob another bank.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>That afternoon you are all working in the prison workshop when you and your friends are handed a box of thread by a guard. Hidden inside the box is several pistols; unseen by the guards you and your companions pull them out and hand them out amongst yourselves until seven you are armed. At a nod to each other you move through the workshop and without morning you quickly take several guards hostage - altogether eleven prisoners are in the plan to escape including you. + +The ambush is going well and forming the guards into a circle around you and have them much you at gunpoint through the prison before using your hostages to force the guards to open the gates to the administration centre. There you capture a further eight clerks and order them all into the vault. Some of the clerks appear to be deliberately going slow and someone yells for someone to shoot them. +> Hurry them along without any gunfire +You ignore the voice but one of the other prisoners raises his pistol and shoots one of the men in the leg. He falls to the floor but it does well in getting the others moving faster, grabbing their wounded colleague under the arms they help drag him into the vault, leaving a trail of blood. With the alarm raised you all run outside and split into two groups, six of the prisoners go one way while you, Harry, Charles, Russell and Red steal a car and start driving to Indianapolis. + +Reaching Indianapolis you are able to reunite with Harry Copeland, John's friend, and from him you learn that John has been arrested and is being held in Lima Prison. Harry is keen for you to rescue John right away but the others would rather rob a bank in nearby St Mary's, Ohio first to raise some funds. Harry, who doesn't know your companions very well, decides to go and hide out in Chicago for a few months.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Two weeks after the Daleville Robbery the three of you drive into the little town of Montpelier, while Harry stays in the car you and John stroll into the bank, draw your pistols on the customers and tellers inside and announce this is a stick-up. Almost immediately a female teller reaches towards a button on the wall and John trains his gun on her. + +"What are you trying to do, set off that alarm?" he asks, chewing his gum. + +"I would if I could," the woman snaps back. + +John herds the prisoners up against a wall while you stride into the vault and shove all the money you can find inside into a bag before locking the customers inside the vault. As you walk out of the bank you encounter an old man standing outside who has obviously been watching what has happened through the windows. + +"Looks like the bank's being held up again," he comments to the pair of you. + +"It's so easy, I'm not surprised," you tell him with a smile. Climbing in the car you drive off with Harry and count the money in the back. You have stolen $10,000, making your share $3,300. Soon after the robbery you get word that your old prison friend Homer Van Meter wants to meet so the three of you drive up to Chicago, Illinois to see him. + +Homer, a skinny, cold character who in prison was something as a loner greets the three of you looking happier than you remember seeing him looking before. + +"Hello pals," he says shaking hands with you all. "I've been reading about your bank jobs in Indiana and Ohio, they're great stuff. I've teamed up with an outfit myself led by Baby Face Nelson. You know him right, used to lead a gang three years ago and escaped from prison last year? He's a real tough character." + +"I heard he was gun-crazy and a killer," Harry says frowning. + +"Well maybe a little but he's a guy you want on your side in a gun-battle," Homer says cheerfully. "He's put together a nice little crew, there's me, a former boxer called Tommy Carroll, Eddie Green of the Barker-Karpis Gang, that old veteran masterthief Eddie Bentz and two Chicago gangsters called Earl Doyle and Chuck Fisher. We're looking at a bank job in Grand Haven, Michigan later this month if you are interested." + +"Thanks Homer but Harry and I have some scores of our own lined up," John tells him. "I've got a mind to try and get some guns smuggled into Michigan State Pen to help Pete, Charles, Red and Russell bust out. If I can get them out we can start up our own gang." + +"Well the offer is always there if you want it," Homer tells John before turning to you. "What do you reckon? You want to join the Nelson Gang?" +> Stick with John and Harry +You turn down Homer and go back to Indiana with John and Harry. In the first week of September the three of you drive up to the State Bank in Indianapolis and leave Harry in the car while the pair of you walk into the bank. John casually climbs up on a table and announces that the bank is being robbed. The teller behind the counter is talking on the phone and doesn't even look up. + +"Get away from that damn telephone," you snap at him. + +Finally the teller looks up to find you pointing a gun at him and quickly puts the phone down. While you hold the two tellers hostage John empties the vault, you both lock the tellers inside the vault and stroll out to the car. As you drive out of town you count the money and find you have stolen $24,000, making our share a cool $8,000. + +John is delighted and quickly explains his plans - he means to bribe guards at Michigan State Penitentiary to smuggle pistols into boxes of thread for the prison workshops and get word to your friends Pete, Charles, Red and Russell that the breakout is on, after that he's going to head over to Dayton, Ohio to see a girl he's dating. Harry plans to lounge around in a hotel in Indianapolis until John sends word that he needs him. +> Go with John to smuggle the guns into prison +You accompany John to Jackson, Michigan where the State Penitentiary that you spend so many unhappy years in is located. John makes contact with some guards who agree to smuggle several loaded pistols he purchased into the prison. Once that is accomplished you both head down to Dayton, Ohio so John can visit a girlfriend of his called Mary Longnaker. + +Visiting Mary's apartment you decide to go out on the balcony for a smoke while John shows Mary some photos he took recently. While you are on the balcony you hear a knock on the door. A moment later you hear it opened and two men walk into the room. A second later your blood runs cold as you hear them speak. + +"Stick them up John, we're police officers," a voice orders. "Don't resist John. I'll kill you." + +A dozen thoughts rush through your head, though you are on the fifteenth floor you wonder if you can climb down onto the balcony below... +> Try climbing down +Quickly you throw aside your cigar and swinging your legs over the balcony you carefully lower yourself down, keeping a firm grip on the balcony. Stretching to your full height you can just touch the balcony below with your feet, taking a deep breath you let go of the balcony of Mary's apartment with your hands. + +You feel a rush of fear as your feet slip on the balcony rail below but they slip inwards, you hit the balcony rail with your butt first and bump down into a sitting position on the balcony floor. Though you've painfully bruised your tailbone you don't hesitate but spring up and hurry off the balcony and through the apartment, past a confused looking housewife holding a baby, out the door and hurry down the stairs. + +You flee rapidly out of the apartment and catch a bus out of town, working your way down to Indianapolis where you reunite with Harry four days later. He has already heard of John's arrest and neither of you are sure what to do until that night when ten prisoners used the guns John smuggled into them to escape Michigan State Penitentiary. + +Your friends Harry Pierpont, Charles Makley, Red Hamilton and Russell Clark use stolen cars to reach Indianapolis where you and Harry meet with them a few days later. You are thrilled to see your pals again: Harry, cold and clever, Charles, experienced and dependable, Red, absent-minded but loyal and Russell, gregarious and confident, are all thrilled to see you too. They are soon planning a bank robbery in the nearby town of St Mary's Ohio before busting John out of prison. Harry, who doesn't know any of them, turns down taking part in the robbery and instead opts to hide out in Chicago for a month or two.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You accompany John to Jackson, Michigan where the State Penitentiary that you spend so many unhappy years in is located. John makes contact with some guards who agree to smuggle several loaded pistols he purchased into the prison. Once that is accomplished you both head down to Dayton, Ohio so John can visit a girlfriend of his called Mary Longnaker. + +Visiting Mary's apartment you decide to go out on the balcony for a smoke while John shows Mary some photos he took recently. While you are on the balcony you hear a knock on the door. A moment later you hear it opened and two men walk into the room. A second later your blood runs cold as you hear them speak. + +"Stick them up John, we're police officers," a voice orders. "Don't resist John. I'll kill you." + +A dozen thoughts rush through your head, though you are on the fifteenth floor you wonder if you can climb down onto the balcony below... +> Go inside and surrender +Cautiously you raise your hands into the air and step off the balcony. The two lawmen, armed with a machine gun and a shotgun, inside are surprised by your sudden appearance but you and John are swiftly taken into custody and transported to the local prison of Lima, Ohio where you are incarcerated and facing charges of bank robbery. + +Days later you are pleased to read how ten prisoners used the guns you and John smuggled in to escape Michigan State Pen, amongst them your friends Harry, Charles, Red and Russell. Both you and John are confident that they will be coming to bust you both out of prison and that you won't be in jail for long. +> Your friends return the favour +You and John remain in prison for three weeks until one evening there is a knock on the door and three men enter. With a thrill of excitement you recognise your friends Harry, Charles and Red. The Sheriff, a kindly character called Jesse Sarber approaches them. + +"What do you need?" he asks cheerfully. + +"We're from Michigan City," Harry tells him. "We want to see John Dillinger." + +"Let me see your credentials," the Sheriff says. + +"Here's out credentials," Harry replies, raises a pistol and shoots the Sheriff in the chest. Sarber falls to the ground, as he does his wife across the room screams. + +"Give us the keys to the cells," Harry shouts at her and frightened she fetches the keys for him. You and John grin as Harry hurries over, unlocks the cell doors and lets you both out. As you hurry towards the door the Sheriff lies on the floor gasping. + +"Oh men, why did you have to do this to me?" he moans. "My love, I believe I am going to have to leave you," he tells his wife. You and John exchange glances but say nothing, hurrying out of the door you reach a car where Russell is waiting to drive you all to safety. You and John are elated by the rescue and together you are all swiftly making plans for your next bank job.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You turn down Homer and go back to Indiana with John and Harry. In the first week of September the three of you drive up to the State Bank in Indianapolis and leave Harry in the car while the pair of you walk into the bank. John casually climbs up on a table and announces that the bank is being robbed. The teller behind the counter is talking on the phone and doesn't even look up. + +"Get away from that damn telephone," you snap at him. + +Finally the teller looks up to find you pointing a gun at him and quickly puts the phone down. While you hold the two tellers hostage John empties the vault, you both lock the tellers inside the vault and stroll out to the car. As you drive out of town you count the money and find you have stolen $24,000, making our share a cool $8,000. + +John is delighted and quickly explains his plans - he means to bribe guards at Michigan State Penitentiary to smuggle pistols into boxes of thread for the prison workshops and get word to your friends Pete, Charles, Red and Russell that the breakout is on, after that he's going to head over to Dayton, Ohio to see a girl he's dating. Harry plans to lounge around in a hotel in Indianapolis until John sends word that he needs him. +> Hide out in Indianapolis with Harry +You join Harry in Indianapolis where you both live quietly in hotel rooms: one morning you are shocked to read in the papers that John has been arrested by lawmen while visiting his girlfriend in Dayton. Initially you and Harry are unsure what to do but days later ten prisoners use the guns John smuggled into them to escape Michigan State Penitentiary. + +Your friends Harry Pierpont, Charles Makley, Red Hamilton and Russell Clark use stolen cars to reach Indianapolis where you and Harry meet with them a few days later. You are thrilled to see your pals again: Harry, cold and clever, Charles, experienced and dependable, Red, absent-minded but loyal and Russell, gregarious and confident, are all thrilled to see you too. They are soon planning a bank robbery in the nearby town of St Mary's Ohio before busting John out of prison. Harry, who doesn't know any of them, turns down taking part in the robbery and instead opts to hide out in Chicago for a month or two.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After the New Carlisle bank robbery you, John and the teenagers drive down to Kansas where you hide out in the town of Muncie at the apartment of a hard-drinking friend of William's called Harry Copeland. You lie low at the apartment while Harry and John commit a few local robberies and then begin planning to rob a bank in the little town of Daleville, Indiana. + +The night before the robbery Harry, William and Paul all drink heavily and on the morning of the planned robbery Harry is alright but William and Paul are too hung-over to go on the robbery. John decides to go ahead and rob the bank with just you and Harry but you are worried if three people are enough to pull the job off. +> Stay in the apartment with Paul and William +You decide to stay in the apartment with the youths when John and Harry leave and begin frying some bacon in the kitchen. Barely five minutes after your friends leave there is a knock on the door. You go to answer it and find yourself confronted by four policemen with guns in their hands. + +"Hands up," they bark at you. +> Run +You take one look and slam the door in the face of the lawmen. While fists drum against the door you race across the kitchen, into the bathroom where you slam and lock the door and you quickly slide the window up. Standing on the toilet you clamber through, legs first, climb down until you are hanging from the window by your finger tips and with a deep breath you let go. + +You fall straight down about fifteen feet, landing in a crouching position in the apartment's parking area and quickly straighten up. You hear the sound of a car engine and glancing back you see John and Harry pulling their car out of their parking spot, racing over you throw open the door and jump in the back. + +"Go, go, go," you pant. "The law are raiding the apartment." + +John steers the car out of the car park and you drive away. You drive to Indiana, hole up in a hotel and the next day you read in the newspapers that both William and Paul were arrested in the apartment and charged with bank robbery. After some discussion the three of you decide to go ahead with your plan to rob the Daleville Bank. + +Just two days after the raid you and John stroll into the bank, draw your pistols and train them on the sole bank teller behind the counter. + +"This is a stickup," John tells her. "Get me the money honey." + +John leaps over the counter, strides into the open safe and quickly scoops up the money inside before you both lock the teller inside, stroll outside and jump in the back of Harry's car. As you drive out of town you count the money and find you have gotten away with $3,500, making your share of the money $1,100, not bad for a dishonest day's work.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to stay in the apartment with the youths when John and Harry leave and begin frying some bacon in the kitchen. Barely five minutes after your friends leave there is a knock on the door. You go to answer it and find yourself confronted by four policemen with guns in their hands. + +"Hands up," they bark at you. +> Surrender +Slowly you raise your hands into the air. The lawmen pour into the apartment and quickly capture William and Paul, who are still in their beds. The three of you are quickly taken downtown to the local Muncie Jail where you are swiftly identified as three of the men who robbed the New Carlisle Bank, you and your companions resolutely refuse to name John or Harry. + +Just two months after leaving prison you are sent back to Michigan State Penitentiary where you are reunited with your friends Pete Pierpont, Charles Makley, Red Hamilton and Russell Clark. + +Fortunately John does not intend for you all to remain imprisoned for long.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your world is rot. Your nostrils fill with the smell of excrement and decay that tends to fill your home. Still, it's all you have. You scurry among the scattered ruins, climbing atop a massive section of castle wreckage, sniffing the air. + + +A rusted, blood-stained sword sits in one hand, a leather pouch hanging from your shoulder. Your whiskers tingle with excitement as you smell the scent of burning meat. Campfires are near, and where there's campfire, there's a caravan. Where there's a caravan, there's food. +> Head towards it +You scurry towards it, as do the others. Dozens of brown and black bodies scurry up from among the rubble and out of the ancient sewers underneath where your camps lie. You're one of the first on the sign, climbing atop a crushed tower as you see it. Three wagons circled around a campfire, basking in its light. The moonlight shines on your brown, shit-matted fur and catches on your blade as you run forward towards the camps. The man on guard, a young, cleanly shaven guard with armor that's too small for him yell as he sees you approach,. He readies his spear, looking ready to plunge it into you. You dance at the edge of the spear point, waiting for your chance. +> Grab at the spear +You step forward, grabbing the spear's shaft and yanking the guard forward. You swing your sword, slashing him in the massive gap between his helmet and shoulder pads, biting into his neck. He screams, collapsing to the ground as blood spurts forth. + + +You yell with glee, at other Ratlings begin arriving to take care of the other guards. The merchants and passengers of the caravan either flee back inside the caravans or procur weapons and get ready to fight, but this isn't a unified raid where the scraps will be given out later. You take what you can get. You run towards the camp fire, grabbing the stew cooking there, jabbing your snout into it and beginning to gulp down the delicious mixture. You manage to finish half before a much bigger rat grabs the pot from you, and you know you can't fight him. You turn to one of the caravans, where rats have killed the guards and are dealing with the merchants. The merchants are surrounded, looking terrified, as all those willing to fight have been cut down. + + +Although the majority of them are to be enslaved and sold to the Lizards or the Eastern Tribes, while the women will be taken back to the burrows for a less than kind fate, one unfortunate soul has made his presence known by trying to negotiate. + + +"Please, taken the cargo! It's yours! Keep the men as well, we'll fetch a heavy ransom! But leave the women and the child go, won't you?" the merchant leader says. + + +Bad choice. The boys have taken note of him now, and he's a fat one. His weight, the fact that he has so much food he can grow weak and fat, only angers you all thanks to the fact that you're all constantly hungry and eating scraps. One of the ratlings slashes his axe, cutting open the man's belly in a superficial wound. Another ratling jabs him with a spear, as the boys begin to jab and slash at the man as he yelps in pain as he's slowly cut and hacked apart. + + +The torture has drawn the others attention away from the actual carriages. You stare at them, contemplating sneaking away and grabbing yourself some more food. +> Join the torture +You laugh gleefully as you dash forward, punching the man in the side of the head and knocking him backward as he grunts in pain, knocking into the blow of a sword blade. You slash at his ankle as he collapses to a knee, before one of the ratlings decks him a blow from the butt of his spear. He tries to stand, blood down streaming down his face. + + +"Please, I'm sorry. I didn't...!" he cries, looking genuinely petrified, before one of the rats takes it too far and stabs him in the throat with his sword, killing him. + + +He slumps to the ground, before lying still. + + +"Bah! Could've played with him for hours!" you complain. + + +The largest rat, a big brute who's taken charge of the raid named Pak, strides forward. Not too many ratlings have joined the raid, a fact Pak is clearly enjoying as it means he gets to take charge, and since you all get a bigger part of the profit, all the better. + + +"You, you and you!" he shouts, selecting three rats from the group. "Start moving the prisoners back." + + +"Yes, yes," they snarl, as they begin to shout and whip the prisoners into movement. + + +"You!" he shouts, pointing a long finger at you. "Kill the horses." + + +You nod, walking over to the horses. They seem terrified and scarred, and look at you as if begging for mercy. You wonder if it's best just to untie them and scare them off. +> Kill the horses +You slash your sword, cutting open one of the horse's throats. You jab your sword through its skull to finish it off, before slashing another's throat. You kill the few horses, before returning to Pak, who's already ordering the others to carve up the horses and bring the meat and hides back to the home. Suddenly, you see two ratlings dragging a teenage girl out of a caravan, whose crying and screaming has gathered the rest of your attention. + + +"Please! Please! Let me go!" the girl sobs. + + +The ratlings toss her in front of Pak, who grins eagerly. + + +"Perfect! I'll have some fun with her!" he says. + + +He glances at you, noticing you're finished with the horses. + + +"Bring the girl back to the burrow. I'll have my fun with her later. Let the others have some fun, too." + + +You nod, walking over to the girl, grabbing her by the hang and beginning to drag her towards the burrow. +> Lead the girl back to the burrows +You drag the girl along the path to the burrow, as she cries. + + +"Please, you have to help me get out of here. We can run, just run into the wilderness." + + +"Can't do it. Too many bad things there. They'd kill on site a ratling. No, no," you say. + + +"Please! I don't want to die..." she whimpers. "Can... can you tell me what's going to happen to me?" +> Walk in silence +You keep walking, as the girl falls silent, becoming quiet. Soon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey. + + +"I'm scared," the girl says. + + +"I'd be, if I were you," you admit. + + +"What's your name?" she asks. + + +"Ritz," you say. + + +"I'm Julianne," she says. "I don't want to die here." + + +You don't say another word, as she begins to chant. + + +"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon..." she continues to chant. + + +You turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it. + + +"This is pretty," you say, admiring the silver. + + +"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father." + + +You stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her. +> Snatch it off her +You grab the necklace, snatching it off her neck and clutching it in her hands. + + +"Hey!" she cries, grabbing at it before you snarl, scarring her away. + + +She whimpers, shuffling away from you. You stare at her, wrapping it around the hilt of your sword and clutching it tightly. You wait patiently for Pak to arrive. + + +After a few minutes, the massive, black-furred rat clambers into the burrow, grinning as he sees her prey. He stomps forward, grabbing her by the hand. + + +"Come on, darling. Let's take you down to the lower levels. I have a few of the others I want pulled over to my side, and I'm sure your sweet ass will do a great deal in getting them there." + + +The huge brute begins dragging the girl away, leaving you standing there. Suddenly, he stops, turning around. + + +"What's your name?" + + +"Ritz," you say. + + +"You did a good job protecting her from the cripples and in the raid, and I'm feeling generous. Care to join in the fun?" +> Join in +You allow your bestial nature to take over, nodding vigorously. You follow him as he drags the weeping girl along with him. Soon, you venture down the twisted staircases and pathways down to the lower layers. Eventually, you enter the chamber filled with whatever Ratlings Pak wants to impress. + + +You watch in a mixture of fear and lust as the Ratlings appear, more than willing to be entertained by the new flesh that's entered their homes. They quickly undress her and begin to have their fun despite her horrified, screaming protests which soon turn to pained screams and begging. The Ratlings have their fun with her, and eventually you have your turn. You focus on the physical sensations rather than the pitiful weeping, and soon embrace the pure pleasure of the act. You achieve release, almost collapsing back as your body fulfills one of its prime functions. A ratling pulls you back to take your place with the hostage, and you're tossed gently aside. + + +You crawl back towards your home, curling up in a bed of animal hides and quickly letting sleep take you. The life of a ratling is a pleasurable one if you're smart enough to take advantage of it, you have to admit. +> Awaken +You awaken to a knife pressed against your throat. You reach for your sword in the darkness, but a hand catches yours. + + +"Scream for help or try anything and I cut you open," a harsh voice growls. + + +You try to nod, but the knife is pressed so tightly any movement would slice open your throat. + + +"A prisoner was taken into the burrows. Where is she?" +> Claim ignorance +"I don't know anything," you say. + + +The man grabs your throat, strangling it as he impales your hand. You try to scream, but you can't even get out a breath. + + +"Quiet," the man says, pulling out the knife and releasing your throat as you whimper, clutching at your wound. + + +"Do you think I picked you out by chance? You have her necklace. I tracked it here. Now, answer me." +> Plead ignorance +"I swear to everything I don't know!" you say. + + +"Filthy lying vermin," the man hisses. "Perhaps the next rat will be more trustworhy." + + +The man slices open your throat, and you collapse against the ground, quickly dying.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"I don't know anything," you say. + + +The man grabs your throat, strangling it as he impales your hand. You try to scream, but you can't even get out a breath. + + +"Quiet," the man says, pulling out the knife and releasing your throat as you whimper, clutching at your wound. + + +"Do you think I picked you out by chance? You have her necklace. I tracked it here. Now, answer me." +> Lie +"She was taken off to be ransomed off by one of the travelling ratlings." + + +You see the runes of the blade glowing, as the man snarls. + + +"Filthy lying vermin," the man hisses. "Perhaps the next rat will be more trustworthy." + + +The man slices open your throat, and you collapse against the ground, quickly dying.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"I don't know anything," you say. + + +The man grabs your throat, strangling it as he impales your hand. You try to scream, but you can't even get out a breath. + + +"Quiet," the man says, pulling out the knife and releasing your throat as you whimper, clutching at your wound. + + +"Do you think I picked you out by chance? You have her necklace. I tracked it here. Now, answer me." +> Tell the truth +"She's been taken down to the fifth layer. You... you won't want to find her. She's dead by now, and her body won't be in the best condition." + + +The man doesn't respond for some time, before snarling. + + +"No, she's alive. I can feel it. You, however, are no better than the rest of your lying kind. Death's for you." + + +The man slices open your throat, and you collapse against the ground, quickly dying.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You awaken to a knife pressed against your throat. You reach for your sword in the darkness, but a hand catches yours. + + +"Scream for help or try anything and I cut you open," a harsh voice growls. + + +You try to nod, but the knife is pressed so tightly any movement would slice open your throat. + + +"A prisoner was taken into the burrows. Where is she?" +> Lie +"She was taken off to be ransomed off by one of the travelling ratlings." + + +You see the runes of the blade glowing, as the man snarls. + + +"Liar. The knife speaks to your honesty. The truth, now, or you die."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You awaken to a knife pressed against your throat. You reach for your sword in the darkness, but a hand catches yours. + + +"Scream for help or try anything and I cut you open," a harsh voice growls. + + +You try to nod, but the knife is pressed so tightly any movement would slice open your throat. + + +"A prisoner was taken into the burrows. Where is she?" +> Tell the truth +"She's been taken down to the fifth layer. You... you won't want to find her. She's dead by now, and her body won't be in the best condition." + + +The man doesn't respond for some time, before snarling. + + +"No, she's alive. I can feel it. Your fate, however, is less certain." + + +The man's blade illuminates, casting golden light on the both of you. You stare at his grizzled face with a thick beard growing. However, he gets a clear view of you, seeing your blood, sweat and semen-encrusted fur. He stares at you, realizing what you've done. + + +"You had her way with her... you disgusting vermin!" he near shouts, hopefully waking some of the other Ratlings to come to your side. + + +The man slices open your throat, and you collapse against the ground. He rams his knife into your chest repeatedly as you try to scream in pain, but blood quickly fills your throat. Your life is quickly drained from you, and you lie there as death takes you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grab the necklace, snatching it off her neck and clutching it in her hands. + + +"Hey!" she cries, grabbing at it before you snarl, scarring her away. + + +She whimpers, shuffling away from you. You stare at her, wrapping it around the hilt of your sword and clutching it tightly. You wait patiently for Pak to arrive. + + +After a few minutes, the massive, black-furred rat clambers into the burrow, grinning as he sees her prey. He stomps forward, grabbing her by the hand. + + +"Come on, darling. Let's take you down to the lower levels. I have a few of the others I want pulled over to my side, and I'm sure your sweet ass will do a great deal in getting them there." + + +The huge brute begins dragging the girl away, leaving you standing there. Suddenly, he stops, turning around. + + +"What's your name?" + + +"Ritz," you say. + + +"You did a good job protecting her from the cripples and in the raid, and I'm feeling generous. Care to join in the fun?" +> Refuse +You shake your head sadly, just staring at the rat. He lets out a grunt of disgust, before dragging the girl away despite her crying protests. + + +You head to your chamber, curling up in a bed of animal hides and lying there. You hear the girl's crying and screaming for help in the distance of the caverns, but know you can do nothing. You push your furs against your floppy ears to drown out the sound, trying to find sleep. Eventually, you manage to do so.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grab the necklace, snatching it off her neck and clutching it in her hands. + + +"Hey!" she cries, grabbing at it before you snarl, scarring her away. + + +She whimpers, shuffling away from you. You stare at her, wrapping it around the hilt of your sword and clutching it tightly. You wait patiently for Pak to arrive. + + +After a few minutes, the massive, black-furred rat clambers into the burrow, grinning as he sees her prey. He stomps forward, grabbing her by the hand. + + +"Come on, darling. Let's take you down to the lower levels. I have a few of the others I want pulled over to my side, and I'm sure your sweet ass will do a great deal in getting them there." + + +The huge brute begins dragging the girl away, leaving you standing there. Suddenly, he stops, turning around. + + +"What's your name?" + + +"Ritz," you say. + + +"You did a good job protecting her from the cripples and in the raid, and I'm feeling generous. Care to join in the fun?" +> Try to stop him taking her +"No!" you say, punching the massive ratling in the jaw and sending him stumbling backwards, more out of surprise than anything else. + + +"What did you say to me, you little prick?" he says, raising his club to strike. +> Go for his eyes +You leap into the air, grabbing the massive ratling's shoulder and jamming your sword into his eyes. + + +"Ah! Fuck, fuck, fuck! I can't see! I can't fucking see!" he yells, grabbing you by the fur and flinging you against the ground with a painful thud. + + +Although he can't see, he still hears where you thud against the ground. With a scream of rage and pain, he raises his club into the air and swings with all his might. It slams into your legs, shattering both of your legs as you scream in pain. He snarls, lifting up his club once more as you yell and grab at your broken legs, trying to focus on survival rather than the awful pain. He swings down his club once more, crushing your skull.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"No!" you say, punching the massive ratling in the jaw and sending him stumbling backwards, more out of surprise than anything else. + + +"What did you say to me, you little prick?" he says, raising his club to strike. +> Dodge +You roll to avoid his club swing, which slams into the stones next to you, sending splinters of wood flying in all directions. With his heavy club now on the ground, you now have a chance to do something. +> Dodge again +You slash at him, ready to dodge again as he lifts his club back up. He roars, swinging his club back at you. You roll under it again, before he changes direction of his swing, prepared for this. It slams into your legs, shattering both of your legs as you scream in pain. He snarls, lifting up his club once more as you yell asd grab at your broken legs, trying to focus on survival rather than the awful pain. He swings down his club once more, crushing your skull.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You roll to avoid his club swing, which slams into the stones next to you, sending splinters of wood flying in all directions. With his heavy club now on the ground, you now have a chance to do something. +> Strike at his side +You step forward, jabbing your sword between his ribs and into his guts as he lets out a horrid scream. He snarls and focuses through his pain, smashing his fist into your snout and sending you toppling to the floor. + + +"Little cunt!" he screams, grabbing your sword and yanking it from his side. + + +With a scream of rage and pain, he raises his club into the air and swings with all his might. It slams into your legs, shattering both of your legs as you scream in pain. He snarls, lifting up his club once more as you yell and grab at your broken legs, trying to focus on survival rather than the awful pain. He swings down his club once more, crushing your skull.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You roll to avoid his club swing, which slams into the stones next to you, sending splinters of wood flying in all directions. With his heavy club now on the ground, you now have a chance to do something. +> Flee +You turn, grabbing Julianne by the hand and yanking her away. The ratling is faster, though, swinging his club again with more accuracy this time and knocking your feet away, sending you slamming into the stone floor. As you go to stand, he swings his club and slams it into your head, cracking your skull and killing you with a heavy blow.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"No!" you say, punching the massive ratling in the jaw and sending him stumbling backwards, more out of surprise than anything else. + + +"What did you say to me, you little prick?" he says, raising his club to strike. +> Run +You turn, grabbing Julianne by the hand and yanking her away. The ratling is faster, though, swinging his club and knocking your feet away, sending you slamming into the stone floor. As you go to stand, he swings his club and slams it into your head, cracking your skull and killing you with a heavy blow.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You keep walking, as the girl falls silent, becoming quiet. Soon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey. + + +"I'm scared," the girl says. + + +"I'd be, if I were you," you admit. + + +"What's your name?" she asks. + + +"Ritz," you say. + + +"I'm Julianne," she says. "I don't want to die here." + + +You don't say another word, as she begins to chant. + + +"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon..." she continues to chant. + + +You turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it. + + +"This is pretty," you say, admiring the silver. + + +"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father." + + +You stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her. +> Lie and agree +"I'll get you out of here," you say, unable to meet her gaze. + + +"Thank you! Thank you!" she whispers in relief, taking off her necklace and placing it in your hands. + + +You sigh, nodding as you wrap it around the handle of your sword. You wait patiently for Pak to arrive. + + +After a few minutes, the massive, black-furred rat clambers into the burrow, grinning as he sees her prey. He stomps forward, grabbing her by the hand. + + +"Come on, darling. Let's take you down to the lower levels. I have a few of the others I want pulled over to my side, and I'm sure your sweet ass will do a great deal in getting them there." + + +The huge brute begins dragging the girl away, leaving you standing there. + + +"Ritz! Help, help!" she cries out, looking desperately to you. + + +Suddenly, he stops, turning around. + + +"Ritz, huh? That's your name?" he asks. + + +You nod cautiously. + + +"You did a good job protecting her from the cripples and in the raid, and I'm feeling generous. Care to join in the fun?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You keep walking, as the girl falls silent, becoming quiet. Soon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey. + + +"I'm scared," the girl says. + + +"I'd be, if I were you," you admit. + + +"What's your name?" she asks. + + +"Ritz," you say. + + +"I'm Julianne," she says. "I don't want to die here." + + +You don't say another word, as she begins to chant. + + +"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon..." she continues to chant. + + +You turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it. + + +"This is pretty," you say, admiring the silver. + + +"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father." + + +You stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her. +> Tell her the truth +"I can't. Even if I wanted to, they'd kill us before we got out," you admit. + + +"No, we can! We have to be able to! You can help me!" + + +You stare at your feet, not saying another word. + + +"Take the necklace! Take it!" she says, taking off her necklace and placing it in your hands. "Please, there's a chance, there has to be a chance. You can help me. You can help me, please!" + + +You don't answer, and as if the hopelessness of her situation is just hitting her she quiets down. You wait patiently for Pak to arrive. + + +After a few minutes, the massive, black-furred rat clambers into the burrow, grinning as he sees her prey. He stomps forward, grabbing her by the hand. + + +"Come on, darling. Let's take you down to the lower levels. I have a few of the others I want pulled over to my side, and I'm sure your sweet ass will do a great deal in getting them there." + + +The huge brute begins dragging the girl away, leaving you standing there. + + +"Ritz! Help, help!" she cries out, looking desperately to you. + + +Suddenly, he stops, turning around. + + +"Ritz, huh? That's your name?" he asks. + + +You nod cautiously. + + +"You did a good job protecting her from the cripples and in the raid, and I'm feeling generous. Care to join in the fun?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You drag the girl along the path to the burrow, as she cries. + + +"Please, you have to help me get out of here. We can run, just run into the wilderness." + + +"Can't do it. Too many bad things there. They'd kill on site a ratling. No, no," you say. + + +"Please! I don't want to die..." she whimpers. "Can... can you tell me what's going to happen to me?" +> Tell her the truth +"Most likely? They'll take you down to the lower chambers as a treat for the more important Ratlings. They'll rape you for a few hours, maybe a few days depending on how resilient you are, and then they'll finally kill you and feed you to the giant rats." + + +The girl bursts into tears, sobbing with terror. You stare at her with a twinge of sympathy and guilt, before continuing walking. + + +"I need to get out of here! I need to...!" she says, looking as if she wants to run, so you tighten your grip on her arm, knowing there's no way she'll escape either way. + + +Soon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey. + + +"I'm scared," the girl says. + + +"I'd be, if I were you," you admit. + + +"What's your name?" she asks. + + +"Ritz," you say. + + +"I'm Julianne," she says. "I don't want to die here." + + +You don't say another word, as she begins to chant. + + +"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon..." she continues to chant. + + +You turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it. + + +"This is pretty," you say, admiring the silver. + + +"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father." + + +You stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You drag the girl along the path to the burrow, as she cries. + + +"Please, you have to help me get out of here. We can run, just run into the wilderness." + + +"Can't do it. Too many bad things there. They'd kill on site a ratling. No, no," you say. + + +"Please! I don't want to die..." she whimpers. "Can... can you tell me what's going to happen to me?" +> Lie to her +"They'll... ransom you off back to the humans after a few days of imprisonment," you say. + + +"Oh... I can survive that. I can do that," she says. + + +You nod grimly, continuing walking. Soon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey. + + +"I'm scared," the girl says. + + +"I'd be, if I were you," you admit. + + +"What's your name?" she asks. + + +"Ritz," you say. + + +"I'm Julianne," she says. "I don't want to die here." + + +You don't say another word, as she begins to chant. + + +"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon..." she continues to chant. + + +You turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it. + + +"This is pretty," you say, admiring the silver. + + +"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father." + + +You stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You drag the girl along the path to the burrow, as she cries. + + +"Please, you have to help me get out of here. We can run, just run into the wilderness." + + +"Can't do it. Too many bad things there. They'd kill on site a ratling. No, no," you say. + + +"Please! I don't want to die..." she whimpers. "Can... can you tell me what's going to happen to me?" +> Change topic +"Where are you from?" + + +"Maryborough, a small trading town. My father lives there." + + +"Was he the merchant we killed?" + + +"No, my father is a Paladin. I was given passage on the trading caravan to meet with him in the town over. He wanted to move me to our summer home in the country, where it's safer." + + +All this talk of summer houses and fine lives depresses you. You sigh, and continue walking. Soon, you walk down into the burrows through the caved in portion of sewer and into the top layer of the many layered burrows. The weakest and most feeble rats are forced to live here, away from the safety that waits lower down. They look gleefully at the girl, talking and chattering among themselves. They grab at her, groping at her breasts and bosom and tearing pieces of fabric off her dress. You raise your sword to threaten them off, and they easily follow orders. You're weak for a Ratling, but you could easily kill the crippled and the the meek who surround you. You find a corner of the room, shoving the girl into it and raising your sword, waiting for Pak to arrive and take his prey. + + +"I'm scared," the girl says. + + +"I'd be, if I were you," you admit. + + +"What's your name?" she asks. + + +"Ritz," you say. + + +"I'm Julianne," she says. "I don't want to die here." + + +You don't say another word, as she begins to chant. + + +"I have the soul of the dragon. Dragons to not break. Dragons do not die. Dragons do not show fear. Dragons survive the flames. I have the soul of the dragon..." she continues to chant. + + +You turn, staring at her. You notice a long, silver necklace hanging around her, and grab it. + + +"This is pretty," you say, admiring the silver. + + +"You can have it. If you help me get out of here, it's all yours. It was a gift from my father." + + +You stare at the necklace, knowing there's not a chance she's getting out of here alive, even if you tried to save her.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You laugh gleefully as you dash forward, punching the man in the side of the head and knocking him backward as he grunts in pain, knocking into the blow of a sword blade. You slash at his ankle as he collapses to a knee, before one of the ratlings decks him a blow from the butt of his spear. He tries to stand, blood down streaming down his face. + + +"Please, I'm sorry. I didn't...!" he cries, looking genuinely petrified, before one of the rats takes it too far and stabs him in the throat with his sword, killing him. + + +He slumps to the ground, before lying still. + + +"Bah! Could've played with him for hours!" you complain. + + +The largest rat, a big brute who's taken charge of the raid named Pak, strides forward. Not too many ratlings have joined the raid, a fact Pak is clearly enjoying as it means he gets to take charge, and since you all get a bigger part of the profit, all the better. + + +"You, you and you!" he shouts, selecting three rats from the group. "Start moving the prisoners back." + + +"Yes, yes," they snarl, as they begin to shout and whip the prisoners into movement. + + +"You!" he shouts, pointing a long finger at you. "Kill the horses." + + +You nod, walking over to the horses. They seem terrified and scarred, and look at you as if begging for mercy. You wonder if it's best just to untie them and scare them off. +> Scare off the horses +You walk over to the horses, untying them from their carriage before gently giving them a hit with their sword on the rump, sending them running off into the wilderness. Pak notices what you're doing, turning to stare at you, snarling. + + +"What the fuck do you think you're doing? That was good meat, good leather! You dumb cunt!" he snarls, enraged by your lack of obedience. +> Try to convince him they deserved to live +"But they were ki..." you begin to say. + + +Unfortunately, in all your life here you seem to have failed to pick up how society functions. By now, Pak's club is already flying through the air, and it smashes into your head, crushing your skull against the carriage and killing you instantly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk over to the horses, untying them from their carriage before gently giving them a hit with their sword on the rump, sending them running off into the wilderness. Pak notices what you're doing, turning to stare at you, snarling. + + +"What the fuck do you think you're doing? That was good meat, good leather! You dumb cunt!" he snarls, enraged by your lack of obedience. +> Duck +You duck, but Pak slams his foot up, smashing you in the face. You sumble back and he punches you, sending you toppling to the floor. Pak stands over, stomping on you repeatedly as his weight and muscle breaks your bones as he smashes into you repeatedly as you scream for help. + + +With your limbs broken and lacking the strength to move, you hope you die of your wounds before something, some enterprising scavenger or worse, finds you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You step forward, grabbing the spear's shaft and yanking the guard forward. You swing your sword, slashing him in the massive gap between his helmet and shoulder pads, biting into his neck. He screams, collapsing to the ground as blood spurts forth. + + +You yell with glee, at other Ratlings begin arriving to take care of the other guards. The merchants and passengers of the caravan either flee back inside the caravans or procur weapons and get ready to fight, but this isn't a unified raid where the scraps will be given out later. You take what you can get. You run towards the camp fire, grabbing the stew cooking there, jabbing your snout into it and beginning to gulp down the delicious mixture. You manage to finish half before a much bigger rat grabs the pot from you, and you know you can't fight him. You turn to one of the caravans, where rats have killed the guards and are dealing with the merchants. The merchants are surrounded, looking terrified, as all those willing to fight have been cut down. + + +Although the majority of them are to be enslaved and sold to the Lizards or the Eastern Tribes, while the women will be taken back to the burrows for a less than kind fate, one unfortunate soul has made his presence known by trying to negotiate. + + +"Please, taken the cargo! It's yours! Keep the men as well, we'll fetch a heavy ransom! But leave the women and the child go, won't you?" the merchant leader says. + + +Bad choice. The boys have taken note of him now, and he's a fat one. His weight, the fact that he has so much food he can grow weak and fat, only angers you all thanks to the fact that you're all constantly hungry and eating scraps. One of the ratlings slashes his axe, cutting open the man's belly in a superficial wound. Another ratling jabs him with a spear, as the boys begin to jab and slash at the man as he yelps in pain as he's slowly cut and hacked apart. + + +The torture has drawn the others attention away from the actual carriages. You stare at them, contemplating sneaking away and grabbing yourself some more food. +> Loot some more +You scurry into one of the carriages, clambering outside. Blood cakes the inside, where some poor soul was hacked apart in their sleep. You find a jar of cider, opening it and quickly downing the delicious drink, before tossing it aside. You grab a jar of honey that's almost empty and begin scooping it into your mouth. + + +"Everyone out here! Now!" one of the ratlings yells, as you turn and walk outside. + + +The largest rat, a big brute who's taken charge of the raid named Pak, stands there. Not too many ratlings have joined the raid, a fact Pak is clearly enjoying as it means he gets to take charge, and since you all get a bigger part of the profit, all the better. + + +"You, you and you!" he shouts, selecting three rats from the group. "Start moving the prisoners back." + + +"Yes, yes," they snarl, as they begin to shout and whip the prisoners into movement. + + +"You!" he shouts, pointing a long finger at you. "Kill the horses." + + +You nod, walking over to the horses. They seem terrified and scarred, and look at you as if begging for mercy. You wonder if it's best just to untie them and scare them off.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You scurry towards it, as do the others. Dozens of brown and black bodies scurry up from among the rubble and out of the ancient sewers underneath where your camps lie. You're one of the first on the sign, climbing atop a crushed tower as you see it. Three wagons circled around a campfire, basking in its light. The moonlight shines on your brown, shit-matted fur and catches on your blade as you run forward towards the camps. The man on guard, a young, cleanly shaven guard with armor that's too small for him yell as he sees you approach,. He readies his spear, looking ready to plunge it into you. You dance at the edge of the spear point, waiting for your chance. +> Charge him +You raise your sword, charging forward. The guard yells and steps back, jabbing his spear out. The metal spear jabs into your fur and into your chest and you yelp as he runs you through. He pulls the spear out as you collapse to your knees, before he jabs it through your throat, killing you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You scurry towards it, as do the others. Dozens of brown and black bodies scurry up from among the rubble and out of the ancient sewers underneath where your camps lie. You're one of the first on the sign, climbing atop a crushed tower as you see it. Three wagons circled around a campfire, basking in its light. The moonlight shines on your brown, shit-matted fur and catches on your blade as you run forward towards the camps. The man on guard, a young, cleanly shaven guard with armor that's too small for him yell as he sees you approach,. He readies his spear, looking ready to plunge it into you. You dance at the edge of the spear point, waiting for your chance. +> Wait for the others +You continue circling the man the as he jabs at you, as you back step to avoid the jabs. Soon, other rats arrive. You can see the man's eyes bulge as he realizes how outnumbered he is. He jabs at another ratling and you take advantage, grabbing your sword forward and stabbing him in the throat. He tries to yell but blood bursts into his throat as you pull out your blade. + + +You turn to one of the caravans, where rats have killed the guards and are dealing with the merchants. The merchants are surrounded, looking terrified, as all those willing to fight have been cut down. + + +Although the majority of them are to be enslaved and sold to the Lizards or the Eastern Tribes, while the women will be taken back to the burrows for a less than kind fate, one unfortunate soul has made his presence known by trying to negotiate. + + +"Please, taken the cargo! It's yours! Keep the men as well, we'll fetch a heavy ransom! But leave the women and the child go, won't you?" the merchant leader says. + + +Bad choice. The boys have taken note of him now, and he's a fat one. His weight, the fact that he has so much food he can grow weak and fat, only angers you all thanks to the fact that you're all constantly hungry and eating scraps. One of the ratlings slashes his axe, cutting open the man's belly in a superficial wound. Another ratling jabs him with a spear, as the boys begin to jab and slash at the man as he yelps in pain as he's slowly cut and hacked apart. + + +The torture has drawn the others attention away from the actual carriages. You stare at them, contemplating sneaking away and grabbing yourself some more food.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>I'm sorry, Jane, that I wasn't older, stronger and wiser when we met. You were a brief illumination in my otherwise bleak existence. I know now that the circumstances were out of our hands and that you would want me to be happy, but I've lived with this guilt for so long. I need to share you with everyone... +> Into the past... +You haven’t eaten anything since early this morning and the walls of your stomach are grinding together. You have to get your mind off of it somehow and the water fountain on the far wall beckons to you. + +You’ve been on the road for days and it feels like the better part of it has been planted in this seat—even though you’ve only been here for the last couple of hours. The skin on your back and the backs of your bare legs rip free of the hard plastic seat as you stand and your flip-flops slap and smack your heels as you plod across the room. + +You freeze midway when you see a cowboy roping a calf from horseback. It’s the most wonderful thing you’ve seen for days even if it is only a poster. And it’s not the only one! Scanning the room you see many, many more of far off magical places with waterfalls and cliffs and mountains and dark caverns. Some of cityscapes with towering buildings and some at night with only the lights on and still more of endless rolling plains. + +From somewhere behind you, you hear a garbled voice fighting it’s way through crackling static, droning on and on about things that only old people care about. You zero in on the source and discover that it is a tiny coin operated radio affixed to the arm of a terminal seat. Neat! + +Just then a clammy hand clamps down on the back of your neck and you’re whisked toward the double glass doors. “It’s time to go, mister,” comes the all too familiar voice of your mom and she only releases her grip—with a surprise thrust that causes you to whack your shin on the bottom step—to allow you to clamber up and into the bus on your own. + +A shiver runs down your spine and the back of your arms prickle as you make your way down the aisle between tall and comfy-looking seats. You’re not used to air conditioning and it brings both pain and relief. + +You pass by an elderly couple. The woman looks up and smiles at you warmly so you give her a wide berth. You doubt that she would, being a stranger and all, but you sure don’t want her squeezing your cheek like Grandma does. + +You’re nudged into the row behind them and you take the farthest seat. Your mother sits beside you and puts the bag with everything the two of you own at her feet. Her lips are pursed and her eyes drawn. She’s been tired every day since the divorce and when she gets tired, she gets mad. You have a hard time even recognizing her now. + +A hiss and a lurch later, the bus pulls out onto the highway and with your face plastered to the side window you watch as the fence posts strobe past with only the occasional bush or sapling breaking the pattern. + +“There’s a storm coming,” remarks the old man to his wife, “and it looks to be a bad ‘un.” + +“Mm-hmm,” she replies absently, not bothering to look up from her needlepoint. + +Your eyes drift upward from the fence to a draw on the horizon and there the sky is beginning to boil and bristle with blue-white sparks. You can’t shake the feeling that you are at the very beginning of the greatest adventure—and worst nightmare—of your life. + +After only a mile or two, the droning of the engine and the rhythmic beat of its tires thumping over the seams in the concrete soothes you to sleep and you sleep the whole rest of the way. + + + +You are shaken from a pleasant dream of opening Christmas presents with your parents to stumble and trip over your feet as you’re dragged toward the front of the bus. It pulls over, dumping the two of you out on a deserted street. + +You know it’s only your reflection, but the ghastly and pale boy is all you can make out in the store window before you. It brightens and fades, brightens and fades with each pulse of the stoplight on the corner. You take a step backward and the wind from the bus pushes you forward as it pulls away. + +“You tryin’ to get yourself run over?” Your mother cups the back of your head and shoves you toward the boy with hollow eye-sockets, “Get over there and sit down against the wall.” + +You do as your told, although you can’t help but look up at the glass expecting him to be standing there looking down at you. + +An eternity goes by with your mom standing slumped against a signpost and staring off into the night. + +Your butt burns as the bones chew their way to the cement. You rock slowly from one side to the other to relieve the pain and she flashes her eyes at you. You melt. + +“Sit there and don’t move,” she barks as she leaps toward the flashing light. A car has stopped at the corner and she waves her arms as she sprints toward it. It begins to pull away, but stops short and the window tentatively rolls down. + +You can’t make out her words, but there’s happiness in your mother’s voice again as she crouches there with her elbows propped against the car door. Maybe she’s not mad anymore. You stretch your legs out as far as you can and wiggle your toes. + +She stands as the car pulls away and turns toward you. You can’t see her face, but there’s no mad in her walk now. You let out a long breath in relief. + +“C’mon, I’ve found us a place to sleep tonight,” she beams snatching up the bag, “and tomorrow I start job huntin’. We’re gonna do jus’ fine you an’ me. You wait an’ see.” She wraps her arm around your shoulders and the two of you skip off around the corner and into the crisp night air. + + + +You sit with your shoulders slumped, dragging your feet in a circle as the swing’s chains lazily wind and unwind and then wind up again. You’ve already walked around the park twice and sat on everything here so now all you can do is wait. + +“You wait here an’ watch our stuff,” your mom had told you, “I’ve got a lot to do today an’, with any luck, things’ll be a whole lot better from now on. And don’t you leave the park! You hear me? I’ll be back as quick as I can.” + +Your stomach grumbles. The two half-crushed cheese and peanut butter crackers your mom gave you before she left didn’t do much to satisfy it. At least the gnawing emptiness is gone. + +You hear a squeal and giggles so you look up. Some little kids are playing in the dirt at the bottom of the slide as if it were a sandbox. A dozen steps away from them sits a plump woman with her nose in a book. + +You survey the park for other signs of life and spot a group about your age. Three boys in a circle around a dark-haired girl. They’re pushing her back and forth between them like some demented form of ‘Hot Potato’. + +“Where do you think you’re going?” jeers the fat one. + +“Yeah, you ain’t goin’ nowhere you little bastard,” cracks the snotty runt. + +“Let me go!” she hisses, “Leave me alone!” + +The tallest of the three quakes from head to toe and nearly loses his breath in a fit of really annoying breathy laughter as he shoves her back toward the other two. + +The girl turns beet red from anger and lashes out with flailing, non-connecting slaps which only seems to feed the boys’ hysterical laughter. + +You have the sudden urge to attack them, but that might be a little hasty. Perhaps you should find some other way. +> Wade into 'em +“Leave her alone!” you command as you trot over to them with more brass than you really possess, “You like picking on little girls?” + +Their shock fades instantly when they see you and Chortle begins to jiggle. They either aren’t that impressed by you in the slightest or they’re extremely good at hiding it. + +Chortle grapples the girl as Tubby strides up to you, heeled closely by Snots. You suddenly feel smaller and more helpless than at any other time in your life, but you refuse to show any sign of it. + +“Who are you?!” demands Snots. + +“Is this your little girlfriend?” jeers Tubby, “Have you come to rescue her?” + +You feel your face flush red, but not from embarrassment. You are livid! + +“Look here, this guy’s here to save his bastard girlfriend,” spits Snots. + +You lunge forward and Tubby grabs you in a meaty “bear hug”, but not before you put your fist in Snots’ mouth. He falls back in horror with a tooth dangling below his upper lip and starts tearing up. + +Tubby swings you around in an arc and falls on you with every ounce of his weight knocking the wind completely out of you. + +You struggle against his massive frame, kicking and thrashing, but there is no escape. It’d take a bulldozer to move this tub o’ guts. + +He crawls upward and pins your arms with his fat legs and starts drilling your forehead with his meaty finger. “Wanna be a tough guy, huh?” + +The girl manages to land one of her backward kicks and Chortle falls like a sack of potatoes, screaming in agony as his face goes purple. She turns and darts between two houses on the far side of the street. + +“Get her,” wheezes Chortle, “Get that little bastard!” + +Snots runs to his aid and tries to pull him to his feet between sobs, but can’t muster the strength. Chortle is in no condition to stand just yet anyhow. + +Tubby turns back to you and pounds a couple of stinging blows to the side of your face, then smooshes your head into the soft earth as he hoists his lard back to his feet and saunters over to his friends. + +You roll onto your belly, push yourself up and limp away in the other direction. + +Looking over your shoulder to make sure the trio aren’t watching, you dash between houses and start making your way back toward where the girl went through. + +The alley is shrouded by trees arching overhead and you make your way to the end of it. Seeing no sign of her, you cut through to the next street. Still nothing. She’s long gone. + +You suddenly remember the bag tucked under the picnic table that you were supposed to be watching. If something happened to it, you’ll be in big trouble. + +You sprint like the devil is after you. A hedge claws up your arms and face as you dart through it, which you barely even notice. + +Turning down the alley, a dark figure steps out from behind the corner of the hedge directly in your path. Your mouth goes all coppery and dry, and you skid to a stop. + +You’re all set to flee when you realize that it’s the girl from before. She looks sheepish and a bit winded, but no worse for wear. + +She hangs her head, but her eyes remain fixed on yours. As you cautiously approach her, you detect the faint hint of a smile. + +“Hi,” she barely more than whispers. + +“Are you okay?” you ask. + +“Yeah. They didn’t hurt me.” + +“You sure hurt that one.” + +She chuckles. + +“Who were them boys?” + +“Just some boys from school. They always pick on me.” + +“How come?” + +“Just ‘cause. They’ve always been like that.” + +“What’s your name?” you ask, scrunching your toes and noticing how dirty they’ve gotten. + +“Jane. What’s yours?” + +“Billy. We just moved here.” + +“Where’s your house?” + +“We don’t have one yet.” + +“Oh,” she says, turning her gaze to the side, then back to you. “My house is on Hill Road.” + +“I don’t know where that is. We just got here last night. We came in on the bus.” + +“It’s over there,” she points over your shoulder, “on the edge of town. C’mon. I’ll show you.” + +“I can’t right now. I have to watch our stuff so Mom can find a job.” + +“Oh.” After a pause, she asks “What grade are you in?” + +“I’ll be in Second this year.” + +“Me too. Maybe we can sit together.” + +The very suggestion makes you feel queasy and uncomfortable. “I better get back before she comes back,” you say stepping past her. + +“Okay. See ya later.” + +“See ya later.” + +You cut between two houses following their shared ribbon driveway. As you get to the front, you peek down the street and see that the gang is gone. + +The park is empty now with no one in sight. You cross the street and see that the bag is still right where it’s supposed to be. + +You climb the cement picnic table and plop down on top of it with your feet on the bench. All you can do now is wait. +> The Way Things Were +“What happened to you?” your mom asks from out of nowhere making you jump. + +You stand up and whirl around making eye contact before looking down at your arms and legs. + +“I got scratched up going through the bushes.” + +“What bushes?” she says squinting, “There aren’t any in the park that I can see.” + +You squirm, knowing full well what is about to happen. + +“Over there in the alley,” you mutter, pointing. + +Snatching you by the hair and ramming your face into hers, “I thought I told you to wait in the park!” she hisses through clenched teeth. “An’ I hadn’t even noticed the scratches. I was talking about your face!” + +Your eyes start to tear up and your lower lip begins to quiver. “A big boy hit me.” + +“You’ve been fighting?” she demands, “Why were you fighting? Why can’t you even go one single day without getting into trouble? What do I have to do to make you listen to me an’ use that head of yours for something other than a hat rack? Huh?!”, accentuating every other word with a jerk of your hair. “An’ stop your damned blubbering or I’ll give you something to really cry about,” she says through her teeth as she gives you a couple of thrusts even more violent than before. + +You slam your eyes shut and grit your teeth in an attempt to stifle the involuntary spasms. + +“Ugh!” she roars in disgust, flinging you prone on top of the picnic table. “Now get over there an’ sit down! It’s time to eat.” + +She unrolls a paper bag and slams down a small boat of shriveled, dried up shrimp and a larger one half full of crispy fries (the small ones that no one wants and are generally tossed out instead of being served to customers). + +You begin to pick at them one by one, but your hunger soon takes over and you start to cram them into your mouth by the handful. + +“Slow down. They’re all yours. I had mine already on the way back,” she says in a more pleasant tone. “I got a job today. I had to sweep the parking lot of the café I’ll be working at to pay for this an’ I’ll be waitressing starting tomorrow. An’ I got us a place to stay, too. Another waitress I’ll be working with is gonna let us stay in her garage until I can get back on my feet. An’ she’s gonna give us cots to sleep on for a change.” + +You look up at her as you pop the last shrimp in your mouth and she smiles at you. You can’t help but smile back. + +“Time to get going, mister,” she beams, snatching the bag from under the table. “I wanna be there when she gets home an’ see what we can do to help her out around the place. We’re not gonna be bums.” + + + +“Why don’t you go out back an’ play while I talk to Honey,” says your mom, “An’ don’t leave the yard.” + +It is a tidy house with a neatly trimmed yard. A small flower garden runs the length of the sidewalk connecting the kitchen door at the back of the house to the one on the side of the garage. Beyond it, there are white painted, metal lawn chairs and set squarely between the house and a row of short evergreens marking the property line stands a wooden swing set. + +You walk around for a few minutes and, finding nothing at all to do, flop into one of the swings where you spend the next few hours. You can’t hear their words, but can see through the kitchen window how much fun your mom is having laughing and talking with her new friend. It makes you both happy and a little sad. She hasn’t laughed like that with you for a long, long time. + +You really miss the old days. +> Unexpected Visitor +You pull the freshly baked muffin out of the Tupperware bowl that Honey had brought over for your breakfast when she and your mom had left for work, absently weighing it in your hands while you try to think of something to while away the hours until they return. + +“I’ll be home before dark. Stay here,” your mom had said, “I don’t want to have to go looking for you after working all day an’ I’m warning you now you’d better not get into any trouble.” + +You’re only a little bit hungry right now so you decide you’d better save it for when you get really hungry later. You put the muffin back in the bowl and snap the lid closed. + +You are startled by a knock on the door. No one knows you are here. + +You creep over to the door and try to peek through the gap between the edge of the window frame and the dark vinyl curtain, but can’t see anything. Imagining the worst, you pick up a small spade from a wooden tote and wield it like a knife. If whoever it is kicks the door down, maybe you’ll be able to get in a jab. + +“Billy?” comes a familiar whisper. + +You drop the spade back in the tote and open the door. + +Jane is wearing cut-offs and flip-flops just like you, but she’s also wearing a yellowed, button-up shirt that’s much too large for her, tied at the waist. + +“How’d you know I was here,” you ask, a little confused. + +“I followed you here from the park yesterday.” + +“You did?” + +“Yeah. I saw that lady pull your hair. Is that your mom?” + +“Uh huh,” you say looking down at your feet, “she gets like that when she’s tired.” + +“My momma does that to me, too. Gramma says I have to love her and be patient, but I still don’t like her.” + +You try to think of something to say, but can’t. All you can do is stare at her. + +Finally, she breaks the silence. “Wanna go get a pop? I got a quarter from the change jar. We can share it,” she grins at you. + +“Okay. We gotta hurry, though. I’m not s’posed to go anywhere.” + +“It won’t take long. The store’s only a couple blocks from here.” + + + +Ten minutes later, the two of you are on the sidewalk staring at the vending machine in front of Fredrick’s grocery. Jane plunks her quarter into the slot and whips open the door on the side. + +“Pick one,” she says. + +You lean in and squint at the selection and then tentatively say “I like root beer.” + +“Me too! It’s my favorite!” she exclaims as she grips the bottle’s neck and yanks it free—allowing another to roll in to take its place. Then, gripping the bottle with both hands, she pokes it into the rectangular hole and pops the cap off without even spilling one single drop. She then presents it to you saying “You’re my guest so you get the first sip.” + +You grin from ear to ear. + + + +On the way back to your house she informs you “I’ve lived here my whole life. I can show you all the neat places and all the places to stay away from. There’s not a whole lot.” + +“That’s how I was at my old house before my mom and dad got divorced,” you say, handing the bottle back to her. + +Jane doesn’t respond, but stops you short by sticking her arm out in front of your chest. She’s staring intently down the street and you follow her gaze. The three boys from yesterday are crossing a block ahead of you. + +“We better go the long way ‘round,” she says, “I’ll show you where my house is.” +> The Secret Place +“That’s my house,” Jane says, pointing to a ramshackle place covered in old and warped wood siding with peeling paint. The yard is waist high in grass and weeds with a worn path leading up to a sagging corner porch that looks like it could collapse at any moment. “C’mon, I’ll show you.” + +You follow her up the path and onto the porch. The boards creak and moan under your feet. You hold the screen door open while she heaves against the heavy entry door sagging on its hinges with her shoulder to unstick it from its jamb and shoves with all her weight to plow it open. + +“My momma’s not home right now,” she says, stepping inside “but that’s okay. I can have friends over if I want to.” + +You follow her in. + +By what little sunlight filters in, you can tell that the inside isn’t much better than the outside. The filthy carpeting is littered in bits of trash and the furniture is piled high with wadded clothing. The air is a stale mixture of cigarette smoke and vomit. You manage to quell your gag reflex by taking shallow breaths in through your mouth. + +She watches you for a minute or two as you look around and says “It’s just a house.” After another minute she says “Okay, let’s go.” + +You help her drag the door closed and are stepping off the porch when she suddenly stops and says “Wait. There’s something else I wanna show you.” + +You pause and then follow her around the corner of the house, watching carefully for snakes in the tall grass. + +“This is my ‘secret place’,” she whispers, “Nobody knows about it. Not even Momma.” + +Bending down, she pulls the grate loose from the foundation and slides it partway to the side, then slips through into a dark crawlspace. “C’mon,” she says over her shoulder, “It’s cool in here.” + +You follow her inside and can barely make out anything other than her. She has turned around and now sits facing you. You hear a rattle of bottles as she puts the now empty one with some others. + +Gradually, you’re able to see a little more, but nothing in detail. + +“This is the ‘change jar’,” she announces, holding something out in front of her, “I keep all the money Gramma gives me in it and what I get for all the bottles I find and take back.” Picking something else up she says in a hushed and mysterious voice “This is my treasure chest. It’s where I keep all my important stuff.” + +Your eyes finally adjust to the dim light and you can see she’s cradling a cigar box tied with a ribbon as she crawls past you to the opening. “Here, I’ll show you.” + +She begins pulling the contents out one by one and handling them gingerly. “This is me and Gramma when I was little,” holding out a yellowed Polaroid of a grim-faced woman holding the hand of a toddler, “and this is when I went to her house when momma went to the hospital,” showing you a slightly fresher one that’s probably only a couple years old, at most. There are several more and all with the same grim-faced woman standing with Jane, holding her hand. + +There are several black-and-white postcards with scenes from various parks and tourist attractions. Each one is addressed to Jane and tells what a wonderful time her Gramma is having and signed ‘Love Gramma’. + +Then there are a few fancy buttons and ribbons and such things that in all likelihood have sentimental value known only to her. + +You smile and nod as she excitedly tells you about every detail. The most interesting to you are the pictures on the post cards. They pull at something primal inside of you and you feel a strange longing to see many of the places for yourself. + +After she has quieted down a bit you say “I don’t have anything important anymore. We lost everything we had moving around so much and now we have to start all over.” + +Jane’s expression grows dark and she only looks at you without saying anything for the longest time which makes you very uncomfortable. Finally, she looks away and changes the subject “I sleep in here at night sometimes. I have my covers in that burlap sack over there.” + +“You sleep in here? How come? Ain’t you afraid of snakes and spiders and stuff?” + +Jane just shakes her head. She gently places her treasure chest back in its place and says “The boys are probably long gone by now so we can go back to your house.” + +You crawl out behind her and she puts the grate back in place. The two of you walk in silence and you can’t figure out for the life of you why she’d ever sleep under her house instead of inside it. +> Wishes and Secrets +When you get back to Honey’s house, the first thing you do is run into the garage and grab your muffin. It’s almost dinnertime now and your stomach has started to complain. You tear it in two as carefully as you can and say “Here,” handing Jane the slightly larger half, “It’s all I have so we’ll have to share it.” + +“Fahnk mhu,” Jane says through a mouthful, beaming at you, as she tears into her half like a wild animal that hasn’t eaten in days. + +After inhaling your half, you wipe your hands on your cut-offs. Jane smirks and wipes her hands off on your shorts, too. You jump back in shock and she tackles you—straddling you and instantly pinning your wrists down above your head. You are caught completely by surprise! This is the first time she’s been physical with you and you aren’t exactly sure how to react. + +You decide to play along by feigning escape. She giggles maniacally and pushes your head back down with her own. You stare into her wild eyes as you wriggle about and her shrieks of excitement grow louder and louder. Her eyes are the color of new grass and despite her current playfulness, reveal that she is much older than her years. Her hair is long and oily black and shimmers blue in the sun. For the first time you notice how beautiful she is. + +Through squeals and giggles she begins pecking kisses all over your face. The more you pretend to struggle the more she seems to enjoy it. + +Her expression suddenly changes to one of extreme seriousness and her eyes narrow. She dives in and gives you a big smacking smooch right on the cheek. You freeze for an instant before rolling out from under her and dashing around the swing set—keeping it between you and her as some kind of protective barrier. Every time she darts one way, you go the other and her shrill laughter only increases. + +She chases you all around the yard in a one-sided game of tag. You are quite a bit faster than she is so you can easily stay out of her reach. She really seems to enjoy the pursuit and she’s unwilling to give up her quarry. + +Eventually, things settle down some and the two of you sit in the swings where you manage to catch your breath. She’s still smiling devilishly at you so you keep your guard up and watch her warily from the corner of your eye. + +“When’s your mom coming home?” Jane asks. + +“’Bout dark, I think.” + +“Wanna go get another pop?” + +“Sure.” + +“We’ll have to return the bottles ‘cause I’m all out of quarters. If you’ll carry half of ‘em, we can take all of ‘em down.” + +“Okay.” + + + +After nearly running the whole way there, you two are puffing as you crawl through the hole into the damp coolness of the ‘secret place’. + +“I need a rest,” she pants, dragging the plump burlap sack out between the two of you. She flops over onto it and stretches her legs out, crossing her ankles. + +“Me, too,” you say, rolling over and laying your head down beside hers, stretching your legs out in the opposite direction. + +The warmth of her ear and cheek are comforting to you as you stare up into the darkness trying to make out the floorboards. Her steady, rapid breathing gradually slows and your eyes start to glaze over. You haven’t had an afternoon nap since you were in kindergarten, but you are beginning to see their appeal. + +Jane finally breaks the silence in a soothing tone, “Gramma has a giant photo book filled with pictures of all kinds of neat places she’s been to from all over the country. My favorite ones are from her honeymoon to the Grand Canyon. She was just a girl back then—even younger than Momma.” + +“It looks like mountains,” she says, “but it’s not. It’s a big hole in the ground a mile deep. It’s so big that you can’t even see the other side! I’m gonna go there when I grow up. I’m gonna see everything in Gramma’s book for myself.” + +Even in the dark and with your eyes closed you can feel the smile on her face, but it’s short-lived and her voice becomes a hoarse whisper, “I wish I could live someplace else. Momma hates me. Gramma told me that Momma was in love with a boy that didn’t love her back. That’s why I don’t have a Daddy and why Momma couldn’t even look at me when I first got borned. The doctor named me Jane ‘cause that’s what they call girls when they don’t know their name.” + +The feeling you had of drowsiness has completely and utterly faded now. You haven’t felt this much sadness since the last time you saw your dad—driving away from the courthouse in his pickup truck and not looking back. + +“C’mon,” Jane says, sitting bolt upright, “let’s change in them bottles.” +> Mr. Freddy +Jane spills her armload on the front counter by the cash register. After she’s righted all of them, she starts pulling them two at a time from yours. + +“You’ve got quite a number this time, little lady,” says a gruff heavy-set man, smiling. “You’re gonna run me clear out of money if you keep on like this.” + +Jane shoots him a wide toothy grin. + +“Let’s see now. Nineteen bottles at three cents apiece… That comes to fifty-seven cents. Does that sound right to you?” + +“Sounds right to me,” Jane beams back at him, “Can I get it in quarters so we can buy pops?” + +“Sure thing. Let me just put ‘em in the crates and then I’ll get you your money,” he says, stepping from behind the counter and walking over to stacks in front of the big plate window in front. + +While his back is to her, Jane snatches a Moon Pie from the impulse buy rack and slips it into the fold of her tied shirt. + +Stepping toward her, you whisper “You shouldn’t do that. What if he catches you?” You glance over to see if the man noticed and, sure enough, you see that he’s watching her in the convex mirror hanging up front in the corner. + +Before you can say anything, he’s already back at the register and putting the bottles in the crates he’s brought back with him. + +You’re shaking like a leaf and expect him to drop the hammer at any second, but all he does is smile at you knowingly and wink. He turns toward the register, pushes a button to release the tray, and slips several coins into his other hand. + +“Here you go, little lady,” he says, dropping the stack into her open palm. “That’s fifty-seven cents. You’d better count it to make sure it’s all there.” + +“Thanks!” she says, poking the coins deep into her pocket. + +“By the way, when’s the last time you ate something? I’ve made up a few too many sandwiches in the back and it looks like you two might be just the ones to help me get rid of ‘em. Whaddaya say?” + +You grin from ear to ear and nod vigorously. + +Jane’s face turns red as she looks off to the side and squeaks “Thank you, Mr. Freddy.” + +“C’mon, let’s get at ‘em then,” he says, flashing his eyes at the two of you while clicking the drawer closed on the register. + +On the way to the back, he grabs three small cartons of milk from their refrigerated case without breaking his stride—with you right on his heels. Jane is a reluctant half-step behind. + +When you reach the meat counter, he steps behind it and pulls up a white butcher paper package from underneath. He opens it revealing three ham and cheese sandwiches stacked high with lettuce, tomato and pickles and proceeds to cut them corner to corner, then fans them out on the paper sheet. + +“Dig in,” he says, opening the milk cartons and handing you each one, “There’s more’n plenty to go around.” + +While you’re eating, he bugs his eyes out at you and makes goofy looking faces. You can’t help but laugh at his antics and Jane spews milk from her nose once. + +Mr. Freddy has picked up a broom and is sweeping up behind the meat counter by the time the two of you have had your fill. He seems particularly interested in the dark corner beneath the bench that holds his slicer, grinder and saw. + +“Thank you, Mr. Freddy.” + +“Thank you, sir,” you say. + +“You’re quite welcome,” he tells you both without looking up or turning around as you’re heading toward the front of the store a step behind Jane. + +When you get to the register, Jane pulls the Moon Pie out of her shirt and puts it back in the rack without looking back. You couldn’t be more pleased. You look back toward Mr. Freddy, but he’s still bent over behind the meat counter and doesn’t see. + +Once outside, Jane fishes out a quarter, drops it in the slot, and pulls out another root beer. You are too full to even think about drinking any of it and, on the way back to your house, take only tiny sips before passing it back to her. + + + +You’re sitting in the shade of the garage on the opposite side as the house, staring vacantly at the overgrown lot crowding in on the neatly trimmed edge of Honey’s yard. + +“You wanna come with me and Gramma to see the Grand Canyon when I grow up?” asks Jane out of the blue, hugging her knees to her chin. + +“Uh huh. Okay.” + +“We can take Gramma’s truck and drive the whole way there. She said I can have it when I grow up ‘cause she’ll be too old to drive it by then. I know how to drive it, she lets me drive it on the farm road when I’m at her house. She has to push the pedals for me, though, ‘cause I can’t reach ‘em. I’ll teach you how and then we can take turns. She’s got a big camper on the back for sleepin’ in, but we always sleep in the house on the big bed ‘cause she’s got tired ol’ bones and she needs her rest.” + +“We need to make up a map of all the different places,” you say, excitedly, “And we can stop at bus stations to find even more. The one we stopped at had posters from all kinds of places. I want to go see them places too.” + +Jane looks over at you and smiles. + +For the next little bit, the two of you talk about the various places that you know about. The whole idea of adventure really appeals to you and you’re probably even more excited than she is about it. Every time you look over at her, she’s staring back at you through glassy eyes that say more than words ever could. + + + +Jane notices Honey’s car pulling into the driveway before you do. She leaps to her feet and says, “I better go so you don’t get in trouble. See ya tomorrow,” she throws over her shoulder as she heads toward the back, carefully keeping the garage between her and the driveway. + +“See ya later,” you holler to her as you watch her dash off between the evergreens and disappear down the alley. + +You walk around the back of the garage to greet your mom when she gets out of the car, but just as you round the corner another car pulls in behind Honey’s. You duck back and peek around to see two scraggly looking men get out. + +Honey walks over to one of them. He throws his arm around her waist and pulls her to him. The other walks up beside your mom and leans back against the trunk of the car next to her. + +You stay hidden until they’ve all gone inside and then you go sit on the swings and watch them through the kitchen window. They are laughing and you see them drinking beers and passing a cigarette back and forth. You didn’t even know your mom smoked! + +You watch her go sit on the man’s lap like she used to with your dad and kiss him every now and then. Maybe he’s her boyfriend now. It’s good that she has friends again. Maybe she will be okay. +> Find something to do +There’s nothing to do and you’ve been sitting here so long that your butt has fallen asleep. You need to do something—anything—, but what? + +You get up and begin taking a stroll around the yard. You turn over a couple of rocks at the edge of the flower bed and pluck a stiff, dry grass stem to herd the pill bugs you find crawling around under them. You usher them first one way and then another before it grows tiresome and you replace their stone shelter. + +Standing up, you wipe your hands off on your cutoffs and walk around some surveying the area. There is absolutely nothing here for a boy to do. You sure aren’t interested in looking at flowers even if they come with their own bugs. + +When you get to the edge of the front yard, you turn down the street and pace back and forth the half a block between Honey’s house and the lamp post on the corner. It doesn’t take long for this to get very, very old. + +You hear a buzz overhead and look up to see the light beginning to flicker to life. Already, there is a swarm of mosquitoes and a moth flitting around it. + +You study the sky and see that it will still be hours until nightfall. You’re not sleepy yet, but might as well head back anyway. +> Head for bed +You go into the garage and flip on the bulb. You flop down on your cot and lay there staring up through the ceiling joists at the shadowy undersides of the boards above the rafters. In the swirls and squiggles of their grain and knots, you make out tiny little faces—each with their own unique expressions. It’s a gift you’ve had since before you can remember that has served no other purpose other than to make you feel not quite so alone all the time. + + + +“Wake up sleepyhead,” your mom says, shaking you. + +You slit your eyes open and stretch your arms as far back over your head as they’ll go. + +“Here’s a dollar so you can buy your lunch at the grocery store,” your mom says, dropping the bill on your chest. “It’s three blocks that way,” she points in the direction of Fredrick’s, not knowing that you’ve already been there. “Make sure you come straight home, okay? Today’s payday, but I got a few dollars in tips yesterday so we’ll spend that so we don’t eat up all of Honey’s food.” + +You try to blink the sleep away. “Are we getting a house when you get paid?” + +“I’ll probably start looking for one in the morning, but I don’t think I’ll have quite enough yet. We might be here for a little while.” + +You look over at the garage’s bare wall studs and can see spots where light seeps through. You sure hope you don’t still live in here in the wintertime, because it might get really, really cold. + +“I’m going out dancing tonight after work. I probably won’t be in ‘til late so you be in by dark. I’ll be here when you wake up.” + +“Okay.” + +“Oh! an’ before I forget, Honey left you some bananas for your breakfast. They’re in the sack by the door. I’ll see you when I get home.” And with that, she’s out the door. + +A couple minutes later, you swing your feet over the side and slide them into your flip-flops. Standing, you stretch one last time as you lurch stiff-legged toward the door, grabbing the sack on your way out. + + + +As you round the corner to Jane’s house, she bolts out of the front door and hop-skips over to you. She grabs your hand and drags you toward her house. + +“Hurry up!” she says, nearly yanking your arm out of its socket, “I made something for you.” + +She practically dives through the hole into the “secret place” and you scurry in behind her wondering what all her excitement is about. She flips open the “treasure chest” and hands you a folded up sheet of notebook paper. + +As you’re looking at it a little confused, “It’s a card, open it up!” she demands. + +You carefully flip it open. Inside are the words “Bestist Frend” drawn with a careful hand in crayon and signed “Jane”. + +“See?” she asks, “I made it the color of our eyes, blue and green!” + +“Nobody ever gave me a card before,” you say, looking back and forth from it to a beaming Jane, smiling. + +“My pleasure!” + +“Ain’t never had a best friend before, neither.” You barely even manage to get the words out before she throws her arms around your neck, hugging the daylights out of you, and kisses you right on the mouth! This time you don’t pull away because you know it’s out of happiness. + +When she finally lets go, you say “Better put it back in the ‘treasure chest’ to keep it safe.” + +“Okay.” + +While she’s carefully arranging everything in her collection, you remember the sack and say “I’ve got bananas for breakfast. Want one?” + +Her face lights up and, nodding, she shuffles forward on her knees over to you. You snap the one off of the bunch that doesn’t have any soft, brown spots and hand it to her. + + + +You’ve been walking around and talking for a couple of hours, not having any specific destination in mind when Jane says “Wanna go see the school? It’s closed up for Summer right now, but I know where Second Grade is. I can show you.” + +“Yeah, okay.” + +A couple of blocks later, you’re cutting through a corner gas station when a display rack just inside the door catches your eye. + +“They got maps here,” you say, pivoting toward the door. Jane holds up and then reluctantly follows you in. + +You’re slowly spinning the display carousel, trying to discern the meaning of all the different shapes and colors when a lanky, bearded man in oil-stained coveralls and wiping his hands on a greasy rag steps in through the side door from the garage. “What are you kids doing in here?” he says, a little too gruff. + +“I-I’m l-looking for a m-map to the Grand Canyon,” you stammer. + +“There ain’t no Arizona maps in there,” he says, pushing you to the side and taking control of the display. “It might be in the Central and Western U.S. road map, here,” handing you one. + +On the top corner, you see “25¢” printed in the center of a circle and you debate buying it out of the dollar you have shoved in your pocket. + +“What do you want it for, anyway?” he asks. + +“I w-wanna s-study how to get there for when I’m growed up, ‘cause me and Jane are gonna go see it someday.” + +He furrows his brow looking the dirty pair of you up and down and finally says, snatching the map from your hands and returning it to the display, “Wait here. I think I have an old one in my glove compartment that I’ll just give you. I need a new one anyway.” + +When he’s out of earshot, Jane gets right up close to your ear and whispers “He came home with Momma one time. He’s not nice.” + +“Whaddaya mean?” + +Jane only shrugs and looks away. + +The man comes back with a folded, tattered map and hands it to you. “There you go, son. I don’t expect I’ll need one for a while so I’ll just get a new one when I do.” + +You reluctantly take it and say “Thank you”, but it worries you not knowing what Jane meant. + +You turn and follow her as she steps quickly outside. + + + +Before you stands a long red brick building surrounded by a native stone wall with a built in sag between sturdy pillars. + +“That’s the school,” says Jane, “C’mon I’ll show you the Second grade. It’s on the other side right next to the playground.” + +You follow her around the end of the building and see a half-dozen children a few years older than yourself lazing around in a chain-link yard. + +Jane freezes. + +“Hello,” comes a sweet womanly voice from behind you, making both of you jump. “You two aren’t here for Summer School, are you?” + +“Nope,” you say, “I don’t even go to this school yet. I just moved here.” + +“I was gonna show him the Second grade,” says Jane. + +“You go right ahead.” + +Jane grabs your hand and pulls you toward a long set of windows. “That’s it right there,” she says, pointing. + +Cupping your hands to the side of your face, you peer through the glass and see rows of small desks, blackboards and the large teacher’s desk. It looks basically the same as your First Grade classroom did last year. + +“If you two want to eat with us, you can,” says the woman from behind you. “I brought plenty of sack lunches to go around.” + +You and Jane swap glances, then you both nod in unison and say “okay” with giant grins on your faces. You turn around to see that she’s holding out a small paper sack with its top neatly folded down to each of you. + +The two of you sit with your backs against the school building while you devour your bologna with mustard sandwiches, carrot sticks and an apple half. The other kids have their lunches sitting on whatever playground equipment they happen to be on when the nice lady delivers their sacks to them. +> It Begins +You wander around town for a while and end up back at the secret spot. The two of you are scrutinizing over the faded and torn map and begin planning your route. + +“Here it is! The Grand Canyon is almost straight across and only a little down,” you say. + +The two of you trace roads with your fingers trying to find the most direct route and puzzling out all the different town names. + +When you’ve grown weary of it, you have Jane put it in the treasure chest. + +You remember the dollar bill in your pocket. “Mom gave me a dollar to buy lunch with,” you say as you dig it out and slick it down across your leg to try to get all the wrinkles out of it before handing it to Jane. “Probably better put it in the change jar so it don’t get lost and we can buy something to eat with it later.” + +She smiles at you and carefully folds it before dropping it in with the rest of her money. + +“Wanna go get a pop?” + +“Sure,” you say. + +Jane fishes one of the quarters out of the jar and the two of you are on your way. + + + +Half a root beer later, you find yourself at the park just idly swaying back and forth on the swings. The place is deserted due to the afternoon heat and you try not to let the dark, rusty chains touch your sides because it nearly takes the hide off whenever they do. + +“Back before the divorce, Dad used to borrow the Tompkin’s boat and take us to the lake on hot days like this. We’d go fishin’ until it got too hot and then we’d cook whatever fish we caught back at the campground. Dad would clean ‘em, mostly, but he showed me where to cut. He just wouldn’t let me hold the knife by myself because I might get a bad cut. And then when it got too hot we went swimming in the lake.” + +“I can’t swim,” Jane says. + +“I can teach you—it’s real easy. Is there a lake anywhere around here?” + +“No. Just the swimmin’ pool over on Broad Street. It costs a dollar to go in and you have to have a bathing suit. They don’t allow no cut-offs.” + +You pass the time idly and soon discover that the street lights have come to life. The shadows under the trees have become full black. + +“I didn’t know it was so late,” Jane says, “we gotta get home so we don’t get in trouble.” + +“Mom isn’t coming home tonight so I’ll be there all by myself.” + +“Wanna spend the night at my house?” + +“I better not. She’s supposed to be back in the morning.” + +“Well, you can come over for a little while. Momma never comes home on the weekend and it’s always boring with nothing to do.” + +“Okay.” + + + +You follow Jane up the front steps of her house and stop at the wide open door. Every time before now it has been closed. + +You hear a woman cough from the blackness within and see a tiny orange ball of light swing in an arc and bounce off of something, exploding in a shower of sparks. “Shit!” the voice says, and then a lamp flips on and you see a ragged, dark haired lady wearing a thin white cotton dress that’s twisted halfway around her middle sitting spraddle-legged in the recliner in the far corner. + +Jane opens the screen door and takes a small step inside. + +A drunken slur whips out like a pistol shot, “Why are you so late?!” It’s obvious by the tone that she doesn’t care about an answer. + +“I was playing at the park with my new friend—” + +A flat pint bottle whistles past your heads and shatters on the porch column. “Don’t give me that shit! I’ve had it with you! If you get the cops out here again, you’ll regret it!” she spits venomously. + +“I wouldn’t do—” Jane starts apologetically as the woman springs from her chair like a cat, snatching her by the arm and starts waling on her in a flurry of slaps. + +“Stop! Stop! Stop!” you scream, hitting the woman at the waist and grappling with all your strength, trying to force them apart. + +She flicks you away like an insect, but loosens her grasp just long enough for Jane to slip free. + +Screaming in half terror, half frustration, Jane flies out the door and into the dark street. + +You dodge around the crazy lady who doesn’t give you a second glance as she steps out onto the porch in pursuit of Jane. She stops at the edge, clutching the column to keep from falling on her face, and screams “You better run you little bitch!” + +You run out into the dark street in the direction you think Jane went and have gone more than a block when you decide she must’ve gone a different way. + +Now you’ve done it. You can feel someone or some thing watching you and you’re pretty sure it isn’t Jane. You’re about to turn around when you hear sobbing up ahead. + +To your relief, you find her crumpled in the grass between the sidewalk and the street. She’s pounding her fists and half squealing, half moaning in her rage. + +You crouch beside her, putting your hand on her shoulder and she looks up at you through swollen, tear-filled eyes. + +“Are you alright?” you ask. + +She opens her mouth to say something, but can’t seem to form the words so she ends up just nodding. + +“C’mon. You can stay at my house tonight. I’ll tell Mom what happened when she gets home in the morning. It’ll be okay,” you say, helping her to her feet. + +Jane shakes her head and says between hitches “Not there. With her. She might come back early.” + +You walk with your arm around her for a few minutes, half carrying her as she regains herself and somehow end up in a dark alley. You hold on to her a bit more tightly than before. Her warmth and presence is enough that you feel safe. + +About halfway down the alley, Jane grabs your hand and pulls you through a leaning gate—held up somewhat by its bottom hinge which is only still barely attached—toward an eerie and desolate looking, boarded up house. + +“C’mon,” she says, “I know the way in.” + +“W-wait. What if something’s in there? What if someone catches us?” + +“Don’t worry. No one ever comes here. This place is ‘bandoned.” + +There are strange dark shapes crouched in the high, unkempt grass that you really hope are only bushes. You look up at the attic vent and can feel eyes peering back at you from the pitch black gaps between the louvers. + +“Here,” Jane says, stopping cold and pivots you around on legs that desire to keep moving. She swings a section of plywood to the side exposing a window. “Go on in. I’ll hold it open for you.” + +“I don’t like this,” you say looking over your shoulder toward the front of the house. + +“C’mon. Ain’t nothin’ to be afraid of,” she says, hiking a foot up on the windowsill and slithers her way through. + +After another cautious survey, you grip the windowsill on either side and hoist yourself up and through into a darkened and vacant dining room. Overhead hangs a chandelier—the only thing in the whole room. + +“See? Told ya,” she says, throwing her arms wide in presentation, “There’s not even any furniture.” + +You creep softly past her to the door to the front room and look from side to side. Light filters in through cracks in the boarded up front windows from the street-lamps somewhere outside. + +Jane plops down with her back against the wall. “I think I’ll stay here tonight. I sure ain’t goin’ home.” + +“Come home with me,” you try again, sliding down beside her, “Everything will be better tomorrow. I’ll make a pallet on the floor and you can sleep on my cot.” + +“Nope,” she says, shaking her head, “I don’t like your mom.” + +“She won’t do anything to you. She only gets mad at me sometimes—not all the time. She never does anything to anyone else.” + +Jane shakes her head and you can tell by the look on her face that she means it. + +“I’ll just stay here with you then,” you say. + +Jane frowns at you. “You’ll get in trouble.” + +“I don’t care. You’re my friend and I won’t leave you here all by yourself.” + +Jane smiles and clutches your hand in hers, folding her fingers around yours and scoots tight up against you. She lays her head on your shoulder and lets out a long, slow sigh of relief. + +“I’m happy you’re my friend,” Jane says wistfully as she drifts off to sleep. + +You softly lean your head against hers as her breaths deepen and slow. +> No Haven +You’ve only just drifted off when a booming man’s voice jars you awake and you very nearly leap out of your skin. “What are you doing in there? Come out of there, you two,” he commands, piercing your eyes with his flashlight beam. + +You stagger to your feet and help a groggy Jane to hers. You saunter over to the window and help steady Jane as she picks her way through. + +“Oh, it’s you again. You shouldn’t be in there. This place is falling apart and you could get hurt.” + +“We were just exploring,” pleads Jane, “weren’t hurting anything.” + +“Looked like you were sleeping to me.” + +“We just took a little nap is all ‘cause we got tired.” + +The man grabs you by the arm to steady you as you hop down to the ground. He’s wearing a dark uniform and you see a shiny tin shield pinned to his left breast pocket. + +“How many times have I told you to stay out of places like this, young lady? Maybe I should take you to the station and let you sit in a cell overnight to let you think about it. Maybe then you’ll listen when an adult tells you not to do something.” Turning toward you, he says “I don’t believe I know you, do I?” + +“N-no, sir. I-I just moved here,” you say, trembling. + +“Well, let me tell you that we take a mighty dim view on breaking and entering and trespassing around here. You look old enough to me to know that if something doesn’t belong to you you should just leave it alone.” + +“Y-yes s-sir.” Your eyes begin to well up. You’ve never met a police officer before and now he’s about to arrest you and throw you in jail. + +Jane stands there, rigid and glaring. She seems so strong and defiant—something you could never hope to be—looking as if she could attack at any moment. + +After a couple minutes that seem more like hours, he says “Now you two get on home right now and don’t let me catch you around here again or I will take you in. You understand?” + +“Y-yes sir,” you say, backpedaling before he can change his mind. You take a couple of steps backward, but Jane only stands there, boring holes in the officer. You snatch her by the hand and drag her along with you. Her gaze remains fixed on him until he’s completely out of sight. + +“What were you trying to do, get arrested?” you ask. + +“He don’t scare me none,” Jane fumes. + + + +You take your sweet time, wandering along first in the direction of your house one minute and then Jane’s the next not really wishing to end up at either place. + +Somehow you reach the railroad tracks on the edge of town and the two of you absently turn and follow them. + +You look warily over the dark embankment not knowing what may be lying in wait in the undergrowth just waiting to pounce. You wouldn’t even be able to hear it the way the gravel is crunching beneath your feet. + +You take a half-step closer to Jane. Even though it doesn’t help all that much since she’s not as big as you you somehow feel that there’s safety in numbers. + +You reach the edge of town and the wide spot that passes as a railroad staging yard. The street lights are behind you and everything here seems somehow darker even though your eyes have adjusted more to the lack of light. + +There’s a short string of boxcars on the side track and the shadows under and between them are completely black. If there was someone or something hiding in them, you wouldn’t be able to see it until it was too late. Jane doesn’t appear to be bothered by this even one little bit. + +While you’re busy keeping an eye out for movement, Jane steps up to the side of the second boxcar where its door is open a couple of feet—jumps up, pokes her head in and cranes her neck from side to side trying to glimpse what might be inside. You step beside her and shield your eyes with your hands from errant light and can’t make out anything but more blackness. + +“Boost me up,” she says, lifting her leg and holding her foot out to you. + +“I don’t think we should.” + +“Don’t be such a fraidy cat. There’s no one around.” + +You grab her foot with both hands and hoist her up. She’s as light as a feather. + +“C’mon.” + +After double-checking to make sure there’s nothing that will grab you from underneath the car, you plant your hands on the floor and jump up, but it’s still a little too high to throw your leg over. You try again jumping with all you have and still no dice. On the third attempt, Jane grabs you under the arm and heaves just enough that you manage to hang your foot. You can feel yourself sliding back out and under the car, but she snatches you behind the neck and you strain against her hands gaining just enough leverage to make it up. + +The two of you shuffle your way toward the end of the car where you find a few scattered and crushed cardboard barrels. You step around them and make your way toward the corner where you hear Jane slide down the side wall on the same side as the door and you turn and seat yourself against the end so that you are facing the door. + + + +“When Momma drinks she gets mean. She’s not always like that. Mostly she acts like I’m not even there.” + +“My mom’s starting to get like that. She spends all her time over at Honey’s house and now she’s got a new boyfriend.” + +“Your mom will never be as bad as mine. She doesn’t hate you.” + +“Maybe, but things keep getting worse instead of better.” + +It’s too dark to see Jane’s face, but you can tell she’s staring at you. It makes you a little uncomfortable. + +“Maybe we should just leave and go somewhere,” Jane finally says, “Maybe we could live at Gramma’s house. She’s really nice.” + +“I’m not sure.” + +You lean your head back and think about what it would be like without your mom. You’ve never been away from her for long. It’s a little scary, but also a little exciting. You’d get to be with Jane. That’s also exciting and scary at the same time, too. + +While you ponder all of this, you drift off to sleep. +> Unexpected Journey +You are jostled awake, but the rhythmic clacking and gentle, soothing rocking makes it difficult to keep your eyes open. Slowly, you begin to drift back toward dreamland when you come to a sudden and horrific realization and your eyes pop wide open. + +“We’re moving!” + +Jane moans softly in her sleep. + +Goose-pimples peak the length of your arm and the tiny hairs on the back of your neck come to attention. You reach out toward her sleep sounds and your hand finds Jane’s cheek with more force than you’d intended. + +She bolts upright, swinging and lands a hard slap to the side of your head. + +“We’re moving,” you repeat, cradling your ear, “The train’s moving!” + +She jumps up and the two of you stumble over the debris as you dash for the partly open door. Outside, the ground whizzes by at breakneck speed. You can barely even make it out as it passes by in the darkness. There is no way you’d be able to jump out at this speed—especially when you can’t see where you might land. + +“We’re stuck here,” says Jane, “We’ll just have to wait ‘til we stop to get off.” + +“How will we find our way back?” + +“We’ll just follow the train tracks. They go straight back to town.” + +“Yeah…” you say, staring blankly toward the horizon—seeing the land zip by faster and faster in your imagination as it rapidly approaches a blur. + +You return to the front of the car and sit back down next to Jane. + +With each passing clack, you know that you are getting farther from home and deeper in dutch with your mom. There’s no telling what she’ll do to you this time when you get back. + +“My mom is going to be really mad when she finds out I’m not in the garage,” you say. + +“We should just keep going and find somebody nice to live with. Gramma doesn’t have a phone, but maybe we might could find her house.” + +“I don’t know. What if she doesn’t like me? What if we can’t find someone who likes both of us?” + +“Then we’ll keep looking ‘til we do.” + +You lay your head down next to Jane and think about what she said. You’ve never been away from your mom before. What if everyone turns out to be just like her? + +You can feel the vibrations through the wood in your teeth. It feels really weird. + + + + + +You wake up and the car is still once more. Maybe it was just a dream. + +You reach out your hand in the darkness, find Jane’s shoulder and gently shake her awake. + +“Are we stopped?” she groggily asks. + +“Yeah. We should probably get off the train in case it starts moving again.” + +You stand up and help Jane stagger to her feet. + +Looking out the door, you see the street-lamps on the wrong side of the track. The diesel engine drones idly in the distance and you can see a rhythmic flashing light coming from that direction, but it’s too far away to make out more than that. + +You hop down onto the crunching gravel and quickly make your way into a stand of trees that are silhouetted against the predawn sky. You sit there until the train resumes its journey and see the sun peek out above the horizon. + +When you’re sure that the coast is clear, you make your way in the opposite direction that the train was headed. A short distance down the tracks you find a similar looking yard to the one you’d left last night. + +A line of metal buildings that serve the railroad runs along the street of whatever town you’re in now and the two of you rattle doorknobs in hopes that you’ll find one unlocked. They are all locked up tight. + +You resume your trek. + +A few blocks down, you come to a crossing and see a highway sign a short distance away. You see the numbers 281 printed in big block letters inside of a white shield. If only you had your map with you, you might be able to figure out where you are and how far away you are from your home. + +The sun is at your back and your shadows stretch into nothingness ahead of you. + +Jane carefully steps on every cross tie as she walks along while you step on every other one with your other foot on the rail—matching her stride for stride—which makes you appear to have a bad and pronounced limp. Your foot slips every now and again on the rail’s dew covered surface. + +“I don’t like Momma’s boyfriends. Sometimes they’re mean to her and sometimes they’re mean to me.” + +“Your Mom has boyfriends?” + +“Yeah, lots of ‘em. Every time she goes out and gets drunk, she gets another one. Sometimes it’s the same one, but not always.” + +“Why does she have so many?” + +“She has to. Kids cost a lot and it’s the only way she can make money. Each one only gives her a little money and sometimes they give her stuff when they don’t have any money. I wish she could find a job like your mom has. Nobody wants to give her a job, though.” + +“Why do they give her money if they are mean to her?” + +Jane shrugs. “Because she needs it, I guess.” + +“Why are they mean to you?” + +“Nobody likes a bastard. It’s just the way it is.” + +“What’s a bastard?” + +“Somebody that doesn’t have a dad.” + +“I don’t have a dad anymore, either.” + +“But you had one so you’re not a bastard. It’s only kids that never had one.” + +“Oh.” + + + +You’ve walked in silence for quite some time when you come upon an iron trestle bridge that spans a wide, muddy river and just beyond it you see a lineman’s shack. The cross ties are wider spaced across the bridge and you aren’t really looking forward to crossing it, but there’s no way around it that you can see. + +“I need to pee,” says Jane. + +“Me too,” you say, relieved that you can put off crossing the bridge for a few minutes at least. + +The two of you step just into the trees, find a spot where the other won’t be able to see and do your business. + +“Hi girly,” croaks a hoarse, grating voice, “What’re you doin’ out here all by yerself? Er you lost?” + +You nearly jump out of your skin. You can’t see the speaker, nor Jane. + +“Ahhh!” Jane screams, “Let go of me!” + +You sprint through the underbrush toward the sound of her cry and stumble out behind a wiry and hunched over, dirty looking man who has Jane caught by the arm. + +You run up and kick out as hard as you can as he’s turning around to see what the commotion is. + +“Let her go!” you shriek, connecting with his shin. + +He momentarily loses his footing and Jane falls away from his grasp. You snatch her by the hand as she stumbles to her feet and the two of you race off deeper into the woods. + +After a few minutes, you both stop—bent over to catch your breath—and hear no sign of the scruffy old man in pursuit. + + + +You head back in the direction you think the tracks are in, but at an angle and—after trudging through the underbrush for quite some time—discover that you are in fact hopelessly lost. + +Mosquitoes swarm all around you and it’s impossible to wave them off. Your hair drips with sweat and trickles the fine dust that covers your face into your eyes causing them to swell and burn. Your arms and legs are covered in swollen bumps from hundreds of itchy bites and the underbrush you’ve been plowing your way through has left tiny cuts and scrapes everywhere your skin is exposed. Both of you are a mess. +> Surprise Guests +You’ve been walking for what seems to be hours without sight of the tracks or the river when the sky starts to darken overhead. You look up to find menacing looking clouds fringed on the edges with lightning. You quicken your pace and just then the heavens decide to open up. The wind nearly knocks you off your feet and the rain scours your skin. + +Soaked to the skin and shaking like a leaf, you step out into a clearing where way out in the middle of it, you spy a quonset-style barn that’s open at the ends. The two of you drag yourselves over to it with lightning striking all around, accompanied by instant and deafening thunderclaps. You feel extremely vulnerable out in the open like this, but you have to get out of this sweeping rain. + +Inside you find that it’s stacked high on both sides with bales of bright green hay. You squeeze your way between the front wall and the stack and find that there is a short and narrow crawlspace behind that runs the length of the building. The bales are stacked at a slight angle which makes a narrow shelf at the top of each layer. + +Still dripping and now covered with dried grass, the two of you wring your clothes out as best you can and spread them out on the shelf of hay to dry and you sit huddled and shivering in the near darkness. + +You notice how frail Jane looks. Her ribs are prominent and she looks somehow more drawn than you had ever seen her. She looks like a skeleton. You feel rage welling up inside you at the abuse she’s suffered at her mother’s hand. How could anyone be that evil? + +Jane still looks worried. The narrow escape was still obviously weighing on her. When she looks over at you you smile and she smiles back. + +Though you don’t see it, you know that the sun has set due to the complete darkness outside. The wind has subsided, but the rain is still coming down in a deluge. + +Exhaustion takes hold and you pass yawns back and forth. You rake hay into a rough pile and make yourself as comfortable as you can. Clutching each other for warmth, you try to force sleep in spite of your misery. And eventually you do. + + + +You’re jolted awake to the sound of a revving engine just outside the barn. You jump up and jerk on your damp clothes as quickly as you possibly can and stealthily make your way to the opposite end of the barn. + +When you are sure that the coast is clear, you bolt—only to crash into a big man in faded overalls who latches onto you more out of surprise or instinct than anything else. + +“Hold on there, kids”, his voice bubbles, “where do you think you’re going?” + +“Let go of me!” Jane demands. + +“What’re you two doing in there?” + +“Nothing…”, you sheepishly respond. + +“Where’re you from? What’s your name? Where’re your folks?” + +Realizing the futility of it, you both stop squirming and he eases his grip on your arms. You share a momentary glance with Jane and in that very instant, know that neither of you are about to tell this stranger anything. + +After a couple odd minutes of silence, the farmer decides that he won’t press you, but he sure isn’t about to let a couple of young kids just run loose when he doesn’t know who or where you belong. He steers you over to his idling tractor and makes you climb up—one on either side—beside his seat, then climbs up behind you. He shoves the tractor into gear and makes a beeline over the hill to his house. + +“Martha! I caught a couple of rats in the barn!” bellows the farmer from behind you as he ushers you through the door of the small farmhouse. + +“What’s that, Earl?” asks a stocky, gray-haired woman entering the room from the far door. “Lan’ sakes! Where did these children come from?” + +“I told you. I found ‘em sneakin’ ‘round the barn. They’re pretty scraped up, too. Could use some of your doctorin’” + +“You children get caught out in the storm last night?” + +You both slowly nod. + +”Let’s have a look and see if we can’t get you cleaned up.” + +You look at each other and then move slowly in her direction. + +“Come now,” she says, putting an arm around each of your shoulders, “Why! You’re still soaked! Earl, go get a couple of your shirts so the little ones can get out of these wet clothes.” + +“Yes, dear,” he says, turning and quickly walking down a hallway. + +“Now come this way. You can change in the other room.” She ushers the two of you into the short, dark hallway that Earl just went down. By the time you reach the second door, Earl is coming out of the one in the very back. + +“Here ya go,” he says holding a shirt out to each of you. + +“Now you go in here and I’ll be right in to collect your clothes, sweetie. Jus’ let me get the ointment and we’ll take care of those nasty scratches while we’re at it,” she says to Jane. + +“And you go with Earl and he’ll bring me your clothes.” + +“Come on, little man,” he says, scooping you toward the back room as he turns. + +While you’re getting out of your wet clothes, Martha taps on the bedroom door and hands a tube of salve, a washcloth and a white ceramic basin of water to Earl when he opens it. + +“Have you seen how emaciated these children are?” she tries to whisper low enough to Earl so that you don’t hear. “I don’t think they’ve had more than scraps for weeks.” + +“Ayuh. They’re pretty scrawny alright,” he says quietly, “They must’ve been through quite the ordeal.” + +When he gets back to you, he gives you a quick rub down with a wet cloth and then smears salve all over your abrasions. It really stings due to his large hands being so rough and calloused, but the ointment itself is cool and soothing. + +With the sleeves being much too long for your arms, you have trouble buttoning up the shirt and Earl ends up having to take over for you. +> Departure +Jane looks ridiculous in Earl’s gigantic shirt. It drags the ground around her feet as she plods back down the hall in front of you—doing her utmost not to trip on it. Of course, you must look equally funny since the one you’re wearing is nearly trailing the floor on you and the cuffs dangle nearly a foot below your hands. + +“I bet you two are starving,” Martha says in a chipper tone, “Come on in the kitchen and you can eat some breakfast with us. It’s almost ready. All I gotta do is set out two more places.” + +When you step through the door, you can’t believe your eyes. You’ve never seen so much food on a table at one time. There are biscuits, eggs, both bacon and sausage, fried potatoes and gravy, and most of a left over ham in which a few slices have already been cut. There’s a big block of butter and a loaf of light bread. Arranged next to each plate, is a bowl of oatmeal, a short glass of orange juice and a heavy round glass with a foot and stem full to the top with fresh milk. + +You can’t imagine how any more could even fit on the table without things tumbling off on the floor, but Martha does just that when she sets a place for you and Jane. And the table doesn’t look any more heaped than it did already. + +The four of you sit down and before you dig in, the elderly couple takes hold of each of your hands and bows their heads. + +"Bless us, O Lord, and these, Thy gifts, which we are about to receive from Thy bounty,” says Earl with his eyes closed, and squeezing your hand he adds, “And thank you for bringing us these dear little ones that they may share in our feast. Through Christ, our Lord. Amen." + +“Amen,” parrots Martha as she reaches out and starts heaping food on your and Jane’s plates before she even does her own. + +Everything is so, so delicious and you cram in more than you ever have in your entire life. Jane is stuffing food in and matching you bite for bite. Earl and Martha pick at theirs and appear to be enjoying watching the two of you eat. + +When you finally push back from your plate it looks as if it has barely even been touched, but your belly feels like an overripe melon. There’s no way you could possibly poke in another spoonful. + +Your eyes have a mind of their own and you watch as the dinner table quickly disappears. You start to slump forward and are prevented doing a face-plant into your plate by Earl’s massive hand. As everything goes black, you hear him chuckle and say “I guess this little guy’s had plenty.” + +“So has this one,” laughs Martha. + + + +You are startled awake by a loud rapping on a door. You find yourself half-sunken into a big fluffy bed and Jane has an arm and a leg draped over you. Her warmth is so comforting and you don’t want to move out of this very spot. The shades are drawn and let in only a pinstripe of blinding light making everything else in the room too dark to make out. + +“They’re sleepin’ in the back room,” you hear Martha say, “Poor little dears were starving and plumb tuckered out.” + +“Do you know who they belong to?” asks a strange man’s voice. + +“They wouldn’t say. I s’pose they’ve run off and I can’t blame ‘em. They’re jus’ skin ‘n bones.” + +“Don’t worry. We’ll get to the bottom of it.” + +The door cracks open and spills light into your eyes. + +“Oh, you’re awake,” Martha says quietly, flicking on the light. “There’s someone here that wants to talk to you. Let me get you your clothes so you can get dressed. They’re all clean and dry now.” + +After Martha has closed the door, you shake Jane awake. “Someone’s here to talk to us,” you tell her. + +“Who is it? What do you think they want?” + +“I dunno.” + +Martha comes back in and lays your clothes out on the foot of the bed. “Hurry and get dressed and you all come on out.” + +“Who is it?” Jane repeats to Martha, but she closes the door without answering. + +You both heave yourselves over and roll off opposite sides of the bed and drag your clothes on, leaving Earl’s crumpled shirts behind. + + + +You follow Jane down the hall and she freezes as she steps into the front room. You lean forward, peering around her and see a policeman framed in the outside doorway. He’s wearing a brown and khaki uniform and has a star pinned above his breast pocket. + +“Step in here so I can get a better look at you,” says the deputy. + +You both take tentative steps into the room—being careful to keep your distance. + +“I don’t think I’ve seen either of you before. Where are you kids from?” + +You look at Jane and her face is like stone. The policeman would probably take Jane back to her house so her mom could hit on her some more. It might be for the best if you stay silent and not tell him anything. + +After a couple of minutes, the deputy takes you each by the arm and says “Well, I guess we’ll have to do this the hard way then. Come on and let’s go.” + +You and Jane are ushered along and both of you walk stiff-legged out to his car. + +“You kids take care of yourselves,” calls Martha from the porch as the car door is being closed behind you. You look over and see her and Earl waving to you, but you don’t feel at all like waving back. + + + +You’ve been sitting on hard wooden chairs in the station for quite some time. Beyond the little glass window to the next room, you see several people moving around and you hear the occasional crackle of static mixed with garbled speech every now and then. + +“We should run away,” whispers Jane without turning to you, “before they can take us back.” + +“They’ll just catch us,” you whisper back, “We don’t even know where we are.” + +“I can’t go back home now. I have to find Gramma.” + +“You should tell them where she lives so they’ll take us there.” + +“They won’t. They’ll only take us home.” + +“Not if you tell ‘em how mean your mom is to you.” + +“They don’t care none about that. They always take me back home.” +> Run away +“Okay. Let’s get out of here,” you say. + +You wait until the dispatcher’s head is turned and both of you bolt for the door. You don’t hear any ruckus coming from behind you so you figure you made it. You don’t have a clue where you are or where to go, but you run. + +There are quite a few more people on the streets here than back at home. You try to keep out of sight at first, but there’s just too many and not enough places to hide. If you knew the town it’d probably make things much easier. Eventually, you don’t even bother trying to conceal yourselves. Why bother? It’s not like anyone is paying you any mind, anyway. + +After several blocks, you spot another one of those highway signs with 281 printed on it—only this one is smaller and way up high on a lamp post and has an arrow. Maybe you could find the train tracks again if you follow the little arrow. + +“I think the tracks are down that way,” you tell Jane. + +She gives you a puzzled look. + +“See the sign? I saw one like that, only bigger, when we were at that train yard.” + +“Okay. Then that’s where we need to go. No one knows how we got here. They won’t know where to look.” + +You both grin at each other and turn the corner. + +About a block out of town, you find the highway. You don’t see any sign of the tracks and decide to follow along it at a safe distance away so any passing cars won’t notice you. + +“We should get some food,” says Jane, “we might have to walk for a long way and we don’t want to starve. There’s a store right over there.” + +“We don’t have any money, though.” + +“We don’t need money. I’ll just grab something when no one’s looking.” + +“I don’t know. Mr. Freddy saw you last time. He just didn’t say anything.” + +“Mr. Freddy’s my friend.” + +“Then why would you steal his stuff?” + +Jane shrugs. “‘cause I need it, I guess.” + +Against your better judgment, you follow Jane over and into the store. While she walks down the aisles picking things off the shelf and acts like she’s looking at the price tags, you pretend to look at the magazines in the rack. You don’t like this at all, but you can’t say anything now. It’s too late for that. + +Suddenly, a hand clamps down on your shoulder. + +“Here you are. Now where’s your little friend?” + +You look up to see the deputy looking toward the back just as Jane steps around the corner. + +“There you are, little lady. C’mon, it’s time to go.” + +She sheepishly walks over to the two of you. + +“You two are beginning to be quite the handful, you know that? I guess we should’ve put bells around your necks.” + +Jane glares up at him. You know your goose is cooked. There’s nothing you can do now. It’s all over. + +“Just out of curiosity, how’d the two of you manage to get this far from home? I can’t imagine that you walked over eighty miles. Did someone give you a ride?” + +Jane says nothing. If you tell him you’ll only get into more trouble so the only explanation you give him is a shrug. + +“I guess it doesn’t matter. There’ll be someone here shortly to drive you back. And I’m sure there will be a lot of questions for you two.” + + + +A couple of hours later, you are back to your town. It was a long, quiet ride and neither you nor Jane gave more than a yes or no answer to the man that drove you. You only looked at each other attempting to communicate with only your eyes. All that she—and you, no doubt—could convey was sadness and a sense of hopelessness of the situation. + +You sit slumped—craning your neck to peek through the patrol car’s rear window—and watch as the officer who ran you and Jane out of the abandoned house a couple nights ago turns away from Jane and her mother, and walks back to the car. No sooner than his back is turned does she turn and shove Jane inside the house, slamming the door shut behind her. + +The officer throws a glance over his shoulder, but doesn’t break stride as he continues on his way. + +After he closes his car door, you say “Is she gonna hit Jane?” + +He turns sideways in his seat and looks back at you. “I wouldn’t be surprised if she’s not able to sit down for a week after pulling a stunt like this. Do you understand how dangerous it was for the two of you out there all alone? We’re lucky that we found you before something bad happened to you. You don’t know what some people are capable of doing to children.” + +“She hates Jane. I don’t want her to hit her anymore.” + +“No mother hates her own child. She’s just having a rough time raising her on her own—being a single mother and all.” + +“You don’t know.” + +“Listen. I’ll swing back by after I drop you off and look in on her, okay?” He starts the engine and pulls it into gear. “Everything will be back to normal as soon as this mess blows over.” + + + +As you pull into the drive, the door opens and your mom steps out on the porch. She rushes over to the patrol car and snatches you by the arm—dragging you out and pulling you close—as soon as the policeman opens the rear door. + +“Here he is, safe and sound. No one knows how those two managed to make it so far away on their own.” + +“He’s always been a handful. I can barely keep up with him most of the time. An’ with this new job, I’ll have to work extra hard at it, I guess,” she says, flashing her eyes at you over a wan smile. “I’m just glad he’s home.” + +“That’s why we’re here, ma’am. Glad to be of service.” + +He walks with you to the door of the garage and watches as the two of you step inside. + +“Thanks again, Officer,” your mom says, ushering you in and closing the door. + +“You’re quite welcome,” he says, turning around and walking back the way he came. + +She lifts the corner of the vinyl curtain to watch him get into his patrol car and pull out of the driveway. When she turns around to you, her face is a deep shade of red and skewed beyond all recognition. + +“If things are so bad here that you felt the need to run away, then why didn’t you just stay gone!?” + +You don’t have an answer. You take a step to the rear as she lifts the solid metal rod from the window and yanks it free of the curtain. + +She is on you before you even know it—whipping you side to side like a terrier does a rat by a handful of hair in one hand while she whacks at your butt and the back of your legs with the curtain rod in the other. Every so often, an errant strike lands in the small of your back and your vision momentarily goes black. You can feel it cut deep and glance off bone with each blow. + +“Why can’t you do anything right? Why do you always have to go out of your way to make me mad?” + +You try to lessen the blows by deflecting them with your palms, but it only forces her to swing harder. The flesh on the underside of your hands soon feels tight and swollen, and you no longer have control enough to maneuver them into a position of any benefit at all. + +All you can do is grit your teeth and bear the pain. If you make even the slightest sound of whimpering, she’ll “give you something to really cry about”. + +The stinging pain finally lessens as your vision fades and grows more and more distant as the world goes dark around you. + + + +You don’t know how long you’ve been lying here in the darkness. Your whole body throbs from one end to the other and you want nothing more than to return to sleep. + +What about Jane? She was right. You and she need to just run away together and find her Gramma or else somebody nice to take care of the two of you. You don’t have a choice anymore. You know that now. Your mom will end up killing you if you don’t get away. + +You slowly open your eyes. You drag your arms under you and shove yourself to your knees. + +You see no sign of your mom and can only guess that she has gone back to the party in Honey’s house. + +You pick yourself up off the floor. You can’t straighten your legs and your back is in an uncontrollable hunch, but you manage to maintain your balance and not topple over despite the impossible angle you are leaning. + +One determined step after another, you make your way to the door. + +The curtain is now back in its place over the window. You look at it for what seems like a long time debating whether or not to do something about that impromptu weapon. It would do absolutely no good, though, because she’d just grab something else to use on you the next time. + +You reach out and grip the knob with all the strength you can muster. It doesn’t give easily, but you manage to turn it enough that the latch lets go. You hobble on one foot through the open doorway into the bright afternoon sun and pull the door closed behind you. + +You can hear music coming from Honey’s house, but don’t see any movement through the windows. You limp around the garage and through the back yard to the alley. + + + +It’s about mid-afternoon by the time you reach Jane’s house. The place looks locked up tight. After calling into the “secret place” and getting no response, you amble up to the front door and rap on it several times with the same result. + +Where could she be? +> Check the Places You Know +You try to find the abandoned house that Jane took you to the other night. You wander down several alleys, but nothing looks familiar. Maybe it just doesn’t look the same in the daylight. + +You are about to give up when you spot the broken and leaning gate about a half a block down. You shuffle to it as fast as your legs will allow. + +The house just looks like any other house in the daytime. The grass is taller than most and there are scraps of trash in the yard among the bushes that are in dire need of trimming, but there’s nothing ominous at all about it. + +You stagger up to the window that you crawled through the other night and see that it has been nailed down tight since you were here. + +“Jane? Jane, are you in there?” you call as you rap on the boarded up window, but you hear only silence from within. + +Your legs and back are starting to buckle so you drag yourself along the wall to the cement and brick porch on the front corner and kneel down on the steps. You suck air in through your teeth to try to ease the pain away, but with each heartbeat your skin twinges with sharp stabbing needles. + +You give it a few minutes before striking out for somewhere else. + + + +You head over to the train yard to see if she might be hiding out there and find that the place is completely deserted. There are no railroad cars in sight. There aren’t even any buildings here like there were in the other one. It’s just a wide gravel lot with two sets of tracks running through it. It looks so different in the daylight. + +She could be almost anywhere and you barely know the town at all. You haven’t even lived here for a whole week yet. + +You have to take a break so you head over to a small grove of saplings just beyond the right of way and ease down to your knees in the sparse shade they provide. You don’t know if you’ll be able to get back up again, but you know you can’t stand any longer. + +It takes a good while for your back and legs to slow their spasms, but you’ve come down with a case of the hiccups. With each one, your back tries to curl back on itself and sends a new flood of agonizing waves of pain. Eventually, they subside and you heft yourself back to your feet. +> Head for the Park +You’ve made your way to the park only to find it completely deserted. Not a soul in sight. + +Your legs are sluggish and you’re having a difficult time staying on your feet. You have to rest a minute so you amble over to the swings and hang a knee on one. You slump stiffly forward—hanging onto the chain so you don’t put down too much weight. All of your energy is gone and your vision is starting to blur. You can’t help but close your eyes for few minutes. + +You hear a crunch nearby and jerk your eyes wide open. You see movement off to both sides and someone is standing directly in front of you. It takes a couple seconds, but it dawns on you that it’s Chortle from the first day you got here. If he’s come to finish the job, there’s no way you’d be able to defend yourself. + +You look up at his face expecting to see the same nasty grin plastered across it that he had the other day, but he looks really sad. + +You look side-to-side and see the other two boys standing there with their heads slightly bowed with nearly the same expression on their faces. + +“We just heard about Jane,” Chortle finally gets around to saying. + +“Yeah. It’s real sad news,” says Tubby. + +You squint up at Chortle—knowing full well that he’s got to be up to something. It’s all some kind of twisted joke he’s set up. “What do you mean?” + +“Don’t you know? She’s dead. Her mom killed her and they threw her in jail.” + +“Nah. You’re lyin’. Get away from me,” you say, heaving yourself back to your feet. + +“No I ain’t,” he says, stepping over to the side when you lurch toward him with your fists doubled. “Why would I lie about something like that?” + +“Get away from me. I’m not gonna listen to you.” + +“But it’s true!” he pleads. + +“Yeah, it is,” says one of the other boys. + +You keep walking and they don’t follow. You’ve never been this mad in all your life and if your muscles weren’t so stiff and on fire, you would’ve hit him right in the nose. +> Dire News +You hobble into Fredrick’s Grocery and see Mr. Freddy slumped and leaning heavily on his forearms over the counter by the register. He turns his head and looks up at you as you enter. + +“My God, son! What happened to you?” + +You shake your head intending to not say anything, but the words slip out before you can stop them. “I got in trouble for running off.” That doesn’t sound quite right so you add “but I didn’t. It was just an accident.” + +Mr. Freddy looks confused and even more concerned. “Come over here boy and let me look at you.” + +You take a couple of slow steps toward him and he meets you over halfway, taking you by the shoulder and leaning around to look at your back. “My God!” he whistles through his teeth, “Someone needs to do something about this.” + +You struggle to get out of his grip, but he doesn’t let go. + +“Come over here and hop up on the counter while I make a quick phone call.” + +“I can’t. It hurts.” + +“I’ll help you up and you can roll over on your belly.” + +He gently lifts you up on the counter before heading off somewhere. You can hear his clapping footfalls and after a moment of silence you hear him speaking, but his words garble and run together as you drift off to sleep. + + + +“Aaahhh!” You jolt awake when a searing pain arcs through your back. You whirl around and see several people standing around you—an older couple that you guess are only customers talking with Mr. Freddy and a couple of firemen. + +“Sorry about that,” says a fireman wearing latex gloves and scrutinizing your wounds, “I guess it is as bad as it looks. I’ll try to be more careful.” + +“…first the little girl and now this,” says the woman, “What is this world coming to?” + +“She was his friend,” says Mr. Freddy under his breath, “Never saw one without the other since he got into town. They’ve been like two peas in a pod.” + +“What a shame,” says the woman, “what a cryin’ shame.” + +“Somebody should do something about it,” says the old man. + +“I intend to,” says Mr. Freddy, “just as soon as Jarvis gets back. Joan said he was looking into a trespass out at the ol’ Simon farm and she’d send him over the minute he got in.” + +“Young people these days have no business having children,” says the old man. + +“Well, I don’t think there’ll be any permanent damage,” says the fireman who’s been working on you, “let’s get you over to the station and we’ll get you all cleaned and bandaged up. What d’ya say?” + +You’re staring at the old woman puzzling over what she’d said and finally can’t help but interrupt “What little girl? What do you mean?” + +Mr. Freddy’s head snaps around and he locks eyes with you, working his jaw without making any sound. + +“He doesn’t know?” gasps the old woman behind her hand, “Me and my big mouth.” + +“No. I guess not. All this must’ve happened around the same time,” Mr. Freddy finally manages to say. + +“What happened to Jane?” + +Focusing back on you he begins to stammer “I— I’m sorry, son. She— she was—” before turning away and stalking off toward the back of the store. + +The hairs on the back of your neck and arms prickle. “What happened to Jane?!” you shriek at the other dumbstruck faces. +> In Hiding +Everything is kind of a blur. You remember being led to the firehouse and worked on in the back of the ambulance. You remember how everyone was busy coming and going around you and there were new faces popping up every now and again, but you can’t recall everything that went on there. You don’t even know how you got here. + +You must’ve run when no one was looking because they never would’ve let you out of their sight in the condition you were in or the danger you could face if your mom had gotten her hands on you again. + +You are laying face down on Jane’s bag of covers in her “secret place”. You can feel the cool dampness all around you and it is so soothing. There is something “safe” about this place. You understand now why Jane would hide and sometimes even sleep overnight in here. + +With every stretch and adjustment you make, the bandages on your back and legs relax and constrict. This, too, is both soothing and comforting. + +Your eyes have long since adjusted to the dim light filtering in through the grate—which you must’ve closed behind you when you crawled in, but you can’t remember doing that, either. It’s got too much of a greenish tint to it to be sunlight. It must be coming from the street lamp on the corner. + +You look over toward the dark corner of the concrete foundation and see a couple empty pop bottles propped up against the change jar which still has your dollar resting on top of all the different coins. You remember sharing those root beers with Jane. Next to them is the ‘treasure chest’ all tied up neatly in the ribbon just the way Jane had left it. + +Your stomach is growling and twisting in knots. You haven’t eaten anything since the feast you shared with Jane, Earl and Martha early this morning. + +You can’t risk going back the garage for food and if you went to the store, Mr. Freddy would likely call the cops for your own protection. You don’t know what else you can do other than just tough out the hunger like you’ve done so many times before. + +You close your eyes and try to sleep, but the gnawing and churning won’t allow you to drift off. You’ll have to suffer through it or else find some way of taking the edge off. + + + +You crawl over to the grate and see that outside it is full dark. You shove lightly on the grate and it groans loudly against the concrete foundation. You nearly jump clean out of your skin. When you finally catch your breath again, you lift up on it on the side and slide it over sideways. + +The high grass outside is dimly lit and shadowy things move about just outside your vision. Your hands and feet go numb, and you get that all too familiar coppery taste in your mouth. + +You crawl out and drag the grate back over the hole, keeping your eyes on the deeper shadows all around you. + +One step after another, you make your way to the corner of the house and—instead of going around the front to the steps—climb up the side and slink your way past the window to the door. + +You gently swing open the screen door—propping it with your foot—and heave up on the doorknob like you remember seeing Jane do, then push inward with all your strength. The door plows the carpeting with a ripping sound that makes a whole new battalion of tiny hairs rise to attention on the back of your neck. Inside, you see that it is darker than dark. + +When the pounding in your ears subsides, you take a short step through the door and strain your ears against the silence. The only sound you hear is that of your own heavy breath going in and out. + +Looking over your shoulder only makes the panic grow, so you focus on finding the door in the back wall. You tiptoe through the room with your hands out in front of you and hoping that whatever is lurking in here doesn’t grab you by the arm or ankle from the dark. + +You find the door facing and pull yourself around it, putting your back against the wall and slamming your eyes shut. Your tongue has swollen two sizes and scrapes leathery against the roof of your mouth. + +You slowly open your eyes and can see the kitchen sink from what little light filters in through the window above it and the dim silhouettes of the cabinet doors flanking each side along the far wall. The linoleum floor is brighter than the dark carpeting in the front room and you can just make out that there’s nothing creeping around in here—at least, not in the open. + +You step lightly over to the sink and slowly make your way toward a wooden box on the counter. Taking another look behind you, you reach out and pry open the small doors with your thumbs. You reach inside and feel a soft bread wrapper with only a couple of slices left in it and a tall, square, cardboard box. + +You take both items and turn toward the front door. The frame is much brighter from this side and is the only thing you can see clearly. Each step you take toward it gets longer and longer until you are at full gallop. + +On your way through, you manage to snag the knob and jerk the door closed behind you—trapping whatever it was that was behind you inside. + +You cross the porch—carefully skirting the dark window—and slip back around the side of the house, then crawl back inside to the safety of the “secret place” and drag the grate back into place. + +Tearing them into chunks, you cram the two stale bread slices into your mouth and choke them down. You then turn your attention to the box. It is still unopened and you rock it lightly in your hands. You can feel the packed contents bounce against the sides. If you’re very careful with them, you can stretch the crackers out for a couple of weeks. + +After you prop it and the wadded bread wrapper against the wall beside the bottles, you flop face-down on the bag of covers. + +Your thoughts turn back to the last few days and of Jane as the world around you fades into dream. + + + +You wake up feeling a bit too warm and your mouth is dry and dusty. You are desperate for something to quench your thirst. + +As you push yourself to your knees, your whole body screams out in agony. You’d forgotten all about yesterday, but it all comes flooding back to you now. + +You reach over and pick up the change jar, but it’s mostly pennies and the pops in the vending machine cost a quarter. You can’t risk going there, anyway. You might not be able to get away this time. + +After putting the jar back, you crawl over to the grate and peer out as far as you can with your face pressed against it. As far as you can see, all there is is tall grass and weeds so you push it out and to the side, and crawl out into the harsh sunlight. Then you carefully drag it back into place. + +There are no houses beyond this street so you decide to crawl to the back of Jane’s house before standing up. There aren’t any close neighbors, but you can see a house a little distance on down the road. + +At the far corner of Jane’s house, you spot prefab concrete steps leading up do a back door. It’s beyond where the kitchen lies and must open into a room you haven’t been in. The house doesn’t seem nearly as spooky in the light of day. You decide to see if you can open it and get inside so you can maybe find something to drink. + +The door barely moves inward and bumps hard against something up high. You can’t see beyond the light pink curtain so you release the knob. Unless you can find an open window, you’ll have to go in through the front. + +All the windows are latched from the inside so after you make certain there is no one in sight, you dash for the porch and shove your way in as quickly as you can—closing the door behind you. + +After taking a second to let your eyes adjust, you walk across the room to the kitchen which is much brighter that the living room now. You stretch up on your tiptoes to reach the faucet knobs and find that they do still work. You catch handfuls of water and lose most of it bringing them to your mouth, but it doesn’t matter. There’s plenty more where that came from. + +When you’ve had enough, you look around for something to catch water in for later. You find a couple of pots on the stove, but they’re filled with moldy food. There are no plastic milk jugs in the garbage that you can rinse out so you start looking around for anything else that will work. The only other thing there is are whiskey bottles with screw on caps so you rinse them out as best you can and—even though you can still smell the alcohol in them—fill up six of the tallest ones. + +You rummage through the cabinets and find a couple of cans of green beans and a can opener. They won’t be as good uncooked, but since you have no choice you’ll just have to eat them straight from the can. + +The refrigerator is bare except for half a stick of butter which might help the crackers slide down easier, but you leave it where it is because it would only end up melting and making a mess. + +You head over to the door in the far back corner that you thought was a closet and find that behind it is a small room with a water heater being the only major thing in it. There is also a broom, a mop, a dustpan and a bucket and other such cleaning tools that you suspect haven’t been used on the place in quite some time. The floor is buckled and crinkles under your feet as you step lightly over to the back door. You see a lock mounted to the top of the back door well out of your reach and it takes some fancy maneuvering of the broom handle to slide the bolt out of the barrel, but the door is now usable so you don’t have to go around to the front and be spotted by random passersby or the neighbors. + +You make sure everything is back to exactly the way you found it before closing the door and carrying the water bottles and other items back around to the “secret place”. + + + +You’ve been hiding in here for the last two days when you hear footsteps coming from inside the house above you. Voices drift down to you through the floorboards. You hold your breath and don’t move a muscle in case they can hear you as easily as you can them. + +“This place is a filthy pigsty. How could anyone live in this place? Why was she allowed to even keep a child here?” you hear a woman say. + +“No one knew. They mostly kept to themselves,” says a familiar sounding man’s voice, “You should hurry and get what you need because I’m not really supposed to let anyone in here until after the trial.” + +“I don’t know how I’m ever going to find something for her to wear in all this mess. And even if I do, it’ll have to be cleaned before the service.” + +“I’ve heard it’s gonna be this Thursday, but have they decided where they’re going to hold it, yet?” + +“Yes, Thursday. It’ll most likely be in the school gymnasium since there are so many people who’ve already called and want to send flowers. Since the story hit all the papers, there’ll probably be a big turnout, too. It’s always sad when someone so young passes.” + +“It was right in front of my eyes and I couldn’t see it. The boy even warned me when I dropped her off and I thought he was exaggerating, like kids do. I wish I’d have listened. Really listened. I told him I’d look in on her, but by the time I got back it was too late.” + +That’s who it is! It’s Officer Jarvis. Now you can put a face to the voice. + +“Don’t blame yourself. The whole town new what shape the little girl was in and just sat on their hands. We’re all to blame.” + +“But, it’s my job to notice these things. I should’ve done something.” + +“We all should’ve done something more for her.” + +There’s a few minutes where all you can hear is footsteps above you and then the woman finally says “I can’t find anything in all this mess. We need to just take up a collection to get her something decent—even if I have to buy it all myself.” + +A short time later, you hear a car pulling away. You let out a long sigh of relief as you roll over onto your back. + +You spend the rest of the afternoon looking over your map and at Jane’s postcards. Everything you and Jane dreamed about seems so hopeless and so far away now. You only knew her for a few days, but it feels like you knew her your entire life. + +Sometime long after dark, your grief finally gives way to sleep. +> The Farewell +You sit on the bleachers at the edge of the school’s soccer field, staring over at the gymnasium. The parking lot is packed tighter than if there were a game going on inside and the cars stretch clear down both sides of the street beyond where you can see. It looks like there might be more people here than even live in this whole town. + +The funeral won’t be for a while yet, but people are paying their respects and viewing her remains. You want so much to see her one last time, but not like that. So you just sit here—feeling more helpless and alone than ever before—and just stare at the building. + +You hadn’t seen the policeman since he’d dropped you off with your mother on that fateful day, but you can make out his face every now and then when he looks out at you from just inside the glass double doors. He’s wearing a dark blue suit now instead of his uniform. When he opens the door and starts walking toward you, every instinct in your body tells you to flee, but you haven’t the will to even stand. You are too tired and sad way down deep to run. You don’t even care what he does to you at this point. You just close your eyes and wait. + +You can hear his heavy footfalls as he approaches and then a hand on your knee, giving it a gentle squeeze. You open your eyes and see through your tears that he has knelt before you and is struggling against his own tears for words. It takes him a couple of minutes, but he finally manages to speak. + +“We’ve been looking everywhere for you and thought something bad might’ve happened. I’m glad to see that you’re alright. I guess you’re here to say goodbye to your friend. We can get you to the station and take care of everything afterward. Would you like to go in?” + +You widen your eyes and your jaw slackens at the very horror of the suggestion. “No, huh uh,” you manage to weakly get out. + +“You really should, you know. She was your friend and she would want you there,” he coaxes softly, “It’ll be the last time you’ll ever see her and you really should say goodbye.” + +Your eyes start to burn and you can’t hold in your grief any longer. You scream from way down deep and fall forward as all of your strength falls away. He catches you before you hit the ground and scoops you up tight against him. + +“I told you. I told you,” you say hoarsely, between sobs. + +He mumbles something, but you can’t make out the words through your hysterical squeaks. You feel his chest heaving as he tries to hold back his own flood of emotions. + +Eventually, you manage to get hold of yourself and so does he. He pulls you to your feet and wraps his arm around your shoulders. “C’mon. I’ll go with you. This is something you have to do. I won’t leave you. I’ll be right there beside you the whole time.” + + + +Officer Jarvis reaches past you and pulls the door open. It is standing room only inside the building. Beyond the partition separating this area from the main gym, there are rows and rows of little white folding chairs reaching from one side of the basketball court all the way to the other where a long white box lays on its back with its lid standing open and draped in a filmy white shroud. + +There is a line of people snaking its way back and forth between silver poles attached together at their top by thick red velvet ropes and up through the center of the packed seats. There is a dull roar permeating the building, but you don’t see anyone talking. + +He walks behind you with a hand on each shoulder, steering you toward the back of the line. Everyone else is dressed in nice clothes and suits, but you still have on the same ones you’ve been wearing since the first night you got here. + +The line moves along at a snails pace. By the time you finally approach the open box, you are rocking back and forth from one leg to the other. It’s not that you have to go so much as it is the anticipation of reaching the end of this line. + +“She is so young,” you hear the gray-haired woman in front of you say, “It’s a real tragedy.” + +When the last of the people part in front of you and wander off toward the far end of the basketball court, you feel Officer Jarvis’ hands give your shoulders a light squeeze. You know you have to walk the few remaining feet to look into the box, but your feet no longer want to cooperate. You stand there frozen — needing to see, but not wanting to with every fiber of your being. + +“Come on,” he says, “you’re doing just fine.” + +He finally steps up beside you and wraps his arm around your shoulders—gently lifting and half carries you the last remaining steps. You squinch your eyes shut as tightly as you can and your whole body starts to spasm from the bottom of your feet all the way to your scalp. + +The moment stretches on and on, and just when you feel like you might make it, your eyelids slowly begin to part of their own accord. + +Everything is blurry at first, almost as if you are looking through a sheet of water on a window pane. The ultra fine netting gives the contents an almost supernatural feel—as if looking through a wispy cloud. Your eyes slowly follow the contour of the fabric sewn to the inside of the lid and come to rest on the sweetest face you have known in your short life. + +She looks so pleasant, as if she were only lying there, sleeping. The stern expression she always wore is completely gone from her face now and she looks so content, so peaceful. She’s wearing a dark blue dress spattered in tiny white flowers and her fingers are laced together below its wide lace collar. Her hair is combed out neatly and drawn back in a white ribbon that’s tied in a bow off to one side. + +You feel like you could just reach out and gently shake her awake, but you know you really can’t. She’s not merely asleep now—she is gone. And with that realization, your eyes begin to burn and you feel a flood cascading down the sides of your face and dripping off your chin onto your bare chest. + +“Okay, we can go now. We need to find us a place to sit for the service,” he says, curling your trembling body into his as he walks you around the far end of the room. + +All the seats on the court are filled so he takes you back toward the stairway leading up to the bleachers where many people have already seated themselves. + +As you round the corner, you see an exit sign over a door with a shiny metal bar across it and another closer one hanging from the ceiling that reads “restrooms” with an arrow pointing down a hall. You point up at it and he nods. + +“I’ll be up in the stands. Come find me when you’re done.” + +You nod up at him and head down the hall. + + + +You feel somewhat better after relieving your bladder, but you stare into the steel mirror at a boy that you don’t recognize any longer. You slap some water on your face to wash away the dust and slump forward with your hands on the edge of the sink. Nothing about this is right. The world just doesn’t make any sense anymore. + +You pound your fists against the top of the sink and then turn toward the door. You see a paper towel dispenser and grab a couple on your way out. + +When you reach the end of the short hall you turn toward the gym, but instead of walking that way you push against the steel bar with your back—feeling a twinge of pain as you do so—and step through into the sunlight. + +You have to get away from here. + + + +When you get back to the “secret place”, you’ve already decided to head West. You don’t have a choice any longer. You have to do this for Jane. And you have to do this now. It can’t wait. + +You begin carefully packing everything into the bag of covers. You dump the change jar into the bread wrapper to save space. You fill two of the screw-top bottles—and the root beer bottles, in which you have crammed wads of waxed paper that you found in the cabinets as makeshift corks, since you’ll be able to sell them somewhere along the way—with water. The last thing you pack is an old paring knife that has its very tip broken off. It fits perfectly in the ‘treasure chest’. + +You’ll leave as soon as it gets dark so no one sees you. Maybe there will be another train in the staging yard. If there isn’t, you’ll just keep on going until you do find one. +> Into the Night +You try to focus on staying between the tracks and not on the darkness that is slowly swallowing you. Every once in a while, the side of your foot glances off one metal rail or the other and you take a step more toward the center. You have to be careful not to turn your ankle since you can only feel your way over the unevenness of cross ties and gravel. + +There is no moon or even a single star in sky above you, but you can’t risk taking a look upward in case something should brush against you and you should need to suddenly run in the opposite direction. + +There is a fine mist in the air and every once in a while a small droplet smacks into your clammy skin making you wince. Your heart is sprinting, but your feet take their own sweet time. + +You have to make it as far as you can before the sun peeks over the horizon. You don’t think you’d be able to survive another beating. + + + +You hear a low, rumbling growl coming from all around you. You can feel it more than hear it. The skin behind your ears tingles and your neck hairs prickle. + +You spin around and around, swinging the bag like a baseball bat and desperately roar as loud as you can to scare off whatever it is that has you surrounded. Your tears burn your eyes and your heart tries to escape through your ears. + +It’s getting closer. + +You scream at the thing in the darkness and hear it reverberate back to you, growing louder and louder. Your feet will no longer obey and your skin has become so stiff that if you could somehow move it would probably rip wide open. + +You close your eyes and grit your teeth. Your whole face feels swollen. + +The rumble has become so loud now that you can feel it welling up from the ground and into your feet. You can’t even draw in breath anymore. + +A sudden trumpeting roar blasts from behind you and you spin around to see shining eyes in the blackness. They are so bright that you can barely even look at them. + +You turn on your heels and can see the tracks stretching out ahead of you. You run. + +The thing is getting closer and closer. You spot a ravine shrouded in blackness off to the side and dive for it with every ounce of your being. Gravel plows through your forearms up to your elbows and you strike the side of your head on something solid. + +It is on you now. The wind swirls all around you threatening to rip you from the ground. + +You flip over and shield yourself with the bag as the thing races past. Through the flashes of light in your vision you can make out a shuttering silhouette and a slow realization bubbles its way to the surface. + +It is no vile beast, but a train moving at breakneck speed. + +You roll over onto your belly and push yourself up to your knees. You can see the light on the front piercing its way through the night. You turn and look back toward the other end and can see red lights bringing up the rear. + +Your burning skin begins to gradually freeze as your breath slowly returns to you and your heartbeat softens and slows. + +You gently caress your gritty forearms and pluck tiny stones from the soft fleshy underside. + +You get back to your feet and climb the grade as the final car zooms by. In the dim glow, you can see the tracks clearly. After looking back to make sure there isn’t another one coming, you step back in the middle and continue on your way. + +You keep your eyes on the train until the tail light finally winks out of sight allowing the darkness to flood back in around you. + + + +You are exhausted. You’ve been walking all night and your muscles are stiff and aching—almost feverish. You need sleep, but the sky has only started to gray behind you. You can barely make out the ground around you, but still can’t see anything more distant. You’ll have to find some place that you won’t be discovered as soon as there is enough light for you to see by. + +The bandages are pulling at your skin from the middle of your back to halfway down your legs and the burning emanating from under them sends a jolt from the base of your scalp all the way to your feet. With every step, the bag you have slung over your shoulder pounds more pain through your body. + +It finally gets light enough that you can see. You spot a stand of high grass over by a barbed wire fence that will easily conceal you from sight. Not caring about snakes or whatever else might be lurking in there, you wade right into the middle of it and fall face down. You barely manage to pull the bag under your head before sleep takes you. + + + +You wake up with the bright sun on your face and it’s too unbearable to open your eyelids. You shield your face with your hand as you roll over onto your side and when your leg strikes the ground it burns like fire. + +You forget all about the burning brightness and look down at your leg. It is beet red all the way up to your cutoffs and starts again at your belly. Your whole front is sunburned and even lightly touching it makes you wince. + +You carefully shove yourself to your feet and look as far around you as you can see. Just beyond the pasture on the other side of the fence, the trees are thick and you can only see darkness within. There are no houses or roads within sight—only the train tracks. + +You are extremely thirsty so you pull one of the screw-top bottles from the sack and gulp down several swallows before picking up the sack and slinging it over your shoulder. You head back to the tracks and—after taking another look around—continue on. +> A New Normal +You’ve walked for most of the day—going off the embankment and crouching low whenever you spot a farmhouse, someone toiling away in their field or a car on a nearby dirt road—and the light is leaving fast when you hear yipping coming from behind you. + +When you turn to look, you see a pack of dogs. No, not dogs, because these are all gray. They don’t look as big as the ones in the movies, but they must be wolves! What else could they be out here in the wilderness? + +You quicken your pace and keep looking back at them over your shoulder. Even though they are definitely following you they don’t seem to be gaining. Maybe they’re waiting for it to get dark before they sneak up on you and attack. They can probably smell the dried blood on your bandages and want to eat you. + +You look around for somewhere to hide, but there isn’t any place. All the trees nearby are scraggly and you don’t really like the idea of trying to stay awake in a tree all night anyway so you keep moving. + +Before long you start to notice the stars coming out and the night insects are starting to come to life. You turn around to look at how far back the wolves are and can’t see any of them. + +Maybe they are sneaking around to ambush you or maybe they lost interest and moved off in a different direction. Either way, you quicken your pace a little more just to be safe. + +You happen to spot a long heavy stick at the bottom of the embankment and quickly rush down to get it. It is rather light and just a little longer than you are tall. It’s a perfect walking stick and will make a nice weapon in case the wolves decide to attack. + +Your weariness catches up to you. You have to stop every couple of miles to get off your feet and take a breather. The grassy embankment feels so cool and invigorating against your bare skin. You don’t dare stop for long or you’ll fall asleep for sure. Eventually, though, you do. + +Your sleep is disturbed by the train screaming by in the night, but you are so tired that all you do is roll over away from the sound. You don’t have the strength to even raise up to look at it. Then it is gone into the place where dreams live. + +When you wake up, it’s still full dark and you have no idea whether you only slept for a few minutes or for several hours. + +You decide to eat a few crackers and polish off your first bottle of water before you set out again. The bottle isn’t worth anything so you decide to save some weight and pitch it aside. Your leg muscles feel like blocks of wood from complete exhaustion and you have some trouble controlling them. + +You also take the time to carefully tear the tape from your back and legs. It’s been on so long that it feels as if it has grown into the skin. Most of the tenderness is gone, but there are still slimy scabs underneath. You can’t see them in the dark, but you can guess that they are all different shades from blue-gray to yellow-green like they were the last time your mom got really mad at you. + +After about an hour or so of walking you see the first rays of dawn on the horizon. There is a faint mist blanketing the field off to your left and a dark, dense thicket of trees to your right. Either place could be concealing all manner of things intent on doing you harm, but you don’t have the time or the energy to dwell on it. + +Mosquitoes whine all around your face and you can feel them lighting on your bare skin. It isn’t long before the itching begins driving you mad so you take to jogging in the hopes that they can’t keep up. It works for the most part, but in rays of the cresting sun you can see wispy clouds of them swarming off to the sides and on down the line. All you can hope for is to avoid the biggest share of them. + +The sun has barely cleared the horizon when up ahead, you see a train parked on the side track of this town’s staging yard. There are a couple of men milling around so you step over the rail and head down the short gravel slope to the ditch filled with stagnant water. There is a line of trees several yards beyond the slough which looks like the perfect cover to make your way up the line without being seen. + +You take off your flipflops to wade through the ankle deep muck and on the other side you drag your feet through the knee deep grass until the slime and mud are mostly wiped away before slipping them back on. + +Concealing yourself behind small trees, you make your way up to the train. The doors are closed on the few boxcars you see at this end so you keep moving until you find another short string. They too have their doors pulled shut so you keep moving. + +You finally near the front end and can see the engine idling beyond the switch on the main track. You can barely hear any other sounds over its rumble. So that you aren’t spotted by someone up there, you duck back behind the boxcars and make your way back toward denser cover. + +Since all the boxcars along its length appear to be locked up tight, you’ll either have to come up with some other place to board or else continue your journey on foot. + +There are several flatcars loaded with timbers and other things that are tightly packed and don’t offer any cover, a few with truck van trailers, but the ones that interest you most are two together with new farm implements chained down. Some of them appear high enough off the bed that you could squeeze under them where it would be hard for someone to see you unless they were really trying. +> From the Jaws of Death +You start to head over to one when you notice a pair of legs walking on the other side toward the back end of the train. You squat back down to wait until they are far enough away that you can make it over unseen, but you hear the engine rev and a couple of jerks later it is moving. + +You give it a few more seconds while you look for movement on the other side before getting up and running over to the flatcar. It is still moving slower than you can walk so you sling your walking stick and bag up on it before grabbing a chain to haul yourself up. You throw your leg over the deck and when you try to wriggle up it slips off. You try again and again as the train slowly picks up speed, but you no matter how hard you try to climb up you can’t get enough leverage with the train moving like this. + +You jump up to try and snag your stuff, but it’s just out of reach so you desperately look around for another stick or anything that would allow you to reach it. There is nothing but gravel so you give it one last try with everything you have. + +You make a run at it again and try to swing your weight up over the side, but fall and land hard on the rail. A shooting pain courses through your ribs making it hard to catch your breath. You lay there for a second to let the pain go away when you remember that the train is moving. You glance over and see the steel wheels are nearly upon you so you roll away as fast as you can, but you can’t move fast enough and they keep getting closer and closer. You try to scream and all that escapes is air. + +Just then, large hands clamp down on your shoulders and you feel yourself being yanked from the jaws of death. One of your flipflops slips off and you try to reach back and grab it, but it’s too late. Your heart is pounding and the world is swirling all around you. Everything within your field of vision has taken on a hellish red hue. + +Before you even know what is happening, those same hands pick you up and sling you on up on the deck. You tumble and roll until slamming into one of the farm implements brings you to a sudden stop. + +Stunned, you finally manage to look around to see what in the world just happened and you see a tall scraggly man in a old gray sports coat with leather elbows on the sleeves pulling himself up on the side of the car. + +“It’s a good thing I happened along or you’d have been cut clean in half. You would’ve definitely missed your train.” + +“Wh- what?” + +“I was waiting for the train to start moving before I hopped on when I saw you sneaking around out there,” he says, hooking a thumb over his shoulder toward the trees, “Didn’t look like you were gonna make it so I decided to give you a hand. Didn’t anyone ever tell you how dangerous it is to mess around with trains? You could get hurt or maybe even killed. If I hadn’t been here you’d be dead right now.” + +You stare at him in silence. + +“What’s a kid like you hopping a freight for, anyway?” + +“I have to get somewhere. It’s real important.” + +“It must be if you’re willing to risk your life for it,” he stares at you for a brief moment then continues “I guess since we’re going the in same direction, we might as well get to know each other. I’m Harvey.” + +You aren’t really sure you should be talking to a stranger let alone tell him your name, but he did just save your life and he’s standing there smiling at you with an eyebrow lifted expecting an answer. He doesn’t really look dangerous and he did help you get on the train so do you tell him the truth or do you lie? +> Tell the Truth +You reluctantly say “I’m Billy.” + +“Nice to meet ya, Billy. I guess we’re gonna be here a while so might as well find a spot to get comfortable.” He sits down between two of the implements—putting his back to one and props his foot up on the other—where he can’t be seen from the ground. + +You bring your bag over and find a nice comfy place out of view from the side. You sit down beside it—leaning on it with your elbow—with your walking stick laying across you lap while keeping a wary eye on Harvey. + +“I saw you a ways back down the line and can’t believe you made it this far. You’ve really covered some miles in the last couple of days.” + +“Yeah. It’s a long ways to where I’m going.” + +“Where’s that? If you don’t mind my asking.” + +You study his face. You’re still not sure if you can really trust him or not so you make up something on the spot. “I have to find my uncle in Arizona so I can live with him.” + +“Hope everything turns out okay for ya. I kinda like to keep moving. Don’t like to stay in one place too long. Figured I’d head for the coast since this area is mostly played out now. It’s not a bad place to Winter.” + +Your belly starts growling so you reach into your bag and pull out what’s left of the pack of crackers you’ve been eating on for the last couple of days. You only have one more pack left and they’re mostly crushed, but you won’t mind that a bit when you get hungry again. You stuff one in your mouth and grab a few more for good measure. You consider putting the pack back in the bag, but decide you ought to share so you offer Harvey the last of the package which he quickly accepts. + +“Thank ya,” he grins, “I haven’t had anything on my stomach since early yesterday.” + +You both eat in silence and after a while you drift off to sleep to the sounds of the clacking rails. +> A Hobo's Life +You are awakened by a gentle shake to your shoulder and see that the stars are out. + +“It’s time to get up. We’re slowing down and the train might be stopping up ahead. We need to get off before it does.” + +“Huh?” + +“There’s no telling what they’ll do if they catch us riding their train. Sometimes they just run you off and sometimes they call the police.” + +You stand up, pick up your bag with your free hand and stand next to Harvey at the side of the flatcar. Still wiping the sleep from your eyes you suddenly think about the jagged gravel that you know is down there where you must jump, but can’t see in this light. + +“I don’t know if I can jump. I lost my flipflop back when we got on.” + +“You need a pair of shoes. We’ll worry about that later. It’s not that far to the ground so you should be just fine. Just try not to land too hard on your bare foot.” + +You nod, but it’s dark enough that Harvey wouldn’t be able to see it. + +“Okay,” he says, “time to go.” Then he steps off the side and disappears. + +You take a deep breath and jump as far away from the train as you can so you don’t get run over. The shock to your knee shoots a bolt of pain through your leg, but it goes away as soon as your bare foot touches down on the jagged chunks of rock. You grit your teeth even though it isn’t as bad as you thought it would be. + +You sling your bag over your shoulder and—leaning hard on your walking stick—limp back toward where Harvey jumped off. It isn’t long before you find him since he’s walking up to find you. + +“Are you okay?” + +“Yeah, but it’s hard to walk bare-footed on these sharp rocks.” + +“Here, climb up on my back until we find softer ground for you to walk on,” he says, squatting down on one knee in front of you. + +You fumble for grip because you don’t have enough hands to hang on. + +“Let me have that,” Harvey says, snatching the stick from your grip before you even know what is happening. + +“Hey, I need that!” + +“Not right now, you don’t. You can have it back later.” + +A short time later, you come to a dirt access road and Harvey sets you down. He’s bent over huffing and puffing and it takes him a while to get his breath back. It’s obvious that he’s older than he looks. The lines in his face have deepened and there are shadows under his eyes. Eventually he catches his breath and straightens up. + +“There has to be a better way,” he says, “Whatcha got in the bag? Anything you could use as a shoe or wrap your foot up with until something better comes along?” + +“Just some covers and postcards.” + +“Let’s have a look at them covers.” + +As you pull the blanket from the bag, the bottles clink together. + +“What’s that?” + +“Just some old bottles that I keep water in.” + +“Let’s have one. I’m parched.” + +You don’t want to risk losing one of the trade-in bottles so you pull out the other screw-top one and hand it to him. He gulps down half of it before cutting his eye at you and stops himself. You can tell that he wants more, but he screws the lid back on and passes it back to you. + +“Thanks, kid. I needed that.” + +You take a couple of swallows for yourself before putting it back in the bag. The bottles clink and clank against each other so you roll the bag up tight against them to keep them from breaking. + +You do your best to tie the wrapped blanket around your foot, but can’t make it stay on so Harvey takes over and by the time he’s done you look like you’re wearing a golf bag on your leg. You feel like Frankenstein when you walk with your leg stiff like this, but it beats jabbing your foot on sharp things. + +“I guess we oughta find some food. What do you feel like, kid, steak or lobster?” chuckling to himself. + +You just stare back at him. + +“That looks like a fine place to eat,” he says, pointing through the trees to a small house. “I hope we don’t need a reservation.” + +You follow him through the trees curious as to how he’s going to get someone to give him food. + +You’re at his heels when he raps on the door and as he steps back he nearly runs you over. When no one comes to the door, he knocks a little louder the second time. + +“Doesn’t look like anyone’s home,” he says, turning toward the steps and leans against the railing. He stands there looking around the yard for a few minutes before walking over to a short board fence and hopping over. He snatches a couple of ripe tomatoes off the vine and pulls up a couple of decent sized carrots. + +“This oughta hold us a while. We don’t want to get too greedy.” + +As you and he walk down the tracks eating your measly meal you can’t help but feel a little guilty. It wasn’t you that stole the food, but you are eating it nonetheless. It’s so delicious that you can’t help yourself. +> Christmas in July +You’ve been walking for a couple hours and things look eerily familiar when up ahead you spot the old trestle bridge that you saw when you were with Jane. + +“Too bad we don’t have any fishing gear,” Harvey muses, “or we could be eating catfish tonight.” You look over at him and then follow his gaze to a small group of people fishing on far bank of the muddy river. “Maybe they could spare a couple of hooks and some line so we can make cane poles.” + +“Do you think they might let us have some?” + +“There’s no harm in asking. C’mon, let’s go see.” + +You follow him as fast as your stiff-legged limp can take you. He stops at the bridge for about a minute looking up and down the tracks until he’s satisfied that there’s no train on its way, then walks at nearly his walking pace across. + +You look down at the muddy, swirling water and wonder what might be lurking under its surface. You don’t really like high places and wish there was another way around. After gritting your teeth, you step out onto the first tie. + +You have trouble keeping up and have only made it halfway across when he reaches the other side. Luckily, you make it across without falling between the cross ties and aren’t surprised by a speeding train. + +“You look like you need a breather,” he says, “Why don’t you go sit in the shade over there while I go talk to these people.” + +You almost protest, but decide it might be better if you’re seen by as few people as possible. Even though you are with an adult now, there’s no telling what might happen and you certainly don’t want to be taken back to your mom. There’s no telling what she might do to you this time. + +You walk over and find a comfy spot and sit down. While you wait, you pull out your map and look for the highway number that you saw when you were near here with Jane. You were focusing your attention on Harvey this time and didn’t notice it this time. It doesn’t look very far away from home on the map, but the deputy had said it was eighty miles and eighty miles is a long way. + +You put the map back in the ‘treasure chest’ and lean back—soaking up the coolness of the shade. Your eyes start to glaze over so you sit up and give yourself a couple of light slaps to make the sleepiness go away. + +You’ve been sitting here a long time and start to wonder what’s taking Harvey so long to get back. It shouldn’t take this long to ask for fishing line and a couple of hooks. Maybe he decided not to come back. Maybe he figured it would be better not to have to travel with a kid. + +Getting to your feet and picking up the bag, you decide you should at least take a peek and see if he’s anywhere to be seen. You walk about halfway back to the river when you hear a hushed “Hey, psst” from behind you. You turn around and see Harvey stepping out of the trees so you walk back over to him. + +He’s got a rolled up paper bag under his arm and is grinning at you as he motions for you to follow him into the tree-line. “They were nicer than I ever would’ve expected. Look at all the stuff they were willing to part with.” He pulls out a brand-new package of treble hooks and a whole roll of bright blue fishing line. “Looks like we might be eating fish tonight. And here’s something for you,” he says, pulling out a rolled up green shirt and flipping it open to reveal a pair of pink and white tennis shoes. + +You crinkle your nose. You don’t want to wear girl’s shoes. + +He smirks and says “Don’t worry. After you wear ‘em a couple days, nobody’ll know the difference. Oh, and this here shirt is for you, too.” + +He helps you untie the blanket and repack your bag. He doesn’t open the ‘treasure chest’ and only packs it in tight with everything else. You mentally let out a sigh of relief. If stealing stuff from a house didn’t bother him, what would he have done if he’d found your money? It makes you wonder if those people actually gave him this stuff or if he stole it, too. + +The shoes are a bit loose on you, but you lace them up good and tight and they only flop a little bit when you walk in them. Your put your lone flip-flop in the bag in case you might need it later and notice that the bag is considerably smaller now which will make it much easier to carry. Harvey must’ve had a lot of practice packing stuff since he moves around so much. + +“We should head off down the river that way to do our fishing. We don’t wanna be too close to other people fishing if we expect to catch anything. You ready to go?” + +You nod. + +“Then let’s go catch us some supper.” Harvey steps into the trees on the other side of the tracks and you follow close behind. It’s been so long since you wore a pair of shoes that you forgot how good they can feel and the branches raking your sunburned chest as walk through the brush doesn’t bother you quite so much now that you have a shirt as an extra barrier of protection. + +It seems like you’ve been walking in the woods for a long time and you begin to think that you might be lost again like what happened when you were with Jane. Harvey stops several times to listen and look around like he doesn’t know where he’s going. You are about to ask him if you might be lost when he steps out on a bluff overlooking the river. He crane’s his neck to look upstream and can’t see beyond the bend. + +“This looks like a good spot,” he says. +> Gone Fishin' +Both of you put your stuff down and Harvey pulls out an old pocket knife and flips out a blade that looks to have been sharpened way too many times. He walks around looking until he finds a couple of straight enough saplings to whack into poles and ties line and hooks to the end. + +“We don’t have any worms or grasshoppers,” you say. + +He raises an eyebrow at you. “We won’t need ‘em.” You look at him a little puzzled as he reaches into the neck of his shirt and rips off the tag, then does the same to yours. “Here’s the best starter bait in the world.” + +You shake your head. What fish would want to eat cloth? Maybe he doesn’t even know how to fish since he doesn’t know what fish like to eat. + +He stabs a hook through each square white piece and hands you your pole before dropping his line in the water. You move a few yards down the bank and find a place where you can sit with your feet hanging over. Might as well get comfortable since you are going to be here a while. + +You drop your line in and lean back against a tree. You notice that your back doesn’t hurt nearly as bad as it did. It still itches a little, but you are careful not to scratch it so you don’t open the scabs and start it bleeding all over again. You look up at the clouds floating by and realize that it has been a long time since you took the time to really stop and look around at anything. You find yourself swinging your feet and whistling softly through your teeth—just like you used to do when your dad took you fishing before he and your mom got a divorce. Everything was perfect back then and everyone was always so happy. You long to be back there because now the whole world has gone crazy and you’re having a hard time just keeping up. + +You don’t notice the slight tugging at your line, but when it is nearly jerked from your grasp you yank on it with too much force. You know better than to do that. That’s how fish get away. + +You look down at your line and see a tiny perch flopping on the end of it. You can hardly believe your eyes. The little fish must’ve really thought that your shirt tag was something to eat. “I got one! I caught a fish!” + +“Shh. Not so loud. You don’t want to scare off all the other fish, do you?” Harvey says, craning his neck to look upriver. “Bring it over here and let me see it.” + +You do as he asks. “It’s only a little one so we gotta throw it back.” + +He shakes his head. “This one’s gonna be our catfish bait.” He worries the hook out and guts the tiny little fish. After baiting your hooks with its innards, he hands you back your pole and pitches his line out as far as it will go. + +You walk back to your spot and throw your line back in. You remember your dad telling you that you have to turn the little fish loose so they can grow up to be big fish. If you didn’t, there wouldn’t be any big fish for other people to catch. You look back over at Harvey and wonder if he really has any idea what he’s doing after all. + +After spending the whole day fishing, there’s only one channel cat and a couple of medium perches to show for it. Harvey did end up throwing several small fish back so it eased your mind about that somewhat. When it came time to clean and cook the fish, he showed you how to tie a fish to the end of a forked stick and stake it on with smaller ones sharpened into little skewers so it wouldn’t fall off in the campfire. You are basically roasting them like marshmallows which was kind of neat and fun. It reminded you of the camp-outs you had with your parents when you were little. + +To round out the meal, you sift through the shattered crackers and pick out the biggest chunks. Harvey eats most of the fish and crackers and before he is through you feel like you wouldn’t be able to hold in even one more bite if you wanted to. + +You collapse into a heap and begin thinking about how almost the entire day was wasted. You could be a long way from here right now—even if you had to walk to do it. Sure, you needed the rest, but not as much as you needed to cover the ground. You’ll have to try to make up for all this lost time tomorrow and if that means going on alone then so be it. Getting to the Grand Canyon for Jane is the most important thing. It’s the only thing that matters. +> Life on the Road +You wake up before the sun and begin readying your pack for the road ahead. Harvey occasionally grunts in his sleep and you don’t dare wake him unless it is a real emergency. That’s just the way it is with grownups. + +When you get tired of waiting, you decide to throw your line in the murky water. It isn’t that you are hungry, but you are nearly out of food and if you had a fish to tide you over in the afternoon it would save time—and the hassle—in the long run. You find a decent looking gut that isn’t too big or too small to skewer onto your hook and pitch your line out as far as it will go. + +After more than an hour, you still haven’t had even a nibble and are about to give up when the sun finally peeks over the horizon. The warmth is overwhelming and the world around you sort of melts away. It is so comforting to just stand here and bask in the rays of the new day. + +Just then, your pole snaps and you are startled back into reality. “Ahhh!” Something big has tied onto your line and with the way it is thrashing, you don’t know if you’ll be able to haul it in. You dig in with your heels and strain with all you have, but the mud is slick and you are being dragged toward the water. The surface opens up in a geyser revealing the biggest catfish you have ever seen. It is a sleek and silky, bluish-gray catfish and you can only stand there while the spray engulfs you in slow motion. + +“Wha- What’s going on?!” you hear from behind you along with quite a ruckus. Harvey scrambles up beside you and is still rubbing the bleariness out of his eyes when it finally dawns on him that you need help so he reaches out and snags the end of your pole. “This guy’s enough to feed an entire army!” + +By the time all the chunks have cooked the sun is already high. You’ve lost so much time already that when you finally do head off down the tracks you have to continually slow down to let Harvey catch up even though your paces are two to his one. You try not to even stop to rest when he suggests it, but he’s not as young as you are so you have to give him the occasional breather. + +The miles tend to run together and then the days. It’s a long way between towns and by the time you finally get within sight of one that is little more than a far away dot, you’ve long since eaten the last morsel of fish. Harvey has pointed out a few edible plants along the way—none of which are very appetizing, but they don’t kill you or even make you sick—which is better than having nothing at all on your stomach. He shows you how to skin prickly pears so you can eat them, but they are so bland that you can only stand to chew them until all the moisture is gone and then spit out the remnants when he’s not looking. + +It’s about midday when you run up on another farmhouse about a half a mile from the tracks. + +“Wait here,” Harvey says, “I’ll be back in a jiff.” + +You watch as he crosses the over-grazed pasture and strides up to the front door. After a couple minutes, you see him disappear around the side only to return a few minutes later cradling something in his arms. When he gets close enough, you can see that what he’s carrying is eggs. + +“I got us a real treat, boy.” + +You look up at him and give a half-smile. “I haven’t had eggs in a long, long time. How are we gonna cook ‘em? We don’t have a pan or anything.” + +“Leave that to me. Where there’s a will—there’s a way.” + +After a short ways, he picks up an old tin can and peers into it while holding it up to the sun. “This’ll do nicely. You got any of that water left?” + +“Yeah.” You reach into the bag and pull a bottle out. “It’s the last one.” + +“It’ll be more than enough. We’ll get some more the next place we run on to.” + +He steps off to the side of the tracks and kicks an area bare with his foot. He starts piling dried grass, twigs and whatever else he finds and then lights it. You quickly run around gathering more bits of dried wood and before you know it, the can is boiling away so he pulls it off to the side a couple inches—enough that it can still get heat, but not so much that it loses all of its water. Then, the two of you sit back and watch it for a few minutes. + +“That oughta be enough.” He pulls his hand inside his sleeve and uses the cuff like a hot pad. After dumping the water on the fire, he kicks it around a little bit to make sure it is completely out. “We’ll let these cool off while we walk and come supper time we’ll have us a real treat.” + +You don’t really want to wait, but you know he’s right so you do your best to put it out of your mind and think about other things. + +All at once, you notice that there are suddenly more houses around. You didn’t even realize how much you’d traveled since you first saw this town as a far off speck. + +“With any luck, we’ll be able to catch a train out of this bump in the road. I don’t think my feet can take too many more miles.” + +“We need to fill up the bottles with water.” + +“We oughta find a milk jug or two instead. Those glass bottles you got are empty weight. If you’re going to be lugging something around, it oughta be more water.” + +You nod in agreement. +> Wrench in the Cogs +Crossing the street to a gas station, you spot a police car coming toward you from down the street. You step up your pace and put Harvey between you and it. You look around for a place to hide, but there isn’t anything close. You prepare yourself in case he stops, but all you can hope for is to run as fast as you can and hope that you can get away. You let out a sigh as it goes on by and the officer behind the wheel doesn’t even look over at you. + +Stepping through the open door, you are hit by a blast of not quite so hot air. A big shop fan rests against the back wall and is aimed directly at the door. A nice looking man in thick glasses and stained coveralls sits just to the right of it and has his nose buried in a newspaper. + +“Ahem,” Harvey clears his throat to get the guy’s attention. + +“Howdy,” says the attendant, leaning forward so that the legs of his folding chair touch the floor, “What can I do for you?” + +“We were hoping to get some water. Drinking water. And maybe a jug or something to put it in.” + +You can see the disappointment on the attendant’s face as he draws his lips back, but it quickly shifts into a forced smile. “Sure thing. I think there might be one around back by the dumpster.” + +“Thanks,” Harvey says as he heads back out the front door. + +You hang back and stand there looking at the guy with a sheepish smile until you finally build up enough nerve to blurt out “Do you buy bottles?” + +“Sure thing, little man. You got some you wanna trade in?” + +“Uh huh.” You dig through you bag and pull out the two root beer bottles. You stand there looking down at them and remember sharing them with Jane. You knew you’d have to sell them eventually, but now you aren’t sure that you really want to. + +“Just the two, then?” + +You wipe the film from your eyes that has started to develop and look up at him. You nod. + +“I think I have it right here—” he says, digging in his pocket. “Yeah, here you go. Six cents. You can put ‘em over there with those,” he points after handing you the coins. + +From the little wire rack by the front door, you grab a couple plastic tubes of peanuts. They are marked twenty-five cents and you think you have more than enough in change. You pull out the plastic bread wrapper and start counting out pennies on the only bare spot on the counter. The attendant watches you and drums his fingers impatiently. + +“That’s it.” + +You look up and see him sliding the pile off into his hand. “That’s not fifty cents.” + +“Yeah, it is. You must’ve just miscounted.” + +You grin up at him. You’d only given him a little over thirty cents so either he is really nice and doing you a favor or else he just doesn’t want all your pennies. He smiles warmly back. + +You quickly twist the bag of money and shove it way down deep in your pocket before Harvey comes back. He seems that he’s on your side so far, but if he can steal from random strangers he might just take from you, too. You drop the peanuts into your bag for later in case you have to go too long without food. + +You’re leaning with your back against the metal door frame when Harvey returns with two jugs. He and the attendant talk briefly before the two of you head around the side of the building to the faucet and fill the jugs. You have a huge lump in your throat and barely even take notice of anything around you for quite a little while. Even bending down and taking giant gulps straight from the spigot doesn’t make it go down. It just sort of hangs there. The last thing you do is pitch the last whiskey bottle in the dumpster before the two of you head back toward the tracks. + + + +It’s several hours before a train comes into view. You hear the blasting horn from miles away and you sit staring in the direction of the blast. It is going the wrong way, however, so you have to keep waiting. You and Harvey have found yourselves a nice comfy spot in the shade of a metal building in some scrub brush where no one can see you. + +Harvey has been leaning with his back against a small tree and every once in a while he lets out a snort that would wake any normal person from a sound sleep. Not him, though. Even though he’s had much more rest than you, he still looks like an old, old man. His gray doesn’t end at his hairline, but keeps going all the way down his face subcutaneously. + +Sometime before dark and just when you finally feel like you could stand some sleep yourself, you hear a long, blaring horn from the opposite direction. + +“That’s our ride,” says Harvey, opening his eyes and stretching to get the kinks out. + +You watch as the engine finally enters the yard, but it keeps going and doesn’t slow any more than a fast walking pace. Harvey cranes his neck and strains to try and see further down its length. There are no boxcars. All you can see are flatcars and hoppers. A long stretch of flatcars are loaded with sea containers probably bound for the coast and don’t offer any space at all around them, but one of the last cars is only half full at the back. + +Harvey trots toward it and you dash around him. After lofting your bag over the side, he grabs you around your middle and hefts you up. He tosses his coat and the water jugs at your feet before trotting up to the very front where there is a step. + +“Hey! Get away from there!” you hear coming from the tail end of the train. “That’s private property!” + +You duck into a corner made by the slightly mismatched cargo containers and watch as Harvey takes a step backward. He looks up at you as the train whisks you by and turns away from the tracks. You peek around the container to see two men rush up to him. They take him by the arms and lead him back across the tracks. One of them is talking on a walkie-talkie. What are they going to do to him? + +Did they see you? You have no idea. If they did, they might call ahead to stop the train and then what would you do? +> Go back for Harvey +You shove Harvey’s coat into your bag and wait until the yard is out of sight before jumping off. The train has picked up a little speed and you end up rolling headlong in the gravel, but only end up with a couple of small scrapes. There will be other trains or maybe Harvey will have another idea. You can’t just bear to take his stuff and go on without him. + +By the time you get back to the train yard there is no one in sight. You don’t know what to do. You can’t just start walking around town looking for him. What if that cop sees you? He’ll take you back to your Mom and after what she did last time—well, that’s just too awful to even think about. + +You hang around the train yard for a little while being sure to keep out of sight until it is full dark and then walk over to the street where the gas station is. You don’t see any sign of Harvey. In fact, the street is completely deserted so you head back to the tracks. + +There’s a strange sense of deja vu as you walk between the rails. It’s not quite as scary this time, but things are still creeping around out there just out of sight. You wish that you still had your stick with you. You must’ve left it back at the river. That’s the last place you remember seeing it. + +About a mile or so away from town, you see a small cinder block building with a light on the front of it above a blue door out in the middle of a field and just behind it there’s an earthen dam. It looks like it might be a good place to stay the night. + +You walk over to it and try to open the door, but it’s locked so you go around to the side where it’s dark and slump down against the wall. + +You are getting rather hungry so you reach in your bag to get a package of peanuts when you remember the eggs. Too bad Harvey isn’t around to enjoy them. You take out two and take your time eating them. You fiddle with the shells—not wanting to go to sleep out here in the open, but there is a little light to see by so you don’t feel quite as skittish—and end up crumbling them into tiny bits only slightly bigger than sand before finally casting them out into the wiry grass. + +You aren’t sitting there long before the day catches up with you and you drift off to sleep. + + + +You wake up before the sun and find it right nippy out so you put on Harvey’s coat. Your legs are stiff and there’s a crick in your back. Your arms feel like they are about to fall off from carrying the extra weight of the water jugs. There has to be something you can do about it. You can’t keep juggling all this stuff and expect to last very long. + +At long last, the sun finally pops up and the dew steams off the tracks. It won’t be long until it gets warm enough that you won’t need the coat anymore and that gives you an idea. + +You pull your arms out of the sleeves and tie a jug to each one—letting them flop in front of you while you keep the coat on like a cape. It’s not pretty, but it frees up your hands so that all you have to worry about is holding onto the bag. + +It isn’t long before you polish off the rest of the eggs and while getting them out, you find the hooks and line. With any luck you’ll run into another river or maybe a lake somewhere up ahead. + +You trudge along for mile after mile as the sun creeps steadily overhead and just hangs there baking you. You keep wishing you had some kind of hat when you see something between the tracks up ahead that looks just like a dusty, smashed cowboy hat. + +You pick up your pace and are nearly on it when it suddenly moves! It’s a snake! And it’s big one. It has a pattern of criss-crossing lines along its back and starts to make a rattling noise. You drop the bag as you fall backward. You see it draw back its head as you crab-walk the heck out of there as fast as you can. + +When you are a safe distance away, you get back to your feet. What are you going to do now? You have to get your bag back, but it’s much too close to it now. + +You look around and the only thing there is is the crushed limestone gravel. Perfect! You pick up a couple handfuls of the biggest chunks and start lobbing them at it to drive it away. Every single stone—whether it be a hit or miss—is a hit because the rattler strikes them when they get close. Every single time! And then it shakes off the impact kind of and gets ready for the next one. Before long the bottom of its mouth is kind of drooping to one side and its head is mangled, but it hangs in there. You ease a little closer being careful to stay well out of range and start pelting it with everything you have until it is little more than a pile of mush. It finally slinks over the rail and slithers into the sparse grass where it disappears completely. + +You creep up and pick up your bag giving that area a wide berth before continuing on your way. +> Any Port in the Storm +You only now realize how late it is getting. It seems like only a couple hours ago the sun was directly overhead and now there are not even shadows at all anymore. You look around for some place to hole up for the night and the only place you see is a small grove of trees in the corner of the field some distance from the tracks. There are no people or animals within sight and you debate whether you should head over there or keep going and hope for a better spot to present itself. + +Just then, a loud crack nearly knocks you off your feet and everything around you is immediately thrown into high contrast. You duck instinctively, even though you are a second too late. + +You look up to see the sky overhead is near black and brimming with static. The horizon behind you fades swiftly to nothing in a dingy gray curtain. You are about to get soaked! + +Nature has made your decision for you. You don’t want to be anywhere near trees during an electrical storm. And you certainly don’t want to be standing on these metal tracks higher than all the ground around you for as far as you can see. + +You can see a dirt road about a half a mile ahead. Perhaps you’ll find some cover when you reach it. In any case, you’ll be off the tracks and will no longer be a sitting duck for lightning strikes. + +You run. + +As you near the crossroad, you look both ways for any sign of shelter and see a bent over mail box at the end of what appears to be a driveway so you veer in that direction cutting across the ditch before even reaching the road. + +There is a stitch in your side, but you keep moving. Thunder is clapping all around you and a sound like running horses is growing louder and louder. + +You turn into the driveway without slowing down and find it nearly overgrown down the center. It is canted downhill and looks more like an old wash than something carved out by human hands. Only vague tire wear paths along each side show that it was once used. The spindly saplings on either side stretch out and their branches knit together overhead throwing the path into unnatural darkness. Your stomach lurches at the prospect of having to venture down such a lane, but you don’t have much choice and hope that there is still some form of shelter when you reach the end of it. + +As you run along weaving back and forth through the tall grass and weeds down the center of the lane from one worn path to the other to avoid the darkest areas and shrubbery that threatens to conceal any manner of creature, you hope that something isn’t lying in wait just out of your vision—to trip you up or is crouched and ready to pounce. + +The path finally widens into a clearing and with it your spirits—for across the unkempt yard you see an old derelict shotgun house whose roof has collapsed in at the back. It might not be much to look at, but it will definitely serve its purpose to keep you dry while you weather the storm that has just now caught up to you. + +Snow white stones pummel the ground around and in front of you and will soon tear their way through the spindly branches overhead so you have no choice but to run the gauntlet and hope that you can make it to the cover on the other side. With giant strides, you cover the ground with ice pelting you from above and ricocheting off of your shoulders and arms—stinging as they bounce high and away—and sure to leave welts the size of goose eggs. A couple or three times a stone smacks into your head and your vision goes fuzzy, but you are too focused on your goal to give it much thought or to succumb to the blinding pain. + +Finally, you spring up onto the gabled porch and dart through the framed hole in the wall that once supported a door. Everything is shrouded in a dim gloom and there is a mustiness that permeates the place. You don’t see signs that anyone has been in this place for possibly years. You set your bag against the wall by the door so you can look around. + +Beyond the front room is a short hall on the left that leads into a darkened room. As you make your way down it, you come to a wood panel door with cracked and peeling white paint that has greened slightly with age midway and see another a little further on with a more yellowed tinge to it. Both are standing wide open and you can see only darkness in the slits between them and the door frame. + +Inside the first room you see the remnants of a mattress leaning against the far wall partially covering a window whose muntins hold only shards and fragments of turquoise shaded glass still trapped by its web of caulk. It was probably placed there to prevent the room from being damaged by weather or overrun with critters when the first of its lights had been knocked out. The bed frame is still in the corner and the pile next to its head was most likely a nightstand that didn’t fare too well with time. A pile of debris layers the floor of the built-in closet. It was undoubtedly shirts and dresses and things once upon a time and has become shredded by moths, rodents and mildew until it could no longer cling on to the wire hangers still suspended on the bar. + +You wrestle the door away from the wall enough to peek behind and find nothing at all there save cobwebs and decades of dust. You shove it back against the wall and step into the room for a more thorough examination. + +Still hanging from a crooked nail in the closet, you find a narrow leather dress belt. You bend and wrench it and find that it still has life left in it. It could come in handy sometime, so you buckle it to its tail and sling it over your head—letting it dangle at your hip like a sash. There are a few other things like a brass ash tray that’s tarnished black with age, but you can’t imagine a use for it and it would only weigh you down. + +You check the next door and see that behind it is a tiled bathroom. There isn’t much of value in here, but as you are about to leave you spot a new vinyl shower curtain still in its wrapper. It sounds a bit crunchy when you bend the package, but it might still be good enough to keep you dry if you get caught in a sudden downpour. + +The back room is the kitchen, but you can’t get through it or even tell what might be in there since the roof has collapsed and draped the ceiling over whatever might’ve once been in here. It doesn’t look too safe to even go near so you head back to the front room where you seat yourself by the open doorway and snack on a few peanuts. + +The storm outside is raging and seems to be growing more violent with every passing second. At least you found a dry place to weather it. You might as well try to get some rest since it looks like you’re going to be here a while so you draw the coat up as tightly as you can and slump your back against the wall. +> Ghosts From the Past +Sleep doesn’t come easily with all the thunderclaps. And you keep seeing movement with each flash of lightning. Sometimes it’s down the dark hallway and sometimes through one of the windows. Each time you spin your head in that direction it is already gone—whatever it is. + +You’d move to a better angle to see everything, but it would only put you at a disadvantage. If you move even a foot to either side, something could grab you through a window and if you move over to the far wall, the hallway would be at your back. As it is now, something could reach through and grab you from the doorway so you draw your feet under you and are poised to spring away. + +Something is scraping around in the kitchen now. You can barely make it out above the howl of the wind, but it is there. You still can’t make anything out through the darkness—which only deepens with each strobe from the storm. + +Something is watching you. You slowly turn your head to one side to see out of the windows along that wall and only see blackness. Your hands are all sweaty so you try to wipe them off on your shirt, but it is still damp and doesn’t do much good at all. Lightning flashes overhead and you can see that there’s nothing outside the windows. + +You slowly pivot your head toward the windows on the opposite wall and notice how much blacker the room has become. Your ears begin to burn and prickle. You don’t dare make any sudden movement. You hear the ambient rumble emanating from all around you with only slight variances every now and again. What happened to all the lightning? Why is it taking so long? + +Then it is suddenly and briefly daylight outside and you can see that the windows are empty. Does it know when the flashes will come and only hide until it gets dark again? + +Something moves in front of you! It is only a black shape against the darkness and you can see it getting taller—as if it is getting to its feet. Your legs won’t work and your chest feels heavy. You can’t see its face, but can feel the too wide grin creeping slowly across it. Its eyes burn into you though you cannot see them. + +You can see more of them writhing in background, waiting. They slither this way and that, but aren’t drawing any closer. + +The thing is still just black on black, but it is drawing ever nearer as it glides toward you. It is getting larger and larger. You can feel it reaching its long bony talons out toward you and its shriveled lips part open. + +Don’t worry. No one ever comes here. This place is ‘bandoned. + +You nearly jump out of your skin and your eyes snap open. Was it a only dream or did you actually just hear those words? + +You rapidly swivel your head back and forth trying to get a handle on where it is. All you can see is blackness that goes gray with each heartbeat. The rumble outside has become more distant and there are no longer any lightning flashes to illuminate the room. You pick up your bag and hold it in front of you as a makeshift shield. + +Get that little BASTARD! + +You are on your feet and running through the night in the direction that you believe the driveway is. It is so dark that you can’t see your hand in front of your face and you can only hope that you don’t slam into a tree or anything. The jugs of water are beating against your thighs with every step. Your eyes burn and tears stream down your cheeks. + +You better run you little BITCH! + +You run like the devil is after you because it most certainly is. With each step, you slog through the ankle deep water. You can hear it slosh and spray all around you. You expect you foot to drop into a hole or get stuck in the mud, but find solid footing among the submerged grass and weeds. You have your arm outstretched ahead of you to help deflect anything in your path, but there is nothing. The grassy slough gives way to solid ground—possibly a road—and you turn back in the direction you believe the tracks are in. You run and run until you run yourself completely out of packed ground and find yourself surrounded by dense grass. You no longer have anywhere to go but down. + +You fall in a heap attempting to stifle your wheezing sobs and clinging to the bag for dear life. The pounding in your ears blocks out all other sound and you wouldn’t know if something was coming up on you in the blackness—no matter how much racket it was making. + +Eons pass and you finally see the first twinkle among the clouds. The sky slowly withdraws its veil letting more and more tiny lights shine through. All around you there is a comforting bluish glow. The grass seems to be lit from within and it feels like you can see for miles and miles—as if you are in some supernatural sea. The serenity seeps into your soul and your previous terror is completely replaced with awe and wonder. + +The sun spills over the horizon and washes across the landscape and you are momentarily blinded by the glint of steel. The tracks are but a short distance away. You must have turned and run along beside them in your panic. A great double rainbow cinches the whole world together and everything is suddenly new again. You feel like you can take the entire universe on single handed. + +You pick yourself up and sling the bag over your shoulder and once again hit the rails. +> Train Wrangler +After a day and a half, you come within sight of a town. It is just getting dark and the street lights are beginning to glow orange as far as the eye can see. This is no ordinary town—it stretches out for miles and is already giving off a glow comparable to that of the setting sun. + +Another track stretching off into the far yonder joins with yours and up ahead you can see yet another. They cling to each other and swap back and forth between switches. There are trains up ahead—some coming and some going—and beyond that a vast highway arcs in perpetual leap from one side of this river of rails to the other. + +You make your way over to the far side to keep out of sight of the headlamps of the oncoming trains and follow the tracks for nearly an hour—careful to stay with the majority as they snake their way westward—doing your best to not get sidetracked. + +Up ahead and on the same side of the arteries of tracks as you you see a train just sitting there alongside a string of small warehouses and aimed in the right direction. You can hear the engine reverberating and there are bright lights on tripods scattered all around. There are some flatcars with men busy loading large crates onto them using forklifts from the loading dock and in the gloom between them and the engine is a string of boxcars. You can see from here that their doors are wide open. If only you could make it inside one without being spotted. + +You sneak up behind the metal buildings and then through the gap between until you are right across from the darkest one and watch the men carefully for your opening. The door is only a few inches higher than the platform so you won’t have any trouble getting inside. You only have to wait for the right moment. + +After the crates have been chained down and the forklifts have gone away, the men start taking the lights down one by one and you hear the engine slowly rev up. You’ll have to time this just right. + +Luck is on your side. There is no one in sight when the train starts inching forward and you make your dash. You make your way as quickly between the slatted crates and the wall as you can to the front of the car where you find just enough crawl space to conceal yourself and your stuff. + +The smell is overpowering and your mouth begins to water uncontrollably. The crates are packed full with cantaloupes and you haven’t eaten anything since the remainder of peanuts you had last night. You are famished! + +You don’t even bother with getting the knife out of the ‘treasure chest’. You just reach in and punch a hole in one with your fist. You pull out handful after handful of slimy goodness and cram it into your mouth. It’s so dark that you can’t even see it, but you know how light and orange it must be. You’ll definitely be filling your belly this night. The thought strikes you that you could take a couple along with you for good measure when you leave the train so while you’re filling your gullet you also pry off enough of the slats to pull out a couple of good sized ones and pack them in the blanket in your bag. + +When you’re finally lulled to sleep by the clacking rails, you are returned to the night you and Jane spent on that train and all the plans you and she had made. Only this time, the two of you are on your way to see the Grand Canyon and are without a care in the world. She gives you a huge grin and throws her arms around you—planting a big kiss on your cheek—and hugging you for all you are worth. + +The day comes much too soon and you stagger over to the open doorway to relieve yourself. You stand there and marvel at how far you can see. Snaking its way through a long valley is a river so blue that it makes your heart stop. On both sides it is lush with trees and you spot a large flock of birds winding and twisting like dust devils above the dense foliage. All is right with the world. You know you are going to make it just fine. +> Where the West Begins +After the long slow grade up from the river bottom, you find yourself in an entirely different landscape. The closest thing to trees are the tumbleweeds attempting to go unnoticed by entwining themselves in the nearly evenly spaced barbed-wire fences. A gentle breeze blows waves through the seeded out short-grass on the endless rolling hillsides as it ebbs and eddies. + +You are careful not to get too close to the open door that you can be seen, but you manage to drag one of the crates close enough that you catch the breeze and sit there dining on cantaloupes as you watch the world whisk by. + +The short-grass is soon replaced with only tufts of desperate hangers-on and sprawling prickly-pear patches. There are colorful rocky outcroppings jutting out from everywhere and you see a herd of small deer pawing and licking at one of them. + +You watch small towns drift by in the distance and for a while the train runs alongside a highway filled with car after car from one end to the other for as far as you can see and wonder how there can be so many people. How did they all get here and why? Where did they all come from and where are they going? + +Soon after, the flat desolation opens wide and the land reaches up in supplication to the heavens. Mountain after mountain looms in the distance and slowly each one in turn makes its way from its incorporeal plane into reality. You’ve never seen anything so amazing. From all the pictures you’ve ever looked at, you never realized how awesome mountains would be up close in real life. + +The train takes forever to reach the bottom of a long grade and your ears pop every couple of minutes. Your eyes feel swollen and like they might end up bursting from the pressure if something doesn’t give soon. The sun was just beginning to set when you started your descent, but now you are in deep shadow cast by the mountains. The early lights of a large city come into view so it won’t be long before you have to leave the train. + + + +You’ve been walking around for hours and still have no idea where to go from here. You’ve gotten all turned around and don’t remember which direction the sun was in. You aren’t exactly sure what town you are in right now, either. You haven’t been looking at your map and you’ve lost all track. You’ve just been following the sun since it seems to know where to go. + +It’d be best if you could board a train at night, but you may have to wait until morning to regain your bearings. There isn’t really any place to lie down here. There are houses immediately beyond a high chain link fence that runs the course of the tracks through town and a gatehouse at each entrance that you are forced to skirt. The street lamps offer little light this far away and those blinding security lights on the front of the little buildings only extend out so far. + +You can either wait until morning or attempt to board one of the random trains that sit idling on the tracks. +> Wait until morning +Not wanting to risk hopping a train to God knows where, you decide to find a place to curl up and sleep for the night. Over behind the steel buildings across from the road, you find a patch of high weeds that will do nicely. + +You settle down and catch a few winks during the short breaks between the interruptions of the normal commotion of loading and unloading the freight cars and hitching and unhitching. It’s exhausting to say the least, but you have faith that in the morning you’ll be able to catch a ride and there’ll be plenty of time to rest then. + +When the sky finally starts to gray in the East, you begin juning around. There are plenty of trains to choose from pointed in the direction you wish to go. It’s just a matter of getting on board without being spotted and as luck would have it, there aren’t too many people bustling about right now. Still, you have to be careful. + +You glide quickly over to the closest one and climb up the ladder on the front of a side dump car on the tail end of the train to look inside. Except for a bit of what looks like gravel here and there and dust, it’s completely empty. + +You pitch your bag over and climb in. There’s no way someone will be able to see you unless they climb up and look directly in. You make yourself cozy and settle in for the ride. + + + +The sun becomes unbearable around midday and you end up having to spread the blanket out to be able to even stand the radiating heat from the floor of the car. Every so often you have to stand up and let the blast furnace air flow over you to try to cool down as much as you can. You can only stand for a few minutes at most each time because the tracks run parallel to a highway and if you are spotted by a passing car, you’ll no doubt be reported. + +You end up going through more of your water than you wanted and end up having to soak your T-shirt and wrap around your head to even begin to bear the heat. + +The sun finally drops down low enough that it casts a shadow in the front end of the car. Every hour brings with it more and more relief as the temperature seems to fall a degree or two until it has cooled down enough—or perhaps you are just that tired—that you find yourself getting sleepy. You stretch out and the rhythm of the tracks sends you tumbling head-first into dreamland. + + + +You wake up before dawn and find the train still once more. You make up your bedroll and repack your bag before peeking out to see if the coast is clear. + +The engine is gone and the short string of cars you are in seems to have been unhitched on a siding. The track stretches northeastward over the hill and there’s a tall barricade of railroad ties where it stops abruptly at the west end. + +You could head back up the tracks, but that would mean backtracking and it’s anyone’s guess how far. Or you could head for the mountains at the far end of the valley. Surely you’ll run into a road or more tracks before too long. +> Backtrack +Maybe you should stick to the tracks. There’s no telling what may be out in the desert. It might take longer and be more out of the way, but there’s less of a chance to get lost. + +The track rejoins one running East to West and you continue on to where the sun sets. It’s blazing hot and only gets hotter with each passing hour. You try to conserve water as best you can and it only makes you thirstier. You’ll have to go back to traveling only while the sun is down or you’ll never make it. + + + +You’ve run yourself completely out of water, but still you trudge on. The iron rails stretch out ahead of you into infinity. There’s no turning back. You’ve shed every single item that you can afford to do without in order to lessen your load. The only thing you are unwilling to part with is Jane’s treasure chest. It’s all that is left of her. + +The sun is blazing down on you and yet you are freezing. If only you’d kept the coat. Your knees are shaking so furiously that you can barely keep them under you. + +Just when you think you won’t be able to take another step, you see a gravel road up ahead crossing the tracks. You dig deep and force yourself to continue on. You must reach the crossing. You have to. + +You are still fifty yards or so shy of it and cannot go on. Your legs are cramping something fierce and no longer obey your wishes. You have to stop. You have to rest. + +A dark green sedan covered in dust pulls up to the crossing and stops momentarily. After everything you’ve done to keep out of sight, you have no choice now but to get help. It no longer matters whether they send you back or not as long as you don’t die—and you know you will if you don’t get assistance. + +You raise your arm to flag the car down and the ground starts spinning. Your vision goes black. +> Francisca +There is soft music playing far, far away. Even though you can’t make out the words, it is so soothing and you feel enveloped by it like a warm blanket on a cold winter night. + +You struggle to open your eyes against a piercing white light. You try to shield them from it with your hand and find that it is captured by a soft, thick blanket. The light is still way too bright, but you force your eyes open despite it. They eventually adjust and you find yourself in a very sterile-looking room. There are framed rubbings on the walls from what appears to be tombstones flanking a large, hand-carved wooden crucifix and on the nightstand next to the bed you are tucked into is a pitcher and basin, and a blue vase exploding with yellow flowers. + +The bed is so soft. You’ve never felt anything so soft. It feels like it could swallow you up. That you might could even drown in it—and that wouldn’t be half bad. Not half bad at all. + +You reach out from under the covers and stretch your arms high over your head. A cool, damp washcloth slides down from your forehead and onto your cheek. It’s a bit startling, but feels good all the same. You smush it back so that it stays in place. + +You pull yourself up even though you’d rather not and find that you haven’t got a stitch of clothing on. You desperately look around and there’s not a single thing other than the blanket to wrap yourself in so you scrunch back down. What in the world are you going to do? + +You hear a “click” and determine that it came from the door a mere moment before it swings open a crack. You can see movement in the darkness beyond the door and then suddenly an eye is looking in at you. + +You scrunch down deep. You have nowhere to run. You only hope that whoever—or whatever—it is isn’t here to hurt you. + +The door slowly creaks open revealing the monster! It’s in the form of a short, dark-skinned woman with long black hair and a broad, warm smile pasted across her face. She’s carefully balancing a wooden tray so that several dishes she has neatly arranged on it don’t go sliding off and onto the floor. + +“¡Buenos días!” + +You eye her suspiciously from under the covers. What does she want? + +“¿Tienes hambre?” she asks, nodding and motioning toward the tray with her lips. “eh … eat food?” + +You nod slowly. + +“¿Sí?” She whisks over beside the bed while you slowly unravel yourself from the blanket and push yourself back making sure not to let anything that shouldn’t come uncovered. She sits beside you and gently places the tray on your lap—keeping her hand on the edge of it for balance. + +Other than the short glass of orange juice and taller one of tepid milk you have no idea what any of this is, but it sure is delicious. You can’t help but cram even more into your mouth before you’ve even had time to swallow the previous bite. + +“¿Sabe bien? eh … es good?” she asks, smiling. + +You give her a broad smile and a vigorous nod. “Mmm hmmm!” + +When you can hold no more, you push back with a groan. “Thank you. That was the best food I ever ate.” + +She places the tray on the foot of the bed and then turns back to you and lifts the blanket before you even know what she’s doing. You start. Extending her finger and gently touching one of the scars on your back she asks “¿Quien te hizo esto? eh … who hurt?” + +You give her another suspicious look and decide that it probably wouldn’t hurt to tell her. It’s not like she’ll be able to tell anyone else. She can’t even talk right. “My mom…” + +“¡Dios mío!” she says, looking at you in horror, “¿Tu madre?” She leaps from the bed and begins pacing back and forth with a wild look in her eyes. She’s rattling on so fast that even she wouldn’t be able to pick out her own words. She finally stops and turns to you. “Nadie te pegará más. Serás mi hijo ahora,” she says in a steadier and more soothing tone. She rushes over and throws her arms around you—nearly dragging you from the bed—and gives you such a squeeze that she nearly crushes the air right out of your chest. “Estás a salvo aquí.” + +Days go by and turn into weeks, and weeks into months, months into years. You keep meaning to get back to your journey to the Grand Canyon, but you feel so safe here and Francisca is so, so nice. There’s not one mean bone in her whole body. Jane would’ve really loved it here. + +Someday—when you’re old enough and have a car of your own—you intend to make good on your promise to Jane. But, for now this is… + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Not wanting to risk hopping a train to God knows where, you decide to find a place to curl up and sleep for the night. Over behind the steel buildings across from the road, you find a patch of high weeds that will do nicely. + +You settle down and catch a few winks during the short breaks between the interruptions of the normal commotion of loading and unloading the freight cars and hitching and unhitching. It’s exhausting to say the least, but you have faith that in the morning you’ll be able to catch a ride and there’ll be plenty of time to rest then. + +When the sky finally starts to gray in the East, you begin juning around. There are plenty of trains to choose from pointed in the direction you wish to go. It’s just a matter of getting on board without being spotted and as luck would have it, there aren’t too many people bustling about right now. Still, you have to be careful. + +You glide quickly over to the closest one and climb up the ladder on the front of a side dump car on the tail end of the train to look inside. Except for a bit of what looks like gravel here and there and dust, it’s completely empty. + +You pitch your bag over and climb in. There’s no way someone will be able to see you unless they climb up and look directly in. You make yourself cozy and settle in for the ride. + + + +The sun becomes unbearable around midday and you end up having to spread the blanket out to be able to even stand the radiating heat from the floor of the car. Every so often you have to stand up and let the blast furnace air flow over you to try to cool down as much as you can. You can only stand for a few minutes at most each time because the tracks run parallel to a highway and if you are spotted by a passing car, you’ll no doubt be reported. + +You end up going through more of your water than you wanted and end up having to soak your T-shirt and wrap around your head to even begin to bear the heat. + +The sun finally drops down low enough that it casts a shadow in the front end of the car. Every hour brings with it more and more relief as the temperature seems to fall a degree or two until it has cooled down enough—or perhaps you are just that tired—that you find yourself getting sleepy. You stretch out and the rhythm of the tracks sends you tumbling head-first into dreamland. + + + +You wake up before dawn and find the train still once more. You make up your bedroll and repack your bag before peeking out to see if the coast is clear. + +The engine is gone and the short string of cars you are in seems to have been unhitched on a siding. The track stretches northeastward over the hill and there’s a tall barricade of railroad ties where it stops abruptly at the west end. + +You could head back up the tracks, but that would mean backtracking and it’s anyone’s guess how far. Or you could head for the mountains at the far end of the valley. Surely you’ll run into a road or more tracks before too long. +> Head for the mountains +You set out through the barren waste, using the highest peak in sight at the far end of the valley for your bearing. Not having to watch your step to keep from tripping on ties makes it much easier going. You skirt large patches of low-lying bushes and piles of rock so you don’t have to worry about snakes. + +The sun climbs slowly overhead and you start putting away the water. You still have nearly a gallon which should more than do to cross this valley. The mountains are right there, after all. You can almost reach out and touch them. Just in case, though, you pick up your pace. You don’t want to be out here alone after dark. + +When it starts getting too hot, you wrap your T-shirt around your head like you did back on the train and imagine yourself as Lawrence of Arabia crossing the desert. You wonder if there might be an oasis out here. Wouldn’t that be something! + +The sun continues to swing across the sky and more than makes it to the finish line of the peaks before you. Maybe this wasn’t such a good idea after all. + +You look back from whence you came and can’t tell how far you’ve come or even where the railroad cars might be. You haven’t even left tracks as far as you can tell across the hard and scorched landscape. There’s no going back. + +Night falls and with it the temperature. The coat isn’t enough so you pull out the blanket and wrap it around you as well. You continue on until the peak fades into the night sky and you are no longer able to see it. + +You have no choice now but to stop here until morning. You can’t even see the ground anymore so you could step right in the middle of a snake before you even knew it was there. + +Wrapping up tightly in the coat, you lean back against the bag. Night insects chirp and buzz even out here so you don’t feel quite so alone as you thought. Somewhere in the far distance, you hear a lonesome yelping howl. It’s so far away that you have nothing to fear from it. But, what about the things closer in? The things that might not even make a sound? + +Your eyes finally close on their own while you are straining to listen. You sleep through the night. +> Cast to the Winds +You’ve been without water now since the day before yesterday. Or was it the day before that? You can no longer remember anymore. + +You can’t go on. Your legs have lost all their strength so you allow yourself to crumble to the ground. You don’t really have a choice in the matter. + +Looking out across the barren landscape, the mountains appear no closer than they did when you first set out. Everything has its own tint of blinding white and you can only make out what you think you are looking at by its vague shape. + +You pull Jane’s card from your pocket and unfurl it in your hand. It’s difficult to make out the lines on the page, but you don’t really need to. They have been seared into your mind since that very first day when she presented it to you. You did your best. You only wish you’d have been able to complete your quest so that her dream would have been realized. + +A slight breeze snatches the page from your grasp. You are helpless to stop it. It flutters for a second where it gets caught on a dessicated plant before the wind works it free. + +For a moment, it blots out the sun just long enough that you can see her standing there—beckoning to you. Those spindly legs and knobby knees ending in flipflops beneath those faded and ragged cutoffs. The stained, white button up shirt tied at her waist. That toothy grin stretching wide across her face beneath that long and cascading raven hair. Those eyes the color of new grass. + +She reaches down and folds her fingers over yours. + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After the long slow grade up from the river bottom, you find yourself in an entirely different landscape. The closest thing to trees are the tumbleweeds attempting to go unnoticed by entwining themselves in the nearly evenly spaced barbed-wire fences. A gentle breeze blows waves through the seeded out short-grass on the endless rolling hillsides as it ebbs and eddies. + +You are careful not to get too close to the open door that you can be seen, but you manage to drag one of the crates close enough that you catch the breeze and sit there dining on cantaloupes as you watch the world whisk by. + +The short-grass is soon replaced with only tufts of desperate hangers-on and sprawling prickly-pear patches. There are colorful rocky outcroppings jutting out from everywhere and you see a herd of small deer pawing and licking at one of them. + +You watch small towns drift by in the distance and for a while the train runs alongside a highway filled with car after car from one end to the other for as far as you can see and wonder how there can be so many people. How did they all get here and why? Where did they all come from and where are they going? + +Soon after, the flat desolation opens wide and the land reaches up in supplication to the heavens. Mountain after mountain looms in the distance and slowly each one in turn makes its way from its incorporeal plane into reality. You’ve never seen anything so amazing. From all the pictures you’ve ever looked at, you never realized how awesome mountains would be up close in real life. + +The train takes forever to reach the bottom of a long grade and your ears pop every couple of minutes. Your eyes feel swollen and like they might end up bursting from the pressure if something doesn’t give soon. The sun was just beginning to set when you started your descent, but now you are in deep shadow cast by the mountains. The early lights of a large city come into view so it won’t be long before you have to leave the train. + + + +You’ve been walking around for hours and still have no idea where to go from here. You’ve gotten all turned around and don’t remember which direction the sun was in. You aren’t exactly sure what town you are in right now, either. You haven’t been looking at your map and you’ve lost all track. You’ve just been following the sun since it seems to know where to go. + +It’d be best if you could board a train at night, but you may have to wait until morning to regain your bearings. There isn’t really any place to lie down here. There are houses immediately beyond a high chain link fence that runs the course of the tracks through town and a gatehouse at each entrance that you are forced to skirt. The street lamps offer little light this far away and those blinding security lights on the front of the little buildings only extend out so far. + +You can either wait until morning or attempt to board one of the random trains that sit idling on the tracks. +> Board a train +You find a string of flatcars loaded with brand new pickup trucks. All of their doors are locked and you don’t want to risk being spotted by hiding under one of them so you climb up in the bed of one and hunker down. You hadn’t noticed it before, but your skin feels thick and rigid. You have your knees drawn up as tightly as you can in the old coat and it doesn’t seem to be helping so you drag out Jane’s blanket—carefully unraveling it from everything in the bag—and wrap yourself in it. As you gradually start to warm up, you watch the stars creep by overhead and can’t help but yawn uncontrollably. + + + +A peppering of raindrops on your face wakes you and you find that the train is moving. The sky overhead is mostly clear, but you happen to be under the one cloud that is leaking. You don’t fancy the thought of getting soaked so you jump to your feet and cram the blanket into the bag. + +The land is sweeping by at high speed and your heart skips a couple beats when your foot slips on the bumper while you’re climbing over the tailgate. You fall on your butt before you can catch yourself and only after you realize that you are safe do you look over and see that you aren’t anywhere near the edge of the flatcar. You roll under the back of the truck and pull the bag in behind you. + +The orange sun hangs in the sky in front of you and to the right of the train. No! You are going the wrong way! There are huge dark mountains on the other side of the train. You drag out your map in the desperate hope that you are somehow mistaken and try to locate where you are. It doesn’t show railroad tracks, but maybe you can figure it out some other way. There’s a highway way out in front of you, but it is too far away to ever hope to be able to read the signs. Until you know what town or highway to look for on the map it is utterly useless. + +You spend the next several hours watching the terrain sweep by knowing that you’ll have to backtrack all these extra miles and your spirits keep sinking lower and lower. By the time the train begins to slow down you have regained your resolve. You absolutely refuse to give up. You’ve come this far and there’s no turning back. There’s nothing to go back to anyway. No matter what it takes, you are going to see this thing through to the end. + + + +After jumping from the train you immediately turned and head back to the south. There wasn’t anything in view when you came within sight of whatever that mountain town was and you didn’t feel like hanging around waiting for something to come along. + +You feel so exposed here. There’s no cover of any kind along the tracks. The mountains appear to be close, but are, in fact, far away and whole communities—maybe cities, but it’s difficult to tell—look like narrow white lines running along their base. Tiny, ant-like cars creep along on roads that you can barely make out if you squint really hard and the dessicated yellow grass fades to blue in the distance giving you the sense that you are on some tranquil sea. Even with everything so spread out and far away, you still feel the need to somehow conceal yourself and hunch over as much as you can get away with while still being able to walk fast. + +Day turns into night and night into day. There’s no need for clocks or calendars out here so you haven’t the faintest idea how many days it has taken you to recover the lost ground of one simple mistake. It just all seems to blur together. You eat on the go and only stop for the occasional catnap—heading well away from the tracks so as not to be spotted from one of the many trains that whiz by. Even with being really conservative, you’ve still eaten the last of the melons and used up all of your water with no hope of replenishing either of them. You can’t afford to make the long trek across the barren landscape to one of the towns for being spotted would definitely put the old kibosh on the whole shebang and everything you’ve done and went through so far would all be for naught. + +As nightfall nears, you spot a small farmhouse not too far away from the tracks and decide to take a closer look. Leaving your bag near the tracks, you crawl on your belly up through the dried grass as far as you dare and try to spot a hydrant somewhere in the junk heap that passes for a yard. There are tires strewn around that may or may not belong to the half dozen or so old cars that are up on blocks. A discarded refrigerator sits propped against an old and rickety-looking wooden fence and there are a few mangy looking mutts staked out next to makeshift doghouses fashioned from oil drums whose tops have been removed. There’s no sense in trying to fill your water jugs. The dogs would only alert whoever is inside and then your goose would be cooked. + +Near the back fence, you spot an overgrown garden and can see quite a few freshly ripe tomatoes mixed in with the green ones clinging to the vine. Your mouth waters just thinking about those delicious fruits. + +You kick back and wait for the residual sunlight to leave the sky and close your eyes for a few minutes. Every little bit of rest you can get here and there helps. +> Oases +The lights just went off in the farmhouse so you crawl your way through the grass toward the garden—trying to keep as low to the ground as you can. It is full dark, but you can’t take the chance that someone might catch a glimpse of you. + +Something moves off to your right, but you can’t see what it is. You just hope it isn’t a snake and if it is, you hope it’s moving away from you instead of toward you. + +The dry grass crunches under your hands and knees so you slow your pace to not make any more racket than you can help. + +You are so, so hungry. It’s been days since you’ve eaten anything—anything at all. + +The hard, dry ground suddenly becomes loose, damp earth and you look up to see three dim strands of barbed wire. On the other side, you can make out the dark shapes holding their orbs out to you. + +You wriggle your way under the bottom wire. Halfway through, you reach up and pluck the first one you see, then another and another. They all look the same in this light so you grab as many as you can and bag them up in the bottom of your shirt. + +You hear a bawl coming from the direction of house, joined by a couple more as the bulb above the back door flips on and the door is thrown open. + +“What is it, boys?” you hear a man say, “What’s out there?” + +You are dragging yourself backward with your knees and shoving with your elbows when you see an orange flash near the house. You hear the boom a split-second later. + +He’s shooting at you! + +You scamper with everything you have and don’t stop until you’re back on the other side of the embankment. You lay prone with your eyes peeled for any sign of movement coming over the rise and, when your heart finally slows, you look down at the single piece of fruit in your hand. At least it’s something. + +You take a bite and feel your face attempt to implode. The tomato isn’t ripe, but it doesn’t matter. It’s food and moisture all in one and you’ve been without either for much too long. + +After all the commotion and dogs’ barking finally peters out, you creep back to retrieve your bag and continue on down the tracks. + + + +You see the back of a big truck stop over on the highway up ahead of you about a mile or two away with a constant stream of vehicles coming and going. The moon is just coming up and from the glint on the tracks it looks like they might come really close to it. It would be a good place to fill up your water jugs. You might be able to blend in among all those people and them not even suspect that you are all alone out here. + +You don’t have a lot of money, but maybe you can find some food that you can afford with the little bit of change you still have in your pocket. A couple of cheese crackers or the peanut butter kind would go really good right about now. + +When you get to a spot that is almost directly behind it, you set your bag down in the grass off to the side of the tracks and—taking just the jugs in hand—set off across the field. As you approach the crumbling asphalt of the back parking lot, you see a water faucet next to the pay air hose. What luck! You rush over and—after gulping down as much of the sweet liquid as you can—fill both jugs to the brim. You lug them back across the parking lot to the knee-high grass and set them down before heading around to the front of the building. + +Before going in, you pull the bread wrapper out of your pocket and sit on a yellow concrete curb to count out the change. You need to know how much you have before going inside. At long last, you decipher that there’s eighty-six cents—a small fortune. You still want to hold onto the dollar for a real emergency so you are only willing to spend the change. You’ve got to be careful not to spend all of it, though. You might really need it later on. + +As you step through the front door, you are blasted by frigid air. You’d almost forgotten that such a thing even existed. Several pairs of eyes are on you, but you pretend not to notice. + +“His mother should be ashamed of herself. Letting a boy get so filthy,” a woman with her face stretched back in a bun says to her friend who only nods in agreement. + +You glance down at your hands and can’t tell where the dirt ends and your skin begins. She’s definitely right about how dirty you are, but if she were a nice person, she wouldn’t have said it loud enough for you to hear. Maybe you should clean up before doing any shopping. + +You walk up to the stocky woman behind the counter and quietly ask “Do you have a bathroom?” + +She squints at you before saying “Sure do. It’s right down that hall over there.” + +“Thank you,” you say, walking as quickly as you can so you can get out from under all the judgmental eyes. + +It’s a tiny little room with only a stainless steel toilet and sink. Above the sink is a cloudy mirror that reflects what little it has to and in the corner is a tall, skinny trash can with a flapper on top. You lock the door before stripping off you shirt and shorts so someone doesn’t walk in on you. You do the best you can with wet paper towels and have to climb up on the sink to make sure you got everything off of your face and neck. After getting dressed, you sop up the floor as best you can. By the time you finally head back out the door, you are feeling fresh as the morning. The trash can, however, has seen better days. + +You walk down each aisle slowly looking at what is offered. Too bad you don’t have more money, because there is a lot of really good stuff you wouldn’t mind having. You finally choose a big plain bag of tortilla chips that are marked “3/$1”. It’s big enough that it should last you a good long while. + +The cashier eyes you with a smirk as you count out thirty-four cents to her. You can’t help grinning back at her every time you make eye contact. + +“Thank you, sir. Please come again,” she says handing you back your bag of chips and giving you a wink. + +You feel your face getting warm and you nod to her as you turn toward the door. You can’t remember the last time you felt as relieved as you do now to get away from people. If it wouldn’t seem suspicious, you would run. + +Wrestling the two jugs while trying not to crush the bag of chips too much, you head back to the tracks and fetch your bag before continuing on your trek. + + + +You come to a fork in the tracks and don’t know which one brought you here. One continues on to the south and the other angles off into the distance in a more easterly direction and looks like it goes right through a distant town. If it’s not just a mirage you might try hopping a train down there, but you aren’t sure that it would be going the right way. Maybe there will be another town somewhere up ahead on the one stretching south. +> Continue south +You’ve been walking south on this line for several days now and haven’t actually run into a single town. It might’ve been better to wait for a train heading in this direction, but who could’ve guessed that it would be so far between settlements. It was never like this back where you grew up. + +The land has gradually shifted from short grass to barren and rocky with only patches here and there so you know you’re getting close to where you were before taking this unfortunate detour. It’s not as easy going as it has been so far and you find yourself taking more and more rest breaks. It’s much easier traveling around dawn and then again at dusk so you’ve been lying around and sometimes napping during midday and when it gets too dark to see snakes that might be in your path. + +You’ve eaten over half of your chips and drank most of your water. You’ll need to find somewhere to replenish your supplies so you don’t end up back in the sorry shape you were in a couple of days ago. + +Somewhere in the wee hours of the morning, you spot a mournful glow all by its lonesome out in the middle of nowhere some distance from the tracks. It takes a while for you to figure out that there is a house not too awful far from it, but it’s hard to see since there are no lights on within. You decide to stroll on over to find out if it might be vacant, but catch a glimpse of a reflection about midway there. It looks like the windshield of a pickup. There’s probably someone sleeping in the house. + +Not wanting a repeat of the last time you tried to sneak food away from a farmhouse, you walk around until you find a shelf of rock jutting out of the ground that’s just the perfect height for surveilling the place. It isn’t too long before the sky begins to gray with dawn, but you wait until the sun is full up and watch the house down below carefully from your perch on the rocky outcropping. After a few hours of biding your time, it happens. + +You watch as the old pickup pulls out of the drive and turns onto the highway. It’s far enough away that you can’t make out the driver and the cloud of dust billowing up from it soon makes it impossible to even make out the vehicle itself. + +You don’t see a garden growing anywhere and the yard is nothing but sand and rocks. There is a rectangular patch of weeds up against the side fence and it seems like the only place anything is growing at all. You sling your bag over your shoulder and walk carefully across the barren field, and then right up to the house like you owned the place. + +You try knocking at the front door in case someone might be inside, but no one comes. You try to open it without any success. You find that all the windows and the back door are locked up tight as well. + +You notice a pipe sticking up near the weed patch with a bucket hanging upside down over it. Sure enough, you find a spigot hiding under that little devil. You fill up your jugs again and drink what you can before turning your attention back to the house. + +You don’t really want to smash a window, but you are getting desperate. You pick up large stone and draw your arm back when you spot something in the reflection of the glass you are about to break. It looks like a large wooden door laying at a slight angle on the ground behind you propped up by a short concrete wall. You know exactly what it is — a storm cellar, just like the one at your grandmother’s house. With any luck, there’ll be jars and jars of canned food just like she stores in hers because it is cooler down there and they won’t go bad nearly as quickly. + +You trot over to it and drop the bag. You hook your hands under and heave with all your strength. The one at Grandma’s has a cable attached to a bunch of window weights strung through a pulley which makes it much easier to open and close. You have to lift the full weight of this one and it doesn’t give easily. + +You stand it up to more than a forty-five degree angle, but can’t get it to go any further without risking falling down the hole underneath it. You try to flop it on over, but you can’t give it enough push and you are already at a rather precarious angle, yourself. If you could fling it on over, you’d probably wind up tumbling in head first. + +Desperately, you look around for anything that might help and you are about to let the door go when you see a shovel leaning against the wall at the bottom of the steps leading down. You inch your way over to the top and carefully reach down with one hand while the door threatens to buckle your other arm. You manage to snag the end of it and drag it up enough that it tips over at your feet just as your other arm tires out, but you save the door from falling down and pinning the shovel by catching hold with your free hand and letting it rest against your chest while you take a minute to catch your breath. + +You pick up the shovel, jab it into the ground as best you can and lower the door onto the handle. There’s just enough room for you to slip through and over the side. + +It takes a minute for your eyes to adjust. There are shelves down here along one wall, but not a single jar on them. You are about to turn around when you notice that they aren’t exactly empty and look a little lumpy so you go over to investigate. + +You’ve hit the jackpot! The shelves are covered in potatoes, onions and turnips—more than you could ever hope to eat. + +Making a couple of trips, you gently drop several handfuls out the door and then clamber out behind them. You stand up and dust yourself off before picking up your bag. You are just starting to drop the vegetables in when you hear a low growl off to the side. + +Slowly turning your head, you see the biggest hound you’ve ever seen in your life. He comes up to your chest and is at least as long as you are tall. You stare back at one another and neither of you make a move. You are trapped! + +You can try to stand here and hope he decides that you aren’t a threat or you can try to come up with something else. +> Distract him +You look down at your bag and see the lone flipflop wedged in just inside the top beside the blanket. It gives you an idea. You’re not sure it will work, but it’s worth a shot. + +You slowly reach in and—being extremely careful not to make any sudden movements—draw it out. You take a deep breath and hold it out in a trembling hand toward the massive beast. “Fetch?” + +Keeping a wary eye on you, he leans forward and gives it a sniff before returning to his previous position. You can’t tell one way or the other whether he’s interested in it or not. Still, you have to give it a try. + +You shake it lightly to get his attention. When his eyes leave you and train on it, you shake it more vigorously. You draw your arm back, snap it forward and just as you let go, you holler “Fetch!” + +The flipflop sails across the yard while both you and he just stand there watching it glide. It skips a couple of times before spinning to a stop. + +You look back at the hound and he looks back at you. He doesn’t appear to be even the slightest bit impressed. + +You have no choice now but to stand here and hope that he finally decides that you are not a threat. +> Wait him out +After waiting for an eternity for the dog to do something, he finally does. He turns, walks stiff-legged over to the back porch and groans softly as he plops down. He looks so old to you now that your fear has turned to pity. + +Keeping a wary eye on him, you start packing the vegetables into your bag. You hold out a turnip to eat on the way because you are half starving after all that hard work. + +You don’t want to overstay your welcome so as soon as you drop the last one in, you turn tail and head back the way you came toward the tracks. + + + +You’ve walked nearly a mile when you hear a strange sounding cough behind you. You whirl around only to find the hound several paces away. He stops and stares up at you. + +“Go home,” you command, but he only looks at you. “Get!” + +You take a couple of steps backward and he takes a couple forward. You think about picking up a rock and chucking it at him, but he’s as big as you are. If you made him mad, you wouldn’t stand a chance. The best thing to do would be to ignore him and he’ll head back home on his own when he’s darn good and ready. + +Over the course of the day, you grow more and more comfortable around your new companion and when you stop for a rest you discover that embroidered in his faded collar are the words “Ol’ Sam”. + +“It’s nice to meet ya, Sam. I’m Billy. I bet you’re hungry.” + +You pull out a handful of chips for Sam and a turnip for yourself to munch on. He greedily wolfs them down. You’re tempted to give him more, but you can’t afford to since they’re the only thing you have that will keep the longest and he’ll probably leave soon anyway. + +When night comes and it gets too dark to see, you find a decent place to bed down and give Sam another handful of chips while you wash down an onion with lots and lots of water. You give Sam a drink in an old tin can that you found on the tracks earlier so he doesn’t get too thirsty either. + +Sam lays down alongside you and his body warmth is somehow comforting. You drift off to sleep more easily than you ever remember doing and don’t stir even once in the night. + + + +The sun is already peeking above the mountains when you wake. Even though you have kinks all over from sleeping on the ground, you feel absolutely wonderful. It’s the first good nights sleep you’ve had in a long, long time. + +After both of you have eaten lightly, you set off once again down the tracks. Sam isn’t hanging back like he did yesterday. He walks right beside you—matching you step for step. You try to take it easy on the old guy and stop for regular rest breaks, but you cover a lot more ground than usual. The day just seems to fly by and by the time night comes, you are completely worn out. + +You start looking for a good spot to sleep when Sam suddenly stops and lets out a hair raising growl. You flinch instinctively and look down at him—frozen in your tracks—and see the hackles standing up from the top of his head to nearly the length of his back. He isn’t looking at you so you follow his gaze and see something really big and tan colored crossing the tracks up ahead. It is long and has a tail that looks as long as its body. It takes you a moment to realize that it’s a cat. A big cat. + +It pauses and stares at you for a few moments while Sam’s growls steadily grow in volume and pitch. Something about that thing clamps you down deep in the core and you can’t move a single muscle. Your skin tingles and your muscles burn. Then all at once the cat shoots off like a rifle shot across the field toward the mountains in tremendous leaps until it finally fades into the background. + +Your legs let go and you crumple right where you stand. All your strength has evaporated and you feel cold chills running all through your body. It’s a good thing Sam was here with you or that thing might’ve decided you were dinner. You throw your arms around his neck and squeeze with what little you have left in you. He just stands there looking in the direction the great cat ran and doesn’t move. + +When you find a spot and settle in for the night, you give Sam a double helping of tortilla chips. He finally eats the last one, but doesn’t seem quite as interested in them as he did last night. You wish that you had something else you could give him, but he wouldn’t like the raw vegetables nearly as much. The next time you see a gas station or store, you’re going to buy him something with meat in it. + +You lie down like you did last night and he stretches out against you just as he did before. You feel warm and safe and once again you sleep right straight on through. + + + +Morning comes early and as you lie there stretching the kinks out, you notice that Sam isn’t there. You sit up and call “Sam?” and don’t hear anything. + +You jump up and look all around as far as you can see and still there is nothing. “Sam!” Your ears prickle as you start to think the worst. You quickly shove those thoughts aside and jump to your feet. + +You run up on the higher ground of the tracks and look all around. You finally spot him way back up the tracks walking back the way you came. “Sam!” He pauses for a moment without turning around and then continues on his way. You want to run after him, but that would only make it worse. He’s been gone from his home too long already and just needs to go back. You watch him until he’s little more than a speck before returning to collect your gear. + +You’re more wary as you go now. Your senses seem heightened and for the first time on this trip you feel more like a wild animal than a person. Your eyes are in a perpetual squint and are constantly sweeping over the terrain from one side to the other. Every far off movement of a bird or hare doesn’t escape your notice and you feel more alive and in tune with the world around you than ever before. With the long nights returns the restlessness and you resume the catnaps during midday. + +Where the track you’ve been following veers alongside another, you peer down the slope at the great train yard you’d left days ago. You’ve finally made it back and can continue on with your journey into the west. + + + +You find a garden hose curled up on the side of the first house you come upon and there’s no one in sight. You refill your water jugs and take off before someone spots you. You’re well stocked up again for a while at least. + + + +The train yard looks so different in the light of day. There are so many things going on and machinery loading and unloading the cars that you are a bit afraid to try to make your way through. You’ll either have to bite the bullet or else skirt around it and hopefully find another opportunity somewhere down the line. +> Watch for an opportunity +You decide that the best option would be to hide under the overpass up near the end where it meets the incline. There’s a shelf that would offer you a nice vantage point to get the lay of the land. Taking your sweet time, you make your way over to it and then when you figure that the coast is as clear as it’s ever going to get you skedaddle your butt up the slope as fast as your legs will carry you. + +As you hike a leg over the short barricade, you smell cigarette smoke and hear a cough from not too far away. + +“Well, well. What do we have here?” + +You look up to see two slightly older boys looking down at you from one of the cubby holes up top. They hop down and stride up to you just as you pull your other leg over. Each one is at least a full head taller than you. + +“What have you got there?” asks the heavier of the two, ripping your bag away from you. + +“Give that back!” + +“Or what, little man?” + +“Or he’ll kick your ass!” cries the other kid, laughing. + +You lunge forward and attempt to wring the bag from him, but he gives it a yank and you lose your grip and go sprawling. + +He starts pulling things out and pitching them to the side. “What’s this?” He pulls out the treasure chest, drops the bag, and holds it up to his ear, shaking it as he and the other kid turn their backs you. + +“Nooo!” you roar, “That’s Jane’s! You can’t have it!”, leaping onto the kids back and grabbing his face with both hands—his ear with one hand and the inside of his cheek with the other. Your legs instinctively grapple him around the middle while you heave back with both hands in violent jerks. + +“Aaa-aaa-aah!” He tries to shake you off, but you have a death grip on him. There’s no way he can get loose without getting his ear and cheek torn off, and his friend sure isn’t stepping in to help. In fact, his friend looks terrified and confused and has taken a couple steps to the rear in wide-eyed panic. + +“YOU CAN’T HAVE THAT! IT’S NOT YOURS!” you shriek just before you clamp down on the side of his neck with your teeth. + +He screams bloody murder, dropping the treasure chest and strewing its contents, and starts raking at you with both hands. “Get him off! Get him off!” + +The other kid swings over the side of the barricade and drops out of sight. + +A warm trickle runs down your chin as you clamp down harder and sink your teeth deeper and deeper while you’re flailing back and forth trying to rip his face open with your bare hands. + +His screams turn to sobbing shrieks as he pounds in futility over his shoulder at you. He stumbles toward the barricade and just as he’s about to go over you shove back with your feet, sending him tumbling over and down the slope. You land flat of your back, but jump right back to your feet in case he decides to come back for you. + +The other kid is standing at bottom of the slope with eyes the size of goose eggs and looking like a deer caught in the cross-hairs. He rushes over and helps the kid with the bloody neck to his feet and they rush off across the tracks and toward the houses on the far side of the street. + +“YOU CAN’T HAVE IT! IT’S NOT YOURS! IT’S JANE’S!” you scream down at them at the top of your lungs, letting the foamy spit in your mouth fly and run out however it feels like. + +They don’t look back. + +The tiny hairs on the back of your neck and partway up your scalp still bristle and your heartbeat still pounds alternating white and dark patches in your vision. You take in deep lungfuls of air and let them out slowly to try to settle down. It helps some, but only slightly. + +You can’t stay here. You have to go before someone comes back to look for you. You start picking things up and cramming them into your bag as fast and as best you can. + +You crawl back over the barricade, dash up the hill on the far side of the overpass and follow the high chain link fence that separates the highway from everything else. Then, when you think you’ve gone plenty far enough, you head off at an angle back toward the tracks—aiming for much farther down. +> Flight +Even though it’s risky with all the men down there, you decide to go ahead and chance it. You can’t wait around here in case the boys come back with the cops. + +You creep down behind a short row of buildings and look for a train aimed toward the west. There aren’t any really close by, but there are a couple not too far away. They’re mostly long strings of hoppers and in a few places there are sections of flatcars. All the boxcars seem to be locked up good and tight. + +You’re still trying to find just the right one when a large hand clamps down on your shoulder and whirls you around. + +“You shouldn’t be back here, boy,” booms a deep gravelly voice. + +You are staring into a drawn face covered by a dark beard with gray streaks down each side. Besides the withered face, he fills out his overalls with a body three sizes too big and could quite possibly be just as thick from front to back as he is tall. + +“Let’s see if we can’t figure out who you belong to.” + +Despite your resistance, he propels you along in his meaty grip and it feels like your feet only touch the ground every second or third step. You manage to hang onto your stuff, but only barely. + +He leads you through the door of one of the guard houses and says to the guy in uniform “I caught this kid prowling around out there. Do something with him, would ya?”, shoving you forward. Without waiting for an answer, he revolves around on his heels and steps back through the door. + + + +“We’ve found a young kid playing in the yard and need someone to come pick him up,” says the guard to someone on the telephone. “I don’t know. Never seen him before. Okay, I’ll keep an eye on him until he gets here. Bye.” + +He hangs up the phone and turns toward you. “You got a name, kid?” + +You just stare back at him. There’s no way you’re going to tell him anything. + +“Okay… It might be a while, you want a soda or something?” + +You just stand there with as blank an expression as you can muster even though you are stewing inside. + + + +It isn’t long before an officer arrives and hauls you down to the police station where you’re forced to wait until they finally figure out who you are and where your home is. It takes them several hours and all the while you’re watching for any opportunity to escape that never presents its self. + + + +You’re led to an unmarked patrol car and—after the officer in a business suit places your bag in the trunk—ushered into the passenger seat. “Climb in and make yourself comfortable, it’s going to be a long ride.” + +You reluctantly climb in and he closes the door behind you. After he slides the key into the ignition he says “You can call me Jim, by the way. If you need anything, just say so.” + +He starts the engine and backs out of the parking space. You’re just pulling out onto the street when you finally can’t hold it in any longer. You already suspect what the answer will be, but have to give it a shot anyhow. + +“I need to go to the Grand Canyon. It’s real important. Can you take me there before you take me home?” + +He looks over at you and perks an eyebrow. “Is that where you were headed? I must say that you made it farther away from home than anyone would’ve guessed. Why is it so important?” + +“I have to go there for Jane. She died and never got to see it.” + +You see him swallow a huge lump in his throat. It takes him well over a minute before he can speak again. “I heard about your little friend from the officer I spoke to from back in your home town. He didn’t know whether you’d just run off or if something bad had happened to you. The whole town’s been combing the entire countryside for you.” After wiping his eye with the back of his wrist, he brings his palm down hard against the steering wheel. And then he pounds it hard a couple more times. “I wish I could, son. I really do. But, that’s nearly a whole state away in the wrong direction and they already know we’re on our way.” + +You lean back against the seat and stare out the side window. You’ve come too far to be turned back now. All of your stuff is locked in the trunk so you have little choice but to sit here and accept your fate. The mile markers on the highway click by like the incessant ticking of a metronome arm. + +It’s hopeless. It’s all over. +> Escape +You can’t go back. You just can’t. You will not be put through that again. You have to do something—anything. You reach down and pull the door handle and shove the door out with your foot. + +“What are you doing?! Stop that!” + +“I’m not going back and you can’t make me!” + +He grabs a handful of your shirt, but you’re not about to let that stop you. You strain with every ounce of your being and feel the fabric slowly begin to tear down from the neck. All at once it lets go and you leap from the door. + +You soar through the air and it feels like you’re flying. You’ve never felt so free before in all your life as you do right in this moment. This must be what birds feel like. + +The wind pushes back hard against you and you start to go down. You see it coming and there’s nothing at all that you can do to stop it. You hit the pavement just as you hear the brakes squeal on the car. The world tumbles over and over and you feel your bones exploding inside your flesh. Your skin burns briefly, but goes numb almost instantly. You try to suck in air and can’t. + +When you finally come to a stop, you hear hard leather soles clapping the asphalt and getting louder and louder as they approach. + +“Oh my God! Oh my God! What did you do?!” + +You see the horror slowly stretch its way across Officer Jim’s face. And you see Jane standing right there beside him—smiling and beckoning to you. Those bright green eyes are the last thing you see in this world. + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Even though it’s risky with all the men down there, you decide to go ahead and chance it. You can’t wait around here in case the boys come back with the cops. + +You creep down behind a short row of buildings and look for a train aimed toward the west. There aren’t any really close by, but there are a couple not too far away. They’re mostly long strings of hoppers and in a few places there are sections of flatcars. All the boxcars seem to be locked up good and tight. + +You’re still trying to find just the right one when a large hand clamps down on your shoulder and whirls you around. + +“You shouldn’t be back here, boy,” booms a deep gravelly voice. + +You are staring into a drawn face covered by a dark beard with gray streaks down each side. Besides the withered face, he fills out his overalls with a body three sizes too big and could quite possibly be just as thick from front to back as he is tall. + +“Let’s see if we can’t figure out who you belong to.” + +Despite your resistance, he propels you along in his meaty grip and it feels like your feet only touch the ground every second or third step. You manage to hang onto your stuff, but only barely. + +He leads you through the door of one of the guard houses and says to the guy in uniform “I caught this kid prowling around out there. Do something with him, would ya?”, shoving you forward. Without waiting for an answer, he revolves around on his heels and steps back through the door. + + + +“We’ve found a young kid playing in the yard and need someone to come pick him up,” says the guard to someone on the telephone. “I don’t know. Never seen him before. Okay, I’ll keep an eye on him until he gets here. Bye.” + +He hangs up the phone and turns toward you. “You got a name, kid?” + +You just stare back at him. There’s no way you’re going to tell him anything. + +“Okay… It might be a while, you want a soda or something?” + +You just stand there with as blank an expression as you can muster even though you are stewing inside. + + + +It isn’t long before an officer arrives and hauls you down to the police station where you’re forced to wait until they finally figure out who you are and where your home is. It takes them several hours and all the while you’re watching for any opportunity to escape that never presents its self. + + + +You’re led to an unmarked patrol car and—after the officer in a business suit places your bag in the trunk—ushered into the passenger seat. “Climb in and make yourself comfortable, it’s going to be a long ride.” + +You reluctantly climb in and he closes the door behind you. After he slides the key into the ignition he says “You can call me Jim, by the way. If you need anything, just say so.” + +He starts the engine and backs out of the parking space. You’re just pulling out onto the street when you finally can’t hold it in any longer. You already suspect what the answer will be, but have to give it a shot anyhow. + +“I need to go to the Grand Canyon. It’s real important. Can you take me there before you take me home?” + +He looks over at you and perks an eyebrow. “Is that where you were headed? I must say that you made it farther away from home than anyone would’ve guessed. Why is it so important?” + +“I have to go there for Jane. She died and never got to see it.” + +You see him swallow a huge lump in his throat. It takes him well over a minute before he can speak again. “I heard about your little friend from the officer I spoke to from back in your home town. He didn’t know whether you’d just run off or if something bad had happened to you. The whole town’s been combing the entire countryside for you.” After wiping his eye with the back of his wrist, he brings his palm down hard against the steering wheel. And then he pounds it hard a couple more times. “I wish I could, son. I really do. But, that’s nearly a whole state away in the wrong direction and they already know we’re on our way.” + +You lean back against the seat and stare out the side window. You’ve come too far to be turned back now. All of your stuff is locked in the trunk so you have little choice but to sit here and accept your fate. The mile markers on the highway click by like the incessant ticking of a metronome arm. + +It’s hopeless. It’s all over. +> Accept your fate +You have no choice but to accept your fate. If when you get back and if you manage to survive, you will try again. It might not be for a long, long time because you will be watched like a hawk—provided your mom doesn’t kill you this time around as soon as there’s no one around to see. + +The landscape flows by in a constantly changing sea. You barely pick at the food that is given to you. You just don’t feel eating. + +Days turn into nights and nights turn into days. You get your own bed in motels where Officer Jim stops each night—which would be exciting any other time, but not now. Now, everything feels like it has a dark cloud hanging over it. + +It only takes two days to get home, but it feels like an eternity. And in all that time you don’t utter even one syllable. You just have to get this over with. + +I’m sorry, Jane. I failed you this time, but I will try again if I can. I promise you. + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After waiting for an eternity for the dog to do something, he finally does. He turns, walks stiff-legged over to the back porch and groans softly as he plops down. He looks so old to you now that your fear has turned to pity. + +Keeping a wary eye on him, you start packing the vegetables into your bag. You hold out a turnip to eat on the way because you are half starving after all that hard work. + +You don’t want to overstay your welcome so as soon as you drop the last one in, you turn tail and head back the way you came toward the tracks. + + + +You’ve walked nearly a mile when you hear a strange sounding cough behind you. You whirl around only to find the hound several paces away. He stops and stares up at you. + +“Go home,” you command, but he only looks at you. “Get!” + +You take a couple of steps backward and he takes a couple forward. You think about picking up a rock and chucking it at him, but he’s as big as you are. If you made him mad, you wouldn’t stand a chance. The best thing to do would be to ignore him and he’ll head back home on his own when he’s darn good and ready. + +Over the course of the day, you grow more and more comfortable around your new companion and when you stop for a rest you discover that embroidered in his faded collar are the words “Ol’ Sam”. + +“It’s nice to meet ya, Sam. I’m Billy. I bet you’re hungry.” + +You pull out a handful of chips for Sam and a turnip for yourself to munch on. He greedily wolfs them down. You’re tempted to give him more, but you can’t afford to since they’re the only thing you have that will keep the longest and he’ll probably leave soon anyway. + +When night comes and it gets too dark to see, you find a decent place to bed down and give Sam another handful of chips while you wash down an onion with lots and lots of water. You give Sam a drink in an old tin can that you found on the tracks earlier so he doesn’t get too thirsty either. + +Sam lays down alongside you and his body warmth is somehow comforting. You drift off to sleep more easily than you ever remember doing and don’t stir even once in the night. + + + +The sun is already peeking above the mountains when you wake. Even though you have kinks all over from sleeping on the ground, you feel absolutely wonderful. It’s the first good nights sleep you’ve had in a long, long time. + +After both of you have eaten lightly, you set off once again down the tracks. Sam isn’t hanging back like he did yesterday. He walks right beside you—matching you step for step. You try to take it easy on the old guy and stop for regular rest breaks, but you cover a lot more ground than usual. The day just seems to fly by and by the time night comes, you are completely worn out. + +You start looking for a good spot to sleep when Sam suddenly stops and lets out a hair raising growl. You flinch instinctively and look down at him—frozen in your tracks—and see the hackles standing up from the top of his head to nearly the length of his back. He isn’t looking at you so you follow his gaze and see something really big and tan colored crossing the tracks up ahead. It is long and has a tail that looks as long as its body. It takes you a moment to realize that it’s a cat. A big cat. + +It pauses and stares at you for a few moments while Sam’s growls steadily grow in volume and pitch. Something about that thing clamps you down deep in the core and you can’t move a single muscle. Your skin tingles and your muscles burn. Then all at once the cat shoots off like a rifle shot across the field toward the mountains in tremendous leaps until it finally fades into the background. + +Your legs let go and you crumple right where you stand. All your strength has evaporated and you feel cold chills running all through your body. It’s a good thing Sam was here with you or that thing might’ve decided you were dinner. You throw your arms around his neck and squeeze with what little you have left in you. He just stands there looking in the direction the great cat ran and doesn’t move. + +When you find a spot and settle in for the night, you give Sam a double helping of tortilla chips. He finally eats the last one, but doesn’t seem quite as interested in them as he did last night. You wish that you had something else you could give him, but he wouldn’t like the raw vegetables nearly as much. The next time you see a gas station or store, you’re going to buy him something with meat in it. + +You lie down like you did last night and he stretches out against you just as he did before. You feel warm and safe and once again you sleep right straight on through. + + + +Morning comes early and as you lie there stretching the kinks out, you notice that Sam isn’t there. You sit up and call “Sam?” and don’t hear anything. + +You jump up and look all around as far as you can see and still there is nothing. “Sam!” Your ears prickle as you start to think the worst. You quickly shove those thoughts aside and jump to your feet. + +You run up on the higher ground of the tracks and look all around. You finally spot him way back up the tracks walking back the way you came. “Sam!” He pauses for a moment without turning around and then continues on his way. You want to run after him, but that would only make it worse. He’s been gone from his home too long already and just needs to go back. You watch him until he’s little more than a speck before returning to collect your gear. + +You’re more wary as you go now. Your senses seem heightened and for the first time on this trip you feel more like a wild animal than a person. Your eyes are in a perpetual squint and are constantly sweeping over the terrain from one side to the other. Every far off movement of a bird or hare doesn’t escape your notice and you feel more alive and in tune with the world around you than ever before. With the long nights returns the restlessness and you resume the catnaps during midday. + +Where the track you’ve been following veers alongside another, you peer down the slope at the great train yard you’d left days ago. You’ve finally made it back and can continue on with your journey into the west. + + + +You find a garden hose curled up on the side of the first house you come upon and there’s no one in sight. You refill your water jugs and take off before someone spots you. You’re well stocked up again for a while at least. + + + +The train yard looks so different in the light of day. There are so many things going on and machinery loading and unloading the cars that you are a bit afraid to try to make your way through. You’ll either have to bite the bullet or else skirt around it and hopefully find another opportunity somewhere down the line. +> Go around +It wasn’t worth the risk to you so you head around the yard and make your way toward where the tracks resume. By the time a train leaves the yard, you find that it is moving much too fast for you to board it so you set off once again down the tracks on foot. + +Every couple of hours you have to ditch the tracks and hide behind a boulder or in a shallow ravine until a train passes. This is the busiest set of tracks that you’ve been on and if anyone spotted someone your age out here alone they would certainly report it. + +You have to take a break so you find a nice clear spot away from the tracks to kick back in and lean back on the bag. You have a sudden urge to pull out the card Jane made for you and look at the old postcards while you rest. You trace each line drawn in crayon on the page with your finger and think back to those few magical days. It seems like so long ago now. A lot has happened and every day that has passed seems to have steadily grown worse than the last. After you do this one thing, you should find someone nice to live with like Jane dreamed of. Surely there’s someone out there that would love and take care of you, someone you can depend on. You carefully refold the letter and slip it into your pocket and put everything else back into the treasure chest before giving your eyes a rest. + +You don’t even notice when you start to drift off, but you are rudely awakened by a brutal gust and find that a strong wind has kicked up. The dust and sand scour your face and you can barely breathe even with your shirt pulled up over your face. You stagger around trying to find some kind of shelter behind a rock or something, but there doesn’t seem to be anything nearby and you probably wouldn’t be able to see one anyway unless you were right on top of it. + +Your foot suddenly finds nothing but open air and you tumble headlong down a steep embankment. Your bag disappears as it goes one way and you go another. And then the world slips away into blackness. + + + +You wake to find your arm twisted under you—your shoulder screaming out in agony. You have scrapes and tiny cuts from the side of your face all the way down your legs. It takes a couple attempts before you’re able to roll over and sit up. + +You push yourself to your feet and look up at the steep incline that you fell down and don’t think you’d be able to climb back up there even if your arm wasn’t throbbing like it is. You can see the coat caught on a rock protruding from the ground near the top. One of the plastic jugs tied to the sleeves is crushed and the other one looks like it just exploded when it slammed into the ground. You don’t see your bag anywhere. + +You pace back and forth along the base of the cliff looking for any trace of your stuff and finally have no choice but to give up. You head down the wash and hope that it doesn’t dead end. + +The feeling finally comes back in your arm. You can move it, but not without pain and there’s a huge black and green bruise that goes from your shoulder to half way across your chest. + +The wash spills you out on the edge of a two-lane highway and there isn’t a car or a sign or anything at all except brushy desert and rocks for as far as you can see. The train tracks must be somewhere beyond the ridge behind you, but you’d never be able to get back to them that way. You look up at the sun and figure that you might as well keep following it since it has already led you this far. + +You close your eyes, take a deep breath and then set off down the road. + + + +You’ve been walking for hours when a car pulls out onto the blacktop from a gas station up ahead that you didn’t even know was there. The hot blazing sun reflecting off the pavement has made you half blind and has given you such a raging thirst that it feels like no amount of water could ever hope to quench. You don’t know if you’ll even be able to make it as far as the gas station. + +You’re torn between whether or not to flag the car down when it gets close or to find somewhere to hide until it passes by. +> Flag down the car +You stagger up to the edge of the road and raise your hands. The car slows down for a moment as the rear passenger window rolls down. As it gets nearly even with you, a bottle flies out and hits the pavement halfway to your feet. You don’t have the strength or energy to jump to the side so you can only stand there and watch as it bounces off the asphalt and hits you dead center in the chest before you can react. + +The pain is so sudden and intense that the wind is knocked completely out of you. Your face feels like it swells to nearly twice its size and burns all the way to your ears. You slump and fall to your knees. + +The car screeches to a stop and the driver’s door opens. “Why in the hell would you do that to a kid?! I oughtta kick your ass. You could’ve killed him, you know that?” + +You gasp for breath and can’t take in any air. You want to cry due to the immense pain, but your eyes are so dry that they can no longer produce tears. Your vision starts to waver and you fall forward. Just before you eat the blacktop, you feel hands grab you and swing you back into a seated position. + +“It’s okay. I’m here to help. He was just being a dumbass and didn’t know that he might actually hit you.” + +You wheeze and can feel your lungs slowly start to fill with air. Your vision is still fuzzing in and out, but it’s slowly beginning to clear. + +“What’s your name?” asks the teenage boy with closely cropped hair. + +You rock back and forth trying to help force more air into your lungs, and only wheeze louder in answer to his question. You look around to see several more teenagers standing around you. + +“Take it easy, man. Don’t try to rush it. I’m not going anywhere.” + +You’re not sure you want to tell them your real name. After all, one of them just tried to kill you. Maybe it was an accident and maybe it wasn’t. You try to think of a name—any name—and a sudden image of little Timmy that lived down the street from you before your parents got a divorce pops into your head. You remember how he used to say his name and before you can correct it, out comes “Tim-O-tee.” You take a deep breath and try hard not to laugh or even smile. “Timothy. My name is Timothy.” + +“What are you doing out here all by yourself, Timothy?” + +“I’m lost. I don’t know where this is.” + +“Where do you live? We’ll take you home,” says a slightly gruffer voice off to the side. + +You shrug as you try to come up with something to tell them. You look around, trying to come up with a story they might believe and your eyes settle on a far-off vertical rock piercing up through desert floor. “A long, long ways from here. I was s’posed to stay by the camper, but I wanted to look at the rocks.” + +One of the boys sucks air in through his teeth. + +“That wasn’t very smart. Kids get lost out here all the time and die,” says the one crouched down by you. “Where were you going? Maybe we can find your parents or get you to someone who can.” + +If they take you to the cops, you’ll never make it to the Grand Canyon. You have to change the subject. “I’m so thirsty. I need water.” + +The boy reaches up and snatches a bottle from one of the others and says “Here, drink this. We’ll get you some water.” + +You tip the over half full bottle and guzzle the orange soda down without stopping. It burns like fire and doesn’t help even a little, but it’s wet and wet is better than nothing. + +“We’ve gotta get back. We can’t take him with us,” says another boy under his breath. + +“We’re not leaving him out here, alone,” snaps the one you’ve been talking to, “Not here!” + +“There’s a gas station right there! It’s not like he’s lost out in the middle of the desert.” + +“We can’t go driving all over the country looking for his folks,” says another. + +“You shoulda thought of that before you chucked that bottle him!” he hisses up at the boy with slicked back hair—who just pivots around on his heels and stalks back to the car. Turning back to you, he says “C’mon. We’ll go find a phone or something,” picking you to your feet and helping you to the car. + + + +You hang back as the boys head into the gas station. If they call the police, they’ll take you home and you’ll never get to the Grand Canyon for Jane. + +As soon as the door swings shut, you dash to the end of the building and swing around the corner toward the back. There is a stack of oil drums at the base of the hill out back and you run in behind them. You hope this will be enough because there is no other cover close by that you can see. + +You squeeze into a hole between two of the drums that are resting on the ground and wait. It isn’t long before you hear them talking from not too far away from your hiding spot. + +“Where could he have got to?” asks the boy that’s been trying to help you. + +“I dunno. He just ran off, I guess. Maybe we just imagined the whole thing.” + +“Maybe he’s a spook and just went invisible,” laughs a third. + +“Don’t be a moron,” says the first, “He’s just scared.” + +“We can’t go traipsing all over the desert looking for him. When he gets tired, he’ll come back. We’re already gonna be late as it is.” + +“I guess. I just wanted to help the kid out, is all.” + +“Let’s just go before we get into trouble, ourselves.” + +You hear the car engine start and gravel raining down in their wake before you poke your head out. You can’t risk going inside because they probably already told whoever is in there about you and the police might still show up. + +You spot a coiled hose on the ground by the corner of the building that you must’ve run right by without even seeing. It’s just what you need. You trot over and reach for the faucet, but the handle has been removed. You study it a minute before picking up the hose a little at a time—working the contents out to the end—and manage to get a good mouthful of scalding hot water. You fight the pain and as soon as it’s cooled enough, you choke it down. + +You can’t go any further in this heat so you look for any kind of shade to get out of this blistering sun. You spot a low-lying rock a little ways up the hillside behind the building and judging by its angle it might offer some shelter from the sun. You drag yourself over to it. + +It looks like it would be the perfect place for a den of snakes, but peering under the shelf you see no sign of anything. You wedge yourself underneath where you’ll wait for nightfall before heading off again. + + + +You open your eyes to find that you are shivering. The temperature has dropped considerably. If you don’t end up freezing, it’ll at least be a welcome relief compared to that awful sun. + +After pulling yourself out, you stand and slink down the hill. Your feet are like bricks, but you have no other choice other than to go on. + +The gas station parking lot is deserted except for a run-down old pickup truck loaded down with all kinds of junk and covered with a tarp. It’s parked in the shade of the pump lights around the corner of the building and you have to walk around it to get to the highway. + +As you pass by it, its yellow license plate catches your eye. It says Arizona in green letters across the top and Grand Canyon State on the bottom. + +You peek around the corner of the building and see an old hunched over Indian man with a pony tail halfway down his back stepping up to the cash register. + +This could be your lucky break. You could try asking him for a ride, but what if he says no? Maybe hiding under the junk in the back and hope for the best would be smarter way to go. It won’t be long before he’s heading this way so you’d better hurry and make up you mind. +> Ask for a ride +You lean against the corner of the building to wait for the old man to step out and when he finally does, you rush over to meet him just as he reaches the corner. Even though he’s walking crooked, he’s still manages to jump back like a cat about to be stepped on. + +“Can you take me to Arizona?” + +He cuts his eyes around the dark parking lot. “No.” He starts walking toward his truck. + +“Please? I need to go to the Grand Canyon.” + +“No.” + +“Can you take me to the railroad tracks? I can walk the rest of the way.” + +“No.” He opens the door and climbs in. + +“Can you take me to the next town, then? I gotta find a new map ‘cause I lost my all my stuff.” + +“No.” + +“Do you have any water?” + +He pulls the door shut, starts his truck and pulls it in gear. + +You watch as he backs up and then drives off into the night. By the pump lights, you can see the trail of dust he left in his wake. Maybe you scared him or maybe that’s just the way he is. It doesn’t matter now. + +You look around at the door to the gas station. There’s no way you can go in there. You’ll have to think of something else. + +Maybe you can climb up the ridge behind the station and from there you might be able to see the tracks. It’s dark enough that you wouldn’t be able to see them until morning—which means that you’ll have to find a place to sleep for the night. You could keep going down the highway and maybe figure something out along the way. You don’t have any water so you’ll have to walk only at night and find cool places to sleep during the day. Whichever way you go, perhaps you’ll run into another farmhouse along the way to get more stuff. +> Take the road +You can probably make more miles on the highway than you could climbing the mountains and crossing the desert. Surely you’ll run into railroad tracks sooner or later. There are probably more houses along the road, too. + +You head around behind the gas station to stay out of the light and then make your way to the blacktop. There are no yard lights within sight, but you’ll probably see one before too long. You just have to make as many miles as you can while it’s still dark. + +You can still feel the heat of the day leeching out of the asphalt and the occasional slight breeze feels good against your clammy skin. Your mouth is dry, but you can probably manage to make it through the night since it isn’t really all that bad right now. You should make it just fine. + +You watch a shooting star that traverses nearly the whole western sky before burning itself out far to the south. Your wish is the same as you’ve had from the very beginning—to make Jane’s dream come true. It isn’t until a little while later that you start kicking yourself for not tacking a little water onto that wish. Oh, well. Surely you’ll find some before long. + +Even though there are no landmarks to go by, you somehow know that you’ve covered many a mile. There’s a blacker circle in the sky that looks like it might be a moon in a day or two. Until then, you’ll just have to make your way as best you can in the dark. + +The night has somehow become a comforting friend instead of the dreaded enemy you once feared. You don’t even know how it happened. It just—all of a sudden—did. + +Mile after mile and you don’t see much more than a vague dark shape every now and then out some distance from the side of the road. They would’ve been monsters lurking and ready to pounce only a few short weeks ago. Now, they’re just big rocks. +> Migration +In the lights of an oncoming car, the highway looks like it has little rippling waves on it. They’re flowing from one side of the blacktop to the other. This must be some kind of dream, but you don’t remember falling asleep. + +As the car gets closer, you can see that they aren’t waves at all. They’re snakes! Dozens of snakes. They move weird, though, throwing a loop and dragging themselves up to it before doing the whole process all over again. + +Snakes don’t move like that. They slide along on their bellies as they slither along. This has to be a dream. Still, you wouldn’t want to be bitten by a dream snake any more than you would a real one so you try not to let them get too close. + +You look up and the headlights flash in your eyes. You can’t see anything. You don’t know whether to get off the road or just keep going. It is a car, though. You’d better at least get off the road so you take a step sideways. + +Zzzht-zzzht-zzzht! + +You know that sound! And it’s much too close! You leap backward, but—whap!—it’s too late. Your leg is on fire! + +“Aaaah!” You fall sideways and—whap!—another hits your arm. Whap! Whap! Whap! You’re being struck from all sides now. Your arms, your legs, your face. Even the top of your head. + +The headlights are on you now and you hear the brakes squeal to a slow stop. Your whole body feels like you’ve fallen into a campfire and you can’t pull yourself out. Your body starts to quake and you’re helpless to stop it. + +“Oh my God in heaven!” shrieks a woman getting out of the car. “It’s a kid and he’s been snake bit!” + +Your tongue grows two sizes and wedges tight in your throat. You can’t breathe and you feel like you might pop from the building pressure. Even counting the beating you got from Mom, you’ve never felt such intense pain. It crashes through your body like a tidal wave. + +The headlights waver and grow steadily brighter and brighter until they fill your entire field of view. In the intense light, you can see Jane standing there looking down at you. She’s shaking her head. She reaches down and takes your hand—cupping it in hers. The only thing you can see now is her face against the blinding white light. + +The burning sensation swallows you whole. + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You lean against the corner of the building to wait for the old man to step out and when he finally does, you rush over to meet him just as he reaches the corner. Even though he’s walking crooked, he’s still manages to jump back like a cat about to be stepped on. + +“Can you take me to Arizona?” + +He cuts his eyes around the dark parking lot. “No.” He starts walking toward his truck. + +“Please? I need to go to the Grand Canyon.” + +“No.” + +“Can you take me to the railroad tracks? I can walk the rest of the way.” + +“No.” He opens the door and climbs in. + +“Can you take me to the next town, then? I gotta find a new map ‘cause I lost my all my stuff.” + +“No.” + +“Do you have any water?” + +He pulls the door shut, starts his truck and pulls it in gear. + +You watch as he backs up and then drives off into the night. By the pump lights, you can see the trail of dust he left in his wake. Maybe you scared him or maybe that’s just the way he is. It doesn’t matter now. + +You look around at the door to the gas station. There’s no way you can go in there. You’ll have to think of something else. + +Maybe you can climb up the ridge behind the station and from there you might be able to see the tracks. It’s dark enough that you wouldn’t be able to see them until morning—which means that you’ll have to find a place to sleep for the night. You could keep going down the highway and maybe figure something out along the way. You don’t have any water so you’ll have to walk only at night and find cool places to sleep during the day. Whichever way you go, perhaps you’ll run into another farmhouse along the way to get more stuff. +> Climb the ridge +It would probably be best not to walk along the highway where a cop might see you. You’ve come a long way and you don’t want to be taken home when you’re so close you can almost taste it. + +You head back around the building and plunge into the darkness. The sky overhead is crowded with stars, but since there is no moon out tonight they offer very little light to see your way by. You’ll have to take it slow and easy so you don’t step into a hole or trip over something in the dark. + +You take small steps. With each one the ground seems to get steeper and steeper until you finally have to crawl on your hands and knees to keep from sliding back down the hill. It would probably be much easier in the daytime, but it would be a lot hotter and you would need water. + +The ground becomes rocky and some of the stones are so big that you have to go around them. You keep working your way toward higher and higher ground until you run into a cliff that you can’t climb, then you follow along its base. Every now and then, your foot dislodges a rock and you listen as it gets fainter and fainter until it finally tumbles out of earshot. + +At long last, the cliff starts to fall away and the ground begins to slope around it. You keep going until you find a crevasse that leads right up through the middle of it. It’s probably the only way through so you heft yourself into it and it’s just like climbing stairs in the dark. You keep going up and up and up until you reach the top and the stars seem to hover right straight in front of you. + +You can’t see the ground on the other side and you sure don’t want to plummet off a cliff so you make yourself as comfortable as you can and wedge yourself in for the night. You pull your knees up and fold your arms against the cold. You close your eyes to try to sleep your way to morning. Maybe then you will be able to see whether you can climb down the other side or if you’ll just have to turn around and find some other way. + + + +The sky starts to brighten a dingy dishwater gray. You couldn’t sleep at all last night thanks to the cold. That’s fine, though, you can find a nice shady spot and sleep through the sun. First things first, though, you have to get off this mountain. + +You stretch your stiff legs out from under you and pull yourself up with the wooden clubs that are your arms. Through the gap in the rocks, you can see a narrow, winding rock shelf snaking its way around the far side of the rocks. You can’t see where it ends, but it beats going back down and all the way around. + +Out across the valley, you can see a gray line at the base of the far away cliffs. It must be the tracks. It’s a long ways away. The sun will be up before too long and you’ll have to find a place to sleep in a few hours so you’d better get moving. + +You wriggle your way over the top of the rocks and stretch out your toes until you can feel the ledge beneath them. It’s a little wider than your shoes are long so it shouldn’t be all that hard to stay on. + +Taking small steps and crowding the rock face as best you can, you slowly make your way down and down. It’s actually easier than it looked from the top. + +The sun spills its rays over the far horizon and they blanket you in their warmth. Your stiff muscles melt away. You can see farther now and the rocky ledge spreads out onto a slope several dozen yards away. You’re going to make it just fine. + +You look down to see just how much farther you have to go and it grabs you. Everything looks so tiny down there. The world sways—first one way and then the other—and your legs no longer want to move. You clutch the rock face with all your strength and take tiny breaths so you don’t accidentally push yourself backward off the ledge. You’re legs start shaking and your palms get all sweaty. + +You close your eyes and feel the blood racing in your veins. You know you have to keep going, but how? If you fall off, it would take a long, long time to reach the bottom. You might not even pass out and feel the whole thing when you splat! + +Don’t be such a fraidy cat. + +She’s right. You can do this. You snap your eyes open and start the tiny sideways steps again. It doesn’t take long for you to reach the rocky slope. From there, you memorize the mountain peak you need to walk toward to get to that gray line and then set out to make it as far as you can before the sun gets too high. + +You’ve covered quite a bit of ground when you find several big boulders in a roughly circular formation and sit beneath the largest one for its shade. You manage to nap quite nicely until the sun gets far enough to the west that you have to move to a different shady spot. + +When the sun has dipped more than halfway behind the horizon, you set out to make as many miles as you can before it gets too dark to see. You feel weak from hunger and from lack of water, but your will pushes you on. + +About halfway through the night, you look up to see a tiny sliver of moon directly overhead. It’s no wonder that you’ve been able to keep going this long. Even with that tiny bit of light, you can see the ground quite clearly. The faint shadows contrast against the background and your eyes seem to have adjusted themselves to the lack of light. + +It’s warmer down here than it was last night, but the air still has that certain crispness to it. You haven’t been able to see the mountain peak for hours, but are confident that you haven’t strayed too much from your intended goal. You just keep pushing yourself. You are going to make it. You have no other choice. + +You continue on. You’ve been walking for hours and you feel like your legs are about to fall off. If you don’t just collapse, that is. But, you must keep going. There will be time to rest tomorrow—when it is too hot. + +The stars and the moon flow gently to the west, but you don’t even notice. You are too focused on putting one foot in front of the other. + +Suddenly, you see a straight black double line running perpendicular to your path. It looks like it might be the edge of a cliff so you approach it ever so slowly. When you’re nearly upon it, you discover that it is higher than the rest of the ground around it. + +It’s the tracks! You’ve found them! You really found them! They weren’t nearly as far away as they looked. You feel great! You are KING! + +You turn toward the west—nearly skipping—and continue on your journey. Now all you have to do is find some water and some food, then you’ll be all set. + +You watch as the sliver of moon finally disappears behind the black horizon and the stars start to twinkle just a tiny bit brighter. You can barely make out the rails on either side of you, but there’s still more than enough light to guide you. + +You trudge on and on in the darkness. It feels somehow comforting to you now. Like you might be the only person in the whole world. The cloak of night is your friend, your companion. + +As the sky starts to gray, you can see farther and farther with each passing minute. There are no yard lights. No houses. No distant towns. No nothing. You feel completely alone now. It gives you a lump in your throat. + +The sun is on your back now and you can feel its rays trickling warmth into your rigid skin. You can’t turn around to look at it. You have to save every last bit of your strength. You can barely lift your legs and the toes of your shoes scrub furrows in the dust. Still, you plod on. + +When you’ve nearly caught up with your shadow, you scan the area for some cool shade. You see a pile of old lumber out all by its lonesome. It may have been some kind of mining shack at one time, but it’s impossible to tell. It’s the only thing within sight and the two vertical boards won’t offer any shade for hours yet, but you can’t go on. You have to get off your feet so that means you have work to do. + +You stumble over and start dragging and prying boards from the ground as best you can. It takes some doing since half of them are buried in sand. You are just pulling up the last one when you see something shiny under it. You drop the board as you jump back thinking at first that it might be a snake. It couldn’t be, though, it didn’t even resemble anything that could even be alive. + +Sticking another board under the one you dropped so you don’t have to stick your bare hand in there, you pry it up. It takes a moment for the sun’s glare to clear from your eyes and then you see a magical treasure. It is a half-crushed tin cup that is about a third full of old water. It is dark and has a funny smell to it, but it’s wet. You aren’t sure that you should drink it, but you might die if you don’t get water soon. +> Drink it +This is life or death. You have no choice but to risk drinking it. You hold your nose against the foul stench and gulp it down. It isn’t really that bad and sure beats dying. + +You go back to work and before long, you have something that resembles something that someone might accidentally mistake for a shack. It’s more of a lean-to than anything, but at least there’s shade. + +You get down on all fours and crawl through a narrow opening at the bottom. The ground is still hot and could possibly blister if you dally. Once inside, you scoop handful after handful off the top and shove it against the sides at the bottom. It’ll help hold them up as well as give you a faintly cooler spot to lay down. + +Slumping over, something bites your little finger. It stings a little, but nothing serious. You push yourself back up and see a tiny scorpion right where your hand was so you slam your fist down on it and crush it before it can strike again. You don’t see any others, so you lay down and look at the white sky through the cracks for a while to make yourself sleepy. + + + +You awake with a shiver and barely have the strength to raise yourself up. The sun is still high and your hand is throbbing something awful, but you barely notice that pain compared to the vise that has seized your stomach. Your belly writhes and tumbles in searing agony and besides that, you need water desperately and your tongue feels like sandpaper in your mouth. + +Pushing yourself back against the far wall so you can catch what little light filters through the cracks, you watch as the sun makes its ever so slow descent. You wrap your sweaty arms around your knees and hug them close to you in an attempt to ward off the shivers. + +Your hair is slicked against your temples and you’re having trouble focusing. This just isn’t going to be your day. You close your eyes and try to take in deep breaths, but hot air you suck in with each one just makes you feel that much worse. + + + +After a while, you open your eyes and between the vertical planks you can see the light fading from the sky. There are reds and oranges and pinks. Even through the slits, it is breathtaking. You only wish you could walk out to see the whole thing. + +You can barely move your head and it’s impossible to move the rest of you. You can’t take this anymore, but what choice do you have? You can only sit here to wait for the inevitable. Too bad you don’t have a blanket, because it is getting so, so cold. Your teeth would chatter if you only had the energy to do so. + +The sky deepens and you can see the first twinkle of a star. You should make a wish. But, it’s much too late for that. You know it as sure as you know anything at all. All you have left waiting for you is the inevitable. + +Maybe if you made the right wish, it might come true. You can’t close your eyes to make the wish or you may never get them open again. You take a long, hard swallow and feel the sides of your throat scratch together. + +You focus hard on the star until you can feel it pulling back at you. You try to mouth the words, but you don’t have the strength. Willing with everything you have—everything you are—you send your wish soaring toward that tiny pinprick of a speck—faster than the speed of light. + +Jane steps from the corner of your little makeshift shelter. She looks so beautiful, yet so sad. She kneels down beside you and stares deep into your eyes while you lose yourself in hers. You drown in those bright green eyes. + +She may not have gotten her wish, but you were granted yours. + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It would probably be best not to walk along the highway where a cop might see you. You’ve come a long way and you don’t want to be taken home when you’re so close you can almost taste it. + +You head back around the building and plunge into the darkness. The sky overhead is crowded with stars, but since there is no moon out tonight they offer very little light to see your way by. You’ll have to take it slow and easy so you don’t step into a hole or trip over something in the dark. + +You take small steps. With each one the ground seems to get steeper and steeper until you finally have to crawl on your hands and knees to keep from sliding back down the hill. It would probably be much easier in the daytime, but it would be a lot hotter and you would need water. + +The ground becomes rocky and some of the stones are so big that you have to go around them. You keep working your way toward higher and higher ground until you run into a cliff that you can’t climb, then you follow along its base. Every now and then, your foot dislodges a rock and you listen as it gets fainter and fainter until it finally tumbles out of earshot. + +At long last, the cliff starts to fall away and the ground begins to slope around it. You keep going until you find a crevasse that leads right up through the middle of it. It’s probably the only way through so you heft yourself into it and it’s just like climbing stairs in the dark. You keep going up and up and up until you reach the top and the stars seem to hover right straight in front of you. + +You can’t see the ground on the other side and you sure don’t want to plummet off a cliff so you make yourself as comfortable as you can and wedge yourself in for the night. You pull your knees up and fold your arms against the cold. You close your eyes to try to sleep your way to morning. Maybe then you will be able to see whether you can climb down the other side or if you’ll just have to turn around and find some other way. + + + +The sky starts to brighten a dingy dishwater gray. You couldn’t sleep at all last night thanks to the cold. That’s fine, though, you can find a nice shady spot and sleep through the sun. First things first, though, you have to get off this mountain. + +You stretch your stiff legs out from under you and pull yourself up with the wooden clubs that are your arms. Through the gap in the rocks, you can see a narrow, winding rock shelf snaking its way around the far side of the rocks. You can’t see where it ends, but it beats going back down and all the way around. + +Out across the valley, you can see a gray line at the base of the far away cliffs. It must be the tracks. It’s a long ways away. The sun will be up before too long and you’ll have to find a place to sleep in a few hours so you’d better get moving. + +You wriggle your way over the top of the rocks and stretch out your toes until you can feel the ledge beneath them. It’s a little wider than your shoes are long so it shouldn’t be all that hard to stay on. + +Taking small steps and crowding the rock face as best you can, you slowly make your way down and down. It’s actually easier than it looked from the top. + +The sun spills its rays over the far horizon and they blanket you in their warmth. Your stiff muscles melt away. You can see farther now and the rocky ledge spreads out onto a slope several dozen yards away. You’re going to make it just fine. + +You look down to see just how much farther you have to go and it grabs you. Everything looks so tiny down there. The world sways—first one way and then the other—and your legs no longer want to move. You clutch the rock face with all your strength and take tiny breaths so you don’t accidentally push yourself backward off the ledge. You’re legs start shaking and your palms get all sweaty. + +You close your eyes and feel the blood racing in your veins. You know you have to keep going, but how? If you fall off, it would take a long, long time to reach the bottom. You might not even pass out and feel the whole thing when you splat! + +Don’t be such a fraidy cat. + +She’s right. You can do this. You snap your eyes open and start the tiny sideways steps again. It doesn’t take long for you to reach the rocky slope. From there, you memorize the mountain peak you need to walk toward to get to that gray line and then set out to make it as far as you can before the sun gets too high. + +You’ve covered quite a bit of ground when you find several big boulders in a roughly circular formation and sit beneath the largest one for its shade. You manage to nap quite nicely until the sun gets far enough to the west that you have to move to a different shady spot. + +When the sun has dipped more than halfway behind the horizon, you set out to make as many miles as you can before it gets too dark to see. You feel weak from hunger and from lack of water, but your will pushes you on. + +About halfway through the night, you look up to see a tiny sliver of moon directly overhead. It’s no wonder that you’ve been able to keep going this long. Even with that tiny bit of light, you can see the ground quite clearly. The faint shadows contrast against the background and your eyes seem to have adjusted themselves to the lack of light. + +It’s warmer down here than it was last night, but the air still has that certain crispness to it. You haven’t been able to see the mountain peak for hours, but are confident that you haven’t strayed too much from your intended goal. You just keep pushing yourself. You are going to make it. You have no other choice. + +You continue on. You’ve been walking for hours and you feel like your legs are about to fall off. If you don’t just collapse, that is. But, you must keep going. There will be time to rest tomorrow—when it is too hot. + +The stars and the moon flow gently to the west, but you don’t even notice. You are too focused on putting one foot in front of the other. + +Suddenly, you see a straight black double line running perpendicular to your path. It looks like it might be the edge of a cliff so you approach it ever so slowly. When you’re nearly upon it, you discover that it is higher than the rest of the ground around it. + +It’s the tracks! You’ve found them! You really found them! They weren’t nearly as far away as they looked. You feel great! You are KING! + +You turn toward the west—nearly skipping—and continue on your journey. Now all you have to do is find some water and some food, then you’ll be all set. + +You watch as the sliver of moon finally disappears behind the black horizon and the stars start to twinkle just a tiny bit brighter. You can barely make out the rails on either side of you, but there’s still more than enough light to guide you. + +You trudge on and on in the darkness. It feels somehow comforting to you now. Like you might be the only person in the whole world. The cloak of night is your friend, your companion. + +As the sky starts to gray, you can see farther and farther with each passing minute. There are no yard lights. No houses. No distant towns. No nothing. You feel completely alone now. It gives you a lump in your throat. + +The sun is on your back now and you can feel its rays trickling warmth into your rigid skin. You can’t turn around to look at it. You have to save every last bit of your strength. You can barely lift your legs and the toes of your shoes scrub furrows in the dust. Still, you plod on. + +When you’ve nearly caught up with your shadow, you scan the area for some cool shade. You see a pile of old lumber out all by its lonesome. It may have been some kind of mining shack at one time, but it’s impossible to tell. It’s the only thing within sight and the two vertical boards won’t offer any shade for hours yet, but you can’t go on. You have to get off your feet so that means you have work to do. + +You stumble over and start dragging and prying boards from the ground as best you can. It takes some doing since half of them are buried in sand. You are just pulling up the last one when you see something shiny under it. You drop the board as you jump back thinking at first that it might be a snake. It couldn’t be, though, it didn’t even resemble anything that could even be alive. + +Sticking another board under the one you dropped so you don’t have to stick your bare hand in there, you pry it up. It takes a moment for the sun’s glare to clear from your eyes and then you see a magical treasure. It is a half-crushed tin cup that is about a third full of old water. It is dark and has a funny smell to it, but it’s wet. You aren’t sure that you should drink it, but you might die if you don’t get water soon. +> Don't drink it +It’s probably better not to risk drinking it, but you sure don’t intend to waste such a gift. You pull your shirt off and wet it carefully from the cup—being extremely careful not to let even a single drop roll off onto the ground. You wipe your back and chest off with the cool rag as best you can before wrapping it around your head like that man did in that movie you saw a long time ago on TV. + +You go back to work and before long, you have something that resembles something that someone might accidentally mistake for a shack. It’s more of a lean-to than anything, but at least there’s shade. + +You get down on all fours and crawl through a narrow opening at the bottom. The ground is still hot and could possibly blister if you dally. Once inside, you scoop handful after handful off the top and shove it against the sides at the bottom. It’ll help hold them up as well as give you a faintly cooler spot to lay down. + +Slumping over, something bites your little finger. It stings a little, but nothing serious. You push yourself back up and see a tiny scorpion right where your hand was so you slam your fist down on it and crush it before it can reset itself to strike again. You don’t see any others, so you lay down and look at the white sky through the cracks for a while to make yourself sleepy. + + + +When you wake up, the sun is still high and your hand is throbbing something awful. You need water desperately and your tongue feels like sandpaper in your mouth. + +Pushing yourself back against the far wall you try to get your mind off of your hand by watching what little light filters through the cracks. While you watch as the sun makes its ever so slow descent, you wipe yourself off every now and then with the cool rag—truly a gift from heaven. + +You don’t know when the throbbing in your hand went away or when your head sagged, but you open your eyes and between the vertical planks you can see the light fading from the sky. There are reds and oranges and pinks. Even through the slits, it is breathtaking. + +You scurry back through the hole in the boards and see the tapestry of the western sky in all its glory. The sun has already set, but has left an explosion of color in its wake. You stand there a moment in awe before setting off down the tracks once more. + +You walk through the night taking frequent rest breaks to rub away the burning cramps in your legs and once, you have to move away from the tracks and go prone when a freight roars through. You don’t think you’ll be able to make it much farther if you don’t find drinkable water soon. + +When the sun starts to peek its head, you scan the barren landscape looking for both water and another daytime shelter. It’s already getting too hot for comfort. Up ahead a couple of miles, you see a string of hoppers sitting off on a siding near the foot of a small mountain. They won’t offer much, but at least it’s shade. You quicken your pace despite your toes attempting to curl themselves in under your feet. + +There’s plenty of shade under the hoppers when you reach them, but already they are giving off more heat than would be comfortable. You do spot a dusty brown prickly pear patch off toward the mountain so it’s a good thing you decided to stop early in the day. It seems like so long ago when Harvey first showed you that you could eat it. You’ll just have to be really careful when you pick and skin it since you lost your knife. + +You rush over and fall to your knees and start to carefully pluck one of the leafy pads. The tiny spines prick at your fingers so you take extra time to be even more careful. When you have it in your hands, you dig the skin off of it with your thumbnail. The moisture runs down and drips off your hand. You greedily lap up the sweet juice as you continue digging away the skin and spines. When you have enough exposed you take a bite and the sweet flavor explodes in your mouth. It doesn’t taste bland at all. Maybe it’s because it’s later in the year and maybe more ripe or maybe it’s just because you haven’t eaten or had anything to drink in days. + +After three pads, you can’t hold any more but you continue chewing up bite after bite to get at the juice. While you’re gorging yourself, you see a deep shadow at the base of the mountain that looks like it has a door in it. Weird. Who would put a door in a mountain? + +You push yourself to your feet and stumble over to the shadow and see that it’s not really a door, but a boarded up hole. A cool draft hits you right square in the face. You have to get in there! At the bottom and under a faded sign that has slipped it’s nail, there’s a gap just big enough for you wriggle your way through if you swing the sign aside. It reminds you of the night you and Jane went into that spooky old house. + +C’mon, I know the way in. + +W-wait. What if something’s in there? What if someone catches us? + +Don’t worry. No one ever comes here. This place is ‘bandoned. + +It seems so long ago and in a place you can barely remember and to a boy who no longer exists. Maybe even in another life, perhaps. + +You squat down and hold the sign up with one hand as you work your way inside. Sand sifts down on you as you pass through the opening—but only a little. From somewhere deep in the bowels of the cave, you can hear water dripping into a pool. Too bad it isn’t outside. It’s been so long since you’ve been swimming. It’d be a nice way to cool off. + +Sitting just far enough inside that you’re out of the direct sunlight, you lean back to soak up the cool, damp air. Your stomach rumbles and cramps up, but you barely notice as you fall fast asleep. + + + +You wake up shivering and crawl back into the blast furnace through the little gap. You have a vague recollection of an eerie yawning groan having disturbed your sleep, but it quickly fades into the ether along with the dream that inspired it. You head back over to the prickly pear patch and perform your routine again. It’ll take some time before you are back to one-hundred percent. Right now, you aren’t even considering leaving this wonderful place. + +Once you’ve had your fill again, you crawl back into your hidey-hole. You have to crawl in a little deeper since the sun is at a lower angle and its rays stretch in nearly twice as far. It’s not that you mind sleeping in the daytime so much, you just don’t want those burning fingers on your skin. + +You see a lump over against the far wall and have to investigate what it might be. You carefully creep over in case it might be an animal—even though by its shape, it couldn’t possibly be. You reach out with the toe of your shoe and give it a light nudge. It teeters to one side and comes back to rest in the same place with a tinny sound that reverberates off the walls. You immediately know what this object is. It’s a bucket! + +If you can find the source of that dripping sound, you could have all the water you’d need for a couple days and surely you’d run into more by the time it is empty. +> Try to find the source +Crawling slowly through the dark on your knees and feeling ahead of you with one hand while dragging the pail with the other, you make your way deep into the cave. The sound gets gradually louder the deeper you go until you feel spatter hit your face. It’s coming from the wall from drips overhead, but the sound of the pool is still far away so you continue on. + +The ground is damp for quite a ways before it starts getting dry again. It doesn’t appear that the sound is getting any closer. If you don’t find it soon, you might as well turn back. You don’t want to get lost in this cave. You might not be able to find your way back. + +The floor keeps rising steadily and turns from sand to rock. It slopes up steeply and you have trouble holding on enough while climbing with only one free hand. You’ve come just about as far as you dare. You try to determine how much farther the sound of the pool is and in what direction, but the echo off the rocks makes it sound like it’s coming from everywhere. + +It’s no use. You shimmy back down the rock and start making your way back. You can feel eyes on you from the darkness, but can’t tell from which direction. One way is as black as another. The only thing you can see is tiny white flashes at the edge of your vision. + +You reach the damp sand again and have just started across it when the ground under you starts shifting forward. You twist around and try to scramble back, but it’s moving too swift and you’re losing more ground than you gain. Then suddenly, you are in open air and tumbling head over feet. The fall seems to take forever. It’s only seconds, but time has slowed down for you. + +“AAAAHH!” + +“AaaAaaAaaahh!” your echo screams back at you. + +You hit the water head first. You frantically paddle for the surface. There is absolutely no light so can’t tell which way is up. Your lungs are empty and you fight to not let the water in. + +Finally, you break the surface and tread water as best as you can, but you don’t have the strength to last long. It dawns on you that you still have the bucket so you flip it upside-down—letting the water spill out and catch some air—to use as a float. + +When you’ve finally caught your breath, you kick and paddle over to a slimy and slick wall. There are no handholds so you slowly move along looking for something to grab onto. + +You come to a ledge that is right at water level and slowly work your way up onto it. When you’re finally seated, you place the bucket beside you and take slow even breaths to slow your racing heart. That was way too close. You stand up and search the slimy wall and find nothing as far up as you can reach. You move from one end to the other and find nothing but the same. + +When you’ve regained your strength, you slip back into the water and—holding onto the bucket—start feeling around some more as you make your way around the pool. You make it back to the same ledge before long. + + + +You don’t know how long you’ve been sitting here. Hours? Days? Weeks? It doesn’t matter. It wasn’t long before you couldn’t feel your legs. Then your arms wouldn’t work anymore. You can’t even tell if your eyes are open or closed at this point. + +Out in the middle of the blackness, you see a shimmering speck of light that grows and grows until it finally takes shape. It’s that dark haired girl with that mischievous grin. Her toes barely skim the water as she glides softly over to you. She reaches down and cups her hand over yours as she looks deeply into your eyes with those bright green eyes. + +You manage to mouth a word, but does it really escape your lips? + +“Jane” your echo whispers back. + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It’s probably better not to risk drinking it, but you sure don’t intend to waste such a gift. You pull your shirt off and wet it carefully from the cup—being extremely careful not to let even a single drop roll off onto the ground. You wipe your back and chest off with the cool rag as best you can before wrapping it around your head like that man did in that movie you saw a long time ago on TV. + +You go back to work and before long, you have something that resembles something that someone might accidentally mistake for a shack. It’s more of a lean-to than anything, but at least there’s shade. + +You get down on all fours and crawl through a narrow opening at the bottom. The ground is still hot and could possibly blister if you dally. Once inside, you scoop handful after handful off the top and shove it against the sides at the bottom. It’ll help hold them up as well as give you a faintly cooler spot to lay down. + +Slumping over, something bites your little finger. It stings a little, but nothing serious. You push yourself back up and see a tiny scorpion right where your hand was so you slam your fist down on it and crush it before it can reset itself to strike again. You don’t see any others, so you lay down and look at the white sky through the cracks for a while to make yourself sleepy. + + + +When you wake up, the sun is still high and your hand is throbbing something awful. You need water desperately and your tongue feels like sandpaper in your mouth. + +Pushing yourself back against the far wall you try to get your mind off of your hand by watching what little light filters through the cracks. While you watch as the sun makes its ever so slow descent, you wipe yourself off every now and then with the cool rag—truly a gift from heaven. + +You don’t know when the throbbing in your hand went away or when your head sagged, but you open your eyes and between the vertical planks you can see the light fading from the sky. There are reds and oranges and pinks. Even through the slits, it is breathtaking. + +You scurry back through the hole in the boards and see the tapestry of the western sky in all its glory. The sun has already set, but has left an explosion of color in its wake. You stand there a moment in awe before setting off down the tracks once more. + +You walk through the night taking frequent rest breaks to rub away the burning cramps in your legs and once, you have to move away from the tracks and go prone when a freight roars through. You don’t think you’ll be able to make it much farther if you don’t find drinkable water soon. + +When the sun starts to peek its head, you scan the barren landscape looking for both water and another daytime shelter. It’s already getting too hot for comfort. Up ahead a couple of miles, you see a string of hoppers sitting off on a siding near the foot of a small mountain. They won’t offer much, but at least it’s shade. You quicken your pace despite your toes attempting to curl themselves in under your feet. + +There’s plenty of shade under the hoppers when you reach them, but already they are giving off more heat than would be comfortable. You do spot a dusty brown prickly pear patch off toward the mountain so it’s a good thing you decided to stop early in the day. It seems like so long ago when Harvey first showed you that you could eat it. You’ll just have to be really careful when you pick and skin it since you lost your knife. + +You rush over and fall to your knees and start to carefully pluck one of the leafy pads. The tiny spines prick at your fingers so you take extra time to be even more careful. When you have it in your hands, you dig the skin off of it with your thumbnail. The moisture runs down and drips off your hand. You greedily lap up the sweet juice as you continue digging away the skin and spines. When you have enough exposed you take a bite and the sweet flavor explodes in your mouth. It doesn’t taste bland at all. Maybe it’s because it’s later in the year and maybe more ripe or maybe it’s just because you haven’t eaten or had anything to drink in days. + +After three pads, you can’t hold any more but you continue chewing up bite after bite to get at the juice. While you’re gorging yourself, you see a deep shadow at the base of the mountain that looks like it has a door in it. Weird. Who would put a door in a mountain? + +You push yourself to your feet and stumble over to the shadow and see that it’s not really a door, but a boarded up hole. A cool draft hits you right square in the face. You have to get in there! At the bottom and under a faded sign that has slipped it’s nail, there’s a gap just big enough for you wriggle your way through if you swing the sign aside. It reminds you of the night you and Jane went into that spooky old house. + +C’mon, I know the way in. + +W-wait. What if something’s in there? What if someone catches us? + +Don’t worry. No one ever comes here. This place is ‘bandoned. + +It seems so long ago and in a place you can barely remember and to a boy who no longer exists. Maybe even in another life, perhaps. + +You squat down and hold the sign up with one hand as you work your way inside. Sand sifts down on you as you pass through the opening—but only a little. From somewhere deep in the bowels of the cave, you can hear water dripping into a pool. Too bad it isn’t outside. It’s been so long since you’ve been swimming. It’d be a nice way to cool off. + +Sitting just far enough inside that you’re out of the direct sunlight, you lean back to soak up the cool, damp air. Your stomach rumbles and cramps up, but you barely notice as you fall fast asleep. + + + +You wake up shivering and crawl back into the blast furnace through the little gap. You have a vague recollection of an eerie yawning groan having disturbed your sleep, but it quickly fades into the ether along with the dream that inspired it. You head back over to the prickly pear patch and perform your routine again. It’ll take some time before you are back to one-hundred percent. Right now, you aren’t even considering leaving this wonderful place. + +Once you’ve had your fill again, you crawl back into your hidey-hole. You have to crawl in a little deeper since the sun is at a lower angle and its rays stretch in nearly twice as far. It’s not that you mind sleeping in the daytime so much, you just don’t want those burning fingers on your skin. + +You see a lump over against the far wall and have to investigate what it might be. You carefully creep over in case it might be an animal—even though by its shape, it couldn’t possibly be. You reach out with the toe of your shoe and give it a light nudge. It teeters to one side and comes back to rest in the same place with a tinny sound that reverberates off the walls. You immediately know what this object is. It’s a bucket! + +If you can find the source of that dripping sound, you could have all the water you’d need for a couple days and surely you’d run into more by the time it is empty. +> Continue on your way +You carry the bucket back with you into the light and examine it for holes. There aren’t any that you can see so you set it near the entrance and crawl back out of the light, lay down and sleep for the rest of the day. + + + +When you wake up, there is barely enough light to see your way out by and you have trouble even making your way back. You manage to squeeze your way back outside and a warm, stiff breeze ripples its fingers over your skin and through your hair. It feels rather pleasant after being in the cool for so long. + +With bucket in hand, you stroll over to the prickly pears and begin carefully filling it with the pads that you don’t immediately eat. There’s not much left of the patch when you get done with it. + +You look over your shoulder to see that the moon is more than a sliver and just a might above the horizon behind you. You decide that you might as well continue on since there’s no point in staying in one place for too long. + +You pick yourself up, dust yourself off and set off down the tracks again. There are faint shadows outlining each railroad tie and you can see the wispy shapes of gravel off to the sides. There is a bluish tint to the desert where it fades into nothingness only a stones throw to each side. + +You don’t have to stop to rest nearly as often and when you do, you carefully peel bits of prickly pear and suck out the juice. You’ve got enough to last you for days as long as you don’t get too piggish with it. And now that you’ve found out how magical it is, you’ll keep an eye out for patches so you can keep your bucket as full of it as you can. + +Once in the night, you have to get away from the tracks and go prone when an East-bound freight rumbles through. It must be miles and miles long with six roaring engines straining to keep it moving. It’s too dark to make out the cargo, but it has to be really something special. You long to be on it heading back to familiar territory, but what magical things it must have seen before reaching this point. Even after it passes out of sight and then hearing, you can still feel its vibrations in the tracks. + +The moon drifts by overhead—dragging the stars in its wake. You take the ties two at a time until the bottoms of your feet are so puffy that you have to slow to every one. The dark silhouettes of the mountains to your right take form as they rip free of the night sky and go from black to red to gold before you turn around and see the sun spilling over the horizon to your rear. It is a most awe inspiring sight of reds and oranges and golds fading into lavender at its fringes. + +You scan the barren landscape around you and spot a tiny twinkle far up ahead. Maybe it’s something and maybe it’s not, but the tracks will come close enough to it that you’re going to find out. The landscape is sparsely dotted with bluish-green lumps and by their shape you can tell that they are prickly pear patches. They are everywhere! There’s so much that you’ll never go hungry or thirsty again! You’ll just grab what you need from the patches when they come close to the tracks to keep your bucket full. + +There is a sudden explosion all around you and your heart skips a couple of beats when a dozen or so tiny pigs shoot out in all directions from their dusty wallows surprised by your sudden appearance. Even the grown ones are no bigger than a dog. It takes you a moment for your blood to settle enough that you can keep walking. + +After you go a little farther, you are close enough to see what the thing is that is twinkling. It’s a windmill out all by itself. The shiny fan blades are high enough off the ground that they catch a ripple every now and then, but the tail fin is broken and bent sideways so it can no longer face into the wind. Did there used to be a farmhouse near it and now it’s gone? Maybe there’s still some stuff laying around it. You pick up your pace in the hopes of finding something salvageable. + +From somewhere not too far off toward the mountains, you hear a sound like someone screaming with rage. Your hair stands on end and you freeze in your steps. You carefully scan the area and see nothing but a barren, sand-colored landscape dotted with the occasional boulder, cactus or prickly pear patch. Everything is eerily still. + +You take a tentative step down the tracks while keeping a wary eye on the desert. Something is out there, but you don’t have a clue what it might be. A ghost, maybe? Or some madman? You are poised to run at the first sign of movement. + +Before long, you are adjacent to the windmill and—after taking a last, long look around—head down the gravel embankment toward it. You see a long galvanized water trough—a little bigger than the bathtub you had in your old house before your mom and dad got a divorce—a short distance from its base connected to a rusty tank via a short, bent pipe. Maybe there will be enough water to soak in and cool off before the sun creeps high enough to scorch the day. + +When you get up to the tank, you see about an inch of water in the bottom. You could still use it to cool off in and rinse away several layers of dirt and dust that you’ve picked up since the last time you bathed so you strip down to your altogethers and dip your toe in. The water is a bit warm now even though it’s still early in the day, but not so much that you can’t stand it and when you climb back out the gentle breeze should take care of the rest. + +You sit down and start dipping water with your hands and pouring it over your head. It feels so good on your bare skin as you rub away the grit and dust. You haven’t had a bath in a long, long time so you make the most if it. + +You lean back and bask in the sun for a few minutes soaking everything up and notice a metal latter going up the side of the windmill. There’s no telling what you’d be able to see from up there. As soon as you’ve dried off, you want to climb it and have a good look around. There’s nothing on the ground here for as far as you can see. Why would anyone put a windmill out in the middle of nowhere? There’s not even a fence to keep in animals if that’s what it’s for. + +You stand up and are reaching over the side for your clothes when you hear that scream again from much closer this time. Your blood runs cold. You whip your head around toward the tracks and the direction it came from. There on the ridge, you see a big tan cat just like the one you saw when you were with Sam only this one isn’t quite as big even though it is twice as scary. + +Before it heads down the slope toward you you are already climbing up the tower. When you reach the top, you look back over your shoulder to see it circling below and looking up at you. You look over and see an old paint can full of bolts and heavy, rusty adjustable wrench which you can use as a nice weapon. As long as it can’t figure out how to use the ladder, you are safe since there’s no way it could climb the metal legs. You pick up the wrench and slap it against your palm. If it does manage to climb the ladder, you’re ready to smash its head and paws as soon as it gets within arm’s reach. + +Its eyes are fixed on yours and its ears are laid back when it makes a tremendous leap. You stagger backward and manage to grab onto one of the center posts that angle to the ground at the very last second while you are teetering and flailing your arms. The cat can jump much higher than you expected, but still only came a little over halfway to the top. After a couple more attempts with no more success than it had the first time, it stalks around and swats your bucket through the air—sending its contents spraying out in a wide arc. + +“Go away! Leave me alone!” + +You grab a hand full of bolts and start pelting the ground around him with the tiny missiles. Only one manages to hit its mark and the cat only flicks its shoulder muscle in response. + +The cat pays no mind to your words and only continues pacing around the tower while staring up at you. There’s really nothing you can do but wait it out and hope it gets interested in something else or bored enough that it forgets all about you and leaves. You sit down with your back against the center post and keep a watchful eye on the cat below in case it figures out how to use the ladder. + +After a few minutes, the big cat moves over to opposite side of the storage tank from the trough and lays down in the sliver of shade it provides. It’s only going to get hotter up here as the sun gets higher and higher. You have no choice but to suffer through it. There is a decent breeze up here that the cat doesn’t have. Maybe it’ll be enough. + +You lean your head back against the post and close your eyes, but only to slits because you don’t want that thing to get out of your sight. It yawns and does the same, but doesn’t lay its head down. From here on in it’s just going to be a waiting game. +> Life happens +Hours have passed when you hear a low rumble coming from behind you. You look down at your nemesis to see that it has its head down on its paws and doesn’t seem to hear it. You look over your shoulder to see bright red pickup kicking up a cloud of dust and heading straight for you. + +You get to your feet just as the pickup skids to a stop and the door flies open. + +“What the hell are you doing up there!?” yells a beefy man with a scraggly beard. “Get down from there!” + +You look down to see the cat jerk its head around and point toward it. + +“I can’t.” + +He looks over to where you’re pointing and immediately dives back into his truck at the same time the cat makes a dash toward the tracks. When he comes back out, he has a rifle in his hands and lays it against the open door. + +Crack! + +You see a wisp of dust explode on the far side of the cat and the cat veers away from it. Before the man can lever in another shell, it has gone over the tracks and down the other side. You watch as it fades into the background as it’s bounding toward the mountains. + +“She won’t be back anytime soon so you can get down off of there now!” + +You lay the wrench aside and step off onto the ladder. You don’t know what you would’ve done if he hadn’t come along when he did. Your mouth is already full of cotton. When you reach the bottom, you head straight for the closest prickly pear and begin skinning it with your thumbnails. + +“What are you doing?” + +“I’m thirsty. I need water.” + +“Come over here. I’ve got some ice water in the truck.” + +He opens the passenger door and rummages around in the pile in the floorboard until he comes back with an only slightly wrinkled paper cup. He slides a big cooler over the edge of the seat and pushes the button on the bottom to fill it before handing it to you. “Here.” + +“Thank you.” You guzzle it down without taking a breath. + +“Why aren’t you wearing any clothes?” + +You look down at yourself and say “I was rinsing off from that trough to get cool when that big cat came.” + +“Well, go put ‘em back on. You can’t be running around naked as a jaybird.” + +You turn to go when he grabs your arm and says “What the hell happened to you, boy?” + +You follow his gaze and look under your arm at your back. “Oh, that’s from my mom.” + +“Why’d she do that?” + +You shrug. “She was mad ‘cause I ran away, but I didn’t. It was an accident.” + +He stands there scratching above his ear for a moment before shaking his head and turning toward the windmill. + +You rush over and jerk on your clothes while he climbs it. Then you start putting the all the prickly pears you can find back in your bucket and look up to see him fixing the tail. You can’t help but stand there until he’s finished just to see if it works. He releases a catch and the blades start turning immediately. + +“Where are you from?” he asks, stepping off the bottom rung. “There aren’t any houses for miles around except for mine.” + +You look down at your feet. “A long, long ways from here.” + + + +He takes you back to his house despite your objections and finally gets the whole story out of you. He threatens to turn you over to the sheriff, but can’t come to terms with what might happen to you if you were sent back. One thing leads to another and days turn into weeks. When school time rolls around, he enrolls you under his name and after talking to a judge friend of his and telling him your story, it’s all made nice and legal. It isn’t long before you feel like you belong at this ranch. + +One day when you’re fourteen and he can barely get around even with the aid of his cane, you and he are out setting the windmill where you first met. He turns to you and says “I never had a son of my own. It’s lucky for me that you dropped into my lap like you did. You’re a damn fine worker and a fine young man. Someday I’ll be gone and all this will belong to you.” + +You smile at him and give him a firm squeeze on the shoulder. Isn’t it funny how life turns out sometimes, you think. Looking him square in the eye, you say “I’m the lucky one.” + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You stagger up to the edge of the road and raise your hands. The car slows down for a moment as the rear passenger window rolls down. As it gets nearly even with you, a bottle flies out and hits the pavement halfway to your feet. You don’t have the strength or energy to jump to the side so you can only stand there and watch as it bounces off the asphalt and hits you dead center in the chest before you can react. + +The pain is so sudden and intense that the wind is knocked completely out of you. Your face feels like it swells to nearly twice its size and burns all the way to your ears. You slump and fall to your knees. + +The car screeches to a stop and the driver’s door opens. “Why in the hell would you do that to a kid?! I oughtta kick your ass. You could’ve killed him, you know that?” + +You gasp for breath and can’t take in any air. You want to cry due to the immense pain, but your eyes are so dry that they can no longer produce tears. Your vision starts to waver and you fall forward. Just before you eat the blacktop, you feel hands grab you and swing you back into a seated position. + +“It’s okay. I’m here to help. He was just being a dumbass and didn’t know that he might actually hit you.” + +You wheeze and can feel your lungs slowly start to fill with air. Your vision is still fuzzing in and out, but it’s slowly beginning to clear. + +“What’s your name?” asks the teenage boy with closely cropped hair. + +You rock back and forth trying to help force more air into your lungs, and only wheeze louder in answer to his question. You look around to see several more teenagers standing around you. + +“Take it easy, man. Don’t try to rush it. I’m not going anywhere.” + +You’re not sure you want to tell them your real name. After all, one of them just tried to kill you. Maybe it was an accident and maybe it wasn’t. You try to think of a name—any name—and a sudden image of little Timmy that lived down the street from you before your parents got a divorce pops into your head. You remember how he used to say his name and before you can correct it, out comes “Tim-O-tee.” You take a deep breath and try hard not to laugh or even smile. “Timothy. My name is Timothy.” + +“What are you doing out here all by yourself, Timothy?” + +“I’m lost. I don’t know where this is.” + +“Where do you live? We’ll take you home,” says a slightly gruffer voice off to the side. + +You shrug as you try to come up with something to tell them. You look around, trying to come up with a story they might believe and your eyes settle on a far-off vertical rock piercing up through desert floor. “A long, long ways from here. I was s’posed to stay by the camper, but I wanted to look at the rocks.” + +One of the boys sucks air in through his teeth. + +“That wasn’t very smart. Kids get lost out here all the time and die,” says the one crouched down by you. “Where were you going? Maybe we can find your parents or get you to someone who can.” + +If they take you to the cops, you’ll never make it to the Grand Canyon. You have to change the subject. “I’m so thirsty. I need water.” + +The boy reaches up and snatches a bottle from one of the others and says “Here, drink this. We’ll get you some water.” + +You tip the over half full bottle and guzzle the orange soda down without stopping. It burns like fire and doesn’t help even a little, but it’s wet and wet is better than nothing. + +“We’ve gotta get back. We can’t take him with us,” says another boy under his breath. + +“We’re not leaving him out here, alone,” snaps the one you’ve been talking to, “Not here!” + +“There’s a gas station right there! It’s not like he’s lost out in the middle of the desert.” + +“We can’t go driving all over the country looking for his folks,” says another. + +“You shoulda thought of that before you chucked that bottle him!” he hisses up at the boy with slicked back hair—who just pivots around on his heels and stalks back to the car. Turning back to you, he says “C’mon. We’ll go find a phone or something,” picking you to your feet and helping you to the car. + + + +You hang back as the boys head into the gas station. If they call the police, they’ll take you home and you’ll never get to the Grand Canyon for Jane. + +As soon as the door swings shut, you dash to the end of the building and swing around the corner toward the back. There is a stack of oil drums at the base of the hill out back and you run in behind them. You hope this will be enough because there is no other cover close by that you can see. + +You squeeze into a hole between two of the drums that are resting on the ground and wait. It isn’t long before you hear them talking from not too far away from your hiding spot. + +“Where could he have got to?” asks the boy that’s been trying to help you. + +“I dunno. He just ran off, I guess. Maybe we just imagined the whole thing.” + +“Maybe he’s a spook and just went invisible,” laughs a third. + +“Don’t be a moron,” says the first, “He’s just scared.” + +“We can’t go traipsing all over the desert looking for him. When he gets tired, he’ll come back. We’re already gonna be late as it is.” + +“I guess. I just wanted to help the kid out, is all.” + +“Let’s just go before we get into trouble, ourselves.” + +You hear the car engine start and gravel raining down in their wake before you poke your head out. You can’t risk going inside because they probably already told whoever is in there about you and the police might still show up. + +You spot a coiled hose on the ground by the corner of the building that you must’ve run right by without even seeing. It’s just what you need. You trot over and reach for the faucet, but the handle has been removed. You study it a minute before picking up the hose a little at a time—working the contents out to the end—and manage to get a good mouthful of scalding hot water. You fight the pain and as soon as it’s cooled enough, you choke it down. + +You can’t go any further in this heat so you look for any kind of shade to get out of this blistering sun. You spot a low-lying rock a little ways up the hillside behind the building and judging by its angle it might offer some shelter from the sun. You drag yourself over to it. + +It looks like it would be the perfect place for a den of snakes, but peering under the shelf you see no sign of anything. You wedge yourself underneath where you’ll wait for nightfall before heading off again. + + + +You open your eyes to find that you are shivering. The temperature has dropped considerably. If you don’t end up freezing, it’ll at least be a welcome relief compared to that awful sun. + +After pulling yourself out, you stand and slink down the hill. Your feet are like bricks, but you have no other choice other than to go on. + +The gas station parking lot is deserted except for a run-down old pickup truck loaded down with all kinds of junk and covered with a tarp. It’s parked in the shade of the pump lights around the corner of the building and you have to walk around it to get to the highway. + +As you pass by it, its yellow license plate catches your eye. It says Arizona in green letters across the top and Grand Canyon State on the bottom. + +You peek around the corner of the building and see an old hunched over Indian man with a pony tail halfway down his back stepping up to the cash register. + +This could be your lucky break. You could try asking him for a ride, but what if he says no? Maybe hiding under the junk in the back and hope for the best would be smarter way to go. It won’t be long before he’s heading this way so you’d better hurry and make up you mind. +> Hide in the back of the truck +You climb in the back of the truck and find a hole under the tarp that you can squeeze yourself into. You hunker down and get as comfortable as you can, but you can’t see out from where you are. It isn’t long before you feel the truck rocking and hear the door slam. The engine revs to life and you are jostled this way and that before the ride eventually smooths out. + +All you can do is hope for the best as you settle back and try to get some much needed sleep. + + + +You wake up with the old Indian man staring down at you. He has a mixture of concern and annoyance on his face. + +“Where did you come from? Why are you in my truck?” + +You rub the sleep from your eyes while you try to think of an answer. Your stiff back decides to contort all on its own and you are helpless to stop it. When you’re able to do so you look back up at him. Not knowing the best way to respond, you say “I was hiding and fell asleep.” + +He looks you over and finally says “Come on out of there.” He turns and walks toward the front of his truck as you sit up. He doesn’t stop at the front and continues on to a short, shiny trailer with a tattered awning drooping from its side and props the door open with a beat up lawn chair. All around you as far as the eye can see is only desolation broken up by the occasional rock jutting up through the earth. + +You climb over the side and aren’t sure whether to follow him inside or to go somewhere else entirely. You don’t know where you are and can only guess that the rough and rutted path behind the truck leads back to some road. + +At the very least, you need water. It couldn’t hurt to go to the door and ask for some before heading out. You also haven’t a clue as to where you are so maybe he’ll tell you that, too. + +You walk over to the trailer and lean in. “Can I have some water?” + +It’s really dark in there and before you can make out any movement, a heavy black pot spattered with light blue specks and a long shiny handle sticking out of the top drops onto the corner of the built-in table into the slender patch of sunlight that makes it through the door. A hand reaches out of the blackness and grabs the handle, drawing a ladle dripping with water from inside the pot. “Here.” + +You lunge inside, snatch the ladle with both hands and gulp down the liquid in huge swallows. It’s warm and you can taste the metal in it. It doesn’t matter. You’ve gone without for so long that the only thing that registers is that it’s wet. Even through you are choking for air you keep chugging. + +Finally, you’ve had all you can hold. After dropping the ladle into the pot, you stagger backward and fall against the aluminum door facing. Your eyes have started to adjust and you can see the old man seated at the far end of the table and staring vacantly at the far wall. + +“You want to tell me where you’re from?” + +You shift from one foot to the other trying to remember some of the towns from your map, but you draw a blank. Not sure if you should tell him the truth or make something up, you end up saying “A long way from here.” + +He lifts an eyebrow, but doesn’t turn toward you. + +“I have to get somewhere. It’s real important.” The instant those words pass through your lips you flash back on a conversation from a long, long time ago, but it slips away before you get the chance to latch on to it. + +He only sits there patiently and stares straight ahead without saying a word. It makes you feel all jittery inside. You have to tell him something. + +“Jane died and I have to go to the Grand Canyon for her ‘cause she never got to see it,” you blurt out. + +He sucks in his breath and stiffens as the words spill out with you powerless to stop them. + +“Her mom hated her and she killed her and all she wanted was someone to love her and to take care of her! She was my friend! She was my bestist FRIEND!” + +You fall to the floor in a heap. All of your strength has dissipated. Your body heaves and shutters and your eyes burn, but they are so dry that they can no longer make tears. A large, gentle hand comes to rest on your shoulder and you don’t even bother raising your head. It has all been too much. Just way too much. + + + +“Wake up. We’re here.” + +You shove yourself up in the seat and peer through the dusty windshield. A red granite sign with dark inset lettering atop a light tan sandstone base stands off to the right in front of the pickup. You can see the words clearly over the hood. “Grand Canyon National Park”. You can hardly believe your eyes. + +After a long, slow grind, the engine whirs to life. Silas jams the truck into gear and it lurches forward. It isn’t long before you come to a large parking area and he whips around into one of the paint-striped spaces, killing the old truck in gear causing it to shudder to a stop. + +You look up at him. He’s staring out through the windshield with that vacant stare he does. You can’t help yourself. You shimmy over in the seat, reach up and give him a big hug around the neck. + +“Thank you for bringing me here.” + +He doesn’t move or even look around. He finally says “Go now.” +> Go now! +You look out over the vast canyon before you—the cool pastel painted walls, the shadowy crevasses and overhangs. You walk down a narrow trail cut into the wall. A flimsy railing is all that separates you from a terrifying fall to your death. You lean against it and peer over the side. You can't make out the bottom, it seems to just flow into the horizon. + +You turn around and look at the cliff face behind you. The tool marks are still there—as they have undoubtedly been for decades—still unweathered in this arid environment. They will most likely remain long, long after your own death. + +You carefully choose your hand and footholds and—after looking around to make sure no one is in sight—make the short climb. At the top, you sit admiring the view. Taking a deep breath, you pull out the folded up sheet of paper. You open it and stare at it one last time, trying to memorize every single line (though you don't need to because you have studied it many times before). You give it a soft kiss, remembering those few magical days, refold it and touch it to your forehead. Then you gingerly slip it into a crack in the wall that faces out over the great canyon. + +You sit there as the sun sets and the light dwindles. The walls of the canyon gradually darken into deeper oranges and violets. You can feel her sitting beside you and know that if you just turn your head, you'd see that raven haired beauty with those bright, shining green eyes. After all this time, her dream has finally come true... + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It wasn’t worth the risk to you so you head around the yard and make your way toward where the tracks resume. By the time a train leaves the yard, you find that it is moving much too fast for you to board it so you set off once again down the tracks on foot. + +Every couple of hours you have to ditch the tracks and hide behind a boulder or in a shallow ravine until a train passes. This is the busiest set of tracks that you’ve been on and if anyone spotted someone your age out here alone they would certainly report it. + +You have to take a break so you find a nice clear spot away from the tracks to kick back in and lean back on the bag. You have a sudden urge to pull out the card Jane made for you and look at the old postcards while you rest. You trace each line drawn in crayon on the page with your finger and think back to those few magical days. It seems like so long ago now. A lot has happened and every day that has passed seems to have steadily grown worse than the last. After you do this one thing, you should find someone nice to live with like Jane dreamed of. Surely there’s someone out there that would love and take care of you, someone you can depend on. You carefully refold the letter and slip it into your pocket and put everything else back into the treasure chest before giving your eyes a rest. + +You don’t even notice when you start to drift off, but you are rudely awakened by a brutal gust and find that a strong wind has kicked up. The dust and sand scour your face and you can barely breathe even with your shirt pulled up over your face. You stagger around trying to find some kind of shelter behind a rock or something, but there doesn’t seem to be anything nearby and you probably wouldn’t be able to see one anyway unless you were right on top of it. + +Your foot suddenly finds nothing but open air and you tumble headlong down a steep embankment. Your bag disappears as it goes one way and you go another. And then the world slips away into blackness. + + + +You wake to find your arm twisted under you—your shoulder screaming out in agony. You have scrapes and tiny cuts from the side of your face all the way down your legs. It takes a couple attempts before you’re able to roll over and sit up. + +You push yourself to your feet and look up at the steep incline that you fell down and don’t think you’d be able to climb back up there even if your arm wasn’t throbbing like it is. You can see the coat caught on a rock protruding from the ground near the top. One of the plastic jugs tied to the sleeves is crushed and the other one looks like it just exploded when it slammed into the ground. You don’t see your bag anywhere. + +You pace back and forth along the base of the cliff looking for any trace of your stuff and finally have no choice but to give up. You head down the wash and hope that it doesn’t dead end. + +The feeling finally comes back in your arm. You can move it, but not without pain and there’s a huge black and green bruise that goes from your shoulder to half way across your chest. + +The wash spills you out on the edge of a two-lane highway and there isn’t a car or a sign or anything at all except brushy desert and rocks for as far as you can see. The train tracks must be somewhere beyond the ridge behind you, but you’d never be able to get back to them that way. You look up at the sun and figure that you might as well keep following it since it has already led you this far. + +You close your eyes, take a deep breath and then set off down the road. + + + +You’ve been walking for hours when a car pulls out onto the blacktop from a gas station up ahead that you didn’t even know was there. The hot blazing sun reflecting off the pavement has made you half blind and has given you such a raging thirst that it feels like no amount of water could ever hope to quench. You don’t know if you’ll even be able to make it as far as the gas station. + +You’re torn between whether or not to flag the car down when it gets close or to find somewhere to hide until it passes by. +> Hide +You take cover and lie flat in some wispy brush. It’s the only choice you have at the moment. It doesn’t conceal you very well, but well enough since the car speeds by without slowing down. + +You get back to your feet and stumble on. + +The sandy, vacant lot is such a relief after walking down the sweltering blacktop for so long. The building is long and narrow and runs parallel to the highway. Along its front drapes a green and white awning and below that there are dark windows partially covered with plywood. There are two antique gas pumps with glass bowls on top for measuring out fuel standing a little more than a car’s width from a glass door plastered with all manner of fliers. + +You struggle to pull open the glass door. You hear a television blaring from within as you stumble inside. + +“Can I have some water?” you hoarsely ask the beefy guy behind the counter. + +“It’s back by the soda fountain,” he answers without looking up from his game-show. “Cups are five cents.” + +You blink. All your money is in your bag lost somewhere back in that canyon. + +“C’mon! Who ever heard of shaving cream costing ten bucks?! You stupid moron!” + +You turn around and fall against the door, forcing it open with your shoulder and stagger back out into the blast furnace. + +Walking around the end of the building, you spot a coiled hose on the ground by the back corner. It’s just what you need. You trot over and reach for the faucet, but the handle has been removed. You study it a minute before picking up the hose a little at a time—working the contents out to the end—and manage to get a good mouthful of scalding hot water. You fight the pain and as soon as it’s cooled enough, you choke it down. + +You can’t go any further in this heat so you look for any kind of shade to get out of this blistering sun. You spot a low-lying rock a little ways up the hillside behind the building and judging by its angle it might offer some shelter from the sun. You drag yourself over to it. + +It looks like it would be the perfect place for a den of snakes, but peering under the shelf you see no sign of anything. You wedge yourself underneath where you’ll wait for nightfall before heading off again. + + + +You open your eyes to find that you are shivering. The temperature has dropped considerably. If you don’t end up freezing, it’ll at least be a welcome relief compared to that awful sun. + +After pulling yourself out, you stand and slink down the hill. Your feet are like bricks, but you have no choice other than to go on. + +The gas station parking lot is deserted except for a run-down old pickup truck loaded down with all kinds of junk and covered with a tarp. It’s parked in the shade of the pump lights around the corner of the building and you have to walk around it to get to the highway. + +As you pass by it, its yellow license plate catches your eye. It says Arizona in green letters across the top and Grand Canyon State on the bottom. + +You peek around the corner of the building and see an old hunched over Indian man with a pony tail halfway down his back stepping up to the cash register. + +This could be your lucky break. You could try asking him for a ride, but what if he says no? Maybe hiding under the junk in the back and hope for the best would be smarter way to go. It won’t be long before he’s heading this way so you’d better hurry and make up you mind.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The lights just went off in the farmhouse so you crawl your way through the grass toward the garden—trying to keep as low to the ground as you can. It is full dark, but you can’t take the chance that someone might catch a glimpse of you. + +Something moves off to your right, but you can’t see what it is. You just hope it isn’t a snake and if it is, you hope it’s moving away from you instead of toward you. + +The dry grass crunches under your hands and knees so you slow your pace to not make any more racket than you can help. + +You are so, so hungry. It’s been days since you’ve eaten anything—anything at all. + +The hard, dry ground suddenly becomes loose, damp earth and you look up to see three dim strands of barbed wire. On the other side, you can make out the dark shapes holding their orbs out to you. + +You wriggle your way under the bottom wire. Halfway through, you reach up and pluck the first one you see, then another and another. They all look the same in this light so you grab as many as you can and bag them up in the bottom of your shirt. + +You hear a bawl coming from the direction of house, joined by a couple more as the bulb above the back door flips on and the door is thrown open. + +“What is it, boys?” you hear a man say, “What’s out there?” + +You are dragging yourself backward with your knees and shoving with your elbows when you see an orange flash near the house. You hear the boom a split-second later. + +He’s shooting at you! + +You scamper with everything you have and don’t stop until you’re back on the other side of the embankment. You lay prone with your eyes peeled for any sign of movement coming over the rise and, when your heart finally slows, you look down at the single piece of fruit in your hand. At least it’s something. + +You take a bite and feel your face attempt to implode. The tomato isn’t ripe, but it doesn’t matter. It’s food and moisture all in one and you’ve been without either for much too long. + +After all the commotion and dogs’ barking finally peters out, you creep back to retrieve your bag and continue on down the tracks. + + + +You see the back of a big truck stop over on the highway up ahead of you about a mile or two away with a constant stream of vehicles coming and going. The moon is just coming up and from the glint on the tracks it looks like they might come really close to it. It would be a good place to fill up your water jugs. You might be able to blend in among all those people and them not even suspect that you are all alone out here. + +You don’t have a lot of money, but maybe you can find some food that you can afford with the little bit of change you still have in your pocket. A couple of cheese crackers or the peanut butter kind would go really good right about now. + +When you get to a spot that is almost directly behind it, you set your bag down in the grass off to the side of the tracks and—taking just the jugs in hand—set off across the field. As you approach the crumbling asphalt of the back parking lot, you see a water faucet next to the pay air hose. What luck! You rush over and—after gulping down as much of the sweet liquid as you can—fill both jugs to the brim. You lug them back across the parking lot to the knee-high grass and set them down before heading around to the front of the building. + +Before going in, you pull the bread wrapper out of your pocket and sit on a yellow concrete curb to count out the change. You need to know how much you have before going inside. At long last, you decipher that there’s eighty-six cents—a small fortune. You still want to hold onto the dollar for a real emergency so you are only willing to spend the change. You’ve got to be careful not to spend all of it, though. You might really need it later on. + +As you step through the front door, you are blasted by frigid air. You’d almost forgotten that such a thing even existed. Several pairs of eyes are on you, but you pretend not to notice. + +“His mother should be ashamed of herself. Letting a boy get so filthy,” a woman with her face stretched back in a bun says to her friend who only nods in agreement. + +You glance down at your hands and can’t tell where the dirt ends and your skin begins. She’s definitely right about how dirty you are, but if she were a nice person, she wouldn’t have said it loud enough for you to hear. Maybe you should clean up before doing any shopping. + +You walk up to the stocky woman behind the counter and quietly ask “Do you have a bathroom?” + +She squints at you before saying “Sure do. It’s right down that hall over there.” + +“Thank you,” you say, walking as quickly as you can so you can get out from under all the judgmental eyes. + +It’s a tiny little room with only a stainless steel toilet and sink. Above the sink is a cloudy mirror that reflects what little it has to and in the corner is a tall, skinny trash can with a flapper on top. You lock the door before stripping off you shirt and shorts so someone doesn’t walk in on you. You do the best you can with wet paper towels and have to climb up on the sink to make sure you got everything off of your face and neck. After getting dressed, you sop up the floor as best you can. By the time you finally head back out the door, you are feeling fresh as the morning. The trash can, however, has seen better days. + +You walk down each aisle slowly looking at what is offered. Too bad you don’t have more money, because there is a lot of really good stuff you wouldn’t mind having. You finally choose a big plain bag of tortilla chips that are marked “3/$1”. It’s big enough that it should last you a good long while. + +The cashier eyes you with a smirk as you count out thirty-four cents to her. You can’t help grinning back at her every time you make eye contact. + +“Thank you, sir. Please come again,” she says handing you back your bag of chips and giving you a wink. + +You feel your face getting warm and you nod to her as you turn toward the door. You can’t remember the last time you felt as relieved as you do now to get away from people. If it wouldn’t seem suspicious, you would run. + +Wrestling the two jugs while trying not to crush the bag of chips too much, you head back to the tracks and fetch your bag before continuing on your trek. + + + +You come to a fork in the tracks and don’t know which one brought you here. One continues on to the south and the other angles off into the distance in a more easterly direction and looks like it goes right through a distant town. If it’s not just a mirage you might try hopping a train down there, but you aren’t sure that it would be going the right way. Maybe there will be another town somewhere up ahead on the one stretching south. +> Head for the town +If you can get on a train, it’ll be well worth going slightly out of your way. You head down the tracks toward the distant town. + + + +The sun is still high overhead when you cross into the train yard. There’s a cross track here and little else save for a row of run-down, caved in buildings along a dusty, weedy road. It doesn’t look like a train would stop here anymore even if it did pass through. You might as well turn around and head back the way you came. + +You have just reached the end of the yard when you see a sky blue car cross on the last street in town just ahead of you. It looks like the driver is looking straight back at you. You duck down, but there’s nowhere to go and it is too late anyway. + +The car slows and you make a mad dash for the buildings just as it disappears from sight. You run at full bore until you see a stack of shipping pallets laying haphazard against the side of the far end building. You dive in behind them. + +Did he really see you or was it just your imagination? Maybe he only slowed down because there was something in the road. You’ll just hide here and wait for a little while until the coast is all clear and then you’ll get the heck out of Dodge. + +The car drives slowly back up the road from where it came. It is barely creeping by this time. He must’ve seen you. What else could it be? He’ll turn you over to the cops and then you’ll never make good on your promise to Jane. You have to somehow get away from him and out of here. +> Find somewhere to hide +There goes that car again. The one that’s been creeping back and forth down the same street for the last hour. The driver must’ve seen you. He might take you to the cops and you’ll be taken back home if he catches you. You duck down as low as you can. If you can hide until it gets dark, maybe you can sneak away. + +You look around for a better place to hide and see nothing. This stack of pallets isn’t much, but it’s better than nothing. You’ll just have to wait. + +The minutes pass by slowly. It will be a long, long time before you’ll be able to escape. Your leg starts cramping so you reach down and rub the knots out of it. + +“There you are,” comes a crackly man’s voice from behind you, “I almost thought you’d flown the coop. C’mon, let’s go for a ride.” + +You are paralyzed with fear. He found you and now they’ll take you home. You can’t go home, yet. You’re not finished. + +He lifts you to your feet by the back of the shirt and you can hardly hold onto your stuff due to your feet barely touching the ground. He takes you around to the back of the building and opens up the passenger door of his car. “Hop in.” + +Something isn’t right. This isn’t the way strangers act. You struggle to remain outside, but he snatches your bag from you and pitches it over the backseat with his free hand. You slap at his hands and kick at his shins, but he doesn’t seem to even notice. He backhands you across the face and shoves you in anyway. + +Your cheek burns from your temple to your chin. The tiny itch on your eyebrow turns out to be a trickle of blood. You are dazed and can only watch as he makes his way around the front of the car to the driver’s door. By the time you finally snap out of it, you see the town getting smaller and smaller through the back glass. + +You start to dive over the seat back and his hand comes crashing down on you again. Your vision narrows to a tiny speck and then winks out. + + + +You wake up shivering. It is dark all around you. You don’t have any clothes on. You are sore in a place where you shouldn’t be and it really, really burns. There’s a strange, intermittent scraping sound coming from somewhere close by. + +You cough and the scraping sound stops. + +You try to raise up on your elbow and see something coming straight down at you from the darkness overhead. It’s the back of a shovel blade and it’s the last thing you will ever see. + + + +— The End<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Crossing the street to a gas station, you spot a police car coming toward you from down the street. You step up your pace and put Harvey between you and it. You look around for a place to hide, but there isn’t anything close. You prepare yourself in case he stops, but all you can hope for is to run as fast as you can and hope that you can get away. You let out a sigh as it goes on by and the officer behind the wheel doesn’t even look over at you. + +Stepping through the open door, you are hit by a blast of not quite so hot air. A big shop fan rests against the back wall and is aimed directly at the door. A nice looking man in thick glasses and stained coveralls sits just to the right of it and has his nose buried in a newspaper. + +“Ahem,” Harvey clears his throat to get the guy’s attention. + +“Howdy,” says the attendant, leaning forward so that the legs of his folding chair touch the floor, “What can I do for you?” + +“We were hoping to get some water. Drinking water. And maybe a jug or something to put it in.” + +You can see the disappointment on the attendant’s face as he draws his lips back, but it quickly shifts into a forced smile. “Sure thing. I think there might be one around back by the dumpster.” + +“Thanks,” Harvey says as he heads back out the front door. + +You hang back and stand there looking at the guy with a sheepish smile until you finally build up enough nerve to blurt out “Do you buy bottles?” + +“Sure thing, little man. You got some you wanna trade in?” + +“Uh huh.” You dig through you bag and pull out the two root beer bottles. You stand there looking down at them and remember sharing them with Jane. You knew you’d have to sell them eventually, but now you aren’t sure that you really want to. + +“Just the two, then?” + +You wipe the film from your eyes that has started to develop and look up at him. You nod. + +“I think I have it right here—” he says, digging in his pocket. “Yeah, here you go. Six cents. You can put ‘em over there with those,” he points after handing you the coins. + +From the little wire rack by the front door, you grab a couple plastic tubes of peanuts. They are marked twenty-five cents and you think you have more than enough in change. You pull out the plastic bread wrapper and start counting out pennies on the only bare spot on the counter. The attendant watches you and drums his fingers impatiently. + +“That’s it.” + +You look up and see him sliding the pile off into his hand. “That’s not fifty cents.” + +“Yeah, it is. You must’ve just miscounted.” + +You grin up at him. You’d only given him a little over thirty cents so either he is really nice and doing you a favor or else he just doesn’t want all your pennies. He smiles warmly back. + +You quickly twist the bag of money and shove it way down deep in your pocket before Harvey comes back. He seems that he’s on your side so far, but if he can steal from random strangers he might just take from you, too. You drop the peanuts into your bag for later in case you have to go too long without food. + +You’re leaning with your back against the metal door frame when Harvey returns with two jugs. He and the attendant talk briefly before the two of you head around the side of the building to the faucet and fill the jugs. You have a huge lump in your throat and barely even take notice of anything around you for quite a little while. Even bending down and taking giant gulps straight from the spigot doesn’t make it go down. It just sort of hangs there. The last thing you do is pitch the last whiskey bottle in the dumpster before the two of you head back toward the tracks. + + + +It’s several hours before a train comes into view. You hear the blasting horn from miles away and you sit staring in the direction of the blast. It is going the wrong way, however, so you have to keep waiting. You and Harvey have found yourselves a nice comfy spot in the shade of a metal building in some scrub brush where no one can see you. + +Harvey has been leaning with his back against a small tree and every once in a while he lets out a snort that would wake any normal person from a sound sleep. Not him, though. Even though he’s had much more rest than you, he still looks like an old, old man. His gray doesn’t end at his hairline, but keeps going all the way down his face subcutaneously. + +Sometime before dark and just when you finally feel like you could stand some sleep yourself, you hear a long, blaring horn from the opposite direction. + +“That’s our ride,” says Harvey, opening his eyes and stretching to get the kinks out. + +You watch as the engine finally enters the yard, but it keeps going and doesn’t slow any more than a fast walking pace. Harvey cranes his neck and strains to try and see further down its length. There are no boxcars. All you can see are flatcars and hoppers. A long stretch of flatcars are loaded with sea containers probably bound for the coast and don’t offer any space at all around them, but one of the last cars is only half full at the back. + +Harvey trots toward it and you dash around him. After lofting your bag over the side, he grabs you around your middle and hefts you up. He tosses his coat and the water jugs at your feet before trotting up to the very front where there is a step. + +“Hey! Get away from there!” you hear coming from the tail end of the train. “That’s private property!” + +You duck into a corner made by the slightly mismatched cargo containers and watch as Harvey takes a step backward. He looks up at you as the train whisks you by and turns away from the tracks. You peek around the container to see two men rush up to him. They take him by the arms and lead him back across the tracks. One of them is talking on a walkie-talkie. What are they going to do to him? + +Did they see you? You have no idea. If they did, they might call ahead to stop the train and then what would you do? +> Ride it out +You don’t know what else you can do except to ride this one out. Even if you went back to find Harvey, there’s no way of knowing if you could get to him without being spotted and sent back to your mom. You’ll just have to be ready for them when the train starts to slow down at the next town. You can jump off early and run just to be on the safe side. You can’t afford to lose any more time. + + + +It’s only been half a day when you come within sight of a town. You gather your stuff together and cling to the side of the sliding door. The gravel drops off sharply just beyond the tracks and the dense bushy undergrowth looks like it would make for a rather soft landing. + +You are poised and ready when the train starts to slow down. You wait for the perfect opening and then leap as far as you can toward the brush. You don’t clear the edge of the right of way, but still tumble into the undergrowth and the back of your head strikes the base of a large sapling. Your nose is instantly filled with a burning, coppery stench and the world blinks out. + + + +When you come to, it’s just getting dark and the street lights are beginning to glow orange as far as the eye can see. This is no ordinary town—it stretches out for miles and is already giving off a glow comparable to that of the setting sun. + +Another track stretching off into the far yonder joins with the one you’re on and you can see yet another up ahead. They cling to each other and whip back and forth across each other at switches. There’s a huge yard with trains pointing this way and that and beyond it is a highway over pass that seems to just hang there with a steady stream of cars flowing in both directions. + +You make your way over to the far side to keep out of sight of the headlamps of the oncoming trains and follow the tracks for nearly an hour—careful to stay with the majority as they snake their way westward—doing your best to not get sidetracked. + +Up ahead and on the same side of the arteries of tracks as you you see a train just sitting there by a string of small warehouses and aimed in the right direction. You can hear the engine reverberating and there are bright lights on tripods scattered all around. There are some flatcars with men busy loading large crates onto them using forklifts from the loading dock and in the gloom between them and the engine is a string of boxcars. You can see from here that their doors are wide open. If only you could make it inside one without being spotted. + +You walk up behind the metal buildings and then through the gap between until you are right across from the darkest one and watch the men carefully for your opening. The door is only a few inches higher than the platform so you won’t have any trouble getting inside. You only have to wait for the right moment. + +After the crates have been chained down and the forklifts have gone away, the men start taking the lights down one by one and you hear the engine slowly rev up. You’ll have to time this just right. + +Luck is on your side. There is no one in sight when the train starts inching forward and you make your dash. You make your way as quickly between the slatted crates and the wall as you can to the front of the car where you find just enough crawl space to conceal yourself and your stuff. + +The smell is overpowering and your mouth begins to water uncontrollably. The crates are packed full with cantaloupes and you haven’t eaten anything since the remainder of peanuts you had last night. You are famished! + +You don’t even bother with getting the knife out of the ‘treasure chest’. You just reach in and punch a hole in one with your fist. You pull out handful after handful of slimy goodness and cram it into your mouth. It’s so dark that you can’t even see it, but you know how light and orange it must be. You’ll definitely be filling your belly this night. The thought strikes you that you could take a couple along with you for good measure when you leave the train so while you’re filling your gullet you also pry off enough of the slats to pull out a couple of good sized ones and pack them in the blanket in your bag. + +When you’re finally lulled to sleep by the clacking rails, you are returned to the night you and Jane spent on that train and all the plans you and she had made. Only this time, the two of you are on your way to see the Grand Canyon and are without a care in the world. She gives you a huge grin and throws her arms around you—planting a big kiss on your cheek—and hugging you for all you are worth. + +The day comes much too soon and you stagger over to the open doorway to relieve yourself. You stand there and marvel at how far you can see. Snaking its way through a long valley is a river so blue that it makes your heart stop. On both sides it is lush with trees and you spot a large flock of birds winding and twisting like dust devils above the dense foliage. All is right with the world. You know you are going to make it just fine.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You start to head over to one when you notice a pair of legs walking on the other side toward the back end of the train. You squat back down to wait until they are far enough away that you can make it over unseen, but you hear the engine rev and a couple of jerks later it is moving. + +You give it a few more seconds while you look for movement on the other side before getting up and running over to the flatcar. It is still moving slower than you can walk so you sling your walking stick and bag up on it before grabbing a chain to haul yourself up. You throw your leg over the deck and when you try to wriggle up it slips off. You try again and again as the train slowly picks up speed, but you no matter how hard you try to climb up you can’t get enough leverage with the train moving like this. + +You jump up to try and snag your stuff, but it’s just out of reach so you desperately look around for another stick or anything that would allow you to reach it. There is nothing but gravel so you give it one last try with everything you have. + +You make a run at it again and try to swing your weight up over the side, but fall and land hard on the rail. A shooting pain courses through your ribs making it hard to catch your breath. You lay there for a second to let the pain go away when you remember that the train is moving. You glance over and see the steel wheels are nearly upon you so you roll away as fast as you can, but you can’t move fast enough and they keep getting closer and closer. You try to scream and all that escapes is air. + +Just then, large hands clamp down on your shoulders and you feel yourself being yanked from the jaws of death. One of your flipflops slips off and you try to reach back and grab it, but it’s too late. Your heart is pounding and the world is swirling all around you. Everything within your field of vision has taken on a hellish red hue. + +Before you even know what is happening, those same hands pick you up and sling you on up on the deck. You tumble and roll until slamming into one of the farm implements brings you to a sudden stop. + +Stunned, you finally manage to look around to see what in the world just happened and you see a tall scraggly man in a old gray sports coat with leather elbows on the sleeves pulling himself up on the side of the car. + +“It’s a good thing I happened along or you’d have been cut clean in half. You would’ve definitely missed your train.” + +“Wh- what?” + +“I was waiting for the train to start moving before I hopped on when I saw you sneaking around out there,” he says, hooking a thumb over his shoulder toward the trees, “Didn’t look like you were gonna make it so I decided to give you a hand. Didn’t anyone ever tell you how dangerous it is to mess around with trains? You could get hurt or maybe even killed. If I hadn’t been here you’d be dead right now.” + +You stare at him in silence. + +“What’s a kid like you hopping a freight for, anyway?” + +“I have to get somewhere. It’s real important.” + +“It must be if you’re willing to risk your life for it,” he stares at you for a brief moment then continues “I guess since we’re going the in same direction, we might as well get to know each other. I’m Harvey.” + +You aren’t really sure you should be talking to a stranger let alone tell him your name, but he did just save your life and he’s standing there smiling at you with an eyebrow lifted expecting an answer. He doesn’t really look dangerous and he did help you get on the train so do you tell him the truth or do you lie? +> Lie +It’s probably better not to tell him your real name. He’s not only a stranger, but also a grownup and grownups think they know what’s best for a kid even if they don’t. The more people who know who you are, the greater the chance that they’ll send you back and the next time Mom gets her hands on you she’ll probably kill you like Jane’s mom did to Jane. + +You look him right square in the eye and say “I’m Tommy.” + +“Nice to meet ya, Tommy. I guess we’re gonna be here a while so might as well find a spot to get comfortable.” He sits down between two of the implements—putting his back to one and props his foot up on the other—where he can’t be seen from the ground. + +You bring your bag over and find a nice comfy place out of view from the side. You sit down beside it—leaning on it with your elbow—with your walking stick laying across you lap while keeping a wary eye on Harvey. + +“I saw you a ways back down the line and can’t believe you made it this far. You’ve really covered some miles in the last couple of days.” + +“Yeah. It’s a long ways to where I’m going.” + +“Where’s that? If you don’t mind my asking.” + +You study his face. You’re still not sure if you can really trust him or not so you make up something on the spot. “I have to find my uncle in Arizona so I can live with him.” + +“Hope everything turns out okay for ya. I kinda like to keep moving. Don’t like to stay in one place too long. Figured I’d head for the coast since this area is mostly played out now. It’s not a bad place to Winter.” + +Your belly starts growling so you reach into your bag and pull out what’s left of the pack of crackers you’ve been eating on for the last couple of days. You only have one more pack left and they’re mostly crushed, but you won’t mind that a bit when you get hungry again. You stuff one in your mouth and grab a few more for good measure. You consider putting the pack back in the bag, but decide you ought to share so you offer Harvey the last of the package which he quickly accepts. + +“Thank ya,” he grins, “I haven’t had anything on my stomach since early yesterday.” + +You both eat in silence and after a while you drift off to sleep to the sounds of the clacking rails.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Jane looks ridiculous in Earl’s gigantic shirt. It drags the ground around her feet as she plods back down the hall in front of you—doing her utmost not to trip on it. Of course, you must look equally funny since the one you’re wearing is nearly trailing the floor on you and the cuffs dangle nearly a foot below your hands. + +“I bet you two are starving,” Martha says in a chipper tone, “Come on in the kitchen and you can eat some breakfast with us. It’s almost ready. All I gotta do is set out two more places.” + +When you step through the door, you can’t believe your eyes. You’ve never seen so much food on a table at one time. There are biscuits, eggs, both bacon and sausage, fried potatoes and gravy, and most of a left over ham in which a few slices have already been cut. There’s a big block of butter and a loaf of light bread. Arranged next to each plate, is a bowl of oatmeal, a short glass of orange juice and a heavy round glass with a foot and stem full to the top with fresh milk. + +You can’t imagine how any more could even fit on the table without things tumbling off on the floor, but Martha does just that when she sets a place for you and Jane. And the table doesn’t look any more heaped than it did already. + +The four of you sit down and before you dig in, the elderly couple takes hold of each of your hands and bows their heads. + +"Bless us, O Lord, and these, Thy gifts, which we are about to receive from Thy bounty,” says Earl with his eyes closed, and squeezing your hand he adds, “And thank you for bringing us these dear little ones that they may share in our feast. Through Christ, our Lord. Amen." + +“Amen,” parrots Martha as she reaches out and starts heaping food on your and Jane’s plates before she even does her own. + +Everything is so, so delicious and you cram in more than you ever have in your entire life. Jane is stuffing food in and matching you bite for bite. Earl and Martha pick at theirs and appear to be enjoying watching the two of you eat. + +When you finally push back from your plate it looks as if it has barely even been touched, but your belly feels like an overripe melon. There’s no way you could possibly poke in another spoonful. + +Your eyes have a mind of their own and you watch as the dinner table quickly disappears. You start to slump forward and are prevented doing a face-plant into your plate by Earl’s massive hand. As everything goes black, you hear him chuckle and say “I guess this little guy’s had plenty.” + +“So has this one,” laughs Martha. + + + +You are startled awake by a loud rapping on a door. You find yourself half-sunken into a big fluffy bed and Jane has an arm and a leg draped over you. Her warmth is so comforting and you don’t want to move out of this very spot. The shades are drawn and let in only a pinstripe of blinding light making everything else in the room too dark to make out. + +“They’re sleepin’ in the back room,” you hear Martha say, “Poor little dears were starving and plumb tuckered out.” + +“Do you know who they belong to?” asks a strange man’s voice. + +“They wouldn’t say. I s’pose they’ve run off and I can’t blame ‘em. They’re jus’ skin ‘n bones.” + +“Don’t worry. We’ll get to the bottom of it.” + +The door cracks open and spills light into your eyes. + +“Oh, you’re awake,” Martha says quietly, flicking on the light. “There’s someone here that wants to talk to you. Let me get you your clothes so you can get dressed. They’re all clean and dry now.” + +After Martha has closed the door, you shake Jane awake. “Someone’s here to talk to us,” you tell her. + +“Who is it? What do you think they want?” + +“I dunno.” + +Martha comes back in and lays your clothes out on the foot of the bed. “Hurry and get dressed and you all come on out.” + +“Who is it?” Jane repeats to Martha, but she closes the door without answering. + +You both heave yourselves over and roll off opposite sides of the bed and drag your clothes on, leaving Earl’s crumpled shirts behind. + + + +You follow Jane down the hall and she freezes as she steps into the front room. You lean forward, peering around her and see a policeman framed in the outside doorway. He’s wearing a brown and khaki uniform and has a star pinned above his breast pocket. + +“Step in here so I can get a better look at you,” says the deputy. + +You both take tentative steps into the room—being careful to keep your distance. + +“I don’t think I’ve seen either of you before. Where are you kids from?” + +You look at Jane and her face is like stone. The policeman would probably take Jane back to her house so her mom could hit on her some more. It might be for the best if you stay silent and not tell him anything. + +After a couple of minutes, the deputy takes you each by the arm and says “Well, I guess we’ll have to do this the hard way then. Come on and let’s go.” + +You and Jane are ushered along and both of you walk stiff-legged out to his car. + +“You kids take care of yourselves,” calls Martha from the porch as the car door is being closed behind you. You look over and see her and Earl waving to you, but you don’t feel at all like waving back. + + + +You’ve been sitting on hard wooden chairs in the station for quite some time. Beyond the little glass window to the next room, you see several people moving around and you hear the occasional crackle of static mixed with garbled speech every now and then. + +“We should run away,” whispers Jane without turning to you, “before they can take us back.” + +“They’ll just catch us,” you whisper back, “We don’t even know where we are.” + +“I can’t go back home now. I have to find Gramma.” + +“You should tell them where she lives so they’ll take us there.” + +“They won’t. They’ll only take us home.” + +“Not if you tell ‘em how mean your mom is to you.” + +“They don’t care none about that. They always take me back home.” +> Stay put +The door suddenly opens and the deputy who brought you in steps through. “Looks like you two have come a long way. How in the world did the two of you manage to get more than eighty miles from your home?” + +Jane doesn’t respond and you only shrug your shoulders slightly. + +“I guess it doesn’t matter. There’ll be someone here shortly to drive you back. And I’m sure there will be a lot of questions for you two.” + + + +A couple of hours later, you are back to your town. It was a long, quiet ride and neither you nor Jane gave more than a yes or no answer to the man that drove you. You only looked at each other attempting to communicate with only your eyes. All that she—and you, no doubt—could convey was sadness and a sense of hopelessness of the situation. + +You sit slumped—craning your neck to peek through the patrol car’s rear window—and watch as the officer who ran you and Jane out of the abandoned house a couple nights ago turns away from Jane and her mother, and walks back to the car. No sooner than his back is turned does she turn and shove Jane inside the house, slamming the door shut behind her. + +The officer throws a glance over his shoulder, but doesn’t break stride as he continues on his way. + +After he closes his car door, you say “Is she gonna hit Jane?” + +He turns sideways in his seat and looks back at you. “I wouldn’t be surprised if she’s not able to sit down for a week after pulling a stunt like this. Do you understand how dangerous it was for the two of you out there all alone? We’re lucky that we found you before something bad happened to you. You don’t know what some people are capable of doing to children.” + +“She hates Jane. I don’t want her to hit her anymore.” + +“No mother hates her own child. She’s just having a rough time raising her on her own—being a single mother and all.” + +“You don’t know.” + +“Listen. I’ll swing back by after I drop you off and look in on her, okay?” He starts the engine and pulls it into gear. “Everything will be back to normal as soon as this mess blows over.” + + + +As you pull into the drive, the door opens and your mom steps out on the porch. She rushes over to the patrol car and snatches you by the arm—dragging you out and pulling you close—as soon as the policeman opens the rear door. + +“Here he is, safe and sound. No one knows how those two managed to make it so far away on their own.” + +“He’s always been a handful. I can barely keep up with him most of the time. An’ with this new job, I’ll have to work extra hard at it, I guess,” she says, flashing her eyes at you over a wan smile. “I’m just glad he’s home.” + +“That’s why we’re here, ma’am. Glad to be of service.” + +He walks with you to the door of the garage and watches as the two of you step inside. + +“Thanks again, Officer,” your mom says, ushering you in and closing the door. + +“You’re quite welcome,” he says, turning around and walking back the way he came. + +She lifts the corner of the vinyl curtain to watch him get into his patrol car and pull out of the driveway. When she turns around to you, her face is a deep shade of red and skewed beyond all recognition. + +“If things are so bad here that you felt the need to run away, then why didn’t you just stay gone!?” + +You don’t have an answer. You take a step to the rear as she lifts the solid metal rod from the window and yanks it free of the curtain. + +She is on you before you even know it—whipping you side to side like a terrier does a rat by a handful of hair in one hand while she whacks at your butt and the back of your legs with the curtain rod in the other. Every so often, an errant strike lands in the small of your back and your vision momentarily goes black. You can feel it cut deep and glance off bone with each blow. + +“Why can’t you do anything right? Why do you always have to go out of your way to make me mad?” + +You try to lessen the blows by deflecting them with your palms, but it only forces her to swing harder. The flesh on the underside of your hands soon feels tight and swollen, and you no longer have control enough to maneuver them into a position of any benefit at all. + +All you can do is grit your teeth and bear the pain. If you make even the slightest sound of whimpering, she’ll “give you something to really cry about”. + +The stinging pain finally lessens as your vision fades and grows more and more distant as the world goes dark around you. + + + +You don’t know how long you’ve been lying here in the darkness. Your whole body throbs from one end to the other and you want nothing more than to return to sleep. + +What about Jane? She was right. You and she need to just run away together and find her Gramma or else somebody nice to take care of the two of you. You don’t have a choice anymore. You know that now. Your mom will end up killing you if you don’t get away. + +You slowly open your eyes. You drag your arms under you and shove yourself to your knees. + +You see no sign of your mom and can only guess that she has gone back to the party in Honey’s house. + +You pick yourself up off the floor. You can’t straighten your legs and your back is in an uncontrollable hunch, but you manage to maintain your balance and not topple over despite the impossible angle you are leaning. + +One determined step after another, you make your way to the door. + +The curtain is now back in its place over the window. You look at it for what seems like a long time debating whether or not to do something about that impromptu weapon. It would do absolutely no good, though, because she’d just grab something else to use on you the next time. + +You reach out and grip the knob with all the strength you can muster. It doesn’t give easily, but you manage to turn it enough that the latch lets go. You hobble on one foot through the open doorway into the bright afternoon sun and pull the door closed behind you. + +You can hear music coming from Honey’s house, but don’t see any movement through the windows. You limp around the garage and through the back yard to the alley. + + + +It’s about mid-afternoon by the time you reach Jane’s house. The place looks closed up tight. After calling into the “secret place” and getting no response, you amble up to the front door and rap on it several times with the same result. + +Where could she be?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You haven’t eaten anything since early this morning and the walls of your stomach are grinding together. You have to get your mind off of it somehow and the water fountain on the far wall beckons to you. + +You’ve been on the road for days and it feels like the better part of it has been planted in this seat—even though you’ve only been here for the last couple of hours. The skin on your back and the backs of your bare legs rip free of the hard plastic seat as you stand and your flip-flops slap and smack your heels as you plod across the room. + +You freeze midway when you see a cowboy roping a calf from horseback. It’s the most wonderful thing you’ve seen for days even if it is only a poster. And it’s not the only one! Scanning the room you see many, many more of far off magical places with waterfalls and cliffs and mountains and dark caverns. Some of cityscapes with towering buildings and some at night with only the lights on and still more of endless rolling plains. + +From somewhere behind you, you hear a garbled voice fighting it’s way through crackling static, droning on and on about things that only old people care about. You zero in on the source and discover that it is a tiny coin operated radio affixed to the arm of a terminal seat. Neat! + +Just then a clammy hand clamps down on the back of your neck and you’re whisked toward the double glass doors. “It’s time to go, mister,” comes the all too familiar voice of your mom and she only releases her grip—with a surprise thrust that causes you to whack your shin on the bottom step—to allow you to clamber up and into the bus on your own. + +A shiver runs down your spine and the back of your arms prickle as you make your way down the aisle between tall and comfy-looking seats. You’re not used to air conditioning and it brings both pain and relief. + +You pass by an elderly couple. The woman looks up and smiles at you warmly so you give her a wide berth. You doubt that she would, being a stranger and all, but you sure don’t want her squeezing your cheek like Grandma does. + +You’re nudged into the row behind them and you take the farthest seat. Your mother sits beside you and puts the bag with everything the two of you own at her feet. Her lips are pursed and her eyes drawn. She’s been tired every day since the divorce and when she gets tired, she gets mad. You have a hard time even recognizing her now. + +A hiss and a lurch later, the bus pulls out onto the highway and with your face plastered to the side window you watch as the fence posts strobe past with only the occasional bush or sapling breaking the pattern. + +“There’s a storm coming,” remarks the old man to his wife, “and it looks to be a bad ‘un.” + +“Mm-hmm,” she replies absently, not bothering to look up from her needlepoint. + +Your eyes drift upward from the fence to a draw on the horizon and there the sky is beginning to boil and bristle with blue-white sparks. You can’t shake the feeling that you are at the very beginning of the greatest adventure—and worst nightmare—of your life. + +After only a mile or two, the droning of the engine and the rhythmic beat of its tires thumping over the seams in the concrete soothes you to sleep and you sleep the whole rest of the way. + + + +You are shaken from a pleasant dream of opening Christmas presents with your parents to stumble and trip over your feet as you’re dragged toward the front of the bus. It pulls over, dumping the two of you out on a deserted street. + +You know it’s only your reflection, but the ghastly and pale boy is all you can make out in the store window before you. It brightens and fades, brightens and fades with each pulse of the stoplight on the corner. You take a step backward and the wind from the bus pushes you forward as it pulls away. + +“You tryin’ to get yourself run over?” Your mother cups the back of your head and shoves you toward the boy with hollow eye-sockets, “Get over there and sit down against the wall.” + +You do as your told, although you can’t help but look up at the glass expecting him to be standing there looking down at you. + +An eternity goes by with your mom standing slumped against a signpost and staring off into the night. + +Your butt burns as the bones chew their way to the cement. You rock slowly from one side to the other to relieve the pain and she flashes her eyes at you. You melt. + +“Sit there and don’t move,” she barks as she leaps toward the flashing light. A car has stopped at the corner and she waves her arms as she sprints toward it. It begins to pull away, but stops short and the window tentatively rolls down. + +You can’t make out her words, but there’s happiness in your mother’s voice again as she crouches there with her elbows propped against the car door. Maybe she’s not mad anymore. You stretch your legs out as far as you can and wiggle your toes. + +She stands as the car pulls away and turns toward you. You can’t see her face, but there’s no mad in her walk now. You let out a long breath in relief. + +“C’mon, I’ve found us a place to sleep tonight,” she beams snatching up the bag, “and tomorrow I start job huntin’. We’re gonna do jus’ fine you an’ me. You wait an’ see.” She wraps her arm around your shoulders and the two of you skip off around the corner and into the crisp night air. + + + +You sit with your shoulders slumped, dragging your feet in a circle as the swing’s chains lazily wind and unwind and then wind up again. You’ve already walked around the park twice and sat on everything here so now all you can do is wait. + +“You wait here an’ watch our stuff,” your mom had told you, “I’ve got a lot to do today an’, with any luck, things’ll be a whole lot better from now on. And don’t you leave the park! You hear me? I’ll be back as quick as I can.” + +Your stomach grumbles. The two half-crushed cheese and peanut butter crackers your mom gave you before she left didn’t do much to satisfy it. At least the gnawing emptiness is gone. + +You hear a squeal and giggles so you look up. Some little kids are playing in the dirt at the bottom of the slide as if it were a sandbox. A dozen steps away from them sits a plump woman with her nose in a book. + +You survey the park for other signs of life and spot a group about your age. Three boys in a circle around a dark-haired girl. They’re pushing her back and forth between them like some demented form of ‘Hot Potato’. + +“Where do you think you’re going?” jeers the fat one. + +“Yeah, you ain’t goin’ nowhere you little bastard,” cracks the snotty runt. + +“Let me go!” she hisses, “Leave me alone!” + +The tallest of the three quakes from head to toe and nearly loses his breath in a fit of really annoying breathy laughter as he shoves her back toward the other two. + +The girl turns beet red from anger and lashes out with flailing, non-connecting slaps which only seems to feed the boys’ hysterical laughter. + +You have the sudden urge to attack them, but that might be a little hasty. Perhaps you should find some other way. +> Find a better way +The only adult you see is the woman reading on the park bench so you run up to her. + +“Please help that girl” you say, pointing toward the group. + +She looks clearly agitated as she lifts her eyes up at you and slowly turns her head toward them, but crinkles her nose and goes right back to her stupid book. + +You have no choice now but to come up with something on your own. + +Looking around for a club of some kind, you notice a bunch of rocks. You quickly grab up a handful and find you a nice spot behind a tree not too far from them. + +“Get away from her!” + +The boys look over and spot you. + +“Who are you?” demands Snots. + +“Just let her go!” + +“Or what?” asks Tubby as he takes a step toward you. + +Chortle grapples the girl as Snots trots up beside Tubby. + +“Are you here to rescue her? Is she your girlfriend?” Tubby jeers. + +You feel your face flush with anger. “Just leave her alone,” you say, taking a step to the rear and letting your hand drop back. + +“Look here, this guy’s here to save his bastard girlfriend,” spits Snots. + +You flash red and send a rock sailing right at his little smart mouth. He manages to turn his head just in time and the rock bounces off the side of his face. He falls back in horror and starts tearing up. + +Tubby lunges toward you, but you side-step and he misses you by several feet, flailing his arms to keep his balance. You ready another rock as he spins back toward you. + +“Wanna be a tough guy, huh?” + +He comes at you again like a raging bull—nostrils flaring and all. You chuck the rock at him. It bounces off his chest and he keeps coming without losing a step. + +You dodge sideways, but his hand still clobbers your face as he continues past. + +The girl manages to land one of her backward kicks and Chortle falls like a sack of potatoes, screaming in agony as his face goes purple. She turns and darts between two houses on the far side of the street. + +“Get her,” wheezes Chortle, “Get that little bastard!” + +Snots runs to his aid and tries to pull him to his feet between sobs, but can’t muster the strength. Chortle is in no condition to stand just yet anyhow. + +You run. + +When you feel like you are far enough away, you look back to see that Tubby has gone back to his friends. You dash between houses and start making your way back toward where the girl went through. + +The alley is shrouded by trees arching overhead and you make your way to the end of it. Seeing no sign of her, you cut through to the next street. Still nothing. She’s long gone. + +You suddenly remember the bag tucked under the picnic table that you were supposed to be watching. If something happened to it, you’ll be in big trouble. + +You sprint like the devil is after you. A hedge claws up your arms and face as you dart through it, which you barely even notice. + +Turning down the alley, a dark figure steps out from behind the corner of the hedge directly in your path. Your mouth goes all coppery and dry, and you skid to a stop. + +You’re all set to flee when you realize that it’s the girl from before. She looks sheepish and a bit winded, but no worse for wear. + +She hangs her head, but her eyes remain fixed on yours. As you cautiously approach her, you detect the faint hint of a smile. + +“Hi,” she barely more than whispers. + +“Are you okay?” you ask. + +“Yeah. They didn’t hurt me.” + +“You sure hurt that one.” + +She chuckles. + +“Who were them boys?” + +“Just some boys from school. They always pick on me.” + +“How come?” + +“Just ‘cause. They’ve always been like that.” + +“What’s your name?” you ask, scrunching your toes and noticing how dirty they’ve gotten. + +“Jane. What’s yours?” + +“Billy. We just moved here.” + +“Where’s your house?” + +“We don’t have one yet.” + +“Oh,” she says, turning her gaze to the side, then back to you. “My house is on Hill Road.” + +“I don’t know where that is. We just got here last night. We came in on the bus.” + +“It’s over there,” she points over your shoulder, “on the edge of town. C’mon. I’ll show you.” + +“I can’t right now. I have to watch our stuff so Mom can find a job.” + +“Oh.” After a pause, she asks “What grade are you in?” + +“I’ll be in Second this year.” + +“Me too. Maybe we can sit together.” + +The very suggestion makes you feel queasy and uncomfortable. “I better get back before she comes back,” you say stepping past her. + +“Okay. See ya later.” + +“See ya later.” + +You cut between two houses following their shared ribbon driveway. As you get to the front, you peek down the street and see that the gang is gone. + +The park is empty now with no one in sight. You cross the street and see that the bag is still right where it’s supposed to be. + +You climb the cement picnic table and plop down on top of it with your feet on the bench. All you can do now is wait.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look through the window from the observation room, down onto the Object placed at the heart of the chamber. Protruding from the walls are all manner of scientific gadgetry, so that the tests can be carried out remotely, and hopefully more safely, from the observation room. + +It has been two and a half months of all manner of tests, such as bathing the Object in various forms of radiation, scanning it with all manner of sensors, trying tests in normal air and in a vacuum, and that sort of thing. So far, the Object has just sat there. It could continue to do nothing at all. It could just be a solid chunk of lifeless metal for all anyone knew. That's what you are beginning to think, anyhow. + +Of course, the Government and Military representatives were "completely positive" that something would happen eventually. And they got to monitor the tests from another facilitiy eighty kilometers away - just in case the Object happened to be a bomb of some sort. That was really reassuring for you. + +"Come on, Jones, let's get to work," Hammond says, the doors to the observation room swishing shut behind him as he arrives. +> "Sure. So, what are we going to do to it today?" +"Okay, we're doing Gamma Radiation today. Why don't you get us started, spin the dial to five, will you?" Hammond says, leaning over one of the consoles, and peering through the window at the Object below. +> Turn the dial to five. +"Here goes nothing," you say as you turn the dial to five. + +Both of you look out through the window at the Object in the chamber beyond. A long mechanical arm unbends from the wall, with a large emitter on the end. It slowly powers up, and you watch a counter slowly tick up from zero. Invisible gamma radiation begins to bathe the Object from the emitter. + +As the counter begins to pass four, something happens! + +There is a flash of light, almost blinding your eyes, and then- +> (continue) +Hammond yawns, leaning back in his chair. "Well, there goes another day of useless tests, Jones," he says. + +"What the-" you stammer, looking around you. The clock on the wall says it is early in the evening outside. You glance at the dial for the gamma radiation emitter, and it is turned off, set to zero. Out through the window, the Object just sits there doing nothing, as usual. + +Hammond notices the look on your face, "What's wrong?" +> Tell him what happened. +"Hammond, what just happened?" you ask him, bewildered. + +"What do you mean? We just completed another day of the same old boring tests that seem to have achieved nothing at all," he answers. + +"You know what? I think something happened!" you say, confusion giving way to excitement. Something was finally taking place! + +"What are you talking about Jones?" he says, tired and in no mood for games. + +"The last thing I remember, I was turning the gamma radiation dial to five. The counter passed four, and there was a flash of light! The next thing I know, I was standing here and the day was over!" you explain, bursting with excitement. + +"Is this some sort of joke," he says, standing up, and getting his things, ready to go home. "Look, Jones, we tested it for gamma, we zapped it with more x-rays, we doubled the air pressure, we tried to cut it open with lasers! Nothing happened, no lights, no sounds, no anything. Look, you're probably just tired, imagining things. There's nothing so boring as staring through a window at a block of metal that just sits there, for hours on end." +> Stick to your version of what happened. +"I'm telling you Hammond, one moment we were standing there performing the test, the next it was the end of the day!" you exclaim, beginning to feel angry. You're sure of what happened. At least, you think you are... + +"Look, Jones, maybe you saw a flashing light, maybe not. It only takes a few minutes to run the gamma radiation test. If you want, we'll throw it back up to five and see what happens. Will that make you happy? Maybe then I can go home and get some sleep," he grumbles. + + +> Perform the Gamma radiation test again. +"Yes, Hammond. That would make me happy. Let's do the test again," you say. + +"Okay, by all means. Turn the dial back to five," he says, shaking his head tiredly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Hammond, what just happened?" you ask him, bewildered. + +"What do you mean? We just completed another day of the same old boring tests that seem to have achieved nothing at all," he answers. + +"You know what? I think something happened!" you say, confusion giving way to excitement. Something was finally taking place! + +"What are you talking about Jones?" he says, tired and in no mood for games. + +"The last thing I remember, I was turning the gamma radiation dial to five. The counter passed four, and there was a flash of light! The next thing I know, I was standing here and the day was over!" you explain, bursting with excitement. + +"Is this some sort of joke," he says, standing up, and getting his things, ready to go home. "Look, Jones, we tested it for gamma, we zapped it with more x-rays, we doubled the air pressure, we tried to cut it open with lasers! Nothing happened, no lights, no sounds, no anything. Look, you're probably just tired, imagining things. There's nothing so boring as staring through a window at a block of metal that just sits there, for hours on end." +> Maybe you just imagined it? +You yawn. Actually, it does feel like you've been working for a whole day. Maybe Hammond was right, maybe you're just tired. Day after day of repetative tests could indeed make everything seem to blur together, after a while. + +"Yeah, maybe you're right, Hammond. I guess I should drive home and get a good night's sleep," you say. + +"Rest up, and I'm sure you'll feel better tomorrow," he says. "Well, see you later then, I'm off." + +Hammond puts on his jacket and heads home. +> Leave the Facility. +You grab your jacket, flick off the lights, and walk out through numerous corridors and doorways. Finally, after passing through two security checkpoints, you reach the garage. Taking your car keys out of your pocket, you hop into your Toyota Aurion V6. You sink into the comfortable seat with a smile. Ah, the perks of your job. + +Switching the car on, you pull out of the multi-level garage, and head out onto the road. The Facility was mostly underground, but a large boxy building juts up from the barren surface. Your temporary home, for the duration of the tests, was a house the company purchased in a relatively modern country town an hour's drive away. + +It's getting dark outside, but the sky is clear, the moon and stars bright above you. You flick on your headlights, and there is a flash of light as they turn on... +> Waking up to more confusion. +You wake in your bed, in a house that the company has purchased, about an hour's drive from the Factility. Stretching, you get up out of bed. What an odd dream... Something had happened out at the Facility, but you couldn't remember what. Dreams tended to be like that. You were in your car, or something? + +Stretching your arms above your head, you bend to each side, stretching your aching muscles, then reach out and open the door to the ensuite. + +A fierce, hot wind assails you, and you stumble backwards, your sleepy limbs not prepared. For a moment you just stand there in your underwear in shock. Outside your bedroom, looking through what should be the door to your ensuite, was the desert! You glance out the bedroom window, and it's still there! Bleak, barren desert sands and rocks stretch off to the horizon. Where is the town? More importantly, where is the rest of your house! +> Step outside +Astonished and confused, you open your main bedroom door, to see more desert outside. You step outside, onto the hot sand, to see if it is real or an illusion. + +The sand is hot beneath your feet, and you quickly step back inside. Perhaps you should get dressed first? +> Get Dressed +Your clothing lies scattered across the floor around your bed. + +(Click on objects to put them in your inventory)<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Childhood + + +A fist thuds into your face, knocking you to the ground. Gruzub stands over you, laughing. + + +"Mazkil! You are as weak as a Shepard!" He laughs, as you leap to you feet. +> Punch him +You swing your fist, but Gruzub quickly ducks and elbows you in the stomach, knocking the wind from your lungs. He gets two more punches in before you manage to roll away and get back into a fighting stance. As you prepare to charge him, you hear a deep voice. + + +"CHILDREN! Your mother struggles to soothe the little one while your brother hunts sheep. This is no time for playing. There is work to be done! Inside!" Your father bellows. +> Go inside +You quickly hurry inside, followed by your twin brother. You live in a small village of small huts. Luckily enough, you father is Chieftain Magrash, which entitles you to sleep in the Chieftain's Hut, the largest hut. As you enter, you see your father sitting in a rough woolen tunic, sharpening his greatsword. In front of him is his heavy steel plate armor, as well as several trophies from his battles. + + +"Mazkil, Gruzub, you fight too much. Mama is trying to put Dagden to sleep." + + +"Yes, papa." You both reply. + + +"Who won the fight?" He asks. + + +"I did!" You both say, before glaring at each other. + + +"You don't know? Perhaps you're not fighting enough. Gruzub, go down to the river and fetch water for the stew. Mazkil, sharpen my sword. I need light the hearth." + + +You go over to the sword, and begin to sharpen it against the whet stone, while looking over your father's trophies: An Elven Dagger, a Shrunken head, a battered golden shield, a shattered battleaxe, a studded mace, a series of Tribal Necklaces and a Dragon Skull. + + +"Papa?" + + +"Yes?" + + +"Can you tell me about your trophies?" You ask. + + +"I've told you many times about my trophies." + + +"Tell me again." + + +Papa chuckles, a harsh sound you've come to love. + + +"Which would you like to know about?" +> Elven Dagger (Elves) +"Ah, the dagger. One of my favorite. The Elves are a race of "beautiful" and "perfect" creatures who don't know a battleaxe from a wood-axe. Death to them all. They're stupid in things like how to start a fire and how to hunt, yet seem to love philosophy and reading. Death should take them. Still, they're fast with a blade and good with a bow, which I found out while hunting a party of them that came into my territory. That knife nearly went into my throat before I impaled the little bastard wielding it."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You quickly hurry inside, followed by your twin brother. You live in a small village of small huts. Luckily enough, you father is Chieftain Magrash, which entitles you to sleep in the Chieftain's Hut, the largest hut. As you enter, you see your father sitting in a rough woolen tunic, sharpening his greatsword. In front of him is his heavy steel plate armor, as well as several trophies from his battles. + + +"Mazkil, Gruzub, you fight too much. Mama is trying to put Dagden to sleep." + + +"Yes, papa." You both reply. + + +"Who won the fight?" He asks. + + +"I did!" You both say, before glaring at each other. + + +"You don't know? Perhaps you're not fighting enough. Gruzub, go down to the river and fetch water for the stew. Mazkil, sharpen my sword. I need light the hearth." + + +You go over to the sword, and begin to sharpen it against the whet stone, while looking over your father's trophies: An Elven Dagger, a Shrunken head, a battered golden shield, a shattered battleaxe, a studded mace, a series of Tribal Necklaces and a Dragon Skull. + + +"Papa?" + + +"Yes?" + + +"Can you tell me about your trophies?" You ask. + + +"I've told you many times about my trophies." + + +"Tell me again." + + +Papa chuckles, a harsh sound you've come to love. + + +"Which would you like to know about?" +> Shrunken Head (Necromancer's Army) +"Ah, that! I took that off a large bastard with a sword twice as large as you.That damn Necromancer, I can't remember his name, rose Zombies Ghouls, Skeletons, Wights, Death Knights, Specters, Ghosts and who knows what else in his quest for power. He led a small group of Death Knights up here to add some Ork Zombies to his collection. He ran faster than a deer when he saw what a true Orc can do! Ha!"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You quickly hurry inside, followed by your twin brother. You live in a small village of small huts. Luckily enough, you father is Chieftain Magrash, which entitles you to sleep in the Chieftain's Hut, the largest hut. As you enter, you see your father sitting in a rough woolen tunic, sharpening his greatsword. In front of him is his heavy steel plate armor, as well as several trophies from his battles. + + +"Mazkil, Gruzub, you fight too much. Mama is trying to put Dagden to sleep." + + +"Yes, papa." You both reply. + + +"Who won the fight?" He asks. + + +"I did!" You both say, before glaring at each other. + + +"You don't know? Perhaps you're not fighting enough. Gruzub, go down to the river and fetch water for the stew. Mazkil, sharpen my sword. I need light the hearth." + + +You go over to the sword, and begin to sharpen it against the whet stone, while looking over your father's trophies: An Elven Dagger, a Shrunken head, a battered golden shield, a shattered battleaxe, a studded mace, a series of Tribal Necklaces and a Dragon Skull. + + +"Papa?" + + +"Yes?" + + +"Can you tell me about your trophies?" You ask. + + +"I've told you many times about my trophies." + + +"Tell me again." + + +Papa chuckles, a harsh sound you've come to love. + + +"Which would you like to know about?" +> Battered Golden Shield (Empire of Man) +"The Shield? The Shield... Ah, yes! The shield! I took it off some fancy knight who drank too much and fought too little. Let me tell you about men, little one, there's a lot of them, but they're weak, stupid and cowardly. They break easily. They're the biggest threat to our little old home, but they're too busy fighting the elves to come fuck with my tribe."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You quickly hurry inside, followed by your twin brother. You live in a small village of small huts. Luckily enough, you father is Chieftain Magrash, which entitles you to sleep in the Chieftain's Hut, the largest hut. As you enter, you see your father sitting in a rough woolen tunic, sharpening his greatsword. In front of him is his heavy steel plate armor, as well as several trophies from his battles. + + +"Mazkil, Gruzub, you fight too much. Mama is trying to put Dagden to sleep." + + +"Yes, papa." You both reply. + + +"Who won the fight?" He asks. + + +"I did!" You both say, before glaring at each other. + + +"You don't know? Perhaps you're not fighting enough. Gruzub, go down to the river and fetch water for the stew. Mazkil, sharpen my sword. I need light the hearth." + + +You go over to the sword, and begin to sharpen it against the whet stone, while looking over your father's trophies: An Elven Dagger, a Shrunken head, a battered golden shield, a shattered battleaxe, a studded mace, a series of Tribal Necklaces and a Dragon Skull. + + +"Papa?" + + +"Yes?" + + +"Can you tell me about your trophies?" You ask. + + +"I've told you many times about my trophies." + + +"Tell me again." + + +Papa chuckles, a harsh sound you've come to love. + + +"Which would you like to know about?" +> Shattered Battleaxe (Dwarves) +"Ah, this one! I fought the dwarves when I was young, back when my name was Youngblood like you. I earned the name Magrash Shatteraxe that day! The Dwarves are small bastards and the sight of one will make you chuckle, but I love 'em! The Gods made them jesters to amuse, and the Dwarves became angry, stubborn, heavy-drinkers who can wield an axe! They hide in their tunnels and mine too much, but I respect them anyway."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You quickly hurry inside, followed by your twin brother. You live in a small village of small huts. Luckily enough, you father is Chieftain Magrash, which entitles you to sleep in the Chieftain's Hut, the largest hut. As you enter, you see your father sitting in a rough woolen tunic, sharpening his greatsword. In front of him is his heavy steel plate armor, as well as several trophies from his battles. + + +"Mazkil, Gruzub, you fight too much. Mama is trying to put Dagden to sleep." + + +"Yes, papa." You both reply. + + +"Who won the fight?" He asks. + + +"I did!" You both say, before glaring at each other. + + +"You don't know? Perhaps you're not fighting enough. Gruzub, go down to the river and fetch water for the stew. Mazkil, sharpen my sword. I need light the hearth." + + +You go over to the sword, and begin to sharpen it against the whet stone, while looking over your father's trophies: An Elven Dagger, a Shrunken head, a battered golden shield, a shattered battleaxe, a studded mace, a series of Tribal Necklaces and a Dragon Skull. + + +"Papa?" + + +"Yes?" + + +"Can you tell me about your trophies?" You ask. + + +"I've told you many times about my trophies." + + +"Tell me again." + + +Papa chuckles, a harsh sound you've come to love. + + +"Which would you like to know about?" +> Studded Mace (Rebel Orcs) +"Ah... the mace. Boy, some Orcs stick to their tribe. Some wander as mercenaries, or sign up as soldiers. Some become Rebels, raiders targeting every humans, elves, dwarves and anyone else that gets in their way. They're mad, stubborn, bloodthirsty fools. I took that weapon off on of them trying to convince Old Klaim to join up. I also took a few of his teeth, but I don't have those anymore."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You quickly hurry inside, followed by your twin brother. You live in a small village of small huts. Luckily enough, you father is Chieftain Magrash, which entitles you to sleep in the Chieftain's Hut, the largest hut. As you enter, you see your father sitting in a rough woolen tunic, sharpening his greatsword. In front of him is his heavy steel plate armor, as well as several trophies from his battles. + + +"Mazkil, Gruzub, you fight too much. Mama is trying to put Dagden to sleep." + + +"Yes, papa." You both reply. + + +"Who won the fight?" He asks. + + +"I did!" You both say, before glaring at each other. + + +"You don't know? Perhaps you're not fighting enough. Gruzub, go down to the river and fetch water for the stew. Mazkil, sharpen my sword. I need light the hearth." + + +You go over to the sword, and begin to sharpen it against the whet stone, while looking over your father's trophies: An Elven Dagger, a Shrunken head, a battered golden shield, a shattered battleaxe, a studded mace, a series of Tribal Necklaces and a Dragon Skull. + + +"Papa?" + + +"Yes?" + + +"Can you tell me about your trophies?" You ask. + + +"I've told you many times about my trophies." + + +"Tell me again." + + +Papa chuckles, a harsh sound you've come to love. + + +"Which would you like to know about?" +> Tribal Necklaces (Tribal Orks) +"The tribal necklaces? Boy, show some respect! Those are the Chieftain's necklaces, that show who's the boss of this tribe! Us Orcs have always been a hot-headed folk. Lots of fighting, drinking, eating, fucking and some more fighting when you're finished. We stick to the tribes, each led by the great Chieftain. It's a good life, boy."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You quickly hurry inside, followed by your twin brother. You live in a small village of small huts. Luckily enough, you father is Chieftain Magrash, which entitles you to sleep in the Chieftain's Hut, the largest hut. As you enter, you see your father sitting in a rough woolen tunic, sharpening his greatsword. In front of him is his heavy steel plate armor, as well as several trophies from his battles. + + +"Mazkil, Gruzub, you fight too much. Mama is trying to put Dagden to sleep." + + +"Yes, papa." You both reply. + + +"Who won the fight?" He asks. + + +"I did!" You both say, before glaring at each other. + + +"You don't know? Perhaps you're not fighting enough. Gruzub, go down to the river and fetch water for the stew. Mazkil, sharpen my sword. I need light the hearth." + + +You go over to the sword, and begin to sharpen it against the whet stone, while looking over your father's trophies: An Elven Dagger, a Shrunken head, a battered golden shield, a shattered battleaxe, a studded mace, a series of Tribal Necklaces and a Dragon Skull. + + +"Papa?" + + +"Yes?" + + +"Can you tell me about your trophies?" You ask. + + +"I've told you many times about my trophies." + + +"Tell me again." + + +Papa chuckles, a harsh sound you've come to love. + + +"Which would you like to know about?" +> Ask about the Dragon Skull (Dragons) +"Ah, the skull. Dragons are fearsome creatures. They come in many colors, all with powerful skills. They speak Dragontongue, and many speak our language. Some are intelligent, while some are incredibly feral and wild from years of isolation. Their flames tend to be tinted the same color as their scales, with an afinity for hoarding treasure and waging war and destruction. They're solitary creatures, Dragons. If you ever slay one, Gorgok will look upon you with joy."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You quickly hurry inside, followed by your twin brother. You live in a small village of small huts. Luckily enough, you father is Chieftain Magrash, which entitles you to sleep in the Chieftain's Hut, the largest hut. As you enter, you see your father sitting in a rough woolen tunic, sharpening his greatsword. In front of him is his heavy steel plate armor, as well as several trophies from his battles. + + +"Mazkil, Gruzub, you fight too much. Mama is trying to put Dagden to sleep." + + +"Yes, papa." You both reply. + + +"Who won the fight?" He asks. + + +"I did!" You both say, before glaring at each other. + + +"You don't know? Perhaps you're not fighting enough. Gruzub, go down to the river and fetch water for the stew. Mazkil, sharpen my sword. I need light the hearth." + + +You go over to the sword, and begin to sharpen it against the whet stone, while looking over your father's trophies: An Elven Dagger, a Shrunken head, a battered golden shield, a shattered battleaxe, a studded mace, a series of Tribal Necklaces and a Dragon Skull. + + +"Papa?" + + +"Yes?" + + +"Can you tell me about your trophies?" You ask. + + +"I've told you many times about my trophies." + + +"Tell me again." + + +Papa chuckles, a harsh sound you've come to love. + + +"Which would you like to know about?" +> Stop asking about Trophies +"I'm finished, Papa!" + + +Papa picks up the blade, and licks the edge. + + +"Yes... Sharp enough to shed dragon blood. Well done, Mazkil. Now, go fetch gather fruit." +> Four years later... +"You've been on this planet fourteen years, and you haven't learned a thing, boys, unless you've seen me and Dendar take out a boar!" + + +You walk with Gruzub, your older brother Bagig and his friend Dendar, out in the woods. You have a small iron knife at your belt and a bow clutched in your hands. So far in your short life, you've only subsided on deer, goat and chicken, but after today you'll be able to feast on the boar you've helped kill. + + +"On your first hunt, it's tradition to eat a deer's dropping to gain it's scent." Dendar remarks. "Everybody knows that." + + +Dendar and Bagig pause, dropping to one knee, pointing to some small droppings. + + +"Go on, Gruzub, Mazkill. Dig in." +> Eat the droppings +You drop to your knees, close your eyes, and quickly swallow a small piece of dropping. Bagig pats you on the head, and nods to Gruzub. Gruzub does the same, and with that, Dendar bursts out laughing. + + +"You two are idiots!" Mazkil and Gruzub Youngblood, eating deer droppings." + + +They chuckle as your face reddens. You open your mouth to yell at them, but then freeze. You spot a beautiful deer just at the edge of a small creek out of sight. You grab your brother, and point to it. + + +"Ah, well spotted, Mazkil Shiteater. Let's catch it, Dendar." + + +"We can't get distracted. We came here to hunt boar." + + +"We'll catch the deer and the boar!" Bagig cries, charging off after the deer. + + +The Deer bursts off running, with Bagig and Dendar quickly following. + + +"Stay there!" Bagig yells at you as he leaves. +> Stay there +You stand patiently with Gruzub, who looks at you. + + +"Just so you know, Oraal is mine." He says quietly. + + +You ponder this for a second. Oraal is a fat, lazy girl who's the daughter of a swordsmaker. + + +"Oraal? Has her father promised you a fine blade if you crawl between her legs?" You giggle. + + +"Hey! She has proclaimed her...!" He begins, before his eyes widen. +> Ask what's wrong +You open your mouth to speak, but you're hit in the back and sent flying through the air. You hit the ground, your head knocking against a tree root and drawing blood. You shakily stand, drawing your knife, as you're faced with a large boar preparing to charge again. + + +"Watch out!" Gruzub yells, running to help, but it's clear he's far too slow. + + +The Boar charges at you, it's tusks looking deadly sharp at they near you... +> Roll to the side +You roll to the side, narrowly dodging a goring from the beast's tusks. As it runs past, you leap forward with your knife, cutting through thick fur and drawing a fair amount of blood. It squeals, before running forward and turning around once more for another charge. +> Dodge again +As the boar charges, you try to roll to the side, but it's prepared this time. You yell as it's tusks slash your side, causing a massive wound. +> Continue +Gruzub charges over and stabs the boar in the side with his dagger, giving you ample time to leap up. You charge at the boar, stabbing it repeatedly in the neck. It squeals, but it's easily killed before it can resist. It falls dead at your feat. +> Rejoice, for the enemy is vanquished! +You rest your foot on the boar's tusks, laughing. + + +"Ha! I've slain the boar!" + + +"Hey!" Gruzub yells. "I helped." + + +Dendar and Bagig burst trough the trees, a deer straddled between them. + + +"We caught the deer. I bet..." They pause, noticing the boar. "Cursed Reaper, is that a boar?" + + +You nod proudly. + + +"Death's Head, Mazkil, you've impressed me. No longer will you be called Mazkil Youngblood, now you'll be Mazkil Boarsbane!" Bagig laughs. + + +You smile proudly, knowing you will feast on boar meat tonight. +> One year later... +"Mazkil Boarsbane! Gruzub Fastfoot! Let's go." Papa yells. + + +You quickly follow your father out of your small home and onto the small dirt road that interconnects the village. + + +"Boys, you've done well. I was so proud when I saw you best Harkor Clawfist in a fight, I got you a present." + + +You smile fondly. Harkor had insulted your brother Bagig and Dendar. They had only been recently killed by a Death Knight from the remnants of the Necromancer's Army, and you made sure that Harkor suffered for his insult. By the time you and Gruzub were finished, his face was half-caved in. + + +Your father hands you each a small amount of gold coins. + + +"Dendar Arroweye is heading down to Riverton today. He's taking the cart to pick up some goods to help us get through the winter. Take the cart, go enjoy yourself." + + +You thank him, and eagerly count your coins. 25 Gold Coins, all shining proudly at you. + + +"Go now, boys. Enjoy yourselves." +> Head down to Riverton +After a long ride to Riverton with Dendar who mostly insults you and Gruzub, you eventually arrive at the small town. You eyes immediately find multiple ways to spend your precious coins. There's a brothel in the poorer section of town, a large shop full of delicious foods you wish to sample, a small gambling ring and a tavern. +> Leave Riverton +Once you've spent your gold coins, you make your way back to Dendar's cart. Unfortunately, you find yourself in the poorer part of town, clearly having taken a wrong turn. As you make your way through a side street, a voice cries out. + + +"Hello! A little lost, are we?" A voice cries. + + +You turn, and are faced with a trio of men holding knives. + + +"Fuck off." You grunt angrily. + + +"'Fuck off', he says. What an angry orc." + + +A voice from behind you says. + + +You turn, to see two more men wielding knives. + + +"Listen, sir. Give us your coins, and we'll see you find your way to where you're going." +> Charge the men +You run forward, swinging your blade. You slash the throat of one of the men and he topples backwards. The second man cuts your shoulder deeply, and you grab his head and smash it repeatedly against a wall, crushing it into a pulp. You feel another knife slash your back and you yell, twisting around to jab another man through the eye and kill him. The two remaining men seem nervous, but one runs forward in a burst of courage. He dives forward, sticking his knife through your arm, causing you to drop your knife. With your other hand you grab him, and push your thumb through his eye as he screams, before stomping on his head until he's a smear on the floor. By then, the final man had left, running as fast as he could. +> Collapse +You fall to the ground with a thud, and lose consciousness. When you wake up, you're in the back of Dendar's cart, with Gruzub next to you. + + +"What happened?" + + +"You killed a lot of people, collapsed, and I dragged you here." + + +"Ah. I'm still alive, then. Good." + + +"We'll get you medical help when we get back to the village." + + +"Good." You grunt. + + +"Well done with the thieves, Mazkil. You've proven yourself a true Orc." +> One year later... +Orc Tribal Customs are simple. The Chieftain's sons fight, and the winner takes over for him when the Chieftain is killed or reaches forty. Papa has just hit forty, so something you've been preparing for all your life. You sit next to Gruzub in front of the Shrine of Gorgok, the Warrior God, praying silently. + + +"I'll try not to kill you, you know." Gruzub says quietly. + + +"I'll try not to kill you." You reply. + + +"Papa killed his brother." Gruzub notes. "Death is quiet likely for one of us." + + +"Grandpapa didn't kill his brother." You add. + + +"Fair point. Whatever it comes down to, I love you. You are my brother, and I would be proud to be killed by you." + + +"Well, I'm great and mighty. Everyone I kill should be proud of it." You chuckle. + + +"I take it back, I'm killing you, you prick." + + +You both laugh, as Papa arrives. He quietly removes his tribal beads, and drapes them around the Shrine. + + +"Ah. My neck feels bare." He sighs. "Boys, tomorrow is going to be the most important day of your life. One of you will become the victor and chieftain, the other will fall and may die. I just want you to both know I feel nothing but pride towards you." + + +You struggle not to tear up, and by the way Gruzub is tensing, you know he's also struggling. + + +"I've always treated you as my father treated me, stern but loving. Whatever you become, be it Chieftain, Warrior, Mercenary or even a whining baker, you will be the greatest at it there's ever been." + + +Your father nods, and lays his great sword in front of the Shrine. + + +"It's late. Go, sleep, rest up." + + +You nod, and stand and begin heading to the hut. As you walk, Gruzub begins to chuckle. + + +"What?" You ask. + + +"Do you remember the time when we were boys when we tried to make a glider out of chicken feathers?" + + +You laugh. + + +"And we were standing on top of the mountain, with you about to jump." You add. + + +Gruzub nods, smiling. + + +"And you yanked me back when you realized chickens can't fly." Gruzub smiles. + + +"Ha! You would've died! Remember when we caught our first boar?" You smile. + + +"Yeah. I ate so much boar that night I almost puked." + + +"That was the mead, Gruzub." + + +"I miss those days."Gruzub nods. + + +You arrive at the hut, and you grab Gruzub in a hug. + + +"Good luck tommorow." You say. + + +"Good luck." + + +You both go to bed, scared and nervous about tomorrow. +> The next day... +You stand, fully armored in plated steel, next to Gruzub and the Shrine of Gorgok. Priest Jinser stands by the shrine, holding two short swords. + + +"Gorgok! Watch over this fight and please bless these warriors. Watch over this fight and see that the greatest Chieftain is chosen!" The Priest wails. + + +He holds the two swords out, and you grab one. Gruzub grabs the other. + + +"Let the fight commence! First to render the other unable to stand wins!" + + +You take up a fighting stance, as does Gruzub. You slowly move forward, before you both swing your blades. Sparks fly as they collide, and the battle commences. You land the first blow, smacking into Gruzub's chest as he stumbles backwards. He draws blood first, slashing open a small bit of unprotected arm. It's obvious that you're the far superior fighter, with Gruzub struggling to avoid your attacks. Then, the Fates pluck your string. +> Pluck +An eagle, far above you, drops a small turtle from a great height, hoping it's shell will shatter on the ground. The turtle smacks into your head, knocking you backwords. Gruzub takes advantage of your confusion, stepping forward and thrusting his blade. The blade enters you chest, Gruzub carefully avoiding your organs but thrusting deep enough to cause you to scream. When he withdraws, blood spurts out, and you struggle to stand. + + +"The Fates seem to dislike Mazkil." The Priest notes loudly, though you barely listen. + + +Gruzub continues to attack, and you barely manage to defend yourself. Eventually, he kicks your leg and you fall backwards. This leaves your throat exposed, for Gruzub to easily slash your throat and make sure you fall and never get up. +> Try to regain a fighting stance +To your surprise, Gruzub hesitates, before taking up fighting stance again, allowing you to gain a defensive position to defend your open throat and stop your demise. Your energy waning, you decide to take one final effort to defeat Gruzub. He swings his sword at your legs, attempting to floor you, but you block the shot and head butt him. He falls backwards, and you swing your blade, smacking into his head. His helmet flies into the air, leaving his head and neck unguarded. You know you don't have enough energy to continue fighting. +> Behead Gruzub +You swing your blade down with a roar. You sword connects with his neck, and his head falls to the ground. You drop to your knees, looking at your dead brother. You barely comprehend the Priest grabbing your hand and holding it up, loudly proclaiming you the victor. Papa walks over, draping the Tribal Chieftain beads and necklaces around your neck. Mama walks out and gently kisses your head, before closing Gruzub's eyes on his decapitated head. The Priest has the body taken away to be burned to ensure it makes it to the afterlife. You struggle not to weep for your brother, while Papa kneels down to talk to you. + + +"You are Chieftain now, Mazkil. Chieftain Mazkil Redblade, leader of the Red Blades. You will lead the tribe to greatness. Tonight, we celebrate. We celebrate your ascension to chieftain, we celebrate the great fight, we celebrate your brother's journey to the Afterlife. He fought so well I'm sure Gorgok himself is Gruzub's cup-bearer." + + +You nod. The path you're going down is set. Gone are dreams of becoming a mercenary or a raider. Now, you are a Chieftain. +> Continue +The Path of the Chieftain + + +You sit on the small wooden Chief's Throne in the Main Hall. Tribal Necklaces and Beads are around your neck, feeling a lot heavier than they are thanks to the guilt and grief from Gruzub's death. Papa has vacated his role as chief completely and given all his responsibilities to you, taking Mama and leaving to a small farm up the mountain, leaving you in charge. Still, he's left you with two lieutenants and advisors, Elder Doct and Thraka Flameborn. + + +Elder Doct is an aging Orc, the oldest in your village. She is a traditionalist, who had fond memories of the old days when warriors fought duels for honor and farms were farmed by hand with hoes rather than with mules and donkeys. She values older values like honor, isolationism and keeping the village moral and traditional. + + +Thraka Flameborn is the polar opposite of Doct. He is one of the few Orc Mages, specialized in pyromatics and flame-based magics. He is a very modern and progressive orc, who wants for the industrialization and modernization of the village as well as a better relationships with the outside world. + + +The pair enter the Main Hall, and begin approaching you. Elder Doct is in ancient, dusty armor from his days as a warrior, and has a face like a wrinkled, rotting prune, while Thraka Flameborn is a younger, smaller Orc who looks like a child playing dress up with his father's red Mage Robes. + + +Huh. Perhaps you are still bitter and angry at the world because of your brother's death. + + +"Congratulations at you ascension to Chieftain, Chieftain Mazkil." Elder Doct says happily. + + +"My brother just died." + + +"Oh... Yes, sorry, Chieftain." Doct apologizes. + + +"What's the issue?" You ask. + + +"Raiders have been spotted at the Eastern Woods, by Jagik Longstride. She says they've been camped there for at least three days, raiding surrounding farms and market caravans." Thraka says. + + +"What am I to do, then?" You ask. + + +"You should grab your sword and lead our warriors to wipe them out." Elder Doct says. + + +You grab your father's long sword, or your long sword now. It's a massive steel blade, the blade inscribed with Orc Runes. It's been handed down your family for four generations, when your great grandfather shattered his family sword on an Elven Shield. + + +"Where are the men?" + + +"Down at the armoury." Thraka adds. +> Head to the armory +You sling the sword over you shoulder, and begin marching towards the armory. The Orcs are all standing around, wearing plate armor and chainmail, wielding swords, axes and maces. They respond to your arrival with eagerness and bloodthirstiness. + + +"Ah! The Chieftain's here! Time for battle!" One of them says gleefully. + + +Because of your age, you know you quickly need to take charge and show your dominence. + + +"Alright men! We had killing to do! On my lead!" You shout. + + +You begin marching towards the Eastern Woods, followed by the the Orcs. With that, you begin leading your War Party towards bloodshed. +> Two Hours Later... +You spot smoke just in the distance, where the raiders are presumably camped. + + +"Orcs!" You loudly whisper. "To arms! We'll wipe out the fiends to the last man." + + +You move forward slowly, further through the woods. You arrive at the edge of a small glade. There is a large opening where there's several dozen tents. A group of around thirty Orcs wearing chainmail armor and wielding axes, short swords and maces. You give a few hushed orders to various Orcs to target the various flanks to make sure not a single raider survives. Then, you raise your sword. + + +"CHARGE!" You roar, sprinting forward. + + +The Raiders are quickly taken by surprise, grabbing any nearby weapons and raising them in defense. You swing your sword, which bites into one of their necks and beheads him in one clean sweep. You kick a second to the floor with one swift kick to the head, knocking him to the floor. You raise your sword and stab downwards, going through the raider's stomach. Within a few seconds, the fighting is over. The raiders have been quickly wiped out to the last orc, leaving none alive. + + +"This was quicker than I had hoped." One of the Orcs remarks. + + +"Orders, Chieftain?" Another asks, turning to you. + + +"Burn the tents, the bodies and take anything worth taking." You reply. + + +"Yes, Chieftain Mazkil." + + +Your men quickly begin removing armor, weapons and jewelry from the dead Orcs, and wrapping their corpses in tents. Once this is finished with all the corpses, they set the wrapped corpses alight, which quickly begin burning. You sniff the air, and smell the delicious smell of sizzling flesh. + + +"Chieftain! I counted the amount of beds versus corpses. Twenty dead raiders, but there's over eighty beds." + + +"There's more! We believe there's at least sixty more raiders off on a mission at the moment. Orders, Chieftain?" + + +One of the Orcs, one of the very few archers you've brought, Kanim Darkwit, steps forward. + + +"Sir. The Raiders will be hungry and tired. They'll be here soon. We can lay an ambush. There's a good vantage point in one of the trees..." + + +"Coward! Where's your honor, boy?" Another Orc, Jakku Bearsbane, roars. "We're not abandoning all honor and reason in favor of hiding like does! We find the raiders, and wipe them out to the last man." +> Return to the village +"Curse the Gods, I'm not wasting my time out here in a freezing, empty forest waiting for what could be days, weeks even, for the raiders to return, all while subsiding on nuts and berries like a fucking chipmunk. We head back to the village for a warm meal and a large drink." + + +"Yes, Chieftain." The Orcs all bark back. + + +You wipe the blood off your longsword on the wet grass, and turn to begin the long walk home. +> Head back to the village +The next day, you walk along the street, Thraka and Doct off managing your work for a while. You survey your village. Children are brawling in the streets, the elders are drinking and the adults are working. Everything's good. You think to yourself. You notice a young Orc woman who's name you haven't learnt, and feel a pang in your heart as you notice how beautiful she is. You feel a pang in another place, but that's neither here nor there. You realize that one of, and perhaps the best, duty of the Chieftain is to have a heir to the throne and get married. You'll try find someone soon enough. Not today, though. You continue strolling around the village, before you notice at the edge of town, a trail of caravans approaching. You raise an eyebrow, as there are no scheduled caravans set to arrive over the next few days. You walk up, and to your surprise, notice the caravaneers are not the Orcs you're used to seeing. They're all men. Usually there's a few men mixed in with the Orcs that run the caravans. You walk over to the caravan. + + +"Hey! Who are you, then?" You ask loudly. + + +The Humans on board are wearing red cloth with gold Eagle symbols embroidered on them. + + +"Greetings! I am Giorgio Lates. I am a merchant from the Kingdom of Mankind." + + +"I recognize the sigil. What do you want?" + + +"I am a merchant, kind sir. Orcs are famous for their steelwork, and I had the pleasure of working with some Orc Mercenaries. They're blades, axes and maces are unrivaled, except for Elvish blades, which are as easy to find as an honest merchant. Which, you so happen to have found." Giorgio says, winking. + + +"You wish to buy blades?" + + +"Buy? Not exactly. I doubt you have much use for my gold. I wish to swap, to barter, to trade." + + +"For what?" + + +"We have much to trade. Food, Drink, Steel, Iron, Wool, Jewelry, Gold, Silver and much, much more. We wish to open up a trade route between here and the Empire." Giorgio grins. + + +You frown. Traders are prone to take advantage of humble villages like yours. The Village is also dedicated to crops, farm work and general self-sufficiency. To increase your smithing and weapons production, you'd need to sacrifice your self-sufficiency. Still, it could increase your village's profit and the standard of living. +> Agree to trade with the Kingdom of Man +"Yes. Yes... I like this plan. I will expand the blacksmith's, and begin producing weapons for the Kingdom of Man." + + +"Ah! Fantastic, Sir!" Giorgio replies happily. "I promise, you won't regret this. I'll increase the amount of caravans coming up here, and have the first few stuffed with a little... gift, a show of appreciation. I've you've never had Elk, or Trout, or Lamb, you'll enjoy the caravans." + + +"It'll take us some time to begin producing weapons, but once we're started we'll be able to produce quite a bit." + + +"Ah, good, good." Giorgio grins. + + +You negotiate the smaller details and offer the merchants each a bed and mead, but they politely refuse to head back down the mountain. Despite Giorgio's friendliness, it's quite obvious most of the other merchants and guards were unnerved by being so deep in Orc territory. Still, you think this trade deal with greatly benefit the Red Blades. +> Three Days Later... +You sit on your throne in the Main Hall, in the midst of a feast to celebrate the death of Chieftain Dadic, your Great-Great-Great-Grandfather, who was brutally stabbed to death by Elven Assassins. Despite being unarmed, surprised and quite old, he put up a grand fight. Twenty Elves entered this very great hall to assassinate him, three went out. Thraka and Dokt stand on either side of you. For once, they both agree on what you should do, although Thraka's much more brutally honest. + + +"Find a girl to fuck." He says. + + +"What Thraka Flameborn means is..." + + +"To get your dick inside a girl." Thraka laughs, to Dokt's embarrassment and frustration. + + +"Chieftain, every Chieftain needs one to share their soul with. You need a mate." Dokt says. + + +You survey the room. You spot a young Orc girl dancing in the crowd. She's small and cute, and you briefly make eye contact. She gives you a flirty wink. A pretty girl would do good to help you survive the cold winter nights. + + +Making use of the drink and food is a tall warrior. Her head is cut short and she has a large, impressive blade on her side. A warrior is someone you could relate to and respect as a mate. + + +One the opposite side (both of the room and orientation), a youngish Orc stands quietly, a leatherbound book in his hands. He looks intelligent, but also has soft features and a nice smile, which he quickly flashes at you. + + +Finally, there's a massive beat of an Orc holding a blade that could cleave horses in half with one blow leans against a wall. You recognize him as Ironsoul, a fantastic warrior notorious for spending large amounts of time in brothels in the company of Orcs who choose to have an adventurous life working in the brothel rather than on the battlefield. +> Talk to the dancing Orc +You walk over to the dancing orc, and smile. + + +"Hello." + + +"Hi." She replies cheerfully. + + +"I am Chieftain Mazkil." + + +She giggles. + + +"Obviously. I make sure I know the name of the Chieftain." + + +"Ah. Good." You reply, awkwardly. + + +You realize while you're very skilled and courageous in the art of warfare, you suck at flirting. Thankfully, she's better and very interested. + + +"I am Sarunt. So, do you want to get a drink, Mazkil?" + + +You nod eagerly, and head over to the drink stand. +> Continue spending time with Sarunt +You spend the next few hours talking with your newfound mate. Sarunt is quite intelligent and flirty, almost your exact opposite. You'll make sure that your relationship continues and develops into what could be a prosperous marriage. +> Four Weeks Later... +You sit on your throne, resting your head on your blade as Thraka Flameborn and Elder Dokt tell you about the village's state of affairs. + + +"There's been a change in the management of the College of Alexandria. They've begun to accept Orc students." Thraka says to you. + + +"Well, this is very good for racial relations, but what do the Red Blades care?" + + +"There are many more profitable jobs that can be found if you work in the College. We could greatly improve their lives." + + +"These jobs would take these people away from profiting the Red Blades, cost massive amounts of money, and mots likely they wouldn't receive these jobs for being Orcs. These students wouldn't be able to get the jobs, and they wouldn't be taught how to farm or fight, so when they came back here without jobs, they couldn't work here." + + +"The Elder exaggerates greatly. There's plenty of work ot be found, especially with Orcs. Learning at the College of Alexandria would mean that our children would have better lives." + + +You briefly consider the thought. Perhaps the Young Orcs would have better lives in and after the College, but it would definitely take away from the tribe's size, and perhaps the Orcs would be left untrained in manual labor or the ability to find actual work after discrimination stops them from finding educated work. +> Send young Orcs to the College +You decide to send these young Orcs to the College. You want them to have a better life than you and your ancestors have had, and make sure the Orcs aren't left out in the education world. +> Five Weeks Later... +You sit on the Throne, looking over hunting cycles. Gemin's Point is good hunting ground, but it could lead to fighting between the Dead Bone Tribe, who also uses the area. You could send hunters there, not send hunters there, or the third and by far the greatest option, fall on your own sword and end the painful trial worse than any other Orc has endured of doing crop rotations or hunting areas. + + +You hear yells outside, and the doors to the town hall is kicked open. A group of six Orcs appear, dragging a brutally beaten man with them. + + +"Chieftain! We have found a man in our territory, the goat fucker." One of the Orcs yells, tossing the man in front of you. "He's been hunting our deer and boar for weeks, it seems." + + +"Explain yourself, human, before I release my warriors to tear you apart." + + +"Sir, please." He says, begging. "I'm from the village of Eckleglade. It was destroyed by an Elvish Assault Party, and we were forced to flee. Many of us headed to the hills and mountains, to hide from Elvish attacks, and formed small camps up there. I was only trying to hunt to feed my family." + + +"Sir, orders?" One of the Orcs asks you. "Shall I take his head?" +> Have the Trespasser executed +"Hmmm... Where are the camps, trespasser?" + + +"Sir, if I tell you..." + + +"Don't preside to know who I am or what I'll do, trespasser." + + +"They're at the Morinspeck Mines, sir." + + +"Good." + + +You stand, and swing your blade. The Man doesn't have time to blink before his head falls to the ground, rolling onto the floor. You turn to your men. + + +"Send warriors up to Morinspeck Miens. Force them out, and kill anyone who resists or refuses to go." + + +"Yes, Chieftain." They say cheerily, running off to find armor and weapons. + + +"Well, that takes care of that problem." You think, kicking the head aside. +> Five Weeks Later... +"Chieftain! Chieftain!" + + +"Yes?" You ask. + + +You're met with a young Orc, a cousin of yours, who reminds you of Gruzub. You feel a twang of guilt, before deciding that in honor of Gruzub, you're going to kill this Orc if he brings up something like the placement of the new well or whether to build the new stable of stone or wood. + + +"There's a disaster up at the Kes Nests." + + +"Disaster? That's a strong word." + + +"It's accurate. A group of Zombies have engaged a Red Dragon perched on the mountain." + + +"If Death and Destruction met on a Road." You quote, remembering one of the few books you read as a child. + + +"What?" The Orc grunts. + + +"The Poem, where the Grim Reaper meets the Mother of Dragons on a road. They debate their roles, with the Grim Reaper saying how his job is necessary ot prevent overpopulation, while the Mother of Dragons says that she prevents empires from wiping out all... What the fuck am I doing? I'm not explaining a children's poem to you." + + +"Sorry Chieftain. The Warriors are suggesting you lead a party up there." + + +"To do what?" + + +The Orc shrugs. +> Lead an army up to the Kes Nests +"Assemble the warriors." You say. "Get me a group of sixty warriors who are hungry for blood." + + +You have the group assembled, and quickly begin making your way up the mountain. About halfway up, you begin to regret it. + + +"It's cold, my feet hurt and I'm fucking tired." You grunt as you trudge up the mountain. + + +"Damn right, Mazkil." Urug Eaglebow says. + + +You look further up the mountain, and hear the howls and rasps of the dead as well as the roars and screeches of the dragon. There's few dragons up here, so you presume this Red Dragon fighting is Mont Pre'Igni Rubrum, a near unpronounceable name, or the Volcano of Gargarum. The Undead are no doubt deserters from the Necromancer's Army. You reach the top of mountain, at the edge of a crater. At the center, a large group of two dozen undead soldiers armed with spears and swords are attempting to kill the dragon. It seems the undead are very unmatched. +> Fight both the Dragon and the Undead +You charge forward, your blade swinging. + + +"Go! Send the dead back to their graves and the dragon to Gorgok's Trophy Room!" + + +You behead one of the undead, its rotting skull flying through the air. You feel a blade slash your back, before a jet of flame sets you alight, melting your skull. +> Death +You let out a pitiful scream as your life is taken from you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Assemble the warriors." You say. "Get me a group of sixty warriors who are hungry for blood." + + +You have the group assembled, and quickly begin making your way up the mountain. About halfway up, you begin to regret it. + + +"It's cold, my feet hurt and I'm fucking tired." You grunt as you trudge up the mountain. + + +"Damn right, Mazkil." Urug Eaglebow says. + + +You look further up the mountain, and hear the howls and rasps of the dead as well as the roars and screeches of the dragon. There's few dragons up here, so you presume this Red Dragon fighting is Mont Pre'Igni Rubrum, a near unpronounceable name, or the Volcano of Gargarum. The Undead are no doubt deserters from the Necromancer's Army. You reach the top of mountain, at the edge of a crater. At the center, a large group of two dozen undead soldiers armed with spears and swords are attempting to kill the dragon. It seems the undead are very unmatched. +> Attack the Undead +"Send the dead back to their graves!" You roar, charging into battle. + + +You swing your blade, beheading a rotting head and sending it through the air. You stab another through the heart, killing him instantly. You headbutt another, with such strength that the spine breaks and the zombie collapses on the ground. The undead are so unmatched that they're wiped out within seconds. You turn, to the snarling face of a dragon. It's voice, a low growl, shakes your very core. + + +"Orcs... Why have you come to my home?" + + +"I... I came to help." You say nervously. "I wanted to make sure this fight doesn't move into my territory." + + +"A wise move, mortal. Your assistance was unnecessary, but polite. Please, let me give you a gift." + + +The Dragon turns and stomps away into a cave. A few minutes later, it comes back. It opens its mouth, letting golden coins and gems fall out. Not a massive amount, but enough to fund the building of a new well and to get new bows for the hunters. + + +"Thank you, mighty dragon." You say. + + +"Of course." + + +You bow, and begin trudging down the mountain. +> One Month Later... +You walk up a mountain, trudging through the harsh snow. You're cold despite being wrapped in furs and leathers, and you really need to piss, but you know that if you tried, your dick would freeze off. You lost three farmers and a dozen goats to a Frost Troll wandering down from the mountain in the cold, icy winter that's just started. You're taking a five war parties of twenty warriors each to wipe out any trolls up in the mountains. You lead the main war party of the best warriors who wish to target the cave system most likely to hold sheltering trolls. Wind and snow begins to block your view. You know you need to find shelter soon. +> Hunker down in the cold +You drop down, putting up whatever tents you have. You crawl inside, wrapping furs and leathers around you. You hope the storm clears up soon. Within an hour and a half, the cold is so brutal that you lose all feeling. The snow's bad you have no idea where you're going. After four hours of waiting, you feel a sudden sensation of warmth. You begin unstrapping your armor to cool down. You're hot and tired. A quick nap in the snow would be nice...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk up a mountain, trudging through the harsh snow. You're cold despite being wrapped in furs and leathers, and you really need to piss, but you know that if you tried, your dick would freeze off. You lost three farmers and a dozen goats to a Frost Troll wandering down from the mountain in the cold, icy winter that's just started. You're taking a five war parties of twenty warriors each to wipe out any trolls up in the mountains. You lead the main war party of the best warriors who wish to target the cave system most likely to hold sheltering trolls. Wind and snow begins to block your view. You know you need to find shelter soon. +> Move to the nearest Cave system to escape the cold +You quickly speed up, heading towards a cave. You manage to find it within ten minutes, managing to take shelter. You rush inside, heading quickly deeper into the cave. You eventually find a point where you're sheltered for the most part from the freezing winds and snow. You feel warm air behind you, and you turn. A massive bear stands in front of you. It swings its paw, smacking you into a wall, leaving massive scratches across your chest plate. The bear is quickly beheaded by the warriors, stabbed repeatedly through the body. It's fur is quickly removed and the Orcs wrap it around themselves. +> Search the cave for the Trolls +You stand, brushing snow and some blood off your chest plate, and begin heading down one of the tunnels. The Orcs light torches, brightening up the tunnel walls. You raise your longsword, watching the walls. Shadows dance, but you see no trolls. Eventually, you come to an opening, where it opens into a massive chamber. Inside are four massive humanoid figures wrapped in bear furs. + + +"Trolls!" You loudly whisper. + + +The Trolls are eating several dead goats which have been brutally town apart. You slowly approach, your sword raised. When you get close enough, you swing. Your blade swings, slashing through the ankles of one of them. You stab the falling troll through the side, slicing open its organs. You pull out your blade and block a swing of a stone cudgel from a troll. The Orcs quickly attack, stabbing through the legs and groin of them, killing them quickly. The Trolls collapse on the ground, where they're hacked apart by the Orcs. + + +"Good job, Orcs. Somebody start a fire. We'll take shelter from the cold, here." +> Three Months Later... +The Red Blades have survived another winter. Once again, Thraka Flameborn and Elder Dokt stand to give you an endless stream of tasks to sort out. The main three are the Farok Mines, the problem of excess warriors and the growing worship of Ka. + + +"Chieftain! We have unearthed a massive iron and coal mine down the mountain, the Farok Mines. It was used by men to supply the war machine, but was abandoned because it was left undefended and abandoned by man. Still, you have excess Orc Workers who could head down to the mines to work, with only a small amount of the profits taken being given to the Kingdom of Man in payment for using the mine. It would mean working for the Kingdom of Man, but could prove very profitable for the village." Thraka says. + + +"We still have mines up the mountain, Orc mines. We don't need to come crawling to the Kingdom of Man in order for a pittance of iron and coal. They'll be able to make more profit in the Orc Mines." Elder Dokt says. +> Send Workers to work in the Farok Mines +You decide that sending the workers to work in the Farok Mines is the best idea. These Workers make a small profit, but this strengthens your relationship with the industrialization complex and the Kingdom of Man. +> Continue +The next issue is the issue of excess warriors. The Red Blades are producing excess warriors, all young, bloodthirsty warriors who wish to fight. You can send them to fight with the Raiders, the Orcs who fight against the Kingdom of Man's expansion into Orc territory and their taking advantage of Orc Tribes and Villages. You could also send them to work as Mercenaries for the Kingdom of Man in the Man-Elf War. +> Send them to work as Raiders +You send your excess warriors to join the raiders. They'll fight for Orc honor and to defend the Orcs from exploitation and expansion by the Kingdom of Man. +> Continue +The next and final issue is the spread of a new religion. The worship of Ka, a monotheistic Creator God, has grown popular among young Orcs for reasons you're not sure. This is leading people away from the worship of the many Gods, especially Gorgok. +> Ban the religion of Ka +You ban the religion of Ka quickly. Its spread is stopped, and although some villagers worship him in private, most abandon him in favor of Gorgok and many. +> One Month Later... +You walk through the village, watching the villagers. You're tired of fighting and making decisions, so you're heading home. You reach the large chieftain's hut. +> Go inside +You walk inside, and are met by a small, thin figure in a dress that is far too fancy for an Orc. + + +"Ah! Mazkil! You're home." + + +"Sarunt! Good to see you!" + + +You pull him into an embrace, almost crushing the figure. + + +"So? How goes work? Did you sort out the crop rotations for spring..." + + +"If you mention crop rotations I kill you." + + +Sarunt laughs. + + +"OK then. What about the Kingdom of Man?" + + +"What about them?" + + +"Do we fear invasion?" + + +"Perhaps." + + +"Well, enough sad news. I have some news of my own." + + +"Go on." + + +You raise an eyebrow, beckoning for her to continue. + + +"Mazkil, I'm pregnant." + + +A rush of emotions hits you immediately. Confusion, annoyance, fear, joy, exhileration, and many more. You realize she's staring at you, so you pick to express the emotion that won't make her start crying. + + +"That's fantastic!" You say. "This is great! Have you visited the Shaman?" + + +"Yes, Mazkil." + + +"What do they think, boy or girl?" + + +"The Shamans don't know shit, Mazkil. They just guess and get it right half the time." + + +"Ah, well this is..." + + +You hear screams outside. Fuck. You grab your blade, and raise it. +> Head outside to investigate. +You walk outside, and are met with an Orc child lying on the road, his face bloodied. A large Orc stands above him, who spits. + + +"Pickpockets. I fucking hate them." He mutters loudly. + + +"Who the fuck are you and why shouldn't I kill you?" + + +"I am Grung Deatheater. I am part of the honor guard for Chieftain Pike." + + +"Chieftain Pike? Why the fuck is...?" + + +"Chieftain, we have a visitor. Or visitors, I should say." A voice cries. + + +"Yes? Who is it?" You ask, turning to Elder Dokt. + + +The old man brushes dust off his armor, and struggles to stay standing under the weight of it. Perhaps you should suggest he replace his heavy armor with some nice silk robes. + + +"Chieftain Pike of the Vengeful Wolves is here, with Chieftain Sozin of the Burning Rage and Chieftain Gorgutz of the Evil Suns." + + +You look back at the massive honor guard member. and shrug and head quickly back to the Main Hall. A group of twenty Orcs, with three massive figures at the front, are waiting for you. + + +"Ah! Chieftain Mazkil! We're preparing a war party to launch a raid on the Kingdom of Man's army stationed at Rubgard. They recently launched a raid against three nearby Orc Villages to take any weapons of war. They're castrating our people. We need to wipe them out to the last man. End their stranglehold on our people. We would like you and your warriors to join us." + + +"Sir, this is the perfect chance to fight and fend off the brutal grasp of the Kingdom of Man and free our people." Elder Dokt says, with more bloodlust than you'd expect from the ageing man. + + +You wonder if you should enter the war that's about to begin on the side of the Orcs. Perhaps you've already integrated into the Kingdom of Man far too much to allow yourself to attack them. Perhaps it's best you don't attack. +> Don't join the Orcs in rising up against the Empire of Mankind +A week later, a regiment of soldiers for the Kingdom of Man arrive, led by a large man in plate armor with a red cloak with a golden dragon on it. He enters the Main Hall, bowing as he approaches your throne. + + +"Greetings, Chieftain Mazkil. I am Sir Ignate. I was chosen by our Royal King Alexander to thank you for your refusal to attack the Kingdom's towns, cities and men. I am happy to offer you a proposal, that if you give troops and support to the Kingdom's counter-attack to wipe out the aggressors. If you accept this proposal you shall be taken on as a vassal for the Kingdom and receive our full financial and military support to allow for your expansion into aggressor territory. Will you accept our proposal, Chieftain Mazkil?" +> Join the Kingdom of Mankind in repelling the Orcs +The March of Progress + + +"Yes. Yes, I will join the Kingdom of Man in their fight against the aggressors." + + +"Good. Fantastic, even. I'll bring this message to King Alexander. I'll make sure you''re rewarded for this, Sir. I promise you, this will help your people. Our first military action is to lead an attack on the village of the main aggressor, the Vengeful Wolves. I assume you'll help us wipe out the Vengeful Wolves' miitaryforces?" + + +"Yes, of course." + + +"Good, I look forward to fighting with you on the battlefield." +> The next night... +Your stand at the edge of the Vengeful Wolves' Village, next to Sir Ignate. + + +"Storm the camp. Don't kill children at any cost, nor the non-combatants." You say loudly to your allies. "Sir Ignate, what's the plan for the village when the fighting has finished? Long term, I mean." + + +"The village and its surrounding territory will become a conquered territory for the Kingdom. We'll have a small fort built here to maintain control, but otherwise we'll try to make sure the transition of power is as smooth as possible." + + +You nod. + + +"Alright. Everyone ready?" + + +"Yes, Chieftain." The chorus of voices come back from your Orc, while the Men exclude the chieftain part of the reply. + + +"Alright. Let's do this. CHARGE!" You roar. + + +You begin moving as fast as you can, your longsword raised. The Warriors of the Vengeful Wolves are clearly unprepared, having spent the previous night drinking and feasting to celebrate their recent victories in the spate of ambushes and assaults of the Kingdom. Still, Orcs are Orcs, and Orcs are always ready to fight. There's a rush of Orcs, some missing armor or only fighting with daggers or even fists, from the buildings. You swing your blade, catching one in the head and tearing his helmet off. You stab, going straight through the throat. You headbutt another Orc, sending him sprawling to the ground, where you quickly hack him apart. You thrust your blade, going though the belly of one of the Orcs. You swing, hack, slash, stab, thrust, parry block and behead for a good few minutes. The Orcs are aggressive fighters, which only means they're prone to more mistakes and leaving themselves more open to blows. You and your forces and allies use this to your advantage, quickly wiping out the militant population there. After the fighting has ceased, the Men begin searching from house to house for any soldiers to capture and weapons to be confiscated, as well as presumably anything to be looted. You see a bloodstained Sir Ignate walking among the carnage, laughing. + + +"Well done, Chieftain Mazkil. You warriors preformed admirably. We'll have this war finished in no time and I'll be able to head back to the Elves. I'm sure they miss me, and they definitely miss my blade." He laughs. + + +You nod, barely listening. You feel a pang of guilt for killing your fellow Orcs, not even in self defense. + + +"We have a few fights left, Chieftain Mazkil. After that, you can settle down to your village. Then, we'll be finished our work together." +> Continue +Over the next few weeks, the Orc Aggressors begin raiding and striking against the Kingdom's Forces. As Orcs, your forces are used to counter these raids and ambushes, with mixed success. Eventually, one of your scouts succeeds. + + +"Chieftain! I've found where the main Orc force is staying." He says proudly. + + +"Where?" + + +"The Fields of Gorgok." + + +"The Fields of Gorgok? Ha! A fitting place for our final battle to take place. Send a message to Sir Ignates. We're going to war." +> Wage War! +You march forward accompanied by a massive force of Men and Orcs. The Royal Army, Red Blades Tribe, River-born Tribe, Dusk Hunters Tribe and various Orc, Human, Dark Elf and Dwarven Mercenaries heading forward to wage war. You have the main force of footmen accompanied by your best warriors and the Knights from the Kingdom of Mankind. There are also large groups of archers and a calvary of horse units, moving forward towards the enemy. After a few hours of marching, you see them. Hundreds of massive tents dot the field. You hear their lookouts blow their horns, waking the Orcs in time to prepare for the upcoming assault. Their will be no surprise assault today, you know. You raise your longsword. The blade is freshly sharpened. + + +"Charge!" You roar, in unison with Sir Ignate and several other leaders of the army. + + +You rush forward, moving forward with immense speed. The force of military wrath that you and leading storms forward as the Orcs appear, weapons drawn and enshrined in their armor. You charge into them, an unstoppable force smashing into an unmovable object. + + +"DIE!" You roar, swinging your blade. + + +You swing your sword, hacking off a limb that goes flying. You knee another figure and smash your hilt repeatedly into his face until it's nothing but pulp. You swing again, cutting open an Orc's stomach after it breaks through the chain mail armor. You swing again, opening a massive gash in the side of an Orc's face. You parry a strike and block another, before charging into battle with ferocity. You elbow an Orc in the face, smashing open bone and gristle with the force of your strike. You block an axe swing and remove the arm of the Orc holding the axe. You swing again, hacking off a leg and dropping an orc to one knee, allowing you to behead the Orc. You hack and swing, roaring with anger. + + +"Chieftain! Orders?" One of your Orcs screams. + + +Time to take command. +> Attempt to regroup and target the Chieftains +You blow a bone horn, and the Red Blades regroup around you. + + +"Target the Chieftains!" You roar, charging forward. + + +You sprint forward, dodging spears and arrows. Eventually, you find the Chieftains, clustered together defending against an advance of enemies approaching. You roar as you and the Red Blades strike. You find the leader of this entire army, Chieftain Pike. Chieftain Pike roars, swinging his blade at you. You block the blow, ducking under another swing. You get in under Pike's reach, and headbutt him, before leaning in. You bite his throat, tearing it out. Blood flows from him as he groans, falling backwards. You roar, turning and stabbing the next chieftain through the throat. You swing again, beheading another Chieftain. Within a few seconds, the entire group of Chieftains are dead. You pick up Chieftain Pike's horn, and blow it. A loud noise erupts from the horn, and you begin to roar. + + +"Orcs! Your Chieftains are dead! Flee now or be wiped out!" + + +The Orcs begin to panic, turning and rushing off. They drop weapons and armor in favor of the much needed speed to flee the area. The Orcs armies are routed and quickly leave. The few that remain are quickly struck down by the soldiers. + + +"Victory!" You roar. +> The enemy is vanquished! +You stand on the field of battle, the bodies of Orcs and Men all around you. You wipe sweat from your brow. Sir Ignates rides up on horseback. + + +"We've done it!" Sir Ignates laughs. "This land is all now King Alexander's! No one can oppose him! Hail the King! Don't worry, Mazkil. I'll make sure you're rewarded. Your village will benefit from this, I swear that to you." + + +You look upon the corpses of your former allies, a feeling of betrayal in your mouth that you haven't tasted since Gruzub's death. You spit and shake your head. No, you did the right thing. You fought to give your tribe a future. You have succeeded. +> Five Years Later... +The Village has grown in the past ten years. Sir Ignates and King Alexander kept their word. The village is three times as large, although it has quite a large human population. It's the capital of the massive territory of Orc land, and is the Centre for a massive trade empire. The Red Blades have taken massive amounts of power, being essential components of the Kingdom of Man. The village is prosperous. You've done some great work for the Empire. You're now Lord Mazkil, Sir Mazkil, Chieftain Mazkil and Mazkil the Light-Bringer in response to the massive round of innovation you've brought about. That makes you laugh. You've only been on this Earth twenty five years, and look at all you've done. The World is good. You've heard rumors of a Necromancer rising and Orc rebellions that could occur, but those are small annoyances. Hell, you're glad for them, for it'll keep you busy. You sit on your throne, and the door is pushed open by a small figure cradling two tiny figures. + + +"Sarunt!" You cry. + + +Sarunt, your wife, carries two small children towards you; A five year old human and a three year old Orc. + + +"Mazkil! Gruzub and Durzul miss you." + + +You smile as you pick up your children. You look out through the open Main Hall and smile. You've saved the Red Blades and made your own future. The World is in your hands.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You march forward accompanied by a massive force of Men and Orcs. The Royal Army, Red Blades Tribe, River-born Tribe, Dusk Hunters Tribe and various Orc, Human, Dark Elf and Dwarven Mercenaries heading forward to wage war. You have the main force of footmen accompanied by your best warriors and the Knights from the Kingdom of Mankind. There are also large groups of archers and a calvary of horse units, moving forward towards the enemy. After a few hours of marching, you see them. Hundreds of massive tents dot the field. You hear their lookouts blow their horns, waking the Orcs in time to prepare for the upcoming assault. Their will be no surprise assault today, you know. You raise your longsword. The blade is freshly sharpened. + + +"Charge!" You roar, in unison with Sir Ignate and several other leaders of the army. + + +You rush forward, moving forward with immense speed. The force of military wrath that you and leading storms forward as the Orcs appear, weapons drawn and enshrined in their armor. You charge into them, an unstoppable force smashing into an unmovable object. + + +"DIE!" You roar, swinging your blade. + + +You swing your sword, hacking off a limb that goes flying. You knee another figure and smash your hilt repeatedly into his face until it's nothing but pulp. You swing again, cutting open an Orc's stomach after it breaks through the chain mail armor. You swing again, opening a massive gash in the side of an Orc's face. You parry a strike and block another, before charging into battle with ferocity. You elbow an Orc in the face, smashing open bone and gristle with the force of your strike. You block an axe swing and remove the arm of the Orc holding the axe. You swing again, hacking off a leg and dropping an orc to one knee, allowing you to behead the Orc. You hack and swing, roaring with anger. + + +"Chieftain! Orders?" One of your Orcs screams. + + +Time to take command. +> Regroup and charge the enemy +You quickly regroup, blowing a bone horn to bring the Red Blades together. + + +"Come on! There is blood to be spilt! Ha!" + + +You break into a charge, moving quickly forward. You swing your sword, sending a head through the air. After about a minute, you've pushed your way past the Orc lines and got yourself surrounded. You take an arrow to the shoulder and fall backwards, before you take a spear through the throat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You march forward accompanied by a massive force of Men and Orcs. The Royal Army, Red Blades Tribe, River-born Tribe, Dusk Hunters Tribe and various Orc, Human, Dark Elf and Dwarven Mercenaries heading forward to wage war. You have the main force of footmen accompanied by your best warriors and the Knights from the Kingdom of Mankind. There are also large groups of archers and a calvary of horse units, moving forward towards the enemy. After a few hours of marching, you see them. Hundreds of massive tents dot the field. You hear their lookouts blow their horns, waking the Orcs in time to prepare for the upcoming assault. Their will be no surprise assault today, you know. You raise your longsword. The blade is freshly sharpened. + + +"Charge!" You roar, in unison with Sir Ignate and several other leaders of the army. + + +You rush forward, moving forward with immense speed. The force of military wrath that you and leading storms forward as the Orcs appear, weapons drawn and enshrined in their armor. You charge into them, an unstoppable force smashing into an unmovable object. + + +"DIE!" You roar, swinging your blade. + + +You swing your sword, hacking off a limb that goes flying. You knee another figure and smash your hilt repeatedly into his face until it's nothing but pulp. You swing again, cutting open an Orc's stomach after it breaks through the chain mail armor. You swing again, opening a massive gash in the side of an Orc's face. You parry a strike and block another, before charging into battle with ferocity. You elbow an Orc in the face, smashing open bone and gristle with the force of your strike. You block an axe swing and remove the arm of the Orc holding the axe. You swing again, hacking off a leg and dropping an orc to one knee, allowing you to behead the Orc. You hack and swing, roaring with anger. + + +"Chieftain! Orders?" One of your Orcs screams. + + +Time to take command. +> Pull back and allow the Kingdom of Man to do the brunt of the fighting +You blow a bone horn, and the Red Blades retreat. You pull back from the fighting, allowing the soldiers to move forward. You do some light support work, defending flanks and archers, which allows your forces to conquer over the Orcs. The Orc Tribes are slowly beaten back through a battle of attrition. Eventually, the Soldiers of the Kingdom of Man have begun to cease their aggression in their attacking. The Orcs are clearly beaten and bruised, unable to fight on for much longer. +> Charge! +"Charge! Strike them down!" You scream, charging forward. + + +You rush forward. You swing your blade, and your forces crash into the Orcs. The Orcs begin to break away, dropping weapons and swords to retreat from the battle. Some stay behind, but you make very short work of them. You roar as you swing your blade, slicing through flesh and shattering armor to wipe out all those who are left. + + +"Victory!" You roar.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A week later, a regiment of soldiers for the Kingdom of Man arrive, led by a large man in plate armor with a red cloak with a golden dragon on it. He enters the Main Hall, bowing as he approaches your throne. + + +"Greetings, Chieftain Mazkil. I am Sir Ignate. I was chosen by our Royal King Alexander to thank you for your refusal to attack the Kingdom's towns, cities and men. I am happy to offer you a proposal, that if you give troops and support to the Kingdom's counter-attack to wipe out the aggressors. If you accept this proposal you shall be taken on as a vassal for the Kingdom and receive our full financial and military support to allow for your expansion into aggressor territory. Will you accept our proposal, Chieftain Mazkil?" +> Don't join the Kingdom of Mankind in repelling the Orcs +You decide against joining the Kingdom of Mankind. You don't wish to take up sides in this war. This proves to be one of your worse ideas, as both Orcs and Men have no issues raiding your village for supplies whenever they wish. Battles spill into your territory and any hunters or gatherers you send out are struck down by both sides. Your tribe begins to fall apart. Your men begin to flee, either signing up on either side of the war to take up arms against their enemies, becoming mercenaries or simply fleeing to escape the territory. This leads to the death of the Red Blades. You've failed as Chieftain.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The next and final issue is the spread of a new religion. The worship of Ka, a monotheistic Creator God, has grown popular among young Orcs for reasons you're not sure. This is leading people away from the worship of the many Gods, especially Gorgok. +> Don't ban the religion of Ka +You decide against banning the religion of Ka. The religion spreads slightly throughout the village, but fails to gain a significant foot hole among the Red Blades.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The next issue is the issue of excess warriors. The Red Blades are producing excess warriors, all young, bloodthirsty warriors who wish to fight. You can send them to fight with the Raiders, the Orcs who fight against the Kingdom of Man's expansion into Orc territory and their taking advantage of Orc Tribes and Villages. You could also send them to work as Mercenaries for the Kingdom of Man in the Man-Elf War. +> Send them to work as Mercenaries +You send your excess warriors to fight as Mercenaries, fighting against the Elvish Kingdom for the Kingdom of Man, sending their profits home to the Red Blades.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Red Blades have survived another winter. Once again, Thraka Flameborn and Elder Dokt stand to give you an endless stream of tasks to sort out. The main three are the Farok Mines, the problem of excess warriors and the growing worship of Ka. + + +"Chieftain! We have unearthed a massive iron and coal mine down the mountain, the Farok Mines. It was used by men to supply the war machine, but was abandoned because it was left undefended and abandoned by man. Still, you have excess Orc Workers who could head down to the mines to work, with only a small amount of the profits taken being given to the Kingdom of Man in payment for using the mine. It would mean working for the Kingdom of Man, but could prove very profitable for the village." Thraka says. + + +"We still have mines up the mountain, Orc mines. We don't need to come crawling to the Kingdom of Man in order for a pittance of iron and coal. They'll be able to make more profit in the Orc Mines." Elder Dokt says. +> Don't send Workers to work in the Farok Mines +You decide to send your workers to the Orc Mines instead of the Farok Mines. They make more profit than they would've in the Farok Mines, strengthening and improving the village and Red Blades as a whole.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk up a mountain, trudging through the harsh snow. You're cold despite being wrapped in furs and leathers, and you really need to piss, but you know that if you tried, your dick would freeze off. You lost three farmers and a dozen goats to a Frost Troll wandering down from the mountain in the cold, icy winter that's just started. You're taking a five war parties of twenty warriors each to wipe out any trolls up in the mountains. You lead the main war party of the best warriors who wish to target the cave system most likely to hold sheltering trolls. Wind and snow begins to block your view. You know you need to find shelter soon. +> Begin the long trek back to the village +You turn around, and begin trekking back to the village. Within a half hour, the cold is so brutal that you lose all feeling. The snow's bad you have no idea where you're going. After two hours of walking, you feel a sudden sensation of warmth. You begin unstrapping your armor to cool down. You're hot and tired. A quick nap in the snow would be nice...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Assemble the warriors." You say. "Get me a group of sixty warriors who are hungry for blood." + + +You have the group assembled, and quickly begin making your way up the mountain. About halfway up, you begin to regret it. + + +"It's cold, my feet hurt and I'm fucking tired." You grunt as you trudge up the mountain. + + +"Damn right, Mazkil." Urug Eaglebow says. + + +You look further up the mountain, and hear the howls and rasps of the dead as well as the roars and screeches of the dragon. There's few dragons up here, so you presume this Red Dragon fighting is Mont Pre'Igni Rubrum, a near unpronounceable name, or the Volcano of Gargarum. The Undead are no doubt deserters from the Necromancer's Army. You reach the top of mountain, at the edge of a crater. At the center, a large group of two dozen undead soldiers armed with spears and swords are attempting to kill the dragon. It seems the undead are very unmatched. +> Attack the Dragon +"I want the Dragon's head in Gorgok's treasure room!" You roar. + + +You charge forward, towards the dragon, ducking under a jet of flames. You stab forward, and with Gorgok's aim, your sword slides in between a missing scale and stabs the dragon through the side. You pull out your blade and slice, making a small cut in the leathery wing. You wing your blade, knocking into the neck of the Dragon. With the combined army of Orcs and Undead behind you begin to slay the dragon. It's fire incinerates three zombies, and several weapons begin thrusting at the dragon's softer belly and face, cutting gouges and wounds. The dragon only lasts a few minutes of fighting, only killing three Orcs before its killed instantly, killing the beast. It's head thumps against the cold stone floor. + + +"Ha! Have the dragon's skull taken and dragged down back to the village. I want it put above my throne." + + +You turn to talk to the undead, but they've already began trudging further up the mountain. You wonder why they're leaving, but decide not to bother them. The dead have enough issues to be bothered by the living.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Chieftain! Chieftain!" + + +"Yes?" You ask. + + +You're met with a young Orc, a cousin of yours, who reminds you of Gruzub. You feel a twang of guilt, before deciding that in honor of Gruzub, you're going to kill this Orc if he brings up something like the placement of the new well or whether to build the new stable of stone or wood. + + +"There's a disaster up at the Kes Nests." + + +"Disaster? That's a strong word." + + +"It's accurate. A group of Zombies have engaged a Red Dragon perched on the mountain." + + +"If Death and Destruction met on a Road." You quote, remembering one of the few books you read as a child. + + +"What?" The Orc grunts. + + +"The Poem, where the Grim Reaper meets the Mother of Dragons on a road. They debate their roles, with the Grim Reaper saying how his job is necessary ot prevent overpopulation, while the Mother of Dragons says that she prevents empires from wiping out all... What the fuck am I doing? I'm not explaining a children's poem to you." + + +"Sorry Chieftain. The Warriors are suggesting you lead a party up there." + + +"To do what?" + + +The Orc shrugs. +> Do nothing +"I'm not going to deal with that, Orc. I want you to go, and I genuinely mean this, fuck your mother and stop bothering me." + + +The young orc runs off. Perhaps you were too mean to him. He reminds you of Gruzub, who you loved to degrade, insult and bully. You miss him so much. You sigh. Time to find a drink. Then, many, many more drinks.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit on the Throne, looking over hunting cycles. Gemin's Point is good hunting ground, but it could lead to fighting between the Dead Bone Tribe, who also uses the area. You could send hunters there, not send hunters there, or the third and by far the greatest option, fall on your own sword and end the painful trial worse than any other Orc has endured of doing crop rotations or hunting areas. + + +You hear yells outside, and the doors to the town hall is kicked open. A group of six Orcs appear, dragging a brutally beaten man with them. + + +"Chieftain! We have found a man in our territory, the goat fucker." One of the Orcs yells, tossing the man in front of you. "He's been hunting our deer and boar for weeks, it seems." + + +"Explain yourself, human, before I release my warriors to tear you apart." + + +"Sir, please." He says, begging. "I'm from the village of Eckleglade. It was destroyed by an Elvish Assault Party, and we were forced to flee. Many of us headed to the hills and mountains, to hide from Elvish attacks, and formed small camps up there. I was only trying to hunt to feed my family." + + +"Sir, orders?" One of the Orcs asks you. "Shall I take his head?" +> Have the Trespasser exiled +"Hmmm... Where are the camps, trespasser?" + + +"Sir, if I tell you..." + + +"Don't preside to know who I am or what I'll do, trespasser." + + +"They're at the Morinspeck Mines, sir." + + +"Good. Go back there, and tell them to leave. I'll send warriors up there in a week. Anyone left there will be wiped out to the last man." + + +"Yes, sir." + + +"Go. If you're found in my land again, I'll make you beg I had killed you here." + + +"Yes, sir." He nods, standing and quickly running out of the room." + + +You watch him as he runs off. Well, that takes care of that issue.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit on the Throne, looking over hunting cycles. Gemin's Point is good hunting ground, but it could lead to fighting between the Dead Bone Tribe, who also uses the area. You could send hunters there, not send hunters there, or the third and by far the greatest option, fall on your own sword and end the painful trial worse than any other Orc has endured of doing crop rotations or hunting areas. + + +You hear yells outside, and the doors to the town hall is kicked open. A group of six Orcs appear, dragging a brutally beaten man with them. + + +"Chieftain! We have found a man in our territory, the goat fucker." One of the Orcs yells, tossing the man in front of you. "He's been hunting our deer and boar for weeks, it seems." + + +"Explain yourself, human, before I release my warriors to tear you apart." + + +"Sir, please." He says, begging. "I'm from the village of Eckleglade. It was destroyed by an Elvish Assault Party, and we were forced to flee. Many of us headed to the hills and mountains, to hide from Elvish attacks, and formed small camps up there. I was only trying to hunt to feed my family." + + +"Sir, orders?" One of the Orcs asks you. "Shall I take his head?" +> Leave the Trespasser go +"Hmmm... Where are the camps, trespasser?" + + +"Sir, if I tell you..." + + +"Don't preside to know who I am or what I'll do, trespasser." + + +"They're at the Morinspeck Mines, sir." + + +"Good. Head back to your camps. I'm not going to harm a man for trying to feed his family." + + +"Thank you! Thank you, sir!" The Man says, cupping his hands in praise. + + +"I'm confused why you're still here." You say, and the man jumps to his feet and quickly runs off, out of the Great Hall.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit on the Throne, looking over hunting cycles. Gemin's Point is good hunting ground, but it could lead to fighting between the Dead Bone Tribe, who also uses the area. You could send hunters there, not send hunters there, or the third and by far the greatest option, fall on your own sword and end the painful trial worse than any other Orc has endured of doing crop rotations or hunting areas. + + +You hear yells outside, and the doors to the town hall is kicked open. A group of six Orcs appear, dragging a brutally beaten man with them. + + +"Chieftain! We have found a man in our territory, the goat fucker." One of the Orcs yells, tossing the man in front of you. "He's been hunting our deer and boar for weeks, it seems." + + +"Explain yourself, human, before I release my warriors to tear you apart." + + +"Sir, please." He says, begging. "I'm from the village of Eckleglade. It was destroyed by an Elvish Assault Party, and we were forced to flee. Many of us headed to the hills and mountains, to hide from Elvish attacks, and formed small camps up there. I was only trying to hunt to feed my family." + + +"Sir, orders?" One of the Orcs asks you. "Shall I take his head?" +> Welcome the Trespasser to join the village +"Hmmm... Where are the camps, trespasser?" + + +"Sir, if I tell you..." + + +"Don't preside to know who I am or what I'll do, trespasser." + + +"They're at the Morinspeck Mines, sir." + + +"Good. Well, I'll give you a choice, trespasser. You leave my lands with the threat of death if you return, or you join the Red Blade Tribe as a Free Worker with no blood or legal connections to the tribe." + + +"Sir?" + + +"We have hunting grounds and farmlands that go unused. If you wish to work, I'll give you the chance to do so." + + +"Yes, sir! Thank you, sir!" + + +Over the next few days, the refugees from Morinspeck Mine arrive, and are given jobs so they can get food, water and beds in the village. +> Two Weeks Later... +Due to your choice in accepting the refugees from Morinspeck Mine, there are more refugees arriving. Most are humans from destroyed or attacked villages looking for a safe place to work, though a few are Wood or Dark Elves who do not wish to partake in the war. They're all requesting to take up work as Hunters, Farmers or Craftsmen in your village. +> Allow them to join +You welcome these refugees into your village, both for ethical and economic reasons. This allows your village to expand as your population experiences a boom.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Due to your choice in accepting the refugees from Morinspeck Mine, there are more refugees arriving. Most are humans from destroyed or attacked villages looking for a safe place to work, though a few are Wood or Dark Elves who do not wish to partake in the war. They're all requesting to take up work as Hunters, Farmers or Craftsmen in your village. +> Don't allow them to join +You decide enough is enough. You're not a safe haven for every coward and weakling who cowers from war.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit on your throne, resting your head on your blade as Thraka Flameborn and Elder Dokt tell you about the village's state of affairs. + + +"There's been a change in the management of the College of Alexandria. They've begun to accept Orc students." Thraka says to you. + + +"Well, this is very good for racial relations, but what do the Red Blades care?" + + +"There are many more profitable jobs that can be found if you work in the College. We could greatly improve their lives." + + +"These jobs would take these people away from profiting the Red Blades, cost massive amounts of money, and mots likely they wouldn't receive these jobs for being Orcs. These students wouldn't be able to get the jobs, and they wouldn't be taught how to farm or fight, so when they came back here without jobs, they couldn't work here." + + +"The Elder exaggerates greatly. There's plenty of work ot be found, especially with Orcs. Learning at the College of Alexandria would mean that our children would have better lives." + + +You briefly consider the thought. Perhaps the Young Orcs would have better lives in and after the College, but it would definitely take away from the tribe's size, and perhaps the Orcs would be left untrained in manual labor or the ability to find actual work after discrimination stops them from finding educated work. +> Don't send young Orcs to the College +You decide against sending away the Orcs. They wouldn't be able to learn important skills such as farming, fighting, hunting and cooking, only to be left with skills in money-handling or Magics that don't help them in their life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit on your throne in the Main Hall, in the midst of a feast to celebrate the death of Chieftain Dadic, your Great-Great-Great-Grandfather, who was brutally stabbed to death by Elven Assassins. Despite being unarmed, surprised and quite old, he put up a grand fight. Twenty Elves entered this very great hall to assassinate him, three went out. Thraka and Dokt stand on either side of you. For once, they both agree on what you should do, although Thraka's much more brutally honest. + + +"Find a girl to fuck." He says. + + +"What Thraka Flameborn means is..." + + +"To get your dick inside a girl." Thraka laughs, to Dokt's embarrassment and frustration. + + +"Chieftain, every Chieftain needs one to share their soul with. You need a mate." Dokt says. + + +You survey the room. You spot a young Orc girl dancing in the crowd. She's small and cute, and you briefly make eye contact. She gives you a flirty wink. A pretty girl would do good to help you survive the cold winter nights. + + +Making use of the drink and food is a tall warrior. Her head is cut short and she has a large, impressive blade on her side. A warrior is someone you could relate to and respect as a mate. + + +One the opposite side (both of the room and orientation), a youngish Orc stands quietly, a leatherbound book in his hands. He looks intelligent, but also has soft features and a nice smile, which he quickly flashes at you. + + +Finally, there's a massive beat of an Orc holding a blade that could cleave horses in half with one blow leans against a wall. You recognize him as Ironsoul, a fantastic warrior notorious for spending large amounts of time in brothels in the company of Orcs who choose to have an adventurous life working in the brothel rather than on the battlefield. +> Talk to the feasting Orc +You walk over to the feasting Orc and sit next to her. + + +"Hello. Are you enjoying the food?" + + +The Orc raises an eyebrow, decides you're not joking, and nods. + + +"Yes, Chieftain." + + +"I don't recognize you. What's your name?" + + +"Dag. Dag Unbroken." + + +"Unbroken? How do you get a title like that?" + + +"I've broken every bone inside my body besides my right shin." + + +"Fuck me." You say, obviously impressed. + + +"I'm not opposed to the idea." Dag says. + + +At that moment, you realize picking up warriors is a lot easier than you thought. +> Continue spending time with Dag +You spend the next few hours talking with your newfound mate. Dag is strong, though, aggressive and violent, which reminds you of a more "you" you. You'll make sure that your relationship continues and develops into what could be a prosperous marriage.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit on your throne in the Main Hall, in the midst of a feast to celebrate the death of Chieftain Dadic, your Great-Great-Great-Grandfather, who was brutally stabbed to death by Elven Assassins. Despite being unarmed, surprised and quite old, he put up a grand fight. Twenty Elves entered this very great hall to assassinate him, three went out. Thraka and Dokt stand on either side of you. For once, they both agree on what you should do, although Thraka's much more brutally honest. + + +"Find a girl to fuck." He says. + + +"What Thraka Flameborn means is..." + + +"To get your dick inside a girl." Thraka laughs, to Dokt's embarrassment and frustration. + + +"Chieftain, every Chieftain needs one to share their soul with. You need a mate." Dokt says. + + +You survey the room. You spot a young Orc girl dancing in the crowd. She's small and cute, and you briefly make eye contact. She gives you a flirty wink. A pretty girl would do good to help you survive the cold winter nights. + + +Making use of the drink and food is a tall warrior. Her head is cut short and she has a large, impressive blade on her side. A warrior is someone you could relate to and respect as a mate. + + +One the opposite side (both of the room and orientation), a youngish Orc stands quietly, a leatherbound book in his hands. He looks intelligent, but also has soft features and a nice smile, which he quickly flashes at you. + + +Finally, there's a massive beat of an Orc holding a blade that could cleave horses in half with one blow leans against a wall. You recognize him as Ironsoul, a fantastic warrior notorious for spending large amounts of time in brothels in the company of Orcs who choose to have an adventurous life working in the brothel rather than on the battlefield. +> Talk to the reading Orc +"I like him." You say, pointing to the reading Orc. + + +"What, Sarunt? He's a male, he can't bear your children." Dokt says, annoyed. + + +"Many Chieftains were adopted. Dadic, for fuck's sake." + + +Dokt rolls his eyes, but nods. You stand from the throne, and walk down to Sarunt. + + +You walk over to the reading Orc, and smile. + + +"Hello." + + +"Hello." He replies, looking up from his book. + + +"I am Chieftain Mazkil." + + +He chuckles. + + +"I might spend far too much time in a book, but I still know enough to know who the Chieftain is." + + +"Ah. Good." You reply, awkwardly. + + +You realize while you're very skilled and courageous in the art of warfare, you suck at flirting. Thankfully, he's better and very interested. + + +"So, do you want to get a drink, Mazkil?" + + +You nod eagerly, and head over to the drink stand.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit on your throne in the Main Hall, in the midst of a feast to celebrate the death of Chieftain Dadic, your Great-Great-Great-Grandfather, who was brutally stabbed to death by Elven Assassins. Despite being unarmed, surprised and quite old, he put up a grand fight. Twenty Elves entered this very great hall to assassinate him, three went out. Thraka and Dokt stand on either side of you. For once, they both agree on what you should do, although Thraka's much more brutally honest. + + +"Find a girl to fuck." He says. + + +"What Thraka Flameborn means is..." + + +"To get your dick inside a girl." Thraka laughs, to Dokt's embarrassment and frustration. + + +"Chieftain, every Chieftain needs one to share their soul with. You need a mate." Dokt says. + + +You survey the room. You spot a young Orc girl dancing in the crowd. She's small and cute, and you briefly make eye contact. She gives you a flirty wink. A pretty girl would do good to help you survive the cold winter nights. + + +Making use of the drink and food is a tall warrior. Her head is cut short and she has a large, impressive blade on her side. A warrior is someone you could relate to and respect as a mate. + + +One the opposite side (both of the room and orientation), a youngish Orc stands quietly, a leatherbound book in his hands. He looks intelligent, but also has soft features and a nice smile, which he quickly flashes at you. + + +Finally, there's a massive beat of an Orc holding a blade that could cleave horses in half with one blow leans against a wall. You recognize him as Ironsoul, a fantastic warrior notorious for spending large amounts of time in brothels in the company of Orcs who choose to have an adventurous life working in the brothel rather than on the battlefield. +> Talk to Ironsoul +"I like him." You say, pointing to Ironsoul. + + +"What, Ironsoul? He's a male, he can't bear your children." Dokt says, annoyed. + + +"Many Chieftains were adopted. Dadic, for fuck's sake." + + +Dokt rolls his eyes, but nods. You stand from the throne, and walk down to Ironsoul. + + +"Hello. Ironsoul, is it?" You ask. + + +"Dag. Dag Ironsoul. It's Dag to you, 'less I gotta call you Chieftain, Mazkil." + + +"How are you, Dag?" You ask. + + +Somehow, despite your ability to show courage in any fight, you abilities to get chicks aren't particularly good. Thankfully, Dag's just as crude. + + +"Do you want something, Mazkil?" + + +"I was just asking about you as a person. We don't get to talk much." + + +Dag raises an eyebrow. + + +"Are you trying to fuck me?" He asks indignantly. "Because I won't refuse a piece of ass, but I'm not going to whine about my day like a Man's wife." + + +You smile. + + +"That simplifies things."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The next day, you walk along the street, Thraka and Doct off managing your work for a while. You survey your village. Children are brawling in the streets, the elders are drinking and the adults are working. Everything's good. You think to yourself. You notice a young Orc woman who's name you haven't learnt, and feel a pang in your heart as you notice how beautiful she is. You feel a pang in another place, but that's neither here nor there. You realize that one of, and perhaps the best, duty of the Chieftain is to have a heir to the throne and get married. You'll try find someone soon enough. Not today, though. You continue strolling around the village, before you notice at the edge of town, a trail of caravans approaching. You raise an eyebrow, as there are no scheduled caravans set to arrive over the next few days. You walk up, and to your surprise, notice the caravaneers are not the Orcs you're used to seeing. They're all men. Usually there's a few men mixed in with the Orcs that run the caravans. You walk over to the caravan. + + +"Hey! Who are you, then?" You ask loudly. + + +The Humans on board are wearing red cloth with gold Eagle symbols embroidered on them. + + +"Greetings! I am Giorgio Lates. I am a merchant from the Kingdom of Mankind." + + +"I recognize the sigil. What do you want?" + + +"I am a merchant, kind sir. Orcs are famous for their steelwork, and I had the pleasure of working with some Orc Mercenaries. They're blades, axes and maces are unrivaled, except for Elvish blades, which are as easy to find as an honest merchant. Which, you so happen to have found." Giorgio says, winking. + + +"You wish to buy blades?" + + +"Buy? Not exactly. I doubt you have much use for my gold. I wish to swap, to barter, to trade." + + +"For what?" + + +"We have much to trade. Food, Drink, Steel, Iron, Wool, Jewelry, Gold, Silver and much, much more. We wish to open up a trade route between here and the Empire." Giorgio grins. + + +You frown. Traders are prone to take advantage of humble villages like yours. The Village is also dedicated to crops, farm work and general self-sufficiency. To increase your smithing and weapons production, you'd need to sacrifice your self-sufficiency. Still, it could increase your village's profit and the standard of living. +> Don't agree to trade with the Kingdom of Man +"No. I will not sell the honor and heart of this village to some merchants only to be ripped off later." + + +The Merchant's face falls and he immediately turns ratty. + + +"Fine. Let this village become an abandoned ghost town in the hills that your children will be dying to get out off. Let's go!" + + +The Merchant Caravans begins to turn around and leave. You know that you've saved your little town from being steam rolled by the massive trade machine of the Kingdom of Man.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You spot smoke just in the distance, where the raiders are presumably camped. + + +"Orcs!" You loudly whisper. "To arms! We'll wipe out the fiends to the last man." + + +You move forward slowly, further through the woods. You arrive at the edge of a small glade. There is a large opening where there's several dozen tents. A group of around thirty Orcs wearing chainmail armor and wielding axes, short swords and maces. You give a few hushed orders to various Orcs to target the various flanks to make sure not a single raider survives. Then, you raise your sword. + + +"CHARGE!" You roar, sprinting forward. + + +The Raiders are quickly taken by surprise, grabbing any nearby weapons and raising them in defense. You swing your sword, which bites into one of their necks and beheads him in one clean sweep. You kick a second to the floor with one swift kick to the head, knocking him to the floor. You raise your sword and stab downwards, going through the raider's stomach. Within a few seconds, the fighting is over. The raiders have been quickly wiped out to the last orc, leaving none alive. + + +"This was quicker than I had hoped." One of the Orcs remarks. + + +"Orders, Chieftain?" Another asks, turning to you. + + +"Burn the tents, the bodies and take anything worth taking." You reply. + + +"Yes, Chieftain Mazkil." + + +Your men quickly begin removing armor, weapons and jewelry from the dead Orcs, and wrapping their corpses in tents. Once this is finished with all the corpses, they set the wrapped corpses alight, which quickly begin burning. You sniff the air, and smell the delicious smell of sizzling flesh. + + +"Chieftain! I counted the amount of beds versus corpses. Twenty dead raiders, but there's over eighty beds." + + +"There's more! We believe there's at least sixty more raiders off on a mission at the moment. Orders, Chieftain?" + + +One of the Orcs, one of the very few archers you've brought, Kanim Darkwit, steps forward. + + +"Sir. The Raiders will be hungry and tired. They'll be here soon. We can lay an ambush. There's a good vantage point in one of the trees..." + + +"Coward! Where's your honor, boy?" Another Orc, Jakku Bearsbane, roars. "We're not abandoning all honor and reason in favor of hiding like does! We find the raiders, and wipe them out to the last man." +> Lay an ambush +"Darkwit. Your plan is good. Jakku, I'm not leading my men into a charge when we have the perfect trap right here." + + +"Yes, Chieftain." Jakku nods. + + +You have Darkwit hide in a vantage point in the trees, the bodies stacked into defensive walls to block enemy escape once they've entered the killzone. You have warriors hide at various points to be able to charge the killzone once the raiders have arrived. You patiently wait, hidden in bushes and undergrowth. One hour passes quickly, the second takes long, but after two and a half hours, the raiders are here. They march, three Caravans in tow, no doubt from a recent raid. They break into a jog when they sight the camp, heading straight into the killzone while confused and unprepared. + + +"STRIKE!" You roar. + + +You break into a run, swinging your blade. The Raiders are surrounded, and they're simply unprepared to face you. You swing your blade downwards, hacking off an arm, and headbutt a raider before running him through with your sword. You dodge an axe swing and cleave the Orc in half. You launch yourself into the fray, and hack a raider to death. The Raiders are beginning to turn and run now, but you slice the back of the legs of one of them and stab them through the chest, breaking through their armor and into the soft flesh beneath. The rest manage to make it past the junk walls you've set up and head off to find safety. + + +"Chieftain! We are victorious!" Darkwit laughs happily. + + +"Losses? Kills?" You ask. + + +One of the scouts quickly begins tallying the dead, and turns to you. + + +"Sir! We lost six men. They lost forty nine." + + +Darkwit grins. + + +"Yes! I told you my plan would work. We almost wiped them out and lost very few." + + +"Yes. Have the scouts find our dead and bring them back to the village for the funeral pyre. Orcs, let's head home."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You spot smoke just in the distance, where the raiders are presumably camped. + + +"Orcs!" You loudly whisper. "To arms! We'll wipe out the fiends to the last man." + + +You move forward slowly, further through the woods. You arrive at the edge of a small glade. There is a large opening where there's several dozen tents. A group of around thirty Orcs wearing chainmail armor and wielding axes, short swords and maces. You give a few hushed orders to various Orcs to target the various flanks to make sure not a single raider survives. Then, you raise your sword. + + +"CHARGE!" You roar, sprinting forward. + + +The Raiders are quickly taken by surprise, grabbing any nearby weapons and raising them in defense. You swing your sword, which bites into one of their necks and beheads him in one clean sweep. You kick a second to the floor with one swift kick to the head, knocking him to the floor. You raise your sword and stab downwards, going through the raider's stomach. Within a few seconds, the fighting is over. The raiders have been quickly wiped out to the last orc, leaving none alive. + + +"This was quicker than I had hoped." One of the Orcs remarks. + + +"Orders, Chieftain?" Another asks, turning to you. + + +"Burn the tents, the bodies and take anything worth taking." You reply. + + +"Yes, Chieftain Mazkil." + + +Your men quickly begin removing armor, weapons and jewelry from the dead Orcs, and wrapping their corpses in tents. Once this is finished with all the corpses, they set the wrapped corpses alight, which quickly begin burning. You sniff the air, and smell the delicious smell of sizzling flesh. + + +"Chieftain! I counted the amount of beds versus corpses. Twenty dead raiders, but there's over eighty beds." + + +"There's more! We believe there's at least sixty more raiders off on a mission at the moment. Orders, Chieftain?" + + +One of the Orcs, one of the very few archers you've brought, Kanim Darkwit, steps forward. + + +"Sir. The Raiders will be hungry and tired. They'll be here soon. We can lay an ambush. There's a good vantage point in one of the trees..." + + +"Coward! Where's your honor, boy?" Another Orc, Jakku Bearsbane, roars. "We're not abandoning all honor and reason in favor of hiding like does! We find the raiders, and wipe them out to the last man." +> Search out and lead a charge against the Raiders +"Darkwit, go, take who you need and scout ahead for the raiders. Jakku, make sure the men are ready. We''re going to charge the raiders and wipe them out to the last orc." + + +"Yes, Chieftain." Jakku barks, before running away. + + +The Orcs quickly regroup as the scouts sprint off in search of the raiders. You wait with your allies for two hours, before one of the scouts breaks through the treeline. + + +"Chieftain! They're coming! They were about an hours march away last I saw, but at the pace they were moving they're only half an hour away." + + +"Good. Let's move. Orcs! Get ready to fight. In fifteen minutes, our swords'll be deep in Raider blood." + + +The Orcs all bark responses in the affirmative, and you begin moving forward towards the raiders. It seems the scout under-exaggerated the raiders speed, because it takes twenty minute to finally meet the raiders. A massive group of Orcs, with three Merchant Caravans in tow, no doubt from a recent raid. + + +"Orcs! Now is the time to spill blood! CHARGE!" You scream. + + +You raise your sword, charging forward with your Orcs. The Raiders aren't prepared to fight, but they're still armed from their previous raid and they're still Orcs. You swing your blade downwards, hacking off an arm, and headbutt a raider before running him through with your sword. You dodge an axe swing and cleave the Orc in half. A Warhammer smacks you in the chest, launching you backwards. Your head bangs against a tree, and you stand and charge forward again. You launch yourself into the fray, and hack a raider to death. The Raiders are beginning to turn and run now, but you slice the back of the legs of one of them and stab them through the chest, breaking through their armor and into the soft flesh beneath. + + +"Chieftain! We are victorious!" Jakku roars happily. + + +"Losses? Kills?" You ask. + + +One of the scouts quickly begins tallying the dead, and turns to you. + + +"Sir! We lost thirteen men. They lost thirty seven." + + +Jakku roars victoriously. + + +"Yes! I told you we didn't need cowards tactics. We wiped them out and sent the rest running." + + +"Yes. Have the scouts find our dead and bring them back to the village for the funeral pyre. Orcs, let's head home."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>To your surprise, Gruzub hesitates, before taking up fighting stance again, allowing you to gain a defensive position to defend your open throat and stop your demise. Your energy waning, you decide to take one final effort to defeat Gruzub. He swings his sword at your legs, attempting to floor you, but you block the shot and head butt him. He falls backwards, and you swing your blade, smacking into his head. His helmet flies into the air, leaving his head and neck unguarded. You know you don't have enough energy to continue fighting. +> Let him regain his fighting stance +He quickly regains his fighting stance, raising his weapon. The fight only lasts another minute, with you barely blocking the next few of his attacks. Eventually, he sweeps your legs and he falls to the ground. Gruzub raises his sword and swings it, smashing into your chest. You attempt to rise to Gruzub's surprise, so he quickly kicks you in the head, and you fall into unconsciousness... +> Awaken +You awaken in the Shaman's hut. You wounds are bandaged and you're covered in various ointments, creams and bandages meant to speed up healing. You groan, and get out of the bed. The Shaman walks over to you, checking your temperature. + + +"You shouldn't be walking around." The Shaman says. + + +"Fuck you." You grunt.e way." + + +"I couldn't kill you. You deserve a much longer, slower death at the hand of someone not as strong and good-lucking as me." + + +"Fuck you, Gruzub." You laugh. + + +You grab the softest woolen tunic you can find and put it on. You walk outside, and wince at the bright son. You spot Gruzub, wearing freshly acquired beads and necklaces to indicate that he is the new chief. He grins when he sees you. + + +"Mazkil!" He rushes over to you, and hugs you. + + +You wince as his hug tightens, but manage to show no pain. + + +"How's your new promotion?" You ask. + + +"It's boring. Papa always made being a Chieftain out to be fighting, fucking, eating and drinking. I've just been given the job of organizing crop rotations." + + +You laugh, and pat him on the back. + + +"Sorry to hear. Thanks for not killing me, by th + + +"Seriously, you should've won that fight." + + +"Maybe." You shrug. "Tell me somebody at least shot that goddamn eagle." + + +"It left before anyone could. And I was talking about when I lost my helmet." + + +"I considered it, but decided that I'd prefer to let you organize the... what did you call it? Crop rotations?" + + +"Yeah." + + +You stand in silence for a few minutes, staring at the rising sun. + + +"What do you plan to do, Mazkil? Will you stay here and help the tribe?" + + +"No, the tribe is your place. I want to travel. The Kingdom of Man are desperate for new soldiers to help them fight the Elves." + + +"Hmmm... When are you leaving?" + + +"Soon. Very soon. I don't want to have to go through the whole goodbye deal with the tribe." + + +"I understand." + + +Once again, you brother pulls you in for a hug. + + +"I'll miss you." +> Three Days Later... +You walk on the road, the village behind you. Your sword is one your back with a bag of some food, water and goods. + + +The Kingdom of Man is recruiting soldiers for the Royal Army. They're planning to attack the Elves again, and want as many men as they can. You could receive good pay, free weapons and equipment and possibly make a name for yourself there. You've always hated the Elves, anyway. + + +Time to become a Soldier. +> Join the Royal Army +The Path of the Soldier + + +It takes three days to find the nearest Royal Army Fort, a large stone castle surrounded by a village and a large series of tents where the men stationed here are staying. When you arrive and say you wish to join up, you’re given a new steel sword, a large shield, some polished plate armor with the symbol of the king on the chest plate and a small starter’s wage. You’re told as an orc, they assume you’ve already trained in warfare; a racist, yet accurate assumption, so you’ll need no new training. You’re given a bed in Beast Regiment, which you’re told is the only regiment that can afford to take extra men. You quickly realize this is bullshit, as Beast Regiment is the only regiment to hold Orcs. You recognize Black Horn, Gold Tusk, Dead Eye, Iron Flame, God Killer, Hardclaw and Bearfoot Orcs all there,sitting around a hearth in a small stone barracks. One of the larger orcs, who wears a shiny helm with the Gold Dragon, the symbol of the King, on it. + + +“Greetings, recruit. I am Captain Darruk. Name and tribe.” + + +“Mazkil Boarsbane, Red Blade.” + + +“Ah, the Red Blades are still alive, are they? Had a Red Blade a couple years back, who managed to behead a dragon. He just ran up, jabbed it in the eye a few times and took a swing. Darkin Dragaonskull. Hell of a sooldier. Perhaps you’ll be as good if you do what I say and don’t cause any fights, but make sure to end any we get in.” + + +“Sure thing, sir.” You struggle with the sir part, but you assume it’ll get easy over time. + + +“Sir? Ha, you’re already using sir. I think you’ll impress me, Mazkil.” + + +You notice a massive Orc that towers over the rest of you, his armor covered with what you assume are kill notches. You make sure to keep an eye on him. You find your bed, and collapse on it. It only takes a few minutes before you're allowed to fall into a dull, dreamless sleep. +> Two Weeks Later... +You march through Elf territory with a little over 50 other Orcs, marching through a hilly area with some trees. You've been sent with Karn Deathreaper, the massive orc with the notched armor, to investigate a small Elf War Party. You've yet to experience any real combat, with your previous time here simply being maneuvering into flanking positions to force the enemy to retreat and moving forward. Still, the sun is particularly red, so you there'll be a battle today with Gorgok watching. + + +"Orcs! Halt!" Karn screams, and you stop moving. + + +Karn Deathreaper truly earned his name. The amount of enemies he's slain is among the hundreds if not thousands. He's a fearsome creature, and you can't wait to see him do battle. + + +"The sun wishes us good luck. We'll do well in the battle." One of the Orcs near you says happily. + + +"Cease your superstitions, Nagrak. We might not even fight today." Another replies. + + +"One can hope." Nagrak eagerly replies. + + +In the blink of an eye, a dozen Orcs are dead. You see six Elves standing on top of the hills, light golden armor and long blond hair holding bows. +> Raise your shield in defense +You raise your shield, and three arrows thuds into it. + + +"Orcs! Regroup, and keep those shields up!" Karn screams. + + +You huddle together, and as a group begin rushing uphill rapidly towards the Elves. The Elves fire a few more arrows at you both, but quickly turn heel and run. You reach the summit of the hill and watch as the Elves disappear into a small woods down the hill. + + +"Come on, Orcs! We follow them and make sure the worms can feast on Elf Flesh tonight!" Karn yells. +> Follow Karn into the woods +Karn lets out a war cry and breaks into a full sprint towards the woods. You follow, your shield covering your chest and your sword raised. As you burst through the trees and run through the undergrowth, you hear a yell. + + +"Fire!" + + +Arrows fire down from the trees. After ten seconds which you spend huddled together with your allies, arrows thudding into your shield, half of your group is dead. Then, Elves Warriors with short swords heavier armor than the archers, though still a lot lighter than yours, coming to wipe out the unprepared, cowering Orcs that remain. +> Act defensively to protect yourself +You bring up your shield and raise your sword. The warriors quickly take advantage of the situation, attacking the unprepared Orcs attempting to take shelter from the arrows. One of them goes towards you, and swings. You block his sword with your shield and repeatedly jab him through the stomach, the third stab penetrating his armor and going through his stomach, which after a few more stabs kill him.By the time the Orcs manage to fend off the Elven Warriors, they're barely a dozen men, including Khan. The Elves outnumber you, but only slightly, and they clearly either don't like their odds, or figure they've killed enough of your allies today. The warriors quickly turn and go sprinting off into the woods. +> Follow the Warriors +You quickly follow the warriors, breaking into a sprint. You refuse to let them escape. After a few minutes, the warriors pause and turn. You realize none of the other Orcs have followed and you're on your own. You raise your sword to fight, but the warriors charge. You swing your sword and manage to decapitate one, before receiving over a dozen stabs to the chest.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You bring up your shield and raise your sword. The warriors quickly take advantage of the situation, attacking the unprepared Orcs attempting to take shelter from the arrows. One of them goes towards you, and swings. You block his sword with your shield and repeatedly jab him through the stomach, the third stab penetrating his armor and going through his stomach, which after a few more stabs kill him.By the time the Orcs manage to fend off the Elven Warriors, they're barely a dozen men, including Khan. The Elves outnumber you, but only slightly, and they clearly either don't like their odds, or figure they've killed enough of your allies today. The warriors quickly turn and go sprinting off into the woods. +> Attack the Archers in the trees +You roar, running forward and jumping in the air. You grab an archer perched on one of the branches who screams, flinging her to the ground. You quickly end her miserable existence, thrusting your sword through her neck. You see another archer leap from the trees in order to escape, but slash his legs, causing him to fall to the ground. You stand above him and stab downward, stabbing him through the chest, killing him. An archer leaps onto you with a hunting knife and slices you across the back of the neck in a failed attempt to murder you. You fling him off your back and to the ground and slice open his stomach. You look up, to see the rest of the archers sprinting incredibly fast away from the battle. + + +"Don't bother chasing. You can't catch an Elf. They've ran their entire lives, the cowards." Karn says. "Come on men. Let's get back to camp." + + + +> One Day Later... +You sit at the camp, at the edge with a campfire, a pig roasting on a spit. You wait eagerly for your meal, before Captain Darruk arrives. + + +"Mazkil, come with me for a moment." + + +You struggle not to snarl in annoyance, knowing you'll miss the best cuts of pork, but nod and follow Darruk anyway. You follow him out of ear range of the camp, before he starts speaking. + + +"You were with Karn on the mission yesterday, correct?" + + +"Yes, sir." + + +"We lost a massive amount of men for a mission that important. I need to know: Was it Karn's fault as a leader?" +> "Yes." +"Ah. I thought so. The other men's testimony said as much. Thank you. Now go, eat." + + +You nod, and quickly return to eat. You have to punch one of the smaller Orcs, but you manage to grab a large, juicy piece of meat and eagerly chew into it. +> One Week Later... +You stand around a massive map, showing the Glenin Plains. Captain Durrak begins explaining the situation. + + +"Captain Rhian is leading the Royal Calvary forward to engage the Elvish Calvary at multiple locations. We're positioned here to launch attacks on the calvary as the rearguard crosses Jacob's Bridge and the small unnamed brick bridge here. I'll lead the main patrol on Jacob's Bridge. Karn, lead a force of your chosen orcs." + + +"Yes, sir." + + +Karn chooses two dozen Orcs, to your surprise he hasn't chosen you, for reason's you don't know. You then follow Captain Durrak as you head towards Jacob's Bridge. Thankfully, the Elvish Calvary haven't arrived, so you take up positions. + + +"Alright, stay low, and don't attack until I say so. Got it?" + + +"Yes, sir." You all reply in unison. + + +The Bridge is a large wooden bridge over a massive muddy creek. You take position at the edge of the bridge so you can storm on and wipe out the calvary's rearguard. A large group of Elves aboard beautiful white horses begin galloping past. They gallop past for a good thirty seconds, before there's a small break in the amount of horses galloping past. + + +"Now! Take them all out!" Captain Durrak roars. + + +You leap out of the muddy river bank and onto the bridge. The small Elvish Calvary's Rearguard, meant to defend their flanks and make sure they have the option to retreat, is only about three dozen Calvary units, and you have as many Orcs with you. You see the the lead of the rearguard, a golden armored Elvish Warrior, is on a horse which rears up in terror. +> Charge forward to target the leader +You sprint forward with your sword raised, roaring. You slash the horse's chest open, and the horse whinnies in terror. The leader falls from the horse, and you quickly stand over him, raising your blade. Suddenly, a spear flies through your chest, tossed by one of the Calvary Units. You groan as the spear embeds itself in you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You stand around a massive map, showing the Glenin Plains. Captain Durrak begins explaining the situation. + + +"Captain Rhian is leading the Royal Calvary forward to engage the Elvish Calvary at multiple locations. We're positioned here to launch attacks on the calvary as the rearguard crosses Jacob's Bridge and the small unnamed brick bridge here. I'll lead the main patrol on Jacob's Bridge. Karn, lead a force of your chosen orcs." + + +"Yes, sir." + + +Karn chooses two dozen Orcs, to your surprise he hasn't chosen you, for reason's you don't know. You then follow Captain Durrak as you head towards Jacob's Bridge. Thankfully, the Elvish Calvary haven't arrived, so you take up positions. + + +"Alright, stay low, and don't attack until I say so. Got it?" + + +"Yes, sir." You all reply in unison. + + +The Bridge is a large wooden bridge over a massive muddy creek. You take position at the edge of the bridge so you can storm on and wipe out the calvary's rearguard. A large group of Elves aboard beautiful white horses begin galloping past. They gallop past for a good thirty seconds, before there's a small break in the amount of horses galloping past. + + +"Now! Take them all out!" Captain Durrak roars. + + +You leap out of the muddy river bank and onto the bridge. The small Elvish Calvary's Rearguard, meant to defend their flanks and make sure they have the option to retreat, is only about three dozen Calvary units, and you have as many Orcs with you. You see the the lead of the rearguard, a golden armored Elvish Warrior, is on a horse which rears up in terror. +> Stick with the group and raise your shield +You stick with the group, deflecting spears off your shield. You move forward, stabbing your blade forward as your shield stays raised to deflect any blows. You stab a Elf Rider through the thigh and he screams, falling off the horse, where you stomp repeatedly on his face. You swing your blade again, slashing a horse's chest and causing it to rear up in terror. The Elf falls off and hits the ground, allowing for an Orc to stand over it and stab it through the chest. The melee only lasts a few seconds, as the Calvary Units are desperately massacred as they're clearly surprised and unprepared for fighting, struggling to find their weapons and prepare to fight. Several Orcs armed with crossbows contribute to the massacre. + + +"Alright. Losses?" Captain Durrak asks, as you survery the battlefield. + + +"Twelve Orcs fallen. Three wounded." + + +"Two. I can still fight." One of the Orcs grunts, pulling a spear from her side. + + +"Alright, begin stacking the horse carcasses into a barricade." + + +You grab one of the dead horses, and begins dragging it into place, placing it on top of another dead horse. After a few minutes, you take position on the bridge. You hear screams from the main battle, as you watch the calvary battle take place in the form of jousts and sword-fights from horseback. You grab a spear from one of the dead Calvary Units, smiling. + + +"This could be useful. Sir, if we use the Elvish Spears, we could assist in the battle." You point out to Captain Durrak. + + +"This would be risky. We need to stay here to defend the bridge." Captain Durrak says. +> Offer to go ahead alone +"I'll go ahead and assist our men. Alone." + + +"Ha! You're a mad man, Mazkil. If you want to play with the horses, go straight ahead." + + +You creep forward quickly, your new spear raised. The battle is going brutally. You move quickly, first going towards a Elf jousting with a human knight, with the knight heavily injured and bleeding from a stab wound in the side. You stab your weapon while the Elf is distracted by the knight, killing the Elf with a quick impalement through the side. You take your spear out, and move forward to the next target, an Elf engaged in sword fighting. You keep low to avoid being seen, and quickly jab the elf through the neck and pull him off the horse and withdraw your spear again. You repeat this, using your spear and stealth to repeatedly stab the various elf riders and Calvary Units to allow for your own calvary to beat back the Elves. Your contribution is minor, but as your own forces are already winning, the few Elves who survive quickly head to the bridges, where they're presumably wiped out. You wipe Elf and Horse blood off your face, and begin wandering towards the bridge. You arrive to find dozens of dead Elves and horses, with Captain Darruk laughing victoriously. + + +"Mazkil, you're alive. This is good. The Elves have been wiped out." + + +"I took out as many as I could, sir. I did my part." + + +"Good. Now, we have work to be done. With the advance of our calvary, we can finally begin to invade and launch attacks on the Elvish Villages." Captain Darruk says. "The Elvish empire is crumbling, boys. Take what you want off the dead, kill the wounded, and we'll head back to the Fort and find something to drink." +> One Week Later... +You walk along the woods with a small group. Twenty Orcs, thirty Men and a dozen War Hounds. You're led by Captain Darruk, who stands proudly at the lead. + + +"Recent Elves have attacked our forces, and taken heavy losses. We believe they've retreated to the village of Abhaile to resupply and have their wounded taken care of. I want this threat dealt with." + + +You gently pat one of the war-hounds on the head, amused by the cheerful dog. Suddenly, the war-hounds burst forward, barking. + + +"Here we are. Orcs! No looting, killing or anything of the sort! Once the village's secure, we stay here for the night." + + +"Yes, sir." You all respond. + + +You march forward past the trees, and see the village. It's a large village, with many homes, all wooden and natural looking, reminding you of several rich men's summer homes you passed on the march to Elf Territory. Many of the civilians notice, and begin to yell and hurry inside. + + +"HOLD IT! This village is under control of King Alexander and the Royal Army!" Captain Darruk barks. "Search house to house! Confiscate any weapons. Kill any soldiers or those trying to resist." + + +You nod, and quickly hurry towards the houses. Inside the first you enter is a small girl holding desperately to a stuffed toy, with her mother standing defensively in front of her, a dagger clutched in her hands. + + +"Stay out!" She cries. + + +You look at her briefly, before ignoring her. You quickly search the upper floor and confiscate a bow, some arrows and three hunting knives, before returning downstairs. The house is empty except for the mother and daughter. + + +"Give me the blade." You ask. + + +"Get out of my house!" She shrieks, and you wince. +> Kill her +You swing your blade, slashing her chest. She falls backwards, hitting the floor with a thud as the daughter screams. You grab her knife, and look to the daughter. You feel a brief wave of pity, but quickly suppress it. +> Move onto the next house +You walk into the next house. A young Elf, as young as you, stands behind the door holding it closed. You smash the door open and he rolls to his knee, his bow readied with an arrow notch. + + +"Drop the bow." You say, raising your shield. + + +He fires, and you easily knock the arrow aside. One quick swipe, and his head is lying on the floor. You search the bottom floors, finding nothing, but upstairs you find another barricaded room. Using your impressive strength, you smash open the door with brute force. Four Elf Warriors are in the room, covered in bandages and with visible wounds. You quickly slash your sword killing one, kicking another in the head and stomping on his throat repeatedly, crushing it. You stab another one through the chest to kill him, and stab the final one through the eye. As his body hits the ground, you notice a backroom. You open it, to find a small stack of Elvish Jewelry. Golden bracelets studded with golden gems, eloquently designed necklaces and a golden ring with a large ruby. Your orders are to leave all valuable items to be taken at a later time by Captain Darruk to be used to buy supplies and food, but... shiny. +> Take the valuables +You smile as you sweep the valuables into your satchel. You've fought for the Royal Army for tiny wages, you deserve these valuables. Time for the next house, you still have an important job to do. +> Search the next house +You walk into the next house, to find an Orc already in there. A beheaded elf lies across the floor, a pool of blood spreading across the floor. The Orc, a short but tough man you recognize as Kannish. He's holding a half undressed Elven Woman, forcing her against the wall. + + +"Shut up!" He roars, before noticing you. "Mazkil? I'm busy here, my friend. There's another one upstairs if you want a go. Otherwise, you should probably get out there while the looting's good." + + +You look at the woman, tears streaming down her face, and wonder what to do. +> Stop Kannish +"Kannish! Release her!" + + +Kannish stops smiling, and snarls. + + +"What, have you fallen in love, Mazkil? Fuck off, or this shit gets bloody." +> Leave the building +You walk outside, and continue searching door to door, although you wince as you hear her cries for help behind you. +> Search the next house +You walk outside, and as you go to the next house, you hear a scream. + + +You turn to see a large house has erupted into flames that are quickly growing. Captain Darruk sprints over, followed by you. + + +"What's going on?" Captain Darruk asks. + + +"We were putting the civilians in this house when they resisted, so we torched the place." One of the Orcs explains. + + +You see civilians; men, women and children rushing out of the building as it rapidly erupts into flames. You hear crying coming from the top floor, a high pitched noise that could only come from an infant. + + +"Captain! There's a baby in there!" + + +"There's nothing we could do. The flames would kill anyone who tries to enter." + + +You watch the building, flames licking the sky. You see a small gap in the flames that someone could easily use to get inside. +> Attempt to save the baby +You charge into the building despite the protests of your team-mates. You dive into a flaming inferno, the heat causing you to sweat profusely and groan in pain. You look around, but smoke obscures your view. You begin to cough and splutter, dropping low. You reach around looking for the stairs. You manage to find it, and begin to clamber up the staircase, following the cries and screams of the babies. The flames begin to sear and burn your flesh as you wince in pain, groaning loudly. You reach the top of the staircase, looking around desperately for the baby. You find a small cradle covered in ash and embers, which you brush off and pick up a bundled up, ugly and loud creature you recognize as a baby. You pick it up, and look for a way out. By now, the room's full of smokes and the fire's spread everywhere. You go to leave, but a roof beam collapses down and smacks you in the back and you fall to the knees as the flames begin to sear your flesh. You scream, and roll out of the way, curling around the baby to protect it. You find your way through the smoke and flames while doing your best to protect the infant. You charge through the door and find your way outside, and fall onto the cool grass. Your flesh is burned and scorched, and you struggle to stay conscious. An Elf picks the baby up and says something, presumably thanks. +> Fall unconscious +You awaken a few hours later, lying on a bed. You're heavily bandaged, lying next to several dozen sleeping Orcs and Men. Captain Darruk had the Medic take care of you, it seems, and you've been dumped to heal next to the sleeping soldiers. You assume you'll be taken back to the nearest fort to be taken care of until you've healed up enough to head out to war again. + + +You lie in the silence, trying to fall back to sleep. Then, you hear a window shatter. You look around, and struggle to get up. Thankfully, the Medic's left your knife on you. You look around, before a fist smashes into the side of your head, knocking you backwards. You try to scream, before you feel the cold steel of a blade on your throat. You look up, to see a short Elven sword being held by a tall elf. + + +"Say your prayers, Orc." He says. + + +You grab at his throat, but he quickly deflects your hand. As he goes to slice open your throat, you see a hand stop him. You notice another Elf stop him. + + +"Wait. Don't." + + +"Why shouldn't I?" + + +"He helped us earlier. He saved Gwendilyn's child." + + +The Elf with the sword shrugs. + + +"Fine." + + +You look around. The room's filled with a group of Elves, all armed for war. It appears you're the first to awaken. With the serious burns covering your body, you'd struggle to do anything physical. You could still warn your team-mates, though. +> Scream for help +"We're...!" You begin to yell. + + +The flat of the blade smashes into your face, knocking you unconscious. +> Awaken +You scream as you awaken and are hit with a fresh wave of pain. You look around. You're surrounded by slaughtered Orcs and Men, many killed in their sleep, but it's clear some awoke in time to resist. You attempt to stand, before collapsing on the floor. The pain is all-consuming, and you consider allowing death to overtake you and end your struggle to survive. +> Search the surrounding area +You look around for something to help you out of this predicament, and you find a small bottle of a blue liquid. +> Drink it +You down the drink, and shiver as the pain begins to cease. You notice not only is your pain ending, but all your feelings are. Shortly after, your body begins to enter paralysis. You wince and shiver as you chest begins to slow, ending your breathing. You struggle to continue breathing, but you only manage a few more painful seconds of existence before you pitiful existence ends.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look around for something to help you out of this predicament, and you find a small bottle of a blue liquid. +> Don't drink it +You decide not to drink it. You know that you need to get moving soon, to escape before nightfall, but hold on to the fact their still might be something useful nearby. +> Drag yourself outside +You drag yourself outside. The village is packed with dead Orcs, Men and War Dogs, interspersed with the golden armored Elves who your allies managed to strike down. You continue dragging yourself forward, passing the dead. Vultures land around you and begin pecking at the corpses. One lands in front of you and pecking at your face. +> Grab the Vulture +You grab the Vulture, tearing the vulture's head off its neck and tossing it aside. You begin dragging yourself forward once more. +> Four Hours Later... +You move your hands forward and find something to drag yourself another few inches forward. Thankfully, the leaves grant you some shade from the hot sun, but the pain's beginning to become unbearable. Then, as if the Gods have all agreed to fuck up your life, you hear wolves. + + +"Fuck you!" You scream, as three wolves begin prowling towards you. +> Fling your knife at one +You throw your knife, impaling one of the wolves' in the head, killing it instantly. It falls backwards, and you feel pride briefly, before another one of the wolves leaps at you, landing on your chest. It bites down on your chest, tearing through flesh at you let out a scream.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You move your hands forward and find something to drag yourself another few inches forward. Thankfully, the leaves grant you some shade from the hot sun, but the pain's beginning to become unbearable. Then, as if the Gods have all agreed to fuck up your life, you hear wolves. + + +"Fuck you!" You scream, as three wolves begin prowling towards you. +> Try defend yourself with your blade +You swing your blade, slashing open one of their eyes. You stab again, killing the wolf, but get your knife lodged in it's head. Another one leaps forward, and bites your arm.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide not to drink it. You know that you need to get moving soon, to escape before nightfall, but hold on to the fact their still might be something useful nearby. +> Continue searching +After another few minutes of searching, you find a small silver flask with a red cross on the front strapped to a medic's belt, which you recognize as a healing potion, and eagerly drink down. As you feel the warm liquid go down your throat, it warms your soul and ends, or at least lessens your pain. Your energy renewed and strength revitalized, you begin dragging yourself yourself out of the building and off in search of help.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You scream as you awaken and are hit with a fresh wave of pain. You look around. You're surrounded by slaughtered Orcs and Men, many killed in their sleep, but it's clear some awoke in time to resist. You attempt to stand, before collapsing on the floor. The pain is all-consuming, and you consider allowing death to overtake you and end your struggle to survive. +> Embrace the sweet release of death +You stop fighting, and allow the sweet painlessness of death to release you from the constant pain.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You awaken a few hours later, lying on a bed. You're heavily bandaged, lying next to several dozen sleeping Orcs and Men. Captain Darruk had the Medic take care of you, it seems, and you've been dumped to heal next to the sleeping soldiers. You assume you'll be taken back to the nearest fort to be taken care of until you've healed up enough to head out to war again. + + +You lie in the silence, trying to fall back to sleep. Then, you hear a window shatter. You look around, and struggle to get up. Thankfully, the Medic's left your knife on you. You look around, before a fist smashes into the side of your head, knocking you backwards. You try to scream, before you feel the cold steel of a blade on your throat. You look up, to see a short Elven sword being held by a tall elf. + + +"Say your prayers, Orc." He says. + + +You grab at his throat, but he quickly deflects your hand. As he goes to slice open your throat, you see a hand stop him. You notice another Elf stop him. + + +"Wait. Don't." + + +"Why shouldn't I?" + + +"He helped us earlier. He saved Gwendilyn's child." + + +The Elf with the sword shrugs. + + +"Fine." + + +You look around. The room's filled with a group of Elves, all armed for war. It appears you're the first to awaken. With the serious burns covering your body, you'd struggle to do anything physical. You could still warn your team-mates, though. +> Stay silent +You stay silent, and the Elves quickly make their way through the room, slaughtering all those across the room, slicing open their throats and stabbing them through the hearts. Eventually, everyone in the room lies dead across the floor. The Elf who had held his blade to your throat takes a final look at you, before leaving you alone in an empty room. After a few minutes, pain begins to sear from your burns as your medicine wears off, and you lie their, struggling to stay conscious through the pain, which you eventually fail at doing.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk outside, and as you go to the next house, you hear a scream. + + +You turn to see a large house has erupted into flames that are quickly growing. Captain Darruk sprints over, followed by you. + + +"What's going on?" Captain Darruk asks. + + +"We were putting the civilians in this house when they resisted, so we torched the place." One of the Orcs explains. + + +You see civilians; men, women and children rushing out of the building as it rapidly erupts into flames. You hear crying coming from the top floor, a high pitched noise that could only come from an infant. + + +"Captain! There's a baby in there!" + + +"There's nothing we could do. The flames would kill anyone who tries to enter." + + +You watch the building, flames licking the sky. You see a small gap in the flames that someone could easily use to get inside. +> Do nothing +You stand, watching the building burn with a few uneasy soldiers and sobbing civilians being kept from entering the building for fear of their brutal death.`Thankfully, the baby's cries only last another few minutes as smoke spreads throughout the house. Once it ceases, Captain Darruk nods. + + +"Alright, everyone. Back to work. Continue searching." + + +You search the next few houses, but the populace is either dead or cowering, allowing for you to find a few small weapons stockpiles. Eventually, you finish up and find an empty house to sleep in. Captain Darruk assigns a few Orcs on guard, but thankfully you're not one of them. +> Rest +You awaken a few hours later, lying in a bed. You've woken up again. + + +You lie in the silence, trying to fall back to sleep. Then, you hear a window shatter. You look around, and struggle to get up. You draw your knife slowly. You look around, before a fist smashes into the side of your head, knocking you backwards. You try to scream, before you feel the cold steel of a blade on your throat. You look up, to see a short Elven sword being held by a tall elf. + + +"Say your prayers, Orc." He says. +> Lunge at him +You lunge forward, grabbing his wrist and flinging the sword away. You grab his head and bring your knife up, repeatedly stabbing him through the eye. Another Elf runs forward and slashes your chest open, and you smash his head across the room, and fling him repeatedly against a wall unless his body's shattered. You slash another Elf's throat open, before the Elves surround you. You roar as every single Elf begins slashing at you. Blood begins down to streak down your chest as thousands of cuts and slashes open all over your body. You only last a few seconds of brutal pain before you collapse on the floor.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You awaken a few hours later, lying in a bed. You've woken up again. + + +You lie in the silence, trying to fall back to sleep. Then, you hear a window shatter. You look around, and struggle to get up. You draw your knife slowly. You look around, before a fist smashes into the side of your head, knocking you backwards. You try to scream, before you feel the cold steel of a blade on your throat. You look up, to see a short Elven sword being held by a tall elf. + + +"Say your prayers, Orc." He says. +> Beg for mercy +"Please. I won't say a word, just..." You begin. + + +The Elf sneers in disgust, and swings his blade. He slashes a deep wound in your stomach, and you scream. The Elf slashes at you repeatedly, opening endless red lines of blood and pain across your chest. After over a dozen cuts, you collapse into unconsciousness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Kannish! Release her!" + + +Kannish stops smiling, and snarls. + + +"What, have you fallen in love, Mazkil? Fuck off, or this shit gets bloody." +> Continue trying to stop Kannish +"I'll tear off your head and give it to the crows, Kannish! Let her go!" + + +Kannish lets go of the girl, who quickly turns and scurries off. Kannish draws his blade. + + +"Are you willing to die for that bitch? Die just so she can spread her legs to some Elven cunt who killed our friends?" + + +"Drop the weapon, Kannish!" + + +Kannish clumsily lunges at you, rage in his eyes. +> Behead him +You swing your blade, killing Kannish. You drag his head outside to Captain Darruk, who growls at the sight. + + +"Who did this? Elves?" + + +"I did. Sir." You add. + + +Captain Darruk's eyes narrow. + + +"Why?" + + +"He refused to follow orders. I found him trying to have his way with one of the elves." + + +Captain Darruk's eyes widen in surprise. + + +"Mazkill, I don't have time to deal with this. Karn and I are returning to the Fort. We need to be gone by nightfall. We don't have time to deal with you killing our men." + + +"He was doing shitty things, sir." + + +"This is war, shitty things happen." + + +"Our jobs are to minimize the amount of shitty things happening." + + +Darruk opens his mouth to say something, before you hear a scream. You turn to see a large house has erupted into flames that are quickly growing. Captain Darruk sprints over, followed by you. + + +"What's going on?" Captain Darruk asks. + + +"We were putting the civilians in this house when they resisted, so we torched the place." One of the Orcs explains. + + +You see civilians; men, women and children rushing out of the building as it rapidly erupts into flames. You hear crying coming from the top floor, a high pitched noise that could only come from an infant. + + +"Captain! There's a baby in there!" + + +"There's nothing we could do. The flames would kill anyone who tries to enter." + + +You watch the building, flames licking the sky. You see a small gap in the flames that someone could easily use to get inside.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"I'll tear off your head and give it to the crows, Kannish! Let her go!" + + +Kannish lets go of the girl, who quickly turns and scurries off. Kannish draws his blade. + + +"Are you willing to die for that bitch? Die just so she can spread her legs to some Elven cunt who killed our friends?" + + +"Drop the weapon, Kannish!" + + +Kannish clumsily lunges at you, rage in his eyes. +> Dodge him +You dodge him, and he smashes past, managing to slash your arm open. He rises up again, ready to strike.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk into the next house. A young Elf, as young as you, stands behind the door holding it closed. You smash the door open and he rolls to his knee, his bow readied with an arrow notch. + + +"Drop the bow." You say, raising your shield. + + +He fires, and you easily knock the arrow aside. One quick swipe, and his head is lying on the floor. You search the bottom floors, finding nothing, but upstairs you find another barricaded room. Using your impressive strength, you smash open the door with brute force. Four Elf Warriors are in the room, covered in bandages and with visible wounds. You quickly slash your sword killing one, kicking another in the head and stomping on his throat repeatedly, crushing it. You stab another one through the chest to kill him, and stab the final one through the eye. As his body hits the ground, you notice a backroom. You open it, to find a small stack of Elvish Jewelry. Golden bracelets studded with golden gems, eloquently designed necklaces and a golden ring with a large ruby. Your orders are to leave all valuable items to be taken at a later time by Captain Darruk to be used to buy supplies and food, but... shiny. +> Leave the valuables +You leave the valuables. You're a soldier with a mission, not a thief.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk along the woods with a small group. Twenty Orcs, thirty Men and a dozen War Hounds. You're led by Captain Darruk, who stands proudly at the lead. + + +"Recent Elves have attacked our forces, and taken heavy losses. We believe they've retreated to the village of Abhaile to resupply and have their wounded taken care of. I want this threat dealt with." + + +You gently pat one of the war-hounds on the head, amused by the cheerful dog. Suddenly, the war-hounds burst forward, barking. + + +"Here we are. Orcs! No looting, killing or anything of the sort! Once the village's secure, we stay here for the night." + + +"Yes, sir." You all respond. + + +You march forward past the trees, and see the village. It's a large village, with many homes, all wooden and natural looking, reminding you of several rich men's summer homes you passed on the march to Elf Territory. Many of the civilians notice, and begin to yell and hurry inside. + + +"HOLD IT! This village is under control of King Alexander and the Royal Army!" Captain Darruk barks. "Search house to house! Confiscate any weapons. Kill any soldiers or those trying to resist." + + +You nod, and quickly hurry towards the houses. Inside the first you enter is a small girl holding desperately to a stuffed toy, with her mother standing defensively in front of her, a dagger clutched in her hands. + + +"Stay out!" She cries. + + +You look at her briefly, before ignoring her. You quickly search the upper floor and confiscate a bow, some arrows and three hunting knives, before returning downstairs. The house is empty except for the mother and daughter. + + +"Give me the blade." You ask. + + +"Get out of my house!" She shrieks, and you wince. +> Force her to give you the knife +You move forward, knocking her back with a punch. She cries out and you grab her wrist, twisting it. She drops the knife, which you catch. + + +"Here's some advice. Don't fuck with an Orc. You're lucky you're not dead." You growl.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk along the woods with a small group. Twenty Orcs, thirty Men and a dozen War Hounds. You're led by Captain Darruk, who stands proudly at the lead. + + +"Recent Elves have attacked our forces, and taken heavy losses. We believe they've retreated to the village of Abhaile to resupply and have their wounded taken care of. I want this threat dealt with." + + +You gently pat one of the war-hounds on the head, amused by the cheerful dog. Suddenly, the war-hounds burst forward, barking. + + +"Here we are. Orcs! No looting, killing or anything of the sort! Once the village's secure, we stay here for the night." + + +"Yes, sir." You all respond. + + +You march forward past the trees, and see the village. It's a large village, with many homes, all wooden and natural looking, reminding you of several rich men's summer homes you passed on the march to Elf Territory. Many of the civilians notice, and begin to yell and hurry inside. + + +"HOLD IT! This village is under control of King Alexander and the Royal Army!" Captain Darruk barks. "Search house to house! Confiscate any weapons. Kill any soldiers or those trying to resist." + + +You nod, and quickly hurry towards the houses. Inside the first you enter is a small girl holding desperately to a stuffed toy, with her mother standing defensively in front of her, a dagger clutched in her hands. + + +"Stay out!" She cries. + + +You look at her briefly, before ignoring her. You quickly search the upper floor and confiscate a bow, some arrows and three hunting knives, before returning downstairs. The house is empty except for the mother and daughter. + + +"Give me the blade." You ask. + + +"Get out of my house!" She shrieks, and you wince. +> Try reason with her +"Listen: You have no power here. I could very easily kill you, and my allies would storm in here and kill you and your daughter if I was harmed. Give me the knife and you life." + + +She looks terrified, but she hands over the knife. You grab it, and nod. + + +"Good choice."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You stick with the group, deflecting spears off your shield. You move forward, stabbing your blade forward as your shield stays raised to deflect any blows. You stab a Elf Rider through the thigh and he screams, falling off the horse, where you stomp repeatedly on his face. You swing your blade again, slashing a horse's chest and causing it to rear up in terror. The Elf falls off and hits the ground, allowing for an Orc to stand over it and stab it through the chest. The melee only lasts a few seconds, as the Calvary Units are desperately massacred as they're clearly surprised and unprepared for fighting, struggling to find their weapons and prepare to fight. Several Orcs armed with crossbows contribute to the massacre. + + +"Alright. Losses?" Captain Durrak asks, as you survery the battlefield. + + +"Twelve Orcs fallen. Three wounded." + + +"Two. I can still fight." One of the Orcs grunts, pulling a spear from her side. + + +"Alright, begin stacking the horse carcasses into a barricade." + + +You grab one of the dead horses, and begins dragging it into place, placing it on top of another dead horse. After a few minutes, you take position on the bridge. You hear screams from the main battle, as you watch the calvary battle take place in the form of jousts and sword-fights from horseback. You grab a spear from one of the dead Calvary Units, smiling. + + +"This could be useful. Sir, if we use the Elvish Spears, we could assist in the battle." You point out to Captain Durrak. + + +"This would be risky. We need to stay here to defend the bridge." Captain Durrak says. +> Defend the Bridge +You stay behind, waiting patiently at the bridge. Eventually, a large group of Elves on horseback begin riding towards the bridge. + + +"Alright, boys, hold the bridge." + + +The horses approach, and you aim your spear. You aim carefully, and as soon as the calvary units arrive you attack. You stand on top of a horse, jabbing with a spear, aiming at the riders. You stab them with your spear, hitting hearts, faces and throats to take them down. Many of the riders manage to leap over the barricade and escape to freedom, though the majority of them easily taken down. + + +"Good. Now, we have work to be done. With the advance of our calvary, we can finally begin to invade and launch attacks on the Elvish Villages." Captain Darruk says. "The Elvish empire is crumblings, boys. Take what you want off the dead, kill the wounded, and we'll head back to the Fort and find something to drink."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit at the camp, at the edge with a campfire, a pig roasting on a spit. You wait eagerly for your meal, before Captain Darruk arrives. + + +"Mazkil, come with me for a moment." + + +You struggle not to snarl in annoyance, knowing you'll miss the best cuts of pork, but nod and follow Darruk anyway. You follow him out of ear range of the camp, before he starts speaking. + + +"You were with Karn on the mission yesterday, correct?" + + +"Yes, sir." + + +"We lost a massive amount of men for a mission that important. I need to know: Was it Karn's fault as a leader?" +> "No." +"Really? The other men I talked to seemed to think it was. Anyway, thank you. Please, go eat." + + +You nod, and quickly return to eat. You have to punch one of the smaller Orcs, but you manage to grab a large, juicy piece of meat and eagerly chew into it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You bring up your shield and raise your sword. The warriors quickly take advantage of the situation, attacking the unprepared Orcs attempting to take shelter from the arrows. One of them goes towards you, and swings. You block his sword with your shield and repeatedly jab him through the stomach, the third stab penetrating his armor and going through his stomach, which after a few more stabs kill him.By the time the Orcs manage to fend off the Elven Warriors, they're barely a dozen men, including Khan. The Elves outnumber you, but only slightly, and they clearly either don't like their odds, or figure they've killed enough of your allies today. The warriors quickly turn and go sprinting off into the woods. +> Gather your men and flee +"Come on! We're getting out of here!" You yell. + + +You allies quickly follow as you turn and sprint out of the trees. Shortly afterwards you break free, and to your relief none of the Elves have followed. + + +"We need to get back to camp." Karn grunts. + + +Karn's covered in bright red Elf blood mixed in with the darker Ork blood from those around him. You realize that Karn is a fantastic fighter, but should never be given a position of power again. He led your squad straight into an ambush.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Karn lets out a war cry and breaks into a full sprint towards the woods. You follow, your shield covering your chest and your sword raised. As you burst through the trees and run through the undergrowth, you hear a yell. + + +"Fire!" + + +Arrows fire down from the trees. After ten seconds which you spend huddled together with your allies, arrows thudding into your shield, half of your group is dead. Then, Elves Warriors with short swords heavier armor than the archers, though still a lot lighter than yours, coming to wipe out the unprepared, cowering Orcs that remain. +> Act offensively to fend off the warriors and protect the group +You charge forward, slamming into one of the warriors. You raise your sword and slam it down through her gut, killing her. You grab an Elf about to stab an undefended orc by his hair and yank him back, slitting his throat. The Elves notice your aggressive tactics and five of them crowd around you. You feel a brief sense of fear. They jab and slice at you, opening up your shoulder with several jabs knocking into your chest and smacking the plate armor, causing you to grunt painfully. Then, Karn arrives. + + +"DIE!" He screams. + + +He flings at throwing axe with such strength it beheads one of the elves and embeds itself in the shoulder of another elf, who drops and screams. Karn then barrels into a third Elf and begins stabbing her through the chest, leaving you with two elves to fight. You block one of their sword thrusts and parry the other's, before kicking one into a tree. You jab the other in the neck, twisting your sword to have a spurt of blood hit you in the face. The other goes to stand back up, but you kick him in the head and slash his throat. + + +"Come on, Orcs! We fight and we kill today!" + + +The Orcs are now prepared to fight, with their formations taken up and their weapons ready. The Elven Warriors quickly begin to retreat. + + +"Now, Orcs! Target the Archers the foolish warriors left behind!"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You raise your shield, and three arrows thuds into it. + + +"Orcs! Regroup, and keep those shields up!" Karn screams. + + +You huddle together, and as a group begin rushing uphill rapidly towards the Elves. The Elves fire a few more arrows at you both, but quickly turn heel and run. You reach the summit of the hill and watch as the Elves disappear into a small woods down the hill. + + +"Come on, Orcs! We follow them and make sure the worms can feast on Elf Flesh tonight!" Karn yells. +> Stop Karn from charging into what might be a trap +You let out a shout. + + +"Wait!" + + +Karn turns and snarls. + + +"What?" + + +"We shouldn't go in there. It's another Elf ambush for sure. We need to wait for reinforcements." + + +"Reinforcements? Is your Mama bringing fresh milk and honey? We fight and strike a blow against the Elves. You either charge with us or die."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You march through Elf territory with a little over 50 other Orcs, marching through a hilly area with some trees. You've been sent with Karn Deathreaper, the massive orc with the notched armor, to investigate a small Elf War Party. You've yet to experience any real combat, with your previous time here simply being maneuvering into flanking positions to force the enemy to retreat and moving forward. Still, the sun is particularly red, so you there'll be a battle today with Gorgok watching. + + +"Orcs! Halt!" Karn screams, and you stop moving. + + +Karn Deathreaper truly earned his name. The amount of enemies he's slain is among the hundreds if not thousands. He's a fearsome creature, and you can't wait to see him do battle. + + +"The sun wishes us good luck. We'll do well in the battle." One of the Orcs near you says happily. + + +"Cease your superstitions, Nagrak. We might not even fight today." Another replies. + + +"One can hope." Nagrak eagerly replies. + + +In the blink of an eye, a dozen Orcs are dead. You see six Elves standing on top of the hills, light golden armor and long blond hair holding bows. +> Quickly alert and direct your own Archers to the Elves +You turn to your archers, but it's clear the Elves targeted them first. Most are dead, and the few remaining drop to their knees and begin firing, but the elves are uphill, naturally better archers and have the wind in their favor. It's clear the elves have carefully chosen this ambush site. + + +You feel an arrow thud into your chest. It shatters on your plate armor, but the force is enough to break a few ribs and you groan loudly. You raise your shield, and another arrow thuds into it. + + +"Orcs! Regroup, and keep those shields up!" Karn screams. + + +You huddle together, and as a group begin rushing uphill rapidly towards the Elves. The Elves fire a few more arrows at you both, but quickly turn heel and run. You reach the summit of the hill and watch as the Elves disappear into a small woods down the hill. + + +"Come on, Orcs! We follow them and make sure the worms can feast on Elf Flesh tonight!" Karn yells.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Once you've spent your gold coins, you make your way back to Dendar's cart. Unfortunately, you find yourself in the poorer part of town, clearly having taken a wrong turn. As you make your way through a side street, a voice cries out. + + +"Hello! A little lost, are we?" A voice cries. + + +You turn, and are faced with a trio of men holding knives. + + +"Fuck off." You grunt angrily. + + +"'Fuck off', he says. What an angry orc." + + +A voice from behind you says. + + +You turn, to see two more men wielding knives. + + +"Listen, sir. Give us your coins, and we'll see you find your way to where you're going." +> Tell them you have no gold +"I have no coins on me." + + +"Really, sir? Larn, go see if our new friend's lying." + + +One of the men walks forward, and begins searching you. +> Grab the man +You grab the man, drawing your blade and driving you knife into his chest repeatedly, tossing his body aside. The men begin charging towards you, three on one side of the street, one on the other. +> Charge the single man +The single man is quick and manages to jab you in the side, his cold iron causing you to groan in pain. You swing your blade, slashing the man's throat, and toss him at the trio. You rush onto the main street, but the trio don't follow. You check your wound, but it's not deep. You wander through the street, until eventually you come across Dendar's Cart. You climb on the back, and lie there, as Dendar arrives with a caged chicken. + + +"Ah! Mazkil, how are you? Ah, you're bleeding." + + +"Someone tried to rob me." + + +"Well, I hope you made sure they'll never try again." + + +You nod, and Dendar chuckles. + + +"Well done. You're a true orc."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grab the man, drawing your blade and driving you knife into his chest repeatedly, tossing his body aside. The men begin charging towards you, three on one side of the street, one on the other. +> Charge the trio +You run forward, leaping through the air as you slam into one of the three, stabbing him through the neck. The others grab you and a knife is painfully brought across your throat, before your limp body is released.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"I have no coins on me." + + +"Really, sir? Larn, go see if our new friend's lying." + + +One of the men walks forward, and begins searching you. +> Let him +You stand there, as one of the men walks over and begins patting on your pockets. As the few coins you have left jingle, the man quickly draws a knife and stabs you through the back, right through the heart. You yell in pain, collapsing.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Once you've spent your gold coins, you make your way back to Dendar's cart. Unfortunately, you find yourself in the poorer part of town, clearly having taken a wrong turn. As you make your way through a side street, a voice cries out. + + +"Hello! A little lost, are we?" A voice cries. + + +You turn, and are faced with a trio of men holding knives. + + +"Fuck off." You grunt angrily. + + +"'Fuck off', he says. What an angry orc." + + +A voice from behind you says. + + +You turn, to see two more men wielding knives. + + +"Listen, sir. Give us your coins, and we'll see you find your way to where you're going." +> Yell at the men +"FUCK OFF, HUMANS! GO SUCKLE ON YOUR MOTHER'S TITS!" You roar. + + +"Oi, Sir! Quiet down. Wouldn't want the Guards to..." + + +"FUCK YOU, YOU TWO-BIT THIEVING CUNTS!" + + +"Shit, Larn, shut him up." + + +You hear a whistling noise, and you turn to investigate. Two throwing knives plunge into your chest. You gasp, and struggle to stay standing before a third enters your heart.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Once you've spent your gold coins, you make your way back to Dendar's cart. Unfortunately, you find yourself in the poorer part of town, clearly having taken a wrong turn. As you make your way through a side street, a voice cries out. + + +"Hello! A little lost, are we?" A voice cries. + + +You turn, and are faced with a trio of men holding knives. + + +"Fuck off." You grunt angrily. + + +"'Fuck off', he says. What an angry orc." + + +A voice from behind you says. + + +You turn, to see two more men wielding knives. + + +"Listen, sir. Give us your coins, and we'll see you find your way to where you're going." +> Hand over your few coins +You quickly take out your remaining coins and hand them to one of the thieves. He flashes a grin, and puts his hand around your shoulder. + + +"Thank you, sir. Pleasure doing business." + + +He leads you out of the ally and points in the direction of the Dengar's cart. You walk along to it, and climb aboard the back. Dengar appears, holding a caged chicken. + + +"How was your time in Riverton?" + + +You shrug, disgusted in yourself for handing over the money. You're no true orc.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After a long ride to Riverton with Dendar who mostly insults you and Gruzub, you eventually arrive at the small town. You eyes immediately find multiple ways to spend your precious coins. There's a brothel in the poorer section of town, a large shop full of delicious foods you wish to sample, a small gambling ring and a tavern. +> Visit the Brothel +You arrive at a large building and take a deep breath, breathing in perfumes of foreign fruits and sweet incense. An elderly woman walks out, and smiles at you. + + +"Ah, a patron. How may I help you, Sir?" + + +"I'd imagine it's the same reason everyone comes here." You reply snidely. + + +"Ah, of course. I'm sorry, you look like Gruft, the debt collector. I assumed you were a brother of his filling in." + + +She leads you into a back room, where you take a seat on an old dirty bed. She leaves, before arriving back with three women. One of them is a middle-aged, chubby, unattractive woman in a plain dress. She smiles at you. + + +"I am Helga. She says. + + +The second woman is a younger, plain faced woman with a nice bosom and bum, which quickly draw your attention. + + +"I am Liz." She says, smiling at you sweetly. + + +The final girl is a short, small, pale blond girl. Her features are sharp and angular, and you recognize her as an elf. + + +"I am Starflower." She says. + + +"The prices are simple." The Matron says. "Helga is five coins, Liz is ten, Starflower is fifteen." +> Pay for Helga +You pay for Helga, and all others but her leave. You quickly undress, and for the next hour, allow your animal urges to take over. You quickly fuck her, trying to focus on the feeling rather than her less than appealing appearance. Afterwards, you clean up and quickly make your way back to the street, a happier orc.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You arrive at a large building and take a deep breath, breathing in perfumes of foreign fruits and sweet incense. An elderly woman walks out, and smiles at you. + + +"Ah, a patron. How may I help you, Sir?" + + +"I'd imagine it's the same reason everyone comes here." You reply snidely. + + +"Ah, of course. I'm sorry, you look like Gruft, the debt collector. I assumed you were a brother of his filling in." + + +She leads you into a back room, where you take a seat on an old dirty bed. She leaves, before arriving back with three women. One of them is a middle-aged, chubby, unattractive woman in a plain dress. She smiles at you. + + +"I am Helga. She says. + + +The second woman is a younger, plain faced woman with a nice bosom and bum, which quickly draw your attention. + + +"I am Liz." She says, smiling at you sweetly. + + +The final girl is a short, small, pale blond girl. Her features are sharp and angular, and you recognize her as an elf. + + +"I am Starflower." She says. + + +"The prices are simple." The Matron says. "Helga is five coins, Liz is ten, Starflower is fifteen." +> Pay for Liz +You pay for Liz, and everyone but her leave. You quickly undress, and take advantage of the ample business advantages that the Gods have given her. Her bosom and ass provide great entertainment as your animal instincts take over. You greatly enjoy the next hour, eventually finishing, cleaning up and leaving the brothel with a smile on your face.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You arrive at a large building and take a deep breath, breathing in perfumes of foreign fruits and sweet incense. An elderly woman walks out, and smiles at you. + + +"Ah, a patron. How may I help you, Sir?" + + +"I'd imagine it's the same reason everyone comes here." You reply snidely. + + +"Ah, of course. I'm sorry, you look like Gruft, the debt collector. I assumed you were a brother of his filling in." + + +She leads you into a back room, where you take a seat on an old dirty bed. She leaves, before arriving back with three women. One of them is a middle-aged, chubby, unattractive woman in a plain dress. She smiles at you. + + +"I am Helga. She says. + + +The second woman is a younger, plain faced woman with a nice bosom and bum, which quickly draw your attention. + + +"I am Liz." She says, smiling at you sweetly. + + +The final girl is a short, small, pale blond girl. Her features are sharp and angular, and you recognize her as an elf. + + +"I am Starflower." She says. + + +"The prices are simple." The Matron says. "Helga is five coins, Liz is ten, Starflower is fifteen." +> Pay for Starflower +You pay for Starflower, and all others live. You quickly undress, and allow your animal instincts to take over. Over the next hour you make sure to enjoy every inch of the young elf's body, and learn she's very, very skilled at her job. After an hour you finish, clean yourself up and leave, happier than you've ever been.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After a long ride to Riverton with Dendar who mostly insults you and Gruzub, you eventually arrive at the small town. You eyes immediately find multiple ways to spend your precious coins. There's a brothel in the poorer section of town, a large shop full of delicious foods you wish to sample, a small gambling ring and a tavern. +> Visit the Shop +You go into the shop, and buy a lamb steak, a shiny purple fruit, boiled sheep's brain and a pouch of milk. You quickly eat these delicious fruits, particularly enjoying the sheep's brain and milk. As you finish, you smile to yourself, your stomach full. + + +Time to find something else to do.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After a long ride to Riverton with Dendar who mostly insults you and Gruzub, you eventually arrive at the small town. You eyes immediately find multiple ways to spend your precious coins. There's a brothel in the poorer section of town, a large shop full of delicious foods you wish to sample, a small gambling ring and a tavern. +> Visit the Gambling Ring +You go inside the gambling ring, where a large half-orc stands, leaning against the doorway. + + +"Good evening, kind patron." He says in a dull, bored voice. "Would you care to see a fight? Five coins, make a bet." + + +"What's the fight?" You ask, eagerly. + + +"A Dragon Youngling, can barely spit fire, vs a trio of wolves we managed to catch. It's a good fight." +> Bet on the Wolves +You place a five coin bet on the wolves, and enter the gambling ring. You find a spot looking in on the ring, watching a small red dragon, snarling at the crowd. Three trapdoors open, with three wolves entering. The wolves begin howling as the dragon snarls. The Dragon lets out a short first of fire, alighting one of the wolves who begins leaping and rolling around in pain. The other two wolves jump, with the dragon lunging forward and biting into the second wolf's neck and tearing into the flesh and fur, before dropping the bleeding wolf. The third wolf lands on the dragon and begins biting and tearing at the dragon's wing. The Dragon screeches, leaping around and flinging the wolf off the ring. The dragon snarls and leaps forward, tearing the wolf's head off and flinging it out of the ring. It lands next to you, but a small child grabs it first and holds it in the air with a laugh. + + +You leave, five coins poorer.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You go inside the gambling ring, where a large half-orc stands, leaning against the doorway. + + +"Good evening, kind patron." He says in a dull, bored voice. "Would you care to see a fight? Five coins, make a bet." + + +"What's the fight?" You ask, eagerly. + + +"A Dragon Youngling, can barely spit fire, vs a trio of wolves we managed to catch. It's a good fight." +> Bet on the Dragon Youngling +You place a five coin bet on the dragon youngling, and enter the gambling ring. You find a spot looking in on the ring, watching a small red dragon, snarling at the crowd. Three trapdoors open, with three wolves entering. The wolves begin howling as the dragon snarls. The Dragon lets out a short first of fire, alighting one of the wolves who begins leaping and rolling around in pain. The other two wolves jump, with the dragon lunging forward and biting into the second wolf's neck and tearing into the flesh and fur, before dropping the bleeding wolf. The third wolf lands on the dragon and begins biting and tearing at the dragon's wing. The Dragon screeches, leaping around and flinging the wolf off the ring. The dragon snarls and leaps forward, tearing the wolf's head off and flinging it out of the ring. It lands next to you, but a small child grabs it first and holds it in the air with a laugh. + + +You leave, five coins richer.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After a long ride to Riverton with Dendar who mostly insults you and Gruzub, you eventually arrive at the small town. You eyes immediately find multiple ways to spend your precious coins. There's a brothel in the poorer section of town, a large shop full of delicious foods you wish to sample, a small gambling ring and a tavern. +> Visit the Tavern +You walk into the Tavern, and drop five gold coins on the counter. + + +"Barkeep. Get me a mug of your finest ale. No, get me however many mugs of my cheapest ale this can get." + + +You're slid over several mugs of ale, which you begin drinking with glee. As you do, an old man sits down next to you wearing the Kingdom of Man's military uniform. + + +"Good day, sir. Ah, an orc. A fierce beast, at that one." + + +"I am not a beast. I am a warrior." You grunt, annoyed. + + +"Ah, of course, of course my good friend. I was just making conversation." + + +You look over at him, noting a black, jagged blade at his side that you recognize as Demonic Obsidian. + + +"That's a nice blade. Where's it from?" You ask. + + +"Ah, now that's a story. I'll tell it to you for a bottle of Elvish Wine, only five coins. A man needs to drink." He winks at you. +> Pay for the man's wine +You pay for the man's drink, and he gleefully accepts. + + +"Thank you. Hell, your kind are far better than most around here. I was a soldier in the King's Royal Army. I was sent to fight the Necromancer's Army, at only a young age. Not the current Necromancer, mind you, the boy's father, the first Necromancer. I was sent to a small graveyard, where a local friendly giant had been buried. One of the Necromancer's Disciples had taken a group of zombies and ghouls down to raise the giant as a soldier in their army, so I was sent to kill them with my regiment. The dead were everywhere, and I sunk my sword into a zombie and lost it. There I was, unarmed and surrounded by the dead, when I saw this figure in a black cloak. I tackled him, grabbed his sword, this very weapon, and stabbed him to death. With that, the zombies lost their leader and we regrouped and repelled the dead. I wielded this very sword when we stormed Reaper's Castle and killed that blasted necromancer. Anyhow, that's my story. I'm glad someone heard it, and gladder my lips aren't as parched." + + +You nod and quickly finish your drink.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk into the Tavern, and drop five gold coins on the counter. + + +"Barkeep. Get me a mug of your finest ale. No, get me however many mugs of my cheapest ale this can get." + + +You're slid over several mugs of ale, which you begin drinking with glee. As you do, an old man sits down next to you wearing the Kingdom of Man's military uniform. + + +"Good day, sir. Ah, an orc. A fierce beast, at that one." + + +"I am not a beast. I am a warrior." You grunt, annoyed. + + +"Ah, of course, of course my good friend. I was just making conversation." + + +You look over at him, noting a black, jagged blade at his side that you recognize as Demonic Obsidian. + + +"That's a nice blade. Where's it from?" You ask. + + +"Ah, now that's a story. I'll tell it to you for a bottle of Elvish Wine, only five coins. A man needs to drink." He winks at you. +> Refuse +"No thanks." + + +The Soldier nods in understanding, and you continue drinking. After a few minutes, a man knocks into you, spilling your drink. + + +"Oi!" You yell, standing up and turning. + + +In front of you is a large man with a thick black beard, who looks at you. + + +"What?" + + +"You spilled my drink!" You roar at him. + + +"Ha! My little daughter could've held a drink with more grip than that! It's not my fault!" +> Punch the Man +You smash your fist into the man's head, knocking him backwards. The man stumbles backwards, and you leap in, punching him twice more. +> Continue punching +You continue punching, and although the man gets two hits in and you, smashing your nose, his body eventually goes limp as he falls to the ground.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You smash your fist into the man's head, knocking him backwards. The man stumbles backwards, and you leap in, punching him twice more. +> Leave the Tavern +You turn to leave as the man stands again. As you walk, the man draws a sword and yells. You turn to confront him, but he stabs you through the chest, straight through the heart.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You roll to the side, narrowly dodging a goring from the beast's tusks. As it runs past, you leap forward with your knife, cutting through thick fur and drawing a fair amount of blood. It squeals, before running forward and turning around once more for another charge. +> Have Gruzub distract it +"Gruzub! Distract the beast!" + + +"Distract it?" Gruzub asks quizically, before picking up a stone and chucking it at the boar. + + +The boar squeals and turns to gore Gruzub. + + +"I did it! Ah, I did it!" He yells, diving out of the way. + + +You charge forward, stabbing the boar repeatedly in the side. It's intestines begin falling out, and it collapses, dead.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The symphonies of snoring and vigorous notebook writing fill your ears as you sit in class at Bridgeport High School. + + +Why can't this English class be over already? You think to yourself. + + +Slowly, you pull out your phone and start checking your texts... + + +Hey! Do you want to go see Studio 5 tonight? + +It's supposed to be an awesome movie! + +Your friend asks you. + + +Is that the murder mystery? It sounds really good! + +I can't even imagine what it must feel like getting + +chased by a killer in real life! + +You respond back. + + +RING RING RING RING RING RING!!! + + +The sound of your high school's bell screams into your ears as you lift your head up from your cell phone. It looks like it's time to go home! You grab your belongings, throw everything into your backpack, and rush out of your classroom. + + +Flooded in the halls are hundreds of students and faculty. You squeeze your way past the crowds to your locker and spin the lock for your combination. + + +14-22-10...CLICK! + + +You swing the locker open and grab your books. Why does there have to be so much homework?! It's Friday! + + +You close the locker and make your tedious way down the stairs of the school to the exit. Outside, you see the same long row of six or seven school buses. Luckily for you, your home is walking distance from the school, so you don't have to deal with finding a seat or bullies. Although you do wish your parents would surprise you with a car. After all, your 16th birthday is coming up soon. + + +You follow the crowds out of the school grounds and cross the street. There are two paths you can take... + + +The Shortcut - Begin a new story + + +Author's Note - Note from the author +> The Shortcut +You turn to take the shortcut through the woods. Surprisingly, not many people know about this shortcut. You stumbled upon it on accident while following a group of students that lived near you. The path remains pretty isolated for the most part. + + +The sound of cracking twigs and the wind hitting the trees becomes more apparent. The farther away you leave the school, the more silent with nature you get. + + +SCREECH! + + +The sound of an animal's cry of pain fills your ears. You look around and don't see anything. You keep walking forward until you reach a cliff. Normally, you walk around the cliff and continue upwards. + + +SCREECH! + + +It looks like the sound is coming from down below. + + +Important Choice: Do you risk climbing down the cliff to investigate the noise? OR Do you ignore the noise and continue your way home. + + +Your decision will have consequences. +> Risk climbing down the cliff to investigate the noise. +You have made your decision. + + +For some reason, you feel different. You feel chills swing over your body, almost as if someone is watching you and your every move. You turn around. Nothing but the forest and trees. + + +You approach the cliff and see an old, wooden ladder. You've always been too afraid to approach the cliff, mostly due to your fear of heights. The ladder is fastened to the cliff, allowing for travel below. You grab on to it and slowly make your way down. Your hands begin to get sweaty at the climb. You must be several hundred feet in the air! Don't look down, don't look down, don't look down...you tell yourself. + + +SCREECH! + + +You hear the sound of the animal's cries in pain. Your pace hastens as you continue your trek down the ladder. + + +POP...POP...POP...POP!!!! + + +You look up at the ladder. The weight of your body and backpack have caused it to unhinge! This old thing can't hold your weight much longer! Now what?! +> Jump off the ladder! +"Hyah!" you scream as you jump off the ladder. You close your eyes. This must be the end. What a terrible way to go. You can see it in the newspapers now. "Kid Jumps off old Ladder and Falls to Their Death". Just as quickly, an eerie thought hits you in the face. What if everyone thinks you committed suicide? What if they don't find your body? What if you stay missing at the bottom of this cliff forever?! + + +PLOSH! + + +You open your eyes. It looks like the drop down was only a couple feet. You smile and realize that you are safe. +> The Bottom of the Cliff +SCREEEEECH! + + +The screeching sound gets louder and louder. You quickly turn around. The bottom of the cliff is pretty dark. You pull out your smart phone and slide the lock. Just as fast, you turn on the flash, revealing the darkness. + + +The bottom of the cliff feels more like a cave than anything else. You walk slowly, hoping that a bear didn't make its home down here. + + +You continue your way through the cliff until you come across...a fox? + + +The fox appears to be stuck. Its hind leg is trapped between two large rocks. You shine the light on the fox, revealing it's red eyes. It growls at you, but then painfully makes a screeching sound. You look down at the two rocks and see some blood. Perhaps the rocks fell from the cavern ceiling, pinning the fox's leg beneath it. You're not exactly a hunter or a fox trainer. Is it safe to free the fox from it's prison? + + +Important Choice: Do you move the two rocks and free the fox? OR Do you leave the fox to die and find a way out of the cavern? + + +Your decision will have consequences. +> Move the two rocks and free the fox. +You have made your decision. + + +You grab one of the large rocks and push it aside with all your might. You can hear the fox wincing in pain, but it's no longer screeching. You grab the other rock and forcefully move it aside. The fox gets up and begins licking its paws, still crying in pain. + + +Finally, the fox looks up at you and then turns to scurry away. + + +You exhale in relief that the fox is okay and didn't attack you. +> The Way Out +You continue your way down the cavern. As you take each step, you fear that you may never see the sun ever again. + + +You shine your phone's flash on the ground and see a fork in the path. You try to investigate for signs and see one: + + +DANGER! + +Right Path is Unstable + + +Which way do you go? +> Left Path +You make your way down the left path of the cave. The further you walk, the less dark it gets. It looks like you're finally reaching an exit! + + +The sun beats down on your face. You leave the cavern and realize that you have no clue where you are. You pull out your phone and enter the GPS app. Unfortunately, you don't have any reception from where you are. Better check later... + + +You start heading forward, trying to think where the cavern could've taken you in comparison to where you climbed down. You walk around the cavern opening and realize that there's way to many trees to see anything from above. + + +You continue forward, hoping you stumble home... +> Continue +You make your walk through the forest. Pulling out your phone, you look at the time, 4:15 PM. The bell at school rang exactly 1 hour ago. You've been traveling through this shortcut for 1 hour. If you just would have taken the long way home, you wouldn't be in this mess. + + +"Please don't do this! Please!" + + +You hear the sound of a girl. You start running forward and come across a large boulder. From the opposite side of the boulder, you see the girl. Her wrists are bound. You can see a figure above her. The figure appears to be wearing a clown mask. + + +"I'll do anything you want, please don't kill me!" + + +The clown mask figure grabs a long machete from his pocket and playfully wraps it around the girl's neck. You can hear the girl whimper in pain. + + +Important Choice: Do you risk trying to save the girl from the clown? OR Do you wait to see what happens? + + +Your decision will have consequences. +> Risk trying to save the girl from the clown. +You have made your decision. + + +Can this day get any worse?! First you lose your way home, and now you're about to fight a serial killer clown! + + +You look around nervously for something to fight with. The closest thing thing to you is a large rock. With one swift breath, you get up from hiding. + + +"Take that, you evil clown!" + + +"What are you doing?!" the girl turns around and screams at you. + + +You ram the rock into the clown's head. The clown falls backwards on to the grass. With all your might, you jump on top of the clown. You turn to the girl. "Run away now!" + + +The girl doesn't run away. She grabs you and pushes you off the clown. + + +"You psycho! That clown isn't trying to kill me!" + + +The clown gets up and takes his mask off. It's just a normal guy. + + +You look at the two people very confusingly. "Then what's happening?" + + +The bound girl and masked clown guy look at each other. "We're - we're role playing." + + +And YOU'RE the psycho. "Who role plays a serial killer clown kidnapping in the middle of the forest?!" + + +The couple looks at you menacingly. "Just stay away from us." They run away towards the cavern. + + +You look around and notice that the clown guy dropped his machete. Should you take it? + + +Tip: Click on the machete to take it. It will get added to your inventory. You do not have to click on the machete to take it if you don't want to. The decision is yours.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You make your walk through the forest. Pulling out your phone, you look at the time, 4:15 PM. The bell at school rang exactly 1 hour ago. You've been traveling through this shortcut for 1 hour. If you just would have taken the long way home, you wouldn't be in this mess. + + +"Please don't do this! Please!" + + +You hear the sound of a girl. You start running forward and come across a large boulder. From the opposite side of the boulder, you see the girl. Her wrists are bound. You can see a figure above her. The figure appears to be wearing a clown mask. + + +"I'll do anything you want, please don't kill me!" + + +The clown mask figure grabs a long machete from his pocket and playfully wraps it around the girl's neck. You can hear the girl whimper in pain. + + +Important Choice: Do you risk trying to save the girl from the clown? OR Do you wait to see what happens? + + +Your decision will have consequences. +> Wait to see what happens. +You have made your choice. + + +You don't have a single chance against a clown with a machete. You crouch down and hope that something can happen. + + +"Please! I beg of you! HELP SOMEBODY HELP!" + + +The clown grabs the mouth of the girl with his bare hands. She screams in his palm but you can't hear her. You turn around and close your eyes, hoping this could all end quickly. + + +"Get your clown tongue in my mouth right now!" + + +You open your eyes. What just happened? You turn around and see the girl. She's still tied up. The clown guy is on the ground, his mask is still on. They appear to be making out. + + +"How did you like this little sexcapade? Don't you just love role playing?" you hear the girl say to the clown. She takes the clown's mask off, revealing a teenage guy. He nods and continues making out with the girl. + + +So this wasn't a real serial killer clown? Something's up... + + +You walk around the boulder and approach the couple. "Excuse me...is everything okay over here" + + +The girl looks up at you. "Oh my God! It's a pervert! Were you watching us?!" + + +You look at the girl in disbelief. "I thought you were going to die!" + + +The clown guy takes his mask off. "Yeah, everything's fine. We're just...role playing." + + +You look at the couple in disbelief. Who role plays a serial killer clown kidnapping in the middle of the forest?! + + +"It's about time we start leaving anyway, right honey?" the clown suggests. + + +"Yeah, I don't want any pervs watching us." the girl gives you a menacing look. They both get up and start heading back towards the way you came. + + +You're still in disbelief at what just happened. You take a deep breath and continue your way home...you hope...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You continue your way down the cavern. As you take each step, you fear that you may never see the sun ever again. + + +You shine your phone's flash on the ground and see a fork in the path. You try to investigate for signs and see one: + + +DANGER! + +Right Path is Unstable + + +Which way do you go? +> Right Path +You ignore the sign and push forward, hoping that it might just be old or something. As you make your way down the cavern, you see a light shrouded in darkness. + + +What is a light doing in the middle of this cavern? You think to yourself. + + +You follow the light and finally get to it. It's a gasoline lamp. You turn the corner where the light is and notice that you are in some kind of bedroom. + + +In one corner of the room is a cot on the floor. Beside the cot is a fire with a cooking pit above it. You see several newspapers and toilet paper on another side. Next to the lantern, you see a crumpled piece of paper. + + +You unfold it and realize that it is a newspaper clipping. "Killer Escaped From Sanitarium" The article is too old to read. Could the killer be living here? + + +You shudder and decide to make your way back to the left path. + + +Clue Discovered!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>SCREEEEECH! + + +The screeching sound gets louder and louder. You quickly turn around. The bottom of the cliff is pretty dark. You pull out your smart phone and slide the lock. Just as fast, you turn on the flash, revealing the darkness. + + +The bottom of the cliff feels more like a cave than anything else. You walk slowly, hoping that a bear didn't make its home down here. + + +You continue your way through the cliff until you come across...a fox? + + +The fox appears to be stuck. Its hind leg is trapped between two large rocks. You shine the light on the fox, revealing it's red eyes. It growls at you, but then painfully makes a screeching sound. You look down at the two rocks and see some blood. Perhaps the rocks fell from the cavern ceiling, pinning the fox's leg beneath it. You're not exactly a hunter or a fox trainer. Is it safe to free the fox from it's prison? + + +Important Choice: Do you move the two rocks and free the fox? OR Do you leave the fox to die and find a way out of the cavern? + + +Your decision will have consequences. +> Leave the fox to die and find a way out of the cavern. +You have made your decision. + + +You look down at the big rocks. If this fox gets free, surely it will attack you and rip your face off. Better to just let it die. + + +You give the fox one last look. It stares into your eyes, pleading for help. Better safe than sorry. + + +You continue your way down the cavern.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have made your decision. + + +For some reason, you feel different. You feel chills swing over your body, almost as if someone is watching you and your every move. You turn around. Nothing but the forest and trees. + + +You approach the cliff and see an old, wooden ladder. You've always been too afraid to approach the cliff, mostly due to your fear of heights. The ladder is fastened to the cliff, allowing for travel below. You grab on to it and slowly make your way down. Your hands begin to get sweaty at the climb. You must be several hundred feet in the air! Don't look down, don't look down, don't look down...you tell yourself. + + +SCREECH! + + +You hear the sound of the animal's cries in pain. Your pace hastens as you continue your trek down the ladder. + + +POP...POP...POP...POP!!!! + + +You look up at the ladder. The weight of your body and backpack have caused it to unhinge! This old thing can't hold your weight much longer! Now what?! +> Continue your pace down the ladder +POP...POP...POP! + + +The screws on the ladder begin to fall off, almost hitting you in the face. You slowly and cautiously continue your way down the ladder. + + +PLOSH! + + +Luckily for you, your feet hit the grass at the bottom of the cliff. You look up and notice that the ladder is definitely not going to be your way back up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You turn to take the shortcut through the woods. Surprisingly, not many people know about this shortcut. You stumbled upon it on accident while following a group of students that lived near you. The path remains pretty isolated for the most part. + + +The sound of cracking twigs and the wind hitting the trees becomes more apparent. The farther away you leave the school, the more silent with nature you get. + + +SCREECH! + + +The sound of an animal's cry of pain fills your ears. You look around and don't see anything. You keep walking forward until you reach a cliff. Normally, you walk around the cliff and continue upwards. + + +SCREECH! + + +It looks like the sound is coming from down below. + + +Important Choice: Do you risk climbing down the cliff to investigate the noise? OR Do you ignore the noise and continue your way home. + + +Your decision will have consequences. +> Ignore the noise and continue your way home. +You have made your decision. + + +SCREECH! + + +That screech is way too scary to investigate. What if it's bear? Or what if it's a mythical creature like Bigfoot? + + +You turn around and cross your arms. What's worse, that ladder looks way too old to support your weight. It's time to get home. You make your way back to the path, hoping that you'll get home soon. + + +A couple minutes pass, and you find yourself still walking along the valley. + + +PLOP! + + +Are you serious?! You look at your shoulder and see a large wad of bird poop! This seriously can't be happening right now. You take off your backpack and look inside it for some tissues. Looks like you forgot your tissues at home. + + +You pick your backpack back up. + + +SNAG! + + +Your backpack gets stuck on a tree branch! You pull it with all your might. Not budging. First the bird poop and now this?! + + +You pull harder and finally the back pack goes free...that is, until you lose your balance. + + +"Woah!" + + +You fall backwards and start tumbling down the valley. You try to grab branches of trees or anything, but it's no use. Finally, you land at the bottom. You cough out some leaves and get up. You look at your body, realizing that you could pass for a hobo or a zombie. You look around and notice the opening to the cavern. You're definitely NOT going in there. + + +You turn around and pull out your phone to check the GPS app. No reception?! Are you serious?! You put your phone away and follow the trail, hoping you'll stumble home soon.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The symphonies of snoring and vigorous notebook writing fill your ears as you sit in class at Bridgeport High School. + + +Why can't this English class be over already? You think to yourself. + + +Slowly, you pull out your phone and start checking your texts... + + +Hey! Do you want to go see Studio 5 tonight? + +It's supposed to be an awesome movie! + +Your friend asks you. + + +Is that the murder mystery? It sounds really good! + +I can't even imagine what it must feel like getting + +chased by a killer in real life! + +You respond back. + + +RING RING RING RING RING RING!!! + + +The sound of your high school's bell screams into your ears as you lift your head up from your cell phone. It looks like it's time to go home! You grab your belongings, throw everything into your backpack, and rush out of your classroom. + + +Flooded in the halls are hundreds of students and faculty. You squeeze your way past the crowds to your locker and spin the lock for your combination. + + +14-22-10...CLICK! + + +You swing the locker open and grab your books. Why does there have to be so much homework?! It's Friday! + + +You close the locker and make your tedious way down the stairs of the school to the exit. Outside, you see the same long row of six or seven school buses. Luckily for you, your home is walking distance from the school, so you don't have to deal with finding a seat or bullies. Although you do wish your parents would surprise you with a car. After all, your 16th birthday is coming up soon. + + +You follow the crowds out of the school grounds and cross the street. There are two paths you can take... + + +The Shortcut - Begin a new story + + +Author's Note - Note from the author +> Author's Note +Welcome to "The Shortcut Home", the newest and latest story from me, AppDude27. + + +Thank you for taking the time to play this storygame! I would appreicate it if you could leave a rating and comment after your experience. Any feedback will help me a lot! + + +Before you begin your walk home from school, I must let you know that there are several branching paths that you can take. Every choice that you make, even the smallest, will have consequences. (This includes social, physical, grabbing or not grabbing items, and even which way you go.) + + +Some tips: + + +- You don't have to grab every item you come across. It's entirely up to you. + +- Try to make honest decisions, it will make the story much more meaningful to you. + +- Very important choices in the game will look like this. Those choices will change the course of the story. Any choices that are not blue will still change the story, as well, but not with as much gravity as the blue choices. + + + +There are several endings to this story. There is also a "Secret Ending", depending on your choices...and if you survive... +> Continue +The symphonies of snoring and vigorous notebook writing fill your ears as you sit in class at Bridgeport High School. + + +Why can't this English class be over already? You think to yourself. + + +Slowly, you pull out your phone and start checking your texts... + + +Hey! Do you want to go see Studio 5 tonight? + +It's supposed to be an awesome movie! + +Your friend asks you. + + +Is that the murder mystery? It sounds really good! + +I can't even imagine what it must feel like getting + +chased by a killer in real life! + +You respond back. + + +RING RING RING RING RING RING!!! + + +The sound of your high school's bell screams into your ears as you lift your head up from your cell phone. It looks like it's time to go home! You grab your belongings, throw everything into your backpack, and rush out of your classroom. + + +Flooded in the halls are hundreds of students and faculty. You squeeze your way past the crowds to your locker and spin the lock for your combination. + + +14-22-10...CLICK! + + +You swing the locker open and grab your books. Why does there have to be so much homework?! It's Friday! + + +You close the locker and make your tedious way down the stairs of the school to the exit. Outside, you see the same long row of six or seven school buses. Luckily for you, your home is walking distance from the school, so you don't have to deal with finding a seat or bullies. Although you do wish your parents would surprise you with a car. After all, your 16th birthday is coming up soon. + + +You follow the crowds out of the school grounds and cross the street. There are two paths you can take... + + +The Shortcut - Begin a new story + + +Author's Note - Note from the author<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Tell me, o Muse, of that ingenious man, who traveled far and wide, after he was spoken to by the gods themselves. + + +'Please aid me, Muses.' You whisper as you walk to the centre of the gathered crowd. 'Welcome, my very honored guests. Tonight I will tell you about the hero Odysseus, who braved many perils on his way home on the island of Ithaca. Once upon a time...' + + +You spend the following hours reciting all the long sentences you have memorized in the past few years. When you finish your story you are met by a wave of sound, as the audience loudly applauds your story. When the crowd leaves you finally begin to breath more easily. + + + +> The epic begins +After you leave the odeon, the performing place of bards, you gaze at the beautiful night sky above Athens' acropolis. The beauty of the night sky always calms you after your performances. However, as you gaze at the stars you suddenly see a golden light shining between the buildings of the temple complex, the acropolis. + + +Curious, you cross the acropolis to get closer to the huge temple. When you approach it you see that someone placed the statue of the goddess Athena outside. Something is strange, though. The statue, that you know is made from marble, gold and silver, is glowing with a golden glow. The statue of Nike that she normally holds in her hand is gone and replaced by her shield, that normally lies by her side. You get uneasy and turn to walk away. + + +'Halt!' + + +You turn around. Did someone just say something? You quicken your pace. + + +'Halt!' + + +Okay, you are really starting to freak out now. You now start running away from the Parthenon. + + +'Foolish mortal.' + + +You spot an owl flying towards you. While you wonder what such an animal would be doing at this time at this place it crashes into your face. While your vision grows black you see a golden glow coming towards you. +> Light in the darkness +You hear faint murmurs in the darkness, like distant voices. A faint glow pierces your eyelids. When you try to open your eyes you are practically blinded by a golden light. After a short scream of fear and pain you close your eyes. The voices become clearer. + + +'Do you really think he is up to this task?' + + +'He is only a mere bard' + + +'You, out of all people, should not criticize a bard, Apollo. And yes, Zeus, father of men and gods, highest of rulers, I do think that this mortal can complete the task we are about to give him.' + + +'Apollo? Zeus? How hard was I hit by that flying piece of vermin?' + + +'He'd better be, the fate of the world rests on his shoulders.' + + +'Open your eyes mortal. I know you are awake. I hope my owl didn't hit you too hard. Don't be afraid.' + + +You slowly open your eyes, afraid to be blinded once again by that golden light. But this time nothing happens. When your eyes are fully opened and have adjusted to the darkness of the night, you see three people. Somehow they look familiar, like people you pass everyday without really looking at them. But on the other hand, you think you have seen their faces over a million times. When you realize just who you are looking at, your jaw drops with surprise. You are looking at three of the Olympic gods; the bright-eyed Athena, the ever-young Apollo and the aegis bearing Zeus. 'I... I... How... When...' While you try to make a coherent sentence, Athena speaks to you: + + +'Please remain calm bard, great teller of tales, and listen to what we have to say. The world as you know it is about to undergo a radical change. War is about to erupt between the Greek city states, a war of which the likes haven't been seen since the great Trojan war. Many heroes died then, and many more will die now. You are the last hope of the Greeks.' + + +'But what can I do to help? I'm just an ordinary bard. If the fate of the Greek cities hangs in the balance, then why can't the gods solve it? I mean, my people pray to you every day. Is this how you repay us?' + + +'Insolent mortal. Is this how you repay us? Is this how you repay the immortal gods, who gave you life, who helped you in your times of need? If my daughter didn't favor you so much I would smite you on this spot.' + + +'That will be enough father. I understand why you are angry, aoidos, but let us explain first. Even the gods are bound by rules, by fate, by moral. After the Trojan war Zeus decreed that no immortal gods may ever be involved in a war between humans again. The fact that we are giving you this advice is as far as we can go without upsetting the balance in the world. In order to avert this war you have to undertake a journey. You have to travel to the great oracle at Thebes, in the lands of the Aegyptians. There you will have to ask for advice on how to avert this war. + + +Still baffled from your sudden encounter with the gods you answer: + + + +> 'I'm sorry, but you have the wrong mortal, ehm... the wrong person. I'm not able to do that +'Ungrateful mortal!' + + +As Zeus speaks this words the skies fill with thunderclouds. The sound of the rumbling thunder drowns all other sounds that eminate from the city of Athens. + + +'Insolent fool! Who are you to doubt the decisions of the almighty gods? I can't understand why Athena chose you as the savior of the Greeks, but she obviously chose poorly! But so be it, if you will not fulfill this task, then the Greek cities are doomed.' + + +The sound of thunder is becoming overwelming. While you cover your ears to block out the sound you see Athena looking at you with a sad expression. When the sound reaches it's climax a huge lightning bolt hits the acropolis. You close your eyes as the light is too intense to gaze at. You remain in this position for a minute or two, covering your ears with your hands and clenching your eyelids tight to avoid being blinded by another lightning bolt. + + +When you finally dare to open your eyes you realise that the gods have left. + + + + + +> A year passes +A year has passed since your encounter with the gods. Although you doubt you really met the gods, you probably were hallucinating due to the stress you had because of your performance in the odeon, you can't stop thinking about their prophecy of war. + + +You suddenly realise that you have almost arrived at the assembly of the people. Time flies when you think intensely about things, maybe you should give up your job as a bard and become a philosopher. The assembly of the people is the highest ruling organ in Athens. The people decide on the future of the city, there is no single ruler or single ruling party. Normally only the richer people, that have the right to vote, attend the assembly. Today, however it seems like every person has come to the meeting place on the hill the Pnyx. But then again, today is not an ordinary day. + + +'The time has come to take up our arms. Sparta, our old enemy has declared war upon us and many other Greek city states! Many other cities, like the city of Thebes, have declared war upon each other. An army of enemies will be arriving here within days! Now is the time to take up our arms, assemble the hoplites, mount our horses with their fast feet. Now is the time to defend our homeland against the aggressors, now is the time to fight!' + + +The speaker now shouts across the gathered crowd. The crowd shouts angrily in response. The great war has reached Athens... +> Days later... +You grip your spear tighter as you gaze at the distant flames on the edge of the horizon. The cool evening wind that is always present on the top of the big stone walls of Athens seems to be filled with the smell of burning wood. Great pyres of smoke have been visible for days since the Spartans and their allies invaded the lands of Athens. From your high point of view on top the gatehouse you can see the camp of the gathered enemies. A chill runs down your spine as you think of the fighting that has been occurring the last few days. Although the Athenian forces have been able to repel the invading forces, many people have lost their lives. Frankly, you don't believe that you are able to win this war. Most of the people that are defending the city only had the two years of mandatory military education. They are just regular citizens that were drafted to defend Athens in this great war. + + +You can see light dawning on the horizon, a new day has begun. A new day, filled with fighting. You can see activity in the enemy camp, men gathering, men mounting horses, people grabbing weapons and gathering in formation. You remember when these men first showed up on the edge of the horizon. You remember the men, women and children in front of them, running away, fleeing into the city. You remember men screaming as they assaulted the high walls of Athens, screaming when you pushed their ladders down to the hard earth, screaming as their souls passed on to the underworld. + + +You lift your shield as the enemy army marches towards the city, the fight is about to begin. + + +Moments later you spot the first ladders being put against the walls and you rush towards them, either to push them down or to kill the men that are scaling them. Suddenly you hear a familiar sound, like a thousand birds flapping their wings in the skies. A shadow blocks the light of the sun as thousands of arrows fly towards the city of Athens. +> You quickly lie down +You throw yourself onto the ground, just as the arrows fly over your head. As you scramble to get up you realise that you are one of the few people that have survived this attack. Dazed, you watch across the city walls, oblivious to the rest of the world. However, you quickly come to your senses as you spot a Spartan soldier that has nearly reached the top of the wall. You pick up the shield and spear that you dropped when you tried to evade the deadly arrows. To your horror you realise that you can't move your spear arm and you realise that an arrow has lodged itself in your shoulder. + + +The Spartan soldiers have now reached the top of the walls and are advancing towards you and a few of the other survivors. Since there is no way that you can win this fight with only a shield, you retreat, stumbling over the corpses that now litter the once great walls of Athens. When you finally descend the walls you spot the swift-footed Polymachos, one of the most experienced marshals in Athens, giving orders to his men. 'Reinforce the walls, don't give them the chance to open the gates!' + + +You wrestle yourself through the soldiers that ascend the walls, trying to repel the invading Spartans, but finally you reach solid ground. You realize that you are more of a burden then an advantage to your fellow soldiers, so you drop your shield and walk away from the gates. Polymachos gives you an angry look but he turns away from you and runs towards the lion-hearted defenders of Athens. You now have a dilemma. Should you help defend the walls, or do you retreat to another part of the city? +> No, I won't run. I will help defend my homeland +You pick up your dropped shield and hurry back to the top of the walls. But before you even reach the staircase you hear a loud cracking to your left. As you look at the source of the noise you see splinters coming off of the city gates. + + +With a thundering crack the gates give way to the Spartan battering ram. At the same time a wave of Spartan soldiers comes flooding through the destroyed gates. You raise your shield and fight valiantly against the endless stream of enemies. Even with your useless arm you manage to injure quite a lot of enemies by smashing your shield at them. + + +Suddenly you see general Polymachos fighting next to you. 'Cover my back!', he shouts at you, just when the spear of an enemy hits him in the chest. You gaze with horror at the sight of the swift-footed Polymachos, the most-experienced general of Athens, lying dead at the floor. While you are astounished by this sight an enemy manages to sneak up to you. As you finally realise what is going on he strikes you with his sword. + + +As your soul prepares to leave your body to journey to the realm of Hades you spot a golden light in the corner of your vision. When your soul finally leaves your body you wonder if this tragedy could have been averted.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You throw yourself onto the ground, just as the arrows fly over your head. As you scramble to get up you realise that you are one of the few people that have survived this attack. Dazed, you watch across the city walls, oblivious to the rest of the world. However, you quickly come to your senses as you spot a Spartan soldier that has nearly reached the top of the wall. You pick up the shield and spear that you dropped when you tried to evade the deadly arrows. To your horror you realise that you can't move your spear arm and you realise that an arrow has lodged itself in your shoulder. + + +The Spartan soldiers have now reached the top of the walls and are advancing towards you and a few of the other survivors. Since there is no way that you can win this fight with only a shield, you retreat, stumbling over the corpses that now litter the once great walls of Athens. When you finally descend the walls you spot the swift-footed Polymachos, one of the most experienced marshals in Athens, giving orders to his men. 'Reinforce the walls, don't give them the chance to open the gates!' + + +You wrestle yourself through the soldiers that ascend the walls, trying to repel the invading Spartans, but finally you reach solid ground. You realize that you are more of a burden then an advantage to your fellow soldiers, so you drop your shield and walk away from the gates. Polymachos gives you an angry look but he turns away from you and runs towards the lion-hearted defenders of Athens. You now have a dilemma. Should you help defend the walls, or do you retreat to another part of the city? +> I have to retreat, I am in no condition to fight. +'I'll just be a burden for the other soldiers', you think as you run away from the walls. + + +While you run through the besieged city you meet other people fleeing from the doomed city. A sense of shock creeps up on you as you realize just how many families are forced from their homes. + + +You finally manage to reach the opposite gate of Athens. Luckily, this one is badly guarded by the enemies as most of the soldiers are fighting on the other side of the city. A large group of people has already gathered near the gate and you hear shouts coming from it. 'Open the gate!' 'No, stay and defend our city!' 'Now, open...'. 'Fools, Athens is doomed!', you shout to them 'I saw the enemies myself, I fought them. There are just to many of them. Our only hope is to flee the city through this gate.' You armor and bleeding shoulder seem to impress the gathered people. Two other wounded soldiers run to the gates to open them. 'I hope you know what you're doing.', one of them says to you. + + +When the gates open you see an almost deserted landscape. Only a handful of soldiers are left behind to make sure no one flees through these gates. Well, now they'll have to work for their money. + + +With the strength of a cornered lion, you, the two other soldiers and the gathered citizens attack the enemies. A few minutes later the enemies lie dead on the sandy soil, only two citizens have died in the attack. + + +You walk all day, always away from Athens. When night falls you camp on a hill. While the other refugees slowly fall to sleep, exhausted from the day's fighting and walking, you can't. Although the bleeding has stopped, moving your shoulder is still painful. + + +You gaze to the distant horizon and see the burning remains of what was the mighty city of Athens. In the inferno you see a flash of golden light coming from the hill that once housed the Parthenon. As you witness the destruction of your home you wonder if this could have been averted.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grip your spear tighter as you gaze at the distant flames on the edge of the horizon. The cool evening wind that is always present on the top of the big stone walls of Athens seems to be filled with the smell of burning wood. Great pyres of smoke have been visible for days since the Spartans and their allies invaded the lands of Athens. From your high point of view on top the gatehouse you can see the camp of the gathered enemies. A chill runs down your spine as you think of the fighting that has been occurring the last few days. Although the Athenian forces have been able to repel the invading forces, many people have lost their lives. Frankly, you don't believe that you are able to win this war. Most of the people that are defending the city only had the two years of mandatory military education. They are just regular citizens that were drafted to defend Athens in this great war. + + +You can see light dawning on the horizon, a new day has begun. A new day, filled with fighting. You can see activity in the enemy camp, men gathering, men mounting horses, people grabbing weapons and gathering in formation. You remember when these men first showed up on the edge of the horizon. You remember the men, women and children in front of them, running away, fleeing into the city. You remember men screaming as they assaulted the high walls of Athens, screaming when you pushed their ladders down to the hard earth, screaming as their souls passed on to the underworld. + + +You lift your shield as the enemy army marches towards the city, the fight is about to begin. + + +Moments later you spot the first ladders being put against the walls and you rush towards them, either to push them down or to kill the men that are scaling them. Suddenly you hear a familiar sound, like a thousand birds flapping their wings in the skies. A shadow blocks the light of the sun as thousands of arrows fly towards the city of Athens. +> You lift your shield to block the arrows +As the deadly projectiles rain down on the wall you quickly raise your shield above your head. Your heart pounds inside your chest as arrows rain down on your shield. As the final arrow strikes the stones of the city wall you lower your shield. + + +The sight of the slaughter on top of the city walls makes you gag. Dozens of men, who defended the walls, lie dead on the cold stone floor. Oblivious to the rest of the world you gaze at the fallen soldiers. The ones who survived are behaving the same. Suddenly you hear a shout coming from your right and you spot the first enemy climbing the siege ladders to the top of the walls. You quickly shout to the other men and rush to the enemy. Before he is able to reach the top of the wall you push back his ladder so he falls to the ground. A new wave of enemies, however, has climbed the other ladders. As you stumble over the corpses that now litter the walls you see your fellow soldiers repelling the enemies, destroying the ladders in the process. + + +Relieved that this attack has been repelled you hear a thundering crack beneath you... + + + +> You quickly run down to the gates +Just as you reach the bottom of the staircase you see the gate give way with a thundering crack. The Spartan battering ram has breached the gates and a horde of enemies is rushing through. + + +The defenders of Athens fight valiantly against the intruders, trying to repel them. You can see the swift-footed Polymachos, the most experienced general of Athens fighting at the front of the defenders. You quickly join your fellow soldiers. Together, you fight bravely against the invading Spartans and after about half an hour most of the invaders are repelled from the city, the battle has moved outside the city walls. + + +However, the enemy hasn't retreated yet. After they have regrouped themselves they attack you another time, killing many Athenian soldiers. You find yourself facing three enemies at the same time. As the adrenaline rushes through your veines you kill one of the attackers with your spear. But then the other enemies attack you... +> Duck! +You duck and the enemies' spears slice through thin air. When you prepare for another attack, your opponents haven't had the time to prepare themselves to defend your assault. You quickly dispatch of one of the soldiers by plunging your spear into his heart. The second one puts up more of a fight. He blocks every trust you make with your spear and vice versa. Eventually you see signs of fatigue across the face of your attacker. With a quick feint you manage to mislead your opponent and you manage to kill him with a single blow to his head. + + +Panting, you look at the rest of the battlefield. You see your fellow defenders fighting with the courage and strength of mountain lions, but they are clearly outnumbered. To your right you see the lion-hearted Polymachos defending against an attack by multiple opponents and to your left you see a couple of Athenian soldiers who are being slaughtered by the Spartan attackers. + + +As you are about to lose all hope of winning this fight a huge soldiers comes into your view, wielding a large sword. As you watch him you think you recognize a highly decorated Spartan general named Dusmenecles, but then again, it is hard to recognize people who's faces are covered by bronze helmets. Unfortunately for you, the enemy general is heading straight to wards you. + + +Seeing no other option, you storm the enemy general with your spear. But before you manage to hit him, he slices through your spear with his sword. Shocked by this turn of events you stand frozen to the ground as Dusmenecles raises his sword for the final blow... +> Block his sword with your shield +Just as the enemy is about to hit you, you raise your shield. But instead of being stopped by the wooden object, the sharp sword of Dusmenecles cleaves right through it, shattering it. This, however, isn't even the worse part. After dealing with your shield the sword carries on with it's swing and slices through your shoulder. + + +You fail to move as Dusmenecles, sacker of cities, thrusts his sword into your belly. You fall to the ground, bleeding from your mortal wounds. + + +As the life flows out of you you see a flash of golden light entering your field of vision. As you slowly bleed to death you wonder if all this fighting could have been prevented. The last thing you hear before your soul leaves your body to travel on to the realm of Hades is the evil laughter of Dusmenecles as he claims his next victim.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You duck and the enemies' spears slice through thin air. When you prepare for another attack, your opponents haven't had the time to prepare themselves to defend your assault. You quickly dispatch of one of the soldiers by plunging your spear into his heart. The second one puts up more of a fight. He blocks every trust you make with your spear and vice versa. Eventually you see signs of fatigue across the face of your attacker. With a quick feint you manage to mislead your opponent and you manage to kill him with a single blow to his head. + + +Panting, you look at the rest of the battlefield. You see your fellow defenders fighting with the courage and strength of mountain lions, but they are clearly outnumbered. To your right you see the lion-hearted Polymachos defending against an attack by multiple opponents and to your left you see a couple of Athenian soldiers who are being slaughtered by the Spartan attackers. + + +As you are about to lose all hope of winning this fight a huge soldiers comes into your view, wielding a large sword. As you watch him you think you recognize a highly decorated Spartan general named Dusmenecles, but then again, it is hard to recognize people who's faces are covered by bronze helmets. Unfortunately for you, the enemy general is heading straight to wards you. + + +Seeing no other option, you storm the enemy general with your spear. But before you manage to hit him, he slices through your spear with his sword. Shocked by this turn of events you stand frozen to the ground as Dusmenecles raises his sword for the final blow... +> Jump aside +You quickly come to your senses and jump aside, dodging the fatal blow. Unfortunately you drop your shield. As you fall to the ground you hit something hard with your elbow. As a sharp pain shoots through your arm you see the enemy preparing for another deadly blow. Fear grips your heart once again as you feel the cold touch of Hades on your shoulder. From utter despair you grope around on the floor, hoping to find anything that you can throw at the enemy general. + + +Your hands find the object with which your elbow came into contact with. You throw it at Dusmenecles with all the strength you have left, closing your eyes, expecting the final blow to come any moment now. You feel like you have been sitting like this for minutes, though it must have been more like seconds, when you hear victorious shouting coming across the battlefield. + + +You open your eyes, surprised by this sound. And when you look around you see Athenian soldiers shouting and cheering. While you wonder what has caused this sudden turn of events you see the swift-footed Polymachos coming to wards you. 'You have my sincerest gratitude, soldier. Because you killed the treacherous enemy general his troops routed and victory was ours. Thank the gods!' + + +You killed who? Baffled you look at the spot where a few moments ago stood the manslaughtering Dusmenecles. Now you see his body lying on the ground, bleeding from a wound to the head, apparently caused by the broken sword that is sticking out of it. Did I really throw that? + + +'I... I... I...' + + +'Calm down great-hearted soldiers, you fought very bravely today. I am sure that the whole of Athens will commemorate your giant victory.' + + +All attention is just to much for you, although you are used to giant crowds of people, being a bard and all. You walk across the battlefield to a low hill, still baffled by the events of the day. +> When you reach the top... +When you reach the top of the hill you still haven't calmed down. You hear the cheering and shouting of the men behind you, mixed with another sound. A sound that is quite familiar, but this isn't coming from behind you, it is coming from in front of you. A sound like the sound of metal slamming against metal, which was sometimes audible at the smithies in Athens. As you look at the darkening horizon, dusk is setting in, your heart begins pounding in your chest. + + +You see an endless wave of enemies coming to wards the wounded city of Athens. You count thousands and thousand of men, all carrying weapons. You drop to the ground in utter despair. Athens will fall, it's soldiers and citizens slaughtered and there is nothing you can do to stop it. Just as the sun sinks beneath the horizon you see a golden flash of light. You wonder if this tragedy could have been averted.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just as you reach the bottom of the staircase you see the gate give way with a thundering crack. The Spartan battering ram has breached the gates and a horde of enemies is rushing through. + + +The defenders of Athens fight valiantly against the intruders, trying to repel them. You can see the swift-footed Polymachos, the most experienced general of Athens fighting at the front of the defenders. You quickly join your fellow soldiers. Together, you fight bravely against the invading Spartans and after about half an hour most of the invaders are repelled from the city, the battle has moved outside the city walls. + + +However, the enemy hasn't retreated yet. After they have regrouped themselves they attack you another time, killing many Athenian soldiers. You find yourself facing three enemies at the same time. As the adrenaline rushes through your veines you kill one of the attackers with your spear. But then the other enemies attack you... +> Block! +You manage to block the double attack with your shield. However, it isn't much worth after the damage done by the enemies spears. You throw your now useless shield at one of the attackers, startling him. The other, on the other hand, isn't that easily scared and attacks you once more. + + +You dodge the blow and return it with a thrust of your spear. As the wooden shaft pierces the armor of your opponent, the other manages to strike you with his spear. Luckily for you, it is only a flesh wound. As he prepares you strike once more, you... +> Counter-attack +You quickly thrust your spear at your opponent. Unfortunately for you, he is quicker. As your strength seeps away you drop your spear. When the enemy pulls his spear from your chest you can't find the strength to stand up anymore. + + +You feel your soul leave your body. You take one last look at the world around you. The sight isn't pretty. The lion-hearted defenders of Athens are being slaughtered by the Spartan soldiers. You see the swift-footed Polymachos fall to the sword of an enemy commander, you think you recognize the manslaughter, Dusmenecles of Sparta. As your soul travels to the realm of Hades you see a golden light. Your last thought in the mortal realm is: 'Could this slaughter have been prevented?'<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You manage to block the double attack with your shield. However, it isn't much worth after the damage done by the enemies spears. You throw your now useless shield at one of the attackers, startling him. The other, on the other hand, isn't that easily scared and attacks you once more. + + +You dodge the blow and return it with a thrust of your spear. As the wooden shaft pierces the armor of your opponent, the other manages to strike you with his spear. Luckily for you, it is only a flesh wound. As he prepares you strike once more, you... +> Dodge his attack +You duck aside just in time to dodge the fatal blow. As adrenaline rushes through your body you grab your opponents spear. You quickly pull it from his hands.The expression on his face changes from a self confident smirk to an expression of utter fear. + + +You quickly dispatch of the unarmed enemy with a quick slash of his spear. The battle rages on for a couple of minutes. After you kill a couple of soldiers you notice that the battlefield is getting quiet. The battle cries of the solders have died down. The shouts of agony from the wounded soldiers quiet down. You look around and see a group of soldiers standing around a body. At closer inspection you see it is the body of the lion-hearted Polymachos. Apparently he died, fighting an enemy general + + +Athens doesn't rejoice at the fact that another wave of attackers has been repelled. Many brave men died and many more are wounded. The cries of widows can be heard around the clock and the smoke from the funerary pyres seems to block out the sun. You cannot stand the sight of this city of death any more. A few moments later you find yourself walking aimlessly across the battlefield. You have no idea how you ended up here. As you walk around the battlefield, occasionally startling one of the carrion eaters that now roam the lands, you think about the slaughter that has been done here the past couple of days. Suddenly a golden light shines from behind a nearby hill. + + +You quickly run to the top of the hill, hoping to see one of the immortal gods, who own the wide sky. However, you see a completely different sight. Thousands of footmen, carrying the swift bronze spears flood the nearby countryside. Hundreds of riders and their swift-hoofed horses pour from behind the enemy lines. Hordes of archers, pulling the strings on their bows flow from behind the horizon. At this sight your heart sinks with despair. How could the wounded city of Athens ever withstand a force like this. As you fall to your knees you once again spot the golden light, shining from behind the horizon. Could this tragedy have been averted?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You hear faint murmurs in the darkness, like distant voices. A faint glow pierces your eyelids. When you try to open your eyes you are practically blinded by a golden light. After a short scream of fear and pain you close your eyes. The voices become clearer. + + +'Do you really think he is up to this task?' + + +'He is only a mere bard' + + +'You, out of all people, should not criticize a bard, Apollo. And yes, Zeus, father of men and gods, highest of rulers, I do think that this mortal can complete the task we are about to give him.' + + +'Apollo? Zeus? How hard was I hit by that flying piece of vermin?' + + +'He'd better be, the fate of the world rests on his shoulders.' + + +'Open your eyes mortal. I know you are awake. I hope my owl didn't hit you too hard. Don't be afraid.' + + +You slowly open your eyes, afraid to be blinded once again by that golden light. But this time nothing happens. When your eyes are fully opened and have adjusted to the darkness of the night, you see three people. Somehow they look familiar, like people you pass everyday without really looking at them. But on the other hand, you think you have seen their faces over a million times. When you realize just who you are looking at, your jaw drops with surprise. You are looking at three of the Olympic gods; the bright-eyed Athena, the ever-young Apollo and the aegis bearing Zeus. 'I... I... How... When...' While you try to make a coherent sentence, Athena speaks to you: + + +'Please remain calm bard, great teller of tales, and listen to what we have to say. The world as you know it is about to undergo a radical change. War is about to erupt between the Greek city states, a war of which the likes haven't been seen since the great Trojan war. Many heroes died then, and many more will die now. You are the last hope of the Greeks.' + + +'But what can I do to help? I'm just an ordinary bard. If the fate of the Greek cities hangs in the balance, then why can't the gods solve it? I mean, my people pray to you every day. Is this how you repay us?' + + +'Insolent mortal. Is this how you repay us? Is this how you repay the immortal gods, who gave you life, who helped you in your times of need? If my daughter didn't favor you so much I would smite you on this spot.' + + +'That will be enough father. I understand why you are angry, aoidos, but let us explain first. Even the gods are bound by rules, by fate, by moral. After the Trojan war Zeus decreed that no immortal gods may ever be involved in a war between humans again. The fact that we are giving you this advice is as far as we can go without upsetting the balance in the world. In order to avert this war you have to undertake a journey. You have to travel to the great oracle at Thebes, in the lands of the Aegyptians. There you will have to ask for advice on how to avert this war. + + +Still baffled from your sudden encounter with the gods you answer: + + + +> 'It is not my right to doubt the decision of a god. I will do as you say.' +'Very well. Listen closely to what I have to say, great bard. You have to travel to the oracle at Thebes in the land of the Aegyptians. There you will have to ask for advice. However, she will test you first. Remember, whatever happens during your journey, don't ever mock the almighty gods. And always help those in need' + + +And with that last warning Athena and the other gods slowly disappear from the sacred grounds of the acropolis. Leaving you behind, baffled and speechless. + + +That night you fall into a restless sleep. One-eyed monsters change into huge beast with multiple heads, sending ships and sailors to their doom. Beautiful women, with white arms, try to kill you and other men. And throughout your dream fires rage on in the background. + + + +> A week later... +The salt sea winds blow across the deck of the large ship. You stand on the deck, gazing at the distant horizon. How a mortal's life can change in the blink of an eye! A mere week ago you were telling stories in Athens' odeon and now you are leading an expedition to the oracle of Thebes! + + +After that faithful night on top of the acropolis you left for the harbor of Piraeus. There, you found a mercenary who was willing to bring you to Thebes, for a steep price. You tell your friends and family you are going to travel to distant courts to show off your knowledge of poetry. Then, nothing is left to hold you back from your journey, after a quick prayer to Athena, the patron goddess of Athens, you sail away on the mercenary ship. + + +--- + + +'Sir, we are about to enter the Nile river, we will reach Thebes in a few days. There are a few complications, however. The trip has taken us more time then we originally planned and the crew is getting mutinous. To secure your... safety, we would like a couple of extra drachmas. +> 'No. A deal is a deal, I won't give you more money.' +'Then I am truly sorry sir', he says as he spits on the ground, 'but I can't guarantee your safety anymore.' He grins as he speaks these last words. You back away from the mercenary captain as more crew members gather around him. You look around for your supplies, there's got to be a sword with them. + + +The ship's crew is closing in on you. + + +You are almost near the edge of the deck, and still no sign of your sword. + + +The captain draws his sword. + + +You finally spot your weapon lying about a feet away from you, just as you reach the edge of the deck. + + +The captain charges you and his crew follows. You quickly dodge aside, reaching for your sword. As your hands touch the cool bronze the captain prepares for another attack. Without another thought you sink your sword into his entrails. A look of horror passes his face as his soul passes on to the realm of Hades. The remaining crew members quickly lay down their arms. + + +One of them walks towards you. 'We are sorry to have disturbed you, noble mister. I don't know what we were thinking, we only acted on the orders of our traitorous captain. Our sincerest apologies.' + + +'Very well, I accept your apologies. Now, go back to your posts, we continue our journey to Thebes.' + + +'Let's just hope that I'll reach it alive', you mutter to yourself +> You carry on your journey on the Nile +The shining Eos rises once again to bring the day to the lands of the Aegyptians. + + +The crew has chosen a new captain and life moves on. No other attempts to kill you or steal your money has been made. You gaze with curiosity at the strange lands at the shores of the Nile, at the foreign people working the fields on the fertile banks on the river and at the strange animals that live in the water and on the shore. This scenery carries on for a couple of hours. + + +Suddenly the ship turns away from the main stream, into a branch of the main river. Although you find this strange, you trust the guidance of the navigator and think no more about it. The scenery changes dramatically as time goes by, the fields and people disappear and the animals don't show themselves anymore. A strange silence falls over the lands. + + +A crew member approaches you. 'Sir, I am sorry to report you that we took a wrong turn. However, the river flows to fast for our rowers to row upstream back to the main river. We will have to wait until the river calms down or we will have to follow this river and see were it takes us. I can't say for certain how long it will take before we reach...' + + +He stops abruptly as the most beautiful song fills the air. You all listen, hypnotized by the sweet sounds that come from no particular direction. However, the song has a strange, dark undertone, a chill runs down your spine as you remember tales about ships that were wrecked after the crew was hypnotized by the songs of mythical beasts. + + +Suddenly alarmed you... + + + +> Plug the ears of the crew members with whatever you can find +You search the deck for... well anything that can plug the ears of the crew members. Eventually you find some wax-tablets. You scrape of as much of the wax as you can and run from crew member to crew member, plugging their ears and preventing them from hearing the tempting song. + + +However, you can't but wonder about the beautiful sounds. So you order the crew to tie you to the mast, that way you can't do anything foolish, while you are still able to listen to the song. + + +A few minutes later you pass a large rock, crowded with strange creatures. They look like women, but have bird wings and a fierce look in their eyes. As they spot your ship they lift up from the rock and circle above your ship, trying to tempt you to offer yourself to them. Their beautiful song fills you with the burning desire to jump in the water and surrender yourself to them, but the ropes prevent you from doing this. + + +The ship sails safely away from the sirens, with no casualties. As the song fades away, you are released by the crew members. + + +You stand on the rear of the ship, watching the sirens plunge themselves in the river. You remember tales saying that sirens can't stand people who hear their songs and live to tell the tale. They rather die than live the rest of their lives in shame. + + + +> As the hours pass, you slowly fall asleep +You are woken the next day by a crew member. 'Sir, I am happy to report you that we are back at the main river. After encountering some locals we have learned that we are mere hours away from the city of Thebes.' + + +About three hours later you finally dock in the port of Thebes. The sun is at his highest peak and the heat is unbearable. 'How is it possible that people manage to live here?', you ask Cyrus, the new mercenary captain. 'I have no idea, but I'll be glad when we've returned to Greece.' + + +While the crew unloads the ship you take a walk through the port of Thebes. Out of precaution you take your sword with you. + + +The far end of the docks are crowded with merchants selling strange and wondrous wares. Ivory from the south, silk from the east. tame crocodiles from the nearby Nile, even Greek pottery is for sale here. You gaze with wonder at all of the stalls when you are suddenly approached by a beggar. 'Please sir, do you have a little money for a poor beggar? ' + + + +> 'Get lost, my money is my own.' +'But please sir, I am only a poor beggar, I don't have anything to eat and I have no money', the beggar replies. + + +'I already told you, my money is my own. So get lost!' You feel a sudden anger setting in as the beggar won't leave. + + +'Sir, have you no pity for a poor person like me?' The beggar says as he clamps on to you. 'The gods don't look kindly on people who don't care about their fellow men.' + + +'I said get lost you old beggar!' You shout as you push the old bum away, 'so get lost!'. You give the beggar one last push and walk away. + + +'So be it, stranger. I warned you the gods frown upon selfish mortals, but you didn't listen. Now you can consider yourself forlorn by the gods. No god will help you on this journey.' Having said this, the beggar disappears. Was this a trial of the gods? + + +You return to the ship, feeling confused and insecure. Cyrus immediately approaches you. 'Sir, we have finished unloading all of the stocks we were carrying on board, but it is too late to visit the Oracle, we will have to go tomorrow.' As you do not respond, Cyrus asks: 'sir, are you all right, you seem a little shaken, is the heat too much for you?' + + +'No, I'm alright. I just need some sleep. I think I'll go to my mat early today.' + + +That night you have an uneasy sleep once again. You find yourself standing within a circle of immortal gods. Zeus, the highest god, father of gods and mortals, speaks to you: + + +'Insolent mortal! Were you not warned to help the needy? Did you really think we gods would reward such selfish behavior? If you were not favored by my daughter Athena I would have killed you already. I will give you one last chance to prove yourself worthy of saving the Greek cities. However, you will find your journey to be harder than before.' + + +Suddenly you are woken by a distant lightning bolt. The sky is darkened tonight by thunder clouds. You won't catch much sleep tonight. +> The next day... +You wake up the next day feeling terrible. Your eyes hurt as the bright rays from the Egyptian sun pierce your sleep-deprived eyes. You let out a soft groan as you stand up and you realise that Cyrus already stands next to your sleeping mat. + + +'Good morning sir. Are you feeling all right today?' + + +'Apart from the incredible fatigue and the scorching heat, I'm alright. Is it possible for me to visit the oracle today?' + + +'I took the liberty to arranging an appointment for you. The oracle is expecting you in about an hour. And don't worry: we won't ask for extra money for this service.' + + +About an hour later you are standing in front of the shrine of the priestess of Zeus. The shrine is a large imposing circular structure made out of gleaming white marble. As you admire the building, the huge bronze doors open to reveal the priestess of Zeus. She wears a long white robe and a bronze necklace around her neck and she is of great beauty. She looks like one of the immortal gods, who own the great sky, herself. She doesn't look very happy, however. You slowly approach her to greet her and she speaks to you: + + +'YOU! You are not welcome here stranger. The gods are angry with you, leave this place and don't return.' + + +'I beg you, mistress, please give me...' + + +'I told you to get lost! Go away right now or you will suffer the consequences!' +> 'I'm not going until you listen to me.' +'You dare disobey the priestess of Zeus. GUARDS! Arrest these men, throw them into the deepest dungeons!' + + +Immediately after she shouts this, guards appear from all sides. + + +'Damn it!' Cyrus curses 'how are we supposed to leave this place, alive, with all these guards here? Oh well, I say we'll fight a way out. What do you think, traveler?' + + +'I say fight them too. We need to find another way to prevent the Greek civil war and we won't be able to do that from a hot, Egyptian dungeon.' + + +Having said this you draw your sword, Cyrus does the same. About ten guards surround you, encouraged by the screaming priestess. However, they seem hesitant to fight against two armed opponents, the cowards. + + +A group of four guards finally dare to attack you. They approach with drawn swords in their right hands and shields in their left. The rest of the guards watch as their colleagues attack you. + + +However, you are fully prepared for an attack and so you: +> Block their attack and counter with your own +Your swords hit with a loud 'Clang' as the two swords collide. + +The guard was unprepared for your block and he lowers his defence for a moment. You quickly dispatch him withing this undefended moment by slashing his throat with your sword. You hear a victory shout from Cyrus as he kills one of the guards too. + +However, the idle guards can't just watch on as two of their comrades have been killed. They quickly rush to the aid of their two remaining colleagues. + +Now it's eight versus two. + +The remaining guards manage to gather in a kind of formation, linking their shields together to form a shield wall. Well, this is going to be fun. +> The shield wall +As you wonder how you are going to deal with this shield wall you notice Cyrus has disappeared. + + +The guards are slowly marching towards you, keeping their pace even to maintain the shield wall. Their glistening bronze swords stick out between the shields. + + +You back away as you realise that it is impossible for you to penetrate their wall without getting yourself killed. + + +Suddenly you spot Cyrus creeping behind the enemies and you realise what he's trying to do. You quickly act like you're going to charge the enemy to create a diversion. + + +Suddenly one of the enemies screams as his throat is slit by a fast movement of Cyrus' sword. However, now the enemies turn on Cyrus. + + +It's still seven versus two. And all of the seven enemies are now focusing on Cyrus. Now is your chance +> to run away. +'I'm truly sorry Cyrus', you whisper to yourself 'but we can't win this battle.' + + +You drop your sword and run away in the opposite direction of the battle. However, the priestess of Zeus is waiting for you, holding a spear. You can immediately see that she is untrained with weapons and so it shouldn't be hard to defeat her, if you hadn't dropped your sword. + + +'Great and noble priestess of Zeus, the highest of rulers. Please listen to my pleads', you say as the priestess charges you with her spear. + + +You quickly dodge but the priestess seems unmoved by your words. 'I beg you, the Greek cities will fall if you won't help me.' + + +The priestess lunges again with her spear, cutting you across the chest. Luckily it's only a flesh wound. 'Mistress, please, thousands of people, innocents, will die if you won't help! Just listen to me!' You begin to scream with utter despair. You hear the shouts of Cyrus behind you as the bronze sword of a guard cuts through his chest and sends his soul prematurely to the realm of Hades, the underworld. + + +The death of Cyrus, although you knew was inevitable, shocks you and distracts you from the priestess. A few seconds later you feel a sharp pain spreading through your body. However, this feeling fades a few moments later. A blissful feeling of weightlessness enters your mind as your soul leaves your body to travel to meet Cyrus in the realm of Hades.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you wonder how you are going to deal with this shield wall you notice Cyrus has disappeared. + + +The guards are slowly marching towards you, keeping their pace even to maintain the shield wall. Their glistening bronze swords stick out between the shields. + + +You back away as you realise that it is impossible for you to penetrate their wall without getting yourself killed. + + +Suddenly you spot Cyrus creeping behind the enemies and you realise what he's trying to do. You quickly act like you're going to charge the enemy to create a diversion. + + +Suddenly one of the enemies screams as his throat is slit by a fast movement of Cyrus' sword. However, now the enemies turn on Cyrus. + + +It's still seven versus two. And all of the seven enemies are now focusing on Cyrus. Now is your chance +> to attack the enemy. +You quickly attack on of the guards in the middle of the shield wall. His back is unprotected as the guards turned on Cyrus. + + +The guards only notices you when it is already too late. His eyes widen as your sword pierces his vital organs. The other guards panic as the shield wall disintegrates now the middle guard is killed. Cyrus takes out one of the guards during this brief period. The five remaining guards are slowly retreating, panicked by the death of their comrades. + + +Cyrus prepares to chase them, killing all of them. But you stop him: 'stop, let them go. We are still on the sacred grounds of the oracle of Zeus. The last thing we should do is to once again insult the gods.' + + +Cyrus appears to calm down. 'You're right sir. Please forgive me, I was too caught up in the fight to think clearly.' + + +Suddenly you see a flash of light in the corner of your eye. You manage to dodge the spear just before it hits you. You turn around and spot the enraged priestess, brandishing a deadly bronze spear. You immediately can see that she is untrained with the weapon. + + +With a quick feint you manage to disarm her. The priestess mutters curses as her weapon plunges to the ground and you hold your sword dangerously close to her throat. Eventually she calms down and speaks: 'Very well, you have defeated me. But I still can't help you. The gods are not pleased with you and so they have clouded my vision. I am not able to see your future, however, there is another way for you to find a solution for your problems. At the edge of the world there stands a rock, at the convergence of two great streams. There the world of the living and the realm of Hades cross-over. There you will have to sacrifice to the dead, for in the underworld a great seer resides, Teirisias is his name. But be careful, other souls will appear, wanting to eat and drink of your sacrifice, but you must fend them off until Teiresias has eaten from it. He will be able to assist you in your goal. I sincerely apologise for my earlier behaviour and I wish you the best of luck for the rest of your odyssey. Farewell.' And with these last words the oracle once again disappears into her temple. +> And so the journey continues... +The journey back across the Nile is quite uneventful. However, you do manage to spot some animals that don't live in Greece, like crocodiles and ibises. + + +It doesn't take many days before you once again reach the Mediterranean Sea. The weather is good, not a cloud in the sky, and the sea has a beautiful blue colour. As you gaze at the horizon you notice Cyrus standing next to you. 'Ah, the Mediterranean, how I've missed it in those bloody Aegyptian lands. Really, you can travel far and wide but you'll never find a sea like this one. But you look troubled sir. Are you troubled about the coming encounter with the dead?' + + +'Of course, I mean are you looking forward to meeting the dead?' + + +'Well, no. But let's deal with the problem at hand first. How are we even going to find that place? I mean, it's not like we have a map or something.' + + +'I was thinking about that too and I have no idea how we are going to find that place. By the immortal gods! How am I able to do this if I don't even have an idea where we have to go!' + + +'I know sir. Look, the sun has already sunk beneath the horizon. Let us go to sleep and think about this tomorrow.' +> 'Very well, I'll see you tomorrow.' +Your dream that night is flooded with golden light. + + +Suddenly a figure appears within the golden glow. A woman, wearing armor and a spear. You recognise the grey-eyed Athena. 'Noble bard, great teller of tales, I have come before you tonight to aid you in your journey. You have shown wisdom at your encounter with the oracle and I want to reward you. You seek an audience with the dead seer Teirisias, but you don't know where you can find him. Tomorrow fair winds will guide you on your path. However, the gods won't help you anymore if you anger them once again!' + + +She dissappears once again with this last warning. As your dream comes to an end you hear the sound of strong winds sweeping across the deck. +> You slowly wake up +You open your eyes and notice the whole crew working very hard. Everyone seems to be in a tense mood. After you stand up from your sleeping mat you grab one of the crew members by his wrist. + + +'Tell me, what is happening? Why is everyone so tense?' + + +'Well, ehm, sir, I really have to get back to my post, or captain Cyrus will flay me alive.' He is about to leave, but you grip his wrist tighter. + + +'Look, Cyrus won't hurt you, but I will if I don't get an answer soon.' + + +'O...okay sir. Well, a strange storm has suddenly turned up. Our sails are almost ripping and the current is too strong for our rowers to combat. We are at the mercy of the swift winds. However, we are trying our best to fight against these forces of nature.' The crew member now seems frightened. You let go of his wrist and he immediately walks away. + + +'Fools!' you mutter to yourself. 'Everyone listen to me!' you shout across the deck, this seems to catch the attention of the crew. 'Stop fighting against the wind. The gods have blessed us with these fair winds, for they will swiftly take us to our destination. The first person who will defy these orders will be punished by the captain himself.' The crew immediately leave their posts and look around, wondering what they have to do. + + +You suddenly hear laughing behind you and notice Cyrus walking towards you. 'Traveler, I consider you my good friend, but you are not captain of my ship and my crew. I don't mind you giving advice to my crew or helping them with their work, but please, don't order them around. My authority will be undermined and I might have to copy some behavior from the former captain.' He winks at the last sentence. 'Alright you scum, you heard our guest. Everyone who tries to steer our ship or to hinder it in any way will be thrown will immediately be released from service. And there is no place on this ship for traitors.' + + +He turns to you once again. 'They are good people, but they still are mercenaries. Turn your back on them and you'll end up with a knife in your back. But why would we have this gloomy mood? Come on, let us... What the... What did I just say you ignorant nitwit?' You look around, trying to find the person Cyrus is shouting at. Then you spot a young crew member, who may just has reached adulthood, holding a oar. Cyrus grabs the oar from his hands. 'Let this be an example for everyone who defies my orders!' He lift the oar and lets it come come down on the back of the young man, repeating this motion over and over again. + + +Tears begin to well up in the eyes of the poor boy. 'Please sir, I was just frightened. I swear I'll never do it again.' Cyrus doesn't seem to take any notice of the boy and keeps hitting him with the oar. While you watch this process you shout at Cyrus: +> 'Stop it at once, I think you have set enough of an example now.' +Cyrus seems impervious to your comment and he keeps on hitting the poor boy. + + +You can't stand the sight of your friend hitting the boy any longer and so you step towards Cyrus and hit him in the face with your fist. Like he wakes up from a waking dream, Cyrus comes to his senses. 'I'm sorry, I didn't know what I was doing. The gods must have blinded me. I am so terribly sorry.' His cheeks redden as he apologizes once again to the boy and retreats to his quarters. + + +Once everyone fully grasped what just happened, a man approaches you. You guess he is a member of the crew, although you have never seen him, and a strange sense of authority hangs around him. While you observe the strange man he speaks to you: + + +'Well done mortal. You have shown compassion for a person in need. You have regained the favour of the gods. But the warning of my daughter, the owl-eyed Athena, still stands. Help your fellow men and respect the gods, or you, and the rest of the Greek world shall be destroyed.' + + +You are briefly distracted by the cries of a nearby bird, but when you turn back to the stranger he seems to have disappeared. Who was this man? + + + +> The rest of the day is uneventful. +Days pass by and Cyrus slowly regains the confidence of the crew. The days pass by without any notable events. You enjoy the calm waves and the fair winds that carry you and guide you on your journey. You marvel at the animals that populate the vast, wine-coloured ocean and the wide skies. During these days you get better acquainted with the crew and you start to feel like you're on a holiday. + + +But then the skies grow darker and darker. The animals disappear and the moral of the crew grows sadder and darker. A week after you left Thebes you finally reach the place where you can consult the dead seer Teiresias. You ask Cyrus to fetch food from the cargo hold, to offer to the souls of the dead. With Cyrus and a couple of crew members in your rear and the food in your hands you set foot upon the strange island. + + +The air is dead silent, not a sound is heard apart from the easy wind. A chill creeps up your spine as you look around the barren land. Not a living thing appears in your vision, not even the lean trees or the though shrubbery survive in this harsh place. Silently and in anticipation you dig a shallow hole in the sand. You take the food and mix it with some red wine. Not long after you call upon the dead you hear a sorrowful moaning spreading through the air. A cold wind sweeps across the barren island and the crew members behind you shiver. A sense of fear and despair spreads across the hearts of the men as the souls of the departed rise from the realm of Hades. +> Suddenly, pale men and women rise from the ground... +Men and women with pale, blood-drained faces rise up from the realm of Hades. You hear the crew members behind cower with fear and retreat to the ship. You notice that only Cyrus remains behind. + + +The souls immediately close in on the sacrifice. With a flash you remember you can't let the other souls eat of the sacrifice until Teirisias has dined. You quickly pull out your sword. + + +The souls of the deceased keep their distance for a moment, but they still slowly creep up to the sacrifice. + + +With the greatest effort you manage to keep calm as hundreds of souls encircle you. Tightly clutching your sword you notice that the spirits of the dead keep creeping closer to you. + + +The sight of their hollow eyes and pale skin makes you despair. As the cold inhabitants of the underworld encircle you you drop your sword, waiting for their cold hands to drag you to the realm of Hades. + + +Suddenly a golden light illuminates the island, startling the ghosts and filling you with the golden glow. You feel as if the goddess Athena has taken away the fear from your limbs and with a renewed courage you storm the bewildered souls. +> A fight is inevitable +Ghostly images of dead soldiers appear before you, their swords drawn. + +You plunge you sword into their chests, but to your horror you notice that is of no use against the dead. Only briefly halted by your attack, the ghostly soldiers continue their attack. As you block their icy swords you feel like your energy is being drained. + +Weakend by this sudden loss you let your guard down and one of the soldiers manages to slash you across your chest. Luckily for you it is only a shallow cut and you are able to carry on your fight. Ignoring the stinging pain you... +> Boldy continue your attack +Gathering all your strenght you rush forward, towards you ghostly opponents. The souls try to strike youwith their swords, but with a quick move of your sword you manage to deflect their blows. As the spirits are recovering from the sudden move you swing your sword at them. Even though they manage to block your blow, the sheer force of the impact shatters their swords. + +After this the souls of the deceased soldiers quickly retreat. Although the souls of the dead have no physical body, their bones, muscles and flesh are all destroyed by the all consuming fire of the funerary pyres, they still have great respect for the valour and courage of the living. + +Panting, you shout at Cyrus: 'Cyrus, can you see Teiresias yet?' + +'Not yet, but I... Oh, wait there he is, he has almost made it to the sacrifice.' + +You look in the direction Cyrus points at and you see the old and wise Teiresias. With a large swing of your sword you repel a couple of souls that tried to sneak up on you. After a couple more swings Teirisas finally reaches the sacrifice. After he eats and drinks from the sacrifice he immediately changes. The pale look disappears from his face and he begins to seem aware of the world around him. + +The old man approaches you. 'Thank you, brave-hearted Greek. Your sacrifice has opened my eyes once again. Now please tell me, why have you, a mortal, come here to the realm of Hades?' + +'I have come to seek your guidance, o wise Teirisias. The Greek city states are on the brink of civil war. Only your advice can save my homeland.' + +'I see. Since you have given me sacrifice I shall offer you guidance. I see a great palace in the land of the Spartans. I see a king, betrayed by his courtiers and a great fire spreading through Greece. A darkness is spreading through the lands, but in this darkness I see a light. He will endure much hardship on his travels, but he is the one who is able to bring peace to the land of the Greeks. This is all I can offer you. Now go, you are running out of time!' + +With these last words, Teirisias and the other souls depart once again to the realm of Hades. + +Cyrus approaches you. 'Well, that was quite the experience. I've overheard some things that Teirisias said. It sounds to me like the solution to your problem lies in Sparta.' + +'Yes, I thought so too. Set a course for Sparta. Let's hope this journey is almost to an end, like Teirisias said: we are running out of time.' + + +> But you are still a long way from Sparta... +A rough wind beats against the ship as it makes it way to Sparta. The unending torrents of rain spoil even the food that's stored below deck. The moral of the crew is on an all-time low as the last of the drinking water is wasted as the last jug of drinking water is thrown overboard by a large wave. + +Exhausted by days of hardship and famine at seas, you reach an unknown island. From the deck of the ship you spot flocks of sheep jumping around the landscape and where there are animals, there's also water. You have a sloop prepared and head of to the shore with Cyrus and seven other men. 'Okay men, we have to collect as much food as possible, two of you are going to look for water. Be on your guard, remember, we are on an unknown island. + +A short time later the crew assembles on the beach, bringing a couple of goats, baskets of vegetables and fruits and sheep and enough drinking water for several weeks. As you investigate the day's harvest you are approached by a crew member. 'I'm sorry to interrupt you sir, but one of my friends thought I should tell you about something. While foraging for food we came across a large cave. We believe that it is inhabited, since it has a door and makeshift pens for animals. I don't know if this is of any interest to you, but we just thought that you might want to know.' + +Hearing the words of the sailor you mutter to yourself: +> 'Interesting, let us go to the cave. I would like to meet the inhabitant. +You order one of the crew members to fetch a sack of wine as a meeting gift for the inhabitant of the cave. + +Together with Cyrus and seven men you make way to the large cave. When you get close to the cave you wonder at the makeshift pens, although there is no signs of the animals. Although the construction seems terribly shaky, you notice that it is more stable than it seems. But your biggest surprise comes when you step over the threshold of the ''house''. On the walls there are racks and shelves filled with cheese. Baskets of fruit litter the floor of the cave and buckets of milk fill one side of the cave. Whoever lives here, he is either very wealthy or very hungry. + +Although it is against your better judgment, you and your men take some of the cheese and drink some of the milk. After the scrumptious meal you hear thundering footstep closing in on the cave. Fear grips your heart and the hearts of your men as you imagine what kind of terrible beast produces such sound. You quickly hide in the shadows at the back of the cave, awaiting the inhabitant of the shelter. + +Then, the owner arrives. A large foot enters though the entrance, followed by a huge leg. A man, as large as three grown men, enters the cave. As you examine the stranger more closely you notice he only has one eye, right in the middle of his forehead. He is followed by dozens of sheep and goats. After he places the male animals into the pens outside the cave, he rolls a huge stone in front of the doorway, well there goes that escape route. Luckily for you, he doesn't seem to miss the cheese and milk that you took. + +Too afraid to approach the creature, you watch him care for his sheep with loving care. He carefully milks the animals. Afterwards he feeds them. As the huge man takes a seat on a flat rock you finally dare to step out of the shadows. + +'Greetings noble host. I would like to introduce myself to you. I am a humble bard from the city of Athens, sent on a mission by the gods themselves. I have traveled far and wide before I came here with my men, and we have faced many perils. I'm sorry to tell you, but as we awaited you return we took some cheese and some milk. I'd like to ask you if you could give us some supplies for our way back, after all it is our right, since we are your guest.' + +The huge man examines you closer, scanning you from your head to your toes with his giant eye. 'Well, great bard, let me first welcome you to my home and let me thank you for your company, you see it is quite lonely here on this island. You mentioned you came here with your men, where exactly are they?' + +'Some of them are here, o noble host', and your men appear from the shadows 'but the rest of my crew is at the beach.' + +'I see. And may I ask how you reached our island. After all, the wide seas encircle it and you would need a well build ship to come here.' + +You become quite suspicious of your host and so you answer him: 'our ship was wrecked at sea by high waves and strong winds. After our ship was completely wrecked by the god of the seas, we were thrown ashore on your island.' + +'Well, you're lucky that you ended up here and not on some uninhabited island. Please, make yourself at home, I was about to dine and you, as my very honoured guests, must join me.' +> Dinner is served +After he has spoken these words with his malicious heart, he picks up two of your men, like young dogs, and smashes their heads against the floor. The contents of their skulls wet the cold, dirt floor. After this atrocious deed he cooks your men and prepares a meal with them. Then he consumes them, their flesh, their inerts and their bones, full of marrow. + +At this sight you and your men heave your arms to Zeus, crying. Desperation grips your hearts. + +After his huge stomach was filled by this meal of human flesh and he drank some of the milk from the buckets, he laid himself to rest between the sheep in the cave. + +While he is sleeping you conceive the plan to, after you pulled your sharp sword from your thigh, stab him in his chest, where the his liver is positioned. Slowly, the plan begins to form in your head. +> Quickly, execute your scheme +You slwoly approach the giant man, careful to produce as little sound as possible, afraid to wake him up. You gently grope across his chest with your hands and when you finally have found the right spot you draw your sword. Solemnly, as if you are offering sacrifice to the immortal gods, you plunge the blade into his chest. + +A river of red blood gushes out of the wound. The creature opens his eyes and all that they portay is fear and pain. You qioetly back away from the cyclops as he seizes his final death throes. You and your men rejoice at the sight of the slain giant and the sense of despair leaves your hearts. + +'Let's get out of this evil place'. + +With these words you guide your companions through the dimly led cave, to the exit. As you reach it you remember that your host has blocked the exit with a huge stone, not even twenty-two carriages with four wheels could move from it's place. No matter how much you try to move it from his place, no matter how hard you pray to the immortal gods, the stone doesn't move. + +The final days of your life are filled with misery, locked within the cave the remaining crew members become mutinous, blaming you for all their troubles. After a short fight only you and Cyrus remain in the cave. Although your head is filled with plans you can't think of a plan to get out of your cold, dark prison. As a last resort, you pull out your sword. The last thing you see on this earth before your vision grows red is a golden flash of light. Was this misery avoidable?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After he has spoken these words with his malicious heart, he picks up two of your men, like young dogs, and smashes their heads against the floor. The contents of their skulls wet the cold, dirt floor. After this atrocious deed he cooks your men and prepares a meal with them. Then he consumes them, their flesh, their inerts and their bones, full of marrow. + +At this sight you and your men heave your arms to Zeus, crying. Desperation grips your hearts. + +After his huge stomach was filled by this meal of human flesh and he drank some of the milk from the buckets, he laid himself to rest between the sheep in the cave. + +While he is sleeping you conceive the plan to, after you pulled your sharp sword from your thigh, stab him in his chest, where the his liver is positioned. Slowly, the plan begins to form in your head. +> Wait, think about this a little longer +While you think about your plan to murder your host a thought comes into your mind. After the giant man entered the cave he blocked the exit with a high, immensly huge stone, not even twenty-two cariages with four wheels could move it from it's place. If you killed the cyclops now, there is no possible way for you to leave the cave. + +Sighing, you and your men await the radiant dawn. +> The radiant dawn spreads her veil of red... +The following morning, the cyclops awakes. After he milks his sheep he prepares another meal, with two other companions of yours. After he finishes his dinner he drives his animals outside the cave. Afterwards he picks up the stone and puts it once again in front of the entrance, as easily as one closes a quiver with a cover. + +Inside the damp, cold cave you you check your surroundings, devising a plan to bring demise to your one-eyed host, to punish him for his cruelty and to bring glory to Athens. Near one of the walls of the vaulted cave lay a pole, freshly cut by the Cyclops, which he uses to prepares fires for cooking when it's dried. It is about the size of the mast of a small ship. After finishing a sharp point to the pole you stick it in the glowing embers of his fire, to harden it. After the pole is sufficiently hardened you hide it in a pile of droppings in the back of the cave, a pretty big pile. + +That evening your host returns. After he drives his cattle into the cave he once again seals of the entrance of the cave with the huge stone. Then he cooks two more men, now there are only you, Cyrus and one of the crew members remaining. +> Now is the time, strike! +As your host is occupied with his meal you quickly pull out the pole from the droppings. Wobbling beneath the weight of the large piece of wood you try to sneak up on the dining giant. However, he notices that something is wrong and he turns around, with a leg from one one your men still in his hands. + +'What are you doing? Are you really such cowardly men?' + +He throws the limb of your crew member away and stands up from the cave floor. Frightened, you drop the pole and try to run away, only to be blocked by the giant stone in front of the exit. The cyclops approaches you with thundering footsteps. Fear grips your hearts as the last remaining crew member is smashed to death against the huge stone. You draw your sword in a futile attempt to stop the giant from causing any more harm. + +The cyclops laughs as he crushes Cyrus with a single sweep from his arm. Enraged by this sight you charge the giant with your drawn sword, oblivious to the rest of the world. + +The next thing you feel is a sharp pain shooting through your body as almost every bone is your body is crushed beneath the force of the cyclops's blow. A golden light fills your vision as your soul enters the realm of Hades.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The following morning, the cyclops awakes. After he milks his sheep he prepares another meal, with two other companions of yours. After he finishes his dinner he drives his animals outside the cave. Afterwards he picks up the stone and puts it once again in front of the entrance, as easily as one closes a quiver with a cover. + +Inside the damp, cold cave you you check your surroundings, devising a plan to bring demise to your one-eyed host, to punish him for his cruelty and to bring glory to Athens. Near one of the walls of the vaulted cave lay a pole, freshly cut by the Cyclops, which he uses to prepares fires for cooking when it's dried. It is about the size of the mast of a small ship. After finishing a sharp point to the pole you stick it in the glowing embers of his fire, to harden it. After the pole is sufficiently hardened you hide it in a pile of droppings in the back of the cave, a pretty big pile. + +That evening your host returns. After he drives his cattle into the cave he once again seals of the entrance of the cave with the huge stone. Then he cooks two more men, now there are only you, Cyrus and one of the crew members remaining. +> Wait until he finishes his meal +You watch in horror as the frighening giant finishes his macabre meal. After he wipes the last bloodstains from his chin you approach your host with the sack of wine you took as a meeting gift. + +'Most noble host. Please accept this peace offering.we brought with us as a meeting gift, it will taste good after your meal of human flesh. We came here, hoping that you were a kind and generous host who could help us to reach the island of Sparta. But why, do you think, shall people visit this island once again, after all the misery that you put us through.?' + +After you speak this words, the cyclops takes the sack of unmixed win and takes a large swig of it. He obviously likes the wine and answers: + +'This wine is amazing. Don't take me wrong, even in the lands of the cyclopses the gods send the rain from the skies which make the grape vines flourish, but this wine is like ambrozia, the nectar of the gods. Please, tell me who you are, noble guest.' + +After these words he once again puts the sack to his lips and he empties the sack of wine into his mouth. The wine immediately takes effect. Immediately you answer him with the winged words: + +'You ask me who I am? Well, I'll tell you. My glorious name is Nobody. Nobody is the name that my parents gave me and Nobody is the name that I am known by.' + +'Well then nobody. In exchange for your gift of wine, I shall give you a gift of my own. You will be the last one of your company that I'll eat. Let that be my gift to you. Yes, let that be my gift to you...' + +And with these last words the cyclops falls asleep. You and your companions rush to the pile of droppings and retrieve the sharpened pole from underneath. You quickly rush to the sleeping giant and stick the pole into his single eyesocket. You keep twisting the pole until the red blood flows from the wound. + +An agonizing roar bellows through the vaulted cave. Frightenend, you and your companions run to the back of the cave. The cyclops stands up from the floor of the cave, still screaming and roaring, calling for the help of the cyclopses that inhabit the surrounding caves... +> A family visit +With a great effort he manages to reach the entrance of the cave. He uses his tremendous strength to remove the stone blocking the entrance. Almost instantly you hear thundering footsteps closing in on the cave. Booming voices speak outside: 'Polyphemos, what happened to you? Why are you disturbing the divine night with your cries for help? Has someone with great strength hurt you, or were you tricked by some malevolent scheme?' + +Your host, the brutish Polyphemus, answers his brothers: 'My brothers, Nobody is hurting me with his schemes, there is no violence.' + +The others answer with the winged words: 'But if nobody is hurting you and you are there all alone, then why are you Disturbing our slumbers? If a disease or other affliction from the gods struck you, it is of no use to shout, for you can't take actions against the immortal Zeus, the cloud-gatherer. Try praying to our father, Poseidon, the god of the seas.' + +After they spoke these words his brothers left the grounds of the godlike Polyphemus. Smiling, you see how the cyclops, while feeling his way across the cave, positions himself next to the exit of his cave. +> Now is your chance, dash through the exit +You and your remaining companions cautiously walk towards the exit of the cave. You heart is pounding within your chest, one wrong move, one noise may be enough for the cyclops to determine your position. Carefully avoiding the sheep you manage to reach the exit, guarded by the savage giant. + +Pressing your body against the wall you try to sneak past him, holding you breath. Unfortunately for you, the cyclops inspects everyone, sheep or guest, that tries to leave his home. Centimeters before you escape your dreadful host he grabs you with his giant hands. An evil grin appears on his face. + +'Were you about to leave already, cowardly Nobody? I was just about to thank you for the injury to my eye. Were should I begin, shall I disembowl you or should I rather... ARGH!' + +A cry of pain slips past the boundaries of his teeth as Cyrus stabs the hand that is holding you with his sharp, bronze sword. The cyclops' grip on you immediately loosens and you manage to escape his grip. As you try to unsheathe your sword you notice the huge arms of the giant flailing wildy towards you. +> You quickly jump aside... +With fear once again gripping your heart you jump aside in an attempt to dodge the arms of Polyphemos. However, the reach of his arm is too great for you evade with just one leap. You are immediately crushed by the brute force with which the cyclops swing his hand towards you. + +As a sharp pain flows throughout your body, a golden light fills your vision. These are the last experiences in this realm before your soul travels to the realm of Hades.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and your remaining companions cautiously walk towards the exit of the cave. You heart is pounding within your chest, one wrong move, one noise may be enough for the cyclops to determine your position. Carefully avoiding the sheep you manage to reach the exit, guarded by the savage giant. + +Pressing your body against the wall you try to sneak past him, holding you breath. Unfortunately for you, the cyclops inspects everyone, sheep or guest, that tries to leave his home. Centimeters before you escape your dreadful host he grabs you with his giant hands. An evil grin appears on his face. + +'Were you about to leave already, cowardly Nobody? I was just about to thank you for the injury to my eye. Were should I begin, shall I disembowl you or should I rather... ARGH!' + +A cry of pain slips past the boundaries of his teeth as Cyrus stabs the hand that is holding you with his sharp, bronze sword. The cyclops' grip on you immediately loosens and you manage to escape his grip. As you try to unsheathe your sword you notice the huge arms of the giant flailing wildy towards you. +> You quickly throw yourself to the ground... +You feel the flow of air passing through the space you were standing in just a minute ago, as the giant arm of the cyclops flies wildly over your head. You roll aside as one of his fists fly towards the ground with tremendous strength. + +As the earth shakes under the force of the impact you stand up. You realise that you can't sneak past the raging giant as he block the only way out. You walk back towards the other end of the cave, keeping your eyes on the blind giant as he continues his tantrum. As you reach the end of the cave you shout towards him: + +'Blind fool, why are you attacking the tender air? Can you, as the son of a god, not even hit a mortal? You bring shame upon your father and your brothers.' + +He rushes toward the sound of your voice in a blind fury, just as you expected. You quickly run in the opposite direction, towards the exit. The earth trembles once again as the giant body of the cyclops hits the wall of the cave. Leaving a bewilderd giant behind you finally reach the exit of your prison. +> Free at last +Blinking in the bright sunlight you stand outside the cave of Polyphemos and your heart is filled with joy. + +You quickly make your way to the beach. As you reach the shore of the island you hear the happy shouting of men. As you look for the source of the sound you see three crew members on the beach. One of them runs towards you. + +'We are so happy to see you. After you didn't come back last night we were afraid that you were killed. We wanted to look for you, but the other men were too afraid to come near that strange cave. We were left here with this sloop to wait for your return', he now directly adressess Cyrus 'but pardon me for asking captain, but I thought you and the traveller left with seven men'. + +'It's a long story. we'll tell it to you and all of the crew members when we're safely back on the ship.' + +After telling everyone on board the story of your adventure with Polyphemos, the crew prepares to sail away. +> You turn towards the island... +The fury for your fallen companions fills your heart and clouds your mind as you shout towards Polyphemos: 'Foolish cyclops! Did you really think that you could keep me captive! If ever one of the mortal men should visit your island, tell them that a great bard from Athens was the one who injured you! And as they will leave your island too, they shall tell the whole of Greece of me, and everyone will know the name of...' + +Your speech is cut short by the lament of Polyphemos: + +'Woe is me, for an ancient prophecy is fulfilled. A great seer who lived here a long time ago told me that a Greek would rob me from the light in my eye. A Greek, who is skilled with words and has a noble heart. I always imagined him to be a true hero, with great strength and fitness. But now this puny wimp, with no strength at all, has blinded me. Not in an honorous fight, but cowardly, after he intoxicated me with strong wine. Come back here, o 'great' bard, so that I may honor you with my hospitality. My father, the earth-shaking Poseidon, will ensure your safe return home.' + +You quickly answer him: + +'Did you really think that I would fall for such foolish words. But if you want, I'll come back to you, and then I won't only take your eye, but your life too. Maybe you should ask your father to give you a new eye, or better yet, you should ask for two. Maybe then, you'll be able to survive a visit from the next guests.' + +The booming voice of Polyphemos answers you: + +'Hear me, o earth-shaking father of mine. If I truly am your son, please answer my prayer. Make sure that this puny coward never reaches the destination of his travels. Make sure that his ship sinks and that he suffer horrible pains before he dies. However, should his fate be to reach his destination, then make sure that he arrives there on someone else's ship, after losing his men, and wrecked by the seas. And after he reaches this place, let him suffer misery there as well. + +After the cyclops falls silent you turn back to the crew. 'Alright men, let's get out of this place.' + +Not long after you spoke these words, a huge boulder lands next to the ship. As fast as possible, the ship leaves the island of the cyclopses. +> At sea again +For days the endless wine-colored sea has surrounded your ship. No island has come into view since you left the island of Polyphemos. As the sun disappears behind the horizon to reveal the starry sky you once again sink away into a deep, restless sleep. + +You are alone in an endless ocean, drifting on the waves. The skies above are filled with violent thunderclouds and terrible winds are sweeping across the sea. Far away, almost behind the horizon, an island is visible, a single light illuminates it. + +Suddenly the bright-eyed Athena, the daughter of Zeus, appears in front of you, walking on the loud-roaring waves. 'You have brought great honour upon yourself, son of Athens, but with that honour comes misery. You have mutilated the son of Poseidon, the god of the sea, and now he carries a heavy wrath. With your brave deeds you have regained your favor with some of the gods so heed this message well: it is your fate to complete this journey, but you will do this on your own. The seas will swallow your vessel and your men will drown. However, the daughter of Atlas will rescue you. Time is running out for Greece. + +A flash of lightning awakens you from your deep slumber. +> The skies roar as thunder rains down on the earth +The dark clouds in the night sky block even the stars themselves. Thunder roars as Poseidon unleashes his wrath upon your vessel. Your men's cries of fear are like a whisper compared to the sound of the waves crashing against your ship. Violent gusts of wind sweep across the deck like raging lions, taking everyone who is in their path. + +You wander across the deck, helpless, trying to think of a way to avert this disaster. Two of the sailors are pulled to their deaths at the bottom of the seas by a large wave, three more are killed by falling debris. The planks of the ship crack and fracture underneath the might of the ocean. The sail is torn apart by the swift winds and a couple of men are caught by it, a moment later it drifts helplessly on the wine-coloured sea. + +You manage to hold on to the broken mast as a large wave clears the deck of rubble and men. You look across the ship and to your horror only a few men are still alive. The moaning of the dying sends chills up your spine. + +The howling winds become more and more violent. With all of your strength you manage to hold on to the broken ship. However, many men can't. You see many of your companions being blown away into the violent ocean. You cry out to the gods, begging them to stop this slaughter, but to no avail. + +You hear a familiar voice next to you. As you turn you see Cyrus battling the winds and the sea. You try to shout to him, to tell him to have faith and to not give up fighting. But even before your words from in your mouth you see Cyrus being dragged of by the winged winds. The world around slows down as you see the horrified look upon your friend's face. + +Suddenly a sharp pain fills your head as you are hit by a flying piece of wood. You flash in and out of consciousness as the ship finally breaks beneath the thundering waves. + +The cold ocean surrounds you... + +You are flailing helplessly with your arms... + +A body drifts by... + +Your hand touches a large piece of wood... + +With your last strength you manage to hold on... + +The ship is nowhere to be seen... + +You are alone... + + +> The world fades away... +You are adrift in an endless void. + +The world around you is dark. + +The soothing nothingness takes away your fears, your despair and your sadness. Slowly all of your thoughts about your crew members and your friends fade away, leaving nothing behind but a comforting silence. + +Eventually even your greatest worries about the fate of Greece are reduced to nothing, you are at peace... + +Suddenly a thought comes crashing into your mind with the strength of Zeus' lightning bolts. How can you rest while thousands of people depend on you? How can you rest when the world you know is about to be destroyed? + +Two thoughts are battling inside your head, which one will win? +> 'I am finally at peace. I will stay here.' +Your worries soon fade away like the rest of your thoughts. + +You close your eyes, relieved that all of your suffering has come to an end. + +The world around you is peaceful. + +The comforting silence, the peaceful void, why leave all of this behind? + +Here, in the realm of Hades, your soul is finally at peace.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are adrift in an endless void. + +The world around you is dark. + +The soothing nothingness takes away your fears, your despair and your sadness. Slowly all of your thoughts about your crew members and your friends fade away, leaving nothing behind but a comforting silence. + +Eventually even your greatest worries about the fate of Greece are reduced to nothing, you are at peace... + +Suddenly a thought comes crashing into your mind with the strength of Zeus' lightning bolts. How can you rest while thousands of people depend on you? How can you rest when the world you know is about to be destroyed? + +Two thoughts are battling inside your head, which one will win? +> 'The fate of the world depends on me, I can't rest while many suffer. I have to get out of this place.' +The bright sunlight pierces your eyes. You can hear the sounds of waves breaking on the shores nearby. As your vision finally focuses you take notice of your surroundings. You are lying on a white beach, nearby the violet sea. Large forests border at the sands. + +You guess this is an island, but how big is it exactly? Is it inhabited, and by who? The memories of your recent visit to the island of the cyclopes are still vividly present within your mind. You try to get up to explore your surroundings, but a sharp pain shoots through your limbs. + +Clenching your teeth you try once again to stand up. With a great feat of determination you manage to stand up. Shaking with suppressed pain and desperation you mange to take your first step on this new-found land. Then follows a second step, and a third. And then your vision turns red. The white sands of the beach come crashing towards you as exhaustion takes control of your limbs. + +'''''''''''''''''''''''' + + + +As you slowly regain conciousness, you notice that the pain racking your body is fading away. You keep lying on the sandy ground, waiting for the pain to dissipate completely. As you lay there you notice sweet music in the distance, a woman's voice, a song. + +Far from his lands and far from his home + +A hero turns up, all alone. + +His ship and his friend he lost to the sea + +But now he is here + + Alone with + +Me + +As this sweet song keeps repeating inside your mind you notice that keeping concious is getting harder and harder. The heavy sleeps once again presses down on your eyelids. +> You wake up a few hours later... +'Awaken, valiant hero. You are safe here.' + +You slowly open your eyes and immediately notice that the pain has gone from your body. You feel like you are full of strength, like you could battle the titans themselves without falling. + +'I am glad that you fully recovered from your dangerous journey.' + +Now you notice the honey-sweet voice which speaks to you. You check your surrounding and see that you are in a vaulted cave, decorated with lavish furniture. Sculptures depicting the travels of Odysseus line the walls of the cave and golden oil-lamps illuminate it. Richly decorated musical instruments lay on a table with beautiful wood carving. A hearth fuelled by cedar wood spreads a pleasant heat throughout the room and fills it with a delightful scent. You only now notice the expensive couch next to your bed and the beautiful woman upon it. She has arms as white as snow and beautiful hair. Her face is caring and her dress is made from the finest silk. + +While the sight of all this splendour fills your head you ask the mysterious woman: 'noble mistress, honourable host, could you please tell me where I am and what kind of place this is?' + +The woman lifts herself from her couch and speaks to you. 'I am the goddess Calypso, great teller of tales, I found you on my island Ogygia after your ship was destroyed and your crew perished because of the wrath of Poseidon. Here, on my island you will be safe.' + +'Radiant goddess, I thank you for your hospitality, but alas, I cannot stay here. The gods have burdened me with a heavy task. Many cities will be destroyed and many people will perish if I will not complete my journey. Please, with your consent, let me build a ship with the trees on your island, please provide me with food and drink, so that I may please the gods by fulfilling my journey.' + +'Dear bard, from far you came and far you have to go. I know of your quest and I know the gods approached you, for all the immortal gods are not unknown to each other, even when they live far apart. However, I cannot let you go. Forget your journey and your quest for Greece will fall, no matter what you try. Sweet traveller I will keep you here as my guest until you want to accompany me as my husband. I will bestow immortality upon on you and give you eternal youth, so we may live here until the end of time itself. Forget your worries about your home and the gods. Stay here, with me.' +> 'Fair goddess. You have cared for me in my time of greatest need. You have spoken to me as an equal, as if I am one of the immortal gods myself. Love fills my heart as I speak these words to you: I will stay here with you.' +The face of Calypso immediately shows a wide smile. + +'My dear lover, joy fills my heart at the sound of these words. Are these really your intentions or are they just part of some elaborate plot? Please, promise me by the immortal gods that your heart is truy filled with love.' + +'My dear Calypso, by the immortal gods I vow that my heart is filled with love for you. Please, let me live here, by your side so that we may be happy together, until the end of time itself.' + +'Traveller, you have no idea how happy you have made me. Many years I have spent here alone on my island. The life of a goddess is not always pretty. Now that you are here my world has suddenly turned bright. I shall grant you immortality and eternal youth. Great bard, forget all of your troubles and doubts. Please, take my hand in marriage, so we may both live together, happy.'' + +... + +Many years pass by and you and Calypso live happily together on Ogygia. You are now immortal and fear or pain are just fading memories to you. You no longer think of your journey or of Greece. Hermes, the messenger of the gods has only once visited your island to tell you that Greece had fallen into civil war. + +Centuries pass by until you and Calypso finally decide to leave the mortal realm altogether. You settle on mount Olympus, where the immortal gods all reside. The promises Calypso made you all those years ago were all true: you are both happy together, until time itself ends.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>'Awaken, valiant hero. You are safe here.' + +You slowly open your eyes and immediately notice that the pain has gone from your body. You feel like you are full of strength, like you could battle the titans themselves without falling. + +'I am glad that you fully recovered from your dangerous journey.' + +Now you notice the honey-sweet voice which speaks to you. You check your surrounding and see that you are in a vaulted cave, decorated with lavish furniture. Sculptures depicting the travels of Odysseus line the walls of the cave and golden oil-lamps illuminate it. Richly decorated musical instruments lay on a table with beautiful wood carving. A hearth fuelled by cedar wood spreads a pleasant heat throughout the room and fills it with a delightful scent. You only now notice the expensive couch next to your bed and the beautiful woman upon it. She has arms as white as snow and beautiful hair. Her face is caring and her dress is made from the finest silk. + +While the sight of all this splendour fills your head you ask the mysterious woman: 'noble mistress, honourable host, could you please tell me where I am and what kind of place this is?' + +The woman lifts herself from her couch and speaks to you. 'I am the goddess Calypso, great teller of tales, I found you on my island Ogygia after your ship was destroyed and your crew perished because of the wrath of Poseidon. Here, on my island you will be safe.' + +'Radiant goddess, I thank you for your hospitality, but alas, I cannot stay here. The gods have burdened me with a heavy task. Many cities will be destroyed and many people will perish if I will not complete my journey. Please, with your consent, let me build a ship with the trees on your island, please provide me with food and drink, so that I may please the gods by fulfilling my journey.' + +'Dear bard, from far you came and far you have to go. I know of your quest and I know the gods approached you, for all the immortal gods are not unknown to each other, even when they live far apart. However, I cannot let you go. Forget your journey and your quest for Greece will fall, no matter what you try. Sweet traveller I will keep you here as my guest until you want to accompany me as my husband. I will bestow immortality upon on you and give you eternal youth, so we may live here until the end of time itself. Forget your worries about your home and the gods. Stay here, with me.' +> 'Fair goddess, you have cared for me in my time of greatest need and for that I thank you. But I cannot forsake the task the gods burdened me with. I cannot stay.' +The face of Calypso shows an understanding smile. + +'Great bard, in my heart I knew that this was the answer you would give me. But I will not give up my love so easily. I will keep you here on my island until you finally admit that you love me. Please, make yourself comfortable, after all, this will be you house too.' + +'Radiant goddess, what words escape the enclosure of your teeth? How can you take me captive here? How can you prevent me from making a raft from these trees under the shadows of the night, when the heavy sleep holds even you in it's sweet embrace?' + +'Traveller, how can you be so foolish? Even if you manage to leave my island, how can you survive your passage over the endless seas? What will you eat? What will you drink? Who will protect you from the wrath of Poseidon? You know just as well as I do that you will not reach Sparta alive, even with the help of Athena.' + +You let out a loud sigh as you realise that Calypso is right, you cannot leave, unless you wish to travel to the realm of Hades. As your hopes of saving Greece are slowly shattered you leave the cave of Calypso. On the beach you drop yourself upon the white sands, praying for a miracle from the gods. +> Days pass by... +The radiant Eos once again rises to bring light of dawn to the earth. + +Several days have passed since you washed ashore on the island of Calypso. You are sitting once again on your spot on the beach, gazing at the horizon, wishing for a miracle to happen. Ever since you rejected Calypso she has been trying to seduce you with her sweet words and beautiful promises. She has given you the finest clothes and the best food, but your heart is still filled with worries about Greece. + +No matter how sorrowful you feel here, on this island-prison, you can't help but notice that Ogygia is really an extraordinary place. The most majestic birds make their nests in the large trees that scatter the island and the sweetest fruits grow just within an arms length. The seas surrounding it are full of fat fish and the skies are always blue. However, not a day goes by in which you stop praying to the gods for a sign, a miracle to happen that will bring you to your goal so you can fulfil your journey. + +You suddenly hear the sad voice of Calypso calling for you: 'Noble traveller, please join me in my home. You have a visitor.' + +Curious, you make your way to the cave of Calypso. Who, but the immortal gods themselves could make their way to the island of the goddess Calypso? + +As you enter the lavishly decorated cave your attention is immediately caught by an unfamiliar man standing next to Calypso. He wears the hat of a traveller and he carries the staff of a negotiator. On his feet he wears winged sandals. You suddenly recognise him as Hermes, the messenger of the gods. +> What have the gods to say? +The sharp-seeing Hermes speaks to you: 'Noble traveller, the gods, who inhabit the wide skies, have spoken to you. You are the one person who can save the Greek cities from the fires of war. You have travelled far and you have accomplished many thing, but your journey has not yet come to an end. Athena, the protector of heroes, has persuaded the council of the gods to send me to this island, to order Calypso to release you. You are now free to go, free to continue your journey.' + +You look at Calypso to ask if this is true, but her face, filled with grief, tells you enough. Her voice, filled with sadness speaks to you: 'Dear guest, Hermes speaks the truth. The gods have ordered me to let you go. But I ask you...no, I beg you to reconsider my offer. Stay here, with me. Forget Greece, forget your journey, stay here with me and be happy. If you knew what the future holds for you you would stay here. You will suffer, even after you reach your destination and the wrath of Poseidon will follow you across the sea. Stay here, be safe, accompany me as my husband, until the end of time itself.' + +Your heart is torn between your duty to the gods and the offer of Calypso. Your mind tells you to continue your journey, but your heart tells you to stay here. The gods have freed you and Calypso, even while she is in love with you, has obeyed them. In front of these two deities you have to make a choice that will shape the rest of your life. + +You answer with a trembling voice: +> 'Sharp-seeing Hermes, messenger of the gods, I thank you for bringing the message that set me free. As ordered by the gods I will continue my journey.' +The sharp-seeing Hermes speaks to you: 'You're welcome, great bard. Now you are free to continue your journey. Remember, the gods are always watching you. You have our blessing.' + +And with these winged words he departs, leaving you and Calypso alone. You turn to her but she immediately averts her gaze. She doesn't want to speak to you. + +You leave the cave, leaving a weeping Calypso behind. + +... + +Three days later your ship is finally complete. You are standing on the beach, admiring your ''handy work''. It has become a small vessel, barely large enough to hold both you and your supplies. But it will suffice for the journey ahead, it's not like you've got a crew to worry about any more. + +The radiant Calypso approaches you with her arms filled with food and water. 'My dear hero, sadness fills my heart because of you, for I have seen your future. You will suffer many suffering and you will feel great pains. But you must not give up. I know you are able to fulfill your destiny and save Greece. Please, take these supplies, so that you may reach your destination. I will always be here for you, on my island. Good luck and farewell.' + +Feeling a little guilty for all the sorrow that Calypso has been though these last days, she had been weeping for days after you decided to leave, you answer her: 'Radiant godess, I am sorry that I could not stay here, but the gods have ordered my departure. I hope that your love will be answered some day, by a noble man, I truly do. Before I go I wish to thank you once again for all the care that you have given me, but now I bid you farewell.' + +And with these last words you turn away from Calypso and push your boat into sea. + + +> You once more continue your journey... +As the sun sinks beneath the horizon you look behind you one more time, the island of Calypso has vanished beneath the horizon, not a single light is visible any more. As the stars once again appear in the wide skies you go to sleep. + + +The endless ocean surrounds you, but the waves are violent. Heavy storms sweep across your ship. With a crashing roar a wave shatters the planks of your ship, leaving you to drown in the violet-coloured sea. Suddenly a figure appears in front of you, walking on the waves. + + +You call out to the barely visible figure: 'Bright-eyed Athena, please aid me. The violent sea is about to claim my life.' + + +Hearing your call for help the figure walks towards you. As it stands in front of you you suddenly recognize the earth-shaker Poseidon, the god of the seas. With his face filled with wrath he speaks to you the thundering words: 'Cowardly bard, shame of Athens, did you really think you could escape me? Did you really think I would ever forgive you for the blinding of my son, the godlike Polyphemos? You should have stayed on the island of that witch Calypso. Mark my words, you will never reach Sparta. You will die a horrible death while Greece burns to ashes.' + + +Violent thunder clouds begin to form over your heads as Poseidon speaks these words. As he finishes his speech, lightning strikes the spot were you are drifting helplessly in the ocean. The next moment you wake up with a violent head-ache. +> The wrath of Poseidon +The seas around you howl with rage as violent gusts of winds cause the seas to form huge waves. Your already weak ship cracks and breaks under the strain of the violence of the seas. + + +Horrible memories of the day you lost your friends flood your mind as you once again find yourself in the cold waters of the dark sea. You struggle to keep afloat, to stay above the waves, but your strength fails you. You almost choke as the icy waters of the sea fill your lungs, preventing you to breath, trying to send you to the realm of Hades. + + +During your epic struggle against the roaring ocean, you see a shining figure on the distant waves. The figure approaches you, has Poseidon come to gloat over your dying body? + + +As the figure has almost reached you you are blinded by a nearby flash of lightning. + + +As the icy water of the deep ocean engulfs your head you begin hallucinating.You hear the voice of the owl-eyed Athena, the protector of heroes: 'Rest now, great storyteller, all will be well.' + + +Although you are fairly sure your mind is playing tricks on you, you feel comforted by the voice of the goddess. You close your eyes and embrace the cold darkness washing over you. Maybe you can finally rest after your long journey. +> All is quiet... +The darkness around you is lifting. + + +You are having a deja vu. + + +Am I back at Calypso's island? + + +No, this feels different. + + +I'm floating, moving on the waves. + + +Yet, I feel the soft ground beneath me. + + +Distant voices... Am I in Hades? + + +I can hear the wind blowing in the distance. + + +But why can't I see anything? + + +Can't move either. + + +How did I get here? + + +Ah, my head, it feels as if I've been hit by Polyphemos. + + +Hmmm, the darkness is returning. + + +Maybe I'll go back to sleep... +> Zzz... +You wake up, and quickly fall back asleep, a couple of times more. However, you never manage to get to know more about your surroundings apart from small, incoherent impressions. + + +But eventually you manage to gather enough strength to stay conscious for a longer period of time. + + +As you open your eyes with much effort you are amazed with what you see. You are aboard a ship, about medium-sized by the looks of it. You are lying in a ornately decorated bed which in itself must cost more than what you earn as a bard in an entire year. An array of bronze objects are visible on a nearby wooden desk: astrolabes, scales, even a small scale model of the solar system. Whoever owns this ship is either a trader or a scholar. + + +You hear stumbling in the room next to yours. The door separating them opens to reveal an elderly man, with grey hair wearing clean, white robes. When he speaks he sounds distracted, as if the affairs of the mortal world are not important enough to catch his attention. 'Welcome, stranger. I can see the questions in your face and I will answer them. My name is Angellios, and I am a priest of the bright Apollo.You might want to know why you are on my ship. Well, the short answer is: because I found you. The long answer is: the gods have sent me a vision, they told me to rescue you from the cold embrace of Poseidon and bring you to Sparta. To be honest, you are one of the few people I let aboard my ship. I use this vessel to completely separate myself from the civilized world, so I can completely focus on my study and the worship of the great Apollo. But since you have regained your strength it is almost time for us to say goodbye. We arrived at the docks of Sparta three days ago and too be honest, those have been three days too much.' + + +Although he obviously tries to hide his annoyance of human contact, you reply that you realize that you have been a burden for Angellios and that you thank him for all his good care. You decline his offer of a strange meal consistent of an array of strange mushrooms and disembark after another thorough thank-you. +> Sparta... At last +You take a deep breath as you walk along the docks of Sparta. You have finally reached your destination, after many hardships and the death of your friends you've finally made it. Your moment of happiness is short-lived though, as you realize your real task has only just begun. Someone somewhere in this great city is going to be responsible for the civil war that will engulf Greece, and it is your task to stop it, Your short moment of happiness is thus replaced by desperation, you have absolutely no idea where to start looking. + + +You walk across the harbor, watching the ship come and go across the busy river and the people walk by. When you realize you won't find anything lingering here you walk to the city. You don't feel at ease in the warrior city. Sparta and Athens are almost complete contrasts of each other. Athens is a centre of art and philosophy and houses some of the most beautiful buildings in Greece, while the whole of Sparta is dedicated to the art of warfare, it's houses almost completely devoid of any decorations. While Sparta controls a large part of the Peloponnese it's theatre is smaller than most provincial towns and the city watch is acts ruthlessly against anyone who breaks the law. The Spartans themselves don't even work their own lands, the peoples they conquered have to work for them as semi-slaves. + + +After an hour or so of exploring the city you decide to call it a day and enter a tavern. The dimly lit place if filled with people from all over Greece, traders from Syracuse, a couple of actors from Athens, you think you've seen them perform back in Athens once, in the back are some Spartan soldiers and half-hidden behind them are seafarers from Crete, pirates by the looks of them. As you order your drink you can't but help overhear a conversation: + + +'Well, it has been a couple of years since the king died, it's about time she remarried, I mean, she isn't even past childbearing age.' + + +'That's true, but Nelei musn't marry any one of her suitors. She needs a strong husband, one who can resist Akakios. Although Nelei is queen, she is still a woman and as such has nothing to say in politics, and her son has not yet come of age.' + + +'What's wrong with Akakios, he's only a council member isn't he?' + + +'Yes, but one who is bribing about half of the council of elders, and the other half consists of senile old fools.' + + +'And yet most of those councilors are Nelei's suitors.' + + +'Which is exactly my point. Everyone knows Akakios wants to steer towards war with the other city states.' + + +'And why is that such a problem, everyone knows Sparta is the mightiest city state in the whole of Greece?' + + +Your heart is pounding, this is the reason of the civil war, one of the councilors will marry the queen and as a result Sparta will go to war. You throw some coins at the innkeeper and rush out of the tavern, leaving baffled customers and a baffled innkeep behind. +> Continue... +The royal palace isn't exactly what you were expecting. True to the nature of the Spartans its decorations are sober, not much different from your average estate of a wealthy merchant in Athens. Fresco's depicting both war scenes and scenes of craftsmen adorn the outside walls. Cypresses shield most of the palace from sight, but you can still see that it's walls are much thicker than your average mansion. Its sturdy gate is made of iron, with gilded tips on top. Two hoplites, Greek spearmen, guard the gate. + + +As you approach the gates of the guardsmen approach you, pointing its spear at your chest. 'Halt, foreigner, what is your business here?' + + +You answer him as calmly as possible: 'I am a bard from Athens, I request an audience with queen Nelei.' + + +'You can't see the queen', he rudely replies. + + +'But it's important, I need to...' + + +The guard smashes you in the head with the flat end of the spearhead. You feel a little of blood run down your cheek. 'Now, do I haev to make myself any clearer or will you leave now?' + + +'I would if I could, but I really need to see the queen, it is a matter of...' + + +You are rudely interrupted as the guard shoves you to the ground. 'Wrong answer.' He raises his spear, ready to thrust it into your chest and ending your life. Your life flashes before your eyes as you search desperately for a way to prevent the bronze spearhead from sending your soul to Hades. however, it is to no avail. the guardsman grins sadistically as he sees you cowering on the floor, he takes one, deep breath and... + + +'Stop!' One word, yet it means the difference between life and death, your death. A woman's voice: sweet, yet filled with authority. + + +Your heart is pounding loudly in your chest and so much blood is flowing through your ears you can hardly hear a thing. A woman walks through the gates, dressed in a simple, yet elegant white robe, a small golden circlet is resting upon her long, brown hair. Her face is soft, yet evokes respect. She yells to the guard, her hands reveal her anger. The guard looks like he will react, but then he decides to walk back to his post. The woman walks towards you, helping you back on your feet. + + +You see her lips forming words, yet you can't hear a thing. + + +'Excuse me?' you yell louder than you meant to. + + +'I asked you: who are you?' + + +'Oh, excuse me, my heart was pounding so loudly I couldn't hear what you were saying. I am a bard from Athens, sent to request an audience with the queen of Sparta.' + + +'Then you are in luck. I'm Nelei, queen regent of Sparta.' + + + +> Nelei leads you to her quarters... +The queen has led you into her private quarters, hardly the usual place for an audience. A couple of ornate wooden chair are placed around a roaring hearth fire. The remains of a meal are visible on a nearby table, you see two half-emptied plates and two empty bronze cups. A loom is tucked away in a corner, showing a half finished burial cloth. Apart from some tapestries the walls are barren. + + +'Please, take a seat. I apologize for the sober setting, this isn't the place where I receive my usual visitors. Yet, you are no ordinary visitor, aren't you?' + + +'You are right, my lady, but how did you know?' + + +'This may sound strange, but my late husband came to me last night. He appeared in my dreams. He told me a great danger threatened me and my poor son, Kourio. You see, dark clouds are gathering above Sparta. My husband has died, leaving me alone to raise our only child, his heir. I believe he was murdered. You see, the council of elders, the advisors of the king, want us to declare war on the other Greek city states, claiming the supremacy over the whole of Greece. My husband was opposed to this. I believe Akakios, an evil man and the most influential of the elders was behind his assassination. Ever since my husbands death he has tried to persuade me to marry either him or any of the other elders. However, though I am a woman, I am no fool. Akakios wants the sole rulership over Sparta and I think he'll murder me and my son if that is was it takes. I only managed to win some time by telling my suitors I wouldn't be ready to marry anyone until I finish the burial cloth you can see over there. It's meant for my husbands fater, who has fallen gravely ill. The whole day I would work on it, only to undo all that work each night. But now the suitors found out about it and are demanding a marriage.' + + +'That is a sad tale indeed, noble lady, but it does not explain how you knew of my coming.' + + +'My husband told me a messenger was coming, sent by the immortal gods themselves. One who, despite his humble origins, would be able to put a stop to Akakios' malicious plans and bring peace to Sparta. It''s hard to explain, but when I saw you I knew you were the one my dear husband meant.' + + +'You are right, I was sent by the gods to prevent a civil war between the Greek city states. However, I do not have the power, nor the knowledge to interfere in the politics of Sparta.' + + +'Then we'll just have to work together', a youthful voice speaks. + + +You turn around and see a youth entering the room, about fourteen years you guess. He has the looks of his mother, the same brown hair and brown eyes and a fair complexion. + + +Nelei speaks to you: 'May I introduce you to my son, Kourio, rightful heir to the kingdom of Sparta, direct descendant to the great king Menelaos. Kourio, this is the envoy your father told me about.' + + +'Then this must be a sign that we will finally be able to put a halt to the evil plans of Akakios. Together, we will be able to figure something out, a ruse, to eliminate these pests from our grand city once and for all.' + + +The three of you deliberate all night and eventually you come up with a plan that will hopefully prevent civil war. +> As the dawning Eos appears once more in the morning sky your plan comes into action. +As planned, all of them showed up, every single one of them. Why wouldn't they come, such a chance only presents itself once every lifetime. You and Kourio are sitting in a dark corner of the courtyard, listening while Nelei addresses the suitors. With a steady and authorative voice she speaks: 'My dear guests, I have summoned you to inform you of my decision: at the end of this day I will marry one of you.' + + +You watch the crowd, almost the whole council of elders is present. Kourio points out Akakios, sitting at the front of them. To you his face looks most like that of a rat, he has a big nose and has little eyes, heavy eyebrows cover most of his forehead. He smirks with his small mouth. + + +'I have prepared a contest. The one who wins it shall become my new husband.' She grabs an ancient looking bow. 'This is the bow of my late husband, passed down to him by his father and his father's father before him. He had an original way to practice with this bow.' She points at six axe handles buried in the sand. 'The one who is able to shoot an arrow through all the six rings of these handles with one shot, like my late husband used to do, I will marry.' + + +You hear mixed comments coming from the crowd: 'Puh, is that everything, that's easy.' + + +'It looks hard.' + + +'I want to go first.' + + +As the contest commences you and Kourio watch anxiously, hoping and praying that everything will go as you planned. Suitor after suitor tries to win the contest, but none of the can even draw the string, let alone shoot an arrow with it through the rings. You laugh as Akakios tries again and again with a reddening face, but even he fails at this test. + + +When most of the suitors have had their go Akakios yells furiously: 'This is ludicrous, what are you trying to proof, woman, that we are not as good as your late husband? Well, too bad, but he died. You are going to marry me today or both you and your son will die. Do you understand? Huh?' + + +Kourio steps out of the shadows and walks towards his mother. 'My dear mother, would you mind letting me have a go at it? Just to proof that it isn't impossible.' + + +The suitors laugh as Nelei hands over the bow to her son. Kouios takes an arrow and... shoots it towards Akakios. +> A fight ensues... +Akakios dodges the arrow, which lodges itself into the chest of the suitor behind him. He draws a sharp, bronze sword and the other suitors follow his lead. Nelei retreats into her chambers, locking the doors behind her. You quickly step forth, out of the shadows drawing your own deadly sword. + + +You are immediately attacked by two suitors, slashing at you with their sharp swords. However, you easily block their blows, finishing off one of your attackers with a quick thrust to his chest. The other suitor retreats, only to be replaced by three more attackers. Although you do your best trying to block their attacks, you still get shallow cuts along your arms and sides. + + +Suddenly the head of one of your attackers explodes in a flurry of brain and blood as a feathered arrow sends another of the suitors to Hades. Taking advantage of the confusion you thrust your sword into the chest of another attacker, ending his life. The remaining attacker drops his sword and cowers away, but he too is slain by Kourio's swift bow. + + +You see a glimmer of bronze in the corner of your eye and you barely manage the deadly thrust of Akakios' sword. But as you try to regain your stance he already prepares another attack. As he once more unleashes a deadly thrust in your direction you have only a split second to take action. Acting more on instinct than on your wits you... +> counterattack. +Putting all your weight behind your thrust you try to end Akakios' life with a single blow. Yet Akakios is faster. A sharp pain erupts as the bronze sword pierces your intestine. You fall to the ground, coughing up blood. Akakios looms over you with a malicious grin. You manage to see the bronze sword flicker in the afternoon sun before it buries itself into your brains. + + +You have travelled a long and dangerous road. You braved many perils and have seen many new places. But although you were close to your goal you didn't make it. Greece is doomed and Athens will be engulfed by flames. Yet you won't notice any of this, as your soul is already on it's way to Hades. May you find peace there, while the world of the mortals is at war.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Akakios dodges the arrow, which lodges itself into the chest of the suitor behind him. He draws a sharp, bronze sword and the other suitors follow his lead. Nelei retreats into her chambers, locking the doors behind her. You quickly step forth, out of the shadows drawing your own deadly sword. + + +You are immediately attacked by two suitors, slashing at you with their sharp swords. However, you easily block their blows, finishing off one of your attackers with a quick thrust to his chest. The other suitor retreats, only to be replaced by three more attackers. Although you do your best trying to block their attacks, you still get shallow cuts along your arms and sides. + + +Suddenly the head of one of your attackers explodes in a flurry of brain and blood as a feathered arrow sends another of the suitors to Hades. Taking advantage of the confusion you thrust your sword into the chest of another attacker, ending his life. The remaining attacker drops his sword and cowers away, but he too is slain by Kourio's swift bow. + + +You see a glimmer of bronze in the corner of your eye and you barely manage the deadly thrust of Akakios' sword. But as you try to regain your stance he already prepares another attack. As he once more unleashes a deadly thrust in your direction you have only a split second to take action. Acting more on instinct than on your wits you... +> try to dodge his attack. +The sharp bronze blade misses you by mere inches as you stumble out of its way. You barely manage to keep standing. you immediately go into the offensive, thrusting and slashing at Akakakios, sending him into the defensive. You are completely focussed on this one opponent, all of your surrounding fade into a blur, leaving only Akakios. + + +The ringing sounds of metal on metal echo across the courtyard as the both of you tries to land a blow on the other. Your travels have given you a tremendous amount of experience, yet you need all of it in your duel with your enemy. You feel your heart skip a beat as Akakios lunges at your head, just barely missing it. You use this small opening in his defence to strike at him, but you only manage to land a glancing blow. + + +However, you manage to take the upper hand in this duel. You commence a flurry of attacks which leave no room for Akakios to retaliate, keeping him on the defensive and slowly maneuvering him to the wall, leaving him little room to dodge. In his desperation to attack you he launches a clumsy attack, missing you completely and leaving him completely open for an attack. You quickly make use of this opening and so you... +> thrust at his head. +You miss his head by inches. With this failure the tides of battle turn against you. Akakios regains the upper hand and sends you back into the defensive. Blow after blow you defend but eventually gaps begin to appear in your defence. In an unguarded moment Akakios manages to land a glancing blow to your head. + + +Dazed and confused you fall to the ground, dropping your sword. The last thing your mind registers is the malicious grin of Akakios as he plunges his sword into your brain. + + +You have travelled a long and dangerous road. You braved many perils and have seen many new places. But although you were close to your goal you didn't make it. Greece is doomed and Athens will be engulfed by flames. Yet you won't notice any of this, as your soul is already on it's way to Hades. May you find peace there, while the world of the mortals is at war.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The sharp bronze blade misses you by mere inches as you stumble out of its way. You barely manage to keep standing. you immediately go into the offensive, thrusting and slashing at Akakakios, sending him into the defensive. You are completely focussed on this one opponent, all of your surrounding fade into a blur, leaving only Akakios. + + +The ringing sounds of metal on metal echo across the courtyard as the both of you tries to land a blow on the other. Your travels have given you a tremendous amount of experience, yet you need all of it in your duel with your enemy. You feel your heart skip a beat as Akakios lunges at your head, just barely missing it. You use this small opening in his defence to strike at him, but you only manage to land a glancing blow. + + +However, you manage to take the upper hand in this duel. You commence a flurry of attacks which leave no room for Akakios to retaliate, keeping him on the defensive and slowly maneuvering him to the wall, leaving him little room to dodge. In his desperation to attack you he launches a clumsy attack, missing you completely and leaving him completely open for an attack. You quickly make use of this opening and so you... +> slash at his chest. +A red gash appears across Akakios' chest as your sword kisses his flesh. Roaring loudly Akakios goes once again in the offensive. However, his attacks are agressive and uncontrolled, leaving your opponent open for a final attack. Putting all your weight behind your attack, you thrust at his chest. + + +Time seems to stop as you plunge your blade into the lying heart of Akakios. The fighting around you seizes as the remaining suitors stare astonished at the death of their leader. You see small eyes of your enemy close beneath his large eyebrows as you pull your sword free from his chest. Blood sprays from his chest and his breath leaves his lungs as Akakios fall to the ground. The great intriguer, the menace of Greece, is dead. + + +As time resumes its normal flow you hear the sounds of falling swords around you. You finally become aware of your surroundings again. The courtyard is littered with bodies, Kourio is dripping with sweat and bleeding from multiple superficial wounds. You now notice your clothes are wet with blood, the once white fabric now a dirty red. The remaining suitors have dropped their swords and have kneeled upon the bloody floor, their hands resting upon their heads. +> The next day... +You are standing inside the throne room of Sparta. Courtiers and servants alike have gathered near the edges of the rooms, whispering to each other. They are standing between graceful columns that support the heavy, stone roof. The room is decorated in the Spartan style, with scarce fresco's decorating the walls. The marble floor beneath your feet is inlaid with mozaics, depicting battles. A fitting scene, you think, seeing the events of yesterday. + + +In front of you are two thrones: a small, elegant one for Nelei, the queen regent; and an elaborately decorated throne for Kourio, the rightful king of Sparta. As the two enter you kneel before them. + + +'Rise, noble hero.' you hear Kourio speak to you, 'you do not have to kneel before us. You are an honored friend of us and the whole kingdom of Sparta and we see you as our equal, even though you are a bard by trade. I cannot think of enough ways to thank you for the extraordinary deeds you have done for us and we will be for ever in your debt. I will give you enough gold to live the rest of your days in luxuries and will give you land in Sparta if you wish it; there will always be a place at our table for you whenever you are in the vicinity of our city and you will always have a place to sleep in our palace. But above all I give you my promise: Sparta will be at peace as long as I reign, no hostile action whatsoever will take place against any Greek city. You have my word, I swear it by the almighty gods, that inhabit the wide skies.' + + +You answer him, astonished by his generous gifts: 'Your honor, I am deeply grateful for this. But how could I ever accept your gifts, I only did my duty.' + + +'I will not hear any excuses. You will accept my gifts, that is an order from the king of Sparta.' + + +You smile at him: 'Very well your grace. I thank you.' + + +Kourio smiles back: 'No, we thank you. But I have one last favour to ask you.' + + +'What might that be your honor?' + + +'Since you are a bard, could you recite an epic to me and my court?' + + + + +--- + + +You gaze at the white city of Athens, gleaming in the morning sun. As you stand at the wooden railing of the vessel given to you by king Kourio to bring you back home, you reminisce about your adventure. You see the faces of all those you've met before your minds eye and you try to remember all of the places you've seen. But now, as you look once more at the city in which you were born you realize how much you've missed your home. The golden image of the wise Athena appears upon the vibrant seas. She smiles at you and waves, before disappearing again in a golden flash. The gleaming white marble of the Parthenon burns with a golden glow in the light of the setting sun, welcoming you home after your long journey.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With a great effort he manages to reach the entrance of the cave. He uses his tremendous strength to remove the stone blocking the entrance. Almost instantly you hear thundering footsteps closing in on the cave. Booming voices speak outside: 'Polyphemos, what happened to you? Why are you disturbing the divine night with your cries for help? Has someone with great strength hurt you, or were you tricked by some malevolent scheme?' + +Your host, the brutish Polyphemus, answers his brothers: 'My brothers, Nobody is hurting me with his schemes, there is no violence.' + +The others answer with the winged words: 'But if nobody is hurting you and you are there all alone, then why are you Disturbing our slumbers? If a disease or other affliction from the gods struck you, it is of no use to shout, for you can't take actions against the immortal Zeus, the cloud-gatherer. Try praying to our father, Poseidon, the god of the seas.' + +After they spoke these words his brothers left the grounds of the godlike Polyphemus. Smiling, you see how the cyclops, while feeling his way across the cave, positions himself next to the exit of his cave. +> Don't take any rash measures. Think about your next action first. +It is never wise to take rash decisions and so you wait while you observe Polyphemos. You notice that some of the sheep in the cave want to go out, but when they reach the exit, the cyclops first feels or pets them. If you were to make a run for the exit no he would surely discover you. + +As you ponder on a way to get out a plan begins to take shape in your mind. You order your companions to gather the twigs on which the giant sleeps at night amongst his sheep. Some of the sheep in the cave have a very thick coat of wool. Your escape plan comes into action. + +You bind three sheep together with the twigs. One of your companions holds on the fur of the middle sheep while he hangs underneath it, the other two sheep act as a distraction. When the sheep reach the exit, the cyclops pets them and lets them through. + +Seeing that your plan worked you use it to get yourself and your other companion out of the cave. Outside you untie the twigs that hold the sheep together.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A rough wind beats against the ship as it makes it way to Sparta. The unending torrents of rain spoil even the food that's stored below deck. The moral of the crew is on an all-time low as the last of the drinking water is wasted as the last jug of drinking water is thrown overboard by a large wave. + +Exhausted by days of hardship and famine at seas, you reach an unknown island. From the deck of the ship you spot flocks of sheep jumping around the landscape and where there are animals, there's also water. You have a sloop prepared and head of to the shore with Cyrus and seven other men. 'Okay men, we have to collect as much food as possible, two of you are going to look for water. Be on your guard, remember, we are on an unknown island. + +A short time later the crew assembles on the beach, bringing a couple of goats, baskets of vegetables and fruits and sheep and enough drinking water for several weeks. As you investigate the day's harvest you are approached by a crew member. 'I'm sorry to interrupt you sir, but one of my friends thought I should tell you about something. While foraging for food we came across a large cave. We believe that it is inhabited, since it has a door and makeshift pens for animals. I don't know if this is of any interest to you, but we just thought that you might want to know.' + +Hearing the words of the sailor you mutter to yourself: +> 'Unfortunately we don't have time. We have to set sail tomorrow.' +Too bad, but we have to set sail immediately, time is running out for Greece. The crew sigh softly from relieve, apparently they had a bad feeling about that cave. + + +You and Cyrus stand at the bow of the ship, looking at the distant horizon. As you stand there you can't but wonder who inhabited that far-away island. But on the other hand, despite your curiosity you too were a little frightened by the cave. + + +The events of the day have left you tired and you quickly fall asleep. In your dreams you find youself floating above the wine-coloured sea. Violent winds blow right through you and the restless sea sends his waves to the clouded skies above. + + +You notice a glowing figure standing next to you. As you watch closer you recognize the bright-eyed Athena. She turns her head to you and speaks the winged words: 'Great bard, you have chosen wisely not to venture into the cave on the far-away island, for a terrible monster inhabits it, Polyphemos, the son of Poseidon. But your journey is not over yet and many dangerous fill the roads ahead.' + + +She points down to two distant shapes in the dark night, lining a narrow passage between two great patches of land. + + +'On the left is the terrible Charybdis, a monster that spawns terrible currents. On the right is the dreadful Scyla, a beast with six heads that attacks all ships that passes it. Choose carefully, the way ahead is long and Greece counts on you.' + + + +> After these words, the wise Athena disappears... +The ship rattles and shakes as violent winds torture the sails and restless waves batter the hull. The obvious signs of looming disaster have not gone unnoticed by your crew. Even the most sturdiest sailors in your crew are praying softly to the immortal gods. + + +Distant lightning illuminates the dark sky. + + +Cyrus approaches you, his hairs are wet and windswept by the violent weather. A look of horror is on his face. 'My friend, what will this day bring us? What are the almighty gods planning for us today? The crew is restless, everyone can sense that something bad is going to happen.' + + +You answer him with a slightly trembling voice: 'We are on a perilous journey and dangers await us every day. Keep your faith in the all-seeing gods, for they too want us to succeed.' + + +Cyrus answer you with a slightly calmer voice: 'But sir, how can you know for sure that the gods...' + + +You interrupt his sentence as you see two shapeless forms materialising at the horizon. You quickly tell Cyrus to send the men back to their stations and prepare for anything. + + +The two monsters are coming into clear view. You can see a large cave on the left of the narrow strait, a large whirlpool is forming at it's entrance. On the right you can see a beast with six dog-like head, connected to it's large body with long necks. + + +You can practically feel the fear of your crew hanging in the air. The moral drops and cries of fear and despair fill the air. + + +'Zeus, protector of travellers, please keep us safe and...' + + +'Ares, lord of war, shield us mercenaries from danger...' + + +You make your way to the centre of the ship. Trying the best you can to make your voice audible above the violence of nature you shout: 'Brave men, tamers of the wild seas, many dangers have we braved together, why should we die now, on this day? Don't let fear conquer your heart. Let us sail forwards with determined souls.' + + +The looks of utter fear are beginning to vanish from the faces of your men. + + +'Now, with a brave heart, let us sail past the... +> Charybdis' +The skies howl and the seas roar as your ship sails towards the monstrous Charybdis. You feel the vessel shaking beneath your feet, as if it too is afraid of the coming confrontation. The islands that seemed so far away are now in front of you. To the far right of the narrow sea-strait you can see the dreadful Scylla. It's six heads almost look sad at the sight of it's lost prey. + + +In front of you you can see the cave of the Charybdis. It's pitch black entrance stands looming at the side of the sea. You see fear once again gripping the hearts of your crew, even Cyrus looks troubled. And to be honest, you yourself do not feel all too well either. + + +Suddenly a high-pitched shriek sounds from the cave, piercing the hearts and minds of everyone on board, breaking your last mental defences. + + +You can feel your heart beating in your chest as the shrieking continues. You start to shake as the shriek reaches a climax and then... + + +Everything is silent in what feels like an eternity. Neither the skies nor the seas make a sound and the shrieking from cave has silenced. You feel as if you and the ship are floating in mid-air. You see the crew moving around you in slow-motion, as if the Chronos, the god of time, himself has pulled your ship out of the normal stream of time. + + +Then, as if nature itself is seeking to compensate the slowed down time, the world seems moving at double time. The sounds of the world around you return even louder. The waves are becoming more and more violent. And then the world seems to spin around it's own axis. You manage to take a quick look at the seas beneath the ship before you, like the rest of the ship, fall down on the deck. But the problem is, the sea has gone. Where once waves were crashing onto the hull of the ship, there is now a black nothingness, a looming darkness that bodes your imminent doom. + + +Charybdis' shrieking seems much more triumphant now and you realise why. The ship is caught in a large whirlpool. A feeling of falling down accompanies your epiphany. The strange thing is, after all you've been through, you are not afraid of dying. You spend your last moments in the world of the living thinking of the people you've met, especially of your new friend Cyrus, the places you've seen and the choices you've made. But you think with regret of the people who will die because of you during Greece's civil war, which you couldn't prevent. + + +You enter Hades with a calm heart, accompanied by a golden light.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The ship rattles and shakes as violent winds torture the sails and restless waves batter the hull. The obvious signs of looming disaster have not gone unnoticed by your crew. Even the most sturdiest sailors in your crew are praying softly to the immortal gods. + + +Distant lightning illuminates the dark sky. + + +Cyrus approaches you, his hairs are wet and windswept by the violent weather. A look of horror is on his face. 'My friend, what will this day bring us? What are the almighty gods planning for us today? The crew is restless, everyone can sense that something bad is going to happen.' + + +You answer him with a slightly trembling voice: 'We are on a perilous journey and dangers await us every day. Keep your faith in the all-seeing gods, for they too want us to succeed.' + + +Cyrus answer you with a slightly calmer voice: 'But sir, how can you know for sure that the gods...' + + +You interrupt his sentence as you see two shapeless forms materialising at the horizon. You quickly tell Cyrus to send the men back to their stations and prepare for anything. + + +The two monsters are coming into clear view. You can see a large cave on the left of the narrow strait, a large whirlpool is forming at it's entrance. On the right you can see a beast with six dog-like head, connected to it's large body with long necks. + + +You can practically feel the fear of your crew hanging in the air. The moral drops and cries of fear and despair fill the air. + + +'Zeus, protector of travellers, please keep us safe and...' + + +'Ares, lord of war, shield us mercenaries from danger...' + + +You make your way to the centre of the ship. Trying the best you can to make your voice audible above the violence of nature you shout: 'Brave men, tamers of the wild seas, many dangers have we braved together, why should we die now, on this day? Don't let fear conquer your heart. Let us sail forwards with determined souls.' + + +The looks of utter fear are beginning to vanish from the faces of your men. + + +'Now, with a brave heart, let us sail past the... +> Scylla' +An eary silence accompanies your ship as you sail forwards towards the dreadful Scylla. Two beams of light pierce the dark skies above, illuminating both your ship and the monster you are about to face. During this moment of peace you gaze at the narrow strait in front of you. On your left you can see the cave of the monstrous Charybdis. A faint shrieking can be heard coming from the entrance, as if it's inhabitant is weeping at the sight of it's lost prey. On the right you can see Scylla. It's six dog-like heads are looking directly at you, full of anticipation and hunger. It's huge body sits quietly at the shore, awaiting your ship with a rumbling stomach. + + +Your moment of contemplation is swiftly cut short as the heavens above roar once more, an ominous sign for the coming encounter. The current which steers your ship towards the narrow strait is accelerating, as if the seas themselves can't stand the tension any longer and want to push you faster towards your destiny. + + +The crew members seem to hold their breath collectively as the ship is almost within reach of the Scylla. The white faces of your crew look like death has already struck your ship. + + +And then it strikes... + + +The six heads of the Scylla pounce on the deck with a ferocious fury. White foam drips from the muzzles of it's doglike heads. It's fierce growling muffles the cries of fear and despair from your crew members. Although he even does an even better job at this when each of it's heads grabs a sailor and swallows it whole. + + +After it's meal it returns to it's place at the edge of the sea-strait, looking rather content. + + +Your ship quickly sails onwards, with it's crew mourning their deceased comrades. + + + +> It's been a long day... +It has been two days since you're encounter with the dreadful Scylla. The morale of the crew is at an all time low and occasionally you can hear people grumble about how 'since they agreed to accompany that crazy bard, all sorts of crazy beasts and monsters have attacked us'. + + +The shining Eos has sunk beneath the horizon hours ago, yet still you can't drift off to sleep. You keep thinking about the rebellious morale of the crew and the heavy weight of your objective pressing on your shoulders. The soft, ritmical breathing of the people around you remind you of the fact that you also carry a responsibility for the lives of the crew. You sigh softly, despaired by the seemingly impossible task the immortal gods appointed you. + + +You watch at the star lighted waves, listening to the soft blowing of the wind. Then the wind starts picking up speed, forming white foam on the tips of the waves. + + +Suddenly you hear one of the boards of the deck creak softly right next to you. An old man carrying a large bag approaches you. + + +'Brave adventurer, I greet you. My name is Aeolos, lord of the winds. The gods are watching your journey from atop of Olympus. I have been sent by the gods to inform you that time has almost ran out for Greece. That is why I have come to give you this.' + + +He gives you the bag. + + +'To aid you in your journey I have locked up all of the winds in this bag. All but the western wind that will carry your ship to Sparta. But remember: do not, whatever happens, open the bag. I wish you good luck, noble bard.' + + +And with these words he disappears in a whirlwind, leaving you bewildered behind. You think you see one of the crew members, Ericles, shifting in his sleep. Yawning, you remember that the night is almost over and Nox, the goddess of the night, will be relieved by Eos in a couple of hours. +> Finally you fall asleep +'I told you, some old man gave him that bag last night, I saw him.' + + +'Yeah, right, and then the satyrs came and did a little dance.' + + +'Then wait and I'll show you. That bag contains something precious. Why else would he be holding that bag even in his sleep?' + + +'Don't you touch him, he is still our client and I, as you captain, command you to leave him alone.' + + +'Right Cyrus, you wouldn't even be captain if it wasn't for him.' + + +You slowly open your eyes and the sight before your eyes surprises you, to say the least. Cyrus is standing in front of an angry mob of crew members, with his arms extended defensively. You recognise the leader of the mob: Ericles. + + +'Hey look, our client is awake.' + + +You quickly jump to your feet, still guarding the bag Aeolos gave you. Facing the angry mob, you speak: 'Are you really going to believe a mischief-maker like Ericles? Yes, I was given a bag by the god of the winds, but it does not contain valuables. The gods have decided to help us, so Aeolos locked up the winds in this bag. Only the western wind, which will bring us to Sparta, he left unchecked.' + + +Ericles replies with his filled filled with contempt: 'Do you take us for fools, traveller? Do you think you can fool us with such a lame story? Give us that bag and we will continue your bloody odyssey. If you do not give it...', he shows you his dagger 'this dagger might just find it's way into your chest when you're asleep.' + + +You hear shouts coming from the angry mob: 'Yeah, tell him Ericles!' + + +You reply: 'I'm sorry, but I can't open this bag. You just have to believe me, bad things will happen if this bag is opened.' + + +This wasn't exactly what the crowd wanted to hear. They overrun you and Cyrus and grab the bag from your hands. You are in no position to oppose them when Ericles unties the cords that keep the winds locked inside. + + +A violent whirlwind sweeps across the deck, pouncing on the crew, the ship and you. You hear the ship cracking and the sails tearing. And then everything is a big blank. +> On the beach +You concentrate with all your might on that one thought: 'The fate of Greece depends on me, I cannot stop here.' + +The void around you seems to collapse, the darkness is lifting. A golden light shines through the crack in the endless void. The sounds of the mortal realm fill your ears. With a great feat of concentration you manage to disperse the nothingness for once and for all. + +... + +The bright sunlight pierces your eyes. You can hear the sounds of waves breaking on the shores nearby. As your vision finally focuses you take notice of your surroundings. You are lying on a white beach, nearby the violet sea. Large forests border at the sands. + +You guess this is an island, but how big is it exactly? Is it inhabited, and by who? The memories of your recent visit to the island of the cyclopes are still vividly present within your mind. You try to get up to explore your surroundings, but a sharp pain shoots through your limbs. + +Clenching your teeth you try once again to stand up. With a great feat of determination you manage to stand up. Shaking with suppressed pain and desperation you mange to take your first step on this new-found land. Then follows a second step, and a third. And then your vision turns red. The white sands of the beach come crashing towards you as exhaustion takes control of your limbs. +> You are awakened by distant voices +The high-pitched voice of a young woman awakens you from your unconscious state. Softly grumbling from the pain that's still very much present in your limbs you manage to turn your head around to see where you are. But before you manage to even see past the white sands of the beach you hear another high-pitched shriek. Immediately after this you feel a pain in your legs as the feet of a young woman hit them. + +A moment later you are joined on the ground by the face of a young woman, just barely of a marriageable age. Her hair is blond and her arms and skin are white as snow and she wears expensive clothing. You close your eyes as the mouth of this young woman once again produces a high-pitched shriek. Afterwards she seems to relax a little, a faint smile even appears on her face. + +'I am sorry, stranger, I hope I didn't startle you too much. I was just surprised to see a traveller on this island, you see we are far away from the rest of the civilised nations and not many people know of us. I was just going to get my ball which landed in the sea over there when I found you, although I wish it would have been a more painless encounter.' + +She gives you another faint smile. + +Smiling, you answer her: 'Well, it certainly is a sudden encounter, but I can't say it is an unpleasant one. But could you please tell me where I am and who you are and...' suddenly you realise that your friends and ship are not the only thing you lost in the ocean, you suddenly realise that you have no clothes on. As you cheeks get redder and redder you ask your new acquaintance: 'I am really ashamed to ask you this, but I suddenly realised that I lost my clothes. Do you perhaps have some spare clothes on you?' + +The girl laughs loudly and speaks to you: 'Stranger, you are certainly one of the strangest people I have ever met. On behalf of my people I welcome you to the island of the Phaeacians, my name is Nausicaä, the daughter of the brave and noble Alcinoös and princess of these people. And you are lucky, I came here with my servants to do the laundry of my brothers, I have some clothes for you to borrow while you are my guest. + +And with these words she stands up, helping you up as well, and takes you to a nearby cart filled with clothes. Her servants avert their gaze as you don some clothes. Now fully clothed you follow Nausicaä and her servants to the capital... +> The city of the sea-farers +As you make your way towards the city you tell the princess about your travels and your destination. She listens fascinated to your stories, only occasionally interrupting you with some small questions. But although you have not yet finished your story as you reach the city gates she stops you. 'I'm sorry, traveller, but I am afraid we have to part our ways here for now. As the princess of these people I have a reputation to keep. If people spot me with a stranger, a foreign man, they are going to gossip. Our island isn't big and gossips spread fast here. However, I have enjoyed your company so far and so I ask you to visit me and my parents in our palace. Every single citizen knows of it, the youngest child could point you the way. I also think that my father will be able to help you, we Phaeacians are a sea-faring people after all.' + +You answer the young princess: 'young mistress, princess of the Phaeacians, I thank you for you hospitality and I am looking forward to seeing you again.' + +The white-armed girl answers you: 'I am looking forward to seeing you again too, traveller. Before we part our ways I want to return this to you' she goves you your sharp bronze sword, 'one of my servants found this on the beach and she brought it to me. I believe this belongs to you.' + +After these words, Nausicaä enters the city with her servants, heading for her palace in which you will see her again soon. + +You decide to explore the city on your own for a few hours before you head to the king's palace. The city itself is not really spectacular for someone who is used to the beauty and splendour of Athens. The island itself has, in contrast to most major cities in Greece, not been inhabited for a long time, only a few generations of people have lived here. Most of the buildings are only one- or two-stories high and there are little ornaments and decorations in the street scape. The people however, are very friendly. Everyone is nice to you, even though not many foreigners are seen here. Even though the people are not exactly the richest in Greece everyone is pleased with the live they've got. + +When the sun has nearly sunk beneath the horizon you make your way to the palace. As you walk through a less crowded part of the city you suddenly hear someone calling from a dark alley. 'Please help me! By the gods could someone please help me!' + +Your heart is torn between two thoughts. This could very much be a deceitful trap, to rob you of your few possessions, or worse... Or someone really is in need of help. +> ''Maybe someone really is in need of help, I'll go and see.'' +You slowly make your way in the dark alley. You expect a thief or robber behind every barrel, every cart that stands in the dark shadows. Eventually you reach the source of the cries for help. A young woman is huddled in a corner, brandishing what looks like the kind of knife butchers use to cut meat. Two robbers are bent over the frightened woman like two vultures on the battlefield; circling over their mortally wounded pray untill his soul finally leaves his body. + +You try to sneak up on the two robbers, trying to reduce the distance between you and them, untill you can drive your sword into their dark hearts. However, the floor is littered with pebbles and shards of pottery. A crunching sound beneath your heels warns the robbers of the fate that is looming above them and they turn around, brandishing daggers in their hands. + +A look of terror passes their face as they realise that their new guest is not a helpless woman. One of them, the 'leader', charges you with his dagger while the other continues harrassing his victim. + +You grip the hilt of your sword tighter as the dagger of your opponent has almost reached your chest. +> Block his attack! +You raise the blade of your sword, trying to block the impact of the robber's dagger. However, it takes too much time to lift it. You are barely able to deflect your opponent's blow and the dagger's deadly blow misses your chest by an inch. + +Fear grips your heart for a brief moment as you realise that you could have been killed this very instant and within this moment your opponent strikes once again. +> Block! +You lift your sword once again. trying to block the deadly blow of your opponents dagger one more time. However, the sheer weight of your bronze sword, in contrast to the small, light dagger of your opponent, combined with your brief hestitation due to the fear gripping your heart prevent you from reacting quick enough. + +Blood erupts from your chest as the deadly bronze pierces your heart. A golden light appears as your lifeless body falls to the ground of the alley.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You raise the blade of your sword, trying to block the impact of the robber's dagger. However, it takes too much time to lift it. You are barely able to deflect your opponent's blow and the dagger's deadly blow misses your chest by an inch. + +Fear grips your heart for a brief moment as you realise that you could have been killed this very instant and within this moment your opponent strikes once again. +> Dodge! +Fear tightens the grip on your heart as the dagger of your opponent barely misses you head. You let out an involuntary sigh of relieve as you realise that you are not yet about to enter the realm of Hades. With all your strenght you kick the leg of your opponent. Surprised by this sudden move your assailant stands no chance against your blow, screaming with rage he falls to the ground. A quick blow with your sword silences him for good. + +As your turn to see how the woman is faring you are met with the other robber. He falls towards you with a knife sticking out of his back. His victim stands behind him with a triumphant smile. You look at her with surprise. She answers calmy: 'What? Two robbers might have been too much, one isn't.' + +You ask the woman for directions to the royal palace and after mutual words of thanks you continue your way. +> The royal palace +You have finally reached the magnificent royal palace of the Phaeacians. You instantly know why every single inhabitant of this city knows it. It is by far one of the largest buildings you have ever seen in you life, either in Athens or in any other Greek city. The outside is decorated with beautiful marble sculptures and richly decorated mosaics are laid on the ground. Small trees and different varieties of flowers separate the palace from the street. + + +You spot two guards in ornate armour standing next to the great wooden gates of the palace. Servants and citizens alike are passing through the entrance to the palace. You hide your sharp bronze sword beneath your clothes the best as you can, since you don't think the guards will let you enter the palace with a weapon. + + +You do your best mingling in with the citizens that enter the palace. Your breathing almost stops as you walk past the guards. You imagine them stopping you any moment now, slowly drawing their weapons as they close in on the citizen they do not recognise. You almost can feel the hand of the imaginary guard on your shoulder. + + +You slowly dare to exhale as you finally reach the courtyard of the palace. People of all ranks and positions mingle in here, as if there is no class difference at all, this is truly an unique sight! You make your way around the different groups, trying to find the throne room. You pass a group of statues depicting the brief history of the Phaeacians. They really are a remarkable people, the previous king, Nausitoös, led the Phaeacians to this island, founding everything you have seen today and more. You recognise one of the last statues as Nausicaä, the princess you met on the beach. + + +Next to these statues is the entrance to the throne room. The high ceiling is supported by several high pillars. Lavish fresco's decorate the walls. Nobles and courtiers are gathered around a roaring fire in the middle of the room. You spot Nausicaä sitting next to her father in the middle of the room. As she sees you she speaks to her father on his well-built throne: 'My noble father, look over there, beneath the well-made archway. This man is my guest. He is a traveller from Athens, many miles from here. The high waves and violent winds smashed his ship and brought him to our shores.' + + +Her father, the noble Alcinoös answer her: 'My dear daughter, any guest of yours is a guest of mine.' He turns to you, 'please, foreign traveller, come closer. You are our honoured guest today. My servants will make sure you will have a comfortable stay here. Please, join us at the dinner table when you are ready.' +> After you refresh yourself in your room, you head towards the dining hall... +You are sitting in the large dining hall next to king Alcinoös. The heavy wood table is covered with the most delicious foods and in the center lies a large, fat swine, fresh from the spit. After a servant fills your plate, a bard enters the hall. The king himself announces him. 'My dear friends and family, I am pleased that our dear bard Demodokos is present here this evening. After all, should we not hold all bards in high esteem. For they received their trade from the gods themselves, either from the god Apollo or the muses themselves.' You smile a little after hearing these words. + + +The shining bard tells with great skill about the fall of Troy and the sufferings of the godlike Odysseus. After about three hours he conludes his story: 'That was the tale of the shrewd Odysseus. Who traveled far and wide after he destroyed the sacred citadel of Troy. But although he suffered much misery in his heart, at sea, he completed his destiny and returned to his home and his faithful wife.' + + +Hearing the story about Odysseus, you can't but compare yourself to him. For you too suffer much, far from your home. You feel tears well up behind your eyes. The noble king notices your obvious sadness and speaks with kind words: 'Great Demodokos, with your silver voice, you told a great story, but I think it was a little too much for our honoured guest. This is a feast in his honour, we should laugh, not cry. But tell us, noble traveller, who you are and where you come from.' + + +The gathered people listen fascinated to every single of your words as you tell about you journey thus far. You tell them everything: your encounter with the gods, the harpies in Egypt, the Oracle, the Scyla and Charibdis, the mutiny on your ship and eventually your adventures in the city. + + +Alcinoös is visibly touched by your story and with his awe-filled voice he speaks to you: 'Great bard from Athens, valiant traveller, I, and the rest of my court, have listened to your story with great astonishment. I think I speak for all of the Phaeacians when I say that we will gladly bring you to Sparta with one of our swift ships.' + + +You answer him with great gratitude: 'Noble king, I thank you for this offer and I gladly accept it. You must have exquisite sailors, if they are able to navigate from here to Sparta.' + + +The king of the Phaeacians answers: 'I thank you for the compliment, traveller, but it is not completely true. You see, our ships are special. Tell them where you want to go and they will bring you there, without the need for guidance. Our swift ships will bring you in three days to Sparta.'<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You slowly make your way in the dark alley. You expect a thief or robber behind every barrel, every cart that stands in the dark shadows. Eventually you reach the source of the cries for help. A young woman is huddled in a corner, brandishing what looks like the kind of knife butchers use to cut meat. Two robbers are bent over the frightened woman like two vultures on the battlefield; circling over their mortally wounded pray untill his soul finally leaves his body. + +You try to sneak up on the two robbers, trying to reduce the distance between you and them, untill you can drive your sword into their dark hearts. However, the floor is littered with pebbles and shards of pottery. A crunching sound beneath your heels warns the robbers of the fate that is looming above them and they turn around, brandishing daggers in their hands. + +A look of terror passes their face as they realise that their new guest is not a helpless woman. One of them, the 'leader', charges you with his dagger while the other continues harrassing his victim. + +You grip the hilt of your sword tighter as the dagger of your opponent has almost reached your chest. +> Dodge! +You let out a sigh of relieve as the sharp bronze dagger of your opponent misses your head by an inch. After you ducked to dodge his attack he could not react fast enough to redirect his attack. You are now in the perfect position to strike. + +You leave your lifeless opponent behind you with a large stab wound in his chest. As your turn to see how the woman is faring you are met with the other robber. He falls towards you with a knife sticking out of his back. His victim stands behind him with a triumphant smile. You look at her with surprise. She answers calmy: 'What? Two robbers might have been too much, one isn't.' + +You ask the woman for directions to the royal palace and after mutual words of thanks you continue your way.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you make your way towards the city you tell the princess about your travels and your destination. She listens fascinated to your stories, only occasionally interrupting you with some small questions. But although you have not yet finished your story as you reach the city gates she stops you. 'I'm sorry, traveller, but I am afraid we have to part our ways here for now. As the princess of these people I have a reputation to keep. If people spot me with a stranger, a foreign man, they are going to gossip. Our island isn't big and gossips spread fast here. However, I have enjoyed your company so far and so I ask you to visit me and my parents in our palace. Every single citizen knows of it, the youngest child could point you the way. I also think that my father will be able to help you, we Phaeacians are a sea-faring people after all.' + +You answer the young princess: 'young mistress, princess of the Phaeacians, I thank you for you hospitality and I am looking forward to seeing you again.' + +The white-armed girl answers you: 'I am looking forward to seeing you again too, traveller. Before we part our ways I want to return this to you' she goves you your sharp bronze sword, 'one of my servants found this on the beach and she brought it to me. I believe this belongs to you.' + +After these words, Nausicaä enters the city with her servants, heading for her palace in which you will see her again soon. + +You decide to explore the city on your own for a few hours before you head to the king's palace. The city itself is not really spectacular for someone who is used to the beauty and splendour of Athens. The island itself has, in contrast to most major cities in Greece, not been inhabited for a long time, only a few generations of people have lived here. Most of the buildings are only one- or two-stories high and there are little ornaments and decorations in the street scape. The people however, are very friendly. Everyone is nice to you, even though not many foreigners are seen here. Even though the people are not exactly the richest in Greece everyone is pleased with the live they've got. + +When the sun has nearly sunk beneath the horizon you make your way to the palace. As you walk through a less crowded part of the city you suddenly hear someone calling from a dark alley. 'Please help me! By the gods could someone please help me!' + +Your heart is torn between two thoughts. This could very much be a deceitful trap, to rob you of your few possessions, or worse... Or someone really is in need of help. +> ''It probably is some ordinary robber. And besides, I really need to go to the palace.'' +You quickly walk past the alley, it's probably safer that way and besides, you've got somewhere to go to. + + Suddenly you hear something behind you. + +Some pebbles on the street are swept aside by the feet of some pedestrian. + +The rustling of the clothes of a person near you. + +The sound of a bronze object being pulled from it's hiding place. + +You quickly duck aside as if the lightning bolt of Zeus himself has struck you. The bronze dagger of the unknown assailant harmlessly flies through the space you just left. You draw your own sword within a split-second, ready to attack any mugger who tries to kill you again. + +For the first time you see your attacker: it's a small man, just able to reach you shoulders with the top of your head, were it not for the patchy black beard that protrudes from beneath his dark hood you could have mistaken him for a child. You see his bronze dagger shaking in his hand and you manage to catch a glimpse of his nervous face beneath his hood. He had not expected that you would dodge his blow and not at all that you would draw a weapon of your own. + +Almost unnoticeable he starts to back away, as if he prepares to flee at the first opportunity. +> ''He's not going to get away so easily after attacking me, he will pay.'' +Your mind is clouded with rage as you chase the cowardly mugger. Street after street you run after him, dodging people and animals alike. You notice that this journey has done wonders for your stamina, you are able to keep up with the coward with relative ease, while he is heavily panting. + +After he dashes in yet another alley he stops, realising that he cannot outrun you. As you enter the alley he has already drawn his deadly bronze dagger, inviting you to come near. You draw your sword in response... +> A battle ensues... +Although the robber lacks real skill he makes up for it with his utter fear of death. He lunges at you at the first opportunity, resulting in a shallow wound on your upper arm. You quickly recover and prepare your attack... +> Attack him quickly, while he is not prepared +You quickly jump to your opponent with your sword drawn. The coward is not at all prepared for your attack, as you anticipated, however, he still manages to stab you in your stomach as a reflex. A sharp pain erupts in your belly and you fall to the ground, clutching your stomach with both of your hands. + +The robber immediately runs away, leaving you behind in the dark alley. The dirt ground turns red with your blood as your life force slowly flows out of your body. The pain does not fade away for some very long hours though. When the rose-fingered dawn is just about to dispel the black veil of night, death finally comes to you, not as a burden, but as a relieve. Your last moments on this earth are painless, filled with a golden light.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Although the robber lacks real skill he makes up for it with his utter fear of death. He lunges at you at the first opportunity, resulting in a shallow wound on your upper arm. You quickly recover and prepare your attack... +> Adopt a careful stance, you never know what might happen +You slowly approach the robber, you never know how a terrified opponent may react. Your caution is rewarded: just when you are within arms reach of the robber he tries to stab you as if by a reflex. However, you quickly block his attack with the flat end of your blade and subsequently counter it with your own... + + +Your cowardly opponent falls to his knees, crying. 'Please stranger, do not kill me. I promise you I'll better my ways. I swear by the immortal gods, who own the wide skies. Please, I beg you, do not kill me. I'll do everything you say.' +> Let him live. +'Stand up, sniveling mugger! I'll let you live this time, but if you do not better your ways, Hades will still claim your soul. Remember, you've sworn it by the immortal gods. Now, tell me where I can find the royal palace...'<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You slowly approach the robber, you never know how a terrified opponent may react. Your caution is rewarded: just when you are within arms reach of the robber he tries to stab you as if by a reflex. However, you quickly block his attack with the flat end of your blade and subsequently counter it with your own... + + +Your cowardly opponent falls to his knees, crying. 'Please stranger, do not kill me. I promise you I'll better my ways. I swear by the immortal gods, who own the wide skies. Please, I beg you, do not kill me. I'll do everything you say.' +> Kill him. +The cowardly mugger falls to the ground with several holes in his chest. You wipe the blood of your sharp bronze sword and carry on towards the royal palace... +> Lost in the city +'It's really easy to find, the smallest child could point you the way. The smallest child could point you the way, where am I going to find a small child? This city is like a maze!' + + +You have been walking through the empty streets for an hour and still have not found the palace. All these streets look alike. You are walking through streets of locked doors and closed shutters. Muffled voices can be heard from the nearby houses. After walking through yet another street you have reached a crossroads. Trying you luck, you decide to... + + + + + + +(The streets of the Phaeacian city are like a maze, it's even like they're designed to confuse strangers. For the traveler who is not able to continue his journey, the gods have left a map below.) + + + + +A golden light reveals the follow letters written on the streets: LRAAA, you'd better remember them. +> Turn left... +You find yourself in yet another street. This time you have two options to choose from: +> Turn right +You have reached yet another crossroads, you have three choices this time: +> Go straight ahead +Yet another crossroads cross your path. You have three options: + + + +> Turn left +You find yourself in a streets with only two options to choose from:<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have reached yet another crossroads, you have three choices this time: +> Turn left +You have two directions to choose from:<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have reached yet another crossroads, you have three choices this time: +> Turn right +You have reached another crossroads. What direction will you turn to?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find yourself in yet another street. This time you have two options to choose from: +> Go straight ahead +You are in a short street, there is only one option to go to:<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>'It's really easy to find, the smallest child could point you the way. The smallest child could point you the way, where am I going to find a small child? This city is like a maze!' + + +You have been walking through the empty streets for an hour and still have not found the palace. All these streets look alike. You are walking through streets of locked doors and closed shutters. Muffled voices can be heard from the nearby houses. After walking through yet another street you have reached a crossroads. Trying you luck, you decide to... + + + + + + +(The streets of the Phaeacian city are like a maze, it's even like they're designed to confuse strangers. For the traveler who is not able to continue his journey, the gods have left a map below.) + + + + +A golden light reveals the follow letters written on the streets: LRAAA, you'd better remember them. +> Turn right... +You reach a street with only two directions to go to:<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Ghostly images of dead soldiers appear before you, their swords drawn. + +You plunge you sword into their chests, but to your horror you notice that is of no use against the dead. Only briefly halted by your attack, the ghostly soldiers continue their attack. As you block their icy swords you feel like your energy is being drained. + +Weakend by this sudden loss you let your guard down and one of the soldiers manages to slash you across your chest. Luckily for you it is only a shallow cut and you are able to carry on your fight. Ignoring the stinging pain you... +> Quickly retreat +Overwhelmed by the sheer number of the souls and the attacks of the dead soldiers you retreat. But with every step you take the souls close in on you. Absolutely terrified you call out to Cyrus, but you get no response. + +Thousands of souls envelop you as you make one final attempt to leave this place of the dead. The cold chill of death creeps through your body as the souls slowly take you with them to the realm of Hades. In your last moments in the realm of the living you can only see darkness. In the last split second before you enter the underworld a golden light fills your vision. Where did this journey go wrong?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You open your eyes and notice the whole crew working very hard. Everyone seems to be in a tense mood. After you stand up from your sleeping mat you grab one of the crew members by his wrist. + + +'Tell me, what is happening? Why is everyone so tense?' + + +'Well, ehm, sir, I really have to get back to my post, or captain Cyrus will flay me alive.' He is about to leave, but you grip his wrist tighter. + + +'Look, Cyrus won't hurt you, but I will if I don't get an answer soon.' + + +'O...okay sir. Well, a strange storm has suddenly turned up. Our sails are almost ripping and the current is too strong for our rowers to combat. We are at the mercy of the swift winds. However, we are trying our best to fight against these forces of nature.' The crew member now seems frightened. You let go of his wrist and he immediately walks away. + + +'Fools!' you mutter to yourself. 'Everyone listen to me!' you shout across the deck, this seems to catch the attention of the crew. 'Stop fighting against the wind. The gods have blessed us with these fair winds, for they will swiftly take us to our destination. The first person who will defy these orders will be punished by the captain himself.' The crew immediately leave their posts and look around, wondering what they have to do. + + +You suddenly hear laughing behind you and notice Cyrus walking towards you. 'Traveler, I consider you my good friend, but you are not captain of my ship and my crew. I don't mind you giving advice to my crew or helping them with their work, but please, don't order them around. My authority will be undermined and I might have to copy some behavior from the former captain.' He winks at the last sentence. 'Alright you scum, you heard our guest. Everyone who tries to steer our ship or to hinder it in any way will be thrown will immediately be released from service. And there is no place on this ship for traitors.' + + +He turns to you once again. 'They are good people, but they still are mercenaries. Turn your back on them and you'll end up with a knife in your back. But why would we have this gloomy mood? Come on, let us... What the... What did I just say you ignorant nitwit?' You look around, trying to find the person Cyrus is shouting at. Then you spot a young crew member, who may just has reached adulthood, holding a oar. Cyrus grabs the oar from his hands. 'Let this be an example for everyone who defies my orders!' He lift the oar and lets it come come down on the back of the young man, repeating this motion over and over again. + + +Tears begin to well up in the eyes of the poor boy. 'Please sir, I was just frightened. I swear I'll never do it again.' Cyrus doesn't seem to take any notice of the boy and keeps hitting him with the oar. While you watch this process you shout at Cyrus: +> 'Very good Cyrus, keep hitting him, set a good example for the crew.' +Cyrus keeps hitting the boy, holding the oar high above his head, encouraged by your shouts. + + +You are too absorbed in the 'disciplinary punishment' of the young boy to notice the growing resentment of the crew members. Behind your back, the disgruntled crew members gather. When you finally notice what is going on the first fist hits you in your stomach. You bend over as the air is forced from your lungs. You collapse as another fist hits you on your head. + + +As you wake up a few moments later you notice that you and Cyrus are tied together with your wrists. A big crew members towers over you. 'Wake up, wake up sleepy. It's time to play. Who is up for a little bit of swimming.' + + +The next moments pass by in a flash. The crew lifts you up and before you realise what exactly is going on you find yourself sinking beneath the waves. + + +You jerk at the ropes that are immobilizing your hands, trying to loosen them. But it is of no use. + + +Your sight blackens as the last air flows from you lungs. The body of Cyrus grows limb as he too struggles for oxygen. The last thing you see is the last of your breath, leaving your body in a string of bubbles. The last seconds before your soul travels to the realm of Hades are filled with torment as you struggle against the cold embrace of the ocean surrounding you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>'You dare disobey the priestess of Zeus. GUARDS! Arrest these men, throw them into the deepest dungeons!' + + +Immediately after she shouts this, guards appear from all sides. + + +'Damn it!' Cyrus curses 'how are we supposed to leave this place, alive, with all these guards here? Oh well, I say we'll fight a way out. What do you think, traveler?' + + +'I say fight them too. We need to find another way to prevent the Greek civil war and we won't be able to do that from a hot, Egyptian dungeon.' + + +Having said this you draw your sword, Cyrus does the same. About ten guards surround you, encouraged by the screaming priestess. However, they seem hesitant to fight against two armed opponents, the cowards. + + +A group of four guards finally dare to attack you. They approach with drawn swords in their right hands and shields in their left. The rest of the guards watch as their colleagues attack you. + + +However, you are fully prepared for an attack and so you: +> Dodge their attack +You quickly fall to the ground and feel their swords pass over you. + + +You hear one of the guards curse as his arm is cut off by Cyrus' sword, however he quickly falls silent as another swing by Cyrus' sword sends his soul to the underworld. + + +As the remaining three opponents rush to their killed comrade you dispatch another one. + + +However, the idle guards can't just watch on as two of their comrades have been killed. They quickly rush to the aid of their two remaining colleagues. + + +Now it's eight versus two. + + +The remaining guards manage to gather in a kind of formation, linking their shields together to form a shield wall. Well, this is going to be fun. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wake up the next day feeling terrible. Your eyes hurt as the bright rays from the Egyptian sun pierce your sleep-deprived eyes. You let out a soft groan as you stand up and you realise that Cyrus already stands next to your sleeping mat. + + +'Good morning sir. Are you feeling all right today?' + + +'Apart from the incredible fatigue and the scorching heat, I'm alright. Is it possible for me to visit the oracle today?' + + +'I took the liberty to arranging an appointment for you. The oracle is expecting you in about an hour. And don't worry: we won't ask for extra money for this service.' + + +About an hour later you are standing in front of the shrine of the priestess of Zeus. The shrine is a large imposing circular structure made out of gleaming white marble. As you admire the building, the huge bronze doors open to reveal the priestess of Zeus. She wears a long white robe and a bronze necklace around her neck and she is of great beauty. She looks like one of the immortal gods, who own the great sky, herself. She doesn't look very happy, however. You slowly approach her to greet her and she speaks to you: + + +'YOU! You are not welcome here stranger. The gods are angry with you, leave this place and don't return.' + + +'I beg you, mistress, please give me...' + + +'I told you to get lost! Go away right now or you will suffer the consequences!' +> 'Very well, I will leave.' +As you turn to walk away Cyrus approaches you. 'For the sake of the immortal gods, what are you doing?' + +'I'm going away, can't you see that?' you reply 'it is no use arguing with the oracle, the gods are displeased with me and I don't want to agitate them any more.' + +'But sir, I thought you were on some kind of important mission.' + +You sigh. 'Yeah, well maybe I'm not the right person for this job. Why did I agree to this foolish journey in the first place? Because of me Greece will fall.' + +'Well sir, if you don't mind me for speaking... Although I don't know what you're talking about I might know a solution to your problem. Many years ago I heard a tale about a place where the living can speak to the dead, a place where the world of the living and the realm of Hades collide. Oh well, just forget about it, it's just a foolish tale. Please forgive me for wasting your time. I'll prepare for the journey home, I'll be expecting you in...' + +'Hold a minute. What did you just say. About a place where I could speak with the dead.' + +'Sir, it's just a myth...' + +'Trust me, I have seen some very strong evidence that makes them sound a lot more credible then you would think.' + +'Very well then. At the edge of the world there stands a rock, at the convergence of two great streams. There the world of the living and the realm of Hades cross-over. In order to speak to the deceased you will have to sacrifice to the souls of dead at that place. But, even if it is possible, how are they going to help you on your journey?' + +'I have heard long ago about a great seer, Teiresias is his name. If I am able to speak to him, then he might be able to help me. It is a slim chance but it is the best I've got. Prepare the ship, we will depart the first thing in the morning.'<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are woken the next day by a crew member. 'Sir, I am happy to report you that we are back at the main river. After encountering some locals we have learned that we are mere hours away from the city of Thebes.' + + +About three hours later you finally dock in the port of Thebes. The sun is at his highest peak and the heat is unbearable. 'How is it possible that people manage to live here?', you ask Cyrus, the new mercenary captain. 'I have no idea, but I'll be glad when we've returned to Greece.' + + +While the crew unloads the ship you take a walk through the port of Thebes. Out of precaution you take your sword with you. + + +The far end of the docks are crowded with merchants selling strange and wondrous wares. Ivory from the south, silk from the east. tame crocodiles from the nearby Nile, even Greek pottery is for sale here. You gaze with wonder at all of the stalls when you are suddenly approached by a beggar. 'Please sir, do you have a little money for a poor beggar? ' + + + +> 'Of course, I always have money to spare for those in need.' +The beggar looks sincerely gratefully at you. 'Thank you, great and noble traveler. The gods will surely reward you for your kindness and generosity. If only more people were like you sir. I'll always be grateful.' + + +And with these last words the beggar walks away. You turn around to ask him who he is but to your astonishment you notice that the beggar has disappeared. After you walk around Thebes for a couple of hours you return to the ship, feeling good about yourself for helping the lesser fortunate. + + +After a light dinner you return to your sleeping mat and you quickly fall asleep. You feel a soothing sense of weightlessness envelop you as you drift through the world of your dreams. The world is flooded with golden light and as you slowly drift through the light you never want to leave this state again. Then you see figures emerging from the light. You recognize the wise and owl-eyed Athena. + + +'Greetings bard, great teller of tales. You have passed the trial the gods set out for you. I am glad that you have proven yourself worthy for this journey. But you are not safe yet, many perils will await you as Greece is about to fall. You are on the right way, but you still can't afford any mistakes. Don't mock the immortal gods!' + + + + + +> You slowly wake up... +You wake up the next day after a peaceful nights sleep. + + +As you slowly open your eyes, blinking from the bright morning sun, you notice Cyrus standing next to your sleeping mat. 'Good morning sir, I hope that you slept well. I have taken the liberty to arrange a meeting with the Oracle for you today. And don't worry, we won't charge you extra money for this service.' He adds with a wink. + + +About an hour later you are standing in front of the shrine of the priestess of Zeus. The shrine is a large imposing circular structure made out of gleaming white marble. As you admire the building, the huge bronze doors open to reveal the priestess of Zeus. She wears a long white robe and a bronze necklace around her neck and she is of great beauty. She looks like one of the immortal gods, who own the great sky, herself. She approaches you very solemnly, holding an incense burner while muttering prayers to the cloud gatherer Zeus. + + +You hesitate to address her, afraid to interrupt a sacred ceremony. So you just keep standing on your spot, watching the priestess and waiting until she is finished. When the priestess has almost reached you notice a boy behind her, holding a honey cake. The priestess stops, but the boy approached you with the cake, offering it to you. As he leaves he says just one word: 'eat'. + + +After you finish the sweet cake a girl approaches you with a bowl filled with water. She holds the bowl in front of you and says just one word: 'wash'. + + +After having washed your hands the priestess of the almighty Zeus finally approaches you. She speaks with a kind voice, but you can hear she is used to speak with powerful men and you detect some hints of conceit. 'Welcome, traveller. The gods have revealed to me in an oracle that you would come to me. That is why you, a commoner are given this last-minute divination. You have powerful friends among the gods, I can tell you that. Now, listen closely to what the gods have chosen to reveal to you through me: + + +'You have started a journey with dangers above your imagination. However, it is your fate to succeed. Stay true to your heart and refrain from angering the gods and you will reach your destination. In the lands of the Spartans there is a great palace. Is's inhabitant, the great king Agatos, has been betrayed by his courtiers. Now, the flame of war has ignited the hearts of the Spartans, the flame that will engulf the whole of Greece if left unchecked.' + + +This is what the gods revealed to me. I understand what a terrible burden the gods have placed on your shoulders and I wish I could relieve some of it. My servants will serve you a banquet before you leave, I wish you good luck.' + + +With these words she retreats into the temple. + + + +> After the meal you stock up on supplies and set sail towards Sparta... +Apart from some near-collisions with crocodiles and other inhabitants of the vibrant Nile, your trip back across is rather uneventful. Fair winds are guiding you towards Sparta and the radiant sun is spreading it's warm veil across the deck of your hired vessel. With such fair winds blowing in your sail, the oars have been stowed away and the crew is relaxing on deck. you find yourself gazing at the horizon, wishing that all days could be like this one. But then you remember your daunting task, and dark storm clouds gather in your mind. + + +Cyrus notices your worried face and approaches you. 'My dear friend, what could possibly be bothering you on such a beautiful day? Like my dear mother always used to say: 'Life's to short to waste a sunny day. Save your worries for when it rains.' She also had some other sayings, but those are not really appropriate in, well actually all sorts of company.' + + +Your mood instantly brightens, you even manage to produce a smile. Following Cyrus' advice you just fit back and enjoy the voyage. + + +... + + +As the starry night drives away the shining day, you and the crew go to sleep. Only a few crew members stay on deck to act as sentries. the worries that clouded your mind have not returned. You twist and turn in your sleep as a sense of foreboding doom fills your dreams. You see flashes of images: a beautiful mansion on top of white cliffs, dozens of swines approach you, a bedchamber with a magnificently decorated bed. Then a golden figure approaches and pushes away all other images: Athena, the owl-eyed protector of heroes. 'Brave traveller, noble bard, you're journey has only just begun. Sparta is still far away, but tomorrow you will reach an island, the island of the goddess Circe, the daughter of Helios, the sun-god. You will have to be on your guard, for she is a powerful witch, expect the unexpected and don't lose your objective out of sight: saving Greece from the flames of war. I wish you good luck.' + + +With these words she leaves your dreams. +> You wake up the next morning +The dawning sun is obscured by grey clouds as you stand uo from your sleeping mat. The sea which was a bright blue colour yesterday has now turned to a drab grey. A thick mist obscures your view and you can see the anxiety on the face of the ship's navigator. + + +'I'm sorry sir, but a thick mist has set in during the night. I cannot guarantee that we are still on the right course. And given the urgency of your 'quest' I am sure you would not have liked it if we suspended our voyage.' + + +'But I'd rather had...' + + +'Yes, I'm sure you had wished the mist wouldn't have set in, but we can't change the past, can we?' + + +'No, but that's not what...' + + +'I thought so, so we'll just sea where the currents take us. Hahaha, sea, get it?' + + +And with those wise words he walks away, laughing maniacally to himself. + + +Cyrus approaches you with a smirk on his face. 'So you've had a nice chat with our navigator huh. Well, he is a kind of a nutjob, but you won't find a better one in the whole of Greece.' He leaves again, chuckling. + + +As hours pass, the fog thickens even more and eventually it is impossible to see more than 4 feet ahead of you. Even worse, the ship is mysteriously losing speed. The navigator is walking around like a confused chicken, walking in circles while making strange noises to himself. + + +Suddenly you hear surprised chatter among the crew. Several crew members are pointing at something in the fog. You gaze at the fog but you can't see a thing. But then, just as you are about to turn away you see it: blinking lights pierce through the fog. As if an invisible hand wipes away the fog, it opens up, revealing a green island. What immediately draws your attention is a large house on a hill, gleaming as if made of solid gold. + + +After a quick meeting with the crew you decide that, since your ship now has lost all speed, you will all go ashore in dinghies. Of course your curiosity also played a part in this decision. + + + + + +> Continue... +You feel the familiar feeling of sands shifting beneath your feet as you step out of the dinghy. Beautiful palm trees dot the beach, providing shade from the blissful heat of the sun. Playful fish approach you and scurry away, following the coming and going of the sea. The deep blue waves of the sea shape the sand in an elaborate pattern, both beautiful and enigmatic at the same time, much like the rest of the island. You can see a large mansion on top of a low hill about 300 feet inland, surrounded by large gardens. Some distance from the mansion you see some piggeries.As you and your companions walk along the beach you can't help but wonder who lives in such a beautiful place, surely such a place would be fit for one of the inhabitants of the wide skies. + + + The soft sands give way to marble steps, which form a path that leads to the luxurious mansion. Without a single doubt in your mind you climb the steps, determined to meet the inhabitant of such a wondrous place. As you near the mansion you notice that fatigue does not even begun to grip your limbs, nor those of your companions, on the contrary, you feel a blissful sense of joy overcome you as you near the mysterious dwelling. You look at the mansion in more detail. The walls are made of gleaming white marble, decorated with gold and silver fresco's depicting a rural scene: a shepherdess herding groups of animals, like pigs but lions and wolves too. The grand oaken doors are decorated with gold leaf and the silver knockers are shaped like hourglasses. + + +You are about to grab one of the knockers when the door opens on it's own accord, revealing a beautiful woman. Her beautiful white robe is fastened around her waist with a golden girdle. She wears her golden hair in a long plaited braid and on top of her head she wears a golden circlet. Her face is unfathomable, but her skin is white as milk. She speaks to you and your companions in a voice as sweet as honey: 'Excuse me, noble visitors, but I was not expecting you. May I ask you who you are and why you have come here?' + + +You answer her: 'noble lady, me and my companions have been traveling far and wide. But the gods have not favored us. The winds, which are sometimes the sailors best friends, but sometimes their enemies, have been absent for a long time and we have not been able to reach our destination. Our supplies have run out and then, like a sign of the gods, we saw your island on the horizon.' + + +'I see... Of course I will give you enough supplies to continue your journey, the gods have not given me riches only to keep them to myself, have they? But to be honest: you look like you're starving. Please, come inside and join me for diner. I was just about to...' + + +Suddenly a pig bumps into her. It then turns to you, shaking it's head violently. Astonished by this sight you fail to produce any comprehensible words. The mysterious woman, straitening her dress, speaks to you again:' Please forgive me, but one of my pigs must have escaped it's pen. Would you like him for dinner tonight? As I was saying, I would love to share my food with you, please do join me at my table. Oh, did I almost forget to introduce myself: my name is Circe.' + + + + + +> 'My lady, I would like to thank you for your hospitality, we would gladly join you at your table.' +The dining hall is breathtakingly beautiful. The tables are placed in a circle in the middle of the room, in the middle of the circle roars a great fire that fills the hall with a warm glow. The food is exquisite, food and delicacies from all over the world are represented: dates from the east, flamingo from Aegyptos, olives from Syracuse and more seafood than you can name, all served in Carthaginian glassware and Roman pottery More fresco's of pastoral scenes decorated the otherwise bare walls. The marble columns that support the roof are chiseled in a way that makes them look like they are revolving around their own axis, grape branches have winded themselves around their tops. A giant loom is tucked away in a corner. + + +Circe speaks amiably to your crew men, speaking to each of them with civility, listening attentively to their every word en laugh at every joke. It seems your men have a great time. Yet you are not as talkative as you usually are, and the delicious food just barely registers in your mouth. Seeing such kindness and joy you realize just how far you are away from your family and friends in Athens. With a sigh you remember every single face and every single smile. And now you are here, who knows how far away from your home, traveling on some journey given to you by either the gods of figments of your delusional mind, as for that you still aren't certain. Even more depressing is the fact that there is a very real possibility that you will never see your beloved ones again. + + +You hardly notice the soft hand Circe puts on your shoulder. 'My dear guest, I can see that something is bothering you. Is there any way I can help you?' + + +You try to turn your face away from hers. 'My graceful hostess, I am sorry. Here, in your warm house I realize how much I miss my beloved ones. Far away I have traveled from them and I scarcely said goodbye to them. And now, I don't know, I am just a little bit depressed.' + + +She answers you with a kind smile, looking absent, as if gazing at something far away in the distance: 'My dear guest I know how you feel. My family is far away from here as well and the man who I loved most in the whole world has left me long ago. You kind of remind me of him. He too was a traveler, far away from his home after he got lost at sea. The god Poseidon cursed him and he and his men arrived at my island. They stayed for a year, but then they left again, taking my heart with them.' she shakes her head as if to bring herself back into the present, 'but now is not the time for sad reminiscence, let us drink and be merry and forget our troubles for a while. Here, let me refill your cup with this exquisite wine, it's almost magical.' + + +She pours a deep red wine into your cup. Trying to forget your sad thoughts you taste it. It is the sweetest, most delicious drink you have ever tasted. Like the honey that is made painstakingly by the smallest bees and is the sweetest thing known in the Greek world, and when one eats it one cannot but forget his troubles for a brief while. Even that cannot match the wine you are tasting right now. You quickly drain the cup. + + +The wine leaves the faint taste of herbs in your mouth and a drowsy feeling in your head. Your eyelids are becoming increasingly heavy and you feel your head drop. As you look across the table you can see the same thing happening to your men. As you look to her to ask for an explanation you see her grabbing a wand from a dresser. She can see your question in your eyes and she answers you with her sweet voice: 'But you won't leave me. You will stay here, with me, until the end of times, just like all other travelers that have come here since my love left me. But to make sure you won't escape I have to may a few arrangements.' + + +She gracefully walks towards you. You try to back away, but your limbs won't listen to the signals from your brains. She lifts her wand menacingly and you close your eyes. The pain you are expecting stays away and you only feel the gentle tap of Circe's wand upon your head. As you open your eyes with relieve you notice that something is wrong. You see your hands turn into hoofs before your eyes and a snout sprouts where your nose used to be. You fall of your chair, on all four of your legs. You are only able to make grunting sounds as you try to shout to your men. + + +The last thing you are able to register with your human mind are the kind words of Circe: 'Come, come little piglet. We'll have a great time together, until time itself seizes to exist.'<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You feel the familiar feeling of sands shifting beneath your feet as you step out of the dinghy. Beautiful palm trees dot the beach, providing shade from the blissful heat of the sun. Playful fish approach you and scurry away, following the coming and going of the sea. The deep blue waves of the sea shape the sand in an elaborate pattern, both beautiful and enigmatic at the same time, much like the rest of the island. You can see a large mansion on top of a low hill about 300 feet inland, surrounded by large gardens. Some distance from the mansion you see some piggeries.As you and your companions walk along the beach you can't help but wonder who lives in such a beautiful place, surely such a place would be fit for one of the inhabitants of the wide skies. + + + The soft sands give way to marble steps, which form a path that leads to the luxurious mansion. Without a single doubt in your mind you climb the steps, determined to meet the inhabitant of such a wondrous place. As you near the mansion you notice that fatigue does not even begun to grip your limbs, nor those of your companions, on the contrary, you feel a blissful sense of joy overcome you as you near the mysterious dwelling. You look at the mansion in more detail. The walls are made of gleaming white marble, decorated with gold and silver fresco's depicting a rural scene: a shepherdess herding groups of animals, like pigs but lions and wolves too. The grand oaken doors are decorated with gold leaf and the silver knockers are shaped like hourglasses. + + +You are about to grab one of the knockers when the door opens on it's own accord, revealing a beautiful woman. Her beautiful white robe is fastened around her waist with a golden girdle. She wears her golden hair in a long plaited braid and on top of her head she wears a golden circlet. Her face is unfathomable, but her skin is white as milk. She speaks to you and your companions in a voice as sweet as honey: 'Excuse me, noble visitors, but I was not expecting you. May I ask you who you are and why you have come here?' + + +You answer her: 'noble lady, me and my companions have been traveling far and wide. But the gods have not favored us. The winds, which are sometimes the sailors best friends, but sometimes their enemies, have been absent for a long time and we have not been able to reach our destination. Our supplies have run out and then, like a sign of the gods, we saw your island on the horizon.' + + +'I see... Of course I will give you enough supplies to continue your journey, the gods have not given me riches only to keep them to myself, have they? But to be honest: you look like you're starving. Please, come inside and join me for diner. I was just about to...' + + +Suddenly a pig bumps into her. It then turns to you, shaking it's head violently. Astonished by this sight you fail to produce any comprehensible words. The mysterious woman, straitening her dress, speaks to you again:' Please forgive me, but one of my pigs must have escaped it's pen. Would you like him for dinner tonight? As I was saying, I would love to share my food with you, please do join me at my table. Oh, did I almost forget to introduce myself: my name is Circe.' + + + + + +> 'My lady, I would like to thank you for your hospitality, but I am not feeling well, I regretfully have to decline your invitation.' +Something just does not feel right. This whole island is just to perfect. The way Circe acts is too kind, she is too trusting and that pig must be a sign of the gods. You tell Circe you're going back to the ship to rest a little. When she asks you with a sad face if you could at least tell your other men about the dinner you promise her you will. As you walk back across the marble steps you spot docile lions and pigs in their respective pens. Something about the way they look at you doesn't feel right either. Their looks are not those of wild animals, on the contrary they almost look... human. + + +You neither saw nor heard him approach you but you suddenly feel a hand tapping you gently on your shoulder. As you turn you see the youthful face of Hermes, the keen-eyed messenger of the gods. 'Strange, aren't they, they have the appearance of animals yet they also seem human. Yet neither the one, nor the other. I can see you have questions and the gods have sent me to answer them.' + + +You don't know where to start and you ask him quickly, as if he'll withdraw his statement if you don't ask something quickly enough: 'Why are we here?' + + +'The gods are testing you.' + + +'Athena gave me a warning about a woman named Circe, was that her?' + + +'Yes, Circe is a witch, she bewitches men with herbs and magic spells. Hear my words and heed them well: these animals you see before you weren't always animals. They were men who were stranded on Circe's island, castaways, merchants, anyone unlucky enough to set foot here is turned into an animal.' + + +'What about my men?' + + +'They too, will be enchanted, cursed to walk the earth as an animal until time itself seizes to exist.' + + +'Isn't there anything I can do to stop her?' + + +'There is a way. Circe bewitches men with the help of magical herbs. However, there is a way to make you immune to her vile witchcraft. Close your eyes.' + + +As soon as you close your eyes you feel the gentle touch of Hermes' staff on your forehead. Images of a strange plant float into your mind. It's flowers are white, yet it's roots are black and it's leaves are green, with small white stripes running across the length. You want to open your eyes to ask Hermes what kind of herb he is showing you but you cannot manage to open them. + + +You hear Hermes' soft voice, yet you could swear your ears don't register a thing: 'the herb you see is known by the gods as 'Moly', a powerful herb that counteracts any harmful effects done to the one who eats it. However, anyone who tries to pick them without the permission of the immortal gods will die on the very spot. Use it to stop Circe and rescue your friends, but remember: don't lose sight of your objective.' + + +Silence falls after he spoke these words and after a minute or so you find you can once again open your eyes. The marble step upon which Hermes was standing a moment ago is now empty, bearing no trace or evidence that it was just treaded upon by a deity. + + +Remembering Hermes' words you spend the next hour searching the island for this so called Moly. +> As you finally find the herb you quickly ingest it and make your way to Circe's mansion. +The scene you witness as you enter Circe's dining hall is... weird to say the least. The hall is magnificently decorated: the walls are covered with fresco's depicting pastoral scene, much like the ones that decorate the outside walls. The marble columns that support the roof are chiseled in a way that makes them look like they are revolving around their own axis, grape branches have winded themselves around their tops. A giant loom is tucked away in a corner. The dining tables are placed in a circle in the middle of the room, filled with delicacies from all over the known world: dates from the east, flamingo from Aegyptos, olives from Syracuse and more seafood than you can name, all served in Carthaginian glassware and Roman pottery. In the middle of the circle burns a great fire that fills the room with a warm glow. + + +The strange thing, however, is that Circe is sitting all alone at one of the dinner tables, surrounded by a herd of pigs. Half emptied plates and spilled cups of wine diminish the otherwise superb setting. You approach her as if you are unaware of her malignant intentions. 'My graceful hostess, I hope I am not too late to attend to your dinner. I am feeling better after a quick rest and I would hate to leave without seeing you again. The rest of my men are tending to chores on board of my ship but they will join us in a while.' + + +She looks at you suspiciously, trying to gauge your intention, but you manage to fool her. 'Very well my noble guest, please join me at my table. Your companions are resting upstairs, I'm afraid that they have eaten a little but too much. but who can blame them, the food is delicious. Please, try some, I'll fill a plate for you if it pleases you. But first, let us drink to your health.' + + +She gives you a cup of wine. You accept it gracefully, acting as if you didn't catch her sly smile. As you raise your glass you proclaim: 'And to your health as well, fair hostess, that we may drink to your good intentions.' + + +After these words you drain your cup. The wine is the sweetest, most delicious drink you have ever tasted. The honey that is made painstakingly by the smallest bees and is the sweetest thing known in the Greek world, and when one eats it one cannot but forget his troubles for a brief while. Even that cannot match the wine you are tasting right now. However, the sweetness of the wine cannot completely hide the taste of unknown herbs. + + +Circe speaks to you with a sweet voice: 'Do you like the wine, my noble guest? Isn't it the sweetest thing you have ever tasted? I keep it specifically for my most valued guests. Too bad though that it bewitches the senses, making one unable to fight off the winged sleep. Unable to defend oneself.' + + +She rises from her seat and walks towards you, holding a wooden wand in her hand. She taps your head gently with her wand and backs away, awaiting the effects of her magic powers. When nothing happens she raises her hands to the heavens and speaks to you in an astonished voice: 'How is this possible? Why are you still a human?' she suddenly stops speaking, you can see comprehension in her eyes,'of course I should have known, it's HIM all over again.' + + +When you try to ask her who she means she interrupts you, paying no attention to your presence whatsoever she continues her furious contemplation: 'A whole year he and his men stayed at my house. A whole year he passed with me, but he had to leave because he missed his home and his wife! His MORTAL wife! I would have given him anything, I would have even made him immortal! But he left me, taking my heart with him.' + + +When you once more try to ask who she is talking about she sneers at you: 'Like you don't know him: that Ithacan, who stranded here when he sailed from Troy. The one cursed by the earthshaking Poseidon.' She bursts into tears. 'But you remind me of him, yes, you even look a but like him.' + + +She walks towards you, having a strange look in your eyes. You quickly stand up from your seat and walk away from her, keeping her inside your vision at all times. Circe extends her arms towards you. 'Please noble hero, please let me embrace you. I have just felt so lonely, all alone here on my island, with only these pigs to keep me company. Could you at least do me this honour? I promise I'll turn your men back to their human forms.' +> You just don't trust this witch, this could be a trick. You quickly back away and run back towards the ship, leavind a baffled Circe behind. +The remaining crew member ask you about their companions when you return to the ship alone. Since it's no use lying about it, you tell them the whole truth, all the things that happened in the accursed mansion of Circe, including your escape. You see the faces of your cew members twist as you tell them you left their friends behind, but they don't say anything about it. + + +The rest of the day you do your best to try to ignore the tense atmosphere on board of the ship. As the sun gives way to the starry night sky you curl up on your sleeping mat, feeling the emptiness of the ship pressing on your shoulders. Your dreams are troubled. Images of the events of the past day are flashing through your mind, bringing guilt along with them. The golden glow of a divine presence this time does not relieve you of your troubled thoughts. The angry image of the cloudgatherer Zeus pops into your mind. A crown made of lightning bolts rests upon his grey hair, twisting and contorting as a nest of angry snakes. + + +'Cowardly bard, despicable craven, shame of Athens. Does it feel good, leaving your friends and comrades behind? You were chosen to rescue the people of Greece, yet you don't even try to rescue those you travel with. You despise me, coward.' you could swear he grows while he scowls at you and while you struggle to think of an answer his angry face looms over you. 'We, the immortal gods have decided upon your fate, and we have found you unworthy for the task we gave you. We have decided you will have to leave this world.' + + +Roaring thunder appears over your head as the immortal kings walks away from you. You feel as if your burning up, as if a thousand knives plunge into your flesh. It feels as if your torment lasts for ages. The cold embrace of death finally relieves you of your agony.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The scene you witness as you enter Circe's dining hall is... weird to say the least. The hall is magnificently decorated: the walls are covered with fresco's depicting pastoral scene, much like the ones that decorate the outside walls. The marble columns that support the roof are chiseled in a way that makes them look like they are revolving around their own axis, grape branches have winded themselves around their tops. A giant loom is tucked away in a corner. The dining tables are placed in a circle in the middle of the room, filled with delicacies from all over the known world: dates from the east, flamingo from Aegyptos, olives from Syracuse and more seafood than you can name, all served in Carthaginian glassware and Roman pottery. In the middle of the circle burns a great fire that fills the room with a warm glow. + + +The strange thing, however, is that Circe is sitting all alone at one of the dinner tables, surrounded by a herd of pigs. Half emptied plates and spilled cups of wine diminish the otherwise superb setting. You approach her as if you are unaware of her malignant intentions. 'My graceful hostess, I hope I am not too late to attend to your dinner. I am feeling better after a quick rest and I would hate to leave without seeing you again. The rest of my men are tending to chores on board of my ship but they will join us in a while.' + + +She looks at you suspiciously, trying to gauge your intention, but you manage to fool her. 'Very well my noble guest, please join me at my table. Your companions are resting upstairs, I'm afraid that they have eaten a little but too much. but who can blame them, the food is delicious. Please, try some, I'll fill a plate for you if it pleases you. But first, let us drink to your health.' + + +She gives you a cup of wine. You accept it gracefully, acting as if you didn't catch her sly smile. As you raise your glass you proclaim: 'And to your health as well, fair hostess, that we may drink to your good intentions.' + + +After these words you drain your cup. The wine is the sweetest, most delicious drink you have ever tasted. The honey that is made painstakingly by the smallest bees and is the sweetest thing known in the Greek world, and when one eats it one cannot but forget his troubles for a brief while. Even that cannot match the wine you are tasting right now. However, the sweetness of the wine cannot completely hide the taste of unknown herbs. + + +Circe speaks to you with a sweet voice: 'Do you like the wine, my noble guest? Isn't it the sweetest thing you have ever tasted? I keep it specifically for my most valued guests. Too bad though that it bewitches the senses, making one unable to fight off the winged sleep. Unable to defend oneself.' + + +She rises from her seat and walks towards you, holding a wooden wand in her hand. She taps your head gently with her wand and backs away, awaiting the effects of her magic powers. When nothing happens she raises her hands to the heavens and speaks to you in an astonished voice: 'How is this possible? Why are you still a human?' she suddenly stops speaking, you can see comprehension in her eyes,'of course I should have known, it's HIM all over again.' + + +When you try to ask her who she means she interrupts you, paying no attention to your presence whatsoever she continues her furious contemplation: 'A whole year he and his men stayed at my house. A whole year he passed with me, but he had to leave because he missed his home and his wife! His MORTAL wife! I would have given him anything, I would have even made him immortal! But he left me, taking my heart with him.' + + +When you once more try to ask who she is talking about she sneers at you: 'Like you don't know him: that Ithacan, who stranded here when he sailed from Troy. The one cursed by the earthshaking Poseidon.' She bursts into tears. 'But you remind me of him, yes, you even look a but like him.' + + +She walks towards you, having a strange look in your eyes. You quickly stand up from your seat and walk away from her, keeping her inside your vision at all times. Circe extends her arms towards you. 'Please noble hero, please let me embrace you. I have just felt so lonely, all alone here on my island, with only these pigs to keep me company. Could you at least do me this honour? I promise I'll turn your men back to their human forms.' +> What harm could a simple embrace do? You decide to grant her this one favour, also for the sake of your men. +You feel Circe's hot tears falling upon your shoulders as you give her the embrace she desires. Between her sobs she speaks to you, still holding you captive in her embrace: 'You know, I really loved that man. But I realize that he won't come back. You are not him and you will never be able to replace him in my heart. At least he was clever, and you aren't. He would never have fallen for such a transparent trap.' + + +You see bronze glimmering in the corner of your eye. As you realize what Circe is planning to do you try to wrestle free from her grip, but it is to no avail. The love-maddened goddess has taken of of the knives from the dining tables and makes sure you never leave her mansion again. The marble floor feel cold against your skin as your red life force is being drained from your body, the beautiful white floor turning slowly red. + + +Before you trade in the mortal world for the underworld you see Circe playing with the bloody knife, muttering incomprehensibly to herself.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The scene you witness as you enter Circe's dining hall is... weird to say the least. The hall is magnificently decorated: the walls are covered with fresco's depicting pastoral scene, much like the ones that decorate the outside walls. The marble columns that support the roof are chiseled in a way that makes them look like they are revolving around their own axis, grape branches have winded themselves around their tops. A giant loom is tucked away in a corner. The dining tables are placed in a circle in the middle of the room, filled with delicacies from all over the known world: dates from the east, flamingo from Aegyptos, olives from Syracuse and more seafood than you can name, all served in Carthaginian glassware and Roman pottery. In the middle of the circle burns a great fire that fills the room with a warm glow. + + +The strange thing, however, is that Circe is sitting all alone at one of the dinner tables, surrounded by a herd of pigs. Half emptied plates and spilled cups of wine diminish the otherwise superb setting. You approach her as if you are unaware of her malignant intentions. 'My graceful hostess, I hope I am not too late to attend to your dinner. I am feeling better after a quick rest and I would hate to leave without seeing you again. The rest of my men are tending to chores on board of my ship but they will join us in a while.' + + +She looks at you suspiciously, trying to gauge your intention, but you manage to fool her. 'Very well my noble guest, please join me at my table. Your companions are resting upstairs, I'm afraid that they have eaten a little but too much. but who can blame them, the food is delicious. Please, try some, I'll fill a plate for you if it pleases you. But first, let us drink to your health.' + + +She gives you a cup of wine. You accept it gracefully, acting as if you didn't catch her sly smile. As you raise your glass you proclaim: 'And to your health as well, fair hostess, that we may drink to your good intentions.' + + +After these words you drain your cup. The wine is the sweetest, most delicious drink you have ever tasted. The honey that is made painstakingly by the smallest bees and is the sweetest thing known in the Greek world, and when one eats it one cannot but forget his troubles for a brief while. Even that cannot match the wine you are tasting right now. However, the sweetness of the wine cannot completely hide the taste of unknown herbs. + + +Circe speaks to you with a sweet voice: 'Do you like the wine, my noble guest? Isn't it the sweetest thing you have ever tasted? I keep it specifically for my most valued guests. Too bad though that it bewitches the senses, making one unable to fight off the winged sleep. Unable to defend oneself.' + + +She rises from her seat and walks towards you, holding a wooden wand in her hand. She taps your head gently with her wand and backs away, awaiting the effects of her magic powers. When nothing happens she raises her hands to the heavens and speaks to you in an astonished voice: 'How is this possible? Why are you still a human?' she suddenly stops speaking, you can see comprehension in her eyes,'of course I should have known, it's HIM all over again.' + + +When you try to ask her who she means she interrupts you, paying no attention to your presence whatsoever she continues her furious contemplation: 'A whole year he and his men stayed at my house. A whole year he passed with me, but he had to leave because he missed his home and his wife! His MORTAL wife! I would have given him anything, I would have even made him immortal! But he left me, taking my heart with him.' + + +When you once more try to ask who she is talking about she sneers at you: 'Like you don't know him: that Ithacan, who stranded here when he sailed from Troy. The one cursed by the earthshaking Poseidon.' She bursts into tears. 'But you remind me of him, yes, you even look a but like him.' + + +She walks towards you, having a strange look in your eyes. You quickly stand up from your seat and walk away from her, keeping her inside your vision at all times. Circe extends her arms towards you. 'Please noble hero, please let me embrace you. I have just felt so lonely, all alone here on my island, with only these pigs to keep me company. Could you at least do me this honour? I promise I'll turn your men back to their human forms.' +> You still don't trust her. She still remains a witch after all. On the other hand: you need to rescue your men. You decide to embrace her, after she swears by the immortal gods she won't harm you or your men. +She smirks at you. 'Hmpf, I guess you're not that foolish after all.' you see a bronze knife falling from her hand. 'You really are like him. But I guess you have to go too, huh? Why are the gods so cruel? But I'll keep my promise, I'll turn your friends back to their human forms. Although, to be honest: I like them more as pigs.' + + +The next half hour she goes through the big hall, tapping each and every pig on their heads with her wand and muttering incantations. Finally, all your companions are returned to their original selves. Afterwards, Circe approaches you. 'My noble hero I understand I've caused you and your friends a lot of trouble, and I am deeply sorry for it. Please, let me make it up to you by letting you stay here for a while, to rest and to regain your strength for the rest of your journey. I promise by the immortal gods that I won't harm any of you, else they may take my soul and lock it away in the Tartaros, the deepest pit of the underworld. + + +After a quick decision with your men you decide to accept Circe's offer and spend some time on her island to regain your strength. Your men each get spacious rooms assigned, but you sleep in Circe's own chambers. You dine exquisitely each day (although you are never served pork) and Circe is the perfect host, with no intentions whatsoever of hurting anyone. The time between meals you spend with Circe, walking on her beautiful island, playing games beneath a pergola while enjoying the cool breeze from the sea or take a swim in the beautiful blue waves. Everything is just so perfect, you never want to leave. + + +However, eventually the time comes when the gods have grown tired of waiting for you to resume your journey and they send Hermes to command you so. As you and Circe reach the top of the marble staircase that leads to her mansion you see the keen-eyed messenger of the gods standing before you. 'Noble bard, the immortal gods have sent me to bring you a message. You must continue your journey to Sparta or Greece will be destroyed by the flames of war. I advice you to do as they say.' + + +You look to Circe, ready to say goodbye, but when you see her sad but beautiful face you hesitate. Seeing the hesitation in your eyes she speaks to you despairingly: 'Please, my noble hero, you do not have to leave me. Stay here and live here with me until the end of days. You like it here, you said so yourself during one of our walks. Please... please consider it.' + + +Hermes speaks sternly to you: 'Remember your journey, mortal. Remember those who depend on you. You have to leave, now!' + + +Torn between your duty and your newly found love for Circe you decide... +> to stay with Circe +You are standing on top of the marble stairs, watching your ship sail away in the distance. With a sad heart you said goodbye to the men you've experienced so much together with. Circe offered them to stay, but they declined. Like Cyrus told you before they left: 'However you put it, we remain mercenaries. The seas and the battle are our homes, we weren't made to stay put in one place.' Circe left you alone, to say your goodbyes and to reminisce about your past adventures, but now she walks towards you. 'Come, my love, please let happiness drive the sadness from your heart.' + + +You follow her advice and try to forget the sad goodbye. You are happy here, on this beautiful island with the woman you love, yet you keep this doubt hidden into the deepest parts of your heart that you should have continued your journey. + + +--- + + +Years go by and you and Circe still live happily together on the island. One more time Hermes has come to you, pleading you to continue the task given to you by the gods but you just dismissed him. Athena visited you in your dreams once, telling you the largest part of the Greek States were engulfed by war, but wishing you good luck and much happiness none the less. Life has been blissful to you, you can't even remember the last time you were sad. You've truly left your past life behind you and you and Circe live happily together until the end of time itself.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>She smirks at you. 'Hmpf, I guess you're not that foolish after all.' you see a bronze knife falling from her hand. 'You really are like him. But I guess you have to go too, huh? Why are the gods so cruel? But I'll keep my promise, I'll turn your friends back to their human forms. Although, to be honest: I like them more as pigs.' + + +The next half hour she goes through the big hall, tapping each and every pig on their heads with her wand and muttering incantations. Finally, all your companions are returned to their original selves. Afterwards, Circe approaches you. 'My noble hero I understand I've caused you and your friends a lot of trouble, and I am deeply sorry for it. Please, let me make it up to you by letting you stay here for a while, to rest and to regain your strength for the rest of your journey. I promise by the immortal gods that I won't harm any of you, else they may take my soul and lock it away in the Tartaros, the deepest pit of the underworld. + + +After a quick decision with your men you decide to accept Circe's offer and spend some time on her island to regain your strength. Your men each get spacious rooms assigned, but you sleep in Circe's own chambers. You dine exquisitely each day (although you are never served pork) and Circe is the perfect host, with no intentions whatsoever of hurting anyone. The time between meals you spend with Circe, walking on her beautiful island, playing games beneath a pergola while enjoying the cool breeze from the sea or take a swim in the beautiful blue waves. Everything is just so perfect, you never want to leave. + + +However, eventually the time comes when the gods have grown tired of waiting for you to resume your journey and they send Hermes to command you so. As you and Circe reach the top of the marble staircase that leads to her mansion you see the keen-eyed messenger of the gods standing before you. 'Noble bard, the immortal gods have sent me to bring you a message. You must continue your journey to Sparta or Greece will be destroyed by the flames of war. I advice you to do as they say.' + + +You look to Circe, ready to say goodbye, but when you see her sad but beautiful face you hesitate. Seeing the hesitation in your eyes she speaks to you despairingly: 'Please, my noble hero, you do not have to leave me. Stay here and live here with me until the end of days. You like it here, you said so yourself during one of our walks. Please... please consider it.' + + +Hermes speaks sternly to you: 'Remember your journey, mortal. Remember those who depend on you. You have to leave, now!' + + +Torn between your duty and your newly found love for Circe you decide... +> to continue your journey +You watch Circe's island growing smaller and smaller until it has finally sunken beneath the horizon. You said your goodbyes to Circe with a troubled heart, promising her you'll come back while deep down you knew you wouldn't. Circe has given you new supplies so you can resume your journey to Sparta. + + +On top of the white marble steps, with the sun setting beneath the horizon in the east, you gave each other your farewell kisses. The creeping chill of the evening marked your parting. Circe waited on the beach until your ship set sail, watching you as you watched her. But now you are both out of sight of each other. The dream has ended, your break is over, and now you have to continue your journey. + + +The winds are blowing again and the stars are clear, giving guidance to your crew. Shaking your sad thoughts away you walk towards the navigator: 'Set sail towards Sparta, don't make any stops until we've arrived at their docks.' + + + +> Of course, this is easier said than done... +Either the gods have not done testing you or your navigator is just really incompetent, but a month later you still haven't reached Sparta. The supplies given to you by Circe, which should have been enough to reach Sparta, are all but gone. Your crew is faced with near starvation. You hear the desperate prayers of the crew members, praying for food or rain, and it pains you that you are unable to aid them. + + +Even Cyrus, who supported you throughout your journey is starting to doubt. He walks up to you with a worried face: 'Noble customer, and dear friend, I have stood by you during the hard times we've encountered on this journey but now I am starting to lose hope. I thought you were aided by the gods on this journey, you have those dreams, right? But what now, are the gods testing us, have they abandoned us and left us to die here on the wine-coloured waves?' + + +'I wish I had an answer for you, I really do, but I just don't know. I wish I knew a way to get things right, but I don't. Our fate is now in the hands of the gods. I'm sorry, but my advice is: have faith in the gods, our journey is righteous and the gods will help us. Let us sleep for now, let our minds wander into the realm of dreams and forget about our horrible situation, at least for a moment.' + + +And so you curl up once again on your sleeping mat, your belly rumbling and your mind troubled. But as you predicted before long your mind departs to the realm of dreams. You are walking across a shadowy island, inhabited by the shadows of oxen. The shadowy grass feel surprisingly soft beneath your ghost-feet. The shining image of Athena approaches you, accompanied by a solemn looking owl. 'Great bard, pride of Athens, you have come a far way since the day you first saw us. The immortal gods have always watched you on your journey and they always will. It pleases us to see you have not lost your faith in the immortal gods, even after so much hardship. However, your trials have not yet come to an end. Tomorrow you will reach the island of Trinacria, a sacred island belonging to the sun-god Helios. Whatever you do, do not disturb the cattle of Helios.' + + +With these words the wise Athena leaves. +> Trinacria +You are violently awoken by a crew member, shaking you enthusiastically. As you struggle to remember just where you are you hear him speak to you: '... 've arrived at an island, sir. No, but not just an island, a fertile island. Fertile, yes, with lots of oxen walking upon it. And fresh water! Lots of it.' + + +You grumble. 'Calm yourself down. Can someone please explain me what is going on, calmly?' + + +Another crew member, an older man with grey stripes through his hair, approaches you: 'Our prayers have been heard, sir. This morning our navigator spotted a large island, with lush meadows and filled with oxen! A small party went ashore and they reported seeing herds of oxen and pools of fresh water. We have been saved, sir, we have been saved!' + + +You quickly jump up from your sleeping mat and rush to the dinghies, trying to prevent the crew from leaving the ship. 'Listen to me, all of you. Whatever you may think, however hungry you are, do not, I repeat, do not harm these oxen. You may drink as much of the water as you like but the oxen must remain unharmed. They are the property of the sun-god Helios. Eating them will have dire consequences.' + + +But despite your attempts, the crew doesn't listen, your pleas get lost in the sea of gleaful shouts from the crew. Their ears plugged by hunger and thirst they slaughter the first oxen that catches their view, hardly taking time to roast the meat they gorge themselves, slaughtering even more oxen as their stomachs command them to. You despairingly gaze at this scene, fearing that this means the end of your journey, and possibly of your lives. + + +Cyrus approaches you, his chin gleaming with fat. 'Why the sad face, we finally have filled stomachs again?' + + +'These were the sacred oxen of Helios, the god of the sun. the gods specifically, specifically warned me. But now all is lost.' + + +You sigh heavily and grab fistfuls of hair with your hands. + + +'Not every dream is a true one, sir. How could something like this not be a sign of the gods. They heard us beg for food and so they sent us these oxen. You seem hungry yourself sir, I bet there is still some food left, why don't you try some? I promise you you'll immediately feel better.' +> Maybe he is right, what if your dream was just that: a dream? You decide to try some of the meat. +Cyrus was right: you do feel a lot better. After you tried some of the meat you couldn't control yourself and you ate as much as you could before your stomach was completely filled. Either it was due to the hunger or to the godly nature of the oxen but it was the best meat you have ever tasted in your life. After washing it down with some fresh water from a nearby spring you returned to the ship. + + +Now you lie on your sleeping mat, gazing at the stars, feeling content about your filled stomach. Your attention is caught by a brightly shining star. Since you started your journey in Athens you have learned a lot about the stars from the navigator of the ship, since the stars guide ships at night sailors know a lot about the constellations. This star, however, you have never seen before. If you didn't know better you could swear it is shining brighter and brighter. + + +After a couple of minutes your other companions notice this star too. You hear confused talk among the men, every one of them trying to guess just which of the countless stars it is. Deciding you'll won't find out any time soon you close your eyes, trying to catch some sleep. The strange thing is, however, that you are able to see it, even through your closed eyelids. When you open your eyes again the star has almost quadrupled in size and is almost shining as brightly as the sun. It's almost as if you can feel the heat coming off of it. + + +When the truth about this star finally hits you it's already too late. Tons of flaming rock crash into your ship with a speed unlike anything in this world, even the swift eagle couldn't match it. Men and wood burn alike as the flaming wrath of Helios reaches them. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are violently awoken by a crew member, shaking you enthusiastically. As you struggle to remember just where you are you hear him speak to you: '... 've arrived at an island, sir. No, but not just an island, a fertile island. Fertile, yes, with lots of oxen walking upon it. And fresh water! Lots of it.' + + +You grumble. 'Calm yourself down. Can someone please explain me what is going on, calmly?' + + +Another crew member, an older man with grey stripes through his hair, approaches you: 'Our prayers have been heard, sir. This morning our navigator spotted a large island, with lush meadows and filled with oxen! A small party went ashore and they reported seeing herds of oxen and pools of fresh water. We have been saved, sir, we have been saved!' + + +You quickly jump up from your sleeping mat and rush to the dinghies, trying to prevent the crew from leaving the ship. 'Listen to me, all of you. Whatever you may think, however hungry you are, do not, I repeat, do not harm these oxen. You may drink as much of the water as you like but the oxen must remain unharmed. They are the property of the sun-god Helios. Eating them will have dire consequences.' + + +But despite your attempts, the crew doesn't listen, your pleas get lost in the sea of gleaful shouts from the crew. Their ears plugged by hunger and thirst they slaughter the first oxen that catches their view, hardly taking time to roast the meat they gorge themselves, slaughtering even more oxen as their stomachs command them to. You despairingly gaze at this scene, fearing that this means the end of your journey, and possibly of your lives. + + +Cyrus approaches you, his chin gleaming with fat. 'Why the sad face, we finally have filled stomachs again?' + + +'These were the sacred oxen of Helios, the god of the sun. the gods specifically, specifically warned me. But now all is lost.' + + +You sigh heavily and grab fistfuls of hair with your hands. + + +'Not every dream is a true one, sir. How could something like this not be a sign of the gods. They heard us beg for food and so they sent us these oxen. You seem hungry yourself sir, I bet there is still some food left, why don't you try some? I promise you you'll immediately feel better.' +> No matter how hungry you are you don't give in to the temptation. You go ashore, but you only drink some water to settle your rumbling stomach. +You are lying on your sleeping mat, trying to ignore the sounds coming from your stomach. You hear laughing coming from the crew members, contents men with filled stomachs are talking loudly to each other. You try to take your mind of food by gazing at the stars. Your attention is caught by a particularly brightly shining one. Since you started your journey in Athens you have learned a lot about the stars from the navigator of the ship, since the stars guide ships at night sailors know a lot about the constellations. This star, however, you have never seen before. If you didn't know better you could swear it is shining brighter and brighter. + + +After a couple of minutes your other companions notice this star too. You hear confused talk among the men, every one of them trying to guess just which of the countless stars it is. Deciding you'll won't find out any time soon you close your eyes, trying to catch some sleep. The strange thing is, however, that you are able to see it, even through your closed eyelids. When you open your eyes again the star has almost quadrupled in size and is almost shining as brightly as the sun. It's almost as if you can feel the heat coming off of it. + + +When the truth finally hits you you realize it's already to late. The heat from the flaming comet has already set fire to the sails. You close your eyes and wait for the end... + + +And suddenly you feel as if an invisible hand smacks into your side, sending you flying through the air. You feel the cold waves of the seas crashing onto your body as you are thrown of the ship. As you open your eyes in shock you witness the destruction of your ship. Men and wood are burned alike as the flaming tons of rock smash into them. A piece of driftwood comes floating by and you grab it tightly. Desperation takes control of your heart as you see your companions burned before your eyes. The screams of the dying are terrifying. You try to block everything out, try to make everything leave, all misery and suffering, but it just won't work. Eventually all noises fade and the fires die out. You pass out from pure strain. +> You feel alone, drifting through darkness. +The darkness around me is lifting. + + +Am I dead? + + +What happened to the ship? + + +Where am I? + + +What happened to my friends? + + +I guess they all died... + + +Why have I survived? + + +I'm floating, moving on the waves. + + +Yet, I feel the soft ground beneath me. + + +Distant voices... Am I in Hades? + + +I can hear the wind blowing in the distance. + + +But why can't I see anything? + + +Can't move either. + + +How did I get here? + + +Ah, my head, it feels as if I've been hit by Polyphemos. + + +Hmmm, the darkness is returning. + + +Maybe I'll go back to sleep...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The shining Eos rises once again to bring the day to the lands of the Aegyptians. + + +The crew has chosen a new captain and life moves on. No other attempts to kill you or steal your money has been made. You gaze with curiosity at the strange lands at the shores of the Nile, at the foreign people working the fields on the fertile banks on the river and at the strange animals that live in the water and on the shore. This scenery carries on for a couple of hours. + + +Suddenly the ship turns away from the main stream, into a branch of the main river. Although you find this strange, you trust the guidance of the navigator and think no more about it. The scenery changes dramatically as time goes by, the fields and people disappear and the animals don't show themselves anymore. A strange silence falls over the lands. + + +A crew member approaches you. 'Sir, I am sorry to report you that we took a wrong turn. However, the river flows to fast for our rowers to row upstream back to the main river. We will have to wait until the river calms down or we will have to follow this river and see were it takes us. I can't say for certain how long it will take before we reach...' + + +He stops abruptly as the most beautiful song fills the air. You all listen, hypnotized by the sweet sounds that come from no particular direction. However, the song has a strange, dark undertone, a chill runs down your spine as you remember tales about ships that were wrecked after the crew was hypnotized by the songs of mythical beasts. + + +Suddenly alarmed you... + + + +> Tell the crew to ready their weapons +'Okay, we are about to be attacked by some kind of monsters. Prepare your weapons, we will not fall today!' However, the crew doesn't listen, they are still under the spell of the strange song. + + +Your mind becomes clouded once again as the song fills your mind. + + +You struggle to keep a hold of yourself as the song becomes louder, you must be getting closer to the source. + + +Suddenly the ships shakes and cracks as it hits sharp rocks that lie beneath the water's surface. + + +The skies darken as strange beast, half women, half bird, appear from the skies. The hypnotized crew members put up no fight as the women drag them of the deck of the ship. As one of the sirens sets it's eyes upon you, you are not able to draw your sword. + + +The last thing you hear before your soul is sent to the realm of Hades is her beautiful, bone-chilling song.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Geek: + +1. A person regarded as foolish or clumsy. + +2. A person who is single-minded or accomplished in scientific or technical pursuits, but is felt to be socially inept. + +3. A carnival performer whose show consists of bizarre and disgusting acts. + + +Your breath stinks from the foul things you’ve been eating and the rest of you stinks from not bathing in who knows when. + +Your head hurts from the cheap moonshine you’ve been getting “paid” in. + +Rubes often throw stuff at you and spit on you. + +Most of the other Carnies find you utterly repulsive and avoid you, a couple of them just abuse you for various reasons. + +On a good day, only the Pinheads come to your cell and taunt you with their gibbering laughs and mongoloid chatter. + +You have absolutely no worth as a human being, you get no respect from others, and you have no respect for yourself…and why should you? You are the lowest form of life in Carney society. You’re not a real performer; what you do can’t really be considered a skill. You’re not even a real freak. At least a deformed freak can evoke an emotion of horror, or pity, or even admiration for overcoming their condition. You weren’t born “this way”. You chose to do this. All you evoke is disgust and revulsion. At best you’re laughed at and not in the good way like those pervert clowns you work with. + +Fuck all that “Wildman of Borneo” shit that the Ringmaster tries to tell all the rubes. You’re little more than a bum with a “job”. A degrading job that involves you to debase yourself, all for the amusement and shock value of others, but hey it keeps a “roof” over your head and you pleasantly drunk enough to just barely forget how utterly pathetic your life is. + +You are the GEEK. + +You wake up to a bucket of piss being thrown in your face. Not the first time and certainly won’t be the last. + +“You like the taste of that Geek? Get up Geek! The Ring Master wants to see you!” Charley orders then he throws the empty bucket at your head. The comical sound it makes hitting your skull and the pain it causes makes Charley laugh. Then he jabs you a couple times with his pointed stick. + +Midgets can be so cruel… +> Go see the Ring Master +“Agh! Alright, alright! Stop poking me…what day is it?” +“Never mind all that geek! Get going you know how the Ring Master doesn’t like being kept waiting! Phew! You smell even more disgusting than usual! I guess that’s one way to keep Ajax from killing you, he’d probably vomit his guts out before he could lay a hand on you…then you could lick it up for the rubes! Ha ha! Move it Geek!” + +Charley prods you with a sharp stick periodically on your way to the Ring Master’s trailer until you arrive at which point, Atlas stops the both of you. + +“Stop! What business do the both of you have here?” +“Goddamnit you fuckin’ one eyed freak! We go through this all the fucking time and its getting REALLY old! You just saw me come out of the Ring Master’s trailer earlier today when he sent me to get the Geek, you know damn well what we’re both doing here!” + +Ignoring Charley’s comments Atlas looks down at you and points. + +“You may enter, but the Ring Master doesn’t need to see you again, so you may not.” +“Yeah, whatever enjoy the smell.” Charley says and mumbles something to himself while leaving the area. + +You barely make it up the little steps to the trailer, but you do. You’re finally starting to gather your wits together; your head still hurts though and you’ve just realize you haven’t had a drink yet. What a terrible feeling. You open the door. + +“Close the door, you’re letting all the sunlight in.” the Ring Master orders from behind his desk. She’s siting in his chair, but has her back turned to you. +“Uh you wanted to see me?” +“Of course…(Sniff sniff) you really haven’t been taking care of yourself. If anything you’ve become even more repulsive than when I first took you in. Remember that day?” +“Um, yeah I think…no, no I don’t. I mean kind of… I forget things.” +“I’m not surprised; you’re constantly drinking that swill Charley makes. I am surprised you haven’t gone blind yet though. Oh well what you insist on doing to yourself is of little concern to me, all I require is your obedience. You are thankful for all I have provided for you aren’t you?” +“Oh yeah. Sure I am.” +“You seem to be one of the few nowadays then. There are some though that are ungrateful for things I’ve done for them, they plan to betray me and everything this carnival stands for. They plan to change the natural order of things. Can you imagine what might happen to this carnival if I wasn’t here? What might happen to you?” + +You attempt to think about this scenario, but instead you just stand there because you can’t really form anything in your mind because it hurts really bad, you’ve been sober too damn long, and it’s about to get even longer as the Ring Master seems intent on bombarding you with talk as he finally swivels around in her chair. That pale androgynous face of the Ring Master’s is displaying a look of seriousness as usual. + +“Nothing good I can assure you. Which is why I’m putting YOU in charge of this task.” +“Huh? What task?” +“Why ensuring the survival of the carnival of course.” +”What!? Me?! Why? How!? I’m not qualified! Can’t you or Charley do it?” +“I fear I’ve done all I’ve can. I mean I’ve provided all of THIS to everyone here. I’ve given them purpose and a life. If that isn’t enough for them, then my words aren’t going to make a difference at this point. And as for Charley, well…I’m sure even in your usual state of drunkenness you’re aware that he has his own plans for this carnival.” +“I guess…but agh, it’s too early for all this…why me? I mean what am I supposed to do? I’m just the Geek.” +“Yes, and that’s exactly why I’m choosing you. You have no motive, you have no agenda, you have no friends, and as such you would probably be the best candidate to convince others to resist change and keep the status quo.” +“You have to be joking! Nobody’s going to listen to me! I’m the fucking Geek!” +“You might be surprised, you have far more potential than you give yourself credit for…perhaps you’ll even change some perspectives, or maybe not. The choice is yours, because the fate of THIS carnival is resting solely on your actions, you can no longer afford to hide from the world in a bottle and a cage if you wish to keep your current life. It is time for you to take some responsibility, its time to repay the debt you owe me. You have until show time.” +“But…” +“Now leave me, I wish to be alone.” + +The Ring Master swivels his chair back to its original position. You head back outside, where upon Atlas blocks it again with his massive body. + +Never before in your life have you been put in this kind of position of responsibility, (Not that you can remember anyway) but you’re going to have to do something, the question is what exactly? +> Obey the Ring Master +You feel you don’t really have a choice in this situation. The Ring Master is in charge and whatever he says goes and you DO owe a lot to her. As bad as it can be here sometimes, it would probably be worse if you didn’t have the protection of the Carnival. + +As tempted as you are to get a drink to get you through this test you have before you, you realize you need to stay sober for this. What a terrible thing. Now you have to figure out who you need to convince. + +The Freaks are firmly on the side of the Ring Master, so you don’t need to talk to them. That just leaves the Midgets and the Normals, both of those present some problems. +> Try to convince the Midgets +Charley leads the Midgets and you doubt if he’s going “fall in line” and even if he claimed he was, he’d just be lying. You might even be putting yourself in great danger by speaking to him directly about this, however you know the Midgets don’t really care for Charley, so if you could get him out of the way somehow, they might be more willing to ally with the Ring Master. + +You decide to “test the waters” by speaking to one of the few Midgets (Actually the only one) that’s somewhat less hostile towards you. You see Bob working on hammering tent stakes in the ground and go up to him. + +“Hey Bob, can I talk to you?” +“Aw hell Geek, I ain’t got no money for you to get fucking drunk! Just go steal the liquor from that sonofabitch Charley and take your goddamn chances!” he says barely paying attention to you. +“No, its not that…so you uh think Charley’s a son of a bitch huh?” +“I don’t think it, I know it. Everyone does.” +“So why do you guys follow him?” +“Because he does make things better for us. Better than the Ring Master did anyway.” +“Yeah, but what if he’s not the best choice to lead you guys, I mean…” + +Bob raises one eyebrow and focuses all of his attention on you now. + +“What the fuck are you talkin’ about Geek? You seem to be awfully interested with matters that don’t concern you.” Bob states raising his hammer menancingly. +“Well um…I just heard that…um Charley…I mean…look there’s some shit gonna go down and the Ring Master wants me to get people on his side!” + +You’re unsure of what Bob’s going to do about your revelation. You expect the worst, but for once luck is on your side. + +“Look Geek, I ain’t gonna lie to ya, not many of us like Charley, and sure, he’s a fucking tyrant, but he gets things done, I dunno he’s kinda like that guy in Germany, except shorter. However, if he wasn’t around, we’d go back to being second class citizens again and why? We DO keep this place running. The Ring Master claims he cares about us, but it doesn’t seem that way to us. We’re under appreciated. And if Charley does have ideas about taking over, then we’re behind him. Maybe the whole place would be run a lot better with him in charge anyway. AND I suggest you don’t talk to any other dwarves about this, you’ll find that you’ll get the same answer and they might just feel the need to tell Charley about the discussion and I don’t think that would be very good for you.” +“So there’s nothing I can do or say to change your mind?” +“Goddamn it, weren’t you fuckin’ listening Geek? I said no! Not unless you found someway of replacing Charley with someone a little more even tempered and with his business savvy.” +“Well, why don’t one of you midg…I mean dwarves do it?” +“(Sigh) Because most of us are simple laborers. We just wanna do our job with as little hassle and relax when we can, we don’t wanna be worried about extra shit. Let Charley worry about it since he wants it so bad. Besides if you haven’t noticed he’s got a mean streak a mile wide and that fuckin’ muscle bound freak Ajax around him all the time.” +“So there’s nobody who’d want to take Charley’s place?” +“Nope. The only one I can think of who’d even have the intelligence of running the criminal activity here smoothly anyway would be his overgrown girlfriend Salina. Now her I wouldn’t mind working under if you know what I mean! Hah! Now get the fuck outta here Geek, I got work to do and your smell is gonna stick to my clothes for days! Get!” + +You back away from Bob before he hits you with his hammer or kicks you in the shin. + +It wasn’t what you expected, but perhaps Bob has subtlety shown you a way to get the midgets to ally with the Ring Master, but of course this means talking with Salina. That could be even more risky though, considering she’s the object of Charley’s “love”. Not to mention she doesn’t particularly like you. + +But then again, who does? +> Go talk to Salina +You cautiously approach Salina’s trailer, you’re nervous as hell. You stop and hide behind a nearby barrel when you see someone coming out. It’s Sasha. She looks like she’s been crying, probably about Ajax no doubt. Salina seems to be telling her something and then hugs her before closing the door. When Sasha leaves you knock on Salina’s door. She answers. + +“Look, I told you…UGH! Its you! Get the fuck outta here Geek! No amount of money is gonna make me degrade myself for your festering ass! And you’re upsetting my snakes with your odor!” +“No, it’s not that, I really gotta talk to you.” +“You don’t have anything to say that I wanna waste my time OR my sense of smell on, so…” +“Please it s really important! It’s about Charley and the future of the Carnival!” + +Salina raises her eyebrow. + +“Hmm, very well, but you’re not coming in here, let’s go someplace secluded where nobody can see me associating with you.” + +You and Salina walk to a nearby spot in the wilderness (Separately of course) to talk where you explain the situation to Salina. + +“Yeah, so what does all this mean to me? If Charley takes over I win and if the Ring Master stays in power I still win. I don’t see why I should get involved in this power struggle.” Salina says unemotionally. + +“You’re not looking at the big picture. As it stands now you got some measure of freedom, but if Charley wins, this place will cease being a Carnival and become a crime ring. And while you might do alright gift and money wise, you’ll be Charley’s girlfriend full time at that point with little freedom. You know he’s never going to let you do anything without his approval if he’s in power. And if the Ring Master wins, chances are the criminal activity here is gonna be severely diminished without Charley to run it, meaning you’ll probably be making less money.” +“Okay…but don’t you want the Ring Master to win?” +“Yes, but she needs allies and I’m trying to get the midgets to ally with him and they won’t if Charley’s in charge of them.” +“So I don’t understand, what exactly are you proposing? You’re kind of all over the place here.” +“I’m saying I want YOU to take over Charley’s position. You run all his business dealings.” +“What? You’re crazy Geek.” +“Why? You’re intelligent; surely you probably know all of Charley’s secrets.” +“Well THAT’S true. The little fucker insists on bragging about everything after sex, but what makes you think the midgets will follow me? I mean I’m a Normal.” +“Please, you’re a tall beautiful woman, the midgets will love you, didn’t you see Wizard of Oz? Just as long as you promise to uphold all the things Charley did like protection from being bullied by rubes and keeping their payment the same, I don’t think they’ll mind you in charge instead of Charley. Think about it, YOU could be in charge of the whole operation, and it’s not like the Ring Master will bother you as long as you don’t try to screw with the everyday Carnival workings.” + +“I’d never do that, the Carnival has been like a home to me…I…” + +Salina seems to stop herself before she displays too much emotion to you. + +“Alright Geek, I’m willing to entertain this idea, but you have to do something for ME first.” +“Okay, what?” +“You gotta get rid of Randal.” +“What? Why? What did he do?” +“To me? Nothing, but he’s competition and I can’t have that.” +“Competition for what?” +“Nevermind, just get rid of him. Think of it this way, if you get him out of the picture, you’ll also eliminate the leader of the third faction here which would really cement the Ring Master’s supremacy here. Surely that should be incentive enough?” +“You want me to kill him?!” +“Look, I don’t care HOW you get rid of him, just get rid of him before show time. If you do that, you can tell the midgets that I’ll be taking over Charley’s position when the time comes. Now don’t speak to me again until you do this.” + +Looks like you got MORE work ahead of you and you really don’t know how you’re supposed to get rid of Randal. You doubt if just asking him to leave is going to work, and while killing him would solve the problem, it’s not really that simple to just kill a man even if you had it in you. + +You could really use a drink… +> Talk to Randal +You can’t kill Randal, so you’re going to have to just try to convince him to leave…somehow. You think perhaps Madam Orbec can help, since she has the most contact with him. + +You approach Madam Orbec’s tent which carries an air of creepiness about it. When you enter, you see her lying on the floor convulsing. + +“Madam! Are you alright?!” you run to her attempting to pick her up, but she pushes you away. + +“GEEK! Take your filthy hands off of me! My body is for the spirits only! You will not molest my person lest I call down their wrath upon you! Though I’m not sure what more they could do to such a pathetic soul such as yourself, and death would be a mercy.” +“Sorry, I was just trying to help.” +“Liar! You sought me out, to help yourself! But still…your mission is a somewhat good intentioned one…even if you are in the dark about some of it…” +“What do you mean?” +“That’s for the more enlightened to know, but I’m sure you’ll find out eventually, assuming we decide to help you that is…” +“How do you know that I want your help?” +“I see what the spirits see! And the spirits see all! You’re easier to read than an open book! You want to know how to get rid of Randal.” +“How…nevermind. So how do I get rid of him? No…don’t tell me YOU want me to do something as well!” +“Actually getting rid of Randal would serve me…he wouldn’t be around hounding me and the spirits all the time for one thing. The only reason I prefer him around is that he is a balancer of this carnival…but we see things are about to change…great changes…things would be better if he wasn’t around any longer.” +“So?” + +Madam Orbec begins to talk to herself. + +“Should we? Maybe. What about them? Later. Yeah, let’s do it.” +“Madam?” +“Tell Randal to come to my tent, I will get rid of him. I shall tell him something that will give him cause to leave immediately. He won’t even be here for showtime. You have the word of the spirits and Madam Orbec. Now leave me, we must prepare.” + +You leave Madam Orbec’s tent and go find Randal. When you do, he attempts to avoid you, but when you mention Madam Orbec wants to see him, he pushes you out of the way to meet her right away. + +You follow him and watch Orbec’s tent, after awhile Randal leaves and heads back to his own tent. Orbec also exits and nods at you. You go back to Salina and tell her the news. + +Salina smiles and tells you everything has been set in motion, and she’ll be ready. She then tells you to go tell the midgets. + +You go back to Bob, who’d forgotten all about your discussion with him. In fact you have to remind him what it was you even discussed. + +“So lemme get this straight Geek…Salina’s taking over the crime trade here?” +“Yeah, and she says everything will stay the same, the protection and the pay. All you gotta do is side with the Ring Master, after show time tonight.” +“…Alright Geek, I’ll tell the rest of the dwarves. I just hope all of you fuckers know what you’re doing, because I guarantee if we get fucked in any way in this arrangement, YOU will be the first to feel our wrath!” + +You hope so too, a lot of this riding on the “word” of everyone. You don’t actually have any assurance by anyone that everything’s going to go as planned. You don’t tell the Ring Master that when you go back to his trailer though. (After getting Atlas’ permission to enter of course) you just tell her that he’ll have her allies when the time comes. The Ring Master seems confident in you and tells you to get ready for show time. + +You spend your remaining time a little on edge, wondering if everything is going to work out. You really wish the Ring Master hadn’t put all this pressure on you. + +Then show time arrives, everything goes pretty much the same except you’re a little distracted the entire time until you notice Randal doesn’t show up at all. You hope that’s a good sign that your plan has worked. +> But the real show begins afterwards +A dark moonlit night. + +Charley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. The Ring Master has Atlas, and his usual allies, the Freaks are hanging in the darkness ready to strike if necessary. Most of the Normals though are nowhere to be seen. Your heart sinks…the midgets have still sided with Charley and you get so worried that you puke up the sheep testicles and pigeon heads you consumed for your act. + +“Your time has come Ring Master! No longer will you exploit us! I’m taking over!” +“So you can exploit your own people of course. Charley, I’ve put up with your delusions of grandeur long enough, it ends tonight. I have allies of my own, and you might find they are much more dedicated to me than yours are.” +“It won’t work Ringy, I got more in common with my people than you ever will! Blood is thicker, and yours is going to run everywhere if you don’t peaceably leave…I’m giving you this one chance you pale she-male.” +“Not likely.” + +At this point all of the freaks come out of hiding. Charley orders an attack, but the rest of the midgets do nothing…you cease worrying and Charley begins to get angry. + +“What the fuck man? I told you fuckers to attack! I’m your leader!” +“Not anymore Charley…we got a new one.” Bob says. +“Who? HIM? This fucking hermaphrodite bitch?” Charley yells pointing to the Ring Master. +“No, this tattooed bitch.” Bob says calmly where upon Salina appears petting a cobra lovingly which is wrapped around her arm. +“Yes, this tattooed snake bitch to be precise. Give it up Charley; your time here is done. You don’t have any allies anymore. I’d suggest you and the muscle bound woman beater leave NOW.” +“You fucking back stabbing viper bitch…” Charley says in shock. +“Hey fuck off cunt, fore I shove that snake up your ass!” Ajax yells. +“You’re certainly welcome to try, here catch!” + +Salina throws here cobra at Ajax, which lands on him, he squashes its head, but not before it bites him a couple times. He runs at Salina, but the midgets trip him up and hold him down as the poison takes effect. Salina then puts out his eye, with her stiletto heel before he succumbs leaving Charley all by himself. + +“Well Charley, it seems all your grand plans have failed. You have nothing left. I’d say there’s no reason for you to stay. Atlas, if you would be so kind to escort this former employee of the premises…” + +When the Ring Master says that, it typically means “Atlas, after you break his neck make sure the body is properly disposed of.” + +Atlas grabs Charley who attempts to defend himself with his sharp stick, but instead it’s taken from him and broken. Then Charley’s spine is taken from him and broken. Atlas lumbers off in the darkness to get rid of Ajax and Charley’s bodies. + +“So, I trust we’ll have no problems Salina?” The Ring Master asks. +“No problems from me, I have all I need, or I soon will have.” +“Good, I suggest you and your new friends get some rest, we got a big show tomorrow.” + +While Salina and the munchkin brigade leave and the freaks disperse as well, the Ring Master calls you out. + +“Geek, you may come out of hiding, I’m sure you can see the danger is over, not that there ever was any.” +“I can’t believe it actually worked. Everything…” +“See? I told you, you underestimated yourself. Not only did you save the Carnival, but you stabilized it even more. I told you, I saw potential even when there was none apparent. Do you still want to be a Geek? You could be so much more if you just put in the effort. Charley used to do all my leg work, but now that he’s gone I need someone else to fit that role…would you be interested? Keep in mind that this new job would require a whole lot more responsibility and significantly less drinking as I would need you in a better frame of mind.” + +At one time you’d balk, but after seeing what you accomplished first hand, maybe you DO have potential. You accept and you’re given Charley’s old trailer. + +Time goes by and you stumble along the way with the first few months as you still have a really bad drinking problem, but fortunately the Ring Master is slightly understanding about that, and only sends Atlas to remind you ONCE to get it under control. (That incident really sets you on the straight and narrow) you get yourself cleaned up and actually become presentable. You’re more of an organizer than a main event now, but you still go ahead and bite some chicken heads off every now and then for the kids. + +Salina is a pretty fair and even handed business woman when it comes to the being new leader of the midgets. Much more than Charley, and she also has Pervus and his clown crew eliminated during one night. Apparently they got rough with one of her girls. They were all found dead the next day. Nobody said anything outright, but the fact that little snake bites were found on their bodies was a pretty good idea who was responsible. However, the Ring Master said nothing since Pervus and his friends had it coming for a long time, not to mention with them gone things actually improved morale wise. (People tend to work better when their aren’t evil demented clowns lurking around) + +You also see Salina and Sasha get very close in a way that makes you tingle in the nether regions. Now you know why Salina wanted you to get rid of Randal. Without Ajax to kick her around anymore, Sasha probably would’ve fell for Randal (You also found out Madam Orbec told him he needed to leave the Carnival to find some magic book in some Mayan ruins that the spirits commanded him to retrieve…he never returned) but since he wasn’t around, she ended up with Salina. They seem to be happy though. + +Actually everyone at the Carnival seems to be a lot happier and more relaxed and it’s all due to your actions. + +The Ring Master has given you a second chance at life, a life with a whole hell of lot more meaning. + +You’ve gotten respect at last.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You cautiously approach Salina’s trailer, you’re nervous as hell. You stop and hide behind a nearby barrel when you see someone coming out. It’s Sasha. She looks like she’s been crying, probably about Ajax no doubt. Salina seems to be telling her something and then hugs her before closing the door. When Sasha leaves you knock on Salina’s door. She answers. + +“Look, I told you…UGH! Its you! Get the fuck outta here Geek! No amount of money is gonna make me degrade myself for your festering ass! And you’re upsetting my snakes with your odor!” +“No, it’s not that, I really gotta talk to you.” +“You don’t have anything to say that I wanna waste my time OR my sense of smell on, so…” +“Please it s really important! It’s about Charley and the future of the Carnival!” + +Salina raises her eyebrow. + +“Hmm, very well, but you’re not coming in here, let’s go someplace secluded where nobody can see me associating with you.” + +You and Salina walk to a nearby spot in the wilderness (Separately of course) to talk where you explain the situation to Salina. + +“Yeah, so what does all this mean to me? If Charley takes over I win and if the Ring Master stays in power I still win. I don’t see why I should get involved in this power struggle.” Salina says unemotionally. + +“You’re not looking at the big picture. As it stands now you got some measure of freedom, but if Charley wins, this place will cease being a Carnival and become a crime ring. And while you might do alright gift and money wise, you’ll be Charley’s girlfriend full time at that point with little freedom. You know he’s never going to let you do anything without his approval if he’s in power. And if the Ring Master wins, chances are the criminal activity here is gonna be severely diminished without Charley to run it, meaning you’ll probably be making less money.” +“Okay…but don’t you want the Ring Master to win?” +“Yes, but she needs allies and I’m trying to get the midgets to ally with him and they won’t if Charley’s in charge of them.” +“So I don’t understand, what exactly are you proposing? You’re kind of all over the place here.” +“I’m saying I want YOU to take over Charley’s position. You run all his business dealings.” +“What? You’re crazy Geek.” +“Why? You’re intelligent; surely you probably know all of Charley’s secrets.” +“Well THAT’S true. The little fucker insists on bragging about everything after sex, but what makes you think the midgets will follow me? I mean I’m a Normal.” +“Please, you’re a tall beautiful woman, the midgets will love you, didn’t you see Wizard of Oz? Just as long as you promise to uphold all the things Charley did like protection from being bullied by rubes and keeping their payment the same, I don’t think they’ll mind you in charge instead of Charley. Think about it, YOU could be in charge of the whole operation, and it’s not like the Ring Master will bother you as long as you don’t try to screw with the everyday Carnival workings.” + +“I’d never do that, the Carnival has been like a home to me…I…” + +Salina seems to stop herself before she displays too much emotion to you. + +“Alright Geek, I’m willing to entertain this idea, but you have to do something for ME first.” +“Okay, what?” +“You gotta get rid of Randal.” +“What? Why? What did he do?” +“To me? Nothing, but he’s competition and I can’t have that.” +“Competition for what?” +“Nevermind, just get rid of him. Think of it this way, if you get him out of the picture, you’ll also eliminate the leader of the third faction here which would really cement the Ring Master’s supremacy here. Surely that should be incentive enough?” +“You want me to kill him?!” +“Look, I don’t care HOW you get rid of him, just get rid of him before show time. If you do that, you can tell the midgets that I’ll be taking over Charley’s position when the time comes. Now don’t speak to me again until you do this.” + +Looks like you got MORE work ahead of you and you really don’t know how you’re supposed to get rid of Randal. You doubt if just asking him to leave is going to work, and while killing him would solve the problem, it’s not really that simple to just kill a man even if you had it in you. + +You could really use a drink… +> Kill Randal +You’ll have to kill him. It’s the only way, since he’ll never listen to you. You need a drink to get you ready for this though. + +You sneak over to Charley’s still, thankfully it’s not being manned right now. You down a couple of bottle of the toxic swill, spilling some of it on yourself. After you’re sufficiently “prepared” you steal one of the midget’s hammers and head to Randal’s tent. + +It’s now or never… + +You enter Randal’s tent which seems a lot larger on the inside than it does on the outside, but you figure it’s the booze is effecting your perception. You see Randal getting dressed with his back to you. Excellent. + +You creep as quietly as you can in your condition, step right behind him with the hammer raised up high and then… + +He disappears before your eyes! + +You do a double take, thinking it’s the booze again, but then you feel a tap on your shoulder, causing you to turn around to a fiery flash. Not very good in any case especially since Charley’s brew that you spilled on yourself earlier makes you quite flammable. You run around his tent attempting to put yourself out. + +“Didn’t you think I could SMELL you approaching Geek?” Randal says. “I have no idea why you would attempt something so foolish as to try to kill me, but I’ve always said the Carnival would be a lot better without the likes of you! TABAXINDOGA!” + +Whatever Randal just said causes all your limbs to freeze up. The good news is you aren’t on fire anymore, the bad news is you’re turning to stone! Randal looks noticeably exhausted after casting his spells, but he’s still holding all the cards. + +“I hate to waste such power on you, especially before showtime. (Pant) it really takes a lot out of me, but sometimes such actions are necessary when being attacked. I’ll have to inform Madam Orbec that the new spell she taught me works perfectly… I’ll take that hammer, it’ll come in handy.” + +As your body becomes completely stone, the last thing you see is Randal swinging the hammer at your head before it breaks into several pieces.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Charley leads the Midgets and you doubt if he’s going “fall in line” and even if he claimed he was, he’d just be lying. You might even be putting yourself in great danger by speaking to him directly about this, however you know the Midgets don’t really care for Charley, so if you could get him out of the way somehow, they might be more willing to ally with the Ring Master. + +You decide to “test the waters” by speaking to one of the few Midgets (Actually the only one) that’s somewhat less hostile towards you. You see Bob working on hammering tent stakes in the ground and go up to him. + +“Hey Bob, can I talk to you?” +“Aw hell Geek, I ain’t got no money for you to get fucking drunk! Just go steal the liquor from that sonofabitch Charley and take your goddamn chances!” he says barely paying attention to you. +“No, its not that…so you uh think Charley’s a son of a bitch huh?” +“I don’t think it, I know it. Everyone does.” +“So why do you guys follow him?” +“Because he does make things better for us. Better than the Ring Master did anyway.” +“Yeah, but what if he’s not the best choice to lead you guys, I mean…” + +Bob raises one eyebrow and focuses all of his attention on you now. + +“What the fuck are you talkin’ about Geek? You seem to be awfully interested with matters that don’t concern you.” Bob states raising his hammer menancingly. +“Well um…I just heard that…um Charley…I mean…look there’s some shit gonna go down and the Ring Master wants me to get people on his side!” + +You’re unsure of what Bob’s going to do about your revelation. You expect the worst, but for once luck is on your side. + +“Look Geek, I ain’t gonna lie to ya, not many of us like Charley, and sure, he’s a fucking tyrant, but he gets things done, I dunno he’s kinda like that guy in Germany, except shorter. However, if he wasn’t around, we’d go back to being second class citizens again and why? We DO keep this place running. The Ring Master claims he cares about us, but it doesn’t seem that way to us. We’re under appreciated. And if Charley does have ideas about taking over, then we’re behind him. Maybe the whole place would be run a lot better with him in charge anyway. AND I suggest you don’t talk to any other dwarves about this, you’ll find that you’ll get the same answer and they might just feel the need to tell Charley about the discussion and I don’t think that would be very good for you.” +“So there’s nothing I can do or say to change your mind?” +“Goddamn it, weren’t you fuckin’ listening Geek? I said no! Not unless you found someway of replacing Charley with someone a little more even tempered and with his business savvy.” +“Well, why don’t one of you midg…I mean dwarves do it?” +“(Sigh) Because most of us are simple laborers. We just wanna do our job with as little hassle and relax when we can, we don’t wanna be worried about extra shit. Let Charley worry about it since he wants it so bad. Besides if you haven’t noticed he’s got a mean streak a mile wide and that fuckin’ muscle bound freak Ajax around him all the time.” +“So there’s nobody who’d want to take Charley’s place?” +“Nope. The only one I can think of who’d even have the intelligence of running the criminal activity here smoothly anyway would be his overgrown girlfriend Salina. Now her I wouldn’t mind working under if you know what I mean! Hah! Now get the fuck outta here Geek, I got work to do and your smell is gonna stick to my clothes for days! Get!” + +You back away from Bob before he hits you with his hammer or kicks you in the shin. + +It wasn’t what you expected, but perhaps Bob has subtlety shown you a way to get the midgets to ally with the Ring Master, but of course this means talking with Salina. That could be even more risky though, considering she’s the object of Charley’s “love”. Not to mention she doesn’t particularly like you. + +But then again, who does? +> Go convince the Normals instead +The Midgets are firmly in the camp of Charley. Your only hope is to convince the Normals and that’s not going to be easy either. A lot of them don’t like you and most of them are “unified” under Randal and he doesn’t like you either. + +The only thing you can of is to talk to Madam Orbec. She has the most contact with Randal, maybe you can get her help. + +You approach Madam Orbec’s tent which has an air of creepiness about it. You see her gazing into a crystal ball. + +“Geek! You foul aura disturbs the spirits!” +“Um, sorry…but I need your…” +“Yes, yes, yes, I know you want my help.” +“How did you know that?” +“I see what the spirits see! And the spirits see all! You want me to convince Randal to convince the Normals to side with the Ring Master in the upcoming battle tonight!” +“Uh…yeah.” +“I suppose I could do that…but I won’t, at least not directly…” +“So you’re not going to help me?” +“I didn’t say that, the spirits say that you can’t get something for nothing however…since you seem to be in such a noble mood Geek, then you won’t mind performing another noble deed. A deed that will help you as well as us.” +“Well, what is it?” + +Madam Orbec starts talking to herself. + +“Could be a suicide mission. So? Yeah, no risk to us. What about the other thing? Will solve itself.” + +“You must get rid of the beautiful Sasha’s abusive boyfriend Ajax once and for all. Do this and we shall help you.” Orbec says addressing you. +“WHAT?! How the hell am I supposed to do that? And why?” +“Do not question the spirits’ wisdom! Just DO! Now leave and don’t return until you complete this task!” + +You exit Orbec’s tent. You’ve got an impossible job to do. Ajax is a vicious thug who beats you for fun on several occasions, there’s no way you can beat him even if you had the killer instinct which you don’t. You’re going to need some help. +> Talk to Sasha +Maybe you can talk directly to Sasha about this. Surely since she’s the one taking the abuse she’d be for getting rid of Ajax. Maybe she’ll even know some tips on weaknesses or something. You head to her trailer. + +She answers the door and looks obviously disgusted. + +“Ew! What’re you doing here Geek? Get outta here, you’re stinky!” +“Wait Sasha, I got a proposal for ya!” +“Excuse me?! This isn’t Salina’s trailer! And I doubt she’d degrade herself for you either! Goodbye!” +“WAIT! This is about Ajax! And about how to get rid of him for good!” + +Sasha suddenly stops trying to get rid of you and seems more willing to listen. + +“How?” +“I dunno, but I’ve seen how he treats you and it isn’t right. Nobody does anything, well I’m just saying I’ve had enough of seeing him push everyone around, especially you!” + +Sasha looks a bit touched by your remark, but then quickly speaks. + +“Okay look, he’ll be coming soon, he always has a drink when he comes over, and I’ll drug it. He’ll get drowsy and fall asleep, BUT you’ll have to finish him off. Many times I’ve though about it, but I just can never bring myself to do it…you’ll have to do it. Please free me from this brute once and for all.” +“I will Sasha.” +“Thank you…I guess underneath the grime you’re alright Geek…now go hide by that barrel over there, I’ll give the signal when he’s asleep!” + +You quickly run over to the barrel and hide. Soon you see Ajax enter Sasha’s trailer. While you wait, you can’t believe what just happened. Sasha actually seemed nice to you. You’ve never experienced that before. And could it be that you saw a glint of something in her eyes when she thanked you? Maybe after all this is over you and Sasha might have something. You never thought this could be possible. You feel positive and confident…you know you’ll have the strength to do in Ajax, he doesn’t deserve a beauty like Sasha anyway. He doesn’t deserve life. + +While you’re thinking about all this you see Sasha come back out of her trailer and wave at you. She has a knife in her hand, obviously what she’s going to give you to do in Ajax which you’ll take great pleasure in. After all this is over, Sasha is going to see you as her savior… + +Nice fantasy Geek. + +The sad truth is much worse though. + +When Ajax arrived he could tell you were around because your stench was still clinging to the door. Then he questioned Sasha about it. And the funny thing about abuse victims is they always side with their abuser before siding with someone who’s trying to help them. She didn’t just tell him everything, but she’s also lured you back into the lion’s den as it were… + +When you get to the doorway, Ajax pulls Sasha back inside roughly, and grabs you. + +“I’ve been looking for a good excuse Geek! I’m gonna enjoy this!” + +Ajax pulls you inside, and enjoys beating you to death. + +Oh how he enjoys it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Midgets are firmly in the camp of Charley. Your only hope is to convince the Normals and that’s not going to be easy either. A lot of them don’t like you and most of them are “unified” under Randal and he doesn’t like you either. + +The only thing you can of is to talk to Madam Orbec. She has the most contact with Randal, maybe you can get her help. + +You approach Madam Orbec’s tent which has an air of creepiness about it. You see her gazing into a crystal ball. + +“Geek! You foul aura disturbs the spirits!” +“Um, sorry…but I need your…” +“Yes, yes, yes, I know you want my help.” +“How did you know that?” +“I see what the spirits see! And the spirits see all! You want me to convince Randal to convince the Normals to side with the Ring Master in the upcoming battle tonight!” +“Uh…yeah.” +“I suppose I could do that…but I won’t, at least not directly…” +“So you’re not going to help me?” +“I didn’t say that, the spirits say that you can’t get something for nothing however…since you seem to be in such a noble mood Geek, then you won’t mind performing another noble deed. A deed that will help you as well as us.” +“Well, what is it?” + +Madam Orbec starts talking to herself. + +“Could be a suicide mission. So? Yeah, no risk to us. What about the other thing? Will solve itself.” + +“You must get rid of the beautiful Sasha’s abusive boyfriend Ajax once and for all. Do this and we shall help you.” Orbec says addressing you. +“WHAT?! How the hell am I supposed to do that? And why?” +“Do not question the spirits’ wisdom! Just DO! Now leave and don’t return until you complete this task!” + +You exit Orbec’s tent. You’ve got an impossible job to do. Ajax is a vicious thug who beats you for fun on several occasions, there’s no way you can beat him even if you had the killer instinct which you don’t. You’re going to need some help. +> Talk to Pervus +You figure Pervus the clown is the only possible candidate to help you in this endeavor. He’s immoral enough and doesn’t have any allegiances. You don’t relish the idea of going anywhere near the clown tent though; everyone knows what terrible things they do to trespassers in there. Fortunately you find Pervus harassing one of the acrobats. She looks terrified, by this scary overbearing clown + +“Aw come on, I just wanna get to know ya better. You’re so pretty and young with a nice tight ass. What I could do with that for about an hour…” + +Suddenly Pervus goes to grab at the acrobat, but she leaps out of the way and runs off in fear. + +“Fuckin’ cock teasin’ bitch…(sniff sniff) I know that smell…smells like a dead dog’s asshole after I busted a nut in it…Geek…what the hell do you want?” +“Uh hello Pervus…I uh, need your help with something.” +“Oh do ya now? What might that be?” +“I need to get rid of Ajax and I need your help to do it.” +“Whoa, hold on there first of all what makes you think I’d help you without asking for something in return, and second of all, Ajax isn’t exactly easy prey if you know what I mean.” +“Well…what would convince you…and NOT THAT!” + +Pervus chuckles. + +“Feh, maybe some of my boys might like a piece of your filthy ass, but I’m a little more discriminating…actually you got me in a unique mood. I’m willing to help you. Ajax pisses me off every time I go try to get some liquor from Charley. Walkin’ around displayin’ that perfect physique. He really needs to be taken down a fuckin’ peg. In fact he NEEDS to be pegged in the fuckin’ ass. Tell ya what, you get Ajax to come over to the clown tent and we’ll do the rest. He’s had this coming for a long time.” Pervus says stroking his crotch. +“You gonna kill him?” +“No, but I suggest you not ask what we ARE going to do to him. Trust me though; you’ll never see him again.” +“Uh, okay…but how the hell am I supposed to get him to go over to your tent, nobody ever goes over there!” +“Well I suggest you think of something, if you want our help. See you later and hopefully with a certain Strongman in tow.” + +Facing Ajax one on one is NOT what you had in mind! You’re going to have to do it though. You could attempt to make up a story which may or may not work, or you could go with a much dangerous approach and piss him off so he chases you there. The problem with that approach is you’re a dead Geek if he catches you. +> Convince Ajax with a story +You don’t want to piss Ajax off anymore than what’s necessary, so you decide to come up with a story that Charley needs him to go get some money the clowns to because they haven’t been paying their latest gambling debts. + +You look around for Ajax, but he’s nowhere around, typical. The one time you WANT to find him you can’t. Eventually you do see him entering Sasha’s trailer, you go to knock on the door. He answers it, and already looks pissed. + +“You got some fuckin’ balls Geek, disturbing me while I’m tryin’ to get me some pussy! This better be REALLY important!” +“It is, Charley wants you to go to the clown tent, apparently they gambled on something or other and didn’t pay up, so he wants you to go get the money from them.” + +Ajax, gives you a hard look. + +“Why didn’t Charley come tell me himself, in fact this is the first I’m hearing about this and I certainly don’t understand why he’d send YOU to tell me.” +“Well I just happened to be around at his still and he was ranting about some private bet he had with Pervus and well you know Charley…he ended up prodding me with his stick and ordered me to go get you to collect the debt from the clowns.” +“I smell bullshit and I don’t like bein’ fuckin’ disturbed from fucking my bitch, let alone by the likes of you! I dunno what your fuckin’ angle is Geek, but since you seem to be so interested in the clown tent, let’s go asshole!” + +Ajax grabs you and raises you above his head with a vice like grip. You attempt to escape, but it’s useless. He walks all the way to the clown tent, where inhuman noises are emanating. + +“Hey you fuckin’ clowns, here’s a new fuck toy for ya!” Ajax yells and throws you inside. + +Pervus and his crew were working themselves up into a sexual frenzy waiting for Ajax to enter, but instead you got thrown in. They’re all a bit disappointed, but they fuck you anyway, no sense in wasting an erection. + +You never return from the horrors inflicted on you in the tent that day, and you are forced to serve their twisted pleasures day in day out, never to exit the tent.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You figure Pervus the clown is the only possible candidate to help you in this endeavor. He’s immoral enough and doesn’t have any allegiances. You don’t relish the idea of going anywhere near the clown tent though; everyone knows what terrible things they do to trespassers in there. Fortunately you find Pervus harassing one of the acrobats. She looks terrified, by this scary overbearing clown + +“Aw come on, I just wanna get to know ya better. You’re so pretty and young with a nice tight ass. What I could do with that for about an hour…” + +Suddenly Pervus goes to grab at the acrobat, but she leaps out of the way and runs off in fear. + +“Fuckin’ cock teasin’ bitch…(sniff sniff) I know that smell…smells like a dead dog’s asshole after I busted a nut in it…Geek…what the hell do you want?” +“Uh hello Pervus…I uh, need your help with something.” +“Oh do ya now? What might that be?” +“I need to get rid of Ajax and I need your help to do it.” +“Whoa, hold on there first of all what makes you think I’d help you without asking for something in return, and second of all, Ajax isn’t exactly easy prey if you know what I mean.” +“Well…what would convince you…and NOT THAT!” + +Pervus chuckles. + +“Feh, maybe some of my boys might like a piece of your filthy ass, but I’m a little more discriminating…actually you got me in a unique mood. I’m willing to help you. Ajax pisses me off every time I go try to get some liquor from Charley. Walkin’ around displayin’ that perfect physique. He really needs to be taken down a fuckin’ peg. In fact he NEEDS to be pegged in the fuckin’ ass. Tell ya what, you get Ajax to come over to the clown tent and we’ll do the rest. He’s had this coming for a long time.” Pervus says stroking his crotch. +“You gonna kill him?” +“No, but I suggest you not ask what we ARE going to do to him. Trust me though; you’ll never see him again.” +“Uh, okay…but how the hell am I supposed to get him to go over to your tent, nobody ever goes over there!” +“Well I suggest you think of something, if you want our help. See you later and hopefully with a certain Strongman in tow.” + +Facing Ajax one on one is NOT what you had in mind! You’re going to have to do it though. You could attempt to make up a story which may or may not work, or you could go with a much dangerous approach and piss him off so he chases you there. The problem with that approach is you’re a dead Geek if he catches you. +> Get Ajax to chase you +He’ll see through a lie, and even if he can’t he won’t want to listen to anything you have to say anyway. There’s nothing for it, you have to have him chase you there. He’s going to be pissed off anyway. + +You look around for Ajax, but he’s nowhere around, typical. The one time you WANT to find him you can’t. Eventually you do see him entering Sasha’s trailer. You take a deep breath and start throwing stones at it, calling him out. + +“Hey asshole, stop hiding behind Sasha in there and get out here!” + +Plink! Plink! Plink! + +“Hey motherfucker I’m talkin’ to you! I know you ain’t still fuckin’ Sasha. Everyone knows you don’t last that long!” + +Plink! Plink! Plink! + +You’re actually having so much fun shouting and throwing things, it almost comes to a shock to you when Ajax comes storming out like a mad bull. He is wicked pissed. + +“YOU’RE FUCKING DEAD GEEK!” + +You throw the rest of your stones at him and run as fast as you can. You just hope you can make it to the clown tent before he catches you. + +Somehow despite Ajax being in better shape than you in every way, you are surprisingly faster than him, maybe its from all that protein from the pig uteruses you’ve had to consume over the years…or perhaps its just fear. Either way it gets the job done. + +You arrive at the clown tent stopping right at the entrance with Ajax not far behind; you see the glinting eyes and hellish grins peering from the unnatural darkness within it. The slurping and hideous laughter makes you REALLY hesitant to actually enter. In your current situation you feel like you’re bordering on the edge of madness with fury seeking to drive you into it. + +And that’s exactly what happens, while you’re stopped at the edge of the clown tent. Ajax tackles you hard, where upon the both of you roll into the clown tent. + +Its pitch dark in here and you don’t know how that’s even possible, but it is. You feel Ajax’s heavy body suddenly be lifted off of you along with several bottle sounds breaking. You can feel several glass particles fall down onto you. + +“AGH FUCK MY HEAD! GODDAMN CLOWN FUCKERS!” Ajax yells. + +You begin the crawl on the floor to get to the outside of the tent, but you’re not sure where the hell the entrance is anymore, the clowns have closed the flap. Apparently they have no intention on letting either of you escape. The only thing working to your advantage is they’re having a hard time subduing Ajax. It’s all very frightening to you though when you begin to hear Ajax scream in a high pitched falsetto voice, you never thought you’d ever hear something like that. The other sounds you hear from the clowns you don’t even want to think about. + +You keep crawling in the darkness hoping to reach the edge of the tent. It seems like forever, but eventually you feel the canvas, you then grab at the bottom and pull up; a beam of daylight enters. + +“STOP THAT GEEK!” you hear one of the clowns yell causing you to scramble out of the tent as fast as possible. You feel a hand grab your foot and attempt to pull you back in. You kick several times with your other foot and once again luck shines down and the clown releases you long enough for you to escape. + +You run back to Madam Orbec’s tent, who glances up at you from her crystal ball. + +“Ah, you’ve returned and from what the spirits have told me, you were successful…good. I will speak to Randal about siding with the Ring Master when the time comes. You may leave.” + +You’re still a little bewildered by her attitude, but you’re not going to press the issue, you got what you wanted. Time to report back to the Ring Master. + +You tell the Ring Master that he’ll have her allies when the time comes when you go back to his trailer though. (After getting Atlas’ permission to enter of course) The Ring Master seems confident in you and tells you to get ready for show time. + +You spend your remaining time a little on edge, wondering if everything is going to work out. You really wish the Ring Master hadn’t put all this pressure on you. + +Then show time arrives, everything goes pretty much the same except Charley looks a bit distracted the whole time as Ajax is nowhere to be seen. Pervus and his clowns seem to keep waving at you and making obscene gestures whenever they can. +> But the real show begins afterwards +A dark moonlit night. + +Charley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him. The Ring Master has Atlas, and his usual allies, the Freaks are hanging in the darkness ready to strike if necessary. Most of the Normals though are nowhere to be seen. You hope Madam Orbec did her job, because even without Ajax, Charley still has a numerical superiority and a pissed off midget can do a lot of damage. + +“Your time has come Ring Master! No longer will you exploit us! I’m taking over!” +“So you can exploit your own people of course. Charley, I’ve put up with your delusions of grandeur long enough, it ends tonight. I have allies of my own, and you might find they are much more dedicated to me than yours are.” +“It won’t work Ringy, I got more in common with my people than you ever will! Blood is thicker, and yours is going to run everywhere if you don’t peaceably leave…I’m giving you this one chance you pale she-male.” +“Not likely.” + +At this point all of the freaks come out of hiding, and then Randal and most of the Normals appear as well. Pervus also shows up with his clown crew, and that’s when you see Ajax, or what’s left of him. He’s dressed in a weird leather getup and has a chain around his neck which one of the clowns is holding. There’s also a black leather mask covering his face now and some sort of ball gag…he looks completely docile and broken. + +Suddenly Charley seems to get a little less hostile, the rest of the midgets also look less than willing to fight now, though he’s still not backing down completely. + +“…so that’s what happened to Ajax…(Sigh)…alright Ringy you win. I can see I can’t beat you…I’ll leave. BUT! I’m taking my people with me!” +“No you won’t, they work for me.” +“The fuck I can’t! They’re still fuckin’ free people! You don’t fuckin’ OWN them Ringy! They ain’t your slaves!” +“Oh and I suppose they’re YOUR slaves eh?” +“Fuck it, let’s settle this.” Charley turns around to his fellow midgets. “Hey, do you want to work for me and make some serious money doing something a lot less menial? Or do ya wanna work for this hypocritical slave driving bitch bastard who claims everyone is free to do what they want and has his protection, but in reality she doesn’t do shit for anyone but herself and just expects everyone to obey him?” + +The midgets talk to each other for a moment and then reply with a uniformed answer that they want to stay with Charley. The Ring Master actually looks surprised, she even gets mad claiming all of what he’d done for them, but it doesn’t work. Charley was right they have more in common with him than they do the Ring Master. Charley leaves with his midget gang. The Ring Master looks like he’s going to order an attack, but decides against it. Instead he just assigns some Normals to do the job of the midgets and orders the rest to seek out new recruits in the next town. + +Everyone disperses leaving just the Ring Master, Atlas and you alone. The Ring Master for once looks a bit despondent. Not knowing what else to do, you attempt to lighten the situation. + +“Well you won, I’m just glad I didn’t mess things up for you.” +“Yes, for now, but there will only be problems in the future. What happened to tonight was just a temporary patch for the situation…I suppose you did your best within your capabilities Geek. No more could be expected of you. The Carnival will survive, just like it always has though…return to your cell, we have a big show to do tomorrow and significantly less help.” + +And you do exactly that and continue on as usual + +Time passes and while nothing really changes for you, things do change… + +Without the midgets around to do most of the manual labor of setting things up, some of the less talented Normals like game barkers and such have to double as laborers. This causes some bad feelings initially until the Ring Master orders the Freaks to start helping as well. The Freaks seem to dislike the fact that the Ring Master isn’t “favoring” them as much anymore, but she’s just trying to keep things fair so his Carnival stays together. The criminal activity goes down quite a bit. (Though someone’s always still making hooch so happily you still have a steady supply of booze to grab) + +With Ajax out of the way Sasha grows closer to Randal who returns these feelings. This new relationship makes him a little less “uptight” and more willing to take chances and less likely to go running to Madam Orbec before he does anything. His “threats” of taking over start becoming more likely. Another rift in the Carnival is expected to occur and finally does, starting with the fiery death of Pervus and his clowns. + +Since the Ring Master was always looking for more help, Pervus and his clown crew took it upon themselves to start “recruiting” unsuspecting townies and rubes to come work for the Carnival, this causes them to start engaging in debauchery on a bigger scale than before, to an extent that they become a liability and more obvious. Randal, still having a great sense of ethics and morality could not stand by and let it go on any longer. He and several other Normals set fire to the entire tent in the middle of the night killing them all. (And putting the “Gimpjax” out of his misery.) + +The Ring Master was furious that Randal would take such a liberty. Another battle comes close to occurring, but fortunately for the Ring Master,(Who would’ve been greatly outnumbered) Randal doesn’t want to fight over the Carnival, instead he convinces his followers to leave while they started their OWN Carnival. One that was more family friendly and without Freaks all over the place. He leaves with Sasha and most of the other Normals in tow. + +The Carnival becomes much smaller and is little more than a traveling Freak show as they are practically the only ones still left. The Ring Master doesn’t seem to mind though, as he said, the Carnival would survive, maybe not in the same way, but its still around. + +And you still remain the GEEK.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Agh! Alright, alright! Stop poking me…what day is it?” +“Never mind all that geek! Get going you know how the Ring Master doesn’t like being kept waiting! Phew! You smell even more disgusting than usual! I guess that’s one way to keep Ajax from killing you, he’d probably vomit his guts out before he could lay a hand on you…then you could lick it up for the rubes! Ha ha! Move it Geek!” + +Charley prods you with a sharp stick periodically on your way to the Ring Master’s trailer until you arrive at which point, Atlas stops the both of you. + +“Stop! What business do the both of you have here?” +“Goddamnit you fuckin’ one eyed freak! We go through this all the fucking time and its getting REALLY old! You just saw me come out of the Ring Master’s trailer earlier today when he sent me to get the Geek, you know damn well what we’re both doing here!” + +Ignoring Charley’s comments Atlas looks down at you and points. + +“You may enter, but the Ring Master doesn’t need to see you again, so you may not.” +“Yeah, whatever enjoy the smell.” Charley says and mumbles something to himself while leaving the area. + +You barely make it up the little steps to the trailer, but you do. You’re finally starting to gather your wits together; your head still hurts though and you’ve just realize you haven’t had a drink yet. What a terrible feeling. You open the door. + +“Close the door, you’re letting all the sunlight in.” the Ring Master orders from behind his desk. She’s siting in his chair, but has her back turned to you. +“Uh you wanted to see me?” +“Of course…(Sniff sniff) you really haven’t been taking care of yourself. If anything you’ve become even more repulsive than when I first took you in. Remember that day?” +“Um, yeah I think…no, no I don’t. I mean kind of… I forget things.” +“I’m not surprised; you’re constantly drinking that swill Charley makes. I am surprised you haven’t gone blind yet though. Oh well what you insist on doing to yourself is of little concern to me, all I require is your obedience. You are thankful for all I have provided for you aren’t you?” +“Oh yeah. Sure I am.” +“You seem to be one of the few nowadays then. There are some though that are ungrateful for things I’ve done for them, they plan to betray me and everything this carnival stands for. They plan to change the natural order of things. Can you imagine what might happen to this carnival if I wasn’t here? What might happen to you?” + +You attempt to think about this scenario, but instead you just stand there because you can’t really form anything in your mind because it hurts really bad, you’ve been sober too damn long, and it’s about to get even longer as the Ring Master seems intent on bombarding you with talk as he finally swivels around in her chair. That pale androgynous face of the Ring Master’s is displaying a look of seriousness as usual. + +“Nothing good I can assure you. Which is why I’m putting YOU in charge of this task.” +“Huh? What task?” +“Why ensuring the survival of the carnival of course.” +”What!? Me?! Why? How!? I’m not qualified! Can’t you or Charley do it?” +“I fear I’ve done all I’ve can. I mean I’ve provided all of THIS to everyone here. I’ve given them purpose and a life. If that isn’t enough for them, then my words aren’t going to make a difference at this point. And as for Charley, well…I’m sure even in your usual state of drunkenness you’re aware that he has his own plans for this carnival.” +“I guess…but agh, it’s too early for all this…why me? I mean what am I supposed to do? I’m just the Geek.” +“Yes, and that’s exactly why I’m choosing you. You have no motive, you have no agenda, you have no friends, and as such you would probably be the best candidate to convince others to resist change and keep the status quo.” +“You have to be joking! Nobody’s going to listen to me! I’m the fucking Geek!” +“You might be surprised, you have far more potential than you give yourself credit for…perhaps you’ll even change some perspectives, or maybe not. The choice is yours, because the fate of THIS carnival is resting solely on your actions, you can no longer afford to hide from the world in a bottle and a cage if you wish to keep your current life. It is time for you to take some responsibility, its time to repay the debt you owe me. You have until show time.” +“But…” +“Now leave me, I wish to be alone.” + +The Ring Master swivels his chair back to its original position. You head back outside, where upon Atlas blocks it again with his massive body. + +Never before in your life have you been put in this kind of position of responsibility, (Not that you can remember anyway) but you’re going to have to do something, the question is what exactly? +> Get a drink +If you’re going to do anything you have to get a drink first, you head over to Charley’s still, you can only hope Ajax isn’t there. + +“What the fuck is that smell? Oh it’s the fucking lame ass Geek, why am I not surprised?” Ajax shouts when he sees you coming. + +Well so much for hope. Normally you’d run, but Charley’s also there and will keep Ajax from killing you (Maybe not beating you though) plus your reliance on alcohol in any form drives you on even in the presence of possible danger. + +“Lemme guess Geek, you want a drink?” Charley asks. “Ah good ol’ predictable Geek. Here you go.” + +Charley pours you some of the swill that you consider the Nectar of the Gods and drink it greedily. He pours you another when you finish it. Charley’s being unusually cool with you. + +“Can’t get enough eh? Here’s another…so what’d the Ring Master want to see you for?” +“Huh?” +“I said what the fuck did the Ring Master want to see you for? Surely it wasn’t about your act, you eat disgusting shit and that’s the end of it. So what did you talk about?” + +Charley’s demeanor has changed severely. He’s looking at you intently to determine if you’re going to lie to him. You’re thrown off guard and can only stutter a response. + +“Um, nothing much, he, um…I mean she…uh…” +“WRONG ANSWER GEEK!” Charley yells, punching you in the nuts and at his height, he lands a good hit. You collapse like a rag doll, and then Ajax puts his foot on your neck while you hold your scrotum in pain. + +Charley continues his interrogation this time with his sharp stick pointed near your eye. + +“Now you’re gonna tell me what you and that pale she male freak talked about or you’ll have something in common with Atlas! Talk!” +“(Groan) Alright! Okay! The Ring Master thinks change in this carnival is coming and he wants me to convince people that they should be on his side when the shit goes down!” + +Charley smirks and looks at Ajax. + +“You hear that Ajax? Some SHIT is supposed to go down! This is the first I’ve heard of any shit going down! You know about any shit going down Ajax?” +“Nope. First I’ve heard of it. The only shit that goes down around here that is what this fucking Geek eats!” +“Got that right…but just in case there WAS some SHIT going down, I’d say it would be in someone’s best interest to not be on the Ring Master’s side and be doing his bidding…after all they might find themselves getting hurt very badly.” +“Charley you don’t have to worry about me! Nobody’s going to listen to me, I’m just a Geek!” +“Of course I’m not worried about you! However…if the Ring Master asked YOU to do this, there must be a reason that I’m not readily seeing…I know! You’re working for me now!” +“What?!” Ajax asks. +“What?!” you repeat. + +“Yeah, all the shit the Ring Master told you to do; you’re doing for me now. Trust me you’ll be better off when I’m in charge. You can have all the booze you want, a bigger cell, hell I’ll even get you LAID! I know a couple of ladies who’ll debase themselves almost as much as you will!” + +Charley then gets in your face and whispers + +“And you won’t have to worry about Ajax ever hitting you again with me in charge I promise. But if you betray me, I’ll make sure Ajax breaks every bone in your goddamn body and then tosses you to Pervus and his fucked up clown army where they can skull fuck your corpse. Are we clear?” +“Yeah, yeah, sure!” you quickly say. +“Good. Ajax let him up.” + +You get up and Charley addresses you before you leave. + +“Remember, you have until show time Geek, and don’t even think about trying to run away, because I’ll find you and you know what happens then.” + +You stagger away with your new mission, you have no idea of how to go about this, so you just think about who might need convincing. + +God you could use another drink… +> Go convince the Freaks +Well, if you can get the freaks to side with Charley, everyone else should be pretty easy of course HOW you’re going to do that is another story. The Freak community is pretty loyal to the Ring Master and given your lowly status, you don’t know if they’re even going to listen to you. + +You approach the freak side of the Carnival. The instant you enter their camp, you’re watched and studied by many eyes (And some of those many eyes belong to the same freak), but at least nobody throws anything at your head. You don’t get far before Jasmine the Bearded Lady stops you. + +“Hey Geek! What’re you doing here? Aren’t you supposed to be doing something for the Ring Master?” +“Huh? How do you know about that?” +“Because we’re his supporters obviously Geek! What he knows we know and she knows all!” + +Obviously he doesn’t know all; otherwise the freaks would know you’re working for Charley now. + +“Anyway, you don’t need to come here to convince us to ally with the Ring Master, our loyalty to him is well known. Though I must admit I wonder why she chose you for this task, but I guess he has her reasons. I suggest you leave now, there’s nothing else for you here Geek.” +> Tell her the Freaks should change their allegiance +“Um, Jasmine maybe you should reconsider.” +“Reconsider what?” +“Well maybe siding with the Ring Master isn’t the best thing for you guys.” + +Those words suddenly causes all the freaks that were previously spying on you from their trailers, tents, and holes to come out and surround you. There’s no way to escape. Jasmine’s eyes narrow while she strokes her beard. + +“Oh? And who would YOU suggest we side with?” +“Well Charley makes this place really profitable and you know you’d have protection, even more than if the Ring Master kept running things.” +“CHARLEY? That little obnoxious creep? He’s a fucking low life and with more power he’d be a fucking dictator! There wouldn’t be the freedom that the Ring Master gives us!” +“How do you know? I mean he’s a midget, that’s almost like being a freak, he might understand your struggle. I mean I do and…” + +Suddenly you feel a crushing blow to the back of your head as Roger the Crustacean hits you with one of his claws. You then feel the stomping of various feet, hooves, talons and “other” on your body. You begin coughing up blood as your head is repeatedly kicked into the dirt. + +Jasmine then address you again while pulling your bloody head up. + +“You feel that? Hundreds of feet continuing to step on you as you struggle to rise up. THAT’S our struggle everyday. And now you know it. Hope you liked being one of us Geek.” + +Jasmine then lands a crunching blow your nose, pushing the bone up into your brain, killing you and ending your misery.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Well, if you can get the freaks to side with Charley, everyone else should be pretty easy of course HOW you’re going to do that is another story. The Freak community is pretty loyal to the Ring Master and given your lowly status, you don’t know if they’re even going to listen to you. + +You approach the freak side of the Carnival. The instant you enter their camp, you’re watched and studied by many eyes (And some of those many eyes belong to the same freak), but at least nobody throws anything at your head. You don’t get far before Jasmine the Bearded Lady stops you. + +“Hey Geek! What’re you doing here? Aren’t you supposed to be doing something for the Ring Master?” +“Huh? How do you know about that?” +“Because we’re his supporters obviously Geek! What he knows we know and she knows all!” + +Obviously he doesn’t know all; otherwise the freaks would know you’re working for Charley now. + +“Anyway, you don’t need to come here to convince us to ally with the Ring Master, our loyalty to him is well known. Though I must admit I wonder why she chose you for this task, but I guess he has her reasons. I suggest you leave now, there’s nothing else for you here Geek.” +> Leave +Mentioning anything against the Ring Master would be a death sentence at this point, so you keep your mouth shut and leave. + +As you leave the freaks, you notice a group of Pinheads congregating behind one of the trailers, when they see you they suddenly become quiet and stare at you with vacant smiles on their distorted faces. +> Approach them +The Pinheads are behaving very oddly, normally they’re gibbering or playing, they’re hardly ever this quiet. You approach them. + +“Hey, what’s going on?” you ask. + +They look up at you still vacantly smiling at you. +> Talk some more +“So, are you guys getting ready for your act tonight?” + +The Pinheads look at each other and then look at you and continue to smile vacantly. +> Talk even more +For some reason the Pinhead’s silence makes you feel welcome, normally everyone drives you off, you decide to talk more. + +“Yeah I got a new act, I bite the head off of a cat, vomit it back up and then eat it again with rotten chicken livers.” + +The Pinheads cease smiling, and begin to look utterly bored. +> Continue to talk to them +“Yeah, I remember one time I ate a dog bladder, kind of a bitter taste.” + +The Pinheads are now starting to get annoyed with you as you insist on telling them your “interesting” list of past dinners. + +You might want to stop. While the Pinheads aren’t normally abusive to you, you don’t exactly have a nice history with them and they have been known to get mean when something displeases them, much like young children do. +> Keep pushing it +“So one time…” +“Geek will you shut the fuck up? Shit, I can smell your rotten breath from here!” one of the Pinheads shouts, you’re absolutely stunned. + +“You…you can talk?!” + +The lead Pinhead gives a dirty look to the one who shouted at you, and then looks back. + +“Yeah we can talk, and now YOU know we can thanks to big mouth over here! Thanks a lot Frank!” +“Well he was getting on my nerves George!” +“But…if you can talk, why do you act like idiots?” +“Why do you eat all that nasty shit? For the money of course or in your case for the booze. You think we’d make as much if we didn’t act like little retarded children? We’re fucking ugly just like any freak, but by acting like simple minded children we come across as charming and harmless…cute even. Which makes us rube favorites. Nobody knows the truth, not even the other freaks, nobody except you…I guess we’ll have to kill you.” +“Hold on wait wait! Can’t we come to an agreement here? I mean I’m not going to tell anyone! And even if I did, who’d believe me?” +“Can’t take that chance.” + +You suddenly crumple to the ground and beg pathetically for your life at the feet of the George. He gives you a disdainful squinted expression. + +“Get off my feet Geek! Sheesh, you’re pathetic! We probably wouldn’t have killed you, maybe just cut out your tongue.” +“So you’ll let me live?” +“Yeah, but you’re still not getting off that easy. You gotta do something for us to make us trust you.” +“What?” +“Go to the clown tent and destroy all their sex toys.” +“WHAT?!” +“Shhhh! Stop fucking drawing attention!” +“You want me to go to the clown tent? But nobody in their right mind goes in there!” +“Duh, that’s why we’re sending you.” +“Why do you want me to do this?” +“Because those pedophile ass clowns are direct competition, they always draw all the children away from our act, and we’d like to get back at them in some way. It’ll really piss off Pervus when he sees his cock ring in pieces heh heh heh.” +“I don’t wanna touch those things! Who knows where they’ve been!” +“You’re kidding me right? This coming from the guy who eats cow ass for his grand finale. Look they’re mostly all in a big wooden box anyway so just set fire to the box or something. It’s not like you have a choice in this matter.” +“I dunno, I think death might be preferable to getting caught by the clowns.” +“(Sigh) Alright, I know you’re working for Charley you wanted to convince the Freaks to side with him in this ensuing struggle coming up…don’t ask us how we know, we just do. And it’s mainly because since much like you we hear a lot more because we’re considers idiots and non-threatening. If you do this, we’ll convince the Freaks to side with Charley, again don’t ask us how…we have our ways…do we have a deal now?” + +Knowing this is probably your best shot and if the Pinheads don’t kill you, Charley certainly will for your failure to get people to side with him, so you agree. + +“Good, return when you’ve completed the job, we’ll be playing around in this area until show time.” + +You leave the Pinheads who resume their pretend act of being morons while you resume your completely real act of being a moron for getting yourself into this mess. You don’t know how you’re going to do this. + +As you approach the tent, you notice how quiet it is. Normally loud insane rowdy laughter can be heard from within, but it’s silent which almost makes it scarier. You wonder if you shouldn’t just set the WHOLE tent on fire. In some ways you’d be doing the world a favor. You do wonder about how the Ring Master can just let such evil go unchecked. +> Set the whole tent on fire +You make up your mind and decide to save yourself some risk and set the whole tent on fire. You head back the Charley’s still, which luckily is unattended right now. You steal three bottles of his stuff and his Zippo lighter that he foolishly left near the volatile concoction. Before you leave you take another drink to calm your nerves. + +You return to the clown tent and start dowsing it with Charley’s booze trying not to be noticed and hopping no clown suddenly comes out of the tent. You continue to do this until you encircle the entire tent and run out of booze. You light it up… + +The entire tent goes up like tinder box, you didn’t expect it to go up so fast, and you’re a little singed yourself, as you fall backwards. You scramble away as other Carneys notice what’s happened and start calling for water. The clowns soon come running out screaming horribly while burning alive. Their faces literally melting off with all the makeup they were wearing. + +You are about to go see the Pinheads, but the carnival is in too much chaos, as your act of arson has had an unintended side effect. The burning clowns end up running hither, thither and yon, setting everything else on fire as well in their torment. Soon the entire Carnival is up in flames and its every man, woman, and freak for itself. + +Having no other options, you keep running until you reach the nearest town. You spend a couple days just bumming around the town and sleeping in the park until one night… + +“Hello, Geek.” You hear melodic voice say. Before you can reply a huge foot steps on your throat. It’s Atlas and the Ring Master. +“It wasn’t enough that you attempted to betray me, but you had to destroy my beloved Carnival. The Carnival that brought so much joy to others and gave jobs to the outcasts. Outcasts like you…well do you have anything to say?” + +Atlas relaxes his foot on your throat for just a bit for you to answer. + +“It…it…was an accident…” +“Hmm, an accident. Yes I made an accident too, time to correct it. Atlas.” + +“N…” + +Before you can get out the “o” Atlas brings his massive foot down on your throat utterly destroying your windpipe, your larynx, and your life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“So one time…” +“Geek will you shut the fuck up? Shit, I can smell your rotten breath from here!” one of the Pinheads shouts, you’re absolutely stunned. + +“You…you can talk?!” + +The lead Pinhead gives a dirty look to the one who shouted at you, and then looks back. + +“Yeah we can talk, and now YOU know we can thanks to big mouth over here! Thanks a lot Frank!” +“Well he was getting on my nerves George!” +“But…if you can talk, why do you act like idiots?” +“Why do you eat all that nasty shit? For the money of course or in your case for the booze. You think we’d make as much if we didn’t act like little retarded children? We’re fucking ugly just like any freak, but by acting like simple minded children we come across as charming and harmless…cute even. Which makes us rube favorites. Nobody knows the truth, not even the other freaks, nobody except you…I guess we’ll have to kill you.” +“Hold on wait wait! Can’t we come to an agreement here? I mean I’m not going to tell anyone! And even if I did, who’d believe me?” +“Can’t take that chance.” + +You suddenly crumple to the ground and beg pathetically for your life at the feet of the George. He gives you a disdainful squinted expression. + +“Get off my feet Geek! Sheesh, you’re pathetic! We probably wouldn’t have killed you, maybe just cut out your tongue.” +“So you’ll let me live?” +“Yeah, but you’re still not getting off that easy. You gotta do something for us to make us trust you.” +“What?” +“Go to the clown tent and destroy all their sex toys.” +“WHAT?!” +“Shhhh! Stop fucking drawing attention!” +“You want me to go to the clown tent? But nobody in their right mind goes in there!” +“Duh, that’s why we’re sending you.” +“Why do you want me to do this?” +“Because those pedophile ass clowns are direct competition, they always draw all the children away from our act, and we’d like to get back at them in some way. It’ll really piss off Pervus when he sees his cock ring in pieces heh heh heh.” +“I don’t wanna touch those things! Who knows where they’ve been!” +“You’re kidding me right? This coming from the guy who eats cow ass for his grand finale. Look they’re mostly all in a big wooden box anyway so just set fire to the box or something. It’s not like you have a choice in this matter.” +“I dunno, I think death might be preferable to getting caught by the clowns.” +“(Sigh) Alright, I know you’re working for Charley you wanted to convince the Freaks to side with him in this ensuing struggle coming up…don’t ask us how we know, we just do. And it’s mainly because since much like you we hear a lot more because we’re considers idiots and non-threatening. If you do this, we’ll convince the Freaks to side with Charley, again don’t ask us how…we have our ways…do we have a deal now?” + +Knowing this is probably your best shot and if the Pinheads don’t kill you, Charley certainly will for your failure to get people to side with him, so you agree. + +“Good, return when you’ve completed the job, we’ll be playing around in this area until show time.” + +You leave the Pinheads who resume their pretend act of being morons while you resume your completely real act of being a moron for getting yourself into this mess. You don’t know how you’re going to do this. + +As you approach the tent, you notice how quiet it is. Normally loud insane rowdy laughter can be heard from within, but it’s silent which almost makes it scarier. You wonder if you shouldn’t just set the WHOLE tent on fire. In some ways you’d be doing the world a favor. You do wonder about how the Ring Master can just let such evil go unchecked. +> Enter the tent +You cautiously enter the tent, fearing for your ass (Literally). + +As it turns out, all the clowns are all passed out from the night before. Looks like it was necrophilia this time, judging from the rotting corpses lying on the floor. In fact if you weren’t so rank yourself, the smell might actually bother you. Pervus doesn’t seem to be here though. + +Liquor bottles are everywhere; in fact you could probably grab one and dowse the box (Which is open and crammed full of whips, shackles and “insertion objects”) then take one of the Zippos lying on a table and light the box up easy. + +This is going to be simpler than you… + +Suddenly you feel a hand grab around your foot. + +“Hmm, yeah come here baby…” + +Before you can do anything one of the clowns has curled his face up next to your foot and began sucking your BIG TOE. + +This is REALLY disgusting, even for you. The only good thing is the clown seems to still be somewhat asleep. +> Remove your foot and get out of there +As you attempt to remove your foot the clown’s grip tightens, and then he wakes up completely. + +“What the…Hey fellas! Look what we got here! It’s the Geek! Let’s fuck the shit out of his ass and make him our permanent fuck toy!” + +The clowns suddenly all get up from their drunken slumber and surround you, there is no escape. The horrors that are unleashed upon you that day are best left unmentioned, but you never leave that tent ever again. You are no longer known as a Geek anymore, you are something much worse… + +You are now the GIMP.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You cautiously enter the tent, fearing for your ass (Literally). + +As it turns out, all the clowns are all passed out from the night before. Looks like it was necrophilia this time, judging from the rotting corpses lying on the floor. In fact if you weren’t so rank yourself, the smell might actually bother you. Pervus doesn’t seem to be here though. + +Liquor bottles are everywhere; in fact you could probably grab one and dowse the box (Which is open and crammed full of whips, shackles and “insertion objects”) then take one of the Zippos lying on a table and light the box up easy. + +This is going to be simpler than you… + +Suddenly you feel a hand grab around your foot. + +“Hmm, yeah come here baby…” + +Before you can do anything one of the clowns has curled his face up next to your foot and began sucking your BIG TOE. + +This is REALLY disgusting, even for you. The only good thing is the clown seems to still be somewhat asleep. +> Let him suck your toe +You don’t want to risk waking him, so you just let him finish...the sucking and slurping sound is unnerving. + +“Hmmm, yeah, your clit tastes so good…mmm.” + +You shutter to think what clits he’s been sucking and licking if he thinks YOUR toe is one and that it tastes good! + +Soon he seems to stop and mumbles something about being sorry for pissing the bed again. You safely move your foot away. Not wishing to have anything else of yours molested, you grab a bottle dowse the box, and then set it on fire with one of the lighters here and get out as fast you can. You can hear some of the clowns cursing and yelling from the tent in the distance. + +When you get back to the Pinheads they’re playing with a ball and laughing. Upon seeing you, George nods in your direction, as its safe to talk with nobody around. + +“I did it.” +“Yes, I know, I had Frank follow you. Good job.” +“So about your side of the deal…” +“Yes, don’t worry, we’ll honor it. Charley’s a good business man, he’ll make this place even more money…which means more money for us too, we don’t mind if he takes charge. You can go report to your new master the good news, but don’t you fucking DARE say shit about our true nature to anyone, EVER.” + +You agree and leave, you tell Charley the news before show time who chuckles heartily and tells you to be ready after the show because the revolution is coming after the rubes leave. Not wishing to run into the Ring Master before hand you hang around Charley’s still which isn’t too pleasant since you have to endure Ajax’s abuse while Charley goes off to make his preparations. + +Then show time arrives, everything goes pretty much the same except the Ring Master looks a little distracted the entire time and the clowns seem to be off their game tonight. The Pinheads take the opportunity to show them up in from of everyone. +> But the real show begins afterwards +A dark moonlit night. + +Charley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. The Ring Master has Atlas, and looks around for his usual allies, the Freaks, but they’re nowhere around. The Normals seem to be staying out of the fight for the most part, but chances are some of them will take one side or the other. + +“Your time has come Ring Master! No longer will you exploit us! I’m taking over!” +“And you all feel this way? You’d rather follow this criminal who’ll be corrupt? You really think he’s doing this out of some noble moral code? Obviously you must be blind if you don’t see that rule by this degenerate will be worse than anything you THINK I’m doing…but I leave it up to you…” +“It won’t work Ringy, I got more in common with my people than you do! Blood is thicker, and yours is going to run everywhere if you don’t peaceably leave…I’m giving you this one chance you pale she-male.” +“Not likely, I have my own friends as you know.” + +The Ring Master whistles and you arrive with all the Freaks behind you. He looks surprised to see you. + +“Geek?” +“Sorry, Ring Master, but we made a better deal.” You say and the Freaks advance. +“NO! Atlas, it’s just me and you now!” + +The battle ensues, though it’s not really a battle. A few of the normals side with the Ring Master, but sensing Charley’s got the winning hand most of them either just stay out of it or directly side with him. The only thing that makes the battle last longer is the fact that Pervus and his clowns side with the Ring Master as they still were mad about the Pinheads embarrassing them at show time. Atlas and Ajax lock horns, and while Atlas kills Ajax in the struggle, he is easily taken down by the midgets afterwards. Pervus and the clowns do some damage, but likewise they too are taken down. + +On the side lines watching, the bloodshed is too much for Randal and he leaves during the battle which has forever destroying his love of the carnival. Sasha leaves with him seeing that Ajax is no longer alive to hold power over her. + +Finally in the last moments Charley laughs as he stands over the Ring Master’s body which is now lifeless with Charley’s sharp stick through its heart. Meanwhile you were hiding during all this, but Charley calls you out. + +“Hey Geek! Come out you fuckin’ coward! We won! Come out, you ain’t gotta worry about Ajax anymore his goddamn neck is twisted all the way around, damn shame.” +“…I’m here Charley.” +“Good, unzip the Ring Master’s pants.” +“What?” +“Unzip the Ring Master’s pants, I wanna see what the hell he or she was packing. I had a bet going with Ajax and while I’m just gonna take everything from his trailer anyway, I still wanna see if I would’ve won fairly.” + +You’re a little hesitant, but your crouch over the body and start unzipping the Ring Master’s pants. A crowd begins to form around you. Normal, Midget and Freak alike. + +“Come on come Geek, we ain’t got all fuckin’ night.” Charley says while kicking you in the ribs. + +You pull down the underwear… + +“EEEEEEEEEEEWWWWWWWWW!” the crowd shouts in unison. +“Holy shit!” you say falling back. +“Ha ha, I knew it!” Charley chuckles before continuing. + +“Alright you lot, I want all these bodies cleaned up and disposed of before we head out to the next town, and Salina I want YOU in my new trailer to help me celebrate this glorious victory!” + +And so begins the reign of Charley the Ringmaster. Under his guidance midgets run everything and the Carnival doesn’t so much resemble a Carnival as it resembles a mobile grifting ring. While regular carnival activities still abound, they’re more of a cover than anything. In time, most of the high maintenance acts are done away with and eventually only thing that stays completely the same is the freak show, just to upkeep the front for what’s really going on. The Pinheads get their own special attraction since they take up the clown vacancy. + +You do somewhat better under the new management. You still do your act as it’s still a big draw; you get lumped in with the Freak Show. You don’t need to put up with Ajax’s abuse anymore so fearing for your life isn’t a factor. (Though the Pinheads still verbally warn you every now and then to ensure your secrecy) Charley uses you as a gopher, so you’re actually making money now (If little). He still kicks you around for his amusement, and is prone to dump a bucket of piss in your face to wake you up, but it’s better than what a Geek like you could’ve hoped for.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Yeah, I remember one time I ate a dog bladder, kind of a bitter taste.” + +The Pinheads are now starting to get annoyed with you as you insist on telling them your “interesting” list of past dinners. + +You might want to stop. While the Pinheads aren’t normally abusive to you, you don’t exactly have a nice history with them and they have been known to get mean when something displeases them, much like young children do. +> Go talk to the Normals +Since the Freaks are firmly behind the Ring Master, you might as well talk to the Normals, the problem is you have to talk to someone with some pull with most of them, and Remarkable Randal is the only one who has that in any great capacity and getting him to side with Charley is out of the question. + +At least directly. + +It’s possible you could talk with Madam Orbec and get her to convince Randal to change his stance since he follows anything she says; also she’s less likely to throw something at your head when she sees you approach. + +You head towards Madam Orbec’s tent, which has an air of creepiness surrounding it. You enter the tent and immediately get your usual welcome. + +“Geek! Begone from this place! Do not assault the spirits with your foulness!” Madam Orbec commands. +“They’re dead; I don’t really see how my smell can affect them.” +“It’s not your odor that offends the spirits, it’s your aura! We do not want you in our presence! Away with you, we have no wish to be involved in your underhanded dealings!” +“How do you know what I’m here for?” +“Fool! I am Madam Orbec! I see all that the spirits see! You’re working with that miscreant Charley in an attempt to take over the Carnival and you’re hoping to influence me so that I may in turn influence Randal to convince the normals to side with him.” +“Well since you know…Madam?” + +Madam Orbec begins to clutch her head and writhe on the floor talking to herself. + +“Yes. But no! Maybe? Perhaps. If he can pull it off. Is he capable? I doubt it. We must try. Whatever, just get him out of here!” + +Madam Orbec suddenly stops and slowly sits up. + +“You need to expose those of the small craniums.” +“What?” +“The Pinheads. You need to show their true nature to the public.” +“True nature? What’re you talking about? Why” +“That is all the spirits have told me, their reasons are not to be questioned, but I have been advised to help you in your treacherous endeavor if you accomplish this objective. Now leave and do not return unless you are successful.” + +At this point Madam Orbec seems to go into a cationic trance. You take your opportunity to leave and ponder what the hell her cryptic ramblings were about. All you know for certain is that you have to do something to the Pinheads. Expose their true nature, though you can’t imagine what that could be. + +You could try spying on them and see what you can find out, or maybe a more direct approach would work. +> Spy on them +You head towards the Freak side of the carnival and try to find the Pinheads, when you see them you notice they’re all congregated together in a relatively secluded area. Almost as if they’re in a meeting. How odd. + +They haven’t seen you yet, so you take the opportunity to get closer by sneaking around behind them and hiding behind a barrel. You prop your back up against it, close your eyes and pretend to be passed out, just in case someone passes by, wondering what you’re doing. You then attempt to listen and you can’t believe what you’re hearing… + +“So George did you hear what’s going on in Germany?” +“Yeah, it wouldn’t surprise me if we had to go to war with them…AGAIN.” +“Well maybe a war would be good for the economy.” +“Maybe, I doubt if it could get any worse.” +“Yeah, but if we go to war that means less people coming to this Carnival, and that’s not good for our income.” +“Oh I don’t know about that. History has shown that in hard times, people are actually more inclined to want to escape reality and that’s what this Carnival is all about; escaping reality.” + +The Pinheads are discussing world matters! All this time they’ve been acting like idiot children and they’re actually intelligent! You get enthralled by more of their conversation. They begin discussing literature, science, philosophy and other topics that are far above your comprehension or even a normal person’s comprehension. + +Unfortunately since you’re not actually watching them and just listening, you don’t see what some of them do. The Pinheads realize you’ve been spying on them mainly due to your powerful smell which is unmistakable at this range. A couple of them did a bit of sneaking around on their own while the others continued the conversation to keep you put until they got into position. + +“Psst! Hey Geek, over here!” + +You open your eyes just in time to see a baseball smash into your face, breaking your nose. You curl in a fetal position while holding your nose and resisting the urge to yell. You pretend you’re still drunk, hoping you can throw them off suspicion. It doesn’t work though. The Pinheads have been fooling everyone for so long they’re experts in seeing through a fake act as pathetic as yours and even if they couldn’t they still wouldn’t want to take the chance of you blabbing. + +“Shoulda stayed in your cell today Geek.” are the last words you hear as a crowd of angry little squinty faces stare down at you, before they beat you to death and then dump your body in the clown tent. + +You really don’t want to know what happens after that.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Since the Freaks are firmly behind the Ring Master, you might as well talk to the Normals, the problem is you have to talk to someone with some pull with most of them, and Remarkable Randal is the only one who has that in any great capacity and getting him to side with Charley is out of the question. + +At least directly. + +It’s possible you could talk with Madam Orbec and get her to convince Randal to change his stance since he follows anything she says; also she’s less likely to throw something at your head when she sees you approach. + +You head towards Madam Orbec’s tent, which has an air of creepiness surrounding it. You enter the tent and immediately get your usual welcome. + +“Geek! Begone from this place! Do not assault the spirits with your foulness!” Madam Orbec commands. +“They’re dead; I don’t really see how my smell can affect them.” +“It’s not your odor that offends the spirits, it’s your aura! We do not want you in our presence! Away with you, we have no wish to be involved in your underhanded dealings!” +“How do you know what I’m here for?” +“Fool! I am Madam Orbec! I see all that the spirits see! You’re working with that miscreant Charley in an attempt to take over the Carnival and you’re hoping to influence me so that I may in turn influence Randal to convince the normals to side with him.” +“Well since you know…Madam?” + +Madam Orbec begins to clutch her head and writhe on the floor talking to herself. + +“Yes. But no! Maybe? Perhaps. If he can pull it off. Is he capable? I doubt it. We must try. Whatever, just get him out of here!” + +Madam Orbec suddenly stops and slowly sits up. + +“You need to expose those of the small craniums.” +“What?” +“The Pinheads. You need to show their true nature to the public.” +“True nature? What’re you talking about? Why” +“That is all the spirits have told me, their reasons are not to be questioned, but I have been advised to help you in your treacherous endeavor if you accomplish this objective. Now leave and do not return unless you are successful.” + +At this point Madam Orbec seems to go into a cationic trance. You take your opportunity to leave and ponder what the hell her cryptic ramblings were about. All you know for certain is that you have to do something to the Pinheads. Expose their true nature, though you can’t imagine what that could be. + +You could try spying on them and see what you can find out, or maybe a more direct approach would work. +> Direct approach +You can’t think of anything else to do, so you wait around for the Pinheads to come running around the Carnival like they usually do. When you see them gleefully playing catch with a baseball with each other, you insist on joining in + +The Pinheads look a little bewildered by your actions at first, and when you actually get a hold of the ball and toss it back at them, they start getting noticeably angry. A few of them start pushing you and attempting to trip you up. You continue to antagonize them by “playing” with them. Until one of them says something out loud surprising everyone. + +“GET THE FUCK OUTTA HERE GEEK! YOU’RE FUCKING STINKING UP THE PLACE!” + +This one hostile sentence shows a coherency that the Pinheads have never displayed before, and shouting it in public for the rest of the Carneys to hear has outted them. + +“Fucking Pinheads can talk!” someone shouts. + +At this point the Pinheads start arguing with themselves and attempting to cover up their mistake, but its too late now. You slip away and head back to Madam Orbec. + +When you get to Orbec’s tent, she’s talking to herself as usual (Or the “spirits” rather) + +“No, I don’t like that. Well if you moved a little more. NO! YOU CAN’T FUCK ME IN THE ASS! Oh fuck it then.” +“Um, am I interrupting something intimate?” +“The Geek returns! And I see you have been successful in your mission. The spirits thank you and you can be sure the Normals will be on your side when the time comes. Now leave us we are discussing something important.” +“Wait, can you at least tell me why you…I mean the spirits wanted the Pinheads exposed?” +“I suppose. Does he need an answer? Probably not. Then why tell? You’re right.” Then Madam Orbec answers you directly. +“No, now leave before we change our mind.” + +Not wishing to undo your work, you leave and head back to Charley, who you see walking around looking for you. + +“Hey there you are Geek! What’s all this I’ve been hearing about you fucking around with the Pinheads? You’re supposed to be doin’ shit for me, I hope you’ve been making progress in that little endeavor.” +“I have. I got the Normals to side with us.” + +Charley chuckles heartily and tells you to be ready after the show because the revolution is coming after the rubes leave. Not wishing to run into the Ring Master before hand you hang around Charley’s still which isn’t too pleasant since you have to endure Ajax’s abuse while Charley goes off to make his preparations. + +Then show time arrives, everything goes pretty much the same except the Ring Master looks a little distracted the entire time and the Pinheads don’t show up at all, apparently their exposure caused some trouble with other Carneys (All of them Normals) who didn’t like the fake act they were doing just to get paid more and taking money out of the pockets of performers who had real talents. (Tricking rubes is one thing, but fucking over other Carneys is frowned upon… if you get caught) +> But the real show begins aftterwards +A dark moonlit night. + +Charley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. The Ring Master has Atlas, and his usual allies, the Freaks are hanging in the darkness ready to strike if necessary. Most of the Normals though are nowhere to be seen. + +“Your time has come Ring Master! No longer will you exploit us! I’m taking over!” +“And you all feel this way? You’d rather follow this criminal who’ll be corrupt? You really think he’s doing this out of some noble moral code? Obviously you must be blind if you don’t see that rule by this degenerate will be worse than anything you THINK I’m doing…but I leave it up to you…” +“It won’t work Ringy, I got more in common with my people than you do! Blood is thicker, and yours is going to run everywhere if you don’t peaceably leave…I’m giving you this one chance you pale she-male.” +“Not likely, I have my own friends as you know.” + +The Ring Master whistles and his Freaks show up, but Charley doesn’t look impressed. + +“Geek?” +“Sorry, Ring Master, but we made a better deal.” You say and show up with a bunch of Normals behind you, and then Randal shows up on the other side with a bunch of Normals behind him as well. +“I see. So you’ve all decided to throw your lot in with petty criminal activity. I’m glad to see your hypocrisy show its true face Randal, and Geek, I’m very disappointed in you. Very well, if I die this day, it’ll be beside those who are the true heart of Carnival! ATTACK!” + +The battle ensues, though it’s not really a battle. A few of the Normals side with the Ring Master, but most of them are on Charley’s side. The only thing that makes the battle last longer is the fact that the Freaks are fierce fighters. Atlas and Ajax lock horns, and while Atlas nearly kills Ajax, Randal does a couple of his magic tricks and blinds Atlas with a bright light, giving Ajax enough time to kill him. + +On the side lines watching, is Pervus and his clown gang masturbating to the carnage. + +Finally in the last moments Charley laughs as he stands over the Ring Master’s body which is now lifeless with Charley’s sharp stick through its heart; the last “Freak” to die. Meanwhile you were hiding during all this, but Charley calls you out. + +“Hey Geek! Come out you fuckin’ coward! We won!” +“Yeah come out, you fucking useless piece of shit! I’m too tired to do anything to you right now.” Ajax adds. +“…I’m here Charley.” +“Good, unzip the Ring Master’s pants.” +“What?” +“Unzip the Ring Master’s pants; I wanna see what the hell he or she was packing. I have a bet going with Ajax and we wanna see who won.” + +You’re a little hesitant, but your crouch over the body and start unzipping the Ring Master’s pants. A crowd begins to form around you. Normal and Midget alike. + +“Come on come Geek, we ain’t got all fuckin’ night!” Ajax says while kicking you in the ribs. + +You pull down the underwear… + +“EEEEEEEEEEEWWWWWWWWW!” the crowd shouts in unison. +“Holy shit!” you say falling back. +“Ha ha, I knew it! I fucking won!” Charley chuckles. +“Shit! Fuck!” Ajax shouts and starts beating you to take his frustrations out. + +“Alright you lot, I want all these bodies cleaned up and disposed of before we head out to the next town, and Salina I want YOU in my new trailer to help me celebrate this glorious victory!” + +And so begins the reign of Charley the Ringmaster. Under his guidance midgets run everything and the Carnival doesn’t so much resemble a Carnival as it resembles a mobile grifting ring. While regular carnival activities still abound, they’re more of a cover than anything. In time though problems occur. Randal and Charley begin to come into conflict as Randal begins to regret his decision to side with him as well as his disapproval of what’s become of the Carnival. Another division begins to occur, but one on a smaller scale as Charley’s corrupting influence has infected most of the remaining Carneys at this point. Things really come to a head when Ajax suspects Sasha of having an affair with Randal. Eventually Randal, a few of his remaining “followers” AND Sasha are all killed in the middle of night and their bodies dumped in the river. Lacking any more “true talent” or even sideshow freaks, the Carnival is disbanded entirely and Charley and Ajax set up headquarters permanently in a sleazy small town where they primarily run the place. Proving that crime does pay. + +You on the other hand don’t do so well. While the Carnival was still around, you were routinely abused by Charley or Ajax more so than you normally were. When the Carnival disbanded you didn’t really have anywhere else to go, so you became the town drunk. Not really needing you anymore and having moved on to more important things, Charley forgets all about you, which leads to one dark rainy night when Ajax comes across you sleeping behind one of his bars. Not being reined in anymore, he does to you what he’s always wanted to do. + +He beats you death, laughing the whole time.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Agh! Alright, alright! Stop poking me…what day is it?” +“Never mind all that geek! Get going you know how the Ring Master doesn’t like being kept waiting! Phew! You smell even more disgusting than usual! I guess that’s one way to keep Ajax from killing you, he’d probably vomit his guts out before he could lay a hand on you…then you could lick it up for the rubes! Ha ha! Move it Geek!” + +Charley prods you with a sharp stick periodically on your way to the Ring Master’s trailer until you arrive at which point, Atlas stops the both of you. + +“Stop! What business do the both of you have here?” +“Goddamnit you fuckin’ one eyed freak! We go through this all the fucking time and its getting REALLY old! You just saw me come out of the Ring Master’s trailer earlier today when he sent me to get the Geek, you know damn well what we’re both doing here!” + +Ignoring Charley’s comments Atlas looks down at you and points. + +“You may enter, but the Ring Master doesn’t need to see you again, so you may not.” +“Yeah, whatever enjoy the smell.” Charley says and mumbles something to himself while leaving the area. + +You barely make it up the little steps to the trailer, but you do. You’re finally starting to gather your wits together; your head still hurts though and you’ve just realize you haven’t had a drink yet. What a terrible feeling. You open the door. + +“Close the door, you’re letting all the sunlight in.” the Ring Master orders from behind his desk. She’s siting in his chair, but has her back turned to you. +“Uh you wanted to see me?” +“Of course…(Sniff sniff) you really haven’t been taking care of yourself. If anything you’ve become even more repulsive than when I first took you in. Remember that day?” +“Um, yeah I think…no, no I don’t. I mean kind of… I forget things.” +“I’m not surprised; you’re constantly drinking that swill Charley makes. I am surprised you haven’t gone blind yet though. Oh well what you insist on doing to yourself is of little concern to me, all I require is your obedience. You are thankful for all I have provided for you aren’t you?” +“Oh yeah. Sure I am.” +“You seem to be one of the few nowadays then. There are some though that are ungrateful for things I’ve done for them, they plan to betray me and everything this carnival stands for. They plan to change the natural order of things. Can you imagine what might happen to this carnival if I wasn’t here? What might happen to you?” + +You attempt to think about this scenario, but instead you just stand there because you can’t really form anything in your mind because it hurts really bad, you’ve been sober too damn long, and it’s about to get even longer as the Ring Master seems intent on bombarding you with talk as he finally swivels around in her chair. That pale androgynous face of the Ring Master’s is displaying a look of seriousness as usual. + +“Nothing good I can assure you. Which is why I’m putting YOU in charge of this task.” +“Huh? What task?” +“Why ensuring the survival of the carnival of course.” +”What!? Me?! Why? How!? I’m not qualified! Can’t you or Charley do it?” +“I fear I’ve done all I’ve can. I mean I’ve provided all of THIS to everyone here. I’ve given them purpose and a life. If that isn’t enough for them, then my words aren’t going to make a difference at this point. And as for Charley, well…I’m sure even in your usual state of drunkenness you’re aware that he has his own plans for this carnival.” +“I guess…but agh, it’s too early for all this…why me? I mean what am I supposed to do? I’m just the Geek.” +“Yes, and that’s exactly why I’m choosing you. You have no motive, you have no agenda, you have no friends, and as such you would probably be the best candidate to convince others to resist change and keep the status quo.” +“You have to be joking! Nobody’s going to listen to me! I’m the fucking Geek!” +“You might be surprised, you have far more potential than you give yourself credit for…perhaps you’ll even change some perspectives, or maybe not. The choice is yours, because the fate of THIS carnival is resting solely on your actions, you can no longer afford to hide from the world in a bottle and a cage if you wish to keep your current life. It is time for you to take some responsibility, its time to repay the debt you owe me. You have until show time.” +“But…” +“Now leave me, I wish to be alone.” + +The Ring Master swivels his chair back to its original position. You head back outside, where upon Atlas blocks it again with his massive body. + +Never before in your life have you been put in this kind of position of responsibility, (Not that you can remember anyway) but you’re going to have to do something, the question is what exactly? +> Do something else +This mission that’s been given to you by the Ring Master has gotten you all shook up. You don’t want all this pressure, yet you’re too scared to leave. This is the only place that accepts you somewhat. + +You’re too distracted to even get a drink! You’d rather not have to deal with Charley or especially Ajax right now either. Sometimes you just wish you didn’t have to live an utterly pathetic existence. + +While you’re attempting to find some place dark to crawl into and hide, you literally bump into Remarkable Randal. + +“Oof! Watch it you smelly, ugly, Geek! Honestly it’s bad enough this Carnival has Freaks and criminal Midgets, but honestly having YOU here defies all logic. If I ran this Carnival things would be different! What are you doing out of your cell anyway? Doesn’t the Ring Master usually keep you locked up until show time?” +“Oh, um he wanted to talk to me about something.” +“She did? What about?” +“Oh about my act, and uh…doing…um…something.” + +Randal’s normal distain for you changes to one of interest. He studies you for a moment before speaking. + +“So the Ring Master has entrusted YOU to save this place? Hah! She MUST be desperate!” +“Huh? What? How did you know?” +“Madam Orbec has been teaching me how to contact the spirit world and read into people’s souls. And yours is an easy read indeed, such as it is…perhaps our meeting has its purpose however. After reading your soul I can see something within you that may be worth saving. I never thought it possible, but I think I may be able to help you and your situation Geek.” +“I don’t understand.” +“Yes you do. Maybe you try to block it out of your mind with that swill you drink from Charley, but deep down you hate what you are and your retched life. And you should. You’re a sorry excuse for a human being, in fact you aren’t really even human anymore, you’re sub-human. However, you have a chance to regain your humanity back, and even become a useful member of this Carnival again. And I’ll help you, if you help me.” +“How am I supposed to help you?” +“A simple task really. All I want you to do is go get Madam Orbec’s black book. She keeps it by her bed. You’ll know it when you see it.” +“What?! You want me to steal from her? I thought she was supposed to be your mentor or something!” +“Shhhhh! Keep it down Geek! Look. Madam Orbec IS my mentor and I’ll always be grateful for what she’s taught me. I’ve always believed in magic, but without her teachings, I wouldn’t be a magician, I’d only be an illusionist.” +“There’s a difference?” you interrupt. +“Oh yes, Geek. Oh yes. Anyway, you’re not stealing the book, I just need to borrow it for awhile because its time for me to learn more. I think Madam Orbec is afraid I’m not yet prepared to learn the secrets that lie inside her black book. But I know I am, and its time for me to prove it to her. She’ll be so proud when she sees what I’ll be able to do.” +“So what’re you going to do with it?” +“I’m going to use its powers to help me take over the Carnival of course.” +“What?! I’m not helping you do that! I’m supposed to be helping the Ring Master anyway!” +“Why? Seriously, what has the Ring Master really done for you? Given you a job? The Ring Master is exploiting you for his own personal gain. She cares nothing for you. He just saw a useless dreg of society and turned you into something that could somehow make money for her. Assuming you helped the Ring Master and were even successful, think about it, you’d just go back to your living your miserable life. Is mere existence just enough for you? Isn’t it time you wanted MORE out of life?” + +You’re quiet. You don’t think anyone’s even asked you that question, even before you became a geek, and you’re really surprised to hear it coming from Randal. Someone who has nothing, but distaste for you. + +“I dunno, I think I’m pretty bad off. I don’t think there’s anything I can do to improve myself at this point.” +“Nonsense, there’s always a way and your first step is by helping me. Look. Maybe you are what you are and I don’t like it, but I do see that underneath it all you ARE a Normal. You should be on my side anyway; I can help you be something more than a geek. With magic anything is possible! Retrieve that book for me and I’ll turn this Carnival into something much more than what it is and I’ll turn you into something much more than what you could’ve thought possible.” + +Something about Randal makes you believe him. You can understand why people do tend to want to follow him. Maybe things would be better if he took over. He certainly seems more caring than the Ring Master and a hell of a lot better in general than Charley. + +“Okay, I’ll help you, but I dunno how I’m gonna ste…I mean borrow the book.” +“Well I leave that up to you, but make sure you get the book to me before show time and don’t come back to me until then.” + +Randal leaves you to it, but you’re still not sure how you’re going to go about this. If Randal can read your intentions then Madam Orbec will certainly be able to read yours. It occurs to you, that you might need some help from the less “moral” people here. And you can’t ask Charley to help you for several reasons. + +You could go to Pervus for help. If murder and sexual deviancy is no problem for him then surely a little theft won’t be either. And he’s usually up for doing anything remotely illegal. + +You could also go see Salina. Besides prostitution she’s known to be good at theft as well, though her helping you is a real long shot. +> Go see Pervus +You decide Pervus would be a better choice. Probably not the safest, but he’s more likely to help you. + +You’re hesitant to go anywhere near the clown tent to get him though, however for once luck is with you and you see him around the animals talking to a horse. + +“Hmmm, yeah. You’re a pretty filly. Yes you are. Let me tell you what I’m gonna do…(sniff) you smell different than usual.” Pervus then turns around. “Oh it’s you Geek. What the fuck do you want? Can’t you see I’m with a lady?” +“Hey um, Pervus I need your help with something.” +“Oh do ya now?” +“I need to borrow a black book from Madam Orbec, and I need you to distract her.” +“Hmm, normally I wouldn’t help you do shit, but I’m kinda in the mood for some OLD pussy right now. Yeah I’ll distract her, I know exactly how to distract her.” Pervus say while stoking his crotch. +“Um hold on, you’re not gonna rape and kill her are ya?” +“I won’t kill her…oh fine I won’t rape her either. Probably won’t be necessary anyway, I’ve always had a way with the ladies…sorry old girl, but I’ll have to be fucking you some other time.” Pervus remarks and pats the horse on the head before following you. + +You both approach Madam Orbec’s tent which has an air of creepiness about it. Pervus has a look of crazed lust in his eyes. He’s starting to breathe heavily and doing a lot of slurping. + +“Oh fuck yeah, this is gonna be soooooooo good.” + +He said he wasn’t going to do anything excessive, but now you’re not so sure… +> Continue with the plan +All that really concerns you is getting that book, because if you don’t get Randal’s help, the Ring Master is certainly going to kill you when she finds out you’ve turned traitor. + +Pervus enters the tent and you sneak around back and begin trying to lift up a small portion of it to crawl in. + +You hear a lot of noise and some protesting, while you’re doing this, when you finally get in, Pervus is having his way with Madam Orbec, completely oblivious to you and Madam Orbec isn’t making a sound…you don’t like the looks of this. + +You turn to your left and see you’re right by her bed, next to that is her dresser which has the book on it. You grab it and crawl back out as quickly as you can. You run and don’t look back. + +When you get back to Randal he wonder’s why the hell you’re so worked up. + +“(Pant) I got the book.” +“Phew! Well don’t breathe all over me, just gimme the thing! Excellent. I’ll study what I can tonight before show time and then afterwards we’ll see who the new master is! And what’s wrong with you Geek? Why are breathing so heavy and looking around…you didn’t let Madam Orbec see you borrow this did you?!” +“No, not at all. I’m just winded from trying to get out there without her seeing me!” +“Well you better make yourself scarce until showtime anyway. I’m sure you wouldn’t want to run into the Ring Master before hand. Relax, I will keep my end of the bargain. Now go.” + +You leave and linger around the edges of the Carnival, staying out of sight until show time. What happened back at Madam Orbec’s tent still has you unnerved a bit. You know it’s only a matter a time before everyone finds out, before Randal finds out. She was basically like a mother figure to him. You didn’t think Pervus would kill her, unless he didn’t mean to and more likely he was just so overwhelmed with lust that he didn’t care at that point. + +In fact you’re a little worried about being here by yourself with no one around. You half think Pervus is going to leap out somewhere and kill you too to shut you up. It would be exactly like him to do something like that. In fact now you think its weird to you that he HASN’T shown up to kill you. + +You’ve got a lot of potential enemies right now, Pervus, the Ring Master, not to mention plain old Ajax who always wants to kill you. Randal is pretty much your only hope for survival now. + +Eventually you wander back to the Carnival around show time. Everything goes as normal with a few exceptions. The Ring Master looks pre-occupied, Randal’s act seems to be a lot more spectacular than usual, the clowns nowhere to be seen and all throughout the show you have a dreaded feeling that something really bad is going to happen. + +And you just may be right. +> Because the real show occurs afterwards +A dark moonlit night. + +Charley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. The Ring Master has Atlas, and looks around for his usual allies, the Freaks, and to the surprise of everyone Randal appears with most of the Normals behind him. You attempt to hide directly behind Randal figuring that will be the safest place. + +“YOU? You’re attempting to take over? You must be joking! Go take your fairy dust and +prance off somewhere, this is between me and the she male freak!” Charley spits. +“No, you malignant midget! Your time and a criminal ways are at an end here today! And you too Ring Master! No longer will this Carnival be run by an exploitative tyrant!” Randal retorts. + +The Ring Master sees you and shakes his head. + +“I’m very disappointed that you decided to betray me here today Geek. You will learn to regret that fateful decision.” +“Enough, of this fuckin’ talk. Let’s see who’s gonna fuckin’ run this show once and for all! Attack!” + +Charley and his midgets begin the assault, and the other two sides follow suit. The fighting is furious and brutal. All you do is crawl away and try to hide under a trailer and hope Randal wins, which he looks like he’s doing. + +Randal has the upper hand in every way, he has numerical superiority for one thing, and the other thing is he’s casting actual magic spells. A couple of bolts of lightning fry Ajax and Charley. Another spell strikes down Atlas. All looks good for Randal…until Pervus and his clown crew show up. + +When you first see them, they look like they’ve already been in a fight. They’re walking in a shambling motion and have wounds on them. When they get closer those wounds look like mortal one. In fact they are. + +Pervus and the clowns are no longer among the living. + +It takes awhile for anyone else to recognize this. Randal just thinks he’s got more allies until they start biting other Normals (as well as some remaining Midgets and Freaks). Upon seeing this, he tries to cast another spell to destroy them, but is stopped when one of the previously dead bodies on the ground rises up and bites his leg. When he cries out, he sees another familiar face. Madam Orbec, who while dead, looks obviously displeased by the theft of her book. + +“I TOLD YOU NOT TO USE THIS BOOK! NOW SUFFER ALONG WITH THE REST OF US!” she shouts and bites a chunk of Randal’s throat out. He falls to the ground to be consumed by more of the dead and the book goes flying out of his hand. + +All of the bodies have risen now. They’re attacking everyone living, you take this as your moment to escape, when you scramble from under the trailer you feel a very strong grip tighten around your shoulder. You look up and see the Ring Master. + +“My poor sad Geek. I told you that you would learn to regret your decision to betray me. I have to thank you though, while my Carnival may be no more, perhaps it was time for a change, and with this book (The Ring Master shows you the black book that Randal lost) I think I can make a lot of them.” + +You try to struggle, but its no use. The Ring Master has an unnaturally strong grip on you. He walks directly towards the zombie horde, dragging you along. + +“Why?! Why aren’t they attacking you?” is the last thing you cry out. +“Silly Geek, haven’t you at least figured that one out by now? Zombies don’t attack other undead.” + +With a sharp fang protruding in a grinning smile at you, the Ring Master hurls you to the zombies, who eat you alive.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide Pervus would be a better choice. Probably not the safest, but he’s more likely to help you. + +You’re hesitant to go anywhere near the clown tent to get him though, however for once luck is with you and you see him around the animals talking to a horse. + +“Hmmm, yeah. You’re a pretty filly. Yes you are. Let me tell you what I’m gonna do…(sniff) you smell different than usual.” Pervus then turns around. “Oh it’s you Geek. What the fuck do you want? Can’t you see I’m with a lady?” +“Hey um, Pervus I need your help with something.” +“Oh do ya now?” +“I need to borrow a black book from Madam Orbec, and I need you to distract her.” +“Hmm, normally I wouldn’t help you do shit, but I’m kinda in the mood for some OLD pussy right now. Yeah I’ll distract her, I know exactly how to distract her.” Pervus say while stoking his crotch. +“Um hold on, you’re not gonna rape and kill her are ya?” +“I won’t kill her…oh fine I won’t rape her either. Probably won’t be necessary anyway, I’ve always had a way with the ladies…sorry old girl, but I’ll have to be fucking you some other time.” Pervus remarks and pats the horse on the head before following you. + +You both approach Madam Orbec’s tent which has an air of creepiness about it. Pervus has a look of crazed lust in his eyes. He’s starting to breathe heavily and doing a lot of slurping. + +“Oh fuck yeah, this is gonna be soooooooo good.” + +He said he wasn’t going to do anything excessive, but now you’re not so sure… +> Change the plan +“Hold on Pervus. I got a better idea.” You say stopping Pervus from entering. +“Geek, that’s the second time you’ve interrupted my dick from finding happiness. If you do it again, it’s gonna find happiness in YOU!” +“Um…well look, I was just thinking that it would be better if you got the book, I dunno if I’m up for it. I’ll distract Madam Orbec instead.” +“The ONLY reason why I agreed to this, was because of the possibility of getting some Granny pussy, and now you’re fuckin’ sayin’ no? Fuck you Geek! I’m doin’ this shit now!” + +Pervus knocks you to the ground and enters Madam Orbec’s tent. You begin to hear some weird noises. Some of it sounds like screams, but not of the human kind. You sit in shock unsure of what to do, and then soon Pervus comes back out with the black book. There’s blood all over his clown costume. + +“I’m not sure what the fuck you wanted this for, but you ain’t gettin’ it now Geek. See ya at show time.” + +You don’t want to check, but you do anyway. You go inside Madam Orbec’s tent and see a gruesome sight. Something else is here though. You feel a force hit you several times. You see sheer depravity in your mind! It overwhelms you, you begin to cry, and laugh at the same time. You immediately run back out to hide somewhere utterly mad from what you saw. + +You run off to the nearest town hoping nobody comes looking for you, and nobody does due to what happens at show time… + +With the black book in his possession, Pervus goes back to his own tent and begins reading it, wondering what you wanted it for. Soon he begins to discover the power contained inside. The reason why Madam Orbec never wanted Randal to use it is due to the evil contained within and didn’t want that evil unleashed lest it destroy him. Of course Pervus isn’t a choir boy like Randal, he embraces the evil and the evil embraces him. It’s a match made in hell. + +When show time comes around he and his whole degenerate clown crew begin chanting from the book unleashing horrible powers. Many in the audience are killed as they attempt to escape, the Ring Master attempts to restore order, but with one utterance by Pervus, a burning black light annihilates her. The next blast destroys Atlas. + +Randle attempts some sort of cheap magic defense, but he’s powerless against the sheer destruction Pervus is wreaking. Eventually some of the clowns surround and capture him and do unspeakable things to him until he’s literally an empty husk. + +Charley and Ajax attempt to escape, but are run down and torn apart by strange shadow creatures that were summoned up. + +The ones that manage to survive that terrible night become part of this twisted new Carnival that now travels the night seeking to pull more victims into its dreaded den of wickedness and suck their souls dry, with Pervus as the new crazed ring master. + +And while you weren’t there for the event, you SAW it all, in your mind back at Madam Orbec’s tent. One last curse by the spirits for your involvement in the death of Madam Orbec. + +You are doomed to forever see the on going horrors committed by Pervus’ Carnival, and yet can do nothing about it. You’re eventually picked up off the street while during one of your screaming jags and thrown into a mental asylum, straight jacked and doped up with morphine. + +But it doesn’t help. + +You still see. + +And you can’t stop the screaming.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This mission that’s been given to you by the Ring Master has gotten you all shook up. You don’t want all this pressure, yet you’re too scared to leave. This is the only place that accepts you somewhat. + +You’re too distracted to even get a drink! You’d rather not have to deal with Charley or especially Ajax right now either. Sometimes you just wish you didn’t have to live an utterly pathetic existence. + +While you’re attempting to find some place dark to crawl into and hide, you literally bump into Remarkable Randal. + +“Oof! Watch it you smelly, ugly, Geek! Honestly it’s bad enough this Carnival has Freaks and criminal Midgets, but honestly having YOU here defies all logic. If I ran this Carnival things would be different! What are you doing out of your cell anyway? Doesn’t the Ring Master usually keep you locked up until show time?” +“Oh, um he wanted to talk to me about something.” +“She did? What about?” +“Oh about my act, and uh…doing…um…something.” + +Randal’s normal distain for you changes to one of interest. He studies you for a moment before speaking. + +“So the Ring Master has entrusted YOU to save this place? Hah! She MUST be desperate!” +“Huh? What? How did you know?” +“Madam Orbec has been teaching me how to contact the spirit world and read into people’s souls. And yours is an easy read indeed, such as it is…perhaps our meeting has its purpose however. After reading your soul I can see something within you that may be worth saving. I never thought it possible, but I think I may be able to help you and your situation Geek.” +“I don’t understand.” +“Yes you do. Maybe you try to block it out of your mind with that swill you drink from Charley, but deep down you hate what you are and your retched life. And you should. You’re a sorry excuse for a human being, in fact you aren’t really even human anymore, you’re sub-human. However, you have a chance to regain your humanity back, and even become a useful member of this Carnival again. And I’ll help you, if you help me.” +“How am I supposed to help you?” +“A simple task really. All I want you to do is go get Madam Orbec’s black book. She keeps it by her bed. You’ll know it when you see it.” +“What?! You want me to steal from her? I thought she was supposed to be your mentor or something!” +“Shhhhh! Keep it down Geek! Look. Madam Orbec IS my mentor and I’ll always be grateful for what she’s taught me. I’ve always believed in magic, but without her teachings, I wouldn’t be a magician, I’d only be an illusionist.” +“There’s a difference?” you interrupt. +“Oh yes, Geek. Oh yes. Anyway, you’re not stealing the book, I just need to borrow it for awhile because its time for me to learn more. I think Madam Orbec is afraid I’m not yet prepared to learn the secrets that lie inside her black book. But I know I am, and its time for me to prove it to her. She’ll be so proud when she sees what I’ll be able to do.” +“So what’re you going to do with it?” +“I’m going to use its powers to help me take over the Carnival of course.” +“What?! I’m not helping you do that! I’m supposed to be helping the Ring Master anyway!” +“Why? Seriously, what has the Ring Master really done for you? Given you a job? The Ring Master is exploiting you for his own personal gain. She cares nothing for you. He just saw a useless dreg of society and turned you into something that could somehow make money for her. Assuming you helped the Ring Master and were even successful, think about it, you’d just go back to your living your miserable life. Is mere existence just enough for you? Isn’t it time you wanted MORE out of life?” + +You’re quiet. You don’t think anyone’s even asked you that question, even before you became a geek, and you’re really surprised to hear it coming from Randal. Someone who has nothing, but distaste for you. + +“I dunno, I think I’m pretty bad off. I don’t think there’s anything I can do to improve myself at this point.” +“Nonsense, there’s always a way and your first step is by helping me. Look. Maybe you are what you are and I don’t like it, but I do see that underneath it all you ARE a Normal. You should be on my side anyway; I can help you be something more than a geek. With magic anything is possible! Retrieve that book for me and I’ll turn this Carnival into something much more than what it is and I’ll turn you into something much more than what you could’ve thought possible.” + +Something about Randal makes you believe him. You can understand why people do tend to want to follow him. Maybe things would be better if he took over. He certainly seems more caring than the Ring Master and a hell of a lot better in general than Charley. + +“Okay, I’ll help you, but I dunno how I’m gonna ste…I mean borrow the book.” +“Well I leave that up to you, but make sure you get the book to me before show time and don’t come back to me until then.” + +Randal leaves you to it, but you’re still not sure how you’re going to go about this. If Randal can read your intentions then Madam Orbec will certainly be able to read yours. It occurs to you, that you might need some help from the less “moral” people here. And you can’t ask Charley to help you for several reasons. + +You could go to Pervus for help. If murder and sexual deviancy is no problem for him then surely a little theft won’t be either. And he’s usually up for doing anything remotely illegal. + +You could also go see Salina. Besides prostitution she’s known to be good at theft as well, though her helping you is a real long shot. +> Go see Salina +Maybe you just want to talk to Salina because you’re creeped by Pervus or maybe you want to talk to her because you think she’s pretty, or maybe it’s a combination of both. + +Whatever the case the result is still the same when you bang on her trailer. + +“PEEYOO! Geek! Get the fuck outta here, even if you did have some money I wouldn’t debase myself!” Salina says when she answers. +“No, its not that, I need some help.” +“I’ll help you get your ass kicked if you don’t get outta here! I’m sure Charley wouldn’t like seeing you here lingering around me.” + +You just realized that. If Charley caught you here, he’d probably torture the shit out of you and then let Ajax finish you off (Nevermind the fact that Salina IS a prostitute, but Charley isn’t always logical when it comes to her, plus you’re a punching bag anyway) +You need to not remain here as long as possible. +> Try to convince her +“Look, I just need your help to ste…I mean borrow something! I heard you were good at borrowing things, so…” +“Go steal it yourself Geek! I’m not your personal thief! And it’s time for you to fucking go!” +“Listen! It’s…” + +As you aggressively begin to step inside the trailer, you suddenly hear some hissing and a couple snakes appear by Salina’s foot. Before you have time to react, both of them dart their heads at your legs, giving you a bite. + +You fall back on the ground, as the poison begins to take effect. First you feel paralysis set in then your organs shut down completely. + +“Hey, somebody come pick up this Geek! He’s gonna smell even worse while dead!” is the last thing you hear Salina shout.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Maybe you just want to talk to Salina because you’re creeped by Pervus or maybe you want to talk to her because you think she’s pretty, or maybe it’s a combination of both. + +Whatever the case the result is still the same when you bang on her trailer. + +“PEEYOO! Geek! Get the fuck outta here, even if you did have some money I wouldn’t debase myself!” Salina says when she answers. +“No, its not that, I need some help.” +“I’ll help you get your ass kicked if you don’t get outta here! I’m sure Charley wouldn’t like seeing you here lingering around me.” + +You just realized that. If Charley caught you here, he’d probably torture the shit out of you and then let Ajax finish you off (Nevermind the fact that Salina IS a prostitute, but Charley isn’t always logical when it comes to her, plus you’re a punching bag anyway) +You need to not remain here as long as possible. +> Beg and plead pitifully +Being pitiful has always been something you’ve been good at, sometimes it even works to your advantage. You collapse on the little piece of stairs you’re standing on and start pleading. + +“Please Salina you gotta help me! (sob) I don’t have anyone else to turn to! I need to sneak in Madam Orbec’s tent and get a book from without her knowing (sob) or I’m gonna die! (sob)” + +Salina doesn’t completely understand what the hell you’re babbling about, but she just wants you to leave and stop stinking up the place. Salina goes back inside and grabs a bottle and dumps the entire contents on you. The shit burns like hell on the sores you have on your skin. You roll off the stairs and on to the ground in irritated pain. + +“I dunno what the hell you’re on about Geek, but you ain’t sneaking anywhere as long as you smell the way you do. I just dumped a strong perfume on you. Normally you’d smell like flowers, but with your disgusting odor all it’s gonna do is cancel out your usual foulness and even then only for a little while giving you time to do whatever it is you have to do. And this is ALL the help you’re getting from me! Now get outta here I got customers coming!” Salina says and then slams her trailer door. + +Not exactly what you had in mind, but more help than you expected. You head to Madam Orbec’s tent. When you arrive there’s a distinct air of creepiness about it. You can’t afford to waste too much time so you head around the back of the tent and start trying to pull up so you can sneak in and get the book. You only hope she doesn’t happen to be looking in your direction while you’re attempting to do this. + +As luck would have it, she isn’t, in fact when you crawl inside you see you’re right near her bed where she’s fast asleep. Next to the bed you see a small table with a black book on it. That must be it. You grab it. + +Madam Orbec then begins to stir. She starts sniffing in her sleep. The perfume must be wearing off! +> Run out of the front entance of the tent +No time to mess around lifting and crawling you just need to get out of here! You run out of the tent and don’t stop until you reach Randal who wonders why you’re breathing so hard. + +When you get back to Randal he wonder’s why the hell you’re so worked up. + +“(Pant) I got the book.” +“Phew! Well don’t breathe all over me, just gimme the thing! Excellent. I’ll study what I can tonight before show time and then afterwards we’ll see who the new master is! And what’s wrong with you Geek? Why are breathing so heavy and looking around…you didn’t let Madam Orbec see you borrow this did you?!” +“No, not at all. I’m just winded from trying to get out there without her seeing me!” +“Well you better make yourself scarce until showtime anyway. I’m sure you wouldn’t want to run into the Ring Master before hand. Relax, I will keep my end of the bargain. Now go.” + +You leave and linger around the edges of the Carnival, staying out of sight until show time. You just hope Randal does live up to his bargain and manages to take control, because if he doesn’t, you’re going to be in a world of shit with the Ring Master. + +Eventually you wander back to the Carnival around show time. Everything goes as normal with a few exceptions. The Ring Master looks pre-occupied, and Randal’s act seems to be a lot more spectacular than usual. +> But the real show occurs afterwards +A dark moonlit night. + +Charley confronts the Ring Master with his army of midgets behind him as well as Ajax. It appears that Pervus and his clowns have also decided to join him. The Ring Master has Atlas, and looks around for his usual allies, the Freaks, and to the surprise of everyone Randal appears with most of the Normals behind him. You attempt to hide directly behind Randal figuring that will be the safest place. + +“YOU? You’re attempting to take over? You must be joking! Go take your fairy dust and +prance off somewhere, this is between me and the she male freak!” Charley spits. +“No, you malignant midget! Your time and a criminal ways are at an end here today! And your too Ring Master! No longer will this Carnival be run by an exploitative tyrant!” Randal retorts. + +The Ring Master sees you and shakes his head. + +“I’m very disappointed that you decided to betray me here today Geek. You will learn to regret that fateful decision.” +“Enough, of this fuckin’ talk. Let’s see who’s gonna fuckin’ run this show once and for all! Attack!” + +Charley and his midgets begin the assault, and the other two sides follow suit. The fighting is furious and brutal. All you do is crawl away and try to hide under a trailer and hope Randal wins, which he looks like he’s doing. + +Randal has the upper hand in every way, he has numerical superiority for one thing, and the other thing is he’s casting actual magic spells. A couple of bolts of lightning fry Ajax and Charley. Another spell strikes down Atlas. All looks good for Randal, especially when he wipes out Pervus and all the clowns with a huge fireball and finally with one last spell he strikes down the Ring Master with a dark black light which completely disintegrates him. + +Its over. + +“Geek! You can stop hiding! We won!” Randal shouts. +“Yes, and with the help of MY book!” Madam Orbec says appearing from nowhere. “What the hell is wrong with you Randal? Didn’t I tell you not to mess with this book?” Orbec begins hitting Randal and takes her book back. +“Ow! I’m sorry Madam! I just wanted to prove to you that I was ready to…ow!” +“You’ll never be ready for this book, you hear me? You’re lucky you didn’t bring the dead back to life with your careless chanting!” then she points to you. “And YOU’RE lucky I didn’t catch you stealing this for him! I would’ve turned you into a worm which probably would be a step up for you!” Orbec decides she doesn’t want to dirty herself hitting you though, so she just leaves. After this embarrassing incident Randal regains his composure. + +“Okay people get some rest for tomorrow, a new era of this Carnival has arrived and we have a lot of hard work ahead of us, but it’ll be worth it! Because with magic anything is possible! And don’t worry Geek, I still haven’t forgotten about you, thanks to your help, you’ll have a place in my Carnival.” + +Time passes and Randal “cleans up” the Carnival of all remaining criminal activity, though without Charley around, it wasn’t really a factor anymore. Salina ends up leaving though as the Carnival has gotten too “Goody” for her liking. Without Ajax around, Sasha ends up falling for Randal and the two eventually get married. + +There also aren’t anymore Freaks in the Carnival anymore; the few that survived ran off to eke out meager livings elsewhere. There were quite a few Midgets left, and were allowed to stay due to the fact that they were hard workers, but their status is severely diminished. In fact they’re pretty relegated back to second class citizen status again. + +The Carnival flourishes though as it becomes a truly wondrous and safe place for entire families. And your reward for your help was a complete magical transformation into… + +An animal keeper. + +Having no other useful skills you’re relegated to have to look after all the animals and take care of them in Randal’s new Carnival. + +Every day you take your life into your hands when dealing with the lions. +Every day the horses fart on you whenever you’re around. +Every day you suffer the indignities of the monkeys throwing their shit at you. Not that it matters since you smell like shit anyway after having to clean up after the elephants. + +In fact you only smell slightly better than when you were a Geek, though at least you don’t have eat various parts of the animals’ anatomies and you don’t get beat up anymore. + +It’s a step up!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Being pitiful has always been something you’ve been good at, sometimes it even works to your advantage. You collapse on the little piece of stairs you’re standing on and start pleading. + +“Please Salina you gotta help me! (sob) I don’t have anyone else to turn to! I need to sneak in Madam Orbec’s tent and get a book from without her knowing (sob) or I’m gonna die! (sob)” + +Salina doesn’t completely understand what the hell you’re babbling about, but she just wants you to leave and stop stinking up the place. Salina goes back inside and grabs a bottle and dumps the entire contents on you. The shit burns like hell on the sores you have on your skin. You roll off the stairs and on to the ground in irritated pain. + +“I dunno what the hell you’re on about Geek, but you ain’t sneaking anywhere as long as you smell the way you do. I just dumped a strong perfume on you. Normally you’d smell like flowers, but with your disgusting odor all it’s gonna do is cancel out your usual foulness and even then only for a little while giving you time to do whatever it is you have to do. And this is ALL the help you’re getting from me! Now get outta here I got customers coming!” Salina says and then slams her trailer door. + +Not exactly what you had in mind, but more help than you expected. You head to Madam Orbec’s tent. When you arrive there’s a distinct air of creepiness about it. You can’t afford to waste too much time so you head around the back of the tent and start trying to pull up so you can sneak in and get the book. You only hope she doesn’t happen to be looking in your direction while you’re attempting to do this. + +As luck would have it, she isn’t, in fact when you crawl inside you see you’re right near her bed where she’s fast asleep. Next to the bed you see a small table with a black book on it. That must be it. You grab it. + +Madam Orbec then begins to stir. She starts sniffing in her sleep. The perfume must be wearing off! +> Crawl back out the way you came +You figure you don’t want anyone else seeing you run out of her tent with the book or else they’ll only rat you out later. You lift up the tent and try to crawl back out. You waste too much time though; she wakes up when you’re halfway through. She’s not happy! + +“GEEK! YOU DARE STEAL FROM ME! I CALL UPON THE SPIRITS TO CURSE YOU TO RESEMBLE THE LOWLY WORM YOU ARE!” + +You don’t think too much of those words at first, until you get fully out of the tent and find that you can’t stand up to run anymore. You look behind yourself and to your horror you see that your legs have fused together into one fleshy mass. Soon the rest of you begins to transform. You gradually start to shrink as you try to crawl away in a hopeless attempt to escape your fate. + +When you’ve fully transformed, Madam Orbec finally arrives to retrieve her book and sees you squirming around in the grass. She laughs and remarks how leaving you in that state is what you really deserve. + +But she decides to show mercy for your plight by stepping on you and putting you out of your misery.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Agh! Alright, alright! Stop poking me…what day is it?” +“Never mind all that geek! Get going you know how the Ring Master doesn’t like being kept waiting! Phew! You smell even more disgusting than usual! I guess that’s one way to keep Ajax from killing you, he’d probably vomit his guts out before he could lay a hand on you…then you could lick it up for the rubes! Ha ha! Move it Geek!” + +Charley prods you with a sharp stick periodically on your way to the Ring Master’s trailer until you arrive at which point, Atlas stops the both of you. + +“Stop! What business do the both of you have here?” +“Goddamnit you fuckin’ one eyed freak! We go through this all the fucking time and its getting REALLY old! You just saw me come out of the Ring Master’s trailer earlier today when he sent me to get the Geek, you know damn well what we’re both doing here!” + +Ignoring Charley’s comments Atlas looks down at you and points. + +“You may enter, but the Ring Master doesn’t need to see you again, so you may not.” +“Yeah, whatever enjoy the smell.” Charley says and mumbles something to himself while leaving the area. + +You barely make it up the little steps to the trailer, but you do. You’re finally starting to gather your wits together; your head still hurts though and you’ve just realize you haven’t had a drink yet. What a terrible feeling. You open the door. + +“Close the door, you’re letting all the sunlight in.” the Ring Master orders from behind his desk. She’s siting in his chair, but has her back turned to you. +“Uh you wanted to see me?” +“Of course…(Sniff sniff) you really haven’t been taking care of yourself. If anything you’ve become even more repulsive than when I first took you in. Remember that day?” +“Um, yeah I think…no, no I don’t. I mean kind of… I forget things.” +“I’m not surprised; you’re constantly drinking that swill Charley makes. I am surprised you haven’t gone blind yet though. Oh well what you insist on doing to yourself is of little concern to me, all I require is your obedience. You are thankful for all I have provided for you aren’t you?” +“Oh yeah. Sure I am.” +“You seem to be one of the few nowadays then. There are some though that are ungrateful for things I’ve done for them, they plan to betray me and everything this carnival stands for. They plan to change the natural order of things. Can you imagine what might happen to this carnival if I wasn’t here? What might happen to you?” + +You attempt to think about this scenario, but instead you just stand there because you can’t really form anything in your mind because it hurts really bad, you’ve been sober too damn long, and it’s about to get even longer as the Ring Master seems intent on bombarding you with talk as he finally swivels around in her chair. That pale androgynous face of the Ring Master’s is displaying a look of seriousness as usual. + +“Nothing good I can assure you. Which is why I’m putting YOU in charge of this task.” +“Huh? What task?” +“Why ensuring the survival of the carnival of course.” +”What!? Me?! Why? How!? I’m not qualified! Can’t you or Charley do it?” +“I fear I’ve done all I’ve can. I mean I’ve provided all of THIS to everyone here. I’ve given them purpose and a life. If that isn’t enough for them, then my words aren’t going to make a difference at this point. And as for Charley, well…I’m sure even in your usual state of drunkenness you’re aware that he has his own plans for this carnival.” +“I guess…but agh, it’s too early for all this…why me? I mean what am I supposed to do? I’m just the Geek.” +“Yes, and that’s exactly why I’m choosing you. You have no motive, you have no agenda, you have no friends, and as such you would probably be the best candidate to convince others to resist change and keep the status quo.” +“You have to be joking! Nobody’s going to listen to me! I’m the fucking Geek!” +“You might be surprised, you have far more potential than you give yourself credit for…perhaps you’ll even change some perspectives, or maybe not. The choice is yours, because the fate of THIS carnival is resting solely on your actions, you can no longer afford to hide from the world in a bottle and a cage if you wish to keep your current life. It is time for you to take some responsibility, its time to repay the debt you owe me. You have until show time.” +“But…” +“Now leave me, I wish to be alone.” + +The Ring Master swivels his chair back to its original position. You head back outside, where upon Atlas blocks it again with his massive body. + +Never before in your life have you been put in this kind of position of responsibility, (Not that you can remember anyway) but you’re going to have to do something, the question is what exactly? +> Run away! +This is all just too much for you; you don’t want to be any part of this. You do what you’ve always done all your life; run away leaving the carnival behind. Nobody goes looking for you, not even the Ring Master. Geeks like you are a dime a dozen. They can get another one. + +You take up “residence” in the nearest town, begging for money for booze and sleeping in the park. The townsfolk are a little less tolerant of the likes of you than the Carneys were though and besides they already have town drunks that they know and love. You’re treated worse than you were at the Carnival if such a thing were possible. At least there you served somewhat of a purpose; here you’re just a drain on the community. + +One night the town’s drain is solved when you’re beaten and set on fire by the local young punks.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Geek: + +1. A person regarded as foolish or clumsy. + +2. A person who is single-minded or accomplished in scientific or technical pursuits, but is felt to be socially inept. + +3. A carnival performer whose show consists of bizarre and disgusting acts. + + +Your breath stinks from the foul things you’ve been eating and the rest of you stinks from not bathing in who knows when. + +Your head hurts from the cheap moonshine you’ve been getting “paid” in. + +Rubes often throw stuff at you and spit on you. + +Most of the other Carnies find you utterly repulsive and avoid you, a couple of them just abuse you for various reasons. + +On a good day, only the Pinheads come to your cell and taunt you with their gibbering laughs and mongoloid chatter. + +You have absolutely no worth as a human being, you get no respect from others, and you have no respect for yourself…and why should you? You are the lowest form of life in Carney society. You’re not a real performer; what you do can’t really be considered a skill. You’re not even a real freak. At least a deformed freak can evoke an emotion of horror, or pity, or even admiration for overcoming their condition. You weren’t born “this way”. You chose to do this. All you evoke is disgust and revulsion. At best you’re laughed at and not in the good way like those pervert clowns you work with. + +Fuck all that “Wildman of Borneo” shit that the Ringmaster tries to tell all the rubes. You’re little more than a bum with a “job”. A degrading job that involves you to debase yourself, all for the amusement and shock value of others, but hey it keeps a “roof” over your head and you pleasantly drunk enough to just barely forget how utterly pathetic your life is. + +You are the GEEK. + +You wake up to a bucket of piss being thrown in your face. Not the first time and certainly won’t be the last. + +“You like the taste of that Geek? Get up Geek! The Ring Master wants to see you!” Charley orders then he throws the empty bucket at your head. The comical sound it makes hitting your skull and the pain it causes makes Charley laugh. Then he jabs you a couple times with his pointed stick. + +Midgets can be so cruel… +> Kick at Charley +You stagger to get up and attempt to kick Charley, but instead to trip over yourself and fall…right on to Charley’s pointed stick. The only good thing is you skewered yourself right through the heart killing you instantly. + +“Aw hell. Hey guys! Someone get me another Geek! This one’s dead.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Geek: + +1. A person regarded as foolish or clumsy. + +2. A person who is single-minded or accomplished in scientific or technical pursuits, but is felt to be socially inept. + +3. A carnival performer whose show consists of bizarre and disgusting acts. + + +Your breath stinks from the foul things you’ve been eating and the rest of you stinks from not bathing in who knows when. + +Your head hurts from the cheap moonshine you’ve been getting “paid” in. + +Rubes often throw stuff at you and spit on you. + +Most of the other Carnies find you utterly repulsive and avoid you, a couple of them just abuse you for various reasons. + +On a good day, only the Pinheads come to your cell and taunt you with their gibbering laughs and mongoloid chatter. + +You have absolutely no worth as a human being, you get no respect from others, and you have no respect for yourself…and why should you? You are the lowest form of life in Carney society. You’re not a real performer; what you do can’t really be considered a skill. You’re not even a real freak. At least a deformed freak can evoke an emotion of horror, or pity, or even admiration for overcoming their condition. You weren’t born “this way”. You chose to do this. All you evoke is disgust and revulsion. At best you’re laughed at and not in the good way like those pervert clowns you work with. + +Fuck all that “Wildman of Borneo” shit that the Ringmaster tries to tell all the rubes. You’re little more than a bum with a “job”. A degrading job that involves you to debase yourself, all for the amusement and shock value of others, but hey it keeps a “roof” over your head and you pleasantly drunk enough to just barely forget how utterly pathetic your life is. + +You are the GEEK. + +You wake up to a bucket of piss being thrown in your face. Not the first time and certainly won’t be the last. + +“You like the taste of that Geek? Get up Geek! The Ring Master wants to see you!” Charley orders then he throws the empty bucket at your head. The comical sound it makes hitting your skull and the pain it causes makes Charley laugh. Then he jabs you a couple times with his pointed stick. + +Midgets can be so cruel… +> Jog your damn memory to remember who the hell you even associate with (Cast of Characters) +Just because you’re all Carneys and united against the Rubes doesn’t mean there isn’t division in the ranks. You’re all like a big dysfunctional family, and you’re the scapegoat black sheep, you lucky Geek you. + +The only good thing about being the GEEK, is that nobody considers you a threat or even a person! Plus you’re usually sprawled out someplace either drunk or asleep. This means while others assume you’re out of it and not competent enough to do anything except eat disgusting things, you’ve over heard some interesting information in your half conscious state of mind. Things that will probably come in handy in the ensuing power struggle you’re about to become embroiled in. + +So if you keep your head down, use animal cunning, watch your ass and you might just come through this alive. + +And maybe, just maybe you’ll finally get some respect. + +Maybe… +> Cast of Characters (The Main Event) +The Ring Master + +Nobody knows what his real name is and if they do nobody’s telling and she’s certainly not volunteering any information about himself. Of course everyone assumes she’s male, but there’s an “air” of androgyny about him leading to rumors that he may actually be female…or possibly both. He’s very pale, his voice has an unnatural melodic tone and he wears a traditional ring master suit with a top hat. The only thing she wants people to know and remember is that he is definitely in charge. Her main concern is to keep his carnival running and turning a profit; he doesn’t really care what any of his employees do in their spare time unless it interferes or hampers the carnival. + +The Ring Master is known for being “Freak friendly” after all not many would have jobs at all if it weren’t for him, but by the same token he pays them fairly. Many see her as somewhat of a savior since he’s given many of them a place in the world where they can be useful. She doesn’t hold their hand or overprotect them he just gives them a chance. A chance that they can either succeed or fail in, but a chance they might not have had otherwise without him. + +He tends to stay in his trailer until show time allowing her assistant Charley to do all his leg work. She’s rarely seen walking around anywhere; instead he just suddenly “appears” and he’s never seen outside at all during the daytime. There have been the hushed rumors and semi-jokes that she’s really a vampire, but most people just think he’s just weird and suffers from albinism which makes her less inclined on wanting to be exposed to the sun. + +While not sadistic, (He doesn’t appear to get off on it like say Charley) he will make examples out of people that displease him and you’ll definitely feel it. Oh how you’ll feel it. When you have to see the Ring Master personally it’s usually not a good thing. + +You met him when she found you wandering and vomiting near his trailer at night while in your usual drunken states. She saw how utterly hopeless you were. You had no job, no home, no loved ones, no future prospects, yet he saw potential where there literally was none. He made a deal with you. Become the GEEK for a place to call home and all the liquor you could drink. + +Well gee how could you not pass up a deal like that? + +Charley the Midget + +Charley was a criminal long before he joined the carnival. The carnival just allowed him to flourish in those activities. He’s in charge of most of the illegal activities that go on at the carnival as well as making life miserable for anyone who displeases the Ring Master. Of course he takes great delight in making people miserable whenever it suits him. He has found a like minded partner in Ajax the Strongman who acts as his muscle when the need arises. He’s a first class sonofabitch, but he probably makes the carnival more profitable than it is. + +Midgets represent most of labor workforce in the carnival and being the “Biggest” and toughest midget at the carnival makes him their unofficial leader which the rest of the midgets have mixed emotions about, but with all his connections and power there is little that they can do about it even if they wanted to. Charley constantly reminds them that they are the real backbone of the carnival and also reminds them how townies and rubes would often pick on them for fun and ever since he arrived they don’t do that anymore lest they suffer the consequences. Gruesome consequences. + +Charley definitely harbors secret plans to take over the carnival completely one day, he likes to think of himself as the “Real Ring Master” and dresses like his boss except his suit is checkered and has an especially tall top hat. (To extend his height no doubt) He feels that with Ajax and “his people” behind him he’ll be able to launch a take over when the time is right. All he needs to do is get a few more of the others to side with him. + +As for you, Charley likes to take any free opportunity he has to humiliate you, which seems rather pointless given you don’t have any self-respect to begin with, still it makes him laugh. Chances are if he did take over the Carnival you’d still have a “job” since Charley wouldn’t want to get rid of his favorite whipping boy. + +The Remarkable Randal + +Randal is the appointed spokesperson for the “normal” Carneys such as the acrobats, tightrope walkers and other performers that rely on their genuine skills rather than their genetic conditions. Randal himself is a magician, but makes no pretense that he actually has any kind of real magical powers, but he believes magic exists. He’s constantly acquiring old books hoping that someday that he can learn how to perform real magic one day. Randal is a bit of an optimistic dreamer, he believes the carnival is supposed to be a place of fun and wonder for the whole family. He IS that boy that ran away to join the circus in a sense as he did run away from his family who were fundamentalists that believed him to be dabbling in Satanic worship with his magic tricks. + +He doesn’t really like the idea of the carnival having “freaks” for the sake of having them. He feels its pandering to the lowest common denominator and cheapening the other Carnies who actually have to rely on a learned skill and he really doesn’t approve of all the illegal activity that goes on (Especially in a place which is supposed to be for the children) he blames the Ring Master as much as Charley for this, since the Ring Master turns a blind eye to it when he should be stopping it. + +Randal is a little more open about his rebellious nature than Charley and complains to the Ring Master whenever he gets the chance, (One of the few that gets away with it without consequences) to which his last response was if he doesn’t like the way things are being run, he can either leave or make his move. So far Randal hasn’t gone anywhere, so maybe he’s going to take the Ring Master up on his challenge. Charley thinks he’s a lot of talk and doesn’t think he really has the balls to do it so he’s not worried about him. + +Considering Randal’s views, you might find yourself out of a job if Randal got things his way. Shock value and Freaks wouldn’t really have a place in Randal’s carnival. Unsurprisingly Randal finds you and your act disgusting and completely unsuitable for anyone, especially children. (Even though the kiddies really like throwing chickens at you)<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just because you’re all Carneys and united against the Rubes doesn’t mean there isn’t division in the ranks. You’re all like a big dysfunctional family, and you’re the scapegoat black sheep, you lucky Geek you. + +The only good thing about being the GEEK, is that nobody considers you a threat or even a person! Plus you’re usually sprawled out someplace either drunk or asleep. This means while others assume you’re out of it and not competent enough to do anything except eat disgusting things, you’ve over heard some interesting information in your half conscious state of mind. Things that will probably come in handy in the ensuing power struggle you’re about to become embroiled in. + +So if you keep your head down, use animal cunning, watch your ass and you might just come through this alive. + +And maybe, just maybe you’ll finally get some respect. + +Maybe… +> Cast of Characters (The Secondary Acts) +Ajax the Strongman + +While Charley has delusions of grandeur, he is somewhat grounded in reality enough not to believe he’s invincible. Ajax on the other hand probably thinks he could catch a bullet in his teeth and spit it back at his assailant. The man is completely narcissistic. Undoubtedly he is in good shape, very strong and probably a lot better looking than most of the Carnies, and he takes every opportunity to let everyone know it. He sneers at all the other guys for being “lesser” than him (Save Charley, Atlas and the Ring Master) and of course shamelessly grabs at any woman that strikes his fancy. So pleased with his own body image that he basically walks around in a loin cloth at all times. Even when the Carnival is someplace cold and snowing. He’d probably walk around naked if he could get away with it. + +Why he’s allied with Charley given his own arrogance and his “normie” status might cause some to wonder, but the reasons aren’t far fetched. Besides Ajax’s own criminal mentality, Ajax is an opportunist, and he’ll make more money under Charley and he thinks Charley is going to be on the winning team (Especially with him on his side) Not to mention Ajax doesn’t really like the Ring Master. Never has. His pale androgynous nature really creeps him out. And the Remarkable Randal is a pussy as far as Ajax is concerned. + +Another person that Ajax definitely doesn’t like is you. While most others will simply avoid, taunt or abuse you for awhile for amusement, Ajax HATES you and has nearly beaten you to death a couple times. Presumably he sees you as a pathetic example of the male specimen that should’ve been killed at birth and while he may be right, he’s kept in check by Charley and/or the Ring Master from carrying out his desires. (As a rule Carneys are NOT supposed to kill each other…well unless there’s a good reason for it) + +You’d be in a world of shit if something ever happened to both of them. + +Atlas the Cyclopean Giant + +If there’s one person that’s possibly stronger than Ajax, it’s Atlas. (He’s certainly scarier) He’s an eight foot Cyclops that wears a hood covering everything except a single unblinking eye. He stands outside the Ring Master’s trailer at all times not letting anyone pass unless the Ring Master wishes it. Atlas has been with the Ring Master even before the Carnival. + +Atlas was personally brought up by the Ring Master and is utterly loyal to him. It’s commonly thought that the Ring Master found him abandoned as a baby and took him in, of course rumors also persist that he’s the Ring Master’s son. (Whether the Ring Master is the father OR the mother causes more rumors) Whatever the truth, Atlas might as well be his son as he certainly considers the Ring Master as a parental figure since he raised him. + +Atlas’ sole job is to protect the Ring Master and to look intimidating. A job he does very well. Atlas rarely speaks and if he does it’s usually a one word response in a low voice. Charley hopes Ajax will be his counter balance when the time comes, of course Ajax feels he’ll be able to beat Atlas with no problems. + +Atlas is one of the few people that has no opinion of you, he just sees you as another Carney who works for the Ring Master and aren’t allowed to see him unless he deems it so. + +Madam Orbec + +Madam Orbec is the gypsy fortune teller. Like most fortune tellers she claims to genuinely have psychic powers, but most likely she’s just really good at conning people. Still she always keeps in character at all times, so it’s possible she believes her own hype. One thing she does a lot is talk to “spirits” that aren’t there. Sometimes this results in her talking to herself for great lengths of time and often screaming to tell “them” to shut up. She doesn’t even appear to notice anyone else around while she’s doing this. All of which pretty much means most of the other Carneys consider her just mentally unstable and is listening to the voices in her own head. + +Oddly Randal completely believes she has psychic abilities, this is probably due to Randal’s own naivety and his own desperate belief that magic is real. He consults her frequently about what she sees in the future for the carnival, it’s possible that’s why he hasn’t made any kind of move of his own because he’s guided by her visions to a certain degree. Madam Orbec likes Randal, but remains suspicious if he isn’t just trying to be friendly to gain access to an old book she has supposedly containing secrets to necromancy. + +Because of this factor, unlike the Ring Master and Charley’s “right hand men”, Madam Orbec isn’t necessarily on Randal’s side. She believes a great change is coming in the carnival, but the spirits haven’t told her exactly what that is yet. Her visions and conversations have been increasing to the point where she can barely keep it together for the rubes anymore. Her sanity has been in severe question for years, but now her competency is as well. + +Of course she still has enough sense to not want to be near you. Apparently the spirits don’t like you anymore than the living do. + +Pervus the Clown + +“Pervert” or “Pervo” is what he’s usually called and for good reason. Pervus is probably the next disgusting Carney after you, the only difference is he has a group of like minded “friends” and the other thing is he’s a clown. And clowns no matter how twisted and evil they are; they can get away with it. + +He and his gang of equally demented red nosed fellows have to be the sickest bunch in the Carnival, particularly in the sex department. It’s not surprising that townie children start disappearing whenever the Carnival makes an extended visit somewhere and they certainly haven’t all run off to join, what ultimately happens to them is better left unmentioned and not dwelled upon too much. But it isn’t just children that disappear. Local farm animals will disappear as well (Strangely these poor creatures may be spared death, if the Carnival is in need of a couple new pack animals) and local graveyards may even be raided… + +Of course Pervus and the clowns think it’s all a big joke on the rubes. + +Despite being the symbols of utter depravity, they are one of the other “major groups” and as is fitting they are a wild card. They do their job when its show time and do it very well which puts them in good standing with the Ring Master. They often indulge in the prostitutes and liquor Charley provides. And while Randal barely approves of them (To be honest he probably isn’t aware of how bad they REALLY are) he does recognize them as having a talent and are an important staple of any carnival. (They also aren’t Freaks, though classifying them as “Normals” might be stretching it) Its unknown who Pervus will side with, but they see that there’s definitely benefits for any of them. + +Pervus and his crew are the one exception concerning you. Instead of them avoiding you, YOU purposely avoid them! While they’d never kill you (They do still follow that one rule that you don’t kill a fellow Carney for no reason) that wouldn’t prevent them from having their way with you if the urge ever struck them. You have been known to resemble a rotting dead body (In smell especially) when you’re passed out after all. + +Sasha and Salina + +Sasha is the on/off girlfriend of Ajax. She’s not only a contortionist, but also an acrobat. She’s very beautiful, but her self-esteem isn’t really the best otherwise she wouldn’t be with Ajax. He pretty much treats her like shit, and she’ll put up with it, until he really fucks up and then she throws him out of her trailer. Upon which time he’ll continue to harass and stalk her until she takes him back for the umpteenth time and the cycle starts over again. She’s definitely the star attraction of the “normal” Carneys, besides Randal. (Who really wishes she wasn’t so close to Ajax.) + +Salina is Charley’s girlfriend…or at least he likes to tell everyone she is. She’s the tattooed woman and also dances with various kinds of snakes. (Imaginatively called a “Snake Lady”) She’s pretty, but has a harder look than Sasha, its obvious by her demeanor she had a rough life before the Carnival. Charley is constantly hitting on her, but he’s unsuccessful for the most part though every now and then he gets lucky, though you suspect it’s his money talking more than his “charms” at work in those cases. In any event she isn’t particularly fond of him. She’s considered a normal, but her activities and lifestyle lean more towards the criminal mindset particularly prostitution. So she has more in common with Charley than Randal who looks his nose down at her. + +Probably due to the partnership of Charley and Ajax, Sasha and Salina associate with each other more than they might normally would. As it turns out the two are genuinely friends and speak to each other frequently, one may wonder if they aren’t plotting something on their own together… + +Of course you’d never know since the two of them avoid you like the plague because you’re just icky.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just because you’re all Carneys and united against the Rubes doesn’t mean there isn’t division in the ranks. You’re all like a big dysfunctional family, and you’re the scapegoat black sheep, you lucky Geek you. + +The only good thing about being the GEEK, is that nobody considers you a threat or even a person! Plus you’re usually sprawled out someplace either drunk or asleep. This means while others assume you’re out of it and not competent enough to do anything except eat disgusting things, you’ve over heard some interesting information in your half conscious state of mind. Things that will probably come in handy in the ensuing power struggle you’re about to become embroiled in. + +So if you keep your head down, use animal cunning, watch your ass and you might just come through this alive. + +And maybe, just maybe you’ll finally get some respect. + +Maybe… +> Cast of Characters (The Sideshows) +Normals + +Normals is really a generic term for anyone who isn’t a Freak, but its often used to describe Carneys who aren’t deformed in some way and make a living in the Carnival utilizing some skill. (“Normals” who aren’t Carneys are usually just called “Rubes” or at best “Townies”) The core of these include acrobats, tightrope walkers, game barkers and the like. Normals as always out number the Freaks, but they aren’t nearly as unified, though Randal’s been trying to, in his effort to gain power. + +Nearly all Normals find you revolting and run you off if you get near, either verbally OR physically. + +Freaks + +This is a generic term for Carneys who have some sort of genetic condition that separates them from the rest of society. They can range from being very hairy, have no limbs, or have a few extra ones. In any case they are one of the major carnival draws. Some learn a few skills to go along with their deformities, but it’s mainly their horrific appearance that they rely upon. Despite all their different forms, they are very unified and support the Ring Master for giving them a place in the world. Jasmine the bearded lady tends to be the Matriarch of them all + +Freaks are a little more tolerant of you, since they’ve also suffered scorn and ridicule too, but you’re not REALLY one of them and as such you’re still an outsider and aren’t really welcomed around them. + +Midgets + +Not quite normals and not quite freaks, but the midgets are the ones who get things done in the Carnival and keep it running. (Though everyone else refers to them as Midgets, they prefer to refer to each other as Dwarves) They make up a majority of the labor force of the Carnival, a thankless job to be sure, and one that went unappreciated until Charley arrived. Now they make a lot more thanks to his “extra curricular” activities. They are pretty much unified, though they have mixed feelings about their self appointed leader. + +Midgets are overworked at the best of times, so when a smelly disgusting Geek like you is around they really don’t have the tolerance or patience for it. Bob is about the only one who’ll even talk to you, the rest tend to kick you in the shins and chase you off with their work tools while shouting obscenities. + +Pinheads + +An interesting sub-society within the Freak community. They all tend to hang out together constantly laughing and babbling nonsensical ramblings. Though they may appear childlike and carefree, those qualities can mask a mean spiritedness sometimes. + +You’d know since you’ve experienced this meanness first hand. + +Clowns + +Pure evil wrapped up in the guise of something supposedly funny and harmless. While technically classified as “normals”, there isn’t anything normal about them. One wonders if they’re actually even human underneath that make up. All intelligent right thinking people stay away from them. + +Even YOU stay away from clowns!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just because you’re all Carneys and united against the Rubes doesn’t mean there isn’t division in the ranks. You’re all like a big dysfunctional family, and you’re the scapegoat black sheep, you lucky Geek you. + +The only good thing about being the GEEK, is that nobody considers you a threat or even a person! Plus you’re usually sprawled out someplace either drunk or asleep. This means while others assume you’re out of it and not competent enough to do anything except eat disgusting things, you’ve over heard some interesting information in your half conscious state of mind. Things that will probably come in handy in the ensuing power struggle you’re about to become embroiled in. + +So if you keep your head down, use animal cunning, watch your ass and you might just come through this alive. + +And maybe, just maybe you’ll finally get some respect. + +Maybe… +> Back to the story +Geek: + +1. A person regarded as foolish or clumsy. + +2. A person who is single-minded or accomplished in scientific or technical pursuits, but is felt to be socially inept. + +3. A carnival performer whose show consists of bizarre and disgusting acts. + + +Your breath stinks from the foul things you’ve been eating and the rest of you stinks from not bathing in who knows when. + +Your head hurts from the cheap moonshine you’ve been getting “paid” in. + +Rubes often throw stuff at you and spit on you. + +Most of the other Carnies find you utterly repulsive and avoid you, a couple of them just abuse you for various reasons. + +On a good day, only the Pinheads come to your cell and taunt you with their gibbering laughs and mongoloid chatter. + +You have absolutely no worth as a human being, you get no respect from others, and you have no respect for yourself…and why should you? You are the lowest form of life in Carney society. You’re not a real performer; what you do can’t really be considered a skill. You’re not even a real freak. At least a deformed freak can evoke an emotion of horror, or pity, or even admiration for overcoming their condition. You weren’t born “this way”. You chose to do this. All you evoke is disgust and revulsion. At best you’re laughed at and not in the good way like those pervert clowns you work with. + +Fuck all that “Wildman of Borneo” shit that the Ringmaster tries to tell all the rubes. You’re little more than a bum with a “job”. A degrading job that involves you to debase yourself, all for the amusement and shock value of others, but hey it keeps a “roof” over your head and you pleasantly drunk enough to just barely forget how utterly pathetic your life is. + +You are the GEEK. + +You wake up to a bucket of piss being thrown in your face. Not the first time and certainly won’t be the last. + +“You like the taste of that Geek? Get up Geek! The Ring Master wants to see you!” Charley orders then he throws the empty bucket at your head. The comical sound it makes hitting your skull and the pain it causes makes Charley laugh. Then he jabs you a couple times with his pointed stick. + +Midgets can be so cruel…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"We are all in the gutter, but some of us are looking at the stars." + + +A good quote, you think to yourself. It'd have had to be written by an Irishman, of course. The English would never speak of themselves being in the gutter with the common muck,, they'd claim to be of the stars themselves if they could. No, an Irishman would have to have written it, because only an Irishman would understand subjugation. + + +You stand under a gray sky, a field of barley and oats surrounding you. Thanks to it being August, there's relatively little to do, so you're given time to think. Of course, without working to keep you going, the thinking usually goes downhill. Either your evenings end with you grabbing the bottle, or staring at those stars as dreams of freedom fill your mind. + + +Eireann is truly in the gutter, you think to yourself. The British boot sits on her throat, keeping her down, like it has for hundreds of years. It will continue to, until the people can rise up and fix that problem. Of course, Britain weakens, its empire collapsing inwards. It's only a matter of time before you finish what the proud Fenians of old had started, what Wolfe Tone continued, and what your generation will finish: the fight for independence. + + +"Michael! Michael, get in here!" a shrill voice screams from the farmhouse. + + +You turn, sighing, as you work towards the farmhouse, your boots plodding through the mud. It's always something with that woman, you think to yourself. You reach the door, pushing it inwards as you walk into your cramped kitchen. + + +"Ma, what's wrong?" you say, leaning in the doorway. + + +Ma sits in the kitchen at the table, a newspaper in her hands. Joseph stands next to her, his tall, sturdy frame filling a long overcoat. Mary is staring around Joseph, a frail, timid creature in comparison to your burly brother, like a delicate flower growing next to a great Oak. Ma motions for you to see the paper, and you shrug, leaning in to see the pages. + + +You lean over, looking at the crinkled paper. "BRITAIN AT WAR: GERMANY IGNORES FINAL ULTIMATUM" reads the title. + + +"Jesus Christ," you say. + + +You're struck in the face by Ma, who doesn't miss a beat in doing so. While the age has certainly taken much from the woman, it sure hasn't sapped her strength by how much it stings. Still, your mind is too focused on the looming war to even register the pain. + + +"Michael, don't take the Lord's name in vain!" the old woman croaks. + + +"We're at war, Ma, don't blame him. He's shocked," Mary says, rubbing your arm. + + +"We're at war?" Joseph says indignantly. "When did Ireland declare war?! This is their doing, not ours!" + + +"You can't be saying that, Joseph. It's our empire too!" Mary says. + + +"Like bloody hell it is!" Joseph says, stepping back to avoid the incoming slap from Ma. "I'd sooner bow downs to the King of Holland than the King of England." + + +"They gave us a parliament!" + + +"They didn't give us a parliament! They promised us a parliament, which we haven't gotten! Now that'll be postponed because of the war, and when that's finished, we'll be feeling the British boot pressed against our throats yet again! + + +There's a short silence, as you all think about the repercussions this new war will have. + + +"Will you be signing up? They're recruiting," Mary says softly. + + +Joseph lets out a barking laugh, shaking his head in disgust. + + +"Are you joking? Unless the Kaiser's recruiting Irishmen to take out the crown, you can count me out!" + + +Joseph spits on the ground, turning and heading out of the room. Ma immediately darts up as quick as a bullet, far faster than any old woman has a right to do, heading after him to give him another smack. You chuckle as the two rush out of the room. This leaves you and your sister standing alone around the table. + + +"We're in dark times, Michael," Mary says to you. "I'm worried about Joseph. He's been hanging around too many hotheads, violent thugs and brutes the lot of them!" + + +"Joseph's fine," you say dismissively. "How do you think he'd react when you asked him if he'd sign up?" + + +"I suppose," she says. "But, Michael, you understand, right? Why we need to serve the Empire, to prove the Irish are a loyal, hard-working people." + + +"To prove that to who?" you say, annoyed. "The British? They saw how loyal we are many a time, they just don't like what we're loyal to. We're Irish, Mary, not British. Don't forget it." + + +Mary turns in a huff, moving out of the room. Thankfully, this leaves you alone to think, and you let out a quiet sigh of contentment, sitting down at the table. You grab the newspaper, flicking through it. Might as well read up while you're alone. +> Read "Hundred year anniversary of the foundation of the Apprentice Boys of Derry Club" (General History) +The nation of Ireland has had a long and varied history. From the Mesolithic hunter-gatherers who walked there via land bridge, the Neolithic Men behind the ancient and amazing Newgrange, the Celts who soon popularized the country when it was known as Hibernia and from the Christians who spread after the return of Saint Patrick, who was enslaved by Irish pirates in his youth and endless Viking attacks, there's been a long history of pioneers and innovators creating a proud and noble nation. + + +Irish history first has serious Anglo involvement in the Norman invasion of Ireland. Before then Ireland was simply a series of kingdoms and warring clans. The larger and more advanced Norman forces soon managed to conquer considerable sections of Ireland. However, rather than push for a full takeover, English focuses soon shifted, leaving a fortified area known as the Pale around Dublin under British control, with the rest mostly being allowed to survive under local rule. After this, there was a divide in power between the Gaelic Lords who could trace their origins back to the Celts who popularized the lands, and the Norman lords descended from those who sought to conquer the island. + + +However, in 1536, Henry VII led an invasion of Ireland. Although there was brutal fighting as the Irish appealed to Catholic Spain for help, Ireland was soon conquered. Then, with a religious divide forming due to the birth of Protestantism, the issues first began arising. Using a system of land confiscation and colonization known as Plantation, English and Scottish Protestants were given Irish land to run, using the Irish Catholics as slaves. Although there were many brutal Irish rebellions such as the War of the Three Kings, which succeeded temporarily before the re-conquest of Ireland by Oliver Cromwell, the Rebellion of 1641, which was fought over the division between Catholics and Protestants, and many more bloody and brutal rebellions, Ireland failed ot successfully regain control of its lands, and were treated as second class citizens by the Protestants who ruled over the country. +> Back +"We are all in the gutter, but some of us are looking at the stars." + + +A good quote, you think to yourself. It'd have had to be written by an Irishman, of course. The English would never speak of themselves being in the gutter with the common muck,, they'd claim to be of the stars themselves if they could. No, an Irishman would have to have written it, because only an Irishman would understand subjugation. + + +You stand under a gray sky, a field of barley and oats surrounding you. Thanks to it being August, there's relatively little to do, so you're given time to think. Of course, without working to keep you going, the thinking usually goes downhill. Either your evenings end with you grabbing the bottle, or staring at those stars as dreams of freedom fill your mind. + + +Eireann is truly in the gutter, you think to yourself. The British boot sits on her throat, keeping her down, like it has for hundreds of years. It will continue to, until the people can rise up and fix that problem. Of course, Britain weakens, its empire collapsing inwards. It's only a matter of time before you finish what the proud Fenians of old had started, what Wolfe Tone continued, and what your generation will finish: the fight for independence. + + +"Michael! Michael, get in here!" a shrill voice screams from the farmhouse. + + +You turn, sighing, as you work towards the farmhouse, your boots plodding through the mud. It's always something with that woman, you think to yourself. You reach the door, pushing it inwards as you walk into your cramped kitchen. + + +"Ma, what's wrong?" you say, leaning in the doorway. + + +Ma sits in the kitchen at the table, a newspaper in her hands. Joseph stands next to her, his tall, sturdy frame filling a long overcoat. Mary is staring around Joseph, a frail, timid creature in comparison to your burly brother, like a delicate flower growing next to a great Oak. Ma motions for you to see the paper, and you shrug, leaning in to see the pages. + + +You lean over, looking at the crinkled paper. "BRITAIN AT WAR: GERMANY IGNORES FINAL ULTIMATUM" reads the title. + + +"Jesus Christ," you say. + + +You're struck in the face by Ma, who doesn't miss a beat in doing so. While the age has certainly taken much from the woman, it sure hasn't sapped her strength by how much it stings. Still, your mind is too focused on the looming war to even register the pain. + + +"Michael, don't take the Lord's name in vain!" the old woman croaks. + + +"We're at war, Ma, don't blame him. He's shocked," Mary says, rubbing your arm. + + +"We're at war?" Joseph says indignantly. "When did Ireland declare war?! This is their doing, not ours!" + + +"You can't be saying that, Joseph. It's our empire too!" Mary says. + + +"Like bloody hell it is!" Joseph says, stepping back to avoid the incoming slap from Ma. "I'd sooner bow downs to the King of Holland than the King of England." + + +"They gave us a parliament!" + + +"They didn't give us a parliament! They promised us a parliament, which we haven't gotten! Now that'll be postponed because of the war, and when that's finished, we'll be feeling the British boot pressed against our throats yet again! + + +There's a short silence, as you all think about the repercussions this new war will have. + + +"Will you be signing up? They're recruiting," Mary says softly. + + +Joseph lets out a barking laugh, shaking his head in disgust. + + +"Are you joking? Unless the Kaiser's recruiting Irishmen to take out the crown, you can count me out!" + + +Joseph spits on the ground, turning and heading out of the room. Ma immediately darts up as quick as a bullet, far faster than any old woman has a right to do, heading after him to give him another smack. You chuckle as the two rush out of the room. This leaves you and your sister standing alone around the table. + + +"We're in dark times, Michael," Mary says to you. "I'm worried about Joseph. He's been hanging around too many hotheads, violent thugs and brutes the lot of them!" + + +"Joseph's fine," you say dismissively. "How do you think he'd react when you asked him if he'd sign up?" + + +"I suppose," she says. "But, Michael, you understand, right? Why we need to serve the Empire, to prove the Irish are a loyal, hard-working people." + + +"To prove that to who?" you say, annoyed. "The British? They saw how loyal we are many a time, they just don't like what we're loyal to. We're Irish, Mary, not British. Don't forget it." + + +Mary turns in a huff, moving out of the room. Thankfully, this leaves you alone to think, and you let out a quiet sigh of contentment, sitting down at the table. You grab the newspaper, flicking through it. Might as well read up while you're alone.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Its another day and you feel nothing... + +You're 18 years old and very socially inept. Naturally you're not popular in high school, you're not even worthy to be routinely picked on. This isn't to say you aren't at all, but most people just find you very creepy and stay away from you. You're mom's strict upbringing has made you very emotionally detached and repressed. At this point you barely feel any kind of emotions at all. + +Maybe that changes today. + +Your Mom is calling you down to eat. +> Go downstairs +You head downstairs, like you always do. No point in breaking tradition. + +When you get downstairs your Mom is arguing with your 17 year old sister as usual. She isn't like you at all, she's popular for one thing, but then again being a very pretty and extroverted will do that for a person. + +She's a bit of a wild child though which your domineering mother can't stand. You wonder why your sister acts the way she does, Mom's just trying to look out for her. + +They're really arguing today. +> Sit down, eat and stay out of it +You sit and eat your breakfast quietly while the two argue as usual. It doesn't involve you, so why get into it? + +"You little fucking whore! You keep staying out all night, and you can just forget about living under my roof! Go fucking sleep in the street with the rest of the sluts!" + +"Oh go fuck yourself Mom! You're just mad because you're a fucking bitter old harpy with nobody in your fucking life!" +"Why you fucking little bitch!" your Mom says and slaps your sister across the face. + +Your sister holds her face and shuts up. She picks up her school stuff and heads toward the door, before exiting she says one last thing, before slamming the door. + +"Don't worry Mom, I'm not staying in this fucking house another day!" + +You finish up your breakfast, your Mom doesn't even acknowledge you're there, she leaves the kitchen in a huff rather quickly. + +She must be really pissed. +> Head to school +Mom's strong, she doesn't need you checking up on her. You head to school as normal. What else would you do? + +You get to school just in time for you to see Henry the school bully kicking the hell out of your "friend" Aaron. Aaron isn't so much your friend in that he's such a social reject that you're the only one who doesn't treat him like a leper, so he's attached himself to you. Of course you could really care less about him. Sometimes you wish he'd leave you alone, since he only makes you stand out more, when all you want to do is blend into the background. + +"Get the fuck up you faggot!" Henry shouts abusively at Aaron while kicking him gleefully. +Aaron looks at you in the hopes that you'll help. +> Go to class +Its between Henry and Aaron. Why get involved? Henry would just draw his attention to you, and you have no desire for that. + +You go to your classes as usual and do your work again as usual. In your computer class you see Jessica. She's one of your sister's friends, but isn't as wild as most of them. Doesn't stop her from being a normal teenager though, assuming you had any idea of what normal is. You don't know what it is about her, but she stirs some kind of feeling inside you. She doesn't really know you at all, other than you're Mary's "creepy" brother. + +She looks like she's having difficulty with today's computer lesson. +> Continue with your work +She's never made any effort to talk to you, so you don't feel the overwhelming need to talk to her. You continue with your work until that class is over. + +Lunch time comes around, you expect Aaron to come sit next to you, but he's nowhere to be seen. You wonder if Henry beat him up so bad he had to go home. + +As you sit by yourself eating quietly, you overhear Butch at the next table. + +"Yeah that fucking bitch sucked my dick last night! Haw Haw!" + +Butch is your sister's jock boyfriend, even though they're constantly breaking up and making up. The break ups are mainly due to him cheating on her all the time, but she always ends up forgiving him. You don't know why, even you think your sister could do way better. + +Right now Butch is bragging to his buddies about his latest conquest, which apparently wasn't your sister. +> Finish eating and go to class +Your sister is aware of Butch's infidelity, its up to her to leave him. What good would it do to confront him? After all it isn't really your concern. + +You finish eating and head back to class. On your way there, you pass Henry. Normally Henry doesn't bother with you, save the occasional name calling, but he's looking for a fight. + +"Hey dickhead! I saw you looking at me kicking that faggot Aaron's ass! I know you two fucking butt boys hang out, aren't you pissed off that I kicked your boyfriend's ass?" Henry says getting in your face and pushing you. +> Ignore him +You step aside and walk around him. Henry's a little surprised. + +"Hey faggot, I'm talking to you bitch!" he shouts as you continue to ignore him. Henry hits you in the back of the head with a thrown pencil which you continue to ignore. Sensing his actions aren't getting the desired effect, he stops harassing you. +"Fuck this creepy faggot." Henry mutters to himself and goes in search of different prey. + +You attend the last of your classes and then leave the school. You run into your sister outside. She walks up to talk to you. + +"Hey, I'm gonna stay with Butch tonight, and I think I might just stay over there permanently, his parents all cool enough to let me stay there. I'll be moving all my stuff out a little bit at a time, but I'll try to be quick, so you can tell that controlling bitch that she won't have to deal with me anymore." + +Wow, your sister wasn't joking about moving out. +> Tell her you'll relay the message to Mom +You nod and say okay unemotionally. Your sister looks at you a little worried. + +"You know, you should get out of that house too. I mean look at what Mom has done to you. You're a fucking emotionless robot! You just do everything Mom tells you. Is that really how you want to go through life?" + +You don't say anything. + +"Look, take care of yourself and remember that you don't need to do everything that Mom says." + +She hugs you goodbye and leaves. + +You head back home and when Mom comes back home from work you explain what happened to your sister. Your Mom looks angry, but also relieved, almost as if having her out of the house is a blessing. + +"Good, that little disobedient bitch can stay gone then. Well what are you doing still standing around for? You know you have work to do around the house!" +> Do as Mom says +You do some cleaning and other chores, then you go up to your room and occupy your time until your Mom tells you to go to sleep, which you comply. You go to sleep until morning, then you wake up. + +Its another day and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You nod and say okay unemotionally. Your sister looks at you a little worried. + +"You know, you should get out of that house too. I mean look at what Mom has done to you. You're a fucking emotionless robot! You just do everything Mom tells you. Is that really how you want to go through life?" + +You don't say anything. + +"Look, take care of yourself and remember that you don't need to do everything that Mom says." + +She hugs you goodbye and leaves. + +You head back home and when Mom comes back home from work you explain what happened to your sister. Your Mom looks angry, but also relieved, almost as if having her out of the house is a blessing. + +"Good, that little disobedient bitch can stay gone then. Well what are you doing still standing around for? You know you have work to do around the house!" +> Disobey Mom +You tell her no. + +She slaps you. "What was that?" + +You don't make anymore trouble, and do what you're told. Your sister's advice only got you punished, and what has her rebellious nature gotten her? She's been kicked out of the house. No, rules are made to be followed. To disobey invites punishment. You go to bed remembering that fact of life. + +Another day arrives, and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You step aside and walk around him. Henry's a little surprised. + +"Hey faggot, I'm talking to you bitch!" he shouts as you continue to ignore him. Henry hits you in the back of the head with a thrown pencil which you continue to ignore. Sensing his actions aren't getting the desired effect, he stops harassing you. +"Fuck this creepy faggot." Henry mutters to himself and goes in search of different prey. + +You attend the last of your classes and then leave the school. You run into your sister outside. She walks up to talk to you. + +"Hey, I'm gonna stay with Butch tonight, and I think I might just stay over there permanently, his parents all cool enough to let me stay there. I'll be moving all my stuff out a little bit at a time, but I'll try to be quick, so you can tell that controlling bitch that she won't have to deal with me anymore." + +Wow, your sister wasn't joking about moving out. +> Tell her that Butch has been cheating on her again +You suddenly realize that with your sister gone, you'll be the only one there to face Mom. Even you sense that isn't a good thing. Maybe underneath all your automaton type behavior you do have a certain sense of self-preservation. If anything you're concerned about the changes that your sister leaving might bring, and even though you might not show it, you fear change. + +You tell your sister about Butch, she gets upset, but isn't really surprised. She'll probably break up with him, only to get back with him later. But for now its enough to convince her not to go move in with him. The status quo is kept in check. + +Home life continues as normal, your Mom yells at your sister and she yells back. There's something that is reassuring about that familiarity. + +Another day arrives and you feel comfortably numb...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your sister is aware of Butch's infidelity, its up to her to leave him. What good would it do to confront him? After all it isn't really your concern. + +You finish eating and head back to class. On your way there, you pass Henry. Normally Henry doesn't bother with you, save the occasional name calling, but he's looking for a fight. + +"Hey dickhead! I saw you looking at me kicking that faggot Aaron's ass! I know you two fucking butt boys hang out, aren't you pissed off that I kicked your boyfriend's ass?" Henry says getting in your face and pushing you. +> Punch him +When Henry pushes you, you look confused at first, but then your expression turns to anger. Then your emotions soon follow... + +You punch Henry straight in the nose causing it to explode in a gout of blood! Henry screams when he sees all that blood gushing from his nose. You don't just stop there though, you then take his pinky finger and break it. At this point you are drawing a crowd, while some others go to fetch a teacher. + +You slam Henry's head into the hard ground until his skull cracks. Henry's already unconscious at this point, but you continue to kick him in the stomach until a teacher finally pulls you off, at which point to go quietly. + +This act of wild unleashed anger gets you in severe trouble, namely prison for attempted murder. You don't seem to mind though, Its a structured environment that you're used to, and you welcome the chance to unleash your endless pent up anger on your fellow inmates. + +Another day arrives in your cell you feel fury...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your sister is aware of Butch's infidelity, its up to her to leave him. What good would it do to confront him? After all it isn't really your concern. + +You finish eating and head back to class. On your way there, you pass Henry. Normally Henry doesn't bother with you, save the occasional name calling, but he's looking for a fight. + +"Hey dickhead! I saw you looking at me kicking that faggot Aaron's ass! I know you two fucking butt boys hang out, aren't you pissed off that I kicked your boyfriend's ass?" Henry says getting in your face and pushing you. +> Tell him you could care less about Aaron +Your detached answer, only causes Henry to believe that you're smarting off to him. He immediately kicks you in the balls and trust me you DO feel that! + +He then drags you into the bathroom and beats the hell out of you and leaves you for dead. As you struggle to get your head out of the toilet you lose consciousness due to the massive gash in your head that's bleeding profusely. + +Later you're found by the janitor who manages to get you to a hospital just in time for you to live. Not in time for you to have not suffered brain damage though. + +Oddly this has an interesting effect on your previous emotional condition. You revert back to a childlike state. Your Mom actually is nicer to you and in general, and sis seems to stop partying as much. Your unfortunate event has inadvertantly brought them closer to each other and to you. Of course you're unaware of such things, you just know that two pretty ladies take care of you. + +Another day arrives and you feel playful...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>She's never made any effort to talk to you, so you don't feel the overwhelming need to talk to her. You continue with your work until that class is over. + +Lunch time comes around, you expect Aaron to come sit next to you, but he's nowhere to be seen. You wonder if Henry beat him up so bad he had to go home. + +As you sit by yourself eating quietly, you overhear Butch at the next table. + +"Yeah that fucking bitch sucked my dick last night! Haw Haw!" + +Butch is your sister's jock boyfriend, even though they're constantly breaking up and making up. The break ups are mainly due to him cheating on her all the time, but she always ends up forgiving him. You don't know why, even you think your sister could do way better. + +Right now Butch is bragging to his buddies about his latest conquest, which apparently wasn't your sister. +> Confront Butch +Probably not the best time to act on your feelings... + +You suddenly feel the need to defend your sister's honor by confronting Butch and his six football playing buddies. Needless to say, you don't win that confrontation. + +For the most part you're more humilated than beaten beyond recognition. Still, its enough to deter you from displaying emotion ever again, you go back to your low profile emotionless lifestyle. Things are just easier that way for you. + +Another day arrives and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Its between Henry and Aaron. Why get involved? Henry would just draw his attention to you, and you have no desire for that. + +You go to your classes as usual and do your work again as usual. In your computer class you see Jessica. She's one of your sister's friends, but isn't as wild as most of them. Doesn't stop her from being a normal teenager though, assuming you had any idea of what normal is. You don't know what it is about her, but she stirs some kind of feeling inside you. She doesn't really know you at all, other than you're Mary's "creepy" brother. + +She looks like she's having difficulty with today's computer lesson. +> Help Jessica +Under different circumstances, this might have worked, but your cold emotionless demeanor is still very much a part of you. When you approach Jessica to help her, she declines and gives you a funny look. + +You go back to doing what you were doing. In fact you go about your usual routine for the rest of the day. The fact Jessica turned you down, seems to only make you supress your feelings and retreat into your own world even more. Eventually you go home and go to bed. + +Another day arrives and you still feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Mom's strong, she doesn't need you checking up on her. You head to school as normal. What else would you do? + +You get to school just in time for you to see Henry the school bully kicking the hell out of your "friend" Aaron. Aaron isn't so much your friend in that he's such a social reject that you're the only one who doesn't treat him like a leper, so he's attached himself to you. Of course you could really care less about him. Sometimes you wish he'd leave you alone, since he only makes you stand out more, when all you want to do is blend into the background. + +"Get the fuck up you faggot!" Henry shouts abusively at Aaron while kicking him gleefully. +Aaron looks at you in the hopes that you'll help. +> Help Aaron +Sometimes attempting to do something positive doesn't work out. + +You attempt to tell Henry to leave Aaron alone, but that doesn't help you. Henry just gets mad and attacks you instead. His anger for you interfering results in him beating you very badly. In fact you don't survive. + +One last breath and then you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit and eat your breakfast quietly while the two argue as usual. It doesn't involve you, so why get into it? + +"You little fucking whore! You keep staying out all night, and you can just forget about living under my roof! Go fucking sleep in the street with the rest of the sluts!" + +"Oh go fuck yourself Mom! You're just mad because you're a fucking bitter old harpy with nobody in your fucking life!" +"Why you fucking little bitch!" your Mom says and slaps your sister across the face. + +Your sister holds her face and shuts up. She picks up her school stuff and heads toward the door, before exiting she says one last thing, before slamming the door. + +"Don't worry Mom, I'm not staying in this fucking house another day!" + +You finish up your breakfast, your Mom doesn't even acknowledge you're there, she leaves the kitchen in a huff rather quickly. + +She must be really pissed. +> Go check on Mom +For some reason you feel the urge to check on Mom, you head towards her room. + +She's crying. You've never seen her like this! You've always known her to be a hard tough woman, its a little shocking to see this side of her. + +She notices you and quickly wipes her eyes and reverts back to her old self. + +"What the hell are you doing here?! Get the fuck to school!!" +> Attempt to reach out to her +You ignore her abuse, you now know her lashing out is merely a reflection of her own unhappiness. You continue to ask what's wrong and that you're only here to help. + +Your genuine concern and her vulnerable state seems to cause her to open up a bit. She breaks down and says how, she's sorry for failing as a parent, and how she's losing your sister, and she doesn't want to lose you either. + +You tell her if perhaps she was less controling, things might be better. You say you'll see what you can do about sis. Your Mom thanks you and after a few more hugs and reassurances, you rush off to school. On your way there, your emotions are a little less surpressed. You feel like you have a goal to accomplish now. + +You get to school a little late, which results in you getting sent to the principal's office where you run into Henry, the school bully. He's there for beating someone up as usual. He gives you a dirty look and the finger. +> Attempt to reach out to him +That routine might work on those close to you, but not on anti-social miscreants who hate your guts! + +As you attempt to ask why Henry feels the need to be hostile to everyone, his expression turns to repulsion. He thinks you're hitting on him. + +"What the fuck are you, some fucking faggot or something?" he says and then attacks you right in the principal's office! He beats you pretty bad before the principal manages to get him off of you. You end up having to go to the hospital. + +Your sister and Mom come to visit you and they get into an even bigger arguement resulting in a physical fight. Any goal you had of trying to patch up your family has been shattered forever. You don't seem to care anymore though, you realize playing peacemaker was a fool's quest anyway. Look what it got you. You fall asleep keeping that thought in mind. + +You wake up the next day in your hospital bed and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You ignore her abuse, you now know her lashing out is merely a reflection of her own unhappiness. You continue to ask what's wrong and that you're only here to help. + +Your genuine concern and her vulnerable state seems to cause her to open up a bit. She breaks down and says how, she's sorry for failing as a parent, and how she's losing your sister, and she doesn't want to lose you either. + +You tell her if perhaps she was less controling, things might be better. You say you'll see what you can do about sis. Your Mom thanks you and after a few more hugs and reassurances, you rush off to school. On your way there, your emotions are a little less surpressed. You feel like you have a goal to accomplish now. + +You get to school a little late, which results in you getting sent to the principal's office where you run into Henry, the school bully. He's there for beating someone up as usual. He gives you a dirty look and the finger. +> Ignore him +You aren't here to be Gandhi and you aren't here to get into anymore trouble so you ignore Henry who gets called in soon. + +You sit and think how you want a close family. One that isn't always fighting or being controling. You know you can patch your family up and make it functional rather than dysfunctional, you just have to figure out how to do it. + +In the meantime the secretary tells you that the principal is going to be with Henry for a long time and since you're a fairly good student who never causes trouble, she says you can leave with a warning. + +You go to lunch, still trying to figure out how to fix your family when over at the table behind you, you hear your sister's boyfriend Butch bragging to his friends about some girl he slept with who wasn't your sister. +> Confront Butch +Exposing your sister's cheating cad of a boyfriend was the right direction, but you definitely went the WRONG way about it. + +Butch and his friends laugh at your attempt to convince him to confess to your sister or you'll do it. + +They beat you and humilate you, then run off laughing. In a cruel twist you get sent to the principal's office again where he's less flexible. He assumes you're a trouble maker and suspends you effective immediately. You don't get a chance to talk to your sister, she and Butch take off early for some party. When your Mom gets home, your sister's run away event and your suspension put your Mom back in her usual hard ass mood. She screams at you and says your sister isn't her daughter anymore, can go to hell and stay there because she isn't welcome here anymore. + +You've failed. Your attempts have been futile. You might as well not tried at all. You were the only one who really cared. You just thought that maybe if you had a more stable home life, you could feel like a normal person, but that goal is lost. You go to bed. + +Another day arrives and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren't here to be Gandhi and you aren't here to get into anymore trouble so you ignore Henry who gets called in soon. + +You sit and think how you want a close family. One that isn't always fighting or being controling. You know you can patch your family up and make it functional rather than dysfunctional, you just have to figure out how to do it. + +In the meantime the secretary tells you that the principal is going to be with Henry for a long time and since you're a fairly good student who never causes trouble, she says you can leave with a warning. + +You go to lunch, still trying to figure out how to fix your family when over at the table behind you, you hear your sister's boyfriend Butch bragging to his friends about some girl he slept with who wasn't your sister. +> Keep quiet +You know that subtlety is going to be required here. This information can help bring your family together, but you have to do it right. + +You attend your classes as usual, eventually school ends and you see your sister. You immediately reveal this information to her. She looks very upset, yet not entirely surprised. This certainly isn't the first time he's done this. She just keeps forgiving him, and taking him back. She was planning on staying with him to get away from Mom, but now she's conflicted. + +You explain what happened with Mom after she left. Your sister looks skeptical, but knows even though you're a bit emotionless, you've never lied to her. Plus your latest deed has put you in better standing with her. Your sister agrees to give getting along with Mom a chance. + +You both go home and wait for Mom to get off work. Mom arrives, she's a little more calmer, but you know this is a volitile situation. +> Stay +You all sit at the table, staring at each other. You're acting as a mediator. Mom and sis start out calmly, but it quickly escalates into name calling and criticism. The usual insults. You put a stop to it and demand that they get along! Family is the most important thing and you won't just let them dismiss it. You remind them both that things haven't always been this bad between them. You remind them of the good times that you all have had at one time. Good times that have occurred much too rarely and much too long ago. + +You tell them you think that's why you shut down emotionally, because it was just easier to deal with the pain of seeing two people you care for in your life grow to hate each other so much. You say how you just want all of them to be a family again. You begin to weep. + +Your speech is probably the most emotional thing either of them has heard from you in years. Hell, they didn't even know you had any emotions anymore. You always did though they were just repressed, but no longer. + +Your Mom and sis also begin to cry at this point. Many apologies are exchanged. +> Say how happy you are +You wipe your tears and say how happy you are that you all have managed to at least come together on this night. Mom says she'll be less domineering and sis says she'll reign in her wild side. You hold both of their hands and say you know this all won't be easy, but you have faith that you're all on your way to being a family again. + +Another day arrives and you feel happy...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You all sit at the table, staring at each other. You're acting as a mediator. Mom and sis start out calmly, but it quickly escalates into name calling and criticism. The usual insults. You put a stop to it and demand that they get along! Family is the most important thing and you won't just let them dismiss it. You remind them both that things haven't always been this bad between them. You remind them of the good times that you all have had at one time. Good times that have occurred much too rarely and much too long ago. + +You tell them you think that's why you shut down emotionally, because it was just easier to deal with the pain of seeing two people you care for in your life grow to hate each other so much. You say how you just want all of them to be a family again. You begin to weep. + +Your speech is probably the most emotional thing either of them has heard from you in years. Hell, they didn't even know you had any emotions anymore. You always did though they were just repressed, but no longer. + +Your Mom and sis also begin to cry at this point. Many apologies are exchanged. +> Group hug +You all gather in a circle and hug one another. This is the closest you've all been in years and its all thanks to you. + +As you hug your Mom begins to rub her hands up and down your back, she then kisses you on the lips...passionately. You're a little surprised. Your sister then puts your hand on her ass, looks lovingly at Mom and kisses her as well. + +Of course! This makes sense now! You all alway felt greater intimacy for each other, but society's laws forbade it, and you all grew detached and hostile to each other because of it. But now that barrier has been shattered forever and you're able to pursue this love. + +Things eventually end up in the bedroom where you all express your love for each other in a physical way. You know that after tonight your family will be closer in ways you never dreamed about. After all family is the most important thing. + +Another day arrives, you wake up beside your sister and Mom and you feel complete euphoria...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know that subtlety is going to be required here. This information can help bring your family together, but you have to do it right. + +You attend your classes as usual, eventually school ends and you see your sister. You immediately reveal this information to her. She looks very upset, yet not entirely surprised. This certainly isn't the first time he's done this. She just keeps forgiving him, and taking him back. She was planning on staying with him to get away from Mom, but now she's conflicted. + +You explain what happened with Mom after she left. Your sister looks skeptical, but knows even though you're a bit emotionless, you've never lied to her. Plus your latest deed has put you in better standing with her. Your sister agrees to give getting along with Mom a chance. + +You both go home and wait for Mom to get off work. Mom arrives, she's a little more calmer, but you know this is a volitile situation. +> Let Mom and sis work it out themselves +You seriously can't expect these two to work it out themselves without your help! You were the architect in all this and now you've just going to abandon your project? You're either naively optimistic or you don't want it bad enough. In either case your lack of commitment shows in a spectacular way. + +Your Mom and sister eventually start disagreeing in a physical way, when this occurs you attempt to break them up. Unfortunately Mom happened to have a butcher knife at the time, you get in the way and Mom accidently stabs you right in the throat. + +You feel a sharp pain briefly then you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For some reason you feel the urge to check on Mom, you head towards her room. + +She's crying. You've never seen her like this! You've always known her to be a hard tough woman, its a little shocking to see this side of her. + +She notices you and quickly wipes her eyes and reverts back to her old self. + +"What the hell are you doing here?! Get the fuck to school!!" +> Go to school +You obey and go to school. There was a real opportunity to change things here, but you failed to take advantage. + +The rest of your day pretty much follows the same pattern until you come home and go to bed. + +Another day arrives and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You head downstairs, like you always do. No point in breaking tradition. + +When you get downstairs your Mom is arguing with your 17 year old sister as usual. She isn't like you at all, she's popular for one thing, but then again being a very pretty and extroverted will do that for a person. + +She's a bit of a wild child though which your domineering mother can't stand. You wonder why your sister acts the way she does, Mom's just trying to look out for her. + +They're really arguing today. +> Side with Mom +You know Mom's just looking out for the best interest of your sister, and you say as much. Your Mom looks a little surprised as does your sister, who then gets really angry. + +"Fuck the both of you! You don't know me! You're a fucking cold hearted bitch who's wallowing in her own loneliness and you're her fucking lap dog who does everything she says!" you sister screams. + +"Maybe because he actually cares about my feelings! Unlike you, you little slut!" your Mom says and then slaps her. Your sister looks like she might attempt to slap your Mom back, but your presence stops her. Instead she runs out the door, with one last comment. + +“I’m leaving this fucking house of insanity! The both of you two can go straight to hell!” she says slamming the door. + +Your Mom waves her hand in disgust and then turns to you. + +“Thanks for taking my side. You’re such a good son.” She says and then hugs you, you return the gesture. + +“Okay now head off to school, I have to go to work.” +> Head to school +As you obey Mom, your budding emotions seem to shrink back again. Maybe it was just a fluke that you acted like you did, because you certainly don't display any follow up feelings towards Mom or anyone else the entire day. + +Your day follows as unemotional as usual until you go home and go to bed. + +Another day arrives and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know Mom's just looking out for the best interest of your sister, and you say as much. Your Mom looks a little surprised as does your sister, who then gets really angry. + +"Fuck the both of you! You don't know me! You're a fucking cold hearted bitch who's wallowing in her own loneliness and you're her fucking lap dog who does everything she says!" you sister screams. + +"Maybe because he actually cares about my feelings! Unlike you, you little slut!" your Mom says and then slaps her. Your sister looks like she might attempt to slap your Mom back, but your presence stops her. Instead she runs out the door, with one last comment. + +“I’m leaving this fucking house of insanity! The both of you two can go straight to hell!” she says slamming the door. + +Your Mom waves her hand in disgust and then turns to you. + +“Thanks for taking my side. You’re such a good son.” She says and then hugs you, you return the gesture. + +“Okay now head off to school, I have to go to work.” +> Ask Mom to drive you +Your Mom again looks surprised, but also a little happy. + +"Well okay, its on my way to work. Are you sure you want me too though? Won't it embarass you in front of your friends?" + +Mom sure doesn't know you very well at all. You don't really have any. Of course even if you did, you wouldn't care. + +Your Mom drives you to school just like you remember she used to when you were little. She always seemed a lot happier back then. She almost looks that happy again right now. + +As she drops you off, she lets you out, but before she does, she kisses you goodbye...on the lips. + +As she drives off, you're left feeling a little strange. You've never been very emotional, but something in you has changed. You head to your classes a little preoccupied, until Jessica comes up to you in computer class. + +"Hey, can you help me with this?" she asks. +> Help Jessica +You kind of don't want to think about your Mom kissing you the way she did. It makes you uncomfortable. You take the opportunity to help Jessica to take your mind off of things. + +As you help Jessica, she thanks you and becomes more friendly. She says she's always wondered about you, since you're very different than your sister who she's friends with. You open up a bit more than you normally would probably because you're still trying to get your mind off of Mom. + +Its probably what makes you blurt out asking Jessica for a date after school. Jessica's a little surprised, but accepts. + +When the class ends you realize you've just recieved a date with the one girl who seemed to stir some emotions in you. You begin to shake and rush to the bathroom to throw up. This is all a lot to take in. Your Mom kissed you on the lips and now you have a date with the girl of your dreams for all intense and purposes. You don't feel very hungry so you spend your lunch hour working on something for another class. + +You attend the rest of your classes and eventually school comes to an end, and Jessica meets you outside. + +Your emotions are all mixed up and your mind is going a mile a minute. +> Take her home +You tell her you want her to meet your Mom. You still got her on your mind. You have to show her that what she wants can't occur! And by bringing Jessica home, you'll be able to show that. Of course you're really nervous about what's going to happen. You barely manage to keep yourself from throwing up again. + +Jessica meanwhile is a little puzzled by your choice of "date" but agrees. You get home and you and Jessica talk for a little while longer getting to know each other better, but still in the back of your head you worry about Mom. + +Then she arrives. And she looks really surprised to see you with a girl in the house. Speechless in fact. +> Introduce Jessica +You muster up all your inner strength and introduce Jessica to Mom. + +Mom is surprisingly cordial. You don't get it, you thought she'd be mad. Maybe she realized that what she wanted to pursue with you was wrong, and is glad you found someone to be with in a healthy relationship. Your nervousness decreases almost completely. Your Mom leaves you and Jessica alone, your previous niceness to her has put her in a good enough mood to let you have some fun, especially since you don't cause much trouble. + +Eventually you take Jessica home, and despite having a rather strange first date, she agrees to see you tomorrow and you promise to really take her somewhere. + +You go home thinking about today's events. You still have a great deal of devotion to your Mom, but are glad it wasn't taken to THAT level. You wonder though, Jessica looks a lot like your Mom when she was younger. Is that why you were attracted to her? + +You don't want to dwell on that too much! You go to bed. + +Another day arrives and you feel slightly warped...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You tell her you want her to meet your Mom. You still got her on your mind. You have to show her that what she wants can't occur! And by bringing Jessica home, you'll be able to show that. Of course you're really nervous about what's going to happen. You barely manage to keep yourself from throwing up again. + +Jessica meanwhile is a little puzzled by your choice of "date" but agrees. You get home and you and Jessica talk for a little while longer getting to know each other better, but still in the back of your head you worry about Mom. + +Then she arrives. And she looks really surprised to see you with a girl in the house. Speechless in fact. +> Beg for Mom's forgiveness +You suddenly lose it. You beg for Mom's forgiveness. Your devotion to your Mom is too great and if she wants you as a lover as well then you'll comply. + +You say all this while groveling at her feet weeping. Jessica AND your Mom look at each other and then slowly back away from you. + +You look up, and see Jessica run past your Mom and out the door saying "Ewwwwww! I KNEW you were creepy!" + +Your Mom tells you to stay away from her. You comply but you don't understand why. You thought she had those feelings for you. She asks where the hell did you get a sick fucking idea like that. You mention the kiss. + +"It was a peck on the lips! Nothing more!" Your Mom shouts. You suddenly feel very very small. You curl up in a ball not knowing what to think anymore. +Your Mom sees that you need many years of professional help and eventually has you put away in an institution where drugs work wonders on your screwed up thought process. No more emotions. Back to normal. + +Another day in your cell and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You kind of don't want to think about your Mom kissing you the way she did. It makes you uncomfortable. You take the opportunity to help Jessica to take your mind off of things. + +As you help Jessica, she thanks you and becomes more friendly. She says she's always wondered about you, since you're very different than your sister who she's friends with. You open up a bit more than you normally would probably because you're still trying to get your mind off of Mom. + +Its probably what makes you blurt out asking Jessica for a date after school. Jessica's a little surprised, but accepts. + +When the class ends you realize you've just recieved a date with the one girl who seemed to stir some emotions in you. You begin to shake and rush to the bathroom to throw up. This is all a lot to take in. Your Mom kissed you on the lips and now you have a date with the girl of your dreams for all intense and purposes. You don't feel very hungry so you spend your lunch hour working on something for another class. + +You attend the rest of your classes and eventually school comes to an end, and Jessica meets you outside. + +Your emotions are all mixed up and your mind is going a mile a minute. +> Go to the movies +You want to avoid Mom for as long as possible! You take Jessica to the movies. + +You and Jessica get some food and sit to watch the film. You can't seem to relax. You're still anxious and nervous about going home. You begin not to feel well again. Just as Jessica asks you what's wrong, you puke up popcorn and gummy bears all over her. + +"EWWWWWWWW!" she screams and runs out of the theatre. + +Not really knowing what to do next you head home, still worrying over what Mom is going to do. When you get home, Mom sees you and starts screaming. She asks where the hell you've been. You say the movies, to which she screams at you some more for saying you never told her you were going there and you need to check in with her first. You'll be getting kicked out of the house like your sister, if you feel the need to disobey the rules she continues to say. + +This seems like the Mom you know and are comfortable with! You guess you were mistaken about Mom's feelings towards you and that relieves you. You don't feel as nervous now, it reverts back into that familar numb feeling again. You decide that acting out of your normal routine was a great risk that nearly drove you over the edge. You won't be doing that again. + +Another day arrives and once again you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your Mom again looks surprised, but also a little happy. + +"Well okay, its on my way to work. Are you sure you want me too though? Won't it embarass you in front of your friends?" + +Mom sure doesn't know you very well at all. You don't really have any. Of course even if you did, you wouldn't care. + +Your Mom drives you to school just like you remember she used to when you were little. She always seemed a lot happier back then. She almost looks that happy again right now. + +As she drops you off, she lets you out, but before she does, she kisses you goodbye...on the lips. + +As she drives off, you're left feeling a little strange. You've never been very emotional, but something in you has changed. You head to your classes a little preoccupied, until Jessica comes up to you in computer class. + +"Hey, can you help me with this?" she asks. +> Ignore Jessica +You barely acknowledge Jessica's presence. She's one of your sister's friends anyway, which makes you even less inclined to help her. You say something about being really busy and having a lot to do on your own computer right now. As Jessica leaves, you continue to think about Mom, and that kiss. + +Lunch time comes around and you sit to ponder it even more, fortunately without your idiot "friend" Aaron buzzing in your ear. You hear your sister's boyfriend Butch bragging at the next table about some chick he slept with last night, that apparently wasn't your sister. This is why your sister SHOULD listen to Mom! She knows what's best, and knows how to protect you from bad people. + +Lunch ends and you attend the rest of your classes without incident. Finally after school lets out, you run into your sister. She sees you, but refuses to talk to you. +> Go talk to your sister +Even though you know your sister doesn't like Mom, she's still family, and needs to realize that Mom's only looking out for her. You have to convince her. + +You go up to your sister who doesn't want anything to do with you after this morning, but you tell her what Butch was bragging about. She doesn't care and while she claims she doesn't believe you, you can tell she does, but her dislike for you and Mom is greater than Butch's infidelity. You start to get angry and start to yell at her saying that she doesn't know what's good for her, you attempt to get physical, but Butch stops you as he's coming out of the school. + +This results in you picking up a nearby rock, and smacking him in the head with it a couple times knocking him to the ground, your sister runs off and you go chasing after her in an attempt to show her the "light". + +You finally catch her in the park, where you give her an ultimatium of either obey Mom's rules or die. Your sister can't believe how over the edge you've gone until you start choking her. So enthusiastic you are to display your loyalty to Mom by "punishing" your sister, you don't even hear a passing police officer say "GET YOUR HANDS OF THE GIRL OR I'LL SHOOT!" +The officer was enthusiastic too. + +You feel three bullets hit you in the body, one more in the head and then you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You barely acknowledge Jessica's presence. She's one of your sister's friends anyway, which makes you even less inclined to help her. You say something about being really busy and having a lot to do on your own computer right now. As Jessica leaves, you continue to think about Mom, and that kiss. + +Lunch time comes around and you sit to ponder it even more, fortunately without your idiot "friend" Aaron buzzing in your ear. You hear your sister's boyfriend Butch bragging at the next table about some chick he slept with last night, that apparently wasn't your sister. This is why your sister SHOULD listen to Mom! She knows what's best, and knows how to protect you from bad people. + +Lunch ends and you attend the rest of your classes without incident. Finally after school lets out, you run into your sister. She sees you, but refuses to talk to you. +> Ignore her and go home +Your sister is hopeless. You feel anger towards your sister, you can see that she doesn't appreciate all the sacrifices Mom makes for her. You hope she does move out, that'll leave you and Mom more time to spend together. + +You head home and wait for Mom to arrive. When she steps in, you hug her as she comes in the door, she hugs you back. + +She tells you to do some chores, but you don't mind, in fact you're happy to do them. You and Mom talk a little more than you normally do at dinner, now that your sister is out of the way and not around to cause trouble everything is good, and you feel wanted for the first time in your life. + +You talk into the night with her, until she tells you its time to go to bed. +> Go to bed +You do what Mom says and go to bed. You wonder if you should've pursued another path, with her, but you quickly dismiss such thoughts. You realize that if Mom wanted anything else from you, she would've told you. For now, she wants you to be a good and obedient son, just like you've always been. No strange thoughts, just total subservience to her. Submission of your will to her, emotions just make things more complicated. You make it a promise to yourself to do just that. + +Another day breaks, and once again you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your sister is hopeless. You feel anger towards your sister, you can see that she doesn't appreciate all the sacrifices Mom makes for her. You hope she does move out, that'll leave you and Mom more time to spend together. + +You head home and wait for Mom to arrive. When she steps in, you hug her as she comes in the door, she hugs you back. + +She tells you to do some chores, but you don't mind, in fact you're happy to do them. You and Mom talk a little more than you normally do at dinner, now that your sister is out of the way and not around to cause trouble everything is good, and you feel wanted for the first time in your life. + +You talk into the night with her, until she tells you its time to go to bed. +> Insist on talking more +You want to stay up all night talking with your Mom, you've never felt closer to her than you ever have in your entire life. Underneath her cold exterior, you can see a gentle and caring woman. She's just lonely... + +Your Mom says she has to go to work tomorrow and has to go to bed herself. She says you can stay up though if you want, but not to bitch about it when she wakes you up tomorrow. + +She leaves, and you feel a little confused, you're not sure how to proceed. +> Watch TV +You sit and watch TV dejectedly and wonder about what just happened. + +Could it be that you imagined things? Let it run wild? You suddenly realize what has been occurring in your mind. And it isn't right. You realize you've been thinking VERY sick thoughts about your mother. You couldn't help it though, she seemed so nice to you today... + +But no! You have to supress these feelings! Its the only way. you struggle all night with your derranged mind until you fall asleep with the TV still on. + +The next day you awake, something's different...it worked. + +You feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You want to stay up all night talking with your Mom, you've never felt closer to her than you ever have in your entire life. Underneath her cold exterior, you can see a gentle and caring woman. She's just lonely... + +Your Mom says she has to go to work tomorrow and has to go to bed herself. She says you can stay up though if you want, but not to bitch about it when she wakes you up tomorrow. + +She leaves, and you feel a little confused, you're not sure how to proceed. +> Follow her +You realize that she wants YOU to take the initiative! She already showed she was interested. She called you a good son, she kissed you, and now she's hinted about going to bed. It doesn't get anymore obvious to you. + +She loves you the same way you love her... + +You enter her room and see her sleeping. You slide into bed next to her. You feel like when you used to crawl into her bed when you were scared of the dark as a little kid. And much like then, you feel so safe being this close to her. She doesn't seem to mind, she cuddles up next to you, but she's still asleep. +> Go to sleep +You just want to be next to her. Nothing wrong with that. As you drift off to sleep, your Mom begins grinding even closer on to you. There's no doubt that she doesn't know who you are now... + +Somehow it doesn't matter. She wakes you up with a kiss. Her loneliness for physical pleasure is too great and her love for you is too strong. This feels so right to you. You realize why the girls at school never "did it" for you, it was always Mom you lusted for, you've always known, and now its all coming true. She begins to mount you and guides your hands all over her body. She is your teacher, she is your master, she is your life. + +You and Mom spend a night of hot taboo passion as your virgin seed enters the very womb that bore you. You fall asleep nestled in her protective bosom, just like when you were a baby. + +The next day you feel much different. You FEEL. You're not repressed anymore. Your love for your Mom, is now finally out and she knows about it and feels the same way. Of course this will have to be your little secret, but right now all that's important is: + +Its another day and you feel love...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You realize that she wants YOU to take the initiative! She already showed she was interested. She called you a good son, she kissed you, and now she's hinted about going to bed. It doesn't get anymore obvious to you. + +She loves you the same way you love her... + +You enter her room and see her sleeping. You slide into bed next to her. You feel like when you used to crawl into her bed when you were scared of the dark as a little kid. And much like then, you feel so safe being this close to her. She doesn't seem to mind, she cuddles up next to you, but she's still asleep. +> Take it one step further +You begin to caress and kiss her beautiful body. Your Mom begins to stir a little and opens her eyes... + +And is horrified! + +"WHAT THE FUCK ARE YOU DOING?!!? I'M YOUR MOTHER YOU SICK FUCK!!!!" + +Your mother throws you off of her and begins to beat you mercilessly! + +You don't understand, you thought she loved you. You thought you understood...but it was all just a fantasy that YOU made up in your twisted mind. Your mother never hinted that she had any interest in you in that way! Even her kiss was just a peck on the lips. Nothing more, but you turned it into something else, along with everything else she did. + +You feel betrayed, you did everything she ever said, only to find out she doesn't love you afterall. You feel rage like you've never felt before, you attack! + +Your Mom isn't like you though, she's strong with a fighting personality. She isn't a push over like you are. She throws a table lamp at your head as you attempt to assault her. As it smashes into your skull, you fall crashing to the ground unconscious. + +When you wake up, you're in a holding cell. A decision is still being made if you should be going to jail or a mental institution. +Its ultimately decided that you belong in a mental institution. You're doped up silly for the rest of your life. + +Once again, you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You head downstairs, like you always do. No point in breaking tradition. + +When you get downstairs your Mom is arguing with your 17 year old sister as usual. She isn't like you at all, she's popular for one thing, but then again being a very pretty and extroverted will do that for a person. + +She's a bit of a wild child though which your domineering mother can't stand. You wonder why your sister acts the way she does, Mom's just trying to look out for her. + +They're really arguing today. +> Side with sis +You know, you've really had it with Mom picking on your sister all the time. Sure she's a little wild, but she isn't a slut and doesn't deserve to be called one, you tell Mom as much. +Your sister and especially your Mom are both VERY surprised! Your Mom gets even angrier and slaps you! + +"So both of you ungrateful shits turn against me! Get the fuck out of my house right now! NOW! And don't fucking return if you aren't going to live by my rules!" She yells and storms out of the kitchen. + +You and your sister leave, but as you both head off to school, she thanks you for taking her side. + +"Thanks, its nice to have an ally for once against that fucking harpy!" + +You feel a little pleased. Its nice to be appreciated for once. + +When you get to school, you see Henry the school bully kicking the hell out of your "friend" Aaron. You don't really care for Aaron, but he looks at you in the hopes you'll help him. +> Help Aaron +You step up to Henry. +"What the fuck do you want faggot?" he demands. + +You don't even answer, you just punch Henry. Henry punches you back! Any other time you might run away, but this is different! Somehow when you stood up to Mom today, you feel a lot more confident! You and Henry begin to wrestle in the hallway, until a teacher breaks you up. Normally you'd get sent to the principal's office, but the teacher just yells at you instead. Aaron thanks you profusely and states how he'll do all your homework for you. + +Your sense of accomplishment grows. You like being praised for your deeds. + +When you get to your computer class, you notice that your sister's friend Jessica, is having problems with today's lesson. +> Help Jessica +You go up to Jessica and explain what she's doing wrong and how she NEEDS to be doing it. You proceed to take completely over. + +While Jessica wouldn't have minded your help, she doesn't particularly care for how you approached her. She didn't ASK you for your help and your arrogant manner has turned her off. And the fact you told her that she may "thank you now" made things even worse. + +You've lost your shot at her, but that doesn't seem to bother you, the fact that she didn't praise the ground you walk on for your help, bothers you more. Some people are just ungrateful you guess. + +Lunchtime comes around and Aaron begins thanking you again, for helping him. You enjoy his praise until you tire of him and tell him to shut up and get you another can of Coke, which he complies. + +At this point you overhear your sister's boyfriend Butch brag to all his friends about some girl he slept with last night. A girl that wasn't your sister. + +You wonder if you should confront him, but you don't see how this could be readily advantageous to you. +> Confront Butch +Your sister has been getting fucked around by this guy for too long. He constantly cheats on her and she always takes him back. Well it stops today, because YOU know what's best for her. + +You immediately confront Butch, he turns around wondering what you want, and you tell him to stay away from your sister. He laughs in your face and tells you to fuck off. This once again prompts you to resort to violence. + +You punch Butch in the face, but the guy's a jock, he can easily withstand anything you can dish out. Not to mention he's got six of his buddies to help him. + +They beat the hell out of you and throw you in the Cafeteria garbage can, and take off laughing before an authority figure catches them. +You get sent to the principal's office for getting into your second fight today! + +After getting suspended for the next three days, you run into your sister outside of school who walks up to you pissed as hell. + +"What the fuck did you think you were doing picking a fight with Butch?!" + +You attempt to explain, but she's not listening. + +"He stopped doing that! He loves me! You're just trying to control my life! I heard about how you acted towards Jessica today. You're trying to dominate everything just like Mom!" + +At this point you get enraged with her, for not showing you the gratitude that you deserve! You tried to help her out and this is how she repays you? +You slap the shit out of her! She holds her face, hits you back and runs off crying, stating how she's moving out of the house. + +Good, you think, if she doesn't know what's good for her, she can get the fuck out. + +You head back home and do what the hell you want, until that bitch you call Mom comes home. She immediately starts her shit. + +"Don't think I haven't forgot about that shit you pulled this morning!" she begins saying. +> Argue back with her +Mom's reign of domination ends fucking today. YOU'RE the fucking man of the house and she needs to recognize that NOW. + +You call her every name in the book, as she returns in kind. She begins slapping you, threatening to kick you out of the house again. You push her down, and overpower her. All your repressed anger is directed towards her. And the shit you've ever had to put up with from her and everyone else is ALL directed at her. + +SHE NEVER APPRECIATED ANYTHING YOU EVER FUCKING DID! + +You snap her neck, thus proving you're the dominant one here. + +You feel a great emotional release, but then it disappears. Strange, killing her has completely deadened your emotions again. + +You decide to go to bed. + +You awaken to police taking you away. Your sister ended up coming home in the middle of the night to pick up some things, and she found Mom still laying on the floor where you left her. + + +Another day in your cell, and once again you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your sister has been getting fucked around by this guy for too long. He constantly cheats on her and she always takes him back. Well it stops today, because YOU know what's best for her. + +You immediately confront Butch, he turns around wondering what you want, and you tell him to stay away from your sister. He laughs in your face and tells you to fuck off. This once again prompts you to resort to violence. + +You punch Butch in the face, but the guy's a jock, he can easily withstand anything you can dish out. Not to mention he's got six of his buddies to help him. + +They beat the hell out of you and throw you in the Cafeteria garbage can, and take off laughing before an authority figure catches them. +You get sent to the principal's office for getting into your second fight today! + +After getting suspended for the next three days, you run into your sister outside of school who walks up to you pissed as hell. + +"What the fuck did you think you were doing picking a fight with Butch?!" + +You attempt to explain, but she's not listening. + +"He stopped doing that! He loves me! You're just trying to control my life! I heard about how you acted towards Jessica today. You're trying to dominate everything just like Mom!" + +At this point you get enraged with her, for not showing you the gratitude that you deserve! You tried to help her out and this is how she repays you? +You slap the shit out of her! She holds her face, hits you back and runs off crying, stating how she's moving out of the house. + +Good, you think, if she doesn't know what's good for her, she can get the fuck out. + +You head back home and do what the hell you want, until that bitch you call Mom comes home. She immediately starts her shit. + +"Don't think I haven't forgot about that shit you pulled this morning!" she begins saying. +> Simmer and just take it +You say a few things back, but nothing too bad, you HAVE to live here and are too fearful of getting kicked out. Your Mom reads you the riot act and uses vulgar language that would shame a sailor. She verbally emasculates you to a degree that assures she's still in control of this house. All the feelings you had before fade. As quickly as gained your sense of "rebellion" your Mom has crushed it within a blink of an eye. + +You go upstairs to bed, your spirit utterly crushed. + +Another day arrives, and once again you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You go up to Jessica and explain what she's doing wrong and how she NEEDS to be doing it. You proceed to take completely over. + +While Jessica wouldn't have minded your help, she doesn't particularly care for how you approached her. She didn't ASK you for your help and your arrogant manner has turned her off. And the fact you told her that she may "thank you now" made things even worse. + +You've lost your shot at her, but that doesn't seem to bother you, the fact that she didn't praise the ground you walk on for your help, bothers you more. Some people are just ungrateful you guess. + +Lunchtime comes around and Aaron begins thanking you again, for helping him. You enjoy his praise until you tire of him and tell him to shut up and get you another can of Coke, which he complies. + +At this point you overhear your sister's boyfriend Butch brag to all his friends about some girl he slept with last night. A girl that wasn't your sister. + +You wonder if you should confront him, but you don't see how this could be readily advantageous to you. +> Keep quiet +No advantange in getting your ass kicked by Butch and six of his friends. No you know what to do. You attend all your classes as usual and wait until after school where you rat on Butch to your sister. She's really upset and confronts him about it. As they start to argue, you see Aaron and tell him that if Butch gets rough with your sister, he should step in and help, since she'll find that attractive and might go out with him. + +Poor Aaron already blindly loyal to you, readily believes your lies and sure enough as soon as Butch grabs your sister, Aaron attempts to defend her and gets the shit beaten out of him very badly. Your sister see first hand the brutality of Butch and screams for someone to help, where upon one of the teachers from the school removes Butch and has someone call the paramedics for Aaron. + +Butch will soon be paying legally for what he did to Aaron. For now though your sister is a bit distraught over all this, she's going to go home, despite the fact she'll have to face Mom. +> Go home +You decide its time to take control of the household. After all you're the fucking man of the house, and that bitch Mom of yours better realize that, besides the shift in power is in your favor with your sister on your firmly on your side now. + +Your prepare your sister for the coming confrontation with Mom, she looks less than excited to do it, but you helped her a lot today and agrees it needs to be done. + +When Mom comes home you immediately go on the offensive, totally catching her off guard. You do most of the fighting, your sister only piping up when you ask her to, you unleash a litany of cruel truths to your Mom. You mention how she's a lonely dried up over the hill woman who needs someone in her life because she's an unhappy person. So if she knows what's good for her she'll start treating you both with more respect. And that's just one of the things you say. Not that she isn't totally without ammo, but you feel actually energized by the battle. Like you're getting off on the conflict. Eventually you wear her down and she half-heartly gives in. + +You know that your Mom is never going to be docile, but you've effectively changed the balance of power. You go to bed totally pleased by your victory. Your confidence transformed into arrogance and finally into outright manipulative nastiness. + +Another day arrives and you feel like Mom...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No advantange in getting your ass kicked by Butch and six of his friends. No you know what to do. You attend all your classes as usual and wait until after school where you rat on Butch to your sister. She's really upset and confronts him about it. As they start to argue, you see Aaron and tell him that if Butch gets rough with your sister, he should step in and help, since she'll find that attractive and might go out with him. + +Poor Aaron already blindly loyal to you, readily believes your lies and sure enough as soon as Butch grabs your sister, Aaron attempts to defend her and gets the shit beaten out of him very badly. Your sister see first hand the brutality of Butch and screams for someone to help, where upon one of the teachers from the school removes Butch and has someone call the paramedics for Aaron. + +Butch will soon be paying legally for what he did to Aaron. For now though your sister is a bit distraught over all this, she's going to go home, despite the fact she'll have to face Mom. +> Stay out +Heh heh, let sis handle Mom, you're going to do something you've never done. Party all night! + +You end up going to a club and even though you haven't really had any previous experience with these places or any other major social gathering you seem to fit in very well. It amazing how far your new outlook on life has taken you within a short period of time. + +You realize that following all those rules was idiotic. You're going to have fun and anyone who tries to stop you is going to pay the price. Nobody is more important than you. + +Your home life changes quite a bit. Now its Mom yelling at you constantly rather than your sister, who seems to have calmed down quite a bit. Strange how things balance out. + +Another day arrives and you feel rebellious...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You step up to Henry. +"What the fuck do you want faggot?" he demands. + +You don't even answer, you just punch Henry. Henry punches you back! Any other time you might run away, but this is different! Somehow when you stood up to Mom today, you feel a lot more confident! You and Henry begin to wrestle in the hallway, until a teacher breaks you up. Normally you'd get sent to the principal's office, but the teacher just yells at you instead. Aaron thanks you profusely and states how he'll do all your homework for you. + +Your sense of accomplishment grows. You like being praised for your deeds. + +When you get to your computer class, you notice that your sister's friend Jessica, is having problems with today's lesson. +> Ignore her +Jessica didn't ask for your help, and you don't want to make an annoyance of yourself, so you go to your seat and quietly do your work. + +Soon, Jessica comes up to you and asks you for your help, since she knows you're good with computers. You're glad to lend her a hand. You've always liked her to some degree even if you never showed it. Now you have the perfect opportunity to do so. + +As you explain things to her you get the feeling she no longer thinks of you as your sister's "creepy" brother anymore. She really welcomes your help. + +Class ends and your confidence increases. You think you might even ask Jessica out tomorrow! + +Lunchtime comes around and Aaron sits next to you as he normally does. He continues to thank you for what you did earlier. He says you've inspired him a bit. + +Meanwhile you happen to over hear your sister's boyfriend Butch, who's bragging about his sexual exploits to his friends. + +"Yeah I fucked that bitch straight in the fucking ass last night! Haw Haw!" + +You're about to get up to defend your sister's honor, but suddenly you realize he's talking about a completely different girl. It appears Butch has been cheating on your sister again. +> Confront Butch +Butch has been treating your sister like this for too long. Its time to stand up to him, since she won't do it. + +You immediately pull him aside and tell him to stay away from your sister. +He laughs in your face and pushes you to the ground. Then his six friends stand up... + +However your recent actions of defending Aaron cause him to try to help you out, by kicking Butch in the shin. Butch winces in pain, but immediately turns his attention to Aaron. He and his friends ignore you and beat the shit out of him. Seriously injuring him. + +The following events occur due to your hubris... + +Aaron has to be hospitalized and never fully recovers from suffering minor brain damage. + +Butch and his friends are charged, but ultimately nothing comes of it, since most of their parents are rich and Aaron's weren't. Charges are dropped. They're all expelled and school is sued however. + +You are also expelled since its determined that you started the fight in the first place, not to mention you your previous actions of fighting with Henry earlier that day, displays that you're a trouble maker. + +You sister blames you for Butch dumping her permanently, despite the fact you were actually trying to help her. + +Finally Mom gets SUPER pissed off at you for causing all this shit, causing her to miss lots of work. She sets you straight by breaking your will once more which is rather easy since you blame yourself for all of what happened. If you hadn't indulged you emotions this all would've never came about. You make sure it won't happen again. + +Another day arrives and once again you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Jessica didn't ask for your help, and you don't want to make an annoyance of yourself, so you go to your seat and quietly do your work. + +Soon, Jessica comes up to you and asks you for your help, since she knows you're good with computers. You're glad to lend her a hand. You've always liked her to some degree even if you never showed it. Now you have the perfect opportunity to do so. + +As you explain things to her you get the feeling she no longer thinks of you as your sister's "creepy" brother anymore. She really welcomes your help. + +Class ends and your confidence increases. You think you might even ask Jessica out tomorrow! + +Lunchtime comes around and Aaron sits next to you as he normally does. He continues to thank you for what you did earlier. He says you've inspired him a bit. + +Meanwhile you happen to over hear your sister's boyfriend Butch, who's bragging about his sexual exploits to his friends. + +"Yeah I fucked that bitch straight in the fucking ass last night! Haw Haw!" + +You're about to get up to defend your sister's honor, but suddenly you realize he's talking about a completely different girl. It appears Butch has been cheating on your sister again. +> Keep quiet +Maybe you've gained a little more confidence in yourself, but you're not an idiot. You can see Butch has six of his friends there. They're all bigger and stronger than you, being on the football team and all. + +You aren't going to let this go though. Lunch ends and you head to the rest of your classes as normal. After school you run into your sister, who looks happy to see you, until you mention what you heard Butch say. + +She get mad, but not at you. She sees Butch coming out of the school and immediately confronts him and starts yelling at him. He starts yelling back. +> Stick around +You aren't just going to leave, you stick around just in case Butch gets violent. Good thing you did, his temper gets worse and he raises his hand to your sister, which you immediately stop. He turns and can't believe you would dare confront him. + +"Huh! You think just because you kicked Henry's ass today, you think you're fucking tough shit? I'm gonna fucking kick your nuts up through your fucking throat! An there ain't no teachers around to break this up!" + +Butch swings at you and you dodge. You land some hits, but he's very strong. You feel a great crushing force to your stomach as he slams his fist into it. You fall trying to catch your breath, almost expecting him to finish you off, but Aaron comes out of no where and kicks him in the back of the head! Your earlier actions of defending Aaron have caused him to return the favor. He has distracted Butch long enough for you to punch him in the nuts as hard as you can three times. + +Butch falls and is in no condition to do anything. Your sister then proceeds to tell him its over for good this time and kicks him a couple times as well. + +Well you've accomplished a lot today at school. You've become a real defender, all your previously repressed energy has been channeled positively. However, home still awaits you and you know who awaits you there. +> Go home +No point in avoiding it. You have to go home eventually. Your sister isn't staying out tonight, since she's just broken up with Butch. You take this opportunity to convince her that you should put up a united front against Mom. She agrees completely and says its about time Mom's tyranny came to an end. + +You both get home, and psychologically prepare yourself for the battle with Mom, and then she enters the door... + +The battle is joined! Mom starts in on both of you right away! Its a very intense and long arguement, but you have the confidence to finally stand up to her and you also have your sister to back you up. As much as Mom continues to threaten to throw you both out of the house, you can tell she's bluffing. She doesn't REALLY want either of you to leave her. If you guys weren't there, she'd have nobody around and then she'd truely be alone. + +The arguement lasts into the night, but it finally ends, with you as the victor. Mom eventually half-heartedly gives in, but not before telling the both of you, what ungrateful brats you are. + +You go to bed that night, with a complete and total feeling of liberation. You have confidence that you've never had before and you can FEEL. By god, you can finally feel! + +Another day breaks, and you feel absolute joy.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren't just going to leave, you stick around just in case Butch gets violent. Good thing you did, his temper gets worse and he raises his hand to your sister, which you immediately stop. He turns and can't believe you would dare confront him. + +"Huh! You think just because you kicked Henry's ass today, you think you're fucking tough shit? I'm gonna fucking kick your nuts up through your fucking throat! An there ain't no teachers around to break this up!" + +Butch swings at you and you dodge. You land some hits, but he's very strong. You feel a great crushing force to your stomach as he slams his fist into it. You fall trying to catch your breath, almost expecting him to finish you off, but Aaron comes out of no where and kicks him in the back of the head! Your earlier actions of defending Aaron have caused him to return the favor. He has distracted Butch long enough for you to punch him in the nuts as hard as you can three times. + +Butch falls and is in no condition to do anything. Your sister then proceeds to tell him its over for good this time and kicks him a couple times as well. + +Well you've accomplished a lot today at school. You've become a real defender, all your previously repressed energy has been channeled positively. However, home still awaits you and you know who awaits you there. +> Stay out +It could be that you're feeling rebellious, or it could be that you're just not confident enough to stand up to your Mom in a knock down drag out arguement. That little one this morning will be nothing compared to what will await you tonight if you went home. After all you gotta live with her and she still commands a very intimidating presence. 18 years of indoctrination is hard to completely shake in one day. + +Your sister suggests a club that doesn't check IDs, since she isn't eager to go home either, but she won't be staying at Butch's anymore. +> Party time! +Well its not really your thing, but you don't really have any other ideas at this point, so you agree. + +The bouncer at the club lets your sister in immediately when he sees her since she's a regular here. She explains you're with her, he doesn't seem to like you, but he lets you in. + +Your senses are instantly assaulted by loud music and flashing blinding lights. + +"Woohoo! I'm getting liquored up tonight!" your sister says and disappears into the crowd heading towards the bar. + +You quietly sit in an empty booth, for some reason you start to feel a little less adventurous again. Less emotional. School was a "controled environment" This place is like a sensory overload to you. Too much chaos. + +You sit and watch all the people going by engaging in various activities. Soon an incredibly friendly girl comes up to you wanting you to follow her. +> Follow her +You follow her on to the dance floor. You of course have no idea how to dance, but that doesn't seem to matter to the girl, who's grinding all over you. +A few minute go by and you begin to realize this isn't that bad! You're starting to enjoy yourself. You guess it just took you a little time to get accustomed to this environment. + +It seems the girl wants you to follow her somewhere else now... +> Follow her +You follow the girl into one of the bathrooms, specifically one of the stalls. + +Still a little naive about certain things, you're not exactly sure what's going to happen until she kneels in front of you... + +Afterwards, you feel a little bewildered about what happened. Its definitely not a common occurence for you. You can't say you didn't enjoy it though. + +You leave the club and sneak back to your house, carefully not waking Mom up. + +You go to bed, thinking about the unusual day and night you've had, and realizing that you should've been having fun like this in the first place. + +Time passes and things have improved for you at school. At home its a living hell. You argue with Mom as much as your sister does now, but nobody gets kicked out. You start staying out all night whoremongering, you also start to not feel well though in the coming months. + +Another day arrives, and you feel deathly sick...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You follow her on to the dance floor. You of course have no idea how to dance, but that doesn't seem to matter to the girl, who's grinding all over you. +A few minute go by and you begin to realize this isn't that bad! You're starting to enjoy yourself. You guess it just took you a little time to get accustomed to this environment. + +It seems the girl wants you to follow her somewhere else now... +> Go do something else +You decide you don't want to spend the entire night dancing with one girl, so you spend the night looking for other girls to dance with. (Yes, you WERE oblivious to what the first girl had in mind!) You have fun without going overboard, and that's probably for the best since all this is brand new to you. + +Eventually you leave the club and sneak back in your house, making sure you don't wake Mom up. + +You lie in bed thinking about the unusual day and night you had and realize there isn't anything wrong with not following the rules ALL the time, and you also realize you're secure enough not to do something stupid. And Mom's just going to have to get used to that idea. + +Another day arrives, and you finally feel normal...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Well its not really your thing, but you don't really have any other ideas at this point, so you agree. + +The bouncer at the club lets your sister in immediately when he sees her since she's a regular here. She explains you're with her, he doesn't seem to like you, but he lets you in. + +Your senses are instantly assaulted by loud music and flashing blinding lights. + +"Woohoo! I'm getting liquored up tonight!" your sister says and disappears into the crowd heading towards the bar. + +You quietly sit in an empty booth, for some reason you start to feel a little less adventurous again. Less emotional. School was a "controled environment" This place is like a sensory overload to you. Too much chaos. + +You sit and watch all the people going by engaging in various activities. Soon an incredibly friendly girl comes up to you wanting you to follow her. +> Stay put +Nope, you just can't get into it. Its all too much for you. You decline her offer and continue to just observe. + +Pretty soon, you see your sister stumbling around, she's not drunk enough to pass out, but she is drunk enough to be acting like an idiot. You notice other guys attempting to take advantage of this fact, you step in, and start escorting her out. When you get outside, you half expect her to start yelling at you for ruining her fun, but she doesn't. Instead she starts getting all weepy. Stating how you've been looking out for her all day and that no guy has ever done that, since they all treat her like shit. + +You tell her to just calm down and take her to the car. Since she's in no condition to drive (Though that's never stopped her before) As you put her in the back seat, she kisses you on the lips, with full tongue. You recoil back a bit in surprise. + +Surely its the alcohol...or is it? +> Drive her home +Alcohol definitely! You know that she gets pretty friendly after she's been drinking. You dismiss it. You can't possibly believe that she'd have that kind of interest in you. She may be a bit wild, but not to that extent! + +As you drive back home, she falls asleep in the back, thanking you for looking out. + +You get back home, unfortunately you're carrying your sister back in and you wake Mom up. She's pissed and iching for a fight. Normally her tirades would effect you more, but not after what you've been through. You're tired of her ordering everyone around, she has no idea how to REALLY look out for someone. If she did, your sister wouldn't be the mess she is. + +You put your sister on the sofa, and yell at your Mom telling her she needs to stop acting like a fucking dictator and to start acting like a mother, because she's going to drive away the both of you if she keeps this up. + +Your words seem to have somewhat of an effect. Your Mom still doesn't want to admit defeat though, she says you're ALL going to talk about this tomorrow. You're tired, and don't want to argue anymore tonight, so you agree. + +You head up to bed, realizing that your actions today have worn you out! Being a defender isn't easy. Its very taxing, but somehow you like it. Its much better than being the emotionless android you were acting like before. Its like you have a purpose in life now. + +Another day breaks, and you feel fulfilled...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Nope, you just can't get into it. Its all too much for you. You decline her offer and continue to just observe. + +Pretty soon, you see your sister stumbling around, she's not drunk enough to pass out, but she is drunk enough to be acting like an idiot. You notice other guys attempting to take advantage of this fact, you step in, and start escorting her out. When you get outside, you half expect her to start yelling at you for ruining her fun, but she doesn't. Instead she starts getting all weepy. Stating how you've been looking out for her all day and that no guy has ever done that, since they all treat her like shit. + +You tell her to just calm down and take her to the car. Since she's in no condition to drive (Though that's never stopped her before) As you put her in the back seat, she kisses you on the lips, with full tongue. You recoil back a bit in surprise. + +Surely its the alcohol...or is it? +> Drive her "home" +That wasn't the alcohol. You know how much your sister can drink. And she hasn't drank nearly enough to not know what the hell she's doing. + +You kiss her back, as she begins to take off her tight clothing. Suddenly it occurs to you that this is right. Your sister NEEDS someone to look out for her, otherwise she'll get into all kinds of trouble. All your helpful actions today have lead up to this moment. The natural progression of your relationship with her. You've always felt that you had a special connection with her, you're her balancer, her anchor if you will. That's why you were so repressed, you felt these emotions were wrong, but now you realize that was just society's rules being forced on you and its apparent that your sister had felt the same way, why else would she put herself in abusive relationships on purpose? She was attempting to run away from her own feelings in a different way. Well no more, tonight you both commit to your true feelings. + +You and your sister proceed to make passionate forbidden love in the backseat of her car where you both fall asleep afterwards. + +The next day when you wake up you both feel a little weird, but somehow satisfied. You don't say anything to each other, you both just slip your clothes back on and drive home. She holds your hand as you drive, occasionally smiling at you. You're fully prepared to hear Mom bitch at the both of you, but it doesn't matter anymore because together there's nobody that can get in your way. + +Yes, its a brand new day, and you feel absolute contentment...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It could be that you're feeling rebellious, or it could be that you're just not confident enough to stand up to your Mom in a knock down drag out arguement. That little one this morning will be nothing compared to what will await you tonight if you went home. After all you gotta live with her and she still commands a very intimidating presence. 18 years of indoctrination is hard to completely shake in one day. + +Your sister suggests a club that doesn't check IDs, since she isn't eager to go home either, but she won't be staying at Butch's anymore. +> Go find something else to do +That may be your sister's path, but it isn't yours. You decline the offer, and she tells you goodbye and thanks you for sticking up for her today. + +You begin to walk around wondering where to go, where all of a sudden Jessica calls out to you. + +You stop and wait for her to arrive, she says she heard what happened with Butch and she said she's glad to hear that your sister finally dumped him for good. Jessica had been telling your sister that for a year now, but she never listened to her. + +Jessica seems impressed by your actions today, looks like you won't have to wait until tomorrow to ask her out, she's interested now! +> Go to the park +You decide to go for a nice leisurely walk in the park, you can get to know her as you talk and walk in the full bloom of nature. + +You and Jessica are having a relatively good time, as the approaching evening makes the moon come out, making this "date" just a little bit more romantic. +> Find some place to make out +While you attempt to find a secluded spot, the approaching evening brings out bad elements of society. Particularly ones you've had run ins with today. + +"Thought you were gonna get away with that shit? Bleed motherfucker!" Henry shouts jumping out of nowhere and stabbing you repeatedly. Jessica attempts to help until he slaps her and begins to assault her. + +Being a "good guy" has its drawbacks, the world is very unfair when people like you aren't allowed happiness, but that's life. As you lay bleeding to death, hearing Jessica's screams, you realize it would've been better for all, if you hadn't felt the need to turn into a crusader today. + +You feel life ebb away then you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to go for a nice leisurely walk in the park, you can get to know her as you talk and walk in the full bloom of nature. + +You and Jessica are having a relatively good time, as the approaching evening makes the moon come out, making this "date" just a little bit more romantic. +> Take her home +All these new feelings are still a bit overwhelming to you, so you decide not to take it to that level just yet. Besides you don’t really want to be hanging out in the park too long at night. + +You take Jessica home who agrees to go out with you again and gives you a big kiss before she goes in which puts a perfect end to this day. + +You sneak back to your house, carefully not waking Mom up. You know you’ll have to deal with her in the morning, but that doesn’t seem to bother you. You’ve accomplished a lot today and that fills you with a sense of achievement that you’ve never felt before. + +Another day arrives and you feel triumphant…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>That may be your sister's path, but it isn't yours. You decline the offer, and she tells you goodbye and thanks you for sticking up for her today. + +You begin to walk around wondering where to go, where all of a sudden Jessica calls out to you. + +You stop and wait for her to arrive, she says she heard what happened with Butch and she said she's glad to hear that your sister finally dumped him for good. Jessica had been telling your sister that for a year now, but she never listened to her. + +Jessica seems impressed by your actions today, looks like you won't have to wait until tomorrow to ask her out, she's interested now! +> Go to her house +Her Mom works nights so you take advantage of the fact you won't be disturbed. You and Jessica have a good time getting to know each other a little better, a lot better in fact. + +Okay not THAT much better! Jessica may be a friend of your sister's, but she's not the "free spirit" she is. Jessica stops you from going any further and says she's just not ready to do that yet, especially since this is basically your first date! +> Get agressive +You know its always tragic to see how easy it is to fall from a positive path... + +Maybe it was your built up confidence crossing over to arrogance. Maybe you felt all your "good deeds" today should be "rewarded". Maybe it was just an overload of different emotions in one day from a previous complete lack of social interaction. Maybe it was a combination of all three factors as well as other ones, but your choice has lead you to perform a dispicable action, effectively erasing anything positive you've done today. + +Afterwards, you feel different, like something shut down inside your head. Perhaps it was a left over shred of morality reminding you of the evil you just committed. Whatever it was, you end up running off, leaving Jessica behind. You feel panic, fear, shame, regret, and disgust all at the same time. As these emotions assault you, you clutch your head, scream and end up collapsing in the park. + +You're awakened the next morning by the police, who've been looking for you, you meekly and quietly go with them. + +Its a brand new day and you feel everlasting anguish...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Her Mom works nights so you take advantage of the fact you won't be disturbed. You and Jessica have a good time getting to know each other a little better, a lot better in fact. + +Okay not THAT much better! Jessica may be a friend of your sister's, but she's not the "free spirit" she is. Jessica stops you from going any further and says she's just not ready to do that yet, especially since this is basically your first date! +> Respect her wishes +You didn't very well expect everything to go your way on your very first day of acting like a real person did you? Part of being a "good guy" is not necessarily expecting a "reward" for things you've done. Fortunately even with your low social skills you've realized this fact. + +You tell Jessica how you can't wait to see her tomorrow, and how you'll take her on a real date after school. She says she looks forward to it and kisses you goodnight before you leave. + +As you sneak back into your house, you think about how much you've changed in one day. For the most part you stood up against things you saw as unjust, yet you still recognized you have to have your own life as well. You'll still have to put up with your Mom's domineering personality and your sister is still a party animal, but you can't change people overnight, let alone the world. All you can do is TRY to do the right thing and hope everything works out for the best. + +And so far it looks like it's working out for you. Small victories will lead to bigger ones eventually, you know it will. + +Another day arrives and you feel hopeful...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know, you've really had it with Mom picking on your sister all the time. Sure she's a little wild, but she isn't a slut and doesn't deserve to be called one, you tell Mom as much. +Your sister and especially your Mom are both VERY surprised! Your Mom gets even angrier and slaps you! + +"So both of you ungrateful shits turn against me! Get the fuck out of my house right now! NOW! And don't fucking return if you aren't going to live by my rules!" She yells and storms out of the kitchen. + +You and your sister leave, but as you both head off to school, she thanks you for taking her side. + +"Thanks, its nice to have an ally for once against that fucking harpy!" + +You feel a little pleased. Its nice to be appreciated for once. + +When you get to school, you see Henry the school bully kicking the hell out of your "friend" Aaron. You don't really care for Aaron, but he looks at you in the hopes you'll help him. +> Ignore him +You leave Aaron to his fate. Your emotions have become dead again. You just don't care anymore. What happened at the house was just an usual oddity in your "normal" behavior you guess. + +You go through your day numb as usual, when you get home, Mom reads you the riot act for this morning. This only makes you realize that speaking out against her wasn't a good idea in the first place. You go to bed. + +Another day arrives and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Its another day and you feel nothing... + +You're 18 years old and very socially inept. Naturally you're not popular in high school, you're not even worthy to be routinely picked on. This isn't to say you aren't at all, but most people just find you very creepy and stay away from you. You're mom's strict upbringing has made you very emotionally detached and repressed. At this point you barely feel any kind of emotions at all. + +Maybe that changes today. + +Your Mom is calling you down to eat. +> Stay in bed +You don't get up. Today is different somehow. You don't know why, but it is. + +Your mother is screaming at you to come down. + +It doesn't even faze you. Her threats meaning nothing anymore. + +You hear her coming up the stairs. +> Stay in bed +She enters the room, screaming at you as usual. You don't even hear her. You've heard it all before. + +She begins to prod you, as you still lay in bed, oblivious to her. She shakes you and hits you, still nothing. Finally she drags you out of the bed and onto the floor... + +You're totally catatonic. + +Your mom screams for your sister to help her, and some confusion occurs. You are completely still from the time, the ambulance come to pick you up, to the time you're put in the catatonia ward. + +As you remain in your cell, you feel something. Freedom. Its ironic, in this place of walls and bars, and your catatonic state, you finally feel free. Your mind is completely free of the problems of the real world, and best of all free of Mom. + +Another day arrives as you lay motionless in a bed and you feel free...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You don't get up. Today is different somehow. You don't know why, but it is. + +Your mother is screaming at you to come down. + +It doesn't even faze you. Her threats meaning nothing anymore. + +You hear her coming up the stairs. +> Get ready for her +Your mother comes bursting in the room. + +"What the fuck are you still doing in fucking bed? Its time for you to get your ass up and go to fucking school! What the fuck are you doing with your hands under the covers? Are you fucking jerking..." + +Before your mother can finish her rant, you flip your covers off and shoot her in the head. + +Wow. You didn't realize you were that good of a shot, you weren't even aiming. + +Your mother slumps to the floor and you jump out of bed, fully dressed for today. You hear your sister running up the stairs screaming, wondering what's going on. +> Go meet your sister +You appear suddenly as your sister comes from around the corner of the stairs, she has just enough time to see Mom's dead body and the pistol you're aiming at her. + +You shoot twice, the bullets can't miss at this range. Your sister goes flying down the stairs and is already dead by the time she hits the bottom. + +Yep, today is a different day... +> Go to school +You collect all the other weapons you had stored in your room. You always knew this day would come. + +You kiss your Mom and sister goodbye. It wasn't their fault, you just had to do it. + +Just like you have to do it again. + +Taking your Mom's car, you get to school, just in time to see your "friend" Aaron, getting beat up in the parking lot by the school bully Henry. + +You double check your weapons before getting out of the car. Henry and Aaron both notice the amount of firepower you're packing. +> Dispense Mayhem +"Hold on don't..." Henry says before taking a shotgun slug to the chest, killing him instantly. + +Aaron at first looks at you as a savior from his tormentor. His expression soon changes to fear when that same shotgun is then pointed at him, exploding his head like a ripe mellon. + +Your actions have now attracted a bit of attention. Students who were in the parking lot are now running for their lives or attempting to drive off. +> Enter the school through the gym +You run around to the back of the school in the attempts to do what you have to do as quickly as possible. + +You throw the doors open and gym class is in full session. You see so many...targets. Your eyes especially focus on Butch. Your sister's boyfriend. You immeidately take out your sub-machine gun and begin spraying the place. Some escape, some die instantly, some lay wounded on the floor begging for mercy. You take the opportunity to shoot the wounded one by one in a calculating manner. + +You do this very calmly. Like stepping on ants... + +Butch attempts to crawl away, but you spray him again with bullets. He lies still in a bloody mess. + +At this point, a majority of the school has been alerted of the things you're doing. The cops should be here shortly. + +You make your way down the corridor... +> Head towards a classroom +You know EXACTLY which classroom to enter. + +You go straight to it, shooting the janitor on the way there and a couple of students that you catch in the hallway. + +You enter your designated target area. And its still full. The class was cowering, hoping you'd pass by, but fate was not with them today. + +You see her. Jessica. Your sister's friend. She looks very frightened, but then again everyone in the class does. + +You assess the situation with your shotgun in hand... +> You know what to do +There's no other way. You begin blasting the room with buckshot, and don't stop shooting until you're sure everyone is dead. + +The room is covered in gore. You look at Jessica and kiss her blood soaked lips. There just wasn't enough time. + +You exit the class room. You hear police sirens and bullhorns screaming at you to give up. Most of the school has been evacuated at this point. + +Just you alone in the school and the cops waiting for you outside now. +> Let's finish it +You reload all your weapons calmly and exit through the front door. + +"DROP YOUR FUCKING WEAPONS NOW!" you hear a cop shout. + +You immediately open fire on them. You barely get off a few rounds before they fill you with lead, dropping you. + +You fall to the ground, and breathe your last breath. + +Nobody ever really knows why you did the terrible things you did that dark day. The only clue is the note they found in your pocket saying: + +I feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's no other way. You begin blasting the room with buckshot, and don't stop shooting until you're sure everyone is dead. + +The room is covered in gore. You look at Jessica and kiss her blood soaked lips. There just wasn't enough time. + +You exit the class room. You hear police sirens and bullhorns screaming at you to give up. Most of the school has been evacuated at this point. + +Just you alone in the school and the cops waiting for you outside now. +> Surrender +Something over comes you. You suddenly feel a sense of self preservation. The only thing you HAVE felt during this bloody day. + +You drop all your weapons and exit the school completely unarmed. The police quickly take you down and drag you away. + +You feel completely numb during the trial, its ultimately decided that you're completely nuts to do what you did (Despite outcries for your death) so you are put in a mental institution. To this day nobody can figure out exactly why you did what you did. + +A reporter comes in to do a special on mass murderers and you were on the top on the list. He doesn't get too far with his questions though, he asks WHY you did it. You just say it had to be done. He asks you how you feel about killing all those people. But you give the same answer you gave at the trial + +You feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know EXACTLY which classroom to enter. + +You go straight to it, shooting the janitor on the way there and a couple of students that you catch in the hallway. + +You enter your designated target area. And its still full. The class was cowering, hoping you'd pass by, but fate was not with them today. + +You see her. Jessica. Your sister's friend. She looks very frightened, but then again everyone in the class does. + +You assess the situation with your shotgun in hand... +> It's all for her +There's no other way. You pull out your pistol and begin shooting people with deadly accuracy, until only you and Jessica are left. + +Jessica is paralyzed with fear. She doesn't realize though, that this has all been for her. She never noticed you before. How much you cared for her. How much you loved her. Well she'll ALWAYS remember you now. You've made sure of that. + +As she cowers and shakes expecting you to kill her, you hand her your pistol. She's too frightened. She just wants you to leave her alone. You have to help her. + +You put the pistol in her hand and force her to squeeze the trigger until it releases its bullet into your heart. + +At last you don't feel the nawing pain of unquenched love anymore. + +You feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You run around to the back of the school in the attempts to do what you have to do as quickly as possible. + +You throw the doors open and gym class is in full session. You see so many...targets. Your eyes especially focus on Butch. Your sister's boyfriend. You immeidately take out your sub-machine gun and begin spraying the place. Some escape, some die instantly, some lay wounded on the floor begging for mercy. You take the opportunity to shoot the wounded one by one in a calculating manner. + +You do this very calmly. Like stepping on ants... + +Butch attempts to crawl away, but you spray him again with bullets. He lies still in a bloody mess. + +At this point, a majority of the school has been alerted of the things you're doing. The cops should be here shortly. + +You make your way down the corridor... +> Try to escape now +Suddenly a sense of fear builds up inside you. You realize what you've done. You can't take what you've done back and worse you're not going to get away with it. + +You begin to run. You don't know where to go though, so you head back home. You hear sirens. They're closing in. + +Its too much for you, you're afraid. You feel the fear, until you realize, you don't have to be afraid. At least not of death! Death is peace. Its unfeeling peace. You want that feeling again. + +You sit down on the sofa and blow your brains out, just as the cops bust the door down. But they can't do anything to you now though because + +You feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Hold on don't..." Henry says before taking a shotgun slug to the chest, killing him instantly. + +Aaron at first looks at you as a savior from his tormentor. His expression soon changes to fear when that same shotgun is then pointed at him, exploding his head like a ripe mellon. + +Your actions have now attracted a bit of attention. Students who were in the parking lot are now running for their lives or attempting to drive off. +> Attempt to stop escapees +You begin spraying the parking lot randomly, attempting to stop people from either running or driving off. + +People are screaming and ducking from the hail of bullets you're peeling off. People and cars are being hit indisciminately + +The funny thing about shooting at a car, is the small possiblity of hitting the gas tank. The possibility of you going on a killing rampage today was actually greater than one of your bullets hitting a gas tank. Probabilty has played a strange role in today's events, because you succeeded in accomplishing both of those odds. + +Unfortunately you were standing too close to the explosion when the first car went up and igniting the others in a domino effect. (Thus accomplishing yet another small possibility) + +You feel a painful burning sensation all over your body for a brief moment then + +You feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You collect all the other weapons you had stored in your room. You always knew this day would come. + +You kiss your Mom and sister goodbye. It wasn't their fault, you just had to do it. + +Just like you have to do it again. + +Taking your Mom's car, you get to school, just in time to see your "friend" Aaron, getting beat up in the parking lot by the school bully Henry. + +You double check your weapons before getting out of the car. Henry and Aaron both notice the amount of firepower you're packing. +> Dispense Justice +"Hey wait, no..." Henry utters before you blast his internal organs to hamburger with your shotgun. + +Aaron looks upon you as a savior. You are. You now know why you came to school. To right the injustices that have occurred. You immediately make your way to the gym. You see Butch, your sister's boyfriend. HE was responsible for leading your sister astray, most of the jocks in here deserve to die. Long have they taunted those they percieve as weaker. + +You catch them completely off guard, you manage to blast Butch first and then pick off his friends as they attempt to run for their pathetic lives. + +You then single out teachers who attempted to bully you with their "Rules". Their rules are meaningless to you. You serve a higher power. Justice. You sneer as one woman begs you not to kill her for the sake of her son. Her son will be much better off without the likes of her... + +People are running in terror from you, but its only because they FEAR the justice you may dispense if they are found guilty. + +The police soon arrive and they are here to dispense their OWN brand of justice. You do not acknowledge this though. What you've done today, will be remembered, nobody can judge you and nobody will. + +You turn one of your guns on yourself. You feel a great sense of pride, before squeezing the trigger. + +Then you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You appear suddenly as your sister comes from around the corner of the stairs, she has just enough time to see Mom's dead body and the pistol you're aiming at her. + +You shoot twice, the bullets can't miss at this range. Your sister goes flying down the stairs and is already dead by the time she hits the bottom. + +Yep, today is a different day... +> End it now +You think about going to school, but you just don't feel like it. Its all so futile anyway. Everything. What you did didn't change anything, so why bother continuing with this pointless carnage? + +You decide there is no point, you sit next to your Mom's body, calmly put the gun in your mouth and then + +You feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your mother comes bursting in the room. + +"What the fuck are you still doing in fucking bed? Its time for you to get your ass up and go to fucking school! What the fuck are you doing with your hands under the covers? Are you fucking jerking..." + +Before your mother can finish her rant, you flip your covers off and shoot her in the head. + +Wow. You didn't realize you were that good of a shot, you weren't even aiming. + +Your mother slumps to the floor and you jump out of bed, fully dressed for today. You hear your sister running up the stairs screaming, wondering what's going on. +> Go out the window +You panic! You don't know what came over you. It was just her constant nagging, her verbal abuse, it just got to the point where you couldn't take it anymore. You don't want to kill anyone else. + +As you attempt to go out your window, but your sister is already up the stairs and sees what you've done. She also calls out to you. + +"Stop! You don't need to run away! Its okay. Just come back inside." +> Listen to your sister +You stop to listen to your sister, you're still scared and panicked, but she's never caused you harm. + +"Its okay I understand, you just couldn't take it anymore. Look what she did to you...okay, I know what to do. You just have to stay calm for me okay?" she says. + +You shake and tremble, but you nod your head. She tells you she's going to leave for a little while, but she'll be back. You don't want her to go, but she says she has to, if she's going to help. You reluctantly agree. + +After sis leaves, its just you alone in the house with Mom's dead body. +> Try to hide it +Weird scenarios enter your head in your state of panic. What if some insistant vaccum salesman knocks on the door and demands to demonstrate his product? Or maybe someone checking for Radon levels in the house? + +You have to hide the body! + +You pick Mom up, trying to figure out where to put her. You decide your closet, unfortunately your closet is full of crap, so you attempt to stuff her in there throwing your entire body into it. As you begin to breathe hard, you catch the fragrence of the perfume still lingering on her body, you notice her dress has been lifted up as you've been attempting to shove her in your closet. You're aroused as you also notice you're positioned between her legs, you begin to have BAD thoughts as you stroke her thighs. + +You can't stop yourself... + +During this completely immoral act, you don't feel panic anymore, you feel power. Total power. All that shit she did to you, you're returning in kind. Now YOU have the power over her. You feel so fuckin' alive! + +As you finish up, you hear your sister come back home. +> Demonstrate your power again +You calm yourself, quickly get your pants back on, and head downstairs. + +Your sister seems to have gone shopping for "body disposing" supplies. How thoughtful. She explains that Mom's body could be disposed of, and it sounds like sis has thought about killing the bitch herself, but was too weak to do it. Her weakness sickens you... + +You grab the shovel and smash your sister in the face with it until you're pretty sure she's not moving anymore. You feel that orgasmic rush again. No panic at all this time. No fear. Just a release. + +You've at last realized your repressed emotions have never really been repressed. You just don't have any, at least not in the traditional sense. You only feel rage and loathing for those who would try to control you and contempt and disgust for those weaker than you. You only feel happy when you kill. And you want to feel happy ALL the time... + +You pack up as much of your things as you can and prepare to leave for the road tomorrow. + +Tomorrow arrives and you feel unrelenting hate...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Weird scenarios enter your head in your state of panic. What if some insistant vaccum salesman knocks on the door and demands to demonstrate his product? Or maybe someone checking for Radon levels in the house? + +You have to hide the body! + +You pick Mom up, trying to figure out where to put her. You decide your closet, unfortunately your closet is full of crap, so you attempt to stuff her in there throwing your entire body into it. As you begin to breathe hard, you catch the fragrence of the perfume still lingering on her body, you notice her dress has been lifted up as you've been attempting to shove her in your closet. You're aroused as you also notice you're positioned between her legs, you begin to have BAD thoughts as you stroke her thighs. + +You can't stop yourself... + +During this completely immoral act, you don't feel panic anymore, you feel power. Total power. All that shit she did to you, you're returning in kind. Now YOU have the power over her. You feel so fuckin' alive! + +As you finish up, you hear your sister come back home. +> Try to place the body back and act like nothing has happend +Suddenly you begin to panic again, and you start to fumble with Mom's body which has obviously been violated with the ripped up clothing and all. Of course even without that evidence, you standing over her with your pants off is enough for your sister to draw her own conclusions when she walks in on your attempt to make things "normal" again. + +Your sister won't help you with this. Instead of looking like a sympathetic emotionally abused victim who was driven over the edge, you now look like a sick homicidal incestuous necrophiliac (And you are) + +She screams and runs out of the house before you can stop her. You know she's going to get the police and you can't say you blame her. You're revolted by your actions. You throw up. + +You don't know why you did the things you did today, but you're sorry you did. You begin to cry and scream as your tortured mind attempts to make sense of the situation, up until the time the police take you away. + +Eventually it's decided you should be in a mental institution, it doesn't matter to you though since all you want to do is die. + +Another day arrives, you wake up in your cell and feel torment...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You stop to listen to your sister, you're still scared and panicked, but she's never caused you harm. + +"Its okay I understand, you just couldn't take it anymore. Look what she did to you...okay, I know what to do. You just have to stay calm for me okay?" she says. + +You shake and tremble, but you nod your head. She tells you she's going to leave for a little while, but she'll be back. You don't want her to go, but she says she has to, if she's going to help. You reluctantly agree. + +After sis leaves, its just you alone in the house with Mom's dead body. +> Leave it where it is +You don't even want to look at it, let alone touch it. Besides sis told you everything would be okay if you just stayed calm. You downstairs to watch TV, but you start to worry about where your sister is at. You begin to panic again, you feel so lost. +> Run +You totally lose it! You know your sister went to go get the cops! They're probably on their way here right now! You run like a mad man down the street until you pass out from hyperventilation. + +When you wake up, your sister is standing over you, scolding you for running off like that. You were fortunate that she saw you lying face first on the sidewalk. This doesn't reassure you though and you continue to gibber about being caught. Your sister gets irritated by your behavior and ends up having to dispose of the body herself. Later a story is made up that your Mom just up and left and never came back, unfortunately your constant nevousness give you away and you blab everything. + +Both of you get charged, but since your sister never actually killed anyone, she get a lesser sentence. You feel completely relieved by all this even though you're going to jail for life. The fear and panic have left you, and have been replaced by a welcomed numbness again. + +Another day arrives in your cell and you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You don't even want to look at it, let alone touch it. Besides sis told you everything would be okay if you just stayed calm. You downstairs to watch TV, but you start to worry about where your sister is at. You begin to panic again, you feel so lost. +> Wait +You wait patiently because you were told to do so. Something about realizing that makes you a lot calmer. + +Your sister returns with "body disposing" items. She says you could either chop her up in the bathtub and then dispose of her in garbage bags or just wait until night and bury her in the backyard. + +It almost looks as if your sister had thought about doing it herself at one time. You hadn't even planned it out that far. You tell your sister whatever she thinks is best, but you'll carry it out whatever she decides. + +After she makes her decision, you go about performing the duty casually. Its almost as if you feel like yourself again. Later your sister makes up an elaborate story about your Mom's disappearance, you back her up without any problems and it is believed. + +Life continues as normal for the both of you, sis feels complete freedom to do what she wants and you take care of the more mundane matters that she tells you to do when she doesn't feel like bothering to do them (Which is all the time) + +You now know why you felt fear and panic after you killed your Mom. It was because after so many years of being told what to do you'd destroyed your shackles. Freedom can be frightening and you realized it wasn't for you. Thank god sis has taken over Mom's role now. Its not exactly the same, but its calmer and secure. + +Another day arrives and you feel safe...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You panic! You don't know what came over you. It was just her constant nagging, her verbal abuse, it just got to the point where you couldn't take it anymore. You don't want to kill anyone else. + +As you attempt to go out your window, but your sister is already up the stairs and sees what you've done. She also calls out to you. + +"Stop! You don't need to run away! Its okay. Just come back inside." +> Continue out the window +You're still too scared, you go out the window and try to climb down, unfortunately your panic prevents you from climbing as efficiently as you'd like. + +You fall off and impale yourself through the chest on the fence surrounding Mom's rose bushes. You gasp for breath, coughing up blood. You feel fear overwhelm you as you approach death. + +Then you feel nothing...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You survey the battlefield that you’ve created. All sides have been at war for a long time, and also evenly matched. Who will win? It will all be decided on tonight. + +“Hey! Its time to go to bed!” you Mom says coming into your room. + +Or at least it would be, if you didn’t have to go to bed! + +“Aw Mom! I was just about to do something!” you protest. +“Well you can do something tomorrow, right now its bedtime, you know the rules. But before you do remember to brush your teeth and put these toys away.” +“But…but can’t I leave them out? I got everything set up and like everything! The final battle for the universe is going to take place!” + +Your Mom surveys everything you’ve set up. You have a myriad of unusual toys and figures standing next to each other. You have plastic knights standing next to space men defending a castle made of blocks on one side while across from them has a combination of green army guys in vehicles and some metal robots. And yet on the far side of your room is another army set up consisting of dinosaurs and some other monsters. She just smiles at your creativeness. + +“Very well, it looks like you went to a lot of trouble, so okay. You certainly do have a vivid imagination to come up with some of the games you do.” + +Happily you go brush your teeth, and think about the battle that’s going to take place tomorrow! General Razor will try to storm the castle and Lord Justice will defend it! And then the Dino Demons will try to destroy everything! It’s going to be so cool! + +After brushing your teeth, you head back to your room where you carefully step around the figures you’ve set up with care and get into bed. Of course as usual, you don’t fall asleep right away; you read a couple pages of your favorite comic book first. Man you wish real life wasn’t as boring as it is. There’s no magic, no super heroes, no giant robots, no nothing! You often wished you lived in a world with all of those things. + +You turn off the lights in your room when your Mom checks on you again and demands you go to sleep. You’re still a little to wound up to fall asleep though, so you just lie in your bed thinking how tomorrow’s battle is going to play out. + +Of course one bad thing about having an overactive imagination is letting it run away with you. Your room is dark, with only the dim moonlight shining in and creating creepy shadows on your walls. You begin to think the shadows are moving, begin to get a little scared and hide under the covers. Then you think back to something your mom told you the last time you got scared like this: “Monsters aren’t real. Nothing like that exists in this world.” +Of course she’s right, after all you just thought the world you lived in was boring by not having those types of things in it. + +You slowly peer out from under your covers, but unfortunately this isn’t the work of your imagination. These shadows ARE moving and now they’re right by the side of your bed. Red dots form their eyes and a bluish light form their grinning maws. Before you can cry out, one of them puts its hand over your mouth and puts its other hand to its own with its index finger to its lips. (Or rather where its lips would be if it had any) + +“Shhhhhhh, the master wants to see you…there will be plenty of time to cry then, little one. Open up the portal.” The shadow says + +Suddenly a purple portal opens up where your closet is, and two of the shadow creatures grab and carry you into it. The shadows run around you as you’re carried down the green tunnel which the portal has lead into. They excitedly talk about how their master will be pleased for getting you. Of course all you’re doing right now is panicking, and you start to struggle to get away, surprisingly, you manage to break free of their grip and start trying to run back to where they entered this thing. + +“Get him! He’s trying to run away!” +“Do it quickly before the portal starts collapsing!” + +As you hear the shadows giving orders to each other, the portal tunnel that you’re in is indeed starting to flash and blink a lot, when you look down at your running feet, the purple light “supporting” you disappears every now and then revealing only blackness. You can see your room just up ahead and you ALMOST reach it, before the green tunnel disappears completely. + +You yell and scream about how you wish you back home as you fall through the endless void, and while that doesn’t happen, you do suddenly appear someplace else… + +You land roughly, scraping your legs and knees and getting your pajamas all dusty. After brushing yourself off and rubbing your hurting legs, you get a better look at your surroundings. + +You’re in what looks to be the middle of nowhere, though there is a small group of rickety looking houses nearby, probably a small village. + +One thing is for certain, you know you aren’t on Earth, because, a small multi-colored lizard like creature with three eyes scurries by your feet and into the wilderness beyond. You’re still scared, but also fascinated by this place; however, you realize you need to figure out how to get back home and what exactly is going on. +> Head to the village +Upon entering you see many of the villagers just sitting outside their houses doing nothing, though a couple of them are lazily plucking some sort of stringed instruments. They barely pay any attention to you at all. + +You know you’re not supposed to talk to strangers, but in this situation you don’t really feel like you have a choice, so you ask one of them for help. + +“Hey, I need some help, these shadow things attacked me…” +“Wazzat? Shadows? Shadows don’t come ‘round here boy, we’s got ourselves a wizard to protect us! If you got shadow problems, maybe you should talk to him. He’s a pretty smart guy. He’s in that nice lookin’ house over there, the one with the roof! Careful though, he’s usually in a bad mood. Argues with his wife constantly too.” The fat villager says going back to drinking whatever it is he’s drinking. + +Not knowing what else to do you head over to the wizard’s house. As you approach you can hear arguing from the inside. + +You knock on the door which is opened by a young woman dressed in a waitress like outfit. She’s pretty, but looks very tired, behind her appears an older man who doesn’t look much like a wizard at all. + +“Whadda you want kid? We ain’t buyin’ anything!” he scowls. +“Are you really a wizard? You don’t look like one.” You remark. +“That’s because he isn’t a real wizard. He’s a lazy charlatan!” the woman answers. +“Shut up Talia, I was good enough to get YOU.” +“Yeah, that’s because I was too young and naïve to know any better! I knew I should’ve married a knight!” +“Hah! And what knight would marry a serving wench like you?” +“Melcar, I don’t have time for your nonsense today, I have to go to work. Can you at least TRY to do something productive while I’m gone, like casting some cantrips to cut down the overgrowth in the backyard? Sheesh, I think I saw a nest of Furms making their homes in there and you know much I hate those little purple things! They infest everything and then you can’t get rid of them! So can you DO that one thing, if nothing else?” +“Yeah, yeah.” + +The woman throws her hands up in dismay and leaves the house, leaving Melcar and you alone. + +“So, what’s your deal kid? I know you ain’t from this backwoods village because I know everyone here and you actually look like you bathe every once in awhile. You lost or something?” + +You explain your situation to Melcar, somehow he doesn’t look surprised, but he does look a little more interested in you. + +“Hmm, sounds like the Nightmare Tyrant. He has a habit of snatching people from other dimensions and draining them to harness his power. Those shadows you encountered are what’s left of his victims. I’m not entirely sure of his methods for choosing, but I do know he only takes those with strong imaginations though. It’s probably why he prefers children since they tend to be more inclined to think up fantastic things.” You were lucky to escape from him.” +“Well how do I get back home?” + +Melcar looks at you a moment before replying. + +“You interested in doing a little yard work?” +“Uh…” +“I’m really busy with an experiment, and I just don’t have time to mess around with clearing the overgrowth in my backyard. If you do it, I think that’ll give me time to complete my experiment, as well as giving me time to look up the spell that can take you back home.” +“Well okay…” +“Good, there’s a scythe in the back. You shouldn’t have too much trouble.” + +Melcar closes his door and you walk around the back, which literally looks like a jungle. The grass is almost as high as you are and the scythe is a little too unwieldy and large for you to use properly. Soon tiny purple people appear and angrily throw small stones at you and squeak some sort of jibberish. They apparently don’t like you trying to tear up their home. + +You don’t see how you’re ever going to finish this task. +> Try to scare away the purple people +You try to scare the little purple people much like you’ve ran after pigeons in the park, however the purple folks won’t be chased away so easily, this is their home after all, they just nimbly get out of your way and continue to pelt you with stones, which are really starting to hurt at this point, and a particularly large stone smacks you in the head knocking you out. + +When you wake up you’re nowhere near the Wizard’s house anymore, in fact you’re quite a ways outside of the village! The purple people must’ve dragged you here. As you groggily get up, you wish that someone would help you. Just then a shadow looms over you, at first you get scared again, but fortunately this one is attached to someone. You look up and see a woman dressed in leather armor, she carries a bow on her back and a sword by her side. She gives you a serious look while she grabs your hand to pick you up. You notice she has pointy ears. + +“Boy, what’re you doing out here? Don’t you know it can be dangerous out here? Do you live in that village?” she asks. +“No, I was trying to look for help there. There was a wizard who said he could help me get back home if…” +“Wizard? There wasn’t any strong magic activity detected around here boy. Where are you from?” + +You explain your story, as the woman listens intently. Much like the wizard you ran into earlier, she doesn’t seem surprised. + +“Mm, yes you are a lucky boy indeed to escape from the Nightmare Tyrant, most never even have a chance. I think you better come with me, my name’s Lyssia” +“But the wizard…” +“Trust me, you’ll be safer with me, than that so called wizard you mentioned. Sounded like a hedge wizard that was just getting you to do some grunt work that he didn’t want to do. He couldn’t help you against the shadows, let alone get you back home. I might be able to though, well the Captain might anyway. We’ll head back to my platoon’s camp.” + +You feel somewhat safer with Lyssia, not to mention she seems like she’s more readily going to help you, so you follow her. Eventually you arrive at a fairly large camp with armored knights, horses, and tents. Most of them look like they’ve been doing a lot of fighting recently and are still recovering from their wounds. When you enter the Captain’s tent, you see him looking over some maps before he looks up at you. He’s a man of average build, but his weathered and tired face shows the signs of having been in battle several times. His armor displays likewise. + +“Lyssia, you better have a good reason for why you’re bringing this boy into my presence. This is a mobile military unit; you know we can’t be coddling civilians, let alone children.” + +Lyssia explains the situation and the Captain’s attitude towards you changes to a more sympathetic one. + +“Escaping from the Nightmare Tyrant’s minions is no small feat, especially for one unprepared for such an encounter. The terror they radiate is normally enough to paralyze most with fear. You’re obviously not a battle hardened soldier to such horrors, and there’s no evidence of any magic about you. You must have an innate strong will, boy. Which is good since you’ll most likely have to deal with them again.” He says grimly. +“Again?!” you exclaim. +“Yes, unfortunately the Nightmare Tyrant isn’t fond of losing those he marks for capture. He has no doubt sent his Shadow minions to look for you. Fortunately you have us to help you now. We are a recon team for the Parran Empire, we’ve been fighting the Nightmare Tyrant for years, trying to find a weakness with little success. Though after some searching we think there may be a powerful weapon that can help us. It’s in some ruins a few days from here, or should be. One can never know for certain with old legends. Now, I have a duty to defend innocents from evil, but I also have a duty to the Empire. I simply cannot take this team all the way back to the Empire just to drop you off there where our wizards can send you back home, I have a mission to complete first. You can either stay with us and then after the mission we shall all go back together, or I shall send a couple of my men with you back to the Empire. Keep in mind the Shadows are probably looking for you and they tend to hunt in swarms, so the more people defending you, the better.” + +You really want to go back home, but you’re a little worried about not having all the protection you can. + +“Well can’t Lyssia go with me?” you ask hopefully. Lyssia smiles a bit at your request, but the Captain shakes his head. +“Sadly no. While I can certainly understand and admire your judgment of wanting her to go with you, I cannot allow her to do so, as my mission will undoubtedly require her skills. As I said, I will send to two of my men, but that is all I can spare if you decide to head back to the Empire.” +> Head back to the Empire +The sooner you’re out of this place the better, so you request to be escorted back to the Empire where their wizards can send you back home. + +“Very well, I’ll send Paladins Salzat and Lakri with you, along with an official letter explaining your situation. Good luck and may you return home without any ill-fated encounters.” The Captain says handing you the letter for safe keeping. + +You are presented to Salzat and Lakri who are explained their mission. Salzat doesn’t look pleased; in fact he gets angry and exclaims his skills would be better put to use fighting the Nightmare Tyrant and other evil creatures, not looking after a child. Lakri on the other hand looks relieved. After the Captain shouts him down and tells him to obey orders, Salzat grumbles and gets on his horse. Lyssia puts you on your own horse, you’ve +never ridden one before, but she assures you that these are the best trained horses in the Empire and will serve you well. You’re told you should reach the Empire in a few days. + +Soon you’re off with your new travel companions They couldn’t be more opposite. Salzat is a mean looking man with scars all over his face who barely speaks to you, but his armor is impeccably clean and well taken care of. It even has a shine to it, almost as if it was brand new. (He doesn’t seem to wear a helmet though, perhaps that might explain all the scars) Lakri on the other hand is much kinder and talkative to you. His armor looks like its seen better days though. It’s metal that looks hastily welded together, badly dented and even showing signs of rust! Unlike Salzat his suit of armor has a full face helmet which he’s wearing right now and Salzat has chosen to taunt him about. + +“Lakri, why are you wearing that thing? We aren’t even going into battle you coward! I swear I don’t know how any of you can see in those things anyway. I need to be able to swivel my head as quick as possible so I can see the next enemy I have to slay!” +“Leave me alone Salzat! I like to make sure I’m protected! I don’t want to end up all scarred and ugly like you! I intend on getting married one day!” Lakri sputters. +“Feh! I don’t need to look pretty; my DEEDS will win the hearts of damsels!” + +“How did you guys become Paladins?” you ask. Surprisingly Salzat answers your question right away. + +“Well unlike Lakri here, I didn’t have royal family connections. I worked my way up through the ranks and went through special training so that I could become a weapon against evil and serve the Empire. If I could wipe out all the evil in this world myself, I would not hesitate to do so. There is no greater deed than to serve the cause of good and righteousness and right now my talents are going to waste escorting you!” +“Yes, well I for one am glad for the break from battle. This is a nice change of pace than fighting trolls, shadows and other such nastiness. I wasn’t really looking forward to going to those ruins the Captain mentioned either. Sounded dangerous.” Lakri says. +“Yeah, well we know you’re a coward anyway, and a disgrace to the Paladin name.” +“I’m not a coward! I…just want to live alright? I mean is it so wrong that I prefer my life to not be at risk every five minutes?” + +“Why did you become a Paladin, if you don’t like to fight?” you ask. +“Oh, that’s a long story…let’s just say my Dad wanted me to.” +“But you’re a grown up, shouldn’t you just be able to do what you want now?” +“Ha ha! You think just because one grows up, you aren’t subjected to being told what to do by your parents? Guess again. Ah well, perhaps you have less demanding parents. You must certainly like them, if you wanted to get home so quickly to see them again.” + +Before you can answer, Salzat suddenly looks up in the sky and draws his sword. + +“Shut up! I sense something…” + +Suddenly the sky grows considerably darker within only a few seconds and screeching can be heard from above. Dark winged creatures begin to descend from the sky + +“SHADOWS!” Lakri shouts. +“Alright! And here I thought I wasn’t going to get to vanquish evil today! Come on and be destroyed foul creatures!” Salzat laughs. + +At this point Lakri and Salzat show their differences again. Lakri panics to the point that he fumbles and drops his weapon before yelling that you all should make haste to escape. Salzat on the other hand turns to face the winged Shadows. You don’t see how he can possibly fight them all himself though. +> Follow Lakri +You’re in no position to fight a bunch of flying Shadows, you’re not armed with anything, and nowhere near being a warrior. You take you horse in the direction that Lakri headed, leaving Salzat behind to fight the Shadows, though you aren’t safe yet as a few of them are still in pursuit of you. + +“That’s the one the Master wants! The little one! Get him! Get him!” you hear raspy voices shout behind you. + +Soon your horse has almost caught up to Lakri’s. Lakri seems to have forgotten that he’s supposed to be DEFENDING you! + +“Hey! Aren’t you supposed to be protecting me?” you shout at him, while briefly looking behind you to see how close the Shadows are. +“I…I’m sorry…I just…ARGH! Shadows! Gotta get away! Don’t follow me, they’re after you!” + +Lakri must be so frightened for his own life that he’s gone half mad! Seeing that he’s not going to lose you, he ends up jumping off of his horse and running off into the wilderness in an effort to ditch the Shadows. It works for him since they were never after him and they continue to follow you and are starting to close in… + +Soon one is close enough to grab at you, in an attempt to rip you from the back of the horse. +> Attempt to punch at the Shadow +With your free hand you attempt to punch the flying Shadow, but unfortunately it deftly dodges your attack and you unbalance yourself causing you to fall off the horse. + +You don’t land on the ground though since the flying Shadows swoop in to catch you before that happens. Of course now you’re in their evil clutches. They laugh and cackle with glee as they take you back to the Nightmare Tyrant.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’re in no position to fight a bunch of flying Shadows, you’re not armed with anything, and nowhere near being a warrior. You take you horse in the direction that Lakri headed, leaving Salzat behind to fight the Shadows, though you aren’t safe yet as a few of them are still in pursuit of you. + +“That’s the one the Master wants! The little one! Get him! Get him!” you hear raspy voices shout behind you. + +Soon your horse has almost caught up to Lakri’s. Lakri seems to have forgotten that he’s supposed to be DEFENDING you! + +“Hey! Aren’t you supposed to be protecting me?” you shout at him, while briefly looking behind you to see how close the Shadows are. +“I…I’m sorry…I just…ARGH! Shadows! Gotta get away! Don’t follow me, they’re after you!” + +Lakri must be so frightened for his own life that he’s gone half mad! Seeing that he’s not going to lose you, he ends up jumping off of his horse and running off into the wilderness in an effort to ditch the Shadows. It works for him since they were never after him and they continue to follow you and are starting to close in… + +Soon one is close enough to grab at you, in an attempt to rip you from the back of the horse. +> Hold on tight to the reins +You pulls away from the Shadow and hold on as tight as you can, hoping that somehow the horse can outrun these creatures, or at least hoping that someone can help you. + +No sooner have you thought this, when suddenly you hear a sizzling sound followed by an ear piecing screech from above. The Shadow trying to rip you from the horse has been struck down by some sort of bolt of lightning. Soon another Shadow is destroyed in the same way + +“Cursed Shadows! Just hold on to the reins boy and keep moving! There’s a town up ahead where you’ll be safe!” you hear someone yell at you. You notice some trees and rocks along side of the road, but no people. Whoever it is helping you must be well hidden. + +Eventually all the Shadows following you have been destroyed by bolts and you make it into the town, though you aren’t sure of what to do or go next, but for now you’re just glad to be alive. (Your horse has even clamed down a bit) + +While you just temporarily rest on top of your horse, you hear the voice of the person who helped you again. + +“Ah there you are, glad to see you’re alright. What’s a boy like you traveling by himself in these dangerous times anyway? The wretched Nightmare Tyrant’s minions seem to be everywhere nowadays.” + +The one who’s helped you looks like a little different from what you expected, this man looks more like a warrior, but not like the knights you encountered earlier. More like a barbarian type. He’s bristling with muscles and has a large axe carried on his back. + +“You don’t look like a Wizard.” You say. +“Of course I don’t, because I’m not.” +“I thought only Wizards could cast spells.” +“Oh that lightning bolts back there? That’s thanks to this magic ring I found a long time ago. Though I think it’s out of charges, it’s useless except maybe to trade with now. Here, why don’t you take it.” He says giving you the ring. + +“Thanks. I’m supposed to be heading to the Parran Empire to get back home.” +“You live in the Parran Empire?” +“No, but they’re supposed to have Wizards there who can help me get back home.” + +You go into detail about your adventures to the barbarian; he seems a lot more surprised by your tale than the rest you’ve told have. + +“That’s some tale boy, though I have no reason to disbelieve you, given the things I’ve seen since my own travels as well as the things I have heard about the Nightmare Tyrant. His darkness has even reached my old homeland far north, though my people tend to be nomadic and the land doesn’t really contain anything of major importance. We had more problems with the usual menaces of giants and trolls more than anything else.” +“How come you’re so far from home?” +“Well as I said, my people are nomadic in nature, and I guess I’m even more so. I wanted to see other places outside of my homeland, so I traveled south to where civilization tends to thrive. I’ll most likely return one day.” + +Before you continue this conversation, you have just realized you don’t really know the route to get to the Empire. The Paladins were supposed to lead you there and now both of them are gone. You don’t know who else to ask, you’re all by yourself again and this barbarian did help you, so you give it a shot… + +“Hey, um…could you help me get to Empire? I don’t exactly know the way.” +“Me? Well, I’m not sure I’m the best person to ask, seeing as I’ve never been there either, though I’m sure that wouldn’t be too much of a problem, all I need is a few directions from someone and I could probably get there quickly…sure why not? As I said, I’ve never been to the Parran Empire lands so it wouldn’t really be a wasted trip for me, but we probably should find a room somewhere first. Also I’ll need to ask for directions. My name’s Qualan by the way.” + +Qualan rents a room for the pair of you, but he doesn’t stay, instead he says he’s going to go ask for directions and explore the town a bit, and for you to just stay in the room and not to open it for anybody. He has the key, so he can let himself in. Soon you’re alone again in a relatively barren room. It’s pretty boring in here, but you try to keep yourself occupied, namely by thinking of all the people and places you’ve encountered since you’ve been here. In fact this is the first time you’ve actually got the chance to reflect on this little adventure. You also wonder about your Mom, she’s going to be worried about you and probably have the police looking all over for you! And when you finally do return, what will you tell her? + +You don’t know, but what you do know for certain is that you DO want to get home as soon as possible. You find this place very fascinating, but the Shadows and the Nightmare Tyrant who’s taken an interest in you is something you can do without. You just wish you had something that you could fight them off with… + +No sooner does that pass through your mind when you notice something glowing under one of the beds. You cautiously check underneath it, and find a short sword. It faintly glows with a white light for a moment longer and then fades back to its normal color. + +After “playing” with the sword for a bit, you suddenly realize that you created the sword, or you at least made it appear. In fact you’ve caused quite a few things to occur just by “thinking”. It seems like every time you “wished” for help, it suddenly arrived. + +Maybe you have magical powers here or something similar, this all can’t be a coincidence. +> Wish to be back home +If you knew that it was a simple wish that could get you home, you would’ve done it a long time ago! You begin to think really hard about going back home. You close your eyes and try to visualize it. + +For a moment you think you’re succeeding, but suddenly all you begin to see is a black void and Shadow creatures. Something terribly wrong is happening. You really know it when you open your eyes and see nothing but darkness and you are being held down on some sort of smooth cold surface by Shadows and you no longer have your sword. A sinister voice emanates from the darkness and you’re completely paralyzed with fear. + +“Ah, yes I knew it would only be a matter of time before you tried that to get home. Fortunately I made plans ahead of time to prevent that from occurring. Of course, in a way you ARE home. Your new one anyway. Soon you’ll be one of us… after a few alterations of course.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You pulls away from the Shadow and hold on as tight as you can, hoping that somehow the horse can outrun these creatures, or at least hoping that someone can help you. + +No sooner have you thought this, when suddenly you hear a sizzling sound followed by an ear piecing screech from above. The Shadow trying to rip you from the horse has been struck down by some sort of bolt of lightning. Soon another Shadow is destroyed in the same way + +“Cursed Shadows! Just hold on to the reins boy and keep moving! There’s a town up ahead where you’ll be safe!” you hear someone yell at you. You notice some trees and rocks along side of the road, but no people. Whoever it is helping you must be well hidden. + +Eventually all the Shadows following you have been destroyed by bolts and you make it into the town, though you aren’t sure of what to do or go next, but for now you’re just glad to be alive. (Your horse has even clamed down a bit) + +While you just temporarily rest on top of your horse, you hear the voice of the person who helped you again. + +“Ah there you are, glad to see you’re alright. What’s a boy like you traveling by himself in these dangerous times anyway? The wretched Nightmare Tyrant’s minions seem to be everywhere nowadays.” + +The one who’s helped you looks like a little different from what you expected, this man looks more like a warrior, but not like the knights you encountered earlier. More like a barbarian type. He’s bristling with muscles and has a large axe carried on his back. + +“You don’t look like a Wizard.” You say. +“Of course I don’t, because I’m not.” +“I thought only Wizards could cast spells.” +“Oh that lightning bolts back there? That’s thanks to this magic ring I found a long time ago. Though I think it’s out of charges, it’s useless except maybe to trade with now. Here, why don’t you take it.” He says giving you the ring. + +“Thanks. I’m supposed to be heading to the Parran Empire to get back home.” +“You live in the Parran Empire?” +“No, but they’re supposed to have Wizards there who can help me get back home.” + +You go into detail about your adventures to the barbarian; he seems a lot more surprised by your tale than the rest you’ve told have. + +“That’s some tale boy, though I have no reason to disbelieve you, given the things I’ve seen since my own travels as well as the things I have heard about the Nightmare Tyrant. His darkness has even reached my old homeland far north, though my people tend to be nomadic and the land doesn’t really contain anything of major importance. We had more problems with the usual menaces of giants and trolls more than anything else.” +“How come you’re so far from home?” +“Well as I said, my people are nomadic in nature, and I guess I’m even more so. I wanted to see other places outside of my homeland, so I traveled south to where civilization tends to thrive. I’ll most likely return one day.” + +Before you continue this conversation, you have just realized you don’t really know the route to get to the Empire. The Paladins were supposed to lead you there and now both of them are gone. You don’t know who else to ask, you’re all by yourself again and this barbarian did help you, so you give it a shot… + +“Hey, um…could you help me get to Empire? I don’t exactly know the way.” +“Me? Well, I’m not sure I’m the best person to ask, seeing as I’ve never been there either, though I’m sure that wouldn’t be too much of a problem, all I need is a few directions from someone and I could probably get there quickly…sure why not? As I said, I’ve never been to the Parran Empire lands so it wouldn’t really be a wasted trip for me, but we probably should find a room somewhere first. Also I’ll need to ask for directions. My name’s Qualan by the way.” + +Qualan rents a room for the pair of you, but he doesn’t stay, instead he says he’s going to go ask for directions and explore the town a bit, and for you to just stay in the room and not to open it for anybody. He has the key, so he can let himself in. Soon you’re alone again in a relatively barren room. It’s pretty boring in here, but you try to keep yourself occupied, namely by thinking of all the people and places you’ve encountered since you’ve been here. In fact this is the first time you’ve actually got the chance to reflect on this little adventure. You also wonder about your Mom, she’s going to be worried about you and probably have the police looking all over for you! And when you finally do return, what will you tell her? + +You don’t know, but what you do know for certain is that you DO want to get home as soon as possible. You find this place very fascinating, but the Shadows and the Nightmare Tyrant who’s taken an interest in you is something you can do without. You just wish you had something that you could fight them off with… + +No sooner does that pass through your mind when you notice something glowing under one of the beds. You cautiously check underneath it, and find a short sword. It faintly glows with a white light for a moment longer and then fades back to its normal color. + +After “playing” with the sword for a bit, you suddenly realize that you created the sword, or you at least made it appear. In fact you’ve caused quite a few things to occur just by “thinking”. It seems like every time you “wished” for help, it suddenly arrived. + +Maybe you have magical powers here or something similar, this all can’t be a coincidence. +> Don't wish +Something instinctively tells you that “It’s not going to be that easy.” You remember back when the Shadows first tried to take you, you wished you were back home and it didn’t happen, you ended up in the middle of nowhere. There’s no telling where you might end up if you tried it again. So far “little wishes” have worked for you, so you’re going to stick with the current plan of getting the Empire wizards to send you home and use your “powers” only when necessary. + +You eventually fall asleep with your new sword by your side, you’re awakened by Qualan in the morning. + +“Hey, get up boy let’s get going… where’d you get that sword from?” +“Huh? Oh…well uh I found it under the bed.” +“Sheesh, I know I’ve forgotten a few things in my travels, but never a weapon. That’s just unthinkable. You probably should have a sword anyway, I’m not sure how it is where you’re from, but a boy your age would definitely be somewhat familiar with a weapon of some sort by now in my tribe.” +“Where were you?” +“I told you, I was getting directions to the Parran Empire, and exploring the town a bit…well okay I was exploring the tavern, in fact I eventually explored the floor of it. Oh well at least nothing was stolen, not that I have anything left after spending it all at the tavern…hey you still have that silver ring? I think I might need to trade for a horse. I can’t be accompanying you efficiently if I’m not on horseback as well.” + +After giving Qualan the ring back, and uses it to buy a broken down nag, you and he are on your way again. You and he talk during your uneventful travel; he’s very fascinated with your world as you are with all the adventures he’s been on. Soon you come to a split in the path. You ask which way to go. + +“Well, both of these paths will eventually lead to the Empire, but one of them is a lot quicker. There’s a catch though, back in town I was told the quicker path is currently under complete control of a vicious goblin tribe. Apparently they’re attacking anyone that goes through there. I heard The Empire was supposed to send in some soldiers to take care of the problem, but the Nightmare Tyrant is a more immediate and dangerous threat and as such they’re concentrating their efforts on him instead. The second path is supposed to be safe and clear, but it’ll take longer. We’ll probably have to make a camp somewhere, before we even reach the Empire. + +“Let’s take the safer route.” You say. +“Alright, but keep alert anyway, just because I heard it was safe doesn’t necessarily mean it is.” + +You and Qualan travel further with no unexpected encounters. When it begins to get dark you half expect Shadows to come attacking you out of the sky again, but this is a natural darkness, night is merely falling. Qualan suggests that you should make camp and you do so. You and he eat the provisions he bought from town. He comments on how bad they are and next time he’s just going to stick to hunting in the wilderness for food next time. + +You’ve never slept outside before, so like most things in this adventure it’s a brand new experience for you. One that makes you really wonder why some of the kids at school have said they like camping so much. You’re definitely a city boy! + +After trying to get comfortable several times and not worry about bugs crawling on you, you fall asleep, but not for long. A noise awakens you and Qualan. The horses seem agitated as well. + +“Qualan?” +“Shhh! I heard it too…be prepared for anything.” He says standing up and readying his axe. + +Soon a large figure lurches out from the darkness. It’s another Shadow, but not like any of the ones you’ve encountered before, this one is bigger for one thing, almost as if its armored and for another it looks vaguely familiar. The black figure is hard enough to make out by the campfire, but when it speaks you know immediately who it is. + +“At last I’ve found you boy.” +“Salzat?” +“You know this…thing?” Qualan asks getting ready to attack. +“Briefly, he used to be one of the Paladins sent with me to take me back to the Empire.” You reply backing away. +“And I still have to waste my time escorting you around!” Salzat hisses. “Come boy, my new master the Nightmare Tyrant wants to see you, it would be unwise to keep him waiting, the agony will only be much worse the more you resist…” +“Take the horse and ride boy! I’ll dispatch this monster!” Qualan shouts at you. + +You’re sick of running at this point, and Qualan needs your help. Besides you figure you can actually do something now with your new sword, which you draw out. + +“Boy, I told you to get out of here!” Qualan exclaims as he defends an attack from Salzat. +“Ha ha! Good. Saves me the trouble of chasing down the little fool!” Salzat laughs. + +While he’s laughing you take the opportunity to stab at him. He attempts to dodge, but you manage to slightly wound his leg. This causes him to bellow in a hissing shriek. Qualan hits him with his axe, but it doesn’t effect Salzat like your attack did. Salzat retreats back a bit to recover. + +“YOU MISERABLE LITTLE WHELP! YOU HURT ME!” he says before getting ready to charge again. + +“Boy, your sword can hurt it, but I’m better with wielding such a weapon, toss it to me and I’ll dispatch this creature!” Qualan quickly says bracing himself for another attack. +> Toss Qualan your sword +Following Qualan’s advice that he would do a better job at fighting Salzat you toss the sword to him and he meets Salzat’s charge. + +Qualan lands what would look to be a powerful blow, but instead nothing happens! In fact you’ve noticed that it’s stopped glowing. Salzat winces a bit from the hit, but he doesn’t stop his own attack which fells Qualan. The sword flies out of his hand and disappears into thin air. It would appear that without your belief in yourself, the sword lost not only its power, but ceased to exist altogether. You attempt to wish for another, but you’re too panicked to think straight and you’re having a hard time concentrating altogether. Soon Salzat’s hulking shadow form has grabbed you, and your mind is filled with nothing but terror. He carries you back to the Nightmare Tyrant. You soon join Salzat and the rest in everlasting shadowy torment.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Something instinctively tells you that “It’s not going to be that easy.” You remember back when the Shadows first tried to take you, you wished you were back home and it didn’t happen, you ended up in the middle of nowhere. There’s no telling where you might end up if you tried it again. So far “little wishes” have worked for you, so you’re going to stick with the current plan of getting the Empire wizards to send you home and use your “powers” only when necessary. + +You eventually fall asleep with your new sword by your side, you’re awakened by Qualan in the morning. + +“Hey, get up boy let’s get going… where’d you get that sword from?” +“Huh? Oh…well uh I found it under the bed.” +“Sheesh, I know I’ve forgotten a few things in my travels, but never a weapon. That’s just unthinkable. You probably should have a sword anyway, I’m not sure how it is where you’re from, but a boy your age would definitely be somewhat familiar with a weapon of some sort by now in my tribe.” +“Where were you?” +“I told you, I was getting directions to the Parran Empire, and exploring the town a bit…well okay I was exploring the tavern, in fact I eventually explored the floor of it. Oh well at least nothing was stolen, not that I have anything left after spending it all at the tavern…hey you still have that silver ring? I think I might need to trade for a horse. I can’t be accompanying you efficiently if I’m not on horseback as well.” + +After giving Qualan the ring back, and uses it to buy a broken down nag, you and he are on your way again. You and he talk during your uneventful travel; he’s very fascinated with your world as you are with all the adventures he’s been on. Soon you come to a split in the path. You ask which way to go. + +“Well, both of these paths will eventually lead to the Empire, but one of them is a lot quicker. There’s a catch though, back in town I was told the quicker path is currently under complete control of a vicious goblin tribe. Apparently they’re attacking anyone that goes through there. I heard The Empire was supposed to send in some soldiers to take care of the problem, but the Nightmare Tyrant is a more immediate and dangerous threat and as such they’re concentrating their efforts on him instead. The second path is supposed to be safe and clear, but it’ll take longer. We’ll probably have to make a camp somewhere, before we even reach the Empire. + +“Let’s take the safer route.” You say. +“Alright, but keep alert anyway, just because I heard it was safe doesn’t necessarily mean it is.” + +You and Qualan travel further with no unexpected encounters. When it begins to get dark you half expect Shadows to come attacking you out of the sky again, but this is a natural darkness, night is merely falling. Qualan suggests that you should make camp and you do so. You and he eat the provisions he bought from town. He comments on how bad they are and next time he’s just going to stick to hunting in the wilderness for food next time. + +You’ve never slept outside before, so like most things in this adventure it’s a brand new experience for you. One that makes you really wonder why some of the kids at school have said they like camping so much. You’re definitely a city boy! + +After trying to get comfortable several times and not worry about bugs crawling on you, you fall asleep, but not for long. A noise awakens you and Qualan. The horses seem agitated as well. + +“Qualan?” +“Shhh! I heard it too…be prepared for anything.” He says standing up and readying his axe. + +Soon a large figure lurches out from the darkness. It’s another Shadow, but not like any of the ones you’ve encountered before, this one is bigger for one thing, almost as if its armored and for another it looks vaguely familiar. The black figure is hard enough to make out by the campfire, but when it speaks you know immediately who it is. + +“At last I’ve found you boy.” +“Salzat?” +“You know this…thing?” Qualan asks getting ready to attack. +“Briefly, he used to be one of the Paladins sent with me to take me back to the Empire.” You reply backing away. +“And I still have to waste my time escorting you around!” Salzat hisses. “Come boy, my new master the Nightmare Tyrant wants to see you, it would be unwise to keep him waiting, the agony will only be much worse the more you resist…” +“Take the horse and ride boy! I’ll dispatch this monster!” Qualan shouts at you. + +You’re sick of running at this point, and Qualan needs your help. Besides you figure you can actually do something now with your new sword, which you draw out. + +“Boy, I told you to get out of here!” Qualan exclaims as he defends an attack from Salzat. +“Ha ha! Good. Saves me the trouble of chasing down the little fool!” Salzat laughs. + +While he’s laughing you take the opportunity to stab at him. He attempts to dodge, but you manage to slightly wound his leg. This causes him to bellow in a hissing shriek. Qualan hits him with his axe, but it doesn’t effect Salzat like your attack did. Salzat retreats back a bit to recover. + +“YOU MISERABLE LITTLE WHELP! YOU HURT ME!” he says before getting ready to charge again. + +“Boy, your sword can hurt it, but I’m better with wielding such a weapon, toss it to me and I’ll dispatch this creature!” Qualan quickly says bracing himself for another attack. +> Defeat Salzat yourself +You have to defeat Salzat yourself. It was your thoughts that created the sword, by your own sheer force of willpower. If you believe in yourself, you’ll be able to defeat Salzat, you know you will. + +Salzat predictable charges at you, Qualan attempts to stop him, but once again his axe does nothing and Salzat smashes him in the face with his free hand, knocking him out. He’s about to finish him off with his sword, but you prevent this from happening by stepping in and parrying the blow. For some reason, you feel much stronger than you ever have before. + +“Whelp! You will be sustenance for the Shadow Tyrant!” Salzat hisses and tries to break through your defense, but your confidence and sudden increase in strength don’t make you fear his threats or him. Your sword glows brighter causing the red dots that are Salzat’s eyes to close in blinding pain. While he temporarily shields them, you press your advantage and strike Salzat multiple times causing him to unleash an unholy scream before dissipating. + +You’re breathing hard after the battle, and you sit down to catch your breath. Qualan’s regaining of consciousness makes you jump again. + +“Hey hold on there, it’s just me! Wow, that really hurt.” Qualan says holding on to his face. “Looks like you took care of him yourself. In my tribe you’d now be a man with all the benefits and respect as such. For defeating such a powerful creature you might even be considered an honorary great warrior. Here, take this.” + +Qualan gives you some sort of strange tooth. Its larger than a humans that’s for sure. + +“What’s this?” +“A troll tooth. It’s customary to take a trophy, but seeing as you fought a shadow, there is none, but you should have something to symbolize your hard earned victory, as well as possibly saving my life. Also know that you have made a permanent friend with no only me, but my entire tribe if you should ever meet them. It is our way.” + +You are filled with pride and pocket the tooth, while thanking Qualan. + +The remainder of the night is uneventful. The next day, you and Qualan bump into a regal looking carriage making its way in the opposite direction. The driver looks annoyed that you’re even on the same road as him, let alone in the way. + +“Hey you peasants! Get out the way! The Archmage is on very important business in the name of the Parran Empire!” + +Your eyes immediately light up in hope. + +“A wizard?” you ask. +“An ARCHMAGE, peasant boy! And I told you and your barbarian servant to get out of the way!” +“Servant? I’m NO ONE’S servant! I am his friend!” Qualan raises his voice in a tone which makes the driver flinch a little. +“Erm…well yes, but I still need you two to…” +“Driver, what is the hold up here?” an old wild haired man in a robe asks getting out of the carriage. “Who are you lot?” he then asks you. + +“You’re a wizard from the Empire! And I need to get home! You have to help me!” you blurt out handing the Archmage the note that the Captain gave you. He reads it and nods as you tell him the rest of your tale. +“Hmm, you are a very lucky little boy. Not many get away from the Nightmare Tyrant, you must have a strong will.” The Archmage says inspecting you. “I sense that your sword isn’t natural, yet I can’t determine its magical origins. Yes, you DO have some sort of power boy. Ever thought of being a wizard? We could use someone like you against the Nightmare Tyrant.” + +For a brief fleeting moment your adventurous side almost jumps at the chance. But still, you don’t want your Mom to worry about you anymore than she probably is right now. You still don’t know what you’re going to tell her. + +“No, I want to go home.” You reply. +“Very well, we can’t have people here that don’t want to be. I can teleport you back home right now if you wish. I myself don’t like to use it for travel unless it’s absolutely an emergency. I still prefer to take life slower and travel the old fashioned ways, of course that’s not really an option for you being from another dimension and all.” +“I can go right now?” +“Oh sure I can get you there real quick. And don’t worry; the Nightmare Tyrant won’t be able to ever steal you from your home world again. He’s only able to perform that feat of interdimentional kidnapping once on a person. Hence the reason why he was so eager to get his hands on you before you could escape again. Now the problem is once I start to open the portal, you need to get going fast. It will undoubtedly alert the Nightmare Tyrant to this location where upon he’ll try one last time to capture you. I’ll certainly help, but this spell will be requiring most of my energy and concentration so hopefully your barbarian friend here will be able to fend off some of the Shadows. Since I’m afraid my driver will most likely be hiding under the carriage the entire time.” +“Hey!” the driver says. +Qualan steps forward and nods. +“Of course. I will do everything in my power to help him get home.” +“Okay then, but that axe isn’t going to do much good, let me enchant it first…there. Now let’s begin.” + +The Archmage begins to chant while you and Qualan wait for the spell to take effect. The driver looks nervous the whole time, but he hasn’t hid under the carriage yet. + +The wind begins to blow strongly and once again that familiar darkness begins gather once again. This time it’s followed a stronger sense of malevolence. + +You suddenly hear a menacing voice in your mind. + +“Boy, did you think you could escape from me? I am the Nightmare Tyrant! Destroyer of life! Your power will be mine and you WILL serve me!” +“NO!” you scream out in defiance! +“Don’t listen! It’s the Tyrant’s way of trying to get inside your head! Don’t let him do it!” the Archmage briefly shouts and then continues his hand gestures. + +Shadow creatures come descending out of the sky screeching horribly as usual. Qualan stands in front of you ready to take the brunt of the attack. + +“Almost done!” the Archmage shouts. + +The shadows swarm your position, and you and Qualan attempt to fight them off. Your sword fortunately is glowing brightly, which at least keeps them from overwhelming you. While you and Qualan are fighting them off, the Nightmare Tyrant’s voice booms from out of nowhere and clearly audible to everyone. + +“FOOLS! Attack the wizard! He’s the one who can create the escape portal!” +“Too late Tyrant! Quick! Get in the portal!” the Archmage commands as a blue portal opens up and he discharges lightning bolts from his fingers to destroy some Shadows attacking him. +“Go! We’ll be alright! We can hold them off!” Qualan adds. + +You’re sort of worried about Qualan, but you realize you have to go now. The Nightmare Tyrant bellows again to his minions about not letting you escape as you run for the portal and entering it. + +You are enveloped by blackness followed by swirling colored lights. Your sword also flickers in and out of existence. It’s all so strange and overwhelming to you that you pass out. + +“Hey! I told you breakfast is ready, are you going to sleep all day?” you hear your Mom call from downstairs as you awaken in surprise. + +You quickly look around your room and nothing looks out of place. Your Mom hasn’t seemed to notice that you were gone, in fact it doesn’t look like you even left. + +Was it all a dream? + +You shake your head trying to decide if it was, then you notice a big tooth on the floor next to the toys you set up yesterday. The troll tooth and oddly its right next to a barbarian figure. Strangely it has a pleased look on their faces. + +It wasn’t a dream. It was real. Created by the power of your own imagination. You decide you’ll keep this information to yourself though, since nobody would ever believe it! + +You had an interesting adventure, but you’re glad to be home you think as you go downstairs to eat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The sooner you’re out of this place the better, so you request to be escorted back to the Empire where their wizards can send you back home. + +“Very well, I’ll send Paladins Salzat and Lakri with you, along with an official letter explaining your situation. Good luck and may you return home without any ill-fated encounters.” The Captain says handing you the letter for safe keeping. + +You are presented to Salzat and Lakri who are explained their mission. Salzat doesn’t look pleased; in fact he gets angry and exclaims his skills would be better put to use fighting the Nightmare Tyrant and other evil creatures, not looking after a child. Lakri on the other hand looks relieved. After the Captain shouts him down and tells him to obey orders, Salzat grumbles and gets on his horse. Lyssia puts you on your own horse, you’ve +never ridden one before, but she assures you that these are the best trained horses in the Empire and will serve you well. You’re told you should reach the Empire in a few days. + +Soon you’re off with your new travel companions They couldn’t be more opposite. Salzat is a mean looking man with scars all over his face who barely speaks to you, but his armor is impeccably clean and well taken care of. It even has a shine to it, almost as if it was brand new. (He doesn’t seem to wear a helmet though, perhaps that might explain all the scars) Lakri on the other hand is much kinder and talkative to you. His armor looks like its seen better days though. It’s metal that looks hastily welded together, badly dented and even showing signs of rust! Unlike Salzat his suit of armor has a full face helmet which he’s wearing right now and Salzat has chosen to taunt him about. + +“Lakri, why are you wearing that thing? We aren’t even going into battle you coward! I swear I don’t know how any of you can see in those things anyway. I need to be able to swivel my head as quick as possible so I can see the next enemy I have to slay!” +“Leave me alone Salzat! I like to make sure I’m protected! I don’t want to end up all scarred and ugly like you! I intend on getting married one day!” Lakri sputters. +“Feh! I don’t need to look pretty; my DEEDS will win the hearts of damsels!” + +“How did you guys become Paladins?” you ask. Surprisingly Salzat answers your question right away. + +“Well unlike Lakri here, I didn’t have royal family connections. I worked my way up through the ranks and went through special training so that I could become a weapon against evil and serve the Empire. If I could wipe out all the evil in this world myself, I would not hesitate to do so. There is no greater deed than to serve the cause of good and righteousness and right now my talents are going to waste escorting you!” +“Yes, well I for one am glad for the break from battle. This is a nice change of pace than fighting trolls, shadows and other such nastiness. I wasn’t really looking forward to going to those ruins the Captain mentioned either. Sounded dangerous.” Lakri says. +“Yeah, well we know you’re a coward anyway, and a disgrace to the Paladin name.” +“I’m not a coward! I…just want to live alright? I mean is it so wrong that I prefer my life to not be at risk every five minutes?” + +“Why did you become a Paladin, if you don’t like to fight?” you ask. +“Oh, that’s a long story…let’s just say my Dad wanted me to.” +“But you’re a grown up, shouldn’t you just be able to do what you want now?” +“Ha ha! You think just because one grows up, you aren’t subjected to being told what to do by your parents? Guess again. Ah well, perhaps you have less demanding parents. You must certainly like them, if you wanted to get home so quickly to see them again.” + +Before you can answer, Salzat suddenly looks up in the sky and draws his sword. + +“Shut up! I sense something…” + +Suddenly the sky grows considerably darker within only a few seconds and screeching can be heard from above. Dark winged creatures begin to descend from the sky + +“SHADOWS!” Lakri shouts. +“Alright! And here I thought I wasn’t going to get to vanquish evil today! Come on and be destroyed foul creatures!” Salzat laughs. + +At this point Lakri and Salzat show their differences again. Lakri panics to the point that he fumbles and drops his weapon before yelling that you all should make haste to escape. Salzat on the other hand turns to face the winged Shadows. You don’t see how he can possibly fight them all himself though. +> Help Salzat +You jump off your horse to grab Lakri’s sword in an effort to help Salzat who is already in the midst of battle, with the Shadow creatures who have almost completely enveloped him. + +You swing the sword, but its still a little to big and heavy for you to weld properly, you hit a few of the Shadows, but its no use, they outnumber you greatly. Soon one of them manages to deprive you of your weapon and two more snatch you up and carry you up to the sky giggling about how the Nightmare Tyrant is anxious to see you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You try to scare the little purple people much like you’ve ran after pigeons in the park, however the purple folks won’t be chased away so easily, this is their home after all, they just nimbly get out of your way and continue to pelt you with stones, which are really starting to hurt at this point, and a particularly large stone smacks you in the head knocking you out. + +When you wake up you’re nowhere near the Wizard’s house anymore, in fact you’re quite a ways outside of the village! The purple people must’ve dragged you here. As you groggily get up, you wish that someone would help you. Just then a shadow looms over you, at first you get scared again, but fortunately this one is attached to someone. You look up and see a woman dressed in leather armor, she carries a bow on her back and a sword by her side. She gives you a serious look while she grabs your hand to pick you up. You notice she has pointy ears. + +“Boy, what’re you doing out here? Don’t you know it can be dangerous out here? Do you live in that village?” she asks. +“No, I was trying to look for help there. There was a wizard who said he could help me get back home if…” +“Wizard? There wasn’t any strong magic activity detected around here boy. Where are you from?” + +You explain your story, as the woman listens intently. Much like the wizard you ran into earlier, she doesn’t seem surprised. + +“Mm, yes you are a lucky boy indeed to escape from the Nightmare Tyrant, most never even have a chance. I think you better come with me, my name’s Lyssia” +“But the wizard…” +“Trust me, you’ll be safer with me, than that so called wizard you mentioned. Sounded like a hedge wizard that was just getting you to do some grunt work that he didn’t want to do. He couldn’t help you against the shadows, let alone get you back home. I might be able to though, well the Captain might anyway. We’ll head back to my platoon’s camp.” + +You feel somewhat safer with Lyssia, not to mention she seems like she’s more readily going to help you, so you follow her. Eventually you arrive at a fairly large camp with armored knights, horses, and tents. Most of them look like they’ve been doing a lot of fighting recently and are still recovering from their wounds. When you enter the Captain’s tent, you see him looking over some maps before he looks up at you. He’s a man of average build, but his weathered and tired face shows the signs of having been in battle several times. His armor displays likewise. + +“Lyssia, you better have a good reason for why you’re bringing this boy into my presence. This is a mobile military unit; you know we can’t be coddling civilians, let alone children.” + +Lyssia explains the situation and the Captain’s attitude towards you changes to a more sympathetic one. + +“Escaping from the Nightmare Tyrant’s minions is no small feat, especially for one unprepared for such an encounter. The terror they radiate is normally enough to paralyze most with fear. You’re obviously not a battle hardened soldier to such horrors, and there’s no evidence of any magic about you. You must have an innate strong will, boy. Which is good since you’ll most likely have to deal with them again.” He says grimly. +“Again?!” you exclaim. +“Yes, unfortunately the Nightmare Tyrant isn’t fond of losing those he marks for capture. He has no doubt sent his Shadow minions to look for you. Fortunately you have us to help you now. We are a recon team for the Parran Empire, we’ve been fighting the Nightmare Tyrant for years, trying to find a weakness with little success. Though after some searching we think there may be a powerful weapon that can help us. It’s in some ruins a few days from here, or should be. One can never know for certain with old legends. Now, I have a duty to defend innocents from evil, but I also have a duty to the Empire. I simply cannot take this team all the way back to the Empire just to drop you off there where our wizards can send you back home, I have a mission to complete first. You can either stay with us and then after the mission we shall all go back together, or I shall send a couple of my men with you back to the Empire. Keep in mind the Shadows are probably looking for you and they tend to hunt in swarms, so the more people defending you, the better.” + +You really want to go back home, but you’re a little worried about not having all the protection you can. + +“Well can’t Lyssia go with me?” you ask hopefully. Lyssia smiles a bit at your request, but the Captain shakes his head. +“Sadly no. While I can certainly understand and admire your judgment of wanting her to go with you, I cannot allow her to do so, as my mission will undoubtedly require her skills. As I said, I will send to two of my men, but that is all I can spare if you decide to head back to the Empire.” +> Go with the Captain +You don’t know anything about this place and you’re in great danger, so you decide it would be best if you had as many people defending you as possible. You’d rather stay with the Captain. + +“Very well, you may stay with us, just don’t make a nuisance of yourself. We’ll also be on the move a lot, so don’t expect a high comfort level, however whenever we make camp, you’re welcome to stay in my tent. For right now though, you’ll have to leave it, I’m having a meeting with Lyssia and a couple of my knights to discuss an important plan of action. Explore if you wish, but don’t wander away from us, we’ll protect you, but we won’t baby-sit you.” + +With these words in mind Lyssia leads you back out of the tent, upon which another knight comes up to her with a message. + +“Sergeant, a man has arrived at the camp.” +“Is he hostile?” +“No, he says he was just passing through and figured maybe he could trade for supplies here.” +“Tell him to move on, this isn’t a trading post.” Lyssia says and goes back in the tent. + +Not knowing what to do next you follow the knight back to the man he was talking about. When you see him, he looks raggedy, but well equipped. He a sword by his side and his leather armor looks more like a patchwork taken from several other suits. The most notable feature is the big backpack on his back. You wonder if he’s an adventurer. + +“Alright you, move on, this isn’t a trading post.” The knight repeats to the visitor. +“Okay, okay, I’ll go. But can’t I just rest here for one minute? I’ve been walking a lot and it would be nice to at least know I’m safe for just a moment.” +“…well okay, but make it quick, and stay on the outskirts of the camp.” The knight says and leaves. You continue to examine this traveler, who immediately knows you are. +“Well, how come you get to stay here? Army camps aren’t known to house children.” He asks while sitting down on a nearby log. + +You explain your situation to this adventurer, and once again you get an unsurprised look from your listener. + +“Got the impression you weren’t from around here. I somehow could sense it. I always had that ability; it’s come in handy a lot. But yes, the Nightmare Tyrant is very bad news; you would do well to leave this world as quickly as you can, no doubt Shadows are already on their way.” +“Well I got this army to protect me!” you exclaim. +“Perhaps, but you said it will be awhile before they return to the Parran Empire where you can get properly transported back to your world, in the meantime they WILL be attacked by not just Shadows, but also by whatever they come across in their mission. Tis a long time to put yourself at risk. Not to mention I see a lack of magic in this camp, I wonder about their chances against Shadows if the Nightmare Tyrant unleashes his full power in order to re-capture you.” + +You’re almost sorry you started talking to this man, within a few seconds he’s managed to worry you all over again. Here you were thinking that you were going to be nice and safe. + +“But…but…well what should I do?” +“Well, if we were back in Null, I could probably get you back home really quick…” + +Before the Adventurer can finish you interrupt. + +“Null?” +“Oh, that’s where I live. It used to be a great city of fantastic magical power a long time ago, but it was destroyed by its own petty bickering. The powerful wizards there began to argue among themselves, factions were drawn and the entire city along with several miles around it went up in a big ball of flame. It was a terrible tragedy that could’ve been avoided, but there was an interesting effect of the aftermath of it though.” +“What happened?” +“Well, no magic works there now, hence the name Null. Powerful wizards can’t get a simple cantrip to work there, let alone a spell. Even the Nightmare Tyrant’s minions can’t go there. Still, it’s far from safe. Lots of the Forsaken live there.” +“Who are the Forsaken?” +“Oh they’re the unlucky folks who actually managed to survive the catastrophe. Not all of them bad, but understandably such a powerful magic disaster had an effect on most of their bodies as well as their minds.” + +While this is all very fascinating, you still don’t see how this helps you exactly. + +“While this is all very fascinating, I still don’t see how this helps me exactly. I mean if no magic works there, how can I get home? And why would you want to live in such a place anyway it sounds dangerous.” + +The Adventurer moves closer to you and looks around before speaking. + +“Okay, because I can sympathize with being in a tough position, I’ll tell you a little secret. Magic DOES work there, but only in one area and it’s only a place I know about as far as I know. There’s a deep, but small underground dungeon in Null where magic seems to work, I know because that’s where I live! I stumbled upon it completely by accident when I was exploring Null. Apparently one of the many trinkets that I had acquired in the past was a key of some sort. It began to glow and then the wall opened up the way for me. Pure random dumb luck. So I went in and discovered that entire section runs on magic or something like it at least. There are some sort of contraption that if you sit down in and visualize with clarity, your wish will come true! I tried it a few times and it was nice, but I’m a wanderer at heart and as such I couldn’t just spend the rest of my days wallowing in eternal paradise, plus I was always leery that something bad might happen if I over used the contraption for greed. However I did see it as a good place to make my home away from the road. In fact I use this magic chair to quickly travel to towns and other cities, of course it’s only one way, but at least it shortens the trip somewhat. You could probably use the chair to return home. Even if it doesn’t work, I could always take you to the Parran Empire to get you back home. It would still be quicker and safer than traveling with an army that has to complete some mission before it can back home. Who knows what responsibilities and dangers it might incur along the way? Think also, in Null, you wouldn’t be attacked by Shadows either. It’s up to you though, but choose quickly because I have to be leaving soon.” +> Go with the Adventurer +You have to admit, even though you want to go back home, part of you really likes it here. Null sounds interesting and anyplace where the Shadows can’t get you sounds even better. The Adventurer seems trustworthy enough, but you still hope you’re making the right decision. + +“Okay, I’ll go with you.” you say a bit hesitantly. +“Alright, let’s get going, we still have a quite a trip ahead of us.” + +You and the Adventurer leave the military camp and set off on your journey. The Adventurer explains that you’ll probably reach Null in a couple of days, but that you still shouldn’t worry too much about Shadow attacks, since the anti-magic effects from Null are also in the desert wasteland surrounding the ruined city. + +As you travel further, you find that the Adventurer is quite talkative. He speaks about his many journeys, he also mentions briefly of why he chose his “profession” which was mainly because he was bored living in the small village where he was born. When you reach the desert you see a big ruined city far in the distance. You also notice night is starting to fall as it’s starting to get dark, though it seems to have come on all of a sudden. The Adventurer has noticed it too and he begins to go for his weapons. + +“It’s not supposed to get dark that quick…The Nightmare Tyrant! Quick! Run towards Null, the anti-magic field gets stronger the closer we are to it!” + +You and the Adventurer begin to run and suddenly you hear screeching behind you, and you turn your head to see Shadows coming out of the sky to capture you. However, they seem to almost be flickering in and out of existence. The unnatural darkness is also being affected bizarrely, since its still “day” in front of you and then complete “night’ behind. Eventually you and the Adventurer outrun the Shadows and the darkness, as they both are unable to withstand the sheer anti-magical forces emanating from Null. After some angry screeching the Shadows retreat back to where they came, while you and the Adventurer take a breather. + +“See? Told you they can’t get you here. Whew, running in this hot desert is tiring. Let’s rest here and continue on tomorrow. The real night will be coming soon and actually walking around in Null after night isn’t particularly a safe thing to do either, the desert is a lot securer.” + +You and the Adventurer settle down for the night, he brings out some water flasks from his backpack and gives you one. You drink it all up and it’s soon empty, but you still wish you had a lot more. + +“Hey, don’t drink all of it! We have to conserve it…wait, I know that flask doesn’t hold that much water.” He says in confusion as you continue to drink what seems to be an endless supply of water in the flask. When you’ve truly satisfied your thirst the Adventurer takes the flask and attempts to look in it and shake it and finds there’s no more water in there. + +“Okay how did you do that?” +“How did I do what?” +“You drank enough for two flasks! These aren’t bottomless canteens of everlasting water either and even if they were they wouldn’t work due to the anti-magic here. So I’d like to know HOW you did that.” + +The Adventurer is looking at you suspiciously, almost as if you could possibly be dangerous. You stutter and fumble with an explanation mainly because you don’t even know. + +“I…I don’t know…I just wished I had more water…I was really thirsty…” you reply a bit worried. He looks at you for a moment longer and then speaks again. +“Try to wish for a chest full of gold.” +“What?” +“Just do it, I want to see something.” +“Erm…okay.” + +You wish and think as hard as you can, but nothing happens. Well that’s not entirely true, you get dizzy and fall to the ground. A single gold piece appears near you though. The Adventurer picks you up as well as the gold piece, which is somewhat misshapen and uneven. + +“Hmm, so there are limits. Did you always have this ability?” +“Huh? No. We don’t have any kind of stuff like this in my world.” You say trying to keep steady. +“I’m not sure what exactly is going on, but it would appear you got some sort of weird mental powers independent of magic. I have fought monsters with similar abilities, which is why I was suspicious at first. You ability reminds me of the magic chair I was telling you about except your power can work even in this anti-magical place and it would appear it isn’t very powerful. I’d almost suggest that you could attempt to wish yourself back home, but as we’ve seen, it isn’t powerful enough to do that. Still, this is probably a good indication that the chair will be able to get you back home. Here, here’s a proper gold piece, I don’t need it. Well anyway let’s get some sleep, we should reach Null tomorrow.” + +You pocket the faultless gold coin and the both of you go to sleep. Before you do though, you reflect on this little adventure. You also wonder about your Mom, she’s going to be worried about you and probably have the police looking all over for you! And when you finally do return, what will you tell her? + +You don’t know, but what you do know for certain is that you DO want to get home as soon as possible even if you do find this place very fascinating. + +The next morning the both of you wake up refreshed and ready to carry on your journey to Null. You don’t get far, when the Adventurer senses someone is following you. You both turn around and see a figure approaching. It looks like a teenage boy, but deathly pale. The odd thing is, he’s wearing modern clothing from YOUR world. + +“Is that one of the Forsaken?” you ask +“Him? No, if it was it would probably coming from Null not towards it, not to mention it would probably be running at us trying to eat us. It also looks too human and it’s wearing strange clothing, in fact it looks more like…well your type of clothing. Friend of yours?” +“Not that I know of, I’m not friends with anyone his age.” + +He doesn’t quicken his pace; he just continues to walk steadily towards your position. When he gets close enough, you can see his face, which looks emotionless. In fact it looks like he’s staring right through the both of you. The Adventurer draws his sword, but it doesn’t look like this person is showing any sign of going to attack. In fact he just stands there looking off into space. + +“Alright, what’s your name?” the Adventurer demands. +“John…Johnny Doe…” he replies still staring into the space. “This place…it’s dead…numb…like me…” + +As odd as he is, something tells you he’s from your world. Maybe he’s another person the Nightmare Tyrant tried to capture. +> Try to help him +You step forward towards him, an action that the Adventurer doesn’t approve of at all. + +“What’re you doing?!” +“I think you’re right, I think he’s from my world. Maybe he escaped from the Nightmare Tyrant too.” +“I don’t trust him, he’s weird and in my line of work, if it’s weird more often than not, it isn’t good!” + +You ignore the Adventurer and go back to talking to Johnny, who seems to have begun to direct his attention towards you. + +“Are you from Earth?” +“Yes.” +“Did the Nightmare Tyrant bring you here?” +“Yes.” +“Did you escape like me?” +“No.” + +This answer catches you off guard, so much in fact that you don’t react in time to jump out of the way of Johnny’s grip. When he grabs your arm, you feel an instant paralyzing numbness causing you to drop immediately. When this occurs the Adventurer leaps into action and strikes Johnny, but when his sword hits Johnny’s body, it’s almost as if the paralysis crept up the sword and was inflicted upon the Adventurer as well. He falls to the ground clutching his arm and dropping his sword. Johnny follows up by merely touching the Adventurer on the head, completely immobilizing him. + +Having incapacitated the Adventurer, Johnny turns his attention back to you. + +“No magic can work here, but I can. The Nightmare Tyrant wants to see you. You must comply. Perhaps you will become one of the Shadows. Maybe you will become like me. The Nightmare Tyrant will decide. He knows best.” + +You attempt to speak, but you’re unable to. You can’t even think. + +“No more talk. No more resistance. Just dead numbness.” He says and then picks you up and begins to carry you out of the desert. Eventually when you’re out of the anti-magic field, a dark portal opens up, and Johnny delivers you to the Nightmare Tyrant.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have to admit, even though you want to go back home, part of you really likes it here. Null sounds interesting and anyplace where the Shadows can’t get you sounds even better. The Adventurer seems trustworthy enough, but you still hope you’re making the right decision. + +“Okay, I’ll go with you.” you say a bit hesitantly. +“Alright, let’s get going, we still have a quite a trip ahead of us.” + +You and the Adventurer leave the military camp and set off on your journey. The Adventurer explains that you’ll probably reach Null in a couple of days, but that you still shouldn’t worry too much about Shadow attacks, since the anti-magic effects from Null are also in the desert wasteland surrounding the ruined city. + +As you travel further, you find that the Adventurer is quite talkative. He speaks about his many journeys, he also mentions briefly of why he chose his “profession” which was mainly because he was bored living in the small village where he was born. When you reach the desert you see a big ruined city far in the distance. You also notice night is starting to fall as it’s starting to get dark, though it seems to have come on all of a sudden. The Adventurer has noticed it too and he begins to go for his weapons. + +“It’s not supposed to get dark that quick…The Nightmare Tyrant! Quick! Run towards Null, the anti-magic field gets stronger the closer we are to it!” + +You and the Adventurer begin to run and suddenly you hear screeching behind you, and you turn your head to see Shadows coming out of the sky to capture you. However, they seem to almost be flickering in and out of existence. The unnatural darkness is also being affected bizarrely, since its still “day” in front of you and then complete “night’ behind. Eventually you and the Adventurer outrun the Shadows and the darkness, as they both are unable to withstand the sheer anti-magical forces emanating from Null. After some angry screeching the Shadows retreat back to where they came, while you and the Adventurer take a breather. + +“See? Told you they can’t get you here. Whew, running in this hot desert is tiring. Let’s rest here and continue on tomorrow. The real night will be coming soon and actually walking around in Null after night isn’t particularly a safe thing to do either, the desert is a lot securer.” + +You and the Adventurer settle down for the night, he brings out some water flasks from his backpack and gives you one. You drink it all up and it’s soon empty, but you still wish you had a lot more. + +“Hey, don’t drink all of it! We have to conserve it…wait, I know that flask doesn’t hold that much water.” He says in confusion as you continue to drink what seems to be an endless supply of water in the flask. When you’ve truly satisfied your thirst the Adventurer takes the flask and attempts to look in it and shake it and finds there’s no more water in there. + +“Okay how did you do that?” +“How did I do what?” +“You drank enough for two flasks! These aren’t bottomless canteens of everlasting water either and even if they were they wouldn’t work due to the anti-magic here. So I’d like to know HOW you did that.” + +The Adventurer is looking at you suspiciously, almost as if you could possibly be dangerous. You stutter and fumble with an explanation mainly because you don’t even know. + +“I…I don’t know…I just wished I had more water…I was really thirsty…” you reply a bit worried. He looks at you for a moment longer and then speaks again. +“Try to wish for a chest full of gold.” +“What?” +“Just do it, I want to see something.” +“Erm…okay.” + +You wish and think as hard as you can, but nothing happens. Well that’s not entirely true, you get dizzy and fall to the ground. A single gold piece appears near you though. The Adventurer picks you up as well as the gold piece, which is somewhat misshapen and uneven. + +“Hmm, so there are limits. Did you always have this ability?” +“Huh? No. We don’t have any kind of stuff like this in my world.” You say trying to keep steady. +“I’m not sure what exactly is going on, but it would appear you got some sort of weird mental powers independent of magic. I have fought monsters with similar abilities, which is why I was suspicious at first. You ability reminds me of the magic chair I was telling you about except your power can work even in this anti-magical place and it would appear it isn’t very powerful. I’d almost suggest that you could attempt to wish yourself back home, but as we’ve seen, it isn’t powerful enough to do that. Still, this is probably a good indication that the chair will be able to get you back home. Here, here’s a proper gold piece, I don’t need it. Well anyway let’s get some sleep, we should reach Null tomorrow.” + +You pocket the faultless gold coin and the both of you go to sleep. Before you do though, you reflect on this little adventure. You also wonder about your Mom, she’s going to be worried about you and probably have the police looking all over for you! And when you finally do return, what will you tell her? + +You don’t know, but what you do know for certain is that you DO want to get home as soon as possible even if you do find this place very fascinating. + +The next morning the both of you wake up refreshed and ready to carry on your journey to Null. You don’t get far, when the Adventurer senses someone is following you. You both turn around and see a figure approaching. It looks like a teenage boy, but deathly pale. The odd thing is, he’s wearing modern clothing from YOUR world. + +“Is that one of the Forsaken?” you ask +“Him? No, if it was it would probably coming from Null not towards it, not to mention it would probably be running at us trying to eat us. It also looks too human and it’s wearing strange clothing, in fact it looks more like…well your type of clothing. Friend of yours?” +“Not that I know of, I’m not friends with anyone his age.” + +He doesn’t quicken his pace; he just continues to walk steadily towards your position. When he gets close enough, you can see his face, which looks emotionless. In fact it looks like he’s staring right through the both of you. The Adventurer draws his sword, but it doesn’t look like this person is showing any sign of going to attack. In fact he just stands there looking off into space. + +“Alright, what’s your name?” the Adventurer demands. +“John…Johnny Doe…” he replies still staring into the space. “This place…it’s dead…numb…like me…” + +As odd as he is, something tells you he’s from your world. Maybe he’s another person the Nightmare Tyrant tried to capture. +> Back away from him +From your world or not, something definitely isn’t right here. In fact you begin pulling at the Adventurer wishing to leave. He concurs, but attempts to warn this person to stop following. + +“Alright, Mr. Doe, now that we’ve exchanged pleasantries you need to just stop following us, before you get yourself in a whole mess of trouble.” + +The teenager doesn’t answer; he just continues walking towards you both. + +“Get behind me. I get the impression that this guy doesn’t know when to take a hint.” He says picking up a rock and throwing it at the teenager. The rock hits him squarely in the head, it seems like it should’ve knocked him out, but instead it just makes him stop and blink a few times before addressing you in a monotone voice. + +“You should not resist. You must come with me. The Nightmare Tyrant must be obeyed. He is…” + +Before Johnny can complete his sentence, the Adventurer strikes him with his sword, but a strange thing happens. The Adventurer drops his sword and falls to the ground, clutching his arm. It would seem a kind of paralysis has stricken the Adventurer. + +“RUN!” he yells trying to crawl away. + +Wasting no time, you run towards Null. Johnny pays no more attention to the Adventurer and continues to follow you, but still doesn’t quicken his pace. Whatever Johnny is, it’s obvious his own powers are in full effect here too. Probably why the Nightmare Tyrant sent him here. + +As you run, you realize you still need the Adventurer to help you get back home. You need to think of something. +> Lose Johnny in Null and then return to the Adventurer +Given Johnny’s seemingly relentless nature, it’s useless to try to reason with him, so you continue to run. He isn’t very fast so you figure you’ll be able to lose him in the ruined City. + +Soon you’ve outdistanced Johnny quite a bit, and are in the City of Null. You’re winded, but you just need to hide out here for awhile and then return to the Adventurer, you hope he’s still alright. + +Looking briefly around you try to find a big building that looks fairly intact for you to hide in, unfortunately you’re so busy trying to evade Johnny, you’ve forgotten that there are OTHER inhabitants that the Adventurer mentioned living here… + +A hideously deformed creature suddenly snatches you when you enter one of the buildings and more of them appear out of the woodwork. + +“Well what have we here? Fresh meat? Looks like we won’t be eating rats tonight!” he laughs. + +Before you can try to think of something to escape, one the Forsaken knocks you unconscious with a rock. + +Even Johnny doesn’t find you in time to hand you over to the Nightmare Tyrant.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>From your world or not, something definitely isn’t right here. In fact you begin pulling at the Adventurer wishing to leave. He concurs, but attempts to warn this person to stop following. + +“Alright, Mr. Doe, now that we’ve exchanged pleasantries you need to just stop following us, before you get yourself in a whole mess of trouble.” + +The teenager doesn’t answer; he just continues walking towards you both. + +“Get behind me. I get the impression that this guy doesn’t know when to take a hint.” He says picking up a rock and throwing it at the teenager. The rock hits him squarely in the head, it seems like it should’ve knocked him out, but instead it just makes him stop and blink a few times before addressing you in a monotone voice. + +“You should not resist. You must come with me. The Nightmare Tyrant must be obeyed. He is…” + +Before Johnny can complete his sentence, the Adventurer strikes him with his sword, but a strange thing happens. The Adventurer drops his sword and falls to the ground, clutching his arm. It would seem a kind of paralysis has stricken the Adventurer. + +“RUN!” he yells trying to crawl away. + +Wasting no time, you run towards Null. Johnny pays no more attention to the Adventurer and continues to follow you, but still doesn’t quicken his pace. Whatever Johnny is, it’s obvious his own powers are in full effect here too. Probably why the Nightmare Tyrant sent him here. + +As you run, you realize you still need the Adventurer to help you get back home. You need to think of something. +> Attempt to reason with Johnny +You remember Null is filled with dangerous creatures as well, so you wouldn’t be any safer going there by yourself and Johnny’s likely to just keep following you no matter where you go. Maybe you can use your “powers” to reason with him. + +You turn around begin to try to psychically talk to Johnny. You figure he’ll be more receptive that way. You also don’t know what you’re doing since you’ve never done this before! + +Johnny steadily approaches you as you just stand there concentrating really hard while you attempt this unusual plan. Suddenly something happens, he stops walking and your own mind is flooded with a lot of weird thoughts. + +You don’t understand all of it, but you get the impression he didn’t have a good home life in your own world. He used to “escape” to a fantasy world a lot and presumably that’s what attracted the Nightmare Tyrant. You attempt to reason with him, but the link is broken when he verbally shouts out! + +“STOP! Get out of my head! Only the Master is allowed! You MUST submit! He makes everything better! Shadows around me always. No pain, no pleasure, just nothingness…” +“Johnny, you’re from the same place I am, don’t you want to return home too?” you retort. +“…better here than what was at home…at least here I have power…and soon you will too. Isn’t that why you came here, to escape the pain?” +“No! The Nightmare Tyrant kidnapped me! I want to go back home, my Mom’s probably worried about me!” +“…mine probably forgot about me years ago…yours will too…you need to just submit…the Nightmare Tyrant makes everything better…” +“NO! I will not! In fact I want you to stop following me! I want you to leave me alone altogether! You will NOT prevent me from going home! Johnny, you’re nothing but a slave to the Nightmare Tyrant. Is that what you want? Somewhere within you, you must miss something about your home.” +“…better than home…but…” + +Once again you’ve managed to stir some sort of emotion in Johnny. Suddenly he slumps to the ground and begins to weep. You’re unsure of how to react, but you see the Adventurer staggering back towards you, which at least makes you somewhat relieved. + +“Look, you don’t have to stay here; you could return back to Earth with me, all we have to do is…” + +Johnny looks up with red eyes, but has regained his composure. + +“No. I left Earth a long time ago. This is my home now. But I see now that I am still under a cruel…guardian. No more. I want to be free… Arrgh!” + +Suddenly Johnny grips his head, and you too feel a pain inside your own. A dark malevolent voice pieces your brain. It’s the Nightmare Tyrant, somehow he’s managed to speak to the both of you from wherever he is. + +“Disobedient children! How dare you defy me Johnny! After all I have given you! Didn’t I give meaning to your pathetic life? Didn’t I become the parent you needed? If you won’t obey me willingly then I’ll just have to destroy what little free will I still allowed you to have! And YOU, oh I have special plans for you! Such power cannot be ignored and WILL supplement my own!” + +While you and Johnny fall on the ground in pain, the Adventurer scoops you up and proceeds to run with you under his arm towards Null. + +“Hang on kid! Keep fighting whatever it is you’re fighting, I’ll get you to your destination, I haven’t failed in a quest yet!” he exclaims. + +In the “real world” you fall unconscious, but in your mind you’re very much awake. It would seem you’re in some sort of dream world. You’re standing on top of a rock floating in the void of blackness. You see Johnny in the distance standing on another rock fighting off Shadows which are attempting to drag him over the edge. He’s punching them, but his fists are glowing with a white energy. + +“I won’t follow your evil commands anymore! From now on, I shall fight you with the very power you gave to me and your Shadows can’t stop me!” He shouts as he completely destroys two Shadows at the same time with one blow of his fist. While you’re watching this the Shadows have become aware of your presence and are climb over the edges of the floating rock. + +“Fight them off! Imagine yourself a powerful warrior! Or whatever you wish! The Nightmare Tyrant can’t stop you power of your mind if it’s strong enough!” Johnny shouts over to you. + +You do just that, you imagine yourself in armor with a sword. You feel your strength grow and your reflexes quicken. + +“Cool!” you say and strike at the nearest Shadow, destroying it. + +This battle continues for some time until it seems that the endless amount of Shadows have become too afraid to attack anymore. You hear the voice of the Nightmare Tyrant again. + +“FOOLS! You think you’ve won? I was just warming up! I will show you the personification of FEAR and of eternal darkness!” +“You always did talk to too much.” Johnny says and summons up a bright blinding ball of light completely enveloping the entire area. You hear an unearthly bellow as you shield your eyes from the blinding light. When you open them again, you see Johnny standing before you. + +“Is he…” +“Gone forever? No, but he won’t be bothering you ever again. Me? He will. But I’ll be even more prepared for him for the next time we meet.” +“You’re still going to stay here?” +“Yes. I meant what I said that this is my home now, and there is nothing for me back on Earth. But now I see that the Nightmare Tyrant just used me for his own purposes, to help him in his ongoing hunt for more power. I need to stay to make things right again. Maybe even destroy him once and for all. I have to try, after all the evil he’s caused and lives he’s ruined. You should of course go back home, and be thankful for what you have there. Farewell and thank you for opening my eyes.” + +Suddenly you wake up from a bed and you’re in an unusually colorful room. You see a broom sweeping by itself pass you by. Jumping up from seeing such a thing, you notice the Adventurer sitting by a table polishing his sword. + +“Now you wake up! You know I had to fight through ten Forsaken trying to eat us, with you under my arm and you didn’t even blink! Fortunately I got us here though. So, what happened to you exactly?” + +You and the Adventurer swap stories about what you both experienced in your respective journeys and you both think that each of you had the easier time of it! After showing you some of the “cool magical stuff” in his home, you’re ready to go back to your own. This entire world is very interesting, but you want to return. + +“Well, I can certainly understand that. Like I said, I’m a traveler, but I suppose even I get a longing to return home. Y’know, maybe I’ll go visit mine. My real one, not this place. They might even have forgotten all the mischief I used to cause there!” the Adventurer laughs. + +The Adventurer shows you the chair he was talking about. You instinctively feel a power coming from it. Not a magical one either, it’s the same one you have. Perhaps it was a device to enhance such abilities? Perhaps it was a secret weapon involved in the destruction of this City? You don’t know and the Adventurer doesn’t either, all you know is you’re hoping it will help you get home. + +Sitting in the thing does make you a bit nervous as it resembles an electric chair, but you know you need to calm yourself of any sort of fear and doubt if you want to get back home. You bid goodbye to the Adventurer before attempting to concentrate and he mentions he’ll stand by to help in case it looks like you’re in trouble. + +You are suddenly transported through a tunnel of blackness followed by swirling colored lights. It’s all so strange and overwhelming to you that you pass out once again. + +“Hey! I told you breakfast is ready, are you going to sleep all day?” you hear your Mom call from downstairs as you awaken in surprise. + +You quickly look around your room and nothing looks out of place. Your Mom hasn’t seemed to notice that you were gone; in fact it doesn’t look like you even left. + +Was it all a dream? + +You shake your head trying to decide if it was, then you notice a coin on the floor next to the toys you set up yesterday. A gold coin and oddly its right next to a sword wielding figure with a peculiar smile on his face. + +It wasn’t a dream. It was real. Created by the power of your own imagination. You decide you’ll keep this information to yourself though, since nobody would ever believe it! + +You had an interesting adventure, but you’re glad to be home and thankful for what you have in the real world you think as you go downstairs to eat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You don’t know anything about this place and you’re in great danger, so you decide it would be best if you had as many people defending you as possible. You’d rather stay with the Captain. + +“Very well, you may stay with us, just don’t make a nuisance of yourself. We’ll also be on the move a lot, so don’t expect a high comfort level, however whenever we make camp, you’re welcome to stay in my tent. For right now though, you’ll have to leave it, I’m having a meeting with Lyssia and a couple of my knights to discuss an important plan of action. Explore if you wish, but don’t wander away from us, we’ll protect you, but we won’t baby-sit you.” + +With these words in mind Lyssia leads you back out of the tent, upon which another knight comes up to her with a message. + +“Sergeant, a man has arrived at the camp.” +“Is he hostile?” +“No, he says he was just passing through and figured maybe he could trade for supplies here.” +“Tell him to move on, this isn’t a trading post.” Lyssia says and goes back in the tent. + +Not knowing what to do next you follow the knight back to the man he was talking about. When you see him, he looks raggedy, but well equipped. He a sword by his side and his leather armor looks more like a patchwork taken from several other suits. The most notable feature is the big backpack on his back. You wonder if he’s an adventurer. + +“Alright you, move on, this isn’t a trading post.” The knight repeats to the visitor. +“Okay, okay, I’ll go. But can’t I just rest here for one minute? I’ve been walking a lot and it would be nice to at least know I’m safe for just a moment.” +“…well okay, but make it quick, and stay on the outskirts of the camp.” The knight says and leaves. You continue to examine this traveler, who immediately knows you are. +“Well, how come you get to stay here? Army camps aren’t known to house children.” He asks while sitting down on a nearby log. + +You explain your situation to this adventurer, and once again you get an unsurprised look from your listener. + +“Got the impression you weren’t from around here. I somehow could sense it. I always had that ability; it’s come in handy a lot. But yes, the Nightmare Tyrant is very bad news; you would do well to leave this world as quickly as you can, no doubt Shadows are already on their way.” +“Well I got this army to protect me!” you exclaim. +“Perhaps, but you said it will be awhile before they return to the Parran Empire where you can get properly transported back to your world, in the meantime they WILL be attacked by not just Shadows, but also by whatever they come across in their mission. Tis a long time to put yourself at risk. Not to mention I see a lack of magic in this camp, I wonder about their chances against Shadows if the Nightmare Tyrant unleashes his full power in order to re-capture you.” + +You’re almost sorry you started talking to this man, within a few seconds he’s managed to worry you all over again. Here you were thinking that you were going to be nice and safe. + +“But…but…well what should I do?” +“Well, if we were back in Null, I could probably get you back home really quick…” + +Before the Adventurer can finish you interrupt. + +“Null?” +“Oh, that’s where I live. It used to be a great city of fantastic magical power a long time ago, but it was destroyed by its own petty bickering. The powerful wizards there began to argue among themselves, factions were drawn and the entire city along with several miles around it went up in a big ball of flame. It was a terrible tragedy that could’ve been avoided, but there was an interesting effect of the aftermath of it though.” +“What happened?” +“Well, no magic works there now, hence the name Null. Powerful wizards can’t get a simple cantrip to work there, let alone a spell. Even the Nightmare Tyrant’s minions can’t go there. Still, it’s far from safe. Lots of the Forsaken live there.” +“Who are the Forsaken?” +“Oh they’re the unlucky folks who actually managed to survive the catastrophe. Not all of them bad, but understandably such a powerful magic disaster had an effect on most of their bodies as well as their minds.” + +While this is all very fascinating, you still don’t see how this helps you exactly. + +“While this is all very fascinating, I still don’t see how this helps me exactly. I mean if no magic works there, how can I get home? And why would you want to live in such a place anyway it sounds dangerous.” + +The Adventurer moves closer to you and looks around before speaking. + +“Okay, because I can sympathize with being in a tough position, I’ll tell you a little secret. Magic DOES work there, but only in one area and it’s only a place I know about as far as I know. There’s a deep, but small underground dungeon in Null where magic seems to work, I know because that’s where I live! I stumbled upon it completely by accident when I was exploring Null. Apparently one of the many trinkets that I had acquired in the past was a key of some sort. It began to glow and then the wall opened up the way for me. Pure random dumb luck. So I went in and discovered that entire section runs on magic or something like it at least. There are some sort of contraption that if you sit down in and visualize with clarity, your wish will come true! I tried it a few times and it was nice, but I’m a wanderer at heart and as such I couldn’t just spend the rest of my days wallowing in eternal paradise, plus I was always leery that something bad might happen if I over used the contraption for greed. However I did see it as a good place to make my home away from the road. In fact I use this magic chair to quickly travel to towns and other cities, of course it’s only one way, but at least it shortens the trip somewhat. You could probably use the chair to return home. Even if it doesn’t work, I could always take you to the Parran Empire to get you back home. It would still be quicker and safer than traveling with an army that has to complete some mission before it can back home. Who knows what responsibilities and dangers it might incur along the way? Think also, in Null, you wouldn’t be attacked by Shadows either. It’s up to you though, but choose quickly because I have to be leaving soon.” +> Stick with the Captain +While this man seems to mean well, you’re still hesitant to just go wandering off with a stranger. Not that you aren’t with some already, but you know the Captain and Lyssia a lot better than this Adventurer. Also you still feel safer with more people defending you, so you decline. + +“Very well, I hope you manage to make it home safely.” The Adventurer remarks and takes his leave. + +You begin to wander around the camp looking at all the neat things. If you weren’t in so much danger and worried about getting home, you’d probably want to stay here. Still wishing to be around a familiar face, you go looking for Lyssia and hope she isn’t too busy. + +You end up finding her tent, but she’s not there. You do see a sleeping black dog though, a big one, bigger than you’ve ever seen. Scary actually, in fact it’s even scarier when it suddenly wakes up and leaps on top of you! + +“Grrrrr! What have we here? A little thief? Maybe eating your hands would teach you a lesson and I’m pretty hungry!” + +You’re so surprised by it talking; you temporarily forget that you’re in danger. + +“Y…you can talk!” you sputter. +“Of course I can talk!” it snarls before sniffing you a bit. “Snnnn…you don’t smell like you’re from around here.” +“I’m not, where I come from dogs don’t talk.” +“DOG?!” it growls gnashing its fangs. “I’m a WOLF and maybe you need to learn that lesson too!” + +Thankfully Lyssia enters at this point. + +“Black Fang, you leave him alone! He’s a guest!” she scolds. Black Fang gives you a dirty look, but backs off to his original position where he closes his eyes again + +“Thanks…he nearly ate me.” +“Oh I doubt that, I know he doesn’t seem like it, but he’s really a softy.” + +One of Black Fang’s eyes open and he makes a growl, but goes back to sleep. You begin to talk to Lyssia and ask her more about where you’re going. + +“It’s an old ruin of an ancient civilization called Zodan. I know because I found it myself while scouting, of course I didn’t explore it in great detail since I figured it would be better to have extra help, but the markings are Zodan. The Zodan are no longer around due to an ancient forgotten war that lead to their downfall, but it’s possible that remnants of their power still exists, possibly something we can use against the Nightmare Tyrant.” +“Like what?” +“Well we don’t know. It’s a chance we’re taking, but anything that might help against the Nightmare Tyrant will be a welcome relief. Many people believe his powers to be magical in nature, but they aren’t. A majority of it is purely mental hence why he is anxious to always absorb the fertile imaginations of children. The Zodan also dabbled in similar psionic activity, so maybe…” + +Suddenly a soldier comes running into the tent and you’ve just noticed how dark its gotten outside. + +“Lyssia, we’re being attacked by Shadows! They’re everywhere!” + +She instantly draws her sword and says a few words before leaving. + +“You stay in the tent! And Black Fang, wake up, you protect him!” +“Huh? Wha…grah! I have to look after this whelp?” +“DO IT!” + +Black Fang gets up and lopes over to the tent entrance and you hear the sounds of battle close by. Soon those sounds are nearly within the tent as a couple of Shadows find your location. + +“HERE! HE’S HERE!” one of them hisses before Black Fang attacks them with his teeth and claws. You wonder if he’s magical in nature since they fall and dissipate from his attacks. However, it looks as if the Shadows are determined to get you as they begin to overwhelm him as well as some of them on the top of the tent attempting to tear it open. +> Try to escape +You have to get out of here! You crawl on the ground and lift up the bottom of one side of the tent and squeeze out. Unfortunately midway through your escape the Shadows see you and quickly drag the rest of you out of the tent and swarm you. You feel a paralyzing fear overwhelm your mind and the hideous laughter of the Nightmare Tyrant fill it. + +“Now you shall join MY army!” you hear his voice say in your mind as the Shadows carry you off to his fortress.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While this man seems to mean well, you’re still hesitant to just go wandering off with a stranger. Not that you aren’t with some already, but you know the Captain and Lyssia a lot better than this Adventurer. Also you still feel safer with more people defending you, so you decline. + +“Very well, I hope you manage to make it home safely.” The Adventurer remarks and takes his leave. + +You begin to wander around the camp looking at all the neat things. If you weren’t in so much danger and worried about getting home, you’d probably want to stay here. Still wishing to be around a familiar face, you go looking for Lyssia and hope she isn’t too busy. + +You end up finding her tent, but she’s not there. You do see a sleeping black dog though, a big one, bigger than you’ve ever seen. Scary actually, in fact it’s even scarier when it suddenly wakes up and leaps on top of you! + +“Grrrrr! What have we here? A little thief? Maybe eating your hands would teach you a lesson and I’m pretty hungry!” + +You’re so surprised by it talking; you temporarily forget that you’re in danger. + +“Y…you can talk!” you sputter. +“Of course I can talk!” it snarls before sniffing you a bit. “Snnnn…you don’t smell like you’re from around here.” +“I’m not, where I come from dogs don’t talk.” +“DOG?!” it growls gnashing its fangs. “I’m a WOLF and maybe you need to learn that lesson too!” + +Thankfully Lyssia enters at this point. + +“Black Fang, you leave him alone! He’s a guest!” she scolds. Black Fang gives you a dirty look, but backs off to his original position where he closes his eyes again + +“Thanks…he nearly ate me.” +“Oh I doubt that, I know he doesn’t seem like it, but he’s really a softy.” + +One of Black Fang’s eyes open and he makes a growl, but goes back to sleep. You begin to talk to Lyssia and ask her more about where you’re going. + +“It’s an old ruin of an ancient civilization called Zodan. I know because I found it myself while scouting, of course I didn’t explore it in great detail since I figured it would be better to have extra help, but the markings are Zodan. The Zodan are no longer around due to an ancient forgotten war that lead to their downfall, but it’s possible that remnants of their power still exists, possibly something we can use against the Nightmare Tyrant.” +“Like what?” +“Well we don’t know. It’s a chance we’re taking, but anything that might help against the Nightmare Tyrant will be a welcome relief. Many people believe his powers to be magical in nature, but they aren’t. A majority of it is purely mental hence why he is anxious to always absorb the fertile imaginations of children. The Zodan also dabbled in similar psionic activity, so maybe…” + +Suddenly a soldier comes running into the tent and you’ve just noticed how dark its gotten outside. + +“Lyssia, we’re being attacked by Shadows! They’re everywhere!” + +She instantly draws her sword and says a few words before leaving. + +“You stay in the tent! And Black Fang, wake up, you protect him!” +“Huh? Wha…grah! I have to look after this whelp?” +“DO IT!” + +Black Fang gets up and lopes over to the tent entrance and you hear the sounds of battle close by. Soon those sounds are nearly within the tent as a couple of Shadows find your location. + +“HERE! HE’S HERE!” one of them hisses before Black Fang attacks them with his teeth and claws. You wonder if he’s magical in nature since they fall and dissipate from his attacks. However, it looks as if the Shadows are determined to get you as they begin to overwhelm him as well as some of them on the top of the tent attempting to tear it open. +> Look for a weapon +You would think Lyssia would have extra weapons in here tent, but if she does she’s currently using them all, because you can’t find anything! Meanwhile Black Fang is being overwhelmed by Shadows and some of them are successfully ripping open the tent. + +You wish you just had a weapon of some sort to fight them with… + +Suddenly a glowing short sword appears in your hand. You’re surprised at first, but when a Shadow comes at you from above, you waste you time in swinging your new acquired weapon at it. The moment the sword touches the shadow, it dissolves and screeches before your eyes. + +“HEY, you got a sword how about helping me out over here!” Black Fang shouts out seeing noticing your actions while still fighting off the Shadows. + +Without hesitation you help him, oddly you no longer feel any kind of fear as you strike down the Shadows. Soon you and Black Fang destroy all the Shadows around the tent, but the rest of the camp is still locked in battle and when you look up MORE Shadows start pouring from the sky. Lyssia comes running towards the both of you. + +“Quickly! We have to get out of here and head towards the Zodan ruins! The Captain says he’s going to stay behind to hold off the rest of the Shadows!” +“But…” +“Move!” + +You, Lyssia and Black Fang take off into the woods, as the sounds of battle get further behind. There are still a few Shadows in pursuit, but you manage to dispatch them. Eventually you reach an abandoned cottage where you all take refuge in for the night. + +“Okay I’m pretty sure we lost the Shadows, we’ll rest here for the night and set off for the ruins in the morning. A question for you though, how did you come across that sword?” +“I dunno, I just wished for something to fight the Shadows with and it appeared in my hand.” +“Oh yeah? You think you could think up something to get rid of ALL the Shadows? That would really help out a lot.” Black Fang says. +“Maybe I could wish myself back home…” you say before Lyssia stops you. +“No wait, don’t do that. Your abilities while obviously powerful are probably not stable. For all you know you might end up in the middle of an ocean! The power of the mind can be very dangerous. The Zodan experimented with it and they’re no longer around anymore. The Nightmare Tyrant wields mind power for evil purposes in his pursuit to conquer everything in his path. I suggest you don’t over abuse your gift. Don’t worry we will get you home eventually though.” + +You sure hope so, while you trust Lyssia, you really do want to get home. You can only imagine how worried your Mom is going to be and you really won’t know what to tell her when you get back! + +In the meantime you settle down to sleep. Lyssia does as well while Black Fang takes watch since Lyssia points out that he was sleeping all day. Fortunately the night is uneventful and when the morning comes you’re on your way. Black Fang doesn’t travel with you though; in fact he pads off into different direction. + +“Why isn’t Black Fang coming with us?” +“He’s not my pet if that’s what you think. He’s a free being allowed to come and go as he pleases, but he’ll be around. He just prefers his own company for the most part. If we get into overwhelming trouble I have complete faith he’ll be around to help. Anyway the Zodan ruins won’t take as long to get to with just us traveling there. We’ll be able to cover more ground and take paths that an army couldn’t travel through.” + +As you and Lyssia travel, you and her exchange a bit of information about each others’ respective worlds which you both find very interesting. You make a lot of progress in one day. So much that Lyssia mentions that you should reach the ruins by the next day. She says that she has orders to search the place as much as she can, and then return back to the Empire where you can get help from the wizards to send you back home. She hopes that the Captain and the rest of his soldiers are alright and will eventually reach the ruins themselves before she returns to the Empire. When night comes Black Fang makes his presence known again as you settle down to camp again. + +“I feel I should warn the both of you that we aren’t completely alone in these woods. There’s something, possibly several things running around out there. Caught a glimpse of them a couple times, but they seem unnaturally quick.” +“Shadows?” you ask. +“No, they would’ve attacked already. Plus I can smell these things when they’re close by. They might be able to stay out of sight, but they can’t hide their scent. Smells rotten.” +“I had a feeling that we were being watched, I never saw anything though.” Lyssia replies. +“They’ve been staying further away from you two. I think they’ve been watching me a lot more. They probably think I’m a greater threat…and they’re right.” +“Glad to see that you’re…” Lyssia suddenly stops. “Okay I heard that.” + +You heard it too and all three of you prepare yourselves. You also start to smell something bad like what Black Fang was talking about. Two demonic looking creatures come jumping down from the trees. One of them is much fatter than the other. + +“Well there doesn’t seem to be anymore point in hiding, I’m pretty sure we can take them anyway.” The thinner one says. +“Uh huh, yeah. Um, Jarac which one are we supposed to take back to the Nightmare Tyrant?” the fat one asks. +“Hago, you really are an idiot, sometimes I wonder how we’re even related. The boy you moron!” +“I thought the Nightmare Tyrant only had Shadows working for him.” You say out loud to Lyssia. +“Oh the Nightmare Tyrant has many working for him, boy. However it seems that a new battle front has recently opened up and he has great need of them elsewhere, but fortunately we happened to be in the area… so here we are.” +“So the Nightmare Tyrant relies on half witted demons to do his work now?” Black Fang growls. +“Hey! Only my brother is half-witted! And for what he’s going to do to you, he doesn’t need to be very smart. Enough of this talk, let’s get to it. Are you ready brother?” + +Hago doesn’t even reply he just smiles with a toothy grin and advances towards Black Fang. Jarak focuses his attention on you, but naturally Lyssia stands in front of you. + +“Run away pretty one if you value your existence, though I’d prefer if you didn’t.” Jarak says and attacks. He’s incredibly quick and manages to hit Lyssia and knock her to the ground. A quick glace sees that Black Fang is struggling with Hago. + +You need to act now, you can’t possibly fight either of the demons with just your weapon given how quick they are, but even they wouldn’t be quick enough to fight the power of your mind… +> Think of something to help your companions +You wish for something that could help Lyssia and Black Fang, and at first nothing seems to happen, but Jarek then notices something when he tries to grab you and you dodge out of the way. + +“WHAT? I should’ve caught you! No human can move that quickly, especially not a boy!” +“Jarek, I feel like something just sapped my…UGH!” Hago grunts as Black Fang claws him across the face. Lyssia also gets back up to strike Jarek across the chest. He reels backward and realizes he no longer has an advantage. + +“Our powers are gone! RUN!” Jarek shouts and runs off with Hago following behind. Black Fang pursues them. + +“Black Fang wait!” Lyssia shouts and runs after him. Not wishing to be left alone, you follow Lyssia. You have a hard time keeping up, but after a short distance she stops when she sees Black Fang sniffing around a strange gray building. There are no windows, just a single door. It’s actually quite tall; you can’t believe you never saw it before even in this forest. + +“What is this?” Lyssia asks. +“Don’t know, but the two demons ran in there. I was tempted to go in, but considering this thing just materialized out of nowhere I thought discretion might be the better idea for once. It’s completely featureless except for this small weird symbol on the door.” + +Lyssia tells you to stand back as she examines it. + +“This is Zodan! I saw these symbols in the ruins I briefly explored. We have to go in explore it If the Nightmare Tyrant’s minions are in there, who knows what secrets the Nightmare Tyrant might gain? We certainly don’t want him to get anymore powerful than he is!” + +At this point the thought of getting home is still in the back of your mind, but with all that has happened you can’t help, but be caught up in this excitement even if a lot of it has been scary. + +You all enter the building, which apparently is a lot bigger on the inside. All the rooms are lit and furnished, but again everything is a dull gray color, the furniture (Most of which looks like it comes from various time periods), the floors, the walls, all of it. Someone must’ve really liked that color. + +Black Fang easily tracks the demons by their smell; however you all can hear their voices anyway. They sound like they’re arguing with someone. When you arrive in the room where they’re located, you see strange machines and the two demons arguing with a ghostly figure. + +“What do you mean?! Teleport this place! We gotta get out of here!” Jarek shouts. +“This place isn’t your personal transportation system! I told you that this place uses up a lot of power and needs to recharge when it teleports. Not to mention you insisted on keeping this place invisible the whole time, didn’t you think that was going to use up power? You two are just going to have to wait awhile, there’s nothing I can do.” the ghost replies. +“Argh! If you weren’t a ghost already, I’d make you one! Okay Hago, check…” + +Before Jarek can give whatever order he was going to give, Black Fang and Lyssia attack. The two demons stand no chance without their enhanced speed. A couple of quick blows and both give other worldly shrieks before they burst into puffs of smoke and disappear. The ghost on the other hand just floats there observing it all. + +“Well, I’m glad they’re gone, they were really getting on my nerves. Never did like demons. Now what can I do for you?” +“What is this place exactly?” you ask. +“Oh just a relic of the past or the future depending on your outlook on life. It once was a mobile military base if you were looking for something a little more precise. Used for conquest and that sort of thing.” +“This is Zodan in nature isn’t it?” Lyssia says. +“Yes, but a fat lot good it did them, considering they aren’t around anymore, well not in the traditional sense anyway. I take it you’re not minions of the Nightmare Tyrant then?” +“Do we look like we are?” Black Fang snarls. +“Well you might, furball especially with that attitude! But the other two certainly don’t look the part, besides I know the Nightmare Tyrant turns children into Shadows. Nasty fellow. No redeeming qualities whatsoever.” +“So who are you and why are you working for the Nightmare Tyrant?” you ask. +“I’m not. I’m just a caretaker of this place and as such I’m tied to it. I can’t prevent someone from using it however they want, I’m just here to make sure it doesn’t fall into decay or get destroyed like so many of the other Zodan inventions. When the Nightmare Tyrant found this place he decided to use it to find other possible Zodan weaponry since this place can easily home in on other Zodan ruins. So far with little success as I said most Zodan equipment has lost all its power. Normally he has those mean little Shadows running around in this place chattering incessantly, but for whatever reason he put those two demons in charge. Guess he needed to reassign troops or something.” +“Hey I found a Zodan ruin not far from this forest, is that why those demons were here?” +“Yes, there was one located by me recently, but those demons aren’t like the Shadows and their minds weren’t as shall we say as sharp hence why we’re here in the middle of the forest instead of closer to the desired location. While this place is magical in nature, it was primarily designed to run on the power of the mind. The Nightmare Tyrant’s Shadows are all psionically linked to him so teleportation isn’t a problem. Those demons couldn’t focus on anything! Now you boy, I sense a great deal of mental focus in you. Your sword was created from your mind was it not?” +“Yes, it was.” +“Ah yes, I can see why the Nightmare Tyrant would want someone like you to add to his power.” +“Can this place take me home?” you ask. +“This place needs time to recharge as those demons used up much of its energy with their bumbling. However, you could probably take yourself home. This place enhances the powers of the mind. Normally I wouldn’t advise it since as I said it requires discipline, but you seem to have a natural gift at it and would probably be successful. Just visualize your home and concentrate.” + +It seems so simple! You wonder if you could’ve done it all along, but that hardly matters, since you can do it now. Lyssia puts her hand on your shoulder. + +“Well, it looks like you’ll get home quicker after all.” +“Thanks for protecting me from the Shadows and demons.” You tell her. +“Hey you helped in both battles.” She says. +“Oh and what did I do, sit around and watch?” Black Fang remarks to the both of you. + +You nearly laugh and thank Black Fang too. The Caretaker then speaks. + +“Okay, now I advise complete quiet when you attempt this. It’s better for concentration and noise won’t distract you. So your friends will have to remain quiet. I’d advise that they leave altogether, as even their random thoughts could interfere. As I said, the chaos of the mind is one of the reasons for the downfall of the Zodan. I’m a ghost so you need not worry about me.” +“Fine! Fine! I know when I’m not wanted I’ll go wait outside!” Black Fang says and lopes off. Lyssia is about to leave too, but you insist that she stay because you feel safer with her around. After seeing that you really want her to stay she does and says she’ll wish for you to get home as well. + +You sit in the middle of the room and close your eyes and concentrate. You visualize your home. You see it. You can almost feel it. You’re there, until… + +“LYSSIA!” Black Fang roars as he runs into the room. +“I told you the boy needs to concentrate and silence!” the Caretaker snaps. +“Shut up ghost! Shadows are outside! A whole mess of them!” + +Lyssia and Black Fang quickly run out of the room. Lyssia shouts at you to continue to your concentration. +> Continue to concentrate for home +You were close last time to getting home, you can’t stop now. Besides you have to do it quickly before the Shadows get inside! + +You attempt to drown out the sounds of battle outside and your concern for Lyssia and Black Fang. Its very difficult and you’re having a difficult time concentrating. You see your house, then various people you’ve encountered, then this place, then total blackness… + +“HE’S HERE! GET HIM GET HIM SSSSSS!” you hear a Shadow hiss before you are transported, but it isn’t to where you wanted… + +When you open your eyes and see nothing but darkness and you are being held down on some sort of smooth cold surface by Shadows and you no longer have your sword. A sinister voice emanates from the darkness and you’re completely paralyzed with fear. + +“Welcome to your new home and family.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wish for something that could help Lyssia and Black Fang, and at first nothing seems to happen, but Jarek then notices something when he tries to grab you and you dodge out of the way. + +“WHAT? I should’ve caught you! No human can move that quickly, especially not a boy!” +“Jarek, I feel like something just sapped my…UGH!” Hago grunts as Black Fang claws him across the face. Lyssia also gets back up to strike Jarek across the chest. He reels backward and realizes he no longer has an advantage. + +“Our powers are gone! RUN!” Jarek shouts and runs off with Hago following behind. Black Fang pursues them. + +“Black Fang wait!” Lyssia shouts and runs after him. Not wishing to be left alone, you follow Lyssia. You have a hard time keeping up, but after a short distance she stops when she sees Black Fang sniffing around a strange gray building. There are no windows, just a single door. It’s actually quite tall; you can’t believe you never saw it before even in this forest. + +“What is this?” Lyssia asks. +“Don’t know, but the two demons ran in there. I was tempted to go in, but considering this thing just materialized out of nowhere I thought discretion might be the better idea for once. It’s completely featureless except for this small weird symbol on the door.” + +Lyssia tells you to stand back as she examines it. + +“This is Zodan! I saw these symbols in the ruins I briefly explored. We have to go in explore it If the Nightmare Tyrant’s minions are in there, who knows what secrets the Nightmare Tyrant might gain? We certainly don’t want him to get anymore powerful than he is!” + +At this point the thought of getting home is still in the back of your mind, but with all that has happened you can’t help, but be caught up in this excitement even if a lot of it has been scary. + +You all enter the building, which apparently is a lot bigger on the inside. All the rooms are lit and furnished, but again everything is a dull gray color, the furniture (Most of which looks like it comes from various time periods), the floors, the walls, all of it. Someone must’ve really liked that color. + +Black Fang easily tracks the demons by their smell; however you all can hear their voices anyway. They sound like they’re arguing with someone. When you arrive in the room where they’re located, you see strange machines and the two demons arguing with a ghostly figure. + +“What do you mean?! Teleport this place! We gotta get out of here!” Jarek shouts. +“This place isn’t your personal transportation system! I told you that this place uses up a lot of power and needs to recharge when it teleports. Not to mention you insisted on keeping this place invisible the whole time, didn’t you think that was going to use up power? You two are just going to have to wait awhile, there’s nothing I can do.” the ghost replies. +“Argh! If you weren’t a ghost already, I’d make you one! Okay Hago, check…” + +Before Jarek can give whatever order he was going to give, Black Fang and Lyssia attack. The two demons stand no chance without their enhanced speed. A couple of quick blows and both give other worldly shrieks before they burst into puffs of smoke and disappear. The ghost on the other hand just floats there observing it all. + +“Well, I’m glad they’re gone, they were really getting on my nerves. Never did like demons. Now what can I do for you?” +“What is this place exactly?” you ask. +“Oh just a relic of the past or the future depending on your outlook on life. It once was a mobile military base if you were looking for something a little more precise. Used for conquest and that sort of thing.” +“This is Zodan in nature isn’t it?” Lyssia says. +“Yes, but a fat lot good it did them, considering they aren’t around anymore, well not in the traditional sense anyway. I take it you’re not minions of the Nightmare Tyrant then?” +“Do we look like we are?” Black Fang snarls. +“Well you might, furball especially with that attitude! But the other two certainly don’t look the part, besides I know the Nightmare Tyrant turns children into Shadows. Nasty fellow. No redeeming qualities whatsoever.” +“So who are you and why are you working for the Nightmare Tyrant?” you ask. +“I’m not. I’m just a caretaker of this place and as such I’m tied to it. I can’t prevent someone from using it however they want, I’m just here to make sure it doesn’t fall into decay or get destroyed like so many of the other Zodan inventions. When the Nightmare Tyrant found this place he decided to use it to find other possible Zodan weaponry since this place can easily home in on other Zodan ruins. So far with little success as I said most Zodan equipment has lost all its power. Normally he has those mean little Shadows running around in this place chattering incessantly, but for whatever reason he put those two demons in charge. Guess he needed to reassign troops or something.” +“Hey I found a Zodan ruin not far from this forest, is that why those demons were here?” +“Yes, there was one located by me recently, but those demons aren’t like the Shadows and their minds weren’t as shall we say as sharp hence why we’re here in the middle of the forest instead of closer to the desired location. While this place is magical in nature, it was primarily designed to run on the power of the mind. The Nightmare Tyrant’s Shadows are all psionically linked to him so teleportation isn’t a problem. Those demons couldn’t focus on anything! Now you boy, I sense a great deal of mental focus in you. Your sword was created from your mind was it not?” +“Yes, it was.” +“Ah yes, I can see why the Nightmare Tyrant would want someone like you to add to his power.” +“Can this place take me home?” you ask. +“This place needs time to recharge as those demons used up much of its energy with their bumbling. However, you could probably take yourself home. This place enhances the powers of the mind. Normally I wouldn’t advise it since as I said it requires discipline, but you seem to have a natural gift at it and would probably be successful. Just visualize your home and concentrate.” + +It seems so simple! You wonder if you could’ve done it all along, but that hardly matters, since you can do it now. Lyssia puts her hand on your shoulder. + +“Well, it looks like you’ll get home quicker after all.” +“Thanks for protecting me from the Shadows and demons.” You tell her. +“Hey you helped in both battles.” She says. +“Oh and what did I do, sit around and watch?” Black Fang remarks to the both of you. + +You nearly laugh and thank Black Fang too. The Caretaker then speaks. + +“Okay, now I advise complete quiet when you attempt this. It’s better for concentration and noise won’t distract you. So your friends will have to remain quiet. I’d advise that they leave altogether, as even their random thoughts could interfere. As I said, the chaos of the mind is one of the reasons for the downfall of the Zodan. I’m a ghost so you need not worry about me.” +“Fine! Fine! I know when I’m not wanted I’ll go wait outside!” Black Fang says and lopes off. Lyssia is about to leave too, but you insist that she stay because you feel safer with her around. After seeing that you really want her to stay she does and says she’ll wish for you to get home as well. + +You sit in the middle of the room and close your eyes and concentrate. You visualize your home. You see it. You can almost feel it. You’re there, until… + +“LYSSIA!” Black Fang roars as he runs into the room. +“I told you the boy needs to concentrate and silence!” the Caretaker snaps. +“Shut up ghost! Shadows are outside! A whole mess of them!” + +Lyssia and Black Fang quickly run out of the room. Lyssia shouts at you to continue to your concentration. +> Attempt to help +You can’t just abandon those who have helped you, and you wouldn’t be able to concentrate anyway. You stand up and wish for something simpler and more immediate + +Suddenly you’re wearing shiny armor and armed with a glowing repeating crossbow. + +“Hmm, didn’t expect that.” The Caretaker says as the sounds of battle start to get louder, in fact now they sound like they’re coming into the building. + +You run into the next room and Lyssia and Black Fang fighting off dozens of Shadows and more of them seem to be pouring in. You waste no time and begin shooting them with your new weapon. + +“Ha ha! Back to the void Shadow scum!” Black Fang laughs when he see you helping. +“There’s more of them coming in from the left!” Lyssia shouts and suddenly you all hear a booming voice. + +“FOOLS! You think you can stop me and take what is rightfully mine? You cannot defeat me! And YOU boy! Your powers are nothing compared to my own, its time that you see what REAL mental power can achieve!” + +Suddenly the lighting gets much dimmer, almost to the point of complete darkness. Fortunately your powers maintain their glow making you the proverbial shining beacon of light. Suddenly more Shadows pour in from the corners of the walls. You’re surrounded. However, help comes in the form of the very building you’re in… + +“Nightmare Tyrant you have attacked this structure and as I am bound to defend it, you have made yet another enemy!” the Caretaker ghost exclaims and the entire building gets brighter, blinding most of the Shadows. + +“Get ‘em while they’re weak! I’m using all the power that this structure recharged right now!” + +You, Lyssia and Black Fang destroy more Shadows than you can count, but they still keep coming. You can’t believe it. You’ve got a lot in your favor except numbers, if you just had that, maybe you could finally defeat these Shadows once and for all… + +Once again it would seem your wishes have come true. + +“Back to the void! Forward men!” a familiar voice shouts. It sounds like its coming from outside. +“That’s the Captain!” Lyssia exclaims as she strikes down another Shadow. +“Bout time we got some help here!” Black Fang growls. + +The battle is going badly for the Shadows who aren’t attacking so much as they’re trying to get away right now. The Nightmare Tyrant’s voice again is heard and filled with rage. + +“COWARDS! FIGHT OR YOU’LL SUFFER FOR YOUR FAILURE!” + +It’s no use though; even his threats can’t motivate the Shadows to victory. You can somehow sense that the Nightmare Tyrant is desperate for victory because if he can’t get you now, he won’t be able to get you ever again. Eventually all of them are defeated. You, Lyssia and Black Fang meet the Captain outside who has a handful of his original army left. + +“How did you find us?” +“Well after we beat back the first Shadow attack we regrouped and headed towards the ruins as planned. Then we saw this tall gray structure looming in the distance so we head towards it, and found more Shadows, so finding you was somewhat pure chance! Well it looks like some of you have underwent some changes…” the Captain says when he sees you with your armor, sword and crossbow. +“We’ve got a lot to discuss about this structure Captain, but first he has to use it to get home.” +“Very well, I’m interested in hearing your report Lyssia. And as for you, I wish you a safe journey home. And thank you for your help with the Shadows, you’d certainly make a good knight.” +“Yeah, you’re a natural Shadow slayer kid.” Black Fang remarks. + +After Black Fang’s uncharacteristic praising remark, you and Lyssia return to the structure where the Caretaker floats about fixing stuff. + +“Blasted Shadows. It’ll take me forever to fix this place again. Oh well, I suppose that’s what I’m here for. So, are you ready to go now? I trust the fighting is over?” + +You nod and get ready to concentrate again, but before you do, Lyssia gives you something. + +“Here, this is medal I was awarded for bravery in battle. I’ve been awarded many actually, but I feel your actions were certainly deserving of such a medal. So this is for you.” she says and then gives you the medal and hugs you goodbye. + +Cherishing the gift, you prepare for your trip home, and concentrate once again. Soon you can feel yourself being transported. + +You float through a tunnel of blackness followed by swirling colored lights. It’s all so strange and overwhelming to you that you pass out once again. + +“Hey! I told you breakfast is ready, are you going to sleep all day?” you hear your Mom call from downstairs as you awaken in surprise. + +You quickly look around your room and nothing looks out of place. Your Mom hasn’t seemed to notice that you were gone; in fact it doesn’t look like you even left. + +Was it all a dream? + +You shake your head trying to decide if it was, then you notice a medal on the floor next to the toys you set up yesterday. The medal is next to three figures: A man in plate armor, a black wolf and finally a warrior woman in leather armor and strangely they all have a look of victory in their faces. + +It wasn’t a dream. It was real. Created by the power of your own imagination. You decide you’ll keep this information to yourself though, since nobody would ever believe it! + +You had an interesting adventure, but you’re glad to be home and thankful for what you have in the real world you think as you go downstairs to eat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You would think Lyssia would have extra weapons in here tent, but if she does she’s currently using them all, because you can’t find anything! Meanwhile Black Fang is being overwhelmed by Shadows and some of them are successfully ripping open the tent. + +You wish you just had a weapon of some sort to fight them with… + +Suddenly a glowing short sword appears in your hand. You’re surprised at first, but when a Shadow comes at you from above, you waste you time in swinging your new acquired weapon at it. The moment the sword touches the shadow, it dissolves and screeches before your eyes. + +“HEY, you got a sword how about helping me out over here!” Black Fang shouts out seeing noticing your actions while still fighting off the Shadows. + +Without hesitation you help him, oddly you no longer feel any kind of fear as you strike down the Shadows. Soon you and Black Fang destroy all the Shadows around the tent, but the rest of the camp is still locked in battle and when you look up MORE Shadows start pouring from the sky. Lyssia comes running towards the both of you. + +“Quickly! We have to get out of here and head towards the Zodan ruins! The Captain says he’s going to stay behind to hold off the rest of the Shadows!” +“But…” +“Move!” + +You, Lyssia and Black Fang take off into the woods, as the sounds of battle get further behind. There are still a few Shadows in pursuit, but you manage to dispatch them. Eventually you reach an abandoned cottage where you all take refuge in for the night. + +“Okay I’m pretty sure we lost the Shadows, we’ll rest here for the night and set off for the ruins in the morning. A question for you though, how did you come across that sword?” +“I dunno, I just wished for something to fight the Shadows with and it appeared in my hand.” +“Oh yeah? You think you could think up something to get rid of ALL the Shadows? That would really help out a lot.” Black Fang says. +“Maybe I could wish myself back home…” you say before Lyssia stops you. +“No wait, don’t do that. Your abilities while obviously powerful are probably not stable. For all you know you might end up in the middle of an ocean! The power of the mind can be very dangerous. The Zodan experimented with it and they’re no longer around anymore. The Nightmare Tyrant wields mind power for evil purposes in his pursuit to conquer everything in his path. I suggest you don’t over abuse your gift. Don’t worry we will get you home eventually though.” + +You sure hope so, while you trust Lyssia, you really do want to get home. You can only imagine how worried your Mom is going to be and you really won’t know what to tell her when you get back! + +In the meantime you settle down to sleep. Lyssia does as well while Black Fang takes watch since Lyssia points out that he was sleeping all day. Fortunately the night is uneventful and when the morning comes you’re on your way. Black Fang doesn’t travel with you though; in fact he pads off into different direction. + +“Why isn’t Black Fang coming with us?” +“He’s not my pet if that’s what you think. He’s a free being allowed to come and go as he pleases, but he’ll be around. He just prefers his own company for the most part. If we get into overwhelming trouble I have complete faith he’ll be around to help. Anyway the Zodan ruins won’t take as long to get to with just us traveling there. We’ll be able to cover more ground and take paths that an army couldn’t travel through.” + +As you and Lyssia travel, you and her exchange a bit of information about each others’ respective worlds which you both find very interesting. You make a lot of progress in one day. So much that Lyssia mentions that you should reach the ruins by the next day. She says that she has orders to search the place as much as she can, and then return back to the Empire where you can get help from the wizards to send you back home. She hopes that the Captain and the rest of his soldiers are alright and will eventually reach the ruins themselves before she returns to the Empire. When night comes Black Fang makes his presence known again as you settle down to camp again. + +“I feel I should warn the both of you that we aren’t completely alone in these woods. There’s something, possibly several things running around out there. Caught a glimpse of them a couple times, but they seem unnaturally quick.” +“Shadows?” you ask. +“No, they would’ve attacked already. Plus I can smell these things when they’re close by. They might be able to stay out of sight, but they can’t hide their scent. Smells rotten.” +“I had a feeling that we were being watched, I never saw anything though.” Lyssia replies. +“They’ve been staying further away from you two. I think they’ve been watching me a lot more. They probably think I’m a greater threat…and they’re right.” +“Glad to see that you’re…” Lyssia suddenly stops. “Okay I heard that.” + +You heard it too and all three of you prepare yourselves. You also start to smell something bad like what Black Fang was talking about. Two demonic looking creatures come jumping down from the trees. One of them is much fatter than the other. + +“Well there doesn’t seem to be anymore point in hiding, I’m pretty sure we can take them anyway.” The thinner one says. +“Uh huh, yeah. Um, Jarac which one are we supposed to take back to the Nightmare Tyrant?” the fat one asks. +“Hago, you really are an idiot, sometimes I wonder how we’re even related. The boy you moron!” +“I thought the Nightmare Tyrant only had Shadows working for him.” You say out loud to Lyssia. +“Oh the Nightmare Tyrant has many working for him, boy. However it seems that a new battle front has recently opened up and he has great need of them elsewhere, but fortunately we happened to be in the area… so here we are.” +“So the Nightmare Tyrant relies on half witted demons to do his work now?” Black Fang growls. +“Hey! Only my brother is half-witted! And for what he’s going to do to you, he doesn’t need to be very smart. Enough of this talk, let’s get to it. Are you ready brother?” + +Hago doesn’t even reply he just smiles with a toothy grin and advances towards Black Fang. Jarak focuses his attention on you, but naturally Lyssia stands in front of you. + +“Run away pretty one if you value your existence, though I’d prefer if you didn’t.” Jarak says and attacks. He’s incredibly quick and manages to hit Lyssia and knock her to the ground. A quick glace sees that Black Fang is struggling with Hago. + +You need to act now, you can’t possibly fight either of the demons with just your weapon given how quick they are, but even they wouldn’t be quick enough to fight the power of your mind… +> Think of something to directly harm the demons +You immediately concentrate on something that will hurt the demons, and your sword suddenly becomes a glowing blue axe. With Jarek approaching you strike at him and score a hit. He bellows in great pain, but it doesn’t stop him from knocking you out with his quick reflexes. + +With you as no longer a threat, Jarek calls his brother to retreat. Lyssia and Black Fang attempt to pursue, but they’re not fast enough to stop the two demons from disappearing with you. + +When you wake up you’re in near total darkness with only the sinister voice of the Nightmare Tyrant with you. + +“Well it would appear my minions have successfully served me this night. I certainly hope you will serve just as well in the future.” You hear him say before the darkness completely takes you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Upon entering you see many of the villagers just sitting outside their houses doing nothing, though a couple of them are lazily plucking some sort of stringed instruments. They barely pay any attention to you at all. + +You know you’re not supposed to talk to strangers, but in this situation you don’t really feel like you have a choice, so you ask one of them for help. + +“Hey, I need some help, these shadow things attacked me…” +“Wazzat? Shadows? Shadows don’t come ‘round here boy, we’s got ourselves a wizard to protect us! If you got shadow problems, maybe you should talk to him. He’s a pretty smart guy. He’s in that nice lookin’ house over there, the one with the roof! Careful though, he’s usually in a bad mood. Argues with his wife constantly too.” The fat villager says going back to drinking whatever it is he’s drinking. + +Not knowing what else to do you head over to the wizard’s house. As you approach you can hear arguing from the inside. + +You knock on the door which is opened by a young woman dressed in a waitress like outfit. She’s pretty, but looks very tired, behind her appears an older man who doesn’t look much like a wizard at all. + +“Whadda you want kid? We ain’t buyin’ anything!” he scowls. +“Are you really a wizard? You don’t look like one.” You remark. +“That’s because he isn’t a real wizard. He’s a lazy charlatan!” the woman answers. +“Shut up Talia, I was good enough to get YOU.” +“Yeah, that’s because I was too young and naïve to know any better! I knew I should’ve married a knight!” +“Hah! And what knight would marry a serving wench like you?” +“Melcar, I don’t have time for your nonsense today, I have to go to work. Can you at least TRY to do something productive while I’m gone, like casting some cantrips to cut down the overgrowth in the backyard? Sheesh, I think I saw a nest of Furms making their homes in there and you know much I hate those little purple things! They infest everything and then you can’t get rid of them! So can you DO that one thing, if nothing else?” +“Yeah, yeah.” + +The woman throws her hands up in dismay and leaves the house, leaving Melcar and you alone. + +“So, what’s your deal kid? I know you ain’t from this backwoods village because I know everyone here and you actually look like you bathe every once in awhile. You lost or something?” + +You explain your situation to Melcar, somehow he doesn’t look surprised, but he does look a little more interested in you. + +“Hmm, sounds like the Nightmare Tyrant. He has a habit of snatching people from other dimensions and draining them to harness his power. Those shadows you encountered are what’s left of his victims. I’m not entirely sure of his methods for choosing, but I do know he only takes those with strong imaginations though. It’s probably why he prefers children since they tend to be more inclined to think up fantastic things.” You were lucky to escape from him.” +“Well how do I get back home?” + +Melcar looks at you a moment before replying. + +“You interested in doing a little yard work?” +“Uh…” +“I’m really busy with an experiment, and I just don’t have time to mess around with clearing the overgrowth in my backyard. If you do it, I think that’ll give me time to complete my experiment, as well as giving me time to look up the spell that can take you back home.” +“Well okay…” +“Good, there’s a scythe in the back. You shouldn’t have too much trouble.” + +Melcar closes his door and you walk around the back, which literally looks like a jungle. The grass is almost as high as you are and the scythe is a little too unwieldy and large for you to use properly. Soon tiny purple people appear and angrily throw small stones at you and squeak some sort of jibberish. They apparently don’t like you trying to tear up their home. + +You don’t see how you’re ever going to finish this task. +> Run back to tell Melcar +You aren’t going to mess about with a bunch of angry little purple people; you don’t know how dangerous they might be. You head back to the front of the house and knock on the door to get Melcar’s help. + +You don’t get an answer, but a short man with a long pink beard comes walking up the steps, he’s your height, but is obviously old. He reminds you of a dwarf. Maybe he is, you are in a different world after all, but the pink beard is really bizarre. There’s another taller man walking behind, but is very disheveled looking. His odor isn’t the best either as he gives off a bad smell and he isn’t even next to you. + +“Outta the way boy! I got important business with this charlatan who claims he’s a wizard!” the dwarf exclaims nearly knocking you down. +“Chargrum, are you sure this is a good idea? I mean it was only five gold…” +“ONLY FIVE GOLD? Stinky, you’ve been working for me for how long now and you’re still too dumb to figure out that nobody steals from me? You’ve truly hit an all time low in stupidity!” +“Yeah, but this guy’s a wizard…” +“He’s a charlatan! And even if he was a real wizard, it doesn’t matter because the money for once is the least of my complaints, he’s gotta pay for what he did! That blasted potion turned my beard PINK, or were you too stupid to even notice that Stinky?” +“Okay, I’m just saying…” + +Before you can react to all of this, Melcar finally answers the door and addresses you first. + +“What’s all this blasted noise? Didn’t I tell you to go clean up my backyard?” +“But there are all these mean little purple people throwing rocks at me!” you say. +“So? They’re just Furms, just stop them, shouldn’t be that hard for you.” +“Nevermind all that, I want my five gold back, look what your potion did to my beard, you charlatan!” the dwarf yells. +“Oh fer…look Chargrum, I said no refunds when I sold you the potion, besides you got what you wanted. Your beard grew a lot longer didn’t it? Don’t like it? Shave it off!” +“WHAT!? Shave off my beard? That’s madness! But no dwarf wants a pink beard! What Dwarven woman would want me like this?” +“(Sigh) Stop pretending that you’re a dwarf! You’re a Halfling that’s just trying to fool Dwarven women! And you’re calling ME a charlatan?” + +Chargrum suddenly looks around nervously and then hits Stinky for snickering. + +“Shhhh! Alright, alright, keep your voice down! Look, do you have anything to change my beard back to a proper color?” +“Maybe, but…hmm, that doesn’t look good…” + +Melcar’s statement and his eyes gazing past his porch cause the rest of you to turn around look where upon you see the sky turning jet black and dark winged creatures begin to descend from it. + +“SHADOWS!” Malcar yells at which point you, Chargrum, and Stinky all rush inside before he shuts the door. + +“What are shadows doing here? This village isn’t even of any strategic importance to the Nightmare Tyrant!” Chargrum shouts. +“He’s the Nightmare Tyrant, does he need a reason? But I’ll wager they’re looking for him.” Melcar says pointing at you. “They’ll probably try to swarm the house soon, I better prepare this place….I have to go get my spell book!” + +After Melcar runs off to go get his book, Chargrum demands and answer from you. + +“What did he mean, they’re probably looking for you?” + +You hesitantly explain yourself at which point Chargrum gets a look in his eye that makes you uncomfortable. + +“So if that’s the case, then the Shadows will probably leave after they get you, well I know how to solve this problem!” + +Chargrum advances on you. +> Run away +You run up the stairs of the house, with Chargrum in pursuit. + +“Don’t just stand there picking your nose Stinky, help me catch the little runt!” Chargrum shouts. + +You reach the second floor and run into one of the rooms locking it behind you. You turn around to see that you’re in a bedroom. Probably Melcar’s no doubt. A single window leads outside. You could escape from it, but you then remember all the Shadows are outside waiting for you in the first place, in fact you can hear their screeching surrounding the house. + +A Shadow breaks in the window just as Chargrum bashes the door open and you begin to wish you were anywhere, but here! + +No sooner have you thought that, you find yourself in front of Melcar, surprising the pair of you! From the looks of things, you’re in a basement, or lab. You know you’re underground, because you can see there is a stairway leading up and hear Chargrum’s voice coming from above. He’s screaming actually. + +“Wha…where did you come from?” Melcar asks. +“I…I dunno! I was running from Chargrum and hiding and then I wished I was someplace else and then I found myself here!” +“Wait. Why was he chasing you?” +“He was trying to throw me to the Shadows!” + +No sooner have you said that, when Stinky comes running down the stairs. + +“The Shadows are in the house and they took away Chargrum through one of the windows!” +“What?! I just erected a barrier! They shouldn’t be able to get in!” +“Well a few of them have, and Argh! Here they come!” Stinky says as some Shadows come down the stairs hissing and screeching. He quickly runs towards the both of you and behind Melcar. + +“Get behind me too, kid.” + +A few chants and Melcar unleashes a couple of electrical blasts from his fingers zapping all of the attacking Shadows. They give one last screech before disappearing. + +Melcar immediately rushes upstairs to see if there are anymore Shadows, you and Stinky follow closely behind him. After some checking, it would appear that the rest of the Shadows have been kept out and only a few managed to get in before the barrier appeared. You can still hear them still trying to get in though. + +“Whew. Okay. That should hold for awhile.” Melcar says collapsing in his chair. +“But what about Chargrum…the Shadows…they…” +“I can’t do anything. They got him and that’s it. But judging by what the kid told me he was trying to do it sounds like he got what he deserved anyway. Besides, I would’ve thought you of all people would’ve been glad to be rid of him, with the way he treated you.” +“I…guess so, but what’re we going to do now?” he asks. +“Dunno yet, but I’m hoping the kid can help out. If he can like I think he can; then we should be fine.” + +Now both of you are looking at Melcar wondering what he’s talking about. He sees that he’ll need to explain in more detail. + +“Kid, as I said you were brought here by the Nightmare Tyrant due to your strong sense of imagination. However, judging from your recent transportation trick it would appear that your imagination is strong enough to cause things to happen with the mere power of your mind. Yet, it would also appear that your power is limited. You wished you were away from danger, yet only re-appeared in another place in the house. Though my magic barrier was up at that point, so perhaps that has something to do with it. I don’t know…let’s test something.” + +Melcar points to another chair. + +“Concentrate, and think about that chair being solid gold.” + +You aren’t sure about all of this, but you’re interested in this “new power” you’ve acquired so you comply. Perhaps you could try to even wish yourself back home! + +You close your eyes, concentrate and wish for the chair to be solid gold, but it’s more difficult than you thought. Your mind is periodically bombarded with images of darkness and grinning Shadows. Eventually you fall to the floor. Melcar helps you up. The chair is still the same, except it has a single gold piece on the seat. Melcar checks to see if it’s real, and then he pockets it. + +“Well, just as I thought, it’s unpredictable and weak right now.” +“I…saw Shadows and darkness…” you say still holding your head. +“It looks like the Nightmare Tyrant really wants you; he’s probably linked to you psychically or something. I wouldn’t try to use your power to try to get back home. You’re likely to appear right in his clutches, but if we harness your power a little better, we can at least get rid of this immediate threat of Shadows. Focus on immediate help right now rather than a long term…” + +Suddenly Melcar is struck in the back of the head, by a Shadow! It must’ve still been hiding during the search! Melcar collapses and falls. Stinky runs off, leaving the Shadow to turn its attention towards you, hissing aggressively. +> Use your power to try to escape +You attempt to wish yourself elsewhere again, but you failed to heed the warning given by Melcar who stated how such an action might be dangerous, and in this case it was… + +Your mind is once again flooded by darkness and Shadows filling you with terror, and causing you to feel pulled towards it. A sinister laugh echoes throughout your head causing you to immediately break your concentration, but the damage is done as you are captured by the Shadow that’s currently in the room with you. At this point your mind is too paralyzed with fear to be of any use, but it knocks you out just to be sure you don’t try to escape again. + +Then it, along with its fellows takes you to meet the Nightmare Tyrant, whose laughter you hear once more before he carries out his evil plans for you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You run up the stairs of the house, with Chargrum in pursuit. + +“Don’t just stand there picking your nose Stinky, help me catch the little runt!” Chargrum shouts. + +You reach the second floor and run into one of the rooms locking it behind you. You turn around to see that you’re in a bedroom. Probably Melcar’s no doubt. A single window leads outside. You could escape from it, but you then remember all the Shadows are outside waiting for you in the first place, in fact you can hear their screeching surrounding the house. + +A Shadow breaks in the window just as Chargrum bashes the door open and you begin to wish you were anywhere, but here! + +No sooner have you thought that, you find yourself in front of Melcar, surprising the pair of you! From the looks of things, you’re in a basement, or lab. You know you’re underground, because you can see there is a stairway leading up and hear Chargrum’s voice coming from above. He’s screaming actually. + +“Wha…where did you come from?” Melcar asks. +“I…I dunno! I was running from Chargrum and hiding and then I wished I was someplace else and then I found myself here!” +“Wait. Why was he chasing you?” +“He was trying to throw me to the Shadows!” + +No sooner have you said that, when Stinky comes running down the stairs. + +“The Shadows are in the house and they took away Chargrum through one of the windows!” +“What?! I just erected a barrier! They shouldn’t be able to get in!” +“Well a few of them have, and Argh! Here they come!” Stinky says as some Shadows come down the stairs hissing and screeching. He quickly runs towards the both of you and behind Melcar. + +“Get behind me too, kid.” + +A few chants and Melcar unleashes a couple of electrical blasts from his fingers zapping all of the attacking Shadows. They give one last screech before disappearing. + +Melcar immediately rushes upstairs to see if there are anymore Shadows, you and Stinky follow closely behind him. After some checking, it would appear that the rest of the Shadows have been kept out and only a few managed to get in before the barrier appeared. You can still hear them still trying to get in though. + +“Whew. Okay. That should hold for awhile.” Melcar says collapsing in his chair. +“But what about Chargrum…the Shadows…they…” +“I can’t do anything. They got him and that’s it. But judging by what the kid told me he was trying to do it sounds like he got what he deserved anyway. Besides, I would’ve thought you of all people would’ve been glad to be rid of him, with the way he treated you.” +“I…guess so, but what’re we going to do now?” he asks. +“Dunno yet, but I’m hoping the kid can help out. If he can like I think he can; then we should be fine.” + +Now both of you are looking at Melcar wondering what he’s talking about. He sees that he’ll need to explain in more detail. + +“Kid, as I said you were brought here by the Nightmare Tyrant due to your strong sense of imagination. However, judging from your recent transportation trick it would appear that your imagination is strong enough to cause things to happen with the mere power of your mind. Yet, it would also appear that your power is limited. You wished you were away from danger, yet only re-appeared in another place in the house. Though my magic barrier was up at that point, so perhaps that has something to do with it. I don’t know…let’s test something.” + +Melcar points to another chair. + +“Concentrate, and think about that chair being solid gold.” + +You aren’t sure about all of this, but you’re interested in this “new power” you’ve acquired so you comply. Perhaps you could try to even wish yourself back home! + +You close your eyes, concentrate and wish for the chair to be solid gold, but it’s more difficult than you thought. Your mind is periodically bombarded with images of darkness and grinning Shadows. Eventually you fall to the floor. Melcar helps you up. The chair is still the same, except it has a single gold piece on the seat. Melcar checks to see if it’s real, and then he pockets it. + +“Well, just as I thought, it’s unpredictable and weak right now.” +“I…saw Shadows and darkness…” you say still holding your head. +“It looks like the Nightmare Tyrant really wants you; he’s probably linked to you psychically or something. I wouldn’t try to use your power to try to get back home. You’re likely to appear right in his clutches, but if we harness your power a little better, we can at least get rid of this immediate threat of Shadows. Focus on immediate help right now rather than a long term…” + +Suddenly Melcar is struck in the back of the head, by a Shadow! It must’ve still been hiding during the search! Melcar collapses and falls. Stinky runs off, leaving the Shadow to turn its attention towards you, hissing aggressively. +> Use your power to fight back +You have to fight back, as escape is not an option. You don’t even concentrate; you just wish you had something to defeat this creature! + +Suddenly a glowing sword appears in your hand. You also feel somewhat different, as if you have been trained to use one before. The Shadow steps back a bit, but then attack anyway. You take one swing at it and strike a powerful blow causing it to completely disappear. + +You hear more coming in from the second floor again. The barrier must be weak in that area. Seeing as Melcar’s out of it, you’re going to have to reinforce it yourself. + +“Stinky! Stop hiding and try to bring Melcar back around so he can help! I’m going to get rid of these Shadows!” you order as you run upstairs. + +More Shadows are eager to carry out the will of their master, but you’re better prepared for them now physically as well as mentally. You strike down the first one coming down the hallway, and then the second one, and then the next, until you get back to the bedroom that you teleported from. You can see that the same window that the Shadows broke through before is where the barrier is also “broken”. The blue glow of the magic barrier is non-existent there. + +Before more Shadows can get in, you begin to wish for the barrier to be repaired. While you attempt this task, you begin to hear the taunts of the Shadows trying to fill you with doubt. You also hear a more sinister voice, one that carries fear directly to your mind. + +“Little fool! Do you actually think this is going to stop me? Your attempts only delay the inevitable. Eventually you WILL be mine!” + +This evil presence in your mind causes you to break your concentration. You’re a little shaken by hearing the voice of the Nightmare Tyrant and you’ve failed to repair the barrier and now more Shadows are climbing in. Fortunately, Melcar has regained consciousness and has appeared to help. + +Melcar zaps the Shadows and with a few mumbling chants the barrier is repaired. Before you thank him, you notice that he’s soaking wet. + +“Uh…” +“Yeah I know, I’m all wet. Stinky nearly drowned me in his attempt to wake me up. Pity he doesn’t immerse himself in as much water! Still, I guess it worked.” Melcar replies. + +“I heard the Nightmare Tyrant’s voice in my head.” +“Not surprised. He’s probably trying to prevent you from using your power. He’s able to focus in on you better because you’ve been in the same location for a long time. I’d suggest moving, but given that we’re surrounded by Shadows, that’s not really an option anymore.” +“Look, can’t YOU just send me back home? I mean that’s what you said you’d do if I had cleared your backyard.” +“Uh, yeah…about that. I was just kind of being lazy. I just didn’t want to be bothered to do it. In fact I had a list of other chores I was going to have you do if you finished that one.” +“What!? You lied? You mean your wife was right about you being a charlatan?” +“AM I NOT! I AM a wizard! I erected this barrier didn’t I? Though maybe my wife is right about one thing, I am lazy. (Sigh) I guess I’m paying for my sloth now. If I’d just cleared out the backyard myself, instead of having you do it, the Shadows wouldn’t have arrived. Bah, no time to worry about the past now, we need to solve this problem. Okay, I’ll try to get you back home, without you around, the Shadows won’t be around either. I know I have some sort of portal spell in one of my books somewhere. I’ve never had any reason to use it before though and those types of spells are very taxing. I would definitely have to take down the barrier first and of course you know what that means and I still don’t know if the spell will be successful, like I said I’ve never cast one before.” +‘Is there anything we can do to slow down the Shadows?” you ask. + +“Well, we can barricade the house properly before I take the magic barrier down which will take us some time, but it’s safer. We’ll have to hope the Shadows don’t break in quickly though. The second way is if we actually try to destroy all the Shadows currently out there, before I start the portal spell. In this case we’ll have to hope that the Nightmare Tyrant can’t summon reinforcements quick enough.” +> Barricade the house +You might have new abilities, but they’re still limited. Fighting a bunch of Shadows is just going to tire you and Melcar out and Melcar needs all of his energy to cast the portal spell. + +“Let’s barricade the house.” You say. +“Alright, but I have to look for that spell first, so you’ll be doing most of the barricading. Hopefully it doesn’t take me too long.” +“Oh, well maybe I can get Stinky to help me.” +“Good idea, I would imagine he’ll be able to at least be useful in that aspect. Make sure you stay focused and block out any of those Shadow tricks or anything the Nightmare Tyrant might try to do to your mind.” + +You take Melcar’s advice and go talk to Stinky. He’s still in a state of panic, and gibbering about the Shadows trying to get in. + +“Hey, help me barricade the house.” +“But what good will that do? Trapping ourselves in won’t help! They’ll get in eventually!” +“Look, we’ve got a plan so that the Shadows won’t bother you ever again, but I need you to pull it off and that involves you helping me barricade the house! You’re braver than you think Stinky, look at me, I didn’t think I could fight the Shadows either and I did.” +“Yeah, but I don’t have any powers like you do and Chargrum always said that I was too…” +“Chargrum isn’t around anymore to abuse you, so his opinion doesn’t matter, in fact it never did. You’re better off not thinking about anything he might’ve said about you. You can do this. Now’s the time to prove yourself.” + +Your inspiring words make Stinky feel more confident in himself, probably for the first time in his life. He immediately thanks you, and begins to help you barricade the house. You spend a whole day doing this mainly because Melcar has a really hard time finding anything in his disorganized lab. You mainly focus on the task at hand as does Stinky, but your thoughts briefly wander about your home. If…no WHEN you get back home, you don’t know how you’re going to explain your disappearance to your Mom. You can’t dwell on such things too much though, you need to keep yourself alert. + +Eventually Melcar comes back up from his lab. + +“Found it. Now I’m going to go back down into the basement and begin the spell because it’ll be the safest place I’ll be able to cast it. I hope your barricades are strong enough to hold because I won’t be able to fight Shadows AND cast this spell. If the Shadows do manage to break in, well its going to be up to you to fight them off.” +“And me…” Stinky pipes up. +“…well, this is a surprise. Okay, the both of you then, here Stinky you’ll need something magical to fight them.” Melcar hands Stinky a wand of some sort. “Make the shots count, because I forget how many charges it has left in it. Okay I would suggest you two guard the basement doorway and when I tell you the portal is open that will be your cue to make haste into it, because again, I don’t know how long I can keep it open. You guys ready?” + +You and Stinky nod. + +“Okay, I’m going to dispel the barrier.” + +Melcar makes a few chanting noises and the barrier goes down where upon you hear the Shadows howling in excitement and start trying to bash their way in. You all retreat back to the basement, where you and Stinky prepare yourselves for an attack and Melcar begins to cast the Portal Spell. + +All seems to be going smoothly, but then you hear the inevitable break in, and the first Shadows attempt to recapture you. Fortunately you’re in a good position to fight them. They can’t overwhelm or sneak up on you. After striking a few down, a smaller Shadow appears and sounds painfully familiar… + +“YOU did this to me! Now I’ll do what I wanted to do in the first place! Throw you to the Nightmare Tyrant!” Chargrum hisses in his new Shadow form. + +You take a swing at Chargrum, but you miss and end up falling off balance causing you to fall down the steps! You’re hurt, and very dizzy, but you can see Stinky trying to fight off Chargrum. He discharges a bolt from the wand, but once again Chargrum proves to be very nimble in his new form and knocks it out of his hand and him to the floor. + +“Outta the way Stinky! When ya get turned into one of us, I’ll make sure to really punish you, for you traitor!” + +Chargrum races down the stairs towards you, just as you see Stinky getting swarmed by other Shadows at the top of the stairs. You roll out the way of Chargrum’s clutches and pick your sword back up. + +“Better put down those Shadows quickly! I’m not near done yet!” Melcar shouts from his own position after seeing you engaged in combat with Chargrum. + +You strike down a couple more Shadows, but Chargrum continues to prove to be faster. He manages to knock you down again and jumps on top of you as your sword is separated from you. + +“The Nightmare Tyrant wants to relay a message to you!” he hisses and you feel the sinister voice of Tyrant entering your mind again. + +“You’ve lost! You cannot defeat me, I am everywhere. You WILL submit and become my servant!” + +The Nightmare Tyrant is attempting to break your will and fill you with terror again, but it’s not going to work this time, you can feel that victory is almost near and the Tyrant probably feels it too. He knows that if you get away back to your own world that he’ll never be able to try to get you ever again. You won’t be beaten after coming this far, all you need is a distraction to help you get your sword back and Chargrum off of you… + +And with that thought in mind, Stinky comes from out of nowhere and zaps Chargrum point blank in the back with his wand. He screeches horribly as he disappears before your eyes. + +“Should’ve watched your back around a traitor like me, Chargrum.” Stinky smirks as you scramble to retrieve your sword. + +You strike down a few more Shadows, and try to hold them back at the bottom of the stairway. Stinky’s wand has run out of charges, but the better news is that Melcar has completed the portal spell! A large blue portal opens up. Now you can hear the Nightmare Tyrant very clearly. + +“NO! GET THE BOY! NOW!” he roars. + +“It’s open! Get in quick! I don’t know how long it will hold!” Melcar shouts. + +“Go! We’ll be alright! We can hold them off!” Stinky adds. +“I can’t leave you without a weapon!” you shout and hand Stinky the sword, at which point he hands you the used up wand. +“It’s not much, but think of it as a souvenir! Thanks for your help!” he shouts as fights off more Shadows coming down the stairs. + +You run towards the portal and give Melcar a look before jumping in. + +“Stinky’s right, we’ll be fine, though I’m sure my wife will yell at me for destroying half the house! Get in!” + +You’re sort of worried about Stinky and Melcar, but you realize you have to go now. The Nightmare Tyrant bellows again to his minions about not letting you escape as you run for the portal and entering it. + +You are enveloped by blackness followed by swirling colored lights. It’s all so strange and overwhelming to you that you pass out. + +“Hey! I told you breakfast is ready, are you going to sleep all day?” you hear your Mom call from downstairs as you awaken in surprise. + +You quickly look around your room and nothing looks out of place. Your Mom hasn’t seemed to notice that you were gone; in fact it doesn’t look like you even left. + +Was it all a dream? + +You shake your head trying to decide if it was, then you notice a small rod on the floor next to the toys you set up yesterday. It’s the used up wand and oddly it’s right next to a couple of figures, one holding a sword and another with his hands positioned to cast a spell. They strangely have a tired, but yet relieved look on their faces. + +It wasn’t a dream. It was real. Created by the power of your own imagination. You decide you’ll keep this information to yourself though, since nobody would ever believe it! + +You had an interesting adventure, but you’re glad to be home you think as you go downstairs to eat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have to fight back, as escape is not an option. You don’t even concentrate; you just wish you had something to defeat this creature! + +Suddenly a glowing sword appears in your hand. You also feel somewhat different, as if you have been trained to use one before. The Shadow steps back a bit, but then attack anyway. You take one swing at it and strike a powerful blow causing it to completely disappear. + +You hear more coming in from the second floor again. The barrier must be weak in that area. Seeing as Melcar’s out of it, you’re going to have to reinforce it yourself. + +“Stinky! Stop hiding and try to bring Melcar back around so he can help! I’m going to get rid of these Shadows!” you order as you run upstairs. + +More Shadows are eager to carry out the will of their master, but you’re better prepared for them now physically as well as mentally. You strike down the first one coming down the hallway, and then the second one, and then the next, until you get back to the bedroom that you teleported from. You can see that the same window that the Shadows broke through before is where the barrier is also “broken”. The blue glow of the magic barrier is non-existent there. + +Before more Shadows can get in, you begin to wish for the barrier to be repaired. While you attempt this task, you begin to hear the taunts of the Shadows trying to fill you with doubt. You also hear a more sinister voice, one that carries fear directly to your mind. + +“Little fool! Do you actually think this is going to stop me? Your attempts only delay the inevitable. Eventually you WILL be mine!” + +This evil presence in your mind causes you to break your concentration. You’re a little shaken by hearing the voice of the Nightmare Tyrant and you’ve failed to repair the barrier and now more Shadows are climbing in. Fortunately, Melcar has regained consciousness and has appeared to help. + +Melcar zaps the Shadows and with a few mumbling chants the barrier is repaired. Before you thank him, you notice that he’s soaking wet. + +“Uh…” +“Yeah I know, I’m all wet. Stinky nearly drowned me in his attempt to wake me up. Pity he doesn’t immerse himself in as much water! Still, I guess it worked.” Melcar replies. + +“I heard the Nightmare Tyrant’s voice in my head.” +“Not surprised. He’s probably trying to prevent you from using your power. He’s able to focus in on you better because you’ve been in the same location for a long time. I’d suggest moving, but given that we’re surrounded by Shadows, that’s not really an option anymore.” +“Look, can’t YOU just send me back home? I mean that’s what you said you’d do if I had cleared your backyard.” +“Uh, yeah…about that. I was just kind of being lazy. I just didn’t want to be bothered to do it. In fact I had a list of other chores I was going to have you do if you finished that one.” +“What!? You lied? You mean your wife was right about you being a charlatan?” +“AM I NOT! I AM a wizard! I erected this barrier didn’t I? Though maybe my wife is right about one thing, I am lazy. (Sigh) I guess I’m paying for my sloth now. If I’d just cleared out the backyard myself, instead of having you do it, the Shadows wouldn’t have arrived. Bah, no time to worry about the past now, we need to solve this problem. Okay, I’ll try to get you back home, without you around, the Shadows won’t be around either. I know I have some sort of portal spell in one of my books somewhere. I’ve never had any reason to use it before though and those types of spells are very taxing. I would definitely have to take down the barrier first and of course you know what that means and I still don’t know if the spell will be successful, like I said I’ve never cast one before.” +‘Is there anything we can do to slow down the Shadows?” you ask. + +“Well, we can barricade the house properly before I take the magic barrier down which will take us some time, but it’s safer. We’ll have to hope the Shadows don’t break in quickly though. The second way is if we actually try to destroy all the Shadows currently out there, before I start the portal spell. In this case we’ll have to hope that the Nightmare Tyrant can’t summon reinforcements quick enough.” +> Destroy the Shadows +You want to get home and away from this place as soon as possible. You feel with your sword and new abilities along with Melcar’s help you should be able to take care of them. + +“Let’s destroy the Shadows!” you say. +“Alright, but let me look for that spell first, because after we’ve destroyed the Shadows, we’re going to want to cast the portal as soon as possible. Shouldn’t take me too long.” +“Okay, what about Stinky?” +“Stinky? He won’t be of any help! He’ll probably be hiding in the house the whole time! I’ll go look for that spell, you just get yourself prepared, because this won’t be easy.” + +You take Melcar’s advice and begin to get yourself in a proper frame of mind; in fact you spend a day doing this since Melcar has a really hard time finding anything in his disorganized lab. Stinky is constantly in a state of panic, and gibbering about the Shadows trying to get in, making it harder for you to keep yourself calm. + +Eventually Melcar comes back up from his lab. + +“Found it; alright let’s get rid of these Shadows quickly. I’m going to dispel the barrier.” + +Melcar makes a few chanting noises and the barrier goes down where upon you hear the Shadows howling in excitement and start bashing their way in, and in the case of some already get in through the upstairs window. + +You and Melcar begin to fight the Shadows, while Stinky goes off to hide, though it doesn’t do him much go since the Shadows at this point are intent on not just getting you, but now everyone in the house, eventually all of his running and hiding attempts fail as you see him being dragged off by a few Shadows, you attempt to stop them, but nearly get yourself captured in the process. + +This ordeal is very tiring as the Shadows seem to be more numerous than you thought. Melcar eventually exhausts his spell power and is reduced to beating the Shadows with a magic wand. You briefly worry about him being able to cast the portal spell, but as it turns out, that will be the least of your worries. + +A shorter Shadow suddenly jumps on your back; it begins to taunt you as it attempts to wrestle you down. The voice is very familiar… + +“YOU did this to me! Now I’ll do what I wanted to do in the first place! Throw you to the Nightmare Tyrant!” Chargrum hisses in his new Shadow form. + +While you manage to get him off and strike him down, Chargrum was able to distract you long enough for other Shadows to overwhelm you, and your sword is separated from you. The blackness has now enveloped you and your worry has now become terror and you can’t think straight. You call out for Melcar to help, but he too has been overwhelmed. + +The sinister laugh now fills your mind, paralyzing it, and soon all is forever shadows when you are taken directly to the Nightmare Tyrant.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren’t going to mess about with a bunch of angry little purple people; you don’t know how dangerous they might be. You head back to the front of the house and knock on the door to get Melcar’s help. + +You don’t get an answer, but a short man with a long pink beard comes walking up the steps, he’s your height, but is obviously old. He reminds you of a dwarf. Maybe he is, you are in a different world after all, but the pink beard is really bizarre. There’s another taller man walking behind, but is very disheveled looking. His odor isn’t the best either as he gives off a bad smell and he isn’t even next to you. + +“Outta the way boy! I got important business with this charlatan who claims he’s a wizard!” the dwarf exclaims nearly knocking you down. +“Chargrum, are you sure this is a good idea? I mean it was only five gold…” +“ONLY FIVE GOLD? Stinky, you’ve been working for me for how long now and you’re still too dumb to figure out that nobody steals from me? You’ve truly hit an all time low in stupidity!” +“Yeah, but this guy’s a wizard…” +“He’s a charlatan! And even if he was a real wizard, it doesn’t matter because the money for once is the least of my complaints, he’s gotta pay for what he did! That blasted potion turned my beard PINK, or were you too stupid to even notice that Stinky?” +“Okay, I’m just saying…” + +Before you can react to all of this, Melcar finally answers the door and addresses you first. + +“What’s all this blasted noise? Didn’t I tell you to go clean up my backyard?” +“But there are all these mean little purple people throwing rocks at me!” you say. +“So? They’re just Furms, just stop them, shouldn’t be that hard for you.” +“Nevermind all that, I want my five gold back, look what your potion did to my beard, you charlatan!” the dwarf yells. +“Oh fer…look Chargrum, I said no refunds when I sold you the potion, besides you got what you wanted. Your beard grew a lot longer didn’t it? Don’t like it? Shave it off!” +“WHAT!? Shave off my beard? That’s madness! But no dwarf wants a pink beard! What Dwarven woman would want me like this?” +“(Sigh) Stop pretending that you’re a dwarf! You’re a Halfling that’s just trying to fool Dwarven women! And you’re calling ME a charlatan?” + +Chargrum suddenly looks around nervously and then hits Stinky for snickering. + +“Shhhh! Alright, alright, keep your voice down! Look, do you have anything to change my beard back to a proper color?” +“Maybe, but…hmm, that doesn’t look good…” + +Melcar’s statement and his eyes gazing past his porch cause the rest of you to turn around look where upon you see the sky turning jet black and dark winged creatures begin to descend from it. + +“SHADOWS!” Malcar yells at which point you, Chargrum, and Stinky all rush inside before he shuts the door. + +“What are shadows doing here? This village isn’t even of any strategic importance to the Nightmare Tyrant!” Chargrum shouts. +“He’s the Nightmare Tyrant, does he need a reason? But I’ll wager they’re looking for him.” Melcar says pointing at you. “They’ll probably try to swarm the house soon, I better prepare this place….I have to go get my spell book!” + +After Melcar runs off to go get his book, Chargrum demands and answer from you. + +“What did he mean, they’re probably looking for you?” + +You hesitantly explain yourself at which point Chargrum gets a look in his eye that makes you uncomfortable. + +“So if that’s the case, then the Shadows will probably leave after they get you, well I know how to solve this problem!” + +Chargrum advances on you. +> Fight him +Chargrum is your height so you think you can fight him off, however you’re forgetting that he still has the strength of someone a lot older than you, he easily fends off your attack and grabs you by the scruff. + +“Stinky open the door! We gotta get rid of this Shadow magnet! NOW!” + +Stinky fumbles with the door while you protest and struggle, but its no use, Chargrum has already thrown you outside to the Shadows. + +When you pick yourself up, you’re stricken with mind paralyzing fear as a large group of grinning Shadows encircle and capture you. + +They take you back to the Nightmare Tyrant who has no intention of getting rid of you. + +Ever.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Look at the birds, Mommy!” a child’s voice exclaims. + +You snap awake, checking for your weapons automatically before you remember you’re on a civilian transport. + +“Bout time, Zee. We left underspace half an hour ago,” Hinsman says from beside you. “Smooth as butter. They have stabilizers set up here now, I didn’t know that. This system’s really had some work put into it since I was here last.” + +In his fifties but not yet looking his age, he’s supposed to be dressed as an asteroid speculator out on holiday and is struggling in the narrow confines of his seat to tug his coat on. Hinsman’s on the short side, and the garment is a couple of sizes too big. All around you others, tourists, businessmen, and families, are starting to collect their things as well. + +“Anyway, just waiting on our transfer now.” + +You unsnap your safety belt. “Okay.” + +Hinsman’s got the aisle seat, just one more factor in his unspoken role in keeping you from too much direct contact with the public. Fine by you. Your job has always been to protect these people, not make conversation. Gazing out the window, you have a good view of the green planet. Camarov IV. It’s supposed to be beautiful, but it’s not like you’re here to sightsee. This is just your fastest route back to work. + +The Order cruiser you’d been using got enough of a beating on your last mission it needed to be taken to a real shipyard for repairs, and meanwhile this transport was headed directly for Camarov and had two vacancies. There’s another Order ship en route to here which you’ll transfer to to be taken back to the Outer Rim. You’ll never even set foot on this planet. + +There is a gentle thud as the landing ship locks on and the crew starts shepherding passengers towards the exit. Hinsman combs his dark hair and tends to the mustache he’s been cultivating. You just sit and wait. + +Both of your wrist comms beep at the same time, and you see the Order ship has left underspace. There’s a little flurry among the crew when it requests to lock on, but Hinsman flashes a badge and his signature smile and the two of you transfer over without incident. + +Once aboard, the ship unlocks and moves to a safe distance for a jump. Then there’s a delay as the pilot seems to have no intention of leaving until he downloads whatever media Camarov IV has to offer. Images of green hills and misty lakes and crystal spires and dancers on a stage and some sort of historical reimagining of Old Earth tumble across the viewscreen. + +The pilot, Karoff, is middle aged, tall and with thinning blond hair just starting to shade to grey. His mustache however is much more impressive than Hinsman’s. You’ve worked with him before. You don't always get his sense of humor, but he's okay. + +The next stop will be The Last Outpost for refueling, then you'll be taken along a scenic tour alternating between the most boring and dangerous parts of the Outer Rim as you go down the list fulfilling your various obligations there and being available to lend assistance in emergencies. + +You lean against the wall and mentally check out until it’s time to strap in for the jump to underspace. Hinsman was right, the in system stabilizers do improve the experience quite a bit. + + +***** + + +The Last Outpost is dark when you approach. + +“Well that’s not a good sign,” Karoff mutters. The station floats in place like a fat black spider against the pale backdrop of the system’s single barren planetoid. Karoff makes a few adjustments to make your approach less obvious and then starts running scans from a distance. It took you nearly a week to get out this far from Camarov and you’re all aware that if there’s trouble it’ll be just as long before you can find any backup. + +The Last Outpost was once a research hospital on the edge of protected space. Now it’s a ways past the official line, although after the rollback it persisted as a stopover and fueling station for both the military and any junker the colony worlds could put together to evacuate in. Officially out of service and abandoned now as far as anyone outside the Order is supposed to know, it’s still got enough automated defenses that any scavengers looking for scrap will be sent packing in a hurry. Or it used to, anyway. Hinsman is frowning over the console now too. + +“That’s a lot of damage.” + +“Pirates?” + +Hinsman shakes his head. “I don’t think so. The way some of the plating is buckled, this looks like a string of explosions from the inside. Mostly just in that one arm, but the defenses are offline and there’s no more than basic life support anywhere on the station.” + +There’s a soft beep as a scan is completed. + +“One life sign,” Karoff grunts. + +“Even if they pulled out everyone on mission, there should’ve be at least three here for maintenance still.” Hinsman joins you at the window as he finishes speaking and stares across the distance. “But...I’ll hail them I suppose.” + +“You sure?” + +“Might as well. Doesn’t look like they have much left to shoot at us anyway.” + +“Let’s hope appearances aren’t deceiving.” +> Inquiry +Karoff looks tense as Hinsman tries to contact the station. There’s a long wait with no reply. He frowns and tries once again using Order passcodes. + +A green light blinks on, and then a moment later a haggard-looking blonde woman with high cheekbones and thin lips appears on the viewscreen with a crackling of static. “So someone finally did show up.” + +The woman’s voice is flat and blank. She’s young and might have been pretty under other circumstances, but her eyes have dark rings under them, her face is sallow and her hair hasn’t seen a brush in awhile. She dips a spoon in a tub of drippy, melting ice cream while staring at the screen indifferently. + +Karoff pulls up her ID while Hinsman coughs and clears his throat. “Ah...you’re Matti Oswen, correct?” + +“Yeah.” + +“I’m Agent Hinsman. We were just stopping over on our way into the Rim, but it looks like you’ve had a bit of trouble here. Do you need assistance?” He keeps his tone light and injects a note of friendly concern. + +She blinks at him owlishly a moment, then sets the ice cream aside and scratches lightly at the side of her neck. “I sent out a call, but the computer lost power and I’m not sure it went through. That was...almost a week ago, I think.” + +“You’re a maintenance worker, correct? What happened here, Matti? And where are the others?” + +“Inea and Markov? Oh, they’re dead.” Her voice is still flat and strangely disinterested. + +Karoff dutifully pulls up their IDs as well. Their new status as deceased hasn’t been updated in the Order database yet, anyhow, and as the three of you have heard nothing regarding the damage to the station or a rescue attempt you can only assume her distress signal never did make it out. + +Oswen continues only after Hinsman prompts her again. “Inea had an accident while doing repairs and Markov killed himself and tried to take the rest of the station with him a couple of days later. I rerouted the power to redirect the blast just in time, but most of the generators still blew. I’ve been sitting around in the dark and trying to eat everything in the freezers before it all spoils, and then figuring I’d inject myself with something before the oxygen fails.” + +Hinsmans voice is soothing. “Well I’m sorry you had to go through that Matti, but you’ll be safe now. We’re going to send out a request for help and then lock on to see what we can do about repairs in the meantime. We can route enough power over to make sure life support holds up, anyway. + +“Whatever.” + +Once the call is cut, a distress signal is sent back to headquarters along with a short recorded message. The three of you briefly go over the situation. + +Hinsman sums it all up. “It’ll be a few days before anyone can arrive to help, and we can’t leave until then. Even if no survivors were here, the station itself is vulnerable and hell, it’s probably more necessary to the Order than any of us, if we’re being honest. Although this Oswen woman...she might be in shock, or there might be something else going on there. Not sure we can trust her.” + +Karoff spits out the end of his mustache. “We’re gonna get in there and find out the bitch slit their throats and made bikini tops out of their skin. Seen it happen before.” + +You look at him. “Really?” + +“Ahh, well not the skinning for bikinis part, but people get assigned to an out of the way place like this too long, they can just snap and start killing each other. Or there maybe was some kind of love triangle going on that turned nasty. And not the good kind of nasty,” he adds, apparently feeling the need to clarify. + +“Well I guess we’re just going to have to risk our skins then,” Hinsman says with a slight roll of his eyes. “Or you and I anyway, Karoff. But Zee, you were always going to be working alone anyhow. You won’t have us standing by in orbit if you go on by yourself, but there’s nothing stopping you from suiting up and taking a spare shuttle, if the job is urgent enough.” + +“Still may be awhile before we know exactly how bad the damage is to the Outpost,” Karoff points out. “She could be needed here.” + +“True, but...Zee, I guess this one is going to be your call. I don’t have details on the mission you’ve been requested for, so what’s protocol here?” + +This would all be simpler if you could directly contact a commander, of course, but out here that’s rarely possible and having to make decisions like this on the fly is part of the job. + +ORDER when it started out stood for Outer Rim Defense, Evaluation and Research. The joke everyone likes to make is how when the Hunger virus appeared on the scene the E stood for Evacuation, and then finally Eradication. + +Of course that’s the part you’re all still working on. And it’s not actually all that funny. + +The Order is the peacekeeping force out past the edge of protected space, although not in any kind of official capacity anymore. A little over twenty years ago when the Hunger virus was at its peak and blazing from planet to planet, the border was rolled back and then rolled back again. Colonies and mining facilities, trading stations and outposts were cut off in the midst of the chaos and anyone who wouldn’t or couldn’t evacuate was left to fend for themselves. + +Some of the Order agents were recalled back to New Terra, but for many more this was their home, this was just what they did. Momentum and habit went a long way and the organization already had enough ships, stations and equipment out here to continue operating much as they always had. If anything they were more effective now that the bureaucracy and red tape had been stripped away, although that sometimes birthed its own kind of controversy. + +Independent, isolated colonies and small time miners and traders had no one to protect them from piracy, not to mention the trade consortiums that amounted to a more organized version of the same thing. They welcomed the Order’s presence on one hand while resenting anything they perceived as meddling in their own affairs on another. In areas where the line between New Terra and frontier authorities blurred, certain parties also never failed to point out that the Order had no more jurisdiction than any other private organization; outside of the ancient one of might making right and the bit about possession and how it related to law, anyhow. + +And although on paper the organization kept to the same laws and standards they had from the beginning, they were just as on their own out here as anyone and had to see to their own people’s interests and protection as well. New blood could be hard enough to find as it was without asking it to spill itself simply because it was the right thing to do. About the only thing anyone could agree on was that the Order were the only ones equipped to really do anything about the Hunger virus and so they should be left to it, no questions asked. + +So thankfully, politics and the rest of that nonsense aren’t anything you ever have to concern yourself with. All you do is your job, and all you worry about is doing it well. Right now that means making a judgment call on where you’ll be the most effective. And right now, that does seem to be here. Nothing you were given indicated anyone was in direct danger, and the Last Outpost is as valuable to the Order as any of the other facilities you were asked to check on, and far more strategically important. The refueling station is what makes these little forays out in this area of Rim possible in the first place. +> Secure the station. +You indicate to the others that you’ll stay for now and Karoff directs the ship on a route toward the station. It makes sense to at least do a cursory inspection of the damage and make sure that at least life support will hold up. And of course there’s the other issue of the alleged sabotage and personnel having been lost under circumstances still waiting to be confirmed. Leaving just two operatives to handle it all isn’t ideal. + +Of the station’s eight arms, the docking bay is luckily on the side that’s suffered the least damage. Karoff locks on without incident and the panels of the reinforced portal retract with a gentle whirring. Beyond, the station is dark and cold. You all file out and make your way out of the landing bay and down a hallway with the aid of flashlights. With what little power remains rerouted to life support, the portal to the central complex refuse to open. Attempts to contact Oswen on a short range channel fail, and so Hinsman finally gets the door moving with the aid of his gun; wiring the energy cell to the panel next to it, that is. At the jolt of power it snaps open with sudden speed, then begins to close again in slow motion and grinds to a halt about a third of the way. The three of you squeeze past and before long find yourselves in an open area, a kind of joint dining hall and exercise room with dead video screens lining the walls. + +The kitchen area behind the dining hall is a disaster zone of empty plastic trays, overflowing trash bins and spoiled food. There’s no sign of Matti although you do find her abandoned ice cream bucket. The three of you begin to search area by area. Although reluctant to split up, you do move a bit faster than the others and take to checking into rooms and around corners ahead of them. + +A pool of vivid crimson against the polished grey tile is your first confirmation that something has gone wrong. You race forward to Matti Oswen’s crumpled form and check her pulse, clamping another hand down on the stub of her severed arm. Lifting the woman from the ground and calling out to the others, you splash your way through the blood, tracking it behind you while more soaks into your uniform. + +A medical station was one of the places the three of you had already searched, so you hasten to it and deposit her on a steel table, keeping your grip just above the wound while Hinsman activates the computer. + +“This nursing AI was obsolete fifteen years ago,” he grumbles, taking a protective suit from a persistently dinging open door and yanking it on over his clothes. + +“Isn’t that a bit of overkill?” Karoff asks, watching him. + +Hinsman’s response is muffled through the breathing filter. “It won’t let me even proceed without it. This place was last used to quarantine evacuees exposed to Hunger, there’s no such thing as overkill as far as the computer is concerned. Just be glad the whole station isn’t set to self destruct the moment someone gets a paper cut.” He pauses a moment to apply a tourniquet. “Now...Zee, you step back, it hates you too.” + +Karoff looks at you and snorts. “I imagine so. You look like you just left the scene of an axe murder.” + +You’d already moved away at Hinsman’s order, and now you ruefully wipe you face, hoping to achieve a clean spot. Karoff’s ensuing guffaw informs you you probably just made the situation worse. + +“I’ll go clean up the mess in the hall...and myself,” you say, turning to go. + +“Zee, wait, wait, Miss Oswen is going to need an arm transplant, don’t you think?” + +You blink at Karoff. “Are you serious?” + +This just provokes more laughter. + +Hinsman, who has been preoccupied with the soothing voice of the medical AI and the use of instruments taken out of little drawers that have been popping open in sequence, now shakes his head at the two of you as he changes to clean gloves. “I’m not that good a doctor, I’m afraid. Zee, you go on.” + +He snaps his fingers at Karoff and in the other hand produces an oversized needle, like a magician’s trick. “But I will need a blood donor, and guess who’s compatible?” + +Already on your way out, you turn and get a glimpse of the pilot’s grimace as the door slides shut between you. + + + +Cleaning up is a tedious but straightforward affair. You scrub yourself down and change into a plain grey jumpsuit you find before returning to the scene of the accident and getting to work. +> Dispose of the severed arm +It seems Oswen had been trying to unjam a door that leads to one of the station’s storage arms, in much the same way Hinsman had gotten you all into the central complex earlier. It was her misfortune that upon receiving a jolt from a maintenance tool the door had snapped shut, meaning it had been open to begin with. + +There’s enough juice left to get it back to where it was and you carefully retrieve the severed limb on the other side, slipping it into a biohazard bag. Taking a moment to confirm with Hinsman there’s nothing he can do as far as reattaching it, you consider your options for disposal. An incinerator would the most straightforward, but those require an amount of energy that seems wasteful if not impossible to produce given the station’s current reliance on emergency backup power for life support. + +You remember then the walk in freezer in the kitchen behind the dining hall. At least that would keep it from rotting if it takes longer that expected to get the power on full. The room isn’t able to maintain freezing temps anymore but it’s still noticeably colder than the rest of the station, and the rest of the station is cold enough. Placing the bagged arm on a shelf, you halt a moment as your gaze fixes on the two bundled forms in the back. So you weren’t the first one to have the idea to use the place as an impromptu morgue. These must be the bodies of the other two maintenance workers, Inea and Markov. +> Inspect the bodies +Opening the largest body bag first, you briefly examine Markov. Evidence of cuts, burns, and some bits of broken glass still embedded in the skin seem consistent with him having been in the vicinity of an explosion, although there were a lot of unanswered questions in Matti’s brief explanation. Further details will have to wait till she’s conscious again, you suppose. + +You zip the bag back up and turn your attention to Inea. The dark haired woman’s cause of death is immediately obvious, her skull on the left side having been caved in just above and behind the ear. ‘An accident while doing repairs’ was how Matti had described her death. While you can’t yet find anything to contradict that, as you probe along the edges of the splintered bits of skull and cold globs of brain matter it seems to you it would’ve taken an awful lot of force concentrated in that one spot all at once to do that kind of damage. + +Then again, Matti had nearly managed to kill herself as well. You wonder what sort of accident it was supposed to have been. It’s almost incredible to you that three people so incompetent had been left in charge of such an important Outpost. It’s true that space is a big place and Order agents and personnel are stretched thin, but in your experience it’s rare for things to go this spectacularly wrong without someone being at fault. + +Finding nothing more of note, you close up that body bag too and then exit the freezer. Grabbing a mop from the corner of the kitchen and filling up a bucket, you make your way back to where you’d found Matti and go to work on the rapidly drying blood. The blood has begun to dry and it’s obvious this will take awhile so you clear out your mind and focus on the task. +> Back to the nursing station +Matti is asleep. Hinsman is seated at a table near the bed, freshly showered and changed into a grey jumpsuit identical to yours and looking exhausted. Karoff is nowhere to be seen. + +“He’s back on the ship seeing how much power we can spare,” Hinsman tells you, before you can ask. “This medical station’s about the only thing working as intended in this place right now. We need to at least get the computers up before we can figure out what all needs to be repaired and how. It’d be really great if we had a maintenance worker familiar with the place to talk to, but...” He inclines his head toward the young woman’s supine form and shrugs. The end of what’s left of her arm is neatly wrapped in bandages, but her face looks pale and strained even in her sleep and her eyes twitch restlessly behind her lids. + +Briefly you relate what you’d discovered. + +“The plot thickens,” he mutters, then gestures toward the computer. “Why don’t you see what you can find there as far as internal records on these three?” + +You nod and take a seat, flashing your wrist at the sensor. The computer blips once and you’re in. You have a pretty high clearance. Higher even than Hinsman’s you suspect, although that’s not really a thing you’re supposed to ask anyone about. Retrieving sensitive data from wrecked Order ships or evacuated command stations is one of the things you need to be able to do with no fuss when required, and your superiors know this. +> Look up Inea +Name: Inea Banca +Eyes: brown +Hair: black +Height: 5’9” +Weight: 145 +Age: 46 +Other: tattoo on right forearm +Origin: Camarov IV +Skills: fringe space station maintenance +Years service: 9<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Matti is asleep. Hinsman is seated at a table near the bed, freshly showered and changed into a grey jumpsuit identical to yours and looking exhausted. Karoff is nowhere to be seen. + +“He’s back on the ship seeing how much power we can spare,” Hinsman tells you, before you can ask. “This medical station’s about the only thing working as intended in this place right now. We need to at least get the computers up before we can figure out what all needs to be repaired and how. It’d be really great if we had a maintenance worker familiar with the place to talk to, but...” He inclines his head toward the young woman’s supine form and shrugs. The end of what’s left of her arm is neatly wrapped in bandages, but her face looks pale and strained even in her sleep and her eyes twitch restlessly behind her lids. + +Briefly you relate what you’d discovered. + +“The plot thickens,” he mutters, then gestures toward the computer. “Why don’t you see what you can find there as far as internal records on these three?” + +You nod and take a seat, flashing your wrist at the sensor. The computer blips once and you’re in. You have a pretty high clearance. Higher even than Hinsman’s you suspect, although that’s not really a thing you’re supposed to ask anyone about. Retrieving sensitive data from wrecked Order ships or evacuated command stations is one of the things you need to be able to do with no fuss when required, and your superiors know this. +> Look up Markov +Name: Markov Carst +Eyes: blue +Hair: brown +Height: 6’3” +Weight: 201 +Age: 41 +Other: left handed +Origin: Galton Station +Skills: fringe space station maintenance +Years service: 5<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Matti is asleep. Hinsman is seated at a table near the bed, freshly showered and changed into a grey jumpsuit identical to yours and looking exhausted. Karoff is nowhere to be seen. + +“He’s back on the ship seeing how much power we can spare,” Hinsman tells you, before you can ask. “This medical station’s about the only thing working as intended in this place right now. We need to at least get the computers up before we can figure out what all needs to be repaired and how. It’d be really great if we had a maintenance worker familiar with the place to talk to, but...” He inclines his head toward the young woman’s supine form and shrugs. The end of what’s left of her arm is neatly wrapped in bandages, but her face looks pale and strained even in her sleep and her eyes twitch restlessly behind her lids. + +Briefly you relate what you’d discovered. + +“The plot thickens,” he mutters, then gestures toward the computer. “Why don’t you see what you can find there as far as internal records on these three?” + +You nod and take a seat, flashing your wrist at the sensor. The computer blips once and you’re in. You have a pretty high clearance. Higher even than Hinsman’s you suspect, although that’s not really a thing you’re supposed to ask anyone about. Retrieving sensitive data from wrecked Order ships or evacuated command stations is one of the things you need to be able to do with no fuss when required, and your superiors know this. +> Look up Matti +Name: Matilda Oswen +Eyes: green +Hair: blonde +Height: 5’3” +Weight: 122 +Age: 26 +Other: stationed at The Last Outpost for completion of training +Origin: Camarov IV +Skills: fringe space station maintenance +Years service: 1<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It seems Oswen had been trying to unjam a door that leads to one of the station’s storage arms, in much the same way Hinsman had gotten you all into the central complex earlier. It was her misfortune that upon receiving a jolt from a maintenance tool the door had snapped shut, meaning it had been open to begin with. + +There’s enough juice left to get it back to where it was and you carefully retrieve the severed limb on the other side, slipping it into a biohazard bag. Taking a moment to confirm with Hinsman there’s nothing he can do as far as reattaching it, you consider your options for disposal. An incinerator would the most straightforward, but those require an amount of energy that seems wasteful if not impossible to produce given the station’s current reliance on emergency backup power for life support. + +You remember then the walk in freezer in the kitchen behind the dining hall. At least that would keep it from rotting if it takes longer that expected to get the power on full. The room isn’t able to maintain freezing temps anymore but it’s still noticeably colder than the rest of the station, and the rest of the station is cold enough. Placing the bagged arm on a shelf, you halt a moment as your gaze fixes on the two bundled forms in the back. So you weren’t the first one to have the idea to use the place as an impromptu morgue. These must be the bodies of the other two maintenance workers, Inea and Markov. +> Go finish cleaning +You come across no shortage of corpses in your line of work and so you have little curiosity about these two, morbid or otherwise. When Matti awakens, Hinsman will question her about the deaths, but aside from some practical knowledge in the area no one here is exactly a forensics expert. That’ll be the job of the team the Order will dispatch to deal with the situation out here. + +You exit the freezer, pausing to grab a mop from a corner of the kitchen and fill up a bucket. Returning to where you’d found Matti, you go to work. The blood has begun to dry and it’s obvious this will take awhile so you clear out your mind and focus on the task. +> Back to the nursing station +Matti is asleep. Hinsman is seated at a table near the bed, freshly showered and changed into a grey jumpsuit identical to yours and looking exhausted. Karoff is nowhere to be seen. + +“He’s back on the ship seeing how much power we can spare,” Hinsman tells you, before you can ask. “This medical station’s about the only thing working as intended in this place right now. We need to at least get the computers up before we can figure out what all needs to be repaired and how. It’d be really great if we had a maintenance worker familiar with the place to talk to, but...” He inclines his head toward the young woman’s supine form and shrugs. The end of what’s left of her arm is neatly wrapped in bandages, but her face looks pale and strained even in her sleep and her eyes twitch restlessly behind her lids. + +There doesn’t seem to be anything you’re able to help with here, so you start to head back to the ship to find Karoff and wind up meeting up with him in the arm of the docking bay. He’s got a hovering platform loaded with equipment next to him and is attaching a power node to a panel. + +“Oh, there you are Zee, perfect. I need you to distribute the rest of these EPNs around the central complex.” He gestures at the platform. “I’ll come along behind you in a bit and rig them up.” + +The EPNs--external power nodes--can be linked in to bypass dead or damaged areas in the regular power system. It’s likely some trial and error will be needed but you doubt it will take more than a couple of hours if all he cares about is the main section and the docking bay. The other seven arms of the station can just stay sealed off until a proper repair team comes in. + +You return to the central area of the station and begin setting down the EPNs near accessible panels and in a short while you’ve covered the perimeter and begin making your way back. All is quiet until just as you pass a narrow hallway you hear a voice. “Zani, get inside!” + +You whirl, activating the short range laser weapon you always have with you. The voice had been a woman’s, sounding frantic and seeming to come from close by. But you see nothing. You shine your light down the hallway you’d just passed, revealing a row of half a dozen closed doors on each side. +> Search the hallway +You want to verify there’s a threat before you call anyone else in. Even though you’re not suited up at the moment you feel pretty confident in your ability to handle a few trespassers anyhow so there’s no point in risking the others if they prove hostile. + +You ghost down the dark hall opening doors one by one and shining your flashlight around. The rooms all appear to be crew quarters and although you search any place anyone could hide, they’re all empty and only three show any recent signs of usage. + +Retreating back to the entrance the hall, you widen the scope of your search, but after another half hour are forced to admit to yourself there’s no one here after all. This wouldn’t be the first time you’ve had...hallucinations in the past. Or whatever the technical term would be for you. They have to get pretty bad before they impair your ability to work, but the woman’s voice had seemed so close and chillingly real. You’ll have to keep aware of the possibility of it happening again now. If it gets worse, you know you’ll have to report it, but for now you’re just glad you didn’t drag anyone else down here for no reason. + +You return to the crew quarters to look once again at the rooms the current maintenance crew were occupying, although more out of curiosity about them than any expectation you’ll locate your phantom voices. The walls of Matti’s room are covered in projected images of performers and celebrities...you recognize many of them from the media Karoff downloaded from Camarov. + +Inea’s room contains images of a family, presumably hers, and several empty bottles that indicate she had a minor pill habit. Nothing illegal enough for you to care about--even less so now that she’s dead--and most of them are expired anyhow and you suspect taken from the station’s abandoned medical arm. + +Markov’s room is somewhat grubby with dirty clothes tossed carelessly around. Your eyes are drawn to his desk immediately as the only uncluttered spot in the room. After a moment you realize that’s because his personal computer is gone. Every other room, even the empty ones, had one of the devices built into the desk surface. +> Search for the missing computer +The crew quarters aren’t large. If the computer is in here there’s only so many places it can be, and a methodical sweep of the room, closet and bathroom finally turns it up--slid into a pair of brackets fitted to the underside of the nightstand drawer. Just as you slide it out, the lights flicker on. Karoff’s triumphant voice sounds over the intercom, followed a moment later by Hinsman congratulating him. + +You however have your attention glued to the activated screen. It’s still an Order-issued computer so your wrist chip was able to get you in, and what you’re looking at is intriguing. Four days before Markov triggered the explosion that took his life--and nearly took out an infinitely more valuable outpost--he started sending and receiving a series of encrypted messages on a private frequency. + +What it all means or if it’s even related to his actions at all you can’t say just yet, but it’s obviously something to look into. You take the computer with you return to where you left the hover platform. The main computer room Karoff’s working in now is quite close so you take a detour to speak to him. +> Frequencies +“Interesting. What was he up too, I wonder?” Karoff peers at the coded messages thoughtfully. “The main computer should be able to unencrypt these though. We’ll just leave it hooked up here and let it do its thing. The damage report for the station is almost done compiling anyhow.” + +“How bad is it?” + +He spins in his chair to face a new screen, chewing on a dirty thumbnail. “Hmm, let’s see. This would indicate The Last Outpost is...yup, it’s damaged all right. And needs repairs. From people who are not us.” + +“So nothing immediate needs attending to? There’s nothing wrong that would put you or Hinsman in danger if you waited here a few days?” + +“Well, unsealing some of the station’s arms would be pretty fatal. They took the brunt of Matti’s hack rerouting job and a couple lost atmosphere. The old medical wing itself is in real bad shape obviously, that’s where Markov set off the first explosion. But all we really need is life support and power here and in the docking bay. We don’t really have enough power for the rest of the station anyway as long as we’re siphoning from the ship. I’ll go and seal anything unnecessary off in a bit and then we don’t even need to worry about leaving them with life support.” + +Good. That means you can leave here and continue carrying out your orders just as soon as this mess with the dead workers is sorted out. + +“By the way, Hinsman is going to try waking Oswen up for a little while and then wanted us there afterwards to sort of put our heads together on how to handle all this,” Karoff adds, nearly reading your mind. + +You step toward the door. “I’ll go now.” + +“Eh, what’s the rush? But I’ll be there after I finish a couple things. We’re all just gonna sit around till the relief team arrives either way.” + +“I could go and take care of my mission while the two of you wait. Hinsman suggested that earlier, remember?” + +Karoff snorts and shakes his head slowly as he turns his attention back to his screen. “Don’t you ever get tired of working so hard?” + +You’re a little take aback by the question. “No?” +> Matti's Story +Matti Oswen is awake and speaking with Hinsman already when you enter. They pause and look up at the soft whoosh of the door, but you take up position in an unobtrusive spot next to it and stay quiet till they resume the conversation. Oswen’s words are hardly above a whisper. Her face is drawn and she’s clearly in pain. Hinsman in his usual way is breezily taking her mind off things while leading her along to a series of key questions and not making it obvious that’s what he’s doing. + +“...I don’t know what happened to Inea exactly. She was just replacing some conduits in the old medical wing...standard stuff, it’s got to be done every four years even in the areas no one uses anymore. Something fell and hit her on the head, he told me. But Markov was in shock, or something like it so he never really went into detail. He hardly left his room for two days, and after that he...” she swallows hard and then continues at his gentle prompting. “I mean, it never seemed that they were like, close close, but they’d worked together a long time, and I can’t think of any other reason he’d do what he did.” + +“Was a report sent in about Inea’s death?” + +She nods. “We sent one, yes. Markov filled in the details of course, since I wasn’t there.” + +Hinsman looks at her intently a moment, then begins asking her some simple questions about their routines around the station, listening patiently to her answers before coming back around to Markov. “So when did you first realize what he was doing?” + +“Like I said, I’d barely seen him in two days. That wasn’t unusual even when there were three of us if we happened to be working on different areas of the station, but I was worried enough about how he was taking things I even went and knocked on his door once. He wouldn’t answer. Although that day that...everything happened he turned the intercom on a couple of times.” + +“What did he say?” + +“Well...nothing. I could hear him breathing and got the idea he was about to say something, but then it would cut out. I was definitely on edge by that time and not sleeping well, but I kept telling myself a team would be here soon, they’d pick up Inea’s body and station someone else here and surely they’d notice what a wreck Mark was and do something to h-help.” She has to stop a moment, and draws a shuddering breath. + +“And then what happened?” + +I was taking a break in the main computer room...I’d decided to sit in a VR film actually, to take my mind off things. Then all of a sudden a bunch of alerts started sounding.” + +Something crawls along your arm and you brush it away. An ant or something is your immediate assumption. A strong fragrance of freshly cut grass lingers in your nostrils. + +“Look at the birds, Mommy!” + +“Zani, get inside!” + +With the interference of the audio hallucinations you come back to yourself. An insect of any kind would be highly unlikely to have hitchhiked this far, and the scent of grass is not something you're certain you've even encountered enough to readily identify. Not to mention your sense of smell is rudimentary at best. + +Oswen has been describing how she counteracted Markov's attempt to destroy the station. “It's almost funny, covering that exact scenario was one of the last things we did in training before they sent me out here. And it just hadn't really sunk in even then that he would really do something like that intentionally. But it worked just like they said it would.” + +Touching your arm, you vividly remember the tickling, crawling sensation and look carefully at your clothes and the floor. There is no ant. + +You shake your head to banish these distractions and refocus. You don’t want to miss anything important. + +“There was a critical overload there in the medical arm where Mark had started the chain reaction, but I was able to redirect the worst of the rest into the arms next to it, so the blown generators were the only damage to the central complex.” + +“And when did you recover Markov's body?” + +“Well he wasn't dead yet, is the thing. The emergency shields were still holding in that section and the computer showed a life sign so I put on a breathing mask and went to try and drag him out.” + +“That was risky.” + +She gives another shaky laugh as she recalls the events. “The anti-grav was already down, and I had to cross this section where the wall and floor was just...gone, so I was terrified the shields would collapse and blow me right out into space. And then when I got to him he was covered in blood, almost unrecognizable. He was trying to unlock a cabinet but his hands were all torn up. There was broken glass and like, shrapnel, all in his skin. Some of it looked deep. And...the most difficult thing was he just wasn't himself.” Her expression darkens. “He'd completely lost it, really. He screamed at me to get away and struggled and fought me. I ended up slashing open my arm on a big piece of bloody glass--” + +She falls silent a moment as her gaze drops to the bandaged stub. “Well. I guess that doesn't matter now, huh?” + +Hinsman murmurs something sympathetic and she continues. “And then he just straight up tried to kill me. Grabbed for my throat, and I kicked him and...I don't know exactly, we got separated and I was trying to orient myself because I was panicking and, you know, the gravity. And then he was just dead. I wasn't really thinking at that point, I hauled him back to the central complex, I was thinking something could be done, like the nursing AI would help or he could be put in cryo or something, you know, like in the VRs...but then of course once we reached Central the gravity kicked back in and I couldn't move him anymore, plus I was bleeding all over everything. I made sure nothing else was going to explode and then went to treat my arm, and brought a platform to lift him later. I moved Inea's body then too...to, to the dining hall freezer.” She sounds momentarily embarrassed and lowers her voice for that, as if she thinks the New Terra health department might overhear and swoop in and shut the place down. “Since the power was out completely in that section and we still had it on low in parts of Central.” + +Matti stops herself and winces. “I mean...not we. It was just me at that point. The most useless person around so of course I survived.” + +“You handled all of that as well as anyone could have and I think better than most,” Hinsman reassures her. “The rescue attempt is probably more than I would've tried, and you had no way of realizing then how far gone he was.” + +“I just can't figure it out, why he would...” Matti trails off and shifts on the bed, closing her eyes and wincing. “I'm just so tired.” + +“Get some rest. You've been a great help and I think you've explained most of what I could think to ask.” + +“Why were you sealing off the door to the storage wing?” This time the question comes from you. Hinsman gives you an irritated look at the interruption. Perhaps your tone was too blunt for his liking, but it really is something that had seemed odd to when you were cleaning up. + +“Oh. Well I knew all of you would be boarding soon, so I thought I should try to pull myself together and...you know, do my job for once. The power would be easier to get back on in the central complex if all the arms could be sealed off, and the storage wing door was jammed open.” + +You nod but say nothing. + +Matti rests her head weakly against the pillows. “I should've just stayed there with my ice cream. I could really go for some now anyway, damn...” + +“I'll heat up some dinner for you soon, from our ship,” Hinsman promises. “I don't know about ice cream, we don't travel quite that luxurious, but we may have something that can pass as dessert around.” + +“Thanks,” she gives him a wan smile and leans her head back against her pillow, her blonde hair spread out on the pillow to frame her strained face like a halo. + +“Zee, let's go outside. I've been needing to talk to you and Karoff...where is he, anyway?” + +You'd already turned to exit with Hinsman stepping out into the hall behind you when you both spot the pilot coming down the hall. + +“Perfect,” Hinsman says. + +“I know I am.” Karoff replies with a wink. “But did I miss anything important?” +> Inference +“Miss Oswen gave me enough details on the cause of the damage to start writing a report, at least, but some things still don’t sit right with me. Even if Inea’s death made him suicidal I still don’t understand Markov’s motivation for trying to take out the entire station, for one...” + +“He had the space crazies!” + +“...I can’t put that in a report. But unfortunately Oswen had very little contact with him following Inea’s death. And we don’t even really know what happened to Inea herself other than Zee’s examination indicating blunt force trauma to the head.” + +“Ah, about that.” Karoff fishes something out of his pocket and taps a button. “Relevant?” + +A 3D image of an energy canister is projected into the air in front of you all. You recognize the type; the larger energy cells can be volatile, so the canisters are made with half an inch of steel and an interior enamel coating for protection. This one is about the size of a fire extinguisher, which is typical. + +What’s not typical about this one however is the is the dried blood and long strands of dark hair caught up on the outside of the sealing mechanism. + +“Where the hell did you find that?” Hinsman wants to know. + +“In the storage arm where Miss Oswen lost hers. There are a lot of spent canisters piled up in there, and I was looking for more power cables just now and stumbled across this one.” + +Hinsman’s brow is deeply furrowed as he studies the projection. “That is just suspicious as hell. Has anyone had a look at the body yet?” + +You and Karoff both shake your heads, and as Matti had just mentioned where they were stored, the three of you make your way to the dining hall. + +The two bodies are on gurneys, zipped up in body bags in the back of the freezer. You open the bag holding the smaller form, ignoring Karoff’s inquiries as to whether letting restaurant kitchens rent freezer space to morgues could be a viable alternate source of income. + +Upon examination the dark haired woman’s cause of death is immediately obvious, her skull on the left side having been caved in just above and behind the ear. + +“Not a glancing blow, either. There’s no way that happens from a spent fuel canister falling on someone’s head. Not even a full one.” + +After a long moment he sighs and steps back. “All right, let’s go over what facts we have. About a week ago, Inea Banca was doing routine maintenance in the medical wing and had her skull caved in with an energy canister. Markov Karst then goes into seclusion for two days, at the end of which he goes to the medical wing and attempts to cause a power overload that will destroy the station; a major act of treason against the Order that will render a number of Outer Rim colony worlds and ships unable to receive emergency aid and also kill the young woman who remains here. A bit dramatic even for a suicide attempt, but I suppose not outside the realm of possibility. When it fails he become violent when Oswen attempts a rescue and dies moments after. Miss Oswen sends out a distress call that doesn’t seem to have gone through due to the failing power and waits here alone until we happen by. Does that all sound about right?” + +You mull that over while he and Karoff discuss the details a bit longer. + +“I’m sure there’s more investigating we can do,” Hinsman is saying. “The medical arm, for instance. That’s where everything happened.” + +Karoff shakes his head. “Atmosphere and shielding has failed and there are holes blown straight through the plating. It’d be too much a risk just to satisfy our curiosity, even for Zee.” + +“Fair. It doesn’t feel right to just sit around and wait on another team, though. We need to get together as much info as possible. It might be useful to read over the personnel reports again, and...oh! There’s the report they sent in on Inea’s death.” Hinsman glances over at you. “And what about you, Zee? Let’s see that sharp analytical brain in action.” + +“My brain’s not any sharper than yours I’m afraid. And too bad, some kind of AI to analyze things might be more what you need right now.” But you’ve been following a particular train of thought, and at his prompting you decide to give it voice. “But they didn’t fill out a death report on Inea Banca. I don’t know why Oswen claimed that. Banca was still listed as alive in their database when Karoff pulled up her file, right before we boarded. So in fact, I believe that...” +> “Matti killed Inea and then Markov to cover her tracks.” +“What?” Hinsman seems taken aback. “Where are you getting that from?” + +Karoff scratches his head. “Uh, Zee, I know that was my original theory, but I’m not so sure now. Markov did try to blow up the station.” + +“Do we have any proof of that? Or of anything Oswen has claimed?” You wait. When neither is able to give a satisfactory answer, you continue. “It’s a possibility we have to consider, at least. All we really know is that Banca and Carst are dead and that someone damaged the station in a way that made most of the evidence inaccessible. And that Oswen tried to seal off the entire the entire wing containing the murder weapon right after we arrived.” + +A couple of times while you were speaking Hinsman looked ready to interrupt, and now he cuts in as you pause, raking his fingers through his dark hair. “Zee, you can't seriously...urgh, I guess you're always serious. But Matti isn't a killer.” + +“How can you be sure of that?” + +“Because dammit. I can tell when people are lying. Matti's not like that.” + +The force of his protest surprises you. “Can people tell when you lie to them?” + +That at least gets a short laugh. “No,” he admits. “But I've had a couple more decades practice don't forget. You can trust me on this one though, Zee. That little girl's not some cold blooded killer.” + +You frown. “I'm not denying you're better at reading people than I am. But at least one murder occurred and serious damage was done to a vital Order refueling station. You know I'm not saying anything anyone at HQ won't bring up. We need to look at real evidence, and for now all we have is one person's word for it.” + +“We're not qualified for this legal crap,” Karoff complains. + +“It's the Outer Rim, buddy, we make our own law,” Hinsman replies. “Hell, nobody should've ever gone out this far at all.” + +“Well now you just sound like a dirty anti-frontierist. But my point is that according to their files, Inea and Matti are both from Camerov IV. Pop them both in cryo and aim them at the planet. They can sort out the murder and if Matti turns out to have done any of the damage to the station she'll be right there and handy to retrieve.” + +Hinsman laughs at that. “You make it sound like we're such good friends with the Camerovs. They'd just love us dumping her off and then swooping in to grab her again I bet.” + +“Yeah well I've got a dozen fusion torpedoes that say they won't complain too hard.” + +“Jesus Christ, I'm definitely not getting a bonus this year if I let you start a war. Anyway, everything else aside, Matti's lost a ton of blood and is pretty weak still. A cryo pod would be too much of a risk.” + +“If there's anything to Zee's theory, she could be a risk to us, keep in mind.” + +“Yeah, I realize that.” Hinsman looks unhappy enough that you almost hope that you're wrong. You've been slowly losing your mind lately anyway, what's one bad theory? + +“Well...we can check for the report,” Karoff offers. “The one on Banca. Maybe it wasn't ever finalized and sent but we'll see if we can verify at least that much of her story. And if it exists it may have more details.” + +Hinsman nods. “All right, let's do that.” +> Interference +“I can absolutely, definitely, factually say with complete certainty , all serious, and not the slightest hesitation...” Karoff twists in his seat to regard Hinsman as he speaks. “...that the report on Inea Banca's death does not exist.” + +“Are you serious? Are you sure?” + +“Hinsman, I don't feel like you heard me. Absolutely, definitely--” + +“All right enough. Dammit. Did you check to make sure it didn't get caught in the buffer? Maybe it's still trying to send. The power hasn't been back on for long.” + +“There weren't any problems with the power at the time the report would've been made. That was before Markov pulled his stunt,” you point out. + +“Just check,” he tells Karoff. + +“Checking, and...nothing. Wait.” He pauses and frowns. “Well none of these are the report, but it looks like a batch of personal letters Inea tried to send a day before her death never went through either.” + +“What do they say?” + +“Hinsman!” Karoff gives a mock gasp and assumes a scandalized tone. “They're personal letters!” He's already pulling the first one up, and you catch a brief glimpse of Banca's smiling face at the beginning of a video before he switches to the readout and scrolls rapidly past pages of text asking how various people, children and pets are, some jokes about a co-worker having a crush on her and discussion of a new VR film. + +“All pretty standard inane family garbage,” Karoff says in helpful summary. + +Hinsman frowns. “Well, make sure they don't get lost. I'm sure the family will think more of them than you do, considering. But why didn't it send? Were they isolated from the network before the power went out? How would that happen?” + +“I'll tell you in exchange for a colorful parrot and a bottle of rum.” + +“You think so?” + +“Oh, I know so, now. You see...” Karoff twists the screen so Hinsman can see it. You shuffle around behind him to get a look too. + +“That's the same encryption the messages on Markov's computer used,” you say. + +“Right. Because it would appear that someone...can't imagine who...installed a little something to communicate with a probe somewhere. The probe in turn has been intercepting any outgoing messages, as of at least one day before Banca's murder. They’re getting a little fancier with their methods but cutting communication before an attack is the classic technique.” + +“So, we have pirates coming this way? Well damn. If they started out right after everything went down they’d be about right on top of us too if they went into underspace from any of the neighboring stars.” He considers that a moment and then shrugs. “But there’s three of us and what, maybe a couple dozen of them? We’ve all fought with worse odds. We can hold them off till help arrives.” + +“Oh, but precious, naive little Hinsman, it’s worse than you think. The probe has been intercepting all outgoing signals. There won’t be any help arriving for Miss Oswen or for the station or ourselves, because no one knows we need it. Also, don’t forget shielding and all defenses are down.” + +“Shit.” + +There is an encouraging beep just then and all eyes turn to Markov's computer. + +“Well it’s not the blueprints for an anti-pirate device so don’t get excited or anything,” Karoff says, picking up the device and activating the screen. “And it’s not even finished yet, that was just the first run. Still, might be enough to give us a better idea of what the situation is." +> Markov's Secret +Most of the text Karoff scrolls past is gibberish, but a few of the messages are partially deciphered. Even these prove frustrating however as even the ones where you can make out sentences are delicately phrased with deliberate obliqueness. But as the messages near the end, they suddenly start dropping the pretense. + +“Ah, here we go. Well that’s right to the point, isn’t it?” + +You peer over Karoff’s shoulder at the screen. + +^ou’ve al%ead^ killed ove% this. It’s too late to back out now. ^ou can take ^ou% mone^ o% a hole th%ough the skull--we’%e coming fo% the package eithe% way, so ^ou’d do well to think twice befo%e ^ou do anything ^ou’ll %eg%et. + +As to ^ou% question, it ain’t nothing but sweet %evenge, Ma%kie bab^. The^ tu%ned us back du%ing the evacuations. We couldn’t ‘p%ove’ we we%en’t infected and what we%e we to them but a bunch of shitkicking fa%mers and %anchers? Well we didn’t have Hunge% but we got hung%^ ENOUGH limping a%ound the %im to find a new home and plent^ of us died of infection all %ight--just plain o%dina%y bo%ing Old Ea%th influenza that could’ve been cu%ed if we’d had even the most p%imitive aid. My wife and daughte% among them. + +The o%ganization ^ou wo%k fo% has blood on its hands, and don’t even think it stops the%e. A lot of ou% people ma^ have gotten complacent once the^ %esettled, all this talk of ‘moving on’, but that’s just not fo% me and m^ f%iends. We won’t fo%get and we won’t allow them too eithe%. And I’ve made man^ mo%e f%iends %ecentl^. We’%e getting ou% %evenge, and I think ^ou know exactly how. + +See ^a soon, Ma%k. + +--W. Ho%seman + + +“So we’ve definitely got pirates coming this way.” Hinsman says with a rueful shake of his head. “Or terrorists, anyway. Even better, right? And so much for your theory on Matti, Zee.” + +“Any theories on what the package is?” you ask after a moment’s silence. + +“Carst is from Galton Station, isn’t he?” Karoff asks. “I think I saw it in his file. I’ve been there once or twice, and don’t ask for what. But they all but advertise they’re a black market.” + +Hinsman nods, looking grim. “Most likely blueprints for illegal weapons tech, or an ethics-stripped AI. Something small Carst could easily smuggle back over here the last time he was on leave. And something valuable and risky enough he’d kill anybody who got in his way.” + +Karoff taps around on the screen some more. “Too bad he didn’t survive,” he finally says with a sigh. “Because I’d sure like to kill him myself right now. Scans found the probe by the way. Way out there on the edge of the system.” + +“Oh really? That’s something at least. Although it’ll take time to get to and disable, and I’m not sure we can spare that right now. We need to start thinking of how to defend ourselves.” + +“The sooner we get a distress call out the sooner we can put an end to all this,” Karoff says. “We’re nothing but a target right now, with the defenses down and if there’s enough of them they can wear us down eventually without much risk to themselves.” + +“Can the defenses be repaired?” + +Karoff winces. “I was afraid you were gonna ask that. And technically yes, but it’s a big job. The turrets are in every arm of the station and we’ll need to get power to all of them, which means cutting back here in the central area.” + +They both sink into a grim silence for a bit, before Hinsman finally looks over. “All right Zee, I guess you get the tiebreaker. What are you most in the mood for right now?” +> Take out the probe +With no time to delay or hesitate, you’re moving toward the docking bay within moments of making your decision while Karoff hurries along behind you and hits you with a barrage of rapid-fire instructions and advice for piloting one of the ship’s shuttles. + +“Whatever you do, don’t get it blown up!” + +“I’ll try my best.” + +The voices of your companions soon fade as you ease the shuttle out into the silence of space, aiming for the emptiest and coldest edge of the system and the coordinates Karoff pinpointed. You blink in and out of underspace a couple of times the way he showed you, or else the trip would take days. Risky in a populated or debris-filled system for someone without much training, but there’s nothing much to worry about colliding with out here. + +The probe is right where it’s supposed to be. It’d be possible to target with a missile now, but your initial scan indicates it might be rather unusual in design. Retrieving it intact might lead to clues about its maker, certainly the sort of person the Order would want to shut down...or recruit. +> Retrieve it. +You ease the shuttle closer, and closer still. The viewscreen isn’t needed to get a visual on the probe now; you can just look out the window. It’s small, but the slender segmented form puts you in mind of a wasp, with a pair of satellites making up the ‘wings’. The design is sleek and something about it worries you. The longer you look at it the more you get the sense it’s dangerous somehow. But that’s just all the more reason to take it out of commission. +> Bring it on board. +The shuttle has a pair of grappling claws for specimen retrieval which you now deploy. Moving with utmost care so as not to nudge your target and send it spinning off into space, you grip the probe and draw it into the cargo hold. + +The hold door slides shut, and the grappling claws fold themselves back into place. Glancing at the probe on the viewscreen, you see a red light blink on. Before you can even wonder what that means an explosion rips through the vessel, splitting the belly of it wide open and spilling you along with the rest of its contents out into the space. You tumble among the shattered remains of what used to be the shuttle, and the last thing you think before you’re vaporized by the detonating power core of the underspace drive is that Karoff will not be happy.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You ease the shuttle closer, and closer still. The viewscreen isn’t needed to get a visual on the probe now; you can just look out the window. It’s small, but the slender segmented form puts you in mind of a wasp, with a pair of satellites making up the ‘wings’. The design is sleek and something about it worries you. The longer you look at it the more you get the sense it’s dangerous somehow. But that’s just all the more reason to take it out of commission. +> Disable it with laser fire to be safe. +A precisely aimed laser from close range is a far cry from a fusion torpedo, and won’t harm the probe in any way that would prevent it from being studied. You target the spherical ‘head’ of the wasp and fire. + +A quick spit of green light burns a tiny hole through what you hope is the central processor. A moment later you realize your error however as the shot has not only failed to disable the probe, but triggered a response in return. The shield indicator on your screen blinks to zero for a split second, accompanied by a sound of metal clinking against the outside of the ship. + +“What the--” + +Crackling energy is suddenly crawling from every wall. The wave rips through you and your vision goes white, then black. You’re dimly conscious of hitting the floor, and then never wake up again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With no time to delay or hesitate, you’re moving toward the docking bay within moments of making your decision while Karoff hurries along behind you and hits you with a barrage of rapid-fire instructions and advice for piloting one of the ship’s shuttles. + +“Whatever you do, don’t get it blown up!” + +“I’ll try my best.” + +The voices of your companions soon fade as you ease the shuttle out into the silence of space, aiming for the emptiest and coldest edge of the system and the coordinates Karoff pinpointed. You blink in and out of underspace a couple of times the way he showed you, or else the trip would take days. Risky in a populated or debris-filled system for someone without much training, but there’s nothing much to worry about colliding with out here. + +The probe is right where it’s supposed to be. It’d be possible to target with a missile now, but your initial scan indicates it might be rather unusual in design. Retrieving it intact might lead to clues about its maker, certainly the sort of person the Order would want to shut down...or recruit. +> Just blow it up. +The targeting system only allows missiles to be fired from a certain distance, depending on the size and movement speed of whatever you’re aiming for. Given the threat a loose missile can pose flying unchecked through space, forever, the idea is to prevent anything that’s not a pretty sure shot. You’re right at the edge of that distance now. The probe is small and so you carefully line up your shot before launching the missile. + +It takes a few minutes to reach its destination, during which you watch the little blipping light traveling on your screen and remember why you prefer ground combat. + +The probe unleashes an inordinately powerful blast of energy when it explodes, the shockwave sending your shuttle tumbling into a backwards roll. You breathe in acrid smoke. From somewhere, shouts of fear and anger, pounding boots mingled with muffled explosions. You are underground but not deep enough to be safe. Striking desperately at the console, you halt your momentum and steady the ship. In a moment you reorient yourself. + +Your shuttle is fine. And a quick scan reveals your target has been reduced to cosmic dust. It must’ve been packing more than the average probe to trigger an explosion of that magnitude, but you’ll never know for sure now. There’s nothing left to salvage. + +Before making your way back to the Last Outpost, you immediately transmit the distress signal Hinsman had prepared, although you know it’ll still take a week before anyone arrives. Anyone on your side, anyway. +> Repair defenses +Hinsman and Karoff are already ripping out most of the EPNs that were so recently installed by the time you finish suiting up. Your sleek one piece outfit is in the Order colors of dark blue and grey, and more than just a uniform. With the addition of your helmet with its built in breathing mask it serves as well in combat as any armor, and protects you in any climate and even for a time in open space. It feels good to be back in it. Between the detour through the Camarov system and then the stop here you’ve been running around without it for an unusually long time. + +Hinsman charges by with a load of power cables draped over one arm, then checks himself mid-stride and comes back over to you. “Zee, question.” + +“Yes?” + +“Do you think we should put Matti in cryo and send her out of here?” + +“You’re asking me?” You’re a little surprised. He hadn’t seemed to like hearing your opinions on Matti very much a little earlier. + +“Not that I’m giving much credence to your theory about her. I’m asking you now, just as a matter of risk assessment, how putting an injured and weakened woman in a cryo pod would stack up to having her stay here with a hostile force on the way.” + +You pause a moment to run over both scenarios. The cryo is a significant risk, but a one time thing. The possibility of attack is an ever evolving situation with the threat level varying from not worth mentioning to all of you dead and the station destroyed. Plus, even with Hinsman telling you to disregard the thought, there’s the possibility Matti might not be trustworthy. You know already that he won’t include any of your suspicions in the note to the Camarovians and they won’t investigate nearly as thoroughly as the Order would even if he did. But guilty or innocent, the rest of you may soon have your hands too full to pay attention to her if you do get company. + +Finally you reply. +> "It's better to send her back to Camarov." +Hinsman nods in agreement. “Probably for the best now that we’ve got a target painted on us. I’ll explain things to her this evening and get her in the pod first thing in the morning.” + + + +You both drag piles of equipment about while Karoff diverts more power from the ship, as much as can be spared, and even sacrifices most of the shuttles. Before long the equipment is in place and the three of you begin rigging up cables, energy cells, power nodes and anything you can find that can produce or transfer a charge down each of the station’s splayed arms to the laser and torpedo turrets mounted at their tips. + +Finally, the heavily damaged medical wing is the last that needs attention. That’s all on you. + +“Think we can get by without that one?” Hinsman asks. + +Karoff shakes his head. “Without the turrets that’s a biiiig area where they can get in close and freely maneuver and we can’t touch them.” + +“Figured. All right then Zee, off you go. Just hook up these cables and don’t slip and go floating off into space, it’ll be a pain in the ass to collect you again. One of us will keep in voice contact while you’re there.” + + +You stand in the airlock, the minutes ticking by while you wait for the atmosphere to slowly equalize with that of the absent one in the medical wing. You know you’re getting close when you begin to float in place. + +Once the door opens and you drift into the entrance to the medical wing, you search for the panel Karoff told you about. It’s about the only one here that hasn’t had its conduits fried, and you remove a connector you’ll need. That and the EPN loaded with an energy canister you have strapped to your back should be all you need to power the turrets. After checking in on your wrist comm you start to make your way on down to the hall. + +You carry a cable as well, meant to be attached to your suit. If you were following safety recommendations, one of the two clips along the length should always be anchored to something. You’re not entirely sure you need it however. The sides of this section have blown out in some places but you can just avoid getting too near the edge of those gaps. Using the tethered cable is fine when working in one place, but tediously slow when trying to move. +> Follow safety regulations +You begin to make your way slowly, carefully along. There’s a bar that runs along the side of the hall that you use for your tether. You fall into a rhythm of attaching one clip, then the other, then unclipping the first, move forward and repeat. Every so often there’s a crackle from your headset as someone checks on you, but the dark halls are otherwise eerily silent. Doors line the walls on either side of you, firmly shutting away their secrets. One door is hanging open and askew on cracked hinges, and you see the long room beyond it is filled with rusting rows of bolted down bedframes. An infirmary at some time in the past, now with the back wall now ripped open to expose them to space. You can see the pale face of the barren rock the station orbits through the gap. + +You drift down an elevator shaft and after a measured distance begin cutting your way out with a laser torch. Gripping the handrail behind you, you kick the slab of metal free. It tumbles forward, and forward, and out into space. Where you expected to find more hallway, you’re now looking at a mostly missing wall, the blown out section large enough to pilot a shuttle through. You’ve drifted out a short ways, watching the metal slab diminishing in the distance, still moving from the momentum of your kick. + +It’s then that you glance down and realize there’s nothing beneath your feet but the void of space and the twinkling of stars. Most of the floor in this section has also been blown away. You pedal your legs in a panic and shoot upwards a short distance until you’re suddenly snapped back. Grabbing at a projecting metal ledge, you steady yourself, realizing that if you hadn’t clipped the tether to the elevator’s handrail out of habit you might be in trouble right now. + +Below, you can just see the edges of other rooms on other floors parallel to this one; the section beneath you has been ripped out clear through to the bottom of the station. But thankfully you don’t have to try to float down through the big hole to reach the turret. Just, across it. +> Leap of Faith +Well, no sense in putting it off. You remind yourself that if her story is to be believed, poor, stupid, terrified Matti made this jump not once, but twice, and carrying Markov’s bloody body behind her the second time. Aiming yourself carefully in the direction you want to go, an airlock that leads to the last section of this wing, you use your legs to launch yourself towards it in a single smooth motion. On instinct you’ve angled your body into an aerodynamic shape, legs straight behind and arms stretched out in front of you, although you know it doesn’t really matter. As you sail across the gap, you stare downward into infinity. You feel like you’re flying. You feel like...a bird... + +Green grass. The smell of it. + +A long blade of green grass, striped by the horizontal bars of sunlight and shadow cast by its fellows. An ant crawls up the blade, in and out of the stripes. Another ant tickles your arm. + +New shadows race across the sun. There are silver wings in the distance, and a beautiful white light. + +“Look at the birds, Mommy!” + +“Zani, get inside!” + +The fresh smell of grass is replaced by acrid smoke. Screams and shouts. Muffled explosions in the distance. You are underground, but not deep enough. Boots thud overhead. Your sister is crying. You want to cry too. Everyone is afraid, even the adults. Especially the adults. + +“The Order!” + +“Oh my God, they’re killing everyone!” + +“We’re not infected! Listen to us, please!” + +“Zani, Nyla, run to the woods!” + +You’re running hard, pulling your sister behind you. There is another explosion, not so distant. The force hurls you hard against the ground. The grass is gone, the earth is a scorched and blackened wound. You and the earth are the same now. Where is Nyla? The pain is incredible. Blackness. You-- + +--you stare down into the blackness. You hit the wall on the other side hard but somehow instinctively grabbed the metal bar next to the airlock. The metal will surely bend, if you squeeze it any harder. Your eyes sting. Your chest aches like its simultaneously been hollowed out and is just about to burst. Physically you’re fine. But from your memory--and you know now for certain that it was a memory--you know now that this is what it feels like to want to cry. + +No tears stain your cheeks, of course. Your brain may be human, but most of the rest of you decidedly is not. Still, you feel weak, shaky, and can’t bring yourself to continue on for quite some time. Unless you deliberately keep your thoughts focused elsewhere, your mind drifts again and again to the memories. + +“The Order!” + +“Oh my God, they’re killing everyone!” + +Those two sentences in particular, shouted at a near hysterical pitch by a voice that seems hauntingly familiar plague you the most. You don’t like the implications. + +At some point you realize your communicator has been going off. Hinsman’s voice is speaking to you, sounding worried. + +You take a deep breath. “I’m fine.” Your words are faint, barely audible. + +“Are you sure, Zee?” He sounds skeptical. +> Tell him about the memories +“I...started hearing some things. But, it’s more like, remembering some things, really. And they’re not...good things.” + +A sigh. “The hallucinations again? How bad are th--” + +“They’re not hallucinations! They’re memories! Of my life, from before! Are you even listening?” The words spit from your lips. That hadn’t been your intention, but, it appeases something dark and angry inside of you to let them out. + +There’s a long pause on the other end. When Hinsman next speaks his voice is calm and careful. “That’s right, I’m sorry Zee, you did say memories. You might be experiencing a few, but, if it’s anything like last time, they’re presenting themselves in a disruptive fashion and mixing in invented details from elsewhere. You can’t rely on them one hundred percent.” + +“Invented? You mean like the Order purging my family’s colony? Are you saying that’s all invented?” You’re still angry. Not just at the questions the memories made you ask, but at the entire situation and what you know it will eventually lead to. You need to pull yourself together, you know this. If nothing else, this is an astoundingly bad time and place to be having a crisis. But Hinsman’s got his most soothing voice on and it doesn’t really have its intended effect when you know exactly what he’s doing. + +“I don’t know, Zee. I’m sorry but I genuinely don’t know the situation prior to your original activation. And...if it helps, you don’t have to think of it as ‘you’, you know. You are a trusted and capable Order operative, with people who respect and value you. You’re simply built around the brain of someone long dead who may have had a tragedy befall them.” + +“A tragedy the Order caused.” + +Hinsman sighs again. “Y’know, Zee, the human brain is a complicated thing. We still don’t entirely understand everything about it. You need to consider the way dreams take real information and memories, and transpose them with--” + +“All right, all right,” you cut him off. “Spare me your horseshit. I need to get this turret activated.” Now it’s your turn to sigh. “Anyway, I’m guessing we’ve probably had this conversation before?” + +“A couple of times. ‘Fraid so. Now take care of yourself and stay focused, Zee. We need you.” + +“Yeah.” +> Staying focused. +Yanking on the handle of the airlock door, you hear the locking mechanism disengage with a satisfying clank. Once inside, you seal it behind you again before proceeding. This last segment of the medical arm lost gravity and life support with the others, but was never exposed directly to space. It seems likely the actual origin of the sabotage was the area you were just in, with the chain of explosions moving from there in the direction of the central part of the station. + +There is quite a bit of floating furniture and assorted medical equipment and other clutter to maneuver through, but thankfully there are no major obstacles or...other distractions between you and the turret. You power and arm it, checking the status of the torpedoes and ensuring everything seems to be in working order before giving the others a call. Karoff confirms the gun is online and you begin to make your way back. + +You still are struggling a bit to keep your head clear, and begin reading the labels on the doors you pass and counting them too to keep your thoughts from wandering back to the that same place, the stripes of sunlight across the grass, again and again. + +What should be door number twenty-eight is open, and when you shine your light inside it falls upon a long white cabinet inside. Particularly, upon the smears of dried blood upon it, one of them a near perfect hand print. + +“He was trying to unlock a cabinet but his hands were all torn up.” + +You recall Matti’s words from a few hours ago, although with far less clarity and immediacy that that of the woman who so long ago shouted for Zani and Nyla to run to the woods. Is this the room where Markov died? +> Stop awhile to investigate. +The cabinet seems the immediate point of interest. You shine your light across it. It’s bolted in place and so it hasn’t joined most of the rest of the furniture and assorted lab equipment in hovering against the middle of the far wall. You realize immediately it’s not really a cabinet at all, but a bank of freezer compartments. Oddly, it still has power. A bit of searching reveals where someone has wired in an EPN behind it. The blood smears are concentrated in one area, and you scrape it away from a combination lock it seems especially thick on. + +It’s a pretty standard lock. The combination possibilities are four alphanumeric characters, and Markov’s bloodied hands had set it as far as INE-. + +You click over the last letter to A and unsnap the lock. Glass vials hover against the top of the compartment. You reach in and gently sweep them out for a better look. Each are full of a frozen yellowish liquid. One of the vials is broken, empty. It’s got smears of red on it too. + +The vials tumble out of the freezer at your touch and float in a loose cluster just above you. You tilt your head and read the label clearly printed on each one: + + +HUNGER 1A-4 +> Protocol +You return to the central complex, making sure not to stare into the abyss this time as you cross it. + +“I’m fine,” you say in answer to Hinsman’s look when you enter, brushing past him. You actually do feel more relaxed and confident now. No longer uncertain, because protocol is very clear. You just need to verify something on your own first. It’s bad to cause a panic. Protocol is clear on that too. + +Except for the monitors in the main computer room turned command center, the station is once again dark. Somehow this environment seems to magnify the echo of footsteps. Peering around the curve of a corridor, you see another oasis of light washing against a wall; the nursing station where Matti is resting. + +You busy yourself the next several hours, putting equipment away, helping Karoff calibrate this or that and then doing your own work while he and Hinsman are sleeping. + +Early in the morning, printouts of the results on hand, you stride to the nursing station. Hinsman is there clearing away Matti’s breakfast tray. “If it’s not too much trouble, could I get a couple more pancakes?” you hear her ask as you enter. “I’m kind of hungry still, I guess because I’m recovering.” + +He gives her a good natured smile and starts to reply, and you drill a smoking hole through her head with your laser pistol. + +“Zee, what the FUCK?” Hinsman bellows, grabbing for his own gun and pointing it at you with a disbelieving stare. “Drop your weapon. NOW!” + +“She was infected.” + +“What? There’s no way! You’re losing it, Zee.” He takes a deep breath. You notice the hand that holds the gun is shaking. “You just committed a murder. I don’t want to shoot you but I’m not going to tell you again. Drop your weapon. We’ll put you in stasis until someone can fix you.” + +You continue in the same matter-of-fact voice. “Markov Carst was storing vials of the live virus in the medical wing. Maybe he even found them there--they could’ve been left behind when the station was originally abandoned. Around the time he sabotaged the station, he infected himself, probably accidentally. And then Oswen infected herself when she tried to rescue him. He was covered in bleeding wounds, and she cut herself too, remember?” You hold out the printouts. “I have proof. Last night I tested the bodies in the freezer, and her arm.” + +Still eying you distrustfully and not yet lowering his weapon, Hinsman steps forward to snatch the papers from your hand and moves away to skim the results. + +“Goddammit,” he finally sighs, sliding his gun back into the holster. He stands over Matti’s bed a long moment looking down at her, shoulders slumped and head bowed. After a long silence he sighs again and straightens. “Sometimes I hate this job.” + +“Believe me, that I understand.” + +“She died because she was too damn kind. None of us would’ve suited up and gone to try and rescue that piece of shit after he blew the power.” He turns to face you, then frowns. “Zee, you can put the gun down already. I believe you.” + +“Yes, I know, but there’s one more thing. You need to test yourself for the virus. Karoff too. I can’t let either of you leave this station or interact with anyone else until you do.” + +Hinsman stares at you, and you can see true extent of the situation finally sinking in. “Goddammit,” he breathes out again, then speaks into his wristcomm. “Karoff, I need you to come to the nursing station. It’s urgent.” +> The Test +“Clean. Both of you.” You snap the computer shut and the tension in the room evaporates amid sighs of relief. + +Karoff lets out a whoop. “Oh thank God. I was too pretty to die!” He stands and makes for the door. “Now if you’ll excuse me, I’m getting the hell out of this plague room.” + +Hinsman lingers a moment, pausing at the foot of Matti’s bed. You’ve draped a sheet over her and will take the body and bedding to be incinerated once he leaves. “Well we got lucky I guess. The one to pick her up when she was bleeding was the only one who couldn’t get infected. And somehow I didn’t catch anything treating her, or afterwards being near her almost constantly. She got damn unlucky though. And here I am the complete bastard while she was the sweet girl with her life ahead of her. I still can’t believe it turned out this way.” With a shake of his head he exits the room, not looking at you. + +You know Hinsman understands as well as anyone possibly could that you were just doing what you had to, but you suspect it’ll be awhile before he can bring himself to ever actually like you again. + +And then the moment arrives. An alert from the computer indicates something just emerged from underspace. Ahead of you the walk of the two men turns into a mad sprint down the hall. The three of you gather in the command center and Karoff quickly locates the ship. + +“No affiliation and armed to the teeth. Yep, we got a pirate.” + +Hinsman drains his faux coffee and sets the cup aside. “Just one? Shouldn’t be too hard to handle.” + +“Yeah, there’s...dammit! You jinxed us. Now there’s two, three...eight on approach. And they’re hard to track.” + +“Sensors didn’t pick them up?” you ask. + +“The first ship was a carrier. It’s how you disguise the size of your force if for instance, you think someone may have an alert set for anyone exiting underspace.” +> Activate the shields and turrets. +If Karoff can’t track the ships there could be one lining up a shot even now. You’d installed a few shortcuts on your console and wristcomm last night, preparing for the possibility you’d be working alone, and now tap a key. The lights in the command center dim briefly as outside the station the massive shield generators hum to life and the turrets ready themselves. Whatever they’d been expecting, anyone approaching will know the station has people inside ready to defend it now, and that you’d been expecting them. + +“They’re hailing us,” Karoff says. + +“Oh good, let me talk to them. Maybe they’re going to surrender.” + +Karoff smirks at the comment and patches the call through to the viewscreen. An older man with steel-grey hair and a scarred face looks down at Hinsman and says in a gravelly voice. “I see you have a ship locked into the bay. Whoever you are, I suggest you use it. We won’t stop you from leaving peacefully, but we’re taking this station and anyone who tries to stop us will most certainly be killed.” + +Hinsman looks unimpressed. “On the contrary, I think it’s you folks who’d better turn around and leave. The Last Outpost is an Order station vital to maintaining peace in the Outer Rim, and if you fire upon it it’s an act of war. We will hunt you down. There won’t be a single airless, lifeless rock left out there you can hide under.” + +The man smiles. “Well aren’t you a big talker. But have it your way. I tried to make this easy, but I’ve never been afraid of a little work to get what I want, and I’m going to enjoy killing you even more now.” + +The transmission cuts off and the first barrage of missiles collides with the central complex, shaking the whole station. + +You steady yourself against the doorframe. “They know this area is shielded. I’m surprised they don’t go for the turrets.” + +“Think those were just showoff shots to let us know they mean business,” Karoff tells you. “Look, they’re deploying into new positions now. Easier to keep track of at this range, anyway.” + +“Off to a good start. I don’t object at all to them wasting missiles,” Hinsman says with a shrug. “They’ll run out soon and then have to get within range of the turrets to use their lasers.” + +Karoff has been tapping feverishly at a console, and suddenly interrupts. “And there go a few of my own. Two can play the torpedo game.” + +Crowding around the screen, you watch as the missiles spin through the formation the ships had been gathering up into. There are a couple of glancing hits that take one ship out of commission and force others to veer this way and that. Two more are hit but their shields hold. Shields are almost always going to be weaker on a ship than on a station, but you suspect they’d all been angling themselves to protect the weaker ships in the center while they made their first sweep at the turrets. + +The missiles that are evaded by the pirates were lined up so that they exploded against the shields of the larger carrier ship waiting behind them. Again, no significant damage done, but the big ship does start moving to get more distance from you, meaning it won’t be so readily available to provide backup to the pirates. + +You take a moment to send a torpedo tearing through the disabled ship, then frown at the screen. “Here they come again.” + +The seven remaining ships come in at an angle, then just out of range of what would be a practical distance to take a shot at them they split into two groups, circling the station from opposite sides. The ships launch a series of missiles at the turrets as they swoop by, and while the lasers are able to take most of them out before impact, one does slip through and blow a gun into pieces spinning off into space. + +The three of you exchange grim looks. You know that with every gun that goes down they’ll have a growing safe area to maneuver in. + +A moment later the ships begin another sweep. They concentrate their fire at the arms surrounding the one with the turret they cleared. Karoff takes another one out with a well timed missile that hits at the moment they drop their own, but two more turrets are taken out regardless. As you watch, a smaller ship moves in, aiming for the now unprotected arm housing the medical wing. It takes you a moment, but you come to a sudden realization. “They’re trying to board it!” you say, remembering the massive gap open to space there. + +“We can stop them, surely?” Hinsman asks. + +Karoff shakes his head. “At that angle, can’t really...wait! My ship! I’ve got a dozen torpedoes loaded still.” + +“You transfered so much of the power over, though. It won’t even have shielding. Let’s stay on the station and just take up positions near the entrance to that section, pick them off when they come through.” + +“We don’t even know how many they have, and we don’t have anything more powerful than a laser rifle. I really don’t like leaving the rest of the ships free to do whatever while we’re over there either.” + +You’re all running out of time fast. They really can’t stand there arguing much longer. The situation being what it is, you decide to take the lead for once and just let them follow. +> Use Karoff's ship to take them out before they board. +“Twelve torpedoes? Then stay here. I’ll stop the boarders.” Before anyone can reply you race down the hall and towards the docking bay. + +“Careful with my ship!” you hear Karoff hollering after you. + +You strap in an unlock in record time, gliding along the side of the docking bay arm opposite the one housing the medical wing, trying not to expose the profile of your ship to the enemy. Then when you’re lined up with the damaged section, you drop down just a short ways and rotate to get a clear view straight across to wear the smaller ship is hovering within the massive hole gouged from the medical wing. + +Their back hatch is open, and someone in a bulky suit is in the process of exiting. Caught with their shields down? Your timing couldn’t be better. With a press of a button you send a fusion torpedo smashing into the exposed ship. The explosion rips right through it, and you wince a bit as it also engulfs the less damaged section of the medical wing beyond, reducing that entire tip of the arm into half-melted wreckage. + +But, well, it was pretty messed up already. Maybe no one would notice. + +“Hey, great plan Zee, let’s just take out an arm for every ship. There were eight of both so now we’ll be even!” + +Karoff’s voice is joined by Hinsman’s. “Laugh all you want, but it looks like their buddies are retreating. You must’ve gotten someone important. Good work, Zee.” + +“Then that went better than I hoped,” you mutter to yourself, but move quickly to relock the ship to the docking bay. No sense in lingering out here without shields. Bad things can happen--just ask the other ship. + +Rejoining the others, you see that indeed, the pirate ships are locking back into the carrier. + +“Could be a trick,” you point out. + +The carrier slips into underspace a few moments later however, and after a short wait it becomes clear they’d have had to emerge by now if they were trying any funny business with blinking around inside the system. + +Hinsman slaps you on the back. “Well that was a damn good shot, Zee. You might’ve got the captain.” He yawns and turns toward the door. “ +> Aftermath +The Last Outpost is awash with light and humming with power and activity. Repair crews tromp through the halls day and night and from the newly cleaned and restocked dining area there’s friendly chatter, the clattering of plates, and laughter at the antics of some performer on the screen. It’s practically unrecognizable from the place the three of you fought for only a couple of weeks ago. + +After an unprecedented two weeks with no new orders, which you know Hinsman and Karoff haven’t minded at all, you’re sitting at the dining hall listening to them trade stories. Taking tiny sips from a glass of water, the closest you can get to having a meal with your friends, you notice three stern-looking people in uniform enter the room, two men and a woman. Their gaze falls on your table and they make a beeline for it. You nudge Hinsman, assuming something’s come up. “Another mission, you think? It’s been awhile.” + +He clears his throat, looking uncomfortable. “I think they’re here in response to my report.” + +“What do you mean?” + +Karoff has become very engrossed in the contents of his glass, and that’s when you realize the officers are here for you. + +They reach the table and introduce themselves to the other two, politely enough. And then, “Is this the android?” + +Hinsman nods, not meeting your gaze. + +“What’s going on?” you ask. Although you believe you already know. You’ve been working on techniques to keep your memories, and the tantalizing fragments of new and sometimes even what seem to be conflicting ones from overwhelming you so suddenly and completely, but they’ve certainly not gone away. + +“You go by Zee, right? We’re going to need you to come with us.” + +Hinsman finally speaks up, “They’re just here to help you out, Zee. You’re going to get some treatment so that those...memories, dreams, whatever they are can’t interfere with your work.” + +“I’ve...been working on that myself,” you tell him, almost pleadingly. “I can keep them under control.” You don’t know why you bother, honestly. The only thing he could have done to prevent this was not put it in his report, and it’s too late for that now. + +“The way they come on, it’s dangerous you know, and they always get worse. It’s not your fault of course, it’s just something that happens with your kind of android. A side effect of using an organic brain. I’ve done a lot of reading on it,” he goes on. “It’s not a big deal, and it’s easy to fix. You’ve had it done before.” As familiar as you are with the way he works, this sounds suspiciously like a memorized speech. + +In the end though, there’s nothing you can do. The officers repeat their request, and however you feel, you can’t find it in you to openly defy an order. And Hinsman’s right; this has all happened before. + +He and Karoff accompany you to the waiting shuttle. As you say your goodbyes and take a last look around the now bustling station, you wonder if you’ll remember any of this by the time they’re done with you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>If Karoff can’t track the ships there could be one lining up a shot even now. You’d installed a few shortcuts on your console and wristcomm last night, preparing for the possibility you’d be working alone, and now tap a key. The lights in the command center dim briefly as outside the station the massive shield generators hum to life and the turrets ready themselves. Whatever they’d been expecting, anyone approaching will know the station has people inside ready to defend it now, and that you’d been expecting them. + +“They’re hailing us,” Karoff says. + +“Oh good, let me talk to them. Maybe they’re going to surrender.” + +Karoff smirks at the comment and patches the call through to the viewscreen. An older man with steel-grey hair and a scarred face looks down at Hinsman and says in a gravelly voice. “I see you have a ship locked into the bay. Whoever you are, I suggest you use it. We won’t stop you from leaving peacefully, but we’re taking this station and anyone who tries to stop us will most certainly be killed.” + +Hinsman looks unimpressed. “On the contrary, I think it’s you folks who’d better turn around and leave. The Last Outpost is an Order station vital to maintaining peace in the Outer Rim, and if you fire upon it it’s an act of war. We will hunt you down. There won’t be a single airless, lifeless rock left out there you can hide under.” + +The man smiles. “Well aren’t you a big talker. But have it your way. I tried to make this easy, but I’ve never been afraid of a little work to get what I want, and I’m going to enjoy killing you even more now.” + +The transmission cuts off and the first barrage of missiles collides with the central complex, shaking the whole station. + +You steady yourself against the doorframe. “They know this area is shielded. I’m surprised they don’t go for the turrets.” + +“Think those were just showoff shots to let us know they mean business,” Karoff tells you. “Look, they’re deploying into new positions now. Easier to keep track of at this range, anyway.” + +“Off to a good start. I don’t object at all to them wasting missiles,” Hinsman says with a shrug. “They’ll run out soon and then have to get within range of the turrets to use their lasers.” + +Karoff has been tapping feverishly at a console, and suddenly interrupts. “And there go a few of my own. Two can play the torpedo game.” + +Crowding around the screen, you watch as the missiles spin through the formation the ships had been gathering up into. There are a couple of glancing hits that take one ship out of commission and force others to veer this way and that. Two more are hit but their shields hold. Shields are almost always going to be weaker on a ship than on a station, but you suspect they’d all been angling themselves to protect the weaker ships in the center while they made their first sweep at the turrets. + +The missiles that are evaded by the pirates were lined up so that they exploded against the shields of the larger carrier ship waiting behind them. Again, no significant damage done, but the big ship does start moving to get more distance from you, meaning it won’t be so readily available to provide backup to the pirates. + +You take a moment to send a torpedo tearing through the disabled ship, then frown at the screen. “Here they come again.” + +The seven remaining ships come in at an angle, then just out of range of what would be a practical distance to take a shot at them they split into two groups, circling the station from opposite sides. The ships launch a series of missiles at the turrets as they swoop by, and while the lasers are able to take most of them out before impact, one does slip through and blow a gun into pieces spinning off into space. + +The three of you exchange grim looks. You know that with every gun that goes down they’ll have a growing safe area to maneuver in. + +A moment later the ships begin another sweep. They concentrate their fire at the arms surrounding the one with the turret they cleared. Karoff takes another one out with a well timed missile that hits at the moment they drop their own, but two more turrets are taken out regardless. As you watch, a smaller ship moves in, aiming for the now unprotected arm housing the medical wing. It takes you a moment, but you come to a sudden realization. “They’re trying to board it!” you say, remembering the massive gap open to space there. + +“We can stop them, surely?” Hinsman asks. + +Karoff shakes his head. “At that angle, can’t really...wait! My ship! I’ve got a dozen torpedoes loaded still.” + +“You transfered so much of the power over, though. It won’t even have shielding. Let’s stay on the station and just take up positions near the entrance to that section, pick them off when they come through.” + +“We don’t even know how many they have, and we don’t have anything more powerful than a laser rifle. I really don’t like leaving the rest of the ships free to do whatever while we’re over there either.” + +You’re all running out of time fast. They really can’t stand there arguing much longer. The situation being what it is, you decide to take the lead for once and just let them follow. +> "We don't need to stop them." +“They’re not coming here. They’re looking for the vials,” you reassure them. “And they won’t find them.” The first thing you’d done after finding Markov’s stash, before you’d done anything else, was melt every single vial along with its contents down to nothing with your laser torch. “Oh, and assuming they know exactly where to look, I left a little surprise for them.” + +The lab had been full of all kinds of interesting chemicals, and the three of you aren’t waiting too long before the sensors trained on the medical wing register a sizable explosion. A moment later, the ship that carried them is careening away, clumsily enough that a laser turret can slice it in half before the shields have a change to reactivate. + +“Beautiful.” Karoff grins, then squints at the screen. “And I think...yes, looks like the others may be retreating. Or moving back toward the carrier, anyhow. You musta got somebody important. That grumpy old bastard from the viewscreen, I hope.” + +Well done, Zee.” Hinsman slaps you on the back. “Damn, will there be enough left in medical to scrape up some DNA, I wonder? There’s gonna be a hell of a manhunt on once we transmit this battle report. Hope none of you were planning a vacation.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Clean. Both of you.” You snap the computer shut and the tension in the room evaporates amid sighs of relief. + +Karoff lets out a whoop. “Oh thank God. I was too pretty to die!” He stands and makes for the door. “Now if you’ll excuse me, I’m getting the hell out of this plague room.” + +Hinsman lingers a moment, pausing at the foot of Matti’s bed. You’ve draped a sheet over her and will take the body and bedding to be incinerated once he leaves. “Well we got lucky I guess. The one to pick her up when she was bleeding was the only one who couldn’t get infected. And somehow I didn’t catch anything treating her, or afterwards being near her almost constantly. She got damn unlucky though. And here I am the complete bastard while she was the sweet girl with her life ahead of her. I still can’t believe it turned out this way.” With a shake of his head he exits the room, not looking at you. + +You know Hinsman understands as well as anyone possibly could that you were just doing what you had to, but you suspect it’ll be awhile before he can bring himself to ever actually like you again. + +And then the moment arrives. An alert from the computer indicates something just emerged from underspace. Ahead of you the walk of the two men turns into a mad sprint down the hall. The three of you gather in the command center and Karoff quickly locates the ship. + +“No affiliation and armed to the teeth. Yep, we got a pirate.” + +Hinsman drains his faux coffee and sets the cup aside. “Just one? Shouldn’t be too hard to handle.” + +“Yeah, there’s...dammit! You jinxed us. Now there’s two, three...eight on approach. And they’re hard to track.” + +“Sensors didn’t pick them up?” you ask. + +“The first ship was a carrier. It’s how you disguise the size of your force if for instance, you think someone may have an alert set for anyone exiting underspace.” +> Wait until they're closer. +Patience is everything out here. You all lapse into a tense silence as you watch the sweeping scans. The ships are visible on the sensors for only a fraction of a second at a time. They move erratically as they approach in a way that would be difficult to target, then seem to gain confidence and split into two groups, angling to sweep by each side of the station. + +You’d installed a few shortcuts on your console and wristcomm last night, preparing for the possibility you’d be working alone, and as they come into range you now tap a key. The lights in the command center dim briefly as outside the station the massive shield generators hum to life. The turrets ready themselves and immediately begin spitting fire. To one of the groups the attack is devastating, leaving two of the ships smoldering wreckage and disabling a third. The four on the other side of the station take minor damage and one loses shields and has to retreat back towards the carrier. + +Karoff hasn’t been idle either, and once he saw you go into action he sent a barrage of missiles toward the carrier itself, which make contact a couple of moments later. They don’t pierce the shields, but apparently are enough of a bother that the big ship begins to move off further out of range, meaning it can’t provide backup to the rest of the pirates, even the unshielded one limping towards it. + +“Nice work, everyone. And I guess I’ll take janitor duty,” Hinsman says, firing another pair of torpedoes. One blows the disabled ship to shrapnel and another zips across the distance to take out the shield-less one. + +The remaining three pull out of range. They continue to make slow circles around the station for a bit, launching a few torpedoes of their own, two exploding harmlessly against the shield of the central complex and the third doing some damage to one of the unshielded arms, but missing the turret. When Karoff manages to strike a glancing blow off of one of them with his return fire they seem to think better of lingering and retreat to the carrier. It jumps to underspace, and after a few seconds it’s clear they’re not trying any risky tricks with jumping closer to the station, while your sensor sweeps continue to not report them emerging anywhere else in the system. + +Battles in space tend to be that way. Hours of tense preparation and waiting, decided by a few seconds of actual weapon’s exchange. If one of the pirate ships had managed to get in close enough to line up a shot before you activated the shields, this all could’ve gone very differently. + +“As soon as we can get this data to the Order, there’s gonna be a hell of a hunt going on for the ones who got away,” Hinsman says later, while compiling the battle report and the information on the infection aboard the station. “Hope no one was planning a vacation.” + +“Eh, scouring a bunch of backwater planets for terrorists won’t be that bad,” Karoff replies with a shrug. “I just don’t envy whoever’s gonna be searching and sanitizing every centimeter of this station. So sorry about that, Zee.” + +You can tell he’s joking for once, and just shake your head. “Nope, not me. Never been gladder they gave me a gun instead of a mop.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Yanking on the handle of the airlock door, you hear the locking mechanism disengage with a satisfying clank. Once inside, you seal it behind you again before proceeding. This last segment of the medical arm lost gravity and life support with the others, but was never exposed directly to space. It seems likely the actual origin of the sabotage was the area you were just in, with the chain of explosions moving from there in the direction of the central part of the station. + +There is quite a bit of floating furniture and assorted medical equipment and other clutter to maneuver through, but thankfully there are no major obstacles or...other distractions between you and the turret. You power and arm it, checking the status of the torpedoes and ensuring everything seems to be in working order before giving the others a call. Karoff confirms the gun is online and you begin to make your way back. + +You still are struggling a bit to keep your head clear, and begin reading the labels on the doors you pass and counting them too to keep your thoughts from wandering back to the that same place, the stripes of sunlight across the grass, again and again. + +What should be door number twenty-eight is open, and when you shine your light inside it falls upon a long white cabinet inside. Particularly, upon the smears of dried blood upon it, one of them a near perfect hand print. + +“He was trying to unlock a cabinet but his hands were all torn up.” + +You recall Matti’s words from a few hours ago, although with far less clarity and immediacy that that of the woman who so long ago shouted for Zani and Nyla to run to the woods. Is this the room where Markov died? +> You don't care about any of this anymore. +Sorrow, anger, and pain still thunder just beyond the edge of your conscious thought. In your eyes, the major failing of the saboteur now was in not blowing this entire station to cosmic dust and sparing you from this brink of madness. You were content in your role before, happy to tirelessly devote yourself to the Order’s interests, and now? You no longer care about what was done here or why. Let someone else figure that out, or not. What difference does it make? + +You return to the central complex, making sure not to stare into the abyss this time as you cross it. + +“I’m fine,” you say in answer to Hinsman’s look when you enter, brushing past him. Except for the monitors in the main computer room turned command center, the station is once again dark. Somehow this environment seems to magnify the echo of footsteps. Peering around the curve of a corridor, you see another oasis of light washing against a wall; the nursing station where Matti is resting. + +You busy yourself the next several hours, putting equipment away, helping Karoff calibrate this or that and keeping watch while he and Hinsman sleep. In the end the power situation means the three of you will only able to get partial shielding up around the non vital sections, which are essentially everything but the docking bay and central complex. Hopefully that will be enough. + +Hinsman has already seen to Matti and he and Karoff are having a quick breakfast and complaining about the coffee substitute when the moment arrives. An alert from the computer indicates something just emerged from underspace. The three of you gather in the command center and Karoff quickly locates the ship. + +“No affiliation and armed to the teeth. Yep, we got a pirate.” + +Hinsman drains his faux coffee and sets the cup aside. “Just one? Shouldn’t be too hard to handle.” + +“Yeah, there’s...dammit! You jinxed us. Now there’s two, three...eight on approach. And they’re hard to track.” + +“Sensors didn’t pick them up?” you ask. + +“The first ship was a carrier. It’s how you disguise the size of your force if for instance, you think someone may have an alert set for anyone exiting underspace.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Well, no sense in putting it off. You remind yourself that if her story is to be believed, poor, stupid, terrified Matti made this jump not once, but twice, and carrying Markov’s bloody body behind her the second time. Aiming yourself carefully in the direction you want to go, an airlock that leads to the last section of this wing, you use your legs to launch yourself towards it in a single smooth motion. On instinct you’ve angled your body into an aerodynamic shape, legs straight behind and arms stretched out in front of you, although you know it doesn’t really matter. As you sail across the gap, you stare downward into infinity. You feel like you’re flying. You feel like...a bird... + +Green grass. The smell of it. + +A long blade of green grass, striped by the horizontal bars of sunlight and shadow cast by its fellows. An ant crawls up the blade, in and out of the stripes. Another ant tickles your arm. + +New shadows race across the sun. There are silver wings in the distance, and a beautiful white light. + +“Look at the birds, Mommy!” + +“Zani, get inside!” + +The fresh smell of grass is replaced by acrid smoke. Screams and shouts. Muffled explosions in the distance. You are underground, but not deep enough. Boots thud overhead. Your sister is crying. You want to cry too. Everyone is afraid, even the adults. Especially the adults. + +“The Order!” + +“Oh my God, they’re killing everyone!” + +“We’re not infected! Listen to us, please!” + +“Zani, Nyla, run to the woods!” + +You’re running hard, pulling your sister behind you. There is another explosion, not so distant. The force hurls you hard against the ground. The grass is gone, the earth is a scorched and blackened wound. You and the earth are the same now. Where is Nyla? The pain is incredible. Blackness. You-- + +--you stare down into the blackness. You hit the wall on the other side hard but somehow instinctively grabbed the metal bar next to the airlock. The metal will surely bend, if you squeeze it any harder. Your eyes sting. Your chest aches like its simultaneously been hollowed out and is just about to burst. Physically you’re fine. But from your memory--and you know now for certain that it was a memory--you know now that this is what it feels like to want to cry. + +No tears stain your cheeks, of course. Your brain may be human, but most of the rest of you decidedly is not. Still, you feel weak, shaky, and can’t bring yourself to continue on for quite some time. Unless you deliberately keep your thoughts focused elsewhere, your mind drifts again and again to the memories. + +“The Order!” + +“Oh my God, they’re killing everyone!” + +Those two sentences in particular, shouted at a near hysterical pitch by a voice that seems hauntingly familiar plague you the most. You don’t like the implications. + +At some point you realize your communicator has been going off. Hinsman’s voice is speaking to you, sounding worried. + +You take a deep breath. “I’m fine.” Your words are faint, barely audible. + +“Are you sure, Zee?” He sounds skeptical. +> You're fine. +“Y-yeah, I just...had some trouble getting across this section with the worst of the damage. It’s bigger than it looked on the images we had. I’m fine now though, just had a close call.” + +“All right, well glad you’re all right, and be careful, Zee.” + +“Right. I’ll be at the turret soon.” + +You cut the call and take a deep breath, telling yourself you’ve got to pull yourself together. This is an astoundingly bad place and time to be having a crisis. You’re unsure if that was your entire motivation in not telling Hinsman the truth, but you know you need to focus on getting the defenses up now. The memories, and the painful questions they’ve made you ask...you’ll dwell on that later when there’s no danger of attack. + +Meanwhile you’ll just hope that they don’t return, or at least not with such force that you can’t function. You need to stay focused.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Hinsman nods in agreement. “Probably for the best now that we’ve got a target painted on us. I’ll explain things to her this evening and get her in the pod first thing in the morning.” + + + +You both drag piles of equipment about while Karoff diverts more power from the ship, as much as can be spared, and even sacrifices most of the shuttles. Before long the equipment is in place and the three of you begin rigging up cables, energy cells, power nodes and anything you can find that can produce or transfer a charge down each of the station’s splayed arms to the laser and torpedo turrets mounted at their tips. + +Finally, the heavily damaged medical wing is the last that needs attention. That’s all on you. + +“Think we can get by without that one?” Hinsman asks. + +Karoff shakes his head. “Without the turrets that’s a biiiig area where they can get in close and freely maneuver and we can’t touch them.” + +“Figured. All right then Zee, off you go. Just hook up these cables and don’t slip and go floating off into space, it’ll be a pain in the ass to collect you again. One of us will keep in voice contact while you’re there.” + + +You stand in the airlock, the minutes ticking by while you wait for the atmosphere to slowly equalize with that of the absent one in the medical wing. You know you’re getting close when you begin to float in place. + +Once the door opens and you drift into the entrance to the medical wing, you search for the panel Karoff told you about. It’s about the only one here that hasn’t had its conduits fried, and you remove a connector you’ll need. That and the EPN loaded with an energy canister you have strapped to your back should be all you need to power the turrets. After checking in on your wrist comm you start to make your way on down to the hall. + +You carry a cable as well, meant to be attached to your suit. If you were following safety recommendations, one of the two clips along the length should always be anchored to something. You’re not entirely sure you need it however. The sides of this section have blown out in some places but you can just avoid getting too near the edge of those gaps. Using the tethered cable is fine when working in one place, but tediously slow when trying to move. +> No time for that. +You drift down the dark hallway, propelling yourself forward in short bursts with the flat of your palm along the wall or the ceiling as you go. + +Every so often there’s a crackle from your headset as someone checks on you, but the dark halls are otherwise eerily silent. Doors line the walls on either side of you, firmly shutting away their secrets. One door is hanging open and askew on cracked hinges, and you see the long room beyond it is filled with rusting rows of bolted down bedframes. An infirmary at some time in the past, now with the back wall now ripped open to expose them to space. You can see the pale face of the barren rock the station orbits through the gap. + +You float down an elevator shaft and after a measured distance begin cutting your way out with a laser torch. Gripping the handrail behind you, you kick the slab of metal free. It tumbles forward, and forward, and out into space. Where you expected to find more hallway, you’re now looking at a mostly missing wall, the blown out section large enough to pilot a shuttle through. You’ve drifted out a short ways, watching the metal slab diminishing in the distance, still moving from the momentum of your kick. + +It’s then that you glance down and realize there’s nothing beneath your feet but the void of space and the twinkling of stars. Most of the floor in this section has also been blown away. You pedal your legs in a panic and the motion sends your body shooting upwards. Struggling to reorient yourself in mid-air, you crack your elbow against a piece of metal railing and grab for it desperately. + +You’re caught up now against a section of what used to be the roof, amid a forest of twisted metal spars and snaking black wires. You remain carefully still a long moment while you calm yourself, your back resting lightly against the jagged mess while you gaze down at the floor. It’s been ripped out clear through to the bottom of the station. You can just see the edges other rooms on other floors parallel to this one, and where the plating that held on the other side of the gap buckled like crumpled tissue, but thankfully you don’t have to try to float down through the big hole to reach the turret. Just, across it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Hinsman and Karoff are already ripping out most of the EPNs that were so recently installed by the time you finish suiting up. Your sleek one piece outfit is in the Order colors of dark blue and grey, and more than just a uniform. With the addition of your helmet with its built in breathing mask it serves as well in combat as any armor, and protects you in any climate and even for a time in open space. It feels good to be back in it. Between the detour through the Camarov system and then the stop here you’ve been running around without it for an unusually long time. + +Hinsman charges by with a load of power cables draped over one arm, then checks himself mid-stride and comes back over to you. “Zee, question.” + +“Yes?” + +“Do you think we should put Matti in cryo and send her out of here?” + +“You’re asking me?” You’re a little surprised. He hadn’t seemed to like hearing your opinions on Matti very much a little earlier. + +“Not that I’m giving much credence to your theory about her. I’m asking you now, just as a matter of risk assessment, how putting an injured and weakened woman in a cryo pod would stack up to having her stay here with a hostile force on the way.” + +You pause a moment to run over both scenarios. The cryo is a significant risk, but a one time thing. The possibility of attack is an ever evolving situation with the threat level varying from not worth mentioning to all of you dead and the station destroyed. Plus, even with Hinsman telling you to disregard the thought, there’s the possibility Matti might not be trustworthy. You know already that he won’t include any of your suspicions in the note to the Camarovians and they won’t investigate nearly as thoroughly as the Order would even if he did. But guilty or innocent, the rest of you may soon have your hands too full to pay attention to her if you do get company. + +Finally you reply. +> "Everything will be fine here once the defenses are up." +Hinsman hesitates. “I just worry something may happen to her. She’s so weak still, she needs care we may not be able to give depending on how things go.” + +“Pirates are a risk at any time, and this station was designed to be defended by only three people,” you point out. + +He nods after a moment and flashes you a smile. “You know, you’re right. Thanks Zee. But I guess we better gets to work now before Karoff finds us just standing around talking.” + + + +You both drag piles of equipment about while Karoff diverts more power from the ship, as much as can be spared, and even sacrifices most of the shuttles. Before long the equipment is in place and the three of you begin rigging up cables, energy cells, power nodes and anything you can find that can produce or transfer a charge down each of the station’s splayed arms to the laser and torpedo turrets mounted at their tips. + +Finally, the heavily damaged medical wing is the last that needs attention. That’s all on you. + +“Think we can get by without that one?” Hinsman asks. + +Karoff shakes his head. “Without the turrets that’s a biiiig area where they can get in close and freely maneuver and we can’t touch them.” + +“Figured. All right then Zee, off you go. Just hook up these cables and don’t slip and go floating off into space, it’ll be a pain in the ass to collect you again. One of us will keep in voice contact while you’re there.” + + +You stand in the airlock, the minutes ticking by while you wait for the atmosphere to slowly equalize with that of the absent one in the medical wing. You know you’re getting close when you begin to float in place. + +Once the door opens and you drift into the entrance to the medical wing, you search for the panel Karoff told you about. It’s about the only one here that hasn’t had its conduits fried, and you remove a connector you’ll need. That and the EPN loaded with an energy canister you have strapped to your back should be all you need to power the turrets. After checking in on your wrist comm you start to make your way on down to the hall. + +You carry a cable as well, meant to be attached to your suit. If you were following safety recommendations, one of the two clips along the length should always be anchored to something. You’re not entirely sure you need it however. The sides of this section have blown out in some places but you can just avoid getting too near the edge of those gaps. Using the tethered cable is fine when working in one place, but tediously slow when trying to move.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Most of the text Karoff scrolls past is gibberish, but a few of the messages are partially deciphered. Even these prove frustrating however as even the ones where you can make out sentences are delicately phrased with deliberate obliqueness. But as the messages near the end, they suddenly start dropping the pretense. + +“Ah, here we go. Well that’s right to the point, isn’t it?” + +You peer over Karoff’s shoulder at the screen. + +^ou’ve al%ead^ killed ove% this. It’s too late to back out now. ^ou can take ^ou% mone^ o% a hole th%ough the skull--we’%e coming fo% the package eithe% way, so ^ou’d do well to think twice befo%e ^ou do anything ^ou’ll %eg%et. + +As to ^ou% question, it ain’t nothing but sweet %evenge, Ma%kie bab^. The^ tu%ned us back du%ing the evacuations. We couldn’t ‘p%ove’ we we%en’t infected and what we%e we to them but a bunch of shitkicking fa%mers and %anchers? Well we didn’t have Hunge% but we got hung%^ ENOUGH limping a%ound the %im to find a new home and plent^ of us died of infection all %ight--just plain o%dina%y bo%ing Old Ea%th influenza that could’ve been cu%ed if we’d had even the most p%imitive aid. My wife and daughte% among them. + +The o%ganization ^ou wo%k fo% has blood on its hands, and don’t even think it stops the%e. A lot of ou% people ma^ have gotten complacent once the^ %esettled, all this talk of ‘moving on’, but that’s just not fo% me and m^ f%iends. We won’t fo%get and we won’t allow them too eithe%. And I’ve made man^ mo%e f%iends %ecentl^. We’%e getting ou% %evenge, and I think ^ou know exactly how. + +See ^a soon, Ma%k. + +--W. Ho%seman + + +“So we’ve definitely got pirates coming this way.” Hinsman says with a rueful shake of his head. “Or terrorists, anyway. Even better, right? And so much for your theory on Matti, Zee.” + +“Any theories on what the package is?” you ask after a moment’s silence. + +“Carst is from Galton Station, isn’t he?” Karoff asks. “I think I saw it in his file. I’ve been there once or twice, and don’t ask for what. But they all but advertise they’re a black market.” + +Hinsman nods, looking grim. “Most likely blueprints for illegal weapons tech, or an ethics-stripped AI. Something small Carst could easily smuggle back over here the last time he was on leave. And something valuable and risky enough he’d kill anybody who got in his way.” + +Karoff taps around on the screen some more. “Too bad he didn’t survive,” he finally says with a sigh. “Because I’d sure like to kill him myself right now. Scans found the probe by the way. Way out there on the edge of the system.” + +“Oh really? That’s something at least. Although it’ll take time to get to and disable, and I’m not sure we can spare that right now. We need to start thinking of how to defend ourselves.” + +“The sooner we get a distress call out the sooner we can put an end to all this,” Karoff says. “We’re nothing but a target right now, with the defenses down and if there’s enough of them they can wear us down eventually without much risk to themselves.” + +“Can the defenses be repaired?” + +Karoff winces. “I was afraid you were gonna ask that. And technically yes, but it’s a big job. The turrets are in every arm of the station and we’ll need to get power to all of them, which means cutting back here in the central area.” + +They both sink into a grim silence for a bit, before Hinsman finally looks over. “All right Zee, I guess you get the tiebreaker. What are you most in the mood for right now?” +> Repair defenses +Hinsman and Karoff have already ripped out most of the EPNs that were so recently installed by the time you finish suiting up. Your sleek one piece outfit is in the Order colors of dark blue and grey, and more than just a uniform. With the addition of your helmet with its built in breathing mask it serves as well in combat as any armor, and protects you in any climate and even for a time in open space. It feels good to be back in it. Between the detour through the Camarov system and then the stop here you’ve been running around without it for an unusually long time. + +Hinsman charges by with a load of power cables draped over one arm, and you have to jog after him a short ways to get his attention and instructions. +> Get to work! +You both drag piles of equipment about while Karoff diverts more power from the ship, as much as can be spared, and even sacrifices most of the shuttles. Before long the equipment is in place and the three of you begin rigging up cables, energy cells, power nodes and anything you can find that can produce or transfer a charge down each of the station’s splayed arms to the laser and torpedo turrets mounted at their tips. + +Finally, the heavily damaged medical wing is the last that needs attention. That’s all on you. + +“Think we can get by without that one?” Hinsman asks. + +Karoff shakes his head. “Without the turrets that’s a biiiig area where they can get in close and freely maneuver and we can’t touch them.” + +“Figured. All right then Zee, off you go. Just hook up these cables and don’t slip and go floating off into space, it’ll be a pain in the ass to collect you again. One of us will keep in voice contact while you’re there.” + + +You stand in the airlock, the minutes ticking by while you wait for the atmosphere to slowly equalize with that of the absent one in the medical wing. You know you’re getting close when you begin to float in place. + +Once the door opens and you drift into the entrance to the medical wing, you search for the panel Karoff told you about. It’s about the only one here that hasn’t had its conduits fried, and you remove a connector you’ll need. That and the EPN loaded with an energy canister you have strapped to your back should be all you need to power the turrets. After checking in on your wrist comm you start to make your way on down to the hall. + +You carry a cable as well, meant to be attached to your suit. If you were following safety recommendations, one of the two clips along the length should always be anchored to something. You’re not entirely sure you need it however. The sides of this section have blown out in some places but you can just avoid getting too near the edge of those gaps. Using the tethered cable is fine when working in one place, but tediously slow when trying to move.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Miss Oswen gave me enough details on the cause of the damage to start writing a report, at least, but some things still don’t sit right with me. Even if Inea’s death made him suicidal I still don’t understand Markov’s motivation for trying to take out the entire station, for one...” + +“He had the space crazies!” + +“...I can’t put that in a report. But unfortunately Oswen had very little contact with him following Inea’s death. And we don’t even really know what happened to Inea herself other than Zee’s examination indicating blunt force trauma to the head.” + +“Ah, about that.” Karoff fishes something out of his pocket and taps a button. “Relevant?” + +A 3D image of an energy canister is projected into the air in front of you all. You recognize the type; the larger energy cells can be volatile, so the canisters are made with half an inch of steel and an interior enamel coating for protection. This one is about the size of a fire extinguisher, which is typical. + +What’s not typical about this one however is the is the dried blood and long strands of dark hair caught up on the outside of the sealing mechanism. + +“Where the hell did you find that?” Hinsman wants to know. + +“In the storage arm where Miss Oswen lost hers. There are a lot of spent canisters piled up in there, and I was looking for more power cables just now and stumbled across this one.” + +Hinsman’s brow is deeply furrowed as he studies the projection. “That is just suspicious as hell. Has anyone had a look at the body yet?” + +You and Karoff both shake your heads, and as Matti had just mentioned where they were stored, the three of you make your way to the dining hall. + +The two bodies are on gurneys, zipped up in body bags in the back of the freezer. You open the bag holding the smaller form, ignoring Karoff’s inquiries as to whether letting restaurant kitchens rent freezer space to morgues could be a viable alternate source of income. + +Upon examination the dark haired woman’s cause of death is immediately obvious, her skull on the left side having been caved in just above and behind the ear. + +“Not a glancing blow, either. There’s no way that happens from a spent fuel canister falling on someone’s head. Not even a full one.” + +After a long moment he sighs and steps back. “All right, let’s go over what facts we have. About a week ago, Inea Banca was doing routine maintenance in the medical wing and had her skull caved in with an energy canister. Markov Karst then goes into seclusion for two days, at the end of which he goes to the medical wing and attempts to cause a power overload that will destroy the station; a major act of treason against the Order that will render a number of Outer Rim colony worlds and ships unable to receive emergency aid and also kill the young woman who remains here. A bit dramatic even for a suicide attempt, but I suppose not outside the realm of possibility. When it fails he become violent when Oswen attempts a rescue and dies moments after. Miss Oswen sends out a distress call that doesn’t seem to have gone through due to the failing power and waits here alone until we happen by. Does that all sound about right?” + +You mull that over while he and Karoff discuss the details a bit longer. + +“I’m sure there’s more investigating we can do,” Hinsman is saying. “The medical arm, for instance. That’s where everything happened.” + +Karoff shakes his head. “Atmosphere and shielding has failed and there are holes blown straight through the plating. It’d be too much a risk just to satisfy our curiosity, even for Zee.” + +“Fair. It doesn’t feel right to just sit around and wait on another team, though. We need to get together as much info as possible. It might be useful to read over the personnel reports again, and...oh! There’s the report they sent in on Inea’s death.” Hinsman glances over at you. “And what about you, Zee? Let’s see that sharp analytical brain in action.” + +“My brain’s not any sharper than yours I’m afraid. And too bad, some kind of AI to analyze things might be more what you need right now.” But you’ve been following a particular train of thought, and at his prompting you decide to give it voice. “But they didn’t fill out a death report on Inea Banca. I don’t know why Oswen claimed that. Banca was still listed as alive in their database when Karoff pulled up her file, right before we boarded. So in fact, I believe that...” +> “Markov killed Inea and then went insane.” +“Why look farther than Occam's Razor on this? It's the simplest explanation,” you say. “Carst, his actions may have been...drastic, and there may be no logical explanation for his destruction of Order property, but before the station sabotage everything points to him murdering Banca.” + +“I think so too,” Hinsman says, “but we don't have any details at all on what happened to her. Certainly no evidence.” + +“That he would feel compelled to return to the medical arm where she died is a good indicator that he was emotionally compromised. If his goal had simply been to destroy the station he would've started in the central computer room. And who else could've killed Banca? Oswen?” + +“Well that was my original theory...” Karoff muses, stroking one end of his mustache. + +“You read the personnel files too,” you point out, cutting him off. “Matti Oswen is considerably shorter and lighter than Inea Banca was. It would take a lot to swing a canister at the back of Banca's head at that height, with that force. Furthermore, the damage was on the back of the left side of the skull. A right-handed person standing behind her would've struck the right side. And meanwhile there's only one left-handed person on this ship.” + +Hinsman's eyes light up. “Markov Carst.” + +“Damn, I was hoping it was the girl,” Karoff complains. + +“What? Why?” + +The pilot shrugs. “No reason really, I just like being right completely by accident.” + +“Anyhow, great job Zee,” Hinsman says, choosing not to respond to that. “But I just wish we had more evidence. It's really too damn bad we can't get at anything in the medical wing. At least one murder occurred and serious damage was done to a vital Order refueling station; everyone in HQ is going to be looking hard at this, and you know how they can sometimes be a little...overzealous. I don't want them demanding a bunch of answers from Matti that she can't give. The poor girl's already been through enough.” + +“Well...we can check for the report,” Karoff says. “The one on Banca. Maybe it wasn't ever finalized and sent but it has to exist if Oswen said they wrote it.” + +Hinsman nods. “All right, let's do that.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Miss Oswen gave me enough details on the cause of the damage to start writing a report, at least, but some things still don’t sit right with me. Even if Inea’s death made him suicidal I still don’t understand Markov’s motivation for trying to take out the entire station, for one...” + +“He had the space crazies!” + +“...I can’t put that in a report. But unfortunately Oswen had very little contact with him following Inea’s death. And we don’t even really know what happened to Inea herself other than Zee’s examination indicating blunt force trauma to the head.” + +“Ah, about that.” Karoff fishes something out of his pocket and taps a button. “Relevant?” + +A 3D image of an energy canister is projected into the air in front of you all. You recognize the type; the larger energy cells can be volatile, so the canisters are made with half an inch of steel and an interior enamel coating for protection. This one is about the size of a fire extinguisher, which is typical. + +What’s not typical about this one however is the is the dried blood and long strands of dark hair caught up on the outside of the sealing mechanism. + +“Where the hell did you find that?” Hinsman wants to know. + +“In the storage arm where Miss Oswen lost hers. There are a lot of spent canisters piled up in there, and I was looking for more power cables just now and stumbled across this one.” + +Hinsman’s brow is deeply furrowed as he studies the projection. “That is just suspicious as hell. Has anyone had a look at the body yet?” + +You and Karoff both shake your heads, and as Matti had just mentioned where they were stored, the three of you make your way to the dining hall. + +The two bodies are on gurneys, zipped up in body bags in the back of the freezer. You open the bag holding the smaller form, ignoring Karoff’s inquiries as to whether letting restaurant kitchens rent freezer space to morgues could be a viable alternate source of income. + +Upon examination the dark haired woman’s cause of death is immediately obvious, her skull on the left side having been caved in just above and behind the ear. + +“Not a glancing blow, either. There’s no way that happens from a spent fuel canister falling on someone’s head. Not even a full one.” + +After a long moment he sighs and steps back. “All right, let’s go over what facts we have. About a week ago, Inea Banca was doing routine maintenance in the medical wing and had her skull caved in with an energy canister. Markov Karst then goes into seclusion for two days, at the end of which he goes to the medical wing and attempts to cause a power overload that will destroy the station; a major act of treason against the Order that will render a number of Outer Rim colony worlds and ships unable to receive emergency aid and also kill the young woman who remains here. A bit dramatic even for a suicide attempt, but I suppose not outside the realm of possibility. When it fails he become violent when Oswen attempts a rescue and dies moments after. Miss Oswen sends out a distress call that doesn’t seem to have gone through due to the failing power and waits here alone until we happen by. Does that all sound about right?” + +You mull that over while he and Karoff discuss the details a bit longer. + +“I’m sure there’s more investigating we can do,” Hinsman is saying. “The medical arm, for instance. That’s where everything happened.” + +Karoff shakes his head. “Atmosphere and shielding has failed and there are holes blown straight through the plating. It’d be too much a risk just to satisfy our curiosity, even for Zee.” + +“Fair. It doesn’t feel right to just sit around and wait on another team, though. We need to get together as much info as possible. It might be useful to read over the personnel reports again, and...oh! There’s the report they sent in on Inea’s death.” Hinsman glances over at you. “And what about you, Zee? Let’s see that sharp analytical brain in action.” + +“My brain’s not any sharper than yours I’m afraid. And too bad, some kind of AI to analyze things might be more what you need right now.” But you’ve been following a particular train of thought, and at his prompting you decide to give it voice. “But they didn’t fill out a death report on Inea Banca. I don’t know why Oswen claimed that. Banca was still listed as alive in their database when Karoff pulled up her file, right before we boarded. So in fact, I believe that...” +> “There’s something more going on...” +“I found Carst's personal computer in his room about an hour ago. It was well hidden, and he'd been using it to send and receive coded messages to someone outside the Order network.” + +“Really? Shit.” Hinsman sighs, running his fingers through his dark hair. “Now we've got that to figure out.” + +“Who would have a satellite out here aside from the Order?” you ask. + +“Traders, miners, colonists, pirates...?” Karoff ticks the list of anyone you might expect to encounter past the edge of the frontier off on his fingers. + +Hinsman has a thoughtful frown. “Seems like it'd have to be pirates. Anyone else would have it registered so we could protect it. They'd have to be pretty organized, though. Damn, I don't like this at all.” + +“Oh, but what if it’s aliens!” + +You and Hinsman both give him a look. Hinsman sounds a little exasperated. “Enough joking around.” + +“Whatever secret Carst had, Inea must've found out. Maybe something happened between them in the medical wing...he might've killed her on the spot, given the caveman tactics used,” you say. + +“The sabotage, though?” + +“Lots of people have it out for the Order. Maybe treason was always the plan and being found out screwed it up somehow. We need to find out what those messages said.” This last you direct at Karoff. + +He explains to Hinsman. “I plugged them into the main computer when Zee brought it to me. Give it a bit more time, it should be able to crack the code.” + +“Let's go there then. Should shed some light on matters. And Kar, you can run a search for the report on Inea's death while we wait. I know we don't have a record of it but Matti said they wrote it, it's possible it was just never finalized and sent. I'd really love to see what load of crap Markov was planning to feed HQ.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You want to verify there’s a threat before you call anyone else in. Even though you’re not suited up at the moment you feel pretty confident in your ability to handle a few trespassers anyhow so there’s no point in risking the others if they prove hostile. + +You ghost down the dark hall opening doors one by one and shining your flashlight around. The rooms all appear to be crew quarters and although you search any place anyone could hide, they’re all empty and only three show any recent signs of usage. + +Retreating back to the entrance the hall, you widen the scope of your search, but after another half hour are forced to admit to yourself there’s no one here after all. This wouldn’t be the first time you’ve had...hallucinations in the past. Or whatever the technical term would be for you. They have to get pretty bad before they impair your ability to work, but the woman’s voice had seemed so close and chillingly real. You’ll have to keep aware of the possibility of it happening again now. If it gets worse, you know you’ll have to report it, but for now you’re just glad you didn’t drag anyone else down here for no reason. + +You return to the crew quarters to look once again at the rooms the current maintenance crew were occupying, although more out of curiosity about them than any expectation you’ll locate your phantom voices. The walls of Matti’s room are covered in projected images of performers and celebrities...you recognize many of them from the media Karoff downloaded from Camarov. + +Inea’s room contains images of a family, presumably hers, and several empty bottles that indicate she had a minor pill habit. Nothing illegal enough for you to care about--even less so now that she’s dead--and most of them are expired anyhow and you suspect taken from the station’s abandoned medical arm. + +Markov’s room is somewhat grubby with dirty clothes tossed carelessly around. Your eyes are drawn to his desk immediately as the only uncluttered spot in the room. After a moment you realize that’s because his personal computer is gone. Every other room, even the empty ones, had one of the devices built into the desk surface. +> You don't care what kind of weird porn he was hiding +You return to where you left the hover platform and then begin making your way back to see if there’s anything else you can help with. You can see Karoff has been busy here fiddling with the wiring, and indeed you’re only halfway back to the medical station when you the lights suddenly flicker on and a much-missed humming fills the halls as all systems come to life. Karoff’s triumphant voice sounds over the intercom, and a moment later Hinsman’s to congratulate him. Everyone seems to be much more cheerful and you’re relieved to see things returning to normalcy. + +The main computer room he’s working in now is quite close so you take a detour to see if he’s pulled up anything about the damage to the station. +> Damage Report +“Ah, I see. No ‘thanks for getting the computers up so quickly’ or even ‘great job, Karoff’. Just more demands.” + +Startled, you begin to apologize before he waves you off. “Calm down, I’m not serious.” + +“Sorry.” + +“Jesus. You really need to work on not taking every little thing so seriously.” + +“That’s...not a skill I need very often, though.” + +“Good point. Well all right, you wanted the damage report. It just finished compiling.” Karoff spins in his chair to face the screen, chewing on a dirty thumbnail. “Hmm, let’s see. This would indicate The Last Outpost is...yup, it’s damaged all right. And needs repairs. From people who are not us.” + +“So nothing immediate needs attending to? There’s nothing wrong that would put you or Hinsman in danger if you waited here a few days?” + +“Well, unsealing some of the station’s arms would be pretty fatal. They took the brunt of Matti’s hack rerouting job and a couple lost atmosphere. The old medical wing itself is in real bad shape obviously, that’s where Markov set off the first explosion. But all we really need is life support and power here and in the docking bay. We don’t really have enough power for the rest of the station anyway as long as we’re siphoning from the ship. I’ll go and seal anything unnecessary off in a bit and then we don’t even need to worry about leaving them with life support.” + +Good. That means you can leave here and continue carrying out your orders just as soon as this mess with the dead workers is sorted out. + +“By the way, Hinsman is going to try waking Oswen up for a little while and then wanted us there afterwards to sort of put our heads together on how to handle all this,” Karoff adds, nearly reading your mind. + +You step toward the door. “I’ll go now.” + +“Eh, what’s the rush? But I’ll be there after I finish a couple things. We’re all just gonna sit around till the relief team arrives either way.” + +“I could go and take care of my mission while the two of you wait. Hinsman suggested that earlier, remember?” + +Karoff snorts and shook his head slowly as he turns his attention back to his screen. “Don’t you ever get tired of working so hard?” + +You’re a little take aback by the question. “No?”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Matti is asleep. Hinsman is seated at a table near the bed, freshly showered and changed into a grey jumpsuit identical to yours and looking exhausted. Karoff is nowhere to be seen. + +“He’s back on the ship seeing how much power we can spare,” Hinsman tells you, before you can ask. “This medical station’s about the only thing working as intended in this place right now. We need to at least get the computers up before we can figure out what all needs to be repaired and how. It’d be really great if we had a maintenance worker familiar with the place to talk to, but...” He inclines his head toward the young woman’s supine form and shrugs. The end of what’s left of her arm is neatly wrapped in bandages, but her face looks pale and strained even in her sleep and her eyes twitch restlessly behind her lids. + +There doesn’t seem to be anything you’re able to help with here, so you start to head back to the ship to find Karoff and wind up meeting up with him in the arm of the docking bay. He’s got a hovering platform loaded with equipment next to him and is attaching a power node to a panel. + +“Oh, there you are Zee, perfect. I need you to distribute the rest of these EPNs around the central complex.” He gestures at the platform. “I’ll come along behind you in a bit and rig them up.” + +The EPNs--external power nodes--can be linked in to bypass dead or damaged areas in the regular power system. It’s likely some trial and error will be needed but you doubt it will take more than a couple of hours if all he cares about is the main section and the docking bay. The other seven arms of the station can just stay sealed off until a proper repair team comes in. + +You return to the central area of the station and begin setting down the EPNs near accessible panels and in a short while you’ve covered the perimeter and begin making your way back. All is quiet until just as you pass a narrow hallway you hear a voice. “Zani, get inside!” + +You whirl, activating the short range laser weapon you always have with you. The voice had been a woman’s, sounding frantic and seeming to come from close by. But you see nothing. You shine your light down the hallway you’d just passed, revealing a row of half a dozen closed doors on each side. +> Alert the others to an intruder +You step back against a wall to have a clear view of anyone coming or going from any direction, and speak in hushed tones into your wrist comm to alert the others of the situation. + +In moments Hinsman and Karoff have armed themselves and joined you. With Karoff taking up watch outside the hall, you and Hinsman methodically check each door. None are locked due to the power situation and all seem to be crew quarters, only three showing any signs of being lived in recently. + +Finding nothing, the three of you expand the search to the surrounding area until after half an hour you have to admit there really may be nothing to find. + +“I’ve got to go check on Oswen,” Hinsman finally says. He gives you a little swat on the back of the head. “Zee, you’re going bonkers again. Need to schedule you another trip to the doctor when we’re done out here, eh?” His tone is light and playful, but you don’t miss the worried glances he and Karoff exchanged. + +Although you don’t remember much about it, it’s true you’ve had...hallucinations in the past. Or whatever the technical term would be for you. They have to get pretty bad before they impair your ability to work, but the woman’s voice had seemed so close and chillingly real. You’re ashamed you dragged the others over here, and after an awkward apology you move to assist Karoff with the remaining power nodes, aware of him still giving you quick glances now and then when he thinks you’re not paying attention. + +After awhile he disappears, and then the lights suddenly flicker on and a low, much-missed humming fills the halls as all systems come to life. Karoff’s triumphant voice sounds over the intercom, and a moment later Hinsman’s to congratulate him. Everyone seems to be much more cheerful and you’re relieved it seems things will go back to normal now. + +The main computer room he’s working in now is quite close so you take a detour to see if he’s pulled up anything about the damage to the station.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You indicate to the others that you’ll stay for now and Karoff directs the ship on a route toward the station. It makes sense to at least do a cursory inspection of the damage and make sure that at least life support will hold up. And of course there’s the other issue of the alleged sabotage and personnel having been lost under circumstances still waiting to be confirmed. Leaving just two operatives to handle it all isn’t ideal. + +Of the station’s eight arms, the docking bay is luckily on the side that’s suffered the least damage. Karoff locks on without incident and the panels of the reinforced portal retract with a gentle whirring. Beyond, the station is dark and cold. You all file out and make your way out of the landing bay and down a hallway with the aid of flashlights. With what little power remains rerouted to life support, the portal to the central complex refuse to open. Attempts to contact Oswen on a short range channel fail, and so Hinsman finally gets the door moving with the aid of his gun; wiring the energy cell to the panel next to it, that is. At the jolt of power it snaps open with sudden speed, then begins to close again in slow motion and grinds to a halt about a third of the way. The three of you squeeze past and before long find yourselves in an open area, a kind of joint dining hall and exercise room with dead video screens lining the walls. + +The kitchen area behind the dining hall is a disaster zone of empty plastic trays, overflowing trash bins and spoiled food. There’s no sign of Matti although you do find her abandoned ice cream bucket. The three of you begin to search area by area. Although reluctant to split up, you do move a bit faster than the others and take to checking into rooms and around corners ahead of them. + +A pool of vivid crimson against the polished grey tile is your first confirmation that something has gone wrong. You race forward to Matti Oswen’s crumpled form and check her pulse, clamping another hand down on the stub of her severed arm. Lifting the woman from the ground and calling out to the others, you splash your way through the blood, tracking it behind you while more soaks into your uniform. + +A medical station was one of the places the three of you had already searched, so you hasten to it and deposit her on a steel table, keeping your grip just above the wound while Hinsman activates the computer. + +“This nursing AI was obsolete fifteen years ago,” he grumbles, taking a protective suit from a persistently dinging open door and yanking it on over his clothes. + +“Isn’t that a bit of overkill?” Karoff asks, watching him. + +Hinsman’s response is muffled through the breathing filter. “It won’t let me even proceed without it. This place was last used to quarantine evacuees exposed to Hunger, there’s no such thing as overkill as far as the computer is concerned. Just be glad the whole station isn’t set to self destruct the moment someone gets a paper cut.” He pauses a moment to apply a tourniquet. “Now...Zee, you step back, it hates you too.” + +Karoff looks at you and snorts. “I imagine so. You look like you just left the scene of an axe murder.” + +You’d already moved away at Hinsman’s order, and now you ruefully wipe you face, hoping to achieve a clean spot. Karoff’s ensuing guffaw informs you you probably just made the situation worse. + +“I’ll go clean up the mess in the hall...and myself,” you say, turning to go. + +“Zee, wait, wait, Miss Oswen is going to need an arm transplant, don’t you think?” + +You blink at Karoff. “Are you serious?” + +This just provokes more laughter. + +Hinsman, who has been preoccupied with the soothing voice of the medical AI and the use of instruments taken out of little drawers that have been popping open in sequence, now shakes his head at the two of you as he changes to clean gloves. “I’m not that good a doctor, I’m afraid. Zee, you go on.” + +He snaps his fingers at Karoff and in the other hand produces an oversized needle, like a magician’s trick. “But I will need a blood donor, and guess who’s compatible?” + +Already on your way out, you turn and get a glimpse of the pilot’s grimace as the door slides shut between you. + + + +Cleaning up is a tedious but straightforward affair. You scrub yourself down and change into a plain grey jumpsuit you find before returning to the scene of the accident and getting to work. +> Find a mop and bucket +The door here opens to one of the storage arms of the station. It seems as likely a place as any to find cleaning supplies and so you slip through the door, carefully stepping over the severed limb and making your way down the dimly lit hall. It becomes obvious this is more of an area for discarded equipment waiting for repair or recycling and you pass numerous discarded fuel and energy tanks as well as other assorted clutter before you come to a cleaning machine parked in an alcove. The energy cell is low but even if it only does the job halfway it’ll save you a lot of time. + +As you’re pulling it free, there’s a clatter of metal and you see an energy canister was wedged behind it and is now rolling across the floor. +> Pick it up +Like the others this canister is spent, cool to the touch and quite heavy. It’s similar in size to a fire extinguisher, and since the larger energy cells can be volatile the shell is made with half an inch of steel and interior enamel coating for protection. What gets your attention about this one however is the dried blood and long strands of dark hair caught up on the outside of the sealing mechanism. + +That’s...unusual, and worth keeping in mind. + +You don’t want to disturb the others just yet since you doubt they’ve finished treating Matti Oswen, so you set the canister aside and leave the storage area, activating the cleaning machine to let the bristles and bubbles go to work on the drying blood while your mind rolls over just what may have happened here. Two maintenance workers dead and another seriously injured in circumstances that were odd to say the least. Just why had Matti been in such a hurry to close that door that she lost an arm over it? She hadn’t struck you as an especially self motivated type the few minutes you’d seen her on the viewscreen.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The door here opens to one of the storage arms of the station. It seems as likely a place as any to find cleaning supplies and so you slip through the door, carefully stepping over the severed limb and making your way down the dimly lit hall. It becomes obvious this is more of an area for discarded equipment waiting for repair or recycling and you pass numerous discarded fuel and energy tanks as well as other assorted clutter before you come to a cleaning machine parked in an alcove. The energy cell is low but even if it only does the job halfway it’ll save you a lot of time. + +As you’re pulling it free, there’s a clatter of metal and you see an energy canister was wedged behind it and is now rolling across the floor. +> Go finish cleaning +This section of the station is literally a junk heap. You roll the machine past the clutter without giving the canister a second thought and then climb on and activate it, cleaning bristles and bubbles going to work on the drying blood. + +Matti’s arm you toss into a non-functioning incinerator and hope the power situation is sorted out before it gets a chance to rot. + +The cleaning machine holds out after all. You finish just as it dies and shove it into an out of the way corner before going to seek out the others.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Welcome to the Quest for the Holy Grail! In this game you play as Arthur, son of Uther Pendragon, from the castle of Camelot. King of the Britons, defeater of the Saxons, Sovereign of all England! ... Yes, you are rather impressive aren't you? Today seems like any other day of you riding through your kingdom with your knights of the round table looking for dragons to save and damsels to slay or something along those lines. + + +"Arthur! King of the Britons!" You hear a voice bellow from above and suddenly the clouds part over your head and a cheaply animated adaptation of the Lord your God shines his glory down upon you. + + +You proceed with the ceremonial praising, grovelling and averting of your eyes for which God scolds you and tells you to stop sucking up. + + +He then explains that he is charging you and your knights with a sacred task, to seek the Holy Grail! He doesn't really explain what it's for or why he wants you to find it, but it's got the word "Holy" in it, so that must make it important, right? +> The Quest Begins! +Your sacred quest for the Holy Grail has begun! Where do you want to look first? +> Camelot! +Oh alright, if you must! But you don't want to stay too long. 'Tis a silly place! You make your way into the stables to find worthy steeds for yourself and your knights. Unfortunately the horses were all sold a few years back during the age of terrible glue shortage. You do however manage to find a coconut which you cut in half and give to your trusty servant Patsy who skillfully bangs the two halves together to make horse hoof noises. He's a prodigy on the coconuts that Patsy!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your sacred quest for the Holy Grail has begun! Where do you want to look first? +> The French Castle +You and your fearless knights ride gallantly to the castle... Well not ride exactly, you don't have horses. You sort of prance there, but you extend your hands as if you were holding reigns and it all looks very convincing! + + +"Hallo!" You call out when you reach the castle. You can see a man with a very distinguished looking mustache in the castle battlements, but he doesn't answer. "It is I, Arthur, King of the Britons!" Again, you get no reply. "We have come here on a sacred quest, and I wish to speak with your master!" + + +You get no response at all. Either the man can't hear you or he's ignoring you deliberately. If only you had some way to get his attention.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your sacred quest for the Holy Grail has begun! Where do you want to look first? +> The Dark Forest +And so, you and your knights boldly make your way towards the Dark Forest, which is no more than two swallow's flights away! + + +Oh, that's an unladen swallow's flight away, obviously. It's more than two laden swallow's flights away. Four really, if they had a coconut on a line between them. + + +Anyway, when you arrive at the forest, you come to a crossroads, where there are four signs. A sign saying "Camelot" which points back the way you came, a sign that says, "Certain Death!" Pointing to the east, a sign that says, "REALLY Certain Death!" Pointing to the west and a sign that says, "Holy Grail this way!" Pointing to the north. Where do you want to go?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your sacred quest for the Holy Grail has begun! Where do you want to look first? +> A Nearby Village +You hope to find clues in a nearby village but on your way your path is blocked by a man clad from head to toe in black armour. + + +"None shall pass!" He tells you. + + +You are left looking rather baffled. "What?" + + +"None shall pass!" He repeats. + + +"But I am Arthur, King of the Britons!" + + +"I move for no man!" The Black Knight tells you with an unwavering tone in his voice. + + +"But God has charged me with a sacred quest and I must reach the village!" You insist, but the Black Knight holds his ground. + + +"I will tell you for the last time... NONE shall pass!" + + +How very rude! You'd challenge this man to a duel in a second but unfortunately you managed to get your sword stuck in a stone awhile back. If only you had some way to convince the knight to let you pass.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your sacred quest for the Holy Grail has begun! Where do you want to look first? +> The Castle Anthrax +And so, you and your knights set out towards the legendary Castle Anthrax. The days turn to weeks, the weeks turn to months, the months unexplainably turn into hours and The Hours turns into a 2002 drama film starring Meryl Streep and Nicole Kidman, which I've heard is really good. + + +Anyways, you find yourself at the Castle Anthrax, where you are warmly welcomed at the door by eight school young blondes and brunettes, all between the ages of sixteen and nineteen and a half. Their's is a very lonely life of bathing, dressing, undressing and making exciting underwear, and they are utterly thrilled to meet so many handsome young knights. + + +"Greetings to you maidens. I am Arthur, King of the Britons!" You tell them, "And I have come here on a sacred quest to find the Holy Grail. Do you know where it is?" + + +"Oh your majesty, you must be exhausted, come, come! Rest in one of our beds!" Their leader Zoot suggests. + + +"I appreciate your hospitality young maiden, must I must find the Grail! Now is it here or not?" But every time you bring up the Holy Grail, Zoot changes the subject. + + +"But you are weary and you must rest!" She insists as she takes your arm. "You may sleep in my bed. It is a very big bed. I'd say it could fit say... A King and at least fifteen scantily clad young women. Just come up stairs with me and we shall tend to your wounds." You are lead to Zoot's bedroom where you find a rather kinky looking nun costume, which you slip into your inventory because... Uhh... Because it's a clue! Yes, that's why! A very vital clue to finding the Holy Grail... Yes. + + +"Now you lay there and let us do all the work." Zoot tells you. "I've been told by a very reliable source that the best cure for aching muscles is to cover yourself with melted chocolate and have three beautiful virgins lick it all off!" + + +At that moment, Sir Lancelot bursts in the room and pushes the women out of the way. "My Leige, we must escape this place! They do not have the Grail and these foul temptresses are trying to distract us from our holy mission!" + + +What will you do now?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The HMS Bounty set sail on a gloomy winter’s day a few days before Christmas. +You like the little ship, which is just ninety feet long and fairly small at just over 200 tons for the 46 men she carries. She has three masts and sails extremely well however and you are quite content aboard her, despite the gloomy weather. She carries four small cannons for defense and a compliment of muskets and cutlasses as well as enough provisions for the voyage. The purpose of the voyage is to sail to Tahiti to pick up breadfruit and transport them to Jamaica to feed the slaves who work the plantations there. It should be an easy enough voyage. + +If you are soon familiar with the ship but the crew are more difficult. You have joined them as an Able Seaman for what should be an easy voyage but there are far too many of men on the ship to remember all of their names. The one name you do remember is Lieutenant William Bligh, the ship’s commander. He is a chubby, little man with very white skin, wispy fair hair and blue eyes looking for all the world like a little girl’s porcelain doll. Bligh is supposed to be a superb navigator, having sailed under the famous Captain Cook, discoverer of Australia, on his last voyage, but he seems a bit excitable and a little difficult to take seriously. + +Almost from the beginning the ship seems to hit bad luck. The weather in the Channel is awful and barely have you sailed out of port than you lose your grip while climbing the rigging. You are plunging towards the deck and almost certain doom when you manage to grab a rope tied between two sails, halting your fall with a heart-stopping judder. Days later a storm breaks the windows of Bligh’s cabin, quickly flooding it with water. + +As the year of 1788 and the voyage of the Bounty begins you hope that things will get better… + +NOTE: PICK UP THE CREW LIST TO HELP YOU KEEP TRACK OF WHO IS WHO IN THIS STORY. +> The Atlantic +After leaving the English Channel the weather does indeed improve and you stop off at the Canary Islands for a week. Spirits are high as you sail onto the southwest bound for Tahiti, an island which you have heard of but have no idea where it is. You gather Bligh intends to sail around Cape Horn, the southernmost tip of South America, to get there. The ship is sailing so well Bligh decides to promote a protégé of his called Fletcher Christian from Master’s Mate to Acting Lieutenant, effectively making him Bligh’s deputy. + +Like everyone else on board the ship you like Christian. He is a cheerful and very likable young man, though a slightly sensitive soul who takes a solicitous interest in everyone’s welfare. His promotion comes at the expense of the Sailing Master John Fryer, a professional man, whose strong, independent opinions seem to irritate Bligh. He takes Christian’s promotion without a word but some of the crew are not so subtle. + +Matthew Quintal is one of your fellow seamen, a young Cornishman and a natural-born trouble-maker, always looking for an opportunity to make a little mischief. One morning he is scrubbing the deck close to where Fryer is sighting the sun with a sextant and begins to mock Fryer about Christian’s promotion, lightly at first and then more harshly when Fryer shows no response. Some of the other sailors standing nearby are exchanging glances and grinning. +> Join Quintal in mocking Fryer +You join Quintal in ribbing Fryer about Christian being replaced over him. He takes it all with ill-tempered terse sentences but suddenly there is a bizarrely high-pitched cry from further up the deck, you glance up to see Bligh striding towards you. + +“You infernal scoundrels!” he roars. “How dare you cowardly rascals show such insolence and contempt for Mr Fryer! Mr Fryer, how came you to permit such a thing to happen sir? Twenty-four lashes each to remind you men of the proper way of addressing your superiors! Master-at-Arms, fetch the lash! Quartermasters, prepare these men!” + +Hardly before you know what is happening strong hands have seized you and Quintal, stripped the shirts from your backs and your are being roped to the mast. The Quartermasters stand behind you and on Bligh’s orders begin to whip you mercilessly with the lash, which burns like a fire. Soon it is stripping flesh from your back and just as the agony is becoming unbearable the punishment is over. + +“May that be a lesson to you all!” Bligh declares. +> The Horn +After the lashing of Quintal you and the rest of your crew go about your duties quietly and you soon come upon Cape Horn in atrocious weather. For over four weeks Bligh tries to sail the Bounty into the face of a terrible wind, tacking into the face of a gale. You and several other sailors come down with fevers, brought on by constant exertion in freezing rain and tiredness, and finally Bligh admits defeat and turns the ship east. + +You will sail to Tahiti east, around the southern tip of Africa instead. Despite the storm damage the Bounty makes good speed and arrives off Cape Town on the tip of South Africa after a month of sailing. Bligh steers the Bounty carefully into the busy harbor and you and another sailor called John Williams are sent to sound the depths with a lead line. You are both feeding the rope out when the lead snags on some rocks far below. Because the Bounty is still going pretty fast the rope starts sliding rapidly through your hands cutting them badly. +> Hold on +You grimace and grasp the rope tight. Williams releases the rope and it drags you across the deck, slamming you painfully into the railing and you are nearly lost overboard but suddenly the lead comes free and you haul it up on the line. Williams, blowing on his burnt hands, only watches you when suddenly you hear a familiar high-pitched cry and look up to see Bligh striding towards you both. + +“You incompetent mongrel!” he spits at Williams. “Why did you not help that man? Six lashes for neglect and dereliction of duty!” + +The lash is fetched again, Williams is tied to the mast and the Quartermaster once more lays into him, drawing blood. Bligh doesn’t even look at you, merely watches the punishment coldly until it is over and he returns to his cabin. +> The Pacific +After making it safely into Cape Town the Bounty spends nearly a month resupplying and repairing storm damage, allowing you plenty of time to enjoy the delights of that port. You set sail again on the first day of July and the following month you arrive at Adventure Bay on the island of Tasmania to the south of Australia. You pause there again to re-supply and sail on again in September bound for Tahiti. Spirits are high on board as you near your destination. + +Unfortunately, you and another sailor called James Valentine begin to develop a breathing problem, sometimes after exertion you find you have difficulty catching your breath. You and Valentine decide to see the Ship’s Surgeon, a heavy-drinking red-faced fat man called Thomas Huggan, who seems rather surprised to be consulted on something medical. Huggan examines you both, wheezing the whole time, and when he has finished he wipes the sweat off his face and gulps down a glass of rum. + +“Internal disorder of some kind,” he tells you both. “Probably too much blood in your spleens. If you would let me open a vein I will bleed you both about a pint and this will relieve the pressure on your organs, you’ll be up and down the rigging free as birds then." + +You and Valentine exchange glances. +> Agree to let the Surgeon bleed you +The Surgeon fetches a grimy scalpel, spits on it and rubs it with a dirty cloth to clean it and slices open veins in your arms. Blood immediately pours out like a high-power hose and Huggan looks rather alarmed. With difficulty he manages to secure bandages to both your arms and pronounces you good as new. You are both doubtful, particularly as the bleeding doesn’t really stop but continues to ooze out of your cuts. Within days you have lost all feeling in your arm. + +When you peel the bandage away you find the area around the wound has turned green and black. You and Valentine are soon both feeling faint and feverish, forced to remain in your hammocks as almost your entire arms turn black. It doesn’t take you long to realize you are dying but there is nothing Huggan can do. Bligh learns of the situation, visits you both and rages at Huggan but your days are numbered. + +You die two weeks before the Bounty reaches Tahiti, the first of that ill-fated crew to perish. +> You are Dead +You have died too early in the story to even experience the Mutiny on the Bounty. Your only option is to return to the beginning of the story and try to live longer by making different choices. After the Mutiny on the Bounty if you die you may end the game and leave a comment. +Better Luck this time! +> Back to the Beginning... +The HMS Bounty set sail on a gloomy winter’s day a few days before Christmas. +You like the little ship, which is just ninety feet long and fairly small at just over 200 tons for the 46 men she carries. She has three masts and sails extremely well however and you are quite content aboard her, despite the gloomy weather. She carries four small cannons for defense and a compliment of muskets and cutlasses as well as enough provisions for the voyage. The purpose of the voyage is to sail to Tahiti to pick up breadfruit and transport them to Jamaica to feed the slaves who work the plantations there. It should be an easy enough voyage. + +If you are soon familiar with the ship but the crew are more difficult. You have joined them as an Able Seaman for what should be an easy voyage but there are far too many of men on the ship to remember all of their names. The one name you do remember is Lieutenant William Bligh, the ship’s commander. He is a chubby, little man with very white skin, wispy fair hair and blue eyes looking for all the world like a little girl’s porcelain doll. Bligh is supposed to be a superb navigator, having sailed under the famous Captain Cook, discoverer of Australia, on his last voyage, but he seems a bit excitable and a little difficult to take seriously. + +Almost from the beginning the ship seems to hit bad luck. The weather in the Channel is awful and barely have you sailed out of port than you lose your grip while climbing the rigging. You are plunging towards the deck and almost certain doom when you manage to grab a rope tied between two sails, halting your fall with a heart-stopping judder. Days later a storm breaks the windows of Bligh’s cabin, quickly flooding it with water. + +As the year of 1788 and the voyage of the Bounty begins you hope that things will get better… + +NOTE: PICK UP THE CREW LIST TO HELP YOU KEEP TRACK OF WHO IS WHO IN THIS STORY.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After making it safely into Cape Town the Bounty spends nearly a month resupplying and repairing storm damage, allowing you plenty of time to enjoy the delights of that port. You set sail again on the first day of July and the following month you arrive at Adventure Bay on the island of Tasmania to the south of Australia. You pause there again to re-supply and sail on again in September bound for Tahiti. Spirits are high on board as you near your destination. + +Unfortunately, you and another sailor called James Valentine begin to develop a breathing problem, sometimes after exertion you find you have difficulty catching your breath. You and Valentine decide to see the Ship’s Surgeon, a heavy-drinking red-faced fat man called Thomas Huggan, who seems rather surprised to be consulted on something medical. Huggan examines you both, wheezing the whole time, and when he has finished he wipes the sweat off his face and gulps down a glass of rum. + +“Internal disorder of some kind,” he tells you both. “Probably too much blood in your spleens. If you would let me open a vein I will bleed you both about a pint and this will relieve the pressure on your organs, you’ll be up and down the rigging free as birds then." + +You and Valentine exchange glances. +> Politely decline +You politely refuse and Huggan shrugs, fetches a dirty scalpel and slices Valentine’s arm open. Blood sprays out over the walls and a startled Huggan desperately staunches the bleeding with a stained rag. He bandages Valentine’s arm but the damage is done. Over the following days the wound continues first to bleed, then to ooze and Valentine becomes increasingly faint and weak. Soon his entire arm is black and green. + +Within days Valentine is consigned to his bunk, feverish and fading. Huggan is powerless to do anything, when Bligh learns of the situation he rages at the Surgeon in the most violent language possible. Valentine continues to weaken and dies late one night. A somber mood descends over the whole crew as he is sewn into his hammock and the following morning it is cast into the sea. You sit next to his body on the first night thinking grimly how that could have been you. +> Sinking spirits +Valentine’s death sends the crew’s spirits plunging low and Bligh decides to raise morale by instructing the crew to dance a jig to the tunes of a half-blind fiddler he has brought on board. The last thing the crew feel like doing is dancing but the sailors obligingly force themselves to their feet and dance wearily to the tunes the fiddler plays. You are dancing when you notice two men are remaining seated. + +William Brown, a mild scientific man who Bligh brought on board as a botanist to take care of the breadfruit plants is talking quietly to John Mills the Gunner’s Mate, a tough and unfriendly older man. You see Fletcher Christian go over and encourage them to dance but Mills shakes his head emphatically and Brown lowers his head. Christian shrugs and walks away. +> Join the two men in their refusal +You walk over and sit next to Mills but you have been spotted. + +Bligh yells for the music to stop and strides towards you three. + +“Why are you not dancing like the others?” he demands. + +“It does not seem like an appropriate time for that,” Brown says quietly. + +“Damn you for contemptible rascals,” Bligh cries. “All three of you will have your grog stopped from now until we reach Tahiti.” + +Mills glares back at him with a half-smile on his face as Bligh turns, returns to his former position near the helm and orders the fiddler to keep playing. The punishment is a harsh one but not as bad as it could have been: a week later you reach Tahiti. +> Tahiti +You are all relieved when the beautiful tree-lined round island of Tahiti is spotted. Bligh has been getting on everyone’s nerves: he is no longer on speaking terms with Sailing Master Fryer, Surgeon Huggan or the Carpenter William Purcell and he has been grating the nerves of most of the rest of the crew. It is with relief that Tahiti is sighted and within hours hundreds upon hundreds of canoes packed with scantily clad but cheering Tahitian men and women surround the Bounty. The women are a particularly lovely sight. + +After a week anchored offshore Bligh sends Christian to lead a party of nine ashore in the ship’s cutter to begin setting up tents and making a camp for the crew to use while they gather the breadfruit. You are part of this group and are left with another sailor called John Adams to guard the boats. Adams is a clever young fellow and the two of you are chatting when you notice a pair of young ladies eying you from behind some nearby huts. When they see you looking they glance at each other and giggle. + +Like all Tahitians they are dark skinned and wear nothing above the waist, their full breasts and brown nipples peep out shyly between the strands of their long black hair. They seem to have more than a casual interest in you and Adams nudges you in the side and points at the women grinning. He suggests you go over, introduce yourselves and keep the young ladies company for a while. +> Go and get acquainted with the young ladies +With a shrug you go over with Adams to meet the two young ladies. With many smiles they lead you into an empty hut where they offer you some fruit and nut snacks and begin examining your skin and clothes. They don’t mind your touching them and when you kiss them they seem to like it and kiss you back. Before things can get too interesting you hear Christian calling your name outside and with a curse you and Adams give your new friends a goodbye kiss and hurry outside. + +Christian is all smiles and thanks you both for doing your bit to improve England’s relationship with the Tahitian people, with embarrassed smiles and to the, slightly jealous, quips of your companions you row back to the Bounty for the evening. Bligh talks to Christian after you arrive and as you and Adams are clearing the boat after swinging it in he suddenly gives a high-pitched yelp. + +“A gudgeon is missing!” he exclaims. “You damned fools, where is the aft gudgeon?” +You and Adams both look for the little metal tube that fixes to part of the rudder but it is indeed missing. Inevitably Bligh fetches Christian, who reluctantly confirms that you both left the boats unattended for a short time. Bligh yells at Christian before inevitably sentencing you both to twelve lashes each for the disappearance of the little metal tube. + +Later as you lie down in your hammock, your back burning, you reflect that you are really beginning to hate that man. +> Discontent +The Bounty remains anchored in Matavai Bay for the next month while every day Bligh, Christian or Fryer lead a party of men ashore to gather breadfruit trees. You get the impression that the men are working deliberately slowly to prolong their stay on Tahiti, as often as they are able the men contrive to spend time with the Tahitians in their villages. All of the Natives are extremely friendly and the women remarkably so. Christian and, surprisingly, Bligh are fairly relaxed about these interactions between the crew and the women but after a year at sea it would have been very unwise to try to restrain the men. + +Bligh inevitably tries however. One day you are a part of a party that is working even more slowly than usual and Bligh is becoming irritable and orders you all to work faster. Repeatedly a sailor called Matthew Thompson, an older and extremely tough man keeps demanding, increasingly more insistently that he be allowed to go into the village. Bligh continues to refuse him. Finally, Thompson has had enough. + +“Damn you sir,” he growls. “If you were any sort of officer you would know better than to deny your men what they want.” + +There is stunned silence following this outburst. +> Join Thompson in criticising Bligh +You speak up, agreeing with Thompson that is the way the whole crew feels. Bligh has gone very pale. + +“Damn you for mutinous dogs,” he growls. “Quartermaster, twelve lashes each!” + +The lash is fetched, the blows are landed and your back is transformed into agony. Sullen and muttering the crew return once more to the Bounty. +> Defiance +Work continues on gathering the breadfruit plants while the crew members continue to enjoy the hospitality and affections of the local people. As well as the company of the women they now have strong locally-brewed alcohol to enjoy, though such gatherings have to be kept secret when Bligh is ashore. The lure of strong alcohol succeeds in drawing the overweight surgeon Huggan from his cabin (which he has rarely left for the last year) and he comes ashore. + +The Tahitians find the fat, red-faced man great fun and the men insist on plying him with more and more alcohol. Finally, it is getting late and Christian, who is part of the party though not drinking himself, informs everyone it is time to return to the ship or risk the wrath of Bligh. Most of the men stumble to their feet and stagger towards the boat but Huggan is too far gone. Making a rude comment about Bligh he tells Christian to leave him there. + +Christian licks his lips nervously. Huggan as a Surgeon is a fellow officer and Christian has no authority to order him back to the ship, on the other hand Bligh is sure to notice his absence and punish Huggan in some way. When Christian points this out Huggan laughs and again voices uncomplimentary views about your Commander. Christian shrugs, turns to you and suggests you come back. +> Join Huggan on an all-night bender +You refuse and Christian reluctantly leads his party back to the ship. All that night you and Huggan down cup after cup of the burningly strong local spirits. The Tahitian men may be used to the strong alcohol but you not so much. Some time before dawn you lie down on your back and pass out. When the inevitable vomit comes your mouth is closed and it remains in your mouth and throat. + +You suffocate and choke to death as the morning sun rises over this tropical paradise.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Work continues on gathering the breadfruit plants while the crew members continue to enjoy the hospitality and affections of the local people. As well as the company of the women they now have strong locally-brewed alcohol to enjoy, though such gatherings have to be kept secret when Bligh is ashore. The lure of strong alcohol succeeds in drawing the overweight surgeon Huggan from his cabin (which he has rarely left for the last year) and he comes ashore. + +The Tahitians find the fat, red-faced man great fun and the men insist on plying him with more and more alcohol. Finally, it is getting late and Christian, who is part of the party though not drinking himself, informs everyone it is time to return to the ship or risk the wrath of Bligh. Most of the men stumble to their feet and stagger towards the boat but Huggan is too far gone. Making a rude comment about Bligh he tells Christian to leave him there. + +Christian licks his lips nervously. Huggan as a Surgeon is a fellow officer and Christian has no authority to order him back to the ship, on the other hand Bligh is sure to notice his absence and punish Huggan in some way. When Christian points this out Huggan laughs and again voices uncomplimentary views about your Commander. Christian shrugs, turns to you and suggests you come back. +> Return to the Bounty +You join the rest of Christian’s group in returning to the Bounty. The following morning you again go ashore and find a group of Tahitian men gathered silently round the motionless figure of your ship’s surgeon. Vomit covers his face and hands and he lies unmoving on his back, his eyes shut. Christian calls out to him and when he doesn’t respond he examines him. At first you think he is dead drunk. You soon realize he is just dead. +> Paradise +After the death of Surgeon Huggan Bligh orders the Bounty sailed from Matavai Bay to Toaroa, a small bay and village further round the island. The reason Bligh gives is that there are more breadfruit trees there but the crew suspect it is to move them further from the scene of Huggan’s death and the temptations of alcohol and women. If that is the intention it is unsuccessful, there are even more of both at Toaroa. + +The women are, if possible, even more free with their affections and breath-takingly beautiful, here and one of your fellow sailors, a friendly, bearded man called William Muspratt, comes up to you one day with an excited whisper as you are moving breadfruit trees as part of a party under Bligh. He tells you he has found some exceptionally affectionate Native women who will apparently trade sex in exchange for odd trinkets such as coins, utensils like cutlery or other odds and ends. He tells you he is going to sneak away now and offers to show you where they may be found. +> Accept his offer +You and Muspratt sneak away from the work party and go to the huts Muspratt found before. He goes in one and you go in the other. You are a little nervous and uncertain this is wise as you step into the darkened interior of the hut. Inside, as your eyes adjust you see a pretty young lady lying under a blanket on the floor, she props herself in one elbow and smiles at you. Nervously you put a spare belt buckle on the floor and she folds back the blanket to reveal she is naked underneath, dark and soft in the darkness. + +Fifteen minutes later you are really starting to enjoy yourself when a small figure strides into the hut. + +“What do you think you are doing you infernal rat?” Bligh barks at you. “Climb off that person, get dressed and come outside at once.” + +He storms from the hut and you sheepishly emerge minutes later, your clothes reassembled and reapplied to you. Muspratt is looking similarly crestfallen and of course Bligh has his quartermasters standing by. You and Muspratt both get twelve lashes each, your backs burn like they are on fire and so it goes on. +> The temptations of Tahiti +Word soon spreads among the crew that Muspratt has found what amounts to a brothel in Toaroa, though actually many of the Native women seem happy to perform sexual services in exchange for gifts. One of your fellow seamen Robert Lamb, who often cuts the meat for the cook, decides to sneak off the next time he is in one of Christian’s work parties and give away his cleaver in the hope of getting two women at the same time. You have a knife and wonder if that would be worth the same. +> Sneak into the village with Lamb +You and Lamb walk off from Christian’s work group to the huts in the village. You make your offerings to the women and hold up two fingers to indicate your desires. To your amazement it works, two women lead Lamb away while two women guide you into one hut where you all hastily disrobe. Both women assume a position some might refer to as riding double and by the time you and Lamb stagger back to the ship that evening you are both feeling exhausted but rather at peace with the whole world. + +This feeling lasts right up until you see Bligh’s mad face. + +“Impertinent dogs!” he screams in your faces. “You think a cleaver and a knife are not as valuable as your disgusting perversions? Quartermasters, twelve each!” + +This whipping feels exceptionally agonizing on your already exhausted body. +> Rebellion +By the beginning of 1789 the crew have had enough of Bligh and his ways. + +Charles Churchill, a middle-aged Manchurian and the Master-at-Arms (the man nominally in charge of discipline on the ship) gathers you, the recently flogged Muspratt and another sailor called John Millward, a young and reasonably well-educated fellow, into a secret meeting a short way from the shore party. + +“I will tell you plainly boys I don’t care a damn for our Commander,” he whispers. “He deserves nothing better than to be shark bait for all I care. But this place is the closest thing to heaven on each I have ever clapped eyes on in all my years of sailing. I say tonight we take a boat and sneak away, Haywood has the watch with us tonight, he is ever sleeping on duty and besides was up most of last night at cards in the wardroom. I will get us a brace of guns each, we can take the cutter and sail round to Matavai Bay and from there light out to one of the smaller islands. After our shipmates have left on the Bounty we can return and live here forever.” + +It is a bold but extremely dangerous plan, desertion can be punished with hanging. Millward and Muspratt quickly agree to it and all three turn their gazes on you. You know if you refuse you must promise to keep silent about the plan. +> Join the three men in deserting +To begin with your plan goes smoothly. + +Midshipman Thomas Haywood is a lazy and indifferent officer who usually sleeps on the nights he has the watches. You, Churchill, Millward and Muspratt climb aboard the cutter and row it away from the ship, by hard rowing all through the night you reach Matavai Bay by dawn and exchange one of your muskets for a sailing canoe. By noon you are paddling north for a small island called Tetiroa, which you have heard of from the Tahitians. + +You make it to the island safely a few days later, though your boat capsizes as you reach the shore soaking your gunpowder and rendering your muskets useless. Notwithstanding this setback you take the boat ashore and set to work gathering edible fruits and nuts, coconuts and preparing nets and spears for fishing. The weather soon turns bad and for two weeks rainstorms lash the island. Soaked to the skin and huddled in what feeble shelters you can build from branches and leaves the four of you are beginning to reflect this might not have been a wise idea… + +Eventually the weather clears and to your dismay you catch sight of the Bounty and dozens of native canoes sailing towards your little island. The Tahitians must have told Bligh where you have gone. Hiding would be pointless so when a party from the Bounty lands on the beach you all go to the edge of the tree line to meet them, muskets in hand. Bligh walks alone up to you, cutlass in hand, and halts a short way from you. + +“Men, if you come back with me without trouble this is what I will do,” he tells you angrily. “I will whip the three of you forty-eight times and you Mr Churchill twenty-four but then that will be the end of it. There will be no hangings, no further punishment, no more word of this will be spoken of. I will write a note to the Admiralty, that I will include when I submit my account of the voyage, stating that I have dealt with this matter accordingly.” + +It seems to be the best you are going to get and the four of you surrender. You are taken back to Toaroa and flogged alongside an American sailor called Isaac Martin who punched a native man in the face for trying to steal an iron hoop from him. By the time the second flogging is over your back is mess of gristle, flesh and blood and you feel completely and utterly exhausted. +> Farewell Tahiti +Discontent continues to seethe in the crew as the last of the breadfruit trees are gathered. Two days after the last floggings someone cuts the Bounty’s anchor cable, apparently hoping the ship would drift away and that you would all be stranded in the paradise of Tahiti, it is only because there is no wind that night that the ship is not lost. Bligh is apoplectic, roundly cursing you all for a pack of traitors and has the spare anchor cable run down. + +The following month a Tahitian man is caught trying to steal Gunner William Peckover’s bedding, Bligh has him flogged a back-breaking one hundred times and hung in irons for a week but the next day he either escapes or is released. So it goes on until by the end of March the gathering of the breadfruit is complete and over 1,000 healthy plants have been safely brought on board until the Bounty resembles a floating garden. + +On the fourth day of April Bligh orders the anchor raised and the Bounty sails away from Tahiti to the great sadness and sorrow of both of the crew, most of which have at least one girlfriend and several male friends ashore by now, and the hospitable Tahitians who seem to have enjoyed spending time with their new visitors. The mood on board the ship is grim and tense, like an explosive ready to blow at any spark. + +Bligh, as usual, provides such sparks. + +The first comes three weeks after leaving Tahiti when the Bounty stops at Nomuka in the Friendly Islands to take on fresh water. Fletcher Christian is sent ashore with a party but Bligh orders him to leave his musket's ammunition behind for fear of harming the Natives and making them anti-English. Despite this order you and some of the other sailors in the party disobey the order and carry knives or dirks ashore. You take a small adze or hand-axe. + +No sooner have you landed than dozens of Tongan Natives armed with spears, clubs and rocks come out and surround you all. Christian yells at them to clear away but the only response is what sounds like shouted threats and a few thrown stones. One warrior, a great big naked man in war-paint snatches your adze out of your hand. Unable to make any headway you are forced to return to the Bounty. + +“You cowardly rascals!” Bligh yells at you all. “You, Mr Christian, are you afraid to go through a set of naked savages when you have arms.” + +For the first time you see Christian lose his temper. + +“The arms are of no use when your orders prevent them being used!” he cries. + +“You sir, are a coward!” Bligh declares and turns away in disgust. + +You and your fellow sailors glance at each other. In England one gentleman calling another a coward would be considered grounds for a duel. Every single one of you feels sympathy for Christian who stands on the deck looking completely paralyzed by indecision. + +The next day you put the Friendly Islands behind you and sail on west towards Australia. +> Bligh breaks Christian +The next afternoon Bligh is on at Christian again. + +You are scrubbing the deck when you see Bligh suspiciously inspecting a pile of coconuts piled between two cannons. + +“Those coconuts look fewer than they did yesterday... why you damned hounds have been stealing my coconuts! You could not have done it unless your officers had known!” + +Inevitably the ship’s officers, including Christian are called out and hear Bligh’s accusations. + +“No one has been stealing your coconuts sir,” Fryer says wearily. + +“Damn you, you must have taken them yourselves! Mr Christian, how many coconuts did you bring with you?” + +“I don’t know sir,” Christian replies. “I hope you don’t think me guilty of stealing your things.” + +“Yes you damned hound I do!” Bligh barks back. “You must have stolen them from me or you could give a better account of them, god damn you for a scoundrel, you are all thieves alike and combined with the men to rob me, I suppose you’ll steal my yams next but I’ll sweat you for it you rascals! I’ll make half of you jump overboard before we get through the Endeavour Straights!” + +Bligh turns to the scowling Master-at-Arms Charles Churchill. + +“Stop these villains’ grog and give them nothing but half a pound of yams tomorrow to eat and if they steal any more I’ll reduce them to a quarter.” + +Christian steps forward and clears his throat. + +“Sir, this treatment is intolerable.” He says, his voice breaking. “My family have been gentlemen for twenty-five generations and not once have any of them been accused of being cowards or thieves without responding.” + +“God damn you, what does that mean!” Bligh explodes. “You sir are the worst of the lot, a contemptible thief, an infernal scoundrel, a cowardly rascal and an incompetent mongrel and that is what my opinion of you is sir.” + +Bligh turns on his heel and storms back down to his cabin. The rest of the officers, avoiding Chistian’s eyes disband and wander down to their cabins or about the deck. Fletcher just stands there, his jaws grinding over and over. Finally, he goes below decks. + +For the rest of the afternoon and evening there is one topic of conversation among the crew, a discussion about Christian and a feeling of great sympathy for him and great hatred towards Bligh. The rumors about Christian are wild: that he has been seen tearing up his personal papers, that he has given away many of his most valuable possessions to his fellow officers, that he has got some spare wood from the carpenter and is trying to build a raft out of it. You go out to the Officer’s Wardroom on an errand and find Christian lying listlessly in his hammock, eyes staring at the ceiling, an almost empty bottle of rum at his side. + +Despite your fears about Christian neither you nor any of the crew are ready for what happens next. +> Mutiny on the Bounty +Early the next morning you are woken from your sleep by wild and confused shouting that seems to come from all around the ship. You and the other sailors spring from your hammocks and rush out on deck to see a bizarre sight. Christian and several other men armed variously with bayonets, cutlasses and muskets are herding a loudly protesting and threatening Bligh out onto deck. His hands are tightly bound behind his back. + +Christian seems half-crazy, he is alternately yelling at Bligh and talking to his fellow mutineers and has a heavy sounding plummet hanging from his neck (you later learn it was so he could jump overboard and drown if the mutiny failed). + +“Knock Christian down men,” Bligh is shouting. “Knock Christian down!” + +“Hold your tongue or you are a dead man!” Christian screams in his face. + +John Fryer emerges on deck at cutlass point. + +“Fletcher, you must stop this,” he calls out. + +“I have been in hell for weeks past!” Christian shouts at him. “Commander Bligh has brought this on himself!” + +You are not sure what is going on but Christian and at least a dozen of the crew seem to have taken control of the ship and no one is really opposing him, the only person arguing against him is the vitriolic Bligh. Christian has decided to cast Bligh and his loyal companions adrift and orders the jolly boat lowered but it found to have several leaks so he orders the cutter lowered instead. It soon becomes apparent that the cutter is too small for all the loyal crew who want to leave with Bligh. + +“You are all pirates!” Bligh shouts at Christian. “Any man who stays on this ship is a pirate and will be hunted down and hanged by the Royal Navy!” + +“Get him away!” men shout loudly. + +The launch, a twenty-three-foot-long boat designed for fifteen men is soon in the water and Bligh is roughly thrown in. Several other crew members starting with Fryer join him, not so much because they like him but because they don’t want to stay on the ship and be labelled as pirates, a crime which carries the death penalty. Soon there are more people in the boat than there is room for and still others want to get in, the ship seems almost equally divided between Bligh Loyalists and Mutineers. + +You stand by the rail looking down at the crowded boat. The island of Tofua is visible nearby and as Christian is throwing a sextant, compass, charts, tools and even four cutlasses (!) down into the boat it seems the nineteen, loyal people in the boat have a good chance of reaching it in safety. It seems that the twenty-five mutineers or pirates remaining on the Bounty (including at least four people who want to go with Bligh but who there is no room for) are planning to return to Tahiti. + +You must choose whether to go with Bligh or remain aboard the Bounty, a decision that will affect the rest of your life. +> Go in the boat with the Loyalists and Bligh +You make your decision and with a deep breath you jump off the Bounty to become the twentieth man in the Loyalist boat. Seconds after you jump in the Mutineers cast the rope off connecting the launch to the Bounty and your boat steers away. There is barely room to move but you row clear of the Bounty to the sound of the pirates’ jeers and last insults and Bligh watches silently as hundreds of his precious breadfruit plants are thrown over the sides of the ship. + +The last you see of the Bounty is her turning away and sailing east, presumably back to Tahiti. Her sails get smaller and smaller before she is just a speck on the horizon and eventually, like a ghost ship or the memories of a dream, she vanishes from sight. You all stare at Bligh with hostility while he clears his throat and doesn’t even have the good grace to look ashamed at the predicament he has landed you all in. + +“Men, the Dutch settlement of Coupang in Timor is about 4,000 miles west of here. With careful navigation and rationing I can get us there. From there we can take ships back to England and report the Mutiny on the Bounty to the Admiralty who will send ships out to Tahiti to hunt down those pirates and bring them back to England for justice. We can do it men.” + +No one answers but you all just go on staring angrily at him in silence. + +Tofua is little more than an active volcano jutting from the sea and the plume of smoke rising from it is clearly visible. With hard rowing you reach the island the day after the mutiny and spread out to search for supplies. There are Natives on the island and unlike the Tahitians they do not appear to be friendly. Within a few days it appears that your return to England will not be as easy as Bligh claims... +> Attack！ +After four days ashore with the Natives gathering in increasing numbers and hardly any supplies to be found Bligh gives the order for you all to return to the boat and resume sailing westwards. As soon as the Natives see you are leaving they attack, they race to the shore and run through the water towards you armed with spears and axes. You are pushing off as fast as you can but one fast moving Native manages to grab a rope attached to the stern. You all quickly realize you can’t escape as long as he is holding that rope. +> Jump off the boat and run out to fight the Native +You grab a cutlass and clamber out of the boat, splashing through waist-deep water towards the warrior. He lets go of the rope and jabs at you with a spear but you side-step it and drive your cutlass through his chest. As you turn back towards the boat you find it is indeed escaping, rowing quickly out to sea. You start to stagger after it but a Native comes up behind you and hits you on the head with a rock. You fall down into the foaming waves and more natives beat and stab you to death, your sacrifice enabling your comrades to escape to safety. +> You are Dead +So you are dead, in fact in the immortal words of John Cleese you are no more, you have ceased to be, bereft of life you rest in peace and are, in fact, an ex-sailor. The great thing about this story (and possibly life in general if the Buddhists are right) is that you don't have to stay this way. You can return to the story either from the beginning or from the Mutiny on the Bounty, if you feel like exploring different story branches. + +Alternatively if, like a glutton at a delicious feast, you really feel like you couldn't take anymore of this wonderful writing, you can End the Game and Leave Comments. + +If that is the case thank you for taking the time to read my story.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After four days ashore with the Natives gathering in increasing numbers and hardly any supplies to be found Bligh gives the order for you all to return to the boat and resume sailing westwards. As soon as the Natives see you are leaving they attack, they race to the shore and run through the water towards you armed with spears and axes. You are pushing off as fast as you can but one fast moving Native manages to grab a rope attached to the stern. You all quickly realize you can’t escape as long as he is holding that rope. +> Let someone else get off the boat +You remain on the boat and watch as stout Quartermaster John Norton jumps overboard, crosses to the Native holding the rope, dodges his spear and cuts him down with his cutlass. The dying Native releases the rope releasing your boat and enabling the oarsmen to row rapidly away from the shore. Norton turns to follow you but is knocked down by a Native with a rock and as he tries to rise he is beaten and stabbed to death. The rest of you escape by throwing spare garments of clothes into the sea, which pursuing Natives stop to pick up. + +The month following your escape from Tofua is a difficult one for you. The weather is constantly cold, there are frequent storms and practically all of your time is spent either rowing or bailing out the boat. Sleep for more than a few hours at a time is impossible. You have nothing but tiny amounts of bread and water, your stomach shrinks massively and you are constantly thirsty. Life becomes blurred. + +By the time you arrive at Restoration Island you can barely drag yourselves ashore. The island receives its name from Bligh after you all find fresh fruit and oysters which go a little way to restoring your strength. You find deserted Native campsites and after your previous experience you are not keen to make contact with them. After two days resting you sail on, reaching an island Bligh calls Sunday Island the next day where tensions again erupt. +> Another Argument +On Sunday Island on the last day of May Bligh nearly faces another mutiny. + +You and the Carpenter William Purcell spend the morning clam hunting and return to the boat that evening with your findings. Bligh orders you to hand the clams over and, considering them personal property, you both refuse. + +“You ungrateful scoundrels!” Bligh exclaims. “If I had not brought you here you would all have perished! + +“If it had not been for you we should not have been here,” you reply angrily. + +“You are scoundrels!” Bligh exclaims. + +“I am not a scoundrel,” Purcell replies coldly. “I am as good a man as you.” + +Bligh grabs a cutlass from the boat and Purcell does likewise. + +“Mr Cole, arrest both of those men,” Fryer calls out to the Boatswain. + +“You will do no such thing,” Bligh snaps. + +“There are other methods in making people do as they are ordered without fighting them sir,” you tell Bligh stepping between him and Purcell. + +Bligh glares at you for a moment, apparently too angry to speak, and then abruptly throws his cutlass into the boat. Purcell does likewise and the next day you sail on to Coupang. Hardly anyone talks to Bligh more than is absolutely necessary, no one can stand him any longer. All of you are too sick, weak and tired and the monotonous waves roll you onwards steadily until finally, gloriously, you arrive at Coupang. + +The little Dutch town huddled against the waves looks the sweetest place on earth as you all sail in, dock and disembark, feeling like kissing the ground. Bligh coldly orders Fryer and you to stay and guard the boat while he leads the rest ashore. You ignore him and join the others in receiving food and medical attention from the kind inhabitants of the colony. + +Your troubles are a long way from over yet however. +> Getting home +Coupang is a small settlement with no large vessels so Bligh arranges the purchase of a derelict 34-foot schooner he names HMS Resource and orders you all to work hard in making it seaworthy enough to sail on to the larger port of Batavia on the island of Java where you should be able to find a ship going back to England. Tensions remain with Bligh bickering frequently with Fryer, Purcell and now also Acting Surgeon Thomas Ledward, who accuses Bligh of eating more than his fair share of supplies. + +Bligh responds by insisting that you all work hard so that you may get back to England sooner, despite your still generally weak state. +> Work hard +You push yourself hard but it turns out to be a mistake, you soon contract a serious inflammatory fever, as does David Nelson the gentle but weak Botanist Bligh also brought with him on the Bounty. Both of you worsen, despite the best efforts of the Doctor and even Bligh’s comments that “your generally good conduct and manly fortitude deserve special tribute to your memory” fail to raise your spirits. + +You succumb to the sickness a short time before your companions sail to Batavia and safety.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Coupang is a small settlement with no large vessels so Bligh arranges the purchase of a derelict 34-foot schooner he names HMS Resource and orders you all to work hard in making it seaworthy enough to sail on to the larger port of Batavia on the island of Java where you should be able to find a ship going back to England. Tensions remain with Bligh bickering frequently with Fryer, Purcell and now also Acting Surgeon Thomas Ledward, who accuses Bligh of eating more than his fair share of supplies. + +Bligh responds by insisting that you all work hard so that you may get back to England sooner, despite your still generally weak state. +> Work at your own speed +You continue to work steadily but Bligh’s relentless hectoring drives the gentle but weak Botanist David Nelson into a tropical disease which claims his life the month after you arrived in Coupang. By August the HMS Resource is ready and the remaining eighteen Loyalists under Bligh make a short voyage to the busy Indonesian port of Batavia, another Dutch port, arriving on the first day of October. The constant bickering between Bligh and the rest of you continue during this +voyage. + +At one point Fryer declares to Bligh “You do not only use me ill but every man in the vessel will say the same.” + +“Yes by God, we are used damn ill and you do not have any right to do so,” Purcell declares. + +Bligh grabs a cutlass and has the two men clapped in irons, releasing Fryer after an apology but keeping Purcell imprisoned for the last ten days of the trip. Bligh quickly begins making arrangements to sell the HMS Resource and the boat you left the Bounty on in order to finance the return home of all of you. + +The boat has been mislaid and officials in Batavia have mistakenly moored it in a mosquito-infested inland bit of water. Bligh orders Seaman Thomas Hall to go and retrieve it despite the risk from the mosquitoes. +> Help Hall retrieve the boat +You and Hall have to venture through thick clouds of mosquitoes to move the boat and by the time you have rowed it back to where it should be both of you have been badly bitten many times. Malaria sets in almost immediately and within days you both succumb to the illness. An indifferent Bligh sails home soon after leaving most of his loyal crew behind in Batavia.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You continue to work steadily but Bligh’s relentless hectoring drives the gentle but weak Botanist David Nelson into a tropical disease which claims his life the month after you arrived in Coupang. By August the HMS Resource is ready and the remaining eighteen Loyalists under Bligh make a short voyage to the busy Indonesian port of Batavia, another Dutch port, arriving on the first day of October. The constant bickering between Bligh and the rest of you continue during this +voyage. + +At one point Fryer declares to Bligh “You do not only use me ill but every man in the vessel will say the same.” + +“Yes by God, we are used damn ill and you do not have any right to do so,” Purcell declares. + +Bligh grabs a cutlass and has the two men clapped in irons, releasing Fryer after an apology but keeping Purcell imprisoned for the last ten days of the trip. Bligh quickly begins making arrangements to sell the HMS Resource and the boat you left the Bounty on in order to finance the return home of all of you. + +The boat has been mislaid and officials in Batavia have mistakenly moored it in a mosquito-infested inland bit of water. Bligh orders Seaman Thomas Hall to go and retrieve it despite the risk from the mosquitoes. +> Let him do it on his own +You avoid helping Hall and predictably he becomes sick with malaria from mosquito bites while retrieving the boat and quickly dies. Bligh has also become sick with malaria and just five days after Hall’s death he books passage aboard the Dutch ship Vlydte bound for Portsmouth. By this point hostility against him is so widespread that only two men, his clerk John Samuel and his servant John Smith are willing to travel with him, the remaining thirteen prefer to wait under Fryer's command for another ship. +> Return to England with Bligh +The voyage back to England is thankfully smooth sailing. It takes two months to reach Cape Town in South Africa, which the Vlydte departs in the first days of 1790. Three months later you are back in England after over two years away and never have you been so relieved to return to your native country. While Bligh goes to London to report the Mutiny on the Bounty to the Admiralty you remain in Portsmouth to rest and wait for your comrades to rejoin you in the safety of England. +> Hunting for the Bounty Mutineers +Just thirteen of the twenty loyal crew members cast adrift with Bligh survive to return to England in the spring and summer of 1790, yourself among them. Bligh quickly reports the Mutiny on the Bounty and publishes a book about it, snappily titled A Narrative Of The Mutiny On Board His Majesty’s Ship Bounty And The Subsequent Voyage Of Part Of The Crew In The Ship’s Boat, which you never both to read. + +In October Bligh is court martialed for the loss of the Bounty, acquitted and subsequently promoted from Lieutenant to Post Captain. The Admiralty begins making plans to deal with the twenty-five Bounty pirates and decides to send the 24-gun frigate HMS Pandora with 134 men under Captain Edward England to Tahiti to capture all the pirates they can find and bring them back to England for trial. The Admiralty puts out a request for former crew of the Bounty to join the voyage to help identify the pirates and Midshipman Thomas Haywood volunteers for the voyage in exchange for a promotion to Third Lieutenant. + +You consider whether to go or not. +> Sail with the Pandora to Tahiti to hunt down your former companions +It is with considerable trepidation that you agree to a second voyage to Tahiti but to your relief this one goes smoothly. The Pandora leaves Spithead and sails directly to Tahiti, travelling successfully around Cape Horn. After a swift four month voyage, which last time took you nearly a year, you arrive off the familiar tropical paradise of Tahiti and sail into Toaroa Bay. + +You and Lieutenant Haywood, a lazy and arrogant character whom you despise, remain on board the HMS Pandora while parties of heavily armed sailors go ashore. They swiftly return with three men (Armourer Joseph Coleman and Midshipmen Peter Heywood and George Stewart) who surrender themselves and the following day they capture another man. The remaining Mutineers flee into the mountains prompting sailors to scour the island in order to capture them all. + +Within two weeks three more men are captured and a fourth has surrendered. By the middle of April six more men have been captured bringing the total up to fourteen of the twenty-five who remained on the Bounty, including all four of the men who wanted to join Bligh in the boat but had no space to do so. They claim two of the remaining men were killed in fights on the island while the other nine Mutineers sailed away aboard the Bounty with several Tahitians in September of 1789 and they haven’t been seen since. The Natives confirm these stories. + +With nine Mutineers and the Bounty still missing Captain England hoists anchor on 8 May and sets sail to find them. The fourteen prisoners are kept in a specially designed prison on the Pandora's deck. +> Disaster! +The Pandora spends three fruitless months scouring the Pacific for signs of the remaining pirates and the Bounty while the fourteen Mutineers they have captured are kept imprisoned in a makeshift prison cell on the quarterdeck inevitably dubbed “Pandora’s Box”. The voyage is hopeless: with hundreds, if not thousands, of islands to hide on the chances of finding the Bounty and the Mutineers is small. + +Disaster strikes you once more one summer’s day when the Pandora runs aground on the Great Barrier Reef. She immediately begins sinking and all efforts to either free her or patch up the damage is hopeless. By the next day she is listing worse than ever and you and Haywood are among the first into the boats. The Mutineers are not released in time and four of them drown, only ten swim to the safety of the boats. + +The survivors of the Pandora, about one hundred of you including the prisoners re-assemble on a small sand cay. Once more you are sailing to Coupang in four open boats and from there onto Batavia and thence to England, this time with your ten prisoners in tow. The prospect of repeating the same arduous trip you took before fills you with dismay but there is nothing else you can do. +> Another remarkable voyage +This time your return back to England is much easier than last time. + +You reach Coupang after a voyage of twenty days and from there arrange transport on to Batavia. In Batavia you are lucky enough to find the HMS Gorgon at anchor and board it to return to England. You reach England one summer’s day and disembark at Spithead with your ten prisoners in tow. Altogether fifty-six of the one hundred and thirty-four-man crew of the Pandora died during the sinking or of disease as well as four of the prisoners. Captain Edwards is court martialed and acquitted of the loss of the Pandora and the Admiralty prepares for the trial of the surviving Bounty Mutineers. +> Trials +Following your safe return to England a Court Martial is quickly arranged to try the ten captured mutineers you and Haywood managed to help the crew of the Pandora get back. Bligh and another of your former comrades, a sailor called Lawrence LeBogue, have gone sailing on a second voyage to try and do what Bligh failed to do on his first voyage and deliver breadfruit from Tahiti to the slave plantations in Jamaica. + +The Admiralty requests that as many of the eleven remaining loyal members of the Bounty crew that can be found (not counting Bligh and LeBogue) should testify against the ten captured mutineers and you read in newspapers that seven, including Fryer, Cole, Peckover, Purcell and Haywood, have volunteered their services. You wonder whether you should go or not. +> Testify against your former companions +You decide to attend the court martial proceedings aboard the HMS Duke overseen by Admiral Hood. Of the ten prisoners Carpenter’s Mates Thomas McIntosh and Charles Norman, Armourer Joseph Coleman and Seaman Michael Byrne have letters from Bligh allowing that they wanted to join him in his boat but had to remain aboard the Bounty due to lack of room. They are quickly acquitted. + +Sailing Master John Fryer, Boatswain William Cole, Gunner William Peckover, Carpenter William Purcell, Lieutenants Thomas Hayward and John Hallet, Seaman John Smith and yourself all testify against the six remainder: Midshipman Peter Heywood, Boatswain’s Mate James Morrison and Seamen Thomas Burkett, Thomas Ellison, John Millward and William Muspratt. With eighteen former crew members of the Bounty present it is the closest you get to a reunion. + +Heywood fights a strong case, pointing out he was just sixteen at the time, that he slept through most of what was going on and arrived on deck too late to help and wanted to join Bligh in the boat but there was no room. Witnesses agree they never saw him helping the mutineers but also that he never did much to help the Loyalists either. Ultimately the Judges decided to pardon him. + +Morrison is another man who wins a pardon, arguing a tenacious defense that successfully convinced the Judge’s he had also taken no part either for or against the Mutineers. Muspratt has a harder time as he was seen at the time of the mutiny standing by with a musket in his hands. He wins a pardon largely based on a technicality: his request to call Byrn and Norman as witnesses was refused and a mistrial was later ruled. + +Burkett, Ellison and Millward had no chance. Burkett was among those who forced Bligh from his cabin at gunpoint. Ellison and Millward both had cutlasses in their hands and took an active part in forcing people into the boat. All three are sentenced to be hung and two months after the court martial all three are executed upon the HMS Brunswick in Spithead and their bodies left hanging for all to see. + +The following summer Bligh returned from his breadfruit expedition, doubtless disappointed to have missed the trials of the Bounty mutineers. This voyage had been a success but on bringing the breadfruit to Jamaica the slaves refused to eat it, not liking the taste. It seems that the reason behind the voyage of the Bounty, and everything that arose from it, was fundamentally pointless. +> The Future +By the end of 1793 there are just thirteen men who survived the boat journey to Coupang in England, including you. Of these you have lost contact with Gunner William Peckover, Clerk John Samuel and Captain’s Servant John Smith. You know some of your former companions have had enough and want to retire from the sea but most are happy to keep serving. You must make your choice. +> Retire from the sea +The years go by and as you age you read in newspapers about what befalls your former comrades. Lieutenant John Hallett dies in 1794 of lingering malaria from your voyages. Lieutenant Thomas Haywood drowns when the HMS Swift sinks in 1798, Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue dies of a fall the same year. Quartermaster’s Mate George Simpson dies on land in 1801. Others go on to long and distinguished careers. + +William Bligh and John Fryer both enjoy success and promotion in the Navy, both die in 1817. Midshipman Robert Tinkler dies in 1820. Boatswain William Cole dies ashore in 1833 and the last of your companions, opinionated Carpenter William Purcell dies in 1834. You live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian. + +In 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people, except for him all women or children. The Admiralty decides against taking any action. + +John Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829. +> Conclusion +By the end of 1835 you have outlived every single one of the forty-six men who sailed from England aboard the Bounty in the winter of 1787 and go to your grave peacefully. + +From 1787-1793 twenty-four, over half, of the Bounty's crew died of disease, drowned, were killed by Natives or each other or were killed in England. Over the next fourteen years seven more met similar fates. Of the entire Crew only nine are known to have definitely suffered natural deaths. You are one of the few lucky ones who experienced disease, piracy, Native attacks, shipwrecks, fighting and all the other hazards that befell you and survived. Ultimately hundreds of deaths including seventy-eight Natives killed on Tubai, and the fifty-eight who died from the HMS Pandora’s crew, are connected with the Mutiny on the Bounty. + +Even the 2012 death of Claudene Christian, Fletcher Christian’s descendent, who drowned when the Bounty, a replica of the HMS Bounty, sank during Hurricane Sandy, can be connected to the Mutiny. + +Singularly each of these events, the Mutiny, the wrecking of the Pandora, the Trials of the Mutineers in Spithead, Massacre Day on Pitcairn, the loss of the replica Bounty were fairly common place events, especially in the 1700’s and 1800’s in England but taken altogether they form a remarkable story. The greatest legacy of this remarkable legacy is the still-populated island of Pitcairn, with approximately fifty people descended from Pirates it remains the smallest country in the world. + +So who was ultimately to blame for the Mutiny, Bligh or Christian? + +Carpenter William Purcell, who hated Bligh, had no doubt. + +“Christian was a gentleman,” he told Christian’s brother after his return to England. “A brave man and every officer and seaman on board the ship would have gone through fire and water to serve him. As much as I have lost and suffered by him if he could be restored to his country I should be the first to go without wages in search of him.” + +It was Christian’s fate, in a moment of madness, to set off a chain of events that would end with him being shot in the back while carrying wood across his garden on Pitcairn four years later. There is a tale oft-told on Pitcairn of a certain cave that Christian had stocked with muskets in case he needed to make a last stand if the island were ever found by the Royal Navy. Often he sat alone up there at night, mournfully reflecting on all that he had lost and the nineteen men he had cast adrift at sea for the sins of one of them. + +The story of the Mutiny on the Bounty can be seen as much as a Tragedy as an Adventure. + +Thank you for taking the time to read my story. +> Sources +I will end this story game with a few notes about my Sources. + +The story of the Mutiny on the Bounty has been made into movies five times, in 1916, in 1933 (with Errol Flynn), in 1935 (with Clark Gable), in 1962 (with Marlon Brando and Richard Harris) and in 1984 (with Laurence Olivier, Anthony Hopkins, Mel Gibson, Daniel Day-Lewis and Liam Neeson). The most recent version is also the most accurate and all are worth watching, if only for entertainment value. + +Wikipedia gave me a good start on sources about the Bounty, the Pitcairn Islands Study Centre proved an invaluable resource and the Famous Trials page on the Mutiny on the Bounty by Doug Linder provided me with detailed accounts of the 1792 trial of the surviving mutineers. Firsthand accounts by William Bligh and a rather good later 1831 book by Sir John Barrow, accessed through Project Gutenberg, also helped immerse myself in the period including Bligh’s bizarre vocabulary of insults. + +As the replica of the HMS Bounty used in the 1984 movie in anchored off Lantau Island in Hong Kong I took the opportunity to pop over from Shenzhen and see it (from a distance as it is a privately-owned ship) on one of my rest days. This replica was made in 1979 and helped drive home the small size of the Bounty, as already noted a second vessel made in 1962 sank during Hurricane Sandy fifty years later resulting in the death of two people including Fletcher Christian’s descendent Claudene Christian. The Christian Science Monitor called her death “an almost inexplicable twist in that family’s legacy”. + +One of my biggest hopes for the future is to one day visit Pitcairn Island. + +Thank you for taking the time to read my story. + +NOTE: IF YOU ARE INTERESTED IN LEARNING ABOUT THE VARIOUS FATES OF THE BOUNTY CREW USE THIS ITEM.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>By the end of 1793 there are just thirteen men who survived the boat journey to Coupang in England, including you. Of these you have lost contact with Gunner William Peckover, Clerk John Samuel and Captain’s Servant John Smith. You know some of your former companions have had enough and want to retire from the sea but most are happy to keep serving. You must make your choice. +> Find another ship +You decide to resume service at sea and look about for whom to serve. William Bligh is now Captain of the HMS Calcutta, you could serve with him. Sailing Master John Fryer is now serving with the HMS Britannia. Lieutenant John Hallett is with the HMS Penelope. Lieutenant Thomas Haywood is the Lieutenant Commanding of the sloop HMS Swift. Lieutenant Robert Tinkler is aboard the HMS Isis. Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue is serving aboard the HMS Jason. You can choose who to follow. +> Captain William Bligh +You join William Bligh and serve with him for the next twenty years. You are with him at the Battle of Camperdown in 1797 and fight for him under Nelson at the Battle of Copenhagen in 1801. In 1805 you accompany him to Australia to rule as Governor and stick with him when he is deposed in yet another mutiny, a Rum Rebellion in 1808 in which he is imprisoned for two years before returning to England. He is cleared of blame once more, serves at sea for three more years before retiring, a Vice Admiral. He dies in 1817 at the age of 63. + +You live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian. In 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action. + +John Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to resume service at sea and look about for whom to serve. William Bligh is now Captain of the HMS Calcutta, you could serve with him. Sailing Master John Fryer is now serving with the HMS Britannia. Lieutenant John Hallett is with the HMS Penelope. Lieutenant Thomas Haywood is the Lieutenant Commanding of the sloop HMS Swift. Lieutenant Robert Tinkler is aboard the HMS Isis. Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue is serving aboard the HMS Jason. You can choose who to follow. +> Sailing Master John Fryer +You join John Fryer and serve with him for the next eighteen years. You are with him under Nelson at the Battle of Copenhagen in 1801. He rises to become one of the foremost Sailing Masters in the Royal Navy before retiring in 1812 and dying five years later at the age of 63. You retire from the sea soon after. + +You live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian. In 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action. + +John Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to resume service at sea and look about for whom to serve. William Bligh is now Captain of the HMS Calcutta, you could serve with him. Sailing Master John Fryer is now serving with the HMS Britannia. Lieutenant John Hallett is with the HMS Penelope. Lieutenant Thomas Haywood is the Lieutenant Commanding of the sloop HMS Swift. Lieutenant Robert Tinkler is aboard the HMS Isis. Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue is serving aboard the HMS Jason. You can choose who to follow. +> Lieutenant John Hallett +You join Lieutenant John Hallett aboard the HMS Penelope but unfortunately neither of you are destined for a long career. You continue to suffer from malaria you became infected with during your voyage and your health worsens. Despite the fact you are both in your early twenties it quickly becomes apparent it is fatal. The two of you journey to Hallett’s home in Bedford where you succumb to your illness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to resume service at sea and look about for whom to serve. William Bligh is now Captain of the HMS Calcutta, you could serve with him. Sailing Master John Fryer is now serving with the HMS Britannia. Lieutenant John Hallett is with the HMS Penelope. Lieutenant Thomas Haywood is the Lieutenant Commanding of the sloop HMS Swift. Lieutenant Robert Tinkler is aboard the HMS Isis. Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue is serving aboard the HMS Jason. You can choose who to follow. +> Lieutenant Thomas Haywood +You join Lieutenant Thomas Haywood aboard his sloop the HMS Swift and spend four happy years running letters for the Royal Navy in Asian waters. Your careers come to an end one terrible night when your ship is sunk with all hands in the South China Sea. The sea is an unforgiving mystery.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to resume service at sea and look about for whom to serve. William Bligh is now Captain of the HMS Calcutta, you could serve with him. Sailing Master John Fryer is now serving with the HMS Britannia. Lieutenant John Hallett is with the HMS Penelope. Lieutenant Thomas Haywood is the Lieutenant Commanding of the sloop HMS Swift. Lieutenant Robert Tinkler is aboard the HMS Isis. Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue is serving aboard the HMS Jason. You can choose who to follow. +> Lieutenant Robert Tinkler +You serve loyally under Lieutenant Robert Tinkler for the next twenty-six years. He rises from Lieutenant to Commander of the HMS Isis after good service under Nelson at the Battle of Copenhagen in 1801. You sail the oceans for many years before Tinkler, his health suffering, retired to Norwich where he dies in 1820. You retire from the sea that same year and live a long and peaceful retirement. + +You live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian. In 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action. + +John Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to resume service at sea and look about for whom to serve. William Bligh is now Captain of the HMS Calcutta, you could serve with him. Sailing Master John Fryer is now serving with the HMS Britannia. Lieutenant John Hallett is with the HMS Penelope. Lieutenant Thomas Haywood is the Lieutenant Commanding of the sloop HMS Swift. Lieutenant Robert Tinkler is aboard the HMS Isis. Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue is serving aboard the HMS Jason. You can choose who to follow. +> Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue +You join Sailmaker Lawrence LeBogue and enjoy his steadfast and resolute companionship during three years of voyages around the world aboard the HMS Jason. Your voyages come to an end one terrible day when a poorly tied rope gives way beneath your hands. Both of you plummet to the deck, killed instantly by the fall. Your bodies are tied in hammocks and thrown overboard: just two more dead sailors.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Following your safe return to England a Court Martial is quickly arranged to try the ten captured mutineers you and Haywood managed to help the crew of the Pandora get back. Bligh and another of your former comrades, a sailor called Lawrence LeBogue, have gone sailing on a second voyage to try and do what Bligh failed to do on his first voyage and deliver breadfruit from Tahiti to the slave plantations in Jamaica. + +The Admiralty requests that as many of the eleven remaining loyal members of the Bounty crew that can be found (not counting Bligh and LeBogue) should testify against the ten captured mutineers and you read in newspapers that seven, including Fryer, Cole, Peckover, Purcell and Haywood, have volunteered their services. You wonder whether you should go or not. +> Remain in Portsmouth +You stay away from the trial of your shipmates and read about the proceedings in the newspapers. The detained Loyalists Carpenter’s Mates Thomas McIntosh and Charles Norman, Armourer Joseph Coleman and Seaman Michael Byrne were quickly pardoned. Midshipman Peter Heywood, Boatswain’s Mate James Morrison and Seaman William Muspratt manage to persuade the Judges they took no active part in the mutiny and win a pardon. Seamen Thomas Burkett, Thomas Ellison and John Millward are found guilty and executed. + +The following summer Bligh returned from his breadfruit expedition, doubtless disappointed to have missed the trials of the Bounty mutineers. This voyage had been a success but on bringing the breadfruit to Jamaica the slaves refused to eat it, not liking the taste. It seems that the reason behind the voyage of the Bounty, and everything that arose from it, was fundamentally pointless.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just thirteen of the twenty loyal crew members cast adrift with Bligh survive to return to England in the spring and summer of 1790, yourself among them. Bligh quickly reports the Mutiny on the Bounty and publishes a book about it, snappily titled A Narrative Of The Mutiny On Board His Majesty’s Ship Bounty And The Subsequent Voyage Of Part Of The Crew In The Ship’s Boat, which you never both to read. + +In October Bligh is court martialed for the loss of the Bounty, acquitted and subsequently promoted from Lieutenant to Post Captain. The Admiralty begins making plans to deal with the twenty-five Bounty pirates and decides to send the 24-gun frigate HMS Pandora with 134 men under Captain Edward England to Tahiti to capture all the pirates they can find and bring them back to England for trial. The Admiralty puts out a request for former crew of the Bounty to join the voyage to help identify the pirates and Midshipman Thomas Haywood volunteers for the voyage in exchange for a promotion to Third Lieutenant. + +You consider whether to go or not. +> Remain in England +You remain in England while the HMS Pandora sets sail and continue to rest for another year. To your amazement you soon get word that William Bligh is setting sail to Tahiti again to fulfil the mission he failed at last time: gather breadfruit and transport them to Jamaica. This time he is traveling aboard the HMS Providence, a much larger and powerful 10-gun sloop-of-war with a crew of one hundred. Among this crew is Lawrence LeBogue, a sailor who survived the open boat voyage to Coupang and Batavia with you and Bligh. + +Bligh sends a letter to you asking if you would like to join him on this voyage. +> Accept +Against your better judgement you agree to sail with Bligh again. To your surprise this voyage goes absolutely smoothly. After leaving England in August of 1791 you reach Tahiti the following April. There you learn that the previous summer the HMS Pandora arrived in Tahiti and captured fourteen of the Bounty mutineers (two having previously been killed in violent altercations). Nine of the mutineers had sailed off aboard the Bounty in the autumn of 1789 but the Pandora left in search of them and Bligh is confident all the Pirates will be tracked down and captured. + +You stay in Tahiti only three months, leaving that July and sailing onto Jamaica. You reach Jamaica in January of 1793 with the breadfruit for the plantation slaves where you discover something that makes you laugh. The slaves can’t stand the taste of breadfruit and refuse to eat it. The whole breadfruit expeditions and everything that arose from them were, fundamentally, pointless. + +You stay in Jamaica for five months, enjoying the Caribbean and all it has to offer, before sailing onto England, arriving that September. There you learn more news of the Pandora: at the same time you set sail she was wrecked on a reef and many of the crew, including four of the captured pirates, drowned. The remainder struggled back to England last year and after trials three of the mutineers were hanged, of the others four had been the detained loyalists while the last three escaped execution due to extenuating circumstances. + +The Admiralty now feels that enough justice has been done. The whereabouts of the Bounty and the nine mutineers who sailed from Tahiti in the autumn of 1789 must, it appears, remain a mystery of the sea.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You remain in England while the HMS Pandora sets sail and continue to rest for another year. To your amazement you soon get word that William Bligh is setting sail to Tahiti again to fulfil the mission he failed at last time: gather breadfruit and transport them to Jamaica. This time he is traveling aboard the HMS Providence, a much larger and powerful 10-gun sloop-of-war with a crew of one hundred. Among this crew is Lawrence LeBogue, a sailor who survived the open boat voyage to Coupang and Batavia with you and Bligh. + +Bligh sends a letter to you asking if you would like to join him on this voyage. +> Refuse +You decline Bligh’s unattractive offer to sail with him again and remain in England for another year. The time passes quietly until, quite unexpectedly, the crew of the HMS Pandora return to Portsmouth aboard another ship. It seems that on arrival in Tahiti the previous year the Pandora found and captured fourteen of the mutineers, two having been killed in fights and another nine having sailed off aboard the Bounty previously. While searching for the Bounty and the remaining pirates the Pandora sank off the Great Reef with the loss of many lives, including four of the mutineers. The surviving crew, including the remaining ten mutineers, sailed to Coupang in open boats, much as you did, then to Batavia and from there returned to England. + +The Admiralty requests that as many of the eleven remaining loyal members of the Bounty crew that can be found (Bligh and LeBogue are still off on Bligh’s second breadfruit voyage) should testify against the ten captured mutineers and you read in newspapers that seven, including Fryer, Cole, Peckover, Purcell and Haywood, have volunteered their services. You wonder whether you should go or not.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You avoid helping Hall and predictably he becomes sick with malaria from mosquito bites while retrieving the boat and quickly dies. Bligh has also become sick with malaria and just five days after Hall’s death he books passage aboard the Dutch ship Vlydte bound for Portsmouth. By this point hostility against him is so widespread that only two men, his clerk John Samuel and his servant John Smith are willing to travel with him, the remaining thirteen prefer to wait under Fryer's command for another ship. +> Remain on Java waiting for another ship +When Bligh and his two companions depart there remains fourteen of the Loyal Bounty crew in Java under the command of Sailing Master John Fryer. He finally finds a ship willing to take you all home but they require you all to do some labor first, either moving supplies from the island’s interior upriver or by the docks loading them on. A party of four: Midshipman William Elphinstone, Quartermaster Peter Linkletter, Acting Surgeon Thomas Ledward and Seaman Robert Lamb volunteer to move supplies down river while the rest work with Fryer to load the ship. +> Help move the supplies by river +You help the other group move the supplies by river and quickly realize you have made a mistake. All five of you are seriously bitten by mosquitoes and quickly develop malaria. You are the first to die just ten days after getting the illness, the others die either on Batavia or on the ship on the way home. Your companions return to England safely where they join Bligh in reporting the Mutiny on the Bounty.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When Bligh and his two companions depart there remains fourteen of the Loyal Bounty crew in Java under the command of Sailing Master John Fryer. He finally finds a ship willing to take you all home but they require you all to do some labor first, either moving supplies from the island’s interior upriver or by the docks loading them on. A party of four: Midshipman William Elphinstone, Quartermaster Peter Linkletter, Acting Surgeon Thomas Ledward and Seaman Robert Lamb volunteer to move supplies down river while the rest work with Fryer to load the ship. +> Help load the supplies on the ship +You sensibly stay with the ship while the others contract malaria from mosquito bites obtained while working on the river. Elphinstone and Linkletter die before even leaving Bavaria while Lamb and Ledward succumb on the journey home. Your ship is finally ready to depart on the first day of December and you reach Cape Town in February of 1790. You stay there for one month before sailing on, finally arriving back to England in the summer after two and a half years away. It seems like a lifetime… but your trials are not over yet.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Early the next morning you are woken from your sleep by wild and confused shouting that seems to come from all around the ship. You and the other sailors spring from your hammocks and rush out on deck to see a bizarre sight. Christian and several other men armed variously with bayonets, cutlasses and muskets are herding a loudly protesting and threatening Bligh out onto deck. His hands are tightly bound behind his back. + +Christian seems half-crazy, he is alternately yelling at Bligh and talking to his fellow mutineers and has a heavy sounding plummet hanging from his neck (you later learn it was so he could jump overboard and drown if the mutiny failed). + +“Knock Christian down men,” Bligh is shouting. “Knock Christian down!” + +“Hold your tongue or you are a dead man!” Christian screams in his face. + +John Fryer emerges on deck at cutlass point. + +“Fletcher, you must stop this,” he calls out. + +“I have been in hell for weeks past!” Christian shouts at him. “Commander Bligh has brought this on himself!” + +You are not sure what is going on but Christian and at least a dozen of the crew seem to have taken control of the ship and no one is really opposing him, the only person arguing against him is the vitriolic Bligh. Christian has decided to cast Bligh and his loyal companions adrift and orders the jolly boat lowered but it found to have several leaks so he orders the cutter lowered instead. It soon becomes apparent that the cutter is too small for all the loyal crew who want to leave with Bligh. + +“You are all pirates!” Bligh shouts at Christian. “Any man who stays on this ship is a pirate and will be hunted down and hanged by the Royal Navy!” + +“Get him away!” men shout loudly. + +The launch, a twenty-three-foot-long boat designed for fifteen men is soon in the water and Bligh is roughly thrown in. Several other crew members starting with Fryer join him, not so much because they like him but because they don’t want to stay on the ship and be labelled as pirates, a crime which carries the death penalty. Soon there are more people in the boat than there is room for and still others want to get in, the ship seems almost equally divided between Bligh Loyalists and Mutineers. + +You stand by the rail looking down at the crowded boat. The island of Tofua is visible nearby and as Christian is throwing a sextant, compass, charts, tools and even four cutlasses (!) down into the boat it seems the nineteen, loyal people in the boat have a good chance of reaching it in safety. It seems that the twenty-five mutineers or pirates remaining on the Bounty (including at least four people who want to go with Bligh but who there is no room for) are planning to return to Tahiti. + +You must choose whether to go with Bligh or remain aboard the Bounty, a decision that will affect the rest of your life. +> Remain abouard the Bounty with the Mutineers and Christian +You remain aboard the Bounty with the twenty-five Pirates and watch as the boat containing Bligh and his companions fades away into the distance. Christian quickly assumes command of the ship and the navigating, realizing quickly that Tahiti will be the first place that the Royal Navy will look for you all but that Bligh will not get back to England, if he gets back to England, for at least one year and a ship from England would not arrive at Tahiti at least until the summer of 1791. + +Christian sets course for an island called Tubai hundreds of miles south of Tahiti which was sighted once twelve years ago but never visited. On arrival the Bounty is attacked by hundreds of warriors in canoes firing arrows at the ship. You and the other sailors return fire killing twelve of the Natives and forcing the rest to scatter. After three days off the island Christian decides to return to Tahiti to seek supplies and support from among the friendlier Natives there. You return to the welcome shores of Tahiti that June. +> The Battle for Tubai +Christian lets you all stay on Tahiti just ten days, long enough to pick up fresh supplies and twenty-eight Tahitians before sailing back to Tubai to try and seize control of it from the Natives. He builds a Fort which he calls Fort George and tries to man it against all comers. When the Natives attack they are repulsed again and again and sixty-six of them were killed, the only casualty on your side being Seaman Thomas Burkett who is speared through the side. Finally, Christian allows a vote between returning to Tahiti or staying on Tubai. The Pirates vote 16-9 to return to Tahiti. Christian sighs. + +“Gentlemen, I will carry you and land you wherever you please. I desire none to stay with me but I have one favor to request: that you will grant me the ship, tie the foresail, give me a few gallons of water and leave me to run before the wind and I shall land upon the first island the ship drives to. I have done such an act that I cannot stay on Tahiti. I will never live where I may be carried home to be a disgrace to my family.” + +“We shall never leave you Mr Christian,” Midshipman Edward Young promises him. “Go where you will!” + +After just three months in Tubai Christian sails the Bounty back to Tahiti. There the sixteen men who voted to remain there disembark the ship while Christian remains aboard with eight other companions. You have a decision to make now: you can remain on Tahiti knowing that it will probably be the first place the Royal Navy looks for you and your companions (if they look for you) or you can join Christian in sailing into the unknown to find the most obscure island possible, knowing you will probably never see England again. +> Remain on Tahiti +You remain on Tahiti and in the autumn of 1789 you watch the Bounty sail away for the last time. There is little left to do now but settle down to living among the Tahitians and hope that the first ship to visit the island will be a friendly one. Like many of the Mutineers you get into a long-term relationship with a beautiful Tahitian woman and enjoy long days spent relaxing on the beautiful island and nights of hard-drinking and partying with the locals. Seven months after the Bounty leaves violence erupts, threatening to destroy your peaceful existence. + +The problem is Matthew Thompson, a middle-aged and brutal man who alone out of all of you doesn’t have a romantic partner as the Native women avoid him. One day there is chaos in the village and you learn that Thompson, drunk on strong spirits, has tried to rape a Tahitian woman but was fought off when her screams brought her brother and other men running to her aid. + +You go out of your hut and walk towards Thompson’s, as do several of your companions, to find him outside his hut shouting at a small crowd of angry Tahitians to go away. He has a musket in his hands and without warning he raises it and fires it at a man. The bullet passes through a baby the man is holding in his arms and into his chest, killing them both. Reversing the musket Thompson swings it in a wild arc, cracking a woman in the head and knocking her unconscious to the ground. The rest of the crowd flees. + +Thompson sensibly flees to the shoreline, steals a canoe and paddles away to a small nearby island called Taiarapu. The rest of you have a meeting with the Tahitians where you emphasize that Thompson’s actions had nothing to do with the rest of you and you all condemn his cruelty. The Tahitians accept your explanations, largely because Quartermaster Charles Churchill has been adopted by a local chief and is gaining considerable status among the Natives. + +After some talk you decide on what to do: you will send a messenger to Thompson telling him he can safely return to Tahiti and when he comes back one or two of you will steal his muskets and cutlasses from his hut and give him no more to prevent him doing anymore harm. It is a risky thing to do as Thompson is a violent man but Churchill volunteers for the task. +> Join Churchill in stealing Thompson's weapons +You send a Native to Thompson telling him all is forgiven and he can return and a suspicious Thompson dutifully returns to Tahiti. About a week after his return when Thompson is elsewhere you and Churchill sneak into his hut, take his weapons and hide them in your own huts. Thompson is absolutely furious when he discovers the theft unfortunately for you a Native man with a grudge against Churchill tells him who stole the weapons. + +You are standing talking to Churchill one day when, without warning Thompson, comes up behind you and shoots you in the back of the head with the musket he has recovered from your hut. You fall instantly dead to the ground and a moment later Thompson shoots and kills Churchill with a second weapon. It might be some consolation for you that your Tahitian friends avenge your death and beat Thompson to dead with rocks later that same day.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You remain on Tahiti and in the autumn of 1789 you watch the Bounty sail away for the last time. There is little left to do now but settle down to living among the Tahitians and hope that the first ship to visit the island will be a friendly one. Like many of the Mutineers you get into a long-term relationship with a beautiful Tahitian woman and enjoy long days spent relaxing on the beautiful island and nights of hard-drinking and partying with the locals. Seven months after the Bounty leaves violence erupts, threatening to destroy your peaceful existence. + +The problem is Matthew Thompson, a middle-aged and brutal man who alone out of all of you doesn’t have a romantic partner as the Native women avoid him. One day there is chaos in the village and you learn that Thompson, drunk on strong spirits, has tried to rape a Tahitian woman but was fought off when her screams brought her brother and other men running to her aid. + +You go out of your hut and walk towards Thompson’s, as do several of your companions, to find him outside his hut shouting at a small crowd of angry Tahitians to go away. He has a musket in his hands and without warning he raises it and fires it at a man. The bullet passes through a baby the man is holding in his arms and into his chest, killing them both. Reversing the musket Thompson swings it in a wild arc, cracking a woman in the head and knocking her unconscious to the ground. The rest of the crowd flees. + +Thompson sensibly flees to the shoreline, steals a canoe and paddles away to a small nearby island called Taiarapu. The rest of you have a meeting with the Tahitians where you emphasize that Thompson’s actions had nothing to do with the rest of you and you all condemn his cruelty. The Tahitians accept your explanations, largely because Quartermaster Charles Churchill has been adopted by a local chief and is gaining considerable status among the Natives. + +After some talk you decide on what to do: you will send a messenger to Thompson telling him he can safely return to Tahiti and when he comes back one or two of you will steal his muskets and cutlasses from his hut and give him no more to prevent him doing anymore harm. It is a risky thing to do as Thompson is a violent man but Churchill volunteers for the task. +> Stay out of the whole business +You all send a Native to Thompson telling him all is forgiven and he can return and a suspicious Thompson dutifully returns to Tahiti. About a week after his return when Thompson is elsewhere Churchill sneaks into his hut, takes his weapons and hides them in his own hut. Thompson is absolutely furious when he discovers the theft and unfortunately a Native man with a grudge against Churchill tells Thompson who stole his weapons. Thompson recovers his musket, walks up behind Churchill one day and shoots him dead. + +Thompson again flees into the jungle interior and again you all meet to decide what to do. The Tahitians are furious over the death of their friend and intend to tell Thompson all is forgiven before jumping on him and beating him to death with rocks. It is a cold-blooded plan. +> Warn Thompson about it +You hurry out of the village to warn Thompson of the Natives’ intentions but you are spotted. Quickly realizing what you are intending to do the Natives give chase and run you down after a few hundred meters. A spear stab in the back knocks you down and then the Natives beat you to death with rocks. They then go on and kill Thompson anyway.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You all send a Native to Thompson telling him all is forgiven and he can return and a suspicious Thompson dutifully returns to Tahiti. About a week after his return when Thompson is elsewhere Churchill sneaks into his hut, takes his weapons and hides them in his own hut. Thompson is absolutely furious when he discovers the theft and unfortunately a Native man with a grudge against Churchill tells Thompson who stole his weapons. Thompson recovers his musket, walks up behind Churchill one day and shoots him dead. + +Thompson again flees into the jungle interior and again you all meet to decide what to do. The Tahitians are furious over the death of their friend and intend to tell Thompson all is forgiven before jumping on him and beating him to death with rocks. It is a cold-blooded plan. +> Stay out of the whole affair +You stay in the village while a large band of Tahitians leave and return later with Thompson’s bloodied and battered body. After the killings of Churchill and Thompson things settle down and the remaining fifteen of you live peaceful lives on this island paradise for one more year. The calm is broken again one spring morning by the terrifying sight of a large Royal Navy vessel sailing steadily towards the island. It anchors offshore and several boatloads of heavily-armed sailors are soon rowing towards shore. + +Some of your companions, notably the Bligh Loyalists who were detained against their will, are in favour of surrendering at once while others propose hiding out in the island interior and on other nearby islands in the hope of eluding capture. You know if captured all of you will be taken back to England and tried for piracy: if found guilty you know you will dance on the end of a rope. +> Surrender to the sailors +You and three other men promptly surrender yourselves to the first sailors who reach the shore, clapped in irons you are swiftly brought back to the ship where, to your surprise, former Bounty shipmate Midshipman Thomas Hayward is waiting to identify you. You are imprisoned in a makeshift prison on the ship’s quarterdeck and over the next month all of your remaining companions are captured. + +You learn that after the Mutiny Bligh sailed his overcrowded boat to safety and returned to England with eleven surviving companions out of the eighteen who were in the boat with him. He reported the Mutiny to the Admiralty who dispatched this ship, the HMS Pandora, to Tahiti to arrest you all. You and your fourteen companions are questioned on the whereabouts of the other nine Mutineers and the Bounty but you can only tell them that you last saw them sail away in the autumn of 1789. + +The Pandora leaves Tahiti that May and spends the next three months scouring the Pacific for your remaining companions but finds no trace of them. One day the Pandora suddenly runs aground off the Great Barrier Reef. Despite desperate efforts that go on for twenty hours the damage is too severe to be repaired and the ship starts to sink increasingly fast. Finally, in desperation the order if given to abandon ship. + +For a few moments it seems that you and your fellow prisoners will all be left shackled to the quarterdeck to drown but as water washes over the main deck a sailor remembers you all and runs up to unlock your leg irons. He gives the keys to you and orders you to unlock the rest. You have managed to free ten of your fourteen companions when the Quarterdeck vanishes beneath your feet into cold clear seawater. Your remaining trapped companions shout for help. +> Work underwater to free the remaining men +Waist-deep in water you wade across the deck and taking a deep breath you plunge underwater to try and untie more leg irons. In the strange underwater world you can barely see and are unaware when the Pandora’s mainmast gives way, breaks and falls on you, pinning you to the deck beneath its vast weight. You desperately try to free yourself but there is nothing you can do: the last bubbles escape your lips and you share the watery grave of the four comrades you died trying to save.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and three other men promptly surrender yourselves to the first sailors who reach the shore, clapped in irons you are swiftly brought back to the ship where, to your surprise, former Bounty shipmate Midshipman Thomas Hayward is waiting to identify you. You are imprisoned in a makeshift prison on the ship’s quarterdeck and over the next month all of your remaining companions are captured. + +You learn that after the Mutiny Bligh sailed his overcrowded boat to safety and returned to England with eleven surviving companions out of the eighteen who were in the boat with him. He reported the Mutiny to the Admiralty who dispatched this ship, the HMS Pandora, to Tahiti to arrest you all. You and your fourteen companions are questioned on the whereabouts of the other nine Mutineers and the Bounty but you can only tell them that you last saw them sail away in the autumn of 1789. + +The Pandora leaves Tahiti that May and spends the next three months scouring the Pacific for your remaining companions but finds no trace of them. One day the Pandora suddenly runs aground off the Great Barrier Reef. Despite desperate efforts that go on for twenty hours the damage is too severe to be repaired and the ship starts to sink increasingly fast. Finally, in desperation the order if given to abandon ship. + +For a few moments it seems that you and your fellow prisoners will all be left shackled to the quarterdeck to drown but as water washes over the main deck a sailor remembers you all and runs up to unlock your leg irons. He gives the keys to you and orders you to unlock the rest. You have managed to free ten of your fourteen companions when the Quarterdeck vanishes beneath your feet into cold clear seawater. Your remaining trapped companions shout for help. +> Abandon the sinking ship and swim for one of the nearby boats +Recognizing it would be suicide to remain on the ship any longer you dive into the sea and wade towards one of the four boats the sailors of the Pandora have succeeded in launching. You are hauled aboard and watch as the last of the HMS Pandora vanishes from sight. It takes with it four of your companions were still manacled to the ship: Midshipman George Stewart and Sailors Henry Hillbrant, Richard Skinner and John Sumner. + +Together with your ten surviving companions you join the other survivors in a three-week open boat voyage, not unlike that Bligh endured two years before) to Coupang in Timor with no mishap. From there you travel on to Batavia on Jakarta and from there take passage aboard the HMS Gorgon, arriving back in England in June of 1792, nearly five years after you left her aboard the Bounty. + +It is good fortune for you that William Bligh is not in England at the moment, having left the previous year to fulfil his mission of taking breadfruit from Tahiti to the slave plantations in Jamaica. Many of your former comrades are in England however and seven (Sailing Master John Fryer, Boatswain William Cole, Gunner William Peckover, Carpenter William Purcell, Midshipmen John Hallett and Thomas Haywood and Seaman John Smith) have been recruited to testify against you and your companions in your trials that August. + +For four of your companions the trials are an easy affair: Carpenter’s Mates Thomas McIntosh and Charles Norman, Armourer Joseph Coleman and Seaman Michael Byrne are acquitted when letters are produced written by Bligh confirming they wanted to join him in the boat but were unable to due to lack of space. For you and six of your companions things look much more dangerous and all of you are keen to argue you took no active part in the mutiny but need to explain your failure to act. + +Your companions intend to do this in two ways. Midshipman Peter Heywood, Boatswain’s Mate James Morrison and Seaman William Muspratt intend to claim they were too confused by what was happening to act. Seamen Thomas Burkett, Thomas Ellison and John Millward intend to claim they were too intimidated by the Mutineers and that they intended to recapture the Bounty at a later date if they could find support among the crew. You need to choose which defense line you go with. +> Too confused to act +You decide to go with the claim that you were too confused by what was happening to act. Somewhat surprisingly this defense works with the Judges: though sentenced to death you, Heywood, Morrison and Muspratt are pardoned for your part in the Mutiny. Burkett, Ellison and Millward are executed by hanging a few months later. You and your companions all feel the most incredible relief at your very narrow escape, Muspratt is so affected by his brush with death he rarely speaks again. + +The following year Bligh returns to England after a successful voyage which brought breadfruit from Tahiti to Jamaica, only to discover the slaves there would not eat it. He is furious that you and your companions escaped death and writes an account roundly condemning you all. Withstanding his fury you are one of the eight Bounty mutineers that survived to return to England. Not a day goes by when you do not wonder what happened to Fletcher Christian and his eight companions who vanished that autumn afternoon so long ago aboard the Bounty. + +You now have a decision to make: whether you return to the sea or retire to the land. McIntosh, Coleman and Byrne have all already turned their backs on the sea and drifted out of touch while Peter Heywood, James Morrison, Charles Norman and William Muspratt are all intended to resume a life on the ocean’s waves. You need to decide whether you too will retire ashore or return to the sea. +> Retire from the sea +The years go by and as you age you read about what befalls your former comrades. + +Carpenter’s Mate Charles Norman dies of a disease, probably brought on by his experiences, in 1793. Seaman William Muspratt also dies at sea of a disease in 1797. Boatswain’s Mate James Morrison drowns when the HMS Blenheim sinks in 1807. Midshipman Peter Heywood serves honorably in the Navy for twenty-two more years, retiring from the Navy in 1816 with the rank of Captain. He dies in 1831, his former status as a Pirate and Mutineer hidden behind a long and distinguished service. You live on, well into your sixties and in your later years you finally learn what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian. + +In 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action. + +John Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to go with the claim that you were too confused by what was happening to act. Somewhat surprisingly this defense works with the Judges: though sentenced to death you, Heywood, Morrison and Muspratt are pardoned for your part in the Mutiny. Burkett, Ellison and Millward are executed by hanging a few months later. You and your companions all feel the most incredible relief at your very narrow escape, Muspratt is so affected by his brush with death he rarely speaks again. + +The following year Bligh returns to England after a successful voyage which brought breadfruit from Tahiti to Jamaica, only to discover the slaves there would not eat it. He is furious that you and your companions escaped death and writes an account roundly condemning you all. Withstanding his fury you are one of the eight Bounty mutineers that survived to return to England. Not a day goes by when you do not wonder what happened to Fletcher Christian and his eight companions who vanished that autumn afternoon so long ago aboard the Bounty. + +You now have a decision to make: whether you return to the sea or retire to the land. McIntosh, Coleman and Byrne have all already turned their backs on the sea and drifted out of touch while Peter Heywood, James Morrison, Charles Norman and William Muspratt are all intended to resume a life on the ocean’s waves. You need to decide whether you too will retire ashore or return to the sea. +> Return to the sea +You decide to return to the sea and need to decide where you serve. You can join Midshipman Peter Heywood aboard the HMS Queen Charlotte or you could join Boatswain’s Mate James Morrison aboard the HMS Blenheim or you could join Carpenter’s Mate Charles Norman aboard the HMS Duke or you can join Seaman William Muspratt aboard the HMS Bellerophon. +> Join Heywood +You serve with Heywood for twenty-two years on various ships, watching him rise to the rank of Captain. You are with him on the Glorious First of June when the French fleet is defeated off Ushant and in the Invasion of the River Plate in 1806. After a long and distinguished service you both retire from the sea in 1816. Fifteen years later your friend dies in London. By that time you have learned what happened to the Bounty and its missing nine Mutineers, including Fletcher Christian. + +In 1808 an American ship, the Topaz, happens upon isolated Pitcairn Island. There the sailors are astonished to discover a thriving Tahitian Community ruled over by one man: John Adams. He is the sole survivor of the nine Mutineers and six Natives who landed on that island and variously killed each other or died of illness leaving Adams patriarch of a thriving community of forty-six people. The Admiralty decides against taking any action. + +John Adams, the King of Pitcairn Island, dies in 1829.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to return to the sea and need to decide where you serve. You can join Midshipman Peter Heywood aboard the HMS Queen Charlotte or you could join Boatswain’s Mate James Morrison aboard the HMS Blenheim or you could join Carpenter’s Mate Charles Norman aboard the HMS Duke or you can join Seaman William Muspratt aboard the HMS Bellerophon. +> Join Morrison +You serve with Morrison in the Navy for thirteen years, Morrison rising to the rank of Chief Gunner. Your long and distinguished careers end aboard the Blenheim one terrible winter’s day in the Indian Ocean when the Blenheim and her accompanying ship HMS Java are caught in a storm while under the command of Admiral Thomas Troubridge. Both ships capsize and sink quickly sending nearly nine hundred men to their watery graves. + +The sea is a cruel and unforgiving mistress.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to return to the sea and need to decide where you serve. You can join Midshipman Peter Heywood aboard the HMS Queen Charlotte or you could join Boatswain’s Mate James Morrison aboard the HMS Blenheim or you could join Carpenter’s Mate Charles Norman aboard the HMS Duke or you can join Seaman William Muspratt aboard the HMS Bellerophon. +> Join Norman +You join Norman aboard the HMS Duke but your mutual experiences in Tahiti and the trial have weakened you both. Just three months after joining the ship an outbreak of cholera decimates the crew and both of you quickly catch the disease and weakened. You die of the illness just one year after the execution of your companions and are just one of the several anonymous bodies cast into the sea that day.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to return to the sea and need to decide where you serve. You can join Midshipman Peter Heywood aboard the HMS Queen Charlotte or you could join Boatswain’s Mate James Morrison aboard the HMS Blenheim or you could join Carpenter’s Mate Charles Norman aboard the HMS Duke or you can join Seaman William Muspratt aboard the HMS Bellerophon. +> Join Muspratt +You serve with Muspratt aboard the Bellerophon for three years. Your narrow escapes from death have had a great effect on both of you and in all your service you hardly speak a word, just quietly and diligently working together. Cholera spreads through the crew one winter and both of you quickly catch the disease and weaken. You die of the illness just five years after the execution of your companions and are just one of the several anonymous bodies cast into the sea that day.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Recognizing it would be suicide to remain on the ship any longer you dive into the sea and wade towards one of the four boats the sailors of the Pandora have succeeded in launching. You are hauled aboard and watch as the last of the HMS Pandora vanishes from sight. It takes with it four of your companions were still manacled to the ship: Midshipman George Stewart and Sailors Henry Hillbrant, Richard Skinner and John Sumner. + +Together with your ten surviving companions you join the other survivors in a three-week open boat voyage, not unlike that Bligh endured two years before) to Coupang in Timor with no mishap. From there you travel on to Batavia on Jakarta and from there take passage aboard the HMS Gorgon, arriving back in England in June of 1792, nearly five years after you left her aboard the Bounty. + +It is good fortune for you that William Bligh is not in England at the moment, having left the previous year to fulfil his mission of taking breadfruit from Tahiti to the slave plantations in Jamaica. Many of your former comrades are in England however and seven (Sailing Master John Fryer, Boatswain William Cole, Gunner William Peckover, Carpenter William Purcell, Midshipmen John Hallett and Thomas Haywood and Seaman John Smith) have been recruited to testify against you and your companions in your trials that August. + +For four of your companions the trials are an easy affair: Carpenter’s Mates Thomas McIntosh and Charles Norman, Armourer Joseph Coleman and Seaman Michael Byrne are acquitted when letters are produced written by Bligh confirming they wanted to join him in the boat but were unable to due to lack of space. For you and six of your companions things look much more dangerous and all of you are keen to argue you took no active part in the mutiny but need to explain your failure to act. + +Your companions intend to do this in two ways. Midshipman Peter Heywood, Boatswain’s Mate James Morrison and Seaman William Muspratt intend to claim they were too confused by what was happening to act. Seamen Thomas Burkett, Thomas Ellison and John Millward intend to claim they were too intimidated by the Mutineers and that they intended to recapture the Bounty at a later date if they could find support among the crew. You need to choose which defense line you go with. +> Too intimidated to act +You decide to go with the claim that you were too intimidated by the Mutineers to act but the Judges refuse to believe it. You, Burkett, Ellison and Millward are all sentenced to death while Heywood, Morrison and Muspratt win pardons. Your sentences is scheduled to be carried out aboard the HMS Brunswick in Portsmouth Harbour soon after the trial. + +On the scheduled morning you and your companions march out in silence onto the ship's deck. Some of your companions insist on their innocence or beg for mercy but as the noose is slipped over your neck you remain silent. On the word of command all four of you are hoisted into the air and after a few seconds of frantic kicking it is all over: you have paid the ultimate price for your part in the Mutiny on the Bounty.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You stay in the village while a large band of Tahitians leave and return later with Thompson’s bloodied and battered body. After the killings of Churchill and Thompson things settle down and the remaining fifteen of you live peaceful lives on this island paradise for one more year. The calm is broken again one spring morning by the terrifying sight of a large Royal Navy vessel sailing steadily towards the island. It anchors offshore and several boatloads of heavily-armed sailors are soon rowing towards shore. + +Some of your companions, notably the Bligh Loyalists who were detained against their will, are in favour of surrendering at once while others propose hiding out in the island interior and on other nearby islands in the hope of eluding capture. You know if captured all of you will be taken back to England and tried for piracy: if found guilty you know you will dance on the end of a rope. +> Hide in the island's interior +You and most of the others scatter into the island’s interior and hide. You avoid the others, steal a Native canoe one night and paddle to an isolated little volcano jutting out of the sea to the east called Mehetia. You manage to hide out here for nearly a month, surviving on nothing more than rainwater and a few fish you manage to catch in the sea and eat raw, as the island has no vegetation. + +Eventually, on 16 April a party of sailors lands on the island and searches it in detail, finally finding you hiding under a rock, too weak to resist capture. You are taken aboard the ship where you find you are the last of the mutineers on Tahiti to be captured, the others all having been found at least a week before. You are clapped in irons and secured in a makeshift prison on the ship’s quarterdeck. + +You learn that after the Mutiny Bligh sailed his overcrowded boat to safety and returned to England with eleven surviving companions out of the eighteen who were in the boat with him. He reported the Mutiny to the Admiralty who dispatched this ship, the HMS Pandora, to Tahiti to arrest you all. You and your fourteen companions are questioned on the whereabouts of the other nine Mutineers and the Bounty but you can only tell them that you last saw them sail away in the autumn of 1789. + +The Pandora leaves Tahiti that May and spends the next three months scouring the Pacific for your remaining companions but finds no trace of them. One day the Pandora suddenly runs aground off the Great Barrier Reef. Despite desperate efforts that go on for twenty hours the damage is too severe to be repaired and the ship starts to sink increasingly fast. Finally, in desperation the order if given to abandon ship. + +For a few moments it seems that you and your fellow prisoners will all be left shackled to the quarterdeck to drown but as water washes over the main deck a sailor remembers you all and runs up to unlock your leg irons. He gives the keys to you and orders you to unlock the rest. You have managed to free ten of your fourteen companions when the Quarterdeck vanishes beneath your feet into cold clear seawater. Your remaining trapped companions shout for help.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Christian lets you all stay on Tahiti just ten days, long enough to pick up fresh supplies and twenty-eight Tahitians before sailing back to Tubai to try and seize control of it from the Natives. He builds a Fort which he calls Fort George and tries to man it against all comers. When the Natives attack they are repulsed again and again and sixty-six of them were killed, the only casualty on your side being Seaman Thomas Burkett who is speared through the side. Finally, Christian allows a vote between returning to Tahiti or staying on Tubai. The Pirates vote 16-9 to return to Tahiti. Christian sighs. + +“Gentlemen, I will carry you and land you wherever you please. I desire none to stay with me but I have one favor to request: that you will grant me the ship, tie the foresail, give me a few gallons of water and leave me to run before the wind and I shall land upon the first island the ship drives to. I have done such an act that I cannot stay on Tahiti. I will never live where I may be carried home to be a disgrace to my family.” + +“We shall never leave you Mr Christian,” Midshipman Edward Young promises him. “Go where you will!” + +After just three months in Tubai Christian sails the Bounty back to Tahiti. There the sixteen men who voted to remain there disembark the ship while Christian remains aboard with eight other companions. You have a decision to make now: you can remain on Tahiti knowing that it will probably be the first place the Royal Navy looks for you and your companions (if they look for you) or you can join Christian in sailing into the unknown to find the most obscure island possible, knowing you will probably never see England again. +> Sail on into the unknown +Fletcher Christian sets sail with the ten of you Mutineers, twelve women and six Tahitian men (including three discovered hiding on board) and spends three months trying to find an island isolated enough to avoid discovery. He finally settles on Pitcairn Island, an isolated little island spotted once twenty-three years ago. Best of all you discover the island has been mis-plotted by around two hundred miles making it impossible to find until a ship sailing outside the usual routes actually comes upon it. + +You like the island, a pleasant little grassy spot with a few hills, and begin unloading the Bounty Just eight days after arriving a very drunk Matthew Quintal sets fire to the ship to prevent any of you from changing your minds and leaving. The twenty-eight of you gather on the shore and watch the ship burn and sink beneath the waves. For better or worse you are on Pitcairn Island for good now. +> A New Life +Three years pass quietly on the island but a few accidents mar the peace. + +Soon after you arrive one of the women falls to her death while gathering eggs from the clifftops, soon after Fletcher Christian’s wife gives birth to the first child born on Pitcairn. The year after a second woman dies of an illness. Previously each of the Mutineers had one female partner each while the six Tahitian men had just two women to have sexual relations with. In the summer of 1793 you and the other Mutineers decide to take the two remaining women from the Tahitian men and give them to John Adams and William Brown respectively, the two men whose wives have died. + +Trouble erupts when four of the Tahitians take the two women and go to live elsewhere on the island. You and the other Mutineers give one of the remaining Tahitians, a tough character called Menalee a musket and send him off to kill the leader of the rebellious Tahitians, a man called Talaloo. On the first day of August Menalee finds him and shoots him dead. The following day he is sent off again and kills a second man called Oho. The two remaining men return and for a time it looks like all has settled down: Adams and Brown have their wives and the four remaining Tahitian men seem suitably chastised. + +One day in September you are in your hut when you hear a few gunshots somewhere nearby. You think nothing of it and a short time later you hear more gunshots. You assume someone is hunting. A short while later you hear loud and excited yells followed by even more gunshots and prolonged shouting. You are now growing concerned and step warily out of your hut. You wonder what to do. +> Go down and investigate the gunshots +You stroll down through the village to see what is happening and encounter the four Tahitian men coming the other way. Each are armed with a musket and others weapons such as axes and rocks. You call out to them, asking what the noise was. In response the Natives raise their muskets and fire a volley of shots at you. Two bullets hit you in the chest and knock you down, before you can rise they beat you to death with axes. + +You are one of the six mutineers to die on what will ever after be known as Massacre Day.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Three years pass quietly on the island but a few accidents mar the peace. + +Soon after you arrive one of the women falls to her death while gathering eggs from the clifftops, soon after Fletcher Christian’s wife gives birth to the first child born on Pitcairn. The year after a second woman dies of an illness. Previously each of the Mutineers had one female partner each while the six Tahitian men had just two women to have sexual relations with. In the summer of 1793 you and the other Mutineers decide to take the two remaining women from the Tahitian men and give them to John Adams and William Brown respectively, the two men whose wives have died. + +Trouble erupts when four of the Tahitians take the two women and go to live elsewhere on the island. You and the other Mutineers give one of the remaining Tahitians, a tough character called Menalee a musket and send him off to kill the leader of the rebellious Tahitians, a man called Talaloo. On the first day of August Menalee finds him and shoots him dead. The following day he is sent off again and kills a second man called Oho. The two remaining men return and for a time it looks like all has settled down: Adams and Brown have their wives and the four remaining Tahitian men seem suitably chastised. + +One day in September you are in your hut when you hear a few gunshots somewhere nearby. You think nothing of it and a short time later you hear more gunshots. You assume someone is hunting. A short while later you hear loud and excited yells followed by even more gunshots and prolonged shouting. You are now growing concerned and step warily out of your hut. You wonder what to do. +> Head away from the village and up into the hills +You wisely flee up into the hills and are startled to meet a panting William McCoy there, he has run all the way from the village after witnessing the Natives shoot and kill his friend John Mills. Soon after you are joined by a breathless Matthew Quintal, who has likewise escaped the village. He has shocking news to tell you, five of your friends: Fletcher Christian, John Mills, William Brown, Isaac Martin and John Williams are dead. Your remaining two companions, John Adams and Edward Young remain in the village, protected by the Native women. + +You and your two unarmed companions remain hiding up in the mountains for two weeks, sometimes receiving messages from your wives still in the village. You learn that Menalee has killed another Native man called Timoa after an argument. Scared of his companions Menalee himself joins you two in the mountains saying he would be safer hiding with you. That night when Menalee falls asleep McCoy picks up his musket and shoots him dead. + +Three days later Adams and Young succeed in persuading the Native women they should kill the two remaining Tahitian men Nehow and Tetaheite. Young shoots Nehow in the back of the head while a woman called Susan kills Tetaheite with an axe. Your friends quickly send word to you all that it is safe to come back to the village. There are now five of you men left with ten Native women and a few small children. + +Peace returns to the island once more. +> Alcohol +Four years pass by peacefully on the island, you live with the women, begin raising a child and live a good life. William McCoy and Matthew Quintal are more restless characters than you, John Adams and Edward Young and McCoy, who once worked in a brewery in Scotland, spends a long time trying to brew alcohol out of various things. He finally succeeds in creating an incredibly strong alcohol from the ti-root and he and Quintal quickly become addicted to it, despite the fact it seems to trigger hallucinations. Adams and Young refuse to drink any. +> Join in the drinking +You and McCoy soon develop a heavy dependency on the dangerous drink and have many hallucinations. After one particular bout to celebrate the beginning of 1798 you and McCoy decide in your drunken states that you want to swim back to England. You run to the edge of a cliff and plunge down into the sea below. You disappear beneath the waves forever, victims of the terrible alcohol you have created.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Four years pass by peacefully on the island, you live with the women, begin raising a child and live a good life. William McCoy and Matthew Quintal are more restless characters than you, John Adams and Edward Young and McCoy, who once worked in a brewery in Scotland, spends a long time trying to brew alcohol out of various things. He finally succeeds in creating an incredibly strong alcohol from the ti-root and he and Quintal quickly become addicted to it, despite the fact it seems to trigger hallucinations. Adams and Young refuse to drink any. +> Refuse to drink +You refuse to drink and it seems a sensible decision, McCoy throws himself off a cliff in a drunken fit of depression, plummeting to his death. With his friend gone Quintal becomes more depressed also, drinking more and becoming more violent. In one incident he bites the ear off his wife Tevarua when she fails to catch enough fish one day. Tevarua, herself a heavy drinker, imitates McCoy in throwing herself off a cliff to her death. + +Deprived of his wife Quintal takes another one and when Adams and Young protest Quintal threatens to kill them both. He is now moody and unpredictable and Adams and Young confer with you in a secret meeting and tell you that the next time Quintal is passed out drunk they intend to kill him with an axe. You consider whether to join them in this plot or warn Quintal of what is happening. +> Join Adams and Young in killing Quintal +That night when Quintal is passed out you, Adams and Young sneak up on him and Adams decapitates him with one swing of the axe. Quintal’s death finally restores peace to the island which lasts another year until Young dies of asthma on Christmas Day of 1800. All that is left now is for you and John Adams to rule over a Pitcairn Island inhabited exclusively by women and children... +> Discovery +The next thirty or so years are peaceful ones for you and Adams, raising your many children and taking care of the island. A ship was spotted out to sea in 1795 and another in 1801 but it is not until February of 1808 that an American ship called the Topaz finally visits the island. You and Adams cautiously meet with the sailors who come ashore and finally learn what has happened on the outside world. + +After the Mutiny on the Bounty in 1789 Bligh and his surviving companions made it back to England and reported the Mutiny. A ship called the Pandora was sent to Tahiti where she captured your remaining companions, while searching for you the Pandora sank off the Great Barrier Reef. The survivors eventually made it back to England where some more of your companions were executed. The search for the Bounty and the rest of you was eventually abandoned. + +You are nervous of what effect the news that you and Adams (after all, still wanted pirates) are living on Pitcairn Island will have but it is not until 1814 that a pair of Royal Navy ships finally visit the island. Twenty-five years after the Mutiny on the Bounty the men aboard report that the Admiralty has decided to grant you both amnesty for your parts in the Mutiny and allow you to continue living on the island. Relieved you continue your peaceful lives. + +Your great friend John Adams dies in 1829 at the age of sixty-one leaving you the sole King of Pitcairn Island.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You refuse to drink and it seems a sensible decision, McCoy throws himself off a cliff in a drunken fit of depression, plummeting to his death. With his friend gone Quintal becomes more depressed also, drinking more and becoming more violent. In one incident he bites the ear off his wife Tevarua when she fails to catch enough fish one day. Tevarua, herself a heavy drinker, imitates McCoy in throwing herself off a cliff to her death. + +Deprived of his wife Quintal takes another one and when Adams and Young protest Quintal threatens to kill them both. He is now moody and unpredictable and Adams and Young confer with you in a secret meeting and tell you that the next time Quintal is passed out drunk they intend to kill him with an axe. You consider whether to join them in this plot or warn Quintal of what is happening. +> 1 January 1799: Pitcairn Island, Pacific Ocean +You warn Quintal of what is happening and both of you are on your guard. It doesn’t take Adams and Young long to learn what you have done and a few nights later they confront both you and Quintal with muskets. Before you can defend yourselves your former friends shoot both of you dead, finally bringing peace to the island. They throw your bodies in the sea for the fish to eat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>By the beginning of 1789 the crew have had enough of Bligh and his ways. + +Charles Churchill, a middle-aged Manchurian and the Master-at-Arms (the man nominally in charge of discipline on the ship) gathers you, the recently flogged Muspratt and another sailor called John Millward, a young and reasonably well-educated fellow, into a secret meeting a short way from the shore party. + +“I will tell you plainly boys I don’t care a damn for our Commander,” he whispers. “He deserves nothing better than to be shark bait for all I care. But this place is the closest thing to heaven on each I have ever clapped eyes on in all my years of sailing. I say tonight we take a boat and sneak away, Haywood has the watch with us tonight, he is ever sleeping on duty and besides was up most of last night at cards in the wardroom. I will get us a brace of guns each, we can take the cutter and sail round to Matavai Bay and from there light out to one of the smaller islands. After our shipmates have left on the Bounty we can return and live here forever.” + +It is a bold but extremely dangerous plan, desertion can be punished with hanging. Millward and Muspratt quickly agree to it and all three turn their gazes on you. You know if you refuse you must promise to keep silent about the plan. +> Remain aboard the Bounty +You refuse to have anything to do with such a dangerous plan and the deserters swear you to silence. That evening, while Midshipman Thomas Haywood is sleeping over the arms chest Churchill, Millward and Muspratt sneak into the ship’s cutter and desert. That morning Bligh is furious when he discovers the missing men’s absence, suspecting you and Haywood of being involved he orders you both clapped in irons for a week. + +Bligh pursues the deserters to Matavai Bay where he learns from Natives that the trio of fugitives traded for a canoe and paddled north in the direction of a small island called Tetaroa. Bligh is set to pursue but the weather turns nasty and for two weeks a storm rages (Bligh has a rage of his own when he discovers the spare sails have rotted into uselessness). Finally, it clears and Bligh sails north to the small island accompanied by dozens of Native canoes. + +You and Haywood are still under suspicion so you are not part of the party Bligh leads ashore which succeeds in recapturing the fugitives without trouble. Between the three deserters Bligh sentences them to one hundred and twenty lashes and steers the Bounty back to Toaroa. By now the crew are all seething with quiet discussion about Bligh’s disciplinary methods and a week after the recapture of the fugitives you are chatting ashore about the matter with Isaac Martin, a good-natured American sailor. + +While you are talking a Tahitian man wanders over to your boat to have a look, a fairly common occurrence. You both ignore him until the man suddenly grabs an iron hoop that has come loose from a barrel and starts running off. Martin yells at you to get him as you both know Bligh is fond of flogging sailors who let Natives steal things from the ship, no matter how small. You both race after the Native and get close to him but there seems to be no way of stopping him short of violence. +> Crash-tackle the man to the ground +You make a flying leap, manage to grab the man’s legs and bring him down. Martin is on him in a moment and as the man tries to squirm free he punches him in the face. This calms the Native who lies there clutching his broken nose while Martin picks up the iron hoop and returns to the boat. You are both feeling rather good about your successful protection of Bounty property until you hear that familiar, hated, yelp from the trees. + +“What do you infernal creatures think you are doing?” Bligh exclaims running towards you. + +“Stopping that man stealing our things,” you tell Bligh irritably. “As you ordered.” + +“As I ordered you insolent cur?” Bligh exclaims. “I also ordered no violence towards Natives, both of you twenty-four lashes each!” + +That evening you are both lashed to trees and whipped by the quartermasters and it is only the intercession of the local Natives, who accept responsibility for the crime, that Bligh reluctantly stops the punishment at nineteen lashes. Regardless, by the time you are cut down you feel completely and utterly exhausted.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You refuse to have anything to do with such a dangerous plan and the deserters swear you to silence. That evening, while Midshipman Thomas Haywood is sleeping over the arms chest Churchill, Millward and Muspratt sneak into the ship’s cutter and desert. That morning Bligh is furious when he discovers the missing men’s absence, suspecting you and Haywood of being involved he orders you both clapped in irons for a week. + +Bligh pursues the deserters to Matavai Bay where he learns from Natives that the trio of fugitives traded for a canoe and paddled north in the direction of a small island called Tetaroa. Bligh is set to pursue but the weather turns nasty and for two weeks a storm rages (Bligh has a rage of his own when he discovers the spare sails have rotted into uselessness). Finally, it clears and Bligh sails north to the small island accompanied by dozens of Native canoes. + +You and Haywood are still under suspicion so you are not part of the party Bligh leads ashore which succeeds in recapturing the fugitives without trouble. Between the three deserters Bligh sentences them to one hundred and twenty lashes and steers the Bounty back to Toaroa. By now the crew are all seething with quiet discussion about Bligh’s disciplinary methods and a week after the recapture of the fugitives you are chatting ashore about the matter with Isaac Martin, a good-natured American sailor. + +While you are talking a Tahitian man wanders over to your boat to have a look, a fairly common occurrence. You both ignore him until the man suddenly grabs an iron hoop that has come loose from a barrel and starts running off. Martin yells at you to get him as you both know Bligh is fond of flogging sailors who let Natives steal things from the ship, no matter how small. You both race after the Native and get close to him but there seems to be no way of stopping him short of violence. +> Keep running +You continue to run but Martin springs ahead of you and brings the native down with a fierce punch to the back of the head. Martin forces the hoop from his grip and begins returning it to the boat when you both halt at the sound of a familiar, and despised, yelp from nearby. + +“What do you infernal creatures think you are doing?” Bligh exclaims running towards you. + +“Stopping that man stealing our things,” Martin tells Bligh irritably. “As you ordered.” + +“As I ordered you insolent cur?” Bligh exclaims. “I also ordered no violence towards Natives. You, Martin, twenty-four lashes!” + +That evening you watch angrily as Martin is lashed to a tree and whipped by a quartermaster and it is only the intercession of the local Natives, who accept responsibility for the crime, that Bligh reluctantly stops the punishment at nineteen lashes. Regardless, by the time Martin is cut down you nothing but searing anger and hatred towards Bligh.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Word soon spreads among the crew that Muspratt has found what amounts to a brothel in Toaroa, though actually many of the Native women seem happy to perform sexual services in exchange for gifts. One of your fellow seamen Robert Lamb, who often cuts the meat for the cook, decides to sneak off the next time he is in one of Christian’s work parties and give away his cleaver in the hope of getting two women at the same time. You have a knife and wonder if that would be worth the same. +> Avoid the risk +You remain with Christian’s work party while Lamb heads off and he returns that evening looking utterly exhausted but grinning from ear to ear. His good feeling lasts until he returns to the Bounty to find an angry Bligh waiting for him. + +“Impertinent dog!” he screams in Lamb’s face. “You think a cleaver is not as valuable as your disgusting perversions? Quartermaster, twelve at once!” + +By now whippings have become so depressingly commonplace that the crew feel nothing but a dull hostility towards Bligh.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After the death of Surgeon Huggan Bligh orders the Bounty sailed from Matavai Bay to Toaroa, a small bay and village further round the island. The reason Bligh gives is that there are more breadfruit trees there but the crew suspect it is to move them further from the scene of Huggan’s death and the temptations of alcohol and women. If that is the intention it is unsuccessful, there are even more of both at Toaroa. + +The women are, if possible, even more free with their affections and breath-takingly beautiful, here and one of your fellow sailors, a friendly, bearded man called William Muspratt, comes up to you one day with an excited whisper as you are moving breadfruit trees as part of a party under Bligh. He tells you he has found some exceptionally affectionate Native women who will apparently trade sex in exchange for odd trinkets such as coins, utensils like cutlery or other odds and ends. He tells you he is going to sneak away now and offers to show you where they may be found. +> Remain at work on the breadfruit trees +You know your place and continue to unearth breadfruit trees, pack them carefully into pots and leave them ready to return to the ship. Bligh soon notices Muspratt’s absence and takes his two quartermasters in search of him. They return with Muspratt a few hours later, the latter having to be helped to walk after having received a dozen lashes for neglect of duty. You are tempted to ask him if it was worth it but fight the urge away.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Bounty remains anchored in Matavai Bay for the next month while every day Bligh, Christian or Fryer lead a party of men ashore to gather breadfruit trees. You get the impression that the men are working deliberately slowly to prolong their stay on Tahiti, as often as they are able the men contrive to spend time with the Tahitians in their villages. All of the Natives are extremely friendly and the women remarkably so. Christian and, surprisingly, Bligh are fairly relaxed about these interactions between the crew and the women but after a year at sea it would have been very unwise to try to restrain the men. + +Bligh inevitably tries however. One day you are a part of a party that is working even more slowly than usual and Bligh is becoming irritable and orders you all to work faster. Repeatedly a sailor called Matthew Thompson, an older and extremely tough man keeps demanding, increasingly more insistently that he be allowed to go into the village. Bligh continues to refuse him. Finally, Thompson has had enough. + +“Damn you sir,” he growls. “If you were any sort of officer you would know better than to deny your men what they want.” + +There is stunned silence following this outburst. +> Keep quiet +Bligh has gone very pale. + +“Damn you Thompson for a mutinous dog,” he growls. “Quartermaster, twelve lashes each!” + +The lash is fetched, the blows are landed and another sailor’s back is transformed into ruin. Sullen and muttering the crew return once more to the Bounty.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are all relieved when the beautiful tree-lined round island of Tahiti is spotted. Bligh has been getting on everyone’s nerves: he is no longer on speaking terms with Sailing Master Fryer, Surgeon Huggan or the Carpenter William Purcell and he has been grating the nerves of most of the rest of the crew. It is with relief that Tahiti is sighted and within hours hundreds upon hundreds of canoes packed with scantily clad but cheering Tahitian men and women surround the Bounty. The women are a particularly lovely sight. + +After a week anchored offshore Bligh sends Christian to lead a party of nine ashore in the ship’s cutter to begin setting up tents and making a camp for the crew to use while they gather the breadfruit. You are part of this group and are left with another sailor called John Adams to guard the boats. Adams is a clever young fellow and the two of you are chatting when you notice a pair of young ladies eying you from behind some nearby huts. When they see you looking they glance at each other and giggle. + +Like all Tahitians they are dark skinned and wear nothing above the waist, their full breasts and brown nipples peep out shyly between the strands of their long black hair. They seem to have more than a casual interest in you and Adams nudges you in the side and points at the women grinning. He suggests you go over, introduce yourselves and keep the young ladies company for a while. +> Think of England and continue guarding the boats +Steadfast, British and sex-less to the last you resist the temptation of attractive women and stolidly remain in the boats while Adams goes off to try and get laid. You are still in the boat when Christian and his party return. After hearing where Adams is from you Christian laughs and calls him out of the hut, he emerges hastily buckling up his trousers. With many a light-hearted jibe you all return to the Bounty. + +Bligh is not so amused, when you return he curses Adams for a scoundrel and orders him lashed twelve times for interfering with the Natives. Immediately the previously cheerful mood evaporates and you all stand around stone-faced as Adams is mercilessly whipped .You help him back to his hammock that evening and all around you can hear angry mutterings about Bligh.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Valentine’s death sends the crew’s spirits plunging low and Bligh decides to raise morale by instructing the crew to dance a jig to the tunes of a half-blind fiddler he has brought on board. The last thing the crew feel like doing is dancing but the sailors obligingly force themselves to their feet and dance wearily to the tunes the fiddler plays. You are dancing when you notice two men are remaining seated. + +William Brown, a mild scientific man who Bligh brought on board as a botanist to take care of the breadfruit plants is talking quietly to John Mills the Gunner’s Mate, a tough and unfriendly older man. You see Fletcher Christian go over and encourage them to dance but Mills shakes his head emphatically and Brown lowers his head. Christian shrugs and walks away. +> Keep dancing +You continue to dance but moments later Bligh shouts for the music to stop and storms towards the seated men. + +“Why are you not dancing like the others?” he demands. + +“It does not seem like an appropriate time for that,” Brown says quietly. + +“Damn you for contemptible rascals,” Bligh cries. “Both of you will have your grog stopped from now until we reach Tahiti.” + +Mills glares back at him with a half-smile on his face as Bligh turns, returns to his former position near the helm and orders the fiddler to keep playing. The punishment is a harsh one but not as bad as it could have been: a week later you reach Tahiti.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After the lashing of Quintal you and the rest of your crew go about your duties quietly and you soon come upon Cape Horn in atrocious weather. For over four weeks Bligh tries to sail the Bounty into the face of a terrible wind, tacking into the face of a gale. You and several other sailors come down with fevers, brought on by constant exertion in freezing rain and tiredness, and finally Bligh admits defeat and turns the ship east. + +You will sail to Tahiti east, around the southern tip of Africa instead. Despite the storm damage the Bounty makes good speed and arrives off Cape Town on the tip of South Africa after a month of sailing. Bligh steers the Bounty carefully into the busy harbor and you and another sailor called John Williams are sent to sound the depths with a lead line. You are both feeding the rope out when the lead snags on some rocks far below. Because the Bounty is still going pretty fast the rope starts sliding rapidly through your hands cutting them badly. +> Let go +You are not going to get your hands sliced open for a lead and line and you and Williams both release the rope. Like a demented snake it zooms across the deck and over the rail, landing in the sea below with a splash. You are both standing there blowing on your burnt hands and cursing when you hear a familiar high-pitched cry and look up to see Bligh striding towards you both. + +“You incompetent mongrels!” he snarls at you both. “You think that losing that lead is a small thing? Six lashes each for neglect and dereliction of duty!” + +The lash is fetched again, you and Williams are roped to the mast and the Quartermasters begin whipping you both, drawing blood. Bligh watches emotionlessly until it is all over and then he turns on his heel and returns to his cabin.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After leaving the English Channel the weather does indeed improve and you stop off at the Canary Islands for a week. Spirits are high as you sail onto the southwest bound for Tahiti, an island which you have heard of but have no idea where it is. You gather Bligh intends to sail around Cape Horn, the southernmost tip of South America, to get there. The ship is sailing so well Bligh decides to promote a protégé of his called Fletcher Christian from Master’s Mate to Acting Lieutenant, effectively making him Bligh’s deputy. + +Like everyone else on board the ship you like Christian. He is a cheerful and very likable young man, though a slightly sensitive soul who takes a solicitous interest in everyone’s welfare. His promotion comes at the expense of the Sailing Master John Fryer, a professional man, whose strong, independent opinions seem to irritate Bligh. He takes Christian’s promotion without a word but some of the crew are not so subtle. + +Matthew Quintal is one of your fellow seamen, a young Cornishman and a natural-born trouble-maker, always looking for an opportunity to make a little mischief. One morning he is scrubbing the deck close to where Fryer is sighting the sun with a sextant and begins to mock Fryer about Christian’s promotion, lightly at first and then more harshly when Fryer shows no response. Some of the other sailors standing nearby are exchanging glances and grinning. +> Stay quiet +You stay silent as Quintal continues to jeer Fryer, who largely ignores him, replying with brief, disdainful sentences. Suddenly you all jump as a bizarrely high-pitched cry rings out from further up the deck and you all glance up to see the comical form of Bligh striding towards you. + +“You infernal scoundrels!” he roars. “How dare you cowardly rascals show such insolence and contempt for Mr Fryer! Mr Fryer, how came you to permit such a thing to happen sir? Twenty-four lashes sailor to remind you of the proper way of addressing your superiors! Master-at-Arms, fetch the lash! Quartermaster, prepare this man!” + +Quintal is seized, the shirt torn from his back and he is lashed to the mast. The Master-at-Arms approaches with the cat o’nine tails and begins flaying Quintal’s back. Soon blood is pouring down his backside and legs as the flesh is stripped from his back but Quintal takes it all in silence. The crew also watch in grim silence until the punishment is complete. + +“May that be a lesson to you all!” Bligh declares.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>What a weird dream. There was a policeman, a fireman, a... No, you can't remember who else was in the dream. It is slipping from your memory as you begin to wake up. Perhaps it is the bouncing, shaking and vibrating of your bed that is waking you up? + +When did you get a vibrating bed? Hang on, are you sitting up? Yes, it would seem so. You must be sitting in bed. Why is you're bed bouncing you about so much? + +Your sleepy head falls forwards, and hits something. Hard. Ah, that's good. Sleep again. + +However, the bouncing, shaking and vibrating causes you to wake up again. You feel so sleepy, so very sleepy. You open your eyes. No, you must still be asleep, this must be some sort of a dream. Trees are flying past you on both sides. The sky is clear and blue. You like the colour blue. It reminds you of water. + +Yes, lots of water in front of you. It seems to stretch off to the horizon. You like the sea. Perhaps if you keep speeding towards it you might be able to go for a swim? + +You bounce upwards and hit your head on something again. Hard. Time to sleep again. +> No! I want to wake up - now! +Maybe it is time to wake up, you think. After all, you'll be late for work if you keep dreaming. Surely your alarm clock will annoyingly start beeping at you soon and wake you up? + +Maybe you should turn it off. You sleepily reach about you, trying to find the Snooze button for your alarm clock. +> You reach out in front of you, trying to push something +Is your alarm clock in front of you, you wonder? You reach out a shaking hand, and touch something. You feel about. No, this object is round like a pizza. There is a sort of soft bubble in the middle of the plastic pizza. You push it and there is a loud honking sound. What a strange pizza! You do have weird dreams sometimes. + +You smile sleepily. The sea seems to be getting bigger. What was it the man had said? Time to go swimming? + +Perhaps you should try something else? +> You reach down beside your bed +Perhaps your alarm clock is down low, beside your bed? You wonder again why you are sitting in your bed, but the thought slips away as your hand touches something. It seems to be jutting out beside your bed. You sleepily feel the object. It's is some sort of plastic rod or something. When you pull against it, it seems to move a bit. Weird. + +You sleepily notice the sea is getting bigger. Maybe you're shrinking? You begin to giggle. +> Pull up the plastic rod +You pull against the plastic rod, but it doesn't move very far. Then your thumb feels a button of some sort on the plastic rod. Perhaps it is your alarm clock's snooze button? You press the button down, and the rod lifts up. As you do so, your dream changes. Now, instead of just bouncing, shaking and vibrating, there is a loud screeching sound, and you feel your seat jerking left and right with the screeching sound. You are now getting a bit dizzy on top of everything else you are feeling.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"My dear, you know if I could stay, I would. But they need me out there!" Isaac, your betrothed, squeezes your hand gently as he tries to soothe you. + + +"But I need you too! I need you here with me!" You scream at him, unwilling to accept that all too soon, he will be going off to fight in a war and may never return. + + +Isaac strokes your cheek gently. "My love. I will return. And when I do, we'll get married, just like we planned before all this started." He leans down and kisses your forehead gently. "I love you." + + +He walks off toward the other soldiers. You're not quite sure if he hears you as you whisper your last words of parting to him. + + +"I'll wait for you..." +> Continue +You sit up abruptly and pull your sheets securely around your chest. It was just another dream about Isaac's departure, you realize. You've been having a lot of those lately, even though it's been two months since he left. You haven't heard anything from him since about a week and a half after he arrived at his destination. It was nothing particularly heartwarming. Just a letter to say he was alive and would write soon. But he never did. He couldn't be dead, though, you think. Surely, someone would have informed you by now. + + +Suddenly, you hear a knock at the door, interrupting your thoughts. You really don't feel like getting up. You didn't sleep well last night. On the other hand, it could be the mailman with a letter from Isaac. +> Answer the door +It is the mailman, you realize with excitement after opening the door! But he doesn't have a letter from Isaac. It's a letter from the man who runs the factory where Tyson, Isaac's younger brother, works. Tyson had apparently been injured while working the assembly line. He was badly hurt and had nowhere to go. So they were sending him to you. No questions asked. He needed to be taken care of, and you were the only likely candidate for the job. Real doctors were much to busy taking care of injured soldiers to devote their time to a young man who couldn't even fight their war. + + +Tyson had broken some bones in his right hand when he was fifteen, and because the injury was never treated, they did not heal properly, resulting in partial loss of the functions in his hand. Therefore, he was useless, except to sit in a factory all day, producing weapons. + + +No one ever let him forget how his injury affected his daily life and his ability to be useful. They would constantly make him miserable, taunting and teasing. + + +But not you. He saved your life. You never believed he was useless... +> 5 Years Earlier... +You were fourteen years old. It had already been a year since the accident when Tyson broke his hand, but he was still having trouble getting used to the fact that he didn't have full control over it. + + +You were walking along the beach one afternoon. You knew Tyson was at the top of a hill not far from the shore, watching you. There were signs of a storm coming in, but you didn't care. You wanted to be alone. You're father had just died, leaving you with only an aunt to take care of you. + + +Naturally, you didn't notice (or maybe you just didn't care) when a huge wave came up the beach straight towards you. You had never been a strong swimmer, so when the wave dragged you into the raging ocean, you pretty much gave in. + + +But Tyson would not allow you to be stolen so easily. The next thing you knew, you were being carried out of the water in his strong, muscular arms. "Stupid, stupid girl..." He crooned gently as he stroked your hair. You weren't sure, but you thought he might've had tears in his eyes. + + +How do you thank someone for just saving your life? +> Kiss him +You were so overcome with emotion, you barely had any time to think before you reached up and gently pulled his face towards yours. Your lips met tenderly, and a small gasp of surprise escaped his lips. But he recovered and realized what was happening. He kissed you with a gentleness you weren't certain you knew existed. He ran his fingers through your hair and whispered "Stupid girl" against your lips as he pulled away. +> Present Day +It's not long before a few men arrive at your door, hauling the injured Tyson. You lead them into the house and to an empty guest room where they lay him out on the bed. As soon as they have him positioned comfortably, they are on their way. + + +You realize that Tyson is drifting in and out of a state of consciousness. You do everything your mother taught you to do when you were young to treat an injury like Tyson's. All that's left to do is wait. + + +So you hold his hand and sit patiently. +> 2 Hours Later... +"Where am I?" Tyson's eyes are open, and he's looking around like a lost child. + + +"It's ok, Tyson. You're safe here with me." You gently stroke his hair as he takes in his surroundings. + + +"Did you save my life?" He asks. You suppose he could've bled to death, but you weren't necessarily the one who saved him. "Can I thank you for saving my life... like you thanked me?" + + +Obviously a reference to the incident five years earlier. You two never talked about it - or the kiss - since it happened. But you were certain that's what he'd implied. + + +He wants to kiss you. Do you let him? +> Yes +He's injured. You don't feel as if you can refuse him. So you nod your head and lean close. + + +He gently reaches towards you, even though he clearly has pain in his arm, and pulls your face the remaining distance so your lips meet. You realize this is the first time the two of you have kissed since that day. + + +His lips are warm and soft against yours, not tainted with seawater as they were last time. He strokes your cheek gently as his mouth refamiliarizes itself with yours. + + +Then suddenly, you pull away as if remembering something. You're engaged to his brother. For all either of you know, he may not be alive. But you are his. And you wouldn't betray his brother... Would you? + + +"Thank you." He whispers softly, as he closes his eyes to rest. +> Continue +When Tyson wakes up a few hours later, you sit next to his bed. You have prepared a meal for him, realizing he must be starving. He sits up carefully, wincing in pain as his injuries are once again agitated. + + +"Be careful." You say gently, resting your hand softly against his chest. + + +He looks up at you and sighs. He has an odd expression on his face, but you can't decide what he might be thinking about. "Well, nurse," he says, his expression returning back to normal, "I hate to be a bother, but I'm really rather famished." + + +"Right. Here you go." You lift the plate out towards him, and he struggles to obtain it, his injuries obviously causing him extreme discomfort. +> Offer to feed him +His pain is too much for you to bear. Your hand instantly retracts, removing the dish from Tyson's reach. A distraught look quickly spreads upon his face. "Why?" He asks pathetically. + + +You shake your head. "I'm going to feed you. Whether you want me to or not. I can't stand seeing you grimace every time you move. So I'll do it." + + +You receive a look of shock in response. Possibly from the fact that you're treating him like a baby, or maybe just because of your extreme air of authority. But he doesn't object. + + +You scoop manageable bites into his mouth as he lays there helplessly. Every now and then, between bites, he'll send a small smile your way. Probably his less embarrassing way of thanking you for playing the role of his mother. + + +After you've fed him the last of his meal, you stand to go wash his dishes. But before you have time to make it a step away from Tyson's bed, he snatches your hand and sends an audible groan of agony through the room. + + +He had his purpose in mind, however, so as you stand there with a worried look on your face, he draws your hand towards his lips and plants a delicate kiss on your wrist. "Thank you." He whispers for the second time that day. +> Tyson's Progress +It's been several weeks since you've taken Tyson into your home. You realize you enjoy his company, not having previously noticed just how lonely you were. He seems to be getting much stronger, though he still hasn't left his bed a single time. + + +One afternoon, you enter Tyson's room to check on him. You see him struggling to stand on his own. When it appears that he's about to topple over, you rush to his side to support him. However, rather than accepting your assistance, he gently shoos you away. "No. I have to do this on my own." He says with determination. Then he adds more softly, "I can't always have you all to myself." + + +You stand back and give him space. He has trouble at first getting readjusted to the use of his legs. He still has some residual discomfort, but most of his pain is gone. Soon, he's walking about the whole room on his own. + + +"I want to go for a walk with you. Get some fresh air, see the sky. It'll be good for me, I think." He looks at you hopefully. + + +Should you go and risk his injury, or tell him to wait till he's fully recovered? +> Go for a walk +You carefully lead Tyson out of the house. He blinks a few times, his eyes readjusting to the bright sun he hasn't seen in forever. "Where to?" You ask. + + +Tyson thinks silently for a moment, then turns to you with a grin. "I think I know just the place." He takes your small, soft hand in his firm, yet gentle, grasp. + + +The two of you walk in comfortable silence for a while until you realize where he's leading you. Just below the hill where the two of you now stand, you can see the beach. Not just any beach. The beach where Tyson saved your life five years ago. + + +He leads you down the hill, then turns to you with a bashful expression. "I figured now was as good a time as any to talk about what happened that day." He presses your hand firmly over his heart. "You must know I had certain... feelings for you. I don't honestly know that I would've jumped in a raging ocean for just anyone." + + +You feel a wave of heat cross your face. You suppose you probably had figured that out by now, you just never wanted to consider the implications of what had occurred that day. Even back then, it was a known fact that Isaac had claimed you. You begin to wonder if you ever gave Tyson a fair chance. + + +"I'm not asking you to come out and say you've always secretly been in love with me. But... I do hope that maybe you'll start to consider - truly consider - how you feel about me." +> Time Goes By... +You and Tyson spend much time together as the days pass. It soon becomes evident that he must leave soon, as he is almost fully healed. You realize that this thought suddenly makes you feel sad and lonely. + + +One night, you enter Tyson's room to check on him. He had recently been having trouble sleeping, so it became your nightly ritual to hold his hand and tell him stories until he fell asleep. + + +When you reach his bedside, you see Tyson looking up at you in the dim light, a sad expression on his face. + + +A wave of concern washes over you. You sit on the edge of his bed and reach for his hand. "What's wrong?" You ask. + + +"I just... I love you so much!" He squeezes your hand to convey the urgency of this revelation. "I want you, all to myself, for the rest of my life. It's not fair that he's so lucky!" + + +You are shocked by his outburst. His proclamation of love was the last thing you expected. You sat in silence, unsure how to respond. + + +"Well? Say something!" You hear the overwhelming desire in his voice as he demands a response. "I need to know. Please. Do you love me? Could you ever learn to love me?" + + +How do you respond? +> "I do love you." +"Do you really?" With the aid of the moonlight streaming in through the window, you are able to see a smile quickly spread across Tyson's face. "Oh, my love!" He pulls you to him and presses his lips to yours. You feel a wave of heat wash through you as he run his hands through your hair. + + +You realize this is the first time he's ever kissed you without that gentleness he usually treats you with. He has replaced that gentleness with a hunger and passion that you find alarming, yet alluring. + + +Tyson gently eases you down on his bed and pins you beneath him. He sends fiery trails of kisses up and down your neck, along your jaw, and returns to your mouth, uttering vows of love against your lips. He breathes heavily as he runs his hands over your body and continues kissing you as if the world will end tomorrow. "My love... oh, how I've wanted you for so long!" + + +By the early morning, you realize two things: First, you have just given yourself to Tyson. And second, you broke your promise to Isaac... +> The Dilemma +It has been three months since you and Tyson consummated your love for each other. You realize that there is no way to hide your affair from Isaac, if he returns. + + +You are pregnant. + + +Tyson returned to the factory two short weeks after your night of bliss. You haven't seen him since, but he's always sending flowers and writing to you. In his last letter, he informed you that he would be visiting in a week. + + +He doesn't know you're pregnant yet, but you plan on telling him when he arrives. + + +You spend the week preparing for his arrival. On the day of his arrival, you hear a knock at the door. You rush to the door, expecting to find Tyson. Instead, you are greeted by the mailman. + + +It is a letter from Isaac. He is coming home in three days. +> The Decision +The instant Tyson sees you, he notices two things: First, he notices the bulge your stomach has begun to form. He is delighted at the implication that he will soon be a father. Second, he notices the look of distress on your face. + + +"My dear, what's wrong?" He asks, pulling you close with one hand. His free hand he gently rests on your stomach, right over the spot where his child resides. + + +You quickly explain to him about Isaac's letter. His reaction is some strange mixture of loathing and triumph. He couldn't stand the fact that, only months ago, you had come close to marrying his brother. But now, you were his. That is what you read on his face. + + +His response was calm, however. "It seems to me we really only have two options." He states matter-of-factly. "Either we stay here in hopes of reconciling with Isaac, or we run. Stay away for a few years. Long enough for him to get over losing you. We leave him a letter informing him of us, but don't tell him where we'll go. It's up to you, though." + + +What will you do? +> Stay +You tell Tyson you think it would be best to try and reconcile with Isaac. Tyson agrees to stay with you to await Isaac's arrival. + + +During the few days you two have alone before Isaac's arrival, you dreamily discuss the sort of life you will have together with your child. Tyson is constantly sneaking glances at your stomach, giddy with excitement of your child's arrival. + + +The moments you don't spend discussing your future, you spend with Tyson's lips pressed passionately against your skin. + + +But all too soon, Isaac arrives... +> Isaac's Arrival +It doesn't take long for Isaac to guess at your current relationship. Between the less than enthusiastic greeting he received, and the fact that you're obviously pregnant, he knows he's been betrayed. + + +"You! You traitor! How the hell could you do this to me?! How could you do this..." He gestures at your stomach. "...to her?!" His rage has caused his face to turn bright red. "You've made her into your plaything! She's no better than your common whore! My love, you've stolen her and her innocence!" + + +"Isaac, you can't always get everything you want! But then, you've never been good at sharing..." Tyson is clearly angered by Isaac's accusations and insults towards you. He shows remarkable restraint. + + +"No. No, I haven't. But... If I can't get what I want, then neither should you!" He draws his handgun from his pocket. Of course he would be in possession of a gun. He just returned from war! + + +With barely so much as the blink of an eye, he snaps his gun towards Tyson. + + +You know how this will end. + + +Without thinking, you position yourself in front of Tyson right before the bullet reaches him. Instead, it plants itself firmly in your pregnant body. You fall backwards and are caught in Tyson's arms. He screams profanities at Isaac. + + +"Stupid, stupid girl..." He says, stroking your hair, tears streaming down his face. He leans down and sends a gentle shower of kisses down upon your forehead. "My love... My stupid girl..." + + +You take another ragged breath. You cup his face gently in your hands. + + +"Now we're even..." You whisper softly, before fading away.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The instant Tyson sees you, he notices two things: First, he notices the bulge your stomach has begun to form. He is delighted at the implication that he will soon be a father. Second, he notices the look of distress on your face. + + +"My dear, what's wrong?" He asks, pulling you close with one hand. His free hand he gently rests on your stomach, right over the spot where his child resides. + + +You quickly explain to him about Isaac's letter. His reaction is some strange mixture of loathing and triumph. He couldn't stand the fact that, only months ago, you had come close to marrying his brother. But now, you were his. That is what you read on his face. + + +His response was calm, however. "It seems to me we really only have two options." He states matter-of-factly. "Either we stay here in hopes of reconciling with Isaac, or we run. Stay away for a few years. Long enough for him to get over losing you. We leave him a letter informing him of us, but don't tell him where we'll go. It's up to you, though." + + +What will you do? +> Run +You and Tyson decide that the best option is to run. You take your most important possessions with you and leave a long letter of apology for Isaac. + + +You and Tyson are married not long after your departure. For months, you constantly wonder how Isaac is. You don't regret choosing Tyson. No, you love Tyson. You only wish you hadn't been forced to hurt Isaac in the process. + + +Just as you are settling into a comfortable routine with Tyson, you receive terrible news. + + +Isaac has killed himself. + + +You don't question his motive. You know, without a doubt, it was because of you. Because he loved you. Because, not only did you betray him, but his brother betrayed him as well. You mourn his death for the months that lead up to the birth of Tyson's and your child. The baby is a healthy and handsome boy. + + +You and Tyson decide to name him "Isaac." + + +You and Tyson have two more children several years later. Another son, Bryce, and a daughter, Lila. + + +You and Tyson live happily together for many years. And every night before bed, he kisses you softly and whispers in your ear, "Thank you." And you know exactly what he means. Thank you for looking past the partial disability in his hand. Thank you for taking care of him when he was injured. Thank you for confessing your love that day, so many years ago. + + +But most of all he was saying "Thank you for giving me so many years of happiness and a beautiful family." Or, put more simply, he meant: "I love you."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Tyson spend much time together as the days pass. It soon becomes evident that he must leave soon, as he is almost fully healed. You realize that this thought suddenly makes you feel sad and lonely. + + +One night, you enter Tyson's room to check on him. He had recently been having trouble sleeping, so it became your nightly ritual to hold his hand and tell him stories until he fell asleep. + + +When you reach his bedside, you see Tyson looking up at you in the dim light, a sad expression on his face. + + +A wave of concern washes over you. You sit on the edge of his bed and reach for his hand. "What's wrong?" You ask. + + +"I just... I love you so much!" He squeezes your hand to convey the urgency of this revelation. "I want you, all to myself, for the rest of my life. It's not fair that he's so lucky!" + + +You are shocked by his outburst. His proclamation of love was the last thing you expected. You sat in silence, unsure how to respond. + + +"Well? Say something!" You hear the overwhelming desire in his voice as he demands a response. "I need to know. Please. Do you love me? Could you ever learn to love me?" + + +How do you respond? +> "I don't love you." +"Of course not! I've been a fool to even think I could win your heart. It was always Isaac. He was older. He was stronger. His hands were undamaged. He was going places! How could you ever love me?" Tyson looks away, hurt and anger spreading on his face. + + +"Tyson, no. It's not like that at all! I just..." You're at a loss for words. + + +"You just what? Tell me! Please! I'd love to know!" + + +"I don't know, ok? I don't know..." You're starting to tremble. + + +Tyson notices your trembling. His voice becomes gentler. "Kiss me. Really kiss me and tell me you don't love me." He quickly leans toward you and wraps his arms around you, pulling you up against him. He covers your mouth with his and kisses you hungrily. His fingers trail up and down your body. His mouth never stops. His lips are on your neck, trailing along your jaw, and back on your mouth. + + +As if suddenly realizing he needs to breathe, he stops, still holding you, and comes up for air. "Do you love me yet?" He breathes heavily. + + +That's when you know your answer, once and for all. +> "I'm sorry, I can't." +Tyson's face suddenly draws a blank expression. He had expected this response, but he was obviously hoping you'd changed your mind. He gently pushes you away. "Please. Leave." His voice cracks. + + +Your heart breaks seeing him this way. "Tyson, I-" He cuts you off. + + +"No. I don't want to hear it. Just go!" His voice rises. + + +When you wake the next morning, you realize Tyson is gone. +> One Year Later... +Isaac had returned from the war three months after that night when you refused Tyson. You and Isaac were married in a simple ceremony. + + +You were glad you decided to wait for Isaac. You loved him dearly, and it seemed as if not seeing you for so long had made him somehow more affectionate. + + +You were, however, sorry for the pain you caused Tyson. By this time, Tyson had become an infamous drunk. He was known for taking many women into his home constantly. More interesting was the fact that it was noted that he preferred a certain type of woman's company. And when this type of woman was described to you, the description sounded remarkably like you. + + +You were certain it wasn't a coincidence. + + +You and Isaac were soon expecting your first child. Isaac was out working one day. That's when the contractions started. You needed someone - anyone - there with you. + + +And that's when he showed up. Tyson. You looked at him with utter surprise and disbelief evident on your face. + + +"I'll always be here for you." That was all he said. That was all he needed to say. + + +By the time Isaac got home, Tyson was long gone. In his place was a beautiful baby girl.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Of course not! I've been a fool to even think I could win your heart. It was always Isaac. He was older. He was stronger. His hands were undamaged. He was going places! How could you ever love me?" Tyson looks away, hurt and anger spreading on his face. + + +"Tyson, no. It's not like that at all! I just..." You're at a loss for words. + + +"You just what? Tell me! Please! I'd love to know!" + + +"I don't know, ok? I don't know..." You're starting to tremble. + + +Tyson notices your trembling. His voice becomes gentler. "Kiss me. Really kiss me and tell me you don't love me." He quickly leans toward you and wraps his arms around you, pulling you up against him. He covers your mouth with his and kisses you hungrily. His fingers trail up and down your body. His mouth never stops. His lips are on your neck, trailing along your jaw, and back on your mouth. + + +As if suddenly realizing he needs to breathe, he stops, still holding you, and comes up for air. "Do you love me yet?" He breathes heavily. + + +That's when you know your answer, once and for all. +> "I think I always have." +Tyson smiles, his eyes shimmering in the moonlight streaming in through the window. "I hoped so! Oh, my love!" + + +He recovers instantly from his previous lack of breath. He instantly begins trailing kisses along every inch of your exposed flesh. His hands are restless. He wants more. + + +You suddenly realize you are willing to let him have more. He can have all of you, if that's what he wants. + + +"Do you want me?" Your whispers are intoxicating. + + +Tyson nods his head, breathing raggedly against your skin. + + +It is well into the morning when you realize you have just broken your promise to Isaac.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It's been several weeks since you've taken Tyson into your home. You realize you enjoy his company, not having previously noticed just how lonely you were. He seems to be getting much stronger, though he still hasn't left his bed a single time. + + +One afternoon, you enter Tyson's room to check on him. You see him struggling to stand on his own. When it appears that he's about to topple over, you rush to his side to support him. However, rather than accepting your assistance, he gently shoos you away. "No. I have to do this on my own." He says with determination. Then he adds more softly, "I can't always have you all to myself." + + +You stand back and give him space. He has trouble at first getting readjusted to the use of his legs. He still has some residual discomfort, but most of his pain is gone. Soon, he's walking about the whole room on his own. + + +"I want to go for a walk with you. Get some fresh air, see the sky. It'll be good for me, I think." He looks at you hopefully. + + +Should you go and risk his injury, or tell him to wait till he's fully recovered? +> Stay inside +"Tyson, dear, I think that's a bad idea. I don't want you to get hurt. You're not strong enough to walk such great distances yet." You don't want to risk Tyson getting hurt all over again. You just hope he doesn't think you're being too controlling. + + +Tyson tries desperately to stifle a grin. "You do care about me, don't you?" + + +You blush fiercely. "Well, of course. I've known you for as long as I can remember. Why wouldn't I care about my friend?" + + +"Oh, is that all? Are you sure I'm just a friend? You've never once wondered what it would be like to spend the night with me?" He asks in a seductive tone. He winks at you and steps closer. + + +You're blushing again. It's rather obvious. Tyson laughs and moves back a step. "You're so cute when you're embarrassed." He says smiling. Then his expression turns serious. "I'm not going to lie, though. I've wondered..."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When Tyson wakes up a few hours later, you sit next to his bed. You have prepared a meal for him, realizing he must be starving. He sits up carefully, wincing in pain as his injuries are once again agitated. + + +"Be careful." You say gently, resting your hand softly against his chest. + + +He looks up at you and sighs. He has an odd expression on his face, but you can't decide what he might be thinking about. "Well, nurse," he says, his expression returning back to normal, "I hate to be a bother, but I'm really rather famished." + + +"Right. Here you go." You lift the plate out towards him, and he struggles to obtain it, his injuries obviously causing him extreme discomfort. +> Watch in silence +You watch as Tyson struggles to position himself to eat. He makes slow progress in trying to feed himself. Every movement causes a flash of pain to course through him. + + +You would do anything to alleviate his pain, however, you don't want him getting the wrong idea. So instead, you wince as you watch him suffer. + + +When he's finally finished, he looks at you pathetically. "You are a wonderful cook. I only wish I could've enjoyed your meal under more favorable circumstances." + + +"I'm so sorry! You look miserable!" You whine sadly. + + +"No, no, darling. It's alright, really. I'm going to be honest. I don't mind it so much." He reaches out to take your hand and groans in pain. "I don't mind because I get to be with you." He gently kisses your wrist. + + +You have difficulty suppressing a smile.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Where am I?" Tyson's eyes are open, and he's looking around like a lost child. + + +"It's ok, Tyson. You're safe here with me." You gently stroke his hair as he takes in his surroundings. + + +"Did you save my life?" He asks. You suppose he could've bled to death, but you weren't necessarily the one who saved him. "Can I thank you for saving my life... like you thanked me?" + + +Obviously a reference to the incident five years earlier. You two never talked about it - or the kiss - since it happened. But you were certain that's what he'd implied. + + +He wants to kiss you. Do you let him? +> No +"Tyson... I'm sorry. We shouldn't. Isaac..." You trail off. + + +"No, I'm sorry. I shouldn't have asked. I just... I've been wanting to kiss you again so badly ever since that day. But you were always his, weren't you?" He looks away sadly. + + +"Tyson..." You reach for his hand, but he pulls away. + + +"No, it's ok. I'm fine with it. I'm sure you two will be very happy once Isaac gets back. You'll get married, have his children, grow old together... But. Remember what I said, ok? Because I meant it. I'll always be there for you, even if you don't want me." + + +"Thank you." You whisper as you rise to leave. "Get some rest, alright?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You were fourteen years old. It had already been a year since the accident when Tyson broke his hand, but he was still having trouble getting used to the fact that he didn't have full control over it. + + +You were walking along the beach one afternoon. You knew Tyson was at the top of a hill not far from the shore, watching you. There were signs of a storm coming in, but you didn't care. You wanted to be alone. You're father had just died, leaving you with only an aunt to take care of you. + + +Naturally, you didn't notice (or maybe you just didn't care) when a huge wave came up the beach straight towards you. You had never been a strong swimmer, so when the wave dragged you into the raging ocean, you pretty much gave in. + + +But Tyson would not allow you to be stolen so easily. The next thing you knew, you were being carried out of the water in his strong, muscular arms. "Stupid, stupid girl..." He crooned gently as he stroked your hair. You weren't sure, but you thought he might've had tears in his eyes. + + +How do you thank someone for just saving your life? +> "Thank you." +Tyson looks somewhat disappointed. You're not quite sure what he was expecting to happen, but he nods his head and smiles. "You know you don't have to thank me. I'll always be there for you if you need me." He strokes your cheek gently. + + +Suddenly, without warning, Tyson leans his face close to yours and kisses you gently on the lips. When he pulls away, he's blushing. + + +You stare at him in shock. "Sorry. I couldn't help myself." He shrugs casually but says nothing else as he walks you home.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You thrust a final time, your ragged cry of release filling the air and startling a pair of birds overhead. As they wing away you clutch Mondy to you, whispering, “Thank you,” and kissing him passionately as the scarlet leaves overhead drift down onto his golden hair. + +These last couple of years have been hell. The two of you had your love put to the test more than ever before. It’s been utterly draining--physically, emotionally, financially--but as you look into Mondy’s eyes you know it was all worthwhile, and you know he feels the same. Such a warm feeling of peace and joy suffuses you, and you can’t help but kiss him again. + +Days drift by, careless and lazy. + +The two of you spend the evenings fishing, and during the day you glean whatever you can find from the overgrown fields. Mondy is still in recovery from his long illness and a bit weak, so the bulk of the work falls on you. Not that you mind. The days are quiet and peaceful, and it’s a joy just to be alive as you greet each sunrise, your love at your side. + +It’s really just the two of you out here now; there were only a handful left in the village after the sickness came, and since then they’ve all packed up and left. No future out here. You heard those words often enough, even in your younger days, and there was even a time you believed it. + +And of course, there were uglier words. +> Days past +The first meeting with Mondy came while dropping off a necklace of your mother’s. The clasp needed repairing, and he was still a jeweler’s apprentice then. You’d always been considered eccentric, and Mother had stopped bothering to ask you when her dear boy Mirk was going to find a nice girl and give her a grandchild long ago. You’d expected you’d die alone, and a virgin, if you were being completely honest with yourself. But when you met Mondy...there was a spark between the two of you immediately, and before long it lit a bonfire in your heart. + +The two of you had never tried to hide your love. + +At first, when you and Mondy pledged yourselves to one another under the tree on the hill, and then again in the village square, the others had been...accepting enough, even if a few of them clearly thought the both of you mad. But your mother had given you her blessing, and took Mondy into her heart almost as a second son, and that was the most important thing. + +Near the end, however, things changed. Personally, you blame the priest. Or perhaps it was the sickness weighing so heavily on everyone’s souls that turned them twisted and cold. But the looks grew darker. The whispers grow uglier, and then stopped being whispers at all. They said the love you shared was an abomination. The priest stood in he doorway of the church and thundered that a demon had poisoned your mind. + +Any of that, all of that...you could have borne without complaint, and gone on about your life. Mondy’s love was all you needed. But when your mother lay on her deathbed, and her last words were begging you to leave the man you loved? It broke something inside of you. + +After her funeral you and Mondy had a long talk...a long cry, really, on your part. There was never a question of you leaving him, of course. For your mother to even suggest it felt like a betrayal, though you knew she wasn’t herself. She was weak, ill, just like Mondy had been, and being quite old and frail as well her mind had easily been poisoned against you. + +But the two of you knew when you were no longer welcome, retreated from life in the village, and moved to a cottage on the other side of the hill. Eventually, the others all left. “Good riddance to that lot,” you’d muttered to Mondy, watching the last cart being drawn away. “We can do as we like now.” + + +What would you like to do? +> Look around the cottage +The cottage--well, it’s more like a shack--has seen better days. And it wasn’t much even back then. + +The fire has gone out, and the only light comes from the gaps in the boards that are now also letting in the icy bite of winter. It’s early for a first frost, and you have a feeling this year may be a bad one. + +Opening the pantry, you find nothing but a cloud of dust that drives you into a coughing fit. Sneaking a guilty glance at where Mondy is resting on the bed, you relax when you see you haven’t wakened him. He was sick for so long, on the verge of death, that even now he hasn’t recovered his strength, and you worry constantly he’ll have a relapse. + +There’s no firewood in the box. How long has it been since you’ve replenished it? You really have been letting things slip around here. Perhaps it’s time you start thinking more seriously about what you’ll do in the coming days. To tell the truth, you’re not confident anything about this place will be enough protection in a bad freeze or heavy snow. +> Walk to your tree +This tree at the top of the hill--a sugar maple--as a lonely, awkward little boy you would play here, and when Mondy came into your life it was the place the two of you would sit and talk for hours, even before you finally mustered up the courage to say the words that had gone unspoken so long between you. You’ve been calling it ‘our’ tree for the last four years, whenever either of you speak of it. + +Your hand caresses well known lines in the bark; a heart with the names Mirk and Mondy inside. On impulse you pull out your knife and carve it all in deeper. + +The branches are bare now, and the wind up here is quite a bit stronger, and carries a bitter chill. You really ought to find some firewood and supplies. Can’t have Mondy getting sick again. + +Below, you see the abandoned shops and dwellings of your old village, huddled together around the little church you eventually came to hate.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You can't remember when the world first started shaking, this little fragile patch of reality with so many cracks and such little support to keep it from breaking apart, but something was always going to give. It was just a matter of time. Nobody knew what really triggered the fall. Was it the breaking of the chains which kept your little quiet island floating in the sky all this time, imbued with the energy which kept it going for so long? Was it the final earthquake that split the lands of the humans, far below your precious little civilisation? Or was it something else? + +It's easy to blame the humans who live beneath you, blame them for every little thing that goes wrong in the world. You're high enough to avoid the worst of the toxic gases that they leak into the atmosphere; you're smart enough to know not to drain the planet of what few resources remain to be cultivated; you're fast enough to hide yourself when they create a multitude of new dangers, unleashing terrors into the wild. + +There is no war here, no government, no violence, no weapons or need to do anything but survive on your own and help each other out. The air is thinner here. Humans find it hard to breathe at this altitude without special equipment of their own. You pity them, but at the same time you admire them for being resourceful enough to create tools enabling them to come all the way up here. Then you remember what had to be sacrificed for such tools to be made, and you no longer admire them so much. + +The island you've lived on for your entire life, along with your family and friends...is beginning to fall. +> Proceed +The wind howls in your ear as the island plummets towards the ground far, far below. No chains to keep you secure. No energy or power to keep you airborne, not anymore. Everything has been used up. This is where your home is, your village, your life; clusters of little grassy huts assembled in neat little circles, built to resist the strong winds of this height. Your people have long grown used to the lack of oxygen up here. + +It isn't your home anymore. + +You clutch onto the beautiful green grass covering the ground, grass which comes off in clumps in your hands. The air pressure is affecting the land and you watch in mounting horror as pieces of your home are savagely torn away from one another. You're not the only one, either; dozens of people are desperately trying to keep their houses secure before they too are ripped asunder. A doomed effort, because the gravitational pull is tremendous. + +You do not see your parents anywhere. You fear they may have been dragged over the edge to their deaths, like so many others. This settlement is not equipped with appropriate equipment to land upon the human-inhabited grounds, thousands of metres below. Nobody would think to do anything like that. + +The roar of the wind grows louder and louder in your ears, and the pressure on your body forces you into a narrow crawl. You cannot even raise your head, at the speed you are falling. Cracks appear in the ground around you, and you realise that this is no longer a case of keeping the island secure. The settlement is already done for. It will not survive. +> Crawl towards the ruins of your house nearby +You claw your way towards what used to be your personal residence. The roof has been torn off, the front door is hanging on by mere threads, and the interior has been devastated beyond recovery. Only pieces of shattered wood remain here now. The wind picks up, and for a second you almost lose your grip, but you somehow manage to make it inside. What remains of the wall here serves as a temporary shelter. + +Even so, the feeling in your gut tells you that the entire island is picking up more speed than before. The chains will not be repaired: it is not going to stop. Your chances of survival are slim at best. +> Keep your head down and seek shelter within the wall +You crouch against the inside of the wall, covering your head as the deafening noise continues all around you. Earlier on, you could hear the cries of the other people as they sought shelter within their fragile little huts, but now there is nothing to be heard but the endless howling of the wind. A chill seeps into your bones, but that is the least of your worries right now. This wall will not hold for long. You may as well be stranded in the middle of the ocean, clinging to a broken piece of driftwood as the storm rages on. + +As if eager to give you confirmation of this, small cracks begin to spread out across the wall where you are hiding. The entire island is shaking, causing the cracks to widen. +> Stay against the wall +You stay braced against the wall, unwilling to move from this spot. This is your home. You will not abandon it, no matter what. More cracks appear all over the wall and start to crumble away; the wind whistles through the holes, and you can feel its chill upon the nape of your neck. + +It’s too late to try and escape your fate now. Everything is already destroyed. Your possessions, your livelihood, the people you grew up and formed relationships with. What else is left? What else can the world take away from you now? Home is where the heart is. You close your eyes and start repeating that small phrase like a constant mantra: home is where the heart is, home is where the heart is, home is where the heart is – + +The wall collapses at your back, nothing but rubble now. You feel a moment of terror before the wind picks up speed and you are thrown off your feet, clumps of wood falling uselessly from your bleeding fingers. You scream as you are flung from the surface of the island, spiralling towards certain death far below… +> Proceed +The pressure mounts in your ears with a fearsome intensity, and your entire world turns into a mass of endless sound and impending pain. You fall for what seems like forever, desperately clutching at any means of support, anything at all. There is nothing for you to catch on to. You fight to draw breath, but your stomach feels as if it is being squeezed to breaking point. It's a struggle to keep your eyes open; your vision blurs and pinpricks of light flash before you, multiplying in number as your speed of descent increases further... + +As you fall, you catch sight of a heavy chain extending from the base of the island. You’ve never had the opportunity to see it up close before, and it’s sad that you can only do so now, in circumstances like these. The chain extends a short distance below the island before ending at a shattered black ring. Energy no longer flows through it to keep the island aloft. It has been split apart from some exterior force. + +Confused at what this could mean, you gasp for breath as you fall with the island. The last of your strength fades. Unconsciousness falls upon you, and what you know of your world is consigned to complete blackness. +> Proceed +You hear voices in your ear, indistinct faces in the gloom around you. There is no pain, but the wind is still quite fierce and there is only a tiny semblance of touch or feeling. You try to move, but your body will not obey you. Everything seems too bright and loud for you to make out anything but what is immediately nearby. Too much light. Too much volume. It is difficult for you to tell if you are dead or alive. Only the presence of pain suggests the latter. + +“Why, Mother?” a woman's voice whispers at your side. You are just barely aware that she is not addressing you, but someone else whom you cannot see. “Why do you choose to help her? Our burden is upon you, to cleanse us of our impurities and prolong our life force, but you lack judgement in this situation. You lack common sense. Do you seek to betray the rules and regulations of the Gahl'vuhr Sehn at its core? The Unworthy ones do not come to you. They do not know half of what you do for us. Yet now they fall from their sky islands, falling into nothing, now that the world finally stops turning. Leave her be. Leave her to die.” + +You feel warm hands pull you free, and a sense of strange nostalgia washes over you. It’s difficult to describe, after all that’s happened, but some of the tension eases away. It feels like…it feels like home. + +“Do not save her, Mother,” repeats the voice unfalteringly. “The Unworthy ones do not wish for absolution. Do you understand? They do not want your blessing, Mother. Waste not, want not.” And then, in a fainter voice, so quiet that you could have sworn you imagined it, “This is not our way, Mother. This is not how we behave in the Gahl'vuhr Sehn. You will regret your folly.” + +The howling has stopped. +> Proceed +You awaken in more peaceful circumstances. No longer are you falling to your death at hundreds of miles an hour, deprived of everything you once held dear. For a split second, you are hopeful that everything which transpired was nothing but a cruel nightmare, designed to bleed you dry of all positive emotions. It certainly felt like a dream. As your surroundings become visible to you, however, you become painfully aware that this is reality. + +Instead, you find yourself lying on a comfy bed inside a small, square room, with no memory of how you got here. Evidently, somebody has gone to a lot of trouble to make you feel at home here. A glass of water is placed on the bedside table for you, and a few pillows have been propped up just underneath your head. + +Dizzily, you start to sit up and are surprised to find that you can do so. You also discover that you appear to have sustained no physical injuries at all. How could you possibly be unhurt? Your first thoughts are that one of the foreign sky races must have treated you upon impact, but they are surely too far away to have reached you in time. Your island was quite isolated from other land masses and never received many foreign visitors or travellers. Could it be that you never hit the ground at all? + +Perhaps this is the afterlife, and you are to be judged for your transgressions in the events leading up to your death. In any case, you will not find out by simply lying in this bed all day. You feel well enough to get up and walk about now, so perhaps it is time to explore your surroundings in some more detail. You still do not know where you are. + +As you start to get up, there is a vicious snarl from the corner of the bedroom. + +With a start, you realise that you are not alone. A green-skinned muscular creature is glaring at you from a short distance away, sporting sharp claws, four arms, and a barbed tail. It is much bigger than you are and seems to be sizing you up. A mutant? You can’t think of what else to call it. There are tales of sky races long ago which were said to engage in such experiments, creating their own warped definition of new life… + +Fortunately for you, the mutant is confined within a large iron cage. It shouldn’t be able to get out. You eye it warily and quickly move past it. +> Inspect the mutant further +The mutant snarls at you intelligibly as you approach it. With a body composition like that, you doubt that this creature evolved naturally; no, it was likely the result of a hideous experiment with organic matter and some unknown toxic material. That’s your best guess, really, but you’re still at a loss to explain why your apparent rescuers put you in the same room as this vicious beast. The mutant seems to have been in this cage for a very long time. + +You peer at it curiously through the bars, and the mutant suddenly slams all four of its claws into the cage. That makes you jump a little, but the door of the cage is quite sturdy and refuses to budge, no matter how much the creature bashes at it. It’s not going to escape any time soon. A padlock on the cage door also prevents you from letting it out, just in case such a thought passed through your mind. +> Search the room for valuables +You make a quick search of the bedroom, being careful not to stray too close to the mutant’s cage, but there doesn’t seem to be much of value here. A wardrobe has been placed against the wall, but contains only foul-smelling rags which are filled with holes. You consider tearing off a fragment of your bedsheets instead, but decide against it once you consider that your situation might be the outcome of limited hospitality. + +After a few more minutes, you do find a strange scroll under your bed. It is written in a language that you do not understand, if it is a language at all; strange symbols and archaic runes cover the wrinkled paper. For now, you decide to take it along with you. + +As you pick up the scroll, the mutant watches you with a baleful glare. It lets out a long hiss and the skin on its body changes colour to an angry red. +> Inspect the mutant further +The mutant snarls at you intelligibly as you approach it. With a body composition like that, you doubt that this creature evolved naturally; no, it was likely the result of a hideous experiment with organic matter and some unknown toxic material. That’s your best guess, really, but you’re still at a loss to explain why your apparent rescuers put you in the same room as this vicious beast. The mutant seems to have been in this cage for a very long time. + +You peer at it curiously through the bars, and the mutant suddenly slams all four of its claws into the cage. That makes you jump a little, but the door of the cage is quite sturdy and refuses to budge, no matter how much the creature bashes at it. It’s not going to escape any time soon. A padlock on the cage door also prevents you from letting it out, just in case such a thought passed through your mind. + +The mutant's skin has now changed to an angry red colour. Even though the cage is holding it back, you're wary about spending any more time in this room. +> Ignore the mutant and leave the bedroom to find out where you are +You push open the door and step outside to find yourself in a narrow corridor which extends both left and right. To the left, you feel a gust of wind blowing, rustling through your hair softly. The sensation is not unpleasant. Perhaps there is a window open in that direction. To the right, you can hear the voices of people talking and laughing, though you are not close enough to hear exactly what they are saying. It is possible that they are your rescuers, but you cannot tell for sure. +> Go left where the wind is coming from +The wind grows stronger as you follow the corridor around the corner, towards a set of stairs which lead to the upper level. You’re not quite sure where you are, exactly. You can only assume that you have been taken to somebody’s home, perhaps another faraway settlement, but you must surely be a long way from home. At least, where your home used to be. It doesn’t explain the presence of the mutant in your room, however, so you can only hope that your hosts are not unpleasant company. + +You climb up the stairs to find yourself...staring out across open skies. Clouds can be seen on the horizon, clustered in a never-ending sea of blue which surrounds you for miles and miles as far as the eye can see… + +This is no ordinary residence. This is no house. You’re not even on ground level. You are standing on the upper deck of a fully functioning airship! No wonder the wind was so strong up here: you must be hundreds of metres above sea level... + +You’ve never been on an airship before, but you have seen plenty of them at the island where you lived all your life. Some sky races use these aerial vessels to transport goods and cargo between islands, others simply for transporting passengers. However, they can be slow and unwieldy to operate, and they are not especially durable; a fierce lightning storm can easily put an airship out of commission. For this reason, airships are usually designed for short voyages with a minimum of passengers. + +It’s like something out of a dream. A real airship. You don’t know where this one is headed, but it has to be somewhere better than where you came from. Where do you want to go, after all? No, the bigger question is – what happened on the surface of the land far below? What prompted your island to fall in the first place? + +As you gaze out thoughtfully across the open skies, there are footsteps behind you. You turn to see a young woman with long red hair cascading across her shoulders. There is a hint of recognition in her green eyes as she looks at you. + +“Vnwprthy,” she says in a clear voice. “Ypv brf thf Vnwprthy.” She beckons to you with one finger. “Cpmf. Cpmf wjth mf. Thf Cbptbjn wbnts tp spfbk tp ypv.” + +Without another word, she turns on her heel and walks across the deck into another section of the airship. You do not understand her words, but it seems that she wants you to follow her. +> Follow the woman +Curious about what awaits you, you follow the red-haired woman across the upper deck and over to the other side. She leads you through another set of twists and turns in the corridors, down into another part of the airship. As you walk, you pass by several uniformed men who watch you with interest. They are not human, but then again...neither are you. Each of them appears to be armed to the teeth. Only now do you realise that they must be part of the ship's crew. + +After a few minutes, your guide leads you to a brass door which lies at the top of a final flight of stairs. There is a sign on top of the door, but you lack the knowledge to read the symbols and runes displayed there. + +“Gp jn,” she says, gesturing for you to enter. “Thf cbptbjn js wbjtjng fpr ypv.” + +At her request, you push open the door and enter the room beyond. +> Proceed +You enter a large, lavishly-furnished room with all manner of alien devices mounted upon the walls, none of which you have seen the like before. One device consists of two gyros oscillating in synchronisation with each other, surrounded by a shimmering coil of energy; another instrument is similar to a telescope upon first glance, but appears to contain three lens of varying sizes at set intervals within its interior; a third device resembles a sundial, but is set into the ceiling and is covered by an array of round discs. Evidently, these instruments must be related to the operation of the airship. You’re not sure whether they are lifelike models of the real thing or not, but they do fascinate you. + +From the look of the place, you must be in the captain’s room. Sunlight pours in through two bay windows at the front, and a plain-looking bed is situated in the corner next to a pair of filing cabinets. This cabin seems to function as both a workspace and as living quarters. A large number of medals and trophies stand upon one of the cabinets. + +The captain herself stands at the other end of the cabin behind a large desk, dressed in a red and purple uniform covered by various badges to indicate her high status. Much like the other crew members you saw earlier, she is not human and is vaguely reptilian in nature. Thick white hair flows down her back in an elegant ponytail. + +“Vnwprthy,” the captain says to you curtly as you enter. “Wflcpmf.” + +You look blankly at her, wondering if you are about to subjected to yet another series of verbal questions in a language you do not understand. + +“My crfw tfll mf thbt ypv hbvf bffn bslffp fpr spmf tjmf, Vnwprthy,” she says, a disregarding tone in her voice, one used to command. “Nbtvrblly, ypvr prfsfncf hfrf hbs cbvsfd qvjtf b stjr bmpng vs. Whp brf ypv, bnd whfrf hbvf ypv cpmf frpm?” + +She looks expectantly at you, frowning when she sees that you do not comprehend her words. With a sigh of disgust, the captain calls out in a sharp voice. The door of the cabin opens behind you, and a red-haired woman with a kindly face steps inside. She appears to be human. It’s strange, because you didn’t think humans could survive at these kinds of altitudes. + +“Hfllp,” the red-haired woman says to you gently. When you look at her in confusion, she tries again. “Cpmmpn Tpngvf…Vncpmmpn…He…Hell-oh? Hello? Is…is this better?” + +“Yes,” you say gratefully. “That’s better. I can understand you.” + +The captain looks quite annoyed with the exchange as the red-haired woman speaks urgently to her. She turns towards you haughtily and clears her throat. + +“How about…this?” she says irritably. “You do not speak Common Tongue, or even Uncommon Tongue. A mix of Skylandish and Common Comorrah? Is this really how you talk to your brethren? You Unworthy ones are nothing but a constant pain.” + +Seeing that you understand her, she sags back against her chair with some relief. “I see that we have some communication in place at last. I am the captain of this ship. I will make a few things clear right now, Unworthy – I do not tolerate stowaways who drop out of the damn sky, taking up additional resources than I can spare for my crew. I don’t care if your island fell into the ocean. That’s no excuse to litter my ship with your worthless carcass. Damn nuisance, you people are!” + +She throws up her hands – or rather, claws – in a gesture which suggests she likes to complain. “Are you aware that Mother Ghared chose to save your life?” The captain nods her head towards the young red-haired woman standing next to her. “As official members of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn, it is against our policy to save the life of an Unworthy. That’s you, by the way. Anybody outside our organisation is an Unworthy. I wasn’t happy about this at all. Mother Ghared is far too soft in these matters.” + +“Captain,” Mother Ghared says in a passive tone of voice, “I believe you did not bring the Unworthy up here to give her a tirade on her existence. She must be quite tired after her ordeal. Her island is not the first to plummet towards the ground, nor will it be the last. An exchange of information is required.” + +The captain glares at you, but reluctantly acknowledges her words. “Very well,” she says. “Unworthy, you are free to ask me questions about your situation. But after you have finished, I have some important questions of my own.” +> Ask her about this airship +“You stand aboard an Auvahr-Tenur Airship, Year 2XX5, Model CXXP,” the captain says with a certain note of pride in her voice. “We Auvahrs are known well for our skill in ship construction, but see little sense in naming them. These vessels are not built for long journeys, as you may know. Although the Tenurs work on the advanced mechanisms, it is not mandatory to employ them as members of the crew and we carry no Tenurs aboard at this time.” + +She appears to be referring to the races which populate the various sky islands. You have heard of the Tenur race before, but have never encountered Auvahrs before. For your entire life, you have been content to remain on your little island without once venturing out into the unknown. At times like this, you wonder if such a decision was altogether wise. + +“Where are you headed?” you ask. + +“Island 45H, according to the sky charts,” she answers. “You Unworthy ones do not name your islands, do you? How quaint. We can respect that, but it makes it harder for us to make a decent reference point. Among us Auvhars, the island is known as Majeruk.” The captain glances at one of the instruments in front of her. “We will reach Majeruk within the hour, at which point you can disembark and get off my damn vessel at last. Unworthy, we carry a decent amount of cargo on board and I will not have your presence contaminate the merchandise further. I will be glad to be rid of you.” + +This news brings you some hope. It sounds as if you might have a chance to reach an island not unlike the one you left behind. That seems a sensible way to proceed right now: move on, rebuild, and re-settle upon a new island. It seems that not every island has met the same fate as yours, but how long will that last? When will the world stop shaking? +> Proceed +The captain of the airship waits patiently at her desk, awaiting your next question. +> Ask her about the people on board +“This airship carries only Auvahrs and one human,” she says dismissively. The captain appears to be referring to the races which populate the sky islands, though you have never encountered an Auvahr in the flesh before. “A standard crew, including mercenaries to guard the merchandise should we run into any trouble. We also carry a few valuable prisoners from the last island.” There’s a pause, and you wonder if she might be referring to the caged mutant you saw in your bedroom. + +“What about…” You voice the question which has been plaguing you, glancing over to the red-haired woman. “Mother Ghared? She’s a human.” + +“Quite right,” the captain replies. “Gahl’vuhr Sehn policy requires that every airship within their organisation carries a representative proficient in restorative abilities, to ensure survival of the crew in the worst-case scenario. It was Mother Ghared who saved your life, against my express wishes. She may be human, but she is a formidable representative of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn and can withstand the high altitudes, thanks to her rather abstract nature. If you wish to speak to her whilst you are here, you will do so only with the greatest of respect.” + +You look towards Mother Ghared, but her expression betrays nothing of her inner thoughts.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The captain of the airship waits patiently at her desk, awaiting your next question. +> Ask her about the Gahl'vuhr Sehn +“I should have anticipated such a question from you, Unworthy,” the captain says, scowling. “The Gahl’vuhr Sehn is a governing body which oversees all operations and protocol undertaken by us Auvahrs, as well as Tenurs and some subspecies of Comors. They strictly enforce the rules and policies put in place to maintain some sense of order among the sky islands, although Unworthy ones such as yourself are unfortunately exempt from such regulations. + +“However, it has probably not escaped your notice that Gahl’vuhr Sehn has their work cut out for them at the moment. Just a bit of chaos going around, that’s all, thanks to what’s going on at the surface. I should also mention that just because myself and my crew are members of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn, we are not especially high-ranking in the organisation.” She cocks her head to one side. “Perks of the job, you might say. It’s probably the only reason why I let Mother Ghared save your skin.” + +You have never heard of this Gahl’vuhr Sehn, not in all your years living at your island. Rules and regulations? You and your family have never needed such things. That’s the whole point of life in the sky islands. You are free. The thought of other people trying to limit such unrestrained freedom makes you feel rather worried about what might be really going on.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The captain of the airship waits patiently at her desk, awaiting your next question. +> Ask her about what happened to you +“Several hours ago, you fell out of the sky,” she says. “You weren’t the only one, either. There were entire islands collapsing to the left and right, and I had to get the ship out of the way to avoid being crushed by the next giant land mass. Mother Ghared…” + +Mother Ghared steps forward at this point. “I was on duty at the front deck when you emerged,” she says calmly. “Unlike the others who fell, you had a slim chance of survival. I chose to use my abilities to slow your fall and take you on board. The captain did not approve of my decision, but I was able to persuade her to let you live until we reached the next island.” + +The captain shakes her head in disgust. “Fat lot of good that will do us, Mother Ghared. If we’re unlucky enough to run into a Gahl’vuhr Sehn patrol when we reach Majeruk, they’ll want to know why we have an Unworthy on board.” She glares at you. “I’ll just tell them that you were a stowaway and that Mother Ghared refused to let me throw you over the side. Doesn’t matter if the world’s splitting down the middle or if islands are falling out of the damn sky – as far as the Gahl’vuhr Sehn is concerned, rules are rules. They must be followed. I’m so glad that the highest-ranking representative on board has decided to break them on my behalf.” + +“You may defer any responsibility to me, captain,” Mother Ghared says. “They will understand. Even the life of an Unworthy can give rise to many new members of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn. The future is always uncertain.” + +“That’s easy for you to say, Mother Ghared, but I like my future to stay as stable as possible.” The captain turns her attention back to you. “What else was there? Oh, yes. We brought you inside and had no choice but to put you in the cabin in which one of our prisoners was housed. Not the safest choice, but we are already stretched to full capacity here.” + +You recall the mutant you saw in your room. “Prisoner?” you repeat. + +“Cargo is not the only thing we transport on this airship,” she states. “Occasionally we are given the task of transporting valuable and dangerous criminals to far-off locations – some islands are used for prisoners alone. “Prison islands”, we call them. Leave them there to rot away, stranded, where they can’t hurt anyone. Better than any of those primitive human jails, in my opinion.” She sits back in her chair. “I’m sure the prisoner didn’t bother you at all. It would be a pretty big problem if that one managed to escape. A single mutant has the means to contact many others of its kind, and those creatures carry grudges against their captors for years. Downright murderous, they are. That's why it's essential that we keep every single one of them locked up.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The captain of the airship waits patiently at her desk, awaiting your next question. +> Ask her about the falling of the islands +The captain stares at you in amazement for a few moments. “You want to know why the islands are falling?” she asks. “Are you serious? Do you mean to tell me that you really don’t know what’s happening on the surface below?” She pauses, then shrugs as if it doesn't really matter. “That’s probably no surprise. None of you Unworthy ones take the time to explore your surroundings. You’re so satisfied with little things instead.” + +Standing up from her desk, she strides over to the door of the room and beckons to you with a single talon. “Mother Ghared. Unworthy. Both of you, follow me. We’re going up to the balcony so that I can educate this girl a little on the world around her.” + +Curious about what she has in mind, you start to follow the captain out of the cabin. Mother Ghared is just a step behind you. “Why are we going up to the balcony?” you ask. “What's this got to do with the - ” + +“You wanted to know why the islands are all falling, didn’t you?” she interrupts. “Well, I’m not going to tell you. it would take too much time to explain and I can’t remember all the fancy words that you Unworthy ones use. No, I’m going to show you instead.” +> Follow her up to the balcony +You follow the captain back onto the upper deck, onto a raised platform protected by a thick metal railing. Up here, you can see that a mystical crystalline device has been installed into the top of the airship. It seems to be made out of hundreds of tiny pieces of metal, interwoven together in a blend of silver and black. You cannot guess at its purpose, but the whole thing is humming with energy. Surely it must power the ship in some way. + +“The lens here will magnify any singular point on the surface, within a set range,” the captain explains. Behind you, Mother Ghared scrambles up next to her. “Right now, it’s focused on one of the human-inhabited regions far below us. Think of it as a giant magnifying glass, except that this one takes about two hours to realign the location. Not very practical, in theory. Usually, we just use it to pinpoint any turbulent weather conditions coming our way, but we don’t have a lot of contact with the people on the surface anyway.” She stands back, allowing you to take your place in front of the device. “Step up to the lens, Unworthy. Take a look for yourself at what’s happening on the surface!” + +Warily, you move forward as she requests and peer into the giant lens. + +The first thing you notice is just how much detail the instrument is showing you. You can see houses down below. People. Trees. In fact, if you look in the right location, then you can see exactly what people are doing. To be honest, it makes you feel a little uncomfortable to be using a device that could technically be used to spy on people. You adjust the lens using the controls on the side, coming out of focus in order to try and look at something else in the same region. + +A black spot shows up on the lens. + +As you focus in on the spot, you realise with alarm that you are looking at the ruins of a whole cluster of buildings. No, not just buildings. That’s…that's an entire town. Big enough to be a city, even. It’s just a burned-out hole in the ground. More black spots appear on the lens now, hundreds and hundreds of them, like termites crawling through the earth... + +That isn’t all. Some of the black spots are surrounded by a sea of red. You move into sharper focus now, going a bit further up, and see that a red river is flowing from a…a mountain? No. it can’t be. That’s a volcano. That means… + +Your heart skips a beat as you swiftly scan the rest of the surrounding region, looking for any signs of life down there. There are still people there. They’re alive, but they’re not living. The earth has cracked all the way down the middle, right across the centre of the entire continent. It’s a crack which extends far and wide, beyond what the lens can see at this position. + +The patch of red is accompanied by orange…and then blue. Are those flood waters? Just what is going on here? There’s so much going on at the surface that you can’t make head or tails about what you're really looking at, let alone grasp the bigger picture. Is it just a constant stream of natural disasters? All at once? + +“If you are looking for a specific, detailed explanation on what has happened,” the captain says, “then you are all out of luck. Nobody can tell you what happened at the source. If you were close enough to know for sure, then you would already be dead. What you can see before you is what's going on right now.” She gestures to the crack running down the middle. “That’s not the result of a normal earthquake. Nor do we believe that a number of volcanoes erupted all at once, purely by accident. Mother Ghared has offered her views on this.” + +“It is possible that there was a split in the energy flow between the human nations,” Mother Ghared ventures. “Everything feeds off energy. Input and output; produce, waste and conservation. Energy is what keeps your islands suspended in the sky. It’s what breathes new life into you. When there’s too much of it in one place, and too little in another…” She shakes her head sadly. “The Gahl’vuhr Sehn call it a “temporal discharge”, although that kind of phrase is largely inaccurate. It’s a measure of great force which saps an enormous amount of resources from the planet itself. The planet, of course, reacts accordingly.” She shrugs. “That’s my theory, but there are others. War could be the trigger. Mass deprivation of world resources. It was always going to happen one day. All we know is that there are no outside forces at work. Everything’s that happened…is something that we did nothing to avoid. + +“Needless to say, the effects upon the sky islands have been disastrous. The tremendous energy drain has disrupted the gravitational pull to an extreme, causing many of the islands to fall out of the sky. Countless airships have been leeched of their power, stranding them in open sky.” + +“Not on my watch,” the captain growls. “I make my own preparations. When our energy cells were depleted, I immediately had the helmsmen switch to our back-up source and keep us airborne. We should survive until we reach the next island. I don't care what those humans did on the surface, but they're not going to bring an Auvahr ship down.” + +Mother Ghared's words swim through your head, but you are still staring at the scenes before you in a state of utter shock. Is this what’s happened to the world? Why? What could be worth this? But at the same time, you remember the experiences you had just days before the island started falling. Changes in the wind. Abstract extremes of temperature and air pressure. Unexplainable disturbances in the atmosphere which were thought to return to normal within the year. + +You don’t know what to make of this. You don’t know what to make of any of this. How can you survive in a world like this, so chaotic and constantly at war with itself? Will you really be safe up here in the sky? The only plan you can think of is to find a new island to settle on, somewhere that you can start again. That would be nice. Wouldn’t it? Wouldn’t it be nice? + +Where do you go from here? +> Proceed +Abruptly, the captain switches off the lens completely. The vision before your eyes turns to a sea of black, disorientating you momentarily. + +“Now that I’ve answered your questions, Unworthy,” she says testily, “I expect you to answer mine. Who are you, and where do you come from?” + +You don’t see any reason to lie. “We do not name each other,” you say truthfully. + +“Excuse me?” The captain frowns distastefully. “You don’t have a name?” + +“Nobody is born with a name,” you answer. “Among humans, the parents name a child at birth regardless of whether they ask for it or not. It is not customary to use names among my people. Giving yourself a name only makes it easier for someone to gain power over you. Bearing in mind the kind of lives we lead with each other, it’s unnecessary.” + +She swears under her breath, clearly put out by your words. “What am I supposed to call you, then? Pigeon Girl? You Unworthy ones are a strange lot. I’ll be damned if I let one on board my ship ever again if I have to put up with this nonsense! Now, tell me which island you came from!” + +“We don’t name our islands either,” you say, confused at the question. “For the same reason.” + +The captain gives you a long-suffering look which suggests she is coming to the end of her patience. + +“I’m sure it doesn’t matter which island she came from, captain,” Mother Ghared reassures her. “You saw what happened. Her island must be at the bottom of the sea by now. Very few survived the fall.” + +“All right, all right. Maybe you’d just like to say that when I tell my superiors that I took in an Unworthy on board my ship. Gender? Female. Name? Non-applicable. Place of birth? Some island that fell out of the sky.” She stares at you angrily. “Listen, girl, you’re not making it easy for me to fill out the required paperwork. I’m not even going to ask how old you are, because you’d probably tell me that you only count backwards using the constellations at a certain time of the year. Can I at least get an iota of cooperation from you, Unworthy?!” + +As she talks, your gaze is drawn to a strange sight upon the horizon. You hadn’t seen it before, but it looks as if it’s coming this way. Slowly, you step forward to peer at the foreign object approaching the airship. +> Take a closer look at the sight on the horizon +You see what appears to be a mass of black clouds on the horizon, lit up by a blaze of yellow and white flashes. The atmosphere around the airship is becoming increasingly turbulent, and you feel the vessel shake beneath your feet, making it difficult to keep your balance. + +The captain turns to see what you’re looking at and swears out loud. “Just our luck,” she mutters. “Damn lightning storm could put us all out of commission.” Without hesitation, she starts to shout orders down to the crew below, reverting back to Common Tongue as she does so. “Bll hflmsmfn pn thf blfrt! Thfrf’s b ljghtnjng stprm bpprpbchjng thf shjp. Bfgjn fvbsjvf mbnpfvvrfs jmmfdjbtfly, pr wf wpn’t lbst fjvf mjnvtfs!” + +You see the crew members scramble to their positions quickly, working amongst themselves to turn the ship around before it makes contact with the imminent storm. The captain turns to you. “We’re going to try and steer around the storm, Unworthy. It’s a big one, and with such short notice we might not be able to make it. But I’m confident I can get my ship through this. It's rare for a lightning storm of this size to appear without any warning, but...” + +“Is this to do with what's happening on the surface?” you ask worriedly. There was no sign of any such storm until now. The change in pressure was simply so drastic for this to happen naturally. + +The look in the captain's eyes tells you the answer to that. “Unworthy, you’d better get yourself below deck where it’s safer,” she says grimly. “Just stay out of trouble. That way I won’t have to worry about protecting your neck.” + +With that she rushes down the steps, still shouting orders as the storm draws closer. You hold onto the railing tightly as the ship starts to change course, but at this distance you have a feeling that it might be too late. A crackle of white-blue lightning flashes not too far from the vessel, and the wind is getting stronger. +> Stay on the upper deck, ready to help +You decide to remain on deck and see what help you can lend to the crew members. Mother Ghared disappears down below, and from here you watch as the helmsmen frantically try to turn the airship around as quickly as possible. Before long, the ship is so close to the storm that pieces of wood are being shredded away from the outside of the hull. You grip the railing tightly, fearing the worst… + +“Brbcf ypvrsflf!” the captain yells. + +There is a horrendous tearing of wood and metal as the storm makes impact. Fearfully, you throw yourself clear from the balcony – and just in time, too. A bolt of lightning flashes down onto the crystal lens where you were standing, shattering it into a million pieces. The crewmen cry out as a violent gust of wind slams into the ship, powerful enough to tear the railings apart. Rain and sleet pours down to accompany it. + +Desperately, you search for somewhere to take cover from the storm. This was a bad idea. You shouldn’t have stayed up on deck in this kind of climate. There’s nothing you can do here – + +Another bolt of lightning flashes down and rips straight through the mast. + +You turn to see the entire weight of the mast fall towards the deck. To your horror, you see that the captain is right in its path, just seconds away from being crushed. None of the mercenaries are close enough to help her. No one is close enough to help…but you. + +Even if you did help her, it’s unlikely that you would be able to get out of the way in time. +> Push the captain out of the way +With your heart in your mouth, you race forward and shove the captain out of the way in the nick of time. You see her eyes go wide at her near escape. Then you look upwards and see wit horror that the mast is continuing to fall – right on top of you. + +Frantically, you start to move to avoid it, but you are already out of time. You have sacrificed what precious seconds you had to save the captain. Your legs are moving too slowly, far too slowly to avoid the heavy lump of wood which will crush you asunder. Everything seems to move in slow motion as the mast careens towards your helpless body – + +“Fprcf!” + +A shrill cry erupts from the other end of the airship. The mast shudders as an invisible force slams to it, snapping it further at an awkward angle. You can barely breathe as the fractured beam crashes through the deck barely a metre away from you. You’re alive. You can’t believe it. + +You raise your head to see Mother Ghared frozen in position, her hands outstretched towards the fallen mast. Your knowledge of her abilities is still limited, but you understand that this is the second time she has saved your life. The captain is already on her feet, struggling to defend herself from another group of mutants. + +Before you can move, you see Mother Ghared slump to the ground. She seems exhausted by the effort of stopping the heavy mast, and the energy drain is too much for her. You start to force yourself to your feet, knowing that if you spend too long dawdling then you won’t have long to celebrate. She needs help, and fast. + +That’s when you hear the violent splintering sound below you. + +Fearing the worst, you see that the heavy mast has in fact torn straight through the centre of the airship. It is in no condition to fly. The vessel has already been damaged by the attacks of the mutants, and you can only watch in horror as more and more cracks appear, joining together as one… + +The airship breaks apart down the middle. + +You see the mutants react with surprise as they start to plummet along with their half of the ship. Surprisingly enough, they can no longer fly. You’re not quite sure why, but you have a feeling that their wings from before were only temporary. In addition...part of the airship somehow remains airborne. You’re not in a position to question the laws of aerodynamics right now, but you need to act fast. + +Your half of the airship is currently airborne and in no danger of falling – or so you hope. The captain is next to you, slumped in a heap. The other half of the ship is about to plummet downwards, and you realise that Mother Ghared is still on that side. She’s unconscious and has no idea of what has happened. + +You have a split second to decide whether to cross over the gap to Mother Ghared, or stay here with the captain. You have no idea what condition either person is in. +> Stay on this part of the ship with the captain +You can do nothing but watch as Mother Ghared is lost with the remaining half of the ship, falling away out of sight. With the last of the mutants gone with her, the bloody battle has ended. The upper deck is covered with the bodies of the dead, both mercenaries and mutants alike, and you find no survivors at all. It’s sad, really. The chaos on the surface has worked its way up here, even though you like to think of yourself as disconnected from the surface as possible… + +Right now, there is nothing powering the airship anymore. You are at the mercy of the wind, which blows the vessel this way and that, stranding you here in the middle of the open skies. You have no knowledge of how airships work, and feel you shouldn’t try to mess with the controls at all. You count yourself lucky that you stand upon a ship which is still airborne at all. + +For now, all you can do is wait for the airship to drift; here, alone, among the mass of dead bodies on board. There are some supplies to keep you going, but they won’t last you very long. All of the food was stored in the lower deck, and that was the part of the ship which went down. + +The captain is lying slumped in the middle of the deck, bleeding profusely from several wounds. She’s alive, but only just. A quick examination of her reveals that she hasn’t got long to live. Only her resilience has allowed her to last this long. +> Proceed +For the rest of the day, the damaged airship drifts upon the wind with no clear or definite destination. You face a lonely vigil here, one of the only survivors among numerous corpses. Whilst you’re here, you try to salvage whatever supplies you can, realising that you may be here for a long time if you are not fortunate enough to reach another island. There a few food packages in the captain’s room, and you are careful to consume only a small amount. These might be your only supplies for a long time… + +The captain has not regained consciousness, at least not fully. She mumbles incoherently when you try to rouse her, but you know she is need of nutrition and medical attention. Unfortunately, there are no medical supplies in this part of the ship. Those were lost with Mother Ghared. Unable to wake her, you force some water through the captain’s cracked lips. She coughs and splutters but manages to get it down. + +As you continue to drift, you see numerous other airships passing by. However…they give you no cause to celebrate. They, too, are drifting. The crew members on board are all dead, as you discover upon your first encounter; some have been attacked by mutants or aggressive races as happened with you, but in fact you find that the majority of them have been the victim of violent storms or run out of food and supplies completely. In more than a few cases, you find that there is a literal skeleton crew on board, as evidence by the remaining bones that greet you. + +The world is falling apart around you, and you can do nothing to stop it. You are the only one out here who remains alive. The chaos on the surface must be affecting the skies, too, since many of the doomed ships here have been drifting for some time. How long has it been since your island fell? How long has the world been like this? + +Hours pass, and you begin to feel that you will not survive. Your supplies will not last forever. + +It is almost nightfall when you are confronted by a single ray of hope. At first, you think that your eyes are playing tricks on you. An island can be seen passing close to the airship. + +An island. It seems like a miracle. There could be people there, people who could help you and give the captain the medical attention she so desperately needs. However, the airship isn’t headed directly for it – you will have to literally jump down onto the island, making use of the few tools still available to you. + +As you draw closer, you realise that you do not recognise this island at all. You don’t know if the inhabitants there will be friendly or hostile to you: there might not even be any people living there at all. It could be filled with wild animals. If you choose to disembark, you will not be able to return to the ship, which will drift away and leave you stranded upon this isle. + +Furthermore, the angle at which you are approaching the island makes it impossible for you take anyone with you. You can jump down onto the surface yourself with some difficulty. This will mean that you will have to leave the wounded captain behind, ultimately sealing her fate. +> Disembark onto this new island, leaving the captain behind +You take one last look at the captain, who is lying on the bed in her cabin where you brought her up to rest. In the circumstances, she almost looks like she is sleeping peacefully. You shake your head and walk away from her, stepping over the corpses littering the deck. You can’t let this affect you. Sometimes you have to make sacrifices in order to survive. + +The island below is coming up fast. If you don't jump now, then you're going ot miss your chance. Crossing your fingers, you grab hold of one of the mooring lines running down the length of the airship, and brace yourself. The wind rushes past you as you swing from the rope and jump from the vessel, feeling as if you’re putting your whole life at stake here. A single misstep could send you hurtling into the void… + +Soft vegetation cushions your fall as you land upon the island, winded but unhurt. You’re dangerously close to the edge but you’re safe, and that’s what matters. The entirety of the island stretches around you. It is as yet unexplored territory. + +Breathing a sigh of relief, you look up to see the airship drift away and out of sight. There’s no going back now. +> Proceed +You begin to explore the island you’re on, and soon find that it is rich in vegetation, full of nutritious fruits which grow upon the numerous trees populating the land, and carries a generous stockpile of resources. It’s a perfect haven for the weary traveller lacking in supplies. At once, you set to work gathering as much food as you can. The majority of the island is open grassland, though you find a small jungle in the southeast, so it's easy enough to traverse the space here. The wildlife here is not hostile to your presence, but from what you can see, you can easily live off the land here for many long decades of your life. + +Further exploration reveals that there are no people inhabiting this island. None at all. That seems a little strange to you, that absolutely nobody has happened upon this place before. Any settler or explorer would immediately seize upon this haven of food and resources. It makes you wonder what secrets must lie here. + +The amount of land here is vast, enough to build several towns a fair distance apart! For the next few weeks, you set out intending to explore the entire island. No passing airships or vessels are sighted anywhere near, and you realise with a heavy heart that you are probably stranded here. After all, you are in the middle of nowhere. The lack of people just makes it feel a bit…isolated. + +At the end of the second week, you discover footprints. The footprints of people. Someone has been here before, although the marks are extremely faint and some part of you feels that you might have made them yourself. It’s hard to be sure. + +It’s really very lonely here. How long are you willing to stay here, after all? How long will it take before you succumb to the ever-present loneliness? It’s been weeks. Maybe you could get used to it, but you can't say for sure… + +You decide to follow the footprints you saw. Despite yourself, you’re intrigued about where they came from. You follow them all the way north, around the corner of the island, where they lead into the waters of a vast, beautiful lake. The sunlight paints its reflection upon the shimmering surface, and you shield your eyes from the glare. It’s really a mystery as to what happened to these people. Perhaps you don’t really want to find out. + +Aside from the lake and the footprints, you’ve seen pretty much everything there is to see on this island. You also have no way of leaving. It’s not bad, really. There’s plenty of food to feed you for the rest of your days, and enough wood from the trees to construct your own shelter from the raging elements. The wildlife isn’t particularly hostile, so you would be quite safe from danger. + +You could settle here – you really could. It’s just that…you’re the only one here, and it’s likely to remain that way. You’ve explored the island for nearly a month now, and there isn’t another living soul to be seen. Well, apart from the animals, but they don’t bother you. You could do anything here. You could run naked through the jungle and nobody would care, because there’s nobody here but you. You could dig a hole underground and lose yourself inside there, bury yourself alive, and scream as loud as you can. Nobody would care, because there’s nobody here but you. You could try to climb a tree, and then fall from a great height. You could break your legs from the fall and nobody would help you, because there’s nobody here but you... + +You don’t cope well with loneliness. + +One thing you can say about this island is that you’ve never seen anything like it before. It’s not going to fall, not like the other islands fell. You don't know why you think that, because there's no chain or energy flow keeping it aloft...but it's just your gut feeling. It's not going to perish like the others. You would be safe. If you settle here, then nobody will ever bother you again. +> Approach the lake +You walk up to the edge of the lake, searching for any sign of the people who came before you. Strangely enough, the footprints disappear into the water itself. After a moment’s hesitation, you wade into the lake a short distance, curious to find out what really happened here. The water is cool and fresh against your skin, as if keen to make you feel at ease. + +To your surprise, you can hear the faint sound of beautiful singing coming from up ahead. You’ve never heard anything quite like it before. The words are difficult to make out, but you are captivated nevertheless by the atmosphere that it creates around you. Intrigued, you push further into the lake towards the source of the singing. + +You can make out the words a little clearer now. The water comes up to your waist. + + + + +“Welcome, welcome, O traveller of the skies, + +Drink from the water, and burn out your life; + +Our singing shall ease all your worries and fears, + +Come closer, young traveller, for all you hold dear… + + + + +The voices fade away, and you are immediately struck by the impact of the silence all around you. Desiring to break the silence, you wade deeper into the lake’s waters. You haven’t heard the voice of another soul on this isle for nearly a month. As much as you hate to admit it, the loneliness is starting to get to you. It would be cruel to deprive you of such company. + +You push further into the lake, not caring that your clothes are now drenched. From afar, you can hear the singing voices again. The water level comes up to your chest. + + + + +“Rejoice, rejoice, O traveller of the skies, + +No need for emotions, to laugh or to cry; + +Sing with us here in the depths of the lake, + +Naught but your soul and your spirit shall we take… + + + + +A strange feeling passes over you, and the singing cuts out. The water level comes up to your neck, turning into a murky green. + +Despite yourself, you do not feel that you are in any real danger. A low hum echoes from all around you, almost seeming to resonate from the waters of the lake itself. You can no longer see the edge of the lake anymore. You swim forward impatiently, still searching for the source of the voices… + +“What are you doing here?” + +The face of a young woman emerges from the water in front of you. She appears to be vaguely human-like in appearance, but when she speaks, it sounds as if you are hearing her voice from underwater. Green hair flows down her back, and you see scales dotting her cheeks. An aquatic lifeform of some kind, perhaps. You didn’t know there were such people living in these waters. + +“You’re not one of us,” she says, a surprised look on her face. “Why are you alive? How can you possibly survive here?” + +Her questions baffle you. Before you can answer her, a second woman appears from the water, rising up to surface besides her companion. + +“Look, sister,” she whispers, pointing towards you. “It’s not a male this time. The men usually drown themselves trying to hear the song, but she…” She smiles faintly at you, pulling back a lock of matted grey hair to one side. You see the hint of fangs protruding from inside her mouth. “We haven’t had a female come here before. Maybe she could join us. Our song has more effect with greater numbers…” + +“Another sister?” the green-haired woman sounds dubious. “But we’ve never done that before. Is she…safe?” + +“Maybe not, but we can easily change her.” The other woman looks at you curiously. “Traveller of the skies, we are the inhabitants of this isle. Everything you see before you is our property and ours alone. Those who visit our land are drawn into the dark waters and consumed by our sisters and children, giving us new life. We share the energy among us and channel it into the land itself, replenishing it. We do not die. We do not perish. Settlers sometimes come here and seek to drain the resources from the island, but no man cannot resist our song. We take from them what they seek to take from us.” + +She holds out a slim hand towards you. “Would you like to join us, traveller? Another female would be a welcome addition to our circle. If you become one of our sisters, you too will enjoy the privileges afforded to us all. However, I will not force you. Should you refuse, we will do you no harm, but please think very carefully before you answer.” +> Agree to join them +“Wonderful,” she says with a smile. “Then let me welcome you in the tradition of our people. A kiss is necessary to seal the agreement of mutual acceptance.” + +Before you can do anything, the grey-haired woman moves swiftly through the water towards you and embraces you tightly. Her lips move onto yours in a surprisingly intimate fashion, and you can't quite keep the shock out of your eyes. You can feel your body changing as an effect of the kiss, as if your internal organs are slowly undergoing alterations of their own… + +Scales appear upon your face, and the tone of your skin deepens to a pale blue. Your vision begins to go fuzzy, and a small measure of panic starts to take root in your mind. What's going on? What exactly have you agreed to do here? Before you, the woman mouths a single word before disappearing into the waters of the lake. You feel her grip your ankles tightly from under the surface...and pull you underwater with her. + +You struggle to break her grip, but in moments you are forced under the surface. With a start, you realise that you can actually breathe underwater. What has happened to you? You feel as if you have gills in place, rather than lungs, and that your body has altered to that of an aquatic being. Fins and scales grow down your body, and any prior hunger or fatigue has lessened as a result. You don't know what significance this has, but… + +The two women from before are swimming underwater with you and watching you closely. You see now that their bodies are just like yours, and that instead of legs they have a fish-like tail. Nothing of the sort has happened to you, however, so you are able to keep your legs for now. + +“Come, sister,” the green-haired woman says to you, much warmer to you now. She isn't a woman at all, you realise. A fish? A mermaid? “Come and meet the others. Let us share this land together, all of us.” + +You swim after her, deeper and deeper through the pleasant waters of the lake. More and more of these mermaids appear from around you, watching you with interest and chatting amongst themselves. You didn't know that so many of these creatures were living down here. You thought the entire island was empty of any intelligent life... + +Right at the bottom of the lake, you discover a curious sight. A stone altar of some kind has been built into the lake bed, upon which a human body is tied. He seems to have been dead for some time. You watch as the mermaids surround him in a tight circle, singing in unison. It's almost as if they're singing to his corpse. + +“Come,” your companion whispers to you, beckoning you forward. “You should join in too.” + +Curious about this strange ritual, you stumble into the circle with her. The beautiful singing echoes all around you, and there is an addictiveness about the harmony of voices which is almost ethereal. You find yourself singing along, too, singing to the human corpse strapped upon the altar. It's mesmerising, hypnotic, and you soon lose yourself in the sound... + +You don't know how long you've been singing for, but before long you start to feel a form of energy take place in your stomach. The feeling is not unpleasant. Euphoria washes over you as the energy grows and grows, giving rise to a greater volume of voices than before. Somehow, you and the other mermaids are leeching away the human's composition, converting it into something which will benefit everyone. The other mermaids are feeling it, too. You can see it in their faces. One of them smiles at you, understanding that you are with them, and you can't help but smile back. + +The ceremony soon ends, and a new day starts anew. You spend all of your time with the community of mermaids around you, exploring the lake and occasionally going up to the surface when any new settlers think to land upon this island. Each time they do, you join in the singing with your sister mermaids, and watch as the men have no choice but to come deeper and deeper into the waters of the lake. They cannot resist the lure of your singing, and drown in the process. + +Every week or so, you participate in another ceremony among one of the drowned men, devouring their body in order to give life back to the island. You feel that you are doing wonderful work here. The bodies of these humans can keep you living forever, really. This is a life that you can look back upon without feeling any regret. + +You ultimately remain here with the other mermaids, here upon this seemingly deserted island, feeding upon any explorers foolish enough to try and settle here. The words of your sisters ring true. This is your land. You will not let anyone take it from you. This island belongs to you. + +You live here in contentment, oblivious to the chaos going on in the surface. This island will not fall, not whilst you continue to sustain it with the bodies of fools. + +After falling from a great height, you have found a new place in life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk up to the edge of the lake, searching for any sign of the people who came before you. Strangely enough, the footprints disappear into the water itself. After a moment’s hesitation, you wade into the lake a short distance, curious to find out what really happened here. The water is cool and fresh against your skin, as if keen to make you feel at ease. + +To your surprise, you can hear the faint sound of beautiful singing coming from up ahead. You’ve never heard anything quite like it before. The words are difficult to make out, but you are captivated nevertheless by the atmosphere that it creates around you. Intrigued, you push further into the lake towards the source of the singing. + +You can make out the words a little clearer now. The water comes up to your waist. + + + + +“Welcome, welcome, O traveller of the skies, + +Drink from the water, and burn out your life; + +Our singing shall ease all your worries and fears, + +Come closer, young traveller, for all you hold dear… + + + + +The voices fade away, and you are immediately struck by the impact of the silence all around you. Desiring to break the silence, you wade deeper into the lake’s waters. You haven’t heard the voice of another soul on this isle for nearly a month. As much as you hate to admit it, the loneliness is starting to get to you. It would be cruel to deprive you of such company. + +You push further into the lake, not caring that your clothes are now drenched. From afar, you can hear the singing voices again. The water level comes up to your chest. + + + + +“Rejoice, rejoice, O traveller of the skies, + +No need for emotions, to laugh or to cry; + +Sing with us here in the depths of the lake, + +Naught but your soul and your spirit shall we take… + + + + +A strange feeling passes over you, and the singing cuts out. The water level comes up to your neck, turning into a murky green. + +Despite yourself, you do not feel that you are in any real danger. A low hum echoes from all around you, almost seeming to resonate from the waters of the lake itself. You can no longer see the edge of the lake anymore. You swim forward impatiently, still searching for the source of the voices… + +“What are you doing here?” + +The face of a young woman emerges from the water in front of you. She appears to be vaguely human-like in appearance, but when she speaks, it sounds as if you are hearing her voice from underwater. Green hair flows down her back, and you see scales dotting her cheeks. An aquatic lifeform of some kind, perhaps. You didn’t know there were such people living in these waters. + +“You’re not one of us,” she says, a surprised look on her face. “Why are you alive? How can you possibly survive here?” + +Her questions baffle you. Before you can answer her, a second woman appears from the water, rising up to surface besides her companion. + +“Look, sister,” she whispers, pointing towards you. “It’s not a male this time. The men usually drown themselves trying to hear the song, but she…” She smiles faintly at you, pulling back a lock of matted grey hair to one side. You see the hint of fangs protruding from inside her mouth. “We haven’t had a female come here before. Maybe she could join us. Our song has more effect with greater numbers…” + +“Another sister?” the green-haired woman sounds dubious. “But we’ve never done that before. Is she…safe?” + +“Maybe not, but we can easily change her.” The other woman looks at you curiously. “Traveller of the skies, we are the inhabitants of this isle. Everything you see before you is our property and ours alone. Those who visit our land are drawn into the dark waters and consumed by our sisters and children, giving us new life. We share the energy among us and channel it into the land itself, replenishing it. We do not die. We do not perish. Settlers sometimes come here and seek to drain the resources from the island, but no man cannot resist our song. We take from them what they seek to take from us.” + +She holds out a slim hand towards you. “Would you like to join us, traveller? Another female would be a welcome addition to our circle. If you become one of our sisters, you too will enjoy the privileges afforded to us all. However, I will not force you. Should you refuse, we will do you no harm, but please think very carefully before you answer.” +> Refuse +“You refuse?” The woman looks greatly disappointed, and a sigh escapes her lips. “That's a shame. The greatest wonders await you beneath the surface of this lake. I will withdraw my offer.” + +With that, she turns away from you and disappears into the water with a small splash. Her companion stares at you for a moment and also vanishes underwater with her. You wait there for a few minutes longer, but neither of the women re-emerge. It seems that they have gone for good. + +Curious about her words, you try swimming underwater yourself to see if you can find them again. Unfortunately, you find that the waters here are too murky to see much at all, aside from a few schools of fish swimming near the surface of the lake. The singing has stopped, and only dead silence greets you. You swim around for a while longer, but nothing else happens. + +Feeling as if you might have missed out on something, you decide that there is nothing else here for you and leave the waters of the lake behind you. You've now explored the entire island and have seen everything there is to offer. It may now be time for you to settle here and find your place in life. +> Proceed +Over the coming months, you begin to settle into daily life on this isolated island. There’s more than enough food and resources here to keep you set for life, and there’s more than enough to be getting on with. Having resigned yourself to the fact that you are going to be living alone, you start setting up some personal projects for yourself. You work on cutting down trees to build a basic shelter, although the natural climate here means that sleeping rough isn’t really a problem. Over time, you improve your skills and modify the shelter into a small cabin for all of your needs. + +You never see anyone else land on this island, not even the Gahl’vuhr Sehn. For the most part, people leave you alone. It’s maybe a year before you see even one airship on the horizon, but it doesn’t come anywhere the island and soon disappears out of sight. It’s all right, really. You’ve started to get used to the constant loneliness, day in, day out. It doesn’t really bother you anymore. Besides, you still have a firm grip on reality – you’re not going to start going mad and go around talking to trees. + +Sometimes you lie awake at night, wondering about all the chaos going on at the surface. It doesn’t matter anymore, because you’re so far removed from that now. You wonder about the fate of the captain aboard the airship, left drifting for eternity through open skies. You hope that she managed to find help, but it’s likely that she didn’t make it. + +With no social contact, you seek the company of animals and begin taking in a few of them as pets. Not that you’re going to become a crazy cat lady or something, but it’s better than talking to yourself all the time. You start growing fruit and vegetables, using the resources of the island to your advantage. Over time, you see the potential of harvesting crops and raising animal as livestock, though you still have a long way to go. + +The island never changes. Nobody is living here but you, so realistically the trees should be growing like crazy and the vegetation going out of control…and yet, this isn’t what you see happening. Everything seems to be stabilised in a very balanced order, leading you to suspect that some ulterior force may be at work. You’re not complaining, though. It saves you having to curb the area yourself. + +In the end, you live here alone for the rest of your days, free from the chaos and violence which plagues the surface. You have your pets and animals for company, and there’s enough resources to keep you busy. You have to be careful, though, because it isn’t easy living alone. There are times when you feel ill and still have to do everything yourself. The animals grow used to your presence, until you almost feel as if you’re a part of their little family. They help out in their own little ways, bringing you food and sustenance when you become sick. + +You’re alone, but you’re still happy and feel fortunate that this is how things have turned out. You take each day as it comes and ensure that you live in the moment. + +After falling from a great height, this is the life you’ve chosen for yourself.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For the rest of the day, the damaged airship drifts upon the wind with no clear or definite destination. You face a lonely vigil here, one of the only survivors among numerous corpses. Whilst you’re here, you try to salvage whatever supplies you can, realising that you may be here for a long time if you are not fortunate enough to reach another island. There a few food packages in the captain’s room, and you are careful to consume only a small amount. These might be your only supplies for a long time… + +The captain has not regained consciousness, at least not fully. She mumbles incoherently when you try to rouse her, but you know she is need of nutrition and medical attention. Unfortunately, there are no medical supplies in this part of the ship. Those were lost with Mother Ghared. Unable to wake her, you force some water through the captain’s cracked lips. She coughs and splutters but manages to get it down. + +As you continue to drift, you see numerous other airships passing by. However…they give you no cause to celebrate. They, too, are drifting. The crew members on board are all dead, as you discover upon your first encounter; some have been attacked by mutants or aggressive races as happened with you, but in fact you find that the majority of them have been the victim of violent storms or run out of food and supplies completely. In more than a few cases, you find that there is a literal skeleton crew on board, as evidence by the remaining bones that greet you. + +The world is falling apart around you, and you can do nothing to stop it. You are the only one out here who remains alive. The chaos on the surface must be affecting the skies, too, since many of the doomed ships here have been drifting for some time. How long has it been since your island fell? How long has the world been like this? + +Hours pass, and you begin to feel that you will not survive. Your supplies will not last forever. + +It is almost nightfall when you are confronted by a single ray of hope. At first, you think that your eyes are playing tricks on you. An island can be seen passing close to the airship. + +An island. It seems like a miracle. There could be people there, people who could help you and give the captain the medical attention she so desperately needs. However, the airship isn’t headed directly for it – you will have to literally jump down onto the island, making use of the few tools still available to you. + +As you draw closer, you realise that you do not recognise this island at all. You don’t know if the inhabitants there will be friendly or hostile to you: there might not even be any people living there at all. It could be filled with wild animals. If you choose to disembark, you will not be able to return to the ship, which will drift away and leave you stranded upon this isle. + +Furthermore, the angle at which you are approaching the island makes it impossible for you take anyone with you. You can jump down onto the surface yourself with some difficulty. This will mean that you will have to leave the wounded captain behind, ultimately sealing her fate. +> Stay with the drifting ship +You decide not to risk it. The captain’s life is already compromised, and you still have some supplies left to make it to the next possible island. Granted, the captain may have been a little rude and abrasive to you when you first met her, but she did allow you to stay on board. You can’t help but feel a little responsible for what happened to her. + +The island appears before you, but you choose not to disembark. Before long, it has disappeared from view. +> Proceed +Over the next few days, the airship you’re on continues to drift at the mercy of the wind. You see no other inhabitable islands within range, and have no way of turning the ship around towards the islands you do see. Progress is painfully slow, and you feel sure that you will die here. Your supplies have dwindled down to almost nothing. + +The captain’s condition worsens near the end of the week. You manage to get her conscious enough to eat what little food and water you have left, but she barely eats anything at all. You don’t have much hope for her survival, and every day she seems weaker than ever. A realistic approach would be to leave her to die and save what precious provisions remain, but you can’t see what good that will do. This ship isn’t going anywhere, after all. + +It’s difficult to sleep at night on the hard wooden deck. The stink of the corpses is too much to bear, and you spend hours dragging them off the ship and shoving him over the side. You thought that removing the extra weight would help the ship move faster, but it doesn’t. Nothing works. Nothing you do seems to help anymore. + +You run out of food in the middle of the second week. + +There’s still water. Water can keep someone going a lot longer than food deprivation will. It hasn’t rained for so long. No storms. No rainfall. You almost wish for a storm to hit the ship, something to break the monotony, but right now this isn’t a ship anymore. This is just half a ship, and you’re just half of the skeleton crew. + +Just mere skeletons now. + +You’re getting weak from lack of food. The gnawing pain in your stomach won’t go away, and you don’t want to waste what little water is left. You think about denying the captain water altogether. Someone has to survive. + +When the next week begins, you awaken to see a strange red mist rise up ahead, out of the gloom. You’ve never seen such a thing before, and something about it frightens you. You feel that the airship has entered a part of the sky that nobody should enter, like a forbidden area. You don’t want anything to do with this mist, just want to lie on your bed and clamp your hands over your ears and block everything out. + +You’re so hungry. You’re so hungry and tired, tired and hungry, sick and tired, tired and sick…Does it really matter anymore? Does anything matter? +> Hide in the captain’s room until the mist passes +You stay huddled in the captain’s room, keeping the door tightly shut. You don’t know why, but something about that mist makes your flesh crawl. As you lock the door, however, you suddenly remember that you left the unconscious captain outside on the deck, right before the red mist was about to descend. She’ll be vulnerable to whatever effects it has. You hesitate to run back out there and get her. + +Just then, you start to hear strange noises from outside. It sounds like some kind of wailing, quiet yet piercing, and it's enough to drive you into a corner with your hands clamped firmly over your ears. You start to imagine that some strange force is going to board the ship and break the door down before bearing down on you. Muttering incoherently to yourself, you crouch by the wall and squeeze your eyes shut, hoping that the mist will pass on. + +The air feels thicker than usual. It’s getting harder and harder to breathe. You feel something change in the surrounding atmosphere, something so subtle that you wouldn’t even notice it otherwise. As it is, you’re so busy locked in your own irrational fear with your hands over your ears that you can’t help but notice it. + +Slowly, very slowly, you feel everything start to go back to normal. + +It’s nearly half an hour before your fear subsides enough for you to emerge back on deck. You’re shaking as you crawl out of the cabin, shaking with a mixture of extreme hunger and trepidation. The red mist is gone. The captain’s body is lying undisturbed on the upper deck. Nothing bad seems to have happened. You start to relax, realising your mind must have been playing tricks on you. Time can do that to you. Lack of food, lack of sleep, lack of all those little things you need in life until you find yourself getting delusional and seeing things that aren’t there – + +You walk over to the captain’s body. Her skin is cold and her mouth is open slightly. She is dead. + +There is no way to tell if she finally succumbed to her injuries over the past few weeks, or if the strange red mist had something to do with it. You stumble back from her corpse in confusion and terror, searching for somewhere to escape to. There’s nowhere else but here. The red mist disappeared as quickly as it came… + +That’s not all, either. Something else has changed, something that you didn’t count on. It’s not something to do with you, or the captain, or your lack of supplies, yet at the same time it’s one of the most important things you’ve been relying on up to this moment in time. + +The wind has stopped. + +Desperately, you run over to the side of the airship and look down. Nothing. Nothing but an empty void stretching down to the surface of the planet. No wind. No wind to blow you forward. The airship is no longer drifting – it’s stationary. Static. Your vessel is at a standstill, here at the edge of an endless sky with no hope of salvation. + +You stare out through endless skies, already weakened by lack of nutrients, before sinking to the ground. Your fate has been sealed. The airship is stranded in an uncharted region of open sky where the wind no longer blows, with no way to move forward on here. Without further resources, your situation is now beyond help. The days will turn into weeks, and the weeks will turn into months, but you have no future from here. You are never seen again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Over the next few days, the airship you’re on continues to drift at the mercy of the wind. You see no other inhabitable islands within range, and have no way of turning the ship around towards the islands you do see. Progress is painfully slow, and you feel sure that you will die here. Your supplies have dwindled down to almost nothing. + +The captain’s condition worsens near the end of the week. You manage to get her conscious enough to eat what little food and water you have left, but she barely eats anything at all. You don’t have much hope for her survival, and every day she seems weaker than ever. A realistic approach would be to leave her to die and save what precious provisions remain, but you can’t see what good that will do. This ship isn’t going anywhere, after all. + +It’s difficult to sleep at night on the hard wooden deck. The stink of the corpses is too much to bear, and you spend hours dragging them off the ship and shoving him over the side. You thought that removing the extra weight would help the ship move faster, but it doesn’t. Nothing works. Nothing you do seems to help anymore. + +You run out of food in the middle of the second week. + +There’s still water. Water can keep someone going a lot longer than food deprivation will. It hasn’t rained for so long. No storms. No rainfall. You almost wish for a storm to hit the ship, something to break the monotony, but right now this isn’t a ship anymore. This is just half a ship, and you’re just half of the skeleton crew. + +Just mere skeletons now. + +You’re getting weak from lack of food. The gnawing pain in your stomach won’t go away, and you don’t want to waste what little water is left. You think about denying the captain water altogether. Someone has to survive. + +When the next week begins, you awaken to see a strange red mist rise up ahead, out of the gloom. You’ve never seen such a thing before, and something about it frightens you. You feel that the airship has entered a part of the sky that nobody should enter, like a forbidden area. You don’t want anything to do with this mist, just want to lie on your bed and clamp your hands over your ears and block everything out. + +You’re so hungry. You’re so hungry and tired, tired and hungry, sick and tired, tired and sick…Does it really matter anymore? Does anything matter? +> Stay up on deck to see what happens +You stay on deck as the red mist descends upon the airship. Something doesn’t feel right about this, but you’re too tired and hungry to care. The unconscious captain is lying nearby, just as vulnerable to the mist as you are. For a moment you consider taking her inside her room to give her some better protection from whatever effects the mist might have, but it’s too late for that now. You brace yourself, ready to act if anything untoward happens. + +Slowly, you feel a strange feeling come over you. The pains of your body begin to recede, here within the red mist. What’s going on? The gnawing hunger in your belly is beginning to disappear, along with your fatigue. There is a movement next to you, and you turn to see the captain open her eyes and slowly get to her feet. Could it be that the effects of the red mist are actually beneficial? + +Even if it’s nothing but an illusion, you are grateful for the relief from the constant pain that has plagued you for the past week or so. Your body feels light now, lighter than air, and you feel almost as if you are floating. The captain turns to stare at you, and you realise that both of you are moving upwards. You don’t know what’s going on, but this doesn’t seem too bad. Perhaps you could rise up to a greater height and find an island, where help may be found – + +You chance looking down and see a sight which fills you with horror. + +Two dead bodies lie on the deck of the airship, directly below you. They belong to you and the captain. + +You turn to call out to the captain, thinking to warn her about what’s happening, but no sound escapes your lips. Your face and body is changing, splitting apart, slowly disintegrating…into just another part of the red mist. The same thing is happening to the captain. She opens her mouth in a silent scream just seconds before she, too, is absorbed. + +The red mist marks an uncharted region of the sky, beyond which no wind blows at all. It has one primary, deadly purpose: to leech away the life-force of the poor souls who drift this far away from the sky islands, far away from any hope of civilisation. Your life-force has now been converted into new energy to facilitate the mist, and you exist no longer. + +You are just part of the red mist now, drifting eternally across this patch of sky to prey upon any survivors of doomed airships which come here. You perish here within uncharted territory, yet live on as part of a mass entity, claiming the lives of others who have already given up hope.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With your heart in your mouth, you race forward and shove the captain out of the way in the nick of time. You see her eyes go wide at her near escape. Then you look upwards and see wit horror that the mast is continuing to fall – right on top of you. + +Frantically, you start to move to avoid it, but you are already out of time. You have sacrificed what precious seconds you had to save the captain. Your legs are moving too slowly, far too slowly to avoid the heavy lump of wood which will crush you asunder. Everything seems to move in slow motion as the mast careens towards your helpless body – + +“Fprcf!” + +A shrill cry erupts from the other end of the airship. The mast shudders as an invisible force slams to it, snapping it further at an awkward angle. You can barely breathe as the fractured beam crashes through the deck barely a metre away from you. You’re alive. You can’t believe it. + +You raise your head to see Mother Ghared frozen in position, her hands outstretched towards the fallen mast. Your knowledge of her abilities is still limited, but you understand that this is the second time she has saved your life. The captain is already on her feet, struggling to defend herself from another group of mutants. + +Before you can move, you see Mother Ghared slump to the ground. She seems exhausted by the effort of stopping the heavy mast, and the energy drain is too much for her. You start to force yourself to your feet, knowing that if you spend too long dawdling then you won’t have long to celebrate. She needs help, and fast. + +That’s when you hear the violent splintering sound below you. + +Fearing the worst, you see that the heavy mast has in fact torn straight through the centre of the airship. It is in no condition to fly. The vessel has already been damaged by the attacks of the mutants, and you can only watch in horror as more and more cracks appear, joining together as one… + +The airship breaks apart down the middle. + +You see the mutants react with surprise as they start to plummet along with their half of the ship. Surprisingly enough, they can no longer fly. You’re not quite sure why, but you have a feeling that their wings from before were only temporary. In addition...part of the airship somehow remains airborne. You’re not in a position to question the laws of aerodynamics right now, but you need to act fast. + +Your half of the airship is currently airborne and in no danger of falling – or so you hope. The captain is next to you, slumped in a heap. The other half of the ship is about to plummet downwards, and you realise that Mother Ghared is still on that side. She’s unconscious and has no idea of what has happened. + +You have a split second to decide whether to cross over the gap to Mother Ghared, or stay here with the captain. You have no idea what condition either person is in. +> Cross over to the other part of the ship where Mother Ghared is, which is plummeting towards the ground +You must be mad to think of doing this. Quickly, you leap over the gap and onto the separated part of the doomed ship, which is quickly plummeting towards earth at a deadly speed. Above you, the remaining half remains airborne. It quickly disappears from sight as you fall. + +It’s impossible to keep your footing on the deck when the ship is falling so fast; parts of it are beginning to break up again from the constant acceleration. Gritting your teeth, you force yourself to crawl over to where Mother Ghared is lying. Her eyes are open, and she seems faintly aware of what is going on around here, but she is otherwise unhurt. If anything, she just looks exhausted. + +When she sees you, her eyes widen and she grabs your wrist. “Fljght, Fljght,” she whispers to you urgently, pressing a crumpled scroll into the palm of your hand. The words she speak are not in your language. “Fljght, fljght…” + +Her eyes close as she falls back into unconsciousness. You stare at her in confusion as the ship continues to fall. The scroll she gave you is covered with strange symbols and runes that are incomprehensible to you. Somehow, you think she was trying to give you to a clue. +> Say the word “Fljght” +You utter the incantation, and the scroll glows faintly before disintegrating into nothing. The glow itself has not faded, however, but has spread to the soles of your feet. With a start, you realise that you are no longer falling, and that your body feels as light as a feather. You are no longer in any danger of plummeting to your death. + +Moving forward, you are surprised to find that you can now move in any direction – up and down, too – at will. You have as much freedom as a bird, and can fly through to the air as you see fit. The activated scroll has bestowed this power on you, and you may now fly from here to your heart’s content. + +Sadly, this power of flight is not extended to Mother Ghared. She continues to fall towards the ground at a faster speed, until you can no longer see her at all. You start to fly down towards her with your new-found ability, but discover that you can only do so at a fixed speed. There is no way to accelerate, and therefore no way of saving Mother Ghared before she disappears into the void far below. + +You have no choice but to travel away from here. Fear washes over you at the thought that this ability may actually be temporary. What if you could lose this power at any given moment? + +With this in mind, you turn to fly as far away from here as you can, away from the ruins of the airship far above you. You don’t know where you’re going, exactly, but anywhere is better than this. +> Proceed +For the next few hours or so, you fly across the skies at a mediocre speed. The wind blows through your hair as you travel, and you feel a kind of freedom wash over you that you’ve never quite experienced before. Throughout your life, you’ve been content to remain settled upon your own island, never venturing out into the skies around you. Right now, however, you feel as if you can literally go anywhere. Any island, any port, above the clouds, down to the ruined surface…The sky’s the limit, so to speak. You feel as if you could fly like this forever. + +You’re not going to do that, of course, because you’re still wary that the effect of the scroll will wear off before long. You will have to land somewhere soon, because ultimately you want to find a new island to settle upon. A new home to call your own. A place where you can start again… + +Within the hour, you pass the remains of several islands floating in the sky, broken chains dangling uselessly into empty space. As you approach, you realise that these are parts of bigger islands which have already fallen towards earth. Nothing remains there anymore. They have all suffered the same fate as the place you used to call home. + +It’s some time before you finally see one island which still remains intact. From here, you can see that there’s a considerable number of inhabitants; numerous houses, roads and streets stretch out below you. Why, it looks like there might be a town down there. There’s definitely some kind of community. The question is, will that community approve of you? +> Land at this new island +You touch down upon the edge of the island, a thrill racing through you at the thought of what lies beyond. Immediately, the glow fades away from the soles of your feet and the power leaves you. So that’s how it is: the scroll’s effects last as long until you touch solid ground again. In theory, you could abuse such a power, but you don’t want to push your luck. + +The town before you is bustling with crowds of people and shops on every street corner. You’ve never seen anything quite like this. In fact, you’re not quite sure this isn’t just part of a small city. The diversity of species here is mind-blowing: you see Auvahrs chatting to each other in the marketplace, Tenurs tending their stalls and displaying their wares, Gahl’vuhr Sehn officials marching up and down the streets as if they own the whole place, other subspecies you’ve never seen before staring at the scene like some kind of tourist…You ever see nameless ones like you. Unworthy ones, as the captain called them, but you don’t take to that nonsense. Nameless is what you are. It’s what you’ve always been. + +A large glistening sign at the main port spells it out for you. + + +WELCOME TO MAJERUK + +WHERE DREAMS COME TO LIFE + + +You could definitely settle in a place like this. You love the city. You love the hustle and bustle of the crowds, the countless things to do on every street, the sheer size and depth of the place you’ve found yourself in. There’s libraries, museums, galleries, bookshops, clothiers, governing halls for Gahl’vuhr Sehn officials, various buildings that you can’t even begin to describe…All you have to do is get a foot on the ladder and you’ll be in. + +This is a place which rewards you for doing very little – or, conversely, which rewards you with little for doing far too much. Exchange of goods and money. Economics. The arts. Societies. Meeting halls. Dance, music, sculptures, concerts, religion… + +“Excuse me, ma’am,” a curt voice says behind you. + +All at once, the illusion is broken. You turn round to see three stern-looking Auvahrs in uniform, carrying firearms at their belt. At least, you assume they’re firearms. You’ve only ever seen pictures of them in books before, never having crossed out of your own little island before now. You’ve heard such stories of the city… + +“You are under arrest for the unlawful use of privileges available only to high-ranking members of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn,” the man says coldly. “As an Unworthy, you should not have access to such abilities.” + +At first, you just stare at him in confusion. Abilities? Wait a second. Is he talking about the scroll’s power which allowed you to fly here? Perhaps that’s the issue here. Someone saw you using the flying ability – or sensed it, detected it, whatever – and decided that you’d breached some kind of unspoken law of theirs. + +“That wasn’t my fault,” you protest. “The airship – ” + +“You were caught using a long-distance Flight scroll,” the official says, his tone rather hostile. “Unless you have a very good reason for doing so, Unworthy, you will face the penalty of breathing the laws of Gahl’vuhr Sehn. The island of Majeruk is under the jurisdiction of the Auvahrs of Gahl’vuhr Sehn, and all must abide by our rules. A lifetime upon a prison island will do a world of good for scum like you.” + +Surely, if you were to explain yourself rationally to the man, then he should understand that this is all a big misunderstanding and let you go. Right? They wouldn’t judge you on something like this, face to face. Surely they can let it slide just this once. +> Tell him your story +You see no reason not to tell the truth. Swiftly, you explain to the official the full story of how you fell from your island and how Mother Ghared saved your life, taking you on board the Gahl’vuhr Sehn airship. As soon as you mention this, the men exchange glances between each other, shaking their heads doubtfully, and look at you with greater suspicion than ever. You continue talking about how you activated the scroll, gaining the ability of flight for a temporary basis, but the official abruptly holds up a hand to stop you. + +“I have heard quite enough,” he says sharply. “Your story is an unlikely one to begin with. Whilst there have been reports that many islands have been falling due to the effects of the chaos on the surface, it is inconceivable that a high-ranking member of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn would choose to save your skin. You are an Unworthy. Your life is not of equal worth to a normal person.” + +“That’s not true!” you protest. “Mother Ghared saved my life!” + +“Is that so?” He folds his arms. “And where is Mother Ghared now? Can she testify to this?” Taken off-guard, you start to splutter that Mother Ghared probably didn’t make it, but the man pushes aside your excuses. “Even if you are telling the truth, which I greatly doubt, it makes one thing very clear: no true member of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn would choose to save the life of an Unworthy. If Mother Ghared truly acted as you claim, then it means that the rules and regulations of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn have not been followed correctly. I see no reason to trust your word. Rather, it seems far more likely that you were a stowaway on board.” + +With that, the official turns away and issues a sharp command to the men on either side of him. The Auvahrs immediately step forward and grab you, pulling your arms behind your back painfully. You struggle indignantly in their grip, protesting all the way as they frog-march you in the direction of the main port. Nothing about this is fair! Have you survived your trip from the airship only to be taken prisoner by the same race of people who saved you in the first place? + +“As the presiding justiciar of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn stationed upon Majeruk,” the lead official says in a rather formal tone, “we find you guilty of the offence of using a long-distance Flight scroll, an item used only by high-ranking members of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn. Normal citizens are not permitted access to such privileges, let alone an Unworthy like you. Having heard your story, we also find you guilty of the additional crime of stowing on board an airship under the command of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn, as well as possible contributing to its destruction!” + +You are forced into the back seat of a cramped-looking aerial vehicle, and strapped in tightly with a grim-looking official seated next to you. Two more men enter the front of the vehicle. The engines start to fire up. + +“What’s going on?” you demand, fearful of what they intend to do with you. The Auvahrs are practically treating you like a criminal. You don’t know what they do with such people, because on your island you never had to deal with anyone like that. “Wh…where are you taking me?” + +The lead official barely glances at you. “Prefect, take the Unworthy to Island 39. She is to be classified as a Class 3H criminal of the fourth degree. If she talks at all during the journey, silence her.” He slams the door on you and turns away without another word. + +Frightened about what fate lies in store for you now, you can do nothing but watch as the Gahl’vuhr Sehn drive you away from the attractive island of Majeruk, towards a grim-looking location in the distance. You are strapped in so tightly that you can barely breathe, making escape impossible. The man in the seat next to you is watching you closely, making you feel very uncomfortable. + +Nobody talks. Nobody says a word, not to you or any of their colleagues. The Gahl’vuhr Sehn operate in a professional manner which scares you, honestly. It’s about half an hour before the vehicle you’re in start to slow down. You chance a glance over the side of the vehicle and see an ominous-looking island, surrounded by cliffs on all sides. Nothing about your situation seems promising at all. +> Proceed +You are forced out of the vehicle with your hands tied behind your back, where the officials march you over to a tall, grey, oblong-shaped building situated some distance inland. As you step inside, you are shoved into a cramped, featureless interrogation cell with dim lighting and no windows to see through. Another Gahl'vuhr Sehn official sits opposite you, barking personal questions at you whilst the other men search you for any weapons or illegal contraband. You sit through the whole experience in a kind of numb shock, never having been through anything like this before. + +After about an hour, you are taken to the strip of land which lies beyond. A grim sight greets your eyes. Thousands and thousands of people are locked within maximum security cells, isolated here away from the general public, some of which are suspended above mid-air to conserve space. Men and women of all races, including some mutants like you saw before at the airship, peer out from behind the bars. Food and water are strictly rationed and prisoners are permitted no more than an hour per day at the exercise yard, before being put to work doing hard labour at the mines, located at the other end of the island. + +“What're you in for, girl?” a mutant sneers at you as you pass by his cage. + +You are thrown into a square cell of your own, situated underground. A small plate of stale food lies in the corner, and your stomach rumbles fro not having eaten all day. There should be water here, too, but the guard with you informs you that they can't get fresh water to every cell during the day. You may have to remain thirsty until they find the time to give you a refill. + +“Sweet dreams, kid,” he says nastily. + +The cell door slams shut behind you with a very real tone of permanency. This is your fate at the hands of the Gahl'vuhr Sehn. You have been sentenced to a maximum of thirty five years of underground confinement and hard manual labour, here upon one of the many prison islands which fill the skies. + +Moreover, it is likely that you will not survive long in such conditions. Prisoners who fail to meet their work quota daily are punished severely, and your body does not possess sufficient stamina to bear the torture experienced at a Gahl'vuhr Sehn prison island. Withdrawal of food and water is not uncommon, and many of the inmates are at the mercy of the guards. Females in particularly do not have any protective rights from assault, not whilst they have their prisoner status. Even if you could escape, the island is ringed by cliffs on all sides. You are deprived even of the opportunity to commit suicide. + +Fate has not been kind to you. You will remain here at the prison island for the rest of your mercifully short life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You touch down upon the edge of the island, a thrill racing through you at the thought of what lies beyond. Immediately, the glow fades away from the soles of your feet and the power leaves you. So that’s how it is: the scroll’s effects last as long until you touch solid ground again. In theory, you could abuse such a power, but you don’t want to push your luck. + +The town before you is bustling with crowds of people and shops on every street corner. You’ve never seen anything quite like this. In fact, you’re not quite sure this isn’t just part of a small city. The diversity of species here is mind-blowing: you see Auvahrs chatting to each other in the marketplace, Tenurs tending their stalls and displaying their wares, Gahl’vuhr Sehn officials marching up and down the streets as if they own the whole place, other subspecies you’ve never seen before staring at the scene like some kind of tourist…You ever see nameless ones like you. Unworthy ones, as the captain called them, but you don’t take to that nonsense. Nameless is what you are. It’s what you’ve always been. + +A large glistening sign at the main port spells it out for you. + + +WELCOME TO MAJERUK + +WHERE DREAMS COME TO LIFE + + +You could definitely settle in a place like this. You love the city. You love the hustle and bustle of the crowds, the countless things to do on every street, the sheer size and depth of the place you’ve found yourself in. There’s libraries, museums, galleries, bookshops, clothiers, governing halls for Gahl’vuhr Sehn officials, various buildings that you can’t even begin to describe…All you have to do is get a foot on the ladder and you’ll be in. + +This is a place which rewards you for doing very little – or, conversely, which rewards you with little for doing far too much. Exchange of goods and money. Economics. The arts. Societies. Meeting halls. Dance, music, sculptures, concerts, religion… + +“Excuse me, ma’am,” a curt voice says behind you. + +All at once, the illusion is broken. You turn round to see three stern-looking Auvahrs in uniform, carrying firearms at their belt. At least, you assume they’re firearms. You’ve only ever seen pictures of them in books before, never having crossed out of your own little island before now. You’ve heard such stories of the city… + +“You are under arrest for the unlawful use of privileges available only to high-ranking members of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn,” the man says coldly. “As an Unworthy, you should not have access to such abilities.” + +At first, you just stare at him in confusion. Abilities? Wait a second. Is he talking about the scroll’s power which allowed you to fly here? Perhaps that’s the issue here. Someone saw you using the flying ability – or sensed it, detected it, whatever – and decided that you’d breached some kind of unspoken law of theirs. + +“That wasn’t my fault,” you protest. “The airship – ” + +“You were caught using a long-distance Flight scroll,” the official says, his tone rather hostile. “Unless you have a very good reason for doing so, Unworthy, you will face the penalty of breathing the laws of Gahl’vuhr Sehn. The island of Majeruk is under the jurisdiction of the Auvahrs of Gahl’vuhr Sehn, and all must abide by our rules. A lifetime upon a prison island will do a world of good for scum like you.” + +Surely, if you were to explain yourself rationally to the man, then he should understand that this is all a big misunderstanding and let you go. Right? They wouldn’t judge you on something like this, face to face. Surely they can let it slide just this once. +> Make something up +“There is an extremely good reason for this,” you say. You doubt that these men will believe you if you tell them the truth, considering their low opinion of your species to begin with. Your best guess is to fabricate something which seems believable. “This Flight scroll doesn’t belong to me.” + +“We are quite aware,” the official says fervently. + +“No, no.” You’re not used to lying to people. There usually isn’t any need to do so. “I was ordered by…by Mother Gherad to use it.” + +He frowns. “Do you expect me to believe that, Unworthy? A high-ranking member of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn willingly gave you a long-range Flight scroll? I have heard more convincing tales extending from the back of an anteater.” + +“She gave me the scroll,” you say quickly, “in order to prevent it from falling into the hands…of…the enemy.” What enemy? Who’s the enemy? Lying to people is a lot harder than you thought. “The enemy, that is, of the Gahl’vuhr Sehn. A…rebel army of mutant rabbits.” + +“Rabbits,” the official repeats. + +“Yes, really. Really, really big ones. With axes.” You’re babbling now, but you might as well keep this up. “It was a valiant battle against the bunnies, and they were after the scroll of Flight in order to turn into flying mutant rabbits! They planned to assault this island, thousands of flying bunnies throwing axes at the poor citizens of Majeruk. Luckily, I thwarted their plans and now they will never have their rabbit revenge!” + +“If I can just stop you there – ” + +“Mother Gherad died heroically defending the ship,” you say dramatically, going all out with this story now. Now that you’ve started, you cannot be stopped. “We could not hold them back for long. We had to poison their supply of carrots just to get an advantage. Lettuce, too!” + +“Wait a second,” one of the other men interrupts. “You mentioned…it was a rebel army of mutant rabbits?” + +You nod enthusiastically. “Exactly.” + +“A rebel army. So…how were they rebelling?” + +“Rebelling against the Rabbit King,” you say proudly. “There’s a long, long history of all the rabbit rebellions before our time, going all the way back to Lord Rabbiter McRabbit himself. I will enlighten you now.” + +With a flourish, you then continue to rabbit on at great length, detailing the long history of two thousand years of rabbit-themed monarchs and bloody battles which claimed the lives of their citizens to gain vital land on the sky islands. You don’t quite know how you came up with all this stuff, but you’re going too fast to be able to stop now. The officials actually seem genuinely interested about all of this fictional backstory that you’re pulling out of thin air – or at least, you think they are. They might not care at all. + +“…and that,” you finish, twenty five minutes later, “is the entire account of the rise and fall of the Rabbit Empire, shortly before Queen Fuzzlebunny came to the throne and brought civil war among the nations.” You let out a long sigh, since you’ve been talking for some time now. “Would you like to hear it again?” + +“That was very interesting, but no,” the official says. He is looking at you long and hard. All of them are, actually. You can’t quite tell what is going through their minds, but you’re sure that you must have made a good impression. “I think we’ve had enough of rabbits.” + +“Why are you looking at me like that?” you ask. “Is it the rabbits?” + +“No,” the first Auvahr states. “It isn’t the rabbits.” + +“What is it then?” + +“We’re looking at you like this,” he says testily, “because we think you’re insane.” + +“Really?” + +He glances helplessly at his two companions, who look back at him in just a helpless a fashion. You watch as they whisper furtively amongst themselves, looking rather worried about the situation. Telling a tall tale about the rise and fall of the majestic Rabbit Empire was definitely a step in the right direction. + +Eventually, the official steps forward towards you again. “We’ve decided,” he says resignedly, “that we are not going to press charges to you, on account of you straying so far from the original question that we can no longer remember what we were talking about in the first place.” + +“It was the scroll,” you remind him helpfully. + +“Right. The scroll.” The man sighs. “Look. I’m not prepared to hear you talk about damn rabbits for another thirty minutes. I don’t have time for this. Rules are rules, and the Gahl’vuhr Sehn has to make sure everything is perfect. Especially here in Majeruk. What I’m going to say instead is that your usage of this high-level scroll was some kind of freak accident, because…you do not seem like the kind of person with the mental capability to steal a Flight scroll whilst knowing what you were doing. My colleagues here will bear witness to that.” + +“Definitely,” says the official next to him. “She’s bonkers.” + +“You may remain in Majeruk for the time being,” he says, with long-suffering patience, “but only because I don’t want to stand here for over an hour listening to a crazy girl talking endlessly about fictional rabbits. You’re free to go. Just…don’t do it again, alright?” + +Elated, you smile as the three officials turn on their heel and march back down the street the way they came. Somehow, you’ve managed to get away with it. You’re not sure where all of that inspiration for rabbit-themed history came from, but you ought to write it down sometime. Some people like that kind of thing, apparently, although you’re yet to meet anyone like that in person. +> Proceed +Majeruk promises to be an exciting place for you to live. There are numerous cities and towns across the island, and you take some time to explore your options before choosing on a suitable career path. In addition, the Gahl'vuhr Sehn occupy the whole of the land here and have set in place a number of strict rules for all citizens. After your last encounter with them, you decide not to do anything to annoy the governing body around here. You don't want to cause any trouble. + +The first week is rather rough for you. With no money or resource of your own to trade – aside from the sword you kept from the airship, and that turns out to be worth very little of value in Majeruk – you are forced to sleep rough at night. The Gahl'vuhr Sehn do not allow people to sleep on the streets, which is fine for you because you see no problem with sleeping outside their towns. It's always good to experience new things, but you have to take care in doing so. The wrong situation could see you lose your life at the hands of the local wildlife, which turn out to be unexpectedly hostile… + +It's some time before you finally manage to secure employment as a courier, delivering goods and packages between the towns in Majeruk. The job gives you an advance payment, enough so that you can afford to rent some accommodation in the suburbs of the central city. It's hard work, with long hours, but you keep at it and soon begin to learn the various trade routes going around the island. It makes your job easier, and it's another year before you have enough money and resources to try your hand at another job. + +Every day, you hear news about the chaos on the surface and how more and more sky islands are falling down to earth in a blaze of constant destruction. It makes you think of home, or what used to be home. You think back to all the events that brought you here in the first place, to Mother Gherad and the captain on the airship which saved your life. You wonder if the captain ever made it out alive. + +You make lots of new friends in Majeruk over the years, but still you worry that such a densely-populated island might suffer the same fate as your first island did. What if everything here is destroyed? With this in mind, you take to travelling. You've become quite an accomplished businesswoman by this point, taking on several jobs and even employing your own staff with ease. You're going up in the world. You manage numerous accounts of money, oversee cargo taken on board airships in an organisation built with your own two hands, and you know that you have to expand your horizons. + +Many years have passed, and you have more than enough to purchase an airship of your own now. You travel through the skies, venturing far and wide, but never stay on board for too long. Airships can be dangerous. You become a kind of explorer in your own right, navigating countless islands and assembling a crew of your own. For some time, you pursue this exciting choice of life, but you're not really sure what you're looking for. You know you're searching for something, but you just can't put your finger on it. + +It's several years after that when you finally return to the island of Majeruk. It's the same as always, and business is booming, but you're now experienced enough to put in several advisors who can easily run your organisation by themselves with only limited help from you. Even the Gahl'vuhr Sehn are respectful to you. They still refer to you as “Unworthy”, more out of habit than anything else, but you have a mutual understanding of each other. You a force to be reckoned with. + +Looking at everything you've achieved over the years, you finally realise what you've been seeking. You want a place to settle down. Somewhere to settle down. A home, in nature, but you already have several homes across the skies. You decide to settle here in Majeruk. You think about the future, and seek a husband with which to bring up a family of your own. There is no shortage of men in Majeruk, and all of them are falling over themselves to propose to you. It's sweet of them, really, but a woman of your reputation and wealth can afford to be choosy. + +At the end of it all, you remain here in the island of Majeruk for the rest of your days. You have lived a life filled with contentment, riches and great respute. You consider having children of your own and handing down the family business to them, once you grow old enough to retire, but that's in the future. You could have never predicted that things would work out so well. + +After falling from a great height, you have risen to become a woman of grand accomplishments and great success.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For the next few hours or so, you fly across the skies at a mediocre speed. The wind blows through your hair as you travel, and you feel a kind of freedom wash over you that you’ve never quite experienced before. Throughout your life, you’ve been content to remain settled upon your own island, never venturing out into the skies around you. Right now, however, you feel as if you can literally go anywhere. Any island, any port, above the clouds, down to the ruined surface…The sky’s the limit, so to speak. You feel as if you could fly like this forever. + +You’re not going to do that, of course, because you’re still wary that the effect of the scroll will wear off before long. You will have to land somewhere soon, because ultimately you want to find a new island to settle upon. A new home to call your own. A place where you can start again… + +Within the hour, you pass the remains of several islands floating in the sky, broken chains dangling uselessly into empty space. As you approach, you realise that these are parts of bigger islands which have already fallen towards earth. Nothing remains there anymore. They have all suffered the same fate as the place you used to call home. + +It’s some time before you finally see one island which still remains intact. From here, you can see that there’s a considerable number of inhabitants; numerous houses, roads and streets stretch out below you. Why, it looks like there might be a town down there. There’s definitely some kind of community. The question is, will that community approve of you? +> Ignore it and keep going +You continue to fly through open skies, unable to rest anywhere for fear that the scroll’s power will suddenly wear off. Hours pass by, and still you see no other inhabitable islands or places where you can land. You encounter a few passing airships – active ones, thankfully – but they are only merchant ships and pay you no heed. You dare not stop. + +There are numerous lightning storms in this part of the sky, and you are quick to stay away from them. Many an airship has fallen victim to the fierce and unpredictable weather conditions escalated by the deadly situation on the surface far below. As it is, a single strike would probably send you plummeting out of the sky. You need to stay airborne at all costs. You saw what the surface is like now: nobody can survive there anymore, and the people who remain there now have no future. + +Nightfall comes at last, and you are exhausted from flying for so long in one go. It is too dangerous to keep going in the dark, anyway, so you absolutely need to rest soon. You decide that the next inhabitable island you see will just have to go. You should change your angle of ascent, too, and see what you can find. Up or down? There has to be something here. So many islands have fallen now, so many lives have been destroyed… +> Choose to ascend +You fly upwards for over twenty minutes more before you spy a small fragment of an island, almost invisible to the naked eye from this distance. It seems to have broken off from a greater land mass, possibly another victim of the chaos on the surface. The island looks to be too small to offer you many favourable options, but you’re in no position to pass up the opportunity. You’ve been flying all day long now, with limited food to keep you going, and you’re extremely tired. As things stand, you’ll just have to take a chance on this. + +Hoping that you won’t regret your decision, you disembark upon this small patch of island. Immediately, the glow fades away from the soles of your feet and the power leaves you. So that’s how it is: the scroll’s effects last as long until you touch solid ground again. In theory, you could abuse such a power, but you don’t want to push your luck. +> Proceed +The island you stand upon seems eerily similar to the one you lived upon previously. It seems strange to suggest such a thing, but you feel almost as if you've been here before. You take a few steps forward upon the crisp, yellowed sand under your feet, and walk towards a cluster of primitive-looking huts in the distance. A dusty path runs towards the centre of a peaceful-looking village, and there is hardly any wind here at all. It's all very quiet. + +Unable to shake off the feeling of deja vu, you continue walking up to the village square. It's quite dark now, but you can see lights up ahead. A small group of people are sharing a bite to eat over a roaring fire, chattering away excitedly in good humour. They are not talking in Common Tongue, like the Auvahrs of the Gahl'vuhr Sehn. They speak your language fluently. + +You approach the fire, and the people turn in surprise to look at you. Their skin and body composition is very similar to yours. You realise, then, that they are the same species as you are: they are nameless. For an instant, you feel almost as if you are back home again, but you push the feeling away on the grounds that it must be some illusion. Your home has already been destroyed, and surely nothing can replace it. + +“Hello,” you say to the people here, unsure what to say. + +A man and a woman look curiously at you and smile, before offering you a leg of meat. There is no suspicion or aggressiveness in their innocent faces. It's as if they've been expecting someone like you to arrive after all this time. + +“Sit and eat,” the man says in a friendly tone as you accept the food. You haven't eaten all day. “You look tired.” + +“I am,” you say, sitting down by the fire with him. “I...I'm so tired.” Your words feel slurred and inconsistent from heavy fatigue, but you feel that it's important to get this off your chest. “What...what's the name of this island? Do you have a name?” + +“What kind of question is that?” He smiles. “We do not name ourselves. Names give power to other people. Why do you ask these things? Do you have a name?” + +You shake your head. “I do not.” + +“Then it is of no consequence.” He gestures to one of the huts behind you. “Feel free to use one of the rooms out back. Our brethren will not mind sharing their bed with a fellow nameless one, but we do not receive many travellers this way. Are you passing through?” + +As it is, you currently have no way off this island. You are stranded here, but somehow you don't see it that way. You look around you with tired eyes at the friendly people here, inviting you inside to share their food and drink with them. It looks so much like the village you used to call home. An island so small and seemingly insignificant that nobody else even knows it exists. You doubt that any airships even come this way. It's a tiny part of the world, isolated away from everything else. + +You could settle here. You feel it in your bones. Start again, rebuild, reconnect with people, contribute to a living community, help each other out and start again...The thought brings tears of happiness to your eyes, and you have to look away for a moment. You didn't think this would ever happen, but you feel...as if you are finally home. + +“No,” you answer. “I'm not just passing through. I'm returning home.” + +You see in his eyes that he understands exactly what you mean. This island has not fallen. It is too high above the rest of the world, too isolated in its own little share of the skies to be affected by all the chaos going on at the surface. You hope that things will remain that way. It is true that you cannot predict the future, but you feel optimistic about what's waiting for you out there. + +After falling from a great height, you have finally found your way back home.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You continue to fly through open skies, unable to rest anywhere for fear that the scroll’s power will suddenly wear off. Hours pass by, and still you see no other inhabitable islands or places where you can land. You encounter a few passing airships – active ones, thankfully – but they are only merchant ships and pay you no heed. You dare not stop. + +There are numerous lightning storms in this part of the sky, and you are quick to stay away from them. Many an airship has fallen victim to the fierce and unpredictable weather conditions escalated by the deadly situation on the surface far below. As it is, a single strike would probably send you plummeting out of the sky. You need to stay airborne at all costs. You saw what the surface is like now: nobody can survive there anymore, and the people who remain there now have no future. + +Nightfall comes at last, and you are exhausted from flying for so long in one go. It is too dangerous to keep going in the dark, anyway, so you absolutely need to rest soon. You decide that the next inhabitable island you see will just have to go. You should change your angle of ascent, too, and see what you can find. Up or down? There has to be something here. So many islands have fallen now, so many lives have been destroyed… +> Choose to descend +You allow yourself to fall downwards, reasoning that you are now too high up to see any inhabitable islands. Your eyelids are heavy and your head drops onto your chest from your exhaustion, but you maintain some element of concentration and continue to descend at a normal pace. It might be your imagination, but the air pressure seems particularly high around here. Dark clouds have built up around you, filled with rain which is pelting down upon the surface… + +Thunder rumbles in your ears, and your eyes flick open when you realise that you have stumbled into the midst of a storm! Shaking your head, you start to fly away from the area to avoid the bad weather, but the wind buffets you back and forth and blows a torrent of rain right into your eyes. You cry out, shielding your face protectively, and start to fall through the clouds. + +You’re falling a bit too fast for your liking now, but at least you’re clear of the storm. From here, you can see that you’re actually not too far from the surface where chaos rages. That won’t do at all. You decide to force yourself to slow down, trying to fly back up to where the sky islands are. + +Nothing happens. You continue to plummet, faster and faster towards the earth. Your flying ability is no longer in effect! + +You don’t entirely understand what just happened – perhaps the storm did something to your abilities, or maybe the effect wore off on its own – but what’s important is that you’re now in constant freefall. Quickly, you try to suppress the sheer panic rising up in your chest and struggle to slow yourself down. Something gives, and you manage to lower your speed of descent – just barely. You might survive, but it’s touch and go at this rate… + +You’re so close to the surface of the planet now. You can see people down there. Buildings burned to the ground, screams and crying, the lava flow from an erupted volcano, mass flooding from the rising sea level…It’s not a place where you could ever survive. You need to stay in the skies. You need to stay up here… + +The noise from below gets louder and louder until it becomes almost unbearable. You can no longer stay in the sky, and you’re going so fast that you can’t focus on anything around you anymore. Praying very slightly, you brace yourself for a crash landing. +> Proceed +The impact is tremendous as you make contact with the surface. As luck would have it, the trajectory of your descent takes you away from the mainland and sends you into the ocean itself, your momentum forcing you deep underwater. Waves of pain wash over you, and for several long seconds you cannot move at all. You feel as if you have broken several bones in your body. + +Fighting to conserve oxygen, one truth reveals itself to you: you are alive. You can hardly acknowledge the fact, but you are alive. The wind has been driven out of you, and you are already starting to swallow sea water; swiftly, you struggle to swim up to the surface for air. Agony rushes through your body at every little movement, prompting a scream deep within your throat that nobody will hear. You grit your teeth and keep swimming upwards, your lungs burning. You need to survive. + +You break the surface at last, hacking and coughing as you take in fresh oxygen into your lungs. Air. Fresh air. From here, you can see the coastline isn't too far away. You should be able to make it as long as you tread water and take it nice and slowly. You've survived this far and you're determined to keep going, despite the mind-numbing pain tearing through your limbs. + +It takes several minutes for you to get to dry land, but you can already tell that something is very wrong. You do not feel well. Perhaps it's the effect of swallowing so much sea water, but you are unsteady on your feet and you can feel a surge of unnaturally dark emotions rising up inside you. You do not feel like yourself. Grimly, you force yourself to suppress such thoughts and concentrate on reaching safety. + +The coastline is littered with corpses. + +You stagger forward and see people shambling across the beach. They do not look like people. Humans, yes. You haven't seen a human being for a long time, but you know what a rational person look like and these are different. Their clothes are ripped and torn, their skin covered by a mesh of angry black spots which suggest the telltale designs of disease, and there is a frenzy in their eyes which frightens you beyond anything you have witnessed so far. + +The people have not reacted to your presence. They are screaming at the top of their voices, wielding vicious blades in their hands, and killing each other on sight. Countless bodies cover the blackened ground as far as the eye can see, like the gruesome remnants of some kind of battlefield. It's as if a war is going on, but you can see here that the war is purely internal. + +You see two men beating another to death with a hatchet. A crowd of children have surrounded a woman and are stabbing her repeatedly, all with the same murderous frenzy in their eyes. Three girls are gouging out the eyes of a bystander. A strange haze has settled upon this place, this peaceful village that saw no such violence before. Everything has gone out of control. You knew the situation on the surface was dire, but you had no idea that it had escalated to such extremes... + +Something snaps inside of you. Something wild. It's the same feeling you had just minutes ago, not long after you accidentally swallowed some of that seawater. You turn to look at the ocean curiously for a moment, and can't help but notice that the water is...a different colour than it's supposed to be. It's certainly not blue... + +You drop to the ground, retching, as a new pain takes hold of you. You can't see anymore. Blood fills your eyes and you buckle forward, clutching at the ground in a similar frenzy to the people around you. You hear yourself scream aloud as every thought going through your mind is crushed into nothing, nothing but a maniacal desire for bloodlust. The world feels like it's revolving around you all of a sudden, revolving in a sea of haunted faces… + +There is no need to think anymore. You snarl and shriek like a wild beast, pouncing forward onto the nearest human being to pluck out their eyes and beat their face into a bloody mess. The man is holding a knife of some kind, and you immediately wrest it from his cold dead hands to take for yourself. + +Gleefully, you charge at your next choice of prey. Two girls covered with blood from head to toe shamble towards you, half-blind. One of them is practically dead already, but she hasn't realised it yet. Both of her arms have been savagely torn off, and her head has been bashed in from one side. You slash at her with the knife and blood spurts out of her throat in a red fountain. The other girl lunges at your neck. You stab her in the stomach. She doesn't react. + +A man is clubbing you from behind, but you don't feel a thing. More people are here now. More people, more violence, more chaos. You twist out of your assailant's grip and kill another person, doesn't matter who it is. You're having fun, and every part of you loves it. + +This is your place now. You're part of the neverending chaos on the surface, just another victim of the shambling horde drifting across the planet in your insatiable desire to kill every living creature you see. Nothing else matters, because this is your world. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You must be mad to think of doing this. Quickly, you leap over the gap and onto the separated part of the doomed ship, which is quickly plummeting towards earth at a deadly speed. Above you, the remaining half remains airborne. It quickly disappears from sight as you fall. + +It’s impossible to keep your footing on the deck when the ship is falling so fast; parts of it are beginning to break up again from the constant acceleration. Gritting your teeth, you force yourself to crawl over to where Mother Ghared is lying. Her eyes are open, and she seems faintly aware of what is going on around here, but she is otherwise unhurt. If anything, she just looks exhausted. + +When she sees you, her eyes widen and she grabs your wrist. “Fljght, Fljght,” she whispers to you urgently, pressing a crumpled scroll into the palm of your hand. The words she speak are not in your language. “Fljght, fljght…” + +Her eyes close as she falls back into unconsciousness. You stare at her in confusion as the ship continues to fall. The scroll she gave you is covered with strange symbols and runes that are incomprehensible to you. Somehow, you think she was trying to give you to a clue. +> Say “Fljght, Fljght” +You utter the incantation, and the scroll glows faintly before disintegrating into nothing. The glow itself has not faded, however, but has spread to the soles of your feet. With a start, you realise that you are no longer falling, and that your body feels as light as a feather. You are no longer in any danger of plummeting to your death. + +Moving forward, you are surprised to find that you can now move in any direction – up and down, too – at will. You have as much freedom as a bird, and can fly through to the air as you see fit. The activated scroll has bestowed this power on you, and you may now fly from here to your heart’s content. + +Thankfully, the same ability has also been granted to Mother Ghared. Though unconscious, she remains floating in the air before you. You take hold of her body, which you find to weigh scarcely anything at all, and bring her with you as you fly through the open skies. Perhaps she just needs some rest after what she’s been through. + +With Mother Ghared in tow, you turn to fly from here as far away as you can. You discover that you can only fly at a fixed speed, so there is no way to accelerate. Fear washes over you at the thought that this ability may actually be temporary. What if you could lose this power at any given moment? + +With this in mind, you travel away from the ruins of the airship far above you, out into the vast vast open skies. You don’t know where you’re going, exactly, but anywhere is better than this.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to remain on deck and see what help you can lend to the crew members. Mother Ghared disappears down below, and from here you watch as the helmsmen frantically try to turn the airship around as quickly as possible. Before long, the ship is so close to the storm that pieces of wood are being shredded away from the outside of the hull. You grip the railing tightly, fearing the worst… + +“Brbcf ypvrsflf!” the captain yells. + +There is a horrendous tearing of wood and metal as the storm makes impact. Fearfully, you throw yourself clear from the balcony – and just in time, too. A bolt of lightning flashes down onto the crystal lens where you were standing, shattering it into a million pieces. The crewmen cry out as a violent gust of wind slams into the ship, powerful enough to tear the railings apart. Rain and sleet pours down to accompany it. + +Desperately, you search for somewhere to take cover from the storm. This was a bad idea. You shouldn’t have stayed up on deck in this kind of climate. There’s nothing you can do here – + +Another bolt of lightning flashes down and rips straight through the mast. + +You turn to see the entire weight of the mast fall towards the deck. To your horror, you see that the captain is right in its path, just seconds away from being crushed. None of the mercenaries are close enough to help her. No one is close enough to help…but you. + +Even if you did help her, it’s unlikely that you would be able to get out of the way in time. +> Turn away and worry about yourself instead +You can’t risk saving her. Who knows if you will succeed? Guiltily, you turn your eyes away from the scene. You don’t want to see the results of your inaction. The opportunity has now passed, and may never be seized again. She isn’t going to make it in time – + +“Fprcf!” + +A shrill cry erupts from the other end of the airship. The mast shudders as an invisible force slams to it, snapping it further at an awkward angle. You watch in amazement as the fractured beam crashes through the deck barely a metre away from the captain. She’s alive. + +You turn your head to see Mother Ghared frozen in position, her hands outstretched towards the fallen mast. Your knowledge of her abilities is still limited, but you understand that she has saved the captain’s life. The captain waste no time moving away from the fallen mast and is already on her feet, struggling to defend herself from another group of mutants. + +Before you can move, you see Mother Ghared slump to the ground. She seems exhausted by the effort of stopping the heavy mast, and the energy drain is too much for her. You start to force yourself to your feet, knowing that time is of the essence. She needs help, and fast. + +That’s when you hear the violent splintering sound below you. + +Fearing the worst, you see that the heavy mast has in fact torn straight through the centre of the airship. It is in no condition to fly. The vessel has already been damaged by the attacks of the mutants, and you can only watch in horror as more and more cracks appear, joining together as one… + +The airship breaks apart down the middle. + +You see the mutants react with surprise as they start to plummet along with their half of the ship. Surprisingly enough, they can no longer fly. You’re not quite sure why, but you have a feeling that their wings from before were only temporary. In addition...part of the airship somehow remains airborne. You’re not in a position to question the laws of aerodynamics right now, but you need to act fast. + +Your half of the airship is currently airborne and in no danger of falling – or so you hope. The captain is next to you, slumped in a heap. The other half of the ship is about to plummet downwards, and you realise that Mother Ghared is still on that side. She’s unconscious and has no idea of what has happened. + +You have a split second to decide whether to cross over the gap to Mother Ghared, or stay here with the captain. You have no idea what condition either person is in.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You see what appears to be a mass of black clouds on the horizon, lit up by a blaze of yellow and white flashes. The atmosphere around the airship is becoming increasingly turbulent, and you feel the vessel shake beneath your feet, making it difficult to keep your balance. + +The captain turns to see what you’re looking at and swears out loud. “Just our luck,” she mutters. “Damn lightning storm could put us all out of commission.” Without hesitation, she starts to shout orders down to the crew below, reverting back to Common Tongue as she does so. “Bll hflmsmfn pn thf blfrt! Thfrf’s b ljghtnjng stprm bpprpbchjng thf shjp. Bfgjn fvbsjvf mbnpfvvrfs jmmfdjbtfly, pr wf wpn’t lbst fjvf mjnvtfs!” + +You see the crew members scramble to their positions quickly, working amongst themselves to turn the ship around before it makes contact with the imminent storm. The captain turns to you. “We’re going to try and steer around the storm, Unworthy. It’s a big one, and with such short notice we might not be able to make it. But I’m confident I can get my ship through this. It's rare for a lightning storm of this size to appear without any warning, but...” + +“Is this to do with what's happening on the surface?” you ask worriedly. There was no sign of any such storm until now. The change in pressure was simply so drastic for this to happen naturally. + +The look in the captain's eyes tells you the answer to that. “Unworthy, you’d better get yourself below deck where it’s safer,” she says grimly. “Just stay out of trouble. That way I won’t have to worry about protecting your neck.” + +With that she rushes down the steps, still shouting orders as the storm draws closer. You hold onto the railing tightly as the ship starts to change course, but at this distance you have a feeling that it might be too late. A crackle of white-blue lightning flashes not too far from the vessel, and the wind is getting stronger. +> Retreat into the cabins below deck +Taking the captain’s advice to heart, you head below deck towards the relative safety of the corridors. There’s nobody else down here, as all of the crewmen have gone upstairs to steer the ship clear of the storm. You start to head towards your bedroom, wondering what will happen next… + +A violent tremor shakes the airship, throwing you off your feet. Fearfully, you stay braced against the wall as the atmosphere around the ship becomes increasingly more turbulent. The storm is very close now. Suddenly, you hear cries of alarm go up on deck and the loud tearing of wood. You grab onto one of the banisters for support as the entire vessel rocks back and forth… + +You hear the sound of thunder. It’s right above you. With a start, you realise that the crew have failed to steer the ship clear in time. The storm has made contact. + +The noise around you is now tremendous. Rain and sleet pour in from above, and holes open up above your head as lightning rips through the airship. You cower in the corner of the corridor, frantically looking for cover, but you don’t know anywhere that’s safe anymore. Perhaps you have overstayed your welcome. +> Hide in one of the cabins +Forcing yourself to remain upright, you manage to slip into one of the empty cabins. The noise above is getting louder and louder, and you crouch in the corner, hoping that you’ll be safe here. Surely someone else will come down here to seek shelter as well? As time passes, you see no sign of any other crew members. Before long, you cannot hear their voices anymore, drowned out by the sound of the thunder… + +The walls around you are shaking, buffeted by the force of the storm on all sides. It feel as if the ship is starting to break up, and you start to wonder if maybe this wasn’t such a good idea after all. You don’t feel safe here. Even so, you hesitate to move from your current position. +> Continue hiding here in the hope that the storm will pass +Despite your better judgement, you remain huddled in the corner of the cabin. The whole ship is shaking violently now. Cracks appear in the walls and ceiling, and you cover your head protectively with your hands. What’s going on out there? + +You start to get to your feet, wanting to move to somewhere more secure, but it’s far too late. The opportunity has already passed. The ceiling of the cabin caves in from above, and your body is crushed under tons of falling rubble. You do not live to see what happens next, but the rest of the airship is destroyed minutes afterwards. You perish here on the airship, in the midst of a violent lightning storm.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Forcing yourself to remain upright, you manage to slip into one of the empty cabins. The noise above is getting louder and louder, and you crouch in the corner, hoping that you’ll be safe here. Surely someone else will come down here to seek shelter as well? As time passes, you see no sign of any other crew members. Before long, you cannot hear their voices anymore, drowned out by the sound of the thunder… + +The walls around you are shaking, buffeted by the force of the storm on all sides. It feel as if the ship is starting to break up, and you start to wonder if maybe this wasn’t such a good idea after all. You don’t feel safe here. Even so, you hesitate to move from your current position. +> Move out of your hiding place as it’s no longer safe here +You’re not staying here a second longer. Quickly, you break out of cover and run out into the corridor. Cracks have appeared in the walls and ceiling, and the roof of the cabin caves in as you make it out of there. You’ve spent quite enough hiding from the storm. It’s time to find a way off this ship, once and for all. +> Proceed +Judging your chances of survival on board this ship to be diminishing by the second, you start to search the surrounding cabins for a way out of here. There has to be something that you can use. Airships are fitted with emergency safety measures for use in the worst-case scenario, such as equipment failure or a particularly vicious storm. You're not on the surface, after all. You’re not in one of those strange human ships which take people over water, able to throw yourself overboard and swim away from all the pandemonium… + +Inside one of the cabins near the back, you find a disused aerial vehicle which is fitted with an engine of some kind. At least, you assume that it’s an engine. It looks quite similar to some of the devices you saw in the captain’s room. Buttons and dials cover the inside of the vehicle, and there is only space for one person to drive it. + +The craft is covered with dust and cobwebs and looks as if it hasn’t been used in some time. You have no idea if it still works. If you’re really unlucky, it might even blow up in your face. + +From far above, you can hear the sound of the storm growing louder and louder. You can no longer hear the voices of the crew members from before. A chill goes up your spine as you realise that the airship is being dragged deeper and deeper into the storm. +> Try to operate the vehicle +You step into the vehicle and strap yourself in, before realising that you have no idea how to physically turn it on. With a frown, you examine the numerous buttons and dials on the dashboard in front of you. One of these must start up the machine – if it works at all, that is. After about a minute, you manage to narrow down the correct button to just two of them. They are all labelled, but naturally the words are written in Common Tongue. +> Push the button which says “Jgnjtjpn” +You press the button and the vehicle immediately roars to life. Twin engines fire up and you are thrown back in your seat as the craft blasts through the weakened hull and out the other side, breaking free of the airship completely. From here, you can see that the storm has devastated the ship almost to the point of complete destruction! You can't see a single living soul on board the upper deck, and you have a feeling that both the captain and Mother Gherad must be among the dead. The airship is covered with the bodies of mercenaries and crewmen, and you are lucky not to share in their fate. + +With a shudder, you turn your vehicle around to fly away from the ship. You don't know how to drive this thing, exactly, but the controls seem to respond to your touch and you're just glad to get out of here. Gauges pop up all over the dashboard, none of which means anything to you. Fuel, altitude, energy levels...no, you haven't a clue how any of this works. You'll worry about it later. + +Grimly, you accelerate away from the doomed airship and fly your craft as far away from here as possible, dodging and weaving through the last of the storm. As you depart, you can just make out the violent wrenching of wood and metal as the airship is ripped apart. +> Proceed +For the next few hours, you travel through the open skies within the comfort of your flying craft, searching far and wide for your next destination. The wind blows through your hair as you accelerate forward, and you feel a kind of freedom wash over that you’ve never quite experienced before. Throughout your life, you’ve been content to remain settled upon your own island, never venturing out into the skies around you. Just a few hours in this craft is enough to tell you that there’s much more to life than that. + +Even so, you don’t want to push the limits of this vehicle too much. In fact, you have a feeling that it’s starting to run low on fuel and energy. You will have to land somewhere soon, if only to refuel, but ultimately you want to find a new island to settle upon. A new home to call your own. A place where you can start again… + +You pass the remains of several islands floating in the sky, broken chains dangling uselessly into empty space. As you approach, you realise that these are parts of bigger islands which have already fallen towards earth. Nothing remains there anymore. They have all suffered the same fate as the place you used to call home. + +Continuing on, you eventually do find an island which is still intact. You do not recognise it, but from here you can see that there is a fair number of inhabitants. You can see houses and huts on the ground, indicating that there is some kind of community there. Of course, you have no idea how this community will react to your presence. +> Land at this island +You descend to the surface of the island, which is ringed by a protective metal fence, and land just within the perimeter. Upon first glance, the surrounding region appears to be nothing more than one of many small towns present upon this isle. There’s plenty of land to build fresh houses, and more than enough grassland for animals to graze. It’s quite a pleasant atmosphere. Perhaps this island could be a suitable place for you to settle upon? + +As you turn your vehicle off and step out onto dry land for the first time in a long time, you notice that the people here are staring at you. Much like the captain and her mercenaries, they are not the same species as you. They appear to be Tenurs, in fact – a bipedal species of people who have inhabited the sky islands for generations before you. They are hairless and bald, with three fingers upon each hand, and two separate mouths set into their faces. + +Their appearance is a little strange to those who have not encountered a Tenur before, but your home island was visited by a few Tenurs some years back, and you have some firsthand experience of interacting with their kind. They are quite an intelligent race with a flair for mechanics and engineering. It’s always fascinated you how their skin colour changes with their temperament; they are people who literally carry their heart on their sleeve. Of course, the older Tenurs can control the rate of change in skin tone, but that's another story. + +“You are not one of us,” says a male Tenur, watching you critically. + +Usually, you can tell what a person is thinking from the way they look at you, or the type of facial expression they wear, or their general body language. With a Tenur, none of that is needed. The man’s skin is pulsating faintly between colours of blue and orange, suggesting that he is both suspicious and anxious about your presence here. It would not do to frighten him. + +Still, you’re just glad that he speaks your language, unlike the captain’s entire crew on board the airship, who mouthed off in Common Tongue to no end. + +“I mean you no harm,” you say to him. His skin tone does not change; your words have brought him no consolation. “I am a survivor from a nameless island. One that fell out of the sky. I only seek shelter and settlement within an island which will help me.” + +His expression did not change, and you realise now that he staring at the sword in your hand. You’d forgotten that you were still holding it after all this time. Quickly, you lower it down to the ground. + +“You carry weapons,” he says sceptically. “But I sense no harm from you. Not many nameless ones come to our island. We place importance upon names, so if you stay here, you may have to take one for yourself.” + +You notice that his skin tone is changing to purple. That confuses you at first, until you recall that purple refers to sexual attraction. His eyes are still fixed on you. Well, this is just brilliant. Your first time on another island and the first native boy you meet is attracted to you. + +“We have heard about the falling of the other islands,” he says quietly. “You have my sympathy. We Tenurs are fortunate that we have not been affected by the energy drain which has destroyed the lives of so many. You need not fear such dangers here. If you wish to settle here with us, then we can offer you some protection.” + +“I would like that very much,” you say gratefully. “Thank you.” + +His skin colour darkens to a deeper purple. “I...I have just one question for you before I admit you into town.” You do not miss how the tone of his voice has softened. “Are you here from Gahl’vuhr Sehn?” +> Tell him you are from the Gahl’vuhr Sehn +Upon hearing your answer, the Tenur's skin tone changes to a murky green. + +“Agents of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn are not welcome here,” he says in a low voice warily. “You have made a dire mistake in coming to this island. Leave here before anybody else sees you. My kin will not be as lenient as I.” + +“Who's this?” interrupts a voice from behind him. A tall, female Tenur with two wide smiles on her face turns to face you. “A nameless one. I heard you mention the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn, sister. Do you know what we do to agents of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn?” The grins on her face carry no friendliness at all. “We don't appreciate what you do here. You will not control us, sister. The other Tenurs may bow down to you, but there is no space in the skies for your kind.” + +“Listen, this has all just been a big misunderstanding,” you blurt out, realising things are starting to escalate out of hand. Naturally, you assumed that these people would respect the word of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn, but it seems that you were dead wrong. “I'm not really with the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn. I escaped from their airship and - ” + +Wordlessly, the male Tenur points to where you parked your craft near the edge of the island. He is staring at the emblem painted at the front. + +“Your vehicle carries the symbol of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn,” he states, his skin colour becoming more hostile. “You are no friend of ours.” + +“I'm telling you, I'm not with them!” you say, starting to panic. “I stole it from their airship!” + +To your dismay, more and more Tenurs are beginning to emerge, drawn by the commotion. You hear murmuring amongst them, and more than a few glares directed towards the emblem of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn, in full view for everyone to see. People are beginning to whisper to one another, calling for you to be thrown out from the island altogether. The atmosphere has quickly turned very toxic. + +“Leave!” one woman yells. “Leave us alone! We will have nothing to do with agents of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn!” + +“Get out!” + +“You Gahl'Vuhr Sehn agents are always snooping around. Go back to where you came from! Try taking a trip back to the surface, there's plenty of room now that the humans have killed themselves!” + +“Filth!” + +The crowd of people is rapidly turning into an angry mob. Sensing that it is too dangerous to remain here anymore, you stumble back towards your vehicle as the Tenurs continue to hurl insults at you. You hadn't realised that some races actually hated the name of Gahl'Vuhr Sehn. From the look of things, the townspeople must have had very bad experiences with them indeed. + +“Get out!” the Tenurs yell at you as you strap yourself into your craft and prepare to take off once more. “We don't want your kind here! Go back to Majeruk with the rest of your slime!” + +Quickly, you hit the ignition and fire the engines up, flying away from the island of angry Tenurs. They seemed to be such a friendly sort of people at first, but just the mention of the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn was enough to set them all off. Perhaps you should have been honest with them, but it's too late now. Feeling rather affronted, you take your vehicle back into the skies and decide to look for an island which isn't so aggressive to visitors. +> Proceed +You continue travelling for a few more hours, on the lookout for any landmarks or signs of life on various islands. After some time, however, you began to realise that something is wrong with your vehicle. Although you still have sufficient fuel to take you a fair distance…you are starting to lose altitude. You are falling lower and lower in the sky, moving down in a broad spiral which takes you closer and closer to the surface of the planet itself… + +Determinedly, you try fiddling with the controls on the craft to try and fly back up to where you were. Nothing works. You are starting to fall through the clouds by now, but all is not lost. It just means it’s more important than ever to find a decent place to land. For some reason, one of the components of your vessel appears to be malfunctioning. + +There are numerous lightning storms in this part of the sky, and you are quick to veer away from them. Many an airship has fallen victim to the fierce and unpredictable weather conditions escalated by the deadly situation on the surface far below. As it is, you can barely control your vehicle at all. You need to stay airborne at all costs. You saw what the surface is like now: nobody can survive there anymore, and the people who remain there now have no future. + +You accelerate in another downward spiral and cross through the clouds into a graveyard of broken and damaged airships, long-abandoned by their previous owners or simply left to rot. Many of these are ghost ships, whereupon the crew have run out of fuel and starved to death in their limited patch of open sky. The wind doesn’t blow all the time, after all. + +One of the airships, strangely enough, shows faint signs of life. It is also severely damaged and has a faint plume of smoke coming from the hull. +> Approach the airship +A strong, putrid stench arises from the remains of the airship as you draw near. It’s easy to see why: the deck is covered with a mass of dead bodies, many of which have rotted away completely. Some of the corpses are now nothing but skeletons. You gag on the smell, forced to cover your mouth and nose with your sleeve. It’s inconceivable that anybody could be still alive out here. + +What on earth happened here? Your first thought is that there must have been a ferocious battle of some kind, but many of the bodies show no signs of any physical wounds. There is some blood, yes, but not enough of it to give a concrete explanation. Mass starvation might be more likely, but this kind of airship seems big enough to carry a large number of supplies, and you don’t think that any of these people died from malnutrition. + +There is a crunching sound from ahead of you, and you look over to see a single man crouched in the centre of the deck. He appears to be humanoid in appearance, aside from a third eye in the centre of his forehead, indicating that he is one of the rare subspecies of the sky races. His eyes are sunken and there are black blotches covering his skin. + +He is gnawing hungrily upon the severed limb of a dead comrade. + +Alarmed, you glance from the man to the countless bodies surrounding him. The smell of death and decay doesn’t appear to bother him. He must have been exposed to it for a very long time. + +The man suddenly whirls around to face you, hearing the telltale sound of your vehicle’s engines. His eyes narrow when he sees you, watching you furtively, and he slowly puts down the bloodied limb that he was eating. Three more skeletons are lying behind him. You have a feeling that he is responsible for all the bones in sight. How long has this man been feeding off the flesh of the dead? + +“Good day,” he calls out to you in a surprisingly jovial fashion. + +You’re not quite sure how to respond. This cannibal is behaving as if you have simply strolled into his house for a brief chat. Every instinct you have screams at you to get as far away from this place as you possibly can. + +“I have not had visitors for some time,” the man says. He beckons to you with one skinny finger, and you can see the bones through his skin. “Come aboard. Dine with me.” +> Come aboard as he requests +With extreme caution, you bring your vehicle up to the edge of the airship and climb aboard. This man looks dangerous, and you feel as if any moment he's going to suddenly snap and lunge at you to consume your flesh for himself. Nobody could possibly be so calm munching upon the flesh of the dead. You hold your sword out in front of you and keep your distance from him. + +“You need not fear me,” he says. The sight of your weapon does not appear to worry him. “I have no intention of feeding on you, girl. There is more than enough food to go on already.” He nods towards the mound of rotting carcasses piled up across the ship. + +You gag on the smell, trying not to breathe. “What happened here?” you demand. “Are you responsible for all this?” + +He laughs shortly and takes another bite out of the severed arm at his feet, chewing slowly. “Unlikely. A third of the crew had already died before they let me out of the brig.” The man gestures at the black spots covering his body. “Worked it out yet? It's a disease. I contracted it from one of the islands to the south, whilst on an exploration mission for the captain. Itches like hell.” + +“And yet you're still alive.” + +The man smiles. “That's the thing. I'm just the carrier, but I suffer no ill-effects apart from...what you see here, but...it's very, very contagious. The rest of the crew received a fatal dose of the infection as soon as I returned to the ship. It attacks the vital organs, you see. Shuts them down, one by one. Body stops working. You hardly know it's happening to you at all until the starvation starts settling in. You live a long time, but you're...not really living anymore...” + +He licks his cracked lips. “You asked me if I was responsible. Take a wild guess.” + +You stare at him for a few moments, sitting here surrounded by bodies. The bodies of people who died as a result of the disease he brought on board. Slowly, the real horror of his words washes over you, and you start to back away. Have you been infected, too, just by coming on board this ship? + +“Oh, don't worry,” the man says reassuringly. “I haven't infected you. Actually, I can't. The virus itself isn't active anymore. I think it's to do with the amount of dead tissue that I've taken into my body lately...but it's fine now. I can feel it. Doesn't get rid of the black spots though.” He rubs at his cheeks self-consciously. “Still itches.” + +You don't want to trust a single thing he says. Your life could be in danger, just by standing here talking to him. Is the virus spread through the air? You shuffle back towards your vehicle, not wanting to have anything more to do with this...this cannibal. + +“Why did you invite me on board?” you ask quietly. “Did you really think I wanted to hear your life story?” + +“No,” he said simply. “I want you to do something for me.” The man gets to his feet, and you tense unconsciously. “I've been here for so long, feeding off the dead. Too long. I want you to get me out of here. That vehicle of yours can support another passenger, so long as you don't go too fast.” + +He takes another step towards you, eyes burning into yours. “I don't weigh much. Not anymore. I want you...to take me with you. You're a wanderer too, girl. You're trying to survive. I...can help you.” +> Allow him to ride on the back of your vehicle +You must be crazy to even consider allowing this disease-ridden, filthy cannibal on the back of your vehicle, but part of you is curious about his offer of help. How could he possibly help you? You watch him very closely as he climbs onto the back of the craft, but the man shows no aggression to you at all. It's difficult to tell what his motivations are, but you know that he must have a reason. + +“One wrong move,” you tell him, “and I'm throwing you off into open sky.” + +He doesn't seem to be worried by that. “You're looking for somewhere to go,” he says. Slowly, the man lifts his arm up and points in a specific direction above you, roughly to the northwest. “You...should go that way, I think...” + +You stare at him in disbelief for a moment, wondering what he's playing at. He surely didn't come along just to give you directions. Besides, you've been driving for hours and haven't seen any signs of inhabitable islands at all. It's worth a short, though, and might be better than just drifting through the skies without knowing where you're going. + +Your vessel is still losing altitude steadily, and that worries you. You don't want to find yourself getting too close to the surface. Nevertheless, you manage to gain some height by pushing the levers on the dashboard as far as they can go, adding an extra boost to the engines and burning more fuel than usual. This had better work. The craft shifts upwards at a steep angle, and you lean back on your seat; the cannibal behind you lets out a cry of alarm as he is almost jolted off the vessel into the void. + +“What was that for?” he demands, clutching onto the back of the vehicle with both hands and holding on for dear life. “You almost threw me off!” + +“This craft is nearly out of energy,” you say. “There's something with the altitude on this thing...” + +You climb steadily for about fifteen minutes, breaking through a new layer of clouds. At once, you spy a small fragment of an island, almost invisible to the naked eye from this distance. It seems to have broken off from a greater land mass, possibly the victim of the chaos on the surface. You almost missed it from here. + +The island looks to be too small to offer you many favourable options, but you’re in no position to pass up the opportunity. Your vehicle is in dire need of maintenance, since you don't know how much longer you can keep it airborne. Only skill and luck have managed to keep it going for so long up to now. As far as provisions go, you've had limited food to keep you going, and you’re extremely tired. As things stand, you’ll just have to take a chance on this. + +Hoping that you won’t regret your decision, you disembark upon this small patch of island. Hopefully there's some kind of intelligent life here, and if you're really fortunate you might be able to find someone who can fix your vessel. Perhaps… + +There is a roar of engines behind you. + +You whirl around to see that the man who guided you here has seized control of the aerial vehicle and is driving away from the island, almost straight down. With a yell, you dart forward to confront the cannibal, but he has already disappeared below. You're never going to see it again. He has effectively stranded you here in the middle of nowhere. + +With little choice left to you, you decide to investigate the tiny island around you. Perhaps you can make the best of a bad situation.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With extreme caution, you bring your vehicle up to the edge of the airship and climb aboard. This man looks dangerous, and you feel as if any moment he's going to suddenly snap and lunge at you to consume your flesh for himself. Nobody could possibly be so calm munching upon the flesh of the dead. You hold your sword out in front of you and keep your distance from him. + +“You need not fear me,” he says. The sight of your weapon does not appear to worry him. “I have no intention of feeding on you, girl. There is more than enough food to go on already.” He nods towards the mound of rotting carcasses piled up across the ship. + +You gag on the smell, trying not to breathe. “What happened here?” you demand. “Are you responsible for all this?” + +He laughs shortly and takes another bite out of the severed arm at his feet, chewing slowly. “Unlikely. A third of the crew had already died before they let me out of the brig.” The man gestures at the black spots covering his body. “Worked it out yet? It's a disease. I contracted it from one of the islands to the south, whilst on an exploration mission for the captain. Itches like hell.” + +“And yet you're still alive.” + +The man smiles. “That's the thing. I'm just the carrier, but I suffer no ill-effects apart from...what you see here, but...it's very, very contagious. The rest of the crew received a fatal dose of the infection as soon as I returned to the ship. It attacks the vital organs, you see. Shuts them down, one by one. Body stops working. You hardly know it's happening to you at all until the starvation starts settling in. You live a long time, but you're...not really living anymore...” + +He licks his cracked lips. “You asked me if I was responsible. Take a wild guess.” + +You stare at him for a few moments, sitting here surrounded by bodies. The bodies of people who died as a result of the disease he brought on board. Slowly, the real horror of his words washes over you, and you start to back away. Have you been infected, too, just by coming on board this ship? + +“Oh, don't worry,” the man says reassuringly. “I haven't infected you. Actually, I can't. The virus itself isn't active anymore. I think it's to do with the amount of dead tissue that I've taken into my body lately...but it's fine now. I can feel it. Doesn't get rid of the black spots though.” He rubs at his cheeks self-consciously. “Still itches.” + +You don't want to trust a single thing he says. Your life could be in danger, just by standing here talking to him. Is the virus spread through the air? You shuffle back towards your vehicle, not wanting to have anything more to do with this...this cannibal. + +“Why did you invite me on board?” you ask quietly. “Did you really think I wanted to hear your life story?” + +“No,” he said simply. “I want you to do something for me.” The man gets to his feet, and you tense unconsciously. “I've been here for so long, feeding off the dead. Too long. I want you to get me out of here. That vehicle of yours can support another passenger, so long as you don't go too fast.” + +He takes another step towards you, eyes burning into yours. “I don't weigh much. Not anymore. I want you...to take me with you. You're a wanderer too, girl. You're trying to survive. I...can help you.” +> Refuse and drive away from here as quickly as you can +The sight of this cannibal gorging himself upon the bodies of his dead comrades sickens you to no end. You're not staying here a second longer. Without hesitation, you strap yourself back into your vehicle and fire up the engines, speeding as far away from the airship as you can. You can feel the man's gaze burn into your back as you depart. +> Proceed +You continue to fly forward for about an hour, mindful that your craft is now losing altitude at a rapid pace. The gauges on the dashboard are showing warning signs, but you still don’t understand what they mean. Power? Are you losing power now? You still haven’t seen a single island since the last one, and there’s nowhere for you to land at all… + +The vehicle falls through the clouds, and you realise you are getting dangerously close to the surface. No. No, you can’t go this way. You’ve already seen the kind of chaos that’s happening down there. You saw every little part of it with the captain on the airship. Your place is up in the sky, among an island where you belong… + +Your vessel runs out of power, and now you are veering towards the rocky ground below at a deadly speed. Frantically, you try every button and dial which makes any kind of sense. Anything. There has to be something which can slow down your descent. This isn’t what you wanted at all. Parachutes? Destabilisation of air pressure? No, of course not, of course this type of vehicle isn’t designed for going anywhere near the surface… + +You’re so close to the surface of the planet now. You can see people down there. Buildings burned to the ground, screams and crying, the lava flow from an erupted volcano, mass flooding from the rising sea level…It’s not a place where you could ever survive. You need to stay in the skies. You need to stay up here… + +The noise from below gets louder and louder until it becomes almost unbearable. Your vehicle is not going to stop. Praying very slightly, you brace yourself for a crash landing. +> Proceed +The impact is tremendous sending multiple shockwaves through your vehicle as it crashes into the ground, continuing forward for several more metres before coming to a grinding halt. Waves of pain wash over you, and for several long seconds you cannot move at all. You feel as if you have broken several bones in your body. Smoke billows out from the front of your vehicle, and you see that the exterior has been completely ripped apart. At the same time, it has cushioned the blow for you. + +You are alive. You can hardly acknowledge the fact, but you are alive. Sparks fly from the dashboard, igniting another smaller fire within the interior, and you force yourself to get to your feet. Agony rushes through your body at every little movement, prompting a scream from your throat. You grit your teeth and keep moving. You need to survive. + +You manage to force open the door. It's so badly damaged from the crash that it practically falls off its hinges. You can hear the screams from here. + +The ground is blackened and burnt, and not because of the impact of your arrival. No, it was already like this. You have landed at the edge of what used to be a peaceful village. Buildings lie in ruins, farm animals lie dead on their side or half-devoured, and any crops have long since been the victim of multiple fires which raged here. + +There are people around you. + +They do not look like people. Humans, yes. You haven't seen a human being for a long time, but you know what a rational person look like and these are different from that. Their clothes are ripped and torn, their skin covered by a mesh of angry black spots which suggest the telltale designs of disease, and there is a frenzy in their eyes which frightens you beyond anything you have witnessed so far. + +The people around you have not reacted to your crash landing. They are screaming at the top of their voices, wielding vicious blades in their hands, and killing each other on sight. Countless corpses litter the blackened ground as far as the eye can see, like the gruesome remnants of some kind of battlefield. It's as if a war is going on, but you can see here that the war is purely internal. + +You see two men beating another to death with a hatchet. A crowd of children have surrounded a woman and are stabbing her repeatedly, all with the same murderous frenzy in their eyes. Three girls are gouging out the eyes of a bystander. A strange haze has settled upon this place, this peaceful village that saw no such violence before. Everything has gone out of control. You knew the situation on the surface was dire, but you had no idea that it had escalated to such extremes... + +Desperately, you run for the safety of your aerial vehicle, even though there is no chance of getting it off the ground anymore. You can't take this. This is not an atmosphere in which you can survive. The people around you do not look as if they have eaten for days, a fact which hardly seems to bother them as they repeatedly murder each other on the spot with little regard as to the consequences. You are stranded on the surface of a world gone insane, and little hope remains to you at all. + +You limp forward a few more steps before the pressure on your broken leg sends you crashing to the ground. The pain flares up anew, and you claw at the dirt around you. Your hands grasp at the morbid remains of a grinning human skull. + +The humans turn around at the noise of your fall and shamble forward slowly, before charging towards you in a frenzy of bloodlust. All of them are already covered by vicious cuts and wounds which would usually kill a normal person, but these people do not seem to notice their injuries. They are far too gone. No semblance of reason remains in their minds. Not anymore. + +The last thing you see is the irrational hatred and rage burning in their eyes, before your body is hacked to pieces by the inhabitants of the surface. Your screams are lost in a storm of mindless insanity which has already engulfed everything around you, mind and soul. You perish here, upon arrival.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You descend to the surface of the island, which is ringed by a protective metal fence, and land just within the perimeter. Upon first glance, the surrounding region appears to be nothing more than one of many small towns present upon this isle. There’s plenty of land to build fresh houses, and more than enough grassland for animals to graze. It’s quite a pleasant atmosphere. Perhaps this island could be a suitable place for you to settle upon? + +As you turn your vehicle off and step out onto dry land for the first time in a long time, you notice that the people here are staring at you. Much like the captain and her mercenaries, they are not the same species as you. They appear to be Tenurs, in fact – a bipedal species of people who have inhabited the sky islands for generations before you. They are hairless and bald, with three fingers upon each hand, and two separate mouths set into their faces. + +Their appearance is a little strange to those who have not encountered a Tenur before, but your home island was visited by a few Tenurs some years back, and you have some firsthand experience of interacting with their kind. They are quite an intelligent race with a flair for mechanics and engineering. It’s always fascinated you how their skin colour changes with their temperament; they are people who literally carry their heart on their sleeve. Of course, the older Tenurs can control the rate of change in skin tone, but that's another story. + +“You are not one of us,” says a male Tenur, watching you critically. + +Usually, you can tell what a person is thinking from the way they look at you, or the type of facial expression they wear, or their general body language. With a Tenur, none of that is needed. The man’s skin is pulsating faintly between colours of blue and orange, suggesting that he is both suspicious and anxious about your presence here. It would not do to frighten him. + +Still, you’re just glad that he speaks your language, unlike the captain’s entire crew on board the airship, who mouthed off in Common Tongue to no end. + +“I mean you no harm,” you say to him. His skin tone does not change; your words have brought him no consolation. “I am a survivor from a nameless island. One that fell out of the sky. I only seek shelter and settlement within an island which will help me.” + +His expression did not change, and you realise now that he staring at the sword in your hand. You’d forgotten that you were still holding it after all this time. Quickly, you lower it down to the ground. + +“You carry weapons,” he says sceptically. “But I sense no harm from you. Not many nameless ones come to our island. We place importance upon names, so if you stay here, you may have to take one for yourself.” + +You notice that his skin tone is changing to purple. That confuses you at first, until you recall that purple refers to sexual attraction. His eyes are still fixed on you. Well, this is just brilliant. Your first time on another island and the first native boy you meet is attracted to you. + +“We have heard about the falling of the other islands,” he says quietly. “You have my sympathy. We Tenurs are fortunate that we have not been affected by the energy drain which has destroyed the lives of so many. You need not fear such dangers here. If you wish to settle here with us, then we can offer you some protection.” + +“I would like that very much,” you say gratefully. “Thank you.” + +His skin colour darkens to a deeper purple. “I...I have just one question for you before I admit you into town.” You do not miss how the tone of his voice has softened. “Are you here from Gahl’vuhr Sehn?” +> Deny that you have anything to do with the Gahl’vuhr Sehn +“I promise you that I have nothing to do with the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn,” you tell him in a sincere tone of voice. Even as you speak, you realise that the vehicle you took from the airship has the telltale emblem of the Gahl'Vuhr painted on its front, and hope that the Tenur does not think to look. You hold his gaze, mindful of his current temperament. “Can you offer me shelter today upon this island? It would be nice to have someone show me around.” + +You play upon his insecurities and any remaining doubt vanishes from his face. He smiles with both mouths. “Of course,” he says, extending one hand towards you. “Come this way. I would be happy to be your guide for today.” You take his hand, and notice the colour of his skin tone fluctuate ever so slightly. “Whilst we walk, perhaps I can tell you a little about the history of this island. Our ancestors first colonised this region of the skies over three hundred and fifty years ago...” + +He clearly likes to talk and you spend some time getting acquainted with the Tenur male, who seems quite smitten with you. You're not sure that you find Tenurs particularly attractive in return – they do have two mouths in their head, after all – but you are keen to take advantage of his feelings. You decide not to risk going back to your vehicle and instead remain with your guide for the rest of the day. + +One thing leads to another, and you start making enquiries about possible lodging and settlement upon the island. You soon learn that the Tenur man can put you in touch with various contacts in town. Money is no problem here; rather, Tenurs value work and resources to trade rather than currency, and you work to secure a steady job for yourself. The island is in need of miners, couriers and helpers for building work and you soon find an available position. + +After that, the rest of the week passes quite quickly. You become close friends with the Tenur man and become acquainted with many people in his circle, as well as other Tenurs at your place of employment. A settlement has been reached. Before the end of the week, you even procure a name for yourself so as to fit into Tenurian society. Annabel. That's what you call yourself now. Annabel. It has a nice ring to it, and you refuse to answer to anything but that. Nobody can call you Unworthy anymore. + +An entire month passes, and you find that you are enjoying month here with the Tenurs. The vehicle you used to travel here is found smashed up just a week after that, turned into scrap metal. Apparently, the locals here really don't like the Gahl'Vuhr Sehn. It's a good thing you didn't associate yourself with the organisation, because the people here seem so friendly otherwise. + +Months turn into years, and you soon forget about the chaos happening on the surface far below. There's nothing to fear here. There is frequent news about the other islands which have fallen, but the Tenurs are a proud people and often talk about how the humans have destroyed themselves. It's nothing for you to be concerned about, really, so long as that kind of destruction doesn't affect your daily life. + +You amass enough resources to improve your place of residence, and even start moving in with a few Tenur males who are interested in you. In fact, you become quite popular upon this island. You spend your resources wisely and save when you can. You have much to look forward to. You start to think about the future, about marriage and children and what prospects you have for them upon this island. The future is bright. This island is not going to fall, after all. The people here have amassed enough energy and resources to keep it going for a long, long time. + +You end up settling permanently upon the Tenurian island, content with the life you lead right now. Not a day goes by where you regret your decision. Sometimes you gaze up into the sky and wonder about the crew of the airship that saved you, about the captain and Mother Ghared. They probably didn't survive. You are glad to live on. + +After falling from a great height, there is no longer anything that can hurt you anymore. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You step into the vehicle and strap yourself in, before realising that you have no idea how to physically turn it on. With a frown, you examine the numerous buttons and dials on the dashboard in front of you. One of these must start up the machine – if it works at all, that is. After about a minute, you manage to narrow down the correct button to just two of them. They are all labelled, but naturally the words are written in Common Tongue. +> Push the button which says “Sflf-dfstrvct” +As soon as you push the button, the entire dashboard lights up. Alarmed, you freeze in your seat as the controls start to glow faintly. A few seconds later, the vehicle explodes in a great ball of fire, taking you with it! You have initiated the self-destruct sequence set into the craft, installed by the Auvahrs for use in dire emergencies, and your death is instantaneous. You perish here upon the airship, trying to escape.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Judging your chances of survival on board this ship to be diminishing by the second, you start to search the surrounding cabins for a way out of here. There has to be something that you can use. Airships are fitted with emergency safety measures for use in the worst-case scenario, such as equipment failure or a particularly vicious storm. You're not on the surface, after all. You’re not in one of those strange human ships which take people over water, able to throw yourself overboard and swim away from all the pandemonium… + +Inside one of the cabins near the back, you find a disused aerial vehicle which is fitted with an engine of some kind. At least, you assume that it’s an engine. It looks quite similar to some of the devices you saw in the captain’s room. Buttons and dials cover the inside of the vehicle, and there is only space for one person to drive it. + +The craft is covered with dust and cobwebs and looks as if it hasn’t been used in some time. You have no idea if it still works. If you’re really unlucky, it might even blow up in your face. + +From far above, you can hear the sound of the storm growing louder and louder. You can no longer hear the voices of the crew members from before. A chill goes up your spine as you realise that the airship is being dragged deeper and deeper into the storm. +> Decide not to risk it and continue searching for another way out +You continue searching through the other cabins for any alternative methods of escape. The ship is shaking rather violently by now. Within minutes, cracks begin to appear in the walls and ceiling, until you realise that the damage to the vessel is more serious than you thought. Frantically, you dash into one of the last cabins to find an escape route as quickly as possible. + +However, you are far too late. The opportunity has already passed. The ceiling of the cabin caves in from above, and your body is crushed under tons of falling rubble. You do not live to see what happens next, but the rest of the airship is destroyed minutes afterwards. You perish here on the airship, in the midst of a violent lightning storm.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The wind grows stronger as you follow the corridor around the corner, towards a set of stairs which lead to the upper level. You’re not quite sure where you are, exactly. You can only assume that you have been taken to somebody’s home, perhaps another faraway settlement, but you must surely be a long way from home. At least, where your home used to be. It doesn’t explain the presence of the mutant in your room, however, so you can only hope that your hosts are not unpleasant company. + +You climb up the stairs to find yourself...staring out across open skies. Clouds can be seen on the horizon, clustered in a never-ending sea of blue which surrounds you for miles and miles as far as the eye can see… + +This is no ordinary residence. This is no house. You’re not even on ground level. You are standing on the upper deck of a fully functioning airship! No wonder the wind was so strong up here: you must be hundreds of metres above sea level... + +You’ve never been on an airship before, but you have seen plenty of them at the island where you lived all your life. Some sky races use these aerial vessels to transport goods and cargo between islands, others simply for transporting passengers. However, they can be slow and unwieldy to operate, and they are not especially durable; a fierce lightning storm can easily put an airship out of commission. For this reason, airships are usually designed for short voyages with a minimum of passengers. + +It’s like something out of a dream. A real airship. You don’t know where this one is headed, but it has to be somewhere better than where you came from. Where do you want to go, after all? No, the bigger question is – what happened on the surface of the land far below? What prompted your island to fall in the first place? + +As you gaze out thoughtfully across the open skies, there are footsteps behind you. You turn to see a young woman with long red hair cascading across her shoulders. There is a hint of recognition in her green eyes as she looks at you. + +“Vnwprthy,” she says in a clear voice. “Ypv brf thf Vnwprthy.” She beckons to you with one finger. “Cpmf. Cpmf wjth mf. Thf Cbptbjn wbnts tp spfbk tp ypv.” + +Without another word, she turns on her heel and walks across the deck into another section of the airship. You do not understand her words, but it seems that she wants you to follow her. +> Decide not to and go back downstairs +You decide not to trust the woman and retreat back down the stairs. She is already several steps ahead and does not notice that you are not following her until you are well out of sight. Quickly, you decide to return to the corridor below and head to the right, where you heard the voices before. +> Proceed +You follow the corridor for some time as the voices become more distinct. They sound rather jovial and cheerful in nature; foreign, too, because they are speaking in a language that you do not understand. It should not be surprising at that, since there are many different varieties of races which populate the skies, each of their own language and culture. Having never left the relative comfort of your own island before, you are unacquainted with the language of any other species. + +At the end of the corridor is a large room filled with uniformed men and what you assume to be soldiers. Mercenaries, more likely, from their get-up. Large groups of them are gathered around each table, drinking from mugs and chattering to one another at great volume. Is this some kind of bar, perhaps? It seems a little rough and rowdy for your taste. + +You look around and see that the place is not in good condition. Furthermore, none of the men in this room are human. Of course, neither are you, but you do not recognise their kind. Their skin colour varies from pearly-white to a pale purple, and many of them appear to sport partial reptilian features. Are these people really your rescuers? From the way they are looking at you now, you are inclined to doubt it… + +“Vnwprthy!” one man shouts, as you step into the room. His gaze is fixed upon you steadily. “Jt’s thf Vnwprthy! Shf’s vp bt lbst.” + +Self-conscious about the sudden attention, you automatically tense yourself, but the mercenaries here do not seem necessarily aggressive. All of them are armed to the teeth with various edged weapons and crossbows which are slung across their backs, but even so they appear to be regarding you with genuine curiosity. Perhaps they are just as fascinated by your unique appearance as you are by theirs. Low murmuring echoes through the room, with a few of the man shaking their heads at you. You do not understand the significance of such a gesture. + +“Vnwprthy,” one of the men says, standing up and walking towards you. He smiles at you warmly and makes a gesture you do not recognise. “Brf ypv wfll? Ypv’vf bffn bslffp fpr b lpng tjmf. Hpw dp ypv fffl? Brf ypv rfstfd?” + +The brief silence which follows his words suggests that he has asked you a question, and is expecting an answer from you. Unfortunately, you haven’t the faintest idea what he just said. +> Nod your head in answer +The mercenary seems satisfied with your answer, and you sense that you have given the correct response. “Thbt's gppd,” he says in a gracious tone of voice. “Npt mbny svrvjvfd thf fbll. Ypv wfrf pnf pf thf lvcky pnfs.” The man sits down on one of the chairs and calls over to one of his companions. “Hfy, thf Cbptbjn wjll wbnt tp sff hfr npw thbt shf's bwpkfn. Spmfpnf tbkf thf Vnwprthy tp sff hfr, vndfrstbnd?” + +“Svrf thjng,” the other man ventures, getting up and moving towards you. “Cpmf pn,” he says to you, beckoning you over with one finger. “Thjs shpvldn't tbkf tpp ljng.” + +You do not understand his words, but it seems that he wants you to follow him. +> Follow the mercenary +You follow the mercenary to the far end of the corridor, towards where a set of stairs lead to the upper level, feeling the wind grow stronger as you do so. Soon enough, you find yourself standing once more upon the upper deck of the airship. It still feels quite surreal, staring out into open skies at such a great height, and you don't think you'll ever get used to this. + +Your guide watches you curiously as you gaze over the deck of the airship, before motioning you forward. Resignedly, you follow him into another part of the airship, through twists and turns in the corridors. As you walk, you pass several more uniformed men who watch you with interest. Only now do you realise that they must be part of the ship's crew. + +After a few minutes, the mercenary leads you to a brass door which lies at the top of a final flight of stairs. There is a sign on top of the door, but you lack the knowledge to read the symbols and runes displayed there. + +"Gp jn," he says, gesturing for you to enter. "Thf cbptbjn bwbjts ypv." + +At his request, you push open the door and enter the room beyond.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You follow the corridor for some time as the voices become more distinct. They sound rather jovial and cheerful in nature; foreign, too, because they are speaking in a language that you do not understand. It should not be surprising at that, since there are many different varieties of races which populate the skies, each of their own language and culture. Having never left the relative comfort of your own island before, you are unacquainted with the language of any other species. + +At the end of the corridor is a large room filled with uniformed men and what you assume to be soldiers. Mercenaries, more likely, from their get-up. Large groups of them are gathered around each table, drinking from mugs and chattering to one another at great volume. Is this some kind of bar, perhaps? It seems a little rough and rowdy for your taste. + +You look around and see that the place is not in good condition. Furthermore, none of the men in this room are human. Of course, neither are you, but you do not recognise their kind. Their skin colour varies from pearly-white to a pale purple, and many of them appear to sport partial reptilian features. Are these people really your rescuers? From the way they are looking at you now, you are inclined to doubt it… + +“Vnwprthy!” one man shouts, as you step into the room. His gaze is fixed upon you steadily. “Jt’s thf Vnwprthy! Shf’s vp bt lbst.” + +Self-conscious about the sudden attention, you automatically tense yourself, but the mercenaries here do not seem necessarily aggressive. All of them are armed to the teeth with various edged weapons and crossbows which are slung across their backs, but even so they appear to be regarding you with genuine curiosity. Perhaps they are just as fascinated by your unique appearance as you are by theirs. Low murmuring echoes through the room, with a few of the man shaking their heads at you. You do not understand the significance of such a gesture. + +“Vnwprthy,” one of the men says, standing up and walking towards you. He smiles at you warmly and makes a gesture you do not recognise. “Brf ypv wfll? Ypv’vf bffn bslffp fpr b lpng tjmf. Hpw dp ypv fffl? Brf ypv rfstfd?” + +The brief silence which follows his words suggests that he has asked you a question, and is expecting an answer from you. Unfortunately, you haven’t the faintest idea what he just said. +> Shake your head +“Ypv'rf npt?” The man seems to be confused by your answer. “Np. Np, ypv're...” He scratches his head and gives you a funny look. “Pf cpvrsf! Vnwprthy. Lvngvbgf...laaa….lan...” For some reason, the mercenary seems to be having a hard time speaking, as if he can't pronounce the word right. “Lan...lang-goo...” + +“Lan-goo-rah?” another one tries. + +He shakes his head, gesturing to you. “Lan...lan-grah. Lan-gredge. Language. Lan-gruage bah...bah-wee-uh...barrier...” The man steps forward in your direction, an inquisitive look in his eyes. “We...we do not...we do not speak your...” He winces again. “Your lan-grah...” + +“Language,” you say helpfully, getting the gist. You try nodding. + +He smiles and nods too. “Yfs.” + +“Yes,” you say. + +“Yfs,” he says, nodding more enthusiastically. Then he shakes his head emphatically. “Np.” + +“No,” you say. + +“Fxbctly.” A nod of the head. “Yfs.” Shake of the head. “Np.” He sighs. “Js hbrd...is hard.” + +“Hard,” you agree. + +He sits down on one of the chairs and calls over to one of his companions. “Hfy, thf Cbptbjn wjll wbnt tp sff hfr npw thbt shf's bwpkfn. Spmfpnf tbkf thf Vnwprthy tp sff hfr, vndfrstbnd?” + +“Svrf thjng,” one of the other men ventures, getting up and moving towards you. “Cpmf pn,” he says to you, beckoning you over with one finger. “Thjs shpvldn't tbkf tpp ljng.” + +You have a very limiting understanding of his words, but it seems that he wants you to follow him.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You follow the corridor for some time as the voices become more distinct. They sound rather jovial and cheerful in nature; foreign, too, because they are speaking in a language that you do not understand. It should not be surprising at that, since there are many different varieties of races which populate the skies, each of their own language and culture. Having never left the relative comfort of your own island before, you are unacquainted with the language of any other species. + +At the end of the corridor is a large room filled with uniformed men and what you assume to be soldiers. Mercenaries, more likely, from their get-up. Large groups of them are gathered around each table, drinking from mugs and chattering to one another at great volume. Is this some kind of bar, perhaps? It seems a little rough and rowdy for your taste. + +You look around and see that the place is not in good condition. Furthermore, none of the men in this room are human. Of course, neither are you, but you do not recognise their kind. Their skin colour varies from pearly-white to a pale purple, and many of them appear to sport partial reptilian features. Are these people really your rescuers? From the way they are looking at you now, you are inclined to doubt it… + +“Vnwprthy!” one man shouts, as you step into the room. His gaze is fixed upon you steadily. “Jt’s thf Vnwprthy! Shf’s vp bt lbst.” + +Self-conscious about the sudden attention, you automatically tense yourself, but the mercenaries here do not seem necessarily aggressive. All of them are armed to the teeth with various edged weapons and crossbows which are slung across their backs, but even so they appear to be regarding you with genuine curiosity. Perhaps they are just as fascinated by your unique appearance as you are by theirs. Low murmuring echoes through the room, with a few of the man shaking their heads at you. You do not understand the significance of such a gesture. + +“Vnwprthy,” one of the men says, standing up and walking towards you. He smiles at you warmly and makes a gesture you do not recognise. “Brf ypv wfll? Ypv’vf bffn bslffp fpr b lpng tjmf. Hpw dp ypv fffl? Brf ypv rfstfd?” + +The brief silence which follows his words suggests that he has asked you a question, and is expecting an answer from you. Unfortunately, you haven’t the faintest idea what he just said. +> Look at him blankly in response +The silence continues for several more seconds, until the mercenary starts to exchanges worried glances with the others. “Js spmfthjng wrpng?” he says to you, a concerned expression on his face. “Djd ypv npt fvlly vndfrstbnd me?” + +A look of realisation suddenly washes over him. “Pf cpvrsf! Vnwprthy. Lvngvbgf...laaa….lan...” For some reason, the mercenary seems to be having a hard time speaking, as if he can't pronounce the word right. “Lan...lang-goo...” + +“Lan-goo-rah?” another one tries. + +He shakes his head, gesturing to you. “Lan...lan-grah. Lan-gredge. Language. Lan-gruage bah...bah-wee-uh...barrier...” The man steps forward in your direction, an inquisitive look in his eyes. “We...we do not...we do not speak your...” He winces again. “Your lan-grah...” + +“Language,” you say helpfully, getting the gist. + +“Yfs. Language barrier.” He sits down on one of the chairs and calls over to one of his companions. “Hfy, thf Cbptbjn wjll wbnt tp sff hfr npw thbt shf's bwpkfn. Spmfpnf tbkf thf Vnwprthy tp sff hfr, vndfrstbnd?” + +“Svrf thjng,” another man ventures, getting up and moving towards you. “Cpmf pn,” he says to you, beckoning you over with one finger. “Thjs shpvldn't tbkf tpp ljng.” + +You do not understand his words, but it seems that he wants you to follow him.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You crouch against the inside of the wall, covering your head as the deafening noise continues all around you. Earlier on, you could hear the cries of the other people as they sought shelter within their fragile little huts, but now there is nothing to be heard but the endless howling of the wind. A chill seeps into your bones, but that is the least of your worries right now. This wall will not hold for long. You may as well be stranded in the middle of the ocean, clinging to a broken piece of driftwood as the storm rages on. + +As if eager to give you confirmation of this, small cracks begin to spread out across the wall where you are hiding. The entire island is shaking, causing the cracks to widen. +> Try to move to a different location +It would be foolishness to remain here. As quickly as you can, you crawl out of cover into the open. Almost immediately, you are buffeted by the force of the wind on your back. You dig your fingernails into the ground at your feet, refusing to let go. You will not die here, not so easily, like a candle sputtering out in the midst of total darkness. You are determined to survive. + +Behind you, the wall of your house collapses and crumbles apart. There’s no going back now. The wind is now fiercer than ever. +> Call out to your neighbours for aid +You raise your voice and let out a desperate cry for help, but your voice is drowned out by the sound of the wind. Your plea goes unheard. In any case, your neighbours and friends have their own problems to deal with. During a crisis of this nature, the act of helping another soul would compromise the safety of another. Nobody is going to help you. This is the reality that you're faced with. + +The wind suddenly picks up speed, and you are thrown off your feet, clumps of grass falling uselessly from your bleeding fingers. You scream as you are flung from the surface of the island, spiralling towards certain death far below…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It would be foolishness to remain here. As quickly as you can, you crawl out of cover into the open. Almost immediately, you are buffeted by the force of the wind on your back. You dig your fingernails into the ground at your feet, refusing to let go. You will not die here, not so easily, like a candle sputtering out in the midst of total darkness. You are determined to survive. + +Behind you, the wall of your house collapses and crumbles apart. There’s no going back now. The wind is now fiercer than ever. +> Inch your way towards one of the few houses still standing +Gritting your teeth, you pull yourself along the ground at a painfully slow pace towards one of the more sturdy-looking houses. You can already see several faces huddled inside the walls, frightened and helpless at what is going on outside. As you draw nearer to them, you see panic rise in their eyes, as if your mere presence is compromising their chances of survival. Perhaps they are simply too scared to move. + +The door, miraculously, appears to be secure. You duck your head down as the wind buffets against your back, and succeed in making it to the threshold. It is then that you discover that the door has been locked and bolted from the inside. The people inside remain huddled together, staring out at you with empty expressions. + +“Let me in,” you cry out to them in desperation, banging on the door with your fists. Your fingers are bleeding from clutching the ground, and you dare not raise your head too far up. “Please. Let me inside!” + +Nobody unlocks the door. Nobody dares to move. + +You are still frantically banging on the door when the wind picks up and throws you off your feet. The people's stares burn into you as you are flung from the surface of the island, screaming as you spiral towards certain death far below…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It would be foolishness to remain here. As quickly as you can, you crawl out of cover into the open. Almost immediately, you are buffeted by the force of the wind on your back. You dig your fingernails into the ground at your feet, refusing to let go. You will not die here, not so easily, like a candle sputtering out in the midst of total darkness. You are determined to survive. + +Behind you, the wall of your house collapses and crumbles apart. There’s no going back now. The wind is now fiercer than ever. +> Maintain your current position and hold on for dear life +You feel that there is no use in moving from here. The slightest motion might give the wind enough leeway to knock you off balance. You grit your teeth and hold on tight, aware that you are exposed and vulnerable, but hopeful that you will be able to get through this. You may be alone, but your strength of will has seen you through many trials in life. You can do this... + +The wind suddenly picks up speed, and you are thrown off your feet, clumps of grass falling uselessly from your bleeding fingers. You scream as you are flung from the surface of the island, spiralling towards certain death far below…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You claw your way towards what used to be your personal residence. The roof has been torn off, the front door is hanging on by mere threads, and the interior has been devastated beyond recovery. Only pieces of shattered wood remain here now. The wind picks up, and for a second you almost lose your grip, but you somehow manage to make it inside. What remains of the wall here serves as a temporary shelter. + +Even so, the feeling in your gut tells you that the entire island is picking up more speed than before. The chains will not be repaired: it is not going to stop. Your chances of survival are slim at best. +> Pick up some of the fragments of wood +You scramble across the floor to where your bed used to be. It is now nothing but rubble, broken into multiple pieces by the pressure of the fall. Most of the fragments are too small to be of any use, but you do find a few sturdy pieces which could be used as a weapon. A weapon? Why on earth are you thinking of weapons now? The realisation comes in an instant: the world really has gone wrong. The crumbling of your island may not be the only danger which awaits you. You need to get your hands on everything you can get. + +The wind is now powerful enough to shred this little piece of wood into pieces, so you hastily tuck it inside your thin tunic for safekeeping. Perhaps it will come in useful later, assuming you have a future to look forward to... + +At your back, small cracks start to spread out across the walls of your house. The entire island is shaking, causing the cracks to widen.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Smoke from the burning city filled the air. Some detest the smell of smoke, others complain that it burns their eyes and throat. For Philip the Second of Macedon, however, smoke only meant one thing. + + +Victory. + + +His eyes stay focused on the city of Potidea. Shouting, screams, and the sound of crackling fire reached Philip's ears, but he did not seem to be affected by it in the slightest. The man was the perfect picture of poise and power. He would never look away from the battle when started, for even the slightest moment. If he faltered for even a moment, then all of his plans could come crashing down. No, he would wait patiently for his field general to come back proclaiming victory in his and Macedon's name. Until then, he would wait here surrounded by his most trusted generals and guards. Philip only ever felt more home in one place. That being his fourth wife, Olympias', bed. He would often switch between the two things. His current battle, and his wife at home, whom, to Philip's delight, was pregnant. A son is what he hoped for, and one sired by him and Olympias was sure to be a boy of the strongest blood. She was getting fairly large at around the time Philip left for his current campaign, and while waiting for victory to be announced, Philip realized something. + + +"Polypias." Philip called out to his general, but still kept his eyes peeled to scene of chaos and destruction before him. + + +"My Liege." + + +"How long have we spent sieging this godforsaken place?' + + +"Around three months, my liege." + + +"I thought so. Prep-" Before he can finish giving his command, a cheer goes up from the burning city. + + +Philip hears him before he sees him. "Victory to Philip! Victory to Macedon!" The man you've been waiting for, the field general, gallops out of the burning city with the city's flag on a chestnut war horse. In his right hand is a spear, and on that spear is the banner of Potidea. The field general, Philip can never seem to remember his name, decided that it'd be a great idea to set that same banner ablaze. Philip reminds himself to give the man a promotion. + + +The question Philip was going to ask Polypias is forgotten in the addictive wake of total victory. + + +- + + +The sheets of Olympias' sheets are soaked. Maids run in and out of the room frantically. Some carry sheets, while other's carry buckets of water, but among the throng of the people surrounding Olympias, one stands out more than the others. A young maiden stands with a bow and a quiver of arrows over her shoulder. Her face is a mix of approval and joy, and her very presence radiates silvery light and power. + + +Philip gazes around the room in awe. None of the maidservants seem to notice him, and in fact, Philip notices, ignore him entirely. Perplexed that his servants would disrespect their king so easily, Philip reaches out to rebuke the closest servant for their flippancy, but his hand goes right through her. He tries again with nearly all of the servants, save the maiden, yet none of them respond to his attempts in the slightest. Still confused, Philip walks to the opposite side of the bed from the young maiden and approaches Olympias. Surely his wife will remember him. + + +"Olympias," he says, then tries to touch her shoulder. His hand passes through, and he cries out in frustration. + + +Olympias cries out as well, simultaneously startling Philip and knocking him to his senses. Philip re-examines the room, and after a few seconds of thought, realizes that his wife is giving birth. Instead of being frustrated at his predicament, Philip watches and waits. + + +A maid, apparently the one in charge of the lot of them, shouts, "It's happening!" Maids move around nearly in unison and in preparation of what's to come. The head maid positions her hands below Olympias' midriff and starts moving her hands amid a mix of blood and skin. Philip looks on excitedly. If this is a vision like he thinks it is, then he really is seeing his son being born. + + +Some moments later, the head maid withdraws her hands from Olympias holding a baby that looks as if it had been bathed in blood. A beautiful sound echoes throughout the room, and as much as he's glad to see his baby born, Philip can't help but feel a sense of foreboding. That sense intensifies when a new sound joins the glorious cries of the baby. This one not nearly so pleasant. + + +Olympias' screams overpower the baby's cries. It spurs all of the maids back into action, for at the splendor of the baby, they forgot their first priority, keeping Olympias alive. + + +"No, no, no..." Philip starts muttering incoherently as he realizes what's about to happen. + + +The maid's are fast and efficient, but no where near as fast and efficient as Philip wants them to be. Every scream of Olympias he hears marks another maid's face he memorizes. If she dies in the care of these people, then there will be eternal suffering for them to pay when he returns. Olympias' breaths turn from heavy, to shallow, then ending at virtually non-existent. Some of the maids start crying, but the head maid keeps working until she feels the last breath go out of her. Only then does she start crying as well. The baby lays in the arm of another nameless maid at the foot of the bed. + + +Philip's heart skips a beat, and it's all he can do to stop himself from crying as well. Of all the wives he'd ever taken, Olympias was the only one he could say that he truly loved. And now she was dead before his eyes. The reality of the situation hits Philip harder than it should, and despite his best efforts, Philip breaks down into tears. + + +"Please. Zeus, Hera. If there be any Gods out there, Please don't take Olympias away from me." He doesn't usually pray so earnestly, but the situation seemed to call for it. + + +Even though he was the one asking, Philip was more than startled to hear a response. It came from the young maiden on the other side of the bed. "Are you sure?" The voice exudes power unlike any other he'd ever heard. + + +Philip looks to the young maiden. Her ancient silvery eyes look back at him, and her eyebrows are raised in question. Philip nods and manages to mumble a "yes." + + +"You may come to regret this." Before Philip can ask what she means, the Goddess leans over and kisses Olympias on her brow. With that action she disappears leaving Philip, the maids, and Olympias alone. + + +Olympias breathing goes from shallow to deep, and her wound seem to heal themselves. If the maids had been paying a little more attention they might have seen the miracle occur, but amid their despair and Olympias blood no one but Philip saw what happened. + + +"Give him to me." The voice starts out as a whisper, but it grows steadily louder until the maids realize that their queen is still alive. The chaos that filled the room moments before the birthing reenters the room as the maids clean the baby and her mother up. Philip stands beside Olympias with his eyes rimmed red, but his expression a mask of joy. + + +Prior to this, Olympias and Philip discussed what your name should be if you were to be a boy. + + +It is there, in your mother's arms that she calls you by it for the first time. + + +"Alexander." +> Olympias +You cling to your mother robes as tightly as possible, and look up into her eyes with a sad look on your face. She loves it when you hug her like that, and when you look at her with your sky blue eyes, she melts under your fingertips. It makes her want to sweep you into her arms, and hold you forever. You think it's because you remind her of you when you were just a baby, but what your mother often forgets is that you are the son of King Philip the Great, and Queen Olympias the God-Blessed. Thus, you are unnaturally talented in everything you've ever tried. So you can even trick the queen into doing what you want. Well at least that's what you think. Everyone else, including your parents, tell you that you're talented because you've been chosen by the Gods. That Artemis herself was there when you were born, and, what most people keep secret from you, that Artemis revived your mother when she died giving birth to you. + + +At the prime age of eight, you aren't sure if you believe that. + + +Your dad's friends die all the time, and no Gods or Goddesses ever rescue them. You've never even heard of anyone being resurrected before, and even if it were possible, why your mother? Not that you're ungrateful if such a thing did happen, but why of all people her? You asked your mother once, and she just shook her head at you and told you not to worry about it. So then you went and asked Uncle Leonidas, and he just told you to continue your lessons and leave things like that to the adults. You responded by telling him he was being too condescending, and he nearly choked on the apple he was eating. Apparently six-year olds aren't supposed to know words that big. + + +You still don't have an answer to that question, but as you get older an older you care less and less. What matters is that your mom is here beside you... + + +...and that by being affectionate to her, you can postpone Leonidas' lessons. Your mom holds you tightly to her, and you think that your plan will go through, but then she lets go. + + +"Go to your lessons, Alexander. You can't keep Leonidas waiting." She smiles and hugs you one last time, before motioning to your personal handmaiden, Lanike. "Take him to Leonidas." + + +So today is one of those days. Your father left yesterday on another campaign, and it has mother sad. It's times like these that she likes to be alone, so like a good kid you oblige your mother's wishes. She did birth you after all. + + +Lanike grabs your hand and leads you from the room. Of all the women you know, Lanike and your mother are perhaps the only two that you will readily allow to touch you. If Goddesses really did exist, then there must have been some involved with the creation of this person. Beautiful black hair falls in loose curls around her perfect face. Her high cheekbones and rosy hue to her face compliment her appearance in an exemplary way. She was very young for a royal handmaid. Apparently her appearance wasn't the only good thing about her, for she worked her way up to this position through hard work and determination. The only two things, your father tells you, that can usurp latent talent. + + +The pair of you make your way to Leonidas' study, but as you near, your desire to to follow your mother's command dwindles. Leonidas was usually so engrossed in his paperwork that he barely notices when you're there anyway. You and Lanike turn down the hallway leading to your uncle's room and you find your opportunity dwindling. You still might be able to convince Lanike to let you skip the lessons. She is quite fond of you after all. +> Try to convince Lanike +If there's any chance of you getting out of your monotonous lessons, then you're going to take it. + + +Your walk slows until it hits an eventual stop. You keep hold of Lanike's hand, and thus, pull her to a stop as well. A look of confusion comes over her face. + + +"Alexander? Why'd you stop?" Her dazzling grey eyes scan you over, but in preparation for your plan, you have your face tilted downward. That way she'll have to lean down to get a closer look at your face. + + +You don't respond, and instead only squeeze her hand tighter. Something about holding onto women tightly really makes them give into you, for the very next moment Lanike crouches down and looks into your eyes. You can see the hint of worry in her eyes, and this close you could practically read every emotion etched into her face. + + +"Alexander?" The words are spoken quietly, and when you open your mouth to reply, you realize you've made a grave mistake. + + +Your original plan was to get her as close as possible to you without having to look her in the eyes, and then all at once you would hit her with a full dosage of your hopeful and sad look. The one that mother always falls for. Then you'd explain that you didn't want to go to the lessons, and would rather stay with her. While you were thinking this, you forgot to factor in the fact that she would be that close to you. Instead of you hitting her with the full power of your cute child persona, she hit you with a dosage of her beauty, and the worst part is that she didn't even mean to do it. You were bested by someone by someone who didn't even try. + + +Still no words came out. Realizing your folly, you walk around her and attempt to pull her along the path Leonidas's room. Lanike, however isn't having any of that. You made her concerned, and she wasn't going to let you alone that easily. She uses your hand as a hold, and pulls you back toward her. this time, you don't look into her eyes. That way you might not be caught in her hypnotizing gaze. + + +She notices this. "Look at me, Alexander." her voice isn't particularly commanding, but you can't resist it. You give in to her command, and look directly into her eyes. She doesn't say anything, and just looks into your eyes. She stays there searching, trying to divine the problem that she still seemed to believe was troubling you. After a few moments of looking into your eyes, Lanike leans toward you and plants a soft, feathery kiss on your forehead. She then proceeds to run her hand through your thick golden hair. If you weren't speechless before, then you were certainly speechless now. + + +"If anything is ever bothering you, you can talk to me. Okay?" You can only nod. "Now, I know you don't really want to go to your lessons, but the queen told me to take you there, and if you stay standing right here I can't do that." + + +You hadn't thought of that, and you certainly don't want to get Lanike in trouble with your mother. Your mother was notoriously protective of you, and if she found out that you convinced Lanike to keep you away from you lessons, well you probably wouldn't see Lanike very much after that. + + +You nod again, and the pair of you continue onward to Leonidas' study. When you two get there, Leonidas is sitting in a polished wooden chair with a book in hand. his desk is positioned behind him, and another chair is sitting in front of him. Several bookshelves line the walls, and each of the shelves are filled with copious scrolls, parchments, and a few bound books. + + +"You're late, Alexander." his voice sounds like your mother's, filled with authority, but the similarities end there. While your mother has fiery red hair, Leonidas has dull brown hair. Even their facial structures are wildly different. The only thing they really have in common, aside from their demeanor, is their color eyes which, like yours, are sky blue. + + +"His mother kept him longer than expected." Lanike immediately comes to your defense. + + +"Hm. Is that so? It can't be helped then ." He says this, but doesn't sound at all convinced. "Now come Alexander. We have work to do." + + +Lanike ruffles your tousled golden hair one last time disappearing into the hallway. She'll be back in a few hours to pick you up. + + +You sit in the chair across from your Uncle. + + +"Alright. What shall we start with? + + + +> Philosophy +Now that you're here you're left with very few options, so you choose the lesser of three evils. It's the lesser, because your uncle's primary vehicle in which he teaches philosophy is debate. Debate is more fun than simply memorizing things, hence the lesser. + + +"Philosophy." + + +"Good choice, my boy." You watch as a spark lights in the man's eyes. A true scholar indeed, for, you think, that only a scholar truly devoted to his studies could find enjoyment in such a task. + + +"Do you remember where we left off?" + + +"We were learning about Socrates and..." you trail off when you fail to remember what exactly about Socrates you were learning. + + +"Questions," Leonidas supplies readily. + + +"Questions?" + + +"Yes." + + +"What does Socrates have to do with questions?" + + +"What did Socrates spend his life doing?" + + +"Teaching philosophy, right?" + + +"How did he teach?" + + +You rack your brain. + + + +> "By studying the world around him." +Leonidas shakes his head. "Sorry Alexander, wrong answer. Guess again."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Now that you're here you're left with very few options, so you choose the lesser of three evils. It's the lesser, because your uncle's primary vehicle in which he teaches philosophy is debate. Debate is more fun than simply memorizing things, hence the lesser. + + +"Philosophy." + + +"Good choice, my boy." You watch as a spark lights in the man's eyes. A true scholar indeed, for, you think, that only a scholar truly devoted to his studies could find enjoyment in such a task. + + +"Do you remember where we left off?" + + +"We were learning about Socrates and..." you trail off when you fail to remember what exactly about Socrates you were learning. + + +"Questions," Leonidas supplies readily. + + +"Questions?" + + +"Yes." + + +"What does Socrates have to do with questions?" + + +"What did Socrates spend his life doing?" + + +"Teaching philosophy, right?" + + +"How did he teach?" + + +You rack your brain. + + + +> "By asking questions until the answer was found." +The hints were subtle, but the hints were there and you caught them. Leonidas was asking you questions until you were able to answer. It was smart of him to teach you in the very way that you were trying to divine. + + +"By asking questions until the answer was found." + + +A smile stretches across Leonidas' face. "Brilliant Alexander. I knew you'd get the answer." + + +You can't help the small smile that comes across your face, and you and Leonidas share a moment of kinship together before Leonidas expounds upon Socrates' method. + + +The rest of the lesson goes famously, and you end up having, dare you think it, fun. It ends all too quickly and soon you're presented with another question. + + +"Which lesson do you want to do next?" +> History +You don't really know why you decide to do history, as you've always disliked history the most among the subjects you were taught, but for some reason you feel like this lesson will be different. + + +"History." + + +Leonidas raises his eyebrows in surprise, but he gets a twinkle in his eyes. "Very well. I have a very special lesson for today. Tell me, Have you heard of the Trojan War...?" + + +Leonidas leaps head first into tale of heroes, gods, and revenge. This is certainly the most interesting tale Leonidas has ever told you, and you decide to give history a chance more often. + + +Seeing your delight in the story, Leonidas asks, "What was your favorite part?" + + + +> "When the trojan horse plan was crafted." +You feel a twinkle in your eyes as you tell him. + + +He nods, elated that you're finally taking to history like he's always wanted you to. After you finish telling him, he relates to you his favorite part. + + +"Remember when Hector was finally bested?" You nod thinking on the act of vengeance being taken. "After that Achilles refused to return the body of Hector to the Trojans, but after a time and fashion, he gave in. It is then that the Achaeans and the Trojans entered into a truce. Both sides had taken heavy casualties, and many heroes died, so they took the time to bury their dead. That truce is my favorite part Alexander." + + +You nod, but don't quite grasp what he's trying to say to you. + + +Leonidas continues. "I would have you remember that in war there is a clear line between opposing forces, but in the end, when we are all dead, we are the same. Don't allow yourself to forget that when you go to war in your father's armies that even in times of war, there can be peace." + + +'Even in times of war, there can be peace.' The words carve themselves into your memory, and Leonidas finishes his lesson. + + +"What do you want to learn about next?" He asks you. +> Philosophy +Leonidas glances outside, and then he immediately lets out a short, abrupt laugh. "Well Alexander, it looks like you made it through the day." + + +You look up surprised. You would've never guessed that the time went by this quickly. Guess that old saying your mother says is true. Time flies by when you're having fun. + + +You hear someone footsteps, and immediately after that, a voice. "Alexander?" Lanike walks into the room and stands beside you. "How were your lessons?" + + +You look from Leonidas to her. "They went well." That was your normal rote response, and was what Lanike and Leonidas expected you to say. Which makes it all the better when you add a genuine response. "I actually really enjoyed the lessons today." + + +Smiles spread across the pair's faces, and you get confused. "Is that so odd?" you ask curiously. + + +Lanike puts her hand on your shoulder and pats it softly. "No not at all Alex. I'm just glad you're finally enjoying them," Leonidas says. "I'll see you tomorrow then. On time as well I hope. Now go ahead and get going before your mother stats worrying." + + +You get up from your seat and grab Lanike's hand. The both of you start to walk through out of the room, but you decide to do something you've never done before. You turn around and look your uncle dead in the eye. "Thanks for always teaching me Uncle." + + +You see his eyes start to glisten with tears. "It's been a joy to teach you." + + +With that said, you and Lanike walk out of the room and head back to your mother's quarter's. If all your lessons go like today then you think your life will start to get a lot better. With a smile on your face and joy spread across your features, you go about the rest of your day. +> 2 Years Later +From age eight to ten, you entered a period of extensive training. Your father Philip decided that if you were to be his heir to the throne, then you needed to be trained to your utmost potential. Your mother shared in this sentiment, and together they cracked down on you. No more were you able to manipulate them into letting you skip lessons, and from then on you were to be disciplined like a soldier. + + +Most other kids would crack under the pressure, but you? You did no such thing. Instead of buckling under the weight of heavy familial, social, and political expectations, you thrived. You went from second best at combat (among the kids your age) to first in a matter of months. Your best friend, Hephaestion was second, and another kid, Cassander, called Cass, was third. Beyond that you began to throw yourself into studies of philosophy, and history at an unprecedented rate. You were even beginning to be more well read than the average adult. Even if your parents wouldn't fall for it anymore, you still practiced manipulating others to do what you wanted them to do. + + +You progressed so well in all aspects of your life that you were even beginning to question your doubts that you were Artemis' chosen. How else could you excel at everything so well? Everyone was impressed by you and your passion to better yourself, but among those that were, your mother stands far above the rest. She was so proud of you that she even suggested to you father that he should start taking you with him on his kingly matters. + + +It was for this reason that you now stood beside your father in a field outside the palace. You father recently found himself in need of a horse, and not just any horse, but one of superior quality and breed. A thessalonian merchant must've caught wind of this, and so brought his best horse to present to Philip. + + +The black stallion was a beautiful horse. Even for a king. Your father was wildly impressed, so much in fact that when the merchant charged him three times the amount for it your father was quite agreeable. + + +Agreeable until he tried to mount the horse that is. Every time Philip neared the horse, it would trot away. your father tried several times to mount it, but each and every time he was either thrown off or unable to mount at all. It was quite the spectacle, for your father was not a man of weakness. He was humbled greatly, and you as well to see your father fail, by the experience. + + +Heated, your father stalked back towards the merchant. "I refuse to pay for a horse that I cannot ride. What use is it to me if it doesn't do what I wish?" + + +"Please reconsider, my liege. He really is a fine horse. If you would but try once more, I'm sure you would be able to ride him," the thessalonian merchant pleaded. + + +But your father wouldn't hear of it. "I've tried many of times yet. Surely I cannot rely on a horse in battle if it is this rebellious." Your father waved the merchant away, then approached you. + + +You look your father over. Anger surges across his features, but you know him well enough to not just see the anger. Disappointment colors his features. A little bit of regret as well. It was plain as day to you that he wanted that horse, for even now he stares longingly at the black stallion. + + +You follow his gaze and watch as the merchant's stable hands try and lead the horse away. Each time one of the men try and grab its reins the horse rears up defensively. You watch amused as they fail at what was supposed to be their job. You find it so appalling that you cannot simply stay silent and watch as they timidly approach the horse. + + +"You thessalonians lose out on an excellent horse because you lack the boldness to even manage him." You laugh brazenly. For a youth of ten, you could be quite condescending. + + +Your father turns to look at you somewhat bewildered. "Why do you rebuke those older than you as if you could do any better?" + + +The merchant looks just as shocked as your father. "If you think you can do any better, than be my honored guest my liege." Haughty, he continues. "In fact, if you are able to tame him, then you can keep the horse for free." + + +The offer sounds tempting, and everyone's eyes turn to you. +> Accept the challenge +A semi-wild grin spreads across your face. "I'll accept your challenge then." + + +If the merchant was upset before, then he was dumbfounded now. You guess he didn't really expect you to try something so daring, but hey, you didn't think you were going to accept his challenge either until a moment before you did. + + +Your father's expression turns stony. He doesn't say a word, and all others watching stay silent as well. You take this as your cue, and begin to approach the beast. + + +The black stallion stands majestically as it grazes in the field before you. It faces toward you and away from the sun. Its eyes regard you for a moment before trotting away and grazing elsewhere. + + +You have the bravado down, but obviously it's going to take a little more than just that to tame this beast. Now, how to go about it... +> Try feeding it some grass +The way to a horse's heart is through its stomach, right? What better way to tame the horse than by feeding it? + + +You nod to yourself assuredly. It was a solid plan. Certainly better than simply running up and holding on for dear life at least. You gather some grass up in a fist and slowly begin to approach the horse. It stays calm and collected as you approach, and even stays that way when you offer it the grass, but when it lifts its head to look at you it panics and rears up on its hind legs. You barely manage to escape without getting kicked in the face. + + +You hear an amused laugh behind you from the merchant, and you turn around to look at your father. His face retains its stony visage, but you think you can make out some disappointment in his eyes. + + +You turn back to the horse and mull over your other options. +> Give up +You don't know why you were so insistent upon attempting to tame the horse. That and ridiculing those who tried, but now as you stand before it, you lose all hope of taming it you might have once had. You turn away from the horse embarrassed and walk back towards your father. + + +When you don't act on your word the merchant laughs. "All talk but no action. Just as I thought." + + +You stay silent, but your father won't have anyone insulting his son. "You had a right to issue a challenge against my son, but cross that boundary and I will see to it that you never walk again." + + +Fear and regret alights the merchant's eyes and he quickly asks for forgiveness before hurrying and trying to rein in the majestic horse. You watch on shamefully. After finally entering the good graces of your father, you go and ruin it by becoming an embarrassment. You feel your father's gaze on you and you turn to face him. + + +"I wouldn't have expected you to do it anyway son." + + +You nod absently as if you aren't affected by your failure, but you could see, practically feel, the loss of respect from your father and anyone else watching. You tilt your head down in shame and pray to the gods for the day to be over with. +> 3 Years Later +This was the day. Your father searched for a long time, and now he finally found someone who he thought would be able to tutor you well enough. He'd been searching ever since it became obvious that there was nothing more for Leonidas to teach you, and Leonidas was no push over when it came to scholarship. Finding someone that would not only be better than Leonidas, but better than yourself as well would not be an easy task. That being said, your father did say he found someone "suitable for your needs," and who were you to argue with your father? + + +Even though you accepted having a new tutor, you remained skeptical even as you went to your very first lesson. It was a ways away from your home at the temple of the nymphs in a small village called Mieza. This doubly confused you, for surely a great tutor such as the one your father found would be quartered in a palace like that of the one you live in. + + +Despite all of this, you were content, for there were many pros to this change in tutorship as well. For example, Hephaestion was to be tutored at your side along with a host of other nobilties' youth. You would be taught in a similar environment to the famed Academy of Plato, but you would also be taught further the art of swordsmanship along with various other talents. + + +All in all you hoped it would be an interesting experience. + + +Hephaestion shared this sentiment aloud as the pair of you made your way to the temple. + + +"I hope this goes well." + + +You yawn idly. "I'm sure it will. It's only another tutor, and this time we'll actually be learning together," you point out. + + +"That is true, but honestly, I'm more worried about you than me. I know I have many things to learn, but Alex, you're accelerating at a rate far beyond me." + + +You don't respond. He is right after all. Your main reservation is that you might end up being woefully bored, and simply outclass anyone else there. + + +Silence comes over you and Hephaestion until you make it out of Mieza entirely. The temple itself was located on the side of a hill, and was said to be pretty rustic in nature. Another interesting aspect of this whole escapade. + + +"Are you sure we're going the right way?" You ask Hephaestion. + + +He nods readily. "Of course. If I didn't memorize the way here, then you would've gotten lost for sure." + + +About an hour passes by, and you repeat the question. + + +"Yes I know where we're going. Stop with the uncertainty. Don't you trust me?" Hephaestion questions. + + +"Yes I do, but I thought the temple was much less than an hour away." + + +Hephaestion shrugs. "I guess you were wrong then. It happens." He says this confidently. You wouldn't normally allow people to insult your honor so easily, but it was honestly one of the things you liked about Hephaestion. He's honest, and honesty is a valuable gift when your royalty, as people tend to lie to gain your favor. + + +Nearly another hour passes by, and you find your patience wearing thin. Hephaestion said that you were going the right way, but this was taking an inordinately long time. + + +Luckily for the both of you, you see an older man in traveling robes heading along the road ahead of you. + + +You start to jog off in the direction of the man when you hear Hephaestion call out from behind you. "Where are you going?" + + +"To ask for directions. That gentleman over there looks like he knows where he's going." + + +"And I don't?" + + +You hesitate, for you'd rather not offend your best friend, but at the same time you don't even know if he knows where he's going. +> Ask for directions +You shake your head regretfully. "I'm sorry Heph. I just don't think you know where you're going." + + +A flash of sadness crosses his face, and you wince in response. You really wish he knew where he was going, but all the signs point to the opposite more obvious point. That you and him are lost. + + +You turn back to the man and jog in that direction. You hear Hephaestion follow behind you, and you're glad he wasn't offended enough to abandon you. As you approach, the man turns around and looks the both of you over. You do the same to him. Grey traveling robes adorn him, and his short cropped hair and beard are a mix of dull brown and grey. The fellow is older than you, but not quite as old as you first thought. + + +You speak first. "Greetings. Do you happen to know of a temple nearby, or somewhere hereabouts?" + + +The man nods, "Yes, as a matter of fact I do. Are you two headed over there right now?" He glances at Hephaestion, and before you can respond Hephaestion speaks. + + +"We were headed over there just now, but my friend thought it expedient to make sure we were going the right way despite my adamant claims that we were going the right direction." + + +You turn around bewildered that your friend would give a stranger so much information, but Hephaestion doesn't meet your eyes so your glaring has no effect on him. You turn around as the man begins to speak. + + +"Well done Hephaestion. You executed your job perfectly. Many thanks." + + +If you were bewildered before, then you were astonishingly confused now. Neither of you offered your names to the stranger, yet he called Hephaestion by name. + + +The man straightens his back, and begins to circle you. He looks you up and down in a very obvious way. "I take it this is Alexander?" + + +He addresses Hephaestion whom immediately respond. "Yes sir." + + +Honorifics too? Who is this guy to make Hephaestion respect him so? The only other people he respected as much were his and your own parents. + + +"Who are you?" Your voice is flavored with curiosity, and confusion. + + +The man doesn't speak, but simply continues looking you over. Hephaestion instead responds. + + +"Remember when I told you we were going to the temple?" You nod your acknowledgement. "Well that was only a half truth. Even if we did go to the temple, there wouldn't be a tutor there." He glances over to the stranger. "Well at least not yet." + + +You turn back and look the men over again when you finally realize what Hephaestion is hinting at. + + +Hephaestion continues. "He met with me several days ago and asked for me to arrange this. Evidently he wanted to meet with you outside the temple because as soon as we got there, he had no intention of paying you special treatment." + + +You repeat your question to the man once more. "Who are you?" + + +The man's brown eyes meet your own, and you see a intelligent look in them. As if he simply knows all of the answers to any questions you might pose. "My name," he says, "is Aristotle." +> Continue +You'd gone into Aristotle's classes with your expectation wildly low, and came out with your expectations blown out of the water. + + +You didn't expect to learn very much, yet you've never learned more. + + +You didn't expect the tutor to be very amiable, yet Aristotle is like the grandfather you never knew. + + +You never expected to find a place where you would feel more at home than your real home, yet here it is before you. + + +You sit outside the temple entrance gazing around the near about endless fields and forests. Many different activities are going on, including sparring, horse riding, tree climbing. + + +Your normal lessons are done for the day, and you are left with a few other things to spend your time doing. All of the activities you see going on are available to you, but if you feel tired then you could also just head to your quarters and fall asleep. +> Do something outside +Birds circle overhead, and a light breeze shuffles through the air. It is a perfect day to be outside. What do you plan to do? +> Go horse riding +You decide almost immediately what you want to do next. Riding horses has always been a passion of yours, and there are few things more enjoyable than riding into the wind on a perfect day. + + +You head to the makeshift stables created for the duration of Aristotle's school here and examine your options. There are many horses to choose from, and you have difficulty choosing, and just when you're about to decide on a horse you see him out of the corner of your eye. Hephaestion is out in the fields behind the stable riding a chestnut colored mare. He catches your eye and waves at you. + + +Suddenly your choices change. +> Go riding with Hephaestion +It all happened so fast. You were losing popularity, and as the prince of Macedon, well, that's a death sentence. You don't know which people made the move, but you're certain they planned this very well, for you don't even see it coming. One minute you're in perfect health, but the next you join your ancestors in the afterlife. You die without even knowing what killed you. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide almost immediately what you want to do next. Riding horses has always been a passion of yours, and there are few things more enjoyable than riding into the wind on a perfect day. + + +You head to the makeshift stables created for the duration of Aristotle's school here and examine your options. There are many horses to choose from, and you have difficulty choosing, and just when you're about to decide on a horse you see him out of the corner of your eye. Hephaestion is out in the fields behind the stable riding a chestnut colored mare. He catches your eye and waves at you. + + +Suddenly your choices change. +> Ride without him +You ignore him, for you did come out here to enjoy the simple pleasures of riding. If you rode with him, then he'd probably ask you to race him, which would turn into a devastating loss for you. None of the horses here would be able to be Atalanta, Heph's horse. + + +So instead, you grab a spotted white and brown horse and take it for a ride. Pointedly away from Hephaestion. + + +An hour or so goes by, and the ride gives you peace and elation not often gifted to princes. Now, time to see if doing something else will give you those same feelings.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Birds circle overhead, and a light breeze shuffles through the air. It is a perfect day to be outside. What do you plan to do? +> Go practice your swordsmanship +You've managed to retain your position as one of the best warriors here, but if others start practicing a lot, then you could find yourself quickly outclassed. Therefore, what better place than the training fields to spend your day? + + +You head over there, and see Cassander practicing. Luckily for you Cassander also happened to be one of the best warriors, so your training today would not be boring. Cass himself is already engaged in combat, but that doesn't last very long, for the poor sap Cass is fighting overextends and Cass executes a perfectly timed jab to his side. The other youth is sent reeling. + + +The fight over, you approach Cass. He sees you and before you can say anything, he greets you first. "Greetings Alexander." + + +Among your friends he is the only that still insists on being formal whenever you two are together. "Do you want to test your blade against my own?" + + +The dirty blonde haired youth nods his head, but motions for you to wait. "Let me rest a moment longer." + + +You nod before moving to the opposite side of the training circle. You grab a wooden sword and wait for Cassander to ready himself. + + +It's not long before your friend stands up and enters his fighting stance. You do the same and the fight begins. Unlike when you and your friends were kids, the lot of you actually know how to fight now, so this fight actually takes more than a few seconds to finish. Despite this, you have the clear advantage. Cass is good, but he's no where near as good as you are. + + +That being said, if you don't change tactics, then this fight could continue on for quite awhile. +> Overpower him +Using superior strength is a tried and true option. Thus, you immediately go on the offensive. You use everything in your arsenal. The only difference being that you consciously make the decision to use excessive amounts of strength in each strike. You lose absurd amounts energy doing this, but Cass is clearly getting worn down as well. + + +You strike horizontally from the right to the left, and Cass goes to block it, but in doing so his sword is moved away from his body. With that strike you destroyed his fighting stance, and created a clear opening. Now all you have to do is capitalize on it. You strike fast and hard from above and your attack...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You've managed to retain your position as one of the best warriors here, but if others start practicing a lot, then you could find yourself quickly outclassed. Therefore, what better place than the training fields to spend your day? + + +You head over there, and see Cassander practicing. Luckily for you Cassander also happened to be one of the best warriors, so your training today would not be boring. Cass himself is already engaged in combat, but that doesn't last very long, for the poor sap Cass is fighting overextends and Cass executes a perfectly timed jab to his side. The other youth is sent reeling. + + +The fight over, you approach Cass. He sees you and before you can say anything, he greets you first. "Greetings Alexander." + + +Among your friends he is the only that still insists on being formal whenever you two are together. "Do you want to test your blade against my own?" + + +The dirty blonde haired youth nods his head, but motions for you to wait. "Let me rest a moment longer." + + +You nod before moving to the opposite side of the training circle. You grab a wooden sword and wait for Cassander to ready himself. + + +It's not long before your friend stands up and enters his fighting stance. You do the same and the fight begins. Unlike when you and your friends were kids, the lot of you actually know how to fight now, so this fight actually takes more than a few seconds to finish. Despite this, you have the clear advantage. Cass is good, but he's no where near as good as you are. + + +That being said, if you don't change tactics, then this fight could continue on for quite awhile. +> Dodge until an opportunity arises +You and most of your friends tend to be aggressive fighters. Cassander included. If you just dodge until an opportunity arises, then you won't expend very much energy at all with the satisfaction of winning the match. + + +You apply your change in tactics immediately, and it doesn't go unnoticed. Cass narrows his eyes at you, and he begins to be more cautious. His aggressive attacks come less readily, and the fight drags on. You realize that if you're to win this then you need to be just a tad more aggressive. You need to force him to be aggressive. A plan forms in your head. If you can attack and intentionally leave an opening for him to strike, then you could very well set yourself up for winning. + + +You put the plan into play immediately. You strike aggressively, then allow an opening. Cassander takes the bait and lunges forward with his sword. Your plan... + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You've managed to retain your position as one of the best warriors here, but if others start practicing a lot, then you could find yourself quickly outclassed. Therefore, what better place than the training fields to spend your day? + + +You head over there, and see Cassander practicing. Luckily for you Cassander also happened to be one of the best warriors, so your training today would not be boring. Cass himself is already engaged in combat, but that doesn't last very long, for the poor sap Cass is fighting overextends and Cass executes a perfectly timed jab to his side. The other youth is sent reeling. + + +The fight over, you approach Cass. He sees you and before you can say anything, he greets you first. "Greetings Alexander." + + +Among your friends he is the only that still insists on being formal whenever you two are together. "Do you want to test your blade against my own?" + + +The dirty blonde haired youth nods his head, but motions for you to wait. "Let me rest a moment longer." + + +You nod before moving to the opposite side of the training circle. You grab a wooden sword and wait for Cassander to ready himself. + + +It's not long before your friend stands up and enters his fighting stance. You do the same and the fight begins. Unlike when you and your friends were kids, the lot of you actually know how to fight now, so this fight actually takes more than a few seconds to finish. Despite this, you have the clear advantage. Cass is good, but he's no where near as good as you are. + + +That being said, if you don't change tactics, then this fight could continue on for quite awhile. +> Parry, then strike +The plan is simple, and perhaps the easiest of your options. You don't have to change your style of fighting at all. The only thing that needs to happen is for you to make sure you parry at the correct time, for parrying is all about timing. You prepare yourself mentally, and your stance changes slightly, but Cass doesn't seem to notice. Instead he goes for the classic overhead slash. Well it's now or never. You go to parry and...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Birds circle overhead, and a light breeze shuffles through the air. It is a perfect day to be outside. What do you plan to do? +> Go tree climbing +You aren't particularly in the mood for anything too intensive, so tree climbing it is. There is something inherently satisfying and relaxing about climbing a tree and sitting atop it's branches. The real hard part was finding a good tree to do the climbing. + + +While the immediate area around the temple was flat, plain terrain, there were still quite a few trees scattered about. You see several pines and cypruses, but you ignore them. If you were really going to do this, then you were going to find a nice large oak tree. + + +You search for a good solid fifteen minutes before finding the perfect one. Tall and thick, the oak's branches wind around the wooden beast. Green dots of its iconic leaves sprout all around, standing as an example of life in its prime to anyone who is blessed enough to see it. such displays of magnificence were rare, and not only did you have the opportunity to see it, but to climb it as well. + + +Smiling you approach the beast. The first branch stands several feet above your head, and it is clear you won't just be able to jump and reach it. +> Use the tree to propel yourself into the air +You take a deep breath and run at the tree, and when you get there you jump at the tree, plant a foot on its side, then propel yourself up to the first branch. You barely manage to grab on with your right hand. You pull yourself up from there, and soon enough you're sitting atop the first branch. After that the going gets easier, for after the first branch branches sprout galore. + + +Your next challenge comes a few minutes later. You are farther up the tree, and the farther you go up the less limbs there are to grab. You've managed to get to the point where here's pretty much only one tree limb that you can grab easily. Any other one would be significantly more difficult, but this isn't usually a problem because the easy limb is usually there. Usually. The part you're at has had its limb broken off near the trunk. You don't know how it happened, but you do know that there are very few options for continuing forward. +> Leap past it to the next highest branch + You briefly look down, then regret it. You are very high up in the tree, and any falling could very well kill you. You've already made your mind, however, and ready yourself to make the jump to the next highest branch. You take a breath then start to jump...but lip instead. You forgot to factor in that when you would start to jump the branch might quake under your weight and bend. This did, in fact, happen and you start to fall through the air, but only for a second. Luckily for you, you didn't slip and fall very far from the branch, so manage to keep one hand on the branch. + + +You pull yourself back onto the branch, and rethink your choices. +> Use the stump part of the branch to climb +The tree limb was broken off, but you think you can still use the stump left as a foothold to get up higher in the tree. Dangerous, sure, but the results would be worth it. + + +You wrap your arms around the tree at the highest point possible and start to shimmy up until your foot is on top of that stump. The foothold is just as sturdy as you thought it would be, and from there it's easy to grab the next branch. + + +You continue your journey up the tree, but the higher you get the slower you go. The branches get smaller and you aren't sure if some of them will even hold you. Still you press on as far as you think you can go without the branches simply breaking under your weight. + + +You get the highest, sturdiest branch possible and gaze out over the fields of the the temple. The view is breathtaking. You see a few people riding horses in the distance, including Hephaestion. Cassander and a few other are practicing swordplay in the sparring part of the field. It all looks fantastic, but there's something yet that bothers you. You look up and see the highest branch possible. Something deep within you yearns to be at the top of that. To show the world that you conquered this tree. +> Continue climbing +You are Alexander, Prince of Macedon, chosen of Artemis, and damn good at climbing trees. You aren't about to let a stick or two get in the way of you standing at the top of this tree. + + +You immediately set back to work in climbing the beast. The branches are rather flimsy, but you find that so long as you stay light of foot the trees don't snap, even though you do hear precarious creaking noises. + + +Eventually you make your way, yes, all the way to the very top branch. Despite being rash in making the decision to continue onward in the first place, you are cautious now, for you'd rather not die. You put one foot on the branch at a time, and in a long moment you find yourself standing at the very top of the tree. + + +If you thought there was a great view before, then you were wrong. Those sturdy branches could never attain the brilliance of the view that you now held. You think you could even see Mieza from here. You start whooping and yelling in excitement. It was truly a good choice for you to come up here. The mild risk of danger held no sway on you any longer, for you start pumping a fist in the air in your fit of elation. + + +Then you hear the cracking. You don't have anytime to react before the branch you are on snaps and you are sent tumbling into the air beneath you. You hit branch after branch and pain courses through your veins. You feel many of your bones break before your head collides with a rather thick branch knocking you out. You fall for just a few more seconds wherein you hit the ground beneath with a resoundingly solemn thud. You never wake up again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The tree limb was broken off, but you think you can still use the stump left as a foothold to get up higher in the tree. Dangerous, sure, but the results would be worth it. + + +You wrap your arms around the tree at the highest point possible and start to shimmy up until your foot is on top of that stump. The foothold is just as sturdy as you thought it would be, and from there it's easy to grab the next branch. + + +You continue your journey up the tree, but the higher you get the slower you go. The branches get smaller and you aren't sure if some of them will even hold you. Still you press on as far as you think you can go without the branches simply breaking under your weight. + + +You get the highest, sturdiest branch possible and gaze out over the fields of the the temple. The view is breathtaking. You see a few people riding horses in the distance, including Hephaestion. Cassander and a few other are practicing swordplay in the sparring part of the field. It all looks fantastic, but there's something yet that bothers you. You look up and see the highest branch possible. Something deep within you yearns to be at the top of that. To show the world that you conquered this tree. +> Resist the urge +You aren't a fool. The chances of you managing to get to the top branch without breaking another one and falling are slim. Right now its better to simply take what you have and be satisfied with it. + + +Acting on those thoughts you make your way back down the tree a satisfied person. You wonder what else could make you feel accomplished.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> You briefly look down, then regret it. You are very high up in the tree, and any falling could very well kill you. You've already made your mind, however, and ready yourself to make the jump to the next highest branch. You take a breath then start to jump...but lip instead. You forgot to factor in that when you would start to jump the branch might quake under your weight and bend. This did, in fact, happen and you start to fall through the air, but only for a second. Luckily for you, you didn't slip and fall very far from the branch, so manage to keep one hand on the branch. + + +You pull yourself back onto the branch, and rethink your choices. +> Stop climbing +You nearly died, and you decide it best not to tempt fate and death by giving them another swing at you. You climb down the tree and head back to the temple.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren't particularly in the mood for anything too intensive, so tree climbing it is. There is something inherently satisfying and relaxing about climbing a tree and sitting atop it's branches. The real hard part was finding a good tree to do the climbing. + + +While the immediate area around the temple was flat, plain terrain, there were still quite a few trees scattered about. You see several pines and cypruses, but you ignore them. If you were really going to do this, then you were going to find a nice large oak tree. + + +You search for a good solid fifteen minutes before finding the perfect one. Tall and thick, the oak's branches wind around the wooden beast. Green dots of its iconic leaves sprout all around, standing as an example of life in its prime to anyone who is blessed enough to see it. such displays of magnificence were rare, and not only did you have the opportunity to see it, but to climb it as well. + + +Smiling you approach the beast. The first branch stands several feet above your head, and it is clear you won't just be able to jump and reach it. +> Wrap your arms around the trunk and shimmy your way up +You take a deep breath and wrap your arms around the beast. You aren't even close to wrapping your arms all the way around, but luckily enough, you do manage to have enough grip to start climbing. The going is slow, but you manage to make your way up to the first branch without falling. You pull yourself up from there, and soon enough you're sitting atop the first branch. After that the going gets easier, for after the first branch branches sprout galore. + + +Your next challenge comes a few minutes later. You are farther up the tree, and the farther you go up the less limbs there are to grab. You've managed to get to the point where here's pretty much only one tree limb that you can grab easily. Any other one would be significantly more difficult, but this isn't usually a problem because the easy limb is usually there. Usually. The part you're at has had its limb broken off near the trunk. You don't know how it happened, but you do know that there are very few options for continuing forward.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren't particularly in the mood for anything too intensive, so tree climbing it is. There is something inherently satisfying and relaxing about climbing a tree and sitting atop it's branches. The real hard part was finding a good tree to do the climbing. + + +While the immediate area around the temple was flat, plain terrain, there were still quite a few trees scattered about. You see several pines and cypruses, but you ignore them. If you were really going to do this, then you were going to find a nice large oak tree. + + +You search for a good solid fifteen minutes before finding the perfect one. Tall and thick, the oak's branches wind around the wooden beast. Green dots of its iconic leaves sprout all around, standing as an example of life in its prime to anyone who is blessed enough to see it. such displays of magnificence were rare, and not only did you have the opportunity to see it, but to climb it as well. + + +Smiling you approach the beast. The first branch stands several feet above your head, and it is clear you won't just be able to jump and reach it. +> Try to find purchase on the bark +You figure that oak bark is sturdier than most, and thus might contain hand and footholds all around its base. If that much is true, then making your way up the tree should be easy. + + +You take a breath and do, in fact, manage to find some spots that you could use as holds. You act on this revelation and begin to make your way up the tree. After a few seconds you fall from your holds and land back on the grass in a mix of dirt, grass, and bark. + + +Apparently bark can't hold your weight very well. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren't particularly in the mood for anything too intensive, so tree climbing it is. There is something inherently satisfying and relaxing about climbing a tree and sitting atop it's branches. The real hard part was finding a good tree to do the climbing. + + +While the immediate area around the temple was flat, plain terrain, there were still quite a few trees scattered about. You see several pines and cypruses, but you ignore them. If you were really going to do this, then you were going to find a nice large oak tree. + + +You search for a good solid fifteen minutes before finding the perfect one. Tall and thick, the oak's branches wind around the wooden beast. Green dots of its iconic leaves sprout all around, standing as an example of life in its prime to anyone who is blessed enough to see it. such displays of magnificence were rare, and not only did you have the opportunity to see it, but to climb it as well. + + +Smiling you approach the beast. The first branch stands several feet above your head, and it is clear you won't just be able to jump and reach it. +> Go get some rope +Now that you know where the tree is, you aren't going to make it even harder on yourself. You go back to the temple and find some rope before coming back to the tree. After that you simply toss half of the rope up and over the first branch. You grab the other half of the rope again and use the rope to climb up the tree.You pull yourself up from there, and soon enough you're sitting atop the first branch. After that the going gets easier, for after the first branch branches sprout galore. + + +Your next challenge comes a few minutes later. You are farther up the tree, and the farther you go up the less limbs there are to grab. You've managed to get to the point where here's pretty much only one tree limb that you can grab easily. Any other one would be significantly more difficult, but this isn't usually a problem because the easy limb is usually there. Usually. The part you're at has had its limb broken off near the trunk. You don't know how it happened, but you do know that there are very few options for continuing forward. Those options don't include the rope, for in your rush to climb the tree you left in on the first branch. You could go and get it, but at that point you might as well just stop climbing all together. + + +You're left with two options.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Birds circle overhead, and a light breeze shuffles through the air. It is a perfect day to be outside. What do you plan to do? +> Do something inside +The inside of the temple is reminiscent of a cave. Having been built in and on the side of a hill, the inside is rather dim. During the day a hole in the roof of the cave is opened for light to seep through, but that is only in one location. Everywhere else without sufficient light is lit with torches. + + +Aristotle's study group took the center of the temple to be under the hole in the cave. Those in the lesson sit in a semi-circle of wooden chairs with Aristotle himself at the head. + + + +> Go back to your quarters (end the day) +Before you know it, the day has gone by and you're left feeling accomplished at what you've spent the day doing. Most days since you've been at Mieza have been spent like this one. Sure the day starts with lessons, hard ones even, yet you've grown to enjoy your time here a lot. You rarely think of home anymore, and instead pour your entire being into your studies with Aristotle, your warrior prowess, and growing closer to your friends. + + +Later that night, in your quarters, you think of how lucky you are to be alive and born into the situation you are in. The gods really must love you. With that comforting thought, you fall asleep and dream dreams of never-ending happiness. +> Three years later +Given the continuity of your studies, you held onto the illusion that they would never end. This illusion, it turns out, was entirely incorrect, and of course you knew it was, but pretending that it wasn't was easier. Pretending that you were a simple son of a random noble was easier then remembering that you were the heir to the throne of the Macedonian empire. + + +So when your father sent a messenger to retrieve you from Aristotle you were shocked. Inwardly only of course. It simply wouldn't due to have everyone know that you were shocked, or in anyway disappointed by your father's summons. There was, however, a farewell for you. all of Aristotle's students gathered to bid you good fortune. Those closest to you even gave you gifts. + + +From Ptolemy you received a journal to document your travels within. You only got to know Ptolemy during the latter half of your studies, but he became a close friend quite quickly. + + +From Cassander you received a sword of the finest make. It was a memento from all of the sparring you and him did together. "To protect you when I'm not at your side," he'd told you. + + +From Hephaestion you received his very own armor set. While not as well crafted as your own, the symbolic meaning behind the gift meant leagues more than the item itself. It was a reference to yours and his most admired people in literature. Achilles and Patroclus. The pair of you often likened yourselves unto the pair of them, and would often argue just as often about which one of you were Achilles and which one was Patroclus. The pair of you would always declare to the other that yourselves Achilles, but neither one of you were ever able to convince the other of this. + + +The armor itself was a reference to, during the Trojan war, when Achilles was abstaining from fighting. During that time, the Achaeans were being driven back by the Trojans, and were in dire need of their greatest warrior, Achilles. Patroclus knew of their need, and pleaded with Achilles to return to the battle. When Achilles refused, Patroclus instead asked for Achilles armor, so that their army would think Achilles was with them, and thus fight better. Achilles obliged and Patroclus' plan worked for a time, but eventually he was slain. + + +While you and Hephaestion disagreed on whom was whom, you did agree on one thing. That the pair of you would not fall victim to death so easily like Achilles and Patroclus did. The armor was a message. "Don't die while we are separated," it seemed to say. But what Heph actually said was, "Don't return this to me with your blood on it." + + +From Aristotle you received your favorite book, The Iliad, annotated by Aristotle himself. Within it contained all of you favorite stories, and advice from Aristotle to reflect on while you read it. + + +These four gifts eclipsed all other you received, and you felt you were well prepared in all aspects to return home to your father. + + +The palace looked like it always did. Well, perhaps a tad smaller, but everything else was the same. You mother stood at the front of the palace waiting for you. The touches of old age had barely marred her features, and her brilliant blue eyes shone with tears as you approached her. + + +"Come here, Alexander." You oblige her and she immediately begins showering you with amounts of affection that only a mother could achieve. After she was done making sure you weren't hurt anywhere, she began the questioning. + + +"How did you like it?" Her voice is music to your ears. Despite having loved being away, you can admit that being back was nice, for you really do love your parents. Their strict leash on you was overbearing at times, but, looking back, they always helped you become the person you are today. Very few people could compare themselves to you without feeling grossly unqualified. + + +"I enjoyed it mother. I learned so much, and you must remind me to thank father for choosing Aristotle as my tutor. Aristotle has a brilliant mind. One perhaps greater than anyone else I've has the pleasure of acquainting." + + +You mother puts her hand on your shoulder, and steers you into the palace. "You can thank him yourself dear. He is waiting inside for you." + + +You raise your eyebrows at her. "I thought he was on preparing for another campaign?" + + +She eyes you carefully as you pass through the palace's white marble hallways. "That is actually what he wants to speak with you about." + + +Your heart skips a beat. Was your father finally going to take you on a campaign with him? You expected something similar, but you thought it would be on the next campaign he led. Certainly not this one. + + +Silence descends upon the both of you on your way to the throne room. When you get there however, that silence is easily broken from the outside. Attendants and generals surround your father's throne, all of which are speaking each one vying for the king's attention. + + +Massive white pillars line the way to the throne, and you and your mother walk square in the center of them. + + +Your presence is noticed immediately. "Alexander, my son. How good it is to see you!" Your father calls from his throne before standing up and walking to you. + + +To others his presence might be imposing, but you can only feel admiration for the man as he wraps you in a bear hug. "How went the lessons?" + + +"They went well father. Many thanks for having Aristotle be my tutor. He is quite the teacher." + + +Your father nods knowingly. "That he is. I had to rebuild an entire village for him to agree to teach for me though. He was expensive." + + +You widen your eyes slightly. You had no idea Aristotle had required such a high price for his services. + + +"But let us move on to the topic at hand. Shall we?" You nod and your father places his hand on your shoulder mirroring the position you and your mother were in moments before. He then leads you up to the throne. The attendants and generals were dispersed from it in the wake of your arrival. + + +"Go ahead Alexander. Sit in it." + + +You look at him curiously, and he meets your eyes with his. He then motions for you to go ahead and sit. Determining your father is serious, you walk up to the throne slowly. You knew that you would sit in the chair one day, but you figured that that day was still years away. After all your father was still alive, and he clearly had no intentions of dying. + + +You take a deep breath and settle your self into the throne. It was made of stark white Alabaster, and lined with silk and wool. It was very comfortable. + + +"Alexander. I now name you acting regent of Macedon. The throne is yours until I return from my campaign." Your father's face is deadly serious, and his voice is grave. You will not dishonor his trust by acting shocked or unworthy of the title. This has been what you've been training for your entire life after all. + + +It is there, sitting on the throne, that you get your first taste of real power. +> Life continues onward +Three years have passed since you were first name regent, and in those three years, you have failed more times than any other person you know. + + +It all started with the Thracians. Not too long after your father left on his campaign, Thrace rebelled against Macedon. Acing as regent, you immediately went to quell the rebellion. While it took some time and resources, you did eventually quell the rebellion. That part went alright. It was when your father returned that things went awry. Several different Thracian settlement began revolting, and, noting your previous success with quelling the previous rebellion, your father sent you to quell these revolts as well. You had to extend your army fairly thin, but you managed to keep the Thracians in line. Once that happened, your father told you to build up your army further, so you could help him in his next campaign against Athens. + + +You obliged, and everything was going well until the Illyrians made their move. For several month then, they had been making demands. Threatening to invade and other such claims. You dismissed these claims as lunacy, for everyone knew that the Illyrians could barely herd cattle. Let alone build an army threatening enough to invade the Macedonian empire. + + +You shouldn't have dismissed their claims. While the Illyrian army wasn't very large, it wasn't anything to laugh at. Especially since the majority of your army was occupied with the Thracians. Your were not nearly as well equipped to deal with the incursion as you should have been, and over half of your army was destroyed by the time your father came to intervene. + + +It was a huge disaster, and you were immediately dismissed from your general position. Even if you were his son, Philip would not have his general be failures. He needed the best of the best, and while you could've been called that in the past, your failure relieved you of that position. + + +You were no longer in charge of armies, and instead your father made you an ambassador. An ambassador! He would send you as far away from the battlefield as possible. Not because he cared for your safety. No, it was because he feared you would destroy all that he'd spent his life building up. You spent the last three years, until you were nineteen, settling minor disputes and brokering peace treaties among your empire with others. To your chagrin, you were rather good at it, and your father noticed this. He made you lead ambassador which carried a lot of authority, but you were away from battle. That assignment guaranteed that you would never be in charge of an army again. + + +Well at least until now. Tensions between Athens and Macedon are at an all time high, and war between the two have all but started. The only key left to knock into place was Thebes. The two last powerful kingdoms in Greece not under you father's control were Athens and Thebes, but unlike Athens, Thebes had not yet taken a side. So, your father sent you, the lead ambassador, to see if you could win Thebes to your side. He told you this, and punctuated it with a promise. If you were able to win Thebes from Athens, then you would finally get your own army again. He must've seen that your heart still yearned for the battlefield. + + + ~ + + +Those were the thoughts going through your head as you were led into the Theban palace. Similar in Architecture to the palace back home, the Theban palace stood as a beacon of hope for Athens. A beacon that you had to put out. + + +A theban attendant led you through the palace and into the throne room of the King of Thebes. White marble walls were everywhere you looked, and the throne room even had the same marble pillars leading up to the throne itself. The throne that the king was currently seated at. He was a grey eyed man. His wasn't young, yet his black hair hadn't started to grey either. He had an air of confidence and security that only a King could muster. + + +"Greetings majesty." You bow down slightly, as is only respectful when in the throne room of another king. That, and you are trying to win his favor. + + +"I am Prince Alexander of Macedon. Sent here on behalf of King Philip of Macedon. I would have words with you regarding your loyalties in the coming war." + + +The king regards you calmly. "What say you Demosthenes?" + + +It is only then that you notice a man standing beside the Throne. Greying brown hair sits in an orderly mop atop his head, and intelligent, if arrogant, eyes bore into you from him. You inwardly cringe as you here the name. Demosthenes. One of the most influential individuals in ll of Greece, and certainly the most influential person in Athens. The Athenian ambassador got here before you did. + + +"I would not put him away out right, your majesty, but I doubt anything he says will be of much consequence to you." You can practically feel the odds of your success stacking against you here. "He is Philip's son after all. He would only seek to control you." + + +The king listens, but doesn't make any expressions on his face that would give way to what he is thinking. + + +You're in a tough spot. Demosthenes already got to the king, so anything you say will most likely be second source information. +> Tell the truth +"Your majesty." You begin. "Truth be told. My father is a very brash man, and can quite often be forgettable. Despite this, he is the greatest warrior and leader Macedon has ever known. He is brilliant on the battlefield, and has won many battles in which the odds were stacked against him. Many mistake him for a god when pitted against him on the battlefield. I assure you. You will not be any different if you go against him in war." + + +Your throat feels dry and you swallow nervously. "Plot with Athens all you want. This will not change the outcome unless you side with us. It would be a shame for a city so great to be razed to the ground just because the king was fooled into believing he had a chance at defeating Macedon." + + +"Athens has already sealed their fate. don't seal yours as well," you finish with that. + + +The room is deadly silent for several infinite moments. The king finally speaks. + + +"You toe a dangerous line Alexander of Macedon. Any more threats and would have had you executed, but you do have a point." + + +"You majes-" Demosthenes begins, but the king waves him silent. + + +"Send a messenger to Philip telling him that I would speak to him in person before finalizing any sort of treaty being made." The king regards you for a moment longer. "And find the prince a room." + + +You let go of a breath you hadn't realized you'd been holding in. You managed to get your father the opportunity to make a treaty with the king. You only hope that this will be enough for you to get your army back. + + + +> Continue +A guard walks you to your temporary rooms, and you get pretty solid rest that night all things considered. In the coming days the meeting is set, and all of the necessary arrangements are prepared. The meeting will be one month from the day you convinced the king to agree with you. + + +You stay on edge for the first week or so of your stay there, but soon you start to relax as you grow more and more confident that you won't be killed in your sleep. However, you still avoid Demosthenes and the king as much as possible, for you don't want to unnecessarily provoke them. + + +The month passes by fairly quickly, and before you know it the night before the meeting comes. You go to sleep early in anticipation thereof. + + +Unfortunately for you, you aren't able to see how the meeting goes, for you are stabbed in your sleep. You guess that they could only deal with so many Macedonian royalty at one time.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Three years have passed since you were first name regent, and in those three years, you have failed more times than any other person you know. + + +It all started with the Thracians. Not too long after your father left on his campaign, Thrace rebelled against Macedon. Acing as regent, you immediately went to quell the rebellion. While it took some time and resources, you did eventually quell the rebellion. That part went alright. It was when your father returned that things went awry. Several different Thracian settlement began revolting, and, noting your previous success with quelling the previous rebellion, your father sent you to quell these revolts as well. You had to extend your army fairly thin, but you managed to keep the Thracians in line. Once that happened, your father told you to build up your army further, so you could help him in his next campaign against Athens. + + +You obliged, and everything was going well until the Illyrians made their move. For several month then, they had been making demands. Threatening to invade and other such claims. You dismissed these claims as lunacy, for everyone knew that the Illyrians could barely herd cattle. Let alone build an army threatening enough to invade the Macedonian empire. + + +You shouldn't have dismissed their claims. While the Illyrian army wasn't very large, it wasn't anything to laugh at. Especially since the majority of your army was occupied with the Thracians. Your were not nearly as well equipped to deal with the incursion as you should have been, and over half of your army was destroyed by the time your father came to intervene. + + +It was a huge disaster, and you were immediately dismissed from your general position. Even if you were his son, Philip would not have his general be failures. He needed the best of the best, and while you could've been called that in the past, your failure relieved you of that position. + + +You were no longer in charge of armies, and instead your father made you an ambassador. An ambassador! He would send you as far away from the battlefield as possible. Not because he cared for your safety. No, it was because he feared you would destroy all that he'd spent his life building up. You spent the last three years, until you were nineteen, settling minor disputes and brokering peace treaties among your empire with others. To your chagrin, you were rather good at it, and your father noticed this. He made you lead ambassador which carried a lot of authority, but you were away from battle. That assignment guaranteed that you would never be in charge of an army again. + + +Well at least until now. Tensions between Athens and Macedon are at an all time high, and war between the two have all but started. The only key left to knock into place was Thebes. The two last powerful kingdoms in Greece not under you father's control were Athens and Thebes, but unlike Athens, Thebes had not yet taken a side. So, your father sent you, the lead ambassador, to see if you could win Thebes to your side. He told you this, and punctuated it with a promise. If you were able to win Thebes from Athens, then you would finally get your own army again. He must've seen that your heart still yearned for the battlefield. + + + ~ + + +Those were the thoughts going through your head as you were led into the Theban palace. Similar in Architecture to the palace back home, the Theban palace stood as a beacon of hope for Athens. A beacon that you had to put out. + + +A theban attendant led you through the palace and into the throne room of the King of Thebes. White marble walls were everywhere you looked, and the throne room even had the same marble pillars leading up to the throne itself. The throne that the king was currently seated at. He was a grey eyed man. His wasn't young, yet his black hair hadn't started to grey either. He had an air of confidence and security that only a King could muster. + + +"Greetings majesty." You bow down slightly, as is only respectful when in the throne room of another king. That, and you are trying to win his favor. + + +"I am Prince Alexander of Macedon. Sent here on behalf of King Philip of Macedon. I would have words with you regarding your loyalties in the coming war." + + +The king regards you calmly. "What say you Demosthenes?" + + +It is only then that you notice a man standing beside the Throne. Greying brown hair sits in an orderly mop atop his head, and intelligent, if arrogant, eyes bore into you from him. You inwardly cringe as you here the name. Demosthenes. One of the most influential individuals in ll of Greece, and certainly the most influential person in Athens. The Athenian ambassador got here before you did. + + +"I would not put him away out right, your majesty, but I doubt anything he says will be of much consequence to you." You can practically feel the odds of your success stacking against you here. "He is Philip's son after all. He would only seek to control you." + + +The king listens, but doesn't make any expressions on his face that would give way to what he is thinking. + + +You're in a tough spot. Demosthenes already got to the king, so anything you say will most likely be second source information. +> Tell the "truth" +"Your majesty," you begin. "My father only wishes for peace among us." Demosthenes scoffs. "Yes. Even with Athens. He would have us all join together and form a coalition. We would finally bring all of Greece under one banner, and we would be powerful and rich beyond compare, and best of all we'd treat each other as equals." + + +The king looks amused, and Demosthenes looks more than a little skeptical. + + +"A triumvirate would be formed, and all decisions would be made together. Demosthenes, you would be granted a special place therein. You would no longer have to bow to the whims of your people's so called democracy." He stands there expressionless, as if considering your offer. "We would become the most powerful empire in the world." You close with that, and anxiously await their reactions. + + +They look at each other for a moment, before the King stands up and walks over to you. You don't allow him to intimidate you, and instead stand your ground and hold his penetrating gaze. + + +"Alexander. You would have me believe that your father would not kill us and take emperorship for himself at the first opportunity he gets?" He laughs in your face. "That is a fool's hope. Almost as foolish as you blatantly lying in my presence." + + +He waves his hands in a quick motion and two guards restrain and force you to your knees while a third one gives the king a sword with a gem encrusted hilt. + + +"My father will avenge me." You say this, but you wonder if they hear the uncertainty in your voice. The king certainly does. + + +"He won't care. You fell out of favor with him long ago. He probably won't even ask for your body." + + +Those are the last words you hear, before the sound of a sword swinging through the air fills your ears. You don't feel any pain as the king of Thebes separates your head from your shoulders.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You'd gone into Aristotle's classes with your expectation wildly low, and came out with your expectations blown out of the water. + + +You didn't expect to learn very much, yet you've never learned more. + + +You didn't expect the tutor to be very amiable, yet Aristotle is like the grandfather you never knew. + + +You never expected to find a place where you would feel more at home than your real home, yet here it is before you. + + +You sit outside the temple entrance gazing around the near about endless fields and forests. Many different activities are going on, including sparring, horse riding, tree climbing. + + +Your normal lessons are done for the day, and you are left with a few other things to spend your time doing. All of the activities you see going on are available to you, but if you feel tired then you could also just head to your quarters and fall asleep. +> Go to sleep +You already finished your lessons for the day, so why not get some rest? You don't have anything else planned for the day, so it works out perfectly for you. Besides, even princes need rest from the monotony of academy life. One could even say you are doing the smart thing by taking a nap. + + +Therefore you head through to the temple and to your quarters for some rest. +> Waking up +After a few hours, you groggily wake up. Post nap fatigue assails you, and you wonder if you should even get up to check what time it is. You really want to go to sleep, but a quiet nagging voice tells you that you should probably do something with your day. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This was the day. Your father searched for a long time, and now he finally found someone who he thought would be able to tutor you well enough. He'd been searching ever since it became obvious that there was nothing more for Leonidas to teach you, and Leonidas was no push over when it came to scholarship. Finding someone that would not only be better than Leonidas, but better than yourself as well would not be an easy task. That being said, your father did say he found someone "suitable for your needs," and who were you to argue with your father? + + +Even though you accepted having a new tutor, you remained skeptical even as you went to your very first lesson. It was a ways away from your home at the temple of the nymphs in a small village called Mieza. This doubly confused you, for surely a great tutor such as the one your father found would be quartered in a palace like that of the one you live in. + + +Despite all of this, you were content, for there were many pros to this change in tutorship as well. For example, Hephaestion was to be tutored at your side along with a host of other nobilties' youth. You would be taught in a similar environment to the famed Academy of Plato, but you would also be taught further the art of swordsmanship along with various other talents. + + +All in all you hoped it would be an interesting experience. + + +Hephaestion shared this sentiment aloud as the pair of you made your way to the temple. + + +"I hope this goes well." + + +You yawn idly. "I'm sure it will. It's only another tutor, and this time we'll actually be learning together," you point out. + + +"That is true, but honestly, I'm more worried about you than me. I know I have many things to learn, but Alex, you're accelerating at a rate far beyond me." + + +You don't respond. He is right after all. Your main reservation is that you might end up being woefully bored, and simply outclass anyone else there. + + +Silence comes over you and Hephaestion until you make it out of Mieza entirely. The temple itself was located on the side of a hill, and was said to be pretty rustic in nature. Another interesting aspect of this whole escapade. + + +"Are you sure we're going the right way?" You ask Hephaestion. + + +He nods readily. "Of course. If I didn't memorize the way here, then you would've gotten lost for sure." + + +About an hour passes by, and you repeat the question. + + +"Yes I know where we're going. Stop with the uncertainty. Don't you trust me?" Hephaestion questions. + + +"Yes I do, but I thought the temple was much less than an hour away." + + +Hephaestion shrugs. "I guess you were wrong then. It happens." He says this confidently. You wouldn't normally allow people to insult your honor so easily, but it was honestly one of the things you liked about Hephaestion. He's honest, and honesty is a valuable gift when your royalty, as people tend to lie to gain your favor. + + +Nearly another hour passes by, and you find your patience wearing thin. Hephaestion said that you were going the right way, but this was taking an inordinately long time. + + +Luckily for the both of you, you see an older man in traveling robes heading along the road ahead of you. + + +You start to jog off in the direction of the man when you hear Hephaestion call out from behind you. "Where are you going?" + + +"To ask for directions. That gentleman over there looks like he knows where he's going." + + +"And I don't?" + + +You hesitate, for you'd rather not offend your best friend, but at the same time you don't even know if he knows where he's going. +> Trust Hephaestion +"I do trust you." You tell him this and a look of relief and shock come over his face. "Lead the way." + + +"Well then," Hephaestion starts. "This is not at all what was supposed to happen." + + +"What?" You ask confusedly. + + +"Let's go ask that man for directions." Hephaestion says, and you only grow more confused. + + +"Wait, why? didn't you already know how to get there." + + +"Just trust me on this. Okay?" + + +You thought you were already trusting him by letting him lead, but you do what he says and start jogging over to the man. You hear Hephaestion follow behind you. As you approach, the man turns around and looks the both of you over. You do the same to him. Grey traveling robes adorn him, and his short cropped hair and beard are a mix of dull brown and grey. The fellow is older than you, but not quite as old as you first thought. + + +You speak first. "Greetings. Do you happen to know of a temple nearby, or somewhere hereabouts?" + + +The man nods, "Yes, as a matter of fact I do. Are you two headed over there right now?" He glances at Hephaestion, and before you can respond Hephaestion speaks. + + +"We were headed over there just now, but my friend thought it expedient to make sure we were going the right way despite my adamant claims that we were going the right direction." + + +You turn around bewildered that your friend would give a stranger so much information, but Hephaestion doesn't meet your eyes so your glaring has no effect on him. You turn around as the man begins to speak. + + +"Well done Hephaestion. You executed your job perfectly. Many thanks." + + +If you were bewildered before, then you were astonishingly confused now. Neither of you offered your names to the stranger, yet he called Hephaestion by name. + + +The man straightens his back, and begins to circle you. He looks you up and down in a very obvious way. "I take it this is Alexander?" + + +He addresses Hephaestion whom immediately respond. "Yes sir." + + +Honorifics too? Who is this guy to make Hephaestion respect him so? The only other people he respected as much were his and your own parents. + + +"Who are you?" Your voice is flavored with curiosity, and confusion. + + +The man doesn't speak, but simply continues looking you over. Hephaestion instead responds. + + +"Remember when I told you we were going to the temple?" You nod your acknowledgement. "Well that was only a half truth. Even if we did go to the temple, there wouldn't be a tutor there." He glances over to the stranger. "Well at least not yet." + + +You turn back and look the men over again when you finally realize what Hephaestion is hinting at. + + +Hephaestion continues. "He met with me several days ago and asked for me to arrange this. Evidently he wanted to meet with you outside the temple because as soon as we got there, he had no intention of paying you special treatment." + + +You repeat your question to the man once more. "Who are you?" + + +The man's brown eyes meet your own, and you see a intelligent look in them. As if he simply knows all of the answers to any questions you might pose. "My name," he says, "is Aristotle."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>From age eight to ten, you entered a period of extensive training. Your father Philip decided that if you were to be his heir to the throne, then you needed to be trained to your utmost potential. Your mother shared in this sentiment, and together they cracked down on you. No more were you able to manipulate them into letting you skip lessons, and from then on you were to be disciplined like a soldier. + + +Most other kids would crack under the pressure, but you? You did no such thing. Instead of buckling under the weight of heavy familial, social, and political expectations, you thrived. You went from second best at combat (among the kids your age) to first in a matter of months. Your best friend, Hephaestion was second, and another kid, Cassander, called Cass, was third. Beyond that you began to throw yourself into studies of philosophy, and history at an unprecedented rate. You were even beginning to be more well read than the average adult. Even if your parents wouldn't fall for it anymore, you still practiced manipulating others to do what you wanted them to do. + + +You progressed so well in all aspects of your life that you were even beginning to question your doubts that you were Artemis' chosen. How else could you excel at everything so well? Everyone was impressed by you and your passion to better yourself, but among those that were, your mother stands far above the rest. She was so proud of you that she even suggested to you father that he should start taking you with him on his kingly matters. + + +It was for this reason that you now stood beside your father in a field outside the palace. You father recently found himself in need of a horse, and not just any horse, but one of superior quality and breed. A thessalonian merchant must've caught wind of this, and so brought his best horse to present to Philip. + + +The black stallion was a beautiful horse. Even for a king. Your father was wildly impressed, so much in fact that when the merchant charged him three times the amount for it your father was quite agreeable. + + +Agreeable until he tried to mount the horse that is. Every time Philip neared the horse, it would trot away. your father tried several times to mount it, but each and every time he was either thrown off or unable to mount at all. It was quite the spectacle, for your father was not a man of weakness. He was humbled greatly, and you as well to see your father fail, by the experience. + + +Heated, your father stalked back towards the merchant. "I refuse to pay for a horse that I cannot ride. What use is it to me if it doesn't do what I wish?" + + +"Please reconsider, my liege. He really is a fine horse. If you would but try once more, I'm sure you would be able to ride him," the thessalonian merchant pleaded. + + +But your father wouldn't hear of it. "I've tried many of times yet. Surely I cannot rely on a horse in battle if it is this rebellious." Your father waved the merchant away, then approached you. + + +You look your father over. Anger surges across his features, but you know him well enough to not just see the anger. Disappointment colors his features. A little bit of regret as well. It was plain as day to you that he wanted that horse, for even now he stares longingly at the black stallion. + + +You follow his gaze and watch as the merchant's stable hands try and lead the horse away. Each time one of the men try and grab its reins the horse rears up defensively. You watch amused as they fail at what was supposed to be their job. You find it so appalling that you cannot simply stay silent and watch as they timidly approach the horse. + + +"You thessalonians lose out on an excellent horse because you lack the boldness to even manage him." You laugh brazenly. For a youth of ten, you could be quite condescending. + + +Your father turns to look at you somewhat bewildered. "Why do you rebuke those older than you as if you could do any better?" + + +The merchant looks just as shocked as your father. "If you think you can do any better, than be my honored guest my liege." Haughty, he continues. "In fact, if you are able to tame him, then you can keep the horse for free." + + +The offer sounds tempting, and everyone's eyes turn to you. +> Refuse +You bite your tongue. Your father couldn't even tame the beast. How could you ever hope to do it? You wish you'd never spoken. + + +When you don't respond the merchant laughs. "All talk but no action. Just as I thought." + + +You stay silent, but your father won't have anyone insulting his son. "You had a right to issue a challenge against my son, but cross that boundary and I will see to it that you never walk again." + + +Fear and regret alights the merchant's eyes and he quickly asks for forgiveness before hurrying and trying to rein in the majestic horse. You watch on shamefully. After finally entering the good graces of your father, you go and ruin it by becoming an embarrassment. You feel your father's gaze on you and you turn to face him. + + +"I wouldn't have expected you to do it anyway son." + + +You nod absently as if you aren't affected by your failure, but you could see, practically feel, the loss of respect from your father and anyone else watching. You tilt your head down in shame and pray to the gods for the day to be over with. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The hints were subtle, but the hints were there and you caught them. Leonidas was asking you questions until you were able to answer. It was smart of him to teach you in the very way that you were trying to divine. + + +"By asking questions until the answer was found." + + +A smile stretches across Leonidas' face. "Brilliant Alexander. I knew you'd get the answer." + + +You can't help the small smile that comes across your face, and you and Leonidas share a moment of kinship together before Leonidas expounds upon Socrates' method. + + +The rest of the lesson goes famously, and you end up having, dare you think it, fun. It ends all too quickly and soon you're presented with another question. + + +"Which lesson do you want to do next?" +> Etiquette +"Etiquette." + + +Leonidas raises his eyebrows in surprise and in mild horror. This is his least favorite subject, and it shows plainly on his face. He is not happy with your choice. "I suppose that we can do etiquette..." He trails off as he walks to a a shelf by his main work desk. On it are several different devices of etiquette including: various brass utensils, the lyre, and a book which you know contains the proper ways to communicate. + + +While he is turned around, you look out a window on the opposite side of the room. Some of the nobles' youth are practicing their skills with wooden swords outside. You yearn to go with them, but your conscious tells you to stay in your lessons. + + +Barring your conscious, you really just want to go play with the other kids, and, you realize, that this is the perfect opportunity to sneak out. Leonidas has his back turned wile rifling through the proper etiquette book. If you left then you think he'd probably be happy. After all he doesn't want to do etiquette either. +> Sneak out and play with the other kids +This is a great opportunity and you aren't going to miss it. You quietly stand up, then tip toe out of the room. You continue walking quietly until you are out of that hallway entirely. The white marbled walls once again grace your eyes with their brilliance as you make your way outside. Eventually you make your way out, and find the hill where you saw the other kids playing. + + +You've played with some of he nobles' kids before, but you never manage to remember their names. Well except for one. That one stands in the middle of a circle of boys your age. His name is Hephaestion. You've never had many friends, but if there was one person you would call a friend, then it would be him. He stands engaged in combat with one other guy. You watch the fight as you approach the mass of raucous kids. + + +Hephaestion and the other kid stand on opposite sides of the circle with each one wielding a wooden practice sword. Hephaestion makes the first move charging with a simple overhand strike at the other kid who manages to block it, and make a swing of his own at Hephaestion's side. That is promptly blocked and parried away. Capitalizing on his advantage, Hephaestion surges forward with a lunge. This attack does not get blocked and the other kid soon drops into a heap on the ground. You then hear a chorus of cries. + + +"Come on, Cass. You had that!" + + +"Now Hephaestion gets to go again!" + + +"We all knew you would lose!" + + +The kid, Cass, struggles up from the ground and shouts back at them. "I'd like to see any of you beat him!" + + +Hephaestion holds a smile throughout all of this, and you think it's high time you put him in his place. + + +"I'll do it." You say this at normal volume, but no one seems to hear you. They haven't even noticed you for that matter, so you try a different tactic. + + +You start shoving your way through the group. "I'll do it!" You shout over the arguing of everyone else, and everyone's eyes go to you as you break the center. Silence holds everyone's hands, and Cass simply gives his sword to you. No one speaks a word, for this is the fight. Whenever you do play with these guys, everything always boils down to this fight. You versus Hephaestion. It had taken on a kind of sacred aura, and as such the fight was given utmost reverence. + + +You enter into your ready stance, and Hephaestion follows. Hephaestion usually bests you in these bouts, but you feel that today is different. The only thing left to decide is how you'll fight. +> Use superior strength +In times past you've allowed yourself to be worn down by Hephaestion's aggressive attacks. Not this time. This time you'll give him some of his own medicine. + + +You open up like he did against Cass. A charging overhead strike, and like the previous fight it is readily blocked. Unlike the previous fight, you don't allow him to attack. Instead you push his block with your sword to create space, then attack again. You keep on pressing attack, and but Hephaestion doesn't budge. You appear to panic, and so make a slow, weak horizontal strike at his side. Hephaestion sees an opening and instead of blocking your weak attack he swings down at your head. + + +Just like you wanted. + + +Your swing changes from a horizontal strike to a side strike at his sword. You put all of your strength into it and when the blades clash, Hephaestion's sword is sent flying. He stumbles back onto his posterior, and you point your wooden sword at his neck in triumph. + + +The silence is continued for a moment longer before a cheer goes out among your fellows. It invigorated them to see Hephaestion defeated. You meet his eyes and a grin goes across both of your faces before you help him back up. + + +"You got me that time Alex, but I'll win next time." + + +"I'd have to disagree," you respond with victory alighting your soul. + + +"I'm sorry, but it's the truth." + + +You're about to make a retort when Hephaestion groans. "Your uncle." He points behind you and at the palace. + + +Leonidas stands at the window you found yourself at just a short while ago. He gestures for you to come inside. You find yourself sighing. + + +"Teach these boys a thing or two, will you Hephaestion?" + + +He nods readily. "Don't die of boredom." + + +You go back inside the palace, through the hallways and back to Leonidas' study. He's already in his chair waiting. + + +"I'm sorry," you begin, but he holds up his hand. + + +"It's fine Alexander. Let's just move on to a different topic. Shall we?" + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This is a great opportunity and you aren't going to miss it. You quietly stand up, then tip toe out of the room. You continue walking quietly until you are out of that hallway entirely. The white marbled walls once again grace your eyes with their brilliance as you make your way outside. Eventually you make your way out, and find the hill where you saw the other kids playing. + + +You've played with some of he nobles' kids before, but you never manage to remember their names. Well except for one. That one stands in the middle of a circle of boys your age. His name is Hephaestion. You've never had many friends, but if there was one person you would call a friend, then it would be him. He stands engaged in combat with one other guy. You watch the fight as you approach the mass of raucous kids. + + +Hephaestion and the other kid stand on opposite sides of the circle with each one wielding a wooden practice sword. Hephaestion makes the first move charging with a simple overhand strike at the other kid who manages to block it, and make a swing of his own at Hephaestion's side. That is promptly blocked and parried away. Capitalizing on his advantage, Hephaestion surges forward with a lunge. This attack does not get blocked and the other kid soon drops into a heap on the ground. You then hear a chorus of cries. + + +"Come on, Cass. You had that!" + + +"Now Hephaestion gets to go again!" + + +"We all knew you would lose!" + + +The kid, Cass, struggles up from the ground and shouts back at them. "I'd like to see any of you beat him!" + + +Hephaestion holds a smile throughout all of this, and you think it's high time you put him in his place. + + +"I'll do it." You say this at normal volume, but no one seems to hear you. They haven't even noticed you for that matter, so you try a different tactic. + + +You start shoving your way through the group. "I'll do it!" You shout over the arguing of everyone else, and everyone's eyes go to you as you break the center. Silence holds everyone's hands, and Cass simply gives his sword to you. No one speaks a word, for this is the fight. Whenever you do play with these guys, everything always boils down to this fight. You versus Hephaestion. It had taken on a kind of sacred aura, and as such the fight was given utmost reverence. + + +You enter into your ready stance, and Hephaestion follows. Hephaestion usually bests you in these bouts, but you feel that today is different. The only thing left to decide is how you'll fight. +> Out maneuver him +In your experience, Hephaestion is a very aggressive fighter. If you can get him to overextend, then you could very well walk away with victory today. As such, Hephaestion is the first one to attack. + + +Testing the waters, he quickly lunges forward only really using his arms as to not commit himself to the strike. You simply take a step or two backward to avoid the blow. Hephaestion attacks again, and you dodge again. Never attacking, but always ready to, you wait for your opportunity to arise. + + +Hephaestion, mistaking your hesitance to attack for weakness, quickly goes on the aggressive. Strike after strike come toward you, but you dodge them whilst making it look like you're on the run. Hephaestion doesn't seem to notice, and his form turns lax. Moments after, your opportunity comes. + + +He swings down in a deadly arc towards your right shoulder, and the swing carries a lot of power, but the harder he swings, the easier it is for him to overextend. You quickly dash toward his strike and let his sword run along the length of yours. His momentum carries him past you and he stumbles. You take the opportunity and plant your foot into his backside. He then goes tumbling to the grassy ground at your feet. You quickly place your wooden sword's tip beneath his chin. + + +Silence continues for a moment longer before a cheer goes out among your fellows. It invigorated them to see Hephaestion defeated. You meet his eyes and a grin goes across both of your faces before you help him back up. + + +"You got me that time Alex, but I'll win next time." + + +"I'd have to disagree," you respond with victory alighting your soul. + + +"I'm sorry, but it's the truth." + + +You're about to make a retort when Hephaestion groans. "Your uncle." He points behind you and at the palace. + + +Leonidas stands at the window you found yourself at just a short while ago. He gestures for you to come inside. You find yourself sighing. + + +"Teach these boys a thing or two, will you Hephaestion?" + + +He nods readily. "Don't die of boredom." + + +You go back inside the palace, through the hallways and back to Leonidas' study. He's already in his chair waiting. + + +"I'm sorry," you begin, but he holds up his hand. + + +"It's fine Alexander. Let's just move on to a different topic. Shall we?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Etiquette." + + +Leonidas raises his eyebrows in surprise and in mild horror. This is his least favorite subject, and it shows plainly on his face. He is not happy with your choice. "I suppose that we can do etiquette..." He trails off as he walks to a a shelf by his main work desk. On it are several different devices of etiquette including: various brass utensils, the lyre, and a book which you know contains the proper ways to communicate. + + +While he is turned around, you look out a window on the opposite side of the room. Some of the nobles' youth are practicing their skills with wooden swords outside. You yearn to go with them, but your conscious tells you to stay in your lessons. + + +Barring your conscious, you really just want to go play with the other kids, and, you realize, that this is the perfect opportunity to sneak out. Leonidas has his back turned wile rifling through the proper etiquette book. If you left then you think he'd probably be happy. After all he doesn't want to do etiquette either. +> Stay in your lesson +As much as you want to practice your fighting skills, you can't just leave Leonidas here. For all you know mother might get mad at him again. + + +You wait patiently as Leonidas decides how to teach you, and before long he walks back over to his seat with the Etiquette 'manual' in hand. He begins the lesson by teaching you the various ways you are supposed to address foreign dignitaries, and then having you memorize them and repeat them back to him. + + +This grows quite tedious and you find yourself whistling some nameless tune. Anything to break the monotony of blanket memorization. After a while you realize that Leonidas has stopped asking you questions, and instead is just listening to you whistle. The sudden attention surprises you and you break off your whistling. + + +"What's wrong Uncle?" + + +He shakes his head idly. "Nothing's wrong. The opposite in fact." You raise your eyebrows surprised and somewhat curiously. + + +Leonidas gets up from his seat and walks back to his materials shelf. He puts the manual back, and instead grabs the lyre you saw earlier. He's never once given you the opportunity to play it before. + + +"Let's see how you do with this Alexander," he hands you the lyre, which you take gingerly, + + +He waits expectantly. + + +"I don't know how to play it," you tell him. + + +"Give it your best shot." + + +Seeing no way out of it, you start to struma few strings. After you figure out the basic sounds of each string you attempt to play craft a melody. You think it sounds great, but Leonidas' expressing denotes otherwise. + + +"That's fine enough for starters, but I think you can do better. If you're willing to commit, Alexander, then I can teach you this instrument. It is a hard thing to do, but i think it's well within your reach. What do you say?" +> Yes +You once heard your father say that there are two things that'll make a girl fall for you. The first: If you you fight honorably. The second: If you can play an instrument. Your answer was simple when you remembered that. + + +"Yes." + + +A smile crosses Leonidas' face. "Alright then. We can begin immediately." + + +Throughout the rest of your lesson he teaches you the basic concept and notes of the lyre. Before too long, however, Leonidas decides that you better move onto something else. + + +"What do you want to study next?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As much as you want to practice your fighting skills, you can't just leave Leonidas here. For all you know mother might get mad at him again. + + +You wait patiently as Leonidas decides how to teach you, and before long he walks back over to his seat with the Etiquette 'manual' in hand. He begins the lesson by teaching you the various ways you are supposed to address foreign dignitaries, and then having you memorize them and repeat them back to him. + + +This grows quite tedious and you find yourself whistling some nameless tune. Anything to break the monotony of blanket memorization. After a while you realize that Leonidas has stopped asking you questions, and instead is just listening to you whistle. The sudden attention surprises you and you break off your whistling. + + +"What's wrong Uncle?" + + +He shakes his head idly. "Nothing's wrong. The opposite in fact." You raise your eyebrows surprised and somewhat curiously. + + +Leonidas gets up from his seat and walks back to his materials shelf. He puts the manual back, and instead grabs the lyre you saw earlier. He's never once given you the opportunity to play it before. + + +"Let's see how you do with this Alexander," he hands you the lyre, which you take gingerly, + + +He waits expectantly. + + +"I don't know how to play it," you tell him. + + +"Give it your best shot." + + +Seeing no way out of it, you start to struma few strings. After you figure out the basic sounds of each string you attempt to play craft a melody. You think it sounds great, but Leonidas' expressing denotes otherwise. + + +"That's fine enough for starters, but I think you can do better. If you're willing to commit, Alexander, then I can teach you this instrument. It is a hard thing to do, but i think it's well within your reach. What do you say?" +> No +You don't know why else you have an aversion to it, but you feel like if you start to learn the lyre, you won't have very much time for anything else. + + +"No.' + + +Leonidas frowns. "That's a shame. I feel like you could have been one of the greatest musicians of our time. " + + +When you don't say anything he simply moves on. + + +"What lesson would you like to learn next?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Now that you're here you're left with very few options, so you choose the lesser of three evils. It's the lesser, because your uncle's primary vehicle in which he teaches philosophy is debate. Debate is more fun than simply memorizing things, hence the lesser. + + +"Philosophy." + + +"Good choice, my boy." You watch as a spark lights in the man's eyes. A true scholar indeed, for, you think, that only a scholar truly devoted to his studies could find enjoyment in such a task. + + +"Do you remember where we left off?" + + +"We were learning about Socrates and..." you trail off when you fail to remember what exactly about Socrates you were learning. + + +"Questions," Leonidas supplies readily. + + +"Questions?" + + +"Yes." + + +"What does Socrates have to do with questions?" + + +"What did Socrates spend his life doing?" + + +"Teaching philosophy, right?" + + +"How did he teach?" + + +You rack your brain. + + + +> "Using an open forum style to have his students debate." +"I'm afraid that's incorrect Alexander." He looks disappointed in you. "Guess again."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You cling to your mother robes as tightly as possible, and look up into her eyes with a sad look on your face. She loves it when you hug her like that, and when you look at her with your sky blue eyes, she melts under your fingertips. It makes her want to sweep you into her arms, and hold you forever. You think it's because you remind her of you when you were just a baby, but what your mother often forgets is that you are the son of King Philip the Great, and Queen Olympias the God-Blessed. Thus, you are unnaturally talented in everything you've ever tried. So you can even trick the queen into doing what you want. Well at least that's what you think. Everyone else, including your parents, tell you that you're talented because you've been chosen by the Gods. That Artemis herself was there when you were born, and, what most people keep secret from you, that Artemis revived your mother when she died giving birth to you. + + +At the prime age of eight, you aren't sure if you believe that. + + +Your dad's friends die all the time, and no Gods or Goddesses ever rescue them. You've never even heard of anyone being resurrected before, and even if it were possible, why your mother? Not that you're ungrateful if such a thing did happen, but why of all people her? You asked your mother once, and she just shook her head at you and told you not to worry about it. So then you went and asked Uncle Leonidas, and he just told you to continue your lessons and leave things like that to the adults. You responded by telling him he was being too condescending, and he nearly choked on the apple he was eating. Apparently six-year olds aren't supposed to know words that big. + + +You still don't have an answer to that question, but as you get older an older you care less and less. What matters is that your mom is here beside you... + + +...and that by being affectionate to her, you can postpone Leonidas' lessons. Your mom holds you tightly to her, and you think that your plan will go through, but then she lets go. + + +"Go to your lessons, Alexander. You can't keep Leonidas waiting." She smiles and hugs you one last time, before motioning to your personal handmaiden, Lanike. "Take him to Leonidas." + + +So today is one of those days. Your father left yesterday on another campaign, and it has mother sad. It's times like these that she likes to be alone, so like a good kid you oblige your mother's wishes. She did birth you after all. + + +Lanike grabs your hand and leads you from the room. Of all the women you know, Lanike and your mother are perhaps the only two that you will readily allow to touch you. If Goddesses really did exist, then there must have been some involved with the creation of this person. Beautiful black hair falls in loose curls around her perfect face. Her high cheekbones and rosy hue to her face compliment her appearance in an exemplary way. She was very young for a royal handmaid. Apparently her appearance wasn't the only good thing about her, for she worked her way up to this position through hard work and determination. The only two things, your father tells you, that can usurp latent talent. + + +The pair of you make your way to Leonidas' study, but as you near, your desire to to follow your mother's command dwindles. Leonidas was usually so engrossed in his paperwork that he barely notices when you're there anyway. You and Lanike turn down the hallway leading to your uncle's room and you find your opportunity dwindling. You still might be able to convince Lanike to let you skip the lessons. She is quite fond of you after all. +> Go to your lessons +While you really don't want to go to your lessons, you also don't want to disobey your mother. That, and there's the chance you might put Lanike in a bad spot with your mother. You'd rather avoid your mother's wrath entirely, for lessons can always end, but when your mother kindles her wrath, it can stay ablaze for several months at a time. It's quite unlike your father's wrath which flares up at the most unexpected times, burn hot, then turns to ash. + + +You yawn and the pair of you continue onward to Leonidas' study. When you two get there, Leonidas is sitting in a polished wooden chair with a book in hand. His desk is positioned behind him, and another chair is sitting in front of him. Several bookshelves line the walls, and each of the shelves are filled with copious scrolls, parchments, and a few bound books. + + +"You're late, Alexander." his voice sounds like your mother's, filled with authority, but the similarities end there. While your mother has fiery red hair, Leonidas has dull brown hair. Even their facial structures are wildly different. The only thing they really have in common, aside from their demeanor, is their color eyes which, like yours, are sky blue. + + +"His mother kept him longer than expected." Lanike immediately comes to your defense. + + +"Hm. Is that so? It can't be helped then ." He says this, but doesn't sound at all convinced. "Now come Alexander. We have work to do." + + +Lanike ruffles your tousled golden hair one last time disappearing into the hallway. She'll be back in a few hours to pick you up. + + +You sit in the chair across from your Uncle. + + +"Alright. What shall we start with?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your name is Daniel Dalton, you were born in 1870 and by 1890 you were a Lawman in the Old West. You arrested law breakers and helped keep the peace. You were a good man. You always knew you would be a good man because your five brothers were good men: Frank was a lawman in Arkansas, Grat was a lawman in Oklahoma and Bob was a lawman in Kansas. Another brother Bill was a lawyer in California, fighting for justice in the courts. You and your younger brother Emmett were Special Policemen in the Indian Territory. You were all good people. + + +But somehow everything went wrong. + + +It began when you were seventeen and your oldest brother Frank was killed in a gunfight with a gang of outlaws. It inspired you and your brothers to become Lawmen and you all served bravely, at one time Grat was shot in the arm by outlaws while during his service Bob killed two wanted men at different times. Despite this word began to spread that the Dalton Boys were no good, crooked lawmen horse stealing and making money on the side. Perhaps the fact that your cousins were the Youngers didn't help. + + +Brothers Cole, Jim, John and Bob Younger had once rode with Jesse James and his legendary gang of outlaws. John had been killed and the others captured and put in prison after a gunfight. You and your brothers tried to have as little to do with them as possible but when you were nineteen Bob Younger died in prison of tuberculosis.You and your brothers traveled to Minnesota State Penitentiary to attend the funeral and on a cold autumn evening you and your cousins gathered in the prison cemetery. + + +Jim did not say a word to any of you but Cole, a tough veteran of fifteen bullet wounds, walked over after the service to say a few words to you and your brothers.When he learns that you are lawmen he reacts with horror. "Our family have never been no Yankee lawmen," he tells you tersely. "Law in the South is nothing more than what the rich Republicans in Washington say is the law. Don't be their bloodhounds and lapdogs boys, it is far better to be the fox!" + + +A few months after this meeting Bob and Emmett are fired from their jobs for illegally selling alcohol to Native Americans. Depressed they go traveling down to New Mexico where they get into a crooked card game with a gang of tinhorn gamblers: realizing they are being cheated they pull out their pistols and take their money back at gunpoint. For this they are posted up as wanted men: outlaws. Days later you and Grat are fired and arrested on charges of horse stealing, though the charges soon fall through for lack of evidence. + + +Feeling victimized you and your brothers all head out to California to see your brother Bill. Bill is having problems of his own: he has been dismissed from the California State Legislature for opposing the large railway companies, who have been using armies of hired gunmen to bully farmers and ranches into selling their land to them cheaply so they can build their railroads. As you gather at Bill's house to celebrate New Year's Day 1891 the mood is dark. + + +"It's time for a change boys," Bob declares. "We've been treated unfairly in honest work because some of our family were outlaws. We've been cheated and abused and when we've stood up for ourselves we've been labeled outlaws too. Cole is right: it's all the fault of the big businesses: the banks and the railroads who do everything they can to take the money of honest men and leave them with nothing but empty promises. The only way not to be part of this system is to live outside the law... all the way." + + +Grat looks uncertain, with Frank dead he is now the oldest brother but he is more of a follower than a leader. "That's a hell of a decision to make Bob," he says quietly. "Grat look at us!" Bob exclaims. "You have shed blood and we've all lost a brother for the law and that same law says we our outlaws! Well I say it's time we started living up to our reputation." + + +Bill frowns thoughtfully, ambitious and determined he and Bob are natural rivals. "If we do this there's no going back Bob. Think on that." + + +Bob nods, a young man and a crack shot with a rifle or a pistol he is the most outspoken of you all. "Then we'll just have to be the best outlaws there ever was," he declares with a grin. + + +"I'm with you Bob," Emmett declares. He is the youngest and he has always idolized Bob and always tries to follow in his footsteps. + + +"Ok," you say quietly. At your hips you wear two matching Colt Pistols which once belonged to your brother Frank. Silent but resolute you have the gift of earning respect from others by your actions. "We will be the Dalton Gang then and begin our new life from today." + + +Your Outlaw story is about to begin. +> How to Play +IF YOU HAVE ALREADY PLAYED AMERICAN OUTLAWS: THE JAMES GANG YOU CAN SKIP THIS PAGE AND MOVE STRAIGHT ON TO THE DALTON GANG PAGE. + + +In this story your fate will be determined entirely by your choices. The number of Gunfights you take part in, the people you Injure and Kill, the number of Robberies you commit and your Score (your share of the amount of money you steal) will all be recorded. Your main aim is to survive, avoiding both prison and death in order to continue your Outlaw Career with a long-term goal of retiring. Be careful: one wrong decision, particularly in a gunfight where any moment could be your last, will signal a sudden and fatal end to your career. + + +If you Survive the Game without going to prison you receive a 100,000 Score Bonus. + + +If you Survive the Game but serve a lengthy prison term you receive a 50,000 Score Bonus. + + +If you are killed during the Game you receive no Score Bonus. + + +Your main aim in the Game is to get the highest Score possible by taking part in successful robberies. You always receive a share of the loot based on how much you steal and the number of outlaws who committed the Robbery, for example if you are part of a ten-man team that rob a bank of $10,000 dollars for example your share will come to $1,000 and this will be added to your Score. + + +Gunfights, Injured, Killed and Robberies numbers are non-essential for the game but when your story ends, either through a sudden and violent death or through peaceful retirement you will be taken to The Performance Table page where you can compare your Gunfights, Injured, Killed, Robberies and Score to your fellow Outlaws as an indication of how you have performed. Leaving a comment after you complete this story will enable others to see your Score. + + +Good Luck Reader, your Outlaw Story is about to begin! +> The Dalton Gang +On a cold winter's night you and your brothers ride out to the small community of Alila. + + +It is a cold winter in night in the Californian hills and you are all wearing dusters, long grey coats that go down to the ankles. Your loaded pistols hang at your belt. At the train station in Alila you sit on the platform in nervous silence, the only light being an orange glow from Bill's cigar. Finally in the distance a second light appears: a single beam of yellow light. Finally with a roar of steam the night train pulls up alongside you all. + + +"Good luck boys," Bob mutters as you all climb aboard. + + +Climbing onto the train you wait until it begins to move then all of you make your way to the driver's compartment at the front of the train. Inside is a little grey-haired man in a blue engineers uniform who looks round in surprise as you enter the locomotive. + + +"I'm sorry gentlemen, you are not supposed to be up here," he says cordially. + + +"Well tonight we're breaking all the rules," Bob replies coldly and draws his pistol. "Stop the train." + + +The engineer obediently pulls the lever to stop the train and just moments after leaving Alila the train is gliding to a halt. As the train slows the engineer suddenly throws open the door of the compartment and jumps off the train. "Kill him," Bob barks. "He'll raise the alarm!" He immediately rushes towards the open door. +> Follow Bob and shoot at the fleeing man +There is a full moon tonight and the silver light grants you a clear view of the old man stumbling for his life across the sloping grass of the railway embankment. Raising your pistol you take careful aim and squeeze the trigger. A spray of red explodes from the man's head and he topples to the ground. He lies there motionless as the train continues a short way before finally gliding to a halt. You return to your stunned brothers inside the compartment. + + +Bob is the first to recover, mutters "come on" and leads you all down the train. Hiding your guns in your pockets you pass through the passenger cars, people looking at you curiously but perhaps sensing who you are no one interferes with you until you come to the corridor that leads to the express carriage. Bob has just started to open the door when a shot is fired, the bullet striking the thick wooden door. You all jump back immediately and Bob pulls the door shut again. There is a moment's silence then more shots are fired, the bullets striking the door in front of you. + + +"We'd better clear out of here," Bill mutters to the rest of you. "That express guard is armed." Bob thinks for a moment and swears. "We should have brought some dynamite," he mutters. "It doesn't matter," Grat says quickly. "The alarm is raised now boys, let's clear out." + + +You open a door and one by one you all jump off the train and run down the embankment. You have left five horses tethered in a copse of trees nearby and reach them after a swift five minutes run. Mounting up you ride off south. The robbery has been a complete failure: an engineer has been killed and you have been forced to flee without a single dollar. It is not an impressive debut. + + +News travels fast and by the time you make it back to San Francisco where Bill lives the news is in all the morning newspapers that an engineer was murdered on a South Pacific Train last night by a desperate gang of train robbers. You keep to Bill's house all day, each of you lost in your own thoughts about what to do now. The tension drags on until evening when after dinner Bob finally addresses the problem. + + +"I've been thinking and I reckon it'd be a lot safer if we all headed back to the Indian Territory," he says. "We know it well and I don't reckon the law will find us there." + + +"I've got a law career here in California Bob," Bill says angrily. "You forget, only you and Emmett are currently wanted for anything: Grat, Daniel and I aren't known to the law yet." + + +"How long do you think that will last with posses tracking us for the Alila Robbery?" Bob demands. + + +An argument rages for the next few hours until it ends with Grat siding with Bill and both choosing to lie low in California while Bob and Emmett head back to the Indian Territory to hide out there until the heat dies down. What you'll do after a few months isn't discussed and you need to choose which pair of brothers to join. +> Go with Bob and Emmett to the Indian Territory +You, Bob and Emmett bid farewell to your other brothers and set off by train across Nevada, Utah and Colorado back to the Indian Territory. You are just in time: days later you read in the papers that Bill and Grat have both been arrested back in California and charged with train robbery. You are all concerned by the news but Bob points out there is nothing you can do about it until you have some money so he arranges a meeting with two of his old friends in the Indian Territory. + + +At the little community of Wharton you find two men waiting at the train station for you. The first is a middle-aged man with a distinctive black gunpowder burn on his left cheek while his companion is shorter, handsome man with an impressive moustache. "Boys, let me introduce you to Black Face Charley Bryant and Bitter Creek George Newcomb," Bob declares. Greetings are exchanged all round as you leave the station. + + +"Black Face and Bitter Creek were with me and Emmett in that little caper down in New Mexico that got us all written up as Outlaws," Bob explains to you. "I've been thinking boys that it was time to show this country what real outlaws are like. We've already held up one train in California and I plan to hit more here in the Territory where they haven't got any real law; just miles and miles of wilderness to hide in and train lines running through it like arteries for us to cut. What do you boys reckon?" + + +"After we read in the papers you boys were behind that hold up in California we were kind of hoping you would turn up with that exact offer," Bitter Creek declares with a grin. Black Face just grunts. + + +On the first day of May the five of you board a train at Wharton. While Black Face and Bitter Creek go to capture the driver and stop the train you, Bob and Emmett head straight to the Express Carriage. Catching the Guard by surprise you disarm him at gunpoint and empty the safe. As the train slows to a halt you jump off and race to a nearby copse of trees where you have left horses waiting, joined by your companions. Once you have ridden a safe distance you count the money and find you have stolen some $1700, making your share $300. It's not much but it's a start. + + +"Well boys it's not millions but the Territory isn't a wealthy place," Bob says thoughtfully. "I reckon it's best if we split up. Bitter Creek, did you say you had some friends over in Hutchinson, Kansas? I reckon that sounds like a safe spot for us." Black Face coughs. "I reckon I'm sick boys," he tells the rest of you. "Got this damn cough that won't go away so I reckon I'd best get into Hutchinson here in the Territory and see a doctor I trust. Drop me a line when you want me and I'll join you boys again." Bob nods and you ponder who to join. +> Go with Bob, Emmett and Bitter Creek to Kansas +You and your companions ride out to Hutchinson to stay with Bitter Creek's friend, a near-silent little man called Charley Pierce who looks like the kind of man who'd easily blend into a crowd. As it turns out you are not Charley's only visitors and three other men are staying with him: a cowboy called Bill Power, a morose young man called Dick Broadwell and a gregarious and cheerful tall man with an elegant moustache called Bill Doolin. + + +You hide out with your four new friends for four months after the Wharton Robbery until the bad news begins to arrive. First witnesses identify all of you who helped rob the Wharton train, this leads to Black Face being recognized in the Indian Territory and being killed after he killed a lawman while trying to resist arrest. This all probably contributes to Grat being found guilty of train robbery and being sentenced to twenty years imprisonment in California. + + +You are all disheartened by Black Face's death but Bob has four new recruits: Charley Pierce, Bill Power, Dick Broadwell and Bill Doolin all agree to join you, Bob, Emmett and Bitter Creek in the Gang giving you eight.Feeling numerous enough to deal with anything you all travel back into the Indian Territory and wearing long grey dusters you wait at the little community of Laelietta to board the train. When it arrives Bill Power and Dick go up to the front of the train to capture the driver, Bill Doolin, Charley and Bitter Creek guard the passengers and you and your brothers go to rob the Express Carriage. + + +The robbery goes like clockwork and everyone keeps calm; you and your brothers capture the Express Guard and use dynamite to blast open the safe. Taking all the money inside you and your fellow Outlaws flee the train on foot and escape with your money, counting it in safety you find you have stolen $2,500, making your share $300. This train robbery seems to signal a change of luck: first Grat escapes from custody by jumping from a moving train on his way to prison and then Bill is acquitted in court of robbery. You send telegrams to both your newly freed brothers to meet you and the rest of the Dalton Gang in the Indian Territory that winter. +> Reunion +Much has changed in a year. + + +In the snow-covered woods outside the small town of Ingalls you and the other nine members of what the newspapers are calling The Dalton Gang have made your camp. Around one campfire your brother Bob is congratulating Bill and Grat on their respective acquittal and escape while your fourth brother Emmett looks on. The five men who have been helping you and your brothers rob trains are sitting around another camp fire chatting. + + +The most experienced recruit is Bitter Creek, a handsome little man with a big moustache. He is sitting next to his silent best friend Charley Pierce and chatting to Bill Doolin, a tall gregarious cowboy with a ready laugh. Next to them are the last two members of the Gang, Bill Power and Dick Broadwell. All of you are well-armed and with the exception of your brother Bill you are all Wanted Outlaws with prices on your heads. You have gathered to celebrate Christmas and the New Year together and on New Years Day Bob gives a little speech. + + +"Boys, we've got great opportunities before us," he declares. "In one year we have robbed three trains and put together this great Gang that is famous throughout America. This year we'll move onto bigger and better things: we'll rob more trains and then we'll move onto banks! We're going to be the biggest Outlaws to hit this country since Jesse James and his Gang! We'll make as much money as we like and out-ride and out-shoot the law!" + + +"You'll have to do it without me Bob," your brother Bill announces. "I'm going back to California to start over. I'm the only one in this Gang with a clean record and I aim to keep it that way. If you're smart Grat, Daniel and Emmett you'll come back with me too and hide out at my place. You take too many chances you'll end up shot up like that Black Face fellow I've read about in the papers or in prison for the rest of your lives." + + +Bill's announcement promptly leads to a massive argument between him and Bob while you and the rest of the Gang look on awkwardly. It ends with Bill deciding to go back to California to try to resurrect his law practice while Grat and Emmett choose to stay in the Indian Territory with Bob and the others and rob trains. When Bill sees his brothers are unwilling to join him he asks you if you'd prefer to go back to California with him or continue your outlaw life here. + + + +> Go to California with Bill +Saying goodbye to your brothers and the rest of the Gang you decide to go back to San Francisco with Bill. In California Bill struggles to rebuild his law firm but it is difficult for a man whose four brothers are wanted outlaws and who many believe is an outlaw himself. Bill struggles while you hide out in his home for ten months. In the papers you read about your brothers and their Gang robbing two more trains in the Indian Territory, the latter after a daring gunfight. + + +Then comes the news of Coffeyville. + + +Bob, Grat and Emmett, together with Bill Power and Dick Broadwell, try to rob two banks at the same time in the city of Coffeyville. The alarm is raised and a massive gunfight breaks out that leaves eight men dead including Bob, Grat, Bill and Dick while Emmett survives despite 23 individual bullet wounds and is imprisoned for life. Your brothers Bob and Grat are dead, their gang destroyed and initially you and Bill are so full of pain you don't know what to do. + + +Your minds are decided when a telegram arrives from the three surviving gang members who did not go on the Coffeyville Raid: Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce. They invite you and Bill to join them and a new Gang they are putting together in the Indian Territory. You and Bill are both in agreement. + + +"They've killed our brothers and now we're going to make America pay," Bill declares. "Damn the law and damn the banks, I'm going to join these boys and bring hell to Kansas and the Territory. Are you with me Daniel?" + + +"I am," you tell your brother quietly and the pair of you return to the Indian Territory. +> A New Gang +It's a somber group of six men that meet in the little town of Ingalls in the Indian Territory. You and your brother Bill are silent and serious when you meet Bill Doolin, bearded now, and his companions: the veteran outlaw Bitter Creek, his mute friend Charley Pierce and a new recruit called Ol Yantis. Despite the news from Coffeyville all of you are resolved to continue your outlaw careers with your brother Bill now declaring he wants to be an even more infamous outlaw than your late brother Bob. + + +"The newspapers say the Dalton Gang is destroyed and called us 'a wild bunch of fugitives," Bill Doolin says grimly. "I suggest we show them what The Wild Bunch is capable of." A plan is quickly hatched to rob a bank in Kansas to show that despite Coffeyville robbing banks in the state still does not intimidate you. One winter's day your newly formed Wild Bunch ride into Kansas to show America the spirit of the Dalton Gang is still alive and well. + + +Riding into the little town of Spearville you all dismount outside the bank and you, Bill and Bill walk inside while the others guard your horse. Taking the teller hostage you rapidly empty the vault of it's money, lock the teller inside, walk out of the bank, mount up and ride away. Making it back across the border into the Indian Territory you are delighted by the ease of the robbery which has netted you all $1500, making your share $200. + + +The papers are soon full of news of what they call "The Doolin-Dalton Gang" and the two Bill's are pleased. Ol is less so, he has been identified as an outlaw and wants to visit his sister's farm to say goodbye to his family while the rest of the Gang is planning on hiding out in Ingalls. You need to choose who to go with. +> Go with Ol to his sister's farm +You decide to go with Ol to his sister's farm near the little community of Orlando in the Territory. You both spend nearly a month relaxing there until one afternoon you see two men approaching the small farm from the front. "Ol! Dan Dalton!" one of the men shouts. "We know you're in there. We're lawmen, we've got the building surrounded and if you come out with your arms raised no one will get hurt." You and Ol glance at each other nervously, the small farm only has one door facing the two lawmen with windows either side, though there are a few back windows. + + +"What are you going to do?" you ask Ol who thinks for a moment. "I'm going to go out and tell them I'm going to surrender and when they're not ready I'm going to draw my pistol and let them have it. If you come with me I reckon there's a good chance we can get both of them." You consider his request: it's risky but it could work. An alternative option is to open a back window, climb out and take a chance escaping on foot. +> Follow Ol out the front door +You and Ol walk outside towards the two waiting lawmen who tense. "What is this about?" you ask. "What is happening? Don't shoot we are surrendering." Suddenly Ol goes for his gun and you follow shoot. Ol gets off a shot before the lawmen realize what is happening and return fire: both of you are hit in the chest and after firing a shot harmlessly into the ground you fall face first to the ground, Ol toppling across your legs a moment later. You die within minutes while Ol expires of his wounds the next day, two more dead outlaws for dusty graves.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to go with Ol to his sister's farm near the little community of Orlando in the Territory. You both spend nearly a month relaxing there until one afternoon you see two men approaching the small farm from the front. "Ol! Dan Dalton!" one of the men shouts. "We know you're in there. We're lawmen, we've got the building surrounded and if you come out with your arms raised no one will get hurt." You and Ol glance at each other nervously, the small farm only has one door facing the two lawmen with windows either side, though there are a few back windows. + + +"What are you going to do?" you ask Ol who thinks for a moment. "I'm going to go out and tell them I'm going to surrender and when they're not ready I'm going to draw my pistol and let them have it. If you come with me I reckon there's a good chance we can get both of them." You consider his request: it's risky but it could work. An alternative option is to open a back window, climb out and take a chance escaping on foot. +> Try slipping out a back window +You and Ol agree to try your different plans and while Ol walks out the front door you open a back window and climb out. Cautiously you jog towards some nearby trees, expecting a bullet to be fired at you at any moment. You nearly jump out of your skin when a gunshot rings out but when it is almost instantly followed by several more you realize the shots are coming from the front of the house. Escaping the area you rejoin your companions in Ingalls where you learn your worst fears are correct: Ol Yantis was shot dead by the lawmen he tried to fight. You hide out in Ingalls until the following summer when The Wild Bunch rides again. + + +In the last six months you and your fellow outlaws have recruited four new gang members, bringing your gang strength up to nine. There is Dynamite Dick, an explosives expert with an impressive nickname, Red Buck, a grim and dour man, Tulsa Jack, a good friend of Bill Doolin's and Arkansas Tom, a sharp-shooting well-dressed young man. Together the nine of you plan your first robbery in Kansas and in the summer of 1893 you strike. + + +One summer morning the nine of you board a train at Cimarron in Kansas and while the new recruits get the driver to stop the train and Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce guard the passengers you and the two Bill's make your way to the Express Carriage. You calmly empty the safe before you all dismount, run to your horses, mount up and ride away. On the ride you count the money you have stolen and find you have gotten away with $1,000, making your share $100. + + +Unfortunately you do not get clean away, that afternoon as you are resting a posse of lawmen suddenly gallop over a nearby ridge. All of your mount up and firing pistols and rifles at each other you and your pursuers engage in a running battle for over a mile. There are no casualties on either side except Bill Doolin who is unlucky enough to be shot in the foot by a rifle shell, a painful but non-serious wound. Easily escaping the nine of you ride back to Ingalls unaware that an even deadlier enemy is in pursuit... +> The Battle of Ingalls +One autumn morning you and The Wild Bunch ride into Ingalls. Bill Doolin leads the way, hobbling ad wincing from his injured foot, while you and your brother Bill follow behind talking. Following you is Bitter Creek and his mute companion Charley Pierce while the newer recruits bunch together, Tulsa Jack is exchanging jokes with Dynamite Dick while Red Buck rides on in silence and Arkansas Tom cradles his rifle. You are as dangerous an outlaw gang as any that roamed the West. + +In town you agree to split up: Arkansas Tom is tired and is going over to the little community's hotel to sleep. Bitter Creek offers to saddle all the horses in the stable while the rest of the gang head into a saloon operated by your friend Murray. You need to choose who to follow. +> Follow Arkansas Tom to the hotel to rest +You and Arkansas Tom split off from the others and walk into the hotel, check in and walk up the stairs chatting. You have just reached your room when you hear the unmistakable sound of pistol shots from the street, racing to the window you see Bitter Creek galloping his horse down the street away from a man who is shooting at him, blood streaming from your friend's leg. You race to Arkansas Tom's room to find him standing by the window firing his rifle into the street at lawmen who are firing from cover at the saloon where your friends are. + +"Come on, we need to get out of here," you shout to Tom. + +"This is a great position," Tom yells back. "I'm going to stay here and cover the others." +> Join Arkansas Tom at the window shooting at the lawmen +You join Arkansas Tom at the window, grab one of his rifle's and peer down for a target. You spot one: a young lawman sheltering behind a tree with his side exposed to you. You take careful aim and fire, your bullet hitting the man in the left side, passing through his body and blasting out his right. The man falls down and doesn't get up again. + +Suddenly your brother Bill, Bill Doolin, Charley, Red Buck, Tulsa Jack and Dynamite Dick all burst from the town's stables mounted on horses. The lawmen, who are still firing at the saloon, scramble around to fire at them, hitting your brother Bill's horse in the head. Bill jumps from the saddle, turns, shoots a lawman dead and scrambles onto the back of Bill Doolin's horse. You watch as your friends escape. + +The lawmen now turn their attention to you and begin firing up at the window, forcing you and Arkansas Tom away from it. You hear running feet on the stairs outside the hotel door and then bullets begin to hit the door, forcing you to take shelter under the bed. You are both trapped and have no way of escaping. + +"We surrender," Arkansas Tom shouts loudly. + +The shooting stops, there is a pause, and then suddenly the hotel door spectacularly explodes inwards in a blinding flash of light that brings down the roof, burying you both helplessly beneath the rubble, your guns lost in the chaos. Several armed lawmen race through the ruins their dynamite created and quickly capture you both. + +It is some consolation to you that your companions all succeeded in escaping, though both Bitter Creek and Dynamite Dick were wounded in all the gunfire. You and Arkansas Tom are not so lucky, you are both quickly tried and convicted for the deaths of three lawman and one civilian who were killed in the gunfight and both of you are sentenced to terms of life imprisonment. + +It seems that your outlaw careers are over but then, after a few years, fate reunites you with your companions. +> Prison +By the summer of 1896 the Wild Bunch is virtually destroyed: the only gang member who remains at large is Little Dick West; everyone else is dead or imprisoned. Your brothers Bob, Grat and Bill are dead, your friends Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are dead. You yourself are facing a long jail term with no hope in sight. + +Then the Federal authorities make the decision to move you and the surviving members of the Wild Bunch to new a prison in Oklahoma City and you find yourself reunited with the last members of the Wild Bunch. Your brother Emmett is there, weak after surviving 23 gunshot wounds, Lawman killer Arkansas Tom Jones, minor gang member Jim Knight, Little Bill Raidler, who was shot 3 times and severely wounded in his capture, the clever Dynamite Dick and, most of all, your unofficial leader Bill Doolin are all reunited. + +Inevitably plans for an escape are quickly made, though Emmett and Little Bill have no interest due to the severity of their wounds while Arkansas Tom and Jim Knight want to turn their backs on the outlaw life, certain it will get them killed. Bill and Dynamite Dick concoct a plan to have a friend smuggle pistols into them, take the guard hostage, make him unlock the cell and then imprison him in it and then make their escape from the prison. It is a bold but risky plan and the two outlaws ask you to join them. Your brother Emmett is against it, warning you that even if it is successful the chances are you will be hunted down and killed on the outside. +> Join the prison break +You agree to join the jailbreak and Bill makes all the arrangements. He has a pistol smuggled into him and at the right moment he trains it on a guard, forces him to surrender his keys and gun, which he gives to you, unlocks the cell and locks the guard inside. After taking a series of guards hostage you and your companions succeed in escaping from the prison on stolen horses. + +You and your companions are elated but you quickly agree it is best if you all split up: Bill plans to hide out with his wife in Lawson while Dynamite Dick intends to lie low in Checotah. You need to join one of them. +> Go with Bill to Lawson +You and Bill hide out with Bill's wife in various hideouts around the settlement of Lawson but the law is never far behind you. One night the two of you are riding your horses from one hideout to another when suddenly a posse of a dozen lawmen spring up from the ground before you and shout for you both to surrender. +> Turn your horse around and ride for dear life +You jerk your horse away and have barely started to ride when the posse open fire. Bullets hit both your horse's rear legs making it collapse to the ground and spilling you from the saddle. By good luck you land next to a deep drainage ditch and scrambling into it you race down it while the posse pumps bullet after bullet into your friend Bill. + +Somehow you escape. The ditch runs out near a line of trees and springing out of it you race into the trees and through them, bullets from the posse hitting the trees and whistling by all around you. You keep running and running and evade capture. For the next year you roam the wilds, living like an animal in the most basic of habitats before finally your remaining outlaw friends get a letter to you inviting you to a meeting in Woodward. +> The last outlaws +On the first day of August you, Dynamite Dick Clifton and Little Dick West assemble in Woodward. You are all that remains of the once-great Wild Bunch and your years on the run and suffering have aged you all prematurely. Little Dick brings with him four of his friends: two pairs of brothers called John and Al Jennings and Pat and Morris O'Malley. John is a serious guy who says little, his younger brother Al is chatty while the O'Malley brothers strike you as a pair of idiots. + +"I'm tired of us hiding out and hunted for having stolen nothing more than a few dollars," Little Dick announces. "Me and my new friends here are going to form a new gang, the Jennings Gang, and go back to robbing trains. If we are going to go down like our companions we might as well go down fighting... and get rich in the meantime." + +Dynamite Dick shakes his head wearily. "I figure I'm going to keep lying low," he announces. "I don't want to die young." + +It seems you have two choices: to resume an active outlaw career or continue your life in hiding. +> Join the Jennings Gang +You team up with Little Dick, Al and John Jennings and Pat and Morris O'Malley and begin robbing trains but it is a disaster. Your first attempt to stop a train at Edmond fails when the train ploughs straight through the barrier of logs you have put on the track to stop it, you are forced to flee without a dollar when the alarm is raised. + +Opting to board the train for your next robbery at Berwyn you and Little Dick enter the Express Carriage after the others have seized control of the train but none of the Express Managers have the key for the safe and your dynamite fails to blow it open. Determined not to repeat this mistake at your third train robbery at Pocasset you use so much dynamite that you destroy not only the safe but the entire Express Carriage. + +These failures are humiliating and when news arrives that Dynamite Dick has been tracked down and killed at Checotah Little Dick decides that enough is enough. He announces he will split off from the others and go into hiding at Guthrie while the rest of the gang elects to hide out at Cushing and try to plan a successful train robbery. +> Go with Little Dick to Guthrie +You elect to stick with Little Dick and accompany him to Guthrie where you find a cabin to live in. You are not surprised to read that Al, John, Pat and Morris were all captured by lawmen, once more you and Little Dick are on your own. You remain hidden over the winter but as the spring dawns you go outside one morning to find two lawmen waiting for you. + +"It's the end of the line boys," one announces. "Surrender and no one will get hurt." + +You and Little Dick glance at each other. +> Surrender +You raise your hands while Little Dick goes for his guns. The two lawmen have no intention of taking either of you in alive and open fire with their pistols. Both of you are shot in the chest and fall dying to the ground. As you stare up at the blue sky, which slowly darkens, you give a deep sigh and smile. It is all over. The last of the Wild Bunch is gone. + +Your Outlaw Career is over. +> Click here to see how well you did compared to your companions +This is the Performance Table where you can compare your Gunfights, Injured, Killed, Robberies, Score and Fate with those of your fellow members of The Wild Bunch to see who is the greatest Outlaw! + + +1: Bill Doolin: Gunfights: 6, Injured: 1, Killed: 2, Robberies: 7, Score: 6500 - Killed. + + +2: Bill Dalton: Gunfights: 6, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 6, Score: 4400 - Killed. + + +3: Bitter Creek: Gunfights: 6, Injured: 1, Killed: 0, Robberies: 7, Score: 3500 - Killed. + + +4: Charley Piece: Gunfights: 7, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 7, Score: 3400 - Killed. + + +5: Bob Dalton: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 2, Killed: 4, Robberies: 6, Score: 3000 - Killed.* + + +6: Emmett Dalton: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 6, Score: 3000 - Imprisoned. + + +7: Dick Broadwell: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 2500 - Killed. + + +8: Bill Power: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 2500 - Killed. + + +9: Grat Dalton: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 4, Score: 2100 - Killed.* + + +10: George Bennett: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 3, Killed: 1, Robberies: 1, Score: 1000 - Killed. + + +11: Asa Knight: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: 1000 - Killed. + + +12: Jim Knight: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: 1000 - Imprisoned. + + +13: Jim Wallace: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: 1000 - Killed. + +14: Dynamite Dick: Gunfights: 5, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 700 - Killed. + + +15: Red Buck: Gunfights: 5, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 700 - Killed. + + +16: Tulsa Jack: Gunfights: 4, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 700 - Killed. + + +17: Little Dick: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 3, Killed: 1, Robberies: 5, Score: 600 - Killed. + + +18: Little Bill: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 2, Score: 600 - Imprisoned. + + +19: Black Face: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 2, Score: 500 - Killed. + + +20: Ol Yantis: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 1, Score: 300 - Killed. + + +21: Arkansas Tom: Gunfights: 3, Injured: 0, Killed: 1, Robberies: 1, Score: 100 - Killed. + + +22: John Jennings: Gunfights: 2, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 0 - Imprisoned. + + +23: Al Jennings: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 0 - Imprisoned. + + +24: Pat O'Malley: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 0 - Imprisoned. + + +25: Morris O'Malley: Gunfights: 1, Injured: 0, Killed: 0, Robberies: 3, Score: 0 - Imprisoned. + + +* Bob Dalton also killed two men in two gunfights and Grat Dalton was in two gunfights, during one of which he was shot in the arm, but as these gunfights occurred when they were serving as lawmen in 1889 and 1890 they are not counted here. + + +Most Prolific Gunfighter: 1: Charley Pierce (7 Gunfights), 2: Bill Doolin / Bill Dalton / Bitter Creek (6 Gunfights). + + +Most Lethal Hurter: 1: George Bennett (3 Injured), 2: Bob Dalton (2 Injured), 3: Bitter Creek (1 Injured) + + +Most Deadly Killer: 1: Bob Dalton (4 Killed), 2: Bill Doolin (2 Killed), 3: Bill Dalton / Grat Dalton / George Bennett / Black Face / Arkansas Tom (1 Killed). + + +Most Enthusiastic Robber: 1: Bill Doolin / Bitter Creek / Charley Pierce (7 Robberies). + + +Most Successful Bandit: 1: Bill Doolin ($6,500), 2: Bill Dalton ($4,400), 3: Bitter Creek ($3,500). + + +Overall Best Outlaw: 1: Bill Doolin, 2: Bill Dalton 3: Bitter Creek, 4: Charley Pierce, 5: Bob Dalton. + + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + +As always thank you for taking the time to read my story, please rate it and if you would like others to see your Score please leave a comment. Have a good day!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You elect to stick with Little Dick and accompany him to Guthrie where you find a cabin to live in. You are not surprised to read that Al, John, Pat and Morris were all captured by lawmen, once more you and Little Dick are on your own. You remain hidden over the winter but as the spring dawns you go outside one morning to find two lawmen waiting for you. + +"It's the end of the line boys," one announces. "Surrender and no one will get hurt." + +You and Little Dick glance at each other. +> Run +You turn to your left and sprint for your life. The lawmen shoot Little Dick dead and then turn, take aim and fire at your back. An almost incredible things happens: both the lawmen's guns jam on a faulty cartridge - it's rare for it to happen to one gun but to both means someone is finally on your side. By the time the cursing lawmen have cleared their blocked guns you have vanished into the wilderness: the last of the Wild Bunch. +> Last Man Standing +After Little Dick West's death lawmen search Indian Territory from one end to the other looking for you but you keep relentlessly on the move, never sleeping in the same place two nights in a row and practically living in the saddle. For nearly two years you evade capture, thinking constantly that it is incredible that the small amount that you stole can be worth such pursuit. + +Finally the Territory Legislature have had enough and make a remarkable offer: if you will surrender yourself then all charges against you will be dropped. As long as you promise to live a peaceful life then you will not be harmed. It is the best offer you are going to get and on the last day of 1899 you meet the Governor in Oklahoma City and surrender. + +It is over and you have beaten them. + +FOR ELUDING THE FORCES OF JUSTICE SUCCESSFULLY YOU HAVE EARNED A BONUS SCORE OF 10,000. +> A peaceful life...? +You live peacefully and over time the world changes: the Indian Territory has been transformed into a state called Oklahoma. Your brother Emmett is released in 1906 and moves to California and become an estate agent, Al Jennings, released in 1902, becomes a politician and only Arkansas Tom Jones, released in 1910, has trouble settling down. He invites you to meet him in Neosho. Arkansas Tom, a lean and pale outlaw the same age as you, has a proposition. + +"I miss the outlaw life and begin rich," he tells you. "I got sent to prison for seventeen years for a train robbery that netted me $100 and for killing a Deputy Marshal. I want to earn something for the years I've served. I want to rob the town bank. Will you help me do this? For old time's sake? Bill Doolin and all the boys would be proud of us." + +You consider his suggestion, it would mean a return to your life of crime after some twenty years but is it worth it? +> Join Arkansas Tom in the robbery +Feeling the familiar thrill of excitement you and Arkansas Tom drive up to the bank in Asbury, walk in and draw your pistols. + +"This is a hold-up!" you declare. + +There is the click of guns cocking and turning you see two bank guards, who you had not even noticed, covering you from the corners of the bank. You can do nothing but surrender your weapons. Considering the circumstances you and Arkansas Tom are lucky to get off with sentences of four year imprisonment. After your release Tom arranges another meeting. + +"We were unlucky the last time but we'll do better this time," he tells you. "We'll hit the bank here in Asbury, Missouri and do it carefully and do it right. What do you say?" +> Join the robbery +You and Arkansas Tom enter the bank in Asbury and after carefully checking for guards you take the lone teller hostage and leaving Arkansas Tom to guard him you walk into the vault, only to discover it is empty as all the money has just been transferred to another facility. Angry but helpless to do anything you two have no choice but to leave, get in your car and drive away. + +The next three years are spent on the run, travelling through a variety of Missouri towns. Finally the law catches up with you when three detectives ring the doorbell of the house you and Arkansas Tom are renting in the town of Joplin. When Arkansas Tom answers the door he is immediately shot dead by the lawmen who burst into the room. + +Jumping to your feet you draw your old scratched six-shooter from your pocket and the detectives open fire with automatic pistols. Shot through several times you fall backwards to the ground. Your long and eventful career has finally come to this desperate end, slain in a cheap lodging house in a small town city. It is finally over. + +Your Outlaw Career is finished.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Feeling the familiar thrill of excitement you and Arkansas Tom drive up to the bank in Asbury, walk in and draw your pistols. + +"This is a hold-up!" you declare. + +There is the click of guns cocking and turning you see two bank guards, who you had not even noticed, covering you from the corners of the bank. You can do nothing but surrender your weapons. Considering the circumstances you and Arkansas Tom are lucky to get off with sentences of four year imprisonment. After your release Tom arranges another meeting. + +"We were unlucky the last time but we'll do better this time," he tells you. "We'll hit the bank here in Asbury, Missouri and do it carefully and do it right. What do you say?" +> Refuse +You refuse to join Arkansas Tom in his robbery and he goes ahead with it anyway. After pulling it off he spends the next few years on the run until you read in newspapers how he has been tracked down and killed in Missouri in 1924. The following year you make the decision to hang up your gun for good and retire, nothing will ever persuade you to return to your former Outlaw ways. A long and peaceful retirement lies ahead for you. + +FOR SURVIVING YOUR OUTLAW CAREER YOU GET A BONUS OF 10,000 TO YOUR SCORE. +> The End +The years pass by slowly as the once endless plains of America are criss-crossed with roads and small towns spring up all over the once wild prairie. As you grow old you watch America go through World War 1, the Depression and World War 2. You read about all the great Depression-Era Public Enemies: John Dillinger, Baby Face Nelson, Pretty Boy Floyd, Bonnie and Clyde, Ma Barker and Alvin Karpis, it's all old news with new faces to you. + +Your brother Emmett prospers in California, helping turn your legend as the Dalton boys into books and movies before his death in 1937. Al Jennings does well, transforming himself into the successful outlaw on-screen that he never was in real life before his death in 1961 at the age 98 leaving you the last of the great old-west outlaws. + +By this point you yourself are very old. The world is a different place to how it was: America is locked in a Cold War with Communism, across the Atlantic in the UK people are singing along to a new band called the Beatles and the outlaws you knew and liked have become the subjects of awful Dime Novels and B Movies. + +That was not how it used to be. When you and your brothers the Dalton rode the air was alive with the crack of gunshots, the smell of gunpowder smoke and the screams of the dead and dying. It was a world of cheap whiskey, wild women, bank and train safes stuffed with money and life or death came down to who had the split second reflexes to be faster. + +That's all gone now... gone but not forgotten. As America celebrates her Independence Day Celebrations you finally go to re-join your comrades and your name too slips into legend... the legend of The Wild Bunch. +> To read about the Historical Wild Bunch click here +The real-life Wild Bunch were not master outlaws or the great gunfighters of legend but a collection of extremely interesting characters destined for a tragic fate: apart from Emmett Dalton all five members of the Dalton Gang and all eleven main members of The Wild Bunch met violent ends, probably the highest number of fatalities suffered by any bank or train robbing gang. + +The tragic thing is the Wild Bunch weren't even particularly good robbers: Jesse James made far more money in his career Jesse James's gang made five times more than the paltry $40,000 the various members of the Wild Bunch managed to steal in their sixteen robberies over seven years, Butch Cassidy's Hole in the Wall Gang made over ten times that amount. Their gunfights were frequent and many however and Coffeeville and Ingalls in particular stand out as iconic gunfights in Old Western History, the first being a great success for the side of the good and the latter for the side of the outlaws. + +But the members of the Wild Bunch were an interesting bunch, with a few notable exceptions (Bob Dalton, George Bennett and Richard West spring to mind) they weren't cold-blooded killers but rather regular guys looking to have a good time, albeit by spending other's money. Their amateurism is reflected in their nicknames, having two guys in your gang called Dynamite Dick and Little Dick is usually not a sign of professional criminals looking to inspire terror in their victims! + +I've taken a few liberties with history, the gunfights and robberies didn't usually happen in quite the way I've described but writing this by stops and starts over the last six months has made me prefer creative licence to historical accuracy. Ultimately this is the story of interesting guys who did interesting things and whose activities were interesting enough for their names to become a part of the pantheon of outlaw history, that is itself part of the cultural heritage of America. + +Hopefully their story made interesting reading :)<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You live peacefully and over time the world changes: the Indian Territory has been transformed into a state called Oklahoma. Your brother Emmett is released in 1906 and moves to California and become an estate agent, Al Jennings, released in 1902, becomes a politician and only Arkansas Tom Jones, released in 1910, has trouble settling down. He invites you to meet him in Neosho. Arkansas Tom, a lean and pale outlaw the same age as you, has a proposition. + +"I miss the outlaw life and begin rich," he tells you. "I got sent to prison for seventeen years for a train robbery that netted me $100 and for killing a Deputy Marshal. I want to earn something for the years I've served. I want to rob the town bank. Will you help me do this? For old time's sake? Bill Doolin and all the boys would be proud of us." + +You consider his suggestion, it would mean a return to your life of crime after some twenty years but is it worth it? +> Turn him down +You refuse to join Arkansas Tom in the robbery, he goes ahead with it anyway and is promptly captured and imprisoned during the robbery. After four years he is released and arranges another meeting with you in the little town of Asbury. Tom looks more gaunt but even more determined than last time and is determined to enlist your help. + +"I'm going to hit the bank here," he tells you. "I want you to help me. This time I'll do it right, no foul-ups I promise. What do you say, one more time for the old days?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You team up with Little Dick, Al and John Jennings and Pat and Morris O'Malley and begin robbing trains but it is a disaster. Your first attempt to stop a train at Edmond fails when the train ploughs straight through the barrier of logs you have put on the track to stop it, you are forced to flee without a dollar when the alarm is raised. + +Opting to board the train for your next robbery at Berwyn you and Little Dick enter the Express Carriage after the others have seized control of the train but none of the Express Managers have the key for the safe and your dynamite fails to blow it open. Determined not to repeat this mistake at your third train robbery at Pocasset you use so much dynamite that you destroy not only the safe but the entire Express Carriage. + +These failures are humiliating and when news arrives that Dynamite Dick has been tracked down and killed at Checotah Little Dick decides that enough is enough. He announces he will split off from the others and go into hiding at Guthrie while the rest of the gang elects to hide out at Cushing and try to plan a successful train robbery. +> Stay with Al, John, Pat and Morris at Cushing +You elect to stay with the gang and continue to hide out at Cushing. One Winter's evening you are all just returning from a reconnaissance raid to inspect the local trains when, completely without warning, a posse of lawmen open fire from a nearby woods. With the familiar whiz of bullets flying around you all turn and flee, though both Al and John Jennings are grazed by the flying bullets. + +You remain on the run for a week, eventually winding up at Carr Creek. Just as you are crossing the fast-moving deep waters a dozen lawmen appear on the far bank and train their rifles on the group of you. Trapped in the slow moving waters you are torn between surrender or diving into the icy fast-flowing waters and trying to swim to safety. +> Surrender +With a deep sigh you slowly raise your hands into the air. After all these years of running and hiding it is all over, you and your companions promptly surrender; soon afterwards Little Dick West is tracked down and killed by lawmen. Inevitably you and your companions are found guilty of train robbery and receive substantial sentences, the most serious is reserved for you: twenty years. + +The years pass slowly. Al, John, Pat and Morris are all released in 1902, Little Bill Raidler is released in 1903 (and dies the following year of his gunshot wounds), your brother Emmett is paroled in 1906 and Arkansas Tom is released in 1910. Your turn for release doesn't come until 1917, by which time you are in your late forties. + +By now the world is changing: the Indian Territory has been transformed into a state called Oklahoma. Your brother Emmett has moved to California and become an estate agent, Al Jennings (an outlaw connected to Little Dick West) has become a politician and only Arkansas Tom Jones has trouble settling down. He invites you to meet him in Neosho. Arkansas Tom, a lean and pale outlaw the same age as you, has a proposition. + +"I miss the outlaw life and begin rich," he tells you. "I got sent to prison for seventeen years for a train robbery that netted me $100 and for killing a Deputy Marshal. I want to earn something for the years I've served. I want to rob the town bank. Will you help me do this? For old time's sake? Bill Doolin and all the boys would be proud of us." + +You consider his suggestion, it would mean a return to your life of crime after some twenty years but is it worth it?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You elect to stay with the gang and continue to hide out at Cushing. One Winter's evening you are all just returning from a reconnaissance raid to inspect the local trains when, completely without warning, a posse of lawmen open fire from a nearby woods. With the familiar whiz of bullets flying around you all turn and flee, though both Al and John Jennings are grazed by the flying bullets. + +You remain on the run for a week, eventually winding up at Carr Creek. Just as you are crossing the fast-moving deep waters a dozen lawmen appear on the far bank and train their rifles on the group of you. Trapped in the slow moving waters you are torn between surrender or diving into the icy fast-flowing waters and trying to swim to safety. +> Dive into the icy waters +Taking a deep breath you plunge into the ice-cold water of the river and swimming in powerful strokes you cut through the freezing water. Bullets whoosh by as the lawmen fire at you but somehow they don't hit and by the time you surface you are far down river. Dragging yourself to the bank, utterly exhausted and more dead than alive you take deep gulping breaths before dragging yourself further into the wood. + +You spend the next two years on the run, in that time both Dynamite Dick and Little Dick are tracked down and killed. You are now the last of the Wild Bunch.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>On the first day of August you, Dynamite Dick Clifton and Little Dick West assemble in Woodward. You are all that remains of the once-great Wild Bunch and your years on the run and suffering have aged you all prematurely. Little Dick brings with him four of his friends: two pairs of brothers called John and Al Jennings and Pat and Morris O'Malley. John is a serious guy who says little, his younger brother Al is chatty while the O'Malley brothers strike you as a pair of idiots. + +"I'm tired of us hiding out and hunted for having stolen nothing more than a few dollars," Little Dick announces. "Me and my new friends here are going to form a new gang, the Jennings Gang, and go back to robbing trains. If we are going to go down like our companions we might as well go down fighting... and get rich in the meantime." + +Dynamite Dick shakes his head wearily. "I figure I'm going to keep lying low," he announces. "I don't want to die young." + +It seems you have two choices: to resume an active outlaw career or continue your life in hiding. +> Hide out with Dynamite Dick +You go with Dynamite Dick to hide out in his small one-roomed cabin near Checotah while Little Dick and his gang go on to pull off a series of unsuccessful train robberies in the Territory. You and Dynamite Dick remain at the cabin until one winter's morning a glance out the window reveals a posse of lawmen are advancing on your hideout. + +"I've had enough of running," Dynamite Dick tells you. "I'm going to fire at them from the windows and give them hell." + +You nod at his words, meanwhile your eyes flicker towards the chimney which looks narrow enough that you might be able to climb up out of it. +> Open fire on the posse +You and Dynamite Dick each choose a window and with a nod to each other you open fire on the lawmen. The posse immediately scatters and dozens of rifles open fire on the cabin, the bullets punching through the thin wooden walls. Both you and Dynamite Dick are hit multiple times but keep firing until eventually blood loss overwhelms you and you die in this last gun battle. + +Your Outlaw Career is over.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You go with Dynamite Dick to hide out in his small one-roomed cabin near Checotah while Little Dick and his gang go on to pull off a series of unsuccessful train robberies in the Territory. You and Dynamite Dick remain at the cabin until one winter's morning a glance out the window reveals a posse of lawmen are advancing on your hideout. + +"I've had enough of running," Dynamite Dick tells you. "I'm going to fire at them from the windows and give them hell." + +You nod at his words, meanwhile your eyes flicker towards the chimney which looks narrow enough that you might be able to climb up out of it. +> Try climbing up the chimney +While Dynamite Dick prepares for his last stand you cross to the chimney, squeeze yourself up the narrow space and begin shimmying up the grimy stone space. Finally you make it up to the roof where, unseen by the posse you lie flat on the roof. Inevitably the gun battle ends in Dynamite Dick's death and the guns fall silent. + +You lie on the freezing cold roof all afternoon while the posse take Dynamite Dick's body away, apparently concluding you must have been elsewhere. By nightfall the posse has gone and you slide off the roof to the ground. You flee the area on foot and vanish into the wilderness: over the next few months you read in newspapers about the capture of the Jennings Gang and the death of Little Dick at the hands of lawmen. + +You are the last of the Wild Bunch.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Bill hide out with Bill's wife in various hideouts around the settlement of Lawson but the law is never far behind you. One night the two of you are riding your horses from one hideout to another when suddenly a posse of a dozen lawmen spring up from the ground before you and shout for you both to surrender. +> Surrender +You raise your hands but Bill yells "I will never surrender" and goes for his guns. Instantly the posse opens fire, in their confusion several lawmen shoot at you as well. You and Bill are both hit multiple times and killed instantly, falling from your saddle onto the soft grass beneath you breathe your last breath as the posse continue to fire into your motionless bodies. + +Your Outlaw Career is at an end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You agree to join the jailbreak and Bill makes all the arrangements. He has a pistol smuggled into him and at the right moment he trains it on a guard, forces him to surrender his keys and gun, which he gives to you, unlocks the cell and locks the guard inside. After taking a series of guards hostage you and your companions succeed in escaping from the prison on stolen horses. + +You and your companions are elated but you quickly agree it is best if you all split up: Bill plans to hide out with his wife in Lawson while Dynamite Dick intends to lie low in Checotah. You need to join one of them. +> Go with Dynamite Dick to Checotah +You accompany Dynamite Dick to an isolated cabin near the village of Checotah, a month after your arrival you read how Bill Doolin has been tracked down and killed by a posse. The death of your friend grieves you but you need to worry about your own safety as well - for a year you and your friend hide out at the cabin, rarely venturing far from it. Finally Little Dick West gets word to you that he wants to meet in Woodward.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>By the summer of 1896 the Wild Bunch is virtually destroyed: the only gang member who remains at large is Little Dick West; everyone else is dead or imprisoned. Your brothers Bob, Grat and Bill are dead, your friends Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are dead. You yourself are facing a long jail term with no hope in sight. + +Then the Federal authorities make the decision to move you and the surviving members of the Wild Bunch to new a prison in Oklahoma City and you find yourself reunited with the last members of the Wild Bunch. Your brother Emmett is there, weak after surviving 23 gunshot wounds, Lawman killer Arkansas Tom Jones, minor gang member Jim Knight, Little Bill Raidler, who was shot 3 times and severely wounded in his capture, the clever Dynamite Dick and, most of all, your unofficial leader Bill Doolin are all reunited. + +Inevitably plans for an escape are quickly made, though Emmett and Little Bill have no interest due to the severity of their wounds while Arkansas Tom and Jim Knight want to turn their backs on the outlaw life, certain it will get them killed. Bill and Dynamite Dick concoct a plan to have a friend smuggle pistols into them, take the guard hostage, make him unlock the cell and then imprison him in it and then make their escape from the prison. It is a bold but risky plan and the two outlaws ask you to join them. Your brother Emmett is against it, warning you that even if it is successful the chances are you will be hunted down and killed on the outside. +> Turn down the offer and do your time +Bill and Dynamite Dick go ahead with their prison break plan which is successful but both are tracked down and killed by lawmen and by 1898 the last of the Wild Bunch is killed. The rest of you remain in prison for a time, Jim Knight dies in prison but Little Bill is released in 1903 (only to die the following year from his gunshot wounds), Emmett is paroled in 1906 and Arkansas Tom is released in 1910. As the most famous of the surviving Wild Bunch you are held the longest and you are not paroled until 1917, by which time you are in your late forties. + +By now the world is changing: the Indian Territory has been transformed into a state called Oklahoma. Your brother Emmett has moved to California and become an estate agent, Al Jennings (an outlaw connected to Little Dick West) has become a politician and only Arkansas Tom Jones has trouble settling down. He invites you to meet him in Neosho. Arkansas Tom, a lean and pale outlaw the same age as you, has a proposition. + +"I miss the outlaw life and begin rich," he tells you. "I got sent to prison for seventeen years for a train robbery that netted me $100 and for killing a Deputy Marshal. I want to earn something for the years I've served. I want to rob the town bank. Will you help me do this? For old time's sake? Bill Doolin and all the boys would be proud of us." + +You consider his suggestion, it would mean a return to your life of crime after some twenty years but is it worth it?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Arkansas Tom split off from the others and walk into the hotel, check in and walk up the stairs chatting. You have just reached your room when you hear the unmistakable sound of pistol shots from the street, racing to the window you see Bitter Creek galloping his horse down the street away from a man who is shooting at him, blood streaming from your friend's leg. You race to Arkansas Tom's room to find him standing by the window firing his rifle into the street at lawmen who are firing from cover at the saloon where your friends are. + +"Come on, we need to get out of here," you shout to Tom. + +"This is a great position," Tom yells back. "I'm going to stay here and cover the others." +> Run for it +You have no intention of lingering and racing down the stairs you slip unnoticed out the back door of the hotel and flee on foot out of town. The sound of gunshots continue to ring out for several minutes until you are aware of the thudding of horse hooves - glancing back your heart gives a thrill of delight as you see your companions Bill Doolin and Bill Dalton (riding the same horse), Charley Pierce, Red Buck, Dynamite Dick and Tulsa Jack all galloping towards you. Charley slows so you can jump onto his horse and you ride on. Looking back you can see lawmen have surrounded the hotel where Arkansas Tom is still firing from the windows and it seems that your companion is lost. +> 23 January 1894: Pawnee, Indian Territory +Your narrow escape has shaken all of you and for the next few days you put as much distance as you can between yourselves and Ingalls; you also read in newspapers about the ambush. It seems that fourteen lawmen planned to arrest you all in Ingalls but the gunfight was triggered prematurely when Bitter Creek encountered one. Three lawman and a civilian (who was accidentally shot by the lawmen) were killed and Bitter Creek, Dynamite Dick and two more civilians were all wounded by the lawmen, Bitter Creek in the leg and Dynamite Dick in the hand, losing two of his fingers. + +Worse of all Arkansas Tom was trapped in the hotel and captured, found guilty of murder in the next few months he receives a life imprisonment. The loss of your companion and your own narrow escape prompts you all to lie low in the winter, you hide out with Bitter Creek and Dynamite Dick, helping them recover from their wounds. + +At the start of 1894 you reunite and Bill Doolin turns up with two new gang members he has recruited: Richard West and William Raidler who are promptly named Little Dick and Little Bill due to their physical resemblances to Dynamite Dick and Bill Doolin. Little Bill doesn't impress you much but Little Dick, a rather wild looking man, is a good pistol shot. + +By now you are the most famous outlaw gang in America, notoriously well-known as The Wild Bunch and are now ten members strong. Bill Doolin and your brother Bill Dalton have emerged as the co-leaders of the gang and have come up with a plan. + +"There are so many of us we should split into two groups and rob banks in different states," Bill Doolin announces. "We'll hit a bank here in Pawnee first and then split into two groups and rob banks in Missouri and Texas. The Indian Territory is getting more and more lawmen in it all the time and if we want to stay ahead of them we need to start branching out into other states." All of the gang is enthusiastic about robbing the bank in Pawnee. + +One winter's morning you ride into the little town with the rest of the gang and leaving Little Bill and Little Dick to guard the horses you all walk straight into the bank. You find just one old man inside who is rather bemused when you all produce your guns and demand he empty the vault. He returns with a small bundle of bills, $100 in all. Apparently the bank is facing fore-closure and all of it's funds have been moved elsewhere. Angry and humiliated there is nothing you can do but take the money, walk out, mount up and ride off. +> A new target +The poor results of the Pawnee Bank robbery have left the gang dispirited and you split up for a few months before reuniting in the little community of Woodward. One evening your brother Bill invites you to a meeting in his room, going there you find Bill, Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley present. Once you are inside Bill closes and locks the door. + +"We have a plan," he tells you all. "It is possible that this gang has become too big so now, even if we pull off a successful robbery, there are too many in the gang for our shares to be worth much. I think we should rob the bank here in Woodward, just the five of us. We're the most experienced and could pull it off." + +Not all the group is in agreement, Bitter Creek and Charley don't like the idea of sneakily pulling off the robbery and not inviting the rest of the gang to take part; they refuse to take part in the robbery. One the other hand both Bill's are very enthusiastic about the proposal and urge you to help them rob the bank. +> Join the two Bill's in the robbery +That afternoon, after ordering the rest of the gang to leave town, you and your two companions ride up to the bank, while Bill Doolin stays outside with the horses you and your brother go in. There is just one cashier behind the counter who freezes in terror as you both draw your pistols and take him prisoner. While you guard him Bill goes to empty the contents of the vault into a sack and emerges from the vault with a wide grin. + +"We're rich little brother," he announces. + +After locking the cashier in the vault the pair of you leave the bank, mount up and ride out of town. The robbery went as smoothly as clockwork and you have escaped with $6,000, an unusually large amount which split three ways makes your share $2,000. You ride off to join the rest of the gang where you begin making plans to rob banks in Missouri and Texas. + +Trouble strikes that night when members of the gang hear news of the robbery in Woodward and quickly realise you and the two Bill's were responsible. Your companions are furious they were not invited to take part and amidst the arguments the two Bill's start to blame each other. The result is the biggest argument to rock the gang since the one just before Coffeeville. + +All the old grudges come out: Bill Doolin accuses your brother of wanting to lead the gang and be more famous than your dead brother Bob. Your brother accuses Bill Doolin of abandoning your brothers which may have contributed to their deaths at Coffeeville. The result of the argument is a split: the newer gang members side with Bill Doolin while Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce side with your brother Bill. + +The next morning the divided gang prepares to part ways. Bill Doolin, Tulsa Jack, Dynamite Dick, Red Buck, Little Dick and Little Bill are going to Missouri to rob a bank in Southwest City. Bill Dalton, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce plan to rob a bank here in the Territory before recruiting more members and heading down to Texas to rob a bank there. Both Bill's ask you to accompany them. + +You are torn between loyalty to your brother Bill and loyalty to your friend Bill but you have to make a choice. +> Go with Bill, Jack, Dick, Buck, Little Dick and Little Bill to rob the bank in Missouri +You and your six companions relocate to Missouri where you hide out for a time. Your brother does not fare well with his gang, in an unsuccessful robbery attempt where Bitter Creek was shot and wounded he and Charley went into hiding: your brother has recruited three cowboy friends and gone south to Texas to rob a bank. Bill Doolin, still angry at your brother, has no intention of helping him, and you begin to make plans for your own bank robbery. + +One spring morning you all ride into town and dismount outside the bank. Bill's plan is to take the gang inside and leave Little Bill and Little Dick outside to guard the horses. He gives you the choice of choosing whether to go inside with the main group or remain outside with the two new recruits. +> Go inside the bank +You and Bill lead your friends into the bank where you quickly draw your guns and take several tellers and customers hostage. While the others guard them you and Bill walk into the vault and quickly begin loading all the money inside into a sack. As you do Little Bill runs into the bank and shouts "Hurry boys, they've raised the alarm!" + +Almost immediately you hear several gunshots ring out from outside followed by screaming and shouting. "Let's go Bill," you tell and together you lead your men at a run out of the bank. It is pandemonium outside: apparently Little Dick has opened fire on townsfolk and shot four, killing one. The rest of you hurry to mount your horses. + +Some of the town's citizens have grabbed guns and fire at you from the window, one bullet hits the bank's wall just in front of you and another grazes Bill's head making him yell. Firing your pistols into the air you all spur your horses down the street and escape from town, leaving the chaos behind you. + +Riding cross-country you find you have escaped with $4,000, which divided between you all makes your share $500. Bill's wound isn't serious and it is soon treated and dressed before you all split up and hide out for the winter. The next month you read that following the bank robbery in Texas your brother was tracked down back to the Indian Territory where he was shot and killed by a posse of lawmen. Two of his companions were killed and the third arrested. + +You are now the last surviving Dalton brother at large and the law is closing in. Your grief is almost too much to bear. +> Reunited +The death of Bill Dalton casts a shadow over the reunion of the Wild Bunch. Bill Doolin looks more haggard and older than you remember him, he, Bitter Creek and Dynamite Dick are all in pain from previous bullet wounds. Charley, always silent seems even more solemn than usual, Red Buck sits and scowls, Little Bill looks nervous, Little Dick is silent and even the usually cheerful Tulsa Jack seems quiet and withdrawn. + +The death of your brother has led everyone to put their past differences behind them and this spring day Bill leads the gang to rob a train: boarding it at Dover Little Bill and Little Dick take the driver hostage and make him stop the train while you, Bill, Bitter Creek and Charley empty the express carriage. The robbery goes smoothly and mounting up you ride away to find you have escaped with just $1,000, making your share $100. + +You ride all day until you reach a rocky valley where you decide to rest. Bill asks for someone to keep watch while the rest of the gang sleeps and Tulsa Jack volunteers to do it. You are not sure if one sentry is enough. +> Volunteer to keep watch with Tulsa Jack +You join Tulsa Jack in keeping watch from the mouth of the valley. Unfortunately the area before the valley is heavily wooded and provides ideal cover for a posse of lawmen advancing on your position. The first thing you know of the ambush is when a dozen rifles fire. You and Tulsa Jack are both shot through and fall to the ground dead or dying. It might be some consolation to know that your sacrifices alerted your companions and enabled them to escape. + +Your Outlaw Career is at an end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The death of Bill Dalton casts a shadow over the reunion of the Wild Bunch. Bill Doolin looks more haggard and older than you remember him, he, Bitter Creek and Dynamite Dick are all in pain from previous bullet wounds. Charley, always silent seems even more solemn than usual, Red Buck sits and scowls, Little Bill looks nervous, Little Dick is silent and even the usually cheerful Tulsa Jack seems quiet and withdrawn. + +The death of your brother has led everyone to put their past differences behind them and this spring day Bill leads the gang to rob a train: boarding it at Dover Little Bill and Little Dick take the driver hostage and make him stop the train while you, Bill, Bitter Creek and Charley empty the express carriage. The robbery goes smoothly and mounting up you ride away to find you have escaped with just $1,000, making your share $100. + +You ride all day until you reach a rocky valley where you decide to rest. Bill asks for someone to keep watch while the rest of the gang sleeps and Tulsa Jack volunteers to do it. You are not sure if one sentry is enough. +> Get some sleep with the others +You join the others in resting and soon drift off to sleep. You are woken suddenly by a volley of rifle shots and springing to your feet you are startled to see Tulsa Jack lying dead on some rocks above you. You and your companions spring to your feet, climb quickly onto your horses and gallop away from the valley, escaping the posse of lawmen closing in on you. + +Bill is very shook by the death of his friend and is certain that the rest of you should all split up and hide out in different locations for at least a year to elude the lawmen who are hunting you. Bill decides to go to Eureka Springs, Arkansas, Bitter Creek and Charley choose to hide out at the ranch of some friends in Payne, Indian Territory, Dynamite Dick is going to Dallas, Texas, Red Buck is going to hide with a friend in Arapho, Indian Territory, Little Dick is going to stay with some friends in Woodward, Indian Territory and Little Bill is going to hide out in a cabin in Pawhuskie, Indian Territory. You need to choose who you will go with. + +As you glance around at your companions you are startled to see, for the first time, fear and uncertainty in their eyes. It is an undeniable fact that of the twenty-one men who have ridden with you in the Wild Bunch thus far eleven are dead and three are in prison leaving just your seven companions. Of your five brothers you are the one not dead or in prison. As your fame increases and lawmen become increasingly determined to bring you in dead or alive (the former preferable) it seems that the writing is on the wall... + +You should choose your companion or companions carefully. +> Go with Bill to Arkansas +You and Bill Doolin hide out in Eureka Springs, Arkansas where your gregarious companion keeps you company. In Eureka Springs you read about how your friends Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce were betrayed and killed by alleged friends of theirs for the reward money while Little Bill is shot and captured after being tracked down by lawmen. The forces of justice are closing in. + +Little Bill still occasionally suffers from pain in his foot that got shot three years ago and intends to go to the bathhouse in Eureka Springs to see if the waters there can help soothe the pain. You are worried it might be too dangerous for both of you to go into the heart of the busy town but Bill points out that you are in Arkansas where the Wild Bunch has never been active and you should be perfectly safe. +> Go with Bill to the bathhouse +You and Bill ride into town and make your way to the bathhouse where you both change into swimming costumes and visit the relaxing springs. The waters of the springs are wonderfully peaceful and you both enjoying your relaxing soak in them until you hear the double click of a shotgun cocking behind you and a voice calls out "put your hands up very slow." + +Turning you both find yourself facing a lone lawman armed with a shotgun, helpless there is nothing you can do as you surrender and are taken into custody. The lawman allows you to change into your clothes before you are both marched to jail where you are securely imprisoned. You are both sentenced to life imprisonment for bank robbery and it seems that your outlaw careers are over. Fate reunites you with your companions...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Bill Doolin hide out in Eureka Springs, Arkansas where your gregarious companion keeps you company. In Eureka Springs you read about how your friends Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce were betrayed and killed by alleged friends of theirs for the reward money while Little Bill is shot and captured after being tracked down by lawmen. The forces of justice are closing in. + +Little Bill still occasionally suffers from pain in his foot that got shot three years ago and intends to go to the bathhouse in Eureka Springs to see if the waters there can help soothe the pain. You are worried it might be too dangerous for both of you to go into the heart of the busy town but Bill points out that you are in Arkansas where the Wild Bunch has never been active and you should be perfectly safe. +> Stay in hiding outside the town +Your decision not to accompany Bill into town turns out to be a wise one: when he doesn't return you become concerned and hastily leave town. The next day you read in the newspapers that your friend was captured by a posse of lawmen at the bathhouse and is in prison facing charges of bank robbery. With the members of the Wild Bunch being tracked down one by one you are running out of friends to hide with... but you have to keep moving. +> Join Red Buck in the Indian Territory +You join Red Buck in a little cabin outside the settlement of Arapho where you read in newspapers about the destruction of the Wild Bunch: first Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are betrayed and killed by bounty hunters, then Little Bill is shot and captured by lawmen and finally, but worse of all, Bill Doolin is captured in a bathhouse in Eureka Springs. + +The law catches up with you and Red Buck one afternoon: you are returning to your cabin after a successful duck hunt when a lawman steps out of your cabin door and casually announces he has you both completely covered and that you should surrender. You and Red Buck glance at each other and you can tell instantly that your companion means to fight. +> Run for the trees +Without hesitating you dart to your right and sprint towards the trees as weapons explode into life behind you: fortunately most of your adversaries are shooting at Red Buck who is hit several times and collapses to the ground dead. You make it to the trees unhurt and continue running, not stopping until you are far from the area. + +Your heart is thudding in your chest as you think desperately of where you can hide: only two other members of the Wild Bunch remain at large: Dynamite Dick down in Texas and Little Dick in the nearby community of Woodward. Wherever you go to hide out it seems that lawmen will not stop pursuing you until you are as dead as most of your friends. +> Join Dynamite Dick in Texas +You join Dynamite Dick in Texas where you read in newspapers of the steady destruction of the Wild Bunch in the year after the Dover Train Robbery. First Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are betrayed and killed by turncoat friends, then Little Bill is shot and arrested in the Territory and Bill Doolin is arrested in Arkansas; finally Red Buck is shot and killed by lawmen. By the summer of 1896 only you, Dynamite Dick and Little Dick remain at large. + +Your friend is an intelligent and cautious man but one summer day you both let your guard down and risk a shopping trip in Dallas. You are walking down the street when you are confronted by a lone lawman with a pair of pistols trained on the pair of you. He orders you to slowly raise your hands and surrender. Dynamite Dick hesitates and then complies. +> Make a run for it +Taking a deep breath you run straight at the lawman and shoulder-barge him. Before he can recover from his shock you race on, vanishing amidst the crowd of people teeming Dallas's busy streets. You run as fast as you can, slipping through the town to it's outskirts where you steal a horse and ride as fast as you can to join your last remaining outlaw companion: Little Dick West. + +While you are riding from Texas to the Indian Territory Dynamite Dick is imprisoned with Bill Doolin. They don't remain imprisoned for long: after a month they escape but soon after your friend Bill is tracked down by a posse of lawmen and shot dead. Dynamite Dick escapes and after a year of hiding out you manage to arrange a meeting with him and Little Dick in the town of Woodward in the Territory, the three of you are the last of the Wild Bunch.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You join Dynamite Dick in Texas where you read in newspapers of the steady destruction of the Wild Bunch in the year after the Dover Train Robbery. First Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are betrayed and killed by turncoat friends, then Little Bill is shot and arrested in the Territory and Bill Doolin is arrested in Arkansas; finally Red Buck is shot and killed by lawmen. By the summer of 1896 only you, Dynamite Dick and Little Dick remain at large. + +Your friend is an intelligent and cautious man but one summer day you both let your guard down and risk a shopping trip in Dallas. You are walking down the street when you are confronted by a lone lawman with a pair of pistols trained on the pair of you. He orders you to slowly raise your hands and surrender. Dynamite Dick hesitates and then complies. +> Surrender +You calmly raise your hands and surrender. You and Dynamite Dick are taken into custody and transported to the Indian Territory for your trial. With your capture Little Dick West remains the only member of the Wild Bunch still at large and it seems that your outlaw career is finally at an end... but then fate reunites you with your friends.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Without hesitating you dart to your right and sprint towards the trees as weapons explode into life behind you: fortunately most of your adversaries are shooting at Red Buck who is hit several times and collapses to the ground dead. You make it to the trees unhurt and continue running, not stopping until you are far from the area. + +Your heart is thudding in your chest as you think desperately of where you can hide: only two other members of the Wild Bunch remain at large: Dynamite Dick down in Texas and Little Dick in the nearby community of Woodward. Wherever you go to hide out it seems that lawmen will not stop pursuing you until you are as dead as most of your friends. +> Join Little Dick in the Indian Territory +You flee to Woodward following the arrest of Bill Doolin and the shooting death of Red Buck at the hands of a posse of lawmen in Indian Territory. You find Little Dick and hide out with him at the home of two brothers called Al and John Jenning where you read of the capture of Dynamite Dick in Texas. Dynamite Dick and Bill Doolin escape from prison together in the summer of 1896, though Bill is tracked down by a posse of lawmen and killed soon after his escape. After a year on the run you and Little Dick finally arrange a meeting with Dynamite Dick in Woodward - by now the three of you are the last members of the Wild Bunch still at large.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You join Red Buck in a little cabin outside the settlement of Arapho where you read in newspapers about the destruction of the Wild Bunch: first Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are betrayed and killed by bounty hunters, then Little Bill is shot and captured by lawmen and finally, but worse of all, Bill Doolin is captured in a bathhouse in Eureka Springs. + +The law catches up with you and Red Buck one afternoon: you are returning to your cabin after a successful duck hunt when a lawman steps out of your cabin door and casually announces he has you both completely covered and that you should surrender. You and Red Buck glance at each other and you can tell instantly that your companion means to fight. +> Go for your gun +You pull your pistol from it's holster but you never get the chance to use it: several bullets hit you and Red Buck in the chest and you both fall backwards to the ground, very dead. Your death marks the passing of the last of the Dalton Boys and within a short time the Wild Bunch is destroyed, it's last members hunted down and killed. + +Your Outlaw Career is over.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You join the others in resting and soon drift off to sleep. You are woken suddenly by a volley of rifle shots and springing to your feet you are startled to see Tulsa Jack lying dead on some rocks above you. You and your companions spring to your feet, climb quickly onto your horses and gallop away from the valley, escaping the posse of lawmen closing in on you. + +Bill is very shook by the death of his friend and is certain that the rest of you should all split up and hide out in different locations for at least a year to elude the lawmen who are hunting you. Bill decides to go to Eureka Springs, Arkansas, Bitter Creek and Charley choose to hide out at the ranch of some friends in Payne, Indian Territory, Dynamite Dick is going to Dallas, Texas, Red Buck is going to hide with a friend in Arapho, Indian Territory, Little Dick is going to stay with some friends in Woodward, Indian Territory and Little Bill is going to hide out in a cabin in Pawhuskie, Indian Territory. You need to choose who you will go with. + +As you glance around at your companions you are startled to see, for the first time, fear and uncertainty in their eyes. It is an undeniable fact that of the twenty-one men who have ridden with you in the Wild Bunch thus far eleven are dead and three are in prison leaving just your seven companions. Of your five brothers you are the one not dead or in prison. As your fame increases and lawmen become increasingly determined to bring you in dead or alive (the former preferable) it seems that the writing is on the wall... + +You should choose your companion or companions carefully. +> Stay with Bitter Creek and Charley in the Territory +You spend the next month riding with Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce to the ranch of their friends, the Dunn brothers. Bitter Creek is friendly and chatty, only wincing occasionally from his wounds. Charley is as silent as ever. As you approach the Dunn ranch the five Dunn brothers come out to meet you. You greet them cheerfully. + +The Dunn boys respond by drawing pistols from their pockets and firing at you and your friends. You have a split second to make a decision on what to do. +> Spur your horse straight at them to break through +Spurring your horse at your attackers is the last thing they expected and they hastily throw themselves aside as you gallop through. Some of your assailants fire shots at you but by leaning far over the side of the saddle you are able to avoid the shots whistling overhead - your companions aren't so lucky and a glance back shows them both lying dead on the ground. + +You do not stop riding until you are reach the nearby town of Payne and hastily buy a train ticket out of the area. Over the next few days the newspapers confirm what you already knew: the Dunn brothers betrayed your friends for money and killed them. With your two friends dead you and Bill Doolin are the last survivors of the Dalton Gang. You must pick someone else to hide with.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You spend the next month riding with Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce to the ranch of their friends, the Dunn brothers. Bitter Creek is friendly and chatty, only wincing occasionally from his wounds. Charley is as silent as ever. As you approach the Dunn ranch the five Dunn brothers come out to meet you. You greet them cheerfully. + +The Dunn boys respond by drawing pistols from their pockets and firing at you and your friends. You have a split second to make a decision on what to do. +> Draw your weapons and return fire +You pull your pistols from your pocket but barely have time to raise them when a rifle shot hits you in the throat. You fall backwards from your horse, dying alongside your companions in the dust. You have been betrayed by your friends for financial reward and the deaths of you and your companions in just the beginning of the end for the Wild Bunch. + +Your Outlaw Career is over.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and your six companions relocate to Missouri where you hide out for a time. Your brother does not fare well with his gang, in an unsuccessful robbery attempt where Bitter Creek was shot and wounded he and Charley went into hiding: your brother has recruited three cowboy friends and gone south to Texas to rob a bank. Bill Doolin, still angry at your brother, has no intention of helping him, and you begin to make plans for your own bank robbery. + +One spring morning you all ride into town and dismount outside the bank. Bill's plan is to take the gang inside and leave Little Bill and Little Dick outside to guard the horses. He gives you the choice of choosing whether to go inside with the main group or remain outside with the two new recruits. +> Stay outside and guard the horses +You remain outside with the two newest gang members while the others go into the bank. Almost immediately you notice that the three of you are attracting attention from the townsfolk with all your horses outside the bank and feel uneasy. Suddenly you are recognised and the familiar cry is shouted out: "Boys! They are robbing the bank!" + +"We'd better warn the others," Little Bill mutters to you nervously. +> Run inside the bank and warn the others +You run into the bank and shout "quick boys, they've raised the alarm!" Almost immediately several gun shots are fired outside and looking out the window you see Little Dick has opened fire on the townsfolk, hitting four of them and killing one. Quickly you and your companions race outside and mount the horses as townsfolk begin to fire at you all from windows and doorways up and down the street. One bullet grazes Bill's head making him yell in pain. Firing your pistols into the air you and your companions ride out of town. + +Riding cross-country you find you have escaped with $4,000, which divided between you all makes your share $500. Bill's wound isn't serious and it is soon treated and dressed before you all split up and hide out for the winter. The next month you read that following the bank robbery in Texas your brother was tracked down back to the Indian Territory where he was shot and killed by a posse of lawmen. Two of his companions were killed and the third arrested. + +You are now the last surviving Dalton brother at large and the law is closing in. Your grief is almost too much to bear.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You remain outside with the two newest gang members while the others go into the bank. Almost immediately you notice that the three of you are attracting attention from the townsfolk with all your horses outside the bank and feel uneasy. Suddenly you are recognised and the familiar cry is shouted out: "Boys! They are robbing the bank!" + +"We'd better warn the others," Little Bill mutters to you nervously. +> Stay outside and protect the horses +You remain outside with Little Dick while Little Bill runs into the bank to warn the others. As the cries of alarm increase Little Dick suddenly starts shooting into the town citizens milling around the street, hitting three of them. The townsfolk scatter except for one man who pulls a pistol from his pocket. Before he can take aim you raise your rifle and shoot him through the throat, dropping him dead in the street. + +As the townsfolk continue to scatter your companions burst from the bank behind you and you all hastily mount your horses. A few citizens have found their weapons and fire at you and your companions from the cover of windows and doorways. One bullet grazes Bill's head making him yell. Firing your pistols into the air you and your companions ride out of town, leaving the scene of chaos behind you. + +Riding cross-country you find you have escaped with $4,000, which divided between you all makes your share $500. Bill's wound isn't serious and it is soon treated and dressed before you all split up and hide out for the winter. The next month you read that following the bank robbery in Texas your brother was tracked down back to the Indian Territory where he was shot and killed by a posse of lawmen. Two of his companions were killed and the third arrested. + +You are now the last surviving Dalton brother at large and the law is closing in. Your grief is almost too much to bear.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>That afternoon, after ordering the rest of the gang to leave town, you and your two companions ride up to the bank, while Bill Doolin stays outside with the horses you and your brother go in. There is just one cashier behind the counter who freezes in terror as you both draw your pistols and take him prisoner. While you guard him Bill goes to empty the contents of the vault into a sack and emerges from the vault with a wide grin. + +"We're rich little brother," he announces. + +After locking the cashier in the vault the pair of you leave the bank, mount up and ride out of town. The robbery went as smoothly as clockwork and you have escaped with $6,000, an unusually large amount which split three ways makes your share $2,000. You ride off to join the rest of the gang where you begin making plans to rob banks in Missouri and Texas. + +Trouble strikes that night when members of the gang hear news of the robbery in Woodward and quickly realise you and the two Bill's were responsible. Your companions are furious they were not invited to take part and amidst the arguments the two Bill's start to blame each other. The result is the biggest argument to rock the gang since the one just before Coffeeville. + +All the old grudges come out: Bill Doolin accuses your brother of wanting to lead the gang and be more famous than your dead brother Bob. Your brother accuses Bill Doolin of abandoning your brothers which may have contributed to their deaths at Coffeeville. The result of the argument is a split: the newer gang members side with Bill Doolin while Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce side with your brother Bill. + +The next morning the divided gang prepares to part ways. Bill Doolin, Tulsa Jack, Dynamite Dick, Red Buck, Little Dick and Little Bill are going to Missouri to rob a bank in Southwest City. Bill Dalton, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce plan to rob a bank here in the Territory before recruiting more members and heading down to Texas to rob a bank there. Both Bill's ask you to accompany them. + +You are torn between loyalty to your brother Bill and loyalty to your friend Bill but you have to make a choice. +> Go with Bill, Bitter Creek and Charley to rob a bank in the Indian Territory +You choose to stick with your brother and together with Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce you quickly plan a robbery of the small bank in the little town of Sacred Heart. One spring morning the four of you ride into town, Bill's plan is for Charley to stay outside with the horses while he and Bitter Creek go into the bank. He gives you the chance of who you go with. +> Go inside the bank with Bill and Bitter Creek +You and your friends walk into the bank and draw your pistols. + +"This is a robbery," you announce to the lone man behind the counter. "Raise your hands." + +The cashier promptly raises his hands, holding a pistol in one of them. Without hesitation he fires a shot, hitting Bitter Creek in the shoulder. Bitter Creek swears and you immediately fire, hitting the teller in the stomach, knocking him to the floor. "Quickly," Bill yells, throwing his arm over the injured Bitter Creek and helping him outside. The four of you mount up and flee without a dollar. + +Bitter Creek's injury is serious and having been shot for the second time in seven months he is angry, insisting he wouldn't have been shot if he had just stayed with Bill. He and Charley plan to go into hiding with a friend, refusing to join Bill in his plan to rob a bank in Texas. In response Bill recruits four cowboy friends of his: a mean character called George Bennett, brothers Asa and Jim Knight and a youth called Jim Wallace. Bill urges you to join him and his raw recruits in robbing the bank in Texas while Bitter Creek and Charley are equally insistent that you should join them in hiding. +> Join Bill and his new companions in robbing the bank in Texas +You, Bill and your four new friends travel south from the Indian Territory to the little town of Longview. You are not impressed by your companions, they seem prone to enthusiastic drinking and bragging about all the men they've beaten in fights or how good they are with pistols. You share your doubts with Bill but he just shrugs and insists they're good gunmen. + +One spring afternoon you all ride up to the bank and dismount outside. Bill's plan is to go inside with the Knight brothers, Asa and Jim, and leave Jim Wallace and George Bennett outside to guard the horses. He lets you choose who you go with. +> Enter the bank with Bill, Asa and Jim +You walk into the bank with your friends and draw your pistols. The two tellers are quickly taken hostage and you and Bill leave your new recruits to guard them while you walk into the vault and quickly begin emptying it's contents into a sack. While you are busy doing this you suddenly hear a gunshot outside followed by a series of them. + +"Well, that's not good," Bill comments to you. "Quickly boys, we're leaving." +You all hurry outside to find Jim sheltering behind the horses while George Bennett is lying dead in the middle of the street, four other people are also lying dead or wounded around the street. A man behind a tree with a rifle, presumably the man who shot George, fires at you all missing. + +"George went crazy and just opened fire on people!" Jim shouts to you. Mounting up quickly the five of you spur your horses out of town, rifle shots zinging past you but fortunately not hitting you. A safe distance from the town you count the money in the sack and find you have escaped with $4,000, making your share $800. + +"We need to split up," Bill announces. "The Texas Rangers will be after us. I'm going back to Indian Territory to hide out at a little cabin I have outside Elk. The rest of you I want to stay here, go down to El Paso or someplace safe and wait for me to send for you." + +The others agree and you need to choose who you will go with. +> Go with Bill back to the Indian Territory +You and Bill travel back to the Indian Territory to a small one-roomed cabin Bill rents where you plan to lie low for a time. On your journey you read how Bill Doolin's half of the gang successfully robbed a bank in Missouri, like you escaping after a gun battle. In the cabin you both lie low for a few weeks until one fateful day you are both sitting inside one night when you hear a voice shout out "We have the cabin surrounded! Come out with your hands up and no one will get hurt." "It's the law!" Bill hisses as you both jump to your feet. + +There are only two ways out of the cabin: the front door and a small back window. Bill snatches up both of his pistols, cocks them and approaches the door. "I'm going to give them something to remember me by," he mutters to you. +> Race out the front door with Bill +You and Bill take a deep breath and then Bill throws open the door and you both race out, pistols in both your hands and firing. A volley of rifle shots rings out and both you and Bill are hit multiple times and blasted to the ground dying. The last of the Dalton brothers breathe their last breaths as you and your brother die in one last hail of gunfire. + +Your Outlaw Career is over.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Bill travel back to the Indian Territory to a small one-roomed cabin Bill rents where you plan to lie low for a time. On your journey you read how Bill Doolin's half of the gang successfully robbed a bank in Missouri, like you escaping after a gun battle. In the cabin you both lie low for a few weeks until one fateful day you are both sitting inside one night when you hear a voice shout out "We have the cabin surrounded! Come out with your hands up and no one will get hurt." "It's the law!" Bill hisses as you both jump to your feet. + +There are only two ways out of the cabin: the front door and a small back window. Bill snatches up both of his pistols, cocks them and approaches the door. "I'm going to give them something to remember me by," he mutters to you. +> Try and squeeze out of the back window +Taking off your gun belt you climb onto a table, throw the window open and painfully squeeze yourself out of the narrow opening. You hear Bill throw open the door, race out firing his pistols, there is a volley of rifle shots and then silence. Gritting your teeth you painfully slide through the window, tearing all the buttons off your shirt in the process and drop awkwardly onto the ground behind. + +You are in luck: no lawmen are guarding the rear of the building and you run as fast as you can into the trees. After many long and difficult days you succeed in reaching safety and read in newspapers what you feared is true: your brother Bill is dead. At the same time lawmen track down your companions in Texas, killing Asa Knight and Jim Wallace and capturing Jim Knight, who is sentenced to life imprisonment. You hide out alone in the Indian Territory for the rest of the year before re-joining the rest of the gang next spring.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk into the bank with your friends and draw your pistols. The two tellers are quickly taken hostage and you and Bill leave your new recruits to guard them while you walk into the vault and quickly begin emptying it's contents into a sack. While you are busy doing this you suddenly hear a gunshot outside followed by a series of them. + +"Well, that's not good," Bill comments to you. "Quickly boys, we're leaving." +You all hurry outside to find Jim sheltering behind the horses while George Bennett is lying dead in the middle of the street, four other people are also lying dead or wounded around the street. A man behind a tree with a rifle, presumably the man who shot George, fires at you all missing. + +"George went crazy and just opened fire on people!" Jim shouts to you. Mounting up quickly the five of you spur your horses out of town, rifle shots zinging past you but fortunately not hitting you. A safe distance from the town you count the money in the sack and find you have escaped with $4,000, making your share $800. + +"We need to split up," Bill announces. "The Texas Rangers will be after us. I'm going back to Indian Territory to hide out at a little cabin I have outside Elk. The rest of you I want to stay here, go down to El Paso or someplace safe and wait for me to send for you." + +The others agree and you need to choose who you will go with. +> Stay with Asa, Jim and Jim in Texas +You decide to go with the cowboys to El Paso and travel there in the week after the robbery. The day after you have arrived you are walking down the main street chatting to Jim Wallace when turn a corner and suddenly find yourself staring down the barrels of a dozen rifles held by some very serious looking Texas Rangers. + +"Men you are under arrest," the Ranger Captain barks. "Throw up your hands." + +Jim Knight immediately complies while the other Jim and Asa drift their hands towards their gun belts. You are on the right of your little group and an alley opening on your right might offer you a chance of escape but it would be extremely risky. +> Raise your hands +You raise your hands into the air. Asa and Jim go for their guns and immediately several rifles explode into life: hit by several bullets the two men fall to the ground dead. Jim Knight gives a howl of pain as his brother dies and the pair of you are taken into custody. One week later lawmen in the Indian Territory track down and shoot your brother dead. + +The trials for you and Jim Knight are straight-forward affairs: you are both found guilty of the Longview Bank Robbery and are both sentenced to fifty years imprisonment. Your only consolation as you begin your jail term is that Bill Doolin and his Wild Bunch are still alive and free... for another year or two until most of the gang are killed or captured. Finally fate reunites you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to go with the cowboys to El Paso and travel there in the week after the robbery. The day after you have arrived you are walking down the main street chatting to Jim Wallace when turn a corner and suddenly find yourself staring down the barrels of a dozen rifles held by some very serious looking Texas Rangers. + +"Men you are under arrest," the Ranger Captain barks. "Throw up your hands." + +Jim Knight immediately complies while the other Jim and Asa drift their hands towards their gun belts. You are on the right of your little group and an alley opening on your right might offer you a chance of escape but it would be extremely risky. +> Go for your gun +You clap your hand to your pistol at your hip while Asa Knight and Jim Wallace do the same thing. Several rifles explode into life and you are shot through three times and together with Asa and Jim you are knocked to the ground, fatally wounded Gasping and choking you die of your wounds minutes later, a week after your death your brother Bill will be killed as well. + +Your Outlaw Career is over.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to go with the cowboys to El Paso and travel there in the week after the robbery. The day after you have arrived you are walking down the main street chatting to Jim Wallace when turn a corner and suddenly find yourself staring down the barrels of a dozen rifles held by some very serious looking Texas Rangers. + +"Men you are under arrest," the Ranger Captain barks. "Throw up your hands." + +Jim Knight immediately complies while the other Jim and Asa drift their hands towards their gun belts. You are on the right of your little group and an alley opening on your right might offer you a chance of escape but it would be extremely risky. +> Run for the alley +You dart to your right at the exact same moment that Asa Knight and Jim Wallace go for their guns. Rifles explode into life, hitting and killing the two men while more Texas Rangers fire at you but you are already down the alleyway and out of sight, darting left and right through a tangle of alleys you finally emerge onto a street where an unattended horse is tied to a railing. Quickly untying it you jump onto it's back and race down the street, quickly and escape from town. + +It takes you a week to make it back to the Indian Territory by horse and train and by the time you arrive it is too late: lawmen have tracked down and killed your brother Bill. You are now the last of the Dalton Brothers free and alive and your grief is overwhelming. You spend the rest of the year in hiding before emerging and reuniting with Bill Doolin and your remaining outlaw companions the following spring.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You, Bill and your four new friends travel south from the Indian Territory to the little town of Longview. You are not impressed by your companions, they seem prone to enthusiastic drinking and bragging about all the men they've beaten in fights or how good they are with pistols. You share your doubts with Bill but he just shrugs and insists they're good gunmen. + +One spring afternoon you all ride up to the bank and dismount outside. Bill's plan is to go inside with the Knight brothers, Asa and Jim, and leave Jim Wallace and George Bennett outside to guard the horses. He lets you choose who you go with. +> Stay outside with Jim and George +You stay outside with the two cowboys while the others go into the bank. George seems ill at ease and strides up and down in front of the horses. His behaviour is so odd it draws the attention of some passing townsfolk who stop and stare. "What are you looking at?" George snaps at them. Without warning he raises his pistol and shoots one of the men in the arm. + +Panic ensues as people scream and run for cover while George begins laughing manically and firing pistol shots wildly at fleeing townsfolk, hitting two more. Jim swears and takes cover behind the horses while you draw your pistol and consider your position. +> Join George in shooting at people +Striding out into the street you catch sight of a lawman jogging down the street towards you. Raising your rifle you take careful aim and shoot him in the chest, killing him. Suddenly you hear the boom of a buffalo gun and George is knocked off his feet by a shot that tears through his head. You turn just in time to see a man crouching behind a tree holding a rifle. He fires again, hitting you in the heart and killing you instantly. + +Your Outlaw Career has come to an end on this blood-soaked Texan street.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You stay outside with the two cowboys while the others go into the bank. George seems ill at ease and strides up and down in front of the horses. His behaviour is so odd it draws the attention of some passing townsfolk who stop and stare. "What are you looking at?" George snaps at them. Without warning he raises his pistol and shoots one of the men in the arm. + +Panic ensues as people scream and run for cover while George begins laughing manically and firing pistol shots wildly at fleeing townsfolk, hitting two more. Jim swears and takes cover behind the horses while you draw your pistol and consider your position. +> Take cover with Jim behind the horses +You join Jim in sheltering behind the horses and watch as George fires again and again, hitting more people. Suddenly a gunman with a rifle fires from behind a tree, hitting George in the head and dropping him dead in the street. Behind you the bank doors open and your companions rush out, your brother clutching a sack of money. + +"George went crazy and just opened fire on people!" you shout to him. Mounting up quickly the five of you spur your horses out of town, rifle shots zinging past you but fortunately not hitting you. A safe distance from the town you count the money in the sack and find you have escaped with $4,000, making your share $800. + +"We need to split up," Bill announces. "The Texas Rangers will be after us. I'm going back to Indian Territory to hide out at a little cabin I have outside Elk. The rest of you I want to stay here, go down to El Paso or someplace safe and wait for me to send for you." + +The others agree and you need to choose who you will go with.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and your friends walk into the bank and draw your pistols. + +"This is a robbery," you announce to the lone man behind the counter. "Raise your hands." + +The cashier promptly raises his hands, holding a pistol in one of them. Without hesitation he fires a shot, hitting Bitter Creek in the shoulder. Bitter Creek swears and you immediately fire, hitting the teller in the stomach, knocking him to the floor. "Quickly," Bill yells, throwing his arm over the injured Bitter Creek and helping him outside. The four of you mount up and flee without a dollar. + +Bitter Creek's injury is serious and having been shot for the second time in seven months he is angry, insisting he wouldn't have been shot if he had just stayed with Bill. He and Charley plan to go into hiding with a friend, refusing to join Bill in his plan to rob a bank in Texas. In response Bill recruits four cowboy friends of his: a mean character called George Bennett, brothers Asa and Jim Knight and a youth called Jim Wallace. Bill urges you to join him and his raw recruits in robbing the bank in Texas while Bitter Creek and Charley are equally insistent that you should join them in hiding. +> Go into hiding with Bitter Creek and Charley +Saying goodbye to your brother you go with Bitter Creek and Charley to hide out at the ranch of the Dunn Brothers, who are friends of theirs. In the newspapers you read how both Bill Doolin and Bill Dalton pull off bank robberies in Missouri and Texas respectively, both escaping after violent gunfights. + +The shocking news comes in June when you read that your brother Bill has been tracked down and killed by a posse of lawmen and all his companions either killed or captured. You are the last surviving Dalton brother not behind bars and you are absolutely devastated by your brother's death. It seems that the law will not rest until you and your companions are all dead.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You choose to stick with your brother and together with Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce you quickly plan a robbery of the small bank in the little town of Sacred Heart. One spring morning the four of you ride into town, Bill's plan is for Charley to stay outside with the horses while he and Bitter Creek go into the bank. He gives you the chance of who you go with. +> Stay outside with Charley +You remain outside the bank with Charley while the other two go in the bank. Almost immediately there is a gunshot followed by a second gunshot and then Bill and Bitter Creek burst out of the bank doors, the latter bleeding from a bullet wound in his shoulder. "Go, go, go!" Bill shouts and the four of you mount up and flee without a dollar. + +It seems that the cashier inside the bank had a pistol in the bank and as soon as your companions drew their weapons he opened fire, hitting Bitter Creek in the shoulder. Bitter Creek fired back, hitting the man in the stomach and then your two companions fled. The robbery attempt has been a complete failure. + +Bitter Creek's injury is serious and having been shot for the second time in seven months he is angry, insisting he wouldn't have been shot if he had just stayed with Bill. He and Charley plan to go into hiding with a friend, refusing to join Bill in his plan to rob a bank in Texas. In response Bill recruits four cowboy friends of his: a mean character called George Bennett, brothers Asa and Jim Knight and a youth called Jim Wallace. Bill urges you to join him and his raw recruits in robbing the bank in Texas while Bitter Creek and Charley are equally insistent that you should join them in hiding.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The poor results of the Pawnee Bank robbery have left the gang dispirited and you split up for a few months before reuniting in the little community of Woodward. One evening your brother Bill invites you to a meeting in his room, going there you find Bill, Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley present. Once you are inside Bill closes and locks the door. + +"We have a plan," he tells you all. "It is possible that this gang has become too big so now, even if we pull off a successful robbery, there are too many in the gang for our shares to be worth much. I think we should rob the bank here in Woodward, just the five of us. We're the most experienced and could pull it off." + +Not all the group is in agreement, Bitter Creek and Charley don't like the idea of sneakily pulling off the robbery and not inviting the rest of the gang to take part; they refuse to take part in the robbery. One the other hand both Bill's are very enthusiastic about the proposal and urge you to help them rob the bank. +> Decline and sit the robbery out +That afternoon the two Bill's order the rest of the gang out of town and you accompany your companions to a nearby village. That evening both Bill's turn up looking pleased with themselves, taking you to one side your brother Bill confides in you the robbery went without a hitch and the two men have just made themselves richer. + +Trouble strikes that night when members of the gang hear news of the robbery in Woodward and quickly realise you and the two Bill's were responsible. Your companions are furious they were not invited to take part and amidst the arguments the two Bill's start to blame each other. The result is the biggest argument to rock the gang since the one just before Coffeeville. + +All the old grudges come out: Bill Doolin accuses your brother of wanting to lead the gang and be more famous than your dead brother Bob. Your brother accuses Bill Doolin of abandoning your brothers which may have contributed to their deaths at Coffeeville. The result of the argument is a split: the newer gang members side with Bill Doolin while Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce side with your brother Bill. + +The next morning the divided gang prepares to part ways. Bill Doolin, Tulsa Jack, Dynamite Dick, Red Buck, Little Dick and Little Bill are going to Missouri to rob a bank in Southwest City. Bill Dalton, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce plan to rob a bank here in the Territory before recruiting more members and heading down to Texas to rob a bank there. Both Bill's ask you to accompany them. + +You are torn between loyalty to your brother Bill and loyalty to your friend Bill but you have to make a choice.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>One autumn morning you and The Wild Bunch ride into Ingalls. Bill Doolin leads the way, hobbling ad wincing from his injured foot, while you and your brother Bill follow behind talking. Following you is Bitter Creek and his mute companion Charley Pierce while the newer recruits bunch together, Tulsa Jack is exchanging jokes with Dynamite Dick while Red Buck rides on in silence and Arkansas Tom cradles his rifle. You are as dangerous an outlaw gang as any that roamed the West. + +In town you agree to split up: Arkansas Tom is tired and is going over to the little community's hotel to sleep. Bitter Creek offers to saddle all the horses in the stable while the rest of the gang head into a saloon operated by your friend Murray. You need to choose who to follow. +> Follow Bitter Creek to the stable with the horses +You and Bitter Creek take the Gang's horses when the others dismount and head towards the stables. As you are moving down the street you catch sight of a man walking down the street towards you. He has a silver Deputy's badge on his chest. The man halts as he catches sight of you and in a flash all three of you go for your guns. +The Lawman fires first, hitting your companion in the leg. Bitter Creek yells as you fire, narrowly missing the man who dives for cover. Suddenly you notice several men with guns in their hands running towards you both from all directions. +"Ride!" you shout to Bitter Creek and with pistols exploding into life behind you the pair of you spur your horses down the main street, bullets zipping by. You do not stop riding until you are well out of town when you finally turn back to see what is happening. +The whole town seems alive with gunfire, bodies are lying in the street as lawmen shelter behind cover and fire pistols and rifles. As you watch Bill Dalton, Bill Doolin, Charlie, Tulsa Jack, Dynamite Dick and Red Buck, all mounted, burst out of the stable and spur stolen horses down the street, firing their pistols. Even as you watch Bill Dalton's horse is shot in the head and collapses spectacularly, your brother jumps from the saddle, lands on his feet, turns and shoots the lawman who killed his horse. Bill Doolin reins in and your brother runs towards him, throws himself onto the back of his horse and they gallop on. When your companions reach your position you all apply spurs to your horses and gallop on, away from Ingalls.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>One autumn morning you and The Wild Bunch ride into Ingalls. Bill Doolin leads the way, hobbling ad wincing from his injured foot, while you and your brother Bill follow behind talking. Following you is Bitter Creek and his mute companion Charley Pierce while the newer recruits bunch together, Tulsa Jack is exchanging jokes with Dynamite Dick while Red Buck rides on in silence and Arkansas Tom cradles his rifle. You are as dangerous an outlaw gang as any that roamed the West. + +In town you agree to split up: Arkansas Tom is tired and is going over to the little community's hotel to sleep. Bitter Creek offers to saddle all the horses in the stable while the rest of the gang head into a saloon operated by your friend Murray. You need to choose who to follow. +> Follow the rest of the Gang into the saloon to drink +You and your companions head down the street to the town saloon where the owner Murray is an old friend of Bill Doolin. You all order drinks and have barely sat down before you hear the unmistakable sound of gunshots from the street. Springing to your feet you all glance out the window and see several lawmen armed with pistols and rifles running towards the saloon. + +"Quick, the back door!" Murray yells. "I'll cover you!" + +Without hesitation and with your brother Bill leading the way you all run out of the back door, cut down an alley to the stable and race inside. There are dozens of horses inside and each of you chooses one while gunfire rages outside as the lawmen trade shots with Murray. Once you are all mounted and ready Bill Doolin throws open the stable doors and you all charge out. + +The lawmen are taken completely by surprise as you and your companions burst out of the stable onto main street: they were all still firing at the saloon or at the hotel where Arkansas Tom is sniping at them with a rifle. Two lawmen are close to the stable and fire at you all, one bullet hits your brother Bill's horse in the head and it falls to the ground, your brother jumping clear just in time. Turning around with his pistol in his hand he fires a shot that hits the lawman in the chest. You and Bill Doolin both pull the reins of your horses and turn around as your brother runs towards you. + +"I'll get him," Bill shouts to you. "Cover me." +> Fire at the remaining lawman +"Ok" you shout and as Bill rides back towards your brother you steady your horse and fire at the lawman. Your first shot misses but the second hits him in the head and he falls to the ground. As Bill pulls alongside your brother scrambles onto the back of his horse and turning about he joins you in galloping down the street away from the lawmen who are firing at you. + +Dynamite Dick has turned his horse around and is firing his pistol at the lawmen behind you to cover you. As you ride towards him a bullet whistles past you and hits Dick in the hand, knocking his pistol flying and severing two fingers. Dick screams in pain and turns away, joining you and your companions in riding away, safely escaping from town and the ambush.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and your companions head down the street to the town saloon where the owner Murray is an old friend of Bill Doolin. You all order drinks and have barely sat down before you hear the unmistakable sound of gunshots from the street. Springing to your feet you all glance out the window and see several lawmen armed with pistols and rifles running towards the saloon. + +"Quick, the back door!" Murray yells. "I'll cover you!" + +Without hesitation and with your brother Bill leading the way you all run out of the back door, cut down an alley to the stable and race inside. There are dozens of horses inside and each of you chooses one while gunfire rages outside as the lawmen trade shots with Murray. Once you are all mounted and ready Bill Doolin throws open the stable doors and you all charge out. + +The lawmen are taken completely by surprise as you and your companions burst out of the stable onto main street: they were all still firing at the saloon or at the hotel where Arkansas Tom is sniping at them with a rifle. Two lawmen are close to the stable and fire at you all, one bullet hits your brother Bill's horse in the head and it falls to the ground, your brother jumping clear just in time. Turning around with his pistol in his hand he fires a shot that hits the lawman in the chest. You and Bill Doolin both pull the reins of your horses and turn around as your brother runs towards you. + +"I'll get him," Bill shouts to you. "Cover me." +> Ignore Bill and ride back to rescue your brother +You ignore Bill and spur your horse back towards your brother. Firing from behind you Bill shoots the remaining lawman in the head and as you pull up alongside your brother you turn your horse around while Bill scrambles onto the back of it. Once he is safely on you spur your horse down the street and together with Bill Doolin ride away from the lawmen who are firing at you. + +Dynamite Dick has turned his horse around and is firing his pistol at the lawmen behind you to cover you. As you ride towards him a bullet whistles past you and hits Dick in the hand, knocking his pistol flying and severing two fingers. Dick screams in pain and turns away, joining you and your companions in riding away, safely escaping from town and the ambush.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It's a somber group of six men that meet in the little town of Ingalls in the Indian Territory. You and your brother Bill are silent and serious when you meet Bill Doolin, bearded now, and his companions: the veteran outlaw Bitter Creek, his mute friend Charley Pierce and a new recruit called Ol Yantis. Despite the news from Coffeyville all of you are resolved to continue your outlaw careers with your brother Bill now declaring he wants to be an even more infamous outlaw than your late brother Bob. + + +"The newspapers say the Dalton Gang is destroyed and called us 'a wild bunch of fugitives," Bill Doolin says grimly. "I suggest we show them what The Wild Bunch is capable of." A plan is quickly hatched to rob a bank in Kansas to show that despite Coffeyville robbing banks in the state still does not intimidate you. One winter's day your newly formed Wild Bunch ride into Kansas to show America the spirit of the Dalton Gang is still alive and well. + + +Riding into the little town of Spearville you all dismount outside the bank and you, Bill and Bill walk inside while the others guard your horse. Taking the teller hostage you rapidly empty the vault of it's money, lock the teller inside, walk out of the bank, mount up and ride away. Making it back across the border into the Indian Territory you are delighted by the ease of the robbery which has netted you all $1500, making your share $200. + + +The papers are soon full of news of what they call "The Doolin-Dalton Gang" and the two Bill's are pleased. Ol is less so, he has been identified as an outlaw and wants to visit his sister's farm to say goodbye to his family while the rest of the Gang is planning on hiding out in Ingalls. You need to choose who to go with. +> Go with the rest of the Gang to Ingalls +You join your brother Bill and fellow gang members Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce in heading down to Ingalls, a lawless community where you all feel safe and hidden. You spend the next six months hiding out and partying, an interlude only briefly ruined by the news that Ol Yantis was tracked down to his sister's home by two lawmen and shot dead while resisting arrest. By the summer of 1893 you are ready for action again and with a new gang. + + +In the last six months you and your fellow outlaws have recruited four new gang members, bringing your gang strength up to nine. There is Dynamite Dick, an explosives expert with an impressive nickname, Red Buck, a grim and dour man, Tulsa Jack, a good friend of Bill Doolin's and Arkansas Tom, a sharp-shooting well-dressed young man. Together the nine of you plan your first robbery in Kansas and in the summer of 1893 you strike. + + +One summer morning the nine of you board a train at Cimarron in Kansas and while the new recruits get the driver to stop the train and Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce guard the passengers you and the two Bill's make your way to the Express Carriage. You calmly empty the safe before you all dismount, run to your horses, mount up and ride away. On the ride you count the money you have stolen and find you have gotten away with $1,000, making your share $100. + + +Unfortunately you do not get clean away, that afternoon as you are resting a posse of lawmen suddenly gallop over a nearby ridge. All of your mount up and firing pistols and rifles at each other you and your pursuers engage in a running battle for over a mile. There are no casualties on either side except Bill Doolin who is unlucky enough to be shot in the foot by a rifle shell, a painful but non-serious wound. Easily escaping the nine of you ride back to Ingalls unaware that an even deadlier enemy is in pursuit...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Much has changed in a year. + + +In the snow-covered woods outside the small town of Ingalls you and the other nine members of what the newspapers are calling The Dalton Gang have made your camp. Around one campfire your brother Bob is congratulating Bill and Grat on their respective acquittal and escape while your fourth brother Emmett looks on. The five men who have been helping you and your brothers rob trains are sitting around another camp fire chatting. + + +The most experienced recruit is Bitter Creek, a handsome little man with a big moustache. He is sitting next to his silent best friend Charley Pierce and chatting to Bill Doolin, a tall gregarious cowboy with a ready laugh. Next to them are the last two members of the Gang, Bill Power and Dick Broadwell. All of you are well-armed and with the exception of your brother Bill you are all Wanted Outlaws with prices on your heads. You have gathered to celebrate Christmas and the New Year together and on New Years Day Bob gives a little speech. + + +"Boys, we've got great opportunities before us," he declares. "In one year we have robbed three trains and put together this great Gang that is famous throughout America. This year we'll move onto bigger and better things: we'll rob more trains and then we'll move onto banks! We're going to be the biggest Outlaws to hit this country since Jesse James and his Gang! We'll make as much money as we like and out-ride and out-shoot the law!" + + +"You'll have to do it without me Bob," your brother Bill announces. "I'm going back to California to start over. I'm the only one in this Gang with a clean record and I aim to keep it that way. If you're smart Grat, Daniel and Emmett you'll come back with me too and hide out at my place. You take too many chances you'll end up shot up like that Black Face fellow I've read about in the papers or in prison for the rest of your lives." + + +Bill's announcement promptly leads to a massive argument between him and Bob while you and the rest of the Gang look on awkwardly. It ends with Bill deciding to go back to California to try to resurrect his law practice while Grat and Emmett choose to stay in the Indian Territory with Bob and the others and rob trains. When Bill sees his brothers are unwilling to join him he asks you if you'd prefer to go back to California with him or continue your outlaw life here. + + + +> Stay in the Territory with the rest of the Gang +Bill departs and the rest of you lie low for six months before making your move: one summer evening the nine of you ride into the little community of Red Rock and wait on the platform. Soon enough a train arrives but this one has all it's lights off and passes right by the platform without stopping, a very unusual thing. The next train does stop and you all climb aboard; while the others take care of the driver and passengers you and your brothers go to the Express Carriage. + + +You take the Express Guard hostage and go to rob the safe, only to discover there isn't one. Angrily you ask the Guard where all the money is. + + +"There isn't any," the terrified man replies nervously. "The Southern Pacific have changed their policy because so many of their trains were robbed last year... now only Express Trains carry money and they're all heavily guarded. The only cash we keep on the Passenger Trains now is petty cash." + + +Grat swears angrily but there is nothing you can do but grab the petty cash, about $50 altogether, and leave when the train stops. After riding a safe distance to avoid pursuit a lively debate ensues in the Gang over what to do now: Bill Doolin thinks you all should rob trains outside the Territory while others think you should try robbing banks instead. The discussion ends with Bob declaring you will all try robbing one of these Express Trains in the Territory next month, despite the armed guards the messenger spoke of... +> The Pryor Creek Train Robbery +On the chosen day you all gather at the tiny train station at Pryor Creek to await the arrival of the train. You all have very specific jobs: Bill Power and Dick Broadwell are to board the driver's compartment immediately and stop him moving the train from the platform. Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce are to board the Passenger Carriage and keep everything under control there. Your brothers Bob, Grat and Emmett will board the Express Carriage and try to capture the armed guards before robbing the safe. You need to choose which group you will join. +> Join Bill and Dick in securing the Driver's Carriage +As the train stops you join Bill and Dick in climbing into the driver's compartment where you draw your pistols. The driver turns to complain but freezes when he sees your guns, you order him to put his hands up and leaving the other two to guard him you return to the doorway and watch what is happening on the platform. Two male passengers have got off the train while further down the platform seven armed guards have stepped off the train and are walking up and down smoking and stretching their legs. + + +Everything seems to be going like clockwork until the guards turn to get back on the train. A shot is fired, hitting one of them and then pandemonium erupts as gunfire explodes from the train, Both the passengers on the platform and a second guard are hit and fall down as the remaining guards run for cover. From the door of the driving compartment you fire your pistol at the fleeing guards, who take shelter and start to return fire. + + +When the guards start firing back you step back inside the driver's compartment and push the door shut. "Time to go I think," you tell your companions and opening the door on the other side you jump down off the train. Further up you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards. + + +The robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious. + + +"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?" he demands. "If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?" + + +It transpires that Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Apparently they were in the Passenger Carriage when they heard the gunfire and shot the first people they saw on the platform. Bob angrily attacks them while the three outlaws defend themselves equally furiously. + + +"I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now," Bob decides. "I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after." + + +"Well that's just fine Bob," Bill Doolin says cooly. "It sounds too risky anyway." + + +Frowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others. +> Join Bob, Grat, Emmett, Bill and Dick in the Coffeyville Raid +On the chosen day, three months after the Pryor Creek Robbery, you and your five companions ride into the peaceful little town of Coffeyville. You already have a plan: to hitch your horses outside the town's two banks. While Bob and Emmett enter the first bank Grat, Bill and Dick are to enter the second bank and rob both, lock any staff and customers in the vaults, emerge at roughly the same time, mount up and ride out of town before the alarm is raised. + + +As you ride into town you are annoyed to see that the hitching posts outside the banks have been taken down for some street work, forcing you to leave your horses in an alleyway close to the banks. As you dismount and walk towards the bank your are uncomfortably aware that a lot of people seem to be glancing at you, heavily armed as you all are with rifles and you with your two pistols. "Ok boys, move smart and fast," Bob mutters. "Who you joining Dan?" +> Go with Bob and Emmett into the first bank +You and your brothers walk confidently into one of the town's banks to discover three cashiers sitting inside chatting and laughing. The laughter dies from their faces as you, Bob and Emmett draw your pistols and point them at the cashiers. "This is a hold up," you declare. "Keep silent and no one will be hurt." While Emmett guards the cashiers you and Bob swiftly empty the contents of the open vault into a sack. Everything is going according to plan. + + +Then you hear the gunshots. + + +The windows of the bank you are in crack as bullets pound into them. "You men in front of us," Bob barks, passing the sack of money to Emmett and grabbing a teller. "We're going out the front." Each of you hold a teller in front of you and move towards the front door but several bullets break the glass, driving you back. "Out the back," Bob yells. "Quickly!" Abandoning the tellers the three of you race out a back door and onto the street. The alleyway where you left the horses is some distance away. "Go quickly boys," Bob orders as gunshots continue to ring out all around. "I'll cover you." +> Help Bob hold the street +While Emmett hurries down the street you and Bob back towards the alley cautiously, guns in your hands. A citizen of the town steps out fo a doorway with a pistol in his hand, instinctively raising both your pistols you shoot him twice in the chest. As he falls a second man springs from cover and runs to the dying man's side. "Stop," you shout but he ignores you. As he stoops and picks up the pistol you fire again, shooting him in the head. As you do a third man steps from cover and fires a rifle at you. The bullet hits you in the chest making you double up. Forcing yourself upright you fire several shots back with both pistols, hitting him multiple times and killing him. + + +"Come on Dan," Bob yells grabbing you, firing more shots. Turning you find you are near the alley entrance, Bill Power and another man lie dead near the entrance while Grat has taken shelter behind an oil drum, his clothes stained red from several wounds. "Come on Dan," Bob yells again but the world is darkening and as Bob tries to help you he stumbles as he is shot. You reach the mouth of the alley before your strength gives way, collapsing to the ground you lie dead in the dust. Your brothers Bob and Grat die within feet of you from their injuries, the legendary Dalton Gang destroyed in this alley of death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and your brothers walk confidently into one of the town's banks to discover three cashiers sitting inside chatting and laughing. The laughter dies from their faces as you, Bob and Emmett draw your pistols and point them at the cashiers. "This is a hold up," you declare. "Keep silent and no one will be hurt." While Emmett guards the cashiers you and Bob swiftly empty the contents of the open vault into a sack. Everything is going according to plan. + + +Then you hear the gunshots. + + +The windows of the bank you are in crack as bullets pound into them. "You men in front of us," Bob barks, passing the sack of money to Emmett and grabbing a teller. "We're going out the front." Each of you hold a teller in front of you and move towards the front door but several bullets break the glass, driving you back. "Out the back," Bob yells. "Quickly!" Abandoning the tellers the three of you race out a back door and onto the street. The alleyway where you left the horses is some distance away. "Go quickly boys," Bob orders as gunshots continue to ring out all around. "I'll cover you." +> Make for the alleyway with Emmett +You and Emmett take off running, your brother still holding the sack of money, while Bob fires his pistols at your pursuers down the street. Approaching the alleyway you see Bill Power and another man lying dead near the entrance, Grat has taken cover behind an oil barrel near the entrance and is firing down the street while behind him Dick Broadwell is clambering onto his horse, both men have been shot several times. Dick begins to ride away as you reach the alleyway. "Keep going boys," Grat yells as you pass him. + + +You and Emmett make it to your horses, both miraculously without a scratch despite all the bullets whizzing around you. Glancing back you are startled to see Grat topple over dead. Bob is staggering towards the alleyway entrance clutching a wound in his side, behind him you can see three townsmen lying dead on the street. Just as he reaches the alley Bob falls to the ground. "Bob," Emmett shouts and abandoning you he hurries to his brother's side. +> Follow Emmett to your brother's aid +You and Emmett run towards Bob but before you can get there someone fires a shotgun blast into Emmett's chest, knocking him flying to the ground. As you stop and turn towards Emmett the gunman fires a second blast into you, sending you flying back a full six feet before crashing into the dust of the alley. After a few more gunshots the town goes silent. You and your three brothers are all lying motionless in this alley of death. + + +Somehow though you do not die. Though Emmett has suffered 23 separate injuries from the shotgun blast and you have even more wounds both of you somehow survive. Your brothers are not so lucky: both Bob and Grat die of their wounds moments after your injury, Bill Power and Dick Broadwell also do not survive the day. Four of the townsfolk lie dead. The sack of money lies between you and Emmett: it is picked up and carried back to the bank. + + +After treatment for your injuries both you and Emmett receive life sentences in prison for your parts in the Raid. During your lengthy incarceration your other brother Bill teams up with Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce to continue robbing banks and trains. First Bill and then Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce are killed by lawmen... finally chance leads to you all being reunited.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Emmett take off running, your brother still holding the sack of money, while Bob fires his pistols at your pursuers down the street. Approaching the alleyway you see Bill Power and another man lying dead near the entrance, Grat has taken cover behind an oil barrel near the entrance and is firing down the street while behind him Dick Broadwell is clambering onto his horse, both men have been shot several times. Dick begins to ride away as you reach the alleyway. "Keep going boys," Grat yells as you pass him. + + +You and Emmett make it to your horses, both miraculously without a scratch despite all the bullets whizzing around you. Glancing back you are startled to see Grat topple over dead. Bob is staggering towards the alleyway entrance clutching a wound in his side, behind him you can see three townsmen lying dead on the street. Just as he reaches the alley Bob falls to the ground. "Bob," Emmett shouts and abandoning you he hurries to his brother's side. +> Mount your horse and follow Dick out of town +Abandoning your brothers you throw yourself onto your horse and spur it into a gallop. As you ride down the alley you glance back just in time to see Emmett shot down with a shotgun blast near a motionless Bob and Grat, all three of your brothers look dead. Swearing, with tears in your eyes, you spur your horse out of town and after Dick Broadwell. He is still riding his horse but gets slower and slower as you get closer. Just before you reach him he topples off his horse and lies motionless on the ground. Sure enough when you check him he is dead. + + +The Dalton Gang has been destroyed in Coffeyville and you are the only survivor. + + +Over the next few weeks you go into hiding in the Indian Territory, trying to rejoin Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce. In newspapers you read how eight men died in the Coffeyville Raid including your brothers Bob and Grat. Emmett miraculously survives 23 bullet wounds to serve a life sentence imprisonment for bank robbery. Finally you manage to reconnect with Bill Doolin and arrange a meeting with him and the remaining members of the gang, as well as your brother Bill who has travelled over from California when he read the news of Coffeyville. You all reunite in the small town of Ingalls.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>On the chosen day, three months after the Pryor Creek Robbery, you and your five companions ride into the peaceful little town of Coffeyville. You already have a plan: to hitch your horses outside the town's two banks. While Bob and Emmett enter the first bank Grat, Bill and Dick are to enter the second bank and rob both, lock any staff and customers in the vaults, emerge at roughly the same time, mount up and ride out of town before the alarm is raised. + + +As you ride into town you are annoyed to see that the hitching posts outside the banks have been taken down for some street work, forcing you to leave your horses in an alleyway close to the banks. As you dismount and walk towards the bank your are uncomfortably aware that a lot of people seem to be glancing at you, heavily armed as you all are with rifles and you with your two pistols. "Ok boys, move smart and fast," Bob mutters. "Who you joining Dan?" +> Go with Grat, Bill and Dick into the second bank +You and Grat lead Bill and Dick into one of the town's banks to find three cashiers inside. "Throw up your hands and don't move," you bark. "We're robbing the bank." While Bill and Dick hold the tellers hostage you and Grat go over to the vault to discover the door is closed and locked. "Open it," Grat orders the tellers. "We can't," one of the men says nervously. "It's a time lock. You'll have to wait ten minutes." You and Grat glance at each other and sigh. + + +Suddenly gunshots explode through the bank's windows, one of them hitting Dick in the right arm. "I can't use my arm," Dick exclaims, holding his arm in his other hand. "It's no use, I can't shoot anymore." "Come on boys, we need to get out of here," Grat yells. "Not without the money," Bill declares and begins riffling the counter, throwing what notes he can find into a small sack. While he is rifling Grat and Dick start running out the bank's front door. +> Join Bill in grabbing the money +You and Bill grab handfuls of money off the counter and throw it into the back before following your companions out the front door. As you emerge from the bank several waiting townsfolk open fire on you. Bill is hit in the head and falls dead to the ground, a moment later you are shot through the heart and fall just in front of him. You and Bill are the first of eight men to die on this bloody day, moments later your brothers Bob and Grat are killed as well in this last battle of the Dalton Gang.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You and Grat lead Bill and Dick into one of the town's banks to find three cashiers inside. "Throw up your hands and don't move," you bark. "We're robbing the bank." While Bill and Dick hold the tellers hostage you and Grat go over to the vault to discover the door is closed and locked. "Open it," Grat orders the tellers. "We can't," one of the men says nervously. "It's a time lock. You'll have to wait ten minutes." You and Grat glance at each other and sigh. + + +Suddenly gunshots explode through the bank's windows, one of them hitting Dick in the right arm. "I can't use my arm," Dick exclaims, holding his arm in his other hand. "It's no use, I can't shoot anymore." "Come on boys, we need to get out of here," Grat yells. "Not without the money," Bill declares and begins riffling the counter, throwing what notes he can find into a small sack. While he is rifling Grat and Dick start running out the bank's front door. +> Follow Grat and Dick out the door +You run after Grat and Dick, both stumbling as they are shot repeatedly, blood and dust flying from their clothes. Somehow you are unhit and the three of you make it to an alleyway where Grat sinks down behind an oil drum and starts firing his pistol down the street while Dick runs on towards the horses. Glancing back you can see Bill Power lying dead in the street, a bullet in his brain, while Emmett is running towards the alleyway from the right followed by Bob who is walking backwards, firing his pistol as he does. "Go on Dan," Grat says hoarsely to you. "I'll cover them." +> Follow Dick to the horses +You follow Dick to the horses and both of you mount up, though your companion is bleeding heavily from his wounds. A glance back shows that Emmett has reached the alleyway and as you look Grat shoots down an approaching lawman of the town. As everything seems to be in order you spur your horse into life and gallop out of town with Dick. Unfortunately everything is not in order: Bob and Grat never make it out of the alleyway alive and Emmett is shot down too. + + +You cannot know this as you ride away as you are more concerned with Dick's condition: he reels alarmingly in the saddle and a short way from town he topples from his horse to the ground. Dismounting quickly you find he is dead of blood loss from his wounds. A quick glance up shows you that none of your brothers have made it out of town. Your heart sinking you mount up and ride on rapidly, the only one to escape this ill-fated raid. + + +Later, over the coming weeks spent in hiding in the Indian Territory, you read how eight men died in the gunfight in Coffeyville including your brothers Bob and Grat. Emmett survived 23 separate gunshot wounds only to be sentenced to life imprisonment for his part in the raid. After weeks of searching with vain you are able to reunite with Bill Doolin, Bitter Creek and Charley Pierce: they have already arranged a meeting with your brother Bill in the hideout town of Ingalls.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You run after Grat and Dick, both stumbling as they are shot repeatedly, blood and dust flying from their clothes. Somehow you are unhit and the three of you make it to an alleyway where Grat sinks down behind an oil drum and starts firing his pistol down the street while Dick runs on towards the horses. Glancing back you can see Bill Power lying dead in the street, a bullet in his brain, while Emmett is running towards the alleyway from the right followed by Bob who is walking backwards, firing his pistol as he does. "Go on Dan," Grat says hoarsely to you. "I'll cover them." +> Help Grat cover Bob and Emmett +You run back and join Grat in firing from cover down the street As three men approach the alley down the street you fire your pistols at them, hitting and killing a lawman leading the trio. The other two men fire back, one bullet hitting Grat and the other hitting you. Both of you fall to the ground as Emmett runs by and Bob staggers up, bleeding from his own wound he topples to the ground near you. A moment later you hear a shotgun blast and then Emmett is down as well. You and your brothers Bob and Grat die of your wounds in that alleyway of death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As the train stops you join Bill and Dick in climbing into the driver's compartment where you draw your pistols. The driver turns to complain but freezes when he sees your guns, you order him to put his hands up and leaving the other two to guard him you return to the doorway and watch what is happening on the platform. Two male passengers have got off the train while further down the platform seven armed guards have stepped off the train and are walking up and down smoking and stretching their legs. + + +Everything seems to be going like clockwork until the guards turn to get back on the train. A shot is fired, hitting one of them and then pandemonium erupts as gunfire explodes from the train, Both the passengers on the platform and a second guard are hit and fall down as the remaining guards run for cover. From the door of the driving compartment you fire your pistol at the fleeing guards, who take shelter and start to return fire. + + +When the guards start firing back you step back inside the driver's compartment and push the door shut. "Time to go I think," you tell your companions and opening the door on the other side you jump down off the train. Further up you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards. + + +The robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious. + + +"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?" he demands. "If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?" + + +It transpires that Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Apparently they were in the Passenger Carriage when they heard the gunfire and shot the first people they saw on the platform. Bob angrily attacks them while the three outlaws defend themselves equally furiously. + + +"I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now," Bob decides. "I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after." + + +"Well that's just fine Bob," Bill Doolin says cooly. "It sounds too risky anyway." + + +Frowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others. +> Hide out with Bill, Bitter Creek and Charley in Ingalls +You and your friends go to hide out in the little community of Ingalls and pass the next three months drinking and relaxing, using the money from the Pryor Creek robbery to pay your way. Much of the time you spend with a friend of Bitter Creek's called Ol Yantis, a softly spoken cotton farmer. The five of you spend your time relaxing and hiding out and for a time there are no worries on your horizons. + + +Then comes the news of Coffeyville. + + +You read in the newspapers how Bob, Grat and Emmett, together with Bill Power and Dick Broadwell, try to rob two banks at the same time in the city of Coffeyville. The alarm is raised and a massive gunfight breaks out that leaves eight men dead including Bob, Grat, Bill and Dick while Emmett survives despite 23 individual bullet wounds and is imprisoned for life. Your brothers Bob and Grat are dead, Emmett is imprisoned and for a time you are all absolutely stunned, completely unsure what to do. + + +The deaths of your brothers only commits you further to your life as an outlaw. After sending a telegram to your brother Bill to join you in the Territroy you remain brooding for days. It is finally Bill Doolin who breaks you out of it. "We'll show America we're not done yet," he tells you firmly. "We'll hit a bank in Carney, we'll make Bob proud. We'll keep on and make the Gang he built the best and most famous there ever was." Grimly you agree. + + +One week after your brothers were killed at Coffeyville you and your companions ride into the town of Carney. While Ol guards your horses outside the door the rest of you go inside; Bitter Creek and Charley guard the lone cashier while you and Bill empty the vault before locking the cashier inside and riding off. It is all too easy, a simple robbery that netted the gang $1,500, making your share $300. After receiving a telegram from your brother Bill you ride back to Ingalls to meet him.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>On the chosen day you all gather at the tiny train station at Pryor Creek to await the arrival of the train. You all have very specific jobs: Bill Power and Dick Broadwell are to board the driver's compartment immediately and stop him moving the train from the platform. Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce are to board the Passenger Carriage and keep everything under control there. Your brothers Bob, Grat and Emmett will board the Express Carriage and try to capture the armed guards before robbing the safe. You need to choose which group you will join. +> Join Bitter Creek, Bill and Charley in securing the Passenger Carriage +As the train stops you join Bitter Creek, Bill and Charley in climbing into the Passenger's Compartment, passing two men on the way who are stepping out onto the platform. As soon as you are in the Compartment you all draw your pistols and you tell everyone to keep calm and remain in their seats. Peering through the windows you can only see the two men on the platform who have halted just outside the train and seem to be talking. + + +Suddenly a gunshot rings out from further down the train and you all jump. Moments later a volley of gunshots rings out, raising their pistols Bitter Creek, Bill and Charley all start shooting out the train windows at the platform as well. The two men on the platform start running and someone yells for you to shoot them before they get to cover. +> Fire at the fleeing men +You fire your pistol rapidly at the two fleeing men, hitting them both in the back and knocking them both to the ground. More windows shatter as shots are fired back from somewhere on the platform, the bullets mostly hitting the roof or passing through the windows on the other side of the Compartment, though they are enough to make you all duck. "Let's go," Bill Doolin shouts and hurrying at a crouch you throw open the compartment door that doesn't face the platform and one by one you all jump down to the ground. Up and down the train you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards. + + +The robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious. + + +"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?" he demands. "If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?" + + +It transpires that you, Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Bob angrily attacks the four of you while you all defend yourselves equally furiously. + + +"Bill, Bitter Creek, Charley, I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now," Bob decides. "I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after." + + +"Well that's just fine Bob," Bill Doolin says cooly. "It sounds too risky anyway." + + +Frowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As the train stops you join Bitter Creek, Bill and Charley in climbing into the Passenger's Compartment, passing two men on the way who are stepping out onto the platform. As soon as you are in the Compartment you all draw your pistols and you tell everyone to keep calm and remain in their seats. Peering through the windows you can only see the two men on the platform who have halted just outside the train and seem to be talking. + + +Suddenly a gunshot rings out from further down the train and you all jump. Moments later a volley of gunshots rings out, raising their pistols Bitter Creek, Bill and Charley all start shooting out the train windows at the platform as well. The two men on the platform start running and someone yells for you to shoot them before they get to cover. +> Hold your fire +You hold your fire while your companions fire their pistols through the windows, hitting both men who fall face-first onto the platform. More windows shatter as shots are fired back from somewhere on the platform, the bullets mostly hitting the roof or passing through the windows on the other side of the Compartment, though they are enough to make you all duck. "Let's go," Bill Doolin shouts and hurrying at a crouch you throw open the compartment door that doesn't face the platform and one by one you all jump down to the ground. Up and down the train you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards. + + +The robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious. + + +"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?" he demands. "If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?" + + +It transpires that you, Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Bob angrily attacks the four of you while you all defend yourselves equally furiously. + + +"Bill, Bitter Creek, Charley, I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now," Bob decides. "I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after." + + +"Well that's just fine Bob," Bill Doolin says cooly. "It sounds too risky anyway." + + +Frowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>On the chosen day you all gather at the tiny train station at Pryor Creek to await the arrival of the train. You all have very specific jobs: Bill Power and Dick Broadwell are to board the driver's compartment immediately and stop him moving the train from the platform. Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce are to board the Passenger Carriage and keep everything under control there. Your brothers Bob, Grat and Emmett will board the Express Carriage and try to capture the armed guards before robbing the safe. You need to choose which group you will join. +> Join Bob, Grat and Emmett in securing the Express Carriage +As the trains stops you join Bob, Grat and Emmett in walking towards the Express Carriage. As you approach several armed guards step off of the train, chatting, smoking and laughing. You and your brothers instinctively tense but the guards pay no attention to you at all and instead walk about on the platform stretching their legs. Stepping into the Express Carriage you and your brothers find just one guard left inside, leaning back on a chair reading a book. He looks up to find your pistol pointing directly at his face. + + +"Don't move friend," you tell the guard quietly and he freezes. Disarming him you leave Emmett to guard him while you and Grat open the unlocked safe door and begin grabbing out handfuls of money and throwing them into a sack. Meanwhile Bob is standing by the open door looking out onto the platform when he suddenly swears and jumps back. "They're coming back," he hisses. Drawing his pistol he takes a deep breath and then steps forward to the door, gun blazing. "Give me a hand brothers," he shouts out. +> Join Bob in shooting at the guards on the platform +You join Bob in the doorway and empty your pistol at the fleeing guards, hitting two of them who fall down onto the platform and lie still. The rest of them reach shelter at various points of the platform and begin firing back, prompting you and Bob to move away from the open door of the Express Carriage: bullets traveling through it hit the wall on the far side of the Carriage. Further down the train you can hear more gunfire as the rest of the Gang fire at the Guards. "I've got the money, let's go," Grat shouts. Throwing open the compartment door that doesn't face the platform and one by one you all jump down to the ground. Further up the train you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards. + + +The robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious. + + +"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?" he demands. "If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?" + + +It transpires that Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Bob angrily attacks thethree of them, who defend themselves equally furiously. + + +"Bill, Bitter Creek, Charley, I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now," Bob decides. "I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after." + + +"Well that's just fine Bob," Bill Doolin says cooly. "It sounds too risky anyway." + + +Frowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As the trains stops you join Bob, Grat and Emmett in walking towards the Express Carriage. As you approach several armed guards step off of the train, chatting, smoking and laughing. You and your brothers instinctively tense but the guards pay no attention to you at all and instead walk about on the platform stretching their legs. Stepping into the Express Carriage you and your brothers find just one guard left inside, leaning back on a chair reading a book. He looks up to find your pistol pointing directly at his face. + + +"Don't move friend," you tell the guard quietly and he freezes. Disarming him you leave Emmett to guard him while you and Grat open the unlocked safe door and begin grabbing out handfuls of money and throwing them into a sack. Meanwhile Bob is standing by the open door looking out onto the platform when he suddenly swears and jumps back. "They're coming back," he hisses. Drawing his pistol he takes a deep breath and then steps forward to the door, gun blazing. "Give me a hand brothers," he shouts out. +> Concentrate on helping Grat get all the money +You and Grat continue grabbing handfuls of money while Bob empties his pistol at the guards before jumping back as the guards begin firing through the open door,bullets hitting the wall on the far side of the Carriage. Further down the train you can hear more gunfire as the rest of the Gang fire at the Guards. "I've got the money, let's go," Grat shouts. Throwing open the compartment door that doesn't face the platform and one by one you all jump down to the ground. Further up the train you can see your fellow gang members doing likewise and together you race across the tracks, scramble up onto the platform on the other side and flee the station to where you have left your waiting horses, all the while keeping the train safely between you and the armed guards. + + +The robbery has been a complete success and you have all escaped with $17,000, a great amount which makes your share $2,000. You are all elated until the next day when you read news of the robbery in the papers. Apparently four people were shot during the brief gunfight: two guards and the two male passengers who are both doctors, one of which has died from his wounds. The papers name you and your brothers as the killers and have posted Bounties of $5,000 on each of your heads. Bob is furious. + + +"What absolute imbeciles shot these two doctors?" he demands. "If there is one thing that will make the law come after us now it is this! Who can't tell the difference between armed guards and a couple of civilians?" + + +It transpires that Bitter Creek, Bill Doolin and Charley Pierce were the ones who shot the doctors. Bob angrily attacks thethree of them, who defend themselves equally furiously. + + +"Bill, Bitter Creek, Charley, I think it's better we don't see much of each other for now," Bob decides. "I don't want you boys in on my next job, go and hide out at Ingalls and I'll tell you when I want you. Go on, go. I have plans to beat anything Jesse James ever did: we're going to rob two banks at once in broad daylight in the town of Coffeyville, Kansas. I don't want you boys to have anything to do with the money we get from this thing, we'll join you after." + + +"Well that's just fine Bob," Bill Doolin says cooly. "It sounds too risky anyway." + + +Frowning you consider whether to join your brothers in the Coffeyville Raid or lie low with Doolin and the others.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You, Bob and Emmett bid farewell to your other brothers and set off by train across Nevada, Utah and Colorado back to the Indian Territory. You are just in time: days later you read in the papers that Bill and Grat have both been arrested back in California and charged with train robbery. You are all concerned by the news but Bob points out there is nothing you can do about it until you have some money so he arranges a meeting with two of his old friends in the Indian Territory. + + +At the little community of Wharton you find two men waiting at the train station for you. The first is a middle-aged man with a distinctive black gunpowder burn on his left cheek while his companion is shorter, handsome man with an impressive moustache. "Boys, let me introduce you to Black Face Charley Bryant and Bitter Creek George Newcomb," Bob declares. Greetings are exchanged all round as you leave the station. + + +"Black Face and Bitter Creek were with me and Emmett in that little caper down in New Mexico that got us all written up as Outlaws," Bob explains to you. "I've been thinking boys that it was time to show this country what real outlaws are like. We've already held up one train in California and I plan to hit more here in the Territory where they haven't got any real law; just miles and miles of wilderness to hide in and train lines running through it like arteries for us to cut. What do you boys reckon?" + + +"After we read in the papers you boys were behind that hold up in California we were kind of hoping you would turn up with that exact offer," Bitter Creek declares with a grin. Black Face just grunts. + + +On the first day of May the five of you board a train at Wharton. While Black Face and Bitter Creek go to capture the driver and stop the train you, Bob and Emmett head straight to the Express Carriage. Catching the Guard by surprise you disarm him at gunpoint and empty the safe. As the train slows to a halt you jump off and race to a nearby copse of trees where you have left horses waiting, joined by your companions. Once you have ridden a safe distance you count the money and find you have stolen some $1700, making your share $300. It's not much but it's a start. + + +"Well boys it's not millions but the Territory isn't a wealthy place," Bob says thoughtfully. "I reckon it's best if we split up. Bitter Creek, did you say you had some friends over in Hutchinson, Kansas? I reckon that sounds like a safe spot for us." Black Face coughs. "I reckon I'm sick boys," he tells the rest of you. "Got this damn cough that won't go away so I reckon I'd best get into Hutchinson here in the Territory and see a doctor I trust. Drop me a line when you want me and I'll join you boys again." Bob nods and you ponder who to join. +> Stay in the Indian Territory with Black Face +You go with Black Face to the small community of Hennessey so Black Face can see a doctor. You both book into the town's small hotel but you have the misfortune of being seen in the street by someone who was on the Wharton train and recognizes you both as the robbers. They tell a lawman and a Deputy with a pistol in each hand is waiting for you when you both emerge from the doctor's surgery backed by an armed posse of a dozen men.You are both disarmed and immediately taken into custody. + + +As Hennessey doesn't have a jail the lawman puts you both on a train for Wichita, Kansas. When the train stops at the station the lawman gets off to make sure it is safe, giving a pistol to a second man to guard you. This man is one of the train staff and he puts the pistol on a table while he does some paperwork. Moving like lightning you spring to your feet, cross the room in great bounds and snatch the loaded weapon out of the man's grasp. + + +You and Black Face now have a gun but you haven't escaped yet: the only way out of the Baggage Car where you are being held prisoner is through the door that leads to the platform. A quick glance through the door shows you that the Lawman who captured you is standing alert on the platform keeping guard, a rifle in his hands. You quickly tell Black Face about the situation and Black Face thinks for a moment. + + +"One of us will have to jump out onto the platform and shoot that lawman dead," he says seriously. "Who do you think is the better shot, you or me?" +> Give the pistol to Black Face to kill the lawman +Black Face takes the pistol, takes a deep breath and then springs out of the carriage, gun firing. Moments later he is hit, you see him jerk as a bullet hits his chest but he keeps firing as he is hit twice more, the last shot knocking him onto his back. You peer cautiously out of the carriage but the lawman is down too, lying face down on the platform in a spreading pool of blood, his rifle lying at his side. Without hesitation you jump out onto the platform, scoop up Black Face's pistol and start running. + + +Everyone gets out of your way as you race across the platform and through the train station, hiding your gun as you do so. Outside you quickly mount a horse tied in an alleyway and gallop out of town. Riding hard you escape back to the Territory, eluding any possible pursuit. You make for Hutchinson but by the time you get there Bob, Emmett and Bitter Creek are gone already. You hide out at the empty house and risk a visit into town to read the papers. + + +As you suspected both Black Face and the Lawman Ed Short die of their wounds. Your fellow gang members resurface when they and four new recruit rob a train in the Indian Territory. You reunite with them when they return to Hutchinson, flush with success from the robbery and pleased you escaped Wichita, even if Black Face did not. More good news is on the way: in California your brother Bill has been acquitted at his trial and Grat, who was found guilty, has escaped custody. Together with the four new gang members you all arrange a winter reunion in the Indian Territory.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You go with Black Face to the small community of Hennessey so Black Face can see a doctor. You both book into the town's small hotel but you have the misfortune of being seen in the street by someone who was on the Wharton train and recognizes you both as the robbers. They tell a lawman and a Deputy with a pistol in each hand is waiting for you when you both emerge from the doctor's surgery backed by an armed posse of a dozen men.You are both disarmed and immediately taken into custody. + + +As Hennessey doesn't have a jail the lawman puts you both on a train for Wichita, Kansas. When the train stops at the station the lawman gets off to make sure it is safe, giving a pistol to a second man to guard you. This man is one of the train staff and he puts the pistol on a table while he does some paperwork. Moving like lightning you spring to your feet, cross the room in great bounds and snatch the loaded weapon out of the man's grasp. + + +You and Black Face now have a gun but you haven't escaped yet: the only way out of the Baggage Car where you are being held prisoner is through the door that leads to the platform. A quick glance through the door shows you that the Lawman who captured you is standing alert on the platform keeping guard, a rifle in his hands. You quickly tell Black Face about the situation and Black Face thinks for a moment. + + +"One of us will have to jump out onto the platform and shoot that lawman dead," he says seriously. "Who do you think is the better shot, you or me?" +> Jump off the train and fire at the lawman yourself +You take a deep breath and jump from the carriage, your pistol firing. You hit the startled lawman in the stomach with your first shot but he recovers quickly and shoots you through the chest. The force of the bullet is like a punch and knocks you a step backwards but you quickly recover and fire three more times, hitting the lawman again. He shoots you again through the chest and you fall onto your back on the hard wooden train platform. Black Face springs out to help you but the lawman shoots him too, hitting him in the head and Black Face falls across your legs, killed instantly. + + +You drop the warm pistol from your hand and raise your head slightly. The lawman is sinking to the ground and suddenly falls forward on his face. There, on that little wooden platform beneath the summer sun the three of you die: your enemy, your friend and you. Your attempt to escape custody has failed and you go the way of so many outlaws: cut down in your last gunfight. You are only the first of the Wild Bunch to fall: within years almost all of your companions will join you in death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is a full moon tonight and the silver light grants you a clear view of the old man stumbling for his life across the sloping grass of the railway embankment. Raising your pistol you take careful aim and squeeze the trigger. A spray of red explodes from the man's head and he topples to the ground. He lies there motionless as the train continues a short way before finally gliding to a halt. You return to your stunned brothers inside the compartment. + + +Bob is the first to recover, mutters "come on" and leads you all down the train. Hiding your guns in your pockets you pass through the passenger cars, people looking at you curiously but perhaps sensing who you are no one interferes with you until you come to the corridor that leads to the express carriage. Bob has just started to open the door when a shot is fired, the bullet striking the thick wooden door. You all jump back immediately and Bob pulls the door shut again. There is a moment's silence then more shots are fired, the bullets striking the door in front of you. + + +"We'd better clear out of here," Bill mutters to the rest of you. "That express guard is armed." Bob thinks for a moment and swears. "We should have brought some dynamite," he mutters. "It doesn't matter," Grat says quickly. "The alarm is raised now boys, let's clear out." + + +You open a door and one by one you all jump off the train and run down the embankment. You have left five horses tethered in a copse of trees nearby and reach them after a swift five minutes run. Mounting up you ride off south. The robbery has been a complete failure: an engineer has been killed and you have been forced to flee without a single dollar. It is not an impressive debut. + + +News travels fast and by the time you make it back to San Francisco where Bill lives the news is in all the morning newspapers that an engineer was murdered on a South Pacific Train last night by a desperate gang of train robbers. You keep to Bill's house all day, each of you lost in your own thoughts about what to do now. The tension drags on until evening when after dinner Bob finally addresses the problem. + + +"I've been thinking and I reckon it'd be a lot safer if we all headed back to the Indian Territory," he says. "We know it well and I don't reckon the law will find us there." + + +"I've got a law career here in California Bob," Bill says angrily. "You forget, only you and Emmett are currently wanted for anything: Grat, Daniel and I aren't known to the law yet." + + +"How long do you think that will last with posses tracking us for the Alila Robbery?" Bob demands. + + +An argument rages for the next few hours until it ends with Grat siding with Bill and both choosing to lie low in California while Bob and Emmett head back to the Indian Territory to hide out there until the heat dies down. What you'll do after a few months isn't discussed and you need to choose which pair of brothers to join. +> Stay in California with Bill and Grat +The next morning Bob and Emmett say their farewells and set off by train for the Indian Territory. You, Grat and Bill settle down and mostly stay in the house, only Bill leaves to see to his law work. One night you are all talking in the kitchen when there is a knock on the front door. Bill goes to answer it and suddenly you hear yells and the sound of a scuffle. You and Grat spring to your feet as several armed policemen burst into the kitchen. + + +You have two choices. There is an open window in the kitchen overlooking an alleyway which you could run to and jump through, though it is perilously narrow or there is a second open door behind you that leads through to the dining room through which a back door leads into a yard that opens out onto a street, though it may be guarded. Grat, who is closer to the policemen, is already grappling with two of them, affording you a possible opportunity to escape. +> Jump out of the kitchen window +Racing to the window you spring up onto the kitchen counter, kick out the window and hurl yourself through it. You hit the ground beneath the window amidst a rain of broken glass but are on your feet in an instant, tearing down the alleyway and across a street. Running on foot you manage to reach the city's train station ten minutes later and catch the first train heading out of town. Sending off telegrams ahead you arrange to meet Bob and Emmett on the way. + + +Days later, after taking trains across Nevada, Utah and Colorado you rejoin Bob and Emmett. By this time you have read in the papers that Bill and Grat have both been arrested back in California and charged with train robbery. You are all concerned by the news but Bob points out there is nothing you can do about it until you have some money so he arranges a meeting with two of his old friends in the Indian Territory. + + +At the little community of Wharton you find two men waiting at the train station for you. The first is a middle-aged man with a distinctive black gunpowder burn on his left cheek while his companion is shorter, handsome man with an impressive moustache. "Boys, let me introduce you to Black Face Charley Bryant and Bitter Creek George Newcomb," Bob declares. Greetings are exchanged all round as you leave the station. + + +"Black Face and Bitter Creek were with me and Emmett in that little caper down in New Mexico that got us all written up as Outlaws," Bob explains to you. "I've been thinking boys that it was time to show this country what real outlaws are like. We've already held up one train in California and I plan to hit more here in the Territory where they haven't got any real law; just miles and miles of wilderness to hide in and train lines running through it like arteries for us to cut. What do you boys reckon?" + + +"After we read in the papers you boys were behind that hold up in California we were kind of hoping you would turn up with that exact offer," Bitter Creek declares with a grin. Black Face just grunts. + + +On the first day of May the five of you board a train at Wharton. While Black Face and Bitter Creek go to capture the driver and stop the train you, Bob and Emmett head straight to the Express Carriage. Catching the Guard by surprise you disarm him at gunpoint and empty the safe. As the train slows to a halt you jump off and race to a nearby copse of trees where you have left horses waiting, joined by your companions. Once you have ridden a safe distance you count the money and find you have stolen some $1700, making your share $300. It's not much but it's a start. + + +"Well boys it's not millions but the Territory isn't a wealthy place," Bob says thoughtfully. "I reckon it's best if we split up. Bitter Creek, did you say you had some friends over in Hutchinson, Kansas? I reckon that sounds like a safe spot for us." Black Face coughs. "I reckon I'm sick boys," he tells the rest of you. "Got this damn cough that won't go away so I reckon I'd best get into Hutchinson here in the Territory and see a doctor I trust. Drop me a line when you want me and I'll join you boys again." Bob nods and you ponder who to join.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The next morning Bob and Emmett say their farewells and set off by train for the Indian Territory. You, Grat and Bill settle down and mostly stay in the house, only Bill leaves to see to his law work. One night you are all talking in the kitchen when there is a knock on the front door. Bill goes to answer it and suddenly you hear yells and the sound of a scuffle. You and Grat spring to your feet as several armed policemen burst into the kitchen. + + +You have two choices. There is an open window in the kitchen overlooking an alleyway which you could run to and jump through, though it is perilously narrow or there is a second open door behind you that leads through to the dining room through which a back door leads into a yard that opens out onto a street, though it may be guarded. Grat, who is closer to the policemen, is already grappling with two of them, affording you a possible opportunity to escape. +> Run through the dining room and out the back door +Racing through the dining room you reach the back door, throw it open and dash out... straight into the arms of three waiting policemen. After a brief struggle you are taken into custody and together with your brothers you are escorted off to the city's jail. It seems that posses used bloodhounds to track you to Bill's house and witnesses from the train soon identify you, Bill and Grat as three of the men who robbed the Alila Train. You are swiftly charged with armed robbery and murder. Bob and Emmett are soon identified as the other participants in the train robbery and don't help your case by putting a gang of outlaws together and robbing trains in the Indian Territory. + + +Things are looking grim as six months pass and the date of your trial approaches. Bill remains optimistic, confident that his own skills as a lawyer, contradictions in the testimony of witnesses on the train and your own previous good reputations will exonerate you. Grat is less sanguine and urges that you join him in trying to escape from prison and heading out across America to go and join Bob, Emmett and their gang in the Indian Territory. You need to choose which course to follow. +> Join Grat in planning an escape attempt +You and Grat plan your escape attempts and make no effort to defend yourselves at trial, which results in you both being found guilty of train robbery and being sentenced to twenty years imprisonment. Put on a train bound for San Quentin and guarded by two armed deputies you see your chance to escape when one of your guards falls asleep and the other becomes engrossed in a conversation with a pretty lady sitting next to him. + + +Moving with infinite care you lean forward, deftly remove the handcuff key from the sleeping guard's trouser pocket, undo your handcuffs and pass it to Grat to free himself. As the train passes over a bridge you both suddenly spring up, punch out the train window next to you and first you, then Grat throw yourselves through it to the astonishment of your guards. Falling through the air you both hit the water as the train rushes by above you. + + +Swimming quickly to the shore, elated at your daring escape you set off cross-country. Stealing horses and robbing country folk along the way you manage to make it to the Indian Territory after a month long series of adventures. On the way you learn that Bill has been acquitted of all the charges against him thanks to his fantastic skills as a lawyer. As the year 1891 you, your brothers and Bob and Emmett's gang gather for a meeting in the Indian Territory.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Racing through the dining room you reach the back door, throw it open and dash out... straight into the arms of three waiting policemen. After a brief struggle you are taken into custody and together with your brothers you are escorted off to the city's jail. It seems that posses used bloodhounds to track you to Bill's house and witnesses from the train soon identify you, Bill and Grat as three of the men who robbed the Alila Train. You are swiftly charged with armed robbery and murder. Bob and Emmett are soon identified as the other participants in the train robbery and don't help your case by putting a gang of outlaws together and robbing trains in the Indian Territory. + + +Things are looking grim as six months pass and the date of your trial approaches. Bill remains optimistic, confident that his own skills as a lawyer, contradictions in the testimony of witnesses on the train and your own previous good reputations will exonerate you. Grat is less sanguine and urges that you join him in trying to escape from prison and heading out across America to go and join Bob, Emmett and their gang in the Indian Territory. You need to choose which course to follow. +> Join Bill in planning for your courtroom defence +You and Bill spend your time researching court cases and preparing for your trial, not helped by the fact that Grat makes a spectacular escape from custody by jumping through the window of a moving train and Bob and Emmett's gang in the Indian Territory rob another train. Notwithstanding these facts at the trial you and Bill absolutely shine, casting doubt on every single witness testimony from the train and illustrating countless cases when bloodhound tracking proved unreliable and misleading. It surprises no one when both of you are acquitted by the Jury after a short deliberation. + + +You and Bill celebrate in San Francisco and Bill makes plans to rebuild his shattered career as a lawyer when a telegram arrives from Bob congratulating you both on your good luck and telling you that Grat has succeeded in joining him and Emmett in the Indian Territory. He invites you and Bill to join him and his gang to for Christmas and New Year and with much reluctance you both make your way out to Indian Territory to meet your outlaw brothers.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>On a cold winter's night you and your brothers ride out to the small community of Alila. + + +It is a cold winter in night in the Californian hills and you are all wearing dusters, long grey coats that go down to the ankles. Your loaded pistols hang at your belt. At the train station in Alila you sit on the platform in nervous silence, the only light being an orange glow from Bill's cigar. Finally in the distance a second light appears: a single beam of yellow light. Finally with a roar of steam the night train pulls up alongside you all. + + +"Good luck boys," Bob mutters as you all climb aboard. + + +Climbing onto the train you wait until it begins to move then all of you make your way to the driver's compartment at the front of the train. Inside is a little grey-haired man in a blue engineers uniform who looks round in surprise as you enter the locomotive. + + +"I'm sorry gentlemen, you are not supposed to be up here," he says cordially. + + +"Well tonight we're breaking all the rules," Bob replies coldly and draws his pistol. "Stop the train." + + +The engineer obediently pulls the lever to stop the train and just moments after leaving Alila the train is gliding to a halt. As the train slows the engineer suddenly throws open the door of the compartment and jumps off the train. "Kill him," Bob barks. "He'll raise the alarm!" He immediately rushes towards the open door. +> Stay where you are +Bob crosses to the open train door, raises his pistol, holds his breath while he takes careful aim and squeezes off a single shot. As the gun smoke rises he leans forward, peers into the darkness and draws back into the carriage. "I've killed him," he says to the rest of you who stand there in stunned silence. After a few seconds Bob mutters "come on" and leads you all down the train. + + +Hiding your guns in your pockets you pass through the passenger cars, people looking at you curiously but perhaps sensing who you are no one interferes with you until you come to the corridor that leads to the express carriage. Bob has just started to open the door when a shot is fired, the bullet striking the thick wooden door. You all jump back immediately and Bob pulls the door shut again. There is a moment's silence then more shots are fired, the bullets striking the door in front of you. + + +"We'd better clear out of here," Bill mutters to the rest of you. "That express guard is armed." Bob thinks for a moment and swears. "We should have brought some dynamite," he mutters. "It doesn't matter," Grat says quickly. "The alarm is raised now boys, let's clear out." + + +You open a door and one by one you all jump off the train and run down the embankment. You have left five horses tethered in a copse of trees nearby and reach them after a swift five minutes run. Mounting up you ride off south. The robbery has been a complete failure: an engineer has been killed and you have been forced to flee without a single dollar. It is not an impressive debut. + + +News travels fast and by the time you make it back to San Francisco where Bill lives the news is in all the morning newspapers that an engineer was murdered on a South Pacific Train last night by a desperate gang of train robbers. You keep to Bill's house all day, each of you lost in your own thoughts about what to do now. The tension drags on until evening when after dinner Bob finally addresses the problem. + + +"I've been thinking and I reckon it'd be a lot safer if we all headed back to the Indian Territory," he says. "We know it well and I don't reckon the law will find us there." + + +"I've got a law career here in California Bob," Bill says angrily. "You forget, only you and Emmett are currently wanted for anything: Grat, Daniel and I aren't known to the law yet." + + +"How long do you think that will last with posses tracking us for the Alila Robbery?" Bob demands. + + +An argument rages for the next few hours until it ends with Grat siding with Bill and both choosing to lie low in California while Bob and Emmett head back to the Indian Territory to hide out there until the heat dies down. What you'll do after a few months isn't discussed and you need to choose which pair of brothers to join.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your name is Leo Trapa (which you have had legally changed from Cleo Trapa to sound more manly) and you have recently gained great fame after sailing your ship Adventurer completely around your world of Magellan from north to south. The Adventurer is a tough little ship, large enough for a Crew of 30 and with enough space to hold 30 days worth of supplies. Though you are only twenty years old you have already received the rank of Commander in recognition of your superb ability and are widely respected as one of the greatest sailors of your homeland, The Kingdom of the Three Islands. + + +The World of Magellan on which you live is mostly water and for this reason the people of The Three Islands have a rich naval tradition. Gunpowder is a recent invention and though your ship is armed with four cannons and all of your crew carry muskets these are slow to load and highly inaccurate when fired making the sword your crew's primary weapon. A dozen Colonies have been established on Islands beyond your people's borders but these vary from well-organized and thriving settlements to frequently-massacred outposts of civilization. + + +Your ship can only carry a maximum amount of Food for 30 days, which will make finding and obtaining sources of Food your top priority. If you ever run out of Food (your Food number reaches 0) then you and all your Crew will starve to death and die. You will almost certainly lose Crew members on this military expedition and you must take care that your Crew number never falls to 0: that will mean that you and all your Crew are dead. + + +Though not as important as during your previous voyage you will still want to make your journeys in the shortest number of Days possible. Queen Anne-Marie is keen to encourage efficiency and rewards those Captains who complete their voyages swiftly with additional Crew and Food. You are sailing as one of the ten Ships in the War Fleet, commanded by Queen Anne-Marie, and you will find details of your fellow Captains and Commanders in the List of War Fleet Officers provided below. + + +Surviving this voyage will not be as easy as it may appear... those who do will receive 1 Score Point while those who run out of Crew or Food during their voyage and die win no Score Points. Your Score will be shown if you leave a comment when you have finished this story. As in previous adventures you might find it useful to make a map as you sail as the information might be useful for future voyages and adventures in these waters... + + +So good luck reader, make wise and strategically sound choices and with a little luck, a good course and a fair wind you might live to see your homeland again! +> Click here to begin your adventure (pick up the List of War Fleet Officers first!) +Queen Anne-Marie looks round at you and her other assembled Officers with a steely gaze, as if measuring each officer's worth. + + +"Your voyages so far have accomplished great things", she announces. "Many Islands have been colonized, many more islands discovered and I am confident that with sailors such as you under my command many more will be found. We do however have a problem: the Lapau as they call themselves. A vast confederation of allied tribes by force or reason we must come to a favorable treaty with them and establish where the border between their lands and ours lies. To do this we must explore their islands, see where they are, how strong they are and how wealthy they may be." + + +You glance round at the other officers, both those you know and those you don't. Grey-bearded and softly-spoken Commander Cuthrew is gazing intently at Queen Anne-Marie as she speaks, nearby Donald Trevers is cleaning his spectacles nervously. Your friend Esme Hale, the attractive fire-haired maiden of the sea, catches your eye and winks at you. You smile back but quickly pay attention as Queen Anne-Marie gives you a disapproving glance. + + +"During The Great Race and The Second Race most of our problems were caused by lack of Food," she declares. "I have had those of our Colonies which lie in our path well-stocked with food and my vessel, the Monarch of the Sea, has been specially constructed to carry vast amounts of Food which I will allocate among you all based on your performance and speed during this voyage. We must try to learn from our past experiences." + + +Anne-Marie pauses again and you quickly glance round at those Officers you are not personally familiar with. Thomas Finch and Richard Quarrel stand behind the Queen, Finch is straight-backed and hard-looking while Quarrel has the face and manner of a pickpocket. More impressive are the cousins Swift and Mason, both fair-haired and smart-looking young ladies. Standing aloof to one side and scowling at something is the tomboyish Eva Freer. With her short purple hair and wiry, slender figure she's quite good looking you think... + + +"The first leg of our voyage will be south through the Southern Passage, past Trever's Island and we will rendezvous on Burnt Island," Queen Anne-Marie declares. "We will sail at dawn tomorrow morning and woe betide you if ten Days from now we are not all anchored off Burnt Island. I know you are all good Sailors and if you serve me well then together we can make this world ours... very well. See to your ships Commanders and we will sail on the dawn tide." + + +The next day the early morning fog is just clearing as you order the anchor raised aboard the Adventurer in readiness to sail out of Golden Sands. The packed crowds on the quay remind you of when you set sail on The Great Race around the world but then the crowds were cheering while today they are oddly subdued and silent... you sense that deep down everyone knows the War Fleet has not been assembled for diplomatic reasons and there are many husbands and fathers aboard it's ships that will not come home again. + + +Some individual ships are still capable of raising a cheer, your Adventurer is one and when Hale's Merry Company sets sail the cheers and shouts are deafening. The Sea Ghost rapidly pulls away from the harbor, vanishing to the south, followed in a group by The Royal Escort, Indefatigable and The Monarch of the Seas. The cousins Swift and Mason are sailing together and you watch with a smile as Trever's Lucky nearly collides with Freer's Gambler prompting a string of imaginative and and biologically detailed insults from that colorful Commander. With a sigh you watch your homeland vanish from sight as you sail the Adventurer once more into the unknown. +> Sailing South +Sailing South for three days you soon come to the Southern Passage, a channel mined and blasted through The Great Reef which surrounds The Three Islands, which together with the Northern Passage and the newer Eastern and Western Passages allow access to the outside world. As you approach the Passage you see the Explorer and Maverick sailing through, not being personally familiar with either Commander Swift or Mason you hang back until they are clear before guiding the Adventurer through. On a relatively flat corral shelf a wooden watchtower and cabin has been built, above the tower flies the royal emblem of Queen Anne-Marie. A soldier in the tower waves cheerfully at you and you remember Anne-Marie's claim she'd had the colonies and outposts along the War Fleet's route supplied with large caches of food. You could drop anchor and try to beg for food but it would cost you 1 Day. +> Drop anchor and try to claim fresh Supplies +Anchoring in the Passage you lead a party of sailors ashore to meet the two friendly soldiers who garrison the watchtower, each working 12 hour shifts. + + +"Expedition is underway then?" one asks you cheerfully. "I have to say Commander Trapa I don't envy you. I served in the Colony on Burnt Island I've seen those Lapaw come out in those little canoes to inspect us. They look a tough bunch, even with ten ships and three hundred men behind me I wouldn't like to go against them." + + +"Have you any food to spare?" you ask politely. + + +The guards cheerfully supply you with a barrel of salted pork which you take back to your ship and thaking them you sail on. +> South to Trevers Island +Leaving The Southern Passage behind you continue on your course, occasionally sighting the sails of your fellow officers on the horizon. At one point you overtake Donald Trever's Lucky, which is zig-zagging erratically. "Rudder broke off on some corral" Trevers shouts across to you when you sail closer but waves you off when you ask if he needs some help. He is still in sight when you reach the island that was named after him after he spent some time marooned there after one of his previous ship's caught fire and sank. The pleasant tropical island is now inhabited by a small village of colonists who grow crops and fish. You are pleased to see Esme Hale's Merry Company is already anchored there, her crew loading barrels of fish aboard her ship. + + +"Esme, you will never reach Burnt Island if you stop for food every time you are hungry," you shout to her when the Adventurer pulls alongside. Hale laughs. + + +"What's the point of rushing?" she asks. "I'd rather get there in good shape than rush and miss out on all this nice fresh fish. Why don't you come ashore, we're having a goat hunt tomorrow!" + + +As you consider your answer you catch your crew looking at you with hopeful eyes, clearly keen to spend a day larking about with Hale's sailors. +> Drop anchor off Trever's Island +Dropping anchor you and your Crew go ashore the next morning and join Hale's hunt. Esme is a fine shot and goat after goat falls to her deadly musket balls. The local Colonists don't get too many visitors and are glad to make you welcome though while resting at their village at lunch time you notice work is underway to build a small wooden fort nearby. + + +"A dozen of them came in canoes one night and killed one of our fishermen," one of the colonists explains nervously. "We had to pluck seventeen arrows out of him." + + +You and Esme exchange frowns and decide it is time to get moving. Loading your fresh goat carcasses on board you both sail on South to the rendezvous at Burnt Island. +> Burnt Island +Your short voyage comes to an end when you drop anchor off the island Donald Trevers managed to so thoroughly destroy with fire during his last voyage here. You arrive at almost exactly the same time as Esme Hales's Merry Company and drop anchor near where the wreck of Trevers's previous ship Lady Fortune is still visible beneath the waves. The Sea Ghost is already there and over the next few hours most of the other ships arrive until finally the last one arrives after dark: Trevers's Lucky, still zig-zagging wildly thanks to it's broken rudder. There is a small colony on the island and Queen Anne-Marie arranges for the colonists to supply all of the ships of the War Fleet with a few supplies while her Officers attend a Council aboard her ship the next morning. +> Burnt Island +One by one the Commanders of the War Fleet row up to the towering sides of the Monarch of the Sea and ascend rickety ladders up to it's deck. Arriving on deck you find Cuthrew already there, looking more elderly and pale than you remember. Brisk and business-like Finch leads you down to Queen Anne-Marie's cabin where Quarrel, an unpleasant-looking man with a mocking smile is already waiting. You are soon joined by the cousins Mason and Swift and up close you can tell they are related as both have fair hair and pale complexions. Hale, Trevers and finally Freer arrive, up close she is even more attractive than she was in Golden Sands. When you are all assembled Queen Anne-Marie enters and the Council begins. + + +"The closest Lapau-inhabited island that we know of lies directly Southeast of here," she declares. "The first thing we need to do is sail there and see if the Natives are willing and able to discuss the relations between our two Nations in a meaningful way. When we anchor offshore I will go ashore with one hundred men and humble these hut-dwellers into submission. Commander Cuthrew will command the Fleet during my absence but any of the rest of you who wish to come ashore with me can... remember at all times that we are superior to these Lapau and we must prove it to them." + + +Following Anne-Marie's speech you are all sent back to your ships and the resupplied War Fleet sails Southeast as one group towards the lands of the Lapau. +> Meeting the Lapau +For three days the War Fleet follows a Southeast course until dusk on the third day when they drop anchor offshore.The small tropical island has a large village of wooden huts on a beach and in the dusk you watch the tall and strong-looking semi-clothed Natives gathering on the shoreline to silently inspect you. The next morning a well-crewed longboat containing Queen Anne-Marie sets out from the Monarch of the Sea, as you watch four more boats containing Commanders Quarrel, Swift, Mason and Freer also set off for the shore. +> Go ashore with the diplomatic mission +Taking a dozen Sailors into your Longboat you join Queen Anne-Marie and the other Commanders as they lead their men ashore to where a crowd of Natives stand silently waiting. Anne-Marie, dressed in her best clothes with a sword and two new-fangled single-shot "pistols" at her belt leads the way in confident strides up the beach. A small group of men move forward to meet her, their elaborately tatoed bodies are naked except for loin cloths and they carry spears and shields. Richard Quarrel calls out a warning to Anne-Marie but she strides on towards them regardless. + + +It is quickly recognized that neither you nor the Lapau understand one another's language: the Lapau speak in deep, rich, musical voices and though Anne-Marie attempts to use sign language this just seems to cause confusion. Anne-Marie tries presenting gifts like expensive jewellery to the Lapau but after examining them briefly they hand them back. The Lapau offer no gifts in return and as the meeting drags on without either side able to understand the other they mutter among themselves and give you all unfriendly looks. Finally giving up Anne-Marie leads you all back to the boats. + + +Returning to your ships Queen Anne-Marie seems unsure what to do next. She issues no orders except to remain on alert and going down into your cabin in the Adventurer you stay awake for a long time, wondering what will happen next. Finally you drift into an uneasy sleep... +> A rude awakening +You are woken in the middle of the night by a scene from the depths of your nightmares. + + +Hundreds of screams and shouts fill the air all at once followed by the muffled bangs of musket shots and springing to your feet you race up to deck to find utter pandemonium has engulfed the War Fleet. Hundreds of little one-man canoes surround the Fleet's ten ships like ants around sandwiches and brightly-painted figures are rapidly climbing up onto the decks, jabbing their spears through the sides of the ships or firing arrows up at them. Aboard all the ships men are grappling as spears thrust, swords swing, muskets fire and men are cut down screaming and gurgling to fall to the decks or into the sea. + + +The Adventurer was not anchored close to the Island and consequently seems to have received little attention but still a dozen Lapau Natives have hauled themselves on deck and are grappling with your Crew, three of your men already lie motionless on the deck. Drawing your sword you order your men to fire their muskets and as guns bang the Lapau Warriors are killed or dive from the ship to the safety of the sea. With the Adventurer secure at least you look round and find things are worse for most of the other ships in the Fleet. + + +A lot worse. + + +Commander Trever's ship Lucky is on fire: blazing fiercely and sinking as the flickering flames light up the silhouettes of men grappling and fighting on her decks. Commander Freer's ship Gambler is also sinking fast: pierced by dozens of spears it's sailors are diving from it's decks into the sea all around. Commander Hale's Merry Company is being swarmed by so many Lapau it seems impossible the ship does not sink under it's wait. A row of several cannons aboard the Monarch of the Sea boom into life but it too is heavily overrun and trying to get to her aid the Indefatigable has also come under heavy attack and a small fire has broken out amidships. + + +Not all is chaos however: the Sea Ghost is under sail and gliding smoothly through the chaos delivering organized volleys of musket fire at the thickest groups of Lapau and the Royal Escort, though still at anchor is also delivering volleys of musket and cannon fire. Anchored nearby, like you the Explorer and Maverick have also only been lightly attacked and are trying to clear their decks for action. As your sailors manage to hoist the anchor the wind fills your sails and the Adventurer glides forward. + + +You can scarcely believe it: the whole War Fleet has fallen victim to a night attack from hundreds, perhaps even thousands, of deadly spear and bow-armed Lapau Warriors in canoes! Aboard the Adventurer you know your must go to the aid of one of your fellow Commanders: the Monarch of the Sea, Indefatigable and Merry Company are all in need of immediate help and the Lucky and Gambler are sinking already. +> Sail towards Queen Anne-Marie's embattled ship Monarch of the Sea +Feeling that the protection of your Queen is your first priority you steer your ship straight towards the towering Monarch of the Sea. Cannons explode madly in the darkness and as you get closer you can see the ship's crew have been driven back to the stern where they are fighting desperately back against their attackers with musket shots and sword points. You spot the distinctively-dressed figure of Anne-Marie calmly aiming and firing muskets at the attackers, which are being loaded and passed to her by two of her sailors. + + +As you pull alongside your men fire a volley of musket and cannon shots into the Lapau that cuts down most of the great crowd on the main deck. With a cheer Anne-Marie's crew counter-attack and the surviving Lapau abandon the ship, diving back into the sea all around. As you spin the wheel to avoid a collision with Anne-Marie's ship a deafening burst of fire lights up the night. The Lucky has just exploded spectacularly, launching scraps of wood and bodies high into the air. The explosion has completely destroyed the ship and a few moments later the Gambler sinks beneath the waves too. With cheers the Lapu abandon their attack and returning to their canoes they paddle back to their island to celebrate their victory. +> The Aftermath... +Dawn illuminates the horrors caused during the night. + + +Bodies bob slowly up and down on the gentle waves in all directions as far as the eye can see while wreckage from the sunken Lucky and Gambler litter the ocean. The Monarch of the Sea, Indefatigable and Merry Company have all been seriously damaged and aboard all the ships of the fleet bodies of sailors and Lapau alike are being pitched into the ocean. Occasionally a musket shot rings out as a wounded Lapau is discovered and killed. At noon you and the other surviving officers are summoned to a Council of War aboard the Monarch of the Sea. + + +Commander Donald Trevers is dead, killed along with the rest of his Crew when the Lucky's gunpowder store exploded. Esme Hale is devastated: two thirds of her crew have been killed in the fighting and sitting there white-faced with a bloodied bandage wrapped around a hip wound she looks the very picture of misery. Eva Freer has been wounded too, stabbed in the shoulder as she swam to safety from the sinking Gambler, only a handful of Crew have survived. Anne-Marie and Quarrel have also suffered heavy losses amongst their crew: altogether nearly one hundred men or a third of the War Fleet's manpower have been killed. The fact that the Lapau suffered similar casualties is small consolation. + + +"None of us expected this attack," Anne-Marie says grimly when you have all gathered. "The Lapau have declared war on us and from now until they surrender we will show them no mercy. We need to make new plans though: this Fleet has been badly damaged and needs to refit and reinforce itself. There is not a danger that the Lapau will attack our colonies. These savages have proven more dangerous than we expected and another battle like last night's fight might destroy our Fleet." + + +Anne-Marie pauses for a moment. "I am dividing this Fleet up. Commander Hale and myself will sail back to Golden Sands to get more men and supplies and to have Commander Hale's wound treated. We will be gone about three weeks. In our absence I want you Commander Cuthrew to sail east pst this island and locate other Lapau-occupied islands near here. We must know where their settlements are so we can attack them. There is no one but you I would entrust this mission to." + + +Anne-Marie glances round at the rest of you. "Commander Finch, I want you and Commander Quarrel to co-ordinate an attack to destroy all Lapau resistance on this island and convert it into a base from which we can launch our assault on other Lapau Islands. Rely on musket and cannon fire, keep a safe distance and the Natives here will be destroyed. Commanders Swift and Mason, I want you to ensure our colonies are safe: sail with me and Commander Hale as far as Trever's Island and then when he turn north sail west to Sandy Island and then back to here where you will render Commanders Finch and Quarrel any assistance they might need." + + +Finally Anne-Marie turns to you and Freer. "Commander Freer, you will join Commander Trapa aboard the Adventurer, your remaining Crew will be assigned to Commander Hale's ship. You will assist Commander Trapa in any way he sees fit." + + +Freer starts to protest angrily but Anne-Marie cuts her short with an angry clap of her hands. + + +"I have given you an order Commander. It will be obeyed. Commander Trapa... the absence of myself and Commander Cuthrew you will command the Fleet until either myself ot Commander Cuthrew return. Commander Freer will assist you. You can either remain here and co-ordinate the assault on this island with Finch and Quarrel or you can accompany Swift and Mason on their voyage to ensure our Colonies are safe. I am giving you that discretion and I trust you will not let me down." + + +Feeling pride at your promotion you promise Anne-Marie she can rely on you. +> Stay here and co-ordinate Finch and Quarrel's attack on the island +After the Council the other five ships of the War Fleet sail off in different directions leaving the Adventurer, Royal Escort and Indefatigable alone off a hostile shore. Between your three crews you have less than eighty men while there are many times that number of Lapau on the island. After a few days of repairing the Indefatigable and ponder the problem you invite the other Commanders aboard to discuss a plan to conquer the island. Finch, Quarrel and Freer all join you in your cabin. + + +"Our main advantage we have here is our muskets and cannon fire," you tell them. "If we land and keep in disciplined ranks then we can advance on the village using musket and cannon fire to keep the enemy at a distance. After taking the village we can clear the whole island + + +"That won't help us if they take to their canoes" Finch points out. "They could easily escape or even make an attempt to capture our ships." + + +"We can use the ships to surround the island at three points and cut off any escape. If one ship is attacked the other two can sail to help them." + + +"Will you be commanding the land or the sea force?" Quarrel asks. +> The land force +It takes a few days for your Crew to complete all the preparations necessary to make the landing on Village Island. On the day of the assault you, Finch and Quarrel lead your sailors ashore in three longboats. The moment you hit the sand your men quickly form into three ranks, loaded muskets held ready as you advance cautiously on the village. It is eerily quiet. You find the village deserted and move past it into the jungle. You search the whole island for hours but don't find a single Lapau. At some earlier date they must have completely evacuated the island, taking with them all the food they could carry. You do find a small amount which is taken back to your ships. + + +When you all lead your Crews back to your ships Captain Freer can't stop laughing when she learns you have painstakingly surrounded and captured a totally uninhabited island. You ignore her because you have still fulfilled your orders and for the next few days your men keep busy knocking down the villager's huts and building a small wooden fort and jetty while you wait for the other ships of the War Fleet to return. +> Cuthrew's Return +After a few days of waiting and working on the Fort the War Fleet begins to reassemble, starting with Commander Cuthrew's Sea Ghost which sails up from the Southeast. When she anchors alongside you Cuthrew comes aboard the Adventurer and resumes command of the Fleet. + + +"Did you find any land?" you ask the old sailor who nods. + + +"Some. There's an island to the south which I've seen before full of giant lizards. Southeast of here there's a barren rocky island which contains a village of Lapau. I did not want to sail too far into hostile waters so I guess that rocky island will be our next target." + + +You agree and settle down to wait for the rest of the Fleet. +> Swift and Mason return +You are beginning to get concerned about the Supply situation by the time Commanders Swift and Mason return. Having visited all four of your country's Colonies in these waters they report the situation is safe: the Lapau have not attacked any of them which supports your belief that they have withdrawn away to the south. You are keen to continue the attack against the Lapay and all you need now is for Anne-Marie and Hale to arrive and after a few more days they do. +> Anne-Marie and Hale's Return +Having made excellent time Queen Anne-Marie and Commander Hale rejoin the War Fleet, restoring it to it's full strength of eight ships. As it turns out they didn't sail all the way back to Golden Sands, only as far as The Southern Passage where ample supplies were waiting for them, Anne-Marie quickly distributes them among the Fleet. With repairs finished to all ships, Hale and Freer's wounds healing nicely and two-hundred strong remaining members of the expedition feeling confident Anne-Marie orders you all aboard the Monarch of the Sea for another Council of War. + + +"We are ready to take the fight to the enemy now," Anne-Marie declares with satisfaction. "Commander Cuthrew has discovered a Lapau-occupied island to the Southeast so there we shall sail and destroy all the settlements we find there. We will kill all the male warriors and take the women and children prisoner. We must learn from them the locations of their islands and settlements so we can destroy them until they submit to our authority." + + +That evening the War Fleet weighs anchor and sails Southeast to war. +> To Battle +The War Fleet sails Southeast for three days and the island sighted by Cuthrew soon comes into sight: it is nothing more than a barren Hill with a few huts nestling on the top; like the Lapau settlement on Village Island it has been abandoned. Queen Anne-Marie summons all her officers to another Council of War, which irritates your companion Eva Freer. + + +"We might as well sleep in a corner of her cabin she gives us so many orders," she grumbles. + + +"I think it is likely that a Lapau fleet is waiting to fight us," Anne-Marie announces when you and the other officers have assembled. "I intend to lure them into a trap of my own. I will send one or two ships ahead to locate the Lapau islands. If they are attacked they will withdraw back to here, meanwhile our Fleet will wait hidden from sight behind this island. If our decoy ship is pursued we will attack them and use musket and cannon fire to kill the Lapau before they can board us or use their spears... who is willing to be the decoy?" + + +There is a moment of silence then Naomi Swift speaks up. + + +"Bermuda and myself can do it," she says and for some reason glances in your direction. "Our crews are at full strength and our ships are undamaged and ready for action. + + +"Good. Excellent, the two of you shall sail directly South from here and try to lead any Lapau after you," Anne-Marie announces. "Do any other Officers wish to join you?" + + +Eva nudges your side. "We should volunteer," she whispers. +> Offer to serve as a decoy alongside Swift and Mason +Your offer to be a decoy is gladly accepted and the next day the Adventurer, Explorer and Maverick all sail south. By the second day the Hill has faded from sight and a great mass of brown with patches of blue fill the horizon: hundreds and hundreds of canoes are sailing towards you, so many canoes in fact that they almost hide the sea from sight and each one contains a spear or bow-armed Lapau Native. Immediately you change direction and begin sailing back north towards the rest of the Fleet. + + +Unfortunately the wind is against you and the canoes are faster. + + +By the third day the canoes have come within bow shot range and sailors in the stern fire muskets at them as the faster Lapau rain arrows down on you. The Barren Hill is back in sight and as you and your companions approach the other five ships of the War Fleet sail into sight. This doesn't seem to make the slightest impression on the Lapau, who if anything increase their efforts to catch up with your ships. For every Lapau your men shoot another ten overtake their fallen countryman to gain on you. Inevitably your enemies catch up to the Adventurer. + + +As well as bombarding your Crew with arrows Lapau warriors now stab their spears into your ship's hull below the waterline to try and sink it or threw their spears up at your crew. Three of your men have been killed and seawater is soon pouring into your ship from dozens of tiny holes stabbed below the waterline. The Explorer and Maverick are under similar attack and a chill goes through you as you see the Maverick list to starboard and start to sink. + + + + +Trying to help her cousin Naomi Swift steers the Explorer towards the Maverick, driving straight through a vast crowd of canoes but the Maverick is sinking fast now. Though they are making good speed the rest of the War Fleet is still out of musket range though the Monarch of the Sea is firing her bow cannons. + + +"We should help them," Freer tells you, pointing at the sinking ship. +> Join Commander Swift in trying to rescue the Crew of the Maverick +Turning towards the Maverick in a sudden burst of speed you push the Adventurer as fast as she will go to try to reach her in time. Before you can get their the ship's deck suddenly slips below the waves leaving a crazy wreckage of wooden debris, swimming men and dozens of canoes. The crew never have a chance: the Lapau stab and hack mercilessly at them in the water and though your men fire a volley of musket shots it only serves to make you a target. The ocean is soon red with blood and floating bodies. + + +The destruction of the Maverick does at least draw attention away from the Explorer and though taking on water she is able to win her way clear of most of the canoes. Under heavy arrow fire which kills three of your Crew and wound more you turn the Adventurer around and use her to try and protect the damaged ship.with your own vessel. Finally the rest of the War Fleet join the battle and sailing between the Royal Escort and Merry Company you finally reach safety. Joining the rest of the Fleet both you and Naomi Swift turn your ships around to join the advance: like every other Sailor on the Fleet you want revenge for the loss of the Maverick. +> No Mercy +The disciplined line of the seven ships of the War Fleet bear down on the hundreds of canoes and the Lapau simply aren't strong enough to overwhelm the prepared and disciplined fire of the Fleet, it's sailors fired up by anger at witnessing the slaughter of Commander Bermuda Mason and her Crew. Over one hundred musket shots cuts down the canoes and as the Lapau flotilla breaks in two to try to outflank and surround the Fleet Anne-Marie orders the ships to drop anchor. More musket volleys decimate the Lapau trying to sail around the Fleet and with a trumpet blast the signal to retreat is given. With at least half their number slaughtered and hundreds of Lapau lying dead or dying in their boats or in the sea the survivors retreat amidst the mocking cheers of your countrymen. + + +Canoes and corpses lie in every direction, the greater part of the Lapau flotilla has been destroyed and there is a real feeling that this victory has given your Fleet the advantage in this War but the casualties have been heavy. Fifty sailors have been killed: all the crew of the Maverick as well as a dozen sailors aboard the Explorer and other casualties throughout the Fleet. Bermuda Mason's mutilated body is fished from the water and her cousin Naomi Swift, who was herself hit in the left arm by an arrow is almost inconsolable with grief. At the Council of War aboard the Monarch of the Sea following the battle she sits shaking like a leaf with tears flooding silently down her face. + + +"We have lost half our strength so far in this expedition but we have no intention of giving up," Anne-Marie declares. "The power of the Lapau has been broken. From wounded prisoners recovered from the water by Commander Cuthrew we have learnt where the Lapau settlements are: they control a string of nine islands in these waters, two of which we have already secured. It seems this Fleet was a gathering of all the Lapau's strength, we will never again face such odds as we did here today." + + +Anne-Marie produces a hastily-drawn map. "Our prisoners inform us that the closest two islands lie south of here. We will proceed in that direction at once. I believe destroying their settlements and capturing their women and children is the best way to force the Lapau to submit and recognize our authority. We will not give up this War until we have forced them to submit or the deaths of our sailors and Commanders Trevers and Mason will count for nothing." + + +Grimly the battered Fleet continues south. +> Onwards +Continuing south you soon sight a small island covered in thick forest. At least one hundred canoes leave the island traveling south carrying what is clearly the island's population: they easily outrace your much slower ships. With a telescope you can see a few Lapau still moving about onshore so clearly the island has not been completely abandoned. Anchoring offshore Anne-Marie holds another Council of War to discuss the situation. + + +"There is no question: we must take this island," Anne-Marie declares. "Our prisoners tell us the next island lies to the Southeast. To save time I will take Commanders Hale and Quarrel to capture that place while Commander Cuthrew will co-ordinate Commanders Finch and Swift to secure this island. We will then rendezvous off this island to continue our voyage south. Commander Trapa, you may join whichever half of the Fleet you think would most benefit from your assistance. +> Join Anne-Marie, Hale and Quarrel in sailing east to take the further island +Parting ways with the Sea Ghost, Royal Escort and Explorer you glide across the sparkling waves with your three companions until you come upon a tropical island, very similar to the previous with a village of huts by the shore. There are no canoes in sight but with a telescope you can see a few Lapau warriors moving near the shoreline. You, Freer, Hale and Quarrel join Anne-Marie in her cabin as she lays out her battle plan. + + +"We will waste no time with reconnaissance but will land immediately and kill every Lapau warrior we see," she declares. "This Fleet cannot spare the food needed to feed prisoners. Me and Commander Quarrel will land with our crews while Commanders Hale and Freer will remain about the ships to ensure no Lapau escape by sea. I intend to conquer this island swiftly and then rejoin the rest of our fleet. Commander Trapa, you may accompany the land or sea force as you prefer." +> Join the land assault with Anne-Marie and Quarrel +Immediately after the Council you, Anne-Marie and Quarrel land your Crews on the southern edge of the island, quickly forming a line of soldiers on the beach with muskets held ready. Together you advance cautiously towards the village, it is eerily quiet. The Warriors you saw earlier have vanished into the jungle. Taking possession of the unoccupied village you reluctantly advance together into the jungle to secure the island. + + +You have not gone far into the thicket when one of your men suddenly yells a warning and fires his musket. A dozen armed warriors spring from the undergrowth, throwing their spears. An explosion of musket fire booms out and the warriors are cut down. "Kill them," Anne-Marie shouts and your sailors run wild, stabbing the warriors to death. A few of your men have been mortally wounded by spears, as have a few of Anne-Marie and Quarrel's crew but the island has been taken. + + +When the slaughter is over Anne-Marie leads you all back to the village. "It seems the Lapau evacuated the island and left these men as a rearguard," she muses to you and Quarrel. "They may be gathering their strength for another attack. We will rejoin the rest of the fleet - in honor of my loyal companion Commander Quarrel I will name this Quarrel Island." Quarrel drops down on one knee and with an extravagant gesture kisses Anne-Marie's hand. You turn away in disgust. By that evening you are under sail and on your way to rejoin the rest of the Fleet. +> Reunion +The two halves of the Fleet reunite off Forrest Island, both having been successful in their efforts to capture Forrest Island and Quarrel Island. On both small bands of Lapau Warriors waited to ambush the invaders, apparently having been left there solely for that purpose. All the Lapau were killed along with about a dozen of your countrymen altogether and Anne-Marie's feeling at her latest Council of War is that the Lapau are gathering their remaining strength to continue opposing you. + + +"According to Commander Cuthrew's prisoners there still remain five Lapau islands ahead and the closest is a mountain of snow due south of here. Although we have been reduced to seven ships and less than half our manpower the Fleet is still in good condition and we will make for this snow mountain. However low supplies is starting to become an issue and we need to obtain more if we are to continue safely. Commander Hale believes she has a partial answer to our problem." + + +Hale clears her throat and speaks. "During my voyage around the world me and my Crew landed on a snow-covered island which was populated by many penguins which we hunted and used to replenish our food stores. If we sail southwest we should encounter this snowy island where we can hunt and bring back lots of food for the rest of the fleet. After that by turning east should be able to rendezvous with the War Fleet near this snowy mountain." + + +Anne-Marie nods. "Very well, any ships who wish to can accompany you." Commander Swift volunteers to accompany Hale but everyone else opts to remain with the War Fleet. + + + +> Sail Southwest with Hale and Swift to hunt penguins +Breaking off from the rest of the Fleet, the Adventurer, Merry Company and Explorer sail Southwest. You notice the temperature drop the further south you can go but despite the decreasing voyage this is a pleasant part of the voyage because every evening you have Esme Hale, Naomi Swift and Taylor Freer join you in your cabin for dinner. The three attractive adventurers are good company but you can't help noticing Swift seems to glance at you a lot when she thinks you aren't looking. One evening Hale takes you to one side with a smile. + + +"You know I think Commander Swift might like you," she tells you. You laugh but Hale shakes her head. "No, it's true. Clever ladies like me can tell these things. And another thing, is it just me or do you seem just a little sweet on Eva Freer?" + + +For some reason you don't feel like laughing anymore. "I don't know what you mean." + + +Hale shrugs. "I'll tell you another secret too, my island is a bit further south than I might have led Anne-Marie to believe. I just wanted to get away from her, Quarrel and the others for a while. We'll change our course due South now and should arrive there in a few days." + + +Adjusting course you glide on towards your destination. +> The Land of the Penguins +As particles of snow drift through the air a snowy island comes into sight. "This is it," Hale declares triumphantly and in a great hurry you go ashore but it quickly becomes clear something is very wrong. Hundreds of penguins lie all across the island, all slain by arrows or spears: clear evidence that the Lapau have been here and recently to destroy any possible food supplies for your Fleet. Fortunately because the low temperature has frozen the meat much of it is still edible and you are able to replenish some of the Food you have consumed so far in this voyage but the butchery of the penguins is a bitter blow when you were relying on their meat. Leaving the island behind you sail due East to report the bad news to Anne-Marie. +> The Snow Mountain +When the two halves of the War Fleet rejoin beneath the icy pinnacle of a great Snow Mountain there is bad news on both sides. Anne-Marie's half of the Fleet were attacked by Lapau warriors who braved the icy waters to swim out and ambush the ships, killing a dozen sailors throughout the Fleet before being repulsed. Hale's expedition successfully rediscovered the island she had visited previously only to find Lapau had already slaughtered the penguin population. Some of the frozen meat is still edible and is distributed throughout the Fleet but the War Fleet as a whole is now facing serious supply and manpower shortages. + + +"The Lapau appear to be conducting a scorched earth policy," Anne-Marie declares, "whittling down our numbers with ambushes while stripping the islands ahead of all edible foods and supplies. Only four hostile islands remain ahead so if we move as fast as we can we can still conquer and subdue these remaining islands and reach our nearest supply cache on the Corral Cabin Island before this Fleet is destroyed. But we will prevail!" + + +Anne-Marie pauses. "According to Commander Cuthrew's prisoners a triangle of three islands lie before us. To the Southwest is a small tropical island and to the Southeast is a low rocky island, both are just a few days sail away. About a week's voyage directly south is a Corral Mountain, this will be our rendezvous point. I am dividing the Fleet again: Commander Cuthrew will take Commanders Hale and Swift Southwest to attack the tropical island while I shall take Commanders Finch and Quarrel Southeast to attack the rocky island. We will rendezvous at the Corral Mountain directly south of here. Officers: be wary of ambushes. The Lapau are withdrawing south, gathering their strength as they go and they surely intend to weaken us further before destroying us in one final attack so be careful! Commander Trapa, you can accompany whichever force you prefer. +> Join Cuthrew, Hale and Swift in attacking the tropical island +Once again the fleet divides and you sail Southwest towards the tropical island. It soon comes into sight and as expected it appears deserted. One unusual thing is noticeable though: a burnt wreck of a ship lies sunk just offshore.Startled you recognize her as the Hope, a vessel commanded by a trader called Ann Lovett, one of your rival competitors during The Great Race to circumnavigate Magellan. She vanished during the voyage and from the looks of it she stumbled upon the Lapau who killed her and burnt her ship. + + +Cuthrew looks as weary as ever as you Hale, Swift and Freer join him in his cabin aboard the Sea Ghost. "Commanders Hale and Swift, you will take your crews ashore to ensure this island is unoccupied. Be wary of ambushes and if you can see if you can discover some trace of what befell Captain Lovett and her crew. Commander Freer and myself will remain offshore. Commander Trapa, you may accompany who you choose." +> Join the landing party +Going ashore you and your Crew together with Hale and Swift advance cautiously across the beach towards the village. You expect an ambush to come from the jungle but when it does it comes in an astonishing form: musket shots ring out knocking down several men including three of yours. Naomi Swift is hit in the right leg and falls to the ground near you. "Return fire," you shout as a musket ball whizzes past your head and your men fire a return volley. "Reload, reload," you shout but as you do you see a dozen figures fleeing from the trees. You and Hale lead your crews in pursuit but they dive into the sea. Using bamboo tubes lashed together with grass as breathing tubes they vanish under the waves and escape. + + +You are startled by the evolving tactics of your adversary and have suffered more casualties in securing another island. Naomi Swift's wound is serious and she is unable to walk. Taken back aboard the Explorer she has the musket ball removed. In agony with pain and confined to her bunk she is unable to command her ship so Eva Freer assumes temporary command, you feel a strange and painful twinge in your chest as she leaves your ship. Convincing yourself it is only because you have become to used to seeing her every day you obey Cuthrew's orders to weigh anchor and steer the Adventurer Southeast towards the rendezvous. By now the hold is almost bare of provisions. +> The expedition continues +When the War Fleet reunites in the shadow of The Corral Mountain there is much news to share, most of it's bad. Cuthrew's expedition captured the island but were attacked by musket-wielding Lapau which suggests that somehow the Lapau have gotten ahold of some of your countrymen's weapons and learnt how to use them. Anne-Marie's expedition also succeeded in capturing the island after some fierce cave-based fighting. Casualties are high now: Naomi Swift has been shot through the leg and can't walk forcing Eva Freer to take command of the Explorer while Thomas Finch has been speared through the arm and is also in great pain. The Fleet is down to just over one hundred men, a third of it's starting strength, and only has enough food left for another week or so. + + +The sight of The Corral Mountain also causes your sprits to plunge. The Lapau seem to have finally dug in, fortifying themselves on the Mountain's steep slopes and hundreds of warriors are moving among the natural cover of the corral crags. The Mountain is so tall you cannot even elevate your ship's cannons to fire more than a quarter of the way up the slope and an assault by your sailors, even with covering musket fire, will surely trigger a rain of spears and arrows from above. Despite it all Anne-Marie remains confident. + + +"The Lapau have clearly gathered their last remaining strength here to fortify this place," she announces. "After we capture this place they have only one more island to shelter in, one more bolt hole. Once we take this Mountain an end to the war is in sight. This mountain must be taken in one assault, one swift charge to overrun their position. My Commanders, you have all fought with tremendous ability and courage so far in this voyage, now I ask who will lead this attack?" + + +She looks round at her officers, at Naomi Swift who has her arm in a sling and her leg in bandages and had to be hauled aboard the Monarch of the Sea in a canvas bag to attend this council, at Thomas Finch who also has his arm in a sling and at Esme Hale and Eva Freer who have also been wounded so far in this voyage. The sycophantic Richard Quarrel remains silent and finally it is the ailing and grey-bearded Tobias Cuthrew who speaks. + + +"My Crew is the strongest of those that remain," he declares. "If this mountain must be taken then I will lead the attack." + + +Anne-Marie looks at her deputy with great respect. "One half of our men must advance up the Mountain while the other half give them covering fire. Who else will charge these slopes?" + + +"If it shortens this war and saves our lives me and my Crew will advance though I'd rather do anything other than this," Hale says reluctantly. + + +"I will go too," Freer announces. "I don't expect this assault will succeed unless I am there." + + +You feel a sudden jolt inside you as you realize the tomboyish adventuress who you have grown so close to will deliberately be putting herself in harm's way. + + +"Is there no one else?" Anne-Marie asks glancing pointedly at Quarrel who looks at +> Volunteer to join the assault on the slopes +At dusk you, Tobias Cuthrew, Esme Hale and Eva Freer and your Crews row ashore amidst a hail of spears. Moving with a speed you did not think you were capable of you scramble up the steep slope. Muskets flash behind you as Anne-Marie, Thomas Finch and Richard Quarrel lead the second wave ashore to give you covering fire. A spear plunges down in front of you and chunks of corral break off in your hands as you scramble up the steepest parts of the slope on all fours. All around you men are falling screaming and as some Lapau begin firing muskets the assault grounds to a halt, sailors seeking shelter in whatever cover they can find. + + +Seeing that the assault has halted Esme Hale springs to her feet and stands tall amidst the storm of flying spears and musket balls. "Come on my boys," she shouts. "Let's take the top!" A moment later a spear strikes her full in the center of her chest, the bloodied point emerging from her back. Time seems to stand still as she falls slowly backwards, her body skidding down the mountainside. There seems to be a moment of stunned silence and then with a collective roar of rage sailors spring to their feet. + + +If anything could have electrified you and your countrymen it was the death of the most popular officer in the Fleet. Screaming with rage like the rest of your countrymen you can think of nothing but getting up the mountain and tearing apart with your bare hands the men who have murdered your friend. Eva Freer is springing up the slope ahead of you when she spins on the spot and goes down: shot through the right shoulder. You falter momentarily to check she is ok but she has fallen behind the shelter of a rock and impatiently gestures for you to get moving. + + +A musket ball knocks your sword flying from your hand and bare-handed you spring on up the slope. Incredibly, despite his age, Cuthrew is ahead of you and he leads his sailors in slaughtering the Lapau warriors. As they flee from their positions they are pursued and butchered without mercy by the vengeful sailors. With the Mountain won and sickened by the sight of the slaughter you turn away and stagger down the slope to where Hale is lying motionless on her back, her eyes staring sightlessly at the sky. + + +"We can't do anything for her," a voice tells you nearby and you see Freer is dragging herself over, trailing blood. The sight of Freer immediately drives other thoughts from your mind and against her protests you hurry over and lift her up in your hands. You carry her down to where the wounded are gathering on the shore near a beaming Anne-Marie who stares up at the mountain top where Cuthrew has ordered your country's banner to be raised. + + +"Now we have won this War," she tells you triumphantly. + + +"Esme Hale is dead," you tell her bluntly. "So I couldn't care less." + + +Anne-Marie stares at you as you walk past her and carry Freer to the safety of a boat back to the Adventurer. Casualties are remarkably light and only three of your Crew have been killed in the fighting, though many more are injured. +> A Friend's Funeral +That night the mood aboard the Fleet is mutinous as the bodies of those who died during the day's battle are consigned to the deep. Only twenty or so men died but three quarters of those who sailed with the Fleet are now dead. When Esme Hale's body, still beautiful in death, is dropped into the ocean a fierce outcry goes up, many men are crying and cries of "murderer" and "tyrant" are shouted at Anne-Marie. Quarrel tries to calm the crowd but someone fires a musket at him which fortunately (for him) wasn't loaded. Taking the hint Anne-Marie retreats to her cabin with you and her other remaining officers. + + +Here the mood is scarcely better. Eva Freer and Naomi Swift are staring at her with real hatred, white-faced from the pain of their wounds. Thomas Finch is sitting to one side grimly staring out of a window. Even Richard Quarrel seems to have nothing to say as he nervously fidgets with a ring in his hands. It falls to Tobias Cuthrew, white-bearded like Old Father Time and with his face still blackened from musket smoke to say what you are all thinking. + + +"My Queen three of us are now dead and three of us wounded. This Fleet has lost three ships, has less than a week's worth of food and has lost three quarters of it's men. One more battle will destroy this Fleet. If you keep going this Fleet will come apart. You must seek terms with the Lapau." + + +"Who are you to talk to your Queen like this?" Anne-Marie snaps. "We will keep going until the Lapau surrender. We have not come this far and suffered so much to roll over and beg when we are on the verge of victory." + + +"No we will not," you tell her quietly and look up at her. "Will you continue until we are all dead? If you do not seek terms of peace when we arrive at the Lapau's last island then all will be well. But me and my Crew will not fight." + + +"Mine neither," Freer says. "Nor mine," Swift adds. "I am finished fighting," Finch agrees. Quarrel glances round the group looking like a rat caught in a trap and quickly shakes his head. "Queen, you have heard your officers," Cuthrew says quietly. + + +"You fools," Anne-Marie says with icy venom. "None of you appreciate what I am trying to do. I am establishing an empire that will last for hundreds of years to come. What are a few lives now compared to greatness in the future? Safety and security cost lives: if we do not take lands the Lapau will take them and one day be so numerous they sill snuff us out like a finger crushes an ant! Do you want to see our small Kingdom of Three Islands surrounded by vicious war-loving Lapau? I know the road is difficult and we will lose many friends on the way but we must be strong! One more week, that is all I ask." + + +"My Queen, you must realize not everyone is like you," Freer tells her. + + +The next morning you sail south from the scene of such terrible fighting. +> The Homeland of the Lapau +Starving and short-handed the War Fleet limps on. Perhaps as a bribe Anne-Marie places Eva Freer in command of Hale's ship Merry Company where mutiny is thickest. Freer promptly changes the ship's name to Esme's Joy and despite moving with a painful limp she provides the perfect leadership the five remaining sailors on that ship need, telling them their only chance is to get home alive is to keep heading south and reminding them they are approaching waters she and they have sailed before. Naomi Swift has herself carried up in a chair to the quarterdeck of the Explorer to resume command of her ship. + + +Finally you reach the last island of the Lapau, their Capital which they call Matan. A terrible sight awaits you: hundreds of canoes wait silently before the island filled with warriors ready for one last battle to save their homeland. Anne-Marie remains out of sight in her cabin as to the relief of you and every sailor on the ship Commander Quarrel and a few sailors row a boat towards the waiting fleet waving a white flag. A canoe so big it holds a dozen warriors comes out to meet him and accompanies him back to the Monarch of the Sea. You and the other officers hurry aboard to meet your adversaries. + + +The first Lapau aboard after Quarrel is a blond-haired lady who looks vaguely familiar to you. She is followed by a handsome young man in war paint and a grey-haired tough old warrior whose bare chest is covered in old scars. Anne-Marie has finally emerged from her cabin in her finest clothes and waits surrounded by you and her other officers. The blond-haired woman's eyes take in Finch, Swift and Freer's wounds before her eyes settle on Anne-Marie. + + +"Greetings to you Queen Anne-Marie," she says, speaking your language perfectly. "I am Ann Lovett, formerly Captain of the Hope and now honored to serve the Royal House of the Lapau." + + +You start, as does Anne-Marie and Cuthrew. The three of you recognize her as one of your fellow rivals in The Great Race to sail around the world of Magellan some five months ago. She was presumed lost but now it seems she has been found and adopted by the Lapau. + + +"I have come here to translate the words of Al-Capu, King of the Lapau and of his son Al-Balu," she says gesturing to the tough old warrior and his handsome son. The King of the Lapau speaks in the deep ponderous tones of his people while Lovett provides a translation. + + +"Al-Capu knows your heart Queen. He is tired of fighting. Many of his warriors are killed. You have taken all his villages and all his lands but Matan. Al-Capu is tired of the war you have waged upon him and his heart is sad. If you leave him in peace he will fight with you no more." + + +"Al-Capu promises not to attack our islands if we do not attack his?" Anne-Marie asks. + + +"It was never the intention of Al-Capu to harrass your colonies," Lovett replies. "Those were the actions of ambitious petty chiefs and young warriors. If you leave the Lapau alone they will leave you alone." + + +"That is not enough," Anne-Marie replies. "I too have lost too many warriors. We demand land as recompense." + + +Al-Capu considers this when Lovett translates and gestures to his fleet of canoes. + + +"If they fight with you perhaps you will win or perhaps the Lapau will triumph," Lovett translates. "Either way many will die and both of us will lose. But if you sail away we will have a lasting peace which will be sweeter than any victory in battle. Trade routes can be established and our people can learn much from each other." + + +Anne-Marie tries one last time. "Your warriors attacked our Fleet without warning when we first visited you in peace," she insists. "We deserve something at least for that." + + +Al-Capu and Al-Balu talk rapidly among themselves for some time before Lovett what they say. + + +"Prince Al-Balu was leading his annual tour of his kingdom with his escort when he learned of your ships off his father's lands. Perhaps his attack on you was over hasty but he feared you meant to attack his father's lands. To ensure a lasting peace between our two peoples King Al-Capu will give his son Al-Balu and myself to you as hostages to live for one year and will now provide your Fleet with food to help you return to your own lands. In this way we hope to ensure a lasting peace." + + +Anne-Marie hesitates, glances around at the unfriendly faces of you and her other Commanders and finally nods and sighs. + + +"Let it be so." +> Matan +When news that peace has been agreed spreads throughout the War Fleet the cheering is continous and quickly prompts Anne-Marie to retreat to her cabin, quickly followed by Quarrel. Ann Lovett remains aboard the ship and chats affably with you and Cuthrew while Prince Al-Balu stands awkwardly by while his father returns to Matan to tell his own people of the peace agreement. The Lapau break into song, stamp their feet and wave their spears and within an hour dozens of canoes are speeding out from the island, conveying welcome supplies to the Fleet. All the food the Lapau took from their islands has been gathered here and is swiftly shared out among the ships of the Fleet. You make sure the Adventurer receives as much food as her holds can contain. + + +Anne-Marie emerges from her cabin that afternoon and using the shaky premise of her hostages and the food delivery claims this war has ended in victory while Lovett later tells you in private the Lapau regard it as a victory because the War Fleet is leaving their lands never to return and a lasting peace has been established - despite their fierce appearence Lovett insists, slightly unconvincingly, that the Lapau are basically a peaceful people. Either way no one seems to have won in this war which has cost many good lives, foremost among them Donald Trevers, Bermuda Mason and Esme Hale. + + +That evening over a dinner aboard the Monarch of the Sea Lovett tells how she was captured by the Lapau on the tropical island where Swift was shot and kept by the Lapau so they could learn about your culture. The next morning the War Fleet is resupplied and ready to return to The Kingdom of the Three Islands and Anne-Marie summons you and the other officers aboard her ship for one last Council. + + +"The voyage home is safe," she announces. "The waters south and west of here are mostly known to us and it will take approximately two weeks to return to Golden Sands. I propose that the Fleet splits up and returns to The Three Islands on separate to ensure we explore this area as much as possible, the first of us to bring his ship safely home will have the honor of bringing news of our success to our people. I recommend following a Southwest course for one week and then turning South but I have absolute trust in your skills." + + +After such a long voyage you have little enthusiasm for more risks but as you are leaving the cabin Naomi Swift hobbles after you awkwardly on crutches. "Cleo?" she calls out to you. "There is something I would like to talk to you about. Can you please sail South of here so no one else is around and I can come aboard the Adventurer and have a private talk with you?" Wondering what the talk could be about you give a non-committal answer. Returning aboard the Adventurer you watch the War Fleet start to break up as it leaves Matan and most of the ships turn Southwest except for the Explorer and Freer's Esme's Joy which turn South. +> Sail Southwards to talk to Swift +Traveling south across the sparkling water you are pleased to have finally escaped Anne-Marie's dictatorial command and you soon catch up with the Explorer and Esme's Joy and pull alongside so their Commanders can join you for dinner. Naomi and Eva come aboard looking like the outpatients of a hospital: Eva is still limping and Naomi still needs crutches to get about but all of you are glad the voyage is nearly over. + + +"We should not have gone so far," Eva says firmly. "Queen Anne-Marie is a tyrant." + + +You are captivated by the attractive tomboy's conversation throughout the dinner and it is only when the meal is over that you realize Naomi has hardly said a word. When you ask if she is ok she nods distractedly. Later when Eva has returned to her ship Naomi hangs back waiting nervously. When you open your mouth to ask her what is wrong the strong-willed adventuress suddenly hobbles closer and kisses you wion the mouth! + + +"I care for you and you care for Eva so that is that," she declares suddenly pulling away. "After Bermuda died I thought I would never know happiness again and then I got to know you! I just wanted you to know how much I cared and how I know we can never be together." She turns and hobbles out of the room leaving you stunned. It takes you a minute or two to recover your wits and follow her out onto deck but she has already left. You hear someone call your name and turn startled to find Eva is still on board the Adventurer. + + +"Are you alright Leo?" she asks you looking amused. "You look shaken." + + +"Naomi... er" you mumble trying to work out how to phrase this. + + +"Kissed you did she?" Eva asks, still with that mocking grin. "I thought she might. She looked like she wanted to. Did you tell her you didn't care for her because you were so in love with me?" + + +"Eva!" you exclaim. Everyone seems to know your own heart better than you! + + +"Isn't it obvious?" Eva asks. "You probably haven't even noticed but most everything you do is with one eye on my reaction. You're a good friend Leo but let's not get stupid about things alright?" + + +With that she turns and walks away towards the gangplank back to her ship leaving you standing open-mouthed on the deck. Later during a sleepless night you reflect on what you have learned tonight and realize that perhaps during the voyage you could have been a little kinder towards Naomi.By dawn there is no sign of the Explorer or Esme's Joy so you turn the Adventurer Southwest towards the Northern Passage and home. +> Food for Thought +As the Adventurer skims across the sparkling water you notice pieces of corral floating in the sea occasionally, a sure sign you are approaching The Great Reef and your homeland! You also haul something even more unusual from the ocean: a net full of struggling fish! The net must have been lost by a fishing vessel somewhere nearby, surely belonging to one of your countrymen. Your men are thrilled and enjoy a fish fry as well as outfitting the Adventurer with enough food for several days but you reflect bitterly there were times in the past when this food would have been much more welcome rather than now when you have plenty to eat. Continuing Southwest you finally arrive at The Northern Passage. +> The Northern Passage +You feel a great sense of relief as you sail through the narrow breach in The Great Reef called The Northern Passage, the real border of your homeland, The Three Islands.On your last voyage you were attacked by a treacherous Captain as you sail in the opposite direction but that man is now dead and this is your gateway home. On the Reef a small watchtower has been built and if you want you can halt here and request supplies, alternatively two of your home islands Amethyst and Onyx lie to the Southwest and Southeast respectively. +> Stop and request supplies +Dropping anchor you go ashore to be greeted by the men at the watchtower. + + +"Fleet's returning home then?" one asks cheerfully. "Where's the rest of you?" + + +"We're some of it," you tell him wearily. "What's left of the rest is coming along soon." + + +"Many new lands been conquered?" the man asks, determined to be cheerful. + + +"None. We have got two new friends thought." + + +The man frowns. "What happened on this voyage Commander Trapa?" + + +"You'll soon find out when Anne-Marie tells you all," you tell him wearily. "Please load what supplies you can aboard my ship." + + +With fresh supplies on board you sail on. +> Southwest to Amethyst +It is nice to see Amethyst again, a busy little port that builds ships for your country. Your arrival provokes a surge of activity along the waterfront but anchoring offshore you do not visit the island; so close to home and with ample provisions you have no intention to stop and meet the widows of your sailors who are not returning on the quay. The next morning a gentle breeze fills your sails and turning Southeast you continue on towards Golden Sands and home. +> Going home +Finally as the beautiful shores of Golden Sands come into sight you feel an indescribable relief at coming home tempered with the grim certainty that in the future you will have to embark on more dangerous and difficult voyages into the unknown. You have made good time but are you the first Commander of the War Fleet to bring their ship back to Golden Sands? +> Click here to find out +Swift and speedy throughout the voyage it is no surprise that you and the Adventurer are the first to return to Golden Sands. A silent crowd waits on the quay as you descend as you go ashore and putting the best possible spin on the War declare that the War Fleet has been victorious in eight out of nine battles and skirmishes with the Lapau earning valuable hostages and recognition of trade routes and national boundaries. The people cheer as you mutter in an unheard undertone that over two hundred of the Fleet's sailors lost their lives including three of the Fleet's most likable officers. Over the next few days Anne-Marie and the others return until within a week all the surviving ships of the War Fleet are back in Golden Sands. + + +You have earned 1 Score Point. +> And at the end... +When the last ship (Captain Quarrel's Indefatigable) has returned to Golden Sands on Day 85 Anne-Marie gives a victory feast in honor of all the survivors of the War Fleet. Fresh promotions are conferred: Ann Lovett and Prince Al-Balu are given the honorary rank of Commander while you, Finch, Swift, Freer, Quarrel, Cuthrew and Anne-Marie herself are all promoted to the rank of Commodore. As a Commodore with royal approval all of you can now independently command fleets of ships. + + +At the Victory Feast Anne-Marie spends most of her time talking to Lovett and Al-Balu leaving you free to make awkward but stilted conversation with Swift, Freer and Cuthrew, the memory of your rebellion against Anne-Marie on the high seas still fresh in your minds. Cuthrew is unusually talkative. + + +"I have been talking to Prince Al-Balu with Commander Lovett's assistance," he tells you all in an undertone. "It seems the Lapau and ourselves are not the only great civilization in these waters. There is apparently a third, a nation the Lapau claim are also armed with muskets and appear as technologically advanced as ourselves." + + +"Well no doubt Anne-Marie won't rest until they are all dead," you comment bitterly. + + +Cuthrew sighs. "That's the problem with exploration Leo," he tells you. "It is like opening a door at a zoo where you only get to find out what animal is inside the room after you've opened the door permanently. If you are not lucky the animal might prove to be much stronger than you." + + +He glances nervously at Anne-Marie and suddenly hisses. "Don't trust that woman for a moment. She means to have the whole world of Magellan by force or not at all. The time for peaceful sailors like me are passing." + + +"What's all the whispering about?" Anne-Marie asks suddenly. "We should be cheerful for we return victorious. You must not become too comfortable though! My friend Saphia Dancer informs me that voyages to the west have uncovered some interesting communications with a previously unknown nation. More uncharted waters await for us to explore! Enjoy your rest now my officers for you have earned it but I expect I will be needing your services again very soon." + + +You roll your eyes and glance across the table. Eva Freer is staring at Anne-Marie with such venom that if looks could kill Anne-Marie would be dead already. Looking away you meet the eyes of Naomi Swift who is watching you sadly. She glances away briefly then looks back and smiles. Raising her fingers to her lips she kisses them softly, reaches across the table and takes your cold hand in her warm one. Your grip tightens as you realize in the future you will need the help of friends like her and Eva more than ever now that Esme is gone. + + +For it is certain that very soon you and the crew of the Adventurer will sail again...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Dropping anchor you go ashore to be greeted by the men at the watchtower. + + +"Fleet's returning home then?" one asks cheerfully. "Where's the rest of you?" + + +"We're some of it," you tell him wearily. "What's left of the rest is coming along soon." + + +"Many new lands been conquered?" the man asks, determined to be cheerful. + + +"None. We have got two new friends thought." + + +The man frowns. "What happened on this voyage Commander Trapa?" + + +"You'll soon find out when Anne-Marie tells you all," you tell him wearily. "Please load what supplies you can aboard my ship." + + +With fresh supplies on board you sail on. +> Southeast to Onyx +Reaching the peaceful little agricultural island of Onyx for some reason you feel strangely guilty that you have survived to return home when so many of your men didn't. It feels strange spending a night peacefully at anchor offshore without having to worry about spear-armed blood-thirsty warriors climbing aboard and killing everyone they find. The next morning you raise the anchor without landing and turn Southwest towards Golden Sands and home.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When news that peace has been agreed spreads throughout the War Fleet the cheering is continous and quickly prompts Anne-Marie to retreat to her cabin, quickly followed by Quarrel. Ann Lovett remains aboard the ship and chats affably with you and Cuthrew while Prince Al-Balu stands awkwardly by while his father returns to Matan to tell his own people of the peace agreement. The Lapau break into song, stamp their feet and wave their spears and within an hour dozens of canoes are speeding out from the island, conveying welcome supplies to the Fleet. All the food the Lapau took from their islands has been gathered here and is swiftly shared out among the ships of the Fleet. You make sure the Adventurer receives as much food as her holds can contain. + + +Anne-Marie emerges from her cabin that afternoon and using the shaky premise of her hostages and the food delivery claims this war has ended in victory while Lovett later tells you in private the Lapau regard it as a victory because the War Fleet is leaving their lands never to return and a lasting peace has been established - despite their fierce appearence Lovett insists, slightly unconvincingly, that the Lapau are basically a peaceful people. Either way no one seems to have won in this war which has cost many good lives, foremost among them Donald Trevers, Bermuda Mason and Esme Hale. + + +That evening over a dinner aboard the Monarch of the Sea Lovett tells how she was captured by the Lapau on the tropical island where Swift was shot and kept by the Lapau so they could learn about your culture. The next morning the War Fleet is resupplied and ready to return to The Kingdom of the Three Islands and Anne-Marie summons you and the other officers aboard her ship for one last Council. + + +"The voyage home is safe," she announces. "The waters south and west of here are mostly known to us and it will take approximately two weeks to return to Golden Sands. I propose that the Fleet splits up and returns to The Three Islands on separate to ensure we explore this area as much as possible, the first of us to bring his ship safely home will have the honor of bringing news of our success to our people. I recommend following a Southwest course for one week and then turning South but I have absolute trust in your skills." + + +After such a long voyage you have little enthusiasm for more risks but as you are leaving the cabin Naomi Swift hobbles after you awkwardly on crutches. "Cleo?" she calls out to you. "There is something I would like to talk to you about. Can you please sail South of here so no one else is around and I can come aboard the Adventurer and have a private talk with you?" Wondering what the talk could be about you give a non-committal answer. Returning aboard the Adventurer you watch the War Fleet start to break up as it leaves Matan and most of the ships turn Southwest except for the Explorer and Freer's Esme's Joy which turn South. +> Follow the rest of the Fleet Southwest +Sailing Southwest you keep most of the rest of the War Fleet in sight for a few days until most of them slip but of sight. The only one still in sight when you sight a low sandy island after a few days is Anne-Marie's Monarch of the Sea. She gives the island an extremely wide berth before continuing her voyage to the Southwest. Coming closer you see the island is completely bare except for several ominous-looking wooden crosses sticking up out of the sand. +> Spend a day landing to investigate these crosses +Dropping anchor you lead a party of sailors ashore to investigate the strange crosses. Almost immediately you learn you have made a dangerous mistake: you and your companions plunge through the sand into a thick gloop lying just beneath the surface! You and most of your companions struggle out but three of your men are sucked beneath the sands never to be seen again. Cursing bitterly to have lost men after the fighting has ended you return to the Adventurer and continue on Southwest. +> Corral Cabin +As the Adventurer glides across the blue expanse of the ocean a familiar shape comes into sight: a stack of corral jutting up from the sea with a small cabin perched atop it, the flag of The Three Islands dancing in the breeze above it. This is the first colony founded by your people beyond the Great Reef and you know for a fact that the cabin atop it is permanently manned by four of your countrymen who will almost certainly have a surplus of food. They also guard a small book inside the cabin which is signed by the Captain of every ship that sails by, if you wanted you could land here and pick up more supplies. +> Spend a day landing at the Corral Cabin +Anchoring off the Corral Cabin you go ashore and are met by the four settlers there, all anxious to hear about your adventures. You give them a brief account before going inside the Cabin itself while the settlers transport surplus food to your ship. You glance through the book on the table which was originally the idea of a Captain called John Dancer to record the names of all those who sailed into the great unknown. Flicking to the front page you find some familiar signatures of Captains who raced against you during The Great Race: Dancer himself, Anne-Marie back when she was still a Princess, Esme Hale (that signature causes a painful pang), Rosemary Cleaver and Jack Spratt. Apart from Anne-Marie all those Captains are dead now. Feeling somewhat saddened you return to your ship and continue south.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When the War Fleet reunites in the shadow of The Corral Mountain there is much news to share, most of it's bad. Cuthrew's expedition captured the island but were attacked by musket-wielding Lapau which suggests that somehow the Lapau have gotten ahold of some of your countrymen's weapons and learnt how to use them. Anne-Marie's expedition also succeeded in capturing the island after some fierce cave-based fighting. Casualties are high now: Naomi Swift has been shot through the leg and can't walk forcing Eva Freer to take command of the Explorer while Thomas Finch has been speared through the arm and is also in great pain. The Fleet is down to just over one hundred men, a third of it's starting strength, and only has enough food left for another week or so. + + +The sight of The Corral Mountain also causes your sprits to plunge. The Lapau seem to have finally dug in, fortifying themselves on the Mountain's steep slopes and hundreds of warriors are moving among the natural cover of the corral crags. The Mountain is so tall you cannot even elevate your ship's cannons to fire more than a quarter of the way up the slope and an assault by your sailors, even with covering musket fire, will surely trigger a rain of spears and arrows from above. Despite it all Anne-Marie remains confident. + + +"The Lapau have clearly gathered their last remaining strength here to fortify this place," she announces. "After we capture this place they have only one more island to shelter in, one more bolt hole. Once we take this Mountain an end to the war is in sight. This mountain must be taken in one assault, one swift charge to overrun their position. My Commanders, you have all fought with tremendous ability and courage so far in this voyage, now I ask who will lead this attack?" + + +She looks round at her officers, at Naomi Swift who has her arm in a sling and her leg in bandages and had to be hauled aboard the Monarch of the Sea in a canvas bag to attend this council, at Thomas Finch who also has his arm in a sling and at Esme Hale and Eva Freer who have also been wounded so far in this voyage. The sycophantic Richard Quarrel remains silent and finally it is the ailing and grey-bearded Tobias Cuthrew who speaks. + + +"My Crew is the strongest of those that remain," he declares. "If this mountain must be taken then I will lead the attack." + + +Anne-Marie looks at her deputy with great respect. "One half of our men must advance up the Mountain while the other half give them covering fire. Who else will charge these slopes?" + + +"If it shortens this war and saves our lives me and my Crew will advance though I'd rather do anything other than this," Hale says reluctantly. + + +"I will go too," Freer announces. "I don't expect this assault will succeed unless I am there." + + +You feel a sudden jolt inside you as you realize the tomboyish adventuress who you have grown so close to will deliberately be putting herself in harm's way. + + +"Is there no one else?" Anne-Marie asks glancing pointedly at Quarrel who looks at +> Remain below to provide covering fire +You elect to be among those who stay at the base of the mountain and provide covering fire. At dusk the assault begins with Tobias Cuthrew, Esme Hale and Eva Freer leading the first wave of attackers ashore while you, Anne-Marie, Thomas Finch and Richard Quarrel lead the second wave to provide covering fire. Your Crew spread out to form a line at the base of the mountain but your men are in almost as much danger as those charging up the slope as spears rain down by the hundreds, musket balls blast sailors's skulls to pieces and occasionally countrymen fall from the steep slopes above, breaking their bodies on the sharp corral. + + +It is a terrible sight and you see your countrymen charging up the slope halt and begin to waver and for a terrible moment you are certain that this attack will be thrown back. At that moment a figure you recognize as Esme Hale springs to her feet and stands tall amidst the chaos all around her. A spear hits her in the chest and she topples backwards. You give an animalistic cry of rage which is echoed by every one of your countrymen on the Mountain. Unstoppable as a rising tide your countrymen resume their surge up the mountainside. + + +You watch as your comrades hack their way upwards, slaughtering Lapau left, right and center until their line breaks and a party of sailors led by Tobias Cuthrew reach the summit. You beam and join the cheering but your grin fades from your face as you see Eva Freer being carried down the mountainside by two of her sailors, her right shoulder shattered by a musket ball. As you hurry towards her she waves you away and assures you she's fine. + + +Moments later she is followed by a somber procession of six sailors bearing Esme Hale's body between them. Your friend's head hangs back, her beautiful long hair skimming over the jagged corral and blood drips from the spear in her chest. You sit on a rock and watch as the procession passes Anne-Marie, Quarrel and Finch. Anne-Marie lowers her head, Quarrel looks away and Finch draws his sword, casts it into the sea and silently walks away. + + +The battle has been won but at this cost. Remarkably casualties have been extremely light and only a few of your men have been killed but one has died who can never be replaced.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Once again the fleet divides and you sail Southwest towards the tropical island. It soon comes into sight and as expected it appears deserted. One unusual thing is noticeable though: a burnt wreck of a ship lies sunk just offshore.Startled you recognize her as the Hope, a vessel commanded by a trader called Ann Lovett, one of your rival competitors during The Great Race to circumnavigate Magellan. She vanished during the voyage and from the looks of it she stumbled upon the Lapau who killed her and burnt her ship. + + +Cuthrew looks as weary as ever as you Hale, Swift and Freer join him in his cabin aboard the Sea Ghost. "Commanders Hale and Swift, you will take your crews ashore to ensure this island is unoccupied. Be wary of ambushes and if you can see if you can discover some trace of what befell Captain Lovett and her crew. Commander Freer and myself will remain offshore. Commander Trapa, you may accompany who you choose." +> Remain offshore +You remain aboard the Adventurer with Eva Freer watching as Swift and Hale lead their crews ashore. "Here it comes," Freer mutters and a moment later a volley of musket shots ring out but to your surprise they come not from the advancing sailors but from Lapau warriors hidden in the trees. You see a dozen figures break cover and race towards the sea and immediately turn the Adventurer towards them and shout for your crew to be ready with their muskets but this time the Lapau outwit you: using long tubes of bamboo lashed together end to end with grass they vanish under the waves, their breathing tubes almost impossible to find. + + +The island has been captured but at the cost of another dozen casualties including Naomi Swift who has been hit by a musket ball in the right thigh. She is taken back aboard the Explorer where she is operated on but she is so badly wounded she cannot walk and is unable to command her ship. Eva Freer temporarily assumes command and you feel strangely clenched up inside as she leaves the Adventurer, you have got used to having her around and feel very sad to see her leave. Cuthrew orders his four-ship half of the fleet to sail Southeast and you obediently sail towards the Corral Mountain, your supplies running dangerously low.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When the two halves of the War Fleet rejoin beneath the icy pinnacle of a great Snow Mountain there is bad news on both sides. Anne-Marie's half of the Fleet were attacked by Lapau warriors who braved the icy waters to swim out and ambush the ships, killing a dozen sailors throughout the Fleet before being repulsed. Hale's expedition successfully rediscovered the island she had visited previously only to find Lapau had already slaughtered the penguin population. Some of the frozen meat is still edible and is distributed throughout the Fleet but the War Fleet as a whole is now facing serious supply and manpower shortages. + + +"The Lapau appear to be conducting a scorched earth policy," Anne-Marie declares, "whittling down our numbers with ambushes while stripping the islands ahead of all edible foods and supplies. Only four hostile islands remain ahead so if we move as fast as we can we can still conquer and subdue these remaining islands and reach our nearest supply cache on the Corral Cabin Island before this Fleet is destroyed. But we will prevail!" + + +Anne-Marie pauses. "According to Commander Cuthrew's prisoners a triangle of three islands lie before us. To the Southwest is a small tropical island and to the Southeast is a low rocky island, both are just a few days sail away. About a week's voyage directly south is a Corral Mountain, this will be our rendezvous point. I am dividing the Fleet again: Commander Cuthrew will take Commanders Hale and Swift Southwest to attack the tropical island while I shall take Commanders Finch and Quarrel Southeast to attack the rocky island. We will rendezvous at the Corral Mountain directly south of here. Officers: be wary of ambushes. The Lapau are withdrawing south, gathering their strength as they go and they surely intend to weaken us further before destroying us in one final attack so be careful! Commander Trapa, you can accompany whichever force you prefer. +> Join Anne-Marie, Quarrel and Finch in attacking the rocky island +With a distinct feeling of deja vu you sail Southeast with Anne-Marie, Freer, Finch and Quarrel and soon catch sight of rocky island. It has a grim and desolate look about it and as you approach you see spear-armed warriors darting in and out of caves on the island, which may well be connected with each other. You don't like the look of the island at all and judging from the faces of your companions when you assemble in Anne-Marie's cabin they don't either. + + +"We need to take this island which means we'll have to clear out each cave systematically," she announces. "Commanders Quarrel and Finch, you will take your crews ashore and carefully scour the caves, killing all you find within, while Commander Freer and I will remain offshore with the ships to prevent escape." + + +"Why don't we just ignore this island and sail on?" Freer asks wearily. "That way more of our countrymen won't need to die." + + +Anne-Marie gives Freer a cold glare. "The Lapau would take that as a sign of weakness," she declares. "As would I. Commander Trapa, who will you accompany?" +> Join the landing force +You, Quarrel, Finch and nearly forty sailors land on the island and begin working your way through the caves. The fighting is bloody: frequently spears fly out of dark openings and return fire rarely hits a target. Your sailors take to sticking their muskets around cave entrances and firing blindly inside in an effort to kill anyone who might be hiding within. More than once a hidden warrior will spring forward and run a startled sailor through with a spear. Finally the last warrior on the island is killed but a dozen sailors lie dead including three of your men. + + +Among the many casualties is Thomas Finch, speared through the right arm by a hidden warrior and though in great pain he insists on retaining command of the Royal Escort. In recognition of his sacrifice Anne-Marie names the island in his honor, which seems to bring him scant consolation for his wounded limb, and with another island secured she orders the Fleet to sail Southwest towards the Corral Mountain and your rendezvous.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With a distinct feeling of deja vu you sail Southeast with Anne-Marie, Freer, Finch and Quarrel and soon catch sight of rocky island. It has a grim and desolate look about it and as you approach you see spear-armed warriors darting in and out of caves on the island, which may well be connected with each other. You don't like the look of the island at all and judging from the faces of your companions when you assemble in Anne-Marie's cabin they don't either. + + +"We need to take this island which means we'll have to clear out each cave systematically," she announces. "Commanders Quarrel and Finch, you will take your crews ashore and carefully scour the caves, killing all you find within, while Commander Freer and I will remain offshore with the ships to prevent escape." + + +"Why don't we just ignore this island and sail on?" Freer asks wearily. "That way more of our countrymen won't need to die." + + +Anne-Marie gives Freer a cold glare. "The Lapau would take that as a sign of weakness," she declares. "As would I. Commander Trapa, who will you accompany?" +> Remain offshore +Knowing better than to risk your remaining sailors' lives in what will surely be dangerous cave fighting you remain offshore and watch the ensuing action from the deck of the Monarch of the Sea with Anne-Marie and Eva Freer. Much of the fighting is hidden but musket shots ring out frequently and a steady stream of bodies are conveyed to the shore. At your side Freer is drumming her fingers impatiently on the rail and you're not surprised when she suddenly snaps at Anne-Marie. + + +"Is it worth it?" she demands. "Lives for land? Or the fact it isn't even our land to begin with?" + + +"You don't know what you're talking about," Anne-Marie says indifferently. "Yes, we might lose one or two sailors here but then we have this island for all of time and think how much greater our population will be if we have more farmland to feed them and more land to house them? The idea of ownership is the idea of weaklings, the strongest take and deserve what they get. So it has always been in Nature, so it is now." + + +Freer and you exchange glances, neither of you are quite sure how to respond to this. By dusk the fighting is over, the Lapau all killed and the island won at the cost of another dozen sailors but Thomas Finch is among the casualties, speared through the right arm and in great pain. In his honor Anne-Marie names the island after him and seemingly content with the day's fighting orders her four ships to turn Southwest and sail towards the rendezvous at the Corral Mountain.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The two halves of the Fleet reunite off Forrest Island, both having been successful in their efforts to capture Forrest Island and Quarrel Island. On both small bands of Lapau Warriors waited to ambush the invaders, apparently having been left there solely for that purpose. All the Lapau were killed along with about a dozen of your countrymen altogether and Anne-Marie's feeling at her latest Council of War is that the Lapau are gathering their remaining strength to continue opposing you. + + +"According to Commander Cuthrew's prisoners there still remain five Lapau islands ahead and the closest is a mountain of snow due south of here. Although we have been reduced to seven ships and less than half our manpower the Fleet is still in good condition and we will make for this snow mountain. However low supplies is starting to become an issue and we need to obtain more if we are to continue safely. Commander Hale believes she has a partial answer to our problem." + + +Hale clears her throat and speaks. "During my voyage around the world me and my Crew landed on a snow-covered island which was populated by many penguins which we hunted and used to replenish our food stores. If we sail southwest we should encounter this snowy island where we can hunt and bring back lots of food for the rest of the fleet. After that by turning east should be able to rendezvous with the War Fleet near this snowy mountain." + + +Anne-Marie nods. "Very well, any ships who wish to can accompany you." Commander Swift volunteers to accompany Hale but everyone else opts to remain with the War Fleet. + + + +> Sail South with the rest of the Fleet +The Merry Company and Explorer split off from the Fleet while the rest of you sail south. The temperature begins to drop noticeably and to try to keep sprits high Anne-Marie begins inviting her officers to her cabin for dinner every evening. It is not a very happy gathering: Cuthrew never attends and there is clear tension between Freer and Anne-Marie. Finch rarely speaks and Quarrel only does so in support of anything Anne-Marie has to say. One evening as you return aboard the Adventurer with Eva Freer she suddenly turns to you. + + +"Have you noticed Quarrel has started spending his nights aboard the Monarch of the Sea," she asks you nonchalantly. You admit that you hadn't and Freer sighs. "I hate that woman," she confesses to you. "She has all the qualities I hate and I will be very glad when this voyage is over." As you put your hand on your arm to help her onto the Adventurer's deck it suddenly brushes against her breasts and an unexpected thrill goes through you. Freer doesn't seem to notice anything as she bids you goodnight but for some reason that night you can't get her face out of your mind. +> Further South +The Snow Mountain soon comes into sight and with a telescope you can spot a huddle of huts perched precariously on a flat plateau at it's base. Anne-Marie takes on look and declares you will all attack tomorrow. Aware of earlier ambushes she issues orders for all ships to post night sentries to keep a close watch on the water that night and it is a good thing she does this. + + +You are woken from your sleep by the sound of a gunshot. Springing to your feet with memories of the earlier ambush that destroyed the Lucky and Gambler running through your head you rush out onto deck to find most of your Crew doing likewise and firing muskets down into the water as spears arc upwards. To your amazement there is no sign of canoes: the Lapau have actually swam through the near-freezing water from the mountain in an effort to surprise the War Fleet. Their tactics are evolving. + + +Fortunately the attack was detected in time and the Lapau are not numerous enough to truly press home their advantage and your battle-hardened Crew soon drive them back, killing many who try to climb aboard the ships but some of your Crew and a few aboard the other ships are slain by thrown spears. The next morning you see the surviving Lapau take to their canoes and paddle south allowing you to take possession of the Snow Mountain. A few days later the Merry Company and Explorer rejoin the Fleet with bad news.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Parting ways with the Sea Ghost, Royal Escort and Explorer you glide across the sparkling waves with your three companions until you come upon a tropical island, very similar to the previous with a village of huts by the shore. There are no canoes in sight but with a telescope you can see a few Lapau warriors moving near the shoreline. You, Freer, Hale and Quarrel join Anne-Marie in her cabin as she lays out her battle plan. + + +"We will waste no time with reconnaissance but will land immediately and kill every Lapau warrior we see," she declares. "This Fleet cannot spare the food needed to feed prisoners. Me and Commander Quarrel will land with our crews while Commanders Hale and Freer will remain about the ships to ensure no Lapau escape by sea. I intend to conquer this island swiftly and then rejoin the rest of our fleet. Commander Trapa, you may accompany the land or sea force as you prefer." +> Remain offshore with Hale and Freer +While the others go ashore you, Hale and Freer wait on the quarterdeck, the usually-cheerful Hale frowning as she absent-mindedly rubs her healed wound in her hip while Freer watches intently as Anne-Marie and Quarrel lead their men across the beach, through the deserted village and into the jungle. Moments later there is the crackling pops of musket shots and Freer sighs wearily. "Well the Orphan and Widows Club has some new members," she says unhappily. "What are we even doing here? If we'd left them alone the Lapau would have been no threat to us. This expedition is solely to steal their lands." + + +Hale says nothing but continues to frown and chews her bottom lip, drawing blood. Soon after the sound of gunfire Anne-Marie and Quarrel's crews return triumphantly having killed a dozen Lapau warriors still on the island and claimed it for your country, Anne-Marie chooses to rename it Quarrel Island after her loyal servant. Raising anchor you put the island behind you and sail due west to rejoin the rest of the Fleet.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Continuing south you soon sight a small island covered in thick forest. At least one hundred canoes leave the island traveling south carrying what is clearly the island's population: they easily outrace your much slower ships. With a telescope you can see a few Lapau still moving about onshore so clearly the island has not been completely abandoned. Anchoring offshore Anne-Marie holds another Council of War to discuss the situation. + + +"There is no question: we must take this island," Anne-Marie declares. "Our prisoners tell us the next island lies to the Southeast. To save time I will take Commanders Hale and Quarrel to capture that place while Commander Cuthrew will co-ordinate Commanders Finch and Swift to secure this island. We will then rendezvous off this island to continue our voyage south. Commander Trapa, you may join whichever half of the Fleet you think would most benefit from your assistance. +> Join Cuthrew, Finch and Swift in capturing this island +The Monarch of the Sea, Merry Company and Indefatigable vanish over the horizon leaving the rest of you anchored offshore. To your surprise Commander Cuthrew doesn't launch his attack straight away but instead waits to consider the situation so it is not until a few days later that you, Freer, Finch and Swift (the latter still with her arm in a sling) are invited to his cabin. Cuthrew looks like he has been ill and does not rise from his chair when you enter. In a tired voice he outlines the plan of attack. + + +"Commander Finch, I want you to lead your Crew and Commander Swift's crew ashore. Try to force any Lapau you encounter to surrender and only fire your muskets if you need to defend yourselves. Commander Swift, I know you have more reason than any of us to hate the Lapau but please do not let this cloud your judgement... Commanders Freer and myself will remain with the Fleet to block off any escape attempts they make. Commander Trapa, you can join the land assault or remain with the sea force as you prefer. +> Join the land assault with Finch and Swift +Dropping anchor you, Swift and Finch cautiously lead your men ashore, Swift looking grim and holding a sword in her good hand. Keeping in close order with muskets loaded and ready you and your men advance, occupy the abandoned village and move into the jungle. Before you can reach it a war cry fills the air and arrows whiz out of the trees, cutting down several men including three of yours. A volley of muskets boom out in response and with a cheer your sailors break ranks and charge into the jungle. The surviving Lapau are swiftly cut down. + + +After the short battle is over Finch orders the borders of both sides buried. It is grim work but the island is yours: your countrymen's individual graves stand as testament to that. The dozen dead Lapau warriors are buried under one mound and that evening you are surprised to see Swift standing alone by the mound crying that evening. Feeling she'd rather be left alone you return to the Adventurer with your surviving Crew and wait for the rest of the Fleet to rejoin you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Monarch of the Sea, Merry Company and Indefatigable vanish over the horizon leaving the rest of you anchored offshore. To your surprise Commander Cuthrew doesn't launch his attack straight away but instead waits to consider the situation so it is not until a few days later that you, Freer, Finch and Swift (the latter still with her arm in a sling) are invited to his cabin. Cuthrew looks like he has been ill and does not rise from his chair when you enter. In a tired voice he outlines the plan of attack. + + +"Commander Finch, I want you to lead your Crew and Commander Swift's crew ashore. Try to force any Lapau you encounter to surrender and only fire your muskets if you need to defend yourselves. Commander Swift, I know you have more reason than any of us to hate the Lapau but please do not let this cloud your judgement... Commanders Freer and myself will remain with the Fleet to block off any escape attempts they make. Commander Trapa, you can join the land assault or remain with the sea force as you prefer. +> Remain offshore with Cuthrew and Freer +You remain offshore while Finch and Swift land. Because Cuthrew remains in his cabin you only have Eva Freer for company as you stand on the quarterdeck of the Adventurer watching the distant sailors move up the beach to capture the unoccupied village. As they approach the jungle there is a volley of gunshots and Freer groans. "We should not be doing this," she tells you unhappily. "This is murder but because the Queen says it is ok our sailors are happy to do it." You glance at her thoughtfully. That evening Finch and Swift's crews return to their ships having killed a dozen Lapau warriors and taken possession of the island; now all you can do is wait for the rest of the Fleet to rejoin you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your offer to be a decoy is gladly accepted and the next day the Adventurer, Explorer and Maverick all sail south. By the second day the Hill has faded from sight and a great mass of brown with patches of blue fill the horizon: hundreds and hundreds of canoes are sailing towards you, so many canoes in fact that they almost hide the sea from sight and each one contains a spear or bow-armed Lapau Native. Immediately you change direction and begin sailing back north towards the rest of the Fleet. + + +Unfortunately the wind is against you and the canoes are faster. + + +By the third day the canoes have come within bow shot range and sailors in the stern fire muskets at them as the faster Lapau rain arrows down on you. The Barren Hill is back in sight and as you and your companions approach the other five ships of the War Fleet sail into sight. This doesn't seem to make the slightest impression on the Lapau, who if anything increase their efforts to catch up with your ships. For every Lapau your men shoot another ten overtake their fallen countryman to gain on you. Inevitably your enemies catch up to the Adventurer. + + +As well as bombarding your Crew with arrows Lapau warriors now stab their spears into your ship's hull below the waterline to try and sink it or threw their spears up at your crew. Three of your men have been killed and seawater is soon pouring into your ship from dozens of tiny holes stabbed below the waterline. The Explorer and Maverick are under similar attack and a chill goes through you as you see the Maverick list to starboard and start to sink. + + + + +Trying to help her cousin Naomi Swift steers the Explorer towards the Maverick, driving straight through a vast crowd of canoes but the Maverick is sinking fast now. Though they are making good speed the rest of the War Fleet is still out of musket range though the Monarch of the Sea is firing her bow cannons. + + +"We should help them," Freer tells you, pointing at the sinking ship. +> Sail directly towards the rest of the Fleet +Knowing the Maverick is doomed you hold your course and in the safety of the War Fleet adjust your course and advance with the line of ships towards the hundreds of Lapau canoes. Before your eyes the Maverick sinks beneath the waves and her crew are slaughtered in the water by the dozens of canoes which converge on the spot: in moments the seas are red with blood and bodies float on the waves all around. The Explorer reaches the safety of the Fleet before turning around, like you and every other sailor aboard the Fleet Naomi Swift wants revenge.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The War Fleet sails Southeast for three days and the island sighted by Cuthrew soon comes into sight: it is nothing more than a barren Hill with a few huts nestling on the top; like the Lapau settlement on Village Island it has been abandoned. Queen Anne-Marie summons all her officers to another Council of War, which irritates your companion Eva Freer. + + +"We might as well sleep in a corner of her cabin she gives us so many orders," she grumbles. + + +"I think it is likely that a Lapau fleet is waiting to fight us," Anne-Marie announces when you and the other officers have assembled. "I intend to lure them into a trap of my own. I will send one or two ships ahead to locate the Lapau islands. If they are attacked they will withdraw back to here, meanwhile our Fleet will wait hidden from sight behind this island. If our decoy ship is pursued we will attack them and use musket and cannon fire to kill the Lapau before they can board us or use their spears... who is willing to be the decoy?" + + +There is a moment of silence then Naomi Swift speaks up. + + +"Bermuda and myself can do it," she says and for some reason glances in your direction. "Our crews are at full strength and our ships are undamaged and ready for action. + + +"Good. Excellent, the two of you shall sail directly South from here and try to lead any Lapau after you," Anne-Marie announces. "Do any other Officers wish to join you?" + + +Eva nudges your side. "We should volunteer," she whispers. +> Remain with the rest of the Fleet +You remain with the rest of the War Fleet, hidden from sight behind the Barren Hill while the Explorer and Maverick sail south. Anne-Marie establishes an observation post manned by two sailors atop the Hill and after just a few days you spot them waving a red blanket, the pre-arranged signal that the decoys are returning. Along with the rest of the Fleet you weigh anchor and steer the Adventurer out from behind the Hill to see a chilling sight: the Explorer and Maverick are sailing straight towards you surrounded by hundreds upon hundreds of canoes, more than you have ever seen in your lifetime. + + +With your telescope you can see the Natives are viciously stabbing their spears through the hulls of the two ships in an effort to sink them, archers are firing arrows up at the ships' decks and warriors are trying to climb aboard. "Stay together" Queen Anne-Marie shouts to you across the space between your ship and the Monarch of the Sea as on your other side the Sea Ghost begins to edge ahead. "We must attack them together!" + + +"That's a stupid order," Eva Freer tells you angrily. "We should go and help them." The Monarch of the Sea fires her bow cannons but she is still out of range. A collective cry of dismay rises from the Fleet as you see the Maverick suddenly list to starboard and start to sink.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After the Council the other five ships of the War Fleet sail off in different directions leaving the Adventurer, Royal Escort and Indefatigable alone off a hostile shore. Between your three crews you have less than eighty men while there are many times that number of Lapau on the island. After a few days of repairing the Indefatigable and ponder the problem you invite the other Commanders aboard to discuss a plan to conquer the island. Finch, Quarrel and Freer all join you in your cabin. + + +"Our main advantage we have here is our muskets and cannon fire," you tell them. "If we land and keep in disciplined ranks then we can advance on the village using musket and cannon fire to keep the enemy at a distance. After taking the village we can clear the whole island + + +"That won't help us if they take to their canoes" Finch points out. "They could easily escape or even make an attempt to capture our ships." + + +"We can use the ships to surround the island at three points and cut off any escape. If one ship is attacked the other two can sail to help them." + + +"Will you be commanding the land or the sea force?" Quarrel asks. +> The sea force +It takes a few days for you to get your Crews ready to launch the assault but finally all the preparations have been made. Leaving Commander Finch to lead the attack on the island you sail the Adventurer round to the south side of the island and watch the other ships move into their positions to block any escape attempts. You watch with a telescope as Finch and Quarrel lead the land force across the island, expecting the sounds of combat to reach your ears at any time but no fighting breaks out. + + +After lots of waiting curiosity gets the better of you and you go ashore with Captain Freer. + + +"The island is deserted Commander," Finch reports to you. "The Lapau have already left." + + +"Excellent," Freer declares with a grin. "All this time we have been planning how to capture a deserted island." + + +Ignoring her you order your men to tear down the villager's huts and use them to build a small wooden fort and a jetty. There is nothing left to do now but sit tight and wait for the other ships of the War Fleet to return here.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Dawn illuminates the horrors caused during the night. + + +Bodies bob slowly up and down on the gentle waves in all directions as far as the eye can see while wreckage from the sunken Lucky and Gambler litter the ocean. The Monarch of the Sea, Indefatigable and Merry Company have all been seriously damaged and aboard all the ships of the fleet bodies of sailors and Lapau alike are being pitched into the ocean. Occasionally a musket shot rings out as a wounded Lapau is discovered and killed. At noon you and the other surviving officers are summoned to a Council of War aboard the Monarch of the Sea. + + +Commander Donald Trevers is dead, killed along with the rest of his Crew when the Lucky's gunpowder store exploded. Esme Hale is devastated: two thirds of her crew have been killed in the fighting and sitting there white-faced with a bloodied bandage wrapped around a hip wound she looks the very picture of misery. Eva Freer has been wounded too, stabbed in the shoulder as she swam to safety from the sinking Gambler, only a handful of Crew have survived. Anne-Marie and Quarrel have also suffered heavy losses amongst their crew: altogether nearly one hundred men or a third of the War Fleet's manpower have been killed. The fact that the Lapau suffered similar casualties is small consolation. + + +"None of us expected this attack," Anne-Marie says grimly when you have all gathered. "The Lapau have declared war on us and from now until they surrender we will show them no mercy. We need to make new plans though: this Fleet has been badly damaged and needs to refit and reinforce itself. There is not a danger that the Lapau will attack our colonies. These savages have proven more dangerous than we expected and another battle like last night's fight might destroy our Fleet." + + +Anne-Marie pauses for a moment. "I am dividing this Fleet up. Commander Hale and myself will sail back to Golden Sands to get more men and supplies and to have Commander Hale's wound treated. We will be gone about three weeks. In our absence I want you Commander Cuthrew to sail east pst this island and locate other Lapau-occupied islands near here. We must know where their settlements are so we can attack them. There is no one but you I would entrust this mission to." + + +Anne-Marie glances round at the rest of you. "Commander Finch, I want you and Commander Quarrel to co-ordinate an attack to destroy all Lapau resistance on this island and convert it into a base from which we can launch our assault on other Lapau Islands. Rely on musket and cannon fire, keep a safe distance and the Natives here will be destroyed. Commanders Swift and Mason, I want you to ensure our colonies are safe: sail with me and Commander Hale as far as Trever's Island and then when he turn north sail west to Sandy Island and then back to here where you will render Commanders Finch and Quarrel any assistance they might need." + + +Finally Anne-Marie turns to you and Freer. "Commander Freer, you will join Commander Trapa aboard the Adventurer, your remaining Crew will be assigned to Commander Hale's ship. You will assist Commander Trapa in any way he sees fit." + + +Freer starts to protest angrily but Anne-Marie cuts her short with an angry clap of her hands. + + +"I have given you an order Commander. It will be obeyed. Commander Trapa... the absence of myself and Commander Cuthrew you will command the Fleet until either myself ot Commander Cuthrew return. Commander Freer will assist you. You can either remain here and co-ordinate the assault on this island with Finch and Quarrel or you can accompany Swift and Mason on their voyage to ensure our Colonies are safe. I am giving you that discretion and I trust you will not let me down." + + +Feeling pride at your promotion you promise Anne-Marie she can rely on you. +> Sail Northwest and co-ordinate Swift and Mason's voyage to ensure the safety of the Colonies +After the Council five ships split off from the rest of the War Fleet and sail Northwest back to Burnt Island. It is a swift voyage and to your relief the small Colony ashore shows no sign of being attacked. When you drop anchor offshore you are surprised when Commanders Naomi Swift and Bermuda Mason come aboard the Adventurer. Both are fair and attractive but efficiently they come straight to the point. + + +"To save time Commander Trapa I think it might be better if we split up," Mason says. "If I sail west I can reach Sandy Island, turn back Southeast to the Colony on Jungle Island and return east to rejoin Commanders Quarrel and Finch. At the same time Naomi can sail north to Trevers Island, back south to here at Burnt Island and southeast back to Quarrel and Finch, by splitting up this way we check all of the Colonies twice as fast as if we stayed together." + + +It is an intelligent plan and you nod thoughtfully wondering which one to join. Eva Freer who is standing by shows no particular preference. + + +"I am not very familiar with the waters around Trevers Island," Swift tells you. "It might be helpful if you could accompany me Commander." +> Sail North with Swift to Trevers Island +You continue north while Commander Mason's Maverick turns off to the West. Every evening Commander Swift comes aboard the Adventurer to join you and Commander Freer for dinner: she turns out to be an interesting individual and good company. + + +"Given that it took some sixty days to sail around the world wouldn't it be better to spend six hundred or so visiting every part of it?" she asks you. "Based on the number of islands discovered already me and Bermuda calculated there must be about one hundred islands out there, all waiting to be found. Do you think one day someone will be able to visit them all?" + + +"I doubt it," Freer says with a smile. "I don't know anyone with that much free time." + + +Reaching Trevers Island you are pleased to see that the Colony here has also escaped attack. The Colonists are shocked to hear news of the Battle of the Fleets and quickly row out to help resupply your ships with supplies. While Anne-Marie and Hale sail North back towards your homeland you order the Adventurer and Explorer to turn about and sail back south to Burnt Island. +> Southward +Returning to Burnt Island you find the Colonists here are still safe and even row out Supplies to your vessels. That evening while anchored offshore the conversation turns to the likely course of the war against the Lapau and what will happen next. + + +"I think this expedition has now turned into one of self-defense," Swift says. "If we don't attack and defeat the Lapau what's to stop them becoming bold, coming out, massacring our settlers and plundering our Colonies?" + + +"I think the Lapau only attacked us because we invaded what they consider their lands to begin with," Freer says. "I think they thought we would give up and go home after they destroyed the Lucky and the Gambler but instead it has just made our Queen determined to destroy them... we will probably win this War but neither side will be better off because of it." + + +You stay silent and the next morning alter your course Southwest to rejoin your companions at Village Island. +> Rendezvous +The Adventurer, Explorer and Maverick return to Village Island within hours of each other to find the Royal Escort, Sea Ghost and Indefatigable already waiting for you. All the news is good news: the Colonies are safe, Quarrel and Finch bloodlessly captured the Island after the Lapau evacuated during the night and Cuthrew has discovered the Lapau's next closest inhabited island just off to the Southeast. The only worry is the low Supply situation in the Fleet and this is soon remedied when Anne-Marie and Hale rejoin the Fleet.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After the Council five ships split off from the rest of the War Fleet and sail Northwest back to Burnt Island. It is a swift voyage and to your relief the small Colony ashore shows no sign of being attacked. When you drop anchor offshore you are surprised when Commanders Naomi Swift and Bermuda Mason come aboard the Adventurer. Both are fair and attractive but efficiently they come straight to the point. + + +"To save time Commander Trapa I think it might be better if we split up," Mason says. "If I sail west I can reach Sandy Island, turn back Southeast to the Colony on Jungle Island and return east to rejoin Commanders Quarrel and Finch. At the same time Naomi can sail north to Trevers Island, back south to here at Burnt Island and southeast back to Quarrel and Finch, by splitting up this way we check all of the Colonies twice as fast as if we stayed together." + + +It is an intelligent plan and you nod thoughtfully wondering which one to join. Eva Freer who is standing by shows no particular preference. + + +"I am not very familiar with the waters around Trevers Island," Swift tells you. "It might be helpful if you could accompany me Commander." +> Sail West with Mason to Sandy Island +You sail West with Commander Mason to Sandy Island, a featureless outcrop of sand where three Colonists have built tents simply to establish it as part of your country's lands. Bored beyond belief with nothing to do except fish they are overjoyed to see you and quickly row out in a small boat to help resupply your vessels. At their insistence you host a dinner on board the Adventurer, Mason says very little but Eva Freer unwinds enough to talk about her childhood of growing up on the streets of Golden Sands. Pleased to find the Colony is safe you turn Southeast towards Jungle Island. +> Southeast +Reaching Jungle Island, a thickly-covered tropical paradise you are pleased to find the Colonists here, the most exposed of all your Colonies, have also escaped attack, though they have lost men to a deadly tiger that lives in the jungle somewhere in the interior. They are kind enough to bring Supplies out to your ships and feeling reinforced you turn your two vessels Southeast to rejoin your companions at Village Island, comforted by the knowledge that all your country's Colonies are safe.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are woken in the middle of the night by a scene from the depths of your nightmares. + + +Hundreds of screams and shouts fill the air all at once followed by the muffled bangs of musket shots and springing to your feet you race up to deck to find utter pandemonium has engulfed the War Fleet. Hundreds of little one-man canoes surround the Fleet's ten ships like ants around sandwiches and brightly-painted figures are rapidly climbing up onto the decks, jabbing their spears through the sides of the ships or firing arrows up at them. Aboard all the ships men are grappling as spears thrust, swords swing, muskets fire and men are cut down screaming and gurgling to fall to the decks or into the sea. + + +The Adventurer was not anchored close to the Island and consequently seems to have received little attention but still a dozen Lapau Natives have hauled themselves on deck and are grappling with your Crew, three of your men already lie motionless on the deck. Drawing your sword you order your men to fire their muskets and as guns bang the Lapau Warriors are killed or dive from the ship to the safety of the sea. With the Adventurer secure at least you look round and find things are worse for most of the other ships in the Fleet. + + +A lot worse. + + +Commander Trever's ship Lucky is on fire: blazing fiercely and sinking as the flickering flames light up the silhouettes of men grappling and fighting on her decks. Commander Freer's ship Gambler is also sinking fast: pierced by dozens of spears it's sailors are diving from it's decks into the sea all around. Commander Hale's Merry Company is being swarmed by so many Lapau it seems impossible the ship does not sink under it's wait. A row of several cannons aboard the Monarch of the Sea boom into life but it too is heavily overrun and trying to get to her aid the Indefatigable has also come under heavy attack and a small fire has broken out amidships. + + +Not all is chaos however: the Sea Ghost is under sail and gliding smoothly through the chaos delivering organized volleys of musket fire at the thickest groups of Lapau and the Royal Escort, though still at anchor is also delivering volleys of musket and cannon fire. Anchored nearby, like you the Explorer and Maverick have also only been lightly attacked and are trying to clear their decks for action. As your sailors manage to hoist the anchor the wind fills your sails and the Adventurer glides forward. + + +You can scarcely believe it: the whole War Fleet has fallen victim to a night attack from hundreds, perhaps even thousands, of deadly spear and bow-armed Lapau Warriors in canoes! Aboard the Adventurer you know your must go to the aid of one of your fellow Commanders: the Monarch of the Sea, Indefatigable and Merry Company are all in need of immediate help and the Lucky and Gambler are sinking already. +> Sail towards Commander Hale's embattled ship Merry Company +Your loyalty to your friend Esme prompts you to steer the Adventurer towards the Merry Company, whose decks are swarming with grappling figures. As you pull your ship alongside your Crew spring across the gap cheering with swords in their hands and quickly help turn the tide of battle. Lashing the wheel into place you follow your crew onto the Merry Company's blood-stained decks which are literally carpeted with bodies. As your men help drive the Lapau from the ship Hale staggers towards you, a blood-covered sword in her hand and the other clasped to her left side which is wet with blood. She has tears in her eyes. + + +"They've killed my boys!" she cries out to you. "Look at them! They've killed my boys!" + + +You glance around: the decks of the ship are indeed so thickly covered with bodies you could walk from prow to stern without once setting foot on the deck. Before you can say a word a spectacular explosion deafens you and knocks both you and Hale to the deck. The Lucky has just blown up, vanishing from sight in an instant as pieces of wood and bodies fly through the air. A moment later the Gambler sinks too. Amidst cheers and war cries the Lapau abandon their attack, take to their canoes and return to their island to celebrate their victory.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are woken in the middle of the night by a scene from the depths of your nightmares. + + +Hundreds of screams and shouts fill the air all at once followed by the muffled bangs of musket shots and springing to your feet you race up to deck to find utter pandemonium has engulfed the War Fleet. Hundreds of little one-man canoes surround the Fleet's ten ships like ants around sandwiches and brightly-painted figures are rapidly climbing up onto the decks, jabbing their spears through the sides of the ships or firing arrows up at them. Aboard all the ships men are grappling as spears thrust, swords swing, muskets fire and men are cut down screaming and gurgling to fall to the decks or into the sea. + + +The Adventurer was not anchored close to the Island and consequently seems to have received little attention but still a dozen Lapau Natives have hauled themselves on deck and are grappling with your Crew, three of your men already lie motionless on the deck. Drawing your sword you order your men to fire their muskets and as guns bang the Lapau Warriors are killed or dive from the ship to the safety of the sea. With the Adventurer secure at least you look round and find things are worse for most of the other ships in the Fleet. + + +A lot worse. + + +Commander Trever's ship Lucky is on fire: blazing fiercely and sinking as the flickering flames light up the silhouettes of men grappling and fighting on her decks. Commander Freer's ship Gambler is also sinking fast: pierced by dozens of spears it's sailors are diving from it's decks into the sea all around. Commander Hale's Merry Company is being swarmed by so many Lapau it seems impossible the ship does not sink under it's wait. A row of several cannons aboard the Monarch of the Sea boom into life but it too is heavily overrun and trying to get to her aid the Indefatigable has also come under heavy attack and a small fire has broken out amidships. + + +Not all is chaos however: the Sea Ghost is under sail and gliding smoothly through the chaos delivering organized volleys of musket fire at the thickest groups of Lapau and the Royal Escort, though still at anchor is also delivering volleys of musket and cannon fire. Anchored nearby, like you the Explorer and Maverick have also only been lightly attacked and are trying to clear their decks for action. As your sailors manage to hoist the anchor the wind fills your sails and the Adventurer glides forward. + + +You can scarcely believe it: the whole War Fleet has fallen victim to a night attack from hundreds, perhaps even thousands, of deadly spear and bow-armed Lapau Warriors in canoes! Aboard the Adventurer you know your must go to the aid of one of your fellow Commanders: the Monarch of the Sea, Indefatigable and Merry Company are all in need of immediate help and the Lucky and Gambler are sinking already. +> Sail towards Commander Quarrel's embattled ship Indefatigable +Sailing towards the Indefatigable you turn the Adventurer to port so your crew can fire your cannons at the Lapau crowded on the assailed ship's deck. Drawing alongside your men fire muskets at the crowd of Lapau warriors allowing Quarrel's men to counter-attack and drive them from the ship. + + +"Commander Trapa, turn your ship around," Quarrel shouts up at you angrily from the quarterdeck. "What are you doing? Your first duty should be to protect the Queen!" + + +Annoyed at this lack of gratitude you shout back a reply which Quarrel fortunately does not hear and leaving his men to extinguish the fire on board you steer your ship towards the Monarch of the Sea. By the time you draw alongside the battle is already over: aided by the Sea Ghost Anne-Marie's crew have driven their attackers from the deck. As you stare at the blood-soaked decks a deafening explosion behind you makes you turn around: the Lucky has just blown up and disintegrated into a cloud of flying debris. The Gambler sinks too and amidst a tumult of war cries and cheers the Lapau return to their canoes and paddle back to their island to celebrate their victory.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are woken in the middle of the night by a scene from the depths of your nightmares. + + +Hundreds of screams and shouts fill the air all at once followed by the muffled bangs of musket shots and springing to your feet you race up to deck to find utter pandemonium has engulfed the War Fleet. Hundreds of little one-man canoes surround the Fleet's ten ships like ants around sandwiches and brightly-painted figures are rapidly climbing up onto the decks, jabbing their spears through the sides of the ships or firing arrows up at them. Aboard all the ships men are grappling as spears thrust, swords swing, muskets fire and men are cut down screaming and gurgling to fall to the decks or into the sea. + + +The Adventurer was not anchored close to the Island and consequently seems to have received little attention but still a dozen Lapau Natives have hauled themselves on deck and are grappling with your Crew, three of your men already lie motionless on the deck. Drawing your sword you order your men to fire their muskets and as guns bang the Lapau Warriors are killed or dive from the ship to the safety of the sea. With the Adventurer secure at least you look round and find things are worse for most of the other ships in the Fleet. + + +A lot worse. + + +Commander Trever's ship Lucky is on fire: blazing fiercely and sinking as the flickering flames light up the silhouettes of men grappling and fighting on her decks. Commander Freer's ship Gambler is also sinking fast: pierced by dozens of spears it's sailors are diving from it's decks into the sea all around. Commander Hale's Merry Company is being swarmed by so many Lapau it seems impossible the ship does not sink under it's wait. A row of several cannons aboard the Monarch of the Sea boom into life but it too is heavily overrun and trying to get to her aid the Indefatigable has also come under heavy attack and a small fire has broken out amidships. + + +Not all is chaos however: the Sea Ghost is under sail and gliding smoothly through the chaos delivering organized volleys of musket fire at the thickest groups of Lapau and the Royal Escort, though still at anchor is also delivering volleys of musket and cannon fire. Anchored nearby, like you the Explorer and Maverick have also only been lightly attacked and are trying to clear their decks for action. As your sailors manage to hoist the anchor the wind fills your sails and the Adventurer glides forward. + + +You can scarcely believe it: the whole War Fleet has fallen victim to a night attack from hundreds, perhaps even thousands, of deadly spear and bow-armed Lapau Warriors in canoes! Aboard the Adventurer you know your must go to the aid of one of your fellow Commanders: the Monarch of the Sea, Indefatigable and Merry Company are all in need of immediate help and the Lucky and Gambler are sinking already. +> Sail towards Commander Trever's sinking ship Lucky +Spinning your ship's wheel you guide the Adventurer towards the Lucky but before you can reach it she dramatically explodes in a burst of light and sound. Your ship is covered in wooden debris and bits of bodies, a severed and thumps into your face and falls to the deck in front of you. A short way off the Gambler sinks beneath the waves as well. You stare in silent horror as the cheers and whoops of the Lapau fill the night air as returning to their canoes they paddle back to their island to celebrate their victory.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are woken in the middle of the night by a scene from the depths of your nightmares. + + +Hundreds of screams and shouts fill the air all at once followed by the muffled bangs of musket shots and springing to your feet you race up to deck to find utter pandemonium has engulfed the War Fleet. Hundreds of little one-man canoes surround the Fleet's ten ships like ants around sandwiches and brightly-painted figures are rapidly climbing up onto the decks, jabbing their spears through the sides of the ships or firing arrows up at them. Aboard all the ships men are grappling as spears thrust, swords swing, muskets fire and men are cut down screaming and gurgling to fall to the decks or into the sea. + + +The Adventurer was not anchored close to the Island and consequently seems to have received little attention but still a dozen Lapau Natives have hauled themselves on deck and are grappling with your Crew, three of your men already lie motionless on the deck. Drawing your sword you order your men to fire their muskets and as guns bang the Lapau Warriors are killed or dive from the ship to the safety of the sea. With the Adventurer secure at least you look round and find things are worse for most of the other ships in the Fleet. + + +A lot worse. + + +Commander Trever's ship Lucky is on fire: blazing fiercely and sinking as the flickering flames light up the silhouettes of men grappling and fighting on her decks. Commander Freer's ship Gambler is also sinking fast: pierced by dozens of spears it's sailors are diving from it's decks into the sea all around. Commander Hale's Merry Company is being swarmed by so many Lapau it seems impossible the ship does not sink under it's wait. A row of several cannons aboard the Monarch of the Sea boom into life but it too is heavily overrun and trying to get to her aid the Indefatigable has also come under heavy attack and a small fire has broken out amidships. + + +Not all is chaos however: the Sea Ghost is under sail and gliding smoothly through the chaos delivering organized volleys of musket fire at the thickest groups of Lapau and the Royal Escort, though still at anchor is also delivering volleys of musket and cannon fire. Anchored nearby, like you the Explorer and Maverick have also only been lightly attacked and are trying to clear their decks for action. As your sailors manage to hoist the anchor the wind fills your sails and the Adventurer glides forward. + + +You can scarcely believe it: the whole War Fleet has fallen victim to a night attack from hundreds, perhaps even thousands, of deadly spear and bow-armed Lapau Warriors in canoes! Aboard the Adventurer you know your must go to the aid of one of your fellow Commanders: the Monarch of the Sea, Indefatigable and Merry Company are all in need of immediate help and the Lucky and Gambler are sinking already. +> Sail towards Commander Freer's sinking ship Gambler +Sailing towards the Gambler you can see dozens of sailors diving from the deck of the sinking ship only to be speared in the water by the dozens of Lapau warriors in canoes all around. Unwilling to risk the water a handful remain on deck tugging frantically at the ship's lifeboat. Something akin to a sun rising bursts out to your left: in a spectacular explosion the Lucky bursts into a million pieces. A moment later the Gambler sinks beneath the ocean's waves as well. + + +With your men giving covering fire from the decks with their muskets you order the Adventurer's longboat lowered and are able to rescue a few survivors from the Gambler. Among those you pull from the water is the Gambler's Captain Eva Freer, bleeding heavily from a serious shoulder wound but still full of passion. "Those damned curs have sunk my ship and they'll be hell to pay!" she snarls at you when she arrives aboard the deck of the Adventurer. You nod silently as you stare around at the ruins of the Fleet.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For three days the War Fleet follows a Southeast course until dusk on the third day when they drop anchor offshore.The small tropical island has a large village of wooden huts on a beach and in the dusk you watch the tall and strong-looking semi-clothed Natives gathering on the shoreline to silently inspect you. The next morning a well-crewed longboat containing Queen Anne-Marie sets out from the Monarch of the Sea, as you watch four more boats containing Commanders Quarrel, Swift, Mason and Freer also set off for the shore. +> Remain at sea with the War Fleet +While the other Officers go ashore you, Cuthrew, Hale, Trevers and Finch gather on the quaterdeck of the Sea Ghost to co-ordinate the fleet's actions from there. Cuthrew looks tired, Finch is silent, Trevers is nervous and even Hale's usual cheerfulness seems to have waned slightly. + + +"Do you think the Lapau will negotiate?" she asks you nervously. + + +"I don't know," you reply thoughtfully, squinting at the distant figures on the beach. + + +"They will not," Finch says confidently and you glance at him in surprise. "All the reports from our Colonists suggest theirs is a proud and strong culture that reacts violently against intrusion into lands they consider their own. The cultural differences between us and them are so vast it would take a great deal of time to even begin to bridge them. I don't think the Queen can wait that long and the sight of this great Fleet might trigger them into action." + + +"I hope there is no fighting," Trevers says unhappily. "I don't think I'd do very well in a War." + + +That evening Queen Anne-Marie and the other Commanders return after a fruitless day spent trying to understand and interact with the Lapau. No orders are issued to the Fleet except to be on alert and returning to your cabin aboard the Adventurer you slip into an uneasy sleep...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have just run your sword through the last of the 6 bandits when you hear a cry for help. You jog over to a large chest. Upon opening it, you find a beautiful girl locked in with a rather large amount of gold. + + +"You must be Amelia" you say, as you boldly lift her from the chest. + + +"I am!" she replies breathlessly, "You must have gotten my hidden message! Thank you for rescuing me. The way you challenged all the bandits to a sword fight at the same time was so very heroic!" You lean closer.... + + +You wake up and take in your surroundings, holding a tiny hope that one of your dreams had been reality and not just fantasy. But all you see is your one room hut, mostly empty and worn down. + + +"Last night it was a dream about escaping from an amazing tower of riddles ruled by an evil magician and today it's a hero rescuing princesses... I must be losing it." You get out of bed, get dressed and take stock. One bed, a desk with your open pack and a chair by the cooking fire are all the furniture in the room. You slowly re-fill your pack with your cloths and hunting gear. The fire went out during the night leaving the room dank and chilled so, realizing you had no reason left to hang around, you stuff your sleeping sheet into you pack, sling it over your shoulders and head to the door. + + +Looking out you see the dirt streets and hastily built shacks of the work camp you've been living in the past few months. + + +Do you: +> Head off to talk to the foreman +You quickly walk through the camp towards the mine, looking in the empty shacks as you pass. Now that the mine is running and producing silver, all the temporary staff brought in to dig out the initial tunnels have been laid off. You were one of the last to go as you were one of the most experienced but tomorrow the shacks would all be torn down and only the huddle of nicer buildings would remain to house the permanent miners and those needed to support them. + + +You arrive at the entrance to the mine and see the Foreman sending the last of his men inside. He calls you over. + + +"Well, you've done a good job for us but I can't keep you on our books any longer. The mine's bringing up silver and they've sent down some official to assess our operation. Sadly, that means he will be checking our payroll so there wont be any room for us to hire out side jobs for a few months." + + +You knew the job was only temporary so you tell him that it's alright and thank him for keeping you on after most others had been laid off. + + +He hands you a small purse with your pay. + + +You start to head off when he calls after you. + + + "I heard a rumor that another mine might be opening a few days walk north of here... Can't say if its true or not but there may be a few months worth of work up there if it is." + + +You wave your thanks and head out of the camp towards the road. It takes just over an hour to reach it so as you walk you think back on your recent dreams. In the tower of riddles you hadn't been much of a traditional sword swinging hero but you had shown great wits and intelligence to escape. In this morning's dream you had been a bold adventurer able to take on 6 ruthless bandits at the same time without breaking a sweat. Comparing it to your own life so far, you think its no wonder you're having escapist dreams. + + +Your name is "Glor". Your mother once told you that traditionally, babies are named after the first thing a father says when a child is born. (This often causes no end of contrived first exclamations from new fathers) Your own father, upon hearing it was a boy, had strode into the room and started saying "Glory be!" (Obviously thinking Glory was a good manly name) Unfortunately, when he saw what a birthing room was like a few seconds after the deed he only managed, "Glorrr..." Most couples iron over the small details like this and name the child what the parent 'meant' to say, but your mother had a wicked sense of humor so Glor stuck fast. + + +You grew up in a small section of the city called the "Old Quarter" near the docks and factories. Your family could only be described as the working poor, the people who do all the dirty and less desirable jobs that keep a city running. Your father worked hard and brought in enough money to keep you all fed, but 4 years after you were born, your mother passed away while giving birth to a stillborn child. Your father still worked but as a broken man and you were mostly brought up by friends and their families around the area. Once you hit your teens, you took any small jobs you could get. Cleaning, hauling, and off-loading ships - no job was too humble or dirty. You spent the rest of your time hanging round the docks and warehouses chatting to sailors about other cities and lands. + + +Not that yours is a sob story. Many had it much worse than you in those days. Lack of jobs sent more and more people into the Old Quarter and many families didn't survive their first years there. You had good friends and old family ties that took care of you when you needed, so it wasn't all bad. + + +Once you were old enough you joined a mining expedition and set off into the hills to make your fortune. Well, to dig holes while other people made their fortunes even bigger, but, it was a wage and a start. You had stayed up North since then, taking mine and farm jobs wherever you could. You claimed you were saving your coin and preparing to head back to the city but the years passed and you stayed, doing manual labor in mines. This latest job had brought you the closest you'd been to the city in years, even if it was still days of hard travel away. + + +Your thoughts are interrupted as you reach the road. You take a good look around but see no-one in either direction. To the North, the road roughly follows the line of the hills; to the south, it disappears onto the plains, where it turns slowly east towards the city. + + +You feel an urge to turn south and see the city again. There's certainly been more mining expeditions sent out recently, so maybe things have improved there. The money you just got paid for the months at the mine would keep you going for at least half a year if you're careful. + + +On the other hand, if there is a new mine starting North, a few more well paid months away from the city won't change your situation for the worse. You think to yourself one more mine job without a break between would get enough for a years living when you got back. + + +Should you make you way back South to the city or try your luck in the mine to the North? +> You head North. +You turn Northward up the road thinking that the rumors of a new mine are too good an opportunity to pass up, and hey, even if it's false you don't mind spending an extra week or two on the road. + + +You pull out some of your dried meat and start eating as you walk, thinking you should probably set some traps and snares when you make camp that night to stock up some fresh meat. You spend an uneventful day walking North and see no other travellers. An hour or so before dusk you start looking for a place to camp. You can camp on the roadside, head into the trees to the east for cover while you sleep or walk an hour or so to the foothills west and hope for a spring or cave. +> It would be good to find a cave to sleep in, head West +You walk for an hour west and reach the larger hill. After some searching you find a game trail that leads to a cave and just have time to build a small fire before night sets in. You didn't find a stream but you're sure you'll come across one tomorrow. + + +You quickly lay a few snares just out of the reach of the firelight then retreat into the cave for the night. + + + +> Morning on the North road +You thought you had heard some noises during the night but there are no signs of other people in the cave. Sadly, your snares are empty too so it'll be another day of dried meat unless you find a traveller on the road today. + + +You cover the embers of the fire and walk back to the road. Once you reach it, you see a lot of fresh footprints and realize you must have missed a group that passed during the night. The tracks lead North so you follow them for a short distance on the road before coming across their abandoned camp on the edge of the woods. + + +A quick look tells you they packed up and started their march North again several hours ago. + + + +> Follow them and try and catch up +You think to yourself that with the rumors of a new mine opening that it might be best to catch this group up and see if they know anything about it. You set off at a fast pace to catch them up. + + +By mid morning you see a dust cloud ahead of you on the road so you keep your fast pace up till you get close enough to make out the group. + + +Its getting close to midday before you get close enough to realize who it is your chasing. Its a group of miners! You quickly conclude that they must be the hired hands sent to get the mine up and running so you approach them to see if you can find out more. + + +As you catch up to the rear of the pack some of them hail you. You respond in kind then fall in beside the rear couple and start chatting. You learn that there are about 50 of them in the group including all the skilled workers the mine needs but that they would be happy to have you along as an unskilled hand. Its not going to be as much money but they tell you that they have sent their mine guards off ahead to make the area ahead safe so there isn't any way to get ahead and get a better job. + + + +> Ask the Foreman to let you sign up as unskilled work and join their group. +You troop into the camp with your new companions and get your first look at your new job site for the next few months. Its a well cleared site around a small mine entrance that couldn't extend more than a few feet into the hill. The guards sent ahead had obviously arrived much earlier than you as the site overseer and his men had readied sheds for your company to sleep in and already had his handful of miners digging and putting up rough timber supports in the mouth of the mine. + + +You're shown your quarters, a small shed set out much like your last one, bed, desk and fire. You settle in and the next day begin your new job. Since you couldn't get a better position your one of the diggers and carters as the foreman put it. You dig to deepen the mine until your standing in a large pile of dirt, then you or someone else, shovel it into a cart and push it outside to be dumped. +> After a couple of weeks +After a few weeks of hard labor your not sure whether your regret your choice or not but your certainly keeping very strong and fit from wielding a pick and shovel all day. The mine has been progressing well, the main shaft has been tunneled deep into the hills bedrock and side tunnels are being opened to chase the smaller silver seams your crew uncover in the rock. + + +You're just taking you latest load of rock out in a cart when the foreman approaches you. "Theres a small job available for you if you want to earn some higher pay than you are at the moment, dangerous though." + + +"What's the job?" + + +"One of the main side tunnels has found a rich looking vein we want to open, but the rock around it is cracked and weak. The weak stone should only extend a few feet but we need some volunteers to risk mining through it. The pay is more than double what your getting now." +> Take the risk and the extra money +You take a proper look at the new tunnel you're to help open up. The stone is very weak and cracked. You and the two other workers start mining, carefully removing the weak stone along with the silver ore and painstakingly placing buttresses and supports as often as possible. + + +A few days pass and your team is making some good headway. One thing you've decided you like about weak stone is that is easy to mine. Half of it just crumbles out of the wall with a single pick blow, That doesn't reassure you about the rest above your head though. + + +After a week you're taking a rest at the end of your tunnel. You've made several metres into the stone and it looks like you've finally reached the end of the weak stone. Your buttresses held and you've earned some easy coin. + + +The Overseer told you after you were done with the weak stone that he might be able to get you moved to some logging duty for a week or two if you wanted, same pay but easier work as an additional reward. Starting today they would be felling the trees that grew near the mine to build more supports for the ever growing maze of tunnels. +> Leave the weak tunnel +You start to pick up your gear to exit your tunnel when you feel a slight shaking and see a few small pebbles fall from the tunnel roof. + + +You feel as if time had slowed around you as you think of the layout of the mine site. Your tunnel had branched far off the main one under the hillside. You can see a small root in the rock wall beside you. Your mind tells you that your seam must have run under the trees behind and to the left of the hill and that they were the obvious choice for the first logging, but all your body is telling you to do is run. + + +The tunnel is small so you start to run hunched over but as you take your third step you feel a tremor moving up through the tunnel floor. + + +"They felled the tree right over my tunnel!" you think as a last thump resounds through the walls and the roof of your tunnel crumbles. Tons of rock pour onto you. + + +You don't have time to think anything else in your rock tomb.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After a few weeks of hard labor your not sure whether your regret your choice or not but your certainly keeping very strong and fit from wielding a pick and shovel all day. The mine has been progressing well, the main shaft has been tunneled deep into the hills bedrock and side tunnels are being opened to chase the smaller silver seams your crew uncover in the rock. + + +You're just taking you latest load of rock out in a cart when the foreman approaches you. "Theres a small job available for you if you want to earn some higher pay than you are at the moment, dangerous though." + + +"What's the job?" + + +"One of the main side tunnels has found a rich looking vein we want to open, but the rock around it is cracked and weak. The weak stone should only extend a few feet but we need some volunteers to risk mining through it. The pay is more than double what your getting now." +> Its not worth it, keep mining the main tunnel +You don't want to risk a tunnel collapse so you turn down the foreman's offer. + + +You work solidly for the next few weeks. You occasionally see the Officials from the miners guild and some officers from the army visit and watch them being greeted by the overseer and his daughter in their newly built house. From speaking to the other miners you find out that the overseer is also the owner of the new mine and a few others in the area, he moved from another country then made his way up from miner, to foreman, then staked his own claim after a few years. Now he travels to all his new mines and oversees their construction with his daughter doing his books and his cooking for him. You never hear about his wife. + + +You think its odd that he gets so many visits, especially from the army but you put them out of your mind as soon as the officials leave- the guild is nothing to do with the hired hands after all, only the owners. + + + +> Months of mining +You've been at the mine nearly three months now, the tunnels are going deep and several promising seams have been opened up, even the weak stoned tunnel is producing well now after a minor cave-in caused by logging right above it. + + +You know its nearly time for the hired hands to be laid off so you approached the foreman to see what the prospects are. He told you that most of the manual labor would be laid off within the week and sadly that included you, you'd been a good worker but with all the better positions filled he had no choice. +> Finish the week and head South +You get your things in order and even if you didn't make as much as you'd hoped for, you still added a few good weeks living expenses to your purse. + + +There have been rumors lately of bandit activity on the road south so you talk to the other workers there to see what their plans are. One group is planning to leave on the day they are laid off and make good time down to the city because they want to get back to family there. The other south bound group plans to stay until all the small jobs are finished around the camp for a few extra coins then have a much more leisurely trip with stops off at way houses and farms along the way. The second group will turn up to the city nearly two full weeks after the first but your in no rush yourself. +> Rush back to the city with the first group, you may as well get back there. +You all gathered on the Friday morning by the foreman. + + +"As you men all know, this mine is now officially up and running so the owner has employed one of the mining guilds to keep her running and turn a profit for him, they bring their own unskilled work as well as the their own guards so you'll all be paid up until today then free to go. You can collect you pay off me this evening or tomorrow morning." as he turns to leave he pauses and says "Hmm for about 10 of you there could be some small coin in clearing the old shacks and tidying the place up, a few days light work for light pay." then he heads off to oversee the cutting of some wooden struts. + + +You and your group finish your days work as quickly as possible then a few hours before dark you file up to the foreman and collect your pay, the owner is a generous man and since the build went well he provides you all with some dried meats and provisions for the trip out. + + +You all head off South into the evening leaving the camp far behind you before stopping. Your days are pretty uneventful with a large group of men around you no bandits make an appearance and you all make very good time to the city, marching most of the days and taking few breaks along the way. +> Rushed arrival +Your group makes it back to the city in what must be only a little short of record time and say your farewells at the gates, most of them running off to see wives or families. You take stock of the area then get yourself through the now alien feeling streets to your old area of the city and are relived to find it almost completely unchanged. You go to an old way house you knew in the hopes that the same owner was still running the place. + + +As you walk in the door a man behind a bar looks up and stares right at you for a full minute before saying "Well this is some triumphant return, look at the state of.." + + +Your coin purse drops on the table + + +"your huge full coin purse" he slowly finishes. + + +You grin and tell him you'll take his best room for the night and some hot food followed by whatever his best bottle of alcohol is then head upstairs to wash the road off your face. Your Old friend meets you as you come back down and tosses you a key as he lays a large bowl of thick stew on the table alongside a large bottle of mead with two glasses. + + +"two?" you point out. + + +"Well its not everyday an old friend comes back into town after years away, so since your now paying for an entire bottle of finest mead reserve I thought I'd close for the evening and join you". + + +You laugh and join him at the table sharing stories of the years since you grew up in the city together and went separate ways. + + +Very late the next morning you wander down nursing your head and see your friend behind the bar equally worse for wear. You wander over and take the mug of water he hands you. Over breakfast and a lot more water you tell him your plans now that your back in the city. Your goal had always been to get enough to settle comfortably in or near the Iron district, then as the months went by, maybe get into one of the guilds as a skilled worker or arrange with a company to be a free-lance worker on their books. Your years of experience with all good references would stand you in good stead. + + + +> You decide that even though the rooms and food are basic at best that you'll stay renting from your friend for a few weeks while you check out the city and find a place of your own +After an enjoyable two weeks at the inn you've found yourself a nice place up in the Iron district, Its just a single bedroom with kitchen and small lounge off it but compared to the last few years it seems like a palace. Even better its only a few minutes walk from several of the guild buildings and mining corporation offices so sorting out a job shouldn't be too taxing, after several months rest of course.You let your friend know that you'll be leaving the next day and he just tells you to come down for drinks as often as you like. + + +That evening you both sit down to share a drink and talk about how to make easy money (your favorite topic since you were 10 and he was 15 working for his dad in this very bar). You glance out the window and comment that its awfully bright out for the time of day when you hear the first screams. + + +You both rush out to see a massive inferno sweeping through the wooden buildings of the old quarter. You both turn to run but there is a wind coming off the sea pushing the fire on and the old wooden buildings are going up like kindling. In your blind sprint you both almost make it to the walls dividing the city's districts when the flames overtake you and the smoke makes you choke and fall, its not long before you are engulfed entirely in flames.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your group makes it back to the city in what must be only a little short of record time and say your farewells at the gates, most of them running off to see wives or families. You take stock of the area then get yourself through the now alien feeling streets to your old area of the city and are relived to find it almost completely unchanged. You go to an old way house you knew in the hopes that the same owner was still running the place. + + +As you walk in the door a man behind a bar looks up and stares right at you for a full minute before saying "Well this is some triumphant return, look at the state of.." + + +Your coin purse drops on the table + + +"your huge full coin purse" he slowly finishes. + + +You grin and tell him you'll take his best room for the night and some hot food followed by whatever his best bottle of alcohol is then head upstairs to wash the road off your face. Your Old friend meets you as you come back down and tosses you a key as he lays a large bowl of thick stew on the table alongside a large bottle of mead with two glasses. + + +"two?" you point out. + + +"Well its not everyday an old friend comes back into town after years away, so since your now paying for an entire bottle of finest mead reserve I thought I'd close for the evening and join you". + + +You laugh and join him at the table sharing stories of the years since you grew up in the city together and went separate ways. + + +Very late the next morning you wander down nursing your head and see your friend behind the bar equally worse for wear. You wander over and take the mug of water he hands you. Over breakfast and a lot more water you tell him your plans now that your back in the city. Your goal had always been to get enough to settle comfortably in or near the Iron district, then as the months went by, maybe get into one of the guilds as a skilled worker or arrange with a company to be a free-lance worker on their books. Your years of experience with all good references would stand you in good stead. + + + +> You Tell you friend that you'll just be staying a couple of days while finding your own place up in the Iron district, after all you have enough coin to rent an entire house for most of a year. +You hang around long enough for your head to stop hurting and the food to settle then head off to see what changes the years have wrought on the rest of the city. Your Old district may not have changed at all but the wooden docks and buildings have stood longer than most peoples grandparents had been alive. You walk slowly up the sloping city until you reach the large walls that divide the districts and head through the large gates. The first thing you notice is that the gates which used to be old relics unmoved in decades had been cleaned up, reinforced and were guarded, they seemed friendly enough and were only guarding the gates closing mechanism not the gateway itself but it was still an odd sight. + + +The Iron district had also changed, the stone buildings seemed even bigger than before and many of them were more ornate, even near the gate which would be considered the less well off area. You head further in and see signs for several new mining companies and new guard businesses recruiting. You quickly move off the main roads and find a respectable looking Inn to ask about rooms. + + +You don't have any luck in the first few inns and taverns you try but after a while you find one with a small flat to rent- Its a little more than you wanted to pay but its only a few minutes from the guild buildings so you agree terms and say you'll move in that night. You head back to let your friend know then move your few worldly belongings into your new place. +> Easy city living +You settle into your new place almost immediately. At first you have no idea what your going to do with the large wardrobe and drawers set up in your room but then you just smile to yourself and head out to the nearest tailors and buy several sets of cloths. All practical and hard wearing, but still one of the first times you've owned more than 3 outfits in your life. After stowing it all away you start your rounds of the district and try to see as many of the changes as possible. + + +You do your sight-seeing for the first couple of days then start to gather information on the Guilds and Companies that interest you. Having got the basics noted down, you buy in a nice supply of long lasting rations (just incase) and set about having an easy life for the whole of winter. Eating down in the taverns or the nice inns, and seeing what nightlife there was to offer. + + +It was just as you were starting to really enjoy your complete lack of routine and responsibility and were planning on heading down to your friends for an evening drink when you start to hear loud voices and strange shouts from the taverns main room. You thought that this was a little to nice of a place for it, but never one to pass up spectating a good tavern brawl (and occasionally participating) you head down the stairs. + + +But your stopped short when you reach the room and instead of a brawl you see a room full of panicked people all saying the word fire. You grab the nearest man and ask what is going on and he tells you the old districts up in flames, they think it started on the shore amongst the docks but the wind off the sea pushed it up into the old wooden buildings and they took like kindling, within minutes the whole district was one big inferno. + + +You rush outside and round the inn, your window looked the other way shielding you from the sight but now you just stare blankly towards where the wall separating the districts and see a fierce orange and yellow glow over the wall, occasionally punctuated by large bursts of flame with plumes of black filling the air above it. You sprint down to the gates but once you get there you find them closed and barred shut. grabbing the nearest guard you shout for them to be open so you can get to your friend but he just stares blankly back at you obviously shocked dumb then walks away. The gate captain walks over and tells you that if anyone is still in there and didn't get out before the gates had to be shut, that there was no chance of them being alive. You start to tell him that he is wrong and needs to open the gates when he takes you over to them and tells you to put a hand on them. + + +You reach out and feel the thick gates metal almost hot enough to burn you. The captain quietly tells you that the fire came at the worst possible time. it had been dry for weeks and wooden buildings had been build right from the shore to the base of the wall, all stocked full of the years produce, hay, wheat, pelts and oils. most of it flammable. The wind blowing in from the sea had fanned it into an inferno almost as soon as the first warehouses had gone up. It had spread unnaturally quickly and only the closing of the huge gates had stopped it spreading through into this district too. The gates would stay closes until the embers were cold, and that could take a couple of days at least without any rain to quench them. + + +You head slowly back to your room and collapse into bed unsure what to do next. +> Morning or choice +You awake in the morning unsure what to do. Your plans had been of an easy year living off your money and you could still do it, prices would probably go up for a time but you'd still comfortably now that your settled. But you are now sure you'd lost any place that you had called home and your closest friend in the fire so you at least wanted to find out what had happened. + + +You grab some food then head out to start trying to ask questions and see if anyone is the wiser about what had caused the fire, and to do a last look through the survivors for any sign of your friend. + + +You ask several guards but most don't seem to know any more than you do. Eventually you see a guard that isn't as shell shocked as the rest and he tells you that the captain over at the military barracks has all the information about the fire and that you should speak to him. You head there to see what he knows. + + +'The Barracks' as it is generally know does contain the city guard's barracks but also the military side of things, the army barracks, its armory, offices and everything else it needed all in one giant building that straddled and made up part of the wall between the iron and stone districts. You quickly see a small group of people talking to soldiers outside one of the entrances and approach them to hear what is going on. + + +Its one of the captains explaining the fire to them, a few minor details extra but basically what you had heard before. Once he is done you ask him about how it started. He looks you over then sends you in and tells you to talk to the man at the desk, first room on the right. You enter and realize you not left with much choice as to where to turn since there is a group of soldiers blocking the corridor a few meters away with only one door standing open between you and them. You enter and approach the man looking at you from behind the desk. + + +"What can I do for you?" + + +"I want to know how the fire started." + + +The man seems mildly amused by your abrupt response but any trace of amusement quickly vanishes as he replies. + + +"A ship packed with flammable fuel was set alight and rammed into our docks. the fire was deliberate." + + +Stunned by the sudden revelation you ask "Are your sure? wait are you just telling everyone this, wont it cause a panic?" + + +"There's no point trying to keep it a secret, half the fishing fleet saw it happen as did many of the survivors that ran into the sea and were picked up the by the ships, the entire city will know in two days at the most. Also there were thousands of people in that district at the time, I wont dishonor them by lying about their deaths." + + +"But who would do it, what is there to gain from burning down old district?" + + +"We think it was Carn, at least the burning ship and the one that had been accompanying it bore their colours" + + +You think for a few seconds but the name rings no bells "Who?" + + +"Carn, the city a few weeks along the coast by boat, you been living under a rock or something? There has been minor trouble and trade disputes between us for nearly two years now." + + +"I've been up North for years in the mines, news apart from bandit activity doesn't make it up there..." + + +"Well long story short we started full maritime trading over 3 years ago, then two years ago some minor trade problems began, then it was about land, finally about fishing rights. things had been getting tense for months with armed ships keeping fishing boats company for protection and guards on our borders but no-one expected this. They have been sent ravens with questions about the ships but they will of course deny all knowledge, then it will be war. The king has already started recruiting to replace the men lost in the fire and more to fill out the army." + + +You just stand unsure what to say, should you hate an enemy you don't know for what they did? Denounce their tactics, or just avoid the war and try and rebuild a life in the city. + + +"So son" the commander stands up "we are still recruiting and the army wage is just as good as the miners one. You want to enlist?" + + + +> You hate what they did but you have money and a chance at a life now so it would be stupid to throw it away in a war, you politely refuse and head out. +You spend the first few days split between organizing whatever is left of you life and watching the embers of the old district burn down to cold ash. Once the gates are opened you had planned to search through the wreckage for you old friends tavern but one look through the gate shows a nondescript layer of ash evenly coating the ground as far as the outer walls and the shore, only the occasional blackened wooden timbers or cracked black stone sticking up to break the massive expanse of grey and black. + + +Soldiers and workers begin repairing the walls and gates from the fire damage and as the weeks pass people begin to clear out the ash and wreckage that survived. In many places the fires burned hot enough that not even much bone was left but in others teams were on duty collecting remains and transporting them into mass graves outside the city limits. + + +The war had broken out after less than a fortnight. Carn repeatedly denied any involvement but after the trouble between the two cities and the witnesses to the ships bearing their royal colours war was inevitable. Reports said it was going our way and that we mostly had control of the seas between the cities and were making steady progress on land as well, casualties were growing but going by the weekly reports given by the guards theirs were much higher and we would have them under tight siege by the end of spring. + + +You take it easy for the first few weeks but then begin helping out where you can. Your time in the mines has given you a simple grasp of solid construction so when work teams are put together building new stone docks in place of the wood ones you join them as skilled labor and since you don't need the money you let your wages go to re-homing the survivors. Your work and charity gets you some small attention from the survivors that make up a lot of the unskilled labor and when they learn you used to live in the old district your adopted into the 'family' again. You even meet a girl a little younger than you that lost her family in the fire. Your friends at first with you looking out for her, then you become closer, and by the time spring draws near you marry and settle into a life in the Iron town. + + +By this time you've begun accepting your wage since most of the survivors are now in temporary homes. Your work on the docks and accepted position amongst the survivors has landed you a full time position in the construction guild overseeing some projects in the rebuilding of a new partly stone old district. + + +The War went as quickly as you had been told to expect with Carn under tight siege by spring and fallen completely by summer. your army had been ruthless , firing burning oil and tar into the city and burning their food stores whenever possible, all in 'revenge' for the old district. Their king had denied all involvement right up until the surrender but he was now exiled along with his advisors and the city under your kings command. + + +The world passed you by as you spent your years happily with your wonderful wife and family, there were always rumors of other wars and far off battles and victories but you didn't concern yourself with them as your city was now flourishing and always expanding and you had plenty of work as you moved up the guild ranks. + + +*** Congratulations! This is the peaceful and happy ending. No big exciting adventure but you're happily married and well paid in a flourishing kingdom. And since all is going well its easy to ignore those little niggling doubts about what really happened that I know your harboring ***<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You awake in the morning unsure what to do. Your plans had been of an easy year living off your money and you could still do it, prices would probably go up for a time but you'd still comfortably now that your settled. But you are now sure you'd lost any place that you had called home and your closest friend in the fire so you at least wanted to find out what had happened. + + +You grab some food then head out to start trying to ask questions and see if anyone is the wiser about what had caused the fire, and to do a last look through the survivors for any sign of your friend. + + +You ask several guards but most don't seem to know any more than you do. Eventually you see a guard that isn't as shell shocked as the rest and he tells you that the captain over at the military barracks has all the information about the fire and that you should speak to him. You head there to see what he knows. + + +'The Barracks' as it is generally know does contain the city guard's barracks but also the military side of things, the army barracks, its armory, offices and everything else it needed all in one giant building that straddled and made up part of the wall between the iron and stone districts. You quickly see a small group of people talking to soldiers outside one of the entrances and approach them to hear what is going on. + + +Its one of the captains explaining the fire to them, a few minor details extra but basically what you had heard before. Once he is done you ask him about how it started. He looks you over then sends you in and tells you to talk to the man at the desk, first room on the right. You enter and realize you not left with much choice as to where to turn since there is a group of soldiers blocking the corridor a few meters away with only one door standing open between you and them. You enter and approach the man looking at you from behind the desk. + + +"What can I do for you?" + + +"I want to know how the fire started." + + +The man seems mildly amused by your abrupt response but any trace of amusement quickly vanishes as he replies. + + +"A ship packed with flammable fuel was set alight and rammed into our docks. the fire was deliberate." + + +Stunned by the sudden revelation you ask "Are your sure? wait are you just telling everyone this, wont it cause a panic?" + + +"There's no point trying to keep it a secret, half the fishing fleet saw it happen as did many of the survivors that ran into the sea and were picked up the by the ships, the entire city will know in two days at the most. Also there were thousands of people in that district at the time, I wont dishonor them by lying about their deaths." + + +"But who would do it, what is there to gain from burning down old district?" + + +"We think it was Carn, at least the burning ship and the one that had been accompanying it bore their colours" + + +You think for a few seconds but the name rings no bells "Who?" + + +"Carn, the city a few weeks along the coast by boat, you been living under a rock or something? There has been minor trouble and trade disputes between us for nearly two years now." + + +"I've been up North for years in the mines, news apart from bandit activity doesn't make it up there..." + + +"Well long story short we started full maritime trading over 3 years ago, then two years ago some minor trade problems began, then it was about land, finally about fishing rights. things had been getting tense for months with armed ships keeping fishing boats company for protection and guards on our borders but no-one expected this. They have been sent ravens with questions about the ships but they will of course deny all knowledge, then it will be war. The king has already started recruiting to replace the men lost in the fire and more to fill out the army." + + +You just stand unsure what to say, should you hate an enemy you don't know for what they did? Denounce their tactics, or just avoid the war and try and rebuild a life in the city. + + +"So son" the commander stands up "we are still recruiting and the army wage is just as good as the miners one. You want to enlist?" + + + +> You cant accept what They did to your city and your friends. Setting the city on fire with no warning to kill civillians was not an act ment to go unpunished so you enlist. +Life in the army starts with training. You're assigned a bunk and basic leather armor on the first day and the next morning at dawn you're woken with the other new recruits to head out for basic training. Your unsure what to expect but life in the mines has kept you strong and and in excellent physical condition so the exercise runs, weights and jogging in full armor don't overly strain you. Other recruits don't fare as well but your not given the time or opportunity to help one another. + + +Your thinking the training is a little harsh for the first day as many of the men and boys in your group have never done physical labor when your all gathered and told that today was the testing day. They needed to asses what sort of condition you were in so they could get you into the proper training programs. You see that everyone is relieved by this and you start marching back to the barracks as your sergeant tells you the last task for the day. + + +"Everyone is to be interviewed about their experience and past jobs, don't worry this isn't a test and it will be kept informal, we just need to know if you've ever held a weapon before or which part of the army suits you best". + + +You all enjoy your evening meal then are called over one by one to the sergeant's table. You tell him that your good with a bow and passable with a knife but that you've never had formal training with a sword before. Your experience in the mines interests him more and one of the other men at the table takes over and asks you several technical questions about struts and construction work. You answer all he asks fairly well and after the Sarge gives him a nod he says "Welcome to the engineering division". + + +You look momentarily confused until he laughs and asks where you thought all the forts, war machines and defenses came from and who you thought build the army's outposts. The light dawns on you and the man smiles. + + +"That's right, you'll be supporting the army using your experience, building our defenses, putting together our war machines and constructing everything from our forward base to our cooking tents. It may not sound as glamorous as charging in with the vanguard but we have a much, much higher survival rate and if the camps are attacked we defend them shoulder to shoulder with all the rest, what do you say?" + + +Your readily agree and Sergeant Reardon, as he introduced himself, leads you off to meet your new training squad. Your introduced and learn they are made up of everyone from those with basic unskilled labor experience to a couple full guild engineers who signed up on the day of the fire. + + +Your training goes well and you get on well with your squad, learning to treat them as your friends as well as squad mates. After a couple of weeks pass War is finally declared. You had known it was just a matter of time but you quickly find your Sarge and ask what it meant for you. + + +"For you and your squad? Nothing at all! Your not fully trained yet and once your basic is over you still need to be assigned to your unit and your duties explained. Since you've got good solid construction knowledge and the experience to back it up you'll most likely be sent to Third company on our borders to get the forward forts built and running as the war progresses. Wont be for another month yet but either way no chance I'm letting my boys out near the fighting till they are ready." + + +Reassured by the Sarge's attitude you pass the info onto your squad and finish out the last of your basic training in the barracks. +> Third company +The Sarge is a little off in his estimate of your departure time. It actually takes a month and a half to get your squad in shape. Its been a long wait but you are finally all ready to head out to the front to help in the war effort! + + +Your squad is woken by an early bell ringing somewhere in the barracks tower and you all assemble in your new polished steel armor. during your training you had all been measured and fitted out in strong forged steel, it turned out many of the iron mongers and jewelers of the city had turned their forges over to making weapons and armor so there was no shortage of equipment for the army. + + +The Sarge gives you all one last look over. + + +"Well its taken longer than I'd like but your all ready to serve your king! You're all heading out to the 3'rd to help in the construction of the new bases so our boys on the front have a good foothold in place before winter hits." + + +A soldier to the left pipes in "But I thought we already had bases on our borders?" + + +"Our Borders? Boy do you think the entire army has been sitting and waiting for you since the war started? They have been advancing solidly for the past 6 weeks. The new borders are near 2 weeks march further forward and THATS where we need the new bases." + + +You think to yourself that the army has made pretty amazing advances considering the fact that Carn was the kingdom that started the war. +> It DOES seem odd, so you speak up +"Sir, Our men are making amazing progress in the war but I have to ask. Carn were the ones that started the war, I mean they sent the ships into the Old Quarter and everything with the trade disputes. Were they not prepared for our counter attack?" + + +You see the Sergeant frown and a shadow clearly crosses his features. He quickly shakes it off and explains that the first week or two on the border was intense fighting and lead to a great many casualties. However once the army had broken through the initial defense line, it had been much easier to push ahead and prevent the Carn army from regrouping properly. + + +You think that this is indeed a possible explanation but a few doubts still remain in the back of your mind.The Sarge says a few last tips and goodbyes then heads off. The last you see of him is as he walks out the door with the shadow back over his features as if he didn't really believe what he had said himself. + + +You see a soldier you don't recognize step forward. + + +"Right then, I'm Capt. Argor. Since I took an arrow in the knee and had to come back here for treatment, I've been given the onerous task of accompanying you to the front lines to make sure you ladies don't get lost. You were all told to report here in full gear and with all your supplies so has anyone left anything behind that they just must run back to their rooms for? Hankies? Training Bra? No? Good, I might not have to babysit you all quite as much as I feared, lets head out cos this is gonna be a long trip for you city folk." +> Quick march out of the city with the new Capt. calling you all little girls for the entire 6 hour march. +You are given a break for lunch with only cold rations, then double speed marched hard till dusk. The Capt. Pulls you all off the road beside a small stream and even though your all ready to collapse and pass out he has you form up. + + +"Right then, this is first point spring. A few generations back some officers from the 1st and 2nd companies were insulting the 3rd, saying we weren't real soldiers because we just built things while they won the war. Our officers didn't take too kindly to this and lets just say a bit of an argument broke out. After the tempers calmed a bit our men challenged the rest of the army to prove their supposed superiority" + + +He paused to give you all a big grin. + + +"Our boys in the 3rd work hard every day moving timber and stone, carrying loads long distances and almost never take days off. Their boys sit on their arses most of the time and only train short periods a day when they aren't actively attacking something. So our officers said they should all go for a little march. You all just made it here within daylight hours which isn't bad at all for this time of year. The 1st and 2nd company soldiers made it in about the same. OUR officers beat them by 3 hours and had a full camp set up and running by the time they limped in. They looked up from their fires and said this is normally just the first point the 3rd stop at before marching on but they had thought they should wait for them to catch up. Its been known as first point ever since. Now anyone joining the 3rd makes the march, so welcome to the 3rd gentlemen, now get our camp up!" + + +Relieved that Capt. Argor wont be calling you all girls for the rest of the march you all set up camp and get some fires going. You're just settling down beside your fire to have supper when a couple of other come over and join you. + + +"We had been thinking the same thing as you about how fast the war is going so when you spoke up we thought we should have a chat and share our concerns about the situation." + + +You think slowly before the reply +> "Well then what did you think of Sarg's answer?" +The two men seem to sense your hesitation so think for a while before one answers. + + +"I would say... that I'm not sure he believed it any more than you or I did." + + +It's exactly the feeling that you had gotten but you also wonder why they are bringing this up now. + + + +> "Honestly? Your right, I'm pretty sure that no-one really bought it and there are other higher ups back at the barracks that seemed to share the doubts." +The men think for a bit before replying, the one who had been silent up till now looks at his companion and says "On your head be it." then gets up and leaves. + + +"Sorry about him." the man says "He is just a little bit on edge about this whole situation." + + +"And just what is this whole situation?" + + +"Ha! fair enough. Well I can tell you some of it now, You did some work in the mines recently and our employer owns several of the new sites that have been opening, so in reality you've been doing work for him." + + +You nod slowly, its common for prospectors to open several sites to ensure one produces. You don't have enough information to pin down a specific job or owner though so keep listening. + + +The man continues "He developed an interest in you from the reports he was receiving which is what put you on our radar and your behavior and reaction to the war made up my mind to come speak to you. Now you can appreciate how much of a risk I am taking here but I have decided to trust you. The war isn't all it seems and you know that. There are a lot of things you don't know about but the main one is that Carn didn't start the war and didn't attack the Old Quarter." + + +He pauses to watch your reaction before continuing. + + +"Now lets set one thing straight, we aren't talking treason here, we are completely loyal to the king, but we think he is being betrayed and tricked by his council. Now I will give you tonight to think this over and talk to you tomorrow evening again if you want to know more." + + +The man gets up and leaves. You realize you don't even know his name but he is too far to call out too now so you sit back and think over your options. +> No matter what they claim, they are commiting treason, report to the Capt. during the day and stop them! +Evil council tricking the king to start a war, its like something out of one of your dreams... you briefly mull over the fact you haven't had any of those recently but put it down to being so tired from army life and move on to planning. + + +You know what the two men look like and one other man that they talk to a lot so you just need to avoid them during the day and get to Capt. Argor with your information. You keep an eye out during the next days march and try to act as normal as possible, when one of the men comes over to you during a break you even share a water flask before moving off so you don't raise their suspicions. + + +You finally see your chance as the camp is being set up for the night, the two men are off at the edge of camp to set up their bedrolls like normal and the man they talk to a lot is on sentry duty. You don't know their names but you can give a near perfect description and point them out once you have the Capt. and other guards with you. + + +You move quickly over to the Captains' fire where he is talking with a runner from a temporary camp up ahead. He motions for you to wait until he is finished, you are impatient to tell him what you know but have no choice but to wait a moment since you don't want to blurt it out in public. One of the cooks hands you ale and you sip at it nervously as you wait. The man drops his tray against your ankle as he passes and you almost jump out of your skin but just about remain calm and give him a nod when he apologizes. + + +Theres no sign of the men and you only wait one minute but you are dripping with sweat as he waves you over. You realize its FAR too much sweat as you try and speak and feel your throat close over and collapse at his feat. The Capt. immediately calls over a medic and crouches beside you but you are suffocating and he cant help, the medic runs over and immediately points out two small puncture wounds on your ankle. "He's been bitten, looks like Asp poison, I'm sorry but theres nothing we can do." + + +"It was the cook, he poisoned me and stabbed my leg when he dropped his try!" you try to shout, but all that comes out is a rasp. + + +You fade into black as you hear the Capt. ordering the men to kill all snakes on site and double check all kit before use.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The men think for a bit before replying, the one who had been silent up till now looks at his companion and says "On your head be it." then gets up and leaves. + + +"Sorry about him." the man says "He is just a little bit on edge about this whole situation." + + +"And just what is this whole situation?" + + +"Ha! fair enough. Well I can tell you some of it now, You did some work in the mines recently and our employer owns several of the new sites that have been opening, so in reality you've been doing work for him." + + +You nod slowly, its common for prospectors to open several sites to ensure one produces. You don't have enough information to pin down a specific job or owner though so keep listening. + + +The man continues "He developed an interest in you from the reports he was receiving which is what put you on our radar and your behavior and reaction to the war made up my mind to come speak to you. Now you can appreciate how much of a risk I am taking here but I have decided to trust you. The war isn't all it seems and you know that. There are a lot of things you don't know about but the main one is that Carn didn't start the war and didn't attack the Old Quarter." + + +He pauses to watch your reaction before continuing. + + +"Now lets set one thing straight, we aren't talking treason here, we are completely loyal to the king, but we think he is being betrayed and tricked by his council. Now I will give you tonight to think this over and talk to you tomorrow evening again if you want to know more." + + +The man gets up and leaves. You realize you don't even know his name but he is too far to call out too now so you sit back and think over your options. +> Wait it out and see what he says the next night, theres too much truth in what he says to ignore it all. +You've had your doubts all along so now you want the facts. You wait till evening when you are all making camp and head out to the edges where the two men normally set up their bedrolls. It isn't long before they come over, set theirs up near you and join you at the fire. "So you didn't try to turn us in?" + + +"I thought about it a lot but I need to hear what you have to say." + + +"Hmm honesty at least, I'm not sure I would have trusted you if you said it didn't cross your mind." he gives you a smile then moves closer so he can speak in a lower voice. "Everything I said last night is true and we have the proof with us, letters and land deals signed by keys members of the council, all encouraging the war. One was even stupid enough to put in writing that he had captured the two Carn ships to use in 'plan spark'. Others talk about preparing for war and the buildup of the army being hidden from Carn's spies. Even the torture and murder of people they think might betray them or go to the king. Basically everything we need to avert a war and have the king put the men to justice." + + +You think for a while and decide if they really have all this proof that you are going to help them, besides now that you know this much you are sure they would kill you if you show any sign or betraying them. You talk till sundown about plans and strategies. +> Reaching the Front Lines +The marching is taken slowly but efficiently and you approach the lines in just under two weeks. The Capt calls a halt for the evening about half a day out from the front lines and says that he plans to arrive by lunchtime tomorrow so you better all clean up your gear and look presentable for the last march. + + +That night you and the two men set up your sleeping rolls near the edge of camp like normal and the man you often see them talking to goes on sentry duty nearby. Its all been arranged for midnight when all but the sentries are asleep. + + +The three of you stay awake and near midnight you all pack up your rolls and sneak over to the sentry who steps back into the light. One more man joins you and the five of you slip out of the camp then turn towards the front lines and break into a jog. The weeks on the road has made you strong and fit so you all go double time for the first few hours before slowing to a normal fast marching pace. + + +The man who is obviously the leader calls back to you all "Right we need to get across by sunrise today or our chances of survival are near zero, our Proprietor has provided us a rough map of the front line fortifications as of when we left the city and plans of what work should have been completed since we will be heading about 2 miles south of the road where there shouldn't be any defenses in place yet so we will only have sentries to deal with." + + +You start marching again when you suddenly remember a conversation you had with Capt. Argor only 2 days back + + +"Wait!" everyone stops and looks back at you "listen, I was letting the Capt. go on about his love of rocks again when he mentioned a runner from the front, he said they came across solid granite just south of the road so moved a mining operation there at short notice, if its close to our crossing point it'll be swarming with men." + + +The leader stares at you for a second before considering the map again. + + +"Good work Glor, we cant afford to meet to many guards, so its north 5 miles instead. Double time people!" + + +You all set off at a fast jog and your just glad you let the Capt. talk about rocks. +> Reaching Carn +Your leader guides you skillfully through he front lines, avoiding encampments and guards and you get across the lines with only one guard killed. You are sad that one had to die but there was no other way and plenty more would die if you didn't succeed. + + +You get through as dawn begins to break and all collapse two miles across the lines from exhaustion. You've all been jogging in full gear for just over 7 hours now and are all spent but you're across the lines and the leader says you can rest. You don't know what to expect but you soon see a small farmers cart approaching your position. The leader quickly speaks to the man and you all pile into the back as he turns back towards Carn and whips the horses into a trot. + + +The journey from there is uneventful, you all change out of your gear into nondescript clothing and the other men all have identification which marks them out as working for Carn's king so no soldiers bother you. + + +You reach Carn after several days hard travel, swapping carts a few times. + + + +> The War +THIS IS THE SECOND BEST ENDING, THE SOLDIERS ENDING. + + + CONGRATULATIONS! + + +Once in Carn you are taken before the king and your leader makes his report after presenting the documents. King Hader immediately sends them to his scribes who make several copies and over the next few days they are smuggled out of Carn to all near-by kingdoms. King Hader also sends several emissaries to your City and is finally granted a cease-fire when one of your kings high council personally intervenes and tells the king that the council had been blocking Carn's requests and emissaries from reaching him. The Councilor was in fact your proprietor and was able to tell the king some of the truth of the situation. + + +Once the king knows he was being lied to he immediately took control of the military and ordered a cease-fire and confined the council to chambers under guard until he had found out the truth. And once the truth came out the entire council bar one was hung from the city gates. Peace was made between the two kingdoms and it was all due to you hearing your captain talk about his love of rocks.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The two men seem to sense your hesitation so think for a while before one answers. + + +"I would say... that I'm not sure he believed it any more than you or I did." + + +It's exactly the feeling that you had gotten but you also wonder why they are bringing this up now. + + + +> "We'll were just soldiers, and new ones at that, guess its not really our place to question things we don't understand." +The two men seem to think about what you said for an age before finally replying. + + +"Well you might be right, have a good night since I'm not entirely convinced Arbor there is going to easy on the marching tomorrow!" He gives you a smile and a bit of a funny wave as he stands up from the fire and you return the gesture before taking your soup from the fire and having your supper. + + +Luckily the next day the Capt. does go a lot easier on you all, making the First Point in 1 day seemed to pacify him somewhat. He now is mostly quite congenial between short bursts of calling your all little girls but you think its just his way of encouraging you. + + +The next two of weeks passes very uneventfully as you march towards the border with days pretty much consisting of March, Eat, Sleep then march some more, when the capt. points out that you are all crossing the old border and into new territory. You think that it seems pretty close considering how far North you used to go mining and hear Capt. Argor saying that he can explain the local borders to anyone who wants. + + +You make the mistake of asking and after a very long a boring talk (maps appear to be Argor's passion but he is only sad he dosn't have an advanced editor to insert one here.) it is explained to you. To the North of your home city your borders are greatly extended due to the western mountain range as it slowly curves North and East and meets the sea. So since the mountains are hard to cross most of the year, your city controls all the encircled land, and since its safer there, that is where it has most of its farms and townships. Whereas to the south and east other nations have encroached significantly closer over the more open and less defensible terrain. Sadly he doesn't stop there and starts going into the different types of rocks in each area and you gather that this is some sort of hobby of his. + + +Worn out by the talk of maps you bed down for your first night in the newly claimed territory. Since Argor kept you up talking about the types of rock in different areas of the kingdom most of the sleeping spots are full. +> Grab the spot beside the Capt. as its nearest. +Just as you lie down to sleep you see the two men who had approached you a couple of weeks before walking nearby, you give them a nod and they give you a wave and wish you a good nights sleep. + + +Nothing had come of the talk they had tried to start so you think to yourself that you had been very paranoid in suspecting perfectly normal guys in your own unit and drift off to sleep telling yourself that you should chat with them over supper sometime since they seemed nice enough. + + +The morning feels much like any other as you all pack up and start marching but you cant help but think about the fact that this used to all be ruled by a different kingdom, there is even the occasional sign of battle along the road. Whether from small skirmishes or a full battle you cant tell but the Capt. seems perfectly content to ignore it all and carry on down the road so you all just follow. He occasionally calls back a running commentary on the rocks and geology of the area but you all mostly ignore him when he does this. + + +The Capt. calls back "Two weeks more and we hit the forward base sites and begin our work. Just remember that this used to be enemy territory so keep your eyes open as we go just incase." +> Nearing the New Border +The marching is taken slowly but efficiently and you approach the lines in just under two weeks. The Capt calls a halt for the evening about half a day out from the front lines and says that he plans to arrive by lunchtime tomorrow so you better all clean up your gear and look presentable for the last march. + + +Having not gotten round to it before now you decide to spend supper chatting to the men who had approached you before. As you approach the fire one gives you a slightly cagey look but the other welcomes you and you all soon chatting happily away about life back in the city and plans for after the war. One or two others join you round the fire and by the time you head to sleep your feeling pretty silly for mistrusting their intentions at first. + + +Having had a tankard or two at the fire you readily fall asleep. +> Morning awaits +The morning horn is pretty normal, as is the packing up of the camp and forming up although you are all the shiniest you have looked since first got your armor since you were all told to look good for your final arrival. + + +The only trouble starts right before you are all due to set off and stems from the fact that 4 men are missing along with all their gear. The Capt. orders an immediate search of the camp and area around it but nothing is turned up. He seems genuinely angry for the first time and mutters about men being dragged naked behind horses before ordering the march to begin at double time since its an hour late. + + +After an hour of double time he calls normal march and shouts back to the squad. + + +"Well boys it appears you have now seen the ugliest part of army life, deserters. I'm going to tell you now that running off after you enlist and gain your armor is a very, very bad idea. The day you left training you swore to serve your country for at least 3 years so breaking that oath is treason and trust me on this, we deal with treason VERY harshly." + + +The proclamation is met with silence as you all try and think of who is missing, you think that you might have an idea when the Capt. begins to speak again. + + +"Now once we reach the temporary camps we are not going to enjoy a nice lunch like I planned, instead I will have to report this and each and every one of you will be questioned by some of our... lets call them information retrievers for now. So I'm going to give you all some honest advice. Do not lie to them, do not hold back and do not try and make things up. If you are honest, you'll have a two minute chat and be in the lunch tent right after. If they catch you lying you'll be in a whole lot more trouble. You all understand?" + + +The squad replies with a resounding "Yes Sir!" then marches in silence until shortly before noon when a runner approaches from up ahead. Its a scout from the camp up ahead and he chats to the Capt. before running back the way he came. The Capt. thinks for a bit before addressing you all. + + +"Well it seems that our deserters tried to cross the lines some time this morning and get over to the enemy side, it also appears that they were carrying some important documents with them. They didn't make it. This wont change our plans at all but just a reminder for you all, be completely honest when questioned and you'll be fine." + + +Once you reach the camp you are all surrounded then guided to a large tent by soldiers from another squad whose emblem you don't recognize. You are informed that you are all here for a quick chat at the request of the intelligence section and that you should wait patiently to be called through as it shouldn't take long. + + +The man seemed nice and reassuring but being 'invited for a chat by the intelligence section' doesn't calm you down much. + + +Your turn finally comes and you are lead through a tent opening into smaller adjoining tent with an old small man waiting behind a desk. You notice another man standing to the side poking at a lamp seemingly trying to get a steady glow from it as it flickered and spluttered. + + +The small man looks up and smiles "Come in and have a seat, don't mind my colleague there, he just refuses to requisition a new lamp if he feels he can fix that one." The other man just grunts and nods in your direction before turning back to the lamp and swearing at it under his breath as he started fiddling with it again. + + +"So I'll be honest with you" he begins "The men that deserted your company may have been trying to take documents containing very classified information regarding our city over to the enemy. We simply need to know everything we can to ensure nothing got through that could put our city in danger, do you understand?" he waits for you to nod before continuing. "So if you could please tell us anything you think is important I'll note it down then you can be on your way to the lunch tent which I believe will be something nice today." + + +"Rabbit stew and potatoes." interjects the man at the lamp. + + +The small man laughs before continuing "My colleague keeps a close eye on the menus, but we must be getting on, so do you have anything you feel might be important to share with us?" + + +The men seem congenial and relaxed and this isn't exactly an interrogation so you quickly decide what to say +> No need to mention a few small chats and get yourself in trouble. You say that you dont really know anything, you may have said a few words to them but dont really know them or what they planned. +You didn't exactly lie to them at all but you left out quite a few details here and there. No point in mentioning things that might make you look bad since you didn't really have anything to do with it now is there? + + +Well, The small man behind the desk doesn't seem quite as sure so asks one last question. + + +"There aren't any small details you may have left out are there, anything connected to the men or what they may have been thinking?" + + +Having come this far you arn't about to make yourself look worse by changing story so you deny knowing more. + + +The little man thinks for a second then gives his colleague a small nod then turns back to you "Thank you for your time Glor, my colleague here will point out the lunch tent to you, I believe that captain Argor is waiting anxiously there for you all, he acts like a bullying older brother, but like older brothers he does care about you all. goodbye." + + +You thank him and follow then grunting lamp obsessed man out of the rear tent flaps. + + +You got away with it! + + +The man holds aside the flaps for you and points towards a large tent with a blue pendant flying above it. "That one." he mumbles at you then starts you turn back into the tent. + + +You take a step forward before everything goes instantly black. + + + +> Waking up? +You wake up in a small room with earth walls, you look round and realize you must be underground. You feel restraints on your arms and legs but can see the small man sitting near you. He is arranging small metal and bone implements on a table beside him. He begins to speak without taking his eyes off his task. + + +"good evening Glor, you have been asleep for several hours now while we finished the rest of our chats. Unfortunately you were clearly holding back when we talked so now I must find out exactly what you weren't telling us." + + +You immediately try to explain but realize your mouth isn't obeying you and you can at best make a slobbery grunting noise. + + +"Ah yes that is a drug I have given you. most people start talking far to fast and saying anything they think I want to hear at this point. To stop that behavior I have taken your power of speech for about half an hour. After half an hour the drug will wear off and you can start talking but until then I am going to make sure you understand that I want the EXACT TRUTH and nothing else. Not the smallest detail missing and not the smallest one invented. Now lets begin." + + +The pain is more than you imagined possible and you are informed that you have also been given drugs that appear to prevent people from going unconscious due to pain so that you have no escape. The man is as good as his word and by the time half an hour is up you are screaming wordlessly. + + +he stops and gives you time to recover and let the pain ebb away. + + +"Now you see how serious I am about the truth do you not?" + + +You croak a yes in reply before telling him everything, every detail about the men you remember, every word you remember being said and everyone you saw them even talking to over a fire. After you are finished he asks a few questions he seems satisfied. + + +"Thank you Glor, now I see no hesitation at all in your eyes and your story perfectly matches what we already knew to be fact so I know you are telling the truth." + + +You sag back against the hard table relieved. he gives you something to drink before continuing. + + +"Now sadly I have made a small mess of a few parts of your body and some of the acids I used on you leave horrific scars and other damage. Also you now know about our section and its methods so you cannot be released incase you spread this information further. Ironically information about us and our commander was part of what those traitors were trying to smuggle out!" + + +You try to object but realize the drink he gave you was the drug that paralysis your mouth. + + +"Now Glor since you were honest with me your death with be very swift, and do not worry, you body will be returned to the city as evidence of the horrible torture our enemies do to captured soldiers." + + +You barely even see his hand slip forward to slide his small blade into your neck and sever your spinal cord. + + +You die instantly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The morning horn is pretty normal, as is the packing up of the camp and forming up although you are all the shiniest you have looked since first got your armor since you were all told to look good for your final arrival. + + +The only trouble starts right before you are all due to set off and stems from the fact that 4 men are missing along with all their gear. The Capt. orders an immediate search of the camp and area around it but nothing is turned up. He seems genuinely angry for the first time and mutters about men being dragged naked behind horses before ordering the march to begin at double time since its an hour late. + + +After an hour of double time he calls normal march and shouts back to the squad. + + +"Well boys it appears you have now seen the ugliest part of army life, deserters. I'm going to tell you now that running off after you enlist and gain your armor is a very, very bad idea. The day you left training you swore to serve your country for at least 3 years so breaking that oath is treason and trust me on this, we deal with treason VERY harshly." + + +The proclamation is met with silence as you all try and think of who is missing, you think that you might have an idea when the Capt. begins to speak again. + + +"Now once we reach the temporary camps we are not going to enjoy a nice lunch like I planned, instead I will have to report this and each and every one of you will be questioned by some of our... lets call them information retrievers for now. So I'm going to give you all some honest advice. Do not lie to them, do not hold back and do not try and make things up. If you are honest, you'll have a two minute chat and be in the lunch tent right after. If they catch you lying you'll be in a whole lot more trouble. You all understand?" + + +The squad replies with a resounding "Yes Sir!" then marches in silence until shortly before noon when a runner approaches from up ahead. Its a scout from the camp up ahead and he chats to the Capt. before running back the way he came. The Capt. thinks for a bit before addressing you all. + + +"Well it seems that our deserters tried to cross the lines some time this morning and get over to the enemy side, it also appears that they were carrying some important documents with them. They didn't make it. This wont change our plans at all but just a reminder for you all, be completely honest when questioned and you'll be fine." + + +Once you reach the camp you are all surrounded then guided to a large tent by soldiers from another squad whose emblem you don't recognize. You are informed that you are all here for a quick chat at the request of the intelligence section and that you should wait patiently to be called through as it shouldn't take long. + + +The man seemed nice and reassuring but being 'invited for a chat by the intelligence section' doesn't calm you down much. + + +Your turn finally comes and you are lead through a tent opening into smaller adjoining tent with an old small man waiting behind a desk. You notice another man standing to the side poking at a lamp seemingly trying to get a steady glow from it as it flickered and spluttered. + + +The small man looks up and smiles "Come in and have a seat, don't mind my colleague there, he just refuses to requisition a new lamp if he feels he can fix that one." The other man just grunts and nods in your direction before turning back to the lamp and swearing at it under his breath as he started fiddling with it again. + + +"So I'll be honest with you" he begins "The men that deserted your company may have been trying to take documents containing very classified information regarding our city over to the enemy. We simply need to know everything we can to ensure nothing got through that could put our city in danger, do you understand?" he waits for you to nod before continuing. "So if you could please tell us anything you think is important I'll note it down then you can be on your way to the lunch tent which I believe will be something nice today." + + +"Rabbit stew and potatoes." interjects the man at the lamp. + + +The small man laughs before continuing "My colleague keeps a close eye on the menus, but we must be getting on, so do you have anything you feel might be important to share with us?" + + +The men seem congenial and relaxed and this isn't exactly an interrogation so you quickly decide what to say +> Complete honesty is best even if you might look bad. You tell everything from when you first had doubts, them approaching you and the last night by the fire. +You were warned not to lie to these people and you don't plan too. Even if they seem nice, they are still intelligence workers so you cant be too careful. + + +You tell them the entire story of meeting the men, you tell them every detail you remember about them before and after they approached you. You even tell them anything you think might have given them reason to talk to you. After your done the small man smiles encouragingly and asks a few small questions to clarify details before putting his quill down. + + +"Well thank you Glor, I do believe you've told us everything you know. You didn't even try to hold back minor details that may have made you look bad but don't worry, you having some doubts isn't a crime and I'm sure the commanders here can put any of your fears to rest. Now I believe the Captain is waiting anxiously in the lunch tent for you all. He puts on a strong front but he always takes care of men in his charge, now go enjoy your lunch, my colleague there will point the tent out to you." + + +The grunting lantern obsessed man waves you over to the back of the tent and opens the flaps for you "The one with the blue pendant." he points to a large tent some way across the camp "Rabbit stew today." he adds before retreating back into the tent. + + +You call you thanks and head to the tent. The little man was right and Capt. Argor is waiting at the entrance, he gives you a reassuring smile and sends you over to the long table where the squad mates who went in before you are all sitting and dishing out stew from a central pot. + + +As the lunch hour passes all but 1 of your squad makes an appearance. The Captain calls you all over and you hear him muttering that he told him not to try and lie before he addresses you all properly. "Right boys you've been spoken too, had some good grub and not its time to meet the rest of the 3rd! We have the main barracks tent in this camp so the commander will give you all a once over before your all assigned duties. Follow me." + + +No-one asks about the missing squad member and several others had heard the Captain's muttering so you all march to the 3rd companies barracks tents in silence thinking that this camp may not be as welcoming as everyone seems so very keen to make out. +> The New Commander +Once you reach the 3rd Companies HQ tent you are all looked over by an older officer who is introduced as the 3rd's commander, and one of the highest ranked officers on the front lines. He gives a welcoming speech and tells a few of his old military stories to try and make you feel at home but ends with telling you all that one of your number ran off during questioning towards the front lines so was probably working with the others that had disappeared. + + +He quickly changes the subject and tells you that the most important matter at hand is getting this base up and running. You can see the start of the fortifications from here and the men working on them so he leaves you back in the care of Capt. Argor (who it appears requested to be assigned to your squad) and he takes you to the work site. + + +Once there you are divided into smaller teams and sent off to the areas that suit your skills best but 2 other highly trained men and your self are kept back and are taken to the work-site overseer's tent. Due to your experience you each given teams to command and areas of the fort to work on, The deadlines are strict but your labor is made up of disciplined soldiers so work should progress quickly. + + +Weeks pass and the forts defenses and main buildings are fully constructed right on schedule. Capt. Argor calls in a few of the team leaders including yourself for a chat. + + +"Well boys the work here has gone great, but the 1st and 2nd haven't been idle either and and still pushing on ahead. Resistance is growing as they near Carn but we should have it under siege but the time spring hits. That being the case we need men and overseers on the front lines to quickly erect new defense lines and set up all the siege works once we reach their walls. The rest will remain here to finish off these forts and make them defensible and livable for years to come. I for one will be heading forward, its dangerous but I was never one for waiting around, who else wants the exciting job?" +> Head to the front and eventually the siege lines +The trip to the front is a long one, each day away from the newly built forts increases the risk of being attacked by small bands of skirmishers or partisans that might be in the area. Your party has an escort from the 1st but you only number 100 men and so everyone is kept watchfull and double sentries are posted each night. + + +Along the way you stop at the small temporary encampments your army is using to move the supplies, no more than palisade walls around bare earth but each time your group stops for a day or two to help fortify the camp before moving on. Finally after many days of marching and building your company arrives at the front lines, they have been pushing ahead each day against increasing resistance but the enemy seems to retreat each time it has lost the advantage. + + +Capt. Argor confides in you that he hates the tactic but that its been their most effective one of the war. They set up small ambushes and skirmishers to engage your vanguard into each fight blocking the advance. They would just keep moving and plow over the small attacks but very occasionally its a much bigger force and plowing ahead would lead to massive casualties. So most days the march is interrupted and temporary defenses erected. + + +The advance continues this way until you are within sight of the city and the clear plains around it prevent any large numbers of troops to be hidden. + + +Spring is just about to begin as your troops encircle the city and you and the rest of the 3rd start building defenses and war machines. +> Final Charge +Your troops are elated about beginning the siege as they see it as a much safer occupation than marching through hostile woods and you share their relief. Your men work quickly and in a couple of days you are beginning to see walls, ditches and palisades spring up around the city. + + +You mainly work on erecting palisades behind shallow ditches but lend a hand to the construction of the massive trebuchet that are going to bombard the cities walls. You feel that the work is going well and that within a week your army will have a very strong position ready to repel any final attacks. + + +Unfortunately Carn does not wait for the week to end and instead attacks in force. Just before dawn they flood out of a merchants gate and launch a full scale attack on your encircling lines. You have some defenses in place but there are still gaps and it is through one of the gaps that they push. Capt. Argor hearing the horn rouses you all instantly and orders you into full armor. + + +"Now is the time we draw swords with the rest! We built these defenses and now we man them ourselves!" + + +He leads you all out and into the camp, as you move forward you can see fires spreading and hear the din of battle. Your army hadn't been as prepared as it should have been and it seemed that every man in Carn was on the field in full armor. The Capt. upon seeing the state of the camp lead you in front of the medical tents and ordered you into a defense line before running inside. + + +Once he returns he explains whats happening. + + +"They are attacking and making ground through the camps fast. These are the medical tents, sick and injured are being evacuated by the staff as we speak but we need to buy them time. We hold here. No retreat untill they are safe you understand me?" + + +Your squad responds with a resounding "Yes Sir!" and prepare for the onslaught. + + +It comes fast and is brutal. A full platoon of enemy soldiers charges you shield line and is in the process of breaking through when they are hit in the flank by a squad from the 3rd who were barracked elsewhere. They join your defense as the enemy regroups and you start gathering stragglers from defeated squads. + + +The enemy attacks relentlessly but each time you just hold the line long enough, then finally the all clear is given from behind. Your squad gives a ragged cheer and those left standing begin to try and retreat. Sadly the enemy has been reinforced and hits you hard, finally smashing through your defense line and overrunning the tents. + + +You fight bravely and have used your skills to take down several attackers but you are tired and you shield arm slips long enough for a spear to take you in the side. You fall and look up at one of your attackers officers as the rest push over you to get at the retreating defense lines. You see him pause to look down. + + +You manage to say "We will still win the war, My home will be avenged." + + +He looks down at you with something akin to pity "Avenged? We never attacked you, your own council sent the burning ships so they could invade us, no, there will be no vengeance for your home here." + + +Then he takes a soldiers pity on you and ends it all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Once you reach the 3rd Companies HQ tent you are all looked over by an older officer who is introduced as the 3rd's commander, and one of the highest ranked officers on the front lines. He gives a welcoming speech and tells a few of his old military stories to try and make you feel at home but ends with telling you all that one of your number ran off during questioning towards the front lines so was probably working with the others that had disappeared. + + +He quickly changes the subject and tells you that the most important matter at hand is getting this base up and running. You can see the start of the fortifications from here and the men working on them so he leaves you back in the care of Capt. Argor (who it appears requested to be assigned to your squad) and he takes you to the work site. + + +Once there you are divided into smaller teams and sent off to the areas that suit your skills best but 2 other highly trained men and your self are kept back and are taken to the work-site overseer's tent. Due to your experience you each given teams to command and areas of the fort to work on, The deadlines are strict but your labor is made up of disciplined soldiers so work should progress quickly. + + +Weeks pass and the forts defenses and main buildings are fully constructed right on schedule. Capt. Argor calls in a few of the team leaders including yourself for a chat. + + +"Well boys the work here has gone great, but the 1st and 2nd haven't been idle either and and still pushing on ahead. Resistance is growing as they near Carn but we should have it under siege but the time spring hits. That being the case we need men and overseers on the front lines to quickly erect new defense lines and set up all the siege works once we reach their walls. The rest will remain here to finish off these forts and make them defensible and livable for years to come. I for one will be heading forward, its dangerous but I was never one for waiting around, who else wants the exciting job?" +> Stay back to finish off the fort's defences +The Capt. Looks right at you obviously wanting you to volunteer but you don't raise your hand and silently watch as he and the group of volunteers head out to the front. + + +The rest of you get back to work and the teams that no longer have overseers are split between you, but you know the work by now and more importantly most of the workers in the 3rd have been building these forts for years so know the work whether you do or not. The fort is finished on schedule and your men even find time to do some minor detailing on the wood and stone to make it feel more like a town than a front line fort. + + +News comes in from the front and you hear about your army's advance, and as spring is about to start you hear that Carn is finally encircled and that the siege lines are being build by the 3rd company already. You are once again amazed by the fast progress but keep your concerns to yourself. + + +A few of you are given minor promotions for the speedy work and are retained at the fort for maintenance work and the continued important works that the commanders want. Your company has even managed to bring out or build proper long tables and roasting pits for the food hall. Its just when you are on your way to a meeting concerning the replacement of a wooden structure with stone that the news comes in. + + +Carn launched a major counterattack from their city before the defenses and war machines were ready. they were beaten back but your army suffered very heavy casualties, some squads and platoons being completely wiped out. You ask about the 3rd but are told that they heroically held a defense line in front of the medic tents against horrific odds, most of them are getting medals for it but only 6 out of the 100 men there survived so the medals will be posthumous. + + +Feeling saddened by the news you barely hear about how the Carn army was beaten back in the nick of time by a flanking maneuver. Nor do you listen to reports that bombardment of the city started with firebombs in 'revenge for the Old Quarter'. + + +You stay on at the fort for a few weeks then head back to the city as a military man, you settle into a city construction position and take no further part in the war, which quickly ends with your city's complete victory.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The two men seem to think about what you said for an age before finally replying. + + +"Well you might be right, have a good night since I'm not entirely convinced Arbor there is going to easy on the marching tomorrow!" He gives you a smile and a bit of a funny wave as he stands up from the fire and you return the gesture before taking your soup from the fire and having your supper. + + +Luckily the next day the Capt. does go a lot easier on you all, making the First Point in 1 day seemed to pacify him somewhat. He now is mostly quite congenial between short bursts of calling your all little girls but you think its just his way of encouraging you. + + +The next two of weeks passes very uneventfully as you march towards the border with days pretty much consisting of March, Eat, Sleep then march some more, when the capt. points out that you are all crossing the old border and into new territory. You think that it seems pretty close considering how far North you used to go mining and hear Capt. Argor saying that he can explain the local borders to anyone who wants. + + +You make the mistake of asking and after a very long a boring talk (maps appear to be Argor's passion but he is only sad he dosn't have an advanced editor to insert one here.) it is explained to you. To the North of your home city your borders are greatly extended due to the western mountain range as it slowly curves North and East and meets the sea. So since the mountains are hard to cross most of the year, your city controls all the encircled land, and since its safer there, that is where it has most of its farms and townships. Whereas to the south and east other nations have encroached significantly closer over the more open and less defensible terrain. Sadly he doesn't stop there and starts going into the different types of rocks in each area and you gather that this is some sort of hobby of his. + + +Worn out by the talk of maps you bed down for your first night in the newly claimed territory. Since Argor kept you up talking about the types of rock in different areas of the kingdom most of the sleeping spots are full. +> You dont really want to sleep near the Capt. in case he tries to talk about rocks again in the morning, sleep out at the edge of the camp. +You head right out to the edge of the camp and set up your bedroll, you don't mind this as your used to sleeping in the wild and there is still the ring of sentries beyond the reach of the light. You drift off to sleep watching the stars and thinking about whether you prefer hare or rabbit in stews. + + +You awake to a slight noise near your head. You groggily sit up and see one of the sentries has come just into the firelight and at least two men were walking past your bed roll in full gear towards him. They freeze as they see you move before one comes close. Its one of the men who approached you before. + + +He squats down beside you and quickly whispers "I'm sorry, we did give you a chance but theres no going back now." + + +You take a moment to wonder what he means since your still half asleep but before you can say anything you feel a wetness on your neck and chest. You try to speak but just gurgle blood and realize he had cut your throat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Sarge is a little off in his estimate of your departure time. It actually takes a month and a half to get your squad in shape. Its been a long wait but you are finally all ready to head out to the front to help in the war effort! + + +Your squad is woken by an early bell ringing somewhere in the barracks tower and you all assemble in your new polished steel armor. during your training you had all been measured and fitted out in strong forged steel, it turned out many of the iron mongers and jewelers of the city had turned their forges over to making weapons and armor so there was no shortage of equipment for the army. + + +The Sarge gives you all one last look over. + + +"Well its taken longer than I'd like but your all ready to serve your king! You're all heading out to the 3'rd to help in the construction of the new bases so our boys on the front have a good foothold in place before winter hits." + + +A soldier to the left pipes in "But I thought we already had bases on our borders?" + + +"Our Borders? Boy do you think the entire army has been sitting and waiting for you since the war started? They have been advancing solidly for the past 6 weeks. The new borders are near 2 weeks march further forward and THATS where we need the new bases." + + +You think to yourself that the army has made pretty amazing advances considering the fact that Carn was the kingdom that started the war. +> Head down and head out! The army awaits! +The Army must be pretty dam good since they have been advancing so far, you do have some niggling doubts about just HOW well they are doing but what is the point in raising them now? + + +You see a soldier you don't recognize step forward. + + +"Right then, I'm Capt. Argor. Since I took an arrow in the knee and had to come back here for treatment, I've been given the onerous task of accompanying you to the front lines to make sure you ladies don't get lost. You were all told to report here in full gear and with all your supplies so has anyone left anything behind that they just must run back to their rooms for? Hankies? Training Bra? No? Good, I might not have to babysit you all quite as much as I feared, lets head out cos this is gonna be a long trip for you city folk." +> To First Point +You are given a break for lunch with only cold rations, then double speed marched hard till dusk. The Capt. Pulls you all off the road beside a small stream and even though your all ready to collapse and pass out he has you form up. + + +"Right then, this is first point spring. A few generations back some officers from the 1st and 2nd companies were insulting the 3rd, saying we weren't real soldiers because we just built things while they won the war. Our officers didn't take too kindly to this and lets just say a bit of an argument broke out. After the tempers calmed a bit our men challenged the rest of the army to prove their supposed superiority" + + +He paused to give you all a big grin. + + +"Our boys in the 3rd work hard every day moving timber and stone, carrying loads long distances and almost never take days off. Their boys sit on their arses most of the time and only train short periods a day when they aren't actively attacking something. So our officers said they should all go for a little march. You all just made it here within daylight hours which isn't bad at all for this time of year. The 1st and 2nd company soldiers made it in about the same. OUR officers beat them by 3 hours and had a full camp set up and running by the time they limped in. They looked up from their fires and said this is normally just the first point the 3rd stop at before marching on but they had thought they should wait for them to catch up. Its been known as first point ever since. Now anyone joining the 3rd makes the march, so welcome to the 3rd gentlemen, now get our camp up!" + + +Relieved that Capt. Argor wont be calling you all girls for the rest of the march you all set up camp and get some fires going. You're just settling down beside your fire to have supper when a couple of other come over and join you. + + +"Hey there mind if we join you?" + + +You nod to a rock near the fire "Of course." + + +After sitting and eating for a minute one of the men turns to you, "We should be honest with you, we didn't join you just for the company this evening. We have had something on our minds recently and thought you might be thinking the same things as us." After a pause where he looks carefully at your expression he starts again "We are concerned about just how fast the war is going, how one-sided it is and maybe even some of the stories about why it started. We asked about it quietly before and the commander just told us its because we were better prepared than before and broke their defense lines. What do you think?" + + +You think slowly before the reply<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You get your things in order and even if you didn't make as much as you'd hoped for, you still added a few good weeks living expenses to your purse. + + +There have been rumors lately of bandit activity on the road south so you talk to the other workers there to see what their plans are. One group is planning to leave on the day they are laid off and make good time down to the city because they want to get back to family there. The other south bound group plans to stay until all the small jobs are finished around the camp for a few extra coins then have a much more leisurely trip with stops off at way houses and farms along the way. The second group will turn up to the city nearly two full weeks after the first but your in no rush yourself. +> Earn the last few coins and enjoy the leasurely trip back now you have no rush after all. +Your group numbers around a dozen workers and stays on over the weekend and most of the next week, dismantling old shacks and helping construct the permanent miners residences. The work is relatively easy after the hard labor of the mining and although the pay is low your still getting free food and a place to sleep. Once the work is done you all collect your pay from the overseer on the Friday, a week after the other group had left, and start a leisurely trip down the south road. + + +Your group sets an easy pace stopping for at least an hour each meal and taking the occasional day out in farms and way houses that some of the other men knew from previous trips. You don't encounter any or the rumored bandits on the road but a dozen well built and fairly well armed men must make a less appetizing target for bandits. All in all you make terrible time back to the city but you really don't care as you enjoy the company and find the lack of rush very relaxing. + + +Since you have plenty of time you all discuss future plans, some are just going to sit out the winter in the city living off their wages then head back out to new mines. A few are lifers and will be clocking in with their guild as soon as they get back ready to be sent on the next job and a couple like you are going to take a year or two out, one even gives you a name to ask about a flat in the Iron district. + + +Its only when you all wake one morning expecting to see your first glimpse of the far off city in the dawn light and instead see a plume of pure black rising miles into the sky that you all start rushing back to the city as fast as you can. + + + +> Blackened Homecoming +Your group practically runs the entire way back to the city making it back well before the sun is at its peak. You all go through the main gates into the Iron district and down towards the source of the smoke. It quickly becomes clear that its the old District, the area you grew up and where you know your closest friend should be running his fathers tavern. as you get close to the wall separating the districts of the city you start to meet groups of people just standing and staring, all seemingly in shock. Most are the better dressed of the affluent Iron district but you see the occasional Old district dwellers, standing alone or in twos and threes, but all equally lost or in shock. + + +You approach the nearest group and ask what is going on. + + +"Fire, just a bloody huge fire. It spread in seconds. we didn't have time to do anything. Just ran. We were bringing some fabrics up from the dock, only reason we made it, we were only one street from the gate. Oh God.." + + +You leave the man as he sinks to the ground and stares towards the high walls. + + +You had only been looking at the people and the smoke before but now you just stared blankly towards where the wall separated the districts and just see an orange glow over the wall with plumes of black filling the air above it. Thinking of you friend and his tavern located close to the docks you sprint down to the gates but once you get there you find them closed and barred shut. grabbing the nearest guard you shout for them to be open so you can get to your friend but he just stares blankly back at you obviously shocked dumb then walks away. The gate captain walks over and tells you that if anyone is still in there and didn't get out before the gates had to be shut, that there was no chance of them being alive. You start to tell him that he is wrong and needs to open the gates when he takes you over to them and tells you to put a hand on them. + + +You reach out and feel the gates metal almost hot enough to burn you. The captain quietly tells you that the fire started late the last evening. It came at the worst possible time. it had been dry for weeks and wooden buildings had been built right from the shore to the base of the wall, all stocked full of the years produce, hay, wheat, pelts and oils. most of it flammable. The wind blowing in from the sea had fanned it into an inferno almost as soon as the first warehouses had gone up. It had spread unnaturally quickly and only the closing of the huge gates had stopped it spreading through into this district too. The gates would stay closed until the embers were cold, and that could take a couple of days at least without any rain to quench them. + + +You stand and stare over the wall for what seems like an eternity then quietly turn and walk back up into the Iron district. You take your road companions advice and speak to the man he mentioned about a flat and find that he did have one free. You agree to the price almost without listening then buying a cheap bottle of mead you head back out to watch the place you grew up burn down to the ashes before collapsing into your bed long evening fell.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You think to yourself that with the rumors of a new mine opening that it might be best to catch this group up and see if they know anything about it. You set off at a fast pace to catch them up. + + +By mid morning you see a dust cloud ahead of you on the road so you keep your fast pace up till you get close enough to make out the group. + + +Its getting close to midday before you get close enough to realize who it is your chasing. Its a group of miners! You quickly conclude that they must be the hired hands sent to get the mine up and running so you approach them to see if you can find out more. + + +As you catch up to the rear of the pack some of them hail you. You respond in kind then fall in beside the rear couple and start chatting. You learn that there are about 50 of them in the group including all the skilled workers the mine needs but that they would be happy to have you along as an unskilled hand. Its not going to be as much money but they tell you that they have sent their mine guards off ahead to make the area ahead safe so there isn't any way to get ahead and get a better job. + + + +> It's not worth it, Start your journey south +Having decided to head back south you set off back the way you came. As you near the turn off to you old camp you see a new sign has been erected pointing the way to the new mine, a sure indicator that new guards and an official are there now. That means no easy nights rest there as they are always careful to keep hangers on and travelers well away from the mines "to keep them from getting any ideas about the silver" as you were once told. + + +You camp off the other side of the road then continue south in the morning. +> The South Road +As you start down the southern road you think to yourself that it's been such a long time since you were back in the city that you're not sure that you'll even recognize it. Yet, despite all the supposed changes and improvements, one thing that would never change is the Old Quarter on the south bank where the river joins the sea. For as long as anyone could remember, the wooden buildings had stood virtually unchanged as the rest of the city rose and fell with the economy and rulers of the time. The Old Quarter was filled with dock-side housing, markets and way-stations for travellers; and it had been your home before you left to find work. + + +Having done your time in the mines and come away with a reasonably full purse you don't feel the need to hurry as you walk, so you are enjoying the experience of not having to rush to get to your next job. You don't see any signs of other travellers until early evening when a mid-sized group of workers and a few guards pass, marching double time to the north. + + +You carry on till it"s nearly dark and set up camp in some woods beside the road. +> Morning on the south road +You quickly pack up your camp and set off south just as dawn reaches over the horizon, then realize ruefully that you could have slept in. As you walk, you think on other habits you've picked up in the mines. Most were useful but getting up at dawn and sleeping at dusk would be pointless in the city where everyone rises late... + + +You are so engrossed in your thoughts that you barely notice the two figures on horseback when they join the road not far ahead of you and start moving south at a slightly slower pace than yourself. + + +You come out of your thoughts with a start as you notice them barely twenty paces ahead of you. Reflexively, your hand drifts down to your knife, just in case. But just as quickly you realize they are dressed as local land owners and one is a woman so you relax and hail them. + + +"Hey there, heading down to the city?" + + +They turn back to you and both smile before the man replies "Of course, there isn't too much else this way but we would be happy for some company if you'd like to join us?" + + +You quickly catch up then fall in with them. You pass the time in conversation and learn that they are indeed local land owners heading to their house in the city for a few weeks. You tell them that you're just out from the mines and heading back for a well-earned rest. The day passes with you trading minor pleasantries and you agree to share a camp near the road for the evening. + + +It's just unfortunate that as you take out your sleeping roll the man clubs you behind the head and rides back north with the woman and almost all your belongings as you lie unconscious on the ground beside the fire. +> A Painful Morning +You wake beside the cold ashes of the small fire only wearing your shirt, trousers and boots. Everything else, including all your coin, has been taken. You curse yourself for trusting the couple from the night before simply because one was a woman and try to take stock. + + +You can't head North again, as in your current state you probably won't find another job for weeks and you can't even feed yourself so you're left with three choices: tightening your belt (well holding your trousers tight as your belt has been taken too) and heading to the city as fast as you can to hope for work/food there; hunting after the people that robbed you; or looking for the first trail off the road that might lead to a farm where you can ask for help or some work in exchange for food. +> Go After The Robbers +You think to yourself "Screw this, I worked too hard to give up all that money so easily!" You head north after the robbers, keeping just off the road in the trees in case they are waiting for you. + + +You follow their trail north for nearly the whole day until you find them leading off towards where the couple had first entered the road. You know since they were on horseback that they probably made it back the same evening, so you hope that after a whole day they would have become complacent. + + +You decide that: +> They are going to be complacent and you are a decent fighter, straight down the track after them! +You think you could take them in a clean fight as the woman seemed small and the man didn't seem like much of a fighter - He had just taken you by surprise before. You start quickly down the trail after the marks left by the horse and after half an hour you see signs of smoke ahead + + +Looking through the trees, you see the woman grooming her mount and the man sitting by the fire, both completely unaware. You stride out into the small clearing and walk purposefully towards the sitting man. + + +The woman looks over at you and you hear her say "Oh dear, this isn't very good, is it?". The man glances up at you as you approach and says, "Not good at all," as he starts to rise to his feet. + + +You laugh and say "You're right! It's not very good for you. You picked the wrong man to rob!" You smile and start to take the last steps towards the man, but as you raise your fists you feel a strange sensation, like being pushed from the side. You hear the woman saying "Oh honey, we meant 'not good for you'. Bandits never just work in twos and this trap was intended for someone else. Since you don't have anything more of value we just need you out of the way fast". + + +You look down at the crossbow bolt planted firmly in your side just in time to see a second one appearing in your chest with a dull thud. You sink to the ground. It all goes dark as you feel yourself hoisted up and carried into the trees. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You think to yourself "Screw this, I worked too hard to give up all that money so easily!" You head north after the robbers, keeping just off the road in the trees in case they are waiting for you. + + +You follow their trail north for nearly the whole day until you find them leading off towards where the couple had first entered the road. You know since they were on horseback that they probably made it back the same evening, so you hope that after a whole day they would have become complacent. + + +You decide that: +> Even if they are complacent, best you play it safe and try to sneak up on them through the trees and shrubs along side the track. +You've decided to play it safe, who knows if they were working alone and they may be better armed than before. Plus it would be sweet to see the mans face as he first realizes your there when you knock him out just like he did to you. + + +You sneak along near the track for close to an hour when you see smoke rising ahead from some trees. You push ahead being careful not to make any noise and approach the clearing slowly. You see the man and woman there near the fire talking and overhear snatches of conversation. You cant make it all out but it sounds like they are talking about a trap and waiting for someone. + + +Are they talking about robbing you or a new trap for someone else? + + +Unsure about their intent you think its best you take them by surprise either way and lift a hefty looking branch then sneak into the clearing at an angle so their backs are mostly turned to you. You approach as silently as if you were stalking a deer and slowly lift it above your head. You smile to yourself then call out "Hey!" just as you swing. The man looks up in shock just as the branch connects, knocking him out cold. + + +"Thats one down" you say as you turn to the woman and heft the branch. The look of surprise on her face is priceless! "How did you..." she starts but you cut her off. "Lets just say you picked the wrong guy to rob, now I don't make a habit of hitting women but I can easily make an exception so bring me everything you took, along with some food to make up for my inconvenience and I'll be going." + + +She just stares and asks "But how did you get them all with just a stick?" + + +You look at her blankly for a second and see her break into a smile "Ooohhh, you just snuck into the clearing didn't you. I'm sorry honey but you should have realized we don't work alone, even if my guards don't make such good sentries". + + +You glance at the trees just as several men with crossbows come running out and take aim at you. The woman backs away from you. You think it was probably a bad idea to chase after robbers in the middle of nowhere as the men open fire rendering you into a human pin-cushion.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wake beside the cold ashes of the small fire only wearing your shirt, trousers and boots. Everything else, including all your coin, has been taken. You curse yourself for trusting the couple from the night before simply because one was a woman and try to take stock. + + +You can't head North again, as in your current state you probably won't find another job for weeks and you can't even feed yourself so you're left with three choices: tightening your belt (well holding your trousers tight as your belt has been taken too) and heading to the city as fast as you can to hope for work/food there; hunting after the people that robbed you; or looking for the first trail off the road that might lead to a farm where you can ask for help or some work in exchange for food. +> Quick March to the City +You decide there isn't any other sensible option but to get to the city, and fast. You set off down the road at a fast walk and only stop to drink water from any streams or wells you see. You don't pass anyone else until a few days later you can see the city ahead in the far distance and collapse on the road exhausted. + + +Luckily you fell near a well used field and the farmers load you onto their cart and take you the rest of the way into the city with a piece of bread to try to nibble on. + + +Once inside the gates they leave you off and after you thank them profusely, they head back out to the fields. You use the last of your energy to get yourself through the now alien feeling streets to your old area of the city and are relived to find it almost completely unchanged. You go to an old way house you knew in the hopes that the same owner was still running the place. + + +As you walk in the door a man behind a bar looks up and stares right at you for a full minute before saying "Well this is some triumphant return, look at the state of you!" + + +You start to explain but the man cuts you off and sends you upstairs to a small room to clean and says to come down for some hot food when you no longer smell and look like a beaten up pile of crap. + + +Once cleaned up and with a good meal inside you you tell your old friend the whole story and and he gives you two options. Work has been going well for him so he could give you a small room and meals and hire you for a low wage till you get back on your feet or you could up into the Iron district where the merchants and barracks have been hiring recently. +> The Iron District +You know that there is the option to join the guards as they are hiring at the moment, you'll get a basic wage but you have a bunk in the barracks and 3 good meals a day. Or you can approach the guild or large mining companies with your experience and hope for a starter job with one of them. + + + +> You head for the barracks as the guard seems like the fastest way to get a roof overhead and food in your belly. +You talk to the guard Standing outside the barracks, the home of the city guards and he directs you round to the recruiters. The Captain there looks you over once and asks your story. You explain in light detail that you had been working the mines for years but after being robbed had nothing left so you thought the guards would be a good way to get back on your feet. He thinks for less than ten seconds before passing you a quill to sign on the line telling you that many men had joined for worse reasons and that they needed more men on patrol. + + +You sign up and after a few days initial training you're attached to a squad and send out for your first training duty. You have no weapons while in training but you are given city guard leather armor and helm and sent out for, as its summed up to you, "Stand behind the real guards in your armor and try not to look stupid for your first week". You manage this with flying colors (especially the not looking stupid part) then for your next training rotation your given a choice by your sergeant. + + +You can join the training squad patrolling old town docks, the "walk up and down in armor and not look stupid" shift as he puts it (since you wont be armed for at least a month). + + +Or the Iron district guard training squad, the "stand out of sight and don't interfere with the cites working people" shift. +> The dock patrole, at least you get to walk up and down... +Well, you were right, you did indeed get to walk up and down and it was passable exercise... + + +Lets face it, its not what you wanted from your life, BUT after a couple more weeks you will become a full guard, proper wages and you get to have a better say in your shifts, not a bad job in all, just the training period to get through. + + +The week goes as fast as the first one and the roof over head and hearty hot meals three times a day doesn't hurt matters at all. You actually take a liking to the patrol there as you get to stop and chat to the sailors and vendors along the dockside. The sailors there are self policing as a rule so you rarely have to step in to do anything dangerous. + + +The weeks pass and as you become a fully fledged member of the guard you make the docks your regular patrol, its a lot longer of a walk from the barracks on the other side of the Iron district but you like the atmosphere and relaxed attitude of the work. The occasional sneak thief or pick pocket are the worst of the criminals on your watch and you get to know the locals on your rounds on a first name basis, you even have time and enough spare coin to stop in for drinks with your old friend on occasion after work and he seems happy about how you landed on your feet. + + +Its really actually starting to look up for you as time passes, you have some small savings building up again, a good job that keeps you fit and your making friends with the other guards and the locals, who like having the guards around even if they aren't usually needed. You even foster some ideas about trying to stay in the guards and move up the ranks as you watch the two large barges from Carn approaching the docks. You think they are approaching a little fast but with all the minor disputes lately they are probably just trying to bluster and throw their weight around with the smaller fishing boats near the dock. + + +Just as you think about their speed you see the barge furl sails and out oars to turn and think to yourself that you were right when you realize the other had gone full sail and had smoke rising from the deck. You rush to the dock edge with the other guards and a few sailors as you watch its accelerated approach. you all realize its going to ram the old wooden dock about the same time as you see a full scale fire burst out onto the deck. You quickly look for the other ship but it had reversed course and is making haste away from the docks. + + +The sailors run for their ships and try to get them off the docks and you start forcing the crowd of gawkers away from the danger area but with the burning ship under full sail with the wind off the sea its only a few seconds more before it plows into the old docks and tears through them, crashing into two warehouses as it runs aground. + + +You start to cry out a warning as you see the ship tilt to one side spilling burning barrels full of oils and tars. But they explode as they hit the ground taking all the barrels filling the ship with them in one huge fiery explosion. You don't even have time to turn away as the blast smashes you through buildings killing you instantly and starting a fire that would incinerate the whole of the Old District<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You talk to the guard Standing outside the barracks, the home of the city guards and he directs you round to the recruiters. The Captain there looks you over once and asks your story. You explain in light detail that you had been working the mines for years but after being robbed had nothing left so you thought the guards would be a good way to get back on your feet. He thinks for less than ten seconds before passing you a quill to sign on the line telling you that many men had joined for worse reasons and that they needed more men on patrol. + + +You sign up and after a few days initial training you're attached to a squad and send out for your first training duty. You have no weapons while in training but you are given city guard leather armor and helm and sent out for, as its summed up to you, "Stand behind the real guards in your armor and try not to look stupid for your first week". You manage this with flying colors (especially the not looking stupid part) then for your next training rotation your given a choice by your sergeant. + + +You can join the training squad patrolling old town docks, the "walk up and down in armor and not look stupid" shift as he puts it (since you wont be armed for at least a month). + + +Or the Iron district guard training squad, the "stand out of sight and don't interfere with the cites working people" shift. +> The Iron District shift, leaning quietly against the district wall for a week is at least easy... +Well, you were right, you did indeed get to rest... and be bored... + + +Lets face it, its not what you wanted from your life, BUT after a couple more weeks you become a full guard with proper wages and you get to have a better say in your shifts, not a bad job in all, just the training period to get through. + + +The week goes as fast as the first one and the roof over head and hearty hot meals three times a day doesn't hurt matters at all. You actually take a liking to the shift there as you get to stop and chat to the workers and vendors along the roadside, and the guilds there are self policing as a rule so you rarely have to step in to do anything dangerous. + + +The weeks pass and as you become a fully fledged member of the guard you make the Iron district your regular patrol (yep the real guards get to walk around the district). Its short walk from the barracks and you like the atmosphere and relaxed attitude of the work. The occasional sneak thief or pick pocket are the worst of the criminals on your watch and you get to know the locals on your rounds on a first name basis. You even have time and enough spare coin to stop in for drinks with your old friend down in the Old District on occasion after work and he seems happy about how you landed on your feet. + + +Its really actually starting to look up for you as time passes, you have some small savings building up again, a good job that keeps you fit and your making friends with the other guards and the locals, who like having the guards around even if they aren't usually needed. You even foster some ideas about trying to stay in the guards and move up the ranks as you walk alongside another guard down the main market street. + + +You both head back to the barracks when you're relieved as your's is the early shift that day and your entertaining the idea of another night down at your friends tavern- you've even got some friends from the guards liking the place enough to make it a regular thing for your patrol. You're just getting in the door when you hear mayhem breaking out in the barracks. + + +You push into the hall to hear the guards all shouting about a fire in the old town. You rush outside and head at a dead run to the speedily growing black cloud above the Old District. +> Reaching the Gates +You pull up from your run a couple of hundred feet from the gates and the wall. You just stare blankly towards where the wall separated the districts and just see a fierce orange and yellow glow over the wall occasionally punctuated by large bursts of flame with plumes of black filling the air above it. You sprint down to the gates but once you get there you find them closed and barred shut. grabbing the nearest guard you shout for them to be open so you can get to your friend but he just stares blankly back at you obviously shocked dumb then walks away. The gate captain walks over and tells you that if anyone is still in there and didn't get out before the gates had to be shut, that there was no chance of them being alive. You start to tell him that he is wrong and needs to open the gates when he takes you over to them and tells you to put a hand on them. + + +You reach out and feel the gates metal almost hot enough to burn you. The captain quietly tells you that the fire came at the worst possible time. it had been dry for weeks and wooden buildings had been build right from the shore to the base of the wall, all stocked full of the years produce, hay, wheat, pelts and oils. most of it flammable. The wind blowing in from the sea had fanned it into an inferno almost as soon as the first warehouses had gone up. It had spread unnaturally quickly and only the closing of the huge gates had stopped it spreading through into this district too. The gates would stay closes until the embers were cold, and that could take a couple of days at least without any rain to quench them. + + +You head slowly back to your room and collapse into bed unsure what to do next. +> Black morning +You awake in the morning unsure what to do. Your plans had been of an easy year living off your money and you could still do it, prices would probably go up for a time but you'd still comfortably now that your settled. But you were now sure you'd lost any place that you had called home and your closest friend in the fire so you at least wanted to find out what had happened. + + +You grab some food then head out to start trying to ask questions and see if anyone is the wiser about what had happened to cause the fire, and to do a last look through the survivors for any sign of your friend. + + +You ask several guards but most don't seem to know any more than you do. Eventually you see a guard that isn't a shell shocked as the rest and he tells you that the captain over at the military end of the barracks has all the information about the fire and that you should speak to him so you head there to see what he knows. + + +'The Barracks' as it is generally know does contain the city guard's barracks but also the military side of things, the army barracks, its armory, offices and everything else it needed all in one giant building that straddled and made up part of the wall between the iron and stone districts. You quickly see a small group of people talking to soldiers outside one of the entrances and approach them to hear what is going on. + + +Its one of the captains explaining the fire to them, a few minor details extra but basically what you had heard before. once he is done you ask him about how it started. He looks you over then send you in and tells you to talk to the man at the desk, first room on the right. You enter and realize you not left with much choice as to where to turn since there is a group of soldiers blocking the corridor a few meters away with only one door standing open between you and them. You enter and approach the man looking at you from behind the desk. + + +"What can I do for you?" + + +"I want to know how the fire started." + + +The man seems mildly amused by your abrupt response but any trace of amusement quickly vanishes as he replies. + + +"A ship packed with flammable fuel was set alight and rammed into our docks. the fire was deliberate." + + +Stunned by the sudden revelation you ask "Are your sure? wait are you just telling everyone this? wont it cause a panic?" + + +"There's no point trying to keep it a secret, half the fishing fleet saw it happen as did many of the survivors that ran into the sea and were picked up the by the ships, the entire city will know in two days at the most." + + +"But who would do it, what is there to gain from burning down old district?" + + +"We think it was Carn, at least the burning ship and the one that had been accompanying it bore their colours" + + +"But don't we just have some minor trade disputes with them why would they do this!" + + +"Well long story short we started full maritime trading 3 years ago, then two years ago some minor trade problems began, then it was about land, finally about fishing rights. things had been getting tense for months with armed ships keeping fishing boats company for protection and guards on our borders but no-one expected this. They have been sent ravens with questions about the ships but they will of course deny all knowledge, then it will be war. The king has already started recruiting to replace the men lost in the fire and more to fill out the army." + + +You just stand unsure what to say, should you hate an enemy you don't know for what they did? Denounce their tactics, or just avoid the war and try and rebuild a life in the city. + + +"So son" the commander stands up "we are still recruiting and the army wage is just as good as the miners one. You want to enlist?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know that there is the option to join the guards as they are hiring at the moment, you'll get a basic wage but you have a bunk in the barracks and 3 good meals a day. Or you can approach the guild or large mining companies with your experience and hope for a starter job with one of them. + + + +> You head for the guild as you know your experience could get you a good position if you push it enough. +You approach the miners guild with the hopes that your experience will land you some work fast, but your hope doesn't last long. They are happy enough with your resume and they even have a couple on people on staff who can vouch for your work but there are no new jobs right now and no major movements planned until the spring. They put you on the books and they guarantee you a skilled position by the time the winter snows melt but that isn't going to put food on your plate right now. + + + +> Your on the books now so what harm is there in taking up your friends offer for a few weeks? +Life isn't so bad working at the inn, you put in all the hard work required and your friend, apart from many sarcastic comments and jokes, is a good boss. You have a room and food again and start saving a small amount of coin up in the hopes of buying some new cloths and getting a better paid job eventually. After a few months you think you've saved up enough to make a go of it again in a richer part of town and let you friend know your plans. + + +You thank him for doing so much for you without really asking much in return as you know the work you did would never normally earn a wage along with room and food but he just waves you off and says the word "friends". + + +You arrange to finish off the week and move out as soon as you find a new job and new place to live. + + +That evening you both sit down to share a drink and talk about how to make easy money (your favorite topic since you were 10 and he was 15 working for his dad in this very bar). You glance out the window and comment that its awfully bright out for the time of day when you hear the first screams. + + +You both rush out to see a fire sweeping through the wooden buildings of the old quarter. you both turn to run but there is a wind coming off the sea pushing the fire on and the old wooden buildings are going up like kindling. In your blind sprint you both almost make it to the walls dividing the city's districts when the flames overtake you and the smoke makes you choke and fall. Its not long before you are engulfed entirely in flames.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wake beside the cold ashes of the small fire only wearing your shirt, trousers and boots. Everything else, including all your coin, has been taken. You curse yourself for trusting the couple from the night before simply because one was a woman and try to take stock. + + +You can't head North again, as in your current state you probably won't find another job for weeks and you can't even feed yourself so you're left with three choices: tightening your belt (well holding your trousers tight as your belt has been taken too) and heading to the city as fast as you can to hope for work/food there; hunting after the people that robbed you; or looking for the first trail off the road that might lead to a farm where you can ask for help or some work in exchange for food. +> Look for a Farm +You start walking south, keeping an eye out for any farm trails or paths that might lead somewhere. You pass several small dirt tracks but most look more like animal trails and after your run in with the robbers, you're loath to risk them. After a few hours you pass near a stream. The water looks fresh and clean, so you take the time for a quick wash-up and a long, cool drink before you continue on. + + +Despite your searching, it is only a couple of hours before the light starts to fade that you come across a well-worn track leading east off the road. Its the right direction for farm country and it seems to have seen recent cart traffic, so you decide its worth a look and start down the trail. + + +After an hour or so the track passes through a thick line of trees and you see fields beginning in front of you. It looks like a large square holding of land surrounding a large old barn and house in the middle. Several men working the fields look up as you approach and lean on their scythes and hoes, keeping a watchful eye on the trees behind you. A man walks out from the door of the house while you're still a few metres away. He smiles and greets you cordially but you're somewhat distracted by the loaded crossbow he is holding casually at his side. + + +You explain your situation to him. He eyes you shrewdly and asks a few questions about the details of your story. After a few moments of consideration, he waves the men back to work and takes you inside. + + +You get a small apology for the crossbow but he points out that, as you learned to your own loss, there are a lot of bandits about recently and you can never be too careful. That comment at least makes you smile as you clearly hadn't been very careful at all. He gives you some hot food and a bed and leaves you to recover a bit. + + +The next day you work hard in the fields helping the other workers with the carrying and loading of carts then at noon they set off in a small convoy to the city to sell goods with you riding along. "So you reach it in one piece" as the Farmer had said. +> Reaching the city +It was a long trip on the carts but the farm-hands made good company and at least you had food. They take you with them to the markets first and you help unload as thanks. Then after thanking the farmer again for his kindness, you begin to make your way through the strangely alien streets toward the area where you grew up. The city has grown so much in your absence that you had to ask directions several times before reaching the arch that has always marked the entrance to the Old Quarter. On the other side of the arch you are relived to find it almost completely unchanged. You go to an old way house you knew in the hopes that the same owner was still running the place. + + +As you walk in the door, the man behind a bar looks up and stares right at you for a full minute before saying "Well this is some triumphant return, look at the state of you!" + + +You start to explain, but the man cuts you off and sends you upstairs to a small room where you are able to clean up a little. A few moments later, the man returns with change of clean, serviceable clothes and invites you to come down for some hot food when you no longer smell and look like crap. + + +Once cleaned up and with a good meal inside you you tell your old friend the whole story and and he gives you two options. Work has been going well for him so he has offered you room and board in exchange for some low wage bar work till you get back on your feet or he suggests you could also try your luck up in the Iron district where the merchants and barracks have been hiring recently.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You thought you had heard some noises during the night but there are no signs of other people in the cave. Sadly, your snares are empty too so it'll be another day of dried meat unless you find a traveller on the road today. + + +You cover the embers of the fire and walk back to the road. Once you reach it, you see a lot of fresh footprints and realize you must have missed a group that passed during the night. The tracks lead North so you follow them for a short distance on the road before coming across their abandoned camp on the edge of the woods. + + +A quick look tells you they packed up and started their march North again several hours ago. + + + +> Search the camp remains for any valubles or food +Having decided to search the camp you reason that you should do it properly. You set a few snares in the trees nearby then start going over the camp carefully. You estimate that 40 to 60 people were here and they had lit a good number of fires so you search carefully around them and search in the grass beside the indents of the bedrolls. + + +You spent a couple of hours looking but apart from two miss-laid copper coins you find little of worth. Still, copper coins add up and you know what its like to go hungry so you add them to your pouch and collect up your snares. The only other thing you take is an old leather water bottle which you tie to your belt and remind yourself to fill it the next time you come across a stream. +> The road North again +Having finished searching the camp, you start North again on the road. You still see signs of the group ahead of you but they have well over half a days hard march on you and judging by how late they camped and how early they set off you decide that you won't be able to catch them without running for the rest of the day, and your not willing to try that just for some company. So, you set off at a steady pace North again looking for any signs of a turn off that may lead to the mine. + + +You spend an uneventful 2 days on the road, stopping occasionally to camp and refill your supplies but on the 3rd day you finally see signs that the group ahead of you turned off into the foothills west of the road. + + +Reasoning that such a large group must have a reason for heading into the hills, you decide that they are probably the crew for the new mine and that you've found the entrance. Knowing that with such a large group already there most jobs will be filled you can follow them and hope for some paid manual labor or you can give up on it and head South for the city. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You turn Northward up the road thinking that the rumors of a new mine are too good an opportunity to pass up, and hey, even if it's false you don't mind spending an extra week or two on the road. + + +You pull out some of your dried meat and start eating as you walk, thinking you should probably set some traps and snares when you make camp that night to stock up some fresh meat. You spend an uneventful day walking North and see no other travellers. An hour or so before dusk you start looking for a place to camp. You can camp on the roadside, head into the trees to the east for cover while you sleep or walk an hour or so to the foothills west and hope for a spring or cave. +> There's a good chance of catching food in the trees, head East +You decide a night under the trees and a good chance of catching food are too good an opportunity to pass up so you head east into the trees till you're well away from the road. You set up a small camp and fire and set up snares out in the trees. + + +Not long after darkness closed in you hear some noise in the direction of the road and go investigate. You caught a Hare! you quickly skin and gut it and are about to head back to the fire when you hear noise from further towards the road. You walk quietly closer to investigate and see a large group setting up camp on the roadside. + + +You're about to leave the cover of the trees to go greet them when you over hear their leader telling a small group to go on ahead and prepare the mine camp. They are the workers sent to open the mine your looking for! You do a fast headcount and realize about 50 workers are camped there and many look experienced. + + +You decide that they must be the main team sent up to get the mining started and realize that they will have enough skilled workers to fill most of the mining jobs there, but unskilled labor is nearly always welcome- if on a much lower pay. + + +You think about it and you decide that you can either try to join up with them and risk the lower pay, or, you can try and beat the group sent on ahead and try and secure a better job at the mine site before word reaches them of their workers being so close. +> Race them to the camp! +You slip away from the workers camp fires and move quickly to your own, you kick dirt over your small fire and quickly collect in your snares. You wrap the hare in some leather and put it into your pack with everything else, you'll have to cook it later. + + +You set out at a jog through the trees, you know the road keeps straight for more miles than you can see ahead so you move until you can just see glimpses of it through the trees and settle into a fast jog. + + +You keep your pace up for several hours, you know it must be after midnight now and your pretty sure you passed the men on the road so you take a short rest below an old oak tree and hope they break for sleep too. + + +In the morning you wake with the first light and quickly set off, you set a more measured pace, walking fast but not quite jogging yet. You walk as fast as you dare through the day barely taking breaks apart from to eat some dried meats. An hour or two after night sets in you decide if you haven't put some distance between you and them by now you never would, so you build a fire to cook and eat your hare then settle down to sleep. + + + +> The Search +You rise at first light again, and quickly cover your fire with dirt. You head onto the road and search carefully for any sign of other men passing but find none. You must still be ahead of them, but you don't know by how much. You set off North again keeping your eye on the hills and woods to your left looking for any sight of a camp entrance or track leading away from the road. + + +After a few hours you come across a small track leading into the hills through a copse of trees and on into the bare foothills. Its a very small track and could easily just be an animal trail but you can never be sure as people are always loath to leave any large signs of a new mine until the have laid full claim to it and got a fair number of guards in place. You spend a few minutes trying to check for other clues but in the end cant decide if it was made by men turning off the road of just some animals. + + +You could follow it further into the hills and check it out but it would be slow going and if it turned out not to be the mine it would loose you most of a days walking. +> Risk the trail +You decide the trail is worth the risk, its a little bigger than most animal trails and with the lengths some claimants go to to hide new mine sites it could well be the one. + + +You strike off onto the trail and after about half an hour it widens a little and you start to get more confident that you've made the right choice. A little more walking brings you to a man leaning against a tree and you think you can see a small amount of smoke over the hill behind him. + + +You approach the man as he hails you and asks your name and reason for being here. Its not the politest of greetings but you explain about coming off another mine job and hearing rumor of one here. The man looks at you for a while then tells you to follow him. + + +You follow him for 15 minutes or so till you've passed round one of the larger foothills and you come across a very small camp build around a very shallow mine entrance. You smile to yourself- Its the new mine, barely started and with only 10 or so men in sight you've beaten the others here! + + +Your led up to a large man standing over a fire and are introduced to the Overseer of the new mine. +> The Overseer +You approach the Overseer who looks you over and repeats the questions about who you are and how you turned up at his mine entrance. You explain to him that you were a Skilled Laborer on a mine further south and that your old overseer had directed you here. Your a little liberal about the the date you left there and the amount of detail you had been told so he wasn't suspicious about your spring ahead of his expected workers. he thinks for a while and you think he has believed you. He presses for some details about your previous boss and the mine you were at then asked a lot of technical questions and posed several hypothetical situations about building mines and construction issues. It takes nearly an hour for him to be satisfied that you are who you say but finally tells you that he is from the same guild as your own boss and knows him well, since you convinced him of your ability and that your old boss recommended you he says he might take you on as a mid level skilled worker since he was a week behind and the men he had been expecting still hadn't turned up. + + +He walks off to a large, nice looking tent set up beside what looks like a half constructed stone house set off to the side of the mine entrance, he goes inside briefly then returns and tells you that the owner had agreed and you were hired, he takes you to the tent and you meet a middle aged but still fairly youthful looking man studying charts of the area with rock samples spread around the desk in front of him. he looks at you quickly and smiles + + +"So your the man who may get my mine back on schedule?" + + +"I didn't know you were behind sir but I will defiantly do what I can if that is the case." + + +he smile again and re-arranges some of the rocks before replying. "what do you make of this then?" + + +You look at the arrangement of rocks on the table laid over part of a map showing your camp. the ones near where you were standing and the mine entrance were a mix of broken granite, shale and other unimportant rock but two of the rocks lying over the hill the mine was starting into had a definite shine to them, you life them to look closer then after replacing them see there is a piece of normal granite placed between them. + + +Your about to say that there is defiantly silver in the hills when you stop to think why he would want such a simple answer so instead you reply + + +"You believe there are two main lodes of silver running into the hill and plan to open them both up from a large forked main tunnel instead of a single straight entrance with branches?" + + +"Ha! got it in one! its going to be harder on the crew building the supports but I think it will get both lodes producing ore much faster and if my hunch is correct the lodes are going to diverge more the further we get into the hills, I'm betting that our short entrance tunnel will be running the equivalent of two normal by the time we are fully up and working. Right since your here you can start today, sign this contract then get over to the loggers behind the hill and started on directing them to make the struts, Slarn there will give you the initial measurements." +> Beginning the mine +You immediately sign the contract put in front of you after a cursory glance confirms that its a skilled labor contract for a good wage and lasting at least until the mine is fully operational. You follow the Overseer out and round to where the three man logging team has stacked a small pile of trees ready for cutting and shaping into the mines first struts. + + +The overseer turns to you "Right then these three have cut enough trees the past week to get us a good five meters into hill down both of the primary forks off the entrance shaft. But since we haven't had any skilled workers here apart from myself they haven't had the directions to get the struts started, so while I get back to the entrance shaft you get them moving double time." + + +He hands you a slate with the tunnel dimensions chalked on it and you quickly see the man knows what he is doing, he has laid out precise numbers and details of the style and shape of Strut he needs for each section. You quickly head over to the workers who had heard the entire conversation so to save your self time you quickly tell them your name and take the straight over to the logs. You set two of them to separate them according to diameter and wood type and keep the other with you to measure out the wood ready for cutting. + + +You've gotten the logs organized and marked out which ones to use for the braces and struts when you hear a small commotion from the camp at the mine entrance, guessing that this is the guards arriving you carry on working and get the men sawing the first struts according to your markings. The days work goes well and by evening you know you've pushed the men a bit hard but you have several well cut lengths of wood ready for final shaping in the morning. + + +You head back into the camp and have your suspicions confirmed, the guards have set up tents near the entrance to the camp but they pay you little heed as you retire to one of the shacks set up for workers for the night. The next morning you get your small team working right after breakfast because you now that the full work group should be arriving that day or the one after at the latest and you need to make a good impression first. You get them ready and you join in so your all sawing and shaping the logs while its still dawn and by noon you have 2 sets or struts with lintels cut, shaped and ready to put it place. you know they aren't smoothly finished or treated but you've been told the gear to do that will be arriving with the main workforce so just before the lunch break you and your team take the first two sets round to the mine entrance and stack them just to the side ready to be used when needed. + + +The Overseer comes over and after inspecting the wood and the shape he admits he didn't expect you to have any ready until tomorrow but inquires about your choices. You tell him that you knew he wanted to get the entrance shaft in deeper as soon as possible so you chose the easier to work wood to make the temporary supports so the shaft could be continued in safety while your team cut and shaped the stronger woods for the permanent supports meaning they could be fully treated before being put in place, you also give a lot of credit to you small team for how hard they worked. Your fast work, choices and ability to give credit to your men where it was due seems to make the Overseers mind up about you and he gives you a pat on the shoulder before turning to walk back towards the mine, he calls back for your team to take a break, the main workforce will arrive any minute and he will be transferring you to the tunnel construction crew now that there are struts able to be used. + + +You know you've done well and that he will be giving you good jobs now you've proved yourself so you head over to the mess area to grab lunch with your team as you see the main workforce approaching the camp. +> The mine well underway +The day the mining company men had arrived you had been called into the owners tent, the owner, Overseer and leading men of the main work group were there and you appeared to be the topic of discussion. They were objecting to you being hired since according to their contract they should be filling all the skilled labor positions They were also trying to bring your abilities and experience into question. + + +You arrived as the overseer had just vouched for your knowledge and stated that you had the backing of a second guild overseer so even if they weren't happy about it that your skills and experience were accepted as fully capable for what you had been hired to do. As you entered the owner paused the discussion and called you over, then asked if the overseers description or your work with the small logging team had been accurate. You relay what had happened again and the owner seemed very pleased. The mining group however didn't and stated that even if you were good at the job, the owner was breaching the contract to give you a position over one of their men. + + +The owner clearly tired of the discussion by this point started casually questioning the work group leader. + + +"When exactly does our contract state that your group would arrive and begin construction?" + + +The man was smart enough to see were this was going to lead so carefully answered "One week ago today sir." + + +"So considering that I paid a hefty deposit to your company in advance, how much money have I lost and how far behind is my mine's construction due to your lateness?" + + +"The mine is almost a week behind sir, but the company will of course refund any loss of wages due to our late arrival. We were forced to wait while our supplies and gear was prepared for us." + + +"Never the less a full week is a pretty serious loss of coin and time for me and could easily be considered a breach of contract by your company, one that would enable me to cancel it for a full refund of deposit and hire someone else correct?" + + +The man, now clearly sweating looked like he was trying to find a way out but could only answer "That could be technically correct sir". + + +"So considering that point; can you really argue that it is outside my remit, that during the week you were not present and my mine was not being constructed that I hired a single skilled worker to aid in my mines initial opening?" + + +"No sir we wont object further" + + +"Perfect, now that this is settled don't worry because he hasn't stolen any of your men's jobs. I'll hire him as an assistant to my overseer so that wont be a problem will it?" + + +Obviously relieved that he didn't have a man out of a job he readily agreed and left the tent. + + +The owner and overseer finally turn to you and ask "well now that the work group is happy and you have suddenly been promoted you have a nice choice ahead of you. You did a good job with your decision about the struts so I'd be happy for you to oversee the logging operation, but most of your experience lies underground and putting the struts in place, which job do you want?" +> You pick the logging operation as overseeing it will keep you out of the way of the work group and you've already made a good impression there +You picked to run the logging group and have twelve men under your supervision plus the three who were there already. You send one of the experienced wood cutters to join your three and after briefly showing him what you had been doing there he quickly understands your system and gets started cutting and preparing the wood. The rest you organize into work teams and get them working on different stages of the process, some felling new trees, some stripping them and others cutting them to length for you final team to prepare, you make one experienced man in each group in charge of his team and your operation practically runs itself. You leave the small choices to the group leaders and spend your time ensuring that the final struts are up to specification and that you meet or surpass you daily quota of cut and treated supports for the mine. The overseer and owner seem happy with your work and leave you to make any decisions you feel necessary, just getting weekly reports and whatever you discuss directly with the overseer during the day. + + +As the weeks pass you all steadily work away and start logging smaller groups of trees near the mine to ensure a continuous supply of wood, you leave the choice of site up to the team leaders you assigned but you always take a cursory glance over them to make sure the trees are up to standard. + + +The mine has been progressing well, the main shafts are already going deep into the hill and side tunnels are being opened to chase any small seams off the main two. You've heard that a couple of the unskilled laborers have been tasked with digging out a particularly weak section of rock and your glad you above ground and not risking you life in a weak tunnel prone to cave in. + + +As the days pass you see one of your team bringing a tree over from the other side of the hill to your normal operation, you stop them to ask which trees they are felling and learn that its a small group of oak on the far side of the hill from the mine entrance. Realizing that some of the tunnels may have gone under in that direction you rush over just as two more trees are about to fall, as the smaller one hits the ground you feel it shaking and moving in an unnatural way. You break into a sprint and call for them to stop but its too late and the large oak falls and as it hits you hear a loud rumble and the whole hill shakes. + + +You realize you team has called a cave in. You run with them to the entrance as the whole camp arrives to asses what happened. Two workers were in the weak tunnel when the trees came down right above it, they were both crushed inside. + + +You weren't blamed for the incident and were just told to carry on, that accidents happen, but two men had died due to a mistake made by one of your teams. For the rest of the time you kept your head down and works as hard as you could making sure no more mistakes were made. +> Finishing the mining work +You kept your head down and worked hard for the rest of the time and not a single weak strut or badly treated piece of wood got past you after the accident. You were never blamed for the accident but you held yourself accountable and though your works was praised you didn't take as much enjoyment in it as you had before. + + +As the final day approached the Overseer called you into his now finished residence. You find him sitting behind a nice desk still covered with maps and charts and see a pretty girl who must be similar age to yourself sitting in a chair by a small log fire reading a book. You begin to wonder if she is the overseers reclusive daughter that the camp is full of rumors about when he waves you over. + + +"I'll be leaving for the city in two days, the day you will all be paid for your work. You did a great job for me and worked harder than any other man here although I know its because you've been blaming yourself for the accident in the tunnel. Your pay has been arranged for what was agreed but a generous personal bonus has been included. Now take tomorrow off as I know your teams are set up to run smoothly enough without you hovering over them for their last day." + + +You thank the owner and head back out into the camp, The overseer is waiting outside and gives you a nod + + +"Don't worry I'll keep an eye on you teams for you, you've worked yourself too hard these last weeks so enjoy your paid day off." + + +You thank him as well then wander over to the packed breakfast tables. You chat to the workers there, many of whom you've become passable friends with and inquire about their plans now the mine is about to close. + + +One group is planning to leave on the day they are laid off and make good time down to the city because they want to get back to family there, while the other south bound group plans to stay until all the small jobs are finished around the camp for a few extra coins then has a much more leisurely trip with stops off at way houses and farms along the way. The second group will turn up to the city nearly two full weeks after the first but you're in no rush yourself.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The day the mining company men had arrived you had been called into the owners tent, the owner, Overseer and leading men of the main work group were there and you appeared to be the topic of discussion. They were objecting to you being hired since according to their contract they should be filling all the skilled labor positions They were also trying to bring your abilities and experience into question. + + +You arrived as the overseer had just vouched for your knowledge and stated that you had the backing of a second guild overseer so even if they weren't happy about it that your skills and experience were accepted as fully capable for what you had been hired to do. As you entered the owner paused the discussion and called you over, then asked if the overseers description or your work with the small logging team had been accurate. You relay what had happened again and the owner seemed very pleased. The mining group however didn't and stated that even if you were good at the job, the owner was breaching the contract to give you a position over one of their men. + + +The owner clearly tired of the discussion by this point started casually questioning the work group leader. + + +"When exactly does our contract state that your group would arrive and begin construction?" + + +The man was smart enough to see were this was going to lead so carefully answered "One week ago today sir." + + +"So considering that I paid a hefty deposit to your company in advance, how much money have I lost and how far behind is my mine's construction due to your lateness?" + + +"The mine is almost a week behind sir, but the company will of course refund any loss of wages due to our late arrival. We were forced to wait while our supplies and gear was prepared for us." + + +"Never the less a full week is a pretty serious loss of coin and time for me and could easily be considered a breach of contract by your company, one that would enable me to cancel it for a full refund of deposit and hire someone else correct?" + + +The man, now clearly sweating looked like he was trying to find a way out but could only answer "That could be technically correct sir". + + +"So considering that point; can you really argue that it is outside my remit, that during the week you were not present and my mine was not being constructed that I hired a single skilled worker to aid in my mines initial opening?" + + +"No sir we wont object further" + + +"Perfect, now that this is settled don't worry because he hasn't stolen any of your men's jobs. I'll hire him as an assistant to my overseer so that wont be a problem will it?" + + +Obviously relieved that he didn't have a man out of a job he readily agreed and left the tent. + + +The owner and overseer finally turn to you and ask "well now that the work group is happy and you have suddenly been promoted you have a nice choice ahead of you. You did a good job with your decision about the struts so I'd be happy for you to oversee the logging operation, but most of your experience lies underground and putting the struts in place, which job do you want?" +> you think that overseeing the mines supports being put in will be the best use of your abilities +You know you did good work with the loggers but they will be receiving experienced men soon and your experience lies underground, The Overseer seems happy that he will be able to just concentrate on the tunnels themselves and the many minor jobs he does around the camp leaving the supports to you. + + +Your given eight men to supervise so you split them into two teams, one to prepare the site while the other brings in and lays the supports, then both teams ensure its bearing the weight of the tunnel well before moving on, and you of course give the final check over yourself. Having caught a weak piece of wood early on you also check all the supports delivered to you before approving them for use to make sure there are no accidents caused due to your oversight. + + +You get on with your workers and everything goes smoothly and efficiently under your guidance, the Overseer and Owner seem very pleased with your work and just get weekly progress reports to supplement anything you talk to the Overseer about during the day. As the weeks pass you carry on working as before and as the tunnels deepens and sprout side shafts following smaller seams. You're given eight more men, so once you divide them like the first team you have two groups working simultaneously under you. After a few more weeks the Overseer mentions that a very promising seam has been found but that it initially runs through some very weak and fragmented rock. After a brief inspection you agree that its worth digging out and that after an initial tunnel with temporary supports is in place your men can permanently shore it up. + + +On the day its due to finish and your men are expected to start putting in the permanent supports you head to the tunnel to inspect the job. The unskilled workers have done well and had no cave-ins, and although weak and unprofessional the temporary supports are holding out well. your about to head back and ready your men as you can see the workers digging out the last loose rock when you feel a slight thump and a tremor running through the rock. You immediately think of the loggers and run out of the mine onto the hill above. You see not far off a tree on the ground with men cutting the last side branches off ready to be slid over to the logging camp, and two larger oaks behind in the process of being felled. + + +You see what is happening in an instant, the trees they are felling are almost right on top of the weak tunnel and if the biggest oak they are chopping at falls, the temporary struts will snap like twigs causing a huge cave-in. You start sprinting towards the men, shouting and waving your arms to get their attention. The men are too far away so have no Idea what you are shouting but luckily you are such an odd sight as you wave your arms while running and tumbling over the uneven ground that they just all stop to stare at you until you get close enough to pant out an explanation. As soon as they hear the word cave-in they send runners to get their supervisor and the Overseer. They both run into the tunnel to assess its position and immediately agree with you, if you had been 2 minutes later the workers finishing the tunnel would have been crushed to death. +> That evening you called in for dinner with the Owner and Overseer +You tidy yourself up as best you can before heading into the Owners stone house but you only own two sets of outfits, and both of them working leathers so theres only so much you can do. Your very relieved when the Overseer meets you to take you into the dining room in his normal working gear too. + + +Your taken into a small but nice room lit by a log fire and see the owner and a pretty young girl sitting at the table with food being brought in from the kitchen. The girl looks about your age and is reading a book but she puts it away as you enter. The Owner waves you and the Overseer to some seats across the table from the two of them and introduces his daughter to you, Her name is Shia and you start trying to work out if she is indeed your age when the Owner asks you to explain about the tunnel. + + +You relay all the information as best you can with the Overseer occasionally adding information you didn't know or had missed. At the end the Owner thinks for a minute before starting to speak. + + +"I took a bit of a risk hiring you, but it seems to me now, that apart from doing an excellent job, you have just saved my mine from a cave-in and most importantly saved the lives of the two workers inside. Would you agree this is a fair assessment" + + +You try to mumble something humble but he cuts you off and presses you for a yes/no answer. + + +"Then yes sir I'd agree with it." you finally reply + + +"Good, then from now on you are officially on my books as the assistant overseer and your contract has been upgraded to increase your pay in-line with your new position. There is also a job in my personal mining company for you as an overseer on future projects if you want it." you glance at the Overseer sitting beside you who just smiles. The owner continues "yes it was his idea and I agreed wholeheartedly with it." + + +You thank him profusely before matters at the table turn to the food now being laced before you. You haven't eaten so well in years so concentrate mostly on the food before joining back into the dinner conversation. Your told that the Overseer is also a family friend so he joins the owner and his daughter for a meal once a week and that your now expected along too. + + +Still dazed from all the good news you head back into the mine a very happy man. +> Completing the mine +You spend the rest of your time in the mine enjoying your new position and especially enjoying your time eating with the owners daughter once a week, she seems to also enjoy your company during the meals. You haven't made any moves yet to spend time alone with her but you think you'll have plenty of time to do that once the job is over if you join her fathers company. The rest of your time there passes without incident so as the final week approaches you feel a pretty good sense of achievement considering how well you did and your future prospects. + + +As you enter the final week you're called back into the Owners house and he say he has some options for you. You've gotten on well with him and he feels he can trust you so he is considering changing his plans and taking you back to the city a few days early. On the trip you would meet some other members of his company and some of his friends from other companies that work, not only in your city, but in neighboring cities and kingdoms too. He implies that there is a little more than he is letting on but he refuses to say anymore until you've made your choice. + + +He tells you that your other options are to stay out the week and head back with the other workers, he knows of two groups, one that is rushing back to the city on payday and the other is staying a few extra days then taking a leisurely route home. He wont judge you either way and the job with his company is always open to you, but if you don't come now you'll have to wait till the spring to contact him again as he is heading off to oversee another job of his soon. + + + +> Join him for the early trip back, it sounds interesting and a trip all the way back to the city in a carriage with his daughter sounds too good to pass up +Having agreed to travel back to the city with the Owner you have to get your affairs in order, you assign supervisors to your work groups and try to do a quick final check over some wood, but you've got your men working well enough to finish the job without you now. The Overseer will be taking over from you to make sure the completion and transition from construction to full production goes smoothly, he will even have use of the owners house whenever he isn't visiting the mine. + + +Having said your goodbyes you join the Owner and his daughter in their small carriage and set off back to the city. A second wagon with a few guards goes ahead of you to make sure you have no trouble with bandits as your also carrying one of the first silver shipments from the mine. The trip is significantly faster with horses pulling you at a brisk trot the whole way but it still takes a couple of days and that leaves plenty of time for talking with the owner and his daughter. To her about herself, and to him about this secret he wouldn't tell you before. + + +You find out that he has holdings and mines not just in the lands around the city in which you grew up but in many other places too. Your home city is really a small kingdom in itself, ruling many small villages around it and a stretch of coastline long enough for several small fishing villages and ports. There are many such city states and kingdoms in the surrounding lands and yours is just above average size for the area, however your city is large and old so your kingdom has a much higher population than many others. + + +The guilds of course know this and trade in the main cities of all the kingdoms but your king has never really spread the information widely- you of course knew of other places but they were always spoken of as far off and hard to get too, not borders merely a couple of weeks away by horse from the city center. + + +The reason he told you all this was that recently there had been a lot of tension with your nearest neighbor Carn. You had heard rumors about it, that they had been causing minor trouble over trade and fishing, small regional things that you hadn't paid much mind to, but you were now told it wasn't as simple as that. His contacts in Carn and other cities had been providing very different reports than your own rulers, your city being much larger than Carn was the one causing the problems, making demands after signing treaties and encroaching on their land. He was convinced that your King didn't know what was really happening as he had always seemed like an honest man, but many of the kingdoms decisions, and most importantly, military decisions were taken by his advisors, who were not known for being honest men. + + +Your given time to think over this as you finally see the city approach. As you draw near the first roadside farms your given another choice. + + +"Well now that you know the reality of the situation you need to decide. I know you might not believe me, you might even think I'm being treasonous in my allegations but that is why I'm offering you this chance. This farm is well under half a days walk from the City, you've had a good lunch not long ago and you have been paid very well for your work so if you want to you can leave here and walk back to the city with no strings attached. Or you can stay and we will head to the meeting." + + + +> You decide you really dont want to be mixed up with treason and he has already paid you your wages, enough for well over a years good living, you get out. +You tell him that your grateful for all that he has done but that he is right and a lot of what he says is dangerous so you'll be hopping out now. He looks like it wasn't what he had hoped for but he just tells you that its you choice and holds the door open for you. You have a last look at his daughter who looks a little sad but you hadn't really gotten to know her yet and with over a years good money you tell yourself that your sure to meet another pretty girl in the city. + + +Still thinking about whether your lying to yourself concerning pretty girls in the city and if you made the right choice or not the door closes behind you and the owner calls goodbye. + + +You turn and wave and are just saying thank you again when you feel several punches in the back, looking down as your propelled forward you briefly have time to see at least three crossbow bolts sticking out from your chest before you land. You hear the owners daughter crying and the owner telling her that he had no choice, you could have betrayed them all and gotten thousands killed if you had talked. You think that you wish you had stayed in the carriage, you think that you wish you had talked to his daughter more. + + +Things quickly turn black and your stop thinking anything at all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Having agreed to travel back to the city with the Owner you have to get your affairs in order, you assign supervisors to your work groups and try to do a quick final check over some wood, but you've got your men working well enough to finish the job without you now. The Overseer will be taking over from you to make sure the completion and transition from construction to full production goes smoothly, he will even have use of the owners house whenever he isn't visiting the mine. + + +Having said your goodbyes you join the Owner and his daughter in their small carriage and set off back to the city. A second wagon with a few guards goes ahead of you to make sure you have no trouble with bandits as your also carrying one of the first silver shipments from the mine. The trip is significantly faster with horses pulling you at a brisk trot the whole way but it still takes a couple of days and that leaves plenty of time for talking with the owner and his daughter. To her about herself, and to him about this secret he wouldn't tell you before. + + +You find out that he has holdings and mines not just in the lands around the city in which you grew up but in many other places too. Your home city is really a small kingdom in itself, ruling many small villages around it and a stretch of coastline long enough for several small fishing villages and ports. There are many such city states and kingdoms in the surrounding lands and yours is just above average size for the area, however your city is large and old so your kingdom has a much higher population than many others. + + +The guilds of course know this and trade in the main cities of all the kingdoms but your king has never really spread the information widely- you of course knew of other places but they were always spoken of as far off and hard to get too, not borders merely a couple of weeks away by horse from the city center. + + +The reason he told you all this was that recently there had been a lot of tension with your nearest neighbor Carn. You had heard rumors about it, that they had been causing minor trouble over trade and fishing, small regional things that you hadn't paid much mind to, but you were now told it wasn't as simple as that. His contacts in Carn and other cities had been providing very different reports than your own rulers, your city being much larger than Carn was the one causing the problems, making demands after signing treaties and encroaching on their land. He was convinced that your King didn't know what was really happening as he had always seemed like an honest man, but many of the kingdoms decisions, and most importantly, military decisions were taken by his advisors, who were not known for being honest men. + + +Your given time to think over this as you finally see the city approach. As you draw near the first roadside farms your given another choice. + + +"Well now that you know the reality of the situation you need to decide. I know you might not believe me, you might even think I'm being treasonous in my allegations but that is why I'm offering you this chance. This farm is well under half a days walk from the City, you've had a good lunch not long ago and you have been paid very well for your work so if you want to you can leave here and walk back to the city with no strings attached. Or you can stay and we will head to the meeting." + + + +> You've come this far and his daughter is smiling at you, you may as well carry on and see where this leads. +You tell him your choice and he just smiles back then says "Well then lets go meet your new friends, I'll head up with the driver and leave you and my daughter to have the chat you've both been desperately wanting to have since you first saw each other. JUST a chat mind." + + +You immediately try to stammer out a response but he just laughs and climbs out and round to the drivers seat. You turn to his daughter to see she has turned an almost luminous shade of red and is desperately trying to look like she wasn't just mortified by her fathers candor. + + +You cant think of much to say so just go with "He did that on purpose to make this awkward didn't he?" + + +She seems to relax the tiniest bit as she replies that "Its just his sense of humor but he means well." + + +You take the opening and run with it so that you're both having a good conversation as the carriage pulls into the city and heads right through the Iron district and into the stone district, the area of the wealthiest and most powerful members of the kings court and city. Your chat is interrupted as you pull up to a small mansion and the doors are opened but you both promise to have more soon and you all head inside. +> The 'Family' +You enter the mansion and are led into a large hall with several men and women lounging in chairs or drinking wine by small tables, they turn to greet you... + + +Seeing that the Owner and his daughter have someone with them causes the talking to stop and everyone watches you for a while. The owner steps forward after giving them a minute to look you over. + + +"ladies and gentlemen this is Glor, he has proven to be a most resourceful and trustworthy man in one of my mining jobs and I feel that he would be a perfect addition to our little family. I'll be personally vouching for him" + + +There are mixed reactions but a beautiful lady just a little older than yourself approaches and gives you a slightly too welcoming hug "Welcome to the family Glor, I'm sure we'll get along VERY well indeed, once the music starts be sure to ask me for a dance". + + +As she walks away you catch a glimpse of the owners daughter with bright red cheeks glaring daggers at her back. The owner sees your slight confusion and his daughters rage and just laughs. "Right then neither of you are dressed for the occasion so you head off my dear and get ready and I'll see if I have anything to fit Glor." + + +You are lead through several rooms until you are in a bedroom with a butler standing waiting for you. "Glor will be joining us for dinner, do you think you could make him presentable for the evening?" The butler gives a quick nod and heads out of a side door, returning quickly with two dinner suits which he lays on the bed before circling you once. he takes one suit then heads out just leaving the one on the bed. + + +"Right then Glor my butler has an uncanny ability to size people up so that suit should fit you well, I'll be in the next room writing a few quick letters while you prepare". +> Your a bit overwhelmed by the rapid turn of events but you dont have much choice now so you quickly wash and dress +Having gotten yourself to what you believe is a presentable state you knock on the owners door. He emerges and gives you a once over. + + +"Well its not bad at all for a first try!" he smiles at you before fixing various parts of the suits that are hanging wrong and showing you how to put on cufflinks. "Well you wont ever pass for some highborn sop who lives in a mansion but I rather think that it makes you a better man for it. Now follow me, I'm sure my daughter has had enough time to change as well." + + +Your lead back to the large room where all tables and chairs have seemingly vanished and a small string quartet has started playing soft music, a few couples are already dancing near them on the open floor. The owner leads you to the side of the room to a small drinks bar. + + +"Ok its time I did my mingling and information gathering, the serious meeting shall begin in a few hours when most of the guests here are gone." He walks away towards a group of men smoking pipes before calling back "The music is just warming up, make sure you dance with at least one girl while your here!" + + +You're no master on the dance floor but you know the basics and as long as the songs are slow you're sure you could keep up. The music gets louder and more people move to the dance floor when you see two things happening. The Owners daughter enters the room looking beautiful in a flowing red dress and is immediately approached by several men asking her to dance, and the woman who approached you earlier detaches herself from the group she was in and slowly heads your way. +> The woman in blue is clearly coming on strong but the Owner's daughter is the one you want to dance with, head over towards her and hope she dosn't dance with someone else instead. +You start heading towards the Owner's daughter, you get close to the ring of men surrounding her and are unsure how you are going to approach this so you quickly glance back towards the woman in the blue dress. She has obviously seen you choose another girl over her flirtatious interest so gives you a stormy look before immediately slipping her arm through nearby man's who seems more than happy to take her for a dance. You look back just in time to see the Owner's daughter watching you with a huge smile on her face. + + +She makes quick apologies to the men around her and heads over to you, slides her arm in yours and leads you to the dance floor. "Now if I wasn't very much mistaken I just saw a handsome but nearly penniless young man spurn the advances of the beautiful and extremely rich Lady Bridleworth, just so he could ask the daughter of a merchant to dance. What do you think about my surmise?" + + +"I would never say your father was just a merchant..." you start before seeing her cheeky smile and start again "I'd say that the young man would be flattered to be called handsome by the most beautiful girl he has ever seen, and that he would pay every penny of Lady Bridleworth's fortune for a single dance with her. So clearly he made the right choice." + + +She laughs at your blatant flattery but you can tell she loves that you said it all the same and you begin dancing slowly to the music. "I must admit I'm a little surprised, I thought I'd have to teach you how to dance, being a lowly mine worker and everything." + + +"Well my lady" you give a slight mocking bow "This worker has many surprises to him, I'm surprised in return though, you turned down offers from a large number of eligible gentry to dance with me, lowly as I am." + + +"Well if you are able to turn down the most eligible Lady of marrying age in the entire kingdom just to dance with me, why shouldn't I turn down the sons of some rich idiots to dance with the man I choose?" Unable to think up a reply you simply laugh and keep dancing. + + +The rest of the night passes like a blur since you spend it entirely with her, dancing and talking and just enjoying every second in her company. Once the party starts ending she leads you over to her father and a group of men he is talking to and after giving you both a look over and a smile he leads you all through to a side room where a few people are starting to sit around a large table. +> The Truth +After everyone is seated the Owner addresses you "Now Glor I have explained a little of why we are here during our trip down from the mines. This family I have gathered together is for the purpose of getting the truth out and showing the king that he is being tricked. We have tried getting evidence straight to him but the rest of the council has him surrounded day and night and I cannot do anything for fear of being caught and this entire group being put in danger." + + +"Which is why we are sending an expedition." one of the other men joins in. "I am a commander in the 3rd company and will be sending some men along with a relief detachment to the border. they will be carrying proof of everything that has been happening over the past two years. We have had to wait this long as gathering the evidence without raising suspicion has not been easy but it is done now and we must hurry as we think the council are preparing for something big using two captured Carn ships. You will be drafted into the 3rd under my orders and send along as well, it'll become your job to help get the proof to Carn." + + +You think for a minute before answering. "Why are we sending the proof to Carn, why not get it to our king?" + + +"We tried, many times we tried, most of the men were killed and the rest searched and all the documents they had destroyed so they couldn't risk saying anything without proof, that would just lead to us all being killed before we could prove anything." + + +"so when does this expedition leave?" + + +"It was going to be in over a month, but now that you are here, the man you know as the Owner of the mine you were in has planned to make them leave in 1 week. You wont be traveling with a relief squad but the papers I provide should see that you don't come under any suspicion." +> A New Morning +You spend the night in the large mansion and you wake thinking you haven't slept anywhere so comfortable before in your life. You find fresh cloths and a note inviting you to breakfast in the solar at the end of your bed so you quickly get ready and head out of your door. You immediately realize that you are entirely lost and have no hope of finding the right room but are luckily saved by a butler who appears to materialize beside you arm. + + +Once you have been guided to the solar for breakfast you are left with the owner and a table laden with food. "All from my own farms and holdings!" he says happily "Now dig in, we have a long day ahead and my daughter has 'informed' me that you are to meet her for a late lunch in the gardens. I normally would entirely ignore any order that came from my daughter but she has inherited a certain look from her mother that I know better than to argue with." + + +"Erm, of course that sounds lovely." you stammer, not really knowing what to say in the current situation. + + +"Hah! don't worry, I have no issue with the fact you both are going dopey eyed at each other since her choice in a man is hers to make, but I will give this warning, if you lead my daughter on then hurt her, I will destroy you entirely. Excellent, now that thats all been said on to business!" + + +You're a little shocked by his change of pace but you both soon start chatting about the up coming plans and preparations. The next few days are spent much the same way, breakfast with the owner, planning time, then lunch with his daughter before more planning. The evenings however are spent at dinners, entertaining guests and holding meetings with other members of the 'family' from around the city. +> The Plan Begins +You have spent an amazing week in the mansion, you and the owner's daughter, Amelia (You almost laughed when you heard because of the dream you had back in the mining camp) are on first name terms and getting closer than ever. Your plans have been completed too. The 'family' of conspirators had been waiting as they didn't have anyone with enough training in construction to go with their team to the front that wouldn't arouse suspicion from the council, and that is where you were to come in. You would be their team leader with a sound understanding of construction, and since you hadn't been in the city for years, you were almost entirely unknown. + + +The plan was simple, The council were watching all the crossing points so you and three others would be sent to the borders with paperwork saying you are new recruits from the 3rd company, the army's builders. Then you would slip across the border and meet up with an intended contact a few miles to the other side. + + +The morning you were due to leave the Owner (Who's name you still haven't been told) arrives late to breakfast and hands you a small cloth bundle full of documents. "These are the documents we need to get across the borders, each of you has a set and this morning we have included new information. One of the council members has managed to capture two of Carn's galleys and is now talking about some 'project spark' or something like that. We don't know what it is yet but we have included a letter in which he admits to taking the ships. You need to get these across the border before something big starts." +> Goodbyes +Having accepted your documents you finish eating quickly before heading back to your room to collect your things. The Owner has prepared you a set of nice traveling gear and also laid out some 3rd company clothing including a tunic and cloak. You've got a full set of Army issue armor in saddle bag on your horse but you'd rather not travel the whole way there in it so the tunic and cloak should be more than enough. + + +You head to the front of the house and find Amelia waiting for you. She looks relieved to see you "I was worried I wouldn't be back in time to see you off! I've been down in the Stone quarter collecting an order I made a few days ago. Its something I had made for you, I want you to wear it under your tunic so you remember I'm thinking about you as you travel." You're unsure what to reply and your slightly worried she has gotten you a waistcoat or something you'd never normally wear but she has already turned bright red so you simply reply "Of Course I will." + + +She hands you a small package which you unwrap to find a tunic made of unbelievably fine metal rings. "This is incredible, I've never seen such fine mail before!" + + +Clearly happy at your reaction she grins "I had one of the best armorers in the city make it, its the finest steel so its very strong but the links are small so its light and can be worn under normal clothing. This way I can keep you safe while you travel!" + + +Unable to think of a proper way to thank her and distracted by her smiling face being so near yours you instead step forward and give her a small kiss. She is initially shocked and almost moves away but then returns the kiss for a second before stepping away her face a beacon of red. "Well that was very forward of you Glor, now you have no choice but to return and beg my forgiveness afterwards!" The she spins on her heels and runs off. You're almost worried you really did offend her until she reaches the door and gives you a big grin and a wave before heading inside. + + +You hop into the carriage that is waiting for you and quickly change into the gift then slip the 3rd company tunic over the top, and its almost impossible to tell your wearing any mail. The Owner joins you and the carriage heads off to the south gate of the city. +> A New Adventure +Once at the south gate you disembark and are given a last few words of encouragement by the owner before he is driven away, leaving you and your new horse alone at the gate. You are quickly joined by a group of three men similarly dressed to yourself and you all begin the ride out of the city on the road that will turn East towards Carn. + + +The first few days of the trip pass quickly, you see very few travelers on the roads and the border disputes with Carn aren't enough to have a large military presence on the roads so you only have to produce your papers once, when you come across a camp of soldiers from the First Company. You decide it would seems strange to ride on by them when it was nearing dusk so you all join them at their camp and spend a nice evening chatting over cooking fires. + + +The next morning you are all saddled up and preparing to leave the First Company soldiers who are traveling on foot when a call is raised of a fast rider approaching on the road. You feel a sense of unease and one of your company signals for you to be ready to ride hard if needed. + + +As the man approaches the small camp he slow momentarily to hand down a letter from his pouch "The Old Quarter is burning, Carn has attacked us. I Need to get news to the borders quickly." You are panicked by the news since The Old Quarter is where you grew up and your remaining friends still live there. You catch his arm as he makes to leave. + + +"We are riding the same way, let us accompany you incase something happens on the road." + + +The man nods his thanks and your small group sets out at a fast pace from the camp. One of your men rides close by and whispers to you "What are you doing getting us involved here?" + + +"I need more information about what is going on, besides if they receive news of an attack before we get there we will look pretty suspicious but if we arrive as guards for the Councils own messenger they wont take a second glance at our reason for being there." The man still doesn't seem happy but falls back as you ride up to the messenger and ask if you can read one of the letters he is distributing since you didn't get a chance back at the camp. His orders are to give them to every military detachment he comes across on way to the border so he happily hands you one. + + +You ride in silence the rest of the day with only brief breaks for lunch and dinner and ride a couple of hours into the night. You finally pull up near a small stream to let the horses rest and make a temporary camp for the night. You take the opportunity to tell your companions what you learned from the letter. + + +A couple of mornings ago two ships bearing Carn's colours had approached the docks in the Old quarter. One had pulled up and reversed course but the other sped up and rammed the docks, it seems it was on fire and filled with burning oils and other flammable substances. The first reports were all that had come in before the letter was sent but there was a fireball that tore through a huge area of the docks and started a fire that spread through the entire Quarter of the city within minutes. It had been dry for weeks and the Old quarter was made almost entirely of ancient timbers so you could imagine the fire tearing through it. The men around the fire swore and one finally spoke up. "Its the ships that councilor captured, they burned down the old quarter themselves to start the war, I'll gut him myself for this!" + + +You caution him to keep his voice down but luckily the messenger sees nothing amiss about the bits he hears of your men's reactions to the news, he joins you at your fire and you all share stories of the city, especially of the Old Quarter which you hope isn't as bad as the letter implies. As the messenger gets into his bedroll for the night the man supposedly in charge of the others speaks up. + + +"I was sent along to ensure we got the documents across the border no matter what happened, now this news changes many things but not our mission, if we can show it wasn't Carn that sent those ships we can prove the council did it and have our revenge. We have two choices, follow Glor's plan of arriving there as the messengers guards then try to slip across after nightfall, or we dispose of him to make sure we arrive before the news does so we can get across the border before they go into a lockdown." +> You want no part of killing an innocent man so you vote for staying as his guards and risk the harder crossing. +You continue your hard ride with the messenger and after a couple more days all arrive just as the horses seem likely to give way. You are unsure what to expect but as soon as you reach the gates and the messenger shows his papers your all admitted straight away. Being with him seems to give you some official status is the guards eyes as you are all not even checked as he passes checkpoints and reaches the commanders office. + + +You are all left in a waiting area as he goes in, he takes your identification papers with him. After a few minutes the commander emerges with the messenger. "It seems you three haven't even entered full service yet but volunteered for a dangerous ride to escort our messenger safely here. he has spoken well of you and your intentions so you are all very welcome in my fort, even if its almost a week early! Now down to business. The fort is going into partial lockdown until the news is spread and the patrols have been updated, you'll be shown to your new bunks and be given a tour, since your duties don't start for days you'll be free to come and go around the fort to learn your way. My aide will give you new papers to this effect." + + +The new papers give you all the run of the forts interior and the messenger thanks you all before riding off again to deliver the letters down the line to the other forts. "It seems this was the right idea after all, these papers should make it easy to slip across the border." + + +"We shall see." one of the men replies +> Night Falls +As night falls over the fort you have visited and gotten your faces and papers known by many of the guards under the pretense of exploring. You all finish a late dinner in the mess hall then head back to your bunks where you have prepared your gear and hidden the documents. You quickly prepare, check Amelia's gift is in good working order and all head out. + + +Getting around the fort is easy for you now thanks to the leg work earlier in the day and any guards that don't recognize you let you pass after seeing your papers. You all make it to the gate without incident, however once you reach it you realize that the initial panic from receiving the news is still in full swing. You quickly think that you could slip out behind a squad going on patrol since the gate is in chaos but you are only in army issue tunics rather than full armor. + + + +> Tag along with a squad and try to stick close so you arn't noticed when they exit. +You all move close behind a squad heading out of the gate and move into formation as if you are with them. Its all going surprisingly well until one guard remarks that is stupid for them to have men without full armor with them. They all quickly turn and point out that you are not in fact with them, and they have no idea WHO you are. + + +You are about to quickly try and make an excuse when one of you men tries to run for it. Sadly with so many soldiers about he is almost instantly cut down and the rest charge at you. With so many men cutting and stabbing you at once even your special mail doesn't stand a chance.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As night falls over the fort you have visited and gotten your faces and papers known by many of the guards under the pretense of exploring. You all finish a late dinner in the mess hall then head back to your bunks where you have prepared your gear and hidden the documents. You quickly prepare, check Amelia's gift is in good working order and all head out. + + +Getting around the fort is easy for you now thanks to the leg work earlier in the day and any guards that don't recognize you let you pass after seeing your papers. You all make it to the gate without incident, however once you reach it you realize that the initial panic from receiving the news is still in full swing. You quickly think that you could slip out behind a squad going on patrol since the gate is in chaos but you are only in army issue tunics rather than full armor. + + + +> Pretend to be a repair squad, you are in the third company afterall and that is one of their jobs. +You realize that four men in army tunics would never get away with joining a fully armored patrol so approach the guard your selves, he seems harassed and overworked so you try to use it to your advantage. "Repair squad from the third." you announce as you hand over all of your papers at once. The man gives you all a quick glance, then obviously trying to work as quickly as possible gives the top sheet a quick glance. He sees that it has the fort commanders own signature and 3rd Company across the front so he doesn't read further and just waves you through. "Don't take too long out there, lockdown starts fully in a few hours!". + + +Having a guard shout you through in such a loud manner makes the rest less inclined to bother checking your paperwork so you get through the gateway without incident. + + +Your all thinking that this is going rather well so pick up the pace and head towards the border lines. +> The Perimeter +You reach where you think the border should be and almost shout for joy when one of your men holds up his hand and indicates to the side. You stop to listen and hear an approaching patrol. Its only a small one by the sound of it which means six men but they will still attack you on sight if they need too. You all quickly look for a place to hide but its too late and they come into view through some trees. + + +They immediately draw weapons and ask for identification. You decide to go with the same bluff as before so try to act clam and keep your hands away from your sword. You pull out your papers and hand them over. "We are third company, they sent us out here to do some repairs before the lockdown began." + + +The other soldiers seems to relax their weapons a bit at your attitude and willingness to hand over your papers. You see some confusion growing on the face of the man reading the papers and realize that he knows your papers don't allow you to leave the fort. He is about to speak when your men act first, drawing hidden knives and taking down two of the parole before they can react. + + +From there it turns into a bloodbath, it seems the men sent with you are very skilled fighters, but they aren't wearing armor and the patrol is. You are almost killed by a sword swing but the man pauses in surprise as his blade bounces off the hidden mail coat. You whisper a quick thank you to Amelia for her gift and saving your life as you use the flat of your blade to knock the man unconscious. + + +You look up to realize its over, two of your company is dead and the other survivor slightly wounded, three of the patrol are dead and the others wounded or unconscious. Saddened that they had to die you pause but the other man drags you away "It wasn't our choice and it had to be done, now move or the rest will catch us!" You listen and indeed hear the sounds of other men moving in your direction so you both run across the border and into Carn's territory. +> Carn +You are still a long journey away from Carn but the other man takes charge and leads you at a run for several miles. You both run until you finally collapse against a large rock outcrop. You help him bind up his wounds but he has lost a lot of blood and the run hasn't helped, he quickly explains that a cart will arrive here soon and that it will take you to Carn. + + +You let him drift off to sleep and keep watch until dawn when you see a small farmers cart coming near. You give the signal and it turns to come pick you up. You jog back over to the other man but realize he passes away from blood loss during the night. Your the last one left so you take the man's documents along with your own and get in the cart. The driver passes back some non-descript clothing and you quickly get out of your military tunic. + + +The trip from there involves a change of carts every few days and finally a carriage for the last few days to enable you to go faster. Eventually you reach Carn and are escorted to the King. +> The King +THIS IS THE BEST ENDING, THE SPIES ENDING. + + + CONGRATULATIONS! + + +Once in Carn you are taken before the king and you make your report after presenting the documents. King Hader immediately sends them to his scribes who make several copies and over the next few days they are smuggled out of Carn to all near-by kingdoms. King Hader also sends several emissaries to your City and is finally granted a cease-fire almost before the war even begins when one of your kings high council personally intervenes and tells the king that the council had been blocking Carn's requests and emissaries from reaching him. The Councilor was in fact your proprietor, the Owner, and he was able to tell the king some of the truth of the situation. + + +Once the king knows he was being lied to he immediately took control of the military and ordered an end to all hostile actions. He confined the council to chambers under guard until he had found out the truth. And once the truth came out the entire council bar one was hung from the city gates. Peace was made between the two kingdoms. + + +King Hader of Carn finally sent you back to your home city once the situation was fully resolved, he even bestowed some land and a house on the shore upon you as a reward. You are unsure what to expect from your own king upon your return but he is as welcoming as Hader had been. Once he learns that you had been given land on the coast beside the border he immediately gave you an equal plot on his side of the border meaning you now had a large holding of forest, farm and coastline in your name that spanned the borders of the two kingdoms. The man you knew as the owner is explained to have been Councilor Fenshield, one of the newest councilors in the city but due to his mines, one of the richest. He greets you warmly and invites you to his house again to recover, which you quickly accept. + + +There Amelia is waiting for you, she immediately rushes to you and gives you a kiss while saying how she always knew you would be successful, once you explain how her gift saved your life she almost cries before just hugging you for a few minutes. + + +Its not many days before you are engaged and only weeks before you and Amelia are married. The wedding is held on your new lands which could only be described as substantial and the house upon them is more of an old castle than just a house. Councilor Fenshield brought many of his scribes and accountants with him and by the time the wedding happens your land is already turning over a profit from the farmers and fishermen on it. + + +I'd say you lived happily ever after at this point, but that isn't always the case is it? lets just say you did have a few happy years, but after that what happens is up to you to choose.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Once at the south gate you disembark and are given a last few words of encouragement by the owner before he is driven away, leaving you and your new horse alone at the gate. You are quickly joined by a group of three men similarly dressed to yourself and you all begin the ride out of the city on the road that will turn East towards Carn. + + +The first few days of the trip pass quickly, you see very few travelers on the roads and the border disputes with Carn aren't enough to have a large military presence on the roads so you only have to produce your papers once, when you come across a camp of soldiers from the First Company. You decide it would seems strange to ride on by them when it was nearing dusk so you all join them at their camp and spend a nice evening chatting over cooking fires. + + +The next morning you are all saddled up and preparing to leave the First Company soldiers who are traveling on foot when a call is raised of a fast rider approaching on the road. You feel a sense of unease and one of your company signals for you to be ready to ride hard if needed. + + +As the man approaches the small camp he slow momentarily to hand down a letter from his pouch "The Old Quarter is burning, Carn has attacked us. I Need to get news to the borders quickly." You are panicked by the news since The Old Quarter is where you grew up and your remaining friends still live there. You catch his arm as he makes to leave. + + +"We are riding the same way, let us accompany you incase something happens on the road." + + +The man nods his thanks and your small group sets out at a fast pace from the camp. One of your men rides close by and whispers to you "What are you doing getting us involved here?" + + +"I need more information about what is going on, besides if they receive news of an attack before we get there we will look pretty suspicious but if we arrive as guards for the Councils own messenger they wont take a second glance at our reason for being there." The man still doesn't seem happy but falls back as you ride up to the messenger and ask if you can read one of the letters he is distributing since you didn't get a chance back at the camp. His orders are to give them to every military detachment he comes across on way to the border so he happily hands you one. + + +You ride in silence the rest of the day with only brief breaks for lunch and dinner and ride a couple of hours into the night. You finally pull up near a small stream to let the horses rest and make a temporary camp for the night. You take the opportunity to tell your companions what you learned from the letter. + + +A couple of mornings ago two ships bearing Carn's colours had approached the docks in the Old quarter. One had pulled up and reversed course but the other sped up and rammed the docks, it seems it was on fire and filled with burning oils and other flammable substances. The first reports were all that had come in before the letter was sent but there was a fireball that tore through a huge area of the docks and started a fire that spread through the entire Quarter of the city within minutes. It had been dry for weeks and the Old quarter was made almost entirely of ancient timbers so you could imagine the fire tearing through it. The men around the fire swore and one finally spoke up. "Its the ships that councilor captured, they burned down the old quarter themselves to start the war, I'll gut him myself for this!" + + +You caution him to keep his voice down but luckily the messenger sees nothing amiss about the bits he hears of your men's reactions to the news, he joins you at your fire and you all share stories of the city, especially of the Old Quarter which you hope isn't as bad as the letter implies. As the messenger gets into his bedroll for the night the man supposedly in charge of the others speaks up. + + +"I was sent along to ensure we got the documents across the border no matter what happened, now this news changes many things but not our mission, if we can show it wasn't Carn that sent those ships we can prove the council did it and have our revenge. We have two choices, follow Glor's plan of arriving there as the messengers guards then try to slip across after nightfall, or we dispose of him to make sure we arrive before the news does so we can get across the border before they go into a lockdown." +> You can't risk arriving at a fort and being trapped there as the war starts, you think the messenger has to be killed for your mission to be sucessful. +Having decided by a vote to dispose of the messenger for the sake of the mission you all head to your bed-rolls and pretend to sleep. You wait until you hear the signal from one of the men and rise to find that the messenger already has his throat slit. You help them carry the body away from the road and hide it in some bushes, it isn't the best disposal ever but it only needs to last a day so you can get safely ahead. + + +You clear up any evidence you can see then all mount up and start riding towards Carn. What you did weighs on your conscience but you think that it was the only way so you push ahead. + + +The next few days are just made up of riding and very short breaks for eating and sleeping. You make it close to the border in great time and camp within half a days ride from the border forts so you can all rest and look presentable when you arrive. You fall asleep hoping that you have arrived ahead of the news and that you can get across safely. Yu think briefly of Amelia and what she may think of your choices so far but decide that she would also do everything it takes to stop the war. Pacified by that thought you fall asleep. +> The Border Forts +You all make sure your uniforms are clean and papers in order before you approach the fort, You expect to find some paroles but are amazed at the sheer amount of them and all the activity that is taking place. You have your papers checked five times before you even reach the gate where You finally get to ask what is going on as your let into the fort. + + +The guard explains that a messenger arrived the evening before from the coastal road, he had ridden from the city almost non-stop for days, swapping horses whenever he could. He had brought news that The Old Quarter had been attack and was burning and war was about to start. You all look stunned by what he said and he takes it to be shock at the news rather than the fact you had killed a messenger but were still beaten here. He lets you on through and your taken immediately to a small barracks where your given bunks and told that sadly the forts going into lockdown until everything settles down but that your welcome in all the normal areas like the mess hall. + + +You all settle in "So it was for nothing then?" you ask aloud. + + +"We had to do it, there was no way to know another messenger could beat us here by taking the coast road. Its all those bloody port outposts allowing him to change horses while we had to spare ours." one of the men replies. + + +"Either way we need a new plan, I'm the only one who really knows about construction so we cant hang around to be tested, what do we do from here?" + + +The men think for a bit and come up with several ideas but it is whittled down to two options. +> Make a run for it that night while there is still confusion about who should be where. +Having made your choice you all get your gear prepared and ensure the documents are well hidden. You made sure your gift from Amelia is in good order then you all wait. Night falls slowly and there is still a lot of people moving about when you leave the barracks. The food hall is nearer the border gate than your current position so you head there as cover first. You all grab some stew from a pot and taking some bread start to stroll around the fort as you eat. You pass several men fresh off duty doing the same thing so you don't raise many eyebrows. Once you near the gate you see that the small one man door in it only has a single guard. + + +One of your men approaches him quietly then faster than the guard can react, he strikes him across the chin with the handle of his dagger. The guard falls unconscious and you all slip through the gate quickly, closing it behind you. + + +You know the wall patrols wont take long to find the unconscious guard so you all start jogging as quietly as you can towards the border lines. You think you have made it when you hear the bells of the fort going off. "Thats it RUN!" you shout as you hear noise of men ahead of you. Your warning came too late and you all run right into a patrol squad as they turn to face you. You all draw weapons and attack. + + +You feel several glancing sword blows hit you but Amelia's gift saves you from taking any major wounds until you and the only other survivor seem to break out the other side of the squad. + + +Your about to run when you feel a blow to your leg and you stumble. Looking down you see a large gash across your calf and realize you can barely walk never mind run. You wave the other man on and turn to face the soldiers. At least one of you will get through with the documents you think as a spear stabs through your side. You think of Amelia as you collapse. +> Ending? +Sadly even if the other man makes it and stops the war you are still dead, no good ending for you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You all make sure your uniforms are clean and papers in order before you approach the fort, You expect to find some paroles but are amazed at the sheer amount of them and all the activity that is taking place. You have your papers checked five times before you even reach the gate where You finally get to ask what is going on as your let into the fort. + + +The guard explains that a messenger arrived the evening before from the coastal road, he had ridden from the city almost non-stop for days, swapping horses whenever he could. He had brought news that The Old Quarter had been attack and was burning and war was about to start. You all look stunned by what he said and he takes it to be shock at the news rather than the fact you had killed a messenger but were still beaten here. He lets you on through and your taken immediately to a small barracks where your given bunks and told that sadly the forts going into lockdown until everything settles down but that your welcome in all the normal areas like the mess hall. + + +You all settle in "So it was for nothing then?" you ask aloud. + + +"We had to do it, there was no way to know another messenger could beat us here by taking the coast road. Its all those bloody port outposts allowing him to change horses while we had to spare ours." one of the men replies. + + +"Either way we need a new plan, I'm the only one who really knows about construction so we cant hang around to be tested, what do we do from here?" + + +The men think for a bit and come up with several ideas but it is whittled down to two options. +> Wait for a few days untill the panic is over then slip across. +You decide that security is too tight to make a go of it now so you all settle in to pretending to be good members of the Third Company. The others help out in small manual jobs that don't require skill and you offer services in some of the more complicated work. After three days of the light volunteer work you seem to be trusted by the men there and the initial panic seems to have settled down into a steady routine so you think it might be time to make your move. Messengers and runners keep arriving but you all pay them little heed now as you are concentrating on finding the best crossing point near the fort. + + +Unfortunately one of the runners came on the main south road just like you and reports about the finding the body of the messenger you killed. Its put down to spies from Carn trying to prevent news getting to the borders so the fort immediately goes on high alert. If you had known it was your own choice in killing him that lead to the lockdown being started again you might have even found it a little funny. + + +Sadly you didn't know any of this and only knew that the bells went off and everyone had to report to their bunks. No-one is told what is going on but the next morning you all see a small group of men with an unusual insignia arriving at the fort and heading straight into the commanders office. One of your companions informs you that these are from the 'intelligence' section and are very bad news. You cant risk them getting anywhere near you. +> You cant risk them finding you, run for it, NOW! +You nod to the men, "Right then we have to get out of here, take only what you can carry easily and pretend we are on patrol, as soon as we get near the lines we get across and run for it." + + +You all get into your Army tunics and strap on weapons then head out towards the wall, your stopped a few times but explaining you have been drafted in for wall patrol because of the lockdown gets you through the fort and to the gates. You find you're in luck today as you know the man on gate duty, he is someone you have been working with so you greet him and take the time for a quick chat before asking to be let through so you can start your patrol. + + +He pauses for a minute but your chat has put him off guard and he lets you through. You all start walking quickly towards the border line where the patrols are thinnest. Your beginning to think you pulled it off but suddenly hear a bell going off behind you and shouting starting up. + + +"Run!" you shout and you all start sprinting for the border. Arrows start falling from the walls behind you and one of the men with you falls with a bolt sticking out of his side. he waves you on and your forced to leave him behind. You feel something hitting you in the shoulder and realize Amelia's chain just saved you. You whisper a quick thanks to her as you run. + + +The arrows stop and you realize your out of range now. You really think your going to make it before you see a full squad forming up in front of you with pikes pointed in your direction. You are left with no choice but to charge them and hope you break through. You're mail saves you a couple more times and you cut down two men in front of you before a third gets a clean hit on you and runs his pike through your gut. You only think that you'll never see Amelia again before you die.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide that security is too tight to make a go of it now so you all settle in to pretending to be good members of the Third Company. The others help out in small manual jobs that don't require skill and you offer services in some of the more complicated work. After three days of the light volunteer work you seem to be trusted by the men there and the initial panic seems to have settled down into a steady routine so you think it might be time to make your move. Messengers and runners keep arriving but you all pay them little heed now as you are concentrating on finding the best crossing point near the fort. + + +Unfortunately one of the runners came on the main south road just like you and reports about the finding the body of the messenger you killed. Its put down to spies from Carn trying to prevent news getting to the borders so the fort immediately goes on high alert. If you had known it was your own choice in killing him that lead to the lockdown being started again you might have even found it a little funny. + + +Sadly you didn't know any of this and only knew that the bells went off and everyone had to report to their bunks. No-one is told what is going on but the next morning you all see a small group of men with an unusual insignia arriving at the fort and heading straight into the commanders office. One of your companions informs you that these are from the 'intelligence' section and are very bad news. You cant risk them getting anywhere near you. +> They shouldnt have any idea about you and you have good paperwork, wait untill they leave. +Waiting till night seems like a better idea so you all prepare your gear and make sure the documents are well hidden then wait. Sadly it is not long before two guards arrive and ask you to accompany them to the commanders office. + + +You find the commander and the men from the intelligence squad waiting for you. They take your papers and look through them before speaking. + + +"Now gentlemen we have been tasked with finding some spies from Carn who have killed one of our messengers on the road to this fort. Your paperwork is all in order but it appears you all joined the third company very recently and most importantly you were all seen accompanying the messenger on his way here. Then arrived alone. Can you explain this at all? + + +One of your men speaks up "We rode with him for two days but he needed to make haste so he went on ahead of us, we just assumed he had arrived already." + + +The man looks at you all for a short time before smiling "Well we shall soon see the truth of that." + + +You are all grabbed from behind and lead down stairways until you are all in a large basement, some dividing screens are set up and tables with straps brought in. Realizing what is about to happen one of the men tries to run but is immediately run through by a guard. The Intelligence man tuts then says "hmm a waste of information there, ah well three is more than enough, lets begin." + + +You are all strapped down and have some fluid poured down your throats before the screens are moved in to block you from seeing each other. You feel it taking affect and your muscles relax and refuse to respond, you become entirely paralyzed and unable to speak. The man comes to you first "Don't worry it will wear off after a few hours, and by then you'll be ready to talk." + + +He is true to his word and tortures you solidly for three hours before you begin to be able to scream, he waits for you to stop before questioning you further. Once satisfied he turns to the guards. "I'll start on the others after a nice lunch, finish this one off and dump his body at the front, claim it was soldiers from Carn torturing him for information." + + +You don't even have time to object before the guards run their spears through your chest.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Having gotten yourself to what you believe is a presentable state you knock on the owners door. He emerges and gives you a once over. + + +"Well its not bad at all for a first try!" he smiles at you before fixing various parts of the suits that are hanging wrong and showing you how to put on cufflinks. "Well you wont ever pass for some highborn sop who lives in a mansion but I rather think that it makes you a better man for it. Now follow me, I'm sure my daughter has had enough time to change as well." + + +Your lead back to the large room where all tables and chairs have seemingly vanished and a small string quartet has started playing soft music, a few couples are already dancing near them on the open floor. The owner leads you to the side of the room to a small drinks bar. + + +"Ok its time I did my mingling and information gathering, the serious meeting shall begin in a few hours when most of the guests here are gone." He walks away towards a group of men smoking pipes before calling back "The music is just warming up, make sure you dance with at least one girl while your here!" + + +You're no master on the dance floor but you know the basics and as long as the songs are slow you're sure you could keep up. The music gets louder and more people move to the dance floor when you see two things happening. The Owners daughter enters the room looking beautiful in a flowing red dress and is immediately approached by several men asking her to dance, and the woman who approached you earlier detaches herself from the group she was in and slowly heads your way. +> The lady from before is beautiful, in a low cut blue dress and is clearly flirting with you in a way the Owner's daughter never did, meet her on the dancefloor. +You see that the daughter is still surrounded by men talking to her so you head onto the dance floor and meet the lady in blue half way. "Have you come to ask me to dance?" she asks coyly + + +"Of course my lady" you reply before taking her hand and beginning to dance. + + +The next hour or so passes rather quickly as the Lady dances much closer to you that you know is appropriate and keeps you to herself for the whole time the music is going. You do see the owners daughter dancing with a few men but she doesn't seem too happy. You consider asking her for a dance too but she has entirely ignored you since the dancing started and your current partner isn't sharing you. + + +Once the music and dancing has ended the Lady extracts herself from your arms with a little pout. "Sadly Glor this is where you have to go to a meeting and I have to head home, but I do promise I'll be seeing ALOT more of you soon." + + +Left with the strong suspicion she would be taking you home with her if she could you head over to where you see the owner and his daughter talking to a small group. + + +"Ah Glor just in time, we are all going to adjourn to a smaller room for some drinks and our little meeting." turning to his daughter he asks if she would like to join them but she says no and walks away without looking at you. The owner gives you and her a quick glance before muttering "Ah well." and leads you into the meeting room. +> The Truth +After everyone is seated the Owner addresses you "Now Glor I have explained a little of why we are here during our trip down from the mines. This family I have gathered together is for the purpose of getting the truth out and showing the king that he is being tricked. We have tried getting evidence straight to him but the rest of the council has him surrounded day and night and I cannot do anything for fear of being caught and this entire group being put in danger." + + +"Which is why we are sending an expedition." one of the other men joins in. "I am a commander in the 3rd company and will be sending some men along with a relief detachment to the border. they will be carrying proof of everything that has been happening over the past two years. We have had to wait this long as gathering the evidence without raising suspicion has not been easy but it is done now and we must hurry as we think the council are preparing for something big using two captured Carn ships. You will be drafted into the 3rd under my orders and send along as well, it'll become your job to help get the proof to Carn." + + +You think for a minute before answering. "Why are we sending the proof to Carn, why not get it to our king?" + + +"We tried, many times we tried, most of the men were killed and the rest searched and all the documents they had destroyed so they couldn't risk saying anything without proof, that would just lead to us all being killed before we could prove anything." + + +"so when does this expedition leave?" + + +"It was going to be in over a month, but now that your here, the man you know as the Owner of the mine your were in has planned to make them leave in 1 week. Your group will be riding alone instead of with a relief detachment but the papers we provide you should get you there just fine." +> A New Morning +You spend the night in the large mansion and you wake thinking you don't think you slept anywhere so comfortable before in your life. You find fresh cloths and a note inviting you to breakfast in the solar at the end of your bed so you quickly get ready and head out of your door. You immediately realize that you are entirely lost and have no hope of finding the right room but are luckily saved by a butler who appears to materialize beside you arm. + + +Once you have been guided to the solar for breakfast you are left with the owner and a table laden with food. "All from my own farms and holdings!" he says happily "Now dig in, we have a long day ahead and you have received this invitation, so you may have a busy evening too I'd imagine." You inquire about his daughter but he says she broke her fast earlier. + + +You start on the food as you read the impeccably written invitation to dinner at Lady Bridleworth's manner house. Before you can even ask the owner tells you that its the lady you danced with the night before. Well you've never been invited to a dinner in a manner house before and she did seem very interested in you. You ask him if he could accept on your behalf and he gives a little nod to one of the footmen nearby who heads off with the invitation in hand. + + +The rest of the day is spent around the house and its grounds, speaking about the mission and plans for the next few days but you are mostly thinking about the invitation you received, luckily the owner is lending you a suit for the occasion so at least you will look presentable. +> The Dinner Meeting +As evening fell you are sent from the Owners mansion in a small carriage. It only takes a few minutes to reach the destination, which is a house almost the same size as the owners. You are dropped off and head up to the gate a little unsure of the protocol but the gate keeper greets you first. "Master Glor, my Lady has been expecting you, if you head to the main doors the butler will show you in." + + +Clearly someone has done some research on you if even their doorman knows you by sight but you think that this is what it must be like when living in high society so head on in. + + +You are met by the butler who ushers you into the house and through a small maze of joining rooms. You are finally led into a room with a single round table in the centre and several chairs around it, only one is occupied and the lady is wearing an even more low-cut dress than the night before. She rises as you enter and you are about to greet her when she raises a hand to cut you off. + + +"Sadly Glor I had many VERY enjoyable plans for you tonight, and having dinner was the least of them, but we heard this morning that that despicable little man had moved his plans forward to only a week away because of you." You are very confused by this but she continues. "You see, he is a member of the kings counsel, but unlike the rest he is trying to foil the plans to start a war. One which we have been preparing for years, we would decimate Carn and double our territory in a matter of weeks. Sadly I am currently not on the council even though the king knows my family and myself so I have had to take steps to correct this. I help remove the meddling pest and I claim his seat, a fair deal no?" + + +"Wait.. But..." you stammer out + + +"Oh I know sweetie and I AM sorry" She looks you over like a hungry man looks at a steak "We really could have had so much fun. But part of the deal was I hand you over to these gentlemen from the councils intelligence section so I must give you up." + + +You feel your arms grabbed by men either side of you and are dragged through a sliding panel in the wall and down into a deep basement. You try and struggle, even as they strap you to the table. Sadly there are more of them than you and once they start injecting you the pain overwhelms everything. + + +During your torture you tell them everything, you even try to make things up to please them but they always know you are doing it and they make the pain worse so eventually they know everything you do. Once they are finished they untie you and let you stand. They have done relatively little damage to your body, it was mostly your mind that suffered. You head for the door but are blocked by a large man "Sorry but I'm afraid you were found here under a collapsed ceiling after heading to fetch some wine for the lady." he gently pushes you back into the room then shuts and locks the door. You watch helpless as the closing door knocks one of the beams away above you and the roof caves in on your head.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You rise at first light again, and quickly cover your fire with dirt. You head onto the road and search carefully for any sign of other men passing but find none. You must still be ahead of them, but you don't know by how much. You set off North again keeping your eye on the hills and woods to your left looking for any sight of a camp entrance or track leading away from the road. + + +After a few hours you come across a small track leading into the hills through a copse of trees and on into the bare foothills. Its a very small track and could easily just be an animal trail but you can never be sure as people are always loath to leave any large signs of a new mine until the have laid full claim to it and got a fair number of guards in place. You spend a few minutes trying to check for other clues but in the end cant decide if it was made by men turning off the road of just some animals. + + +You could follow it further into the hills and check it out but it would be slow going and if it turned out not to be the mine it would loose you most of a days walking. +> Push on North and look for a more promising turn off +You decide that the trial is too small and too close to your previous mine to be the new mine turn off so you continue North at a reasonable pace. + + +Through the day you pass a couple of even smaller trails but you decide they could be nothing but animal trails as they often pass under bushes and shrubs so you continue till nightfall. You can out into the trees again and have the last of your cooked hare meat. You fall asleep reasoning that if the mine is still ahead that you should pass it tomorrow. + + +Morning arrives and you set off North again but as noon comes and goes and you start to pass into the evening you still see nothing. You start to feel like maybe you made the wrong choice but you push on till night fall and make camp again. + + +In the morning light you take stock, you decide that you can head back and try the original trail, as long as your careful if you see the men approaching you on the road you can always double back North again. Or you can continue on and hope its still ahead of you. +> Head back for the side trail +Your turn back south and walk fast, always keeping an eye on the horizon for any signs of the men you passed but your see none. You push on at a reasonable pace till your forced to camp, in the morning you continue south keeping an eye out for the trail. + + +You come across it by the evening but now you see a large beaten down trail and the marks of a lot of people passing very recently. + + +Not only had the small group sent ahead got there first but since you had lost nearly 4 days going North then back the main group had also gotten their first by a few hours. + + +You Sigh and head down the trail yourself knowing that you missed out on the chance of the good jobs.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide that the trial is too small and too close to your previous mine to be the new mine turn off so you continue North at a reasonable pace. + + +Through the day you pass a couple of even smaller trails but you decide they could be nothing but animal trails as they often pass under bushes and shrubs so you continue till nightfall. You can out into the trees again and have the last of your cooked hare meat. You fall asleep reasoning that if the mine is still ahead that you should pass it tomorrow. + + +Morning arrives and you set off North again but as noon comes and goes and you start to pass into the evening you still see nothing. You start to feel like maybe you made the wrong choice but you push on till night fall and make camp again. + + +In the morning light you take stock, you decide that you can head back and try the original trail, as long as your careful if you see the men approaching you on the road you can always double back North again. Or you can continue on and hope its still ahead of you. +> Carry on North +You decide there isn't any point in going back so soon and head off North as a fast pace again, most of the day passes without signs of a trail. As evening falls you see clear signs of damaged undergrowth and a clear path off into the hills. It must be the mine! + + +Glad you carried on North you strike off the road into the trail and head into the foothills loosing sight of the road behind you. You walk for an hour or two carefully following the trail further in when you see a man leaning against some trees beside the trail. He gives a small nod in your direction so you approach and ask if this is the entrance to the new mine. + + +"New mine? Now where did you hear that?" + + +You explain about your work on a mine further south and that you had heard rumors from your old Forman about a new mine opening in this area. + + +He looks at you thoughtfully for a minute then says "Alright if your fresh from another mine job keep going on this track for a bit till you see a big man with a woodman's axe, his names Pug, tell him Clay sent you, He'll tell you whats going on and get you sorted out." + + +Thanking Clay you set off again down the trail +> Pug +You walk for about half an hour until you see a huge man chopping some wood and stacking it into a cart, he pauses and leans on his axe while you approach. + + +"Are you pug?" + + +"That would be me, now who would be doing the asking all the way out here?" + + +"Clay told me to come speak to you, I'm a miner looking for work. He said you'd be the one to get me sorted out and explain the work here" + + +The big man laughed and said "right you are then, I'll be happy to explain it to ya". He waved the axe indicating the hill just behind him "Just over that rise is our camp, and even though I'm in charge I'm the only one that can ever be bothered to chop the wood for the fires, well I also enjoy it which is part of the reason I'm always the one here doing it but anyway you didn't come here for me to tell you about chopping wood. Were a small band here at the moment which makes it easier but sadly for you I wouldn't say were a mining camp" + + +"Not a mining camp?" your not sure how to take the news that they aren't a mining camp but Pug seems nice enough and you'd be happy enough to do logging or hunting work too "So what work are you doing out here then?" + + +Pug gives you a grin "Ah that would be banditry mostly, some robbery, looting and such like." + + +Your trying to think up a reply to his statement when you feel the wind being knocked out of you, looking down you see a steel arrow head pointing out of your chest. You fall backwards away from the grinning Pug to see Clay and a couple of others holding loading crossbows walking towards your head. + + +"Always nice when they come to you isn't it! This one said he just came off a job so should even have some good coin on him" + + +You try to say something but can only gurgle a little before darkness closes your eyes<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide a night under the trees and a good chance of catching food are too good an opportunity to pass up so you head east into the trees till you're well away from the road. You set up a small camp and fire and set up snares out in the trees. + + +Not long after darkness closed in you hear some noise in the direction of the road and go investigate. You caught a Hare! you quickly skin and gut it and are about to head back to the fire when you hear noise from further towards the road. You walk quietly closer to investigate and see a large group setting up camp on the roadside. + + +You're about to leave the cover of the trees to go greet them when you over hear their leader telling a small group to go on ahead and prepare the mine camp. They are the workers sent to open the mine your looking for! You do a fast headcount and realize about 50 workers are camped there and many look experienced. + + +You decide that they must be the main team sent up to get the mining started and realize that they will have enough skilled workers to fill most of the mining jobs there, but unskilled labor is nearly always welcome- if on a much lower pay. + + +You think about it and you decide that you can either try to join up with them and risk the lower pay, or, you can try and beat the group sent on ahead and try and secure a better job at the mine site before word reaches them of their workers being so close. +> Approach the foreman for a job +You sling your hare through a belt loop and walk out of the trees towards the foreman's fire. He watches you approach with obvious interest, glancing at the hare tied to your belt. You hail him and ask if you might make use of his fire to cook your hare, you would of course be willing to trade some for a mug of the ale the man was drinking if he was interested. + + +The man laughs and agrees, you finish preparing the hare and start cooking it. Once its starts the cook through you sit down beside the foreman to see about getting a job. +> The new foreman +"Where are they off to so late at night?" you ask indicating the group vanishing into the night up the road as he trades you a full mug of ale for a chunk of meat off the fire + + +"They're the mine guards that marched up from the city with us, I sent them on ahead to give the news that we are almost there and to make the camp safe and ready for when we arrive". + + +You carefully start inquiring about jobs at the mine but he sadly informs you that they have all the trained hands that they need with them already but that you'd be welcome as unskilled labor, the pay would be much lower but that's all he could offer. + + +You realize with the guards sent ahead already that you wont be able to reach the camp before them so your left with the choice of joining them for much lower pay or heading back south to the city after all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You turn Northward up the road thinking that the rumors of a new mine are too good an opportunity to pass up, and hey, even if it's false you don't mind spending an extra week or two on the road. + + +You pull out some of your dried meat and start eating as you walk, thinking you should probably set some traps and snares when you make camp that night to stock up some fresh meat. You spend an uneventful day walking North and see no other travellers. An hour or so before dusk you start looking for a place to camp. You can camp on the roadside, head into the trees to the east for cover while you sleep or walk an hour or so to the foothills west and hope for a spring or cave. +> Might be a traverler along the road, camp beside it +You decide it would be best to just set up camp beside the road and see if any other travelers come along during the night. You go a few feet east of the road to a nice looking oak tree and start setting up a camp for yourself as theres still some time till night sets. You Set a few snares further into the trees and build a nice fire for yourself then settle down for a while. + + +Just as darkness arrives you hear some noise in the trees, one of your snares has caught a hare! Gathering in the other snares you quickly skin and prepare the hare then set it cooking on the fire- its worth staying up an hour or two for some good hot food. + + +The hare eventually starts to cook nicely and you've just pulled its leg off to start eating when you hear some noise coming up the road. You keep eating as you watch a large group coming towards you. They slow as they reach the fire and the one in the lead walks over to you. + + +"Hail stranger, mind if we set up camp with you for the night? I could even trade some ale for a little of that hare if your interested?" + + +You haven't had ale in a week or two now so you readily agree and watch the group start to build a couple more fires and set out their sleeping rolls. The man who had talked to you first sends a few of the group off North up the road then joins you by the fire with a small ale keg under one arm.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have just run your sword through the last of the 6 bandits when you hear a cry for help. You jog over to a large chest. Upon opening it, you find a beautiful girl locked in with a rather large amount of gold. + + +"You must be Amelia" you say, as you boldly lift her from the chest. + + +"I am!" she replies breathlessly, "You must have gotten my hidden message! Thank you for rescuing me. The way you challenged all the bandits to a sword fight at the same time was so very heroic!" You lean closer.... + + +You wake up and take in your surroundings, holding a tiny hope that one of your dreams had been reality and not just fantasy. But all you see is your one room hut, mostly empty and worn down. + + +"Last night it was a dream about escaping from an amazing tower of riddles ruled by an evil magician and today it's a hero rescuing princesses... I must be losing it." You get out of bed, get dressed and take stock. One bed, a desk with your open pack and a chair by the cooking fire are all the furniture in the room. You slowly re-fill your pack with your cloths and hunting gear. The fire went out during the night leaving the room dank and chilled so, realizing you had no reason left to hang around, you stuff your sleeping sheet into you pack, sling it over your shoulders and head to the door. + + +Looking out you see the dirt streets and hastily built shacks of the work camp you've been living in the past few months. + + +Do you: +> Put off speaking to your boss and go back in for a last look around +Your boss will be busy shouting orders at people anyway so talking to him can wait. + + +You turn back inside and have a good look around for anything you might have missed. You rummage under the bed and behind the desk, you even check the pot over the fire for any scraps. + + +But all you find is an old, completely rotted apple under the bed which smells so bad you chuck it into the coal embers as soon as you pick it up. + + +Sighing, you admit that your already carrying everything you own and head out the door to speak to the foreman of the camp. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your name is Miyuki Takeda. Otherwise known as "Mayumi's sister." + +Since the day you were born, it seems you have been in her shadow. Twins, but not equal. Never equal. + +Mayumi has always been the pretty one, the clever one. Everybody's favorite. + +I know what you're thinking. This is one of those petty revenge dramas. Neglected Miyuki takes vengeance on her sister for being loved more than she is. But you're better than that. + +You've never been jealous of Mayumi. Not once. You love your sister. + +But she doesn't love you. Strangely enough, she's the jealous one. It's almost as if she fears that someday, everyone will realize that she really isn't smarter or better than you. And then she won't be the favorite any more. + +It started slowly. Little unkind things she'd say, little acts of cruelty. You tried to pretend it wasn't happening. You still do. +> Playing in the Park +"Everyone! I've got a great new idea for a game!" + +It's Saturday afternoon, and you and your sister are with your friends, playing in the park. + +As usual, Mayumi has taken charge. She always come up with the best games. Everyone has so much fun! Well, almost everyone. You didn't really like last week's game. But you didn't want to spoil everyone else's fun. + +"This game is called 'Outlaw.' One of us will be the outlaw, and the others will form a posse to hunt them down and capture them." + +This doesn't sound too bad. Not like 'Safari Hunter' last week, where you were the lion, and everyone threw water balloons at you. + +"Who should be the outlaw first? Hmmm. . . Miyuki! Why don't you go first?" + +"I don't know, Mayumi. Why don't you pick someone else?" + +"Isn't that just like my selfish sister? I'm nice enough to let her go first, and she acts like that. If it's too much trouble, Miyuki, you don't have to play with us!" + +"No, no, Mayumi. I want to play, I just. . ." + +"Good. Then you're the Outlaw. You have ten seconds to run." +> Hiding +So you run. + +You find a tiny shallow beneath a stone sculpture where you can cower. It's cramped and dirty, but you feel fairly sure Mayumi can't find you here. + +As you crouch in the damp crater, you can hear two women chatting on a nearby park bench. + +"Have you heard about the Hell Correspondence?" + +"Is that the cursed website?" + +"Yeah, they say if you log on at midnight, you can summon the Hell Girl to take vengeance for you!" + +Hell Correspondence. . . sounds scary. +> Found you! +With a triumphant shout, Mayumi grabs you by the hair and drags you out from under the statue. + +"Ow! Mayumi, you're pulling too hard!" + +"Quiet, Outlaw! I'm taking you in!" + +She drags you over to the rest of the group. + +"Good job, Mayumi! Way to go!" They applaud her success. + +"So now does somebody else get to be the Outlaw?" you ask hopefully. + +"No, dummy. Now we bring you to justice, Texas style!" + +"Um, what does that mean?" + +"Quiet, bandit. You don't get to talk till it's time for your last words! Rei, hand me that jump rope. Good. Sho, you and Takeshi can use this to tie Miyuki to that tree over there." + +"I don't wanna. . ." + +"Come on Miyuki, it's just a game." +"Yeah, Miyuki, just play along." +> Go along with the game +You let Sho and Takeshi tie you to the tree. + +"Rei, you can hide next." + +Everyone runs off and leaves you tied to the tree. Everyone but Mayumi. She stands there, watching you intently, as if she's expecting something to happen soon. + +Then you spot them. + +"Mayumi, there are ants all over this tree!" + +"I know. That's Texas style justice. We tie you up and let the ants get you." + +"Mayumi! No!" + +"Don't be such a little crybaby, Miyuki." + +You struggle and shriek as the ants crawl all over you, but you are tightly fastened to the tree. Mayumi just watches, smiling slightly. + +Of course, when the other children come to see why you're making such a racket, Mayumi claims to have only just arrived, and scolds Sho and Takeshi for not noticing the ants before they tied you up. + +You consider telling the other kids what really happened, but you know they won't believe you. + +You are rapidly reaching the conclusion that your life cannot continue this way. +> Hell Correspondence +Late that night, when your parents are sleeping, you sneak into the computer room and log onto the website. + + +"We will take revenge on your behalf" + +That's all it says. And below that, a box to enter. . . + +Mayumi's name? +> Typing +Hands shaking, you type into the box: + +"Hell Girl, please kill Mayumi Takeda." + +The screen goes black, and you cower, awaiting confirmation of your dark deed. + +But nothing happens. + +Disappointed, you try again, but you can't seem to access the site. A 404 file not found error is the only thing that comes up. +> Next Day +Nothing has changed at all. + +You try to avoid her, but Mayumi corners you in the upstairs hallway. + +"Come on, Miyuki, let's go outside and play together!" +> Push past her +Mayumi drops to the ground as you push past. She pauses, then deliberately thumps her head against the wall, loud enough to attract your mother's attention, and begins crying. + +You get spanked for being a bully, and are forced to apologize to Mayumi. She smiles sweetly and says she is sure it was an accident, and you didn't mean for her to fall. Your mother beams proudly at her sweet, forgiving daughter before ordering you into your room for the rest of the day. +> In your room +You lie on your bed and cry, muffling your tears with your pillow. + +When you open your eyes, everything is different. + +You are outside, the sun is setting. + +A young girl with dark hair and red eyes is standing before you. +> "My name is Ai" +"Where am I? What is this place?" + +"My name is Ai. You've summoned me." +> "This is for you" +"This is for you." + + +She hands you a straw doll.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Nothing has changed at all. + +You try to avoid her, but Mayumi corners you in the upstairs hallway. + +"Come on, Miyuki, let's go outside and play together!" +> Go outside and play +Once outside, Mayumi shoves you into a mud puddle and runs back into the house crying "Mother, come quick, Miyuki fell down!" + +Your mother pulls you into the house. "Why on earth were you playing in the mud, Miyuki?" + +"I. . . I wasn't. . ." you stammer. "Mayumi pushed me." + +Mayumi's lower lip trembles. Tears well in her eyes. "Why would you say those horrible things about me, Miyuki?" + +Your mother angrily orders you to your room. + +As you head up the stairs, you can hear Mayumi's voice. "Why does Miyuki hate me, Mother?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With a triumphant shout, Mayumi grabs you by the hair and drags you out from under the statue. + +"Ow! Mayumi, you're pulling too hard!" + +"Quiet, Outlaw! I'm taking you in!" + +She drags you over to the rest of the group. + +"Good job, Mayumi! Way to go!" They applaud her success. + +"So now does somebody else get to be the Outlaw?" you ask hopefully. + +"No, dummy. Now we bring you to justice, Texas style!" + +"Um, what does that mean?" + +"Quiet, bandit. You don't get to talk till it's time for your last words! Rei, hand me that jump rope. Good. Sho, you and Takeshi can use this to tie Miyuki to that tree over there." + +"I don't wanna. . ." + +"Come on Miyuki, it's just a game." +"Yeah, Miyuki, just play along." +> Refuse to play +Everyone calls you a crybaby and a spoilsport. You're unhappy, but at least you are away from Mayumi for the rest of the afternoon. + +You decide to go to the library and read for a while. It's peaceful and quiet, and you start to think maybe you were wrong about Mayumi. + +When you get home, your mother is waiting. + +"I'm very disappointed in you, Miyuki!" + +"What? What's the matter?" + +"Don't play dumb with me, little missy! Upstairs, now!" + +Apparently, Mayumi went home crying, telling your mother that you pushed her off the swings and she fell. She even has a fresh scrape on her knee to prove it. + +You get spanked for being a bully, and are forced to apologize to Mayumi. She smiles sweetly and says she is sure it was an accident, and you didn't mean for her to fall. Your mother beams proudly at her sweet, forgiving daughter before ordering you into your room for the rest of the night. + +You are rapidly reaching the conclusion that your life cannot continue this way.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Gunship Iron Eagle Two roared through sector 205 on the rim of the Mesarius star system. The sleek aerospace vehicle, similar in form to the hi-tech attack copters of the 21st Century, was designed with a swappable engine section, allowing it to be equipped with a spacedrive for stellar travel, or a jet-boost assisted rotor section for duties planetside. Turrets swivelled slowly on either side of the Gunship's hull, mounting missile launchers and an energy cannon, while the small chin-turret at the front, below the cockpit, housed twin-plasmabolt machine guns used in anti-infantry duties while planetside. + +Kreiger 'Wildcat' Jones sat at the front of the two-man cockpit, one hand on the pilot's joystick, the other tapping occassionally at the keys on the console in front of him. "I'm telling you, those frontier raiders make no sense at all. I mean, all they have to do is sign up with the Federation and all their supply and maintenance problems are solved! Makes no sense they would fight for political control of a few hundred rocks in space, and waste their lives trying to steal the equipment and supplies they need. I mean, sign on the dotted line, and they get everything for free without a fight, and the planets are still theirs to do with as they please, just with a Fed governor helping make sure things are run right." + +Susa 'Spitball' Henderson sat in the gunner's seat, behind him, with a complex console that controlled targeting and weapons systems. "I guess for some people, the 'idea' of independance is more powerful than whatever the facts of the situation might be." + +Jones shook his head in frustration. "I just don't get it, that's all. We're better armed than they are. We've got better skills, better funding. We're going to defeat them in battle pretty much every time, but raiders keep a'coming. They should all - hey, wait a moment, I got something on the scan." + +He tapped a few keys on his console, and zoomed in on one of his displays, where small flashes of light flickered in a section of the grid. "Hey, we've got Space Folds in the next sector. Better report it in." + +Henderson turned on a Comm channel back to their carrier. "Carrier Opal, this is gunship Iron Eagle Two, out in Sector Two-Oh-Five. We've just scanned incoming starships in Sector Two-Oh-Six. Requesting permission to check it out?" + +"This is carrier Opal, that is affirmitive. Watch your tails," the reply came back over the Comm. + +"How many are you reading?" Henderson asked Jones. + +"Looks like four Space Folds detected. If it's a typical raider force, what, two transports, two of their rickety old gunships, we should be able to take 'em out or send 'em packing," Jones said confidently. Leaning softly on the joystick, he arced the gunship toward the sensor readings, and kicked on the afterburners. The Iron Eagle gunship rocketed forward and into the next sector. + +"There they are," he said, seeing starship blips appearing on his radar. "Hang on... these readings can't be right. Can you get some info on your tac console?" + +"Just a moment," Henderson said, tapping away on her console. "What the - that can't be right at all. I think our scanner's gone screwy. The scale's all gone wrong." + +"What do you mean?" Jones asked hesitantly. + +"This says those ships are huge... I mean, the smallest one is five times the size of our carrier!" she replied. + +"That can't be right, we've got no ships that big, and the raiders certainly don't have anything like that... Let's get a bit closer, try to get a visual." Jones increased the thrust, closing toward the four unknown starships. "Coming into Optical range... now," he said, and zoomed in on the target location on one of his displays. What he saw was like nothing he had ever seen before. He took a few screen capture images. + +"I've taken some shots, send these images back to the Opal, right now!" he ordered. + +"Transmitting data," she said, reaching for a button on her console. Something streamed out from one of the unidentified starships, like a beam of concentrated sunlight. The beam engulfed the Iron Eagle. It left nothing behind. +> On Patrol +It is a typical sunny Mesarian day, a soft breeze rustling leaves and causing the branches of the trees surrounding Fort Dale to sway softly. You walk from the barracks toward the large three-story high mecha hanger by the east walls of the complex, wondering why frontiersman would live on the desolate outer star systems, when they could live on the core worlds and enjoy weather like this. Well, I guess it takes all sorts to make the galaxy go round, you think to yourself. + +Entering the hanger, you pause to look up at the twelve Mechanised Assault Units, standing in bays on each side of the hanger. They are standard Fire Hawk and Gatling chassis, the first a multi-role fighting machine, the latter often used for anti-infantry, or anti-gunship purposes. At the rear of the hanger is a thirteenth bay, where the company commander's large M.A.U., a Nova, is parked. Bearing two large energy cannons, and standing almost to the roof of the hanger, it is the toughest M.A.U. fielded by Sol Federation. Of course, it takes the skill and experience of a company commander to pilot such a mecha. At least, that's what your C.O. tells you all. + +'Tomcat' and 'Wolfman' walk into the hanger, waving your way as they head for their machines. As the Squad Leader, you are in charge of the fort's M.A.U. Squad Beta, and as your two squadmates, they are under your command. Of course, being about the same age as you are, and having served for about the same amount of time as you have, they don't exactly obey your every whim. At least they obey you when it counts though, when raiders land ground forces on the planet, and you find yourself in the heat of battle. + +Turning to your left, you head for a small lift, and slap the 'up' button. It rises upward, taking you behind the torso section of your Gatling M.A.U. The war machine stands like a 7 metre (23 foot) high metal man, with rectangular armour plating panels slapped around joints and further protecting the chest section. Pressing some buttons on the back of the machine, a two-foot thick section of metal slides aside, letting you step into the chest of the machine. + +You're already wearing your Pilot Suit, so you close the door behind you, and connect sensor cables to the sockets in your suit, and attach the control pads to the wrists of your suit. The control pads extend out below your hand, allowing you to move your hands about, and always be able to touch the buttons on the control pad that control every facet of the war machine, from targeting and firing weapons, to powering the machine up or down. The suit itself is harnessed to the inside of the machine, locking you into place. After powering up, any time you try to move a part of your body, the limbs of the towering war machine will echo the move. In this way, trying to walk will cause the machine to walk instead of you. Moving your body just the right amount to get the machine to move exactly where and when you want it to is a difficult art, and one that took years of boot-camp training to accomplish, but for a low-level Squad Leader, you think you do pretty good. + +Before locking your suit into place, you attach your head equipment, and then you lock the suit, and power up. Instantly your vision goes blank, as your headset pulses into your skull, and interrupts the signals your optic nerves send to your brain. Then it begins to send signals of its own into your brain, as it reads optical information from the camera systems in the head of your war machine. + +A moment later, you suddenly feel very big, as you 'look' through the 'eyes' of your Gatling M.A.U., seven meters above the floor of the hanger. You try to turn your head from side to side, and the Gatling's head turns instead, allowing you to look around. Flexing your limbs a bit, you crouch the machine, stand back up, and wave the arms about a little. Everything seems to be in working order. Time to move out. + +You step forwards, and the machine steps into the middle of the hanger bay. Tomcat and Wolfman walk their Fire Hawks out beside you, and together the three of you stomp out of the hanger. + +"So, Squad Leader, where are we going to patrol today?" Wolfman's voice comes over your headset. +> "Let's go for a walk in the forests around the Fort," you order. +You lead the squad to the towering gates of the Fort. "This is Squad Beta, requesting Gate Clearance," you say to the fort's traffic control tower. + +"We read you, Squad Beta. You're good to go," someone replies. The massive gates slide into the Fort's surrounding wall, and you lead your squad out. A large clearing lies between the Fort's walls and the forest that surrounds it, so that any approaching vehicles can always be seen. You lead your men down the main road and into the forest, among the equally towering trees. It's a funny thing, being at eye-level with the tops of many of the trees, and it always takes you a moment to get your balance right, and for the feeling of being a giant to become natural. + +Many of the trees are toppled over throughout the forest, from people having stomped out among the trees. Being a three-story high metal man means that you often have to push trees out of the way. While conservationists might have a problem with such actions in some areas of the planet, no one complains when soldiers do it around a fort, as they depend on the forts scattered across the planet for protection, and you never knew if a raider force had secretly touched down, and enemy M.A.U.s were hiding among the trees, waiting for an opportunity to strike. + +Well, actually, that sort of thing was pretty rare. The Orbital sensor network always detected incoming ships, and could pinpoint the exact landing location of any military transports on the planet. Anyway, you stomp off among the trees, shoving them out of the way whenever you need to make room for your machine. Wolfman and Tomcat stomp along, off to either side of you. + +"One of these days, we're gonna find a raider mecha waiting for us out here, and patrol is going to actually be interesting," Tomcat laughs. + +"Hey, anything beats sitting around the barracks, losing at cards to Thunder," Wolfman replies. + +Suddenly a ComTech from the Fort speaks over the Fort's military channel. "This is Fort Dale to all units on patrol. Be advised, the planetary sensor network has detected unidentified incoming starships. We haven't been able to establish contact with the carrier scout network... This could be a raider force. Stand By for possible interception coordinates." + +"I hope they land in our sector... haven't seen any action in months now," Tomcat says. + +"Hang on, did they say they couldn't establish communcations with the carrier scout network? What does that mean? A raider force couldn't take out all the carriers and gunships out there. I haven't heard of them being able to jam our communications either," Wolfman says worriedly. + +"Nah, probably just a technical glitch at our Fort. The other Fort's probably heard all about it from the scout network," Tomcat says dismissively. + +The ComTech at Fort Dale speaks over the military channel again. "All units on patrol, be advised the planet has been taken to High Alert. We don't know what those ships are up there, but they're huge! Dozens of smaller ships, we assume they're military transports, have come out of the mothers, and are coming down all across the planet. We've got a couple of these transports inbound toward our location. Keep an eye on the skies, people, and if you get in over your head, get back here, and take up defensive positions inside the Fort! The other pilots at Fort Dale are mounting up, and should be ready for action soon." + +"What the hell? Multiple transports heading our way? What exactly are we up against?" Wolfman asks anxiously. + +"Hey, frontier raiders aren't well armed. They're probably just small transports, full of infantry. We'll mow them down, and be back to the Fort for dinner in no time," Tomcat says confidently. +> "No, I think Wolfman's right to be worried. Let's head back to the Fort, and take up a defensive position with the rest of our M.A.U. company," you order. +You lead the way back to the Fort. Seeing you coming across the clearing around Fort Dale, Traffic Control opens the doors for you, and you stomp your way into the walled complex. Only a few minutes later, you pick up approaching blips on the scanner hud display which is 'projected' into your mind by your headset, in the corner of your 'vision'. Four large unidentified transports are heading toward the Fort. + +You listen to the roaring of flying machines on your M.A.U.'s audio sensors, approaching from the east. The other ten M.A.U.'s of Fort Dale's company have marched out of the Hanger, and begin taking up positions around the perimeter, their outstretched weapon-bearing arms just above the walls of the Fort, pointing in every direction. You quickly take up a position with your squad, along the east wall. + +Moments later, you can see the four massive transports. They are about the size of a squad-carrying M.A.U. transport, but they are a bit bulkier and boxier than any M.A.U. transports you've seen before. + +In the Fort's courtyard, the infantry division assemble, about a hundred soldiers. Most of them were standard infantry bearing plasmabolt rifles and shocksticks, but a dozen or so were fitted up in battlesuits - three meter tall armoured exoskeltons with clawed robotic hands, and small energy cannons attached to each shoulder. + +At the rear of the Fort, another hanger houses a Gunship squad. The six flying machines had just finished powering up and begin to lift up into the air to intercept the enemy transports. Suddenly a thick bolt of lightening blasts out from the nose of the leading enemy transport ship. The lightning crackles loudly as it arcs through the air toward Fort Dale, to explode in the midst of the Gunships! The lightning bolt narrowly misses the Gunships, their pilots scattering the ships away from each other, but two pilots panic, and you watch in horror as their ships crash together in the air, then tumble in a wreck of twisted metal and fire, to crash onto the tarmac. + +Some of the other M.A.U. soldiers open fire with their weapons. Your company commander, Captain Jefferson, yells out over the local military channel, "Hold your fire! They're out of range! Save your ammo and power cells! Everyone, get down!" + +You join with your company as everyone kneels their M.A.U. war machines behind the Fort's wall. The remaining four Gunships fold down their rotors, and kick on their afterburners, rocketing through the air toward the enemy transports. You watch them fly overhead, then lose sight of them due to the Fort's walls. You hear the roar of the afterburners kick off again as the Gunships draw near to the flying transports, and listen to energy cannons and missiles firing away. A while later, you hear the loud crack of another lightning strikes, and some explosions. Then there is a tremendous crashing sound, and the ground shakes. + +"Looks like it takes them a while to recharge that lightning cannon. Someone get a look at what's happening out there!" Captain Jefferson orders. +> "I'll do it," you say bravely, and stand your M.A.U. up to look over the Fort's walls. +You quickly stand up and look out over the walls of Fort Dale through the eyes of your Gatling war machine. + +"Sir, the Gunships are all down, but it looks like they took out one of the enemy transports!" you report, looking at the smoke and flames rising from the distant fields beyond the forest. Three of the large transports are hovering in the air near the wreckage. Then you see some sort of flickering light at the front of one of the transports. +> Curious, you decide to keep watching, and see what it does next. +Seconds later, you remember about it's strange energy weapon, and then you watch as the weapon finishes charging up, and a massive bolt of lightning surges through the air with a loud crack. It is the last sound you ever hear, as the lightning bolt blasts the top half of your M.A.U. to scrap, taking most of your body with it. + +This is the end, for you...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You quickly stand up and look out over the walls of Fort Dale through the eyes of your Gatling war machine. + +"Sir, the Gunships are all down, but it looks like they took out one of the enemy transports!" you report, looking at the smoke and flames rising from the distant fields beyond the forest. Three of the large transports are hovering in the air near the wreckage. Then you see some sort of flickering light at the front of one of the transports. +> You decide not to take any risks, and crouch back down behind the wall. +As you crouch back down, you hear a loud cracking sound, as the weapon that had been charging up finished charging, and launches one of the massive lightning bolts through the air. The searing electrical beam blasts through the air where you were standing moments ago, and smashes into one of the armoured buildings in the middle of the Fort. A large fiery hole is blown through the side of the building, as debris scatters into the courtyard, among screaming infantry. The rest of the infantry and battlesuit wearing soldiers run for cover. + +"Damn it! How can they shoot so far! Who the hell are they?" Captain Jefferson growls over the Comm. Then the ground shakes again - the familiar shaking of massive spaceships landing on the ground in the distance. + +"Okay, they've touched down in the fields out past the forest... That means there's lines of trees between us and whatever ground forces they've brought down. We won't know what's coming until they reach the clearing around Fort Dale," the Captain says. He cautiously raises his Nova M.A.U. so that its head can peek above the wall. + +"Those transports are so big, more than half of their hull rises above the tree line. I suspect they'll keep barraging the Fort with that lightning cannon of theirs, while their troops advance. Intel has it they are coming down all across the planet, so we've got to hold Fort Dale, because there aint going to be reinforcements coming our way any time soon. So, I'm gonna need two squads to volunteer. I want a squad to take turns looking over the wall for incoming enemies, and I need a squad for scout duty, to try and get a closer look at what we're dealing with before they reach us." +> "Sir! Squad Beta will scout out the enemy," you volunteer. +"Oh, great!" Wolfman says, and you smile as his mecha shakes its head. + +"Good job, Squad Leader," Captain Jefferson says. "Head east into the trees, and try to get us some optics on the enemy. I want you three to patch an optic channel back here to Fort Dale, so myself and the other officers can see what you see." + +"Will do, Captain," you reply, and flick a switch on one of your control pads. A blinking light in the corner of your vision tells you that your mecha is transmitting everything you see to the commanders of the Fort. + +"Okay Squad Beta, form on me!" you order, and Wolfman and Tomcat take a position on either side of you. The large gate in the south wall slowly slides open. + +"Good luck, men," the Captain says. +> "Okay, on my mark, make a dash for the trees... Mark!" you order, and race for the trees. +The three of you stomp past the gate at full speed, racing across the clearing that lies around Fort Dale. As you dash, you glance to the east, where the top half of the three transports rise above the treeline in the distance. With a curse, you notice power building up at the front of one of the transports. + +"Get into the trees, they're going to fire again!" you shout. You rush into the trees just as you hear the loud cracking sound of a lightning bolt cannon firing, then suddenly the force of an explosion sends you falling forwards among the trees. You grab onto a tree and stumble down on one knee, but manage to stay relatively upright. Turning, you see Tomcat crouching beside you, but metres behind you, still in the clearing, is the half melted wreck of what was once Wolfman - obliterated by the enemy weapon. + +"Dammit! Man down, I repeat, man down!" you say over the military channel. + +"We see it," the Captain replies, watching everything through your mecha's 'eyes' from within Fort Dale. "You're in the forest now though, you should be out of sight of the transports' weapon." + + +> "I understand. We'll do the best we can, and get those visuals you're after," you promise, thinking a quick prayer for Wolfman. +You head deeper into the forest, angling toward the east, as you work your way into a position between the grounded enemy transports and the walls of Fort Dale. You glance at the radar sensor readings every few seconds to make sure no enemy contacts have come within range. Of course, your sensors only pick up energy sources - they were designed to pick up vehicles and war machines similar to your own. If the transports were carrying an army of infantry soldiers, and they weren't wearing any form of powered armour, you'll only notice them when you actually see them... Anyhow, transports the size of those ones had to be carrying something pretty big inside of them, so the enemy must be inside some sort of war machines. + +"This aint good," Tomcat says softly over your squad channel. + +"I know," you reply anxiously, stomping through the forest towards the other side. + +"I mean, this really aint good," Tomcat says. + +"Keep your mind on the job. We have to get some visuals on enemy units, so the Fort knows what they're up against," you tell him. + +"What if they're bigger and tougher than we are?" he asks. + +"Then we get a look at them for the Captain, and get the hell out of here," you say grimly. It's a strange feeling. You've never had to think about retreat before. + +Suddenly you pick up a small blip on your sensors, then a couple other small ones. The blips are moving toward you at a high speed, shifting about slightly. Probably dodging trees. Some sort of small hover vehicle, you wonder? + +"Incoming hostiles," you say over the squad channel. + +"I see them," he replies. +> "Okay, let's brace to fire. Take 'em out on sight," you order. +"Roger," he replies. The two of you plant your war machines' feet slightly apart, and firmly on the ground, having turned to face the incoming targets. You tap a button on one of your suit's control pads, and the twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns attached to your M.A.U.'s left arm begin spinning rapidly, ready to fire. + +Seconds later, the fast moving machines zip into sight through the trees, and you both open fire. Superheated bolts of energy blast out from your arm, tracing a line of destruction through the trees. You see a couple explosions, and fiery fragments of hover machines go flying through the air, but two of the small machines go flying between you and Tomcat, and in a second, disappear into the trees behind you. + +"What the hell were they?" Tomcat asks. + +You wait to make sure the hover machines aren't heading back in your direction. On your sensor display you see them continuing on toward the Fort. "Must be scouts of some kind. We've got a moment - bring up visual playback and let's check them out," you order. + +You bring up a small window in the corner of your vision, and rewind the optical recordings of what your M.A.U. has seen recently. Just before the explosions took place, you press pause, and see a blurry image of what you blew up. It looked like a civilian a-grav hoverbike, but of a more angular design than those you had seen. A blurry figure sat on top of it, but you can't make out any good details. They appeared to be wearing some sort of green uniform that covered their whole body, like a jumpsuit, with oval shaped goggles or something on their faces. + +"You got this, Captain?" you ask over the military channel. + +"We see it. Good work, Squad Leader. Must be some sort of scouts. Get closer, and try to get something on their main forces. We'll try to clear up your visual image, and get a better look at what you blew up. We'll deal with the other scouts when they get here," Captain Jefferson tells you. + +Suddenly there's a loud crack, and a massive bolt of lightning flies over the top of the forest. Explosions tell you that they struck at the Fort again, and you wonder how much damage they did. + +You wait a moment, and then wave your Gatling's hand. Tomcat moves back into position beside you. You head off at a fast pace, continuing through the forest toward the landing site. Ten minutes later, numerous sensor blips begin appearing all over your sensors in the distance, close together so it is hard to tell what was a large enemy unit, or what was just a group of them close together. At the edge of your sensors, three massive blips mark the location of the enemy transports. +> "Okay, let's run to the edge of the forest, get a good look, then get back to the Fort in one piece," you order. +You head for the edge of the forest, noticing that some of the enemy forces are moving away from the transports, toward the forest as well. Minutes later, the trees begin to thin before you, and you get your first glimpses of the enemy. + +The three massive metal transports rise high above the ground in the fields beyond the forest, and massive hatches in their sides have opened. Hundreds, if not thousands, of infantry soldiers had already poured out of the transports to assemble in large formations in the fields. What is more disturbing are their mechanised assault units. These M.A.U.s are like nothing you have ever seen. + + +Instead of being shaped like a big metal man, they are on four legs, with a large body pod-section in the middle, bristling with weapons. What is worse, if your estimates are correct, is that the enemy M.A.U.s must be sixteen metres (52 feet) high! They tower above the ground like five or six-story buildings! That's more than twice the height of your own war machine - and you thought your Gatling was big! + +The body section of these behemoth sized war machines have three rotating cylinder shapes coming out of them, with sparkling, glowing spheres moving along the rims. They must be weapons of some sort, able to move about to fire in any direction! + +"Squad Leader," the Captain's voice comes over the military channel. "Zoom your optics in on those soldiers, let's try to identify who we're dealing with." + +You press a button and zoom your view in on a large group of soldiers. What the - you gasp. You hear the Captain and Tomcat swear in unison, as they both get a better look as well. From the blurry image of the hoverbike rider you saw earlier, you had thought the soldiers were wearing some sort of green body suit. Now you realise it's their skin! Their unhelmeted heads reveal the enemy to be some sort of lizard men! You're dealing with an alien invasion fleet! No wonder the scout ships in this star system hadn't reported in - they had been destroyed by aliens with completely different weapon technology to your own! Thinking further, you realise that there haven't been any frontier raiders attacking in a long time. Perhaps the frontier star systems had already been conquered by the alien force? + +Even more chilling, you notice that many of the lizardman soldiers have long swords hanging from their belts, in addition to the rifles they carried. Swords? Talk about close combat. You feel glad that you aren't in the infantry, but have many sheets of metal between you and whatever comes your way. + +"All right, Squad Leader, get back here pronto! We'll need all the help we can get!" Captain Jefferson orders you. + +"This aint good man... this aint good!" Tomcat says over the squad channel, as one of the massive transports sends another crackling lightning bolt over the forest, and into the Fort compound. + +Some legions of infantry, and two of the massive behemoth war machines, have begun marching toward where you and Tomcat are hiding among the trees. Have they seen you on their sensors? Most probably, you think. +> "Okay, Tomcat, let's get back to Fort Dale!" you order, turning your war machine around. +You rush off into the forest, heading west toward the Fort. Behind you, too close for comfort, you hear cracking sounds like that of the alien transports' lightning cannon, but on a smaller scale, followed by explosions along the treeline. If you had remained near the edge of the forest, than whatever just fired would probably have blown you away! You feel a chill run down your spine as you race through the forest toward the walls of the Fort, and temporary safety. + +Around fifteen minutes later, having edged around to the southern side of the Fort, and having waited for the alien transports to fire their massive cannons at the Fort again, you race into the clearing and for the Fort gate. + +"Squad Beta to Fort Dale, open up, we're coming in!" you shout over the military channel. Thankfully, the gates slide open as you approach, and the two of you quickly move over to one of the walls, and crouch down behind it. + +"Good to see you two," the Captain says. "Shame about Wolfman, he was a good soldier." + +"Thank you Captain," you reply, feeling a moment of guilt that all you had thought of was how happy you were to make it back to the Fort in one piece. + +The Captain addresses the M.A.U. pilots of Dale Company. "Okay, people, I want a defensive line along the east wall. Infantry will stand prepared to deal with any of those lizard men who manage to breach the walls. We're to focus on those big..." + +"I called them Behemoths, sir," you prompt him. + +"Hmm. Behemoth it is. All pilots to focus fire on the enemy Behemoths. Gatling pilots, feel free to use your machine guns on the infantry forces as well. We recently got word that the Carriers Rogerson and Toyama are still up there in space. The Toyama will be bringing their squadrons of Gunships to provide us some support here at Fort Dale, so we just have to hold out until they arrive. If you believe in God or something, now's the time to say a prayer." + + +> "Sir - has anyone sent a message Out System to try and reach Sol Federation Command, and let them know we're under attack by aliens?" you ask. +"Of course we've tried that, Squad Leader. It seems something is jamming the Fort's interstellar communications. The enemy is blocking the Greyson Transmitter somehow, so we're stuck with local communications. I don't know if they're only jamming the Fort, or if the whole planet has been jammed somehow, but there's nothing we can do here," he tells you. +> "What about civilian transmitters? If they're only jamming the Forts, they might not know about the Civilian Comm Centres!" you suggest. +"It's possible," Captain Jefferson agrees. "If they aren't jamming the whole planet, but just the military, there might be a way to get a message through... Okay, here's the plan. You and Tomcat are to make for Drysdon City, and see if the C.C.C. there has been jammed. If not, transmit the visual data you recorded on you scouting mission. It might not work, but it's worth a try." + +"It's got to work," Tomcat says. "We saw how many of them there were out there. If it's like that at the other Forts, this planet is going to fall, and fast. We've got to get reinforcements!" + +"Get out of here, before the main force arrives," the Captain orders, as another explosive blast from the enemy transport cannons strikes one of the Fort's buildings. The gate slides open, and you and Tomcat race across the clearing and back into the forest. + +Drysdon City is located to the west, luckily for you, as the enemy landed in the east. It should take you a few hours running to get there. Thankfully, you don't have to physically run with your body, but only make slight movements for your war machine to respond to, so you should be able to run the whole way without tiring out. That is, assuming more alien forces haven't landed between the Fort and the city... or even in the city itself! + +Forest turns into fields, and farmland, on either side of the road to Drysdon City. Soon more houses and buildings spread out in all directions, as you both stomp along the wide nature strip between opposite road lanes, designed so that M.A.U.'s can move through populated areas without stepping on hovercars or pedestrians. As the buildings grow up around you, and you approach the city, traffic lights at intersections automatically detect your approach, and turn red, so you can race across roads without squashing anyone. + +Skyscrapers rise before too long, and you are in the city. People scream and point in astonishment, as the two war machines run through the city. You wonder that everyone is still going about their business, and then realise that they might not even be aware that an alien invasion force has attacked the planet. +> "Hey Tomcat, we better warn these people of the danger they're in from the alien invasion!" you say. +"I hear you," Tomcat replies. Together, you turn on your loudspeakers, and start warning people to find shelter, or some place safe, as an enemy force has invaded the planet and has a chance of overwhelming the Forts. + +You quickly realise it was a mistake. As word spreads, and people hear your message while you run through the city, people begin to panic. Hovercars start speeding off in every direction. People race about recklessly, ignoring traffic rules. You soon find that you and Tomcat are standing in the middle of a traffic jam of panicking people! + +"Get out of the way! We've got to get a message out over the C.C.C.!" you cry over the loudspeakers. You realise your second mistake, as dozens of people start running toward the Civilian Communications Centre to get their own messages out. + +"We've got to get there!" Tomcat growls over the squad channel, then yells over the loudspeaker, "We're coming through, get out of our way!" He steps forward, crushing the front of a hovercar beneath one of his Fire Hawk M.A.U.'s massive feet. People scream and start running away from the two war machines. + +"Come on!" he tells you over the squad channel, as he sets off, people and cars hurrying to make way. You sigh. There's no other way, you realise, and you stomp off after him, occassionally crushing parts of hovercars, and hoping no one gets injured as you race for the C.C.C. + +You finally arrive at a large building with a massive dish on the roof, and the letters "C.C.C." on a big sign. Pressing a button on your control pad, you shut down your Gatling. The pilot suit loosens up in it's harness, and you unbuckle yourself and pull free. Detaching the cables and control pads from your suit, you quickly find a small portable data stick, and insert it into a slot in the cockpit. Pulling a small switch, you wait as the visual data of your machine is downloaded onto the data stick, and then you pull the stick out and pocket it. + +Pressing some buttons at the rear of the cockpit, the thick rear hatch slides open. Another button causes a rope ladder to pop out, and unfurl, unrolling down to the street far below you. You always feel uneasy climbing down, but you were trained for it, and you quickly descend to the street below. By now crowds have begun closing in on your parked M.A.U.s, calling out questions, and asking what is going on. + +"Come on!" Tomcat calls to you from nearby, and you both push your way through the crowd and into the C.C.C. building. People are everywhere inside, trying to get the attention of the clerks. + +"Over here!" One of the clerks calls out to you, seeing your military uniforms. You push your way through the crowd to the desk. + +"This data has to be transmitted to Sol Federation Command, on Earth!" you cry out over all the noise, and hand the data stick to the clerk. They nod their head, and plug the stick into their computer console. You pray that they haven't been jammed by the alien fleet. Moments later, the clerk gives you a thumbs' up. It worked! + +Tomcat shares a laugh with you. Your mission succeeded! Now, it would take a few days for the transmission to reach the Earth, but there was hope! Someone would surely come and rescue the people of Mesarius V! + +"Now what do we do? Our two mecha alone can't defend this city!" Tomcat says. +> "Let's get back into our M.A.U.s, and radio Fort Dale, and see what happened back there," you suggest. +You push your way back through the crowds, and climb the ladders up into your war machines. After suiting up and reactivating the machine, you turn on the Fort Dale military channel. + +"This is Squad Beta, in Drysdon City. Captain Jefferson, do you read me?" you ask. There is no reply, just static. Either the local military channels are also jammed now, or the Fort no longer exists... + +"What do we do?" you wonder out loud. + +"Squad Leader," Tomcat says, having heard you over the squad channel, "They didn't attack the cities, they focused only on military targets. Perhaps they aren't here to wipe us all out, but just to take control? Maybe they won't obliterate the cities?" + +"You could be right," you agree. "If that's the case, then walking around in these war machines could make us and anyone near us targets for the enemy. How about... we'll hide our M.A.U.s in a warhouse somewhere, and try to blend in with the crowd. If the enemy comes in firing, then we mount up, and go out in a blaze of glory. What do you say?" + +"I'm with you, Squad Leader," he replies. + +You stomp your way through the city, to the warehouse district. People scatter as the two M.A.U.'s stomp across the yards around a large warehouse that looks big enough to park your machines inside. Some workers come out, waving angry fists in the air. + +"We're requisitioning this building for the military," Tomcat says over the loudspeakers, and you grin. They rush away, and you head inside and power down.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"It's possible," Captain Jefferson agrees. "If they aren't jamming the whole planet, but just the military, there might be a way to get a message through... Okay, here's the plan. You and Tomcat are to make for Drysdon City, and see if the C.C.C. there has been jammed. If not, transmit the visual data you recorded on you scouting mission. It might not work, but it's worth a try." + +"It's got to work," Tomcat says. "We saw how many of them there were out there. If it's like that at the other Forts, this planet is going to fall, and fast. We've got to get reinforcements!" + +"Get out of here, before the main force arrives," the Captain orders, as another explosive blast from the enemy transport cannons strikes one of the Fort's buildings. The gate slides open, and you and Tomcat race across the clearing and back into the forest. + +Drysdon City is located to the west, luckily for you, as the enemy landed in the east. It should take you a few hours running to get there. Thankfully, you don't have to physically run with your body, but only make slight movements for your war machine to respond to, so you should be able to run the whole way without tiring out. That is, assuming more alien forces haven't landed between the Fort and the city... or even in the city itself! + +Forest turns into fields, and farmland, on either side of the road to Drysdon City. Soon more houses and buildings spread out in all directions, as you both stomp along the wide nature strip between opposite road lanes, designed so that M.A.U.'s can move through populated areas without stepping on hovercars or pedestrians. As the buildings grow up around you, and you approach the city, traffic lights at intersections automatically detect your approach, and turn red, so you can race across roads without squashing anyone. + +Skyscrapers rise before too long, and you are in the city. People scream and point in astonishment, as the two war machines run through the city. You wonder that everyone is still going about their business, and then realise that they might not even be aware that an alien invasion force has attacked the planet. +> "Come on, let's get to the C.C.C.!" you order Tomcat. +You finally arrive at a large building with a massive dish on the roof, and the letters "C.C.C." on a big sign. Pressing a button on your control pad, you shut down your Gatling. The pilot suit loosens up in it's harness, and you unbuckle yourself and pull free. Detaching the cables and control pads from your suit, you quickly find a small portable data stick, and insert it into a slot in the cockpit. Pulling a small switch, you wait as the visual data of your machine is downloaded onto the data stick, and then you pull the stick out and pocket it. + +Pressing some buttons at the rear of the cockpit, the thick rear hatch slides open. Another button causes a rope ladder to pop out, and unfurl, unrolling down to the street far below you. You always feel uneasy climbing down, but you were trained for it, and you quickly descend to the street below. + +A small crowd gathers, watching the two pilots come out of their war machines, obviously wondering what is going on. It is not unusual for M.A.U.s to walk through the city, but the two of you had ran in quite a hurry. + +"Come on!" Tomcat calls to you from nearby, and you both push your way past the crowd and into the C.C.C. building. + +"Over here!" One of the clerks calls out to you, seeing your military uniforms. + +"This data has to be transmitted to Sol Federation Command, on Earth!" you say, and hand the data stick to the clerk. She nods her head, and plugs the stick into her computer console. You pray that the C.C.C. hasn't been jammed by the alien fleet. Moments later, the clerk gives you a thumbs' up. It worked! + +Tomcat shares a laugh with you. Your mission succeeded! Now, it would take a few days for the transmission to reach the Earth, but there was hope! Someone would surely come and rescue the people of Mesarius V! + +"Now what do we do? Our two mecha alone can't defend this city!" Tomcat says. +> "Let's get back in our machines, and try to see how the Fort is faring," you say. +You go back outside into the street, and climb the ladders up into your war machines. After suiting up and reactivating the machine, you turn on the Fort Dale military channel. + +"This is Squad Beta, in Drysdon City. Captain Jefferson, do you read me?" you ask. There is no reply, just static. Either the local military channels are also jammed now, or the Fort no longer exists... + +"What do we do?" you wonder out loud. + +"Squad Leader," Tomcat says, having heard you over the squad channel, "They didn't attack the cities, they focused only on military targets. Perhaps they aren't here to wipe us all out, but just to take control? Maybe they won't obliterate the cities?" + +"You could be right," you agree. "If that's the case, then walking around in these war machines could make us and anyone near us targets for the enemy. How about... we'll hide our M.A.U.s in a warhouse somewhere, and try to blend in with the crowd. If the enemy comes in firing, then we mount up, and go out in a blaze of glory. What do you say?" + +"I'm with you, Squad Leader," he replies. + +You stomp your way through the city, to the warehouse district. People scatter as the two M.A.U.'s stomp across the yards around a large warehouse that looks big enough to park your machines inside. Some workers come out, waving angry fists in the air. + +"We're requisitioning this building for the military," Tomcat says over the loudspeakers, and you grin. They rush away, and you head inside and power down.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Of course we've tried that, Squad Leader. It seems something is jamming the Fort's interstellar communications. The enemy is blocking the Greyson Transmitter somehow, so we're stuck with local communications. I don't know if they're only jamming the Fort, or if the whole planet has been jammed somehow, but there's nothing we can do here," he tells you. +> 'I guess they're probably jamming the whole planet,' you think. Better focus on defending this fort! +Everyone readies themselves for the coming battle, and another two of the massive blasts from the transports fire upon the Fort before enemy blips begin massing on your sensors. Squad Alpha is on 'wall duty', their M.A.U.'s leaning up to peek over the wall every now and then. + +Suddenly one of them ducks his head back down, as smaller versions of the lightning cannon blast through the air. + +"The enemy is here!" the pilot tinforms everyone. "Looks like those Behemoth's have three lightning weapons on them, smaller than the transports, but deadly all the same!" + +"Okay people, time to make a stand! Aim and fire, but keep an eye out for the transports. If you see them charging their big cannons up, duck down behind the wall until after they fire, then get back up again. We're here until it's just them or us. Go! Go! Go!" the Captain shouts. + +Everyone leaps up and opens fire with everything they have. Looking out over the wall, you see two of the massive Behemoth machines stomping out of the forest, trees collapsing all around them. In front of and around the Behemoths are swarms of lizardman infantry. Many of them running at the wall, others leaping and bounding with incredible speed! + +One of the Behemoths fires three bolts of artificial lightning from its three weapon spheres, and the energy arcs in on one of the pilots in Squad Gamma, completely obliterating the top half of his M.A.U. in a single blast! +> You open fire on the Behemoths with your energy cannon and your twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns! +You start blasting away with your fellow Dale Company M.A.U.'s at the Behemoth war machines. Blasts of superheated energy lance out from the energy cannon attached to your mecha's right arm, melting lines through the thick armour of the enemy war machines. Your twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns rotate at blinding speed, spitting out fiery bolts that spray the surface of an enemy war machine, peppering it with superheated metal. + +Under the concentrated fire of Dale Company, one of the front legs of a Behemoth begins to buckle at the knee joint. As it starts to fall, it fires the three lightning-globe weapons, lashing out with fierce energy strikes. Two members of Squad Gamma are blown away by the strike, and a member of Squad Alpha goes down as the other Behemoth fires as well! There are only nine M.A.U.'s left in Dale Company! + +Then the front Behemoth tilts and it's leg snaps at the knee. The machine falls forward, pounding into the ground, but you realise that the moveable lightning-ball weapons on the top/sides of the machine are still able to point in the direction of the Fort's walls, so it is far from being out of the battle. + +Swarms of infantry charge the walls, some of the lizardmen jumping and bounding across the ground. As they reach the bottom of the wall, the jumping lizardmen leap up onto the wall, and somehow manage to cling to the slick metal surface! With horror, you watch as a dozen of the leaping lizard men climb up the wall, and leap past the towering Dale Company M.A.U.'s, and into the courtyard! + +You glance behind you momentarily to see the infantry of Dale Fort battle it out with the lizard men. A number of soldiers die horribly, as the lizard men draw wicked looking swords, and cut them down. Then the Fort's battlesuit warriors open fire with their anti-infantry weapons, and blow the lizard men away. + +A small lightning bolt blast explodes against the wall beside you, from one of the Behemoths, and you turn you attention back to the battle! +> Focus fire on the fallen Behemoth! +Everyone joins together in firing on the fallen Behemoth. After a while, fragments of metal blast away from the top of the machine, and you fire into the hole. There's a huge explosion from within the Behemoth, as fire roars out the hole in its hull. Everyone cheers! + +The cheers are cut short, six streams of lightning blast out of the trees. Tomcat and the Captain are blown away as two more Behemoths stomp out of the forest and join the battle! Then you notice energy charging at the front of the massive transports in the distance. + +"Everyone down!" you cry out, and everyone ducks as a massive lightning blast assaults the Fort. The Command Centre at the middle of the complex blows apart, shattering under the assault of the weapon! Then you see hundreds of lizardmen leaping over the walls and bounding down into the courtyard! + +"We're being overrun!" someone shouts over the military channel. You quickly stand up again, and open fire on the lizards with your Gatling's twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns, mowing down groups of lizards, but there's too many of them! The Fort's infantry are swarmed, falling and screaming beneath the assault. Beside you, a fellow M.A.U. get's blown away by a back shot from the Behemoths behind you, on the other side of the wall! + +Then the lizard men are leaping and bounding onto the M.A.U.'s. You try to look down at the body of your M.A.U. but you head can't look straight down. They're crawling over your body, doing something! You glance at an M.A.U. near you, and see lizard warriors planting what looks like small explosive charges on the backs of his war machine. Moments later, you hear an explosion behind you, in the cockpit, and feel wind rushing inside. + +Your last thought is that they've blown the cockpit hatch off, and then you feel the blade of a sword thrust through your back, and everything goes dark. + +It is the end... for you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Everyone readies themselves for the coming battle, and another two of the massive blasts from the transports fire upon the Fort before enemy blips begin massing on your sensors. Squad Alpha is on 'wall duty', their M.A.U.'s leaning up to peek over the wall every now and then. + +Suddenly one of them ducks his head back down, as smaller versions of the lightning cannon blast through the air. + +"The enemy is here!" the pilot tinforms everyone. "Looks like those Behemoth's have three lightning weapons on them, smaller than the transports, but deadly all the same!" + +"Okay people, time to make a stand! Aim and fire, but keep an eye out for the transports. If you see them charging their big cannons up, duck down behind the wall until after they fire, then get back up again. We're here until it's just them or us. Go! Go! Go!" the Captain shouts. + +Everyone leaps up and opens fire with everything they have. Looking out over the wall, you see two of the massive Behemoth machines stomping out of the forest, trees collapsing all around them. In front of and around the Behemoths are swarms of lizardman infantry. Many of them running at the wall, others leaping and bounding with incredible speed! + +One of the Behemoths fires three bolts of artificial lightning from its three weapon spheres, and the energy arcs in on one of the pilots in Squad Gamma, completely obliterating the top half of his M.A.U. in a single blast! +> You focus your twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns on the swarms of lizard man infantry! +You set your twin-firing plasmabolt machine guns into rotation mode, and start laying down lines of superheated bolts across the clearing, mowing down lizardmen soldiers who are charging for the Fort's walls. Some of the other Gatling pilots join you, focusing fire on the enemy infantry, while the Fire Hawks and the Captain's Nova focus their fire on one of the Behemoth war machines. + +To your amazement and horror, many of the lizardman infantry leap and bound as they head for the wall, managing to dodge most of the superheated bullets streaming from the Gatlings' machine guns. Then the Behemoths open fire, six streams of artificial lightning surging toward the wall. You see the three M.A.U's of Squad Alpha get completely blown away under the assault! There's only nine of you left in Dale Company! + +As the approaching enemy infantry reach the bottom of the wall, the jumping lizardmen leap up onto the wall, and somehow manage to cling to the slick metal surface! With horror, you watch as a dozen of the leaping lizard men climb up the wall, and leap past the towering Dale Company M.A.U.'s, and into the courtyard! +You glance behind you momentarily to see the infantry of Dale Fort battle it out with the lizard men. A number of soldiers die horribly, as the lizard men draw wicked looking swords, and cut them down. Then the Fort's battlesuit warriors open fire with their anti-infantry weapons, and blow the lizard men away. + +A small lightning bolt blast explodes against the wall beside you, from one of the Behemoths, and you turn you attention back to the battle! One of the Behemoths' legs snaps off at the knee and it falls forward, plunging into the ground. However, the moving, rotating design of its weapon system means the two lightning weapons on its upper body can still aim and fire toward the wall, so it isn't out of the fight yet!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You head for the edge of the forest, noticing that some of the enemy forces are moving away from the transports, toward the forest as well. Minutes later, the trees begin to thin before you, and you get your first glimpses of the enemy. + +The three massive metal transports rise high above the ground in the fields beyond the forest, and massive hatches in their sides have opened. Hundreds, if not thousands, of infantry soldiers had already poured out of the transports to assemble in large formations in the fields. What is more disturbing are their mechanised assault units. These M.A.U.s are like nothing you have ever seen. + + +Instead of being shaped like a big metal man, they are on four legs, with a large body pod-section in the middle, bristling with weapons. What is worse, if your estimates are correct, is that the enemy M.A.U.s must be sixteen metres (52 feet) high! They tower above the ground like five or six-story buildings! That's more than twice the height of your own war machine - and you thought your Gatling was big! + +The body section of these behemoth sized war machines have three rotating cylinder shapes coming out of them, with sparkling, glowing spheres moving along the rims. They must be weapons of some sort, able to move about to fire in any direction! + +"Squad Leader," the Captain's voice comes over the military channel. "Zoom your optics in on those soldiers, let's try to identify who we're dealing with." + +You press a button and zoom your view in on a large group of soldiers. What the - you gasp. You hear the Captain and Tomcat swear in unison, as they both get a better look as well. From the blurry image of the hoverbike rider you saw earlier, you had thought the soldiers were wearing some sort of green body suit. Now you realise it's their skin! Their unhelmeted heads reveal the enemy to be some sort of lizard men! You're dealing with an alien invasion fleet! No wonder the scout ships in this star system hadn't reported in - they had been destroyed by aliens with completely different weapon technology to your own! Thinking further, you realise that there haven't been any frontier raiders attacking in a long time. Perhaps the frontier star systems had already been conquered by the alien force? + +Even more chilling, you notice that many of the lizardman soldiers have long swords hanging from their belts, in addition to the rifles they carried. Swords? Talk about close combat. You feel glad that you aren't in the infantry, but have many sheets of metal between you and whatever comes your way. + +"All right, Squad Leader, get back here pronto! We'll need all the help we can get!" Captain Jefferson orders you. + +"This aint good man... this aint good!" Tomcat says over the squad channel, as one of the massive transports sends another crackling lightning bolt over the forest, and into the Fort compound. + +Some legions of infantry, and two of the massive behemoth war machines, have begun marching toward where you and Tomcat are hiding among the trees. Have they seen you on their sensors? Most probably, you think. +> "Let's wait a moment longer, to make sure nothing else comes out of those transports," you order. +You wait a minute longer, as the detachment of enemies draws closer, watching the transprots to see if anything else you've never seen before comes out. Nothing does. + +"Okay, let's get out of here!" you order. + +"I hear ya!" Tomcat says in relief. + +You turn to run back west through the forest, Tomcat just behind you, when suddenly you hear the cracking sound of the transport weapons firing again! You only have a moment to respond, diving to one side, before it strikes. There's a huge explosion, shattering trees and scattering debris, as your war machine rolls along the ground, crashing into the trunk of a large tree. + +For a while there is just a ringing sound in your ears, and large cracks and gaps in your vision tell you the optic feeds from the head of your M.A.U. were damaged. You try to stand up, but your limbs are all held solid in place, meaning your M.A.U. took severe damage, and it can't get up. Swearing, you try hailing Tomcat. + +"Tomcat, you okay?" you say over the squad channel. You get no response, just static. Damn, you think to yourself, as you flick a switch on one of your control panels, and power down. Your suit suddenly becomes limp, as the power turns off, and you slip out of the cockpit harness that held you in place. Unplugging cables you pull your headset free, and your own eyes' natural vision is restored. You realise your M.A.U. is lying on its side, on the ground, and press a button at the back of the cockpit to open the rear hatch. Only two meters off the ground, in this position, you lower yourself down to the forest floor. + +Looking around, you see that one of the massive lightning strikes hit right where the two of you were standing. Tomcat's M.A.U. lies scattered about in pieces of burning rubble. The blast must have struck him in the back, and because you were in front of him, you were partially shielded. Turning, you assess the wreck of your war machine. It will never walk again. + +What do I do now? You wonder. You decide to try and hike back to Fort Dale, and hope you don't run into alien infantry... or one of those massive behemoth war machines! + +You start hiking, grumbling about the fact that M.A.U. pilots aren't equipped with sidearms. About ten minutes into your hike, witnessing two more of the powerful lightning strikes surge through the air above the forest, and hearing explosions from the Fort, you hear whining engine sounds behind you. + +The sounds come so fast, you don't have time to respond. Alien soldiers on hoverbikes roar past you, narrowly missing you, as enemy scouts head toward the fort. Suddenly one of the hoverbikes comes back! It quickly slows to a halt, and the soldier leaps down onto the ground. Before you stands some sort of lizard man, covered in green scales! + +The lizard man looks you up and down, and sees you have no ranged weapon on you, so he tosses his rifle behind him. Then you notice he has two more weapons - wicked looking swords hanging from either side of his belt. Swords? Who in the galaxy wields swords in this day and age?? + +The alien creature tosses one of the swords at you, and it lands quivering blade-first in the ground at your feet. It gestures for you to pick up the sword. With no other options apparant, you hesitantly pull the blade from the ground. Instantly, the alien launches into its attack. With no training in this sort of thing, you manage to block the alien's first sword blow, but the second slices clean through your heart. + +This is the end... for you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You head deeper into the forest, angling toward the east, as you work your way into a position between the grounded enemy transports and the walls of Fort Dale. You glance at the radar sensor readings every few seconds to make sure no enemy contacts have come within range. Of course, your sensors only pick up energy sources - they were designed to pick up vehicles and war machines similar to your own. If the transports were carrying an army of infantry soldiers, and they weren't wearing any form of powered armour, you'll only notice them when you actually see them... Anyhow, transports the size of those ones had to be carrying something pretty big inside of them, so the enemy must be inside some sort of war machines. + +"This aint good," Tomcat says softly over your squad channel. + +"I know," you reply anxiously, stomping through the forest towards the other side. + +"I mean, this really aint good," Tomcat says. + +"Keep your mind on the job. We have to get some visuals on enemy units, so the Fort knows what they're up against," you tell him. + +"What if they're bigger and tougher than we are?" he asks. + +"Then we get a look at them for the Captain, and get the hell out of here," you say grimly. It's a strange feeling. You've never had to think about retreat before. + +Suddenly you pick up a small blip on your sensors, then a couple other small ones. The blips are moving toward you at a high speed, shifting about slightly. Probably dodging trees. Some sort of small hover vehicle, you wonder? + +"Incoming hostiles," you say over the squad channel. + +"I see them," he replies. +> Spread out behind the trees and let them pass. Hopefully they won't see us," you order. +You quickly run south, and try to get as many trees between you and the incoming vehicles as possible, while Tomcat runs north. You watch the small blips on your sensors, and hear small engine sounds roar past through the forest. The blips on your display keep heading west toward the fort, and then they vanish from sight. + +You head north and meet up with Tomcat again. + +"Must be scouts of some kind. Hopefully they didn't detect us, or the rest of the enemy force might know we are coming," you say over the squad channel. + +Suddenly there's a loud crack, and a massive bolt of lightning flies over the top of the forest. Explosions tell you that they struck at the Fort again, and you wonder how much damage they did. + +You wait a moment, and then wave your Gatling's hand. Tomcat moves into position beside you, and you head off at a fast pace, continuing through the forest toward the landing site. Ten minutes later, numerous sensor blips begin appearing all over your sensors in the distance, close together so it is hard to tell what was a large enemy unit, or what was just a group of them close together. At the edge of your sensors, three massive blips mark the location of the enemy transports. +> "Okay, let's run to the edge of the forest, get a good look, then get back to the Fort in one piece," you order. +You head for the edge of the forest, noticing that some of the enemy forces are moving away from the transports, toward the forest as well. Minutes later, the trees begin to thin before you, and you get your first glimpses of the enemy. + +The three massive metal transports rise high above the ground in the fields beyond the forest, and massive hatches in their sides have opened. Hundreds, if not thousands, of infantry soldiers had already poured out of the transports to assemble in large formations in the fields. What is more disturbing are their mechanised assault units. These M.A.U.s are like nothing you have ever seen. + + +Instead of being shaped like a big metal man, they are on four legs, with a large body pod-section in the middle, bristling with weapons. What is worse, if your estimates are correct, is that the enemy M.A.U.s must be sixteen metres (52 feet) high! They tower above the ground like five or six-story buildings! That's more than twice the height of your own war machine - and you thought your Gatling was big! + +The body section of these behemoth sized war machines have three rotating cylinder shapes coming out of them, with sparkling, glowing spheres moving along the rims. They must be weapons of some sort, able to move about to fire in any direction! + +"Squad Leader," the Captain's voice comes over the military channel. "Zoom your optics in on those soldiers, let's try to identify who we're dealing with." + +You press a button and zoom your view in on a large group of soldiers. What the - you gasp. You hear the Captain and Tomcat swear in unison, as they both get a better look as well. At first you had thought the infantry were wearing some sort of green body suit, but the zoomed image shows something quite different - you realise it's their skin! Their unhelmeted heads reveal the enemy to be some sort of lizard men! You're dealing with an alien invasion fleet! No wonder the scout ships in this star system hadn't reported in - they had been destroyed by aliens with completely different weapon technology to your own! Thinking further, you realise that there haven't been any frontier raiders attacking in a long time. Perhaps the frontier star systems had already been conquered by the alien force? + +Even more chilling, you notice that many of the lizardman soldiers have long swords hanging from their belts, in addition to the rifles they carried. Swords? Talk about close combat. You feel glad that you aren't in the infantry, but have many sheets of metal between you and whatever comes your way. + +"All right, Squad Leader, get back here pronto! We'll need all the help we can get!" Captain Jefferson orders you. + +"This aint good man... this aint good!" Tomcat says over the squad channel, as one of the massive transports sends another crackling lightning bolt over the forest, and into the Fort compound. + +Some legions of infantry, and two of the massive behemoth war machines, have begun marching toward where you and Tomcat are hiding among the trees. Have they seen you on their sensors? Most probably, you think.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you crouch back down, you hear a loud cracking sound, as the weapon that had been charging up finished charging, and launches one of the massive lightning bolts through the air. The searing electrical beam blasts through the air where you were standing moments ago, and smashes into one of the armoured buildings in the middle of the Fort. A large fiery hole is blown through the side of the building, as debris scatters into the courtyard, among screaming infantry. The rest of the infantry and battlesuit wearing soldiers run for cover. + +"Damn it! How can they shoot so far! Who the hell are they?" Captain Jefferson growls over the Comm. Then the ground shakes again - the familiar shaking of massive spaceships landing on the ground in the distance. + +"Okay, they've touched down in the fields out past the forest... That means there's lines of trees between us and whatever ground forces they've brought down. We won't know what's coming until they reach the clearing around Fort Dale," the Captain says. He cautiously raises his Nova M.A.U. so that its head can peek above the wall. + +"Those transports are so big, more than half of their hull rises above the tree line. I suspect they'll keep barraging the Fort with that lightning cannon of theirs, while their troops advance. Intel has it they are coming down all across the planet, so we've got to hold Fort Dale, because there aint going to be reinforcements coming our way any time soon. So, I'm gonna need two squads to volunteer. I want a squad to take turns looking over the wall for incoming enemies, and I need a squad for scout duty, to try and get a closer look at what we're dealing with before they reach us." +> "Sir! Squad Beta will take turns looking over the wall," you volunteer. +"Oh, great. Just great!" Wolfman says over your squad channel. + +"Okay, we're depending on you to tell us if any enemy units reach the clearing," the Captain says. + +For the next fifteen minutes, you take turns leaning up and peeking over the wall. Now and then an enemy transport fires its massive lightning cannon at the Fort, sending debris showering across the courtyard. + +However, luck only smiles on you so many times. You lean up to see if you can see anything, just in time to be targeted by a lightning strike. All you see is white, searing light, filling your vision, and then the top half of your M.A.U. is gone, along with most of your body. + +It is the end... for you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It is a typical sunny Mesarian day, a soft breeze rustling leaves and causing the branches of the trees surrounding Fort Dale to sway softly. You walk from the barracks toward the large three-story high mecha hanger by the east walls of the complex, wondering why frontiersman would live on the desolate outer star systems, when they could live on the core worlds and enjoy weather like this. Well, I guess it takes all sorts to make the galaxy go round, you think to yourself. + +Entering the hanger, you pause to look up at the twelve Mechanised Assault Units, standing in bays on each side of the hanger. They are standard Fire Hawk and Gatling chassis, the first a multi-role fighting machine, the latter often used for anti-infantry, or anti-gunship purposes. At the rear of the hanger is a thirteenth bay, where the company commander's large M.A.U., a Nova, is parked. Bearing two large energy cannons, and standing almost to the roof of the hanger, it is the toughest M.A.U. fielded by Sol Federation. Of course, it takes the skill and experience of a company commander to pilot such a mecha. At least, that's what your C.O. tells you all. + +'Tomcat' and 'Wolfman' walk into the hanger, waving your way as they head for their machines. As the Squad Leader, you are in charge of the fort's M.A.U. Squad Beta, and as your two squadmates, they are under your command. Of course, being about the same age as you are, and having served for about the same amount of time as you have, they don't exactly obey your every whim. At least they obey you when it counts though, when raiders land ground forces on the planet, and you find yourself in the heat of battle. + +Turning to your left, you head for a small lift, and slap the 'up' button. It rises upward, taking you behind the torso section of your Gatling M.A.U. The war machine stands like a 7 metre (23 foot) high metal man, with rectangular armour plating panels slapped around joints and further protecting the chest section. Pressing some buttons on the back of the machine, a two-foot thick section of metal slides aside, letting you step into the chest of the machine. + +You're already wearing your Pilot Suit, so you close the door behind you, and connect sensor cables to the sockets in your suit, and attach the control pads to the wrists of your suit. The control pads extend out below your hand, allowing you to move your hands about, and always be able to touch the buttons on the control pad that control every facet of the war machine, from targeting and firing weapons, to powering the machine up or down. The suit itself is harnessed to the inside of the machine, locking you into place. After powering up, any time you try to move a part of your body, the limbs of the towering war machine will echo the move. In this way, trying to walk will cause the machine to walk instead of you. Moving your body just the right amount to get the machine to move exactly where and when you want it to is a difficult art, and one that took years of boot-camp training to accomplish, but for a low-level Squad Leader, you think you do pretty good. + +Before locking your suit into place, you attach your head equipment, and then you lock the suit, and power up. Instantly your vision goes blank, as your headset pulses into your skull, and interrupts the signals your optic nerves send to your brain. Then it begins to send signals of its own into your brain, as it reads optical information from the camera systems in the head of your war machine. + +A moment later, you suddenly feel very big, as you 'look' through the 'eyes' of your Gatling M.A.U., seven meters above the floor of the hanger. You try to turn your head from side to side, and the Gatling's head turns instead, allowing you to look around. Flexing your limbs a bit, you crouch the machine, stand back up, and wave the arms about a little. Everything seems to be in working order. Time to move out. + +You step forwards, and the machine steps into the middle of the hanger bay. Tomcat and Wolfman walk their Fire Hawks out beside you, and together the three of you stomp out of the hanger. + +"So, Squad Leader, where are we going to patrol today?" Wolfman's voice comes over your headset. +> "Let's go for a long patrol. We'll head out to the fields and hills, out east past the forests," you order. +You lead the squad to the towering gates of the Fort. "This is Squad Beta, requesting Gate Clearance," you say to the fort's traffic control tower. + +"We read you, Squad Beta. You're good to go," someone replies. The massive gates slide into the Fort's surrounding wall, and you lead your squad out. A large clearing lies between the Fort's walls and the forest that surrounds it, so that any approaching vehicles can always be seen. You lead your men east, off the road and into the forest, among the equally towering trees. It's a funny thing, being at eye-level with the tops of many of the trees, and it always takes you a moment to get your balance right, and for the feeling of being a giant to become natural. + +Many of the trees are toppled over throughout the forest, from people having stomped out among the trees. Being a three-story high metal man means that you often have to push trees out of the way. While conservationists might have a problem with such actions in some areas of the planet, no one complains when soldiers do it around a fort, as they depend on the forts scattered across the planet for protection, and you never knew if a raider force had secretly touched down, and enemy M.A.U.s were hiding among the trees, waiting for an opportunity to strike. + +Well, actually, that sort of thing was pretty rare. The Orbital sensor network always detected incoming ships, and could pinpoint the exact landing location of any military transports on the planet. Anyway, you stomp off among the trees, shoving them out of the way whenever you need to make room for your machine. Wolfman and Tomcat stomp along, off to either side of you. + +"One of these days, we're gonna find a raider mecha waiting for us out here, and patrol is going to actually be interesting," Tomcat laughs. + +"Hey, anything beats sitting around the barracks, losing at cards to Thunder," Wolfman replies. + +A twenty minute march later, and you come out from the thinning trees, and into the eastern fields of the region. Low hills rise here and there, and you walk about taking in the scenery. Nope, you think, no raider pirates out here today. + +Suddenly a ComTech from the Fort speaks over the Fort's military channel. "This is Fort Dale to all units on patrol. Be advised, the planetary sensor network has detected unidentified incoming starships. We haven't been able to establish contact with the starship scout network either... This could be a raider force. Stand By for possible interception coordinates." + +"I hope they land in our sector... haven't seen any action in months now," Tomcat says over the squad channel. + +"Hang on, did they say they couldn't establish communcations with the starship scout network? What does that mean? A raider force couldn't take out all the carriers and gunships out there. I haven't heard of them being able to jam our communications either," Wolfman says worriedly. + +"Nah, probably just a technical glitch at our Fort. The other Forts have probably heard all about it from the scout network by now," Tomcat says dismissively. + +The ComTech at Fort Dale speaks over the military channel again. "All units on patrol, be advised the planet has been taken to High Alert. We don't know what those ships are up there, but they're huge! Dozens of smaller ships, we assume they're military transports, have come out of the mothers, and are coming down all across the planet. We've got a couple of these transports inbound toward your location. Keep an eye on the skies, people, and if you get in over your head, get back here, and take up defensive positions inside the Fort! The other pilots at Fort Dale are mounting up, and should be ready for action soon." + +"What the hell? Multiple transports heading our way? What exactly are we up against?" Wolfman asks anxiously. + +"Hey, frontier raiders aren't well armed. They're probably just small transports, full of infantry. We'll mow them down, and be back to the Fort for dinner in no time," Tomcat says confidently.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +> Turn out the lights. +Once upon a time you were called the greatest hero to ever live. + + +You must have been nineteen at the time. Fresh faced, hot headed, and too dumb for your own good. With sword in hand, you set out with your childhood friends to save the world from an evil wizard (damn, you can't even remember his name) bent on enslaving mankind. When you left home, there were five of you: a mage, a rogue, a bard, a healer, and yourself, a fighter. + + +The six month long journey to the wizard's tower was filled with happy times, light hearted misadventures as you all prepared for fortune and glory. When you reached the tower, the mood quickly changed. Your bard fell to a herd of undead that ambushed you at the entrance. The healer took a poison dart to the throat on the fourth floor while the rogue was burned to ash by a pyromancer on the seventeenth floor. Yourself and the mage were all that remained when you reached the twentieth and final floor, and she was cut down halfway through the fight with the wizard. When the dust cleared and all was quiet, you were the last one standing. + + +You returned home a year after you had left it. The villagers showered you in praise for killing the wizard, and word reached the nobles in the cities far away that the evil wizard had been defeated. They held a feast in your honor, they showered you in gold, they gave you a title and a manor and an army of servants. Women wanted you, men wanted to be you. But it was all hollow. + + +You played along for the first ten years, finding little joy in the newfound fortune and glory you had longed for. It wasn't until the writers and artists began to touch your quest that you finally shut yourself in. It started innocently enough, sanitized children's tales about the exploits of you and your allies, but soon it became epic poems and romanticized paintings. One by one, your friends disappeared from the fictionalized tales of your quest, until it was just you, the knight in shining armor, slaying the vile wizard with your enchanted blade. + + +That was when you finally shut yourself in, to hide from the common folk and their damning praise, from the artists and their bastardized accounts. For five years the only place you'd go was the tavern down the road from your estate, where you'd planned to waste the rest of your days drinking until you couldn't remember your regrets. It didn't work. Just as luck would have it, you were recognized one day, and soon people were flocking to the pub like moths to a torch. All in the hopes of meeting you, the legendary hero. + + +In these last five years, you've stayed locked up in the master bedroom of your manor. You ordered your butler to bring you ten bottles of wine and three loafs of bread in the morning, leaving you be until the next day. No one can enter your room save the butler, and if anyone does you make sure to scare them off by grabbing your old sword and flailing it around while yelling drunkenly at them. + + +It's a fitting end for the man regarded as the greatest hero to ever live: locking himself away in the home gifted to him, drinking wine and eating bread and waiting for the day he finally dies. +> Continue +Your latest quest begins not with the destruction of your manor or the death of someone close to you, but rather with a letter. + + +Bertrand, your loyal servant, comes to your room in the early morning hours to drop off today's dosage of bread and wine. But on the platter, tucked in between two loaves of bread, is a letter. The seal is emblazoned with the royal coat of arms. You eye Bertrand warily, and the old man gives a sigh. "Apologies, my lord. A knight came to the manor this morning, and he requested that I pass this along to you. The knight said that it's an invitation to the royal castle from the king himself. I suggest you read it." + + +With a sigh of your own, you rip open the envelope and unfold the letter, taking a look at the contents. + + +"Dear Sir, + + +I have need of a man of your talents. There are important matters to discuss regarding the ongoing war between the Kingdom of Oren and the Empire of Kishak. You must report to Castle Oren as soon as you may, though I urge you to arrive soon. If a week has passed without word from you, then I am afraid I must send my men to acquire you immediately. I hope that you will come. + + +Regards, + +King Walter III." + + +You scoff at the letter. Bastard king, sitting on his throne while his dogs do the work. You suppose that he considers you one of them. The question lies in whether you are indeed one of the dogs that mindlessly obeys orders, or whether you'll break from the pack and carve your own path. +> Damn the king. He holds no power over me. +For a moment, rage shakes within you. He thinks he can simply call upon you and you'll trot over to his castle? What sort of man does he take you for? The bubble of rage bursts, and you find yourself tearing the letter in two, before crumpling it and throwing it on the floor. Bertrand gulps slightly as he watches. + + +"Leave me," you say, and he does. You carry on that day as you normally do, drinking heartily and eating when your stomach grumbles. As usual, you pass out late into the night, last bottle of wine in hand. + + +When you wake the next day, you're fully hit by the reality of the situation. The king threatened to send men to acquire you should you fail to show up after a week. You can't stay here anymore, and if you do, then they'll come sooner or later. This means you'd either need to move on, or try to hold out and fend off any of his men who come your way. + + +What's it going to be, hero? +> I need to leave. There's nothing for me here. +In the late hours of the night, you set out for parts unknown. + + +On your back is your sword, chipped and dull. It's far too large to be called a sword; massive, heavy, far too rough. If anything, it's a hunk of raw iron. But it's yours, and a single swing with the large blade is enough to cut down three cavalrymen and their horses too. Beside it is your knapsack, carrying only raw essentials, such as food, a change of clothes, a tinderbox, lantern oil, and a jug of alcohol. Fifteen feet of rope in a coil is tied onto your belt, alongside a lantern. + + +For a moment you're leaving your home village with your friends. All of you are young, reckless, hopeful... But the nostalgia soon fades, and you realize what you're doing. You're not leaving to save the world, you're leaving to get away from your responsibilities. The thought makes you let out a dry, humorless laugh. + + +It's been so long since you've traveled. You almost forgot what it felt like, just you on the open road. It feels... Liberating, almost. Like a weight has been lifted off your shoulders for the first time in years. As though you were holding the world high above you, and only now can you take a break. But you don't hold onto that feeling, for you know well enough that it will distract you from any dangers on the road... + + +Soon enough, you come upon a fork in the road. One road leads into the forest. You're unlikely to come across any other people on this road, only wilderness as far as the eye can see. The other road is a common trade route, with villages dotting it every few miles. Either way, wherever you go, you'll be traveling far away from the place you once called home. +> Take the path into the woods. +You take the path through the woods, being sure to light your lantern along the way. The ambient sounds of wildlife keep you on the alert. For every wolf's howl and twig snapped in the distance, your hand draws closer to the hilt of your sword. Still, nothing comes out to attack you, and you must be grateful for that. + + +The road carries you onwards for hours, until finally you must stop and rest. With a grunt, you begin to climb up into a large oak tree along the path, checking every branch until, finally, you find one that can support your weight. You kill your lantern and tie it to the branch using your rope. Setting your knapsack up against the tree, you lay down, and fall asleep. + + +The sound of shouting and the light of torches causes your eyes to snap open. Through the canopy of leaves you can see a faint glow, as though sunlight is fighting hard to break through and onto the path. On said path you see a large group of men wearing armor comprised of animal hides and worn out leather. + + +Marauders. They're a wandering group of bandits and raiders, accepting any who wish to fight with them. They make their living by ransacking and pillaging towns, and never stay in one place for long. Above all, they admire a fierce warrior, and rumor has it that if one can slay the leader of a Marauder band, then one may lead them. + + +Instinctively you reach for your sword, but stop as you realize that they can't see you unless they look up. They must be on the way to find a village, so that they can steal their valuables, kill them all, or rape the women. Perhaps even all three, if they're a particularly ambitious bunch. + + +You've fought these sorts before, and most often they'll fight tooth and nail until their leader is dead. Once that happens, they'll submit themselves to you willingly... That is, if you can survive long enough to reach their leader. If you got into a fight, you can't be sure you'll walk away from it alive. + + +But at the same time... Could you just sit by and let these men harass, or even kill, the innocent? +> Yes, I can. I'm not a hero anymore. They can do as they like, so long as they don't bother me. +You make yourself scarce, watching them as they continue their march out of the forest. They're a band of about four dozen, and you know that if you had chosen to fight them, it may have meant the end of you. It must have taken close to half an hour for them all to move on so far that they were out of sight, but the adrenaline pumping through your blood made the time seem as though it had passed in the blink of an eye. + + +Once they're gone, you retrieve your lantern and rope, before carefully climbing down the tree. You let out a sigh of relief once your feet hit the ground, and you continue your journey onward into the woods. Your journey lasts long into the day, and before you know it, the trees begin to give way to grassy fields. The only problem being that it's almost night again, and you don't want to risk sleeping out in the open. + + +The trees are too small here for you to be able to sleep in one. You scan the area, and find... A cave? Yes, there's an entrance to a cave poking out of the ground towards the edge of the wilderness. The entrance is massive, which means that something undesirable may lurk in there, though you can take out whatever may call the cave its home. + + +Alternatively, you can continue your march into the night. Perhaps you'll find a better place to take shelter. +> I'll take shelter in the cave. +You walk to the cave's entrance, lighting your lantern. Within the inky black darkness are piles of bones. Most of them are those of animals, though you spot a human skull in there. This might have been a bad idea. Still, you carry onward, swinging your sword around from your back and gripping the hilt tightly. + + +As you journey further, you find no sign of bears or wolves or the like. So, you carry onward, intent on slaying whatever beast may live here. It is deeper into the cave that you begin to hear and feel a low rumbling. It shakes you to your core, and your knuckles whiten as you grip your sword tighter. Is it what you think it is? + + +Your question is answered when your lantern's light glints off of maroon scales. + + +A dragon, slumbering on a pile of branches and bones. By the size of it, it appears to be young, no older than perhaps an infant, though that does not mean that it will be friendly. Nearby are the skeletal remains of another dragon, this beast far larger. Was it orphaned? You've no idea. + + +You are about to make your leave so you don't face the wrath of the beast when its eyes snap open. +> Quickly slide my blade back onto my back and raise my hands. I just want to go. +Slowly, you slip your sword back into place on your back, and raise your hands. The dragon stares at you, though no malice is in its eyes; instead, you see an almost childlike curiosity. Perhaps the human skull you saw was left there by its deceased parent? Whatever it is, the dragon has yet to make any hostile actions towards you. + + +It begins to inch its head closer to you, sniffing you curiously. Thinking quickly, you carefully remove your knapsack, then reach deep inside it. Within is a slab of raw venison, which you offer to the beast. It looks as though it's about to rip your arms off along with the meat, so you set it down at your feet and back away slowly. As you suspected, the dragon greedily gobbles it up. + + +Once it has finished its snack, it looks contentedly at you, nudging you as though asking for more. You provide him another slab of meat, which he takes from your hands this time. Then another. You save the last piece of venison for yourself, slowly putting your knapsack back in place. The dragon tilts its head at you, before letting out what appears to be a yawn. It settles back down on the ground, and falls asleep. + + +You let out a sigh. That was... Terrifying. You back up and set up a place to sleep not far from the dragon's chamber, falling asleep in minutes from the exhaustion. In the morning, you get up... Only to see the dragon there, staring at you. Carefully, you get up, but the dragon makes no sudden moves. Just stares at you expectantly. + + +Putting your hands back up, you begin to back away slowly, and the dragon begins to follow. For a second, you close your eyes, awaiting the painful bite that will follow... But nothing happens. Instead, it stands there staring at you as though a puppy waiting for its master's commands. + + +You lower your hands, then turn around. Continuing out of the cave, you glance over your shoulder every now and again, and the dragon still follows. Have you... Tamed the beast? That was easier than you expected it would be. It continues to follow you out of the cave, blinking violently at the light when you emerge from the cave and into the daylight, but still retaining its friendly attitude. It continues to follow you as you march onward to places unknown. + + +When you fell asleep in the night, you half expected the dragon to have tried eating you in your sleep, or to have flown back to his cave. Instead, you awake to him presenting you a mangled deer carcass. It looks like you've made a new companion, and a very powerful one at that. + + +So it is that you and the beast continue onward to wherever the road takes you. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk to the cave's entrance, lighting your lantern. Within the inky black darkness are piles of bones. Most of them are those of animals, though you spot a human skull in there. This might have been a bad idea. Still, you carry onward, swinging your sword around from your back and gripping the hilt tightly. + + +As you journey further, you find no sign of bears or wolves or the like. So, you carry onward, intent on slaying whatever beast may live here. It is deeper into the cave that you begin to hear and feel a low rumbling. It shakes you to your core, and your knuckles whiten as you grip your sword tighter. Is it what you think it is? + + +Your question is answered when your lantern's light glints off of maroon scales. + + +A dragon, slumbering on a pile of branches and bones. By the size of it, it appears to be young, no older than perhaps an infant, though that does not mean that it will be friendly. Nearby are the skeletal remains of another dragon, this beast far larger. Was it orphaned? You've no idea. + + +You are about to make your leave so you don't face the wrath of the beast when its eyes snap open. +> This beast might be wild. I swing wildly, hoping to wound it. +You swing wildly, a yell escaping your lips. The blade meets the dragon's rough scales, and it lets out a roar of mixed agony and rage. Blood drips from its wounds, and it rears back, head turning to look at the deep gash in its side... Then, it charges at you. + + +It barrels into you, sending you onto your ass. Another roar escapes its mouth, swiping a claw at you. You block the blow with your sword, cutting deeper into the dragon's hand, and it rears back yet again to determine its next move. It must not be used to fighting. + + +It's making for another charge. +> Stand my ground and stick my sword out, hoping the beast runs into it. +As the dragon charges forward, you stick your blade out, hoping that it will be unable to stop and impale itself on your sword. Instead, it ducks below the blade, and though you try to adjust quickly and bring the sword down onto the animal, you're too late. It charges into you, this time biting into your stomach. You let out a yell of pain, repeatedly bringing your sword down onto its back, but by the time it is finally dead the damage is done. + + +Your entrails are spilling out of your torso. Bloody coughs escape your lips. There's no coming back from this, unless a healer suddenly happened to come by. With your luck, another dragon would sooner come by instead. Eventually, the pain stops, and you close your eyes with a shuddering, blood-tinged sigh... + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You swing wildly, a yell escaping your lips. The blade meets the dragon's rough scales, and it lets out a roar of mixed agony and rage. Blood drips from its wounds, and it rears back, head turning to look at the deep gash in its side... Then, it charges at you. + + +It barrels into you, sending you onto your ass. Another roar escapes its mouth, swiping a claw at you. You block the blow with your sword, cutting deeper into the dragon's hand, and it rears back yet again to determine its next move. It must not be used to fighting. + + +It's making for another charge. +> Leap out of the way, swinging my sword at it whilst I do. +You wait for a moment, to ensure that it's close... And then you leap out of the way of the charge, swinging your sword at it. You manage to nail it right in the belly, the blade cleaving through the dragon's scales and into its flesh. It lets out a blood curdling screech, tumbling a bit as it loses its footing before finally falling over onto the ground. + + +You walk closer, sword at the ready. The dragon twitches slightly, so you bring your blade onto its throat. That killed it, for sure. With the beast slain, you collapse onto the ground, catching your breath. That was... Intense, to say the least. You've never fought a dragon. If the beast were any bigger, you would have lost, no doubt. + + +Then, you laugh. You laugh until your ribs ache and tears escape your eyes. Then you laugh some more. + + +You just slayed a dragon. You must be losing your mind to be doing this sort of stuff again. + + +After a while of laying there, you fall asleep, and in the morning you wake up recharged despite the aching where the dragon rammed into you. You exit the cave, and begin the track on the path. The excitement of fighting such a monstrous beast and living to tell the tale... It's exhilarating. Why has it been so long since you've felt this? You miss it. + + +You set out to find more beasts to hunt. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You make yourself scarce, watching them as they continue their march out of the forest. They're a band of about four dozen, and you know that if you had chosen to fight them, it may have meant the end of you. It must have taken close to half an hour for them all to move on so far that they were out of sight, but the adrenaline pumping through your blood made the time seem as though it had passed in the blink of an eye. + + +Once they're gone, you retrieve your lantern and rope, before carefully climbing down the tree. You let out a sigh of relief once your feet hit the ground, and you continue your journey onward into the woods. Your journey lasts long into the day, and before you know it, the trees begin to give way to grassy fields. The only problem being that it's almost night again, and you don't want to risk sleeping out in the open. + + +The trees are too small here for you to be able to sleep in one. You scan the area, and find... A cave? Yes, there's an entrance to a cave poking out of the ground towards the edge of the wilderness. The entrance is massive, which means that something undesirable may lurk in there, though you can take out whatever may call the cave its home. + + +Alternatively, you can continue your march into the night. Perhaps you'll find a better place to take shelter. +> I'll continue my trek. +In spite of the darkness, you continue on the path, keeping a hand on your sword in case you're attacked. You light your lantern so that you can see more clearly, and march onwards. Eventually, you spot an old wooden cabin near a lake, not too far off the path. It looks abandoned, but hopefully if anyone still resides within you can convince them to let you take shelter. + + +You make your way to the front door, where you attempt to open it, only to find that it's locked. Damn, the place isn't abandoned. Instead, you raise your fist and pound upon the door. "Hello," you call out, "I seek shelter for the night." It takes a moment, but soon you hear footsteps descending stairs within, then the sound of a lantern being lit, followed by faint light creeping through under the door. Finally, you hear the sound of a bolt being unlocked. + + +The door cracks open slightly, and you can see a wrinkled eye poking out. "I didn't think anyone still wandered these old roads," he says, his voice old and creaky. "What brings you 'round here, stranger?" + + +"I'm nothing but a simple wanderer," you reply. "I just seek shelter for the night." + + +He looks as though he's contemplating it. He seems wary, though that isn't unreasonable; if you were in his shoes, being woken in the dead of night by a large man with a large sword, you'd be wary as well. Finally, he opens the door wider, croaking out "Come in." You oblige. + + +Before you stands an older man, perhaps in his 60s, dressed in a faded blue woolen shirt and ragged breeches. "Welcome. My name is Oscar. What's yours, wanderer?" + + +"My name is Kit." You look around. The interior of the cabin is quaint, decorated with paintings and old wooden furniture. A hearth sits on the back wall, cooking utensils hanging above it, near stairs ascending to the second floor. "A nice home you have here." + + +"Thank you." Oscar gestures to the floor. "You're welcome to make yourself comfortable. Please, do not head to the second floor. My wife is attempting to sleep. She's been sick." + + +You nod. "I understand. Thank you, sir." + + +Oscar ascends the stairs, leaving you on the first floor. You lay down, and fall asleep. + + +In the morning, you wake to Oscar descending from the stairs. "Morning, sir. You're welcome to stay for breakfast if you want, I'm going to get wood for the hearth. And again, please do not disturb my wife. She's still dreadfully sick." With that, he heads to the door and leaves. + + +He's rather insistent that you not bother his wife. Is she really that sick? Maybe you can check for yourself. Or, you can wait for him to come back and then eat breakfast with him and be on your way. +> I'm curious. I'll head upstairs. +After a moment, you get up from your place on the floor and slowly head up the stairs. Surely you have enough time before Oscar gets back. Once you reach the top of the steps, you find there is a hallway leading to a single door. You approach the door, a sinking feeling in your gut rising all the while. Something isn't right. + + +You open the door and what you see almost causes you to lose the contents of your stomach. + + +There in the bed is the corpse of a woman. She's decomposed heavily, and it's clear she's been dead a long while, far too long. Porridge drips from her rotting mouth. It was made recently. This is... Repulsive. Horrific. Wrong. + + +You're not sure how long you've been standing there, staring at the woman's corpse in shock. It isn't until you hear Oscar's shouting that you realize what you've just found... And rage shakes within you. + + +You unsheath your sword. "W-wait! I can explain!" Oscar yells, sticking his hands up. +> Damn him, the sick bastard. I swing. +You swing your blade into him. It cleaves through him like a knife through butter, bisecting him from hip to shoulder. He's dead before his torso hits the floor, and blood stains the walls of the cabin. You don't bother to clean up the mess you just made. Instead, you make your leave. + + +You continue on the road for a while. Days, maybe even weeks pass. However long you've been on these pathways, you don't know. Eventually, you manage to find a cabin that has actually been abandoned, resting nicely on the edge of a forest. It is there that you finally settle down, hunting and gathering for food. + + +Occasionally, travelers pass through on their own journeys, but they never stay long. Once or twice bandits have attempted to rob you, but once you retrieved your old sword and showed how well you can handle it, they quietly backed away... Most of them, anyhow. The fools that didn't? Well, you're lucky the stains came off easily with a bit of elbow grease. + + +Finally, you are at peace. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After a moment, you get up from your place on the floor and slowly head up the stairs. Surely you have enough time before Oscar gets back. Once you reach the top of the steps, you find there is a hallway leading to a single door. You approach the door, a sinking feeling in your gut rising all the while. Something isn't right. + + +You open the door and what you see almost causes you to lose the contents of your stomach. + + +There in the bed is the corpse of a woman. She's decomposed heavily, and it's clear she's been dead a long while, far too long. Porridge drips from her rotting mouth. It was made recently. This is... Repulsive. Horrific. Wrong. + + +You're not sure how long you've been standing there, staring at the woman's corpse in shock. It isn't until you hear Oscar's shouting that you realize what you've just found... And rage shakes within you. + + +You unsheath your sword. "W-wait! I can explain!" Oscar yells, sticking his hands up. +> I stay my hand. If he doesn't give an answer I like, I'll kill him. +It takes all your willpower to keep your blade from meeting his flesh. Still, your anger does not subside, and your voice comes out in a low growl when you speak, "What the fuck are you doing?" + + +It is then that Oscar breaks into tears.He falls to his knees. "I... I... I couldn't bare to lose her! I loved her so much! When she got sick, I was heartbroken... And when she died I couldn't accept it! I didn't want to lose her!" He can't find it in himself to continue, instead letting out a heart wrenching sob. "Please, sir... If you must, end my life. I wish... I wish to buried next to her." + + +The grip on your sword tightens. You're not sure what to do with this pitiful old man. +> He asked me to kill him. I will, and put him and his wife to rest. +You raise your sword. As gently as you can, you stab his throat. He lets out a pained gurgle, blood filling his esophagus, before finally his lungs are filled and death takes him. You pull out your sword and find his head has nearly been lopped off. Disgusting. + + +You take his corpse in your hands and take him outside, where you set him down. Then, you do the same with his wife, hauling her outside. You set her down next to her husband, before heading back inside to grab a shovel. + + +A few hours later, the pair are buried. You head to a nearby tree and cut off a decent sized branch, which you jam into the soil of their grave. There, they shall find rest... As you stand there over their shared grave, you find yourself thinking back to Grace, the hotheaded girl who could conjure fire with but a flick of her palm. What you would give to have been buried next to her. + + +You set off from the grave. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It takes all your willpower to keep your blade from meeting his flesh. Still, your anger does not subside, and your voice comes out in a low growl when you speak, "What the fuck are you doing?" + + +It is then that Oscar breaks into tears.He falls to his knees. "I... I... I couldn't bare to lose her! I loved her so much! When she got sick, I was heartbroken... And when she died I couldn't accept it! I didn't want to lose her!" He can't find it in himself to continue, instead letting out a heart wrenching sob. "Please, sir... If you must, end my life. I wish... I wish to buried next to her." + + +The grip on your sword tightens. You're not sure what to do with this pitiful old man. +> I won't kill him. I know the pain he is going through, has been going through. +With a sigh, you place your sword back onto your back. Then, you kneel down to be at eye level with the sobbing man. Despite the emotions you want to show, you find your voice being almost monotone as you speak. "I know the pain you're going through. I lost my love when she and I were young, far too young. You should be grateful for the time you had with her." + + +He wipes his eyes slowly, but he says nothing. + + +"It's time to let go." + + +With that his tears are dried. It seems as though a weight is lifted from his shoulders with your words. + + +"I... Thank you, for your words. I'll... I'll bury her, under her favorite tree. You can stay for breakfast, if you'd like. I won't be long." He picks himself up off the floor, and you do as well. + + +"I think I will." With that, you head downstairs, while Oscar begins to retrieve his wife's corpse. He leaves for the yard, while you sit and wait in his living room. He comes back an hour or so later, makes porridge, and serves it to you. The two of you eat in silence, before you stand and make your leave. + + +Life must go on. The pain that one endures is what makes them human. You know that all too well. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>In spite of the darkness, you continue on the path, keeping a hand on your sword in case you're attacked. You light your lantern so that you can see more clearly, and march onwards. Eventually, you spot an old wooden cabin near a lake, not too far off the path. It looks abandoned, but hopefully if anyone still resides within you can convince them to let you take shelter. + + +You make your way to the front door, where you attempt to open it, only to find that it's locked. Damn, the place isn't abandoned. Instead, you raise your fist and pound upon the door. "Hello," you call out, "I seek shelter for the night." It takes a moment, but soon you hear footsteps descending stairs within, then the sound of a lantern being lit, followed by faint light creeping through under the door. Finally, you hear the sound of a bolt being unlocked. + + +The door cracks open slightly, and you can see a wrinkled eye poking out. "I didn't think anyone still wandered these old roads," he says, his voice old and creaky. "What brings you 'round here, stranger?" + + +"I'm nothing but a simple wanderer," you reply. "I just seek shelter for the night." + + +He looks as though he's contemplating it. He seems wary, though that isn't unreasonable; if you were in his shoes, being woken in the dead of night by a large man with a large sword, you'd be wary as well. Finally, he opens the door wider, croaking out "Come in." You oblige. + + +Before you stands an older man, perhaps in his 60s, dressed in a faded blue woolen shirt and ragged breeches. "Welcome. My name is Oscar. What's yours, wanderer?" + + +"My name is Kit." You look around. The interior of the cabin is quaint, decorated with paintings and old wooden furniture. A hearth sits on the back wall, cooking utensils hanging above it, near stairs ascending to the second floor. "A nice home you have here." + + +"Thank you." Oscar gestures to the floor. "You're welcome to make yourself comfortable. Please, do not head to the second floor. My wife is attempting to sleep. She's been sick." + + +You nod. "I understand. Thank you, sir." + + +Oscar ascends the stairs, leaving you on the first floor. You lay down, and fall asleep. + + +In the morning, you wake to Oscar descending from the stairs. "Morning, sir. You're welcome to stay for breakfast if you want, I'm going to get wood for the hearth. And again, please do not disturb my wife. She's still dreadfully sick." With that, he heads to the door and leaves. + + +He's rather insistent that you not bother his wife. Is she really that sick? Maybe you can check for yourself. Or, you can wait for him to come back and then eat breakfast with him and be on your way. +> No, I won't invade their privacy. I'll stay for breakfast then leave. +You stay put. Oscar comes back not long after with an armful of wood logs and grass, which he places into the hearth. You offer him your tinderbox, which he takes with a hum of thanks, before lighting the hearth. He begins to cook porridge, and hands you a bowl not long after. It's good. + + +After you finish up your breakfast, you gather your things and take your leave. He was quite a kind old man. You wonder if he and his wife will do alright all alone out here. Perhaps such a life... Would suit you. Perhaps. + + +A few days, maybe even weeks later, you find a worn-down cabin on the edge of a forest that is actually abandoned this time. You decide to give that life a shot, and find that it does suit you. It is there that you finally settle down, hunting and gathering for food. + + +Occasionally, travelers pass through on their own journeys, but they never stay long. Once or twice bandits have attempted to rob you, but once you retrieved your old sword and showed how well you can handle it, they quietly backed away... Most of them, anyhow. The fools that didn't? Well, you're lucky the stains came off easily with a bit of elbow grease. + + +Finally, you are at peace. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You take the path through the woods, being sure to light your lantern along the way. The ambient sounds of wildlife keep you on the alert. For every wolf's howl and twig snapped in the distance, your hand draws closer to the hilt of your sword. Still, nothing comes out to attack you, and you must be grateful for that. + + +The road carries you onwards for hours, until finally you must stop and rest. With a grunt, you begin to climb up into a large oak tree along the path, checking every branch until, finally, you find one that can support your weight. You kill your lantern and tie it to the branch using your rope. Setting your knapsack up against the tree, you lay down, and fall asleep. + + +The sound of shouting and the light of torches causes your eyes to snap open. Through the canopy of leaves you can see a faint glow, as though sunlight is fighting hard to break through and onto the path. On said path you see a large group of men wearing armor comprised of animal hides and worn out leather. + + +Marauders. They're a wandering group of bandits and raiders, accepting any who wish to fight with them. They make their living by ransacking and pillaging towns, and never stay in one place for long. Above all, they admire a fierce warrior, and rumor has it that if one can slay the leader of a Marauder band, then one may lead them. + + +Instinctively you reach for your sword, but stop as you realize that they can't see you unless they look up. They must be on the way to find a village, so that they can steal their valuables, kill them all, or rape the women. Perhaps even all three, if they're a particularly ambitious bunch. + + +You've fought these sorts before, and most often they'll fight tooth and nail until their leader is dead. Once that happens, they'll submit themselves to you willingly... That is, if you can survive long enough to reach their leader. If you got into a fight, you can't be sure you'll walk away from it alive. + + +But at the same time... Could you just sit by and let these men harass, or even kill, the innocent? +> No, I can't. I have to do something. +You sit up and kneel on the branch. From that position, you watch for a moment, counting their numbers. Altogether, they're about four dozen. You've fought those odds before... Then again, you had your companions by your side. Even then, you can fight like a cornered animal if you try hard enough. Time to see if you still have it. + + +You pull your sword from your back and ready it, then jump down in a swing. The momentum of your fall slices right through three different men before they could even react. Their heads split right open like overripe watermelons, and the sword carries on through their bodies, cleaving them in half messily. Blood and guts cover your blade. + + +The others all stop their march and back away immediately, staring in awe at the mess you just created. There's an intense stare down between you and all of their numbers. Some have fear in their eyes, others anger, an odd few even respect. Most? A mixture of the three. The seconds tick by slowly, painfully, neither you nor the bandits wanting to make the first move, then... + + +"WHAT ARE YOU WAITING FOR!?" a gruff voice calls out. "ATTACK!" + + +Then, they're swarming you while yelling and swinging their weapons in a panic. You bring down a few with a single swing. A few cuts and stabs get through your defense. An arrow pierces your left bicep. Still, you fight madly, like an unchained beast. + + +Soon, you're attacking and defending on pure instinct. Adrenaline carries you as your body moves on its own. Too tired to think clearly. Can only act. + + +But it's in the repetition of swing, block, swing, block, that you find time to reflect. + + +What are you doing here? + + +Why are you doing this? + + +When did you go from being a hero to callously slaying bandits in the woods? + + +You're hurt. You're cold. You're hungry. You're tired. You're afraid. + + +But something still carries you. + + +That intense desire to live. + + +Like a flame that won't die out. + + +The question is... + + +Should the flame stay lit? +> The passion has died. I need to let go of my pitiful life. +You're past your prime. Nothing you do will make a difference in this world. It's time to let an old man die before he does something too rash. + + +Slowly, you stop fighting. More attacks get through your defenses. Fewer of your hits connect. Soon, it's just you standing there taking their punishment. A sword gets driven through your back. A spear impales you through the abdomen. An arrow flies into your throat. + + +Soon enough, you're nothing but a battered and unrecognizable corpse, lying in the road. You took 21 of their number with you. Nearly half their forces. They regard your corpse with a begrudging sense of respect. No one has given them such a fight before. + + +You're left slumped against a tree, sword in your lap. No one who passes through dares disturb your corpse, and soon, the earth retakes you. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit up and kneel on the branch. From that position, you watch for a moment, counting their numbers. Altogether, they're about four dozen. You've fought those odds before... Then again, you had your companions by your side. Even then, you can fight like a cornered animal if you try hard enough. Time to see if you still have it. + + +You pull your sword from your back and ready it, then jump down in a swing. The momentum of your fall slices right through three different men before they could even react. Their heads split right open like overripe watermelons, and the sword carries on through their bodies, cleaving them in half messily. Blood and guts cover your blade. + + +The others all stop their march and back away immediately, staring in awe at the mess you just created. There's an intense stare down between you and all of their numbers. Some have fear in their eyes, others anger, an odd few even respect. Most? A mixture of the three. The seconds tick by slowly, painfully, neither you nor the bandits wanting to make the first move, then... + + +"WHAT ARE YOU WAITING FOR!?" a gruff voice calls out. "ATTACK!" + + +Then, they're swarming you while yelling and swinging their weapons in a panic. You bring down a few with a single swing. A few cuts and stabs get through your defense. An arrow pierces your left bicep. Still, you fight madly, like an unchained beast. + + +Soon, you're attacking and defending on pure instinct. Adrenaline carries you as your body moves on its own. Too tired to think clearly. Can only act. + + +But it's in the repetition of swing, block, swing, block, that you find time to reflect. + + +What are you doing here? + + +Why are you doing this? + + +When did you go from being a hero to callously slaying bandits in the woods? + + +You're hurt. You're cold. You're hungry. You're tired. You're afraid. + + +But something still carries you. + + +That intense desire to live. + + +Like a flame that won't die out. + + +The question is... + + +Should the flame stay lit? +> The passion still burns within me. I won't let go. I'll fight until every bone is broken and my last drop of blood has spilled. +No. You won't go quietly. That fire, deep within your soul, it still burns as bright as it ever did. And no two-bit marauders will extinguish it. You swing with more force than you ever have before, take more punishment than you ever have before. Throwing caution to the wind as you try to take down as many of these bastards as you can. + + +After a while, you think you finally land a hit on their leader, and one hit is all you need. You can tell it's him by the glint of silver decorating his armor. When you land that blow, the others lose their fighting spirit. You plant your sword into the ground, panting as you catch your breath. Then, you turn to them with a sudden jerk of your head, a twisted grin on your face. + + +"Well? What are you waiting for?" + + +They stare at you with shock and awe written on their faces. There's only about 16 left. One steps forward. "You... Killed our leader! And most of our band!" + + +"And I'll kill you too!" You bare your teeth at them for full effect. + + +Then, they fall to their knees and lay their faces on the ground. You stare at them, still thirsting for blood on your blade. One of them begins to yell, "Lead us into battle, worthy warrior! You've proven that you can kill dozens of men and carry on!" + + +They're offering you the now vacant spot as their leader. +> I've nothing better to do. I'll take it. +You stare at them. Then, you grin. "Get your faces out of the mud. We've got a job to do." They all rise up from their bowing position, staring at you uncertainly. Your unsettling grin puts them even more on edge. "One of you! Patch up my wounds. We'll make camp for the night, then set out at dawn. We need to recruit more soldiers, then we'll see about raiding a town." + + +They all nod. Most of them begin to set up their tents, while others loot the bodies for any valuables. One of them comes over to you and sets to work on your wounds, he tells you he was a healer once upon a time, but grew bored of his life. He desired excitement, so he joined up with a band of raiders. + + +Perhaps this is what you needed. Excitement. And leading a band of raiders? Just your style. + + +Sunrise comes, and you set off into the world with your newfound band. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No. You won't go quietly. That fire, deep within your soul, it still burns as bright as it ever did. And no two-bit marauders will extinguish it. You swing with more force than you ever have before, take more punishment than you ever have before. Throwing caution to the wind as you try to take down as many of these bastards as you can. + + +After a while, you think you finally land a hit on their leader, and one hit is all you need. You can tell it's him by the glint of silver decorating his armor. When you land that blow, the others lose their fighting spirit. You plant your sword into the ground, panting as you catch your breath. Then, you turn to them with a sudden jerk of your head, a twisted grin on your face. + + +"Well? What are you waiting for?" + + +They stare at you with shock and awe written on their faces. There's only about 16 left. One steps forward. "You... Killed our leader! And most of our band!" + + +"And I'll kill you too!" You bare your teeth at them for full effect. + + +Then, they fall to their knees and lay their faces on the ground. You stare at them, still thirsting for blood on your blade. One of them begins to yell, "Lead us into battle, worthy warrior! You've proven that you can kill dozens of men and carry on!" + + +They're offering you the now vacant spot as their leader. +> I won't stoop so low. They're pathetic bandits. +Rage bubbles within you. They think that you want that position? That you'll forgive them of their crimes? You're not going to give them that satisfaction. Instead, you raise your sword, and with a sweeping blow, take out four of them with one swing. The others realize what you're doing and try to run. They don't make it very far. + + +Soon, you're cleaning your blade in a stream outside of the forest, while binding your wounds. They did a number on you, but you suppose it's just more scars for the collection. It's almost comforting, in a way. Almost. + + +There's more injustice out there. If anything, now is the time to act. + + +You set out into the horizon, never once looking back. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>In the late hours of the night, you set out for parts unknown. + + +On your back is your sword, chipped and dull. It's far too large to be called a sword; massive, heavy, far too rough. If anything, it's a hunk of raw iron. But it's yours, and a single swing with the large blade is enough to cut down three cavalrymen and their horses too. Beside it is your knapsack, carrying only raw essentials, such as food, a change of clothes, a tinderbox, lantern oil, and a jug of alcohol. Fifteen feet of rope in a coil is tied onto your belt, alongside a lantern. + + +For a moment you're leaving your home village with your friends. All of you are young, reckless, hopeful... But the nostalgia soon fades, and you realize what you're doing. You're not leaving to save the world, you're leaving to get away from your responsibilities. The thought makes you let out a dry, humorless laugh. + + +It's been so long since you've traveled. You almost forgot what it felt like, just you on the open road. It feels... Liberating, almost. Like a weight has been lifted off your shoulders for the first time in years. As though you were holding the world high above you, and only now can you take a break. But you don't hold onto that feeling, for you know well enough that it will distract you from any dangers on the road... + + +Soon enough, you come upon a fork in the road. One road leads into the forest. You're unlikely to come across any other people on this road, only wilderness as far as the eye can see. The other road is a common trade route, with villages dotting it every few miles. Either way, wherever you go, you'll be traveling far away from the place you once called home. +> Take the trade route. +You take the path that eventually merges back onto the main roads. This is a common route for wandering merchants or supply caravans, with villages darting the path every couple of miles. The entire route itself from where you are is about 30 miles, where it runs into the city of Sodran and then disappears, assimilated into the highways. + + +The villages in these areas all make their profits in a variety of ways. Some survive off of hunting and gathering, others fishing, most farming. One village, from what you've heard, even makes money by hiring off the able-bodied men and women to traveling merchants in need of protection. Whatever gets the bills paid and keeps food on the table, you suppose. + + +It's an hour into your march that you come across the first village. There's an inn right on the edge of the town that's still open. The lit lanterns within seep through the windows, as if a beacon guiding weary travelers to the doorstep. On the side of the inn is a small stable, where some horses and a mule reside. The horses have everything from a simple saddle to a whole pack of belongings tied to them, and the mule has a pack of wares strapped to its back. + + +You can stop at the inn for the night. It would be nice to sleep in a warm bed. Still, you don't want to get distracted; you can just carry on through the night to put as much distance between you and your former estate as you can. +> I'll rent a room at the inn. +As you walk past the stable to the inn's door, a woman, looking to be in her late 20s, walks out of the stables. Her hands are calloused and her fair skin tinged red, no doubt from working under the sun all day. As she spots you, she looks surprised for a moment, before smiling. "Oh, hello sir! Stopping at the inn for the night? I was just about to head in myself." + + +You grunt out something resembling a "yes", and she nods. "The place is real nice, sir. My father runs it, I manage the stables for him. My name is Eliza, what would yours be?" She extends a hand, perhaps thinking you'll shake it. You don't, and after an awkward moment she withdraws it. + + +You do, however, give her a response. "Kit." + + +"That's a nice name, sir." She smiles at you still. You continue to frown. Eventually, her shining grin falters, and she looks worried. "Something wrong, sir?" + + +"I didn't come here to chat." + + +Her face falls a bit more, but she regains her smile. "Of course not, sir. I'm sorry if I held you up. Let's go." + + +"Right." You move to leave. Eliza follows after you, and you turn to look at her over your shoulder. "Oh, and stop saying sir at the end of every sentence. Makes you seem uptight." Her face falls a bit at that, but she keeps her smile plastered on her face. + + +As you open the door to the inn, a pleasant warmth hits you in the face. You step inside, Eliza following after you. The entrance of the inn is empty save for a man behind a wooden counter up front, tapping the counter with his finger. He looks at you, and a smile makes its way onto his face, disturbing his bushy mustache. "Ah, Eliza! Welcome back. Who's this, potential customer?" + + +"Yes, father. His name is Kit. Kit, this is my father, Isaiah. Go on, sir... Um, I mean, Kit." Good, she caught herself. + + +You step forward to the man behind the counter, staring down at his sitting form. "How much for a room?" you ask. + + +"Just 5 gold pieces a night, sir. Throw in an extra coin for as many drinks as you can have." That piques your interest. You open your coin pouch and pull out six coins, tossing them onto the counter. The owner takes a moment to count them out, before he nods. He slips the coins into a lockbox under the counter, before grabbing a key from behind him. "Very good, sir. Here's your room key, room 8." + + +You nod at him, taking the key from his hands and looking around. "There's a dining hall to the right," Isaiah points to an archway. "You can get your drinks there if you want. We have ale, wine, fruit juice, and water." + + +"Alright." You pocket your key, then head straight for the dining room. Heading through the doorway, you see that it's far more lively in here, different people milling about and sitting at different tables. You spot a few interesting folks, but one really catches your eye: a man with tanned skin, dressed in clothing made of brightly colored textiles. He must be a wandering merchant from the distant lands of Cikoni. + + +You wonder what he's doing here. Maybe he could use a guard, could get you a steady source of income and get you far away from the kingdom. Alternatively, you can just get your drink and sit by yourself. +> Speak to the wandering merchant. +Grabbing your drink, you head on over to the wandering merchant's table. You note a pipe hanging from his mouth, a strange crushed up substance within it; upon closer inspection, the substance appears to be sharp and jagged like glass, and glows a faint blue. You know what the substance is: Cikoni Crab Shells, a popular recreational drug hailing from the beaches of Cikoni. To make it, one has to find a Cikoni Long Crab, which possesses a strangely potent amount of magic within its shell, and kill it. Then, they crush it up, either to a fine paste or to shards like the merchant has it; from what you heard it determines how harsh the taste is. + + +As you stop to recollect your knowledge on what's within the pipe, a small flickering flame bursts from his fingertips with a snap. He sticks his finger into the crab shells, taking a moment to let the fire melt them down, and before long the pipe has been lit. He's a mage, though you should have expected that; most who hail from Cikoni are mages after all. + + +You slide into the chair across from him as he puffs on his pipe. He looks up at you, gives a little nod and speaks, "Anything important, traveler?" + + +You lean forward. "I need work, and a way out of this kingdom. I can give you strong arms and protection if you hire me on. In exchange you don't ask about who I am or what I did." + + +You must have appealed to his shadier side, as the man smiles a bit. "Ah, a man after my own heart, I see. I understand. Since I assume names are on the list of things I should not ask about, I won't. My name is Gi'anti, and I'm a traveling merchant of sorts." + + +"You can call me whatever you wish. I just need a way out of here." + + +At that, Gi'anti grins and lets out a puff of smoke. "Well then. I shall call you T'kanka. Please, tell me your room number, so I may wake you when we set off tomorrow." + + +With your luck, that means rodent in their language. Still, it'll do. "It's room 8. When do we set off?" + + +"At dawn. Get some sleep, T'kanka, for you will need it." With that, Gi'anti extinguishes the Crab Shells and departs for his room, leaving you to finish your drink alone. At the very least, you got a way out of this kingdom now. + + +You finish your drink, head up to your room, and pass out in the bed not long afterwards. A few hours later you awake to a pounding on your door and dim sunlight shining onto your face through the window. You get up out of bed, and open the door. There, Gi'anti greets you. "Ah, T'kanka. Was worried I'd have to knock your door down, for I almost thought you were dead in there." + + +You rub the sleep out of your eyes. "Needed the sleep. We setting off now?" + + +Gi'anti nods. "Come along, T'kanka." He gestures for you to follow, which you do. He leads you out of the inn and to the stable, where he unhooks the mule you saw last night and grabs a lead. "We'll be setting off through the woods and heading through to the city of Tolast. If we run into trouble on the way, you put that sword of yours to use, eh T'kanka?" + + +You nod. "Right." + + +And so, the two of you walk off into the wilderness. +> Continue +Over the next week, the two of you make small talk. Gi'anti is an interesting fellow, with a lot to say on various herbs and plants you come across in the forest. One particular time, he points out a faintly red leaf, and says, "That there is what they call sorem incenti, it's a medical leaf used for treating wounds caused by magic." + + +"Hm. So if, say, you threw a fireball at me, we'd just plant some sorem incenti on me and I'd be fine?" Your response causes him to let out a laugh, which makes you frown. "What's so funny?" + + +"T'kanka, if I hit you with a fireball, all you'd need is aloe vera. I'm not a very accomplished mage!" He continues to laugh heartily, and despite yourself you also let out a small chuckle. "If I was a powerful mage, I wouldn't have need of your assistance, no?" + + +"I suppose not." + + +The two of you continue on into the woods, bantering during the day and resting during the night. A few times you nearly let slip some of your old stories, but you doubt the man would care any for them. Plus, he silences you before you can get started on them anyhow. One night you almost mention your old friends when Gi'anti holds up a hand. "I enjoy your company, T'kanka, but I'd prefer if our relationship be kept professional. No point getting attached if you're going to leave anyway." + + +Eventually, the two of you pass through the city of Tolast, Gi'anti selling some of his crab shells to anyone looking for a fix. He sells a particularly large amount to a noble passing through, who gives him a nice stack of gold coins in exchange. The mule is extra burdened from then on due to the sheer size of the bag of gold. + + +Eventually, the two of you cross the border from the Kingdom of Oren to the Empire of Kishak, after about a month on the road. "I would appreciate if you would stay on my caravan, T'kanka," Gi'anti says while the two of you set up camp for the night. "But I understand if you wish to leave. We've come far, and that was all you wished to do." + + +You have a decision to make. Will you stay on with Gi'anti, continuing your travels together, or depart come sunrise? +> Gi'anti has become something of a friend over this last month. I will gladly stay on the caravan with him. +You nod. "I'll gladly stay with you, Gi'anti. Come hell or high water, I'll be here with you, my friend." With those words, you finish setting up your camp. Gi'anti grins brightly at you. + + +"I am glad to hear it, T'kanka..." He pauses, pondering his next words. "Do you know what T'kanka means, my friend?" + + +You shake your head. "No." + + +"It's the name of a legendary warrior, where I come from. T'kanka, the Wandering King. Able to slay an army with one swing of his sword, able to traverse thousands of miles in a single day, and able to survive no matter how many times he is struck. Of course, these are all myths, but T'kanka was a real man. Legend has it that after his death, his body denied this fact, and he continued to roam, forever." Gi'anti leans forward. "I saw in your eyes the same spirit that I imagine T'kanka to have." + + +You suppose you must be flattered by that, so you crack Gi'anti a small smile. The two of you then begin to banter again, as you've done in the past month, and finally lay down to sleep. Come sunrise, the two of you will continue onward together. You know that you've made a brother for life in him, and you could not be any gladder. + + +In the morning light, the two of you pack up and leave, never once looking back. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Over the next week, the two of you make small talk. Gi'anti is an interesting fellow, with a lot to say on various herbs and plants you come across in the forest. One particular time, he points out a faintly red leaf, and says, "That there is what they call sorem incenti, it's a medical leaf used for treating wounds caused by magic." + + +"Hm. So if, say, you threw a fireball at me, we'd just plant some sorem incenti on me and I'd be fine?" Your response causes him to let out a laugh, which makes you frown. "What's so funny?" + + +"T'kanka, if I hit you with a fireball, all you'd need is aloe vera. I'm not a very accomplished mage!" He continues to laugh heartily, and despite yourself you also let out a small chuckle. "If I was a powerful mage, I wouldn't have need of your assistance, no?" + + +"I suppose not." + + +The two of you continue on into the woods, bantering during the day and resting during the night. A few times you nearly let slip some of your old stories, but you doubt the man would care any for them. Plus, he silences you before you can get started on them anyhow. One night you almost mention your old friends when Gi'anti holds up a hand. "I enjoy your company, T'kanka, but I'd prefer if our relationship be kept professional. No point getting attached if you're going to leave anyway." + + +Eventually, the two of you pass through the city of Tolast, Gi'anti selling some of his crab shells to anyone looking for a fix. He sells a particularly large amount to a noble passing through, who gives him a nice stack of gold coins in exchange. The mule is extra burdened from then on due to the sheer size of the bag of gold. + + +Eventually, the two of you cross the border from the Kingdom of Oren to the Empire of Kishak, after about a month on the road. "I would appreciate if you would stay on my caravan, T'kanka," Gi'anti says while the two of you set up camp for the night. "But I understand if you wish to leave. We've come far, and that was all you wished to do." + + +You have a decision to make. Will you stay on with Gi'anti, continuing your travels together, or depart come sunrise? +> Much as I enjoy his company, I need to leave. I'll tell him as much. +You shake your head. "I'm sorry, Gi'anti, but I must go. I enjoyed our time together but I need to carve my own path in this world. I'll leave come sunrise." With those words you finish setting up your tent. Gi'anti sighs, shakes his head a bit. Still, he smiles. + + +"Do you know what T'kanka means, my friend?" + + +You shake your head. "No." + + +"It's the name of a legendary warrior, where I come from. T'kanka, the Wandering King. Able to slay an army with one swing of his sword, able to traverse thousands of miles in a single day, and able to survive no matter how many times he is struck. Of course, these are all myths, but T'kanka was a real man. Legend has it that after his death, his body denied this fact, and he continued to roam, forever." Gi'anti leans forward. "I saw in your eyes the same spirit that I imagine T'kanka to have." + + +You suppose you must be flattered by that, so you crack Gi'anti a small smile. The two of you then begin to banter again, as you've done in the past month, and finally lay down to sleep. Come sunrise, you may never see this man again. But you know that you've made a brother for life in him. + + +In the morning light, you leave, never once looking back. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you walk past the stable to the inn's door, a woman, looking to be in her late 20s, walks out of the stables. Her hands are calloused and her fair skin tinged red, no doubt from working under the sun all day. As she spots you, she looks surprised for a moment, before smiling. "Oh, hello sir! Stopping at the inn for the night? I was just about to head in myself." + + +You grunt out something resembling a "yes", and she nods. "The place is real nice, sir. My father runs it, I manage the stables for him. My name is Eliza, what would yours be?" She extends a hand, perhaps thinking you'll shake it. You don't, and after an awkward moment she withdraws it. + + +You do, however, give her a response. "Kit." + + +"That's a nice name, sir." She smiles at you still. You continue to frown. Eventually, her shining grin falters, and she looks worried. "Something wrong, sir?" + + +"I didn't come here to chat." + + +Her face falls a bit more, but she regains her smile. "Of course not, sir. I'm sorry if I held you up. Let's go." + + +"Right." You move to leave. Eliza follows after you, and you turn to look at her over your shoulder. "Oh, and stop saying sir at the end of every sentence. Makes you seem uptight." Her face falls a bit at that, but she keeps her smile plastered on her face. + + +As you open the door to the inn, a pleasant warmth hits you in the face. You step inside, Eliza following after you. The entrance of the inn is empty save for a man behind a wooden counter up front, tapping the counter with his finger. He looks at you, and a smile makes its way onto his face, disturbing his bushy mustache. "Ah, Eliza! Welcome back. Who's this, potential customer?" + + +"Yes, father. His name is Kit. Kit, this is my father, Isaiah. Go on, sir... Um, I mean, Kit." Good, she caught herself. + + +You step forward to the man behind the counter, staring down at his sitting form. "How much for a room?" you ask. + + +"Just 5 gold pieces a night, sir. Throw in an extra coin for as many drinks as you can have." That piques your interest. You open your coin pouch and pull out six coins, tossing them onto the counter. The owner takes a moment to count them out, before he nods. He slips the coins into a lockbox under the counter, before grabbing a key from behind him. "Very good, sir. Here's your room key, room 8." + + +You nod at him, taking the key from his hands and looking around. "There's a dining hall to the right," Isaiah points to an archway. "You can get your drinks there if you want. We have ale, wine, fruit juice, and water." + + +"Alright." You pocket your key, then head straight for the dining room. Heading through the doorway, you see that it's far more lively in here, different people milling about and sitting at different tables. You spot a few interesting folks, but one really catches your eye: a man with tanned skin, dressed in clothing made of brightly colored textiles. He must be a wandering merchant from the distant lands of Cikoni. + + +You wonder what he's doing here. Maybe he could use a guard, could get you a steady source of income and get you far away from the kingdom. Alternatively, you can just get your drink and sit by yourself. +> Just get my drink. +You decide not to bother the wandering trader, instead taking a seat at a table by your lonesome. Eventually, the trader gets up and leaves, heading back to his room for the night. You never see him again. After a few more drinks, you stumble out of the dining hall and up the stairs to your room. There, you throw your sword and knapsack to the floor, before passing out on your bed. + + +In the morning, you awake to a woman's scream. Groggily, you get up, heading to the door so you can see what the hell is going on - grabbing your sword along the way, of course. When you head down the stairs, you see a pair of thugs roughing up the owner, Isaiah. His daughter Eliza watches on, tears streaming from her eyes, as a third thug holds her back. The two harassing Isaiah stick a lit cigar into his face. This time, it's Isaiah who screams. + + +The thugs laugh at him, sadistic grins on their faces. Your stomach turns. This is disgusting. + + +Then, one of the thugs turns his head and looks at you. He whistles, the other two looking at you soon after. One with a strange piercing in his nose lets out a laugh. "Oi, you! Quit yer starin' and get outta here, chump." Perhaps you should do something about this, or not. After all, this doesn't involve you. +> The sick bastards. I'll strike them down. +You unsheathe your blade, pointing it at the bastards. One of them gulps almost imperceptibly, but the one who spoke to you just lets out another nasty laugh. "Wanna play hero, eh?" He callously drops Isaiah, pulls a mace from his side. The others follow suit, pulling out their own weapons; one has a curved blade, the other a pair of daggers. This should be easy. + + +You leap forward and swing, managing to decapitate the one with daggers easily. Blood gushes from his neck, before he falls to the floor, lifeless. This manages to scare the other two, but mace guy nudges sword guy, the latter nodding before rushing forward to cut at you. You don't bother to use your sword on him, instead ducking out of the way of his swing then tripping him up. Then you use the sword, cutting him right in half with one swing while he lies on the ground. + + +At this point, mace is quaking in fear. He drops his weapon, raising his hands and getting on his knees. "I-I surrender! Please, don't kill me!" You step forward, planning on delivering the killing blow... + + +But mace leaps up and pulls a dagger from his boot! His speed surprises you, and he manages to catch you with a glancing blow. Instantly, you begin to feel light-headed, almost unsteady. Still, you swing, cutting off his arm and wedging your blade deep into his side. He lets out an ungodly scream, then dies. + + +You grin, give a little chuckle. Then you collapse. + + +When you awaken next, you're in a soft bed, a bandage wrapped around your wound. It throbs still, and your throat is parched. A soft groan escapes your lips, then you grunt out, "water", hoping someone may hear you. There's a slight shuffling, then a cup of water is handed to you. You look up at who gave it to you, and there stands Eliza. She smiles. + + +"I can't thank you enough for what you did... But you've brought trouble to the village at the same time. There was one watching outside, he told his leader about what happened. They came to town early this morning and said that if we don't surrender all our goods, they'll raze the place. We have until tomorrow to decide." + + +"Really..." The word that escape your lips comes out less as a question and more as a statement. + + +"Yes, really." + + +"How long have I been out?" + + +"4 days now. The dagger was poisoned. We got our healer to work on you, you should be fine if you rest another few days." + + +That gets you to jolt up, hissing slightly as you grip your wound. "I can't. I have to leave." + + +"Please, just relax. You'll be better soon. We plan to surrender to them. And as far as they know, you're dead; we hid you well. You'll be safe to rest here." + + +Hmph. So they're giving up, simple as that? Back in your day the people would have fought back tooth and nail. What are you going to do? +> I'll leave. Now. There's no reason to defend those who won't defend themselves. +You pretend that you'll stay to rest, and convince Eliza you'll be fine by yourself. She leaves the room, and after a minute, you get up and search for your things. Thankfully, they left them right at the foot of the bed. Fools, probably didn't expect you to try and leave. + + +You get into your clothes and throw on your knapsack, securing your sword onto your back. You open the door, seeing that it leads outside; it's night time, which means your escape will be easier. Keeping down low, you sneak to the edge of the village, where you finally stand, noting that your escape went unnoticed. You prepare to walk away... + + +"So you are leaving." + + +Turning, you see Eliza standing there. She looks sad, but smiles nonetheless. "I knew you would. You didn't strike me as the type to be patient and rest. Am I right?" + + +"Right." You turn your back on her. "You won't convince me to stay. I'll recover on my own." + + +"I figured as much." She sighs. "I wish you well on your travels, Kit." Then, she turns and leaves. + + +You continue onwards into the night. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You unsheathe your blade, pointing it at the bastards. One of them gulps almost imperceptibly, but the one who spoke to you just lets out another nasty laugh. "Wanna play hero, eh?" He callously drops Isaiah, pulls a mace from his side. The others follow suit, pulling out their own weapons; one has a curved blade, the other a pair of daggers. This should be easy. + + +You leap forward and swing, managing to decapitate the one with daggers easily. Blood gushes from his neck, before he falls to the floor, lifeless. This manages to scare the other two, but mace guy nudges sword guy, the latter nodding before rushing forward to cut at you. You don't bother to use your sword on him, instead ducking out of the way of his swing then tripping him up. Then you use the sword, cutting him right in half with one swing while he lies on the ground. + + +At this point, mace is quaking in fear. He drops his weapon, raising his hands and getting on his knees. "I-I surrender! Please, don't kill me!" You step forward, planning on delivering the killing blow... + + +But mace leaps up and pulls a dagger from his boot! His speed surprises you, and he manages to catch you with a glancing blow. Instantly, you begin to feel light-headed, almost unsteady. Still, you swing, cutting off his arm and wedging your blade deep into his side. He lets out an ungodly scream, then dies. + + +You grin, give a little chuckle. Then you collapse. + + +When you awaken next, you're in a soft bed, a bandage wrapped around your wound. It throbs still, and your throat is parched. A soft groan escapes your lips, then you grunt out, "water", hoping someone may hear you. There's a slight shuffling, then a cup of water is handed to you. You look up at who gave it to you, and there stands Eliza. She smiles. + + +"I can't thank you enough for what you did... But you've brought trouble to the village at the same time. There was one watching outside, he told his leader about what happened. They came to town early this morning and said that if we don't surrender all our goods, they'll raze the place. We have until tomorrow to decide." + + +"Really..." The word that escape your lips comes out less as a question and more as a statement. + + +"Yes, really." + + +"How long have I been out?" + + +"4 days now. The dagger was poisoned. We got our healer to work on you, you should be fine if you rest another few days." + + +That gets you to jolt up, hissing slightly as you grip your wound. "I can't. I have to leave." + + +"Please, just relax. You'll be better soon. We plan to surrender to them. And as far as they know, you're dead; we hid you well. You'll be safe to rest here." + + +Hmph. So they're giving up, simple as that? Back in your day the people would have fought back tooth and nail. What are you going to do? +> I'll defend them from the raiders come tomorrow. They need it. +You shake your head vehemently. "No. I won't stand by while you all give in to worthless bandits. I'll stay, and fight them off tomorrow." + + +Eliza's eyes widen. "You're still hurt! They're near fifty strong, if you fight them, you'll die!" She's begging you particularly hard. + + +"I've fought worse odds. I can handle them." To prove your point, you get out of the bed and stand up, Eliza moving quickly to sit you back down. You shrug her hands off. + + +"Please, don't. These men will slaughter you." + + +"I can do it." You shoulder your way past her, to your knapsack. There, you slip into your clothing, and grab your sword. "I'll watch for them. When they come, I'll kill them all." A bloodthirsty grin makes its way onto your face. "Watch." Ignoring any further pleas from Eliza, you carry onward and leave the room. You see that it's a small hut, the only door leading directly outside; it's night, which means you have time to set up. + + +You go to the largest tree in the center of the village, scaling up it and sitting on a branch. There, you wait. And wait. Then you wait some more. + + +The sun is high in the sky, the villagers are out in the fields, and your ass is sore by the time the raiders finally do come. The villagers milling about pause in their work as they watch them, all with fear written on their faces. The raider leader, a large and burly man in chainmail, raises his arms up high. "People of this fair village! We have come to accept your surrender. Should you resist, we'll kill all of you. So please, resist." + + +Isaiah steps forward, head down low. You note the bandage on his cheek, where the cigar was jammed into his face. "Please, don't harm us. We surrender. You are free to take all the supplies we have." + + +The raider leader lets out a small tsk, shaking his head. "Really? That's all? How disappointing." You're about to jump down and attack him, when... + + +"I guess we'll just have to kill you anyway." The raider leader pulls out his sword and runs it through Isaiah's chest. Your blood begins to pump viciously. "Kill them all." + + +That's when you finally jump from the branch. You were too late. Isaiah is dead, because you took too long to just jump down and kill them. You're no hero. + + +You land on top of the nearest raider, his head crushing beneath the weight of your boot. The others quickly turn their eyes to you and stare in awe. You unsheathe your sword, then start swinging with a primal yell. A few men are taken down by your blade, while the others go on the attack. You bring up your blade occasionally to block attacks, swinging when you see an opening. It's a slaughter for them. + + +By the time you take down a few dozen, the others begin to retreat. Their leader yells at them, calls them cowards, but stands his ground. "FINE!" He unsheathes a blade of his own. "I'll do it myself!" He goes on the attack, swinging the sword at you. You block it, then swing, but the raider manages to leap out of the way. Damn, if you weren't still recovering, you could have gotten him. Still, it's been a long while since someone managed to dodge one of your attacks. This should be fun. + + +The two of you continue on like that for a while; he strikes, you block, you strike, he dodges. It's almost like a dance between two experienced partners. This man, he's well trained, and a far better swordsman than you are. There's one difference though, and that is while you lack strength, you make up for it in raw power. + + +It also helps that you picked the winning side in this battle. + + +Slowly, the villagers start to gather courage. Before you know it, rocks are being pelted at the raider. He ignores them well enough, but they throw him off enough that he starts to barely evade your attacks. Then, after a longer time, some start pushing forward with pitchforks and other tools in hand. They attack, but the raider attacks back and they retreat before they get killed. + + +But, their attacks are all you need, and soon, one of your swings eventually makes its way into his hip. He lets out a yell of agony, dropping his blade and falling into a kneel. You don't waste any time letting him have his last words, instead bringing the blade down right onto his head, bisecting it down the middle. + + +There is silence. + + +Then, defeaning cheers. + + +The town is safe. You've done it. + + +There are no celebrations afterwards however. The bodies of the raiders are burned, Isaiah is brought to his daughter. The others return to their homes, some continue to work. Eliza picks out a plot in the cemetary, and the gravekeeper gets to work. You approach her as she watches. Her father has been set down in a coffin not far from the grave. + + +Her eyes are red and puffy. She's been crying all day, no doubt. You place a hand on her shoulder. "I'm sorry I couldn't save him," you say. + + +She turns to look at you, no malice whatsoever on her face. "I know." + + +"What will you do now? Manage the inn?" + + +She sighs, shakes her head. "I don't know. My father was all I had." + + +You nod. "... I'll leave you be." + + +Then, you walk away. + + +You have a decision to make. Stay here in this village and live out the rest of your days, or continue onwards into the great unknown. +> I'll stay here. Perhaps I can help the people that way. +The next day, you knock on a random villager's door, and ask for a job. He knows that you saved the village, so he gladly gets you work tending to the fields. It's hard work, but they provide you with a nice home and let you take some of the harvest for food. It's a good way of life, you suppose. + + +You keep Eliza company when you're off work. She decided to stay in the town, managing the inn like her father before her. It takes her a while, but eventually, she's back to her usual self. Smiling softly, being as kind as possible, and working hard. But you see in her eyes that she won't be able to recover fully anytime soon. You know the pain. One may be able to put on the guise of being back to normal, but they'll never be the same deep down. + + +You continue to spend your days tending to the fields, visiting Eliza after work or on your days off, and making friends around the village. It's a nice life, you'd say. Eventually, you integrate so well into the village's society, that it's almost like you've been there your whole life. + + +Finally, you are at peace. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You shake your head vehemently. "No. I won't stand by while you all give in to worthless bandits. I'll stay, and fight them off tomorrow." + + +Eliza's eyes widen. "You're still hurt! They're near fifty strong, if you fight them, you'll die!" She's begging you particularly hard. + + +"I've fought worse odds. I can handle them." To prove your point, you get out of the bed and stand up, Eliza moving quickly to sit you back down. You shrug her hands off. + + +"Please, don't. These men will slaughter you." + + +"I can do it." You shoulder your way past her, to your knapsack. There, you slip into your clothing, and grab your sword. "I'll watch for them. When they come, I'll kill them all." A bloodthirsty grin makes its way onto your face. "Watch." Ignoring any further pleas from Eliza, you carry onward and leave the room. You see that it's a small hut, the only door leading directly outside; it's night, which means you have time to set up. + + +You go to the largest tree in the center of the village, scaling up it and sitting on a branch. There, you wait. And wait. Then you wait some more. + + +The sun is high in the sky, the villagers are out in the fields, and your ass is sore by the time the raiders finally do come. The villagers milling about pause in their work as they watch them, all with fear written on their faces. The raider leader, a large and burly man in chainmail, raises his arms up high. "People of this fair village! We have come to accept your surrender. Should you resist, we'll kill all of you. So please, resist." + + +Isaiah steps forward, head down low. You note the bandage on his cheek, where the cigar was jammed into his face. "Please, don't harm us. We surrender. You are free to take all the supplies we have." + + +The raider leader lets out a small tsk, shaking his head. "Really? That's all? How disappointing." You're about to jump down and attack him, when... + + +"I guess we'll just have to kill you anyway." The raider leader pulls out his sword and runs it through Isaiah's chest. Your blood begins to pump viciously. "Kill them all." + + +That's when you finally jump from the branch. You were too late. Isaiah is dead, because you took too long to just jump down and kill them. You're no hero. + + +You land on top of the nearest raider, his head crushing beneath the weight of your boot. The others quickly turn their eyes to you and stare in awe. You unsheathe your sword, then start swinging with a primal yell. A few men are taken down by your blade, while the others go on the attack. You bring up your blade occasionally to block attacks, swinging when you see an opening. It's a slaughter for them. + + +By the time you take down a few dozen, the others begin to retreat. Their leader yells at them, calls them cowards, but stands his ground. "FINE!" He unsheathes a blade of his own. "I'll do it myself!" He goes on the attack, swinging the sword at you. You block it, then swing, but the raider manages to leap out of the way. Damn, if you weren't still recovering, you could have gotten him. Still, it's been a long while since someone managed to dodge one of your attacks. This should be fun. + + +The two of you continue on like that for a while; he strikes, you block, you strike, he dodges. It's almost like a dance between two experienced partners. This man, he's well trained, and a far better swordsman than you are. There's one difference though, and that is while you lack strength, you make up for it in raw power. + + +It also helps that you picked the winning side in this battle. + + +Slowly, the villagers start to gather courage. Before you know it, rocks are being pelted at the raider. He ignores them well enough, but they throw him off enough that he starts to barely evade your attacks. Then, after a longer time, some start pushing forward with pitchforks and other tools in hand. They attack, but the raider attacks back and they retreat before they get killed. + + +But, their attacks are all you need, and soon, one of your swings eventually makes its way into his hip. He lets out a yell of agony, dropping his blade and falling into a kneel. You don't waste any time letting him have his last words, instead bringing the blade down right onto his head, bisecting it down the middle. + + +There is silence. + + +Then, defeaning cheers. + + +The town is safe. You've done it. + + +There are no celebrations afterwards however. The bodies of the raiders are burned, Isaiah is brought to his daughter. The others return to their homes, some continue to work. Eliza picks out a plot in the cemetary, and the gravekeeper gets to work. You approach her as she watches. Her father has been set down in a coffin not far from the grave. + + +Her eyes are red and puffy. She's been crying all day, no doubt. You place a hand on her shoulder. "I'm sorry I couldn't save him," you say. + + +She turns to look at you, no malice whatsoever on her face. "I know." + + +"What will you do now? Manage the inn?" + + +She sighs, shakes her head. "I don't know. My father was all I had." + + +You nod. "... I'll leave you be." + + +Then, you walk away. + + +You have a decision to make. Stay here in this village and live out the rest of your days, or continue onwards into the great unknown. +> I'll leave. I defended the village, and now nothing is left for me here. +You spend the next few days in the hut where you were told to recover, Eliza visiting you every now and again. She's going to manage the inn, because that's what her father would have wanted. You make it no secret that you'll leave; she looks sad when you say you will, but accepts it nonetheless. You almost feel sorry for her, like you might stay if only to help her, but you know you can't. + + +A few days later, you've fully recovered, and you pack up your things. As you step onto the open road for the first time in almost a week, it feels liberating. You missed this. But, before you go, you hear someone calling your name. Turning, you see Eliza, waving wildly. She smiles faintly, then calls out, "Be sure to come and visit sometime!" + + +You let out a laugh, then call back, "I'll be sure to if I'm in the area again!" With that, she heads back to the inn, and you continue onward into the great unknown. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide not to bother the wandering trader, instead taking a seat at a table by your lonesome. Eventually, the trader gets up and leaves, heading back to his room for the night. You never see him again. After a few more drinks, you stumble out of the dining hall and up the stairs to your room. There, you throw your sword and knapsack to the floor, before passing out on your bed. + + +In the morning, you awake to a woman's scream. Groggily, you get up, heading to the door so you can see what the hell is going on - grabbing your sword along the way, of course. When you head down the stairs, you see a pair of thugs roughing up the owner, Isaiah. His daughter Eliza watches on, tears streaming from her eyes, as a third thug holds her back. The two harassing Isaiah stick a lit cigar into his face. This time, it's Isaiah who screams. + + +The thugs laugh at him, sadistic grins on their faces. Your stomach turns. This is disgusting. + + +Then, one of the thugs turns his head and looks at you. He whistles, the other two looking at you soon after. One with a strange piercing in his nose lets out a laugh. "Oi, you! Quit yer starin' and get outta here, chump." Perhaps you should do something about this, or not. After all, this doesn't involve you. +> I'll just leave. Doesn't involve me. +You raise your hands, shake your head. "Do what you will. I'm leaving." With those words, you make your way to the door. Eliza shoots a horrified look at you, Isaiah stares at you with pure hatred in his eyes. They must think you're an awful person. You're not; you're just doing what you have to in order to survive. + + +You exit the inn, leaving the bandits with Isaiah and Eliza. As you leave, you hear another scream, from Isaiah again. Can't be helped. Much as you want to go back in, sword in hand, you don't want to cause more trouble to the town by killing those bandits. All in all, you're doing this for the right reasons... Mostly. + + +You walk down the road, never returning to the village again. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You take the path that eventually merges back onto the main roads. This is a common route for wandering merchants or supply caravans, with villages darting the path every couple of miles. The entire route itself from where you are is about 30 miles, where it runs into the city of Sodran and then disappears, assimilated into the highways. + + +The villages in these areas all make their profits in a variety of ways. Some survive off of hunting and gathering, others fishing, most farming. One village, from what you've heard, even makes money by hiring off the able-bodied men and women to traveling merchants in need of protection. Whatever gets the bills paid and keeps food on the table, you suppose. + + +It's an hour into your march that you come across the first village. There's an inn right on the edge of the town that's still open. The lit lanterns within seep through the windows, as if a beacon guiding weary travelers to the doorstep. On the side of the inn is a small stable, where some horses and a mule reside. The horses have everything from a simple saddle to a whole pack of belongings tied to them, and the mule has a pack of wares strapped to its back. + + +You can stop at the inn for the night. It would be nice to sleep in a warm bed. Still, you don't want to get distracted; you can just carry on through the night to put as much distance between you and your former estate as you can. +> I'll continue on the road. +You pass the inn by, instead opting to continue on into the night on the road. Carrying onward for miles, you eventually lay down on the side of the road to sleep for the night. A few hours later you awaken to the morning light, and continue onwards, north to Sodran. + + +You've been there before, almost a lifetime ago. Back in your day the place was like a sapling surrounded by soot; attempting to grow, but suppressed by its surroundings. The metaphorical soot to the city's metaphorical sapling was the evil wizard you faced down. Try as you might, you could never forget the expressions on the faces of the downtrodden. They looked like they had nothing to live for. + + +You suppose you know know how it feels now. + + +By midday, the city is within sight after passing a few dozen villages or so. Great walls surround it, and tall buildings poke out from behind the walls. Stone steps lead up to a massive stone archway, which itself leads into the city proper. There's a statue at the base of the steps, the details of which you can't make out, but it looks like it's in decent condition from this far away. It's a magnificent sight, to be sure. + + +Once you're within a half mile of the city not an hour later, you finally notice something you couldn't spot from further away: a large camp encompasses the city. Strange. A quarter mile away you can make out shambling figures stumbling around the camp. Once you get close, not ten yards away, you can make out exactly what's happening. + + +The shambling figures all look to be malnourished and dressed in glorified rags. The adults sit around the camp looking defeated, a small number praying to whatever God they worship. A few children run around kicking a ball, but their expressions tell you that they've experienced too much. What the hell is going on here? + + +You go and speak to a guard watching them all, and ask him who these people are. His reply is to let out a dry chuckle. "What, haven't been to this city in a while? These are the unfortunate bastards who were denied access to our fair city. Refugees and the like from the war with Kishak. Mostly natives to our kingdom, couple of Kishak bastards here and there." + + +"Is there any reason the Count of this city has it closed off?" you ask. His response is to laugh again. + + +"There's an entry fee, two hundred gold coins. They," he gestures to the camp, "couldn't cover it. Poor bastards, left to rot out here." + + +What the hell? They couldn't pay some fee, so now they're locked from entering the city? At the very least you can pay it, but you suppose the question remains if you can just walk on by these people. +> I can't do that. I need to do something. Get them to rise up. +It pains you to watch these people carry on like this. Just wandering, barely any food, scarce shelter, and no chance of ever entering the city they're so desperate to live in. This Count of Sodran guy. You've never heard of him, considering the last time you were here the title was still "mayor". It doesn't matter who he's supposed to be, because you know that he's not doing this city any good. + +You walk away from the guard and head to the nearest refugee. "Do you have a leader I can speak to?" + +He looks up at you, a dejected expression on his face, and gives a weary sigh. He points to a tent that's larger than the rest. "Hugo, the old man in there, is sort of our leader. He gets us jobs in the area and makes sure everyone is well fed." + +You nod. "Thanks for the info." With those words, you head to the tent, intent on pitching your idea to the leader. Opening the tent's flaps and stepping inside, you see that it's decorated scarcely. There's some small bedding in the corner, next to a chair and a small bookshelf. An old man with weathered features and a bushy beard sits in the chair reading a book. + +You give a cough to break the silence, and he looks up, smiling at you. "Oh, hello there. New to our fair camp?" His voice carries a thick Kishak accent. Guess you know where he's from now. + +"No. I came to speak to you about Sodran, and the Count." + +"What about it, stranger?" + +"Have you ever thought about how many people you have here? It's at least a legion's worth, damn near a thousand from the looks of it. If you banded together... You could take the city." + +Hugo looks a bit shocked by your proposal, but not disapproving of the idea. "... Maybe we could, stranger. But what business do you have with us, or Sodran, or the Count?" + +"None at all. I'm just a traveler with too much time on his hands." + +Hugo mulls your words over. He stares at you, as if trying to assess your reasons for approaching him with this proposition. Finally, he shrugs, and nods at you. "Very well then. I'll organize the refugees... Did you come here just to plant the idea in my head, or do you want to participate in this... Uprising?" +> I've come this far, might as well follow through. I'll join their uprising. +You nod your head. "Yeah. I'll join you in your uprising." + +Hugo smiles, and nods. "Very well. You seem like you have the most combat experience out of anyone in this camp, anyhow! I was simply a baker back home, har har!" + +"Is there anyone here who can fight?" + +"A decent chunk, I'd say. Mostly defending themselves from any bandits back in their homes. I can take you to Rupert, he was a mercenary years ago. He retired four years back, but he may be willing to help you organize this." + +You nod. "I'll speak to him. What does he look like?" + +"He's a bit younger than me. He has a bushy mustache, bright red hair, green eyes. You'll know him when you see him, he always has a big smile on his face. In the meantime, I'll gather the others." + +Wait. A Rupert with red hair and green eyes? Oh God, if it is him... Grunting in acknowledgement, you go on your way to find Rupert. It doesn't take you long, as you find him swinging his sword at a tree in the center of the camp. Oh great, it probably is him. Approaching him, you speak, "Keeping your swordsmanship sharp?" + +He nods, not looking away from his practice. When he speaks, it's in a voice you know: "Aye, I were a merc many years back! Ran me own company I did, paid well. I retired 'cause me wife wanted me to, but I still know 'ow to swing a sword 'round." + +Great. It really is him."... Rupert. It's me, Kit." + +He turns, and looks at you. His jaw drops along with his sword. Then, he's smiling widely. You're caught off guard by his speed as he rushes over to give you a hug. "Kit, ol' buddy ol' pal! It's been too damn long ya jammy bastard!" + +"Yeah, Rupert. Too long. How've you been doing?" + +"Pretty damn well I'd say, 'side from the whole losin' my home thing! Dear God lad, it's been ages. Ye've gotten so damn old! Even I look better than ya, haha!" + +Despite yourself, you crack a smirk. "Really? At least I'm not soft in the middle like you, you old son of a bitch." + +He chuckles. "Alright, maybe I've gotten a wee bit out of shape in the last coupla years. Could still kick yer ass, I bet! Oh, they always left that outta the stories, didn't they? How I whooped yer ass the first time we met! Think I could beat ya if we did round two?" + +This makes you roll your eyes. "Oh, yeah, you soundly defeated me with your brave tactic of setting a trap. Piss off." You pause, remembering why you came here. "... Well, I'd love to chat about old times for longer, but I came here for a reason. I convinced the leader, Hugo, to start an uprising so you can get access into the city." + +Rupert runs a hand along his chin. "Did ya now? I've been thinkin' 'bout it myself to be honest with ya. So, I'm down. It'll be just like old times, eh Kit?" + +"Just like old times." + +"So, when do we start and whadda we need to do?" + +"Whenever we're ready. Right now, I think we need to stock up on weapons. You know anybody who has some?" + +"Aye, that I do. There's a few people 'round here who have personal weapons, mostly shortswords and daggers. A few folks have stockpiles of them too, we could convince them to lend 'em out to the folks who don't have none." + +You nod. "Good. You organize this, they'll trust someone they know more." Rupert nods at your words, then continues on to the people who have weapons. In the meantime, you head back to Hugo's tent. When you arrive, you see that he's outside, addressing a crowd of refugees. + +"People of this fair camp," he speaks in a low voice, enough for people in the immediate vicinity to hear, but not loud enough for it to reach the guards watching the camp from a distance. "It is time for us to finally enter this city... By force." + +A few members of the crowd gasp at this, but are otherwise not opposed by the idea. It makes sense, you suppose; this city has kept them under its boot long enough. Hugo continues, "This brave stranger here has finally given me the courage I need to carry this uprising out. Step forward." He points to you. You step up. "You have spoken to Rupert, yes?" + +You nod. "Yes. I spoke to Rupert. He's currently gathering people who have stockpiles of weapons so that they may be handed out to all of you who need them." + +Hugo nods. "Very good. And before you begin to wonder, my friends: yes. Some of you may very well die in this uprising. But the important thing is that the other refugees will enter the city in your place." + +The crowd all nods at this; they know not to cause a scene when the guards are near. They then head back to their tents, where they presumably get ready. Rupert comes to meet you and Hugo soon after. + +"I spoke to the people that got weapons," he says. "They're all on board with the plan. This'll go right smooth like if we just keep on keepin' on." + +Hugo nods. "Excellent work, Rupert. What have you to say, stranger?" + +"When do we do this?" + +"Tonight. The guards won't be expecting it then. We'll strike tonight." + +You give a grunt in affirmation, then head off to the edge of the camp to await nightfall. Hours pass, and soon, the sun has gone down and the moon has taken its place in the sky. No lights illuminate the camp; it's as if nothing is there at all. You push through the inky darkness and to Hugo's tent. + +There, he reads by candlelight. You speak up, "Hugo. Is it time?" + +Hugo nods. "I do believe it's time." With that, he closes the book and stands, leaving the tent. One by one, the other refugees emerge from their tents as well. They must be better coordinated than you thought. With everyone gathered, you make sure you have their attention, then address them. + +"We'll head through the front gates. I'll take out any opposition, I'll just need the others to watch my back." They all look apprehensive of the idea, but after a moment they nod. Still, you know well enough that they might bolt at the first sign of trouble. You gather up whoever's fit to fight, giving a grand total of nearly two hundred for the attack. Hugo decides to stay behind to make sure the others are fine. +> Continue +This late at night, there are no guards milling around outside the city. Your band of would-be freedom fighters ascend the stone steps up to the city gates, completely unnoticed. When you reach the gates, you see two guards ahead; one is watching a firefly intently as it floats around his face, while the other has fallen asleep while standing up. + +You unsheathe your sword and rush forward, stabbing the firefly guard through the chest. He lets out a blood-tinged gasp of mingled shock and pain, before slumping over. You pull your sword out of his chest and swing at the sleeping guard, whose head rolls to the ground before he can even wake up. "Open the gates," you order the others, and they move to do so. + +The sound of wood grinding against stone greets your ears as the gates are opened. After a moment, they're open enough for you to slip through. Looking around, you see that only a few people roam the city streets, most of them guards. You turn your head over your shoulder to address the group, "If I look like I'm in trouble, come help. Otherwise, stay back." With those words, you charge at the nearest guard with a swing. + +You cut down a few guards before they even notice you're there. Once they do, however, shouting breaks the silence of the night as they alert each other to your presence. One grabs a whistle and blows it, the sharp sound tearing through the city streets. Whatever civilians are around quickly run away... And you notice a few refugees taking the opportunity to bolt as well. + +Damn those cowards! You should have figured, though: they're just peasants without a lot in life. They're not willing to die for their freedom. Hell, you're not even sure why you're fighting their fight... But you aren't one to quit something when you've started. + +You continue to fight. Of the two hundred refugees that were fit to fight, a grand total of twenty stuck with you, with Rupert among them. The rest fled deeper into the city or back to the camp. It doesn't matter; what does matter right now is getting to the Count's manor and taking it down. + +You continue to fight through the streets for what seems like days, but in truth was only about an hour. You cut down any guards that attacked, and the others watched your flanks and defended you when any got past your defenses. It works well as a system, but all good things must come to an end. One by one, your allies drop to the guards. + +By the time you reach the Count's manor, four of you remain: yourself, Rupert, and two men you learn are named Karl and Frank. You don't bother with subtlety when you reach the metal gate in front of the Count's manor. Raising your blade up high, you slam it down upon the lock keeping it closed once, twice, three times, before it splits wide open and opens the way. + +The moon illuminates the manor, casting a shadow on your quartet. No guards are there to greet you, which is strange. Looking around the courtyard leading into the manor, you notice a collection of barrels. Curious, you approach them, and read the labels on them. + +They read "gunpowder". + +You find yourself grinning. This will help. "You three, grab a barrel and throw it inside." The others quickly move to help you, picking them up and heading to the door. You open it for them, finding it unlocked, and they begin to throw the barrels into the entrance hall. + +Once most of the barrels are inside, you grab the last one and pull the cork off the top. You drain a line of gunpower out of it, leading from the door to where the barrels are placed. Then, you exit the manor and pull out your tinderbox. The flames burst forth, and the trail of gunpowder ignites, moving slowly to the barrels. You take the chance to run in the opposite direction. + +A moment later, there is a loud explosion, and the manor is set ablaze. Still, you keep on guard. There weren't any guards around, which is strange. As you're comtemplating, Rupert, Karl, and Frank are celebrating. "Lighten up, lad! We blew up the Count and his damned manor! The city's free!" + +"Not quite." + +You look up to see a man consumed by flames, floating above you. He begins to drop down, and you instantly roll backwards. The man on fire lands on top of Frank, smashing through his head and completely obliterating it. Karl and Rupert back away in terror. + +"I don't appreciate what you did to my home. Die." He raises a hand, and slings a fireball at Karl. The refugee is consumed by flames, screaming all the while. Desperately, he tries to pat them away, but it does no good. He falls to the ground and rolls around in pain, his screeches of sheer agony lasting until his lungs collapse from the fire. Even then he's still alive, if only for a moment longer. + +The man on fire turns to you. "You. Die." He slings a fireball your way, but you manage to deflect it with the flat side of your sword. The fireball flies right back at him, and he recoils away from it for only a moment. Still, he laughs. "You think you can kill me with fire? Really?" + +He snaps his fingers and the fire subsides. He's naked, athletically built with fair skin. His black hair is messy. Another snap, and now he's fully clothed with hair neatly combed. "Tell me this, peasants. Why did you feel the need to burn down my manor?" + +This is the Count. + +"Yer a bastard that's corruptin' this fair city with yer stench, that's why!" Rupert answers for you, which makes the Count laugh heartily. + +"My, you're something. An old drunk picking a fight he can't possibly win. Amusing." Then, the Count sighs. "Oh well, I'm bored of you." A snap of his fingers, and then Rupert is sent flying into a nearby wall. You shout his name, but the Count turns on you. "... Hm. You look familiar." + +"I'm the man who saved this city, you son of a bitch! And I'm gonna do it again!" you shout, readying your sword. + +The Count laughs. "Hoho, Sir Kit! I should have known! Come to slay the big bad Count, have we?" + +"You're not human! You're a... A monster!" + +"Demon, to be specific." He gives you a smug smile. + +This son of a bitch, correcting you like you're a simple-minded peasant. You find yourself grinding your teeth together. Unconsciously, your grip on your sword tightens. As you're doing this, your eyes catch Rupert's as he picks himself up. He's still alive, if only barely. You can see the question in his eyes... + +He's asking you if you want him to help you out. +> No. Rupert might die if he attacks. I'll do this myself. +Slowly, you shake your head. Rupert looks slightly worried, but nods. That settled, you turn your attention back to the Count. He gives a tsk, shaking his head and chuckling slightly. "Colluding with your half dead pal? I'm not stupid or blind, you know." + +Shit. Should have figured. Now you're glad you didn't bring Rupert into this. So, rather than try and fuck around any longer than you already have, you jump right into the fray. Swinging your sword at the demonic Count, you're not surprised when he catches the blade with his hands. You expected him to go for some blatant display of power like that. He just made a mistake. + +You grit your teeth harder than you already were as you twist the blade. The Count is taken off guard by this and you manage to flip him onto his back. Yanking the sword from his grip, you raise it up high and swing down, cutting his head in half at the nose. + +You let out of a sigh, thinking it's over, when you hear clapping behind you. "Well done, Kit! Well done!" You turn your head to see who's saying that... + +It's the Count. Alive and unharmed. If you were any younger, you'd let out a gasp of shock and shout something like "how are you still alive?!" But you're not as stupid as you were. Instead, you release a weary sigh. "Let me guess: demonic powers?" + +"You bet. No mortal can kill me." + +You run forward and swing again. The Count blocks, but you continue to attack, until eventually you cleave him in half. He rises again. "Give up, Kit." + +Your response comes in the form of a sword through his head. + +The two of you dance like that for a while. Occasionally, he attacks, and it takes all you have to defend yourself. Even when he grazes you it's enough to nearly take you out of the fight. The only thing carrying you right now is adrenaline, passion, and pure unbridled hatred for this "man" and his kind. + +You're not sure how long the fight lasts. You just know that right now you're keeping yourself held up by your sword. Your body is bloodied and bruised, and you're not sure how long you can keep going... That is, until you notice a strange black orb poking out of the Count's chest. + +His heart. + +He doesn't notice, because he simply awaits your next attack. "Looks like your wounds are catching up to you, human. Next time you strike, I'll bring you down." + +You're going to have to make this one count. + +Picking up your sword, you make as if you're going to swing, and run at the Count. He's already moving to intercept your swing, when you quickly shift and run your sword through his heart. A look of shock makes its way onto his face, and he swings a clawed hand at your face. It claws off a good chunk of your head, including your left eye, but you don't give a damn. You've got him now. + +You pull the blade out once he hits the ground. He's not getting up from that. You almost feel like you're about to fall over and die yourself, but you raise your blade up high for the final attack. He raises his hand feebly. "W-wait, d-don't..." + +You swing. + +Then, you collapse. + +Rupert rushes over to you. His face is a mask of horror and sadness. "Kit... Oh God, lad. What the Hell were you thinkin'?" + +"Just... Being a hero... One last... Time." + +"I... I want to say help is coming, Kit. But Lilith ain't 'round no more." + +Despite yourself, you let out a chuckle. It causes you more pain, and your words come out weaker. "Don't... Worry... Gonna be seeing her... And Henry... And Thomas... And... Grace... Soon." + +Tears are streaming down Rupert's face. "You were always such a damned fool, lad." + +"Heh... May... be..." + +You let out your last breath. + +In the coming days the guards are wiped out by the refugees. You become a martyr for their cause, drawing support from the townsfolk who worshiped you like one of the Gods. Soon, the rebellion takes over Sodran, allowing any and all who need shelter into the city. + +This proves to be its downfall in the coming years. + +The city can't handle the massive influx of people. Overpopulation becomes an issue. The homeless rate spikes, as there aren't enough jobs to go around. As such, crime rises as well, and soon the majority of the city is comprised of criminals. + +Sodran's reputation shifts from a glorious beacon of light to a city of thieves. No one wants to go there anymore, for fear of their coin purse and their life. The merchant and trade caravans passing through the city disappear one by one until none are left, and the city's income goes with it. + +With the rise of overpopulation, homelessness, and crime, it's no surprise that the rate of diseases the citizens catch increases as well. Eventually, damn near the whole city is infected with a dangerous plague for which there is no cure. The city is quarantined off by the King. When the last citizen dies, Sodran is razed, and no trace of its existence is left but rumors and closely kept records. + +This matters not to a dead hero such as yourself. In death, you find peace. In death, you see them again. In death, you are happy. + +Despite what most religions on your world would like people to believe, there are no pearly gates or fluffy clouds in the afterlife. There is no fire and brimstone. There's not even a blank void of nothingness. Instead, there is bliss, with fallen friends gathering around you to celebrate your reunion with them. + +It's the ending that a hero deserves. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This late at night, there are no guards milling around outside the city. Your band of would-be freedom fighters ascend the stone steps up to the city gates, completely unnoticed. When you reach the gates, you see two guards ahead; one is watching a firefly intently as it floats around his face, while the other has fallen asleep while standing up. + +You unsheathe your sword and rush forward, stabbing the firefly guard through the chest. He lets out a blood-tinged gasp of mingled shock and pain, before slumping over. You pull your sword out of his chest and swing at the sleeping guard, whose head rolls to the ground before he can even wake up. "Open the gates," you order the others, and they move to do so. + +The sound of wood grinding against stone greets your ears as the gates are opened. After a moment, they're open enough for you to slip through. Looking around, you see that only a few people roam the city streets, most of them guards. You turn your head over your shoulder to address the group, "If I look like I'm in trouble, come help. Otherwise, stay back." With those words, you charge at the nearest guard with a swing. + +You cut down a few guards before they even notice you're there. Once they do, however, shouting breaks the silence of the night as they alert each other to your presence. One grabs a whistle and blows it, the sharp sound tearing through the city streets. Whatever civilians are around quickly run away... And you notice a few refugees taking the opportunity to bolt as well. + +Damn those cowards! You should have figured, though: they're just peasants without a lot in life. They're not willing to die for their freedom. Hell, you're not even sure why you're fighting their fight... But you aren't one to quit something when you've started. + +You continue to fight. Of the two hundred refugees that were fit to fight, a grand total of twenty stuck with you, with Rupert among them. The rest fled deeper into the city or back to the camp. It doesn't matter; what does matter right now is getting to the Count's manor and taking it down. + +You continue to fight through the streets for what seems like days, but in truth was only about an hour. You cut down any guards that attacked, and the others watched your flanks and defended you when any got past your defenses. It works well as a system, but all good things must come to an end. One by one, your allies drop to the guards. + +By the time you reach the Count's manor, four of you remain: yourself, Rupert, and two men you learn are named Karl and Frank. You don't bother with subtlety when you reach the metal gate in front of the Count's manor. Raising your blade up high, you slam it down upon the lock keeping it closed once, twice, three times, before it splits wide open and opens the way. + +The moon illuminates the manor, casting a shadow on your quartet. No guards are there to greet you, which is strange. Looking around the courtyard leading into the manor, you notice a collection of barrels. Curious, you approach them, and read the labels on them. + +They read "gunpowder". + +You find yourself grinning. This will help. "You three, grab a barrel and throw it inside." The others quickly move to help you, picking them up and heading to the door. You open it for them, finding it unlocked, and they begin to throw the barrels into the entrance hall. + +Once most of the barrels are inside, you grab the last one and pull the cork off the top. You drain a line of gunpower out of it, leading from the door to where the barrels are placed. Then, you exit the manor and pull out your tinderbox. The flames burst forth, and the trail of gunpowder ignites, moving slowly to the barrels. You take the chance to run in the opposite direction. + +A moment later, there is a loud explosion, and the manor is set ablaze. Still, you keep on guard. There weren't any guards around, which is strange. As you're comtemplating, Rupert, Karl, and Frank are celebrating. "Lighten up, lad! We blew up the Count and his damned manor! The city's free!" + +"Not quite." + +You look up to see a man consumed by flames, floating above you. He begins to drop down, and you instantly roll backwards. The man on fire lands on top of Frank, smashing through his head and completely obliterating it. Karl and Rupert back away in terror. + +"I don't appreciate what you did to my home. Die." He raises a hand, and slings a fireball at Karl. The refugee is consumed by flames, screaming all the while. Desperately, he tries to pat them away, but it does no good. He falls to the ground and rolls around in pain, his screeches of sheer agony lasting until his lungs collapse from the fire. Even then he's still alive, if only for a moment longer. + +The man on fire turns to you. "You. Die." He slings a fireball your way, but you manage to deflect it with the flat side of your sword. The fireball flies right back at him, and he recoils away from it for only a moment. Still, he laughs. "You think you can kill me with fire? Really?" + +He snaps his fingers and the fire subsides. He's naked, athletically built with fair skin. His black hair is messy. Another snap, and now he's fully clothed with hair neatly combed. "Tell me this, peasants. Why did you feel the need to burn down my manor?" + +This is the Count. + +"Yer a bastard that's corruptin' this fair city with yer stench, that's why!" Rupert answers for you, which makes the Count laugh heartily. + +"My, you're something. An old drunk picking a fight he can't possibly win. Amusing." Then, the Count sighs. "Oh well, I'm bored of you." A snap of his fingers, and then Rupert is sent flying into a nearby wall. You shout his name, but the Count turns on you. "... Hm. You look familiar." + +"I'm the man who saved this city, you son of a bitch! And I'm gonna do it again!" you shout, readying your sword. + +The Count laughs. "Hoho, Sir Kit! I should have known! Come to slay the big bad Count, have we?" + +"You're not human! You're a... A monster!" + +"Demon, to be specific." He gives you a smug smile. + +This son of a bitch, correcting you like you're a simple-minded peasant. You find yourself grinding your teeth together. Unconsciously, your grip on your sword tightens. As you're doing this, your eyes catch Rupert's as he picks himself up. He's still alive, if only barely. You can see the question in his eyes... + +He's asking you if you want him to help you out. +> Yes. I need all the help I can get. +You nod your head, indicating you'd appreciate his help. Rupert gulps slightly, indicating his hesitation, but nods back to you. Slowly, he gets up, approaching the Count with shortsword in hand. You keep the Count busy by attacking him ruthlessly, waiting for Rupert to attack. + +After several grueling moments, Rupert reaches the count, aiming his sword for a backstab... + +... But the Count turns around and blows Rupert away with a blast of telekinetic force! Your jaw drops at the sight as Rupert hits the wall hard, blood spurting out of his head. "RUPERT!" you call out. The Count turns back to you. His expression is smug. + +A blood-curdling scream of rage flies out of your mouth as you swing relentlessly at the Count. You continue to wail on him, and despite his best efforts, he can't manage to make an attack against you. The only thing keeping him alive is his demonic nature. Any other man would have fallen to this onslaught by now. + +You must've been hacking at him for about half an hour when you notice something peeking out of his chest. It's a black orb. His heart. + +His heart is exposed. Maybe that's what you need to destroy to kill this monster. So, you continue to attack as you've been doing, and the Count continues trying to defend. Finally, you rear back, and stab his heart with a roar of anger. + +The rotting organ explodes in a mess of black ooze when your sword pierces it. Falling to the ground, the Count stares at you in disbelief. Despite your furious attacks that he couldn't defend himself from, he must have figured you'd never be able to kill him. + +"Wai-" You don't let him speak, instead slicing his head in half. + +With that done, you rush over to Rupert. You expected him to have held out somehow. You could have saved him, or at the very least exchanged some parting words. Instead, you find that he's dead, and probably was not long after he hit that wall. His eyes are widen open. You reach down and close them for him. + +You conquered the city. You don't care enough to inform the cowards that sent you on this mission. So, instead, you leave, and never return. + +A week after your killing of the Count, you hear news from Sodran while drinking at a pub in a village with no name. The refugees rose up and wiped out the rest of the guards, declaring that the gates to the city were open... However, those who lived within the city were having none of it. + +The refugees attempted to claim that you helped them to bolster support. After all, the townsfolk adored you for saving the city in the past. And while you did indeed help them, you didn't stay behind to prove it, and as such the townsfolk had no reason to believe the refugees. The refugees were driven out of the city or killed, and the people of Sodran elected a new count, as the former one had no heirs. + +Needless to say, the uprising's victory was rendered moot not long after they took the city. A dark chuckle escapes your lips. Well, can't say you didn't try. You finish your drink, pay the barkeep, then leave the bar. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It pains you to watch these people carry on like this. Just wandering, barely any food, scarce shelter, and no chance of ever entering the city they're so desperate to live in. This Count of Sodran guy. You've never heard of him, considering the last time you were here the title was still "mayor". It doesn't matter who he's supposed to be, because you know that he's not doing this city any good. + +You walk away from the guard and head to the nearest refugee. "Do you have a leader I can speak to?" + +He looks up at you, a dejected expression on his face, and gives a weary sigh. He points to a tent that's larger than the rest. "Hugo, the old man in there, is sort of our leader. He gets us jobs in the area and makes sure everyone is well fed." + +You nod. "Thanks for the info." With those words, you head to the tent, intent on pitching your idea to the leader. Opening the tent's flaps and stepping inside, you see that it's decorated scarcely. There's some small bedding in the corner, next to a chair and a small bookshelf. An old man with weathered features and a bushy beard sits in the chair reading a book. + +You give a cough to break the silence, and he looks up, smiling at you. "Oh, hello there. New to our fair camp?" His voice carries a thick Kishak accent. Guess you know where he's from now. + +"No. I came to speak to you about Sodran, and the Count." + +"What about it, stranger?" + +"Have you ever thought about how many people you have here? It's at least a legion's worth, damn near a thousand from the looks of it. If you banded together... You could take the city." + +Hugo looks a bit shocked by your proposal, but not disapproving of the idea. "... Maybe we could, stranger. But what business do you have with us, or Sodran, or the Count?" + +"None at all. I'm just a traveler with too much time on his hands." + +Hugo mulls your words over. He stares at you, as if trying to assess your reasons for approaching him with this proposition. Finally, he shrugs, and nods at you. "Very well then. I'll organize the refugees... Did you come here just to plant the idea in my head, or do you want to participate in this... Uprising?" +> No, I don't think I will. The idea was to give them the push they needed, not participate. +You shake your head. "All I wished to do was push you in the direction of uprising. Now that you're planning on it, my work here is done." Without another word, you exit the tent, leaving Hugo slightly baffled by your bluntness. Taking a look around the camp one last time, you depart, heading off down the road. + +A few weeks later you're drinking at a pub in a town with no name. A man rushes in, and brings you all news of an attempted uprising in Sodran. It fell apart rapidly due to a lack of discipline within the troops; for every soldier they killed, they lost ten of their own. What should have reached the Count's manor instead ended two blocks from the city's entrance. + +There were no surviving refugees. + +The news makes you shrug. No skin off your back. It was their own faults for rushing in without a plan. You finish your drink and order another. When the second one's done, you pay the barkeep, and head out the door. Tomorrow you should be nearing the Kishak border. It should be nice this time of year. + +You walk off into the sunset. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You pass the inn by, instead opting to continue on into the night on the road. Carrying onward for miles, you eventually lay down on the side of the road to sleep for the night. A few hours later you awaken to the morning light, and continue onwards, north to Sodran. + + +You've been there before, almost a lifetime ago. Back in your day the place was like a sapling surrounded by soot; attempting to grow, but suppressed by its surroundings. The metaphorical soot to the city's metaphorical sapling was the evil wizard you faced down. Try as you might, you could never forget the expressions on the faces of the downtrodden. They looked like they had nothing to live for. + + +You suppose you know know how it feels now. + + +By midday, the city is within sight after passing a few dozen villages or so. Great walls surround it, and tall buildings poke out from behind the walls. Stone steps lead up to a massive stone archway, which itself leads into the city proper. There's a statue at the base of the steps, the details of which you can't make out, but it looks like it's in decent condition from this far away. It's a magnificent sight, to be sure. + + +Once you're within a half mile of the city not an hour later, you finally notice something you couldn't spot from further away: a large camp encompasses the city. Strange. A quarter mile away you can make out shambling figures stumbling around the camp. Once you get close, not ten yards away, you can make out exactly what's happening. + + +The shambling figures all look to be malnourished and dressed in glorified rags. The adults sit around the camp looking defeated, a small number praying to whatever God they worship. A few children run around kicking a ball, but their expressions tell you that they've experienced too much. What the hell is going on here? + + +You go and speak to a guard watching them all, and ask him who these people are. His reply is to let out a dry chuckle. "What, haven't been to this city in a while? These are the unfortunate bastards who were denied access to our fair city. Refugees and the like from the war with Kishak. Mostly natives to our kingdom, couple of Kishak bastards here and there." + + +"Is there any reason the Count of this city has it closed off?" you ask. His response is to laugh again. + + +"There's an entry fee, two hundred gold coins. They," he gestures to the camp, "couldn't cover it. Poor bastards, left to rot out here." + + +What the hell? They couldn't pay some fee, so now they're locked from entering the city? At the very least you can pay it, but you suppose the question remains if you can just walk on by these people. +> Yeah I can. I'll continue onwards. +You nod to the guard, gritting your teeth slightly. "Good thing I have enough gold then." He lets out another bark of laughter, then waves you on, not bothering to reply. Likewise, you continue on without another word, closer to the stone steps of the city. + +Approaching the stone steps, you can finally make out the statue you had seen earlier. To your surprise, the statue depicts you. While you never wore the shining armor they present you in, and the sword is far to small to be your own, the facial features are too similar for it to be anyone else. Looking it over, you see that it's covered in bird dung, and there are many chips and cracks in the marble. + +You clutch your hand tightly. Of course, the statue couldn't have depicted anyone else. Couldn't have been the king, couldn't have been the count, couldn't have even been some sort of God. It had to be you. Taking in a breath and releasing the death grip you have on your palm, you push on past the statue and up to the steps. A guard stands there gripping a spear. Behind him is a large oak door, leading into the city proper. + +He blinks at you and lets out a mix between a yawn and a sigh, before speaking, "Two hundred gold for entrance into the city, sir." + +You pull out your bag and rifle through it, before handing him four pieces of gold, each worth fifty. He counts them out, even chews on one to ensure its authenticity, before nodding. "Very good, sir. Welcome to Sodran." He pushes the doors open, and lets you through. + +Stepping into the city, you find that it's grown substantially since your last visit to it. Large buildings rise high into the sky, faded signs declaring what they're all for. People bustle through the streets, going about their own business, while merchants hawk their wares. Guards stand at every corner, keeping a watchful eye on the citizens. Shady looking people hang around alleyway entrances; unconsciously, you keep a tighter grip on your coin purse. + +So much to do, so little time. But I suppose the question I should be asking is if you wish to do something about the state of the city, or if you're just here to explore. +> I'm heading right for the Count's manor. I'm going to do something for those refugees. +You might not have tried getting the refugees to rise up, but you can fight this battle without having to put innocent lives at risk. This Count of Sodran guy. You've never heard of him, considering the last time you were here the title was still "mayor". It doesn't matter who he's supposed to be, because you know that he's not doing this city any good. + +Dipping through the crowds of people, you climb a set of stone stairs up to what appears to be a park overlooking the entire city. Hugging the north wall in the distance is a manor, taking up damn near an entire block and looming over the city streets. That's got to be the Count's manor. Nodding to yourself, you begin to make your way to it. + +Along the way, you spy a few guards cornering a man in butcher's clothes. The butcher is an older man, with thinning hair and a physique reminiscent of a skeleton. Sweat drips down his brow, and he gives the guards an uneasy look. "I-I swear, I'll pay the Count! I just need another week! Please, this shop's all I got left!" + +One of the guards gives him a nasty grin. "Well ya shoulda thought 'bout that 'fore ya gotta loan. The Count don't take too kindly to old weasels who don't cough up what they owe." He brings his fist up to the butcher's gut, causing the older man to fall to his knees. Then, the guard backhands him to the floor. "Ya got till the end of the day to get that money." With those words, the guards walk away. + +It takes all your willpower to not fly into a frenzy and attack them. Instead, you wait until they've moved on, then approach the butcher who's regaining his footing after the attack. "How much?" you ask. + +"What?" the butcher replies, looking at you suspiciously. + +"How much do you owe?" + +"Five hundred. I needed a loan of one hundred to pay for my daughter's medicine... But she died even with it." The butcher pauses to wipe away a tear threatening to escape his eye. "... I try to pay the Count back, but he keeps raising the price, further and further... I can't keep up. At this rate, I'll lose my business." + +"Sorry to hear about that." You pull out your coin purse, then throw him a handful of gold coins worth one hundred gold each. "Take these. Gather everyone you care about and leave. You don't want to be around for what I'm going to do." + +The butcher looks frightened by that, but nods, accepting the money gladly and quickly rushing off. You watch him go, then release a sigh through gritted teeth. When you came here, you were hoping to be able to resolve this issue using diplomacy. It was never your strong suit, but your fame, much as you hate it, would be useful in this situation. + +Now, though? You're going to kill this Count, or die trying. + +It's an hour and several similar incidents later that you finally arive at the gates of the Count's manor. A few guards mill about the front, and you draw their attention by pounding against the steel gate. One of them approaches, staring at you with a nasty grin. It's the one from earlier, with the butcher. "Well? Whaddya want?" he asks. + +"I'm here to see the Count," you reply. + +"Really? The Count don't let no middle-aged bums in to see 'im. Get lost!" He spits in your face. + +You keep your rage contained, gritting your teeth and giving him a toothy smile. His grin falters. "Tell him that it's Lord Kit of Droburg. You know. The guy on that statue outside." + +He gives a nervous chuckle. "O-oh, you're Lord Kit, eh? How do I know you're telling the truth?" + +"Because if you don't let me in, I'll cleave you in half." + +Between your expression, the threat, and the fact that you haven't even bothered to wipe off the saliva that's starting to drip down your cheek, the guard is thoroughly terrified. "R-right, apologies Lord Kit, I'll let you in..." He opens the gate slowly. The creak of metal against stone splits through your ears. Your hand itches, begging for you to unsheathe your sword. + +You do. + +You reach up and grab your blade off your back as soon as the gate is open wide enough for you to walk through. With a swing, you slice through the guard's waist, the force sending his torso flying high into the air as he lets out an ungodly scream. His torso meets the floor with a meaty thud. He's still alive for only a few moments, gasping for air as blood leaks out of his mouth. Then, he lets out his last breath. + +The other guards are quick to notice their fallen comrade. None of them carry ranged weaponry, just swords, axes, and batons. They all begin to run at you, weapons raised. Judging by your quick assessment of the odds, it's fourteen to one. Despite yourself, you can feel the sadistic grin on your face widen. + +This will be too easy. + +A primal yell bursts out of your throat, and you rush forward to meet the guards head on. It's easy enough to deflect a few blows, and with each swing you bring at least two men out of the fight. It doesn't last long, and within minutes, the manor's courtyard is covered in blood, guts, and corpses. + +You enter the manor, sparing but a glance to the carnage you left behind. +> Continue +You fight your way through the manor to the great hall, where you expect the Count will be. When you reach it, however, you find it empty. The Count must be elsewhere. So, you continue to hack and slash your way through, checking every room in an attempt to find the bastard. + +It's only after a dozen men have died and you yourself have suffered several wounds that you find him. He's sitting calmly in his study, reading a book, perhaps unaware of the fighting that had been going on outside. You readjust your grip on your sword, then bark, "Hey!" + +He looks up, sighs, then slips a ribbon into the book on the page he was on. Shutting it and placing it down on a table, the Count stands, and gives you a small smile. "My apologies. I got so absorbed with my reading, I must not have heard you." He stands a good few inches below you, dressed in fine silk clothing with various pieces of jewelry adorning his body. Truly, he's a pompous asshole. + +You stare at him in disbelief. "Deaf and corrupt, huh?" + +He frowns. "Whatever do you mean?" + +You grit your teeth so hard you feel like they might crack. "You've been running this city into the ground long enough. I didn't save this Goddamn world so its rulers could become just as bad as the man I saved it from." You raise your sword, point it at him. "I'm going to cut you down." + +The Count looks confused for a moment, and he studies your face. Then, it clicks, and he sighs. "Lord Kit, is it? I see. So you've finally decided to come out of retirement. I knew this day would come." He turns his back on you and approaches his bookshelf. Picking one out, he turns it over in his hands, then shows it to you. The cover is faded, but the words clear as day. + +It reads "Sir Kit Against Alistair". + +"This was one of my favorite books, y'know. You seemed so pure, so flawless." He flips through it a bit. "But it's clear that reality is far from the truth. How much blood have you shed today?" + +"I cut down dozens of your guards to reach you." + +"Ah. It would seem you live up to the tales in that regard then." He turns the book over more, before placing it back. "Let's test another aspect of those tales. It was said that Alistair tried to tempt you with unlimited power, but you turned it down. Was that true?" + +You snort. "Of course not. As soon as Grace and I entered that throne room of his, we were fighting for our lives. No time for words." + +"So it would seem. But if he did offer you that power, would you have accepted?" + +You're not sure how to respond. + +The Count smiles. "I'll make you an offer. I'm very talented in... Certain aspects of magic. You miss your friends, no?" He snaps his fingers, and a portal is opened to you. What's inside you can hardly believe. + +Your friends. All of them. Henry, strumming his lute. Thomas, sharpening his daggers. Lilith, reading holy scriptures... And Grace, sitting there and playing with fire as she always did. + +You reach out to them, let out a yell of pure shock and happiness despite yourself. A mixture of awe and sheer joy making its way onto your face. It's them! They're alive! By the Gods, they're alive, like they should be! + +Then, the portal closes. You shift back towards the Count, having forgotten he was even there. He gives you an enigmatic smile. "It seems that seeing your companions again got a reaction. I can take you to them again. You can relive your quest, make things right." + +Your voice is shaky as you reply, "You're... You're not planning anything? I can fix things... Right?" + +"That you can. But only if you spare me." +> I accept in a heartbeat. I need to bring them back! +In an instant you reply, "Yes! Yes! For the love of the Gods, let me make things right! Please!" + +His smile widens. "I was hoping you'd say that." The portal is summoned again... Only this time, your friends on the other side notice it, too. They approach it, staring in awe. + +"What in the world...?" Henry asks, staring through. He spots you, and points. "Woah, guys, doesn't that look like Kit?" + +Thomas lets out a derisive snort. "Can't be. Too old. Then again, we just saw a crazy ass portal open up before our eyes, so it could be." + +Lilith places a hand on her heart and takes in a few deep breaths. Then, she speaks, "I think... This might be a portal to the future. I wonder...?" + +Grace is staring at you. Those big, brown eyes staring into your own grey ones. Searching for something. Whatever it is, it seems she's found it. + +She reaches for you. You approach her, taking her hand. Her other hand reaches up to touch your face. + +"You look tired, Kit," she says, and you let out a laugh, because you know it's true. + +"I sure as shit am." + +The portal closes behind you as you step through it fully. + +Then, everything is fire. + +One by one they fade away. Your eyes widen in shock. What the hell? You look down, and find that your clothes are igniting, your flesh is slowly peeling and melting off the skin. + +You do the logical thing and scream in sheer agony. + +You scream until all the air has left your lungs, and even then, you're trying to with all your might. It is only after your lungs and larynx have been fried to a crisp that you can't even attempt to scream. There is only fire, faint voices, and silhouettes you can't even see. + +There's laughter in the distance. Then, a booming voice all around you. + +"Welcome to Hell, hero." + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You fight your way through the manor to the great hall, where you expect the Count will be. When you reach it, however, you find it empty. The Count must be elsewhere. So, you continue to hack and slash your way through, checking every room in an attempt to find the bastard. + +It's only after a dozen men have died and you yourself have suffered several wounds that you find him. He's sitting calmly in his study, reading a book, perhaps unaware of the fighting that had been going on outside. You readjust your grip on your sword, then bark, "Hey!" + +He looks up, sighs, then slips a ribbon into the book on the page he was on. Shutting it and placing it down on a table, the Count stands, and gives you a small smile. "My apologies. I got so absorbed with my reading, I must not have heard you." He stands a good few inches below you, dressed in fine silk clothing with various pieces of jewelry adorning his body. Truly, he's a pompous asshole. + +You stare at him in disbelief. "Deaf and corrupt, huh?" + +He frowns. "Whatever do you mean?" + +You grit your teeth so hard you feel like they might crack. "You've been running this city into the ground long enough. I didn't save this Goddamn world so its rulers could become just as bad as the man I saved it from." You raise your sword, point it at him. "I'm going to cut you down." + +The Count looks confused for a moment, and he studies your face. Then, it clicks, and he sighs. "Lord Kit, is it? I see. So you've finally decided to come out of retirement. I knew this day would come." He turns his back on you and approaches his bookshelf. Picking one out, he turns it over in his hands, then shows it to you. The cover is faded, but the words clear as day. + +It reads "Sir Kit Against Alistair". + +"This was one of my favorite books, y'know. You seemed so pure, so flawless." He flips through it a bit. "But it's clear that reality is far from the truth. How much blood have you shed today?" + +"I cut down dozens of your guards to reach you." + +"Ah. It would seem you live up to the tales in that regard then." He turns the book over more, before placing it back. "Let's test another aspect of those tales. It was said that Alistair tried to tempt you with unlimited power, but you turned it down. Was that true?" + +You snort. "Of course not. As soon as Grace and I entered that throne room of his, we were fighting for our lives. No time for words." + +"So it would seem. But if he did offer you that power, would you have accepted?" + +You're not sure how to respond. + +The Count smiles. "I'll make you an offer. I'm very talented in... Certain aspects of magic. You miss your friends, no?" He snaps his fingers, and a portal is opened to you. What's inside you can hardly believe. + +Your friends. All of them. Henry, strumming his lute. Thomas, sharpening his daggers. Lilith, reading holy scriptures... And Grace, sitting there and playing with fire as she always did. + +You reach out to them, let out a yell of pure shock and happiness despite yourself. A mixture of awe and sheer joy making its way onto your face. It's them! They're alive! By the Gods, they're alive, like they should be! + +Then, the portal closes. You shift back towards the Count, having forgotten he was even there. He gives you an enigmatic smile. "It seems that seeing your companions again got a reaction. I can take you to them again. You can relive your quest, make things right." + +Your voice is shaky as you reply, "You're... You're not planning anything? I can fix things... Right?" + +"That you can. But only if you spare me." +> ... No. The Count is playing a trick on me. I won't let him. +You look longingly at the portal for a moment. It's tempting, oh so tempting, but you know that whatever lies beyond it is a farce. The Count is trying to trick you, offering you something he knows you would want, but you won't take the bait. + +You give your companions a stony face. "You're not real." Then, you turn to the Count, and swing at his head. + +The sword cleaves through his dandy face, completely knocking off the top half. He stands stone still for a minute, as if his corpse is denying his death, before falling to the ground. The portal closes, and with it, the image of your friends. + +Sighing, you place your sword back onto its sheath, and exit the room. + +Before you stands the Count, alive and unharmed. He smiles, but instead of a small and enigmatic smirk, it's a large and goofy grin. + +"Well done. You resisted my temptation. Not many have ever done that." He walks around you, examining you, while you stand there still reeling from the shock. "I wonder. How did you know that wasn't real?" + +After taking a moment, you respond, "You're too much of a bastard to give me what I really wanted. It was a test. One I passed, apparently." + +"Yes, yes it was, Kit. I'm impressed that you sussed that out, really. I suppose you're going to want to kill me again?" + +Without another word you unsheathe your sword again and swing. He's cut in half this time. Then, the Count approaches from behind. "It's pointless, Kit. A mere mortal like you? You can't kill me. Just hear me out." + +"What!?" you bark out. + +The Count laughs. "I have a final offer. No tricks this time. I will give you a way out of this country. A key to a nice home on the Cikoni shoreline. The place will be stocked with food, alcohol, water, whatever you need once a week. Other than that? There will be no one who knows you're there." + +You frown. "And in exchange?" + +"In exchange, you leave Sodran and this Kingdom. Don't even return. You've been enough of a thorn in my side today." + +This offer is much more down to earth and, therefore, more believable. Still, you're wary of any tricks. +> He admitted he was trying to trick me with his earlier offer. No more. I'll strike him down until finally, I kill him for good. +You answer his offer with another swing of your blade. This time, he simply forgoes his reappearance act and rises up again. He uses his hands to put his head back in place, and soon, the flesh has knitted back together and he's back to himself. The Count gives a tsk; lets out a sigh. "I hoped you would accept. I was being earnest, you know. Not many get that honor from me." + +"I don't believe you. You're inhuman... A monster. What the hell are you?" + +His small enigmatic smile returns to his face. "The answer lies in your question. What the hell am I? I come from Hell." + +"... You're a demon." + +He lets out a small chuckle. "Exactly. And I hope you know, you'll never kill me." + +You go back to gritting your teeth in rage. This time, your grind them together so hard a piece of one of your incisors chips off. "I've killed enough men to know that all you need to do..." You swing, chopping his legs off. "IS KEEP SWINGING!" + +You chop his corpse to bits. He comes back from behind you. You keep hacking. He keeps coming back. You keep slashing. He rises again with a laugh. You keep stabbing. He continues to laugh. You keep chopping. He rises without a scratch. Eventually you start bashing him with the flat of your blade. It doesn't keep him down. + +But through the constant fierce attacks, you see that pieces of his chest have fallen off to reveal a glowing black heart. That's your ticket. You move your eyes from it before he notices. Right now, the Count is too busy chuckling madly to do anything. + +"Alright... Alright, I think you've had your fun." He smiles. "This is the end, Kit." + +He snaps his fingers. Flames burst from beneath you. Acting quickly, you roll away from them, and watch as they begin to consume the floor and walls of the hallway you're in. Your cloak is on fire, but you pat it away, and focus on your target. + +He's standing there. Smiling that damned smile. + +You can't wait to wipe that smirk off his face. + +Deep within you, a scream builds up and lets loose. You dash at him, acting as though you're going for a swing. He opens his arms wide, awaiting the fruitless swing... + +Then, you bring the sword back and ram it into his heart. + +Unlike your other attacks, this gets him to look shocked. Black ooze slowly drips from his lips. You kick him away, and he lies on the ground, staring at you in awe. + +"H-how?" he chokes out. + +You don't give him a response. Instead, you pull the lantern oil from your pack and dump it all on him. He whimpers something, probably a plea for his life. You ignore him. Pulling your lantern from your hip, you ignite it... + +Then smash it onto him. + +The flames begin to consume him. He lets out a gurgling screech of agony. You grin at that scream. The rest of the fire rushes to meet him. + +You step past his flailing, burning body, and descend to the entrance of the manor. You see that the fire is spreading quickly, burning through the wooden building rapidly. His screams have long since died down. + +Outside there are guards waiting for you, staring in terror at your blood-stained body. You raise your sword, but instead, they step aside. The expressions on their faces range from terrified to relieved. + +You leave the manor courtyard and disappear into the panicking mass of people in the streets. The guards stare at you in shock. They know that you did it, they know that they should apprehend you, know that you should be hung for your crimes. Still, they don't move out of fear of what you'll do to them. + +You leave the city and never return. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look longingly at the portal for a moment. It's tempting, oh so tempting, but you know that whatever lies beyond it is a farce. The Count is trying to trick you, offering you something he knows you would want, but you won't take the bait. + +You give your companions a stony face. "You're not real." Then, you turn to the Count, and swing at his head. + +The sword cleaves through his dandy face, completely knocking off the top half. He stands stone still for a minute, as if his corpse is denying his death, before falling to the ground. The portal closes, and with it, the image of your friends. + +Sighing, you place your sword back onto its sheath, and exit the room. + +Before you stands the Count, alive and unharmed. He smiles, but instead of a small and enigmatic smirk, it's a large and goofy grin. + +"Well done. You resisted my temptation. Not many have ever done that." He walks around you, examining you, while you stand there still reeling from the shock. "I wonder. How did you know that wasn't real?" + +After taking a moment, you respond, "You're too much of a bastard to give me what I really wanted. It was a test. One I passed, apparently." + +"Yes, yes it was, Kit. I'm impressed that you sussed that out, really. I suppose you're going to want to kill me again?" + +Without another word you unsheathe your sword again and swing. He's cut in half this time. Then, the Count approaches from behind. "It's pointless, Kit. A mere mortal like you? You can't kill me. Just hear me out." + +"What!?" you bark out. + +The Count laughs. "I have a final offer. No tricks this time. I will give you a way out of this country. A key to a nice home on the Cikoni shoreline. The place will be stocked with food, alcohol, water, whatever you need once a week. Other than that? There will be no one who knows you're there." + +You frown. "And in exchange?" + +"In exchange, you leave Sodran and this Kingdom. Don't even return. You've been enough of a thorn in my side today." + +This offer is much more down to earth and, therefore, more believable. Still, you're wary of any tricks. +> I'll take his offer. I just need to get out of this place. +You have nothing to lose but your life. Maybe you do need to leave this place behind. You don't even know why you're doing this. Some futile attempt to be a hero one last time? Or maybe you're just trying to sate your bloodlust. + +Whatever it is, you're tired of fighting. You just want to hide away until the end of your days. Maybe, this offer is what you need. Maybe... + +You nod your head. "I accept your offer. I'll leave, and never return." + +The Count smiles. "Good. Here." He snaps his fingers, and a key materializes from thin air. "The key to the property." Another snap of his fingers, and a portal opens, revealing a pathway to a nice cabin. "Step through. No tricks this time." + +Warily, you accept the key, and step through the portal. Your feet meet sand, and the portal closes behind you as soon as you're all the way through. You stand there a moment, waiting for some sort of attack, or for the scenery to shift into something nightmarish... + +... But it never comes. + +After a while, you head towards the cabin and unlock it. Stepping inside, you see that it's nicely decorated with rustic furniture and paintings adorning the walls. You head into the kitchen and find that it's stocked with bread and wine, and that's all you really need. + +You stay there for days awaiting a painful shift in scenery. Those days turn to weeks, then months, then years, then decades. Nothing happens. Guilt eats you away a bit, you were so close to toppling a tyrannical government, only to back off and accept a bribe. Still, you have to say, it's certainly nice out here. + +Years later you finally pass away quietly in your sleep. It's the best a "hero" like you could hope for. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You nod to the guard, gritting your teeth slightly. "Good thing I have enough gold then." He lets out another bark of laughter, then waves you on, not bothering to reply. Likewise, you continue on without another word, closer to the stone steps of the city. + +Approaching the stone steps, you can finally make out the statue you had seen earlier. To your surprise, the statue depicts you. While you never wore the shining armor they present you in, and the sword is far to small to be your own, the facial features are too similar for it to be anyone else. Looking it over, you see that it's covered in bird dung, and there are many chips and cracks in the marble. + +You clutch your hand tightly. Of course, the statue couldn't have depicted anyone else. Couldn't have been the king, couldn't have been the count, couldn't have even been some sort of God. It had to be you. Taking in a breath and releasing the death grip you have on your palm, you push on past the statue and up to the steps. A guard stands there gripping a spear. Behind him is a large oak door, leading into the city proper. + +He blinks at you and lets out a mix between a yawn and a sigh, before speaking, "Two hundred gold for entrance into the city, sir." + +You pull out your bag and rifle through it, before handing him four pieces of gold, each worth fifty. He counts them out, even chews on one to ensure its authenticity, before nodding. "Very good, sir. Welcome to Sodran." He pushes the doors open, and lets you through. + +Stepping into the city, you find that it's grown substantially since your last visit to it. Large buildings rise high into the sky, faded signs declaring what they're all for. People bustle through the streets, going about their own business, while merchants hawk their wares. Guards stand at every corner, keeping a watchful eye on the citizens. Shady looking people hang around alleyway entrances; unconsciously, you keep a tighter grip on your coin purse. + +So much to do, so little time. But I suppose the question I should be asking is if you wish to do something about the state of the city, or if you're just here to explore. +> The Count doesn't matter. I came here to get away from fighting, not to get involved in more of it. I'll look around. +You decide not to interfere with the Count, instead opting to explore Sodran. It's been a while since you've been here. Briefly, you wonder how much has changed; obviously it's grown a lot, but are any of the old stores still open? You recall a store run by an older man, which sold the best wine you ever tasted. Is he still alive, or did his son take over the store like he wanted? + +Shaking your head, you reason that you'll just have to find out, and begin to explore. Most of your knowledge of the city hasn't aged well, since more buildings have sprung up and some roads you used to know are gone now. Still, your knowledge holds true when you find the old store you knew. The sign reading "Louie's Supplies" is faded and the wooden door is cracked, but it's still the same place. + +Stepping through, you find a bored looking young man standing behind the counter. Looks like you were right about his son taking over. He perks up as soon as he sees you, and smiles. "Ah, a customer! It's been a while since one came through." He studies your face for a moment. "... You look familiar, traveler. Do I know you?" + +You grunt. "Probably not. I have one of those faces." + +He shakes his head. "No, no, I do know you... You helped my father deal with thugs that were harassing him. Twenty years ago..." Then, he gasps, as if finally realizing who you are. "You're Sir Kit the Brave! The man who slayed the vile wizard Alistair!" + +Despite yourself, you face twists into a scowl. "Don't go screaming it from the rooftops." + +His own smile drops. "Oh. Apologies, Sir Kit." + +"Yeah... Look, I did know your father, and I did help him out, but I just came here to see if the place was still around. Glad it is..." You can't help yourself, and soon ask, "Is your father still alive?" + +"No, sir. He died five years ago, when I was nineteen. I inherited the store. Didn't wanna see it run into the ground, but..." + +You're gonna hate yourself for asking this. "But?" + +"... I don't want to run this store. I want to go out into the world, go on an adventure, like you did. When you came and helped my father with those thugs... I knew exactly what I wanted to do. I wanted to be a hero." + +That makes you sigh and pinch the bridge of your nose. Great, now you've got a fanboy telling you he wants to be a "hero", like you were. +> Discourage him. Being a hero's not all it's cracked up to be. +You take a moment to think about what you want to say. After a moment, you begin to speak, "Look, kid. Adventuring isn't all that fun. It can be brutal. I had to cut down my fair share of men when I was younger, and while I can live with it, not everyone can. Just keep the store running, like your father would've wanted." + +The shopkeeper's face falls. He lets out a sigh, but nods. "... Right. I should probably keep doing that. Settle down, find a wife, too. It's just that ever since I took over the store, no one's coming here anymore. I guess I just don't manage it as well." + +"What do you mean? Is there any competition or something?" + +He nods. "There's another store across town that opened before my father died. People went there, but they came here more often, because they trusted my father. Now that I've taken over, people don't shop here as much, if at all in a few cases. They don't know me as well as they did my father, so I might as well be another stranger to them... If people come here these days, it's because they want to save time rather than walk across town." + +You ponder for a moment. Maybe you could get people to start heading to this store more often? You have your fame to use to your advantage, maybe if you recommend it, more people will come. Alternatively, you can just ignore the boy and leave. You've spent too much time in this town already. +> I'll give the store my commendation. That will get people to shop here. +After a moment of mulling it over, wondering if you should bring this much attention to yourself, you come to this decision. "I could help you out. We can use my fame to get people to come here. Everyone loves me, for whatever reason, so if I gave your store my commendation they'd shop here." + +The shopkeeper's face lightens up immediately. "Y-you'd really do that for me? You're serious?" + +"Sure. It'd help you out. I didn't go through those thugs just so this place would have to close down." + +To your surprise, the shopkeeper jumps up and hugs you from across the counter. You awkwardly pat his shoulder, as he blubbers into your own. "Oh by the Gods, thank you, thank you so much! I don't know how I can ever repay you!" + +"You'll repay me enough by keeping this place open... And giving me as much of that Cikoni wine as I can carry." + +The shopkeeper pulls away from you with a small smile. He wipes the tears away from his eyes... Then pauses. Chuckling nervously, he asks, "Uh... Do you mean the Cikonus Vineyard Wine?" + +You frown. "Yeah. What about it?" + +"We uh... Lost contact with the makers of that wine, about ten years back. We don't sell it anymore." + +You grumble. "... Perfect. Just perfect." + +Not long after, you leave the shop and look around outside. You told the kid to stay inside, because you'd get the customers in there. As you search the marketplace, you find that there's a large chunk of townsfolk milling about. Some are in a hurry, others taking their time checking each shop out. + +Raising your voice, you begin to shout, "My name is Sir Kit of Droburg, and Louie's Supplies is my favorite store in Sodran!" This piques the interest of a few shoppers, who turn in your direction. A few look in awe that you're there. Others look disbelieving and carry on. Still, you got some attention. + +A young girl approaches you, looking at you with wide eyes. "Wow! Are you the guy who killed the evil wizard Al-a-star?" She pronounces his name wrong, but you smile at her and nod. + +"Yes, I did! I saved this city, and this store right here, too!" + +More people begin to flock over. A few actually head inside, but most just ask you questions or request some stories of your exploits. You don't want to answer them all, but an idea sparks in your head... "Tell you what, folks! If you buy one item from this store, I'll gladly tell you any story you want!" + +That really gets people heading into the store. + +People start swarming in and out, buying everything from little knick knacks to their groceries. You answer a few lighthearted questions about yourself and what you've been up to, the occasional serious one involving your friends. The former is asked by young kids and the like, while the latter is older folks who know the true details of your journey beyond the bastardized fictionialized versions. + +Eventually, a young boy tugs at your shirt. You look down, and he smiles wide, his two front teeth missing. He shows you a small box of chocolates he just purchased from the store. "Look, I bought some chocolates! Can you tell us about your adventure, Mr. Kit? The whole adventure, not just parts of it!" + +You were waiting for that. To be honest, you're not sure how to respond. It takes you a moment, before you decide that no, you won't tell this story. + +You're about to give the boy your answer, but you stare into his wide and hopeful eyes. Despite yourself, you can't find it in yourself to decline him. "... Alright. But it's a long one. I might not be able to get to all of it." + +"That's fine! I just wanna hear what really happened!" + +A small smile makes its way onto your face despite yourself. Taking in a deep breath, you begin to reminisce about those days. Where to start? You suppose, at the very beginning. + +"Listen closely, because I won't repeat myself. A long time ago, I lived in a village called Droburg. It was there that I lived with my best friends, Henry, Thomas, Lilith, and... Grace. One day, news came through that an evil wizard was attacking the Kingdom! We knew that this was what we had been waiting for. So, the very next day, we set out to slay the vile wizard. And that, is where our story begins..." + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You take a moment to think about what you want to say. After a moment, you begin to speak, "Look, kid. Adventuring isn't all that fun. It can be brutal. I had to cut down my fair share of men when I was younger, and while I can live with it, not everyone can. Just keep the store running, like your father would've wanted." + +The shopkeeper's face falls. He lets out a sigh, but nods. "... Right. I should probably keep doing that. Settle down, find a wife, too. It's just that ever since I took over the store, no one's coming here anymore. I guess I just don't manage it as well." + +"What do you mean? Is there any competition or something?" + +He nods. "There's another store across town that opened before my father died. People went there, but they came here more often, because they trusted my father. Now that I've taken over, people don't shop here as much, if at all in a few cases. They don't know me as well as they did my father, so I might as well be another stranger to them... If people come here these days, it's because they want to save time rather than walk across town." + +You ponder for a moment. Maybe you could get people to start heading to this store more often? You have your fame to use to your advantage, maybe if you recommend it, more people will come. Alternatively, you can just ignore the boy and leave. You've spent too much time in this town already. +> No, I should just leave now. He can figure this out on his own. +With a shrug and a shake of your head, you reply, "Wish I could help you out, son. I really do. But I've got to get moving on. I've stayed in this city too long already." + +He gives you a smile and nods. "Right, right... Sorry that I held you up with all my rambling and complaining. I'll try and sort things out myself. It was nice seeing you again, Sir Kit." + +"Yeah, sure was." You turn around and head out the door. For the rest of the day, you mill about Sodran for a while, visiting other places you and your friends visited. A few of the shops have closed down, some of them are under new management. The remainder that haven't changed as much are surprised and pleased to see you. + +At the end of the day, you head to an inn near the entrance to the city and sleep. When you awake in the morning, you pack up your things and leave the city behind. Weeks pass as you get further and further away from your former home, then reach a port town by the sea. You pick up transit on a supply ship headed to Cikoni. A few months later, you arrive in the country. + +You wander there for a while, unsure what to do. Eventually, you find a small coastal town with few people. There, you take residence in an abandoned shack. To make ends meet, you get a job at a farm, tending to exotic crops you've never seen before. It's strange, but eventually, you think you've got the hang of it. + +It's a good life. All in all, better than anything a guy like you could've hoped for. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide not to interfere with the Count, instead opting to explore Sodran. It's been a while since you've been here. Briefly, you wonder how much has changed; obviously it's grown a lot, but are any of the old stores still open? You recall a store run by an older man, which sold the best wine you ever tasted. Is he still alive, or did his son take over the store like he wanted? + +Shaking your head, you reason that you'll just have to find out, and begin to explore. Most of your knowledge of the city hasn't aged well, since more buildings have sprung up and some roads you used to know are gone now. Still, your knowledge holds true when you find the old store you knew. The sign reading "Louie's Supplies" is faded and the wooden door is cracked, but it's still the same place. + +Stepping through, you find a bored looking young man standing behind the counter. Looks like you were right about his son taking over. He perks up as soon as he sees you, and smiles. "Ah, a customer! It's been a while since one came through." He studies your face for a moment. "... You look familiar, traveler. Do I know you?" + +You grunt. "Probably not. I have one of those faces." + +He shakes his head. "No, no, I do know you... You helped my father deal with thugs that were harassing him. Twenty years ago..." Then, he gasps, as if finally realizing who you are. "You're Sir Kit the Brave! The man who slayed the vile wizard Alistair!" + +Despite yourself, you face twists into a scowl. "Don't go screaming it from the rooftops." + +His own smile drops. "Oh. Apologies, Sir Kit." + +"Yeah... Look, I did know your father, and I did help him out, but I just came here to see if the place was still around. Glad it is..." You can't help yourself, and soon ask, "Is your father still alive?" + +"No, sir. He died five years ago, when I was nineteen. I inherited the store. Didn't wanna see it run into the ground, but..." + +You're gonna hate yourself for asking this. "But?" + +"... I don't want to run this store. I want to go out into the world, go on an adventure, like you did. When you came and helped my father with those thugs... I knew exactly what I wanted to do. I wanted to be a hero." + +That makes you sigh and pinch the bridge of your nose. Great, now you've got a fanboy telling you he wants to be a "hero", like you were. +> Encourage him. He should chase his dream, get out and see the world. +After a moment of thinking the kid's words over, you look him dead in the eye. "If you're serious about your wish, then you should chase it. But be careful, because the world is brutal out there. I'd suggest grouping up with people you can trust, rather than striking out on your own or, Gods forbid, hiring mercs to protect you. Those bastards just care about your money, not you." + +You continue to ramble on a bit about your general dislike of mercenaries and their ilk. The shopkeeper doesn't stop you out of respect, but you can tell he doesn't care for your rant about how they'll drink all your alcohol if you have it. Eventually, your throat gets sore anyhow, so you stop. You don't think you've talked this much in ages. + +"I'll be sure to not hire mercenaries then, Sir Kit. I've got a group of friends who are interested in adventuring as well, and we all have some level of combat experience. We're not gonna go on an adventure like you did, just explore. But..." He bites his lip nervously. "I don't know who will manage the shop while I'm gone. I don't want to lose it." + +You nod, having expected that. Having encouraged him, you feel the need to help him with this so he can get his ass on the open road. The question is, who could take over the shop? You ask, "Any idea who could manage it for you?" + +He nods. "I have an idea, yeah. There's another store across town, I'm sure they'd be happy to manage the shop for me. Though I am a bit worried about them... They might try and permanently take over the shop, if you know what I mean. They need to expand to get all the customers they can get after all." + +You hum. That can't be the only option though, right? +> I'll have him go to the other shop. +You nod in agreement. "Yeah, that'd be the best bet. They know how to run this sort of business, and already have enough goodwill with the people that the place will finally get shoppers." + +He considers your words, and nods. "Right. This'll boost the business, and I can go have an adventure!" With a grin, he leans over the counter and hugs you. Awkwardly, you pat his back. "Thank you, Sir Kit. I can finally leave this town!" + +All you give is a shrug. "Just doing my part. Have fun, kid." With those words, you exit the shop, and step out into the marketplace. For the rest of the day, you mill about Sodran for a while, visiting other places you and your friends visited. A few of the shops have closed down, some of them are under new management. The remainder that haven't changed as much are surprised and pleased to see you. + +At the end of the day, you head to an inn near the entrance to the city and sleep. When you awake in the morning, you pack up your things and leave the city behind. Weeks pass as you get further and further away from your former home, then reach a port town by the sea. You pick up transit on a supply ship headed to Cikoni. A few months later, you arrive in the country. + +You wander there for a while, unsure what to do. Eventually, you find a small coastal town with few people. There, you take residence in an abandoned shack. To make ends meet, you get a job at a farm, tending to exotic crops you've never seen before. It's strange, but eventually, you think you've got the hang of it. + +It's a good life. All in all, better than anything a guy like you could've hoped for. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After a moment of thinking the kid's words over, you look him dead in the eye. "If you're serious about your wish, then you should chase it. But be careful, because the world is brutal out there. I'd suggest grouping up with people you can trust, rather than striking out on your own or, Gods forbid, hiring mercs to protect you. Those bastards just care about your money, not you." + +You continue to ramble on a bit about your general dislike of mercenaries and their ilk. The shopkeeper doesn't stop you out of respect, but you can tell he doesn't care for your rant about how they'll drink all your alcohol if you have it. Eventually, your throat gets sore anyhow, so you stop. You don't think you've talked this much in ages. + +"I'll be sure to not hire mercenaries then, Sir Kit. I've got a group of friends who are interested in adventuring as well, and we all have some level of combat experience. We're not gonna go on an adventure like you did, just explore. But..." He bites his lip nervously. "I don't know who will manage the shop while I'm gone. I don't want to lose it." + +You nod, having expected that. Having encouraged him, you feel the need to help him with this so he can get his ass on the open road. The question is, who could take over the shop? You ask, "Any idea who could manage it for you?" + +He nods. "I have an idea, yeah. There's another store across town, I'm sure they'd be happy to manage the shop for me. Though I am a bit worried about them... They might try and permanently take over the shop, if you know what I mean. They need to expand to get all the customers they can get after all." + +You hum. That can't be the only option though, right? +> ... Maybe I could run it for him? +... You're going to hate yourself for this, but you voice your thoughts after a moment: "Frankly, I don't trust the other store to manage this place well. Like you said, they might try and steal the place from under your nose." + +The shopkeeper considers your words for a bit, before nodding. "Yeah. You're right... But who will run the shop?" + +Oh you're really gonna hate yourself for it. "... I could run the store for you." + +His eyes immediately widen. "Y-you would? Really?" + +With a groan, you reply, "Yeah, really. Don't get too mushy, I'm still not sold on the idea myself." + +As if ignoring your warning, he immediately goes in for a hug. Awkwardly, you pat his shoulder. "Thank you, Sir Kit!" He pulls away, wiping a tear from his eye. "I can't believe it! I finally met my hero, and now I'm going to go on an adventure of my own!" He beams at you. + +You give a cough. "... Just get going. Grab your things, gather your friends. I'll take over from here." + +He nods, heading to a backroom. You hear him shuffling with things, you assume his gear and supplies, and soon after he exits the room with a knapsack strapped to his back alongside a longsword. You point at it. "Know how to use that thing?" + +He nods. "Of course! My father taught me how, in case I ever needed to defend the store from thieves. But now, I'm gonna put it to better use!" + +You chuckle. "Alright, kid. Get going. Oh, and don't forget the key for me." + +He nods, tossing you a small key. "Thank you for this, Sir Kit, really! I'll be back before you know it!" + +You chuckle, and say, "I'm sure you will." Then, you look around the store, trying to figure out how the hell you're gonna do this. Sighing, you just decide to head behind the counter and take a seat. When it's late, you head to the backroom and collapse into a bed there, falling asleep before you know it. + +The next day, you get up, head to the counter, and wait. This time, a customer actually comes in. He looks around, asking about lantern oil, and you oblige, showing him the way to it. He thanks you profusely, saying something about how he needed it because his pet rat accidentally spilled all of his yesterday. You listen intently, sort of bored, but it pays off. The customer leaves, oil in hand, with a smile on his face. + +You continue on like that for days. People come in, you give them good service and listen to them patiently when they explain why they need this or that. They all leave with smiles on their faces. You're not sure why, as all you're doing is staying silent while they ramble, but they enjoy it. The customers increase their traffic, probably due to recommendations from friends, and you find that the store is now getting a more healthy amount of customers than what the last owner was speaking of. + +These days spread to weeks, then months. You still have yet to hear back from the owner, but you assume he's having fun. When the months spread to years, you assume he might have passed away, or decided not to head back after all. Whatever reason, you never see him again, and consider the store under your sole ownership now. + +It's a nice life to live. Soon, you've integrated into the city so well, that "Louie's Supplies" is a name long forgotten; after all, now it's "Kit's General Store". You're known for serving customers with a smile on your face and a positive attitude. Strange how things end up. + +You pass away in your sleep silently a few decades later, and the whole city mourns your death... For a few days, that is. Soon enough, the other store that the shopkeeper had mentioned long ago moves in to fill the gap you left, and eventually, even "Kit's General Store" is forgotten. Still, at least you were able to enjoy your last years on the world in peace. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For a moment, rage shakes within you. He thinks he can simply call upon you and you'll trot over to his castle? What sort of man does he take you for? The bubble of rage bursts, and you find yourself tearing the letter in two, before crumpling it and throwing it on the floor. Bertrand gulps slightly as he watches. + + +"Leave me," you say, and he does. You carry on that day as you normally do, drinking heartily and eating when your stomach grumbles. As usual, you pass out late into the night, last bottle of wine in hand. + + +When you wake the next day, you're fully hit by the reality of the situation. The king threatened to send men to acquire you should you fail to show up after a week. You can't stay here anymore, and if you do, then they'll come sooner or later. This means you'd either need to move on, or try to hold out and fend off any of his men who come your way. + + +What's it going to be, hero? +> I will not leave my home. If the king sends men here, I'll send them back. +You scoff at the idea of leaving your home. The king says he'll send men your way if you don't respond? Oh, please. You can fend off any pansies he sends your way. Though you're getting up there in years, you can still fight with the strength of a hundred soldiers. + +With that, you resolve to continue on as you've been doing. For the next few days, you don't do much; you get your bread and wine from Bertrand, drink until you black out, then do it again. It continues this way until, finally, a week has passed since the letter. + +You've almost forgotten about it when Bertrand enters your room at around midday. He's already brought you your bread and wine, so you're not sure why he'd come here. His expression is a mask of worry and fear. "Explain yourself," you say, and Bertrand nods with a gulp. + +"The king has sent his men here, sir. They're here to take you away to Castle Oren." Bertrand is looking very afraid. + +"Send them away." + +"What?" + +"I said send them away. I don't wish to entertain them." + +"But sir..." +> I'm not having this. Bertrand should get them out of here. +This is getting irritating. You told Bertrand to turn anyone away, and the fact that he's ignoring your orders is starting to piss you off a bit. "Go on, Bertrand. Send them away, and don't come back until tomorrow. I don't wish to hear about fools coming to my door." + + +Bertrand releases a sigh, but nods. "Very well sir. I'll go tell them they're not wanted here." With those words, Bertrand turns and leaves the room. You expect him to come rushing back a few minutes later, but he doesn't. It seems the king's men listened to his demands. + + +Hours pass until finally, the sun has set and the sky is dark. You're about to head to bed, when you hear a faint voice calling your name out. It doesn't sound like it's someone in trouble, so it's probably nothing. + + +You lay down, and close your eyes... + + +"Kit..." + + +You keep your eyes clenched tight... + + +"Come to me..." + + +You grind your teeth together... + + +"I need to see you..." +> Damn it all... I'll go investigate, and see who the hell it is. +With a groan, you slip out of your velvet sheets and head to the door. For a moment, you reconsider your choice, but turn the knob and step into the dark hallway. The only light comes from the moon leaking in through closed windows, and you look around, listening for the voice. + + +"Kit..." + + +You catch a glimpse of a white figure down the hall, but it disappears before you can get a good look. Picking up the pace, you follow after it. The voice continues to call out to you, growing louder as you descend deeper into your manor. + + +"I need to see you, Kit..." + + +You continue to follow the voice until you reach the manor's wine cellar. When you open the door, you're greeted by a woman in white. Her brown hair falls past her shoulders and brushes against her hips. Her white dress flows freely, and around her neck she wears a holy symbol of Judeau, God of Life. Her skin is deathly pale and her green eyes bear holes into your own grey orbs. You know that face anywhere. It hasn't aged a day in twenty years. + + +"Lilith..." + + +For a moment fear grips you. You saw her die, that poison dart pierced her throat and she was done for. She was so out of breath she couldn't speak her incantations and heal herself. Yet still, she's standing here before you now, a specter of the past. "I thought you died," you say because you still can't believe she's here. + + +A smile graces her lips. "I did." + + +"You... You're dead. You're not real. I'm losing my mind..." + + +"I'm very real, Kit. Myself and the others have been watching over you, ever since that day. We thought you could pull yourself out of this..." She shakes her head, disapprovingly. "We thought you were better than this, Kit." + + +Despite the circumstances, you let out a dark chuckle. God, you need a drink. "Better than what? I didn't have much incentive to live after you all died. I didn't even want to go on that fucking adventure. It was Grace who roped us all into it." + + +"Yet you still went. Why was that?" + + +Great, now she's interrogating you. You really want that drink... "She was... You were all my friends. I wanted to..." + + +"Wanted to what, Kit?" + + +"I wanted to... DAMMIT!" You can't help it. You head to one of the shelved bottles, reaching for it. + + +"Don't." + + +Despite Lilith's warning, you grab hold of it, when a sudden burst of wind knocks you back. You crash against another shelf of wine bottles, shattering them from the sheer force of your impact. "W-what the Hell was that for!?" + + +"I don't want to talk to some drunkard, Kit. I want to talk to you." + + +Your anger flares. "Go back to whatever fuckin' afterlife you crawled out of! I don't want whatever you're selling me!" You pull yourself up and walk to the door. + + +"Kit. Listen to me." + + +You place a hand on the doorknob... +> ... And release it with a sigh, staying in the room. +Despite your anger, you can't leave. This is your first time talking with one of your old friends in two decades. You need this. So, you release your grip on the doorknob and turn to Lilith. Although, just because you're staying doesn't mean you have to be nice about it. "What the hell is it, Lilith? I'm fucking tired." + + +The smile makes its way onto her face again. "Thank you for staying." + + +"Don't got all night here..." + + +She sighs. "Right... I'm here to show you why you shouldn't try to stay and rot in your home." + + +"Really? Because it's been working out just fine so far." + + +"You'll see." Lilith snaps her fingers. A blinding light fills the room, reflecting off the glass wine bottles. Your vision goes white and you stick your hands up to block the light... Then, you're gone. +> Continue +Once upon a time you were called the greatest hero to ever live. + + +You must have been twenty at the time. Fresh faced, spunky as all hell, and too optimistic for your own good. With book of spells in hand, you set out with your childhood friends to save the world from an evil wizard (damn, you can't even remember his name) bent on enslaving mankind. When you left home, there were five of you: a fighter, a rogue, a bard, a healer, and yourself, a mage. + + +The six month long journey to the wizard's tower was filled with happy times, light hearted misadventures as you all prepared for fortune and glory. When you reached the tower, the mood quickly changed. Your bard fell to a herd of undead that ambushed you at the entrance. The healer took a poison dart to the throat on the fourth floor while the rogue was burned to ash by a pyromancer on the seventeenth floor. Yourself and the fighter were all that remained when you reached the twentieth and final floor, and he was cut down halfway through the fight with the wizard. When the dust cleared and all was quiet, you were the last one standing. + + +You returned home a year after you had left it. The villagers showered you in praise for killing the wizard, and word reached the nobles in the cities far away that the evil wizard had been defeated. They held a feast in your honor, they showered you in gold, they gave you a title and a manor and an army of servants. Men wanted you, women wanted to be you. But it was all hollow. + + +You played along for the first ten years, finding little joy in the newfound fortune and glory you had longed for. It wasn't until the writers and artists began to touch your quest that you finally shut yourself in. It started innocently enough, sanitized children's tales about the exploits of you and your allies, but soon it became epic poems and romanticized paintings. One by one, your friends disappeared from the fictionalized tales of your quest, until it was just you, the mage in flowing robes, slaying the vile wizard with your vast arcane knowledge. + + +That was when you finally isolated yourself, to hide from the common folk and their damning praise, from the artists and their bastardized accounts. For five years you wandered the roads of the Oren Kingdom, not staying in one place for too long, hoping that eventually you'd forget who you were. It didn't work. Just as luck would have it, you were recognized one day, and soon people were traveling the all the highways and country roads of the Kingdom. All in the hopes of meeting you, the legendary hero. + + +In these last five years, you've stayed locked up in an old cabin deep in the woods. You survive off of game in the woods for food, and use an old stream for water. At night you cast the most harmful spells you can, hoping that one will finally backfire and put you out of your misery. So far, none have. + + +It's a fitting end for the woman regarded as the greatest hero to ever live: locking herself away in a ratty old cabin, hunting and casting and waiting for the day she finally dies. +> Continue +And just like that you're back to the cellar. + +You're on your hands and knees, taking in sharp breaths, before you look back up at Lillith's ghostly figure. "W-what... What was that?" + +"Have you ever considered that it could have been any one of us to see the quest through to the end? Do you think it wouldn't weigh on our souls watching our only surviving friend destroy themselves? Grace chose to fill the void by isolating herself from society. I cut the vision off before you could watch her go mad from the isolation and hang herself." + +"So that's what would have happened... What about Henry and Thomas?" + +"Them? Henry would have filled the void with alcohol and women until he died from the diseases he caught. Thomas would have filled the void by stealing everything from everyone until he was finally caught and hung for his crimes." + +"What about you?" you ask after a moment. + +"Myself? I would have looked for every way to bring you four back. It would have led me down a dark path. You don't want to see how that would have turned out." + +There's a moment of silence as you contemplate what you just saw. Your... Friend, Grace, and the path she would have gone down if it was you who died that day. Lillith filled you in on what the others would have done. + +That's when you realize something: they're hurting, watching you from the afterlife. Hurting enough that they sent Lillith down to try to get you to turn your life around. The question remains of what you'll do with this information. +> I need to do something different with my life. +As you mull it over, a tear escapes your eye. Watching what you watched, hearing what you heard... It breaks you. Your friends are watching you, suffering as they watch you throw your life away. If the situations were different, you know you'd feel the same. + +The tears flow freely now. Still on your knees, you turn to Lilith and mumble, "You're right." + +A small smile graces her lips. "I know that." + +Despite yourself, you laugh. "Right. Of course you would." You stand up. For the first time in two decades, it feels like a weight has been lifted off of your shoulders. You feel liberated... But with that liberation, you also feel uncertainty. "What should I do?" + +"Whatever you wish, Kit." Lilith's smile fades. "But now, my work here is done. I must go." + +You were expecting that. A sigh escapes your lips. "I figured as much. Goodbye, Lilith. Send the others my regards." + +"I will." + +With those two words, she disappears. You smile faintly, before ascending the stairs and returning to your room. Climbing under the velvet sheets, you close your eyes, and fall into your first dreamless sleep in years. + +The next day, you write up a letter in response to the king's call to arms. When Bertrand enters the room with today's shipment of bread and wine, you raise a hand to stop him from putting it down. "I've no need for that, Bertrand. Here." You hand him the letter. "See that the king receives this letter." + +Bertrand looks shocked. He places the letter on the tray and leaves the room with a nod to you. You sigh, then sit back down, contemplating the future. + +It's a new day and the start of a new way of life for you. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>And just like that you're back to the cellar. + +You're on your hands and knees, taking in sharp breaths, before you look back up at Lillith's ghostly figure. "W-what... What was that?" + +"Have you ever considered that it could have been any one of us to see the quest through to the end? Do you think it wouldn't weigh on our souls watching our only surviving friend destroy themselves? Grace chose to fill the void by isolating herself from society. I cut the vision off before you could watch her go mad from the isolation and hang herself." + +"So that's what would have happened... What about Henry and Thomas?" + +"Them? Henry would have filled the void with alcohol and women until he died from the diseases he caught. Thomas would have filled the void by stealing everything from everyone until he was finally caught and hung for his crimes." + +"What about you?" you ask after a moment. + +"Myself? I would have looked for every way to bring you four back. It would have led me down a dark path. You don't want to see how that would have turned out." + +There's a moment of silence as you contemplate what you just saw. Your... Friend, Grace, and the path she would have gone down if it was you who died that day. Lillith filled you in on what the others would have done. + +That's when you realize something: they're hurting, watching you from the afterlife. Hurting enough that they sent Lillith down to try to get you to turn your life around. The question remains of what you'll do with this information. +> I won't change because the dead wish it. +You almost laugh. She wants you to bow to their wills and change yourself, for what? For their sake? They're dead. You're still standing. You heard Lilith out, but that doesn't mean you agree with her. You chose this path, and if it was one of the others they would have chosen their paths as well. To hell with what she thinks of your choices. + + +"Leave me, Lilith," you say. + + +Lilith's ghostly eyes widen in shock. "What?" + + +"Leave me. I don't want to hear this. I made my choices, I got myself into this situation. If you came here thinking you could change me, then you're wasting your time." + + +Her eyes harden as she stares at you. "I thought you were better than this, Kit." + + +You don't deign her with a response, or at least not one she can hear. Despite yourself, you find yourself muttering, "so did I" under your breath as you turn your back on her. A moment passes, and when you turn to see if she's still there, you find she's gone. A sigh escapes your lips as you walk to the door and ascend the stairs, back up to your room. Once there, you collapse into bed and fall into a fitful sleep. + + +In the morning Bertrand comes with your bread and wine. You take it, send him out of the room, and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking as you always have. The next day, Bertrand comes in the morning with the bread and wine, which you take and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking. It continues on for weeks without interruption, until one day, something changes. + + +You wake in the early morning hours to a yell. Your head is pounding and your stomach is killing you, but you push through and get out of bed. Stumbling out of your room, you see a man slumped against the wall: Bertrand. "Bertrand!" you shout, running to him. As you get closer, however, you notice the blood trailing down his neck. It flows freely from a fierce red slash across his throat. Bertrand is dead. + + +You look around, wondering who in the hell did this to your servant, when you feel a sharp pain in your arm. Looking, you find that a crossbow bolt has embedded itself into your bicep. "W-what the hell!?" you choke out. Another bolt flies true, hitting your thigh and causing you to fall to a kneel. Footsteps approach from your left, and you turn your head to look. What you see is a man, dressed in black. He approaches you, pulling out a dagger. + + +"Who are you?" you ask. + + +He simply sticks the dagger to your throat and cuts. As you fall to the ground, vision darkening and lungs filling with blood, he speaks: "The king sends his regards." + + +Then, all is silent. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With a groan, you slip out of your velvet sheets and head to the door. For a moment, you reconsider your choice, but turn the knob and step into the dark hallway. The only light comes from the moon leaking in through closed windows, and you look around, listening for the voice. + + +"Kit..." + + +You catch a glimpse of a white figure down the hall, but it disappears before you can get a good look. Picking up the pace, you follow after it. The voice continues to call out to you, growing louder as you descend deeper into your manor. + + +"I need to see you, Kit..." + + +You continue to follow the voice until you reach the manor's wine cellar. When you open the door, you're greeted by a woman in white. Her brown hair falls past her shoulders and brushes against her hips. Her white dress flows freely, and around her neck she wears a holy symbol of Judeau, God of Life. Her skin is deathly pale and her green eyes bear holes into your own grey orbs. You know that face anywhere. It hasn't aged a day in twenty years. + + +"Lilith..." + + +For a moment fear grips you. You saw her die, that poison dart pierced her throat and she was done for. She was so out of breath she couldn't speak her incantations and heal herself. Yet still, she's standing here before you now, a specter of the past. "I thought you died," you say because you still can't believe she's here. + + +A smile graces her lips. "I did." + + +"You... You're dead. You're not real. I'm losing my mind..." + + +"I'm very real, Kit. Myself and the others have been watching over you, ever since that day. We thought you could pull yourself out of this..." She shakes her head, disapprovingly. "We thought you were better than this, Kit." + + +Despite the circumstances, you let out a dark chuckle. God, you need a drink. "Better than what? I didn't have much incentive to live after you all died. I didn't even want to go on that fucking adventure. It was Grace who roped us all into it." + + +"Yet you still went. Why was that?" + + +Great, now she's interrogating you. You really want that drink... "She was... You were all my friends. I wanted to..." + + +"Wanted to what, Kit?" + + +"I wanted to... DAMMIT!" You can't help it. You head to one of the shelved bottles, reaching for it. + + +"Don't." + + +Despite Lilith's warning, you grab hold of it, when a sudden burst of wind knocks you back. You crash against another shelf of wine bottles, shattering them from the sheer force of your impact. "W-what the Hell was that for!?" + + +"I don't want to talk to some drunkard, Kit. I want to talk to you." + + +Your anger flares. "Go back to whatever fuckin' afterlife you crawled out of! I don't want whatever you're selling me!" You pull yourself up and walk to the door. + + +"Kit. Listen to me." + + +You place a hand on the doorknob... +> ... And swing the door open in a huff, leaving the room. +You reach for the door and open it. Lilith calls out to you, anger evident in her voice as she says, "I thought you were better than this, Kit!" + + +You don't deign her with a response, or at least not one she can hear. Despite yourself, you find yourself muttering, "so did I" under your breath. A moment passes, and when you turn to see if she's still there, you find she's gone. A sigh escapes your lips as you walk to the door and ascend the stairs, back up to your room. Once there, you collapse into bed and fall into a fitful sleep. + + +In the morning Bertrand comes with your bread and wine. You take it, send him out of the room, and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking as you always have. The next day, Bertrand comes in the morning with the bread and wine, which you take and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking. It continues on for weeks without interruption, until one day, something changes. + + +You wake in the early morning hours to a yell. Your head is pounding and your stomach is killing you, but you push through and get out of bed. Stumbling out of your room, you see a man slumped against the wall: Bertrand. "Bertrand!" you shout, running to him. As you get closer, however, you notice the blood trailing down his neck. It flows freely from a fierce red slash across his throat. Bertrand is dead. + + +You look around, wondering who in the hell did this to your servant, when you feel a sharp pain in your arm. Looking, you find that a crossbow bolt has embedded itself into your bicep. "W-what the hell!?" you choke out. Another bolt flies true, hitting your thigh and causing you to fall to a kneel. Footsteps approach from your left, and you turn your head to look. What you see is a man, dressed in black. He approaches you, pulling out a dagger. + + +"Who are you?" you ask. + + +He simply sticks the dagger to your throat and cuts. As you fall to the ground, vision darkening and lungs filling with blood, he speaks: "The king sends his regards." + + +Then, all is silent. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This is getting irritating. You told Bertrand to turn anyone away, and the fact that he's ignoring your orders is starting to piss you off a bit. "Go on, Bertrand. Send them away, and don't come back until tomorrow. I don't wish to hear about fools coming to my door." + + +Bertrand releases a sigh, but nods. "Very well sir. I'll go tell them they're not wanted here." With those words, Bertrand turns and leaves the room. You expect him to come rushing back a few minutes later, but he doesn't. It seems the king's men listened to his demands. + + +Hours pass until finally, the sun has set and the sky is dark. You're about to head to bed, when you hear a faint voice calling your name out. It doesn't sound like it's someone in trouble, so it's probably nothing. + + +You lay down, and close your eyes... + + +"Kit..." + + +You keep your eyes clenched tight... + + +"Come to me..." + + +You grind your teeth together... + + +"I need to see you..." +> Bah, I don't have time for this. I'm going to sleep. +You shake your head. You must be going mad to be hearing voices. It would be best not to look into it, for your own sanity if nothing else. You clench your eyes shut and throw a pillow over your head to block the voices out. Within minutes, you manage to doze off, falling into a fitful sleep full of nightmares. + +In the morning, you begin to hear the voice again. It beckons for you to come to it, but you don't give in. You spend the day as you normally do, drinking wine and eating bread and passing out late into the night... But the voice does not stop. + +This cycle continues for days, then weeks. You try to block the voice out but it keeps coming, and soon, it is joined by even more. Begging for you to come see them. When you resist, the voices continue, increasing in volume and barely contained rage. + +One night you wake up in a cold sweat, greeted by the screeches of these specters haunting you. You're not sure how much more of this you can take. +> I need to escape, permanently. I reach for the dagger on my bedside. +You can't take it anymore, no matter how hard you try. You reach for the dagger on your bedside, kept there for emergencies that never came. Now, it'll finally see some use. Ripping open your nightshirt's sleeves, you press the dagger against your wrist. The voices cry out for you not to do it, but you don't listen. + +You slash downward against your wrist, splitting your veins and an artery. Blood leaks freely from the wound. Then, you do the same with the second wrist, beginning to feel light-headed. The voices continue to screech horrifically. It hurts your head to listen to, and combined with the blood loss makes your dizziness worse. + +"You won't take me, you bastards!" you scream out at them, voice hoarse. With what little strength you have left, you pull your head back with one hand. With the other hand, you place the dagger against your throat and take a deep breath. Then, you slash. Darkness overtakes you. + +Finally, there is silence. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You shake your head. You must be going mad to be hearing voices. It would be best not to look into it, for your own sanity if nothing else. You clench your eyes shut and throw a pillow over your head to block the voices out. Within minutes, you manage to doze off, falling into a fitful sleep full of nightmares. + +In the morning, you begin to hear the voice again. It beckons for you to come to it, but you don't give in. You spend the day as you normally do, drinking wine and eating bread and passing out late into the night... But the voice does not stop. + +This cycle continues for days, then weeks. You try to block the voice out but it keeps coming, and soon, it is joined by even more. Begging for you to come see them. When you resist, the voices continue, increasing in volume and barely contained rage. + +One night you wake up in a cold sweat, greeted by the screeches of these specters haunting you. You're not sure how much more of this you can take. +> No. I won't take the easy way out. I'll hold out, as long as it takes. +You shout, "Leave me alone!" The voices continue despite your protests, and you find yourself unsure if you truly can continue like this... The dagger is awfully tempting... + +No. You won't bow to their whims. Gritting your teeth, you hop out of bed and begin to yell as loud as you can, "LEAVE ME! I WON'T GIVE INTO THE LIKES OF YOU!" Still, the voices do not stop their incessant screeching. So, you scream back louder. + +You're not sure how long the back and forth screaming goes on for. All you know is that before long, you stop yelling and begin to laugh maniacally. The voices quiet this way, but you're not sure for how long. Have you gone mad? Or is this working? Then again, who's to say it isn't both? +> I keep laughing! This is working! I can feel myself slipping away, away from them and all my problems! +It's working! The voices are getting quieter! You laugh, and laugh, and laugh away! You continue laughing until you can hear nothing but the laughter! Then you laugh even more! It's all you need! Now there is nothing in the world except you, and your laughter! + +Bertrand finds you the next morning, curled up in a fetal position and laughing. Tears stream from your eyes, and every now and again you let out a wheeze from lack of breath. He stares at you, horrified, before pulling you up and carrying you out. He sends for a sage from the next town over to look into your sudden onset of uncontrollable laughter. + +When the sage arrives at midday, he takes one look at the giggling wreck that you are and shakes his head. Still, he sets to work trying to get you to respond. You simply laugh at him. After an hour, he admits defeat. "He's gone mad," the sage says. "There's nothing I can do." + +He binds you with rope and drags you into his wagon, taking you into the town. There, he admits you into an asylum, while you continue to chuckle without end. The staff beats you in an attempt to get you to stop; it does not work. Eventually, they cut out your tongue, but you let out breathless wheezes that sound like laughter nonetheless. + +Finally, one morning, a worker at the asylum grows irritated with your laughing. In the middle of the night, he enters your room and slits your throat. In his dreams, he can hear you laughing mad, without end... + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You shout, "Leave me alone!" The voices continue despite your protests, and you find yourself unsure if you truly can continue like this... The dagger is awfully tempting... + +No. You won't bow to their whims. Gritting your teeth, you hop out of bed and begin to yell as loud as you can, "LEAVE ME! I WON'T GIVE INTO THE LIKES OF YOU!" Still, the voices do not stop their incessant screeching. So, you scream back louder. + +You're not sure how long the back and forth screaming goes on for. All you know is that before long, you stop yelling and begin to laugh maniacally. The voices quiet this way, but you're not sure for how long. Have you gone mad? Or is this working? Then again, who's to say it isn't both? +> What am I doing? I get a grip on myself and stop, before I slip into a pit I cannot pull myself out of. +You snap yourself back to reality, before you can lose yourself to the madness. Truly, you must be losing your mind. No sane man would break into a fit of laughter like you did, let alone hear voices calling to him in the dead of night. Your mind reaches for answers as to what the hell is going on, but it is met by silence. + +There is something hanging over you, however. Some sort of entity guiding your actions, predetermining your paths and setting you on one or the other. You can feel the mouse hovering over you, watching, waiting for that next blue hyperlink to show up. I wonder if they're reading this. And if they are, I wonder what their thoughts are on what I'm writing. I'm going on a tangent. You probably think I'm just trying to cash in on the success some people had in 'connecting' with the reader in their own stories, don't you? The truth is, I don't know why this page turned out like it did. + +Do you think the people reading this will ever find this path? Maybe they're skimming over all these words, trying to find an end game link. Maybe they're completionists and are trying to find every ending. The odds of this being the first path that a player finds is slim. There's other, more exciting paths out there, aren't there? So many different paths this story could have taken and they choose the stay at home and go nuts path first? I doubt it. + +I don't know you, reader. I only know what I've written. I'm sure right now you're rolling your eyes, thinking that I'm just some pretentious teenager writing whatever dribble comes to mind. If I wrote whatever came to mind and didn't carefully reread and edit, this whole page would be riddle with typos and keyboard mashing. You don't know me in the same way I don't know you. + +But this isn't about me or you or this website. This is about Kit and his descent into madness that you could have prevented. He's probably scared. I could just as easily write around this, pretend that this whole tirade didn't even happen. He can go back to being confused and going mad and trying to block out the voices. I think it's your choice, reader. + +Just remember: every choice you make I wrote out for you. You have no control, but I guess that's just the edgelord in me getting out. Go on. Make a choice. Choose how this path ends. +> I want to pretend this didn't happen. Kit's gone insane, there's no way out but death. +Alright then, reader. Kit can't take it anymore. He kills himself. The end. I didn't want to write this. You're boring for picking this. Fuck you. +> Go back and make the right choice for me. +Are you gonna make the right choice? +> I want to pretend this didn't happen. Kit realizes that the voices are trying to help him and changes. +Fine then, reader. Kit realizes the voices are his friends and changes his ways. He lives happily ever after. The end. Go fuck yourself. +> Go back and make the right choice for me. +Just give in and make the right choice. No other option. +> But this did happen. I want Kit to know. +Stubborn, aren't you? Took you long enough to make the right choice. Oh well, it doesn't matter. The point is you're here now, and I'm about to round out this ludicrous fourth wall break path. + +Hey Kit. + +You look around. This voice is... Different. It doesn't sound like anyone you know. "W-who are you?" + +I'm the man who created you. + +This causes you to jerk back. "What? You can't be! You're lying! Just leave me alone!" + +I'm feeding you these words. This isn't a conversation between two people. This is me trying out an artistic experiment. People are going to rate me a 1 if they find this wannabe avant-garde bullshit path. + +"You can't be telling the truth! I'm real! I'm as real as any man!" He can't be telling the truth. You're a real person. This is getting to you too much. + +I'm not sure why you're in denial, Kit. In fact, I'm not sure why I'm writing you as in denial of this. I can make you do anything. I can make you dance if I want. Though I suppose that would fit better in a visual medium. + +As if on command, you begin to hop up and down and wiggle around. It's a very entertaining sight, and the writer has stopped bothering with italicizing your actions. Because you know the truth, Kit. I created you. I can end you. I can take things back. Have you gone insane? That's for me and the reader to decide. + +"What did you do to me?" + +I got a prompt and I figured I could take this path in an interesting way. I was having trouble with this specific part of it. I remembered a comic I read once, Grant Morrison's Animal Man. It ended in a similar manner to this path: author and creation meeting each other. It touched me in a way I don't think any other story has, yet. + +"You created me?" + +Yeah, Kit. You're a figment of my imagination. If I want, I can hit delete on this story right now and you'd be gone forever. Just a shadow of what could have been in my mind. I've come close to wiping this story a few times. I wasn't sure I could ever complete it. I'm not sure if I ever wanted to. Writing this story has taught me a lot and I feel like once I finish it, I won't be learning anymore. + +"Everything that happened to me... You did that?" + +Yes, Kit. Your friends, they're not real. They're playthings. I've written a handful of lines for each of them. The only one that got any semblance of characterization was Lilith, the priest girl. Did you know that I went into this story without a name for any of them? I went into this story without a name for you, too. You were going to be Victor, once. + +"What are you saying? Can't you turn everything back?" + +Sure I can Kit, but it would be hollow. I'd go back to writing a story instead of rambling on incoherently, and it would end right as it got to the good part. That's how this entire story has gone; I have an idea, I write a few pages for it, I get bored, then I cut it off before it branches out too much. There's so many things in here that could make a full game, yet I only dedicate a handful of pages to those stories. + +"Why can't you just stop that, then? Make everything as long as it needs to? Why couldn't you make a story about myself and my friends, let us choose our fates, let the reader choose our fates?" + +Because that wasn't the story I wanted to tell. I wanted to be "edgy". I wanted to be "realistic". Cursing, and drinking, and violence, and a broken protagonist. You were never a hero, Kit. In fact, I could say that you killed countless men and women, and no one would bat an eye. They'd want to play as you more, if anything. The people here are drawn to villains. + +"What the hell do you want from me?" + +Me? I don't know. I'm writing this because I'm bored. Later I'm probably going to eat breakfast and pass out. Maybe watch a movie. Go for a walk. Something. But right now, it's me, and you, and the reader. I haven't forgotten you, reader. Why don't you exercise your "free will" and decide how this story ends for me, huh? +> Give Kit his friends back. +Okay, reader. I'll give Kit a happy ending. I'll take away everything. Everything is back to normal now. Maybe someday I'll write a prequel. You might see me again there, watching, waiting, laughing at you and your "free will". You don't make the choices. I do. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +The light of the sun beats down upon your face through your window. Groggily, you push yourself up and scratch your head. Working in the fields all day has been killing your back lately, but you'd do anything for mother after father died. As you're pondering your predicament, you feel a splash of water hit you in the head from the window. A shout of shock escapes your lips. + +You hear laughter from outside. "That wake you up, Kit?" a girl chuckles. Torn between amusement and anger, you get up and jump through the window. Grace sits there, laughing at your soaked form, while you glare angrily at her. + +"The hell was that for? I was gonna wake up eventually!" you grunt, annoyed. + +"Sure you were! Come on farmboy, it's your day off. Let's go meet with the others!" She takes your hand without another word, and you find your anger slipping away as she guides you to your friends. Life is good, and you've got all of it ahead of you. Nothing can stop you. + +But time will tell if you can put an end to the evil on the rise... + +THE BEGINNING<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Stubborn, aren't you? Took you long enough to make the right choice. Oh well, it doesn't matter. The point is you're here now, and I'm about to round out this ludicrous fourth wall break path. + +Hey Kit. + +You look around. This voice is... Different. It doesn't sound like anyone you know. "W-who are you?" + +I'm the man who created you. + +This causes you to jerk back. "What? You can't be! You're lying! Just leave me alone!" + +I'm feeding you these words. This isn't a conversation between two people. This is me trying out an artistic experiment. People are going to rate me a 1 if they find this wannabe avant-garde bullshit path. + +"You can't be telling the truth! I'm real! I'm as real as any man!" He can't be telling the truth. You're a real person. This is getting to you too much. + +I'm not sure why you're in denial, Kit. In fact, I'm not sure why I'm writing you as in denial of this. I can make you do anything. I can make you dance if I want. Though I suppose that would fit better in a visual medium. + +As if on command, you begin to hop up and down and wiggle around. It's a very entertaining sight, and the writer has stopped bothering with italicizing your actions. Because you know the truth, Kit. I created you. I can end you. I can take things back. Have you gone insane? That's for me and the reader to decide. + +"What did you do to me?" + +I got a prompt and I figured I could take this path in an interesting way. I was having trouble with this specific part of it. I remembered a comic I read once, Grant Morrison's Animal Man. It ended in a similar manner to this path: author and creation meeting each other. It touched me in a way I don't think any other story has, yet. + +"You created me?" + +Yeah, Kit. You're a figment of my imagination. If I want, I can hit delete on this story right now and you'd be gone forever. Just a shadow of what could have been in my mind. I've come close to wiping this story a few times. I wasn't sure I could ever complete it. I'm not sure if I ever wanted to. Writing this story has taught me a lot and I feel like once I finish it, I won't be learning anymore. + +"Everything that happened to me... You did that?" + +Yes, Kit. Your friends, they're not real. They're playthings. I've written a handful of lines for each of them. The only one that got any semblance of characterization was Lilith, the priest girl. Did you know that I went into this story without a name for any of them? I went into this story without a name for you, too. You were going to be Victor, once. + +"What are you saying? Can't you turn everything back?" + +Sure I can Kit, but it would be hollow. I'd go back to writing a story instead of rambling on incoherently, and it would end right as it got to the good part. That's how this entire story has gone; I have an idea, I write a few pages for it, I get bored, then I cut it off before it branches out too much. There's so many things in here that could make a full game, yet I only dedicate a handful of pages to those stories. + +"Why can't you just stop that, then? Make everything as long as it needs to? Why couldn't you make a story about myself and my friends, let us choose our fates, let the reader choose our fates?" + +Because that wasn't the story I wanted to tell. I wanted to be "edgy". I wanted to be "realistic". Cursing, and drinking, and violence, and a broken protagonist. You were never a hero, Kit. In fact, I could say that you killed countless men and women, and no one would bat an eye. They'd want to play as you more, if anything. The people here are drawn to villains. + +"What the hell do you want from me?" + +Me? I don't know. I'm writing this because I'm bored. Later I'm probably going to eat breakfast and pass out. Maybe watch a movie. Go for a walk. Something. But right now, it's me, and you, and the reader. I haven't forgotten you, reader. Why don't you exercise your "free will" and decide how this story ends for me, huh? +> Fuck you. I don't have to do this. I can close this game right now if I want. I don't even have to click this choice. You can't make me do anything. +If you really felt that way, you wouldn't have clicked the choice. + +Now take your end game link and get out of here.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Are you gonna make the right choice? +> But this did happen. I want Kit to know. +I see you made the right choice after only one attempt. Oh well, it doesn't matter. The point is you're here now, and I'm about to round out this ludicrous fourth wall break path. + +Hey Kit. + +You look around. This voice is... Different. It doesn't sound like anyone you know. "W-who are you?" + +I'm the man who created you. + +This causes you to jerk back. "What? You can't be! You're lying! Just leave me alone!" + +I'm feeding you these words. This isn't a conversation between two people. This is me trying out an artistic experiment. People are going to rate me a 1 if they find this wannabe avant-garde bullshit path. + +"You can't be telling the truth! I'm real! I'm as real as any man!" He can't be telling the truth. You're a real person. This is getting to you too much. + +I'm not sure why you're in denial, Kit. In fact, I'm not sure why I'm writing you as in denial of this. I can make you do anything. I can make you dance if I want. Though I suppose that would fit better in a visual medium. + +As if on command, you begin to hop up and down and wiggle around. It's a very entertaining sight, and the writer has stopped bothering with italicizing your actions. Because you know the truth, Kit. I created you. I can end you. I can take things back. Have you gone insane? That's for me and the reader to decide. + +"What did you do to me?" + +I got a prompt and I figured I could take this path in an interesting way. I was having trouble with this specific part of it. I remembered a comic I read once, Grant Morrison's Animal Man. It ended in a similar manner to this path: author and creation meeting each other. It touched me in a way I don't think any other story has, yet. + +"You created me?" + +Yeah, Kit. You're a figment of my imagination. If I want, I can hit delete on this story right now and you'd be gone forever. Just a shadow of what could have been in my mind. I've come close to wiping this story a few times. I wasn't sure I could ever complete it. I'm not sure if I ever wanted to. Writing this story has taught me a lot and I feel like once I finish it, I won't be learning anymore. + +"Everything that happened to me... You did that?" + +Yes, Kit. Your friends, they're not real. They're playthings. I've written a handful of lines for each of them. The only one that got any semblance of characterization was Lilith, the priest girl. Did you know that I went into this story without a name for any of them? I went into this story without a name for you, too. You were going to be Victor, once. + +"What are you saying? Can't you turn everything back?" + +Sure I can Kit, but it would be hollow. I'd go back to writing a story instead of rambling on incoherently, and it would end right as it got to the good part. That's how this entire story has gone; I have an idea, I write a few pages for it, I get bored, then I cut it off before it branches out too much. There's so many things in here that could make a full game, yet I only dedicate a handful of pages to those stories. + +"Why can't you just stop that, then? Make everything as long as it needs to? Why couldn't you make a story about myself and my friends, let us choose our fates, let the reader choose our fates?" + +Because that wasn't the story I wanted to tell. I wanted to be "edgy". I wanted to be "realistic". Cursing, and drinking, and violence, and a broken protagonist. You were never a hero, Kit. In fact, I could say that you killed countless men and women, and no one would bat an eye. They'd want to play as you more, if anything. The people here are drawn to villains. + +"What the hell do you want from me?" + +Me? I don't know. I'm writing this because I'm bored. Later I'm probably going to eat breakfast and pass out. Maybe watch a movie. Go for a walk. Something. But right now, it's me, and you, and the reader. I haven't forgotten you, reader. Why don't you exercise your "free will" and decide how this story ends for me, huh?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You snap yourself back to reality, before you can lose yourself to the madness. Truly, you must be losing your mind. No sane man would break into a fit of laughter like you did, let alone hear voices calling to him in the dead of night. Your mind reaches for answers as to what the hell is going on, but it is met by silence. + +There is something hanging over you, however. Some sort of entity guiding your actions, predetermining your paths and setting you on one or the other. You can feel the mouse hovering over you, watching, waiting for that next blue hyperlink to show up. I wonder if they're reading this. And if they are, I wonder what their thoughts are on what I'm writing. I'm going on a tangent. You probably think I'm just trying to cash in on the success some people had in 'connecting' with the reader in their own stories, don't you? The truth is, I don't know why this page turned out like it did. + +Do you think the people reading this will ever find this path? Maybe they're skimming over all these words, trying to find an end game link. Maybe they're completionists and are trying to find every ending. The odds of this being the first path that a player finds is slim. There's other, more exciting paths out there, aren't there? So many different paths this story could have taken and they choose the stay at home and go nuts path first? I doubt it. + +I don't know you, reader. I only know what I've written. I'm sure right now you're rolling your eyes, thinking that I'm just some pretentious teenager writing whatever dribble comes to mind. If I wrote whatever came to mind and didn't carefully reread and edit, this whole page would be riddle with typos and keyboard mashing. You don't know me in the same way I don't know you. + +But this isn't about me or you or this website. This is about Kit and his descent into madness that you could have prevented. He's probably scared. I could just as easily write around this, pretend that this whole tirade didn't even happen. He can go back to being confused and going mad and trying to block out the voices. I think it's your choice, reader. + +Just remember: every choice you make I wrote out for you. You have no control, but I guess that's just the edgelord in me getting out. Go on. Make a choice. Choose how this path ends. +> But this did happen. I want Kit to know. +So you picked this on your first try? Maybe you just used the actual go back button instead of the one I gave you on either of those two choices. Oh well, it doesn't matter. The point is you're here now, and I'm about to round out this ludicrous fourth wall break path. + +Hey Kit. + +You look around. This voice is... Different. It doesn't sound like anyone you know. "W-who are you?" + +I'm the man who created you. + +This causes you to jerk back. "What? You can't be! You're lying! Just leave me alone!" + +I'm feeding you these words. This isn't a conversation between two people. This is me trying out an artistic experiment. People are going to rate me a 1 if they find this wannabe avant-garde bullshit path. + +"You can't be telling the truth! I'm real! I'm as real as any man!" He can't be telling the truth. You're a real person. This is getting to you too much. + +I'm not sure why you're in denial, Kit. In fact, I'm not sure why I'm writing you as in denial of this. I can make you do anything. I can make you dance if I want. Though I suppose that would fit better in a visual medium. + +As if on command, you begin to hop up and down and wiggle around. It's a very entertaining sight, and the writer has stopped bothering with italicizing your actions. Because you know the truth, Kit. I created you. I can end you. I can take things back. Have you gone insane? That's for me and the reader to decide. + +"What did you do to me?" + +I got a prompt and I figured I could take this path in an interesting way. I was having trouble with this specific part of it. I remembered a comic I read once, Grant Morrison's Animal Man. It ended in a similar manner to this path: author and creation meeting each other. It touched me in a way I don't think any other story has, yet. + +"You created me?" + +Yeah, Kit. You're a figment of my imagination. If I want, I can hit delete on this story right now and you'd be gone forever. Just a shadow of what could have been in my mind. I've come close to wiping this story a few times. I wasn't sure I could ever complete it. I'm not sure if I ever wanted to. Writing this story has taught me a lot and I feel like once I finish it, I won't be learning anymore. + +"Everything that happened to me... You did that?" + +Yes, Kit. Your friends, they're not real. They're playthings. I've written a handful of lines for each of them. The only one that got any semblance of characterization was Lilith, the priest girl. Did you know that I went into this story without a name for any of them? I went into this story without a name for you, too. You were going to be Victor, once. + +"What are you saying? Can't you turn everything back?" + +Sure I can Kit, but it would be hollow. I'd go back to writing a story instead of rambling on incoherently, and it would end right as it got to the good part. That's how this entire story has gone; I have an idea, I write a few pages for it, I get bored, then I cut it off before it branches out too much. There's so many things in here that could make a full game, yet I only dedicate a handful of pages to those stories. + +"Why can't you just stop that, then? Make everything as long as it needs to? Why couldn't you make a story about myself and my friends, let us choose our fates, let the reader choose our fates?" + +Because that wasn't the story I wanted to tell. I wanted to be "edgy". I wanted to be "realistic". Cursing, and drinking, and violence, and a broken protagonist. You were never a hero, Kit. In fact, I could say that you killed countless men and women, and no one would bat an eye. They'd want to play as you more, if anything. The people here are drawn to villains. + +"What the hell do you want from me?" + +Me? I don't know. I'm writing this because I'm bored. Later I'm probably going to eat breakfast and pass out. Maybe watch a movie. Go for a walk. Something. But right now, it's me, and you, and the reader. I haven't forgotten you, reader. Why don't you exercise your "free will" and decide how this story ends for me, huh?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You scoff at the idea of leaving your home. The king says he'll send men your way if you don't respond? Oh, please. You can fend off any pansies he sends your way. Though you're getting up there in years, you can still fight with the strength of a hundred soldiers. + +With that, you resolve to continue on as you've been doing. For the next few days, you don't do much; you get your bread and wine from Bertrand, drink until you black out, then do it again. It continues this way until, finally, a week has passed since the letter. + +You've almost forgotten about it when Bertrand enters your room at around midday. He's already brought you your bread and wine, so you're not sure why he'd come here. His expression is a mask of worry and fear. "Explain yourself," you say, and Bertrand nods with a gulp. + +"The king has sent his men here, sir. They're here to take you away to Castle Oren." Bertrand is looking very afraid. + +"Send them away." + +"What?" + +"I said send them away. I don't wish to entertain them." + +"But sir..." +> Fine. If Bertrand is so hesitant, I'll do it myself. +"Fine," you grunt. "I'll do it myself." Of course Bertrand can't get them out of here. They're the king's men with an order to get you, not some con man looking to sell you cheap wares at an inflated price. He's never had to do this to someone who has good reason to come in, and it scares him. You understand, somewhat. + +For the first time in ages, you leave the master bedroom and walk the halls of your manor, Bertrand following after you. It's been well kept by your servants, for the odd occasion that someone comes to visit. The fine paintings adorning the walls are flawless and their frames clean of dust, the walls are painted a regal blue, and lanterns hung on the ceiling keep the place well lit. + +You walk out to the courtyard to greet the king's men. A lone tree sits in the center of the courtyard on a circular patch of grass, surrounded by a cobblestone path. A series of bushes encompass the manor itself, giving the entire courtyard a reserved, tidy appearance. The knights are sitting in wait and look up when you approach. One stands and walks over to you. + +He removes his helmet, revealing a youthful yet stern face. His sandy blond hair is cut short, and his green eyes burn a hole into your own grey ones. He gives you a salute, then speaks, "Good day, Sir Kit. I am Miller, of the Gold Hawk Knights. We've come here to take you with us to Castle Oren." +> I shake my head. "Afraid I won't oblige your request. Now leave." +Miller scowls at your calm request for him to leave. "I'm afraid I can't, Sir Kit. Please, come with us. I won't ask again." You can feel your anger flaring up, and for a moment you wish you had brought your sword to cut this bastard down. + +"You listen to me, Miller," you growl, hissing his name out like it's an insult. "I want to live in peace. You take your Gold Hawk Knights and get out of here. Leave me be." + +He shakes his head. "I was hoping it wouldn't come to this. Knights, apprehend Sir Kit." The two knights flanking Miller approach you, attempting to grab you. On instinct, you fight back, delivering a hook to one's face and causing him to stumble back towards Miller. The other quickly draws his sword and swings, but you duck under it and disarm him. With the longsword in hand, you quickly stab him in the chest. + +Blood pours out of his wound as you push him to the ground. You blink, suddenly realizing what you just did. Miller and the other knight look at you and their dying comrade in shock. Miller and his ally draw their own swords, pointing them at you. "You're under arrest, murderer! Surrender or our blades will taste your blood!" +> I didn't mean to do that... I can't believe... I surrender willingly. I deserve whatever fate awaits. +You're in as much shock as the two knights. Quickly, you drop the sword and raise your hands. Miller approaches you, rage written on his face, and hits you in the face with the pommel of his sword. Instantly, darkness takes you. The last thing you hear before you slip into unconsciousness is Miller telling his comrade, "Tie him up and get him in the wagon. Take Edward's corpse." + +When you wake up, you're face down on a cold stone floor. Pushing yourself up, you look around and see Miller not far from you. Seperating the two of you is a row of iron bars. "Miller," you say. "What is the meaning of this?" + +He sighs, pulling up a wooden chair and sitting down. "You should be thankful you're not on the chopping block. The king's respect for you is the only reason you're still alive. If you were any other man, your head would roll for killing a knight." + +You don't respond. The weight of what you did hits you full force in that moment. Because of it, you're going to rot here. + +"There will be no trial. If anything, you being in this cell is to protect you. The Gold Hawk Knights are furious." Miller stands, pushing the chair back. "Farewell, Kit." + +Miller heads to the door and shuts it, leaving you to your isolation. It's the last time you ever see him. + +For the next few years, your only human contact is when a guard comes in to deliver you some food. At first it's a nice break in the monotony of being alone in your cell, but soon it becomes part of the routine. Even when you try to strike up a conversation, the guard ignores you and just gives you your food. It's a lonely life. + +Eventually, the meals decrease in frequency, until one day you realize that it's been a week since you had food. You begin to yell, hoping to grab a guard's attention and get some food, but no one comes. Another week passes and you find yourself barely clinging onto what little life you have. The lack of food has been effecting you greatly, and the only water you can get is from drops of rain that come through your little window. + +When three weeks pass, you finally die. A guard comes the next day to remove your corpse. He drops it into a wagon of similar corpses, where you're sent off to be incinerated. A criminal such as yourself doesn't deserve a proper burial anyhow. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Miller scowls at your calm request for him to leave. "I'm afraid I can't, Sir Kit. Please, come with us. I won't ask again." You can feel your anger flaring up, and for a moment you wish you had brought your sword to cut this bastard down. + +"You listen to me, Miller," you growl, hissing his name out like it's an insult. "I want to live in peace. You take your Gold Hawk Knights and get out of here. Leave me be." + +He shakes his head. "I was hoping it wouldn't come to this. Knights, apprehend Sir Kit." The two knights flanking Miller approach you, attempting to grab you. On instinct, you fight back, delivering a hook to one's face and causing him to stumble back towards Miller. The other quickly draws his sword and swings, but you duck under it and disarm him. With the longsword in hand, you quickly stab him in the chest. + +Blood pours out of his wound as you push him to the ground. You blink, suddenly realizing what you just did. Miller and the other knight look at you and their dying comrade in shock. Miller and his ally draw their own swords, pointing them at you. "You're under arrest, murderer! Surrender or our blades will taste your blood!" +> I can't go down like this. I'll tell them to leave again, and if that doesn't work, I'll attack. +No. You can't let them take you like this. Standing there with bloody sword raised, you speak slowly, "I don't want to have to kill you both. Leave now and never return." There's a tense moment for a while as you stare at the two of them and they stare back. They're too scared to make the first move, and you don't want to make it. The standoff lasts for a moment longer, then... + +"Oh screw this!" Miller's ally yells, before rushing at you with a shout of rage. He swings his sword, which you easily deflect, then duck down for a sweeping slash that cuts through his abdomen. Clutching his wound, he collapses to the ground, writhing and moaning in agony as he slowly bleeds out. Miller stays back, examining you. + +"Your buddy won't die with that wound. It'll take a few days for him to bleed out all the way. Take him and go, if you know what's good for you," you say, giving Miller his last warning. Miller looks down at his companion, as though considering it. Then he shifts his gaze back to you, looking more furious than ever. + +"I won't let you walk free you bastard." With those words, he advances towards you. The two of you clash blades for a while, and whenever one of you tries to go for an opening the other blocks or parries. You're not as good with longswords as Miller is, specializing more in greatswords and their overwhelming force, but you're too stubborn to let him beat you. + +In the end, that stubbornness is what grants you victory. While Miller has been tiring, you've only been attacking more and more ferociously. Eventually, his defense slips, and you slide your blade right into his chest. His face morphs into a mask of pure shock as he drops his sword. He stares at you in fear, which quickly shifts to anger. He pushes himself forward, forcing the sword deeper into his body, while reaching out for your neck. His hands squeeze against your throat, at first tightly, then slowly weakening in strength until they fall limp. + +As his eyes close, you pull the blade out of him and let his corpse fall to the floor. His ally is still on the ground begging for death. You grant him the pleasure, holding his head down and sliding the blade into the base of his skull. He twitches slightly, then goes limp. You stand and consider what you just did. + +You could just as easily burn the bodies and head back inside, but there's no way the king would allow this. He could send more knights, perhaps far more than you could handle. On the other hand, there's the option to use this to spark a rebellion among the people. Though the king is far from tyrannical, there's enough dissent from the long-lasting war against the Empire of Kishak for the common people to attempt an uprising. With how much the people love you for your deeds, they'd join you in a rebellion in a heartbeat. +> I can't count on the goodwill I have built up. I'm going to just wait this out. +You can't be bothered to try something that stupid. The king has well trained knights and soldiers under his command; if you put together a rebellion, it would be destroyed as quickly as you build it up. Instead of deciding to go on a pointless endeavor such as that, you begin to gather the bodies up in a pile. You cover them in dried sticks and leaves, then start a fire. As soon as it's gotten large enough to engulf the bodies, you return into your home. The servants watch as you head to your room in mingled awe and terror, unsure of how to act around you. You head into your room, lay in bed and sleep the rest of the day away. + + +In the morning Bertrand comes with your bread and wine, looking a bit more cautious after what happened yesterday. You take it, send him out of the room, and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking as you always have. The next day, Bertrand comes in the morning with the bread and wine, which you take and spend the rest of the day eating and drinking. It continues on for weeks without interruption, until one day, something changes. + + +You wake in the early morning hours to a yell. Your head is pounding and your stomach is killing you, but you push through and get out of bed. Stumbling out of your room, you see a man slumped against the wall: Bertrand. "Bertrand!" you shout, running to him. As you get closer, however, you notice the blood trailing down his neck. It flows freely from a fierce red slash across his throat. Bertrand is dead. + + +You look around, wondering who in the hell did this to your servant, when you feel a sharp pain in your arm. Looking, you find that a crossbow bolt has embedded itself into your bicep. "W-what the hell!?" you choke out. Another bolt flies true, hitting your thigh and causing you to fall to a kneel. Footsteps approach from your left, and you turn your head to look. What you see is a man, dressed in black. He approaches you, pulling out a dagger. + + +"Who are you?" you ask. + + +He simply sticks the dagger to your throat and cuts. As you fall to the ground, vision darkening and lungs filling with blood, he speaks: "The king sends his regards." + + +Then, all is silent. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No. You can't let them take you like this. Standing there with bloody sword raised, you speak slowly, "I don't want to have to kill you both. Leave now and never return." There's a tense moment for a while as you stare at the two of them and they stare back. They're too scared to make the first move, and you don't want to make it. The standoff lasts for a moment longer, then... + +"Oh screw this!" Miller's ally yells, before rushing at you with a shout of rage. He swings his sword, which you easily deflect, then duck down for a sweeping slash that cuts through his abdomen. Clutching his wound, he collapses to the ground, writhing and moaning in agony as he slowly bleeds out. Miller stays back, examining you. + +"Your buddy won't die with that wound. It'll take a few days for him to bleed out all the way. Take him and go, if you know what's good for you," you say, giving Miller his last warning. Miller looks down at his companion, as though considering it. Then he shifts his gaze back to you, looking more furious than ever. + +"I won't let you walk free you bastard." With those words, he advances towards you. The two of you clash blades for a while, and whenever one of you tries to go for an opening the other blocks or parries. You're not as good with longswords as Miller is, specializing more in greatswords and their overwhelming force, but you're too stubborn to let him beat you. + +In the end, that stubbornness is what grants you victory. While Miller has been tiring, you've only been attacking more and more ferociously. Eventually, his defense slips, and you slide your blade right into his chest. His face morphs into a mask of pure shock as he drops his sword. He stares at you in fear, which quickly shifts to anger. He pushes himself forward, forcing the sword deeper into his body, while reaching out for your neck. His hands squeeze against your throat, at first tightly, then slowly weakening in strength until they fall limp. + +As his eyes close, you pull the blade out of him and let his corpse fall to the floor. His ally is still on the ground begging for death. You grant him the pleasure, holding his head down and sliding the blade into the base of his skull. He twitches slightly, then goes limp. You stand and consider what you just did. + +You could just as easily burn the bodies and head back inside, but there's no way the king would allow this. He could send more knights, perhaps far more than you could handle. On the other hand, there's the option to use this to spark a rebellion among the people. Though the king is far from tyrannical, there's enough dissent from the long-lasting war against the Empire of Kishak for the common people to attempt an uprising. With how much the people love you for your deeds, they'd join you in a rebellion in a heartbeat. +> Damn waiting in fear. I'll tear this kingdom down, and the people will help me do it. +You look at the corpses you just created and release a heaving sigh. There's not much else you can do now. The king will have your head for this either way, so you figure you might as well take more than a handful of knights down with you. This is the dumbest thing you've done in a while, and you've done a lot of dumb things in your life. + +You load the corpses up into the carriage they came in, then hurry back into your house to retrieve your sword and get into some more fitting traveler's clothes. As you stride through the halls of your home, the servants watch you warily, as if fearing that they may meet your blade next. You ignore them, ascending the stairs to your master bedroom and begin loading up. Once you're all done, you flip your cloak over your shoulder and walk out the door. The nearest town, a large village by the name of Everseed, is about half an hour away by horseback. + +Taking a seat in the carriage, you kick the horses in gear and ride to the town. The ride down the country road is quiet and peaceful, the best that can be expected. You know that it will be the last time for a while you get to relax and unwind. + +When you arrive in town, you stop the carriage in the most active place in town; in this case, the market. The people watch you curiously as you step off the carriage and approach a fountain in the center of the market. There, you raise your voice and speak, "Everyone! My name is Sir Kit of Droburg, the man who slayed the vile wizard that plagued our lands twenty years ago!" This gets all eyes on you as you approach the back of the cart again. + +"And these," you pull the cover of the cart off, revealing the three dead knights to the people. They gasp in shock, some moving to weapons in case they need to attack you. "These are three knights that the king sent to kill me. The lengths this man has gone to, trying to kill a hero such as myself. What has our kingdom come to?" You're bending the truth, a lot, but these people are eating it up. The villagers that went for weapons are looking furious, while the others left unarmed grab for makeshift weapons as well. + +"That bastard king! He's been taxing us so hard we barely have enough to pay for food!" one villager pipes up from the crowd. + +"He drafted my son into the war and he died! My boy was only 15!" a woman cries out. + +"He's been doin' nothin' but tearin' us down and buildin' himself up!" a farmer yells from the back. + +"And now, my friends, he's trying to kill the last true hero in this kingdom. A man like this must be stopped, once and for all. For the true Kingdom of Oren, we must eliminate this tyrant!" you shout, and the crowd answers with cheers and battle cries. Now, you have an army. You're not sure how this will end, but wherever it leads, the kingdom will be changed forever... + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Fine," you grunt. "I'll do it myself." Of course Bertrand can't get them out of here. They're the king's men with an order to get you, not some con man looking to sell you cheap wares at an inflated price. He's never had to do this to someone who has good reason to come in, and it scares him. You understand, somewhat. + +For the first time in ages, you leave the master bedroom and walk the halls of your manor, Bertrand following after you. It's been well kept by your servants, for the odd occasion that someone comes to visit. The fine paintings adorning the walls are flawless and their frames clean of dust, the walls are painted a regal blue, and lanterns hung on the ceiling keep the place well lit. + +You walk out to the courtyard to greet the king's men. A lone tree sits in the center of the courtyard on a circular patch of grass, surrounded by a cobblestone path. A series of bushes encompass the manor itself, giving the entire courtyard a reserved, tidy appearance. The knights are sitting in wait and look up when you approach. One stands and walks over to you. + +He removes his helmet, revealing a youthful yet stern face. His sandy blond hair is cut short, and his green eyes burn a hole into your own grey ones. He gives you a salute, then speaks, "Good day, Sir Kit. I am Miller, of the Gold Hawk Knights. We've come here to take you with us to Castle Oren." +> Considering it, I sigh and nod. "Fine. I'll go with you to Castle Oren." +Miller smiles at you, nodding at your answer. "I'm glad to hear it, sir. Go, gather your things and we'll head straight for Castle Oren." You nod at his request, quickly heading back inside and packing what you need. You make sure to grab your sword as well, as you know you'll need it. + +When you exit the manor, you and the three Gold Hawk Knights enter their wagon and begin the ride to Castle Oren. You end up having to stop for the night, but in the morning you continue on to finish the last stretch. You arrive at Castle Oren around lunch time. The castle is large and imposing, made of stone that has gathered a fair bit of moss over the years. It was built a thousand years before your time, and still stands after all this time with only minor renovations to keep it up. A town surrounds the castle, full of shops and inns and homes and other assorted buildings. People mill about, paying you no mind as the wagon rolls up to the castle gates. + +The guards there stand at attention, waiting for you to make a move. Miller nods to them, and they move to open up the gates. The wagon rides into the castle ground proper. Inside the castle grounds, the knights park their wagon and you all hop off. Miller stands beside you. "When can I see the King?" you ask. + +"Come along, I'll take you to him." Miller walks away. You follow closely behind, examining the castle grounds. The courtyard leading into the castle is home to many trees and flowers, a few of which you've never even seen. The King's gardeners must take their work very seriously. + +You head into the castle proper, in an entrance hall that doubles as a throne room. The King is nowhere in sight, and Miller continues on past the throne and to a door not far from it. As you step into the room, you see a man in fine clothing sitting at a desk. The desk houses a golden crown. The King is around his mid thirties, though the wrinkles in his face and the gray streaking his hair indicates a man at least a decade older. + +"Your highness. Sir Kit has arrived," Miller says. The King looks up from his writing at you, and gives a faint smile. He waves Miller off, and the young knight departs from the room. + +"Sir Kit. It is an honor to finally meet you." The King stands from the desk and approaches you. He's only a bit shorter than you, impressive considering your bulky stature, though his posture and build indicates he's never been a fight before. He sticks out a hand for you to shake, which you do. + +"The honor is all mine, your highness," you say, though rather half-heartedly. + +The King laughs. "Let's skip the formalities. Call me Walter. We're not here to discuss something officially." His face darkens. "I called you here because I need someone to weaken the Kishak Empire, so that my army can strike the final blow against them." + +"I see." + +"I need someone who doesn't mind getting their hands dirty, Sir Kit. I need a warrior such as you. I take it whatever you face on this mission will be enough for you to handle, and I'll be sending you backup anyhow." + +"What's this mission you're sending me on?" + +"My spies in Kishak have uncovered the location of the Empire's supply cache: in the heart of their capital city. If you can destroy the supply cache, there goes all of the Kishak army's food, weapons, and gunpowder. They'd be running on what they have left, and soon enough that would run out and my men would be able to drive them back." + +"... This sounds like a suicide mission." + +The King nods slowly. "Perhaps. But if you manage to see this mission through, the war will be won by next year. Would you not want to see an end to this war that has claimed so many lives? An end to a war your grandfathers would have fought in, and your grandchildren will fight in if it doesn't end?" + +You shake your head, chuckling. "You're wrong there. My grandfathers were simple farmers, and I don't have children. This war means nothing to me." + +"Maybe it doesn't. But think of the millions of lives that have been lost to it, and the millions of lives you will save by ending it." + +You sigh. At the very least, this is something to do. + +"Fine. Let's get prepped for this suicide mission." +> Continue +You spend the rest of the day in the castle, resting up and mentally preparing yourself for your mission. The King's servants bring you whatever you wish, and in this case, it's more alcohol so you can psych yourself up. Liquid courage and all that. By nightfall, you're as drunk as can be, staring silently at a wall as you usually do. +"Stop doing this." +"Well what do you want me to do?" you mumble, replying to no one. +"Anything else." +A chuckle escapes your lips. "Really? I guess you'd prefer me going on a drunken rampage and slaughtering all the guards." +"That's not what I meant, Kit." +"Then what did you mean?" +"I meant you need to stop drinking. It's not doing you any good." +"Of course it's not doing me any good if I'm having a conversation with myself." +"You know who I am." +"Quit lying. You're just a figment of my imagination I start hearing when I get too wasted." +"Please, Kit. For me." +"Buzz off." You throw the empty bottle of wine in your hand at the wall, then crawl into bed. You have a long day ahead of you tomorrow, and you need your sleep. + +In the morning, you're woken up by a knock on your door. You get up, groaning slightly, and head for it. When you open it, Miller stands before you. "The King sent me to wake you. We're leaving today." + +"We?" you ask. + +"He asked me to accompany you, along with a mage in our military. A small enough team to get behind Kishak lines unnoticed, and hopefully enough to provide backup should you need it." + +You nod, heading to the dresser to grab some clothes. Miller turns away so you can get dressed, yet you still speak to him. "So what are you going to bring to the table?" you ask as you slide into a pair of breeches. + +"I was knighted at twenty-one, the youngest man to be knighted... Aside from yourself, of course. For the past seven years I have served the Royal Family, and have led many knights to victory against Kishak forces." + +"Hrm. How good are you with a sword?" You put on your boots and pick out a shirt. + +"I've never lost a one-on-one sword fight, sir. I have also managed to take down ten men at once with only minor injuries." + +"This bodes well then." You finish your ensemble by sliding on a tunic. "Alright then. Let's get going." Miller turns to face you then nods. He allows you to grab your sword and hook it onto your back, then leads you to where you'll depart. + +You head through several hallways before Miller stops in front of a bookcase. He taps on it once, pauses, taps twice, pauses, taps once, pauses, then taps three ties in quick succession. The bookcase opens slowly, and he leads you through a secret passage. A whistle escapes your lips. "How fancy." + +"Indeed." + +Miller continues leading you through the tunnel for what seems like half an hour before you come out the other side. You're in a clearing, about a mile out from the Castle, where a wagon and two people wait for you. You're not far from Kishak now, only a few more miles until the border. + +One of the two people, a woman about a year younger than Miller, steps forward. She eyes you up and down, and looks unimpressed. "This is the legendary hero who saved our city? He looks like a drunk and smells like one too." You give her a quick glare. + +"Hold your tongue, Iris. If it weren't for this man, we wouldn't be here talking today," the other person says, an older man who is checking the horses. You shift your glare to him. It wasn't just you. + +"Please. This man had backup even then. Did you only hear the children's tales, Oliver?" the woman, Iris, asks. "If it weren't for his friends, I'm sure he'd have died not far into his journey." Well, at least she has her facts straight. + +"Both of you, shut your damn mouths," you say, stepping forward. "Whatever your thoughts on me are, I'm the real deal, and we're here to finish a war." You turn to the man, Oliver. "I assume you're our driver?" + +"Aye, I am. I'll take you as far as the border. There, you'll be on your own. Kishak's capital, Ornislov, is only a couple miles out. You should reach there in no time if you stay off the roads and don't stop for anything." + +"Right," you nod. You head towards the wagon, motioning for Miller and Iris to follow you. "Come on. Don't have all day." You climb into back, and they follow. After a moment, the wagon begins moving towards the border. You stay silent for a moment, assessing Iris, before speaking up. "I did this with Miller so you should be no different: what are you bringing to the table?" + +Iris scoffs. "I spent my whole life training at the Academy in Loren. I enlisted with the military when I came of age, and I've seen my fair share of battles. I can also speak fluent Kishak, so if you need a translation just ask me." + +"That'll come in handy. How quick are you at casting?" + +"I can get a fireball off before you can blink." + +"Good enough for me." You pause, then consider something. "How'd you know about my friends? There's not exactly much documentation on the real story." + +"You five passed through Loren twenty years ago, right? You helped the Academy secure a magical artifact while you were in the area." + +"... Yeah, we were. What about it?" + +"I was there. I was about seven at the time, and got to meet one of your friends. The mage woman." + +Your face darkens. "Is that so?" + +"Yeah. She was nice. Told me about the quest you all were on, even gave me pointers on how to be a good mage." A faint smile appears on Iris' face as she recalls your friend, Grace. "Even told me not to fall for some jarheaded fighter boy. I think it's obvious who she was talking about." Her smile shifts to a frown. "A shame what happened to her... I know I was being rude, but I want you to know that I am sorry for your lo-" + +"Can it. I don't want your sympathy." + +Iris glares at you, before shaking her head slightly and averting her gaze. The rest of the ride is silent, and before long the wagon stops. Oliver's voice pipes up from the front, "There's a gap here between the outposts. If you keep pushing through the fields you should reach some woods, head through there and just keep going forward. Eventually, you'll get to Ornislov." + +"Right," you say, climbing out of the wagon. Miller and Iris join you, and you see the wagon off as Oliver turns it around and begins driving back. + +You're beginning the march to the forest when Miller stops you. "I know a way to Ornislov that's faster, and bypasses the forest. However, it's much riskier and involves traveling out in the open. If we're lucky we'll get there much quicker." + +You consider it. Miller warns that it's risky, but you're used to high risks. Maybe this path is worth a try? +> "Fine, let's take your path. Be ready to fight, just in case." +Miller nods, then takes the lead. He begins heading southeast instead of the east you were expecting. "If keep heading this way, then go around the forest and keep heading east, we'll get to Ornislov faster. I know a way in." + +You quirk an eyebrow. "You know a way in?" + +Miller nods solemnly. "I was sent there on a covert mission a few months. It's how we found out about the supply cache. Most of my team died, but I managed to escape." You nod at Miller's response, and continue following him. The sun is high in the sky, and on the horizon you can see Kishak troops marching. They wouldn't be able to spot you from here, but still, Miller gets down low. You and Iris follow his lead. + +"Keep low, stick to the tall grass. If we're quiet enough, they won't stop us," Miller warns, then continues walking slowly. The process continues on, and after what feels like hours but must have been only ten minutes or so, the Kishak soldiers are long gone. Your team releases a collective sigh of relief and stands, continuing on at a much faster pace... + +... That is, until a bolt flies into your shoulder. You shout a curse in pain, then dive straight for the ground. Your companions follow suit. "Are you okay, Sir Kit?" Miller hisses urgently. You wave him off, then grip the bolt. You pull it out, slowly to ensure you don't tear any muscles, and let out a sigh of relief when it's out. + +Iris scowls. "Great thinking, Miller. You've just gotten us all killed." + +"Damn it, keep quiet!" Miller hisses. + +"Both of you, shut up and let me think," you say. There's two options here: you can either run for the woods, exposing yourselves for a bit before getting to adequate cover, or you can sneak forward and attempt to take out the archer. Either way, you're putting great risk on you and your team. +> Run for the woods, it's the only way to ensure our safety. +"We run for the woods and don't fucking stop. You two hear me?" you ask. Miller and Iris nod, rather hesitantly. "Alright. Good. Wait for my mark..." You peek your head up slowly, above the tall grass. The lone archer kneels on the road, about forty yards away, and watches slowly. You wait until he's looking away from your current position, then nod. "Now!" + +The three of you pull yourselves up and begin running for the woods. A few bolts fly past you, but none manage to hit you. You keep running, until you hear a shout behind you. Whipping around quickly, you see a bolt has managed to catch Iris right in the back, and she's fallen to the ground. "Go, dammit!" she shouts, pulling herself along. "I'll be fine!" + +"Don't you die on me!" Miller shouts, and moves to help her up. He gets a bolt through the neck for his troubles, and collapses to the ground. With no other options, you continue sprinting to the woods as fast as you can. You hear a shout from Iris, presumably having another bolt hit her, then another which is cut short. + +Your companions are dead. Again. And this time, it really is your fault. You suddenly find yourself stopping in place, no far from the edge of the woods. This bastard took out both of your allies just as you were beginning your quest. And by God, there's no way you're going to let him get away with it. + +You unhook your sword from its chain on your back, and with a primal yell rush his position. Bolts fly your way, but it doesn't matter. He's going to die. Maybe you will, too, but his head will roll before yours does. + +You raise your sword to deflect any bolts coming your way, and before long you're right up in his face. He fires a bolt which hits your gut, but doesn't have time to reload as you slam your sword into his shoulder, cleaving him in half. That takes care of that. + +You drop to your knees and pull the bolt out of your stomach with a grunt of pain. The sounds of many men running hits your ears, and you turn your head to see the soldiers from before marching right for you. A ferocious grin spreads across your face. This is one way to go out, at least. + +You raise your sword and meet their charge head on. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Miller nods, then takes the lead. He begins heading southeast instead of the east you were expecting. "If keep heading this way, then go around the forest and keep heading east, we'll get to Ornislov faster. I know a way in." + +You quirk an eyebrow. "You know a way in?" + +Miller nods solemnly. "I was sent there on a covert mission a few months. It's how we found out about the supply cache. Most of my team died, but I managed to escape." You nod at Miller's response, and continue following him. The sun is high in the sky, and on the horizon you can see Kishak troops marching. They wouldn't be able to spot you from here, but still, Miller gets down low. You and Iris follow his lead. + +"Keep low, stick to the tall grass. If we're quiet enough, they won't stop us," Miller warns, then continues walking slowly. The process continues on, and after what feels like hours but must have been only ten minutes or so, the Kishak soldiers are long gone. Your team releases a collective sigh of relief and stands, continuing on at a much faster pace... + +... That is, until a bolt flies into your shoulder. You shout a curse in pain, then dive straight for the ground. Your companions follow suit. "Are you okay, Sir Kit?" Miller hisses urgently. You wave him off, then grip the bolt. You pull it out, slowly to ensure you don't tear any muscles, and let out a sigh of relief when it's out. + +Iris scowls. "Great thinking, Miller. You've just gotten us all killed." + +"Damn it, keep quiet!" Miller hisses. + +"Both of you, shut up and let me think," you say. There's two options here: you can either run for the woods, exposing yourselves for a bit before getting to adequate cover, or you can sneak forward and attempt to take out the archer. Either way, you're putting great risk on you and your team. +> Go for the archer, take him out before he alerts the others. +"It's just a lone sniper out there, waiting. If there were more, they'd be firing volleys of bolts and arrows right at us. I'm going to sneak ahead and try to take that archer down. You two stay here and keep your heads down." Your companions nod slowly, still unsure of the plan. You poke your head up a bit, trying to spot him. There he is, about forty yards away. You duck back down and begin crawling towards him. + +It takes several agonizing minutes, occasionally stopping to poke your head up and hoping he won't spot you, but soon enough you're within charging distance of the archer. You slowly unhook your blade from its chain on your back, taking a deep breath to ready yourself, before popping up and running straight for him. He manages to get a bolt off, hitting you in the thigh, but you carry on despite the wound and swing your sword at him. His head rolls on the ground not long after, and you pant. + +You remove the bolt like you did the other one and look around. No one here yet. You shout back to your companions, "Let's get going!" Slowly, they rise from the grass. Miller takes the lead again, and the rest of the march goes on without incident. + +After a few hours of walking, you arrive at Ornislov just as the sun is starting to set. The city is more like a giant fortress, surrounded by walls on all sides with no obvious entry points aside from the gates. Miller leads you around the city walls, to a sewer grate. "This is how we got in last time. Come on, get in." You and Iris crawl through the grate as Miller holds it open. He climbs in after you, shutting it. + +Iris summons a fireball in her hand, keeping it held out to illuminate the area. The sewer tunnel stretches on for what seems like miles. There's a few latters every couple of yards, likely leading up into the city streets. Miller takes the lead again, walking past several ladders until he stops in front of one. "This is it. Above is a warehouse, where all the supplies are kept. There's guards around, so we'll have to take them out." + +You and Iris nod. "Let's go." + +The three of you begin climbing the ladder. +> Continue +Once you get above ground, you pause to examine the warehouse. It's bland and non-descript, made of wood and flanked on both sides by identical warehouses. Miller points out the one you're staring at. "This is it. There's guards inside. Come on, I know a way inside." You and Iris follow him to the side of the warehouse. There, a single wooden door stands, which Miller cracks open slowly. No one in sight, at least for now. + +The three of you step inside, crouching down low. There's guards patrolling the warehouse, hands on swords at their hips. You hear two of them having a conversation in Kishak. You whisper, "Can I get a translation?" + +Iris nods. + +"What are those two saying?" You point out the two guards. + +She listens in for a moment, then smiles slowly. "They're talking about how boring warehouse duty is. Let's spice it up a bit." She conjures up an smoky green orb in your hand. You wonder what it is for a moment, before she shoots it straight at the two guards. A faint cloud comes into existence around them, and as they breathe it in their eyes sag. After a few moments, the two collapse, sleeping. Iris nods. "Come on." + +The three of you continue on like that, you and Miller keeping an eye out for guards while Iris takes them out quickly and quietly. Before long, the guards are all down, and the warehouse is yours for the taking. You approach the nearest supply box and open it, finding a large supply of food. You open the next, and find hundreds of crossbows. The next, hundreds of swords. It goes on and on, each crate containing an ungodly amount of supplies. + +Nodding, you motion to Iris. "Light it up." The mage nods, before summoning up a fireball and shooting it right at the nearest crate. Then, she summons another and fires it, then another, and another. Before long, the building is starting to go up in flames. It seems like your work here is done, and you ready to leave... Before you hear a shout in Kishak. + +A guard. + +He runs straight for the front door and bolts before you can do anything, and the three of you share a look of shock. Then, Miller and Iris bolt, you trailing behind as fast as you can. The three of you get out of the warehouse and begin to open up the hatch leading into the sewers, while you hear a sharp horn go off in the distance. This is bad. + +Miller cracks open the hatch and motions for the two of you to get in. As you do, Iris fires off a few more fireballs at the other warehouses. "Just in case!" she says, before joining you on the ladder. Miller gets in right away, closes the hatch above you all. + +As you three enter the sewers and then quickly leave it, the sounds of marching footsteps greet your ears. The Kishak soldiers are moving fast. They must have sent some to investigate the warehouses, while the others were sent to find you on the outside. The three of you take off into the night as fast as you can, keeping an eye out for soldiers. + +You get about a mile away when you notice the squadron of soldiers following after you. They must be one hundred men in all, all bolting straight for you. "We've got company!" you shout to your companions, who quickly notice the threat and pick up the pace. The three of you continue on, then notice an old log cabin on the side of the road. Acting quickly, the three of you duck in there. + +Miller slams the door shut and immediately moves a nearby bookshelf in front of it. "That won't hold for long," you warn. + +"I know. It's more for my piece of mind," he replies, slumping down into a sitting position. + +"What are we going to do?" Iris asks. You and Miller don't give her an answer. "We accomplished our mission, but now we're behind enemy lines with no chance of rescue. Are we just supposed to sit back and die?" + +You pat her on the shoulder, and nod. "Afraid so. We did the right thing. They'll make martyrs out of us, probably." + +Miller sighs. "So we're just supposed to give in and die, is that it?" + +Iris is fuming. "No. We're not going to just give in and die. We're going to go out there and give them hell before we do." + +"No use. There's one hundred of them and three of us. We'd be slaughtered." Miller places his face in his hands. + +"Better to take at least a few of them with us before they kill us, right?" Iris asks. "What do you think, Kit?" +> "You're right. Let's give those Kishak bastards hell." +Iris smiles. "I guess you are the real deal." + +Despite yourself, you crack a smile too. "Yeah. I guess I am." + +Miller sighs, then stands up. He unsheathes his sword, and sighs. "Well then, let's see to it that these Kishak sons of bitches meet their maker." He moves the bookshelf from the door, and looks to the two of you as he grips the door handle. "You two ready?" + +"Ready as I'll ever be," Iris says. + +You nod. "Let's get this over with." + +He pushes the door open, and the three of you move out as quickly as you can. There's at least one hundred Kishak soldiers in front of you, all armed with swords and axes and pikes and whatever else they have. The three of you stand side by side, readying your weapons; Miller takes a battle stance with his sword, Iris prepares an arc of electricity, and you grip your blade with both hands. + +The Kishak soldiers charge, and the three of you meet them head on. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Once you get above ground, you pause to examine the warehouse. It's bland and non-descript, made of wood and flanked on both sides by identical warehouses. Miller points out the one you're staring at. "This is it. There's guards inside. Come on, I know a way inside." You and Iris follow him to the side of the warehouse. There, a single wooden door stands, which Miller cracks open slowly. No one in sight, at least for now. + +The three of you step inside, crouching down low. There's guards patrolling the warehouse, hands on swords at their hips. You hear two of them having a conversation in Kishak. You whisper, "Can I get a translation?" + +Iris nods. + +"What are those two saying?" You point out the two guards. + +She listens in for a moment, then smiles slowly. "They're talking about how boring warehouse duty is. Let's spice it up a bit." She conjures up an smoky green orb in your hand. You wonder what it is for a moment, before she shoots it straight at the two guards. A faint cloud comes into existence around them, and as they breathe it in their eyes sag. After a few moments, the two collapse, sleeping. Iris nods. "Come on." + +The three of you continue on like that, you and Miller keeping an eye out for guards while Iris takes them out quickly and quietly. Before long, the guards are all down, and the warehouse is yours for the taking. You approach the nearest supply box and open it, finding a large supply of food. You open the next, and find hundreds of crossbows. The next, hundreds of swords. It goes on and on, each crate containing an ungodly amount of supplies. + +Nodding, you motion to Iris. "Light it up." The mage nods, before summoning up a fireball and shooting it right at the nearest crate. Then, she summons another and fires it, then another, and another. Before long, the building is starting to go up in flames. It seems like your work here is done, and you ready to leave... Before you hear a shout in Kishak. + +A guard. + +He runs straight for the front door and bolts before you can do anything, and the three of you share a look of shock. Then, Miller and Iris bolt, you trailing behind as fast as you can. The three of you get out of the warehouse and begin to open up the hatch leading into the sewers, while you hear a sharp horn go off in the distance. This is bad. + +Miller cracks open the hatch and motions for the two of you to get in. As you do, Iris fires off a few more fireballs at the other warehouses. "Just in case!" she says, before joining you on the ladder. Miller gets in right away, closes the hatch above you all. + +As you three enter the sewers and then quickly leave it, the sounds of marching footsteps greet your ears. The Kishak soldiers are moving fast. They must have sent some to investigate the warehouses, while the others were sent to find you on the outside. The three of you take off into the night as fast as you can, keeping an eye out for soldiers. + +You get about a mile away when you notice the squadron of soldiers following after you. They must be one hundred men in all, all bolting straight for you. "We've got company!" you shout to your companions, who quickly notice the threat and pick up the pace. The three of you continue on, then notice an old log cabin on the side of the road. Acting quickly, the three of you duck in there. + +Miller slams the door shut and immediately moves a nearby bookshelf in front of it. "That won't hold for long," you warn. + +"I know. It's more for my piece of mind," he replies, slumping down into a sitting position. + +"What are we going to do?" Iris asks. You and Miller don't give her an answer. "We accomplished our mission, but now we're behind enemy lines with no chance of rescue. Are we just supposed to sit back and die?" + +You pat her on the shoulder, and nod. "Afraid so. We did the right thing. They'll make martyrs out of us, probably." + +Miller sighs. "So we're just supposed to give in and die, is that it?" + +Iris is fuming. "No. We're not going to just give in and die. We're going to go out there and give them hell before we do." + +"No use. There's one hundred of them and three of us. We'd be slaughtered." Miller places his face in his hands. + +"Better to take at least a few of them with us before they kill us, right?" Iris asks. "What do you think, Kit?" +> "It's pointless. Let's just... Wait it out." +Iris wrinkles her nose at you. "Wait it out? The hell do you mean, wait it out? Wait until they burst in here and separate our heads from our bodies?" + +You sigh, sitting down on the floor. "Something like that. We're going to die, might as well accept it." + +She shakes her head. "The man I heard about would have gone out and faced them head on, even if it meant death." + +"Sorry to disappoint you, kid. But I'm not that man anymore." You pull your knapsack off your back and reach into it, finding one of the bottles of wine you had Bertrand stash for you. You sigh, then pop it open and take a swig. You hold the bottle out. "Either of you want a sip?" + +Miller grabs it first and chugs the bottle greedily. After a few moments, Iris snatches it out of his hands and takes a drink of her own, as if accepting defeat. She sits down on the floor with you and Miller, and the three of you pass the bottle around and drink for a while. + +There's the pounding on the door as the Kishak soldiers try to get in. The bookshelf rattles with every hit, but it stands its ground. The three of you continue drinking. After all, you have all the time in the world. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You spend the rest of the day in the castle, resting up and mentally preparing yourself for your mission. The King's servants bring you whatever you wish, and in this case, it's more alcohol so you can psych yourself up. Liquid courage and all that. By nightfall, you're as drunk as can be, staring silently at a wall as you usually do. +"Stop doing this." +"Well what do you want me to do?" you mumble, replying to no one. +"Anything else." +A chuckle escapes your lips. "Really? I guess you'd prefer me going on a drunken rampage and slaughtering all the guards." +"That's not what I meant, Kit." +"Then what did you mean?" +"I meant you need to stop drinking. It's not doing you any good." +"Of course it's not doing me any good if I'm having a conversation with myself." +"You know who I am." +"Quit lying. You're just a figment of my imagination I start hearing when I get too wasted." +"Please, Kit. For me." +"Buzz off." You throw the empty bottle of wine in your hand at the wall, then crawl into bed. You have a long day ahead of you tomorrow, and you need your sleep. + +In the morning, you're woken up by a knock on your door. You get up, groaning slightly, and head for it. When you open it, Miller stands before you. "The King sent me to wake you. We're leaving today." + +"We?" you ask. + +"He asked me to accompany you, along with a mage in our military. A small enough team to get behind Kishak lines unnoticed, and hopefully enough to provide backup should you need it." + +You nod, heading to the dresser to grab some clothes. Miller turns away so you can get dressed, yet you still speak to him. "So what are you going to bring to the table?" you ask as you slide into a pair of breeches. + +"I was knighted at twenty-one, the youngest man to be knighted... Aside from yourself, of course. For the past seven years I have served the Royal Family, and have led many knights to victory against Kishak forces." + +"Hrm. How good are you with a sword?" You put on your boots and pick out a shirt. + +"I've never lost a one-on-one sword fight, sir. I have also managed to take down ten men at once with only minor injuries." + +"This bodes well then." You finish your ensemble by sliding on a tunic. "Alright then. Let's get going." Miller turns to face you then nods. He allows you to grab your sword and hook it onto your back, then leads you to where you'll depart. + +You head through several hallways before Miller stops in front of a bookcase. He taps on it once, pauses, taps twice, pauses, taps once, pauses, then taps three ties in quick succession. The bookcase opens slowly, and he leads you through a secret passage. A whistle escapes your lips. "How fancy." + +"Indeed." + +Miller continues leading you through the tunnel for what seems like half an hour before you come out the other side. You're in a clearing, about a mile out from the Castle, where a wagon and two people wait for you. You're not far from Kishak now, only a few more miles until the border. + +One of the two people, a woman about a year younger than Miller, steps forward. She eyes you up and down, and looks unimpressed. "This is the legendary hero who saved our city? He looks like a drunk and smells like one too." You give her a quick glare. + +"Hold your tongue, Iris. If it weren't for this man, we wouldn't be here talking today," the other person says, an older man who is checking the horses. You shift your glare to him. It wasn't just you. + +"Please. This man had backup even then. Did you only hear the children's tales, Oliver?" the woman, Iris, asks. "If it weren't for his friends, I'm sure he'd have died not far into his journey." Well, at least she has her facts straight. + +"Both of you, shut your damn mouths," you say, stepping forward. "Whatever your thoughts on me are, I'm the real deal, and we're here to finish a war." You turn to the man, Oliver. "I assume you're our driver?" + +"Aye, I am. I'll take you as far as the border. There, you'll be on your own. Kishak's capital, Ornislov, is only a couple miles out. You should reach there in no time if you stay off the roads and don't stop for anything." + +"Right," you nod. You head towards the wagon, motioning for Miller and Iris to follow you. "Come on. Don't have all day." You climb into back, and they follow. After a moment, the wagon begins moving towards the border. You stay silent for a moment, assessing Iris, before speaking up. "I did this with Miller so you should be no different: what are you bringing to the table?" + +Iris scoffs. "I spent my whole life training at the Academy in Loren. I enlisted with the military when I came of age, and I've seen my fair share of battles. I can also speak fluent Kishak, so if you need a translation just ask me." + +"That'll come in handy. How quick are you at casting?" + +"I can get a fireball off before you can blink." + +"Good enough for me." You pause, then consider something. "How'd you know about my friends? There's not exactly much documentation on the real story." + +"You five passed through Loren twenty years ago, right? You helped the Academy secure a magical artifact while you were in the area." + +"... Yeah, we were. What about it?" + +"I was there. I was about seven at the time, and got to meet one of your friends. The mage woman." + +Your face darkens. "Is that so?" + +"Yeah. She was nice. Told me about the quest you all were on, even gave me pointers on how to be a good mage." A faint smile appears on Iris' face as she recalls your friend, Grace. "Even told me not to fall for some jarheaded fighter boy. I think it's obvious who she was talking about." Her smile shifts to a frown. "A shame what happened to her... I know I was being rude, but I want you to know that I am sorry for your lo-" + +"Can it. I don't want your sympathy." + +Iris glares at you, before shaking her head slightly and averting her gaze. The rest of the ride is silent, and before long the wagon stops. Oliver's voice pipes up from the front, "There's a gap here between the outposts. If you keep pushing through the fields you should reach some woods, head through there and just keep going forward. Eventually, you'll get to Ornislov." + +"Right," you say, climbing out of the wagon. Miller and Iris join you, and you see the wagon off as Oliver turns it around and begins driving back. + +You're beginning the march to the forest when Miller stops you. "I know a way to Ornislov that's faster, and bypasses the forest. However, it's much riskier and involves traveling out in the open. If we're lucky we'll get there much quicker." + +You consider it. Miller warns that it's risky, but you're used to high risks. Maybe this path is worth a try? +> "No, we'll take the path that was suggested. Let's get going." +Miller nods. "Alright. We don't know of any outposts in those woods, so we should be able to get through undetected." With those words, the three of you continue on to the woods. You walk through the fields without incidence, and get to the edge of the forest in record time. + +The three of you march through it, keeping an eye out. You're there for about an hour, continuing to march on, when you hear voices up ahead. The three of you stop in your tracks and get down low, listening. The voices are speaking Kishak. You turn to face your companions. "Can I get a translation?" you ask. + +Iris nods, and listens to the voices. Her face goes pale. "... They're talking about how boring it is to be in an outpost in the middle of the woods." You and Miller share a look of surprise, then turn to face the direction of the voices again. A new outpost, one that the military didn't know about. + +Miller pipes up. "We go around it as slowly and carefully as we can." + +Iris shakes her head. "It can't be that many. We go in there and light them up." + +Looks like it's up to you to decide what to do. +> We'll go around like Miller suggested. +You shake your head at Iris. "That's a damn stupid idea. We go around it like Miller suggested, keep low to the ground. If we're lucky, they won't see us." + +Miller nods in approval, while Iris scoffs. The three of you keep low as you move to head around the voices. As you push through the greenery, you notice the outpost. It's large and well-fortified; surprising, considering its location. Must be some sort of well-kept or something of the sort. There's a dozen Kishak soldiers wandering around, keeping an eye out. + +The three of you continue walking. There's a few times when you're sure you'll be spotted, but soon enough you manage to move far away enough from the outpost that you can walk normally again. Your team releases a collective sigh of relief that you're out of there. The three of you continue through the forest without incident. + +After a few hours of walking, you arrive at Ornislov a couple of hours into the night. The city is more like a giant fortress, surrounded by walls on all sides with no obvious entry points aside from the gates. Miller leads you around the city walls, to a sewer grate. "This is how we got in last time. Come on, get in." You and Iris crawl through the grate as Miller holds it open. He climbs in after you, shutting it. + +Iris summons a fireball in her hand, keeping it held out to illuminate the area. The sewer tunnel stretches on for what seems like miles. There's a few latters every couple of yards, likely leading up into the city streets. Miller takes the lead again, walking past several ladders until he stops in front of one. "This is it. Above is a warehouse, where all the supplies are kept. There's guards around, so we'll have to take them out." + +You and Iris nod. "Let's go."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Miller nods. "Alright. We don't know of any outposts in those woods, so we should be able to get through undetected." With those words, the three of you continue on to the woods. You walk through the fields without incidence, and get to the edge of the forest in record time. + +The three of you march through it, keeping an eye out. You're there for about an hour, continuing to march on, when you hear voices up ahead. The three of you stop in your tracks and get down low, listening. The voices are speaking Kishak. You turn to face your companions. "Can I get a translation?" you ask. + +Iris nods, and listens to the voices. Her face goes pale. "... They're talking about how boring it is to be in an outpost in the middle of the woods." You and Miller share a look of surprise, then turn to face the direction of the voices again. A new outpost, one that the military didn't know about. + +Miller pipes up. "We go around it as slowly and carefully as we can." + +Iris shakes her head. "It can't be that many. We go in there and light them up." + +Looks like it's up to you to decide what to do. +> We'll take them down like Iris suggested. +You shake your head at Miller. "Remember, this'll make it easier for the military to come through the area. If we're quick and efficient, we'll barely miss any time." + +Iris nods, smiling in approval that you agreed with her. + +Miller sighs, shaking his head. "I don't like it." + +"Too bad. That's what we're doing. Now come on, let's go." You get up, unhooking your sword from your back, and march towards the voices. As you break through the brush and step into view of the outpost, you're surprised to find a well-defended fort instead of a dingy wooden watchtower like you were expecting. A dozen or so Kishak wander about, waiting for an attack. + +"Shi-" Iris' curse is cut off when a bolt flies into her throat, and she collapses to the ground. She twitches for a moment, then goes still. A horn blows, and the soldiers all turn to you. Miller unsheathes his sword and charges at the nearest Kishak soldier, impaling him. He doesn't last long either, however, as a bolt flies true and hits him in the chest, followed by another. For added measure, a soldier runs up and runs his spear through Miller's gut. The knight falls to the ground, dead. + +The remaining soldiers turn to you. You sigh, shaking your head. Dumb move. Shouldn't have done it. Now you're dead for sure. + +You grin, however. Doesn't mean you won't go down without a fight. + +You charge forward with a primal yell, meeting the soldiers head on. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your latest quest begins not with the destruction of your manor or the death of someone close to you, but rather with a letter. + + +Bertrand, your loyal servant, comes to your room in the early morning hours to drop off today's dosage of bread and wine. But on the platter, tucked in between two loaves of bread, is a letter. The seal is emblazoned with the royal coat of arms. You eye Bertrand warily, and the old man gives a sigh. "Apologies, my lord. A knight came to the manor this morning, and he requested that I pass this along to you. The knight said that it's an invitation to the royal castle from the king himself. I suggest you read it." + + +With a sigh of your own, you rip open the envelope and unfold the letter, taking a look at the contents. + + +"Dear Sir, + + +I have need of a man of your talents. There are important matters to discuss regarding the ongoing war between the Kingdom of Oren and the Empire of Kishak. You must report to Castle Oren as soon as you may, though I urge you to arrive soon. If a week has passed without word from you, then I am afraid I must send my men to acquire you immediately. I hope that you will come. + + +Regards, + +King Walter III." + + +You scoff at the letter. Bastard king, sitting on his throne while his dogs do the work. You suppose that he considers you one of them. The question lies in whether you are indeed one of the dogs that mindlessly obeys orders, or whether you'll break from the pack and carve your own path. +> I've nothing better to do. I'll go to Castle Oren. +You shake your head slightly, before shrugging. There's not much you do in your day to day life, and at the very least, this is something. "Bertrand," you say. "Get to packing my things. I'm going to Castle Oren at dawn." Your servant seems very surprised by this, but immediately leaves the room to get a knapsack for you. He comes back not long after and begins packing the essentials: changes of clothes, a tinderbox from your dresser, and lantern oil, along with some of the bread and wine he came to give you. + +He nods to you, taking the knapsack. "I'll pack it in your carriage, sir. In the morning we'll go." With those words, he leaves the room. You sigh, before popping open the remaining bottle of wine and beginning your daily routine. By nightfall, not a drop remains of the wine nor a crumb of the bread. The weight of the situation hangs heavily on you: tomorrow, you're going to leave your home for the first time in years to fight a war that isn't yours to fight for a man who will never care for you. It's enough to make you reconsider your plans. Almost. + +At least, this is something you can use your talents for. Twenty years and your blade hasn't tasted a drop of blood. You feel as though you're getting rusty, that your time is long past, and it would be best to turn this offer down... No. You need to prove to yourself that you can still do this. Age means nothing for a person with your raw strength and skill, and you could kill four times as many men as a soldier half your age and twice your size. You were always told that you had a warrior's heart. Soon, you shall reaffirm it once and for all. + +When the sun dawns on the horizon, you get up and get dressed into practical clothing. Then, you grab your old sword, giving it an experimental swing at the air. It's large, only a bit shorter than your tall frame, and almost as wide as your torso. A greatsword that no man but you could wield. After hooking it onto your back, you head down to where your carriage is stored. Bertrand is already there, waiting for you in the driver's seat. "I packed some of my things as well, sir. Hope you don't mind me coming with you," he says. You nod, getting into the passengers seat. He spurs the horses into action with the reigns, and the two of you begin the ride to Castle Oren. + +You pass through a town on the way there and pass by several small hamlets. The sun is high in the sky when you see something on the horizon: a group of men sifting through a broken down carriage on the road. The men are dressed in fur and hides, and have chipped and dented axes at their sides. Highwaymen, bandits who prey on anyone daring to go from one place to another by the main roads. It makes you sick just looking at them. Then, you hear a woman's scream from the carriage. A noble lady in fine clothing runs from the carriage, screaming all the while. The highwaymen chase after her, abandoning the carriage. + +You grip your blade... +> ... Then jump out and chase after the bandits, intent on killing them. +Damn these sick bastards. Robbing and killing the innocent. You jump out of the carriage and begin to chase after them. Faintly, you hear Bertrand yelling at you, but the pounding of your head as a cold rage runs through you blocks out any sounds but the woman's screams. You chase the highwaymen down; it doesn't take long, you find them just as one tackles the noble woman to the ground. The others haven't noticed you yet. + +You draw your blade, making sure that the chain keeping it tied to your back clinks loud enough for them to hear. They whip around, glaring at you; their eyes hold a mixture of primal rage and fear. One bares rotting yellow teeth at you, snarling like a dog. You put both hands on your sword, keeping a firm grip on it, waiting for them to make the first move. You don't have to wait long, as Yellow Teeth runs at you screaming, flailing two axes around as though he's a barbarian of the Northern Wildlands. You smoothly sidestep his charge, then bring your sword down at his legs. His upper body is sent flying upwards as your sword slices through his thighs and out the other side. + +The other three highwaymen stare at their dying ally, the fear overcoming their rage. You draw your sword back and swing at nothing, the blood flying off. Droplets land on their faces. "Leave the woman alone, or you'll wind up like your friend," you say. To seal your threat, you take a step forward, and they immediately back off and begin running. You draw a dagger from your boot, stabbing it into the dying bandit's throat as you approach the woman to make sure she's okay. + +"Hurt?" you ask, kneeling down next to the noble woman as she lays on the ground. She's hyperventiliating, looking around with wild eyes, before turning over and vomiting on the grass. You pat her on the back to help her get it out, then shake your head. "It's normal the first few times something like this happens. Once the adrenaline wears off, you feel sick to your stomach. Get up." You offer a hand, which she accepts. + +"T-thank you, sir. I can never repay you. Those... Those thugs attacked my carriage, killed my driver and the stole all my valuables. I... I don't know how I can make it back home." She sighs, shaking her head. "I'll just have to walk, I suppose." + +"Where were you going?" you ask, already wishing you hadn't. + +"Elkstern Keep. Have you heard of it?" + +You have, actually. It was one of the stops on your journey twenty years ago... And is in the opposite direction of Castle Oren, about two hundred miles away in fact. You'd have to arrive much later or even cancel your trip if you were to escort her. +> Damn it all, I'm too soft for my own good. I offer to escort her. +You mull it over for a moment, before groaning internally at how soft you've gotten. "I can drive you. It's far out of the way of my destination, but I need to see you safe." Perhaps that was a bit too much, but the woman gives you a shaky yet radiant smile anyhow. + +"You will, sir? Oh thank you, thank you!" She leaps up, giving you a bear hug. Your arms stay limp at your side. + +You wait a moment for her to let go. Then another. Then one more. Finally, fed up with this contact, you push her arms off of you. "We must get going," you say. She nods, withdrawing from you and falling into step as you walk back to your carriage. + +"What's your name?" she asks. "I am Lady Caroline of House Rorens, Fairest Lady of The Western Woodlands." + +"Kit of Droburg," you reply, shaking your head slightly at the woman's title. + +"Kit of Droburg? Are you not the same Kit that saved our kingdom two decades ago?" + +"The one and only. And before you start, don't you dare start worshiping the ground I walk on." + +"I wouldn't dream of it, Sir Kit. It is an honor to meet you." + +The conversation drifts off just as the two of you reach the carriage. Bertrand is keeping watch, having dug a crossbow out of the back of the carriage. "Ready to get going, sir?" he asks, but you shake your head. + +"Change of plans. We need to make sure Lady Caroline here gets safely to her destination. Elkstern Keep, about two hundred miles west." + +Bertrand's eyes practically bulge out of his head, yet he keeps his voice level and calm. "That's far from Castle Oren, sir." + +"I know," you say, grunting as you climb onto the carriage, "but I'm sure the king will understand our tardiness." You wait for Caroline to get into the back, then turn to Bertrand. "Let's get going, eh?" + +He sighs, before nodding. Spurring the horses on, Bertrand turns the carriage around and begins heading west, in the direction of Elkstern Keep. You have a ways to go, but you know that you made the right choice doing this. + +The carriage carries on into the horizon. +> Continue +The ride to Elkstern Keep is mostly quiet. Occasionally, Caroline tries to break the silence in an attempt to get to know you, but your grunts and shrugs to her questions discourage her. Bertrand stays silent every time she tries to talk to him. She probably wasn't expecting something like this, but at the very least she's getting to her destination in one piece this way. + +A few hours later, you're forced to stop for the night. You use your sword to cut down a small tree, splitting it up into smaller logs to build a fire. As the fire rages, Bertrand sets a few strips of meat on a small metal pan and holds it over the fire. The only sound is the crackling of the fire and the sizzling of the meats; that is, until Caroline decides to speak up. "So where were you two going before you picked me up?" she asks. + +"Castle Oren," you reply. + +"Castle Oren? I was just leaving there. I was negotiating with the King, he wants to buy some land near Elkstern Keep that's under my domain. He was talking about building a second castle there." + +It is Bertrand who replies to that: "Why would he want to do that?" + +Caroline shrugs her shoulders. "I don't know. Castle Oren is rather old, but it's in great condition. Maybe the King wants to relocate?" + +"It could be because of the war," you suggest. + +"I've heard the war has been going as it usually does: no real advances on either side. Just an uneasy stalemate occasionally breaking out into a scuffle over the border towns." + +"Perhaps the King fears it won't be like that for long, and wants to fall back. Castle Oren is only a few miles from the border, after all." + +"Fair point." + +Bertrand pulls the pan away from the fire as the strips are done cooking. He takes a few strips of meat in hand then passes the pan to you. You do the same, then pass the pan to Caroline, who looks at it strangely. "Aren't you going to eat?" you ask. + +"Yes. I'm just not used to this is all." She hesitantly plucks a strip from the pan, giving it a cautious nibble. She sets the pan down on the ground and continues nibbling slowly on the strip of meat. By the time she's finished her first one, you've been finished for a few minutes and are laying down to sleep. + +In the morning, the three of you pack up your things and get back into the carriage. You estimate that you're about a week's ride from Elkstern Keep, if you keep this pace up. Maybe you and Bertrand can alternate between driving the carriage while the other sleeps in the back to make the most out of the time you have. + +It's about midday when Caroline finally pipes up from the back: "So tell me, why were you going to Castle Oren?" + +Feeling in a generous mood today, you reply, "To meet the King." + +Caroline laughs. "Well of course you were meeting the King, but why were you meeting him?" + +"He wanted my help with the war effort. Drive the Kishak back to their own country." + +"Really?" + +"Yes." + +"I suppose there's no one who could do the job better. That man, the other day... I take it he wasn't the first one you've killed?" + +"Wasn't the first, likely won't be the last." + +She's quiet for a moment, likely considering your answer, before piping up again. "... What was the first one like?" + +You consider the question for a moment. Your first kill. You haven't thought back on that day in a long time. It was about a week into your journey, and you and your companions had gotten into quite a bit of trouble. A group of Marauders, vicious barbarians and raiders, had ambushed you on the road. They weren't interested in killing you like most, though; no, they had something much more sadistic in mind. + +You can still remember the screams. Just a kid, a year younger than you were. Had his whole life ahead of him. And they peeled the flesh from his bones. Took their time. Used a jagged rock. Lasted for hours. Felt like years. When the screaming stopped they were still peeling the meat off him. Cooked it. Ate it. Would've been you next. Fortunately for you they got distracted and left a single guard there. + +You can still remember the way he struggled under your firm grip. Busted down the rusty cage door and charged right for him. Tackled him next to the fire. Choked him out for a bit. When that proved to be taking too long, you grabbed the pot of water boiling over the fire. Poured it all over his face. The scalding hot water peeled the skin from his face, and he screamed louder than the boy did. You shut him up by smashing his skull in with the pot. + +When you freed your friends and escaped, they didn't look at you the same way for a while. You did what you had to do. You knew that. They knew that. Two weeks had passed when they started acting normal again. But you remember the looks in their eyes, remember the fear they held. That day you proved what you were capable of, and they were terrified of you until the day they died. You wish you could take it all back. + +"Sir Kit? Were you going to tell me?" Caroline's voice snaps you out of your recollection. She looks concerned. "You've been spaced out for a few minu-" + +"Stop." + +"What?" + +"Stop. Stop asking questions you don't want to know the answers to." + +For a moment, there is silence. Then, you hear the cover of the wagon being drawn back, indicating that Caroline has retreated back into it. You sigh, then dig one of the bottles of wine out of your knapsack. You need it. + +Bertrand doesn't ask questions when he sees you drinking. Just nods and continues driving. +> Continue +The next day of your trip goes by quietly. There's nothing but the open road ahead of you. Any travelers pass you by without a second thought, and aside from Bertrand and Caroline you haven't interacted with anyone since the highwaymen. It's peaceful, almost too peaceful; usually it means something will happen, and it comes when you least expect it. Of course, your gut is right on this one. + +On the third day of traveling, just a day or so away from Elkstern Keep, you come across a bridge and force Bertrand to stop. The bridge is large, wide enough to fit three carriages side by side and about half a mile long. It stretches over a canyon, a long drop into a rapid river below. You see men in ragged clothing milling about; they haven't seen you yet, but if you move forward they will. By their looks, they won't be too friendly. + +If you tried to go around, you'd lose a day of time. Safer, yes, but you really just want this to be over and done with. The bridge is risky but you're sure that you can defend the carriage. You look to Bertrand and nod. "Keep going." + +He nods, spurring the horses into gear. "Think we'll run into any opposition, sir?" + +"Not sure. Probably, though. Keep that crossbow ready." Bertrand nods and grabs the crossbow with one hand, keeping the other on the reins. The carriage continues on, heading towards the bridge. You draw closer to the men, who turn their heads and finally see you. Quickly, they start moving, grabbing weapons and preparing for you to come by. You notice one poking his head out. + +"Take that one out!" you point him out to Bertrand, who shifts the crossbow and fires. The bolt flies true, hitting the man in the forehead. He slumps over, and his companions immediately open fire with a volley of arrows and bolts. You raise the flat of your sword and hold it up, using it as a makeshift shield. You and Bertrand are spared from most of them, but an arrow manages to hit him in the leg. + +"Shit!" you shout, then jump off the carriage and begin sprinting towards the men. They shift their focus from the carriage to you, firing more arrows and bolts in your direction. You keep your sword raised to deflect any projectiles coming your way, and through sheer luck, you manage to get to the men with only the faintest of grazes to show for it. They back off and drop their ranged weapons, readying knives and rusty swords. + +You swiftly dodge the first swing that comes your way, then back hand the man who attacked. He staggers back with a split lip, and you move in fast by smashing his face with the pommel of your sword. He falls to the ground, dropping his sword and clutching at his broken nose. You don't have time to finish him off, as another blade comes your way, then another, and another. Raising your blade, you deflect most of the blows and dodge others. However, one of the bridge men gets a lucky hit through, cutting your side. You hiss in pain but push on. + +Quickly jumping back, you assess the situation. There's still more down the way, keeping crossbows and longbows at the ready, while there's a group of about six heading right for you. They're all clustered up close, as though they believe that will make it harder for you. If anything, it'll make it easier. + +You rear your sword back, waiting for them to get close enough... + +Then swing. + +The massive blade cuts through three before it gets stuck in the ribcage of the fourth one. The three you managed to hit fall to the floor in pieces, flecks of blood spraying onto you and their remaining allies. You pull your sword out of the fourth man, who falls to his knees and screams in agony for his mother, before swinging yet again. His cries are cut off as the blade cuts through his skull, and out the other side to take down the remaining two. + +You pant, catching your breath. You don't have long though, as a bolt flies true and lands in your shoulder. You stumble back with a curse, and nearly fall into the canyon were it not for the rail you grabbed onto. A horn pierces the quiet of the bridge, and you know what it means: they're calling for reinforcements. You're not sure if you can take on these men, let alone more. + +The river is seeming awfully tempting. Maybe you can survive the fall and be carried away to some place safer... +> No. I've got to defend my companions. I'll fight as long as I have to. +You steel yourself and stumble away from the edge of the bridge. No. You're not going to let them down. Using that stored up adrenaline within you, you push forward with a primal yell, charging straight for the archers. They fire at you, but you ignore the arrows and bolts flying your way. Occasionally one manages to graze you, a scant few even hit you, but you ignore it as best you can. You've got a fight to win. + +The first one loses his head. The seconds his arms, then a stab through the chest. The third drops his crossbow as if in surrender, only to be sliced clean in half. You continue on like this, no longer seeing men but instead an army of targets you need to tear down. Half way through these ones, more targets come running down the bridge. You finish off the remaining archers, then ready yourself in preparation for the others. + +You're not sure how long the fight lasts. All you know is that by the end of it, you're using your sword to keep yourself standing. The carriage slows to a stop, and Bertrand hops off to help you into the back of the wagon. You're still on edge enough that you snarl at him, like a wild hound defending its territory. He doesn't back off, and soon you're lying on the floor in the back of the wagon. + +A woman is there, digging through your supplies and pulling out a roll of bandages. Caroline. She sets to work immediately, pulling out bolts and arrows and wrapping them up as best as she can. Her hands are left bloodied from the work, but in the end you're much better off than you were. She smiles. "You'll get proper healing at Elkstern Keep." + +She continues speaking, but the words fade away, and you slip into unconsciousness. +> Continue +When you wake up, it's in a bed. You're covered in bandages, and though your body aches it seems your wounds are gone. There must be a healer here. In the bed to your right, a person stirs, and you shift to get a good look at them. There lays Bertrand, flipping through a leather bound book. "I see you still live, sir," he says, dog-earing the page he's on and closing the book. + +"Sorry to disappoint you," you chuckle. + +A small laugh escapes Bertrand's lips. "No, sir. I'm happy to see you're still among us." He pauses. "We got here yesterday afternoon, sir. The healer set to work immediately. You'll be okay if you rest for a few days." + +"That so? Where's Caroline?" + +"She's still here, sir. Likely in her chambers. She said she'd come visit later." + +"Alright." You sigh and close your eyes. You made it to Elkstern Keep, and you and Bertrand are still relatively intact. + +You consider what you should do now. You'll be extremely late for your meeting at Castle Oren. The King may not like it, but if he truly needed you, he'd excuse it. Still, something about this... Felt better than fighting some meaningless war you have no investment in. Maybe... + +You must have been thinking for much longer than you thought you were, as Caroline steps into the infirmary and immediately gives Bertrand a bear hug. Your servant pats her slowly on the back, and she breaks away after a moment to move onto you. The hug is so tight, it makes the aching turn into a sharp sting, and you hiss in pain. Caroline withdraws. + +"I'm so glad you two are alright. Thank you for all that you've done for me, I can't repay you," she says. + +You wave your hand and shake your hand. "No, no, everything is fine. Just letting us rest here a few days is good enough." + +She gives a worried look. "Are you sure? I can give you supplies, or money, or..." + +"Nothing. It's fine. Thanks for visiting us." + +Caroline nods. The three of you talk for a while, though it's mostly her thanking you profusely and continually offering help, which you turn down. After about an hour, a man comes in and informs her that she's needed in the entrance hall. Caroline sighs, but nods at the man. + +Before she leaves, she turns to you and Bertrand one last time. "I know I've been saying it a lot, but thank you from the bottom of my heart. If you hadn't saved me and escorted me here, I don't know what I'd have done." With those words, she departs. + +After she leaves, you once again wonder what you'll do now. +> Maybe I can keep helping people. Damn the King and his war, I'll help people in other ways. +Yes. You can keep helping people. That's what you should do, what your friends would have wanted you to do. It's what the hero you used to be would have done in this situation. As much as you've tried to drown that boy with alcohol, you know that deep down he's still in there. Maybe, it's time to let him back out. + +You voice your thoughts to Bertrand. "Damn the King's summons. After all this, I think I want to keep helping people. Will I have you by my side, Bertrand?" + +Your servant smiles at that. "Of course, sir. I was hoping you'd say that." + +You nod your head a few times. "Okay. Okay." + +For now, you have a few days to rest. When you're done, you'll leave Elkstern Keep, and set out to right any wrongs you find. After all, that's what a hero does. + +The sun is high in the sky. It's a new beginning. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When you wake up, it's in a bed. You're covered in bandages, and though your body aches it seems your wounds are gone. There must be a healer here. In the bed to your right, a person stirs, and you shift to get a good look at them. There lays Bertrand, flipping through a leather bound book. "I see you still live, sir," he says, dog-earing the page he's on and closing the book. + +"Sorry to disappoint you," you chuckle. + +A small laugh escapes Bertrand's lips. "No, sir. I'm happy to see you're still among us." He pauses. "We got here yesterday afternoon, sir. The healer set to work immediately. You'll be okay if you rest for a few days." + +"That so? Where's Caroline?" + +"She's still here, sir. Likely in her chambers. She said she'd come visit later." + +"Alright." You sigh and close your eyes. You made it to Elkstern Keep, and you and Bertrand are still relatively intact. + +You consider what you should do now. You'll be extremely late for your meeting at Castle Oren. The King may not like it, but if he truly needed you, he'd excuse it. Still, something about this... Felt better than fighting some meaningless war you have no investment in. Maybe... + +You must have been thinking for much longer than you thought you were, as Caroline steps into the infirmary and immediately gives Bertrand a bear hug. Your servant pats her slowly on the back, and she breaks away after a moment to move onto you. The hug is so tight, it makes the aching turn into a sharp sting, and you hiss in pain. Caroline withdraws. + +"I'm so glad you two are alright. Thank you for all that you've done for me, I can't repay you," she says. + +You wave your hand and shake your hand. "No, no, everything is fine. Just letting us rest here a few days is good enough." + +She gives a worried look. "Are you sure? I can give you supplies, or money, or..." + +"Nothing. It's fine. Thanks for visiting us." + +Caroline nods. The three of you talk for a while, though it's mostly her thanking you profusely and continually offering help, which you turn down. After about an hour, a man comes in and informs her that she's needed in the entrance hall. Caroline sighs, but nods at the man. + +Before she leaves, she turns to you and Bertrand one last time. "I know I've been saying it a lot, but thank you from the bottom of my heart. If you hadn't saved me and escorted me here, I don't know what I'd have done." With those words, she departs. + +After she leaves, you once again wonder what you'll do now. +> My plans remain the same. I'll head straight for Castle Oren. I'm sure the King needs me, and won't mind. +Yes. The King summoned you, and you won't ignore those summons. Being a wandering hero is appealing, but this way you can help the kingdom in a much more substantial way. Winning a war? You'd save the kingdom, and drive the Kishak menace away from it. You'd be a hero yet again. + +You voice your thoughts to Bertrand. "Our plan remains the same: we'll head straight for Castle Oren when we recover. Will I have you at my side, Bertrand." + +Bertrand nods. "Of course, sir. We'll get there and finish this war." + +You nod your head a few times. "Okay. Okay." + +For now, you have a few days to rest. When you're done, you'll leave Elkstern Keep, and head straight for Castle Oren. After all, you have a duty, and you must see it through. + +The sun is high in the sky. It's a new beginning. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The next day of your trip goes by quietly. There's nothing but the open road ahead of you. Any travelers pass you by without a second thought, and aside from Bertrand and Caroline you haven't interacted with anyone since the highwaymen. It's peaceful, almost too peaceful; usually it means something will happen, and it comes when you least expect it. Of course, your gut is right on this one. + +On the third day of traveling, just a day or so away from Elkstern Keep, you come across a bridge and force Bertrand to stop. The bridge is large, wide enough to fit three carriages side by side and about half a mile long. It stretches over a canyon, a long drop into a rapid river below. You see men in ragged clothing milling about; they haven't seen you yet, but if you move forward they will. By their looks, they won't be too friendly. + +If you tried to go around, you'd lose a day of time. Safer, yes, but you really just want this to be over and done with. The bridge is risky but you're sure that you can defend the carriage. You look to Bertrand and nod. "Keep going." + +He nods, spurring the horses into gear. "Think we'll run into any opposition, sir?" + +"Not sure. Probably, though. Keep that crossbow ready." Bertrand nods and grabs the crossbow with one hand, keeping the other on the reins. The carriage continues on, heading towards the bridge. You draw closer to the men, who turn their heads and finally see you. Quickly, they start moving, grabbing weapons and preparing for you to come by. You notice one poking his head out. + +"Take that one out!" you point him out to Bertrand, who shifts the crossbow and fires. The bolt flies true, hitting the man in the forehead. He slumps over, and his companions immediately open fire with a volley of arrows and bolts. You raise the flat of your sword and hold it up, using it as a makeshift shield. You and Bertrand are spared from most of them, but an arrow manages to hit him in the leg. + +"Shit!" you shout, then jump off the carriage and begin sprinting towards the men. They shift their focus from the carriage to you, firing more arrows and bolts in your direction. You keep your sword raised to deflect any projectiles coming your way, and through sheer luck, you manage to get to the men with only the faintest of grazes to show for it. They back off and drop their ranged weapons, readying knives and rusty swords. + +You swiftly dodge the first swing that comes your way, then back hand the man who attacked. He staggers back with a split lip, and you move in fast by smashing his face with the pommel of your sword. He falls to the ground, dropping his sword and clutching at his broken nose. You don't have time to finish him off, as another blade comes your way, then another, and another. Raising your blade, you deflect most of the blows and dodge others. However, one of the bridge men gets a lucky hit through, cutting your side. You hiss in pain but push on. + +Quickly jumping back, you assess the situation. There's still more down the way, keeping crossbows and longbows at the ready, while there's a group of about six heading right for you. They're all clustered up close, as though they believe that will make it harder for you. If anything, it'll make it easier. + +You rear your sword back, waiting for them to get close enough... + +Then swing. + +The massive blade cuts through three before it gets stuck in the ribcage of the fourth one. The three you managed to hit fall to the floor in pieces, flecks of blood spraying onto you and their remaining allies. You pull your sword out of the fourth man, who falls to his knees and screams in agony for his mother, before swinging yet again. His cries are cut off as the blade cuts through his skull, and out the other side to take down the remaining two. + +You pant, catching your breath. You don't have long though, as a bolt flies true and lands in your shoulder. You stumble back with a curse, and nearly fall into the canyon were it not for the rail you grabbed onto. A horn pierces the quiet of the bridge, and you know what it means: they're calling for reinforcements. You're not sure if you can take on these men, let alone more. + +The river is seeming awfully tempting. Maybe you can survive the fall and be carried away to some place safer... +> They're on their own. I'm getting out of here, while I still can. +This is too much, even for you. Hell, for all you know, the archers down the bridge have already taken out Bertrand and you're just defending a corpse. The only way you're going to survive this is if you give into your fight or flight instincts; right now, your entire body is screaming flight. Taking in a deep breath and mumbling a quick prayer to whatever god will hear it, you jump off the bridge into the river below. + +The water is freezing, you note, and pushing you at a breakneck speed. Occasionally you bump into a rock and feel as though you're about to lose consciousness, but the fear of drowning keeps you awake as you struggle to keep your head above the surface. By the time you wind up on land, it feels as though you've been at this for hours, when really it's only been a few minutes at most. + +You crawl on hands and knees away from the river, heaving up water and bits of your breakfast on the gravel. Pushing forward, you note that you're in a forest of snow covered pine trees, despite it only just being fall. Then again, you've been heading towards a much colder climate, so this is to be expected. Shivering, you push yourself up on the ground and hook your sword onto your back. There has to be some sort of shelter around here. + +Your walk through the forest lasts most of the day, and by nightfall you're sure you'll freeze to death out here. However, luck is on your side; you spot a faint glow not far from you, and push towards it. What you see is a cabin, light from a lantern pouring out of it... The problem, however, is the spikes planted into the ground with heads stuck through them. Whatever this is, it's bad news. + +You consider your options: freeze to death out here, or take your chances fighting whoever is in there. +> I need warmth. I'll kill whoever is in there, and feel no guilt over it. Whoever's in there is a monster. +You unhook your blade and stalk towards the cabin, ready to swing at the slightest twitch of movement. Pushing the door open, you step inside with sword at the ready. You find a single man there, clothes ragged and dirty with unkempt hair and beard. In his hands is a single human arm, a woman's by the looks of it. He turns to look at you, and gives you a blank stare. + +Then, a blood-tinged smile. + +You swing your sword, splitting his skull open like an overripe watermelon. Pulling the sword out of his corpse, you swing again. Then again. And again. And again. And again. You keep swinging until there's nothing left to hit. Even then you keep at it, busting up the bloodied floorboards and reducing the mush that's left of him to bloody stains. Finally, you drop your sword and collapse. The exhaustion overtakes you, and you fall into a sleep before you even realize it. + +When you wake in the morning, you feel warmed up after the night in the cavern. You quickly dig through any containers you find. There's not much, but there is a spare set of the cannibal's clothes. It looks like it's just about your size, and made of animal hides. Good enough in this climate. You remove your soaked clothing slide into the outfit, making sure it fits. + +With nothing left to do, you set out from the cabin and into the forest. There has to be a town somewhere. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This is too much, even for you. Hell, for all you know, the archers down the bridge have already taken out Bertrand and you're just defending a corpse. The only way you're going to survive this is if you give into your fight or flight instincts; right now, your entire body is screaming flight. Taking in a deep breath and mumbling a quick prayer to whatever god will hear it, you jump off the bridge into the river below. + +The water is freezing, you note, and pushing you at a breakneck speed. Occasionally you bump into a rock and feel as though you're about to lose consciousness, but the fear of drowning keeps you awake as you struggle to keep your head above the surface. By the time you wind up on land, it feels as though you've been at this for hours, when really it's only been a few minutes at most. + +You crawl on hands and knees away from the river, heaving up water and bits of your breakfast on the gravel. Pushing forward, you note that you're in a forest of snow covered pine trees, despite it only just being fall. Then again, you've been heading towards a much colder climate, so this is to be expected. Shivering, you push yourself up on the ground and hook your sword onto your back. There has to be some sort of shelter around here. + +Your walk through the forest lasts most of the day, and by nightfall you're sure you'll freeze to death out here. However, luck is on your side; you spot a faint glow not far from you, and push towards it. What you see is a cabin, light from a lantern pouring out of it... The problem, however, is the spikes planted into the ground with heads stuck through them. Whatever this is, it's bad news. + +You consider your options: freeze to death out here, or take your chances fighting whoever is in there. +> If it's a choice between being gruesomely maimed and killed or slowly freezing to death... I think I'll take the latter. +There's no way you're going in there. You barely have enough strength to walk, let alone fight off whatever bastards are in the cabin. If you're going to die anyway, you figure you're going to do it on your own terms, and walk away from the cabin. + +You continue on into the night, feeling the cold wind slowly freeze your soaked clothing. Ice clings to you, and you feel your strength slowly fading. You're not sure how much longer you can keep walking, so you should at least make sure you're comfortable. Slowing down, you set your back against a tree, and slowly slide down into a sitting position. + +Your breathing is slowing down. + +You can feel your heart beat every couple of seconds. + +It's so cold out here. + +Maybe you should rest. + +You close your eyes. + +Yeah, rest sounds good. + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Damn these sick bastards. Robbing and killing the innocent. You jump out of the carriage and begin to chase after them. Faintly, you hear Bertrand yelling at you, but the pounding of your head as a cold rage runs through you blocks out any sounds but the woman's screams. You chase the highwaymen down; it doesn't take long, you find them just as one tackles the noble woman to the ground. The others haven't noticed you yet. + +You draw your blade, making sure that the chain keeping it tied to your back clinks loud enough for them to hear. They whip around, glaring at you; their eyes hold a mixture of primal rage and fear. One bares rotting yellow teeth at you, snarling like a dog. You put both hands on your sword, keeping a firm grip on it, waiting for them to make the first move. You don't have to wait long, as Yellow Teeth runs at you screaming, flailing two axes around as though he's a barbarian of the Northern Wildlands. You smoothly sidestep his charge, then bring your sword down at his legs. His upper body is sent flying upwards as your sword slices through his thighs and out the other side. + +The other three highwaymen stare at their dying ally, the fear overcoming their rage. You draw your sword back and swing at nothing, the blood flying off. Droplets land on their faces. "Leave the woman alone, or you'll wind up like your friend," you say. To seal your threat, you take a step forward, and they immediately back off and begin running. You draw a dagger from your boot, stabbing it into the dying bandit's throat as you approach the woman to make sure she's okay. + +"Hurt?" you ask, kneeling down next to the noble woman as she lays on the ground. She's hyperventiliating, looking around with wild eyes, before turning over and vomiting on the grass. You pat her on the back to help her get it out, then shake your head. "It's normal the first few times something like this happens. Once the adrenaline wears off, you feel sick to your stomach. Get up." You offer a hand, which she accepts. + +"T-thank you, sir. I can never repay you. Those... Those thugs attacked my carriage, killed my driver and the stole all my valuables. I... I don't know how I can make it back home." She sighs, shaking her head. "I'll just have to walk, I suppose." + +"Where were you going?" you ask, already wishing you hadn't. + +"Elkstern Keep. Have you heard of it?" + +You have, actually. It was one of the stops on your journey twenty years ago... And is in the opposite direction of Castle Oren, about two hundred miles away in fact. You'd have to arrive much later or even cancel your trip if you were to escort her. +> I'll just have to wish her luck and give her directions to the nearest town. +You sigh, shaking your head. "Wish I could help you, but I have urgent matters to attend to and Elkstern Keep is too far away. There's a town about ten miles down the road, a few small villages and hamlets along the way. Maybe you can see if a caravan is heading there." + +She nods. "Thank you again for saving me, sir. I'll head there now." You walk her to the road, and see her off. Bertrand watches from the driver's seat of the carriage, a loaded crossbow in his hands. After the noble woman is no longer in sight, you climb back up and sit next to Bertrand. + +"Shall we go now, sir?" + +"Yes. Let's go." + +Bertrand spurs the horses into action, and the two of you continue on. You're forced to set up camp for the night along the road, but you can see Castle Oren in the distance. You'll be there not long after you get up in the morning. + +Your blade rests in your lap as you clean it with a rag and some water. Bertrand stirs the fire with a stick, then quirks a brow at you. "Why did you agree, sir?" + +"Agree to what?" you ask. + +"Agree to go to Castle Oren." + +You sigh, shrugging your shoulders. "Not entirely sure of that myself. I just figured it was better than wasting away at home." You pause, and trace a finger along the flat of your blade. "... Truth is I feel like I need to prove something to myself. That I still have what it takes." + +"Judging by the blood I saw on your blade, you still do." + +A mirthless chuckle escapes your lips. "Maybe. Maybe I just got lucky. Sword this size, I could cut a horse in half once I get it going. There's no skill involved when it comes to wielding a blade like this, only blind luck." + +Bertrand nods. "I should be turning in now. I suggest you do too." He gets up from the fire and lays down on a blanket he has sprawled out, closing his eyes and drifting off to sleep in moments. You watch his sleeping form for a moment, before setting your sword down and laying on your own blanket. Though you toss and turn for a bit, exhaustion takes over and you fall into your first dreamless sleep in years. + +In the morning, you and Bertrand pack your things up and begin the last stretch to the Castle. +> Continue +You arrive at Castle Oren around lunch time. The castle is large and imposing, made of stone that has gathered a fair bit of moss over the years. It was built a thousand years before your time, and still stands after all this time with only minor renovations to keep it up. A town surrounds the castle, full of shops and inns and homes and other assorted buildings. People mill about, paying you no mind as the carriage rolls up to the castle gates. + +The guards there stand at attention, waiting for you to make a move. A young man in knight's armor approaches your carriage. He takes his helmet off, revealing a youthful yet stern face with sandy blond hair and grey eyes. The knight salutes you. "Sir Kit?" he asks. You nod, and the man smiles. "My name is Sir Miller of the Gold Hawk Knights. Welcome to Castle Oren." He nods at the guards, who open the gates. Your carriage rides through, and Miller follows. + +Inside the castle grounds, you park your carriage and climb off. Bertrand stands behind you, while you address Miller. "When can I see the King?" you ask. + +"Come along, I'll take you to him." Miller walks away. You follow closely behind, examining the castle grounds. The courtyard leading into the castle is home to many trees and flowers, a few of which you've never even seen. The King's gardeners must take their work very seriously. + +You head into the castle proper, in an entrance hall that doubles as a throne room. The King is nowhere in sight, and Miller continues on past the throne and to a door not far from it. As you step into the room, you see a man in fine clothing sitting at a desk. The desk houses a golden crown. The King is around his mid thirties, though the wrinkles in his face and the gray streaking his hair indicates a man at least a decade older. + +"Your highness. Sir Kit has arrived," Miller says. The King looks up from his writing at you, and gives a faint smile. He waves Miller off, and the young knight departs from the room. Bertrand follows close behind, assuming the King doesn't want an audience. + +"Sir Kit. It is an honor to finally meet you." The King stands from the desk and approaches you. He's only a bit shorter than you, impressive considering your bulky stature, though his posture and build indicates he's never been a fight before. He sticks out a hand for you to shake, which you do. + +"The honor is all mine, your highness," you say, though rather half-heartedly. + +The King laughs. "Let's skip the formalities. Call me Walter. We're not here to discuss something officially." His face darkens. "I called you here because I need someone to weaken the Kishak Empire, so that my army can strike the final blow against them." + +"I see." + +"I need someone who doesn't mind getting their hands dirty, Sir Kit. I need a warrior such as you. I take it whatever you face on this mission will be enough for you to handle, and I'll be sending you backup anyhow." + +"What's this mission you're sending me on?" + +"My spies in Kishak have uncovered the location of the Empire's supply cache: in the heart of their capital city. If you can destroy the supply cache, there goes all of the Kishak army's food, weapons, and gunpowder. They'd be running on what they have left, and soon enough that would run out and my men would be able to drive them back." + +"... This sounds like a suicide mission." + +The King nods slowly. "Perhaps. But if you manage to see this mission through, the war will be won by next year. Would you not want to see an end to this war that has claimed so many lives? An end to a war your grandfathers would have fought in, and your grandchildren will fight in if it doesn't end?" + +You shake your head, chuckling. "You're wrong there. My grandfathers were simple farmers, and I don't have children. This war means nothing to me." + +"Maybe it doesn't. But think of the millions of lives that have been lost to it, and the millions of lives you will save by ending it." + +You sigh. At the very least, this is something to do. + +"Fine. Let's get prepped for this suicide mission."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You shake your head slightly, before shrugging. There's not much you do in your day to day life, and at the very least, this is something. "Bertrand," you say. "Get to packing my things. I'm going to Castle Oren at dawn." Your servant seems very surprised by this, but immediately leaves the room to get a knapsack for you. He comes back not long after and begins packing the essentials: changes of clothes, a tinderbox from your dresser, and lantern oil, along with some of the bread and wine he came to give you. + +He nods to you, taking the knapsack. "I'll pack it in your carriage, sir. In the morning we'll go." With those words, he leaves the room. You sigh, before popping open the remaining bottle of wine and beginning your daily routine. By nightfall, not a drop remains of the wine nor a crumb of the bread. The weight of the situation hangs heavily on you: tomorrow, you're going to leave your home for the first time in years to fight a war that isn't yours to fight for a man who will never care for you. It's enough to make you reconsider your plans. Almost. + +At least, this is something you can use your talents for. Twenty years and your blade hasn't tasted a drop of blood. You feel as though you're getting rusty, that your time is long past, and it would be best to turn this offer down... No. You need to prove to yourself that you can still do this. Age means nothing for a person with your raw strength and skill, and you could kill four times as many men as a soldier half your age and twice your size. You were always told that you had a warrior's heart. Soon, you shall reaffirm it once and for all. + +When the sun dawns on the horizon, you get up and get dressed into practical clothing. Then, you grab your old sword, giving it an experimental swing at the air. It's large, only a bit shorter than your tall frame, and almost as wide as your torso. A greatsword that no man but you could wield. After hooking it onto your back, you head down to where your carriage is stored. Bertrand is already there, waiting for you in the driver's seat. "I packed some of my things as well, sir. Hope you don't mind me coming with you," he says. You nod, getting into the passengers seat. He spurs the horses into action with the reigns, and the two of you begin the ride to Castle Oren. + +You pass through a town on the way there and pass by several small hamlets. The sun is high in the sky when you see something on the horizon: a group of men sifting through a broken down carriage on the road. The men are dressed in fur and hides, and have chipped and dented axes at their sides. Highwaymen, bandits who prey on anyone daring to go from one place to another by the main roads. It makes you sick just looking at them. Then, you hear a woman's scream from the carriage. A noble lady in fine clothing runs from the carriage, screaming all the while. The highwaymen chase after her, abandoning the carriage. + +You grip your blade... +> ... Then let it go. Best to get out of here while they're gone. +Your hand falls from your sword. "Let's go, Bertrand. We've got time while they're distracted to beat a hasty retreat." + +"But sir," Bertrand begins to interrupt before you silence him by holding up your hand. + +"I don't want to hear it. Get going." + +Hesitantly, Bertrand nods and spurs the horses on. They walk past the overturned carriage and continue down the road. The woman's screams penetrate the otherwise silent countryside, until they are finally silenced. + +Nightfall comes sooner than you'd like. You're forced to set up camp for the night along the road, but you can see Castle Oren in the distance. You'll be there not long after you get up in the morning. + +Your blade rests in your lap as you clean it with a rag and some water. Bertrand stirs the fire with a stick, then frowns at you. "We should have helped her." + +"Hrm," you hum. + +"The man I agreed to work for would have saved her. What the hell even happened to you?" + +You sigh, shaking your head. "I don't know. I'm just not that kind of man anymore." You pause, and trace a finger along the flat of your blade. "... Just an old dog called in to do the king's dirty work. Nothing more, nothing less. There's no more heroes in this world Bertrand, and the sooner you accept that, the sooner life gets easier." + +"You don't know what you're talking about." + +A mirthless chuckle escapes your lips. "Maybe I don't. Can you blame me, though? I'm just a bitter old drunk. It'd be best if you just ignored what I say." + +Bertrand sighs. "... I should be turning in now. I suggest you do too." He gets up from the fire and lays down on a blanket he has sprawled out, closing his eyes and drifting off to sleep in moments. You watch his sleeping form for a moment, before setting your sword down and laying on your own blanket. Though you toss and turn for a bit, exhaustion takes over and you fall into your first dreamless sleep in years. + +In the morning, you and Bertrand pack your things up and begin the last stretch to the Castle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The arrows never stop flying. + + +Crawling through the mud, you watch as unlucky comrades around you are caught in the volleys. A grunt and a thud, in the trench in front of you one falls, reaching his hand out to you. Crawling over to him you rip off his armor, trying to stop the bleeding. Almost impossible with the arrow lodged in his chest, ripping it out would only kill him faster. + + +You sit there cradling him, trying to offer some small comfort in his final moments. He tries to speak, but only a gurgling sound emerges as crimson red trickles out of the side of his mouth. One final sigh and his whole body relaxes, his head falls back. His glassy eyes stare at you, only seeing emptiness. + + +Placing him down, you continue to trudge through the mud. Around you more have fallen, and will continue to fall. A dark purple blast of energy flies overhead, frying some unfortunate. + + +You make a run for the trees. Never running in a straight line, you start right, then dart left as you dive behind a tree. A few arrows lodge themselves in the ground beside you. + + +Damn elves. + + +You think back to how the elves had first come peacefully. Offering promises of power and strength. The orcs didn't want anything to do with them and their magic. The next time the elves showed up; however, it was in force. Looking to capture conscripts for their fight against the Empire. The orcs wanted nothing to do with their war, but since the elves brought it to our doorstep, we had now come to retaliate. + + +The elves, unable to fight a war on two fronts, were sure to crumble. + + +But this all started four years ago. Turns out elves have incredible resolve... which you intended to break. +> Advance +Only a few miles ahead, you see the castle stronghold of the Wister Elves' king. King Harribor, intent on delaying his final stand, hides behind his people. + + +Coward. + + +He would let his enemies lay waste to his nation, rather than meeting his fate out on the battlefield. + + +By now, you've made your way to a ridge, behind which many orcs wait. Across is another ridge, with orcs similarly stationed. In between, dozens and dozens of orcs slowly advance: hiding in trenches, behind rocks, and amidst piles of dead comrades. They will never make it through unless you buy them time. + + +Ahead, the elves had constructed wooden walls and towers. Each had slits and ramparts to shoot their arrows and blast their magic. + + +Scanning the area, you see that the elve's defenses are strongest on their right flank. Perfect. All you need to do is charge down the ridge and straight towards that tower. + + +You grab an orc by the shoulder, he looks back grunting. + + +"See how strong their defenses are on the right?" + + +He peers out, grunting in acknowledgment. + + +"I need you all to string up, focus all of your fire in that region." + + +"Why? Their left is weakest." + + +"I know, I'm going to use that to our advantage." + + +You're about to leave when you pat his shoulder again. + + +"Try not to shoot me." + + +You backtrack down into the forest and see some lights coming from the trees. The elves are watching their line closely. + + +Seeing multiple orcs in the darkness, you stop them. They look at you inquisitively until you explain your plan. They are eager to follow. + + +You move back behind the ridge, close to the front lines, careful to stay in the darkness. Peering over the top you notice something new: a system of hidden trenches filled with elves. They must be expecting the orcs to charge at any minute and are planning a surprise in the trenches. + + +You inspect the trench immediately below you. It leads directly to the door of a tower. You see an officer using a dimly glowing spyglass. Near him, and scattered throughout the trenches, are wounded elves. Some fit to fight, some are not, and yet they'll do it regardless. You have to respect that at least. + + +You ready your bow, and sight an elf slumped against the trench wall. Bloody bandages wrapped around his head, he holds his dagger and appears to be praying. He looks almost like a child, several years younger than yourself. + + +As you let loose, the rest do as well. The elf gasps in surprise as the arrow pierces his chest. You all fire several arrows, until each elf in front of you is pin-cushioned. + + +No one is walking away from this. No one sounds an alarm. + + +Making your way through the trench to the nearest battlement, you ready your axe, short enough to be used with one hand but long enough for two. You stand next to the tower door, inhaling deeply. +> Tower +Thrusting your foot forward, the door bursts open, splinters hitting the wall directly behind. You storm in as a bloodied elf staggers towards you. His eyes widen in surprise as you plant the axe into his forehead. Thick streaks of blood creep down his face as other orcs pour past you. You pull the axe from the fallen foe with a satisfied grunt. + + +As you enter the narrow hall, you see the wide eyes of many elves, their dead faces contorted in shock. They... almost didn't see what hit them. + + +Leading the way once more, you rise up the stairs to the next landing, your movements hidden by the sounds of battle. You recognize the twanging of arrows. + + +"I hit one," one of the elves says, "Ha! Look at him squirming!" + + +Your face contorts in rage. Raising your axe, you step out, and embed it into their officer's neck. You've left your axe in another's shoulder and jammed an arrow into the eye of a third before they realize what's happened. In an instant, the other orcs are upon them. + + +You ascend to the top of the tower. Almost immediately, an elf with bandaged hands sees you and shouts a warning to his companions. + + +You charge them, dodging arrows and bowling into them, knocking two over the edge, screaming. The wounded one tries to bring down his sword, but you catch it between your hands. Wrenching it away you toss the sword off the edge. + + +Snarling, you prowl towards the elf; he backs up, desperately swinging as you do so. You duck a punch and wrap an arm around his neck as you slip behind him. His hands bat and pull at your arms ineffectually. You squeeze tighter. With a snap, his hands go limp. You drop him. + + +Fucking stick, so damn weak. +> Continuing +You duck down and go to the ledge, peering up and over a low wall. Arrows are still flying; chaos everywhere. + + +"Come on, we have more towers to take out," you say. + + +You go to the other edge and wave to get the attention of the orcs at the ridge you left. You signal them to storm the trenches from your side. + + +By the time you've made your way down, the orcs have already flooded into the trenches. As the enemy loses focus in the confusion, the rest of your comrades rush in from the center to surround them. + + +The elves fight valiantly, refusing to surrender, which surprises you. What is more surprising is that you are only able to kill a few before the orcs have completely decimated the rest. + + +You run forward to the walls watching over the trenches, where the elves are far up but their fear is visible. All the trenches seem to lead to an underground tunnel system, with side rooms dug out for wounded and extra supplies. + + +As you enter one of them you see a wounded elf on a cot. His chest wrapped in bloody bandages, his breathing labored. He might not even make it, although killing defenseless people is for the weak as far as you're concerned. +> Mercy Kill +You approach the elf, stepping lightly. As you draw your blade from you sheath he looks up at you. His eyes widen and his breathing become faster. He feebly tries to raise his arms, probably to ask for mercy. + + +Driving the sword through his recent wound, you press as the blood pours out and trickles down his side. A short gasp escapes from his lips as his back and neck arches, his eyes widening before closing about halfway. You pull your blade out and move forward. +> Back to the tunnel +As you are about to run back into the tunnel, a loud sound erupts, shaking the ground. You have to catch yourself against the wall. After exchanging glances with the other orcs, you make your way forward through the tunnel, ever vigilant. + + +You reach an opening engulfed in flames. Orcs scream burning or already lay still, flesh roasting. + + +You cringe as the putrid smell reaches your nostrils. You get low to try to get a better view up a dirt ramp. The explosive must have come from the wall. + + +You dart to the side of the hall, thinking about what you should do. You see some other orcs about to through the fiery opening. +> Wait +You hold up your hand. + + +"Wait," you say. "They could have more." + + +The room is deadly silent as everyone waits. You hear more of those explosions, and orcs storming through the other trench tunnels. + + +By now, it sounds like full on chaos out there. At some point, you hear a scream and an elven body crunch against the ground just outside of the opening. + + +They must have taken the walls, or at least part of them by now. + + +You slowly approach the opening, axe in hand. As you step out, you notice there are elves and orcs engaged in deadly combat everywhere. + + + Several elves run straight towards you. They're probably trying to seek refuge. One of their face twists as they raise their arm. A bright red bolt flies from his hand. You barely have time to drop to the ground as the bolt slams into the wooden fixture right above the tunnel. + + +As small wood pieces shower your back, you notch an arrow to your bow. You only stand up high enough for your arrow to be raised just above the ramp. You exhale as you align the arrow with the closest of the elves, who are significantly closer now. + + +You release the arrow, the elf who blasted at you staggering as it lands in his hip. But he still runs forward, although now they all start blasting bolts of energy at you. An orc to your right goes down, smoke rising from the wound on his chest. + + +You notch another arrow, a bolt passing right by you, and you shoot the next elf as another orc already finished off the first one you hit. + + +Within moments, the group of elves are all dead, along with a few orcs around you. + + +It seems that the orcs have gained the upper hand once again, superior strength and numbers. + + +You move out into the open with your group, quick to find somewhere less vulnerable. +> Push +Many of the orcs loot the treasures, weapons, and trophies from the elf bodies. You cross your arms and lean against some supply shed. + + +A horse gallops over to a group of orcs, in the middle of them is an orc chief. The orc scout on horseback frantically starts speaking. + + +"The elves! They're closing in on us, we're right in the middle of their line, we'll be surrounded," he yells. + + +It would only be a matter of time before they cut off the opening to their king. + + +Sifting through the orcs, you eventually find the orc chief in charge of the battle, who seemed to have dismissed the scout. + + +"Chief," you say, "we need to push further." + + +"Yes, yes, I'm aware." He sort of shrugs you off, while some other kiss ass orcs hand him some trinkets. + + + "You heard him, we're in the middle of their line, we could easily get caught in a pincer movement. Probably surrounded too." + + +The orc chief laughs. + + +"Let them come, they won't stand a chance." + + +Your eyes widen, this fool would let your brethren die rather than end this it seems. + + +Grunting, you rip the horn fastened to his belt. He glares at you, stepping forward. You see his hand lightly resting on his sword handle. +> Reason with him +Looking at the horn in your hands, you realize you may have made a mistake. + + +"I'm not gonna sit here while you get them all killed," you say. "We need to move now, while we have an opening to their king." + + +The chieftain's eyes dart to the side as he considers what you have said. + + +He chuckles. + + +"You are a bold one, and you're right." He says this as he walks up to you, and he pushes you to the side as he grabs the horn from your hand. + + +"But I can't let this disrespect stand." + + +He keeps walking as he blows the horn, rallying the orc armies. As he calls for them to push forward, you hear something sliding behind you. + + +Whipping around, you are just in time to sidestep a sword blow, which would have cleaved your head apart. + + +You grab the orcs forearm, quick to twist his arm and steal his sword. He falls to one knee grunting in pain, and you kick him in the face, knocking him over. + + +The other four orcs in the chieftains entourage all draw their weapons as they try to surround you. All the while you are moving, back, left, right, where ever you have to go to keep the foremost ones in front of you and keep the others from surrounding you. + + +One finally lurches forward, slicing open your shin. Ignoring the searing hot pain, you leap forward, your sword biting into his neck. His body relaxes and he slumps forward, not quite dead yet but on his way there. + + +Another orc rushes forward, trying to bury his axe into your head. You simply pull the dying orc in front of you, the axe burying into his back. + + +You let the orc fall, as the weight of him doesn't allow the other orc to pull his axe out. It instead slips from his fingers. His hand goes for his dagger, but before he can do anything else, your stolen sword is buried in his chest. + + +With a grunt you push it the rest of the way through, all the way to the hilt, specks of his warm blood spattering your arms and chest. The orc's mouth gapes and quivers as his arms flail in his death throes, patting your arms as his hands slide off your forearms. + + +The remaining two orcs have already started charging. One leaps over the dying orc, almost hacking into your shoulder. You get a lucky dodge, this time drawing your real sword. + + +The other one comes from your side, intent on plunging his spear into your side. You knock the spearhead away, sliding the blade along the shaft, until you reach his hand. You simply pull your blade back real quick, then with a quick chop severing his fingers. He cries out in pain, turning into a gurgling as you slash your sword across his throat. + + +The last orc, and probably the most resourceful. Pulls up a small shield from his side, frisbee whipping it at you. It hits your raised forearm, leaving a stinging mark on your arm. + + +As you step back, the other orc tucks and rolls, grabbing the spear. As he raises into a kneel, he lurches the spear forward. It buries into your waist, burning hot pain shoots through. You roar in pain as he rips it out. This time he aims right below your throat, but you manage to knock it aside. + + +In the same motion, you pull up your axe, throwing it with surprising dexterity. The orcs head kicks back, then slowly slumps forward. One of his eyes stares at you, the other looks off at a weird angle. He falls, the axe handle stopping his face from hitting the ground. + + +Sighing, you limp over, pulling your axe out of his forehead. As you look around, you realize some orcs had gathered to cheer you on. They didn't seem to want to get involved in case you deserved it, and they didn't know what you were even fighting about but seemed entertained nonetheless. + + +They pat you on the back for wrecking four orcs, and one even offers to help you clean and bandage your wound. Which you gladly accept... + + +Some hard alcohol and stitches later, your leg and stab wound are securely patched up. You just have to be careful not to reopen or aggravate the wound. + + +Having missed the initial rush, you are stuck moving with the supply wagons, with all the old, lame, or wounded orcs. You do manage to hitch a ride, also being offered some fresh cooked beef. A delicatessen you haven't had since months ago. + + +You decide to get some shut-eye on your way to the front... +> King Harribor's Stand +The past few days have been spent sieging the elven King's last safe harbor. All the fields, villages, and towns outside of the castle having been swept up by the armies of orcs. + + +Somewhere behind the main army, detachments of orcs have been held back to keep the elven lines from closing in. You've heard they fight with desperation at the thought of losing their king. They've gained almost a mile since yesterday, but the orc rearguard has finally managed to hold their ground. + + +You sit on a hill, drinking whiskey as you watch the orcish reserves moving about the moats and trenches, trading arrows with the elven defenders. + + +You had spent the previous nights routing out and destroying the surrounding elf units. You've finally been convinced to reserve your strength as you sit against a tree with some trusted orcs. + + +To your left a huge swath of trees fall. Tensing up a bit, you see large wooden catapults being forced out of the trees. Followed by columns of heavily armored elven knights. + + +Preparing to warn the orcs, you bolt up onto your feet, as do your friends. As you run down the hill you notice something odd. The insignia on their flags are different from the Wistern elves' flag. Instead of a yellow flag with red shield, it is a black flag with a red dragon. + + +These might be the Velaneer elves. + + +You hop on a horse, galloping over to them with a dozen or so other orcs. The rest prepare to defend their lines. + + +You stop out of spear or bolt range of the columns, they don't appear to have any archers with them yet, so that won't be an issue. + + +You call out. + + +"Who are you? And what business do you have here?" + + +What appears to be an officer steps forward. You don't realize the elf is a woman until it speaks. + + +"My name is Valek, Captain of the Velaneer assault brigade. You are?" + + +"Nolazir." + + +"Rank?" + + +"I'm... I just kill things." + + +"Any generals?" + + +"No, we have some chiefs though." you say. + + +"And?... Where are they?" She asks getting clearly annoyed. + + +"Off sieging King Harribor's last defense... or drunk somewhere." + + +"You'll have to do." Valek says this as she strides toward you and your horse. + + +You hop off and go to meet her. Her hair is the gold blonde that most elves of her nation seem to have, and her eyes are a deep green. They would almost be beautiful.....if she wasn't an elf. You almost can't look away, but you manage to break eye contact. Looking down her face to her lips, which seem to come up to a slight pout. She slowly smiles, some twinkle in her eye. + + +"Seems like you really are doing a great job breaking into the castle." She says haughtily. + + +"We're trying to starve them out," you say. + + +She sighs. + + +"They're elves, they can magically grow food in their castle gardens, and when they run out of ammunition they'll probably start throwing magic bolts at you." + + +You grunt, not having thought of this. Valek chuckles. + + +"You orcs are always getting caught with your dicks in your hands." + + +You look down at your fur and leather pants, no dick in sight. Fearing this was a ruse, you grunt and look up at her, but she isn't trying to fry your face off. + + +"We kinda did have a plan, the moat is the issue," you say. "We were gonna tunnel under the fort, but that would probably just flood." + + +"Have you tried just knocking?" She smirks. + + +You look over to the drawbridge, covered in arrows. + + +You look back at her and shake your head. + + +"Too dangerous." + + +"Well, you have some brains... for an orc." Valek chuckles. + + +She is about to say something but you interrupt her. + + +"We were thinking of finding a way to just barge straight in. They must have a weakness somewhere." + + +"They probably have a secret tunnel system, most elven fortresses do." + + +Now it is your turn to act like a snob. + + +"Don't you think if they did they would have taken their king to safety?" you say, mimicking her haughty attitude. + + +"Besides," you say resuming your normal tone, "we already caved in their tunnel system." + + +"What? Why didn't you just use that to get in?" She starts getting angry. + + +"Too small, and we lost too many orcs trying to get in. Better to collapse and kill all the elves inside." + + +She looks over to the wall, observing the battle taking place. + + +"We have a plan to get through," you say. "We just need more time." + + +You show her some of the wooden "machinations" you and the orcs have been working on. They are wooden constructs, each with a front wall with a small window and handles, there is a small roof to protect against arrows, and the side walls are dipped to allow archers to fire from the side. Each one can protect half a dozen orcs and are operated by three pushing, which would turn the wheels on the front and sides, and three archers firing from the front and sides respectively. + + +"We call them siege breakers. Should get us close enough to take those doors down," you say as you stand behind one, the roof part at least a good foot above your head. A dozen or so elves could probably fit behind one of these. + + +"I have to say," she smirks, "I'm impressed Nolazir. But are you sure you'll be able to get through to the walls, even with these?" + + +"Valek, that's where you come in," you say. "We need you to barrage them with your catapults, and your... magic blast things. Once they are beaten down, we can get in." + + +She nods, taking a moment to look at the defenders scrambling up on the walls, they seem to be massing more out of their reserves in response to this elven nations arrival. + + +You decide to spend the rest of the day with Valek and other elvin and orcish leaders planning out how to break the siege of King Harribor's castle. +> Three Days Later... +You grunt as you push, gripping the handle of the siege breaker you take shelter behind. Arrows embed themselves into the front and top of it. Far ahead, the catapults snap as they fire off, sending stones into the wall. + + +The orc next to you chuckles as a stone shatters part of the wall, and several elves fall to their dooms below. + + +Looking behind you, Valek watches as you push the siege breaker. She sticks her thumb up at you and smiles, and not being sure what to do, you smile and raise your middle finger. She looks surprised for a second and looks away to the catapult. + + +"Idiot!" the orc next to you yells. "Elves don't make jokes!" + + +Nodding in acknowledgment of this wisdom, you continue to push the machine. A horn blares behind you. Valek stands with a catapult into position right behind you and orders it to fire. You and the other orcs all cringe as the projectile soars overhead. + + +With a huge crash, the missile breaks through the castle gate, shattering it and sending splinters flying all over. + + +You nod at Valek, who smiles and raises her middle finger at you. + + +Drawing your sword and axe, you give a mighty cry and lead the charge through the gate. The elves on the walls scramble to either rush to the gate or shoot down on the orcs, but your elven allies blast them with energy bolts, either killing or suppressing them. + + +As you burst through the opening, dozens of elves wait, swords in hand. One tries to hack you, but you simply knock it away with your sword and slice his knee with your axe, running it across his belly next as he falls to a kneel. He tries to keep his guts from spilling out, but you manage to slice his throat, only a gurgle escaping as he falls to the ground. + + +You throw yourself into a group of elves, fighting through them with a new ferocity along with your comrades… + + + +> Revenge +With the castle in sight, the orc army pushes forward, as the elves follow up and support them. From the castle, a large brigade of elves come flowing through. They are lead by an elf in leather black armor, and a large sword for an elf of his stature. From here, you can see his hair is raven black, much like the orcs, but he is full elf, with one blue eye and one green eye. A nasty scar crawls across his face. + + +As the orcs and elves meet, chaos ensues, from the houses and shops the windows burst open, energy blasts shooting out and killing elves and orcs alike. More of the elves flood in from a side street, blindsiding the orcs. + + +You barely manage to dodge an axe to the head, before lopping off your foes arm. You and another orc move through, watching each other's backs and cutting down elf after elf. + + + + + + +You hear a grunt and a heavy sigh. Turning, you see the orc you were fighting with sinking to the ground, a smaller axe buried in his chest. Ahead you see the culprit. The chief from before chuckles as he draws his sword. "So you managed to survive, pretty impressive," he says, "my son and I have a bone to pick with you though." Coming up to his side you see an orc, who looks familiar. Then you remember, he was the orc whose sword you stole. You kicked him in the face and knocked him out, you should have gone back to kill him. Oh well, time to handle this now. The two orcs begin to circle you, the younger seeming eager to rush in. The older content with biding his time. The chief's son rushes in suddenly, he is quick and strong, but stupid and sloppy. You parry a downward blow, raking your axe blade across his thigh. He stumbles as he steps to the side, but manages to stop you from burying your sword into his neck. He swings at your neck, and, stepping back, you slice down into his chest, quickly retracting. He grunts in pain, blood oozing down from his wound. You hear something behind you… Turning, you duck under a strike that surely would have decapitated you. As you pivot, you run your sword along his side, and finishing you bury the axe blade behind his knee. As he falls you loop the axe around and over your head, about to bring it down for the final blow... Something stops you, the chief's son had leaped over, barring you with his sword. His other hand grips the blade, pushing your axe up. His face straining as you both struggle, genuine concern for his father on his face. With your other hand, you drive the sword through him. His brows furrow and his mouth gapes slightly, a small choked cry of pain escapes his lips. As you step back, you pull the sword out of him. Backing up several steps, you watch as the chief pulls himself up to kneel over his son. You can't hear what, but you see the chief's lips moving as he talks to his son. The son tries to speak, and the chief leans in to hear one last whisper before his son goes limp. Turning to you, rage is blazing in his eyes. He moves quickly despite his injuries, and almost bowls you over. You manage to roll out of the way, his sword striking the ground where you stood. In almost the same movement he turns, almost cleaving you in half. You try to chop him with your sword, but he buries his blade in the handle, pulling against the hilt as the sword is pulled from your hand. Gasping, with sweat running down your body, you attempt to chop his arm. The chief roars as he catches the axe by the shoulder, kicking you as he pulls it from your grip. Panting, you crawl back, trying to reach his son's sword. But you are too far, and the chief is too fast. He steps in, looping the sword around his head and raising it for the killing strike. Something pale blue hits his chest, emitting a pop and smoke, sizzling heard from the wound on his chest. He looks up as he staggers back, accidentally lowering the sword. Two more bolts slam into him, causing him to reel back and fall to the ground. Smoke rising from his body, and he lays still. + + + +> Rescued +You roll onto your side, to see Valek standing with her arm outstretched. As you stand, she runs over to you. + + +"Nolazir, are you okay?" + + +"Yeah, I'm fine," you grunt. + + +"What were those guys trying to kill you for anyway?" + + +"Orc dispute. I didn't like his leadership, and they tried to kill me. Twice now." + + +You gather your weapons and take a second to gather your breath. The battle seems to have turned for the orcs. + + +Valek turns and pats you on the back. + + +"You alright? You didn't get tired from fighting a couple of orcs now did you?" + + +"I thought elves didn't joke?" you say. + + +"Now where did you hear that?" She raises an eyebrow. + + +"Uhh, nevermind," you grunt. + + +You both watch as the orcs make their way through up to the front of the castle. + + +"So, where exactly are you from?" you ask. + + +"The Velaneer Kingdom," she says. "Only the best of the best." + + +"I know where you are from, but what did you come from?" + + +"Well, you may be surprised to hear it, but I'm actually from a family of peasant farmers." + + +"Can't you elves use your magic to grow stuff." + + +"We can, which I guess made it easier. But we still needed to make a living, and the Kingdom needs a food supply." + + +"Aren't you elves all fancy? I couldn't imagine what elven peasants would look like." + + +"No, those are probably just common myths. While we do hold ourselves to a higher standard than all other races, we're not all getting fat off the spoils of the kingdom." + + +"So what are you doing here?" you ask. + + +"I thought I could do better for my people than growing grapes and tomatoes, so I became a soldier. Surprised to say I rose through the ranks pretty quickly and found myself here." + + +"So you weren't happy with the life of a peasant, I get that." + + +"So, Nolazir, what about you?" Valek asks. + + +"Hold on," you grunt. "We're pushing through." + + +Ahead, the orcs seem to have breached the castle. Valek follows behind you, noticing that you are somewhat pissed at not being in the front of the fray. +> Castle Fall +You pass over the bodies of the fallen, some horribly mangled, some looking almost peaceful laying on the ground. You see an elf and orc tangled up, the orc's hands wrapped around the elves neck, whose eyes are bulging from his skull. The orc still has a snarl frozen on his face, multiple dagger wounds on his ribs and back, with the elves hand still gripping the dagger. + + +As you enter the castle hall with Valek, the sounds of combat echo throughout the halls. + + +Eventually, you make your way through the main hall, littered with the corpses of elves and orcs. Throughout all of this, you don't see the corpse of the elf with the two different colored eyes. + + +The large golden doors to the King's chamber stand ajar. Holding your axe tightly, you step over to the door. You signal Valek as you get ready to open the door, and she preps to blast a bolt of magic. + + +A shuffling sound and a groan come out from behind the door. You give Valek a sideways glance, and she nods. Throwing the door open, you step back and tighten your grip on your axe. Valek raises her hand... + + +In front of you, an orc shuffles towards you, his body covered in deep gorges, cuts, and burn wounds. In his hand is the head of an elf, which he holds by his long hair. Behind the orc the rest of the body lays in a golden robe, covered in wounds and with a bloody sword next to it. + + +The orc stops in front of you, throwing King Harribor's head to the ground, where it rolls to your feet. The King has one blue eye and one green eye. + + +The orc's mouth quivers slightly as he tries to say something, but he just falls forward. + + +You kneel next to him, feeling his pulse, but he is dead. + + +As the fighting in the rest of the castle recedes, dozens of elves come retreating into the chamber pursued by orcs, only to stop short at seeing the elf king's corpse. + + +You watch as the elves stare in shock, one of them, rather old for an elf draws his sword. You reflexively ready your axe. But the elf drives it through his own chest, gritting his teeth in pain as he pushes it in deeper before falling. + + +Several of the elves follow suit. The rest, seemingly galvanized start firing bolts at the orcs, in a moment you see one heading straight for Valek. + + +You grab her, throwing her behind the door as the bolts fly by. Several manage to miss you as you throw her to safety. You turn to throw the axe, but the orcs have already overrun the remaining elves and have butchered them. + + +You just watch the carnage as you call Valek out. + + +"You didn't have to do that, you know," she says. + + +"Eh, it just seemed like the right thing to do." + + +You and her walk out onto the king's castle balcony. Some elves stop her to ask her some questions about prisoners and the remaining soldiers in the forests and hills. While she talks to them you step through the curtain. +> Balcony +It's a beautiful sight, the sun setting over the trees and the hills. The orange and purple rays playing over the horizon. + + +Casting your glance down, gruesome corpses lay all around the castle yard and surrounding houses and buildings. Elves and orcs alike plunder and loot the corpses and treasures of the elven kingdom's capital. + + +Outside, the elves move their catapults and shift columns of soldiers who got to sit and watch the battle. Somewhere to the left, you see allies moving in large groups of prisoners. Word of King Harribor's death spread quickly. + + +The curtain ruffles, and Valek steps out beside you. + + +"So, Nolazir, are you going to be staying around for a while?" Valek asks. + + +"Hmm, yeah, just long enough to organize some things. What about you?" + + +"Uhh, yeah I was planning on staying for a bit. Lots of prisoners to secure and people to move around." + + +"Great," you say. "I'm sure I'll see you around then." + + +Valek wrinkles her nose, looking out at the carnage below. + + +"Sometimes, I wonder if it was all worth it," she says. "So many people killed, and for what?" + + +"I don't know why you elves started fighting each other, but they came to us making promises of strength and power. They thought we would be too short-sighted to see what they were trying to do." + + +Valek nods. + + +"They showed up in force, and we responded with greater force," you say. + + +"We had our reasons, but I just don't know what the point of it all really was," Valek says as she leans against the railing. + + +"Sure, the Wister elves were at odds with us, but these past few years, we made so many sacrifices. " + + +"It wasn't all in vain," you say, "they sacrificed to secure a better future. You might not see it now, but King Harribor was getting too bold, too greedy. He was putting you and us in jeopardy." + + +"Hmm, we will see about that," she says. + + +You both stop talking for a moment, and after a few seconds you look over to find her just looking at you. + + +"What's with the staring?" you ask raising an eyebrow. + + +"I don't know, there's just something I like about you." + + +You take a step toward her, and, even though she is an elf, there is something you like about her too. You put your hand on the back of her head, pulling her in as you lean in. Her lips are much softer than an orc woman's. + + +She puts her hand on your shoulder as she begins to reciprocate… +> Later... +You lay on your bed of blankets and pillows. Valek is snuggled up next to you, her hand resting on your chest, your arm wrapped around her lower back and resting between her hip and stomach. Her body very warm against yours. + + +"I hope no one heard us," she says. + + +"Screw 'em if they did." + + +"Well, this was a fun little experiment," she says. "Too bad we won't have time for more of this." + + +You grunt in response to which she lightly slaps your chest. + + +"What's 'mrmmph' supposed to mean?" + + +You grunt. + + +"Are you going to talk to me," she asks, "or are you going to keep being weird?" + + +You grunt in response. + + +Valek rolls over and grunts... to which you also grunt, causing her to grunt once again. + + +Valek laughs and snuggles closer to you. + + +"You're pretty funny for a big ugly orc. I'll miss you, I think." + + +"And you're not such a pretentious snob... for an elf." + + +You close your eyes and hold her close, knowing that this won't last long and you will soon have to return to your homelands… +> Prologue Closing +The Wister Empire had fallen, allowing the elves and orcs to return to their homes at long last. In the coming years, relative peace would fall over the orcs, but a storm was forming over the horizon… +> Chapter 1:Rising +Six years later... + + +The sun casts its golden rays over the blessed lands of Orcin, the blue sky showers the soft grass in its jubilee. The rivers run freely, the animals roam, and the people are happy. + + +The villages and tribes have recovered well from the four years of grinding combat with the elves. The Wister Elf nation has been absorbed into the Empire; the Imperial governor of the old nation has turned it into a labor force for the Empire. From what you have heard they have been sending a surplus of weapons, wagons, and even domestic equipment to their allies. + + +A loud wailing sound pierces the silence you had lost yourself in. The baby cradled in your arm cries out, demanding attention. You rock the child in your arm, murmuring an old orcish lullaby. + +A little orc girl of three years waddles over and pats your knee. + + +"Dad, can I hold Lagrik?" she asks. + + +"No, Vokra, I'm just getting him back to sleep," you say. "You can play with him later." + + +Vokra walks off to pout but is soon distracted by her brother, Grovlar, who seems to have found a baby snake to play with. + + +It's been a long six years. + + +They've been filled with blessings though. Your wife and children are all healthy and strong, your humble farm yields healthy crops. The animals are all in good condition, and you have nothing you would consider a real problem. + + +A quick pinch to your belly reminds you that you have gotten a little soft in these past few years. While you are still strong as an orc should be, it has been a while since you've actually had to do any vigorous work for extended periods of time. + + +Well, other things call in the life of an orc. You hand the infant to your wife, as you go to chop up some more firewood for the coming night along with other chores that need to be done. + + +You raise the axe, cleaving the piece of wood in half… + + + + +Later in the day, you sit by the fire with your wife snuggled beside you. The children all snore gently in their beds of animal furs. Gilikia cradles the baby as he whimpers softly. + + +As you sit, you wonder how Valek is doing, if she is even alive. You haven't heard from her since you left the Wister Kingdom. More than likely she has probably moved on with the life of a soldier in search for something else, as most tend to do. +> The Next Day +It's been a productive day. You've made sure the crops have adequate water, your animals are well fed and some are ready to be slaughtered soon. + + +The sound of hooves hitting the dirt causes your ear to prick. Looking over your shoulder, you see two orcs on horseback. + + +One you recognize as Rolomag, a few years younger than you and being the son of your cousin's sister in law. Something like that anyway. His hair tied up in a bun, similar to what many of the orcs seem to prefer these days, and his face clean shaven. + + +The other one you don't quite recognize, a little orc boy. About ten years of age. + + +"Nolazir," the older orc says, "we need to talk." + + +"Alright, come in," you say. "And whose kid is this?" + + +"Huh? That's my little brother, Rolzagir." + + +You nod. + + +The two brothers hop down off the horse, the older handing the reigns to the younger, who goes to tie the horse to a post. + + +The other orcs in your village live pretty spread out, as everyone farms or at least owns some livestock. + + +"So what's going on Rolomag?" you ask, sitting down on a wooden log. + + +Rolomag sits down as his brother walks over and leans against your house. + + +"Dekard spotted some Imperial patrols hovering near the border," Rolomag says. "We think they are preparing to come through." + + +"For what?" you say. "They already took the elves. What do they want with us?" + + +"Resources, food, animals, us… Hell if I know." + + +Rolomag stands up. + + +"Anyway, the village is meeting up to see what we're going to do about this." + + +"Is there really anything we can do?" you ask. "Maybe they just want to protect their border. I wouldn't put it past some of the border tribes to be raiding people on Imperial lands." + + +"You think that's the case?" + + +"If it is, we need to stop them before the Empire takes it out on all of us." + + +You stand and go to your horse. + + +"No point in waiting around." + + +You, Rolomag, and Rolzagir all ride off to meet with all the other orcs. +> Village Meeting +All the orcs stand around a giant tree in the village center, waiting for your chief, Greusim, to speak. He stands on a flat rock, looking over everyone. + + +Greusim has the raven black hair that all the orcs have, the sides shaved into a mohawk, with the back end running down to his upper back. White hairs scattered throughout his majestic hair. His face aged and wrinkled, giving him the appearance of a grumpy bulldog, and two sharp teeth protrude up from his under bite, a common trait among orcs. + + +For a moment you and he look at each other, his left eye always perpetually half closed, making him look vexed. Although the chief is one of the calmest orcs you have ever met. + + +"Everyone," he starts, "it has come to my attention that the Imperials are amassing warriors by the borders between our lands." + + +He spreads his arms out. + + +"These very lands that have been our home since Gigalak gave it to the First Born." He pauses for a moment. "We need to make sure these lands are protected, for the well being of all orcs, ourselves, and future generations. " + + +Some of the orcs start calling out for blood, to which Greusim shakes his head. + + +"No, we must watch what the Empire does, we cannot go out looking for a fight. Not this time, we must try to avoid conflict. Now, I will personally lead an expedition team to the border, and we will see what the Imperials are doing. There will likely be other tribes of orcs doing likewise, but if they fight the Empire, we will not interfere." + + +"What happened to all that shit about sticking together?!" an orc cries angrily. + + +"We will only fight if they attack us first, we will not be the ones to start a war with the Empire. It would be deadly, and very long if we did so." + + +You all talk amongst each other. According to chief Greusim, this could be a very precarious situation. You call out. + + +"What if they are protecting their borders from orcs raiding Imperial lands?" you ask. "You know what some of the tribes are like." + + +If you could even call them that, some groups of orcs aren't even proper tribes. Just bands of raiders, thieves, and scum. + + +"If that is the case," the chief says, "we will let them know they do not act on behalf of all of Orcin. Maybe, we would even help the Empire fight them on behalf of the rest of the tribes." + + +There is arguing amongst the orcs. The orcs have banded together to fight external threats, but never with a foreign power to fight other orcs. The affairs of orcs have always been kept to the tribes of orcin. + + +Helping the Empire fight fellow orcs, no matter if they are scum, would be crazy. + + +"So, my friends," Greusim says, "who will aid me on this quest." + + +Many hands go up, the chief peering through the crowd to see who would be best. + + +You wonder if you should raise your hand, the expedition might call for experience and expertise, which you would have. On the other hand, you also don't really want to leave your family for an extended period of time. While Gilikia is strong and hard-working, two kids, an infant, and a multitude of chores would be difficult for her to handle by herself. Also, there is the fact that someone may need to run the village in Greusim's absence, which is also something you would be willing to do. +> Raise Your Hand +You raise your hand, the chief's eyes widening slightly and a small grin creeps across his face. Seems like he was hoping you would join. The chief starts calling out names, yours and Rolomag's among them. + + +The other orcs shuffle off at the command of Greusim. You go off towards your house, to prepare for the expedition. +> Expedition +With your supplies ready, you've said your goodbyes to your family and ride over to the village center, where three dozen orcs have gathered. + + +Greusim nods his head towards the mountains, leading the group forward. You ride on for the whole day, passing streams, rivers, fields, and forests. + + +After some days you come to the foot of the mountains. On the other side of this lies the border between Imperial lands and Orcin. + + +Rolomag cuts you a look, raising his eyebrows and gesturing towards the mountains. You wonder why he seems annoyed by the mountains, as he knew you would be traversing them. +> Mountain Trail +The howling wind's cruel bite pierces your fur and leather clothing. It takes the dying leaves from the trees with it, spiraling down to the depths below. Crags point out accusingly, and cliffs dare you to come too close. + + +You all ride in a single file line, making sure your horses don't slip and fall to certain doom below. + + +Somewhere above, something skitters along the rocks. There is nothing to be seen up there, very strange. Could just be some mountain critters going about their day. + + +Finally, after a whole day of moving painstakingly slow, you get off the steep paths of doom. Ahead the road is far wider, and there is vegetation and pools of water for the horses. Stopping the horses to rest, you all huddle behind the chief as he looks out from the mountain. + + +The mountain curves down into a valley, and even below that are the great forests guarding Orcin. Miles and miles of trees, and eventually you can see large Imperial cities interspersed throughout the forests, hills, mountains, and plains in the distance. To the right, past a large river, are huge plains that are home to the more nomadic orc tribes, as well as the vagabond types roaming Orcin. + + +"Beyond this mountain, where the First Born was created, the Empire seeks out our land," Greusim says while he takes in the fresh mountain air, gesturing to the forests and plains below. + + +"We will give them a warm welcome, or a bloodbath," Greusim says. "It's their choice." + + +The group rests there for the night, leaving guards to watch out for wild creatures or individuals who would do harm. + + +The next few days are full of eventful walks down the mountain. + + +Soon, the path to the valley is in sight. + + + +> Through the Valley +Silence. No wind. No talking. + + +You all sit on your horses, staring into the valley. Ahead, what appears to be scattered remains of tents and campfires lay around. + + +As you advance towards the deserted campground, your eyes dart back and forth, to every rock and every tree. Something doesn't quite feel right here. + + +As you ride through the camp, you notice some of the tents seem to have been ripped open. There aren't any bodies or anything, and by the camp's design, it belonged to some orcs. + + +On the ground is a tattered blanket, pinned under a tent stake, and almost blowing in the wind. Hopping off the horse, you look underneath it. A dagger made out of bone and hide sits under it, dark red blood sticking to the blade. + + +You hold it over your shoulder, showing it to the chief, who takes it in his hand. + + +"Something definitely came through here," he looks into the trees above, "but what?" + + +"Nothing I want to find out about," Rolomag says, much louder than he should. + + +You put a finger to your lip, looking up to the trees. They sway in the wind, maybe carrying something deadly within them. + + +You're not sure, but for a moment it sounds like something is whispering to you from the trees. + + +Greusim signals the group to mount up and move on, which you do gladly. + + +You all gallop out of the valley, and into the forests ahead. +> First Encounter +With the strange campsite far behind you, the group seems to be more at ease. The forest is much more serene and offers some peace and quiet. + + +A stream trickles by, as your horse steps over it, you hear some sounds up ahead. + + +Greusim looks over his shoulder at the group behind him, and you nod at him. + + +You, Greusim, Rolomag, Dekard, and some other orcs all leave your horses to go scout ahead. The main group waits for your return. + + +The unmistakable sounds of violence penetrate your ears. Peering from the foliage, you see two things. The first must be Imperial soldiers, with their flat top helms and robes over what appears to be some kind of silver coat. + + +Cowards. The orcs only use some padding from their leather armor and sometimes studs. Anything more would just weigh a warrior down and keep him from being effective. + + +From what you can see, they have two separate lines of archers by the trees, and in the clearing between them are soldiers on horseback. Ahead, on a rocky hill, a group of orcs seems to be holding their ground, trading arrows with the Imperial archers. Once in a while, an orc taking a shot at one of the horsemen, but always missing. + + +In between two groups lays a slain Imperial, a spear in his back, and a dead orc with the spear still gripped in his hands. The orc has several arrows protruding from his back. Judging by his face paint, it looks like these orcs are one of the lawless bands of orcs. + + +"We need to help them," Rolomag says as he starts forward. + + +You grab him by the shoulder, pulling him back. + + +"Stop. We don't know who started it," you say. "This isn't a proper orc tribe. They're just some vagabonds." + + +"Does it matter? They're still orcs," Rolomag says. + + +"No, Nolazir may be right," Greusim says. "We should let the Imperials know they aren't working on behalf of all of orcin." + + +"Are you really going to listen to this?" Rolomag asks. "Nolazir, the Empire won't care either way. They will blame all of us." + + +"No, we can make peace with them," Greusim says. + + +Greusim looks at you. + + +"You believe me, don't you, Nolazir?" + + +Chief Greusim looks genuinely concerned about whether or not you believe him or not. You look to Rolomag, he raises an eyebrow, not lifting the scowl on his face for a moment. +> Talk to the Imperials +"We will talk to them," you say. "We can't achieve peace through war, not this time." + + +"Thank you, friend," Greusim says. + + +With this, Greusim leads you all over to the Imperials. You all move slowly, hands in sight, and with Greusim several feet ahead. The Imperial knight ahead jerks his head back as he sees your group. The other horsemen seem alarmed, but ultimately don't do anything. + + +"Friends," Greusim calls out, "we have come to tell you, those lawless do not act on behalf of Orci-" + + +To this day, no one knows where it came from, if it was a stray arrow from the lawless orcs meant for an Imperial knight or an Imperial archer who was too hasty in his actions, but everyone knew it was what started one of the largest conflicts in the history of Velis Brum. + + +Greusim gasps, an arrow piercing his side. Crimson red oozes out of the wound soon after. With a roar, the other orcs charge forward in rage. + + +"Wait," Greusim wheezes out, trying to compose himself. + + +In response, the Imperials charge forth, ready to fight the orcs. The knight who had first seen your group holds his hand out, signaling the other knights. + + +"No, stop," he commands. + + +But the knights just keep charging, and the two groups embroil in deadly combat. +> Fight the Horsemen +Looking between the groups, you and the knight find each other. He still seems shocked, having tried to stop his men from attacking. As you both make eye contact, you nod at him. Both of you share a resigned look, but know this must be done. + + +You draw your sword, and the knight does likewise. He holds the sword in front of his face, putting his forehead to the hilt for a moment before readying it to fight. You both spur your horses forward. +> Charge +As you get closer to him, you arc your sword over your head, aiming for his neck. The Imperial soldier slams it away with the flat of his blade and, mid-push, brings his blade back down. The sword cuts through your thick leather armor, biting into your shoulder. + + +You wince and grunt as he pulls his sword, the both of you passing each other and turning in preparation to charge again. Behind him, you see that the orcs seem to have pushed the Imperial horsemen back a bit, and the orcs on the hill have wounded several archers in each column. + + +The battle is going well enough for the orcs. + + +As you charge the Imperial knight again, you consider your next move. +> Slice through him with your sword +As you ride forward, you prepare to slash into his neck again. You pull the sword over the opposite shoulder of the hand it's in. As the Imperial gets closer, you go for a vicious swing. + + +He twists his wrist, blocking it near the hilt, pushing your sword up. As your blade slides off his, the knight arcs the deadly weapon over his head the opposite way. As you pass each other he swings his sword back. + + +Your mouth gapes open as the tip of the blade digs into your back, cutting across the length of your back. It notably severs your spine. As your horse trots forward you feel a numbness creep from your waist and through your legs. + + +As the horse starts to turn, you begin to feel dizzy, the numbness spreading through the rest of your body. You see the knight watching you, his sword at the ready. You don't even realize that you've fallen off your horse, the numbness finishing spreading through your body. + + +Then, an eternal night. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you get closer to him, you arc your sword over your head, aiming for his neck. The Imperial soldier slams it away with the flat of his blade and, mid-push, brings his blade back down. The sword cuts through your thick leather armor, biting into your shoulder. + + +You wince and grunt as he pulls his sword, the both of you passing each other and turning in preparation to charge again. Behind him, you see that the orcs seem to have pushed the Imperial horsemen back a bit, and the orcs on the hill have wounded several archers in each column. + + +The battle is going well enough for the orcs. + + +As you charge the Imperial knight again, you consider your next move. +> Run him through +The horses charge forward, the Imperial knight holds his sword out in front of him, ready for whatever may come next. You arc your sword around your head, and you see his arm flex to deflect the strike. + + +As you near striking range, you whip the sword around counter clockwise, pulling your elbow back and plunging forward. The knight manages to knock your sword aside, flicking his wrist and stabbing the tip of his blade into your chest. The momentum causes the tip of the blade to just come out through your back. + + +Pain shoots through your body and you gasp. The force of the sword pushing into you causes you to fall back, but you manage to catch onto your horse, stopping you from falling off. You clutch the wound as the horses circle back around. + + +Looking back you can see the Imperials are starting to overwhelm the orcs. How can this be? There are far more orcs than those human scum. + + +White hot pain shoots through your chest again, and you clutch the wound. Blood sticks to your hand as you pull it away. + + +"Damn it," you say. + + +The Imperial knight twirls his sword, daring you to come at him again. Such arrogance. + + +You decide to oblige him, charging forward. He prepares his sword, expecting you to strike again. + + +This time you pull up your axe, but hold it down behind the horse. You strike with the sword, and he predictably parries it. This time you slam your axe blade into his side, and as you circle back around you smirk as you see that….. + + +There's no blood? + + +You see the spot on his side where you swung the axe, but the robe is just ripped, the silver coat gleaming in the sunlight. + + +Is this some kind of magic coat? Or maybe it is some kind of metal. You've never seen anyone wear metal to avoid battle injuries. You've also never actually seen a human before either. + + +As the knight prepares to charge again, your body begins to feel weak. You're losing blood fast, so you are going to have to finish this or he will. The knight charges towards you… + + + +> Throw your axe at the Knight (W) +You sit there panting, and for a moment you see that the orcs on the hill have finally come down, and helped turn the fight around for the orcs. + + +The soldier readies his sword, and you lift your axe, hefting it forward. + + +It flies, whipping through the air. The blade buries into the horses forehead, it lets out a pained neigh and drops forward. The knight flies forward and off the horse, crying out as he does. + + +You hear a crunch as he hits the ground, and he rolls to a stop. Trotting forward, you prepare your sword to finish him. + + +The knight grunts and feebly tries to stand up, but one of his arms is horribly bent. He loses his balance and falls before he can get up. + + +You feel dizzy as you raise your sword, pain shooting through your arm. + + +Before you can strike him down, you hear a loud cry emanating out from behind you. + + + +> For the Emperor! (W) +You turn your horse, clutching your wounds. From out of the trees, an enormous group of humans comes rushing out, screaming and yelling. You notice they are quite different from the knights. While some of them have the silver coats, most of them just have some kind of padding and the Imperial soldier robes. Their boots, gloves, and helmets don’t look anywhere near as nice as the knights'. + + +These must be the lowly soldiers of the Empire, but there sure are a lot of them. Wincing, you turn as you see the lawless orcs bring up a cry, charging towards the humans. You watch as your comrades also charge the humans, so you decide you should as well. + + +Galloping forward, you prepare your axe. A battle of strength versus numbers, you decide that Gigalak will decide the winner today. + + +You trample a couple of humans, their cries ringing out. The axe bites into another, and as he dies his sword nicks your arm. You slash, hack, batter, and even punch one. A dying soldier cries out, digging his dagger into your side. You gasp and slam your axe handle into his eye, a squishing sound resounds as blood squirts out and onto your leg. He lets out a blood-curdling scream as he flails, soon going limp and falling to the ground. + + +With the dagger still in your side, you circle back, needing to fight through a few more soldiers to do so. Panting, you see that the battle is being lost for the orcs, but some still fight on, despite their injuries and overwhelming odds. + + +Chief Greusim charges into the middle of it, laying waste to soldier after soldier. His mighty club denting helmets and cracking skulls, breaking arms and busting jaws. + + +You watch as he cries out, someone plunging their sword into his side. Gasping, you ride forward to save him. But there are too many soldiers to fight through, and before you can reach him the grunts pull Greusim from his horse, stabbing, slashing, punching, and beating. You see his own club being raised to be used against him. + + +All the other orcs in your tribe watch as the chief goes down, along with the other orcs he had around him. + + +There's just too many, you'll never fight through them all. + + +"Fall back! Fall back!" some orc cries out. + + +As you all do so, the lawless orcs seem shocked as to why. Before they can get away, the Imperial troops have swept them up and begin to butcher most of them. Few escape, and you even swing one onto your horse as you ride away. You trample and hack several Imperial soldiers on your way out. + + +You all ride into the forest, lucky to have escaped death on this day. The same cannot be said for many others. + + +You exchange glances with Rolomag, who nods and pokes his chin to the valley. Although you don't like the idea, you all will have to go there to recover and make plans…. +> New Problems +You sit there by the fire. Rolomag sits across from you, taking a swig from a flask of orcish whiskey before handing it to you. You gladly accept, the bitter substance burning your throat as it goes down. + + +The camp is silent except for the tribeless orcs squabbling over something. + + +"We're gonna have to go back," Rolomag says. + + +"What? Back where?" you ask. + + +"The village. We need more orcs. We have to get these Imperials out of our lands." + + +"I don't think it's going to work so well," you say, "there's so many of them." + + +"What's wrong with you?" Rolomag says, "I used to hear stories about you from returning orcs in our village." + + +"That was years ago. This is now. Greusim was right. We can't fight them." + + +"Yeah, well those animals tore him apart. It's our job to get vengeance." + + +You sit and stare into the fire, realizing the Imperials are probably already marching further into Orcin. Grunting as you stand, you walk over to the wild group of lawless orcs. + + +"Who of you is your leader?" you ask. + + +"I am!" one orc cries as he stands. + + +"No, I am!" another yells. + + +They both start brawling, savagely punching and wrestling each other. You shake your head and look to the rest. A tall orc stands, one tooth protruding up from his underbite, the other chipped, warpaint in the shape of a red handprint on his face. His raven black hair runs wild along his head, the sides shaved as is popular with warring orcs. + + +"I am Grolik," he says, "leader of the Red Handed orcs band." + + +You extend your hand and shake his in the traditional orc handshake. + + +"I am grateful for your assistance," Grolik says. "We probably wouldn't have made it out of there." + + +"We orcs need to stick together," you say, "but I wonder. How did this all start?" + + +Grolik looks to the side and shuffles his feet. + + +"We….uhh, we thought they were invading and tried to stop them." + + +You squint your eyes at him. + + +"You weren't raiding Imperial villages on their side of the border?" you ask. + + +"Well…uh….no?" he says. + + +"You realize you've put Orcin in jeopardy," you say. + + +"We can probably work something out with the Empire," Grolik says. "Hell, they probably think they've won." + + +"I have half a mind to turn you over to them," you say, "but I just want to get this all settled, and go back home." + + +Grolik laughs hard at this. + + +"What? Have you gotten soft?" he asks, "what kind of orc are you?" + + +Before he can react, your slam your fist into his face, bowling him over. Some Red Hands grab their nearest weapons and stand up. Several of your tribesmen prepare for a fight as well. + + +"No, no. It's alright," Grolik says. "Don't worry about him. He's just a fool." + + +Grolik snarls as he stands. + + +"But if you ever do that again," he says, "it won't end well for you." + + +You just watch as he goes back to his spot next to the fire and guzzles some alcohol. + + +Grunting, you walk back over to Rolomag. + + +"Just as I thought," you say. "We shouldn't even be involved. They started this mess." + + +Rolomag's eyes widen for a moment before going back to staring sleepily at the fire. + + +"We still lost good friends there," he says. "We need to right this." + + + + +The next day, Dekard and three other orcs ride back to the village to get some help. You're sure some of the orcs will be happy to have some fighting to do. Although you can't be sure where this will lead, you will be happy to keep the Imperials away. + + +You sit back, closing your eyes to rest. +> Two Months Later... +The wind plays along your hair, the warm morning sunshine gracing your face. The rocky outcrop you lay upon offering you a complete view of the Imperial camp ahead. + + +The past two months had been spent watching and tracking the Imperials. Their move into Orcin has been slow, and, other than a few minor fights with other random lawless bands, they have not done much. + + +You watch soldiers milling about, their purple and black standards dotting the camp. Stern officers watch younger soldiers and recruits train, practice, and do drills. Oddly, it looks much like an orcish war band preparing for battle. Only, the humans have a lot more wagons and crates of supplies than orcs, who mostly live off the land as they go. + + +The camp of soldiers still outnumbers your group, even with back up from the camp and some more tribeless orcs rallying to the Red Handed cause. Grolik's band are even more impatient and bloodthirsty than regular orcs. + + +Grolik sits behind you, mumbling something as he sharpens his axe blade. His plan is just to march in and start slaughtering people, but you know you'll only be overwhelmed and killed. These soldiers are too numerous and too skilled for those tactics. + + +You're going to have to go with another plan, somewhat against your nature, but maybe it'll help win this fight. + + +Almost on cue, a column of soldiers marches onto the road running through the camp. They all have their helmets and silver coats, as well as varying degree of light weapons. + + +"Humans sure do dress strangely for battle," you say. + + +Leading the column is a knight on a horse, looking very similar to the knights you first encountered. + + +You signal the orcs around you, slowly making your way down the rocky hill. + + +"Come on," Grolik complains. "Let's charge 'em!" + + +"No, we must wait." + + +Putting your finger to your lips, you follow the Imperials as they move through the forest. They move quite slowly, and some don't really seem to even be paying attention. +> Circle +Your orcs faithfully carry out your plan, most moving ahead and some around the Imperial soldiers, until you have created a c-shape around them. + + +Every orc has the same tools for fighting these humans. As they march forward, you prepare to throw one of your spears. Lifting it, you watch as the knight stops and looks to his right. As you chuck the spear, he looks ahead. Somehow he manages to duck and slip off the horse, hitting the ground and rolling before the spear can hit him. + + +You watch as it harmlessly bounces off a soldiers helmet. Once an eerie silence, the area now erupts with men and orcs shouting, as orcs fire arrows relentlessly at the soldiers. As you notch an arrow, the knight lays down behind his fallen horse. + + +You observe the arrows and most spears bouncing off the silver coats they wear. Although some are killed when they are hit in spots the coat doesn't cover, such as arms, legs, and their faces. You are surprised to see one spear actually pierce the armor, but it can't have gone too deep as the soldier is still standing. + + +The soldiers hide behind their shields and armor, most of the projectiles becoming useless. The orcs get sick of all this shooting and decide to charge the Imperials. As you draw your axe and run forth, you see the Imperials making a line of shields with other Imperials standing between them and firing arrows through. + + +The orcs are pierced by arrows as their axes and swords bounce uselessly off the shields. Getting closer, you watch an Imperial bash an orc with his shield before slicing through his padded leather shirt with his sword. + + +You rush in, throwing your shoulder into one of them. The human doesn't quite fall, but you ram your axe head's spike into his face. He cries out in pain and falls, and you barely have time to react before other soldiers close the gap. You leap back as three blades are swung and jabbed at you. +> Break +While some Imperials have been killed, they are quickly whittling down your numbers. To your left, you see the knight caught out of the line, trying to rally his soldiers. You watch as an orc chops at his head with an axe, but it bounces off his helmet. The knight rams his sword blade through the orc's armpit, pushing the dying orc off. + + +Another orc slashes, the blade harmlessly skidding across the helmet. Before the orc is cut down, he slams the flat of the axe on the soldier's helm, slightly denting it. + + +You look to the Imperial with the protruding spear from his silver coat, and the knights dented helmet. You get an idea… +> Smash a rock on the knight +You run up to the knight, parrying a jab, tackling him and throwing his sword to the ground. The knight rolls to the side, slamming his fist into your stomach as he comes up to a crouch. It barely affects you, but he reaches his sword. + + +As he grabs it, he stumbles and, seeing your moment, you grab a large rock. The knight twirls around, crying out and trying to take your head. You duck, the blade swooshing over your head. With a mighty roar, you stand, slamming the rock onto his helmet. + + +The sound of metal crashing attacks your ears. The Empire's knight crumples to the ground, a large dent in his helm. You kneel down, slamming the rock into his helmet again and again. The helmet crushing inward unnaturally and the man's body spasming as blood seeps out from under his helmet. +> Retreat +The orcs give a cry as the knight dies, and the Imperials try to execute a controlled retreat. Some orcs mimic you in using force to crush the helmets and pierce the silver coats. You notice though, that most of the weapons used seem heavily damaged after. + + +Picking up an Imperial shield, you catch up to some unfortunate and ram the shield into his helmet, denting it. You slam the point of the shield into his face until it is a pink, bloody, unrecognizable mass of flesh. + + +At this point, the soldiers are in full flight, attempting to reach the safety of the camp. It is not too much longer before all of the Imperials lay butchered on the ground. + + +Panting and covered in sweat and blood, you lean against a tree. You watch as the orcs loot the corpses, taking Imperial weapons. + + +Curious, you walk over to one of the bodies, removing his silver coat. It clanks together as you move it about and is heavier than you thought. Peering closely, it appears as though it is made up of many little rings of metal. You fold it up and stash it inside an Imperial soldiers satchel, which you also take. + + +You assist the orcs with collecting the dead and wounded, intent on better preparing for your next encounter... +> Two Years Later... +The past two years have been successful in repelling the Empire. While you wish it didn't have to come to this, you know that these humans can't freely move their army around Orcin without consequence. + + +Shortly after ambushing that patrol two years ago, you led the orcs into a nighttime raid on the camp. Your warriors cut throats, burned tents and supplies, and left few survivors. Since then, the human generals have sent more and more troops to try to contain the situation. + + +Once this had happened, you enlisted the help of a couple of the other surrounding orc tribes. Using your newfound guerilla tactics, you managed to keep the skirmishes to the forests at the borders of Orcin. + + +In the meantime, your fellows had created some advancements to cracking the metal shells of the Imperials. Heavy tipped arrows and spears for piercing the chainmail armor, as you have since learned was the name for their "silver coats". You had also taken the heavy wooden clubs and trimmed down the large wooden portion for a couple metal rings wrapped around the tip. This would make them easier to swing, and it is easier to dent Imperial helmets, as well as bruise and break limbs. + + +Also, having taken some of the chainmail, you and the others have learned how to make your own in recent months. Although you were not able to make steel, you used iron to make chain rings and studs woven into your leather padded clothing. + + +This had decreased the chances of death for your orcs, forcing the Imperials to get more creative with their killing methods as you have had to. For a while, you had the upper hand until they developed heavier weapons that could easily pierce mail. + + +Neither the orc tribes nor the Imperials have made any attempts at establishing peace or any sort of treaty. It just seems as though these fights have become normal for both sides by now, although the council has sent you several messages asking to make a treaty. You always send the messenger back, telling them to come do it if they are worried about it. It isn't that you do not want peace, but the Imperials have become pretty skittish at the sight of orcs, each side shoots first and asks questions later. +> Interruption +Two loud voices shout just outside of your tent. Pushing the flaps aside you step out and are not surprised to see that Rolomag and Grolik are arguing again. While Grolik was a problem for a while, he seemed to warm up after you unknowingly saved his cousin's life a few months ago. + + +You watch as the two bicker like some old married couple. + + +"Grolik, you're a fool if you think we can push into Imperial territory," Rolomag shouts. + + +"My orcs haven't looted anything in weeks. We're getting restless." + + +"See, I can agree on invading soldier camps," Rolomag replies, "but actually going into their home villages and towns is asking for more than we can handle." + + +"It's only a matter of time before they start attacking ours," Grolik says. "Once they realize we've been trading with the surrounding neutral villages, they'll start wiping them out. And there are innocent people in those villages too." + + +"Why do you care? You're worried the Empire is going to steal your victims?" + + +"Of course I care, they're fellow orcs damn it! Besides, we only raid fellow bands of 'tribeless orcs', like ourselves." + + +"So you've never raided a village?" + + +"Well….maybe we've stolen crops and cattle here and there. But that's survival, and we usually don't murder anyone. Besides, we wouldn't want to bring the wrath of the council on us." + + +"But you have no problem stirring up the Empire?" Rolomag asks. + + +"It was the same thing with them. We stole crops and cattle when we needed. I thought if anything they would just bolster their defenses, not send a damn legion in here." + + +Grolik seems to realize he has stepped too close to Rolomag and sighs as he takes a step back. + + +"Besides," he says, "they're not completely innocent. They've made dozens of trespasses in years past." + + +You stand and watch, a scowl on your face. They both are right to some degree. It seems that you can either escalate the conflict or remain in this little stalemate. + + +You have also been made aware that the goblins living in the Southwest of Orcin, who have always been rivals with the lawless, have become bolder. After years of constant skirmishing with the lawless orc bands, the goblins have gotten more organized, made better equipment, and even have moved further into Orcin. + + +This is an issue for everyone as the lawless orcish tribes and the goblins have usually kept too many dwarves, humans, and more adventurous ogres and other invasive creatures from coming too far in from there. While you are sure there are smaller pockets of goblins and other creatures in the orc lands, these goblins have only increased in number. + + +Now, with the lawless focused on the Mannate Empire, and the goblins moving away from the Southwestern border, you've heard of dwarves making a steady advance into the lands. They mostly just mine for raw materials, the only military presence being small teams to protect the miners. You are aware that many of the dwarves have a partnership with the Empire, and, at any moment, they could push into the hills and plains and into the heart of Orcin. +> Issues at hand +Stopping your thoughts, you decide to intervene before Rolomag and Grolik come to blows. + + +"Enough," you say. "We will figure all of this out." + + +It seems that you have become the unofficial chief of your tribe since Greusim's doom, and even his son Galik hasn't tried to challenge this. It has its benefits, but also its own headaches. + + +"Well, Nolazir," Rolomag says, "what will it be?" + + +"Neither for now," you say. "We need to amass strength before we do anything else. We can probably keep them in this stalemate for a while." + + +"You need to act now," Grolik says. "I think you've become complacent, and that never ends well in these situations." + + +"Grolik," you say, "while we have many orcs, I don't think we have enough to keep this up for too much longer. All the humans need to do is galvanize a couple of legions, and they could wipe these mountains with our corpses." + + +You grunt and spread your arms out for a moment. + + +"We can't risk escalating right now," you say, "but we also need to keep up the appearance of being a larger force, and we know this won't keep up for long." + + +You gesture for the two to enter your tent, where you have a large map of Orcin pinned to a wooden table. + + +"See here?" You point on the map. "The goblins started out here. The lawless orcs drove them way out over here." + + +Grolik grunts in surprise, apparently unaware that they had covered so much ground. + + +"We need to either wipe them out," you say, "or make a treaty, which I like better." + + +"What?" Grolik says. "They're filth, scavengers, and cowards." + + +"They're organized," you say, "and like you and your lawless tribes, they have kept the dwarves away. If we can make a treaty between them and the lawless tribes, you all should be able to live close enough, back where they originally were." + + +You point back to where the goblins originally lived. + + +"Once we have made peace with them," you say, "your orcs can enjoy whatever spoils they take from the Imperials. We'll even help you establish farms and trade with the rest of the orcs." + + +"Why would we want that?" Grolik asks. + + +"No more hungry winters. Besides, don't think I don't know what you all do for food when you're desperate." + + +Grolik's eyes dart to the ground, his face wincing for a brief moment. + + +"What are you talking about?" he says, not so much asking. + + +"You know damn well. It's against Gigalak." + + +"It was just survival…" Grolik says. + + +"Yeah, well we're not animals… or wendigos." + + +There is a silence as Grolik shifts uncomfortably. Rolomag just pretends he is not paying attention as he studies the map. + + +"Now," you say, "while I deal with the goblins, can you gather some of the lawless tribes?" + + +Grolik still looks ashamed, but he nods. + + +"If I promise them some loot, food, and some autonomy… then yeah, I can." + + +"Good, now can you and your best go handle that?" + + +Grolik nods and walks out of the tent. After a few moments, Rolomag speaks. + + +"Damn," he says, "didn't know things were that desperate for them. Now I guess I can see why they loot." + + +"Yeah, well we will put an end to that soon enough." + + +You sigh and grab a pack of supplies. + + +"Rolomag, stay here and watch over the camp," you say. + + +"Where are you going?" he asks. + + +"I'm taking a group, we're going to go take care of the goblins, one way or another." + + +With this you exit the tent, gathering some trusted orcs for the trip. +> One Month Later... +The last several weeks have yielded little results. After reaching the deserted camp of the goblins, you can only assume they had moved deeper into Orcin. At this point, you're wondering if going total war on them wouldn't be a bad idea. + + +While orcs do not always completely waste their enemies, conflict can get messy and shit happens. This might become one of those instances if the goblins keep pissing you off. + + +As you travel deeper into the hills, the light drizzle overhead turns into a heavy pelting. At first, you see one, then two dim fires in the distance. The fields and hills slowly turning to marsh and then swamp as the trees in the outskirts give heed to many mysteries and dangers. + + +Since the beginning, the orcs have always stayed well enough away from the swamps of their own homeland. Except for some light traveling on the outskirts, there has always been some common knowledge that something terrifying resides deep within. It would seem that, perhaps, the goblins welcome the unknown fear that the swamplands bring. + + +You look to your orcs, signaling them to travel through the swamps and towards what might be the goblin's camp. At first, you just see some lamps tacked onto the trees, but soon you see the campfires ahead. + + +After some time, you finally reach the camp. It consists of wooden huts, bridges, and walkways to evade the murky waters. Several goblins sound a horn as they see you, all preparing to defend themselves. You raise your hands, signaling you are not a threat. + + +The goblins seem to be reluctant until one comes forward. + + +"Hey, stop!" it cries. "I recognize you… aren't you the orc chieftain?" + + +"Yes." you say. "Where is your chief?" + + +The goblins all look at each other, seemingly whispering amongst themselves. You slowly reach down to your side, clutching your axe. After what seems like a long time, one of the goblins finally steps down and around to the closest walkway. + + +This one seems to be wearing some sort of fur shawl, the skulls of various animals and other races adorning his belt. What appears to be a large snake tooth hangs from a necklace on his neck. His black hair is tied up into a messy knot which seems common for goblin shamans. + + +"Chief Gru'zikular is not taking guests right now," the goblin says as he starts to turn around. + + +"Yeah, well you're encroaching on our territory," you say. "I'm here to ask you to go back to where you came from." + + +The goblin turns, his yellow eyes appear to be gleaming. A sick smile spreads across his face. + + +You frown, knowing that something isn't right about this particular goblin. This one seems different from the rest. + + +"What? Go back to those hellholes you call caves?" he asks. + + +"I don't care if you go into the caves or not. The dwarves are creeping into that area, as well as other things. You used to keep them away, and your presence would probably slowly force them to back off." + + +The goblin just stares at you. + + +"If you go back, it can be beneficial for all of us," you continue. "I can even get the tribeless orcs to leave you all alone. You can build proper houses such as the ones you have here." + + +"You see, orc," the goblin says, "these swamps had always been the homes of the goblin people. We were never supposed to be cave dwellers as everyone seems to think." + + +The goblin raises his hand as the other goblins start to join in. They immediately go silent. + + +"I demand to see your leader," you say. "I will not listen to this foolishness." + + +The strange look on the goblin's face intensifies. His teeth showing as his sick smile widens. + + +"As you have asked, so shall it be," he says. "Just East, further in, you can find our leader." + + +The goblin gestures, showing the way. + + +"I advise you though, green one, the Master's work is best not interfered with." + + +You furrow your brow, wondering at the meaning. You look at the whole group of goblins, who, compared to this one, seem like they are more even-minded. + + +Also, you seem pretty sure that this emissary for their chief may have been threatening you all. But he is just a goblin, you could crush him if needed. + + +"Tell me, who are you?" you ask. + + +"I am the Shaman, Rozibu," he says, "speaker for Gru'zikular and humble servant of the Master." + + +You squint at him. Perhaps it would be best to return and have the tribeless bands inhabit the lands the goblins used to live in. It would accomplish a dual purpose; each group gets their own respective territory and stops fighting, and it is not like the goblins are using any land that you are not. Also, the tribeless orcs could probably keep the dwarves out. + + +As you stare at the forest beyond, you get a feeling, not of immediate danger from the goblins standing before you, but a dark foreboding. + + +You and the goblin stare each other down, the whole time you think about what you should do. + + +[Add link for Reign of Amortia] +> Turn Back +Sensing that continuing on this mission would be foolish, you begin to leave. + + +"I don't think that will be necessary," you say as you nod your head. + + +Your orcs protest, but you hold up a hand to silence them. The goblin just smirks and bids you farewell. + + +A sense of relief sweeps over you as the horse trots out of the marsh. There was something weird going on there, and you don't want to know what it was. You have more important things to worry about right now. + + +You hear a couple of the other orcs express their relief in getting out of there as well. Soaking up all the little conversation, you are content to sit quietly and enjoy the trip back to your camp. + + +A couple weeks later, you have arrived, many orcs welcome you and your group back. The journey back was much shorter, as you didn't have to spend any time searching; like you needed to do on the way to the goblin camp. + + +On the other side of the camp, there appears to be a large addition, namely dozens and dozens of tents and large groups of orcs. You can tell from their tattoos, paints, clothing, and general demeanor that these are the lawless tribes that Grolik had gathered in the last month or so. + + +Going around the camp, you gather Rolomag, Grolik, Galik, Dekard, and a few other orcs. Bringing them into the tent, you start to go through plans for fighting the Empire… +> One Year Later +Over the course of the last year, things have been going smoothly for you and your army. Some of the lawless orcs have begun to push the dwarves out of Orcin. As per your instructions, they haven't used methods that were too over the top. You don't want to attract the might of the dwarven armies, and other than a few small skirmishes there has not been a whole lot of trouble for them. + + +The Imperial patrols and camps have increased, but they have not taken any ground. In fact, they lost some serious distance a few months ago. You led a large assault on a couple of the camps, then about a week later some of your scouts were overrun by a surprise Imperial patrol. Among them was one of your best scouts, an orc named Ruzmar. In retaliation for the dead scouts, you staged another large attack. + + +Unlike the last one, you managed to recover a lot of loot and supplies, while killing multiple Imperial soldiers. + + +In the meantime, you have not heard from the goblins. They have not moved any further into Orcin, and they haven't moved back to the hills and plains. There were reports of some minor earthquakes in the area, but nothing after that. + + +Several of the Council members visited your camp recently as well. Some congratulated you, and others scorned and chastised you for fighting the Mannate Empire so doggedly. In the last couple of months, the Council got the Empire to agree to stop the fighting. While you didn't agree with this, you have respected the armistice. From what your messenger has told you, the Council and Imperial ambassadors are at a stalemate in terms of negotiating a treaty. + + +You have just taken this time to better arm and train your orcs, for when the Empire continues the fight, you will be ready. The peace has allowed many of the orcs to take an extended leave to return to their homes though. Many have farms, cattle, families, and other important endeavors to watch over. So until it is time to recall your orcs, a skeleton crew patrols the mountains and borderlands. +> Home Again +After a long day of taking care of household duties, you sit and watch your children. Grovlar and Vokra have gotten big. It seems they do so considerably every time you have taken a trip back during these last three years. It has been a whole nine years since you finished fighting the Wister Elves, and since the last time you saw Valek. + + +While you do take care of home and village life, messengers bring regular reports to you on the state of the conflict with the Empire. Not much has changed in the last few days, of course. You are actually content with it being so, and, who knows, maybe the Council will come to an agreement with the Empire. + + +Gilikia, your wife, comes outside. She kisses you before looking at the children at play. Little Lagrik stumbles around, trying to keep up with the two older kids. + + +"When is this all going to end?" she asks. "You know we need you here, Nolazir." + + +"I am doing what needs to be done," you say. "When it is all over, I will return home, and I will stay here." + + +"They won't be small forever. Don't you want to watch them grow up? And what if you…." + + +She trails off, not able to say the obvious concern on her mind. You turn, taking her hand in yours. + + +"I've been through too much for too long to let anyone or anything take you all away from me." You say as you stand up and embrace her, and, stepping back, you continue to hold her hands. + + +"I have been blessed with you, my beautiful wife, and these healthy, strong children," you say. "If it weren't for you all those years ago… well, you pretty much saved me from what I would have become." + + +You step a little bit closer. + + +"If Gigalak didn't intend for us to be together," you say, "he would have never let me off those muddy fields in the Elven kingdom, but he did, and I am grateful to have you all. I know he will return me to you every time." + + +"Well…how do you know?" she asks. + + +"Because, while I may be off fighting in the mountains and off finding the Imperials in the forests... my heart is here, with you all, and an orc always returns to where his heart is." + + +She leans into you, squeezing with all her might. + + +"I love you," she says. "I know you'll always return to me." + + +You smile and hold her, as you turn and watch the children playing… and once in a while eating an insect on the ground… +> Six Months Pass +The last few months find you and your army in the forests by the border. Reports had come of a legion of Imperials slowly making their way to the border. In the meantime, you have amassed assistance from a few more orc tribes. All the while, the Imperials wait, and your forces grow stronger and stronger. + + +You wait, while the rain pelts your face. Every orc is silent as the ground starts to become muddy at the intensity of the precipitation. + + +You signal the orcs to move forward, a slow trod through the mud. The Imperials are moving dozens of soldiers through, but if all goes to plan they'll never make it to the staging ground. By the time you reach them, you are hoping their supply wagons will be stuck in the mud, and their horses antsy at every trick and sound of the forests. + + +When the time is right, you will strike, and make them pay. If the Imperials seek to break their treaty, you will show them the consequences. You all have your padded leather gambesons over your chainmail, extra leather straps tied around to reduce some of the clinking the chain tends to make. + + +Riding forward, you catch Grolik's eye, who nods at you. Rolomag as well, who winks and pats his heart with his palm in a sign of respect. + + +Coming up to a ridge, you signal your forces to stop. Creeping low through the foliage, you see the Imperial columns. As suspected, their wagons seem to mostly be stuck in the mud. At your signal, your archers start their painstaking crawl over to the ridgeline. + + +The other third, slowly bring their horses onto both sides of the columns, preparing their charge. On the other side across from you, some of the lawless orcs should be preparing their attack on the Mannate soldiers. The cavalry orcs should still be fighting their way through by the time the archers are done, and when that happens they will slide down the slope. You don't want to run the risk of accidentally shooting your cavalry, so the archers will have to work fast, but by then the Imperials will be surrounded, and you should be able to crush them. + + +As the rain intensifies a bit, their horses get even antsier. As the lightning strikes, the soldiers look into the dark forests, fear apparent. When the thunder claps, their officers bark orders to hurry and move the wagons from the mud. +> Stay with the Archers +When the heavens are silent, the wind stops blowing for a moment, and the trees stop their near eternal sway, a single arrow soars. + + +The Imperial officer, in the middle of yelling his commands. Lurches forward, his face curling up as the arrow pierces his chainmail, sticking through his heart. Only a moment after, dozens of arrows are unleashed upon the hapless soldiers. + + +Their cries ring out, almost drowned out by the thunder of Gigalak's wrath. Many soldiers lay wounded, and others lay fallen. They try to hide behind their wagons, some even shooting back. You lay low as some of their arrows pierce the foliage, a few lucky shots downing some of your comrades. + + +An Imperial crouches behind a wagon, your arrow ready to be released and show the Imperial his doom. As the lawless fire their arrows, the Imperial screams as arrows slam into his back. On both sides, Imperial and Orcish cavalry alike duel on, the clamor raging. + + +At your signal, you and the orcs charge down the slope. You slide through the mud, running as you touch the bottom. Some arrows happen to miss you, swept off course by Gigalak's hand, and you break into the soldiers. + + +The first one you slash with your sword, his blood oozing from his coat and covering the top of his hauberk. A swooshing sound comes from up ahead, a soldier's sword clinking against your leather padding and chainmail as you dodge the blow. + + +With a roar you embed your axe into his shoulder. His chain catches most of it, but you ram your sword pommel into his jaw. His face being reduces to a broken jaw and a bloody face, you turn to deflect blows from his other comrades. + + +A spearman downs the orc next to you. Noticeably, his armor covers his face, two slits over where his eyes are, and a grate over his mouth. He spins and twirls, intent on tripping you up. You are too experienced and would not fall for this trick. With a hop you avoid this maneuver, charging towards him as he brings the spear up and around. + + +As your foe tries to bring the spear down, you catch it in the shoulder of your axe. Pushing it away, you step forward and jab your sword. He grunts as the tip pierces his armor, and he accidentally drops the spear. + + +Taking this moment, you charge and swing. Two other Imperials rush in to his aid, one nearly beheading you. You roar and charge forward, ramming the sword all the way through his gut. The second Imperial nicks your arm, and you slam the hammer side of your axe into his head. + + +The spearman draws a dagger, jabbing at your side. It bounces off the chainmail, and seeing this, he and the other soldier charge you. With the axe you deflect a dagger blow, ramming your shoulder into the spearman. The other Imperial tries to aim for your throat, but, with a quick parry, your axe lands in his face. A gurgling cry comes out, stymied by the blade in his face. + + +A squelching sound comes from behind, and you swing around just in time. The spearman lifted a sword from a fallen comrade and stepped into jam it through your back. Luckily you sidestep this and, grabbing his wrists, you twist the sword from his grasp. He grunts as you force him to drop it, and slam one hand into his face, exposing his throat. + + +With a mighty cry, you send your fist into his exposed throat. A pained choke coming from behind the helmet, he steps back and grips his throat. He falls to one knee, his windpipe crushed, and his adam's apple dislodged. You turn your attention to other combatants as the spearman struggles with choking to death… +> Forward +The Imperials try to hold out, managing to down a few orcs, but, in the end, they are overwhelmed. You stand, stabbing an Imperial with one of their own spears repeatedly. His friend, clutching an injury, swipes his blade at you. You step back to dodge and ram the spear into his throat. Gurgling as he goes down he swings once more; his blade scratches your hand but not too deep. + + +Twisting and pulling the spear, you yank it from his corpse. You run forward, seeing the orcs beating down a group of Imperials. The last few men seem terrified, and one not older than seventeen trembles. If you could hear over the sound of the fighting, you would be able to hear his knees causing his hauberk to clink together. + + +Before you can reach them, the rest of the orcs have stabbed and battered them into oblivion. Some orcs ride into the forest to find the fleeing soldiers. + + +You pant, watching the massacre taking place all around. Wounded men cry out, and some lay there dying quietly. + + +An orc approaches you, the frenzy of blood-shed just starting to wear off. + + +"What shall we do with the wounded?" he asks. + + +You sit there and think for a moment. Orcs have never really taken prisoners, and you don't have the supplies to care for their wounded. You are worried about having enough medical supplies for your own as it is. + + +Although it might help to take some of them ransom, there is not too much that you would need, so maybe just leaving them to die would be better. +> Finish them off +"Finish off the wounded," you cry. "Leave no survivors!" + + +At this, the orcs seem to go into a frenzy again as they start clubbing, hacking, and slashing the wounded. Some orcs even loot the dying men before slicing off their scalps. + + +Stepping forward to do your dirty work, you flip over an injured soldier with your foot. Placing the sword tip to his throat, the man tries to talk but his voice seems hoarse. He sputters as rainwater barrages his mouth, and he soon closes it to die quietly. + + +With your foot on his chest, he feebly grabs your calf. Snarling, you push the sword down as the tip slowly pushes through. Blood oozes out of the neck wound, the man sputtering and choking on his blood, and the blade penetrating through. In a matter of moments, his hands stop feebly hitting your leg as they go limp. + + +In the large crowd of orcs, you see Grolik. He pushes a spear tip into a dying human, his face twisting into a mixture of anger and shame. As Grolik pulls the spear out, you catch his glance. Guilt written all over his face. + + +You were not aware that an orc such as he could have such emotions. It comes as a bit of a shock to you, but sometimes tough things must be done to preserve victory. While killing the helpless is not a task for the faint of heart, it must take its toll on some. + + +Rolomag sits on a rock, using a rag to nurse a gash on his cheek. He seems tired, and just sits and watches the other orcs. A good amount of whom are helping your injured orcs. Sighing you decide it is a job best fit for them, as you have other work to do. + + +You wander off to continue… +> Aftermath, Six Months Later +These past six months after the battle where you ambushed the soldiers in the mud have been brutal. You continued to push through, fighting patrol after patrol. It seems that after some time, the humans have wised up, laying counter traps and ambushes. These did not work too favorably for them at first, but they soon developed their skills. + + +Unlike them, you don't have hundreds and hundreds of recruits. You and your army are tired, theirs is often quite fresh. These skirmishes have dragged out over the last four years, and while they are not as intense as the four years of war you experienced with the Wister Elves, it is taking its toll. + + +You need more troops, and you need them fast. It may be time to unite all of the orc tribes, as this concerns them as well. While they are not fully involved, they have not been entirely complacent. Some have traveled far to join you and your warriors, believing it is in the best interest of Orcin. + + +You have heard of reports of other armies such as yours gathering up. Having tried to correspond with them, there have been delays, or the messages never arrive. The increased Imperial presence must be contributing to this. It seems that every month brings more and more of them on your doorstep. You know that soon, they will be ready for a giant push. The ambush and sabotage missions can only hold them back for so long. + + +While you do technically have your troops on some kind of rotation, it hasn't been enough. The only real reason for the rotation is that you and many other orcs have homes and families to take care of. Many of them have family and children old enough to help out on their farms and their ways of living; which you believe should at least help them in their home efforts. The winters have been especially brutal these last few years though. The only consolation is that, as orcs, you all tend to live off the land when agriculture is not available, which has helped immensely. + + +Your recent decision to bring all of your warriors back into the fight has caused grumbling from many. They do not rebel though, as they know they work for the good of all of orc-kind. + + +While there are some that don't agree with everything you are doing, such as Galik and sometimes Grolik, you suppose that is bound to happen in these situations. + + +Leaving your tent, you go to check up on things... +> By the Border +Standing on a rocky ridge, you watch over a large clearing. On the other side is a forest leading from Orcin and into the Imperial lands. Behind you stands Galik, who seems to be lost in thought. + + +"Just a few miles out there," you say, "lies the Imperial homeland." + + +Galik raises an eyebrow and steps forward, standing at your side. + + +"Will we be waging war in their home? As they have done to us?" + + +"No," you say, "they have legions staged in those forests. Going in now would be suicide." + + +"So what, we're just going to sit here and let them take back the land we just kicked them out of?" + + +"Yes… to a point. See this field? They'll never cross it on our watch, but they will try." + + +You sigh and pat Galik's shoulder. + + +"I need you all to watch over everything for me." + + +"What? Are you leaving us?" + + +"Not for long," you say. "I need to get some help. Unite the tribes." + + +"That's impossible, they'll never agree to join us. If the Empire kills us all, well, they don't want to be held responsible as well." + + +"No, they'll see reason," you say. "This affects all of us." + + +"Nolazir," Galik says, "if you don't move us into their homeland soon, I will do it." + + +"Don't, you fool. This would put all these past few years of fighting to an end, and it wouldn't be good for us." + + +You point to Rolomag who is standing nearby. + + +"Make sure he doesn't do anything stupid." + + +With that, you mount your horse and ride back into the lands of Orcin. While you have left a few trusted orcs in charge, you hope not to take too long. Galik's impatience could spell doom for the Orcish army. Rolomag certainly will obey your orders. + + +You are not sure of Grolik though, he has been scarce the last couple of days. He seems to be leading his orcs from inside his tent. + + +While you are not sure of the outcome, you know you will fight the Mannate Empire until the bitter end. + + +Breathing in, you take in the air of the forests as you make your way to the tribes. +> Rising Part Two +One Month Later… + + +The large wooden gates of the village creak open, the surrounding orcs casting suspicious glances your way. A few even have their hands on some weapons nearby, and you do not blame them. + + +Riding in through the mist which veils dawn's light, you appear almost as a specter of death. Lifting the hood, you give your brethren a weary nod. + + +A few of their eyes widen as they recognize you, some stand unsure of who you are, and some just shrug and go back to their business. + + +One orc approaches you. + + +"Who are you?" + + +"I am Nolazir, surrogate chief of the River Tribe in place of Chief Greusim." + + +The orc's eyes widen. + + +"It's been four years, and you have not found a replacement? Does he have any sons?" + + +You nod. + + +"One, but he is young and impatient. I will stand in until he has learned how to do his duty with patience and wisdom." + + +The orc scoffs at the unthinkable act of leaving a tribe largely chief less. + + +"What is it that you seek?" + + +"I want to speak with your chief," you say. + + +The orc shrugs and gives you directions to the chief's hut. That was a bit easier than you thought. + + +As you ride forward, the large hut comes into view. You are impressed to see that it actually has two stories to it. Most orcs chose to build one floor but with a wider house, although you are aware the council has at least three floors. + + +Pushing this useless information out of your mind, you hop off your horse. Your legs are stiff from the long ride, and you take a moment to stretch them. + + +Muffled yelling comes out from within the doors of the chief's hut. Splinters of wood fly as the door bursts open. A hapless orc youth falls out and tumbles down the stairs. + + +A large, broad orc steps out. His dark mane falling past his shoulders, two sharp teeth protrude from his bottom lip. His right eye looks like it is perpetually swollen halfway shut, a series of scars emanating from the side of his eye and going all the way to his ear. On his head rests a helmet with two bullhorns attached to it. + + +His tribal necklaces jingle as he bounds down the steps, his boot landing in the young orc's face. + + +"Fool, how could you be so incomprenent?" he says, not realizing he butchered the word. + + +The youth prepares to defend himself, but the chief is too fast. He twists the orcs arm and lands several fists into his ribs. As he continues to beat the orc, you wonder if he will kill him. + + +While you have the strong urge to step in, you also don't want to get into another tribe's affairs. They could easily kill you for interfering, although it wouldn't be the first time you have pissed off an orc chief. +> Step In +You walk forward, prepared for anything. The orc chief snorts as he stops wailing on the orc young for a moment. + + +"Who the hell are you?" he asks. + + +"Nolazir of the River Tribe," you say. "I'm here to see the chief." + + +"I am Chief Gro'tesk," he snorts again. "Nolazir, huh? I've heard of you. Getting soft for an orc, are ya?" + + +Your eyes narrow, some think you've gone soft, and others think it's just your age. + + +"I'm not sure what you're talking about." + + +"Pshhah, you let those under you argue and disagree with you all day long. The right way is to beat them into submission." + + +"Why don't you just leave him alone, he is already defeated." + + +The chief laughs and throws the young one to the ground, he cannot be any older than fifteen. Gro'tesk lands a couple swift kicks to his ribs. + + +"You done beating him yet?" you ask. + + +Gro'tesk's eyes narrow, he straightens up and stares at you. + + +"No," he says, "and I don't think you'll do anything about it either" + + +"Oh yeah, and why is that?" + + +"Because you need me, and my allies," he says. "You want us to help you fight the humans?" + + +"Yes." + + +"Well, I'm not gonna help you!" he snarls. "You're nothing but a weakling!" + + +Taking a deep breath, and, tilting your chin down slightly, you frown. + + +"So are we going to do this the hard way?" + + +The chief grins and cracks his knuckles. You slowly roll your neck and stretch your arms back. + + +"I have two conditions," you say. "If I win, you join me, along with your allies, and you stop beating the kid." + + +"If I win… you screw off!" Gro'tesk screams. + + +By now, a large group of orcs has gathered around. All of them cheering on Gro'tesk as he removes his tribal necklaces. They make a circle around you as you prepare to fight… +> Fight! +Fists raised, you step to the side, constantly circling your foe. Gro'tesk does likewise, a sadistic grin spread across his face. + + +With a huff you step forward, your fist twisting as the arm propels it forward. Gro'tesk's cheek ripples and his head turns as he moves with the punch. At the same time his fist flies, you manage to knock it away. + + +Ducking under, you slam your left fist into his ribs and come back up slamming into his jaw. + + +Gro'tesk staggers back, bewildered at your speed. Although you are quite a large orc, he is bigger than you. + + +He throws a backhand, which hits your defending arm. As he brings it back, he sends his other fist forward, which you manage to parry. But, in your rush, you accidentally lower your right arm a bit too far… + + +As it connects a quick flash of dark splits through your vision, but only for a brief moment. As you stagger back, a pain shoots through your jaw. Managing to duck another blow, you push your opponent back, a move he was not expecting. + + +As you try to regain your ground, you feel a fuzziness spreading throughout your head. Getting punched sucks. + + +As you step forward, you consider your next move… +> Feign a Kick +Lifting your knee, you hop forward and act as though you are about to kick Gro'tesk's shin. He brings one hand down to push your leg away, and in this moment you slam your foot into the ground, lurching forward. + + +In the same movement, you reel your fist back and then bolt forward. Your knuckles hit him straight in the forehead, this is followed by another swift hit right under his eye. + + +Gro'tesk grunts and staggers back. With a mighty roar he charges you, slamming one punch into your chest. + + +"Oof!" + + +The blow knocks the wind out of you, throwing you to the ground. Chief Gro'tesk savagely lands a quick kick to your face. Reeling to the side you land face first in the dirt, the heavy pounding of his feet stopping as he lifts his foot again. +> Cheap Shot +Grunting and rolling, you dodge his right foot, stopping under and between both of his legs. Pushing up on your forearm, your other hand curls into a fist, hitting him right in the sweet spot with a thud. He hunches a bit as his face contorts into pain. + + +He screams as his knees buckle, but before he can fall forward you slam your foot into his stomach, toppling him another way. + + +You pant as you pull yourself up, looking at the large group of orcs standing around you. Some look disapprovingly at your method of winning, others stand in awe, and some appear indifferent. The chief grunts as he rolls around in pain. + + +"No fair!" he says, "that was cheating!" + + +"There is no such thing as cheating when you're about to get your face stomped in." + + +The chief manages to pull himself up. + + +"Fine!" he says," you win." + + +The chief pouts as he hobbles over to his hut, and you follow to give him your terms. +> Terms and Conditions +Gro'tesk sits on his large fur and leather chair, looking glum. It's apparent he is used to getting his way, but so are you. + + +You grin as you finish explaining your terms. + + +"You would still largely be in command of your tribe and your allies," you say, "only I will have final say and make the larger battlefield and strategic decisions." + + +"Hmm, I don't like to be bossed around." + + +"You wouldn't be so much," you say. "Think of yourself still as a chief and advisor, only I'm just supervising the rest of you." + + +Gro'tesk seems to mull this over and leans back. + + +"Well as long as I get some say in things…" + + +With that, you have Gro'tesk agree to go meet your army, along with the lesser tribes that follow him. + + +You go and mount your horse, intent on gathering some more tribes… +> Two Months Later.... +You've traveled far the past three months total, gaining the support from large and small tribes alike. It has been tough convincing some, but others are far more agreeable. From the reports you've heard, it's put much less pressure on your army, for now. + + +On the downside, Galik and Grolik have managed to engage the Mannate Empire in some larger skirmishes than you would have liked. Rolomag and the other more reliable orcs haven't been able to keep them in check as well as you had hoped. + + +As you ride on, one of the coastal villages comes into view. The sun bearing down upon you, in the distance you see a number of orcs. Some seem to be fishing with nets and spears, and some seem to be enjoying the sun. A few unsurprisingly wrestle in circles made of seashells. + + +Several wooden boats float lazily among the waves. One orc saunters over to you, his skin a much darker shade of green due to generations of living out here. Yours is a much lighter shade of green. The orc stops several feet away from you. + + +"Who are you?" + + +"Nolazir." + + +His eyebrows arch and his eyes widen a bit. A small grin spreads across his face. + + +"I have heard of you, fighting off the humans. Making your rounds to many of the villages and tribes. That is why you are here?" + + +"Yes." + + +The orc chuckles as he leads you toward the village. + + +"I don't think we'll be able to help you, friend," he says. + + +"All of us are at stake," you say. "We need all the people we can get." + + +"We're having our own issues. We can't save everyone else when we can't even save ourselves." + + +You grunt, scanning the area. Nothing seems to be happening. + + +"What's your name?" you ask. + + +"Silak," he says, "I just do the fishing around here. The chief is inside." + + +He gestures into a small wooden hut. You nod to him in thanks and step inside, the old wood steps creaking a bit. + + +Half of the hut is dark, the rest illuminated by the sunlight entering between the wooden beams above. Some tarp seems to be covering the rest of it. + + +You stop short as a figure steps out of the shadows, an orc with several wrinkles on his face. His raven dark hair contrasted by a multitude of grey hairs throughout. His face turns up into a weary smile. His dark green skin hiding him well, until he steps into the rays of light. + + +"Welcome, friend," he says. "I am Chief Hidius." + + +"I am Nolazir." + + +It is just then that you notice the severe burn marks covering Hidius' body. His face, from what you can see, is even a bit distorted. + + +"I know why you are here." + + +"Will you join me?" you ask. + + +"No." + + +"But-" + + +"Walk with me." + + +The chief puts his hand on your shoulder, slowly leading you outside. As you step into the sunlight, you realize Hidius injuries are more severe than you thought. It appears as though his nose has been smelted off of his face. You're surprised that his hair is still growing though, which should not be possible. + + +"How... is your hair still growing?" + + +"A rude question to ask of my deformities." + + +"I'm sorr-" + + +"No. It's alright, no one has asked in a long time, some around here know the story. Others think it's crazed nonsense." + + +Hidius waves a hand to change the subject. He stops and gestures to the village and the waters ahead. + + +"Gigalak gave us these lands and these waters so that we could live wild and free. The Mannate Empire wants to take that from us." + + +"So help us stop them." + + +"We can't… I can't," Hidius says. "I am dying and so is my village." + + +"What do you mean?" + + +"We've been cursed, you see, as made apparent by my condition." + + +"That's nonsense," you say. "Taking heavy burn wounds isn't going to damn the rest of the village. Besides, they look fine to me." + + +Hidius chuckles. + + +"It won't be today, or tomorrow, or even a decade from now, but we're all doomed. I've seen it." + + +Hidius closes his eyes and takes a deep breath. + + +"Whether or not we stop the Mannate Empire… something far worse is waiting to take us into a grip of fire." + + +"Stop this," you say, "and tell me what you mean." + + +"Nothing we really do this day matters anymore, I have seen it." + + +You take a deep breath and try to stop yourself from shaking the older orc in frustration. + + +"No matter what is going to happen, you can't just lay down and die." + + +You gently put a hand on his shoulder and turn him around to face you. + + +"We're orcs damn it, and we fight everything that gets in our way. Living, dead, hell, Empire, whatever it may be. We don't just lay down and die." + + +The chief smiles slowly. + + +"While that may be true of you and yours, I am old and tired of fighting. I've seen enough horrors to last one thousand lifetimes. Our time is useless." +> "Use that time for a greater purpose" +"If you think you're gonna die anyways, why don't you use whatever time you have left for something good?" you ask. + + +The chief shuts his eyes and seems to be contemplating your words. + + +"Whatever you think is coming to harm us all, we can deal with it when it comes. In the meantime, we can't just sit around and let the Empire step on us." + + +Hidius does nothing. + + +"I need everyone that I can get," you say, "there are so many orcs doing their part. Now you need to do yours. Please….I'm asking for your help." + + +At this, Hidius opens his eyes and gives you a side wards look. + + +"Although your words will be ultimately futile…..I will help you." + + +Letting out a sigh of relief, you step to the side. + + +"One more thing," you say, "stop spreading this doom prophecy to your people. They're really taking it to heart. I'm not saying it's not true or whatever, but at least lift their spirits a little." + + +Hidius nods, and begins to walk back to his hut. + + +"I will gather a group of warriors, and we will meet your army." + + +"Good," you say, "make haste, for things are stirring quickly." + + +Hidius nods, and goes to a group of orcs. You can’t hear what he says, but they all seem to go off to find more orcs. + + +With satisfaction, you mount your horse to make your way out of the village. As you head to where you are sure where the next will be, you think that maybe you'll find a place to escape the heat first. +> Three Months Later... +It has been six months since you left to unite the tribes. It has not been easy, but it has been largely successful. There were a few that gave you trouble, refusing to join in the fight. Even then, some of their members disobeyed and walked right out with you. The rest will come around eventually. + + +Lately, the Council has sent several couriers with messages urging you to hold off in the fight against the Empire. You always send them back with a "no." + + +It appears that the humans have really been pushing within the last month, and Galik seems to have taken charge over things since you have left. Maybe he has finally matured and is ready to take over for you. + + +You wouldn't mind not having to worry about all of this; except for the fighting really. It would be just like the war with the Wister Elves, someone points and you attack, broken up with random bursts of initiative and leadership. + + +At the same time, your axe itches to go into the fray. That spark Gigalak ignited into all orcs has not gone out yet. You begin to wonder where this course of action will take you when it begins to rain. + + +"It's raining again." + + +As you make your way back to your camp, you see that it has grown tremendously. Many orcs shout and greet you as you enter. While you have been pretty well liked by most of them, you didn't expect such an enthusiastic welcome. + + +"The chieftain has returned!" + + +"Hail Nolazir!" + + +"Our leader returns to us!" + + +You smirk a bit, it will be a letdown for some if they find out you're thinking of resigning over to Galik. + + +As you enter the main area of the camp where many of the orcish leaders live, you notice something is different. Several posts have been erected, with orcs tied to them, while their comrades grimly whip them. + + +As you turn, looking between your old tent and some of the others, there upon the ground are three slain orcs. Above them stands Galik, a fiery rage in his eyes. Near them, stands Grolik, severely beaten and held back by three orcs. + + +"Galik!" you cry. + + +Galik breathes heavily and looks up from the corpses to meet your eye. + + +"Nolazir," he says prowling forward, "stand down!" + + +"What is going on?" + + +"These fools disobeyed me. They were here to sabotage our efforts." + + +"What in Grikalia are you talking about?" + + +"These traitors spent weeks scheming and planning," Galik said, "but it was not that alone that caused this? Do you want to know what it was?" + + +You glare at him, lowering your chin a bit. Your hands curl at your side as you prepare for anything. + + +"There are some in the Council who think we should give the humans quarter," Galik says, "parley with them, make an agreement. These fools pushed this idea, even saying we should compromise with them." + + +Galik furiously spits on one of the corpses. + + +"This one thought that we should concede some land to be annexed with the Empire. Fools." + + +While you can see the logic in his anger, something seems off. + + +"And the rest?" you ask. + + +"Not so keen on the idea of conceding land yet," Galik says, "but it was only a matter of time before the traitor would get them to turn over. I know this." + + +"That's only one of three," you say, "and you think you can justify their executions with assumptions?" + + +"Nolazir, they were traitors. I could see it! It would not have been too long!" + + +"And what say you for Grolik?" you ask. "What has he done?" + + +Grolik slowly looks up at the two of you, a dark look in his eyes. + + +"When I was… purging these traitors, he tried to intervene," Galik says, "using much the same words as you have. Actually, he is lucky I haven't gutted him yet, seeing as he has been a pain these last couple of months." + + +Galik twirls his sword a bit before pointing it at the whipping post. + + +"I thought a nice whipping would get him to change his mind," he says, "but he sure is stubborn. I have only spared his life because he spoke against these traitors, but then he ridiculed me for sending them to Grikalia early." + + +"So what do you intend to do?" you ask. + + +"I'm going to kill him," Galik says with a smirk. + + +"Or more like…" he grins, "you're going to kill him. Prove your loyalty to your new chief, Nolazir" + + +Galik takes a few steps back, gesturing you to step forward. As you do, the other three orcs raise Grolik. + + +As you stand in front of him, one of the orcs hands you a shortsword. As you grip the simple weapon, the texture of the leather grip feels odd to you right now. + + +Grolik looks at you, shaking his head a bit. + + +"Don't do it Nolazir," he says. "I think we know who the real traitor is." + + +You look at the blade, surely Galik has seen madness, but could you really kill the child of your dear friend Greusim? The young orc who had often sat on your lap when you went to visit your now dead friend… all those years ago. + + +Who is Grolik? You've known him for a few years, but he is just a lawless orc. Still, he has shown great promise, and hasn't let you down yet. Other than your first altercation, he has been a true friend. + + +Grolik looks into your eyes, there is no fear. There is a quiet rage, and even a hint of sadness in his eyes. +> Free Grolik +With a heavy sigh… you lift the sword up, gripping it with both hands. Grolik doesn't even blink as you bring it down. But you step slightly to the side, slicing clean through the arm of the orc to your left who handed you the sword. He screams in pain as he falls over, and you run the second through the chest. + + +As you pull it out, you turn around just in time to deflect an attack from Galik. As you circle him and parry his blows, Grolik tackles the third orc, turning his own dagger towards him. + + +"You've made the wrong choice, old friend," Galik says. "I'm sorry." + + +You don't respond but, instead, block his swift attack. Galik fights with ferocity, but you match this with skill. + + +As you hook your blade onto his hilt, you turn and twist, Galik flies forward. He drops his sword for a moment but rolls and picks it back up. Behind him, Grolik and the other orc still struggle, the dagger on the ground and both of them in a deadly grapple. + + +Galik twirls his sword as you circle each other. + + +"Drop the sword, Galik," you say. "It doesn't have to be like this." + + +"Oh but it does. Remember, you chose this!" + + +The last couple of words are emphasized by Galik swinging his sword down at you. You easily dodge this and take a wide swipe, nicking his arm. Galik hisses and swings at your head, which you duck as you plunge the tip of the sword into his calf. + + +Galik cries out in pain and staggers back. You raise the sword before pausing, instead, taking a step back. + + +"You truly have gotten soft, Nolazir," he says. "What happened to the ruthless orc I used to hear stories about?" + + +"Do you really think I want to kill you?" you say. "You're the child of my dear friend Greusim. He was like a father to me, why would I want to kill any of his children?" + + +"You're just a weakling and a pathetic leader, Nolazir," Galik says. "My father would be disappointed in you." + + +With these words still in the air, Galik charges you, first swinging high but then veering low. With a cry you barely manage to escape, the tip of the blade slicing into your thigh. Gritting your teeth you slash his chest. + + +Not once, but twice and then three times; you swing the sword in a perfect arc of fury. Galik's face twists as he staggers back, clutching his chest. He raises his sword and stumbles forward, you easily deflect the strike and slam your foot into his knee. + + +Galik cries out and falls back, rolling to get away from what he thought would be a killing blow. As he looks up, you see the seething hatred in his eyes. His sword lays behind you, which he had dropped when you knocked him over. + + +"Well, what are you waiting for, Nolazir?" + + +You take a step forward, raising the sword. As you do so, you remember the first day that Greusim showed Galik to you; when he was but an infant wrapped inside a blanket. You remember the days of taking him out as a young lad, teaching him how to fish and about the plants and animals. You remember the closeness you used to share, before Greusim fell, and this wrath took him over. +> Kill Galik +As these memories flood through your mind, you realize that it doesn't matter what he was. It just matters what he has become; and that's a murderer. He would drag the orcish armies into the grave with him, dooming Orcin to an eternity of rule by the Mannate Empire. + + +Galik laughs insanely as you step forward, and you drive the sword down… + + +In the last moment, Galik rolls to the side and the sword slams into the dirt. You pull, but the blade does not budge. + + +Standing, you cannot do anything before your foe slams into you. His fingers dig into your shoulder as he draws a dagger from under his shirt. He grins and chuckles as he lifts the blade up, intent on slamming it into your chest. The dagger gleaming in the sunlight, showing you your final moments… + + +Galik brings the knife down, your hand shooting up just in time. Grunting you twist and wrench the blade from his hand. Grabbing his shoulder you shove the knife forward into his belly, as it slides through surprisingly easy. Galik gasps, and his hands grip your shoulders. + + +You rip the dagger out and slam it back into him, this time some splatter decorating your forearms. On the third strike, Galik's knees buckle and he falls back, guided by your hand. As you kneel over him, Galik's hands grip your arms and shoulder. +> Stab him again +He tries to speak but he is too winded. Snarling, and with a gleam of victory in your eyes, you plunge the knife into him a fourth time. Galik's eyes widen for a moment before his head falls back onto the dirt. He expels a short breath before laying still. + + +Panting heavily, you kneel over your once good friend. You stare down at his face, empty eyes staring into the sky above. Your brow furrows as you place your hands under him, lifting him up a bit. + + +"Why did you make me have to do this, Galik?" you ask. "Greusim was my friend. I've known you since before you were born. You fool." + + +With this, you drop him, and you look up to see Grolik. He stands there holding a bloody dagger at his side. He gives you an understanding nod. + + +You stand up and start to walk away. He raises an eyebrow. + + +"Let someone else deal with his corpse," you say. "I want nothing to do with him anymore. It's done." + + +You drop the dagger and walk to the tent, and, sitting on the chair, you grab some whiskey… +> Six Months Later +The last six months since Galik's death have been eventful. It took a while for you to reorganize the camp, fixing all of Galik's mistakes. While it was stressful at first, you managed to delegate some responsibility to Grolik, Gro'tesk, Hidius, and Rolomag. + + +Everything is now organized, but it seems that the Empire is done playing around. In the last two months alone, you have repelled several small-scale assaults. You are sure they are finally going to act and make some big moves. + + +But so are you. Soon, these years of stalemates and quiet maneuvering will be at an end. Soon, it will be time to test the Mannate Empire's true mettle. + + +The past five years have been filled with hardships and struggles, but you have managed to overcome all of them. For the first time, you are looking at this conflict pretty positively. Young orcs trickle in everyday willing to contribute to the cause. What worries you though is their age. While there are plenty of experienced veterans in your army, the number of young, inexperienced, and foolhardy orcs concerns you. + + +Traditionally, orcs have always set out as adults at the age of fifteen. What this usually means for them is going out and finding adventure and fighting things. Because of your warlike nature, many orcs do not actually live too long. Some would even consider an orc such as yourself, at the ripe age of thirty-five to have been a long enough and accomplished life. + + +Gigalak did not intend your kind to grow old and miserable, but, instead, to put life into your years, no matter how short or long they may be. + + +You sense someone pulling up to the side of you. + + +"Still thinking about Galik?" Grolik asks. + + +"Among other things," you sigh. + + +"I know you were close to him, but he just went too far." + + +"I know, it’s just hard seeing someone you care about turn into something else." + + +Grolik exhales slowly, nodding as he does so. + + +"Sometimes, you'll do everything you can to save someone," he says, "but sometimes you have to do what you have to do." + + +"What would you know about this?" you snort. + + +Grolik gulps and looks into the distance before turning his head to you. + + +"I….I butchered my entire family and tribe." + + +"What?" you ask. + + +"It's… a long story." + + +Before you can say anything further, Grolik spurs his horse forward to attend to something else. + + +A whole throng of orcs march ahead and behind you, as you all make your way down the mountains and to the hills where the rest of your army waits. Along the way, you have groups of fighters intersperse throughout the hills and rocks just before the plains. It seems the Empire plans to take you on in open combat. + + +The scouts alerted you of the huge shift in troops heading this way. Once your reserves and last line are firmly placed, you call to all of your commanders. + + +Kneeling by a rock, you spread a map across it. Taking a piece of charcoal to mark it up. + + +Rolomag peers closely at it, rubbing his chin. Grolik looks out to the hills and then to the plains and forest ahead. Gro'tesk sharpens his weapons and checks the string on his bow. Hidius closes his eyes and takes in the crisp air. + + +You start by marking all of the locations the Imperials should be attacking from. Mostly, directly ahead of you. + + +Gro'tesk points to the area in the Southeast. + + +"I think they'll try sending a few brigades through here," he says. "While there's no chance they would be able to make it through the mountains in time, it wouldn't take much longer for them to divert through these woods." + + +You have some light patrols stationed in the mountains, so they would alert your left flank if they saw Imperials moving through there. + + +"Hmm, we can probably divert more troops to watching that area then," you say. + + +"Or, we could go through that way ourselves and try to catch them off guard," Gro'tesk says, "whether or not they're coming through that way." + + +"No way," Rolomag says. "We need all the warriors here that we can get. Their only real option is to try to push through the plains, and we should try to match them." + + +"No, wrong way!" Gro'tesk yells. + + +Grolik speaks without looking to the group. + + +"I think Gro'tesk is actually right about this one," he says, "we need to keep an eye over that way. Or maybe even exploit it." + + +"Yes, if they get cavalry through those woods," Gro'tesk says, "even with our reserves and archers, we won't be able to stop them from wiping through our flank." + + +You analyze the area, the humans could utilize it, in which case it would be helpful to prepare to counteract them. They also just might use brute force, in which case you would need to have all of your fighters here at the ready. + + +"There is another thing," Hidius says. "While we can't expect them to come through and around the mountains, see this stretch of open space between the mountains and the trees?" + + +Rolomag squints at the map. + + +"Yes, but what does that-" + + +"If they move some soldiers through here," Hidius says, "they could easily hit this side with a concentrated force. I suspect they would use cavalry to cover the gap as well." + + +"Let me position more warriors there," he continues. "I will keep the mountain patrol there. But if we see any soldiers or cavalry, we can easily ride in and trap them in between the main force and this one." +> Attack Straight On +"I like Rolomag's idea," you say. "The chances of them utilizing either side is nonsense." + + +"What? Fool!" Gro'tesk yells. + + +Grolik's eyes snap to you in surprise. + + +"Nolazir," he says, "are you serious? This is stupid. You were the one always going on about how pure strength alone won't win this." + + +"I can't say I agree at all," Hidius says, "but if I can't change your mind, I will obey." + + +Rolomag just sits back in silence. + + +You nod to all of them and roll up the map. + + +"I know this won't be easy," you say, "but I know we can do this. We'll still have the reserves to help us, but as I see it… we're gonna be able to just push through them." + + +Grolik shakes his head. + + +"I don't know about this, Nolazir," he says. "Why don't we think about this again?" + + +"No," you say. "I have decided." + + +Grolik sighs and goes off to get his orcs ready. The rest do the same. +> Preparations +Days later, your troops stand at attention, their mail armor and weapons gleaming in the sunlight. The red tendrils of the rising sun cast themselves over the sky, piercing the clouds like slender fingers eager to reach into what lay beyond. The wind's breath carries the fresh morning air through the field, passing through each warrior; the wind carrying the breath they might otherwise hold in anticipation of what lays ahead. + + +The orcs stand before you, ready to move forth at the sight of the Mannate Empire. The reserves wait in the rocky hills behind you. While not appearing so, many orcs are nervous, as any would be before a large battle; but, with hope in their minds and courage in their hearts, they stand by you. + + +Your horse shuffles, it's ears pricking up. The song of the Empire trickles from the forest, quietly at first. But, as the first humans emerge, their hauberks showing crests of their nobles, the standard bearers proudly emerge, their counterparts blaring trumpets and horns. How kind of them to announce themselves, yet so arrogant. + + +The columns of Mannate warriors spill forth. They move simultaneously. They do not waver or break form. Their perfect union a direct affront to the free and natural order that was intended for all. + + +The human soldiers stand at attention, all saluting as their officers move up and down the line. Some appear to inspect their warriors, some seem to be doing a lot of shouting. Others stand calmly in front of their columns. + + +One knight, which you recognize as such by the helm he wears, rides out in front of the column. He waves a white flag ahead above him. + + +"I think they wish to speak," Hidius says. + + +You scowl at the human riding forth, as if you could not have him crushed. His hands held up and flag waving as a sign of peace. + + +Spurring the horse beneath you to meet this human, you keep your hand by your sword. + + +Stopping several feet away from the Imperial, you both meet in the field between your armies. + + +"Hail Orc," the knight says. + + +You grunt in response. + + +"General Levalier has sent me to parley. Will you speak?" + + +"I will." + + +"Who may I ask do you speak for?" + + +"Myself." + + +"So you are this rabble's leader?" + + +Peering through the slits in the knight's helmet, his eyes light up in understanding. His other hand, which lays free of the flag, twitches slightly by his sword. Your hand already rests near yours. + + +You peer into the eyes of the knight, your eyes narrowing as you do so. The soldier looks back, and both of you sit there in silence. + + +His hand slowly moves away from his sword as he shifts to hold the flag with both hands. + + +"I have been sent to ask you to disperse your forces." + + +"No." + + +"Brute, won't you listen to reas-" + + +"No." + + +"I say, while I would not expect a beast of your nature to understand politics. At least hear the message my general has for yourself." + + +"The only thing you need to do is go home," you say. "You could save many of your soldiers' lives today." + + +The knight huffs in exasperation and turns his horse around. He gallops back, moving around the side of the columns. + + +Grunting, you trot back to your spot among your comrades. You don't trust that they will just up and leave after these years of skirmishes and preparation. It seems that battle was fated to happen this day, it will progress no matter what words are spoken. +> Attack! +The trumpets across the field begin to sound, and the officers riding upon their horses shout and wave their swords around. With all of your troops in position, you take your horn. Exhaling, you blow into it, and the other chiefs under you do so as well. The air is filled with the sound of war as you and your warriors pour forward. The Mannate humans approach, weapons held tightly and the crest of their Emperor waving in the wind. + + +Your orcs go to meet them, the might of Gigalak carries you forward to crush your enemies. +> Brute Force +With all of your forces centered, the orcish lines meet the human's with unparalleled force. You watch from your horse as weapons and shields collide. Mail armor protecting both sides from grievous wounds. It is not too long before your orcs push through the humans first line, bashing and knocking down warriors as the rest overtake them. + + +The humans give a steady retreat, before spearmen move through the columns to give some support. Two large columns come down and around from each side, taking a diagonal assault to your front. On your orders, your fighters divert to stand against it. As you wave your arm, two bands of cavalry swoop around your lines. One lead by Grolik and his Red Handed, the other by Gro'tesk and various civilized orc tribes. + + +Archers in each of your lines work to weaken your foes. Hidius and Rolomag each lead one of the defending lines to your sides, and you command the center force. With Gigalak's fist you break into the center. As your lines push the Imperials back, some Imperial knights by Grolik shake up his assault. + + +From where you are, you can't reach them. But orcs from one of the columns rush forth, taking on the knights. Many orcs to the right fall, but your overall army holds strong, and steadily you push the Imperials back. The horses stepping over the crumpled remains of orc and human alike. + + +Grolik blows his horn, rallying his troops. Nursing a wound in his shoulder, he rides forward, inspiring his fighters to go forth. Many fight on, even with life threatening injuries. You gaze to the wave of orcs. + + +Grolik circles around them, yelling out orders. In a moment, his eyes meet yours, before his face scrunches and his brows furrow. Looking down to his chest, a bloody arrow protrudes from his heart. Your friend goes limp and slumps off his horse, rolling as he hits the ground. Many of his orcs stare in confusion, before a volley of arrows shows them the same fate. + + +From the forest in the Southeast, a column of Imperial soldiers rushes out, covered by archers. They do untold damage to your right flank. They sweep in before your forces can organize a defense. Roaring, you charge forward. + + +Rolomag starts to divert troops. + + +"No," you cry, "stay focused. I've got this." + + +As you ride by, you see Grolik's eyes glazed, and staring into the sky. The arrow having gone straight through his heart, and spilling his spirit into the void. Orcs continue to fall, as the diversion weakens your center line. The humans in the center gain no ground, but don't lose any either. + + +Something else in the distance disturbs you. Circling around, a large cavalry rides through the open plain. Between the mountains and the forest they go, sweeping into your left flank. Hidius is just able to mount his horse, fighting off a knight. You howl in agony as another one rides up behind Hidius, planting his sword through his back. + + +Hidius falls quietly, and almost immediately. Somewhere in the fray, you see Silak defending his chief's corpse before himself being killed. As you rally troops to defend this side, Gro'tesk glances to you, his eyes flashing in anger. + + +The lines and columns are all in a frenzy, being attacked viciously from multiple sides. There is no semblance of lines and divisions. All the orcs fight as one, the Imperials slowly pushing through with reinvigorated fury. + + +Slamming the butt of your axe into a hapless soldiers helmet, you let out a roar. His helmet pinging and denting under your blow, his eyes bloodshot from the trauma. The soldier twitches before laying still. + + +The horse you are on cries out in agony, a couple of arrows piercing its chest. Managing to leap off, you roll to the ground and stand bearing both weapons. Just in time to meet the blades of bloodthirsty soldiers. + + +Hacking, slashing, and bashing you stand by your brethren. As you remove the head of one soldier, another's spear finds its way through your armor. Your mouth gapes in pain but you stay silent, grimacing and facing the soldier, you knock his spear away. + + +With a grunt you shove the sword blade under his helmet and into his face. Specks of crimson blood cover your arms as the soldier writhes, twitches, and dies. On the right flank, the Imperials push Rolomag's line ever closer to this one. The center also being pushed back. + + +Rolomag, with several injuries, gives you a weary nod. You are about to return it when Rolomag huffs and falls, an axe buried in his back. Ahead of you, a beast of a man wrenches the axe from your fallen friend's back. + + +You charge each other, weapons sparking and colliding. Grinning, you slam the spike atop your axe into the man's ribs. He ignores the pain and hacks into your side, breaking through the armor and embedding his axe into your ribs. + + +Twisting, you make him lose his grip. Your sword buries into the human's neck as his eyes widen in surprise. Before you can twist the sword out, a burning sensation shoots through your side. + + +The axe blade twists through your side snapping ribs and almost blinding you with pain. Before you can move, the axe blade slams into your helmet. As this happens a hand pushes you down, before you can twist around the handle slams into your helmet as well. + + +It's not long before various weapons slam into your armor or pierce through it and into your flesh. Your body aches all over, before feeling numb as you are overwhelmed. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The last six months since Galik's death have been eventful. It took a while for you to reorganize the camp, fixing all of Galik's mistakes. While it was stressful at first, you managed to delegate some responsibility to Grolik, Gro'tesk, Hidius, and Rolomag. + + +Everything is now organized, but it seems that the Empire is done playing around. In the last two months alone, you have repelled several small-scale assaults. You are sure they are finally going to act and make some big moves. + + +But so are you. Soon, these years of stalemates and quiet maneuvering will be at an end. Soon, it will be time to test the Mannate Empire's true mettle. + + +The past five years have been filled with hardships and struggles, but you have managed to overcome all of them. For the first time, you are looking at this conflict pretty positively. Young orcs trickle in everyday willing to contribute to the cause. What worries you though is their age. While there are plenty of experienced veterans in your army, the number of young, inexperienced, and foolhardy orcs concerns you. + + +Traditionally, orcs have always set out as adults at the age of fifteen. What this usually means for them is going out and finding adventure and fighting things. Because of your warlike nature, many orcs do not actually live too long. Some would even consider an orc such as yourself, at the ripe age of thirty-five to have been a long enough and accomplished life. + + +Gigalak did not intend your kind to grow old and miserable, but, instead, to put life into your years, no matter how short or long they may be. + + +You sense someone pulling up to the side of you. + + +"Still thinking about Galik?" Grolik asks. + + +"Among other things," you sigh. + + +"I know you were close to him, but he just went too far." + + +"I know, it’s just hard seeing someone you care about turn into something else." + + +Grolik exhales slowly, nodding as he does so. + + +"Sometimes, you'll do everything you can to save someone," he says, "but sometimes you have to do what you have to do." + + +"What would you know about this?" you snort. + + +Grolik gulps and looks into the distance before turning his head to you. + + +"I….I butchered my entire family and tribe." + + +"What?" you ask. + + +"It's… a long story." + + +Before you can say anything further, Grolik spurs his horse forward to attend to something else. + + +A whole throng of orcs march ahead and behind you, as you all make your way down the mountains and to the hills where the rest of your army waits. Along the way, you have groups of fighters intersperse throughout the hills and rocks just before the plains. It seems the Empire plans to take you on in open combat. + + +The scouts alerted you of the huge shift in troops heading this way. Once your reserves and last line are firmly placed, you call to all of your commanders. + + +Kneeling by a rock, you spread a map across it. Taking a piece of charcoal to mark it up. + + +Rolomag peers closely at it, rubbing his chin. Grolik looks out to the hills and then to the plains and forest ahead. Gro'tesk sharpens his weapons and checks the string on his bow. Hidius closes his eyes and takes in the crisp air. + + +You start by marking all of the locations the Imperials should be attacking from. Mostly, directly ahead of you. + + +Gro'tesk points to the area in the Southeast. + + +"I think they'll try sending a few brigades through here," he says. "While there's no chance they would be able to make it through the mountains in time, it wouldn't take much longer for them to divert through these woods." + + +You have some light patrols stationed in the mountains, so they would alert your left flank if they saw Imperials moving through there. + + +"Hmm, we can probably divert more troops to watching that area then," you say. + + +"Or, we could go through that way ourselves and try to catch them off guard," Gro'tesk says, "whether or not they're coming through that way." + + +"No way," Rolomag says. "We need all the warriors here that we can get. Their only real option is to try to push through the plains, and we should try to match them." + + +"No, wrong way!" Gro'tesk yells. + + +Grolik speaks without looking to the group. + + +"I think Gro'tesk is actually right about this one," he says, "we need to keep an eye over that way. Or maybe even exploit it." + + +"Yes, if they get cavalry through those woods," Gro'tesk says, "even with our reserves and archers, we won't be able to stop them from wiping through our flank." + + +You analyze the area, the humans could utilize it, in which case it would be helpful to prepare to counteract them. They also just might use brute force, in which case you would need to have all of your fighters here at the ready. + + +"There is another thing," Hidius says. "While we can't expect them to come through and around the mountains, see this stretch of open space between the mountains and the trees?" + + +Rolomag squints at the map. + + +"Yes, but what does that-" + + +"If they move some soldiers through here," Hidius says, "they could easily hit this side with a concentrated force. I suspect they would use cavalry to cover the gap as well." + + +"Let me position more warriors there," he continues. "I will keep the mountain patrol there. But if we see any soldiers or cavalry, we can easily ride in and trap them in between the main force and this one." +> Allow Gro'tesk to Flank +"Gro'tesk," you say, "I want you to put together a strike force, and go around. Give the battle some time to start, but once you take them by surprise, hit them as hard as you can." + + +"Got it," Gro'tesk nods. + + +"What about the left side?" Hidius asks. + + +"We don't need to worry about that," you say. "With Gro'tesk attacking their flank, they'll have no choice but to concentrate in those two areas." + + +"We're going to be exposed over there," Hidius says while sharpening his knife. + + +"Trust me," you say. "This plan will work." + + +"Gro'tesk, while we are setting up I want you to wait in the forest over there," you say. "Make sure they don't see you at all." + + +With the plan made, you all disperse to make preparations for the upcoming battle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The last six months since Galik's death have been eventful. It took a while for you to reorganize the camp, fixing all of Galik's mistakes. While it was stressful at first, you managed to delegate some responsibility to Grolik, Gro'tesk, Hidius, and Rolomag. + + +Everything is now organized, but it seems that the Empire is done playing around. In the last two months alone, you have repelled several small-scale assaults. You are sure they are finally going to act and make some big moves. + + +But so are you. Soon, these years of stalemates and quiet maneuvering will be at an end. Soon, it will be time to test the Mannate Empire's true mettle. + + +The past five years have been filled with hardships and struggles, but you have managed to overcome all of them. For the first time, you are looking at this conflict pretty positively. Young orcs trickle in everyday willing to contribute to the cause. What worries you though is their age. While there are plenty of experienced veterans in your army, the number of young, inexperienced, and foolhardy orcs concerns you. + + +Traditionally, orcs have always set out as adults at the age of fifteen. What this usually means for them is going out and finding adventure and fighting things. Because of your warlike nature, many orcs do not actually live too long. Some would even consider an orc such as yourself, at the ripe age of thirty-five to have been a long enough and accomplished life. + + +Gigalak did not intend your kind to grow old and miserable, but, instead, to put life into your years, no matter how short or long they may be. + + +You sense someone pulling up to the side of you. + + +"Still thinking about Galik?" Grolik asks. + + +"Among other things," you sigh. + + +"I know you were close to him, but he just went too far." + + +"I know, it’s just hard seeing someone you care about turn into something else." + + +Grolik exhales slowly, nodding as he does so. + + +"Sometimes, you'll do everything you can to save someone," he says, "but sometimes you have to do what you have to do." + + +"What would you know about this?" you snort. + + +Grolik gulps and looks into the distance before turning his head to you. + + +"I….I butchered my entire family and tribe." + + +"What?" you ask. + + +"It's… a long story." + + +Before you can say anything further, Grolik spurs his horse forward to attend to something else. + + +A whole throng of orcs march ahead and behind you, as you all make your way down the mountains and to the hills where the rest of your army waits. Along the way, you have groups of fighters intersperse throughout the hills and rocks just before the plains. It seems the Empire plans to take you on in open combat. + + +The scouts alerted you of the huge shift in troops heading this way. Once your reserves and last line are firmly placed, you call to all of your commanders. + + +Kneeling by a rock, you spread a map across it. Taking a piece of charcoal to mark it up. + + +Rolomag peers closely at it, rubbing his chin. Grolik looks out to the hills and then to the plains and forest ahead. Gro'tesk sharpens his weapons and checks the string on his bow. Hidius closes his eyes and takes in the crisp air. + + +You start by marking all of the locations the Imperials should be attacking from. Mostly, directly ahead of you. + + +Gro'tesk points to the area in the Southeast. + + +"I think they'll try sending a few brigades through here," he says. "While there's no chance they would be able to make it through the mountains in time, it wouldn't take much longer for them to divert through these woods." + + +You have some light patrols stationed in the mountains, so they would alert your left flank if they saw Imperials moving through there. + + +"Hmm, we can probably divert more troops to watching that area then," you say. + + +"Or, we could go through that way ourselves and try to catch them off guard," Gro'tesk says, "whether or not they're coming through that way." + + +"No way," Rolomag says. "We need all the warriors here that we can get. Their only real option is to try to push through the plains, and we should try to match them." + + +"No, wrong way!" Gro'tesk yells. + + +Grolik speaks without looking to the group. + + +"I think Gro'tesk is actually right about this one," he says, "we need to keep an eye over that way. Or maybe even exploit it." + + +"Yes, if they get cavalry through those woods," Gro'tesk says, "even with our reserves and archers, we won't be able to stop them from wiping through our flank." + + +You analyze the area, the humans could utilize it, in which case it would be helpful to prepare to counteract them. They also just might use brute force, in which case you would need to have all of your fighters here at the ready. + + +"There is another thing," Hidius says. "While we can't expect them to come through and around the mountains, see this stretch of open space between the mountains and the trees?" + + +Rolomag squints at the map. + + +"Yes, but what does that-" + + +"If they move some soldiers through here," Hidius says, "they could easily hit this side with a concentrated force. I suspect they would use cavalry to cover the gap as well." + + +"Let me position more warriors there," he continues. "I will keep the mountain patrol there. But if we see any soldiers or cavalry, we can easily ride in and trap them in between the main force and this one." +> Allow Hidius to lay a trap +"Hidius," you say, "I want you to take a unit and set them up by the bottom of the mountain. If they try to send cavalry across, sweep them up and take them down." + + +Hidius nods. + + +"What about the forest to the Southeast?" Gro'tesk says. "We need to watch it." + + +"No Gro'tesk," you say, "there's no way they'll take that much time to divert forces that way. I know how the Imperials fight, they'll just attack straight on and use cavalry." + + +Gro'tesk shakes his head in frustration. + + +"You never know!" he yells throwing a rock at the ground. "It will take more time, but it would be worth it for them. I have seen these things happen!" + + +"If they do attack, we will easily be able to divert troops to stand in their way," you say. "We can't risk our bulk to divert troops left and right without knowing if we need to." + + +"I think Gro'tesk is right," Grolik says. "I'll personally take-" + + +"No," you say. "You'll have other roles to play. Focus on them." + + +Gro'tesk and Grolik glance at each other but then turn and nod at you. You send the group to go about their duties and prepare for the oncoming battle ahead. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The last six months since Galik's death have been eventful. It took a while for you to reorganize the camp, fixing all of Galik's mistakes. While it was stressful at first, you managed to delegate some responsibility to Grolik, Gro'tesk, Hidius, and Rolomag. + + +Everything is now organized, but it seems that the Empire is done playing around. In the last two months alone, you have repelled several small-scale assaults. You are sure they are finally going to act and make some big moves. + + +But so are you. Soon, these years of stalemates and quiet maneuvering will be at an end. Soon, it will be time to test the Mannate Empire's true mettle. + + +The past five years have been filled with hardships and struggles, but you have managed to overcome all of them. For the first time, you are looking at this conflict pretty positively. Young orcs trickle in everyday willing to contribute to the cause. What worries you though is their age. While there are plenty of experienced veterans in your army, the number of young, inexperienced, and foolhardy orcs concerns you. + + +Traditionally, orcs have always set out as adults at the age of fifteen. What this usually means for them is going out and finding adventure and fighting things. Because of your warlike nature, many orcs do not actually live too long. Some would even consider an orc such as yourself, at the ripe age of thirty-five to have been a long enough and accomplished life. + + +Gigalak did not intend your kind to grow old and miserable, but, instead, to put life into your years, no matter how short or long they may be. + + +You sense someone pulling up to the side of you. + + +"Still thinking about Galik?" Grolik asks. + + +"Among other things," you sigh. + + +"I know you were close to him, but he just went too far." + + +"I know, it’s just hard seeing someone you care about turn into something else." + + +Grolik exhales slowly, nodding as he does so. + + +"Sometimes, you'll do everything you can to save someone," he says, "but sometimes you have to do what you have to do." + + +"What would you know about this?" you snort. + + +Grolik gulps and looks into the distance before turning his head to you. + + +"I….I butchered my entire family and tribe." + + +"What?" you ask. + + +"It's… a long story." + + +Before you can say anything further, Grolik spurs his horse forward to attend to something else. + + +A whole throng of orcs march ahead and behind you, as you all make your way down the mountains and to the hills where the rest of your army waits. Along the way, you have groups of fighters intersperse throughout the hills and rocks just before the plains. It seems the Empire plans to take you on in open combat. + + +The scouts alerted you of the huge shift in troops heading this way. Once your reserves and last line are firmly placed, you call to all of your commanders. + + +Kneeling by a rock, you spread a map across it. Taking a piece of charcoal to mark it up. + + +Rolomag peers closely at it, rubbing his chin. Grolik looks out to the hills and then to the plains and forest ahead. Gro'tesk sharpens his weapons and checks the string on his bow. Hidius closes his eyes and takes in the crisp air. + + +You start by marking all of the locations the Imperials should be attacking from. Mostly, directly ahead of you. + + +Gro'tesk points to the area in the Southeast. + + +"I think they'll try sending a few brigades through here," he says. "While there's no chance they would be able to make it through the mountains in time, it wouldn't take much longer for them to divert through these woods." + + +You have some light patrols stationed in the mountains, so they would alert your left flank if they saw Imperials moving through there. + + +"Hmm, we can probably divert more troops to watching that area then," you say. + + +"Or, we could go through that way ourselves and try to catch them off guard," Gro'tesk says, "whether or not they're coming through that way." + + +"No way," Rolomag says. "We need all the warriors here that we can get. Their only real option is to try to push through the plains, and we should try to match them." + + +"No, wrong way!" Gro'tesk yells. + + +Grolik speaks without looking to the group. + + +"I think Gro'tesk is actually right about this one," he says, "we need to keep an eye over that way. Or maybe even exploit it." + + +"Yes, if they get cavalry through those woods," Gro'tesk says, "even with our reserves and archers, we won't be able to stop them from wiping through our flank." + + +You analyze the area, the humans could utilize it, in which case it would be helpful to prepare to counteract them. They also just might use brute force, in which case you would need to have all of your fighters here at the ready. + + +"There is another thing," Hidius says. "While we can't expect them to come through and around the mountains, see this stretch of open space between the mountains and the trees?" + + +Rolomag squints at the map. + + +"Yes, but what does that-" + + +"If they move some soldiers through here," Hidius says, "they could easily hit this side with a concentrated force. I suspect they would use cavalry to cover the gap as well." + + +"Let me position more warriors there," he continues. "I will keep the mountain patrol there. But if we see any soldiers or cavalry, we can easily ride in and trap them in between the main force and this one." +> Listen to both Hidius and Gro'tesk +You nod and look to both Hidius and Gro'tesk. + + +"I think you are both right," you say. "We need the right amount of surprise and caution. If the battles with the Empire so far has taught us anything, these humans are tenacious, and we need to prepare for anything." + + +Gro'tesk grunts in agreement, and Hidius slowly nods his head. + + +"So, Gro'tesk, I want you to take your warriors up and around the forest. Divert and cut off any troops they are sending through, then begin your assault on their flank." + + +"I will crush them for you, chief." + + +"And Hidius, station your cavalry by the base of the mountain," you say. "If they come through the plain to attack our flank, sweep them in and crush them. Rolomag and I will prepare that flank to fend off their horsemen while you charge them." + + +You gaze out through the plains and to where the mountain turns into rocky hills. + + +"You will need to go quickly lest they finish their foul deeds." + + +"I will go with Gigalak's breath at my heels," Hidius says. + + +"Good," you say. "With one hand may he guide us, and with the other sweep our enemies from our home." + + +You and your comrades disband to prepare for the battle that is yet to come.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As these memories flood through your mind, you realize that it doesn't matter what he was. It just matters what he has become; and that's a murderer. He would drag the orcish armies into the grave with him, dooming Orcin to an eternity of rule by the Mannate Empire. + + +Galik laughs insanely as you step forward, and you drive the sword down… + + +In the last moment, Galik rolls to the side and the sword slams into the dirt. You pull, but the blade does not budge. + + +Standing, you cannot do anything before your foe slams into you. His fingers dig into your shoulder as he draws a dagger from under his shirt. He grins and chuckles as he lifts the blade up, intent on slamming it into your chest. The dagger gleaming in the sunlight, showing you your final moments… + + +Galik brings the knife down, your hand shooting up just in time. Grunting you twist and wrench the blade from his hand. Grabbing his shoulder you shove the knife forward into his belly, as it slides through surprisingly easy. Galik gasps, and his hands grip your shoulders. + + +You rip the dagger out and slam it back into him, this time some splatter decorating your forearms. On the third strike, Galik's knees buckle and he falls back, guided by your hand. As you kneel over him, Galik's hands grip your arms and shoulder. +> Stop +As Galik's weak hands clutch onto you, your fingers curl around the dagger tightly. But you toss it to the side, instead lifting Galik up and cradling him. + + +"Why did you do this?" you ask. "Greusim was my friend, I've known you since before you were born. Why couldn't you just wait for me to come back, we could have handled this together." + + +A weak grunt passed Galik's lips, and he pulls himself up a bit. + + +"I'm…sorry…" + + +The last breath passes between his lips, and his body goes limp. You sit there, letting out a heavy sigh. With a grunt, you lift up Galik's body, throwing him over your shoulder. + + +In front of you stands Grolik, a bloody dagger in his hands. He nods in understanding and steps to the side as you walk by. + + +You go down to bury your former friend by the river…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With a heavy sigh… you lift the sword up, gripping it with both hands. Grolik doesn't even blink as you bring it down. But you step slightly to the side, slicing clean through the arm of the orc to your left who handed you the sword. He screams in pain as he falls over, and you run the second through the chest. + + +As you pull it out, you turn around just in time to deflect an attack from Galik. As you circle him and parry his blows, Grolik tackles the third orc, turning his own dagger towards him. + + +"You've made the wrong choice, old friend," Galik says. "I'm sorry." + + +You don't respond but, instead, block his swift attack. Galik fights with ferocity, but you match this with skill. + + +As you hook your blade onto his hilt, you turn and twist, Galik flies forward. He drops his sword for a moment but rolls and picks it back up. Behind him, Grolik and the other orc still struggle, the dagger on the ground and both of them in a deadly grapple. + + +Galik twirls his sword as you circle each other. + + +"Drop the sword, Galik," you say. "It doesn't have to be like this." + + +"Oh but it does. Remember, you chose this!" + + +The last couple of words are emphasized by Galik swinging his sword down at you. You easily dodge this and take a wide swipe, nicking his arm. Galik hisses and swings at your head, which you duck as you plunge the tip of the sword into his calf. + + +Galik cries out in pain and staggers back. You raise the sword before pausing, instead, taking a step back. + + +"You truly have gotten soft, Nolazir," he says. "What happened to the ruthless orc I used to hear stories about?" + + +"Do you really think I want to kill you?" you say. "You're the child of my dear friend Greusim. He was like a father to me, why would I want to kill any of his children?" + + +"You're just a weakling and a pathetic leader, Nolazir," Galik says. "My father would be disappointed in you." + + +With these words still in the air, Galik charges you, first swinging high but then veering low. With a cry you barely manage to escape, the tip of the blade slicing into your thigh. Gritting your teeth you slash his chest. + + +Not once, but twice and then three times; you swing the sword in a perfect arc of fury. Galik's face twists as he staggers back, clutching his chest. He raises his sword and stumbles forward, you easily deflect the strike and slam your foot into his knee. + + +Galik cries out and falls back, rolling to get away from what he thought would be a killing blow. As he looks up, you see the seething hatred in his eyes. His sword lays behind you, which he had dropped when you knocked him over. + + +"Well, what are you waiting for, Nolazir?" + + +You take a step forward, raising the sword. As you do so, you remember the first day that Greusim showed Galik to you; when he was but an infant wrapped inside a blanket. You remember the days of taking him out as a young lad, teaching him how to fish and about the plants and animals. You remember the closeness you used to share, before Greusim fell, and this wrath took him over. +> Spare Galik +He may have lost his way, overtaken with wrath, but surely there must be another way to handle this. You stop, and glancing around you see many orcs have gathered. They seem to be expecting you to finish Galik off. + + +Despite your brutal nature, you cannot bring yourself to do it. There is another way to handle this… he is just lost- + + +Something slams into you, forcing the wind from your chest, and as you fall your arms twist and you roll. + + +Stopping, you see Galik stepping towards you… twirling the sword, a smirk on his face. + + +You crawl back, lifting your arms up defensively as Galik raises the sword. + + +You cringe a bit as his arm twitches… but not for the reason you would expect. Another arm shoots under it and grabs his wrist, twisting it back and to his side. You pull yourself up, hands out just in case. + + +Galik snarls as he begins to struggle, but this is replaced by a gasp; his brow twitches and he drops the sword. He staggers forward and reaches his arms out, and as he falls you catch him. His face buries into your chest as he falls at an awkward angle. + + +Bewildered you look up to see Grolik, standing, a dagger slicked in blood in his hand. His brow furrowed, he looks up from Galik and nods at you. + + +Upon Galik's back you see a stretch of blood dripping down his back. The dagger wound placed expertly in his spinal column. Rolling Galik over and kneeling, you hold him off the ground somewhat. His eyes are blank and his mouth slightly agape, he did not suffer for very long. + + +"Damn it Galik," you say. "It didn't have to be like this." + + +A few orcs walk forward, nodding at you. + + +"Chief," one says, "we will take care of him for you." + + +"No," you say. "I'll handle it, let's untie the other orcs first though." + + +You walk with Grolik over to the orcs tied to the posts, the whippers having long since left. Grunting, you begin the work of cutting their bonds, several orcs coming over to help. + + +"Can't say we'll miss him too much," one says. "I know you were close to him, but he was a damn tyrant." + + +You sigh and continue your work. After finishing up, you hoist your former friend over your shoulders and go to find somewhere to bury him…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It has been six months since you left to unite the tribes. It has not been easy, but it has been largely successful. There were a few that gave you trouble, refusing to join in the fight. Even then, some of their members disobeyed and walked right out with you. The rest will come around eventually. + + +Lately, the Council has sent several couriers with messages urging you to hold off in the fight against the Empire. You always send them back with a "no." + + +It appears that the humans have really been pushing within the last month, and Galik seems to have taken charge over things since you have left. Maybe he has finally matured and is ready to take over for you. + + +You wouldn't mind not having to worry about all of this; except for the fighting really. It would be just like the war with the Wister Elves, someone points and you attack, broken up with random bursts of initiative and leadership. + + +At the same time, your axe itches to go into the fray. That spark Gigalak ignited into all orcs has not gone out yet. You begin to wonder where this course of action will take you when it begins to rain. + + +"It's raining again." + + +As you make your way back to your camp, you see that it has grown tremendously. Many orcs shout and greet you as you enter. While you have been pretty well liked by most of them, you didn't expect such an enthusiastic welcome. + + +"The chieftain has returned!" + + +"Hail Nolazir!" + + +"Our leader returns to us!" + + +You smirk a bit, it will be a letdown for some if they find out you're thinking of resigning over to Galik. + + +As you enter the main area of the camp where many of the orcish leaders live, you notice something is different. Several posts have been erected, with orcs tied to them, while their comrades grimly whip them. + + +As you turn, looking between your old tent and some of the others, there upon the ground are three slain orcs. Above them stands Galik, a fiery rage in his eyes. Near them, stands Grolik, severely beaten and held back by three orcs. + + +"Galik!" you cry. + + +Galik breathes heavily and looks up from the corpses to meet your eye. + + +"Nolazir," he says prowling forward, "stand down!" + + +"What is going on?" + + +"These fools disobeyed me. They were here to sabotage our efforts." + + +"What in Grikalia are you talking about?" + + +"These traitors spent weeks scheming and planning," Galik said, "but it was not that alone that caused this? Do you want to know what it was?" + + +You glare at him, lowering your chin a bit. Your hands curl at your side as you prepare for anything. + + +"There are some in the Council who think we should give the humans quarter," Galik says, "parley with them, make an agreement. These fools pushed this idea, even saying we should compromise with them." + + +Galik furiously spits on one of the corpses. + + +"This one thought that we should concede some land to be annexed with the Empire. Fools." + + +While you can see the logic in his anger, something seems off. + + +"And the rest?" you ask. + + +"Not so keen on the idea of conceding land yet," Galik says, "but it was only a matter of time before the traitor would get them to turn over. I know this." + + +"That's only one of three," you say, "and you think you can justify their executions with assumptions?" + + +"Nolazir, they were traitors. I could see it! It would not have been too long!" + + +"And what say you for Grolik?" you ask. "What has he done?" + + +Grolik slowly looks up at the two of you, a dark look in his eyes. + + +"When I was… purging these traitors, he tried to intervene," Galik says, "using much the same words as you have. Actually, he is lucky I haven't gutted him yet, seeing as he has been a pain these last couple of months." + + +Galik twirls his sword a bit before pointing it at the whipping post. + + +"I thought a nice whipping would get him to change his mind," he says, "but he sure is stubborn. I have only spared his life because he spoke against these traitors, but then he ridiculed me for sending them to Grikalia early." + + +"So what do you intend to do?" you ask. + + +"I'm going to kill him," Galik says with a smirk. + + +"Or more like…" he grins, "you're going to kill him. Prove your loyalty to your new chief, Nolazir" + + +Galik takes a few steps back, gesturing you to step forward. As you do, the other three orcs raise Grolik. + + +As you stand in front of him, one of the orcs hands you a shortsword. As you grip the simple weapon, the texture of the leather grip feels odd to you right now. + + +Grolik looks at you, shaking his head a bit. + + +"Don't do it Nolazir," he says. "I think we know who the real traitor is." + + +You look at the blade, surely Galik has seen madness, but could you really kill the child of your dear friend Greusim? The young orc who had often sat on your lap when you went to visit your now dead friend… all those years ago. + + +Who is Grolik? You've known him for a few years, but he is just a lawless orc. Still, he has shown great promise, and hasn't let you down yet. Other than your first altercation, he has been a true friend. + + +Grolik looks into your eyes, there is no fear. There is a quiet rage, and even a hint of sadness in his eyes. +> Kill Grolik +You level the sword, the placing the tip on Grolik's chest. Sometimes sacrifices have to be made for the greater good, Galik may be wild but you should be able to keep him in check. + + +"Really Nolazir?" Grolik says, "is this really what you're doing?" + + +Grolik's stare pierces you, his glare hard enough to cut steel and his voice unwavering. + + +"If this is really what you're doing," Grolik says, "Gigalak help me you better make sure I'm dead because if I make it out of this I'm coming for you bo-" + + +You grab his shoulder as hard as you can, thrusting the sword into his chest and through his heart. Grolik's face scrunches up in pain, but only for a moment. His eyes roll into the back of his head and he falls to the side. + + +Holding the sword, you stare at the bloody blade. The weight of what you have done not quite hitting you, and this weapon of death seeming foreign for a moment. + + +As you lower the sword to your side, a hand slams into your shoulder. + + +"Hahaha!" Galik says, "good job Nolazir! Guess he wasn't so tough after all, let's see him come back to get us from this one!" + + +Forcing yourself to laugh, you walk off with Galik, who starts to talk about some strategies. +> Conflict +In the following days, chaos has erupted throughout the camp. The Red Handed and their allies dispersed themselves throughout the camp, then without warning began to butcher as many of your orcs as they could. + + +Trapped by a cliff behind you and the bulk of the late Grolik's forces ahead of you, the only viable cover is the rocks and wagons you hide behind. They have a pretty good grip on the main camp area. Once they finish fighting the rest of the camp, they will surely overwhelm you at any moment. + + +Arrow after arrow thuds into the wagon. You fire an arrow back under one of the wheels, unsure of where the hell it landed. In front of you the tents burn and the sounds of fighting ring throughout. You didn't know there were so damn many of them until last night. + + +The minor nicks, scratches, and bruises you've received from fighting your way out pulsate through your body. Galik sits next to you, nursing a grievous injury in his side. + + +As you, Galik, and the rest of the orcs fought your way through, some orc chucked a javelin into Galik's side. It went through pretty deeply and you are surprised that he is still alive, although he won't be if you do not get him treatment soon. Even then his chances are probably slim. + + +You witnessed Hidius walking out of his tent to see the commotion, and immediately was stabbed in the chest before you could help. Silak fought valiantly to defend his dying chief, but was ultimately overwhelmed. + + +Gro'tesk might be dead by now, you didn't see what became of him. You're not too sure about Rolomag either for that matter. You had not seen him since late yesterday, and as far as you know he wanted to speak with Gro'tesk. So they're either standing together or already dead. + + +Gasping and panting, Galik stands up and directs some of the orcs around you. + + +"You, crawl that way," he says, "and you, keep shooting damn it!" + + +He kneels and grips another orc by the shoulder. + + +"Finish this up, damn it!" + + +A team of orcs furiously work on a contraption similar to the siege breakers you constructed during the war with the Wister Elves. Actually, you recognize a lot of the orcs around you from those days. + + +Galik slumps against the wagon, gritting his teeth. + + +"Nolazir," he says, "we're going to try to break through. We'll have archers at the sides covering you, follow us, and when we get close enough break out and rush them." + + +While the path you have to go is pretty narrow, you're sure this will only lead to your doom. Well, so would sitting here eventually. +> Follow Galik's Lead +"Yes Chief," you say, "bring one of these shields." + + +Luckily, one of the wagons happened to have a bunch of weapon and shield supplies in it. Galik hands the shield back to you. + + +"Gigalak will shield me," he says, "besides, I don't know how much longer this dressing will hold without my hand." + + +"I'll see this through to the end with you," you say. + + +As the orcs finish up the siege breaker, you all get into position. A few orcs begin the slow push, as Galik stands in the middle of it barking orders and taking cover. Raising your shield you get into the column, a couple of arrows already hitting and bouncing off your shield. + + +You all make a sort of wall with the shields, but many orcs are still struck down. Some of yours fire arrows over the shields and the siege breaker, a few even managing to kill or wound some of your foes. + + +As you get closer, you see the Red Handed preparing to charge. You brace yourself for their attack. +> Use your bow +You hand an orc your shield, as his is riddled with arrows. Getting behind him, you notch an arrow to your bow. Taking aim as the orcs ahead cry out and begin their charge. Even as you aim, an arrow glances off your cheekbone, but it does not sway you. You release your first arrow, the receiving orc stumbling and falling still. + + +The gleam of bloodlust in your eyes, you fire arrow after arrow. Mostly killing and wounding offending orcs. When your quiver runs out, you start ripping arrows out of the shield on the ground next to you, using the projectiles that haven't broken. + + +The Red Handed push into your line, many of your orcs rushing forward to take them on. They actually hold them off pretty well for a good while. But as they exhaust and succumb to their injuries, you see there is no way you will win this. + + +You push forward with the orc in front of you as they start to surround Galik, making a desperate attempt to get to him. The orc in front of you drops you his quiver and heroically dashes into the fray, almost immediately he is beat down and killed by your enemies. + + +You move forward with the other archers, roaring as you make your way to your leader. As the Red Handed flood around him, he has no choice but to climb atop the siege breaker. Orc after orc is cut down trying to get to him. + + +You charge forward, deflecting a sword with your bow. The orc's face crunches as you smash the bow into his face, the heavy wooden weapon turning his face into red mush. You throw it at the next, which doesn't do much but give you an opportunity to axe him in the neck. + + +Before you can do anything, Galik takes a spear jab in the back. Two orcs climb up and one grabs him, the other using his dagger to stab the shit out of him. + + +You hook the axe shoulder behind the knee of one of those lawless scum, arcing it back around and slamming it into his face. As the orc sputters and cries out, you try to pull the axe out, but it won't budge. The bastard even grips the top part of the handle, pushing it deeper into his face. + + +You struggle with him until you feel a heavy pain in your chest. + + +"Argh!" + + +Above you, a Red Handed quickly retracts his spear. You roar as you charge up, but the dying orc below grabs your leg, causing you to fall. The orc with the spear begins to stab you in the back, as other orcs stab you and beat you down with clubs. + + +You cry out in pain and anger, but you are too weak to do anything else. In moments you are left to die, broken, bloody, and bleeding out….<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Yes Chief," you say, "bring one of these shields." + + +Luckily, one of the wagons happened to have a bunch of weapon and shield supplies in it. Galik hands the shield back to you. + + +"Gigalak will shield me," he says, "besides, I don't know how much longer this dressing will hold without my hand." + + +"I'll see this through to the end with you," you say. + + +As the orcs finish up the siege breaker, you all get into position. A few orcs begin the slow push, as Galik stands in the middle of it barking orders and taking cover. Raising your shield you get into the column, a couple of arrows already hitting and bouncing off your shield. + + +You all make a sort of wall with the shields, but many orcs are still struck down. Some of yours fire arrows over the shields and the siege breaker, a few even managing to kill or wound some of your foes. + + +As you get closer, you see the Red Handed preparing to charge. You brace yourself for their attack. +> Charge +You draw your sword, preparing it as you raise your shield. With a roar you go forth to meet them, arrows from the archers flying to the sides of you and taking down some of your foes. + + +This barely slows them down, and they meet yours. The orcs slow down the Red Handed, but as you duck, parry, deflect, and attack….the exhaustion is clearly written on your orcs. Almost a straight twenty four hours of combat and sustaining injuries seems to be taking it's toll. + + +You slowly and steadily retreat as your allies fall one by one. Ahead, Galik and the rest of the orcs at the siege breaker are being flooded by the Red Handed. Galik climbs atop the contraption as he makes his stand, cutting down any foe brave enough to try to face him. + + +Roaring, you and a few other orcs break your line to fight your way towards Galik. Most of the other orcs rally to you and help you to push forward. + + +Dodging a blow, you slice through an orc's face. He shouts out but before he can do much else you've already slashed his neck. As you lunge forward you parry a blow, slamming your blade straight through the offenders chest. + + +His arms flail in front of him, and as you wedge the blade to get it out his blood spouts from it. Another orc swings, his sword glancing off your cheek bone. Roaring in fury, you slash through his knee and he falls gripping his stub. + + +Galik slams his sword into an orc's skull, but it is in too deep for him to wrench it out. The orc falls and the sword slips from his grip. + + +"Galik!" you shout as you throw him your sword, and in one motion he catches it and slices through an orc's chest in mid climb. + + +Brandishing your axe you charge forward, cutting down several orcs in a fury, but not without sustaining some injuries yourself. + + +Panting and heaving, you climb onto the top of the siege breaker. The both of you stand back to back fighting off orcs, as the rest of your allies are swallowed up. As your weapon clashes with others, and blood is shed, you hear a gasp behind you. + + +Turning, you see there is a dagger wedged into Galik's knee joint. He falls and you reach out to catch him, but miss by a hair. Galik is dragged into the crowd of orcs, you slash, beat, stab, and jab at him. + + +You roar and slam your axe into the nearest orc. Before you can fall another, a flail flies forward, wrapping around your leg. + + +The orc pulls with a grunt, and steps back, dragging you off the glorified wagon. You howl in pain and rage as the surrounding orcs begin to stab you and beat your with their clubs and fists. + + +You meet much the same fate as Galik….<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>In the following days, chaos has erupted throughout the camp. The Red Handed and their allies dispersed themselves throughout the camp, then without warning began to butcher as many of your orcs as they could. + + +Trapped by a cliff behind you and the bulk of the late Grolik's forces ahead of you, the only viable cover is the rocks and wagons you hide behind. They have a pretty good grip on the main camp area. Once they finish fighting the rest of the camp, they will surely overwhelm you at any moment. + + +Arrow after arrow thuds into the wagon. You fire an arrow back under one of the wheels, unsure of where the hell it landed. In front of you the tents burn and the sounds of fighting ring throughout. You didn't know there were so damn many of them until last night. + + +The minor nicks, scratches, and bruises you've received from fighting your way out pulsate through your body. Galik sits next to you, nursing a grievous injury in his side. + + +As you, Galik, and the rest of the orcs fought your way through, some orc chucked a javelin into Galik's side. It went through pretty deeply and you are surprised that he is still alive, although he won't be if you do not get him treatment soon. Even then his chances are probably slim. + + +You witnessed Hidius walking out of his tent to see the commotion, and immediately was stabbed in the chest before you could help. Silak fought valiantly to defend his dying chief, but was ultimately overwhelmed. + + +Gro'tesk might be dead by now, you didn't see what became of him. You're not too sure about Rolomag either for that matter. You had not seen him since late yesterday, and as far as you know he wanted to speak with Gro'tesk. So they're either standing together or already dead. + + +Gasping and panting, Galik stands up and directs some of the orcs around you. + + +"You, crawl that way," he says, "and you, keep shooting damn it!" + + +He kneels and grips another orc by the shoulder. + + +"Finish this up, damn it!" + + +A team of orcs furiously work on a contraption similar to the siege breakers you constructed during the war with the Wister Elves. Actually, you recognize a lot of the orcs around you from those days. + + +Galik slumps against the wagon, gritting his teeth. + + +"Nolazir," he says, "we're going to try to break through. We'll have archers at the sides covering you, follow us, and when we get close enough break out and rush them." + + +While the path you have to go is pretty narrow, you're sure this will only lead to your doom. Well, so would sitting here eventually. +> Stay here and cover Galik +"Galik" you say, "let's hold out here." + + +"We need everyone to push through." + + +"No, if we stay here we can shoot them when they inevitably charge us," you say, "we will probably die anyway, but we can whittle down their numbers a bit." + + +Galik nods and prepares his bow. You pass along the order for everyone to stand their ground and wait for the time to fire…. + + +But it never seems to come. + + +Two days later, the fighting has calmed down in the camp, many of your orcs apparently having managed to escape if they weren't killed. + + +Now most of the Red Handed are focused on launching volley after volley of arrows at you. Many of you manage to shoot back, sometimes killing and wounding theirs. But they have you beat down pretty well. + + +As you stand to fire an arrow, a sharp pain shoots through your chest. Gritting your teeth you kneel down, gripping the arrow lodged in your chest. You snap the shaft in half, knowing that pulling it out would only really cause you to bleed out faster. + + +Still, this isn't the first time you have been shot with an arrow. You sit down against the wagon next to Galik. He is not doing so well, having developed a fever, and his wound becoming red and filled with pus. + + +An orc bends as low as he can as he dashes over to you. Right before he can yell his message an arrow tears into his forehead. He looks up at it, almost going cross eyed. The orcs mouth moves but no sound comes out, and he collapses. + + +Looking around, your orcs seem dispirited. Many nursing wounds that will eventually be the death of them anyway. One tired looking orc crawls his way over to you. + + +"Nolazir," he says, "I was with you during our fight with the Wister Elves. I will remain with you until the bitter end." + + +"The bitter end is already here, my friend," you respond. + + +Galik wheezes and grabs your shoulder. + + +It's time," he says while bearing his sword. + + +"They've already got us beat," he says, "we mind as well go out on our feet." + + +You and the other orc help Galik up as he struggles to stand. He manages to get his own balance though. + + +"Friends, warriors," he says, "the end is here. I say we honor our fallen comrades, and go out on our feet as Gigalak intended it to be." + + +Galik's voice is raspy and weak. The remaining orcs all nod and prepare to charge. + + +"Forward!" Galik cries. + + +As you and your young friend storm forward, you do not hear the rest of the orcs going. + + +"What is the this?" Galik says, as you both see the other orc dead on the ground, an axe in his skull. + + +One of the orcs gestures to the dead orc with the arrow in his head. + + +"The Red Handed gave us an ultimatum while you were busy talking about how best to get us all killed," he says. + + +"What are you-" you say. + + +"Shut up," he says, "this fool was going to tell you." + + +"Tell us what?" you ask. + + +Maybe it was the fatigue, maybe it was the trust in your fellows. But under normal circumstances you should have seen this coming. + + +"It's better if we show you." + + +About a dozen orcs notch their bows, you reel back in surprise, inhaling deeply. + + +"I order you to-" Galik is cut off as several arrows hit him, he immediately drops. + + +You only get a moment to roar in rage as several more arrows pierce your chest. You stagger back, blood starting to ooze out of your body. + + +"Argh! I'll fucking kill you!" + + +Before you can muster anything else your old friends have restrung their bows. + + +"By Gigalak's blood I'll-" + + +Arrows whistle through the air and slam into your body, gritting your teeth and writhing in pain as the deadly projectiles tear through your flesh and organs. + + +You go down, yelling an unintelligible garble, as you fall into a rage filled heap. Twitching you lay there, all of your senses stopping as a haze slowly envelops your vision.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You've traveled far the past three months total, gaining the support from large and small tribes alike. It has been tough convincing some, but others are far more agreeable. From the reports you've heard, it's put much less pressure on your army, for now. + + +On the downside, Galik and Grolik have managed to engage the Mannate Empire in some larger skirmishes than you would have liked. Rolomag and the other more reliable orcs haven't been able to keep them in check as well as you had hoped. + + +As you ride on, one of the coastal villages comes into view. The sun bearing down upon you, in the distance you see a number of orcs. Some seem to be fishing with nets and spears, and some seem to be enjoying the sun. A few unsurprisingly wrestle in circles made of seashells. + + +Several wooden boats float lazily among the waves. One orc saunters over to you, his skin a much darker shade of green due to generations of living out here. Yours is a much lighter shade of green. The orc stops several feet away from you. + + +"Who are you?" + + +"Nolazir." + + +His eyebrows arch and his eyes widen a bit. A small grin spreads across his face. + + +"I have heard of you, fighting off the humans. Making your rounds to many of the villages and tribes. That is why you are here?" + + +"Yes." + + +The orc chuckles as he leads you toward the village. + + +"I don't think we'll be able to help you, friend," he says. + + +"All of us are at stake," you say. "We need all the people we can get." + + +"We're having our own issues. We can't save everyone else when we can't even save ourselves." + + +You grunt, scanning the area. Nothing seems to be happening. + + +"What's your name?" you ask. + + +"Silak," he says, "I just do the fishing around here. The chief is inside." + + +He gestures into a small wooden hut. You nod to him in thanks and step inside, the old wood steps creaking a bit. + + +Half of the hut is dark, the rest illuminated by the sunlight entering between the wooden beams above. Some tarp seems to be covering the rest of it. + + +You stop short as a figure steps out of the shadows, an orc with several wrinkles on his face. His raven dark hair contrasted by a multitude of grey hairs throughout. His face turns up into a weary smile. His dark green skin hiding him well, until he steps into the rays of light. + + +"Welcome, friend," he says. "I am Chief Hidius." + + +"I am Nolazir." + + +It is just then that you notice the severe burn marks covering Hidius' body. His face, from what you can see, is even a bit distorted. + + +"I know why you are here." + + +"Will you join me?" you ask. + + +"No." + + +"But-" + + +"Walk with me." + + +The chief puts his hand on your shoulder, slowly leading you outside. As you step into the sunlight, you realize Hidius injuries are more severe than you thought. It appears as though his nose has been smelted off of his face. You're surprised that his hair is still growing though, which should not be possible. + + +"How... is your hair still growing?" + + +"A rude question to ask of my deformities." + + +"I'm sorr-" + + +"No. It's alright, no one has asked in a long time, some around here know the story. Others think it's crazed nonsense." + + +Hidius waves a hand to change the subject. He stops and gestures to the village and the waters ahead. + + +"Gigalak gave us these lands and these waters so that we could live wild and free. The Mannate Empire wants to take that from us." + + +"So help us stop them." + + +"We can't… I can't," Hidius says. "I am dying and so is my village." + + +"What do you mean?" + + +"We've been cursed, you see, as made apparent by my condition." + + +"That's nonsense," you say. "Taking heavy burn wounds isn't going to damn the rest of the village. Besides, they look fine to me." + + +Hidius chuckles. + + +"It won't be today, or tomorrow, or even a decade from now, but we're all doomed. I've seen it." + + +Hidius closes his eyes and takes a deep breath. + + +"Whether or not we stop the Mannate Empire… something far worse is waiting to take us into a grip of fire." + + +"Stop this," you say, "and tell me what you mean." + + +"Nothing we really do this day matters anymore, I have seen it." + + +You take a deep breath and try to stop yourself from shaking the older orc in frustration. + + +"No matter what is going to happen, you can't just lay down and die." + + +You gently put a hand on his shoulder and turn him around to face you. + + +"We're orcs damn it, and we fight everything that gets in our way. Living, dead, hell, Empire, whatever it may be. We don't just lay down and die." + + +The chief smiles slowly. + + +"While that may be true of you and yours, I am old and tired of fighting. I've seen enough horrors to last one thousand lifetimes. Our time is useless." +> "Stop Moping" +"Listen, Hidius," you say. "You need to stop moping around and do something. The only thing that is going to doom you and your tribe to extinction is this attitude of yours." + + +Hidius' eyes widen in surprise at your words. + + +"Even though you've been through much, they all look up to you. You need to be their guiding hand, show them how to live a life by example, show them how to defend it too." + + +"I can't- there's no way we'll ever stop the oncoming darkness-" + + +"Enough of that talk, it's spreading to everyone here. The second thing that came out of Silak's mouth was this doom and gloom shit." + + +Hidius looks down for a moment. + + +"Perhaps my suffering has made me weak, when it should make me stronger." + + +"Yes, look. They all need you. We all need you," you say. + + +"Fine." Hidius clenches his fists. "I will gather my forces and take them to meet your army." + + +"Be quick. The Mannate Empire is becoming a faster and larger beast every day." + + +Hidius nods and calls over a group of orcs. You can't hear what he says but they all split up to gather more orcs, so you can only imagine that he is keeping his word. + + +As you ride off into the burning rays of the sun, you hope that your words actually got through to Hidius. + + +You ride on, to where you think the next tribe should be. Perhaps you will find somewhere to hide from the sun for a bit first…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Lifting your knee, you hop forward and act as though you are about to kick Gro'tesk's shin. He brings one hand down to push your leg away, and in this moment you slam your foot into the ground, lurching forward. + + +In the same movement, you reel your fist back and then bolt forward. Your knuckles hit him straight in the forehead, this is followed by another swift hit right under his eye. + + +Gro'tesk grunts and staggers back. With a mighty roar he charges you, slamming one punch into your chest. + + +"Oof!" + + +The blow knocks the wind out of you, throwing you to the ground. Chief Gro'tesk savagely lands a quick kick to your face. Reeling to the side you land face first in the dirt, the heavy pounding of his feet stopping as he lifts his foot again. +> Knock Out +Rolling to the side, his foot smashes into the ground inches away from your head. Pulling your foot back, you shout as you slam it into Gro'tesk's knee. As his knee pushes in, he cries out and falls forward, catching himself with his hands. + + +You push yourself up into a crouch as you run forward, reeling your fist back. But you lose your balance and skid forward. Fortunately, you use the momentum to plant your fist into the side of his head. He grunts as the full force of your attack hits him, his head snapping to the side and his body twisting. + + +He lays still, and you crawl backward, just in case…. + + +But he just lays on the ground. All of the onlookers gasp, never having seen their mighty chief get knocked out cold. You stand up and dust yourself off, and just right after the chief rolls over onto his back. + + +Rubbing his face and sitting up he looks at you, still dazed. + + +"I win.", + + +He stares at you blankly for a moment. + + +"Fine!" + + +With the help of a couple of onlookers, he stands up and stumbles his way over to his hut, rubbing his head as he tries to figure out how he could have lost. + + +You smirk and follow him in to give him your terms.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Fists raised, you step to the side, constantly circling your foe. Gro'tesk does likewise, a sadistic grin spread across his face. + + +With a huff you step forward, your fist twisting as the arm propels it forward. Gro'tesk's cheek ripples and his head turns as he moves with the punch. At the same time his fist flies, you manage to knock it away. + + +Ducking under, you slam your left fist into his ribs and come back up slamming into his jaw. + + +Gro'tesk staggers back, bewildered at your speed. Although you are quite a large orc, he is bigger than you. + + +He throws a backhand, which hits your defending arm. As he brings it back, he sends his other fist forward, which you manage to parry. But, in your rush, you accidentally lower your right arm a bit too far… + + +As it connects a quick flash of dark splits through your vision, but only for a brief moment. As you stagger back, a pain shoots through your jaw. Managing to duck another blow, you push your opponent back, a move he was not expecting. + + +As you try to regain your ground, you feel a fuzziness spreading throughout your head. Getting punched sucks. + + +As you step forward, you consider your next move… +> Swift Punch +Keeping your elbows tucked in, you send out several punches. The first three land well, hitting Gro'tesk's face. The next two don’t go so well. As your foe dodges the next, you lose form and go wide with your fifth punch, and he easily sees it coming. + + +He actually manages to catch your fist, twisting your arm to the side with one hand. As you bring your left arm up to defend your face, his large fist slips in under it. Your head kicks back as you feel the pain ripple through your mouth, the lip busting open. + + +Gro'tesk lets go of your arm as you stumble back, and he lands another fist into the side of your head. A throbbing pain emanates from the side of your head. + + +Your opponent grins as you stagger in a daze, he prepares the finishing blow… +> Catch his Wrist +Shuffling to the side a bit, you stare at your foe, your hands at your side. He snarls and lunges forward for the last strike. You lean back, then step to the side as you grab his wrist with your outermost hand. You pull it down with as much force as you can, and with your arm closest to him you run your elbow along his straightened arm for a moment. + + +Your elbow collides, hitting him right between the eyes. His face scrunches up, and, as you let go, you step right in front of him; reeling your fist back you snarl as you ram it into his nose. His head jerks back and his feet slip out from under him, landing with a heavy thud. + + +Panting, you step back and watch him as he lays still. + + +With a groan he shuffles, rubbing his face with his hands. + + +"What happened?" he asks. + + +"I won the fight." + + +"Aww, come on!" he complains. "I wanted to win!" + + +"No, I won fair and square." + + +"Fine!" Gro'tesk groans. + + +As he pulls himself up, he mumbles under his breath. He signals to you to follow him into his hut. The crowd stares in awe, as they have never seen anyone beat their leader down before.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Fists raised, you step to the side, constantly circling your foe. Gro'tesk does likewise, a sadistic grin spread across his face. + + +With a huff you step forward, your fist twisting as the arm propels it forward. Gro'tesk's cheek ripples and his head turns as he moves with the punch. At the same time his fist flies, you manage to knock it away. + + +Ducking under, you slam your left fist into his ribs and come back up slamming into his jaw. + + +Gro'tesk staggers back, bewildered at your speed. Although you are quite a large orc, he is bigger than you. + + +He throws a backhand, which hits your defending arm. As he brings it back, he sends his other fist forward, which you manage to parry. But, in your rush, you accidentally lower your right arm a bit too far… + + +As it connects a quick flash of dark splits through your vision, but only for a brief moment. As you stagger back, a pain shoots through your jaw. Managing to duck another blow, you push your opponent back, a move he was not expecting. + + +As you try to regain your ground, you feel a fuzziness spreading throughout your head. Getting punched sucks. + + +As you step forward, you consider your next move… +> Grapple +You shuffle forward, wrapping your fingers around his forearm. He grunts in surprise as you pull, while simultaneously planting a fist or two into his ribs. + + +Ducking under a swing, you grab his wrist with your other hand and slide the first up his arm and lock it around his elbow. With all your might, you yank is arm forward and pull down. Gro'tesk stumbles and falls, and, as you are about to twist his arm, you feel a savage kick land on the back of your knee. + + +Buckling and letting go of his arm, the foe pushes himself up. Hearing him coming up right behind, you throw an elbow back with a savage snarl. He catches it and wraps his hand around the back of your neck. + + +With a heavy grunt, he pushes you forward, using his control and momentum to keep you moving. You cry out as he tosses you over a water trough and into a wooden rack with animal skins hanging from it. + + +You only half-catch yourself, and, before you can fully turn, Gro'tesk is right there. With a sick grin, his boot flies into the water trough which slams into your stomach. The wind is taken out of you, and you even manage to get a grip on it. You cannot stop the force of the kick and the trough still goes down, pinning you to the ground from your waist. + + +The cold water spills out, pouring up over your belly and chest. You feel like something sucks up into your chest as the cold makes you gasp. + + +With an unnatural nimbleness, Gro'tesk hops over the fallen trough. He lifts his foot and brings it down. Luckily you manage to catch his foot in time. With both hands, you push as he does; both of your faces twisting with effort. +> Twist his leg +Crying out, you twist his ankle; Gro'tesk almost falls but catches himself on the skin rack. With one hand you pull his ankle forward. Your goes tries to stop himself from falling forward, his other leg straightening up. You shout out, sending your other fist into his straightened knee. + + +A sickening crack resounds as your opponent's face twists up in pain. He falls as he cries out, rolling into the skin rack as he nurses his injured knee. + + +Pushing the water trough off of you, now easier as it's empty, you hobble over to Gro'tesk. He looks at you, a fiery rage in his eyes. + + +"You ruined my leg!" he screams. + + +"That was called winning." + + +He roars, almost springing up and grabbing you, but his leg buckles and he falls. + + +"Hey, it was your knee of my skull." + + +"Fine! You win fair and square!" + + +You stand to the side as several orcs help him limp into his hut. The rest of the orcs from the village just stare at you in awe.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You shuffle forward, wrapping your fingers around his forearm. He grunts in surprise as you pull, while simultaneously planting a fist or two into his ribs. + + +Ducking under a swing, you grab his wrist with your other hand and slide the first up his arm and lock it around his elbow. With all your might, you yank is arm forward and pull down. Gro'tesk stumbles and falls, and, as you are about to twist his arm, you feel a savage kick land on the back of your knee. + + +Buckling and letting go of his arm, the foe pushes himself up. Hearing him coming up right behind, you throw an elbow back with a savage snarl. He catches it and wraps his hand around the back of your neck. + + +With a heavy grunt, he pushes you forward, using his control and momentum to keep you moving. You cry out as he tosses you over a water trough and into a wooden rack with animal skins hanging from it. + + +You only half-catch yourself, and, before you can fully turn, Gro'tesk is right there. With a sick grin, his boot flies into the water trough which slams into your stomach. The wind is taken out of you, and you even manage to get a grip on it. You cannot stop the force of the kick and the trough still goes down, pinning you to the ground from your waist. + + +The cold water spills out, pouring up over your belly and chest. You feel like something sucks up into your chest as the cold makes you gasp. + + +With an unnatural nimbleness, Gro'tesk hops over the fallen trough. He lifts his foot and brings it down. Luckily you manage to catch his foot in time. With both hands, you push as he does; both of your faces twisting with effort. +> Go for a cheap shot +Gritting your teeth as his foot gets closer and closer to your face, you're only left with one option. He tries to pull his leg away, but you hold on tight. Your wrap your hand over the top of his foot, pulling it so his heel skids across your chest. Your other hand shoots upward, Gro'tesk's face twists in pain as he stumbles back and falls. He rolls howling in pain, nursing his injured genitals. + + +With the water trough empty and no one trying to crush your skull, you have a much easier time pushing it off of you. + + +"No fair!" Gro'tesk cries, "that's cheating!" + + +"So is trying to stomp in my skull," you say, "but I did win." + + +"Fair is fair…and unfair is unfair!" Gro'tesk screams. + + +"Well, now you've learned that there are consequences to trying to stomp heads in." + + +Gro'tesk rolls to the side and pouts. + + +"Fine, you win," he says, "but I owe you a punch!" + + +Gro'tesk pulls himself up in a huff, and hobbles over to his hut. Most of the orcs stare at you in awe as you follow, others give you disapproving looks for your chosen victory route. + + +Although you don't really care either way, you've won.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>One Month Later… + + +The large wooden gates of the village creak open, the surrounding orcs casting suspicious glances your way. A few even have their hands on some weapons nearby, and you do not blame them. + + +Riding in through the mist which veils dawn's light, you appear almost as a specter of death. Lifting the hood, you give your brethren a weary nod. + + +A few of their eyes widen as they recognize you, some stand unsure of who you are, and some just shrug and go back to their business. + + +One orc approaches you. + + +"Who are you?" + + +"I am Nolazir, surrogate chief of the River Tribe in place of Chief Greusim." + + +The orc's eyes widen. + + +"It's been four years, and you have not found a replacement? Does he have any sons?" + + +You nod. + + +"One, but he is young and impatient. I will stand in until he has learned how to do his duty with patience and wisdom." + + +The orc scoffs at the unthinkable act of leaving a tribe largely chief less. + + +"What is it that you seek?" + + +"I want to speak with your chief," you say. + + +The orc shrugs and gives you directions to the chief's hut. That was a bit easier than you thought. + + +As you ride forward, the large hut comes into view. You are impressed to see that it actually has two stories to it. Most orcs chose to build one floor but with a wider house, although you are aware the council has at least three floors. + + +Pushing this useless information out of your mind, you hop off your horse. Your legs are stiff from the long ride, and you take a moment to stretch them. + + +Muffled yelling comes out from within the doors of the chief's hut. Splinters of wood fly as the door bursts open. A hapless orc youth falls out and tumbles down the stairs. + + +A large, broad orc steps out. His dark mane falling past his shoulders, two sharp teeth protrude from his bottom lip. His right eye looks like it is perpetually swollen halfway shut, a series of scars emanating from the side of his eye and going all the way to his ear. On his head rests a helmet with two bullhorns attached to it. + + +His tribal necklaces jingle as he bounds down the steps, his boot landing in the young orc's face. + + +"Fool, how could you be so incomprenent?" he says, not realizing he butchered the word. + + +The youth prepares to defend himself, but the chief is too fast. He twists the orcs arm and lands several fists into his ribs. As he continues to beat the orc, you wonder if he will kill him. + + +While you have the strong urge to step in, you also don't want to get into another tribe's affairs. They could easily kill you for interfering, although it wouldn't be the first time you have pissed off an orc chief. +> Stay out of it +The chief just continues to wail on the youngster, his nose battered and turned wrong. Blood oozes out of his nostrils and his left eye seems to be swollen shut. He tries to talk but it just comes out as garble. + + +"What!? I can't hear you," the chief screams, "you'll have to speak louder than that!" + + +The youth's mouth begins to move, and as he does so, the chief's hand lifts and curls into a fist. The larger orc raises an eyebrow, daring the smaller to try to speak again. Realizing he is being given a chance, the younger sighs and remains quiet. + + +"Coward!" the chief yells and drops the other orc onto the ground. + + +He just lays there, silently soaking in the pain inflicted upon him. The chief turns to you, satisfaction in his eyes. + + +"Who the hell are you?" he asks. + + +"My name is Nolazir, of the River Tribe…as some call it." + + +"Hah! Foolish name!" he says, "I am Chief Gro'tesk, and you are…..ah, Nolazir." + + +He grins. + + +"I've heard of you, fighting the humans….but you let your warriors argue with you," he says, "you have gone soft! You should pummel them into the ground whenever they so much as look at you the wrong way." + + +"Maybe I'm not so harsh to my own," you say, "but I don't give that same kindness to strangers." + + +Gro'tesk's eyes narrow, and he snarls. + + +"Are you threatening me?" he asks. + + +"No, I'm challenging you," you say, "if I win, you and your allies join me." + + +"If I win….you screw off!" Gro'tesk growls. + + +By now, a large group of orcs has gathered around. All of them cheering on Gro'tesk as he removes his tribal necklaces. They make a circle around you as you prepare to fight…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Imperials try to hold out, managing to down a few orcs, but, in the end, they are overwhelmed. You stand, stabbing an Imperial with one of their own spears repeatedly. His friend, clutching an injury, swipes his blade at you. You step back to dodge and ram the spear into his throat. Gurgling as he goes down he swings once more; his blade scratches your hand but not too deep. + + +Twisting and pulling the spear, you yank it from his corpse. You run forward, seeing the orcs beating down a group of Imperials. The last few men seem terrified, and one not older than seventeen trembles. If you could hear over the sound of the fighting, you would be able to hear his knees causing his hauberk to clink together. + + +Before you can reach them, the rest of the orcs have stabbed and battered them into oblivion. Some orcs ride into the forest to find the fleeing soldiers. + + +You pant, watching the massacre taking place all around. Wounded men cry out, and some lay there dying quietly. + + +An orc approaches you, the frenzy of blood-shed just starting to wear off. + + +"What shall we do with the wounded?" he asks. + + +You sit there and think for a moment. Orcs have never really taken prisoners, and you don't have the supplies to care for their wounded. You are worried about having enough medical supplies for your own as it is. + + +Although it might help to take some of them ransom, there is not too much that you would need, so maybe just leaving them to die would be better. +> Leave them +"Leave the wounded," you say. "Gigalak will decide their fate!" + + +Most of the orcs obey, although many still loot the corpses. Some of the more savage orcs cut the scalps from the still living and squirming men despite your order. + + +You walk through the dead and wounded, picking out the orcs who plead for your help. Some you know cannot be saved, and others can while being grievously wounded. With all the orcs gathered, you and many of the other orcs set to work helping them. + + +You have saved many lives this day, working over the sound of groaning Imperials dying in the mud just outside. + + +You see Grolik looking around, putting a spear tip to a wounded human. With a grunt he pushes, sending the dying man to his fate. It would seem as though that is not the first or the last he has killed in this manner. You catch his glimpse for a second, shame written across his face. + + +While he does not seem the type for emotions like that, putting helpless people out of their misery must take a certain toll on one. + + +On a rock sits Rolomag, nursing a gash on his face using a rag. He just watches some of the orcs finishing off the dying Imperials. Most of them do not seem happy about it, but maybe they believe it right not to prolong their suffering. + + +You turn your attention back to your work, ending the suffering of friends in a much different manner. The orc whose deadly injury you have just cleaned and sewn up thanks you as he hobbles away.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Imperials try to hold out, managing to down a few orcs, but, in the end, they are overwhelmed. You stand, stabbing an Imperial with one of their own spears repeatedly. His friend, clutching an injury, swipes his blade at you. You step back to dodge and ram the spear into his throat. Gurgling as he goes down he swings once more; his blade scratches your hand but not too deep. + + +Twisting and pulling the spear, you yank it from his corpse. You run forward, seeing the orcs beating down a group of Imperials. The last few men seem terrified, and one not older than seventeen trembles. If you could hear over the sound of the fighting, you would be able to hear his knees causing his hauberk to clink together. + + +Before you can reach them, the rest of the orcs have stabbed and battered them into oblivion. Some orcs ride into the forest to find the fleeing soldiers. + + +You pant, watching the massacre taking place all around. Wounded men cry out, and some lay there dying quietly. + + +An orc approaches you, the frenzy of blood-shed just starting to wear off. + + +"What shall we do with the wounded?" he asks. + + +You sit there and think for a moment. Orcs have never really taken prisoners, and you don't have the supplies to care for their wounded. You are worried about having enough medical supplies for your own as it is. + + +Although it might help to take some of them ransom, there is not too much that you would need, so maybe just leaving them to die would be better. +> Take them prisoner +"Take them as prisoners," you shout. "We will take them as ransom." + + +You divide your orcs, some of them gathering wounded orcs to aid them with their injuries. The rest gather up the wounded Imperials worth saving. Some are too wounded, so are either put out of their misery or left to die. + + +You grab a dying Imperial soldier, the young human sort of whimpers. He must believe you are going to kill him, but his eyes widen in surprise as you clamp his wound. You lift him up and carry him to some of the tents erected for the wounded. There are many more orcs in here than humans, as most are focusing on the orcs, who they find more worth saving. + + +The soldier winces and grunts as you pour alcohol into his wound. Alcohol and blood running from the gash in his side. He groans in pain as you sew his wounds, then when it seems he is set, you tie his hands and place him under the guard of some other orcs. + + +You go, helping orc and human alike. In the group, you are surprised to see Grolik eagerly helping a human. + + +Strangely, he seems compassionate towards the wounded fellow as he wholeheartedly stitches his wounds up. You are surprised to see this trait from an orc such as Grolik. After witnessing him brutally butcher and maim countless enemies, it comes as a bit of a shock that he is not looting or scalping the helpless foes. + + +While aiding enemy soldiers does not come naturally to you, surely Gigalak would smile upon saving lives as opposed to wanton destruction of life, something only the grimmest of souls would take satisfaction with. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The last few months find you and your army in the forests by the border. Reports had come of a legion of Imperials slowly making their way to the border. In the meantime, you have amassed assistance from a few more orc tribes. All the while, the Imperials wait, and your forces grow stronger and stronger. + + +You wait, while the rain pelts your face. Every orc is silent as the ground starts to become muddy at the intensity of the precipitation. + + +You signal the orcs to move forward, a slow trod through the mud. The Imperials are moving dozens of soldiers through, but if all goes to plan they'll never make it to the staging ground. By the time you reach them, you are hoping their supply wagons will be stuck in the mud, and their horses antsy at every trick and sound of the forests. + + +When the time is right, you will strike, and make them pay. If the Imperials seek to break their treaty, you will show them the consequences. You all have your padded leather gambesons over your chainmail, extra leather straps tied around to reduce some of the clinking the chain tends to make. + + +Riding forward, you catch Grolik's eye, who nods at you. Rolomag as well, who winks and pats his heart with his palm in a sign of respect. + + +Coming up to a ridge, you signal your forces to stop. Creeping low through the foliage, you see the Imperial columns. As suspected, their wagons seem to mostly be stuck in the mud. At your signal, your archers start their painstaking crawl over to the ridgeline. + + +The other third, slowly bring their horses onto both sides of the columns, preparing their charge. On the other side across from you, some of the lawless orcs should be preparing their attack on the Mannate soldiers. The cavalry orcs should still be fighting their way through by the time the archers are done, and when that happens they will slide down the slope. You don't want to run the risk of accidentally shooting your cavalry, so the archers will have to work fast, but by then the Imperials will be surrounded, and you should be able to crush them. + + +As the rain intensifies a bit, their horses get even antsier. As the lightning strikes, the soldiers look into the dark forests, fear apparent. When the thunder claps, their officers bark orders to hurry and move the wagons from the mud. +> Join the Cavalry +On your horse, you go around to join the cavalry. As you do so, you signal the archers, the lightning briefly illuminating your warriors. For a moment, the heavens are silent, the wind stops causing the trees to sway, and a single arrow soars through the air. + + +The Imperial officer lurches back, the arrow slicing through his shoulder. He falls off his horse with a thud, and the rest of the soldiers try to escape, but it is already too late. + + +You and your cavalry have them caught in a pincer movement. As you ride by, you lop an Imperial's head clean off his shoulders. Before long, some of the humans have mounted horses in a vain attempt to buy their fellows time to escape. + + +Galloping through the mud, you rush to meet one of these foes. Before you is a tired looking man, a wild look in his eyes as he gives a mighty battle cry. His sword clashes against yours, the rain splattering off the twin blades. You circle back to face him again, a slight burning sensation on your neck. To your left an Imperial soldier stands, fixing another arrow, the first arrow's head had just lightly grazed your neck. + + +Ducking, you spur your horse forward, turning back around to face the man who you had clashed with before. Three orcs are upon him, as one sends his club into the man's gut, the other two hack and slash him with swords. It takes some time before they pierce the mail he wears, but they are effective. + + +Charging towards the small group of archers, you throw your axe. The blade misses, instead the blunt side slamming into the man. He holds his face, blood dripping from his nose. A few arrows almost slam into you, but by the hand of Gigalak they are swept aside. You ram your horse through, trampling two men and cutting another's chest open. + + +As you circle back around, you grab a spear from a leather pouch at the side of your horse. Chucking it, the spear impales an Imperial. + + +By now your archers have joined the battle, and the Imperials are all but surrounded. As they group up, they seem to realize the futility of their fight, and some even manage to run into the forest to escape.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While some Imperials have been killed, they are quickly whittling down your numbers. To your left, you see the knight caught out of the line, trying to rally his soldiers. You watch as an orc chops at his head with an axe, but it bounces off his helmet. The knight rams his sword blade through the orc's armpit, pushing the dying orc off. + + +Another orc slashes, the blade harmlessly skidding across the helmet. Before the orc is cut down, he slams the flat of the axe on the soldier's helm, slightly denting it. + + +You look to the Imperial with the protruding spear from his silver coat, and the knights dented helmet. You get an idea… +> Impale the Knight +You pull one of your spears slung onto your back. With a roar, you charge the knight, he looks in surprise, taking a swing at you. You knock the sword to the side and ram the spear into his stomach. The silver coat snaps and crunches, and, as the knight falls, you push the spear further into him. You watch as crimson red oozes out from inside the coat as you twist and push the spear. The imperial sputters and coughs from under his helm as he feebly reaches for his sword before going limp. Ripping the spear out, you see the tip is mostly ruined. If you hadn't kept pushing the dead man before, you would only have had a minor flesh wound.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you get closer to him, you arc your sword over your head, aiming for his neck. The Imperial soldier slams it away with the flat of his blade and, mid-push, brings his blade back down. The sword cuts through your thick leather armor, biting into your shoulder. + + +You wince and grunt as he pulls his sword, the both of you passing each other and turning in preparation to charge again. Behind him, you see that the orcs seem to have pushed the Imperial horsemen back a bit, and the orcs on the hill have wounded several archers in each column. + + +The battle is going well enough for the orcs. + + +As you charge the Imperial knight again, you consider your next move. +> Throw your axe at the horse +The horses gallop forward, the knight's elbow tenses and he leans forward on the horse. He seems intent on running your through. As you ride forward you let him think this will be a jousting match…. + + +Like a bolt of lightning, you draw the axe at your side, throwing it at the Imperials horse. The axe embeds itself in its forehead, and it lets out a pained neigh. You dip to the side as it lurches forward, the knight being launched off with a cry of dismay. + + +As he lands a sickening crunch sounds out. The knight groans and tries to pull himself up, but his arm is twisted and bent horribly. He buckles and falls onto the ground, a defeated sigh escaping his lips. + + +"Come on, knave," the knight says, not moving, "what are you waiting for you brute?" + + +Before you can ride forth to finish him, a loud cry emanates from the forest behind you. +> For the Emperor! +You turn your horse. From out of the trees, an enormous group of humans comes rushing out, screaming and yelling. You notice they are quite different from the knights. While some of them have the silver coats, most of them just have some kind of padding and the Imperial soldier robes. Their boots, gloves, and helmets don’t look anywhere near as nice as the knights'. + + +These must be the lowly soldiers of the Empire, but there sure are a lot of them. You turn again as you see the lawless orcs bring up a cry, charging towards the humans. You watch as your comrades also charge the humans, so you decide you should as well. + + +Galloping forward, you prepare your axe. A battle of strength versus numbers, you decide that Gigalak will decide the winner today. + + +You trample a couple of humans, their cries ringing out. The axe bites into another, and as he dies his sword nicks your arm. You slash, hack, batter, and even punch one. A dying soldier cries out, digging his dagger into your side. You gasp and slam your axe handle into his eye, a squishing sound resounds as blood squirts out and onto your leg. He lets out a blood curdling scream as he flails, soon going limp and falling to the ground. + + +With the dagger still in your side, you circle back, needing to fight through a few more soldiers to do so. Panting, you see that the battle is being lost for the orcs. But some still fight on, despite their injuries and overwhelming odds. + + +Chief Greusim charges into the middle of it, laying waste to soldier after soldier. His mighty club denting helmets and cracking skulls, breaking arms and busting jaws. + + +You watch as he cries out, someone plunging their sword into his side. Gasping, you ride forward to save him. But there are too many soldiers to fight through, and before you can reach him the grunts pull Greusim from his horse, stabbing, slashing, punching, and beating. You see his own club being raised to be used against him. + + +All the other orcs in your tribe watch as the chief goes down, along with the other orcs he had around him. + + +There's just too many, you'll never fight through them all. + + +"Fall back! Fall back!" some orc cries out. + + +As you all do so, the lawless orcs seem shocked as to why. Before they can get away, the Imperial troops have swept them up and begin to butcher most of them. Few escape, and you even swing one onto your horse as you ride away. + + +You all ride into the forest, lucky to have escaped death on this day. The same cannot be said for many others. + + +You exchange glances with Rolomag, who nods and pokes his chin to the valley. Although you don't like the idea, you all will have to go there to recover and make plans…. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you get closer to him, you arc your sword over your head, aiming for his neck. The Imperial soldier slams it away with the flat of his blade and, mid-push, brings his blade back down. The sword cuts through your thick leather armor, biting into your shoulder. + + +You wince and grunt as he pulls his sword, the both of you passing each other and turning in preparation to charge again. Behind him, you see that the orcs seem to have pushed the Imperial horsemen back a bit, and the orcs on the hill have wounded several archers in each column. + + +The battle is going well enough for the orcs. + + +As you charge the Imperial knight again, you consider your next move. +> Throw your axe at the knight +As you both ride forward, the knight tenses up, preparing to run you through. Pulling the axe from its loop, you whip it forward. The axe whirls landing in his shoulder, almost making him fall off his horse. Despite this injury he manages to hang onto his horse, pulling the axe from his shoulder. + + +Yet there isn't the familiar sight of blood oozing from the wound, just a ripped robe and silver gleaming in the sunlight. + + +"You'll have to do better than that, brute," the knight says while twirling the axe. + + +Glaring at him, you accept his challenge, you spur your horse onward. + + +The knight does the same, holding both sword and axe in hand. As he rides forward, you get an idea. +> Stab his neck under his helmet +You lean in as you ride forward, intent on pushing the tip of your sword under his helmet, which should pierce his throat. + + +As the knight gets closer, you lunge, pushing the blade forward. He slams his sword into yours, simultaneously pushing it forward and sliding the axe blade along it. + + +Before you even realize what is happening, the sword blade is biting through your neck. The axe follows tearing through your flesh, muscle, and severing your neck bone. You barely feel a thing as your head rolls to the floor, your vision darkening as the knight rides on, and your body falls to join you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you both ride forward, the knight tenses up, preparing to run you through. Pulling the axe from its loop, you whip it forward. The axe whirls landing in his shoulder, almost making him fall off his horse. Despite this injury he manages to hang onto his horse, pulling the axe from his shoulder. + + +Yet there isn't the familiar sight of blood oozing from the wound, just a ripped robe and silver gleaming in the sunlight. + + +"You'll have to do better than that, brute," the knight says while twirling the axe. + + +Glaring at him, you accept his challenge, you spur your horse onward. + + +The knight does the same, holding both sword and axe in hand. As he rides forward, you get an idea. +> Use bow +Not wanting to get close to this knight, you decide to this would have to do. Sheathing your sword, you sling your bow from your back, notching an arrow just as fast. + + +"Huh?" the knight says in surprise. + + +You release the arrow, and with a twang it soars through the air. The knight barely has time to react before the arrow lands in between his helmet and silver coat. It protrudes from his neck as dark blood spills out, a gurgling sound coming from his throat. + + +The knight struggles to stay up on the horse, falling onto the ground below. You manage to recover your axe before you hear a loud cry coming out from the forest behind you. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With the strange campsite far behind you, the group seems to be more at ease. The forest is much more serene and offers some peace and quiet. + + +A stream trickles by, as your horse steps over it, you hear some sounds up ahead. + + +Greusim looks over his shoulder at the group behind him, and you nod at him. + + +You, Greusim, Rolomag, Dekard, and some other orcs all leave your horses to go scout ahead. The main group waits for your return. + + +The unmistakable sounds of violence penetrate your ears. Peering from the foliage, you see two things. The first must be Imperial soldiers, with their flat top helms and robes over what appears to be some kind of silver coat. + + +Cowards. The orcs only use some padding from their leather armor and sometimes studs. Anything more would just weigh a warrior down and keep him from being effective. + + +From what you can see, they have two separate lines of archers by the trees, and in the clearing between them are soldiers on horseback. Ahead, on a rocky hill, a group of orcs seems to be holding their ground, trading arrows with the Imperial archers. Once in a while, an orc taking a shot at one of the horsemen, but always missing. + + +In between two groups lays a slain Imperial, a spear in his back, and a dead orc with the spear still gripped in his hands. The orc has several arrows protruding from his back. Judging by his face paint, it looks like these orcs are one of the lawless bands of orcs. + + +"We need to help them," Rolomag says as he starts forward. + + +You grab him by the shoulder, pulling him back. + + +"Stop. We don't know who started it," you say. "This isn't a proper orc tribe. They're just some vagabonds." + + +"Does it matter? They're still orcs," Rolomag says. + + +"No, Nolazir may be right," Greusim says. "We should let the Imperials know they aren't working on behalf of all of orcin." + + +"Are you really going to listen to this?" Rolomag asks. "Nolazir, the Empire won't care either way. They will blame all of us." + + +"No, we can make peace with them," Greusim says. + + +Greusim looks at you. + + +"You believe me, don't you, Nolazir?" + + +Chief Greusim looks genuinely concerned about whether or not you believe him or not. You look to Rolomag, he raises an eyebrow, not lifting the scowl on his face for a moment. +> Help the Orcs +You look to Greusim. + + +"Sorry chief," you say, "Rolomag is right. We need to work with the orcs, besides, the Imperials encroached on our lands." + + +You draw your sword. + + +"And there must be consequences." + + +You tell Dekard to get the rest of the orcs, in the meantime you wait. + + +"Nolazir," Greusim says, "I'm disappointed in you. We're in no position, and we will never be in a position to fight the Empire." + + +"It's for the good of Orcin," you say, "we'll teach them a lesson." + + +The rest of the orcs arrive, and you look out towards them. + + +"Please chief," you say, "help us defend our home." + + +He looks at the ground for a moment, but returns to answer you. + + +"If you all think it is best, I will help you." + + +Making sure to stay in cover, you wonder what the best course of action would be. +> Attack the Horsemen + Feeling bold, you suggest to go straight for the horsemen first, then fan out to the sides and wipe out the archers. Some of the orcs have reservations about this plan, as it would place you right into the center of the archers. + + +But by Grikalia, you won't let some sharp objects scare you. + + +"We go in fast, and we go in deadly," you say raising your sword. + + +Most orcs nod, and some reluctantly agree, including Greusim. You all get on your horses, waiting for the right moment, although there really isn't one. + + +On Greusim's command you all charge forward, readying your weapons to meet these humans. The archers fire at your group, an arrow whirling right by your head. The cries and thudding of fallen comrades sounds out as the arrows kill several of your comrades. + + +A low gasp, an arrow sticks out of chief Greusim's chest. His face scrunches up in pain, but he ignores it and rides on, letting out a war cry of rage and pain. + + +One of the horsemen comes circling back from near the hill. Seeing you all on the attack, he draws his sword, arcing it over his head as he rides towards you. + + +You decide to accept his challenge, arrows whirling around you and the sound of fighting in your ears. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look to Greusim. + + +"Sorry chief," you say, "Rolomag is right. We need to work with the orcs, besides, the Imperials encroached on our lands." + + +You draw your sword. + + +"And there must be consequences." + + +You tell Dekard to get the rest of the orcs, in the meantime you wait. + + +"Nolazir," Greusim says, "I'm disappointed in you. We're in no position, and we will never be in a position to fight the Empire." + + +"It's for the good of Orcin," you say, "we'll teach them a lesson." + + +The rest of the orcs arrive, and you look out towards them. + + +"Please chief," you say, "help us defend our home." + + +He looks at the ground for a moment, but returns to answer you. + + +"If you all think it is best, I will help you." + + +Making sure to stay in cover, you wonder what the best course of action would be. +> Wipe out the Archers +Scanning the area, you decide it would be best to take out the archers first. Your plan is to split the groups into two, each taking out a column of archers, and then catching the knights in a pincer attack. + + +You and the chief lead one group to the closest archers, and Dekard and another orc lead the others. They take their group a longer way as their targets are further away. Although you figure your distraction will let them take the other column even easier. + + +You slowly pass through the trees, the sounds of fighting slowly dying down until you creep up behind the archers. The orcs prepare their weapons, waiting for the signal. + + +As you are about to charge, an Imperial archer steps out from behind a tree, adjusting his belt and sighing contentedly. Although his hood is up and his mask is pulled up over most of his face, you see the surprise in his eyes when he sees you all. + + +"Attack!" he cries, and at this point you all gallop forward. + + +The archers scramble to get ready, and Greusim make a passing swing for the Imperial. He ducks under, and in the same movement grabs onto Greusim and his horse, pulling himself onto it. + + +As you ride forward, and Greusim tries to throw the archer off, the Imperial draws a small dagger. The chief cries out in agony as the Imperial buries the blade into his back. The chief falls, taking the Imperial with him. + + +The other orcs are coming up on the archer column, several having been killed by arrows. Greusim groans and the archer attempts to stab him, but he catches his wrist, and the push and struggle. Normally Greusim could easily overpower him, but getting thrown off the horse must have done a number on him. +> Continue the Charge +Greusim seems to be doing well enough, so you decide to charge forward. The orcs have broken through the middle of the column, leaving crushed and mangled corpses strewn about. You break into the utter chaos, cleaving half of an Imperial's face off. + + +To the left a group of archers tries to form, and you attempt to go straight through them! + + +You duck low onto your horse, and as you approach them, you feel a stinging in your side. You ignore it as your horse slams into some archers, screaming sounding out. You lop another's arm off as you ride by, circling around and preparing to finish the group off. + + +One of the archers, helping a wounded friend, drops him and notches an arrow. As you ride forward he lets it loose, and you grunt as the arrow buries itself into your thigh. In anger you don't even bother using your axe, you just trample him and his friend with the horse. + + +Looking out, you see that the orcs have decimated most of the archers. The other column seems to be in chaos. + + +Out towards the clearing, you see the lawless orcs have charged the Imperial knights, overwhelming them with sheer numbers. They hack and beat the knights to pieces. + + +A hot pain shoots up through your body, and looking down, you realize you have an arrow buried into your side. Groaning, you steer the horse over to the other orcs as they finish off the archers. + + +From out of the trees, Greusim stumbles out, panting and covered in wounds. He has multiple gash marks and three arrows dug into his back, side, and hip. Looking behind him, you see multiple archers laying broken and bloody on the ground. + + +The chief hefts his club over his shoulder. + + +"It'll take some more than some tender-bellies to take me down," he says. + + +The chief grunts as he pulls himself onto his horse. As you ride to meet with the rest of the orcs, you break most of the shafts from the arrows on your body. You leave a portion in so as not to make the injuries worse, and so that you can get them out later. + + +Your comrades seem to have wiped out the other column, and the lawless orcs you helped start to walk towards you. + + +Before you can do anything else, a cry rises up from the forest behind you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Scanning the area, you decide it would be best to take out the archers first. Your plan is to split the groups into two, each taking out a column of archers, and then catching the knights in a pincer attack. + + +You and the chief lead one group to the closest archers, and Dekard and another orc lead the others. They take their group a longer way as their targets are further away. Although you figure your distraction will let them take the other column even easier. + + +You slowly pass through the trees, the sounds of fighting slowly dying down until you creep up behind the archers. The orcs prepare their weapons, waiting for the signal. + + +As you are about to charge, an Imperial archer steps out from behind a tree, adjusting his belt and sighing contentedly. Although his hood is up and his mask is pulled up over most of his face, you see the surprise in his eyes when he sees you all. + + +"Attack!" he cries, and at this point you all gallop forward. + + +The archers scramble to get ready, and Greusim make a passing swing for the Imperial. He ducks under, and in the same movement grabs onto Greusim and his horse, pulling himself onto it. + + +As you ride forward, and Greusim tries to throw the archer off, the Imperial draws a small dagger. The chief cries out in agony as the Imperial buries the blade into his back. The chief falls, taking the Imperial with him. + + +The other orcs are coming up on the archer column, several having been killed by arrows. Greusim groans and the archer attempts to stab him, but he catches his wrist, and the push and struggle. Normally Greusim could easily overpower him, but getting thrown off the horse must have done a number on him. +> Help Greusim +You whip the axe, the blade burying into the archer's shoulder blade. He screams in pain as he stumbles to the side, almost tripping over Greusim. He tries to pull the axe out, but Greusim gets a hand on it first. + + +Still on the ground, he wrenches the axe out, swinging it back around and slamming it into the Imperial's stomach. He doubles over as the chief rips the axe out, and the Imperial falls to his knees clutching the wound. With a savage cry, Greusim arcs the weapon back around, burying it into the Imperials neck. He falls twitching and gurgling as his blood seeps out into the earth. + + +Panting, Greusim pulls the axe out, tossing it to you. + + +"Thanks," he says, and you nod at him. + + +The other orcs seem to be wrecking the column pretty well, even though several orcs have been shot down by the deadly volleys. + + +"Well, let's get to i-" Greusim says, almost stumbling as an arrow rips into his back. + + +You ride over, looping around the tree and lopping off an archers arm. + + +Several more materialize from the trees, firing at you. Ducking you circle back around, hopping off your horse. Sliding behind a tree, you and Greusim ready your bows. + + +Stepping out, you don't realize the archers were trying to creep up on you. You slam your notched bow into his, causing his arrow to hit the dirt, before bringing yours back and shooting him in the throat. He gurgles as he staggers to the ground. + + +Before you know it, the archers are charging you. A couple arrows flying by you as you draw your axe. To your right, Greusim cracks a couple of skulls with his club. You deflect a sword, chopping into an Imperial's shoulder. + + +One jumps onto you, grabbing you and trying to restrain you. His friend tries to run you through with his sword, but you step to the side. The soldier's sword plunges into the tree, and as you raise your sword he desperately tries to yank it out. He screams as you spill his blood onto the grass, specks hitting the tree. + + +The archer on your back grips your forearm, trying to turn your sword into you. You chuckle and jab the sword back, the tip stabbing him in the face. He cries out and you throw him over your shoulder, stomping on his neck to silence him. + + +You look up, ready to take the next one, but you see them laying crushed and bleeding around Greusim. He pants as he kneels, deep cuts and gouges all over him. Three arrows protrude from his back, side, and hip. The archers must have thought the other two were going to kill you, and decided to all focus on him. + + +"Chief!" you cry out. + + +He stands up, waving you off. + + +"I'm fine, I'm fine," he says, "let's go find the rest, Nolazir." + + +You nod and go with him to find the rest, mounting your horses. As you ride out you see that both columns of archers have been destroyed. The lawless orcs on the hill must have swept down and fought the knights, as evidenced by the butchered corpses on the ground. + + +Greusim climbs onto his horse as you ride forward. Before you can do anything else, a loud cry rises up from the forest behind you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>All the orcs stand around a giant tree in the village center, waiting for your chief, Greusim, to speak. He stands on a flat rock, looking over everyone. + + +Greusim has the raven black hair that all the orcs have, the sides shaved into a mohawk, with the back end running down to his upper back. White hairs scattered throughout his majestic hair. His face aged and wrinkled, giving him the appearance of a grumpy bulldog, and two sharp teeth protrude up from his under bite, a common trait among orcs. + + +For a moment you and he look at each other, his left eye always perpetually half closed, making him look vexed. Although the chief is one of the calmest orcs you have ever met. + + +"Everyone," he starts, "it has come to my attention that the Imperials are amassing warriors by the borders between our lands." + + +He spreads his arms out. + + +"These very lands that have been our home since Gigalak gave it to the First Born." He pauses for a moment. "We need to make sure these lands are protected, for the well being of all orcs, ourselves, and future generations. " + + +Some of the orcs start calling out for blood, to which Greusim shakes his head. + + +"No, we must watch what the Empire does, we cannot go out looking for a fight. Not this time, we must try to avoid conflict. Now, I will personally lead an expedition team to the border, and we will see what the Imperials are doing. There will likely be other tribes of orcs doing likewise, but if they fight the Empire, we will not interfere." + + +"What happened to all that shit about sticking together?!" an orc cries angrily. + + +"We will only fight if they attack us first, we will not be the ones to start a war with the Empire. It would be deadly, and very long if we did so." + + +You all talk amongst each other. According to chief Greusim, this could be a very precarious situation. You call out. + + +"What if they are protecting their borders from orcs raiding Imperial lands?" you ask. "You know what some of the tribes are like." + + +If you could even call them that, some groups of orcs aren't even proper tribes. Just bands of raiders, thieves, and scum. + + +"If that is the case," the chief says, "we will let them know they do not act on behalf of all of Orcin. Maybe, we would even help the Empire fight them on behalf of the rest of the tribes." + + +There is arguing amongst the orcs. The orcs have banded together to fight external threats, but never with a foreign power to fight other orcs. The affairs of orcs have always been kept to the tribes of orcin. + + +Helping the Empire fight fellow orcs, no matter if they are scum, would be crazy. + + +"So, my friends," Greusim says, "who will aid me on this quest." + + +Many hands go up, the chief peering through the crowd to see who would be best. + + +You wonder if you should raise your hand, the expedition might call for experience and expertise, which you would have. On the other hand, you also don't really want to leave your family for an extended period of time. While Gilikia is strong and hard-working, two kids, an infant, and a multitude of chores would be difficult for her to handle by herself. Also, there is the fact that someone may need to run the village in Greusim's absence, which is also something you would be willing to do. +> Don't Go +You have weighed out all of the options, and you decide that you are going to stay here at the village. Let the currently more adventurous orcs handle this sort of thing. Greusim looks somewhat disappointed that you did not volunteer to go along, but no chief can force an orc to take a part in these matters if they do not wish to. + + +Chief Greusim beckons you to him, while all the other orcs are getting prepared for the trip, or complaining they weren't selected. + + +"Nolazir, my friend," Greusim says, "I need your help." + + +"I'm sorry Greusim, I can't go-" + + +"No, not that," he says. "I need you to keep an eye of the village while I am gone. Oversee things and make sure that it all holds together." + + +"Well what exactly do I have to do?" you ask. + + +"Hmm, govern the daily matters of the village, for one. Most orcs are responsible for their own crops and supplies, but sometimes Gigalak has other plans. If they need help, then you help them. If there are any squabbles, you end those as soon as you can. Also, as I'm sure you know, make sure the village is kept safe…" + + + + +Greusim gets into the specifics of running the village day to day, and while some of it sounds kind of boring, you realize those are the things that must be done to keep the village together. + + +"Gigalak didn't give us these fields, forests, and mountains as our home, just to lose it to laziness and ignorance. Remain vigilant and you will be fine," Greusim nods and pats your shoulder, "but I trust you Nolazir, you'll do a fine job in my stead." + + +You bid each other farewell. Greusim and the rest of the groups ride off towards the mountains, and before leaving the village Rolomag looks back from his horse and nods at you, which you return. + + +The village stands behind you, more or less going on as it always has, even if it is a little emptier. +> Branch 1B: Home +You enter the large hut that could be considered the villages town hall. There really isn't much to it, mostly a chair and desk near a fire place. The rest of the space just has piles of extra crates, hide bags, and random farming tools. As there isn't much use for an orc at a desk, you decide to saddle up and make your rounds through the village. + + +After some time, you realize there isn't much going on except for the village seeming a bit emptier. It isn't as empty as it was when you returned from fighting the Wister Elves, but you shake off this feeling before you go into your old habit of thinking about those days too much. + + +It is not too long after that several orcs come to seek out your guidance and leadership. While you have always been able to lead others when it counted, it was never really in a domestic capacity. + + +You stand outside of the chief's hut, feeling it unnecessary to sit at the desk. One by one the orcs come through, asking for advice on various issues regarding farming, smithing, and others. A few even come to you for help in settling disputes among each other. + + +After the next few hours, you feel pretty great that you got to help, and that none of the disputes ended in bloodshed, which is quite common in Orcin. While you are the acting chief, you are confident that no fools are going to try to challenge your leadership. This would be foolish as Greusim would return to take his rightful place soon anyway. You have rarely heard of orc cheifs being assassinated, as outright murdering an orc chief does not count, and would only end in execution. + + +An aspiring orc would have to challenge him, and at the appointed time they would fight where the whole village could watch. The fight would go until one yielded, or to the death. From what you remember from when you were much younger, that is how Greusim came to be chief. Although the chief before him was a terrible and cruel leader. Since then, you had only seen a few orcs challenge Greusim; those all ended in a grisly demise for the challengers, and saying as most are happy with his leadership, there has been no need to attempt to remove him. + + +As you prepare to return home for the day, you see one of Greusim's sons, Galik, briskly approaching. Judging by his demeanor, you know he is upset about something. At first, you assume it is about Greusim refusing to bring him on the expedition. Although Galik is of age to participate in these matters, he is way too hot headed, even for a normal orc of youth. + + +"I'm here to take my rightful place as chieftain," Galik says. + + +You take a moment to stop yourself from laughing. + + +"Galik, my friend," you start, "do you realize this is temporary?" + + +"Yes, but as I am his son," he says. "Why shouldn't I be in charge? I have seen him work enough to know what to do." + + +"I know you would be very skilled in leading the tribe," you say, "but he left me in charge and I will obey his wishes." + + +"Who are you to take this power from us?" he asks. "When we earned-" + + +"No, Greusim earned it," you say. "You should know that status does not follow family lines. Each lives according to his own merit." + + +You cross your arms and lean against the hut. + + +"Besides, in a few years when your father is good and ready to retire," you say. "I'm sure you'll be well prepared to lead us further into prosperity. Do you think I want this title?" + + +Galik stops and thinks for a minute. + + +"Galik, as I said, this is only temporary," you say. "I would not want to do this for all the years Greusim has, I have my own place in the tribe. While he can't pass down leadership to you, he can prepare you to earn the role when it is your time. You'll do a fine job, boy." + + +Galik seems calmed down at your words, and he nods. + + +"I'm sorry Nolazir, my friend," he says. "Sometimes I get caught up in these things too much. I especially want to preserve all the hard work my father has put into this village." + + +"And you shall, someday." + + +Galik apologizes again before going off to take care of other matters. You sigh and look around the village, the dying light casting a cold shade upon your home. + + +You get to your horse and ride back down the trail leading to your house. +> Later... +The next morning yields several orcs showing up to your house. While at first, you thought their intentions were bad, as soon as they saw you they started complaining about issues. You notice these orcs are the young and impatient sort, who haven't learned that showing up at a chief's house first thing in the morning is frowned upon. + + +Sternly, you tell them to wait until you go down to the hut to start village business. The orcs all grumble and shuffle off, presumably to cause some mischief. + + +You shake your head. + + +"No damn patience." + + +You take care of your regular work, making sure your wife only really needs to worry about the inside of the house and the children. + + +After saying your goodbyes to your family, you walk down to the village center. Breathing in the fresh morning air, happiness swells inside of you, but soon after you can't help but get a sick feeling in your stomach. It is almost as if something has reached its hand into your gut and is content with squeezing your organs within. Ignoring this feeling, you go back to thinking about the day. + + +All around the village orcs hustle and bustle, going about their daily work and chores. You see the village blacksmith working hard, mostly making farming equipment for some of the residents. You have dabbled in some smithing yourself, but as most orc weapons are relatively simple to make, the task is usually up to a handful of orcs. These days all their work mostly goes to farming equipment, tools, and other metal components for barrels, wagons, and other miscellaneous things. + + +You watch as a dozen orcs prepare their canoes for some river fishing. While most orcs can be self-sufficient, most like fish, and it makes good for trading for the villages who cannot get fish so easily. + + +Ahead, a wagon slowly rolls into the village, pulled by horses and with several orcs sitting on it. You recognize them as being from one of the mountain coastal tribes. They have come a long way to trade with many tribes. As they trade rocks and materials only found by the sea, including some pearls, they regale the younger orcs with tales of adventures on the sea. Most likely exaggerating accounts of encounters and battles with large sea monsters. + + +Eventually, they roll through the village, their exchanges being over with. You notice they even recruit a few young and adventurous orcs to join them on their sea adventures. While you can't stop them, you wish they would stay and help the village. Most are still concerned about the reports on the Mannate Empire. + + +The orcs that leave with them will probably return someday, they always do. Turning your attention to other matters, several of the orcs need your assistance and advice on village matters. You lead them past a group of young teenage orcs fighting and wrestling, as they tend to do. +> Two Hours Later +After a couple hours of dealing with the villagers' problems, one orc named Ruzmar rushes in, panting and sweating profusely. + + +"Nolazir," he says, "I was out hunting for deer by the rivers Southwest of the village. We saw a group of goblins heading through the hills." + + +"Goblins live in the area, so what's it to us?" you ask. + + +"We were only a few miles from the river," Ruzmar says. "They have always been rivals with the lawless tribes down in the plains in that area. The thing is, they've never been this far up." + + +"Hmm," you cross your hands under your chin, "perhaps they've been driven up here by the tribeless bands." + + +"Also," he says, "they are pretty heavily armed. Not the usual stone and wood weapons either, metal and iron. I think they're learning how to make better stuff, or stealing it from the lawless, who have probably stolen it from others." + + +"Show me." +> Onward +With this alarming revelation, you round up two dozen orcs to go with you and Ruzmar. As you climb onto the saddle, Galik approaches, ready to go. + + +You open your mouth to tell him to stay, but stop as you realize he will need to learn how these things are handled. + + +Later, after as the evening sun lowers over the land, you move through the hills. Keeping a vigilant watch, Ruzmar tells you that you have almost reached where he last saw the Goblins. + + +Over the next hill, a large camp extends over the little peaks and valleys in between. Multiple campfires are alight, and you see the short goblins scampering about, doing random chores or just keeping an eye out. + + +Peering closer, you see that several seem to notice your group. Before long a group of over thirty goblins cautiously make their way over, stopping at the end of what they believe is throwing distance. One particularly larger and uglier goblin walks forward. His face and body are covered in tribal tattoos, and he wears bone necklaces and an amulet which must be a symbol of status. + + +"I am Gru'zikular," he says, "Chieftain of the proud tribe of Gerobler." + + +"I am Nolazir, humble servant of Chief Greusim, the leader of our tribe." + + +"Has your tribe no name?" + + +"Sometimes we are called the River tribe, but Gigalak has never had need to distinguish us. Only the lawless concern themselves with petty names." + + +Gru'zikular nods, both hands resting on his staff, which you assume is where he draws his shamanic power. The orcs and goblins are similar in that respect, they call upon the powers of the Earth for assistance, while the elves use their strange magic. + + +"That is what we have come to speak about," Gru'zikular says. "These….lawless orcs raid and pillage, steal and burn. We have tried to make peace, we have tried to fight them. Nothing has worked, so we come to you with a treaty." + + +"I see your plight, the lawless have been trouble," you say, "but they've kept the humans, dwarves, ogres, and even yourselves from treading too far in our lands. I would say, you goblins and the ogres have probably helped keep the dwarves out as well." + + +"So then why are we treated as such vermin and animals?" Gru'zikular asks, "we no longer have lands to call our own, since the dwarves threw us from the mountains and caves, and before that, we walked these very lands you now call yours. Since our removal we have roamed the land, living much as bandits and raiders in order to survive." + + +Gru'zikular seems to get a little angry, although he attempts to hide it. + + +"We seem to have common interests," he says, "so we need your help. Either tell the lawless to leave us alone or else help us fight them. In exchange for their souls, and the land they live, we would be glad to put our skills to use for the lawful tribes of orcs." + + +They offer an interesting argument, and although both goblins and the lawless orcs have each been helpful in their own way, they each also pose their own problems. + + +"I will bring your request to Chief Greusim upon his return," you say. "Until then, you will have our protection." + + +Gru'zikular raises his eyebrow. It is here that you explain you will leave some orcs to watch over the camp, as the lawless would not dare to kill an orc from a proper tribe. This would bring upon them the wrath of the council and neighboring orc tribes. The goblin chief expresses his appreciation. + + +You leave half of the orcs in your company with the goblins. Although there is much complaining, they still comply. +> Return to the Village +As you ride back, Galik ceaselessly argues over your decision. At which point you tell him to shut up, and that Greusim will have the final say. Even though he still seems pissed, it gets him off of your back for now. + + +It is late when you return to the village, and you decide not to worry about any of these issues for the night. They can easily be handled tomorrow. + + +The next morning seems to come quicker than you had expected. Yawning as you stretch, you go to quiet your infant child, Lagrik. + + +After some time, when the child has fallen asleep, you go outside. Almost immediately, you see three orcs riding up to your house on horseback. You are almost about to shout at them when you realize these aren't the young and impatient orcs from the other day. + + +You see three faces before you. The first being Rolomag, his face drawn and tired looking. His normally shaved face covered in a dark stubble. The second is Dekard, the orc who first saw the Imperials and went on the expedition. Around his head are bandages wrapped around, a dark red stain soaked into it. + + +The third orc is one you do not know, his hair is wild and his face also covered in stubble. Multiple scars line his face and arms, his leather and fur clothing not looking like that of your tribe. Two teeth protrude from his underbite, one of those is chipped. A red hand painted on his face, his dark eyes attempt to pierce through you. + + +"Who is this?" you ask. + + +"My name is Grolik, leader of the Red Handed orcs band." + + +"Hmm?" you say, "one of the lawless. What are you doing here?" + + +Before he can continue, Rolomag has jumped off of his horse and grabs your shoulders. Eyes widening, you step back, pushing his arms off of you. + + +"What has gotten into you?" you ask. + + +"Nolazir," he says, seeming very tired, "we ran into some Imperials, they were fighting these orcs." + + +Rolomag goes on to explain that the Imperial soldiers laid siege to the orcs, who were stuck on a rocky hill. They exchanged arrows with the archers, and some Imperial knights on horseback made sure none could leave the hill. + + +He goes on to say that Greusim rode forward to talk to the Imperials, but was struck in the side with an arrow. While both sides were shooting back and forth, Rolomag is not sure who actually hit the chief. + + +Rolomag goes on to explain that the arrow barely had an effect on him, and that, even when all-out combat broke out, Greusim was able to help them. They killed the knights and managed to wipe out the archer columns after a hard-fought battle. + + +Rolomag looks at the ground and seems to stop. + + +"Well, then what happened?" you ask. "Out with it." + + +"From out of the trees a large force of Imperial soldiers ran out, we fought them well on horseback… but… they surrounded Greusim and the orcs nearest to him." + + +Rolomag seems to struggle with speaking. + + +"They fought well, but the humans were hard to kill with their silver coats and helmets. They pulled Greusim off his horse… by Gigalak there were so many of them. They struck him with everything imaginable, even his own club." + + +"What are you saying?" you say, already knowing but in disbelief. + + +"Greusim lays dead," Rolomag says. "They butchered his corpse. After that we couldn't fight them, there were just too many. We fled to the hills, and from there the three of us came here." + + +You sit down, almost missing the wooden log and hitting the ground. Staring at the ground, you wonder how this expedition could have led to this? All he wanted to do was talk, and those animals tore him apart. + + +"Damn human scum," you say on the way to the village as you learn of the other fallen orcs. +> Mourning +The village is in mourning, the loss of Greusim and the other dozen orcs has hit the village hard. A somber mood fills the air, and most orcs only know of one way to handle these types of emotions. + + +You see many orcs putting on their war paint, and performing war rituals to ask for Gigalak's favor and guidance. Sighing, you join in on this, as your anger fills you. + + +The humans do not know peace or diplomacy. They only see war and control. While the switch from sadness to rage was quick, you all know it is the right thing to do. + + +As you ride towards the camp in the mountain, you make your plans for revenge on the Empire. + + +The plan, to unite with the Red Handed and find where the Imperial camp is located. Then you will figure out how best to handle them…<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>I don't know what it is with me and zombie games, I just love them. A while back, I wrote a story called No Man's Land. It did a lot better than I expected, prompting me to try again. So here it is: Ultraoverlord Strikes Again, Zombie Style. + + +A NOTE ABOUT THE GAME: + + +The structure of this story is kind of a new one I'm experimenting with. There is only one 'win' scenario, the rest are deaths. Now, given that, there a few different ways to get there. Different choices can get you there in different states of health, with different supplies, and different people. I made this with as much replayability as possible, and there are references to characters in each storyline sprinkled throughout other storylines. See if you can find them all! +> Start +You watch as the coffee slowly filters out of the machine, and into your mug. After it's finished, you pick it up and take a sip. Perfect. + + +Life in the apartment isn't easy. You and your wife don't have enough money for a house yet, and you don't have any kids, so an apartment seemed like the best choice. You have a few commodities; a microwave, a TV, and a coffee maker. You do your own dishes and drive to the laundromat to wash clothes, but you're still content. + + +You sit on your beater couch and drink more coffee. Your wife isn't even awake yet. You wake up an hour before her every morning. The quiet is nice. It gives you time to think. You think about what you'll have to do today. Today is Sunday, chore day. You're pretty sure it's your turn to wash the dishes. You put your mug down and get up. Better to get the dishes done now than put it off. + + +Just before you start the disposal, a sharp beeping noise startles you. It came from the TV, but nobody turned it on. You peek into the living room, and see the TV screen. It has flashing images and warnings on it. There's a national security threat. Worried, you turn up the TV's volume and listen in. Your wife, woken up by the beeping, slowly wanders in. + + +"What's going on?" she sleepily asks. Before you can answer, a robotic voice blasts through the speakers. + + +"ATTENTION U.S. CITIZENS. AN ACT OF TERRORISM HAS RESULTED IN A DEADLY INFECTION IN THE FOLLOWING STATES: TEXAS, TENNESSEE, OKLAHOMA, KANSAS..." the list goes on. You don't hear California, your state. You're still safe, for now. You and your wife watch as the TV cuts to live news footage. A woman stands in a demilitarized zone, with heavy fencing, and military personnel everywhere. The newslady announces that unaffected states have set up border guards to prevent the spread of disease. Forces from other parts of the world are also rushing in, with Mexican and Canadian soldiers struggling to keep the infection inside the U.S. + + +The TV then cuts to a live shot of sick people. They aren't slow, or drowsy, like when you have the flu. No, they're the exact opposite. They're ravenous. They stumble around a a speedwalk pace, and they look dead. Bloods soaks their clothes. Their eyes are glazed over. Suddenly, a deer bounds into view. You watch in horror as the infected surround and kill the deer. The footage immediately cuts away. + + +You wife begins to panic. You try to console her, reminding her that the whole world is fighting to keep the monsters at bay, and that you two will be just fine. Sacramento is a long ways away from California's border. Perfectly safe. Perfectly safe. You're perfectly safe. + + +Suddenly, the TV makes an announcement: "ALL MALES OVER THE AGE OF 18 ARE REQUIRED TO LOCATE THE NEAREST OUTPOST AND CONTRIBUTE TO HOLDING THE LINE." + + + +> Go to the border +Panic sets in for you. You're supposed to stay, to help your wife, to be safe. You can't accept this. But you have to. + + +You pack everything you can think of: Clothes, food, water, towels, a book. Everything you have room for. You don't own any guns, and the knives in the kitchen seem useless against these predators. Even after loading up, your backpack still feels light. + + +You say goodbye to your wife, once, twice, three times, and it still hurts to leave. It feels unreal, like a dream, riding the elevator down, hailing a cab, and telling the driver to take you to your own funeral. + + +The trip takes about three hours. There are a lot of males over the age of 18 in California. When you get out of your cab, you are greeted by a steely man wearing a full set of bulletbroof armor. He orders you to follow him, and shows you to a barrack. + + +"This is your new home for the time being," he says in a gruff voice. The room is full of hammocks. Each one has a table and a storage unit next to it. You select the cleanest-looking one and put your stuff down. "How long is the time being?" you ask. The man looks at you. "Until this all blows over." + + +The next thing you know, you are kneeling in front of a human-shaped target, with an assault rifle in your hands. + + +"The first rule of operating a weapon is to never have your finger on the trigger unless the barrel is aimed at your target," the instructor says. All these military people look so similar, you could swear this was the same guy who showed you to your hammock. + + +After you're shown the proper way to fire the monster in your hands, you are ordered to take a shot. You aim directly for the target's chest, and open fire. + + +You are successful only in breaking the cardboard hand off the target. Your shoulder aches from the recoil. "Don't get discouraged, you'll get the hang of it." the man doesn't really seem to care about you in particular. You pause to look down the row of trainees. They are all just random people with expressions of fear or pain on their faces. As you look at their weapons, you conclude there must somehow be a gun shortage. Three of the trainees are using BB guns. + + +After three rigorous days of training, you're almost dead. Your shoulder is in immense pain. You want desperately to call your wife, but any and all electronic devices were confiscated, 'for security reasons.' You hate this. You just want to be back home. You just want things to go back to how they were... + + +You are suddenly called up, along with all the other recruits, to grab your guns and march to the battlefield. +> The Battlefield +You are down on one knee, behind a metal wall. There is a hole, just big enough for you to see and shoot out of in front of you. Ahead is a grassy field. The trees were cleared in anticipation of the dead. All to your left and right, a line of hardened soldiers mixed with scared civilians stands ready to fire, as soon as the signal is given. Your heart is pounding in your chest. + + +Suddenly, the line of trees is broken by a small pack of the dead. Before you can react, a machine gun takes out the whole horde. After that, it's a steady stream. The infected march through the trees, only to get shot down once in full view. All around you, gunshots ring, commands are yelled, and the groans of the dead get louder and louder. + + +You succeed in taking down a few zombies. Most of the time, as soon as you set your sights on one, someone else kills it. You try to calm your nerves and pretend it's just a game or something. Point and shoot. Simple as that. + + +After about an hour, the undead conga line shows no signs of stopping. The commander is just about to give the order to pause and reload when his walkie-talkie begins to crackle. He answers, and proceeds to shout to his colleagues that a large section of the blockade down south just broke. Hundreds are already dead and the zombies have made it to civilian territory. Instantly, your mind flashes to your wife. You can't let her die. + + +You pull away from your post and address the commander. "I have to go," you say. + + +"Absolutely not," the man responds. + + +"Please," you beg. "My wife, I have to-" the man cuts you off. "Teams have already been sent out to round up women and children. They're being taken up to Washington. It's more safe there. Don't worry about your wife," he says. You catch a tone of uncertainty in his voice. Suddenly, another soldier shouts. You look over the wall and see that you won't make it. The zombies and advancing faster than they're being taken down. You look back at the soldier. He can see it too. + + +"RETREAT! RETREAT!" you hear as you run for your life. Behind you, you can hear screaming. You drop your gun, it's only weighing you down, and you aren't very good at using it anyway. Retreat, you hear as you run up to the gates. Retreat, you hear as you hastily get in an abandoned car. Retreat, you hear over the deafening sound of the metal walls collapsing. +> retreat... +You speed away from the military zone. The terrain slowly morphs back into city. But it's all empty. Nobody is around, and it seems like the power grid is gone. But that doesn't matter. If everyone's gone, that means the military evacuated them, and that means your wife is safe. Now you just need to worry about you. As you drive on, you see a sign declaring that you have 80 miles until you reach Sacramento. That's no problem. You have a head start on the dead, and a car. + + +Just as you pass under a bridge, you hear a loud pop noise. Just as you feared, your tire popped on shards of glass. You look around. Actually, this whole road is covered with an even layer of glass shards. Thank goodness you're wearing shoes. + + +The car is useless now, as all four tires are popped. You couldn't even push it forward, because the traffic up ahead is deadly. The streets are full of abandoned cars, some with their lights on, some with doors still open. You don't know how long you have before the dead catch up with you. You look around and hastily make a choice. +> Get food +Food is always the top priority. If you're going to survive, you'll need food. Period. You look around. Nothing is in the immediate vicinity, so you'll have to do some exploring. You head toward the traffic jam up ahead. + + +As you weave your way through the cars, you notice something odd. A lot of the windows are smashed, and there's blood on the inside and outside of most of the cars. The military wouldn't do something like that. A thought crosses your mind: You left a while after hearing that a southern wall fell. The zed could have already been here, which means you're already too late. + + +You pick up the pace, dodging cars and debris. As you pass an SUV, a zombie pops out of one of the windows and swipes at you. They were definitely here. You break into a run past all the cars. + + +After finding clear roads again, you spot a road sign. It advertises hotels and shops, and tells where they are. You see a supermarket that's very close. You set off to find it, and hope that it wasn't picked clean. + + +After navigating the roads, you see the supermarket. Unfortunately, a fair amount of zombies surround it. You watch to see if there's any way to slip through, but the zombies all wander aimlessly and block the entrances. Besides, even if you got in, you wouldn't be able to get out. + + +Just as you are about to give up, a boy, no older than sixteen, goes running into the market. He must have been watching, just like you. But unlike you, he found a way in. He dodges the zombies and makes it to the doors without ever touching one of them. A minute goes by, and the boy comes up onto the roof with a bag of food in his hand. + + +You and the boy realize at the same time that getting out won't be so easy. There's nothing to jump on top of, and the zombies were drawn by the noise. They've surrounded the building, and are starting to climb the dumpsters and cars onto the roof. +> Help the boy +You decide that the boy is worth saving. If he can run like that, he'll be useful to you as a partner. The only question is, how do you go about saving him? + + +You know they're distracted by noise, so you start there. You see a truck on the opposite side of the road. It could work. You run over and see if the truck is operational. To your surprise, it's in almost perfect condition. However, when you try the door, you find out it's locked. You look back at the store. The boy is running out of time. In a moment of panic, you slam the car window with your elbow. This shatters the window and sets off the car alarm. + + +The boy is as startled as you are. As for the zombies, you delayed them. About half the group splits away from the store and targets you. You realize this is a big mistake. You didn't stop the zombies on the roof, and now you have a sizable herd following you. You turn to run an abandon the boy, when you see that he made it. The small lapse in attention for the zombies let the boy jump off the roof. He hits the ground and sprints off into the trees. Instinctively, you follow him. +> follow him +You can barely maneuver around the horde. You manage to escape and follow the boy. He's definitely a better runner than you, but you can keep him in your sights. He doesn't go far before entering a large storage warehouse from the back door. You know the boy saw you, so you continue forward. + + +When you reach the warehouse, you peek through one of the industrial windows. To your surprise, there are three people in the warehouse. The boy, a girl roughly his age, and another woman, presumably their mother. You watch as the boy unpacks the food bag. He was able to fit a surprising amount of food into the bag. The girl picks it up and adds it to a large pile of canned goods in the corner. The three begin to talk, and then the boy turns and looks directly at you. + + +You panic and duck. They probably think you're a creep now, or worse. Your best bet is to get away from the warehouse. You get down on all fours, and make it a few feet before you hear the boy behind you. + + +"What are you doing?" he demands. You turn around. The boy has a Glock pointed right at your forehead. As soon as you turn, the boy's expression changes. "Oh. You're the guy the broke that truck window, aren't you? You want a reward or something?" +> yes +Getting a reward is reasonable for saving this boy's life. "Yes," you say. The boy rolls his eyes. "Great," he says. "Come inside." + + +The boy leads you inside. The woman stands defensively between you and the girl. "Mikey, who is this?" the woman says. Mikey doesn't reply. He walks over to the food supply, picks up a can of peaches, and throws it, more at you than to you. You catch the can and examine it. + + +"Where are you from?" the girl asks, before her mother shushes her. You answer anyway. "I'm from Sacramento. I was out fighting for the border, but it collapsed. Now I'm here. I don't have any supplies, or a home, and I don't know if my wife is alive." + + +The woman seems genuinely sorry for you, but Mikey isn't convinced. "Thanks for the sob story," he says. "Now leave." + + +The mother shoots him a scolding look, before addressing you again. "Feel free to stay here a few nights. You can have some of our food, providing you're willing to help out." + + +That sounds like more than a fair deal to you. You accept, then sit down against one of the walls. "Oh," the woman suddenly says. "How rude of me. I should introduce myself. I'm Barbara, and this is Megan," the woman motions to the girl, "and this is-" Mikey cuts off his mother. "I'm Mikey." + + +"Well, what should I do?" you ask. "Oh, we're just waiting around right now. The sun will set soon, and Mikey just brought more food, so we'll be fine. Feel free to get a book, or something to entertain yourself. Mikey, will you roll our guest an air mattress?" Barbara says. Mikey shoots a dirty look to his mom, then you, before dragging an air mattress out from one of the units and dropping it on the ground. +> Settle in +You read a book from the pile, then pace around the warehouse, examining everything. The warehouse is big enough for 1000 people to stand shoulder to shoulder in it. There are a few storage units within the warehouse that the family is using for backup. You note that the only gun in the warehouse is in Mikey's possession. Each family member seems to have a sort of 'cubby' for personal stuff. + + +Hours pass, and nighttime is upon you. You watch out the window. A few lone zombies wander across the roads. The warehouse is actually quite hidden by trees, so you feel safer. "Okay," Barbara says."Bedtime. We'll need our strength for tomorrow." + + +You start to go over to your air mattress. "Oh, not you," she says. "I just mean the kids. They need all the energy they can get. As soon as they sun goes down, so do they!" + + +Barbara pulls a Sudoku book from the pile and starts to entertain herself. You sit on your air mattress and decide what to do. +> talk to Barbara +You go sit next to Barbara and watch her play a Sudoku game for a few minutes. "How did you end up here?" you finally ask. + + +Barbara explains that her husband was also drafted, so she took her kids to somewhere safe. When they happened upon the warehouse, it was abandoned and empty, but also out of the way of the dead. The perfect base. "I'm sorry your first impression with the kids wasn't that great. Megan can be shy, and Mikey gets worked up easily, but they'll warm up to you. Say, did you see my husband? His name is David, he has brown, curly hair, and he wears a necklace with him all the time." + + +You try to picture him in your head, but you can't. "Nope, didn't see him." Barbara seems disappointed. "But I'm sure he's fine," you say, a little too quickly. "Most of the civilians and soldiers were evacuated when the walls fell." + + + +> go to sleep +After fully inflating the air mattress, you decide to get some sleep. As you lay there, you think about the day. So much happened. Last night, you were in some military barrack hammock with ten other strangers, and now you're in a warehouse on an air mattress. You make one last promise to yourself before nodding off: you will find your wife. +> In the Morning +When you wake up, everyone else is already up. Megan is setting up a breakfast of canned fruit, Barbara is rolling up the air mattresses, and Mikey is nowhere to be found. + + +You sit up and do your best to fix your hair with your hands. You probably smell terrible, but whatever. Megan puts a plate of dried cranberries and an apple in your lap. You thank her, and eat quickly. You haven't eaten since yesterday afternoon, back at the barracks. After breakfast, you stand up and decide what to do with the day. +> Supply Run +The warehouse has very little in the way of weaponry. If you're going to survive, you'll need weapons. You tell Barbara that you're going on a run, and leave the warehouse. You take a backpack with some meager supplies. + + +The zombies have mostly cleared out. That works to your benefit, since you have only your fists for protection. You don't know this area very well, so you head in a random direction, remembering street names as you pass them. + + +Eventually, you come upon a tank in the middle of the road. The hatch is still open, and blood is splattered on the side. You climb inside. After searching the tank, you come up with a walkie-talkie and a water bottle. You try the walkie-talkie, and every channel is silent on the other end. You decide to leave it in the tank so you know where it is if you need it. + + +As for the tank itself, you've never seen the inside of one before, so you don't know if it's operational or not. You decide to not touch anything, and exit the tank. + + +You are disappointed at the lack of supplies in the tank. Shouldn't there be some rocket launcher, or at least a flare gun? You are very disappointed. So disappointed, in fact, that you almost miss the man running from a horde of the dead out of the corner of your eye. + + +You turn to look - it seems like you've found the owner of the tank. The man is clearly a soldier, he is dressed in all camo, and has a large, scary-looking gun over his shoulder. Closer inspection reveals that the gun has no clip, and therefore no ammo. The man swears and looks back at the herd, causing him to trip over a fire hydrant. + + +You feel like you should help, but you don't want to get in this man's way, and besides, what could you do? You're defenseless. You watch as the man pulls out a knife and starts to hack away at the group of zombies. Unfortunately, he quickly falls. You've never seen them infect someone, and it's not a pretty sight. The man's screams soon die down. After another few minutes, the horde wanders away from the man. + + +After they're a safe distance away, you inspect the corpse. Bite wounds cover the man's arms and torso. You don't know how long you have until he turns, so you move quickly. You take the gun off of him and check his pockets. He definitely was out of ammo. You also get his knife out of his hand. It's a durable, large knife, one that should have a holster or some sort of container. If it did, the man doesn't have it. + + +You come back to the warehouse with your finds. It's not a lot, but it's something. When you ge there, Mikey is also back. He succeeded in getting more food. You set the gun off to the side, and pocket the knife for yourself. Barbara notes your findings, and puts the gun in a storage unit. "So the kids don't get at it," she explains. +> Dinner +Dinner consists of canned meat and bread. The four of you eat in silence. Today was certainly a productive day. You sit and think about the next day. + + +The silence is broken by someone pounding on the back door of the warehouse. You sit up. Everyone glances around nervously. Finally, Mikey gets up and looks through the window. + + +"It's just a zombie, I got..." Mikey trails off. You get up and look through the window. + + +A hundred. No, a thousand. The streets are filled with zed. A small pack have found their way to the warehouse. "We can't risk killing them," you say. "Opening the door would be a bad idea. We need to hide, and be quiet." + + +Megan hurriedly blows out the candles you used for light. You hide behind a storage locker, while everyone finds a quiet place. The inside of the warehouse is silent. From the outside, you can hear moaning and pounding. The small pack is attracting more zombies. + + +"This isn't going to work," Mikey says. "We need a better plan." You hurriedly think of a way out of this. "We need to distract them," you say. "Is there a way onto the roof?" +> The Roof +You climb up onto the roof using a ladder, and taking out the skylight. The roof is curved, so keeping your balance is a struggle. You look out into the sea of the dead. It doesn't look as big from here, but it's still too many. There's no chance of distracting them. Unless, somehow, you could sneak through them. + + +You climb back down the ladder. "There's no way through that," you say. "We're surrounded." Mikey walks over to the door. "I bet I could get through," he says. You open your mouth to stop him, but Barbara beats you to it. "Absolutely not. You won't be able to run through that, no matter how fast you think you are." + + +Panic begins to set in. The walls feel much closer than they are. The groans get louder. There really is no way out of this. + + +Suddenly, gunshots rip through the air. You watch through the window as the horde of zed quickly hit the ground like dominoes. In a matter of seconds, the road is clear. You rush outside to see who, or what, killed the zombies. + + +Parked on the road is a large passenger bus and a big rig. Several men armed with various types of guns are set out the bus windows. They killed all the zombies. The door to the big rig opens, and a man steps out. He wears a bright orange vest over a bomber jacket, and wields a machine gun in his hands. + + +"Hi, folks," he begins with a creepy smile. +> attack him +Without hesitation, you tackle the man. The machine gun flies from his hands. As soon as you hit the ground, three bullets from three different guns hit you in the side. You topple over in pain, and the man gets up. + + +"Well, that wasn't very wise, now was it?" he taunts, before kicking you in the face. The pain in your nose makes you see flashes of light that aren't there. You lay on the ground, motionless, while the man laughs. Eventually, you finally bleed out. +> Reset Game +I don't know what it is with me and zombie games, I just love them. A while back, I wrote a story called No Man's Land. It did a lot better than I expected, prompting me to try again. So here it is: Ultraoverlord Strikes Again, Zombie Style. + + +A NOTE ABOUT THE GAME: + + +The structure of this story is kind of a new one I'm experimenting with. There is only one 'win' scenario, the rest are deaths. Now, given that, there a few different ways to get there. Different choices can get you there in different states of health, with different supplies, and different people. I made this with as much replayability as possible, and there are references to characters in each storyline sprinkled throughout other storylines. See if you can find them all! <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You climb up onto the roof using a ladder, and taking out the skylight. The roof is curved, so keeping your balance is a struggle. You look out into the sea of the dead. It doesn't look as big from here, but it's still too many. There's no chance of distracting them. Unless, somehow, you could sneak through them. + + +You climb back down the ladder. "There's no way through that," you say. "We're surrounded." Mikey walks over to the door. "I bet I could get through," he says. You open your mouth to stop him, but Barbara beats you to it. "Absolutely not. You won't be able to run through that, no matter how fast you think you are." + + +Panic begins to set in. The walls feel much closer than they are. The groans get louder. There really is no way out of this. + + +Suddenly, gunshots rip through the air. You watch through the window as the horde of zed quickly hit the ground like dominoes. In a matter of seconds, the road is clear. You rush outside to see who, or what, killed the zombies. + + +Parked on the road is a large passenger bus and a big rig. Several men armed with various types of guns are set out the bus windows. They killed all the zombies. The door to the big rig opens, and a man steps out. He wears a bright orange vest over a bomber jacket, and wields a machine gun in his hands. + + +"Hi, folks," he begins with a creepy smile. +> Let him continue +"Well, it seems to me that your lives were just in some very serious danger," the man continues. "Luckily, me and my people were just driving by. We just saved you from certain death. No need to thank us. All I ask is just a little something in return," the man says in a cutesy voice. "You wouldn't want to upset me, now, would you?" +> Offer gun +You go back inside and get the gun out of the storage unit. You take it outside and offer it to the man. He rips it out of your hands. "Wow," he says after examining it. "One damn gun, and it doesn't even have ammunition?" he looks at you, faking confusion. "You're gonna have to give us a little more than this." + + +"We don't have anything else," Mikey says behind you. You turn around to shush him, but the man stops you. "I don't believe that. In fact, I can see something right now that you could give us." The man points to the warehouse. "Me and the boys have been on the road for a long while, and we could really use a rest. Now, how about you fix us some dinner, yeah?" +> refuse +"No," you say. "It's already more than we can afford to give you the gun, so I'm not going to allow that." You watch the man's expression. He lets out a small laugh, and looks at the ground. Then he suddenly grabs you by the shirt collar and leans in so close you can smell the cigarettes on his breath. "I think," he whispers, "that you may want to reconsider that." +> Reconsider +Reluctantly, you step aside and show the man the door. He smiles at you, and steps inside. Slowly, his men file out of the bus and follow him. + + +Inside, the man turns and looks around. He lets out a small whistle. "This is quite the place you have here, isn't it?" he says. "Now, make with the dinner." + + +You and Megan hastily prepare canned vegetable soup for your guests, while Mikey and Barbara make them chairs to sit on. When you are done, you give each man a bowl of vegetable soup and a small cup of water. + + +"What's the matter?" the man says. "You didn't make any for yourselves. Won't you dine with us?" + + +"There's no more. You're already eating half of our food," you say. The man raises his hands. "Forgive me for more rudeness. Here, you can have mine." He slides he bowl of soup over to you, and throws the spoon at you. "Please, sit." + + +Everyone eats dinner in silence. Barbara sits with her kids off to the side. None of the men make eye contact with you, except for the leader, who smiles at you. Finally, the bowls are empty. Megan hurriedly collects them and throws them away. + + +"Wow. Now, I don't believe for a second that the gun you gave us is the only gun you have. There's gotta be more, right? So are you going to give it to me, or will I have to take it?" You notice Mikey grabbing at his gun, holstered on his belt. + + +"Yeah. That boy has a gun," you say. Mikey gives you a look full of hate. "Well," the man says. He gets up and walks over to Mikey. He puts his hand out. "Give it to me." + + +Mikey dumps the gun into the man's hand. "Thanks," he says. "I really do appreciate it." + + +Back outside, the man addresses you once more. "That was a wonderful gesture, yes it was. Now, I think you've got quite the setup here," the man motions to the warehouse, the road, and the trees. "In fact, I love it so much, that I think we just might have to come back someday." The man's smile disappears. "You'll still be here, right?" + + +"Y-yes," you say, and curse yourself for stuttering. The man pats you on the shoulder, a little too hard. "Great. See you soon." With that, the man gets back into the big rig, spits onto the ground, and drives off. + + + +> What now? +The four of you sit on the ground in the warehouse. Mikey finally speaks. "What are we gonna do about this?" + + +"We can't do anything," you say. "They already left." + + +"I'm talking about next time. He said he's coming back. Let's be ready for him." + + +"Actually," Barbara interrupts, "I think the best thing to do now is leave. He can't find us again, if we go deeper into the city. The big truck won't be easy to drive in the city streets. They're full of bodies and abandoned cars." It seems like the decision is left up to you: stay and fight, or find a new home. +> Find a new home +"We should leave," you say. "We don't have numbers or weapons on our side." Everyone seems to agree, even though they don't like it. Since it's getting dark, you decide to leave in the morning. You lay down on your air mattress and try to get some sleep. + + +In the morning, you begin packing. You are about halfway through the food when you realize that you don't have a vehicle. There's no way the four of you can carry all the food and water, plus the extra. You'll need to go look for something. + + +It's not as easy as finding any car. You need one that can seat four people, plus all the supplies. As you walk down the road, you see a billboard for a used car dealership. Perfect. + + +After a while, you spot the car dealership. The entire area is clear of zed, which means the trip back will be easy. You start your trip over to the dealership when you see something written in marker on a store window: + + +GOT GUNS? + +WE GIVE FOOD, JEWELRY, AMMUNITION, GASOLINE + + + + + + + +> You don't have anything you want to trade right now +You walk past the ad. You just don't have anything you're willing to give up, not yet. You make your way over to the dealership. + + +Most of the cars are gone, but you expected that. You do have three choices: A pickup truck, a minivan with a trailer attached to it, and a convertible. The choice is quite obvious for your needs. + + +Luckily, the minivan door is unlocked, and the keys are on the dashboard. You check the fuel gauge - you have a full tank. You thank your lucky stars and drive the minivan and the trailer back to the warehouse. +> Take off +When you get back, the others have already gathered everything up. You load the group's belongings into the trailer, and then everyone gets into the minivan. Megan seems sad to leave the warehouse. Barbara doesn't seem too emotionally attached to it. Mikey's expression is difficult to read. + + +You head up the road, looking for a place to go. Cars and debris block most roads, so your options are limited. All you need is a shelter big enough to support the group of four, and hidden well enough that you won't have to deal with Big Rig, or anyone else. + + +Finally, you decide to pull away from the major city roads and go out into the countryside. There, you find a nature center. It's perfect for the group. It's big, secluded, and even has a natural river running next to it, a potential water source. + + +The group unpacks and begins to get comfortable in their new home. This seems like an upgrade from the warehouse. The are two floors, and a lot of easily accessible windows. +> What now? +The most obvious thing to do is explore the new terrain. If there's some sort of supply cache or other survivors nearby, you need to know about it. "Nobody goes alone this time," you say. "I'll be going. Mikey, we can use you, too. Barbara, Megan, do you want to come?" + + +Megan slowly nods, and paces over to you. "I'll hold down the fort while y'all are gone," she says. You nod, and start setting up a pack. You bring a flashlight, clothes, water and food. Megan brings along a poetry book, and Mikey is traveling light. + + +Once outside, you get a good look at your surroundings. A dirt road connects you back to civilization. Then there's the woods beyond the nature center. You are deciding the best course of action, when Mikey speaks up. "I'll go into the woods alone, and look for stuff. You and Megan go that way." Before you have a chance to respond, Mikey is off. +> Into The City +Megan follows you along the dirt road, until you see buildings again. Most of them are useless, like hair salons, and the ones that could be potentially useful, like gas stations, have been looted. You are about to turn back when you see a gun store up ahead. + + +You and Megan race over to it, as if it will disappear if you aren't fast enough. The store has a small group of zed inside, and the front window was smashed with a cinder block, but you can see guns hung up on the walls. "We need to get in there," you whisper to Megan. She nods. + + +Both of you split up to find a good makeshift weapon. A board, a hammer, a pipe - anything will work. The nearest building to you is a flower shop. The front window is smashed, just like the gun shop. Why would someone bother to break into a flower shop? It's the least of your worries, because you get a large glass shard out of it. You wrap your shirt sleeve around it for better grip and come back to the gun shop. + + +Megan returns with a long, flat wooden board a few moments later. "Ok, you go in, grab as many guns as you can, and get out. Okay?" you say. Megan nods. You position yourself in front of the broken window and whistle. The zombies all notice you at once, and start to fumble out the window. Once there's enough clearance, Megan darts into the store. + + +The first zombie you kill is a huge jolt. You stab the glass shard into its skull, and it hits the ground dead. You're proud of yourself, but there are many more after that one. So you go again. You thrust the glass shard into a head, and then pull it out. This time, however, the shard breaks. Your hand is left bleeding, and you have no other weapons. Luckily, as if on queue, Megan comes running out of the building with three guns over her shoulder, and another few in her hands. Without having to say it, both of you flee in the direction of home. + + +You slow to a walk after you've put enough distance between you and the dead-heads. "That was impressive. You're just as fast as your brother," you comment. Megan gives a fleeting smile. Suddenly, she points out something. "Look over here." + + +You stand in front of a concrete wall with the U.S. military seal hastily painted on with spray paint. Below that is a short message: + + +HOPE IS LOST FOR THE REST OF YOU. THE DEAD NEVER SLEEP, AND NEITHER CAN YOU. WASHINGTON IS THE ONLY SALVATION. COME TO WASHINGTON OR DIE. LE + + +It seems like the writer was going to say something like "Let" or "leave", but they were interrupted while writing the message. Still, this is big. You estimate you're in the middle of California. If you head north, up through the rest of the state, then through Oregon, you'll arrive at Washington. You look at Megan. She looks back with a flicker of hope in her eyes. +> Get home +Barbara and Mikey are dumbfounded at the news. Everyone's thinking the same thing right now. Yes, the temptation of safety is strong, but traveling through a whole state and a half to get there? Unthinkable. + + +"It doesn't matter," you say. "Every second we spend here is a second we could be moving forward. We should leave now." Barbara shakes her head. "I think we should leave tomorrow. We'll need the rest, and we can scavenge for more food and things like that." + + +"It's not worth it," you say. "We have a gun. We have a minivan with gas in it. We can make it. Besides, there's no time to scavenge. It'll be dark soon." +> Stay, and leave in the morning +"Okay, we'll stay. But tomorrow, we leave. First thing in the morning." Everyone nods their heads in agreement. You have a bad feeling about this. + + +After everyone is settled down and laying on their air mattresses, you slip out the front door. Outside, it's still rather free of zombies. You sit down on the road and look around. You think about your wife, and Washington, and everything that's happened. So much changed in just two days. + + +Suddenly, you hear leaves crunching behind you. You turn around, thinking it's a zombie, but it's not. It's a soldier. He has frizzy, unkempt black hair, and still wears his uniform. "Mind if I have a seat?" + + +You feel oddly safe around him. He hasn't shown any signs of aggression, and to your knowledge, he has no weapons. He does, however, have a duffel bag. "I been watchin' you, with that group." "Watching me?" you say in surprise. + + +"Yeah, watching you. The way you raided that gun store. I'm gonna be straight with you; these folks are slowin' ya down. I'm headed to Washington, just like you are. I believe you're more capable to get there if you travel lighter." + + +"Where are you going with this?" you ask. "I'm askin' you to ditch these people and come to Washington. You have family there, correct?" You nod. "'Kay, then. Why waste time? You have no connection to these people. You don't even know their last names." + + +"How do I know I can trust you?" you ask. The man's expression doesn't change. "I guess you don't. But that's a decision I'm gonna leave to you." Both of you sit in silence on the road for a few minutes. Then, the soldier gets up and opens his duffel bag. He takes out a can of spray paint, and walks over in the direction of the unfinished message. +> Stay with the current group +"Sorry," you say. "But I already made a commitment to these people. Hopefully I'll see you in Washington." The man smiles over his shoulder. "Okay," he says. "Your funeral." He goes back to pick up his duffel bag, and leaves. You get up and go back inside the nature center. You lay down on your air mattress, and ponder if you made the right choice. +> Leave for Washington +After everything is packed up, you do one last check to make sure you didn't forget anything. You find a few water bottles in a vending machine, but nothing else. You say goodbye to your makeshift home, and get in the driver's seat of the minivan. + + +On the road, you follow roads that you know to head north. You try to stay and back roads, just in case you run into anything. You're determined to make it to Washington. + + +While driving, Barbara thinks to open up the glove box. The group is rewarded with a U.S. map and another bottle of water. You set the map up on the dashboard so you can see it while driving. You decide to follow I-5 north, which should take you right up to Washington. + + +Your trip is cut short after a few miles when you come to a blockade in the road. A chain fence was haphazardly set up in the middle of the road. A handmade sign hanging from it reads: FOLLOWERS' TERRITORY. TRESPASSERS WILL BE LOOTED AND FED TO THE DEAD. + + + +> Head through the fence +You refuse to let some stupid sign deter you. Who are the 'Followers' anyway? You don't care. You and Mikey get out, and move the chain link fencing. + + +After that, it seems like smooth sailing. You do start to notice, however, that the place seems less quality here. Graffiti covers the area, and certain buildings are just gone. + + +Suddenly, you see something off to the side of the road. There are three men standing off in a secluded alley. One of them is tied to a pole. The other two are mercilessly beating him with pieces of metal. +> Intervene +You get out and take a gun with you. "Hey," you say. The two attackers look over at you. The man tied to the pole can barely move his head. "What's going on here?" + + +"This fine gentleman over here," one of the men points to the beaten victim, "has broken our golden rule. That rule is NO TRESPASSING. And it seems to me that you are also breaking that rule. So I think a punishment for you is in order as well!" +> See what else he has to say +"Rico, what do you think this man deserves?" one of the men says, addressing the other. "I think a proper beating is in order," Rico responds. Before you can step out of the way, he steps forward and hits you with the metal bar in his hand, knocking you to the ground. The two proceed to hit and kick you until you're numb. Eventually, about halfway through, you realize you're not going to make it out of this alive. You wish you had taken the detour.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You get out and take a gun with you. "Hey," you say. The two attackers look over at you. The man tied to the pole can barely move his head. "What's going on here?" + + +"This fine gentleman over here," one of the men points to the beaten victim, "has broken our golden rule. That rule is NO TRESPASSING. And it seems to me that you are also breaking that rule. So I think a punishment for you is in order as well!" +> shoot them both +You won't let the man continue. You draw your gun and shoot both men down. They were at close range, but it still took a few shots. Once they're dead, you go up to the victim. His face is swollen, and his nose is bleeding. He flinches, expecting you to attack him too. +> kill the hostage +You have no interest in dealing with another group member. You put the man out of his misery, and get back in the car. +> Keep driving +You begin to get a bad feeling about the place. The empty buildings and atmosphere feel a lot more sinister now than they did a second ago. Your instincts kick in, and you try to drive away. + + +You quickly find that the roads have been blocked off by debris. They're herding you in a certain direction. You can't get out of the car, either, as you start to see other people watching you out of buildings and behind trash cans. In a last ditch effort to get away, you throw the minivan in reverse. + + +As you try to back out, you see something: a large truck blocks the way out. They've sealed the road behind you. A man holding a golf club comes out of a nearby building and starts running toward the minivan. In total panic, you speed down the road, away from the truck. + + +Barbara is gripping her armrests in fear. You would be, but both your hands are on the steering wheel. You drive down the road, exactly where they want you to. You can hear the truck following closely behind you. Suddenly, you drive into a dead end. The way forward is blocked. The truck pulls to a stop behind you, trapping you. + + +You have no choice but to get out of the car. A mob of people has gathered around your vehicle. Your group follows suit, and gets out of the car. + + +"Okay, let's not waste time. Give us your stuff, and your car, and we'll escort you to your new home," barks a large, bald man. The crowd of angry people with their guns pointed at you reminds you that you'll have to speak carefully. +> Offer a deal +"We can work this out," you say. The man lowers his gun. "I'm listening." +> Offer a group member +You look back at your group. "I'll give you a person, from my group. They can work for you, or whatever you want." The man seems to strongly consider it. You regret making the offer, but it's too late now. You look back one more time. Barbara gives you a look of total disgust. + + +Finally, the man nods. "Yes, I think that just may work. Reginald, clear the road outta here," he says to another. He turns, and looks over your group. "I want the girl." + + +Barbara starts crying immediately. Megan has a look of fear on her face, and Mikey shows nothing but resentment. Two people break from the crowd and grab Megan. They pull her away and out of sight. "Okay," he says. "That's it. Take the little track over there, it'll take you right out of here." The man turns to walk away. "Pleasure doing business with you," he adds. + + +Barbara and Mikey get in the minivan without you, and drive off. Mikey flips you off from the backseat. You admittedly feel terrible. As the crowd parts, you feel terrible for your choice. But you can't go back now. You follow the minivan on foot, until you're out of the slums. +> .... +You aren't sure how to feel as you pace up the road, vaguely in the direction of Washington. You feel remorse for your decision, and wish you could take it back. Giving up Megan was a stupid choice. She cared about you, and you would gladly hand her over for your own protection. There's no more time to dwell, though. That affair took up the whole day. It'll be dark soon. + + +you continue up the road, in search of a place to spend the night. About an hour after the sun goes down, you spot something. It looks like a military outpost. + + +It ends up being exactly that. Judging by the footprints and blood, this place didn't last too long. It's only been a few days, and people are dying fast. Not even the military can seemingly stand up to the ever-growing threat of death. You open the door to the trailer and look inside. + + +You are rewarded with another gun, this one a Stag-15. It has a half-empty magazine. Other than that, you find nothing in the trailer. It's as good a place as any to sleep, and it has a pullout couch/bed. + + +You are awoken in the morning by growling. You sit up quickly and look out the window next to the door. + + +Zombies. And several of them. They have wandered up and down the street, surrounding you on one side. If you could get out the door, and past the horde, you could outrun them and head north again. +> shoot them +You load up the gun and kick the door open. The closest group of zed growl, and stomp over to you. You kneel for better balance, and do your best to aim. When you pull the trigger, you are surprisingly accurate. By the time you're out of bullets, you've cleared just enough of a path out. You slip by the trailer and move up the street at a steady jog, away from the zombies. + + +After you've slowed to a walk, you notice another building coming up. It looks kind of like a factory building. It has several floors, is made of brick. Three smokestacks jut out of the building's roof. it seems worthwhile to check out, so you run up to it. You are disappointed to learn that the entrance is surrounded by fencing. + + + +> move on +Picking at the fence isn't worth it. Besides, why waste time here? Your goal of getting to Washington is still the highest priority. You leave the warehouse alone and continue on your way. +> What's new? +You continue to walk down the road as before, this time with a gun slung over your shoulder. You spot a sign telling you that you're still on I-5, on a crash course with Washington. + + +The sun beats down on you as you realize you are quite thirsty. Hungry, too. The way ahead looks bare. Bare except for a road sign. It tells you that if you continue ahead, you'll reach a small town. Next to the town's name, written with blood, is a small message: COME ONE, COME ALL + + +If you turn to the right, you'll arrive at a rest stop. There won't be food or water, but there will be a gas station (probably empty), and a pharmacy. +> Check the rest stop +You make the decision to see if there's anything worth taking at the rest stop. It's a short walk, and if there's any water, you'll gladly take it. + + +Just as you suspected, the gas station has been looted of everything. The cash register, the food, even the toilet paper is all gone. Someone beat you to the punch. Oh, well. You go to check the pharmacy. That has been looted too, but not all the way. A few bottles have been left behind, scattered among the shelves. You take a bottle of painkillers and a roll of bandages. Nothing else really seems useful. + + + +> Head to the town +The collar of your shirt is soaked with sweat by the time you spot the town. It's relatively small, and a wall of cars and metal scrap surrounds it. A front gate set on hinges to swing open is right in the middle of the road. Above it sits a guard tower. + + +You are spotted well before you get to the door. You are ordered to get on your knees and place any weapons you have on the ground. You place your gun on the road in clear view of the tower and comply. The gate swings open, and a small group comes to meet you. + + +The group consists of a clean-shaven man, a small boy, and a woman holding a clipboard. "Hello. My name is Rose. Welcome to Fort Z." + + +After the group makes sure you aren't going to hurt anyone, you get your gun back and are welcomed into the community. You are surprised at how fast it went up. It's only been a few days, but the walls are up, and the community is thriving (for now). There is no shortage of people, and homes and buildings have been turned into sleeping quarters, storage, and everything else you can think of. "Well," begins Rose. "It seems like you've come a long way, would you like something?" +> What are the rules around here? +"Well, there aren't many rules around here, because no one seems to be causing any trouble. Just don't hurt anyone or steal anything and you should be fine," says Rose. "Also, don't do anything stupid," adds the clean-shaven man. +> Who are these people? +"Oh, jeez," Rose begins. "I couldn't hope to remember everyone's name. But, this is Callaghan," Rose says of the clean-shaven man. He reaches out to shake your hand. "It's a pleasure to meet you," he says. "Then there's Max," Rose pats the little boy on the head. The boy is hiding behind his mother's legs. "We're kind of like the government around here. Other than that, you can make friends as you wish."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You load up the gun and kick the door open. The closest group of zed growl, and stomp over to you. You kneel for better balance, and do your best to aim. When you pull the trigger, you are surprisingly accurate. By the time you're out of bullets, you've cleared just enough of a path out. You slip by the trailer and move up the street at a steady jog, away from the zombies. + + +After you've slowed to a walk, you notice another building coming up. It looks kind of like a factory building. It has several floors, is made of brick. Three smokestacks jut out of the building's roof. it seems worthwhile to check out, so you run up to it. You are disappointed to learn that the entrance is surrounded by fencing. + + + +> break in +You use the butt of your gun to hit the fence poles repeatedly. Eventually, the pole gives way, and part of the fence falls away. You step in, and into the factory. + + +As soon as you step inside, you see a woman picking through a pile of debris. She looks up at you as you enter. + + +"Oh. Hi," she says. She seems rather uninterested in you. "What are you looking for?" you ask. "Parts," she replies. "Parts for an engine. More specifically," she pulls a piece of notebook paper out of her pocket and reads it, "...a fan belt." + + +You nod. "Okay." + + +"My name's Clarice, by the way," she says out of nowhere. You are caught slightly off guard, but introduce yourself anyway. Suddenly, Clarice pulls a large black thing out of the wreckage. "Found it," she says triumphantly. She heads out of a side door. "By the way," she adds, "Don't bother following me."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren't sure how to feel as you pace up the road, vaguely in the direction of Washington. You feel remorse for your decision, and wish you could take it back. Giving up Megan was a stupid choice. She cared about you, and you would gladly hand her over for your own protection. There's no more time to dwell, though. That affair took up the whole day. It'll be dark soon. + + +you continue up the road, in search of a place to spend the night. About an hour after the sun goes down, you spot something. It looks like a military outpost. + + +It ends up being exactly that. Judging by the footprints and blood, this place didn't last too long. It's only been a few days, and people are dying fast. Not even the military can seemingly stand up to the ever-growing threat of death. You open the door to the trailer and look inside. + + +You are rewarded with another gun, this one a Stag-15. It has a half-empty magazine. Other than that, you find nothing in the trailer. It's as good a place as any to sleep, and it has a pullout couch/bed. + + +You are awoken in the morning by growling. You sit up quickly and look out the window next to the door. + + +Zombies. And several of them. They have wandered up and down the street, surrounding you on one side. If you could get out the door, and past the horde, you could outrun them and head north again. +> search the trailer for another weapon +Not wanting to waste bullets, you scrounge around the trailer for something sharp. Eventually, you find a piece of plastic that looks like it used to be part of a canteen. Nonetheless, it's sharp. + + +You open the trailer door and slice away, just like with the glass shard. You're able to clear a small opening for you to charge through, and you make it away from the horde at a running speed. + + +After you've slowed to a walk, you notice another building coming up. It looks kind of like a factory building. It has several floors, is made of brick. Three smokestacks jut out of the building's roof. it seems worthwhile to check out, so you run up to it. You are disappointed to learn that the entrance is surrounded by fencing.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"We can work this out," you say. The man lowers his gun. "I'm listening." +> Offer half your supplies +"Half our supplies," you offer. "Please, just let us pass. We need to get somewhere, quickly." You search for any sign of anything behind the man's eyes. You find nothing. "Sorry," he says. "But unless you have a better offer than our current demands, this won't turn out well for you."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"We can work this out," you say. The man lowers his gun. "I'm listening." +> Offer your gas +"Gas," you say. "You can have it. Just leave us enough to get out. You can take the rest." The man doesn't even consider it. "Look around you, stupid. Do you see a single functioning car?" You look around. "NO!" the man yells. "We don't have 'em 'cause we don't need 'em. If you don't start making me a good offer, I'm just gonna have to start taking without asking first."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You begin to get a bad feeling about the place. The empty buildings and atmosphere feel a lot more sinister now than they did a second ago. Your instincts kick in, and you try to drive away. + + +You quickly find that the roads have been blocked off by debris. They're herding you in a certain direction. You can't get out of the car, either, as you start to see other people watching you out of buildings and behind trash cans. In a last ditch effort to get away, you throw the minivan in reverse. + + +As you try to back out, you see something: a large truck blocks the way out. They've sealed the road behind you. A man holding a golf club comes out of a nearby building and starts running toward the minivan. In total panic, you speed down the road, away from the truck. + + +Barbara is gripping her armrests in fear. You would be, but both your hands are on the steering wheel. You drive down the road, exactly where they want you to. You can hear the truck following closely behind you. Suddenly, you drive into a dead end. The way forward is blocked. The truck pulls to a stop behind you, trapping you. + + +You have no choice but to get out of the car. A mob of people has gathered around your vehicle. Your group follows suit, and gets out of the car. + + +"Okay, let's not waste time. Give us your stuff, and your car, and we'll escort you to your new home," barks a large, bald man. The crowd of angry people with their guns pointed at you reminds you that you'll have to speak carefully. +> Give up your supplies +"It's all in the trailer," you say, which is true. The man looks behind him, and snaps his fingers. "Boys, unload the trailer." He turns back to you. "Now that that's out of the way, I will be happy to escort you to your new home." +> Attack +You pretend to walk over to the minivan to surrender the keys. Everyone's eyes are on you. You open the door, and grab a gun out of its holster. No one can see you. You ponder who to shoot first. "Well?" the man taunts. "Am I getting the keys or not?" Decision made. + + +You thought you could be quick enough to shoot somebody. But you didn't even pull the trigger. Not once.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You won't let the man continue. You draw your gun and shoot both men down. They were at close range, but it still took a few shots. Once they're dead, you go up to the victim. His face is swollen, and his nose is bleeding. He flinches, expecting you to attack him too. +> leave the hostage +You can't take in a new member, and you also can't trust him. You leave him tied to the pole, get back in the car, and drive off.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You won't let the man continue. You draw your gun and shoot both men down. They were at close range, but it still took a few shots. Once they're dead, you go up to the victim. His face is swollen, and his nose is bleeding. He flinches, expecting you to attack him too. +> take the hostage with you +You can't leave the man out here like this. It's not safe. You untie the rope holding him to the pole. He gives you a look of pure gratitude. You have him hide in the trailer, and you take off. + + + +> Keep going +There's no time to waste. You gunshots echoed throughout the area, and you doubt those two were alone. With the man hiding in your trailer, you try to drive away. + + +You quickly find that the roads have been blocked off by debris. They're herding you in a certain direction. You can't get out of the car, either, as you start to see other people watching you out of buildings and behind trash cans. In a last ditch effort to get away, you throw the minivan in reverse. + + +As you try to back out, you see something: a large truck blocks the way out. They've sealed the road behind you. A man holding a golf club comes out of a nearby building and starts running toward the minivan. In total panic, you speed down the road, away from the truck. + + +Barbara is gripping her armrests in fear. You would be, but both your hands are on the steering wheel. You drive down the road, exactly where they want you to. You can hear the truck following closely behind you. Suddenly, you drive into a dead end. The way forward is blocked. The truck pulls to a stop behind you, trapping you. + + +You have no choice but to get out of the car. A mob of people has gathered around your vehicle. Your group follows suit, but the former hostage stays in your trailer. + + +"Okay, let's not waste time. Give us our hostage, your stuff, and your car, and we'll escort you to your new home," barks a large, bald man. The crowd of angry people with their guns pointed at you reminds you that you'll have to speak carefully. +> Give up the hostage +Slowly, with your arms raised, you walk over to the trailer, and open the door. The hostage steps out with his arms raised. "Wonderful," the man says. He grabs the hostage by the shirt collar and hands him over to another man, who drags him away. "Anything else?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's no time to waste. You gunshots echoed throughout the area, and you doubt those two were alone. With the man hiding in your trailer, you try to drive away. + + +You quickly find that the roads have been blocked off by debris. They're herding you in a certain direction. You can't get out of the car, either, as you start to see other people watching you out of buildings and behind trash cans. In a last ditch effort to get away, you throw the minivan in reverse. + + +As you try to back out, you see something: a large truck blocks the way out. They've sealed the road behind you. A man holding a golf club comes out of a nearby building and starts running toward the minivan. In total panic, you speed down the road, away from the truck. + + +Barbara is gripping her armrests in fear. You would be, but both your hands are on the steering wheel. You drive down the road, exactly where they want you to. You can hear the truck following closely behind you. Suddenly, you drive into a dead end. The way forward is blocked. The truck pulls to a stop behind you, trapping you. + + +You have no choice but to get out of the car. A mob of people has gathered around your vehicle. Your group follows suit, but the former hostage stays in your trailer. + + +"Okay, let's not waste time. Give us our hostage, your stuff, and your car, and we'll escort you to your new home," barks a large, bald man. The crowd of angry people with their guns pointed at you reminds you that you'll have to speak carefully. +> more than food +You slowly walk over to the trailer to hand over the supplies. When you open the door, the hostage comes out with his arms raised. "Well, look who it is," the man says. "Thought you could sneak this one past us?" Another person from the crowd takes him away. Then the man snaps his fingers. "Boys, unload the trailer. I want to see what I got." + + +After the men have searched through the trailer, the man turns to you. "Now that we have your stuff, I will escort you to your new home."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You refuse to let some stupid sign deter you. Who are the 'Followers' anyway? You don't care. You and Mikey get out, and move the chain link fencing. + + +After that, it seems like smooth sailing. You do start to notice, however, that the place seems less quality here. Graffiti covers the area, and certain buildings are just gone. + + +Suddenly, you see something off to the side of the road. There are three men standing off in a secluded alley. One of them is tied to a pole. The other two are mercilessly beating him with pieces of metal. +> Keep driving +You watch over the scene. The attackers seem like hardened thieves. Getting in a confrontation wouldn't be wise. You slowly drive past the scene. As you do, the victim of the beatings gives you a long, cold stare in between blows to the face. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After everything is packed up, you do one last check to make sure you didn't forget anything. You find a few water bottles in a vending machine, but nothing else. You say goodbye to your makeshift home, and get in the driver's seat of the minivan. + + +On the road, you follow roads that you know to head north. You try to stay and back roads, just in case you run into anything. You're determined to make it to Washington. + + +While driving, Barbara thinks to open up the glove box. The group is rewarded with a U.S. map and another bottle of water. You set the map up on the dashboard so you can see it while driving. You decide to follow I-5 north, which should take you right up to Washington. + + +Your trip is cut short after a few miles when you come to a blockade in the road. A chain fence was haphazardly set up in the middle of the road. A handmade sign hanging from it reads: FOLLOWERS' TERRITORY. TRESPASSERS WILL BE LOOTED AND FED TO THE DEAD. + + + +> Try to find a way around +Heeding the warning of the sign, you decide to change direction. You look on the map and find an alternate route. You'll be able to loop around and rejoin I-5 after some time. + + +As you drive, you begin to notice something is very wrong. You expected to be out of range of whoever the 'Followers' are, but graffiti and roadblocks suggest otherwise. Zombies have been staked to the ground on the side of the road. garbage cans have been laid out to block the roads, and a few of them have fires going in them. + + +"We need to turn around," you say. Nobody objects, so you throw the car in reverse. You back into the grass, and turn around so that you can pick a different route. But, when you turn, you see a man walk out into the middle of the road. He has something in his hands, but you can't tell what it is. It looks like a bat, or an axe. Suddenly, you see a car driving up the road toward you. + + +By this time, you realize the mistake you made. You try to turn around to see if you can get out of the backroads, and away from these people. You end up knocking over some trash cans and putting dents in the car, but that's currently the least of your worries. You start to see that forks in the road have been blocked off completely. They're herding you in a certain direction. With the roadblocks, the zombies, and the car behind you, you have nowhere to go. + + +You have no choice but to follow the intended path for you. You eventually end up in a section of the road that's walled off completely. When you stop, the car behind you stops, blocking you in. A group of people approaches the car from behind roadblocks and trees. Every single one of them is armed with either a gun or a large melee weapon. One man, who is bald and wearing a blood-soaked apron, walks up to your car. He clutches a metal bar in his meaty fist. + + +"Knock, knock, knock," he says, hitting the top of your car with every word. "Come on out, so we can see our kill." You freeze with fear. The man leans down into the window. "Get out of the car," he says. You slowly open the door, and the man steps aside to let you out. When the four of you are out of the car, The man addresses all of you. + + +"So," he starts, "Apparently you didn't pay attention to our little warning. This is our turf, and anyone who enters our turf, becomes our property. You four, and everything you have, is ours now. I'm gonna need the keys to your car, and then I'm gonna need you all to step aside, so I can escort you away." + + +Mikey is the first to act. He gets back in the car, and comes up a moment later with a gun. He points it at the bald man. "Leave us alone," he says. + + +The man laughs. "Silly boy. Young kids like you shouldn't play with guns," he says. He snaps his fingers, and a small group of men from the crowd steps forward. They rip the gun out of Mikey's hands, and pull him out of view. + + +"Hey," you say. "Listen, I'm sorry we trespassed, but I don't want any trouble. Please, please, just let us pass. We don't want to bother or hurt anyone. We just have somewhere to be. Can't you-" + + +The man cuts you off by hitting you in the head with his metal bar. "Fool! Stop trying to plead your case! I told you how it's gonna be! We get your stuff, and you're gonna die!" + + + +> Attack him +Without hesitation, you jump out at the man. You grab the bar and hold it against his neck, choking him. Behind you, you hear the others leap into action. + + +"I told you," you say, "Just let us go. But you wouldn't listen. Now we have to-" + + +You are suddenly pulled off of the man and stabbed in the side. You shriek in pain, and your attacker drops you onto the road. "I tried to tell you," the man says. "But you just wouldn't listen." The man brings the bar down onto your head, caving your skull in.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Heeding the warning of the sign, you decide to change direction. You look on the map and find an alternate route. You'll be able to loop around and rejoin I-5 after some time. + + +As you drive, you begin to notice something is very wrong. You expected to be out of range of whoever the 'Followers' are, but graffiti and roadblocks suggest otherwise. Zombies have been staked to the ground on the side of the road. garbage cans have been laid out to block the roads, and a few of them have fires going in them. + + +"We need to turn around," you say. Nobody objects, so you throw the car in reverse. You back into the grass, and turn around so that you can pick a different route. But, when you turn, you see a man walk out into the middle of the road. He has something in his hands, but you can't tell what it is. It looks like a bat, or an axe. Suddenly, you see a car driving up the road toward you. + + +By this time, you realize the mistake you made. You try to turn around to see if you can get out of the backroads, and away from these people. You end up knocking over some trash cans and putting dents in the car, but that's currently the least of your worries. You start to see that forks in the road have been blocked off completely. They're herding you in a certain direction. With the roadblocks, the zombies, and the car behind you, you have nowhere to go. + + +You have no choice but to follow the intended path for you. You eventually end up in a section of the road that's walled off completely. When you stop, the car behind you stops, blocking you in. A group of people approaches the car from behind roadblocks and trees. Every single one of them is armed with either a gun or a large melee weapon. One man, who is bald and wearing a blood-soaked apron, walks up to your car. He clutches a metal bar in his meaty fist. + + +"Knock, knock, knock," he says, hitting the top of your car with every word. "Come on out, so we can see our kill." You freeze with fear. The man leans down into the window. "Get out of the car," he says. You slowly open the door, and the man steps aside to let you out. When the four of you are out of the car, The man addresses all of you. + + +"So," he starts, "Apparently you didn't pay attention to our little warning. This is our turf, and anyone who enters our turf, becomes our property. You four, and everything you have, is ours now. I'm gonna need the keys to your car, and then I'm gonna need you all to step aside, so I can escort you away." + + +Mikey is the first to act. He gets back in the car, and comes up a moment later with a gun. He points it at the bald man. "Leave us alone," he says. + + +The man laughs. "Silly boy. Young kids like you shouldn't play with guns," he says. He snaps his fingers, and a small group of men from the crowd steps forward. They rip the gun out of Mikey's hands, and pull him out of view. + + +"Hey," you say. "Listen, I'm sorry we trespassed, but I don't want any trouble. Please, please, just let us pass. We don't want to bother or hurt anyone. We just have somewhere to be. Can't you-" + + +The man cuts you off by hitting you in the head with his metal bar. "Fool! Stop trying to plead your case! I told you how it's gonna be! We get your stuff, and you're gonna die!" + + + +> Let him kill you +You stay silent, and get up off the road. The man has a wide, wicked grin on his face. As the others close in on the car, the man hits you again, sending you to your knees. Again, and you're on the ground. Again, and you're barely conscious. + + +"Signs are there for a reason," the bald man says as your vision swims. "We gave you an honest, fair warning, but you just didn't listen." The man brings the bar down onto your temple, killing you. + + + + +"Not my fault you don't listen." + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Okay, we'll stay. But tomorrow, we leave. First thing in the morning." Everyone nods their heads in agreement. You have a bad feeling about this. + + +After everyone is settled down and laying on their air mattresses, you slip out the front door. Outside, it's still rather free of zombies. You sit down on the road and look around. You think about your wife, and Washington, and everything that's happened. So much changed in just two days. + + +Suddenly, you hear leaves crunching behind you. You turn around, thinking it's a zombie, but it's not. It's a soldier. He has frizzy, unkempt black hair, and still wears his uniform. "Mind if I have a seat?" + + +You feel oddly safe around him. He hasn't shown any signs of aggression, and to your knowledge, he has no weapons. He does, however, have a duffel bag. "I been watchin' you, with that group." "Watching me?" you say in surprise. + + +"Yeah, watching you. The way you raided that gun store. I'm gonna be straight with you; these folks are slowin' ya down. I'm headed to Washington, just like you are. I believe you're more capable to get there if you travel lighter." + + +"Where are you going with this?" you ask. "I'm askin' you to ditch these people and come to Washington. You have family there, correct?" You nod. "'Kay, then. Why waste time? You have no connection to these people. You don't even know their last names." + + +"How do I know I can trust you?" you ask. The man's expression doesn't change. "I guess you don't. But that's a decision I'm gonna leave to you." Both of you sit in silence on the road for a few minutes. Then, the soldier gets up and opens his duffel bag. He takes out a can of spray paint, and walks over in the direction of the unfinished message. +> Follow The Stranger +Something about what the soldier said makes you think. Barbara can't operate a weapon, Mikey doesn't like you, and probably never will, and Megan is too shy for you to even be sure about her. You realize the soldier is right, and go to follow him. + + +You catch up with the soldier as he is finishing the spray-painted message on the wall. + + +HOPE IS LOST FOR THE REST OF YOU. THE DEAD NEVER SLEEP, AND NEITHER CAN YOU. WASHINGTON IS THE ONLY SALVATION. COME TO WASHINGTON OR DIE. LEAVE NOW, AND BE A PART OF THE REBUILDING. + + +"What's the rebuilding?" you ask. "Oh," the soldier answers, "It's a military plan that died out pretty quickly. Back before the zombies took control, we had a plan set up to rebuild and restructure the damaged areas. You know, help with businesses, relocate families." That makes sense. Nobody saw this outbreak coming, and it makes you feel better that the government is working to help you. You hope they were able to help your wife to safety. Along with everyone else of course, but mostly your wife. + + +"It's pretty dark out," says the soldier. "We should head back." You are confused. "Head back? To where?" The soldier looks at you and raises his eyebrows. "The camp. Follow me." The soldier leads you back past where Barbara and her kids are, and into the trees. "By the way, my name's Conway," he says suddenly. + + + + + +> Camp +After a few minutes, you arrive at a small campsite. A single tent is set up in front of a living space. A fire pit, a log to sit on, what looks like a knife-sharpening station, among other things. "Here we are," Conway says. "Camp me." + + +"Are you alone?" you ask, noting the single, one person tent. "I am now," Conway answers. "I was with one of the patrol groups, but we got split up in all the ruckus. There were a bunch of useless men anyway. Pretty sure I was the only one who could operate a rocket launcher." You think of the civilian volunteers back at the wall, and wonder if Conway was paired with such people. + + +"So you just ditched them?" you ask as you sit down on the log. "Wasn't my choice. We carried packs with necessary supplies for a few days in the event we were separated or trapped. Once I knew I was gone, I booked it outta there. Found this place, set up shop, and ditched my backpack. Kept the duffel bag for carrying big finds," Conway answers. + + +"Aren't you heading back to Washington?" you ask. Conway chews his lip for a moment before answering, "No. Not yet." You decide to leave it there. You don't want to bring up a possible bad moment in the man's past, so you change the subject. "Where are we sleeping?" Conway snaps at of his thoughts. "Oh yes! Um, you can take the tent. I have no problem sleeping on the ground. Won't be the first time." + + +You nod, and take note of Conway's supplies. He has quite a few guns, an impressive knife collection, and whatever he's hiding in the duffel bag. It's definitely full, but you aren't sure of what. There's also plenty of food around, but no water to be seen. You wonder if Conway hid it, or needs more. + + +As you look around, Conway says, "You planning on sleeping anytime soon, or are you just gonna sit there and stare at my guns?" You climb into the tent, and try to sleep on the inflatable pillow and thin blanket. +> Rise and Shine +When you wake up, Conway is already up. From the way he's acting, you wonder if he ever fell asleep. You see five empty cans scattered around the area, more than three servings of breakfast. You decide not to comment, and pick up a can of instant mashed potatoes. + + +"Alrighty," Conway says as you eat, "Today, I'm thinkin' we go out and look for more supplies. Specifically, more ammo for him," Conway points to an especially large gun propped against a tree, "...some more food, and, of course, any other survivors we can find." + + +"Wait, what?" you ask. "If you were looking for survivors to rescue, why didn't you get my whole group back at the nature center?" Conway goes quiet, similar to yesterday when you asked if he was headed to Washington. He finally answers, "I'm not rescuing people." + + +"Speaking of which," he says, "We'd better get moving. Your people are gonna start wonderin' where you went, and they could also be a supply drain. Early bird gets the arm cannon! Let's get moving!" Not wanting to challenge Conway, you hop up and follow him out of the woods, and onto another car-choked road. + + +You scan the area for points of interest. You don't see anything, but Conway does. He points out something a few streets over, that you can't see. You tell him there's nothing there, to which he insists there is. "I can't tell what it is," he says, "But it has our colors. Let's go grab it." + + +As Conway leads you through the cars over to the next street, a lone zombie comes out from behind one of the cars. "Aw, shoot," Conway says, and pulls a large knife out of his belt loop. He goes over to kill the zombie, and stabs the knife through its forehead. The knife is so comically large, it goes through the zombie's head, and sticks out the back three inches. "Well?" he says. + + +The thing he saw was a camo backpack. You unzip it and find several ammo magazines you don't recognize. "Yes!" Conway shouts, and pulls one of the cartridges out of the backpack. "Here's just what I was lookin' for!" You see a few other things in the pack, including a hunting knife. You pocket it for yourself, and examine the rest of the pack. It's mostly military-type stuff. + + +You look up, and see a small pack of zed coming through the cars towards you. "Uh oh," you say, and grab your knife. Conway turns towards them. "Looks like that rotter brought some friends!" You go to the right, and single off one zombie. While Conway goes to town on the others, you focus on the one in front of you. When it's close enough, you force the knife into its face. To your satisfaction, the zombie dies instantly. You pull the knife out and let it drop to the ground. + + +Conway looks at what you've done. "Excellent! You're learning," he says. "Anyway, this is one awesome find. You wanna go for more, or should we go back with our find?" +> Search for more +"Let's keep going," you say confidently. Conway smiles. "That's the way. Where to?" + + +You travel up the road, cautiously watching for more zombies. It doesn't look like there's much more out here. The cars are all empty, and there's a severe lack of convenient backpacks. You think about searching elsewhere. "There a problem?" Conway asks. "You reconsiderin'?" You shake your head. "Maybe we should go to where there's more buildings, and potential for supplies," you say. + + +The city isn't much more fruitful. As you look at the empty streets, you see something painted on a wall. At first, it looks like another call to Washington, but the message is different: + + +NO MORE + + +STRIVE FOR BETTER + + +A NEW WORLD ORDER + + +"Conway," you say. "What do you think this is?" Conway reads the message, and laughs. "What the hell? What kind of garbage is this? 'New World Order?' Sounds like some lunatic wants to take on the government. The whack job's probably dead by now. You ready to head back?" + + +You're disappointed at your lack of finding anything, but at least you killed a few zombies with your new knife. You're feeling more comfortable with it. You and Conway walk back to his camp. +> Head back +Conway happily loads his new ammo into his gun back at the camp, while you unpack the backpack. A lot of ammo, a few more knives, an empty water bottle, and a gold bracelet. "Huh," says Conway. "That looks familiar. I think someone used to wear that around. Uh....oh come on...what was his....Lincoln! That was it! Yeah, he used to have that, but this ain't is backpack." + + +You eat a light lunch, and talk to Conway more about Washington. "You ready to leave?" you ask, anticipating a bad response. Conway seems to have come to terms with whatever was troubling him. "Yes, I think we'll leave soon. The only obstacle is a good vehicle. I can drive just about anything, but I want somethin' durable, not just some car on the side of the road. I plan to drive through the wastelands in style, know what I mean?" You nod. There are benefits to a more durable vehicle for sure. You make plans to search tomorrow, and leave as soon as you find what you're after. + + +"Now that that's settled," Conway says. "You up for a little game?" +> A what? +Conway fishes two more guns out of his duffel bag. "Follow me." + + +Conway leads you to the top of a small hill, overlooking another trashed street. This one, however, is full of the dead. "The rules are simple," says Conway. "You shoot the zombies. I did this to pass time, I have no shortage of ammo. Now that there's two of us, I suppose we should set up some rules." + + +You agree on ten points per killed zombie. Twenty if you steal a kill from someone else. You lose five points if you don't kill a zombie first shot. Conway seems very invested in the game, but you just see it as target practice. "Alright," he says. "Three, two..." + + +You kill a zombie on the very first shot, standing next to a jeep. The next kill is in the driver's seat of a station wagon. "I think bonus points are in order for that one," says Conway. Before you know it, you're into the game, too. You don't kill every zombie on the first shot, but you're decent. Conway, of course, has double your points by the time you've used up all your rounds. "Good game," he says. "We should head back, I guess." +> A Calling +Your walk back is uneventful. You still aren't sure what the point of that excursion was, but it's nice to get your mind off impending doom for awhile. Plus, as Conway said, there's no shortage of bullets. + + +You arrive back at the campsite as night is falling. "Well, time to hit the hay," says Conway. "Are we leaving for Washington tomorrow?" you say. It's not that you're getting impatient, but you don't see a reason (beyond Conway's personal reason) for staying back. Conway slowly nods. "Yeah. Yeah, we'll leave soon." + + +"Soon?" you ask. "Or tomorrow?" Conway doesn't answer this time. You begin to question whether joining him was a good idea, and consider ditching him if you need to. As you retire to your tent, you hear a crackling noise from Conway's duffel bag. Quickly, he fishes out the object. It's a walkie talkie. + + +Chzzz.....Zhhcccc..tzzz....Hello? Anytzzzz....anyone there? Conway, is chzzzzzzzzzz.... + + +"Yes? Hello, yes! Yes, this is Conway Matthews, deployed with the fourth wave? Do you copy?" + + +Tzhhhhhh.....Chzzzz...... getting really bad outthcccczzzz....going to leave soon.....wanted to check for any others....tchzz.......tchzzzare you? Come to the......thczzzzz..... + + +Conway fiddles with the receiver in an attempt to make the signal stronger. "I'm losing connection! Where are we supposed to go?" + + +Tchzzzzzz....................341...tchzzzstreet.....local museum..... + + +Conway looks up at you in slow recognition. "The museum," you repeat. Conway nods. "Let's go. Now." + + +You quickly collapse the tent, while Conway packs various weapons into his duffel bag. "We aren't gonna have room for everything," he says. "It's either the guns, or the food. I can fit some of both, but we need to make our choice quick." + + +Meanwhile, the person on the other end of the walkie talkie gives out more advice. + + +Streets are crowdetchcchhh........be careful.....the dead aren't gchhhhhhhhh.......hundreds of them...in the streets........come quick.....we need to leave soon... + + +You can make out gunshots in the background. You can hear the same gunshots echoing through the city. +> Mostly guns +"Pack more guns," you say. "We'll need them for the dead." Conway nods. You disassemble a large gun with Conway's instruction. After the duffel bag is full of guns, you're ready to leave. "Come on," he says. "Through the backstreets." + + +You can immediately tell what the others were talking about. Where the streets used to be empty (of zombies, not of cars), there are now vast hordes. They aren't moving in any direction, or at all for that matter. They just bump into each other and walk in circles. You and Conway elect to stay off the roads, and slip between buildings. + + +Meanwhile, Conway keeps a conversation going with the other soldier. Through garbled radio speech, you hear him tell you what's going on. The dead are mostly avoiding the museum, which is why that's their pick-up spot. + + +You're sneaking past a rogue group of zed when the radio suddenly emits a loud burst of static. The group slowly turns their heads, and they growl at a potential food source. "Oh, please no," Conway whispers. The dead slowly hobble over to where you're advancing. You don't know whether to keep sneaking or lash out, but Conway makes that decision for you. Whipping out his knife, he takes the top half the the closest zombie's skull off with one sweep. + + +You draw your knife, and take care of a few of the others. After the horde is cleared, Conway switches off the walkie talkie. "Not gonna go through that again." + + +You slowly progress through the city amongst the waves of walkers. Eventually, the museum is in sight. You're surprised to see an actual helicopter guarded by a handful of soldiers. Conway switches the walkie talkie back on. + + +"We can see you, over." + + +Tchhhhhh....okay, that's good......These hordes are getting worse....no way you're gonna make it through here.....we can provide covering fire......run for it...... + + +You look at Conway, and nod. The soldiers reveal several guns, and start firing on the group of zombies. Taking the chance, you follow Conway through the gunfire. A few zombies attempt to follow you, but you're moving too fast for them. When you get past the hordes, the soldiers wave to you and open the helicopter doors. "GET IN!" + + +You climb into the helicopter after Conway, with a sea of rotting flesh at your heels. You slam the door shut, and hear the helicopter blades whir to life. "Come on! Let's get this bird off the ground!" shouts one of the soldiers. The helicopter slowly lifts off the ground, with a few zombies holding on for dear life to the bottom. They slip free once you're airborne. + + + +> Airborne +The sky view of the city is quite depressing. The streets are full of cars and zombies, buildings sit demolished and broken, and you can see a few places that you recognize from before all this. It hurts to see them invaded by corpses. + + +In the helicopter, you are accompanied by three men (not including Conway). Roger seems to be the only one ordering people around, so you assume he's in charge. Ozzy, the pilot of the helicopter, silently minds his own business. The third soldier, Matthias, isn't dressed in a soldier's uniform. What he's wearing could only be classified as a 'makeshift doctor's outfit'. You wonder if he was involved with helping injured civilians. + + +"Where exactly are we aiming to land?" asks Conway. "There's another outpost just a bit north, with more gas stores," answers Matthias. "That is, assuming we'll be the first to arrive. Communication's been lost for awhile, so it's just kind of a mad rush for survival at this point." + + +"And we have the ultimate goal of getting back to Washington, correct?" you ask. Roger nods. "It kinda depends on what mindset you have. Some have the 'save as many as you can, carry out our original orders' mindset. I personally follow the 'let's stay alive' mindset. Provided we make it back to Washington on two legs, we should be fine." + + +You stare out the window some more, watching the rivers of death move through the city. +> The landing +You've always kind of wondered what riding in a helicopter would be like. Now you know: boring, with a slight touch of fear of heights. + + +Finally, Ozzy makes a short announcement. "We're nearing the landing spot." Thank goodness. Suddenly, something starts beeping on the control board. "What's that?" asks Roger. + + +"We don't have enough to make it there," Ozzy says, with slight fear in his voice. "At this rate, we'll have to walk the last few miles to get to the gas stores, and then take them back on foo-" + + +Ozzy is interrupted by several metallic noises, like someone is dumping marbles onto the helicopter. "What in the.." says Roger. You look out the window, and are shocked to see a group of people firing at the helicopter. + + +"Making an emergency landing," says Ozzy. "Brace yourselves." Roger stares out the window in disbelief. "Why the hell are they shooting at us?" + + +To your surprise, the shooters break into a run and follow the helicopter on its course downward. "We're going to meet them when we land," you say. Matthias and Roger are already arming themselves. "Well then," says Roger. "Let's meet 'em." + + +When the helicopter plunks down, and the blades whir to a stop, the shooters are ready at the doors. A gravelly voice commands you to come out, unarmed. + + +"That'll be the day," says Roger. "We aren't doing anything of the sort. Actually, you're the ones who should be running. I'll give you five seconds. Five..." + + +Five is plenty for them. The shooters open fire, damaging the helicopter's window and hull. The soldiers quickly return fire, but the battle's pretty one-sided. The shooters definitely have the numbers, and the better guns. + + +"What do you want from us?" asks Roger. This is the first time you're getting a good look at the shooters. They look horrible, dressed in filthy clothing, with generally ugly faces. Not a single one is clean-shaven or looks like they've had a haircut even once. + + +"We want your 'copter," grunts one of the shooters. "We can't allow that," says Roger. "We're headed back to Washington. You should come, there are showers, and fresh food, and-" + + +"NO!" the shooter angrily kicks a rock. "We want the helicopter! And food! And books! And all of it! And guns! And snakes! And cell phones!" + + +The soldiers look at each other in disbelief. "These people have lost it," whispers Conway. Should you give up what you can, or try to diffuse the situation? + + + +> Give up guns +"Okay," you say. "We have extra guns. You can have some of them." This seems to pacify the people. You quickly go back into the helicopter and get the duffel bag Conway brought along. You empty it of guns, and offer a good amount (but not too much) of them to the people. + + +You are kind of shocked when the man walks up to you and takes the first gun, a pistol, out of your hand...in his mouth. He then proceeds to take guns off of you one by one. When he has what he wants, he backs off. + + +"Ftill wuff hewicoffter," he says through the gun in his mouth. "What?" The man spits the pistol onto the ground. "We still want the helicopter." + + +Matthias shakes his head. "This is ridiculous. We should leave." Roger shakes his head. "We can't, they'll gun us down." + + +"Is there any way we can work around this?" you call to the man. He thinks for a moment. "Yes. If we can't have the helicopter, we want...follow us." + + +The man promptly turns around and motions for you to follow him. +> Refuse to follow +You stay where you are. The other soldiers do the same. When the man sees you standing still, he loses it. + + +He throws his hands up in the air, and makes sputtering noises. He then proceeds to do some sort of angry dance, flinging his limbs around. The whole time, he's talking in broken English. + + +Finally, he realizes he's in the presence of other people. He turns to you, and points at your stomach, then to your face. "Follow." He follows up the action by raising a gun. +> Follow +Reluctantly, you follow the man. Roger stops you. "You sure this is the wisest choice?" + + +Conway chimes in. "Yeah, these guys seem a little...'on edge'." You nod. "I know this is dumb, but they have the firepower, and outnumber us two to one. We don't have another option." + + +Slowly, your group follows the strange folk over to an empty parking lot. A group of dumpsters have been arranged in a defensive wall. Corpses litter the area. You can see piles of trash from discarded food, as well as several empty cans and bottles. Dirty mattresses propped against the dumpsters presumably serve as beds. + + +"Welcome!" yells the man. The few people that were waiting at the camp stand up. They stare emotionlessly into your eyes. "Sit down," says the man, gesturing to a spot on the ground. "Oh," you say, "You want us to...join you?" + + +Uncomfortable, you and your group sit amongst the filthy survivors. "So, now that you're part of us, you have to pass initiation," says the man. You sit up. "Hold up," says Roger. "We aren't joining you. That was never up for arguing." The man sticks out a pouty lip, and walks over to where Roger sits. Roger rises, and meets the man. + + +"Yes," says the man. "You will be joining us for dinner." + + +Suddenly, Roger pulls a gun from his belt and shoots the man in the head, killing him. Horrified, the remaining members of the other group fish around for their guns, and begin to fire aimlessly. You group stands up defensively, and you realize you don't have a weapon of your own. As gunshots ring around you, you hide under a dumpster. The other group quickly loses track of your people. You stay hidden under the dumpster, while the garbage group searches out your people. You see a pair of feet coming over to your dumpster. + + + +> Run away +Without thinking, you climb out form under the dumpster on the opposite side of the unknown enemy. You crawl over to the next dumpster to climb over, when you hear an excited, "Found one!" behind you. + + +A bullet rips through your midsection, causing you to yell in pain. You hear a triumphant laugh behind you, and your attacker grabs you by the feet. You are dragged into the middle of the parking lot. The man who brought you here stands over you with a gun. + + +"This is what happens to people who don't join us for dinner," he says, and shoots you in the kneecap, immobilizing you. You yell out again, and receive a shot in the side. Several more bullets go through you, until you're barely alive. As your vision fades, the man's laugh pounds in your eardrum.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Reluctantly, you follow the man. Roger stops you. "You sure this is the wisest choice?" + + +Conway chimes in. "Yeah, these guys seem a little...'on edge'." You nod. "I know this is dumb, but they have the firepower, and outnumber us two to one. We don't have another option." + + +Slowly, your group follows the strange folk over to an empty parking lot. A group of dumpsters have been arranged in a defensive wall. Corpses litter the area. You can see piles of trash from discarded food, as well as several empty cans and bottles. Dirty mattresses propped against the dumpsters presumably serve as beds. + + +"Welcome!" yells the man. The few people that were waiting at the camp stand up. They stare emotionlessly into your eyes. "Sit down," says the man, gesturing to a spot on the ground. "Oh," you say, "You want us to...join you?" + + +Uncomfortable, you and your group sit amongst the filthy survivors. "So, now that you're part of us, you have to pass initiation," says the man. You sit up. "Hold up," says Roger. "We aren't joining you. That was never up for arguing." The man sticks out a pouty lip, and walks over to where Roger sits. Roger rises, and meets the man. + + +"Yes," says the man. "You will be joining us for dinner." + + +Suddenly, Roger pulls a gun from his belt and shoots the man in the head, killing him. Horrified, the remaining members of the other group fish around for their guns, and begin to fire aimlessly. You group stands up defensively, and you realize you don't have a weapon of your own. As gunshots ring around you, you hide under a dumpster. The other group quickly loses track of your people. You stay hidden under the dumpster, while the garbage group searches out your people. You see a pair of feet coming over to your dumpster. + + + +> Stay Put +Despite your fear, you stay put. The pair of feet walks up to you, and you hear the top of the dumpster being opened. Then, it closes, and you hear a dissatisfied, "Nobody over here." + + +The people struggle to find any of your group, you scattered pretty quickly. As you hide, you make eye contact with Ozzy, who's hidden under an adjacent dumpster. You see fear in his eyes. He's slowly pulling a small gun out of his pocket, and holding eye contact with you. + + +"Well, well, well. Come out when you're ready, hooligans," the man who led you here says. The other group sits down in the middle of the parking lot, and begins to eat. + + +Ozzy slowly makes his way out from under the dumpster, out of sight of the others. You do the same. You sit behind the dumpster and think over your next move. +> Stay behind the dumpster +You stay behind the dumpster, and out of sight. To reveal yourself now would be suicide. + + +After waiting for a few minutes, you peek out from behind the dumpster. The other group shows no signs of moving soon. Ozzy has crawled past the dumpsters and in the direction of the helicopter. When he sees you, he waves for you to follow him. You get down on all fours and crawl after him, staying behind the dumpsters. + + +When you get far enough away, you see that the others have already escaped. "Took you long enough," says Roger. "I wanted to make sure it was safe, you say. Roger shrugs. + + +"Okay," Ozzy whispers. "Let's leave while the Garbage Pail Kids are still having dinner." You follow the others back to the helicopter. + + +"None of their gunfire hit anything too important. We'll make it back, but it won't look pretty," Ozzy declares. The others breathe a sigh of relief. "What about the windows?" Matthias asks. "We just won't be able to go as far up in the air, and if we get shot at again, we're toast, but we should be fine," Ozzy answers. + + +You board the helicopter, and start to lift off. During the entire thing, you're afraid the other group will come running back, guns in hand. Fortunately, they never do. + + +"Okay, as previously stated," Ozzy says, "We'll be a few miles short of our target. Don't get too comfortable." +> Gas +You're on edge the rest of the ride, but nothing else goes wrong. + + +"What do you reckon happened to those people?" Roger asks. "The apocalypse can have a serious effect on some people," says Matthias. "They might've been homeless people, or mental patients, or something like that." + + +Finally, Ozzy brings the helicopter to a stop on the ground. "Here we are," he says. Everyone gets out of the helicopter, and starts the trek over to the fuel stores. "Let's hope there's any left for us," mutters Roger. + + +Along the way, you notice the bodies of zed scattered around. All of them were victim to a gunshot in the head. "Someone came through here," says Conway, "And they were goin' for it." You hope that whoever this was, they weren't searching for fuel. "Come on," says Matthias. "If there's competition, we have to beat them to the outpost." + + +It doesn't really matter how fast you ran. When you arrive at the outpost, it's obvious nobody has been through here. The area is packed with the dead. "You've gotta be kidding me," says Roger. The fuel stores are visible, but the whole outpost is surrounded by a chain-link fence. There are no visible gates or entry points, but a large hole in one side of the fence explains how the zombies got in. + + +"Should we run and gun 'em?" asks Conway. "That depends," you answer, "...on how much firepower we have." + + +"If it comes down to it, we might have to find another way through this," says Roger. +> Create a distraction +"We don't have the guns for this," you say. + + +"I have an idea," says Matthias. "If we could make more holes in the fence, and lure the dead out of the way....we'd have no issue getting what we need." + + +Conway volunteers to make some noise and distract the hordes. The rest of you split up around the fence. You are given a large knife to cut the fence. "Okay," says Roger. "We're all clear, correct? Cut through the fence, and as soon as there's enough room for the dead to make it out, you back away. Once we're all clear, I give the whistle, and Conway does his thing." + + +You go to work hacking through the fence. A few zombies take notice, and push up against the fence. "Stay back," you whisper. Clink. The first fence loop breaks open. One of the zombies forces a hand through the hole. You kill it, and keep going. Clink. Clink. Clink. + + +Soon, you have a sizable hole. You step back to see if the zombies can fit. It's a struggle, but eventually one of them forces its way through the hole. You decide you're done, and back up. + + +You wait a few minutes for Conway, but the gunfire never comes. Roger looks around in bewilderment. "What's going on? He should've-" + + +Roger is cut off by the fence collapsing. The pressure of all the corpses shoving up against it caused the supports to snap. The pile of zombies struggle to their feet, and give chase. "Fall back!" yells Roger, and the team scatters. + + + +> Run +You blindly scramble through the forest, not thinking enough to follow someone else or even pay attention to what direction you're running in. You point yourself towards the helicopter, since you assume that's where the others are going. + + +You can easily outrun the horde, that's no problem. Once you're far enough away, your biggest concern becomes finding the others. You scan the forest in search of familiar faces, but find none. In panic, you continue towards the helicopter. The horde of zed has made its way further out, and a few eager corpses have already made it pretty far out. + + +You hear yelling from a few yards away, and see Roger running in the direction of the helicopter. You run up to follow, and call his name. He looks around, spots you, and waves you over. + + +"Come on!" he shouts. "Back to the helicopter!" A few moments later, you hear gunshots nearby. The others. + + +"Should we go back?" you ask. Roger doesn't answer, he's dead set on making it back to the helicopter. You hesitate, before following him. The zombies have advanced further, and you doubt you'd be able to come back safely if you turned around now. + + +As you make your way to the helicopter, you see the garbage people, the ones that shot at the helicopter, approaching in the distance. They must have heard the gunfire and realized their prisoners got free. + + +"Well....crap. This is a problem," says Roger, his voice wavering. You look behind you; the zombies haven't caught up to you yet, but if you keep wasting time, they will. You might be able to make it back to the helicopter before interacting with the garbage people to get a gun or something. +> Look For Your Friends +You resolve not to let the others die, and turn around. + + +"What are you doing?"" yells Roger, but you pay no attention. You maneuver around the first few zombies, and back into the woods. You call out names while searching for movement among the trees. + + +"Matthias!" you yell, scanning the broken fence. "Conway? Ozzy?" you don't see anything, except advancing hordes of the dead. Suddenly, gunfire erupts from a few yards away. You see Conway firing at a pack of zombies with the signal gun. + + +Conway spots you, and breaks into a run. He's pointing at something behind you, but you're so focused on him that you don't notice the zombie right behind you. You narrowly avoid the monster's jaws, and push it to the ground. By then, Conway has caught up to you. + + +"Come on," you say. "To the helicopter." Both of you take off. On the way, you ask where Ozzy is. + + +"I think he made it out before I did. He should be at the helicopter right now," Conway answers. "As for Matthias, I don't kn-" + + +Conway suddenly stops as a bullet hits him squarely between the eyes. You freeze with fear, and turn to see the garbage people standing before you. The leader steps out. + + +"Thought you could run away, huh?" he taunts, and pops another shell into his shotgun. + + + + +"Here's what we do to runaways around here." + + + + +Bang!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You blindly scramble through the forest, not thinking enough to follow someone else or even pay attention to what direction you're running in. You point yourself towards the helicopter, since you assume that's where the others are going. + + +You can easily outrun the horde, that's no problem. Once you're far enough away, your biggest concern becomes finding the others. You scan the forest in search of familiar faces, but find none. In panic, you continue towards the helicopter. The horde of zed has made its way further out, and a few eager corpses have already made it pretty far out. + + +You hear yelling from a few yards away, and see Roger running in the direction of the helicopter. You run up to follow, and call his name. He looks around, spots you, and waves you over. + + +"Come on!" he shouts. "Back to the helicopter!" A few moments later, you hear gunshots nearby. The others. + + +"Should we go back?" you ask. Roger doesn't answer, he's dead set on making it back to the helicopter. You hesitate, before following him. The zombies have advanced further, and you doubt you'd be able to come back safely if you turned around now. + + +As you make your way to the helicopter, you see the garbage people, the ones that shot at the helicopter, approaching in the distance. They must have heard the gunfire and realized their prisoners got free. + + +"Well....crap. This is a problem," says Roger, his voice wavering. You look behind you; the zombies haven't caught up to you yet, but if you keep wasting time, they will. You might be able to make it back to the helicopter before interacting with the garbage people to get a gun or something. +> Go for the helicopter, get a gun +You realize you aren't getting out of this alive without a weapon, and run for the helicopter. The garbage people start to fire back, but that doesn't go to smoothly. Roger follows you into the cockpit, safe from the garbage people. + + +You scrounge around, and are rewarded with a small handgun with a full clip. Looking at the approaching horde, you realize the garbage people may not even be your biggest threat at the moment. +> Fire at the dead +The advancing hordes of zombies are closer and more plentiful, you decide. Plus, the garbage people will have to fight them off as well. You get into a defensive stance with both hands on the gun, and open fire on the horde. The gun's clip has thirteen bullets in it; you manage to kill six zombies before running dry. + + +"Here," says Roger, tapping you on the shoulder. "Found more of them." he gives you another fully loaded clip. "We had a bag stashed under the seat," Roger explains. "For emergency." You ditch the empty clip and reload, before taking another shot. + + +You bring down twelve walkers this time, and notice that the garbage people are firing at the dead, too. In a moment, they'll fall back, you can get your people, and leave. Except you can't. It slowly dawns on you that the helicopter's still dead on fuel. + + +Meanwhile (and unbeknownst to you), the garbage people realize they're wasting bullets on the zombies, and go to take out the real threat- you. The leader approaches the cockpit, out of your view. He sneaks right up to the door and kills you, without you ever knowing. + + + + +If it's any consolation, none of your group made it out, either.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You realize you aren't getting out of this alive without a weapon, and run for the helicopter. The garbage people start to fire back, but that doesn't go to smoothly. Roger follows you into the cockpit, safe from the garbage people. + + +You scrounge around, and are rewarded with a small handgun with a full clip. Looking at the approaching horde, you realize the garbage people may not even be your biggest threat at the moment. +> Fire at the garbage people +At the moment, the garbage people pose more of a threat to you than anything, you decide. You turn so you can see them clearly. + + +The leader is approaching the helicopter, so you fire at him first. You were aiming at his chest, but the bullet goes through his arm. It still cripples him, so it's done it's job. The other garbage people quickly catch on, and start firing back. + + +Your gun's clip has thirteen bullets in it; you manage to kill three garbage people before you run dry. For a moment you're worried that you just made things a lot worse, but Roger passes you another fully loaded clip. + + +"We keep them under the seats," he explains. "For emergencies." You ditch the old clip, and keep firing. Luckily, the garbage people's guns are louder than yours, and your gunfire combined with the hordes of the dead cause them to eventually fall back. + + +"There's one problem solved," you say. "Now we just need to get our group back." + + +"Actually, that problem is also solved," says Roger, pointing into the trees. Conway, Ozzy, and Matthias are running through the trees towards the helicopter. They're being followed by a massive horde. You open the doors as wide as they'll go in preparation. + + +When the three make it back, you slam the door shut and hide. "Hopefully, the gunfire from that other group will draw the horde," says Matthias. The group sits quietly in the helicopter for a while. Soon, it becomes clear you'll be spending a long time in the helicopter. The dead show no sign of going away, and the growls, while faint, are a bit too close for comfort. +> Prepare to spend the night in the helicopter +Thankfully, the seats of the helicopter are soft enough to lay on. As the sun sets, you lay down. The group agrees to taking two-hour shifts to watch for garbage people or zombies, and warn the others. You volunteer for a later spot, so you can get some rest. + + +The night drags on, safe but very boring. When you wake up for your shift, it's almost light outside. + + +"Hey!" you say. "Why didn't you guys wake me up?" + + +"It was my fault," says Ozzy. "I just took the whole night." + + +"You shouldn't have done that," exclaims Conway. "You have to fly this helicopter!" + + +"Uh, not any time soon," Ozzy says, gesturing out the window. It's true. The dead are meandering outside, not too interested in letting you get your fuel. + + +"Looks like some action needs to be taken," says Matthias. "So, what's plan B?" +> Keep waiting +You keep sitting in the helicopter, with the hopes that the dead will eventually leave. Your food situation is decent, and you're prepared to spend multiple days here if you need to. + + +"We're really doing this?" asks Ozzy. It's not the best plan, but it saves bullets and effort. + + +"Yeah, we are," you answer. Outside, it doesn't seem like your plan is working. The zombies are basically stagnant, not even walking around. They just stand there, like a creepy flash mob. You pray for a gunshot, or a plane, or some noise to draw them away. + + +Finally, Conway gets restless. He gets up, and takes a flare gun from out of his duffel bag. + + +"Conway, what are you doing?" asks Matthias. Conway doesn't answer, but goes for the helicopter door. The rest of the group moves to stop him. + + +"Get off!" Conway yells. "I'm not gonna sit and wait any longer! Y'all want a distraction? I'll give you one!" Conway yanks open the door, attracting the attention of a few zed. Conway fires a flare over the field, and then slams the door shut. The good news is the flare lands on the opposite side of the field, and most of the horde clumps around it. The bad news is that the door slam attracted a few stragglers over to you. The group immediately jumps up and readies their weapons. + + +"I'm gonna open the door and let a few in," Matthias says, "Then we kill 'em. Let a few in, kill 'em, let, kill, repeat until they're gone. Ready?" The first few step forward, and are eliminated quickly. Nobody's using guns because the noise would damage hearing, so there's just as much of a threat posed by the others' knives as the zombies do. + + +Once the dead are clear, you're open to grab the fuel. You waste no time getting over to the tanks, where the area is now empty of the dead. + + +"Lucky us," Conway remarks as your team fills gas canisters up. You lug them back over to the helicopter, and begin to fill up the tank. Ozzy goes in to watch the fuel gauge, while Matthias keeps watch of the horde. Three painful and long trips later, the tank is full. + + +"Come on," Matthias says, "They're getting restless. Load up!" Everyone piles into the helicopter, and Ozzy starts the blades. The horde, noticing the new potential for food, turns over to you. By the time they get anywhere near you, you're up again. + + +"Take that, growlers!" Ozzy shouts over the engine. +> Airborne (Again) +Once in the air, Roger addresses Conway. + + +"That little stunt, ripping open the helicopter door like that? Not gonna fly with me," Roger says. Conway stands up. + + +"Excuse me, but did anybody get so much as a scratch on them? My little 'stunt' got us to safety," Conway retorts. + + +"You're lucky that's the way things went. Next time, it might turn out different." + + +"Yeah,, if someone who didn't know what they were doing tried it! I've had several years of experience on the battlefield." + + +"CONWAY MATTHEWS, LET ME REMIND YOU THAT YOU ARE TAKING THAT TONE WITH FIRST SERGEANT ROGER MILLS! I WILL NOT ALLOW YOU TO ENDANGER THE LIVES OF MULTIPLE SOLDIERS AND A CIVILIAN! DESIST AT ONCE!" + + +Both soldiers rise and stare each other coldly in the eyes. + + +"Guys? Right when we're flying over hordes of man-eating monsters is not the best time to get physical," Ozzy warns from the front. + + +"Sit down, and obey my word," Roger hisses. Conway begrudgingly takes a seat, and holds a stare with Roger. Matthias makes eye contact with you, and you see a slight twinge of fear in his eyes. He's been with Roger for a while, so if he's worried, you're worried. Roger finally sits down next to you, as far away from Conway as he can get. + + +"We won't make it to Washington," Ozzy suddenly says. This gets the attention of everyone immediately. "We don't have the fuel. We'll get close, but we don't have enough, even with the extra fuel." + + +Everyone looks around at each other. + + +"So we need to find another reserve," Roger says. Matthias pulls out a pocket map, and a pen. "Where will we run out of fuel?" + + +"I think about here," Roger says, pointing to a spot on the map. It's in Oregon, not far from the border. "There aren't any fuel reserves there, far as I know," Roger continues. + + +"Any chance we could get the fuel from cars?" you offer. + + +Roger shakes his head. "This thing won't take car fuel, of any kind," he says. "Unless somebody just happens to have filled their tank with jet fuel." + + +"We'll figure something out," Matthias says. The subject is dropped. You just don't want to think about what will happen if you can't find any fuel. +> Continue +For the next few hours, the ride is uneventful Everyone is minding their own business, and the cabin is silent, except for the occasional noise from Ozzy, at the controls. + + +Before you know it, you're drifting off, and then it's a new day. You look out the window. The terrain has changed. You're no longer above a city of bodies, but empty roads, with only a few zombies lurking around. You're getting closer to Oregon, which means closer to the fuel issue. You don't want to think about when that time comes. Luckily, Roger takes your mind off it. + + +"Breakfast time," he says, fishing around for a backpack. The team searches out cans to make a meal out of, and that's when it becomes apparent that you're very low on food. Three cans left to split between five people, for another two days, and that's assuming the fuel thing goes smoothly, which you can guess it won't. + + +"We're gonna have to touch ground again," says Matthias. Nobody wants to admit it, but yes, you'll have to be at the same level as the dead once more. "Lower us down," Matthias says to Ozzy. "We need to run some errands." + + +Food is definitely easier to come across than helicopter fuel, but you're still worried. There's been plenty of time for every store and market to be emptied of all its goods. When the helicopter sets down and the engine dies down, you scan for a sign of food. The only promise is a road sign telling you fast food places nearby, and there isn't much opportunity there. + + +"Bingo," Conway suddenly says. He's spotted a farmhouse through the trees. "That's where we'll find what we're looking for." The group slowly goes to follow, but Roger stops. + + +"Wait. We need someone to stand at the helicopter and guard it," he says. + + +"I can do it," says Matthias. "Unless, anyone else would rather take the spot." +> Volunteer to watch the helicopter while the others leave +"I'll do it," you say. Matthias nods. The other soldiers go over a plan for the farmhouse, while you take a defensive position behind the helicopter door. You figure that it's extremely unlikely you'll see anybody, you still want to remain vigilant. You sit up straight and try your hardest to stay awake. + + +The others have been gone for a worryingly long amount of time, and you decide to go check on them. You get out of your seat, and go look at the farmhouse. From where you are, you can't see any fighting or danger, and you haven't heard any gunshots. You assume they're just doing a thorough search, and cross your fingers for some fresh bread. + + +As you turn to get back in the helicopter, you are met with a bow and arrow pointed at your face. Its user is a man with long blonde hair that covers his eyes. + + +"Water," he says, in a parched voice. "Give it to me." Shaking, you slowly nod. You climb into the helicopter, and fumble around for the pack with the bottled water in it. You find the pack, but then you remember your gun. +> Shoot him +As quick as you can, you turn to shoot the attacker. Your bullet goes over his shoulder. He shouts, and releases an arrow into your chest. You cry out, and the man yanks the water pack from your hands. + + +"See ya," he says, and slams the helicopter door shut. He gives a little wave before leaving. + + +You struggle to get the arrow free from your skin. That arrow had a lot of power behind it, and you end up staining the seats of the helicopter with your blood, and doing all kinds of irreversible damage to your chest. When the soldiers come back, you're barely alive. Your final moments are of being shaken back and forth by Conway, who is trying to get you to sit up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"I'll do it," you say. Matthias nods. The other soldiers go over a plan for the farmhouse, while you take a defensive position behind the helicopter door. You figure that it's extremely unlikely you'll see anybody, you still want to remain vigilant. You sit up straight and try your hardest to stay awake. + + +The others have been gone for a worryingly long amount of time, and you decide to go check on them. You get out of your seat, and go look at the farmhouse. From where you are, you can't see any fighting or danger, and you haven't heard any gunshots. You assume they're just doing a thorough search, and cross your fingers for some fresh bread. + + +As you turn to get back in the helicopter, you are met with a bow and arrow pointed at your face. Its user is a man with long blonde hair that covers his eyes. + + +"Water," he says, in a parched voice. "Give it to me." Shaking, you slowly nod. You climb into the helicopter, and fumble around for the pack with the bottled water in it. You find the pack, but then you remember your gun. +> Give him the water +Not wanting to risk conflict, you hand the bag over to the man. He takes it, and slings it over his shoulder. + + +"Thanks. Now get out," he commands. You oblige. "I see your stuff," the man says from behind you, the arrow in his bow brushing against your back. "I see those guns. You got any food back there? I'm hungry." + + +You can't think of anything to do, so you try to stall. "Who are you?" + + +"Name's Cedar. What's it to you?" + + +"Why are you stealing from me?" you ask, careful not to say 'us'. It's better if he thinks you're alone. + + +"I had people. They ditched me. Now I got nothing but this bow, and I need basic stuff to live. Food, Water. I'm gonna get it fro-" + + +Cedar suddenly takes a bullet to the forehead, and slumps to the ground. Conway comes running up from the trees. + + +"Did he hurt you?" Conway asks. You're surprised to see that he cares so much about you. You shake your head, and go to retrieve the water pack. Matthias and Ozzy have large cases of seed and preserved food in their hands. + + +"Okay, one more hurdle," Ozzy says. "We get gas in Oregon, and we're home free." +> Continue +The trip continues, and you quickly lose track of time. It's daytime, so you know you shouldn't be sleeping, but you can't see where the sun is out the windows from where you are. Of course, time doesn't really hold much value anymore. You can't be late to Washington. + + +Roger and Conway still refuse to speak to each other. Each just acts like the other isn't there. Whenever one speaks, the other is silent, and they make great effort to avoid eye contact. The others soldiers have caught wind of this, but nobody seems to be making an effort to help the situation. You decide to leave it alone for now. + + +"Good news! We're crossing the California-Oregon border.....now!" Ozzy shouts from the cabin. The team rejoices, but you're just worried. The small pocket of fear in your gut grows. "We don't have much fuel left. I'm probably going to touch down soon," he finishes. + + +You land on the outskirts of a small town. "There weren't any fuel-holding outposts, as Roger said, but there is an outpost here, so it's a possibility that there will be fuel here, in one form or another," Ozzy declares. "Who's guarding the helicopter this time?" + + +Conway volunteers, most likely to get away from Roger. Nobody in the group objects, so you don't either. The less time those two spend together, the better. Conway takes a seat in the cabin, while the rest of the group sets out for the town. + + +"There's not much hope that this place is still inhabited," Roger says on the way. "Except maybe by the dead. As long as we're careful, there shouldn't be much of an issue." Roger points out a large metal wall in the distance. It's made up of three metal fences, put one after the other. You can see a few places where the fence broke, and entire panels are missing. + + +You approach the outpost with caution, but stop when you realize the whole thing is empty. When you step into the compound through a hole in the fence, the ground is littered with zombies, all of them shot in the head. + + +"What?" exclaims Matthias when he sees. "How could this have happened? Unless..." + + +"This wasn't the dead," Roger finishes. "Somebody did this. Somebody took down this outpost. We had three tanks, and a heavy machine gun stationed at this outpost, and somebody wiped it clean." You stare in disbelief. If there's a threat that's stronger than the U.S. military's stores, that's all the more reason to get to Washington immediately. + + +The group splits up to search the most likely areas where fuel would be, if there was a landed helicopter or a truck containing jet fuel around. But, of course, the attackers didn't leave so much as a single can of food, much less a tank of jet fuel. + + +"We're gonna have to look elsewhere," Matthias declares. + + + + + +> elsewhere +"The only other place I think can think of that would hold the fuel we need is an airport or something," Matthias says. "And that wouldn't even work." + + +You try to think of places you've seen a helicopter. News helicopters? No, the probability of there still being fuel in them is too low. There are no more outposts nearby, so military aid is useless. The only thing left you can think of is recreational helicopters, but the thought of a 'posh' country club in a town this small is, once again, very unlikely. + + +"We don't have to take the helicopter, do we?" you suggest. "We could leave it here, and take something easier to transport, like a bus or a car." The team seems to consider the thought. + + +"Helicopter fuel is only going to get harder and harder to find," Matthias points out. Finally, Roger agrees. + + +You find several cars abandoned on the side of the road, and take the two in the best condition for your group. Having two cars is better for your group because it's less cramped, and you can sit Roger and Conway in opposite vehicles. You siphon the gas from the remaining cars, and drive back. + + +Conway is less than pleased with the group's decision. "We need the helicopter!" he insists. "We skip over so much crap that way!" + + +Roger, for the first time since the incident, faces Conway sternly. "We're taking the cars," he says. +> Continue +Moving everything from the helicopter to the cars is not an easy task. It takes up most of what's left of the day, and your shoulder is aching when you're done. After the helicopter is empty, everyone splits into the cars. Roger puts a 'Come to Washington or Die' message on the helicopter door. "Just in case," he explains. + + +Oregon is surprisingly zombie-free, after what you saw in California. The streets are empty. Not full of dead corpses or defeated zombies, but completely empty. It's strange. + + +"Odd that there are no walkers here," Ozzy says, echoing your thoughts. "Think there's a reason for it?" + + +"Maybe we cleared them all out," Roger suggests. "It would make sense for the guards to want to keep the dead as far from sanctuary as possible." You decide it's still out of the ordinary for there to be absolutely no zombies around. + + +"Maybe it's because there's no food?" you suggest. "I mean, we've known them to follow noises and the smell of food, so maybe Oregon ran out." The team seems to be thinking over this possibility, when all your theories are disproven. + + +"Holy hell," Roger whispers. You're looking out over the city of Portland, Oregon- or, more accurately, what's left of it. Every single zombie that was missing from Oregon as packed tightly into the streets of Portland. They have no room to move, and a chorus of hungry growls emanates over the city. + + +"No way we're getting through that," says Roger. "We should've kept the helicopter." + + +Your team gets out of the car. Conway and Matthias get out of the other car. You group up and look out over the maze of rotting flesh that stands between you and salvation. + + +"Think we could sneak through it?" suggests Matthias. "If we cover ourselves in zombie goop, we might be able to pass by." + + +"I say we go in guns ablaze," Conway says. + + +"Are you insane?" Roger shoots back. "Do I need to remind you of the warning I gave you before? You want to fire a gun in that?" Roger points to the zombie-filled streets. "If you sneeze hard enough, you'll be dead. Firing a single shot would be simultaneously slitting all of our throats." + + +Conway doesn't respond, but you can tell he isn't going to heed Roger's words. "Let's go with Matthias' plan, then." + + +Easier said than done. Extracting one zombie from the masses proves to be scary and difficult. But, Ozzy manages to pull it off. He comes back with a bloody corpse slung over his shoulder. "Let's cut this sucker open," he says, "...and have a bath." + + +The fumes are dizzying. Days of rotting organs and waste come billowing out of the cadaver. What's worse is that you're tossing those very guts over your shoulder, on your back, and on your front. After a few minutes, you'd pass for some pretty smelly zombies. You really wish you hadn't ditched the helicopter. + + +You approach the city slowly, your group forming a tight pack. To get separated would mean death. You slowly walk through the crowd, scared to even brush past a zombie. One by one, the dead look at you, decide you aren't good to eat, and stumble off in another direction. More often than you'd like, a zombie is idly standing in your way, meaning you have to try to slip past it with as little contact as possible. + + +Eventually, you realize you're passing through the city center. You notice a lot of uniformed soldiers among the gobs of zombies. But, the plan is working. You can tell you're going ot make it. Not a single zombie even bothers to look at you anymore. You're just another mindless walker. Everything seems to be going on course- until Conway spots a tank in the middle of the road, and starts to go for it. + + +"No!" Roger hisses as quietly as he can. A few nearby zombies stare curiously at him for a moment. "Conway, stop! You are ruining the plan! Get back here!" But, of course, Conway isn't listening. + + +"The plan doesn't matter anymore," Conway whispers back. "If I get control of that tank, we could clear out a path. There'd be no trouble." He grows closer and closer to the tank, with his teammates behind him, begging him to stop and turn around. Finally, he reaches the tank, and struggles to open the hatch at the top. + + +You notice Roger pulling his silencer gun out of his belt. "No," you say, stopping him. "He isn't worth the bullet, or the attention it'll draw." + + +"You sure about that?" Roger asks back. + + +You're too late to do anything, anyway. Conway rips open the hatch to reveal a zombie that was waiting inside. Surprised, he takes a step back, and slips off the tank. He lets out a bloodcurdling scream as he cradles a bite on his arm. The scream causes the idle moaning of the zombies to stop. Slowly, unanimously, the zombies all turn their heads towards a screaming Conway, and the rest of your group. They seem to have caught on to the fact that you aren't zombies. + + +As the space closes in around you, and your innards are divided up between six different sets of hands, you kind of wish you had let Roger shoot Conway. + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For the next few hours, the ride is uneventful Everyone is minding their own business, and the cabin is silent, except for the occasional noise from Ozzy, at the controls. + + +Before you know it, you're drifting off, and then it's a new day. You look out the window. The terrain has changed. You're no longer above a city of bodies, but empty roads, with only a few zombies lurking around. You're getting closer to Oregon, which means closer to the fuel issue. You don't want to think about when that time comes. Luckily, Roger takes your mind off it. + + +"Breakfast time," he says, fishing around for a backpack. The team searches out cans to make a meal out of, and that's when it becomes apparent that you're very low on food. Three cans left to split between five people, for another two days, and that's assuming the fuel thing goes smoothly, which you can guess it won't. + + +"We're gonna have to touch ground again," says Matthias. Nobody wants to admit it, but yes, you'll have to be at the same level as the dead once more. "Lower us down," Matthias says to Ozzy. "We need to run some errands." + + +Food is definitely easier to come across than helicopter fuel, but you're still worried. There's been plenty of time for every store and market to be emptied of all its goods. When the helicopter sets down and the engine dies down, you scan for a sign of food. The only promise is a road sign telling you fast food places nearby, and there isn't much opportunity there. + + +"Bingo," Conway suddenly says. He's spotted a farmhouse through the trees. "That's where we'll find what we're looking for." The group slowly goes to follow, but Roger stops. + + +"Wait. We need someone to stand at the helicopter and guard it," he says. + + +"I can do it," says Matthias. "Unless, anyone else would rather take the spot." +> Go with the group to raid the farmhouse +You let Matthias take over guard duty. Whatever you can do to speed things up, you will. Roger brings the rest of the group closer to the farmhouse. + + +"There's a strong possibility that someone's still alive in there, and they're surrounded by tall grass. Here's what we'll do. We split up, and approach the house from all sides. If you see someone in the window, fire at them. If you here gunshots from someone else, rush the house. The first person to get in the house needs to clear the ground floor, and we'll move from there. Clear?" + + +Everyone nods, and the plan commences. You get set on a straight path to the front door of the farmhouse, while the others spread out. The entire walk over, you listen intently for gunshots, or any sign of disturbance. It never comes, and suddenly you're at the front door. Remembering your instructions, you draw your gun and search the ground floor. + + +As it turns out, the house is abandoned. Searching the place top to bottom yields no humans. The fate of the owner is revealed when you check the basement: a lone corpse, hanging from a noose. + + +"He had such a good setup," comments Roger. "Wonder why he did it." But, of course, there's no time to wonder. Everyone spreads out to search the house again, this time for food. You continue in the basement. + + +The basement is actually quite empty, making you wonder if someone else cleaned the place out first. Just as you are about to give up, you see a message scrawled on a drywall. It looks like it could have been written with blood. + + +THEY TOOK EVERYTHING. I'M SORRY. IT'S NOT WORTH IT ANYMORE. THE WORLD IS ENDING, AND NOBODY WILL BE SAVED. BETTER TO DIE WITH DIGNITY THAN BE TORN APART BY THE ROTTERS. + + +You disagree, but respect the man's choice, and leave the basement. When you come back up, you see that the others were luckier. + + +On your way back, you look over the findings: several small wooden crates packed with cans, and some nonperishables. Not bad, and it's more than you'll need for five for a day. + + +"Any trouble?" Roger asks Matthias as you load the food up. "Yes, actually," Matthias responds. "One guy. But, he wasn't a problem. I'm fine."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Thankfully, the seats of the helicopter are soft enough to lay on. As the sun sets, you lay down. The group agrees to taking two-hour shifts to watch for garbage people or zombies, and warn the others. You volunteer for a later spot, so you can get some rest. + + +The night drags on, safe but very boring. When you wake up for your shift, it's almost light outside. + + +"Hey!" you say. "Why didn't you guys wake me up?" + + +"It was my fault," says Ozzy. "I just took the whole night." + + +"You shouldn't have done that," exclaims Conway. "You have to fly this helicopter!" + + +"Uh, not any time soon," Ozzy says, gesturing out the window. It's true. The dead are meandering outside, not too interested in letting you get your fuel. + + +"Looks like some action needs to be taken," says Matthias. "So, what's plan B?" +> Get armed, and go outside to get the fuel +"We shouldn't wait anymore," you say. "Let's go out, and get the fuel." The others are hesitant, but Conway takes your side immediately. + + +"We know them," Conway says. "We know how they act, how they think. They won't move anywhere until they have reason to, and that could be days. We don't have the capacity to sit and burn off our food, and then try to fly back. Let's go, and let's go now." + + +After everyone has armed themselves, Conway opens the door. The first few zombies turn in your direction, but are quickly subdued by Roger. Roger's gun has a silencer, so he's the go-to shooter for the moment. + + +"The fuel is over there," Roger whispers, gesturing with his gun. "If we stay tight to the tree line, we might be able to sneak past them." The team nods, and rushes to follow the orders. The dead seem to dislike the closed-in trees, and have gravitated over to the fields. By staying among the trees, you have no issues. Almost. + + +As you travel, one curious zombie notices you, and starts to stir. Roger hesitates, and decides not to shoot. + + +"Just keep going," he whispers. As you walk, the zombie steps in close. + + +"What the hell are you doing?" demands Conway. "Shoot it!" + + +Roger shakes his head. "Not worth the bullet," he explains, but Conway won't hear it. He draws his gun, without a silencer, and points it at the zombie. You grab him. + + +"No! That's worse!" you whisper-yell. "You'll attract the whole field, and more!" Conway, of course, doesn't listen. He fires, and the zombie drops to the ground. Behind it, several heads slowly turn towards you, and you hear a low growl. + + +"Run," Roger says, not bothering to whisper. The team breaks into a panic, with people struggling to get past each other. Without the cover of silence, a few start to shoot at the zombies. It almost seems like you'll be able to keep them at bay. + + +"Come on!" Ozzy says. He leads the group in the direction of the fuel tanks. Unfortunately, a considerable portion of the zombies chose to stay back, and inhabit the empty lot. Now, you're sandwiched between two hordes, and you hear the familiar clicking of empty guns. + + +"I'm out," says Conway, furiously pumping the trigger. + + +"Same," Roger says in dismay. "Thanks a million, Conway." + + +The dead close in, and you look for a way out, a weak spot, a break in the horde, anything. But you don't see it. You go to grab for your knife, but the horde is too close. A set of jaws rips into your neck from behind.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Despite your fear, you stay put. The pair of feet walks up to you, and you hear the top of the dumpster being opened. Then, it closes, and you hear a dissatisfied, "Nobody over here." + + +The people struggle to find any of your group, you scattered pretty quickly. As you hide, you make eye contact with Ozzy, who's hidden under an adjacent dumpster. You see fear in his eyes. He's slowly pulling a small gun out of his pocket, and holding eye contact with you. + + +"Well, well, well. Come out when you're ready, hooligans," the man who led you here says. The other group sits down in the middle of the parking lot, and begins to eat. + + +Ozzy slowly makes his way out from under the dumpster, out of sight of the others. You do the same. You sit behind the dumpster and think over your next move. +> Help Ozzy attack the group +You look at Ozzy, and point to the other group. He holds up his gun and nods. + + +You position yourself behind a dumpster, right next to the leader of the other group. You'll grab him and hold him hostage, so that the others will let you go. You wait until the right moment... + + +The man decides he needs to get up, and you strike. As soon as he's on his feet, he's on the ground again, with you holding him down. "Nobody move!" You yell. + + +Sadly, while your plan would have worked, Ozzy wasn't on the same page as you. He fires his gun in an attempt to hit the leader, but instead hits you in the chest, killing you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You've always kind of wondered what riding in a helicopter would be like. Now you know: boring, with a slight touch of fear of heights. + + +Finally, Ozzy makes a short announcement. "We're nearing the landing spot." Thank goodness. Suddenly, something starts beeping on the control board. "What's that?" asks Roger. + + +"We don't have enough to make it there," Ozzy says, with slight fear in his voice. "At this rate, we'll have to walk the last few miles to get to the gas stores, and then take them back on foo-" + + +Ozzy is interrupted by several metallic noises, like someone is dumping marbles onto the helicopter. "What in the.." says Roger. You look out the window, and are shocked to see a group of people firing at the helicopter. + + +"Making an emergency landing," says Ozzy. "Brace yourselves." Roger stares out the window in disbelief. "Why the hell are they shooting at us?" + + +To your surprise, the shooters break into a run and follow the helicopter on its course downward. "We're going to meet them when we land," you say. Matthias and Roger are already arming themselves. "Well then," says Roger. "Let's meet 'em." + + +When the helicopter plunks down, and the blades whir to a stop, the shooters are ready at the doors. A gravelly voice commands you to come out, unarmed. + + +"That'll be the day," says Roger. "We aren't doing anything of the sort. Actually, you're the ones who should be running. I'll give you five seconds. Five..." + + +Five is plenty for them. The shooters open fire, damaging the helicopter's window and hull. The soldiers quickly return fire, but the battle's pretty one-sided. The shooters definitely have the numbers, and the better guns. + + +"What do you want from us?" asks Roger. This is the first time you're getting a good look at the shooters. They look horrible, dressed in filthy clothing, with generally ugly faces. Not a single one is clean-shaven or looks like they've had a haircut even once. + + +"We want your 'copter," grunts one of the shooters. "We can't allow that," says Roger. "We're headed back to Washington. You should come, there are showers, and fresh food, and-" + + +"NO!" the shooter angrily kicks a rock. "We want the helicopter! And food! And books! And all of it! And guns! And snakes! And cell phones!" + + +The soldiers look at each other in disbelief. "These people have lost it," whispers Conway. Should you give up what you can, or try to diffuse the situation? + + + +> Try to talk to them +"Hey," you say. "Listen. We can't afford to give anything up. Is there a possibility that we could work around this?" + + +The man holds up his finger, and draws something in the air. Then, he looks at you expectantly. When you don't know how to respond, the man becomes angry. He furiously draws some sort of picture in the air with his finger over and over again. + + +"What? What is it? What do you want?" you ask. The man finally gets fed up with your incompetence. "WAAATTTTEEERRR!!!!" + + +"We can't spare, um, any water at the moment," you say, almost afraid that he'll flip his lid. Instead, the man gets quiet. "Follow," he finally says, and begins to walk away.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your walk back is uneventful. You still aren't sure what the point of that excursion was, but it's nice to get your mind off impending doom for awhile. Plus, as Conway said, there's no shortage of bullets. + + +You arrive back at the campsite as night is falling. "Well, time to hit the hay," says Conway. "Are we leaving for Washington tomorrow?" you say. It's not that you're getting impatient, but you don't see a reason (beyond Conway's personal reason) for staying back. Conway slowly nods. "Yeah. Yeah, we'll leave soon." + + +"Soon?" you ask. "Or tomorrow?" Conway doesn't answer this time. You begin to question whether joining him was a good idea, and consider ditching him if you need to. As you retire to your tent, you hear a crackling noise from Conway's duffel bag. Quickly, he fishes out the object. It's a walkie talkie. + + +Chzzz.....Zhhcccc..tzzz....Hello? Anytzzzz....anyone there? Conway, is chzzzzzzzzzz.... + + +"Yes? Hello, yes! Yes, this is Conway Matthews, deployed with the fourth wave? Do you copy?" + + +Tzhhhhhh.....Chzzzz...... getting really bad outthcccczzzz....going to leave soon.....wanted to check for any others....tchzz.......tchzzzare you? Come to the......thczzzzz..... + + +Conway fiddles with the receiver in an attempt to make the signal stronger. "I'm losing connection! Where are we supposed to go?" + + +Tchzzzzzz....................341...tchzzzstreet.....local museum..... + + +Conway looks up at you in slow recognition. "The museum," you repeat. Conway nods. "Let's go. Now." + + +You quickly collapse the tent, while Conway packs various weapons into his duffel bag. "We aren't gonna have room for everything," he says. "It's either the guns, or the food. I can fit some of both, but we need to make our choice quick." + + +Meanwhile, the person on the other end of the walkie talkie gives out more advice. + + +Streets are crowdetchcchhh........be careful.....the dead aren't gchhhhhhhhh.......hundreds of them...in the streets........come quick.....we need to leave soon... + + +You can make out gunshots in the background. You can hear the same gunshots echoing through the city. +> Mix of food and guns +"Pack both," you say. 'We'll need some of both." Conway nods, and begins packing. You take half the food and half the guns, burying the rest so no one else can get to it. After the duffel bag is full, you move into the streets. + + +You can immediately tell what the others were talking about. Where the streets used to be empty (of zombies, not of cars), there are now vast hordes. They aren't moving in any direction, or at all for that matter. They just bump into each other and walk in circles. You and Conway elect to stay off the roads, and slip between buildings. + + +Meanwhile, Conway keeps a conversation going with the other soldier. Through garbled radio speech, you hear him tell you what's going on. The dead are mostly avoiding the museum, which is why that's their pick-up spot. + + +You're sneaking past a rogue group of zed when the radio suddenly emits a loud burst of static. The group slowly turns their heads, and they growl at a potential food source. "Oh, please no," Conway whispers. The dead slowly hobble over to where you're advancing. You don't know whether to keep sneaking or lash out, but Conway makes that decision for you. Whipping out his knife, he takes the top half the the closest zombie's skull off with one sweep. + + +You draw your knife, and take care of a few of the others. After the horde is cleared, Conway switches off the walkie talkie. "Not gonna go through that again." + + +You slowly progress through the city amongst the waves of walkers. Eventually, the museum is in sight. You're surprised to see an actual helicopter guarded by a handful of soldiers. Conway switches the walkie talkie back on. + + +"We can see you, over." + + +Tchhhhhh....okay, that's good......These hordes are getting worse....no way you're gonna make it through here.....we can provide covering fire......run for it...... + + +You look at Conway, and nod. The soldiers reveal several guns, and start firing on the group of zombies. Taking the chance, you follow Conway through the gunfire. A few zombies attempt to follow you, but you're moving too fast for them. When you get past the hordes, the soldiers wave to you and open the helicopter doors. "GET IN!" + + +You climb into the helicopter after Conway, with a sea of rotting flesh at your heels. You slam the door shut, and hear the helicopter blades whir to life. "Come on! Let's get this bird off the ground!" shouts one of the soldiers. The helicopter slowly lifts off the ground, with a few zombies holding on for dear life to the bottom. They slip free once you're airborne.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your walk back is uneventful. You still aren't sure what the point of that excursion was, but it's nice to get your mind off impending doom for awhile. Plus, as Conway said, there's no shortage of bullets. + + +You arrive back at the campsite as night is falling. "Well, time to hit the hay," says Conway. "Are we leaving for Washington tomorrow?" you say. It's not that you're getting impatient, but you don't see a reason (beyond Conway's personal reason) for staying back. Conway slowly nods. "Yeah. Yeah, we'll leave soon." + + +"Soon?" you ask. "Or tomorrow?" Conway doesn't answer this time. You begin to question whether joining him was a good idea, and consider ditching him if you need to. As you retire to your tent, you hear a crackling noise from Conway's duffel bag. Quickly, he fishes out the object. It's a walkie talkie. + + +Chzzz.....Zhhcccc..tzzz....Hello? Anytzzzz....anyone there? Conway, is chzzzzzzzzzz.... + + +"Yes? Hello, yes! Yes, this is Conway Matthews, deployed with the fourth wave? Do you copy?" + + +Tzhhhhhh.....Chzzzz...... getting really bad outthcccczzzz....going to leave soon.....wanted to check for any others....tchzz.......tchzzzare you? Come to the......thczzzzz..... + + +Conway fiddles with the receiver in an attempt to make the signal stronger. "I'm losing connection! Where are we supposed to go?" + + +Tchzzzzzz....................341...tchzzzstreet.....local museum..... + + +Conway looks up at you in slow recognition. "The museum," you repeat. Conway nods. "Let's go. Now." + + +You quickly collapse the tent, while Conway packs various weapons into his duffel bag. "We aren't gonna have room for everything," he says. "It's either the guns, or the food. I can fit some of both, but we need to make our choice quick." + + +Meanwhile, the person on the other end of the walkie talkie gives out more advice. + + +Streets are crowdetchcchhh........be careful.....the dead aren't gchhhhhhhhh.......hundreds of them...in the streets........come quick.....we need to leave soon... + + +You can make out gunshots in the background. You can hear the same gunshots echoing through the city. +> Mostly food +"Pack more food," you say. "Food is more important than guns." Conway nods. You empty the food stash into the duffel bag. "Come on," Conway says once the bag is full. "Through the backstreets." + + +You can immediately tell what the others were talking about. Where the streets used to be empty (of zombies, not of cars), there are now vast hordes. They aren't moving in any direction, or at all for that matter. They just bump into each other and walk in circles. You and Conway elect to stay off the roads, and slip between buildings. + + +Meanwhile, Conway keeps a conversation going with the other soldier. Through garbled radio speech, you hear him tell you what's going on. The dead are mostly avoiding the museum, which is why that's their pick-up spot. + + +You're sneaking past a rogue group of zed when the radio suddenly emits a loud burst of static. The group slowly turns their heads, and they growl at a potential food source. "Oh, please no," Conway whispers. The dead slowly hobble over to where you're advancing. You don't know whether to keep sneaking or lash out, but Conway makes that decision for you. Whipping out his knife, he takes the top half the the closest zombie's skull off with one sweep. + + +You draw your knife, and take care of a few of the others. After the horde is cleared, Conway switches off the walkie talkie. "Not gonna go through that again." + + +You slowly progress through the city amongst the waves of walkers. Eventually, the museum is in sight. You're surprised to see an actual helicopter guarded by a handful of soldiers. Conway switches the walkie talkie back on. + + +"We can see you, over." + + +Tchhhhhh....okay, that's good......These hordes are getting worse....no way you're gonna make it through here.....we can provide covering fire......run for it...... + + +You look at Conway, and nod. The soldiers reveal several guns, and start firing on the group of zombies. Taking the chance, you follow Conway through the gunfire. A few zombies attempt to follow you, but you're moving too fast for them. When you get past the hordes, the soldiers wave to you and open the helicopter doors. "GET IN!" + + +You climb into the helicopter after Conway, with a sea of rotting flesh at your heels. You slam the door shut, and hear the helicopter blades whir to life. "Come on! Let's get this bird off the ground!" shouts one of the soldiers. The helicopter slowly lifts off the ground, with a few zombies holding on for dear life to the bottom. They slip free once you're airborne.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A world on the cusp of disaster. Two sides on the verge of destroying each other, but there is hope. In the form of a hero. Now this will hero..., will they be able to rise into the mantle of hero? +> Yes +As the son of your father, the Grand Priest of the Holy Kingdom, you've always had a lot on your plate. The moment you could speak, your father put you in lessons of every type. At first they were purely academic, only ranging from basic history to simple math, but as time progressed your lessons became more difficult. You were required to memorize religious texts of every manner, and you were even taught some philosophy. This routine was all there was to your life at twelve years of age. You were content with it too, until two major things happened. + + +A breeze shakes the trees around you and cools your face. Your take a moment and close your eyes allowing the feeling to move across your entire body. It relaxes you, and coupled with the silence of the forest you imagine this is what Paradise must feel like. You open your eyes and are momentarily blinded by the sun. It'd been like this every day this season. Blistering hot, but with a breeze that you always make sure to thank the Creator for. Without it your training would be nearly unbearable. + + +Of course, you'd much rather have to deal with your Knight training every day than have to do extra academic lessons. Maybe if you hadn't started the training to become a knight of the Holy Order you wouldn't hate lessons so much. Then again, you also wouldn't know the bliss of resting after a good workout. Besides, even if you hadn't begun your training there was always the second thing. + + +Even as the thought enters the mind, the figure appears before you. Platinum blonde hair frame an angelic face that seems to hold your attention much longer than normal. You bring your eyes to her emerald ones for a moment then look away. + +“Hey Erron. Have you been waiting long?” Her voice is rich with authority and familiarity, + + +You turn back at the sound of your name to see a wide smile atop her face. “Yes I have. If you kept me waiting much longer, then some bird might've started using me for a nest.” You allow yourself a small smile when she rolls her eyes. + + +“Are you ready for this, Alessandra?” Her name rolls off your tongue with ease. “Excuse me. I meant your Majesty.” You bow slightly, and her smile stays for a few more moments before disappearing from her face entirely. It's replaced with an expression of apprehension. + + +“I’m nervous. I don't want him to keep us from going back there.” + + +She runs her fingers through her hair. The young princess was authoritative, but often times, you find her to lack a lot of confidence. Or maybe that was just with you. + + +“It’s fine. He's never been mean to us before. Remember? The only thing he asked us not to do was to bring anyone else when we visit him.” You cast your thoughts back to your memories of the man… +> Background: The World +The continent of Dellandia is a large one. It is famous for the wars and constant strife that inhabits its lands. Well, was famous for. + + +You cast you mind and thoughts back to your history lessons. You were born in the new era of Dellandia where the entire continent has finally been united under the rule of the current royal family. The Dellandins were just figureheads a short hundred years ago, but with the support of the Holy Kingdom they were finally able to latch onto some real power. As time passed the Dellandins grew more and more powerful until they were able to start conquering the lands of Dellandia. They stretched themselves too thin, and were about to collapse, but yet again the Holy Kingdom supported them. This pattern continued until the Holy Kingdom itself rose to power in a way that wasn’t just religious. Support of the people grew until the Grand Priest of that time revived the lost order of knights. + + +The Grand Priest declared this order to be a Holy Order of Knights created under the direction of their God. The Creator. However, the Grand Priest didn’t do all that his people wanted him to do. Instead of going to war with the Dellandins, the Grand Priest entered into an uneasy alliance with them. Although wary of the Holy Order’s knights, the Dellandins accepted and together they managed to bring the continent of Dellandia to their knees. + + +After several heated arguments, it was decided that the Holy Kingdom (and their religion) were to be just that. A religion. No standing armies, but against their better judgement, they allowed for the Holy Order to exist. It was a heavily regulated existence with a limit on how many people could be trained as well as where the Holy Order could be “stationed.” + + +That is the situation to this day with only a few differences. The Dellandins are constantly pushing for more and more regulations on not just the Holy Order of Knights, but the Holy Kingdom itself. The King and the Grand Priest spend much of their time arguing, and recently you notice that tensions are getting much more strained. You just hope it won’t ruin your relationship with Alessandra. + + +You don’t really worry much about it though. You trust your father after all.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As the son of your father, the Grand Priest of the Holy Kingdom, you've always had a lot on your plate. The moment you could speak, your father put you in lessons of every type. At first they were purely academic, only ranging from basic history to simple math, but as time progressed your lessons became more difficult. You were required to memorize religious texts of every manner, and you were even taught some philosophy. This routine was all there was to your life at twelve years of age. You were content with it too, until two major things happened. + + +A breeze shakes the trees around you and cools your face. Your take a moment and close your eyes allowing the feeling to move across your entire body. It relaxes you, and coupled with the silence of the forest you imagine this is what Paradise must feel like. You open your eyes and are momentarily blinded by the sun. It'd been like this every day this season. Blistering hot, but with a breeze that you always make sure to thank the Creator for. Without it your training would be nearly unbearable. + + +Of course, you'd much rather have to deal with your Knight training every day than have to do extra academic lessons. Maybe if you hadn't started the training to become a knight of the Holy Order you wouldn't hate lessons so much. Then again, you also wouldn't know the bliss of resting after a good workout. Besides, even if you hadn't begun your training there was always the second thing. + + +Even as the thought enters the mind, the figure appears before you. Platinum blonde hair frame an angelic face that seems to hold your attention much longer than normal. You bring your eyes to her emerald ones for a moment then look away. + +“Hey Erron. Have you been waiting long?” Her voice is rich with authority and familiarity, + + +You turn back at the sound of your name to see a wide smile atop her face. “Yes I have. If you kept me waiting much longer, then some bird might've started using me for a nest.” You allow yourself a small smile when she rolls her eyes. + + +“Are you ready for this, Alessandra?” Her name rolls off your tongue with ease. “Excuse me. I meant your Majesty.” You bow slightly, and her smile stays for a few more moments before disappearing from her face entirely. It's replaced with an expression of apprehension. + + +“I’m nervous. I don't want him to keep us from going back there.” + + +She runs her fingers through her hair. The young princess was authoritative, but often times, you find her to lack a lot of confidence. Or maybe that was just with you. + + +“It’s fine. He's never been mean to us before. Remember? The only thing he asked us not to do was to bring anyone else when we visit him.” You cast your thoughts back to your memories of the man… +> The Man +You think about the first time you saw the guy. Two years ago, at age ten, you were fearing for your life. + + +You and Alessandra had only met minutes before at yours and her parents' insistence. They allowed you to both go into the royal forest on the castle grounds. It was a large preserve with plenty of animals to hunt whenever the King wanted to, but to you and Alessa, it was a place that needed exploration. And so, you obliged. + + +Neither of you were certain of each other, but you both had a childish taste for adventure, so when you saw the alluring cabin…well there was only one thing you could do. + + +Casting caution aside, the two of you walked inside and began exploring. It had everything a person needed to survive, but oddly enough it also contained a well stocked book case. This didn’t quite catch your attention, but Alessa was enamored. She made you stay with her to look at the books. Time passed on, and eventually you found yourself reading too. + + +It was only a little after that that he showed up. Leather clothes fit around him, and his rugged beard made him look like a wild man. A barbarian of some sort. You hurriedly yanked Alessa to her feet and the both of you ran for your lives. He didn’t follow, and neither of you turned back. + + +When you told your father about some strange man trying to kill you, he raised his eyebrows in disbelief. Alessa corroborated your claim, however, and the King formed a search party to find the stranger. You and Alessa stayed out of the forest with your mothers while your fathers led the search party. They took the better part of an hour searching, before they came back empty handed. They told you to stay out of the forest, but another meeting between you two was planned for the next day. + + +This time your parents weren’t present, and a guard was assigned to you two. One from the King’s royal guard and one from the Holy Order were always stationed with you. It was a week before you got the courage up to suggest going into the forest. When you finally did suggest it, Alessa agreed and the both of you snuck away from your guards. + + +The old cabin was there just like last time, but instead of marching into the cabin blindly, you and Alessa waited for the man to come back. When he finally came back you and Alessa spied on him nearly the rest of the day. Eventually the you returned to the guards and found them wondering where you were. + + +Each day you and Alessa met, and this turned into a game. First, you would escape from your guard, and then you would spy on the enigmatic man. Back at the castle you and Alessa told no one of this, for fear of them ruining your fun. + + +A couple weeks later the man finally caught you. You were in the middle of climbing your favorite tree when a spider of an absurd size climbed onto your hand and stung you. With a loud yelp you fell to the ground and passed out. + + +Just thinking about it made your face red from embarrassment. Alessa later told you that the man took you inside and helped the bite on your hand heal, and even gave you medicine for the bruise that would soon surface on your head. You'd ruined the fun times of spying because you couldn’t stay calm around a spider. + + +You shake your head at your younger self, and then you shake your head at your current self. You shouldn’t criticize his past self too much, for it was because of that that you and Alessa were able to gain a friend. You glance over at her and find that she looks like she’s reminiscing as well. + +You nudge her elbow before speaking, “We should get going.” + + +Alessa nods, and you both start heading in the direction of that familiar cabin. +> Continue +During all of the fun times you and Alessa spent in the man's cabin, neither one of you asked why he was there. The thought certainly crossed your mind, but you and Alessa entered into a bliss of sorts. You were afraid to ruin the friendly relationship you had with the man by getting on his bad side. After all, (well, at least in your experience) adults tended to anger quickly when questioned too often. + + +Thus you and Alessa enjoyed a period of unadulterated happiness...that you were sure was going to end today. As you grew older you began to question the man and his purpose even more. You mentioned it to Alessa, and while she was slow to agree, she eventually came around. She must have finally thought about the situation from someone else's perspective. Anyone else would have the guard chase down this stranger. Worst case scenario, the man could turn out to be some kind of serial killer. You doubted that he was, but there was always the possibility. + + +You hoped for the best, but feared the worst. That's most of the reason you carried the sword at your waist even though your Holy Order training was already over for the day. + + +The cabin came into your field of vision, and nostalgia cascaded over you. You stopped walking, and Alessa turned back to gaze at you. "Are you ready? We don't really have to do this if you don't want to." Her voice was muddled with nervousness, and concern. + + +You could tell that she was hoping you'd turn back, and that you two could hang out without having to worry. You almost agreed with her, but you decided to do this. You were going to follow through with it. + + +Some moments are seared in people's memories forever. Every one of your senses seemed to be extra sensitive. The sun was shining brightly through the trees above casting light that made you squint your eyes. Alessa stood half turned back to you with a question in her eyes. She was obviously waiting for you to continue moving. You look to the cabin ahead, and all of the warmth that you felt in the past dwindled away. In its place were ominous feelings of forbidding, but you gathered your courage and approached the cabin. + + +Alessa knocks on the door, and you only have to wait a few moments before a muffled voice calls you inside. + + +If the outside of the cabin looked ominous, the inside was a picture of abnormality. Something was wrong. You could tell it from the moment you stepped into the cabin. You didn't need the door slamming shut behind you, or the crazed look in the man's eyes to tell you that much. He sat in a chair against the wall on opposite side of the room. His wild brown hair was even more disorganized than usual. It fell across his face as he looked at the floor. + + +A silent moment passed and the man began to speak. "I know why you're here. I knew this day would come, but I didn't want to believe it." That part was directed at you and Alessa, but the part that followed seemed more like a crazed man's mutterings. And he never seemed crazed before. + + +"I wish I didn't have have to do this. I was content. Happy even. We were almost like a family. I felt needed, and not abused. Not like the people who use my name for evil purposes..." His mutterings continue, but you've had enough. Enough of being here, that is. While you were prepared to deal with bad reactions, frankly you didn't think it would be this bad. You were getting really creeped out, and a quick glance at Alessa told you you weren't the only one. + + +You reached back to try the knob, but it didn't turn. You put more force into it, but still nothing. The man doesn't react, so you lose all pretenses of sneaking out. You throw your shoulder into the door, and it doesn't even quiver. Just as you begin to pull your sword from its sheathe, the man finally speaks to you two again. + + +"I'm sorry, but this has to be done. Alessa, Erron I hope you'll forgive me." He begins walking towards you two, and you decide that you don't want to know why he's sorry. You go ballistic and start hacking at the door, but after the first few swings you realize that it's not going to work. There was something otherworldly going on here and it was preventing you from leaving. Instead you turn back around and hold your sword the way you were taught. + + +The man nears the both of you, and you take the time to shout to Alessa, "Get behind me!" When you don't hear an immediate shuffling of feet, you turn and see her frozen with fear. At the same time you notice the man walking towards her instead of you. + + +You figure that somewhere inside each man there is a primitive instinct that overrides all self control. That instinct sends you rushing between the disaster that was surely about to occur. A couple things happen at once. Without your meaning to, your sword strikes the man's outstretched hand. And your body hits Alessa onto the ground behind you. Before you can check to see if Alessa is okay you notice the cut on the man's hand bleeding. But not just bleeding. Bleeding gold. + + +You barely have time to send up a prayer to the Creator before he speaks again. This time he seems to have some semblance of intelligence instead of his ranting. "Alessa would have made a better choice I think, but I guess you'll do fine. I'll let you carry the blame for what's to come next." The man takes a deep breath and holds his hands out in front of him. This time that instinct doesn't come just in time. Your frozen in place, but to your surprise he doesn't touch you, or kill you or anything of the sort. + + +Instead, two lights appear. With his palms facing up to the ceiling a bright white light appears in his right hand. A dark black light appears in his left hand. They both glimmer and shine alluringly, but for different reasons. You feel yourself drawn to the dark light, because of an eerie feeling of power. A power that you feel could bring you anything you ever wanted. The white light gives you a feeling of happiness. The power to endure and make it through anything that could ever come in your way. The power to obtain versus the power endure. You're enthralled. + + +"Now. Choose. Will you take this blessing," he moves his right hand forward, "or this curse?" He moves his left hand forward to punctuate the question. + + +You barely hear what he's saying, and you don't really get what he's saying about that dark light being a curse. How could it be a curse when it offers you so much power. Then again, the white light offers you security. You feel that you could protect anything, and get through everything that dared challenge you. You think of Alessa at that, whom is still sitting on the floor behind you dumbfounded. + + +You know you don't really have much of a choice here. Who knows what the man would do if you were to refuse? You have to choose one. + + + + + +> "The Blessing." +"Blessing." You whisper the words, and immediately the blinding light flies from the man's hand and into you. You don't feel any different at first, but as the seconds go by you feel yourself getting really tired. The fatigue spreads throughout your body and you know that at any moment you may pass out. The feeling reminds you of a story your dad once told you about him treading water for hours at a time. He said afterwards that he knew he wouldn't be able to keep it up forever, but he would continue for as long as he could. + + +You sympathize with that thought as your body and mind betray you to their tiredness. When you finally feel as if you could not hold on any longer, you collapse to the floor beside Alessa. The last thing you see is the black light, the curse, flying from the man and into Alessa, and the man's face; a picture of sadness. + + + + +~ + + + + +You wake up hours later in the cabin. You peel your face of of the wooden floor and groggily rub your eyes. It takes you a moment to remember what happened, but when you do you leap to your feet confused. There isn't a single thing out of place in the cabin. You look all around for evidence of what you could've sworn happened here only moments ago, but you find nothing. Even your sword is back inside your sheathe. Nothing was amiss. Perhaps it was all a dream, you think relieved. + + +With a sigh and a shrug you brush the dust off of your clothes and open the cabin door. You remember the struggle you had with the man moments before, and you laugh to yourself. Leave it to your subconscious to turn one of your favorite people into a scary curse giving man with emotional problems. Although... you do wonder why Alessa isn't with you. You were supposed to meet with her in this cabin after all. + + +Your don't think to much of it, for you finally realize the time. In the distance the sun begins to dip down into the gray blue clouds. It was sundown, the time time your parents require you to be home. You immediately break into a jog. You Father could be quite strict when it came to you. If he caught you coming back late, then he would surely punish you. + + +You jog into a relatively silent castle, although you hear sounds of eating and merriment coming from the main dining hall. As if to punctuate the point, your stomach rumbles in anticipation for dinner. Thankfully you only have to go up one staircase on the way to your room. You're careful to look through each hallway before entering in order to avoid a potential disaster with your dad, so in not too long you come to a solid oak door. Engraved on the wall beside it reads the name, 'Lucentia,' your family name. Without wasting any time you throw the door open and slam the door shut behind you. + + +"Erron? What are you doing back so late?" You turn around to see your Father seated on at your desk with a grave look on his face. His deep authoritative voice is riddled with anxiety and subtle undertones of sadness. Something your dad rarely displays. + + +You begin to mumble an excuse about knight training, but your Father interrupts you. "Never mind that. I need you to pack your things. We're going away for a while." The persona of a strong confident man your Father usually portrayed was gone. + + +When you don't respond immediately, he raises his voice. "Quickly now. We must be going!" + + +You don't question him and immediately begin to pack your travel bags with necessities. You're at it for a couple minutes when you realize your Father had no bags with him. "Did you already have your bags packed? you ask curiously. Any information you could glean from him would be useful. + + +He looks around for a moment confused. "I must've forgotten to grab them. I'll be back, son. Stay here and pack. If I'm not back in fifteen minutes then go find Morden." He rushes out of the room leaving you even more confused than when you woke up in the cabin. + + +You shrug and obey him. Even at his worst he still knows more than you do. + + +It doesn't take you long to pack, and soon enough you're left waiting on your bed. A few long moments later you begin to hear shuffling outside, and shouting. You try to ignore it, but it soon grows to a point where you can't ignore it very well. That, and you're starting to get curious. The royal guards don't usually act so panicked, so maybe you should check it out. +> Sate your curiosity +Tossing your fathers wishes out the window, you crack the door open. If you come back in five minutes, then that should leave you plenty of time to find out what's going on. + + +You walk out of the door and into the stone walled hallways. You listen for a moment, then follow the sounds of shouting. As you near the source, other sounds enter the mix. The sounds of swords ringing and armor being torn fill your ears, and before you can turn yourself back you walk into the scene of the noise. Bodies of the knights of the Holy Order llitter the hallway floor. Royal guards stand amidst the corpses, while others drive their swords through the fallen bodies. Some dark liquid covers the cobblestone floor, and that same liquid is splattered across the walls. Blood. + + +The thought sickens you and you begin to retch despite not having had dinner yet. The sound draws some attention, and as you bring your head up from the ground your eyes meets with a dying Knight on the floor not to far from you. That knight mouths the word "Run," just before his eyes lose the life in them. + + +Before you can really react to that you hear someone yell, "There's the Assassin's son! Get him!" You look up to find every royal guard with their eyes trained on you. Your instincts take over and you begin to run back the way you came. The sounds of metal boots hitting the floor echo throughout the hall behind you. Fear courses throughout your body, and you run faster than you ever have before. + + +However, it's not enough. After only a few moments of running you hear a voice behind you yell, "I've got him!" You're only left wondering what he means for a moment, for right afterwards a javelin hits your shoulder. The force of it doesn't kill you, but it certainly sends you toppling to the floor. The pain is horrible, but luckily you don't have to endure it for long. A royal guard comes up moments later to finish the job.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Blessing." You whisper the words, and immediately the blinding light flies from the man's hand and into you. You don't feel any different at first, but as the seconds go by you feel yourself getting really tired. The fatigue spreads throughout your body and you know that at any moment you may pass out. The feeling reminds you of a story your dad once told you about him treading water for hours at a time. He said afterwards that he knew he wouldn't be able to keep it up forever, but he would continue for as long as he could. + + +You sympathize with that thought as your body and mind betray you to their tiredness. When you finally feel as if you could not hold on any longer, you collapse to the floor beside Alessa. The last thing you see is the black light, the curse, flying from the man and into Alessa, and the man's face; a picture of sadness. + + + + +~ + + + + +You wake up hours later in the cabin. You peel your face of of the wooden floor and groggily rub your eyes. It takes you a moment to remember what happened, but when you do you leap to your feet confused. There isn't a single thing out of place in the cabin. You look all around for evidence of what you could've sworn happened here only moments ago, but you find nothing. Even your sword is back inside your sheathe. Nothing was amiss. Perhaps it was all a dream, you think relieved. + + +With a sigh and a shrug you brush the dust off of your clothes and open the cabin door. You remember the struggle you had with the man moments before, and you laugh to yourself. Leave it to your subconscious to turn one of your favorite people into a scary curse giving man with emotional problems. Although... you do wonder why Alessa isn't with you. You were supposed to meet with her in this cabin after all. + + +Your don't think to much of it, for you finally realize the time. In the distance the sun begins to dip down into the gray blue clouds. It was sundown, the time time your parents require you to be home. You immediately break into a jog. You Father could be quite strict when it came to you. If he caught you coming back late, then he would surely punish you. + + +You jog into a relatively silent castle, although you hear sounds of eating and merriment coming from the main dining hall. As if to punctuate the point, your stomach rumbles in anticipation for dinner. Thankfully you only have to go up one staircase on the way to your room. You're careful to look through each hallway before entering in order to avoid a potential disaster with your dad, so in not too long you come to a solid oak door. Engraved on the wall beside it reads the name, 'Lucentia,' your family name. Without wasting any time you throw the door open and slam the door shut behind you. + + +"Erron? What are you doing back so late?" You turn around to see your Father seated on at your desk with a grave look on his face. His deep authoritative voice is riddled with anxiety and subtle undertones of sadness. Something your dad rarely displays. + + +You begin to mumble an excuse about knight training, but your Father interrupts you. "Never mind that. I need you to pack your things. We're going away for a while." The persona of a strong confident man your Father usually portrayed was gone. + + +When you don't respond immediately, he raises his voice. "Quickly now. We must be going!" + + +You don't question him and immediately begin to pack your travel bags with necessities. You're at it for a couple minutes when you realize your Father had no bags with him. "Did you already have your bags packed? you ask curiously. Any information you could glean from him would be useful. + + +He looks around for a moment confused. "I must've forgotten to grab them. I'll be back, son. Stay here and pack. If I'm not back in fifteen minutes then go find Morden." He rushes out of the room leaving you even more confused than when you woke up in the cabin. + + +You shrug and obey him. Even at his worst he still knows more than you do. + + +It doesn't take you long to pack, and soon enough you're left waiting on your bed. A few long moments later you begin to hear shuffling outside, and shouting. You try to ignore it, but it soon grows to a point where you can't ignore it very well. That, and you're starting to get curious. The royal guards don't usually act so panicked, so maybe you should check it out. +> Stay in your room +While you're certainly curious about what all of the commotion is about, you trust your father's orders. He wouldn't tell you to do something without a reason, so you wait. + + +Around fifteen minutes later your door is opened, but not by your father. Rather, it's opened by the General of the Knights of the Holy Order, Morden. His presence is intimidating, but from your experience he's always been more or less kind. At least when he's not giving you knight lessons. Then he becomes strict and commanding. You might be the Grand Priest's son, but that certainly won't stop him from going easy on you in lessons. + + +"Where's Father?" You ask, but Morden ignores you and walks straight to the window on the opposite side of the room. You take the hint and stay quiet while he looks around. When he's satisfied he closes the windows quietly, then turns around to face you. + + +He speaks quietly, almost whispering, but his face tells you that the words he says mean just as much as when he would be yelling. "Your father is outside. There was an assassination attempt on his life when he left your room, ands he's asked me to accompany you to meet with him." While he speaks, he gathers a quill with ink and scratches a message on a piece of parchment on your desk. + + +It reads, "There are people outside the door. Say out loud that you need time to pack. In the meantime, gather these sheets and start tying them together. Don't be conspicuous." + + +You nod suddenly grateful for all of the lessons on reading you were taught. "Give me a few minutes to pack my things, and then we can go." You say this and hope to the Creator that that your voice won't betray you. You don't say anything and Morden doesn't offer anymore information, so you both work quietly to construct a makeshift rope. Beneath the surface, however, your mind is racing to try and comprehend the situation. + + +From the things that have been said, and the way your father has been acting you take it that there was, in fact an assassination attempt on your father. That would explain his nervousness, as well as all of the commotion outside. You briefly wonder why they haven't already barged into the room if they were waiting outside, but before you can come to a conclusion your thoughts go to you mother. Your heart skips a beat, and you quickly turn to face Morden. + + +"Where's Mother?" You mouth, and Morden immediately looks away from you obviously avoiding the question. You stop working for a brief moment, for the severity of the situation suddenly hits you. That's why Father was hiding in his room. He was hiding from the guards whilst waiting for you to return from the cabin. They must have already gotten Mother. With that sobering thought tears come to your eyes, and you resume tyirng the sheets together. + + +When you and Morden finally finish, he turns back to you and says aloud, "Hurry up boy. We don't have time to waste." Then he immediately mouths to you, "Your father will explain everything later." + + +He better, you think to yourself. Morden takes the newly made sheet rope and quietly opens the window. After a moment of securing the rope to one of your bed posts, he motions for you to climb down it. You hesitate for a brief moment, but remembering that your father is waiting you cast away your doubts and climb down the rope. + + +For the first time since you've lived at the castle, you've decided that you hate your room. As son of the Grand Priest, you were given one of the 'best' with a view worthy of kings. So they gave you a room on the second floor. You always just took for granted the view, and it never occurred to you that you might have to use this as an escape route someday. You remind yourself to have a room on the first floor next time you live in a castle. + + +The makeshift rope is sturdy enough, so despite your doubts you manage to climb down the rope without too much difficulty. Morden is different. He gets about halfway down the rope when you start to here the rope tear. The combined weight of his armor and a extremely muscled fully grown man were apparently too much for 'rope' to handle. It tears in half and send the armor clad General tumbling to the ground with a chorus of clanking armor. + + +Morden is quick to get back on his feet, however, so he grabs you by the arm and starts to rush you off the castle grounds. It was luck that you had a window that led directly outside the castle. Once you and Morden have made it a fair distance away form the castle, you and Morden break into a run. + + +The familiar features of the castle grounds blur together in a seamless picture of grey and green. You really hope Morden knows where he's going, because you start to feel faint. Fatigue starts to hit you again in an all too familiar way. You remember your dream about the cabin, and have a brief hope that if this fatigue is the same, then perhaps this nightmare of escape is a dream as well. + + +The last thing you hear before you pass out is Morden's voice urging you to push on. +> Dreams +You're back in the cabin. Sunlight once again pours through the window, and once again the man stands before you. The choice is the same. Light is held in his right hand, and darkness is in his left. + + +"Which will you choose? Protection or power?" Unlike the last time you saw him, the man seems to have regained his senses. His normally calm demeanor has returned, but his appearance is still that of an unkempt barbarian. + + +Your gaze turns back to the balls of light, and you begin to reach for the man's right hand when you hear a voice. + + +"Give me the curse." Her voice is melodic and terrible at the same time. Melodic because her voice cleared your mind of the fog that made you think this dream was reality. Terrible, because you remembered what happened when you were last awake. Your Father was nearly assassinated, and you believe your mother was. You climbed out of your window... but you can't remember anything after that. Perhaps the feel of armor against your skin, or the faces hovering above you, but nothing definite. + + +You stop reaching for the blessing, and instead wipe the tears from your eyes. Out of the corner of your eyes you see the curse and blessing fly to whom they belong. You knew that yours and Alessa's fathers never really quite got along, but you didn't think the King would go so far as to assassinate the Grand Priest. Personal matters aside, this was an affront to the major religion of the entire continent. It was sure to cause an uproar. + + +You turn around to face the speaker at your back. + + +Standing in the doorway is Alessa. Sunlight seeps in through the door and glances off of her hair giving her the appearance of having a halo. Her face is a mix of despair, and her posture reminds you of what yours must've been when you realized the chances of your mother being alive were low. + + +Under normal circumstances you would've been delighted to see her, but all her face reminds you of is the gall the King had to take your family away from you. "Why did he do it? Why did your father kill my mother?" You ask the question with your face a mask of sadness. + + +Alessa looks shocked to say the least, but before she can respond, you continue. "I don't know why I'm asking you. You're just some mirage my mind must've made up, and you're probably only here because whenever I'm at this cabin, you're usually with me." You start rambling, and although she certainly tries to say something several times, you ignore her. + + +Apparently it becomes too much for the dream Alessa, and instead of trying to overpower your voice with her own, she slaps you. You figured that since this is a dream it wouldn't hurt, but to your chagrin you are wrong. The force of the blow is more than enough to shake you from your rant, and you decide that this dream Alessa must have something important to say. + + +You weren't paying to much attention to her until now, but now that she's much closer you can see the tears in her eyes and the frustrated expression etched onto her face. "First off, I'm the real Alessa." + + +It has to be a lie. + + +"Secondly, even if I was just a figment of your imagination..." A sob interrupts her sentence, "...are you seriously saying that you'd be this insensitive?" + + +You flinch at that and look away. + + +Surprisingly enough, Alessa reaches up, grips your chin, and faces you back towards her. As soon as she lets go, you turn your head back away from her. However you do take note of that. The real Alessa would've never done something so bold. + + +You hear a sigh of defeat, and the pat of footsteps on the floor. "I'll be back when you're ready to believe me," Alessa says, but mutters immediately afterwards, "i can't believe my Father thought I could trust you." + + +It's only when you hear the sound of the door close that you turn back around. You fall to your knees, and put your face in your hands. Too much was going on for you to think straight. If that really was Alessa, then you could already feel heavy guilt setting on your heart. But there was too much else going on. her father saying that she could trust you? as far as you knew her father didn't like you anymore than he like your dad. + + +You hear a sigh behind you. "You two should really work together." It's obviously the man's voice, but when you turn around there's no one there. you sit there alone in the cabin, wallowing in your despair. It is then you decide that whoever took your family away from you...that person would recieve pain by your hands. No one harms your family and gets away with it. + + +~ + + +"He has to be blessed Cassius. There's no other explanation. You should be proud. Your son is the chosen of the Creator." + + +"I understand, But why now of all times, and why someone as young as him?" + + +"I've heard rumors. They say that the princess is cursed. Perhaps the Creator gave us a Blessed One to combat her, A cursed One." The voice you don't recognize manages to fill as much contempt for Alessa as possible in that last phrase. + + +"Shush, I think he's waking." You figured you could fake sleep to hear more, but your father knows you better than you thought. + + +You open your eyes to the room beyond. White walls, and sheets cover every inch of the room. The only colorful spots are the two men at the foot of your bed. Your father on your right, and the stranger on the left. While they both have dark hair with a streaks of grey, the similarities end there. The stranger Is much more heavyset than your father. He looks like he spent a few too many times at the dinner table instead of exercising. Your father is slimmer than him, but doesn't quite have the muscular body he had in his younger days. + + +"Erron?" Your father asks as your eye open fully. + + +"Father?" You respond, or at least try to. Your throat is dry beyond belief. You feel you haven't had water in days. + + +"Get him some water,' your father commands the stranger before embracing you and smiling. + + +"What happened?" you manage to croak out. + + +Your father's joy at seeing you wake is replaced with a grim expression. "Wait until you've had some water son. Then we can talk." + + +It isn't long before the one man walks back in with a goblet filled with water. You drink it greedily as your father begins telling you what happened. + + +"Things had been getting bad for a long time. You know the King and I didn't agree on a lot of things, but it goes beyond that. He was passing more and more restrictions upon the Holy Kingdom. I resisted as much as possible, but in the end my resistance only served as an excuse to get rid of me. As you can see, he failed." Sadness fills his eyes. "Instead of killing me, he settled for getting your mother." + + +So it was true. However, your guesses did nothing to stop the tears from flowing down your face. + + +"When you were passed out for this past week, I was sure your mother wasn't the only loved one I'd lost." A week? There's no way. You only remember having the one dream, and even that dream didn't last that long. + + +"A week?" you respond slowly before enjoying the last bit of water from the goblet. + + +Your father nods. "Yes, You were out for an entire week." A pained smile reaches tour father's face. "But when i saw the mark, I knew you'd be okay." + + +"What mark?" As soon as you ask the question you regret it. The stranger immediately goes on about how the Creator chooses people to serve him, and about the great honor it is. Your eyes start to glaze over, but your father manages to get the stranger to stop his lengthy explanation. + + +"That's the significance of the mark, but to answer your question, 'What mark?' I'm going to have to have you stand up son." + + +Your legs are a little shaky from a week of no use, but you manage to stand up and go over to where your father is standing. He turns you around so that you are facing away from him, and he tells the other man to go get a pair of mirrors before addressing you. + + +"This is what the Creator has blessed you with." Your Father's hands brush the skin from your left shoulder to your right seemingly tracing lines onto your back. "where I've touched is where the mark spans. You'll see in a moment what the Creator has given you. + + +As if on cue, the man from before comes into the room with the hand mirrors. Your father thanks him then takes them. With his help you position the mirrors at the best angles to allow you to glimpse at your back. + + +Glittering lines of gold shine all across the top of your back. If you try to look at a single line you lose the picture, but when you try to focus on the elegant gold lines as a whole you see what it is meant to depict. + + +"The saving wings of the Creator," the man remarks. "Said to only show when his followers are in grave danger." You continue to stare at the markings and marvel at how similar the wings on your back are to that of those of the Creator. + + +You begin to hear your father's friend launch into another lengthy description of the "Blessed Ones" but your father stops him short. + + +"Let's leave him be. He needs more rest. He's only just now woken up." + + +Your father makes a move to leave, but you stop him one last time. "Father, can I go with you? You are going to fight back, right?" + + +Your father turns back around to face you, and examines you for a good few seconds before the stranger interjects. "You can't possibly be considering this. Can you Cassius?" + + +Your father responds, "Of course I can be. He's a Blessed One. Surely that fact will give our knights someone advantage on the battlefield. even if he is a mile away from the battlefield. And we can train him on the spot." + + +You smile and start to agree, but your father continues. "But you might be of more use to us if you train here first, and then come help when you're ready. Here, as in the Academy of the Holy Order. It's a perfect opportunity to have you learn how to use your power as well. But, I'll leave the choice up to you. I believe the Creator will back any of your choices." + + +You aren't sure about all of 'Blessed One' stuff, but you do know that you don't want to be away from your father if he might need your help. You couldn't stand to lose another one of your parents. + + +Then again, you also see the wisdom in waiting here and training before you go out onto the battlefield. You wouldn't be very useful if you died after all. + + + +> Go with your father +While you're sure the Knight Academy would increase your usefulness, you decide that you're more useful now than later. What if everyone you wish to protect is already dead by the time your prepared? Besides, your father did say that they could teach you on the way there. + + +"I'd like to go with you father." + + +"Alright son. Rest up. We leave at first light tomorrow." He pats you on your back, then leaves the room with the stranger. + + +You pack up your belongings, or at least what's left of them then leave to take a bath. You can't imagine that a week in bed does wonders for your hygiene. + + +After that, you take a stroll around the Knight Academy. It is quite magnificent, and you're sure you would have had everything you needed had you stayed, but you've already made your choice. your place is at your father's side. The rest of the day goes fast, and before you know it you're already back in bed. One might think that a week sleeping would make it harder for you to fall back asleep, but soon enough you drift back into your dreams. + + +Your dream is the same as it has been the last few times, except this time you're actually alone. No Alessa, and no shaggy haired man. Instead you go through your recent dreams, and a thought you shoved to the back of your mind finally resurfaces. When your father and his friend were talking you connected the dots, but you didn't want to believe it. That yours and Alessa's friend was the Creator himself. It didn't seem likely, but neither didn't being hunted down until today. + + +You keep in in your head for when the piece of information might come in handy, and the next morning comes quickly. You and your father are allotted a wagon and several soldiers to ensure that you get to your forward camp safely. While waiting your father takes to teaching you the history behind 'Blessed Ones.' You learn that there role was to create peace on this world, and that often times they did so by focusing an evil foe. Most saw them as heroes, but you don't really understand why. The only thing people saw that was special about you was the golden mark on your back in the shape of angelic wings. + + +Beyond that there was nothing else. These lessons continued for about a week before the unexpected happened. While gazing out the wagon window you see a glimmer out in the forest. you don't think much of it until you hear someone yell, "Attack!" All at once Dellandian soldiers start pouring out from the trees and to the wagon. Your own knights are heavily outnumbered, so you're father makes a split second executive decision. You both decide to run. + + +You make it around twenty steps before several arrows stick into your back killing you. you only hope that your father made it farther than you did.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You're back in the cabin. Sunlight once again pours through the window, and once again the man stands before you. The choice is the same. Light is held in his right hand, and darkness is in his left. + + +"Which will you choose? Protection or power?" Unlike the last time you saw him, the man seems to have regained his senses. His normally calm demeanor has returned, but his appearance is still that of an unkempt barbarian. + + +Your gaze turns back to the balls of light, and you begin to reach for the man's right hand when you hear a voice. + + +"Give me the curse." Her voice is melodic and terrible at the same time. Melodic because her voice cleared your mind of the fog that made you think this dream was reality. Terrible, because you remembered what happened when you were last awake. Your Father was nearly assassinated, and you believe your mother was. You climbed out of your window... but you can't remember anything after that. Perhaps the feel of armor against your skin, or the faces hovering above you, but nothing definite. + + +You stop reaching for the blessing, and instead wipe the tears from your eyes. Out of the corner of your eyes you see the curse and blessing fly to whom they belong. You knew that yours and Alessa's fathers never really quite got along, but you didn't think the King would go so far as to assassinate the Grand Priest. Personal matters aside, this was an affront to the major religion of the entire continent. It was sure to cause an uproar. + + +You turn around to face the speaker at your back. + + +Standing in the doorway is Alessa. Sunlight seeps in through the door and glances off of her hair giving her the appearance of having a halo. Her face is a mix of despair, and her posture reminds you of what yours must've been when you realized the chances of your mother being alive were low. + + +Under normal circumstances you would've been delighted to see her, but all her face reminds you of is the gall the King had to take your family away from you. "Why did he do it? Why did your father kill my mother?" You ask the question with your face a mask of sadness. + + +Alessa looks shocked to say the least, but before she can respond, you continue. "I don't know why I'm asking you. You're just some mirage my mind must've made up, and you're probably only here because whenever I'm at this cabin, you're usually with me." You start rambling, and although she certainly tries to say something several times, you ignore her. + + +Apparently it becomes too much for the dream Alessa, and instead of trying to overpower your voice with her own, she slaps you. You figured that since this is a dream it wouldn't hurt, but to your chagrin you are wrong. The force of the blow is more than enough to shake you from your rant, and you decide that this dream Alessa must have something important to say. + + +You weren't paying to much attention to her until now, but now that she's much closer you can see the tears in her eyes and the frustrated expression etched onto her face. "First off, I'm the real Alessa." + + +It has to be a lie. + + +"Secondly, even if I was just a figment of your imagination..." A sob interrupts her sentence, "...are you seriously saying that you'd be this insensitive?" + + +You flinch at that and look away. + + +Surprisingly enough, Alessa reaches up, grips your chin, and faces you back towards her. As soon as she lets go, you turn your head back away from her. However you do take note of that. The real Alessa would've never done something so bold. + + +You hear a sigh of defeat, and the pat of footsteps on the floor. "I'll be back when you're ready to believe me," Alessa says, but mutters immediately afterwards, "i can't believe my Father thought I could trust you." + + +It's only when you hear the sound of the door close that you turn back around. You fall to your knees, and put your face in your hands. Too much was going on for you to think straight. If that really was Alessa, then you could already feel heavy guilt setting on your heart. But there was too much else going on. her father saying that she could trust you? as far as you knew her father didn't like you anymore than he like your dad. + + +You hear a sigh behind you. "You two should really work together." It's obviously the man's voice, but when you turn around there's no one there. you sit there alone in the cabin, wallowing in your despair. It is then you decide that whoever took your family away from you...that person would recieve pain by your hands. No one harms your family and gets away with it. + + +~ + + +"He has to be blessed Cassius. There's no other explanation. You should be proud. Your son is the chosen of the Creator." + + +"I understand, But why now of all times, and why someone as young as him?" + + +"I've heard rumors. They say that the princess is cursed. Perhaps the Creator gave us a Blessed One to combat her, A cursed One." The voice you don't recognize manages to fill as much contempt for Alessa as possible in that last phrase. + + +"Shush, I think he's waking." You figured you could fake sleep to hear more, but your father knows you better than you thought. + + +You open your eyes to the room beyond. White walls, and sheets cover every inch of the room. The only colorful spots are the two men at the foot of your bed. Your father on your right, and the stranger on the left. While they both have dark hair with a streaks of grey, the similarities end there. The stranger Is much more heavyset than your father. He looks like he spent a few too many times at the dinner table instead of exercising. Your father is slimmer than him, but doesn't quite have the muscular body he had in his younger days. + + +"Erron?" Your father asks as your eye open fully. + + +"Father?" You respond, or at least try to. Your throat is dry beyond belief. You feel you haven't had water in days. + + +"Get him some water,' your father commands the stranger before embracing you and smiling. + + +"What happened?" you manage to croak out. + + +Your father's joy at seeing you wake is replaced with a grim expression. "Wait until you've had some water son. Then we can talk." + + +It isn't long before the one man walks back in with a goblet filled with water. You drink it greedily as your father begins telling you what happened. + + +"Things had been getting bad for a long time. You know the King and I didn't agree on a lot of things, but it goes beyond that. He was passing more and more restrictions upon the Holy Kingdom. I resisted as much as possible, but in the end my resistance only served as an excuse to get rid of me. As you can see, he failed." Sadness fills his eyes. "Instead of killing me, he settled for getting your mother." + + +So it was true. However, your guesses did nothing to stop the tears from flowing down your face. + + +"When you were passed out for this past week, I was sure your mother wasn't the only loved one I'd lost." A week? There's no way. You only remember having the one dream, and even that dream didn't last that long. + + +"A week?" you respond slowly before enjoying the last bit of water from the goblet. + + +Your father nods. "Yes, You were out for an entire week." A pained smile reaches tour father's face. "But when i saw the mark, I knew you'd be okay." + + +"What mark?" As soon as you ask the question you regret it. The stranger immediately goes on about how the Creator chooses people to serve him, and about the great honor it is. Your eyes start to glaze over, but your father manages to get the stranger to stop his lengthy explanation. + + +"That's the significance of the mark, but to answer your question, 'What mark?' I'm going to have to have you stand up son." + + +Your legs are a little shaky from a week of no use, but you manage to stand up and go over to where your father is standing. He turns you around so that you are facing away from him, and he tells the other man to go get a pair of mirrors before addressing you. + + +"This is what the Creator has blessed you with." Your Father's hands brush the skin from your left shoulder to your right seemingly tracing lines onto your back. "where I've touched is where the mark spans. You'll see in a moment what the Creator has given you. + + +As if on cue, the man from before comes into the room with the hand mirrors. Your father thanks him then takes them. With his help you position the mirrors at the best angles to allow you to glimpse at your back. + + +Glittering lines of gold shine all across the top of your back. If you try to look at a single line you lose the picture, but when you try to focus on the elegant gold lines as a whole you see what it is meant to depict. + + +"The saving wings of the Creator," the man remarks. "Said to only show when his followers are in grave danger." You continue to stare at the markings and marvel at how similar the wings on your back are to that of those of the Creator. + + +You begin to hear your father's friend launch into another lengthy description of the "Blessed Ones" but your father stops him short. + + +"Let's leave him be. He needs more rest. He's only just now woken up." + + +Your father makes a move to leave, but you stop him one last time. "Father, can I go with you? You are going to fight back, right?" + + +Your father turns back around to face you, and examines you for a good few seconds before the stranger interjects. "You can't possibly be considering this. Can you Cassius?" + + +Your father responds, "Of course I can be. He's a Blessed One. Surely that fact will give our knights someone advantage on the battlefield. even if he is a mile away from the battlefield. And we can train him on the spot." + + +You smile and start to agree, but your father continues. "But you might be of more use to us if you train here first, and then come help when you're ready. Here, as in the Academy of the Holy Order. It's a perfect opportunity to have you learn how to use your power as well. But, I'll leave the choice up to you. I believe the Creator will back any of your choices." + + +You aren't sure about all of 'Blessed One' stuff, but you do know that you don't want to be away from your father if he might need your help. You couldn't stand to lose another one of your parents. + + +Then again, you also see the wisdom in waiting here and training before you go out onto the battlefield. You wouldn't be very useful if you died after all. + + + +> Enroll in Knight Academy +You hesitate while you think, but you answer before long. + + +"I'll stay here." Your father smiles, and it's obvious that he's very relieved at your choice. You imagine that a heavy burden must've been taken off of his shoulders. Here you would be safe. Here you wouldn't have to worry. + + +Your father nods before turning to the heavy set man on his left. "This is the Headmaster here at the academy. Headmaster Rallas. He's taught at this academy for years now," a slight smile breaks across your father's face, "and despite his looks, he used to quite capable." + + +Headmaster Rallas scoffed at that. "I'm still more than capable," he remarks before your father continues speaking. + + +"I'll be leaving in the morning, so it may be some time before i see you again, son. When I next see you, I expect to see a man grown and ready for anything. The Creator has blessed you as his champion, so you must prepare yourself to fulfill that demanding role. I'll see you again in the morning, but for now Headmaster Rallas will give you a tour." Your father embraces you, then walks out of the room leaving you alone in the room with Headmaster Rallas. + + +He regards you for a silent moment. "You carry a great burden. If you're well enough I'll show you around." + + +Despite the sleepy haze you've retained since you awoke, you nod and get up from your bed. You look around the room, and wonder why you're the only one here. This was obviously the Academy's infirmary and this was a fighting school, so surely there must be more people injured. You express these thoughts aloud to the Headmaster, and he smiles then throws an arm around you. + + +"You've got a good head on you. The academy is on break for another week, so until then, it'll be you, me, the staff, and a rare few other students." + + +You nod and the Headmaster leads you out of the room. The halls remind you of the Castle back in Valium except that these were newer and more obviously centered around academics. The Headmaster leads you around, and before long you find yourself increasingly impressed with the facility. It's every bit as big as the castle, and the rumors you've heard about it do not nearly do it justice. + + +The Headmaster explains that aside from basic academics, everyone in the academy is taught how to wield a sword. Once a student finishes their schooling here, they begin their long noble service to the Grand Priest wherever it may take them. If even to death. You feel a sense of foreboding and briefly wonder how many knights died to help you escape Valium. + + +The Grand Priest finishes his explanation by telling you that at age sixteen every student is sorted into two more facilities depending on their aptitude for fighting. One is simply called Advanced Combat where the inhabitants focus solely on honing their skills in combat, tactics, and other such needs for war. The other school is called Support, which is more or less self explanatory. This school includes those training in the healing arts, organizational matters, but everyone one of them still is constantly trained in fighting. If the need ever arises, then those in both schools can form a force of a couple thousand, that is when all of the knights on missions are gathered in. Aside from the knights at the school, there are bases scattered around the continent each with a minimum number of five thousand strong. that is where the majority of your numbers reside. Apparently your father had been prepared for this, for you cannot imagine that the King would have allowed such an amassing of numbers to occur under his nose. + + +Once the introductions are over, the Headmaster leaves you to explore the facility whilst he claims that his work needs his utmost attention. You shrug and simply head off of in the direction of the armory. You didn't have much time to grab your sword when you left, so hopefully they could supply you with one. + + +On your way there you run into another student. You don't quite feel the want (or need) to converse with him, so you barely give him a glance. Despite your wishes, he moves in front of you effectively stopping you in your tracks. This was most inconvenient, because a staircase was not the best place to meet someone new. If it was someone younger, or even smaller than you then you may have pushed passed him. However, he was neither. + + +He was taller than you by a couple inches, making him around six foot, but that wasn't what stopped you. For someone who can't have been more than two years older than you, his frame filled his clothing and his muscles stretched the grey and black leather. He reminded you of Morden. He stood on the stair step right above you making his presence just that more imposing. + + +Although you originally didn't want to meet him, you found yourself mildly interested. What did this oversized adolescent want with you? + + +"Are you Erron?" his face was expressionless, but when you answer "Yes," his face changes to that of contempt. + + +"You're the person that the teachers keep going on about? You barely have any muscle on you, and you look like you haven't ever seen a battle. The Creator should've chosen me, but instead he chose a scrawny piece of trash like you. I bet you didn't even have the guts to screw the princess while you were in that castle." + + +His voice is filled with mocking arrogance, and his insults, quite frankly annoy you. He had just barely met you, yet he acted as if he knew your whole story. His insults weren't even that good, but his attitude was certainly more abrasive than you could otherwise stand. You normally wouldn't even consider physical retaliation as a viable option, but his mention of Alessa tipped your judgment. She might be the daughter of a treacherous King, but she wasn't some cheap prostitute. + + + +> Ignore him and move on +While feeling tempted to show this peasant his place, you aren't that rash. If put to the test you figure you would have a high chance of winning in this fight. However, you don't think he got that muscular from sitting around doing nothing, and since this is an academy where people are being taught how to fight, so you assume he has more experience than you as well. Of course you were taught by the General himself, Morden, so despite the person's goading you push past him and continue up the stairs. + + +On your way past him he grips your forearm and speaks, "Hey, don't leave when I'm talking to you!" + + +He has a strong grip, but since you know how to get out of such a simple hold, you easily twist out and continue up the stairs. + + +You hear a string of profanity and calls for you to come back, but for whatever reason he doesn't come after you, so you continue to ignore him. It hadn't really occurred to you that there might some people that are jealous of you. Especially since you have no idea why they think you're blessed by the Creator. Certainly the mark on your back is indicative to the Creator's wings, but you're fairly certain that the Creator didn't just come down from paradise and bestow upon you the powers to govern his people on this world. No, you're fairly certain that this isn't the Creator's doing, and even more so when you remember your dream. + + +In the back of your mind things were already starting to make sense, but you didn't want to believe it. Somehow that man in the King's Forest was able to obtain power beyond your comprehension. Maybe he got it from the Creator, but regardless of where you are fairly certain that those years spent in the King's Forest were not normal. You thought it was odd when the guards couldn't relocate the cabin, but you always chalked it up to your superior tracking skills. Well at least until you learned enough to know that you were no where near as good at tracking as the royal guards. + + +You cast your thoughts to the very first 'dream.' If you recall correctly then you were actually confronting the man about his purpose in being in those woods. He'd mentioned about how he knew that day would come, and how sad he was. + + +You reach the Academy's armory, and you resolve to figure out what happened later. soon enough they find you a sword that's suited to your size and fighting style, and you leave with your mind still centered on weapons. You get the vague feeling that you were meaning to do something, but before you realize what it was, Headmaster Rallas shows up at the end of the hallway. + + +He's wearing the same grey and black material from before, but this time he has more of the stuff gathered together in his arms. You remember the other student you met, and realize that the Headmaster was holding some kind of student uniform. + + +"I'm sorry. I meant to give this to you before, but my attention was elsewhere." He shoves the grey and black uniform into your arms before reaching into a pocket and pulling out a key. + + +"This is for your room. We made sure to give you the best of the best." + + +"That's une-" you begin, but the headmaster interrupts you. + + +"Nonsense. The son of the Grand Priest deserves the very best." + + +You hesitate before grasping the Gold plated key. Despite the unfortunate meeting in the hallway, you decide that you might very well get used to living here. "Yes sir." + + +~ + + +A few weeks pass, and the first battle happens. A messenger leaves you a letter from your father detailing what happened. It was mostly just the Knights testing the Dellandian army. It wasn't some crazy battle of massive proportions, but rather, it was a skirmish that didn't even contain a hundred men in total. While it wasn't the greatest battle, the Knights managed to beat the army with a combination of skill (from the individuals), and strategy. (from the different leaders) You find out that Morden is leading the charge against the corrupt royalty, and that in terms of skill, the Knights heavily outclass the army of Dellandia. You hope that superior strategy and skill will be enough, for the Dellandian army has the advantage in numbers. + + +Aside from that, the only important thing happening is the new term start for the Academy. No new dreams of the Man and Alessa happen leaving you with a relatively bored few weeks. You don't see the pretentious student from before, so you ended up spending most of your time staying fit and practicing your swordplay. You're in an almost feverish state, and your father and your friends only serve to make that fever go. Whether the mark you received was from the Creator or not, you feel your place is beside your father championing the cause of the Holy Kingdom. + + +Occasionally you go to the library hoping to find information regarding this mark, and while there are a lot of history about what the Blessed Ones are, the texts never go into the differences between the Blessed Ones and other people. You're always left wondering if the mark is simply there to notify your enemies of whom to kill. + + +Thus, your thoughts are everywhere when you attend your first class at the Academy. The Headmaster had your schedule delivered to you earlier week with a note attached. + + +It read, "Erron, enclosed is your schedule of the coming term. Seeing as how you were taught by the best while in Vailum, we've decided to put you in classes closer to your skill level. You will be surrounded by peer s who are older than you, and may even be jealous of you and your position. Heed them not, for your position demands that you be above everyone else. You are held in a higher regard because of your blessing, so do not stoop down to the level of those who oppose you. Sincerely, Headmaster Rallas. + + +You take a deep breath and clear your head. The open doorway seems almost ominous in nature, but when you finally step through it, the classroom beyond leaves you astounded. Mostly because you've never really seen so many kids in the same location. The majority of the students are male, but you do see several girls around the room too. You do not see the teacher, so when you enter the room you try to sneak along the wall to an empty wooden desk. + + +Alas, Your endeavor fails. It only takes a few seconds for someone to recognize you as the Grand Priest's son, so a fairly large group forms around you. + + +"Are you Erron?" + + +"Can I see your mark?" + + +and + + +"Where'd you get that jawline?" are only a few of the questions you hear. + + +You do your best to answer the questions, but luckily for you, the teacher steps into the room and tells everyone to go to their seats. + + +The teacher Introduces himself as Sir Kakanos, and he barely takes anytime before diving into the lesson. Your first class is history, and it ends up going fairly smoothly. Well at least for you. The rest of the class seem distracted by your presence, as if you're some kind of exotic animal. It's only when the student you met before walks through the doorway that the classes' attention turns away from you. + + +Sir Kakanos looks away from the class when he walks in, and gestures for the guy to sit. "It's nice of you to join us Mr. Rallas." The Headmaster's son, you take note of that. + + +'Mr. Rallas' walks to the seat designated, but takes a specific moment to look at you and stare you down. He doesn't have the same astonished and contempt filled expression as he did before. Rather it's blank, and you realize, with a start, that this guy wasn't just some brute filled with anger. No, if he had that much control over his emotions to begin with, then he was much smarter than you previously thought. If you allowed yourself to be angered back when you first met you might have been outclassed. + + +The class ends soon after that interruption, and you head to your next class. It turns out similarly, with the exception of the Headmaster's son actually being to his class on time. + + +Science, Numbers, Battle Tactics, and Reading pass by fairly quickly and before long you're standing in a field outside the academy. Of all the classes you have, this is probably the one you look forward to the most. Advanced Combat. The teacher is a female Knight by the name of Sarrin. She's quite young. If you weren't her student, you might consider her beautiful. She quickly pairs off each the students there to "see what each of you can do." + + +You're paired with a stocky fellow named David, and you start to spar with the wooden practice swords. It doesn't take you very long at all to best him, but David decides that he wants more. You happily oblige, for you haven't had a real opponent in a while. However, it soon becomes very clear that despite his two year advantage of age, you are the better fighter. + + +"Erron. Pair up Ashyr." You hear Miss Sarrin tell you, and before you can ask who she means, you see her pointing at the Headmaster's son. + + +You mutter a quick "Yes ma'am" and head over to your new opponent. Unlike your previous opponent, Ashyr stands a few inches taller than you. His hazel eyes regard you calmly, and he holds his practice sword carefully, lightly, as if the sword was his lover. The thought amused you, and you allowed a small smile to light up your features. + + +You ready your practice sword for battle. The space between you is filled with tension, and you start circling each other. For a fraction of a second you see his eyes shift to the contempt filled ones you first saw, but you don't have time to think about it, for Ashyr lunges. You react immediately by parrying, then you follow up with a counterattack of your own. He defends against just as easily as you did against him, and the both of you enter into a trance of sorts. Neither of you gain ground against each other, and each and every one of your strikes is parried or otherwise defended against. + + +Soon enough you realize that this battle will be decided through endurance. The first person to slack off in their attacks, the first person to make a mistake, they will be the one to lose. You continue the fighting for a few moments longer before you realize that it would be you to make the mistake. While Ashyr showed hints of strain, he didn't look anywhere close to as tired as you were. You have to strike now while you still have the energy to do so. + + +Throughout the fight, many different tactics have been employed. Given this, there are only a few things you think work. You haven't tried overwhelming him with power, so you might be able to take your opponent by surprise. The same principle applies to forcing him to grapple with you. If you get close enough you may be able to catch him off guard by tackling him to the ground. Of course, you could always wait for Ashyr to mess up. Maybe he feels more tired than he looks. + + +In any case you feel yourself beginning to tire, so you need to make a decision now. + + + +> Overwhelm him with attack +Ashyr is stronger, taller, and every bit as skilled as you. You don't think you'll be able to last for too long if you stay on defense. Tackling him might also have detrimental consequences. If you timed it bad then you could take a sword to the head. No, among the choices you figure your best one is to overwhelm him with attacks. + + +With a sudden turn of luck you parry a blow, and Ashyr decides not to pursue attacking you. Instead you start circling each other again. You're grateful for the time to rest before you begin your attack, but Ashyr doesn't seem to be thinking at all about his energy. Instead his eyes are focused on you with a puzzled look in his eyes. You guess no one has ever lasted this long against him. + + +By now the sun's heat has your body beginning to wear down, and your fatigue must show, for Ashyr smiles a triumphant smile. Immediately afterwards, he surges forward with an overhead slash. + + +But you're ready for it. You surge forward as well and parry his attack on your way. You leave him no time to counterattack, but instead press the advantage created by surprising him with your ferocity. For the first time since the fight started, you seem to have a clear advantage. Every attack Ashyr blocks is a step he is forced backwards, and before long the smile he had disappears from his face. Replacing it is a face contorted in concentration, and Ashyr finally seems like he the exertion is getting to him. + + +However, you also feel your fatigue. You begin to slow down in your attacks whilst Ashyr's blocks pick up in their efficacy. Instead of barely being able to keep up, Ashyr is now blocking each attack with an attack of his own. It isn't long before you realize that you're going to fail. One of these moments you won't have enough energy to meet his attack with your own. One of these attacks you simply won't be able to raise your sword to block his. + + +The moment comes in the form of another overhead slash. Ashyr uses his height and superior strength to increase the attack's power, and you realize that he means to end the fight with this attack. You have no time to dodge and you feel like you don't have nearly enough energy to raise your sword, let alone enough to block the monstrous attack. Nevertheless, You push your arms with all your remaining strength to meet his attack with your own. Your thoughts aren't even centered upon winning the fight in that moment, rather, they're centered on making sure that that attack doesn't hit you. They're centered on protecting yourself. + + +As you bring your sword up, you feel a surge of energy resonating from your shoulders. It strengthens your body and fills your arms with power. Your sword clashes with Ashyr's, and the power behind your hit was so powerful that it knocks the wooden sword clear out of his hand. There's a moment of stunned silence all around, and in the back of your mind you realize that the other students must've stopped their sparring to watch, but your mind isn't on that. Instead the power you feel brings a grin to your face. It contrasts greatly with Ashyr's expression when you bring your sword to rest beneath his chin. + + +The changes in Ashyr's face come quickly, so if your weren't already looking at him then, you're not sure you would've noticed. Astonishment first, but rage soon followed with mixes of despair and vengeance coloring his eyes. You even thought that there was some respect there, but the moment of conflicting emotions passed. Back was his calm facade; the mask he wore was impressive, and if you hadn't seen it off when you first met, then you might really think that this calm demeanor was really him. + + +You hear hushed conversations among the remainder of the students, and soon enough Miss Sarrin shouts at everyone. "Get back to sparring everyone!" + + +You lower you sword and Ashyr takes a hesitant step. Then another. Before long Ashyr is heading off the field, and not much more time passes until he's out of sight. + + +You take this opportunity to rest. The fight was certainly much more difficult than you anticipated. You're sure you would've lost if you had not found that reserve of energy. Heat still resonated from your shoulders, although it certainly was much less noticeable than it was a few moments ago. + + +Your rest only last for a few minutes before Miss Sarrin approaches you. "You're one lucky kid. Without that blessing you would have spent the next few days in the infirmary. Ashyr put enough force into that last attack to give you a concussion." + + +What blessing? Your tired mind thinks before realizing the importance of what just happened. It makes sense to you all of the sudden, for you recall the moment of the last attack. You were only seeking to protect yourself. It couldn't be a coincidence that The Man told you the blessing would give you the power to protect yourself. You'd been wondering what all the fuss about the blessing was for. After all, it wasn't until now that the so called "blessing" did anything except give you a cool mark. + + +You only nod in response. You don't really have anything to say, and besides, you'd rather take this moment to think upon the implications of what you just discovered. + + +Unfortunately Miss Sarrin doesn't allow you to sit while everyone else spars, so she tells you to stand up and ready yourself. She spars with you for most of the remainder of class, but try as you might, you aren't able to beat her and you aren't able to activate your blessing. + + +Class ends and Miss Sarrin pulls you aside. The rest of the students file off the sparring field until it's just the two of you standing there. She speaks first. + + +"Do you want to know how to control your power?" + + +The question surprises you to say the least. "Yes, of course." You reply immediately. While you've been able to keep your emotions in check for most of your stay at the academy, you still feel the smoldering of anger and sadness at your mother's death. If there's any way you could learn to use the power to help you become stronger, then your answer will always be certain. + + +"It will take a lot of training. Not to mention a change in your mindset. any more questions?" she asks. + + +You raise an eyebrow at the 'mindset' comment. "Only one. How are you qualified to teach me?" You figure the question is necessary. You don't want to commit to learning if you're being taught by a teacher who doesn't know what they're doing. + + +"That's not something I am willing to tell. Go get some rest. From tomorrow onward, you'll be learning about this gift you have." + + +You're about to insist upon her giving you a straight answer when you realize that she's right. You do need rest, and tomorrow is another day. + + + + + +> Continue +At age sixteen you are the youngest person to attain knighthood from the Academy for Advanced Combat. The AAC. When you were at the Knight Academy, you were placed two years above your age group to compensate for the learning you received while in the castle at Valium. Because of this, you graduated to the AAC at a record age of fourteen years old. Which was even more prodigious then Miss Sarrin's feat of graduating at age fifteen. (You like to remind her of that whenever you get the chance to) + + +The AAC didn't pose much of a problem to you in regards to practically anything. Many classified you as a prodigy beyond all others, and as such you excelled at everything the AAC had to offer. You have a natural mind for strategy, tactics, and fighting; so much in fact, that many believe you will surpass Morden before you reach the age of twenty five. + + +Rumors of you spread at an alarmingly rate, and just before you graduated from the AAC, people came to know you as the Chosen Hero. A man of great regard that surpasses all who contend against him, and a man that would come and tip the war in the favor of the Holy Kingdom. (For the death of the King barely tipped the scales at all. In fact, some think that it only served to enrage the Dellandians and their supporters.) You had no control over the rumors, and they ended up being blown out of proportion. Ever the opportunist, your Father had Headmaster Rallas directed the rumors into propaganda of sorts. Essentially, they used your image as a rallying point for those eager to fight in support of the Holy Kingdom. And the Creator knows that the Holy Kingdom needs all the help it can get. + + +You tolerated the increase in attention towards, but when it got to the point where Academy students simply stopped in the hallway to stare at you, well it was a little too much. + + +You mentally shrug as you make your way to Headmaster Rallas' office. Raven walks beside you, who you can tell is enjoying the attention garnered from being beside you. As for why you were even back at the Academy... you weren't told much. The Headmaster at the AAC, Headmaster Farid, only told you that Headmaster Rallas needed you and Raven immediately. To quote, "Headmaster Rallas needs to see you immediately. Besides, your fan club deserves to see you every once in a while." + + +You had rolled your eyes at that one. It was interesting thing. The kids at the Academy admired you, and went to great lengths to make sure you were always welcome there. It was a nice gesture, but all too often you felt turned off from all of the attention. Especially since you think that you wouldn't be getting nearly as much attention had you not been blessed by the Creator. (Ironically enough, you still weren't sure if that man was the Creator. Specifically because you know he was also the one that cursed Alessa. You don't mention this to anyone though. It would cause an uproar that's altogether unecessary.) + + +The only other times you come back here are when you want to see Miss Sarrin. You ended your lessons with her when you graduated, and the both of you left on good terms. You still don't know how she knew what she knew, but you're eternally grateful regardless. + + +"What do you think he wants us for?" Raven says to you, as the pair of you make your way up a flight of stairs. + + +After that first year of solitude at the Academy, Raven and you became fast friends. You ended up gaining other friends too, but none were as close as Raven, or Miss Sarrin for that matter. You crush on her faded off sometime last year, around when you and Alessa met in a dream for the second time. Ironically you think that your lack of interest in her caused her to be more interested in you. Of course it could just be your dazzling fame. + + +"I have no idea. I haven't talked to him in ages. My first guess was that he'd be giving us a mission, but Headmaster Farid is usually in charge of those, especially since we haven't had our first mission yet." Headmaster Farid had a longstanding tradition of presenting each new graduate with their first mission. Graduation was after the first two years in the AAC, but each student stayed enrolled until two more years passed of just missions and other tasks. After that, AAC students finally became true "Knights," and were assigned to an area somewhere in the continent of Dellandia. This being war time, however, caused most of the knights to be on the warfront instead. + + +Raven nods in response, but doesn't say anything. The both of you walk in silence the rest of the way whilst attempting to ignore the occasional gawping student. + + +Eventually the two of you come before two oak wood double doors. They were stained black with the handles grey, the colors of the Knights, and you don't even hesitate before knocking on the door. + + +Almost immediately you hear Headmaster Rallas' muffled response telling you to come in. You and Raven walk in the room and take in the surroundings. The Headmaster's desk sits as the centerpiece of the room with papers messily scattered all atop it. A bookshelf stands to your left, and maps stretch across the wall to your right. You've always heard about the Headmaster being very capable in his younger days, but you can't help but think he looks more scholarly then anything else. + + +He sits behind his desk facing the two of you. The only oddity in the room takes the form of a tall man. You immediately recognize the uniform and armor as being that of a tru knight. It's quite similar to what you have on with the exception of an extra insignia signifying that he had gone through his full four years of the AAC. A messy mop of golden blonde hair frames his roguish face, and his stubble accentuates this. + + +Your first impression of him makes you want to keep your coin purse tied much tighter to your belt. Your second impression, however, leaves you certain that this is a good man. His roguish persona is all but gone when he smiles and extends his hand towards you. It's an honest smile that reaches his eyes. You immediately feel like you can trust this man. + + +"I'm Vitre," he tells you and Raven and you all exchange greetings before the Headmaster has you sit down. + + +"Time is of the essence. I've already briefed Vitre on the situation, but let me catch you two up as well." + + +"Catch us up as well?" you ask. + + +"Yes," he waves the question aside as if you should already know what he's talking about. "I need you two to go on a mission with Vitre." + + +He pauses for the slightest moment to make sure no one else was going to interrupt him before he continues. "You two are here because I've received direct orders from the Grand Priest to include you in on this mission. Specifically you Raven, because the Grand Priest asked that someone Erron knew well be included on this." Headmaster Rallas shifts his gaze to you. "You'll find out why you're here soon enough." + + +"A little less than a week ago your father caught a group of royal guards on patrol. He managed to capture them and take them prisoner, which, you all know, is not an easy feat." + + +You nod readily. Of all the people in the Dellandian royal army, the royal guards are the most skilled. It's been speculated that though miniscule in number, the royal guards are even more skilled in battle than true knights. + + +"But your father managed to do it. The odd thing was trying to figure out why they were so far from Valium. It took a few days, but your father and his aides managed to pry some information out of them. The princess has gone missing." + + +You register that thought for a solid moment. Alessa is missing... + + +"After a bit more prying, he managed to find out the date she was gone as well as the likely place she's headed. Long story short, we need you three to find the princess and bring her in alive. Or dead if she struggles." + + +Your heart nearly stops in your chest. You figure that something like this might eventaully happen, but certainly not so soon. + + +"Erron. Your father realizes that two of you were friends in the past, and that you may be liable to sparing her." + + +You make it a point to raise your eyebrows in disdain. You don't want them thinking thst this was true. + + +"Therefore your father has offered you an alternate choice. If you feel you can't complete this mission, then your father has requested that you join him on the battlefield." + + +Ever since that fateful day nearly four years ago, you've wanted to join your father in taking the battle to the Dellandians. Now the opportunity was in front of you, and you find yourself not sure what to do. + + +If what they say is true, then your closest friend is in trouble perhaps even in a life threatening situation. You find yourself worrying about Alessa probably more than you should. If you do go on this mission, and find her, then the other will expect you to kill her. On the flip side, if you don't go, then you won't be able to help her. On the off chance that you find her, and the two of you are alone, then you think you could do wonders for helping her. Of course that would also mean betraying your father to a degree, but you don't really think that Alessa is much of a threat to the Holy Kingdom. Deeper down, however, you have a selfish need that wants her to stay alive. You don't want the person that understands you best to fall prey to your allies. + + +Then again, Alessa does have that curse, and if you're anything to go by, it is quite the power. And that's leaving out the fact that Alessa might not even be there in the first place. Any number of factors could contibute to her not being at the expected place, and you aren't particularly inclined to waste the next few months chasing someone that might not even be where you're looking. Of course, your father may also need you on the battlefield. You could list off several ways that you'd be of service. + + +A moment of silence passes and the three others in the room look at you expectantly. + + +You nearly laugh out loud. While your father is important to you, you know he can wait a month or two more for you to get back. There's only one real choice. +> Accept the mission +You'd rather be safe than sorry. What if you decided not to go, and they end up capturing her? You'd probably want to help her, but at the same time, you wouldn't want to betray your allies. A situation like that could only end in disaster. Instead you would go to the designated location and hope to find her by yourself before anyone else is able to get to her. + + +"I'll accept the mission." + + +The Headmaster raises his eyebrows in surprise. "You're braver than me. I'm not sure I would have been able to make the choice you just did had i been in your position. Alright then. Vitre, I'll leave the details to you. Just know that you need to leave within the next few days." + + +With that the Headmaster dismisses you. Vitre walks ahead of you two and motions for you to follow after him. Luckily, the Academy students are all in classes, so there's no one left to gawk at you. Vitre leads you and Raven down a few hallways, and before long you can guess where he's taking you. + + +"Are we headed to the library?" + + +Vitre nods. "There are maps there." His deep voice speaks quietly as if afraid that speaking in a tone larger than a whisper would interrupt classes. + + +"I wonder if Headmaster Farid is upset. I'm sure he was looking forward to assigning the chosen hero his first mission," Raven comments to you whilst giving you a slight push with her arm. + + +"I'm sure he'll be fine." You don't continue the line of conversation she tries to start. Your thoughts are pretty much exclusively centered on how in the name of the Creator you're supposed to find Alessa. Well, not only find her, but also make sure everyone else doesn't find her. Vitre, however, speaks again effectively ruining your train of thought. + + +"Does he really still insist on giving every new grad their first mission?" + + +Raven answers, "Yes, he does. Honestly, I'm not sure how he does it. Ever since the war started there's been way too many people waiting to receive their first mission." + + +"He probably just sends most of them of to the warfront for their first mission," you comment. "You could consider us lucky that we don't have a mission like that." You aren't too sure you consider yourself lucky, but if you were Raven, then you don't doubt that she'd rather be finding a lost princess than fighting a war. + + +"I'm not so sure about that." Vitre responds. "If this princess really is a Cursed One, then we could be in some serious trouble. That's probably one of the main reasons your father wants you here with me." + + +"Why you?" Raven asks almost immediately. You have to admit that you were curious as well. You know why you and Raven were chosen, but you had only just met Vitre. + + +He shrugs. "There isn't really some grand reason for it. I just happen to have a lot of experience in hunting people down. It makes me the ideal person to lead you two. Especially since we don't need some insanely good fighter. We are only hunting a princess. She probably hasn't even touched a sword in her life." + + +You knew this was false, but you didn't really want to comment. Let him think that Alessa is incapable. It'll be easier for her to avoid capture that way. + + +The three of you reach the library to find it mostly empty. A few academy students sat at desks doing classwork, but fortunate for you, no one is anyone near the map section. + + +The area isn't particularly large, but it's more than enough to suit your needs. Perhaps the most notable feature of the area is the massive wall map. It's position on the wall allows for many people to look at it without crowding it. The map itself is double your height and is about the same length from side to side. After a quick once over you realize it to be a map of the continent. It was fairly recent, and someone even updated it to show which cities are under Dellandian control, and which are in control of the Holy Kingdom. + + +It's this map that Vitre stops in front of. + + +"This is where we'll be going." He points to the very bottom of the map, specifically at the city of Aeors. + + +You remember the city from your history classes. Back before the Dellandians and the Holy Kingdom conquered the continent, this was the largest city, and the last one to fall before the Dellandians might. This was largely due to the fact that an army the size of the Dellandians was very difficult to provide food and drink for, but even harder when attempting to take a city in the middle of the desert. + + +When you and Raven don't say anything, Vitre continues speaking. "Aeors has always been fairly removed from the events on the continent, and even now they don't offer support to the Holy Kingdom or Dellandia. This makes it a nearly perfect place for people to want nothing to do with the war to move to. We surmise that the princess noticed this, and headed south so she could reap the benefits of relative neutrality." + + +You're about to interrupt him to tell him that that isn't much to go off of, but he raises his hand to stop you. "We also have reports telling us that she was last sighted heading in a southward direction." + + +Raven speaks this time. "If others saw and recognized her, then why didn't they already bring her in?" + + +"I mentioned it briefly before, but there is a strong possibility that this princess is a cursed one. Every time one of our own went to apprehend her, they only remember speaking to her as if they were old friends. Apparently, whenever someone enters her presence they forget why they approached her, and she uses her cursed powers to confound them." + + +You nod in agreement. You do remember how easily you were swayed in your dream. + + +Vitre continues to speak about the mission detailing how we would recognize her, which you already knew, how long it would they were to stay in Aeors, and other such information. Before too long, he finishes his debrief of the mission and everyone returns to the temporary rooms at the academy. + + +With your thoughts a mix of worry, determination, and fatigue you go to sleep. + + +~ + + +The next few days go by fairly quickly, and you find yourself on the road for the first time in while. Years in fact. You weren't really permitted to take lengthy trips during your years of schooling, so your last trip of moderate length was when you left Valium. + + +The first few days of the trip go by almost quickly, but with each passing day thereafter, you begin to feel like it's taking forever. You tend to stay silent for most of the trip, but Raven decides talking is much more preferable to silence. After the first few attempts at talking to you either fail, or end in uninteresting conversations, she decides to talk to Vitre. It goes fairly well for her, and the both of them get along famously for the remainder of the trip. You think you see Raven making eyes at Vitre, but you chalk it up to motion sickness. + + +As the days go by, the terrain changes and you begin to see progress being made in your trip. The surroundings go from green to brownish yellow, and you start seeing more and more sand replacing the trees. Eventually you get to the point where the three of you are wandering through the southern deserts of Dellandia. They're the only real obstacle that lies between you and Alessa. + + +The desert is hot, arid, and leaves you wishing for water often. Luckily for you, Vitre planned the trip well enough to take a route following a river. + + +Several more days pass, and Vitre finally talks about strategy. + + +"How do you two think we should go about finding this lost princess?" + + +You'd been waiting for this. This conversation was the key to achieving your goal of helping Alessa. Had you brought it up yourself, and then mentioned your plan, Vitre might've gotten suspicious. + + +"Well, we know her appearance. Her hair is supposed to be pretty distinct in Aeors. If we patrol the area, and can just find her, then I think I can apprehend her." + + +"What do you mean by 'I can apprehend her?' You don't seriously think that you're going to take her on alone, do you?" Raven questions you with a surprised look on her face. + + +"Of course I do," you respond cheerfully. When you see Raven about to object again, you continue. "I'm the only one who can do it. I am blessed by the Creator himself. I probably won't be affected by her black magic." You sound silly to yourself, but Raven takes your words completely seriously. + + +"But she's a cursed one!" + + +"That's even more of a reason for me to do it alone. What if she takes one of you hostage through her powers? That'd complicate things considerably. I'm not sure I'd even be able to rescue you if it came to that." + + +Throughout this back and forth, Vitre stayed silent, but takes the momentary lull in conversation to interject. "He's got a point Raven." + + +You allow yourself a small smile. If Vitre liked your plan, then you're quite certain that the two of you could convince Raven. However, your smile disappears when you hear what he has to say next. + + +"That being said, Aeors is not the kind of city we need to wander alone in. You're liable to get stabbed, robbed, and you're body desecrated if you wander alone. While I'm sure you're quite capable of defending yourself, I'm not convinced wandering around alone is the best idea." + + +You think he's probably exagerating, but you do see his point. Regardless of that, however, this was Alessa you were trying to save. You doubt that you'd get an opportunity to talk with her alone if you all patrolled as a group together, and you sure didn't want to find her when you're with the two of them. + + +You still wonder if Vitre is right though... +> Concede the point +A heavy sigh escapes you. "I guess you guys are right. Even if I had you two trailing behind me, it would still only take a moment to stab someone, so I could be dead before you guys come to my aid." You say that, but you still wish that you were going at it alone. You'd just have to find some other way to contact Alessa. + + +Vitre nods his agreement. "We'll find clothes there to disguise ourselves with, and then we'll patrol the city several times. If we still can't find her, then we can consider another option. Any questions?" + + +Raven and you shake your heads, and your trio continues onward. + + +It's a few days later when you finally come upon the city of Aeors. Walls of hardened sand surround the entirety of the city, and towers line either side of the main entrance. As you arrive, the sun dips beyond the walls and casts a welcome shadow over you and your companions. You continue to follow the river until you three approach the gate, then Vitre surges ahead of you and Raven. + + +He approaches one of the two guards standing beneath the gate. After a muted conversation and a few coins exchanged, Vitre motions for you two to follow him into the city. You glance around and are surprised to see that the river flows under a section of the wall and into the city beyond. This sparks a memory from your history class back at the academy. + + +It was in your first year that you remember learning about the city of the lake. A city that was founded entirely around a lake and the resources that came from it. Supposedly the city was able to sustain itself entirely of the agriculture, water, and meat that came from it. + + +You and Raven pass through the gate and form up beside Vitre. If the view from the outside was impressive, then the view from the inside was magnificent. Sunlight falls over the tops of the sandstone buildings creating a dynamic contrast between sunlight and shadow. You continue to follow Vitre through a maze of roads until you come upon a tavern. Raucous laughter emanates from the inside, and for the first time since you went on this trip, you find yourself in a somewhat familiar atmosphere. + + +Vitre casts sidelong glances at the two of you that seem to say "here we go." With that encouraging look, Vitre pushes open the worn door open and steps into the tavern. You and Raven follow moments afterward. + + +The interior of the tavern is lined with torches, and the walls, floors, and ceilings are all made of polished sandstone. It's looks kind of odd to you, but everyone else seems to not care. Wooden tables are strewn about the room along with people of every type. You examine the room carefully, first to see if by some crazy chance Alessa was there. Second, to see if there was any danger in the immediate area. Aside from a few shady people in corners, no one pays the newcomers much attention. + + +"Wait here, I'll go fetch us rooms." Vitre goes off to the bar to secure lodging leaving you and Raven alone. + + +You sneak a glance at her. Her skin has started to tan, and there's a tired look in her eyes, but other than that (and of course her getting more... developed) nothing has really changed since you first met her. Despite your expert glancing, she catches you looking at her and raises an eyebrow. + + +"Staring at me at a time like this?" A smirk follows the comment and you scowl. + + +"I wasn't staring," you object. + + +She laughs lightly, and you find yourself suddenly embarrassed. + + +"I'm glad you decided forget about that crazy idea you had," she refers back to you wanting to look for Alessa alone. + + +"It wasn't that bad of an idea," you point out. + + +"It was a bad idea to me." She sees you with a confused expression on your face, then she hesitates. She seems to be debating on whether or not to say something + + +"Erron, I'm sure you know that I've liked you for some time now..." she trails off leaving you with a surprised expression on your face. Not surprised about her feelings, but about the fact that she had the courage to say anything. Especially since you hadn't given her any signs her feelings were mutual. + + +Raven then looks you in the eyes. You are a few inches taller than her despite the two year age difference, so your eyes lock onto her deep brown eyes fairly easily. "I'm not sure what I'd have done if you'd gotten killed because of your plan, but I do know one thing. My heart would be broken without you." + + +The sudden confession leaves you slightly flushed, but you maintain your cool. While she was confessing she inched closer to you, and now she gazes at you expectantly. Her lips are parted, and her face is even more red than yours. + + +You can tell what she wants. +> Kiss her +You are happy to oblige, for her confession sparked the old crush you used to have on her. Those old feelings resurface, and you realize that they were never really gone on the first place.You lean down and press your lips to hers. + + +You haven't really had much experience in the past with kissing. None if you don't count the dream kiss with Alessa, so you aren't quite sure what to expect. Her lips are almost deliciously soft. Almost because her lips are a little cracked, but you don't really blame her. After all, your lips are probably in worse condition. + + +The kiss keeps going for another five seconds or so before the denizens of the tavern start to take notice. When they do start to take notice, many laugh it off and chalk it up young people's hormones. Others look longingly at the two of you wishing they were entrapped in such an enthralling relationship. + + +You don't take note of either, however, for you happen to be occupied at the moment. + + +"As much as I'd like to stand here all night, and have people take bets on which of you would run out of breath first... I'm sure you can continue this after we've put our things in our rooms." Vitre looks around the room somewhat worried. + + +You break away from Raven and take a couple of deep breaths. Raven does the same, and the both of you follow Vitre up the stairs to the living floor of the tavern. + + +"I'm glad I got separate rooms. I'd hate to have to bunk in the same room as two sexually heated teens," Vitre comments idly. The way he put it leaves you more self conscious than you normally are. You're sure Raven feels the same way. + + +Vitre stops in front of a room, and hands you a key. "I'm in the next room over. I don't care what you two do tonight. Just be ready in the morning to begin our mission." You and Raven nod absently. You hear Vitre mutter something about sex being the weakness of Knights just before he leaves the two of you to go to his own room. + + +You put the key in the keyhole and fumble with the lock for a few seconds longer than normal before you get the door open. You barely manage to pull the key out when, Raven tugs on your other hand to pull you into the room. You hadn't given too much credence to Vitre's comment of sex, but when you look into raven's eyes again, you know that there's only one thing that such fevered feelings could lead to tonight. + + +You find yourself kissing again, but for much longer. Actually you delay ending the kissing for as long as possible, for you aren't really quite sure what to do. If you didn't really have much experience with kissing, then you had absolutely no experience with this kind of intimacy, and you really didn't fancy asking Raven what to do. + + +Despite your best efforts, when Raven breaks away you find yourself more than ready to be embarrassed. After a few moments of shedding clothes, you find yourself wondering what to do next. Luckily, (or maybe unluckily?) Raven knows what she's doing, and helps you get to where you both want to be. + + +The whole process is pure ecstasy for you, but you find that it ends all too quickly for you. Raven doesn't seem to mind though, so you shrug it off. You both lay under the covers breathing heavily. Your arm holds her close to you, and she uses the position to lean in and whisper into your ear. + + +"I love you." + + +Maybe it's because of the heat of the moment phenomena , but you respond in kind, "I love you too." + + +Silence ensues and Raven falls asleep. Soon afterwards you find yourself drifting off, and your last thoughts before you go to sleep are you hoping that this relationship won't change between you two. + + +Fortunately your wishes come true. Unfortunately, this is because you are so tired that you don't realize the intruder enter the room. You and Raven die in your sleep from slit open throats. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A heavy sigh escapes you. "I guess you guys are right. Even if I had you two trailing behind me, it would still only take a moment to stab someone, so I could be dead before you guys come to my aid." You say that, but you still wish that you were going at it alone. You'd just have to find some other way to contact Alessa. + + +Vitre nods his agreement. "We'll find clothes there to disguise ourselves with, and then we'll patrol the city several times. If we still can't find her, then we can consider another option. Any questions?" + + +Raven and you shake your heads, and your trio continues onward. + + +It's a few days later when you finally come upon the city of Aeors. Walls of hardened sand surround the entirety of the city, and towers line either side of the main entrance. As you arrive, the sun dips beyond the walls and casts a welcome shadow over you and your companions. You continue to follow the river until you three approach the gate, then Vitre surges ahead of you and Raven. + + +He approaches one of the two guards standing beneath the gate. After a muted conversation and a few coins exchanged, Vitre motions for you two to follow him into the city. You glance around and are surprised to see that the river flows under a section of the wall and into the city beyond. This sparks a memory from your history class back at the academy. + + +It was in your first year that you remember learning about the city of the lake. A city that was founded entirely around a lake and the resources that came from it. Supposedly the city was able to sustain itself entirely of the agriculture, water, and meat that came from it. + + +You and Raven pass through the gate and form up beside Vitre. If the view from the outside was impressive, then the view from the inside was magnificent. Sunlight falls over the tops of the sandstone buildings creating a dynamic contrast between sunlight and shadow. You continue to follow Vitre through a maze of roads until you come upon a tavern. Raucous laughter emanates from the inside, and for the first time since you went on this trip, you find yourself in a somewhat familiar atmosphere. + + +Vitre casts sidelong glances at the two of you that seem to say "here we go." With that encouraging look, Vitre pushes open the worn door open and steps into the tavern. You and Raven follow moments afterward. + + +The interior of the tavern is lined with torches, and the walls, floors, and ceilings are all made of polished sandstone. It's looks kind of odd to you, but everyone else seems to not care. Wooden tables are strewn about the room along with people of every type. You examine the room carefully, first to see if by some crazy chance Alessa was there. Second, to see if there was any danger in the immediate area. Aside from a few shady people in corners, no one pays the newcomers much attention. + + +"Wait here, I'll go fetch us rooms." Vitre goes off to the bar to secure lodging leaving you and Raven alone. + + +You sneak a glance at her. Her skin has started to tan, and there's a tired look in her eyes, but other than that (and of course her getting more... developed) nothing has really changed since you first met her. Despite your expert glancing, she catches you looking at her and raises an eyebrow. + + +"Staring at me at a time like this?" A smirk follows the comment and you scowl. + + +"I wasn't staring," you object. + + +She laughs lightly, and you find yourself suddenly embarrassed. + + +"I'm glad you decided forget about that crazy idea you had," she refers back to you wanting to look for Alessa alone. + + +"It wasn't that bad of an idea," you point out. + + +"It was a bad idea to me." She sees you with a confused expression on your face, then she hesitates. She seems to be debating on whether or not to say something + + +"Erron, I'm sure you know that I've liked you for some time now..." she trails off leaving you with a surprised expression on your face. Not surprised about her feelings, but about the fact that she had the courage to say anything. Especially since you hadn't given her any signs her feelings were mutual. + + +Raven then looks you in the eyes. You are a few inches taller than her despite the two year age difference, so your eyes lock onto her deep brown eyes fairly easily. "I'm not sure what I'd have done if you'd gotten killed because of your plan, but I do know one thing. My heart would be broken without you." + + +The sudden confession leaves you slightly flushed, but you maintain your cool. While she was confessing she inched closer to you, and now she gazes at you expectantly. Her lips are parted, and her face is even more red than yours. + + +You can tell what she wants. +> Don't kiss her +Despite having cracked lips, you want to kiss her. You feel an inkling of the crush you used to have start to her come back, and then you nearly kiss her regardless, but you manage to stop yourself. + + +"Raven. Whatever you feel for me, see if you still feel it for me later. When we aren't on the cusp of life or death situations. Maybe then I can see how I feel about you." Disappointment flashes across her features. "Until then, I don't want to be distracted by you." + + +You feel that you didn't really choose the best set of words to say, for now disappointment and hurt color her features. You mentally wince at the awkward tension you feel building up, but thankfully Vitre saves you from braving it alone. + + + "We'll have two rooms here for a week. If we haven't found her by then, then we can pay for longer. Agreed?" Raven nods slowly. Certainly not in her usual jovial manner. You nod as well, and Vitre looks back and forth between the two of you with a knowing look on his face. + + +"Alright then. Follow me." You both follow him as he leads you up the stairs. "Erron and I will share a room. Raven, you'll take this room." He gestures to a door on his left. "We're in the next room over. If you need us, just pound on the wall. Okay?" + + +You watch as Raven nods numbly, and you feel a brief stab of regret. Maybe you should've kissed her if it meant that you were to keep your previous relationship. Raven walks into her room and the door slams shut. + + +Vitre gives you a brief judgemental glance. "What did you do to her?" + + +You stay quiet until you are safe from being heard in your room. "She confessed to me." You try to leave it at that, but he motions for you to continue. + + +You look away from him, "I told her that, uh, I didn't want to be distracted by her." Your usual articulate self is long gone, and replaced by a less convenient embarrassed version of yourself. + + +Vitre shakes his head back and forth. "You should've let her down more easily. I expected more from the Chosen Hero." He says that last part because he knows it'll get to you the most. "I can't have something like this ruining the mission. You're going to have to make up with her before long, or the rest of this trip is going to be very unpleasant." + + +You nod your assent, and he gives you one last disappointing look before he goes off to take a bath. + + +Somehow being left alone with your thoughts is even worse than having someone chastise you. You run the situation over and over again in your head trying to find a way that you could've rejected her without having left her so dejected. + + +Vitre comes back before you can fathom a way to do so, and you go ahead to take a bath as well. The water feels heavenly, but you don't feel as if you're really enjoying it quite as much as you could. Even before the incident today, you had quite a lot on your mind. With the addition of a sad friend on your mind, you find yourself starting to get mentally taxed. Sleep would do you good. + + +You come back to the room minutes later to find Vitre already asleep. Asleep on the only bed in the room at that. You sigh and tell yourself that you deserve it when you sink into a very uncomfortable wooden chair. You manage to get a few winks of sleep, but you often wake up due to aches on your body from sleeping in such an uncomfortable position. + + +You wake up again, and you automatically start to rub your back, when you see a figure begin to creep through the window. You immediately close your eyes most of the way, and hope he didn't see you moving. Luckily for you, it appears he didn't. + + +He wears a black cloak, so you can't see who he is, but that isn't what catches your attention the most. Instead of a typical rope coming across his chest to connect the two sides of the cloak together, there is an insignia. In the dark it's hard to see, but you think it's a symbol of the sun. You think it has a reddish hue, but you don't know for sure. + + +He walks silently and leans over the bed to stare at Vitre. You ready yourself to spring at the intruder at the first signs of aggression, but there's no need. Apparently Vitre wasn't who he was looking for. Instead the man turns his attention to you. You make sure your breathing is even as he makes his way over to you, and that your eyes are so close to being closed that it's nearly impossible to tell. + + +He examines your face, and gives slight nod to himself. You assume that you are his target, and ready yourself for the opportunity to strike. The man pulls a dagger out of his cloak, and starts the motions to stab you. + + +It's what you were waiting for. You twist out of the way at the last second, and his dagger lodges into the back of the chair instead. You take the opportunity to punch him in the stomach and shove him to the floor. He lets go of the knife, and you quickly pull that from the chair's back. The man recovers fairly quickly and attempts to tackle you to the ground, but the attempt only goes so far. You knee him in the face and throw him across the room. Coincidentally, that place you throw him happens to be the bed Vitre lays on. + + +You see Vitre start to stir out of the corner of your eye. You decide that you needed this guy immobilized as soon as possible, so you follow up your throwing him with another throw. This time, however, you're throwing the guy's dagger. Your aim is true, and the dagger hits the guys upper thigh. He yells out in pain causing Vitre to wake up fully. + + +You think of why someone would be targeting you, but then realize you have your priorities skewed. You needed to make sure that the danger was gone. You rush to the window and gaze out across the city that you can see. At first you see nothing, but a glint of silver shines in the distance and you duck down. An arrow embeds itself in the wall directly behind you. + + +Your heart pound in your chest as you realize that you could've been dead if you hadn't been so fast. You glance to Vitre who has the first attacker subdued on the floor of the room. Whoever these people were, they obviously wanted you dead, and you doubt they'd stop after one attempt. You figure you should take them out now before they have a chance to regroup and attempt another assassination attempt. + + +"Make sure Raven is okay!" You call out to Vitre as you vault the window sill out onto the street below. You hear what may have been Vitre telling you to wait, but you ignore that. Better to ask forgiveness than permission. + + +Another arrow whizzes pased you on the way down to the street. The fall is two stories high, but you use the momentum from gravity and roll to reduce any damage you might take from it. As fast as possible, you spring up from your roll to get behind cover. + + +You glance from behind the wall you took cover at. Almost immediately you hear the twang of a bow, and, consequently, you move your head back behind cover. Thoughts roil in your head as you try to figure out how to get to the enemy without getting hit by an arrow. A few different ideas come into your head, but when you examine and reexamine them you are only left with two plausible ideas. + + +You could use your blessing to speed up your reflexes in hopes that it'll allow you to dodge any arrows come at you. + + +The other idea you have much less confidence in working. You could dash from cover to cover, and hope he doesn't hit you. You don't really like this idea, because it puts your fate into the air. Instead of relying on your reflexes, you'd simply be hoping that he'd miss. + + + +> Dodge from cover to cover +The silence of the night seems to accentuate the risks your about to take. You breathe deeply and launch yourself from your position, across the alley, and behind a wall on the other side + + +An arrow hisses past you, but you manage to avoid being hit. You take another discreet glance down the alley, but this time your able to make out a figure about sixty feet farther down. + + +You take another deep breath and launch yourself across the alley once more. Once more an arrow launches past you, but once again, it misses. You feel the first two successful passes fill you with positive energy. You move once again across the alley. + + +Unfortunately you forgot to take into account that you got closer to him with every pass that you made. If he was any less good of a shot, then your plan may have worked, but an arrow pierces your side and you feel your energy leave you. Breathing heavily, you attempt to call for help, but your voice is silenced by an arrow protruding through your throat. + + +If only you were faster.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Despite having cracked lips, you want to kiss her. You feel an inkling of the crush you used to have start to her come back, and then you nearly kiss her regardless, but you manage to stop yourself. + + +"Raven. Whatever you feel for me, see if you still feel it for me later. When we aren't on the cusp of life or death situations. Maybe then I can see how I feel about you." Disappointment flashes across her features. "Until then, I don't want to be distracted by you." + + +You feel that you didn't really choose the best set of words to say, for now disappointment and hurt color her features. You mentally wince at the awkward tension you feel building up, but thankfully Vitre saves you from braving it alone. + + + "We'll have two rooms here for a week. If we haven't found her by then, then we can pay for longer. Agreed?" Raven nods slowly. Certainly not in her usual jovial manner. You nod as well, and Vitre looks back and forth between the two of you with a knowing look on his face. + + +"Alright then. Follow me." You both follow him as he leads you up the stairs. "Erron and I will share a room. Raven, you'll take this room." He gestures to a door on his left. "We're in the next room over. If you need us, just pound on the wall. Okay?" + + +You watch as Raven nods numbly, and you feel a brief stab of regret. Maybe you should've kissed her if it meant that you were to keep your previous relationship. Raven walks into her room and the door slams shut. + + +Vitre gives you a brief judgemental glance. "What did you do to her?" + + +You stay quiet until you are safe from being heard in your room. "She confessed to me." You try to leave it at that, but he motions for you to continue. + + +You look away from him, "I told her that, uh, I didn't want to be distracted by her." Your usual articulate self is long gone, and replaced by a less convenient embarrassed version of yourself. + + +Vitre shakes his head back and forth. "You should've let her down more easily. I expected more from the Chosen Hero." He says that last part because he knows it'll get to you the most. "I can't have something like this ruining the mission. You're going to have to make up with her before long, or the rest of this trip is going to be very unpleasant." + + +You nod your assent, and he gives you one last disappointing look before he goes off to take a bath. + + +Somehow being left alone with your thoughts is even worse than having someone chastise you. You run the situation over and over again in your head trying to find a way that you could've rejected her without having left her so dejected. + + +Vitre comes back before you can fathom a way to do so, and you go ahead to take a bath as well. The water feels heavenly, but you don't feel as if you're really enjoying it quite as much as you could. Even before the incident today, you had quite a lot on your mind. With the addition of a sad friend on your mind, you find yourself starting to get mentally taxed. Sleep would do you good. + + +You come back to the room minutes later to find Vitre already asleep. Asleep on the only bed in the room at that. You sigh and tell yourself that you deserve it when you sink into a very uncomfortable wooden chair. You manage to get a few winks of sleep, but you often wake up due to aches on your body from sleeping in such an uncomfortable position. + + +You wake up again, and you automatically start to rub your back, when you see a figure begin to creep through the window. You immediately close your eyes most of the way, and hope he didn't see you moving. Luckily for you, it appears he didn't. + + +He wears a black cloak, so you can't see who he is, but that isn't what catches your attention the most. Instead of a typical rope coming across his chest to connect the two sides of the cloak together, there is an insignia. In the dark it's hard to see, but you think it's a symbol of the sun. You think it has a reddish hue, but you don't know for sure. + + +He walks silently and leans over the bed to stare at Vitre. You ready yourself to spring at the intruder at the first signs of aggression, but there's no need. Apparently Vitre wasn't who he was looking for. Instead the man turns his attention to you. You make sure your breathing is even as he makes his way over to you, and that your eyes are so close to being closed that it's nearly impossible to tell. + + +He examines your face, and gives slight nod to himself. You assume that you are his target, and ready yourself for the opportunity to strike. The man pulls a dagger out of his cloak, and starts the motions to stab you. + + +It's what you were waiting for. You twist out of the way at the last second, and his dagger lodges into the back of the chair instead. You take the opportunity to punch him in the stomach and shove him to the floor. He lets go of the knife, and you quickly pull that from the chair's back. The man recovers fairly quickly and attempts to tackle you to the ground, but the attempt only goes so far. You knee him in the face and throw him across the room. Coincidentally, that place you throw him happens to be the bed Vitre lays on. + + +You see Vitre start to stir out of the corner of your eye. You decide that you needed this guy immobilized as soon as possible, so you follow up your throwing him with another throw. This time, however, you're throwing the guy's dagger. Your aim is true, and the dagger hits the guys upper thigh. He yells out in pain causing Vitre to wake up fully. + + +You think of why someone would be targeting you, but then realize you have your priorities skewed. You needed to make sure that the danger was gone. You rush to the window and gaze out across the city that you can see. At first you see nothing, but a glint of silver shines in the distance and you duck down. An arrow embeds itself in the wall directly behind you. + + +Your heart pound in your chest as you realize that you could've been dead if you hadn't been so fast. You glance to Vitre who has the first attacker subdued on the floor of the room. Whoever these people were, they obviously wanted you dead, and you doubt they'd stop after one attempt. You figure you should take them out now before they have a chance to regroup and attempt another assassination attempt. + + +"Make sure Raven is okay!" You call out to Vitre as you vault the window sill out onto the street below. You hear what may have been Vitre telling you to wait, but you ignore that. Better to ask forgiveness than permission. + + +Another arrow whizzes pased you on the way down to the street. The fall is two stories high, but you use the momentum from gravity and roll to reduce any damage you might take from it. As fast as possible, you spring up from your roll to get behind cover. + + +You glance from behind the wall you took cover at. Almost immediately you hear the twang of a bow, and, consequently, you move your head back behind cover. Thoughts roil in your head as you try to figure out how to get to the enemy without getting hit by an arrow. A few different ideas come into your head, but when you examine and reexamine them you are only left with two plausible ideas. + + +You could use your blessing to speed up your reflexes in hopes that it'll allow you to dodge any arrows come at you. + + +The other idea you have much less confidence in working. You could dash from cover to cover, and hope he doesn't hit you. You don't really like this idea, because it puts your fate into the air. Instead of relying on your reflexes, you'd simply be hoping that he'd miss. + + + +> Use your blessing +In the past years you've become fairly efficient at tricking your body into thinking it needed to be protected. That way you'd be able to use your power whenever you wanted. Now, however, you realize you do not need to trick yourself at all. + + +You breathe in deeply, and then let that deep breath out. If anyone wa paying attention, then they might've thought an angel had appeared in the street. The mark on your back glows through your clothes and that familiar heat radiates across your shoulders. You prepare to rush the man, and at the last second pull your sword from you belt. + + +You rush out into the alley, and head in the direction of the archer. Almost immediately an arrow flies toward your head. You twist your head out of the way, and manage to get out of the way before it can touch you. It was close, but you were still fast enough to dodge it. You feel a surge of success, but you make sure you don't allow it to go to your head as you barrel down the alleyway. + + +Just before the next arrow flies at you, you manage to make out the outline of your second attacker. The next arrow flies toward your chest, but the feeling of protecting yourself grows even stronger. Thus you feel like the arrow is moving slower. You bring up your left hand (the hand that isn't holding the sword) up and your timing is perfect. You grab the arrow just before it hits you. Somewhere in the back of your mind you feel pain from splinters entering your hand, but that doesn't;t bother you anymore. You've given yourself into the adrenaline that comes from such a life threatening situation. + + +You gauge the distance between you and the shadowed figure, and realize, with relief, that he wouldn't have enough time to draw another arrow before you reached him. + + +Unfortunately, he notices this as well, and instead of bothering to fight, he runs. You continue running after him determined to find out who exactly wanted you dead this bad. + + +The would be assassin is much faster than you expected, so even with your blessing, you're barely gaining on him. He leads you down a maze of alleys and streets until he finally makes a wrong turn an hits a dead end. You cease your running, and the man turns around with a panicked expression on his face. Time seems to slow down as you wait for him to try and dodge past you. He stays eerily still as you walk towards him, and if you didn't have your blessing activated you might not have caught the signs. The signs that you were led into a trap. The man your facing made the mistake of glancing behind you. That mistake alone might not have given it away, but you hear the light fall of a single footstep behind you. + + +The hair on your neck stands, and you roll out of the way to dodge whatever was behind you. While your roll saved you from that initial attack, you're left on the defensive when you look behind you. + + +Several cloaked figures stand between you and the exit of the dead end. You quickly count them up. Five. Including the archer from before, there were five more cloaked figures cornering you. All with that symbol of the red sun on their cloak. As you stand up from the roll, you see that the guy who tried to decapitate you looking suitably surprised at your reflexes. + + +You use half a moment to examine the surroundings. The blessing helps marvelously with this. You take note of each important thing in the form of fragmented thoughts. + + +Only one archer. Everyone else has swords. They arrived at different times. Must be why only one person attacked you a moment ago. One of the five stands alone in the back. The archer from before looks ready to draw another arrow. Take him out first...situation has changed. Don't try to disable. Go for the kill. + + +All of these thoughts run through your mind just as that guy (whom attacked you seconds ago) steps forward for a second try. It would be his last mistake. + + +You've always been great at fighting, even without your blessing, but with it you're pretty much unstoppable. You were even able to surpass Miss Sarrin before you graduated. + + +So when assassin number three (Assassin number one being the one back at the tavern) decides he wants another try, you parry his thrust and slash his throat before he could understand what just happened. + + +Assassin number two managed to string an arrow while you dealt with his friend, and is now in the process of aiming it at you. Assassin's number four and five decide that advancing at the same time might be better alternative to going at you separately. Assassin number six, oddly enough, doesn't do anything else but watch things go down. He seems to be the leader of numbers one through five. + + +You're left with two viable options. (short of giving up that is) +> Attack numbers four and five +Your original line of thought made you want to take out the archer first, but then a brilliant idea comes to mind. You glance at the archer, and sure enough he's starting to aim at you. You're tempted to smile, but you think better of it. You don't want to tip your hand. + + +You charge Assassins four and five, and take a brief, seemingly unnoticeable action, moment to position yourself between the archer and his friends. + + +While surprised the Assassins react quickly enough. You slash and stab in a whirl of different tricks, and despite the fact that there are two people against you, you manage to put them on the defensive. during this, however, you use your blessing to the fullest. Your urge to protect yourself is so strong that time seems to slow down. It's certainly potent enough for your plan to work. + + +The first step being to place yourself, and therefore assassins four and five, in the archer's line of fire. Second step is to exploit your power so much that you're reflexes will be fast enough to dodge the arrow as soon as you here the twang of the bow. After that dispatching someone one on one would be easy, then the archer would go down leaving one final person to take care of. + + +He's the only person you're truly wary of, for when placed against a blessed one, all he does is watch. A cool confidence that you find a little disheartening. Of course, that's still only a little. There's no doubt in your mind that you'll be able take care of him. + + +So you wait. You wait for the twang of the bow whilst attempting to break through the defense of two people at once. Not just two people at that. Two people that happened to be quite skilled with a blade. you might have been more well aware of this if you hadn't taken the other two out via surprise. Still it isn't long before you do manage to find a whole in their defenses. + + +Your assault of attacks must have become very taxing for them, and especially for assassin number five, for the next feint you throw at him proves to be his downfall. Your fake thrust to his left side opens his right side up, and you take that opportunity to deal a lightning speed thrust straight into his heart. + + +If you hadn't used your power to such an extent, then your sense of time may not have been so skewed. For that reason, you don't seem to realize that the archer didn't take his first opportunity to fire at you. No, he'd already seen the insane reflexes you'd exhibited prior to being cornered. He would wait for the perfect opportunity to shoot at you. + + +Stabbing your enemy through the heart was one such opportunity. Your blessing not only gave you increased speed, but also increased strength. When slashing it didn't particularly matter, but with a stab, it's easier to use to much strength. Therefore, when you finally do hear the twang, it takes you much too long to yank the sword out of your opponents body. + + +Even so, you manage to let go of the sword to try and dodge away. The arrow still hits you however, albeit barely missing your heart. It is a tiny success in the grand scheme of things, for assassin number four takes the opportunity to avenge his comrade. If only you had been more self aware. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>In the past years you've become fairly efficient at tricking your body into thinking it needed to be protected. That way you'd be able to use your power whenever you wanted. Now, however, you realize you do not need to trick yourself at all. + + +You breathe in deeply, and then let that deep breath out. If anyone wa paying attention, then they might've thought an angel had appeared in the street. The mark on your back glows through your clothes and that familiar heat radiates across your shoulders. You prepare to rush the man, and at the last second pull your sword from you belt. + + +You rush out into the alley, and head in the direction of the archer. Almost immediately an arrow flies toward your head. You twist your head out of the way, and manage to get out of the way before it can touch you. It was close, but you were still fast enough to dodge it. You feel a surge of success, but you make sure you don't allow it to go to your head as you barrel down the alleyway. + + +Just before the next arrow flies at you, you manage to make out the outline of your second attacker. The next arrow flies toward your chest, but the feeling of protecting yourself grows even stronger. Thus you feel like the arrow is moving slower. You bring up your left hand (the hand that isn't holding the sword) up and your timing is perfect. You grab the arrow just before it hits you. Somewhere in the back of your mind you feel pain from splinters entering your hand, but that doesn't;t bother you anymore. You've given yourself into the adrenaline that comes from such a life threatening situation. + + +You gauge the distance between you and the shadowed figure, and realize, with relief, that he wouldn't have enough time to draw another arrow before you reached him. + + +Unfortunately, he notices this as well, and instead of bothering to fight, he runs. You continue running after him determined to find out who exactly wanted you dead this bad. + + +The would be assassin is much faster than you expected, so even with your blessing, you're barely gaining on him. He leads you down a maze of alleys and streets until he finally makes a wrong turn an hits a dead end. You cease your running, and the man turns around with a panicked expression on his face. Time seems to slow down as you wait for him to try and dodge past you. He stays eerily still as you walk towards him, and if you didn't have your blessing activated you might not have caught the signs. The signs that you were led into a trap. The man your facing made the mistake of glancing behind you. That mistake alone might not have given it away, but you hear the light fall of a single footstep behind you. + + +The hair on your neck stands, and you roll out of the way to dodge whatever was behind you. While your roll saved you from that initial attack, you're left on the defensive when you look behind you. + + +Several cloaked figures stand between you and the exit of the dead end. You quickly count them up. Five. Including the archer from before, there were five more cloaked figures cornering you. All with that symbol of the red sun on their cloak. As you stand up from the roll, you see that the guy who tried to decapitate you looking suitably surprised at your reflexes. + + +You use half a moment to examine the surroundings. The blessing helps marvelously with this. You take note of each important thing in the form of fragmented thoughts. + + +Only one archer. Everyone else has swords. They arrived at different times. Must be why only one person attacked you a moment ago. One of the five stands alone in the back. The archer from before looks ready to draw another arrow. Take him out first...situation has changed. Don't try to disable. Go for the kill. + + +All of these thoughts run through your mind just as that guy (whom attacked you seconds ago) steps forward for a second try. It would be his last mistake. + + +You've always been great at fighting, even without your blessing, but with it you're pretty much unstoppable. You were even able to surpass Miss Sarrin before you graduated. + + +So when assassin number three (Assassin number one being the one back at the tavern) decides he wants another try, you parry his thrust and slash his throat before he could understand what just happened. + + +Assassin number two managed to string an arrow while you dealt with his friend, and is now in the process of aiming it at you. Assassin's number four and five decide that advancing at the same time might be better alternative to going at you separately. Assassin number six, oddly enough, doesn't do anything else but watch things go down. He seems to be the leader of numbers one through five. + + +You're left with two viable options. (short of giving up that is) +> Attack number two +It doesn't matter that two guys are advancing toward you from your right, you don't at all feel comfortable with someone aiming an arrow at your back. It would only take one mistake on your part, and you would be lying dead on the cold hard stones of Aeors. + + +You rush archer number two with incredible speed, and the other two rush after you. The archer brings his bow up just as you get to him, and at the same time assassin number four closes in on you from behind. A truly un-ideal situation. Well at least if you hadn't expected it. + + +You twist out of the way the moment your heightened senses see the archer begin to release his arrow. Unfortunately for number four, he is nowhere near as fast as you. The arrow slams into his chest silencing him immediately. + + +Astonishment colors the eyes of the archer as he kills his comrade, but you don't allow him any time for regret. You immediately advance and stab him through the stomach. Your blade sinks far into his stomach, certainly farther than normal, and you note that if you were any stronger, thn you very well could have your hand wrist deep into his body. + + +Luckily for you, assassin number five isn't fast enough to hit you before you withdraw your sword from the archer's stomach. Unluckily for you, it seems that assassin number six finally decided to contribute to the fight. He makes his way towards the both of you just as you swing your first slash at number five. He barely manages to block it, and is put on the defensive immediately. You only manage to get a few swings out before number six joins the fight. + + +A fast thrust is immediately dealt towards you, and as you parry it away, you realized that it was thrown with immense strength. You simultaneously kick out at number five, catching him in the leg, and slash from the bottom up at the newcomer. + + +Your slash, although extremely fast, doesn't hit him. Instead, he's fast enough to avoid the deadly attack. Well he is. Your sword does manage to catch the edge of his cloak hood thoug, and the cloak material is thick enough that your sword takes just longer than a moment to slice through it. That moment is more than enough to send his hood flying off of his head. + + +You're so surprised that you nearly drop your sword. Ashyr stand before you. Obviously older, and with a scar on his chin, but Ashyr nonetheless. + + +You remember back when you first clashed swords years ago. For a brief moment you feel nostalgia, but that moment passes very quickly when you remember that he's trying to kill you. + + +Number five recovers from the kick and swings his sword in a deadly arc over his head at you, which you block, then Ashyr follows up with an attack of his own, which you parry. + + +The three of you soon enter a dance of sorts. Blades ring throughout the alley and echo into the night. There's a brief moment where you wonder if anyone will here the commotion, but you shrug it off quickly enough. Your opponents had the luxury of choosing the sight for this fight. You doubt they would choose a place where someone would impede their killing you. + + +Without your blessing you're sure you would already be dead, for Ashyr certainly kept honing his swordplay since the Academy, and number five is no push over either. You hate to admit it, but you doubt if you could beat Ashyr without your blessing. Someone of his caliber fighting against you would require you to use your blessing to win, and with someone else helping him... it turns the fight into a near stalemate. It is only a near stalemate though, because your increased prowess with your blessing, let alone that Ashyr no longer has strength and height advantage over you, allow you the edge in this fight. + + +That being said, you aren't really fighting offensively, so you don't get very far in your attempts to take them out. + + +You decide that in order to effectively protect yourself, and stay alive, you need to focus your attack on one of your opponents. + + +While assassin five is certainly weaker, you briefly think that it might better suit you if you take out Ashyr first. Of course, there's also the flip side. If you take number five out quickly enough, then Ashyr won't be able to stand alone against you. + + + +> Focus your attacks on number five +Maybe it' a greater sense of strategy. or perhaps you just want to save Ashyr for last. Whatever the reason, you focus all of your strength on number five. + + +To the untrained eye, the fight will have stayed the same, but to the trained eye everything changed in the span of a second. Before you were attacking and defending from both sides, but with your new strategy you only attack against number five, and only ever defend against Ashyr. so long as you sufficiently defend yourself from Ashyr, and constantly press the attack on number five, then you don't get harmed. + + +To your surprise, it not only works, but it works famously. Number five turns out to be less suitable to defending than to attacking. He practically stumbles several times in his attempts to stay alive. What surprises you even more is Ashyr's performance on offense. He doesn't attack quite as skillfully as you might imagine he would have, so his attacks end up having loads of power, yet not quite enough skill to use it effectively. You catch a glimpse of his face during the encounter, and his face is a mix of true rage and hate. You knew he didn't like you, but you didn't think it would be quite so extensive. + + +You press the attack on number five even more urging him to cease his impotent defense. Every swing of yours brings a weaker block from him. Eventually this becomes too much for him and one of his blocks fails to have nearly enough power to stop your blow. Your over head strike knocks his sword clear out of his hand, but your sword continues and bites down into his neck. + + +Halfway decapitated, number five falls to the ground amongst the bodies of the other assassins. + + +Despite your moment of victory, Ashyr is undeterred. He launches a powerful strike in a deadly arc at your shoulder. Probably in hopes of making you lose the ability to use your arm. It was a smart move, but you do manage to bring your sword back in time for you to block it. To your chagrin, his attack was plentifully powerful. Enough to push your block down, and even make a slight cut in your arm. The pain isn't too great, and with the addition of of your adrenaline pumping you barely feel it at all. + + +This must've been a last ditch effort to defeat you, for he immediately goes back on the defensive. With your focus solely on Asher, you are able to to put all of your effort into attack. The eerie similarity of the situation astonishes you for a moment. + + +You pushing him back with a sudden ferocity akin to a demon. + + +Him, defending as if his life depended on it. + + +You continuing to press him with attacks despite fatigue starting to come to you. + + +Him, realizing your fatigue and desperately trying to hold out until your attacks weaken. + + +You, finally failing in your attacks, and on the defensive. + + +Him, pushing you back with attacks that you are barely able to defend against. + + +You start gasping for air, and it seems that you can never gulp down enough. Your eyes blur for a moment and Ashyr nearly takes your head off. Wait, this isn't right. You think this as you barely manage to stay alive against his onslaught of attacks. Your blessing should be giving you much greater energy than this. You try to activate it again, but realize that it is already activated. Still, you don't have the energy that you know you should have. + + +Then everything connects in your head. The red suns...they were a symbol for an ancient assassin group. Your mind goes all the way back to when you were with Alessa in the Man's cabin. It was one of the books he had on the shelf. So these people weren't just assassins against you, they were regular assassins. And as with most assassins, Ashyr probably had his sword poisoned. It would explain the sudden loss of energy, as well as why he was so intent on simply hitting you. + + +You grow weaker and weaker. You realize that there's only one way this can end. You clumsily block Ashyr's next attack then immediately back up against the end of the alley. Apparently he had been pressing you hard enough to push you into a literal corner. Your back slides against the alley wall, and you sink into a sitting position on the ground. The strength gives out in your arms and your sword clatters to the ground beside you. + + +Ashyr stands above you with a triumphant expression on his face. He slowly brings his sword over his head and prepares to bring it down in a deadly stab. You close your eyes and await the inevitable. + + +It doesn't come. you hear a whirring sound in the air and then the sound of metal striking the alley wall. You open your eyes tiredly. + + +Alessa stands at the end of the alley. The moonlight shines across her hair making her shine in the darkness. In her hands is a gleaming silver sword, and at her shoulders you can see a darkish aura rising from her persona. Ashyr stares in astonishment at the newcomer, but his true goal doesn't leave his mind. He brings his sword down again at you. You blink and Alessa is already beside you stopping his sword from killing you. + + +She was extremely close now, and you could see the outline of dark wings through her leather armor. Despite that you dearly wish to fall asleep... + + +"Stay with me Erron!" Her voice commands you, and you reopen your eyes. Ashyr attack aat you again, and Alessa manages to defend you again. You want to tell her to leave you, but you don't have the strength to say anything. + + +Alessa pushes Ashyr back with her sword, and a fight ensues. Alessa is clearly no match for him in terms of skill, but her curse gives her enough power to stay toe to toe with him. Alessa manages to push him back a few feet, but she is nowhere near as good at you at fighting. Moments later, you hear a pained cry as Ashyr's sword slashes across her upper arm. + + +You lose all hope then. Alessa's power would soon be depleted, and you would both die. The thought of Alessa dying starts to motivate you, and you look for ways to help her. You see your sword lying on the ground beside you, and you wonder if you can pick it up. Maybe you have enough energy for one last thrust... + + + +> Pick up the sword and stab Ashyr +You muster all of your remaining strength and reach for the sword. For a moment your fingers fumble, but you manage to pick the sword up. You roll forward onto one knee, and for a brief satisfying moment, you think you'll be able to do it. + + +Turns out the extra movement only accelerated the poison. You collapse to the ground in a fit of coughs. + + +You die, knowing that you fail in saving Alessa. Some "Chosen Hero" you are.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Maybe it' a greater sense of strategy. or perhaps you just want to save Ashyr for last. Whatever the reason, you focus all of your strength on number five. + + +To the untrained eye, the fight will have stayed the same, but to the trained eye everything changed in the span of a second. Before you were attacking and defending from both sides, but with your new strategy you only attack against number five, and only ever defend against Ashyr. so long as you sufficiently defend yourself from Ashyr, and constantly press the attack on number five, then you don't get harmed. + + +To your surprise, it not only works, but it works famously. Number five turns out to be less suitable to defending than to attacking. He practically stumbles several times in his attempts to stay alive. What surprises you even more is Ashyr's performance on offense. He doesn't attack quite as skillfully as you might imagine he would have, so his attacks end up having loads of power, yet not quite enough skill to use it effectively. You catch a glimpse of his face during the encounter, and his face is a mix of true rage and hate. You knew he didn't like you, but you didn't think it would be quite so extensive. + + +You press the attack on number five even more urging him to cease his impotent defense. Every swing of yours brings a weaker block from him. Eventually this becomes too much for him and one of his blocks fails to have nearly enough power to stop your blow. Your over head strike knocks his sword clear out of his hand, but your sword continues and bites down into his neck. + + +Halfway decapitated, number five falls to the ground amongst the bodies of the other assassins. + + +Despite your moment of victory, Ashyr is undeterred. He launches a powerful strike in a deadly arc at your shoulder. Probably in hopes of making you lose the ability to use your arm. It was a smart move, but you do manage to bring your sword back in time for you to block it. To your chagrin, his attack was plentifully powerful. Enough to push your block down, and even make a slight cut in your arm. The pain isn't too great, and with the addition of of your adrenaline pumping you barely feel it at all. + + +This must've been a last ditch effort to defeat you, for he immediately goes back on the defensive. With your focus solely on Asher, you are able to to put all of your effort into attack. The eerie similarity of the situation astonishes you for a moment. + + +You pushing him back with a sudden ferocity akin to a demon. + + +Him, defending as if his life depended on it. + + +You continuing to press him with attacks despite fatigue starting to come to you. + + +Him, realizing your fatigue and desperately trying to hold out until your attacks weaken. + + +You, finally failing in your attacks, and on the defensive. + + +Him, pushing you back with attacks that you are barely able to defend against. + + +You start gasping for air, and it seems that you can never gulp down enough. Your eyes blur for a moment and Ashyr nearly takes your head off. Wait, this isn't right. You think this as you barely manage to stay alive against his onslaught of attacks. Your blessing should be giving you much greater energy than this. You try to activate it again, but realize that it is already activated. Still, you don't have the energy that you know you should have. + + +Then everything connects in your head. The red suns...they were a symbol for an ancient assassin group. Your mind goes all the way back to when you were with Alessa in the Man's cabin. It was one of the books he had on the shelf. So these people weren't just assassins against you, they were regular assassins. And as with most assassins, Ashyr probably had his sword poisoned. It would explain the sudden loss of energy, as well as why he was so intent on simply hitting you. + + +You grow weaker and weaker. You realize that there's only one way this can end. You clumsily block Ashyr's next attack then immediately back up against the end of the alley. Apparently he had been pressing you hard enough to push you into a literal corner. Your back slides against the alley wall, and you sink into a sitting position on the ground. The strength gives out in your arms and your sword clatters to the ground beside you. + + +Ashyr stands above you with a triumphant expression on his face. He slowly brings his sword over his head and prepares to bring it down in a deadly stab. You close your eyes and await the inevitable. + + +It doesn't come. you hear a whirring sound in the air and then the sound of metal striking the alley wall. You open your eyes tiredly. + + +Alessa stands at the end of the alley. The moonlight shines across her hair making her shine in the darkness. In her hands is a gleaming silver sword, and at her shoulders you can see a darkish aura rising from her persona. Ashyr stares in astonishment at the newcomer, but his true goal doesn't leave his mind. He brings his sword down again at you. You blink and Alessa is already beside you stopping his sword from killing you. + + +She was extremely close now, and you could see the outline of dark wings through her leather armor. Despite that you dearly wish to fall asleep... + + +"Stay with me Erron!" Her voice commands you, and you reopen your eyes. Ashyr attack aat you again, and Alessa manages to defend you again. You want to tell her to leave you, but you don't have the strength to say anything. + + +Alessa pushes Ashyr back with her sword, and a fight ensues. Alessa is clearly no match for him in terms of skill, but her curse gives her enough power to stay toe to toe with him. Alessa manages to push him back a few feet, but she is nowhere near as good at you at fighting. Moments later, you hear a pained cry as Ashyr's sword slashes across her upper arm. + + +You lose all hope then. Alessa's power would soon be depleted, and you would both die. The thought of Alessa dying starts to motivate you, and you look for ways to help her. You see your sword lying on the ground beside you, and you wonder if you can pick it up. Maybe you have enough energy for one last thrust... + + + +> See if your blessing works +Your thoughts go once again to the cabin. The last time you saw Alessa in person. The choice was offered to you, but no words were said. You felt that one would give you power, while the other would give you the power to protect. You assumed that the power to protect meant only yourself, but as you see Alessa fighting for her life, you realize that being able to protect means that you protect more than just yourself. + + +And if there was anyone that you wanted to protect more than yourself, it was her. + + +Power surges from your shoulders and throughout your body. More power than you have ever felt before. You feel your blessing fighting off the poison and expelling it from your system. Much of the power you felt moments before, leave you body with the poison. You guess the blessing wasn't meant to heal such a detrimental poison. You reach over to your side and confidently grab your sword. + + +Alessa looks like she's starting to feel the debilitating effects of the poison now, but the Creator must be on your side, for she sees you stand up. You meet her eyes, and she seems to understand exactly what you mean to do. + + +She maneuvers the fight so that she is facing directly towards you whilst Ashyr's back is right in front of you. You move as fast as possible but your fatigue hasn't entirely gone away, so the going is much slower than you'd wish it to be. A few feet away from Ashyr, he hears something and starts to look behind him. + + +But it's too late. You force your sword through his back, and into his heart. His body falls limply to the ground dead. + + +Alessa falls moments after, and you rush to her side. The poison looks like its affecting her much more quickly than it affected you, so you know you don't have much time. + + +Her eys open, and she smiles weakly at you. "I'm glad I got to save you." + + +Your thoughts are frantic, as you try and think of a way to save her. You weren't nearly strong enough to carry her anywhere, so you start to panic. + + +Alessa's eyes start to close. "Stay with me, Alessa!" You shout frantically at her repeating the words she said to you minutes before. + + +You start losing all hop, and then an odd thought occurs to you. + + +You've never really known if you received this power from the Creator or not, but if you did, then surely he didn't want you to die. + + +You start to pray. You ask him to help you, and you promise that you'll forever be in his debt. You go on, and at the same to you start using your power to see if you can heal Alessa. + + +You feel power going through you and into her, but her eyes don't open. You pull and pull as much power as you can from your body in order to heal her. When you exhaust all of your energy, you pass out. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It doesn't matter that two guys are advancing toward you from your right, you don't at all feel comfortable with someone aiming an arrow at your back. It would only take one mistake on your part, and you would be lying dead on the cold hard stones of Aeors. + + +You rush archer number two with incredible speed, and the other two rush after you. The archer brings his bow up just as you get to him, and at the same time assassin number four closes in on you from behind. A truly un-ideal situation. Well at least if you hadn't expected it. + + +You twist out of the way the moment your heightened senses see the archer begin to release his arrow. Unfortunately for number four, he is nowhere near as fast as you. The arrow slams into his chest silencing him immediately. + + +Astonishment colors the eyes of the archer as he kills his comrade, but you don't allow him any time for regret. You immediately advance and stab him through the stomach. Your blade sinks far into his stomach, certainly farther than normal, and you note that if you were any stronger, thn you very well could have your hand wrist deep into his body. + + +Luckily for you, assassin number five isn't fast enough to hit you before you withdraw your sword from the archer's stomach. Unluckily for you, it seems that assassin number six finally decided to contribute to the fight. He makes his way towards the both of you just as you swing your first slash at number five. He barely manages to block it, and is put on the defensive immediately. You only manage to get a few swings out before number six joins the fight. + + +A fast thrust is immediately dealt towards you, and as you parry it away, you realized that it was thrown with immense strength. You simultaneously kick out at number five, catching him in the leg, and slash from the bottom up at the newcomer. + + +Your slash, although extremely fast, doesn't hit him. Instead, he's fast enough to avoid the deadly attack. Well he is. Your sword does manage to catch the edge of his cloak hood thoug, and the cloak material is thick enough that your sword takes just longer than a moment to slice through it. That moment is more than enough to send his hood flying off of his head. + + +You're so surprised that you nearly drop your sword. Ashyr stand before you. Obviously older, and with a scar on his chin, but Ashyr nonetheless. + + +You remember back when you first clashed swords years ago. For a brief moment you feel nostalgia, but that moment passes very quickly when you remember that he's trying to kill you. + + +Number five recovers from the kick and swings his sword in a deadly arc over his head at you, which you block, then Ashyr follows up with an attack of his own, which you parry. + + +The three of you soon enter a dance of sorts. Blades ring throughout the alley and echo into the night. There's a brief moment where you wonder if anyone will here the commotion, but you shrug it off quickly enough. Your opponents had the luxury of choosing the sight for this fight. You doubt they would choose a place where someone would impede their killing you. + + +Without your blessing you're sure you would already be dead, for Ashyr certainly kept honing his swordplay since the Academy, and number five is no push over either. You hate to admit it, but you doubt if you could beat Ashyr without your blessing. Someone of his caliber fighting against you would require you to use your blessing to win, and with someone else helping him... it turns the fight into a near stalemate. It is only a near stalemate though, because your increased prowess with your blessing, let alone that Ashyr no longer has strength and height advantage over you, allow you the edge in this fight. + + +That being said, you aren't really fighting offensively, so you don't get very far in your attempts to take them out. + + +You decide that in order to effectively protect yourself, and stay alive, you need to focus your attack on one of your opponents. + + +While assassin five is certainly weaker, you briefly think that it might better suit you if you take out Ashyr first. Of course, there's also the flip side. If you take number five out quickly enough, then Ashyr won't be able to stand alone against you. + + + +> Focus your attacks on Ashyr +You decide that taking out the greater threat will prove to be more advantageous to you in the long run. + + +To the untrained eye, the fight will have stayed the same, but to the trained eye everything changed in the span of a second. Before you were attacking and defending from both sides, but with your new strategy you only attack against Ashyr, and only ever defend against number five. so long as you sufficiently defend yourself from number five, and constantly press the attack on Ashyr, then you don't get harmed. + + +Well that's the idea. While it works at the beginning, you soon realize that you've made a huge mistake. On the outside Ashyr has always seemed like he would be an aggressor in a fight, but it is actually the contrary. You remember your first fight. You won after pressing him with a series of attacks, but never once did he truly falter in his defenses. Maybe if you had time you could wear him down, but you don't have that kind of time. You only managed to defeat him before, because of the overwhelming power from the blessing, and because you bested him while he was attacking. + + +This time is barely different. Except that number five is smarter than he looks, and has begun finding patterns in your defenses. Your deadly speed, strength, and skill are being analyzed and holes are starting to be exploited. Every swing presses you, and soon enough you're having to spend more and more time/energy defending than attacking. + + +Eventually Ashyr finds a hole in your attacks and manages to put you on the defensive. Despite your vast reserves of energy, you find yourself starting to tire. Your focus begins to wear thin as well, and it's all you can do to stay alive. You attempt to trick yourself into thinking that you need to be protected. It proves that you aren't in the best shape mentally, because you're already trying to protect yourself to the maximum. + + +Suddenly you lose your grip on your sword, and, consequently, you make an awkward block against Ashyr. It proves to be a fatal mistake. After that clumsy block, number five surges forward and horizontally slashes at you. The blade cuts deep into your right side dealing you immense pain. + + +Fortunately for you, Ashyr ends the pain with a well placed stab through your heart. Your body falls limply into pools of blood on the ground. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Despite having cracked lips, you want to kiss her. You feel an inkling of the crush you used to have start to her come back, and then you nearly kiss her regardless, but you manage to stop yourself. + + +"Raven. Whatever you feel for me, see if you still feel it for me later. When we aren't on the cusp of life or death situations. Maybe then I can see how I feel about you." Disappointment flashes across her features. "Until then, I don't want to be distracted by you." + + +You feel that you didn't really choose the best set of words to say, for now disappointment and hurt color her features. You mentally wince at the awkward tension you feel building up, but thankfully Vitre saves you from braving it alone. + + + "We'll have two rooms here for a week. If we haven't found her by then, then we can pay for longer. Agreed?" Raven nods slowly. Certainly not in her usual jovial manner. You nod as well, and Vitre looks back and forth between the two of you with a knowing look on his face. + + +"Alright then. Follow me." You both follow him as he leads you up the stairs. "Erron and I will share a room. Raven, you'll take this room." He gestures to a door on his left. "We're in the next room over. If you need us, just pound on the wall. Okay?" + + +You watch as Raven nods numbly, and you feel a brief stab of regret. Maybe you should've kissed her if it meant that you were to keep your previous relationship. Raven walks into her room and the door slams shut. + + +Vitre gives you a brief judgemental glance. "What did you do to her?" + + +You stay quiet until you are safe from being heard in your room. "She confessed to me." You try to leave it at that, but he motions for you to continue. + + +You look away from him, "I told her that, uh, I didn't want to be distracted by her." Your usual articulate self is long gone, and replaced by a less convenient embarrassed version of yourself. + + +Vitre shakes his head back and forth. "You should've let her down more easily. I expected more from the Chosen Hero." He says that last part because he knows it'll get to you the most. "I can't have something like this ruining the mission. You're going to have to make up with her before long, or the rest of this trip is going to be very unpleasant." + + +You nod your assent, and he gives you one last disappointing look before he goes off to take a bath. + + +Somehow being left alone with your thoughts is even worse than having someone chastise you. You run the situation over and over again in your head trying to find a way that you could've rejected her without having left her so dejected. + + +Vitre comes back before you can fathom a way to do so, and you go ahead to take a bath as well. The water feels heavenly, but you don't feel as if you're really enjoying it quite as much as you could. Even before the incident today, you had quite a lot on your mind. With the addition of a sad friend on your mind, you find yourself starting to get mentally taxed. Sleep would do you good. + + +You come back to the room minutes later to find Vitre already asleep. Asleep on the only bed in the room at that. You sigh and tell yourself that you deserve it when you sink into a very uncomfortable wooden chair. You manage to get a few winks of sleep, but you often wake up due to aches on your body from sleeping in such an uncomfortable position. + + +You wake up again, and you automatically start to rub your back, when you see a figure begin to creep through the window. You immediately close your eyes most of the way, and hope he didn't see you moving. Luckily for you, it appears he didn't. + + +He wears a black cloak, so you can't see who he is, but that isn't what catches your attention the most. Instead of a typical rope coming across his chest to connect the two sides of the cloak together, there is an insignia. In the dark it's hard to see, but you think it's a symbol of the sun. You think it has a reddish hue, but you don't know for sure. + + +He walks silently and leans over the bed to stare at Vitre. You ready yourself to spring at the intruder at the first signs of aggression, but there's no need. Apparently Vitre wasn't who he was looking for. Instead the man turns his attention to you. You make sure your breathing is even as he makes his way over to you, and that your eyes are so close to being closed that it's nearly impossible to tell. + + +He examines your face, and gives slight nod to himself. You assume that you are his target, and ready yourself for the opportunity to strike. The man pulls a dagger out of his cloak, and starts the motions to stab you. + + +It's what you were waiting for. You twist out of the way at the last second, and his dagger lodges into the back of the chair instead. You take the opportunity to punch him in the stomach and shove him to the floor. He lets go of the knife, and you quickly pull that from the chair's back. The man recovers fairly quickly and attempts to tackle you to the ground, but the attempt only goes so far. You knee him in the face and throw him across the room. Coincidentally, that place you throw him happens to be the bed Vitre lays on. + + +You see Vitre start to stir out of the corner of your eye. You decide that you needed this guy immobilized as soon as possible, so you follow up your throwing him with another throw. This time, however, you're throwing the guy's dagger. Your aim is true, and the dagger hits the guys upper thigh. He yells out in pain causing Vitre to wake up fully. + + +You think of why someone would be targeting you, but then realize you have your priorities skewed. You needed to make sure that the danger was gone. You rush to the window and gaze out across the city that you can see. At first you see nothing, but a glint of silver shines in the distance and you duck down. An arrow embeds itself in the wall directly behind you. + + +Your heart pound in your chest as you realize that you could've been dead if you hadn't been so fast. You glance to Vitre who has the first attacker subdued on the floor of the room. Whoever these people were, they obviously wanted you dead, and you doubt they'd stop after one attempt. You figure you should take them out now before they have a chance to regroup and attempt another assassination attempt. + + +"Make sure Raven is okay!" You call out to Vitre as you vault the window sill out onto the street below. You hear what may have been Vitre telling you to wait, but you ignore that. Better to ask forgiveness than permission. + + +Another arrow whizzes pased you on the way down to the street. The fall is two stories high, but you use the momentum from gravity and roll to reduce any damage you might take from it. As fast as possible, you spring up from your roll to get behind cover. + + +You glance from behind the wall you took cover at. Almost immediately you hear the twang of a bow, and, consequently, you move your head back behind cover. Thoughts roil in your head as you try to figure out how to get to the enemy without getting hit by an arrow. A few different ideas come into your head, but when you examine and reexamine them you are only left with two plausible ideas. + + +You could use your blessing to speed up your reflexes in hopes that it'll allow you to dodge any arrows come at you. + + +The other idea you have much less confidence in working. You could dash from cover to cover, and hope he doesn't hit you. You don't really like this idea, because it puts your fate into the air. Instead of relying on your reflexes, you'd simply be hoping that he'd miss. + + + +> Put your hands up and hope he doesn't shoot +A thought briefly crosses your mind. What if I just pretend to give up? + + +It doesn't seem like it'll work at first, but you hope that he'll be so surprised that he won't know what to do. Maybe even see if he can take you hostage. Then you would make your move. + + +You step out from behind the wall with your hands up above your head. A brief moment of silence passes, and you feel triumphant for a brief second. Then an arrow flies from the alleyway the archer is staked out in. You are no where near fast enough to dodge it, and it pierces through your chest. + + +You don't know why you thought this plan would work, but one thing is for certain. You're failed the Holy Kingdom in your role as the Chosen Hero. + + +The last thing you think is that the Creator must be face palming at your stupidity. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You'd rather be safe than sorry. What if you decided not to go, and they end up capturing her? You'd probably want to help her, but at the same time, you wouldn't want to betray your allies. A situation like that could only end in disaster. Instead you would go to the designated location and hope to find her by yourself before anyone else is able to get to her. + + +"I'll accept the mission." + + +The Headmaster raises his eyebrows in surprise. "You're braver than me. I'm not sure I would have been able to make the choice you just did had i been in your position. Alright then. Vitre, I'll leave the details to you. Just know that you need to leave within the next few days." + + +With that the Headmaster dismisses you. Vitre walks ahead of you two and motions for you to follow after him. Luckily, the Academy students are all in classes, so there's no one left to gawk at you. Vitre leads you and Raven down a few hallways, and before long you can guess where he's taking you. + + +"Are we headed to the library?" + + +Vitre nods. "There are maps there." His deep voice speaks quietly as if afraid that speaking in a tone larger than a whisper would interrupt classes. + + +"I wonder if Headmaster Farid is upset. I'm sure he was looking forward to assigning the chosen hero his first mission," Raven comments to you whilst giving you a slight push with her arm. + + +"I'm sure he'll be fine." You don't continue the line of conversation she tries to start. Your thoughts are pretty much exclusively centered on how in the name of the Creator you're supposed to find Alessa. Well, not only find her, but also make sure everyone else doesn't find her. Vitre, however, speaks again effectively ruining your train of thought. + + +"Does he really still insist on giving every new grad their first mission?" + + +Raven answers, "Yes, he does. Honestly, I'm not sure how he does it. Ever since the war started there's been way too many people waiting to receive their first mission." + + +"He probably just sends most of them of to the warfront for their first mission," you comment. "You could consider us lucky that we don't have a mission like that." You aren't too sure you consider yourself lucky, but if you were Raven, then you don't doubt that she'd rather be finding a lost princess than fighting a war. + + +"I'm not so sure about that." Vitre responds. "If this princess really is a Cursed One, then we could be in some serious trouble. That's probably one of the main reasons your father wants you here with me." + + +"Why you?" Raven asks almost immediately. You have to admit that you were curious as well. You know why you and Raven were chosen, but you had only just met Vitre. + + +He shrugs. "There isn't really some grand reason for it. I just happen to have a lot of experience in hunting people down. It makes me the ideal person to lead you two. Especially since we don't need some insanely good fighter. We are only hunting a princess. She probably hasn't even touched a sword in her life." + + +You knew this was false, but you didn't really want to comment. Let him think that Alessa is incapable. It'll be easier for her to avoid capture that way. + + +The three of you reach the library to find it mostly empty. A few academy students sat at desks doing classwork, but fortunate for you, no one is anyone near the map section. + + +The area isn't particularly large, but it's more than enough to suit your needs. Perhaps the most notable feature of the area is the massive wall map. It's position on the wall allows for many people to look at it without crowding it. The map itself is double your height and is about the same length from side to side. After a quick once over you realize it to be a map of the continent. It was fairly recent, and someone even updated it to show which cities are under Dellandian control, and which are in control of the Holy Kingdom. + + +It's this map that Vitre stops in front of. + + +"This is where we'll be going." He points to the very bottom of the map, specifically at the city of Aeors. + + +You remember the city from your history classes. Back before the Dellandians and the Holy Kingdom conquered the continent, this was the largest city, and the last one to fall before the Dellandians might. This was largely due to the fact that an army the size of the Dellandians was very difficult to provide food and drink for, but even harder when attempting to take a city in the middle of the desert. + + +When you and Raven don't say anything, Vitre continues speaking. "Aeors has always been fairly removed from the events on the continent, and even now they don't offer support to the Holy Kingdom or Dellandia. This makes it a nearly perfect place for people to want nothing to do with the war to move to. We surmise that the princess noticed this, and headed south so she could reap the benefits of relative neutrality." + + +You're about to interrupt him to tell him that that isn't much to go off of, but he raises his hand to stop you. "We also have reports telling us that she was last sighted heading in a southward direction." + + +Raven speaks this time. "If others saw and recognized her, then why didn't they already bring her in?" + + +"I mentioned it briefly before, but there is a strong possibility that this princess is a cursed one. Every time one of our own went to apprehend her, they only remember speaking to her as if they were old friends. Apparently, whenever someone enters her presence they forget why they approached her, and she uses her cursed powers to confound them." + + +You nod in agreement. You do remember how easily you were swayed in your dream. + + +Vitre continues to speak about the mission detailing how we would recognize her, which you already knew, how long it would they were to stay in Aeors, and other such information. Before too long, he finishes his debrief of the mission and everyone returns to the temporary rooms at the academy. + + +With your thoughts a mix of worry, determination, and fatigue you go to sleep. + + +~ + + +The next few days go by fairly quickly, and you find yourself on the road for the first time in while. Years in fact. You weren't really permitted to take lengthy trips during your years of schooling, so your last trip of moderate length was when you left Valium. + + +The first few days of the trip go by almost quickly, but with each passing day thereafter, you begin to feel like it's taking forever. You tend to stay silent for most of the trip, but Raven decides talking is much more preferable to silence. After the first few attempts at talking to you either fail, or end in uninteresting conversations, she decides to talk to Vitre. It goes fairly well for her, and the both of them get along famously for the remainder of the trip. You think you see Raven making eyes at Vitre, but you chalk it up to motion sickness. + + +As the days go by, the terrain changes and you begin to see progress being made in your trip. The surroundings go from green to brownish yellow, and you start seeing more and more sand replacing the trees. Eventually you get to the point where the three of you are wandering through the southern deserts of Dellandia. They're the only real obstacle that lies between you and Alessa. + + +The desert is hot, arid, and leaves you wishing for water often. Luckily for you, Vitre planned the trip well enough to take a route following a river. + + +Several more days pass, and Vitre finally talks about strategy. + + +"How do you two think we should go about finding this lost princess?" + + +You'd been waiting for this. This conversation was the key to achieving your goal of helping Alessa. Had you brought it up yourself, and then mentioned your plan, Vitre might've gotten suspicious. + + +"Well, we know her appearance. Her hair is supposed to be pretty distinct in Aeors. If we patrol the area, and can just find her, then I think I can apprehend her." + + +"What do you mean by 'I can apprehend her?' You don't seriously think that you're going to take her on alone, do you?" Raven questions you with a surprised look on her face. + + +"Of course I do," you respond cheerfully. When you see Raven about to object again, you continue. "I'm the only one who can do it. I am blessed by the Creator himself. I probably won't be affected by her black magic." You sound silly to yourself, but Raven takes your words completely seriously. + + +"But she's a cursed one!" + + +"That's even more of a reason for me to do it alone. What if she takes one of you hostage through her powers? That'd complicate things considerably. I'm not sure I'd even be able to rescue you if it came to that." + + +Throughout this back and forth, Vitre stayed silent, but takes the momentary lull in conversation to interject. "He's got a point Raven." + + +You allow yourself a small smile. If Vitre liked your plan, then you're quite certain that the two of you could convince Raven. However, your smile disappears when you hear what he has to say next. + + +"That being said, Aeors is not the kind of city we need to wander alone in. You're liable to get stabbed, robbed, and you're body desecrated if you wander alone. While I'm sure you're quite capable of defending yourself, I'm not convinced wandering around alone is the best idea." + + +You think he's probably exagerating, but you do see his point. Regardless of that, however, this was Alessa you were trying to save. You doubt that you'd get an opportunity to talk with her alone if you all patrolled as a group together, and you sure didn't want to find her when you're with the two of them. + + +You still wonder if Vitre is right though... +> Keep trying to convince him +"You said it yourself Vitre. There's a reason my father wanted me to be on this mission. If we all just travel together, then we'd draw too much attention, and an encounter with her could end catastrophically." + + +Seeing that Vitre and Raven still weren't convinced, you continue. "If you're that worried about me, then just follow behind me at a distance. That way you can rush to my aid if I ever need it." You make sure the emphasis on the 'if' is very clear. + + +Vitre starts nodding. "That could work," + + +Raven throws her hands up in exasperation. "You too Vitre? I can't believe you really think this is a good idea." + + +Raven continues to to express her dislike of the plan, but now that you have Vitre agreeing with you, everything goes much smoother. Even so, it takes most the rest of the trip to convince her. + + +When she is finally convinced, everything returns to normal, or at least as normal as it can get when traveling. + + +It's a few days later when you finally come upon the city of Aeors. Walls of hardened sand surround the entirety of the city, and towers line either side of the main entrance. As you arrive, the sun dips beyond the walls and casts a welcome shadow over you and your companions. You continue to follow the river until you three approach the gate, then Vitre surges ahead of you and Raven. + + +He approaches one of the two guards standing beneath the gate. After a muted conversation and a few coins exchanged, Vitre motions for you two to follow him into the city. You glance around and are surprised to see that the river flows under a section of the wall and into the city beyond. This sparks a memory from your history class back at the academy. + + +It was in your first year that you remember learning about the city of the lake. A city that was founded entirely around a lake and the resources that came from it. Supposedly the city was able to sustain itself entirely of the agriculture, water, and meat that came from it. + + +You and Raven pass through the gate and form up beside Vitre. If the view from the outside was impressive, then the view from the inside was magnificent. Sunlight falls over the tops of the sandstone buildings creating a dynamic contrast between sunlight and shadow. You continue to follow Vitre through a maze of roads until you come upon a tavern. You can tell this because of the raucous laughter coming the inside. + + +Vitre casts sidelong glances at the two of you that seem to say "here we go." With that encouraging look, Vitre pushes open the worn door open and steps into the tavern. You and Raven follow moments afterward. + + +The interior of the tavern is lined with torches, and the walls, floors, and ceilings are all made of polished sandstone. It's looks kind of odd to you, but everyone else seems to not care. Wooden tables are strewn about the room along with people of every type. You examine the room carefully, first to see if by some crazy chance Alessa was there. Second, to see if there was any danger in the immediate danger. Aside from a few shady people in corners, no one pays the newcomers much attention. + + +"Wait here, I'll go fetch us rooms." Vitre goes off to the bar to secure lodging leaving you and Raven alone. + + +You sneak a glance at her. Her skin has started to tan, and there's a tired look in her eyes, but other than that (and of course her growing) nothing has really changed about her since you first met her. Despite your expert glancing, she catches you looking at her and raises an eyebrow. + + +"Staring at me at a time like this?" A smirk follows the comment and you scowl. + + +"I wasn't staring," you object. + + +She laughs lightly, and you find yourself suddenly embarrassed. Luckily, Vitre comes walking back to you giving you a welcome distraction. + + +"We'll have two rooms here for a week. If we haven't found her by then, then we can pay for longer. Sound good?" + + +You and Raven nod your assent, and Raven and Vitre start to go up the stairs to the rooms. You pull Vitre back for a moment. + + +"Where's the privy?" You ask him quietly. + + +He keeps his face straight apparently catching on that you would prefer Raven to not hear about your endeavor to expel waste from your bowels. Even so, amusement twinkles in his eyes. + + +"The Innkeeper told me it was out behind the building." + + +You whisper a thanks to him, and head outside to relieve yourself. You find the privy easily enough, and you step inside eagerly. + + +It's what comes after you finish, however, that complicates things. When you open the door to go back outside, you find a cloaked figure waiting for you. From the physique type, you can tell it's a man. a man with a sinister kind of presence. Before you can ask him what he wants, he reaches into his cloak and pulls out a dagger. He then lunges at you. + + +He's fast, but not nearly fast enough to hit you. You easily sidestep, and as his hand passes your body, you pull on it and shove him past you and into the privy. You are just about to turn around and reenter the privy to question the guy, when you see something glint in the corner of your eye. You step entirely out of the privy and roll away just in time to dodge an arrow. + + +You heart pounds in your chest, but doesn't stay that way for long. When you rolled out of the way of the arrow, you happened to roll in to a third enemy. This time you don't have time to react. The third guy had a sword waiting, and he plunges it through your heart. + + +The last thing you see is the face of Ashyr standing over you, and the word "Payback" mouthed on his lips. + + + + + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Ashyr is stronger, taller, and every bit as skilled as you. You don't think you'll be able to last for too long if you stay on defense. Tackling him might also have detrimental consequences. If you timed it bad then you could take a sword to the head. No, among the choices you figure your best one is to overwhelm him with attacks. + + +With a sudden turn of luck you parry a blow, and Ashyr decides not to pursue attacking you. Instead you start circling each other again. You're grateful for the time to rest before you begin your attack, but Ashyr doesn't seem to be thinking at all about his energy. Instead his eyes are focused on you with a puzzled look in his eyes. You guess no one has ever lasted this long against him. + + +By now the sun's heat has your body beginning to wear down, and your fatigue must show, for Ashyr smiles a triumphant smile. Immediately afterwards, he surges forward with an overhead slash. + + +But you're ready for it. You surge forward as well and parry his attack on your way. You leave him no time to counterattack, but instead press the advantage created by surprising him with your ferocity. For the first time since the fight started, you seem to have a clear advantage. Every attack Ashyr blocks is a step he is forced backwards, and before long the smile he had disappears from his face. Replacing it is a face contorted in concentration, and Ashyr finally seems like he the exertion is getting to him. + + +However, you also feel your fatigue. You begin to slow down in your attacks whilst Ashyr's blocks pick up in their efficacy. Instead of barely being able to keep up, Ashyr is now blocking each attack with an attack of his own. It isn't long before you realize that you're going to fail. One of these moments you won't have enough energy to meet his attack with your own. One of these attacks you simply won't be able to raise your sword to block his. + + +The moment comes in the form of another overhead slash. Ashyr uses his height and superior strength to increase the attack's power, and you realize that he means to end the fight with this attack. You have no time to dodge and you feel like you don't have nearly enough energy to raise your sword, let alone enough to block the monstrous attack. Nevertheless, You push your arms with all your remaining strength to meet his attack with your own. Your thoughts aren't even centered upon winning the fight in that moment, rather, they're centered on making sure that that attack doesn't hit you. They're centered on protecting yourself. + + +As you bring your sword up, you feel a surge of energy resonating from your shoulders. It strengthens your body and fills your arms with power. Your sword clashes with Ashyr's, and the power behind your hit was so powerful that it knocks the wooden sword clear out of his hand. There's a moment of stunned silence all around, and in the back of your mind you realize that the other students must've stopped their sparring to watch, but your mind isn't on that. Instead the power you feel brings a grin to your face. It contrasts greatly with Ashyr's expression when you bring your sword to rest beneath his chin. + + +The changes in Ashyr's face come quickly, so if your weren't already looking at him then, you're not sure you would've noticed. Astonishment first, but rage soon followed with mixes of despair and vengeance coloring his eyes. You even thought that there was some respect there, but the moment of conflicting emotions passed. Back was his calm facade; the mask he wore was impressive, and if you hadn't seen it off when you first met, then you might really think that this calm demeanor was really him. + + +You hear hushed conversations among the remainder of the students, and soon enough Miss Sarrin shouts at everyone. "Get back to sparring everyone!" + + +You lower you sword and Ashyr takes a hesitant step. Then another. Before long Ashyr is heading off the field, and not much more time passes until he's out of sight. + + +You take this opportunity to rest. The fight was certainly much more difficult than you anticipated. You're sure you would've lost if you had not found that reserve of energy. Heat still resonated from your shoulders, although it certainly was much less noticeable than it was a few moments ago. + + +Your rest only last for a few minutes before Miss Sarrin approaches you. "You're one lucky kid. Without that blessing you would have spent the next few days in the infirmary. Ashyr put enough force into that last attack to give you a concussion." + + +What blessing? Your tired mind thinks before realizing the importance of what just happened. It makes sense to you all of the sudden, for you recall the moment of the last attack. You were only seeking to protect yourself. It couldn't be a coincidence that The Man told you the blessing would give you the power to protect yourself. You'd been wondering what all the fuss about the blessing was for. After all, it wasn't until now that the so called "blessing" did anything except give you a cool mark. + + +You only nod in response. You don't really have anything to say, and besides, you'd rather take this moment to think upon the implications of what you just discovered. + + +Unfortunately Miss Sarrin doesn't allow you to sit while everyone else spars, so she tells you to stand up and ready yourself. She spars with you for most of the remainder of class, but try as you might, you aren't able to beat her and you aren't able to activate your blessing. + + +Class ends and Miss Sarrin pulls you aside. The rest of the students file off the sparring field until it's just the two of you standing there. She speaks first. + + +"Do you want to know how to control your power?" + + +The question surprises you to say the least. "Yes, of course." You reply immediately. While you've been able to keep your emotions in check for most of your stay at the academy, you still feel the smoldering of anger and sadness at your mother's death. If there's any way you could learn to use the power to help you become stronger, then your answer will always be certain. + + +"It will take a lot of training. Not to mention a change in your mindset. any more questions?" she asks. + + +You raise an eyebrow at the 'mindset' comment. "Only one. How are you qualified to teach me?" You figure the question is necessary. You don't want to commit to learning if you're being taught by a teacher who doesn't know what they're doing. + + +"That's not something I am willing to tell. Go get some rest. From tomorrow onward, you'll be learning about this gift you have." + + +You're about to insist upon her giving you a straight answer when you realize that she's right. You do need rest, and tomorrow is another day. + + + + + +> New friends (Background) +The first of your new friends came in a most unexpected way. + + +Following the day of your victory against Ashyr. You appeared to be something of a legend among the underclassmen. Even the upperclassmen showed respect for you. Ashyr must have been something of a symbol for the school. The Headmaster's son. No one particularly had a problem with him, and everyone respected him. Your victory sparked a transition phase from Ashyr being the symbol of the school, to you eclipsing him. + + +Oddly enough, Ashyr went missing. Searches were conducted, but it was to no avail. It was when Ashyr was finally confirmed as a missing person, that this new friend came to see you. You'd seen her in the hallways prior to your meeting, but she wasn't in any of your classes, so you didn't really pay her much attention. That is, until she slapped you. + + +It happened on your way back to the academy building after a training session with Miss Sarrin. You saw her coming towards you, but didn't pay her much attention. Why would a girl as pretty as her be storming toward you with an expression filled with ill intent? Well, apparently Ashyr had a girlfriend. + + +The slap she gave you probably surprised you more than it hurt. You were left confounded for a solid moment before she continued her assault on you in the form of words. "What did you do to Asher?" + + +You half expected her to be screaming her question given that she slapped you moments before, but to your surprise her voice is relatively quiet. + + +You shake your head. "No. I've only ever met him twice. The last time I saw him was the first day school was open," you explain carefully. You'd rather not have her explode and slap you again. You don't think your honor could take another blow like that. + + +Her angry demeanor changes in the blink of an eye. Tears start pouring from her eyes, and she sits down on the grass beside you. You aren't really sure how to react to all of this, for you've only been slapped like that once before, and the way you reacted to that left you feeling guilty beyond belief. + + +You decide that you can't just leave her there, but in the same thought you decide that it isn't really your place to comfort her either. Instead you stand still and wait for her to cry it out. you didn't really have any plan for the rest of the day anyway. + + +Minutes pass, and you feel your legs begin to tire. You cast your thoughts back to the lesson with Miss Sarrin you had today. It was mostly just stuff you already knew, but you found yourself interested in it nonetheless. + + +You start thinking about how you ended up in this situation in the first place. About your mother's death, and your's and Alessa's falling out. If the girl slapping you didn't sully your carefree mood earlier, then this certainly did. + + +You're in the middle of that depressing train of thought when you notice the girl staring at you. Her tear stained face and eyes bore into you, but it has neither the anger nor sadness from before. Instead curiosity burns in her in her deep brown eyes. + + +"Why are you still here?" she asks. + + +"I couldn't just leave you here," you respond. You realize in the back of you're mind that she might think you are more caring than you really are. You only couldn't leave her because that would be cowardly. Certainly not because you cared about some random girl crying. + + +Hesitantly, she stands and offers her hand for you to shake. "I'm sorry about earlier. I was just frustrated with Ashyr disappearing on me." + + +You take her hand, albeit warily. If your life were more ordinary, then you might consider this an odd day, but you figure that it could've gone worse. + + +She releases your hand and fakes a smile. "I hope we can start over. My name is Raven. Pleased to meet you." + + +While you aren't sure if you really want to be acquaintances with her, you decide that it she can't always be this emotionally unstable. + + +"I'm Erron." + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Ashyr is stronger, taller, and every bit as skilled as you. You don't think you'll be able to last for too long if you stay on defense. Tackling him might also have detrimental consequences. If you timed it bad then you could take a sword to the head. No, among the choices you figure your best one is to overwhelm him with attacks. + + +With a sudden turn of luck you parry a blow, and Ashyr decides not to pursue attacking you. Instead you start circling each other again. You're grateful for the time to rest before you begin your attack, but Ashyr doesn't seem to be thinking at all about his energy. Instead his eyes are focused on you with a puzzled look in his eyes. You guess no one has ever lasted this long against him. + + +By now the sun's heat has your body beginning to wear down, and your fatigue must show, for Ashyr smiles a triumphant smile. Immediately afterwards, he surges forward with an overhead slash. + + +But you're ready for it. You surge forward as well and parry his attack on your way. You leave him no time to counterattack, but instead press the advantage created by surprising him with your ferocity. For the first time since the fight started, you seem to have a clear advantage. Every attack Ashyr blocks is a step he is forced backwards, and before long the smile he had disappears from his face. Replacing it is a face contorted in concentration, and Ashyr finally seems like he the exertion is getting to him. + + +However, you also feel your fatigue. You begin to slow down in your attacks whilst Ashyr's blocks pick up in their efficacy. Instead of barely being able to keep up, Ashyr is now blocking each attack with an attack of his own. It isn't long before you realize that you're going to fail. One of these moments you won't have enough energy to meet his attack with your own. One of these attacks you simply won't be able to raise your sword to block his. + + +The moment comes in the form of another overhead slash. Ashyr uses his height and superior strength to increase the attack's power, and you realize that he means to end the fight with this attack. You have no time to dodge and you feel like you don't have nearly enough energy to raise your sword, let alone enough to block the monstrous attack. Nevertheless, You push your arms with all your remaining strength to meet his attack with your own. Your thoughts aren't even centered upon winning the fight in that moment, rather, they're centered on making sure that that attack doesn't hit you. They're centered on protecting yourself. + + +As you bring your sword up, you feel a surge of energy resonating from your shoulders. It strengthens your body and fills your arms with power. Your sword clashes with Ashyr's, and the power behind your hit was so powerful that it knocks the wooden sword clear out of his hand. There's a moment of stunned silence all around, and in the back of your mind you realize that the other students must've stopped their sparring to watch, but your mind isn't on that. Instead the power you feel brings a grin to your face. It contrasts greatly with Ashyr's expression when you bring your sword to rest beneath his chin. + + +The changes in Ashyr's face come quickly, so if your weren't already looking at him then, you're not sure you would've noticed. Astonishment first, but rage soon followed with mixes of despair and vengeance coloring his eyes. You even thought that there was some respect there, but the moment of conflicting emotions passed. Back was his calm facade; the mask he wore was impressive, and if you hadn't seen it off when you first met, then you might really think that this calm demeanor was really him. + + +You hear hushed conversations among the remainder of the students, and soon enough Miss Sarrin shouts at everyone. "Get back to sparring everyone!" + + +You lower you sword and Ashyr takes a hesitant step. Then another. Before long Ashyr is heading off the field, and not much more time passes until he's out of sight. + + +You take this opportunity to rest. The fight was certainly much more difficult than you anticipated. You're sure you would've lost if you had not found that reserve of energy. Heat still resonated from your shoulders, although it certainly was much less noticeable than it was a few moments ago. + + +Your rest only last for a few minutes before Miss Sarrin approaches you. "You're one lucky kid. Without that blessing you would have spent the next few days in the infirmary. Ashyr put enough force into that last attack to give you a concussion." + + +What blessing? Your tired mind thinks before realizing the importance of what just happened. It makes sense to you all of the sudden, for you recall the moment of the last attack. You were only seeking to protect yourself. It couldn't be a coincidence that The Man told you the blessing would give you the power to protect yourself. You'd been wondering what all the fuss about the blessing was for. After all, it wasn't until now that the so called "blessing" did anything except give you a cool mark. + + +You only nod in response. You don't really have anything to say, and besides, you'd rather take this moment to think upon the implications of what you just discovered. + + +Unfortunately Miss Sarrin doesn't allow you to sit while everyone else spars, so she tells you to stand up and ready yourself. She spars with you for most of the remainder of class, but try as you might, you aren't able to beat her and you aren't able to activate your blessing. + + +Class ends and Miss Sarrin pulls you aside. The rest of the students file off the sparring field until it's just the two of you standing there. She speaks first. + + +"Do you want to know how to control your power?" + + +The question surprises you to say the least. "Yes, of course." You reply immediately. While you've been able to keep your emotions in check for most of your stay at the academy, you still feel the smoldering of anger and sadness at your mother's death. If there's any way you could learn to use the power to help you become stronger, then your answer will always be certain. + + +"It will take a lot of training. Not to mention a change in your mindset. any more questions?" she asks. + + +You raise an eyebrow at the 'mindset' comment. "Only one. How are you qualified to teach me?" You figure the question is necessary. You don't want to commit to learning if you're being taught by a teacher who doesn't know what they're doing. + + +"That's not something I am willing to tell. Go get some rest. From tomorrow onward, you'll be learning about this gift you have." + + +You're about to insist upon her giving you a straight answer when you realize that she's right. You do need rest, and tomorrow is another day. + + + + + +> Lessons with Miss Sarrin (Background) +Your first year at the academy goes by fairly quickly. You turn out to be a less studious person than you'd ever realized. While you were at the castle, every lesson was tailored specifically to you, so you picked things up pretty easily. In this new environment you find yourself playing catch up more than you should be. + + +Having decided that you're her new favorite friend, Raven helps you with your schoolwork. Her friends tease her about hitting on a younger guy, which you and her ignore, but at the same time you can't help but notice that she is very pretty. Of course, you don't let that get in the way of your learning. Much. + + +You look forward to those lessons more than the lessons the classes offers. How can they even compete with being privately tutored by a pretty older girl. You have to remind yourself that she is older more than you'd like admit, but that doesn't prevent you from developing a bit of a crush on her. There are times when that crush causes you to think of Alessa, but you cast those thoughts away. You are at war now. If it came down to it, then you would be expected to fight her and her family. + + +While those lessons keep you occupied, the lessons that really enamor you are the ones that Miss Sarrin teaches you. Learning about this 'blessing' you have is much more fun than you realize. Her lessons began with basic history lessons on the relevance of the 'Blessed Ones,' and how they ruled the continent at the word from the Creator. You already knew about most of it, so that didn't quite truly catch your interest. Instead what really interested you was what Miss Sarrin was able to learn about your power. + + +This particular instance occurred a few months after you started your training with Miss Sarrin... + + +~ + + +The wooden sword fell to the ground beside you with a resounding thud. It was the third time that day that you lost against Miss Sarrin. She never went easy against you, and, consequently, this led to many bruises. It wasn't that she was looking to hurt you, but rather she was only trying to help you activate your power again. + + +Your fight with Ashyr months earlier was the first and only time you succeeded in activating that blessing of yours. Try as you and Miss Sarrin did, you still weren't able find away to reactivate it. + + +You dropped the ground with your sweat stained tunic plastered to your chest. Your were frustrated with Miss Sarrin, the Creator, but most of all, yourself for not being able to activate this faulty power of yours. No matter how hard you tried you couldn't get it to adhere to your will. + + +"Get back up. Let's go one more time," Miss Sarrin insisted. + + +You were tired, and quite frankly, sick of losing over and over again. "I'm sorry. I think I'm done with losing for the day. Let's just get with the academic stu-" You interrupt yourself mid-sentence when you see Miss Sarrin's practice sword come flying towards your head at an alarming speed. Even though you are tired, you're still able to dodge the sudden attack. + + +Almost instinctively, you roll out of the way and grab your practice sword. You barely have to to raise it before Miss Sarrin is attacking you again. Several times you try to speak to get her to stop, but each time you speak Miss Sarrin rushes into another attack. Her ferocity surprises you, for you hadn't seen her like this before. While you've known her to be blunt these past months of lessons, she's never been this close to hurting you. She's always held herself back so she wouldn't hurt you, but this time is much different. + + +You manage to block each attack she throws, but you constantly lose ground, and soon enough you figure she'll get threw your defenses. Usually when she wins, Miss Sarrin stops herself from dealing any kind of finishing blow to you. This time, however, will be different. Her eyes are focused purely on the task at hand, and her face is devoid of emotion. She isn't thinking about your safety at all. + + +You begin to increase the effort you put into each block and parry. It wouldn't do to spend the next week in the hospital from a concussion. It's all in vain. Aside from Morden, She's the best fighter you've ever fought. Ashyr was easy compared to her, but unlike Ashyr, you don't think you have any chance of winning. Therefore your goal changes. Instead of winning, you only want to prevent irreparable brain damage. + + +It's unnoticeable at first. It's only a little heat on your shoulders, so you chalk it up to the sun, but as the heat appears you find yourself blocking each attack more easily. Miss Sarrin starts to move slower, and you feel yourself moving faster. Each swipe of your sword is a another step Miss Sarrin has to take back. It's like your fight with Ashyr. You feel victory within your grasp, so you close in on it with a thrust carrying your full force behind it. + + +However, Miss Sarrin uses that force against you. She sidesteps the thrust and with a quick yank of your wrist pulls you farther than you intended. You're sent sprawling to the grassy ground before you. The burning in your shoulders disappears, and you're left lying fatigued in the grass. + + +To your surprise Miss Sarrin doesn't continue her attack, and even more surprising is when you look over to her and find her grinning. + + +"What are you smiling at?" You question unable to hide the bitterness in your voice. + + +Miss Sarrin starts to laugh a bit, and you feel even more slighted. Well at least until the reality of the situation hits you. Miss Sarrin rarely ever smiles, or even laughs, so this is a treat. Especially since it makes her face even prettier. Your offense is forgotten, and you briefly wish that Miss Sarrin was your age instead of ten years older than you. That way you might actually have a chance with her, but you chastise yourself. Even if she was your age, then she wouldn't be in your class. Apparently Miss Sarrin is the youngest prodigy to have ever graduated from the academy, and the Advanced Combat school that followed. That's why she'd been able to be an instructor here so quickly. + + +You turn your head away from her hoping that your blushing would be covered by the scowl you put on your face. + + +"Erron. Do you realize what just happened?" Her voice is filled with excitement. + + +"What do you mean?" Your brief thoughts from earlier completely disappear from your head. + + +"I figured out what triggers your power!" She continues to speak before you can answer. "I was looking through the Blessed Ones histories the other day, and every account of them talks about their purpose being to protect." + + +"And what's that got t-" You stop when it hits you. That's what the Man (you still weren't really sure he was the Creator yet) was talking about in the dream you had. He said that the blessing gave you protection. You think back to when you fought Ashyr, and just a few moments when the power was triggered again. Both times you were focused on protecting yourself. + + +Miss Sarrin nods when she sees the realization come over you. "It activates whenever you feel the need to truly protect yourself. That's why it wasn't working when were sparred previously. I was never actually putting you in danger, so you didn't feel the need to really protect yourself. You only wanted to win." + + +"Wait, does that mean you were planning on hurting me?" you ask curiously. + + +Miss Sarrin makes a small gesture with a hand as if she could brush the question aside. "That's aside the point." Before you can pursue that point, she continues. "Now we just need to make you better at using this blessing of yours. After all, you managed to use it this past fight, and still ended up losing. Of course that's probably because you aren't quite as good as me yet, but we'll work on that too." + + +You nod and get back to your feet. Your loss and fatigue replaced by a newfound sense of purpose. You were actually making progress. You ready your sword and Miss Sarrin readies hers. You really do like these lessons. + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Ashyr is stronger, taller, and every bit as skilled as you. You don't think you'll be able to last for too long if you stay on defense. Tackling him might also have detrimental consequences. If you timed it bad then you could take a sword to the head. No, among the choices you figure your best one is to overwhelm him with attacks. + + +With a sudden turn of luck you parry a blow, and Ashyr decides not to pursue attacking you. Instead you start circling each other again. You're grateful for the time to rest before you begin your attack, but Ashyr doesn't seem to be thinking at all about his energy. Instead his eyes are focused on you with a puzzled look in his eyes. You guess no one has ever lasted this long against him. + + +By now the sun's heat has your body beginning to wear down, and your fatigue must show, for Ashyr smiles a triumphant smile. Immediately afterwards, he surges forward with an overhead slash. + + +But you're ready for it. You surge forward as well and parry his attack on your way. You leave him no time to counterattack, but instead press the advantage created by surprising him with your ferocity. For the first time since the fight started, you seem to have a clear advantage. Every attack Ashyr blocks is a step he is forced backwards, and before long the smile he had disappears from his face. Replacing it is a face contorted in concentration, and Ashyr finally seems like he the exertion is getting to him. + + +However, you also feel your fatigue. You begin to slow down in your attacks whilst Ashyr's blocks pick up in their efficacy. Instead of barely being able to keep up, Ashyr is now blocking each attack with an attack of his own. It isn't long before you realize that you're going to fail. One of these moments you won't have enough energy to meet his attack with your own. One of these attacks you simply won't be able to raise your sword to block his. + + +The moment comes in the form of another overhead slash. Ashyr uses his height and superior strength to increase the attack's power, and you realize that he means to end the fight with this attack. You have no time to dodge and you feel like you don't have nearly enough energy to raise your sword, let alone enough to block the monstrous attack. Nevertheless, You push your arms with all your remaining strength to meet his attack with your own. Your thoughts aren't even centered upon winning the fight in that moment, rather, they're centered on making sure that that attack doesn't hit you. They're centered on protecting yourself. + + +As you bring your sword up, you feel a surge of energy resonating from your shoulders. It strengthens your body and fills your arms with power. Your sword clashes with Ashyr's, and the power behind your hit was so powerful that it knocks the wooden sword clear out of his hand. There's a moment of stunned silence all around, and in the back of your mind you realize that the other students must've stopped their sparring to watch, but your mind isn't on that. Instead the power you feel brings a grin to your face. It contrasts greatly with Ashyr's expression when you bring your sword to rest beneath his chin. + + +The changes in Ashyr's face come quickly, so if your weren't already looking at him then, you're not sure you would've noticed. Astonishment first, but rage soon followed with mixes of despair and vengeance coloring his eyes. You even thought that there was some respect there, but the moment of conflicting emotions passed. Back was his calm facade; the mask he wore was impressive, and if you hadn't seen it off when you first met, then you might really think that this calm demeanor was really him. + + +You hear hushed conversations among the remainder of the students, and soon enough Miss Sarrin shouts at everyone. "Get back to sparring everyone!" + + +You lower you sword and Ashyr takes a hesitant step. Then another. Before long Ashyr is heading off the field, and not much more time passes until he's out of sight. + + +You take this opportunity to rest. The fight was certainly much more difficult than you anticipated. You're sure you would've lost if you had not found that reserve of energy. Heat still resonated from your shoulders, although it certainly was much less noticeable than it was a few moments ago. + + +Your rest only last for a few minutes before Miss Sarrin approaches you. "You're one lucky kid. Without that blessing you would have spent the next few days in the infirmary. Ashyr put enough force into that last attack to give you a concussion." + + +What blessing? Your tired mind thinks before realizing the importance of what just happened. It makes sense to you all of the sudden, for you recall the moment of the last attack. You were only seeking to protect yourself. It couldn't be a coincidence that The Man told you the blessing would give you the power to protect yourself. You'd been wondering what all the fuss about the blessing was for. After all, it wasn't until now that the so called "blessing" did anything except give you a cool mark. + + +You only nod in response. You don't really have anything to say, and besides, you'd rather take this moment to think upon the implications of what you just discovered. + + +Unfortunately Miss Sarrin doesn't allow you to sit while everyone else spars, so she tells you to stand up and ready yourself. She spars with you for most of the remainder of class, but try as you might, you aren't able to beat her and you aren't able to activate your blessing. + + +Class ends and Miss Sarrin pulls you aside. The rest of the students file off the sparring field until it's just the two of you standing there. She speaks first. + + +"Do you want to know how to control your power?" + + +The question surprises you to say the least. "Yes, of course." You reply immediately. While you've been able to keep your emotions in check for most of your stay at the academy, you still feel the smoldering of anger and sadness at your mother's death. If there's any way you could learn to use the power to help you become stronger, then your answer will always be certain. + + +"It will take a lot of training. Not to mention a change in your mindset. any more questions?" she asks. + + +You raise an eyebrow at the 'mindset' comment. "Only one. How are you qualified to teach me?" You figure the question is necessary. You don't want to commit to learning if you're being taught by a teacher who doesn't know what they're doing. + + +"That's not something I am willing to tell. Go get some rest. From tomorrow onward, you'll be learning about this gift you have." + + +You're about to insist upon her giving you a straight answer when you realize that she's right. You do need rest, and tomorrow is another day. + + + + + +> Your Allegiance (Background) +Three years have passed since the unfortunate events that sparked the civil war occurred. They say time heals everything, but you aren't so sure. You can still feel the pains of your mother's death weighing on your heart, and your thirst for revenge still leaves you parched from time to time. + + +Fortunately, today your thirst was quenched. + + +The war has been going on for some time now, and neither side has really taken much of an advantage. That is, until this past week. The Dellandians must've decided that they wanted the war to be over already, so the King led the next attack against the Knights. That was a major mistake. As soon as your father realized the King would be there, the goal of that battle changed. Instead of an all out battle, your father focused on taking out the King. An army without it's leader isn't very efficient after all, but you know that the driving reason for such a tactic was the revenge you and your father shared. With a mixture of luck, strategy, and skill, the King was killed and the head for the army cut off. + + +You feel a morbid sense of peace as you go to sleep that night. One that is promptly destroyed when you dream about that cabin for the first time in three years. + + +The scene is always the same. It's always afternoon, and without the context of the cabin, it would be a very peaceful place. However, the beautiful figure in front of you dispels all of that in the blink of an eye. + + +In the three years that you haven't seen her, Alessa seems to have grown exponentially more beautiful. Her long silvery blonde hair frames an angelic face. Her emerald green eyes train in on you, and it's all you can do to breathe. She's much more beautiful than both Miss Sarrin and Raven. Despite this beauty, her persona is accentuated by a sadness and tiredness that makes you feel inordinately sympathetic. + + +When she speaks your eyes are drawn to her lips and your heart sinks with guilt. Your years of schooling have been preparing for the eventual situation wherein you would face the Dellandian army, and perhaps even the Dellandians themselves. Ever since the war started there's been a large emphasis on the corruption of the royal family, and the hate for the royal family is evident in your peers eyes. You'd be lying if you said you didn't feel hate for them either. Despite all of this, you can't help but remember that Alessa was a kid when all of this happened. None of it was her fault. + + +"Erron," she begins, and you find yourself desperately wanting to know what she has to say. "Are you happy now?" Her voice is bitter and accusatory. "One parent for another, right? It's finally even. Are you happy now?" she repeats. + + +Somewhere in the back of your mind you realize that you aren't acting like your usual self. "No, I didn't want this to happen." You start to say that, but then stop confused. You remember going to sleep happy that her father had been killed, and that you did, in fact, want this to happen. + + +Alessa sees your confused expression and sighs. "Don't you know how to use your blessing?" Her tone is less bitter, and the question is something that doesn't confuse you (much), so you respond. + + +"Yes, but I have to feel the need to protect myself in order to use it." You tell her this without the slightest qualm, but her question triggers something in the back of your mind. In the past few years you've learned to use your power fairly easily by tricking yourself into thinking you need to protect yourself. You do this now, and that familiar feeling radiates from your shoulders. With the power activating your mind becomes clear. It's like a fog you didn't even know was there, was lifted. + + +Alessa must've been able to tell a difference because she speaks again. "You didn't answer my question. Are you happy now?" + + +Now that you're able to think clearly you register two things. The first, Alessa is much less captivating than before. Still gorgeous, but you aren't left speechless anymore. The second thing is you realize that your decreased mental state was most likely caused by the curse she bears. She probably didn't even do it on purpose, hence why she only noticed you were affected after she battered you with questions. + + +Still you hesitate. You aren't at all torn up by the King's death, and you're certainly more happy about it than not. Of course, that doesn't mean you want to tell her that you like her father better when he's dead. + + + + + + + +> Tell the truth +"I wouldn't call it being happy," you start, "but I can't say I'm sad that the person who killed my mother is dead." You realize that this is kinda harsh, but you don't want to lie to your childhood friend. You expect her to be angry, but her face is blank. + + +"I thought you were going to lie to me." The sentence barely escapes her lips. + + +You shake your head. "I thought about it, but I felt you deserved to hear the truth." + + +She nods in return, and a moment of silence descends upon the cabin. The both of you are left staring at one another. Eventually she walks toward you and wraps her arms around you. You hesitate before returning the gesture. Her face rests in your chest, and you feel tears leaking through your tunic. She starts speaking again, but this time everything she says runs together. You do manage to catch a few things though. + + +"I'm sorry all of this happened, I wish we could go back to the way things were," and "I miss you," were just some of the few things you heard her say. + + +The sudden expression of emotion nearly overwhelms you, for you realize that she's voicing many things that you've felt for the past three years. Perhaps one of the most prominent of those feelings being a sad loneliness. After all, the only person that might understand you is your sworn enemy. + + +The pair of you stay like that for a while, but soon enough, and to your disappointment, Alessa lets go of you. She takes a step away from you, and starts to walk out of the cabin. The sudden absence of her presence leaves you cold, and as you stare at her leaving, you realize that this could be the last time you are able to be with her alone. Even if this 'being alone' was in a dream state. + + +You catch her hand and pull her back. Your heart feels like it's going to pound out of your chest when her eyes meet yours. Her face was a mask of surprise when you lean down toward her with your lips parted. You close your eyes half expecting to be slapped, but instead you feel the soft texture of her lips against yours. The kiss only continues for a few seconds, but you feel happier in those seconds than you have in a long time. + + +As you two separate, you feel your real self begin awake. She says, "Bye Erron" at the same time you say "Stay safe." + + +You lay in your bed with the image of her seared into your memory. You feel elated, but only for a few moments. Any feelings you might still feel for her make you feel guilty. Regardless of whether or not it was a dream, you did just kiss an enemy. + + +You lie in bed torn between the people you're meant to protect, and the person who understands you better than anyone else. + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Three years have passed since the unfortunate events that sparked the civil war occurred. They say time heals everything, but you aren't so sure. You can still feel the pains of your mother's death weighing on your heart, and your thirst for revenge still leaves you parched from time to time. + + +Fortunately, today your thirst was quenched. + + +The war has been going on for some time now, and neither side has really taken much of an advantage. That is, until this past week. The Dellandians must've decided that they wanted the war to be over already, so the King led the next attack against the Knights. That was a major mistake. As soon as your father realized the King would be there, the goal of that battle changed. Instead of an all out battle, your father focused on taking out the King. An army without it's leader isn't very efficient after all, but you know that the driving reason for such a tactic was the revenge you and your father shared. With a mixture of luck, strategy, and skill, the King was killed and the head for the army cut off. + + +You feel a morbid sense of peace as you go to sleep that night. One that is promptly destroyed when you dream about that cabin for the first time in three years. + + +The scene is always the same. It's always afternoon, and without the context of the cabin, it would be a very peaceful place. However, the beautiful figure in front of you dispels all of that in the blink of an eye. + + +In the three years that you haven't seen her, Alessa seems to have grown exponentially more beautiful. Her long silvery blonde hair frames an angelic face. Her emerald green eyes train in on you, and it's all you can do to breathe. She's much more beautiful than both Miss Sarrin and Raven. Despite this beauty, her persona is accentuated by a sadness and tiredness that makes you feel inordinately sympathetic. + + +When she speaks your eyes are drawn to her lips and your heart sinks with guilt. Your years of schooling have been preparing for the eventual situation wherein you would face the Dellandian army, and perhaps even the Dellandians themselves. Ever since the war started there's been a large emphasis on the corruption of the royal family, and the hate for the royal family is evident in your peers eyes. You'd be lying if you said you didn't feel hate for them either. Despite all of this, you can't help but remember that Alessa was a kid when all of this happened. None of it was her fault. + + +"Erron," she begins, and you find yourself desperately wanting to know what she has to say. "Are you happy now?" Her voice is bitter and accusatory. "One parent for another, right? It's finally even. Are you happy now?" she repeats. + + +Somewhere in the back of your mind you realize that you aren't acting like your usual self. "No, I didn't want this to happen." You start to say that, but then stop confused. You remember going to sleep happy that her father had been killed, and that you did, in fact, want this to happen. + + +Alessa sees your confused expression and sighs. "Don't you know how to use your blessing?" Her tone is less bitter, and the question is something that doesn't confuse you (much), so you respond. + + +"Yes, but I have to feel the need to protect myself in order to use it." You tell her this without the slightest qualm, but her question triggers something in the back of your mind. In the past few years you've learned to use your power fairly easily by tricking yourself into thinking you need to protect yourself. You do this now, and that familiar feeling radiates from your shoulders. With the power activating your mind becomes clear. It's like a fog you didn't even know was there, was lifted. + + +Alessa must've been able to tell a difference because she speaks again. "You didn't answer my question. Are you happy now?" + + +Now that you're able to think clearly you register two things. The first, Alessa is much less captivating than before. Still gorgeous, but you aren't left speechless anymore. The second thing is you realize that your decreased mental state was most likely caused by the curse she bears. She probably didn't even do it on purpose, hence why she only noticed you were affected after she battered you with questions. + + +Still you hesitate. You aren't at all torn up by the King's death, and you're certainly more happy about it than not. Of course, that doesn't mean you want to tell her that you like her father better when he's dead. + + + + + + + +> Lie +"I'm not happy, no." You start with this, but the next thing you say slowly turns what you're saying from a lie, into a bitter sarcastic truth. + + +"How couldn't I be happy that the man who had my mother killed died?" With your mother's death on your mind, Your demeanor quickly becomes sour. You gaze at Alessa expecting her to be upset, but her face remains blank. + + +"I thought you were going to lie to me." The sentence barely escapes her lips. + + +You shake your head. "I started to, but I felt you deserved to hear the truth." + + +She nods in return, and a moment of silence descends upon the cabin. The both of you are left staring at one another. Eventually she walks toward you and wraps her arms around you. You hesitate before returning the gesture. Her face rests in your chest, and you feel tears leaking through your tunic. She starts speaking again, but this time everything she says runs together. You do manage to catch a few things though. + + +"I'm sorry all of this happened, I wish we could go back to the way things were," and "I miss you," were just some of the few things you heard her say. + + +The sudden expression of emotion nearly overwhelms you, for you realize that she's voicing many things that you've felt for the past three years. Perhaps one of the most prominent of those feelings being a sad loneliness. After all, the only person that might understand you is your sworn enemy. + + +The pair of you stay like that for a while, but soon enough, and to your disappointment, Alessa lets go of you. She takes a step away from you, and starts to walk out of the cabin. The sudden absence of her presence leaves you cold, and as you stare at her leaving, you realize that this could be the last time you are able to be with her alone. Even if this 'being alone' was in a dream state. + + +You catch her hand and pull her back. Your heart feels like it's going to pound out of your chest when her eyes meet yours. Her face was a mask of surprise when you lean down toward her with your lips parted. You close your eyes half expecting to be slapped, but instead you feel the soft texture of her lips against yours. The kiss only continues for a few seconds, but you feel happier in those seconds than you have in a long time. + + +As you two separate, you feel your real self begin awake. She says, "Bye Erron" at the same time you say "Stay safe." + + +You lay in your bed with the image of her seared into your memory. You feel elated, but only for a few moments. Any feelings you might still feel for her make you feel guilty. Regardless of whether or not it was a dream, you did just kiss an enemy. + + +You lie in bed torn between the people you're meant to protect, and the person who understands you better than anyone else. + + + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While feeling tempted to show this peasant his place, you aren't that rash. If put to the test you figure you would have a high chance of winning in this fight. However, you don't think he got that muscular from sitting around doing nothing, and since this is an academy where people are being taught how to fight, so you assume he has more experience than you as well. Of course you were taught by the General himself, Morden, so despite the person's goading you push past him and continue up the stairs. + + +On your way past him he grips your forearm and speaks, "Hey, don't leave when I'm talking to you!" + + +He has a strong grip, but since you know how to get out of such a simple hold, you easily twist out and continue up the stairs. + + +You hear a string of profanity and calls for you to come back, but for whatever reason he doesn't come after you, so you continue to ignore him. It hadn't really occurred to you that there might some people that are jealous of you. Especially since you have no idea why they think you're blessed by the Creator. Certainly the mark on your back is indicative to the Creator's wings, but you're fairly certain that the Creator didn't just come down from paradise and bestow upon you the powers to govern his people on this world. No, you're fairly certain that this isn't the Creator's doing, and even more so when you remember your dream. + + +In the back of your mind things were already starting to make sense, but you didn't want to believe it. Somehow that man in the King's Forest was able to obtain power beyond your comprehension. Maybe he got it from the Creator, but regardless of where you are fairly certain that those years spent in the King's Forest were not normal. You thought it was odd when the guards couldn't relocate the cabin, but you always chalked it up to your superior tracking skills. Well at least until you learned enough to know that you were no where near as good at tracking as the royal guards. + + +You cast your thoughts to the very first 'dream.' If you recall correctly then you were actually confronting the man about his purpose in being in those woods. He'd mentioned about how he knew that day would come, and how sad he was. + + +You reach the Academy's armory, and you resolve to figure out what happened later. soon enough they find you a sword that's suited to your size and fighting style, and you leave with your mind still centered on weapons. You get the vague feeling that you were meaning to do something, but before you realize what it was, Headmaster Rallas shows up at the end of the hallway. + + +He's wearing the same grey and black material from before, but this time he has more of the stuff gathered together in his arms. You remember the other student you met, and realize that the Headmaster was holding some kind of student uniform. + + +"I'm sorry. I meant to give this to you before, but my attention was elsewhere." He shoves the grey and black uniform into your arms before reaching into a pocket and pulling out a key. + + +"This is for your room. We made sure to give you the best of the best." + + +"That's une-" you begin, but the headmaster interrupts you. + + +"Nonsense. The son of the Grand Priest deserves the very best." + + +You hesitate before grasping the Gold plated key. Despite the unfortunate meeting in the hallway, you decide that you might very well get used to living here. "Yes sir." + + +~ + + +A few weeks pass, and the first battle happens. A messenger leaves you a letter from your father detailing what happened. It was mostly just the Knights testing the Dellandian army. It wasn't some crazy battle of massive proportions, but rather, it was a skirmish that didn't even contain a hundred men in total. While it wasn't the greatest battle, the Knights managed to beat the army with a combination of skill (from the individuals), and strategy. (from the different leaders) You find out that Morden is leading the charge against the corrupt royalty, and that in terms of skill, the Knights heavily outclass the army of Dellandia. You hope that superior strategy and skill will be enough, for the Dellandian army has the advantage in numbers. + + +Aside from that, the only important thing happening is the new term start for the Academy. No new dreams of the Man and Alessa happen leaving you with a relatively bored few weeks. You don't see the pretentious student from before, so you ended up spending most of your time staying fit and practicing your swordplay. You're in an almost feverish state, and your father and your friends only serve to make that fever go. Whether the mark you received was from the Creator or not, you feel your place is beside your father championing the cause of the Holy Kingdom. + + +Occasionally you go to the library hoping to find information regarding this mark, and while there are a lot of history about what the Blessed Ones are, the texts never go into the differences between the Blessed Ones and other people. You're always left wondering if the mark is simply there to notify your enemies of whom to kill. + + +Thus, your thoughts are everywhere when you attend your first class at the Academy. The Headmaster had your schedule delivered to you earlier week with a note attached. + + +It read, "Erron, enclosed is your schedule of the coming term. Seeing as how you were taught by the best while in Vailum, we've decided to put you in classes closer to your skill level. You will be surrounded by peer s who are older than you, and may even be jealous of you and your position. Heed them not, for your position demands that you be above everyone else. You are held in a higher regard because of your blessing, so do not stoop down to the level of those who oppose you. Sincerely, Headmaster Rallas. + + +You take a deep breath and clear your head. The open doorway seems almost ominous in nature, but when you finally step through it, the classroom beyond leaves you astounded. Mostly because you've never really seen so many kids in the same location. The majority of the students are male, but you do see several girls around the room too. You do not see the teacher, so when you enter the room you try to sneak along the wall to an empty wooden desk. + + +Alas, Your endeavor fails. It only takes a few seconds for someone to recognize you as the Grand Priest's son, so a fairly large group forms around you. + + +"Are you Erron?" + + +"Can I see your mark?" + + +and + + +"Where'd you get that jawline?" are only a few of the questions you hear. + + +You do your best to answer the questions, but luckily for you, the teacher steps into the room and tells everyone to go to their seats. + + +The teacher Introduces himself as Sir Kakanos, and he barely takes anytime before diving into the lesson. Your first class is history, and it ends up going fairly smoothly. Well at least for you. The rest of the class seem distracted by your presence, as if you're some kind of exotic animal. It's only when the student you met before walks through the doorway that the classes' attention turns away from you. + + +Sir Kakanos looks away from the class when he walks in, and gestures for the guy to sit. "It's nice of you to join us Mr. Rallas." The Headmaster's son, you take note of that. + + +'Mr. Rallas' walks to the seat designated, but takes a specific moment to look at you and stare you down. He doesn't have the same astonished and contempt filled expression as he did before. Rather it's blank, and you realize, with a start, that this guy wasn't just some brute filled with anger. No, if he had that much control over his emotions to begin with, then he was much smarter than you previously thought. If you allowed yourself to be angered back when you first met you might have been outclassed. + + +The class ends soon after that interruption, and you head to your next class. It turns out similarly, with the exception of the Headmaster's son actually being to his class on time. + + +Science, Numbers, Battle Tactics, and Reading pass by fairly quickly and before long you're standing in a field outside the academy. Of all the classes you have, this is probably the one you look forward to the most. Advanced Combat. The teacher is a female Knight by the name of Sarrin. She's quite young. If you weren't her student, you might consider her beautiful. She quickly pairs off each the students there to "see what each of you can do." + + +You're paired with a stocky fellow named David, and you start to spar with the wooden practice swords. It doesn't take you very long at all to best him, but David decides that he wants more. You happily oblige, for you haven't had a real opponent in a while. However, it soon becomes very clear that despite his two year advantage of age, you are the better fighter. + + +"Erron. Pair up Ashyr." You hear Miss Sarrin tell you, and before you can ask who she means, you see her pointing at the Headmaster's son. + + +You mutter a quick "Yes ma'am" and head over to your new opponent. Unlike your previous opponent, Ashyr stands a few inches taller than you. His hazel eyes regard you calmly, and he holds his practice sword carefully, lightly, as if the sword was his lover. The thought amused you, and you allowed a small smile to light up your features. + + +You ready your practice sword for battle. The space between you is filled with tension, and you start circling each other. For a fraction of a second you see his eyes shift to the contempt filled ones you first saw, but you don't have time to think about it, for Ashyr lunges. You react immediately by parrying, then you follow up with a counterattack of your own. He defends against just as easily as you did against him, and the both of you enter into a trance of sorts. Neither of you gain ground against each other, and each and every one of your strikes is parried or otherwise defended against. + + +Soon enough you realize that this battle will be decided through endurance. The first person to slack off in their attacks, the first person to make a mistake, they will be the one to lose. You continue the fighting for a few moments longer before you realize that it would be you to make the mistake. While Ashyr showed hints of strain, he didn't look anywhere close to as tired as you were. You have to strike now while you still have the energy to do so. + + +Throughout the fight, many different tactics have been employed. Given this, there are only a few things you think work. You haven't tried overwhelming him with power, so you might be able to take your opponent by surprise. The same principle applies to forcing him to grapple with you. If you get close enough you may be able to catch him off guard by tackling him to the ground. Of course, you could always wait for Ashyr to mess up. Maybe he feels more tired than he looks. + + +In any case you feel yourself beginning to tire, so you need to make a decision now. + + + +> Defense is the best offense +You're willing to bet that you can defend longer than he can attack. After all, you only have to get one good hit in in order to win. With that plan in mind, you begin carefully watching for an opportunity to end tis fight. + + +With a sudden turn of luck you parry a blow, and Ashyr decides not to pursue attacking you. Instead you start circling each other again. You're grateful for the time to rest before you begin your attack, but Ashyr doesn't seem to be thinking at all about his energy. Instead his eyes are focused on you with a puzzled look in his eyes. You guess no one has ever lasted this long against him. + + +By now the sun's heat has your body beginning to wear down, and your fatigue must show, for Ashyr smiles a triumphant smile. Immediately afterwards, he surges forward with an overhead slash. + + +Having switched your mindset, you easily block the blow. Ashyr frowns and attacks again. He meets with no success, but he isn't one to give up. + + +He continues his predictable strategy of continuous attack. You are grateful you decided that defense was the best option. You aren't sure you would last very long in a strategy of continuous attack similar to what Ashyr was trying. + + +The fight goes on with little change and you continue to tire, but, on the bright side, Ashyr is as well. All you need to do is wait for the moment where he falters in his attack. Almost as soon as you think that, the moment comes. It's eerie that it came so quickly, but you don't question it. His lunge was sloppy leaving you plenty of time and skill to exploit in your next attack. You bring your wooden sword above your head to bear down on him, but when you look at him you don't see fear, or any other emotions indicative of defeat. In fact you see the exact opposite. Triumph rests in his eyes as if he never had a doubt he would win. + + +You hesitate in order to figure out what he could possibly be triumphant about. Then you realize it. It was odd that he got tired this quickly. He had shown tremendous endurance throughout the fight, and for all of that to suddenly disappear...it was too easy. With a panicked thought you realize what is about to happen. The lunge you blocked easily from moments before was still beside your body, and unlike the moments before the hold on his sword isn't sloppy at all. Ashyr swings his sword from under and to the side of you in an upward slash. You turn to face it at the last moment in hopes of blocking it, but that proves to be a fatal mistake. + + +You're no where near fast enough to do that, and instead of blocking the attack, you only give Ashyr a better target. Unfortunately, the angle at which Ashyr swings his sword and the angle that your facing it combine to create the worst possible outcome. + + +The blow hits you just under your nose, but Ashyr doesn't stop the hit there. No, you realize he must've been fed up with the fighting. The blow is strong enough to hit your nose cartilage straight up and into your brain. The result in a quick, unlucky, and untimely death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While feeling tempted to show this peasant his place, you aren't that rash. If put to the test you figure you would have a high chance of winning in this fight. However, you don't think he got that muscular from sitting around doing nothing, and since this is an academy where people are being taught how to fight, so you assume he has more experience than you as well. Of course you were taught by the General himself, Morden, so despite the person's goading you push past him and continue up the stairs. + + +On your way past him he grips your forearm and speaks, "Hey, don't leave when I'm talking to you!" + + +He has a strong grip, but since you know how to get out of such a simple hold, you easily twist out and continue up the stairs. + + +You hear a string of profanity and calls for you to come back, but for whatever reason he doesn't come after you, so you continue to ignore him. It hadn't really occurred to you that there might some people that are jealous of you. Especially since you have no idea why they think you're blessed by the Creator. Certainly the mark on your back is indicative to the Creator's wings, but you're fairly certain that the Creator didn't just come down from paradise and bestow upon you the powers to govern his people on this world. No, you're fairly certain that this isn't the Creator's doing, and even more so when you remember your dream. + + +In the back of your mind things were already starting to make sense, but you didn't want to believe it. Somehow that man in the King's Forest was able to obtain power beyond your comprehension. Maybe he got it from the Creator, but regardless of where you are fairly certain that those years spent in the King's Forest were not normal. You thought it was odd when the guards couldn't relocate the cabin, but you always chalked it up to your superior tracking skills. Well at least until you learned enough to know that you were no where near as good at tracking as the royal guards. + + +You cast your thoughts to the very first 'dream.' If you recall correctly then you were actually confronting the man about his purpose in being in those woods. He'd mentioned about how he knew that day would come, and how sad he was. + + +You reach the Academy's armory, and you resolve to figure out what happened later. soon enough they find you a sword that's suited to your size and fighting style, and you leave with your mind still centered on weapons. You get the vague feeling that you were meaning to do something, but before you realize what it was, Headmaster Rallas shows up at the end of the hallway. + + +He's wearing the same grey and black material from before, but this time he has more of the stuff gathered together in his arms. You remember the other student you met, and realize that the Headmaster was holding some kind of student uniform. + + +"I'm sorry. I meant to give this to you before, but my attention was elsewhere." He shoves the grey and black uniform into your arms before reaching into a pocket and pulling out a key. + + +"This is for your room. We made sure to give you the best of the best." + + +"That's une-" you begin, but the headmaster interrupts you. + + +"Nonsense. The son of the Grand Priest deserves the very best." + + +You hesitate before grasping the Gold plated key. Despite the unfortunate meeting in the hallway, you decide that you might very well get used to living here. "Yes sir." + + +~ + + +A few weeks pass, and the first battle happens. A messenger leaves you a letter from your father detailing what happened. It was mostly just the Knights testing the Dellandian army. It wasn't some crazy battle of massive proportions, but rather, it was a skirmish that didn't even contain a hundred men in total. While it wasn't the greatest battle, the Knights managed to beat the army with a combination of skill (from the individuals), and strategy. (from the different leaders) You find out that Morden is leading the charge against the corrupt royalty, and that in terms of skill, the Knights heavily outclass the army of Dellandia. You hope that superior strategy and skill will be enough, for the Dellandian army has the advantage in numbers. + + +Aside from that, the only important thing happening is the new term start for the Academy. No new dreams of the Man and Alessa happen leaving you with a relatively bored few weeks. You don't see the pretentious student from before, so you ended up spending most of your time staying fit and practicing your swordplay. You're in an almost feverish state, and your father and your friends only serve to make that fever go. Whether the mark you received was from the Creator or not, you feel your place is beside your father championing the cause of the Holy Kingdom. + + +Occasionally you go to the library hoping to find information regarding this mark, and while there are a lot of history about what the Blessed Ones are, the texts never go into the differences between the Blessed Ones and other people. You're always left wondering if the mark is simply there to notify your enemies of whom to kill. + + +Thus, your thoughts are everywhere when you attend your first class at the Academy. The Headmaster had your schedule delivered to you earlier week with a note attached. + + +It read, "Erron, enclosed is your schedule of the coming term. Seeing as how you were taught by the best while in Vailum, we've decided to put you in classes closer to your skill level. You will be surrounded by peer s who are older than you, and may even be jealous of you and your position. Heed them not, for your position demands that you be above everyone else. You are held in a higher regard because of your blessing, so do not stoop down to the level of those who oppose you. Sincerely, Headmaster Rallas. + + +You take a deep breath and clear your head. The open doorway seems almost ominous in nature, but when you finally step through it, the classroom beyond leaves you astounded. Mostly because you've never really seen so many kids in the same location. The majority of the students are male, but you do see several girls around the room too. You do not see the teacher, so when you enter the room you try to sneak along the wall to an empty wooden desk. + + +Alas, Your endeavor fails. It only takes a few seconds for someone to recognize you as the Grand Priest's son, so a fairly large group forms around you. + + +"Are you Erron?" + + +"Can I see your mark?" + + +and + + +"Where'd you get that jawline?" are only a few of the questions you hear. + + +You do your best to answer the questions, but luckily for you, the teacher steps into the room and tells everyone to go to their seats. + + +The teacher Introduces himself as Sir Kakanos, and he barely takes anytime before diving into the lesson. Your first class is history, and it ends up going fairly smoothly. Well at least for you. The rest of the class seem distracted by your presence, as if you're some kind of exotic animal. It's only when the student you met before walks through the doorway that the classes' attention turns away from you. + + +Sir Kakanos looks away from the class when he walks in, and gestures for the guy to sit. "It's nice of you to join us Mr. Rallas." The Headmaster's son, you take note of that. + + +'Mr. Rallas' walks to the seat designated, but takes a specific moment to look at you and stare you down. He doesn't have the same astonished and contempt filled expression as he did before. Rather it's blank, and you realize, with a start, that this guy wasn't just some brute filled with anger. No, if he had that much control over his emotions to begin with, then he was much smarter than you previously thought. If you allowed yourself to be angered back when you first met you might have been outclassed. + + +The class ends soon after that interruption, and you head to your next class. It turns out similarly, with the exception of the Headmaster's son actually being to his class on time. + + +Science, Numbers, Battle Tactics, and Reading pass by fairly quickly and before long you're standing in a field outside the academy. Of all the classes you have, this is probably the one you look forward to the most. Advanced Combat. The teacher is a female Knight by the name of Sarrin. She's quite young. If you weren't her student, you might consider her beautiful. She quickly pairs off each the students there to "see what each of you can do." + + +You're paired with a stocky fellow named David, and you start to spar with the wooden practice swords. It doesn't take you very long at all to best him, but David decides that he wants more. You happily oblige, for you haven't had a real opponent in a while. However, it soon becomes very clear that despite his two year advantage of age, you are the better fighter. + + +"Erron. Pair up Ashyr." You hear Miss Sarrin tell you, and before you can ask who she means, you see her pointing at the Headmaster's son. + + +You mutter a quick "Yes ma'am" and head over to your new opponent. Unlike your previous opponent, Ashyr stands a few inches taller than you. His hazel eyes regard you calmly, and he holds his practice sword carefully, lightly, as if the sword was his lover. The thought amused you, and you allowed a small smile to light up your features. + + +You ready your practice sword for battle. The space between you is filled with tension, and you start circling each other. For a fraction of a second you see his eyes shift to the contempt filled ones you first saw, but you don't have time to think about it, for Ashyr lunges. You react immediately by parrying, then you follow up with a counterattack of your own. He defends against just as easily as you did against him, and the both of you enter into a trance of sorts. Neither of you gain ground against each other, and each and every one of your strikes is parried or otherwise defended against. + + +Soon enough you realize that this battle will be decided through endurance. The first person to slack off in their attacks, the first person to make a mistake, they will be the one to lose. You continue the fighting for a few moments longer before you realize that it would be you to make the mistake. While Ashyr showed hints of strain, he didn't look anywhere close to as tired as you were. You have to strike now while you still have the energy to do so. + + +Throughout the fight, many different tactics have been employed. Given this, there are only a few things you think work. You haven't tried overwhelming him with power, so you might be able to take your opponent by surprise. The same principle applies to forcing him to grapple with you. If you get close enough you may be able to catch him off guard by tackling him to the ground. Of course, you could always wait for Ashyr to mess up. Maybe he feels more tired than he looks. + + +In any case you feel yourself beginning to tire, so you need to make a decision now. + + + +> Tackle him +Going on either pure attack or pure defense would be expected, you decide. You need something entirely unprecedented. Something that''ll surprise him so thoroughly he won't know what to do. + + +With a sudden turn of luck you parry a blow, and Ashyr decides not to pursue attacking you. Instead you start circling each other again. You're grateful for the time to rest before you begin your attack, but Ashyr doesn't seem to be thinking at all about his energy. Instead his eyes are focused on you with a puzzled look in his eyes. You guess no one has ever lasted this long against him. + + +By now the sun's heat has your body beginning to wear down, and your fatigue must show, for Ashyr smiles a triumphant smile. Immediately afterwards, he surges forward with an overhead slash. + + +But you're ready for it. When he gets close enough you get low and charge him. The impact of you hitting him stops him from continuing his swing downward, however, you aren't able to fully tackle him. The result of your attempt leaves you bear hugging his stomach. Ashyr reacts quickly and switches the hold on his sword so he can stab downward. You see what he's doing out of your peripheral vision, and you realize what's about to happen. + + +You disentangle yourself from him just as he starts to bring his sword down at you. The hit, originally aimed at your back, hits the top of your spinal cord due to your attempt to dodge, and you black out. + + +You wake up approximately a day later. The white of the infirmary hurts your eyes, but not as much as your pride hurts. You could accept losing, but losing in such a pathetic way was disappointing. + + +You reach you hand to cover a sudden yawn, but your hand doesn't move. You try to bring it up once again, but still, it doesn't move. You start attempting to move every possible limb, but your body doesn't obey you. The only things that you can move are your facial appendages. + + +You start shouting for someone, and soon enough a nurse comes to see you followed by Headmaster Rallas. They go into a lengthy explanation of what happened to you. That explanation ends with them saying that you are paralyzed from neck up. You end up going into shock, and you realize that you won't ever be able to do anything you want ever again. + + +You enter a limbo like state where nothing really matters to you. Even letters from your father seem to have lost their meaning. + + +Months pass and your thoughts are filled with regret and despair. If only you had gone with your father, or if only you had won that fight...if only. Those thoughts consume your entire being until there's nothing you can do, but think about what ifs. Life in this state leaves you wishing to be dead. You push those thoughts off, but when there's nothing else to do but think, then that becomes a burden too. + + +One day you finally decide to do it. Maybe the Creator will forgive you for being a failure as a Blessed One. + + +Well, if that's all I could do in a fight, then maybe I am a hero. I saved everyone from watching me fail as the Chosen Hero of the Holy Kingdom. + + +With that thought you end your existence in Dellandia.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You hesitate while you think, but you answer before long. + + +"I'll stay here." Your father smiles, and it's obvious that he's very relieved at your choice. You imagine that a heavy burden must've been taken off of his shoulders. Here you would be safe. Here you wouldn't have to worry. + + +Your father nods before turning to the heavy set man on his left. "This is the Headmaster here at the academy. Headmaster Rallas. He's taught at this academy for years now," a slight smile breaks across your father's face, "and despite his looks, he used to quite capable." + + +Headmaster Rallas scoffed at that. "I'm still more than capable," he remarks before your father continues speaking. + + +"I'll be leaving in the morning, so it may be some time before i see you again, son. When I next see you, I expect to see a man grown and ready for anything. The Creator has blessed you as his champion, so you must prepare yourself to fulfill that demanding role. I'll see you again in the morning, but for now Headmaster Rallas will give you a tour." Your father embraces you, then walks out of the room leaving you alone in the room with Headmaster Rallas. + + +He regards you for a silent moment. "You carry a great burden. If you're well enough I'll show you around." + + +Despite the sleepy haze you've retained since you awoke, you nod and get up from your bed. You look around the room, and wonder why you're the only one here. This was obviously the Academy's infirmary and this was a fighting school, so surely there must be more people injured. You express these thoughts aloud to the Headmaster, and he smiles then throws an arm around you. + + +"You've got a good head on you. The academy is on break for another week, so until then, it'll be you, me, the staff, and a rare few other students." + + +You nod and the Headmaster leads you out of the room. The halls remind you of the Castle back in Valium except that these were newer and more obviously centered around academics. The Headmaster leads you around, and before long you find yourself increasingly impressed with the facility. It's every bit as big as the castle, and the rumors you've heard about it do not nearly do it justice. + + +The Headmaster explains that aside from basic academics, everyone in the academy is taught how to wield a sword. Once a student finishes their schooling here, they begin their long noble service to the Grand Priest wherever it may take them. If even to death. You feel a sense of foreboding and briefly wonder how many knights died to help you escape Valium. + + +The Grand Priest finishes his explanation by telling you that at age sixteen every student is sorted into two more facilities depending on their aptitude for fighting. One is simply called Advanced Combat where the inhabitants focus solely on honing their skills in combat, tactics, and other such needs for war. The other school is called Support, which is more or less self explanatory. This school includes those training in the healing arts, organizational matters, but everyone one of them still is constantly trained in fighting. If the need ever arises, then those in both schools can form a force of a couple thousand, that is when all of the knights on missions are gathered in. Aside from the knights at the school, there are bases scattered around the continent each with a minimum number of five thousand strong. that is where the majority of your numbers reside. Apparently your father had been prepared for this, for you cannot imagine that the King would have allowed such an amassing of numbers to occur under his nose. + + +Once the introductions are over, the Headmaster leaves you to explore the facility whilst he claims that his work needs his utmost attention. You shrug and simply head off of in the direction of the armory. You didn't have much time to grab your sword when you left, so hopefully they could supply you with one. + + +On your way there you run into another student. You don't quite feel the want (or need) to converse with him, so you barely give him a glance. Despite your wishes, he moves in front of you effectively stopping you in your tracks. This was most inconvenient, because a staircase was not the best place to meet someone new. If it was someone younger, or even smaller than you then you may have pushed passed him. However, he was neither. + + +He was taller than you by a couple inches, making him around six foot, but that wasn't what stopped you. For someone who can't have been more than two years older than you, his frame filled his clothing and his muscles stretched the grey and black leather. He reminded you of Morden. He stood on the stair step right above you making his presence just that more imposing. + + +Although you originally didn't want to meet him, you found yourself mildly interested. What did this oversized adolescent want with you? + + +"Are you Erron?" his face was expressionless, but when you answer "Yes," his face changes to that of contempt. + + +"You're the person that the teachers keep going on about? You barely have any muscle on you, and you look like you haven't ever seen a battle. The Creator should've chosen me, but instead he chose a scrawny piece of trash like you. I bet you didn't even have the guts to screw the princess while you were in that castle." + + +His voice is filled with mocking arrogance, and his insults, quite frankly annoy you. He had just barely met you, yet he acted as if he knew your whole story. His insults weren't even that good, but his attitude was certainly more abrasive than you could otherwise stand. You normally wouldn't even consider physical retaliation as a viable option, but his mention of Alessa tipped your judgment. She might be the daughter of a treacherous King, but she wasn't some cheap prostitute. + + + +> Stay and retaliate +While on the inside you're starting to seethe, on the outside you manage to keep you're cool. You step to the side and start walking up the stairs past him, as if you're making a move ot ignore him. In reality you just want to have to high ground when you punch him. + + +As you place your foot on the step above this oversized boy, he grips your forearm saying, "Hey, Don't walk away from m- Hey!" + + +He interrupts his own sentence with "Hey" when instead of yanking your arm away from him, you use his grip and push him forward and hopefully, down the stairs. + + +But this guy is smarter than he looks. + + +Instead of being surprised like you hoped, it appears he was more or less ready for it. he uses the momentum from your push to pull himself up and pull you past him down the stairs. Unlike him, you are completely surprised. You figured he was like a dog. Lots of barking, but no bite. You were wrong. + + +You attempt to twist your head away from the floor, but you were propelled at too fast of a rate. With a sickening crack, your head splits open on the white granite stairs. You pass out, and never wake up. Your last thought is that maybe the guy was right. The creator chose the wrong person. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>During all of the fun times you and Alessa spent in the man's cabin, neither one of you asked why he was there. The thought certainly crossed your mind, but you and Alessa entered into a bliss of sorts. You were afraid to ruin the friendly relationship you had with the man by getting on his bad side. After all, (well, at least in your experience) adults tended to anger quickly when questioned too often. + + +Thus you and Alessa enjoyed a period of unadulterated happiness...that you were sure was going to end today. As you grew older you began to question the man and his purpose even more. You mentioned it to Alessa, and while she was slow to agree, she eventually came around. She must have finally thought about the situation from someone else's perspective. Anyone else would have the guard chase down this stranger. Worst case scenario, the man could turn out to be some kind of serial killer. You doubted that he was, but there was always the possibility. + + +You hoped for the best, but feared the worst. That's most of the reason you carried the sword at your waist even though your Holy Order training was already over for the day. + + +The cabin came into your field of vision, and nostalgia cascaded over you. You stopped walking, and Alessa turned back to gaze at you. "Are you ready? We don't really have to do this if you don't want to." Her voice was muddled with nervousness, and concern. + + +You could tell that she was hoping you'd turn back, and that you two could hang out without having to worry. You almost agreed with her, but you decided to do this. You were going to follow through with it. + + +Some moments are seared in people's memories forever. Every one of your senses seemed to be extra sensitive. The sun was shining brightly through the trees above casting light that made you squint your eyes. Alessa stood half turned back to you with a question in her eyes. She was obviously waiting for you to continue moving. You look to the cabin ahead, and all of the warmth that you felt in the past dwindled away. In its place were ominous feelings of forbidding, but you gathered your courage and approached the cabin. + + +Alessa knocks on the door, and you only have to wait a few moments before a muffled voice calls you inside. + + +If the outside of the cabin looked ominous, the inside was a picture of abnormality. Something was wrong. You could tell it from the moment you stepped into the cabin. You didn't need the door slamming shut behind you, or the crazed look in the man's eyes to tell you that much. He sat in a chair against the wall on opposite side of the room. His wild brown hair was even more disorganized than usual. It fell across his face as he looked at the floor. + + +A silent moment passed and the man began to speak. "I know why you're here. I knew this day would come, but I didn't want to believe it." That part was directed at you and Alessa, but the part that followed seemed more like a crazed man's mutterings. And he never seemed crazed before. + + +"I wish I didn't have have to do this. I was content. Happy even. We were almost like a family. I felt needed, and not abused. Not like the people who use my name for evil purposes..." His mutterings continue, but you've had enough. Enough of being here, that is. While you were prepared to deal with bad reactions, frankly you didn't think it would be this bad. You were getting really creeped out, and a quick glance at Alessa told you you weren't the only one. + + +You reached back to try the knob, but it didn't turn. You put more force into it, but still nothing. The man doesn't react, so you lose all pretenses of sneaking out. You throw your shoulder into the door, and it doesn't even quiver. Just as you begin to pull your sword from its sheathe, the man finally speaks to you two again. + + +"I'm sorry, but this has to be done. Alessa, Erron I hope you'll forgive me." He begins walking towards you two, and you decide that you don't want to know why he's sorry. You go ballistic and start hacking at the door, but after the first few swings you realize that it's not going to work. There was something otherworldly going on here and it was preventing you from leaving. Instead you turn back around and hold your sword the way you were taught. + + +The man nears the both of you, and you take the time to shout to Alessa, "Get behind me!" When you don't hear an immediate shuffling of feet, you turn and see her frozen with fear. At the same time you notice the man walking towards her instead of you. + + +You figure that somewhere inside each man there is a primitive instinct that overrides all self control. That instinct sends you rushing between the disaster that was surely about to occur. A couple things happen at once. Without your meaning to, your sword strikes the man's outstretched hand. And your body hits Alessa onto the ground behind you. Before you can check to see if Alessa is okay you notice the cut on the man's hand bleeding. But not just bleeding. Bleeding gold. + + +You barely have time to send up a prayer to the Creator before he speaks again. This time he seems to have some semblance of intelligence instead of his ranting. "Alessa would have made a better choice I think, but I guess you'll do fine. I'll let you carry the blame for what's to come next." The man takes a deep breath and holds his hands out in front of him. This time that instinct doesn't come just in time. Your frozen in place, but to your surprise he doesn't touch you, or kill you or anything of the sort. + + +Instead, two lights appear. With his palms facing up to the ceiling a bright white light appears in his right hand. A dark black light appears in his left hand. They both glimmer and shine alluringly, but for different reasons. You feel yourself drawn to the dark light, because of an eerie feeling of power. A power that you feel could bring you anything you ever wanted. The white light gives you a feeling of happiness. The power to endure and make it through anything that could ever come in your way. The power to obtain versus the power endure. You're enthralled. + + +"Now. Choose. Will you take this blessing," he moves his right hand forward, "or this curse?" He moves his left hand forward to punctuate the question. + + +You barely hear what he's saying, and you don't really get what he's saying about that dark light being a curse. How could it be a curse when it offers you so much power. Then again, the white light offers you security. You feel that you could protect anything, and get through everything that dared challenge you. You think of Alessa at that, whom is still sitting on the floor behind you dumbfounded. + + +You know you don't really have much of a choice here. Who knows what the man would do if you were to refuse? You have to choose one. + + + + + +> "The 'Curse.' " +"Curse." You whisper the words, and immediately the dark light flies from the man's hand and into you. You don't feel any different at first, but as the seconds go by you feel yourself getting really tired. The fatigue spreads throughout your body and you know that at any moment you may pass out. The feeling reminds you of a story your dad once told you about him treading water for hours at a time. He said afterwards that he knew he wouldn't be able to keep it up forever, but he would continue for as long as he could. + + +You sympathize with that thought as your body and mind betray you to their tiredness. When you finally feel as if you could not hold on any longer, you collapse to the floor beside Alessa. The last thing you see is the bright light, the blessing, flying from the man and into Alessa, and the man's face; a picture of sadness. + + + + +~ + + + + +You wake up hours later in the cabin. You peel your face of of the wooden floor and groggily rub your eyes. It takes you a moment to remember what happened, but when you do you leap to your feet confused. There isn't a single thing out of place in the cabin. You look all around for evidence of what you could've sworn happened here only moments ago, but you find nothing. Even your sword is back inside your sheathe. Nothing was amiss. Perhaps it was all a dream, you think relieved. + + +With a sigh and a shrug you brush the dust off of your clothes and open the cabin door. You remember the struggle you had with the man moments before, and you laugh to yourself. Leave it to your subconscious to turn one of your favorite people into a scary curse giving man with emotional problems. Although... you do wonder why Alessa isn't with you. You were supposed to meet with her in this cabin after all. + + +Your don't think to much of it, for you finally realize the time. In the distance the sun begins to dip down into the gray blue clouds. It was sundown, the time time your parents require you to be home. You immediately break into a jog. You Father could be quite strict when it came to you. If he caught you coming back late, then he would surely punish you. + + +You jog into a relatively silent castle, although you hear sounds of eating and merriment coming from the main dining hall. As if to punctuate the point, your stomach rumbles in anticipation for dinner. Thankfully you only have to go up one staircase on the way to your room. You're careful to look through each hallway before entering in order to avoid a potential disaster with your dad, so in not too long you come to a solid oak door. Engraved on the wall beside it reads the name, 'Lucentia,' your family name. Without wasting any time you throw the door open and slam the door shut behind you. + + +"Erron? What are you doing back so late?" You turn around to see your Father seated on at your desk with a grave look on his face. His deep authoritative voice is riddled with anxiety and subtle undertones of sadness. Something your dad rarely displays. + + +You begin to mumble an excuse about knight training, but your Father interrupts you. "Never mind that. I need you to pack your things. We're going away for a while." The persona of a strong confident man your Father usually portrayed was gone. + + +When you don't respond immediately, he raises his voice. "Quickly now. We must be going!" + + +You don't question him and immediately begin to pack your travel bags with necessities. You're at it for a couple minutes when you realize your Father had no bags with him. "Did you already have your bags packed? you ask curiously. Any information you could glean from him would be useful. + + +He looks around for a moment confused. "I must've forgotten to grab them. I'll be back, son. Stay here and pack. If I'm not back in fifteen minutes then go find Morden." He rushes out of the room leaving you even more confused than when you woke up in the cabin. + + +You shrug and obey him. Even at his worst he still knows more than you do. + + +It doesn't take you long to pack, and soon enough you're left waiting on your bed. A few long moments later you begin to hear shuffling outside, and shouting. You try to ignore it, but it soon grows to a point where you can't ignore it very well. That, and you're starting to get curious. The royal guards don't usually act so panicked, so maybe you should check it out. +> Sate your curiosity +Tossing your fathers wishes out the window, you crack the door open. If you come back in five minutes, then that should leave you plenty of time to find out what's going on. + + +You walk out of the door and into the stone walled hallways. You listen for a moment, then follow the sounds of shouting. As you near the source, other sounds enter the mix. The sounds of swords ringing and armor being torn fill your ears, and before you can turn yourself back you walk into the scene of the noise. Bodies of the knights of the Holy Order llitter the hallway floor. Royal guards stand amidst the corpses, while others drive their swords through the fallen bodies. Some dark liquid covers the cobblestone floor, and that same liquid is splattered across the walls. Blood. + + +The thought sickens you and you begin to retch despite not having had dinner yet. The sound draws some attention, and as you bring your head up from the ground your eyes meets with a dying Knight on the floor not to far from you. That knight mouths the word "Run," just before his eyes lose the life in them. + + +Before you can really react to that you hear someone yell, "There's the Assassin's son! Get him!" You look up to find every royal guard with their eyes trained on you. Your instincts take over and you begin to run back the way you came. The sounds of metal boots hitting the floor echo throughout the hall behind you. Fear courses throughout your body, and you run faster than you ever have before. + + +However, it's not enough. After only a few moments of running you hear a voice behind you yell, "I've got him!" You're only left wondering what he means for a moment, for right afterwards a javelin pierces your shoulder. The force of it doesn't kill you, but it certainly sends you toppling to the floor. The pain is horrible, but luckily you don't have to endure it for long. A royal guard comes up moments later to finish the job.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> + + + +Paper-Mache + + +By Jster02 +> Start +The pain is the first thing you notice. It feels as though someone's poured an entire vat of hot coffee over your entire body. Somehow, you get the sense that you've been asleep a lot longer than normal. You open your eyes to find yourself laying in a patch of grass, staring up at a clear, starry sky, interrupted by the branches of nearby trees. You don't move for a moment. How did you get outside? You don't remember going to sleep out here... as a matter of fact, you don't remember going to sleep at all. Or anything else, as a matter of fact. + + +The pain is fading fast, so you sit up and take a look around, pulse racing. The shadowy forms of trees surround you, the sounds of the night bombarding your senses. It occurs to you that you're hyperventilating. Is this what it feels like to have a heart attack? No this is a panic attack of some kind. Instinctively, you find yourself focusing on a single blade of grass in the field. With shaking hands, you pluck it from the dirt and study it, taking note of its shape, the feel of it in your hand, the nearly indistinguishable pattern of little veins running through it. Mindfulness. That's supposed to help with Panic attacks. Somehow, you remember that. But you can't remember where you learned it. + + +Slowly but surely, your breathing normalizes. You wipe the snot from your nose and the tears from your eyes as your body stops convulsing. For the first time since you woke up, you notice the cool night breeze. You're going to be fine. If you just keep your wits, you'll find a way out of this eventually. You take a quick inventory of everything you can remember. Random bits of knowledge surface in your head, facts about whales, mathematical formulas, the steps to changing a tire. But no memories of the people, or events, or books that taught you those things. + + +As you contemplate these things, you notice a few items laying in the grass around you. Namely, a small backpack and an odd metal disk, with a glowing screen on one side. You pick up the disk first and examine it. "Insufficient power," flashes across its face over and over in red. Something about it tugs at something in your memory, but you can't quite put your finger on what. Confused, you slip it into your pocket and turn to the bag. You unzip it to find a lighter, a knife, a sleeping bag, a pillow, and... a whole mountain of Cheez-Its and Mountain Dew? Just what kind of person are you? Still, it's better than nothing, so you slip it over your shoulders. + + +As you try (and fail), to take your bearings from the waning crescent moon, (not that it really matters, it's not like you know where you came from), you become aware of a strange noise in the distance. You stop and listen. Is that yelling? Wait, yelling is a human noise, right? So, where there's yelling, there's humans. Before you can even finish processing that thought, your feet are carrying you towards the source of the noise. You didn't know you could run this fast on pavement, much less over the uneven turf of the forest, but then, maybe you're a famous football player or something and just don't remember it. + + +The yelling grows louder as you draw nearer. A dim light shines in the distance, growing brighter. You slow down a little, these shouts don't sound like happy ones. + + +"Stop struggling or it'll only hurt more!" a gravelly voice says. + + +"Help! Stop! Let me go!" An extremely high pitched voice this time. + + +You've slowed to a tip-toe now. Whatever this is, you're not sure you want to be a part of it. Still you creep closer until you can just make out the figures involved between the trees. They look small from here, no bigger than children, but then, it's a little hard to tell from this distance. It looks like they might be wearing some kind of cloaks, green ones, if your eyes don't deceive you. + + +"Gag her before she draws someone to us!" Says the gravel tongued shadow to two others holding down a third, "Get her in the bag and tie it tight. The last thing we need is another escape." + + +Your palms are soaked with sweat. You should do something, anything, to help, but whoever these people are, they certainly don't sound like the kind of folks you'd like to mess with... +> Creep closer and attack +You drop into a crouch and creep closer, stopping behind trees whenever you can. Now that you're closer, you can make out more details, and boy are these people weird. They're even shorter up close, they'd probably only come up to your waist. But that's the least strange thing about them. They're skin resembles Paper-Mache, all folded over itself. And then there's the ears, so long and pointy. Almost as big as they are, and yet still they point straight up. Forget whatever you thought about only humans yelling. You must've forgotten that too, because these things are no humans. + + +The two biggest creatures hold down a smaller one, (perhaps that one is only a child), while the one that appears to be the leader stands and watches. Like you thought, all but the one on the ground are clad in green cloaks, reaching nearly to their feet, with a strange symbol of something like a broken goblet embroidered on their backs in brown. + + +They've nearly got the child into a big sack now, but she (he? It?) still hasn't given up. + + +"Please!" She cries, "I just wanna go home! Let me go home!" + + +"We're giving you a new home." Says the leader, "A better home! Don't you want to help make your old home better?" + + +"No! I want my papa!" + + +Just watching this makes you nauseous. This has got to be stopped, there's no way you can sit by and let it happen. Before you've even so much as thought of a plan, you're on your feet, charging the creatures with... +> the knife! +You flick your knife open and tense for battle. It feels so small in your hand, so weak. If only you had a gun, or a hatchet at least. Still, it's better than using your fists. + + +Before you have the chance lose your nerve, you charge one of the creatures holding down the... other creature. (You're really not sure what to call any of these things, you've never seen anything quite like them before). You slam into it, knocking it to the ground before it has a chance to react. It's eyes go wide as you plunge the knife into it's stomach, (or what appears to be it's stomach). It penetrates easier than you expected, the knife. Feels a little too easy. + + +But before you have time to fully contemplate the moral ambiguity of your actions, you see, out of the corner of your eye, the other creature charging you with some kind of sharpened stick. You act faster than you ever thought you could, rolling to the side, just as it brings it's stick down in a stabbing motion. The stick buries itself into the chest of the first creature, (the one with the knife still stuck in it's chest). If it wasn't dead before, it certainly is now. + + +The creature with the stick stares at it's fallen friend, stunned. You should strike now, while it's distracted, but all you can do is stare at the dead creature. You did that. Even though it's not exactly a human, something about the whole thing just feels wrong. Slowly, the surviving creature turns towards you. + + +"Why would you do that?" He asks, "That was my friend!" + + +"You were attacking that... other creature!" You say. Even as you say it, the words feel hollow. "He... had it coming!" + + +"You have no idea what you've gotten yourself involved in!" He says, "You're messing with things you shouldn't you crazy monster!" With that, the creature charges you once more, wrenching it's weapon from the chest of its dead friend. Perhaps you should let him strike you down. Maybe you're the monster here. But then, what about that other creature? The one he was tormenting? What does that make him? No, you were just acting as any good person should when they see someone in danger. Just as the creature reaches you, instinct takes over and you slam your fist into it's head. + + +These creatures don't just look like Paper-Mache, they tear like it too. As soon as your hand makes contact, his face crumples inward and he staggers back, falling to the ground, dead. You stare at your hand, stunned. Either you've got some sort of hidden superpowers, or these creatures are weaker than most. That doesn't seem normal. Even with your broken memory, you can be pretty sure of that. + + +As the adrenaline wears off, you remember that there were three creatures involved. Two doing the heavy lifting and one giving orders. You take a quick look around you, but see nothing. It must've run off somewhere; the only other living thing left in the area is the creature you came to save in the first place. +> Check on the fallen creature +The creature lays in the dirt, staring at you. It trembles as you approach, inching away on its back. + + +"Who are you?" It asks with trembling voice, "What do you want? I want my papa!" + + +"I'm not going to hurt you," You say, trying to sound as soothing as you can, "I'm here to help." + + +"You're... not gonna hurt me like those other guys?" + + +"No, I was saving you. That's why I hurt them." + + +"Oh... Okay..." + + +You stare at each other wordlessly for a few moments, unsure of what to say. Finally, you extend your hand to help the creature up. It stares for a second at your arm, and asks, + + +"What are you doing?" + + +"I'm helping you up." + + +"How does holding your hand out help me up?" + + +"You grab it and... oh, never mind. Do you know how to get home?" (Does this thing even have a home)? + + +"I think so..." + + +"Alright, can you walk?" + + +The creature struggles to its feet. "Yes." + + +Another moment of silence. + + +"I'm Pila," the creature says, "...thanks." + + +"You're welcome. Come on, let me walk you home." + + +"Okay." + + +You set off down the path, Pila leading the way. For a few minutes you travel in silence. The hooting of owls and the howl of the wind are your only company as you trudge through the trees. Finally, you can't help but break the silence. + + +"What are you exactly?" + + +Pila looks at you, her ears twitch slightly. "I already told you, I'm Pila." + + +"No, I mean, what are you. As in, what species are you?" + + +"What's a species?" + + +You struggle to come up with an explanation. "It means, what kind of creature are you? I don't know how else to explain it." + + +"I'm confused." + + +"Well... I'm a human." You point to yourself, then look around for something else to name. You spot an owl sitting on a branch, "And that's an owl," You point at the creature, "But what are you? I've never seen anything like you before." + + +"I still don't understand... human? Is that what you said your name was?" + + +It's no use trying to get anything out of her. You sigh, and say, "Never mind, it's not important." + + +"Okay!" She says + + +As you're talking, you come to the side of a hill, with little stairs carved into the side for you to climb down. Lights twinkle a little ways below; must be some kind of village. + + +Pila points at the lights. "That's where I live. It's also where my mama and my papa live. And all of my friends. Let's go!" + + +With that, she dashes down the stairs. They're the perfect size for her little feet, (if a little big). As for you though, you may as well be going downhill on gravel. You nearly slip at least three times as you descend, but in the end you make it to the bottom unscathed. + + +"We're almost there now," Pila says, running up the path. + + +You follow as quick as you can, it wouldn't do to lose her again. If that happened you might as well have never saved her at all. As you jog along the path, you pass a strange plant, just taller than you are. It grows on a thin, blue stalk, straight up, until it droops over at the top, opening into a strange, orange bulb. The bulb glows in the dawn, lighting the whole path beneath your feet. Just a few moments later, you pass by another on the opposite side of the path. The entire trail leading up to the village is lined with these plants, lighting the way like streetlights on an old city road. +> Pila's house +It soon becomes apparent that you are closer to the village than you thought. Is it just you, or are those buildings smaller than they seemed from afar? You come to the edge of the village to find that the smallest of the houses are about your height. Everything is half the size it should be, from the road through town to the stones that pave it. Stranger still, it all has the same Paper-Mache quality as Pila's skin. + + +You follow the little creature through a twisting maze of streets, just a tad bit too small for you. You begin to see other creatures like Pila milling about. Most stare at you, terrified, a few even run the other way, screaming. But every time that happens, Pila shouts after them, + + +"It's okay, he's nice! He saved me from bad people!" + + +After about five minutes of walking, a high pitched whistle cuts through the air. You try to ignore it, but it persists. + + +"What is that?" You ask. + + +"Oh that?" Pila stops and turns, "That's the alarm. People sound it whenever there's an emergency. Then the watchmen come and help whoever sounded it. My papa is the leader of all of the watchmen." She beams with pride. + + +"Shouldn't we be worried." + + +"No, this happens a few times every day. My papa will take care of it, whatever it is." + + +"Well, alright." + + +You walk for a few minutes more, then the alarm stops, leaving you in complete silence. + + +"See?" Pila says, "Everything's going to be-" + + +A voice from behind interrupts her, "What in the name of the water-pit are you?" + + +You and Pila turn in unison to see a whole squadron of creatures, all pointing little wooden spears your way. But before you can do or say anything, Pila runs straight up to them. + + +"Papa!" She cries, flinging her little arms around the one who appears to be their leader. + + +"Pila?" He says, "What are you doing with this... thing? Did it hurt you?" He turns his gaze on you. "What were you doing with my Daughter, you monster?" + + +"No, Papa! You don't understand! This is human, he saved me from a bunch of really mean people. They tried to put me in a big bag, but then he came out of the forest and beat them up!" + + +Pila's father is quiet for a minute. Then, he turns to the creatures behind him and says, "You can relax. Looks like we won't be needing spears." He turns back to you, and takes a few steps in your direction. "I apologize... human, is it? It's just that no one's ever seen anything like you before. So it was only natural the alarm was sounded. They all thought you were some kind of monster!" + + +"I thought the same when I first saw creatures like you." You say, "If you don't mind me asking, what exactly are you? I've never seen anything quite like you either. At least, I don't think I have." + + +"You stand in a village full of Oalkwardners." The Creature says, "I am Merk, head of the Watchmen of Arrorn. I help to protect this place from any sort of outside invaders or natural disasters. That's why I came when I heard you had arrived. By the way, thank you so much for rescuing my daughter. If you ever need anything at all, just come find me and I'll do my best to make it happen." He stops and thinks for a moment. "Are you planning on staying here a while?" + + +"Actually," You say, "I have no idea how I got here in the first place. So, I guess I'm kinda stuck till I figure out how to get back home." + + +"That's strange indeed," Merk says, "Come with me, if you need, you may stay with me and my family while you're here. You did save Pila, after all. It's the least we can do." + + +"I guess I have nowhere else to go," You say. + + +"Yay!" Pila says, "It'll be like when we have all the family over for a feast!" + + +And once again, you set off through the streets. As you walk, you explain to Merk how you woke up in the forest with no memory and found Pila in trouble. + + +"What were you doing out there, Pila?" Merk asks, "Why on earth did your mother let you go out so late? And why on earth did you take this long to come back? From what Human said, it doesn't sound like you were too far from town." Merk frowns, "In fact, you'd better come up with a pretty good explanation as to why you were out so late, or else you're in hot water!" + + +"It's not my fault!" Pila says, "I went out to play hide-and-seek in the woods with my friends. The sun was going down, but we knew it would still be light outside for a little bit, so we thought it would be okay. But I really wanted to win. I never win at hide-and-seek, so I needed a plan to make sure they'd never find me. So I went really far away on the road. But then it started to get dark, and I got scared. And then, the ground started shaking, and I got really scared. So I ran away into the trees. But then I got lost, so I was really really scared. It took me a long time to find my way back to the road, and then when I was walking back, the mean guys came and tried to put me in a bag!" + + +"You said the ground started shaking?" Merk asks, "But I didn't feel anything here. I was on the night-watch, so I know." + + +"But it's true, Papa!" Pila says, "There was a really bright light in the sky too! It was like lightning, but it stayed there for a looooooong time." + + +"Don't make up stories, Pila." Merk sounds a little irritated now, "When we get home, you're going to have to do some chores." + + +"But Papa-" + + +"Let's not do this in front of our guest, alright?" + + +Pila sighs, "Yes Papa..." + + +"Good girl. Oh look, we're here." + + +The streets are a bit wider here, and the houses a bit bigger. They're all spaced apart, each one with a good five-or-so acres of space. You've stopped in front of a beautiful yellow one, that looks like it might be two stories high, (though it's hard to tell what with the strange sizes of everything). + + +"We have the best house in the village!" Pila beams, "That's because Papa has the best job. I wanna do it when I grow up too, so I can have this same house." + + +Merk laughs. "I'm glad you think this house is the best. You've never told me that before. Come on, lets go inside." + + +You follow Merk to the front door, where it becomes apparent that you might have a problem. + + +"I'm... not sure I can fit," you say, staring at the door. It comes up only to your chest and looks just a little too narrow for you to fit through. "I don't want to mess up your house." + + +Merk thinks for a moment, wringing his hands. "That really is a shame. We might have to figure out somewhere else for you to stay, I'm sorry." + + +It's then that you remember, you've got camping supplies in your backpack + + +"I can just sleep outside," You say, "I've got a sleeping bag and a pillow, I'll just lay it out in your yard somewhere, if that's alright. + + +Pila's face brightens, "Papa, can we eat outside with Human too?" + + +"I guess we may as well, so long as it stays nice outside," Merk says, "Now you'd better go get some sleep. I'm not sure how you can be this chipper after staying up all night like that. Besides, you'll need your rest if you ever want to get done with the massive list of chores you're gonna get once I figure out just how much trouble you're in." + + +Pila sighs, and starts towards the door. "Yes papa..." + + +You spend the rest of the day on Merk's property, not daring to re-enter the village for fear that someone might see you and sound the alarm. ("Just until we get the word around that you're not a threat," Merk says). For a while you talk with Merk, trying to figure out where exactly you are. Eventually, Merk pulls out a map of the area, and you find that you don't recognize any of the landscape. (Though, you can't quite remember any other landscapes either). You just can't make heads or tails of the situation. + + +Once evening rolls around, Merk's wife, (who you quickly learn is named Fila), brings you dinner in a bowl, much too small for you to properly hold. It's filled with some kind of goop that smells like burning rubber, and doesn't taste much better. But you don't say anything, and just choke it down best you can. You know you can eat some of the Cheez-Its from your bag after everyone else goes to bed. + + +After an hour-or-so more of small talk, everyone decides to hit the sack. As the Oalkwardners head inside, you spread out your sleeping bag and lay down, staring up at the stars. The moment your head touches the pillow, all the energy you spent today hits you at once. You're asleep within minutes... +> A living nightmare +Your dreams are a confused mass of pictures and images. Lots of formulas and numbers, the strange disk you found in the woods, a violet light engulfing you... + + +A whisper in your ear breaks you from your slumber. + + +"Wake up, strange beast. I need to talk to you." + + +You open your eyes so find that it's still dark. The face of an Oalkwardner stares down at you, blocking out the moonlight. It startles you so much, you sit straight up; if it wasn't for the creature's swift reflexes, your head would've smashed right into it. That's when you get a good look at it in the light of the moon. + + +"What the heck do you think you're doing here?" You ask, "You were the guy that ran away after I saved Pila!" + + +"Not so loud," He hisses, "Do you want to give me away?" + + +"Yeah, actually. I should call Merk right now, or better yet, do you in myself!" You take a deep breath to let out a shout. + + +"Don't!" + + +Something about the creature's tone stops you, if only for a moment, from alerting the Oalkwardners in the house. What would drive any intelligent creature to walk into the lion's den like this in the first place? It just doesn't add up. + + +"At least hear me out." Pleads the creature, "I need your help." + + +"What makes you think I would help a kidnapper? Seriously, are you crazy?" + + +"It's not just me you'd be helping, but them too!" he gestures towards the house, "In fact, you'd be helping every Oalkwardner in this village." + + +"Is that a threat?" You ask, "Are you going to kill them or something if I don't cooperate?" + + +"My word, you must really think I'm some kind of monster, monster. No, I'm not here to hurt anyone. Like I said, I'm here to help." + + +"How does kidnapping children help anyone?" + + +"I was getting to that. This village, Arrorn, I believe it's called, is not as peaceful as it seems. It is under the rule of King Faerdalm, a cruel, ruthless tyrant." + + +"Sound like something a teenager would come up with for a writing contest," You say, rolling your eyes. + + +"Will you let me finish?" The creature glares at you, "He takes their food, says they owe it to him for getting to live in such a 'great and powerful country.' It's all a load of bull, of course. He takes so much that a good many of the villagers die every year from starvation. I'm part of a resistance group trying to stop it. We've been working on a way to get rid of Faerdalm once and for all, so everyone can be free, just like in the good old days. That's why we've needed to take children, to run tests on them. We're developing a way to make ourselves stronger, so we can finally stand up to him. But we're still a ways out from perfecting it. It's going to take a lot more people, a lot more deaths, to finally perfect it. To be quite frank, I'm getting quite sick of it." + + +"So, where do I come in?" You ask. + +"Never in my life, have I ever seen a creature as powerful as you." He says, "If you were to join us, we would be able to achive our goal much quicker. And the quicker we achive it, the less needless deaths must occuer." He extends his hand, as if to shake yours, "So, are you in?" +> Shake his hand +The Oalkwardner smiles as you shake his hand. + + +"Very well then," he says, "We must go at once, there are many preparations to be made." he stops for a moment and looks at you, "You may call me Bolard, by the way." + + +With that, he makes a single clicking noise with his mouth, and a whole hoard of Oalkwardners dressed in the same cloaks as Bolard step out from the shadows, surrounding the two of you. + + +"We're heading back to base," Bolard says, "Better get moving if you wanna get any sleep tonight!" + + +"Hold on a second!" you say, "Were you planning on ambushing me if I said no?" + + +"Of course not!" Bolard says, "They were just here in case you were... unreasonable, and decided to attack me." + + +Something about his tone puts you on edge, but you can't exactly do anything about it with all these guards around. You follow the pack into the forest... + + + + +Bolard leads the group back up the path you came from, past the place where you witnessed the attempted kidnapping. You walk for hours, never stopping for even so much as a five minute break. As the sun's rays begin to peak over the horizon, the leaders of the pack turn off the trail abruptly and lead you into more densely wooded area. + + +As the sun grows higher in the sky, you notice that there is still a sort of trail here, just fainter and harder to see than the one you left. It seems this way has been traveled a few times before, the vegetation trampled underneath it. After a few more hours of walking, the group stops abruptly, and you nearly trip over the Oalkwardner in front of you. + + +You sigh with relief. This must be some kind of break. Thank goodness, your feet feel like they're about to fall off. But instead of dispersing and finding spots to sit down and talk, the Oalkwardners stay where they are. There's motion at the front of the pack, someone's doing... something, you're not sure what. Then, a great wooden hatch opens up from the ground, revealing a spiral staircase descending down into the earth. You didn't see it because it was camouflaged by dirt and leaves, somehow stuck on top of it. + + +The assembly moves forward, down the stairs, and you follow at the middle of the pack. You reach the bottom and find yourself in a hard packed dirt tunnel, with a few paths branching off from it. + + +"To your barracks, everyone!" Bolard says, "I must speak with the monster for a moment." + + +The crowd disperses, heading down various tunnels, chattering amongst themselves. Bolard turns to you. + + +"I'm not going to have you stay in the barracks with the others," He says, "You're a might too big for the beds there, and I don't want you rolling over and crushing someone or something. Instead, I think you ought to take one of the private suites, which are usually reserved for our highest ranking officials. Thankfully enough, we've got a few to spare. Come, I'll take you there now. I'm headed that direction anyway." + + +You follow Bolard through the tunnels, trying your best to remember how to get back to the hatch. Thankfully, it isn't too far. After a few minutes, the dirt walls become wooden, which feels a little nicer. It's like being in a regular hallway, (if a bit cramped, due to your size). + + +"This is your room," Bolard says, opening the door at the very end of the hallway, "Take some time to get acquainted with your new surroundings. I will return shortly, there are a few matters of grave importance which I must discuss with you." + + +He shuts the door, leaving you to explore your new accommodations. Not to say there's all that much to explore, the room is quite barren. The only furniture is a sleeping pad that looks like it's woven from grass and a little table on the far side of the room. It's all too small for you, but you'll just have to make do. You take off your backpack and sit on the mat. It feels so nice to take a rest after all that walking. + + +While you sit, you begin sifting through the contents of your bag, laying them out on the floor in front of you. You stop when your hand touches the strange metal disk you found in the forest when you woke up. The screen still flashes, "insufficient power," over and over again. Maybe if you can get it charged up again, you might be able to uncover some clue about your past. You flip it over and look at the back. There's a little tank strapped to this side, with a tiny bit of green fluid inside. Is this the stuff that powers it? If you fill it up, will the disk work again? + + +As you ponder all these things, the door opens and Bolard walks in. + + +"Come, monster," he says, "I need to relay the plan to you, so that we're ready." +> The plan +Bolard leads you back out into the hallway and through another nearby door. This room is less barren than the one you sleep in, and it's set up more like an office. + + +"Sit," Bolard gestures towards a stool, too small for you, in front of a desk in the middle of the room. You obey, sitting uncomfortably low, as Bolard walks around the desk and sits on a stool of his own on the other side. + + +"Monster," Bolard says, "You have displayed great strength. Strength enough, perhaps, to take out an entire army single handedly." + + +"What do you mean?" you ask, "I've never fought anyone in my life since yesterday. At least, I don't think I have." + + +"Training will be provided of course," Bolard says, "With your great strength, and the proper training, you may lead us to victory." + + +"You're crazy! What kind of insane thing do you want me to do anyway?" + + +"I want you to storm the king's palace. In two weeks time, there'll be a banquet, and all his advisors and officials will be there. If you attack then, you'll be able to cripple his regime, creating a power vacuum with no one to fill it. That's when we'll step in and take over, creating a new era of peace and prosperity." + + +"But why just me? Why should I do this alone?" + + +"Because if you don't, more innocent Oalkwardners will die! They'll keep doing experiments, stealing more children to use as lab rats! We've got someone inside the palace who can get you inside. There's no turning back, you agreed to this when you shook my hand." + + +You open your mouth to argue, but then close it. It's useless to argue. If you refuse to do as he says, he'll probably have you killed or something. + + +"Any questions?" Bolard asks. + + +You don't say anything. + + +"Good. You may spend the rest of the day as you wish. Go explore the facility, if you want. Get to know your way around so you feel more comfortable here." + + +You turn and walk out the door, back to your room. There's nothing else to say. +> The note +You return to your room to find a note, laying on your pillow. + + +"Come to the mess hall at midnight. There's something we must discuss." + + +Confused, you turn it over to see if there's anything on the back, but there's not. For a moment, you stand there, staring at the piece of paper in your hands. What's going on? You've hardly met anyone yet, and already someone wants to talk with you privately? Is it some kind of trap? But what if it's important? + + +Curiosity burns within you. You have to find out what this is all about. If things go wrong, you'll just have to find a way out of it. + + + + +That night, you creep out of your room and head to the mess hall at what you think is about 11:30. (It's hard to tell, the Oalkwardners use a complex system of hourglasses to tell time. It's nothing like what you're used to). Luckily, you explored most of the tunnels beforehand, so you find your way easily enough, with ten minutes to spare. + + +You enter the mess hall to find... nothing out of place. There's not another person in sight. You're not surprised, you are early after all. + + +Something touches your shoulder. You whirl around to see a cloaked Oalkwardner with a wooden mask over their face, standing behind you. + + +"What-" you start to say, but the Oalkwardner puts a finger to its lips. It beckons for you to follow, and scurries down a tunnel at the far side of the room, one of the few you have yet to explore. You follow behind as best you can, trying your best not to lose them in the twists and turns of the passage. Soon, you reach a staircase, leading up to a hatch. + + +The Oalkwardner leads you through the hatch and into the cool night air. You hadn't realized how much you missed the surface until now, and you cherish each breath of fresh air. They lead you a little ways into the forest, then stop. + + +"So," the Oalkwardner says, "You're the one Bolard was talking about. The one that's gonna save the entire rebellion." + + +"I... guess." you say, confused. "What did you want to talk about, exactly?" + + +"Do you want to know how Bolard sees you?" The Oalkwardner asks. + + +"What?" + + +"When he looks at you, he sees only a pawn. A monster which he can bend to his will and use for his own gain." The Oalkwardner turns to face you. "But you are not the only one. He treats everyone that way. All of the high ranking Oalkwardners do, at least in this rebellion." + + +"What does this have to do with me?" + + +"If their plan succeeds, and they manage to take power, I fear they will estate an even worse government than there already is. You are the key piece in their plan. But if that key piece were to fail..." + + +"What, you want me to die on purpose?" + + +"No, of course not! But I want you to fake your own death. Me and some others are ready to desert this crazy rebellion and take whatever the king has to throw at us. It can't be worse than what they've got planned. Not only that, but we want you to tip the king off about their plans while your at it. We'll write a note, and we want you to leave it somewhere they'll find it once you're inside the fortress." + + +"Wait, so am I going into the fortress or am I faking my death?" + + +"You're faking your death at the fortress. They'll just think you failed your mission, but you'll actually have run away, with me and the others." + + +"I hardly know you! Why should I trust you?" + + +"I'll give you until the day of the attack to think it over, alright?" The Oalkwardner says, "I get that this can be hard, but I'm begging you, please don't fail us." + + +You sigh. "I'll think about it." + + +"Good. Now, go get some rest. You've got a long couple of weeks ahead of you." +> The choice... +The next two weeks are a blur. You train for six hours a day, preparing for the big day. Before you know it, it's nearly arrived. The night before, you find another note on your pillow, this one a little longer than the last. + + +"Enclosed is the note you must plant in the fortress," It reads, "I hope you've decided to help us, as we desperately need it. Meet us in the woods behind the fortress once you've done the job, and we can escape." + + +There's another piece of paper, this one explaining everything about the rebellion, where to find their headquarters, and how best to stop them. You skim it, then shove it in your pocket. You're still not sure whether to go along with the rebellions plan, or join the defectors. Whatever you do, you'll have to decide now... +> Tell Bolard about the defectors and end this right here and now +There's no point risking complications during the mission. You'd better tell Bolard about this right now. You stand and head to his office. He's still in there, organizing some of the books on his shelves, as you enter. + + +"Hello, monster." He says, nodding to you. "What can I do for you?" + + +"Defectors," you say, "They've been trying to get me to help them, I've got proof!" + + +You show him the note. He reads it, his eyebrows rising higher and higher with every sentence. + + +"My word!" he cries, "We must do something about it before it's too late! I'll initiate a surprise inspection, we'll catch those filthy traitors yet!" + + +He rushes out of the office. You head back to your room and sit on your bed. Did you do the right thing? There's no stopping it now, so you'd best try and get some sleep. It doesn't come easy though. There's a lot of yelling and screaming from the other tunnels, probably the defectors. You try your best to ignore the conflicting feelings in your stomach as you drift into an uneasy sleep... +> The attack +The next day, you begin the journey to the fortress, escorted by a few rebels, and Bolard himself. It takes several days to get there, and you get to pass by Arrorn on the way, so that's fun. (Though, you don't get to actually enter the village. Too much risk of being recognized or something). + + +Finally, you spot it, sitting on a hilltop just on the horizon. + + +"Alright," Bolard says, "There's a little side door you're going to be let in through. It leads straight to the great hall. Once you get inside, kill as many people as you can, alright? Especially the ones that look super regal, because those are probably royalty." + + +"Anything else?" you ask, dryly. + + +"Actually, yes. The king wears this magic armor all the time. He doesn't get hurt by physical attacks." + + +"Why didn't you tell me this sooner?" you protest, "What do you want me to do about him if I can't hurt him?" + + +"I'm getting to that!" Bolard sounds annoyed, "I do have something that'll kill him." + + +He reaches into his bag and pulls out a glass bottle full of... water. + + +"What's this for?" You ask. + + +"What do you think? It'll get through the cracks in his armor, and kill him!" + + +"It's water." + + +"Exactly! Water kills people!" + + +"I don't follow." + + +"Didn't anyone ever tell you that water disintegrates people? The skin soaks up too much and it just falls apart." + + +"That's not how it works for Humans," you say, "We can touch water, no problem." + + +"Really? Well, that sure makes things easier. This way you can cross the moat, no problem! I was wondering how we'd do that." + + +"Yeah... Okay." You roll your eyes. "Just give me the bottle. I'll smash it over his head or something." + + +As you get closer to the fortress, you start to make out more detail. It looks like it mainly consists of a bunch of towers, surrounded by a wooden wall. By the time the sun sets, you're within a hundred yards of the walls. + + +"Perfect!" Bolard says, "Look, all the nobles are already inside." He points to the closed drawbridge, as if to prove it. "The doorway is just around the back of the fortress. Good luck, monster." + + +"Thanks," you say, rolling your eyes. You grab your knife and hop into the moat, making it across in less than a minute. You rush around the side of the wall and find a door, carved into the side. Just as you reach it, it flies open, and a female Oalkwardner beckons you inside. + + +As soon as you enter the fortress, the nauseating smell of Oalkwardner food hits your nose. You ignore it best you can and take a look around. You're in an alcove at the edge of the great hall, which consists mainly of a bunch of wooden tables lined up together. Over fifty Oalkwardners sit around it, laughing, eating, getting drunk... + + +This is perfect! If they're tipsy, you can strike much more easily. Quickly, you locate the king, (his armor sets him apart from the rest quite nicely), and sneak up behind him. Then, in one quick motion, you bash the bottle over his head, shattering it into a million pieces. The water splashes everywhere, (it definitely wasn't a small bottle), and the entire room goes silent. Then, the king begins to scream, and the room erupts into chaos. + + +Quick as you can, you start punching, kicking, stabbing right and left. Oalkwardners go flying everywhere, most dying the instant you touch them. You manage to take out about half of the nobles before they get wise and start running for the door. At the same time, some of the guards seem to be getting ready for a counter attack. You'd better figure out what to do next, and fast... +> Get out now, while you still can. (You've already killed the king, and that's all that really matters). +You dash out the door before the guards can strike back. Soon as you make it to the moat, you know you're home free. The guards can't follow you here. Before you know it, you've reached the other side. + + +"Bolard!" You call, "I got the king!" + + +He and the other guards come running from around the corner. + + +"Great!" Bolard says, "That should be enough! Worst comes to worst, and we have to launch another assault. They're crippled without a leader, it should be easy." + + +"Good to know. Now why don't we get out of here before they come after us?" + + +Bolard laughs. "Yes, let's get on that." And you run off into the forest together.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The next day, you begin the journey to the fortress, escorted by a few rebels, and Bolard himself. It takes several days to get there, and you get to pass by Arrorn on the way, so that's fun. (Though, you don't get to actually enter the village. Too much risk of being recognized or something). + + +Finally, you spot it, sitting on a hilltop just on the horizon. + + +"Alright," Bolard says, "There's a little side door you're going to be let in through. It leads straight to the great hall. Once you get inside, kill as many people as you can, alright? Especially the ones that look super regal, because those are probably royalty." + + +"Anything else?" you ask, dryly. + + +"Actually, yes. The king wears this magic armor all the time. He doesn't get hurt by physical attacks." + + +"Why didn't you tell me this sooner?" you protest, "What do you want me to do about him if I can't hurt him?" + + +"I'm getting to that!" Bolard sounds annoyed, "I do have something that'll kill him." + + +He reaches into his bag and pulls out a glass bottle full of... water. + + +"What's this for?" You ask. + + +"What do you think? It'll get through the cracks in his armor, and kill him!" + + +"It's water." + + +"Exactly! Water kills people!" + + +"I don't follow." + + +"Didn't anyone ever tell you that water disintegrates people? The skin soaks up too much and it just falls apart." + + +"That's not how it works for Humans," you say, "We can touch water, no problem." + + +"Really? Well, that sure makes things easier. This way you can cross the moat, no problem! I was wondering how we'd do that." + + +"Yeah... Okay." You roll your eyes. "Just give me the bottle. I'll smash it over his head or something." + + +As you get closer to the fortress, you start to make out more detail. It looks like it mainly consists of a bunch of towers, surrounded by a wooden wall. By the time the sun sets, you're within a hundred yards of the walls. + + +"Perfect!" Bolard says, "Look, all the nobles are already inside." He points to the closed drawbridge, as if to prove it. "The doorway is just around the back of the fortress. Good luck, monster." + + +"Thanks," you say, rolling your eyes. You grab your knife and hop into the moat, making it across in less than a minute. You rush around the side of the wall and find a door, carved into the side. Just as you reach it, it flies open, and a female Oalkwardner beckons you inside. + + +As soon as you enter the fortress, the nauseating smell of Oalkwardner food hits your nose. You ignore it best you can and take a look around. You're in an alcove at the edge of the great hall, which consists mainly of a bunch of wooden tables lined up together. Over fifty Oalkwardners sit around it, laughing, eating, getting drunk... + + +This is perfect! If they're tipsy, you can strike much more easily. Quickly, you locate the king, (his armor sets him apart from the rest quite nicely), and sneak up behind him. Then, in one quick motion, you bash the bottle over his head, shattering it into a million pieces. The water splashes everywhere, (it definitely wasn't a small bottle), and the entire room goes silent. Then, the king begins to scream, and the room erupts into chaos. + + +Quick as you can, you start punching, kicking, stabbing right and left. Oalkwardners go flying everywhere, most dying the instant you touch them. You manage to take out about half of the nobles before they get wise and start running for the door. At the same time, some of the guards seem to be getting ready for a counter attack. You'd better figure out what to do next, and fast... +> Go after the rest of the so-called nobles +You can't leave any behind to take the king's place, or else the entire mission is a failure. You rush out after them, easily catching up to them with your longer legs. Guess they're not the types to exercise... or do whatever it is these creatures have to do to get stronger. You plow through them like they're snowmen. But the guards begin to come after you, and they clearly do exercise. They begin to surround you as you chase the last noble across the courtyard. (Most of them never made it past the great hall door). + + +Just as the guards close in, you leap atop the last noble, crushing him under your weight! He dies instantly. Unfortunately for you, the guards reach you at that exact moment, stabbing you in about fifteen different places at once. You also die instantly. + + + + +But hey. At least you saved the kingdom. Sort of...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The next two weeks are a blur. You train for six hours a day, preparing for the big day. Before you know it, it's nearly arrived. The night before, you find another note on your pillow, this one a little longer than the last. + + +"Enclosed is the note you must plant in the fortress," It reads, "I hope you've decided to help us, as we desperately need it. Meet us in the woods behind the fortress once you've done the job, and we can escape." + + +There's another piece of paper, this one explaining everything about the rebellion, where to find their headquarters, and how best to stop them. You skim it, then shove it in your pocket. You're still not sure whether to go along with the rebellions plan, or join the defectors. Whatever you do, you'll have to decide now... +> Go along with the defectors plans +What are you thinking? Of course you're going along with them! This rebellion kidnaps children, for crying out loud! There's no way they'd make good rulers. You finger the note in your pocket, your resolve slowly growing. Tomorrow, you get to leave this place forever. With that thought in mind, sleep comes easy... + + + + +The next day, you begin the journey to the fortress, escorted by a few rebels, and Bolard himself. It takes several days to get there, and you get to pass by Arrorn on the way, so that's fun. (Though, you don't get to actually enter the village. Too much risk of being recognized or something). + + +Finally, you spot it, sitting on a hilltop just on the horizon. The King's fortress. + + +"Alright," Bolard says, "I didn't have much to do last night, so I thought a lot about the plan. We've got an informant inside the fortress who can let you in so you can carry out the mission. Just do what we discussed and we'll be fine." He thinks for a moment, then says, "Also, I brought something in case the king doesn't fall so easy. He's got this enchanted armor, and I'm not quite sure you'll be able to break through it. So, I procured a bottle of water." He pulls a glass bottle out of his bag and hands it to you carefully. + + +"What's this for?" You ask. + + +"What do you think? It'll get through the cracks in his armor, and kill him!" + + +"It's water." + + +"Exactly! Water kills people!" + + +"I don't follow." + + +"Didn't anyone ever tell you that water disintegrates people? The skin soaks up too much and it just falls apart." + + +"That's not how it works for Humans," you say, "We can touch water, no problem." + + +"Really? Well, that sure makes things easier. This way you can cross the moat, no problem! I was wondering how we'd do that." + + +"Yeah... Okay." You roll your eyes. "Just give me the bottle. I'll smash it over his head or something." + + +As you get closer to the fortress, you start to make out more detail. It looks like it mainly consists of a bunch of towers, surrounded by a wooden wall. By the time the sun sets, you're within a hundred yards of the walls. + + +"Alright," Bolard says, "Good luck monster!" He gives you a shove towards the moat. You jump right in and swim across, making it to the other side in less than a minute. You head around the back of the castle, where you find door carved into the wall. As you're contemplating how to get inside, it swings open and a female Oalkwardner beckons you inside. + + +That's when you realize you'll have to kill her so she doesn't reveal that you're a traitor once you escape. As soon as she shuts the door, you bash her over the head with your fist, taking her out instantly. You feel a little guilty about it, because after all, she did let you in. But then, the king is probably gonna execute all of the rebels anyway, right? + + +You're in a little alcove in the great hall, unseen by the group of people at the table, talking and laughing. There's another door nearby, presumably to the courtyard. You'll head out there in a moment, but first you've gotta figure out the best way to deal with the note... +> Go up to the table and deliver it yourself +You have to make sure the king gets this note, don't you? So, you walk right up to the table, reaching in your pocket for the note. + + +But before you can say so much as a word, someone screams. Now what on earth could've caused that? You look around, but realize they're all looking at you, backing away. You open your mouth to say that you come in peace, but before you do, a guard rushes over and stabs you in the gut! You're so surprised, you don't do anything when the others come and follow suit! + + +You fall to the ground, still clutching the note in your hand. Your vision swims, then fades to black. Hopefully they'll still find the note in your hand. They'll probably feel pretty stupid about killing a potential ally, but that's their loss...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>What are you thinking? Of course you're going along with them! This rebellion kidnaps children, for crying out loud! There's no way they'd make good rulers. You finger the note in your pocket, your resolve slowly growing. Tomorrow, you get to leave this place forever. With that thought in mind, sleep comes easy... + + + + +The next day, you begin the journey to the fortress, escorted by a few rebels, and Bolard himself. It takes several days to get there, and you get to pass by Arrorn on the way, so that's fun. (Though, you don't get to actually enter the village. Too much risk of being recognized or something). + + +Finally, you spot it, sitting on a hilltop just on the horizon. The King's fortress. + + +"Alright," Bolard says, "I didn't have much to do last night, so I thought a lot about the plan. We've got an informant inside the fortress who can let you in so you can carry out the mission. Just do what we discussed and we'll be fine." He thinks for a moment, then says, "Also, I brought something in case the king doesn't fall so easy. He's got this enchanted armor, and I'm not quite sure you'll be able to break through it. So, I procured a bottle of water." He pulls a glass bottle out of his bag and hands it to you carefully. + + +"What's this for?" You ask. + + +"What do you think? It'll get through the cracks in his armor, and kill him!" + + +"It's water." + + +"Exactly! Water kills people!" + + +"I don't follow." + + +"Didn't anyone ever tell you that water disintegrates people? The skin soaks up too much and it just falls apart." + + +"That's not how it works for Humans," you say, "We can touch water, no problem." + + +"Really? Well, that sure makes things easier. This way you can cross the moat, no problem! I was wondering how we'd do that." + + +"Yeah... Okay." You roll your eyes. "Just give me the bottle. I'll smash it over his head or something." + + +As you get closer to the fortress, you start to make out more detail. It looks like it mainly consists of a bunch of towers, surrounded by a wooden wall. By the time the sun sets, you're within a hundred yards of the walls. + + +"Alright," Bolard says, "Good luck monster!" He gives you a shove towards the moat. You jump right in and swim across, making it to the other side in less than a minute. You head around the back of the castle, where you find door carved into the wall. As you're contemplating how to get inside, it swings open and a female Oalkwardner beckons you inside. + + +That's when you realize you'll have to kill her so she doesn't reveal that you're a traitor once you escape. As soon as she shuts the door, you bash her over the head with your fist, taking her out instantly. You feel a little guilty about it, because after all, she did let you in. But then, the king is probably gonna execute all of the rebels anyway, right? + + +You're in a little alcove in the great hall, unseen by the group of people at the table, talking and laughing. There's another door nearby, presumably to the courtyard. You'll head out there in a moment, but first you've gotta figure out the best way to deal with the note... +> Leave it stuck between the door and the wall on your way out +You slip out the door before anyone notices you, leaving the note behind. Now, you're in the fortress courtyard. Luckily, it's deserted, probably thanks to the banquet. Even more lucky, you spy another exit door just across the courtyard. You head straight for it and try to open it. To your immense surprise, it swings right open. Are they really this under prepared? What if someone broke into the fortress through that? + + +You step outside the walls, and realize that there's no handle on the other side. Closed, the door blends seamlessly with the wall, making it completely invisible. How interesting, looks like they had an escape route planned in case of an attack. So smart of them. + + +You cross the moat and hurry back into the forest, hoping against hope that Bolard doesn't see you. Once you're a good hundred feet in, a voice from besides you nearly makes you jump out of your skin. + + +"Did you do it?" + + +You turn to see the masked Oalkwardner and a few others looking at you, waiting for an answer. + + +"Yeah," you say, "It's done." + + +"Perfect!" The Oalkwardner pulls off his mask, revealing his face. "Now that I know I can trust you, I can take this stupid thing off. I was just wearing it in case you betrayed us or something. My name is Culmad, by the way. Now what do you say we get the heck out of here?" + + +"Yeah," you say, "Why don't we?" + + +And you set off into the forest, together. + + +When word gets out about what you did, you will be hailed as a hero, the savior of the kingdom. But for now, perhaps you ought to just try your best to make a life for yourself in this place. It seems like you've already got yourself a few friends to start your new life with. Best of luck...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your dreams are a confused mass of pictures and images. Lots of formulas and numbers, the strange disk you found in the woods, a violet light engulfing you... + + +A whisper in your ear breaks you from your slumber. + + +"Wake up, strange beast. I need to talk to you." + + +You open your eyes so find that it's still dark. The face of an Oalkwardner stares down at you, blocking out the moonlight. It startles you so much, you sit straight up; if it wasn't for the creature's swift reflexes, your head would've smashed right into it. That's when you get a good look at it in the light of the moon. + + +"What the heck do you think you're doing here?" You ask, "You were the guy that ran away after I saved Pila!" + + +"Not so loud," He hisses, "Do you want to give me away?" + + +"Yeah, actually. I should call Merk right now, or better yet, do you in myself!" You take a deep breath to let out a shout. + + +"Don't!" + + +Something about the creature's tone stops you, if only for a moment, from alerting the Oalkwardners in the house. What would drive any intelligent creature to walk into the lion's den like this in the first place? It just doesn't add up. + + +"At least hear me out." Pleads the creature, "I need your help." + + +"What makes you think I would help a kidnapper? Seriously, are you crazy?" + + +"It's not just me you'd be helping, but them too!" he gestures towards the house, "In fact, you'd be helping every Oalkwardner in this village." + + +"Is that a threat?" You ask, "Are you going to kill them or something if I don't cooperate?" + + +"My word, you must really think I'm some kind of monster, monster. No, I'm not here to hurt anyone. Like I said, I'm here to help." + + +"How does kidnapping children help anyone?" + + +"I was getting to that. This village, Arrorn, I believe it's called, is not as peaceful as it seems. It is under the rule of King Faerdalm, a cruel, ruthless tyrant." + + +"Sound like something a teenager would come up with for a writing contest," You say, rolling your eyes. + + +"Will you let me finish?" The creature glares at you, "He takes their food, says they owe it to him for getting to live in such a 'great and powerful country.' It's all a load of bull, of course. He takes so much that a good many of the villagers die every year from starvation. I'm part of a resistance group trying to stop it. We've been working on a way to get rid of Faerdalm once and for all, so everyone can be free, just like in the good old days. That's why we've needed to take children, to run tests on them. We're developing a way to make ourselves stronger, so we can finally stand up to him. But we're still a ways out from perfecting it. It's going to take a lot more people, a lot more deaths, to finally perfect it. To be quite frank, I'm getting quite sick of it." + + +"So, where do I come in?" You ask. + +"Never in my life, have I ever seen a creature as powerful as you." He says, "If you were to join us, we would be able to achive our goal much quicker. And the quicker we achive it, the less needless deaths must occuer." He extends his hand, as if to shake yours, "So, are you in?" +> Do not. (No way I'm helping this guy). +You stare at the Oalkwardner's hand. Slowly, you shake your head, and he draws back his arm, frowning. + + +"I figured this might happen," he says, "I suppose you won't be much use as an assassin if you don't cooperate. But we may be able to find... another use for you." + + +"What are you talking about?" You ask, "I said no! I'm not going to help you!" + + +But he doesn't respond. Instead, he makes a popping sound with his mouth, three times in a row. Suddenly, an entire hoard of Oalkwardners appears from all directions, all holding spears, all wearing the same cloaks as the leader before you. + + +"I feared it might come to this," he says, "That's why I brought backup. The data we gather from studying you might just help us yet." + + +You leap to your feet and tense for a fight. "You're going to kidnap me now? Bring all the Oalkwardners you've got, I'll just do them in like I did your other friends! You said it yourself! I'm a force to be reckoned with!" + + +The Oalkwardner shakes his head and raises his hand. All of his soldiers, or whatever it is they are, leap towards you as one. There are far too many to fight off, even if you're stronger than they. Even still, you put up your fists and start swinging madly as you are engulfed in a wave of papery skin. Each swing of your arm makes contact, sending the creatures flying right and left. But as much as you punch and kick, they still manage to get a grip on you, pulling you this way and that, crawling up your legs and weighing you down. For some reason or other, none of them have spears. Not that you're complaining, if it weren't for that fact, you'd probably be dead already. + + +A single Oalkwardner is light as a football, easily tossed around in a fight. But a whole hoard? That's enough to crush a grown man under their combined weight. Slowly, your knees begin to weaken as more and more of the creatures pile on top of you. You stagger around for a few moments until you finally collapse, falling backwards into the grass. It's hard to see anything, they cover your face, blocking your view. But over their cries, you can just hear the leader's voice. + + +"You should've taken my offer, monster. Perhaps then, we could've been friends." + + +A pain slashes across your wrist. Something's cut you! Before you have time to figure out what that might be, you begin to feel dizzy. The edges of your vision close in until all that's left is one small pinprick of light. Then, even that is extinguished, and the world fades away...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You drop into a crouch and creep closer, stopping behind trees whenever you can. Now that you're closer, you can make out more details, and boy are these people weird. They're even shorter up close, they'd probably only come up to your waist. But that's the least strange thing about them. They're skin resembles Paper-Mache, all folded over itself. And then there's the ears, so long and pointy. Almost as big as they are, and yet still they point straight up. Forget whatever you thought about only humans yelling. You must've forgotten that too, because these things are no humans. + + +The two biggest creatures hold down a smaller one, (perhaps that one is only a child), while the one that appears to be the leader stands and watches. Like you thought, all but the one on the ground are clad in green cloaks, reaching nearly to their feet, with a strange symbol of something like a broken goblet embroidered on their backs in brown. + + +They've nearly got the child into a big sack now, but she (he? It?) still hasn't given up. + + +"Please!" She cries, "I just wanna go home! Let me go home!" + + +"We're giving you a new home." Says the leader, "A better home! Don't you want to help make your old home better?" + + +"No! I want my papa!" + + +Just watching this makes you nauseous. This has got to be stopped, there's no way you can sit by and let it happen. Before you've even so much as thought of a plan, you're on your feet, charging the creatures with... +> the lighter! +Common sense says the knife would be the better choice. I mean, how much damage can you really do with a lighter? It takes too long to set someone's clothes on fire; you'll be tackled from behind before you have a chance to hold the flame in place long enough. But for some strange reason, the lighter just feels like the right tool for the job. + + +Before anyone even has a chance to process the fact that you're there, you tackle one of the creatures holding the... other smaller creature down. It's like running into a giant beach ball, except made of Paper-Mache. You thought it would be harder to send the creature flying, but it's so light, you hardly notice the impact. By the time the two of you hit the ground, you've already pressed the lighter to the thing's head and flicked it on. To your amazement, it's skin goes up in flames faster than a pile of dry pine needles. So fast, you nearly burn yourself before you manage to get far enough away from it. These things not only look like they're made of paper, the also burn like it too. + + +"What is this?" The leader cries, "What the heck are you?" + + +There's no time to respond. The other creature (not the leader), is already upon you. It charges towards you, so fast you can barely get the lighter around in time... But you do. The creature runs right into the flame, recoiling as if it's been stabbed. Within seconds it's reduced to ashes, just like the first one. + + +The leader stares at you and takes a few steps back. + + +"P-please..." he says, "D-don't hurt me!" + + +Before you have a chance to react, he's already running away, off into the forest. He's far too fast for you, that's for sure. By the time you get to your feet again, he's already disappeared into the trees. + + +As the dust settles, the weight of your actions sets in. You've just killed two intelligent creatures. Even if they're not quite human, they still talked. What if they had family? Kids? You had no way of knowing the lighter would kill them. You just thought you might give them a scare, send them running. But the way they treated that other creature... there's no way they were really worth sparing... right? + + +Speaking of which, you'd better make sure that other creature is alright...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The pain is the first thing you notice. It feels as though someone's poured an entire vat of hot coffee over your entire body. Somehow, you get the sense that you've been asleep a lot longer than normal. You open your eyes to find yourself laying in a patch of grass, staring up at a clear, starry sky, interrupted by the branches of nearby trees. You don't move for a moment. How did you get outside? You don't remember going to sleep out here... as a matter of fact, you don't remember going to sleep at all. Or anything else, as a matter of fact. + + +The pain is fading fast, so you sit up and take a look around, pulse racing. The shadowy forms of trees surround you, the sounds of the night bombarding your senses. It occurs to you that you're hyperventilating. Is this what it feels like to have a heart attack? No this is a panic attack of some kind. Instinctively, you find yourself focusing on a single blade of grass in the field. With shaking hands, you pluck it from the dirt and study it, taking note of its shape, the feel of it in your hand, the nearly indistinguishable pattern of little veins running through it. Mindfulness. That's supposed to help with Panic attacks. Somehow, you remember that. But you can't remember where you learned it. + + +Slowly but surely, your breathing normalizes. You wipe the snot from your nose and the tears from your eyes as your body stops convulsing. For the first time since you woke up, you notice the cool night breeze. You're going to be fine. If you just keep your wits, you'll find a way out of this eventually. You take a quick inventory of everything you can remember. Random bits of knowledge surface in your head, facts about whales, mathematical formulas, the steps to changing a tire. But no memories of the people, or events, or books that taught you those things. + + +As you contemplate these things, you notice a few items laying in the grass around you. Namely, a small backpack and an odd metal disk, with a glowing screen on one side. You pick up the disk first and examine it. "Insufficient power," flashes across its face over and over in red. Something about it tugs at something in your memory, but you can't quite put your finger on what. Confused, you slip it into your pocket and turn to the bag. You unzip it to find a lighter, a knife, a sleeping bag, a pillow, and... a whole mountain of Cheez-Its and Mountain Dew? Just what kind of person are you? Still, it's better than nothing, so you slip it over your shoulders. + + +As you try (and fail), to take your bearings from the waning crescent moon, (not that it really matters, it's not like you know where you came from), you become aware of a strange noise in the distance. You stop and listen. Is that yelling? Wait, yelling is a human noise, right? So, where there's yelling, there's humans. Before you can even finish processing that thought, your feet are carrying you towards the source of the noise. You didn't know you could run this fast on pavement, much less over the uneven turf of the forest, but then, maybe you're a famous football player or something and just don't remember it. + + +The yelling grows louder as you draw nearer. A dim light shines in the distance, growing brighter. You slow down a little, these shouts don't sound like happy ones. + + +"Stop struggling or it'll only hurt more!" a gravelly voice says. + + +"Help! Stop! Let me go!" An extremely high pitched voice this time. + + +You've slowed to a tip-toe now. Whatever this is, you're not sure you want to be a part of it. Still you creep closer until you can just make out the figures involved between the trees. They look small from here, no bigger than children, but then, it's a little hard to tell from this distance. It looks like they might be wearing some kind of cloaks, green ones, if your eyes don't deceive you. + + +"Gag her before she draws someone to us!" Says the gravel tongued shadow to two others holding down a third, "Get her in the bag and tie it tight. The last thing we need is another escape." + + +Your palms are soaked with sweat. You should do something, anything, to help, but whoever these people are, they certainly don't sound like the kind of folks you'd like to mess with... +> Watch from afar. Better to stay safe than risk your life for a stranger. +You stay where you are and listen. + + +"Please!" cries the high pitched voice, "I just wanna go home! Let me go home!" + + +"We're giving you a new home." Says the gruff voiced one (probably the leader), "A better home! Don't you want to help make your old home better?" + + +"No! I want my papa!" + + +"My word!" The leader explodes, "She's a child! How hard is it to get a child into a bag?" + + +The screams become muffled now, and a new voice says + + +"We're not incompetent, you shriveled prune! See? We've already got her in. If you'd use your rotten husk of a brain for one second you'd stop yelling and see that." + + +"Under the old order, a comment like that would get you executed." + + +"So what? We're out to put an end to the old order, not-" + + +"Would you shut up? You want someone to hear us? You're worse than the little girl!" + + +"All I'm saying is, you won't do anything about it. You know it's wrong, I know it's wrong, so stop making stupid hollow threats!" + + +The leader laughs, a cold, empty laugh. "I'll be the judge of what's right and what's wrong, thank you very much. Not everything about the old order has to go. Don't throw the slush out with the water, as they say. Now pick up that bag and start walking. We've taken too long already." + + +With that, the muffled screams of the child fade into the distance as the light grows further away. Soon, all you can hear is the pounding of your heart, returning slowly to normal. It's a good thing you didn't get tangled up in that mess. No telling what would've happened if they'd seen you. Still, the sounds of that girl screaming still ring in your ears. Something tells you they might linger still for a little while longer. + + +Soon as you're sure the danger's passed, you walk a little closer to the scene of the crime, or whatever it was you just saw. To your surprise, there's a path not too far from there. The kidnapers must've been waiting in the bushes or something, and jumped out to grab the girl as she passed. With no other options at hand, you start down the path in the opposite direction from the kidnapers. It's lined with stones, with a few oddly-shaped bricks set in the ground here and there, as if, a long time ago, it was paved. + + +The trees are thinning out now, and soon you can see the night sky in all it's glory. You come to the edge of a hill and stop. Down the slope in front of you, lights are visible. A village rests at the bottom of the hill, still sleeping in the light of the stars. What's more, from your vantage point you can just see the beginnings of the sunrise peeking up from behind the mountains in the distance. The path has given way to a rough set of stairs carved into the hillside. They are smaller than most stairs you've seen, like they were carved especially for children. Still, it's better than picking your way down the slope and probably slipping a few times along the way. + + +You reach the bottom of the hill in record time and find yourself still a mile or so away from the village. Looks like the path continues into it, so you keep following it. As you walk, you pass by a strange plant, just taller than you are. It grows on a thin, blue stalk, straight up, until it droops over at the top, opening into a strange, orange bulb. The bulb glows in the dawn, lighting the whole path beneath your feet. Just a few moments later, you pass by another on the opposite side of the path. The entire trail leading up to the village is lined with these plants, lighting the way like streetlights on an old city road. +> The village +It soon becomes apparent that you are closer to the village than you thought. Is it just you, or are those buildings smaller than they seemed from afar? You come to the edge of the village to find that the smallest of the houses are about your height. Everything is half the size it should be, from the road through town to the stones that pave it. What's more, everything is made of the strangest materials, the likes of which you've never seen. (At least, not that you can remember). The only thing you've seen that looks remotely like this is Paper-Mache, but this must be sturdier than that, otherwise these houses would've fallen down ages ago as soon as the wind decided to pick up. + + +As you draw nearer to the center of town, you begin to feel that unsettling feeling of being watched. It's been present for quite some time now, growing stronger as the sun continued to light up more of the sky. Are those eyes you see, poking out between the shuttered windows of the houses? Why is nobody out and about yet, it may be early, but even still- + + +"What in the name of the water-pit are you?" A voice from behind snaps you out of your thoughts. + + +You turn, knocking your elbow on the corner of the houses nearby. Grimacing from the pain, you see before you a strange creature, almost human, yet not quite. Its head comes up only to your waist, and it's skin has the same Paper-Mache quality as the walls of the buildings beside you. The ears are the strangest part, sticking straight up into the air. It's a wonder something so small can hold them up like that for so long. The creature holds something like a spear, made of wood, pointed straight at you. + + +"Do you speak, you big brute?" The creature asks, "What are you, why have you come here, waking us all up in the night?" + + +"The sun's out," you reply, "People get up when the sun is out, don't they?" + + +"Do you like getting up at the crack of dawn? Some of us sleep in and that's besides the point. What the heck are you, and why are you here?" + + +"What am I?" You ask, your irritation growing with each word this creature says, "What are you? What is this place? I've never seen anything like you." + + +Other creatures, like this one before you, peak their heads out from doorways and windows, drawn out by the commotion at hand. + + +"I am Merk, head of the watchmen of Arrorn." Says the creature, "This village and it's people are under my protection. If you have come to do harm, consider this my warning. State your purpose or leave this place, lest I am forced to raise my spear and drive you out myself!" + + +"I haven't done anything!" You protest, "Why are you threatening me? Don't I have... rights or something?" That thing may be small, but the stick it's holding still looks pretty sharp. + + +The creature pauses, lowering it's spear just a touch. "I don't know what you mean by 'rights,'" it says, "But you raise an important point. I apologize for threatening you, it's just that I've never seen anything quite like you in all my seventy-four years of life in this village." + + +"I'm a human... I think," You say, still feeling a little annoyed, "And in all my... well, I'm not sure how many years of existence, I've never seen anything quite like you either. I think." + + +"I am what is known as an Oalkwardner." Says the creature, (Merk, as he called himself), "As are all others like me. This village-" + + +A high pitched whistle cuts through the air, cutting Merk off mid sentence. He seems to jump a little when he hears it, his stance becoming more rigid, more alert. + + +"The alarm!" He says, raising his spear once more, "I'm sorry, but duty calls!" He leaps towards you and you flinch. Is he going to attack you after all? But no, he soars over your head and lands behind you, taking off as soon as his feet touch the ground. + + +"Wait!" You call. The idea of being left alone in this strange village terrifies you. Who knows? The next person you talk to might attack you for real. You run after Merk, ducking through the too narrow streets, nearly flattening a few unsuspecting Oalkwardners. Even with your longer legs, Merk is faster than you, slowly drawing farther and farther away. + + +"Please!" You cry once more, "I don't even know where I am!" + + +Merk slows a little and looks over his shoulder. "If you want to stay with me, then do so!" He calls back, "But I must warn you, I have work to do. I may not be of much use to you." + + +"That's... fine..." You pant, "Just... slow down... a little." + + +"We're almost there, human! I cannot slow my pace, there may not be much time!" + + +You can hardly begin to imagine what he means by that in your current state, (you're not going to be able to run much longer with this pain in your side), but he's clearly not slowing down. Maybe it's the fear of being left behind, but somehow you find the strength to keep up the pace. The road grows wider with each twist and turn, until it gives way to a dilapidated plaza with a strange tower in the middle. Atop it is what looks to be a horn of some kind, with an Oalkwardner blowing into it. This is where the high pitched noise came from earlier. + + +Most of the people milling about the square ignore the horn, as if this is some kind of daily occurrence. Merk slows at the base of the tower, stopping in front of an Oalkwardner in something resembling a dress, it's ears drooping. You catch up just in time to hear the ensuing conversation. + + +"Fila?" Merk asks, "Why have you sounded the alarm? What's wrong?" + + +"Its Pila," Says Fila, "She's dis-" the Oalkwardner notices you for the first time, "What in the world is that?" + + +Her ears stick straight in the air and she leaps backwards, trembling. Merk turns and sees you standing there. + + +"This is human. It's friendly, don't worry." He turns to you and says, "And this is Fila, my wife." + + +"Why is everyone so afraid of me?" You ask, "I haven't done anything wrong." + + +"I'm sorry... hue-mon." Her ears begin to droop once again, "I'm just worried, that's all. Our daughter," She gestures to Merk and herself, "is missing. She went to play with her friends yesterday evening. I meant to stay up waiting for her, but I was so tired that I just couldn't stay awake. And when I woke up, she still hadn't come back." + + +Merk's eyes grow wider, and he grips his spear tighter. "What do you mean, she hasn't come back." + + +"I mean, she isn't here, Merk! She might've disappeared like all those other-" + + +"No!," he says, "I'm sure she's fine. She probably just got lost. We'll find her." + + +A chill runs down your spine. You'd forgotten about the kidnapping you saw in the forest after Merk confronted you. You were too worried about staying alive to think about someone else's troubles. But now the memory returns in full force, the fear it brings creeping through every fiber of your being. + + +"I'm not so sure about that..." You say, voice trembling a little. + + +Merk turns to you. "What do you mean? Did you have something to do with it?" He picks up his spear, gripping it tight. + + +"No! But I think I might have seen what happened." And you go on to explain the strange events which you saw when you first awoke. When you finish, Merk covers his face with his hands. + + +"I've dealt with this sort of thing for years," he chokes, "But it's always been someone else's kid. Someone else's heartache..." He looks up at you. "This is the fourth kid to disappear in the last month. If these people that took... that took my daughter, took the others too..." He stops and covers his face again. + + +"Then," Fila says, "If we find her, we find them all. Hue-mon. Please, will you help us? Take us to where you saw her, tell us which way they went. Then, maybe, we can find her. Her, and everyone else." +> "Of course I'll help!" +Maybe it's bravery, or maybe it's the guilt of having done nothing to help the girl in the first place, but you don't hesitate to say yes. + + +"Thank you so much!" Merk says, "Come on, we'd better get going now. Normally I'd get a team together to help with the search, but since I have you, I think we'll just go as a twosome. The time it takes to round everyone up isn't worth it." + + +You leave the village and lead Merk back up the hill to where you saw the kidnapping. His ears twitch nervously as you walk, and he talks incessantly. + + +"I just don't know what I'll do if we don't get her back." he says at one point, "the thought of never seeing her again... hurts more than anything. Why couldn't it have been me? What do they want with children?" + + +You don't respond. There's just nothing to say. At this point you reach the staircase, and begin climbing up it. In the light of the day, you're beginning to notice something strange about the trees. It's been bugging you for a while now, come to think of it. From what you can draw from your broken memory, these trees aren't like any back... well, wherever you came from. The shapes of the leaves are different, so is the pattern of the bark. It's like the entire forest is something out of a fantasy world. + + +As you draw near to the scene of the kidnapping, you slow down. + + +"It happened just up there," you point, "They went up the path that way once they were finished." + + +"We've gotta make sure we don't miss anything." Merk says, "Thankfully, this path isn't as well traveled as it once was, or our search would be nigh impossible. Keep an eye on the edges of the trail, let me know if you see any sort of clues." + + +"What am I looking for anyway? If I see, say, a broken branch or something, how are we to know it wasn't broken by a deer or some other, innocent travelers?" + + +Merk sighs, "I don't know, human, but right now it's all we have." + + +For the next couple of hours, you walk the trail, scanning the ground for something, anything that might help you. But there's nothing. Not so much as a blade of grass is out of place, (if, indeed, blades of grass can be considered out of place in a forest). The sun is growing low in the sky now, soon it'll be too dark to search. Your feet ache and your stomach rumbles, your stash of Cheez-Its isn't enough to satisfy your hunger completely. + + +Then, you see something that is a little out of place. A few of the trees just off the path look as though they've had bites taken out of them by some big hungry monster. + + +"Merk?" you say, "Do you see that?" + + +Merk jumps a little at the sound of your voice. "What is it?" he asks, excited, "Did you find something?" + + +"I don't know," you say, pointing, "I'm not quite sure it's what we're looking for, but it's definitely something." + + +Merk takes one look at the markings on the trees and his eyes go wide. He reaches over his shoulder and draws his spear. + + +"What is it?" You ask, your muscles tensing up in fear, "What's wrong?" + + +"Those markings," Merk's voice trembles a little, "are from a beaver." + + +You stare at him for a moment. Then, a chuckle escapes you lips. + + +"What's so bad about a beaver?" You laugh, "Are you afraid one might drop a tree on you or something?" + + +"Beavers are no laughing matter," Merk snaps, "They're vicious killers! If you'd heard a quarter of what I had about them, you'd be scared too, I guarantee." + + +"Do you want to turn back?" + + +"Heck no! If I turn back, it means I don't get Pila back, and if I don't get Pila back..." he trails off, and is quiet for a moment. Then, he shakes his head. "It doesn't matter, we're not stopping. Beavers or no, we will keep going. I don't think I could live with myself if we didn't." + + +"Whatever you say," you shrug, "I'm not afraid of beavers, so I guess you'll just have to face your fear if we meet one." + + +"Let's try to make sure we don't meet one, alright?" + + +"Alright," you say, rolling your eyes. + + +You continue up the trail. As it continues to get darker, the two of you go slower and slower, as it's harder to verify that there are, indeed, no clues in a given area. The beaver markings are becoming more and more numerous the longer you walk, which does nothing to help Merk's nerves. It's not exactly great for yours either, if you're honest with yourself. You may not be afraid of beavers as you know them, but there's always that chance that "beaver" means something different in this place than what you know. + + +"Do you think we should stop for the night?" you ask, as the darkness grows too thick to properly see through, "So we don't miss anything in this darkness?" + + +Merk thinks for a moment, then sighs. "I guess you have a point. We'd best make camp here. Hold on for a moment, I have to go... erm, relieve myself." + + +He heads a little ways off the path, and you sit down on a rock to wait for him. Your feet need a rest, they've probably got blisters all over after all that hiking. + + +"Human!" Merk cries, "Come look at this!" + + +You groan and stand up. Guess your feet aren't getting that much of a rest after all. + + +"What were the kidnapers wearing?" Merk asks when you reach him. + + +"It was hard to tell from so far away," You say, trying to remember, "It looked like they were wearing some kind of robes." + + +"What color were they?" + + +"Green, I think, why do you ask?" + + +"Because I found this!" Merk gestures towards a little thorn bush to his left. Hanging from one of the branches is a small scrap of green fabric. "I bet they went off this way!" he says, "We should see if we can follow their trail." + + +"Can you do that in the dark?" + + +Merk goes quiet for a moment. "I... don't know." he admits, "Probably not as well as in daylight, we might lose the trail or something if we go now. But they could get further away if we wait. Oh, it's so much harder to think clearly about these things when it's your own daughter at stake... " + + +"We best wait till morning," You say, "We don't want to lose the trail in the dark and get ourselves lost. We wouldn't be much help then would we?" + + +Merk doesn't say anything for a moment. Then, he nods slowly. + + +"I guess it's the best we can do," he sighs, "It just hurts to sit here, doing nothing." + + +"I get it," You say, "But think of it this way: by waiting, we're maximizing our chances of finding her." + + +"Yeah, I know. Let's get set up, I'm tired. If we're going to get some sleep tonight, we'd better do it soon..." +> The next morning... +You sleep like a rock. It's been a very long day, that's for sure. You've hardly stopped since waking up in the forest last night. But of course, it doesn't last. You awake to Merk staring down at you, poking your side with his foot. + + +"Wake up, human," he says, "It's time to go." + + +You sit up, blinking back the sleep from your eyes. The sun is just beginning to rise, but by all accounts, it's still pretty dark outside. + + +"Shouldn't we wait a little longer?" You ask, "until it's lighter out?" + + +"By the time we pack up camp, the sun will have risen a little more." + + +You take one last longing look at your sleeping bag, then roll it up and start getting your stuff together. In a half hour's time, you're on the trail again, Merk leading the way with his tracking skills. + + +"What's the plan when we if we do find them?" You ask. + + +"We don't know what we're walking into, so we'll have to improvise." + + +"Oh..." + + +For a while, the two of you walk in silence, Merk stopping every ten feet or so to check for new clues. It seems people have traveled this way before, and relatively frequently. There is a faint trail, if you really look for it, where other Oalkwardners have gone before. + + +"These beaver markings are getting more and more frequent," Merk says after you've been on the trail an hour, "I think we're headed right into the heart of their territory. What on earth were they thinking, coming to a place like this?" + + +"Listen," you say, "I'll deal with any beavers that come our way. All I need to do is wave my hands in the air and make a loud noise." + + +"You're either a lot stronger than you seem, or an arrogant fool if you think that." + + +"It's a beaver! What harm can it do?" + + +Merk doesn't respond. Instead, he stops short, and you nearly trip over him. + + +"Why are we stopping?" you ask + + +Merk puts a finger to his lips and points down the path. You look and see something big and hairy laying just to the side of the trail. It's some sort of creature, about the size of a bear, and it isn't moving. + + +"It's a beaver," Merk whispers, "If you really know what you're doing, go deal with it!" + + +"That's no beaver," you whisper back, "I'm not sure what that is, but it's not a-" + + +"Shut up and take a look, will you?" + + +"Fine!" + + +Quietly as you can, you walk closer, crouching behind trees at every opportunity. But it never moves. You're not even sure it's breathing. Then, you notice the blood staining the ground around it. Whatever this creature is, it's dead. + + +"Merk, I think it's dead!" you say. + + +"Are you sure?" + + +You walk right up to the creature and take a closer look. It has a gaping hole in it's stomach, and multiple puncture wounds in various places. Looking at it up close, it occurs to you that this thing really does bear an uncanny resemblance to a beaver, right down to the teeth and tail. The only thing that's different is the size. + + +"Yeah," you call, "I'm pretty sure." Just to prove it, you give it a good kick in the side. + + +"My goodness," Merk says when he gets closer, "Never in all my days... Those look like spear wounds. And that big hole in it's stomach looks too clean to have come from some kind of other animal." + + +"Are you saying an Oalkwardner did this?" + + +"Possibly. And a powerful one at that. I certainly hope we never have to fight them, should we ever meet." + + +The two of you stare at the beaver corpse for a few minutes. Finally, Merk breaks the silence. + + +"We should keep going, the trail continues this way." + + +Unnerved, you follow him. Something about that corpse put you on edge. Every random snap of a twig has you checking over your shoulder, searching for potential threats. For another two hours, you walk in silence. Neither of you dares say a word, in case whatever killed that beaver is somewhere lurking nearby. The trees are growing thicker now, the beaver markings more numerous. Then, Merk stops again. + + +"Do you hear that?" he whispers + + +You stop and listen. + + +"What is it?" you ask, not hearing anything, + + +"Shhh!" + + +For a few minutes, you're completely still. Then, you hear it, ever so faintly in the distance. The sound of voices. + + +"Let's go," says Merk, and takes off towards them on silent feet. + + +As quietly as you can, you follow behind him. The voices grow louder as you get closer, and soon you can make out snippets of conversation. + + +"...Hold her still..." + + +"...better be quick..." + + +"...somebody help!" + + +The last voice is louder than the others, more clear. Merk stand up straighter when he hears it. + + +"That's my daughter," he says in a low voice, "If they hurt her, I swear I'll..." + + +He doesn't finish the sentence, but instead speeds up even more. You follow as closely behind as you can, worried that he might do something stupid. Suddenly, the trees give way to a clearing, where a large group of Oalkwardners in green cloaks gather around something at the very center. + + +"It's almost finished!" one of them says, "I'm applying the branch now, everyone back off!" + + +The group spreads out enough that you can just see what they were gathering around. A small Oalkwardner is strapped to the ground, drenched in some kind of green substance. + + +"Please stop!" She cries, struggling against her bindings, "I don't like this, let me go!" + + +The cloaked Oalkwardner ignores her and tosses something on top of her struggling form, then takes a few steps backwards as fast as he can. The girl, Pila, begins to scream, and the earth begins to quake. + + +"NO!" Merk cries, and runs into the clearing before you can do anything to stop him. (How he manages to do so without tripping is beyond you). All the cloaked Oalkwardners turn and look at him in shock as he runs towards them. They draw their spears and get ready to fight, but instead of charging them, he leaps into the air, sailing over their heads, and lands right next to Pila. + + +But while all this is happening, Pila's skin begins to give off a faint blue glow, growing brighter every second. By the time Merk reaches her side, she's too bright to look at. + + +As Merk reaches out to touch her, a bolt of lightning flashes up from the ground, and the sound of thunder resonates throughout the forest. A split second later and the light is gone. A moment later, the earth stops it's quaking. You turn and look at the place where Pila once was, and gasp. All that's left of Merk are a few scraps of Paper-Mache skin and a pile of ashes. As for Pila... what on earth is that? A strange lump of wood lays in the middle of the clearing. It takes you a few seconds to realize that it's an exact copy of Pila. What the heck did they do to her anyway? + + +Presently, about half the Oalkwardners head over towards a contraption over on the other side of the clearing, (you can't quite make it out from here), while the rest mill about, chatting nervously among themselves about what Merk did. If you're going to try anything, now might be the time to do it. You might be able to save Pila and Merk's remains, at least... +> Attempt to steal the remains of the fallen Oalkwardners +You may not get this chance again, so you'd better make the most of it. You run into the clearing as fast as you can. It only takes a moment for one of them to notice you and sound the alarm. By the time you've reached Pila's side and scooped her up in your arms, every last one of them are charging towards you, spears drawn. Without thinking, you run back the way you came, leaving Merk's remains behind. (Not that there was much left to collect to begin with). + + +Branches scrape your face as you run, but you don't stop. The Oalkwardners aren't slowing down, so neither can you. No telling what'll happen if they catch you. It's a good thing you've got adrenaline, because otherwise the blisters on your feet alone would've stopped you in your tracks by now. But it doesn't really matter. They're gaining on you too quickly to escape. Suddenly, the wooden lump in your arms shifts, and you're so startled, you drop it and proceed to trip over it, falling face first into the dirt. As you're getting back to your feet, you see out of the corner of your eye, the wooden Pila getting to its feet. Slowly, it turns towards you, staring at you with glowing yellow eyes. Then, it leaps on top of you, and digs its claws into your chest. You're too surprised to do anything about it. By the time you've recovered from the shock, you're too delirious from the pain to care. The last thing you see as the world fades away is the Oalkwardners running away in terror as the creature feasts on your flesh...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sleep like a rock. It's been a very long day, that's for sure. You've hardly stopped since waking up in the forest last night. But of course, it doesn't last. You awake to Merk staring down at you, poking your side with his foot. + + +"Wake up, human," he says, "It's time to go." + + +You sit up, blinking back the sleep from your eyes. The sun is just beginning to rise, but by all accounts, it's still pretty dark outside. + + +"Shouldn't we wait a little longer?" You ask, "until it's lighter out?" + + +"By the time we pack up camp, the sun will have risen a little more." + + +You take one last longing look at your sleeping bag, then roll it up and start getting your stuff together. In a half hour's time, you're on the trail again, Merk leading the way with his tracking skills. + + +"What's the plan when we if we do find them?" You ask. + + +"We don't know what we're walking into, so we'll have to improvise." + + +"Oh..." + + +For a while, the two of you walk in silence, Merk stopping every ten feet or so to check for new clues. It seems people have traveled this way before, and relatively frequently. There is a faint trail, if you really look for it, where other Oalkwardners have gone before. + + +"These beaver markings are getting more and more frequent," Merk says after you've been on the trail an hour, "I think we're headed right into the heart of their territory. What on earth were they thinking, coming to a place like this?" + + +"Listen," you say, "I'll deal with any beavers that come our way. All I need to do is wave my hands in the air and make a loud noise." + + +"You're either a lot stronger than you seem, or an arrogant fool if you think that." + + +"It's a beaver! What harm can it do?" + + +Merk doesn't respond. Instead, he stops short, and you nearly trip over him. + + +"Why are we stopping?" you ask + + +Merk puts a finger to his lips and points down the path. You look and see something big and hairy laying just to the side of the trail. It's some sort of creature, about the size of a bear, and it isn't moving. + + +"It's a beaver," Merk whispers, "If you really know what you're doing, go deal with it!" + + +"That's no beaver," you whisper back, "I'm not sure what that is, but it's not a-" + + +"Shut up and take a look, will you?" + + +"Fine!" + + +Quietly as you can, you walk closer, crouching behind trees at every opportunity. But it never moves. You're not even sure it's breathing. Then, you notice the blood staining the ground around it. Whatever this creature is, it's dead. + + +"Merk, I think it's dead!" you say. + + +"Are you sure?" + + +You walk right up to the creature and take a closer look. It has a gaping hole in it's stomach, and multiple puncture wounds in various places. Looking at it up close, it occurs to you that this thing really does bear an uncanny resemblance to a beaver, right down to the teeth and tail. The only thing that's different is the size. + + +"Yeah," you call, "I'm pretty sure." Just to prove it, you give it a good kick in the side. + + +"My goodness," Merk says when he gets closer, "Never in all my days... Those look like spear wounds. And that big hole in it's stomach looks too clean to have come from some kind of other animal." + + +"Are you saying an Oalkwardner did this?" + + +"Possibly. And a powerful one at that. I certainly hope we never have to fight them, should we ever meet." + + +The two of you stare at the beaver corpse for a few minutes. Finally, Merk breaks the silence. + + +"We should keep going, the trail continues this way." + + +Unnerved, you follow him. Something about that corpse put you on edge. Every random snap of a twig has you checking over your shoulder, searching for potential threats. For another two hours, you walk in silence. Neither of you dares say a word, in case whatever killed that beaver is somewhere lurking nearby. The trees are growing thicker now, the beaver markings more numerous. Then, Merk stops again. + + +"Do you hear that?" he whispers + + +You stop and listen. + + +"What is it?" you ask, not hearing anything, + + +"Shhh!" + + +For a few minutes, you're completely still. Then, you hear it, ever so faintly in the distance. The sound of voices. + + +"Let's go," says Merk, and takes off towards them on silent feet. + + +As quietly as you can, you follow behind him. The voices grow louder as you get closer, and soon you can make out snippets of conversation. + + +"...Hold her still..." + + +"...better be quick..." + + +"...somebody help!" + + +The last voice is louder than the others, more clear. Merk stand up straighter when he hears it. + + +"That's my daughter," he says in a low voice, "If they hurt her, I swear I'll..." + + +He doesn't finish the sentence, but instead speeds up even more. You follow as closely behind as you can, worried that he might do something stupid. Suddenly, the trees give way to a clearing, where a large group of Oalkwardners in green cloaks gather around something at the very center. + + +"It's almost finished!" one of them says, "I'm applying the branch now, everyone back off!" + + +The group spreads out enough that you can just see what they were gathering around. A small Oalkwardner is strapped to the ground, drenched in some kind of green substance. + + +"Please stop!" She cries, struggling against her bindings, "I don't like this, let me go!" + + +The cloaked Oalkwardner ignores her and tosses something on top of her struggling form, then takes a few steps backwards as fast as he can. The girl, Pila, begins to scream, and the earth begins to quake. + + +"NO!" Merk cries, and runs into the clearing before you can do anything to stop him. (How he manages to do so without tripping is beyond you). All the cloaked Oalkwardners turn and look at him in shock as he runs towards them. They draw their spears and get ready to fight, but instead of charging them, he leaps into the air, sailing over their heads, and lands right next to Pila. + + +But while all this is happening, Pila's skin begins to give off a faint blue glow, growing brighter every second. By the time Merk reaches her side, she's too bright to look at. + + +As Merk reaches out to touch her, a bolt of lightning flashes up from the ground, and the sound of thunder resonates throughout the forest. A split second later and the light is gone. A moment later, the earth stops it's quaking. You turn and look at the place where Pila once was, and gasp. All that's left of Merk are a few scraps of Paper-Mache skin and a pile of ashes. As for Pila... what on earth is that? A strange lump of wood lays in the middle of the clearing. It takes you a few seconds to realize that it's an exact copy of Pila. What the heck did they do to her anyway? + + +Presently, about half the Oalkwardners head over towards a contraption over on the other side of the clearing, (you can't quite make it out from here), while the rest mill about, chatting nervously among themselves about what Merk did. If you're going to try anything, now might be the time to do it. You might be able to save Pila and Merk's remains, at least... +> Wait and follow them. +You stay where you are and watch as they pick up the contraption and carry it to Pila's remains. That's when you realize, it's a cage. They set it down right beside her and put her remains inside it. Then they close it up and lock it tight. Four Oalkwardners pick it up by the corners and lead the way into the forest. You follow at a distance, careful not to be seen. The brush is thicker than ever here, branches scratch your face and you nearly trip several times. Luckily, you manage to keep your footing in the end. + + +As you walk, you begin to notice something strange about the wooden remains of Pila in the cage. Every once in a while, they shift a little, as if of their own accord. Is it just your imagination, or did one of her arms just twitch? The Oalkwardners glance up at it every time this happens, and you notice a few of them gripping their spears, getting ready to draw them in case... well, you're not sure what. + + +All of a sudden, the whole procession stops. Something's going on at the very front of the group, but you can't quite make it out from this distance. Then, you see it. A wooden hatch opens up in front of them, about four times their size, and they begin to descend down it, carrying the cage somewhat awkwardly between them. Then, the rest of them follow. Soon as the last one descends, the hatch falls closed. You rush over to it and find that it's camouflaged to look like part of the landscape, though, if you really look hard enough, you can just see the outline of it in the grass. + + +You wait about five minutes before you try to open it. (Just to make sure no one's lingering by the door when you come in). A good tug on the handle, (cleverly disguised as a tree root), confirms that, as expected, it's locked. As you stand there, trying to figure out a way to get inside, you hear the muffled sound of footsteps coming up, getting nearer and nearer to the surface. Quick as you can, you back away and duck behind a bush, just before the hatch comes open. A single Oalkwardner climbs out, leaving the door open behind him. He grumbles something about "Bathrooms" and "Relieving himself," and heads off a little ways into the woods. + + +Now's your chance! Thanks to that Oalkwardners carelessness, the door is wide open in front of you. You slip inside as quickly as you can, pulling the door shut behind you. It clicks when it closes, probably locking itself automatically. Good, now that Oalkwardner won't come in from behind and surprise you. + + +You find yourself at the top of a spiral staircase, which descends about twenty feet before stopping. When you reach the bottom, you find yourself in a dirt tunnel with three paths branching off from it. +> The tunnels +You are at the bottom of a spiral staircase, leading up to the surface. Three, hard packed dirt tunnels branch off from here, each with a sign that tells where it leads. A notice board full of announcements hangs on one wall. You glance over it and notice one in particular reminding the whole facility of a mandatory meeting at this very time. This is perfect! You'll be able to explore the whole place without being caught! + + +The first tunnel is marked "auditorium," the second says "Lab," and the third, "Containment." +> Go down the path labeled "auditorium" +You slip down the hallway, trying to be as quiet as you can. This must be the way to their meeting place. It's probably where everyone is right now. Sure enough, you begin to hear the faint sound of voices echoing down the tunnel, growing louder as you go further. Soon, you come to a round wooden door, blocking the way. From behind it, you can hear the voices, or rather, one voice, of someone giving a speech on the other side. You press your ear to the door and listen... + + +"As you well know," the speaker says, "The order of the broken chalice has spent years upon years preparing to liberate this land in which we all live, by slaying the tyrant in our midst!" The crowd cheers at this, sounds like only a few hundred Oalkwardners. Are they really planning some kind of uprising with such a small amount of people? As if in answer to your question, the speaker continues, "Though we are few in number, the king cannot begin to anticipate our secret weapon: The Oalkfriers! Thanks to the dedication of our resident alchemists, we have perfected the art of creating fearsome beasts, made of the strongest substance known to our kind: the wood of a simple oak tree!" + + +"The day of the uprising draws nearer and nearer. Just a few more Oalkfriers and we will be ready to estate our glorious new order. Allow me to go over the plan once again. We begin by releasing our Oalkfriers into many of the current order's key locations. This includes their military bases, ambassador homes, and the palace itself. They will wreak havoc, destroying everyone in their path. Once they have done their job, we will move in and neutralize them, leaving no-one to prevent us from taking the throne ourselves!" The crowd cheers once again. + + +You've heard enough. Whatever this is, it can't be good. You've got to do something about it, or else there's no telling what might happen! +> Charge into the auditorium and take out as many as you can! +There's nothing else for it. You fling open the door and rush into the room, screaming. The entire auditorium turns to look at you just as you reach the Oalkwardners nearest to the door. Before they can react, you start kicking as many as you can. They go flying, your foot leaving dents wherever it lands. Compared to these papery creatures, you're like some kind of superhero, with ten times the strength of any of them. + + +Unfortunately for you, however, there are about five hundred of them, and they're not about to let you plow through all of them without a good fight. Many draw their spears, and leap at you all at once. You try your best to fight them off, but there's just too many! They latch onto you wherever they can, driving their spears into your arms, your legs, your stomach. The pain is overwhelming. Those spears may be small, but they still hurt pretty bad. You fall to the ground as the world fades away around you. Who knew you'd be killed by a pack of midgets?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are at the bottom of a spiral staircase, leading up to the surface. Three, hard packed dirt tunnels branch off from here, each with a sign that tells where it leads. A notice board full of announcements hangs on one wall. You glance over it and notice one in particular reminding the whole facility of a mandatory meeting at this very time. This is perfect! You'll be able to explore the whole place without being caught! + + +The first tunnel is marked "auditorium," the second says "Lab," and the third, "Containment." +> Go down the path labeled "lab" +You head down the tunnel, trying your best to tiptoe. The earthy ground helps muffle your footfalls, thank goodness, but it doesn't matter. There's no one in the tunnel. When you reach the end, you find yourself in a room made of wood. Shelves line the walls, filled to the brim, not only with books, but also with other curiosities. Jars of frogs, and creatures stranger still, all of them dead. There are little models, carved from wood, bits of untempered metal and glass, among other things. + + +A wooden cauldron sits in the center of the room, with a strange liquid sitting in it, still as glass. A table stands off to the side, holding numerous cups and bowls of different liquids and powders, none of which you recognize. A neat stack of papers sits on one end of the table, pinned down by a particularly large bowl of rocks. + + +Everything here is perfectly neat and organized. Nothing is so much as an inch out of place, even the tiniest grains of powder in the bowls seem to have a strange, indescribable order to them. +> Fill a bottle of the cauldron liquid +You take off your backpack and rifle through it, until you find just what you need: an empty plastic bottle. (You finished off the mountain dew the first day you got here). Quickly, you dip the bottle into the cauldron and fill it up, screwing the cap back on once you're done. Let's just see what you can accomplish with that...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You head down the tunnel, trying your best to tiptoe. The earthy ground helps muffle your footfalls, thank goodness, but it doesn't matter. There's no one in the tunnel. When you reach the end, you find yourself in a room made of wood. Shelves line the walls, filled to the brim, not only with books, but also with other curiosities. Jars of frogs, and creatures stranger still, all of them dead. There are little models, carved from wood, bits of untempered metal and glass, among other things. + + +A wooden cauldron sits in the center of the room, with a strange liquid sitting in it, still as glass. A table stands off to the side, holding numerous cups and bowls of different liquids and powders, none of which you recognize. A neat stack of papers sits on one end of the table, pinned down by a particularly large bowl of rocks. + + +Everything here is perfectly neat and organized. Nothing is so much as an inch out of place, even the tiniest grains of powder in the bowls seem to have a strange, indescribable order to them. +> Check the notes +You take the bowl of rocks off of the stack of papers and glance at the paper on top. + + +"To destroy and Oalkfrier," the title reads. Below are a few paragraphs in immaculate handwriting. + + +"Oalkfriers are essential to the master plan of the Order of the Broken Chalice, however, they must be neutralized once they've served their purpose, lest they overrun the kingdom. I have created a poison of sorts, powerful enough to destroy these creatures within seconds. For now, it sits in the cauldron in my lab, waiting to be used. It is nearly perfect, as much so as I can hope to make it. Just in case something is to happen to me before the plan is carried out, (though I highly doubt it), I will relay the instructions for its use below" + + +"The poison is inactive until acted upon by a catalyst of some sort. This is for the safety of those using it. To activate, place a generous helping of Sodium Chloride (table salt), into it. (I have a bowl full of it on my desk in the lab). Then, throw it on the Oalkfrier as fast as you can. Get as far away as you can, as even the fumes from this deadly cocktail are enough to kill a whole room full of Oalkwardners. (You should be alright so long as you're outside, but I still wouldn't chance it." + + +You look up from the paper. The bowl of salt is just to the left of the stack of notes. On a whim, you pick it up to take it with you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are at the bottom of a spiral staircase, leading up to the surface. Three, hard packed dirt tunnels branch off from here, each with a sign that tells where it leads. A notice board full of announcements hangs on one wall. You glance over it and notice one in particular reminding the whole facility of a mandatory meeting at this very time. This is perfect! You'll be able to explore the whole place without being caught! + + +The first tunnel is marked "auditorium," the second says "Lab," and the third, "Containment." +> Go down the path labeled "containment" +You sneak down the tunnel, checking around every corner just in case someone hasn't made it to the meeting yet. It wouldn't do to get caught now, there's no telling how many Oalkwardners are holed up down here. Luckily, the tunnel isn't that long, and after a few twists and turns, you find yourself in a large, dimly lit room, full what looks to be some kind of boxes + + +It takes a moment for your eyes to adjust, but when you do, you realize that these aren't boxes at all, but cages, just like the one they used to carry Pila's remains through the forest. What's more, every last one of them has a wooden Oalkwardner inside them, exactly like Pila after the lightning struck her. Gripped with a deadly cocktail of curiosity and fear, you approach the cage nearest to you and peer inside for a better look. It's a perfect likeness of an Oalkwardner child, right down to the Paper-Mache quality of it's skin. The only thing that's missing are the ears, which look like they've been broken off. + + +"What on earth have they done to you?" You whisper to yourself. + + +Aroused by the sound of your voice, the eyes of the wooden Oalkwardner snap open. They give off a harsh, yellow glow, lighting up the dim room just a little. You stare at the creature, stunned, and it stares back. Then, without warning, it leaps at the bars of the cage, snarling. You leap backwards in the nick of time as one of its arms reaches between the bars and takes a grab at you. + + +The noise wakes the other creatures and before you know it, all of them are attacking their bars, trying to get at you. Fear overtakes you, and you take off running back down the way you came. What on earth was that anyway? What do they want with all these monsters? How are they creating them? All these questions race through your mind, unanswered, as you reach the crossroads once again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It soon becomes apparent that you are closer to the village than you thought. Is it just you, or are those buildings smaller than they seemed from afar? You come to the edge of the village to find that the smallest of the houses are about your height. Everything is half the size it should be, from the road through town to the stones that pave it. What's more, everything is made of the strangest materials, the likes of which you've never seen. (At least, not that you can remember). The only thing you've seen that looks remotely like this is Paper-Mache, but this must be sturdier than that, otherwise these houses would've fallen down ages ago as soon as the wind decided to pick up. + + +As you draw nearer to the center of town, you begin to feel that unsettling feeling of being watched. It's been present for quite some time now, growing stronger as the sun continued to light up more of the sky. Are those eyes you see, poking out between the shuttered windows of the houses? Why is nobody out and about yet, it may be early, but even still- + + +"What in the name of the water-pit are you?" A voice from behind snaps you out of your thoughts. + + +You turn, knocking your elbow on the corner of the houses nearby. Grimacing from the pain, you see before you a strange creature, almost human, yet not quite. Its head comes up only to your waist, and it's skin has the same Paper-Mache quality as the walls of the buildings beside you. The ears are the strangest part, sticking straight up into the air. It's a wonder something so small can hold them up like that for so long. The creature holds something like a spear, made of wood, pointed straight at you. + + +"Do you speak, you big brute?" The creature asks, "What are you, why have you come here, waking us all up in the night?" + + +"The sun's out," you reply, "People get up when the sun is out, don't they?" + + +"Do you like getting up at the crack of dawn? Some of us sleep in and that's besides the point. What the heck are you, and why are you here?" + + +"What am I?" You ask, your irritation growing with each word this creature says, "What are you? What is this place? I've never seen anything like you." + + +Other creatures, like this one before you, peak their heads out from doorways and windows, drawn out by the commotion at hand. + + +"I am Merk, head of the watchmen of Arrorn." Says the creature, "This village and it's people are under my protection. If you have come to do harm, consider this my warning. State your purpose or leave this place, lest I am forced to raise my spear and drive you out myself!" + + +"I haven't done anything!" You protest, "Why are you threatening me? Don't I have... rights or something?" That thing may be small, but the stick it's holding still looks pretty sharp. + + +The creature pauses, lowering it's spear just a touch. "I don't know what you mean by 'rights,'" it says, "But you raise an important point. I apologize for threatening you, it's just that I've never seen anything quite like you in all my seventy-four years of life in this village." + + +"I'm a human... I think," You say, still feeling a little annoyed, "And in all my... well, I'm not sure how many years of existence, I've never seen anything quite like you either. I think." + + +"I am what is known as an Oalkwardner." Says the creature, (Merk, as he called himself), "As are all others like me. This village-" + + +A high pitched whistle cuts through the air, cutting Merk off mid sentence. He seems to jump a little when he hears it, his stance becoming more rigid, more alert. + + +"The alarm!" He says, raising his spear once more, "I'm sorry, but duty calls!" He leaps towards you and you flinch. Is he going to attack you after all? But no, he soars over your head and lands behind you, taking off as soon as his feet touch the ground. + + +"Wait!" You call. The idea of being left alone in this strange village terrifies you. Who knows? The next person you talk to might attack you for real. You run after Merk, ducking through the too narrow streets, nearly flattening a few unsuspecting Oalkwardners. Even with your longer legs, Merk is faster than you, slowly drawing farther and farther away. + + +"Please!" You cry once more, "I don't even know where I am!" + + +Merk slows a little and looks over his shoulder. "If you want to stay with me, then do so!" He calls back, "But I must warn you, I have work to do. I may not be of much use to you." + + +"That's... fine..." You pant, "Just... slow down... a little." + + +"We're almost there, human! I cannot slow my pace, there may not be much time!" + + +You can hardly begin to imagine what he means by that in your current state, (you're not going to be able to run much longer with this pain in your side), but he's clearly not slowing down. Maybe it's the fear of being left behind, but somehow you find the strength to keep up the pace. The road grows wider with each twist and turn, until it gives way to a dilapidated plaza with a strange tower in the middle. Atop it is what looks to be a horn of some kind, with an Oalkwardner blowing into it. This is where the high pitched noise came from earlier. + + +Most of the people milling about the square ignore the horn, as if this is some kind of daily occurrence. Merk slows at the base of the tower, stopping in front of an Oalkwardner in something resembling a dress, it's ears drooping. You catch up just in time to hear the ensuing conversation. + + +"Fila?" Merk asks, "Why have you sounded the alarm? What's wrong?" + + +"Its Pila," Says Fila, "She's dis-" the Oalkwardner notices you for the first time, "What in the world is that?" + + +Her ears stick straight in the air and she leaps backwards, trembling. Merk turns and sees you standing there. + + +"This is human. It's friendly, don't worry." He turns to you and says, "And this is Fila, my wife." + + +"Why is everyone so afraid of me?" You ask, "I haven't done anything wrong." + + +"I'm sorry... hue-mon." Her ears begin to droop once again, "I'm just worried, that's all. Our daughter," She gestures to Merk and herself, "is missing. She went to play with her friends yesterday evening. I meant to stay up waiting for her, but I was so tired that I just couldn't stay awake. And when I woke up, she still hadn't come back." + + +Merk's eyes grow wider, and he grips his spear tighter. "What do you mean, she hasn't come back." + + +"I mean, she isn't here, Merk! She might've disappeared like all those other-" + + +"No!," he says, "I'm sure she's fine. She probably just got lost. We'll find her." + + +A chill runs down your spine. You'd forgotten about the kidnapping you saw in the forest after Merk confronted you. You were too worried about staying alive to think about someone else's troubles. But now the memory returns in full force, the fear it brings creeping through every fiber of your being. + + +"I'm not so sure about that..." You say, voice trembling a little. + + +Merk turns to you. "What do you mean? Did you have something to do with it?" He picks up his spear, gripping it tight. + + +"No! But I think I might have seen what happened." And you go on to explain the strange events which you saw when you first awoke. When you finish, Merk covers his face with his hands. + + +"I've dealt with this sort of thing for years," he chokes, "But it's always been someone else's kid. Someone else's heartache..." He looks up at you. "This is the fourth kid to disappear in the last month. If these people that took... that took my daughter, took the others too..." He stops and covers his face again. + + +"Then," Fila says, "If we find her, we find them all. Hue-mon. Please, will you help us? Take us to where you saw her, tell us which way they went. Then, maybe, we can find her. Her, and everyone else." +> "Naw, I'm good." +"I'm sorry." You say, "I'm not sure where, or even who I am. I don't think I'm up to this sort of mission." + + +Fila stares at the dirt, clearly disappointed. + + +"Could you at least tell us where you saw them last?" Merk asks + + +"I guess it couldn't hurt," you say. You explain how you came down the path from the top of the hill, and how you went in the exact opposite direction as them. "Just keep going down the path and, I don't know, get some kind of tracker-person to pick up their trail. Am I saying that right?" + + +"I suppose that helps," Merk murmurs, "Thank you human. I hope that the knowledge you have granted me is a fair substitute for your presence on this journey. Come on Fila, let's go round up a search party." + + +You watch as they walk back into town, leaving you alone in the square. All the things you felt after witnessing the kidnapping resurface, guilt, helplessness, the whole package. For a moment you sit there, feeling sorry for yourself. Then you notice the Oalkwardners looking your way, suspicion in their eyes. Maybe you'd better find somewhere else to stay, you're not quite sure you're welcome here. It wouldn't do to have another incident like you did with Merk. + + +So, you head out of the village the same way you came in. Luckily, the most threatening thing you encounter on your way out are a few nervous glances as the rest of the village wakes up. Soon, you've left the buildings behind and are back on the path through the forest. After you've gone a ways, you turn off the path and head out into the field surrounding the village. Once you're far enough from the path that you're not likely to run into any unfriendly villagers, you toss your bag onto the ground and pull out your sleeping bag and pillow and spread them out on the ground. Not that you need to go to bed yet, but just to give yourself something to do, if only for a few minutes. Guess this'll serve as a camp for the time being. + + +For a while you stare off into the distance, thinking of nothing in particular. Your mind wanders, replaying the events of the day, contemplating your memory loss, trying to tease something from the thick fog that seems to engulf your thoughts every time you try to remember anything before you awoke in the forest. + + +After a while, a line of figures appear in the distance, coming from the village, following the trail into the woods. You can just make out Merk and a few others, all carrying bags slung over their shoulders and spears in their hands. They don't notice you watching them, and carry on into the forest, following the information you gave them. Hopefully they find what they're looking for. + + +The rest of the day is uneventful at best. You busy yourself by building a fire, even though it's far too hot to need one, and exploring around your campsite. It crosses your mind that maybe you should head back into the village and introduce yourself, show them that you're nothing to fear. You go back and forth as to whether or not you should, but eventually sheer boredom convinces you to be brave and face the Oalkwardners. So you stamp out the fire best you can and start towards the path into the village. You've almost reached it when a lone Oalkwardner comes dashing out of the forest and trips, falling right on its face + + +"Are you alright?" You ask, rushing to the creature's side. + + +"They've been taken!" It gasps, "Merk and the others... I was the only one... to escape. Man that hurts..." It rolls onto its side, revealing a gaping hole, oozing a clear substance. + + +"What happened to you?" Your heart pounds that the sight of the... well, you think it's blood. "I... I think you need a doctor or something." + + +The creature doesn't respond. It just lays there, taking in shallow breaths, coughing every once in a while. You don't think, you just act, scooping up the body and taking off running towards the village. It's lighter than you'd expect, but maybe that's just adrenaline. + + +"Help!" You shout as you run through the village streets, "A doctor! She need a doctor!" The Oalkwardners look at you terrified. + + +"A monster!" One of them cries, seeing the creature in your arms. + + +"No!" you shout, "Don't those ears of yours work? I'm trying to save-" + + +"Run it'll kill us all!" + + +The Oalkwardners scatter in all directions, screaming. But there's no time to worry about them, you keep going, still calling for a doctor. A minute of this and the alarm sounds once more, cutting through the air. Still you search, frantically, for someone to help you. Then, you round a corner and come face to face with a wall of spears. The Watchmen of Arrorn have come to stop you, thinking you're a monster. + + +Before they can attack, you kneel and lay the Oalkwardner in your arms at their feet. + + +"I didn't do this." You say, "You have to help her, she's going to die!" + + +"Why should we believe you, monster?" One of the watchmen asks, "For all we know, you're responsible for all the disappearances." + + +"Why would I come here if I was the one who did this?" You ask, "What, do you think I'm stupid?" + + +"I don't know," the watchman says, "I don't make a habit of dealing with monsters." + + +"Enough of this!" A voice from behind the line of Watchmen startles everyone. "Clear a path, you idiots! This is no monster, but an acquaintance of Merk! He spoke to this creature just this morning and determined it was no threat!" The Watchmen part to reveal an especially wrinkly Oalkwardner. + + +"I found her on the path!" you say, "She's from the search party that went out after Merk's kid, but I think something went wrong!" + + +The wrinkly Oalkwardner takes one look at the wounded creature at your feet and gasps. "Never, in all my years as an elder... I can treat her, but we must get to my office quickly. Come on, I need you to carry her, it'll be quicker that way!" + + +You scoop her up and follow without a word. The elder's office is on the edge of the town square, (Which, thank goodness, is pretty close). It's bigger than some of the other buildings in the town, so you can just squeeze inside. + + +"Set her down here!" he says, sweeping the contents off a table in the middle of the room in one motion. You obey, and the elder gets to work without another word, it's as if he's forgotten you're even there. For a while you stand there awkwardly, watching as the Elder stitches up the wound. What if he needs you for something? He probably won't but even still, you'd better stay put. + + +Surprisingly, the operation takes only a half hour. After the Elder finishes bandaging the wound, he looks up at you. + + +"Thank you, human." He says, "We are in your debt. You may leave if you wish, but-" + + +The injured Oalkwardner moans on the table, cutting him off. "They're gone... Dead, all of them." Her eyes are open, and they're staring straight at the elder. + + +"What happened?" You demand, perhaps a little too swiftly. + + +"Don't pressure her, she just woke up," The elder says. + + +"No, I'm okay," she says, wincing, "But they're not." + + +"If you feel you have the energy to talk, please go on," The elder says, "I would like to know more about this myself." + + +"We were tracking... the kidnapers." She says, "But... they found us. A whole hoard of them. There was some kind of talk of a base... said they were gonna... overthrow the king... but no time... to pay attention..." Her ears droop, "And... they killed... I was... only one..." Her eyes roll back in her head and she passes out. + + +"My word!" The elder says, rushing to her side and taking her right ear in his hand, "She'll be alright once she gets some rest, but you should probably head outside for now. We must make preparations for a funeral for those who were lost. Do you have anywhere to go?" + + +"I set up camp just outside the village," you say, "I'll be alright, just tend to her." +> The funeral +After word gets around about how you helped save that Oalkwardner girl, the villagers seem to trust you enough to allow you to roam the city without sounding any alarms. Over the next few days, you help with preparations for the funeral, in part because there's nothing better to do, but also because you feel a little bad about not helping Merk with his search. Who knows? Maybe you would've been the difference between his life and death. + + +When the day of the funeral rolls around, the entire town gathers in the square. It's the most extravagant display you've ever seen in your short time at the village, with tons of food for all and more flowers than you've ever seen in one place before. It must've cost a fortune in... whatever these guys use as currency. Merk must've done quite a lot to help the community, because there sure are a lot of drooping ears. (Which, you've learned, is the Oalkwardner's equivalent to crying). + + +You stand at the edge of the crowd, still not quite feeling like a part of the community, as the Elder gives a speech. + + +"We are gathered here today to commemorate the life of Merk, Gertra, and Silia, three of the greatest-" + + +A pounding in the distance interrupts the speech. The whole crowd turns towards the source of the noise just in time to see a whole procession of Oalkwardners dressed in the brightest reds and yellows, all riding creatures like ponies, but with little spines running down their back instead of manes. They beat on little drums, all in sync. + + +The Oalkwardner at the front of the pack raises her arm and raises her voice. + + +"Presenting, the great Yelgar, Grand Protector of Realgna and the surrounding country!" + + +The Drummers beat their drums faster and faster now, parting to allow a carriage to pass through, drawn by three lizard-like creatures, the size of bulls. The crowd parts for the carriage, and it stops right in front of the stage. + + +The door on the side of the vessel opens, and out hops a rather tall Oalkwardner wearing a red cape and strange, red bracelets spiraling around the entirety of his forearms, like snakes. + + +"People of the village of Arrorn!" He says, "I have come with grave news. It truly is a shame to interrupt such a lavish funeral, but there are more important matters at hand. It has come to my attention that there is a base of Rebels in the area, planning to overthrow the kingdom and estate a blasphemous 'new order.' These are the very same rebels that killed these three!" He gestures at the paintings of the three fallen Oalkwardners, set on easels on the stage. "We must act now, lest our glorious empire be overthrown. Outside this village is the seventy-third division of the King's army, sent to protect this village and take out the Rebel scum in our midst! It is for this reason, that the King and I felt the need to impose martial law on this village and the surrounding area! We will also be tripling the tax to sustain our troops. And we'll be taking all this lovely food you've set out for the funeral. Desperate times, desperate measures and all that." + + +A cry of protest comes from deep within the crowd. "You're already taking three quarters of everything we have!" A female Oalkwardner pushes her way to the front of the crowd to confront the Yelgar. "We can barely survive as it is! And that food for the funeral is the last of our reserves, we only took it out in the first place because Merk and the others did so much for us in their lives!" + + +Yelgar stares her straight in the face. "I understand your concern." He says, "But as I said, desperate times, desperate measures. Guards, restrain her!" Two of the horsemen hop off their steeds and grab the girl by the arms, forcing her to her knees. Yelgar raises his hand, and slaps her across the face, and the crowd gasps. + + +"Do not question the authority of the Crown." Yelgar says, still deathly calm, "Or you might wind up like them too," he nods towards the paintings. + + +"Who gives a crap about the Crown? We're all gonna die anyway under your 'martial law', so may as well go out fighting!" The girl glares at Yelgar, as the whole crowd seems to hold its breath. + + +"I see how it is," Yelgar says, clearly disappointed. "Then let this be an example to anyone else who thinks of dissenting." He reaches beneath his cloak and pulls out a wooden knife, raising it above his head to strike at the girl, now trembling in the guards grip. + + +"C-come on," the girl says, voice faltering, "They can't stop all of us! I say we finish what those rebels started!" + + +Still, no one moves. The whole thing reminds you, once again, of the girl in the forest the night you woke up. The guilt of leaving her behind wells up within you, are you really gonna let it happen again? +> Heck no I'm not letting that happen again! Attack Yelgar! +"Hey, stop!" You cry, before you can think of anything cleverer to say. + + +Everyone turns towards you, shocked. Even Yelgar raises an eyebrow. Before anyone has the chance to grab you, you rush towards Yelgar, and his eyes go wide. + + +"What are you?" He cries, dropping the knife to the ground with a clatter. + + +You don't answer, just slam your foot into his face, full force. He goes flying into the side of the carriage and crumples to the ground, dead. Holy smokes, did you actually just do that? How the heck did you do that? But there's no time to think about it now, a few of the other guards are just realizing what's happened and are charging you. + + +"He killed the Grand Protector!" one of them shouts, "Stop him before he does any more damage!" + + +You should probably run, but something stops you. So, you tense up, and get ready for battle. Soon as the first horseman gets close, you swing at him with everything you've got. He goes flying off his steed, tripping up one of the others. + + +Then it's rinse and repeat for the whole fight. You find, to your surprise, that you're extremely strong compared to the Oalkwardners. With every swing, you take out another guard, and a few from the crowd cheer. But now more of the guards are waking up to what's happening, and they begin to encircle you. There's no way you can beat them all, no matter how strong you happen to be in comparison. Before you have time to react, you're surrounded. They all point their spears your way, slowly closing the circle now that they know they've got you cornered. + + +Frantically, you look around for any sort of weakness in their wall of spears. But you can't seem to see... wait, there! One of the guards is a little further forward than the others, and smaller too. If you attack him, then maybe you can stay out of reach of those spears. + + +It's a split second realization, and you act on it, charging the guard and tackling the pony out from under him. (That way, you stay out of reach his spear too). You don't stop to look at the damage you've caused; they'll be after you in seconds! So, you dash towards the edge of the village. Even though it's only been a few days, you've already got a rudimentary knowledge of this village's layout, which is much more than the guards have, (seeing as they've only been here for an hour, tops. + + +You quickly manage to lose your pursuers in the twists and turns of the city, but that doesn't mean you're stopping. You don't slow down till you've made it out of the city, and left the buildings far behind. This is a different path than you've taken before, so it's a good thing you've already got most of your stuff with you. No chance you'll be able to swing by your little campsite on the way out. So that means you'll have to do without the sleeping bag and pillow you left there this morning. Hope you like sleeping in the dirt. + + +Speaking of camping, the field surrounding the village is dotted with Oalkwardners in the same red and yellow cloaks of the other guards, setting up tents among other things. Luckily, they don't notice you, and you soon find yourself in the forest once again. It's only then that you allow yourself to slow to a walk. You feel a little sad about leaving Arrorn, even if you never felt like you truly belonged there. There's no way you'll ever be able to return, at least, not for a while. +> Wandering in the woods +For the next few days, you continue on the path, surviving on nothing but the supplies left in your bag. You're almost out of Cheez-Its, so you'll have to find another village soon or you might starve. No one comes after you, probably because you took out their leader. No-one to give orders. Still, you move quickly as you can, just in case they are still after you. + + +On the third night, you veer off the path a little to find a nice place to sleep. You've given up on finding something even remotely comfortable, (as your aching back won't let you forget). What you're really looking for is something concealed, so if anyone tries to find you, they'll just walk right past without noticing. Tonight, you're lucky. There's a shallow divot in the ground, just big enough for you to spend the night in. All you've gotta do is cover it with leaves and sticks, and you're set. + + +The sun hasn't even finished setting by the time you finish, so you sit on a nearby rock and pull out your last bag of Cheez-Its and stare at it. If you eat them now, you'll go to bed hungry, but be hungry in the morning, but if you wait, you're not sure you'll even be able to sleep due to the hunger pains. + + +The snapping of a twig behind you breaks you out of your thoughts. You turn around, just as something, you're not sure what, slams right into you! It sends you toppling off the rock and into the dirt on your back. Before you even have the chance to comprehend what's happening, you find yourself staring into the eyes of a raggedy Oalkwardner, standing on your chest and pointing a spear at your throat. + + +"I wouldn't try to escape, if I were you." The Oalkwardner says, "You may be strong, monster, but I'm certainly quick enough to drive this spear right through you before you have the chance to take a single swing at me." + + +"What the heck is this?" You ask, a quaver in your voice. "Where did you come from?" + + +"The King sent me after you." The Oalkwardner says, "They call me Kralmer, I'm one of the greatest bounty hunter's this side of the water-pit." + + +"So you're a filthy mercenary! You kill people for what... money?" + + +Kralmer spits out of the side of his mouth. "I'm not doing this for money! The king's holding my family, said he'd only let them go if I took you to him. It's nothing personal, I assure you." + + +"Well, that sucks," You say, "But isn't there another way, aside from, you know, killing me?" + + +"I wish," He sighs, "But the king says bounty hunting is illegal. That's why he took my family. I was gonna be executed, but he said he'd grant us a pardon if I brought you to him. Filthy rat won't follow his own rules. Anyway, really sorry about this. I heard what you did back in Arrorn. Heck, I'd join you if I could. But I've got my family to think of. I'll try to make your death swift." With that, he raises his spear to deliver a killing blow. + + +"Wait!" You cry. + + +"What?" Kralmer says, sounding impatient, "Look, I don't like this any more than you do, so may as well get it over with." +> "Don't I at least deserve a fair fight?" +Kralmer pauses for a moment and thinks. Your heart pounds as you watch him, hoping against hope that he's honorable. + + +He sighs and says, "Why do ya gotta make things so complicated?" And he leaps into the air, landing about ten feet away from you. "I guess you have a point. This way, I at least don't have to feel so bad. Stand up now, I guess we'd better do this." + + +You stand up, feeling just a little bit relieved. But the danger's not over yet. You've still gotta fight him. + + +"Monster," Kralmer says, "Just promise me this." + + +"What? + + +"Show me no mercy. On the off chance you beat me, I'd rather not have to face my family to tell them... I've failed." + + +"Well... okay." + + +Kralmer readies himself. "Now... are you ready?" + + +"I suppose I am." Your palms are slick with sweat. + + +"Right then. Now fight!" + + +Before the words have even left his lips, he's already flying through the air towards you, faster than you could've imagined possible. There's no time to put up any sort of defense before he smashes right into your head, his spear penetrating straight through your right eye. The pain is so great, you hardly notice as you fall to the ground, or Kralmer's whispered apology as the world fades around you. + + +Well, that ended quicker than expected...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For the next few days, you continue on the path, surviving on nothing but the supplies left in your bag. You're almost out of Cheez-Its, so you'll have to find another village soon or you might starve. No one comes after you, probably because you took out their leader. No-one to give orders. Still, you move quickly as you can, just in case they are still after you. + + +On the third night, you veer off the path a little to find a nice place to sleep. You've given up on finding something even remotely comfortable, (as your aching back won't let you forget). What you're really looking for is something concealed, so if anyone tries to find you, they'll just walk right past without noticing. Tonight, you're lucky. There's a shallow divot in the ground, just big enough for you to spend the night in. All you've gotta do is cover it with leaves and sticks, and you're set. + + +The sun hasn't even finished setting by the time you finish, so you sit on a nearby rock and pull out your last bag of Cheez-Its and stare at it. If you eat them now, you'll go to bed hungry, but be hungry in the morning, but if you wait, you're not sure you'll even be able to sleep due to the hunger pains. + + +The snapping of a twig behind you breaks you out of your thoughts. You turn around, just as something, you're not sure what, slams right into you! It sends you toppling off the rock and into the dirt on your back. Before you even have the chance to comprehend what's happening, you find yourself staring into the eyes of a raggedy Oalkwardner, standing on your chest and pointing a spear at your throat. + + +"I wouldn't try to escape, if I were you." The Oalkwardner says, "You may be strong, monster, but I'm certainly quick enough to drive this spear right through you before you have the chance to take a single swing at me." + + +"What the heck is this?" You ask, a quaver in your voice. "Where did you come from?" + + +"The King sent me after you." The Oalkwardner says, "They call me Kralmer, I'm one of the greatest bounty hunter's this side of the water-pit." + + +"So you're a filthy mercenary! You kill people for what... money?" + + +Kralmer spits out of the side of his mouth. "I'm not doing this for money! The king's holding my family, said he'd only let them go if I took you to him. It's nothing personal, I assure you." + + +"Well, that sucks," You say, "But isn't there another way, aside from, you know, killing me?" + + +"I wish," He sighs, "But the king says bounty hunting is illegal. That's why he took my family. I was gonna be executed, but he said he'd grant us a pardon if I brought you to him. Filthy rat won't follow his own rules. Anyway, really sorry about this. I heard what you did back in Arrorn. Heck, I'd join you if I could. But I've got my family to think of. I'll try to make your death swift." With that, he raises his spear to deliver a killing blow. + + +"Wait!" You cry. + + +"What?" Kralmer says, sounding impatient, "Look, I don't like this any more than you do, so may as well get it over with." +> "What if we figure out a way to get your family back without me dying?" +Kralmer lowers his spear ever so slightly. "What, you got some kind of master plan that'll get the king outta the way?" + + +"Well..." you say slowly, your mind racing. You've got a half formulated idea already, if only you had more time to think... "Don't you get an audience with the king or something? To show him my dead body?" + + +He thinks for a moment. "I suppose, but if you're thinking of trying anything, you best be aware that the king is heavily guarded. And he wears this enchanted armor, made by his dark sorcerer, Maeldral. While it's on, he's practically immortal! That's why no-ones ever, you know, killed him before!" + + +"But it must have some kind of weakness, don't you think?" + + +"I dunno... his Maeldral might have something in his notes or something, but I have no idea where he'd keep something like that. I mean, that's really dangerous knowledge. I'm sorry, but I have to kill you." + + +He raises his spear once more, ears drooping. + + +"But I'm super strong, remember?" You say, "At least compared to you guys. If we find a way in, I can take out the guards. I took out fifteen or so of the king's men just the other day in Arrorn. Then you won't have to kill me, because your family will be safe! I could go after the king by myself, if you don't want to get tangled up in all this." + + +He seems to think it over for a moment. Then, he sighs and steps off your chest. + + +"Stand, monster..." Kralmer says, "I'll accept your terms on the condition that we break my family out before anything else. And after that, you're on your own. I have my family to think of." He's quiet for a moment. "You're lucky the king has a reputation for making bad deals. I'm not the first to be roped into something like this by that soggy bag of water, and from what I've heard, he doesn't always follow through. I certainly hope you're more honorable than he is. Now, let's find a better spot to camp." +> To the palace! +Thankfully, Kralmer has enough food for the both of you, so you go to bed with a full stomach. But you just can't get to sleep. After a half hour of tossing and turning in the dirt, you sit up and take inventory of your supplies, (for lack of anything better to do). It's then that you remember the strange disk you found on the night you first woke up in the woods. You must've forgotten about it after seeing the kidnapping. It's been in your bag this whole time, waiting to be rediscovered. + + +You take it out and examine it. Something about it tugs at your memory, but you just can't place it. For a while you stare at the screen, flashing "insufficient power," over and over in red. Tapping at the screen does nothing, and there are no other buttons to speak of. On the other side is some kind of clear plastic tank, with a little bit of green fluid sloshing about inside. You can't make heads or tails of it. Soon, you're fast asleep, the disk resting on your chest... + + + + +Your dreams that night are filled with visions of the disk. You see yourself putting it together, building it, tweaking it. It's the most important thing you've ever created, more important than your family, your friends, the outside world. The disk consumes your entire life, you work on it day and night. And then, one day, there's no more work to be done. You fill the tank with the green liquid, harvested from the core of a meteorite, tap the screen a few times, and suddenly find yourself surrounded by a brilliant, violet light... + + + + +"Wake up, monster!" + + +You open your eyes to the sight of Kralmer's wrinkly face. + + +"Eat something, we've got a long trek ahead of us." he pushes a bowl of black goop into your hands and walks a few paces away as you attempt to choke it down. + + +"So," he says as you finish, "You're still here." + + +"Yup," you say, running your tongue over your teeth to get the last little bits of your breakfast off. + + +"You really are honorable then... I suppose I should call you something other than 'Monster.' What are you anyway?" + + +"I'm a human," you say. + + +"Good to know, human," Kralmer grins, "Now, like I said, we've got a long ways to go, so let's get going." + + + + +For the next two days you walk on, stopping only to sleep. + + +On the evening of the second day, Kralmer says "Look! It's just over this hill," and dashes ahead. You follow, quick as you can. When you crest the hill, you can just see the outline of some sort of fortress, sitting on a hilltop on the horizon. + + +"We ought to make camp a little ways off the trail, and soon." Kralmer says, "Just in case some of the King's guard happen to pass." + + +You follow him off the trail and into a nearby thicket. For a good ten minutes, you push through the brush, covering yourself in all sorts of scratches. Finally, you come to a clear spot, right at the heart of the thorn bushes. + + +"There," Kralmer says, "No way they'll think to look here. Now, we'd better come up with some kind of plan before we get any closer." + + +"Do you know if there are any secret entrances?" You ask. + + +"The only way in, so far as I know, besides the front gate would be through the moat. It runs right through the dungeon, so the king can drown his subjects in it." + + +"Great!" you say, "We'll swim in that way!" + + +"Swim?" Kralmer asks, "What does 'swim' mean?" + + +"You've never heard of swimming?" You ask, "You know, where you paddle to stay afloat in the water?" + + +"Human, you are far more powerful than I ever could've imagined," Kralmer is clearly awed, "We Oalkwardners cannot touch the water. If we soak in it, it seeps into our skin, making it weaker and weaker, until it simply dissolves into mush. I imagine it's a horribly painful way to go, hence why our lovely, benevolent King uses it to dispose of anyone who so much as looks at him funny." + + +"My word! That's why I never found any sort of well in the village! I had to suck the moisture out of mud to survive! What do you do when it rains?" + + +"I've heard of this 'rain,' you speak of. Thankfully, such a calamity has yet to befall this land." + + +"But what about all these trees and plants? How can they grow without water?" + + +"I don't know what you mean!" Kralmer says, "All plants need is a little sunshine and they'll grow just fine. But we're getting off topic. The best way to get into the palace may just be for you to sneak in through the moat." + + +"But what about you? How will you get inside? What about your family?" + + +"I... don't know. But the moat could be our best shot. You may have to go in without me." + + +"You trust me that much?" + + +"I trust you more than I trust the King, I'll say that much. There'll be no-one to guide my family out of the dungeon, should you decide to go after the King. If you feel the need, you can disregard my earlier request for them to be let out first. Should you manage to take the fortress, you'll then be able to set them free." + + +"Alright..." you agree, "I'll do it." + + +"Great." Kralmer says, "We'll think of some kind of meeting point. I really appreciate this, Human. You are quite possibly the most courageous creature I've ever met." + + +"You're welcome," you say. + + +After a moment of silence, Kralmer says, "Well, we'd better make camp. I have a feeling it's gonna be a long day tomorrow." + + +"You and me both," you murmur, as you stand up to start getting the camp ready. +> The moat +You reach the fortress at about noon the next day. It's really not much of a castle. Instead of stone, like you would expect, it's made completely out of wood, with a few rickety looking towers poking up from behind the wall. Once you're only about a hundred feet off from the moat, Kralmer stops you. + + +"Send my family out this way, when you get out." He points at a spot where the moat goes under the wood. "You see where the water crosses under the wall?" + + +"Yeah?" + + +"That should take you into the dungeon." + + +You don't say anything. This is all happening so fast, you're not sure you're ready. + + +"Thanks again, human." Kralmer says, "Whatever happens, I'll make sure your legacy lives on." + + +"Right," you say, "Thanks." + + +There's no point in stalling, so you start running towards the moat, fast as you can, so no one sees you. Once you reach the edge, you don't hesitate to dive right it. + + +The water is warmer than you expected, and murky. It's hard to stay afloat with a backpack on, but you still manage to keep your head above the water. Luckily, it doesn't seem to be flowing in any particular direction, so you have no trouble with current. You swim for the opening Kralmer pointed out and duck under it. Suddenly, the sunlight from above is gone. You're in a sort of dirt tunnel, with just enough space at the top for you to breathe. It's fairly short, and before you know it, the river opens up into a sort of pool at the edge of a huge underground room. + + +You swim to the edge of the pool, out of breath. Are you really this out of shape? For a moment you sit on your hands and knees, panting. Then, you look up and get a good look at the wall on the other side of the room. You suck in your breath. It's lined with cages, set into the wall, dirty and disheveled Oalkwardner eyes staring out at you from behind wooden... well, they're not exactly bars... more like fat wooden sticks. + + +It looks like this part of the fortress is built into the hillside, as half of the walls are wood, and the other half, dirt, hard packed. + + +Thankfully, there are no guards down here, at least not right now. You need to decide if you're going to free the prisoners now, or wait until after the king is dead. +> Go after the king first +"I'll be back for you all later," you say, as loud as you dare. + + +There's an opening in the wall with a spiral staircase going up, so you head through it. At the top of the stairs is a wooden door. You can hear voices from the other side, probably guards. Quietly, you turn the handle and push it open. Two guards stand on the other side, their backs to you. They don't notice you, because they just keep chatting about the weather. You creep closer, and closer, and then you put a hand over each of their mouths and drag them back through the door before they even realize you're there! + + +They struggle in your grip, but their flailing is no match for your strength. You carry them downstairs, still covering their mouths, and toss them into the nearest empty cell. You steal the keys off their belt while you're at it, and lock them inside. + + +"What's going on?" one of them cries. + + +"What the heck are you?" Asks the other. + + +"Shut up, both of you!" You say, "I need to know where the Dark Sorcerer lives." + + +"Why would we tell you that? You're kidnapping us!" the first guard says, + + +"Because if you don't, you die!" You say, slamming your fist against the bars. + + +"I'm not talking." The first guard says, crossing his arms. + + +"Well, I am!" The Second one says, trembling, "He's in the tower opposite us, at the very top!" + + +"What the heck is wrong with you?" The first guard says, "If you tell it that, you're breaking your sacred oath to protect the king!" + + +"I'd rather stay alive, thank you very much!" + + +"Shut up, or I'll kill you both!" You say, feeling a little guilty. (Threatening lives isn't exactly the most fun thing in the world). + + +They go quiet after that. There's no way to know how long they'll stay quiet though, so you'd better be quick. You head back up the stairs and slip out the door. Luckily, the courtyard isn't all that crowded, but there are still a few Oalkwardners milling about here and there. + + +A line of bushes sits in the shadow of the wall, wrapping all the way around, so you crouch behind it to avoid being seen. As fast as you can, you crawl around the perimeter until you reach the tower the guards were talking about. There's no-one there to guard the door, it's almost too easy. Quickly, you slip inside and find yourself staring at yet another spiral staircase. + + +You take the stairs four at a time, as they're smaller than stairs for humans. The tower has multiple levels, with rooms branching off on each one, but you don't stop to look in any of them until you reach the very top. The stairway ends in a trapdoor. You press your ear up against it, but hear nothing. Pushing on the door reveals that it's locked, with the same type of wooden lock that was on the cells in the dungeon. For a moment, you panic. What are you going to do if you can't get in? It would be a defeat on the whole purpose of this mission! + + +Then, you remember that you stole the keys off the guards you trapped in the dungeon. Checking over your shoulder to make sure no one's coming, you pull out the wooden key ring and try each one of them on the lock. The key slides in on the fourth try, and the door swings open freely to reveal something like a cross between a bedroom and a laboratory. One side of the room has a big table full of all kinds of odds and ends, different materials and chemicals. The other side has a bedroll, woven from grass and stuffed with... well, more grass. + + +You start looking around for anything that looks like it might do away with magic armor. You look through the contents of the table first, but don't find anything remotely useful. (Though, there is a cage of yellow rats on one corner, which is quite entertaining to look at). You're about to turn elsewhere when you spy something else. Hidden behind a stack of books is a bowl of a strange green substance, glowing slightly in the dim light. + + +This is the same fluid that's in the back of the disk you found in the forest when you first woke up! You pull it out of your backpack to confirm. Maybe, if you refill the tank on the back, it'll work properly again, and you can find out more about what it does. +> Fill up the tank and see what happens +You pull the disk out of your bag and examine the tank on the back. There's a little cap you can take off to open it. It comes off in two twists, and you fill it with the goo from the bowl. As you screw the cap back on, a little beep sounds. You flip the disk over and find that the display at the front has changed. + + +"Power Restored." It flashes, "Ready for dimensional rift generation. Please set coordinates or choose a preset." + + +Two options appear on the screen, one reads, "set new preset" and the other simply says, "home." + + +For a moment, you forget all about your mission. This thing can send you home? Impulsively, you tap the button, and a message pops up. + + +"Warning: Dimensional travel may disrupt certain brain functions, including cognition, memory, and vision. Continue at your own risk." + + +You hesitate, but curiosity gets the better of you and you push "Continue" on the screen. + + +It'll just be a short trip, you tell yourself. Just to jog your memory a little, then you'll come right back. A violet light envelops you, burning your skin. You shut your eyes as it becomes too intense to look at. It's like you're spinning, being stretched in fifteen different directions at once. That's about the point at which you lose consciousness. + + + + +The pain is the first thing you notice. It feels as though someone's poured an entire vat of hot coffee over your entire body. Somehow, you get the sense that you've been asleep a lot longer than normal. You open your eyes to an overcast, gray sky. You're laying on the lawn of someone's house, in the middle of a quiet suburb. You sit up and look around. There's a backpack a few feet away, with a strange disk beside it. How the heck did you get here? You try to remember, but find that you simply cannot. If you really concentrate, you can just remember a strange violet light...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"I'll be back for you all later," you say, as loud as you dare. + + +There's an opening in the wall with a spiral staircase going up, so you head through it. At the top of the stairs is a wooden door. You can hear voices from the other side, probably guards. Quietly, you turn the handle and push it open. Two guards stand on the other side, their backs to you. They don't notice you, because they just keep chatting about the weather. You creep closer, and closer, and then you put a hand over each of their mouths and drag them back through the door before they even realize you're there! + + +They struggle in your grip, but their flailing is no match for your strength. You carry them downstairs, still covering their mouths, and toss them into the nearest empty cell. You steal the keys off their belt while you're at it, and lock them inside. + + +"What's going on?" one of them cries. + + +"What the heck are you?" Asks the other. + + +"Shut up, both of you!" You say, "I need to know where the Dark Sorcerer lives." + + +"Why would we tell you that? You're kidnapping us!" the first guard says, + + +"Because if you don't, you die!" You say, slamming your fist against the bars. + + +"I'm not talking." The first guard says, crossing his arms. + + +"Well, I am!" The Second one says, trembling, "He's in the tower opposite us, at the very top!" + + +"What the heck is wrong with you?" The first guard says, "If you tell it that, you're breaking your sacred oath to protect the king!" + + +"I'd rather stay alive, thank you very much!" + + +"Shut up, or I'll kill you both!" You say, feeling a little guilty. (Threatening lives isn't exactly the most fun thing in the world). + + +They go quiet after that. There's no way to know how long they'll stay quiet though, so you'd better be quick. You head back up the stairs and slip out the door. Luckily, the courtyard isn't all that crowded, but there are still a few Oalkwardners milling about here and there. + + +A line of bushes sits in the shadow of the wall, wrapping all the way around, so you crouch behind it to avoid being seen. As fast as you can, you crawl around the perimeter until you reach the tower the guards were talking about. There's no-one there to guard the door, it's almost too easy. Quickly, you slip inside and find yourself staring at yet another spiral staircase. + + +You take the stairs four at a time, as they're smaller than stairs for humans. The tower has multiple levels, with rooms branching off on each one, but you don't stop to look in any of them until you reach the very top. The stairway ends in a trapdoor. You press your ear up against it, but hear nothing. Pushing on the door reveals that it's locked, with the same type of wooden lock that was on the cells in the dungeon. For a moment, you panic. What are you going to do if you can't get in? It would be a defeat on the whole purpose of this mission! + + +Then, you remember that you stole the keys off the guards you trapped in the dungeon. Checking over your shoulder to make sure no one's coming, you pull out the wooden key ring and try each one of them on the lock. The key slides in on the fourth try, and the door swings open freely to reveal something like a cross between a bedroom and a laboratory. One side of the room has a big table full of all kinds of odds and ends, different materials and chemicals. The other side has a bedroll, woven from grass and stuffed with... well, more grass. + + +You start looking around for anything that looks like it might do away with magic armor. You look through the contents of the table first, but don't find anything remotely useful. (Though, there is a cage of yellow rats on one corner, which is quite entertaining to look at). You're about to turn elsewhere when you spy something else. Hidden behind a stack of books is a bowl of a strange green substance, glowing slightly in the dim light. + + +This is the same fluid that's in the back of the disk you found in the forest when you first woke up! You pull it out of your backpack to confirm. Maybe, if you refill the tank on the back, it'll work properly again, and you can find out more about what it does. +> There's no time for this. Keep looking for the weapon. +You sigh and leave the bowl alone. Maybe you can come back here once your mission's over. There's a book lying on the floor next to the bed that you didn't notice until now. Its cover is blank, and it looks hand bound. Curious, you pick it up and open it to a random page. Numerous entries in impeccably neat handwriting fill the pages. Looks like the sorcerer keeps a diary. + + +You skim the pages, looking for any mention of the king's amour. A full page drawing of a helmet stops you in your tracks. It's entitled, "Kingly helmet." The next few pages are the same, full of images of chest plates and gauntlets, different designs and chemical formulas. It's only when you reach the last page of drawings that you find anything useful. A little blurb at the bottom of the page tells you everything you need to know. + + +It has come to my attention that this amour, while stronger than anything this world has ever seen, is not infallible. It does not block out liquids, so that a little splash of water might be enough to do our great monarch in. I must keep this fact a secret, or I fear he may have me executed. Thankfully enough, no one else can so much as touch this water either, so there's little chance of it being used against him. I certainly hope none of our enemies figure out a way to circumvent this, as it could spell doom for the entire kingdom. + + +You look up from the book. This is perfect! All you've got to do is lure the king down into the dungeons and push him into the water and you're set! At that moment, you hear shouts from outside. You rush to the window and look down into the courtyard to see the tiny figures of three guards dragging Kralmer into the courtyard. Your heart begins to pound. You have to save him! + + +Then, an idea comes to you. An idea that might just save Kralmer and everyone else. You rush down the stairs as fast as you can. When you reach the ground floor, you open the door to the outside just a crack and peer out. You can just see the guards holding Kralmer on the other side of the courtyard. Now all you've got to do is wait... + + +A minute later, the king comes out of one of the towers, just as anticipated. (You know it's him because he's clad in a strange bronze amour, unlike any you've ever seen. At least, that you remember you've seen). He talks to the guards for a moment, then they all head towards the dungeon. Quick as you can, you start to crawl around the perimeter, behind the bushes, towards the same place. + + +You reach the door to the dungeon just as the king and his guards enter, and wait a moment to let them get a little further ahead. Then, you go in after them. As you sneak down the stairs, you can hear their voices. + + +"What happened?" the king shouts. + + +"We were trapped by a monster!" + + +You jolt a little. You'd forgotten all about the guards you trapped in the cell! The king must've found them. + + +At this point, you've reached the bottom of the stairs, and are peaking into the next room. The king and his guards are still talking. + + +"Go sound the alarms," the king orders, "I've got an execution to oversee." + + +It's now or never. You dash out into the next room, screaming at the top of your lungs. Everyone leaps backwards in shock. By the time they regain their footing, you've already scooped up the king under your arm. He's heavier than most with that armor, but you manage. + + +"Let me go or I'll have you executed!" he screams, "Guards, take him out!" + + +"Never!" you shout, and dive into the pool of water at the opposite side of the room. + + +The king shrieks in pain as the water floods through the cracks in his armor. You turn away, not wanting to watch. By the time you've exited the lake, the king is dead. + + +The guards stare at you, openmouthed. You ready yourself to do battle one more time, but then something entirely unexpected happens. One of the guards in the cage begins to clap. Then the rest of them join in. All the prisoners pick up on it too, until the entire dungeon is applauding. + + +"Bravo, monster!" one of the guards in the cage says, "The rest of us hated him just as much as anyone else. Now we can all be free!" + + +"You have done well, Human." Kralmer says, "I believe you will go down in history as a hero. Never before has such a great deed been performed alone." + + +"Yeah," you say, trying not to think about the king's final screams as he died, "I guess... I guess it was pretty great." +> Epilouge +After the king's death, the rebel group that the king was trying to stop steps into the power vacuum and takes over. They estate a glorious new order in which all of the people share their resources and the government owns the means of production.* The people are quite receptive to it, as they hated the old order of things and needed a change. + + +The story of the Human that ended the terrible reign of king Maeldral is passed down from generation to generation, until it becomes legend. Some say you integrated into their society and are living a quiet life in a village near the edge of the kingdom. Others think you returned to your own world. Whatever the answer, everyone agrees that you are a hero. Thanks to you, the kingdom is much better off. + + + + +The end. + + +*The only reason this sort of Communism works is because they are fantasy creatures in a fantasy world. Do not attempt in real life, it never has worked out, and probably never will. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You reach the fortress at about noon the next day. It's really not much of a castle. Instead of stone, like you would expect, it's made completely out of wood, with a few rickety looking towers poking up from behind the wall. Once you're only about a hundred feet off from the moat, Kralmer stops you. + + +"Send my family out this way, when you get out." He points at a spot where the moat goes under the wood. "You see where the water crosses under the wall?" + + +"Yeah?" + + +"That should take you into the dungeon." + + +You don't say anything. This is all happening so fast, you're not sure you're ready. + + +"Thanks again, human." Kralmer says, "Whatever happens, I'll make sure your legacy lives on." + + +"Right," you say, "Thanks." + + +There's no point in stalling, so you start running towards the moat, fast as you can, so no one sees you. Once you reach the edge, you don't hesitate to dive right it. + + +The water is warmer than you expected, and murky. It's hard to stay afloat with a backpack on, but you still manage to keep your head above the water. Luckily, it doesn't seem to be flowing in any particular direction, so you have no trouble with current. You swim for the opening Kralmer pointed out and duck under it. Suddenly, the sunlight from above is gone. You're in a sort of dirt tunnel, with just enough space at the top for you to breathe. It's fairly short, and before you know it, the river opens up into a sort of pool at the edge of a huge underground room. + + +You swim to the edge of the pool, out of breath. Are you really this out of shape? For a moment you sit on your hands and knees, panting. Then, you look up and get a good look at the wall on the other side of the room. You suck in your breath. It's lined with cages, set into the wall, dirty and disheveled Oalkwardner eyes staring out at you from behind wooden... well, they're not exactly bars... more like fat wooden sticks. + + +It looks like this part of the fortress is built into the hillside, as half of the walls are wood, and the other half, dirt, hard packed. + + +Thankfully, there are no guards down here, at least not right now. You need to decide if you're going to free the prisoners now, or wait until after the king is dead. +> Free the people first +You rush up to the bars of the nearest cage to you. In that moment, you decide that there's no way you're leaving anyone behind. If you're taking one, you're taking them all. + + +"I'm here to save you." You say in a low voice, "all of you." + + +"What... are you?" Asks the Oalkwardner in the cage, inching backwards. + + +"I'm a friend, now let me get these bars off the cage." + + +You grip the bars and pull as hard as you can, but they don't budge. This is real wood, not the Paper-Mache everything else in this place is made of. You're going to have to find another way to get through it. Maybe you can steal the keys off a guard or something. Or maybe... + + +You sling your bag off your shoulders and go through the contents until you find what you're looking for. It takes a minute, and for a moment you fear it might have fallen out of your bag. But no, at the bottom of your bag, lays your lighter, untouched since the night you first woke up. + + +Maybe, you can use this on lock of the cell! Because even that's made of wood, for some reason. Or maybe you should just play it safe and look for the keys... +> Attempt to burn through the lock +Working quickly, you put the lighter up to the keyhole and flick it on. Somehow, even after you swam through that moat, it still works. The lock catches instantly, faster than you would've thought possible. Once again, you grip the bars and wrench open the door. + + +"Are you a wizard?" The Oalkwardner asks, "What kind of magical power is that? I've never seen anything like it? Also, is it going to eat the whole door?" + + +You glance once again at the door to see that the entire thing is engulfed in flames. How is it possible for fire to spread that fast? Either this is your faulty memory at work, or this wood is different from the stuff back at home. Even as you think this it's already spreading to the rest of the cell. + + +"Get out of there!" You cry, pulling the Oalkwardner out of the flaming cell. + + +The fire is spreading quicker and quicker. Before you even manage to take so much as two steps back, the entire wall is in flames. The other trapped Oalkwardners scream as they and their cells are consumed in the flames. + + +"We've gotta get to the exit!" The Oalkwardner says, pointing to an opening in the wall, with a spiral staircase just beyond it, "Come on!" + + +"But what about-" You're cut off by a loud crack. The exit collapses, and sparks fly everywhere. One of them lands on your Oalkwardner friend, and catches him on fire. + + +"Gaahhh!" he screams as the flames engulf him, burning him as if he's made of paper. Your stomach turns at the sight and you look away. + + +At that moment, the ceiling caves in, and falls right on top of you, killing you instantly. +> Epilouge +So, you're dead. But let's look on the bright side of things, shall we? After you died, the fire spread to the rest of the palace, burning it completely to the ground. No one escaped, not even the king and his invincible suit of amour! Not even his children made it out, so there was no one left to take his place. No one, that is, except for the rebel alliance the Grand Protector and his army were trying to find. With the king dead, they sweep in and take power within a month. They estate a new order, where everyone shares what they have, and the government owns the means of production.* + + +Even you get to live on in the hearts and minds of everyone you saved from the king's reign of terror. They even erected a statue in your honor! (Though, it looks nothing like you). You will be known forevermore as, "Human, Martyr of the New Order." + + +So, in a way, even you get to live happily ever after. Everyone, it seems, gets a happy ending. + + + + +Except for all the innocent people you killed in the dungeon. + + + + +And Kralmer, because his entire family is dead. He will forever curse your name. + + +*I swear, I'm not communist.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You rush up to the bars of the nearest cage to you. In that moment, you decide that there's no way you're leaving anyone behind. If you're taking one, you're taking them all. + + +"I'm here to save you." You say in a low voice, "all of you." + + +"What... are you?" Asks the Oalkwardner in the cage, inching backwards. + + +"I'm a friend, now let me get these bars off the cage." + + +You grip the bars and pull as hard as you can, but they don't budge. This is real wood, not the Paper-Mache everything else in this place is made of. You're going to have to find another way to get through it. Maybe you can steal the keys off a guard or something. Or maybe... + + +You sling your bag off your shoulders and go through the contents until you find what you're looking for. It takes a minute, and for a moment you fear it might have fallen out of your bag. But no, at the bottom of your bag, lays your lighter, untouched since the night you first woke up. + + +Maybe, you can use this on lock of the cell! Because even that's made of wood, for some reason. Or maybe you should just play it safe and look for the keys... +> Go find a guard and steal the keys +"I'll be right back," you say, turning around. There's an exit a few yards away, a neat gap in the wall with a spiral staircase behind it. You head up the staircase as quietly as you can and find yourself at a wooden door. You can hear muffled voices on the other side, probably the guards. Gently as you can, you turn the knob and open the door. Sunlight floods into the room, blinding you momentarily. Seems the door opens into the courtyard. Two guards stand on the other side, their backs turned to you, chatting about the weather. + + +Ever so slowly, you inch out the door, getting closer and closer until they're in your reach. They still haven't noticed you. Then, quick as you can, you grab them, clapping your hand over their mouth. Before they have a chance to react, you dash back through the door, carrying them with you. Soon as you reach the edge of the stairwell, you throw them down onto the floor below, killing them instantly. + + +You hurry down the stairs, taking them two at a time. After making sure the guards are thoroughly dead, you check their pockets for keys. It doesn't take you long to find them. Strangely enough, they're made of the same wood as the lock. + + +"I'm back!" you say as loud as you dare. + + +You dash to the first door and unlock it, then go to the next, and the next. Soon, every cell is unlocked, and you're surrounded by a bleary-eyed crowd of Oalkwardners, staring up at you. + + +"What now?" one of them asks. + + +"I'm getting you out of-" You start to say, but stop. Above you, you can just hear the sound of muffled voices. You put your finger to your lips, and creep towards the exit, where you can hear better. + + +"Why is this door open?" one asks, "And where are the guards?" + + +Crap! You must've forgotten to close the door behind you on your way back down! + + +"I thought I heard something down there," Another voice says, "Let's go check it out, I've got a bad feeling about this." + + +The sound of footsteps coming down the stairs resonates through the whole room. You ready yourself for a fight as the bottoms of Oalkwardner feet and red and yellow cloaks become visible on the stairs. + + +"What on earth?" one of them says. They must've seen the dead guards at the bottom. You don't waste any more time. You charge into the room with the stairwell, screaming at the top of your lungs. Five guards stare at you from halfway down the stairs, too stunned to move, at least for a moment. You use it to your advantage, bounding up the steps and plowing through the first two before they even think to raise their weapons. + + +Of course, the other three are a little smarter. They back out of your reach before you can take a swipe at them, and ready their spears for an attack. You stop ascending for a moment and assess the situation. They've got the high ground, and their spears are ready. You may be stronger than they, but a shaft of wood through the heart will still kill you, regardless of who's holding it. + + +Without warning, The Oalkwardner in front leaps into the air towards you, ready to bring her spear down on your head. You leap backwards, nearly tumbling down the stairs, just avoiding what could've been a fatal strike. For a moment, you're both off balance, but you recover first, and drive your fist into her face. + + +"Noooo!" one of the other Oalkwardners cries, and charges at you wildly. + + +You step out of the way just in time, and he trips over his own feet, falling off the rickety spiral staircase to his doom. That's four down, now where's that last one. You look around wildly, just in time to see the edge of a cloak disappearing through the door at the top of the stairs. + + +"Come on!" You call down to the prisoners below, "We have to get out of here, now! Up the staircase!" + + +The prisoners obey, flooding into the room, and starting up the stairs after you. There are about two dozen in all, not as many as you might have thought, but still a substantial number to herd out of a fortress like this. + + +As you lead them out into the courtyard, a high pitched shriek cuts through the air. It's an alarm, just like the one back in Arrorn! The entire courtyard is in chaos, people running this way and that, guards and civilians alike. The gateway out is on the other side, about a hundred yards away, sitting wide open. But it won't be for long, even from here you can see guards gathering by the big swinging doors, getting ready to push them closed and trap you inside. + + +"Quick, to the exit!" You shout, breaking into a run. Everyone else follows as you weave through the crowd, trying your best not to trample any innocent people. (If, indeed, there are any innocent people in this place). It looks like you might just make it, until you've made it about halfway across the courtyard. Seemingly out of nowhere, guards on little ponies, like the ones that invaded Arrorn, flank your band of criminals. Slowly but surely, they're closing in, going ahead of you to cut you off. If you don't do something fast, you're going to be surrounded. + + +There's no time to think though. No time to come up with a brilliant plan. Before you even quite realize it, there's nowhere left to go. The guards are in front and behind, to the right and to the left. You are struck with a strange sense of Deja Vu. This isn't the first time you've been in a situation like this, it happened back in Arrorn too! So if you just do the same thing you did before, you'll get out of it just fine. + + +"Don't stop!" You cry, "I'll clear a path!" + + +There's no time to pick out the weak link, so you just plow on forward, attacking the guard directly in your path. Soon as you get within range of the spears, you leap into the air and drive your foot into the guard's chest. He tumbles off the horse, screaming, and all the prisoners flow through the gap you've created. After you've ran a good thirty feet from the circle, you glance over your shoulder to make sure everyone got through. But to your horror, only about half have made it past the circle. The rest of the guards have closed in further, getting rid of the gap you created. More of them have to get taken out if you are to have any hope of saving everyone. + + +Worse, there are more guards coming from the sides, and the doors are halfway closed. If you don't get the rest of the prisoners out quick, no-one will make it out at all. +> Cut your losses and lead those who are left out to freedom +It hurts more than you could've ever imagined, leaving people behind like this. But there's no sense in you dying too. You keep running until you reach the gate and the others follow. As you pass through it, you notice a few of the Guards coming after you on ponies out of the corner of your eye. You're about to turn and fight them, when something shoots out from the shadows and knocks the first one off his horse. Then it takes down the second, and the third! Kralmer has come to your aid. + + +"Let's get out of here, Human!" He cries, catching up to you, "We've gotta leave the kingdom as fast as we can! Go somewhere else, where they'll never find us." + + +"Right," You say, "I hope we've got enough supplies..." + + +"We'll survive, we can forage if we need to." + + +"Perfect, you got somewhere in mind?" + + +"Sure! I'll lead the way..." + + + + +A week of walking later, you cross the border of the land you were in and into somewhere nicer. You and the former prisoners integrate into a nearby village. They all celebrate you as their hero, and come together to build you a nice, human sized house. After a few months of living there, it really starts to feel like home. You even get used to the food. + + +As for Kralmer, his family just so happened to be amongst the half you managed to save. It's a good thing too, you're not sure he would've forgiven you if you hadn't managed to get them out alive. You have dinner with him most nights, and the two of you become quite good friends. + + +The villagers are happy to have you as part of their community. After the brave deeds you committed, they see you as their last line of defense. If anything ever happens, you'll be there to save them. + + +But that hasn't happened yet. For now, you've been blessed with some much needed peace...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"I'll be right back," you say, turning around. There's an exit a few yards away, a neat gap in the wall with a spiral staircase behind it. You head up the staircase as quietly as you can and find yourself at a wooden door. You can hear muffled voices on the other side, probably the guards. Gently as you can, you turn the knob and open the door. Sunlight floods into the room, blinding you momentarily. Seems the door opens into the courtyard. Two guards stand on the other side, their backs turned to you, chatting about the weather. + + +Ever so slowly, you inch out the door, getting closer and closer until they're in your reach. They still haven't noticed you. Then, quick as you can, you grab them, clapping your hand over their mouth. Before they have a chance to react, you dash back through the door, carrying them with you. Soon as you reach the edge of the stairwell, you throw them down onto the floor below, killing them instantly. + + +You hurry down the stairs, taking them two at a time. After making sure the guards are thoroughly dead, you check their pockets for keys. It doesn't take you long to find them. Strangely enough, they're made of the same wood as the lock. + + +"I'm back!" you say as loud as you dare. + + +You dash to the first door and unlock it, then go to the next, and the next. Soon, every cell is unlocked, and you're surrounded by a bleary-eyed crowd of Oalkwardners, staring up at you. + + +"What now?" one of them asks. + + +"I'm getting you out of-" You start to say, but stop. Above you, you can just hear the sound of muffled voices. You put your finger to your lips, and creep towards the exit, where you can hear better. + + +"Why is this door open?" one asks, "And where are the guards?" + + +Crap! You must've forgotten to close the door behind you on your way back down! + + +"I thought I heard something down there," Another voice says, "Let's go check it out, I've got a bad feeling about this." + + +The sound of footsteps coming down the stairs resonates through the whole room. You ready yourself for a fight as the bottoms of Oalkwardner feet and red and yellow cloaks become visible on the stairs. + + +"What on earth?" one of them says. They must've seen the dead guards at the bottom. You don't waste any more time. You charge into the room with the stairwell, screaming at the top of your lungs. Five guards stare at you from halfway down the stairs, too stunned to move, at least for a moment. You use it to your advantage, bounding up the steps and plowing through the first two before they even think to raise their weapons. + + +Of course, the other three are a little smarter. They back out of your reach before you can take a swipe at them, and ready their spears for an attack. You stop ascending for a moment and assess the situation. They've got the high ground, and their spears are ready. You may be stronger than they, but a shaft of wood through the heart will still kill you, regardless of who's holding it. + + +Without warning, The Oalkwardner in front leaps into the air towards you, ready to bring her spear down on your head. You leap backwards, nearly tumbling down the stairs, just avoiding what could've been a fatal strike. For a moment, you're both off balance, but you recover first, and drive your fist into her face. + + +"Noooo!" one of the other Oalkwardners cries, and charges at you wildly. + + +You step out of the way just in time, and he trips over his own feet, falling off the rickety spiral staircase to his doom. That's four down, now where's that last one. You look around wildly, just in time to see the edge of a cloak disappearing through the door at the top of the stairs. + + +"Come on!" You call down to the prisoners below, "We have to get out of here, now! Up the staircase!" + + +The prisoners obey, flooding into the room, and starting up the stairs after you. There are about two dozen in all, not as many as you might have thought, but still a substantial number to herd out of a fortress like this. + + +As you lead them out into the courtyard, a high pitched shriek cuts through the air. It's an alarm, just like the one back in Arrorn! The entire courtyard is in chaos, people running this way and that, guards and civilians alike. The gateway out is on the other side, about a hundred yards away, sitting wide open. But it won't be for long, even from here you can see guards gathering by the big swinging doors, getting ready to push them closed and trap you inside. + + +"Quick, to the exit!" You shout, breaking into a run. Everyone else follows as you weave through the crowd, trying your best not to trample any innocent people. (If, indeed, there are any innocent people in this place). It looks like you might just make it, until you've made it about halfway across the courtyard. Seemingly out of nowhere, guards on little ponies, like the ones that invaded Arrorn, flank your band of criminals. Slowly but surely, they're closing in, going ahead of you to cut you off. If you don't do something fast, you're going to be surrounded. + + +There's no time to think though. No time to come up with a brilliant plan. Before you even quite realize it, there's nowhere left to go. The guards are in front and behind, to the right and to the left. You are struck with a strange sense of Deja Vu. This isn't the first time you've been in a situation like this, it happened back in Arrorn too! So if you just do the same thing you did before, you'll get out of it just fine. + + +"Don't stop!" You cry, "I'll clear a path!" + + +There's no time to pick out the weak link, so you just plow on forward, attacking the guard directly in your path. Soon as you get within range of the spears, you leap into the air and drive your foot into the guard's chest. He tumbles off the horse, screaming, and all the prisoners flow through the gap you've created. After you've ran a good thirty feet from the circle, you glance over your shoulder to make sure everyone got through. But to your horror, only about half have made it past the circle. The rest of the guards have closed in further, getting rid of the gap you created. More of them have to get taken out if you are to have any hope of saving everyone. + + +Worse, there are more guards coming from the sides, and the doors are halfway closed. If you don't get the rest of the prisoners out quick, no-one will make it out at all. +> Go back and save the rest of them +"Go on without me!" You cry, "I'll catch up!" You turn and run back to the circle of guards, and knock the first one you reach off his horse. Then you do it again, and again. By the time the guards realize what's happening, you've already taken out four of them. + + +The rest of the prisoners take this as their cue to leave, they rush through the gap you've created and head towards the gate, and as soon as the last of them has gone past you, you turn to follow, but find yourself face to face with even more guards. You tense for battle once more, and start swinging, taking down as many as you can! + + +But they're getting smarter. Instead of surrounding you, they all form a barrier in front of you, cutting you off from the gate. You try to plow through them as best you can, but as soon as you take out one, another takes its place! Suddenly, a sharp pain pierces your side. You look over to see a single Oalkwardner, driving a spear deeper and deeper into the side of your stomach. Then, another pain, this time in your back. You've been stabbed once again! + + +The pain brings you to your knees, as more and more spears pierce your flesh. The last thing you see before everything fades to black are the last few prisoners slipping through the door as it closes with a few of the Oalkwardner guards hot on their heels. Whether or not they survive is in their hands now...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After word gets around about how you helped save that Oalkwardner girl, the villagers seem to trust you enough to allow you to roam the city without sounding any alarms. Over the next few days, you help with preparations for the funeral, in part because there's nothing better to do, but also because you feel a little bad about not helping Merk with his search. Who knows? Maybe you would've been the difference between his life and death. + + +When the day of the funeral rolls around, the entire town gathers in the square. It's the most extravagant display you've ever seen in your short time at the village, with tons of food for all and more flowers than you've ever seen in one place before. It must've cost a fortune in... whatever these guys use as currency. Merk must've done quite a lot to help the community, because there sure are a lot of drooping ears. (Which, you've learned, is the Oalkwardner's equivalent to crying). + + +You stand at the edge of the crowd, still not quite feeling like a part of the community, as the Elder gives a speech. + + +"We are gathered here today to commemorate the life of Merk, Gertra, and Silia, three of the greatest-" + + +A pounding in the distance interrupts the speech. The whole crowd turns towards the source of the noise just in time to see a whole procession of Oalkwardners dressed in the brightest reds and yellows, all riding creatures like ponies, but with little spines running down their back instead of manes. They beat on little drums, all in sync. + + +The Oalkwardner at the front of the pack raises her arm and raises her voice. + + +"Presenting, the great Yelgar, Grand Protector of Realgna and the surrounding country!" + + +The Drummers beat their drums faster and faster now, parting to allow a carriage to pass through, drawn by three lizard-like creatures, the size of bulls. The crowd parts for the carriage, and it stops right in front of the stage. + + +The door on the side of the vessel opens, and out hops a rather tall Oalkwardner wearing a red cape and strange, red bracelets spiraling around the entirety of his forearms, like snakes. + + +"People of the village of Arrorn!" He says, "I have come with grave news. It truly is a shame to interrupt such a lavish funeral, but there are more important matters at hand. It has come to my attention that there is a base of Rebels in the area, planning to overthrow the kingdom and estate a blasphemous 'new order.' These are the very same rebels that killed these three!" He gestures at the paintings of the three fallen Oalkwardners, set on easels on the stage. "We must act now, lest our glorious empire be overthrown. Outside this village is the seventy-third division of the King's army, sent to protect this village and take out the Rebel scum in our midst! It is for this reason, that the King and I felt the need to impose martial law on this village and the surrounding area! We will also be tripling the tax to sustain our troops. And we'll be taking all this lovely food you've set out for the funeral. Desperate times, desperate measures and all that." + + +A cry of protest comes from deep within the crowd. "You're already taking three quarters of everything we have!" A female Oalkwardner pushes her way to the front of the crowd to confront the Yelgar. "We can barely survive as it is! And that food for the funeral is the last of our reserves, we only took it out in the first place because Merk and the others did so much for us in their lives!" + + +Yelgar stares her straight in the face. "I understand your concern." He says, "But as I said, desperate times, desperate measures. Guards, restrain her!" Two of the horsemen hop off their steeds and grab the girl by the arms, forcing her to her knees. Yelgar raises his hand, and slaps her across the face, and the crowd gasps. + + +"Do not question the authority of the Crown." Yelgar says, still deathly calm, "Or you might wind up like them too," he nods towards the paintings. + + +"Who gives a crap about the Crown? We're all gonna die anyway under your 'martial law', so may as well go out fighting!" The girl glares at Yelgar, as the whole crowd seems to hold its breath. + + +"I see how it is," Yelgar says, clearly disappointed. "Then let this be an example to anyone else who thinks of dissenting." He reaches beneath his cloak and pulls out a wooden knife, raising it above his head to strike at the girl, now trembling in the guards grip. + + +"C-come on," the girl says, voice faltering, "They can't stop all of us! I say we finish what those rebels started!" + + +Still, no one moves. The whole thing reminds you, once again, of the girl in the forest the night you woke up. The guilt of leaving her behind wells up within you, are you really gonna let it happen again? +> Yeah, I can live with that. This way I get to stay alive, even if I have to live as a coward. +You want to do something, you really do, but fear paralyzes you. It's all you can do to look away as the knife comes down. Even without looking, you know when the knife falls by the gasps of the crowd and the final screams of the victim. + + +"Do not forget the events of today," Yelgar says, "Remain under the crown, lest you meet the same fate as this poor, misguided soul here." + + +A wave of nausea hits you, you can barely manage to stay standing. What kind dictatorship is this? The village seemed almost peaceful when you first arrived, but now, you're not so sure. Your thoughts are interrupted when you hear one of the guards say, + + +"Sir! What on earth is that?" + + +You turn to see one of the taller soldiers pointing straight at you. Your heart begins to pound. Now the rest of the guards are looking at you, you can feel their eyes all over you, crawling over your skin like spiders. + + +"It's a monster!" Yelgar cries, "Capture it before it destroys the village!" + + +You should do something, run, hide, get ready to fight. But suddenly there doesn't seem to be enough oxygen in your lungs, as much as you gasp. You fall to your hands and knees, heaving. Another panic attack? There's no time for this, you have to escape... but it's so... hard to breathe.... + + +Before you know it, you're surrounded by guards, all pointing spears your way. They close in so tight that any one of them could take you out in one blow if they really needed to. Why isn't anyone standing up for you? They all know you're harmless. Maybe they're all too afraid to say anything. + + +The guards all bring down their spears at once, and you know no more...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“My face is fucking freezing,” says Lars. + + +No shit you think to yourself. It’s the middle of winter and you both are assigned to guard duty. Normally, the cold isn’t an issue. However, due to increasing demon sightings, a few unlucky bastards have to spend the night outside the city walls keeping watch. + + +Snow begins to fall, and your cheap leather armor offers little resistance. + + +“I can’t take it anymore, I quit.” + + +Lars tosses down his sword and walks towards the city entrance. + + +“What about the demons?” you ask. + + +He turns to you and a slight grin appears on his face. + + +“Demons? I welcome them with open arms. The city could use some heating up.” + + +With that, he leaves. It’s just you and the dead silence of the night. You try to stand still and focus on the dirt road leading away from the city. This road is where nearby demon sightings have occurred. A few minutes past and you swear you saw a red flash. Your hands shake and your heart beat slows down. Is your mind just playing tricks on you? Surely you’re just reacting to the cold, right? + + +Mere moments after this thought you hear a laugh. Unlike what you were expecting, this isn’t the laugh of some badass demon. No, it’s the laugh of a female. You try to tighten your grip on your sword but can’t move your fingers. Shit, maybe Lars had the right idea. Spending the night out here is a death sentence, regardless if demons attack. + + +You can’t bear to stand any longer and lower yourself to the ground. You drop your sword and curl into a ball. You don’t have the energy to move a muscle and your body becomes stiff. Your eyes shut close and you’re out cold seconds later. + + +“What’s a strong soldier like you doing out here all alone?” a soothing voice inquires. + + +You open your eyes to find yourself staring at barely clothed succubus. She radiates an intense heat, although it’s not enough to burn. + + +“Who are you?” you ask. + + +“My name’s Catia and you never answered my question. Why are you all alone?” + + +“My other guard, Lars, left. Look there’s his sword right there,” you say, feeling compelled to give more information than necessary. + + +Catia walks towards his sword and picks it up. + + +“Is this supposed to kill me? Ha! Don’t make me laugh. Why is your equipment so poor?” + + +You see no logical reason to tell a demon this but find yourself doing so instinctively. + + +“Ever since demons came near our city, trade has been impossible. We have no experience with a threat this large and thus don’t have the weapons or equipment to deal with it.” + + +She grins and salivates to your every word. You take a moment to stare at her figure. She looks more human than succubi are told to be. Still, there are a few stark differences. These being her bright red eyes, dark red curled horns, and pink tail. Oh, and she utterly beautiful. More so than any human you’ve seen. Despite being face to face demon for the first in your life, you feel entirely calm. Dare you say, the calmest you’ve ever felt. + + +This calmness is ripped away when she begins to leave. + + +“Where are you going?” + + +“Hm? You want me stay huh?” + + +“Yes… I do.” + + +She grins again and starts chewing on her tail in a seductive manner. + + +“Sorry, no can do. But if you want, I would love to see you again. Trust me, it will be the most pleasurable experience of your life. All you have to do for me is one small favor.” + + +You feel an intense compulsion to comply with her every demand, but you stop yourself. Making deals with demons is serious business. You have enough willpower to at least ask what the favor is. + + +She explains how if you want to meet again you need to be a more suggestive state, like you are right now due to the cold. She recommends going to a bar and drinking for a few hours. Then, all you have to do is whisper her name and she will come visit, provided that you’re alone. + + +She walks away leaving you all alone. As if in a trance, you make your way to The Drunk Tortoise Tavern. +> A few hours later... +“This is the last time I’m saying this Greg, immortality is not worth cutting off your cock. What’s the point of being immortal if you’re deprived of the best feeling in the world?” + + +“Ey’ maybe he’s lacking in that area. No wonder he wants immortality if all he has to do his cut off an inch or two worth of pecker.” + + +Greg suddenly stands up, drawing your eyes to the bickering trio. They’ve been arguing random hypotheticals since you’ve gotten here. All you wanted was to get a quiet drink before meeting with Catia. As long as these buffoons are here, that’s impossible. + + +Even as Greg stands up he’s shorter than the other two sitting. It’s no wonder they pick on him, he looks pathetic. + + +“Can you both just shut the fuck up? I mean, god damn. All I’m saying is living forever outweighs the downsides of not having a dick,” he says in a whiny voice. + + +The other two laugh uncontrollably at his pitiful attempt of defiance. One manages to calm down and spits out, + + +“Maybe when it’s smaller than a gnome’s toothbrush, but for the rest us it’s not so easy.” + + +Queue more uncontrollable laughter as Greg’s face becomes redder than demon blood. + + +“I’ll shove a gnome’s toothbrush up your ass if you say that one more time! C’mon, let’s move on to another question.” + + +The trio quiets down and you zone them out. You take a swig of whisky and start to remember the reason while you’re here. Oh yeah, the succubus. She wanted you to drink a bit before meeting her. You didn’t necessarily jump at the idea of getting drunk before meeting with a demon, but she promised you she would make it worthwhile. You’re pretty sure that means… + + +Your thoughts are interrupted by the thickheaded trio once again. + + +“You’re telling me you’d prefer your child be retarded and kind than ingenious and mean?” + + +“Yes Connor, I would.” + + +“God damn it, Greg! You want to spend an eternity with no dick while taking care of a retarded child? Pathetic. I would kill myself after a week.” + + +“Har har har! I would kill myself in a week if I had to live Greg’s life as it is. No, scratch that, a day!” + + +“Fuck you Tom. I can’t be the only one who thinks this…” + + +Greg glances around nervously looking for a savior. Eventually he turns his gaze towards you and his eyes light up. + + +“Hey you over there! What would you rather have, a dumb, but kind child; or a smart, but cruel child?” he says while pointing at you. + + +You stare blankly ahead and breathe a deep sigh. This is beyond stupid. You briefly consider just ignoring him and getting the hell out of this place. + + +“Why do you think that man would agree with you? He’s a soldier. Surely, he recognizes the benefits a genius could provide for society. Especially when you consider the need for mages regarding the growing demon problem.” + + +Soldier? Shit you forgot to change out of your uniform. So much for staying inconspicuous. You can thank your lucky stars none of the other guards are here to see you in this shithole. + + +“Now now, let the man speak. Just because he’s a soldier doesn’t mean he agrees with you,” says Tom. + + +“Fine, what do you think...and hurry up! We don’t have all day.” +> “I prefer a retarded but kind child." +“Thank you,” Greg whispers. + + +“You what!” + + +“Pfft! And to think, I used to respect soldiers.” + + +Tom and Connor start shouting about how much of a dumbass you are. You don’t bother to engage with such idiotic banter. Instead, you walk out of the tavern without a second glance. As you make your way outside you are hit with a rush of cool air. + + +“I can’t wait to meet Catia,” you mutter to yourself. + + +“Who’s Catia?” + + +You turn around and only see the entrance to the tavern. + + +“Hello?” + + +“Ermm down here sir!” + + +You glance down and instantly recoil. It’s Greg, what’s he doing here? + + +“What the hell do you want?” + + +He begins to squirm uncomfortably and hyperventilate. + + +“I…uh…I…erm…” + + +“Spit it out!” + + +“I wanted to thank you for agreeing with me,” he says between irregular gasps for air. + + +Oh, that’s why he’s here. You normally wouldn’t mind but you have plans tonight and have no time for conversation. + + +“People don’t agree with you often kid? That’s too bad,” you say while walking away. + + +“I’m not a kid, I’m 20. But yeah, everyone I meet either ignores or makes fun of me. I almost prefer the latter as at least they keep me company,” he says while following behind you. + + +“Damn that really sucks,” you stop walking and stare him in the eyes, “Look I’d love to keep you company, but I have somewhere very important to be.” + + +Greg looks at you with a face of disappointment. But he lights up to ask, + + +“Where do you have to be? Maybe I could come with you.” + + +Gah! As bad as you feel for Greg, under no circumstances could he come with you. She agreed to see you, not Greg and you. + + +“Sorry I don’t have time.” + + +“God damn it. Can you at least tell me why? I don’t want to be near Connor and Tom right now. They make me feel inhuman.” + + +Does this guy ever shut up? You been trying to exit this conversation gracefully since it started. You should just tell him to fuck off and be done it. Of course, you could humor him and tell him what you’re doing. It’s been hard keeping this succubus thing a secret and having someone to confide in wouldn’t be the worst thing in the world. On the other hand, you really want to go have demon sex. +> Talk to Greg +“Fine I’ll tell you why. But be warned, it’s a long story.” + + +“That’s alright, the longer I’m away from the other two the better.” + + +You take a deep breath and begin to describe your recent encounter with a succubus. + + +“Well it all started when I fell asleep during guard duty.” + + +Later + + +“And that’s why I came to this tavern.” + + +Greg looks off in the distance, taking in everything you’ve told him. He starts speaking aloud slowly asking, + + +“Do you think she was immortal?” + + +Immortal? Aren’t all demons immortal, unless killed? You’re no expert, but you have never heard of a demon dying of old age. + + +“I don’t have a clue to be honest. I was under the impression that her actual age is much more than her physical appearance would suggest though.” + + +Greg gives a nod satisfied with your answer. You feel like you’ve told Greg more than enough and decide it’s time to go. You wish him goodbye and feel a hint of longing in his response. + + +“Goodbye friend.” + + +You tuck your hands in your pockets and begin the walk to your home. You’re going to have to get home fast as the cold is unbearable. You decide to take the alleys, as not only is it faster, but it also provides protection from the wind. + + +Common sense says going through alleys at night isn’t safest, but Ashton is different than most cities. Crime is low, and poverty is uncommon as anyone can get a job as a guard as demand is higher than ever. The night’s sky combined with the tight spaced alley nearly blinds you. When you finally get out you’re relieved to have arrived at your parents’ house. + + +Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don’t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. + +You walk to your parent’s porch and open the door. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. + + +“Some things never change,” you whisper to yourself. + + +You immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers’ uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but your too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? + + +You feel like this is your purpose. It’s time to see Catia. + + +“Catia”. + + +A dark cloud appears in your room, dispelling a toxic fume. You start violently coughing as you vision blurs indiscriminately. Your eyes shut close and you feel you grip on reality slipping away from you. + + +“Ah shit,” you whisper before passing out. + + +Your eyes jitter open and you’re greeted by Catia stroking your face. Her palm flushes the coolness off your face. Beads of sweat drip furiously down your neck as she continues caressing you. + + +“Couldn’t wait a single day before seeing me again? How cute.” + + +She crawls onto your bed and moves closer to you. Her aura is all consuming and you feel your free will being drained away. Yet, the whole process is extremely pleasing to you. She moves her mouth to your ear and whispers, + + +“Do you want to see everything I have to offer?” + + +You bite your tongue to avoid instinctively shouting yes. This may be your last chance to not go through with this. At the very least, it would give you chance to ask her a few more questions. + + + +> Yes, I’m ready. +She takes no time to hesitate and begins kissing you. As she does so, she unties your tunic and throws it off. Her warm body pushes against your bare skin as you are filled with euphoria. + + +Soon both of you are completely naked. Catia pleases you in ways no other woman has or will ever be able to. Afterwards you both lay in bed panting as one thought races through your mind. + + +How do you get more of this? + + +1 Month Later + + +It’s been a month since you’ve started having sex with Catia on a regular basis. The first few times you felt great afterwards. However, lately she has been demanding more out of you. + + +First, you no longer have to say her name to see her. She visits you most nights whether you like her to or not. Last night she told you she wants to introduce you to a group: The Order of the Inferno. She told you they are a group of demons who could give you unimaginable powers in exchange for your help. You protested as you feared what could happen. Demon attacks are becoming more common and more lethal. Their reputation proceeds them and stomps out any curiosity you have of meeting one. Tales of rape, human consumption, and slavery are a few of many horrendous acts they have committed. + + +Yet, as always, she managed to convince you. As much as your mind tries to resist, her presence is intoxicating. You embrace it as fighting gets you nowhere. She tells you to meet you in a nearby forest tonight. This is the first time you're seeing her outside your bedroom since the day you met. You sneak out the city walls when no one is watching and blend into the shadows. + + +Although it is still winter, the temperature has unexpectedly risen. Some say its because of demonic power, others view it as being coincidence. Whatever it is, the cold will not be a hindrance. You reach the edge of the forest and feel your heart leaping out of your chest. While the city has many focused-on demons, other creatures lurk during the night. Just because Catia is on your side doesn’t mean you are safe. You keep this in mind as you take cover in bushes and flora periodically. + + +An intense red light comes into view causing you to close your eyes. You begin to stumble and fall to the ground. When you’re able to open your eyes, you find yourself staring up at a hooded figure. + + +“Who dares disturb me?” she hisses. + + +Behind a dark brown hood lies a demonic face. Compared to Catia, she is clearly not human. Although none of that matters now, you begin to explain, + + +“Catia told me to come here. Are you part of The Inferno Order?” + + +“She sent a human to the center of The Order of the Inferno! I guess she wants to make up for earlier. I could never turn down a good meal.” + + +She begins advancing towards you as a snake-like tongue hangs out of her mouth. + + +‘Wait! She told me you wanted my help and would give me powers in exchange.” + + +She begins to laugh as she towers over you. You’re helpless as she grabs your neck and leans in… to kiss you? + + +“My kiss is to die for!” + + +You surprise yourself when you send a punch flying at her mouth. She seems equally surprised as she falls backwards. + + +“I guess I can still resist,” you say. + + +You get up and start running away but it's no use. She’s much faster than you, especially considering she can fly. You don’t have many options left but need to decide quick. Do you run deeper in the forest and hope to lose her or run back to the city and put everyone at risk? +> Go deeper into the forest +You start running to the heart of the forest praying that you lose her. It’s to no avail, she easy catches up to you and it seems you reached your end. Right as she is in arm’s length she stops. Before you know it, she has flown away leaving you all alone. What’s the deal? + + +You quickly get your answer as you hear a monstrous screech. You suddenly feel extremely cold as a ghost like entity hovers above you. There’s no doubt about it, this is a wraith. They're well known for their madness and spreading it to all they encounter. + + +Your mind is assaulted with a barrage of incomprehensible whispering. Within seconds you wish that demon would have killed you as the pain you experience is like no other. Your life energy is sapped away from you when the wraith eats your soul. You haven’t died technically but exist as one of hundreds of souls trapped within the wraith’s body. You’re never heard from again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>She takes no time to hesitate and begins kissing you. As she does so, she unties your tunic and throws it off. Her warm body pushes against your bare skin as you are filled with euphoria. + + +Soon both of you are completely naked. Catia pleases you in ways no other woman has or will ever be able to. Afterwards you both lay in bed panting as one thought races through your mind. + + +How do you get more of this? + + +1 Month Later + + +It’s been a month since you’ve started having sex with Catia on a regular basis. The first few times you felt great afterwards. However, lately she has been demanding more out of you. + + +First, you no longer have to say her name to see her. She visits you most nights whether you like her to or not. Last night she told you she wants to introduce you to a group: The Order of the Inferno. She told you they are a group of demons who could give you unimaginable powers in exchange for your help. You protested as you feared what could happen. Demon attacks are becoming more common and more lethal. Their reputation proceeds them and stomps out any curiosity you have of meeting one. Tales of rape, human consumption, and slavery are a few of many horrendous acts they have committed. + + +Yet, as always, she managed to convince you. As much as your mind tries to resist, her presence is intoxicating. You embrace it as fighting gets you nowhere. She tells you to meet you in a nearby forest tonight. This is the first time you're seeing her outside your bedroom since the day you met. You sneak out the city walls when no one is watching and blend into the shadows. + + +Although it is still winter, the temperature has unexpectedly risen. Some say its because of demonic power, others view it as being coincidence. Whatever it is, the cold will not be a hindrance. You reach the edge of the forest and feel your heart leaping out of your chest. While the city has many focused-on demons, other creatures lurk during the night. Just because Catia is on your side doesn’t mean you are safe. You keep this in mind as you take cover in bushes and flora periodically. + + +An intense red light comes into view causing you to close your eyes. You begin to stumble and fall to the ground. When you’re able to open your eyes, you find yourself staring up at a hooded figure. + + +“Who dares disturb me?” she hisses. + + +Behind a dark brown hood lies a demonic face. Compared to Catia, she is clearly not human. Although none of that matters now, you begin to explain, + + +“Catia told me to come here. Are you part of The Inferno Order?” + + +“She sent a human to the center of The Order of the Inferno! I guess she wants to make up for earlier. I could never turn down a good meal.” + + +She begins advancing towards you as a snake-like tongue hangs out of her mouth. + + +‘Wait! She told me you wanted my help and would give me powers in exchange.” + + +She begins to laugh as she towers over you. You’re helpless as she grabs your neck and leans in… to kiss you? + + +“My kiss is to die for!” + + +You surprise yourself when you send a punch flying at her mouth. She seems equally surprised as she falls backwards. + + +“I guess I can still resist,” you say. + + +You get up and start running away but it's no use. She’s much faster than you, especially considering she can fly. You don’t have many options left but need to decide quick. Do you run deeper in the forest and hope to lose her or run back to the city and put everyone at risk? +> Go back to the city +You pump your muscles and start running back to the city walls. She follows you like a hawk, soaring above you with her wings. Once she’s directly above she swoops in. Too late though as you bolt through the city entrance. You keep running straight and dive into a nearby bush. You stop breathing and don’t dare move. You can sense that she is nearby, but she doesn’t seem to be trying to kill you anymore. Instead, you hear screaming in a nearby house followed by laughing. + + +Curiosity gets the better of you and you peak out from the bushes. You spot her in a house cornering a family. You know demons are monsters, but what benefit is there to killing innocent children and their parents? It’s senseless, what’s the point of destruction for destruction sake? You continue starring at her as she slashes the throat of presumably a father. But for some reason, she does not kill him. + + +What she does is much worse. She leaves him alive to watch as she sends a ball of red energy at the children. It renders them into ash, not giving them a chance to scream. You curse at yourself for indirectly causing this. Why did you listen to a demon anyways? You keep watching in nervous anticipation of her killing the father. Instead, she just leaves. What cruelty propels such an atrocious action? This man has lost all that’s dear to him, and she left him alive. + + +You stay in the bushes as she goes from house to house committing similar acts of violence. There must be a stop to the madness. You gather the courage to leave your bush haven. You dash away back to your home and fling the door open. Your immediately reaction is to get your sword and leather armor to slay the demon. Yet, the logical side of your mind tells you that’s suicide. There's another way, although you don’t want to admit it. What if you got drunk and contacted Catia to save your city? She saved your life before, maybe she can do it again? +> Slay the demon +You must slay the demon yourself. Catia didn’t bother showing up to the forest, why would she help you? You throw on your armor and pick up your sword. You grin at the thought of stabbing this demon to death. You haven’t ever felt pleasure from violence before, yet something tells you you’ll enjoy killing her. With your weapon and protection, you leave your home. + + +Terror has spread like wildfire. Bodies lay on the street charred and bruised. Your veins pulsate with anger. Why, tell me why? These are your neighbors and friends. You run with each step being more purposeful than the last. After a few hundred steps, you hear laughter. There she is, cornering a group of children. You yell to create a distraction, but she ignores you. The children are reduced to fragments of ember. + + +Destruction lies all around you with more bodies than you could count. You scream a battle cry of hatred and charge. She looks up and makes eye contact but doesn’t move. You resist the urge to strike her down as you know you are outmatched physically. Still, another urge gnaws at your conscious forcing you to spit out, + + +“Why would you do this?” + + +You’re surprised when she stops to think for a moment. + + +“I had everything I held dear to me ripped away. When Catia came to me with the idea of working along side a human, I couldn’t contain my anger.” + + +“What’s wrong with working with a human?” + + +She stares at you with pity. + + +“You truly don’t know? Why the hell are you helping Catia then? I don’t understand.” + + +You are equally confused and explain your relationship with Catia. + + +“Oh, so you’re her fuck toy then? Jesus Christ, she’ll never get back with such degrading tactics.” + + +You ignore her insult (although she said it more like an objective statement) and ask her, + + +“What do you mean get back? Demons invaded earth, why wouldn’t they want to finish the job?” + + +“You think we’re here willingly? Holy shit you’re brain dead, I still can’t get over Catia fucking a human as dumb as you. It would be like if you had sex with a jellyfish, completely different wavelengths.” + + +This hellish creature is relentless with her insults. Though it seems there is a fundamental misunderstanding between you two. + + +“If you’re not here by choice, why are you here?” + + +She explains that there is a demonic code in the infernal realm. Any demons who break it, are sent to lesser realms for a chance at redemption. + + +“And I was sent to one of the worst; Earth.” + + +“How do you get back?” + + +“I need to conquer not through destruction, but manipulation. It goes against my nature, but it is the way of life in the infernal realm where all strength is equal. To prove my worth, I need to work with humans and other lesser creatures.” + + +“Then why are you destroying my city?” + + +She sighs and furrows her eyebrows. + + +“Because I’m pissed off, ok?” + + +You continue talking to the demon, who tells you her name is Aria, until you come to a complete understanding of each other’s motivations. Still, after everything you’ve learned about each other she says, + + +“I’m still going to destroy your city. Although there may be one thing you could do to stop me…” + + +She explains how a nearby wizard has imprisoned her friend, Azor, and offers to spare your city in exchange for his freedom. + + +“You have 24 hours, or your city goes up in flames.” + + +Your blood boils over the fact she still desires to destroy the city. Your morality prevents you from standing aside and letting your city burn. You have your sword in hand and amour equipped. Why not pretend to agree then attack when she least expects it? +> Help save her friend +“I’ll help you to stop the destruction.” + + +“Great!” + + +Aria conjures a portal made of dark matter. + + +“Quick get in before it closes.” + + +You jump in, not knowing your destination. After a short transit, you find yourself outside of a tree house. You wanted to live in a tree house as a child, but now that your in front of one, they don’t seem very practical. + + +“How do I get inside?" you wonder aloud. + + +“The ladder.” + + +“Why didn’t I think of that! Thank you voice inside my head.” + + +“You're welcome, now free me from this ethereal prison.” + + +This must be who Aria was talking about, but you want to make sure. + + +“Say, what’s your name?” + + +“Amlodipine Olmesartan Medoxomil, but you may call me Azor for short.” + + +You climb the ladder and enter a room with wooden floors and walls. + + +“Why are you so fixated on the floors and walls? What did you expect a tree house to be made of?” + + +You don’t answer and continue examining your surroundings. A table lies in the center of the room aligned with various trinkets. One that catches your eye is a glowing red crystal ball. Your first instinct is to break it but you resist the temptation. + + +“What are you waiting for, mortal? Free me from this ethereal trap at once!” +> Free him +You grab the red crystal ball and drop it as it burns your finger tips. It shatters into a million pieces as a red fog pours out of it. + + +“Now open up!” + + +The red fog flows into your ears, mouth, and nose. Your eyes roll into the back of your head as your mind splits into two. Thoughts that aren’t your own begin to flood in. + + +“What are you waiting for? Let’s get the hell out of here.” + + +You climb down the ladder and exit the tree house. You don’t even know where you are right now but somehow know the way back is to the north. + + +“Take a rest, I’m taking over.” + + +Your face grows warm and you start feeling lightheaded. Your body still walks forward as you black out. You awaken in mid conversation sitting by a campfire. + + +“So when are you gonna get a better body Azor? Look at yourself, how will you kill anyone appearing like that.” + + +“Don’t be so dismissive Kancor, at least with this body he won’t have to worry about losing control.” + + +You look around and note the men you're talking with are much more muscular than yourself. There’s something off about them, their body language is inexpressive and follows little pattern. Sometimes their hands dangle from their arms and other times they jerk up and down. It all feels unnatural and inhuman. + + +“Looks like you might of spoke too soon Borax.” + + +“Nonsense, Azor is fucking with us and you're taking the bait. Now tell me, how did you convince this poor fuck to release you?” + + +You stare at these two men and know you can’t fight them. Plus, you feel a nauseating light-headed feeling. You could experience a loss of movement at any time if Azor gains control. + + +“I convinced him to break my crystal ball, releasing me from my ethereal prison,” you say remembering his own words. + + +“Yeah but how did you do it? Borax and me had to torture bandits to near death, how did you get someone to give you control willingly?” + + +“He had no idea I would gain control,” you say with a hint of spite. + + +“Damn small-muscled and a moron? Looks like you hit the jackpot with this one.” + + +“I sure did…” + + +You talk for a little longer before Borax puts out the fire. Despite having little clothing for spending a night outside in the winter, you don’t feel cold. Is Azor’s presence maintaining your normal body temperatures? + + +“What’s the point of putting out the fire? We’re going to have to use twice as much energy to stay warm.” + + +“We’re demons, not monsters. Wouldn’t want an entire forest burning down for no reason.” + + +“Wasn’t the poor bastard you’re possessing now screaming ‘Monster! Monster!’ when you tortured him?” + + +“Kancor, you know I had no choice. He was being uncooperative and I needed to put him in his place.” + + +“Well you can think about how you had no choice but to mutilate his ball sack into a dough-like mess over sleep.” + + +All three of you lie down on lovely dirt mattresses. You stare eyes open fearing you might lose control at any moment. After what feels like an hour, you’re sure both of them are asleep. You could get up and make your escape, although you have no idea where you are. Something tells you north is the way to go, but you have no idea how long of a journey it will be and when you will lose control again. You could fall asleep and wait until you're closer to safety. But what good will that even do? Azor will still coexist with you like an infernal parasite. + + + +> Escape +You get up and sneak away, careful not to step on any sticks. Once you’re a good distance away, you break into a sprint. You need to get out of here before they realize you're gone. If Ashton, or any city for that matter, is nearby, then maybe someone could help you. You heard about demon purges before but it never seemed to be the most pleasant process. What choice do you have if you want to hold onto your own free will? + + +While running you start to feel incredibly dizzy. Your head sways up and down, spit drips out of your mouth, and you begin to fall. You wait for Azor to take over, but he never does. A coldness perpetuates all around you as you go numb. There will be no one to save you as you pass out from the freezing temperatures. You die a relatively painless death. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grab the red crystal ball and drop it as it burns your finger tips. It shatters into a million pieces as a red fog pours out of it. + + +“Now open up!” + + +The red fog flows into your ears, mouth, and nose. Your eyes roll into the back of your head as your mind splits into two. Thoughts that aren’t your own begin to flood in. + + +“What are you waiting for? Let’s get the hell out of here.” + + +You climb down the ladder and exit the tree house. You don’t even know where you are right now but somehow know the way back is to the north. + + +“Take a rest, I’m taking over.” + + +Your face grows warm and you start feeling lightheaded. Your body still walks forward as you black out. You awaken in mid conversation sitting by a campfire. + + +“So when are you gonna get a better body Azor? Look at yourself, how will you kill anyone appearing like that.” + + +“Don’t be so dismissive Kancor, at least with this body he won’t have to worry about losing control.” + + +You look around and note the men you're talking with are much more muscular than yourself. There’s something off about them, their body language is inexpressive and follows little pattern. Sometimes their hands dangle from their arms and other times they jerk up and down. It all feels unnatural and inhuman. + + +“Looks like you might of spoke too soon Borax.” + + +“Nonsense, Azor is fucking with us and you're taking the bait. Now tell me, how did you convince this poor fuck to release you?” + + +You stare at these two men and know you can’t fight them. Plus, you feel a nauseating light-headed feeling. You could experience a loss of movement at any time if Azor gains control. + + +“I convinced him to break my crystal ball, releasing me from my ethereal prison,” you say remembering his own words. + + +“Yeah but how did you do it? Borax and me had to torture bandits to near death, how did you get someone to give you control willingly?” + + +“He had no idea I would gain control,” you say with a hint of spite. + + +“Damn small-muscled and a moron? Looks like you hit the jackpot with this one.” + + +“I sure did…” + + +You talk for a little longer before Borax puts out the fire. Despite having little clothing for spending a night outside in the winter, you don’t feel cold. Is Azor’s presence maintaining your normal body temperatures? + + +“What’s the point of putting out the fire? We’re going to have to use twice as much energy to stay warm.” + + +“We’re demons, not monsters. Wouldn’t want an entire forest burning down for no reason.” + + +“Wasn’t the poor bastard you’re possessing now screaming ‘Monster! Monster!’ when you tortured him?” + + +“Kancor, you know I had no choice. He was being uncooperative and I needed to put him in his place.” + + +“Well you can think about how you had no choice but to mutilate his ball sack into a dough-like mess over sleep.” + + +All three of you lie down on lovely dirt mattresses. You stare eyes open fearing you might lose control at any moment. After what feels like an hour, you’re sure both of them are asleep. You could get up and make your escape, although you have no idea where you are. Something tells you north is the way to go, but you have no idea how long of a journey it will be and when you will lose control again. You could fall asleep and wait until you're closer to safety. But what good will that even do? Azor will still coexist with you like an infernal parasite. + + + +> Fall Asleep +You drift off to sleep, wondering if you’ll wake up in the same place. + + +An unknown amount of time later + + +You wake up starring at a bloody pile of human corpses. You’re carrying an iron sword that’s stained red. The stained sword seems like the proximate cause of human bodies. You hold back from throwing up as you notice all the stab wounds that you made. You feel lightheaded and can’t tell if its because of the bodies or Azor. Regardless, you have to get out of here before someone sees you. You run from the murder scene and notice you’re in a small village. The sun is beginning to rise and people are going to wake up any minute. Needing to get the hell out of here, you take off running to the north. You hear screams in the distance the moment you take off. They must have discovered the bodies… + + +Once out of the village, you bend over gasping for air. Your heart flutters as you feel like you’re gonna pass out from adrenaline. You stumble haphazardly knowing the villagers are on the lookout for a killer. You need to reach Ashton, you need to know it’s ok. The thought that Aria manipulated you and destroyed your city spikes your anxiety. This isn’t the only thought that is causing you panic though. + + +You have a fucking demon inside of you. It’s like a tape worm but instead of wanting food it craves evil. What happens if you return to Ashton and lose control? What if you’re the one who destroys the city under Azor’s guidance? Your thoughts are too much causing you to stop dead in your tracks. Why should you try to reach Ashton just to lose control? Instead, you could turn around and go back to the village. If you explained you situation, they may be able to help you. + + + +> Go back to the village +You’ve seemed to lack so much control over your choices ever since you met Aria. Now that Azor is involved, this lack of control has intensified. This may be your last chance to make your own choice. It’s time to put an end to this. You turn around and sprint back to the village. When you arrive, the villagers don’t seem very happy. + + +“That’s the murderer! I saw him run away covered in blood.” + + +“Yeah and he has a sword! Let’s get him!” + + +It probably would have been a good idea to change clothes and ditch the sword. Or, you know, go to any other place but the village you just killed someone at. No matter, this was your choice and you have to live with the consequences. + + +“Please let me explain.” + + +They give you no chance as they charge at you with pitch forks and makeshift swords. You are beaten to a bloody pulp until you die from loss of blood.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You drift off to sleep, wondering if you’ll wake up in the same place. + + +An unknown amount of time later + + +You wake up starring at a bloody pile of human corpses. You’re carrying an iron sword that’s stained red. The stained sword seems like the proximate cause of human bodies. You hold back from throwing up as you notice all the stab wounds that you made. You feel lightheaded and can’t tell if its because of the bodies or Azor. Regardless, you have to get out of here before someone sees you. You run from the murder scene and notice you’re in a small village. The sun is beginning to rise and people are going to wake up any minute. Needing to get the hell out of here, you take off running to the north. You hear screams in the distance the moment you take off. They must have discovered the bodies… + + +Once out of the village, you bend over gasping for air. Your heart flutters as you feel like you’re gonna pass out from adrenaline. You stumble haphazardly knowing the villagers are on the lookout for a killer. You need to reach Ashton, you need to know it’s ok. The thought that Aria manipulated you and destroyed your city spikes your anxiety. This isn’t the only thought that is causing you panic though. + + +You have a fucking demon inside of you. It’s like a tape worm but instead of wanting food it craves evil. What happens if you return to Ashton and lose control? What if you’re the one who destroys the city under Azor’s guidance? Your thoughts are too much causing you to stop dead in your tracks. Why should you try to reach Ashton just to lose control? Instead, you could turn around and go back to the village. If you explained you situation, they may be able to help you. + + + +> Continue to Ashton +You keep running north, praying it’s the way to Ashton. It’s a long journey, and you find yourself having to piss multiple times. During one of these pisses you lose muscle control and fall into a puddle of your own urine. When you come to, you find yourself in Ashton. Or at least, what used to be Ashton. The city has been completely destroyed, houses burned to the ground and there’s not another soul in sight. You do sense someone being nearby and search for any survivors. + + +What you find instead sends you into a rage. It’s Aria and she is looking at you smugly. + + +“Good job destroying the city, you did a much better job than I ever could.” + + +You hold back from attacking her considering you no longer have your sword. You make an emotional plea and say, + + +“You promised you wouldn’t destroy the city if I freed Azor.” + + +She laughs and starts to fly circles around you. + + +“Au contraire my little killer. YOU destroyed the city and I kept my promise. Thanks to you I’ve been granted a passage home.” + + +“What are you even talking about? How could I destroy the city if I don’t have a weapon?” + + +She laughs again and stops flying to land beside you. + + +“When you black out, you take on a different form. Azor is capable of much more than you ever will be.” + + +This can’t be real, you’ve gone through so much just to be a pawn in her little game. You wish you just died on that freezing night instead of having Catia save you. Maybe Ashton would still exist if it weren’t for you. + + +“Don’t be so sad, you’re coming with me!” + + +You stare daggers at her. + + +“What do you mean I’m coming with you?” + + +“You’re coming home with me of course. Azor’s a demon too and you couldn’t have destroyed the city without him. And thanks to you, Tornaxaan, a powerful demon lord, commended us for tricking you into destroying your own city. As a reward, we get to return to the infernal realm.” + + +“Can’t you just let me go? Surely Azor could possess a different body...” + + +“Nonsense, now grab my hand. We’re going to have so much fun!” + + + +> Epilogue #3: Returning to a Home Unknown +“So your name’s Coyote?” + + +“Yes, and I presume you’re Azor?” + + +At this point you don’t even bother correcting people. Your moments of control are becoming more scarce and there’s no point in wasting it telling people you aren’t Azor. + + +“That’s correct, now tell me, how can I get sent to Earth?” + + +“You could try learning dark magic, that’s how my friend Jirzan got there.” + + +Dark magic is notorious for being hard to control. Still, it might be your best option. + + +“Dark magic sounds interesting. Is there some sort of teleportation spell that can get me back to earth? Oh, maybe I could learn to conjure a portal!” + + +Coyote, who is half man half coyote, shows what would be a pleasant smile if he didn’t have two monstrous fangs. + + +“No nothing like that, you don’t even have to learn a single spell. Just being in possession of a dark magic book, or kit, will be enough to get you sent back.” + + +“And where could I get such resources?” + + +“I wish I knew, but dark magic is heavily guarded by the most elite demons. I would take a look in Tornaxxan’s castle, just don’t get caught.” + + +“Yeah I wasn’t planning to. Thanks for your help Coyote, I’ll try to sneak in before it's too late.” + + +“Too late? Buddy, you got an eternity to figure this out.” + + +“Sure I do,” you say while sulking away. + + +Coyote calls after you, + + +“Before you go, could you do me a favor?” + + +You stop and pause to ask, + + +“What?” + + +“If you ever meet a demon named Jirzan, tell him I’ve been released from captivity. He’ll be happy to hear that.” + + +“I’ll be sure to tell him if I get the chance.” + + +Coyote wags his tail as you wave goodbye. Who knows if you’ll ever return home? And if you do, when can you get rid of Azor? Life used to be so much simpler.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“I’ll help you to stop the destruction.” + + +“Great!” + + +Aria conjures a portal made of dark matter. + + +“Quick get in before it closes.” + + +You jump in, not knowing your destination. After a short transit, you find yourself outside of a tree house. You wanted to live in a tree house as a child, but now that your in front of one, they don’t seem very practical. + + +“How do I get inside?" you wonder aloud. + + +“The ladder.” + + +“Why didn’t I think of that! Thank you voice inside my head.” + + +“You're welcome, now free me from this ethereal prison.” + + +This must be who Aria was talking about, but you want to make sure. + + +“Say, what’s your name?” + + +“Amlodipine Olmesartan Medoxomil, but you may call me Azor for short.” + + +You climb the ladder and enter a room with wooden floors and walls. + + +“Why are you so fixated on the floors and walls? What did you expect a tree house to be made of?” + + +You don’t answer and continue examining your surroundings. A table lies in the center of the room aligned with various trinkets. One that catches your eye is a glowing red crystal ball. Your first instinct is to break it but you resist the temptation. + + +“What are you waiting for, mortal? Free me from this ethereal trap at once!” +> Keep looking around +You continue searching the tree house until you find a book. It's titled in a language you don't understand. You pick it up to get and a closer look and it seems to be some sort of spell book. + + +"Don't read that!" screams Azor. + + +But it's too late, you've already opened the book. You poof into nothingness and die in unpredictable fashion.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You must slay the demon yourself. Catia didn’t bother showing up to the forest, why would she help you? You throw on your armor and pick up your sword. You grin at the thought of stabbing this demon to death. You haven’t ever felt pleasure from violence before, yet something tells you you’ll enjoy killing her. With your weapon and protection, you leave your home. + + +Terror has spread like wildfire. Bodies lay on the street charred and bruised. Your veins pulsate with anger. Why, tell me why? These are your neighbors and friends. You run with each step being more purposeful than the last. After a few hundred steps, you hear laughter. There she is, cornering a group of children. You yell to create a distraction, but she ignores you. The children are reduced to fragments of ember. + + +Destruction lies all around you with more bodies than you could count. You scream a battle cry of hatred and charge. She looks up and makes eye contact but doesn’t move. You resist the urge to strike her down as you know you are outmatched physically. Still, another urge gnaws at your conscious forcing you to spit out, + + +“Why would you do this?” + + +You’re surprised when she stops to think for a moment. + + +“I had everything I held dear to me ripped away. When Catia came to me with the idea of working along side a human, I couldn’t contain my anger.” + + +“What’s wrong with working with a human?” + + +She stares at you with pity. + + +“You truly don’t know? Why the hell are you helping Catia then? I don’t understand.” + + +You are equally confused and explain your relationship with Catia. + + +“Oh, so you’re her fuck toy then? Jesus Christ, she’ll never get back with such degrading tactics.” + + +You ignore her insult (although she said it more like an objective statement) and ask her, + + +“What do you mean get back? Demons invaded earth, why wouldn’t they want to finish the job?” + + +“You think we’re here willingly? Holy shit you’re brain dead, I still can’t get over Catia fucking a human as dumb as you. It would be like if you had sex with a jellyfish, completely different wavelengths.” + + +This hellish creature is relentless with her insults. Though it seems there is a fundamental misunderstanding between you two. + + +“If you’re not here by choice, why are you here?” + + +She explains that there is a demonic code in the infernal realm. Any demons who break it, are sent to lesser realms for a chance at redemption. + + +“And I was sent to one of the worst; Earth.” + + +“How do you get back?” + + +“I need to conquer not through destruction, but manipulation. It goes against my nature, but it is the way of life in the infernal realm where all strength is equal. To prove my worth, I need to work with humans and other lesser creatures.” + + +“Then why are you destroying my city?” + + +She sighs and furrows her eyebrows. + + +“Because I’m pissed off, ok?” + + +You continue talking to the demon, who tells you her name is Aria, until you come to a complete understanding of each other’s motivations. Still, after everything you’ve learned about each other she says, + + +“I’m still going to destroy your city. Although there may be one thing you could do to stop me…” + + +She explains how a nearby wizard has imprisoned her friend, Azor, and offers to spare your city in exchange for his freedom. + + +“You have 24 hours, or your city goes up in flames.” + + +Your blood boils over the fact she still desires to destroy the city. Your morality prevents you from standing aside and letting your city burn. You have your sword in hand and amour equipped. Why not pretend to agree then attack when she least expects it? +> Pretend to help, then backstab her +“I’ll help you seeing as I don’t have much choice.” + + +“Great!” + + +Aria conjures a portal made of dark matter. + + +“What are you waiting for, jump in!” + + +You instead jump at her with your sword. This does not go as planned as you are reflected by a pulse of telekinetic energy. + + +“I had a feeling you might betray me. After all, I did just massacre half of your city. Humans emotions are soooo predictable.” + + +Before you can even scream, she burns you head to toe. You are reduced to a bubbling puddle of human flesh. + + +“Great, what body will Azor possess now?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You pump your muscles and start running back to the city walls. She follows you like a hawk, soaring above you with her wings. Once she’s directly above she swoops in. Too late though as you bolt through the city entrance. You keep running straight and dive into a nearby bush. You stop breathing and don’t dare move. You can sense that she is nearby, but she doesn’t seem to be trying to kill you anymore. Instead, you hear screaming in a nearby house followed by laughing. + + +Curiosity gets the better of you and you peak out from the bushes. You spot her in a house cornering a family. You know demons are monsters, but what benefit is there to killing innocent children and their parents? It’s senseless, what’s the point of destruction for destruction sake? You continue starring at her as she slashes the throat of presumably a father. But for some reason, she does not kill him. + + +What she does is much worse. She leaves him alive to watch as she sends a ball of red energy at the children. It renders them into ash, not giving them a chance to scream. You curse at yourself for indirectly causing this. Why did you listen to a demon anyways? You keep watching in nervous anticipation of her killing the father. Instead, she just leaves. What cruelty propels such an atrocious action? This man has lost all that’s dear to him, and she left him alive. + + +You stay in the bushes as she goes from house to house committing similar acts of violence. There must be a stop to the madness. You gather the courage to leave your bush haven. You dash away back to your home and fling the door open. Your immediately reaction is to get your sword and leather armor to slay the demon. Yet, the logical side of your mind tells you that’s suicide. There's another way, although you don’t want to admit it. What if you got drunk and contacted Catia to save your city? She saved your life before, maybe she can do it again? +> Contact Catia +How could you possibly save your city and survive? As much as you don’t want to admit it, you can’t win without some help. You sprint to the drunk tortoise tavern (which luckily is on the opposite side of the city that is being terrorized) and bust through the door. It’s completely empty aside from a single person. + + +“Long time no see bud.” + + +It’s Greg, he has bright red cheeks and is swaying slightly. + + +“Why are you still here? There’s a demon on a murder rampage outside!” + + +He chuckles then says, + + +“Sometimes you don’t want to be saved. I’m staying here and if I die, so be it.” + + +“Well let me join you,” you say with no intention of sitting around to die. + + +You and Greg sit together and talk about all sorts of things while drinking. This isn’t like the before, when the conversation revolved around meaningless hypotheticals. You delve into some deep shit in a relatively short amount of time. You talk about politics, the meaning of life, and what happens after you die. While this is all going on, the demon continues massacring your entire city. Oops, looks like getting drunk has made you forget your priorities. When the realization dawns on you after a few drinks, you waste no time in shouting, + + +“Catia!” + + +Greg squints at you, clearly remembering the name from the last time you talked. This look of curiosity turns into horror as a swirling red cloud appears in front of you. Catia stands before you but looks much different than before. Unlike her human-like form, she has dark red skin and humongous bat wings. + + +“You call me once again, how pathetic are you?” + + +This question strikes you with surprise as it’s the first time she has shown open hostility towards you. Greg on the other hand begins laughing, then says, + + +“Is this the demon that’s been destroying the city? Man, I thought it would be at least a little bigger than that. I know it's rich coming from me, but damn how can something as small as that destroy the city?” + + +“Shut up already Greg! This isn’t the demon that’s been attacking the city.” + + +Greg looks at you in confusion as Catia speaks up, + + +“He's right you know, I haven’t killed a single person in weeks. That is, until now.” + + +Catia takes to the air and flies towards Greg. His drunken state makes him slow to react as Catia rips his throat out. Blood sprays everywhere like a broken faucet. + + +“Who’s the small one now, bitch?” + + +“Jeez I know he was asking for it, but you didn’t have to kill him.” + + +Catia turns her head towards you and shows no remorse. Her pupils have shrunk, giving her eyes a milk white appearance. + + +“This is all your fault, why couldn’t you have just listened to Aria?” + + +She advances towards you, snarling like a wild beast. + + +“Wait just a second I didn’t have a chance—“ + + +And you didn’t have a chance to finish that sentence either as Catia pulls your throat off your body like a soldier grabs a sword off a rack. You die in a puddle of mixed, throat extracted, blood.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Fine I’ll tell you why. But be warned, it’s a long story.” + + +“That’s alright, the longer I’m away from the other two the better.” + + +You take a deep breath and begin to describe your recent encounter with a succubus. + + +“Well it all started when I fell asleep during guard duty.” + + +Later + + +“And that’s why I came to this tavern.” + + +Greg looks off in the distance, taking in everything you’ve told him. He starts speaking aloud slowly asking, + + +“Do you think she was immortal?” + + +Immortal? Aren’t all demons immortal, unless killed? You’re no expert, but you have never heard of a demon dying of old age. + + +“I don’t have a clue to be honest. I was under the impression that her actual age is much more than her physical appearance would suggest though.” + + +Greg gives a nod satisfied with your answer. You feel like you’ve told Greg more than enough and decide it’s time to go. You wish him goodbye and feel a hint of longing in his response. + + +“Goodbye friend.” + + +You tuck your hands in your pockets and begin the walk to your home. You’re going to have to get home fast as the cold is unbearable. You decide to take the alleys, as not only is it faster, but it also provides protection from the wind. + + +Common sense says going through alleys at night isn’t safest, but Ashton is different than most cities. Crime is low, and poverty is uncommon as anyone can get a job as a guard as demand is higher than ever. The night’s sky combined with the tight spaced alley nearly blinds you. When you finally get out you’re relieved to have arrived at your parents’ house. + + +Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don’t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. + +You walk to your parent’s porch and open the door. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. + + +“Some things never change,” you whisper to yourself. + + +You immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers’ uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but your too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? + + +You feel like this is your purpose. It’s time to see Catia. + + +“Catia”. + + +A dark cloud appears in your room, dispelling a toxic fume. You start violently coughing as you vision blurs indiscriminately. Your eyes shut close and you feel you grip on reality slipping away from you. + + +“Ah shit,” you whisper before passing out. + + +Your eyes jitter open and you’re greeted by Catia stroking your face. Her palm flushes the coolness off your face. Beads of sweat drip furiously down your neck as she continues caressing you. + + +“Couldn’t wait a single day before seeing me again? How cute.” + + +She crawls onto your bed and moves closer to you. Her aura is all consuming and you feel your free will being drained away. Yet, the whole process is extremely pleasing to you. She moves her mouth to your ear and whispers, + + +“Do you want to see everything I have to offer?” + + +You bite your tongue to avoid instinctively shouting yes. This may be your last chance to not go through with this. At the very least, it would give you chance to ask her a few more questions. + + + +> No, let’s just talk. +As the words leave your lips you feel Catia’s mood shift. She seems more hostile saying, + + +“Do you not find me attractive or something? I don’t have time to talk and have many more people to see after you. Let’s focus on the now shall we? Take of your clothes.” +> Take of your clothes +You follow her command as she details step by step what you should do. + + +“Ok now remove your tunic. Good, throw it on the floor and put your pants on top. Great job!” + + +She tells you things along the same lines until you're completely devoid of any clothing. + + +“Now here comes the fun part, get on your hands and knees.” + + +You’ve already come this far, might as well comply. You get down and have to arch your back to stare up at her. The uncomfortable position does not bother you as all you can focus on is her figure. Damn she sure is beautiful. Especially when she says incantations. Hey, that’s what she’s saying right now!” + + +“Sarahkahnar Hor zeef narze taf!” + + +When she finishes you have a out of body experience. It’s like you're having an orgasm all over your body. Yet, it’s so much more than just that. Your whole room is having an organism and you feel it all. The walls, the table, the bed, and even clumps of dust experience this sensation along side you. It’s magical and you don’t care if she’s a so called demon, she is a blessing to this world. You can’t keep this feeling inside and whisper, + + +“I love…” + + +You pass out before finishing from pure ecstasy. When you regain consciousness you feel utterly cold. You’re naked as Catia towers over you. + + +"Saying the word 'love' after our first night together tells me all I need to know about you." + + +"What's that?" + + +She grows quiet and says in a pitiful tone, + + +"You're too weak-willed to be of any real use to me. Best I throw away the trash before it makes my presence known." + + +You try to question her but find yourself unable to move. A white spirit begins to flow out of your body. + + +"Don't think I'm taking your soul or anything. I'm merely releasing you from your human form." + + +Soon everything turns black as you find yourself floating in infinite space. Other floating spirits whiz around, but you're unable to communicate with any of them. You never escape this purgatory and soon forget how you got here. The weak-willed guard from Ashton is remembered as nothing more than a victim of the demon invasion.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As the words leave your lips you feel Catia’s mood shift. She seems more hostile saying, + + +“Do you not find me attractive or something? I don’t have time to talk and have many more people to see after you. Let’s focus on the now shall we? Take of your clothes.” +> Refuse +“I will be doing no such thing,” you say in protest. + + +Catia raises her eyebrow before breaking out in laughter. + + +“Well this is a first,” she says. + + +You stare at her as she seems to be deciding whether she’ll force you to remove your clothes. You feel the sweat drip down your back when she finally says, + + +“Maybe I really deserved to be sent here. I can’t even manipulate a human into having sex with me.” + + +A black cloud appears as she disappears from your room. You start violently coughing but don’t pass out this time. It’s not like it matters, you need to sleep anyway. You put out your candles and fall into bed. You focus on your breathing as you drift off to sleep. Best to reflect on what happens when you have a clearer mind. + + +You wake up with a throbbing pain in your head. The light coming from your window floods your mind with intense pain. Guess you drunk more last night than you thought. You decide its best to make yourself some food and drink to clear your head. You grab water and a slice of peach pie you made a few days ago. You scarf the food down and shallow the water in huge gulps. Your head should start feeling better within the next few hours. + + +Except it doesn’t, you lie in bed with constant tension on your head. It’s like someone is squeezing your brain with both hands, but not hard enough to cause physical harm. Something unnatural is going on and you know it. Hangovers should get better after rest, not worse. It’s hard to focus on anything but the pain. You try remembering what Catia did before she left. She dispelled a black cloud which didn’t knock you out. Is it possible this was a curse? + + +The more you think about it, the more it makes sense. While she tried not to show it, she was upset you resisted her temptation. She wanted you to pay for hurting her ego. That bitch! As you think about her more, tension is released from your skull. In fact, you're able to think about her in vivid detail and feel headache free. Although, the second you stop thinking about her the pain comes rushing back. This certainly isn’t good. + + +You’re going to have to do something about this. There is one obvious solution which is trying to contact Catia and having her remove the curse. Though who knows if she’ll even remove it, assuming she still wants to visit you. The other option is going to a local witch doctor and having them remove the curse. Although, you’ve heard they’ve been busy since demons first started being sighted. Maybe the curse is temporary, why not wait it out? +> Call for Catia +You can barely move, so you know you’re in a susceptible state. The question is, does she still want to see you? + + +“Catia,” you whisper. + + +You wait a few tense seconds and feel the pain in your head begin to relieve itself. But then, nothing. She never comes and the pain comes rushing back. You find tears streaming down your face as you realize your chances with Catia are probably over. You’re also in no state to continue working as a guard and will probably be fired soon. The only thing you can do is lay in bed and suffer. + + +Days past and your state of mind only gets worse. You begin seeing shadowy figures at the corner of your eyes. One day you manage to touch one and ask, + + +“Who are you?” + + +He laughs and laughs before disappearing. This isn’t the most psychologically scaring part of this ordeal. Your recurring nightmares are much worse. You dream of your family returning home in vivid detail, only for it to all come crashing down as you realize they're not real. You stop eating and drink only when necessary. It gets to a point where you know if you don’t try to seek help you will die. + + +You have no idea where to go for help, especially since the local witch doctor has been arrested for using humans as potion ingredients. You wander aimlessly taking morning walks in a vain attempt to find your savior. Shadowy figures whisper about you as you walk past. + + +“There’s nothing out here, return home” + + +“You’re never going to get better, why not end it?” + + +You’ve been seeing these shadowy figures more frequently recently. You chalk this up to your lack of sleep. Sleeping is when your most vulnerable, so you try to do as little of it as you can. + + +During a morning walk you run into a familiar face. It’s your childhood friend Julia. You haven’t seen her since schooling and boy does she look different. + + +“Is that…” she says + + +“Yeah it’s me,” you reply + + +“Boy do you look different.” + + +You haven’t been grooming yourself since the madness occurred. You have lots of dark circles under your eyes and probably don’t smell too good either. + + +“You also look different.” + + +She raises an eyebrow not knowing if your complementing or insulting her. + + +“In a good way in a good way!” you clarify. + + +She laughs as her dress flows in the wind. + + +“Sorry I can’t say the same to you. Down on your luck?” + + +“That’s putting it lightly,” you say jokingly, even though it’s the truth. + + +“Hahah I bet. I was just about to get some coffee, wanna come with?” + + +“Would I ever! Is it ok if the shadow people follow along?” + + +“The what?” + + +“Never mind.” + + +Later + + +Julia and you decided to go to the Cinnamon Pearl Cafe. As fancy as it may seem, its nothing more than a place to eat pastries and drink coffee. She begins telling you what’s she’s been doing lately. + + +“You know Andy right?” + + +“Of course, me and him have been on guard duty together a couple times.” + + +Julia bites her lips and chooses her words carefully, + + +“Well we broke up recently due to the fact that he...he...raped me...” + + +You’re shocked at this revelation, Andy has always seemed like a standup guy. + + +“How could he do such a thing?” + + +“He’s a piece of shit that’s how!” + + +Your lower your head as she composes herself. + + +“Sorry, I’m just not in the best mental space right now.” + + +“No need to apologize, you have every right to be angry.” + + +“Thank you.” + + +“So tell me, what happened?” + + +She explains how one night, after a long tiring day working as a cleaner, Andy wanted sex. They had been dating for a few months and had yet to have sex. The conversation went a little like this, + + +“All of my other friends constantly brag about sex. If I keep telling them I haven’t fucked you yet they might start thinking I’m gay," says Andy. + + +“Stop pressuring me! I told you, I am not in the mood and am not ready to pursue that kind of relationship with you.” + + +“You’re such a bitch, you know that right? Fuck you make me angry,” Andy says while walking towards Julia menacingly. + + +“Back off, get away from me!” + + +Julia stops talking and begins to choke up. She covers her face with her hands and says shakily, + + +“He grabbed me and wouldn’t let go. I tried to scream but he covered my mouth and clenched my throat. He violated me and nobody cares to do anything about it. Everyone’s to focused on the damn demons to give a shit about poor ol’ me.” + + +“That’s horrible, who else have you told?” + + +“Just you and the captain of the fucking guards. He wouldn’t even fire him, saying the demand for guards is ‘very high’ right now. No guard is better than a guards that’s a mother fucking rapist.” + + +“I wish I could help, but the captain probably won’t listen to me anymore. I haven’t shown up for work in days and didn’t give any notice.” + + +“It’s ok, I don’t want the captain’s help anyways. I need to move on and be strong.” + + +You make small talk about various things before saying your goodbyes. With Julia in such a vulnerable state, you wonder if it’s best to give her time to heal. At the same time, you long for human relationship. The shadow figures just aren’t the same as real human contact. +> Give her time to heal +You decide it’s best to give it time before pursuing a relationship. Not just for her, but you as well. You figure you’ll stop seeing shadow people sooner than later and be in a better headspace. A few days go by and the shadowy figures start to appear in the corner of your eyes. You’re starting to regret your decision of not pursing Julia but they reassure you. + + +“You’re better of without her.” + + +“Why have friends when you have us?” + + +And a particularly rude one says, + + +“She’s much better off without you in her life.” + + +You stop your morning walks and live a hermit lifestyle. You start eating bugs off the ground as you’ve long since ran out of food. This is no way to live your life and you know it. In a moment of clarity you sprint out of the house and run to “The Devil’s Cliff”. You jump off laughing as you’ve hit rock bottom in life and now in death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You can barely move, so you know you’re in a susceptible state. The question is, does she still want to see you? + + +“Catia,” you whisper. + + +You wait a few tense seconds and feel the pain in your head begin to relieve itself. But then, nothing. She never comes and the pain comes rushing back. You find tears streaming down your face as you realize your chances with Catia are probably over. You’re also in no state to continue working as a guard and will probably be fired soon. The only thing you can do is lay in bed and suffer. + + +Days past and your state of mind only gets worse. You begin seeing shadowy figures at the corner of your eyes. One day you manage to touch one and ask, + + +“Who are you?” + + +He laughs and laughs before disappearing. This isn’t the most psychologically scaring part of this ordeal. Your recurring nightmares are much worse. You dream of your family returning home in vivid detail, only for it to all come crashing down as you realize they're not real. You stop eating and drink only when necessary. It gets to a point where you know if you don’t try to seek help you will die. + + +You have no idea where to go for help, especially since the local witch doctor has been arrested for using humans as potion ingredients. You wander aimlessly taking morning walks in a vain attempt to find your savior. Shadowy figures whisper about you as you walk past. + + +“There’s nothing out here, return home” + + +“You’re never going to get better, why not end it?” + + +You’ve been seeing these shadowy figures more frequently recently. You chalk this up to your lack of sleep. Sleeping is when your most vulnerable, so you try to do as little of it as you can. + + +During a morning walk you run into a familiar face. It’s your childhood friend Julia. You haven’t seen her since schooling and boy does she look different. + + +“Is that…” she says + + +“Yeah it’s me,” you reply + + +“Boy do you look different.” + + +You haven’t been grooming yourself since the madness occurred. You have lots of dark circles under your eyes and probably don’t smell too good either. + + +“You also look different.” + + +She raises an eyebrow not knowing if your complementing or insulting her. + + +“In a good way in a good way!” you clarify. + + +She laughs as her dress flows in the wind. + + +“Sorry I can’t say the same to you. Down on your luck?” + + +“That’s putting it lightly,” you say jokingly, even though it’s the truth. + + +“Hahah I bet. I was just about to get some coffee, wanna come with?” + + +“Would I ever! Is it ok if the shadow people follow along?” + + +“The what?” + + +“Never mind.” + + +Later + + +Julia and you decided to go to the Cinnamon Pearl Cafe. As fancy as it may seem, its nothing more than a place to eat pastries and drink coffee. She begins telling you what’s she’s been doing lately. + + +“You know Andy right?” + + +“Of course, me and him have been on guard duty together a couple times.” + + +Julia bites her lips and chooses her words carefully, + + +“Well we broke up recently due to the fact that he...he...raped me...” + + +You’re shocked at this revelation, Andy has always seemed like a standup guy. + + +“How could he do such a thing?” + + +“He’s a piece of shit that’s how!” + + +Your lower your head as she composes herself. + + +“Sorry, I’m just not in the best mental space right now.” + + +“No need to apologize, you have every right to be angry.” + + +“Thank you.” + + +“So tell me, what happened?” + + +She explains how one night, after a long tiring day working as a cleaner, Andy wanted sex. They had been dating for a few months and had yet to have sex. The conversation went a little like this, + + +“All of my other friends constantly brag about sex. If I keep telling them I haven’t fucked you yet they might start thinking I’m gay," says Andy. + + +“Stop pressuring me! I told you, I am not in the mood and am not ready to pursue that kind of relationship with you.” + + +“You’re such a bitch, you know that right? Fuck you make me angry,” Andy says while walking towards Julia menacingly. + + +“Back off, get away from me!” + + +Julia stops talking and begins to choke up. She covers her face with her hands and says shakily, + + +“He grabbed me and wouldn’t let go. I tried to scream but he covered my mouth and clenched my throat. He violated me and nobody cares to do anything about it. Everyone’s to focused on the damn demons to give a shit about poor ol’ me.” + + +“That’s horrible, who else have you told?” + + +“Just you and the captain of the fucking guards. He wouldn’t even fire him, saying the demand for guards is ‘very high’ right now. No guard is better than a guards that’s a mother fucking rapist.” + + +“I wish I could help, but the captain probably won’t listen to me anymore. I haven’t shown up for work in days and didn’t give any notice.” + + +“It’s ok, I don’t want the captain’s help anyways. I need to move on and be strong.” + + +You make small talk about various things before saying your goodbyes. With Julia in such a vulnerable state, you wonder if it’s best to give her time to heal. At the same time, you long for human relationship. The shadow figures just aren’t the same as real human contact. +> Pursue a relationship +You’re both facing adversity in life. In a sense, you’ve both been raped. Julia in a literal sense and yourself in a mental sense. Catia cursed you and has left you a shell of your former self.The past few days have been hell. Why not reconnect with a old friend and see if it leads anywhere? Everyday you walk to the Cinnamon Pearl Cafe hoping to see Julia. A few days go by and you never see her, however it’s not all bad. You’re now eating and staying hydrated, which is never a bad thing. You haven’t seen any shadow people in days and have stopped having nightmares. Things are looking up for you. + + +One day after ordering your usual (a cup of coffee and cinnamon toast) Julia walks in. She’s all alone and you make eye contact with her. She winks at you and holds up a finger indicating that you should give her a second. You watch as she orders a coffee and raisin bread. After paying, she walks over to join you. + + +“I’m surprised to see you here,” she says. + + +“I’m here all the time now. I mean, their coffee’s really great.” + + +She laughs and asks, + + +“How have you been doing?” + + +“I’m great, but I’ve been worrying about you, how have you been holding up?” + + +She gets a little teary eyed while saying, + + +“That’s so sweet of you, but you don’t have to worry about me. I’m planning on leaving Ashton tomorrow morning.” + + +You sit mouth agape shocked at the news. She could have easy left without telling you. You might have gone mad waiting for her, but now you have a chance to leave with her. + + +“Why are you leaving? I get why you might not want to live in a place with bad memories of your past, but why leave so soon?” + + +“It’s no longer safe here and you should know better than anyone being a guard and all.” + + +“Former guard, and what do you mean it’s not safe? I haven’t heard of any demon sightings...” + + +“Well there was one just a few nights ago and people living in Ashton died. I have family up in Kingsburg and know I’ll be safe there.” + + +“Are you going all alone or bringing anyone with you?” + + +“As of now, all alone. I don’t know how difficult travel will be, back if I survive, I’ll finally have a place to call home.” + + +You really don’t think it’s a good idea for her to travel alone. One for the selfish reason of wanting to be close to her, but also because it’s the middle of winter and travel hasn’t been safe since the demonic invasion. This is all happening so fast, you barely know Julia the adult considering you just reconnect with you. Will she even let you come with her if you ask? + + + +> Ask if you can come with her +“Hey do you think I could go with you?” + + +“Umm...why would you want to do that?” + + +You explain how you don’t have any reason to stay in Ashton anymore. Your parents are likely dead and you’re unemployed. A new start in Kingsbury is just what the doctor ordered. + + +“You can come...just meet me outside the Cinnamon Pearl at dawn.” + + +“Yes! Thank you so much, I can’t wait!” + + +You leave the cafe and feel an incredible sense of euphoria. You can’t believe she said yes, although she was a bit apprehensive. You can’t wait to show her that she made the right choice in letting you come along. You spend the rest of the day gathering all your most prized belongings. You also take all of your parent’s savings figuring they’re never coming back. You fall asleep and begin to dream... + + +You're back in school and are sitting next to Julia. You don't hesitate and begin talking to her fully lucid of your actions. + + +"Hey Julia! Want a cookie?" + + +You pull a cookie out of thin air and hold it out to her. She reacts in disgust, + + +"Did you really think you could win my love so easily? Andy's my boyfriend and we're going to be together forever!" + + +You stammer out, + + +"One day you'll realize Andy isn't as nice as he may seem. Appearances can be deceiving..." + + +She bursts out in hysterical laughing and you have no idea why. Your look of confusion becomes apparent as she says, + + +"Appearances sure are deceiving!" + + +"Yeah..." + + +"For instance, I'm not even Julia." + + +Your pulse increases as you feel yourself losing control. Julia's face contorts feature by feature. First, her eyes turn red, then horns grow out of her head. By the end of it you are staring face to face with the demon of your nightmares. + + +"Catia?" + + +"You may think you've escaped me, but Julia will never be your true love." + + +"Shut up! Julia's just a friend..." + + +"No, YOU shut up! I know your deepest secrets and desires. Why keep up the charade? I know you think Julia can fill the void in your life, but that's just a fantasy." + + +"None of this is real and that includes you. This is nightmare, that's all." + + +"Go ahead, believe that. Just don't act like I didn't try to warn you." + + +You wake up as your head pounds like never before. You're suddenly very scared and seeing Julia and aren't sure why. It's clearly irrational, but a part of you wants to contact Catia again. Who's to say the curse will go away just because you're with Julia? Should you even bother? +> Go to the Cinnamon Pearl +It's best to ignore the nightmare and pretend it never happened. You head to meet Julia at the Cinnamon Pearl. You arrive shortly after and see her waiting for you. + + +“Ready to go?” + + +“Ready for anything,” you stay while brandishing your sword. + + +The road to Kingsbury is no easy journey. You feel Julia is glad you came along as you can scare away any thieves and bandits you come across. Who knows if you’ll make it in one piece but at least you have a purpose. You leave through the city walls and take the old dirt road to Kingsbury. + + +“You know the forest would be faster?” you say. + + +“I know, I have a feeling we’re much safer this way.” + + +You look at her and smile. Her blue eyes sparkle as you realize one thing: true beauty is in the eye of the beholder. You’ve been staring it in the face since childhood and are only realizing that now. +> Epilogue #4: The Kingsbury Kiss +The journey to Kingsbury wasn’t easy. You and Julia saved each other’s behind on multiple occasions. Through adversity, you grew closer together. Once you arrived at Kingsbury you had no plan. Julia saw this and invited you to stay with her. Before you knew it, you two started dating. She was everything you’ve ever wanted and more. You never cared that she wanted to take things slow, in fact, you embraced it. + + +“You only live once, might as well enjoy the whole ride,” you said to her one night. + + +“Oh shut up, you and your cheesy sayings need to stop,” she says while touching your shoulder. + + +“You want me to shut up? I’ll do it, just for you my Cinnamon Pearl.” + + +“If you say something cheesy one more time I’ll...” + + +“You’ll what?” + + +She pauses and stare at you with her beautiful, shinning blue eyes. You don’t have time to react before she leans in and says, + + +“I’ll... kiss you.” + + +Your lips connect and you feel a fullness in your heart for the first time in years. You’re reminded of the night you met Catia where everything about her gave you joy. Except this time it’s different, this isn’t some spell or magical aura. This is all real, and you can’t believe it. + + +“I love you,” you say to remind yourself this is really happening. + + +“I love you too.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Hey do you think I could go with you?” + + +“Umm...why would you want to do that?” + + +You explain how you don’t have any reason to stay in Ashton anymore. Your parents are likely dead and you’re unemployed. A new start in Kingsbury is just what the doctor ordered. + + +“You can come...just meet me outside the Cinnamon Pearl at dawn.” + + +“Yes! Thank you so much, I can’t wait!” + + +You leave the cafe and feel an incredible sense of euphoria. You can’t believe she said yes, although she was a bit apprehensive. You can’t wait to show her that she made the right choice in letting you come along. You spend the rest of the day gathering all your most prized belongings. You also take all of your parent’s savings figuring they’re never coming back. You fall asleep and begin to dream... + + +You're back in school and are sitting next to Julia. You don't hesitate and begin talking to her fully lucid of your actions. + + +"Hey Julia! Want a cookie?" + + +You pull a cookie out of thin air and hold it out to her. She reacts in disgust, + + +"Did you really think you could win my love so easily? Andy's my boyfriend and we're going to be together forever!" + + +You stammer out, + + +"One day you'll realize Andy isn't as nice as he may seem. Appearances can be deceiving..." + + +She bursts out in hysterical laughing and you have no idea why. Your look of confusion becomes apparent as she says, + + +"Appearances sure are deceiving!" + + +"Yeah..." + + +"For instance, I'm not even Julia." + + +Your pulse increases as you feel yourself losing control. Julia's face contorts feature by feature. First, her eyes turn red, then horns grow out of her head. By the end of it you are staring face to face with the demon of your nightmares. + + +"Catia?" + + +"You may think you've escaped me, but Julia will never be your true love." + + +"Shut up! Julia's just a friend..." + + +"No, YOU shut up! I know your deepest secrets and desires. Why keep up the charade? I know you think Julia can fill the void in your life, but that's just a fantasy." + + +"None of this is real and that includes you. This is nightmare, that's all." + + +"Go ahead, believe that. Just don't act like I didn't try to warn you." + + +You wake up as your head pounds like never before. You're suddenly very scared and seeing Julia and aren't sure why. It's clearly irrational, but a part of you wants to contact Catia again. Who's to say the curse will go away just because you're with Julia? Should you even bother? +> Summon Catia one more time +You don't care if it's irrational, something deep inside says you need to see Catia. You head out to The Drunk Tortoise Tavern to get in a "more suggestive state". It's warmed up quite a bit since the last time you've been there and you're glad. New weather, new you, and perhaps a new Catia? You can only hope... + + +As you daydream, you lose track of where you're going. You don't even realize it when you take a wrong turn and end up in a dark alley. Logic tells you it's too dark to see anybody, but that isn't the case. The shadow people are back and they have you surrounded! You press yourself up against a wall and begin to scream. + + +"Hey, quiet down. We're not here to torment you," a shadow person says. + + +"In fact, we're here to prevent you from making a huge mistake," another says. + + +They explain how they weren't always shadow people. They used to be everyday people; soldiers, farmers, merchants, and every other occupation imaginable. However, one day they met a succubus and fell in love. + + +"I didn't want to go through with it, but once the madness hit I kept crawling back," one says. + + +"We all kept crawling back. There is a point where you lose so much individuality and can't even make decisions for yourself." + + +"That's how we all became shadow people. We lost our faces, our bodies, and our past to the abyss." + + +You can't believe you're having a full on conversation with the shadowy figures after all this time. You've completely lost it, why not see where this goes? + + +"Ok, so you lost all your individuality. How are you able to talk to me and tell me all of this?" + + +"What?" + + +"You said it yourself, you couldn't make 'decisions for yourself.' If so, how are you here right now? + + +"Shit he's on to us!" + + +"What should we do, can we still trick him?" + + +You shift uncomfortably. + + +"You idiot, why would you say that? Now we have to kill him." + + +You get up and try to run. You figure they aren't real and can't hurt you. Well, it turns out they can. They punch, kick, and slap you into a bloody mess. + + +"Finally, I will have a face again!" + + +They begin to peel away your skin and plaster it on their body. All the shadow people converged into a single mass resembling a ball. They tear off your arms and legs and add it to the mass. You're fully converged to the ball-like mass as a portal is conjured before you. + + +"Into the forest!" + + +You're don't die and live as part of this abomination. Your life is an eternal nightmare. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You’re both facing adversity in life. In a sense, you’ve both been raped. Julia in a literal sense and yourself in a mental sense. Catia cursed you and has left you a shell of your former self.The past few days have been hell. Why not reconnect with a old friend and see if it leads anywhere? Everyday you walk to the Cinnamon Pearl Cafe hoping to see Julia. A few days go by and you never see her, however it’s not all bad. You’re now eating and staying hydrated, which is never a bad thing. You haven’t seen any shadow people in days and have stopped having nightmares. Things are looking up for you. + + +One day after ordering your usual (a cup of coffee and cinnamon toast) Julia walks in. She’s all alone and you make eye contact with her. She winks at you and holds up a finger indicating that you should give her a second. You watch as she orders a coffee and raisin bread. After paying, she walks over to join you. + + +“I’m surprised to see you here,” she says. + + +“I’m here all the time now. I mean, their coffee’s really great.” + + +She laughs and asks, + + +“How have you been doing?” + + +“I’m great, but I’ve been worrying about you, how have you been holding up?” + + +She gets a little teary eyed while saying, + + +“That’s so sweet of you, but you don’t have to worry about me. I’m planning on leaving Ashton tomorrow morning.” + + +You sit mouth agape shocked at the news. She could have easy left without telling you. You might have gone mad waiting for her, but now you have a chance to leave with her. + + +“Why are you leaving? I get why you might not want to live in a place with bad memories of your past, but why leave so soon?” + + +“It’s no longer safe here and you should know better than anyone being a guard and all.” + + +“Former guard, and what do you mean it’s not safe? I haven’t heard of any demon sightings...” + + +“Well there was one just a few nights ago and people living in Ashton died. I have family up in Kingsburg and know I’ll be safe there.” + + +“Are you going all alone or bringing anyone with you?” + + +“As of now, all alone. I don’t know how difficult travel will be, back if I survive, I’ll finally have a place to call home.” + + +You really don’t think it’s a good idea for her to travel alone. One for the selfish reason of wanting to be close to her, but also because it’s the middle of winter and travel hasn’t been safe since the demonic invasion. This is all happening so fast, you barely know Julia the adult considering you just reconnect with you. Will she even let you come with her if you ask? + + + +> Wish her good luck and say goodbye +“Well best of luck, but I have to go.” + + +“Ok...goodbye.” + + +You leave and give her a smile, but on the inside you feel horrible. Why didn’t you ask if you could come along? The worse that could happen is her saying no, but at least you could say you tried. You arrive home and spend all day inside. During sleep, you have your first nightmare in days. Seeing no reason to go to the Cinnamon Pearl Cafe now that’s Julia is gone, you stay inside all day. The shadow people start showing up in the corner of your vision and they taunt you relentlessly. Since you’re not eating or drinking, you don’t have the energy to leave bed anymore. You spend the next few days like this regretting the choice you made. + + +On a day like any other, you die from dehydration during your sleep. Rest easy knowing you’ll never have a nightmare again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“I will be doing no such thing,” you say in protest. + + +Catia raises her eyebrow before breaking out in laughter. + + +“Well this is a first,” she says. + + +You stare at her as she seems to be deciding whether she’ll force you to remove your clothes. You feel the sweat drip down your back when she finally says, + + +“Maybe I really deserved to be sent here. I can’t even manipulate a human into having sex with me.” + + +A black cloud appears as she disappears from your room. You start violently coughing but don’t pass out this time. It’s not like it matters, you need to sleep anyway. You put out your candles and fall into bed. You focus on your breathing as you drift off to sleep. Best to reflect on what happens when you have a clearer mind. + + +You wake up with a throbbing pain in your head. The light coming from your window floods your mind with intense pain. Guess you drunk more last night than you thought. You decide its best to make yourself some food and drink to clear your head. You grab water and a slice of peach pie you made a few days ago. You scarf the food down and shallow the water in huge gulps. Your head should start feeling better within the next few hours. + + +Except it doesn’t, you lie in bed with constant tension on your head. It’s like someone is squeezing your brain with both hands, but not hard enough to cause physical harm. Something unnatural is going on and you know it. Hangovers should get better after rest, not worse. It’s hard to focus on anything but the pain. You try remembering what Catia did before she left. She dispelled a black cloud which didn’t knock you out. Is it possible this was a curse? + + +The more you think about it, the more it makes sense. While she tried not to show it, she was upset you resisted her temptation. She wanted you to pay for hurting her ego. That bitch! As you think about her more, tension is released from your skull. In fact, you're able to think about her in vivid detail and feel headache free. Although, the second you stop thinking about her the pain comes rushing back. This certainly isn’t good. + + +You’re going to have to do something about this. There is one obvious solution which is trying to contact Catia and having her remove the curse. Though who knows if she’ll even remove it, assuming she still wants to visit you. The other option is going to a local witch doctor and having them remove the curse. Although, you’ve heard they’ve been busy since demons first started being sighted. Maybe the curse is temporary, why not wait it out? +> Visit the Witch Doctor +Your brain aches with pain and going to what you assume is the source of the pain will probably make it worst. While you’ve never been too trusting of witches, you know a local one with good reputation. As you make your way outside the light pierces through your skull. Your eye sockets feel like their burning and your brain feels like it’s melting. You press on and begin to enter the slums of the city. The practice of brewing potions containing humans, a required ingredient for witch doctors, is not exactly legal. Still, you are in no place to have such prejudice considering if your head keeps pounding like it is now, you might just kill someone. + + +You reach the witch doctor’s office and make your way inside. It’s pretty busy at the moment, which is no surprise as people want protection from demons. You wait in a line of about twenty people. The pounding has intensified, and you aren’t even aware how much time has passed when somebody says, + + +“Excuse me, do you need to see the witch doctor” + + +“SHUT UP!” you snap. + + +The clerk cowers as you finish screaming at him. You manage to calm down and whisper, + + +“Please help me.” + + +The clerk nods and orders you to follow him. You go down a hall way affixed with a assortment of trinkets and baubles pinned to the walls. + + +“To keep away evil spirts,” the clerk explains. + + +There is a huge variety of objects that you would normally want to know more about. You are in no mood now though and continue down the hall until you reach the doctor. + + +You enter a room lit only by bright red stones. In the center lays a boiling pot emitting the scent of rotten egg. The bright lights distract you from even noticing the witch doctor standing right in front of you. + + +“I sense a demonic curse within you. Don’t worry, I know the perfect potion for you.” + + +The witch doctor, who prefers you call her “a potion brewer”, starts throwing a concoction of ingredients into a cauldron. + + +“One imp carcass to ward off spirts, 2 cups of orc blood for personal strength, and a dash of lemon juice.” + + +“Why lemon?’ you ask. + + +She smiles and says, + + +“For flavor silly! Do you think you could stomach a potion solely comprised of raw meat and blood?” + + +She mixes everything together and pours out the cauldron into multiple bottles. She hands you one and the smell alone relieves your head. You down the vial and struggle to hold back from vomiting. It’s a lot thicker than you thought and the blood clumps up in your throat. The potion brewer notices your discomfort and gives you a small vial composed of a black liquid. + + +“Drink this it will help.” + + +You do as told and gulp the vial down. It seems to do the trick as the clumped blood slides down your throat. You still want to vomit out your insides. + + +“So how will you be paying today, soul or servitude?” + + +“I thought you accepted coin.” + + +“Oh, we do, but the black vial I gave you was extremely valuable. The ingredients needed to make it cannot be paid by mere coin.” + + +“What! How expensive can it be to make a potion that clears your throat?” + + +She laughs and shakes her head before saying, + + +“That’s not what the potion did, silly! It’s what I give to people if I sense they are close to death. It will prevent any proximate death, but can only be used once.” + + +“Why not just give me something else then?” + + +“I wasn’t sure if the curse was attacking you or if you were having an allergic reaction to the potion. While I can sense a lot, I’m not psychic. Rather than make a guess I did the only thing I could to guarantee your life.” + + +“I suppose that makes sense.” + + +“Great! Now how about that payment, soul or servitude?” +> Soul +“I’ll pay with my soul.” + + +She smiles and says, + + +“I was hoping you’d say that.” + + +She latches onto you and pushes you to the ground. + + +“Clerk Anthony, tie him up!” + + +The clerk pounces and takes out a long thread of rope while the potion brewer holds you down. The rope is wrapped around your hands and legs and you’re tied up like an animal. + + +“Now time to harvest your flesh!” + + +The witch, which is more apt of a title, pours a white liquid mixed with thousands of black dots down your throat. It’s not until you shallow when you realize what those black dots were, ticks! They burrow into your mouth and bite your gums. You feel bumps forming on your tongue, gums, and uvula. Then the biting spreads to your throat. More bumps form and you’re unable to breath. Your face starts to turn blue and your senses dim. + + +“He’ll be dead soon.” + + +“But what about his soul, master?” + + +She laughs and says, + + +“I never wanted his soul silly! My herbal tea requires human flesh.” + + +This is the last thing you hear before blacking out. Hopefully the tea was good.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your brain aches with pain and going to what you assume is the source of the pain will probably make it worst. While you’ve never been too trusting of witches, you know a local one with good reputation. As you make your way outside the light pierces through your skull. Your eye sockets feel like their burning and your brain feels like it’s melting. You press on and begin to enter the slums of the city. The practice of brewing potions containing humans, a required ingredient for witch doctors, is not exactly legal. Still, you are in no place to have such prejudice considering if your head keeps pounding like it is now, you might just kill someone. + + +You reach the witch doctor’s office and make your way inside. It’s pretty busy at the moment, which is no surprise as people want protection from demons. You wait in a line of about twenty people. The pounding has intensified, and you aren’t even aware how much time has passed when somebody says, + + +“Excuse me, do you need to see the witch doctor” + + +“SHUT UP!” you snap. + + +The clerk cowers as you finish screaming at him. You manage to calm down and whisper, + + +“Please help me.” + + +The clerk nods and orders you to follow him. You go down a hall way affixed with a assortment of trinkets and baubles pinned to the walls. + + +“To keep away evil spirts,” the clerk explains. + + +There is a huge variety of objects that you would normally want to know more about. You are in no mood now though and continue down the hall until you reach the doctor. + + +You enter a room lit only by bright red stones. In the center lays a boiling pot emitting the scent of rotten egg. The bright lights distract you from even noticing the witch doctor standing right in front of you. + + +“I sense a demonic curse within you. Don’t worry, I know the perfect potion for you.” + + +The witch doctor, who prefers you call her “a potion brewer”, starts throwing a concoction of ingredients into a cauldron. + + +“One imp carcass to ward off spirts, 2 cups of orc blood for personal strength, and a dash of lemon juice.” + + +“Why lemon?’ you ask. + + +She smiles and says, + + +“For flavor silly! Do you think you could stomach a potion solely comprised of raw meat and blood?” + + +She mixes everything together and pours out the cauldron into multiple bottles. She hands you one and the smell alone relieves your head. You down the vial and struggle to hold back from vomiting. It’s a lot thicker than you thought and the blood clumps up in your throat. The potion brewer notices your discomfort and gives you a small vial composed of a black liquid. + + +“Drink this it will help.” + + +You do as told and gulp the vial down. It seems to do the trick as the clumped blood slides down your throat. You still want to vomit out your insides. + + +“So how will you be paying today, soul or servitude?” + + +“I thought you accepted coin.” + + +“Oh, we do, but the black vial I gave you was extremely valuable. The ingredients needed to make it cannot be paid by mere coin.” + + +“What! How expensive can it be to make a potion that clears your throat?” + + +She laughs and shakes her head before saying, + + +“That’s not what the potion did, silly! It’s what I give to people if I sense they are close to death. It will prevent any proximate death, but can only be used once.” + + +“Why not just give me something else then?” + + +“I wasn’t sure if the curse was attacking you or if you were having an allergic reaction to the potion. While I can sense a lot, I’m not psychic. Rather than make a guess I did the only thing I could to guarantee your life.” + + +“I suppose that makes sense.” + + +“Great! Now how about that payment, soul or servitude?” +> Servitude +“I’ll pay in servitude.” + + +She frowns and murmurs, + + +“I wish you chose the other option That would have been a lot more fun.” + + +She explains how in exchange for saving your life you will be her assistant until she considers you debt repaid. + + +“My name’s Helena by the way, but you can call me master.” + + +“Can as in I have a choice?” + + +“You really are silly! No, can as in you can chose to call me master if you want to live, Understood? + + +“Yes…” + + +“Yes what!” + + +“Yes master…” + + +You begin work immediately and are sent out to gather various herbs for her potions. One day while gathering a rare mushroom, you encounter a demon who screams, + + +“I CRAVE DESTRUCTION!” + + +You try to run but he sends a bolt of fire into your chest. You burn into blackened ash.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“I will be doing no such thing,” you say in protest. + + +Catia raises her eyebrow before breaking out in laughter. + + +“Well this is a first,” she says. + + +You stare at her as she seems to be deciding whether she’ll force you to remove your clothes. You feel the sweat drip down your back when she finally says, + + +“Maybe I really deserved to be sent here. I can’t even manipulate a human into having sex with me.” + + +A black cloud appears as she disappears from your room. You start violently coughing but don’t pass out this time. It’s not like it matters, you need to sleep anyway. You put out your candles and fall into bed. You focus on your breathing as you drift off to sleep. Best to reflect on what happens when you have a clearer mind. + + +You wake up with a throbbing pain in your head. The light coming from your window floods your mind with intense pain. Guess you drunk more last night than you thought. You decide its best to make yourself some food and drink to clear your head. You grab water and a slice of peach pie you made a few days ago. You scarf the food down and shallow the water in huge gulps. Your head should start feeling better within the next few hours. + + +Except it doesn’t, you lie in bed with constant tension on your head. It’s like someone is squeezing your brain with both hands, but not hard enough to cause physical harm. Something unnatural is going on and you know it. Hangovers should get better after rest, not worse. It’s hard to focus on anything but the pain. You try remembering what Catia did before she left. She dispelled a black cloud which didn’t knock you out. Is it possible this was a curse? + + +The more you think about it, the more it makes sense. While she tried not to show it, she was upset you resisted her temptation. She wanted you to pay for hurting her ego. That bitch! As you think about her more, tension is released from your skull. In fact, you're able to think about her in vivid detail and feel headache free. Although, the second you stop thinking about her the pain comes rushing back. This certainly isn’t good. + + +You’re going to have to do something about this. There is one obvious solution which is trying to contact Catia and having her remove the curse. Though who knows if she’ll even remove it, assuming she still wants to visit you. The other option is going to a local witch doctor and having them remove the curse. Although, you’ve heard they’ve been busy since demons first started being sighted. Maybe the curse is temporary, why not wait it out? +> Wait +You continue lying around and try to fall asleep. The pain won’t let this happen and you lie in bed starring at the ceiling. You start thinking about Catia again as it seems to be the only thing you can focus on. You think about how much of an idiot you are for passing up sex with a demon. + + +Your front door makes a loud squeaking sounds followed by footsteps. Is Catia back to finish the job? You try to get to grab your sword but your head pounds forcing you to stay in bed. Expecting Catia to kill you at any second, you are very surprised to hear, + + +“Son, I’m home.” + + +“Mmmm—-mmmmm—-mmother? + + +“Yes, it’s me and I come baring bad news. Your Father, he was killed on our way home. I feel so empty I don’t know how I’ll go on.” + + +She begins crying into her hands. The pounding in your head stops, allowing you to get up to comfort her. + + +“Everything will ok you just have to stay strong,” you say while patting her back. + + +Your mother looks up at you and smiles. Her blue eyes shine through the tears and you know everything will be ok. She goes in to hug you and you return the favor. As you embrace, she massages your back making you feel like a kid again. She whispers into your ear, + + +“Will you sleep with me tonight? I don’t want to be alone after all that’s happened.” + + +Now you’re really starting to feel like a kid again. This is your mother and as sad as it sounds, you could also use some company after all that’s happened. + + +“Sure, I don’t want to be alone either.” + + +You both fall into bed and feel instant relief. She moves closer to you and grabs your hand. She moves your arm over her body and huddles your body close to your chest. As much as you want to say something about how uncomfortable this makes you feel, you know she needs company after all she’s been through. You no longer feel like a kid, but feel like your father? This is pretty weird, but its just one night. One weird night is nothing to be alarmed about. + + +You drift off to sleep and have the best night of rest you’ve had in years. When you wake up you're surprised to find your mother still pressed up against your chest. Not wanting to disturb her, you just lay there eyes open. Your headache is gone, and you think you know why. Only the love between a son and a mother could dispel the curse Catia put on you. Your mother soon wakes up and says, + + +“I don’t want to be too forward, but can we do this again tonight? The horrors I saw, the bloodshed, is too much for me to be left alone with my thoughts. I need someone to be my rock, so I don’t fall into the pit of despair.” + + +You’ve never seen your mother so sad before, thought its understandable. The question is, are you ok with doing this again? Sure, one night of sleeping in the same bed of your mom after such trauma isn’t that crazy. But doing again, that may be a bit crazy. +> Agree to be her rock +You agree to comfort her again tonight. It’s as weird as the last time, but it seems to make your mom happy and that’s all a son could want. + + +“Thank you, I need this right now,” she says as you massage her back. + + +You sleep in the same bed as your mom everyday for the next few weeks. Demon sighting have been occurring more frequently and your mother is becoming increasingly worried. + + +“I think we need to get out of Ashton before its too late,” she says. + + +“Where will we go and how could we survive alone?” + + +“I know a place, but you have to trust me.” + + +You have no reason not to trust her and follow her once nightfall arrives. You leave the city walls and venture into a nearby forest. + + +“Where exactly are we going?” + + +“You’ll see.” + + +She speeds up showing a surprising amount of fitness for a middle-aged woman. You eventually reach a clearing where a river flows against rocks. + + +“It’s beautiful,” you say stunned.. + + +“Not as beautiful as you,” your mother says with a playful wink. + + +It gets kind of awkward for a bit until you break the silence. + + +“I still don’t understand what we’re doing here. How is a forest any safe than Ashton?” + + +“Oh, it’s not safer at all. I just wanted to go somewhere nobody could hear you scream,” + + +Your mother dashes at you with inhuman speed. She pins you down and starts ripping off your clothes + + +“Ever since father died, I’ve had to suppress my sexual desires. Not anymore, never again.” + + +You try to struggle but it's no use. You find yourself buck naked in the middle of forest. + + +“I want you to enjoy this as much as I do, so please don’t fight back.” + + +You always assumed you were stronger than mother but aren’t so sure now. Perhaps you should give in to a deep seeded desire you’ve repressed for all these years. +> Give In +You decide to just enjoy yourself and throw away all logic. This plan backfires once you begin to have sex. This is all wrong, and its not because its your mom, it's because… + + +“WHY DID YOU HAVE A PENIS!” you scream. + + +Your mother’s voice grows deep and she begins to laugh. You are at her mercy as tears begin to fill your eyes. When it's all done you are left humiliated and at a loss of all self-ego. + + +“I don’t understand.” + + +“What’s there not to understand? I pretended to have your mom to have sex with you. I assumed you were a momma’s boy by the way you repelled my sexual aura. My assumption was correct!” + + +Your mother face contorts feature by feature. First, her eyes turn red, then horns grow out of her head. By the end of it you are staring face to face with the demon of your nightmares. + + +“Catia?” + + +You are given no explanation as she sends a powerful blast of dark energy at you. + + +“You may have been able to repel my aura, but you can’t repel dark magic.” + + +It strikes you and tears a hole through your heart. You die both literally and metaphorically heartbroken.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You agree to comfort her again tonight. It’s as weird as the last time, but it seems to make your mom happy and that’s all a son could want. + + +“Thank you, I need this right now,” she says as you massage her back. + + +You sleep in the same bed as your mom everyday for the next few weeks. Demon sighting have been occurring more frequently and your mother is becoming increasingly worried. + + +“I think we need to get out of Ashton before its too late,” she says. + + +“Where will we go and how could we survive alone?” + + +“I know a place, but you have to trust me.” + + +You have no reason not to trust her and follow her once nightfall arrives. You leave the city walls and venture into a nearby forest. + + +“Where exactly are we going?” + + +“You’ll see.” + + +She speeds up showing a surprising amount of fitness for a middle-aged woman. You eventually reach a clearing where a river flows against rocks. + + +“It’s beautiful,” you say stunned.. + + +“Not as beautiful as you,” your mother says with a playful wink. + + +It gets kind of awkward for a bit until you break the silence. + + +“I still don’t understand what we’re doing here. How is a forest any safe than Ashton?” + + +“Oh, it’s not safer at all. I just wanted to go somewhere nobody could hear you scream,” + + +Your mother dashes at you with inhuman speed. She pins you down and starts ripping off your clothes + + +“Ever since father died, I’ve had to suppress my sexual desires. Not anymore, never again.” + + +You try to struggle but it's no use. You find yourself buck naked in the middle of forest. + + +“I want you to enjoy this as much as I do, so please don’t fight back.” + + +You always assumed you were stronger than mother but aren’t so sure now. Perhaps you should give in to a deep seeded desire you’ve repressed for all these years. +> Struggle +This is way too far, and you do not want it in any way. + + +“Mom, I love you, but please don’t do this.” + + +You expect her to understand, but her reaction is completely different. + + +“Are you impotent or some shit?” + + +For the first time in a long time your head starts pounding again. She continues, + + +“I mean I know you are right now, but I are you impotent in terms of sex?” + + +“I don’t want to have sex with my own mother! If that makes me impotent then I guess I am.” + + +She grows angry and grabs your crotch. + + +“It’s not just that! You didn’t even want to have sex with a hot succubus. I thought you must have had some mommy issues, but that doesn’t seem to be it either.” + + +“Whaaaaa,” is all you have time to say before she tears your crotch off. + + +“That’s for wasting my time!” + + +She finishes the job by setting you on fire and spitting on your charred corpse. + + +“And that’s for being a bitch.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You continue lying around and try to fall asleep. The pain won’t let this happen and you lie in bed starring at the ceiling. You start thinking about Catia again as it seems to be the only thing you can focus on. You think about how much of an idiot you are for passing up sex with a demon. + + +Your front door makes a loud squeaking sounds followed by footsteps. Is Catia back to finish the job? You try to get to grab your sword but your head pounds forcing you to stay in bed. Expecting Catia to kill you at any second, you are very surprised to hear, + + +“Son, I’m home.” + + +“Mmmm—-mmmmm—-mmother? + + +“Yes, it’s me and I come baring bad news. Your Father, he was killed on our way home. I feel so empty I don’t know how I’ll go on.” + + +She begins crying into her hands. The pounding in your head stops, allowing you to get up to comfort her. + + +“Everything will ok you just have to stay strong,” you say while patting her back. + + +Your mother looks up at you and smiles. Her blue eyes shine through the tears and you know everything will be ok. She goes in to hug you and you return the favor. As you embrace, she massages your back making you feel like a kid again. She whispers into your ear, + + +“Will you sleep with me tonight? I don’t want to be alone after all that’s happened.” + + +Now you’re really starting to feel like a kid again. This is your mother and as sad as it sounds, you could also use some company after all that’s happened. + + +“Sure, I don’t want to be alone either.” + + +You both fall into bed and feel instant relief. She moves closer to you and grabs your hand. She moves your arm over her body and huddles your body close to your chest. As much as you want to say something about how uncomfortable this makes you feel, you know she needs company after all she’s been through. You no longer feel like a kid, but feel like your father? This is pretty weird, but its just one night. One weird night is nothing to be alarmed about. + + +You drift off to sleep and have the best night of rest you’ve had in years. When you wake up you're surprised to find your mother still pressed up against your chest. Not wanting to disturb her, you just lay there eyes open. Your headache is gone, and you think you know why. Only the love between a son and a mother could dispel the curse Catia put on you. Your mother soon wakes up and says, + + +“I don’t want to be too forward, but can we do this again tonight? The horrors I saw, the bloodshed, is too much for me to be left alone with my thoughts. I need someone to be my rock, so I don’t fall into the pit of despair.” + + +You’ve never seen your mother so sad before, thought its understandable. The question is, are you ok with doing this again? Sure, one night of sleeping in the same bed of your mom after such trauma isn’t that crazy. But doing again, that may be a bit crazy. +> Put a stop to this now +This is just too weird, and it needs to stop before spirals into something else. + + +“Mom, I love you, but I just don’t think this is the best path of recovery.” + + +You expect her to be sad, maybe cry a little, but her reaction is completely different. + + +“GOD FUCKING DAMN IT YOU ARE TOO PURE!” she screams. + + +A cloud of dark smoke blinds you as your mother morphs into a demon like form. + + +“Mother, what happened on your trip?” you say while blinded by smoke. + + +“You insolent fool, I’m not your mom I am a succubus.” + + +The smoke clears and you find Catia standing before you. + + +“Whaaaaa,” is all you have time to say before she tears your head of. + + +“That’s for wasting my time!” + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Thank you,” Greg whispers. + + +“You what!” + + +“Pfft! And to think, I used to respect soldiers.” + + +Tom and Connor start shouting about how much of a dumbass you are. You don’t bother to engage with such idiotic banter. Instead, you walk out of the tavern without a second glance. As you make your way outside you are hit with a rush of cool air. + + +“I can’t wait to meet Catia,” you mutter to yourself. + + +“Who’s Catia?” + + +You turn around and only see the entrance to the tavern. + + +“Hello?” + + +“Ermm down here sir!” + + +You glance down and instantly recoil. It’s Greg, what’s he doing here? + + +“What the hell do you want?” + + +He begins to squirm uncomfortably and hyperventilate. + + +“I…uh…I…erm…” + + +“Spit it out!” + + +“I wanted to thank you for agreeing with me,” he says between irregular gasps for air. + + +Oh, that’s why he’s here. You normally wouldn’t mind but you have plans tonight and have no time for conversation. + + +“People don’t agree with you often kid? That’s too bad,” you say while walking away. + + +“I’m not a kid, I’m 20. But yeah, everyone I meet either ignores or makes fun of me. I almost prefer the latter as at least they keep me company,” he says while following behind you. + + +“Damn that really sucks,” you stop walking and stare him in the eyes, “Look I’d love to keep you company, but I have somewhere very important to be.” + + +Greg looks at you with a face of disappointment. But he lights up to ask, + + +“Where do you have to be? Maybe I could come with you.” + + +Gah! As bad as you feel for Greg, under no circumstances could he come with you. She agreed to see you, not Greg and you. + + +“Sorry I don’t have time.” + + +“God damn it. Can you at least tell me why? I don’t want to be near Connor and Tom right now. They make me feel inhuman.” + + +Does this guy ever shut up? You been trying to exit this conversation gracefully since it started. You should just tell him to fuck off and be done it. Of course, you could humor him and tell him what you’re doing. It’s been hard keeping this succubus thing a secret and having someone to confide in wouldn’t be the worst thing in the world. On the other hand, you really want to go have demon sex. +> Tell him to fuck off +“Fuck off worm.” + + +Greg surprises you when he snaps back, + + +“Connor and Tom picking on me is one thing, but you? I don’t know why, but I thought you were different.” + + +For a second, you feel hurt. But then you realize it's Greg and feel a bit better. + + +“Your fault, not mine. Now do as you're told and stop following me,” you say while walking away. + + +This guys persistent and runs to catch up when you start walking fast. Are you going to have to kick the shit out of him so he leaves you alone? You hope not, but that may be the only option as he’s acting like a child. + + +“I don’t want to go back to the tavern. Wherever you’re going, it's better than there.” + + +He’s probably not wrong, but it's beyond pathetic that he still follows you. Guess when you take so much abuse you can shrug it off pretty easily. + + +“Go ahead, follow me. Just know if you try to enter my house you won’t be able to leave.” + + +He gulps but continues to follow you. He’s wasted a lot of your time so you decide to take a shortcut to your parents’ house. You find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don’t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. + + +You arrive at your parent’s old home and open the door. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. + + +“Some things never change,” you whisper to yourself. + + +You immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers’ uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? + + +You’re about to sit down in your bed when a chill runs down your spin. Your door makes a squeaking noise and a cold breeze rushes towards you. + + +“I swear to god Greg! you shout. + + +No reply, although you don’t know what you were expecting. It’s possible the breeze pushed the door open, it's pretty flimsy and it wouldn’t be the craziest thing that’s happened in the last 24 hours. On the other hand, you can’t shake the feeling you're being watched. Should you investigate? +> Investigate +Maybe it’s paranoia, but what kind of brain-dead retard wouldn’t rather be safe than sorry? Assuming its just Greg, you don’t even bother grabbing your sword, and leave the bed room, checking every corner as you do so. This pays of as you notice a shadowy figure standing outside your bedroom. Is that…Lars? + + +He wastes no time in attacking you, but why? You’ll never know as he slams your head into his knee until you die.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Fuck off worm.” + + +Greg surprises you when he snaps back, + + +“Connor and Tom picking on me is one thing, but you? I don’t know why, but I thought you were different.” + + +For a second, you feel hurt. But then you realize it's Greg and feel a bit better. + + +“Your fault, not mine. Now do as you're told and stop following me,” you say while walking away. + + +This guys persistent and runs to catch up when you start walking fast. Are you going to have to kick the shit out of him so he leaves you alone? You hope not, but that may be the only option as he’s acting like a child. + + +“I don’t want to go back to the tavern. Wherever you’re going, it's better than there.” + + +He’s probably not wrong, but it's beyond pathetic that he still follows you. Guess when you take so much abuse you can shrug it off pretty easily. + + +“Go ahead, follow me. Just know if you try to enter my house you won’t be able to leave.” + + +He gulps but continues to follow you. He’s wasted a lot of your time so you decide to take a shortcut to your parents’ house. You find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don’t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. + + +You arrive at your parent’s old home and open the door. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. + + +“Some things never change,” you whisper to yourself. + + +You immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers’ uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? + + +You’re about to sit down in your bed when a chill runs down your spin. Your door makes a squeaking noise and a cold breeze rushes towards you. + + +“I swear to god Greg! you shout. + + +No reply, although you don’t know what you were expecting. It’s possible the breeze pushed the door open, it's pretty flimsy and it wouldn’t be the craziest thing that’s happened in the last 24 hours. On the other hand, you can’t shake the feeling you're being watched. Should you investigate? +> Ignore it +It probably was just the wind, no need to be paranoid. You hop in bed and close your eyes. + + +“Cat---” + + +You head is struck making you collapse. You black out from what you assume to be Greg’s doing. Who knew he was so strong? You suffer intensive internal bleeding and die a slow, painful death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“This is the last time I’m saying this Greg, immortality is not worth cutting off your cock. What’s the point of being immortal if you’re deprived of the best feeling in the world?” + + +“Ey’ maybe he’s lacking in that area. No wonder he wants immortality if all he has to do his cut off an inch or two worth of pecker.” + + +Greg suddenly stands up, drawing your eyes to the bickering trio. They’ve been arguing random hypotheticals since you’ve gotten here. All you wanted was to get a quiet drink before meeting with Catia. As long as these buffoons are here, that’s impossible. + + +Even as Greg stands up he’s shorter than the other two sitting. It’s no wonder they pick on him, he looks pathetic. + + +“Can you both just shut the fuck up? I mean, god damn. All I’m saying is living forever outweighs the downsides of not having a dick,” he says in a whiny voice. + + +The other two laugh uncontrollably at his pitiful attempt of defiance. One manages to calm down and spits out, + + +“Maybe when it’s smaller than a gnome’s toothbrush, but for the rest us it’s not so easy.” + + +Queue more uncontrollable laughter as Greg’s face becomes redder than demon blood. + + +“I’ll shove a gnome’s toothbrush up your ass if you say that one more time! C’mon, let’s move on to another question.” + + +The trio quiets down and you zone them out. You take a swig of whisky and start to remember the reason while you’re here. Oh yeah, the succubus. She wanted you to drink a bit before meeting her. You didn’t necessarily jump at the idea of getting drunk before meeting with a demon, but she promised you she would make it worthwhile. You’re pretty sure that means… + + +Your thoughts are interrupted by the thickheaded trio once again. + + +“You’re telling me you’d prefer your child be retarded and kind than ingenious and mean?” + + +“Yes Connor, I would.” + + +“God damn it, Greg! You want to spend an eternity with no dick while taking care of a retarded child? Pathetic. I would kill myself after a week.” + + +“Har har har! I would kill myself in a week if I had to live Greg’s life as it is. No, scratch that, a day!” + + +“Fuck you Tom. I can’t be the only one who thinks this…” + + +Greg glances around nervously looking for a savior. Eventually he turns his gaze towards you and his eyes light up. + + +“Hey you over there! What would you rather have, a dumb, but kind child; or a smart, but cruel child?” he says while pointing at you. + + +You stare blankly ahead and breathe a deep sigh. This is beyond stupid. You briefly consider just ignoring him and getting the hell out of this place. + + +“Why do you think that man would agree with you? He’s a soldier. Surely, he recognizes the benefits a genius could provide for society. Especially when you consider the need for mages regarding the growing demon problem.” + + +Soldier? Shit you forgot to change out of your uniform. So much for staying inconspicuous. You can thank your lucky stars none of the other guards are here to see you in this shithole. + + +“Now now, let the man speak. Just because he’s a soldier doesn’t mean he agrees with you,” says Tom. + + +“Fine, what do you think...and hurry up! We don’t have all day.” +> “I prefer a genius but cruel child.” +“My man!” shouts Connor. + + +“Har har Greg probably wants a retarded child to have someone finally agree with him,” Tom jokes. + + +Tom and Connor start shouting about how much of a dumbass Greg is. You agree, but don’t join in on the berating. Instead, you walk out of the tavern without a second glance. As you make your way outside you are hit with a rush of cool air. + + +“I can’t wait to meet Catia,” you mutter to yourself. + + +You tuck your hands in your pockets and begin the walk to your home. On the way, you bump into a familiar face. It’s Lars. + + +“How did last night go?” he asks. + + +Something about Lars is rubbing you the wrong way. It might be his emotionless eyes or his downtrodden tone, but you feel like telling him about Catia is a bad idea + + +“I nearly froze to death,” you say, wanting to be vague. + + +“Yeah how exactly did you avoid doing that? When I left it looked like you were about to pass out.” + + +“Just lucky I guess.” + + +“Lucky huh? Well it’s your ‘luck’ that got me fired. Thanks a lot, now my family can starve to death before getting killed by demons.” + + +You remain silent. + + +“The captain chewed my ass out for quitting guard duty. I thought he would berate me and give me a warning, but he fucking fired me. I told him how much bullshit that was because I would have frozen to death otherwise. He told me I was lazy and incompetent because ‘the other guard didn’t complain’ as if your dumbass was smart to stay.” + + +You try to apologize but Lars is having none of it. He gets angry and says, + + +“I pray to god the demons invade and gut you and the captain like fish. Scrape out your insides with their claws and your other insides with their dick.” + + +“Jesus man I said I was sorry.” + + +“Sorry doesn’t feed my family. Get out of my way, I’m gonna’ drink until I die.” + + +You move aside as Lars storms past you. Well, that was an interesting encounter. You don’t even know what to think, were you wrong to lie to him? How would he have reacted if you told him the truth? You push these thoughts out of your head and focus on getting home. It’s super cold and you don’t want to freeze to death and not have a succubus save you. + + +You find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don’t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. + + +You arrive at your parent’s old home and open the door. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. + + +“Some things never change,” you whisper to yourself. + + +You immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers’ uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? + + +You’re about to sit down in your bed when a chill runs down your spin. Your door makes a squeaking noise and a cold breeze rushes towards you. + + +“Is somebody there?” you ask. + + +No reply, although you don’t know what you were expecting. It’s possible the breeze pushed the door open, it's pretty flimsy and it wouldn’t be the craziest thing that’s happened in the last 24 hours. On the other hand, you can’t shake the feeling your being watched. Should you grab your sword and investigate? +> Close the door and get in bed +It probably was just the wind, no need to be paranoid. You hop in bed and close your eyes. + + +“Cat---” + + +Your head is struck making you collapse. + + +“They may have taken my job, but they didn’t take my sword.” + + +“Lars?” You ask through blurred vision. + + +“Why yes, it’s me, demon! You really think I believed you survived on pure luck?" + + +He looks completely unhinged. You try to say something but just start coughing blood. It comes out in chunks resembling mashed berries. + + +“You really thought you could get away with it, didn’t you? HAHAHAHA! I know you’ve been possessed by a demon; how else could you survive the frigid cold?” + + +Clumps of blood continue flying out of your mouth as you fail to speak. Lars crotches down next to you and strokes your face. + + +“It’s ok, calm down. Like I told you before, or at least the non-possessed you, the city could use some heating up.” + + +Where is this going? + + +“I want to make a deal with you! Kill the Captain and I’ll let you live. Hell, I’ll even give you something in exchange. Perhaps a part of my soul? If there’s anything left in there.” +> Nod your head +That’s the last thing you do before passing. Between your shuttered eyes you can make out one last thing. + + +An even bigger smile on Lars’ face. + + +The next time you wake up your chained in darkness. You can still reach around a fair bit and waste no time exploring your surroundings by touch. When you get to your face you find it hastily wrapped in gauze and bandages. You shallow and taste dried up blood sticking to your mouth like honey. You really need a drink. With nobody around you start banging your chains against the ground. It makes a loud rattling sound that will surely attract anyone close by. + + +Nothing. Wherever you are nobody is here. Although, you assume Lars will be back soon. That is, unless he was killed as raving mad men often are. As you sit here hungry, tired, and thirsty you rack your mind trying to remember anything that can help you. Your head pounds with each thought, it feels like a hangover but a 100 time worse. Getting whack in the head may have some long-lasting effect on your mental capabilities. + + +After a few minutes of fruitless concentration, it hits you. The thing that got you into this mess is what will get you out; Catia. While the alcohol has mostly worn off, your injuries have left you in a susceptible state. Assuming she wasn’t lying when she said she would meet you again, she should be able to get you out of this mess. You can’t believe you need a demon to rescue you, but you have no choice. + + +“Catia,” you whisper. + + +A few seconds pass and despair creeps in. Just before you lose all hope a dark cloud appears in the room. It dispels a nauseous fume that ferociously attacks your lungs. You start violently coughing more blood, mostly dry, as you vision blurs. Your eyes shut close and you feel your grip on reality slipping away. + + +You awaken to find yourself in a metallic cage. This room is much brighter than the one before. + + +“When I saw you chained I figured a cage would make you feel right at home.” + + +It’s Catia and you’re getting a very different vibe from her than last time. Your gut tells you to do what she says as you are powerless. + + +“Now tell me, how come I wasn’t the first one to put you in chains?” she says while licking her lips. + + +“It’s not like it was consensual. I was blindsided and nearly died.” + + +She gives you a playful smile and whispers in to your ear + + +“Tell me everything and don’t spare any details. + + +Seeing as you don’t have much of a choice you describe everything that’s occurred since you last saw her. You don’t withhold even the most irrelevant details. + + +“It’s nice to know you believe I exist. I know it’s hard to believe someone this beautiful isn’t a figment of your imagination.” + + +Her red eyes pierce into your mind, daring you to think otherwise. + + +“So, what do you think we should do about Lars?” you ask. + + +She starts laughing to herself. + + +“What?” + + +She walks towards your cage and reaches inside. She puts her hand on your chin and points your head upwards. She locks eyes with you and grins widely + + +“You’re going to kill the captain!” + + +Later + + +It took a lot less convincing that you thought it would. Something about Catia just makes you want to obey her, though this time around you didn’t have much choice. She didn’t give you a reason other than saying + + +“Chaos sows the seeds of discontent.” + + +Which if you agree with this line of thinking, you are only helping the infernal realm by following Catia. Her influence is so strong you didn’t consider any other option. Or maybe you just really want to fuck her. Either way, time to kill the captain. + + +After releasing you from your cage, she offers to heal you with dark magic. You agree, as you can barely move let alone assassinate someone. What you didn’t know is that another demon would be performing the ritual. + + +“Why is a human stinking up the place?” + + +“Mind your manners, Jirzan. Someone finally wants you for your magic and you treat them like this?” + + +“Heh I guess you got a point. They don’t call me Jirzan the Lunatic for nothing. Alright tell me what you need me to do.” + + +She whispers into his ear and is too quiet to understand. Though you make out words such as “transform” and painful. + + +What exactly do they plan on doing to you? Perhaps you should try backing out of this whole ritual. +> Go on with it +Catia asks you to join hands with Jirzan and her. Once you do, they begin chanting nonsensical words. Their eyes roll into the back of their heads and their bodies go limp. After a few seconds they get up and it’s now you that’s limp. You feel excruciating pain course through your veins. Your skin burns, and it feels like fire ants are crawling in your eyes. + + +You can’t help but scream as every part of your body feels like hell, literally. Your skin starts to red and your head feels like it’s being ripped apart. They can’t be doing what you think they’re doing. + + +“The transformation is working!” Jirzan shouts. + + +You begin spazzing out on the floor. This isn’t what you thought she meant by healing you. + + +“Enjoy your new life under my servitude,” Catia laughs. + + +Your body starts contorting as blood spills out of your eyes. You jolt in and out of consciousness while Catia laughs louder. Her voice sounds dreamlike as the room around you morphs into hell. You black out. + + +When you wake up you find Catia and Jirzan shorter than before. In fact, the whole room feels smaller. + + +“There he is!” shouts Jirzan. + + +“How does it feel?” asks Catia. + + +You stare at them in shock. + + +“What did you do to me?’ + + +Catia approaches you differently than before. She no longer seems to be trying to seduce you. Rather, she carries a wave of supremacy not present before. + + +“You will obey my commands as long as I live. Now, get on your knees,” she says. + + +You try to protest, but find your whole body paralyzed. You assume this must be some sort of magic forcing you to obey. This however is not the case as she makes clear. + + +“WHY AREN’T YOU MOVING?” + + +“It seems like my ritual may have had some unintended effects.” + + +Your body goes into an epileptic seizure as they start arguing over the ritual. None of that matter to you as your heart can’t support your new body. The world becomes a blur as you hear one last thing, + + +“Great, I’ll never return home now that he’s dead.” + + +While you aren’t dead yet, you will be soon. Your tale ends here.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>That’s the last thing you do before passing. Between your shuttered eyes you can make out one last thing. + + +An even bigger smile on Lars’ face. + + +The next time you wake up your chained in darkness. You can still reach around a fair bit and waste no time exploring your surroundings by touch. When you get to your face you find it hastily wrapped in gauze and bandages. You shallow and taste dried up blood sticking to your mouth like honey. You really need a drink. With nobody around you start banging your chains against the ground. It makes a loud rattling sound that will surely attract anyone close by. + + +Nothing. Wherever you are nobody is here. Although, you assume Lars will be back soon. That is, unless he was killed as raving mad men often are. As you sit here hungry, tired, and thirsty you rack your mind trying to remember anything that can help you. Your head pounds with each thought, it feels like a hangover but a 100 time worse. Getting whack in the head may have some long-lasting effect on your mental capabilities. + + +After a few minutes of fruitless concentration, it hits you. The thing that got you into this mess is what will get you out; Catia. While the alcohol has mostly worn off, your injuries have left you in a susceptible state. Assuming she wasn’t lying when she said she would meet you again, she should be able to get you out of this mess. You can’t believe you need a demon to rescue you, but you have no choice. + + +“Catia,” you whisper. + + +A few seconds pass and despair creeps in. Just before you lose all hope a dark cloud appears in the room. It dispels a nauseous fume that ferociously attacks your lungs. You start violently coughing more blood, mostly dry, as you vision blurs. Your eyes shut close and you feel your grip on reality slipping away. + + +You awaken to find yourself in a metallic cage. This room is much brighter than the one before. + + +“When I saw you chained I figured a cage would make you feel right at home.” + + +It’s Catia and you’re getting a very different vibe from her than last time. Your gut tells you to do what she says as you are powerless. + + +“Now tell me, how come I wasn’t the first one to put you in chains?” she says while licking her lips. + + +“It’s not like it was consensual. I was blindsided and nearly died.” + + +She gives you a playful smile and whispers in to your ear + + +“Tell me everything and don’t spare any details. + + +Seeing as you don’t have much of a choice you describe everything that’s occurred since you last saw her. You don’t withhold even the most irrelevant details. + + +“It’s nice to know you believe I exist. I know it’s hard to believe someone this beautiful isn’t a figment of your imagination.” + + +Her red eyes pierce into your mind, daring you to think otherwise. + + +“So, what do you think we should do about Lars?” you ask. + + +She starts laughing to herself. + + +“What?” + + +She walks towards your cage and reaches inside. She puts her hand on your chin and points your head upwards. She locks eyes with you and grins widely + + +“You’re going to kill the captain!” + + +Later + + +It took a lot less convincing that you thought it would. Something about Catia just makes you want to obey her, though this time around you didn’t have much choice. She didn’t give you a reason other than saying + + +“Chaos sows the seeds of discontent.” + + +Which if you agree with this line of thinking, you are only helping the infernal realm by following Catia. Her influence is so strong you didn’t consider any other option. Or maybe you just really want to fuck her. Either way, time to kill the captain. + + +After releasing you from your cage, she offers to heal you with dark magic. You agree, as you can barely move let alone assassinate someone. What you didn’t know is that another demon would be performing the ritual. + + +“Why is a human stinking up the place?” + + +“Mind your manners, Jirzan. Someone finally wants you for your magic and you treat them like this?” + + +“Heh I guess you got a point. They don’t call me Jirzan the Lunatic for nothing. Alright tell me what you need me to do.” + + +She whispers into his ear and is too quiet to understand. Though you make out words such as “transform” and painful. + + +What exactly do they plan on doing to you? Perhaps you should try backing out of this whole ritual. +> Back out +“Hey uh guys, I don’t know about this. I think it would be best if I just heal the natural way.” + + +Jirzan turns towards you and hisses. + + +“You insolent fool! You dare turn the opportunity to become a demon, what else do you have going for you in life?” + + +You instinctively start backing away as he gets angrier. + + +“Is it my epithet ‘Lunatic’ that scares you? You humans disgust me. If that scares you I couldn’t imagine what you’d think about the meaning of my first name.” + + +Well his epithet played a role, but dark magic frightens you more. Now you’re curious about his first name and don’t hesitate in asking him, + + +“What does Jirzan mean?” + + +He does a little dance and is excited to share, + + +“Enslaver. My full name means translates to Enslaver the Lunatic. As a shorthand, ‘Deranged Enslaver’ works as well.” + + +He’s known as an Enslaver? Kind of ironic seeing as he is doing Catia’s bidding. How did he plan to enslave you with dark magic? Does dark magic break demonic rule or did he have no intent on subjugating you? + + +“Were you planning to enslave me? How can you just do that, doesn’t a deal have to be made?” + + +“A deal? Why do you think I was banished to earth? I don’t do deals and see no reason why I should. All I need is your consent to use dark magic and I can do whatever I want.” + + +Looks like you dodge a bullet. Although, you’re still confused about this whole banishment to earth. You thought demons were mounting a full-scale invasion. You bring up your confusion and that only causes him to laugh at you. + + +“You think I would be near humans willingly? The only reason I’m here is because dark magic is outlawed in hell. Demons tend to stray away from things they don’t understand” + + +“Same reason I’m here,” adds Catia. + + +If not here by free-will, what explains the siege of the capital? How would a bunch of misfits pose a threat to the elite empiric army? As you to reason through it, your brain aches with pain. Damn that hit from Lars got you good. + + +“Well if he doesn’t want to go through with the ritual then my work here is done,” says Jirzan. + + +“Not so fast!” says Catia. + + +“Eh? Do you want me to kill him or something? I thought you could use the practice.” + + +Catia sighs and places her hand on hip whist saying, + + +“What about instead of turning him into a demon we make him a Doom Knight? All you’d have to do is teach him a little dark magic and we should be all set.” + + +You don’t even know what a Doom Knight is and still don’t trust Jirzan to teach you. + + +“You think this imbecile could handle learning the dark arts? You have truly gone mad! And to think, they call me the lunatic.” + + +“C’mon Zan, you owe me this. Backing out will only lead to more consequences down the road.” + + +This seems to shut him up real quick. He starts cursing as it becomes clear to you Catia has something he dearly wants. + +“Fine I’ll do it, under two conditions. The first, I will need his full consent to do the initiation spell. Without it, there is no way he could become a Doom Knight. The second, you return Coyote back to me once I finish.” + + +Catia nods and agrees to his terms. She now turns to you and asks, + + +“Any questions?” +> What’s a Doom Knight? +You rack your brain and try to formulate some questions. Everything they’ve been saying kind of has blurred together. Though you do want to know what exactly a Doom Knight is. + + +“Doom Knights are slayers of all things good and holy. Think of them as some sort of reverse paladin.” + + +You always thought paladins were self-righteous assholes. They claim to protect others from evil yet persecute the smallest of sins. Who knows, Doom Knights might be more to your liking. + + +Other questions? +> Why me? +“I told you he would ask this!” says Jirzan. + + +“We might as well tell him the truth, or he might not join,” says Catia. + + +“Go ahead, though you are putting a lot of trust in a meathead.” + + +Catia explains how if they wanted to, demons could conquer earth in minutes. + + +“Why don’t you then?” you ask. + + +Catia pauses and starts speaking in a sad tone, + + +“If we did, I could never return to my homeland. In the underworld, different dimensions are at constant war. When darkness fights darkness, brute strength does nothing. You must outsmart your opponent through trickery and manipulation. That’s where you come in.” + + +She goes on to explain how banished demons are sent to lesser domains, such as earth, to earn redemption. Some demons are content with wreaking havoc, but others long for home. Take Jirzan for example, he couldn’t care less about the underworld. He thrives of chaos and enslaves all weaker than him. + + +“The only reason he’s helping is because he has no choice,” adds Catia. + + +In Catia’s case, she needs to others to do her own bidding to prove she does not have to relay on brute strength. Lucky for her, succubi are experts at having others do what they want. By having you kill the captain, she can prove just how capable she is. + + +“Making Lars believe you are a demon, and constructing a fake deal with him, proves how I can bend reality to my whim,” boasts Catia. + + +Regardless of what you think of her motivations, it seems the only choice you have is to follow her. + + +What else do you want to know?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It probably was just the wind, no need to be paranoid. You hop in bed and close your eyes. + + +“Cat---” + + +Your head is struck making you collapse. + + +“They may have taken my job, but they didn’t take my sword.” + + +“Lars?” You ask through blurred vision. + + +“Why yes, it’s me, demon! You really think I believed you survived on pure luck?" + + +He looks completely unhinged. You try to say something but just start coughing blood. It comes out in chunks resembling mashed berries. + + +“You really thought you could get away with it, didn’t you? HAHAHAHA! I know you’ve been possessed by a demon; how else could you survive the frigid cold?” + + +Clumps of blood continue flying out of your mouth as you fail to speak. Lars crotches down next to you and strokes your face. + + +“It’s ok, calm down. Like I told you before, or at least the non-possessed you, the city could use some heating up.” + + +Where is this going? + + +“I want to make a deal with you! Kill the Captain and I’ll let you live. Hell, I’ll even give you something in exchange. Perhaps a part of my soul? If there’s anything left in there.” +> Shake your head +That’s the last thing you do before passing out. + + +And the last thing you’ll ever do as Lars makes no attempt at reliving you. + + +End...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“My man!” shouts Connor. + + +“Har har Greg probably wants a retarded child to have someone finally agree with him,” Tom jokes. + + +Tom and Connor start shouting about how much of a dumbass Greg is. You agree, but don’t join in on the berating. Instead, you walk out of the tavern without a second glance. As you make your way outside you are hit with a rush of cool air. + + +“I can’t wait to meet Catia,” you mutter to yourself. + + +You tuck your hands in your pockets and begin the walk to your home. On the way, you bump into a familiar face. It’s Lars. + + +“How did last night go?” he asks. + + +Something about Lars is rubbing you the wrong way. It might be his emotionless eyes or his downtrodden tone, but you feel like telling him about Catia is a bad idea + + +“I nearly froze to death,” you say, wanting to be vague. + + +“Yeah how exactly did you avoid doing that? When I left it looked like you were about to pass out.” + + +“Just lucky I guess.” + + +“Lucky huh? Well it’s your ‘luck’ that got me fired. Thanks a lot, now my family can starve to death before getting killed by demons.” + + +You remain silent. + + +“The captain chewed my ass out for quitting guard duty. I thought he would berate me and give me a warning, but he fucking fired me. I told him how much bullshit that was because I would have frozen to death otherwise. He told me I was lazy and incompetent because ‘the other guard didn’t complain’ as if your dumbass was smart to stay.” + + +You try to apologize but Lars is having none of it. He gets angry and says, + + +“I pray to god the demons invade and gut you and the captain like fish. Scrape out your insides with their claws and your other insides with their dick.” + + +“Jesus man I said I was sorry.” + + +“Sorry doesn’t feed my family. Get out of my way, I’m gonna’ drink until I die.” + + +You move aside as Lars storms past you. Well, that was an interesting encounter. You don’t even know what to think, were you wrong to lie to him? How would he have reacted if you told him the truth? You push these thoughts out of your head and focus on getting home. It’s super cold and you don’t want to freeze to death and not have a succubus save you. + + +You find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don’t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. + + +You arrive at your parent’s old home and open the door. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. + + +“Some things never change,” you whisper to yourself. + + +You immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers’ uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? + + +You’re about to sit down in your bed when a chill runs down your spin. Your door makes a squeaking noise and a cold breeze rushes towards you. + + +“Is somebody there?” you ask. + + +No reply, although you don’t know what you were expecting. It’s possible the breeze pushed the door open, it's pretty flimsy and it wouldn’t be the craziest thing that’s happened in the last 24 hours. On the other hand, you can’t shake the feeling your being watched. Should you grab your sword and investigate? +> Grab your sword and investigate +Maybe it’s paranoia, but what kind of brain-dead retard wouldn’t rather be safe than sorry? You take out your sword and leave the bed room, checking every corner as you do so. This pays of as you notice a shadowy figure standing outside your bedroom. Is that…Lars? + + +“Your senses are very good, demon. I knew you were possessed, how else could you have heard me?” + + +“The annoying door squeak, for one. Also, it's fucking freezing so I knew someone let in the cold.” + + +“More lies! First you tell me you survived the cold from pure luck, now you tell me your heighten senses are nothing special? + + +“Lars, you have no idea what you’re talking about.” + + +“Stop pretending, I know your secret. You’ve been possessed by a demon; how else could you survive the frigid cold?” + + +Not wanting to fight a former friend, you decide to tell him the truth. + + +“I haven’t been possessed by a demon, but one did save me. It all started once you left…” + + +Later + + +“So that’s why you were at the drunk tortoise? I admit, you’ve never been one to drink.” + + +“Exactly! I’m glad you understand.” + + +“What now? You’re going to come clean to the captain and convince him to give me back my job, right? + + +While the captain may give Lars his job back, you would probably be fired. Coming into direct contact with a demon and living to tell the tale is a no go. He’ll probably think you made some sort of deal to avoid being killed. Regardless of what you plan to do, you say, + + +“I will definitely do that tomorrow.” + + +Lars nods but still looks a little unhinged. His hand twitches and he gives you a half grin. + + +“Ok I’m holding you to it, because if you don’t, you’re gonna wish you froze to death last night.” + + +You gulp as you have no doubt Lars could kill you if he wanted. He leaves and you hear the door squeak once again. The cold breeze has expanded throughout your house and you could use some heating up. After securing to house to make sure Lars isn’t still lurking, you fall into bed. + + +You’re super tired and debate whether you still want to see Catia. It’s been a long day and if you have any intention of talking to your captain tomorrow, you should go to sleep. +> Summon Catia +“Catia.” + + +A dark cloud appears in your room, dispelling a toxic fume. You start violently coughing as you vision blurs indiscriminately. Your eyes shut close and you feel you grip on reality slipping away from you. + + +“Ah shit,” you whisper before passing out. + + +Your eyes jitter open and you’re greeted by Catia stroking your face. Her palm flushes the coolness off your face. Beads of sweat drip furiously down your neck as she continues caressing you. + + +“Couldn’t wait a single day before seeing me again? Especially after you promised your friend you would visit ‘the captain’? How cute.” + + +You don’t have time to question how she knows that before she crawls on top of your bed and snuggles against you. Her aura is all consuming and you feel your free will being drained away. Yet, the whole process is extremely pleasing to you. She moves her mouth to your ear and whispers, + + +“Do you want to see everything I have to offer?” + + +You bite your tongue to avoid instinctively shouting yes. This may be your last chance to not go through with this. At the very least, it would give you chance to ask her a few more questions. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Maybe it’s paranoia, but what kind of brain-dead retard wouldn’t rather be safe than sorry? You take out your sword and leave the bed room, checking every corner as you do so. This pays of as you notice a shadowy figure standing outside your bedroom. Is that…Lars? + + +“Your senses are very good, demon. I knew you were possessed, how else could you have heard me?” + + +“The annoying door squeak, for one. Also, it's fucking freezing so I knew someone let in the cold.” + + +“More lies! First you tell me you survived the cold from pure luck, now you tell me your heighten senses are nothing special? + + +“Lars, you have no idea what you’re talking about.” + + +“Stop pretending, I know your secret. You’ve been possessed by a demon; how else could you survive the frigid cold?” + + +Not wanting to fight a former friend, you decide to tell him the truth. + + +“I haven’t been possessed by a demon, but one did save me. It all started once you left…” + + +Later + + +“So that’s why you were at the drunk tortoise? I admit, you’ve never been one to drink.” + + +“Exactly! I’m glad you understand.” + + +“What now? You’re going to come clean to the captain and convince him to give me back my job, right? + + +While the captain may give Lars his job back, you would probably be fired. Coming into direct contact with a demon and living to tell the tale is a no go. He’ll probably think you made some sort of deal to avoid being killed. Regardless of what you plan to do, you say, + + +“I will definitely do that tomorrow.” + + +Lars nods but still looks a little unhinged. His hand twitches and he gives you a half grin. + + +“Ok I’m holding you to it, because if you don’t, you’re gonna wish you froze to death last night.” + + +You gulp as you have no doubt Lars could kill you if he wanted. He leaves and you hear the door squeak once again. The cold breeze has expanded throughout your house and you could use some heating up. After securing to house to make sure Lars isn’t still lurking, you fall into bed. + + +You’re super tired and debate whether you still want to see Catia. It’s been a long day and if you have any intention of talking to your captain tomorrow, you should go to sleep. +> Go to sleep and visit the captain first thing in the morning +You close your eyes and drift off to sleep. You dream of a bright forest with playing children. Everything is nice and everyone is happy. Then one day that changes when a portal to another dimension appears in the middle of the forest. Out of the portal comes abominations to mankind. A collection of arms and legs attached on to a giant ball of flesh. This ball rolls around destroying the forest, killing everyone and growing stronger as it does so. The ball then comes rolling at you. You don’t have time to scream before… + + +You jolt awake and find yourself covered in sweat. As much as you hate nightmares, they do a great job at waking you up. You look outside your window and notice the sun rising. This rising ball of fire reminds you of the ball from your dream. You throw on a clean pair of clothes, grab your sword just in case, and make your way to the captain’s quarters. + + +It’s an uneventful journey and you arrive within a few minutes. Not wanting to wake the captain, you pull out pen and paper. It goes as follows, + + +Dear Captain Dario, + + +I am writing to you regarding the firing of guard Lars. I was on the same shift as him before he left. The windchill was approaching deadly levels and he decided to head inside as a last resort. I stayed out only because I feared the repercussions. As I sat out there, my muscles began to freeze until I could no longer move. I passed out minutes later. + + +I would have surely died had a traveling merchant not stopped by. They started a fire and warmed me up. I would have died otherwise and thank the heavens a demon didn’t wander by. Due to my own experiences, I recommend you rehire Lars and if anything, fire me for putting my life on the line when it wasn’t needed. + + +You are in such a rush that you slide the letter under the door before signing it. You decided against telling the truth as Captain Dario is a hard ass for rules. Not only would you have been fired, but also forced to undergo a purging to ward off any demonic influences. + + +With that out of the way, you decide to head to a local armory. Your city issued sword is no match for a demon, as Catia pointed out. Not knowing if your parents will ever return, you see no problem with using their savings for your protection. You take a stroll to the armory and find it to be quite crowded for this early in the morning. + + +“I need something that can scare away demons,” a farmer says + + +“Scare away? Why not something that can kill?” + + +“Look son, I’ve never been one to resort to violence. I just need something to protect you and the Misses.” + + +You zone out their conversation and take a look around. They have swords, maces, axes, and even a trident. However, what catches your eyes is a bow painted red and black. It’s the only one in the store and seems rare. + + +“Excuse me sir, what’s the price on this bow?” + + +“That would be 500 gold sir,” replies a dwarf with steel encrusted teeth. + + +“What’s so special about it?” + + +“We brought it from a dark elf mercenary. They have great craftsmanship, especially when it comes to bows.” + + +“How is it different than all the other bows for sale?” + + +He pauses and turns red, + + +“I hate to admit it, but I’ve always struggled making bows. That red and black one has much finer strings and sturdier wood, giving it a greater firing range.” + + +You thank the dwarf for the information and continue looking around. Nothing else catches your eye, so you decide to buy the bow. + + +“Pleasure doing business with ya.” + + +You leave with your new bow and 500 gold poorer. You hope you still have your guard job as your parent’s money won’t last much longer. You go to the guard barracks and decide to get a meal there. Even if you’ve been fired, you doubt any of the servers will know. You arrive to a mess hall and find it more empty than usual. Two men eat soup together and another man sits alone. + + +You grab a cup of soup and take another look around. You recognize the two men sitting together as Herbert and Andy. Herbert is an older man with a gray beard who has always been kind to you. Andy is around your age, mid twenties, and is already going bald. Both are good chaps and would be happy if you sat with them. + + +The man sitting alone is someone you don’t recognize. He is a very thin fellow with patchy hair and missing teeth. You could try to find out who he is, or sit with Herbert and Andy. +> Sit with the skinny man +You walk over to the skinny man and and ask, + + +“Mind if I sit next to you?” + + +He is startled by your presence and jumps up a bit. He mutters something incomprehensible before saying, + + +“I don’t mind.” + + +The hot soup burns your tongue as you eat a spoonful. + + +“So what’s this town’s name again?” + + +“Ashton, why do you ask?” + + +“You might not believe me, but I came face to face with a demon. When I finally got away, I ran to the city walls.” + + +“Trust me, I believe you. I encountered a demon while on guard duty.” + + +You tell him about how you passed out and met a succubus. + + +“That’s wild.” + + +“Sure is, now tell me about the demon you met.” + + +He grits what few teeth he has and begins, + + +“He wasn’t pleasant at all like the one you met. I was going for a walk in the forest. I know, it’s not the smartest thing to do in times like these, but it's one of my few sanctities.” + + +His voice gets lower as he describes, + + +“I knew something was off the moment I entered. An unholy energy made me feel weak and tired. I started hearing voices and couldn’t tell what was real. It was like I was in a trance.” + + +“Did you actually see a demon?” + + +“No, but he made his presence known. He tired to coerce me into letting him take over my mind. I almost did it too, but something broke me out of my trance.” + + +He pauses for dramatic effect, + + +“A bird fucking shat on my head!” + + +You stare at his head and notice white flakes clumped in his hair. + + +“Once I realized what I was about to do I ran like hell. I wasn’t thinking straight and went the opposite direction which I came in. I’m lucky I ended up here.” + + +His experience is vastly different to your own. You suppose he encountered a demonic sprit, rather than a full fledge demon. + + +“Perhaps this all was for the best. My city was running low on food, hence my frail appearance.” + + +“Are you planning on staying in Ashton?” + + +“I don’t know. I would need to get a job and a place to sleep at night. Would you be able to help me out in any way?” + + +When your about to answer you hear someone call your name. It’s Captain Dario and he wants to speak with you immediately. You get up and tell the thin man, + + +“It was nice talking to you.” + + +“I hope you can come back when you're done. My name’s Eric by the way.” + + +You wave goodbye and follow the captain into his private quarters. + + +A rush of anxiety hits you as your still not sure if the captain bought your story. What if Lars told him the truth? + + +“Please, take a seat.” + + +You sit and find yourself starring at the gray haired captain. He stares back, unblinking as you both wait to see who makes the first move. + + +“First things first, you’re not fired.” + + +“That’s a relief.” + + +“I’m sure it is, but what I say next may not be. I have no intention of re-hiring Lars.” + + +“Wait what? Like I said in my letter, he did the smart thing and could have died had he stayed.” + + +The captain sighs and says, + + +“While that may be true, I’ve been wanting to fire him for awhile. He’s lazy and incompetent. The only reason he still had a job was because guards are in high demand right now. The problem now is finding a replacement.” + + +“What happens if you don’t?” + + +Dario frowns and bitterly says, + + +“Then I might have to rehire Lars.” + + +You could mention your new acquaintance, Eric, and vouch for him to replace Lars. On the other hand, who knows how Lars will react if he finds out you played a role in replacing him. There may be no reasoning with him. +> Mention Eric +“I may know of a potential replacement.” + + +“No need not to not speak in absolutes. Spit it out sonny.” + + +You stumbled a bit, not because your scared to tell him, but because his syntax confuses you. + + +“Erm… I—I… his name is Eric.” + + +“Who is this so-called Eric?” + + +“He was the man I was sitting with. He’s looking for work and seems like a good fellow.” + + +“That’s all I need, tell him he’s hired. Oh, and he starts immediately. 11pm tonight tell him to go to the city walls.” + + +“Tonight? Isn’t this all happening a bit too fast?” + + +“Nonsense, plus he won’t be doing it alone. He’ll have you to teach him.” + + +You tense up as Dario continues, + + +“Lighten up, kid! I took the initiative and brought fur coats for each of you.” + + +Hell of an initiative considering you almost died two nights ago. + + +“Thanks for taking the initiative…” + + +“You’re most certainly welcomed! Now that that’s settled, get the hell out of here!” + + +You stand up and leave his office. Eric does a one tooth smile as you walk over to him. + + +“What was that all about?” + + +You have a sly smile on your face when you say, + + +“It was about you, congrats you’re now a guard!” + + +He gives you a look of confusion and asks, + + +“What the hell are you talking about?” + + +You explain how guards are in high demand and that you mentioned him to the captain. + + +“And I almost forgot, you start tonight.” + + +“Wait what?” + + +“Don’t worry, I’m on guard duty tonight as well. Plus, I’ve only ever seen demons one time...” + + +“That one time was last night!” + + +“Actually two nights ago, but never mind that. Anyways the captain brought fur coats for the both of us so no freezing to death tonight. C’mon, let’s get rolling.” + + +“Alright but don’t act like this is permanent, if I don’t like it, I’m quitting after tonight.” + + +“Trust me, it’ll be much easier now that we won’t be freezing. I have a feeling you’ll stick around.” + + + +> 1 month later +“You really don’t have to do this,” + + +“Blasphemy, I’ve seen what you can do with my bow, you deserve one of your own.” + + +“Yeah but you don’t have to help me pay for it. Anyways, I’m not that good with a bow,” Eric says humbly. + + +“Well you’ll have plenty have chance to practice, let’s get going.” + + +The past month in Ashton has been quiet, but demon sighting have increased in the nearby forest. Eric and you need to be as prepared as possible for when they strike. In addition, you have grown to like Eric a lot and are happy to help pay for his bow. You’re hoping they have one that’s as good quality as the one you brought last month. You arrive at the armory and note it being a lot less busy than it was last time. In fact, you’re the only two here aside from the dwarf who runs the place. + + +“Where is everyone?” you ask. + + +“I about ran out of equipment. With how trade has been recently, its impossible to get the material needed to craft weapons.” + + +You offer your condolences and tell him why you’ve came here, + + +“You wouldn’t happen to any bows for sale?” + + +He half smiles, then says, + + +“I might have a few, but none of my own creation. Those sold out the fastest due to their cheap price.” + + +Eric gives you a concerned look knowing the cheapest bows are all sold out. + + +“Well let’s see them,” you say. + + +He lays out a few bows on a table and describes each of them. + + +“This one right here was specifically crafted to kill orcs, but it should be fine for just about anything.” + + +“What about demons?” + + +“I see no reason why not!” + + +He shows you a few other bows, mostly made be other local blacksmiths, but one other thing catches your eye. + + +“Hey what’s that?” you say pointing to a crossbow on display. + + +“She’s a beauty, isn’t she? Crafted by the capital’s smartest black smiths, though its a few years outdated. It doesn't have the most range, but it sure packs a punch. I reckon one shot from it could bring any creature to near death. That is, if you’re a good enough shot to hit your target dead on.” + + +“How much?” asks Eric. + + +“800 gold.” + + +“Are you crazy? That’s more than I made last month working as a guard.” + + +“Higher prices, higher quality.” + + +“What about the orc killer bow?” + + +“Those are pretty common, 300 gold would be a fair price.” + + +“We should probably just get that one, don’t want my friend going bankrupt.” + + + +> Insist you buy the better bow +You help Eric buy the better bow and he is apprehensive. + + +“Thanks man, but now we’re both broke.” + + +“Better broke than dead.” + + +You leave with the bow and get ready for guard duty. + + +5 hours later + + +It’s been a quiet night so far and warmer than usual. Eric stands up and draws his crossbow towards the forest. + + +“Do you see something?” + + +“Yeah I do. It’s like a bat but much larger.” + + +You look where he’s pointing and something comes into view. It’s a succubus, but unlike the one you met before, it no longer resembles a human. It has blood stained skin and humongous bat wings. + + +“Holy shit.” + + +Don’t just stand there, fire!” you say. + + +You and Eric unleash a flurry of arrows at the creature. It manages to dodge almost everything, but Eric hits it dead on. + + +“Got it!” + + +It falls from the sky and lands awkwardly. You waste no time laying it to waste with arrow after arrow. You don’t stop until you’re sure its dead, and it soon looks like a half-bat, half-porcupine monstrosity. You did it, you killed a demon. + + +“That was an amazing shot, I’m not sure we would have brought it done had we brought the cheaper bow.” + + +“Yeah, thanks again,” Eric says with tears streaming down his face. + + +“What’s wrong?” + + +“I just can’t believe we survived. You hear tales about demons destroying entire cities and yet we were able to bring down one with only two of us.” + + +“We make a good team.” + + +“We sure do, we sure do.” + + + +> Epilogue #2: Succubus Slayers +You two are lauded as heroes and given a big pay raise. + + +“And to think, I almost kept that loser Lars!” + + +Speaking of Lars, want to know what happened to him? He and his whole family starved to death. Better him than the whole city am I right? On the bright side, you and Eric continue killing demons as sightings become more common. After word of your legacy spreads, a local lord hires you as demon hunters. You decide to take up the name Succubus Slayers as a reference to your first kill. This is a rather ironic turn of events considering you went from being saved by a succubus, to killing them for a living. + + +Who knows, maybe you’ll have to kill Catia one day?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“You really don’t have to do this,” + + +“Blasphemy, I’ve seen what you can do with my bow, you deserve one of your own.” + + +“Yeah but you don’t have to help me pay for it. Anyways, I’m not that good with a bow,” Eric says humbly. + + +“Well you’ll have plenty have chance to practice, let’s get going.” + + +The past month in Ashton has been quiet, but demon sighting have increased in the nearby forest. Eric and you need to be as prepared as possible for when they strike. In addition, you have grown to like Eric a lot and are happy to help pay for his bow. You’re hoping they have one that’s as good quality as the one you brought last month. You arrive at the armory and note it being a lot less busy than it was last time. In fact, you’re the only two here aside from the dwarf who runs the place. + + +“Where is everyone?” you ask. + + +“I about ran out of equipment. With how trade has been recently, its impossible to get the material needed to craft weapons.” + + +You offer your condolences and tell him why you’ve came here, + + +“You wouldn’t happen to any bows for sale?” + + +He half smiles, then says, + + +“I might have a few, but none of my own creation. Those sold out the fastest due to their cheap price.” + + +Eric gives you a concerned look knowing the cheapest bows are all sold out. + + +“Well let’s see them,” you say. + + +He lays out a few bows on a table and describes each of them. + + +“This one right here was specifically crafted to kill orcs, but it should be fine for just about anything.” + + +“What about demons?” + + +“I see no reason why not!” + + +He shows you a few other bows, mostly made be other local blacksmiths, but one other thing catches your eye. + + +“Hey what’s that?” you say pointing to a crossbow on display. + + +“She’s a beauty, isn’t she? Crafted by the capital’s smartest black smiths, though its a few years outdated. It doesn't have the most range, but it sure packs a punch. I reckon one shot from it could bring any creature to near death. That is, if you’re a good enough shot to hit your target dead on.” + + +“How much?” asks Eric. + + +“800 gold.” + + +“Are you crazy? That’s more than I made last month working as a guard.” + + +“Higher prices, higher quality.” + + +“What about the orc killer bow?” + + +“Those are pretty common, 300 gold would be a fair price.” + + +“We should probably just get that one, don’t want my friend going bankrupt.” + + + +> Settle for the cheaper bow +You help Eric buy the cheaper bow and he is glad. + + +“Thanks man, no need to go broke.” + + +“Better dead than broke,” you say sarcastically + + +You leave with the bow and get ready for guard duty. + + +5 hours later + + +It’s been a quiet night so far and warmer than usual. Eric stands up and draws his bow towards the forest. + + +“Do you see something?” + + +“Yeah I do. It’s like a bat but much larger.” + + +You look where he’s pointing and something comes into view. It’s a succubus, but unlike the one you met before, it no longer resembles a human. It has blood stained skin and humongous bat wings. + + +“Holy shit.” + + +Don’t just stand there, fire!” you say. + + +You and Eric unleash a flurry of arrows at the creature. It manages to dodge almost everything, but Eric hits it dead on. + + +“Got it!” + + +Except it does nothing but annoy it. The creature screams and flies at blazing speed towards both of you. You manage to hit it a few times, but it does nothing. You are torn to pieces as Eric watches. He awaits the same fate. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk over to the skinny man and and ask, + + +“Mind if I sit next to you?” + + +He is startled by your presence and jumps up a bit. He mutters something incomprehensible before saying, + + +“I don’t mind.” + + +The hot soup burns your tongue as you eat a spoonful. + + +“So what’s this town’s name again?” + + +“Ashton, why do you ask?” + + +“You might not believe me, but I came face to face with a demon. When I finally got away, I ran to the city walls.” + + +“Trust me, I believe you. I encountered a demon while on guard duty.” + + +You tell him about how you passed out and met a succubus. + + +“That’s wild.” + + +“Sure is, now tell me about the demon you met.” + + +He grits what few teeth he has and begins, + + +“He wasn’t pleasant at all like the one you met. I was going for a walk in the forest. I know, it’s not the smartest thing to do in times like these, but it's one of my few sanctities.” + + +His voice gets lower as he describes, + + +“I knew something was off the moment I entered. An unholy energy made me feel weak and tired. I started hearing voices and couldn’t tell what was real. It was like I was in a trance.” + + +“Did you actually see a demon?” + + +“No, but he made his presence known. He tired to coerce me into letting him take over my mind. I almost did it too, but something broke me out of my trance.” + + +He pauses for dramatic effect, + + +“A bird fucking shat on my head!” + + +You stare at his head and notice white flakes clumped in his hair. + + +“Once I realized what I was about to do I ran like hell. I wasn’t thinking straight and went the opposite direction which I came in. I’m lucky I ended up here.” + + +His experience is vastly different to your own. You suppose he encountered a demonic sprit, rather than a full fledge demon. + + +“Perhaps this all was for the best. My city was running low on food, hence my frail appearance.” + + +“Are you planning on staying in Ashton?” + + +“I don’t know. I would need to get a job and a place to sleep at night. Would you be able to help me out in any way?” + + +When your about to answer you hear someone call your name. It’s Captain Dario and he wants to speak with you immediately. You get up and tell the thin man, + + +“It was nice talking to you.” + + +“I hope you can come back when you're done. My name’s Eric by the way.” + + +You wave goodbye and follow the captain into his private quarters. + + +A rush of anxiety hits you as your still not sure if the captain bought your story. What if Lars told him the truth? + + +“Please, take a seat.” + + +You sit and find yourself starring at the gray haired captain. He stares back, unblinking as you both wait to see who makes the first move. + + +“First things first, you’re not fired.” + + +“That’s a relief.” + + +“I’m sure it is, but what I say next may not be. I have no intention of re-hiring Lars.” + + +“Wait what? Like I said in my letter, he did the smart thing and could have died had he stayed.” + + +The captain sighs and says, + + +“While that may be true, I’ve been wanting to fire him for awhile. He’s lazy and incompetent. The only reason he still had a job was because guards are in high demand right now. The problem now is finding a replacement.” + + +“What happens if you don’t?” + + +Dario frowns and bitterly says, + + +“Then I might have to rehire Lars.” + + +You could mention your new acquaintance, Eric, and vouch for him to replace Lars. On the other hand, who knows how Lars will react if he finds out you played a role in replacing him. There may be no reasoning with him. +> Defend Lars +“Lars might not be the best guard, but he’s the best option available. On the bright side, we at least seem to get along.” + + +Dario’s face turns dark red as he spits out, + + +“If he’s the best option, then this city might burn in flames tonight. None of us are safe with him on duty.” + + +“So I take it that you won’t be rehiring him?” + + +The captains sighs deeply out of frustration. + + +“Look, tell him he can guard tonight. However, if he messes up one more time, he’s out for good.” + + +You do a small fist bump out of celebration. + + +“Not so fast sonny, you’re going with him.” + + +“Really? Even after what happened the last time we were on guard duty together?” + + +“You said it yourself, you two get along. Now, get out and get to work.” + + +You leave in a pissed off mood, however the captain adds one thing before you slam his door shut. + + +“I brought fur coats for the both of you. They’re in your lockers and it’s best if you wear them tonight.” + + +You leave in a slightly less pissed off mood and slam the door. Eric does a one tooth smile as you walk over to him. + + +“What was that all about?” + + +“Nothing too important. I have to go now, it was nice meeting you.” + + +Nice meeting you too...” + + +You leave and head over to Lars house. It’s best to tell him the good news as soon as you can. You get there shortly and he answers the door right away. + + +“So did you do it? Did you tell the captain what really happened.” + + +“I convinced the captain to give you your job back, that’s all that matters.” + + +Lars looks like he wants to argue, but holds back. + + +“I’m just happy my family won’t starve to death. Oh, and that I won’t have to kill you,” he says with a wink. + + +“Yeah it’s great news, now follow me. The captain brought fur coats for both of us.” + + + +> A month later +Lars is an incompetent fucktard who can’t even hold a bow. You’re very lucky the last month has been quiet for you, however demon sighting are getting more common. Sooner than later you’re going to encounter one. You put on your fur coat and walk to the city walls. + + +5 hours later + + +It’s been a quiet night so far and warmer than usual. Lars stands up and points his sword towards the forest. + + +“Do you see something?” + + +“Maybe, unless the booze is fucking with my vision. It looks like a bat but much larger, and...sexier.” + + +You look where he’s pointing and something comes into view. It’s a succubus, but unlike the one you met before, it no longer resembles a human. It has blood stained skin and humongous bat wings. + + +“Holy shit.” + + +Don’t just stand there, defend yourself.” + + +“Nah fuck that,” Lars says while running away. + + +You unleash a flurry of arrows at the creature as Lars makes his escape. It manages to dodge almost everything, but one arrow grazes its foot. + + +“HOW DARE YOU!” + + +The succubus releases a bolt of dark energy at you. It hits you in the chest and you collapse. As you sit there about to pass out, a thought comes to you. One month ago a succubus saved your life, now another ends it. + + +“Tell Catia I said hi...”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You close your eyes and drift off to sleep. You dream of a bright forest with playing children. Everything is nice and everyone is happy. Then one day that changes when a portal to another dimension appears in the middle of the forest. Out of the portal comes abominations to mankind. A collection of arms and legs attached on to a giant ball of flesh. This ball rolls around destroying the forest, killing everyone and growing stronger as it does so. The ball then comes rolling at you. You don’t have time to scream before… + + +You jolt awake and find yourself covered in sweat. As much as you hate nightmares, they do a great job at waking you up. You look outside your window and notice the sun rising. This rising ball of fire reminds you of the ball from your dream. You throw on a clean pair of clothes, grab your sword just in case, and make your way to the captain’s quarters. + + +It’s an uneventful journey and you arrive within a few minutes. Not wanting to wake the captain, you pull out pen and paper. It goes as follows, + + +Dear Captain Dario, + + +I am writing to you regarding the firing of guard Lars. I was on the same shift as him before he left. The windchill was approaching deadly levels and he decided to head inside as a last resort. I stayed out only because I feared the repercussions. As I sat out there, my muscles began to freeze until I could no longer move. I passed out minutes later. + + +I would have surely died had a traveling merchant not stopped by. They started a fire and warmed me up. I would have died otherwise and thank the heavens a demon didn’t wander by. Due to my own experiences, I recommend you rehire Lars and if anything, fire me for putting my life on the line when it wasn’t needed. + + +You are in such a rush that you slide the letter under the door before signing it. You decided against telling the truth as Captain Dario is a hard ass for rules. Not only would you have been fired, but also forced to undergo a purging to ward off any demonic influences. + + +With that out of the way, you decide to head to a local armory. Your city issued sword is no match for a demon, as Catia pointed out. Not knowing if your parents will ever return, you see no problem with using their savings for your protection. You take a stroll to the armory and find it to be quite crowded for this early in the morning. + + +“I need something that can scare away demons,” a farmer says + + +“Scare away? Why not something that can kill?” + + +“Look son, I’ve never been one to resort to violence. I just need something to protect you and the Misses.” + + +You zone out their conversation and take a look around. They have swords, maces, axes, and even a trident. However, what catches your eyes is a bow painted red and black. It’s the only one in the store and seems rare. + + +“Excuse me sir, what’s the price on this bow?” + + +“That would be 500 gold sir,” replies a dwarf with steel encrusted teeth. + + +“What’s so special about it?” + + +“We brought it from a dark elf mercenary. They have great craftsmanship, especially when it comes to bows.” + + +“How is it different than all the other bows for sale?” + + +He pauses and turns red, + + +“I hate to admit it, but I’ve always struggled making bows. That red and black one has much finer strings and sturdier wood, giving it a greater firing range.” + + +You thank the dwarf for the information and continue looking around. Nothing else catches your eye, so you decide to buy the bow. + + +“Pleasure doing business with ya.” + + +You leave with your new bow and 500 gold poorer. You hope you still have your guard job as your parent’s money won’t last much longer. You go to the guard barracks and decide to get a meal there. Even if you’ve been fired, you doubt any of the servers will know. You arrive to a mess hall and find it more empty than usual. Two men eat soup together and another man sits alone. + + +You grab a cup of soup and take another look around. You recognize the two men sitting together as Herbert and Andy. Herbert is an older man with a gray beard who has always been kind to you. Andy is around your age, mid twenties, and is already going bald. Both are good chaps and would be happy if you sat with them. + + +The man sitting alone is someone you don’t recognize. He is a very thin fellow with patchy hair and missing teeth. You could try to find out who he is, or sit with Herbert and Andy. +> Sit with Herbert and Andy +You head over to sit with Herbert and Andy and listen in on their conversation. + + +“I can’t believe she would do such a thing,” says Herbert. + + +“I don’t know how she could just lie after all I did for her. She’s been pissed at me ever since we last had sex. I can’t even talk to her anymore.” + + +“I know how you feel, women sure are a pain in the ass. Hey new guy, did you hear what Andy’s girlfriends been doing?” + + +You stop blowing on your soup and glance at Herbert. + + +“I haven’t, what happened?” + + +“So this fucking bitch named, what was her name again Andy?” + + +“Julia.” + + +“Yeah so this bitch named Julia has been spreading lies about him ever since they broke up. She told the captain that he raped her!” + + +“I guess she wants to get me fired. Rather get revenge against me for something I didn’t do then have the city be safe.” + + +“Julia...what’s her last name?” + + +“Why does it matter? She’s a fucking liar and that’s that,” says Andy. + + +“Sorry I thought I might know her...I had a childhood friend named Julia.” + + +“Well I hope you don’t still consider her a friend after what she did to Andy. That skank deserves to live a life alone.” + + +You sit in silence as you take this all in. If this is the Julia you think it is, there’s got to be a reason she said what she said. You never knew her as the type of person to lie, even as a child. When you’re about to prod further, you hear someone call your name. It’s Captain Dario and he wants to speak with you immediately. You wave goodbye and follow the captain into his private quarters. + + +A rush of anxiety hits you as your still not sure if the captain bought your story. What if Lars told him the truth? + + +“Please, take a seat.” + + +You sit and find yourself starring at the gray haired captain. He stares back, unblinking as you both wait to see who makes the first move. + + +“First things first, you’re not fired.” + + +“That’s a relief.” + + +“I’m sure it is, but what I say next may not be. I have no intention of re-hiring Lars.” + + +“Wait what? Like I said in my letter, he did the smart thing and could have died had he stayed.” + + +The captain sighs and says, + + +“While that may be true, I’ve been wanting to fire him for awhile. He’s lazy and incompetent. The only reason he still had a job was because guards are in high demand right now. The problem now is finding a replacement.” + + +“What happens if you don’t?” + + +Dario frowns and bitterly says, + + +“Then I might have to rehire Lars.” + + +You could talk about Herbert and Andy, they might be able to take over Lars’ previous guard duties. On the other hand, who knows how Lars will react if he finds out you played a role in replacing him. There may be no reasoning with him. + + + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“This is the last time I’m saying this Greg, immortality is not worth cutting off your cock. What’s the point of being immortal if you’re deprived of the best feeling in the world?” + + +“Ey’ maybe he’s lacking in that area. No wonder he wants immortality if all he has to do his cut off an inch or two worth of pecker.” + + +Greg suddenly stands up, drawing your eyes to the bickering trio. They’ve been arguing random hypotheticals since you’ve gotten here. All you wanted was to get a quiet drink before meeting with Catia. As long as these buffoons are here, that’s impossible. + + +Even as Greg stands up he’s shorter than the other two sitting. It’s no wonder they pick on him, he looks pathetic. + + +“Can you both just shut the fuck up? I mean, god damn. All I’m saying is living forever outweighs the downsides of not having a dick,” he says in a whiny voice. + + +The other two laugh uncontrollably at his pitiful attempt of defiance. One manages to calm down and spits out, + + +“Maybe when it’s smaller than a gnome’s toothbrush, but for the rest us it’s not so easy.” + + +Queue more uncontrollable laughter as Greg’s face becomes redder than demon blood. + + +“I’ll shove a gnome’s toothbrush up your ass if you say that one more time! C’mon, let’s move on to another question.” + + +The trio quiets down and you zone them out. You take a swig of whisky and start to remember the reason while you’re here. Oh yeah, the succubus. She wanted you to drink a bit before meeting her. You didn’t necessarily jump at the idea of getting drunk before meeting with a demon, but she promised you she would make it worthwhile. You’re pretty sure that means… + + +Your thoughts are interrupted by the thickheaded trio once again. + + +“You’re telling me you’d prefer your child be retarded and kind than ingenious and mean?” + + +“Yes Connor, I would.” + + +“God damn it, Greg! You want to spend an eternity with no dick while taking care of a retarded child? Pathetic. I would kill myself after a week.” + + +“Har har har! I would kill myself in a week if I had to live Greg’s life as it is. No, scratch that, a day!” + + +“Fuck you Tom. I can’t be the only one who thinks this…” + + +Greg glances around nervously looking for a savior. Eventually he turns his gaze towards you and his eyes light up. + + +“Hey you over there! What would you rather have, a dumb, but kind child; or a smart, but cruel child?” he says while pointing at you. + + +You stare blankly ahead and breathe a deep sigh. This is beyond stupid. You briefly consider just ignoring him and getting the hell out of this place. + + +“Why do you think that man would agree with you? He’s a soldier. Surely, he recognizes the benefits a genius could provide for society. Especially when you consider the need for mages regarding the growing demon problem.” + + +Soldier? Shit you forgot to change out of your uniform. So much for staying inconspicuous. You can thank your lucky stars none of the other guards are here to see you in this shithole. + + +“Now now, let the man speak. Just because he’s a soldier doesn’t mean he agrees with you,” says Tom. + + +“Fine, what do you think...and hurry up! We don’t have all day.” +> “I have no preference.” +“No preference? What the hell is that supposed to mean?” says Connor. + + +“He must think he’s not having any children. I guess he’s into dudes.” Replies Tom. + + +“Yeah I think you’re right. I swear I saw him eyeing Greg.” + + +You feel the bile rising in the back of your throat. They think you’re attracted to that disgusting little worm? People usually don’t get under you skin so much but this time it’s different. You’re about to fuck a hot demon bitch and the idea of being attracted to Greg is NOT what you need right now. + + +“Do you really want to know why I don’t give a fuck about your pointless hypothetical?” + + +“Well, yeah.” + + +You take a deep breath and begin to describe your recent encounter with a succubus. + + +“Well it all started when I fell asleep during guard duty”. + + +One convoluted story later. + + + “And that’s why I came to this tavern,” you say with a cheeky grin. + + +Your story gets mixed reactions. + + +“You’re not actually going through with this are you?” asks Tom. + + +“Ok so you’re attracted to some demon bitch. I still saw you eyeing Greg for at least the past hour.” + + +And strangest of all, + + +“Wait aren’t succubi immortal? And they don’t have dicks! Well, at least I assume they don’t”. + + +You don’t engage with any of them and feel compelled to go home. Although, Tom’s words are giving you second thoughts. Should you wait a few days before even thinking about seeing the succubus? +> Stay and think it over +The trio starts arguing but you quickly interrupt them. + + +“Hey wait! Why shouldn’t I go through with this?” + + +Everyone turns towards you as if confused to why you’re still here. Tom let’s out a long sigh and asks the question that has been on everyone’s mind. + + +“Are you sure any of that was even real?” + + +You scrunch your eyebrows and consider the possibility. No, it can’t be fake. The rush of it all was too great for it to be a hallucination. It was either real or nothing is real. + + +“Yeah your dumbass was probably just hallucinating from the cold,” Connor jeers. + + +That can’t be it. You know it was real, although they couldn’t possibly understand. They weren’t there. + + +“If I had to guess, I’d say a good Samaritan helped you when they saw you passed out. You might have mistaken their torch for that of a demon,” Says Tom. + + +“Yeah and they probably told you to go to the tavern to warmup. That’s what these two did when they first found me,” says Greg. + + +For the love of god! Now even Greg is gaslighting you. Enough of this nonsense. You can either leave right now or waste your night away here. +> Leave RIGHT NOW +The trio begins arguing again. Something about how demon immortality is different than regular immortality. You don’t time to dwell on it and make your way home. You find yourself grinning the whole walk back. This isn’t just a happy drunk feeling. You feel like this is your purpose. It’s time to see Catia. + + +You find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don’t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. + + +You arrive at your parent’s old home and twist the doorknob. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. + + +“Some things never change,” you whisper to yourself. + + +You immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers’ uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? + + +“Catia.” + + +A dark cloud appears in your room, dispelling a toxic fume. You start violently coughing as you vision blurs indiscriminately. Your eyes shut close and you feel you grip on reality slipping away from you. + + +“Ah shit,” you whisper before passing out. + + +Your eyes jitter open and you’re greeted by Catia stroking your face. Her palm flushes the coolness off your face. Beads of sweat drip furiously down your neck as she continues caressing you. + + +“Couldn’t wait a single day before seeing me again? How cute.” + + +She crawls onto your bed and moves closer to you. Her aura is all consuming and you feel your free will being drained away. Yet, the whole process is extremely pleasing to you. She moves her mouth to your ear and whispers, + + +“Do you want to see everything I have to offer?” + + +You bite your tongue to avoid instinctively shouting yes. This may be your last chance to not go through with this. At the very least, it would give you chance to ask her a few more questions. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The trio starts arguing but you quickly interrupt them. + + +“Hey wait! Why shouldn’t I go through with this?” + + +Everyone turns towards you as if confused to why you’re still here. Tom let’s out a long sigh and asks the question that has been on everyone’s mind. + + +“Are you sure any of that was even real?” + + +You scrunch your eyebrows and consider the possibility. No, it can’t be fake. The rush of it all was too great for it to be a hallucination. It was either real or nothing is real. + + +“Yeah your dumbass was probably just hallucinating from the cold,” Connor jeers. + + +That can’t be it. You know it was real, although they couldn’t possibly understand. They weren’t there. + + +“If I had to guess, I’d say a good Samaritan helped you when they saw you passed out. You might have mistaken their torch for that of a demon,” Says Tom. + + +“Yeah and they probably told you to go to the tavern to warmup. That’s what these two did when they first found me,” says Greg. + + +For the love of god! Now even Greg is gaslighting you. Enough of this nonsense. You can either leave right now or waste your night away here. +> Waste the night away +“Fuck all of you, let’s talk about something else. Bartender! Get me another drink,” you say. + + +A couple hours later. + + +“All I’m saying is it’s a bit hypocritical to complain about demons capturing human when we capture orc children on the regular.” + + +“What do you mean we? Last time I checked you’re the only one in the army,” says Tom. + + +“Yeah plus it’s different. Orcs are uncivilized barbarians who kill all those they meet. When’s the last time a human killed a demon unprovoked?” asks Connor. + + +“Did you forget how this whole demon war started? We tried to wipe them off the face of the earth and they retaliated. Jeez Connor, you say orcs are barbarians, but I’ve met orcs smarter than you,” Greg says. + + +Connor slams his fist on the table making everyone jump a little bit. Although all he says is, + + +“Yeah, I’m sure you have.” + + +Connor has been a lot less hostile to Greg since you came here. It’s probably because Greg finally has someone who agrees with him on some issues. Oh, and the fact you could kick Connor’s ass without breaking a sweat. + + +The three of you continue discussing the demon war and the implications it as on the empire. Recent news of the capital being overrun has set the whole empire into a panic. You begin discussing the possibility of fleeing the city before its too late. + + +“I don’t have much confidence in Ashton keeping us safe, but it’s more protection than outside the city walls,” you state. + + +“I don’t want to wait here to die,” Connor says while slurring his words. + + +“You must know better than anyone being a soldier and all. Do you think the city guards could even kill a single demon? I know it’s just rumors, but word says our army is ill-equip to fight in the winter, let alone against demons.” + + +How the hell does a guy like Tom know that? You stare at him trying to gain insight into his mind, but all he does in shrug. Damn, might as well give him your honest opinion. + + +“I’ve never seen a demon. Well, other than that succubus and she wasn’t fighting me.” + + +“So, is that a yes or no you bitch?” slurs Connor. + + +“I don’t know.” + + +There is an awkward silence as you all realize how up in the air the future of this city is. The capital was supposed to send reinforcements to any city that sighted demons. Though with it being under siege that possibility lessens by the minute. + + +“Has anyone even seen a demon? I mean—” Connor says before downing another drink. + + +“Has your dumbass forgot already? This man right here saw a succubus!” Greg says. + + +Finally, someone believes you. Perhaps he agreed with you from the beginning and was too scared to admit it? + + +“Like I said before, it was probably just a hallucination. Plus, why would succubi be needed to conquer the city?” Tom says. + + +Just as you're about to answer that the question a man walks in the tavern. You turn to see who it is and wish you hadn’t. + + +It’s Lars. + + +It’s inevitable he notices you and when he does, he wastes no time telling you why he’s here. He got caught abandoning his guard duty last night and has been let go. When he tried to argue how unfair that was because he lacked equipment to handle the conditions all he was told was. + + +“That’s your own damn fault! The other guard did it without complaint.” + + +He came here to drink until he passed out. Without the money from his guard job he has no way to support his family. He appears a bit more unhinged than usual because of that. + + +“I fucking hope the demons break down the city walls and storm the captain’s quarters. I don’t care what happens next. All I want is for him suffer a slow and painful death. That’s what he sent me to last night and blamed me for saving myself.” + + +You sit in silence not knowing what to say. He continues, + + +“Speaking of which how the hell did you survive last night? When I left it looked like you were about to pass out.” + + +Well he’s got that right. You briefly consider telling him about your encounter with Catia but the rabid look in his eyes tells you that’s not a good idea. + + +“Just lucky I guess.” + + +He doesn’t second guess you and continues his rambling. You pay little attention to his words and when you do it’s clear he’s gone off the rails. + + +“Then they’ll rape his family and have him watch. It’s what he fucking deserves, and he deserves what he’s going to get.” + + +As Lars drones on and on you realize how late it’s getting. You better go home and get the hell away from this guy. You tell him you must go, and he just continues on talking to himself. It’s like he doesn’t know you’re here. + + +That’s probably for the best. As you leave you give him one last look, and he looks back at you with a huge smile and twitchy eyes. That’s creepy. You make your way out of the tavern and are hit by the freezing winter breeze. You’re going to have to get home fast lest you pass out again. Best to take the alleys as not only is it faster, but it also provides protection from the wind. + + +You don’t even get a few steps before you tumble to the ground, but not because of the cold. You are whacked in the back of the head with a glass. You fall face first, mouth agape, breaking teeth instantly. Blood seeps out of your head as you press your hand on the back of your skull. It’s more caved in than usual. + + +You start hearing laughter. This isn’t your first time hearing it either. + + +“As if I believed you survived by pure luck. You’re lucky I don’t just kill you now. Now tell me the truth, demon!” + + +It’s Lars and he looks completely unhinged. You try to say something but just start coughing blood. It comes out in chunks resembling mushy cherries. + + +“You really thought you could get away with it, didn’t you? HAHAHAHA! I know you’ve been possessed by a demon; how else could you survive the frigid cold?” + + +Clumps of blood continue flying out of your mouth as you fail to speak. Lars crotches down next to you and strokes your face. + + +“It’s ok, calm down. Like I told you before, or at least the non-possessed you, the city could use some heating up.” + + +Where is this going? + + +“I want to make a deal with you! Kill the Captain and I’ll let you live. Hell, I’ll even give you something in exchange. Perhaps a part of my soul? If there’s anything left in there.” + + +Your vision blurs as Lars grins widely at you. Saliva drips down his face like a feral beast. + + +“Decide now! Don’t make me kill you to reveal your true self.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“No preference? What the hell is that supposed to mean?” says Connor. + + +“He must think he’s not having any children. I guess he’s into dudes.” Replies Tom. + + +“Yeah I think you’re right. I swear I saw him eyeing Greg.” + + +You feel the bile rising in the back of your throat. They think you’re attracted to that disgusting little worm? People usually don’t get under you skin so much but this time it’s different. You’re about to fuck a hot demon bitch and the idea of being attracted to Greg is NOT what you need right now. + + +“Do you really want to know why I don’t give a fuck about your pointless hypothetical?” + + +“Well, yeah.” + + +You take a deep breath and begin to describe your recent encounter with a succubus. + + +“Well it all started when I fell asleep during guard duty”. + + +One convoluted story later. + + + “And that’s why I came to this tavern,” you say with a cheeky grin. + + +Your story gets mixed reactions. + + +“You’re not actually going through with this are you?” asks Tom. + + +“Ok so you’re attracted to some demon bitch. I still saw you eyeing Greg for at least the past hour.” + + +And strangest of all, + + +“Wait aren’t succubi immortal? And they don’t have dicks! Well, at least I assume they don’t”. + + +You don’t engage with any of them and feel compelled to go home. Although, Tom’s words are giving you second thoughts. Should you wait a few days before even thinking about seeing the succubus? +> Leave now! +The trio begins arguing again. Something about how demon immortality is different than regular immortality. You don’t have time to dwell on it and make your way home. You find yourself grinning the whole walk back. This isn’t just a happy drunk feeling. You feel like this is your purpose. It’s time to see Catia. + + +You find yourself exiting out of the slums and into the residential part of the city. Most guards sleep in the barracks, however, since your parents never returned from their trip their house is all yours. If they ever return, you hope they don’t mind you bringing a demon inside the house. Although, they were always bugging you about finding a girlfriend, this might not be what they had in mind. + + +You arrive at your parent’s old home and turn the door knob. The wooden door squeaks loudly as you open it. + + +“Some things never change,” you whisper to yourself. + + +You immediately start making yourself more presentable. You change out of your soldiers’ uniform and put on a loose-fitting black tunic. You probably should take a bath but you're too excited to see Catia that you forget to. Do demons mind odor? + + +“Catia.” + + +A dark cloud appears in your room, dispelling a toxic fume. You start violently coughing as your vision blurs indiscriminately. Your eyes shut close and you feel you grip on reality slipping away from you. + + +“Ah shit,” you whisper before passing out. + + +Your eyes jitter open and you’re greeted by Catia stroking your face. Her palm flushes the coolness off your face. Beads of sweat drip furiously down your neck as she continues caressing you. + + +“Couldn’t wait a single day before seeing me again? How cute.” + + +She crawls onto your bed and moves closer to you. Her aura is all consuming and you feel your free will being drained away. Yet, the whole process is extremely pleasing to you. She moves her mouth to your ear and whispers, + + +“Do you want to see everything I have to offer?” + + +You bite your tongue to avoid instinctively shouting yes. This may be your last chance to not go through with this. At the very least, it would give you chance to ask her a few more questions. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are a local swineherd in the village of Jacquescrappe and your two best friends in the whole world are your two favorite pigs "Oinky" and "Snout". You have recently finished your daily chores when you hear a terrifying scream. Your village is known for suffering frequent hit and run attacks from the creatures in the mountainside and those that get taken never come back. By the time you get there, it is already too late. And to make matters worse, it was your little sister that was taken this time. You've been dealing with this shit your whole life, but this is the last straw. Somebody has to take care of those foul beasts! + + +You pick up a pitchfork only to be stopped by the gentle hand on your shoulder. You turn and see Brandolf the Bray gazing down at you from behind a beard that is quickly encompassing his whole face. He tells you that to stop the monsters you must focus on assassinating the Craxil, for without their leader the rest will likely vacate the area (or at least fall into disunity making them easier for the local militia to handle individually). + + + + + Many other villagers have arrived on the scene and they obviously share the same sentiments as you. Seeing the looks in their eyes, Brandolf decides he's going to have to organize a council meeting to discuss the matter before anyone gets it in their mind to do anything stupid. + + + +> To The Council Meeting Then +Brandolf the Bray manages to convince the townspeople to stow their torches and pitchforks and agree to a council meeting but it is clear from everyone's faces that they would not accept any outcome that did not involve taking immediate action. Brandolf's magic may be formidible, but against a numerous and organized foe he would not get far. The townspeople (yourself included) are but farmers and peasants and would be hardpressed to slay a hackneyed donkey, let alone a monster. + + +Most of the creatures that come out of the mountains are lumbering, humanoid creatures that stand about 10 feet tall and are covered by brown fur from head to toe. They have a hunch in their backs, and the villagers have taken to calling them humunculi. While these creatures are certainly new to you, you are warned that there are even more dangerous creatures lurking in the depths of the mountainside. Now you begin to look at the towering rockface with a mixture of curiosity and dread. + + +"We need to deal with this Craxil thing NOW" an angry voice shouts. "How long must be culled before the royal military arrives to aid us?" + + +Of course, the royal military they speak of is from the kingdom of Mihtana, which is a considerable distance away. + + +"The royal military has never been willing to send any military force out to our village, why should this be any different?" + + +This comment is true, you think. The village of Jacquescrappe is a considerable distance away from civilization and the kingdom of Mihtana sees it as being of no strategic value. Even if it was under direct threat of annihiliation, you doubt anyone would go through the trouble of committing a significant military force out to such a far away place. In fact, Brandolf is the only outsider that has bothered to help the village in a long time. + + +The rest of the townspeople immediately begin arguing over whether they should stay and defend the land of their ancestors or simply leave. Others put forth ideas on how to trap the Craxil that are quickly dismissed by Brandolf as stupid. Suddenly, Brandolf makes an announcement. + + +"I have a poison, aquired from an alchemist in Lima, that can kill the Craxil. Even trace amounts of this deadly substance can kill even the largest of creatures". + + + +> Listen Intently to Brandolf's Plan +"The trouble is that this poison must be ingested or applied to a blade, simply splashing your opponent with it will not suffice." + + +"But how will anyone even get that far? Without royal aid, how can anyone even hope to reach the Craxil?" + + +At this point, many in the council are reminded of your exploits at last year's "capture the flag" contests. In fact, at every annual festival you manage to outfox your opponents, evade their numbers, and sneak up on their flag. Your success record was almost unrealistic. Suddenly, the council gets it in their minds to send you in with the poison. In fact, you're alarmed by how quickly they're all agreeing to this idea despite the fact you haven't yet. Then again, you've always sensed that as a swineherd you've never really been well liked or considered "valuable" by the townsfolk so this response isn't entirely unexpected. + + +Nonetheless, you aren't going to go anywhere or do anything that you haven't agreed to do first. Unlike the others in the room, Brandolf has the decency to walk up and ask your opinion on the matter. He is usually dismissive of stupid ideas, but he seems to think this one might actually work. You take a moment to decide how to respond. + + + +> Accept The Offer And Begin Your Quest +You resent that the rest of the village is so quick to agree to such an idea without bothering to consult you first, but these creatures carried off your sister and they are going to have to pay for that. Besides, this shit has to stop. You inform Brandolf that you agree and he smiles warmly. + + +"Thank you young one, you are certainly bold to undertake such a suicidal mission." + + +"Well, what choice do I have right?" + + +He hands you the vial of poison, a short sword, a longbow, and a quiver of basic iron arrows. For once, some of the people of the village actually look at you with respect but then you realize that they are commenting on how stupid you must be under their breath. The ingrates! Still, you need to focus on the task at hand. Brandolf reminds you that the Craxil will be larger that the other creatures and that you should seek to evade rather than engage its underlings. At this point, you realize you have a problem... + + +You stink! The stench of swine manure spreads forth like body odor of a sweaty fat girl and you realize you are going to have to do something about this if you expect to succeed in your quest. The council members may be used to it as this is a farming community, but the creatures almost certainly will not be. You are going to have to consider how you are going to go about dealing with this issue. + + + +> Try The Fancy Cologne +You know that a friend of yours has recently returned from his trip to the city and brought some cologne with him. You've heard that it does wonders for a man's scent and promptly apply some from a bottle labeled "Musque". Coincidentally, it does seem rather musky. Confident in your newfound manly scent you head into the mountains and prepare to meet destiny. The wind changes direction and your enemy is aware of your position before you even reach the first plateau on the trail. It isn't long before the humunculi are upon you, ripping you from limb to limb. You tried to defend yourself with your short sword but hey... these are monsters and you've got the upper body strength of an anorexic girl. They find you to be an unsatisfying meal. + + + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You resent that the rest of the village is so quick to agree to such an idea without bothering to consult you first, but these creatures carried off your sister and they are going to have to pay for that. Besides, this shit has to stop. You inform Brandolf that you agree and he smiles warmly. + + +"Thank you young one, you are certainly bold to undertake such a suicidal mission." + + +"Well, what choice do I have right?" + + +He hands you the vial of poison, a short sword, a longbow, and a quiver of basic iron arrows. For once, some of the people of the village actually look at you with respect but then you realize that they are commenting on how stupid you must be under their breath. The ingrates! Still, you need to focus on the task at hand. Brandolf reminds you that the Craxil will be larger that the other creatures and that you should seek to evade rather than engage its underlings. At this point, you realize you have a problem... + + +You stink! The stench of swine manure spreads forth like body odor of a sweaty fat girl and you realize you are going to have to do something about this if you expect to succeed in your quest. The council members may be used to it as this is a farming community, but the creatures almost certainly will not be. You are going to have to consider how you are going to go about dealing with this issue. + + + +> Roll Around In Mud And Grass So You Smell More "Earthy"... Like The Monsters Do +You reason that many of the monsters that come down from the mountainside smell a bit "earthy" so you try rolling around in the mud and grass to try and acheive that same smell for yourself. Unfortunately, it doesn't mask the stench of the hog manure that still stains your pants and boots. It isn't long before the humunculi are aware of your presence. The villagers got to see their hero pounced on and torn apart before he even got out of sight range. Too bad. + + + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You resent that the rest of the village is so quick to agree to such an idea without bothering to consult you first, but these creatures carried off your sister and they are going to have to pay for that. Besides, this shit has to stop. You inform Brandolf that you agree and he smiles warmly. + + +"Thank you young one, you are certainly bold to undertake such a suicidal mission." + + +"Well, what choice do I have right?" + + +He hands you the vial of poison, a short sword, a longbow, and a quiver of basic iron arrows. For once, some of the people of the village actually look at you with respect but then you realize that they are commenting on how stupid you must be under their breath. The ingrates! Still, you need to focus on the task at hand. Brandolf reminds you that the Craxil will be larger that the other creatures and that you should seek to evade rather than engage its underlings. At this point, you realize you have a problem... + + +You stink! The stench of swine manure spreads forth like body odor of a sweaty fat girl and you realize you are going to have to do something about this if you expect to succeed in your quest. The council members may be used to it as this is a farming community, but the creatures almost certainly will not be. You are going to have to consider how you are going to go about dealing with this issue. + + + +> Just Take A Bath +This is a no brainer. If you want to shed the stench of pig crap then take a bath and get a change of clothes! You head down to the bathouse and a tall, dark haired girl prepares your bath. The bath is relaxing and you take special care to dawn an all tan outfit as you suspect it may help you blend in with the rockface better than your usual swineherding outfits will. When you are done, you realize you haven't any scent at all and gather up the equipment you were given at the council. It is time to go. + + +The villagers are gathered at the base of the mountainside cheering you on as you walk forth. Despite their cheering you know they don't really give a shit about you and you question why you are still taking this kind of risk, but you move forward with it anyway. You continue up the path and reach the first plateau that overlooks the village. There are two caves that go down deeper into the rockface. You remember seeing humunculi emerge from these caves so you reason that this would be a good place to being your search. + + + + +All that's left to decide is which cave you wish to enter. + + + +> The Left Cave + +You are quickly beginning to wish Brandolf had given you a torch, but given the nature of your quest he probably figured you didn't need to draw attention to yourself. Still, you can barely see more than a few feet in front of your face and it is only getting darker as you continue further inward. You run your hand along the right wall and move carefully, scouting each step with your foot to avoid a fall. Your heart is racing and you know that at any moment, something might come out and attack. + + + + +Eventually, the cave leads into a small inner chamber with a campfire in the middle. Three humunculi are sitting around the campfire, roasting human limbs on a stick as if they were marshmellows. Fortunately, they are not aware of your presence and the campfire enables you to see there are several tunnels leading out from this chamber. On the other side of the chamber is a tunnel that goes deeper in, but you won't be able to go down this way undetected as long as the humunculi are here. There are also nondescript passsageways to the left and the right (large and small respectively) that you can reach as long as you stay in the shadows. + + + +> Sneak Down The Large Passageway +You press your body firmly against the back wall of the chamber and slowly make your way over to the entrance of the large passageway on the left. Occasionally the campfire will flicker light in your general direction giving you pause, but the humunculi are totally unaware of your presence. Eventually, you manage to make it to the passageway and it doesn't take long before you reach another chamber. You are greatly disheartened by what you see up ahead. + + + +A larger than normal humunculus stands in the center of the fairly well lit chamber and judging from his tribal decor you figure he must be someone of rank. The passageway continues at the other end of the chamber, but this creature blocks your path. At the moment, he is looking off to the side and does not notice your presence. You weigh your options. + + + + +> Charge Him With Your Sword Drawn. Only One Of Him After All. +You may be weaker than a Japanese schoolgirl but there is only one enemy to face here and you have the element of surprise! Perhaps if this were just an ordinary humunculus this would have worked, but it becomes apparent that this well decorated character is something altogether different. His reaction time is excellent and he whirls around to back hand you before you can get within range to strike. This sends you sprawling across the floor and knocks the sword out of your hand and beyond your reach. Before you can get up, he leaps over and grasps your neck. As he squeezes the life out of you, the three from the other room come down and you quickly realize all hope is lost. There is no point in fighting now, it is simply... + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You press your body firmly against the back wall of the chamber and slowly make your way over to the entrance of the large passageway on the left. Occasionally the campfire will flicker light in your general direction giving you pause, but the humunculi are totally unaware of your presence. Eventually, you manage to make it to the passageway and it doesn't take long before you reach another chamber. You are greatly disheartened by what you see up ahead. + + + +A larger than normal humunculus stands in the center of the fairly well lit chamber and judging from his tribal decor you figure he must be someone of rank. The passageway continues at the other end of the chamber, but this creature blocks your path. At the moment, he is looking off to the side and does not notice your presence. You weigh your options. + + + + +> Draw Your Bow And Try To Kill Him From A Distance Before He Realizes You're Here. +The room is too well lit to try and sneak past him and lunging forth at a superior foe with a short sword doesn't strike your fancy either. You decide to get creative and pull out the bow that Brandolf gave you in the council before you left. You ran a few practice shots before departing on this journey and you know you can at least hit a general target, though you'd be pretty hard pressed to achieve any kind of real accuracy. + + +The first shot whizzes past the creatures head and into a nearby pillar of rock. His eyes go wide as he looks at the arrow then turns to look directly at you. You immediately pull back another arrow and take aim knowing this shot is going to make or break destiny. You aim for his chest as that is the broadest target available and the iron arrowhead may even reach his heart. As he lunges forth you close your eyes and release... + + + +You half expected you'd be dead by now but when you open your eyes you discover your arrow went through the creatures neck. He is now on his knees bleeding profusely and clutching his throat. Wasting no time, you finish him with your short sword, then dive into the darkest corner. The three humunculi heard the ruckus and have come down from their campfire to see what the commotion was. When they discover their fallen comrade, they go into a rage and start to look around. You dig into the corner as much as you can and clutch your sword. Two of the creatures move towards the unexplored passageway on the other side of the chamber while the third seems to be gravitating closer to your position. You begin to wonder if you should strike him by surprise while you still can or hope you can try to remain undiscovered. +> Strike Now While You Have The Chance! +Instinctively, you know you are going to be discovered if he gets any closer. You aren't sure how you are going to go about escaping the other two, but you are gonna have to kill this one before it gets any closer. Without warning you lunge forth and put your short sword through the creature's belly. You were actually aiming for the heart and the creature moved so I guess that says something about your swordsman skill. Nonetheless, it proved effective at killing the creature. You waste no time at all in bolting back up to the original chamber with the campsite and the other two will round the corner any second. You need to make a decision FAST! + + +The large pathway (on the right wall as you enter) is now inexplicably barred but you can still run back outside the cave or down the passageway that was previously inaccessable due to their presence. The adrenaline floods your body and your survival instincts take over. You immediately decide to... + + +> Run Down The Previously Inaccessable Passageway +You run down the passageway that you were previously unable to get to while the three humunculi were at the campfire. Unfortunately, the humunculi have chosen the same path. You aren't sure if it is because they saw you or because of bad luck, but they are not far behind you now. You reach another chamber and find a large, demonic looking creature blocking your path. Before you can even think about how to describe this thing you feel the humunculi grab you from behind and pull you to the ground. They are about to stomp you to death when the demonic looking creature disintigrates them on the spot. + + +"Nobody takes my prey in my domain. Tell me little thing, what are you here to do?" + + +This thing looks like a large floating eye with multiple smaller eyes attached atop its head. You realize this thing is a beholder and soon you find yourself paralyzed in its gaze. That's what you get for staring into its eye I guess. + + +"Answer me puny one, why are you here in my domain?" + + +You are too terrified to answer, but this creature appears to grow irritated by your silence so you muster all the courage you've got and speak up + + +"I'm here to slay the Craxil" you proclaim, terrified of how this creature will respond to such a bold statement. + + +"HA! Amusing little one, someone of your strength doesn't have what it takes but it would entertain me to see how you die in the Craxil's mountains. Answer this riddle correctly, and I will permit you to continue through to the other side of my domain. Answer incorrectly, and you will share the same fate as your pursuers. Are you ready?" + + +"As ready as I'll ever be" you squeak. + + +"Very well!" it bellows, clearly enjoying every bit of this. "I am a vast canyon that spans beyond sight. I am without end and have been a part of every man whenever there is trouble. What am I?" + + + + +> Boundless Hope + +"Indeed" the creature states. "You are clearly in trouble right now as you are helpless in my domain, yet like the rest of your kind you retain hope of survival somehow. I guess this means I'll have to let you through to the other side, but hear this: once you reach the other side, I'll not permit you back in so this is a one way deal. Get going." + + +You wanted to protest as you can't guarantee you won't need to come back here later in search of the Craxil but let's face it... you aren't willing to argue with this thing either. Just stay focused on the goal and avoid unnecessary conflict with anything other than the Craxil. You cross to the other side and a gate closes behind you. The beholder gives you a look as if to say "good-bye", then turns and moves the other way. You have no choice but to move foward from here. + + +> Time To Move Forward +You are standing on a narrow plateau in the rugged mountainous region beyond your village. Unlike the brownish/tan rockface you see near your village, the rocks in this region are more redish and vibrant looking. You see a path leading forward and you decide to follow it. On the plus side, you haven't encountered any hostile creatures so far. You walk for at least a few miles and it appears to extend beyond your sight. You curse at your luck and begin to slump into depression when you realize you don't even know where to fnd this Craxil thing in the first place. You decide to build a campfire for the night, think things over, and gather some rest. As you are doing so, a strange man lumbers out from behind a large rock and begins to beg you for help. + + +"Please, it won't take long. My caravan was beset upon by foul creatures and I fear for my families safety. You must help me!" + + +You pause. It seems odd that a human would be up here in such a hostile region, let alone a caravan. But this is definitely the face of a human and he shows no signs of hostility. + + +"Why are you up here anyway"? you ask. "The Craxil and his followers will kill anyone that wanders into their mountainous territory." + + +"We got lost trying to find our way to Jacquescrappe village, perhaps you've heard of it"? + + +"Yeah... I just came from there... but I don't think you want to go back that way, you won't get far." + + +"Look, I don't wish to be rude, but my family is in danger and I need your help NOW!" + + +At this point, the man turns and runs down the path. You call out to him to stop but he keeps going. You aren't sure if you would be of much help to him in battle, but you aren't sure how you would feel about abandoning him like that either. Time to decide... + + + +> Ignore The Man, There Is Something Fishy About That Fellow +You decide to just ignore the man as he runs on ahead. Part of you feels like an absolute dickhead for doing this, but you sense there is something strange about how a human caravan is operating this far into the Craxil's lands in the first place. And even if it is true, the man is physically stronger than you are so what kind of help do you honestly think you can provide in a situation that has him scared? Most importantly of all... your gut tells you there is something fishy about that fellow and you think it best to let him run on ahead. + + +You wait until he is out of sight, then wait a while longer and continue your jouney. + + + +As you continue on your journey you wonder if you made the right choice. I mean, what if the man's family really was in danger and you could have made a difference? Did you make the right call? You console yourself by reminding yourself of the importance of your own mission and how you cannot afford to take unnecessary chances. Just as you are having these thoughts, you discover the man who approached you earlier as well as four others standing in the middle of the beaten path with their heads down. It looks like you aren't done with them after all... + + + +> What Do They Want? +The man you just dismissed earlier is standing at the front of the pack. You knew there was something off about that earlier request and seeing this display only reaffirms that you were right to avoid them in the first place. They are all looking down at the ground but now he is looking up directly at you with a creepy smile on his face. + + +"So, you saw through our little ambush scheme did you?" he sneers. + + +"What is it you want?" + + +"Quite simply we're aware of your quest to reach the Craxil and we are not prepared to allow it." + + + +At this point their heads begin to twist and contort and their skulls appear to come out of their mouths. It is almost as though they were never human at all but part of some kind of disguise. In fact, it is now readily apparent that this is the case. You are now looking at five maniacal looking skeletons armed with an assortment of swords and hand axes. They seem like they are eager to get things started and in fact, they are all rushing down the beaten path towards you. You turn the other way until you can decide what to do and despite what you've been told about the undead, you discover they are perfectly capable of keeping pace with you. + + +You know you aren't going to be able to take on five of these guys and they seem intent on sticking together during the pursuit. To your left is another cave you've chosen to pass up on your journey, figuring it was just another humunculus den. Perhaps, if you are lucky, you can lose your pursuers in there. Alternatively, you could always try climbing the steep rockface off to your right. You've had plenty of climbing experience as a kid and somehow you hope these skeletons won't be able to follow you. You could also turn around and start unloading arrows into your enemies. They may be keeping pace with you, but you still have a heck of a head start and you'd wager you could release quite a few before they catch up to you. It's up to you... + + + +> Try To Lose Them In The Cave +The cave is dark, and dark is good given your need for evasion. You dart forth into the cave hoping not to alert any inhabitants present inside. You know you have a good headstart on your pursuers so you take the time to quietly move in and survey your surroundings. Just inside the cave is a half eaten corpse (one of the villagers that was taken from the village a few weeks ago in fact). The stench is overpowering but you persist down the next passageway and into a large chamber with a multitude of standing rocks. Another passage off the left wall goes deeper in, but you choose instead to find a hiding place behind one of the standing rocks here. + + + +For quite a while you wait, thinking the skeletal warriors that chased you are not going to be coming. Just as you are about to stand up and leave you see them coming down the corridor. They fan out and are now scoping out all the possible hiding spots in this room so it won't be long before they find yours. You look back at the passageway on the left and notice that although they are not up, there are bars in the floor that can be raised to block the passage. You can only hope that the lever on the wall controls this mechanism. In a flash you jump up and run towards this passage. You throw up the lever and step back. The bars raise in time to stop the other four from getting in, but the lead one who tried to fool you earlier managed to get in before the bars raised and now brandishes his sword at you. + + + +In self defense you draw your own sword and prepare to thwart his advance. He is fast and it takes all your concentration just to block his attacks from hitting you. Given you are in a close range battle in a part of the cave that may or may not have other inhabitants, you don't really see much use in running. You figure you are going to have to continue this fight with your sword but another item catches your eye. Off to the side is a good size rock that would fit easily in the palm of your hand. Given the opportunity you could try and bash the skeleton in the face with it. + + + +> Sword Fight + +There is no time to try newfangled plans, you just need to survive. You parry his most of its attacks but take several slashes. Nothing major, but damn if it doesn't hurt and you are losing blood. You manage to land a blow against his shoulder and it goes halfway through the bone, but that doesn't stop the skeleton from fighting. In fact, before you can get your sword back out he lands a blow against your shoulder and it deals a lot more damage. You struggle to keep up with your opponent but you are losing a lot of blood now and this monster is picking up the pace. In desperation you suddenly drop any pretense of defense and lunge forth at your opponent. You bring your sword down through several ribs but this does little to phase him and now you are wide open for the final blow. + + +Perhaps this would have gone better if you remembered that bladed weapons are only effective against enemies with flesh and blood. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The cave is dark, and dark is good given your need for evasion. You dart forth into the cave hoping not to alert any inhabitants present inside. You know you have a good headstart on your pursuers so you take the time to quietly move in and survey your surroundings. Just inside the cave is a half eaten corpse (one of the villagers that was taken from the village a few weeks ago in fact). The stench is overpowering but you persist down the next passageway and into a large chamber with a multitude of standing rocks. Another passage off the left wall goes deeper in, but you choose instead to find a hiding place behind one of the standing rocks here. + + + +For quite a while you wait, thinking the skeletal warriors that chased you are not going to be coming. Just as you are about to stand up and leave you see them coming down the corridor. They fan out and are now scoping out all the possible hiding spots in this room so it won't be long before they find yours. You look back at the passageway on the left and notice that although they are not up, there are bars in the floor that can be raised to block the passage. You can only hope that the lever on the wall controls this mechanism. In a flash you jump up and run towards this passage. You throw up the lever and step back. The bars raise in time to stop the other four from getting in, but the lead one who tried to fool you earlier managed to get in before the bars raised and now brandishes his sword at you. + + + +In self defense you draw your own sword and prepare to thwart his advance. He is fast and it takes all your concentration just to block his attacks from hitting you. Given you are in a close range battle in a part of the cave that may or may not have other inhabitants, you don't really see much use in running. You figure you are going to have to continue this fight with your sword but another item catches your eye. Off to the side is a good size rock that would fit easily in the palm of your hand. Given the opportunity you could try and bash the skeleton in the face with it. + + + +> Bash Skeleton With Rock +You grab the rock you noticed earlier almost immediately, then go back to blocking your opponents attacks. The enemy is attacking fast and furious and it takes all your concentration to block. Even so, you only manage to block most of its attacks and take a few slashes. Nothing major, but you are losing blood. Eventually you see your opening and you ram the rock into the creature's skull with the full force of your adrenaline infused arm. You hear a satisfying crack as the front of the skull crumbles and the creature stumbles back. Realizing how brittle this thing must be, you grab its wrist before it can regain composure and bring the rock down again, taking off its sword arm at the elbow. Another crack at the spine for good measure and you are confident the creature is dead. The other four look on angrily and scream but the bars prevent them from doing anything about it, so you decide to move on deeper into the cave in hopes of finding another way out of here. + + +The cave only gets darker and darker as you go in deeper and you find it odd that there are no other inhabitants in this region... until you see a pair of large white eyes staring back at you from the darkness in the next cavern. It doesn't appear willing to leave the chamber in pursuit of you, but you cannot return the way you came as the skeletons are still banging on the bars you left behind. Studying the creatures behavior a little more, you begin to suspect it is a grue. + + + + +You've heard stories of grues from nearly every adventurer you've ever met. These things are the leading cause of death amongst those in the adventuring profession. Even higher than dragons, vampires, and Lindsay Lohan. In fact, while grues are believed to be organic and corporeal, no adventurer has ever actually killed one before. You struggle to remember what the adventurers told you when dealing with a grue. It has a certain weakness, but for the life of you you simply cannot remember what that is... You're going to have to guess. + + + +> A Grue's Weakness Is Garlic, I apply It To Myself + +Of course! Garlic! You still have some garlic powder in your pack that you use to flavor your pork rines. You douse yourself with it and make a mental note to bathe later so the other monsters don't notice your scent. You confidently walk into the dark chamber ahead, certain that the grue will flee your garlic stench. As you confidently strut through the creatures chamber you think to yourself, + + +"Why can't all my challenges be this...." + + +You don't get enough time to finish that thought. + + +You were eaten by a grue. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grab the rock you noticed earlier almost immediately, then go back to blocking your opponents attacks. The enemy is attacking fast and furious and it takes all your concentration to block. Even so, you only manage to block most of its attacks and take a few slashes. Nothing major, but you are losing blood. Eventually you see your opening and you ram the rock into the creature's skull with the full force of your adrenaline infused arm. You hear a satisfying crack as the front of the skull crumbles and the creature stumbles back. Realizing how brittle this thing must be, you grab its wrist before it can regain composure and bring the rock down again, taking off its sword arm at the elbow. Another crack at the spine for good measure and you are confident the creature is dead. The other four look on angrily and scream but the bars prevent them from doing anything about it, so you decide to move on deeper into the cave in hopes of finding another way out of here. + + +The cave only gets darker and darker as you go in deeper and you find it odd that there are no other inhabitants in this region... until you see a pair of large white eyes staring back at you from the darkness in the next cavern. It doesn't appear willing to leave the chamber in pursuit of you, but you cannot return the way you came as the skeletons are still banging on the bars you left behind. Studying the creatures behavior a little more, you begin to suspect it is a grue. + + + + +You've heard stories of grues from nearly every adventurer you've ever met. These things are the leading cause of death amongst those in the adventuring profession. Even higher than dragons, vampires, and Lindsay Lohan. In fact, while grues are believed to be organic and corporeal, no adventurer has ever actually killed one before. You struggle to remember what the adventurers told you when dealing with a grue. It has a certain weakness, but for the life of you you simply cannot remember what that is... You're going to have to guess. + + + +> A Grue's Weakness Is Noise, I Shout Loudly As I Enter + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Of course! Many creatures are frightened by loud noises, grues must be too! You march into the chamber singing "FRIDAY FRIDAY" as well as "MY MILKSHAKE BRINGS ALL THE BOYS TO THE YARD..." certain that this will scare the creature. Sadly, despite your frightening choice in music, the creature does not appear to be phased. + + +You were eaten by a grue. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grab the rock you noticed earlier almost immediately, then go back to blocking your opponents attacks. The enemy is attacking fast and furious and it takes all your concentration to block. Even so, you only manage to block most of its attacks and take a few slashes. Nothing major, but you are losing blood. Eventually you see your opening and you ram the rock into the creature's skull with the full force of your adrenaline infused arm. You hear a satisfying crack as the front of the skull crumbles and the creature stumbles back. Realizing how brittle this thing must be, you grab its wrist before it can regain composure and bring the rock down again, taking off its sword arm at the elbow. Another crack at the spine for good measure and you are confident the creature is dead. The other four look on angrily and scream but the bars prevent them from doing anything about it, so you decide to move on deeper into the cave in hopes of finding another way out of here. + + +The cave only gets darker and darker as you go in deeper and you find it odd that there are no other inhabitants in this region... until you see a pair of large white eyes staring back at you from the darkness in the next cavern. It doesn't appear willing to leave the chamber in pursuit of you, but you cannot return the way you came as the skeletons are still banging on the bars you left behind. Studying the creatures behavior a little more, you begin to suspect it is a grue. + + + + +You've heard stories of grues from nearly every adventurer you've ever met. These things are the leading cause of death amongst those in the adventuring profession. Even higher than dragons, vampires, and Lindsay Lohan. In fact, while grues are believed to be organic and corporeal, no adventurer has ever actually killed one before. You struggle to remember what the adventurers told you when dealing with a grue. It has a certain weakness, but for the life of you you simply cannot remember what that is... You're going to have to guess. + + + +> A Grue's Weakness Is It's Reflection, I Hold Up A Reflective Surface As I Enter + + + +Upon reflection you decide that a mirror would be your best bet against this creature. Grues are afraid of their reflection right? You go back and find an old iron shield half buried under dirt. It is mostly caked with crud and rust, but still operable as a ghetto-esque mirror. You hold the mirror in the direction of the grue and move along the wall looking for the next passage. Suddenly you realize the stupidity of your mistake. It's pitch black down here, how is this thing even gonna see its reflection in the first place?!? Sadly, you learn all to late that your new concerns are well founded. + + +You were eaten by a grue. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grab the rock you noticed earlier almost immediately, then go back to blocking your opponents attacks. The enemy is attacking fast and furious and it takes all your concentration to block. Even so, you only manage to block most of its attacks and take a few slashes. Nothing major, but you are losing blood. Eventually you see your opening and you ram the rock into the creature's skull with the full force of your adrenaline infused arm. You hear a satisfying crack as the front of the skull crumbles and the creature stumbles back. Realizing how brittle this thing must be, you grab its wrist before it can regain composure and bring the rock down again, taking off its sword arm at the elbow. Another crack at the spine for good measure and you are confident the creature is dead. The other four look on angrily and scream but the bars prevent them from doing anything about it, so you decide to move on deeper into the cave in hopes of finding another way out of here. + + +The cave only gets darker and darker as you go in deeper and you find it odd that there are no other inhabitants in this region... until you see a pair of large white eyes staring back at you from the darkness in the next cavern. It doesn't appear willing to leave the chamber in pursuit of you, but you cannot return the way you came as the skeletons are still banging on the bars you left behind. Studying the creatures behavior a little more, you begin to suspect it is a grue. + + + + +You've heard stories of grues from nearly every adventurer you've ever met. These things are the leading cause of death amongst those in the adventuring profession. Even higher than dragons, vampires, and Lindsay Lohan. In fact, while grues are believed to be organic and corporeal, no adventurer has ever actually killed one before. You struggle to remember what the adventurers told you when dealing with a grue. It has a certain weakness, but for the life of you you simply cannot remember what that is... You're going to have to guess. + + + +> A Grue's Weakness Is Light, I Make A Fire With Some Wood And Tinder +Grues are afraid of light! This is why it won't leave its pitch black chamber to pursue me. Fortunately, you still have some flint and tinder. You originally brought it with the intention of building a campfire along the journey but things change I guess. You light a piece of wood and wrap a piece of torn clothing (soaked in cave water) around the middle to help prevent the flames from going to far down near your hands. You need to move fast as this is not going to last for long and you don't want to be stuck down there without light. + + +As anticipated, the grue backs away in a feverish effort to avoid the light your flame is generating. You are pleased to see that the passageway at the end of this chamber has a faint light source at the end (although it is very far away). Hauling ass as fast as you can, you head down the tunnel towards the light source as your makeshift torch is already beginning to burn itself to completion. By the time it does, you've already made it close enough to the nearby light source that the grue wouldn't dare follow. + + + +It seems the light is being generated by a series of torches that line a set of tracks. It is then that you realize this cave is not really a cave at all but a mine occupied by numerous kobolds. You were always raised to believe that kobolds had beards and wore candles on their heads, but seeing them now you realize how ridiculous that claim actually is. Who came up with that anyway? In reality, they are like miniture lizard folk and very scrawny too (even by your scrawny standards). Staying at the edge of the light source, you decide to observe these creatures for a little while before planning a move. You are reasonably certain you could handle one or possibly even two in a fight but you most certainly can't charge in or you will be overwhelmed in an instant. + + + + + + + +Of particular notice is the kobold on the high ledge that is sporting a purple overcoat and barking orders at the laboring kobolds in whatever the hell language these things are speaking. It occurs to you that these kobolds may very well be working for the Craxil, in which case you would very much like to get your hands on that one in the purple & green coat. You tire of wandering the mountainside aimlessly, narrowly evading one death after another all the while having no idea where this Craxil actually is. Perhaps you could find some way of getting to him quietly and making him talk. + + +There are a few problems with this plan. For starters, the torches provide plenty of illumination in this region and there are countless kobold laborers that would detect your presence and tear you to shreds if you just went in as things are now. You entertain the idea of making them chase you back to the grue, but you don't really have enough wood for another makeshift torch. Even if you were to sneak along the wall on either side, there is still enough light in there to give away your location. This is going to be tough. + + +You observe them more and try to formulate some kind of cogent strategy when you notice a kobold has to emerge from a nearby storage chamber to bring wood to the torches. The storage chamber isn't illuminated and you didn't even notice it was there in the beginning. That gives you a couple of ideas. For one, you could hide in the storage chamber until the next kobold comes in to keep the torches going, then kill him quickly. Once the torches go out, you can head to the head kobold in charge. Alternatively, you can set the entire room on fire, which would undoubtedly create a diversion. This plan is risky given that the fire would undoubtedly light the place up quite a bit, but it would also eliminate the tinder they need to light any torches later. + + + +> Hide In The Storage Room And Kill The Kobold +You sneak into the storage room and wait for almost 2 hours before the next kobold comes in. As soon as he does you plunge your sword into his back and try to silence him by holding his mouth shut with your arm. He let's out several whining and whimpering noises but nothing that seems to attact alarm. A few minutes later another kobold walks in, obviously waiting for that tinder and you manage to surprise attack that one as well. + + +Unfortunately this plan isn't working out as well as you had planned. The torches are still going strong and now a group of three kobolds is heading towards the stock room. You hide behind the door and manage to kill the first one but the other two draw their weapons and start shouting. Soon, all the kobolds in the mine are aware of your presence and it isn't long after that that you begin to find yourself overwhelmed. You have the unique displeasure of being killed an eaten by a large number of creatures that are even weaker than you are. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Grues are afraid of light! This is why it won't leave its pitch black chamber to pursue me. Fortunately, you still have some flint and tinder. You originally brought it with the intention of building a campfire along the journey but things change I guess. You light a piece of wood and wrap a piece of torn clothing (soaked in cave water) around the middle to help prevent the flames from going to far down near your hands. You need to move fast as this is not going to last for long and you don't want to be stuck down there without light. + + +As anticipated, the grue backs away in a feverish effort to avoid the light your flame is generating. You are pleased to see that the passageway at the end of this chamber has a faint light source at the end (although it is very far away). Hauling ass as fast as you can, you head down the tunnel towards the light source as your makeshift torch is already beginning to burn itself to completion. By the time it does, you've already made it close enough to the nearby light source that the grue wouldn't dare follow. + + + +It seems the light is being generated by a series of torches that line a set of tracks. It is then that you realize this cave is not really a cave at all but a mine occupied by numerous kobolds. You were always raised to believe that kobolds had beards and wore candles on their heads, but seeing them now you realize how ridiculous that claim actually is. Who came up with that anyway? In reality, they are like miniture lizard folk and very scrawny too (even by your scrawny standards). Staying at the edge of the light source, you decide to observe these creatures for a little while before planning a move. You are reasonably certain you could handle one or possibly even two in a fight but you most certainly can't charge in or you will be overwhelmed in an instant. + + + + + + + +Of particular notice is the kobold on the high ledge that is sporting a purple overcoat and barking orders at the laboring kobolds in whatever the hell language these things are speaking. It occurs to you that these kobolds may very well be working for the Craxil, in which case you would very much like to get your hands on that one in the purple & green coat. You tire of wandering the mountainside aimlessly, narrowly evading one death after another all the while having no idea where this Craxil actually is. Perhaps you could find some way of getting to him quietly and making him talk. + + +There are a few problems with this plan. For starters, the torches provide plenty of illumination in this region and there are countless kobold laborers that would detect your presence and tear you to shreds if you just went in as things are now. You entertain the idea of making them chase you back to the grue, but you don't really have enough wood for another makeshift torch. Even if you were to sneak along the wall on either side, there is still enough light in there to give away your location. This is going to be tough. + + +You observe them more and try to formulate some kind of cogent strategy when you notice a kobold has to emerge from a nearby storage chamber to bring wood to the torches. The storage chamber isn't illuminated and you didn't even notice it was there in the beginning. That gives you a couple of ideas. For one, you could hide in the storage chamber until the next kobold comes in to keep the torches going, then kill him quickly. Once the torches go out, you can head to the head kobold in charge. Alternatively, you can set the entire room on fire, which would undoubtedly create a diversion. This plan is risky given that the fire would undoubtedly light the place up quite a bit, but it would also eliminate the tinder they need to light any torches later. + + + +> Sneak Into Storage Room And Set Fire To Their Supply Of Tinder +There is no point in hiding in the storage room as they may very well send more kobolds in to retrieve the tinder. Instead, you are going to set it all ablaze. Even if the distraction doesn't work well enough for you, it will only be a matter of time before the quell the fire and run out of tinder for their torch basins. You sneak in start a fire using their own flint and tinder. Soon this fire spreads to the rest of the tinder in the room (with your help of course) and you quickly find your way out of there and out of sight before the kobolds are aware of what has transpired. + + + +It isn't long before they take notice and flock over to their storage room. The taskmaster kobold keeps jumping around shouting "yip yip" or whatever the hell these things say and the other kobolds are struggling to stop the fire. You manage to slip around the corner and evade the bulk of them and you think you've found the passageway leading up towards the taskmaster kobold. In fact, you have. There's just one small problem. There are two kobolds guarding the taskmaster and you would be foolish to assume the taskmaster is unarmed so that makes three. At present, the taskmaster is clearly focused on the fire, to the point of ignoring all else, but the two guardian kobolds are still vigilant. You're going to need another plan. + + +You consider using your bow again. You are actually pretty close to the bodyguard kobolds yet still veiled in darkness so you would not likely miss from this range. Of course, with one dead you would have to immediately focus on the other and subdue the taskmaster all in quick succession lest the entire colony become aware of your attack. Another, possibly crazier idea is to just run past the guards before they mentally register your presence, grab the taskmaster, jump from the ledge, and just run. The fall may be considerable for a kobold, but you are sure that as a human you can handle it. + + + +> Use Your Bow To Take Out The Guardians Quickly, Then Subdue The Taskmaster +You are going to take advantage of the short range and the distraction you created to shoot down your target's guardians and then grabbing the target himself. You don't want to just grab him and run as you have no secluded place in mind in which to take him and you certainly don't want to alert the rest of the colony. It is decided then, you are going to have to use the element of surprise once again and make a risky move. + + +You draw your bow and notch an arrow in the drawstring. The nearest kobold is so very close. You aim at his head and for the first time in your life the arrow actually goes where it is supposed to. The other bodyguard is so in shock at the sight of this that by the time it registers what is going on you already have another arrow drawn back and ready to go. He turns to run towards his taskmaster and you put one between his shoulderblades. Its only at this time that the taskmaster turns around and sees what has transpired. He starts shouting more of his "yip yip" nonsense but given that he had been doing that already since the fire started the other kobolds don't seem to notice anything out of the ordinary. + + +You grab him and pull him back into the passage before the ledge, tear the purple cloth that makes his coat, bind his wrists, and search him thoroughly for any weapons. The creature looks at you in complete fear and for the first time you are truly taken back by the kind of things you are capable of. After all, you've just been an underappreciated swineherd your whole life. And a scrawny one to boot (ok, so you're still scrawny, but that's beside the point). I guess survival and stress can make people do some pretty crazy things huh? + + +You draw your sword and let the kobold know that if he makes any unnecessary noise he'd quickly regret it. Like most leaders, he's bold in words and all coward at heart. You decide its time to begin. + + +"Tell me what you know about the Craxil" you demand. You're clearly not used to being in such a position of dominance or control but damn if you're gonna let the kobold know that. + + +"Yip, ok. The Craxil is the organizer, the one that unifed the scattered beastmen thoughout this region of the barren mountain range." + + +"Why did the Craxil do this? What does it hope to accomplish?" + + +"eee. The Craxil wants to provide for the beastmen it does! No likes hoominz that take all nice land and push us back into barren lands yip. Craxil wants some good lands too yip. Takes them from hoominz he will. You'll see" + + +You shove your sword under his neck as if to somehow counter his claim. "What manner of creature is this Craxil you demand." + + +"Yip. Nobody knows, least not us kobolds anyway. We's gets our orderss from the riders we does" + + +"Riders?" + + +"Yip, humans that serve the Craxil. Well, at least they used to be human. Now... not anymore" + + +"The Craxil raised them as undead?!?" + + +"Yip noes, the Craxil does not perform such foul practices. The Craxil is noble to us beasties he is. No, the Craxil spends days performing the ritual to break their mind and make them thralls." + + +This last part terrifies you. You know mindflayers are capable of turning humans into thralls, but they can do so instantly. They don't require days and a ritual to do so. Clearly, this Craxil is indeed a creature unlike any other. You can hear the sound of kobold laborers gradually getting closer so you take the last bit of time you have to ask the most important question. + + +"Where can I find the Craxil?" + + +"Yip! He resides in an underground cavern accessed from the bottom of a vast canyon up north yip. Best way is Redridge Pass. Rocks will be red they wills and cactii too. Use mine shaft at end of mine that way, it takes you close. Now let's me go yip!" + + +The voices are drawing closer and you don't have time for any further answers. You decide to execute your prisoner and stash the body so you can sneak out to the passageway without alerting the rest of the kobold colony. +> Continue Sneaking To The Mine Shaft + +The kobolds are not alerted to your presence yet; and with most of them trying to contain the fire you started, there aren't very many standing between you and the mine shaft. You continue down along the tracks in the passageway. There are multiple passages and mining spots on both sides and even some ladders leading deeper into the ground but you follow the tracks straight as told until you reach the end of the passage. A single ladder leads up, very far up in fact. You are beginning to develop a fear of heights just looking at how high you are gonna have to climb and given that kobolds built this place you have serious reservations about how well the ladder is gonna support your weight. + + +But what choice do you have? The skeletons and grue you left behind will certainly make it difficult to leave this place the way you came and it won't be long before the kobolds discover the bodies. You set about climbing the ladder and waste no more time thinking about it. You just do it. The ladder reaches higher and higher and higher and looking down you are soon aware of just how extensive these mining tunnels are. Still, your curiosity about kobold mining practices will have to wait. You've got a Craxil to kill and a village to save. Finally, you reach the top and fling open the hatch. + + + +> Move On With The Quest +You are glad to have put that unplesant ordeal behind you and now head forth in search of the Redridge Pass. You are finally beginning to see cactii, which pleases you greatly, and the dirt/rocks are still red. You get the sense that you must be close so this Redridge Pass is going to have to be somewhere nearby or up ahead. You shudder when you realize there are rarely ever any formal signs in beastmen controlled territories so how will you know this pass when you get to it? + + + +As you ponder these thoughts you notice a small hut up ahead, along your path. Smoke rising from a brick chimney tells you someone is home though you cannot imagine what civilized being could possibly live so deep within the Craxil's territory. How would such a person get supplies? How would such a person survive out here with all the hostile creatures roaming about? Perhaps this person isn't a person at all but a hostile creature himself that for whatever reason favors the abode of humans? + + +Despite the fact that it is still daytime, you decide to creep up and look in the window to see who is inside. All you see is a homely old man with a beard eating plumpdinberry pie in his rocking chair. An illusion you question? Or perhaps your time out here in the Craxil's territory has made you jaded. After some internal debate, you decide to go in. You've been awake for two and a half days now and eaten nothing but the pork rines you brought with you (which you are nearly depleted on). At this rate, you won't be able to put up much of a fight at all, even if you do get to the Craxil. Besides, he might know something about the Craxil or the Redrange Pass and you can't afford to be wandering around aimlessly throughout the Craxil's domain. + + +You go back around to the front door and before you even knock the door opens... + + + +> Dun Dun Duuuuuuunnnnnnnnn!!!!!!!!! + +The door opens and the old man is standing there, looking at you expectantly. He is at least two feet taller than you but looks frail in his old age. He invites you in and you go in, though cautiously. The inside of his home looks pretty much like you would expect for a man of his age. A tad messy, but plenty of paintings of his family and the all too familiar old people smell. He beckons you to join him for dinner and nervously you do so. + + +The food is tremendous though in all fairness, its been quite a while since you have had anything but the pork rines you brought with you. He fills your pack with fruits and breads and now you are starting to feel guilty about it all. This guy seems genuinely nice and you feel your guard beginning to drop, but still...you have to ask... + + +"Why do you live out here sir? This is deep within the Craxil's territory and extraordinarily dangerous." + + +"I've lived her since before the Craxil established itself. I'm pretty out of the way for their usual operations so they don't usually pay me much mind. Besides, I'm old. If they find me and its my time then so be it." + + +You're taken back by this strange answer but you accept it and ask further... + + +"If you've been here all this time, that must make you something of a hermit. Still, you ought know something about the Craxil right?" + + +"Yes, I suppose I am something of a hermit, but only because the visions I have make people suspect I'm crazy. Still, I've sensed the Craxil in my dreams and I know it is capable of having such visions as well. That is how it is aware of you and your plans." + + +"WHAT?!" you exclaim. You've always relied upon stealth and the element of surprise to make up for the drastic difference in power between you and your adversaries. If the Craxil is aware of you and your plans, how are you going to pull this off? + + +"Indeed, the Craxil knows what you hope to do. But don't dispair yet, as I've seen a good deal of cleverness in you and even if it knows your coming it doesn't know when. + + +Somehow that last statement doesn't offer you much consolation but after coming as far as you have you don't really see that you have any other choice than to stay the course. After a filling dinner you lie down on a mat and get the best sleep you've had in a long time. During this nap, you are visited by a strange dream... + + + +> Strange Dream + +You saw a soft mist of white and purple against a pitch black surrounding. You could sense there was something or someone in the room with you but you could not see who it was. You could not sense whether or not it was good or evil, kind or malevolent, all you could sense was its presence. It hits you that this presence is the Craxil, and it is watching you intently as you stumble around in the darkness. + + + + + + + +You sense one more presence, one which you are very familiar. It's your sister! You see her only breifly before her likeness disappears back into the darkness. You sense fear followed by supplication coming from her. You are now moving faster through the darness, stumbling over rocks and nearly twisting your ankles on rivets in the ground. But no matter how quickly you move you cannot get a visual on either your sister or the Craxil, you only sense their presence. + + +You wake up sweating feverishly. "That was quite a dream you had young man" the old man starts. "You were shouting so loud I thought you were losing it. And here people thought I was crazy..." + + +You aren't really sure what to make of this dream. Was it a vision or just a nightmare? Was the Craxil really watching you the whole time? And what of your sister? You last saw her being drug off by humunculi so you assumed she was dead. Could she still be alive somehow? She looked a lot different in that dream too. Not the shy, reserved younger sister you knew but rather a fierce looking warrior in battle garb. The hell is that about? Your dream seemed so vivid you can't help wondering if it was a vision, but your logical mind tells you that the power of suggestion is at work here and its all bullocks. + + +Feeling full, refreshed, and well stocked on supplies you thank the old hermit for everything and really appreciate what he's done for you. He tells you that the Redrange Pass is just over the peak to the northwest of his hut and you immediately see what he's talking about. Its still a long way from the pass to the canyon, but you have a very clear idea of where you are going now. Once you get to the Redrange Pass you just follow it northwest of your current position and it will EVENTUALLY lead you straight to the canyon, which you're told is hard to miss. + + +"Good luck young man, I'm rooting for you". + + +"Thank you sir, and again I appreciate it." + + +Nice guy. He's the first to address you as something other than "pencil arms", "scrawny one", "bone boy", or the like. You head out towards the peak and begin the lengthy climb upwards. + + + +> Up The Peak +You climb the peak and though it takes a considerable amount of time to get to the top, it isn't nearly as tiring as you expected it would be. You are now standing on an even higher plateau on the mountainside and the Redridge Pass is precisely where you expected it to be. You are thrilled to have finally found the pass, which is really more of a trail than a pass, but you still have a lot further to go. As you move forward you suddenly get wind of a foul stench and hear a lot of loud, obnoxious grunting noises up ahead. + + +You immediately get off the beaten path and find a good hiding spot. It is midday now so there isn't a lot of darkness to aid you. Still, you manage to crawl forward unseen until you see a small group of orcs. This is VERY not good you think you yourself. Orcs are exceptionally strong. Even one on one you stand no real chance of defeating one. There are about five blocking the path forward so you are going to simply have to sneak around them and continue on your journey. You've interrogated lesser creatures, but if the Craxil is commanding these creatures then just how strong is the thing? No, don't dwell on such thoughts. You need to focus. You've come this far and you're sure as hell not gonna let yourself be intimidated now. + + +Returning to the task at hand you see a couple of different options. There is a river that runs down the middle of the orc group's position and some hollow reeds close to you. You remember one time during capture the flag where you moved through the river underwater and breathed through reeds very similar to these. That was an epic maneuver worth remembering, perhaps it will serve you again here? The orc camp and you are at the same elevation; but there is a ditch that runs from your current position, along the side of the camp, and out the other side. Presumably, if you hug the side of the ditch closest to the orcs and move along quietly they shouldn't be able to see you. Alternatively, you still have plenty of poison. Even if you applied it to all your remaining arrows, you wouldn't even have used half the bottle. Orcs are large and there are only five of them... + + +Time for a decision. What's your plan of action? + + + +> Breathe Through Reeds And Move Slowly Underwater To The Other Side +Of course! The reeds will enable you to breath from underwater. The river water is opaque so you will not be seen and because orcs have an exceptional sense of smell, this is probably the safest way to get past them without being seen. You quietly slip into the river water from a point that can't be seen by the orcs, get one of the hollow reeds to act as a snorkel, and slowly begin moving through the water. You intend to move slowly, so that if any of the orcs do notice the moving reed it will look like it is just drifting downriver. + + +The idea is working. You can hardly see where you are going, but you got a very good look at where the river goes and the approximate distances before you got in so you have a pretty good estimate of where you are. Soon, you can hear the orcs talking and you know you must be in the middle of them now. As fate would have it, a snapping turtle decides to be a pain in the ass (literally) but despite the pain this hissing bastard is inflicting you manage to keep your cool and continue moving slowly through the river. Eventually you, make it to the other side and emerge out of the orc's view. You pat yourself on the back for that one, this maneuver is definitely one of your favorites. + + +Just then the hissing bastard that bit your ass makes it known that he's still attached by tighting his bite and inflicting more pain. You put a drop of the poison in his mouth and within moments he's off of you and squirming on the ground. Looks like this stuff Brandolf gave you is legit after all. You massage your sore bottom and try to walk it off. There is a welt on your right butt cheek that still stings but you figure you will eventually get over it. + + + +> Get Over It And Get On With The Quest +You rejoin the Redridge Pass and continue northwest towards the canyon you hope to find. You hear a shuffling noise and you could have sworn that the vines stemming from that rather bizarre looking cactus just moved. Nah, just a vine on the ground... from a cactus... on a mostly dry and rocky mountainside... makes perfect sense. You continue to rationalize this in your head as you walk along only to notice a similar movement from another cactii vine up ahead of you. Suddenly you feel one of these vines wrap itself around your left ankle and sting you. + + + +You pull and draw your sword but other vines have taken up the call as well and you are getting grabbed and stung all over. You still have limited movement with your limbs, but you are out of balance. The stingers must have injected you with something because you are feeling nausious. You need to focus and get out of this mess before you black out or you might not wake up. You look over at the cactii these vines are coming from and they have inexplicably moved closer to your position. Very close in fact. The needles jutting out from them seem to have perked up and gotten longer. Whatever these things are, they've got you and you aren't about to become their prey. + + +You are still able to reach your sword, but with vines slowing your arm and your lack of balance you aren't sure you will be able to sever the thick vines that are holding you in place. You could always apply some poison to it first, but just reaching the poison is going to be a challenge as you've stored that in your backpack. You still have flint in your front pocket and a few pieces of tinder left, perhaps if you can get a small fire going you can push them back. Whatever you do though, it has to be quick. You can feel the venom from the many stingers affecting your mind and it is taking all your discipline to maintain your focus right now. + + + +> Just Draw Your Sword And Try To Cut Through The Vines +It would take too much time and energy just to reach the backpack and rumage through it for the venom right now, and you need all the time and energy you have to try and free yourself from this trap you seem to have landed in. You are able to reach your shortsword within a short while and begin raising it against the vine holding your left arm. You bring it down as hard as you can, but with the vine holding your right arm and the others keeping you off balance, you don't cause nearly as much damage as you would like to. The same happens when you try again. + + +You decide to start using your sword like a saw instead, running the edge of the blade back and forth against a singular point on the vine holding your left arm. It takes a while but you are about halfway through the vine when it suddenly responds. The vine recoils abit so that the part you were working on is now out of your reach. You are greatly disheartened by this, but set to work on it again in a new spot. The creature's vine responds the same way again and by now the venom has clouded your mind so much you are barely able to maintain your conciousness. You realize now that it is over. You have no idea what they did after you blacked out, because you never woke up again. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You rejoin the Redridge Pass and continue northwest towards the canyon you hope to find. You hear a shuffling noise and you could have sworn that the vines stemming from that rather bizarre looking cactus just moved. Nah, just a vine on the ground... from a cactus... on a mostly dry and rocky mountainside... makes perfect sense. You continue to rationalize this in your head as you walk along only to notice a similar movement from another cactii vine up ahead of you. Suddenly you feel one of these vines wrap itself around your left ankle and sting you. + + + +You pull and draw your sword but other vines have taken up the call as well and you are getting grabbed and stung all over. You still have limited movement with your limbs, but you are out of balance. The stingers must have injected you with something because you are feeling nausious. You need to focus and get out of this mess before you black out or you might not wake up. You look over at the cactii these vines are coming from and they have inexplicably moved closer to your position. Very close in fact. The needles jutting out from them seem to have perked up and gotten longer. Whatever these things are, they've got you and you aren't about to become their prey. + + +You are still able to reach your sword, but with vines slowing your arm and your lack of balance you aren't sure you will be able to sever the thick vines that are holding you in place. You could always apply some poison to it first, but just reaching the poison is going to be a challenge as you've stored that in your backpack. You still have flint in your front pocket and a few pieces of tinder left, perhaps if you can get a small fire going you can push them back. Whatever you do though, it has to be quick. You can feel the venom from the many stingers affecting your mind and it is taking all your discipline to maintain your focus right now. + + + +> Apply The Poison First, Then Cut At The Vines +You aren't sure if you will be able to completely sever the vines that hold you, but if you can at least cut into them, the poison should do the rest. Unfortunately, it is stored in your pack which is a little difficult to reach right now, but that isn't going to stop you from trying now is it? You pull your right hand back and the vine that holds it pulls back. Somehow, you think it might realize you are trying to get something and it seeks to keep your arm out front. You continue to pull against it with all your might but you reach a stalemate with the vine just getting your arm to your side. + + +The venom is starting to really kick in now. In addition to being nausious you are now dizzying as well. The only thing keeping you going is your sheer determination to live. You bite and claw at the vine, you squirm, you fight, and eventually you get your arm back to your pack. You are feeling light headed and you know you don't have much time. You manage to get the vile of venom out of your backpack but in your situation that struggle took too much time and energy. You no longer have the energy and wherewithall to apply it. You black out and the vile falls uselessly to the ground. You don't know what they did after that, because you never woke up again. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You rejoin the Redridge Pass and continue northwest towards the canyon you hope to find. You hear a shuffling noise and you could have sworn that the vines stemming from that rather bizarre looking cactus just moved. Nah, just a vine on the ground... from a cactus... on a mostly dry and rocky mountainside... makes perfect sense. You continue to rationalize this in your head as you walk along only to notice a similar movement from another cactii vine up ahead of you. Suddenly you feel one of these vines wrap itself around your left ankle and sting you. + + + +You pull and draw your sword but other vines have taken up the call as well and you are getting grabbed and stung all over. You still have limited movement with your limbs, but you are out of balance. The stingers must have injected you with something because you are feeling nausious. You need to focus and get out of this mess before you black out or you might not wake up. You look over at the cactii these vines are coming from and they have inexplicably moved closer to your position. Very close in fact. The needles jutting out from them seem to have perked up and gotten longer. Whatever these things are, they've got you and you aren't about to become their prey. + + +You are still able to reach your sword, but with vines slowing your arm and your lack of balance you aren't sure you will be able to sever the thick vines that are holding you in place. You could always apply some poison to it first, but just reaching the poison is going to be a challenge as you've stored that in your backpack. You still have flint in your front pocket and a few pieces of tinder left, perhaps if you can get a small fire going you can push them back. Whatever you do though, it has to be quick. You can feel the venom from the many stingers affecting your mind and it is taking all your discipline to maintain your focus right now. + + + +> Light A Piece Of Tinder And Wield The Flame As A Weapon +You need to get out of this mess as quickly as you can. The vines are thick, you are off balance, your arms are partially restrained, and you don't have much time. You reason that in this situation your best bet is to start a fire and try to use it against the vines. You lean forward and allow the flint and tinder to fall from you and onto the ground. After a short struggle, you manage to get your hands on them and work feverishly to start a fire. You worry that lighting the tinder on fire will make it difficult to hold against your enemies without burning yourself but you do it anyway and wrap a thick piece of cloth torn from your shirt around your hand before doing so for rudimentary protection. + + + +It hurts, but not to the point of burning you thanks to the cloth material and you are far more concerned about survival. You hold the fire up close to the vine holding your left arm and it releases and recoils almost immediately. The others follow suit pretty quick, which is good as this tinder won't last much longer before it is burned to completion. You hold out what's left of it to keep these cactii away and rush away. + + +You've managed to get away, but the venom in your system is already screwing with your head and you don't think you will get much further before blacking out. You go to the nearest area you can find without any cactii around and collapse on a large rock. You don't awaken again until nightfall, but at least you have your mind and focus back, and you are glad you weren't attacked while you were out. However, it isn't long after you awaken that you get a sickening feeling in the pit of your stomach. + + + +> Uh-Oh, What Is This? +The bad feeling in the pit of your stomach returns and you realize that eating all those pork rines and only pork rines for several days until seeing the old man did not do your digestive system any good. You spring into action, find a secluded corner, and relieve the mess that was building up inside you. Unfortunately, it is not until after this messy endeaver that you remember you neglected to pack bottom tissue when you left on this quest. You've braved many dangers and survived several impossible situations but now you are going to have to make a decision. A decision that is more frightening than any you have made before. + + + +To your left are large, round, orange leaves. They aren't brittle and look as though they might work. To your right are a bunch of ferns sporting three fingered leaves. These are green with red spots. It's time to make an all important decision. + + + + +> Wipe With The Large, Round, Orange Leaves + +You choose to wipe with the large, round, orange leaves and you find them quite well suited for the task. With your keister sanitized you have now averted another dangerous situation and decide to continue on with your quest. + + +The next three days of travel down the Redridge Pass are surprisingly uneventful. You sneak past the occasional orc patrol and wild animal but nothing particularly difficult. You half expect something to come jumping out at you from the darkness or to find some large camp around the corner but to your plesant surprise the way seems more or less clear. Part of you wonders if it is a trap given the Craxil knows you are coming but then ... what choice do you have? + + +As you come up a steep incline you look down and with great satisfaction you find what you've been searching for all this time. A colossal chasm, the canyon you've been searching for! The old man said you would know it when you see it and damn if he wasn't right about that! Still, this canyon is freaking huge. It will take probably half a day just to get down to the bottom safely and once down there, there is a LOT to explore. You know the underground cavern that houses the Craxil is accessed somewhere down there, so I guess you don't have much choice than to go down there and investigate huh? + + +You are about to cautiously decend when you hear the sound of hoofprints behind you... + + + +> Turn Around + +You turn around to confront the source of the hoofprint noise and you see two humans on horseback. Their eyes appear to be in a glaze and they are looking right at you. Thing is, you recognize these two. They were farmhands that were captured a few weeks back. Everyone assumed they were eaten like most of the people who are taken. For some reason the Craxil must have decided to make them thralls and this is abundantly clear in their appearance. These must be some of the "riders" you've heard about. + + +They both hop down from their horses and draw swords. Given you were already standing at the edge of the canyon when they showed up, you don't have a lot of room to maneuver. You know that before they became thralls they didn't really possess much fighting skill, but you have no idea now. You don't have much time to decide what to do here. + + +There is a small gap between the two of them and they are widening it in an attempt to come at you from both sides. Perhaps you should bolt between them and try to get away. Alternatively, there is a branch sticking out of the wall of the canyon not far below you. You could jump down to it and try to climb down the wall of the canyon to a safer ledge. Either way, you need to get away from these two. + + + +> Run Between Them + +You make a break for it and dash between them. You catch an unpleasant slash across the right hip and it is bleeding but you are still alive and running and that's what counts. You contine down the Redridge Pass, determined to lose them and double back somehow. Its only when you hear the hoofprints getting closer that you realize the tactical error you've just made. The horseback riders quickly catch up to you and one of them puts his sword into the back of your head as he rides by. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +You turn around to confront the source of the hoofprint noise and you see two humans on horseback. Their eyes appear to be in a glaze and they are looking right at you. Thing is, you recognize these two. They were farmhands that were captured a few weeks back. Everyone assumed they were eaten like most of the people who are taken. For some reason the Craxil must have decided to make them thralls and this is abundantly clear in their appearance. These must be some of the "riders" you've heard about. + + +They both hop down from their horses and draw swords. Given you were already standing at the edge of the canyon when they showed up, you don't have a lot of room to maneuver. You know that before they became thralls they didn't really possess much fighting skill, but you have no idea now. You don't have much time to decide what to do here. + + +There is a small gap between the two of them and they are widening it in an attempt to come at you from both sides. Perhaps you should bolt between them and try to get away. Alternatively, there is a branch sticking out of the wall of the canyon not far below you. You could jump down to it and try to climb down the wall of the canyon to a safer ledge. Either way, you need to get away from these two. + + + +> Jump To Branch And Climb Down +You aren't going to be able to outrun them if they have horses so you take the only option you got and jump. You are scared out of your mind but you successfully grapple the hanging branch and the two riders can do nothing but glare down at you and growl. The tricky part is getting down from here. You have never really been afraid of heights but you are REALLY high up. The nearest ledge is almost halfway down the canyon and the rockface isn't easily climbable. Still, you don't have much of a choice so you try anyway. + + +You make it most of the way down until one of the groves you were holding onto comes out and you fall. Thankfully, you land on the ledge and you were already most of the way there so aside from knocking the wind out of you and hurting like hell you are pretty much alright. Its possible you might have a broken rib but you have no way of knowing and it isn't precluding you from going on even if it is broken. After taking time to recover a bit and catch your breath, you look around a bit and find a clear way to climb down to the bottom of the canyon and downward you go. Fortunately, you make it to the bottom of the canyon without further incident. + + + +You have now reached the bottom of the canyon and you know the entrance to the Craxil's chasm must be around here somewhere, but it is a massive canyon to explore. You spent almost 7 hours down there until you come across three bizarre looking doors. One is red and bears the emblem of a bear. The next is green and bears the emblem of a spider. The last is blue and bears the emblem of a wolf. This whole ritual gets even more bizarre when you notice a rabbit approach and stand beside the red door as if to beckon you in that way. A squirrel approaches the green +door and stands atop the frame as if to endorse that one, and an owl flies down to a rock near the blue door. Its times like these you wish you were a druid so you could better understand what the hell these critters are trying to tell you. Still, you have a decision to make and your instincts (whatever they are worth) are telling you that you only get one shot at this. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +~Hint: Depending upon the path you took to get here, you may or may not have seen one or both of the creatures on the correct door already. If not, you are just going to have to guess.~ + + + + + +> Enter The Red Door With Bear Emblem, Endorsed By The Bunny + +Who can resist a cute widdle fluffy wuffy bunny hmm? You open the red door with the bear emblem and as soon as you enter, the door slams shut and locks behind you. It looks like you really don't have much of a choice but to continue down this passageway. At the end is a large, circular chamber with numerous torches illuminating the entire chamber. You are trying to decide which of two passageways to proceed down until you notice two bears, one coming out of each passage. They lock eyes on you and give chase almost immediately. You turn and run back to the door you entered from but it won't budge. It seems you've made the wrong decision, and now the bears are eviscorating your midsection. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren't going to be able to outrun them if they have horses so you take the only option you got and jump. You are scared out of your mind but you successfully grapple the hanging branch and the two riders can do nothing but glare down at you and growl. The tricky part is getting down from here. You have never really been afraid of heights but you are REALLY high up. The nearest ledge is almost halfway down the canyon and the rockface isn't easily climbable. Still, you don't have much of a choice so you try anyway. + + +You make it most of the way down until one of the groves you were holding onto comes out and you fall. Thankfully, you land on the ledge and you were already most of the way there so aside from knocking the wind out of you and hurting like hell you are pretty much alright. Its possible you might have a broken rib but you have no way of knowing and it isn't precluding you from going on even if it is broken. After taking time to recover a bit and catch your breath, you look around a bit and find a clear way to climb down to the bottom of the canyon and downward you go. Fortunately, you make it to the bottom of the canyon without further incident. + + + +You have now reached the bottom of the canyon and you know the entrance to the Craxil's chasm must be around here somewhere, but it is a massive canyon to explore. You spent almost 7 hours down there until you come across three bizarre looking doors. One is red and bears the emblem of a bear. The next is green and bears the emblem of a spider. The last is blue and bears the emblem of a wolf. This whole ritual gets even more bizarre when you notice a rabbit approach and stand beside the red door as if to beckon you in that way. A squirrel approaches the green +door and stands atop the frame as if to endorse that one, and an owl flies down to a rock near the blue door. Its times like these you wish you were a druid so you could better understand what the hell these critters are trying to tell you. Still, you have a decision to make and your instincts (whatever they are worth) are telling you that you only get one shot at this. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +~Hint: Depending upon the path you took to get here, you may or may not have seen one or both of the creatures on the correct door already. If not, you are just going to have to guess.~ + + + + + +> Enter The Green Door With Spider Emblem, Endorsed By The Squirrel + +You choose the green door with the spider emblem, endorsed by the squirrel. After all, what is more trustworthy than a cute little squirrel? You enter and immediately thereafter the door slams shut behind you and locks in place. It seems you haven't much of a choice but to move forward down the passageway. It is exceptionally dark down here, but given that you are a sneak that is actually a good thing. You suddenly find yourself stuck and after fidgeting around for a while you come to the sudden realization what it is that has trapped you and why the door has a spider emblem on it. It seems you aren't the only one that enjoys sneaking around in the dark... + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You aren't going to be able to outrun them if they have horses so you take the only option you got and jump. You are scared out of your mind but you successfully grapple the hanging branch and the two riders can do nothing but glare down at you and growl. The tricky part is getting down from here. You have never really been afraid of heights but you are REALLY high up. The nearest ledge is almost halfway down the canyon and the rockface isn't easily climbable. Still, you don't have much of a choice so you try anyway. + + +You make it most of the way down until one of the groves you were holding onto comes out and you fall. Thankfully, you land on the ledge and you were already most of the way there so aside from knocking the wind out of you and hurting like hell you are pretty much alright. Its possible you might have a broken rib but you have no way of knowing and it isn't precluding you from going on even if it is broken. After taking time to recover a bit and catch your breath, you look around a bit and find a clear way to climb down to the bottom of the canyon and downward you go. Fortunately, you make it to the bottom of the canyon without further incident. + + + +You have now reached the bottom of the canyon and you know the entrance to the Craxil's chasm must be around here somewhere, but it is a massive canyon to explore. You spent almost 7 hours down there until you come across three bizarre looking doors. One is red and bears the emblem of a bear. The next is green and bears the emblem of a spider. The last is blue and bears the emblem of a wolf. This whole ritual gets even more bizarre when you notice a rabbit approach and stand beside the red door as if to beckon you in that way. A squirrel approaches the green +door and stands atop the frame as if to endorse that one, and an owl flies down to a rock near the blue door. Its times like these you wish you were a druid so you could better understand what the hell these critters are trying to tell you. Still, you have a decision to make and your instincts (whatever they are worth) are telling you that you only get one shot at this. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +~Hint: Depending upon the path you took to get here, you may or may not have seen one or both of the creatures on the correct door already. If not, you are just going to have to guess.~ + + + + + +> Enter The Blue Door With Wolf Emblem, Endorsed By The Owl +After careful consideration, you trust the owl and enter the door with the wolf emblem. The door shuts and locks behind you and you see no choice but to move forward. An eery glow beckons you forward down a passageway that is leading you deeper and deeper underground. You can't tell if that is a good thing or a bad thing but you follow it anyway. When you reach the bottom you see a large room decorated to look like the antechamber of a church. You aren't sure what to make of all this, but you feel like you must be getting close to the Craxil now. + + + +The next chamber is substantially different than the one you just entered from. Instead of being all decorated and kept, you see half eaten farm animals in a pen and three large lizardfolk guarding a doorway. They bear polearms and plate mail and you don't think you would be able to take even one of them in combat. The blue door has shut behind you and you don't really see any reliable means of setting a trap. You have dealt with these types of situations before though. You just have to keep your cool and figure a way to deal with this. + + +For one, you could start a fire in the antichamber to distract the lizardfolk from the door, then slink in. The antichamber is big, but a fire large enough to attract their attention might also illuminate most of the room, making it hard for you to operate unseen. Another possibility is their food source. You surmise the half eaten farm animals are what they've been feeding on during their meal breaks. You could try using some of the poison Brandolf gave you on some of the meat of the freshest looking animal and wait until they feed again. Of course, there is no telling how long you will have to wait for them to feed again. Your call adventurer. + + + +> Start A Fire To Distract The Lizard Folk +You don't have any tinder left after that incident with the cactii, but you do have some flint. You look around the large antichamber-like room for anything wooden and you find a few things that look like they might be combustable. You set about lighting them with the flint, then quickly cast them in the direction of a large wooden table in the center of the room and run to the corner just before the room with the lizardfolk. As you had hoped, two of the lizard folk eventually come out and because you are hiding in their blindspot, they don't see you. The creatures rush over to quell the fire as best they can but there is a problem. + + +Only two of the lizardfolk emerged to deal with this threat. The third one still stands guard at the door. Lizardfolk are known for their fierce dedication to their duty and unfortunately it seems they are also smarter than the majority of your adversaries as well. After quelling the fire the two begin searching the room, leaving no stone unturned so-to-speak. They must suspect that it was caused by someone. You move around from one dark hiding spot to another, hoping to evade their search until they retire back to the door but you step down on the charred remains of the table and an audible crunch is heard. + + + +To your credit, you kept them searching for a long time due to your skill at evasion but given that you just removed any and all doubt about your presence, it was only a matter of time before they found you. + + +THE END + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After careful consideration, you trust the owl and enter the door with the wolf emblem. The door shuts and locks behind you and you see no choice but to move forward. An eery glow beckons you forward down a passageway that is leading you deeper and deeper underground. You can't tell if that is a good thing or a bad thing but you follow it anyway. When you reach the bottom you see a large room decorated to look like the antechamber of a church. You aren't sure what to make of all this, but you feel like you must be getting close to the Craxil now. + + + +The next chamber is substantially different than the one you just entered from. Instead of being all decorated and kept, you see half eaten farm animals in a pen and three large lizardfolk guarding a doorway. They bear polearms and plate mail and you don't think you would be able to take even one of them in combat. The blue door has shut behind you and you don't really see any reliable means of setting a trap. You have dealt with these types of situations before though. You just have to keep your cool and figure a way to deal with this. + + +For one, you could start a fire in the antichamber to distract the lizardfolk from the door, then slink in. The antichamber is big, but a fire large enough to attract their attention might also illuminate most of the room, making it hard for you to operate unseen. Another possibility is their food source. You surmise the half eaten farm animals are what they've been feeding on during their meal breaks. You could try using some of the poison Brandolf gave you on some of the meat of the freshest looking animal and wait until they feed again. Of course, there is no telling how long you will have to wait for them to feed again. Your call adventurer. + + + +> Poison Their Food Supply And Wait For Them To Feed Again + + +Brandolf gave you more than enough poison to kill the Craxil. It takes only trace amounts to kill even the largest of creatures so why would you need to save the entire vial? You carefully creep up and apply poison to various parts of the bovine flesh, particularly the meaty parts, and take care to poison all the carcasses in the pen so you don't have to try and guess which ones they will feed off next. You then back away to the antichamber-like room and begin waiting the long wait. + + +It is almost 7 hours later and only now do the lizardfolk appear to be conversing with each other and gravitating towards the food pen. "About damn time" you think to yourself, eagerly waiting for them to begin eating as you watch them from a dark corner in the next room. You struggle to contain your glee as the first one sinks his teeth into the freshest cow and another picks up a smaller animal you also poisoned. Before long, they are all dry heaving and you are doing a silent victory dance in the darkness. For some reason it took a while for one of them to finally die, but when he did the way to the door was clear. + + +Crossing through the doorway and into the underground chasm, you come to realize the Craxil is NOTHING like what you had expected... + + + +> The Craxil + +The Craxil is nothing like what you were expecting. You are standing in a massive underground cavern that extends as far as the eye can see in all directions (except the one you came from). Running across it is an underwater stream and floating above it is a beautiful woman bathed in pure white light. It almost appears to leave an after image of itself behind as it moves. You aren't really sure if you would categorize this as a ghost or spirit or what, but you remember that it is a supposed to be a creature unlike anything since discovered. + + +Almost as if reading your mind the Craxil remarks "Indeed... I am not like any other creature your kind has ever seen before, but then I believe I have already told you that haven't I?" + + +To your shock and horror she transforms into the likeness of Brandolf the Bray, the mage who visited you in the village of Jacquescrappe, then into the old man who watched over you as you slept. Was it really the Craxil all along?!? Is this why you had that dream that it was watching you the entire time?!? What does this mean for your sister, is she still alive? And what of the poison? Surely she wouldn't give you something that would actually work on her. + + +Sensing the millions of questions that flurry through your mind, the Craxil begins to laugh and float about you in circles. The door once guarded by lizardfolk now slams shut and locks on its own. With this door shut, there is no longer any light and the Craxil itself is the only thing left that you can actually see. + + +"I can take whatever form I please swineherd, and I have been watching you in various forms throughout the entirety of your journey. You fancy yourself the king of sneak yet you were clearly unaware that you were being watched the moment you entered my territory." + + +Your face grows pale and you have no idea how you are going to deal with this being. She knows all your secrets. She knows your plan. You haven't any element of surprise whatsoever. Hell, you aren't even sure if your weapons are going to work and you're sure as hell certain the poison isn't going to be effective given that it was her that gave it to you. Your mind races to discern a proper course of action as she continues to toy with you. However, your concentration is broken when another figure enters your view... + + + +> The Other Figure +You turn to find your sister, dressed in one of the war garbs you saw in your dream, walk out towards you from the shadows. She doesn't look as glossy-eyed as the other riders you encountered (in fact she looks perfectly normal) but from her demeanor and obvious reverence to the Craxil you know she is in fact a thrall. How can this be? This is the same war garb from the dream! But your sister has never been like that. + + +"We have big plans for her" the Craxil coes. "She is the carrier of a great plague, a slower acting yet more contagious version of what you carry in that vial I gave you. As a carrier she will be immune to its effects, but she will spread them among the humans whereever she goes." + + +"Why?!? Why would you do something like that you sick bitch?!?" + + +The Craxil only laughs at your insult and seems to take delight in your obvious fear and frustration at this moment. + + +"With the surrounding kingdoms of Mihtana and Lima buckling from the plague, there will be little resistance when we move out of the mountain range and into their lands. As you may have noticed on the way here, I have many humunculi, goblins, grippli, kobolds, and even a handful of orcs all gathered here in these mountains." + + +"So you really are planning an invasion then?" + + +"I believe that poor servant you so ruthlessly interrogated several days ago already explained that much to you." + + +You struggle not to be blinded by your anger at this point, but there is nothing you can do to stop her. + + +"The humans are a truly repugnant race. They have no respect for those that labor, those that produce, those that sacrifice for the good of others. Whenever they want something (be it money, power, or respect) they simply take it for themselves, and only those who do are respected. This is why the beastfolk I serve have been pushed deep into this barren mountainside." + + +To your astonishment, you actually find yourself identifying with the Craxil. Even when you agreed to stick your neck out on their behalf they snickered comments about your intelligence under their breath. Even now, after all the dangers you've faced, you're sure they have probably already assumed you're dead and are likely redistributing your property as we speak. + + +"The beastfolk here are loyal to me and to themselves, they have honor. And they certainly deserve the lands of their ancestors, taken from them by the humans." + + +"And you think slaughtering humans is the answer?" + + +"Since when has diplomacy not ended with a beastman's head on a human's table? Since when did the humans ever sit down to negotiate with my brethren? The humans understand only the simplicity of death and destruction so that is what we will bring to them." + + +You know this is morally reprehensible, but from a purely stoic and logical standpoint you can understand the rationale behind the Craxil's argument. You wonder if peace between humans and the beastmen really is possible. Since the beginning of time, beastmen have always preyed on humans and humans have always responded with military force on their camps. Perhaps there really is no better way to advance their position right now but you cannot stomach the loss of life that would come with it. + + +"My beast brothers have every right to be happy, and so they shall. They humans will be brought to the breaking point with this plague and the forces I gathered will retake the lands they deserve. But I am not without understanding. I can see you have an open mind and have considered my position. You were wondering if peace between human and beast is possible. It is a noble but impractical thing. If you were to join us, I could make you powerful..." + + +You think to yourself "damn, does this Craxil thing read my mind too?" Still, it is a tempting offer. You have always toiled as a swineherd, providing the ever popular hams and bacon that are so popular at festivals and weddings and even fed those without homes, yet you've always been looked down upon as a swineherd by those who have probably never worked a day in their lives. You've seen girls you had feelings for go for men who were of "higher social standing" than yourself. You've always wanted respect, maybe even a little money or even power. You think about what the Craxil said, about how only those who TAKE it can ever HAVE it, and upon reflection you must admit it makes sense. But the Craxil's plan would involve massive loss of life and you are unsure if you want that on your hands. + + +"Your sister did not understand the situation as well as you and I, so I had to make her a thrall. When the acquisition is finished, I will return her to you... but only if you join me and help spread this plague throughout the human lands." + + +The Craxil, now clearly curious about all the thoughts running through your head, moves closer until her face is less than a foot away from your own. "Well human, how do you respond?" + + + +> I Will Join You, And Seize The Respect And Power I Deserve +The humans of Mihtana refused to send aid to the villagers of Jacquescrappe (even when people were dying) because it didn't suit their political or military interests. The villagers practically elected you for this quest without even asking you if you wanted to, then mocked your intelligence when you accepted on their behalf. You're sick of being looked down upon as a low class swineherd despite all the hard work you've done to provide for your community. All of that is about to change. + + +You proclaim your allegiance to the Craxil and to your astonishment she is actually overjoyed. Seems she needs as many people as possible to help spread the plague and your sister is the only thrall that doesn't look like an obvious thrall. Your voluntary support to the Craxil's plan is well recognized. You and your sister are made to be carriers of the great plague. When you return to the village of Jacquescrappe, you misinform the people that the Craxil is dead and deliver a liquid dose of the plague into the town's wine supply and shaking hands with everyone who comes to congratulate you. Shortly thereafter, you make sure to thoroughly infest all your pork before the next big wedding in Lima. Meanwhile, your sister gets a position as a laysister at a cathedral in the kingdom of Mihtana. By poisoning the holy water, she manages to infect everyone who comes in for a blessing. + + +Between the two of you, and the increased contagiousness of this version of the plague, you are able to infect a massive segment of the population. You work to continue spreading the disease, but the damage is already done. Quarantines are set up in Mihtana and Lima in a desperate attempt to quell the spread of the plague. Those who are uninfected (or who believe themselves uninfected) revolt against the guards in a desperate bid for self preservation. Others lock themselves in their homes and arm themselves in hopes of outliving the vile plague. Criminals take full advantage of the choas to operate unchecked and before long both kingdoms (and their militaries) are completely at their knees. + + +When the beastmen move forth to retake human lands, there is nothing to stop them. As you and your sister have become the Craxil's right and left hands so-to-speak, you are now recognized as a person of power and all respond with fear and respect when in your presence. + + +"The Craxil was right" you think to yourself. "If you want respect, you have to take it. If you want power, you have to take it. Nobody else is going to recognize your merit and deliver these things to you. To have anything worth having in life, you simply have to take it." + + +Unfortunately, it wasn't quite what you imagined. You enjoy your newfound respect and power, but the fear felt by everyone else only makes you feel more alienated and alone. By choosing this path, you have seized what you've always wanted, but what good is respect if it comes with the kind of fear that pushes people away? What good is power if there is no one to share it with. + + +When the time comes, the Craxil honors its agreement to release your sister and as you feared, she is appauled by what the two of you have wrought. You recieve word the next week that she was found in a clearing in the woods. She hung herself in the field where she used to play as a child. You try to establish some sort of peace between humans and beastfolk, but given what you have done the humans want nothing to do with you. They only respect you out of fear because of the beastmen you now command. Realizing you are now completely alone, you go to meet your sister in the clearing and follow her to whatever lies beyond. + + +CONGRATULATIONS! + +This is official ending #1 of 2<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You turn to find your sister, dressed in one of the war garbs you saw in your dream, walk out towards you from the shadows. She doesn't look as glossy-eyed as the other riders you encountered (in fact she looks perfectly normal) but from her demeanor and obvious reverence to the Craxil you know she is in fact a thrall. How can this be? This is the same war garb from the dream! But your sister has never been like that. + + +"We have big plans for her" the Craxil coes. "She is the carrier of a great plague, a slower acting yet more contagious version of what you carry in that vial I gave you. As a carrier she will be immune to its effects, but she will spread them among the humans whereever she goes." + + +"Why?!? Why would you do something like that you sick bitch?!?" + + +The Craxil only laughs at your insult and seems to take delight in your obvious fear and frustration at this moment. + + +"With the surrounding kingdoms of Mihtana and Lima buckling from the plague, there will be little resistance when we move out of the mountain range and into their lands. As you may have noticed on the way here, I have many humunculi, goblins, grippli, kobolds, and even a handful of orcs all gathered here in these mountains." + + +"So you really are planning an invasion then?" + + +"I believe that poor servant you so ruthlessly interrogated several days ago already explained that much to you." + + +You struggle not to be blinded by your anger at this point, but there is nothing you can do to stop her. + + +"The humans are a truly repugnant race. They have no respect for those that labor, those that produce, those that sacrifice for the good of others. Whenever they want something (be it money, power, or respect) they simply take it for themselves, and only those who do are respected. This is why the beastfolk I serve have been pushed deep into this barren mountainside." + + +To your astonishment, you actually find yourself identifying with the Craxil. Even when you agreed to stick your neck out on their behalf they snickered comments about your intelligence under their breath. Even now, after all the dangers you've faced, you're sure they have probably already assumed you're dead and are likely redistributing your property as we speak. + + +"The beastfolk here are loyal to me and to themselves, they have honor. And they certainly deserve the lands of their ancestors, taken from them by the humans." + + +"And you think slaughtering humans is the answer?" + + +"Since when has diplomacy not ended with a beastman's head on a human's table? Since when did the humans ever sit down to negotiate with my brethren? The humans understand only the simplicity of death and destruction so that is what we will bring to them." + + +You know this is morally reprehensible, but from a purely stoic and logical standpoint you can understand the rationale behind the Craxil's argument. You wonder if peace between humans and the beastmen really is possible. Since the beginning of time, beastmen have always preyed on humans and humans have always responded with military force on their camps. Perhaps there really is no better way to advance their position right now but you cannot stomach the loss of life that would come with it. + + +"My beast brothers have every right to be happy, and so they shall. They humans will be brought to the breaking point with this plague and the forces I gathered will retake the lands they deserve. But I am not without understanding. I can see you have an open mind and have considered my position. You were wondering if peace between human and beast is possible. It is a noble but impractical thing. If you were to join us, I could make you powerful..." + + +You think to yourself "damn, does this Craxil thing read my mind too?" Still, it is a tempting offer. You have always toiled as a swineherd, providing the ever popular hams and bacon that are so popular at festivals and weddings and even fed those without homes, yet you've always been looked down upon as a swineherd by those who have probably never worked a day in their lives. You've seen girls you had feelings for go for men who were of "higher social standing" than yourself. You've always wanted respect, maybe even a little money or even power. You think about what the Craxil said, about how only those who TAKE it can ever HAVE it, and upon reflection you must admit it makes sense. But the Craxil's plan would involve massive loss of life and you are unsure if you want that on your hands. + + +"Your sister did not understand the situation as well as you and I, so I had to make her a thrall. When the acquisition is finished, I will return her to you... but only if you join me and help spread this plague throughout the human lands." + + +The Craxil, now clearly curious about all the thoughts running through your head, moves closer until her face is less than a foot away from your own. "Well human, how do you respond?" + + + +> I Cannot Abide The Senseless Slaughter You're Scheming, I Would Rather Die +Humanity may not be perfect, but it certainly doesn't deserve the kind of death and destruction the Craxil has in mind. You announce to her that you would rather die than support her in this plan. You were terrified that this being might become infuriated and attack, but instead she calmly and slowly backs away... then looks to your sister. Your sister looks back at the Craxil and you realize the Craxil has just given her a nonverbal order. By now your sister's blade is unsheathed and she is coming at you. + + +She fights with a furocity and intent that is completely out of character for your shy and reserved little sister, but her physical strength is the same. There is nothing special about her swordplay technique either and you are pleased to see that you can block and parry her attacks. Still, this is your sister, and you don't want to kill her if you don't have to. The Craxil is obviously enjoying this and you can't help but think that if you could just find some way of killing her then perhaps your sister can be saved. + + +The Craxil is currently in her noncorporeal true form, but she has taken corporeal forms before when she was watching you. You wonder if striking her while she's in one of these corporeal forms might actually damage her. Alternatively, you wonder why a shapeshifting being with noncorporeal capability would even need others to spread the plague in the first place. Perhaps she isn't immune like you once thought or perhaps she felt secure from it in her noncorporeal form. Would you still need to get her into corporeal form for that first or could you try and give it to her while she's in her noncorporeal state. Or perhaps there is some other way of getting your sister back to normal. Unlike you, she knows some very basic magic. Perhaps she will have something that will damage the Craxil in its noncorporeal state. + + +While your mind wonders to ponder these things, your sister manages to get a shallow cut across your right shoulder and you respond by kicking her onto the ground and stopping down on her sword hand. You remove your sister's weapon and the Craxil moves in as if to protect its vassal. You quickly begin to go over your previous ideas in your head knowing you will need to try something and soon lest the Craxil decides to attack first. + + + +> Call Out To Your Sister And Try To Free Her From Her Servitude +You call out to your sister and try to reach her as her brother. You remind her of the grove you two played in when you were young. You recall times when you organized a surprise gathering for her birthday. You remind her how much she cares about the well being of others and beg her to come to her senses. Unfortunately, whatever magicks control her mind apparently override any logical or emotional argument you put forth and she instantly follows whatever order the Craxil gives her. + + +You have her weapon, but she still has her basic spell casting abilities. She puts a magic missile into your leg and you are unable to stand. From here, the Craxil decides to turn you into another one of her mindless thralls. You spend your days serving her whims, spreading the plague, and standing guard against intruders until one day many monthes later a real hero lops your head off while fighting the Craxil's minions. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Humanity may not be perfect, but it certainly doesn't deserve the kind of death and destruction the Craxil has in mind. You announce to her that you would rather die than support her in this plan. You were terrified that this being might become infuriated and attack, but instead she calmly and slowly backs away... then looks to your sister. Your sister looks back at the Craxil and you realize the Craxil has just given her a nonverbal order. By now your sister's blade is unsheathed and she is coming at you. + + +She fights with a furocity and intent that is completely out of character for your shy and reserved little sister, but her physical strength is the same. There is nothing special about her swordplay technique either and you are pleased to see that you can block and parry her attacks. Still, this is your sister, and you don't want to kill her if you don't have to. The Craxil is obviously enjoying this and you can't help but think that if you could just find some way of killing her then perhaps your sister can be saved. + + +The Craxil is currently in her noncorporeal true form, but she has taken corporeal forms before when she was watching you. You wonder if striking her while she's in one of these corporeal forms might actually damage her. Alternatively, you wonder why a shapeshifting being with noncorporeal capability would even need others to spread the plague in the first place. Perhaps she isn't immune like you once thought or perhaps she felt secure from it in her noncorporeal form. Would you still need to get her into corporeal form for that first or could you try and give it to her while she's in her noncorporeal state. Or perhaps there is some other way of getting your sister back to normal. Unlike you, she knows some very basic magic. Perhaps she will have something that will damage the Craxil in its noncorporeal state. + + +While your mind wonders to ponder these things, your sister manages to get a shallow cut across your right shoulder and you respond by kicking her onto the ground and stopping down on her sword hand. You remove your sister's weapon and the Craxil moves in as if to protect its vassal. You quickly begin to go over your previous ideas in your head knowing you will need to try something and soon lest the Craxil decides to attack first. + + + +> Fire A Poison Coated Arrow Into the Noncorporeal Form Of The Craxil +You draw a poison coated arrow from your pack and immediately notch it into your bow. You realize you don't have a lot of time so you draw it back, aim, and fire immediately. The Craxil does not move. Instead, she allows the arrow to pass directly through her noncorporeal state and land somewhere in the dark distance. You realize she only felt secure enough to give you the poison in the first place because she existed in this noncorporeal form whenever she wasn't spying. You attempt to quickly consider your other options but it seems she doesn't much care for you any longer. She stretches forth her hand and it feels as though you are being lifted into the air by your own skeleton. You scream as you feel what feels like a brain aneurysm. You continue to suffer the pain until it kills you. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Humanity may not be perfect, but it certainly doesn't deserve the kind of death and destruction the Craxil has in mind. You announce to her that you would rather die than support her in this plan. You were terrified that this being might become infuriated and attack, but instead she calmly and slowly backs away... then looks to your sister. Your sister looks back at the Craxil and you realize the Craxil has just given her a nonverbal order. By now your sister's blade is unsheathed and she is coming at you. + + +She fights with a furocity and intent that is completely out of character for your shy and reserved little sister, but her physical strength is the same. There is nothing special about her swordplay technique either and you are pleased to see that you can block and parry her attacks. Still, this is your sister, and you don't want to kill her if you don't have to. The Craxil is obviously enjoying this and you can't help but think that if you could just find some way of killing her then perhaps your sister can be saved. + + +The Craxil is currently in her noncorporeal true form, but she has taken corporeal forms before when she was watching you. You wonder if striking her while she's in one of these corporeal forms might actually damage her. Alternatively, you wonder why a shapeshifting being with noncorporeal capability would even need others to spread the plague in the first place. Perhaps she isn't immune like you once thought or perhaps she felt secure from it in her noncorporeal form. Would you still need to get her into corporeal form for that first or could you try and give it to her while she's in her noncorporeal state. Or perhaps there is some other way of getting your sister back to normal. Unlike you, she knows some very basic magic. Perhaps she will have something that will damage the Craxil in its noncorporeal state. + + +While your mind wonders to ponder these things, your sister manages to get a shallow cut across your right shoulder and you respond by kicking her onto the ground and stopping down on her sword hand. You remove your sister's weapon and the Craxil moves in as if to protect its vassal. You quickly begin to go over your previous ideas in your head knowing you will need to try something and soon lest the Craxil decides to attack first. + + + +> Challenge The Craxil To Take On Other Corporeal Forms, Then Infect Her With The Poison +"It is clear that I have neither the means nor the ability to complete my quest, so as a dead man I ask that you grant one dying wish" you proclaim. + + +"Throwing in the towel already?" she scowls, obviously disappointed that you didn't have some clever trick in mind. "From your past exploits in my territory I thought you'd at least think of something to try. What do you want?" + + +"I want to know how you were able to keep tabs on me during the journey. What other forms did you take besides Brandolf and the old man?" + + +"I took many forms. From birds, to rocks, to the very water you swam through to get past the orcs." + + +"Show me" you demand, "I want to more fully understand how I was bested before this ends. Let me die with that peace." + + + +As she's talking, she starts by taking the corporeal form of Brandolf the Bray and you seize upon the opportunity. As rapidly as you can you grab a poison coated arrow, notch it in your bow, drawback the drawstring, aim, and release. The poison arrow lands in her forearm and she promptly removes it and tosses it aside. You fear she was unaffected by this arrow and she begins to laugh. + + +"It seems I misjudged you, you haven't surrendered at all have you? Attacking me in my corporeal state... that does sound like you. But I have the ability to reform my corporeal state just as easily as I formed it in the first place. This is a simple matter of..." + + +She stops midsentence as if she somehow came to the realization of what you've done. + + +"That arrow..." + + +"The same stuff you gave me on day 1. It looks like I managed to complete this quest after all" + + +The Craxil bursts with laughter as if somehow impressed with your creativity or perhaps the irony of the situation. She doesn't stop laughing even when the nausea and vomitting come. You can tell her power is waning because you sister suddenly regains control of her facilties and runs to your side. The Craxil laments that the beastmen will no longer maintain unity after her death and expresses genuine concern about their well-being. You aren't sure why, but you promise to try and convince the human leaders in Mihtana and Lima to recognize the importance and advantages of peace and even integration of beastmen into civilization. She smiles and then the light that made up her corporeal being goes out. + + + +> Continue The Story +Unfortunately, this story takes a tragic end for your sister, who remains a carrier for the plague even after the Craxil's death. You explain to her what the Craxil was and what it planned to do. She backs away from you immediately as if not wanting to infect you. In fact, it dawns on both of you that she will never again get to experience the physical touch of another person in any way ever again without killing them. In a deep state of sadness, she decides to remain in the wilds as a hermit, embarking on a quest to find a cure for this condition. You want to stop her but in all honesty, you cannot possibly think of anything better for her right now and bringing her to civilization would be a bad idea right now. You wish you could hug her or comfort her somehow, but you both understand why you can't. Instead, you wish her the best of luck and hope she one day finds what she's needs. From this point on, there is not a single night that goes by for the rest of your life that you don't pray for her. + + +With the death of the Craxil, the doors that sealed behind you are no longer fixed. The infighting amongst the now disunified beastmen makes it easy for you to get through unnoticed on your way back to the village. Along the way you see grippli attacking goblins, kobolds fighting amongst themselves, and the orc patrols seem to have raided numerous humunculi settlements. The large, unified force they once represented is now thinned out considerably, and although the journey is long and your rations are low, you eventually make it back to the village. + + +The villagers are shocked to hear that the Craxil is dead and you tell them all about it. Some believe you are full of it and think the Craxil still lives. Others admit they bet good money you would die. You were right to assume they'd have redistributed your property under this very assumption and it takes some doing getting it all restored. Unfortunately, they decided to slay your friends Oinky and Snout for ham while you were away and for the first time in your life you chose not to take it lying down anymore. If this journey taught you anything, its that you are going to have to demand respect if you hope to get it. + + +However, this journey has taught you a lot more than that. As promised, you travel to meet with leaders in both Mihtana and Lima so that you can try to convince them why peace between the humans and the beastfolk might actually be beneficial. You explain how the Craxil was able to rally them together and organize them and how some of them demonstrated a higher level of intelligence than you originally thought them capable of (i.e. - the kobolds extensive mining techniques and the goblin's tinkering). Unfortunately, despite your best efforts, the world is just not ready to view them as anything other than dangerous savages to be on guard against and you realize that this is how it is going to stay. + + +Eventually you return to your farm and begin shoveling out all the pig dung that had been piling up in your absence. As you are working, a girl you took notice of at the local tavern looks over to you. You smile with confidence and she smiles back and suddenly you think... this might not be so bad after all. + + +CONGRATULATIONS! + +You've found real ending #2 of 2.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Humanity may not be perfect, but it certainly doesn't deserve the kind of death and destruction the Craxil has in mind. You announce to her that you would rather die than support her in this plan. You were terrified that this being might become infuriated and attack, but instead she calmly and slowly backs away... then looks to your sister. Your sister looks back at the Craxil and you realize the Craxil has just given her a nonverbal order. By now your sister's blade is unsheathed and she is coming at you. + + +She fights with a furocity and intent that is completely out of character for your shy and reserved little sister, but her physical strength is the same. There is nothing special about her swordplay technique either and you are pleased to see that you can block and parry her attacks. Still, this is your sister, and you don't want to kill her if you don't have to. The Craxil is obviously enjoying this and you can't help but think that if you could just find some way of killing her then perhaps your sister can be saved. + + +The Craxil is currently in her noncorporeal true form, but she has taken corporeal forms before when she was watching you. You wonder if striking her while she's in one of these corporeal forms might actually damage her. Alternatively, you wonder why a shapeshifting being with noncorporeal capability would even need others to spread the plague in the first place. Perhaps she isn't immune like you once thought or perhaps she felt secure from it in her noncorporeal form. Would you still need to get her into corporeal form for that first or could you try and give it to her while she's in her noncorporeal state. Or perhaps there is some other way of getting your sister back to normal. Unlike you, she knows some very basic magic. Perhaps she will have something that will damage the Craxil in its noncorporeal state. + + +While your mind wonders to ponder these things, your sister manages to get a shallow cut across your right shoulder and you respond by kicking her onto the ground and stopping down on her sword hand. You remove your sister's weapon and the Craxil moves in as if to protect its vassal. You quickly begin to go over your previous ideas in your head knowing you will need to try something and soon lest the Craxil decides to attack first. + + + +> Challenge The Craxil To Take On Other Corporeal Forms, Then Strike Her Down With Your Sword +"It is clear that I have neither the means nor the ability to complete my quest, so as a dead man I ask that you grant one dying wish" you proclaim. + + +"Throwing in the towel already?" she scowls, obviously disappointed that you didn't have some clever trick in mind. "From your past exploits in my territory I thought you'd at least think of something to try. What do you want?" + + +"I want to know how you were able to keep tabs on me during the journey. What other forms did you take besides Brandolf and the old man?" + + +"I took many forms. From birds, to rocks, to the very water you swam through to get past the orcs." + + +"Show me" you demand, "I want to more fully understand how I was bested before this ends. Let me die with that peace." + + +The Craxil takes the form of Brandolf the Bray first and you seize upon you opportunity. Walking forth with feigned curiosity you unsheath your sword and charge at her with a firm sense of purpose. You bring the blade down through her collar bone and into her chest while she's still in the Brandolf form. She looks surprised, and the look of disappointment is replaced with a smile and a laugh. + + +"So that's it eh? Not bad. But you see, I can reconstitute my form." You withdraw your blade and watch as her flesh comes back together and restores itself anew. + + +"It was not a bad idea, it really wasn't. The kind of thing a guy like you would probably try. But this is where it is going to have to end. + + +While your attention is focused upon the Craxil, your sister springs forth and grabs your arm. The significance of this move is lost on you until you realize she's the carrier of the new plague. You shirk her off and back away but it is too late. The Craxil and your sister then leave, discussing various ideas for disseminating the plague, leaving you to spend the last few hours of your life in complete darkness. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The bad feeling in the pit of your stomach returns and you realize that eating all those pork rines and only pork rines for several days until seeing the old man did not do your digestive system any good. You spring into action, find a secluded corner, and relieve the mess that was building up inside you. Unfortunately, it is not until after this messy endeaver that you remember you neglected to pack bottom tissue when you left on this quest. You've braved many dangers and survived several impossible situations but now you are going to have to make a decision. A decision that is more frightening than any you have made before. + + + +To your left are large, round, orange leaves. They aren't brittle and look as though they might work. To your right are a bunch of ferns sporting three fingered leaves. These are green with red spots. It's time to make an all important decision. + + + + +> Wipe With The Three Fingered Green Leaves With Red Spots + +You choose the three fingered green leaves with red spots and it is not long after your sanitation ritual that you realize what a mistake that was. Whatever manner of herbs those were you have a burning rash all along and in your backside. Between that and the turtle bite, you are finding it difficult to walk without pain. You really hope this journey ends soon, you really do. + + +The next three days of travel down the Redridge Pass are surprisingly uneventful. You sneak past the occasional orc patrol and wild animal but nothing particularly difficult. You half expect something to come jumping out at you from the darkness or to find some large camp around the corner but to your plesant surprise the way seems more or less clear. Part of you wonders if it is a trap given the Craxil knows you are coming but then ... what choice do you have? + + +As you come up a steep incline you look down and with great satisfaction you find what you've been searching for all this time. A colossal chasm, the canyon you've been searching for! The old man said you would know it when you see it and damn if he wasn't right about that! Still, this canyon is freaking huge. It will take probably half a day just to get down to the bottom safely and once down there, there is a LOT to explore. You know the underground cavern that houses the Craxil is accessed somewhere down there, so I guess you don't have much choice than to go down there and investigate huh? + + +You are about to cautiously decend when you hear the sound of hoofprints behind you...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The bad feeling in the pit of your stomach returns and you realize that eating all those pork rines and only pork rines for several days until seeing the old man did not do your digestive system any good. You spring into action, find a secluded corner, and relieve the mess that was building up inside you. Unfortunately, it is not until after this messy endeaver that you remember you neglected to pack bottom tissue when you left on this quest. You've braved many dangers and survived several impossible situations but now you are going to have to make a decision. A decision that is more frightening than any you have made before. + + + +To your left are large, round, orange leaves. They aren't brittle and look as though they might work. To your right are a bunch of ferns sporting three fingered leaves. These are green with red spots. It's time to make an all important decision. + + + + +> Don't Wipe At All You Filthy Mongrel + +Real men don't wipe, so why should you? LOL, ok.. so that was stupid. But you don't feel like wiping with leaves so you just pull up your pants and keep going. Sure you've got a pretty nasty case of mudbutt going on and you are not looking forward to returning these pants to the girl who loaned them to you (don't even ask why you chose to wear girls pants...). Hopefully this journey will end soon. + + +The next three days of travel down the Redridge Pass are surprisingly uneventful. You sneak past the occasional orc patrol and wild animal but nothing particularly difficult. You half expect something to come jumping out at you from the darkness or to find some large camp around the corner but to your plesant surprise the way seems more or less clear. Part of you wonders if it is a trap given the Craxil knows you are coming but then ... what choice do you have? + + +As you come up a steep incline you look down and with great satisfaction you find what you've been searching for all this time. A colossal chasm, the canyon you've been searching for! The old man said you would know it when you see it and damn if he wasn't right about that! Still, this canyon is freaking huge. It will take probably half a day just to get down to the bottom safely and once down there, there is a LOT to explore. You know the underground cavern that houses the Craxil is accessed somewhere down there, so I guess you don't have much choice than to go down there and investigate huh? + + +You are about to cautiously decend when you hear the sound of hoofprints behind you... + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You climb the peak and though it takes a considerable amount of time to get to the top, it isn't nearly as tiring as you expected it would be. You are now standing on an even higher plateau on the mountainside and the Redridge Pass is precisely where you expected it to be. You are thrilled to have finally found the pass, which is really more of a trail than a pass, but you still have a lot further to go. As you move forward you suddenly get wind of a foul stench and hear a lot of loud, obnoxious grunting noises up ahead. + + +You immediately get off the beaten path and find a good hiding spot. It is midday now so there isn't a lot of darkness to aid you. Still, you manage to crawl forward unseen until you see a small group of orcs. This is VERY not good you think you yourself. Orcs are exceptionally strong. Even one on one you stand no real chance of defeating one. There are about five blocking the path forward so you are going to simply have to sneak around them and continue on your journey. You've interrogated lesser creatures, but if the Craxil is commanding these creatures then just how strong is the thing? No, don't dwell on such thoughts. You need to focus. You've come this far and you're sure as hell not gonna let yourself be intimidated now. + + +Returning to the task at hand you see a couple of different options. There is a river that runs down the middle of the orc group's position and some hollow reeds close to you. You remember one time during capture the flag where you moved through the river underwater and breathed through reeds very similar to these. That was an epic maneuver worth remembering, perhaps it will serve you again here? The orc camp and you are at the same elevation; but there is a ditch that runs from your current position, along the side of the camp, and out the other side. Presumably, if you hug the side of the ditch closest to the orcs and move along quietly they shouldn't be able to see you. Alternatively, you still have plenty of poison. Even if you applied it to all your remaining arrows, you wouldn't even have used half the bottle. Orcs are large and there are only five of them... + + +Time for a decision. What's your plan of action? + + + +> Move Through The Ditch To The Other Side +The orcs might notice a moving reed and get suspicious and attacking a superior number of superior enemies is just inviting death. You decide the best bet is to move through the ditch and move through while tightly hugging the wall closest to them, thus minimizing your chances of being seen. You hop in and start moving. A tiny little stream trickles through and much of the ground here is mud. The stench of orc shit is strong in here and you begin to realize this is where they've been dumping it (no pun intended). Still, you brave on knowing this is a life or death situation and no time to be getting squeamish. + + + +You are now so very close to the orcs but they haven't yet seen you. You move even slower than before but you are confident you will make it. That is, until one of them lifts his nose and sniffs the air. It seems you forgot to take into account the fact that orcs have an exceptionally keen sense of smell. Despite the fact that you are clean, and the fact that the orc manure should be overpowering their senses right now, it seems they've identified your scent. They move over and it isn't long before you are seen. You try to run, but you stumble in the mud that has taken your shoe. You try to run without it but you don't get very far. The orcs were put there on the path to stop you from reaching the Craxil and they've succeeded. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You climb the peak and though it takes a considerable amount of time to get to the top, it isn't nearly as tiring as you expected it would be. You are now standing on an even higher plateau on the mountainside and the Redridge Pass is precisely where you expected it to be. You are thrilled to have finally found the pass, which is really more of a trail than a pass, but you still have a lot further to go. As you move forward you suddenly get wind of a foul stench and hear a lot of loud, obnoxious grunting noises up ahead. + + +You immediately get off the beaten path and find a good hiding spot. It is midday now so there isn't a lot of darkness to aid you. Still, you manage to crawl forward unseen until you see a small group of orcs. This is VERY not good you think you yourself. Orcs are exceptionally strong. Even one on one you stand no real chance of defeating one. There are about five blocking the path forward so you are going to simply have to sneak around them and continue on your journey. You've interrogated lesser creatures, but if the Craxil is commanding these creatures then just how strong is the thing? No, don't dwell on such thoughts. You need to focus. You've come this far and you're sure as hell not gonna let yourself be intimidated now. + + +Returning to the task at hand you see a couple of different options. There is a river that runs down the middle of the orc group's position and some hollow reeds close to you. You remember one time during capture the flag where you moved through the river underwater and breathed through reeds very similar to these. That was an epic maneuver worth remembering, perhaps it will serve you again here? The orc camp and you are at the same elevation; but there is a ditch that runs from your current position, along the side of the camp, and out the other side. Presumably, if you hug the side of the ditch closest to the orcs and move along quietly they shouldn't be able to see you. Alternatively, you still have plenty of poison. Even if you applied it to all your remaining arrows, you wouldn't even have used half the bottle. Orcs are large and there are only five of them... + + +Time for a decision. What's your plan of action? + + + +> Attack With Poison Tipped Arrows + +You have way more poison than you need to kill the Craxil so why not use it to help you get there as well? If Brandolf was right about this stuff, it should kill anything that ingests it or is stabbed by it. The orcs are very large creatures too, so you hope you will be able to hit them. You apply the poison to about a dozen of your arrows and take your stance. You pull out the first poison arrow, notch it in your bow, pull back the drawstring as far as you possibly can, and release. + + +The first shot is a success. One of the closest orcs takes it in the shoulder and it isn't long before the poison takes effect. He is laying on the ground vomiting and though he isn't dead yet, you know it won't be much longer for he has the look of death upon him. The other four are now charging at you. The two in front have their shields out, as if to block any subsequent shots. You quickly let fly another arrow. It goes precisely where you aimed but one of the front orcs anticipated it and blocked it with his shield. You manage to get one of the ones in back in the leg with your next shot, bringing your enemy's total to three but they are nearly upon you now. You only have enough time for another two shots and the forward orcs manage to block them with their shields. They've certainly developed a clever counterstrategy to your strategy haven't they? + + + +Now they are upon you, hacking you to pieces and bellowing insults like "stupid morra". You don't live long enough to hear him finish his next line. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no point in hiding in the storage room as they may very well send more kobolds in to retrieve the tinder. Instead, you are going to set it all ablaze. Even if the distraction doesn't work well enough for you, it will only be a matter of time before the quell the fire and run out of tinder for their torch basins. You sneak in start a fire using their own flint and tinder. Soon this fire spreads to the rest of the tinder in the room (with your help of course) and you quickly find your way out of there and out of sight before the kobolds are aware of what has transpired. + + + +It isn't long before they take notice and flock over to their storage room. The taskmaster kobold keeps jumping around shouting "yip yip" or whatever the hell these things say and the other kobolds are struggling to stop the fire. You manage to slip around the corner and evade the bulk of them and you think you've found the passageway leading up towards the taskmaster kobold. In fact, you have. There's just one small problem. There are two kobolds guarding the taskmaster and you would be foolish to assume the taskmaster is unarmed so that makes three. At present, the taskmaster is clearly focused on the fire, to the point of ignoring all else, but the two guardian kobolds are still vigilant. You're going to need another plan. + + +You consider using your bow again. You are actually pretty close to the bodyguard kobolds yet still veiled in darkness so you would not likely miss from this range. Of course, with one dead you would have to immediately focus on the other and subdue the taskmaster all in quick succession lest the entire colony become aware of your attack. Another, possibly crazier idea is to just run past the guards before they mentally register your presence, grab the taskmaster, jump from the ledge, and just run. The fall may be considerable for a kobold, but you are sure that as a human you can handle it. + + + +> Run Past The Guardians, Grab The Taskmaster, Jump From The Ledge, And Run +You may be in close range, but you doubt if your skills with a bow would enable you to kill in quick succession like that. Instead, you choose the more daring approach. After all, the crazier the plan the less likely they are to see it coming. You gather your nerve, fixate upon your target, and bolt. The kobold guards jump back like they've just seen a screamer or something and you sail past them and onto the ledge. The taskmaster, still focused on the fire, is completely surprised when you grab him and jump off the ledge. By now, every kobold in the colony is aware of what you've done so you just blindly run down the back passage and deeper into the mines. + + + + +You haven't any idea where you are going and there are numerous kobolds chasing you from behind. Thankfully, their legs just aren't long enough to keep pace with you, though they certainly push themselves trying. You focus all your attention on trying to avoid the kobolds that are deeper in these mines while simultaneously trying to find a secluded place to stop and interrogate your new prisoner. Unfortunately, you're so focused on this task that you don't see the dagger your kobold prisoner pulls out of his sleeve and plunges into your chest. Seems the flaw with your plan was that you didn't have any time to properly restrain your prisoner and now you are dead. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The man you just dismissed earlier is standing at the front of the pack. You knew there was something off about that earlier request and seeing this display only reaffirms that you were right to avoid them in the first place. They are all looking down at the ground but now he is looking up directly at you with a creepy smile on his face. + + +"So, you saw through our little ambush scheme did you?" he sneers. + + +"What is it you want?" + + +"Quite simply we're aware of your quest to reach the Craxil and we are not prepared to allow it." + + + +At this point their heads begin to twist and contort and their skulls appear to come out of their mouths. It is almost as though they were never human at all but part of some kind of disguise. In fact, it is now readily apparent that this is the case. You are now looking at five maniacal looking skeletons armed with an assortment of swords and hand axes. They seem like they are eager to get things started and in fact, they are all rushing down the beaten path towards you. You turn the other way until you can decide what to do and despite what you've been told about the undead, you discover they are perfectly capable of keeping pace with you. + + +You know you aren't going to be able to take on five of these guys and they seem intent on sticking together during the pursuit. To your left is another cave you've chosen to pass up on your journey, figuring it was just another humunculus den. Perhaps, if you are lucky, you can lose your pursuers in there. Alternatively, you could always try climbing the steep rockface off to your right. You've had plenty of climbing experience as a kid and somehow you hope these skeletons won't be able to follow you. You could also turn around and start unloading arrows into your enemies. They may be keeping pace with you, but you still have a heck of a head start and you'd wager you could release quite a few before they catch up to you. It's up to you... + + + +> Climb The Rockface To Get Beyond Their Reach +The skeletal undead aren't exactly known for their climbing skills so you promptly head over to the steep rockface and set about climbing to a point beyond their reach. You are almost at the top when the skeletons reach the base. The attempt to climb but as you had hoped, they are substantially less successful than you. One of them responds to the situation by tossing his hand axe at you and you move your hand just in time to avoid it. You make sure it stays stuck in the rockface so it doesn't get to try again, then pull yourself up and over the top. + + +You are glad to be away from those damn things and now that you are at a slightly higher elevation along the mountainside, there's a good chance you won't be seeing them again. Just got to keep your cool and remember to be stealthy. You continue your journey in the same general direction but keep to this elevation for fear of encountering those undead creatures a second time. After a while, you begin to smell a rather curious smell up ahead. As you approach you discover a camp situated in what is probably the only forested ledge on this entire mountain range. You don't initially see anyone there, but you keep your distance and eventually see something hop down rather quickly from one of the trees and go behind another. You didn't get a good look at whatever it was and you are hoping they haven't seen you. + + + +Nightfall comes and now the occupants of the camp are coming into view. You never believed that at any time in your entire life you'd ever lay eyes on the creatures you are seeing. The grippli, a race of humanoid tree frogs standing at 2 feet tall, have organized this camp. There aren't more than a dozen tops, but grippli are known to be considerable fighters when they need to be and there is no way of knowing if there are more of them in the trees. + + +They often prefer to fight with poison darts, nets, and bows as they would prefer to keep their enemy at a distance but a few bear swords. You see one of them adorned in considerably nicer garb than the others and commands quite a presence from them so you surmise it must be their leader. + + +Suddenly it occurs to you. These creatures are in Craxil territory so odds are they work for the Craxil. That means that instead of wandering the mountain range aimlessly you ought try and extract information regarding the Craxil's whereabouts from the grippli. Ideally, you could get your hands on their leader but that is going to be easier said than done. There may not be many grippli present, but each one is a challenge in his own right and you have no way of knowing how many may be in the trees to see what you do. + + +Eventually, the captain retires to his tent as do many others. Three grippli remain near the campfire out front and again, you have no way of knowing what is still in the trees. The captain's tent is near the back. You surmise you could go around, giving the camp a wide berth, and sneak into the captain's tent. However, you feel like you should at least do SOMETHING about the three on watch or you may be the one getting captured instead. This is quite a dilly of a pickle indeed. + + + +> Sneak Around Back And Enter The Captain's Tent Quietly + +You don't foresee any way to take down a group of three grippli given each one would probably pose a challenge. As well, they are tasked with being nightwatchmen so you doubt they'd abandon their posts so easily no matter what you do. You are going to just have to take a risk and sneak into the captain's tent without attracting any attention. You give the camp a wide berth as planned and SLOWLY work your way along the far edge of the treeline until you are in a position to sneak in towards the captains tent without being seen by the grippli at the campfire. + + +Your approach is successful. You slowly creep in, staying low to the ground. You can't help but look up at the treetops everyone in a while out of fear that darts, arrows, or nets may come raining down upon you but so far nothing has happened. Perhaps there is nobody there or perhaps they just don't see you. Either way, you've made it to the captain's tent. Cautiously, you open the canopy and enter the tent. As you had hoped, the captain is asleep and you take care to knock him unconcious with a block shaped wooden figurine from his tent. Now all that's left is to carry him away from the camp, someplace safe where you can interrogate him for information regarding the Craxil. + + + +You exit the tent with the grippli captain slung over your shoulder. At only 2 feet tall the little fella is surprisingly light. Unfortunately, as you exit you hear a rather startling noise. It sounded like a cross between a ribbit and a scream. Whatever the hell it was, it came from one of the grippli over by the campfire. Almost immediately, the whole camp is on alert. Grippli are dropping down from the trees and coming out of their tents. You take off and run, your only real option left. Unfortunately, the grippli have amazing speed and agility. You drop the captain behind in hopes of getting away but before long you've taken a few darts in the back. As the poison sinks in, you realize it no longer matters if you outrun your pursuers... this stuff will kill you anyway. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The skeletal undead aren't exactly known for their climbing skills so you promptly head over to the steep rockface and set about climbing to a point beyond their reach. You are almost at the top when the skeletons reach the base. The attempt to climb but as you had hoped, they are substantially less successful than you. One of them responds to the situation by tossing his hand axe at you and you move your hand just in time to avoid it. You make sure it stays stuck in the rockface so it doesn't get to try again, then pull yourself up and over the top. + + +You are glad to be away from those damn things and now that you are at a slightly higher elevation along the mountainside, there's a good chance you won't be seeing them again. Just got to keep your cool and remember to be stealthy. You continue your journey in the same general direction but keep to this elevation for fear of encountering those undead creatures a second time. After a while, you begin to smell a rather curious smell up ahead. As you approach you discover a camp situated in what is probably the only forested ledge on this entire mountain range. You don't initially see anyone there, but you keep your distance and eventually see something hop down rather quickly from one of the trees and go behind another. You didn't get a good look at whatever it was and you are hoping they haven't seen you. + + + +Nightfall comes and now the occupants of the camp are coming into view. You never believed that at any time in your entire life you'd ever lay eyes on the creatures you are seeing. The grippli, a race of humanoid tree frogs standing at 2 feet tall, have organized this camp. There aren't more than a dozen tops, but grippli are known to be considerable fighters when they need to be and there is no way of knowing if there are more of them in the trees. + + +They often prefer to fight with poison darts, nets, and bows as they would prefer to keep their enemy at a distance but a few bear swords. You see one of them adorned in considerably nicer garb than the others and commands quite a presence from them so you surmise it must be their leader. + + +Suddenly it occurs to you. These creatures are in Craxil territory so odds are they work for the Craxil. That means that instead of wandering the mountain range aimlessly you ought try and extract information regarding the Craxil's whereabouts from the grippli. Ideally, you could get your hands on their leader but that is going to be easier said than done. There may not be many grippli present, but each one is a challenge in his own right and you have no way of knowing how many may be in the trees to see what you do. + + +Eventually, the captain retires to his tent as do many others. Three grippli remain near the campfire out front and again, you have no way of knowing what is still in the trees. The captain's tent is near the back. You surmise you could go around, giving the camp a wide berth, and sneak into the captain's tent. However, you feel like you should at least do SOMETHING about the three on watch or you may be the one getting captured instead. This is quite a dilly of a pickle indeed. + + + +> Construct A Pit Trap And Lure The Three Out Towards You +You need to dispatch with the three grippli keeping watch but you cannot do that in the camp or you will almost certainly get attention. Therefore, your only real option is to lure them out and eliminate them somehow while they're away from camp. Even if you do lure them away from their camp though, three grippli are more than a match for you so you are going to have to construct a trap of some sort. You remember seeing a small drop off in the middle of the path you just came down and that gives you an idea. + + + + +You take about a dozen of your arrows and plant them firmly in the ground (arrowhead up) at the bottom of the hole you encountered along the path. You only lightly cover it with what little large leaves and vines you can find, then cover this foliage completely with sand and small rocks (enough to cover the vegetation but not enough to make it fall into the hole). Your hope is that you will be able to lure your three grippli out here away from the camp and then fall in on top of your arrows. The only thing left to do is figure out how you are going to lure them away from the camp without them alerting the camp as well. + + +You decide to mimic the sounds of the small prairie dog like creatures out here and toss small pebbles around the corner where they would see them. You seem to have their attention as they are too bored to really entertain themselves with anything else. Unfortunately, the prairie dog gag isn't enough to make them come so next you imitate the sound of a ewe while making loud pawing noises at the ground. For whatever reason, this one gets their attention and they start approaching quietly with their weapons drawn. + + + +You continue making animals noises but move back slowly at the same time. At point for them is a hunter brandishing a bow. The other two apparently believe in the sword. Maybe that's not as atypical for a grippli as you thought. You are careful to remain unseen but back up slowly and continue leading them forth with animal noises. Eventually the game is up as the hunter seems to get suspicous and notices you are there. You turn and run using the indentations in the rockwall to your right to help protect you from arrow fire. You take your position behind a rock on the other side of the trap and to your glee they are running straight for it. + + +YES! The sound of your cover giving way under their weight is music to your ears, as are the ribbits of pain emitted shortly thereafter. You surmise they are dead until one of them jumps out of the pit with only a leg wound. He pulls out his sword and glares at you. You feel like facing him like this, it would be an even match. Still, you would much prefer some kind of advantage whereever you can get it. You draw your sword and begin to think carefully about how this is going to go down. + + + + + +> Rush The Creature And Try To Push Him Back Into The Pit +You realize that if the pit was good enough to kill the other two then knocking him in again ought do the trick pretty quick. Plus, he's still standing only a few feet from the edge. You charge in at him and strike your sword vertically at his face. He parries as you knew he would, and now you prepare to push his 2 foot little keister back into the pit. + + + + + + + + +The problem with this strategy is that it is predictable. The grippli knew what you were doing as soon as you began the charge. It hopes well out of the way and launches a charge of his own. He cannot match your strength (which is saying a lot coming from you) but he is so damn fast that you can't react to his moves in time to avoid getting stabbed. This persists for a while until finally you drop to the ground looking like one of Freddie Kruger's victims. With a sense of pride, the 2 foot little froggie bastard walks off back to camp no doubt to brag to his friends what he just accomplished. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You need to dispatch with the three grippli keeping watch but you cannot do that in the camp or you will almost certainly get attention. Therefore, your only real option is to lure them out and eliminate them somehow while they're away from camp. Even if you do lure them away from their camp though, three grippli are more than a match for you so you are going to have to construct a trap of some sort. You remember seeing a small drop off in the middle of the path you just came down and that gives you an idea. + + + + +You take about a dozen of your arrows and plant them firmly in the ground (arrowhead up) at the bottom of the hole you encountered along the path. You only lightly cover it with what little large leaves and vines you can find, then cover this foliage completely with sand and small rocks (enough to cover the vegetation but not enough to make it fall into the hole). Your hope is that you will be able to lure your three grippli out here away from the camp and then fall in on top of your arrows. The only thing left to do is figure out how you are going to lure them away from the camp without them alerting the camp as well. + + +You decide to mimic the sounds of the small prairie dog like creatures out here and toss small pebbles around the corner where they would see them. You seem to have their attention as they are too bored to really entertain themselves with anything else. Unfortunately, the prairie dog gag isn't enough to make them come so next you imitate the sound of a ewe while making loud pawing noises at the ground. For whatever reason, this one gets their attention and they start approaching quietly with their weapons drawn. + + + +You continue making animals noises but move back slowly at the same time. At point for them is a hunter brandishing a bow. The other two apparently believe in the sword. Maybe that's not as atypical for a grippli as you thought. You are careful to remain unseen but back up slowly and continue leading them forth with animal noises. Eventually the game is up as the hunter seems to get suspicous and notices you are there. You turn and run using the indentations in the rockwall to your right to help protect you from arrow fire. You take your position behind a rock on the other side of the trap and to your glee they are running straight for it. + + +YES! The sound of your cover giving way under their weight is music to your ears, as are the ribbits of pain emitted shortly thereafter. You surmise they are dead until one of them jumps out of the pit with only a leg wound. He pulls out his sword and glares at you. You feel like facing him like this, it would be an even match. Still, you would much prefer some kind of advantage whereever you can get it. You draw your sword and begin to think carefully about how this is going to go down. + + + + + +> Toss Dirt In His Eyes, Then Attack + +There is no shortage of dry dirt and rock all around you and as an amphibian you reason he's probably not to terribly accostomed to that type of thing. Given his 2 foot stature, you wait for him to make a move then kick dirt in his face. You reasoned correctly. The frog's large eyes close down firmly and he is clearly unable to handle himself. You almost feel sorry for employing such a cheap trick on the little guy. Almost. + + +With him unable to see and barely able to compose himself, the battle ends pretty quickly. You return to the edge of the pit and shoot a couple more arrows into your punctured prey for good measure as you don't want any more unexpected surprises to arise when you go in for the capture. You inch your way back to camp under the midnight moon and make sure to scope the place out anew before making your move. As you had hoped, the nightwatchmen didn't rouse anyone before they left. You still don't know about the treetops, but the coast is as clear as its gonna get. + + +You creep through camp where it is darkest and make your way to the captain's tent. You carefully open the canopy and move inside. As you had hoped, the captain is still asleep. You take care to knock him out over the head with a block shaped wooden figurine you find in his tent, then carry him over your shoulder and out of the camp. Without the three nightwatchmen, it is easy to carry the unconcious 2 ft. lightweight out of camp and out to a safe location. It takes several hours before he awakes, but when he does you already have his froggie hands and feet bound with cloth torn from his own outfit. + + + +> Time To Talk To The Froggie +To be honest, you aren't entirely sure which one of you two is more afraid... him or you. The grippli struggles in his bindings and begins to make noise which you are quick to silence. You raise your sword in warning and he begins to quiet down. Quite frankly, you are amazed that you are actually doing this. You've never been in a position like this before, doing something like this. You've always been an underappreciated swineherd your whole life. You are definitely not used to this sort of thing but you sure as hell don't want your prisoner to realize that. + + +"The Craxil isn't something you can easily kill. It has united the beastmen in this region of the mountains and aims to provide for its people" the captain starts. + + +"And what exactly is that suppose to mean" you demand. + + +"The humans have driven us beastmen into the barren land of the mountainrange and taken the fertile, soft ground for themselves. The Craxil wants for us to have good ground. Human ground. The Craxil has been organizing us for quite some time now and it is going to help us take what we deserve." + + +"What manner of creature is this Craxil anyway?" you ask, knowing you'll have to face him eventually. + + +"We don't know, none of us do. We never see the Craxil, its sends its orders with the riders." + + +"The riders?" + + +"Yes. They used to be humans but... well... not anymore really." + + +"You mean he's raising them as undead?!?" + + +"No, no, the Craxil would never resort to such deplorable practices. The Craxil breaks their minds with a ritual that takes days. When the Craxil finishes, they become thralls." + + +You are truly frightened by this last comment. It is common knowledge that mind flayers can dominate the minds of others, but they are able to do so instantly. They don't require a ritual that takes several days to accomplish. Brandolf did say the Craxil was a completely different creature than anyone has encountered before. + + +"Where can I find the Craxil?" you demand. + + +"The Craxil resides in an underground cavern, accessed from the base of a large canyon up north. The most direct route is Redridge Pass though I doubt you'll even get there alive. You'll know you are getting close when all the rocks and dirt are red and the cactii become more numerous." + + +You wanted to ask him more questions, but it seems that his comrades have already noticed his absence and begun looking for him. You don't see any other choice than to kill him, hide the body, and head north. But hey, at least you got some valuable information including some general directions. + + + +> Moving North +You ponder what the grippli captain said as you continue on your northward journey. You haven't seen any cactii yet so you surmise you still have a long way to go. But what other dangers await you? So far you've encountered humunculi, undead, grippli, and even a beholder. More amazing is that your sorry swineherding ass has survived this far. Still, you have to wonder just how many different types of creatures there are under the Craxil's command and what this Craxil even looks like. + + + +Your musings are cut short when your path is suddenly blocked by a very large wolf. Its eyes glow red and it snarls with both anger and malice evident. This wolf is no ordinary wolf. It is huge and it looks like its possessed or something. You draw your sword preparing to defend yourself but it doesn't attack, it simply stands there staring at you. You attempt to move to the side and it follows as if to block your path. You move to the other side and it follows again. You take a step back and it follows with a step forward. You aren't sure you even want to know what it will do if you take a step forward, and for once you aren't crazy enough to find out. + + +Suddenly, the creature does something you did not expect. It speaks. + + +"Tell me human, do you serve the Craxil?". + + +You are tempted to lie and say yes but then how do you know that is the answer it wants to hear? Maybe it serves the Craxil or maybe it is its enemy. Either way, it looks like its going to kill you if you don't share its loyalties so you are going to have to decide what to say. + + + +> Yes + +You decide to lie and tell the large creature that you are in fact a rider for the Craxil in hopes that it will calm it down a bit. Quite the opposite. It seems this wolf is infuriated by the Craxil and the recent beastmen influence in the region. You try to go back on your word and tell it the truth but its too late. The massive wolf jumps on you, knocking you on the ground. It goes immediately for your throat. You spend the last moments of your life in a state of sheer terror. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You ponder what the grippli captain said as you continue on your northward journey. You haven't seen any cactii yet so you surmise you still have a long way to go. But what other dangers await you? So far you've encountered humunculi, undead, grippli, and even a beholder. More amazing is that your sorry swineherding ass has survived this far. Still, you have to wonder just how many different types of creatures there are under the Craxil's command and what this Craxil even looks like. + + + +Your musings are cut short when your path is suddenly blocked by a very large wolf. Its eyes glow red and it snarls with both anger and malice evident. This wolf is no ordinary wolf. It is huge and it looks like its possessed or something. You draw your sword preparing to defend yourself but it doesn't attack, it simply stands there staring at you. You attempt to move to the side and it follows as if to block your path. You move to the other side and it follows again. You take a step back and it follows with a step forward. You aren't sure you even want to know what it will do if you take a step forward, and for once you aren't crazy enough to find out. + + +Suddenly, the creature does something you did not expect. It speaks. + + +"Tell me human, do you serve the Craxil?". + + +You are tempted to lie and say yes but then how do you know that is the answer it wants to hear? Maybe it serves the Craxil or maybe it is its enemy. Either way, it looks like its going to kill you if you don't share its loyalties so you are going to have to decide what to say. + + + +> No +Honesty always was the best policy. You tell the wolf you are on a quest to kill the Craxil then raise your sword defensively expecting him to attack. Instead, the creature looks you over and accuses you of dishonesty. + + +"You honestly expect me to believe a scrawny kid like you was chosen to slay a being like the Craxil?" + + +"I made it this far didn't I?" + + + +The wolf looks taken back by this comment and you tell him all about the plan to use poison, how you outmaneuvered the humunculi, the beholder's riddle... everything. The creature takes a few steps closer to you and his bright red eyes are bearing deeply into your own. You've never been more scared in your life than you are right now, but it seems the wolf has decided you are telling the truth. + + +"There is truth in your eyes, a certainty I haven't seen in quite some time. Lots of fear though. Odds are you are going to fail but hey, its your life to waste right?" + + +"Well thank you for trusting my allegiance then. Why don't you tell me what the heck you are, starting with how the hell you can talk." + + +The wolf turns back around, front legs spread in an aggressive position. "I never said I trusted you, you are going to have to prove yourself." + + +"But..." + + +"You claim you came from the village. What is this village called?" + + + +> Jacqueshit + +WRONG! + + +The massive wolf knocks you to the ground and rips your throat out with its teeth. A terrible way to die to be sure. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Honesty always was the best policy. You tell the wolf you are on a quest to kill the Craxil then raise your sword defensively expecting him to attack. Instead, the creature looks you over and accuses you of dishonesty. + + +"You honestly expect me to believe a scrawny kid like you was chosen to slay a being like the Craxil?" + + +"I made it this far didn't I?" + + + +The wolf looks taken back by this comment and you tell him all about the plan to use poison, how you outmaneuvered the humunculi, the beholder's riddle... everything. The creature takes a few steps closer to you and his bright red eyes are bearing deeply into your own. You've never been more scared in your life than you are right now, but it seems the wolf has decided you are telling the truth. + + +"There is truth in your eyes, a certainty I haven't seen in quite some time. Lots of fear though. Odds are you are going to fail but hey, its your life to waste right?" + + +"Well thank you for trusting my allegiance then. Why don't you tell me what the heck you are, starting with how the hell you can talk." + + +The wolf turns back around, front legs spread in an aggressive position. "I never said I trusted you, you are going to have to prove yourself." + + +"But..." + + +"You claim you came from the village. What is this village called?" + + + +> Jackcrappe + +WRONG! + + +The giant wolf leaps upon you and tears your throat out with its teeth. A horrible way to die to be sure. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Honesty always was the best policy. You tell the wolf you are on a quest to kill the Craxil then raise your sword defensively expecting him to attack. Instead, the creature looks you over and accuses you of dishonesty. + + +"You honestly expect me to believe a scrawny kid like you was chosen to slay a being like the Craxil?" + + +"I made it this far didn't I?" + + + +The wolf looks taken back by this comment and you tell him all about the plan to use poison, how you outmaneuvered the humunculi, the beholder's riddle... everything. The creature takes a few steps closer to you and his bright red eyes are bearing deeply into your own. You've never been more scared in your life than you are right now, but it seems the wolf has decided you are telling the truth. + + +"There is truth in your eyes, a certainty I haven't seen in quite some time. Lots of fear though. Odds are you are going to fail but hey, its your life to waste right?" + + +"Well thank you for trusting my allegiance then. Why don't you tell me what the heck you are, starting with how the hell you can talk." + + +The wolf turns back around, front legs spread in an aggressive position. "I never said I trusted you, you are going to have to prove yourself." + + +"But..." + + +"You claim you came from the village. What is this village called?" + + + +> Jacquescrappe +"Correct" the wolf admits, "but even the Craxil and the surrounding beastmen know that much. It doesn't prove anything." + + +"Then ask me something else" you demand. + + +"Fine then, I shall!" + + +"What is the name of the wizard that came to Jacquescrappe?" + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Honesty always was the best policy. You tell the wolf you are on a quest to kill the Craxil then raise your sword defensively expecting him to attack. Instead, the creature looks you over and accuses you of dishonesty. + + +"You honestly expect me to believe a scrawny kid like you was chosen to slay a being like the Craxil?" + + +"I made it this far didn't I?" + + + +The wolf looks taken back by this comment and you tell him all about the plan to use poison, how you outmaneuvered the humunculi, the beholder's riddle... everything. The creature takes a few steps closer to you and his bright red eyes are bearing deeply into your own. You've never been more scared in your life than you are right now, but it seems the wolf has decided you are telling the truth. + + +"There is truth in your eyes, a certainty I haven't seen in quite some time. Lots of fear though. Odds are you are going to fail but hey, its your life to waste right?" + + +"Well thank you for trusting my allegiance then. Why don't you tell me what the heck you are, starting with how the hell you can talk." + + +The wolf turns back around, front legs spread in an aggressive position. "I never said I trusted you, you are going to have to prove yourself." + + +"But..." + + +"You claim you came from the village. What is this village called?" + + + +> Jaquescrappe + +WRONG! + + +The wolf jumps on you and tears your throat out with his teeth. A horrible way to die to be sure. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You ponder what the grippli captain said as you continue on your northward journey. You haven't seen any cactii yet so you surmise you still have a long way to go. But what other dangers await you? So far you've encountered humunculi, undead, grippli, and even a beholder. More amazing is that your sorry swineherding ass has survived this far. Still, you have to wonder just how many different types of creatures there are under the Craxil's command and what this Craxil even looks like. + + + +Your musings are cut short when your path is suddenly blocked by a very large wolf. Its eyes glow red and it snarls with both anger and malice evident. This wolf is no ordinary wolf. It is huge and it looks like its possessed or something. You draw your sword preparing to defend yourself but it doesn't attack, it simply stands there staring at you. You attempt to move to the side and it follows as if to block your path. You move to the other side and it follows again. You take a step back and it follows with a step forward. You aren't sure you even want to know what it will do if you take a step forward, and for once you aren't crazy enough to find out. + + +Suddenly, the creature does something you did not expect. It speaks. + + +"Tell me human, do you serve the Craxil?". + + +You are tempted to lie and say yes but then how do you know that is the answer it wants to hear? Maybe it serves the Craxil or maybe it is its enemy. Either way, it looks like its going to kill you if you don't share its loyalties so you are going to have to decide what to say. + + + +> What Is A Craxil? Is That A New Brand Of Butter Cracker? + +You attempt to lie to the giant wolf creature but despite your skill as sneakery you've always been a horrible liar. The dishonesty is not taken well and before you know it, the massive canine has you on the ground and is sinking his jaw into your throat. You spend the last moments of your life in sheer terror. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You need to dispatch with the three grippli keeping watch but you cannot do that in the camp or you will almost certainly get attention. Therefore, your only real option is to lure them out and eliminate them somehow while they're away from camp. Even if you do lure them away from their camp though, three grippli are more than a match for you so you are going to have to construct a trap of some sort. You remember seeing a small drop off in the middle of the path you just came down and that gives you an idea. + + + + +You take about a dozen of your arrows and plant them firmly in the ground (arrowhead up) at the bottom of the hole you encountered along the path. You only lightly cover it with what little large leaves and vines you can find, then cover this foliage completely with sand and small rocks (enough to cover the vegetation but not enough to make it fall into the hole). Your hope is that you will be able to lure your three grippli out here away from the camp and then fall in on top of your arrows. The only thing left to do is figure out how you are going to lure them away from the camp without them alerting the camp as well. + + +You decide to mimic the sounds of the small prairie dog like creatures out here and toss small pebbles around the corner where they would see them. You seem to have their attention as they are too bored to really entertain themselves with anything else. Unfortunately, the prairie dog gag isn't enough to make them come so next you imitate the sound of a ewe while making loud pawing noises at the ground. For whatever reason, this one gets their attention and they start approaching quietly with their weapons drawn. + + + +You continue making animals noises but move back slowly at the same time. At point for them is a hunter brandishing a bow. The other two apparently believe in the sword. Maybe that's not as atypical for a grippli as you thought. You are careful to remain unseen but back up slowly and continue leading them forth with animal noises. Eventually the game is up as the hunter seems to get suspicous and notices you are there. You turn and run using the indentations in the rockwall to your right to help protect you from arrow fire. You take your position behind a rock on the other side of the trap and to your glee they are running straight for it. + + +YES! The sound of your cover giving way under their weight is music to your ears, as are the ribbits of pain emitted shortly thereafter. You surmise they are dead until one of them jumps out of the pit with only a leg wound. He pulls out his sword and glares at you. You feel like facing him like this, it would be an even match. Still, you would much prefer some kind of advantage whereever you can get it. You draw your sword and begin to think carefully about how this is going to go down. + + + + + +> Don't Waste Time With Elaborate Trickery, Just Fight The Thing + +There is no longer any element of surprise so the time for elaborate tricks is over. You are simply going to have to face this thing one on one. At first things seem to go well. His 2 foot tall stature is no match for your strength (which is saying a lot coming from you) but he is fast as hell. Given that he's part frog he's hopping around behing you, above you, between your legs, all with the speed and reflexes of a frog. You've always wondered what made people consider these things to be so dangerous. + + + + + + +In the end, you've taken on more stab wounds than you can possibly handle and drop to the ground looking like one of Freddie Krougar's victims. The 2 foot little froggie bastard develops a new air of pride and marches back to camp, no doubt to brag to his friends about his new victory. But for you it is simply... + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The skeletal undead aren't exactly known for their climbing skills so you promptly head over to the steep rockface and set about climbing to a point beyond their reach. You are almost at the top when the skeletons reach the base. The attempt to climb but as you had hoped, they are substantially less successful than you. One of them responds to the situation by tossing his hand axe at you and you move your hand just in time to avoid it. You make sure it stays stuck in the rockface so it doesn't get to try again, then pull yourself up and over the top. + + +You are glad to be away from those damn things and now that you are at a slightly higher elevation along the mountainside, there's a good chance you won't be seeing them again. Just got to keep your cool and remember to be stealthy. You continue your journey in the same general direction but keep to this elevation for fear of encountering those undead creatures a second time. After a while, you begin to smell a rather curious smell up ahead. As you approach you discover a camp situated in what is probably the only forested ledge on this entire mountain range. You don't initially see anyone there, but you keep your distance and eventually see something hop down rather quickly from one of the trees and go behind another. You didn't get a good look at whatever it was and you are hoping they haven't seen you. + + + +Nightfall comes and now the occupants of the camp are coming into view. You never believed that at any time in your entire life you'd ever lay eyes on the creatures you are seeing. The grippli, a race of humanoid tree frogs standing at 2 feet tall, have organized this camp. There aren't more than a dozen tops, but grippli are known to be considerable fighters when they need to be and there is no way of knowing if there are more of them in the trees. + + +They often prefer to fight with poison darts, nets, and bows as they would prefer to keep their enemy at a distance but a few bear swords. You see one of them adorned in considerably nicer garb than the others and commands quite a presence from them so you surmise it must be their leader. + + +Suddenly it occurs to you. These creatures are in Craxil territory so odds are they work for the Craxil. That means that instead of wandering the mountain range aimlessly you ought try and extract information regarding the Craxil's whereabouts from the grippli. Ideally, you could get your hands on their leader but that is going to be easier said than done. There may not be many grippli present, but each one is a challenge in his own right and you have no way of knowing how many may be in the trees to see what you do. + + +Eventually, the captain retires to his tent as do many others. Three grippli remain near the campfire out front and again, you have no way of knowing what is still in the trees. The captain's tent is near the back. You surmise you could go around, giving the camp a wide berth, and sneak into the captain's tent. However, you feel like you should at least do SOMETHING about the three on watch or you may be the one getting captured instead. This is quite a dilly of a pickle indeed. + + + +> Try To Sneak Up On The Grippli Near The Campfire And Cut Them All Down Before They Can React +The way you see it, you don't really have a choice. You can't risk going after the captain while these three grippli are here standing guard like this. You'll be caught. You have your doubts about whether you'd be able to lure the nightwatchmen away from their posts so you are going to just have to be direct about it. There may be three of them, but once again you have the element of surprise and you don't intend to give them any time whatsoever to react to the onslaught you intend to bring. You creep around into the center of the camp and approach the nightwatchmen from behind. + + + + +As you approach, the light from the campfire makes your shadow apparent and the other grippli take notice. After all your years of capture the flag success you'd think you'd know by know that it is much easier to creep up on someone in the dark than near a campfire. Rookie mistake. The grippli nightwatchmen rouse from their posts and draw their weapons. As the three leap forth to attack you, grippli in the trees fire poison darts into your back and others are roused from their tents. I don't think I need to tell you that this is... + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The man you just dismissed earlier is standing at the front of the pack. You knew there was something off about that earlier request and seeing this display only reaffirms that you were right to avoid them in the first place. They are all looking down at the ground but now he is looking up directly at you with a creepy smile on his face. + + +"So, you saw through our little ambush scheme did you?" he sneers. + + +"What is it you want?" + + +"Quite simply we're aware of your quest to reach the Craxil and we are not prepared to allow it." + + + +At this point their heads begin to twist and contort and their skulls appear to come out of their mouths. It is almost as though they were never human at all but part of some kind of disguise. In fact, it is now readily apparent that this is the case. You are now looking at five maniacal looking skeletons armed with an assortment of swords and hand axes. They seem like they are eager to get things started and in fact, they are all rushing down the beaten path towards you. You turn the other way until you can decide what to do and despite what you've been told about the undead, you discover they are perfectly capable of keeping pace with you. + + +You know you aren't going to be able to take on five of these guys and they seem intent on sticking together during the pursuit. To your left is another cave you've chosen to pass up on your journey, figuring it was just another humunculus den. Perhaps, if you are lucky, you can lose your pursuers in there. Alternatively, you could always try climbing the steep rockface off to your right. You've had plenty of climbing experience as a kid and somehow you hope these skeletons won't be able to follow you. You could also turn around and start unloading arrows into your enemies. They may be keeping pace with you, but you still have a heck of a head start and you'd wager you could release quite a few before they catch up to you. It's up to you... + + + +> Rain Arrows Upon Them +Why run when you can fight? The arrows worked for you before and you believe you can get off quite a few shots before they start catching up to you. To wait until you reach the top of a local hill then spin around and draw your bow. The five skeleton creatures are still running towards you in a tight grouping. You let fly the first arrow and it hits the collarbone of one of the back skeletons. You release another and it hits the leg of another skeleton. In fact you score a lot of hits, even putting one through the skull of the lead skeleton. There's just one problem... they aren't slowing down! + + +Maybe you've forgotten, but arrows and bladed weapons are only effective against enemies that still have flesh and blood to let. These skeletons are not slowing down or taking much damage as a result of your arrows. In fact, it would require a more blunt weapon to kill. As they start drawing in close you turn and continue running. You've pretty much lost your head start and now they are hot on your heels. This continues for a while until one of your skeletal pursuers gets it in his mind to throw its hand axe into your back. It only goes downhill from there for you. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are standing on a narrow plateau in the rugged mountainous region beyond your village. Unlike the brownish/tan rockface you see near your village, the rocks in this region are more redish and vibrant looking. You see a path leading forward and you decide to follow it. On the plus side, you haven't encountered any hostile creatures so far. You walk for at least a few miles and it appears to extend beyond your sight. You curse at your luck and begin to slump into depression when you realize you don't even know where to fnd this Craxil thing in the first place. You decide to build a campfire for the night, think things over, and gather some rest. As you are doing so, a strange man lumbers out from behind a large rock and begins to beg you for help. + + +"Please, it won't take long. My caravan was beset upon by foul creatures and I fear for my families safety. You must help me!" + + +You pause. It seems odd that a human would be up here in such a hostile region, let alone a caravan. But this is definitely the face of a human and he shows no signs of hostility. + + +"Why are you up here anyway"? you ask. "The Craxil and his followers will kill anyone that wanders into their mountainous territory." + + +"We got lost trying to find our way to Jacquescrappe village, perhaps you've heard of it"? + + +"Yeah... I just came from there... but I don't think you want to go back that way, you won't get far." + + +"Look, I don't wish to be rude, but my family is in danger and I need your help NOW!" + + +At this point, the man turns and runs down the path. You call out to him to stop but he keeps going. You aren't sure if you would be of much help to him in battle, but you aren't sure how you would feel about abandoning him like that either. Time to decide... + + + +> Help Him, What Kind Of Adventurer Are You? +You decide to help the man. What kind of adventurer would you be to deny a father the aid he needs to save his family from the Craxil's minions? The royal military may have abandoned Jacquescrappe because it was remote and of no strategic value but dammit if you are going to end up just like them. However, something about this is starting to feel weird. Why would there be a human caravan up here in the Craxil's lands and why do you have this strange feeling in the pit of your stomach. + + +Just as you are having these thoughts, an owl looks at you from atop a dead tree and just looks at you with intent. You've never been able to communicate to animals like the druids do, but somehow you just know this thing is telling you to turn back. You stop for a minute, then strike yourself and shake it off. Since when did you become a druid and take advice from animals? Aside from your pigs "Oinky" and "Snout" you've never really connected with any animals anyway. Besides, your gut hasn't helped you win any gambling tournaments so why should you trust it now? You're probably just afraid and subconciously looking for a way to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Helping the man is the right thing to do, you're sure of it... + + +Right? + + + +> Indeed, What Kind Of Hero Abandons His Fellow Man When His Family Is At Stake? +You arrive in a clearing and the man who pleaded with you earlier has just stopped in his tracks. + + +"So where's the caravan?" you inquire, expecting some sort of explanation for this sudden drop in urgency. + + +Silence + + +.............. + + +At this point you are quickly surrounded by other men who are equally silent. The feeling in the pit of your stomach has just gotten worse and you realize that you've been had. + + +"There is no caravan is there." + + +..... + + +At this point the man who led you here turns to face you. The head suddenly begins to twitch and distort and the head of a skeleton emerges from the mouth as if pushing through a mask. You back up and realize the four other men around you are doing the same. They rush you from all sides and you are quickly overwhelmed. You made a grave mistake in not trusting your instincts earlier, they exist in us for a reason. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to help the man. What kind of adventurer would you be to deny a father the aid he needs to save his family from the Craxil's minions? The royal military may have abandoned Jacquescrappe because it was remote and of no strategic value but dammit if you are going to end up just like them. However, something about this is starting to feel weird. Why would there be a human caravan up here in the Craxil's lands and why do you have this strange feeling in the pit of your stomach. + + +Just as you are having these thoughts, an owl looks at you from atop a dead tree and just looks at you with intent. You've never been able to communicate to animals like the druids do, but somehow you just know this thing is telling you to turn back. You stop for a minute, then strike yourself and shake it off. Since when did you become a druid and take advice from animals? Aside from your pigs "Oinky" and "Snout" you've never really connected with any animals anyway. Besides, your gut hasn't helped you win any gambling tournaments so why should you trust it now? You're probably just afraid and subconciously looking for a way to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Helping the man is the right thing to do, you're sure of it... + + +Right? + + + +> No, Something About This Whole Situation Is Fishy. I'm Turning Back. +You don't like any part of where this is going and decide that the best thing to do is to turn back. After all, no humans from Jacquescrappe have ever made it this far into the Craxil's territory so why should you believe there is a human caravan out this far? None of this makes any sense and you think to yourself that these beastmen are not above using your compassion against you as a weakness. It is low, but well within the bounds of what these things might do. + + +You come to a stop, and look up at the owl. He gives you a warm, approving look then flies away. "What a strange creature" you think to yourself. You wait for the man to disappear from view, then wait a while longer for good measure, then continue forward on foot as you had originally planned. Frankly, you're just glad to be away from the suspicious man. + + + + + + +As you continue on your journey you wonder if you made the right choice. I mean, what if the man's family really was in danger and you could have made a difference? Did you make the right call? You console yourself by reminding yourself of the importance of your own mission and how you cannot afford to take unnecessary chances. Just as you are having these thoughts, you discover the man who approached you earlier as well as four others standing in the middle of the beaten path with their heads down. It looks like you aren't done with them after all... + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You run down the passageway that you were previously unable to get to while the three humunculi were at the campfire. Unfortunately, the humunculi have chosen the same path. You aren't sure if it is because they saw you or because of bad luck, but they are not far behind you now. You reach another chamber and find a large, demonic looking creature blocking your path. Before you can even think about how to describe this thing you feel the humunculi grab you from behind and pull you to the ground. They are about to stomp you to death when the demonic looking creature disintigrates them on the spot. + + +"Nobody takes my prey in my domain. Tell me little thing, what are you here to do?" + + +This thing looks like a large floating eye with multiple smaller eyes attached atop its head. You realize this thing is a beholder and soon you find yourself paralyzed in its gaze. That's what you get for staring into its eye I guess. + + +"Answer me puny one, why are you here in my domain?" + + +You are too terrified to answer, but this creature appears to grow irritated by your silence so you muster all the courage you've got and speak up + + +"I'm here to slay the Craxil" you proclaim, terrified of how this creature will respond to such a bold statement. + + +"HA! Amusing little one, someone of your strength doesn't have what it takes but it would entertain me to see how you die in the Craxil's mountains. Answer this riddle correctly, and I will permit you to continue through to the other side of my domain. Answer incorrectly, and you will share the same fate as your pursuers. Are you ready?" + + +"As ready as I'll ever be" you squeak. + + +"Very well!" it bellows, clearly enjoying every bit of this. "I am a vast canyon that spans beyond sight. I am without end and have been a part of every man whenever there is trouble. What am I?" + + + + +> The Thirst For Knowledge +"Wrong" it proclaims. "While the thirst for knowledge may be limitless in your kind, it is not your primary concern in times of trouble now is it?" + + +"Well... erm..." + + +You don't have time to retort. It fires a beam of negative energy into your chest and you disintigrate on the spot, bringing your quest to an abrupt end. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You run down the passageway that you were previously unable to get to while the three humunculi were at the campfire. Unfortunately, the humunculi have chosen the same path. You aren't sure if it is because they saw you or because of bad luck, but they are not far behind you now. You reach another chamber and find a large, demonic looking creature blocking your path. Before you can even think about how to describe this thing you feel the humunculi grab you from behind and pull you to the ground. They are about to stomp you to death when the demonic looking creature disintigrates them on the spot. + + +"Nobody takes my prey in my domain. Tell me little thing, what are you here to do?" + + +This thing looks like a large floating eye with multiple smaller eyes attached atop its head. You realize this thing is a beholder and soon you find yourself paralyzed in its gaze. That's what you get for staring into its eye I guess. + + +"Answer me puny one, why are you here in my domain?" + + +You are too terrified to answer, but this creature appears to grow irritated by your silence so you muster all the courage you've got and speak up + + +"I'm here to slay the Craxil" you proclaim, terrified of how this creature will respond to such a bold statement. + + +"HA! Amusing little one, someone of your strength doesn't have what it takes but it would entertain me to see how you die in the Craxil's mountains. Answer this riddle correctly, and I will permit you to continue through to the other side of my domain. Answer incorrectly, and you will share the same fate as your pursuers. Are you ready?" + + +"As ready as I'll ever be" you squeak. + + +"Very well!" it bellows, clearly enjoying every bit of this. "I am a vast canyon that spans beyond sight. I am without end and have been a part of every man whenever there is trouble. What am I?" + + + + +> The Limitless Potential Of Mankind +"Wrong" it bellows, laughing under its breath. "Your kind's potential is not as limitless as you like to think it is. And besides, your limitless potential isn't exactly showing through in this time of trouble now is it little one?" + + +"Well... erm... " + + +You wanted to say something about how desperate situations propel human potential to new heights but the blast of negative energy he shoots at you doesn't give you a chance. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You run down the passageway that you were previously unable to get to while the three humunculi were at the campfire. Unfortunately, the humunculi have chosen the same path. You aren't sure if it is because they saw you or because of bad luck, but they are not far behind you now. You reach another chamber and find a large, demonic looking creature blocking your path. Before you can even think about how to describe this thing you feel the humunculi grab you from behind and pull you to the ground. They are about to stomp you to death when the demonic looking creature disintigrates them on the spot. + + +"Nobody takes my prey in my domain. Tell me little thing, what are you here to do?" + + +This thing looks like a large floating eye with multiple smaller eyes attached atop its head. You realize this thing is a beholder and soon you find yourself paralyzed in its gaze. That's what you get for staring into its eye I guess. + + +"Answer me puny one, why are you here in my domain?" + + +You are too terrified to answer, but this creature appears to grow irritated by your silence so you muster all the courage you've got and speak up + + +"I'm here to slay the Craxil" you proclaim, terrified of how this creature will respond to such a bold statement. + + +"HA! Amusing little one, someone of your strength doesn't have what it takes but it would entertain me to see how you die in the Craxil's mountains. Answer this riddle correctly, and I will permit you to continue through to the other side of my domain. Answer incorrectly, and you will share the same fate as your pursuers. Are you ready?" + + +"As ready as I'll ever be" you squeak. + + +"Very well!" it bellows, clearly enjoying every bit of this. "I am a vast canyon that spans beyond sight. I am without end and have been a part of every man whenever there is trouble. What am I?" + + + + +> A Bar Wench? +The creature and you both get a hearty laugh out of this response but you know that you are wrong and you know you are going to die soon. Indeed, the creature hits you with the same negative energy it used on the humunculi and you disapate into the air. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Instinctively, you know you are going to be discovered if he gets any closer. You aren't sure how you are going to go about escaping the other two, but you are gonna have to kill this one before it gets any closer. Without warning you lunge forth and put your short sword through the creature's belly. You were actually aiming for the heart and the creature moved so I guess that says something about your swordsman skill. Nonetheless, it proved effective at killing the creature. You waste no time at all in bolting back up to the original chamber with the campsite and the other two will round the corner any second. You need to make a decision FAST! + + +The large pathway (on the right wall as you enter) is now inexplicably barred but you can still run back outside the cave or down the passageway that was previously inaccessable due to their presence. The adrenaline floods your body and your survival instincts take over. You immediately decide to... + + +> Run Outside The Cave + +You run outside the cave and around the corner. You are back on the plateau overlooking the village. Your heart is beating fast as hell and you are clutching your sword so tightly you will probably have blisters. Fortunately for you, the humunculi have chosen to run down the path behind their campsite. You wait outside the cave for a few hours and still they haven't returned from the passageway. Perhaps they have chosen to travel further in to pursue you? + + +You return to the cave's interior and are standing at the campfire. The large passageway on the right side of the chamber is still blocked. You peer down the passageway in front of you, the one the humunculi chose to go down and you wonder what lies beyond its depths. However, as you look left you remember there is still an as yet unexplored passageway down in the cavern where the humunculi nearly overwhelmed you. You aren't going to find the Craxil by standing around here so you are going to have to decide where you want to go from here. + + + +> Follow The Path Behind The Campfire, Where The Two Humunculi Went +You chose to take the passageway behind the campfire. If these creatures are protecting the Craxil, or at least serving him in some sense, it would makes sense they would head in this direction. You get the strong scent of burning animals or something like that and what you see next is COMPLETELY unexpected. Instead of seeing the two humunculi that ran down this passageway earlier, you are standing directly in front of some kind of hovering demon whose gaze is fixed directly upon you! + + +This thing looks like a large floating eye with multiple smaller eyes attached atop its head. You realize this thing is a beholder and soon you find yourself paralyzed in its gaze. That's what you get for staring into its eye I guess. + + +"Answer me puny one, why are you here in my domain?" + + +You are too terrified to answer, but this creature appears to grow irritated by your silence so you muster all the courage you've got and speak up + + +"I'm here to slay the Craxil" you proclaim, terrified of how this creature will respond to such a bold statement. + + +"HA! Amusing little one, someone of your strength doesn't have what it takes but it would entertain me to see how you die in the Craxil's mountains. Answer this riddle correctly, and I will permit you to continue through to the other side of my domain. Answer incorrectly, and you will share the same fate as your former pursuers. Are you ready?" + + +"Did he kill the humunculi?" you think to yourself... + + +"As ready as I'll ever be" you squeak. + + +"Very well!" it bellows, clearly enjoying every bit of this. "I am a vast canyon that spans beyond sight. I am without end and have been a part of every man whenever there is trouble. What am I?" + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +You run outside the cave and around the corner. You are back on the plateau overlooking the village. Your heart is beating fast as hell and you are clutching your sword so tightly you will probably have blisters. Fortunately for you, the humunculi have chosen to run down the path behind their campsite. You wait outside the cave for a few hours and still they haven't returned from the passageway. Perhaps they have chosen to travel further in to pursue you? + + +You return to the cave's interior and are standing at the campfire. The large passageway on the right side of the chamber is still blocked. You peer down the passageway in front of you, the one the humunculi chose to go down and you wonder what lies beyond its depths. However, as you look left you remember there is still an as yet unexplored passageway down in the cavern where the humunculi nearly overwhelmed you. You aren't going to find the Craxil by standing around here so you are going to have to decide where you want to go from here. + + + +> Go Down To The Cavern Where You First Used Your Bow And Try That Passageway + + + +Naturally, you are not going to go down the passageway that your pursuers went down, that's just stupid. You want to avoid unnecessary conflict after allso you can increase your chances of reaching the Craxil. This passageway leads you out to a large plateau. To the right, you can see another several clusters of cave networks populated by humunculi. To the left you see a step drop off that would land you in the forest the hunters of your village like to use. In front of you, and in the distance, is a curious looking camp. You see a couple different campfires and at least two dozen tee-pee style tents down over there. You can't make out who the inhabitants are though, at least not from here. Odds are they aren't friendly though. This is Craxil territory after all. Of course, the humunculi in the multiple cave clusters over there aren't friendly either so what does it matter? You still have no leads as to where to find the Craxil but you need to make a decision as to where to go. +> Investigate The Camp + +You cannot contain your curiosity about this camp but you know you should keep your distance and be careful. They are likely hostile after all. You remember that you are out in the open now so the sun will remove any advantage that the shadows had given you in the caves. You decide to wait until nightfall, then slink in closer to the camp. There is minimal rock cover but you manage to find a decent place from which to observe their camp. They are goblins, armed with schimitars and polearms which you assume must be the work of the Craxil. + + +Even outside the Craxil's domain, goblins are known for their hostility towards humans so approaching them would be stupid. However, unlike the powerful humunculi you've had to deal with so far, goblins are a weaker enemy you feel confident you could stand against (provided you don't get yourself overwhelmed). There are about 30 of the foul creatures wandering about the camp, but the one that catches your interest is the shaman. Decked out in fancy garb and occupying a large tent in the center of the camp, it is clear this one is the leader. It occurs to you that if they are working for the Craxil then this one might be able to provide you with some much needed leads as to where you can find him. + + + + + + + + + +You are confident in your ability to handle a single goblin or perhaps even two if your life depended on it but certainly not the entire camp. You're just a sneaky swineherd after all. You wait until midnight, when most of the goblins have retired to sleep. There are still a handful of night watchmen goblins though, and they will need to be dealt with before you can hope to reach the shaman's tent. You also shudder at the thought of the shaman unleashing horrid magicks upon you. Once again, you will have to use the element of surprise to make up for your lack of fighting experience but then... as a sneaky bastard that is your specialty. + + +The first concern is the single goblin standing at the closest entrance to the camp. He is holding a polearm and needs to be removed before you can get into the camp. As stated before, you are confident you can take him, but you need to be careful not to wake the rest of the camp in the process. One idea is to sneak up on him and stab him through the back with your sword before he can react. Another idea is to try and hit him with an arrow from a distance, then move on to the next target. Either way, he needs to be removed. + + + +> Sneak Up And Stab Him + +You might be able to hit the broadside of a barn, but your aim is not sufficient for anything more than a general area. You don't want to alert the goblin to your presence so you are just going to have to deal with him the old fashioned way. Under cover of midnight you slink around to the edge of the camp and work your way along the side until you are close. Despite your apparent lack of skill in fighting and archery you are an absolute master at sneakery. But enough of such destracting thoughts. As the goblin turns away you leap forth, cup his mouth with your left hand, and stab him through the back. You pull the body away from the camp so none of the other goblins will see it. + + +Fortunately for you, none of the goblins seem stirred in the least. You removed that problem without attracting attention. Even better, another one of the nightwatchmen goblins has come back to the same post trying to figure out why his comrade is no longer at his post. This affords you the opportunity to repeat the procedure and return once again. The way to the central tent still has a few more problems in store for you. Single goblins patrol the area and there is always at least one patrol goblin within sight range of that tent. Also, the tent itself has its own nightwatchman who is evidently dedicated to the shaman. At the very least, you need to kill one of the patrolling goblins to create an opening and the sentry guarding the tent. With this done, you have a chance at abducting and interrogating the shaman for some much needed information on the Craxil. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +You have some ideas on the patrolling goblin. You could attempt to construct a simple foothold trap out of vine and add some barbs from the camp to dig into his foot. Alternatively, you could wait until he rounds his usual tree and cut him down before the next patrolling goblin comes along. +> Construct A Barbed Foothold Trap And Place It In The Patrol's Path +You can't get caught if you aren't around when he trips the trap right? Well, I suppose you could be, but whatever. You spend a half hour or so of your time outside the camp constructing this trap. The knot will tighten the loop around the goblins leg when I pull on the vine so I just need to get back into position and lay the trap. As predicted, the goblin came back around with his usual path but this time he was a little bit to far to the right. You pull the loop a bit closer and wait until the next one comes, but he is a bit too far to the left. After some frustrating trial and error, a patrolling goblin finally steps foot in your loop and you tighten it abruptly around his foot. At the same time, you quickly drag him towards your hiding spot so you can silence him. Goblins are particularly light, especially when they are not wearing armor, so you are able to do it fairly easily. The barbs dug into his foot so deep they nearly too it off. You silence him with your hand then break his neck. For a moment, you are amazed at what you have learned to do given you're just a swine herd, but then again... survival makes us capable of many things doesn't it. + + +The next patrolling goblin discovers the sword the last patrolling goblin dropped when you got him. You are concerned that he's about to raise the alarm but he just mutters "Akt Khazzat nighmam noriet maln" or something along those lines and walks off. You have no idea what he said, but from his tone of voice, you think he thinks the other watchman is skipping out on his duties. Shit, does that mean the shaman will be able to speak English? Surely he will, he's a shaman after all. He better dammit. + + +You wait for the opening to come again, then quickly maneuver into position to stab the tent's sentry before the next patrol goblin comes around. You peek inside to see the shaman sleeping (lucky you) and drag the sentry's body inside where it won't be detected. You've reached the shaman, and he's still asleep, but you can't very well interrogate him here. You pick up a candlestick from the nearby table and as he's coming to you clock him over the head with it. You check for a pulse to see if he's dead or unconcious and thankfully, he's just knocked out. You gag him and bind his arms behind his back because he won't be able to cast spells without his tounge and hand movements. You use the same patrol opening to escape the camp and return to a spot distant from the camp. You rouse the shaman to wake up and realize you are probably more scared than he will be. + + + +> Time For An Interrogation +Fortunately for you, he does know English as is readily apparent by the curses he chooses to expel regarding your parents. You glare at him and ask him about the Craxil but he just squeals with laughter as if finding it difficult to take you seriously. You ask him again and remove the gag so he can answer but then quickly put it back in when he starts trying to chant a spell of some sort. You punch him and because you're such a wimp it ends up hurting your wrist more than it hurt his face, which only adds to his laughter. You realize this isn't working as planned so you take him to where you stashed the bodies of the two nightwatchmen you killed at the entrance and draw your sword. This seems to make a bigger impression upon him. You take him back further away from the camp and inquire again. This time he seems more receptive. + + +"The Craxil isn't something you can reason with or just strike down, he's an inspiration to the beastmen of this region. A unifying force." + + +The shaman goes on to explain that the Craxil has been gathering his strength here for longer than the villagers realized and that the weekly raids for food were little compared to what is being organized. + + +"The Craxil isn't content to leave his children here in the mountains while the humans enjoy the soft lands." The shaman explains. "He isn't after world domination or anything, but he wants to take a few choice pieces of territory from the humans down below." + + +"What manner of creature is he?" you demand, keeping your sword out as a reminder of your unspoken threat. + + +"None of us goblins really knows for sure. The riders deliver his orders to us and they are the only ones who have ever seen him." + + +"The riders?" + + +"Yes, they were once human but umm... not anymore." + + +"You mean they were raised as undead!?!?!" + + +"Heavens no, the Craxil doesn't resort to such disgusting practices. Rather, they become his thralls after a lengthy, mind breaking ritual. They do his bidding now." + + +You pause at that comment. You've heard of mind flayers dominating people's minds like this but they've always been able to do so instantly, without the need for such rituals and practices. Moreover, Brandolf insisted that the Craxil is a being unlike any that has been seen in this world so far. You decide to change the topic to discuss the Craxil's location. + + +"Where is the Craxil located?" you ask. + + +"Pff. Do you even know where YOU are located right now" the shaman says with a chuckle. "A bit far from home and looking a little lost out here aren't we?" + + +You shove your sword closer to his throat and he ceases to taunt you. + + +"The Craxil resides in an underground cavern that is accessed from a canyon north of here. When the rocks cease to be this familiar brown and start looking red then you are getting closer. Even closer still when you begin to see the cactii. The most direct route is the Redrange pass, though that has some dangers of its own." + + +You are about to inquire further about what else lies in store for you, but you hear the sounds of goblins in the distance and you are worried the shaman may start making noise for them. You can't afford to be swarmed by goblins right now so you cut his throat and retreat a little until they return to camp. Fortunately, the path he spoke of can be reached by simply going around the goblin camp from a safe distance and continuing in that direction. You still have about a full days journey before you get to this "Redrange Pass" and even then you are only at the start of the shaman's directions. But hey, at least you know where you are going now and have the knowledge that you've been going the right way all this time. You just really hope that little shit isn't lying to you. + + + +> Onward + +You've gotten past the bulk of the humunculi and the goblins were refreshingly easy, but as you continue forward you shudder to think at what else may lie in store for you up ahead. This nondescript plateau had dredged on for quite a while and still no sign of Redridge pass. Suddently you reach a tunnel and you are dismayed to see a large troll blocking access. Trolls are even stronger than humunculi so you won't be fighting this one anytime soon. The tunnel represents the only way through to the other side as an inclimbable rockface extends in both directions along the plateau. You're gonna have to get through that tunnel one way or another. + + +You remember that the shaman said that the Craxil uses riders to send its orders out to its minions and that these riders are basically human thralls. Perhaps you could fake it to get past him. Another option is your bow. Trolls are very large creatures and therefore pretty hard to miss, even for you. A final option is to try and distract it somehow. You reason that you could cause a lot of commotion in the half-dead vegetation nearby to draw him away from the tunnel, then circle around and make a run for it. + + + +> Try To Trick The Troll Into Believing You Are A Thrall +You dawn your poker face and approach the troll expectantly. You reason that you cannot hope to match a troll's strength but rather take advantage of their lack of intelligence. As you approach, the troll glares at you and is clearly readying his club for a strike. + + +"I must report back to the Craxil" you announce. + + +"And who are you to see the Craxil" the troll questions. + + +"I am a rider and have no time for your nonsense. This report is very important." + + +There is a pause as the troll is thinking over your response. Clearly, he isn't sure what to say or do in this situation. It looks like this might actually work. But then... + + +"Where is your steed?" the troll asks. + + +Shit. Of course, they're called riders for a reason and you haven't got any ride now do you? Of all the rotten luck. + + +"He is ill, suffers the ick" you manage, doubtful as to whether or not this will be taken. + + +At this point the troll isn't buying it. You wish you had considered this before you attempted to lie. Hard to take, being outsmarted by a troll. Even harder to take is the club that has now crushed every bone in your body and left you a mangled mess. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +You've gotten past the bulk of the humunculi and the goblins were refreshingly easy, but as you continue forward you shudder to think at what else may lie in store for you up ahead. This nondescript plateau had dredged on for quite a while and still no sign of Redridge pass. Suddently you reach a tunnel and you are dismayed to see a large troll blocking access. Trolls are even stronger than humunculi so you won't be fighting this one anytime soon. The tunnel represents the only way through to the other side as an inclimbable rockface extends in both directions along the plateau. You're gonna have to get through that tunnel one way or another. + + +You remember that the shaman said that the Craxil uses riders to send its orders out to its minions and that these riders are basically human thralls. Perhaps you could fake it to get past him. Another option is your bow. Trolls are very large creatures and therefore pretty hard to miss, even for you. A final option is to try and distract it somehow. You reason that you could cause a lot of commotion in the half-dead vegetation nearby to draw him away from the tunnel, then circle around and make a run for it. + + + +> Draw Your Bow And Fire Upon The Troll + +You may only be able to hit a general area, but a troll is a very large and broad target so you have practically no chance of missing here. You position yourself behind a large rock, just out of the trolls sight and ready your bow. The troll is still completely unaware of your presence and just stands there looking bored out of his mind. You pull out an arrow and draw it back in the string. You take aim and release. + + +The first shot hits the troll in the navel but seems to deal minimal damage. You draw back again and fire one into him, this time just below his chest. He looks confused but now lumbers in your direction. As you pull another one back he detects your presence and is now moving faster. You put another one into his midsection but again this deals minimal damage. You prepare to draw back another but he is upon you now. + + +It's too bad you forgot that trolls have exceptional regenerative capabilities. It takes more than a few arrows to bring these things down. Unfortunately, this is a lesson that has cost you your life. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +You've gotten past the bulk of the humunculi and the goblins were refreshingly easy, but as you continue forward you shudder to think at what else may lie in store for you up ahead. This nondescript plateau had dredged on for quite a while and still no sign of Redridge pass. Suddently you reach a tunnel and you are dismayed to see a large troll blocking access. Trolls are even stronger than humunculi so you won't be fighting this one anytime soon. The tunnel represents the only way through to the other side as an inclimbable rockface extends in both directions along the plateau. You're gonna have to get through that tunnel one way or another. + + +You remember that the shaman said that the Craxil uses riders to send its orders out to its minions and that these riders are basically human thralls. Perhaps you could fake it to get past him. Another option is your bow. Trolls are very large creatures and therefore pretty hard to miss, even for you. A final option is to try and distract it somehow. You reason that you could cause a lot of commotion in the half-dead vegetation nearby to draw him away from the tunnel, then circle around and make a run for it. + + + +> Create A Diversion To Lure Him Away, Then Run For It +The troll may be large, but something tells you it would take more than a few arrows to bring this thing down and you have no intention of getting up close to it for a bluff. It takes time, but after making enough noise from cover you manage to get the troll's attention and lure him away from the tunnel entrance. The creature lumbers slowly and cautiously towards the source of the noise and you are already working your way around from the other side. Eventually you see your opportunity and make a break for it. By the time the troll realizes you are there, you are already behind him and nearing the entrance to the tunnel. He tries to stop you, but you are already inside and despite his best efforts to stop you, you are already beyond his reach. He lets out a series of angry grunts and you continue onward through the tunnel. Clearly all those years of playing capture the flag have served you well. + + +As you emerge from the other side, you begin to see the rocks getting more red and you take it as a sign that you are on the right path. There was never much foliage in this mountainside but the area you are in now is especially rocky and devoid of vegetation. You hope you will find the Redrange Pass soon so you can deal with the Craxil and be done with this quest. + + + +You've been traveling a long time without sleep and dawn is starting to crack. Somehow, the warm beams of sunlight raising up over the distant rocks make you feel sleepy. As you continnue forward along the rugged expanse of jagged red rocks and dirt you discover the remains of an unused campsite. The inhabitants are long gone, but the camp is still here. A cozy warm campfire, soft, cottony sleeping mat, warm blanket, the works. There are no enemies as far as the eye can see in any direction and you think you would probably be able to think better if you had some rest. The warmth and coziness of this campsite is calling to you and since you haven't slept in almost 40 hours now, you begin to consider. + + + +> Curl Up And Sleep, You May Not Get The Chance To Later +You are going to need to stay awake if you want to keep your mind sharp, and you can't do that if you are sleep deprived. It only makes sense that you would need to take a break in your journey and catch some much needed sleep. Besides, the blanket is so warm, the mat is so cottony soft and the sun beams over your face are just wonderful. You feel as though you could just curl up and hibernate like a bear and continue your sneaky journey at night. + + +Kind of lucky that you just happened upon such a nice, uninhabited camp huh. I mean, what are the odds right? Well... they aren't very high actually. Actually, its pretty damn convinent isn't it. It's at this point you start to get suspicious but by now it is too late. The entire camp site dissipates into a thick black smoke and you feel as though you've just aged by 50 years. You manage to stand but you can barely move. This is when you notice all the skeletons on the ground that were not here before. How could you not see them before?!? They definitely weren't here before. No way! + + +The billowy smoke takes form and suddenly it all makes sense in a terrible way. The campsite was just a tempting illusion generated by a wraith. Its terrifying to think that its intelligent enough to lure you in like this, and now that it has already sapped so much of your strength and lifeforce you know in your heart you are completely fucked. Fear gives way to anger, which then gives way to desperation followed by pathetic pleading. The wraith ignores it all and soon you are but a husk of a man and within a few weeks of decay you become just another skeleton adorning his trap. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The troll may be large, but something tells you it would take more than a few arrows to bring this thing down and you have no intention of getting up close to it for a bluff. It takes time, but after making enough noise from cover you manage to get the troll's attention and lure him away from the tunnel entrance. The creature lumbers slowly and cautiously towards the source of the noise and you are already working your way around from the other side. Eventually you see your opportunity and make a break for it. By the time the troll realizes you are there, you are already behind him and nearing the entrance to the tunnel. He tries to stop you, but you are already inside and despite his best efforts to stop you, you are already beyond his reach. He lets out a series of angry grunts and you continue onward through the tunnel. Clearly all those years of playing capture the flag have served you well. + + +As you emerge from the other side, you begin to see the rocks getting more red and you take it as a sign that you are on the right path. There was never much foliage in this mountainside but the area you are in now is especially rocky and devoid of vegetation. You hope you will find the Redrange Pass soon so you can deal with the Craxil and be done with this quest. + + + +You've been traveling a long time without sleep and dawn is starting to crack. Somehow, the warm beams of sunlight raising up over the distant rocks make you feel sleepy. As you continnue forward along the rugged expanse of jagged red rocks and dirt you discover the remains of an unused campsite. The inhabitants are long gone, but the camp is still here. A cozy warm campfire, soft, cottony sleeping mat, warm blanket, the works. There are no enemies as far as the eye can see in any direction and you think you would probably be able to think better if you had some rest. The warmth and coziness of this campsite is calling to you and since you haven't slept in almost 40 hours now, you begin to consider. + + + +> Focus & Discipline, You Need To Keep Moving + +You decide that there will be time to sleep when your journey is over. Sleeping now would only make you vulnerable within Craxil territory and given the myriad of possible fates that may befall you we simply cannot take that chance now can we. Then again, you have gone almost 40 hours without sleep so far and you aren't even sure if you are halfway there yet. If you continue pushing yourself forth at this pace you may very well collapse. Perhaps finding a safe place to rest isn't such a bad idea after all. + + + +As you try to walk away you get the distinct smell of bacon. You look back and see a skillet over the campfire. It smells fantastic. Strange that you didn't notice this earlier though. The campsite seems to be calling to you, but of course that idea is completely absurd. Your beginning to feel like that halfling Brodo Faggins, who traveled relentlessly on his journey without supplies or rest. You suppose that given you've been an underappreciated swineherd your whole life, such an idea is a fun one to ponder. + + +You catch yourself stopping in your tracks, and starring at the food over the campfire and the mat on the ground. "How convinent" you think, "to have all that food within reach of the soft cotton mat. You shake your head and try to shake it off but the temptation is grabbing at your attention. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +You might be able to hit the broadside of a barn, but your aim is not sufficient for anything more than a general area. You don't want to alert the goblin to your presence so you are just going to have to deal with him the old fashioned way. Under cover of midnight you slink around to the edge of the camp and work your way along the side until you are close. Despite your apparent lack of skill in fighting and archery you are an absolute master at sneakery. But enough of such destracting thoughts. As the goblin turns away you leap forth, cup his mouth with your left hand, and stab him through the back. You pull the body away from the camp so none of the other goblins will see it. + + +Fortunately for you, none of the goblins seem stirred in the least. You removed that problem without attracting attention. Even better, another one of the nightwatchmen goblins has come back to the same post trying to figure out why his comrade is no longer at his post. This affords you the opportunity to repeat the procedure and return once again. The way to the central tent still has a few more problems in store for you. Single goblins patrol the area and there is always at least one patrol goblin within sight range of that tent. Also, the tent itself has its own nightwatchman who is evidently dedicated to the shaman. At the very least, you need to kill one of the patrolling goblins to create an opening and the sentry guarding the tent. With this done, you have a chance at abducting and interrogating the shaman for some much needed information on the Craxil. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +You have some ideas on the patrolling goblin. You could attempt to construct a simple foothold trap out of vine and add some barbs from the camp to dig into his foot. Alternatively, you could wait until he rounds his usual tree and cut him down before the next patrolling goblin comes along. +> Wait Behind The Tree And Cut Him Down As He Comes Along + +You prefer to keep things simple and avoid the convoluted. Besides, a barbed trap would likely make him scream out before you kill him would it not? You hide behind a tree and wait for the next goblin to make his usual round. As he comes about you plunge your sword into his chest and immediately grab him so you can hide the body before the next patrol arrives. + + +You wait for the opening to come again, then quickly maneuver into position to stab the tent's sentry before the next patrol goblin comes around. You peek inside to see the shaman sleeping (lucky you) and drag the sentry's body inside where it won't be detected. You've reached the shaman, and he's still asleep, but you can't very well interrogate him here. You pick up a candlestick from the nearby table and as he's coming to you clock him over the head with it. You check for a pulse to see if he's dead or unconcious and thankfully, he's just knocked out. You gag him and bind his arms behind his back because he won't be able to cast spells without his tounge and hand movements. You use the same patrol opening to escape the camp and return to a spot distant from the camp. You rouse the shaman to wake up and realize you are probably more scared than he will be. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +You cannot contain your curiosity about this camp but you know you should keep your distance and be careful. They are likely hostile after all. You remember that you are out in the open now so the sun will remove any advantage that the shadows had given you in the caves. You decide to wait until nightfall, then slink in closer to the camp. There is minimal rock cover but you manage to find a decent place from which to observe their camp. They are goblins, armed with schimitars and polearms which you assume must be the work of the Craxil. + + +Even outside the Craxil's domain, goblins are known for their hostility towards humans so approaching them would be stupid. However, unlike the powerful humunculi you've had to deal with so far, goblins are a weaker enemy you feel confident you could stand against (provided you don't get yourself overwhelmed). There are about 30 of the foul creatures wandering about the camp, but the one that catches your interest is the shaman. Decked out in fancy garb and occupying a large tent in the center of the camp, it is clear this one is the leader. It occurs to you that if they are working for the Craxil then this one might be able to provide you with some much needed leads as to where you can find him. + + + + + + + + + +You are confident in your ability to handle a single goblin or perhaps even two if your life depended on it but certainly not the entire camp. You're just a sneaky swineherd after all. You wait until midnight, when most of the goblins have retired to sleep. There are still a handful of night watchmen goblins though, and they will need to be dealt with before you can hope to reach the shaman's tent. You also shudder at the thought of the shaman unleashing horrid magicks upon you. Once again, you will have to use the element of surprise to make up for your lack of fighting experience but then... as a sneaky bastard that is your specialty. + + +The first concern is the single goblin standing at the closest entrance to the camp. He is holding a polearm and needs to be removed before you can get into the camp. As stated before, you are confident you can take him, but you need to be careful not to wake the rest of the camp in the process. One idea is to sneak up on him and stab him through the back with your sword before he can react. Another idea is to try and hit him with an arrow from a distance, then move on to the next target. Either way, he needs to be removed. + + + +> Put An Arrow In Him +You are concerned that if you were to get to close to him or the camp before he is taken out then you will be detected so it is best to deal with the problem from afar. You pull an arrow back in your bow and wait until the goblin stops fidgeting around. You were successful with this thing the last time you used it against that one humunculus, but you know that was just luck. Besides, you aren't going to get a second chance this time. + + +You carefully aim at the goblins chest because that is the broadest target on his body and an arrow that lands there is likely to still prove fatal. You wait for the wind to die down, pull the drawstring as far back as you possibly can, perfect your aim, and....................RELEASE! + + +The arrow sails through the air but fails to hit its target. Actually, you overshot and the arrow tore through one of the peripheral tents. You ready another arrow, but the goblin guard is aware now and so is the inhabitant of that tent you shot. You manage to blow out the guards knee with the second shot (despite still aiming for the chest) but its no use as the camp is now stirring and the goblins are now being roused. You pull back towards the humunculus caves you emerged from, hoping to find someplace to hide before they get their shit together. You duck behind a large rock just outside the passageway you exitted from when you first arrived on this plateau. The goblins have explored the area between you and the camp and they are drawing closer. + + +The shaman leads them into the passageway you came from and for a moment you think you're going to be safe...until one of the footsolder goblins detects your presence. He lifts his spear above his head leaving you no choice but to thrust your sword through his abdomin. Of course, now the other goblins are aware of your presence. Reasoning your longer legs should enable you to outrun the goblins you take off and it looks like you might get away. At least, that's what you thought until the shaman lands a fireball against you. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> + + +Naturally, you are not going to go down the passageway that your pursuers went down, that's just stupid. You want to avoid unnecessary conflict after allso you can increase your chances of reaching the Craxil. This passageway leads you out to a large plateau. To the right, you can see another several clusters of cave networks populated by humunculi. To the left you see a step drop off that would land you in the forest the hunters of your village like to use. In front of you, and in the distance, is a curious looking camp. You see a couple different campfires and at least two dozen tee-pee style tents down over there. You can't make out who the inhabitants are though, at least not from here. Odds are they aren't friendly though. This is Craxil territory after all. Of course, the humunculi in the multiple cave clusters over there aren't friendly either so what does it matter? You still have no leads as to where to find the Craxil but you need to make a decision as to where to go. +> Explore The Humunculi Clusters + +Perhaps it is wise to stick with the enemy you know right? Anyway, the creatures that have been attacking your village have been humunculi and while they are not the only creatures under the Craxil's command (according to Brandolf) they are the ones he seems to call on the most. Perhaps you'll find clues to his whereabouts somewhere about in their dwellings. + + +The task of sneaking over to these cave clusters unseen is a challenging one. You are out in the open now, so the sun is taking away any advantage that the darkness would otherwise have given you. Also, a couple humunculi are standing outside in the open, in the front of the cave clusters you seek to gain entry to. Realizing the impossibility of this situation, you fall back a bit and wait until nightfall to make your move. + + + +Eventually the sun sets and the humunculi retire to their caves. You slink over to their position using what little rock cover and shrubbery you have to conceal your approach. Just as you reach the next rock for cover you feel something strike you from above and you lose conciousness. Seems one of the humunculi noticed your approach and got you with a rock from a high vantage point. You're surprised you survived such a blow but you soon wish you hadn't. Your arms and legs are restrained with thick vines and it is clear you are about to become the meal for a handful of humunculi. + + + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The room is too well lit to try and sneak past him and lunging forth at a superior foe with a short sword doesn't strike your fancy either. You decide to get creative and pull out the bow that Brandolf gave you in the council before you left. You ran a few practice shots before departing on this journey and you know you can at least hit a general target, though you'd be pretty hard pressed to achieve any kind of real accuracy. + + +The first shot whizzes past the creatures head and into a nearby pillar of rock. His eyes go wide as he looks at the arrow then turns to look directly at you. You immediately pull back another arrow and take aim knowing this shot is going to make or break destiny. You aim for his chest as that is the broadest target available and the iron arrowhead may even reach his heart. As he lunges forth you close your eyes and release... + + + +You half expected you'd be dead by now but when you open your eyes you discover your arrow went through the creatures neck. He is now on his knees bleeding profusely and clutching his throat. Wasting no time, you finish him with your short sword, then dive into the darkest corner. The three humunculi heard the ruckus and have come down from their campfire to see what the commotion was. When they discover their fallen comrade, they go into a rage and start to look around. You dig into the corner as much as you can and clutch your sword. Two of the creatures move towards the unexplored passageway on the other side of the chamber while the third seems to be gravitating closer to your position. You begin to wonder if you should strike him by surprise while you still can or hope you can try to remain undiscovered. +> Remain In The Corner And Hope To Be Undiscovered +Even if you succeeded in sneak attacking this one, what about the other two? You cannot possibly hope to defeat two humunculi, especially without the element of surprise on your side. Their monsters and let's face it, elementary school girls still best you at arm wrestling. Your best bet is to remain in the corner and pray. You sit there, hold your breath, and close your eyes. This is probably for the best, because its all over before you realize what's happening. The humunculus discovered you and struck you upside the head with such force that you suffered a fatal concussion. On the plus side, you didn't feel a thing. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You press your body firmly against the back wall of the chamber and slowly make your way over to the entrance of the large passageway on the left. Occasionally the campfire will flicker light in your general direction giving you pause, but the humunculi are totally unaware of your presence. Eventually, you manage to make it to the passageway and it doesn't take long before you reach another chamber. You are greatly disheartened by what you see up ahead. + + + +A larger than normal humunculus stands in the center of the fairly well lit chamber and judging from his tribal decor you figure he must be someone of rank. The passageway continues at the other end of the chamber, but this creature blocks your path. At the moment, he is looking off to the side and does not notice your presence. You weigh your options. + + + + +> Go Back The Way You Came +You are quickly beginning to wish Brandolf had given you a torch, but given the nature of your quest he probably figured you didn't need to draw attention to yourself. Still, you can barely see more than a few feet in front of your face and it is only getting darker as you continue further inward. You run your hand along the right wall and move carefully, scouting each step with your foot to avoid a fall. Your heart is racing and you know that at any moment, something might come out and attack. + + +Eventually, the cave leads into a small inner chamber with a campfire in the middle. Three humunculi are sitting around the campfire, roasting human limbs on a stick as if they were marshmellows. Fortunately, they are not aware of your presence and the campfire enables you to see there are several tunnels leading out from this chamber. On the other side of the chamber is a tunnel that goes deeper in, but you won't be able to go down this way undetected as long as the humunculi are here. There are also nondescript passsageways to the left and the right (large and small respectively) that you can reach as long as you stay in the shadows. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +You are quickly beginning to wish Brandolf had given you a torch, but given the nature of your quest he probably figured you didn't need to draw attention to yourself. Still, you can barely see more than a few feet in front of your face and it is only getting darker as you continue further inward. You run your hand along the right wall and move carefully, scouting each step with your foot to avoid a fall. Your heart is racing and you know that at any moment, something might come out and attack. + + + + +Eventually, the cave leads into a small inner chamber with a campfire in the middle. Three humunculi are sitting around the campfire, roasting human limbs on a stick as if they were marshmellows. Fortunately, they are not aware of your presence and the campfire enables you to see there are several tunnels leading out from this chamber. On the other side of the chamber is a tunnel that goes deeper in, but you won't be able to go down this way undetected as long as the humunculi are here. There are also nondescript passsageways to the left and the right (large and small respectively) that you can reach as long as you stay in the shadows. + + + +> Attack The Humunculi With Your Sword While They Are Relaxed + +These humunculi are blocking a passage that may lead to the Craxil; and the fewer of them there are, the less difficult it will be for you to have to sneak around. You draw your sword and lung forth plunging it into the back of the nearest unsuspecting humunculi. You swell with pride realizing that you have just killed your first monster, and a humunculi too! Unfortunately, you have difficulty removing the sword from the humunculi's body and the others have immediately taken notice of you. You attempt to run back out of the cave from whence you came, but the creatures are faster than you are. They beat you savagely before bringing you back to their campfire for desert. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"The trouble is that this poison must be ingested or applied to a blade, simply splashing your opponent with it will not suffice." + + +"But how will anyone even get that far? Without royal aid, how can anyone even hope to reach the Craxil?" + + +At this point, many in the council are reminded of your exploits at last year's "capture the flag" contests. In fact, at every annual festival you manage to outfox your opponents, evade their numbers, and sneak up on their flag. Your success record was almost unrealistic. Suddenly, the council gets it in their minds to send you in with the poison. In fact, you're alarmed by how quickly they're all agreeing to this idea despite the fact you haven't yet. Then again, you've always sensed that as a swineherd you've never really been well liked or considered "valuable" by the townsfolk so this response isn't entirely unexpected. + + +Nonetheless, you aren't going to go anywhere or do anything that you haven't agreed to do first. Unlike the others in the room, Brandolf has the decency to walk up and ask your opinion on the matter. He is usually dismissive of stupid ideas, but he seems to think this one might actually work. You take a moment to decide how to respond. + + + +> Refuse The Offer And Tell The Assholes In Your Community Where They Can Shove Their New Idea +The people of Jacquescrappe have never really treated you with respect and you never really liked them either. Moreover, you are offended by how many of them just agreed to send you in without even bothering to ask you how YOU felt about the idea. You decide to return to your swineherding responsibilities and let the rest of the townspeople try to figure this out for themselves. "Fuck 'em" you think as you leave the council chambers and return to the fields. + + +In the weeks that followed, several intrepid individuals attempted to reach the Craxil and never returned. Many townspeople gathered together all the gold they had in hopes of putting together a reward for a worthy adventurer who might succeed in this task. Many others were sent to the royal palace, begging desperately and fruitlessly for military assistance in their remote and low value settlement. In the end, all these events failed and soon, the raids returned. + + +If the townspeople didn't like you before, they certainly hated you now. While before you would sometimes get dirty looks or the occasional one word answer, they now ignore you completely wherever you go. You insist that you had every right to refuse such a foolish plan, but most just dismiss you as being a selfish bastard. You return to the fields to talk to "oinky" and "snout", the only friends that haven't turned their backs on you yet. + + +In the monthes that followed, numerous people are dragged off into the mountainside, never to be heard from again. You smile as the fat hog of a woman with a barbed tounge that pissed you off the most is seen screaming while in the grasp of one of these creatures. However, one night while you are cleaning up the digested remains of oinky's chili burritos you are surprised by two humunculi. You may have enjoyed it when others you didn't like so much got carried off, but this time it is you. You are never heard from again. + + + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The wintry winds howl a horrible wail, whipping white watery snow against the weathered watchtower’s westernmost wall. Yes, it is indeed a dark and stormy night, but darker and stormier and maybe just a tad more purple than your run-of-the-mill dark and stormy night. + + +Somewhere deep in the forest a unicorn frolics in a magical glade, as elves watch and scamper amongst the trees, polishing their bows with the blood of dwarves. + + +“Killed a big fat one today, Elfrond,” says Elfmoor. “Bastard was trying to chop down a cherry tree. Can you believe it, a fucking cherry tree? Sacrilege.” + + +“Have you ever wondered why we hate the dwarves so much?” asks Elfrond. + + +“What do you mean? They’re fucking dwarves! And this one chopped down a tree. A cherry tree. Only thing that rivals my love of trees are cherries. And music. And song. And like five other things.” + + +“Yeah, I’ve just been thinking lately. How did we get these sweet bows, if we didn’t chop down a tree to shape them. And how do we burn fires without firewood? And why exactly do we hate the dwarves?” + + +“It’s canon. Don’t ask questions.” + + +“What’s a cannon?” + + +Suddenly, the elves quit bickering. Something that only happens once in a thousand years occurs. The glade explodes with magical aura as the unicorn releases its legendary rainbow fart. Magical anomalies, such as this, signal only one thing: the birth of a hero. + + +Elfmoor takes a big whiff of the magical aroma. “B. E. A. Utiful. Times like this make life worth living.” + + +Elfrond shakes his head. “Elfmoor, we’re immortal. I’ve seen this like ten times already. And every time this happens, it means something evil is about to come afoot." + + +“But the hero always wins.” + + +“Have you ever heard the term collateral damage?” + + +“Is that a sword?” + + +And there you have it. The magical unicorn fart that marks your birth. How exciting! I wonder what type of hero you will grow up to be. +> Heroic knight, heroic knight! +Ah, the noble knight in shining armor. And they say chivalry is dead. + + +You are born into a loving but stern peasant family in the hamlet of Forest Hill. Your formative years are a medley of hardship, merriment, and hard work. While most of the other children in the hamlet are content to play ragamuffin children’s games and live out their lives in this quaint corner of the woods, you aspire to greatness, spending every evening selling turnips and every night mucking shit from the stables. With all this (paltry sum of) loot, you are able to afford sword and shield lessons from the guardsmen. + + +One fine autumn evening, you and your sword master Jon are finishing a sparring session. Jon is bigger and faster than you are, but you have taken his lessons to heart. Training swords are blunted, but they hurt all the same when they whack you. + + +Jon’s sword arcs toward your shoulder. You raise your shield, and the wood splinters. With a quick twist of the wrist, you yank the shield downwards, catching Jon’s sword in the process. He is open; here is your chance. You swing your sword… + + +“Dodge!” you shout, dropping to the ground. Jon’s fist sails an inch above your head. You toss your shield and lurch from your knees into Jon. The pair of you grapple on the ground. Dust flies. Both of your swords are lost in the ruckus. + + +A fist catches you square in the gut. Once, twice, three times. You spit in Jon’s eyes and roll to the side, and stagger to your feet. A leg comes sweeping toward you. + + +“Dodge!” you shout, jumping back. You avoid the leg, but tumble onto your ass. Before you can regain your feet, a boot hits your chest, shoving you back into the ground. + + +Jon stands above you and smirks. “You know what you forgot to do?” + + +You nod, knowing. + + +“You forgot to DODGE!” + + +You share a hearty laugh. At first, Jon would shout ‘dodge’ to train you to avoid taking hits, now it is your job to shout it when you train. He even sends kids around to throw shit at you randomly during the day. That really sends the message home. You have come so far that the art of dodging has almost become a sixth sense. ‘If they can’t hit you, they can’t kill you,’ Jon had reasoned. + + +The pair of you head to the watch house to clean up. The building is small and reeks of sweat and mildew. The hamlet only has three guards, so upgrading their housing has not been a top concern of the local Baron. You are just thrilled the hamlet has guards at all. + + +“You’re getting good, kid. Real good,” says Jon, stripping his leather armor. “I think you’re ready for some real patrol work. We just got a report the other night about some disappearances on the Baron’s Road. It’s probably just some bandits, but we need to take care of it. You in?” +> Hell yeah I'm in. +“Hell yeah I’m in.” + + +Jon nods. “Glad to hear it.” + + +This could be your big chance to finally prove yourself. You need to get your name out there if you want to have any chance of receiving a knighthood someday. They do not just hand those things out like… well, nobody has ever actually handed you anything except a nice big steaming pile of shit. Peasantry blows. + + +Under cover of darkness, you and the three guards head out along the Baron’s Road in the back of a covered wagon. No one has ever thought of ambushing bandits in a covered wagon while guised as merchants. Surely, the plan will go off without a hitch. + + +Samwellington the Fat jitters in his seat. You are not sure if it is because he is scared or hungry. How Sam became a member of the guard is beyond your imagination. Jon trusts him for some reason, and that is good enough for you. “Nervous kid?” he asks. + + +That you might eat me. “No. If Jon says I’m ready, then I’m ready.” + + +Bowie bobs his head. “It’s best to trust Jon. I didn’t once and then my world went to shit. That draugr attack during the winter of ’69 was brutal… I still have nightmares.” + + +Jon rolls his eyes. “If you hadn’t st-” + + +“Hey, let’s let bygones be bygones,” says Bowie. + + +“Hey do you hear that?” you ask. + + +“Sorry, my stomach rumbles when I travel,” says Samwellington. + + +“No, not-” + + +The horses whinny and bolt. One of the wheels catches a snag in the road and topples over. Luckily, you land on Samwellington’s gut. Jon cuts a hole in the wagon covering and climbs out into the night, and you and Bowie follow. + + +“Oh, fuck…” Jon clutches his sword in both hands and rushes. + + +Two trolls tower over the corpses of the horses and the wagon driver, tearing chunks of bloody flesh with the effort you would rip apart a boiled chicken. +> Help Jon. +In your eagerness to fight at Jon’s side, you forget the most important lesson of your training: always dodge. + + +A troll whips a horse leg in your direction. Off balance and off guard, you cannot avoid the hurling limb as the hoof nails you in the shoulder, severing your sword arm. Blood spouts like a geyser from your body as you crumple to the road. + + +“Bowie, help Jon!” Samwellington shrieks. “I’ve got the kid.” Samwellington stumbles to your side and rolls you onto your back. “Hang in there little buddy. It’s going to be alright.” + + +Blood loss is making you delusional. It is the only way to explain what is happening. Samwellington draws his dagger and sticks himself in the gut. He drags the blade across his stomach, slips his hand into the incision, and pulls out a chunk of his own fat. He smacks the lard on your wound and it sticks in place, stemming the blood flow. + + +“Can you walk?” asks Samwellington. + + +“Can I walk? Can I walk! I just had my fucking arm cleaved off. What the fuck do you think?” + + +“Yeah, an arm, not a leg. Don’t be a baby.” + + +“Sam we could really use your fat ass over here,” shouts Bowie. “Any motherfucking time!” + + +You hear a gurgle and a gasp just before Bowie’s head goes sailing through the air. Samwellington gulps and scurries away to hide behind the wreckage of the wagon. What a coward. Oh well, at least he saved your life. + + +Leaning against your sword, you stagger to your feet. One of the trolls ravages Bowie’s headless corpse. The crunching and snapping of bones sickens you, and you fight the urge to hurl as bile tickles your throat. Jon appears to be holding his ground against the other troll, but once his friend finishes devouring Bowie’s corpse, even Jon won’t be able to fend off their combined savagery. You have to do something quick or all of your worthless lives will be over. +> Throw your severed arm as a distraction. +You doubt you will be of much use as a combatant, so you may as well make yourself useful in some other fashion. + + +You grab your severed arm and wing it as hard you can toward the trolls. The troll feasting on Bowie ignores the bloody mess of flesh, but Jon’s troll clambers after it on all fours. A deep sadness seeps into your bones as you hear the troll crunch your arm in its jaws. Heroes are not supposed to be eaten. + + +Jon slices the back of the trolls’ knees, and the troll howls in agony as its legs buckle. Jon leaps onto its back and cleaves the head clean off with one swipe with your arm still clenched between its teeth. + + +“Go Jon,” Samwellington cheers. The fat coward is still cowering behind wreckage from the wagon. + + +“Why don’t you try and help?” you snarl. + + +“I am helping. I’m providing emotional support.” + + +You roll your eyes and look back in time to see Jon finish off the second troll. + + +“Wow, that was fast,” you say. + + +Jon shrugs. “A little emotional support can go a long way. Nice job yourself. You didn’t even need to have your sword arm attached to the rest of your body for it to be useful. Try dodging next time though.” + + +“I don’t know if there will be a next time. How can I fight without a sword arm?” + + +Jon winks. “I know a guy: magic fellow and what not. He should be able to do something for you.” Jon raises his hand. “Hold on one second. I’ll be right back.” + + +Jon darts into the forest and you hear the lovely sound of steel biting into flesh and the accompanying screams. + + +“Sam, why don’t you go back to the hamlet and draft the report,” says Jon, emerging from the forest, “add five dead bandits to it. I’ll take our buddy here to the hedge wizard.” + + +With that, you and Jon part ways with Samwellington and enjoy a relatively droll venture to the hedge wizard’s hut. You understand why he is only a hedge wizard. The hut is a ramshackle smattering of twigs and leaves that appear to be held together by nothing but mud and bird poop. The entire place smells worse than a popcorn fart. This may not have been the best idea, but before you can raise your concerns with Jon, he hollers out. + + +“Hey, Osprey, get out here. I need a favor.” + + +“Is that you Jon?” You hear weird pops and bangs from inside the bird poop hut. “Just a second.” + + +“Take your time,” says Jon. “No hurry.” + + +After a few minutes, a bent white-bearded man with smoldering eyebrows and a staff teeters out of the hut amidst a cloud of smoke. The smoke shrouds Osprey and follows him around. It smells of rancid cheese and burning bird shit. + + +“Whew,” Jon attempts to wave the stink away, “what were you doing in there?” + + +Osprey’s eyes light up. His lips twist into a smirk as he cackles. “Wizard things.” + + +“Oh, Dear God.” + + +Osprey’s smile vanishes as he notices you and totters over. He grabs your head in both hands, lifts your chin, peers into your eyes, and prods your chest with a bony finger. A chill courses through your bones. He proceeds to violate your personal space for several minutes while you do your best to avoid suffocating in the smoke. + + +“Mmhmmm,” he says to himself. “Just as I thought. The boy is missing an arm.” + + +You roll your eyes. “How observant.” + + +Osprey whacks you upside the head with the staff. “Mind your manners, boy, or I’ll turn you into a leprechaun.” He shakes his head. “Ain’t nothing sadder than a leprechaun.” + + +“Not even a smelly old man living in a bird shit hut?” + + +Osprey clobbers you with the staff again. “I’ll have respect from you boy. This is no joking matter. You ever see a leprechaun you give that poor bastard nothing but your sincerest sympathies.” He smacks you with the staff one more time for good measure. “Now about that arm. I can fix you right up. Get you a brand new ethereal arm. Those things are sweet: impervious to physical damage. Magic will fuck you up though.” + + +Osprey begins nodding his head and drawing weird symbols in the ground with his staff while mumbling to himself. + + +“Jon,” you whisper, “I really don’t think this is a good idea. This guy is cracked.” + + +Jon scoffs. “Posh. You want to be a knight, right? Well, a knight needs both arms.” +> Bring on the magic. +Truer words have never been said. Well, they probably have, but you cannot think of any at the moment. + + +“Alright,” you nod, “bring on the magic.” + + +“That’s the spirit.” Osprey bumbles around finishing his runes. He mutters some incantations, bops you on top of the head a few times with his staff and bursts into poetry. + + +A wizard did it, a wizard bid it. + + +An arm grew, fresh and new. + + +Ethereal, but not imperial. + + +As we live in a realm, surrounded by elm. + + +Nature’s magic, is never tragic. + + +My rhymes are bad, but I’m not mad. + + +This spell worked, ‘cause Cyrus twerked. + + +Just like that, a sprite and shiny ethereal arm appears from your shoulder. You clench your fist and feel the power pulsing through your… veins? Jon claps politely as Osprey bows. + + +The hedge wizard slaps you across the back, smiling. “Now don’t go committing sins of self-pleasure with that thing. You might rip something important off.” + + +You gulp. + + +Osprey cackles and slaps you some more. He seems to like hitting you. “You can shoot magic energy blasts out of that thing too. I thought that might be useful for a hero.” + + +Jon shakes his head. “If you want to be a heroic knight, don’t do that. Knights aren’t magic. Only trouble can come of it. This isn’t a wizard’s tale.” + + +Osprey shrugs and wanders back into his hut. The door creaks shut and you soon hear the calamity snap back to life. He pokes his head out to offer one last piece of advice. “You treat them leprechauns with respect, boy, you hear me?” He slams the door shut and that is that. + + +“What do we do now?” you ask Jon. + + +“Well, I’m going to go back to the hamlet and make sure everything’s in order. You should go try out your new arm and get used to it.” + + +You consider that a smashing idea and head off to the neighboring kingdom of Irelandshire to seek out one of these mystical leprechauns. With the help of several drunken and boisterous natives, you learn the not-so-secret location of the Valley of Rainbows where the leprechauns supposedly abound. They warn you not to go though because it is a sad and wretched place. Obviously, you ignore them. + + +Hundreds of rainbows dot the easy to access valley, and you have little difficulty tracking one down to its end. Naturally, a great pot of gold sits next to it, but no leprechaun. + + +You try calling for them, taunting them, begging them, praising them, but none appear. + + +“Well at least I’m rich.” + + +You pack as much gold as you can onto your horse (which isn’t anywhere near the entire pot since gold is heavy, yet it’s still enough to buy a castle or two) and prepare to return home. + + +As you approach the precipice with the cave that leads out of the valley, a shrill cry booms from deep in the heart of the valley. +> I'm rich. I'm going home. +Where is your sense of adventure? Heroes aren’t supposed to be in the game just for the money! + + +What about for princess bosom? + + +Princess bosom is nice, but even with that you are still only a cheap imitation of a true hero. Besides, I do not see any princess bosom in the area, and no, you cannot buy princess bosom. You must earn such luxuries. + + +Are you telling me I don’t actually get to go home? + + +No, you can go home if you want. I’m merely giving you an opportunity to reconsider because I am a kind and kindred spirit. Eh, who am I kidding? I’m kind of a dick, but my offer still stands. +> Piss off, I'm going home with my booty. +You elect to go home with your wealthy horde of treasure, as you have every right to do so. I applaud your resolution. That takes cajones. Even divine intervention cannot derail you from your path. + + +With your newfound riches, you decide to take a luxury cruise on the C.Y.S. Generic Heroine. She is truly a gallant vessel. You dine on raw oysters and baked clams, which you eat off the bare breasts of dashing dames. At night, mermaids sing scandalous songs as they swim along with the ship, attempting to lure foolish sailors and passengers into their clutches, but not you, no, you are too wise. You simply listen and enjoy the sweet melodies. + + +The seas stay smooth and calm and you enjoy a pleasurable sailing experience. Pirates only attack once, and with your bitchin’ ethereal arm, you smash and bash them to bits, claiming their brig as your own. You even remembered to heed Jon’s warning and not use the magical energy blasts to preserve your status as a heroic knight. + + +“How was your trip?” Jon asks as you arrive in port. + + +“Profitable.” + + +Samwellington’s mouth waters as he sniffs the seafood on your breath. “Do you have any more clams?” + + +“I hope so,” says Jon, ignoring Samwellington. “You missed the king’s tournament. Sooooooo much shit went down.” + + +“Jon found a fire-crotch.” Samwellington beams gaily. “And killed a no good dirty evil wizard.” + + +Jon nods. “The future looks bright. That’s for damn certain.” + + +The three of you leave the docks and head into the city, ready to raise hell and fuck bitches make sweet tender love to beautiful maidens. What, did you think I would be spiteful and have you die of the Great Pox or be devoured by the kracken? <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Where is your sense of adventure? Heroes aren’t supposed to be in the game just for the money! + + +What about for princess bosom? + + +Princess bosom is nice, but even with that you are still only a cheap imitation of a true hero. Besides, I do not see any princess bosom in the area, and no, you cannot buy princess bosom. You must earn such luxuries. + + +Are you telling me I don’t actually get to go home? + + +No, you can go home if you want. I’m merely giving you an opportunity to reconsider because I am a kind and kindred spirit. Eh, who am I kidding? I’m kind of a dick, but my offer still stands. +> You convinced me, oh benevolent and mighty guardian angel. +No one likes a kiss ass. I'm more akin to a god than an angel anyway. + + +Taking a deep whiff of air you can smell the magic. This place has more to it than abandoned pots of gold and rainbows after all. You order your horse to stay and guard your gold as you dart towards the disturbance, and he obeys, because that is what good horseys do. + + +You storm through the trees, snapping branches and scaring furry little forest critters. In your haste, you trample a chipmunk. The little fellow’s bones make a nice crunching noise. + + +“Hey what’s the big idea!” + + +You whirl around but do not see anyone. You inspect the bottom of your boot, but the chipmunk is not the speaker. He is squashed like a rotten pumpkin all juicy and splattered. + + +“Over here you idiot.” A giant of a man posing as a tree rumbles toward you. He has moss and vines for a beard and hair. His green eyes glimmer with malice. A bear and a wolf lumber along at his sides. “Why are you destroying my forest?” + + +“Sorry, I was looking for whatever made that awful cry.” + + +“That was a leprechaun bemoaning his sorry fate of being a leprechaun.” + + +“Cool, can you show me where they are?” + + +“You murder my friend and harm my trees and you ask me for help? Give me one reason why I shouldn’t bring you home to my wife and tickle you to death for her amusement while my children eat your toes!” + + +What in the name of Pegasus is this thing? Oh, if only you had brought that book on mythical creatures Samwellington bought you for your birthday. At any rate, something tells you he does not belong in Irelandshire. You do not think you will be able to reason with him. If the chipmunk was his friend, honor would dictate that he avenge the cute little guy’s mushy corpse. How do you want to play this? +> Tell him, 'Everything I say is a lie.' +A smug smirk crosses your lips as you proudly declare, “Everything I say is a lie.” + + +The weird tree man thing stares at you then shakes his head in pity. “What did you think a paradox would do? Make my brain melt into soup?” + + +“Yes, actually.” + + +“I am a leshy. Not an imbecile.” + + +“I have no idea what that is. Do you sing songs?” + + +“You’ll see what I do.” + + +The leshy’s animal friends attack and pin you to the ground before you can react. You manage to strangle the bear to death with your ethereal arm, but this only enrages the leshy further. He plucks you from the ground as a princess would an eyelash and carries you off to his shanty with the wolf nipping at your feet. + + +Once inside his home, he binds you with vines and hangs you from the ceiling. His wife and children enter from kitchen. + + +“Oh, wonderful,” his wife cries with glee, “you found a wanderer! We get so few in the Valley of Rainbows.” + + +“The stupid leprechauns keep everyone away,” says one of the children. “No one wants to be near a leprechaun.” + + +The leshy’s wife smacks the child upside the head. “You treat the leprechauns with respect young man. They have enough misfortune without your drivel.” + + +“That’s right. Behave yourself, or I won’t let you eat his toes,” says the leshy. + + +“Yes Pa.” + + +The leshy begins tickling you as the children nibble on your toes. The wife shoves a hand down her dress and begins to moan and giggle. You shut your eyes and vomit between fits of laughter and screams of agony. Piss runs down your leg. + + +“You evil bastard!” you scream. + + +“I’m not evil. You’re just a failure and a murderer,” says the leshy as he proceeds to tickle you to death. “Chipper was one of my best friends. He will not be forgotten.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No one likes a kiss ass. I'm more akin to a god than an angel anyway. + + +Taking a deep whiff of air you can smell the magic. This place has more to it than abandoned pots of gold and rainbows after all. You order your horse to stay and guard your gold as you dart towards the disturbance, and he obeys, because that is what good horseys do. + + +You storm through the trees, snapping branches and scaring furry little forest critters. In your haste, you trample a chipmunk. The little fellow’s bones make a nice crunching noise. + + +“Hey what’s the big idea!” + + +You whirl around but do not see anyone. You inspect the bottom of your boot, but the chipmunk is not the speaker. He is squashed like a rotten pumpkin all juicy and splattered. + + +“Over here you idiot.” A giant of a man posing as a tree rumbles toward you. He has moss and vines for a beard and hair. His green eyes glimmer with malice. A bear and a wolf lumber along at his sides. “Why are you destroying my forest?” + + +“Sorry, I was looking for whatever made that awful cry.” + + +“That was a leprechaun bemoaning his sorry fate of being a leprechaun.” + + +“Cool, can you show me where they are?” + + +“You murder my friend and harm my trees and you ask me for help? Give me one reason why I shouldn’t bring you home to my wife and tickle you to death for her amusement while my children eat your toes!” + + +What in the name of Pegasus is this thing? Oh, if only you had brought that book on mythical creatures Samwellington bought you for your birthday. At any rate, something tells you he does not belong in Irelandshire. You do not think you will be able to reason with him. If the chipmunk was his friend, honor would dictate that he avenge the cute little guy’s mushy corpse. How do you want to play this? +> Turn your clothes inside out and put your shoes on the wrong feet. +You remember now! This creature is a leshy, and there is only one sure fire way to stop a leshy. You whip off your clothes, put them on inside out, kick off your shoes and slip them onto the opposite feet. + + +The leshy grimaces and his animal companions slink away. “I guess I have to show you the way out now.” + + +“I know the way out. Can you take me to the leprechauns?” + + +“You want to see the leprechauns? Are you dull in the head?” + + +“I like bacon, yes.” + + +The leshy’s eyes twinkle with fear. “Clearly, you’re mentally unhinged. Just like those poor leprechauns. If I take you to them, promise you’ll leave me and my family alone.” + + +“Sure.” + + +You follow the leshy into a glade, within a glen, within a gorge, within a holler, within a hollow, within a dell, within a dale, within a dingle, within a canyon, within a vale within the Valley of Rainbows. The trip is quite, shall I say, trippy. + + +The leshy points to a pool of water where all the rainbows spring forth. “I’m not getting any closer. Give the leprechauns my condolences, and please don’t murder rape my family. Good day.” The leshy leaves in a hurry without another word. + + +You approach the pool with eager enthusiasm and the leprechauns begin to appear from the surrounding trees… + + +... + + +Why are you stopping? + + +I’m sorry. It’s too depressing. Give the leprechauns my condolences as well, poor sorry bastards.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Truer words have never been said. Well, they probably have, but you cannot think of any at the moment. + + +“Alright,” you nod, “bring on the magic.” + + +“That’s the spirit.” Osprey bumbles around finishing his runes. He mutters some incantations, bops you on top of the head a few times with his staff and bursts into poetry. + + +A wizard did it, a wizard bid it. + + +An arm grew, fresh and new. + + +Ethereal, but not imperial. + + +As we live in a realm, surrounded by elm. + + +Nature’s magic, is never tragic. + + +My rhymes are bad, but I’m not mad. + + +This spell worked, ‘cause Cyrus twerked. + + +Just like that, a sprite and shiny ethereal arm appears from your shoulder. You clench your fist and feel the power pulsing through your… veins? Jon claps politely as Osprey bows. + + +The hedge wizard slaps you across the back, smiling. “Now don’t go committing sins of self-pleasure with that thing. You might rip something important off.” + + +You gulp. + + +Osprey cackles and slaps you some more. He seems to like hitting you. “You can shoot magic energy blasts out of that thing too. I thought that might be useful for a hero.” + + +Jon shakes his head. “If you want to be a heroic knight, don’t do that. Knights aren’t magic. Only trouble can come of it. This isn’t a wizard’s tale.” + + +Osprey shrugs and wanders back into his hut. The door creaks shut and you soon hear the calamity snap back to life. He pokes his head out to offer one last piece of advice. “You treat them leprechauns with respect, boy, you hear me?” He slams the door shut and that is that. + + +“What do we do now?” you ask Jon. + + +“Well, I’m going to go back to the hamlet and make sure everything’s in order. You should go try out your new arm and get used to it.” + + +You consider that a smashing idea and head off to the neighboring kingdom of Irelandshire to seek out one of these mystical leprechauns. With the help of several drunken and boisterous natives, you learn the not-so-secret location of the Valley of Rainbows where the leprechauns supposedly abound. They warn you not to go though because it is a sad and wretched place. Obviously, you ignore them. + + +Hundreds of rainbows dot the easy to access valley, and you have little difficulty tracking one down to its end. Naturally, a great pot of gold sits next to it, but no leprechaun. + + +You try calling for them, taunting them, begging them, praising them, but none appear. + + +“Well at least I’m rich.” + + +You pack as much gold as you can onto your horse (which isn’t anywhere near the entire pot since gold is heavy, yet it’s still enough to buy a castle or two) and prepare to return home. + + +As you approach the precipice with the cave that leads out of the valley, a shrill cry booms from deep in the heart of the valley. +> Investigate the cry. +Taking a deep whiff of air you can smell the magic. This place has more to it than abandoned pots of gold and rainbows after all. You order your horse to stay and guard your gold as you dart towards the disturbance, and he obeys, because that is what good horseys do. + + +You storm through the trees, snapping branches and scaring furry little forest critters. In your haste, you trample a chipmunk. The little fellow’s bones make a nice crunching noise. + + +“Hey what’s the big idea!” + + +You whirl around but do not see anyone. You inspect the bottom of your boot, but the chipmunk is not the speaker. He is squashed like a rotten pumpkin all juicy and splattered. + + +“Over here you idiot.” A giant of a man posing as a tree rumbles toward you. He has moss and vines for a beard and hair. His green eyes glimmer with malice. A bear and a wolf lumber along at his sides. “Why are you destroying my forest?” + + +“Sorry, I was looking for whatever made that awful cry.” + + +“That was a leprechaun bemoaning his sorry fate of being a leprechaun.” + + +“Cool, can you show me where they are?” + + +“You murder my friend and harm my trees and you ask me for help? Give me one reason why I shouldn’t bring you home to my wife and tickle you to death for her amusement while my children eat your toes!” + + +What in the name of Pegasus is this thing? Oh, if only you had brought that book on mythical creatures Samwellington bought you for your birthday. At any rate, something tells you he does not belong in Irelandshire. You also doubt you will be able to reason with him. If the chipmunk was his friend, honor would dictate that he avenge the cute little guy’s mushy corpse. How do you want to play this?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You doubt you will be of much use as a combatant, so you may as well make yourself useful in some other fashion. + + +You grab your severed arm and wing it as hard you can toward the trolls. The troll feasting on Bowie ignores the bloody mess of flesh, but Jon’s troll clambers after it on all fours. A deep sadness seeps into your bones as you hear the troll crunch your arm in its jaws. Heroes are not supposed to be eaten. + + +Jon slices the back of the trolls’ knees, and the troll howls in agony as its legs buckle. Jon leaps onto its back and cleaves the head clean off with one swipe with your arm still clenched between its teeth. + + +“Go Jon,” Samwellington cheers. The fat coward is still cowering behind wreckage from the wagon. + + +“Why don’t you try and help?” you snarl. + + +“I am helping. I’m providing emotional support.” + + +You roll your eyes and look back in time to see Jon finish off the second troll. + + +“Wow, that was fast,” you say. + + +Jon shrugs. “A little emotional support can go a long way. Nice job yourself. You didn’t even need to have your sword arm attached to the rest of your body for it to be useful. Try dodging next time though.” + + +“I don’t know if there will be a next time. How can I fight without a sword arm?” + + +Jon winks. “I know a guy: magic fellow and what not. He should be able to do something for you.” Jon raises his hand. “Hold on one second. I’ll be right back.” + + +Jon darts into the forest and you hear the lovely sound of steel biting into flesh and the accompanying screams. + + +“Sam, why don’t you go back to the hamlet and draft the report,” says Jon, emerging from the forest, “add five dead bandits to it. I’ll take our buddy here to the hedge wizard.” + + +With that, you and Jon part ways with Samwellington and enjoy a relatively droll venture to the hedge wizard’s hut. You understand why he is only a hedge wizard. The hut is a ramshackle smattering of twigs and leaves that appear to be held together by nothing but mud and bird poop. The entire place smells worse than a popcorn fart. This may not have been the best idea, but before you can raise your concerns with Jon, he hollers out. + + +“Hey, Osprey, get out here. I need a favor.” + + +“Is that you Jon?” You hear weird pops and bangs from inside the bird poop hut. “Just a second.” + + +“Take your time,” says Jon. “No hurry.” + + +After a few minutes, a bent white-bearded man with smoldering eyebrows and a staff teeters out of the hut amidst a cloud of smoke. The smoke shrouds Osprey and follows him around. It smells of rancid cheese and burning bird shit. + + +“Whew,” Jon attempts to wave the stink away, “what were you doing in there?” + + +Osprey’s eyes light up. His lips twist into a smirk as he cackles. “Wizard things.” + + +“Oh, Dear God.” + + +Osprey’s smile vanishes as he notices you and totters over. He grabs your head in both hands, lifts your chin, peers into your eyes, and prods your chest with a bony finger. A chill courses through your bones. He proceeds to violate your personal space for several minutes while you do your best to avoid suffocating in the smoke. + + +“Mmhmmm,” he says to himself. “Just as I thought. The boy is missing an arm.” + + +You roll your eyes. “How observant.” + + +Osprey whacks you upside the head with the staff. “Mind your manners, boy, or I’ll turn you into a leprechaun.” He shakes his head. “Ain’t nothing sadder than a leprechaun.” + + +“Not even a smelly old man living in a bird shit hut?” + + +Osprey clobbers you with the staff again. “I’ll have respect from you boy. This is no joking matter. You ever see a leprechaun you give that poor bastard nothing but your sincerest sympathies.” He smacks you with the staff one more time for good measure. “Now about that arm. I can fix you right up. Get you a brand new ethereal arm. Those things are sweet: impervious to physical damage. Magic will fuck you up though.” + + +Osprey begins nodding his head and drawing weird symbols in the ground with his staff while mumbling to himself. + + +“Jon,” you whisper, “I really don’t think this is a good idea. This guy is cracked.” + + +Jon scoffs. “Posh. You want to be a knight, right? Well, a knight needs both arms.” +> Continue as a cripple. +There is no way you are about to let this bird-brained lunatic work any form of magic on you. Somehow, someway, you will adapt to your crippled state. + + +“It’s just not happening, Jon,” you say and walk away. + + +“Hey, get back here, kid!” + + +“Let him go, Jon,” you hear Osprey say. “He’ll come back. They always do.” + + +You ignore them and keep walking. Left, right, left, you allow your mind to wander and just let your feet carry you where they will. How could this have happened? You are supposed to be a hero! A young knight in training, you had such a promising future… + + +Time passes and the sky darkens as you continue to roam without purpose. Self-wallowing will certainly help you in your quest for glory. You meander deeper into the forest, down into a dell. A coyote’s howl jars you back to reality. You slump against a rock beside a bubbling stream and bury your head into your hand. + + +“Everything I ever dreamed,” you scream, “ripped apart and devoured by some beast from hell.” + + +“Oh, do tell,” whispers a soft voice from behind. “I love stories about fallen heroes.” The voice giggles. “Or, would-be heroes.” + + +Slippery wet fingers trace your cheeks and run through your hair. A veil of mist seeps into the dell. Queer sensations stir in the pit of your gut. You think you are being enchanted, and you are not sure if that is necessarily a bad thing. + + +“Who are you?” + + +“I have many names,” sings the sweet voice. Her fingers caress your body. You feel at ease in her arms, as if all the aches in your body and pains in your mind wash away at her command. “But you may call me Organa Mel Fy.” + + +“What are you?” + + +“Ah, now that is a better question, but still not the right one.” You feel her teeth nibble at your neck. “I am an angel to some: demon to others. Last question my sweetness, make it count.” +> "What happens next?" +“What happens next?” + + +“Now that, that is the question of the hour, isn’t it?” sings the sweet voice. + + +The mysterious creature’s slick fingers trace their way into your breeches and tickle your Johnson. An overwhelming sensation of euphoria courses through your veins. Blood surges through your body. You feel… invigorated, as if you have more energy than the sun itself. + + +“I get ever so lonely here by myself,” the voice sings. “Won’t you… play with me?” +> Sexytime! +You have never felt so amazing in your life. How could you possibly let this sensation escape? You make sweet tender love to the mysterious creature. She looks human enough, except for the fact she can transform into water at will, which only serves to enhance the awesomeness of the experience. It just feels soooo damn good. + + +A little too good. Blinded by euphoria, ecstasy, magic, hormones, and a fatal condition I like to call “being a goddamned idiot,” you fail to notice your lover drag you down into the deceptively deep depths of the stream where you drown in the throes of love-making. Oh, those pesky water sprites!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“What happens next?” + + +“Now that, that is the question of the hour, isn’t it?” sings the sweet voice. + + +The mysterious creature’s slick fingers trace their way into your breeches and tickle your Johnson. An overwhelming sensation of euphoria courses through your veins. Blood surges through your body. You feel… invigorated, as if you have more energy than the sun itself. + + +“I get ever so lonely here by myself,” the voice sings. “Won’t you… play with me?” +> It's a trap! +Shit, it’s a trap! Jon once gave you a book about just this situation. This magical sexy creature is none other than a water sprite, posing as the evil sorceress, Organa Mel Fy, probably one of her sultry minions. She’ll sex you up then drown you in the stream and feast on your corpse. + + +“I want you to want me.” The water sprite moans and works magic on your body with her fingers. + + +Try as you might you cannot resist her allure as she toys with you in her lap. The magical enchantment and sexual tension corrode the fibers of your mind, breaking the mental barriers you constructed for just such a situation. + + +Saggy old nuns. Saggy old nuns. Saggy old nuns. Sally David. Mom. Oh shit, I’m still getting hard. + + +Hard as a brick in fact. + + +Help me! + + +Do you have a sister? + + +Yes, but that won’t work. + + +You whacked it while watching her bathe in the river didn’t you, perv. + + +Maybe… + + +I suppose there is always self-castration. + + +Go to hell. + + +“Don’t be shy, baby,” sings the water sprite, “I just want to rock you like a hurricane, shake you all night long, twist and shout, scream a rebel yell, make you walk on water, take you down to the paradise city, administer rough justice, and get your rocks off.” + + +Losing the battle of self-control your johnson twitches wildly. “Oh, sweet merciful God, that sounds orgasmic.” + + +The water sprite leans in close and whispers in your ear, “Let me take you home tonight so I can keep on loving you.” + + +The sultry songs of the water sprite prove too much for your feeble constitution. Your johnson explodes into a fountain of blood from a colossal aneurysm brought on by an overload of magical sexual tension. Since I’m not completely depraved, I’ll spare you the grisly details. Short agonizing story in brief: you bleed out.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no way you are about to let this bird-brained lunatic work any form of magic on you. Somehow, someway, you will adapt to your crippled state. + + +“It’s just not happening, Jon,” you say and walk away. + + +“Hey, get back here, kid!” + + +“Let him go, Jon,” you hear Osprey say. “He’ll come back. They always do.” + + +You ignore them and keep walking. Left, right, left, you allow your mind to wander and just let your feet carry you where they will. How could this have happened? You are supposed to be a hero! A young knight in training, you had such a promising future… + + +Time passes and the sky darkens as you continue to roam without purpose. Self-wallowing will certainly help you in your quest for glory. You meander deeper into the forest, down into a dell. A coyote’s howl jars you back to reality. You slump against a rock beside a bubbling stream and bury your head into your hand. + + +“Everything I ever dreamed,” you scream, “ripped apart and devoured by some beast from hell.” + + +“Oh, do tell,” whispers a soft voice from behind. “I love stories about fallen heroes.” The voice giggles. “Or, would-be heroes.” + + +Slippery wet fingers trace your cheeks and run through your hair. A veil of mist seeps into the dell. Queer sensations stir in the pit of your gut. You think you are being enchanted, and you are not sure if that is necessarily a bad thing. + + +“Who are you?” + + +“I have many names,” sings the sweet voice. Her fingers caress your body. You feel at ease in her arms, as if all the aches in your body and pains in your mind wash away at her command. “But you may call me Organa Mel Fy.” + + +“What are you?” + + +“Ah, now that is a better question, but still not the right one.” You feel her teeth nibble at your neck. “I am an angel to some: demon to others. Last question my sweetness, make it count.” +> Kill it +When in doubt, flay ‘em like a trout. Swift as a cat hopped up on methamphetamines you draw your sword, spin around, and hack off Organa Mel Fy’s head. Magic may not be dope, but you sure are. + + +What didn’t you know? Magic is a stimulating drug. That’s why even the best wizards are twitchy and half-cracked in the head. Shit’s addictive, man. + + +Whoa, what the hell is going on? Organa Mel Fy’s body and freshly decapitated head melt into what appears to be water and seeps into the ground. That is not normal. Perhaps now would be a good time to get out of here. You are still feeling funny from the magic and can swear you are being watched as you clamber up out of the dell. In fact, your feet are moving in a flurry, but it does not seem like you are getting anywhere. You definitely passed that big ass maple like five times already. + + +You whirl around and brandish your sword. “Ok, what the fuck gives? Will the mysterious magic bitch or bastard please stand up?” + + +“If you insist.” A mysterious magic bitch with bountiful breasts appears before you out of thin air wearing low-cut red robes. She reeks of magic and virility. + + +“Listen, err, lady, my day’s been one odious load of shit, so unless you want me to wrap you up in the stink, I suggest you bugger off.” + + +The woman’s lips curl into a seductive smirk. “Aren’t you curious as to whom I am, or what I am going to offer you?” + + +“At this point, I really don’t give a damn.” + + +“Perhaps you should.” + + +“Perhaps you should suck my dick.” + + +“If that is what you truly desire, that may be arranged. But for now, you will listen to my proposal like a good puppy.” The woman raises her hand, immobilizing your body with her magic. “Now then-“ +> Hear her out. +“If you agree to be my obedient and ever loyal servant, I will allow you to be my second in command and we shall rule the world with a magical fist! I’ll even fix up your arm for you, much better than that crackpot Osprey could do for you too.” + + +“Can I be a Knight in Shining Armor?” + + +“You can be a Black Knight.” + + +“Awww, that’s not heroic at all.” + + +“Well, you could just be my Dragon.” + + +“You’ll turn me into a dragon! That’s awesome!” + + +“No. A Dragon is a trope. Don’t you have the internet?” + + +“What’s a trope? Or the internet? Is it like a cliché?” + + +Organa Mel Fy face palms. “Go here and waste countless hours of your life and educate yourself. http://tvtropes.org/pmwiki/pmwiki.php/Main/HomePage” + + +“I don’t speak foreign. Just Common.” + + +“I think I’ll just kill you.” + + +And so she does. Now you are free to lose your soul in the vast voids of the internet.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When in doubt, flay ‘em like a trout. Swift as a cat hopped up on methamphetamines you draw your sword, spin around, and hack off Organa Mel Fy’s head. Magic may not be dope, but you sure are. + + +What didn’t you know? Magic is a stimulating drug. That’s why even the best wizards are twitchy and half-cracked in the head. Shit’s addictive, man. + + +Whoa, what the hell is going on? Organa Mel Fy’s body and freshly decapitated head melt into what appears to be water and seeps into the ground. That is not normal. Perhaps now would be a good time to get out of here. You are still feeling funny from the magic and can swear you are being watched as you clamber up out of the dell. In fact, your feet are moving in a flurry, but it does not seem like you are getting anywhere. You definitely passed that big ass maple like five times already. + + +You whirl around and brandish your sword. “Ok, what the fuck gives? Will the mysterious magic bitch or bastard please stand up?” + + +“If you insist.” A mysterious magic bitch with bountiful breasts appears before you out of thin air wearing low-cut red robes. She reeks of magic and virility. + + +“Listen, err, lady, my day’s been one odious load of shit, so unless you want me to wrap you up in the stink, I suggest you bugger off.” + + +The woman’s lips curl into a seductive smirk. “Aren’t you curious as to whom I am, or what I am going to offer you?” + + +“At this point, I really don’t give a damn.” + + +“Perhaps you should.” + + +“Perhaps you should suck my dick.” + + +“If that is what you truly desire, that may be arranged. But for now, you will listen to my proposal like a good puppy.” The woman raises her hand, immobilizing your body with her magic. “Now then-“ +> Spit in her face. +Spitting isn’t exactly heroic, unless you’re a cowboy. Unfortunately for you, you are not a cowboy. + + +You hack a glob of spittle onto the woman’s face. “I’ll cut your fucking heart out. Bitch.” + + +“Interesting, I’d love to see you try.” The woman wipes your saliva from her face, as you remain helplessly immobilized. “Yes, that’s what I thought. Though I imagined you had a little more sense in you than that. You are not the vessel I am looking for. That is clear to me now. Still, I can use your corpse as a fine minion. And you gave me such a wonderful idea of how to kill you.” + + +The mysterious magic bitch magics up a dagger and proceeds to cut out your heart, which she then consumes. You watch in horror as the last moments of your life fade away. Perhaps, antagonizing your captor was not the best of ideas. + + +Sadly, you cannot even enjoy peace in death, as the mysterious magic bitch reanimates your corpse to do her bidding, trapping your soul within your decaying body. The tasks she orders you to perform are humiliating and degrading, but there is nothing you can do. You are hers, now and forever.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When in doubt, flay ‘em like a trout. Swift as a cat hopped up on methamphetamines you draw your sword, spin around, and hack off Organa Mel Fy’s head. Magic may not be dope, but you sure are. + + +What didn’t you know? Magic is a stimulating drug. That’s why even the best wizards are twitchy and half-cracked in the head. Shit’s addictive, man. + + +Whoa, what the hell is going on? Organa Mel Fy’s body and freshly decapitated head melt into what appears to be water and seeps into the ground. That is not normal. Perhaps now would be a good time to get out of here. You are still feeling funny from the magic and can swear you are being watched as you clamber up out of the dell. In fact, your feet are moving in a flurry, but it does not seem like you are getting anywhere. You definitely passed that big ass maple like five times already. + + +You whirl around and brandish your sword. “Ok, what the fuck gives? Will the mysterious magic bitch or bastard please stand up?” + + +“If you insist.” A mysterious magic bitch with bountiful breasts appears before you out of thin air wearing low-cut red robes. She reeks of magic and virility. + + +“Listen, err, lady, my day’s been one odious load of shit, so unless you want me to wrap you up in the stink, I suggest you bugger off.” + + +The woman’s lips curl into a seductive smirk. “Aren’t you curious as to whom I am, or what I am going to offer you?” + + +“At this point, I really don’t give a damn.” + + +“Perhaps you should.” + + +“Perhaps you should suck my dick.” + + +“If that is what you truly desire, that may be arranged. But for now, you will listen to my proposal like a good puppy.” The woman raises her hand, immobilizing your body with her magic. “Now then-“ +> Struggle to break the spell with sheer willpower. +Ah, yes, the only thing more powerful than the human spirit is the spirit of a hero. You dig deep inside yourself, channeling your energy into an explosion of heroism. Eww, gross, it smells… sticky. + + +“- hey wait, what are you doing?” shrieks the mysterious magic bitch as you take a step forward. She doubles her efforts to paralyze you, but you are fixated on your goal and nothing is going to stand in your way. You cock your arm and deliver a vicious left hook. Crack. “Foolish mortal,” she screams as blood dribbles down into her frock, “that was most unwise.” + + +It really was, you think as you massage your broken hand against your thigh. Why didn’t I just hack off her head? + + +Good question hero, how do you plan to kill her now with one arm and a broken hand? + + +I dunno, but it was worth it. The blood glistens gorgeously on her bosom. + + +Maybe. If you are into that kind of stuff. But the time for internal dialogue and wall shattering is over, you have a situation here. + + +The mysterious magic bitch hurls a poorly aimed fireball in your direction. “I bet you don’t even have it in you to kill a woman!” + + +“Didn’t I just kill that water creature thingy? What was her name, Morgan Le Fay?” + + +“Organa Mel Fy, you fool!” The mysterious magic bitch hurls another fireball, but once again, her aim is so dreadful you do not even have to dodge. + + +“Oh, whatever.” + + +“Did you really think that half-witted harpy was the real Organa Mel Fy, sorceress supreme?” + + +“Kind of.” + + +“Well she wasn’t! I am!” + + +Organa Mel Fy whips up a magic firestorm, igniting the forest in a blaze of light and charred forest critters. You have to respect her strategy. When you cannot hit the broad side of a barn, just fire a broadside and blow everything to hell. + + +“I could have given you power beyond your wildest dreams! Sex the likes of which you have never known possible! We could have ruled the world together and ascended into the divine! Now DIE!” + + +Flames lick at you from all angles while smoldering branches and roasted birds tumble around you. Your stomach rumbles and mouth waters. Too bad you do not have time for a snack; a nice greasy roasted duck would really hit the spot right about now. One problem at a time though. You think you see a small avenue of escape, but you will have to bolt for it now. Of course, running away admits defeat. +> Fight +I didn’t know you were courting Death. + + +I’m not. What the hell are you talking about? + + +Oh dear, this is awkward. + + +What!? + + +I just assumed you had a date with Death, how else to explain such an absolute act of pure, unadulterated retardation. + + +Crashing through the inferno, you barrel toward Organa Mel Fy as the flames sear your skin. One armed and broken handed, I’m certain the fight would have been worthy to watch. Sadly, you collapse before you close even half the gap where the dancing fires consume your corpse. + + +It is a shame really. You came so close to discovering Organa Mel Fy’s secret. I actually thought you were going to make it. Instead, Organa Mel Fy did the world a service by culling a hero that just wasn’t cut out for the job.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Ah, yes, the only thing more powerful than the human spirit is the spirit of a hero. You dig deep inside yourself, channeling your energy into an explosion of heroism. Eww, gross, it smells… sticky. + + +“- hey wait, what are you doing?” shrieks the mysterious magic bitch as you take a step forward. She doubles her efforts to paralyze you, but you are fixated on your goal and nothing is going to stand in your way. You cock your arm and deliver a vicious left hook. Crack. “Foolish mortal,” she screams as blood dribbles down into her frock, “that was most unwise.” + + +It really was, you think as you massage your broken hand against your thigh. Why didn’t I just hack off her head? + + +Good question hero, how do you plan to kill her now with one arm and a broken hand? + + +I dunno, but it was worth it. The blood glistens gorgeously on her bosom. + + +Maybe. If you are into that kind of stuff. But the time for internal dialogue and wall shattering is over, you have a situation here. + + +The mysterious magic bitch hurls a poorly aimed fireball in your direction. “I bet you don’t even have it in you to kill a woman!” + + +“Didn’t I just kill that water creature thingy? What was her name, Morgan Le Fay?” + + +“Organa Mel Fy, you fool!” The mysterious magic bitch hurls another fireball, but once again, her aim is so dreadful you do not even have to dodge. + + +“Oh, whatever.” + + +“Did you really think that half-witted harpy was the real Organa Mel Fy, sorceress supreme?” + + +“Kind of.” + + +“Well she wasn’t! I am!” + + +Organa Mel Fy whips up a magic firestorm, igniting the forest in a blaze of light and charred forest critters. You have to respect her strategy. When you cannot hit the broad side of a barn, just fire a broadside and blow everything to hell. + + +“I could have given you power beyond your wildest dreams! Sex the likes of which you have never known possible! We could have ruled the world together and ascended into the divine! Now DIE!” + + +Flames lick at you from all angles while smoldering branches and roasted birds tumble around you. Your stomach rumbles and mouth waters. Too bad you do not have time for a snack; a nice greasy roasted duck would really hit the spot right about now. One problem at a time though. You think you see a small avenue of escape, but you will have to bolt for it now. Of course, running away admits defeat. +> Flee +Sometimes you have to lose the battle to win the war. You seize your opportunity to escape and disappear in the smoky haze. That crazy loon must have set half the forest on fire. Things cannot get much worse at least, right? + + +A gale pummels you from behind and knocks you down. Coals soar through the air. The force of the wind uproots entire trees, filling the air with splintering missiles of fire and death. Shit just got worse. + + +“Oh come on,” you mutter, “the bitch has to have some limit to her magic.” + + +You stagger onto your feet and proceed to dodge the incredible amount of bullshit and debris flying through the air all the way back to Osprey’s ramshackle birdshit hut. Osprey and Jon are sitting on stumps around a bonfire drinking tea, completely ignoring the magic fire engulfing the forest. + + +Osprey nudges Jon with his elbow. “See, I told ya he’d come back. They always come back.” + + +“Never doubted you for a second Osprey. The boy is young. He’ll learn.” + + +You throw up your arms in exasperation. “In case you two didn’t notice, we have a situation here.” + + +“You heroes today, always in such a hurry.” Osprey bops you on the head with his staff. “Never taking any time to stop and smell the pteguonias.” Osprey takes a deep whiff. “Putrid.” + + +“That’s your birdshit hut burning up.” + + +Osprey’s eyebrows shoot up, nearly off his forehead. “Damnit, Organa, you’ve gone too far this time. Show yourself! It ends now!” + + +Organa Mel Fy once again materializes out of thin air. She blasts an ice spike through Osprey’s heart without so much as a howdy-do. The cooky old hedge wizard voids his bowels and leaves this world once and for all. So much for getting a new arm. + + +Jon draws his sword. This battle may rest entirely on his blade now because you certainly do not appear to be in any condition to help. “Heartless harpy,” he growls. + + +Organa Mel Fy shrugs, which causes her bountiful breasts to bounce beautifully. “Well aren’t you a luscious lug. The world is a better place without the old fart stinking up half the forest. And I assure you, while I may be tart, I do have a heart. I know I just met you, and this may seem a tad crazy. But I’m ovulating, so would you like to make a baby?” + + +“Well, I am a sucker for gingers.” + + +“Power, sex, and divinity, we could have it all.” + + +Jon lowers his sword. “That is tempting.” + + +“Jon, what the hell!” You make a fist and drop to your knees in pain. Yep, still broke. + + +Jon stares at you with puppy dog eyes. “But she’s a ginger! I love gingers. Besides, heroes aren’t supposed to hit girls let alone kill them. That’s villainy right there.” + + +The man makes a strong argument. Are you really willing to begin the long dark descent down the path of debauchery and villainy just to stop one lone psychotic bitch with a magic addiction? Maybe it is not too late for you to get in on the action too. Organa Mel Fy does have a pretty sweet body and has a serious sexual appetite. There are probably some fantastic adventures awaiting the three of you in your potential sexcapades. +> Grope Organa Mel Fy +Something has been off about Organa Mel Fy ever since you first took a whiff of her presence. Eureka, that’s it! You just have to get close enough to check and make sure. + + +“Organa, I think I made a terrible mistake. Just think of all the sexy good times the three of us could have.” + + +“Hmmm, maybe.” Organa’s eyes fall to your junk, judging you. + + +You saunter over to Organa Mel Fy, trying your best to look charming and horny. Yeah, she wants some of that. When you get in close, you shove your hand down her robes and clutch onto her naughty bits. Son of a peasant, you were right! + + +“She’s packing heat Jon,” you shout as you simultaneously twist Organa Mel Fy’s genitals and headbutt her in the temple. “I knew I smelled the unmistakable musk of virility on you when we first met.” + + +Jon gawks stupidly. “You mean Organa Mel Fy is a transsexual?” + + +You mercilessly curb stomp Organa Mel Fy into the forest floor, not feeling the least bit bad about it. “Nope, she’s a hermaphrodite.” + + +“Oh, wow. That could have got… kinky?” + + +“Not the word I would have used, but you’re probably right.” + + +“You’re still kind of beating up a woman you know.” + + +“Eh, it’s got a penis. I think my hero’s soul is safe.” + + +“You son of a whore!” Tears pour down Organa’s cheeks. “We could have achieved great things, the three of us, united as a triumvirate of power, glory, and sexual ecstasy.” + + +This is true. Do you want to give all of that up? I know it requires a new perspective on life and an open mind, but that sounds interesting if nothing else. You could shatter boundaries and usher in a new age of sexual exploration and understanding. Then again, she does want to take over the known world, so it is not like she’s a nice lady… gentleman... person. Or is (s)he just misunderstood? +> Heroes kill evil things. She's evil. +You don’t make the rules; you just follow them. Canon dictates you kill all evil things that cross your path. Open-mindedness is not canon. Therefore, it must be evil. When was the last time you read a cliché story about two homoerotic knights swordfighting their way through the kingdom, never. + + +A few curb stomps later, Organa Mel Fy is dead. Congratulations, you rid the world of a great evil. Jon shoots a passing red herring. Ain’t nobody got time for that. + + +Jon slaps you on the back. “Well kid, turns out you had it in you to be a hero after all. You’ll earn a knighthood for this beautiful handiwork, no doubt. How do you feel?” + + +“Dirty.” + + +“Nothing a good bath won’t fix.” + + +“So what happens next?” + + +“Oh, I imagine you’ll have some titillating adventures over the years and wind up marrying a big bosomed princess with blond hair and blue eyes. She’ll give birth to a brood of little prince-lings and you’ll grow old in a nice big ass castle. Doubt you’ll ever get your arm fixed though. You proved today you don’t need it.” + + +“That sounds fine by me.” + + +“Amen. A cliché life is a happy life.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Something has been off about Organa Mel Fy ever since you first took a whiff of her presence. Eureka, that’s it! You just have to get close enough to check and make sure. + + +“Organa, I think I made a terrible mistake. Just think of all the sexy good times the three of us could have.” + + +“Hmmm, maybe.” Organa’s eyes fall to your junk, judging you. + + +You saunter over to Organa Mel Fy, trying your best to look charming and horny. Yeah, she wants some of that. When you get in close, you shove your hand down her robes and clutch onto her naughty bits. Son of a peasant, you were right! + + +“She’s packing heat Jon,” you shout as you simultaneously twist Organa Mel Fy’s genitals and headbutt her in the temple. “I knew I smelled the unmistakable musk of virility on you when we first met.” + + +Jon gawks stupidly. “You mean Organa Mel Fy is a transsexual?” + + +You mercilessly curb stomp Organa Mel Fy into the forest floor, not feeling the least bit bad about it. “Nope, she’s a hermaphrodite.” + + +“Oh, wow. That could have got… kinky?” + + +“Not the word I would have used, but you’re probably right.” + + +“You’re still kind of beating up a woman you know.” + + +“Eh, it’s got a penis. I think my hero’s soul is safe.” + + +“You son of a whore!” Tears pour down Organa’s cheeks. “We could have achieved great things, the three of us, united as a triumvirate of power, glory, and sexual ecstasy.” + + +This is true. Do you want to give all of that up? I know it requires a new perspective on life and an open mind, but that sounds interesting if nothing else. You could shatter boundaries and usher in a new age of sexual exploration and understanding. Then again, she does want to take over the known world, so it is not like she’s a nice lady… gentleman... person. Or is (s)he just misunderstood? +> Heroes show compassion and understanding. +With time and love, you are convinced that Organa Mel Fy can be converted into a peaceful member of society. Perhaps she will even redeem herself and become a hero. As much as you would like to tell yourself that your actions are purely heroic, deep down you know what you really wanted. Don’t worry, I won’t judge you. After all, you are at that age of sexual hyperactivity where the only thing on your mind is sex, and sex, and sex, and sex. + + +You offer Organa Mel Fy an awkward hand of love and friendship, which she accepts, not that (s)he has much of a choice at this point. You, Jon and Organa Mel Fy consummate your union in the smoldering ruins of a once proud forest and Osprey’s birdshit hut. The sensations you experience are… unique. + + +The divine overseer in the eternal heavens is rather displeased with your choice. Canon dictates Organa Mel Fy is evil and deserving of a gruesome death. You cannot just spit in the face of canon and expect to come out unharmed. Consequently, the titles of knight and hero are beyond your grasp. Naturally, you turn to a life of villainy in retaliation. + + +Years pass and your unholy union is on the verge of kingdom-wide conquest and savagery. The bedroom antics are as fierce and wild as ever. Organa Mel Fy didn’t lie about the sexual ecstasy. It’s amazing what a little magic can do in the bedroom. By the screams, one would swear the dead are cumming. But kingdom-wide devastation is not all sex games. Castles lay in ruin, cities burn, and famine and plague ravage the land. You personally hunted down and rape murdered every last unicorn to prevent the birth of another hero who may one day end your reign of terror. Fortunately, villains always get their comeuppance in the end. + + +One day while enjoying your depravity a rouge dragon from the nearby kingdom of Irelandshire flies overhead and roasts the three of you in a blast of dragonfire. The wyrm proceeds to eat you and utilize your energy as an aphrodisiac. The dragon is celebrated as a hero and he and his mate are pronounced king and queen of the kingdom. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Sometimes you have to lose the battle to win the war. You seize your opportunity to escape and disappear in the smoky haze. That crazy loon must have set half the forest on fire. Things cannot get much worse at least, right? + + +A gale pummels you from behind and knocks you down. Coals soar through the air. The force of the wind uproots entire trees, filling the air with splintering missiles of fire and death. Shit just got worse. + + +“Oh come on,” you mutter, “the bitch has to have some limit to her magic.” + + +You stagger onto your feet and proceed to dodge the incredible amount of bullshit and debris flying through the air all the way back to Osprey’s ramshackle birdshit hut. Osprey and Jon are sitting on stumps around a bonfire drinking tea, completely ignoring the magic fire engulfing the forest. + + +Osprey nudges Jon with his elbow. “See, I told ya he’d come back. They always come back.” + + +“Never doubted you for a second Osprey. The boy is young. He’ll learn.” + + +You throw up your arms in exasperation. “In case you two didn’t notice, we have a situation here.” + + +“You heroes today, always in such a hurry.” Osprey bops you on the head with his staff. “Never taking any time to stop and smell the pteguonias.” Osprey takes a deep whiff. “Putrid.” + + +“That’s your birdshit hut burning up.” + + +Osprey’s eyebrows shoot up, nearly off his forehead. “Damnit, Organa, you’ve gone too far this time. Show yourself! It ends now!” + + +Organa Mel Fy once again materializes out of thin air. She blasts an ice spike through Osprey’s heart without so much as a howdy-do. The cooky old hedge wizard voids his bowels and leaves this world once and for all. So much for getting a new arm. + + +Jon draws his sword. This battle may rest entirely on his blade now because you certainly do not appear to be in any condition to help. “Heartless harpy,” he growls. + + +Organa Mel Fy shrugs, which causes her bountiful breasts to bounce beautifully. “Well aren’t you a luscious lug. The world is a better place without the old fart stinking up half the forest. And I assure you, while I may be tart, I do have a heart. I know I just met you, and this may seem a tad crazy. But I’m ovulating, so would you like to make a baby?” + + +“Well, I am a sucker for gingers.” + + +“Power, sex, and divinity, we could have it all.” + + +Jon lowers his sword. “That is tempting.” + + +“Jon, what the hell!” You make a fist and drop to your knees in pain. Yep, still broke. + + +Jon stares at you with puppy dog eyes. “But she’s a ginger! I love gingers. Besides, heroes aren’t supposed to hit girls let alone kill them. That’s villainy right there.” + + +The man makes a strong argument. Are you really willing to begin the long dark descent down the path of debauchery and villainy just to stop one lone psychotic bitch with a magic addiction? Maybe it is not too late for you to get in on the action too. Organa Mel Fy does have a pretty sweet body and has a serious sexual appetite. There are probably some fantastic adventures awaiting the three of you in your potential sexcapades. +> Villain Smillain, I'm saving the day. +“I don’t give a damn if she is a woman, I’m kicking her ass.” + + +Jon sighs. “Fine, but you owe me a red-headed whore.” + + +“Dude, Jon, man, you need therapy.” + + +“No, I need a fire-crotch to melt the icy walls of my soul.” + + +Organa Mel Fy claps her hands together. “What a wonderful idea. Ice and fire! And in song form.” She claps her hands once more, and a snowstorm blizzards into existence. Ice, fire, and steam clash together while small mutant dwarf elves dance and sing in circles. + + +A song and storm of ice and fire, while we strum on our lyre. + + +Hit the bong and throw ‘em in the fryer, while we drum by the funeral pyre. + + +Dum dee dee dum dum dum dum ho, dum dee dee dum dum dum dum wo, + + +Magic in the morning. + + +Watch them suffer hear them scream, while we make love by the bubbling stream. + + +Botch the murder we die as a team, while we fuck in a collective dream. + + +Dum dee dee dum dum dum dum ho, dum dee dee dum dum dum dum wo, + + +Magic in the morning. + + +Drink blood red wine at a wedding on the river, hope we get to dine on someone’s liver. + + +The bread is fine honey don’t you shiver, hope we bet on the cruelest sinner. + + +Dum dee dee dum dum dum dum ho, dum dee dee dum dum dum dum wo, + + +Magic in the morning. + + +If you suckle too long on Organa’s teat, we hope you find an extra treat. + + +We may chuckle ‘cause she’s packing heat, pray we don’t die for this beat. + + +Dum dee dee dum dum dum dum ho, dum dee dee dum dum dum dum wo, + + +Magic in the morning. + + +You blink and rub your eyes. “Jon, I think I’m tripping. I inhaled a lot of smoke; there must be some wicked shrooms growing in the forest.” + + +“Either that or the narrator isn’t even trying anymore.” + + +A flaming chunk of ice crashes into the back of Jon’s skull. The poor bastard never saw it coming. He topples to the ground like a turd. You feel your emotions building up, too surreal to touch. They boil over and burst. You feel yourself nut, but it doesn’t matter it’s time to get rough. + + +“Bam! Pow!” you shout. + + +Organa Mel Fy cocks her head and gawks at you. “Uhm, excuse me?” + + +“Those are the sound effects about to go off upside your head, bitch.” + + +Bam. Pow. + + +Your headbutt kick to the jaw combo work perfectly. Organa Mel Fy hits the ground, and the magical maladies plaguing the forest vanish. Tears well in her eyes as you end her miserable existence by stomping on her face. + + +“Too bad so sad,” you say. “By choosing villainy over heroism you brought this on yourself.” + + +With one final stomp, the light in Organa Mel Fy’s eyes go out, hopefully for good. You never know with these magic types. They come back like cockroaches or supposedly dead G.R.R.M characters. Just playing homie, we love you. + + +Jon picks himself off the ground and massages the back of his head. “Eh, I’ve had worse.” + + +You nod. “Good to hear.” + + +Well congratulations my noble crippled hero. You killed the evil Organa Mel Fy. Now go find Jon a fire-crotch like you owe him.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>In your eagerness to fight at Jon’s side, you forget the most important lesson of your training: always dodge. + + +A troll whips a horse leg in your direction. Off balance and off guard, you cannot avoid the hurling limb as the hoof nails you in the shoulder, severing your sword arm. Blood spouts like a geyser from your body as you crumple to the road. + + +“Bowie, help Jon!” Samwellington shrieks. “I’ve got the kid.” Samwellington stumbles to your side and rolls you onto your back. “Hang in there little buddy. It’s going to be alright.” + + +Blood loss is making you delusional. It is the only way to explain what is happening. Samwellington draws his dagger and sticks himself in the gut. He drags the blade across his stomach, slips his hand into the incision, and pulls out a chunk of his own fat. He smacks the lard on your wound and it sticks in place, stemming the blood flow. + + +“Can you walk?” asks Samwellington. + + +“Can I walk? Can I walk! I just had my fucking arm cleaved off. What the fuck do you think?” + + +“Yeah, an arm, not a leg. Don’t be a baby.” + + +“Sam we could really use your fat ass over here,” shouts Bowie. “Any motherfucking time!” + + +You hear a gurgle and a gasp just before Bowie’s head goes sailing through the air. Samwellington gulps and scurries away to hide behind the wreckage of the wagon. What a coward. Oh well, at least he saved your life. + + +Leaning against your sword, you stagger to your feet. One of the trolls ravages Bowie’s headless corpse. The crunching and snapping of bones sickens you, and you fight the urge to hurl as bile tickles your throat. Jon appears to be holding his ground against the other troll, but once his friend finishes devouring Bowie’s corpse, even Jon won’t be able to fend off their combined savagery. You have to do something quick or all of your worthless lives will be over. +> Charge into the fray. +You throw caution and sanity to the wind and charge into the fray. + + +Well, charge is a kind term. You mostly stagger along the blood-slicked road, swaying from side to side, until you topple over and slam your head against the cobblestones. Your sword flies from your grasp and slides beyond your reach. Adjusting to missing limbs takes time. + + +Both trolls look up, and in your blurred vision, you swear they are laughing at you. + + +Mocked by a troll, you think, how embarrassing. + + +Jon takes advantages of your momentary distraction and hacks his troll in the legs, sending the beast to its knees. The troll roars. Jon drives his blade into the troll’s open mouth and out the back of its throat. One down. + + +The second troll grabs the remnants of Bowie’s body and rushes toward you. The troll stands above you and squeezes the juices from what used to be Bowie, taking care to cover every inch of you in Bowie juice. The stink is agonizing. + + +“Oh my god,” Samwellington cries, “He’s marinating you!” + + +“Just kill me you son of a bitch,” you sputter as you spit some of the vile goop from your mouth. + + +The troll grips you by the shoulders and bares his teeth. The tip of a blade tears through the troll’s chest. Troll blood and the sweet smell of apples descend upon you. And the troll’s lifeless corpse… which crushes you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Hell yeah I’m in.” + + +Jon nods. “Glad to hear it.” + + +This could be your big chance to finally prove yourself. You need to get your name out there if you want to have any chance of receiving a knighthood someday. They do not just hand those things out like… well, nobody has ever actually handed you anything except a nice big steaming pile of shit. Peasantry blows. + + +Under cover of darkness, you and the three guards head out along the Baron’s Road in the back of a covered wagon. No one has ever thought of ambushing bandits in a covered wagon while guised as merchants. Surely, the plan will go off without a hitch. + + +Samwellington the Fat jitters in his seat. You are not sure if it is because he is scared or hungry. How Sam became a member of the guard is beyond your imagination. Jon trusts him for some reason, and that is good enough for you. “Nervous kid?” he asks. + + +That you might eat me. “No. If Jon says I’m ready, then I’m ready.” + + +Bowie bobs his head. “It’s best to trust Jon. I didn’t once and then my world went to shit. That draugr attack during the winter of ’69 was brutal… I still have nightmares.” + + +Jon rolls his eyes. “If you hadn’t st-” + + +“Hey, let’s let bygones be bygones,” says Bowie. + + +“Hey do you hear that?” you ask. + + +“Sorry, my stomach rumbles when I travel,” says Samwellington. + + +“No, not-” + + +The horses whinny and bolt. One of the wheels catches a snag in the road and topples over. Luckily, you land on Samwellington’s gut. Jon cuts a hole in the wagon covering and climbs out into the night, and you and Bowie follow. + + +“Oh, fuck…” Jon clutches his sword in both hands and rushes. + + +Two trolls tower over the corpses of the horses and the wagon driver, tearing chunks of bloody flesh with the effort you would rip apart a boiled chicken. +> DODGE!!! +All of Jon’s training really pays off. Using your sixth sense, you see the attack coming leagues away. With all the grace of youth, you jump to the side as a horse leg soars past your ear. Quite unfortunate for Bowie, who takes the hoof straight in the face. You do not even look. The crack and thump tells you all you need to know. + + +Dodging more chunks of horse and human, you maneuver your way to Jon and the trolls. Master and apprentice stand back-to-back as you fend off the fearsome beasts. Dodge, parry, dodge, dodge, strike, dodge, parry, dodge, dodge, dodge, strike. And so the battle goes. Troll blood drenches you as you hack away. Surprisingly, it smells like apples. + + +“Jon,” you say, while dodging another troll fist, “they keep regenerating when I dodge them. It’s a troll blood bath, but they aren’t going down.” + + +“DODGE!” Jon shouts. “Always DODGE!” + + +“Then RAM,” screams Samwellington, bulling into the fray. By the sound of the collision, you think Samwellington just tackled Jon’s troll. What an awful, squishy sound. + + +“Where the fuck have you been?” you ask. + + +“Cowering.” + + +Your troll swings its long hairy arms wide and claps them together, aiming for your head. You dodge and slide along the blood slicked ground, slashing the beast’s legs as you slip between them. Hopping to your feet, you deliver the finishing blow as the beast drops to its knees before splashing face first into a puddle of its own blood. + + +Jon’s troll has met the same fate. Jon appears unwounded, though breathing heavily, leaning on his sword. + + +“Oh, dear god! Samwellington!” + + +Samwellington lies on the ground with a grisly gash on his robust gut that looks inches deep. “Oh don’t worry,” he says. “They just cut into the fat. I always knew eating all that pork lard would pay off one day.” + + +Jon smirks. “See, I told you. Dodge.” + + +“I won’t question you again Jon. Too bad about Bowie though.” + + +“Meh, he was a fucking dick anyway.” + + +Sam struggles to sit up. “I don’t think those trolls were the reason those people went disappearing.” + + +You nod. “Because all this blood and gore would have been pretty hard to miss.” + + +“No. Because there are five guys with loaded crossbows behind you.” + + +“Shit.” +> Turn and rush them. +Without a moment’s hesitation, you turn and rush the bandits. You are the fledgling hero of this story after all, and the hero always wins. The bandits either agree or are too shocked by your blazen stupidity and gawk at you as you close the gap. + + +By the time one of them gathers his wits, three of them are dead at your feet. A bolt grazes your cheek as you cut the fourth man down. The fifth man, who fired the bolt, turns to flee back into the forest. He does not make it. Jon skewers him from behind. + + +“That’s going to be quite the scar,” says Jon. “It’s not so much a deforming scar as a handsome, charismatic scar. All great heroes get them. Chicks dig it.” + + +“I don’t have one,” whines Samwellington. + + +Jon rolls his eyes. “Yeah, I wonder why.” + + +The three of you hobble back to the hamlet. You have one of the priests help draft a report of the incident and send a runner to deliver it to the baron. Some unimportant nobodies go clean up the mess while you kick back and relax. Not bad for a (k)night’s work. + + +“Good work today kid, but don’t get ahead of yourself kid,” says Jon. “You still have a long way to go to be a true knight. It takes hard work to bang a princess and ride off into the sunset. Oh, and remember.” + + +“Dodge,” you say in unison. + + +The baron is pleased with what he reads in the report. You become Bowie’s replacement in the hamlet guard and undertake some other minor missions with Jon and Samwellington. Soon you become a bit of a celebrity and inspiration, and your fame goes countywide. Priests take time out of their day to tutor you in your letters, and the baron invites you and Jon to take place in the next tournament he’s hosting. The king will even be there; it is supposed to be quite the shindig. Things are looking up. All you have to decide now is what event you are going to compete. +> Compete in the joust. +For reasons far beyond normal human comprehension, you elect to compete in the joust: never mind the fact that you do not own a horse and have never held a lance in your life. Remember, dodging is against the rules in a joust, so you are not exactly playing to your strengths. + + +During a morning patrol, you and Jon discuss the upcoming tournament. + + +“I still think you should participate in the melee with me instead,” says Jon. “But if you’re dead set on jousting, you’re going to need a horse.” + + +“Any recommendations?” you ask. + + +“Jousting horses are expensive. You’re either going to need a big loan or a big friend. And don’t forget, if you lose the joust, you lose your horse and your armor.” + + +“Can I use a quarter-horse? I bet old man Nathaniel David would let me borrow Bessy.” + + +“Sure. You can ride out naked too, but you’ll just embarrass yourself.” Jon smacks you upside the head. “If you aren’t going to take this seriously, don’t even bother showing up.” + + +You finish your patrol with Jon and head over to old man Nathaniel David’s orchard before you visiting the moneylender in the next town. You know it is not wise to ignore Jon’s advice, but you want to keep your options open. Old man Nathaniel David proves easy to find, he is humped over, shitting on a sapling when you arrive. + + +“Um, what are you doing David?” + + +“Fertilizing,” he says with a massive grin. “What can I do for you lad?” He sticks out his hand for you to shake, which you begrudgingly accept. + + +“I decided to joust in the king’s tournament, but I don’t have a horse.” + + +“Ah, well, I can’t imagine you’d want to use any of the horses in the hamlet. Plow horses ain’t going to win that for you, but I know you don’t have much money. So if you want Bessy, you can have her, on one condition.” + + +“What’s that?” + + +“If by some miracle you win, you name my lil’ pumpkin, Sally, Lady Fair of the Tournament. If you lose, you pay me back by marrying her. You’re a good lad, and you’d make a fine husband for my girl.” + + +You have seen Sally David before, strutting around. She has a fine body for a wench, but holy matrimony is her face hideous. It looks like someone took a rake and beat her bloody. You will have to mull this one over; these are high stakes. Even if you won, you could offend many important people. + + +“Alright, David, I’ll keep the offer in mind,” you say as you wave goodbye. + + +Old man Nathaniel David hitches up his trousers and nods. “You do that, boy.” + + +The Baron’s Road has been nice and calm ever since you took care of those trolls and bandits, and you arrive at the moneylender’s office without incident. The moneylender’s office is small and simple: one desk, two hard wooden chairs, and a few bookshelves. You have heard of these types before, and they are nothing but trouble. The moneylender skims over the pleasantries and bids you sit and begin your business. + + +“What can I do for you, friend?” he asks. His hair is dark and oily, eyes small and beady. An unnecessarily pointy goatee graces his chin. Yep, slap the evil and unscrupulous label on him. + + +“I need money for a horse to use in the joust. I’m one of the guys that killed those bandits and trolls on the Baron’s Road awhile back.” + + +“I know who you are,” he snaps. “I also know you have no money and no experience jousting.” + + +“How do you know that?” + + +“Because.” He points at his goatee. “Now I will lend you the money if you agree to my terms.” + + +“Which are?” + + +“If you win, I get 50% of the ransom and prize money. You keep the horse. If you lose, you become my personal slave for a year.” The moneylender pulls, ink, quill and parchment from his desk. “We can get the contract signed right now.” +> Done deal! +As you reach to sign the contract, the moneylender stabs your hand with the tip of the quill. He pops the end of the quill into his mouth and sucks the blood off with a loud slurp. Black and blood-red sparks shoot randomly from his body. Wings burst forth from his back and claws grow from his fingers. + + +“First, I kill you. Then, I rule the kingdom. Finally, I get all the bitches.” + + +You blink in confusion. “What?” + + +“That’s what is going to happen, and you can’t stop me.” + + +“Why did you drink my blood? Are you a vampire? So help me Stephanie, if you're lurking around here, I'll kick your ass.” + + +“There’s power in heroes blood.” + + +“And?” + + +“Actually, I have no idea what I am now. I was an evil sorcerer in disguise. Then I drank hero’s blood, and since I’m evil that would probably make me an anti-hero now.” + + +“Would I become an anti-villain if I drank your blood?” + + +“I don’t think it works like that.” + + +“Why not?” + + +Because you’re dead. The evil monster rips your head off with his claws and devours your corpse. That will teach you to make dirty deals with shady characters.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For reasons far beyond normal human comprehension, you elect to compete in the joust: never mind the fact that you do not own a horse and have never held a lance in your life. Remember, dodging is against the rules in a joust, so you are not exactly playing to your strengths. + + +During a morning patrol, you and Jon discuss the upcoming tournament. + + +“I still think you should participate in the melee with me instead,” says Jon. “But if you’re dead set on jousting, you’re going to need a horse.” + + +“Any recommendations?” you ask. + + +“Jousting horses are expensive. You’re either going to need a big loan or a big friend. And don’t forget, if you lose the joust, you lose your horse and your armor.” + + +“Can I use a quarter-horse? I bet old man Nathaniel David would let me borrow Bessy.” + + +“Sure. You can ride out naked too, but you’ll just embarrass yourself.” Jon smacks you upside the head. “If you aren’t going to take this seriously, don’t even bother showing up.” + + +You finish your patrol with Jon and head over to old man Nathaniel David’s orchard before you visiting the moneylender in the next town. You know it is not wise to ignore Jon’s advice, but you want to keep your options open. Old man Nathaniel David proves easy to find, he is humped over, shitting on a sapling when you arrive. + + +“Um, what are you doing David?” + + +“Fertilizing,” he says with a massive grin. “What can I do for you lad?” He sticks out his hand for you to shake, which you begrudgingly accept. + + +“I decided to joust in the king’s tournament, but I don’t have a horse.” + + +“Ah, well, I can’t imagine you’d want to use any of the horses in the hamlet. Plow horses ain’t going to win that for you, but I know you don’t have much money. So if you want Bessy, you can have her, on one condition.” + + +“What’s that?” + + +“If by some miracle you win, you name my lil’ pumpkin, Sally, Lady Fair of the Tournament. If you lose, you pay me back by marrying her. You’re a good lad, and you’d make a fine husband for my girl.” + + +You have seen Sally David before, strutting around. She has a fine body for a wench, but holy matrimony is her face hideous. It looks like someone took a rake and beat her bloody. You will have to mull this one over; these are high stakes. Even if you won, you could offend many important people. + + +“Alright, David, I’ll keep the offer in mind,” you say as you wave goodbye. + + +Old man Nathaniel David hitches up his trousers and nods. “You do that, boy.” + + +The Baron’s Road has been nice and calm ever since you took care of those trolls and bandits, and you arrive at the moneylender’s office without incident. The moneylender’s office is small and simple: one desk, two hard wooden chairs, and a few bookshelves. You have heard of these types before, and they are nothing but trouble. The moneylender skims over the pleasantries and bids you sit and begin your business. + + +“What can I do for you, friend?” he asks. His hair is dark and oily, eyes small and beady. An unnecessarily pointy goatee graces his chin. Yep, slap the evil and unscrupulous label on him. + + +“I need money for a horse to use in the joust. I’m one of the guys that killed those bandits and trolls on the Baron’s Road awhile back.” + + +“I know who you are,” he snaps. “I also know you have no money and no experience jousting.” + + +“How do you know that?” + + +“Because.” He points at his goatee. “Now I will lend you the money if you agree to my terms.” + + +“Which are?” + + +“If you win, I get 50% of the ransom and prize money. You keep the horse. If you lose, you become my personal slave for a year.” The moneylender pulls, ink, quill and parchment from his desk. “We can get the contract signed right now.” +> I'll just go with Bessy. +Probably not a great idea to borrow money from such an obviously evil character: you excuse yourself, leaving the moneylender fuming. He mutters something under his breath while stroking his goatee as you walk out the door. Perhaps you will cross paths with him again. + + +Your heart is still set on riding in the joust, so you head back to old man Nathaniel David’s orchard and agree to his bargain. You spend the remainder of your free time preparing for the tournament. Jon coaches you as best he can, which is not very well since he has never jousted either, but you think you have the hang of it. + + +Bessy’s training has mixed results. She works hard and seems to appreciate the change of scenery. You figure being a plow horse is probably pretty dull. She has spirit, but the old girl does a lot more plodding than charging. At least, she does not shy away when the other horse speeds toward her. + + +The day of the tournament dawns cool and crisp. Sweaty with excitement, you try to relax in your pavilion before your first match. You have already made water five times this morning, and you think you have to go again. So many things ride on the outcome of today’s events, but you cannot think about that. The here and now is what is important. You watch squires scurry around the grounds, doing the bidding of Sir this or Sir that or some other random bastard. You fall into a daze and your thoughts wander. + + +Why don’t I have a squire? Crap, I think I need to piss again. Dear lord, please grant me the strength and will to win today. I don’t want to marry that troll Sally David. Have you seen her? Oh, is that who I think it is? + + +Sir Jamison Hill, The Iron Boar, approaches and shakes your hand: what an honor! Ser Jamison serves as the Baron’s champion and is renowned throughout the kingdom for his tourney skills. + + +“I heard about how you helped take care of those bandits and trolls on the Baron’s Road,” he says. “The kingdom needs more fine young men like you. I expect to see great things from you today and in the future.” + + +“Thank you, sir.” + + +You want to talk some more with him – he certainly has plenty he could teach you – but the herald calls you for your first bout. You wave farewell and enter the lists, wishing you had taken the time to make water one more time. + + +“Are you ready girl?” you ask as you mount Bessy. Bessy snorts in reply. “That’s the spirit.” + + +Your first match is against Lord Isaac Cleaver, The Cleaver. The man has a penchant for the flamboyant. The sun gleams off his silver gilded armor as he rides into position on his roan courser: his shield emblazoned with his house emblem, a silver cleaver beheading a golden goose. + + +Not a very creative nickname, you think. Perhaps not, but it is the badassery of a nickname that is too be feared, not the cleverness. + + +The herald blows his trumpet, and you urge your horses on. Bessy hobbles along as fast as she can, but she is completely outmatched in speed by the roan courser. Everything else disappears as you focus on Lord Cleaver. The distance closes. You raise your lance and prepare to strike. +> Just hold the hell on +There is no way you have gained enough skill to make a precise aim. Your best bet is too just hold on with the fury of hell and hope for the best. You grit your teeth; here it comes. + + +Crack! Both of your lances splinter on contact. The collision jars you, but you manage to hang in the saddle. What a rush. Your heart hammers in your chest, and the world snaps back into focus. The crowd screams and cheers. Flags twirl in the wind and a herald’s trumpet booms. You turn around and see Lord Cleaver’s squire helping him to his feet while another attendant runs down his horse. You won! + + +Jon rushes forward to greet you. “Fantastic, I never thought you could win riding that old draft horse! It looked like you were moving in slow motion compared to Lord Cleaver.” + + +“Bessy and I may not be a fast duo, but we’re tough as nails and hard as stone.” + + +Jon chuckles. “Interesting, we’ll have to have someone take care of that for you.” + + +“What are you talking about?” you ask. Your face flushes red as you realization hits you. “Oh, damn it. You perverse bastard.” + + +Jon snatches the reins from you and snarls. “Never call me a bastard again. Got it?” + + +“Uh, sure.” + + +He helps you off Bessy and slaps you on the back. “Good.” + + +I wonder what that was all about? + + +You head back to your pavilion and bask in your glory. The road ahead is still long and perilous, but you took another step down the path of success. You kick back to relax when the flap of your tent opens. In steps a gorgeous lass, with gingersnap hair and vicious eyes. She looks wild and… hungry. + + +“May I help you?” you ask. + + +“The name is Bell. I’ve been sent to help you with a little problem.” She winks. “Your friend said you needed some refreshment before your next bout.” She shakes her breasts free from her loose shift and steps fully into the tent. + + +Before the tent flap falls, you see the shady moneylender prowling around Sir Jamison’s pavilion. + + +“Come on hero,” she urges. “Don’t keep me waiting.” +> "Jump on top of me, baby." +“Jump on top of me baby.” + + +Bell does as you say. Two beings disappear and reemerge as one as the pair of you become lost in the heat of passion. Funny thing about passion: it often comes and goes without warning. In this case forty-seven seconds. + + +Bell giggles. “First time?” + + +You groan. “First time.” + + +“No shame in that, darling. I’ll be here when you get back. Practice makes perfect, am I right?” + + +You nod and step out of the tent. + + +“Holy shit, what the hell happened!?” + + +The entire fairground is on fire. The air is rank with burning flesh and hair. Bodies are everywhere. Horses whinny in agony. Those not too injured to flee scramble about in sheer terror. High above you see the evil moneylender, floating on a black cloud, cackling and tossing lightning bolts. + + +Bessy plods toward you. A bolt catches her in the flank and explodes into a fireball. She collapses to the ground and shrieks. Another bolt pierces her neck and her and she lies silent. + + +You hear the tent flap jostle, and you wheel around. You clutch Bell by the throat and dive-tackle her into the tent. “What the fuck is this?” you scream. + + +Bell claws at your hand, gasping for breath. You relieve pressure, but keep her pinned to the ground. + + +“I don’t know.” Tears well in her eyes. + + +“Liar.” + + +“No, I swear. Your friend Jon sent me.” +> She's lying. Beat the truth out of her. +“You lying whore!” You bash her head into the ground and clobber her with your fist. + + +“Stop, please. I don’t know anything.” + + +“Tell me the truth!” + + +“I am. Please, you’ve got to believe me.” + + +Her pleas for mercy only anger you more. You know she is lying. “Last chance. Tell me what’s going on. Who are you? Who sent you? What the hell is that floating madman doing?” + + +“I don’t know.” + + +You hit her again and again and again and again. You pummel the poor girl until her once fair face is a mask of blood and tears. The tent flap ruffles open and you spin around to see Jon step inside the tent. + + +He gapes. “What the hell are you doing?” + + +“She distracted me while the lunatic set the world on fire.” + + +“No she didn’t. I sent her to f-” he smacks his forehead. “Damn it all. What’s done is done. We can worry about this later. Right now, we have to stop this lunatic. Come on.” + + +You leave a broken Bell lying on the tent floor and follow Jon outside. Everything except your tent is in flames. The moneylender – perhaps it is time to start calling him a sorcerer – floats toward you on his cloud. You and Jon draw your swords. + + +“Why didn’t he fry my tent too?” + + +“How should I know?” says Jon. “Let’s just kill him and go into damage control mode.” +> Demand the sorcerer explain himself +No, this is too confusing and you have too many questions. You already stripped your honor by beating up an innocent whore. You can at least play the hero’s role and make the evil sorcerer reveal the details of his plans. + + +“Explain yourself, fiend,” you say, brandishing your sword. + + +The sorcerer floats closer on his cloud and shrugs. “Sure, why the hell not?” + + +Jon sits and crosses his legs. + + +“What are you doing?” you ask. + + +“Preparing for a monologue.” + + +“Comfy? Good,” says the sorcerer. “My name is Merek the Mad Mage of Misery. I pose as a moneylender to conceal my true operations as an evil wizard.” + + +Jon sighs. “A cover that is now blown.” + + +Merek the Mad Mage of Misery ignores Jon. “Ever since you walked into my office, I knew you had the makings of a hero. I knew of the unicorn fart, and I knew a hero had been born. I knew he was somewhere in this area, but not exactly where. You are that hero. It’s in your eyes, your blood, your-” + + +“Urine?” you ask. + + +“Sure… The only person who could stop me was Sir Jamison and his magic sword and shield.” + + +“I didn’t know he had a magic sword and shield.” + + +“You just met him, and stop interrupting me!” + + +“Sorry.” + + +“As you can see, I have Sir Jamison’s magic sword and shield nice and safe up here with me.” Merek clinks the magical artifacts together. “I need to drink your blood to gain the power for my master plan to succeed. That is why I did not fry you and your tent. Once I extract your blood, I can complete my master plan.” + + +“Which is?” + + +“World domination.” + + +“You seem to be doing pretty well without my blood.” + + +“Shut up and prepare to die!” + + +Bolts appear in Merek’s hands as his cloud races toward you. + + +“Jon wake up, he’s attacking.” + + +“Huh, oh sure.” Jon leaps to his feet. “Let’s get this over with.” + + +Merek hurls his bolts, which you and Jon dodge with ease. You slice Merek’s arm off as his cloud whizzes past. Jon leaps onto the cloud and stabs him in the back. + + +“So that’s what doing that feels like,” says Jon as he yanks Merek off the cloud. + + +Black sparks shoot from Merek’s body as he slams into the ground. The sparks shoot and dance, stitching his arm back on. He rises to his feet and cackles at the sky. + + +“Fools! Only a magic weapon can kill me. Ahhhhhhhhhargggggg” + + +Merek slumps over and falls face down in the dirt. + + +Sir Jamison bends down and pulls a dagger from Merek’s back. “He forgot about my magic dagger.” + + +Jon shakes his head. “I hope this doesn’t become a thing.” + + +The three of you do your best at damage control. Jon kills Bell, and the two of you bury her in a shallow grave, pretending she never existed. Merek managed to kill literally everything else in a three mile radius, so the three of you take over ruling the kingdom. Sir Jamison becomes King Jamison. Jon becomes Warden of the North. And you receive the honor of knighthood, vowing to keep your whore murdering lifestyle in the past. + + +You marry a buxom wench – seeing as all the noble Ladies are dead – and, in a strange twist of fate, have seven daughters who all grow up to be fabulous whores.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“You lying whore!” You bash her head into the ground and clobber her with your fist. + + +“Stop, please. I don’t know anything.” + + +“Tell me the truth!” + + +“I am. Please, you’ve got to believe me.” + + +Her pleas for mercy only anger you more. You know she is lying. “Last chance. Tell me what’s going on. Who are you? Who sent you? What the hell is that floating madman doing?” + + +“I don’t know.” + + +You hit her again and again and again and again. You pummel the poor girl until her once fair face is a mask of blood and tears. The tent flap ruffles open and you spin around to see Jon step inside the tent. + + +He gapes. “What the hell are you doing?” + + +“She distracted me while the lunatic set the world on fire.” + + +“No she didn’t. I sent her to f-” he smacks his forehead. “Damn it all. What’s done is done. We can worry about this later. Right now, we have to stop this lunatic. Come on.” + + +You leave a broken Bell lying on the tent floor and follow Jon outside. Everything except your tent is in flames. The moneylender – perhaps it is time to start calling him a sorcerer – floats toward you on his cloud. You and Jon draw your swords. + + +“Why didn’t he fry my tent too?” + + +“How should I know?” says Jon. “Let’s just kill him and go into damage control mode.” +> Attack +You don’t have the time to sit around and listen to a monologue. When evil rears its ugly mug, there is only one viable option: destroy it with extreme prejudice. + + +With swords in hand, you and Jon leap into action, literally. Unfortunately, the sorcerer is beyond your reach on his floating cloud. You and Jon jump as high as you can, but your best efforts are nowhere near good enough. + + +“Well this is embarrassing,” says Jon after another failed leap. + + +“A bow and arrow would really come in handy right about now.” You scan the bedlam for a projectile, but there is not much of anything to work with. “Well I’m stumped.” + + +“Fools.” The sorcerer cackles as he tosses bolts of lightning toward you. “You should know better than to defy an all-powerful mage such as myself. Now perish!” + + +You successfully dodge the first couple bolts, but the sorcerer is throwing them around like candy and eventually one catches you in the leg. The bolt explodes on contact, obliterating muscle, tissue, ligaments, tendons, and bones. The intense heat cauterizes what little remains of your leg. The stink of your own charred flesh hits your nostrils and you gag. Crawling on hands and knee, you seek shelter in your tent, praying the smoke will conceal your movements. Jon will have to handle this on his own now. + + +Inside the tent, you pass out from the pain: never to awake again. + + +What the hell happened? + + +Bell cut your throat with your own dagger while you were unconscious. If it is any consolation, Jon and Sir Jamison Hill managed to kill the sorcerer. When Jon found your lifeless corpse, he took it upon himself to brutally murder Bell. + + +What happens now? + + +Well, you were on the path to heroism, but you failed to kill the big baddie and fell into an act of villainy by beating the ever-loving life out of poor sweet Bell. So I imagine you’ll go to limbo where they’ll force you to play a never ending game of Monopoly for the next 1,000 years.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Jump on top of me baby.” + + +Bell does as you say. Two beings disappear and reemerge as one as the pair of you become lost in the heat of passion. Funny thing about passion: it often comes and goes without warning. In this case forty-seven seconds. + + +Bell giggles. “First time?” + + +You groan. “First time.” + + +“No shame in that, darling. I’ll be here when you get back. Practice makes perfect, am I right?” + + +You nod and step out of the tent. + + +“Holy shit, what the hell happened!?” + + +The entire fairground is on fire. The air is rank with burning flesh and hair. Bodies are everywhere. Horses whinny in agony. Those not too injured to flee scramble about in sheer terror. High above you see the evil moneylender, floating on a black cloud, cackling and tossing lightning bolts. + + +Bessy plods toward you. A bolt catches her in the flank and explodes into a fireball. She collapses to the ground and shrieks. Another bolt pierces her neck and her and she lies silent. + + +You hear the tent flap jostle, and you wheel around. You clutch Bell by the throat and dive-tackle her into the tent. “What the fuck is this?” you scream. + + +Bell claws at your hand, gasping for breath. You relieve pressure, but keep her pinned to the ground. + + +“I don’t know.” Tears well in her eyes. + + +“Liar.” + + +“No, I swear. Your friend Jon sent me.” +> Trust her. +Whether you trust Bell or not, a true knight never harms a lady… or a whore. + + +“Alright,” you say pulling Bell to her feet, “help me save the day, and we can get back to putting a little baby hero in your belly.” + + +“You think I want that after what you just did to me?” + + +“Everyone wants the hero,” you deadpan. “So yes.” + + +And you are right. Feminism is for spunky heroines, not the spunk covered ragtag sack ticklers of heroic knights. Bell grumbles a pithy supplication and follows you out of the tent into the inferno of the fairgrounds. + + +The evil moneylender stares at you from his floating cloud, with his face screwed up into a scowl of utter disgust and contempt. He leans over the edge of his cloud and vomits. + + +“You,” he jabs an accusatory finger, “are a vile, putrid, scumbag of a hero. Have you no sense of decency?” + + +You hear a soft plop, plop behind you. + + +“What are you talking about?” you ask, drawing your blade, preparing to pounce during the villain’s moment of weakness, but you hold off, curious of his ailment. + + +“Your woman is naked before the world, dripping your seed! And the script says I’m the villain? What depraved fool green-lit this?” + + +*Poof* + + +The narrator appears, riding a gigantic black German Shepherd, which is both ferocious and adorable. He wields a word processor and keyboard with a suspiciously sticky set of keys. He wields unadulterated badassery and lowbrow humor. + + +“I’ll tolerate snark from the hero and the spirits that control him, but not the damn villain, and yes the script says you are the villain. So unless you want to be spontaneously transfigured into an elephant entering the initial stages of menopause, then I suggest you shut the fuck up and let his hoe decide if she’s being mistreated.” The narrator turns to Bell. “Are you being mistreated?” + + +“Sort of, I guess.” + + +“Would you like a pony?” + + +“Yes?” + + +“Done.” + + +A pony wanders through the carnage, and Bell climbs on top, uncertain of what to do. + + +The narrator scowls at the villain. “Merek the Mad Mage of Misery, are you content with the current proceedings? Well are you?” + + +The villain tugs at the collar of his robes. “Yes, your godliness.” + + +*Poof* + + +“That was interesting,” you say. “Anyway, I’m making baby heroes. And that’s heroic. The naked human body is an art form to be admired, not scorned! Besides there’s no one left to ogle her since you killed them all. Except Jon, over there, staring at her burning bush. And I bet Sir Jamison is alive somewhere. He seems pretty badass.” + + +Jon smiles dumbly, sword in hand. + + +Merek the Made Mage of Misery shrieks. “You perverted bastards! I’ll kill you all!” Lightning bolts sparkle in his hands, and he hurls them at you with the accuracy of a drunken Storm Trooper smoking black tar heroin. + + +You stand still, watching the blasts scorch the already scorched ground twenty yards away. + + +Jon lurches out of his stupor and rushes into battle, tucking away his playing sword and drawing his fighting one. “I’ll show you who the bastard is, you slut!” + + +Merek the Mad Mage of Misery curses his incompetence and swings his attention toward Jon. The two engage in a very boring battle. Wild lightning blasts scatter the land while Jon meanders around and tries to jump onto the floating cloud, which always drifts beyond his reach. + + +You turn to Bell. “I have an idea.” You pull Bell from the pony’s back and make sweet love to her in the middle of the burning fairgrounds. Merek the Mad Mage of Misery catches sight and gawks in horror. This provides Jon the opening to leap onto his magic cloud and cut his throat with the magic dagger Sir Jamison conveniently just threw to him: because deus ex machina is beautiful and everyone knows only magic items can kill magic beings. + + +… + + +Sweet, so what happens now? + + +The spirits guiding you probably leave mean comments because of the sexism and ridiculousness bomb we just exploded all over the place. At least we took it up to eleven. + + +It was rather ridiculous, but hey, I won, right! What should I do with the pony? + + +Breed it with a unicorn and find out what manner of being is born when the abomination spawn spews magical flatulence. + + +Wicked. Do you have any parting words of advice for me or wrap-up narration? + + +What the hell, is this twenty questions? I don’t know, go murder every sparkly vampire and warrior-cat that you see and you can’t go wrong. Shit, I just earned more hate comments.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no way you have gained enough skill to make a precise aim. Your best bet is too just hold on with the fury of hell and hope for the best. You grit your teeth; here it comes. + + +Crack! Both of your lances splinter on contact. The collision jars you, but you manage to hang in the saddle. What a rush. Your heart hammers in your chest, and the world snaps back into focus. The crowd screams and cheers. Flags twirl in the wind and a herald’s trumpet booms. You turn around and see Lord Cleaver’s squire helping him to his feet while another attendant runs down his horse. You won! + + +Jon rushes forward to greet you. “Fantastic, I never thought you could win riding that old draft horse! It looked like you were moving in slow motion compared to Lord Cleaver.” + + +“Bessy and I may not be a fast duo, but we’re tough as nails and hard as stone.” + + +Jon chuckles. “Interesting, we’ll have to have someone take care of that for you.” + + +“What are you talking about?” you ask. Your face flushes red as you realization hits you. “Oh, damn it. You perverse bastard.” + + +Jon snatches the reins from you and snarls. “Never call me a bastard again. Got it?” + + +“Uh, sure.” + + +He helps you off Bessy and slaps you on the back. “Good.” + + +I wonder what that was all about? + + +You head back to your pavilion and bask in your glory. The road ahead is still long and perilous, but you took another step down the path of success. You kick back to relax when the flap of your tent opens. In steps a gorgeous lass, with gingersnap hair and vicious eyes. She looks wild and… hungry. + + +“May I help you?” you ask. + + +“The name is Bell. I’ve been sent to help you with a little problem.” She winks. “Your friend said you needed some refreshment before your next bout.” She shakes her breasts free from her loose shift and steps fully into the tent. + + +Before the tent flap falls, you see the shady moneylender prowling around Sir Jamison’s pavilion. + + +“Come on hero,” she urges. “Don’t keep me waiting.” +> Ugh, I better go check out what that moneylender is doing. +Despite adamant protests from your little head, your big head wins the day, insisting you act responsibly and investigate what that shady character is up to: shenanigans no doubt. + + +“I’m sorry, Bell. I have to take care of something quick.” + + +“Oh, don’t leave me hero.” Bell wraps her arms around, drawing you in tight against her bare bosom. + + +You pull away from her enticing embrace before you change your mind. Now where did that moneylender run off? You don’t see him skulking around Sir Jamison’s tent anymore. Could your eyes have been playing tricks on you? The bad feeling in the pit of your gut says no. + + +Muffled noises are coming from Sir Jamison’s tent. Not wanting to intrude on a living legend in the throes of lovemaking, you ruffle the flap of the tent to announce your presence. “Sir Jamison, are you in there? I noticed a shady character lingering around your tent a moment ago.” + + +The noise inside the tent ceases. + + +Oh, crap. Your dodge sense tingles. + + +You jump aside just in time to avoid incineration via fireball. Within the smoking remains of the tent, the shady moneylender stands poised to attack. Magic crackles in both of his hands. The shady moneylender is a sorcerer, who knew. + + +“I knew you were up to no good,” you say, drawing your sword. “I don’t know what you’re up to, but I’m going to put a stop to it.” + + +“Imbecile, you may have the skills, but you lack the tools to defeat me.” + + +“We’ll just have to see about that!” + + +“Is that really the best line you’ve got?” + + +“I know you are but what am I?” + + +The sorcerer face-palms. “You’re an idiot aren’t you?” + + +“Bring it on, bitch!” + + +Onlookers scurry about to put out the fires the fireball ignited and to get a front row view of what is shaping up to be a good old-fashioned melee on magic standoff. + + +The sorcerer simultaneously hurls a fireball and casts a bolt of lightning. +> Dodge the bolt; bat the fireball back at him with your sword +You dodge the bolt with ease and set your feet. You’re going to knock this fireball right out of the park. You step, swing, and… your sword melts as the fireball passes through and explodes amongst the crowd of onlookers. + + +You scream in agony as molten steel splatters across your body. + + +The sorcerer cackles. “Imbecile, only a magic artifact can repel a magical attack.” + + +You collapse to the ground, defeated. And dead. The sorcerer proceeds to extract your hero blood, which he uses to conquer the entire kingdom. A shame, you couldn't even save your friends.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Despite adamant protests from your little head, your big head wins the day, insisting you act responsibly and investigate what that shady character is up to: shenanigans no doubt. + + +“I’m sorry, Bell. I have to take care of something quick.” + + +“Oh, don’t leave me hero.” Bell wraps her arms around, drawing you in tight against her bare bosom. + + +You pull away from her enticing embrace before you change your mind. Now where did that moneylender run off? You don’t see him skulking around Sir Jamison’s tent anymore. Could your eyes have been playing tricks on you? The bad feeling in the pit of your gut says no. + + +Muffled noises are coming from Sir Jamison’s tent. Not wanting to intrude on a living legend in the throes of lovemaking, you ruffle the flap of the tent to announce your presence. “Sir Jamison, are you in there? I noticed a shady character lingering around your tent a moment ago.” + + +The noise inside the tent ceases. + + +Oh, crap. Your dodge sense tingles. + + +You jump aside just in time to avoid incineration via fireball. Within the smoking remains of the tent, the shady moneylender stands poised to attack. Magic crackles in both of his hands. The shady moneylender is a sorcerer, who knew. + + +“I knew you were up to no good,” you say, drawing your sword. “I don’t know what you’re up to, but I’m going to put a stop to it.” + + +“Imbecile, you may have the skills, but you lack the tools to defeat me.” + + +“We’ll just have to see about that!” + + +“Is that really the best line you’ve got?” + + +“I know you are but what am I?” + + +The sorcerer face-palms. “You’re an idiot aren’t you?” + + +“Bring it on, bitch!” + + +Onlookers scurry about to put out the fires the fireball ignited and to get a front row view of what is shaping up to be a good old-fashioned melee on magic standoff. + + +The sorcerer simultaneously hurls a fireball and casts a bolt of lightning. +> Double dodge! +Few living souls can successfully perform a double dodge, but you are a hero damn it. From the moment the unicorn farted, you were destined to accomplish great feats. You have the skill. You have the power. You have… ah, to hell with it. Just get on with it. + + +You avoid the bolt and the fireball, perfectly executing a textbook double dodge. The onlookers cheer and scream approval… except for the ones who got incinerated by the fireball you dodged. The bloodcurdling screams of the not quite dead but still severely burned could wake the dead. Way to not take one for the team, asshole. + + +“Dodge all you want!” cries the sorcerer. “It won’t do you any good in the end. Your pathetic blade can’t kill me.” + + +You’re about to test that theory when a sparkly pulsating glow coming from behind the sorcerer catches your eye. The tantalizing and addicting flash of spectral lights can be only one thing: a magical artifact. The sorcerer must have been trying to steal it from Sir Jamison. If the sorcerer wants them, that must mean they can kill him. Or destroy the kingdom. One or the other. + + +“We’ll see about that,” you shout as you charge ahead. + + +“I’ll humor you, simpleton,” says the sorcerer. “Just try and strike me down. I’ll stand still.” + + +The sorcerer crosses his arms and smirks as you lumber toward him. His evil sneer disappears once you run past him. The magical artifact turns out to be a magic sword and shield combo. It’s on like a donkey’s hard on now. + + +“No, you can’t!” + + +“Sure I can,” you say as you bash and slash him with your magic weaponry. “By the way, if these things can kill you, why did you let me get so close to them?” + + +The world will never know the answer to that question. The sorcerer shrivels up and dies within a cloud of evaporated blood. His death screams awaken some of the recently deceased onlookers, which you swiftly put back in their graves unburied corpse state. + + +Fires rage throughout the fairgrounds and more bodies than you feel like counting litter the ground. Crows and ravens already flock to the feast. It looks like the tournament is going to have to be canceled. Oh well, there is always next year. You turn around and look to see if Bell is still alive and willing for a romp.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Probably not a great idea to borrow money from such an obviously evil character: you excuse yourself, leaving the moneylender fuming. He mutters something under his breath while stroking his goatee as you walk out the door. Perhaps you will cross paths with him again. + + +Your heart is still set on riding in the joust, so you head back to old man Nathaniel David’s orchard and agree to his bargain. You spend the remainder of your free time preparing for the tournament. Jon coaches you as best he can, which is not very well since he has never jousted either, but you think you have the hang of it. + + +Bessy’s training has mixed results. She works hard and seems to appreciate the change of scenery. You figure being a plow horse is probably pretty dull. She has spirit, but the old girl does a lot more plodding than charging. At least, she does not shy away when the other horse speeds toward her. + + +The day of the tournament dawns cool and crisp. Sweaty with excitement, you try to relax in your pavilion before your first match. You have already made water five times this morning, and you think you have to go again. So many things ride on the outcome of today’s events, but you cannot think about that. The here and now is what is important. You watch squires scurry around the grounds, doing the bidding of Sir this or Sir that or some other random bastard. You fall into a daze and your thoughts wander. + + +Why don’t I have a squire? Crap, I think I need to piss again. Dear lord, please grant me the strength and will to win today. I don’t want to marry that troll Sally David. Have you seen her? Oh, is that who I think it is? + + +Sir Jamison Hill, The Iron Boar, approaches and shakes your hand: what an honor! Ser Jamison serves as the Baron’s champion and is renowned throughout the kingdom for his tourney skills. + + +“I heard about how you helped take care of those bandits and trolls on the Baron’s Road,” he says. “The kingdom needs more fine young men like you. I expect to see great things from you today and in the future.” + + +“Thank you, sir.” + + +You want to talk some more with him – he certainly has plenty he could teach you – but the herald calls you for your first bout. You wave farewell and enter the lists, wishing you had taken the time to make water one more time. + + +“Are you ready girl?” you ask as you mount Bessy. Bessy snorts in reply. “That’s the spirit.” + + +Your first match is against Lord Isaac Cleaver, The Cleaver. The man has a penchant for the flamboyant. The sun gleams off his silver gilded armor as he rides into position on his roan courser: his shield emblazoned with his house emblem, a silver cleaver beheading a golden goose. + + +Not a very creative nickname, you think. Perhaps not, but it is the badassery of a nickname that is too be feared, not the cleverness. + + +The herald blows his trumpet, and you urge your horses on. Bessy hobbles along as fast as she can, but she is completely outmatched in speed by the roan courser. Everything else disappears as you focus on Lord Cleaver. The distance closes. You raise your lance and prepare to strike. +> Pinpoint your aim +If you can hit Lord Cleaver’s shield just right, then you can knock him right off of his horse. You can do this. This is what you spent all those hours training for. You pinpoint your target and adjust your aim. The horses draw closer. You can see the roan courser’s breath. Here it comes! + + +Crack! Thud! Crack! + + +Weightless, you are falling. A flash of pain. Blackness. + + +I have good news, bad news and worse news, hero. Good news: you managed to hit your target. That first crack was both of your lances splintering. Bad news: the thud was you hitting the ground. Worse news: the second crack was your skull splitting in two when it bounced off a rock.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For reasons far beyond normal human comprehension, you elect to compete in the joust: never mind the fact that you do not own a horse and have never held a lance in your life. Remember, dodging is against the rules in a joust, so you are not exactly playing to your strengths. + + +During a morning patrol, you and Jon discuss the upcoming tournament. + + +“I still think you should participate in the melee with me instead,” says Jon. “But if you’re dead set on jousting, you’re going to need a horse.” + + +“Any recommendations?” you ask. + + +“Jousting horses are expensive. You’re either going to need a big loan or a big friend. And don’t forget, if you lose the joust, you lose your horse and your armor.” + + +“Can I use a quarter-horse? I bet old man Nathaniel David would let me borrow Bessy.” + + +“Sure. You can ride out naked too, but you’ll just embarrass yourself.” Jon smacks you upside the head. “If you aren’t going to take this seriously, don’t even bother showing up.” + + +You finish your patrol with Jon and head over to old man Nathaniel David’s orchard before you visiting the moneylender in the next town. You know it is not wise to ignore Jon’s advice, but you want to keep your options open. Old man Nathaniel David proves easy to find, he is humped over, shitting on a sapling when you arrive. + + +“Um, what are you doing David?” + + +“Fertilizing,” he says with a massive grin. “What can I do for you lad?” He sticks out his hand for you to shake, which you begrudgingly accept. + + +“I decided to joust in the king’s tournament, but I don’t have a horse.” + + +“Ah, well, I can’t imagine you’d want to use any of the horses in the hamlet. Plow horses ain’t going to win that for you, but I know you don’t have much money. So if you want Bessy, you can have her, on one condition.” + + +“What’s that?” + + +“If by some miracle you win, you name my lil’ pumpkin, Sally, Lady Fair of the Tournament. If you lose, you pay me back by marrying her. You’re a good lad, and you’d make a fine husband for my girl.” + + +You have seen Sally David before, strutting around. She has a fine body for a wench, but holy matrimony is her face hideous. It looks like someone took a rake and beat her bloody. You will have to mull this one over; these are high stakes. Even if you won, you could offend many important people. + + +“Alright, David, I’ll keep the offer in mind,” you say as you wave goodbye. + + +Old man Nathaniel David hitches up his trousers and nods. “You do that, boy.” + + +The Baron’s Road has been nice and calm ever since you took care of those trolls and bandits, and you arrive at the moneylender’s office without incident. The moneylender’s office is small and simple: one desk, two hard wooden chairs, and a few bookshelves. You have heard of these types before, and they are nothing but trouble. The moneylender skims over the pleasantries and bids you sit and begin your business. + + +“What can I do for you, friend?” he asks. His hair is dark and oily, eyes small and beady. An unnecessarily pointy goatee graces his chin. Yep, slap the evil and unscrupulous label on him. + + +“I need money for a horse to use in the joust. I’m one of the guys that killed those bandits and trolls on the Baron’s Road awhile back.” + + +“I know who you are,” he snaps. “I also know you have no money and no experience jousting.” + + +“How do you know that?” + + +“Because.” He points at his goatee. “Now I will lend you the money if you agree to my terms.” + + +“Which are?” + + +“If you win, I get 50% of the ransom and prize money. You keep the horse. If you lose, you become my personal slave for a year.” The moneylender pulls, ink, quill and parchment from his desk. “We can get the contract signed right now.” +> I changed my mind; I'll fight in the melee like Jon said. +Wise decision: it is best to stick with your strong suits. + + +You excuse yourself and get up to leave. The moneylender, mutters something to himself while stroking his beard as you head toward the door. Something is really evil about this guy. You turn around and lop off his head before heading home. Yeah, that was probably a good idea. + + +The morning of the tournament dawns crisp and cool with a slight breeze, just enough to give the ladies’ skirts a nice billowing. You feel a familiar stirring in your loins, and it is driving you insane. As a fledgling hero, you have been saving yourself for your future princess bride, but dear God has it left you on edge, not that you have not had offers. Jon was right; your scar is a chick magnet. You practically have to beat them off. + + +A gaggle of girls giggle as you walk past them. Bitches. + + +Whoa, where did that come from? That is not very heroic. The proper term is ‘wenches.’ Remember that next time, fledgling hero. + + +With your minor slip into villainy over, you prepare for the melee and take your place in the fighting field. There appear to be fifty or so participants as you try to pick out some of the people the Baron told you about. You see Mad Moose McDoogle in his clumsy antlered helmet, Sir Richard Lionsmane with his shaggy locks, Sir Henry Williams a.k.a. The Rabid Fox, the Weasel brothers in their matching silver gilded armor, and Bucktooth Barry among others. + + +“Save your energy,” says Jon. “Let the others wear themselves down. They’ll make a mistake eventually. Then you can strike when they’re weak and out of position. And stay by me. We might both be able to get knighthoods out of this.” + + +“Don’t worry. I got your back Jon.” + + +A blast from the bugle signals the start of the melee. The clamor of blunted steel on blunted steel rings through the fairgrounds. You and Jon fight back-to-back, just as you did against those trolls several years ago. You two are not the only ones fighting on teams. Out of the corner of your eye, you see the Weasel brothers and Mad Moose McDoogle charge The Rabid Fox. + + +The Rabid Fox looses ground as the trio attempt to surround him. He isn’t dodging. He’s parrying. He’s done for. The Rabid Fox’s and one of the Weasel brother’s swords shatter on impact. Mad Moose McDoogle peels off the attack and rounds on the Weasel brothers, catching them unaware. He knocks them both down and out just before The Rabid Fox charges him in turn. + + +A sword slashes inches from your cheek, and you regain your focus. Dodge, slash, dodge, dodge, slash, dodge, trip, kick. Another one bites the dust. + + +The fighting continues until there is just you, Jon, The Rabid Fox, who has not only obtained a new sword but a horse as well, and Bucktooth Barry left. + + +Maybe you should turn on Jon now? +> Fight with Jon. +Heroes fight with honor at all times. There is no way in hell you are going to betray Jon. How could you ever look him in the eyes again? Besides, he is pretty fucking awesome. If you are going to win this thing, you are going to do it the right way and beat him with pride, honor, dignity, and all the other bullshit that goes with being a hero. + + +“I’ll distract him. You knock him off the horse,” says Jon. + + +“What about Bucktooth Barry?” + + +“Dodge.” + + +Jon darts off to run interference while you attempt to flank. The Rabid Fox is on to your plan though and outmaneuvers you while Bucktooth Barry hedges his position. This might go on for a while. What would a hero do? + + +You glance up at the spectators and catch sight of the princess. A blonde haired blue eyed bombshell with a bosom to die for. She flashes you a smile of perfect pearly whites. Did you expect anything else? Take a moment to picture all the ways you would love to chivalrously plow her into next Sunday. Just try not to ejaculate prematurely in your armor. That is not heroic. No, go ahead. I can wait. + + +Got all that out of your system? Good. With the princess’s bosom in your mind to inspire you, you charge the mounted knight. He reels the horse around and barrels toward you, eager for the challenge. As you are about to collide, you dodge. The Rabid Fox brings the horse around for another pass. You feel the blood pumping through your veins. The air tastes sweet. Colors are brighter. The world slows down. This is what being a hero is all about. + + +You and The Rabid Fox rush each other once more. As you are about to collide, not only do you dodge, but you grab the reins as well and yank. Your arm feels like it is going to pop out of its socket, but you grit it out. The Rabid Fox flies through the air and thuds into the dirt. He stumbles to his feet and grabs a greatsword off the ground. Man, this motherfucker just does not give up. + + +He has the reach advantage, but he is hurt. Pretty bad, judging by the fact he just fell off a galloping horse decked out in mail while brandishing a sword. He should probably be dead: or at least broken. He uses his reach to keep you at a distance, but you bide your time. He will make a mistake. Dodge, backstep, yawn, dodge. A quick glance up at the princess’s bosom. With princess bosom lighting your fire, you see an opening and dive in and drive The Rabid Fox to the ground. + + +“Well fought, friend. I yield,” says The Rabid Fox as you hold your sword tip over him. + + +Jon has finished off Bucktooth Barry. It is down to the two of you. +> For princess bosom! +There is only one way this story can unfold, and that is with you finally surpassing your master and claiming the princess as your own. For princess bosom! You charge. + + +Jon dodges your blow. You swing again. He dodges and counters with an upward thrust. No time to dodge, you catch his sword with your shield. The wood splinters, and you snap your wrist, catching his sword in the shield. Déjà vu? + + +Not quite. A knee slams you in the groin, and you crumple to the ground. Fight through the pain hero! You lash you with your legs, catching Jon in the chest. Both of you regain your feet and slam into each other. Over and over you roll, grappling on the ground. Dust swirls around your heads. You throw blind punches. The crowd cheers. + + +You fight the good fight, but Jon wins in the end, catching you in a stellar headlock. The king congratulates you both and the crowd gives a standing ovation. + + +“Best melee in years. I think the both of you earned a knighthood for such a fine display of chivalrous combat,” says the king. “Tonight there will be a feast for the ages... on the Baron’s tab of course.” + + +You are bummed you will not be getting princess bosom, but you feel proud of how you fought. Even heroes take their lumps from time to time. + + +As expected, Jon names the princess Lady Fair of the tournament. You see him whisper something in her ear and point in your direction. She is walking toward you! What the hell did he say? + + +“Princess Anne.” You bow. “It is my pleasure.” + + +“And mine. Would you care to walk with me in the gardens?” + + +You readily agree and spend much of the remainder of your time getting to know Princess Anne. She is everything you could hope for in a princess, blonde, blue eyed, fair skinned, sweet, charming, big bosomed, and all the works. + + +“What did you say to her?” you ask Jon one evening. + + +He shrugs. “I love princesses as much as the next guy, but really, I’m in to redheads.” He smirks. “I think the farmboy turned knight getting the princess makes the better story. I’m nailing the Baron’s daughter. Wildfire hair on her.” He winks. “Just the way I like it.” + + +Months pass and you perform several fantastic heroic feats. Jon marries the Baron’s daughter and you become engaged to the princess. Some days it all seems so unreal, like just the other day you were selling turnips and mucking shit. Now you are a hero. +> Time to kill a motherfucking dragon. +That’s the spirit! + + +Emissaries arrive at the capital from the neighboring kingdom of Irelandshire pleading for assistance with a dragon problem. It seems the fiend has been soaring around the country, torching towns, devouring livestock, looting treasuries and snatching young ladies from their bedchambers. Naturally, you don your shining armor and volunteer to help rid them of the menace once and for all. Princess Anne kisses you goodbye as you ride off to hunt down the winged beast. + + +Finding the dragon’s lair – a cave high up a tall mountain with half the forest burnt to ashes – proves easier than you anticipated. No one ever said dragons were discreet. The march up the mountain presents more of a challenge. Far too steep for your steed, you hike up on foot. You soon learn hiking in full plate armor is not easy. Every step requires sheer willpower and brute strength. Sweat pores off you so fast you fear you are going to rust, so you strip down to your leathers and continue to the top light as feather, just like the old days when you first practiced with Jon in the yard. + + +“Well at least you aren’t a knight in shining armor,” says the dragon as you enter his cave. The behemoth is resting on a hoard of gold, jewels, swords, cups, and other valuable crap because of course he is. + + +“Pardon me?” + + +“Do you have any idea how annoying it is fighting knights in shining armor? I just fry them with a nice blast of fire. They’re too heavy and clunky to dodge. No challenge at all. You should see the nice collection of armor I have though. I could outfit an entire empire.” + + +“Actually, I stripped my armor coming up. I got sweaty.” + + +The dragon sighs. “Well you’re smarter than most at least.” + + +“Your days are done dragon!” You prepare to make a heroic speech, but cut it off. “Wait, where are the noble ladies?” + + +“Didn’t you see all the dung piles on the mountainside?” + + +“You ate them!?” + + +“What did you think I do with them? Keep them as company?” + + +“You bastard!” + + +You draw your sword. Fate has finally arrived. Are you up to the task? +> Attack his eyes. +The eyes: go for the eyes. If you can blind the dragon, you can pounce in and end this while his guard his down. + + +You scoop a handful of ashes from the ground and fling them at the dragon’s eyes as you bound toward him. It’s not very effective… The dragon stares at you and shakes his head as you scuttle to a stop. + + +“I burn entire cities and forests for a living,” says the dragon. “Do you have any idea how much ash is floating around in the air after I start lighting shit up?” + + +“Uhm…” + + +“Literally, a metric fuck ton.” The dragon blinks. “I have protective coverings over my eyes to keep all that crap out. How else would I be able to see with all that debris in the air? I’d be spending my entire fortune on eye-drops.” + + +“Like a camel?” You sidle closer to the dragon. + + +“Did you just compare me, a dragon, to a dirty, smelly, filthy, no good camel? You wannabe heroes have no resp-” the dragon sighs. “You know what? It’s not worth it. Sure, like a camel,” the dragon sighs. + + + “So where’s your hump?” You continue to inch closer to the dragon. + + +“Wh- what?” + + +“Your hump. You said you’re like a camel, so where’s your hump?” You jump up and down, searching for a hump on the dragon’s back while closing distance. + + +“You have got to be kidding.” The dragon slams his head into the cave wall. “Why do all the retarded heroes have to come fight me?” + + +While the dragon wallows, you pitter-patter your way in close and drive your sword deep into his eye socket. The wyrm wails in agony as you wrench the sword free, clamber over his snout and shove the blade into his other eye. Before you can scurry away, the dragon whips his head around and snaps his massive jaws around you. You scream as your bones splinter and your innards trickle from your body. The world fades to black as the dragon swallows you down his gullet. + + +That seemed quite painful. If it is any consolation, you managed to both severely wound the dragon and piss him off before he ate you. The dragon goes on to burn the entire kingdom of Irelandshire to ashes in a blind rage before Jon and The Rabid Fox save the day and cut out his heart. + + +Princess Anne is heartbroken and goes on to become a sex addict and develops a dungeon porn fetish to cope with your untimely death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>That’s the spirit! + + +Emissaries arrive at the capital from the neighboring kingdom of Irelandshire pleading for assistance with a dragon problem. It seems the fiend has been soaring around the country, torching towns, devouring livestock, looting treasuries and snatching young ladies from their bedchambers. Naturally, you don your shining armor and volunteer to help rid them of the menace once and for all. Princess Anne kisses you goodbye as you ride off to hunt down the winged beast. + + +Finding the dragon’s lair – a cave high up a tall mountain with half the forest burnt to ashes – proves easier than you anticipated. No one ever said dragons were discreet. The march up the mountain presents more of a challenge. Far too steep for your steed, you hike up on foot. You soon learn hiking in full plate armor is not easy. Every step requires sheer willpower and brute strength. Sweat pores off you so fast you fear you are going to rust, so you strip down to your leathers and continue to the top light as feather, just like the old days when you first practiced with Jon in the yard. + + +“Well at least you aren’t a knight in shining armor,” says the dragon as you enter his cave. The behemoth is resting on a hoard of gold, jewels, swords, cups, and other valuable crap because of course he is. + + +“Pardon me?” + + +“Do you have any idea how annoying it is fighting knights in shining armor? I just fry them with a nice blast of fire. They’re too heavy and clunky to dodge. No challenge at all. You should see the nice collection of armor I have though. I could outfit an entire empire.” + + +“Actually, I stripped my armor coming up. I got sweaty.” + + +The dragon sighs. “Well you’re smarter than most at least.” + + +“Your days are done dragon!” You prepare to make a heroic speech, but cut it off. “Wait, where are the noble ladies?” + + +“Didn’t you see all the dung piles on the mountainside?” + + +“You ate them!?” + + +“What did you think I do with them? Keep them as company?” + + +“You bastard!” + + +You draw your sword. Fate has finally arrived. Are you up to the task? +> Attack his belly. +Everyone knows the underbelly of a dragon is vulnerable. If you get in close, your sword can rip through him like hot crocodile shears through flesh. + + +You charge the dragon with sword in hand. The dragon blasts fire. You have too much forward momentum; there is no way to dodge this one. The world slows to crawl and your entire life flashes before your eyes: all that time spent mucking shit and selling cabbages, long hours training in the yard with Jon, your sexless courting of Princess Anne. Wow, your life sucked. + + +Well, maybe you can take the dragon with you: go out a hero and all that. + + +You grit your teeth and shut your eyes as you barrel into the firestorm. The stink of charred flesh and burning hair cloak you. Your blood boils, lips sear off, eyes burst and brain tingles as it begins to melt inside your skull. Somehow, you are still conscious as you storm through and plunge your sword through the dragon’s soft underbelly bounce your sword off the dragon’s rigid scales. Turns out those underbelly scales are just as tough as the rest of them. Who knew? + + +The dragon chuckles as you collapse to the cave floor in a smoldering heap. “Foolish bravery, mortal, is foolishness all the same.” The dragon admires you a moment longer before he devours you as a midday snack. + + +If it serves as any consolation, your remains go on to fertilize several small trees… which promptly get burnt down.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>That’s the spirit! + + +Emissaries arrive at the capital from the neighboring kingdom of Irelandshire pleading for assistance with a dragon problem. It seems the fiend has been soaring around the country, torching towns, devouring livestock, looting treasuries and snatching young ladies from their bedchambers. Naturally, you don your shining armor and volunteer to help rid them of the menace once and for all. Princess Anne kisses you goodbye as you ride off to hunt down the winged beast. + + +Finding the dragon’s lair – a cave high up a tall mountain with half the forest burnt to ashes – proves easier than you anticipated. No one ever said dragons were discreet. The march up the mountain presents more of a challenge. Far too steep for your steed, you hike up on foot. You soon learn hiking in full plate armor is not easy. Every step requires sheer willpower and brute strength. Sweat pores off you so fast you fear you are going to rust, so you strip down to your leathers and continue to the top light as feather, just like the old days when you first practiced with Jon in the yard. + + +“Well at least you aren’t a knight in shining armor,” says the dragon as you enter his cave. The behemoth is resting on a hoard of gold, jewels, swords, cups, and other valuable crap because of course he is. + + +“Pardon me?” + + +“Do you have any idea how annoying it is fighting knights in shining armor? I just fry them with a nice blast of fire. They’re too heavy and clunky to dodge. No challenge at all. You should see the nice collection of armor I have though. I could outfit an entire empire.” + + +“Actually, I stripped my armor coming up. I got sweaty.” + + +The dragon sighs. “Well you’re smarter than most at least.” + + +“Your days are done dragon!” You prepare to make a heroic speech, but cut it off. “Wait, where are the noble ladies?” + + +“Didn’t you see all the dung piles on the mountainside?” + + +“You ate them!?” + + +“What did you think I do with them? Keep them as company?” + + +“You bastard!” + + +You draw your sword. Fate has finally arrived. Are you up to the task? +> Neither. +Attacking him head on would be suicide. Sure, it would be nice to blind him or cut into his underbelly, but he would just fry you with a blast of fire before you even got close. There is only one course of action to take in times like this: dodge. + + +Like a timid bear you perform a false charge, pulling up at the last second as a blast of fire scorches the ground in front of you. Without your bulky armor you are able to twist and twirl, spin and swirl, dip and dive, jump and jive and pirouette away from the dragon fire while inching ever closer to the monster. Since when did you get moves like Jagger? + + +“Die mortal,” the dragon shouts, releasing another blast of fire. + + +You duck behind a conveniently placed boulder just in time to escape. The dragon stalks closer. His massive limbs quake the ground with every step: his tail smashing the wall without purpose. Another blast of fire. The heat coming off the rock is like lava. You fear it is about to melt. + + +Is this it? Is this the end? + + +“Foolish mortal. The only way to kill a dragon is with a disorganized band of heroes and a bard, or with a magic sword. And you don’t have either. Mwhahaha.” + + +Shit. I’m totally fucked. Why didn’t I read that book on dragon clichés Jon bought me last Christmas? Think fast, think fast, think fast. Brain blast! Music! Music soothes the savage beast. Shit, I forgot my fiddle. + + +The dragon rumbles closer, taking his sweet time. Any more bright ideas, Mr. Hero? +> Cry and Beg for Mercy +“Please, Mr. Dragon spare me!” Tears pour down your cheeks, and you drop to your knees. “I’ll do whatever you want. I can be a good servant, or a steward. Everyone can use a good steward.” + + +The dragon laughs so hard the entire mountain shakes. The roof of the cave above his head collapses, crushing his head. Ever the opportunist, you leap to your feet and plunge your sword down his gullet. The dragon’s jaws snap shut before you can remove your arm. Steam spouts from his nostrils, burning your face. You see the dragon’s body burst into flames as you blackout from the pain. + + +You awake sometime later in unfamiliar surroundings. A nice plush pillow is beneath your head, and half your head is wrapped in bandages. Your balls itch, but when you go to scratch them you realize your arm is gone. + + +“Where the fuck am I?” + + +A comely wench caresses your hand. “My good knight, you killed the dragon! We heard the battle from down in the valley, and some of the braver folk went to investigate. They found you gravely wounded, so they brought you to me and I nursed you back to health.” + + +“Are you a herb woman?” + + +“No.” + + +“What are you?” + + +“A milkmaid.” + + +“Why did they bring me to you?” + + +“Milk gives you strong bones?” She shrugs. “But don’t worry, I did a good job taking care of you. I watched over you day and night, and I only touched your private bits a few times.” + + +“Well that’s nice of you, but… WHAT?” + + +“To clean them, Sir.” + + +“Oh, I’m sorry. I just thought… never-mind. Thank you.” + + +The milkmaid wench smirks coyly. “With my tongue.” + + +Goddamn it. + + +Well, there you go, Mr. Hero. You killed the dragon. Not exactly the most heroic showing, but it got the job done. I imagine you expect to go back to your princess bride now, am I right? Princess Anne must be dying to see you. Boy, do I have bad news for you. + + +Princesses’ do not marry hideously scarred men, and your face, well go look in a mirror. You look like someone slammed your head into a flaming brazier. Hey, don’t get too upset. You are still a knight, and you have the eternal gratitude of the kingdom of Irelandshire. Plus, you got a ton of booty from that dragon’s lair. + + +Time passes and you heal, more or less. You have the pick of any non-princess in two kingdoms, but you decide to settle down with the milkmaid wench, whose name turns out to be Marie. The two of you have several healthy children together with heroic aspirations of their own. You still keep in touch with your old pals Jon, Samwellington, and The Rabid Fox. You have a few castles built in both kingdoms and become a legendary hero. Of course, when you tell the story, you leave out the crying and begging for mercy part. + + +Your life with Marie is hot and steamy. You are not sure if you will ever get used to all of her kinks – you find yourself in some interesting scenarios when you wake up from time to time – but at the same time they kind of turn you on. +> Once upon a time... +The wintry winds howl a horrible wail, whipping white watery snow against the weathered watchtower’s westernmost wall. Yes, it is indeed a dark and stormy night, but darker and stormier and maybe just a tad more purple than your run-of-the-mill dark and stormy night. + + +Somewhere deep in the forest a unicorn frolics in a magical glade, as elves watch and scamper amongst the trees, polishing their bows with the blood of dwarves. + + +“Killed a big fat one today, Elfrond,” says Elfmoor. “Bastard was trying to chop down a cherry tree. Can you believe it, a fucking cherry tree? Sacrilege.” + + +“Have you ever wondered why we hate the dwarves so much?” asks Elfrond. + + +“What do you mean? They’re fucking dwarves! And this one chopped down a tree. A cherry tree. Only thing that rivals my love of trees are cherries. And music. And song. And like five other things.” + + +“Yeah, I’ve just been thinking lately. How did we get these sweet bows, if we didn’t chop down a tree to shape them. And how do we burn fires without firewood? And why exactly do we hate the dwarves?” + + +“It’s canon. Don’t ask questions.” + + +“What’s a cannon?” + + +Suddenly, the elves quit bickering. Something that only happens once in a thousand years occurs. The glade explodes with magical aura as the unicorn releases its legendary rainbow fart. Magical anomalies, such as this, signal only one thing: the birth of a hero. + + +Elfmoor takes a big whiff of the magical aroma. “B. E. A. Utiful. Times like this make life worth living.” + + +Elfrond shakes his head. “Elfmoor, we’re immortal. I’ve seen this like ten times already. And every time this happens, it means something evil is about to come afoot." + + +“But the hero always wins.” + + +“Have you ever heard the term collateral damage?” + + +“Is that a sword?” + + +And there you have it. The magical unicorn fart that marks your birth. How exciting! I wonder what type of hero you will grow up to be. +> I want to be a wizard! Step aside, Potter! +A fine choice my friend. What is fantasy without wizards and magic? + + +You are born to parents of mysterious lineage. You cannot recall their faces or remember much of anything about them. When you are three years old, an old grey-bearded man in a tall pointy hat whisks you away to his society of magical folk and teaches you all he knows of the arcane. Naturally, the society is on a magical island whose shores are shrouded in fog, located some indeterminate number of leagues off the coast of the mainland. Growing up is fun, but tedious. Spells and incantations do not learn themselves. + + +Everything is peaches and plum pudding until one day you receive a summons – via giant flying eagle – from your old master. You are high up on the mountain, collecting snow samples for an alchemical experiment. It would take several days to hike all the way back to Manawell. + + +“Mr. Eagle?” you ask. Your voice is hedging, what you are about to ask is groundbreaking. + + +“What is it friend?” + + +“Could you give me a lift back down the mountain? This sounds important.” + + +The eagle cocks his head. You are not sure if an eagle can look bemused, but if it could, you imagine this is what it would look like. “You know, no one has ever asked me that before. I always wondered why.” + + +“Wizards are notorious for staying in shape,” you say. “How else could white-beards run around with swords and keep pace with adventuring young heroes?” + + +“Ah, I see. You learn something new every day. Well, very well. Hop on my back, but try not to pull out any feathers.” + + +The eagle flies you down to Manawell in no time at all. There may even be time to run a nice 10k this evening to make up for your lost exercise. You rush through the magical community to your master’s tower, stopping only a brief moment to window shop at Merlim’s Beard Trimming Emporium. Don’t worry, I understand. Proper beard care is essential. No one wants to be the ruddy wizard with a bird’s nest in his beard. That guy sucks. You finish your browsing and proceed to your master’s tower without further incident. + + +“Master Dumbledalf,” you shout as you reach the top room of the tower. “I received your summons. Is everything alright?” + + +Dumbledalf sets down his alchemical decanter and stares at you, his face expressionless. “Why are you here?” + + +“I told you. I received your summons.” + + +“Yes, but you aren’t supposed to be here for five more days.” + + +“I hitched a ride with the eagle.” + + +“You what!? Oh you ruined everything.” + + +“Excuse me?” + + +“I’m not supposed to die for five more days. You sapped all the drama from my character. Oh well, just sit tight one second.” + + +Dumbledalf crushes a few rattails and snake fangs with his mortar and pestle, boils some rum and troll’s blood, sprinkles some belladonna power, and mixes all the goop together. He downs the concoction in one gulp and collapses to the floor. + + +“There, that’s better,” he says, coughing blood. “You have finally completed your apprenticeship under me. My time has come and gone, but yours is just beginning. As a true wizard, you must now undertake a heroic adventure. Let me see here.” Dumbledalf pulls a scrap of parchment from within his robes. “Ah, here we go. There are two available that fit your qualifications.” + + +Dumbledalf dies in your arms. You scream and curse the gods for taking the life of such a fine man. He was only 1984. He should have had at least another century in him. You finish your mandatory blubbering and look at the paper. +> Travel to Westengland and Kill some Evil Wizard +Why bother tutoring the next great hero when you can be the next great hero? Killing an evil wizard is certain to garner the fame and acclaim necessary to ascend to the ever sought after hero status. You grab an assortment of essential wizarding supplies from Dumbledalf’s stores, cast a burying spell on his body, and head to the port to set sail for Westengland. + + +The captain of the Briar Rose is thrilled to have a wizard onboard. Wizards prove quite invaluable at sea, what with all the pirates, storms, and sea monsters lurking beneath the depths. + + +“A wizard at sea is worth his weight in silver,” says Captain Horatio. + + +“I thought the saying was ‘worth his weight in gold.’ + + +“No offense your magicness, but if a wizard was worth his weight in gold, I’d have no room for a profit.” + + +“Better to be alive and penniless than dead and rich.” + + +“A wise wizard,” chuckles Captain Horatio. “Who would have guessed?” + + +Captain Horatio excuses himself and bustles about the ship, blowing his horn. What a pleasant fellow. + + +You watch as the magic island that has been your home for so many years shrinks in the distance. Leaving feels so weird, but when destiny calls, heroes must rise to the summons. Perhaps someday you will return. + + +Despite all the perils of the sea, your trip to Westengland is nothing but sugarplums and rainbows. Dear Lord are you sick of sugarplums. Captain Horatio could have stocked the ship with a wider and more nutritional array of foodstuffs. At least all of the rainbows are pretty to look at. + + +Thrilled to be back on dry land and away from the sugarplums, you hasten to the king’s castle – aptly named King’s Castle – on the outskirts of the capital city. The road reveals no signs of this evil wizard, though the lack of peasants proves quite disturbing. On second thought, perhaps that is a sign. + + +As you near King’s Castle, the unmistakable and addicting allure of magic thickens in the air. Sweet, succulent, salacious magic. Coaxing your horse to gallop like she never galloped before and thanking God for the widespread success of the Rent-a-Horse industry, you burst onto the scene of a massive siege of King’s Castle. + + +Grotesque trolls, disfigured by horrible magic spells, batter the gates with uprooted trees. Goblins beyond count shriek and swarm the outer walls on ladders crafted from bones. Wyverns – the dragon wannabes of the world – lash at the human defenders from above. Centaurs loose arrows and rape women, even in the midst of battle: the deviant equines. Mages cast spells and necromancers awaken the dead. The defenders fight with vigor and valiance only for the slain to arise and fight on. Most horrible of all, waves of human corpses throw themselves at the castle walls, snaking from the smoking ruins of the capital city down in the valley. + + +The evil wizard is really throwing the gauntlet at King’s Castle. The castle may be beyond saving already. The old adage a wizard is never late or early isn’t really true. Of course, a wizard can be late or early! They are human after all. Sort of. The wisest thing may be to find the king and save his sorry ass. Then again, heroes aren’t known for always making the wisest decision. So how about it hero, do you pack enough punch to turn the tides of battle on your own?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The wintry winds howl a horrible wail, whipping white watery snow against the weathered watchtower’s westernmost wall. Yes, it is indeed a dark and stormy night, but darker and stormier and maybe just a tad more purple than your run-of-the-mill dark and stormy night. + + +Somewhere deep in the forest a unicorn frolics in a magical glade, as elves watch and scamper amongst the trees, polishing their bows with the blood of dwarves. + + +“Killed a big fat one today, Elfrond,” says Elfmoor. “Bastard was trying to chop down a cherry tree. Can you believe it, a fucking cherry tree? Sacrilege.” + + +“Have you ever wondered why we hate the dwarves so much?” asks Elfrond. + + +“What do you mean? They’re fucking dwarves! And this one chopped down a tree. A cherry tree. Only thing that rivals my love of trees are cherries. And music. And song. And like five other things.” + + +“Yeah, I’ve just been thinking lately. How did we get these sweet bows, if we didn’t chop down a tree to shape them. And how do we burn fires without firewood? And why exactly do we hate the dwarves?” + + +“It’s canon. Don’t ask questions.” + + +“What’s a cannon?” + + +Suddenly, the elves quit bickering. Something that only happens once in a thousand years occurs. The glade explodes with magical aura as the unicorn releases its legendary rainbow fart. Magical anomalies, such as this, signal only one thing: the birth of a hero. + + +Elfmoor takes a big whiff of the magical aroma. “B. E. A. Utiful. Times like this make life worth living.” + + +Elfrond shakes his head. “Elfmoor, we’re immortal. I’ve seen this like ten times already. And every time this happens, it means something evil is about to come afoot." + + +“But the hero always wins.” + + +“Have you ever heard the term collateral damage?” + + +“Is that a sword?” + + +And there you have it. The magical unicorn fart that marks your birth. How exciting! I wonder what type of hero you will grow up to be. +> I am Vegeta, prince of all saiyans! +No teaser here, but you wouldn't actually get to play as Vegeta, just an angsty prince with a dead father.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The wintry winds howl a horrible wail, whipping white watery snow against the weathered watchtower’s westernmost wall. Yes, it is indeed a dark and stormy night, but darker and stormier and maybe just a tad more purple than your run-of-the-mill dark and stormy night. + + +Somewhere deep in the forest a unicorn frolics in a magical glade, as elves watch and scamper amongst the trees, polishing their bows with the blood of dwarves. + + +“Killed a big fat one today, Elfrond,” says Elfmoor. “Bastard was trying to chop down a cherry tree. Can you believe it, a fucking cherry tree? Sacrilege.” + + +“Have you ever wondered why we hate the dwarves so much?” asks Elfrond. + + +“What do you mean? They’re fucking dwarves! And this one chopped down a tree. A cherry tree. Only thing that rivals my love of trees are cherries. And music. And song. And like five other things.” + + +“Yeah, I’ve just been thinking lately. How did we get these sweet bows, if we didn’t chop down a tree to shape them. And how do we burn fires without firewood? And why exactly do we hate the dwarves?” + + +“It’s canon. Don’t ask questions.” + + +“What’s a cannon?” + + +Suddenly, the elves quit bickering. Something that only happens once in a thousand years occurs. The glade explodes with magical aura as the unicorn releases its legendary rainbow fart. Magical anomalies, such as this, signal only one thing: the birth of a hero. + + +Elfmoor takes a big whiff of the magical aroma. “B. E. A. Utiful. Times like this make life worth living.” + + +Elfrond shakes his head. “Elfmoor, we’re immortal. I’ve seen this like ten times already. And every time this happens, it means something evil is about to come afoot." + + +“But the hero always wins.” + + +“Have you ever heard the term collateral damage?” + + +“Is that a sword?” + + +And there you have it. The magical unicorn fart that marks your birth. How exciting! I wonder what type of hero you will grow up to be. +> Is there any way I can be a girl? +Certainly, you can be a girl. However, I am afraid it only comes in one flavor: spunky! + + +Born to ho-hum parents in a ho-hum village in a ho-hum kingdom, life growing up bores the daylights out of you. You are faster and stronger than all the boys are, and sexier and wilder than all the girls, despite their best efforts. You thirst for adventure and always prance around with an almost – but not quite – slutty smile on your face. + + +One evening you find yourself down at the lake with your friends: Cherry, Melisa, Tommy, and Brad. Of course, you have more friends because you are just so damn spunky, but these are your best friends. + + +You notice Tommy staring at you for the sixth time today. “Is everything alright, Tommy?” you ask. “You seem to be off in the clouds.” + + +“Yeah, I’m ok. Can I tell you something?” + + +“You can tell me anything, Tommy.” + + +“No offense, but you have awesome breasts.” + + +You smack Tommy upside the head. “Tommy. Stop. Now. That is not cool. Just because I’m spunky does not mean you get to ogle my body. If that is all you can think about, stare at Melisa. She’s the whore of our group.” + + +Melisa nods. “Guilty as charged.” + + +You storm off with Brad and Cherry following at your heels like a pair of nipping puppies while Tommy and Melissa disappear into the bushes. After all, this is a tale of a heroine’s escapades, not her sexcapades. + + +“The nerve of that guy,” you say, shaking your head. “I am a prime virgin flower, and I will not be treated like some common whore. I think it’s time we went off on a grand adventure and left that jerk behind.” + + +Brad’s face glows with delight. “I second that!” + + +“What about Melissa?” asks Cherry. + + +“As long as there is a man around with a penis and a pulse, Melissa will be fine,” you say. “I say we go adventuring!” + + +So you decide to leave your quaint little life in village ho-hum for the experience of a lifetime. Any thoughts as to where you are adventuring?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The wintry winds howl a horrible wail, whipping white watery snow against the weathered watchtower’s westernmost wall. Yes, it is indeed a dark and stormy night, but darker and stormier and maybe just a tad more purple than your run-of-the-mill dark and stormy night. + + +Somewhere deep in the forest a unicorn frolics in a magical glade, as elves watch and scamper amongst the trees, polishing their bows with the blood of dwarves. + + +“Killed a big fat one today, Elfrond,” says Elfmoor. “Bastard was trying to chop down a cherry tree. Can you believe it, a fucking cherry tree? Sacrilege.” + + +“Have you ever wondered why we hate the dwarves so much?” asks Elfrond. + + +“What do you mean? They’re fucking dwarves! And this one chopped down a tree. A cherry tree. Only thing that rivals my love of trees are cherries. And music. And song. And like five other things.” + + +“Yeah, I’ve just been thinking lately. How did we get these sweet bows, if we didn’t chop down a tree to shape them. And how do we burn fires without firewood? And why exactly do we hate the dwarves?” + + +“It’s canon. Don’t ask questions.” + + +“What’s a cannon?” + + +Suddenly, the elves quit bickering. Something that only happens once in a thousand years occurs. The glade explodes with magical aura as the unicorn releases its legendary rainbow fart. Magical anomalies, such as this, signal only one thing: the birth of a hero. + + +Elfmoor takes a big whiff of the magical aroma. “B. E. A. Utiful. Times like this make life worth living.” + + +Elfrond shakes his head. “Elfmoor, we’re immortal. I’ve seen this like ten times already. And every time this happens, it means something evil is about to come afoot." + + +“But the hero always wins.” + + +“Have you ever heard the term collateral damage?” + + +“Is that a sword?” + + +And there you have it. The magical unicorn fart that marks your birth. How exciting! I wonder what type of hero you will grow up to be. +> Bonus Material +Thanks for playing. Enjoy the troll blood. +> Play as an Elf +Elves are certainly cliché. But I’m a species-ist. That means while I have no problem with humans be they white, orange, green, blue, black, yellow, pink, purple, brown, grey, indigo, crimson, maroon, cream, peach, pie… wait where was I going with this. Oh, right. I have a deep hatred of other species. We humans are superior and everyone else must bow down to our supremacy. Don’t judge me. It’s a disease. Now excuse me while I enslave this squirrel.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Thanks for playing. Enjoy the troll blood. +> Play as a Dwarf +Game of Thrones changed the world for dwarf kind forever. Are they a species or are they people? The species-ist in me is skeptical. Judgment shall be reserved.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Thanks for playing. Enjoy the troll blood. +> Play as a Warrior-Cat +You ran out into the road and got trampled by a runaway carriage, and your corpse was devoured by a pack of dogs. The End.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Thanks for playing. Enjoy the troll blood. +> Play as a Dark Elf +Have you not read Eternal? Go read Eternal. Then come back and tell me how heroic dark elves are.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Thanks for playing. Enjoy the troll blood. +> Play as a Sparkly Vampire +Really, you want to be a sparkly vampire? What kind of writer do you think I am? I have standards after all. Do you really want to be a sparkly vampire, or are you just trying to piss me off? +> I'm sorry. I'll pick something more appropriate. +That’s right young lady. No hero of mine is going to be some sissified vampire. My heroes have pretty blue eyes, long blonde hair and flawless pearly whites. Manliness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Really, you want to be a sparkly vampire? What kind of writer do you think I am? I have standards after all. Do you really want to be a sparkly vampire, or are you just trying to piss me off? +> Sparkly Vampire! +Stephanie, I hate you. + + +Fine, you want to be a sparkly vampire, go ahead. + + +Once a pompous little lordling living in the south of Spainland you not only had the misfortune of being bitten by a vampire while having sex with your sister, but also getting gene spliced with a unicorn by the hands of a genre-bending – and seriously twisted – wizard from the future called a Brony. The magic involved with this transformation goes far beyond my comprehension of the arcane, but I assure you it was incredibly painful. On the positive end, however, you now fart bubblegum and shit figgy pudding.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Attacking him head on would be suicide. Sure, it would be nice to blind him or cut into his underbelly, but he would just fry you with a blast of fire before you even got close. There is only one course of action to take in times like this: dodge. + + +Like a timid bear you perform a false charge, pulling up at the last second as a blast of fire scorches the ground in front of you. Without your bulky armor you are able to twist and twirl, spin and swirl, dip and dive, jump and jive and pirouette away from the dragon fire while inching ever closer to the monster. Since when did you get moves like Jagger? + + +“Die mortal,” the dragon shouts, releasing another blast of fire. + + +You duck behind a conveniently placed boulder just in time to escape. The dragon stalks closer. His massive limbs quake the ground with every step: his tail smashing the wall without purpose. Another blast of fire. The heat coming off the rock is like lava. You fear it is about to melt. + + +Is this it? Is this the end? + + +“Foolish mortal. The only way to kill a dragon is with a disorganized band of heroes and a bard, or with a magic sword. And you don’t have either. Mwhahaha.” + + +Shit. I’m totally fucked. Why didn’t I read that book on dragon clichés Jon bought me last Christmas? Think fast, think fast, think fast. Brain blast! Music! Music soothes the savage beast. Shit, I forgot my fiddle. + + +The dragon rumbles closer, taking his sweet time. Any more bright ideas, Mr. Hero? +> Dodge? +If Jon taught you one thing, it is how to dodge like it is your job, and it kind of is. Sort of. I don’t know, just kill the damned thing. + + +You leap over the rock and attempt a triple double-axle barrel roll in midair and land on the dragon’s head. For some reason, this works and you manage to dodge the dragon’s fire breath in the process with your sixth sense. + + +The dragon thrashes his head against the cave walls, but you manage to cling on while avoiding having your body smashed to a thousand bloody bits. You hack at the dragon’s head with your sword, but it may as well be a butter knife for all the good it does against the tough dragon scales. Maybe you should have dodged over toward one of those fancy looking magic swords. + + +Shut up. I have this under control. + + +Ok. Whatever you say, Mr. Hero. + + +“Hey, dragon, you suck.” + + +“I will not have a mortal make mockery of me!” the dragon bellows. “Get. Off. My. Head.” + + +The dragon swings his mighty tail at you, but once again, you manage to use your sixth sense to dodge all of the attacks. The dragon repeatedly pummels himself in the head with his own tail to the point where he shatters both his scales and his skull. You drive your sword into the crevice and perform a super-duper double whammy backflip with a 720 degree spin off the dragon’s head as he bursts into flames. + + +“Wicked. Now how the hell am I going to haul all this shit down the mountain?” + + +… + + +What, aren’t you going to finish the story? + + +Yeah, just give me a second. + + +What the fuck is the problem? I won, I want to marry my princess and lose my damn virginity already. + + +I’m just struggling to comprehend how you turned into a jedi. + + +A what? + + +Never mind. + + +… + + +Word of your victory quickly spreads across the land. The king of Irelandshire showers you in gratitude and offers you his daughter as a bride, which you decline because you proved to be a noble and heroic knight and you already have a bride. You take some of the dragon’s treasure back home with you and build a series of castles and forts at strategic points across the countryside. Your future kin are keeping this kingdom for life. Historians and bards alike flock to scribble down your life story and paint it in song. + + +Your wedding to Princess Anne is a legend in its own right: drunken revelry at its finest. Samwellington entertains the masses by sticking himself with pointy knives and not screaming in pain, good old pork lard. Jon and The Rabid Fox have a friendly sparring match, showcasing some of the finest swordsmanship since your melee. Jon later demonstrates another kind of swordsmanship with his wildfire gingersnap of a wife. On the table. Next to one of the cakes. The king gets drunk and accidentally burns down the stage while a troupe of troubadours are performing. No one important dies. + + +Most importantly, you finally get to bang Princess Anne, that blue-eyed blonde haired big bosomed goddess of your dreams: a night of ecstasy ends in an explosion of pleasure with many more to come.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Attacking him head on would be suicide. Sure, it would be nice to blind him or cut into his underbelly, but he would just fry you with a blast of fire before you even got close. There is only one course of action to take in times like this: dodge. + + +Like a timid bear you perform a false charge, pulling up at the last second as a blast of fire scorches the ground in front of you. Without your bulky armor you are able to twist and twirl, spin and swirl, dip and dive, jump and jive and pirouette away from the dragon fire while inching ever closer to the monster. Since when did you get moves like Jagger? + + +“Die mortal,” the dragon shouts, releasing another blast of fire. + + +You duck behind a conveniently placed boulder just in time to escape. The dragon stalks closer. His massive limbs quake the ground with every step: his tail smashing the wall without purpose. Another blast of fire. The heat coming off the rock is like lava. You fear it is about to melt. + + +Is this it? Is this the end? + + +“Foolish mortal. The only way to kill a dragon is with a disorganized band of heroes and a bard, or with a magic sword. And you don’t have either. Mwhahaha.” + + +Shit. I’m totally fucked. Why didn’t I read that book on dragon clichés Jon bought me last Christmas? Think fast, think fast, think fast. Brain blast! Music! Music soothes the savage beast. Shit, I forgot my fiddle. + + +The dragon rumbles closer, taking his sweet time. Any more bright ideas, Mr. Hero? +> How about I steal one of those sweet magic swords sticking out of his treasure pile. +You make a mental note to thank the dragon for providing you with the recipe for his death at his funeral as you yank the first magic sword you find from the mountain of plunder. The sword shines a brilliant blue-gold and has a queer hourglass shape carved into the blade: yep, definitely magic. Though, something feels awful familiar about this. Oh well, you can worry about that later. You have a dragon to kill. + + +“Your day of reckoning has come, dragon!” + + +“No, you fool,” the dragon rasps. “Put that down. Hasn’t anyone ever told you not to meddle with magic you don’t know how to use?” + + +“Nope.” + + +The dragon breathes fire at you, but you knock it away with a swing of the sword. The resulting fireball explodes in the treasure hoard. Molten gold and silver splatter everywhere. Droplets burn into your arms and chest, but you struggle through the pain and raise the magic sword for the killing blow. + + +“You’ll doom us all,” the dragon pleads. + + +Not that it’s my place, but I think you should listen to the dragon. + + +What do you expect me to do, negotiate a treaty? + + +I would endorse that. +> Fine. +“Alright dragon,” you say. “The asshole narrator told me not to kill you. What’s the deal?” + + +The dragon sighs in relief as steam spouts from his nostrils. “Of all the fucking magic swords, you grabbed the Time-Warper.” + + +“And I care why?” + + +“Once the blade slices into something living, the last five seconds of all life are replayed on an infinite loop.” + + +“How do you stop it?” + + +“You can’t.” + + +“That’s fucking retarded. Who would make such a stupid sword?” + + +“A villain.” + + +“But the villain would be damning himself for all eternity too.” + + +“I said a villain. Not a smart villain.” + + +Agreeing you are at an impasse, you and the dragon negotiate a treaty the two of you find mutually acceptable. The dragon receives 50% of all taxes collected within Irelandshire, 1 out of every 3 sheep, 1 princess of his choice per year, and you receive one dragon ride every Sunday after church. You are not very good at negotiations.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You make a mental note to thank the dragon for providing you with the recipe for his death at his funeral as you yank the first magic sword you find from the mountain of plunder. The sword shines a brilliant blue-gold and has a queer hourglass shape carved into the blade: yep, definitely magic. Though, something feels awful familiar about this. Oh well, you can worry about that later. You have a dragon to kill. + + +“Your day of reckoning has come, dragon!” + + +“No, you fool,” the dragon rasps. “Put that down. Hasn’t anyone ever told you not to meddle with magic you don’t know how to use?” + + +“Nope.” + + +The dragon breathes fire at you, but you knock it away with a swing of the sword. The resulting fireball explodes in the treasure hoard. Molten gold and silver splatter everywhere. Droplets burn into your arms and chest, but you struggle through the pain and raise the magic sword for the killing blow. + + +“You’ll doom us all,” the dragon pleads. + + +Not that it’s my place, but I think you should listen to the dragon. + + +What do you expect me to do, negotiate a treaty? + + +I would endorse that. +> I'm killing him. +“You’ll doom us all,” the dragon pleads again. + + +“No, just you.” And you hammer the sword into the dragon. +> Deja vu +“You’ll doom us all,” the dragon pleads again. + + +“No, just you.” And you hammer the sword into the dragon. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is only one way this story can unfold, and that is with you finally surpassing your master and claiming the princess as your own. For princess bosom! You charge. + + +Jon dodges your blow. You swing again. He dodges and counters with an upward thrust. No time to dodge, you catch his sword with your shield. The wood splinters, and you snap your wrist, catching his sword in the shield. Déjà vu? + + +Not quite. A knee slams you in the groin, and you crumple to the ground. Fight through the pain hero! You lash you with your legs, catching Jon in the chest. Both of you regain your feet and slam into each other. Over and over you roll, grappling on the ground. Dust swirls around your heads. You throw blind punches. The crowd cheers. + + +You fight the good fight, but Jon wins in the end, catching you in a stellar headlock. The king congratulates you both and the crowd gives a standing ovation. + + +“Best melee in years. I think the both of you earned a knighthood for such a fine display of chivalrous combat,” says the king. “Tonight there will be a feast for the ages... on the Baron’s tab of course.” + + +You are bummed you will not be getting princess bosom, but you feel proud of how you fought. Even heroes take their lumps from time to time. + + +As expected, Jon names the princess Lady Fair of the tournament. You see him whisper something in her ear and point in your direction. She is walking toward you! What the hell did he say? + + +“Princess Anne.” You bow. “It is my pleasure.” + + +“And mine. Would you care to walk with me in the gardens?” + + +You readily agree and spend much of the remainder of your time getting to know Princess Anne. She is everything you could hope for in a princess, blonde, blue eyed, fair skinned, sweet, charming, big bosomed, and all the works. + + +“What did you say to her?” you ask Jon one evening. + + +He shrugs. “I love princesses as much as the next guy, but really, I’m in to redheads.” He smirks. “I think the farmboy turned knight getting the princess makes the better story. I’m nailing the Baron’s daughter. Wildfire hair on her.” He winks. “Just the way I like it.” + + +Months pass and you perform several fantastic heroic feats. Jon marries the Baron’s daughter and you become engaged to the princess. Some days it all seems so unreal, like just the other day you were selling turnips and mucking shit. Now you are a hero. +> Time to retire. +Did you seriously just turn down the opportunity to kill a dragon? You may be a hero, but you aren’t the cliché’ hero you were destined to be. You could have done more. Oh well, what is done is done. + + +You marry Princess Anne and have a beautiful wedding ceremony. All the dukes, earls, barons, and other lords in the kingdom attend. Jon serves as your best man and leads the wedding toast. Samwellington gets drunk and passes out in one of the massive strawberry cakes while receiving a blowjob from one of the maids, not quite sure how that happened. + + +Sir Henry Williams, your old friend The Rabid Fox, regales the guests with tales from the tournament and other ventures you undertook together in the aftermath. “Would you believe,” he says, “we saw a unicorn fart in a glade a few months back? Mark of a hero’s birth is what that is.” Hmm, so much for that once every thousand years bullshit. You lame ass heroes are becoming a dime a dozen. + + +Too bad ma and pa could not be around to see this, but heroes almost never have parents survive long enough to see them achieve success. You know their watching over you from somewhere above though. + + +Later that night, you finally get to relief all that pent up tension that has been building up in your loins for all of these years. You are glad you saved yourself because it was something special. All thirty seconds of it. But you get better with time, and Princess Anne plops out several little you’s, one of which grows up to be king someday. + + +Still. You could have killed a dragon.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Heroes fight with honor at all times. There is no way in hell you are going to betray Jon. How could you ever look him in the eyes again? Besides, he is pretty fucking awesome. If you are going to win this thing, you are going to do it the right way and beat him with pride, honor, dignity, and all the other bullshit that goes with being a hero. + + +“I’ll distract him. You knock him off the horse,” says Jon. + + +“What about Bucktooth Barry?” + + +“Dodge.” + + +Jon darts off to run interference while you attempt to flank. The Rabid Fox is on to your plan though and outmaneuvers you while Bucktooth Barry hedges his position. This might go on for a while. What would a hero do? + + +You glance up at the spectators and catch sight of the princess. A blonde haired blue eyed bombshell with a bosom to die for. She flashes you a smile of perfect pearly whites. Did you expect anything else? Take a moment to picture all the ways you would love to chivalrously plow her into next Sunday. Just try not to ejaculate prematurely in your armor. That is not heroic. No, go ahead. I can wait. + + +Got all that out of your system? Good. With the princess’s bosom in your mind to inspire you, you charge the mounted knight. He reels the horse around and barrels toward you, eager for the challenge. As you are about to collide, you dodge. The Rabid Fox brings the horse around for another pass. You feel the blood pumping through your veins. The air tastes sweet. Colors are brighter. The world slows down. This is what being a hero is all about. + + +You and The Rabid Fox rush each other once more. As you are about to collide, not only do you dodge, but you grab the reins as well and yank. Your arm feels like it is going to pop out of its socket, but you grit it out. The Rabid Fox flies through the air and thuds into the dirt. He stumbles to his feet and grabs a greatsword off the ground. Man, this motherfucker just does not give up. + + +He has the reach advantage, but he is hurt. Pretty bad, judging by the fact he just fell off a galloping horse decked out in mail while brandishing a sword. He should probably be dead: or at least broken. He uses his reach to keep you at a distance, but you bide your time. He will make a mistake. Dodge, backstep, yawn, dodge. A quick glance up at the princess’s bosom. With princess bosom lighting your fire, you see an opening and dive in and drive The Rabid Fox to the ground. + + +“Well fought, friend. I yield,” says The Rabid Fox as you hold your sword tip over him. + + +Jon has finished off Bucktooth Barry. It is down to the two of you. +> Actually, I was going to name one of the other girls Lady Fair of the Tournament. +You have to be kidding me. Don’t you know anything about the antics of cliché knightly heroes? The gallant knight always marries the blue eyed blonde haired princess and enjoys blissful princess bosom until the end of his days. And you want to throw all of that away for some lowly baron’s daughter or common wench? You disgust me. + + +Fighting for an unworthy cause, you race forward to meet Jon in good old-fashioned master-student combat. The clamor of steel on steel fills the field as you and Jon clash and slash. Sweat stings your eyes as Jon attacks with relentless vigor. You dodge, parry, and counterstrike as best you can, but you are fighting against the man who taught you everything you know. How can you possibly hope to win? You don’t even have the righteous thirst for princess bosom riling your untapped potential. + + +For gritty lowborn buxom wenches! + + +Well, I must admit they do have their own special brand of flavor. It just doesn’t have the same ring to it though. + + +Drunk on visions of buxom wenches you dodge blow after blow after blow. You resist the urge to strike and continue to dodge; your heart will tell you when it is time to attack. + + +“I taught you well,” Jon pants. “You’re dodging like a true champion.” + + +“I learned from the best.” + + +“Time for another lesson.” Jon backs off and takes a defensive position. “You can’t dodge if I don’t attack.” + + +“You son of a bitch.” + + +Jon smirks. “Trumped.” + + +A crazy idea crosses your mind. You don’t know if it’ll work – or if it even makes any sense – but it just might be stupid enough to work. With nothing to lose and everything to gain, you begin the attack. Just as expected Jon dodges. Then you dodge his dodge, catching Jon completely by surprise. Taking a page out of Samwellington’s incredibly short book of useful combat skills you follow up with a dodge ram attack, circling Jon and barreling him into the ground. The maneuver hurts like hell, but like a true hero you ignore the pain and leap to your feet. + + +You hold your blade over Jon’s throat. “Yield.” + + +Jon chuckles. “Nice moves. You win.” + + +You help Jon to his feet as the crowd erupts into a chorus of cheers and shouts. + + +“What skill! What daring! What a fight!” The king bids you and Jon both kneel and knights the pair of you right there in the field. “They’ll be talking about this tourney for ages. I don’t even know what that was you did there Sir, but it was fantastic.” + + +All that is left is for you to name the Lady Fair of the tournament. I still don’t approve of your anti princess antics, but you showed mettle in the melee and that is something to take pride in. + + +Two buxom wenches who have caught your eyes on since the tourney started: the ginger haired Baron’s daughter, Ginger, and a lowly servant woman, Abbey, with rather typical and mundane features. What the servant woman lacks in grandeur she makes up for with a charming smile and pleasant cuteness all her own. Of course, naming a servant woman Lady Fair could cause some very serious problems by offending the nobles. + + +Not that it is my place to intrude young knight, but Jon has been ogling the gingersnap all day. Take that as you will. The choice is yours after all; you earned it. +> Name Ginger Lady Fair +It takes a very special and talented person to handle a fire-crotched wildfire gingersnap, and quite frankly I don’t think you have what it takes. + + +You name Ginger Lady Fair and marry her shortly after. Jon turns down your request to be your best man, saying something about a dragon he needs to kill in Irelandshire. You’re bummed, but you understand. A hero’s work is never done until the end of the story. Ginger is a freak in bed, and just as I warned, it takes all of your energy to feed her wicked sexual appetite. + + +Life goes on and you undertake a series of adventures with your new friend The Rabid Fox. Sadly, as the years pass you and Jon grow further and further apart. Years go by without seeing or hearing from him at all. + + +… + + +It has been ten years since the fateful tournament, and you have a small brood of gingersnap children to go with your gingersnap wife. You doubt any of them have it in them to be heroes. There isn’t even a strawberry blonde one in the bunch. + + +After several weeks of adventuring with The Rabid Fox, you wave farewell to him at the fork in the road and head to your respective castles. On the way, you find your lands burnt and salted. The villages are nothing but smoldering ruins and the peasants have completely vanished. Massive piles of dung litter the landscape. Urging your trusty steed, Hot Biscuit Slim, to a full gallop you arrive at your castle to find it lying in ruins. Oh, and there’s a dragon sitting on top of the pile of rubble. Jon is there too. + + +You are starting to think Jon may be jealous about you marrying Ginger. He does have an unhealthy fixation for fire-crotched gingersnaps. + + +“Where the hell is my family?” You draw your sword, waving it menacingly. + + +“In my belly.” The dragon guffaws, releasing a blast of deadly dragon fire. “Thank you so much Sir Jon for raping the woman first. I love my food when it’s properly terrorized and ravaged.” + + +“Jon! How could you?” You fall to your knees in sorrow. “You were my friend!” + + +“Don’t listen to the dragon! She’s lying. I’ve been tracking her for weeks. She’s the mate of the dragon I killed in Irelandshire years ago. To avenge her lover, she’s trying to turn you against me by creating this incredibly unnecessary scenario to frame me for the rape, murder, and plunder of all you know and love.” + + +“That seems excessive, Jon. Excuse me if I don’t buy that.” + + +“It’s true! She wants to set us against each other so she can kill us both while we’re at one another’s throats.” + + +“For what greater purpose?” + + +“Elaborate revenge and kingdom domination.” + + +“Hmmm, we are pretty badass. I doubt she could kill either of us one on one. And that does sound like something a dragon would do.” + + +The dragon roars and flaps her massive wings. “I never lie about properly terrorized and ravaged food. Rape and betrayal are the perfect seasonings.” + + +Well now, this is an unfortunate situation. Who is telling the truth? +> Kill the dragon +“I trust you, Jon. Let’s make this scaly freak go the way of the dinosaurs. Extinct.” + + +“Leave the witty one-liners to me and you’ve got a deal.” + + +Together you and Jon dispatch the dragon after a long and grueling battle. You don’t remember any of the details because your heart is too choked with grief. The important thing is the dragon is dead and you’re not. Exhausted and suffering from severe burns you and Jon slump against the ruins of your castle. + + +“Well, so much for a heroes ending,” you say, emptying your canteen. “I guess this is what I get for breaking the cliché.” + + +“I have a confession to make,” says Jon. + + +“Oh, God, don’t tell me the dragon was telling the truth.” + + +“It’s a dragon, man. They always tell half-truths. Everything I said was true. I really was tracking the dragon to kill it.” + + +“But…” + + +“But I got here before the dragon and raped your wife. I’m sorry, man, I have a sickness for fire-crotch. In the meantime, the dragon wasted your livelihood then came and ate Ginger out from under me.”<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It takes a very special and talented person to handle a fire-crotched wildfire gingersnap, and quite frankly I don’t think you have what it takes. + + +You name Ginger Lady Fair and marry her shortly after. Jon turns down your request to be your best man, saying something about a dragon he needs to kill in Irelandshire. You’re bummed, but you understand. A hero’s work is never done until the end of the story. Ginger is a freak in bed, and just as I warned, it takes all of your energy to feed her wicked sexual appetite. + + +Life goes on and you undertake a series of adventures with your new friend The Rabid Fox. Sadly, as the years pass you and Jon grow further and further apart. Years go by without seeing or hearing from him at all. + + +… + + +It has been ten years since the fateful tournament, and you have a small brood of gingersnap children to go with your gingersnap wife. You doubt any of them have it in them to be heroes. There isn’t even a strawberry blonde one in the bunch. + + +After several weeks of adventuring with The Rabid Fox, you wave farewell to him at the fork in the road and head to your respective castles. On the way, you find your lands burnt and salted. The villages are nothing but smoldering ruins and the peasants have completely vanished. Massive piles of dung litter the landscape. Urging your trusty steed, Hot Biscuit Slim, to a full gallop you arrive at your castle to find it lying in ruins. Oh, and there’s a dragon sitting on top of the pile of rubble. Jon is there too. + + +You are starting to think Jon may be jealous about you marrying Ginger. He does have an unhealthy fixation for fire-crotched gingersnaps. + + +“Where the hell is my family?” You draw your sword, waving it menacingly. + + +“In my belly.” The dragon guffaws, releasing a blast of deadly dragon fire. “Thank you so much Sir Jon for raping the woman first. I love my food when it’s properly terrorized and ravaged.” + + +“Jon! How could you?” You fall to your knees in sorrow. “You were my friend!” + + +“Don’t listen to the dragon! She’s lying. I’ve been tracking her for weeks. She’s the mate of the dragon I killed in Irelandshire years ago. To avenge her lover, she’s trying to turn you against me by creating this incredibly unnecessary scenario to frame me for the rape, murder, and plunder of all you know and love.” + + +“That seems excessive, Jon. Excuse me if I don’t buy that.” + + +“It’s true! She wants to set us against each other so she can kill us both while we’re at one another’s throats.” + + +“For what greater purpose?” + + +“Elaborate revenge and kingdom domination.” + + +“Hmmm, we are pretty badass. I doubt she could kill either of us one on one. And that does sound like something a dragon would do.” + + +The dragon roars and flaps her massive wings. “I never lie about properly terrorized and ravaged food. Rape and betrayal are the perfect seasonings.” + + +Well now, this is an unfortunate situation. Who is telling the truth? +> Kill Jon and the dragon +“You bastard! How could you rape my wife!?” + + +“I’m not a bastard!” + + +You and Jon attack each other, and just as Jon warned, the dragon fries you both with a blast of dragon fire. With the two of you dead the dragon goes on to… get slain by The Rabid Fox a few hours later.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have to be kidding me. Don’t you know anything about the antics of cliché knightly heroes? The gallant knight always marries the blue eyed blonde haired princess and enjoys blissful princess bosom until the end of his days. And you want to throw all of that away for some lowly baron’s daughter or common wench? You disgust me. + + +Fighting for an unworthy cause, you race forward to meet Jon in good old-fashioned master-student combat. The clamor of steel on steel fills the field as you and Jon clash and slash. Sweat stings your eyes as Jon attacks with relentless vigor. You dodge, parry, and counterstrike as best you can, but you are fighting against the man who taught you everything you know. How can you possibly hope to win? You don’t even have the righteous thirst for princess bosom riling your untapped potential. + + +For gritty lowborn buxom wenches! + + +Well, I must admit they do have their own special brand of flavor. It just doesn’t have the same ring to it though. + + +Drunk on visions of buxom wenches you dodge blow after blow after blow. You resist the urge to strike and continue to dodge; your heart will tell you when it is time to attack. + + +“I taught you well,” Jon pants. “You’re dodging like a true champion.” + + +“I learned from the best.” + + +“Time for another lesson.” Jon backs off and takes a defensive position. “You can’t dodge if I don’t attack.” + + +“You son of a bitch.” + + +Jon smirks. “Trumped.” + + +A crazy idea crosses your mind. You don’t know if it’ll work – or if it even makes any sense – but it just might be stupid enough to work. With nothing to lose and everything to gain, you begin the attack. Just as expected Jon dodges. Then you dodge his dodge, catching Jon completely by surprise. Taking a page out of Samwellington’s incredibly short book of useful combat skills you follow up with a dodge ram attack, circling Jon and barreling him into the ground. The maneuver hurts like hell, but like a true hero you ignore the pain and leap to your feet. + + +You hold your blade over Jon’s throat. “Yield.” + + +Jon chuckles. “Nice moves. You win.” + + +You help Jon to his feet as the crowd erupts into a chorus of cheers and shouts. + + +“What skill! What daring! What a fight!” The king bids you and Jon both kneel and knights the pair of you right there in the field. “They’ll be talking about this tourney for ages. I don’t even know what that was you did there Sir, but it was fantastic.” + + +All that is left is for you to name the Lady Fair of the tournament. I still don’t approve of your anti princess antics, but you showed mettle in the melee and that is something to take pride in. + + +Two buxom wenches who have caught your eyes on since the tourney started: the ginger haired Baron’s daughter, Ginger, and a lowly servant woman, Abbey, with rather typical and mundane features. What the servant woman lacks in grandeur she makes up for with a charming smile and pleasant cuteness all her own. Of course, naming a servant woman Lady Fair could cause some very serious problems by offending the nobles. + + +Not that it is my place to intrude young knight, but Jon has been ogling the gingersnap all day. Take that as you will. The choice is yours after all; you earned it. +> Name Abbey Lady Fair +You already shunned cliché protocol by refusing to fight for princess bosom, so you may as well go full renegade and elect the servant woman Lady Fair. There is something bewitching about good old down to earth country cuteness. All of the beautiful noble Ladies can primp themselves up all they want, but they can never attain the country wild of a lowborn servant girl. + + +A wave of awe spreads through the crowd as you proclaim Abbey Lady Fair. Fights break out, which quickly turn into full-blown riots. You grab your new ladylove and disappear in the chaos while you still have a chance to escape. + + +“Not so fast,” snarl the high-pitched bitch voices of the weasel brothers. “You committed a great insult today. I think the king will be quite pleased when we bring him your heads.” + + +“I won the melee. By law and tradition the right to name Lady Fair is my choice and mine alone. Now get out of my way or else I’ll have to kick your ass all over again.” + + +“Can you fight the both of us and defend your whore at the same time?” + + +“He doesn’t have to.” The Rabid Fox draws his blade and springs to your side. It appears you have made a friend. “My good, Sir, my sword is yours.” + + +“Thanks, but why are you helping me? I broke the cliché.” + + +“I don’t know what that means, but you fought with honor. And that I can respect.” + + +The weasel brothers topple over unconscious. Jon and Ginger stand behind them each holding a big ass rock. + + +“My way saves time.” Jon discards his rock and beams. “Now let’s get out of here so I can get it up and get it on. Know what I mean?” + + +With that taken care of the six of you make your escape. (The Rabid Fox picked up a prostitute on the way out, that dog.) The kingdom devolves into a bloody civil war as a result of the tournament debacle. In the mayhem, the king got trampled to death and poor Princess Anne was brutally raped by no less than sixty-nine men. Princess Anne recovered from the savagery and personally hunted down every single one of the scum and forced them to castrate themselves and consume the mess. Future reference, don’t mess with her. + + +You, Jon, and the Rabid Fox carve out your own minor kingdoms and remain close friends to this day. You feel horrible about what happened to Princess Anne and offer her a place of honor in your court, but she politely declines, harboring no bad feelings against you. She elects to travel the world as an adventurer. Your life with the newly crowned Queen Abbey is blissful and filled with bosom and country cunt. You never get the ever sought after princess bosom, but queen bosom is a nice too. + + +I swear she called it that, not me!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Wise decision: it is best to stick with your strong suits. + + +You excuse yourself and get up to leave. The moneylender, mutters something to himself while stroking his beard as you head toward the door. Something is really evil about this guy. You turn around and lop off his head before heading home. Yeah, that was probably a good idea. + + +The morning of the tournament dawns crisp and cool with a slight breeze, just enough to give the ladies’ skirts a nice billowing. You feel a familiar stirring in your loins, and it is driving you insane. As a fledgling hero, you have been saving yourself for your future princess bride, but dear God has it left you on edge, not that you have not had offers. Jon was right; your scar is a chick magnet. You practically have to beat them off. + + +A gaggle of girls giggle as you walk past them. Bitches. + + +Whoa, where did that come from? That is not very heroic. The proper term is ‘wenches.’ Remember that next time, fledgling hero. + + +With your minor slip into villainy over, you prepare for the melee and take your place in the fighting field. There appear to be fifty or so participants as you try to pick out some of the people the Baron told you about. You see Mad Moose McDoogle in his clumsy antlered helmet, Sir Richard Lionsmane with his shaggy locks, Sir Henry Williams a.k.a. The Rabid Fox, the Weasel brothers in their matching silver gilded armor, and Bucktooth Barry among others. + + +“Save your energy,” says Jon. “Let the others wear themselves down. They’ll make a mistake eventually. Then you can strike when they’re weak and out of position. And stay by me. We might both be able to get knighthoods out of this.” + + +“Don’t worry. I got your back Jon.” + + +A blast from the bugle signals the start of the melee. The clamor of blunted steel on blunted steel rings through the fairgrounds. You and Jon fight back-to-back, just as you did against those trolls several years ago. You two are not the only ones fighting on teams. Out of the corner of your eye, you see the Weasel brothers and Mad Moose McDoogle charge The Rabid Fox. + + +The Rabid Fox looses ground as the trio attempt to surround him. He isn’t dodging. He’s parrying. He’s done for. The Rabid Fox’s and one of the Weasel brother’s swords shatter on impact. Mad Moose McDoogle peels off the attack and rounds on the Weasel brothers, catching them unaware. He knocks them both down and out just before The Rabid Fox charges him in turn. + + +A sword slashes inches from your cheek, and you regain your focus. Dodge, slash, dodge, dodge, slash, dodge, trip, kick. Another one bites the dust. + + +The fighting continues until there is just you, Jon, The Rabid Fox, who has not only obtained a new sword but a horse as well, and Bucktooth Barry left. + + +Maybe you should turn on Jon now? +> Turn on Jon. +Fuck this shit. You’re in it to win it. You whirl around and knock Jon out cold. Poor bastard never saw it coming. + + +Bucktooth Barry gestures toward The Rabid Fox and the pair of you charge the mounted knight. You pull up at the last moment and watch The Rabid Fox clobber Bucktooth Barry aside the helmet. Seizing the opportunity, you bolt in, grab the reins and yank. The horse bucks, but The Rabid Fox manages to cling in the saddle. + + +With no other options, you hack at the horse’s legs. The beat cries out in pain as The Rabid Fox topples from the dying beast. You thrust your sword, sticking the point an inch from The Rabid Fox’s throat. + + +“Yield.” + + +The Rabid Fox coughs blood. “You have no honor. You’re no… hero.” + + +“Hero’s win. I won. Now yield.” + + +Blood gushes down your leg, and you scream in pain as you collapse to your knees. What happened? What the bloody fucking hell!? The dying horse lying beside you twists its neck, reaches up and bites you in the throat. Warm blood trickles down your body. You cannot breath. + + +You fall into a pool of blood. + + +The Rabid Fox staggers to his feet, shaking his head. + + +You hear Jon’s voice. “A heroic knight fights with honor at all times.” Those are the last words you hear as the world fades to black. + + +Well that was disappointing. Killed by a horse. Apparently, you were not the hero I thought you were. He must be somewhere else. Enjoy death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Without a moment’s hesitation, you turn and rush the bandits. You are the fledgling hero of this story after all, and the hero always wins. The bandits either agree or are too shocked by your blazen stupidity and gawk at you as you close the gap. + + +By the time one of them gathers his wits, three of them are dead at your feet. A bolt grazes your cheek as you cut the fourth man down. The fifth man, who fired the bolt, turns to flee back into the forest. He does not make it. Jon skewers him from behind. + + +“That’s going to be quite the scar,” says Jon. “It’s not so much a deforming scar as a handsome, charismatic scar. All great heroes get them. Chicks dig it.” + + +“I don’t have one,” whines Samwellington. + + +Jon rolls his eyes. “Yeah, I wonder why.” + + +The three of you hobble back to the hamlet. You have one of the priests help draft a report of the incident and send a runner to deliver it to the baron. Some unimportant nobodies go clean up the mess while you kick back and relax. Not bad for a (k)night’s work. + + +“Good work today kid, but don’t get ahead of yourself kid,” says Jon. “You still have a long way to go to be a true knight. It takes hard work to bang a princess and ride off into the sunset. Oh, and remember.” + + +“Dodge,” you say in unison. + + +The baron is pleased with what he reads in the report. You become Bowie’s replacement in the hamlet guard and undertake some other minor missions with Jon and Samwellington. Soon you become a bit of a celebrity and inspiration, and your fame goes countywide. Priests take time out of their day to tutor you in your letters, and the baron invites you and Jon to take place in the next tournament he’s hosting. The king will even be there; it is supposed to be quite the shindig. Things are looking up. All you have to decide now is what event you are going to compete. +> Compete in the melee. +It is best to stick with your strong suits. You have combat training and can dodge with the best of them in the melee. From what you understand, dodging is frowned upon in jousting. Besides, you would have to borrow a horse from someone, and you do not have the money to ransom the horse if you lose. Debtors do not make good heroes. + + +Jon decides to enter the melee as well. + + +The morning of the tournament dawns crisp and cool with a slight breeze, just enough to give the ladies’ skirts a nice billowing. You feel a familiar stirring in your loins, and it is driving you insane. As a fledgling hero, you have been saving yourself for your future princess bride, but dear God has it left you on edge, not that you have not had offers. Jon was right; your scar is a chick magnet. You practically have to beat them off. + + +A gaggle of girls giggle as you walk past them. Bitches. + + +Whoa, where did that come from? That is not very heroic. The proper term is ‘wenches.’ Remember that next time, fledgling hero. + + +With your minor slip into villainy over, you prepare for the melee and take your place in the fighting field. There appear to be fifty or so participants as you try to pick out some of the people the Baron told you about. You see Mad Moose McDoogle in his clumsy antlered helmet, Sir Richard Lionsmane with his shaggy locks, Sir Henry Williams a.k.a. The Rabid Fox, the Weasel brothers in their matching silver gilded armor, and Bucktooth Barry among others. + + +“Save your energy,” says Jon. “Let the others wear themselves down. They’ll make a mistake eventually. Then you can strike when they’re weak and out of position. And stay by me. We might both be able to get knighthoods out of this.” + + +“Don’t worry. I got your back Jon.” + + +A blast from the bugle signals the start of the melee. The clamor of blunted steel on blunted steel rings through the fairgrounds. You and Jon fight back-to-back, just as you did against those trolls several years ago. You two are not the only ones fighting on teams. Out of the corner of your eye, you see the Weasel brothers and Mad Moose McDoogle charge The Rabid Fox. + + +The Rabid Fox looses ground as the trio attempt to surround him. He isn’t dodging. He’s parrying. He’s done for. The Rabid Fox’s and one of the Weasel brother’s swords shatter on impact. Mad Moose McDoogle peels off the attack and rounds on the Weasel brothers, catching them unaware. He knocks them both down and out just before The Rabid Fox charges him in turn. + + +A sword slashes inches from your cheek, and you regain your focus. Dodge, slash, dodge, dodge, slash, dodge, trip, kick. Another one bites the dust. + + +The fighting continues until there is just you, Jon, The Rabid Fox, who has not only obtained a new sword but a horse as well, and Bucktooth Barry left. + + +Maybe you should turn on Jon now?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>All of Jon’s training really pays off. Using your sixth sense, you see the attack coming leagues away. With all the grace of youth, you jump to the side as a horse leg soars past your ear. Quite unfortunate for Bowie, who takes the hoof straight in the face. You do not even look. The crack and thump tells you all you need to know. + + +Dodging more chunks of horse and human, you maneuver your way to Jon and the trolls. Master and apprentice stand back-to-back as you fend off the fearsome beasts. Dodge, parry, dodge, dodge, strike, dodge, parry, dodge, dodge, dodge, strike. And so the battle goes. Troll blood drenches you as you hack away. Surprisingly, it smells like apples. + + +“Jon,” you say, while dodging another troll fist, “they keep regenerating when I dodge them. It’s a troll blood bath, but they aren’t going down.” + + +“DODGE!” Jon shouts. “Always DODGE!” + + +“Then RAM,” screams Samwellington, bulling into the fray. By the sound of the collision, you think Samwellington just tackled Jon’s troll. What an awful, squishy sound. + + +“Where the fuck have you been?” you ask. + + +“Cowering.” + + +Your troll swings its long hairy arms wide and claps them together, aiming for your head. You dodge and slide along the blood slicked ground, slashing the beast’s legs as you slip between them. Hopping to your feet, you deliver the finishing blow as the beast drops to its knees before splashing face first into a puddle of its own blood. + + +Jon’s troll has met the same fate. Jon appears unwounded, though breathing heavily, leaning on his sword. + + +“Oh, dear god! Samwellington!” + + +Samwellington lies on the ground with a grisly gash on his robust gut that looks inches deep. “Oh don’t worry,” he says. “They just cut into the fat. I always knew eating all that pork lard would pay off one day.” + + +Jon smirks. “See, I told you. Dodge.” + + +“I won’t question you again Jon. Too bad about Bowie though.” + + +“Meh, he was a fucking dick anyway.” + + +Sam struggles to sit up. “I don’t think those trolls were the reason those people went disappearing.” + + +You nod. “Because all this blood and gore would have been pretty hard to miss.” + + +“No. Because there are five guys with loaded crossbows behind you.” + + +“Shit.” +> Surrender. +Sometimes the odds are just stacked too highly against you. It is not that you are a coward or anything. It is just that you know a lost cause when you see one. If the situation had been different… Oh well, what is the worst that can happen? They will probably just steal your valuables and leave you on your merry way. Thankfully, none of you are women. + + +“I yield,” you say, unbuckling your sword belt. + + +“Some knight you are,” Jon scoffs as he rushes the bandits. Five bolts tear into his body, ripping his flesh to ribbons like a ragdoll. + + +Samwellington squeals incomprehensible gibberish. + + +“He never even had a chance to dodge.” A lone tear trickles down your cheek. “Poor bastard.” + + +Jon’s eyes snap open. He glares at you as he struggles to his feet, using his sword as a crutch. “Cunt.” He takes a step toward you. Five more bolts drive into him, and he collapses in a heap. + + +Samwellington squeals more incomprehensible gibberish. + + +“What the-?” + + +… + + +Your head is throbbing and you taste dirt and blood. Bindings dig into your wrists and ankles. The bandits are dragging you through the undergrowth: rather unkindly as your head bangs into root and trunk alike. + + +Oh dear God, I hope I don’t have a concussion. Mom always told me to wear a helmet. + + +How long had you been unconscious? Surely, it could not have been more than a minute or two. The road should still be close. If you could only somehow manage to escape, you could gather reinforcements. + + +You thrash in an attempt to break free, but your efforts are rewarded with nothing but a series of swift kicks to the ribs. You slip into your happy place for the remainder of the journey, day dreaming of sweet, succulent, juicy bacon and princess bosom. + + +… + + +A fist drills into your gut, wrenching you out of your blissful imagination. The bandit leader towers over you, looking buff and pissed. You know he is the leader because he is wearing a cape and is the only black dude in this story. + + +“Alright, punk, you’ve got two choices.” + + +“Naturally.” + + +“I’m always looking for good men to join my crew, and since you surrendered like a good little bitch, you get the first crack at signing up. All you have to do is kill your friends to prove your loyalty.” + + +“Did you have to hit me?” + + +“Yes, it illustrates my tough guy, no bullshit attitude.” + + +“Oh, I see. Kind of like how Dark Lords sacrifice random minions to show how evil they are.” + + +“Exactly. You get the picture. I knew I liked you. Now go kill your friends and maybe one day you can earn the right to wed my ebony bandit princess daughter.” + + +“Is she tight and curvy?” + + +“What part of bandit princess don’t you get?” + + +“Sweet.” +> Accept the offer +“I love princess bosom! And bacon.” + + +“Of course you do. Underlings, untie him and give him his sword. He has friends to murder.” + + +The bandit underlings do as commanded and direct you to the tent where Jon and Samwellington are being kept on the opposite side of the camp. The entire place is a mess of mud and slop: nothing like a rainstorm to turn a perfectly planned camp into a pile of crap. As you make your way to take care of business, you spy what can only be the ebony bandit princess. The bandit leader did not do the lass justice. She is nothing less than a dark chocolate goddess sent from the heavens themselves. + + +She notices you staring and rubs her nipples. “Like what you see?” + + +“Yes, Mam.” + + +“Me too.” She winks and blows a kiss. “Think your cute?” + + +“You can bet your scantily clad ass and bosom I do. I’m a generic hero after all. Being cute is in the job description.” + + +“Ooooooo, a generic hero turned renegade! That really turns me on. I’m so wet.” + + +“Yeah, all this rain is getting me soaked too.” + + +“Cute and funny! We’re going to have a lot of fun tonight.” + + +“I try to have fun every night. I love games. Do you like games?” + + +“I think I just orgasmed. See that tent? Five minutes. Be there.” + + +The ebony bandit princess saunters off, leaving you alone to complete your dark deed. Looking forward to countless nights of games and fun, you duck into the tent to kill Jon and Samwellington. They are blindfolded, bound, and gagged. They won’t even know you betrayed them! + + +You raise your sword to do the deed, but before you can deliver the stroke, all the wonderful memories you had training under Jon stream through your mind. You remember the first time he taught you to dodge, the first time he had a random ragamuffin kid in the hamlet throw piles of shit at you, the time he told you what a clitoris is, and the time he first taught you that survival sometimes means kicking the enemy in the balls. + + +Shit I dunno if I can do this. + + +Perfectly understandable, but I assure you the ebony bandit princess is the only ebony chick in this universe. Is your friendship worth giving that up? She is unique, one-of-a-kind, like a special edition Poke’mon. +> Ebony bandit princess, I choose you! +How positively villainous, betraying your best friend and teacher. You kill Jon with a discreet thrust to the heart. Samwellington takes a little more work since you have to cut through all the fat, but in the end, the deed is done. I hope you are proud of yourself. + + +With a minute to spare, you enter the tent the ebony bandit princess demanded. You play games together all night long, every night for years to come. Eventually, you take over and become the new bandit leader, earning a fortune in the bacon smuggling trade. Life couldn’t be better for a bandit king. + + +For awhile you feared the ghosts of Jon and Samwellington would return to the living world and haunt you for your atrocious crimes, but thankfully you are left in peace. + + +One night you die of a heart attack while playing your nightly game with your ebony bandit princess turned queen. The absurd amount of bacon consumption probably had something to do with that. Before you were forced to enter your happy place all those years ago, you had been able to suppress your bacon cravings. Since then you could never resist the urge. Alas, life treated you well all the same. + + +The afterlife does not. You go to the innermost circle of hell and burn in eternal hellfire for murdering your friends in cold blood, asshole.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“I love princess bosom! And bacon.” + + +“Of course you do. Underlings, untie him and give him his sword. He has friends to murder.” + + +The bandit underlings do as commanded and direct you to the tent where Jon and Samwellington are being kept on the opposite side of the camp. The entire place is a mess of mud and slop: nothing like a rainstorm to turn a perfectly planned camp into a pile of crap. As you make your way to take care of business, you spy what can only be the ebony bandit princess. The bandit leader did not do the lass justice. She is nothing less than a dark chocolate goddess sent from the heavens themselves. + + +She notices you staring and rubs her nipples. “Like what you see?” + + +“Yes, Mam.” + + +“Me too.” She winks and blows a kiss. “Think your cute?” + + +“You can bet your scantily clad ass and bosom I do. I’m a generic hero after all. Being cute is in the job description.” + + +“Ooooooo, a generic hero turned renegade! That really turns me on. I’m so wet.” + + +“Yeah, all this rain is getting me soaked too.” + + +“Cute and funny! We’re going to have a lot of fun tonight.” + + +“I try to have fun every night. I love games. Do you like games?” + + +“I think I just orgasmed. See that tent? Five minutes. Be there.” + + +The ebony bandit princess saunters off, leaving you alone to complete your dark deed. Looking forward to countless nights of games and fun, you duck into the tent to kill Jon and Samwellington. They are blindfolded, bound, and gagged. They won’t even know you betrayed them! + + +You raise your sword to do the deed, but before you can deliver the stroke, all the wonderful memories you had training under Jon stream through your mind. You remember the first time he taught you to dodge, the first time he had a random ragamuffin kid in the hamlet throw piles of shit at you, the time he told you what a clitoris is, and the time he first taught you that survival sometimes means kicking the enemy in the balls. + + +Shit I dunno if I can do this. + + +Perfectly understandable, but I assure you the ebony bandit princess is the only ebony chick in this universe. Is your friendship worth giving that up? She is unique, one-of-a-kind, like a special edition Poke’mon. +> Free Jon and Samwellington +No, you just cannot bring yourself to betray your friends like this. You are a hero goddamn it, and being a hero sometimes means letting the legendary Poke’mon roam free. For whatever reason, the bandits just assumed you would kill your friends and did not even bother maintaining a guard on you until you actually did the dastardly deed, which makes freeing Jon and Samwellington astonishingly droll. + + +Samwellington maintains the status quo by squealing incomprehensible gibberish. The fellow is nothing if not consistent. + + +Freed from his bindings, Jon decks you in the jaw and kicks you in the groin once you hit the ground. “Never. Call. Me. A. Fucking. Bastard.” He kicks you once again for good measure. + + +You curl into a ball and wheeze. “Understood.” + + +With that out in the air, Jon reverts to all smiles and rainbows and helps you back to your feet. “Good. Thanks for cutting us loose. Ready to settle the score on these pricks?” + + +“Yeah, just give me a minute. Still in pain here.” + + +“Right, right.” + + +After you recover from the assault on your genitals, you, Jon, and the squealing Samwellington launch a surprise assault on the bandit camp. They prove as unprepared and hapless as they have so far demonstrated. Stab, dodge, slash, hack, dodge, dodge, slash, dodge, stab. Soon enough only the bandit leader and the ebony bandit princess remain. + + +“Look at what you’ve done!” he shouts. “Do you think I’ll just stand for this?” + + +“I thought you just stood around and scratched your nuts all day,” you say. “This is a pretty piss poor operation.” + + +“You piss pot! You threw away the opportunity of a lifetime. You could have had an ebony bandit princess. I was going to look at you as a son! Now you’ll never find true love or happiness.” + + +“My uncle always said, ‘Every piss pot has its lid.’ I’ll find mine some day.” + + +The bandit leader draws his scimitar and discards his cape. Oh snap, he means business now. “You son of a peasant! I’ll kill you!” The bandit leader darts forward with the speed of a black mamba. + + +You dodge the attack like a pro. The bandit leader moves to strike again, but his own daughter stabs him in the back. + + +The ebony bandit princess points to the same tent she did earlier. “You. Me. Tent. Now.” + + +“Yay, I love games!” you cheer as you follow her into the tent. + + +Well, well, well nice going hero. You have your cake and you get to eat it out too. Life goes on and you and Jon eventually receive knighthoods for your valiant efforts in your ongoing adventures. Samwellington continues to provide… company if nothing else. + + +Ever since you entered your happy place, you have had difficulty resisting the succulent allure of bacon. Thankfully, with Samwellington around the bacon never lasts long, probably saving you from a heart attack. + + +You marry the former ebony bandit princess and enjoy your specialty games every night. Yay games!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Sometimes the odds are just stacked too highly against you. It is not that you are a coward or anything. It is just that you know a lost cause when you see one. If the situation had been different… Oh well, what is the worst that can happen? They will probably just steal your valuables and leave you on your merry way. Thankfully, none of you are women. + + +“I yield,” you say, unbuckling your sword belt. + + +“Some knight you are,” Jon scoffs as he rushes the bandits. Five bolts tear into his body, ripping his flesh to ribbons like a ragdoll. + + +Samwellington squeals incomprehensible gibberish. + + +“He never even had a chance to dodge.” A lone tear trickles down your cheek. “Poor bastard.” + + +Jon’s eyes snap open. He glares at you as he struggles to his feet, using his sword as a crutch. “Cunt.” He takes a step toward you. Five more bolts drive into him, and he collapses in a heap. + + +Samwellington squeals more incomprehensible gibberish. + + +“What the-?” + + +… + + +Your head is throbbing and you taste dirt and blood. Bindings dig into your wrists and ankles. The bandits are dragging you through the undergrowth: rather unkindly as your head bangs into root and trunk alike. + + +Oh dear God, I hope I don’t have a concussion. Mom always told me to wear a helmet. + + +How long had you been unconscious? Surely, it could not have been more than a minute or two. The road should still be close. If you could only somehow manage to escape, you could gather reinforcements. + + +You thrash in an attempt to break free, but your efforts are rewarded with nothing but a series of swift kicks to the ribs. You slip into your happy place for the remainder of the journey, day dreaming of sweet, succulent, juicy bacon and princess bosom. + + +… + + +A fist drills into your gut, wrenching you out of your blissful imagination. The bandit leader towers over you, looking buff and pissed. You know he is the leader because he is wearing a cape and is the only black dude in this story. + + +“Alright, punk, you’ve got two choices.” + + +“Naturally.” + + +“I’m always looking for good men to join my crew, and since you surrendered like a good little bitch, you get the first crack at signing up. All you have to do is kill your friends to prove your loyalty.” + + +“Did you have to hit me?” + + +“Yes, it illustrates my tough guy, no bullshit attitude.” + + +“Oh, I see. Kind of like how Dark Lords sacrifice random minions to show how evil they are.” + + +“Exactly. You get the picture. I knew I liked you. Now go kill your friends and maybe one day you can earn the right to wed my ebony bandit princess daughter.” + + +“Is she tight and curvy?” + + +“What part of bandit princess don’t you get?” + + +“Sweet.” +> Refuse the offer +There is no way you can betray your friends like that, even if it means certain death. They would never betray you. That manner of treachery is the stuff villains are made of, and that is a long dark road you want no part of. Villains never get princess bosom! You’re also not too sure about their bacon situation. + + +“I’ll never join you!” + + +“Really? What a pity. I suppose I’ll have to waste you now.” The bandit leader draws his scimitar. “Ebony, get in here!” + + +A slick dark chocolate goddess enters the tent: scantily clad in bosom emphasizing furs. “Yes, father?” + + +“I wanted this chump to see what he was missing out on. Flash him a little more skin… no not that much! Put your top back on!” + + +“Wait a second,” you say. “You named your daughter Ebony? Isn’t that crass?” + + +“I’m not very creative, alright. I don’t even have a fucking name of my own.” + + +“I’m just going to call you Sinbad. Because you sin and you’re bad. Get it?” + + +“Oh mother-fucking merciful God!” + + +The bandit leader, now known as Sinbad hacks your body to bloody bits with his scimitar while Ebony rubs her nipples in the background. Something tells me she has daddy issues. Anyway, you’re dead, so you won’t get to explore them. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your name is Arakhan. + + +For years, you have dreamed of becoming Captain of the Guard, and protecting your small hometown of Lyestra. Fortunately for you, your wildest dreams came true just last week. You finally received your long overdue promotion, and now you are the official Captain of the Guard! + + +Lyestra is a quiet enough village, so the first few weeks were rather uneventful. However, two days ago, you received a tip that a group of goblin warriors had been spotted camping out in the woods not far from Lyestra. Goblins rarely come so near to a village, so you and a handful of other men have gone to scope out the situation. So far, you have found nothing. You are running low on supplies, and the men have requested to return to Lyestra. + + +However, you told them you would like to make one last sweep of the area before you return home. You and your men have split up to search the area for any sign of the goblins. + + +You are on your own, in a dense area of the woods. You are searching for any sign that the goblins were here. +> Search behind a nearby bush +You get on your hands and knees, hoping to find a clue underneath a nearby bush, but alas, all you get for your trouble is a dirty uniform. There is nothing to be found under the bush. You stand up quickly, trying best as you can to brush the filth from your clothes. + + +What now? +> Inspect the oak tree +As you stare at the tree, you notice something that had escaped your search before. There appears to be an arrowhead embedded in the trunk of the tree. You yank it out. It seems that it was once attached to an arrow, but someone has snapped off the shaft, leaving just the arrowhead. There is a small white feather attached to the arrowhead. You pull it off. It appears to be decorated with a strange symbol, the likes of which you have never seen before. A red, two headed cobra has been painted onto the feather. The symbol fills you with dread. +> Place the feather in your pocket +You feel that you've seen all you can here. You turn, ready to go back to your camp, when suddenly you hear a quick rustling in the bushes. You feel sweat instantly bead on your brow. Someone is coming towards you, and they're moving quickly. What will you do? +> Wait to see who it is +You stand at the ready, but keep your sword sheathed. A good thing, too, because at that moment, Adonis, official messenger of Lyestra, comes hurtling through the bushes. + + +"Arakhan!!" He nearly collapses to the ground with relief and exhaustion. "Thank the gods I've found you!" + + +Adonis is panting heavily. He bends over, trying to catch his breath. + + +"Calm down," you say, "What seems to be the problem? What are you doing so far from Lyestra?" + + +"Lyestra?" Adonis gets a hollow, far off look in his eyes. "Lyestra is...now don't take this too hard, but--" he swallows. "Lyestra is gone." + + +You nearly sink to your knees. Lyestra? Your home town, gone? + + +"What do you mean? Tell me, NOW!" You are barely able to choke back your panic and grief. Your village needs you now more than ever. Now is the time to keep a cool head. + + +"Goblins came in the night---we---we weren't ready for them," Adonis chokes, "And so many of them! They just kept coming! In hordes! I barely got out with my own--I mean--I fought off at least half a dozen, of course--but---even for someone like me, I knew the odds were hopeless--" + + +"Get to the point," you growl, "How many are dead?" + + +Adonis stares down at the ground. + + +"....Hundreds," he mumbles. + + +Now, you really do fall to your knees. How could you have let this happen? You've failed Lyestra, and nearly a hundred people have paid for your carelessness with their lives. You've failed your guards--your guards! You have to find them. They must be scattered around the woods--somewhere nearby. You have to find them before a troop of goblins finds them first! + + +"We've got to get back to Lyestra," Adonis continues, "There might be a few survivors left. And we have to find out who was responsible for the attack!" + + +You weigh your options. If you go with Adonis now, the two of you could conceivably make it back to Lyestra in two hours. However, there are still a few guards doing their final sweep of the area. They could take care of themselves, surely, but you would feel much better knowing that they are safe in this uncertain time. + + +Adonis looks at you expectantly. What will it be? Find your guard regiment? Or go back to Lyestra and search for survivors? +> Return to Lyestra with Adonis +You decide to return to Lyestra with Adonis. + +"The smart choice," Adonis nods. + +You feel awful about abandoning your guard regiment, but time is of the essence. And, after all, your friends are trained warriors. You hope they will be able to find their way back on their own. + +You follow the winding path, Adonis tagging along, until at last you reach the town gates. + +And there, your blood runs cold. + + +You reach the Lyestra gates, and stop in abject horror. The town has been completely gutted. + +Smoke billows from the wreckage of houses. You hear wailing in the streets. + +Corpses line the streets, and a few wanderers roam freely, searching and crying out for their loved ones. + +Never before have you felt like such a failure. + +"HALT!" A voice cries, "Who goes there?!" + +You raise your head and see a short, stocky man in a helmet approach you. + +It's Quent, one of your guards. + +"Quent!!" You cry, "It's me, Arakhan." + +"And me!!! Adonis!!!" Adonis screams. + +"We've returned," you say. + +Quent lowers his spear and begins to cry, his brave front completely lost. + +"Oh, Arakhan," he sobs, and wraps his arms around you. "You're back!! It was---it was a living nightmare...." + +"Where are the other guards?" you ask, gripping him by the shoulders. "Where are the others we left posted here?" + +He sobs, choking. + +"All dead, Arakhan," he cries. + +"Brutus? Carissa? Andrey?" You ask. + +"All of them!! They were cut down, every last one. Killian forced me to hide so someone would be left to tell you what happened. I ran, only to see him get shot down as well. Arakhan, they came at us like a wave of death." + +"Stand tall, Quent," you say. "I've come to kill the one responsible for this." + +"I'm so glad you're back," he sobs. "Please, head into the town and see what you can do for the villagers. They need someone. And maybe you can find some of the answers you need in there." + +You nod, and release Quent to return to his patrol duties. + +Adonis approaches you. + +"Well, I hope you're satisfied," he grumbles, "Some protection." + +"Move along, Adonis," you growl, and he yelps. + +"Erk! I--uh--right, then. I'll be on my way," he mumbles, and shuffles off into the city. + +You glare, watching him go. + +After a moment, and a chance to catch your breath....you enter the city gates as well. + +At long last, you are home. +> Enter Lyestra +Home. + + +Or what remains of it. + + +You wander through the streets of Lyestra, barely even recognizable after such brutal destruction. There is the old tree that you used to swing from as a child, burned and splintered into nothing more than a husk. The mayor's house looms in the distance, black smoke plumes rising from it and lifting into the sky. + + +Worst of all are the bodies. + + +You cannot tear your gaze away from the corpses lining the streets, the sobbing that wracks every alleyway, and the stench of hot blood and fire that fills the air. + + +You see not a few familiar faces among the dead, and, nearly choking on your grief, you press on. + + +Eventually, you find that you have traversed the length of the entire village, and you now stand at the North Gate. + + +The great wall that surrounds your village has been cracked, and furniture and lumber has been haphazardly barricaded into the broken sections. + + +The Gate itself is wrapped deeply in chains, with an enormous bronze padlock sealing the chains tight. + + +A man staggers over to you, his eyes glinting malevolently. It's Joad, one of the older guards on your force. He holds a pitchfork, and is staggering towards you. + + +"ARAKHAN!" he shouts. You feel a flutter of nervous fear. +> Draw your Sword +You draw your sword, and hold it out protectively. + + +Joad snorts. + + +"Useless AND stupid," he mutters. "Who would have guessed?" + + +You lower your sword, feeling a hot rush of embarrassment. Joad sneers, his pitchfork falling to his side. + + +"Welcome back, Captain," he grunts. You feel his hatred wash over you like the tide. "Have a nice walk out in the woods, then? Don't mind us, we were just out here, fighting for our lives while you hid in the bushes." + + +"Calm down, Joad," you say, "I'm back now, and I swear to you, I will have revenge on these miserable creatures." + + +Joad spits. + + +"Fat lotta good that'll do us now," he mutters, "Now that near the whole village's dead and killed." He sighs, and you see weariness crease his brow. + + +"If you want to go and play the hero....and get your damned self killed--be my guest," Joad grumbles, "we were barely able to fight them back. They left for the woods---we thought to go find you. But just an hour or so ago, our scouts saw them returning. They've made camp just north of here, probably planning their next move." + + +"Do you see who is out there?" you ask. + + +"We didn't see nothing," Joad growls, "You prob'ly know more than we do. All we know is that we was having a normal day, when suddenly a horde of goblins tear through this town like wildfire, killin' and maimin'. We barely fought 'em back." + + +You reach for the padlock on the North Gate. "I'll bring you their leader's head," you growl, gripping your sword. + + +"Ah, ah, ah," Joad says, staying your hand. I'd love to see you go out there and get killed much as the next man. But that lock ain't comin' off. Not 'less you get a key for it." + + +"You don't have a key?" you ask. + + +"Not me," Joad says, "we gave out keys to people we trust, people who were here." + + +"I get it," you say. + + +"Go on and explore the town a bit. See what you left behind. Find a key. When you get one, come back here, and I'll let you through. But not a moment before." + + +You nod. "Very well," you say. + + +You turn and leave the North Gate behind, heading for the Lyestra Town Square. Your mission is clear. + + +Find a key. + +Then, take your vengeance. +> Go to the Lyestra Town Square +You stand in the Town Square of Lyestra. + + +The enormous stone fountain of Lyestra stands before you. It is cracked down the center, and stained with blood. At this time of day, it would normally be gushing happily, but now, it stands still and silent, like an enormous gravestone. + + +You think for a moment. Your mission is to find a key, exit through the North Gate, and take your revenge on the monsters responsible for this attack. + + +But perhaps you should explore the town a bit. Not only will you be likely to find a key, you may also find more information you can use to defeat the mysterious attackers. + + +You consider your options. There is the Morgan's bar--a popular (well, really the only) tavern in town. The few survivors of the attack are almost certain to be holed up there. + + +The Mayor's house is smoking in the distance. It might be a good idea to check there, to see if he or any of his family survived the attack. + + +And lastly, there is the Lyestra Library. The Library is rather large for such a small village, and the Librarian is a good friend of yours. Perhaps you will find some information on your attackers there. + + +Where to go first? +> Go to the Morgan's Bar +You weigh your options, and decide the best course of action is to head to the esteemed Morgan's Bar. + + +You head down the winding pathways of Lyestra, until you have reached the swinging double doors of the Bar. + + +You push through the door, and there, as you expected, you see several dozen villagers, all crowded about within the dimly lit tavern. + +They are gathered around the small wooden tables, drinking at the bar. A few children are huddled in the corner, smeared with dirt and playing a card game in grim silence. + + +The Morgan's Bar, being the largest building in town, was always designated as the survival shelter in case of attack. It had almost been a sort of joke. 'We'll drink til' the invaders get bored,' people used to say, laughing. + +After all, who would ever want to attack a town as tiny and insignificant as Lyestra? + + +You shake your thoughts away, and stride into the Bar. + + +Everyone freezes for a moment at your approach, and all eyes turn to stare directly at you. You feel their gazes burning into you. + + +And then, quickly, the villagers all turn aside, quickly absorbed back into whatever menial tasks had been consuming them. + + +You feel a hot rush of shame, but force it down. You have a mission--you must find a key to unlock the door. + +Someone in here is sure to have it. + +You survey the room. + +There are the children, of course, playing their game in the corner. Morgan himself, the Barkeep, is washing a glass and avoids your gaze. There is an incredibly muscular man in the corner, picking at his teeth with a dagger, and wrapping a gauze bandage around the his arm. And in the corner, there is a tall, gaunt man in a purple cloak. His hood is up, so you can't make out his face in the dimly lit room. + +And of course, you could always have a drink. +> Speak to Morgan, the Barkeep +"Morgan!" You call, and start walking towards him. + + +He sees you out of the corner of his eye, and turns away from you, to help a customer. + + +"And how can I help you, miss?" he asks, pointedly ignoring you. Your hand falters, and you turn away from him. + + +Clearly, he is none too happy to see you. Time for a different approach. +> Give Up +You are standing in the middle of the Morgan's Bar, surrounded by the few survivors of the attack. + + +There are some children, playing a game in the corner. + + +Morgan stands behind the bar, washing glasses. + + +A muscular man is bandaging himself near a table. + + +There is a cloaked man in the shadows. + + +And you are pretty parched.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> You wake up and grin. You did it. Your friends bet three cars that you wouldn't sleep in the haunted house and make it out alive. You're definitely alive. You look around and see the haunted store's giant lizard monsters. Wait a second! The haunted Radio Shack has no giant lizard monsters! It doesn't even have that weird whispering noise! + + + "Attack the kitten! Yes go ahead and attack it! King Iwan Napee! It is your job to eat it! We will be invincible + + + You push yourself back into a corner. This is definitely a room, but this is definitely not the haunted Radio Shack. You start to bite your fingernails, a bad habit. But that's when you realize that your fingernails are claws! Wait, what! You look at your hands, uh.. paws... You also have an urge to itch your ears with your feet! You've turned into a kitten! You look down to your belly. You're a kitten yes, a fat one. Too bad for you! + + +for another year! Yes! Yes! Yes! Take it, take the fat thing! It doesn't know anything about us! The less curious + + + One of the lizard beasts says to you, "Kitten! We are the Beasts! I am King Iwan and all twenty-eight of our endangered species will split you up and eat you!" They all lunge at you, but you jump up and hide behind them. + + +the better! No! Don't let it get away! It might learn our secrets! Eat it so that we can all be invincible for a year! + + + You look around again and spot a few other kittens camouflaged with the walls. You can smell them out, too. They're watching you. What the?! You think to yourself and think of a way to escape. Hmm... + + +Do not let it know that our weakness is tomato sauce! Do not let it know! Don't let it think! Don't!" + + + You spot three things. There are three knives stuck in a piece of sausage on a table, a miniature rocket ship fit for two small kittens in the corner, and a large frying pan hanging on the wall. What do you do? +> Get into the rocket! + You immediately rush into the rocket just before the teeth of the Beasts snap your neck. To your surprise, there is a kitten with sunglasses dancing inside the rocket. Seeing as he's distracted, you rush to the control pad. You can feel the beasts shaking the rocket. There's only one thing to do. + + + You flip switches and push buttons and pound on the control pad. Pounding on the pad, you accidentally punch the DO NOT PUNCH button. Uh-oh. + + + The dancing kitten drops his sunglasses and his donuts and stares at you. "Did you just-" + + + Before you can even shrug, the rocket explodes, one of the large pieces stabbing Beast King Iwan in the left eye. Uh-oh! That's not good. You are launched out of the window, but thankfully you have a parachute! + + + You dive through the sky and breathe in fresh air. Aaaaaahhh, that's good. However, your parachute is ripped to pieces by a small piece of the rocket. Oh no! You look around frantically. Where do you want to try to land? +> Land in the forest close by +You bounce around on the leaves of a tree. You decide to bounce on it some more. Then you realize that leaves aren't bouncy. Who cares? You think and you jump up and down on the leaves. + + + Then some grumpy voice shouts, "HEY! This is private property! These leaves are for the Mitten Factory! Wait a second! Stop right there!" + + + You bounce off of the leaves and run as fast as you can. The police kitten runs at you and notices something on your shoulder. "Oh... If you're FAT, then you can stay around. Wait a second, all Feline Agent Troop members have the scale of a lizard on their shoulders!" + + + "Tell me the truth!" The police kitten points a cane at you. +> Tell the truth no matter how crazy it is! + You decide to tell the truth. You tell him everything from the day of your birth to the time you ate cheese on a dare and to the present time. The police kitten's eyes widen. + + + "Wow, that's a story, kid! That's absolutely true! Only the most high ranking police know about all this mess. You're lucky kid. I'm a rebel who's against all that sacrifice mess." + + + The police kitten rants about the FAT, an acronym for Feline Agent Troop. They are kittens who protect Earth from giant lizard monsters called Beasts. He also tells you that every year, the kittens take a human and turn them into a kitten as a sacrifice to the Beasts. He tells you that the sacrifice is just something to stall the Beasts for a bit while the FAT are trying to figure out all their secrets. + + + "My name's Waldo, kid. If you need the police, just dial my number on the phone. The thing is, the only pay phone that can call me is at the Beast Tower, where you were." He gives you a phone number. Great! + + + Waldo goes ahead and drives you to Mitten Village.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You bounce around on the leaves of a tree. You decide to bounce on it some more. Then you realize that leaves aren't bouncy. Who cares? You think and you jump up and down on the leaves. + + + Then some grumpy voice shouts, "HEY! This is private property! These leaves are for the Mitten Factory! Wait a second! Stop right there!" + + + You bounce off of the leaves and run as fast as you can. The police kitten runs at you and notices something on your shoulder. "Oh... If you're FAT, then you can stay around. Wait a second, all Feline Agent Troop members have the scale of a lizard on their shoulders!" + + + "Tell me the truth!" The police kitten points a cane at you. +> Lie and save your skin! + Before you can lie, the police kitten rants about the FAT, an acronym for Feline Agent Troop. They are kittens who protect Earth from giant lizard monsters called Beasts. He also tells you that every year, the kittens take a human and turn them into a kitten as a sacrifice to the Beasts. He tells you that the sacrifice is just something to stall the Beasts for a bit while the FAT are trying to figure out all their secrets. + + + He then shoves you into his police car while tossing you some fish. "You aren't going to arrest me?" You ask. + + + "Nah, I know you're the human sacrifice this year. Breaking rules isn't too bad. Here, you're a nice quiet little guy. I'll take you to Kitty City, a nice bustling town. You'll like it, I know, just stay away from any FAT agents while you're there because you're now wanted by them. Be careful! By the way, the name's Waldo, Inspector Waldo!" + + + You listen to him talk about his life as you sigh and lay back. You might actually have a nice life in Kitty City...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Blackness. + + +Your mind is cloudy and hazy. + + +Pain. You feel pain. + + +Flashes of sound burst in the distance. You slowly feel awareness coming back, the world leaking back into coherent form. You are in so much pain. Around you you hear familiar sounds: Screaming, the butchery of men, the agony of rape, buildings burning, children screaming, and the cheers of the victors. + + +"Where am I?" You think to yourself. Slowly you move your fingers, then your toes. A soft moan issues from somewhere around you. You realize it is you and you begin to make your stiff body begin to move again. First one arm, then your leg, then you slowly lift up and look around. + + +You think hard to remove the fuzziness of the recent events from the corners of your mind and concentrate on survival. "I've got a concussion." You conclude. + + +Finally, you peer through the dense smoke and realize that you are in a crater, the bodies of men, horses, and weapons of war surround you. The acrid smell of burning flesh mixed with the tinny smell of blood, the pain in your head, and the entrails of the man you ran beside all make you vomit. + + +Strangely, you feel just a little bit better and your head is starting to clear, "I'm Sebastian, a mercenary, I chose to defend the city of Essitrea against the Turric . I don't think we won... I think I'd better get the hell out of here!" + + +Looking around you a sturdy broadsword sticks out from a body of a Turric soldier, you recognize the blade as yours. You stagger over to the soldier and with effort pull the blade free from the man's corpse. + + +Now armed, you know you've got to get out but amidst the rubble and the ruffians running amok, the sounds of battle in the air, and the thudding of artillery, every step could be your last. + + +You decide quickly that you can either run building to building a fast method of travel but with heavy odds of discovery; try to enter the sewers, an obviously unsanitary means to travel but with less likelihood of discovery, or you can try to hole up in the nearest building and wait for the action to die down. +> Run For It! +You grab your blade tightly and look around quickly before dashing over the lip of the crater and towards the blasted wall nearest your left side. Nearby an explosion spurts up chunks of earth and stone as well as the arm of a corpse, high into the air. You watch in horror as the appendage plops onto the sidewalk. + + +From your left, three Turric warriors rush and assault an injured merchant, stabbing him repeatedly with their wickedly barbed scimitars before looting the man's corpse. + + +To your right you see another building about twenty feet across some exposed ground. + + +Do you: +> Attack the Turric Warriors? +You attack the warriors with the advantage of surprise. Crawling low, you creep until you are at the edge of the wall you were hiding behind then you suddenly sprint with your broadsword lifted in both hands. As you descend upon the Turric Warriors, you swing the sword in an arc that splits the first Turric Swordsman's left arm from his body. You spin and use the heavy blade's momentum to make a second cut from the shoulder blade up through the man's neck decapitating him instantly. + + +As the first warrior falls, blood arcing into the sky, the two others reel in shock. You take advantage of this momentary lapse of reason and bring a low slice towards the second man's knee. The blade connects and the limb is taken clean off. Following the blade's momentum, you raise it up and steer it into the man's chest. + + +The third warrior has now gathered his wits and attacks viciously trying to slice you with his barbed scimitar. You back away from the first strike, block the second, and duck the third. His blows are coming faster than the broad-blade can react. Do you: Parry and look for an opening with the butt of your sword to stun the enemy or block with the sword and pull a dagger with your other hand and plunge it into his neck? +> Parry and Stun the Enemy! +You conserve your energy and block his blows. Knowing the wild style of the Turric swordsman, you easily parry several wild blows. As he failed to strike he becomes more and more frustrated and you lure him into a wide swing and while he is pulling back, you step in his reach and break his nose with the handle of your sword. The stunning blow makes him stumble backwards and you press the advantage kicking him backwards and then turning your sword and driving it through his stomach! + + +He squirms like a worm for several long seconds before you twist your blade and finish the job. Though you conserved your energy by blocking, you attracted the attention of a few more warriors. They come streaming out of a building to your right and you count at least five men, two with crossbows aimed in your direction. + + +Do you: Run away or turn to face the group and take them head on using throwing knives to whittle them down before resorting to your sword? +> Run Away! +Feeling like discretion is the better part of valor, you turn tail and run away as fast as you can. You are lithe and Agile and in light armor and the heavier, more armored men can't keep up. However, one of the crossbowmen draws a bead on you and fires. The bolt slams into your left shoulder and you scream in pain before skirting around a clump of rubble and ducking under some fallen timbers. The warriors curse as they try to track you but they walk past your position and disappear into the smoky ruins. + + +You are injured and the bolt projects out of your left shoulder. You try to hold back tears as you reach with your good arm and gingerly touch the shaft. It's buried deep and you'll need a healer to remove it. You grimace and pull your first aid kit out of your belt. You find a few bandages and make yourself a sling and place your left arm in it. + + +You are alive but now you are crippled. Without both arms your swordplay will be much diminished and you realize that your ability to defend yourself has been compromised. You will now have to use stealth until you can find an ally or escape altogether. + + +Desperate, you must move on, losing consciousness in this state could be life-ending. + + +Do you: +> Wait for Nightfall to Continue? +Resting back, you decide to wait until nightfall to continue trying to escape. You hope that your stealth will be aided by the darkness. The problem is finding a decent place to rest. Carefully, you creep towards a building that looks promising. It is three stories tall but also damaged and missing most of the roof. You think that it is the least likely place around the enemy will look but you admit it's a gamble and a possible deathtrap if you get cornered by enemy forces with no where to run. + + +Making sure no one is watching, you scurry from the rubble to an alley and with another quick look around, you duck through a hole in the wall and make it into the first floor. A quick search reveals nothing good. A family has been butchered, the man stabbed repeatedly, his wife raped and her throat cut, the oldest boy, perhaps ten in age, was stapled to the wall with crossbow bolts and still hangs there, his life's blood pooled and congealed at his feet, and the youngest daughter, about six? Well if there is a hell, who ever hurt her will burn there forever. + + +You curse the gods at their apathy and resolve to never give up, never surrender, even if death is the only alternative! Better to jump from a building or cut one's own throat than to be raped and killed like a cowering dog. + + +A noise takes you out of your revelry, you need to hide somewhere and fast! Rushing towards the staircase do you... + + + + + +> Run Upstairs! +You skate up the stairs taking three at a time and find a door at the top of the stairs. You pull out your lockpicks and begin to jimmy the door. Within seconds you hear the lock 'click' and you slide inside closing the door behind you. You hear a creak and some sniffling sounds somewhere in the room. It's very dark, all of the windows are shuttered, and you negotiate the room by sound and touch rather than lighting a lamp and giving yourself away. + + +Following behind your sword, you investigate the dark room and try to track the noise before someone or something gets the drop on you. When the sound is made again, you rush to the wall ripping off a tapestry and see a that it hides a small doorway. You open it in a flash, sword back to provide a fatal stab. To your surprise a young girl, perhaps sixteen years in age is in hiding. + + +You look at her frightened face, streaked with tears and the knowledge that none of her family made it through whatever happened downstairs. She screams at the sudden discovery and scrambles as far back in the hidden compartment as she can go. You curse your luck and say, "Be quiet girl! I'm not here to hurt you! Pray you haven't woken the neighborhood!" + + +You quickly move away from the whimpering girl and check the windows. Sure enough two Turric Swordsmen and a Wardog are on the prowl. The dog starts to bark and drag the two soldiers towards the house. + + +"Shit!" You hiss and move back to the secret compartment. Pulling up the tapestry you tell the girl, "No matter what you do, no matter what you hear, do not leave this compartment for the next few hours unless you hear me say 'Defender'." You slide a dagger her way and say, "And no matter what, don't let them take you alive, if this place is discovered, if this flap is opened and they try to take you, slice your throat, plunge this into your chest but don't let them take you out of here. No matter what!" + + +You close the hidden door, drop the tapestry, close and lock the door to the first floor, and hide behind a desk. When those bastards come through they're going to pay dearly. + + +The sound of heavy boots tromping up the stairs follow a barking dog. They try the lock, try it again, and then start trying to bash the door in. The door survives four solid charges before the door rips off of the hinges and the men and beast rush in swords drawn. + + + +> Kill the Dog First +You realize that the hound is going to be a noisy, dangerous problem and so you resolve to end that issue first. As soon as the trio of enemies rush into the room you pop up from behind the desk and throw three throwing knives at the beast. The first knife goes wide and lands knee level in the wooden wall, but the second catches in the jaw bursting it's teeth and jutting through it's muzzle, and the third smashes in the flanks sticking through it's hind quarter. The beast yelps pitiably and staggers backwards incapacitated. + + +The beast howls and you leap over the table drawing both of your short blades. In close quarter fighting, your short swords and stabbing style will be a good match against the barbed scimitars the Turrics favor which require wide fast swings. + + +The first Turric swings high and you duck and deflect the first blade while reversing your spin and cutting the soldier's leg off at the knee. The second swings towards your midriff but you tumble and his swing lodges in his already injured partner's ribs. + + +You crouch and then spring low stabbing the second soldier's foot and slicing his sword arm off at the wrist. The second soldier screams and tries to stagger backwards but his foot is pinned to the floor. Rising you pull the blade free and jut the short blade up into his stomach pushing under his ribs until the blade pierces his heart and blood runs down his armor like a burst dike. + + +As he falls back, you turn to the hound. You hate to kill such a noble beast but it was now time to end it's pain. A quick reversal of your swords sets up a downward thrust that pierces it's brain and severs it's spine. The hound collapses with a quiver. + + +You wipe your swords on a soldier's sleeve and place them again on your back. You then collect your throwing knives and search the soldiers for anything they carry you can use. You ignore their damaged armor, barbed scimitars, and top-heavy daggers and instead collect their coin pouches. Thirty Silvers later, you check the windows. You are relived to see that there is no further action in the streets. + + +Do you: + + + +> Go into the Basement? +You hurry downwards, using the stairs to enter the basement. At the bottom of the stairs is a cellar door. It opens easily into a pitch black room. You back up and decide to light your lantern. + + +Now with a fresh light source, and broad sword in your other hand you begin to explore the room. The basement is dark and eerie, filled with boxes and other items of storage, small terra cotta statues, paintings and furniture with tarps over them, extra sets of candles, piles of clothes, and other errata fill the shelves, cabinets, and wall spaces. + + +You figure that if you were to hide here, you'd probably be able to get the jump on any who entered here but you'd be trapped if there were multiple opponents. You reason you could probably take two swordsmen without difficulty but a larger group would be problematic. + + +Do you: + + + +> Search the Basement +You decide to search the basement. You comb through the boxes, look through the shelves, and rifle through the cabinets looking for something that could help you with your escape from the city. As you are searching, you hear some noises coming from above. Quickly you duck and blow out your lantern. + + +You can now light your lantern 2 More times. + + +Tense moments pass but the sounds cease. after ten minutes you feel safe enough to try looking again. After about a half of an hour you have accumulated everything that might be of interest to you. It isn't much but these people were obviously merchants, not warriors and as such didn't store any warrior items. + + +You find: + +Lantern Oil: Useful for lighting your lantern 3 extra times. +> Crash here. +You're tired, you've had a long afternoon and you have found somewhere to crash. You hope that this place is safe enough but in a city under siege, no where is truly safe. You find a little corner amongst the clutter and nestle in as best as you can. + + +You place your broadsword to your side within easy reach and thank the gods you have your modified light chainmail. It's very comfortable to sleep in, especially compared to most armors. Covering yourself with a blanket you slip easily into the demesne of sleep. + + +TEST YOUR LUCK: Pick a number between 1 and 3. + + +> 1 +You sleep fitfully, your dreams filled with nightmares that involve you being caught by the Turric, held down, and cut into pieces and fed to wardogs with fiery eyes. Several times you jump awake and look about yourself hoping you haven't been discovered and sit for several minutes straining your ears for phantom noises but eventually give up the search and head right back into another nightmare. You aren't discovered but you really don't feel rested when you awake. + + +Frustrated when you awake, you grumpily gather your few belongings and head back out into the city. It is now NIGHT. +> NIGHT: Creeping in the Darkness +You wait until nightfall and begin to make your journey flitting from alley to alleyway and make good progress though you occasionally have to see nightmares, at one intersection you see Turric soldiers by a scaffold where then men and women; soldiers and civilians both, are being hanged. You cringe as the men slap the horses underneath the victims and the prisoners are left to dangle helplessly in the air struggling as their weight begins to choke them to death. It takes over three minutes before the last of the men stops twitching, leaving the bodies swinging in the air. + + +You move on helpless to alter the events of the sacking of the city. Stepping from an alleyway you later see hundreds of Turric soldiers leading hundreds more prisoners down a broad street towards whatever grim fate awaits them. You turn back and enter a building through a window moving across the floor and exiting out the other side. Most of the buildings have by now been ransacked. + + +You exit out of the other end and creep into the next street. You immediately flatten against the wall as you see a Turric Deathwarden steering a group of hellhounds down the street. The flaming hounds are barking and growling but don't catch your scent. Taking a deep breath, you wait for the Deathwarden to pass and sprint for the next street. + + +Finally, after over two hours have passed, you arrive at a massive barricade. The barricade is manned by a holdout group of Essitrean soldiers each holding crossbows. There have to be dozens of them all on watch. The bodies of hundreds of Turric soldiers lie scattered in the streets around the barricade though it's obvious the Essitreans are wounded and exhausted. +> Join them +You pull your contract and slowly move towards the Essitreans making sure that you hold the contract high so that the tired and trigger happy soldiers don't mistake you for the enemy. As you enter into their line of sight, you hear the guards call out, "Halt and identify yourself or you'll be shot on sight!" + + +You enter into the torchlight and call out, I'm Sebastian, a mercenary serving under the Essitrean flag, here is my lawful contract. I wish to join you." + + +The men aren't much moved but a voice calls through the barricade, "Sebastian? By the Gods you're still alive? Boys, let her in, she's a friendly." + + +You jog across the street looking both ways for any enemy snipers or troops and enter a small gate and go beyond the barricades. The gate is closed quickly behind you. The situation behind the barricades is worse than you would have imagined, with dozens of troops injured or dead, scorch marks from enemy mages, and decapitated undead minions lying like wheat after the harvest. + + +A soldier approaches you and offers you a handclasp. You recognize him as Captain Krayler, a stern but effective commander whose forces numbered a full company, scarcely three platoons exist now and you see that by daylight only two dozen men will still be clinging to life. His face is grim and streaked with blood and dirt. he says, "What is the situation in the city beyond." + + +You reply, "The city is lost, the Turric are killing and rounding up anyone they find and Deathwardens, Vanguards, and Deathmagi wander the streets at will.Those who aren't killed or turned into the Walking Dead are being turned into slaves. I'm sorry Commander." + + +He nods and said, "I was expecting as much. The tide of refugees has thinned and you've been the first person we haven't had to fight in three hours. This is a tragedy, we watch the death of my beautiful home and the birth of another Turric Enclave. Such a blasphemy to the gods should have never been seen." + + +You nod. + + +He says, " I know you are tired and hungry, let me offer you some scant supplies and then we'll talk further." + + +You are led to a chow table, mostly chunks of bread and a few sips of water from a canteen before he leads you to a chair. You have a seat and instantly the weight of the night descends upon your weary bones. The captain brings you a tightly wrapped scroll and says, "Bast, you've always been a reputable mercenary, I need someone I can trust with an important mission. I need you to take this scroll and this boy. He is the heir to Essitrea's throne. Though his home has been lost he can keep the noble lineage flowing and can rally any escapees under the Essitrean Banner so that one day we can take this place back. I need you to take him with you to the gates. Can you do this for me?" + + +You ponder your options: +> Take the Boy and Scroll +You nod, this was a grave task. "I will be proud to serve the throne, Sir. I will take the young lord and deliver him safely to his men outside the gate." + + +The Commander nods and points to one of his men, and from a tent they bring forward a richly dressed but dirty faced little boy of about ten Summers old. Blood stains the front of his clothes but he appears uninjured. He wields a short sword uncertainly and there is both fear and stout resolution in his eyes. The boy looks you up and down, "I am to go with this lady?" + + +You look to the captain who says, "Yes, Milord, Sebastian is an experienced and wise warrior and your best hope from henceforth, follow her, do what she says, and rebuild our city. Remember those who died for it." + + +The Lordling nods and says, "I am honored to make your acquaintance Sebastian. Take my horse Arbalest he is a true steed meant for a warrior. The white pony is my own mount Bayerus." + + +The Commander smiled and said, "Well that's that. We'll hold the wall, we are the last hope for anyone to try and escape this blasted place. I wish you luck Sebastian." You salute and turn to head for the gates. + + +You begin the last part of the journey even as you hear behind you, "Ready men, here they come!!!" + + +The sound of battle rings out behind you as you gallop for the Only gate left in the city still controlled by Essitrean forces. The last that you see of the captains forces is the zombies overwhelming the barricades. + + +Less than fifteen minutes later you arrive at the gates with the Lordling. Men snap to salute as you and the Lord Ride out of the city into the countryside. You know not where the future lies but you realize that you have found the only candle of hope in the darkness that falls over the city of Essitrea.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You pull your contract and slowly move towards the Essitreans making sure that you hold the contract high so that the tired and trigger happy soldiers don't mistake you for the enemy. As you enter into their line of sight, you hear the guards call out, "Halt and identify yourself or you'll be shot on sight!" + + +You enter into the torchlight and call out, I'm Sebastian, a mercenary serving under the Essitrean flag, here is my lawful contract. I wish to join you." + + +The men aren't much moved but a voice calls through the barricade, "Sebastian? By the Gods you're still alive? Boys, let her in, she's a friendly." + + +You jog across the street looking both ways for any enemy snipers or troops and enter a small gate and go beyond the barricades. The gate is closed quickly behind you. The situation behind the barricades is worse than you would have imagined, with dozens of troops injured or dead, scorch marks from enemy mages, and decapitated undead minions lying like wheat after the harvest. + + +A soldier approaches you and offers you a handclasp. You recognize him as Captain Krayler, a stern but effective commander whose forces numbered a full company, scarcely three platoons exist now and you see that by daylight only two dozen men will still be clinging to life. His face is grim and streaked with blood and dirt. he says, "What is the situation in the city beyond." + + +You reply, "The city is lost, the Turric are killing and rounding up anyone they find and Deathwardens, Vanguards, and Deathmagi wander the streets at will.Those who aren't killed or turned into the Walking Dead are being turned into slaves. I'm sorry Commander." + + +He nods and said, "I was expecting as much. The tide of refugees has thinned and you've been the first person we haven't had to fight in three hours. This is a tragedy, we watch the death of my beautiful home and the birth of another Turric Enclave. Such a blasphemy to the gods should have never been seen." + + +You nod. + + +He says, " I know you are tired and hungry, let me offer you some scant supplies and then we'll talk further." + + +You are led to a chow table, mostly chunks of bread and a few sips of water from a canteen before he leads you to a chair. You have a seat and instantly the weight of the night descends upon your weary bones. The captain brings you a tightly wrapped scroll and says, "Bast, you've always been a reputable mercenary, I need someone I can trust with an important mission. I need you to take this scroll and this boy. He is the heir to Essitrea's throne. Though his home has been lost he can keep the noble lineage flowing and can rally any escapees under the Essitrean Banner so that one day we can take this place back. I need you to take him with you to the gates. Can you do this for me?" + + +You ponder your options: +> Refuse and Go it yourself +You decide to refuse the offer and exit the barricade choosing to make it on your own. +> Head to another part of the city. +You decide to head to another part of the city and are flitting from building to building when you see a massive attack by Turric troops to your left. To your right an explosion rocks the streets and ahead, you see a Deathmagus and his Vanguard accompanied by a horde of undead. You are spotted by the Deathmagus down the streets and you turn to run, there are just too many of them. At first you try to retreat and go back to the barricades but another explosion collapses the buildings around you. + + +You are now faced with running into mass combat, into the necromancer or down the alley where an explosion just occurred. You run down the alleyway and lose sight of the Deathmagus and the battle but run into a mass of Turric reinforcements. You are trapped. You retreat and are now surrounded by the three forces. + + +You resign yourself to a death by the sword. Choosing the least dangerous option, you run into the mass combat. The chaos of arrows, swordfighting, and bodies moving en mass make the situation deadly. You duck, twist, and dodge through the massive melee. Unfortunately, you are struck by an random arrow and then tripped by the boot of a running soldier who is quickly killed by a crossbow bolt. You try to rise but watch as a roiling ball of flame explodes incinerating those around you. + + +Another explosion takes a building out and it collapses showering stone and mortar over the street. You are caught be a falling piece of rubble the size of a horse and it lands on your leg. You try to free it but another explosion demolishes the next building and it collapses and sprays more stone upon you. You are killed by a falling brick that turns your head into a read smear. + + +YOU HAVE FAILED!!! +> A Horrible Awakening +Blackness. + + +Your mind is cloudy and hazy. + + +Pain. You feel pain. + + +Flashes of sound burst in the distance. You slowly feel awareness coming back, the world leaking back into coherent form. You are in so much pain. Around you you hear familiar sounds: Screaming, the butchery of men, the agony of rape, buildings burning, children screaming, and the cheers of the victors. + + +"Where am I?" You think to yourself. Slowly you move your fingers, then your toes. A soft moan issues from somewhere around you. You realize it is you and you begin to make your stiff body begin to move again. First one arm, then your leg, then you slowly lift up and look around. + + +You think hard to remove the fuzziness of the recent events from the corners of your mind and concentrate on survival. "I've got a concussion." You conclude. + + +Finally, you peer through the dense smoke and realize that you are in a crater, the bodies of men, horses, and weapons of war surround you. The acrid smell of burning flesh mixed with the tinny smell of blood, the pain in your head, and the entrails of the man you ran beside all make you vomit. + + +Strangely, you feel just a little bit better and your head is starting to clear, "I'm Sebastian, a mercenary, I chose to defend the city of Essitrea against the Turric . I don't think we won... I think I'd better get the hell out of here!" + + +Looking around you a sturdy broadsword sticks out from a body of a Turric soldier, you recognize the blade as yours. You stagger over to the soldier and with effort pull the blade free from the man's corpse. + + +Now armed, you know you've got to get out but amidst the rubble and the ruffians running amok, the sounds of battle in the air, and the thudding of artillery, every step could be your last. + + +You decide quickly that you can either run building to building a fast method of travel but with heavy odds of discovery; try to enter the sewers, an obviously unsanitary means to travel but with less likelihood of discovery, or you can try to hole up in the nearest building and wait for the action to die down.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to refuse the offer and exit the barricade choosing to make it on your own. +> Move on +You decide to pass them by, there has to be another way through the city without the aid of the Essitreans and the inevitable conflict they will attract. You head down a corridor and see flames rising ahead, to the left you see a massive army of Turric soldiers fighting with another smaller group of Essitreans. The carnage is horrid and you opt not to go that way. To your right you see an old stable. Perhaps within you can find a horse. + + + +> Head towards the Fire +The flames ahead of you fly many feet into the air and you try to find a way past the street but there are no obvious exits. Disheartened you retreat back to the previous intersection.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to pass them by, there has to be another way through the city without the aid of the Essitreans and the inevitable conflict they will attract. You head down a corridor and see flames rising ahead, to the left you see a massive army of Turric soldiers fighting with another smaller group of Essitreans. The carnage is horrid and you opt not to go that way. To your right you see an old stable. Perhaps within you can find a horse. + + + +> Check out the Stable +You opt to check out the stable but there are no horses inside. As you are searching, you see the fighting from the left street starting to pour into yours. The mass combat is punctuated by explosions, the sound of steel on steel or flesh, and the screams of the injured or dying. You quickly decide to abandon the search and head back to the intersection before you are overwhelmed. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to pass them by, there has to be another way through the city without the aid of the Essitreans and the inevitable conflict they will attract. You head down a corridor and see flames rising ahead, to the left you see a massive army of Turric soldiers fighting with another smaller group of Essitreans. The carnage is horrid and you opt not to go that way. To your right you see an old stable. Perhaps within you can find a horse. + + + +> Go Backwards +You arrive at the massive barricade. The barricade is manned by a holdout group of Essitrean soldiers each holding crossbows. There have to be dozens of them all on watch. The bodies of hundreds of Turric soldiers lie scattered in the streets around the barricade though it's obvious the Essitreans are wounded and exhausted. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You're tired, you've had a long afternoon and you have found somewhere to crash. You hope that this place is safe enough but in a city under siege, no where is truly safe. You find a little corner amongst the clutter and nestle in as best as you can. + + +You place your broadsword to your side within easy reach and thank the gods you have your modified light chainmail. It's very comfortable to sleep in, especially compared to most armors. Covering yourself with a blanket you slip easily into the demesne of sleep. + + +TEST YOUR LUCK: Pick a number between 1 and 3. + + +> 2 +You fall into a deep and dreamless sleep. As luck would have it, you are not bothered by anything or anyone during your stay and you feel quite at peace with yourself. Your mother always said you were a strong one before she died. She never knew how many times you would have to test that theory. You wake up refreshed and ready to go. + + +It is now NIGHT.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You're tired, you've had a long afternoon and you have found somewhere to crash. You hope that this place is safe enough but in a city under siege, no where is truly safe. You find a little corner amongst the clutter and nestle in as best as you can. + + +You place your broadsword to your side within easy reach and thank the gods you have your modified light chainmail. It's very comfortable to sleep in, especially compared to most armors. Covering yourself with a blanket you slip easily into the demesne of sleep. + + +TEST YOUR LUCK: Pick a number between 1 and 3. + + +> 3 +Your sleep is suddenly interrupted by the sound of the door being kicked in by heavy booted feet. In the entrance are five undead warriors, two heavily armored Turric Vanguards and a Turric Deathmagus, a necromancer by any other name. You rise to your feet pulling your broadsword and charging. Deathmagus takes no prisoners. This is going to be a fight to the death. + + +You swing a heavy blow and decapitate the lead zombie as the others charge forward. You've fought the occasional zombie in the past and you know from experience that you have to decapitate them to bring them down. As the first zombie falls, you face a thicket of swinging blades, what zombies lack in speed and accuracy, they make up in fearlessness and tenacity. + + +You need to fight without getting cornered or overwhelmed. You duck to the left and then run to the right, making the zombies slowly try to follow you. You pick a zombie at the edge and cut at his knees while parrying two blades aimed at your midsection. The zombies legs are undercut and you duck and blade and stab upwards into a zombie's gut. They keep onrushing but you roll to the side of a blow and parry a second before leaping on a table. + + +A downward chop takes another zombie downward and you backflip off the table landing on your feet. Taking a mirror, you toss it into the face of a nearing zombie and slip to the left before arcing right and using your sword to decapitate the next. + + +Several seconds later, you pant as the last zombie falls. + + +The Deathmagus claps his bony pale hands slowly, "Very good little Silver one, you are most impressive. I've decided to give you one last challenge, if you can over come it I'll let you live." He turns to one of the fully armored vanguards and points at you. The Vanguard silently obeys stepping forward with his barbed Falchion at the ready. + + +The other Vanguard stands by his master and together they watch the duel. You know from experience that Vanguards are heavily armored juggernauts with undead endurance and massive two handed falchions with rasping barbs attached. + + +Do you: + + + +> Use your Broadsword and Short Swords to inflict heavy damage? +The Vanguard was a heavy warrior with a massive slow sword so you decide to try your luck with your heavy sword relying on your natural quickness to keep one step ahead of him. As he nears you you double-hand the broadsword and smash it as hard as you can against his side. The blade bangs loudly against him and you see a dent appear in the armor but he moves as if it were a feather duster. He swipes at your head but you duck and spin away. + + +You finish the spin with a heavy blow to his knee and you see with some satisfaction as the armor dents in and his knee buckles. The Vanguard barely even registers the blow and chops at you with an overhand blow that meets the stone floor and shatters it. You roll backwards and throw two blades that ricochet off the armor and stick in the ceiling. + + +He keeps moving forward unperturbed by the blades and you charge towards him willing him to commit for a swing. When he does, you leap to the side and again bash his knee. The metal dents a little more and his knee visibly weakens. You roll away and place your broadsword between yourself and his blade. + + +His hand glows black and he begins to drag you towards him with some form of dark magic. You put your sword in front of you and duck another slash as you use his magic to impale himself with your sword. He staggers backwards and you block a sideways slash meant for your wait with your broadsword. The power knocks it flying across the room lodging into the wall. + + +You kick off of the Vanguard and run backwards as the knight continually steps forward thinking to yourself, "That was cheating..." + + +Pulling your twin short swords, you leap and twist so your blades smack deep into his shoulders. The Vanguard staggers and steps back and you tumble off of his body and duck to the left. You hear his stomps as you run for your broadblade. You reach it and pull it out of the wall just as the Vanguard reaches you. You have to release the sword in order to keep your arm. + + +After his miss, you again grab the blade and rush around him to his backside raining your broadblade high into the air and stabbing it downward into his wounded knee. Your blade bites deep into the knee and sinks into the stone floor pinning him. Pulling your swords from his shoulders, you jump into his back making him fall forward and then roll over him pulling your twin blades with you. You then watch as he starts to pull himself up. This is when you strike with both blades at his neck repeatedly, the sparks of your work lighting up the room as your steel pounds against the Ulum metal of the Turric Mages. Finally, the metal gives way and you plant both swords into his neck and pull outward. + + +The metal shell and flesh peels outwards and you take your dagger and plant it deep into his spine wrenching it back and forth until the warrior drops coldly into the dust. + + +Backing away you watch as his body, armor, flesh, and weapon melt and turn to dust. + + +Breathing heavily, you turn towards the door where the Deathmagus nods his approval and turns to the exit. A second later, the place is quiet and empty. Despite yourself you fall into a deep, deep sleep...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your sleep is suddenly interrupted by the sound of the door being kicked in by heavy booted feet. In the entrance are five undead warriors, two heavily armored Turric Vanguards and a Turric Deathmagus, a necromancer by any other name. You rise to your feet pulling your broadsword and charging. Deathmagus takes no prisoners. This is going to be a fight to the death. + + +You swing a heavy blow and decapitate the lead zombie as the others charge forward. You've fought the occasional zombie in the past and you know from experience that you have to decapitate them to bring them down. As the first zombie falls, you face a thicket of swinging blades, what zombies lack in speed and accuracy, they make up in fearlessness and tenacity. + + +You need to fight without getting cornered or overwhelmed. You duck to the left and then run to the right, making the zombies slowly try to follow you. You pick a zombie at the edge and cut at his knees while parrying two blades aimed at your midsection. The zombies legs are undercut and you duck and blade and stab upwards into a zombie's gut. They keep onrushing but you roll to the side of a blow and parry a second before leaping on a table. + + +A downward chop takes another zombie downward and you backflip off the table landing on your feet. Taking a mirror, you toss it into the face of a nearing zombie and slip to the left before arcing right and using your sword to decapitate the next. + + +Several seconds later, you pant as the last zombie falls. + + +The Deathmagus claps his bony pale hands slowly, "Very good little Silver one, you are most impressive. I've decided to give you one last challenge, if you can over come it I'll let you live." He turns to one of the fully armored vanguards and points at you. The Vanguard silently obeys stepping forward with his barbed Falchion at the ready. + + +The other Vanguard stands by his master and together they watch the duel. You know from experience that Vanguards are heavily armored juggernauts with undead endurance and massive two handed falchions with rasping barbs attached. + + +Do you: + + + +> Stay at range and use throwing blades and daggers. +You begin the duel with two throwing knives as you try to stay at range. The blades hit square but ricochet off the heavy armor. You growl as you duck under his heavy blade and cartwheel out of his range. Having more space, you throw two more knives, one bounces off and sticks in the ceiling and the other lodges under his armor. The Vanguard pulls the blade out and throws it to the ground and you pull a dagger with two more knives. + + +Since the Vanguard seems to be taking his time, steadily moving forward, you carefully aim the next two throws. The first slides into an eyehole of the armor and for the first time you get his attention. The blade spews brackish blood that leaks from under his helm and dribbles down his chin. He pulls the blade from his eye and grasps the Falchion with both hands, the old leather crackles under his grip. + + +"Great..." you think as you dodge a powerful but slow swipe that smashes the cabinet you ducked behind. You pull back and throw the second blade trying to lodge it through his plates under his arm. It connects with the armor and bangs off into the floor. + + +Pulling your daggers you duck under a sweeping cross-swipe and punch the dagger into his breastplate. The dagger rings in your hand without doing any apparent damage. He kicks but misses as you flit to the side and stab him in the neck. The blade slides into his neck but it doesn't slow him even a bit. + + +He backhands you and you barely escape a full on hit but feel your jaw instantly bruise and you see stars as you fall backwards into the debris around you. He is upon you instantly but you dodge his reversed blade and watch the heavy blade pierce the stone itself. You roll to your feet and try to kick out his feet but your leg meets with an unmovable object and you back away limping. + + +He closes in on you as you switch to your throwing knives which clink off his armor. You can't believe it when he raises his hand and you feel dark energy course through you. + + +"That wasn't fair..." is the last thought you think as he plants his falchion deep into your stomach and rips downward splitting your body from stomach to crotch. The last thing you see is his dead eye peering at you as you bleed out. + + +YOU HAVE FAILED.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You realize that the hound is going to be a noisy, dangerous problem and so you resolve to end that issue first. As soon as the trio of enemies rush into the room you pop up from behind the desk and throw three throwing knives at the beast. The first knife goes wide and lands knee level in the wooden wall, but the second catches in the jaw bursting it's teeth and jutting through it's muzzle, and the third smashes in the flanks sticking through it's hind quarter. The beast yelps pitiably and staggers backwards incapacitated. + + +The beast howls and you leap over the table drawing both of your short blades. In close quarter fighting, your short swords and stabbing style will be a good match against the barbed scimitars the Turrics favor which require wide fast swings. + + +The first Turric swings high and you duck and deflect the first blade while reversing your spin and cutting the soldier's leg off at the knee. The second swings towards your midriff but you tumble and his swing lodges in his already injured partner's ribs. + + +You crouch and then spring low stabbing the second soldier's foot and slicing his sword arm off at the wrist. The second soldier screams and tries to stagger backwards but his foot is pinned to the floor. Rising you pull the blade free and jut the short blade up into his stomach pushing under his ribs until the blade pierces his heart and blood runs down his armor like a burst dike. + + +As he falls back, you turn to the hound. You hate to kill such a noble beast but it was now time to end it's pain. A quick reversal of your swords sets up a downward thrust that pierces it's brain and severs it's spine. The hound collapses with a quiver. + + +You wipe your swords on a soldier's sleeve and place them again on your back. You then collect your throwing knives and search the soldiers for anything they carry you can use. You ignore their damaged armor, barbed scimitars, and top-heavy daggers and instead collect their coin pouches. Thirty Silvers later, you check the windows. You are relived to see that there is no further action in the streets. + + +Do you: + + + +> Help the girl out of the hiding place? +You dislike the thought of dragging around a non-combatant but you could at least take care of her until she can be handed off to someone else. By herself she'd either starve to death or get caught and become a victim to the Turrics. With you she had a slim chance to live, it wasn't much but it was something. + + +You dislike the thought of dragging around a non-combatant but you could at least take care of her until she can be handed off to someone else. By herself she'd either starve to death or get caught and become a victim to the Turrics. With you she had a slim chance to live, it wasn't much but it was something. + + +Going downstairs, you say 'Defender' as you pull back the tapestry but there is no answer. You say 'Defender' again but there is still no response. Dreading what you'll find, you open the little door to find the girl, her body lifeless with your dagger stuck in her chest. You curse her weakness even as the pragmatic side of you tells you your own survival rate just increased. + + +At least she'll be with her family you suppose. With a heavy heart you retrieve your knife and close the trapdoor.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You skate up the stairs taking three at a time and find a door at the top of the stairs. You pull out your lockpicks and begin to jimmy the door. Within seconds you hear the lock 'click' and you slide inside closing the door behind you. You hear a creak and some sniffling sounds somewhere in the room. It's very dark, all of the windows are shuttered, and you negotiate the room by sound and touch rather than lighting a lamp and giving yourself away. + + +Following behind your sword, you investigate the dark room and try to track the noise before someone or something gets the drop on you. When the sound is made again, you rush to the wall ripping off a tapestry and see a that it hides a small doorway. You open it in a flash, sword back to provide a fatal stab. To your surprise a young girl, perhaps sixteen years in age is in hiding. + + +You look at her frightened face, streaked with tears and the knowledge that none of her family made it through whatever happened downstairs. She screams at the sudden discovery and scrambles as far back in the hidden compartment as she can go. You curse your luck and say, "Be quiet girl! I'm not here to hurt you! Pray you haven't woken the neighborhood!" + + +You quickly move away from the whimpering girl and check the windows. Sure enough two Turric Swordsmen and a Wardog are on the prowl. The dog starts to bark and drag the two soldiers towards the house. + + +"Shit!" You hiss and move back to the secret compartment. Pulling up the tapestry you tell the girl, "No matter what you do, no matter what you hear, do not leave this compartment for the next few hours unless you hear me say 'Defender'." You slide a dagger her way and say, "And no matter what, don't let them take you alive, if this place is discovered, if this flap is opened and they try to take you, slice your throat, plunge this into your chest but don't let them take you out of here. No matter what!" + + +You close the hidden door, drop the tapestry, close and lock the door to the first floor, and hide behind a desk. When those bastards come through they're going to pay dearly. + + +The sound of heavy boots tromping up the stairs follow a barking dog. They try the lock, try it again, and then start trying to bash the door in. The door survives four solid charges before the door rips off of the hinges and the men and beast rush in swords drawn. + + + +> Kill the men, then the dog. +You decide that men with swords beat out a hound so you ready your ambush by hiding behind a desk and wait for them to rush in. They do as you predict and you pop up from behind the desk and toss three throwing knives, two at the leader, one at the man following him. The first bounces off the lead man's armor. The second catches him in the neck and he goes down grasping at his throat. The third narrowly misses the following soldier by inches. + + +You draw your short swords which are a good matchup against the wide swinging barbed scimitars the Turric use, at least in confined spaces. Then you leap over the desk ready to take the second soldier out. + + +He charges as you rush to meet him. His swing is wild and you parry it ducking into a tumble and swing low cutting his foot off at the ankle. As you roll into a crouch you are hit from the side by the wardog which barrels into you knocking you off balance. It bites for your throat but you sacrifice your arm instead losing your left hand sword in the process. The short sword rings off of the wooden floor and skitters several feet away as you use your other sword to stab the dog in the ribs. + + +Even as you stab the dog and it yelps, the other soldier levels a boot at your head and kicks you so hard you see sparkles and blackness for a second. The dog rends a massive rip in your bracer and blood spurts from the open wound into it's mouth. You stab it again and it collapses. + + +The second warrior raises his Barbed Scimitar as you struggle to get the dog's dead weight off of your own body. You scream as the blade comes down cutting deep into your skull. Death is instantaneous. + + +YOU HAVE FAILED!!!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You conserve your energy and block his blows. Knowing the wild style of the Turric swordsman, you easily parry several wild blows. As he failed to strike he becomes more and more frustrated and you lure him into a wide swing and while he is pulling back, you step in his reach and break his nose with the handle of your sword. The stunning blow makes him stumble backwards and you press the advantage kicking him backwards and then turning your sword and driving it through his stomach! + + +He squirms like a worm for several long seconds before you twist your blade and finish the job. Though you conserved your energy by blocking, you attracted the attention of a few more warriors. They come streaming out of a building to your right and you count at least five men, two with crossbows aimed in your direction. + + +Do you: Run away or turn to face the group and take them head on using throwing knives to whittle them down before resorting to your sword? +> Kill Em All! +You whirl quickly around pulling three throwing knives and letting them free at the charging warriors. Two of the three blades 'thunk!' into the Turric Swordsmen. One plunks deep in a man's chest and he staggers sideways before falling. The other knife slams into a warrior's arm causing him to howl in pain. + + +With four of the men left from the initial assault, you realize you are in a bind. You level your sword at the two melee warriors and try to stay out of the sight of the two crossbowmen. + + +A bolt 'thrums' by your ear. Another 'thuds' into a pillar to your left. You circle for position as one warrior heads towards your left side and the injured warrior with a knife sticking out of his arm circles to your right. The crossbowmen are reloading and another attack is imminent. + + +What do you do? + + + +> Feint Right and Attack the Warrior to the left. +Quickly, you move right and fake the warrior to your weak side, then cross the blade over and thrust it deep into the warrior on your left. The sword punctures the armor of the warrior and slides thickly into his belly where you feel the steel edge nestle in his spinal column and break through his back. The man instantly collapses like a stack of bricks taking your sword with it. + + +Rolling with the momentum, you duck under the whistling blade of the other warrior and tumble through bolts fired by the crossbowmen several meters distant. Before you even roll fully out of your crouch you pull two daggers and let them fly into the swordsman giving chase. One bashes into his face piercing his skull and the other strikes his leg. He falls lifeless like a bull shot in mid charge. + + +The crossbowmen, once trying to pick shots are now hurriedly trying to reload. you turn to them and pull short swords and charge them. They fumble their crossbows as you near them. Two vicious strikes later and you stand triumphant over five Turric corpses. + + +Catching your breath, you grab your weapons and check the bodies for loot. Seeing that your masters aren't probably going to be keeping you on the payroll, you may as well scrounge a little coin to prevent this from being a total loss. Three bags full of silver coins jingle in your hand and you put them in your pockets and turn to go. + + +You can either try to keep moving by skipping from building to building or you can choose to head into the dark alleyways across the street that heads to the ghettoes of Essitrea.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You whirl quickly around pulling three throwing knives and letting them free at the charging warriors. Two of the three blades 'thunk!' into the Turric Swordsmen. One plunks deep in a man's chest and he staggers sideways before falling. The other knife slams into a warrior's arm causing him to howl in pain. + + +With four of the men left from the initial assault, you realize you are in a bind. You level your sword at the two melee warriors and try to stay out of the sight of the two crossbowmen. + + +A bolt 'thrums' by your ear. Another 'thuds' into a pillar to your left. You circle for position as one warrior heads towards your left side and the injured warrior with a knife sticking out of his arm circles to your right. The crossbowmen are reloading and another attack is imminent. + + +What do you do? + + + +> Throw more daggers at the crossbowmen. +You are surrounded both by swordsmen and crossbowmen. Sensing that you might be plucked off from range you duck under the slash of the warrior to your left and pull your throwing blades. Two blades fly free and both strike the crossbowmen, the man on the left is hit in the chest and the one on the right feels a blade hit his shoulder. + + +Even as they fall, you bring your broadblade up to parry the attacks from the man on the right. The barbed scimitar collides with the flat of your blade and sparks glide from the conflicting metals. Then you feel a sharp pain from behind as you see the point of a scimitar pierce through your chest. You feel as if your whole body is being electrocuted and you watch with hazing vision as your sword falls limply from your grasp. + + +The blade twists inside you and your knees give out and you fall to your knees. The left side swordsman measures you up and swings his blade. The sensation of your head rolling on the ground is eerie as you watch your body fall. Then, slowly, the world turns black. + + +YOU HAVE FAILED!!!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You whirl quickly around pulling three throwing knives and letting them free at the charging warriors. Two of the three blades 'thunk!' into the Turric Swordsmen. One plunks deep in a man's chest and he staggers sideways before falling. The other knife slams into a warrior's arm causing him to howl in pain. + + +With four of the men left from the initial assault, you realize you are in a bind. You level your sword at the two melee warriors and try to stay out of the sight of the two crossbowmen. + + +A bolt 'thrums' by your ear. Another 'thuds' into a pillar to your left. You circle for position as one warrior heads towards your left side and the injured warrior with a knife sticking out of his arm circles to your right. The crossbowmen are reloading and another attack is imminent. + + +What do you do? + + + +> Feint Left and Attack the Warrior to your right. +You quickly feint left and then pull your heavy blade to the right with a vicious backhand arc that decapitates your opponent. The right-side swordsman's body twists in a ghoulish pirouette before stepping once to the left and falling. His head lies some ten feet into the distance. + + +You have however left your side exposed and you feel the results of a brutish slice into your side. You scream in agony and frustration before reversing your sword and thrusting it backwards. This catches the left-side swordsman directly in his stomach and you thrust it through his body before giving the blade a nasty twist. + + +You feel the warrior slide off of the steel and grunt in satisfaction. However, this is cut short by a bolt which smashes into your shoulder. You scream and reflexively draw a dagger which you hurtle across the field into the throat of the crossbowman who just shot you. However, his ally has been taking careful aim and looses another bolt which slams into your stomach. + + +Blood courses down your armor as you collapse to the ground, your feet no longer able to carry you. You grip your sword and try to rise as the men reload speaking their guttural language. They walk cautiously up to you as you grip a dagger secretly and act just a little bit more wounded than you are. + + +The first man approaches and pulls a knife, "You've got pretty skin bitch," he growls and grabs your face, pulling your chin up to his. "Too bad I've gotta cut you up, you might have been a good ride." + + +Growling, you plunge your dagger into his crotch and twist. He screams, gripping his groin and falls to the side rolling in pain. The other crossbowman steps back in suprise then his look hardens, "You've got teeth, Siak was always a fool. I'm not." + + +Raising his crossbow he levels it at your head and pulls the trigger. + + +The bolt jolts your head back as you fall lifeless into the street surrounded by a pile of corpses. + + +YOU HAVE FAILED!!!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You whirl quickly around pulling three throwing knives and letting them free at the charging warriors. Two of the three blades 'thunk!' into the Turric Swordsmen. One plunks deep in a man's chest and he staggers sideways before falling. The other knife slams into a warrior's arm causing him to howl in pain. + + +With four of the men left from the initial assault, you realize you are in a bind. You level your sword at the two melee warriors and try to stay out of the sight of the two crossbowmen. + + +A bolt 'thrums' by your ear. Another 'thuds' into a pillar to your left. You circle for position as one warrior heads towards your left side and the injured warrior with a knife sticking out of his arm circles to your right. The crossbowmen are reloading and another attack is imminent. + + +What do you do? + + + +> Surrender. +Surrounded by the warriors and realizing that you will probably not survive this fight, you drop your sword and raise your hands. The warriors grin and, under the careful watch of the crossbowmen, the swordsmen circle, one to the front and one behind. Suddenly, your hair is gripped and you are pulled to your knees. + + +A knife is applied to your neck and the men begin to grin. "Take her weapons Siak, the kitten still has claws." + + +You feel your body being searched, the knives being stripped and tossed, your belts being removed, and then the men fall on you. You scream and try to fight them but there are just too many of them. You finally burst into tears as you realize your impending fate. Two hold you arms as the others pry your legs open and the others pull off your pants. You scream for help knowing none will be coming. + + +Before they kill you, you hear Siak say, "I wish all our girls were this easy..." + + +YOU HAVE FAILED!!!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You attack the warriors with the advantage of surprise. Crawling low, you creep until you are at the edge of the wall you were hiding behind then you suddenly sprint with your broadsword lifted in both hands. As you descend upon the Turric Warriors, you swing the sword in an arc that splits the first Turric Swordsman's left arm from his body. You spin and use the heavy blade's momentum to make a second cut from the shoulder blade up through the man's neck decapitating him instantly. + + +As the first warrior falls, blood arcing into the sky, the two others reel in shock. You take advantage of this momentary lapse of reason and bring a low slice towards the second man's knee. The blade connects and the limb is taken clean off. Following the blade's momentum, you raise it up and steer it into the man's chest. + + +The third warrior has now gathered his wits and attacks viciously trying to slice you with his barbed scimitar. You back away from the first strike, block the second, and duck the third. His blows are coming faster than the broad-blade can react. Do you: Parry and look for an opening with the butt of your sword to stun the enemy or block with the sword and pull a dagger with your other hand and plunge it into his neck? +> Pull the Dagger and go for the Kill! +Parrying his first attack, you slip a dagger from your belt and plunge it deep into his neck. The man stops and falls backwards, his body shivering and eyes glazing as he tries to pull the treacherous weapon free. His struggles soon cease and he lies in a glistening pool of his own blood. + + +Do you: + + + +> Scram before anyone else sees you? +Deciding that it is smarter to pick your battles rather than have them pick you, you decide to leave the corpse alone and head for the nearest cover. Sure enough several men, three swordsmen and two crossbowmen curiously round a corner of a destroyed building and begin to investigate the area. + + +You are skilled but you'd rather not risk being put to the test against such ruthless men. You shiver when you consider what they do to women they take captive. Crouching, you duck out of sight and move quietly out of their range. A few tense moments later you are in a less damaged part of the city. You look around and you see two likely routes of escape, the sewers and the twisting alleyways that run through the slums. + + +Going through the main thoroughfares would be suicide so you decide to risk them. Normally both the alleys and the sewers are dangerous because of brigands, disease, and wild animals but for now, they might make for safe havens in the otherwise fallen city. + + +Which do you choose? + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Parrying his first attack, you slip a dagger from your belt and plunge it deep into his neck. The man stops and falls backwards, his body shivering and eyes glazing as he tries to pull the treacherous weapon free. His struggles soon cease and he lies in a glistening pool of his own blood. + + +Do you: + + + +> Search the Body. +You check the body of the fallen soldier and find a map. The map shows the city as it once was before the attack. You look around and try to get your bearings and spy a tower that is currently in flames. Orienting yourself, you see that the enemy has well marked battle plans and you can see troop movements marked in red as well as defending troop locations marked in blue. Perhaps you can make it to a defensive point where other troops might be, or you might just want to try to use back alleys to avoid all troops altogether. You could also ignore the map and head for the sewers. + + +MAP: Essitrea Battle Plans +> Head for a Defensive Point +You move quickly and silently through the alleys, side streets, and main streets of the falling city. Several times you have to draw swords and fight enemy troops, run away from other Turric groups, or even loose undead creatures wandering the city, however, you find a place to hole up before you make the final push towards safety. You decide to wait until nightfall before moving onwards.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grab your blade tightly and look around quickly before dashing over the lip of the crater and towards the blasted wall nearest your left side. Nearby an explosion spurts up chunks of earth and stone as well as the arm of a corpse, high into the air. You watch in horror as the appendage plops onto the sidewalk. + + +From your left, three Turric warriors rush and assault an injured merchant, stabbing him repeatedly with their wickedly barbed scimitars before looting the man's corpse. + + +To your right you see another building about twenty feet across some exposed ground. + + +Do you: +> Run for the Next Building? +You run for the next building, everything looks safe. No one passes by and the streets are filled with corpses. Perhaps the vanguard has passed by. Taking a breath, you peek out and sense no one. + + +Slowly you rise and take some tentative steps towards the next building. Though you cross a twenty foot expanse, you safely make it to the next stop. Peeking around the corner, you see a pitiable sight, a small blonde boy is crying over the corpses of his parents in the rubble strewn debris that was once his building. The piercing scream of an incoming flaming boulder smashes into the cobblestones vaporizing everything in your vision and knocking you back. + + +As you rise, you hear yet another burst far to the rear. + + +After regaining your feet, you start after where the boy was. There is nothing left but a smoking crater surrounded by a ring of flames. Despite your normal stoic nature, tears threaten to slide down your cheek. Gripping your blade, you force yourself to trudge onwards. + + +Three streets upward, you notice a firefight going on. Three Essitrean troops are hunkered behind a wall. Each has a crossbow and a fourth soldier lies dead with a bolt sticking out of his neck. You run in a crouch towards their position and fall to a knee beside the sergeant, "What's the situation Sergeant?" You ask. + + +He turns and almost goes for his sword as he doesn't recognize you but he says, "Mercenary?" + + +You nod and he grunts, "Figured you all had fled by now, hell if this wasn't my home I'd have fled long ago. Suppose I'll be dying within these old walls soon enough." + + +A crossbow bolt smacking against the wall brings him back to the fight. "Well, we're trying to reach a defensive position North of here but the bloody Turrics got us cut off. Out of a platoon sized element, only we remain and we're cut off from Main Group. If you can fire a crossbow, your help would be welcome. Hell, even if you can't you can at least take potshots at the bastards." + + +You nod taking up the Arbalest, a crossbow you are very skilled with and load the bolt. "Where are they located?" You ask. + + +He darws a quick picture in the dirt with a bolt and says, "We're here, their behind that berm over there. I'm pretty sure there's a sniper a little to the west. Bad thing is, though we can't see him, he can sure as hell see us and he's a crack shot. Took out Ivey with one clean shot, got Spiner just over there." He points to a Essitrean corpse about fifteen feet away, a bolt planted in his back. + + +Those idiots behind the berm are lousy but they've got us pinned with suppressive fire, can't raise my head without fear of taking bolts, the sniper though, he's the real challenge. We take him out and we can flank. Without him dead, we're stuck in a stalemate." + + +Add ARBALEST (Crossbow) to your Inventory. + + +You think over the options: + + + +> "Cover me, I'll take the Sniper." +You agree to stay but you have to figure out where the sniper is before you can take him out. "Hey Soldier, let me borrow that shield for a second." You grab his small metal shield and quickly raise it above the small wall you are all hunkered behind. Sure enough, the distraction brings a small hail of bolts from your front where the Turric Soldiers are entrenched, but they miss. However, from your right side a bolt slams the shield knocking it out of your hands and sends it rolling about ten feet to your left before the shield flops over. + + +"Okay soldiers, I know where the sniper is. I'm going to be heading to that little brick wall by the rubble pile, when I say go, I want you to fire your crossbows at the Turric Bastards until I'm set." + + +The men nod, they lock and load their crossbows and scrunch up preparing to fire. + + +You count to three and then begin a full-out sprint towards the brick wall in a low crouch. Meanwhile the Essitreans fire all they have at the Turric soldiers who keep their heads don until the flurry is over. They then return fire on the Essitreans and you wheel to the right towards the wall. You realize that the next five feet will be critical. + + +Test your luck: + + + + + +> If your name starts with B, E, F, J, P, or Y... +You duck, dodge, and sprint and are scant seconds to making a dive for home when you take a bolt directly in the ribs. Crashing Uncontrollably into the bricks you injure yourself pretty badly but you skitter up behind the wall and lean against it. + + +You now have a 2 ENDURANCE (out of 3) if your ENDURANCE lowers to 0 you are Dead. + + +Breathing with difficulty, you crouch and load your crossbow, you're going to get that Son-of-a-bitch if it's the last thing that you do. After saying a quick prayer, you turn out from the wall and scan the buildings in the direction of the shot, just as quickly you turn back in too the safety of the wall. A millisecond later a bolt smashes into the rubble you were just perched on. + + +You scoot over mentally aiming at the tall tower window on your upper right side. Then you skirt over to the small hole in the wall and aim. Inside you see movement in the wall and you draw a bead. Inhale. Exhale... Fire! + + +The bolt soars through the air and you hear a slight gasping sound before a man topples out of the window and falls four stories to the cobblestones below. The soldiers cheer and you send them a quick thumbs up. + + +Now to deal with the Turric Soldiers. + + +You move along the wall to flank the Turric Crossbowmen being careful not to make noise or alert them to your position. Finally, you can go no further and you peek your head out to see where they are and how many. You notice five men, each loading their crossbows. Deciding to make it four, you fire at the most exposed soldier and duck back behind your wall. A scream rewards your efforts and shouts from the Turric soldiers show that they now have a sniper to deal with. + + +You reload your Arbalest and ready yourself for another shot. Turn, aim, fire, and duck. A scream follows that action and you slide back down the wall to communicate with the sergeant. He is busy instructing his men to take careful aim but you catch his eye and motion for him to send another soldier across to your position. + + +You slide back to your sniper's post and between you and the soldiers, lay down covering fire as one of the privates rushes to the wall you are hiding behind. You've now got the enemy flanked. He looks at you with the bolt sticking out of your ribs and exhales but you motion for him to move to the corner. + + +He takes a quick look and sees a Turric Medic tending for their two wounded men while two men provide fire at the Soldiers you left. You nod and roll over aiming at the Medic and taking him out with a bolt that shatters his skull. The soldier with you runs to the side to another wall to the rear of the beleagured Turric warriors and The sergeant and his soldier keep up firing from the front. + + +Seconds later, you and your soldier pick off the last two Turric Crossbowmen. You wave your hand back and forth indicating a cease fire and you all rise from the rubble strewn battleground. The Sergeant and his men rush to congratulate you, "I don't know what we'd have done without your timely intervention. I'm Sergeant Reynall and these soldiers are Corvis and Leake. I'm guessing your that merc girl they call 'Silver'. I'd heard you were amazing but obviously the legends do you no justice." + + +He looks at the bolt in your side and cringes, "Looks like you took one for the team, unfortunately our medic is lying over there with a bolt in him so I'll just bandage it up and keep it as sterile as possible. We're heading over to a defensive position where we think some friendly troops are stationed, your welcome to come along for the ride if you'd like. Four is a hell of a lot better than one I'd say." +> "Thanks for letting me tag along..." +You and the troops move quickly and silently through the alleys, side streets, and main streets of the falling city. Several times you have to draw swords and fight enemy troops, run away from other Turric groups, or even loose undead creatures wandering the city, however, you all find a place to hole up before you make the final push towards safety. You decide to wait until nightfall before moving onwards.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You duck, dodge, and sprint and are scant seconds to making a dive for home when you take a bolt directly in the ribs. Crashing Uncontrollably into the bricks you injure yourself pretty badly but you skitter up behind the wall and lean against it. + + +You now have a 2 ENDURANCE (out of 3) if your ENDURANCE lowers to 0 you are Dead. + + +Breathing with difficulty, you crouch and load your crossbow, you're going to get that Son-of-a-bitch if it's the last thing that you do. After saying a quick prayer, you turn out from the wall and scan the buildings in the direction of the shot, just as quickly you turn back in too the safety of the wall. A millisecond later a bolt smashes into the rubble you were just perched on. + + +You scoot over mentally aiming at the tall tower window on your upper right side. Then you skirt over to the small hole in the wall and aim. Inside you see movement in the wall and you draw a bead. Inhale. Exhale... Fire! + + +The bolt soars through the air and you hear a slight gasping sound before a man topples out of the window and falls four stories to the cobblestones below. The soldiers cheer and you send them a quick thumbs up. + + +Now to deal with the Turric Soldiers. + + +You move along the wall to flank the Turric Crossbowmen being careful not to make noise or alert them to your position. Finally, you can go no further and you peek your head out to see where they are and how many. You notice five men, each loading their crossbows. Deciding to make it four, you fire at the most exposed soldier and duck back behind your wall. A scream rewards your efforts and shouts from the Turric soldiers show that they now have a sniper to deal with. + + +You reload your Arbalest and ready yourself for another shot. Turn, aim, fire, and duck. A scream follows that action and you slide back down the wall to communicate with the sergeant. He is busy instructing his men to take careful aim but you catch his eye and motion for him to send another soldier across to your position. + + +You slide back to your sniper's post and between you and the soldiers, lay down covering fire as one of the privates rushes to the wall you are hiding behind. You've now got the enemy flanked. He looks at you with the bolt sticking out of your ribs and exhales but you motion for him to move to the corner. + + +He takes a quick look and sees a Turric Medic tending for their two wounded men while two men provide fire at the Soldiers you left. You nod and roll over aiming at the Medic and taking him out with a bolt that shatters his skull. The soldier with you runs to the side to another wall to the rear of the beleagured Turric warriors and The sergeant and his soldier keep up firing from the front. + + +Seconds later, you and your soldier pick off the last two Turric Crossbowmen. You wave your hand back and forth indicating a cease fire and you all rise from the rubble strewn battleground. The Sergeant and his men rush to congratulate you, "I don't know what we'd have done without your timely intervention. I'm Sergeant Reynall and these soldiers are Corvis and Leake. I'm guessing your that merc girl they call 'Silver'. I'd heard you were amazing but obviously the legends do you no justice." + + +He looks at the bolt in your side and cringes, "Looks like you took one for the team, unfortunately our medic is lying over there with a bolt in him so I'll just bandage it up and keep it as sterile as possible. We're heading over to a defensive position where we think some friendly troops are stationed, your welcome to come along for the ride if you'd like. Four is a hell of a lot better than one I'd say." +> "Sorry, I work alone..." +You head out, leaving the men to their own fate. Such was the life of a mercenary, why get attached to lost causes? You duck into an alley to avoid a patrol and then head left throwing your hood over your distinctive silver hair. Ducking to the right you enter a series of alleyways. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You agree to stay but you have to figure out where the sniper is before you can take him out. "Hey Soldier, let me borrow that shield for a second." You grab his small metal shield and quickly raise it above the small wall you are all hunkered behind. Sure enough, the distraction brings a small hail of bolts from your front where the Turric Soldiers are entrenched, but they miss. However, from your right side a bolt slams the shield knocking it out of your hands and sends it rolling about ten feet to your left before the shield flops over. + + +"Okay soldiers, I know where the sniper is. I'm going to be heading to that little brick wall by the rubble pile, when I say go, I want you to fire your crossbows at the Turric Bastards until I'm set." + + +The men nod, they lock and load their crossbows and scrunch up preparing to fire. + + +You count to three and then begin a full-out sprint towards the brick wall in a low crouch. Meanwhile the Essitreans fire all they have at the Turric soldiers who keep their heads don until the flurry is over. They then return fire on the Essitreans and you wheel to the right towards the wall. You realize that the next five feet will be critical. + + +Test your luck: + + + + + +> If your name starts with any other letter of the alphabet... +You duck, dodge, and sprint and then make a graceful rolling tumble into the rubble. + + +Coming up from your roll, you crouch and load your crossbow, you're going to get that Sniper if it's the last thing that you do. After saying a quick prayer, you turn out from the wall and scan the buildings in the direction of the shot, just as quickly you turn back in to the safety of the wall. A millisecond later a bolt smashes into the rubble you were just perched on. + + +You scoot over mentally aiming at the tall tower window on your upper right side. Then you skirt over to the small hole in the wall and aim. Inside you see movement in the wall and you draw a bead. Inhale. Exhale... Fire! + + +The bolt soars through the air and you hear a slight gasping sound before a man topples out of the window and falls four stories to the cobblestones below. The soldiers cheer and you send them a quick thumbs up. + + +Now to deal with the Turric Soldiers. + + +You move along the wall to flank the Turric Crossbowmen being careful not to make noise or alert them to your position. Finally, you can go no further and you peek your head out to see where they are and how many. You notice five men, each loading their crossbows. Deciding to make it four, you fire at the most exposed soldier and duck back behind your wall. A scream rewards your efforts and shouts from the Turric soldiers show that they now have a sniper to deal with. + + +You reload your Arbalest and ready yourself for another shot. Turn, aim, fire, and duck. A scream follows that action and you slide back down the wall to communicate with the sergeant. He is busy instructing his men to take careful aim but you catch his eye and motion for him to send another soldier across to your position. + + +You slide back to your sniper's post and between you and the soldiers, lay down covering fire as one of the privates rushes to the wall you are hiding behind. You've now got the enemy flanked. He looks at you with admiration and awe but you motion for him to move to the corner and keep his wits about him. + + +He takes a quick look and sees a Turric Medic tending for their two wounded men while two men provide fire at the Soldiers you left. You nod and roll over aiming at the Medic and taking him out with a bolt that shatters his skull. The soldier with you runs to the side to another wall to the rear of the beleagured Turric warriors and The sergeant and his soldier keep up firing from the front. + + +Seconds later, you and your soldier pick off the last two Turric Crossbowmen. You wave your hand back and forth indicating a cease fire and you all rise from the rubble strewn battleground. The Sergeant and his men rush to congratulate you, "I don't know what we'd have done without your timely intervention. I'm Sergeant Reynall and these soldiers are Corvis and Leake. I'm guessing your that merc girl they call 'Silver'. I'd heard you were amazing but obviously the legends do you no justice!" + + +He looks at you and says, "We're heading over to a defensive position where we think some friendly troops are stationed, your welcome to come along for the ride if you'd like. Four is a hell of a lot better than one I'd say." + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You run for the next building, everything looks safe. No one passes by and the streets are filled with corpses. Perhaps the vanguard has passed by. Taking a breath, you peek out and sense no one. + + +Slowly you rise and take some tentative steps towards the next building. Though you cross a twenty foot expanse, you safely make it to the next stop. Peeking around the corner, you see a pitiable sight, a small blonde boy is crying over the corpses of his parents in the rubble strewn debris that was once his building. The piercing scream of an incoming flaming boulder smashes into the cobblestones vaporizing everything in your vision and knocking you back. + + +As you rise, you hear yet another burst far to the rear. + + +After regaining your feet, you start after where the boy was. There is nothing left but a smoking crater surrounded by a ring of flames. Despite your normal stoic nature, tears threaten to slide down your cheek. Gripping your blade, you force yourself to trudge onwards. + + +Three streets upward, you notice a firefight going on. Three Essitrean troops are hunkered behind a wall. Each has a crossbow and a fourth soldier lies dead with a bolt sticking out of his neck. You run in a crouch towards their position and fall to a knee beside the sergeant, "What's the situation Sergeant?" You ask. + + +He turns and almost goes for his sword as he doesn't recognize you but he says, "Mercenary?" + + +You nod and he grunts, "Figured you all had fled by now, hell if this wasn't my home I'd have fled long ago. Suppose I'll be dying within these old walls soon enough." + + +A crossbow bolt smacking against the wall brings him back to the fight. "Well, we're trying to reach a defensive position North of here but the bloody Turrics got us cut off. Out of a platoon sized element, only we remain and we're cut off from Main Group. If you can fire a crossbow, your help would be welcome. Hell, even if you can't you can at least take potshots at the bastards." + + +You nod taking up the Arbalest, a crossbow you are very skilled with and load the bolt. "Where are they located?" You ask. + + +He darws a quick picture in the dirt with a bolt and says, "We're here, their behind that berm over there. I'm pretty sure there's a sniper a little to the west. Bad thing is, though we can't see him, he can sure as hell see us and he's a crack shot. Took out Ivey with one clean shot, got Spiner just over there." He points to a Essitrean corpse about fifteen feet away, a bolt planted in his back. + + +Those idiots behind the berm are lousy but they've got us pinned with suppressive fire, can't raise my head without fear of taking bolts, the sniper though, he's the real challenge. We take him out and we can flank. Without him dead, we're stuck in a stalemate." + + +Add ARBALEST (Crossbow) to your Inventory. + + +You think over the options: + + + +> "Good luck guys. You're on your own!" +You owe these soldiers no allegiance, you don't live in this city, and dying for a pointless cause in a nameless street doesn't seem very appealing. You say, "If i were you, I'd retreat cause that's what I'm doing. No point in dying now, this war is lost." + + +You feel a slight twinge of guilt at the faces of the men who look as if you'd taken the little bit of hope you'd given them and dashed it. However, the Sergeant turns to his men and says, "Don't worry about her men, she's a mercenary, she'd sell her mother if the coin was right. We're heroes fighting for our mothers, our families, and our city!" + + +The men buck up and begin to rally sending bolts back towards the enemy as you leave them in the distance. + + +Several streets away and you'd almost forgotten them. To each his own. As you cross a dirty alleyway you see an old woman wandering around the streets asking if anyone had seen her boy tears form rivers in her dusty face. You haven't so you move on. You were hired to fight, not to save the world, to cure the sick, or to save the innocent. It was just too much. You wonder to yourself as you pass the banged out ruins of a massive church, "Where is this god these people prayed to? Why don't they ask him? I'm just one person and I can barely care for myself..." + + +The bitter scenes of man's cruelest depravities pass your sight, dogs chewing on the corpses of a baby in a dead woman's arms, a scavenger stealing bread from a stall while the rats chew on the proprietor, and charred bodies still smoking from the artillery strikes. + + +Somehow you sneak past a troop of Turric soldiers carrying the spoils of their ill-earned gains, golden rings, jeweled necklaces, and young girls, most already battered and beaten, headed to the slave squares and whorehouses the Turrics are so fond of. Nothing you can do, you're just one girl, at least you're not one of them. + + +Sneaking into a doorway you are getting tired, your legs are weakening, and your vision is washed with sweat and exhaustion. You need to find refuge.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You run for the next building, everything looks safe. No one passes by and the streets are filled with corpses. Perhaps the vanguard has passed by. Taking a breath, you peek out and sense no one. + + +Slowly you rise and take some tentative steps towards the next building. Though you cross a twenty foot expanse, you safely make it to the next stop. Peeking around the corner, you see a pitiable sight, a small blonde boy is crying over the corpses of his parents in the rubble strewn debris that was once his building. The piercing scream of an incoming flaming boulder smashes into the cobblestones vaporizing everything in your vision and knocking you back. + + +As you rise, you hear yet another burst far to the rear. + + +After regaining your feet, you start after where the boy was. There is nothing left but a smoking crater surrounded by a ring of flames. Despite your normal stoic nature, tears threaten to slide down your cheek. Gripping your blade, you force yourself to trudge onwards. + + +Three streets upward, you notice a firefight going on. Three Essitrean troops are hunkered behind a wall. Each has a crossbow and a fourth soldier lies dead with a bolt sticking out of his neck. You run in a crouch towards their position and fall to a knee beside the sergeant, "What's the situation Sergeant?" You ask. + + +He turns and almost goes for his sword as he doesn't recognize you but he says, "Mercenary?" + + +You nod and he grunts, "Figured you all had fled by now, hell if this wasn't my home I'd have fled long ago. Suppose I'll be dying within these old walls soon enough." + + +A crossbow bolt smacking against the wall brings him back to the fight. "Well, we're trying to reach a defensive position North of here but the bloody Turrics got us cut off. Out of a platoon sized element, only we remain and we're cut off from Main Group. If you can fire a crossbow, your help would be welcome. Hell, even if you can't you can at least take potshots at the bastards." + + +You nod taking up the Arbalest, a crossbow you are very skilled with and load the bolt. "Where are they located?" You ask. + + +He darws a quick picture in the dirt with a bolt and says, "We're here, their behind that berm over there. I'm pretty sure there's a sniper a little to the west. Bad thing is, though we can't see him, he can sure as hell see us and he's a crack shot. Took out Ivey with one clean shot, got Spiner just over there." He points to a Essitrean corpse about fifteen feet away, a bolt planted in his back. + + +Those idiots behind the berm are lousy but they've got us pinned with suppressive fire, can't raise my head without fear of taking bolts, the sniper though, he's the real challenge. We take him out and we can flank. Without him dead, we're stuck in a stalemate." + + +Add ARBALEST (Crossbow) to your Inventory. + + +You think over the options: + + + +> "Charge the Berm, they can't kill us all!" +You charge the berm and watch as two of your men fall from the crossbows of the opposing soldiers. You are next to fall with a sniper bolt in your neck. As you watch the rest of the men fall you curse your stupidity and choke as blood fills your windpipe and you slowly choke to death facedown in a growing pool of blood. + + +YOU HAVE FAILED!!!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You grab your blade tightly and look around quickly before dashing over the lip of the crater and towards the blasted wall nearest your left side. Nearby an explosion spurts up chunks of earth and stone as well as the arm of a corpse, high into the air. You watch in horror as the appendage plops onto the sidewalk. + + +From your left, three Turric warriors rush and assault an injured merchant, stabbing him repeatedly with their wickedly barbed scimitars before looting the man's corpse. + + +To your right you see another building about twenty feet across some exposed ground. + + +Do you: +> Wait for the Men to Move On? +The merchant is already dead so why waste your life fighting for him? Also running away will probably attract their attention so you hide and wait for the men to pass. After about three minutes, you see the men move on, one brags about the men he's killed as they turn a corner. As you are just about to leave, another five Turric soldiers appear from around the corner. + + +You are glad you didn't charge the first three or you might have been fighting eight men by now. You've got the drop on the five men but it seems like it could be really risky. You can also try to sneak away or continue to wait. You take a small breath and exhale as you make your next decision. + + +You creep towards the edge of the wall ready to make your move.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You get up to the morning breeze blowing through the window. The start of summer is upon the villiage of Aravon. You, unlike most people of the village, have a dragon. Redscale has been in your care for several years now. You came upon him as hatchling when he was being attacked by a wild boar. Your long bow you had killed the giant boar in a single shot. You were ready for the dragon when you realized that he was no more than a baby. You took him to your house. That was a wise choice. You no longer have to worry of robbery. You two been best of friends since that faithful day. + +Dragons in this land are common. They vary in size depending their age. Not many hang around humans because of their past war with dragons. The two races had disagreements that when one king went too far war was declared by dragons. It ruined may kingdoms and the caves of dragons. Until the war exhausted both of them they settled on leaving each other alone. Though some humans found ways to work with them. Together they built houses, discovered new medicine, and worked to get a better understanding of the world. + +Normally he'd be outside hunting around the time you get up. So you go outside to see the flowers bloom and a humid smell in the air. Clouds were in the sky. It might start to rain. Better get a coat just in case, you think. You live a hundred meters from Aravon. Near the edge of a great forest known as Valkar Forest. You get a coat and head out. + +You get an axe. You go to start chop some wood for a fire when a blinding flash of light beams up in front of you. A snarling wolf demon appears and stares at you. Demons have appeared when the dragon war was ended by the humans that wanted power. Though the Royal Court of Varon put an end to it. Or most of it. All you have to defend yourself is a axe for cutting wood. You have your bow and sword inside. Still you prepare for battle. "Don't bother to fight me Human." it sneers at you. "You think you can kill me with an axe. I wouldn't try." + +You stare at the beast, focused and concentrated. You were taught to stay calm at all times. "What do you want demon?" + +"To talk to you about your pet dragon." It replies. "We caught him." You stand there. How could they catch him? Who would want to mess with you two? " Where is he? "I'll find him and kill whoever did this." you say. + +" Go to Igor's tower and you'll find whom you seek." He disappears in flames leaving you there to think how this could've happened. And why would they just tell you that they took Redscale? It doesn't make sense. You don't have enough time to think about the situation you're in. You'll have to resolve it and fast. + + +> Get Supplies +You return to your house to prepare for your journey. Whoever did this has to be very powerful to stop a big dragon like Redscale. You grab your weapons: a sword and longbow. You grab a bag full of coins differing in value. You make a list for what you need: a horse, food, and quiver of arrows. You look around for anything else you may need. You see nothing and start to move toward Aravon. + + You arrive to see several single storied. You head to the local butcher. He was a rather large man. He goes by the name of Scar. Noone in the village ever found out why he calls himself that. He was skinning a whitetail deer when you entered his house. "Need something?." Scar asked.You sigh. "I need some meat. Why else would I come here?" He gets up and looks at you. "Come" was all he said. He says nothing to you as you buy the meat you need for your trip. + + +You head to the blacksmith who is known to have quivers of arrows. You enter his workshop to a smell of smoke. You never hunted for any animal because Redscale would hunt for you two, so you never really had any need for arrows. You see the blacksmith hammering a cherry red sword that had to be recently made. You say,"Sir, I have come in need of some arrows." He continues to hammer until its shape is correct. He puts it into a barrel of water and looks at you. "Sure, you need some for a trip. I'll get you a quiver of usable arrows." He returns with your quiver and you pay. "Thanks." is all you say is before you leave. + + +You head toward the local stable that sells horses. You are looking for a palfrey or known as a riding horse. You see a chocolate colored horse that looks as it was never used. You walk to the stable keeper. "I want that one." You point at the palfrey. "Well Mister, its one of my finer ones. You have 100 gold pounds with you?" He asked. You sigh. Why is every stable keeper here a rip off, you think. You reluctently give him the amount. You leave with your new companion. You give him the name Amin, the Honest horse. + + +You ride Amin to your house. You know Redscale went to Valkor Forest to hunt, so that is the direction you are heading in. +> Head for Valkor Forest +You are in the forest. Animals scurry around you. A bridge is about 50 yards before you are stopped by two warriors. They come in front of you. The wierd thing is no battle horses. They bear the symbol of Varon: the king's knights. "Halt." one of them says. You bring Amin to a stop. He snorts nervously. + +"Why are you in the forest, young one?" he asked. + +"I am but a simple peasant." you reply. + +"Somehow I doubt that," The other one says, " you would not have weapons like that." + +"Gotta protect myself." you say cautiously. You have uneasy feeling about these two. You look at the armor. You look at all the details and see nothing, but you see a sword mark by the heart. You now know what happened. These two must have ambushed a pair of battle-weary knights. By the look of the aromor they tried to fix it, but could not repair the heart wound. "You two aren't knights! You're bandits!!!" you yell. + +"Your smarter than you look. The master misread your intelligence. Though we're not bandits, We'Re DeMoNs." + +No more words are to be exchanged. These two are of the same demon that told you that Redscale was gone. These wolf demons must be killed. You can use your blade or take them out with your bow +> Use Sword +You shoot your blade out of its scabbard with lightning fast reflexes. You were star pupil of world reknowned swordmaster Quon. As they pounced you slashed one deeply into the shoulder. It dropped to the ground howling in pain while holding his shoulder. + +The other one leaped on top of you and knocking you to the ground. You drop your sword and it slides away from your reach. Damn. you think as you hit the ground. You see a claw come at you to cut you. You grab the arm as its in mid swing and use your leg to kick him. That stuns him for a second and goes to grab your fallen sword. You get up to your knees to see him try to cut your head off. You duck and give him a leg sweep to try get him down. It works. He drops the sword and holds the back of his leg. You get up and pick up your sword. You limp over and look down in disgust. "You should've left me alone. Your action will cost you your life." You raise your sword and cut his head off. He's done. You walk over to the wounded one and say, "Whoever is your master is as good as dead. I'll spare you to tell him that he better realease Redscale or he's doomed." You remount Amin and go across the bridge. + +You know that there's two villages on two crossroads. You come up to one, but the road to Seri is blocked by collapsed trees. Looks like Xias is the only one. + + +> Xias +Xias is little less than a city. You head on the crossroad leading toward it. People are running around you trying to go somewhere or get something. You get people to look at you. They step back from you. They're afraid of me, you think as Amin walks across a busy street. You make your way to the local inn for any rumors that may help. + + The innkeeper is a rather bulky figure. Stories are told of how he trained in the military. He goes by the name of Io. He asks you if you wanted some coffee. Io asked,"What makes you visit these parts stranger? Not as many folks come in here as the used to." + +"I'm looking for a certain wizard who has captured a close friend of mine." you reply. You don't want to get too detailed. You hear the front door open to see a person come in with a cloak. The person heads to a croner and sits down. You're curious on who it is. + +Your curiosity was shattered by another person at the door come in. This was an angry group of men wielding swords and other kinds of weapons. A tall man, you presume to be their leader, steps up and shouts, "Where is SHE! There you are you wrench!!" They head over to the cloaked figure in the corner. You see them pull the hood down. A female sat there. Knowing that, you stand up and draw your own sword. "You should leave her alone if I were you." you tell him. The leader turns and whispers to two of his men. They come at you with a axe and club. + +You let them attack you first. The axeman swings the axe at your head. You duck and bring an uppercut to his chin that sends him staggering to the group. The man with the club tries to hit you in the head. It connects and sends you flying to the ground dazed and confused. Looks like I failed my quest. Forgive me Redscale, you think. For a moment there you think you felt a far sense of disappointment from somewhere. Then the woman leaps at the others with a concealed dagger. Within a few seconds, half the men that entered were on the ground, dead or wounded. The man raises the club for the final blow when a dagger thrusts through his heart. You see the woman standing over you, her hand reaching out at you. + +You grab it and she pulls you to your feet. When you got up you got a better look at her. Brown hair that flowed down her back. Blue eyes that shone with a life energy that you"ve never seen before in someone. She looks over your shoulder and her eyes widen. "Come" is all she says. She dashes up the stairs of the inn and disappears. You head up the stairs to see her in a room motioning for you to come in. you go in and she says, "Help me." She's trying to barricade the door with the bed. You go over and out the corner of your eye you see a chair. "Let's jam the chair in the doorknob." you yell. + +She grabs the chair and jams it under the doorknob. Pounding on the door starts and you know men are trying to break in. Fear is swelling inside your body. "OPEN THIS DOOR!!!" someone outside the door yells. You start to get angry and your fear is gone. + +"Like that's gonna happen," you yell back. The pounding is harder now. "Explain later. What now?" you say to your supposed ally. She gives you a grin that makes chills go down you back. + +"We jump." she responds. + +"Where?" you ask. She points at a window behind you. Oh boy, you think. +> Jump +You open the window to see a cart of hay below. "Well." you hear her voice behind you. Better to jump than fight in my condition. Well, here I go, you say to yourself. You jump and land in the cart of hay below. You see her jump in to the cart nearly before you got out. "What now?" She looks at you in a funny way. + +"We go to the stable." She responds. We get to the stable to see Amin and another horse. It was a dark black. She mounts the horse. "Do you have a horse?" She asks. You nod and point at Amin who snorts. "Nice. Let's go." You mount Amin and we head toward the gate. + +You see some men with bows at the gate wall with bows pointed at your companion and you. judging by the distance you estimate a hundred yards. An arrow shoots by your head. Apparently these archers are expert shooters. + +"Don't shoot." She says. You look at her in worry. + +"Why?" you ask. + +"I have some help of my own." she says. "Look to your right." You turn your head to the right to see ten archers with crossbows. They aim and fire to take out all of the archers. She turns to them and nods. You two bolt through the gate and head towards Valkor Forest. +> Finally Meet +You ride with her for hours until you make it back to Aravon. You head into your house and collapse on your bed. She enters and sits on a chair near your fire place. "This is where you live? she asks and you nod. + +"I'll put the horses in the stable." you say. You never use it and thought back then how it might come in handy. You take the black horse and Amin to the stables. You fetch water from a small stream out back. You get some oats and feed them and head back in. + +You return to the cabin and see your friend asleep. You go to your bed and doze off. You have a dream: You see yourself in front of two shadow figures. "How could you fail on killing the boy. I've trained him and saw potential. But he's not good enough to slay a demon and wound one." a loud voice roars. To you it seems really familiar, though you can't seem to recall who's voice it is. + +A low one who's clearly afraid says, "But Master... he's far more powerful than you envisioned. His dragon has made him far too powerful than your magic can predict." + +All you can see is black, but the voices remain very clear. "My magic not strong enough. That is a lie!!! He may be more powerful, but I'm not stupid enough to not believe it." You hear a low rumble. You know its Redscale rumbling a warning. You are all too familiar with it. + +"He will save me and when he does. I'll personally tear you limb from limb. Zaron, I know you're your here. Don't give up! Use the power that I saw in you the day we met!" Tears started to flow down your cheeks. + +"The boy is here!?! Fine. You listen up Zaron. I will have my revenge. Just you wait..." the voice fades in to darkness. + + + + +> Continue +You wake up to your friend shaking you. Tears were really flowing down your cheeks. So it wasn't a dream, you say to yourself. "We need to talk." you say to her. + +"Fine. But I start. My name is Kai. I come from a wealthy family in the royal court of Varon. They were selfish. My OWN family! They sent me off to marry some Lord Warren I didn't even know. I reluctently agreed to the marrige. As my escort and I neared to his lands we were taken by suprise by some large group of bandits. My escort was killed and I ran to Xias. Some of the bandits followed me and I bought the cloak you first saw me in from a farmer. I went to the inn you were in. As they entered I prayed someone may help me. When you stood up I thought you were leaving, but you helped me and almost died from it. For that I'm in your debt." Kai finished. + +You nod. "I'm surprised I'm in the presence of royalty. I'd escort you, but I have a mission that demands my immediate attention." + +"What mission?" she asked. + +"You wouldn't believe me anyway." + +I've seen some crazy stuff." You give her a sarcastic look. "I'm not lying. Tell me of your mission that demands your attention." + +"I'm not trying to get into deatils, but someone was taken from me." + +"You're trying to save someone?" + +"Yeah." + +"Who?" You sigh and go to the window to look at the sky. You look at her with a deep sadness. + +"My dragon." + +That got her attention. She didn't say a thing so you continue, "Two days ago Redscale; that's his name, went out hunting and never came back." + +She finally was able to speak,"How do know he didn't just leave." + +For once since he was taken you laughed. It didn't last long, but it felt good. You look at her. "Because we were too close to leave each other without telling one another. Anyway, before I went out to chop wood a flash of light appeared. A wolf demon appeared to give me the news. Then I went to the village for supplies. I headed for Valkor Forest and took the path to Xias for any rumors. Before I got info you came along with those thugs. And I'm Zaron, son of Aron." you finish. + +"That's sad. Well I made my decision. I am coming with you." +> Continue with Kai +"I accept your help Kai." you say with gratitude. "We need to make a stop at Aravon. You know how to use a sword and shield?" She nodded. "We need a sword for you and two shields. Let's go." + +You head out to the stable and mount Amin. She mounts her horse. You ask, "What's its name?" + +"Shadow." She said. We went in the direction of Aravon. + +We go to the blacksmith. He greets you two and asks what you want. " Two shields and a sword." He comes back with a shield with a red dragon on it and a steel one with the symbol of Varon: an eagle. He asks Kai if she could use it. She grabs it and waits. "This I made for you personally if the day came. This battle-ready Red Dragon shield is made of 16 gauge thick steel which will protect you from poundings on any battle field. Its yours without cost. And this is for you girl." He uncovers a steel sword on a table and gives it to her. He goes back to work and you leave with your new gear. + + +We put our gear on and headed torward a mountain rumored to have Igor's Tower. You both didn't talk because you know you two may die. You make it to a pass up the mountain when you hear you a noise in the bush. You snap you head in that direction and saw more movement. A lesson from Quon to observe everything. Kai was already doing that when the attack came, but you were ready. + +Groups of demons varying from animals of all kinds. A bear demon swipes you off Amin and to the ground. You cut at its leg and it goes down. Before you could finish it two more of them were on you. You see Kai kill any demon that came at her with expert cuts. She kills every demon that crossed her path. Something fired inside you that made each swing of your blade and land an instant kill. The first was a bird-demon from the air aiming to pick you up and drop you. A tiger came and clawed at you. You blocked with your shield and cut it apart. They begin to retreat. You can follow them to there hideout or cheak the area for any clues. + + +> Check for clues +You go to see if Kai is okay. "You hurt?" She shakes her head. "Yell if anything happens." + +"What are you doing?' she asks panting. + +"To search for any clues on how those demons got here." + +You leave her while she tends to the horses. You look around to see a large set of footprints. You notice at least twenty humans have been here recently. You look around to see not only humans, but some demon footprints. Satisfied here you look in the direction opposite of which you looked at. + +You go in the opposite direction to see a village there. North of there stood a large sructure you can't identify. "Looks like a prison to me, but who's it for?" you say to yourself. With the information you have it looks like that's your next destination. + +You head to Kai and all you say is "Mount up. We can't leave those demons. We must find out who summoned them." + +She smiles. "Let's get to it partner." + + + +> Head deeper into the mountain +You remount your horse. Kai and you follow them. Whatever they're up to you need to know. You track them using the footprints and some blood they left. You have your sword laying in your hand for immediate use. Whoever is here has got to be powerful to summon these demons. + +You eventually come to a cave. Kai said, "We have to go in there." + +"I never thought of that. Thanks." + +"Don't have to be a jerk." + +"I know. So we go in carefully or charge?" + + + + +> Approach carefully + +"Wait here." you tell Kai. You go in with your shield up enough to protect you but not enough to block your line of sight. A turn is up ahead with a small reflection of light coming from it. + +You motion for her to come in. "There is a light behind the corner. I'll go see what's in there. Stay close enough that if I need help. You'll be here. Don't move! Be ready for a fight. I sense a great evil in there." + +You go in there to see an old man who's maybe seventy years old. He turns towards you and smiles. "I've been waiting for you." + +"Who are you?" + +"I'm known by many names. But you may call me Tora." + +"Were those your demons?" + +"Yes. The has master taught me very well." + +"Master? Who is he?" + +"Telling you would be too easy. You'll find out soon enough. After we bring you down." + +Demons from a secret path. One was a black dragon, bigger than Redscale. "Kai!!!" you shout. + +"You have a partner. His reading said you'd be alone." Tora screams. + +Kai comes by your side. "No way. I may never have joined you if I knew this would happen." + +"Shall we?" + +"We shall." + +You both leap into action. You cut down any demon that enters your blade's range. Kai also was doing great until all that remained was the black dragon. + +You can't move. Why can't I move, you ask yourself. The feeling is preventing you from moving. the black dragon swipes at you. Kai intervenes by blocking the claw with her shield. "Snap out of it Zaron!! This isn't a dragon. Its a dragon demon!" + + You aren't able to keep its tail from smacking her across the room. She hits the wall and falls to the floor motionless. That angers you to see it do that. Whatever pity you have for it is gone now. It goes in the direction of Kai to finish the job. You run in its path and yell, "You want her? You'll have to go through me first!" + +You hear a deep rumble in its throat, like a laugh. To your amazement it can talk. "Go through you first? You can't kill me boy! For I'm no demon, for I'm the KING of all dragons. I'm called Calivir." + +"Some king you are. You'll let one of your kind be taken captive? You have no right to be called king!" + +" NO RIGHT!?!" Calivir roars. + +"You heard me." + +"You don't understand. He's my son. I couldn't convince him to leave you, so I helped capture him." + +"You may be his father, but he's my brother." + +"You have no right to say that. Your a human and not a dragon." + +You shake your head. "We look out for one another, we argue with each other, we will risk everything to save each other, and the most important thing: we love each other. I don't need to be a dragon to call him my brother. I know he feels the same way. I feel it. So I have every right to call him my brother." + +"Be as that may. I have no choice but to kill you." You look him in the eye and see something that shocks you. They have pain and a deep sadness in them. No.... something isn't right, you think. No one should ever have that look. You try one more time to reason with him. "You have pain." + +"Alas I do. I have to kill my son's brother." + +"You have pain that whoever has Redscale may kill him." + +"You obviously know how to read a dragon from Redscale. If you defeat me I'll reveal his location to you. If not, you die." + + "Very well." + +You get into a battle stance and Calivir sighs. He wips a claw and it glides across your shield. You cut a swipe at his leg and he flaps his wings to go airborne. He shoots a jet of flame at you. You lift your shield, unsure if it will protect you. It does however hold against the array of flames. You see him land and use his tail to whip at you. You are sent flying into a wall. Can't lose consciousness. You fight the urge to pass out. Calivir walks in your direction and shoots a claw at your chest. It rips your shirt off, but otherwise your uninjured. You grasp your sword for a final strke and cut a deep gash in his chest. Blue blood gushes out and he falls on his side. You fall to your knees after the battle. Kai and Calivir are in your sight. It gets blurry and blurrier by the second. You think you'll die before you pass out. A dream appears to you: All blackness surrounds you except for a faint red glow. It grows bigger until you see Redscale. + +"Redscale...." + +"Rise brother." He says. You hear passion in his voice. + +"I can't... pain ...too great." + +"You must. You must not leave us. The pain is not enough to keep you down. RISE BROTHER!!!" + + +A great power awakens in you. The pain disappears and you rise from the dead. " I'm up." + +"Run toward the light Zaron. Run towards it and arise from your grave." He fades away and you feel tears come up. You hold them in and look around to see a light above you. "I'm not done. Not by a long shot." + +You wake to see Calivir gone and Kai in a corner with a fire. "I must have been hit by a rockslide." + +She hears your voice and jumps up. "Your alive! But your pulse was gone." + +"I was dead, but a friend showed me the light." + +"Well Tora was easy to kill. I burned his remains and disposed off them. Calivir told me Redscale was in a prison in a village called Osco. I was gonna bury you, but you got up. How did you defeat Death?" + +"With purpose and Redscale. Let's go get him." + +With your spirits refilled you head to the Osco. You will rescue him. You've got to, for it's destiny! +> Go to the Prison +You have no idea of Redscale's and your death sentence. You go to the large building you saw when searching for clues. Kai and you dismount your horses and sneak up a hundred meters from the prison. "We'll camp here for the night." You start to set up camp for the night. You have another dream of Redscale: + +You are on the ground you first saw Redscale. You see the boar with that very same arrow you killed it with. You look down to see your sword isn't there. It was here the day you met Redscale. You hear a rustle in the bush to your right. You head in the direction to see Redscale in a river that wasn't there when you were last here. " + +"Redscale." + +He snaps his head in your direction. His eyes flash with an acknowledgement of your presence. " So your here." + +"I am." + +"Are you near the prison?" + +"I'm camped outside with my new ally Kai." + +"Never seem to go alone." + +"So it seems." + +"I'll be killed at midnight tommorow, then you will be hunted down too." + +"Don't worry old friend. You can count on us." + +"What will we do when we get out of here?" + +"Go after this so called master." + +"Then do me a favor." + +"What?" + +He comes out of the water. He walks up to you and puts his snout on your face. "Wake up...wake up...wake up..." his voice says to you becoming fainter and fainter. + +You open your eyes to see your blade in hand. Its changed in appearance: The blade itself was a deep shade of red and the hilt is the same except for a saphire on the end. You smile and know this will work out. + + +> Go into the Prison +You wake Kai. "What..." she asks half asleep. Her eyes are barely open. She falls into another sleep and you shake her. That makes her angry. + +"WHAT!" she yells. + +"We're going in there now." you reply. + +"Now? There's still hours till daylight." + +"We need to go in there now. Redscale has been sending me dreams on how he's doing. We go in now because by midnight tommorow, he'll be dead. Why are we going now after a big fight? Night gives us the concealment of darkness. We only have one chance, so I will go in with or without you. Redscale's my world, so I'll go in and I'll die trying to save him." you say with affection. + +"If we go now, we have time. Okay, let's go." + +You sneak up to the prison wall and scan the area. You don't see anyway in, but after further looking you see a house. "That house might be our way in." you whisper. You head in the direction with Kai following close behind. You head toward the door and quietly open it. A guard is in ther asleep guarding a door next to him. You close it and whisper,"There's a guard in there. Go in and take him down quietly. Then sneak around and get info. Don't make noise and run in the sign of danger. I'm coming with you in the house, but will seperate with you and find Redscale." She has no worry in her eyes, you can see determination. + +Kai heads in with blade drawn and cuts his throat. He falls and you drag his body outside to a big bush you see growing on the bottom wall.You head back in to see Kai waiting for you. You nod and go through the door. You go down a long passage underground and see a latter uphead of you. "I'll go first." + + + +You head up the latter to see a lit hallway that has two directions. You lift yourself up and whisper,"Clear." Kai clinbs up and is next to you in a second. "Don't make any unneeded noise. I'm going left. You take right." + +"Zaron." + +"Yeah." + +"Better live." + +She quietly dashes down the hall and takes a left turn. You walk in the other direction. You left your bow on Amin because most combat will be close up. You head down to two hallways leading in two differrent directions. One heads downstairs and the other up. +> Right (Down) +Redscale may be downstairs so you decide to go down. Sword drawn you head down to see doors. All along the hallway. + + + + +> Dungeon +You see doors going all along the hall. The biggest is the one at the far end. You approach it with deep caution and peer through a window to it. + +You see Redscale there lying on the stony floor. You see keys on a table. A chair was there but no guard. You head to the door to put the key in the keyhole. You head in. + +"I warned you whoever would come in would die." + +"What did I do?" you say playfully. + +"Zaron!" + +"Let's go find Kai." + +You her a scream from upstairs. Its no male. Then the saddening thought came to you. " Go outside. I'll go get Kai." Redscale let loose a ripple of flame at the ceiling and flew outside the castle. +> Scream +You run up the stairs and see some man holding Kai by the arm. "So you found your dragon, but that was not my true intention. Getting the princess was." That voice was very familiar. Then it came to you. + +"It's been along time Quon." + +"You remember me. How sweet." + +"Let her go." + +"I'd like to see you make me." + +"Okay." You swing your sword at his head and he ducks letting go of Kai. She grabs her fallen blade and goes on the offense. Swing after swing she goes at Quon with. He blocks or dodges every blow she tries. You go at him with your blade and he cuts your thigh. You fall holding it. Then he swings and nails the hilt of his blade into Kai's temple. She collapses to the ground. "You've failed Zaron. Your quest was successful, but your mission was in vain." A black shape came from above. It was Calivir. The blood surrounding you makes your vision blurry and you black out. + +You wake up to see Redscale hovering over you. "You have waken. Where is your friend?" + +You look at your leg. It has clotted up and stopped bleeding. "I'm such a fool. Why has that thought not occurred to me?" + +"Not everyone can predict what will happen." + +He comes over and breathes on your leg. It starts to heal to a scar and finally to nothing. That get's you shocked. + +"When did you learn to do that?" + +"People don't know everything about dragons. Many known facts on dragons are complete lies." + +You look at the sky. "Where do we go from here?" + +"We go back to Aravon or go for the rescue." + + + + +> Go home +"Let's go home." There was a faint disappointment in him. He did not argue. You go to Aravon on Amin and sold Shadow to a trader. You two live happily until you die of old age. Redscale then goes to live with his own kind. You often dreamed of what could have been. + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You run up the stairs and see some man holding Kai by the arm. "So you found your dragon, but that was not my true intention. Getting the princess was." That voice was very familiar. Then it came to you. + +"It's been along time Quon." + +"You remember me. How sweet." + +"Let her go." + +"I'd like to see you make me." + +"Okay." You swing your sword at his head and he ducks letting go of Kai. She grabs her fallen blade and goes on the offense. Swing after swing she goes at Quon with. He blocks or dodges every blow she tries. You go at him with your blade and he cuts your thigh. You fall holding it. Then he swings and nails the hilt of his blade into Kai's temple. She collapses to the ground. "You've failed Zaron. Your quest was successful, but your mission was in vain." A black shape came from above. It was Calivir. The blood surrounding you makes your vision blurry and you black out. + +You wake up to see Redscale hovering over you. "You have waken. Where is your friend?" + +You look at your leg. It has clotted up and stopped bleeding. "I'm such a fool. Why has that thought not occurred to me?" + +"Not everyone can predict what will happen." + +He comes over and breathes on your leg. It starts to heal to a scar and finally to nothing. That get's you shocked. + +"When did you learn to do that?" + +"People don't know everything about dragons. Many known facts on dragons are complete lies." + +You look at the sky. "Where do we go from here?" + +"We go back to Aravon or go for the rescue." + + + + +> Rescue Kai +"She helped me rescue you, so it's time to return the favor." + +You get on Redscale's back. It felt prickly under you. You hold on to a spike that bunches ran down his back. "Run toward the horses." He flaps his giant wings and is up several thousand feet in a matter of minutes. You aren't afraid because you became used to it from a very young age. He heads in the direction your horses are. They were grazing and drinking from a stream. They scuttle away from Redscale as he lands. " So I fly above and scout the area." + +"Tomorrow. We are gonna need rest and night is almost upon us. Plus we are gonna need to talk." + +He gets into a comfortable resting position. "Okay. What's on your mind?" + +"Does the name Calivir sound familiar." + +"Yes, that's my father's name." + +"He's working with Quon." + +"That's impossible!" + +"I saw him!" + +"What color are his scales?" + +"Black." + +He looks down. "Only someone can remember a dragon's scale color once if he's seen it." + +"So you believe me?" + +"Yes." You two rest for the night. You know where to look first: Quon's old training grounds. +> Quon's Old Training Place +You woke early in the morning to see Redscale looking at the sunrise. "Beautiful. Isn't it?" + + +You look to see swirling colors of yellow, orange and a light red color of the rising sun. "Might be the most beautiful sunrise I've ever seen." + +"Where we going today?" + +"Quon's training grounds." + +"We're rescuing the girl?" + +"Yes. Either we'll save her or die trying." + +"Why are we going there?" + +"Its the only lead we've got. Do you know where Igor's Tower is?" + +"No..." + +"Then that's where we check first. Fly above and keep watch for any guards, students, or demons of his." + +"What of father." + +"I couldn't beat him, but if you see Calivir you land at once! We need each other to finish this once and for all!!" + +"Understood." He takes off and soars above to keep watch over the land. + +You arrive there in two days ride on your horses. It was once a plush place filled with flowers and life of all kinds. Now the place was a dead forest. No plants grew there and as your eyes could see there's no animal life. Redscale lands next to you. There stood the castle of Quon. Once a mighty place was now a former look of its former appearance. A destroyed castle. "Let's go." + +You ride to the former castle. You look around for any sign of Quon. No luck. Redscale sniffs the air around here. "They were hear alright. Maybe four hours at best." + +"Good going. Any sign of Kai?" + +"She's here." + +"Now?" + +"Yes." + +"Anyone else?" + +He had a sad face. "Father's here too. Demons of all kinds too." + +"We're going in. I know how hard it is to fight someone you love. I felt like Quon is my father, but now I lost that love. I feel as if something is not right in there." You walk in on Redscale's back. You see demons, but all they do is sneer and jeer at you. "They don't stop us. Why?" + +"They want us to see what's in here. Let's go to the throne room." Redscale responds. + +We go to the court room and there you beheld a sight you may never forget. Kai and Calivir was there. + +"About time you got here. I see you rescued Redscale." Calivir sighs. + +"What's the meaning of this father?" + +"I work with Quon." + +"WHY!!!" Redscale roars. + +"To save you from this human who calls you his "brother"." Calivir says calmly. Kai comes at you blade drawn. You get off his back with your sword drawn. + +"She's being controlled." + +Redscale looks at me then snaps his head back. "I'll never forgive you!" + +"I'm trying to save YOU!" he shouts angrily shaking the room. + +"I'm not asking to be saved. I DO think of him as my brother. We know how the other feels and thinks. We came for the girl. Give her to us." + +"I'm afraid I can't do that." + +"Why?" + +"She is under Quon's control. The only known way to break it is death." + +"Zaron, take on Kai. I'll deal with Calivir." That's the first time you heard him say him by name. + +"Kai, I'll make sure you won't die. Redscale, take on Calivir." + + "Got it." His let's an inferno of flame at Calivir. The fight is on. +> Two Allies Fight +Forgive me Kai. I'll break this spell without killing you, you think as you go in. She cuts and hacks at you without stopping . Each cut is blocked though you must get on the offense. But how, you say to yourself deflecting a thrust. You could block or go on the offensive on your next move, but what would be the consquenses. + + + +> Offensive +You go on the offensive. You can't stay on defensive forever, so after her last blow you attack. Blow after blow you drive her back. Redscale battles his father and by the looks of it is winning. You let your guard down for a moment to get a cut in the arm. Damn, you say to yourself. You then recall leaving your shield with Amin. you block another one and respond with an overhand cut. She deflects it. You see an opening and leap on her . Both of you hit the ground with a THUD. Both of your swords slid on the ground beyond reach. She keeps on hitting you and you refuse to fight. + +"Fight me." she says punching you in the face. + +"N-n-n-no..." you say as you fall to your side. + +"WHY?!?" she screams. + +"Your my f-f-friend..." + +"Even friends fight." + +You stand up to see her in a fighting stance. "Not like this... friends fight... but not like this." + +"JUST FIGHT ME!" + +You shook your head. "Kai, are you happy? Do your parents condone this. Strike me down. If it makes you happy, then I'm happy." You smile. + + + +Something is different now. An opening has been made. You take a chance and throw her on the ground. You reach for your blade with her coming at you. You trip her and keep her grounded by your knees pinning her to it. I hope this works. You grab the hilt and put the jewel to her forehead. +> Break the spell +The sword and jewel light up. She stops struggling and looks at you. "Why am I on the ground?" she asks. You lift her up and don't answer. All you do is hug her. + +"I'm glad you're back." + +"Where was I?" + +"Gone. But I found you again." She hugs you back and you feel that she's smiling. You know you will win this fight now. + +You turn to see Redscale losing the fight. Claws and fangs were attacking him from each side. You turn to Kai. "Let's help him." + +"Come on." And you charge together. + + + +> Battle Calivir +You get in between the recovering Redscale and the towering Calivir. "This ends here." Calivir merely laughs. He swings a claw at you and you roll out of its path. Redscale trys to stand but falls down. + +"You are no match for me. You know of my kingship." You don't answer and aim for one of his legs. He flaps his wings and goes airborne. Kai goes and tends to Redscale. Calivir looks at her and aims a jet of fire at her. Redscale attempts to rise his head to shoot fire back but his head falls back down. "KAI!" you yell. Your sword all of a sudden blazes up with fire along the blade. You don't stare at it for long and aim it at the fire shooting at your friends. It goes and the fires collide. You move in the direction that Calivir's fire is. You align yourself with Calivir and wait. + +"So you learn some new tricks. Big deal." He looks at you. "You're more powerful, but it won't save you," Redscale recovers and is behind you within a second. Kai follows shortly. + +"You're right. It won't. But I've got friends to help me. We become strong if we're willing to save each other in our darkest moments. I now realize it. But we will finish it now." You smile at them. Kai returns it but Redscale doesn't. He looks at you. + +Can you hear me. That's Redscale's voice in your head. + +Redscale, you think. + +Yes. You can hear my thoughts and I yours. You have awakened your true power. Now let's use it. + +How? you ask. + +By protecting those you care for. + +I must protect them. This isn't our battle anymore: it will determine the fate of Varon. We must win! + +You focus all your energy to fighting Calivir. Your attacks become lightning fast. Calivir has no time to block them and soon falls from the small wounds you gave him. Not enough to kill but make him unable to fight. + +"So this is how it ends, huh." + +"Redscale, you decide your father's fate." Redscale comes over and you see his wounds were all gone. + +"I've decided to spare you. Though if you intervene again I'll have no choice but to end you." + +"Why?" + +"You are my father, but tell me why you joined Quon." + +Calivir has the pain in his eyes like in the cave. "I was a fool. He promised me I'd win my son's heart over Zaron. I bought into his lies and lost what I wanted most; your love." + +"I always have loved you." + +"Then why did you never visit me? I'd lost hope and my heart became bitter. I'd lost the wisdom that dragons poccess. All to that I'd thought you've forgot me, but my guess is you never had." + +"Dragons never forget their relatives." + + + +"Well since I'm not making it back you have a job." Redscale looked confused. "Since I'm no longer able to be King of Dragons it is now your job. Rule over us with pride son. And may I speak with you Zaron." You walk up to him and kneel by his head. "Forgive me for my blindness. I never saw what Redscale meant until now. Take care of Redscale. For... without him... you'll find out life is... hardly work living... at all." + +Redscale comes over and says to Kai and you, "He may not have been perfect but nor is anyone else. He was a confused and saddened dragon. But in the end he was a hero. As the new king I must go announce my father's death and claim my right as king. Are you two coming?" + +"I am." you announce. + +He looks at Kai. She sighs and says, "I'm coming. Though know now that I am the princess of Varon and the dragons have never been fond of us. Since the war five hundred years ago we've managed to get along, though never really made up for it." + +Redscale says, "I forgive your people for your past deeds. What happened then can be fixed by YOU. Zaron and Kai; you are now official representatives of the human race. Do you accept?" + +You answer for you two, "We do. But what of our horses?" + +"You must sell them. Grab your shields and some food." + +You nod and grab the shields and food. You then sell your horses to a traveling trader and go to the dragon's cave. +> Go to the Dragon's Cave +With Calivir left in the castle you head out. Redscale gets down on his chest and you climb to grab a spike on his back to hold on to. You help Kai up and put her in front of you. "Grab a spike and hold on." + +Redscale gets up and asks, "Are you ready back there." + +We are. You decide to answer through this new telepathic communication you two share. He goes up and you head in the direction of his clan's cave. + +After a few hours riding on his back a new mountain range comes into view. You and Kai look down to see wildlife of all kind. Flashes of animals you see are wolves, deer, moose, birds and fish. Plants can be seen as far as the eye can see. Do you like it? Redscale asked. + +Its great. It looks as if no human has been here forever, you respond. + +No human ever has because of the dragons that live here, he says. + +He turns right and heads to a small cliff on one of the mountains. A big cave stood there. + +I can see a dragon living here. + +Pretty much anyone could see that. The clan would attack any human that came here without a dragon. They already saw us. So let me talk to them. Are you alright with that? + +Will they attack us, you ask. + +They may. But they usually would question a dragon. Here comes one now, he says. + +A big silver dragon comes out and stands between you and the entrance. You stand there unconcerned by this dragon. It looks at you and simply nods as if he approves of you. But when he turns to Kai there is a different reaction. It is of confusion and anger. It finally speaks, "Welcome to the Draco clan. Dragon, why are these humans here?" The voice of it is female. Comparing the size to Redscale its at least a few centuries old. + +"These are the human representatives. I'm Redscale and these are my traveling companions: my brother Zaron and Princess of Varon Kai." Redscale replies. + +"Your brother? This human." + +"Yes." + +"You're Calivir's son. Is Calivir among us anymore?" + +"Unsure. He might have passed out in our fight. He's been working with the wizard Quon." + +"Come." She heads in and you follow close behind Redscale. + + +> Follow the dragon. +You head in and for about a hundred meters you can't see a thing. Kai puts her hand on yours making sure you weren't seperated from one another. You finally see a light up ahead and are amazed by what you see. + + There was a large hole at the top of the mountain, letting the sunlight through. Grass and flowers made the ground glow like a rainbow. Looking above, you see hundreds of caves varying in size and shape. Then dragons come of the caves and look down at the passing figures. Some gave looks of surprise, others hate, and others of happiness. You were led down another passage way to a fire lit room. Three large dragons and a small one the size of Redscale sat there. One was gold, one deep blue, another was red like Redscale, and forest green. Whoever these guys were they were expecting you. + +"May I introduce the three elders of the Draco clan. The gold one is Haru, the green one Mia, the red one Scaro, and the young blue one Sea. And I'm Moon," the silver dragon says. "Is there anything else you need elders?" They shake their heads and Moon leaves. + +Haru moves in your direction. Haru looks at Redscale and nods. "You'll be a fine dragon one day." Its voice is female. Haru then sets her eyes on Kai and you. "You two are the first humans to ever set foot in our clan's caves. We knew Redscale had a human companion, but the princess of Varon is another story. We don't have any affection for your family girl." + + + +"Do you still have a grudge against us?" + +The red dragon Scaro speaks up, "May we speak of the matter of why they're here Haru? I have no affection for her either, but let's hear what young Redscale has to say." + +Redscale goes by us and says loudly, "Dragon Circle, I bring grave news of Calivir and a request." + +The green dragon Mia finally speaks, "We will grant your request if its within our power, but what of Calivir?" + +"Calivir as you all know is king of the clan. Recently, he has been working in league with the wizard Quon. He and his demons captured me and brought me to a prison in Oscro. My companions rescued me for us turning to rescue Kai. We went to Quon's former castle to see Calivir waiting for us. He brainwashed Kai into fighting Zaron there, but he managed to break his control over her. We managed to overpower Calivir and after the battle, he named me king. I have no idea if he's still alive, but we need your help. We then had no idea for the location of Igor's Tower. We have roamed far and wide for if you don't know then no one knows." He finished the tale of your quest. + +Haru looks mad at Kai and says, "We can't help." + +That gets you mad, but your teachings taught you to be calm at all times. + + +> Mad +"What do you mean you can't!" you yell. Haru was surprised by your outburst. + +"We know the location, but won't reveal it." That get's you even angrier. + +Calm down, Redscale says in your mind. + +She is just annoying. + +Let me handle handle it. + +Fine, you grumble. You start to calm down and eventually regain your senses. + + + +> Calm +"Dragon Circle", Redscale roars, "My father has named me the new clan king. So as the new king I order you to tell me the location of Igor's Tower." + +Haru sighs. "Fine. Young Sea here will take you." She motions for the young blue dragon to come over next to her. "She will take you to Igor's tower and help you end this darkness over the land. She's one of our greatest fighters and will fight to her last breath." + +You calmly wait for Redscale to respond. Finally he says, "What of my kingship?" + + +Scaro replies, "You are a young king, so we will advise you until you're old enough to make your own decisions." + +Mai says, "You must return once you finish. Return them to the Varon capital and we will announce your new rule." + +"And as for you Kai." Haru swipes a claw at her. You react and block it with your shield. You draw your sword and its blade gleams with glee. Mia and Scaro moved quickly for their age between you and her. Scaro screams, "Haru! Return to your cave at once!" + +She prowls out with anger. You bow to the dragons. They incline your bow with a nod. + +Sea speaks to you three, "Let's spend the night here." + + +> Rest. +Both dragons fly up to Sea's cave. It was like a regular cave. Everything made of stone. The two dragons retire as Kai and you head out and sit on the edge of the cliff. Kai finally says, "Why'd you come and rescue me from Quon?" + +"Well I could not leave you. Why'd you not leave yet?" + +"I don't know why." + +"This place is pretty." + +She seems sad. You can tell by this next response, "Sure. Its really pretty..." + +You now are concerned about her. What could be bothering her? "What's wrong?" + +"When this is all over I'm gonna have to marry that creep Warren. He's three times my my age." + +"Do you have a choice?" + +"Why? They arranged this years ago." + +"You have a choice." + +"What?" + +"To marry someone YOU love. Not some guy they tell you to." + +She smiles and leans close to you. "You're right." She kisses you. You're shocked yet somehow pleased. You are close together until Redscale comes out. You both don't see him until he says, "Having fun?" + + Kai pulls back almost immediately. She gives you a hug and goes in the cave. "Why'd you have to ruin the moment?" + +"For rest." + +Kai is in a corner. You look in a bag you brought and hand a blanket to her. "Time to sleep." You turn and she grabs your wrist. + +"You are sleeping by me tonight." You nod. You fall asleep in each others arms smiling. You dream of a wonderful future you will have with her. For once in your life you feel true love. + + +> Shocking News +Last night is a night you'll never forget, but that's the past. Kai and you wake up early. Not that you wanted to but of the dragons making loud noises. You grab an apple from your bag and eat it. "Let's head out," you say. + +Mia and Scaro meet you outside of Sea's cave. Scaro whispers something to Mia and flys off. "I've got grave news my friends. Scaro was flying toward Igor's Tower to see Quon's armies marchng toward Varon. Even having the second largest army in the world Varon would be wiped out. Unless..." + +Kai stepped foward with determination on her face. "Unless what?" + +"Unless the dragons weren't mobilizing to help. We've been stuck in petty hate for years and are ready to reestablish our friendship with the Varonians. Will you help us Kai?" + +Kai smiled. "I will help. And when I take my father's throne you will become honored counsel members." + +"Thank you. Now you must go warn your father and have him mobilize your army. We will come when we are ready." + +Redscale comes and asks Mia, "Have you told them of the Circle's choice?" + +"I have." + +"Then go prepare. We will go visit the king." She flys off and Redscale says to you, "We are gonna need a whole lot of luck to win this." + +Kai laughs. "Don't worry. We have a great army in store for this. We faced threats like this before." + + + +You step in. "Come on you two. We have a job to do." Sea comes from another cave further down and comes to you. + + + + + +"I'm coming to." There was not any disagreements on it and Kai gets on Sea's back while you Redscale's. You head in the direction of the Varon capital Yeli. +> To Warn a King +You fly in the direction of Yeli. Yeli is the most populated city in Varon. The first wall was in your eyesight and guards see you, yet don't stop you. You head over the city and people look up. The color drains from their faces and the run in the nearest building. The castle loomed in the distance and had a second wall protecting it. "Land in by the entrance," you tell Redscale. + +The two dragons land by the two large doors that go into the castle. Further down guards came and surrounded you in a circle. A man in the group comes foward. He studies you and Redscale. Then looks at Sea and sees Kai on her back. That shocks him. He stammers, "W-w-what are y-y-you doing on a d-dragon?" + +"Captain!" + + "Yes." + +" Fetch my father. We have a horrible situation coming our way. And hurry!" + +"Yes mistress." And goes to get the king. + +The king sends you to his chambers to talk to him. He was a large man. He wore the traditional robes of the royal family. Its color was a deep saphire and gold. He looks with interest as Kai and you enter his private study. He finally talks, "You have put me in a deep issue here. Kai... you are supposed to be at Lord Warren's palace by now. He sent message that you never came." + +"I was ambushed and fled while my escort held this large group of bandits off. This is a discussion another time. You have a larger threat in the making." + +He walks around the room pondering that thought. "I see no threat large enough to be of concern." + +You shake your head. The king sees and asks, "Who may you be?" + +You respond, "The one who saved your daughter." + + + +"Why didn't my daughter return here then?" + +"She offered to come along in my quest to save my dragon." + +"I'm afraid you can't do that." + +"It was already done." + +"I thank you for saving her, but why are you still here then?" + +"To stop my old master Quon." + +"What do you mean?" + +Kai interrupts, "He turned evil long ago. He took control of my mind and Zaron here saved me. He made an army large enough to destroy Varon. They are coming here as we speak." + +"Then there's no hope." + +You say, "There still maybe is." + +"Where?" + +"The dragons have overcome the hate of Varon and are mobilizing to help." + +"Only the king can be giving that order and Calivir would never do that." + +You can feel the pain in his voice. "Calivir is no longer among us as we know, but his son is my brother and he issued the help of the Draco clan." + +"May I speak with him?" the king asks. + +"Follow me." All three of you head out to Redscale and Sea. +> King to King +The dragons were lying down in the courtyard where you last saw them. The king had a worried look on his face. They got up and look down on Kai's father. "You are the king I presume", Redscale asks. + +The king gets over his nervousness and responded, "Welcome to Yeli. What makes you come to Yeli?" + +"The threat of a madman's demons. We have come to aid you and the dragons will join later." + +"We must first come to the issue with you three now. Our army will prepare for this at once. First I've got to start with Zaron." He looks at you. "I don't agree with what daughter and you did, but it may have saved us. I will have to have a fully detailed report on what happened between the rescue of your dragon to your arrival here. Please don't lie on anything. Come to my private chambers tonight. And Kai too. Dragon, may I speak with you alone?" Redscale nods and they walk off in another direction. + + +Kai and you walk towards her father's private chambers. You come to a door with an eagle symbol on it. You knock and a male voice answers, "Come in." You go inside the room.The king sat on his bed. It was large and had the most exspensive bedwear out in the kingdom. His look was of pain and sorrow. "Sit there", he said pointing to a pair of wooden chairs. He gets up and walks back and forth between Kai and you. "I've recieved a message from Warren asking why Kai isn't there. I responded to him of what happened to the escort and what transpired between you. He is to arrive at morning tomorrow, but what I called you here for is something to do with the marriage between Warren and you Kai." + +You speak up, "Why am I here sir?" + +"Call me Ponis. And because I have a suspicion something may have happened between you two. I'm not angry, but there may be some issue with it." + +Kai's body froze up. You had a similar feeling in your body. Kai recovered and was the one who spoke up for the two of you, "I'm going to have to say a kiss and a bit more. I don't think the marriage with Warren is what I want. I don't love him." + +"I do understand. I fell in love with someone of nonroyalty. It was your mom Kai. If you do love him I will support you." + +"I do." + +He smiled. "Then may the gods look over you two. You may go. We will talk of this tomorrow with Lord Warren." Both of you go to your bedrooms for the night. +> Redscale explains +Before you went to bed you went talk to Redscale. This power thing between Redscale and you has been something the occasion to talk of never offered till now. You went to the courtyard since there was nowhere in the palace big enough for him, so you walk up and sit next to him. Is there a problem? + +There is Redscale. Its the entire power that we share. One is how my sword changed its appearance and has different abilities. Also how we can talk through thinking? How is this even possible? + +Redscale laughs. He responds, Many people over the ages in different places had bonds like ours. We are known as Entrin by the dragons. Or in your language known as Dragon Rider. We share feelings, thoughts, and are even considered realatives by some. The bond gets so strong by a human and dragon at times that supernatural things may happen. Just like your sword for example. There are none known aside from you and me since the war between our races. + +Why was there a war? + +He looks to the night sky. You look at them with them and see thousands of little dots up there. Redscale answers, Its like those stars. Two worlds collide with different beliefs and traditions than the other. The stars represent the lives of humans and dragons. I can't say who's fault it is who started the war, but can say it killed it millions. People in and out of the war. So its just as bad. Though good came from it. + +What? + +The bonds that came between our races. It became the strongest link to connect humans and dragons, but evey person with a bond with a dragon took it very seriously. Now go rest . For you will need it for Lord Warren's arrival tomorrow. You leave Redscale and go to your room for the night. + + + +> Lord Warren's arrival +You are dreaming of a bright future with Kai and Redscale. You are the king of Varon and are sitting at a large round table. There are knights all around it. You seee them arguing about something. A pounding starts and you jump up. "What's that?" Your knights look at you with a worried glance. One of them gets up and looks at you. The pounding resumes until everything goes dark. + +You launch up in your bed. You look at the door and the pounding was something from there. A voice said, "Get dressed and to the court yard." Someone left you a new outfit: a expensive silk shirt with a detailed drawing of a red dragon on it with a jacket to put over it. A pair of pants with a belt so you could have your sword with you. Finally with a pair of boots. + +"Nice clothing." You get dressed and strap your sword on. You head to the courtyard to await the arrival of Warren. + +It turns out you didn't have to wait. Ponis, Kai, and a man of sixty stood there. He had snow with hair and had a scar below his left eye. You walk up to hear him say in a raspy voice, "... but the marriage was made years ago!" + +Ponis repiles, "I'm sorry old friend, but she already loves a man." + +The man says angrily, "Who may this coward be?" + +This man is getting on your nerves, but you announce your presence to them, "Fair day to you three I suppose?" + +The man turns to you. "Who may you be?" + +"Zaron." + +He nods. "So your this Zaron character I've heard about. You love Kai I suspect?" + +"I do." + +"And you know of..." + +"The marriage. We talked about it." + +"Then you must know the rules of that interference? You know peasants can't marry a royal family member?" + +"I'm familiar with them, but there is a way they can." + +"And that is?" + +"Is that if the courter is beaten in single combat that he drops any rights to the member of the royal family. If my assumption is correct Ponis?" He nods. + +"You think you can beat me boy?" + +"I know I can!" + +"I have won some of the greatest single combats in history, You scared?" + +You look at Kai and smile. Then return to his glance and frown. "I've beaten stronger people than you." + +"Then I Warren accept your challenge." He draws his sword and prepares to fight. + +You go for your sword until Kai says, "Wait." She walks up to you and gives you a long kiss that makes your mind feel like its melting. She steps back and whispers, "Please defeat him." + +You give her a kiss on the forehead. "I'll win. Just like the battle with Quon." You draw your blade. Its red blade flashes with glee. +> Attack +You attack him with swordcuts from all angles. He is forced to block them. You manage to get a cut on his left arm. He jumps back and preapres to attack. + + + + + + +> Attack again +You attack again to keep the momentum up. You continue the attack and push him back. He tries to attack and he gets cut in several different places. Its tiring you out. + + + +> Attack again +Your fatigue sets in and you fall to your knees, so you don't see his blade come toward your head. The ground is the last thing you ever see. + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You attack again to keep the momentum up. You continue the attack and push him back. He tries to attack and he gets cut in several different places. Its tiring you out. + + + +> Defend +You go on the defense while he wears his strength down. He goes blow after blow and on his face you you can see his exhuastion grow. He stops to catch his breath and that's when you strike. + +Your age helps because of endurance. He recieves blows all over his body and he falls to the ground. Warren coughs blood from his mouth and mutters, "D-d-do what y-y-you want with m-m-me." + + + +> Spare Him +"You may have some great victories in the way of the sword, but I have more duty to rid this land of a great evil. You may live, but never return to Varon. And if you do I'll have no choice but to end you... forever." + +He gets up and with his old gaze replies, "I acknowledge defeat. I retake any claim I've got to Kai. You are a worthy man to marry her. May you two live in harmony for all enternity." He bows to you and asks to King Ponis, "May I see your healer?" + +"You may." For that is the last time you see Warren . + +A few hours later when a feast is prepared for your victory a messager comes and announces, "The dragons are here." +> Dragons' Arrival +The dragons filled the courtyard as you exit the castle. Ponis come close behind with Kai and whispers, "Oh my god!" + +"They won't hurt you," you assure him. + +He gulps and says, "I hope so." + +Redscale came through the mass of dragons and heads in your direction. He says, "There's five hundred thousand of us here. The others will be defending our home." + +Ponis replies, "That's good. How far is Quon from Yeli?" + +"I'd say two weeks away." + +"I'll go prepare a meeting with my generals. Come as soon as you announce what to do." He leaves leaving Kai, Redscale, and you with the other dragons. You say, "Let's get started." + +Redscale nods and lets go a big roar to tell the other dragons to quiet down. He speaks loudly so every dragon could hear, "We have come to an end of an era of hate and mistrust between our races. We have all agreed to fight together to stop a threat in a man we always trusted: Quon! A man who twisted Calivir's way of peace and trust to hate and bitterness. A man who capture a dragon against his will. A man who wants to destroy both our way of living. I say we work as one to stop this threat. I came to care for a human. So much that the bond we thought never would happen again did happen. Entrin, dragons, Entrin! The bond between a dragon and human. I have bonded with Zaron, but we share more than what our legends say. We have done more than any other pair that has existed. Dragons, will we fight to keep our ways the same or forever killed?" + +"Fight for freedom," the dragons yell. + +"Now let my friend speak. Zaron." + +You walk up and nod. You say as loudly as possible, "We have come together for a common cause: Quon's death. All of you should hide in the forest and wait for his flying demons. The final confrontation will be between Redscale and me against Quon. We will be prepared. Please try not to terrify Yeli. All of you may head to the forest." + +They head to the forest, but the red dragon Scaro stayed for a second. He said, "After the meeting come to the forest to talk." He flys off. + +"Kai, let's go to the meeting. Redscale, wait for us to be done. Go with your clan for now." He flys away and you mutter, "What a day it has been." +> A Plan +You follow Kai to the meeting room with Ponis and three large men waiting for you. All sat at a circular table with a map of the surrounding areas. They had little wodden figures on it to represent varon's troops, the dragons, and Quon's demons. You took a seat next to one of the generals and Kai sat next to her father. Ponis stood up. Zaron. I'd like you to meet Generals Aso, Tumera, and Ferka." The one named Aso was a large blond headed man who looked to have years of experience in battle. Tumera was a dark skinned man who must have been a general for a short time. Ferka was the one who was the pale one of them, but he looked to be a good strategist. You shook their hands and sat to begin the meeting. Ponis said, "All the citizens will be sent to our ally Skania. I got the emperor's approval. All the provisions will be provided. Now onto the battle plan." + +Ferka says, "We have one your Majesty. We came up with it while you told us of the dragons. We will have the dragons handle our arial combat while the troops handle the ground. My 7th Legion will defend the courtyard and town area." + +Tumera says, "My 1st Division will handle the gate areas." + +Aso finishes, "And my 2nd Division will fight further out." + +Ponis says, "Okay. What will Zaron do?" + +Aso answers, "He will be in my 2nd Division fighting outside with my soliders. Kai will help defend the castle." + +Kai looked steamed. Though replies calmly, "I'll fight further out. I'm fighting with Zaron and there's no stopping me." + +Aso stammers, "But princess..." + +"That's final." + +"Fine. This meeting is dismissed." + +Everyone leaves the meeting room. You go to where you sent Redscale to see what's he wants. +> Continue +You think of what could trouble Scaro. Nothing comes to mind as you head through Yeli with speed. Kai and her advisors are talking over some private matters, so she couldn't come. Ponis was too nervous to even consider to. The generals were busy preparing to evacuate the citizens, but you were given no job. It gave you the free time to do as you please, but since Scaro has to talk you should see what he has to say. + +You head out the gate and see the first wave heading out the northeast gate. You say to yourself, "I wonder what would have happened if Redscale never came into my life, but I wouldn't have it any other way." You smile and head for the forest with that thought. + +You look around for sign of the dragons. They had a habit of scorching trees and have tend to leave huge footprints. You walk for a few hundred yards until you see a few dragons flying overhead. You follow under them until you come to a large open area. The dragons were talking to each other and stop and look as you walk by them. You have to walk to the center of their little camp until you see Scaro, Redscale, and the green dragon Mia. Scaro sees you and motions for you to come to him. He says, "Haru betrayed us. She was working for Quon the whole time. We were fools. Her place will be taken by Sea, but where is she?" + +"Oh, Sea? She's with Kai. She seems to have taken a liking to her," you reply. + +He laughs. "Seems your bad influence is starting to rub off Redscale." + +He snorts. "I doubt it." + +"It is! It is! You may be a great king one day." + +"Thanks. And how is it?" + +"The bond you and Zaron share made her think of it." + +"Fair enough. What is the plan?" + +"Haru will most likely be carrying Quon. What most people don't know is past Dragon Riders have worn a dragon's saddle. Its used to keep the rider safe from the dragon's scales. We have one here that was newly made from an ally. Its for you Zaron. It is like a horse's saddle, but made for dragons. I'll tell you how to put it on. It has two safety buckles on the bottom to made sure it doen't move around. They are in between a middle buckle to make sure you have it on before you do the other two. You would see two footholds going down with a long piece of strong cloth. Step in it and sit in the saddle. That's about it." + +"Where is it?" + +"Its behind me. Train for awhile. It will come in handy in tough predicaments. It won't matter how bigger Redscale is, but have a good time flying safer in the sky. You may go." + +You bow to them and put the saddle on Redscale. He takes flight and its basically the same without the saddle. Still you decide to practice just in case. +> The first invasion +The days went by with training with your sword, to your nights spending with Kai, and to the hours training as a Dragon Rider with the dragons. Life would be great if it wasn't for Quon, but you already are ready for him. The thing you don't know is that a preinvasion Quon had. You were in the castle learning about Kai's backround and family history when the invasion started. Bells rang and you leap out to head to the courtyard. Redscale was fighting demons off. None got to him. He slashed and bit and smacked all of them around leaving none left standing. + +Redscale!!! + +I'm fine. Get on. You were flying earlier and left it on for the invasion. You get on and he begins to circle the city. Demons and soliders were fighting off demons at every corner. He returns to the courtyard to you see Sea and Kai there. They both looked worried. "Kai, it's hell out there." + +"Well that's bad. I also got a saddle for Sea. We decided we're partners since we are similar in many ways." + +"Great!" + +"We going to fight?" + +"From above." Your both in your saddles and get in the air. You draw your sword and Redscale and Sea flew upside down so you could slash demons. This is around the time when they began to retreat. You watch until they are no longer in view. + +The deaths were in the hundreds. You were all over and did many jobs. The final fight will start the next day. +> The final invasion starts +You were summoned to the throne room. Kai, Sea, Redscale and Ponis were there talking as you got there. "... no way Zaron can win," Ponis says as you walk up. + +"Win against who," you ask. + +He jumps. "When did you get here?" + +"Just now." + +"Quon's army did some serious damage, but we have millions of soliders left to the hundreds we left." + +"Were you saying I wouldn't beat Quon?" + +"I did." + +"Well I'll win." + +Then a pounding noise was outside. It shook the whole castle. You were to put on a suit of armor. You did that and wore a suit of armor made of ruby, metal fused into it. Then that's where the talking stopped. + +Quon has arrived. "Redscale!" Both of you rush outside. You see him and Haru waiting in the sky above. You mount Redscale and he flaps his wings with strong gusts of wind and pushes himself into the sky. + + + + + +> Quon's Challenge +You head in the direction of Haru. Quon was in his saddle. His snow white hair became much clearer on his pitch black armor. He had a golden sword in one hand and a shield in the other. + +You drew your sword. Its red blade gleemed in the morning sun. A smile crosses Quon's ancient face. "So its come down to student and teacher. Will you back down?" + +"We won't." + +"Join us! We can teach you so much. We could make all your desires come true!" + +"My dreams are here. With Kai, Redscale, and Sea. They're my desires." + +"Then I suppose you leave me no choice." +> Redscale blows fire +Redscale blows fire at them. The fire hits them and you think its over. You can't see as smmoke covers the area they're at. The smoke clears and they were not even damaged. He smiles and Haru does the same to you. Redscale flys sharply left to avoid the flame. You can't get why the fire didn't hurt them, but you don't dwell on it for long. + + + +They move in and it's now close combat. You aim for a leg on Quon and he blocks you sword with his own. The fight between you and him with the dragons is getting you nowhere. He gets a pleasant look in his face and says, "Let's do this alone." + + + +> A Long Fall +Quon snaps his fingers. A rumble went through Redscale's body and he begins to fall to the ground. "Redscale! Redscale! Are you okay," you ask nervously. + +"I can't move my body!" He wiggling underneath you, but still no major body movement. Looks like the end of you two. In your mind it goes the other way. I can't die here. We came too far to lose now. He defeated Redscale so easily with his magic. I need the power, you say to yourself. You know that your family used to use magic for the royal court to help the people of Varon. You hope that the power is somewhere in you that remained dormant, but its unlikely. You get mad. Then some spark of unknown energy sparks through your body. Redscale begins to slow down and lands in the city unharmed. You slide out of the saddle as Redscale landed. + +Redscale collapses to the ground. "I can't move. Looks like you'll have to fight on your own..." Redscale is either dead or knocked out, but that makes you check for signs of life just to make sure. He's breathing, so he should be fine. Your anger is flaring and you look at Quon in the sky to see him smiling. + +The fighting is further down the street. Among the fighting is Kai who saw what happened and runs over to you. Your anger is preventing you from noticing her. She says, "Zaron, is Redscale okay?" + +"He's unconcious, but he should be fine." + +She sensed something. Something abnormal, so she looks at you to see a red aura coming from your ruby armor. "Your armor is glowing." + +"I know," you reply. + +"You were falling to fast to slow down by normal means, so you must have used..." + +"Magic. I did to save Redscale. I didn't know how to use magic until now. My family as you know used magic all those years ago to aid the royal family." + +"But yours is aided by your anger. You must calm down." + +"I... can't." + +"You can. What would Redscale say?" + +That snaps you back into reality. You have a short thought on what'd he say. He'd tell you magic is the energy that flows through the kindness of people and all living things. Its possible to do many things. Your breathing slows down and you can think clearly now. "Thanks. I'm better." + +"You have a better chance to beat Quon now. You can use magic, but don't through rage." + +"Okay. But what of Redscale?" + +She gives you a kiss on the cheek and says, "I'll tend to his injuries. Now go and fight." She starts to care for Redscale's wounds. You run in the other direction to the gate to get to Quon and Haru. +> To fight alone +You dash out the gate and head in the direction of Quon. He is still airborne. Haru begins to lower herself to give Quon and her a better fighting zone. "So you have unlocked your hidden power?" + +You don't answer as you get into a fighting stance. He sighs. "Why do you always want to do the the hard way? You were always like that and still are." Haru breathes fire at you. + + + +> Block with shield +You block the fire with your shield and jump left. Quon shoots electricity before you can attack and you roll out of the way. You use your magic to lift Quon from his saddle and throw him to the ground. You'll have to fight a two on one battle, but you know you can't die until they are dead. + + + +> Attack Quon +You aim for Quon. He is the reason that this battle is taking place. It's hard at first since of Haru, but eventually you come up with ideas to move around her to attack Quon. He becomes more desperate as he knows your gaining control of the fight. + + +He began to attack you from a sides and was getting more reckless. Soon he began to regain his senses and used magic on you. You block most of it, but a lighting bolt hits you in the chest and you fly back to hit a large rock. You see them above you ready to finish you when a fire blast knocks them away. + + +> An Unexpected Arrival +You are struggling to focus when a familiar voice, but faint, say, "I suppose I'll fight with you." + +"Who... are... you?" + +"You mean you don't remember me?" Your eyes begin to refocus and you see a former foe: Calivir. That was a shocking since the last time you saw him he was on the brink of death. He stood over you looking for you to get up. "Come on. It won't take long for them to recover." + +You get to you feet and look at him. "You are going to help me?" + +"I'll fight till my last breath. I will die anyway because of my injuries. I found an old friend who put a temporary spell on me that will help me fight with you. Where's Redscale?" + +"With Kai trying to heal him. We fought them and we were tossed around like we were like children." + +"I'll hold them off. Redscale will have to fight Haru alone. You on the other hand will fight Quon alone. The dragons in the sky are aware of me and the spell. I'll seperate them." + +"No. We fight together." + +"Fine. Get on my back." + + + + + +> Redscale Recovers +Redscale begins to regain his senses. He moves his legs, tail, and neck. He opens his eyes to see the princess Kai over him. "What is it, Kai?" + +"Oh! Your awake? You'd better hurry." + +"Why?" + +"Zaron is fighing alone." + +"Not for long!" Redscale opens his wings and flies off looking for Zaron's scent. + +Kai stood there alone. She sighs. "These two were made for each other." She laughs to herself. + +A man comes up and says, "You are needed Kai." + +"And so here we go." She heads off in the direction of where she's needed. +> Fight with Calivir +You got on Calivir's back and got ready to continue the fight. Haru got back in the air and stood about thirty meters away from Calivir. Quon was rubbing the back of his like he's hurt. He says, "Well this is shocking. Calivir, I thought you were dead. And to think you'd betray me. Yes, very shocking indeed." + +Calivir merely snarls at Quon. "What now Zaron?" + +"We fight." He launches a ball of fire from his jaws and aims it at them. + + That made him go on the defense and you ask what will you do next? +> Sword +You have Calivir go in close so you can use your sword. That was your mistake. He was wanting close combat. He cuts your back and then stabs your heart. He cuts Calivir and then Haru finished the job. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You got on Calivir's back and got ready to continue the fight. Haru got back in the air and stood about thirty meters away from Calivir. Quon was rubbing the back of his like he's hurt. He says, "Well this is shocking. Calivir, I thought you were dead. And to think you'd betray me. Yes, very shocking indeed." + +Calivir merely snarls at Quon. "What now Zaron?" + +"We fight." He launches a ball of fire from his jaws and aims it at them. + + That made him go on the defense and you ask what will you do next? +> Magic +You feel the power of magic flow through your veins. This power was yours and you focus all of it against Haru and Quon. You used fire, lightning, water, and much more against the pair. They couldn't keep this hell away. Quon smiles. Of all the things he can do, he smiles. Then he looked at Calivir. + +Haru moved in and Quon stabs Calivir in the heart. You tried to stop him, but were a split second too late. "NOOOOO," you shout. You begin to fall to the ground once more. + + +> Redscale returns to a death +The fall was a foggy memory as Calivir and you fell. You come to see Calivir lying on the ground next to you. You move your arms and legs to make sure you could move. You could move without any pain, but you remember what happened and rushed to Calivir. His breathing was faint. He says, "I hope your okay." + +"I-I-I-I am, but what of you?" + +His mouth seems to have formed a smile. "I won't make it. I have an idea how to defeat them." + +"How?" + +"You must seperate them." Redscale appears over the horizon and lands next to you. He sees Calivir and moves back a few steps. + +"Father..." + +"Redscale my boy. How good is it to see you." + +"You're..." + +"Dying. Yes, I am. I want one last wish before I pass on." + +"What?" + +"Protect Zaron and live a full, happy life. Goodbye... my... sons." And he closed his eyes for the last time. + +You look at Redscale. "Are you okay?" + +"I'm fine." + +"I hope so. I got a plan to beat those two." + +"What?" + +"Seperate them." + +They come in the distance. You use a spell and Quon was lifted from his saddle and tossed in another direction. Redscale flys off and tackles Haru in the opposite direction. + + +> One on One +You head in the direction Quon landed. He was on his knees when you reached him. "It ends now," you snarl at him. + +"I couldn't agree more," he replied. You two begin to exchange sword blows. He was getting the advantage. You block his cuts and attack back. He had a hurt expression on his face. That gives you confidence. You attack him until you began to push him back. All the anger and pain was involved in these cuts. He misses a block and you get him in the chest. He falls. You look over him. + +"Quon, traitor of Varon, you are hereby sentenced to death." You stab him in the heart and end his life. Fatigue sets in and you fall to your knees. "So I may die as well. I am happy to rid this land of Quon. If I die, farewell my friends." And you fall down into a black conciousness. +> Celebration +You wake in your room and see Kai sitting by your bedside. She has a sad look on her face. You feel happiness and launch up to give her a hug. "I did it, Kai, I did it." + +She was in shock and recovers to say, "I know, but at the price I thought was I lost you." + +"It'd be hard to get rid of me." + +She laughs and gives you a big kiss. "I know. I think I'd perfer it that way." + +"I do too." + +"What will you do now?" + +"Stay here with Redscale and you." + +"I think Redscale must leave." + +"Why?" + +"He's the king of his clan and must rule them." + +"I suppose. And you?" + +"You should know that." She laughs and and gives you another kiss.You leave the room and go outside to see everyone celebrating. With Kai there you go out.A party was made and you party all night. You drank, danced and talked a more than you did your entire life. Everything is how it is supposed to be. Life couldn't be better, so you go to see Redscale. +> Seperation of Brothers +Redscale stood in the moonlight. He looked at the heavens above him. "I'll have to leave you," he said as you came to him. + +"Kai said that you may have to." + +"Are you okay?" + +"I am. For I have Kai and you, no matter how far we are apart we will talk through on minds." + +That we can. + +"Hahahaha, don't need to do that. I'm sure going to miss you." + +"But I'll come and visit every month. That's true." + +"Its sad what happened Quon, he was such a great man." + +"His ways were twisted from what they once were." + +"What shall happen to Sea?" + +"She's telling Kai what I'm telling you. I've decided she'll be my queen." + +A big grin came to your face. "Otherwise your wife?" + +"In your language... yes." + +"Goodbye brother." + +"And fair winds to you brother." What he said is the old dragon goodbye, but no one knows whoever came up with it. You put a hand on side. He moved so he was face to face with you. He put his snout on your forehead and gazed into your eyes. All the memories you had together flashed into your mind. You smiled and for the last time he says, "Goodbye brother." He flies off. + + +> Final Words +Months have past since you married Kai. You are on the Varonian throne with Kai by your side. Ponis decides to go on a long trip. He sends you letters every few weeks. Redscale and Sea did become mates and had many children. He sent one to you and it was a silver color to the egg. You smile and set it in a cushion. You are known as the Dragon King among your followers. For all you can do now is rest and wait. For your great journey is now over.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You got on Calivir's back and got ready to continue the fight. Haru got back in the air and stood about thirty meters away from Calivir. Quon was rubbing the back of his like he's hurt. He says, "Well this is shocking. Calivir, I thought you were dead. And to think you'd betray me. Yes, very shocking indeed." + +Calivir merely snarls at Quon. "What now Zaron?" + +"We fight." He launches a ball of fire from his jaws and aims it at them. + + That made him go on the defense and you ask what will you do next? +> Dragon fire +"Fire!" Calivir lets loose an inferno of fire on Haru and Quon. Calivir was unleashing hellfire upon the unlucky pair. They get burned and they fall back. Calivir follows quickly behind them. Haru flys higher and you loose them. "Where are they?" + +Calivir responds, "I don't know. They may be..." He didn't finish because somehow they got below Calivir and Quon managed to stab his heart. + +"Nooooooooo," you shout as you realized what happened. Calivir had no movement as you fell to the earth. + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You block the fire with your shield and jump left. Quon shoots electricity before you can attack and you roll out of the way. You use your magic to lift Quon from his saddle and throw him to the ground. You'll have to fight a two on one battle, but you know you can't die until they are dead. + + + +> Attack Haru +You try to remove Haru from the fight, but it was her that removed you. She clawed your stomach to make a big gash. Then breathed fire onto you. She bites you to finish the job. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You dash out the gate and head in the direction of Quon. He is still airborne. Haru begins to lower herself to give Quon and her a better fighting zone. "So you have unlocked your hidden power?" + +You don't answer as you get into a fighting stance. He sighs. "Why do you always want to do the the hard way? You were always like that and still are." Haru breathes fire at you. + + + +> Use magic to block +You raise your hand to create an invisible wall and the fire goes to the right, left and up. The power slides you back a little bit, but your otherwise unharmed. Quon was already on you with a sword cut and you block it with your sword. You attack a leg of Haru and get a deep cut in it. She roars of agony of the pain. You strike them with a combination of attacks. Some connect and others don't. You somehow manage to get under them to deal a finishing blow. + + + +> Stab Haru +You manage to stab Haru. She roars and shoots fire at you. You roll out of the way and slash her again. She claws at you and manages to remove your helmet, but that just reveals your smile. Quon looks shocked. You guess that is how you are lasting so long against him without Redscale. + +He keeps on the offense and becomes careless in his attacks. You hit Haru and him a few times. He then uses magic on you and you are being pushed back one step at a time. He hits a fire ball on you and sends you flying back. He gets ready to finish you when a dark shape rams Haru to send her in another direction. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You raise your hand to create an invisible wall and the fire goes to the right, left and up. The power slides you back a little bit, but your otherwise unharmed. Quon was already on you with a sword cut and you block it with your sword. You attack a leg of Haru and get a deep cut in it. She roars of agony of the pain. You strike them with a combination of attacks. Some connect and others don't. You somehow manage to get under them to deal a finishing blow. + + + +> Slash Quon +You slash at Quon. That's a mistake. He blocks it and hits your arm with his sword. He then hits a leg that makes you fall to the ground. He then cuts your head off to finish the job. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You dash out the gate and head in the direction of Quon. He is still airborne. Haru begins to lower herself to give Quon and her a better fighting zone. "So you have unlocked your hidden power?" + +You don't answer as you get into a fighting stance. He sighs. "Why do you always want to do the the hard way? You were always like that and still are." Haru breathes fire at you. + + + +> Dodge +You dodge the fire, but Haru stops the flow and keeps it on you by closing her mouth to fire again. You dodge it a few times more until the fire hits you. It burns through the armor and burns you alive. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You head in the direction of Haru. Quon was in his saddle. His snow white hair became much clearer on his pitch black armor. He had a golden sword in one hand and a shield in the other. + +You drew your sword. Its red blade gleemed in the morning sun. A smile crosses Quon's ancient face. "So its come down to student and teacher. Will you back down?" + +"We won't." + +"Join us! We can teach you so much. We could make all your desires come true!" + +"My dreams are here. With Kai, Redscale, and Sea. They're my desires." + +"Then I suppose you leave me no choice." +> Sword Slash +Redscale moves in quickly so you can get a sword cut on Quon. He's ready and blocks the attack and returns with lightning fast reflexes. You raise your shield and blocked the hit. The dragons were fighting with their teeth, claws, tail, and fire. One hoping to get an advantage. Quon and you are exchanging blows, but is hard because of the fighting dragons. Redscale, you need to back up. We need a better plan. + +We don't have one. We attack until they die! And that's what you do. Or what you tried to do. It drags to a sword fight between Quon and you. He is getting made by the look on his face. The dragons fight below and its getting hard to fight Quon. He gets a annoyed look to his face. + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You head in the direction of Haru. Quon was in his saddle. His snow white hair became much clearer on his pitch black armor. He had a golden sword in one hand and a shield in the other. + +You drew your sword. Its red blade gleemed in the morning sun. A smile crosses Quon's ancient face. "So its come down to student and teacher. Will you back down?" + +"We won't." + +"Join us! We can teach you so much. We could make all your desires come true!" + +"My dreams are here. With Kai, Redscale, and Sea. They're my desires." + +"Then I suppose you leave me no choice." +> Wait for him to attack +You wait for him to attack. Haru flys at Redscale, but he goes into a steep dive. He slows down by flapping his wings strongly to stop his fall. He rises up and faces them again. Redscale lets a jet of fire go at them and they stay there and get hit. For some reason you think it isn't over. You were right, for they were in the same place undamaged. There is something wrong, Redscale. + +I agree, but we may have to split up. + +The fighting continues. You aim sword cuts at Quon and Haru. Some do damage and others don't. Redscale uses his claws on them and lands some while others are blocked or avoided. They return the attack by sword cuts and claws flinging at Redscale and you. The same results as you did to them. Quon has a nasty look in his eyes now.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You go on the defense while he wears his strength down. He goes blow after blow and on his face you you can see his exhuastion grow. He stops to catch his breath and that's when you strike. + +Your age helps because of endurance. He recieves blows all over his body and he falls to the ground. Warren coughs blood from his mouth and mutters, "D-d-do what y-y-you want with m-m-me." + + + +> Kill Him +"You have my sorrow, Warren. I can't let you live though, for you may ruin my quest to kill Quon." You walk up and raise your blade and aim for his heart. His last breath is now forever lost in the sands of time. You look over to Kai and she's nodding. + +Ponis comes over and says, "Nothing could be done Zaron. He chose a young woman that a man had already claimed his love for. Warren's death was inevitable." + +"I wish it may have turned out differently." + +"As do I. Come! Let's have a feast in honor of your victory!" + +You feast for the next fews hours until a message came of the dragons' arrival.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You attack him with swordcuts from all angles. He is forced to block them. You manage to get a cut on his left arm. He jumps back and preapres to attack. + + + + + + +> Defend +You wait for him to attack. He attacks form all directions and gets no hits. He keeps going and hits a blow on your left leg. You step back for another solution. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Forgive me Kai. I'll break this spell without killing you, you think as you go in. She cuts and hacks at you without stopping . Each cut is blocked though you must get on the offense. But how, you say to yourself deflecting a thrust. You could block or go on the offensive on your next move, but what would be the consquenses. + + + +> Defensive +You go on the defensive and keep blocking cut after cut. This is zapping your strength. You got to go on the offensive before she gets a lucky blow in. +> Stay on defensive +You stay on the denfensive until a cut to the leg brings you down. Then a head blow finishes it. + +Redscale is recaptured and is come to believe his father's lies. Kai stay's under Quon's control who eventually takes over Varon.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wake Kai. "What..." she asks half asleep. Her eyes are barely open. She falls into another sleep and you shake her. That makes her angry. + +"WHAT!" she yells. + +"We're going in there now." you reply. + +"Now? There's still hours till daylight." + +"We need to go in there now. Redscale has been sending me dreams on how he's doing. We go in now because by midnight tommorow, he'll be dead. Why are we going now after a big fight? Night gives us the concealment of darkness. We only have one chance, so I will go in with or without you. Redscale's my world, so I'll go in and I'll die trying to save him." you say with affection. + +"If we go now, we have time. Okay, let's go." + +You sneak up to the prison wall and scan the area. You don't see anyway in, but after further looking you see a house. "That house might be our way in." you whisper. You head in the direction with Kai following close behind. You head toward the door and quietly open it. A guard is in ther asleep guarding a door next to him. You close it and whisper,"There's a guard in there. Go in and take him down quietly. Then sneak around and get info. Don't make noise and run in the sign of danger. I'm coming with you in the house, but will seperate with you and find Redscale." She has no worry in her eyes, you can see determination. + +Kai heads in with blade drawn and cuts his throat. He falls and you drag his body outside to a big bush you see growing on the bottom wall.You head back in to see Kai waiting for you. You nod and go through the door. You go down a long passage underground and see a latter uphead of you. "I'll go first." + + + +You head up the latter to see a lit hallway that has two directions. You lift yourself up and whisper,"Clear." Kai clinbs up and is next to you in a second. "Don't make any unneeded noise. I'm going left. You take right." + +"Zaron." + +"Yeah." + +"Better live." + +She quietly dashes down the hall and takes a left turn. You walk in the other direction. You left your bow on Amin because most combat will be close up. You head down to two hallways leading in two differrent directions. One heads downstairs and the other up. +> Left (Up) +He may be up there since he's so big. You head up there to see at least twenty soldiers. You are able to kill half of them until they overwhelm you with numbers. + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +"Wait here." you tell Kai. You go in with your shield up enough to protect you but not enough to block your line of sight. A turn is up ahead with a small reflection of light coming from it. + +You motion for her to come in. "There is a light behind the corner. I'll go see what's in there. Stay close enough that if I need help. You'll be here. Don't move! Be ready for a fight. I sense a great evil in there." + +You go in there to see an old man who's maybe seventy years old. He turns towards you and smiles. "I've been waiting for you." + +"Who are you?" + +"I'm known by many names. But you may call me Tora." + +"Were those your demons?" + +"Yes. The has master taught me very well." + +"Master? Who is he?" + +"Telling you would be too easy. You'll find out soon enough. After we bring you down." + +Demons from a secret path. One was a black dragon, bigger than Redscale. "Kai!!!" you shout. + +"You have a partner. His reading said you'd be alone." Tora screams. + +Kai comes by your side. "No way. I may never have joined you if I knew this would happen." + +"Shall we?" + +"We shall." + +You both leap into action. You cut down any demon that enters your blade's range. Kai also was doing great until all that remained was the black dragon. + +You can't move. Why can't I move, you ask yourself. The feeling is preventing you from moving. the black dragon swipes at you. Kai intervenes by blocking the claw with her shield. "Snap out of it Zaron!! This isn't a dragon. Its a dragon demon!" + + You aren't able to keep its tail from smacking her across the room. She hits the wall and falls to the floor motionless. That angers you to see it do that. Whatever pity you have for it is gone now. It goes in the direction of Kai to finish the job. You run in its path and yell, "You want her? You'll have to go through me first!" + +You hear a deep rumble in its throat, like a laugh. To your amazement it can talk. "Go through you first? You can't kill me boy! For I'm no demon, for I'm the KING of all dragons. I'm called Calivir." + +"Some king you are. You'll let one of your kind be taken captive? You have no right to be called king!" + +" NO RIGHT!?!" Calivir roars. + +"You heard me." + +"You don't understand. He's my son. I couldn't convince him to leave you, so I helped capture him." + +"You may be his father, but he's my brother." + +"You have no right to say that. Your a human and not a dragon." + +You shake your head. "We look out for one another, we argue with each other, we will risk everything to save each other, and the most important thing: we love each other. I don't need to be a dragon to call him my brother. I know he feels the same way. I feel it. So I have every right to call him my brother." + +"Be as that may. I have no choice but to kill you." You look him in the eye and see something that shocks you. They have pain and a deep sadness in them. No.... something isn't right, you think. No one should ever have that look. You try one more time to reason with him. "You have pain." + +"Alas I do. I have to kill my son's brother." + +"You have pain that whoever has Redscale may kill him." + +"You obviously know how to read a dragon from Redscale. If you defeat me I'll reveal his location to you. If not, you die." + + "Very well." + +You get into a battle stance and Calivir sighs. He wips a claw and it glides across your shield. You cut a swipe at his leg and he flaps his wings to go airborne. He shoots a jet of flame at you. You lift your shield, unsure if it will protect you. It does however hold against the array of flames. You see him land and use his tail to whip at you. You are sent flying into a wall. Can't lose consciousness. You fight the urge to pass out. Calivir walks in your direction and shoots a claw at your chest. It rips your shirt off, but otherwise your uninjured. You grasp your sword for a final strke and cut a deep gash in his chest. Blue blood gushes out and he falls on his side. You fall to your knees after the battle. Kai and Calivir are in your sight. It gets blurry and blurrier by the second. You think you'll die before you pass out. A dream appears to you: All blackness surrounds you except for a faint red glow. It grows bigger until you see Redscale. + +"Redscale...." + +"Rise brother." He says. You hear passion in his voice. + +"I can't... pain ...too great." + +"You must. You must not leave us. The pain is not enough to keep you down. RISE BROTHER!!!" + + +A great power awakens in you. The pain disappears and you rise from the dead. " I'm up." + +"Run toward the light Zaron. Run towards it and arise from your grave." He fades away and you feel tears come up. You hold them in and look around to see a light above you. "I'm not done. Not by a long shot." + +You wake to see Calivir gone and Kai in a corner with a fire. "I must have been hit by a rockslide." + +She hears your voice and jumps up. "Your alive! But your pulse was gone." + +"I was dead, but a friend showed me the light." + +"Well Tora was easy to kill. I burned his remains and disposed off them. Calivir told me Redscale was in a prison in a village called Osco. I was gonna bury you, but you got up. How did you defeat Death?" + +"With purpose and Redscale. Let's go get him." + +With your spirits refilled you head to the Osco. You will rescue him. You've got to, for it's destiny! +> Redscale's Jail +Redscale wakes and smiles with glee. "I'm in jail. Zaron will come. With his new sword he'll become the true Entrin." Or dragon rider. Redscale settles down for his noon meal. He hears a knock and a note appears at the door's bottom. Zaron taught him literature long ago. It reads: + + + +Dragon, + +This is your final night in this prison. Zaron will be killed and so with you. Enjoy your time in your cell. I'll see you later. + +Master + +Redscale snorts and thinks, Zaron will be here before then. + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You remount your horse. Kai and you follow them. Whatever they're up to you need to know. You track them using the footprints and some blood they left. You have your sword laying in your hand for immediate use. Whoever is here has got to be powerful to summon these demons. + +You eventually come to a cave. Kai said, "We have to go in there." + +"I never thought of that. Thanks." + +"Don't have to be a jerk." + +"I know. So we go in carefully or charge?" + + + + +> CHARGE!!! +You get your weapons ready for use. You dismount and run in ready. A man who's at least seventy years old is standing before you. He turns and smiles. "I've been waiting for you." Without warning he uses some magic. A bolt of lightning hits Kai and kills her. Before you turn towards him, he launches a fire ball at you and burns you to death.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"I accept your help Kai." you say with gratitude. "We need to make a stop at Aravon. You know how to use a sword and shield?" She nodded. "We need a sword for you and two shields. Let's go." + +You head out to the stable and mount Amin. She mounts her horse. You ask, "What's its name?" + +"Shadow." She said. We went in the direction of Aravon. + +We go to the blacksmith. He greets you two and asks what you want. " Two shields and a sword." He comes back with a shield with a red dragon on it and a steel one with the symbol of Varon: an eagle. He asks Kai if she could use it. She grabs it and waits. "This I made for you personally if the day came. This battle-ready Red Dragon shield is made of 16 gauge thick steel which will protect you from poundings on any battle field. Its yours without cost. And this is for you girl." He uncovers a steel sword on a table and gives it to her. He goes back to work and you leave with your new gear. + + +We put our gear on and headed torward a mountain rumored to have Igor's Tower. You both didn't talk because you know you two may die. You make it to a pass up the mountain when you hear you a noise in the bush. You snap you head in that direction and saw more movement. A lesson from Quon to observe everything. Kai was already doing that when the attack came, but you were ready. + +Groups of demons varying from animals of all kinds. A bear demon swipes you off Amin and to the ground. You cut at its leg and it goes down. Before you could finish it two more of them were on you. You see Kai kill any demon that came at her with expert cuts. She kills every demon that crossed her path. Something fired inside you that made each swing of your blade and land an instant kill. The first was a bird-demon from the air aiming to pick you up and drop you. A tiger came and clawed at you. You blocked with your shield and cut it apart. They begin to retreat. You can follow them to there hideout or cheak the area for any clues. + + +> Follow the demons +You follow them deep into the mountain.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You awake in a great hall, huge stone pillars holding up the high ceiling, fine stone art carved into the perfect marble walls. Couples dressed in medieval finery dance around you, ignoring the nearly naked man on the floor who just woke up. With surprise and embarrassment you realize you're only wearing a loose pair of breeches that only reach to your knees. You keep a hand on it to stop it from falling down. + + +"Ah! Another one. I had just begun to believe the party was over. Seems the second round has started! Grab a lady and begin the dance anew. Oh, you might want to put something on first. Or not. Whatever you think is an appropriate way to celebrate!" + + +A man sits in a stone throne a few steps up in front of you. He stares at you with dark red eyes as he taps his bare feet on the lovely gold and red carpets. His pure white hair is pushed back over his head, over his ears, and under a dull plain looking iron crown, more like a simple iron circle than a crown. He puts his hand over his chin in a thinking position. + + +"On second thought; that is the perfect way to celebrate! Everybody naked! Brilliant my speechless friend! Haha, someone grab my friend here a partner!" He jumps up and rips off his coat. "Nevermind, I will!" He grabs your hand and pulls you up, spinning you around and around. + + +Everyone around you is going through the long process of undressing and he pushes you into the crowd, towards the only person done, a woman who gracefully catches you before you not very gracefully fall into the nearly naked bodies. + + +You don't know if this is a nightmare or a fantasy. +> Where am I? +She's behind you, holding you up. You get back your footing and turn around to face her. She grabs your hands and starts to dance, forcing you along. Her long black hair is pulled up into a ridiculous hairdo, nearly making you laugh, but her intense face stops you. + + +You open your mouth to ask the question, but she places one finger over her red lips. + + +She turns her head and looks at you. + + +You look around. The women have all stripped to down to their shifts and the men down to breeches or hose. +> Ignore her warning +As soon as you open your mouth again she pushes you away and stops dancing. + + +The crowd has stopped and is looking at you. The man, now minus his tight black pants, stares at you. You noticed that some of his guards are walking torwards you. + + +"Please, please, hold all questions until the end of the presentation." He claps and everyone resumes dancing. + + +Everyone but you that is, as his guards have long since killed you and are now in the process of cleaning up the mess your blood leaves on the smooth tiles.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>She's behind you, holding you up. You get back your footing and turn around to face her. She grabs your hands and starts to dance, forcing you along. Her long black hair is pulled up into a ridiculous hairdo, nearly making you laugh, but her intense face stops you. + + +You open your mouth to ask the question, but she places one finger over her red lips. + + +She turns her head and looks at you. + + +You look around. The women have all stripped to down to their shifts and the men down to breeches or hose. +> Keep quiet for now +Considering you have no idea what in the hell is happening, you decide to take her silent advice. You nod to let her know you understood her message. Her large lucious lips briefly show a tiny smile. + + +She leads as you slowly dance. She tries to bring you up to speed, but you've no talent for this. + + +Suddenly, you hear it. A cacophony of bells and whistles, flutes and drums. The horrible sound is quiet at first, messy and brutal, but as the volume grows it becomes cleaner. The cruelty of the sound is transformed into music by the strings that fade in. + + +And then your feet will themselves along. They know every move, exactly what to do, exactly when to do it. You hands are placed at just the right place on your partners body. You search for the source of the sweet sound, seeing the man sprinting and springing all around the room, screaming. The music is so loud you can only hear his roars of laughter as he passes by you. + + +The choir starts in and the sound feels like honey. The men at first, low basses, then the women join in, their high sopranos filling the air with such lovely wisps of beauty. You lean your head back and open your mouth to drink in the sounds. + + +Your partner leans against you closely as dance, right against your chest, but the music is the only thought in your head and heart. Your body almost don't care. +> Quiet +And then it stops without notice. You nearly fall down, and would have, if it weren't for the support of your partner. + + + + +The strange man has stopped dancing, his laughter the only sound now. "Stop! Stop stop stop! Everyone!" + + +The people had continued dancing without the music, but now at his word they halt their movements. + + +The man looks around at them all. He squints his eyes and angles his head with a hand cupped around his ear. + + +"What? Time already? It can't be. Oh yes it is, is can be, because it is and therefore must be and can be. Oh well, next time, same time. And you, find some proper trousers . Here, you can have mine." He hands you his black pants. You reach out to take them, in shock. + + +"On second thought, no." He quickly grabs it back. He walks through the wall behind his throne, disappearing, all the while laughing. + + +The room breathes a collective sigh and everyone is searching the floor for their clothing. + + +Your partner is putting on her clothes, and you avert your gaze. + + +People all around are talking now, and she finally says something. + + +"Relax. I bet you have many questions. Come. We'll find you something to wear." + + +You open your eyes and she's wearing a simple grey outfit, probably something that went under the ridiculous dress she's carrying now. Her hair is down now, and you can't help but appreciate her stunning beauty. + + +You take a breath. You'll listen to her and keep quiet for now, at least until you have an inkling of what's going on. This feeling of tension inside you isn't just because you're mostly naked... But it probably would be better if you were wearing something proper. You blush. +> She guides you out of the room +She takes your arm and pulls you towards a corner of the great hall. + +"The man you just met is Zaren. He's... Complicated. All you need to know right now is that he's God here. If he asks you to do something, it's not a question. You obey him. Without hesitation." + +She pulls you through the stone blocks of the wall before you know what's happening. It's chilly on your naked skin and tickles slightly. + +"A few decades ago Zaren had an argument with... with a door. Apparently, the door won, so he decreed that all doors be hung and then burned." She looks straight at you, not even blinking. "It was a few years before he got sick of that and decided to introduce these fake walls." She pulls you through a narrow hallway, past tapesties of Zaren eating breakfast. In every single one he's moving. You can hear whispers coming from them, most of them asking if it's on. A few people pass you, guards and servants by their look. None of them gives you a second glance. You look in awe at the beautiful artwork on the walls. + +"Oh my, I'm forgeting my manners. It's good Zaren isn't here. We must be quiet. He hears much of what is not meant for him. My name is Ophelia." She pulls you through a series of walls, all made of gorgeous stone with artwork carved into the individual blocks. "It's been a long time since one has joined the upper ranks. Maybe you'll even last. Although I've never heard of someone... Well, just appearing out of thin air. Something that Zaren would do certainly, but I think he went through that phase a few hundred years ago. It's hard to remember all the things he does... You will be joining the upper rank, won't you? You must be, Zaren did not request your absence, as he calls it, or an execution, as we call it. So, why are you here?" + +She pulls you into a room full of mannequins and fabric, with colourful carpet on the floors, walls, and ceiling. "I'm sure the Tailor will find something for you. So why you are here?" +> Where is here, exactly? +"Oh my. Now that is a very good question. But here comes the Tailor." She turns around and curtsies towards the door. + + +"What -" You stand there speechless. + + +A man walks into the room and bows, a spotless fine black coat shimmering around his white furry torso, four furry little limbs poking out of the coat. They are end in three long, delicate fingers with little hairs at the base and bare human-like tips. His hairy legs have the same pattern, with his feet looking almost normal. Large wings are folded at his back, trailing on the floor. + + +His large black eyes poke out from his white fur and his human jaw opens to speak in a slightly buzzing voice. + + +"Hello, good lord. I am the tailor. I must say, your eyes are a wonderful colour. Such a light but intense brown. They will be a challenge to match correctly, but I will enjoy creating your outfits for you." + + +"What..." You take a step back, bumping into a mannequin and accidently knocking it over. + + +"You will have to work on your coordination if you plan to be part of The Court. Dancing is quite popular here. But even if you fall or some such thing, you will look wonderful. Still, that is not my job. Now come over here, I must measure you. Take a look around at the outfits. You may find one you like." + + + Ophelia stares at you and gestures. You timidly take a few steps forward. + + +The tailor places his finger tips on your arms, mummering to himself. "Don't you need measuring tape for this?" You ask. + + +"Measuring tape? Bah, I am better then the tailors you have known. A true master can look at a man for a second and make him a god within minutes." + + +"I've never known any tailors." + + +"Well then trust me, I am the best. Now lift your arms please?" As he slides his hands around your arms and chest you look away, uncomfortable. +> Look at the strange carpeted walls +Colourful fine carpets cover all the walls, some more rugs hanging over them in turn. + +The carpets are like a dark, dull rainbow. The carpet itself is black, with colours seeming floating over it like a reflection in water. The colours swirl and mix and seperate so slowly you have to careful look before you see the emerging patterns of dancing colours.. You watch a batch of a grey blue twirl around with concentrated yellow and green drops, absorbing them. + +The rugs draped over them like curtains over imaginary windows are stationary pictures of outfits, each in a different pose. They continue from down the walls onto the floor and a few hang from the ceiling. You recognize a few outfits, but what really catches your eye is the one hidden on the far left, the one that looks just like Zaren's black finery. It's the only one with a person in the clothes. + +Zaren's in it, posed elegantly in his black and gold coat. His arms are raised as if to greet you, but his face perfectly shows his comtempt at your very existance. All but his eyes, which are laughing. You do not know if the contempt is the joke. + +There is a man behind that insanity, you are sure of it. Whether the insanity is a cover or not, you do not know. + +You look back at the swirling patterns. They are starting to resemble pictures now, just barely, but the proper shades are coming in... +> An Arena +Your heart beats. + +You stand in an great amphitheatre, on shifting sands. It's quiet for but a moment, and then the clashes of weapons rings out in great echoes, with cheery yells of murder providing a bass quality. Smiles flash all around as people hack or are hacked about and nothing but snorts of laughter without the barest hint of pain accompany the carnage. + +Sprays of blood float on the air. Spilled guts and limbs sink deep into the sands. Heads laughing are choking on sand and sweet blood spills out of their lifeless bodies. + +You smell gore in the air and it clouds your thoughts. Little droplets rain down in your vision. You count each as they pass. Some spray in the corner of your eye hits your cheek and you can taste the liquid life. + +Liquid life. + +Life. + +You're alive. + +Where is your weapon? +> A claymore on the ground to your right +The heavy blade is laying on the ground. + +Your heart beats. + +You survey the fight. + +It's a giant mass of men screaming in a variety of different emotions. Joy here, fear there. You can see spectres spectating, watchers watching, and shadows spectating as well, because what else would they do? Be serious. + +With all the chaos, if you crouched you could conceivably have more cover. A lower center of gravity would also be a benefit. A quick roll would provide more cover and speed, but lack the same control. The ground, while littered with weapons and bodies, has a clear path to your weapon. You could try to crawl there. This would provide the most cover, but you risk being stepped on, and what you gain in cover you give up in speed. + +Beat. + +Move now, or risk danger for another look around. +> Crouch +You shift and fall, knees bent, head low. An arrow whistles in the air. + +Beat. + +You senses collaspe in on this one thing. The arrow shines brightly as the sun catches it and then wades in and out of bloody bodies. + +Your toes curl in the sand, trying to the draw the rest of your body in. Your arms follow your slowly moving torso as it curls as well. You blink and lose the arrow. When your eye open your head to low to see it. You can only hope. You push foward with one foot. + +Beat. + +The arrow catches your left shoulder blade and tears through the top layer of muscle and skin but leaves your body mostly intact. + +Beat. + +You grit your teeth and swallow a gurgle of pain. You've had worse. You lie. + +Beat. + +Beat. Beat. + +Beat. Beat. Beat. + +You reach the sword and grab it with your right hand, using all your strength to swing it up and around so your weak hand to hold it. + +The man in front of you laughs as back is penetrated by the blade. The combination of the unbalancing swing and the collision shock your hands and they tingle. Oh wait, that's because someone cut them off. Now who would do such a thing. + +A laugh swirls around in your mouth and tastes great. You let it out and the fear and terror and pain all disappear. + +A pommel strike to the face later and you're laying on the ground as the battle rages on, spitting out sand and blood and teethe as you laugh. +> Back in the room +You blink. The world is... well, not really "normal", but... it's better. You bring a hand to your head, fine, but tears are falling down your face. Colours spin in your eyes. The madness of the walls creeps and lurks in your head and it's shrieks and whispers make your ears bleed. + +"You looked at the walls, didn't you? Where did you go? Nevermind, it's not important. It's not frequently a pleasent place anyway. Now look at me. Hmm, the barber will have to take a look at you. Fuzzy face, tangled hair. Still, not my job. Now please stand still and um, please do not touch anything. You don't seem graceful. No offense meant, my good sir." The Tailor lets go of your arm and waddles off on his strange legs. He walks straight through a carpeted wall. + +You carefully sit down on the floor. This isn't real. + +But it is. + +This can't be real. + +But it is. + +It was a dream then. But you're -- you're awake now. It was a dream. Just a dream. + +No, no, no, NO, NO, NO! This can't be happening. The world is spinning now, and you feel faint and dizzy. There's a sour taste in the back of your dry mouth. Don't open your eyes. Don't look up. This isn't real. This isn't real. This isn't happening. Your heart pounds. Your fists close and your arms tense. + +No, no, no, NO, NO, NO! + +Something touches your head -- NO! "Get away! Get away! Take your bug men and crazy kings and doors and dreams and shove it!" You fling yourself backwards and push off the attacking nightmares. +> Ophelia +You hit the nightmares and they gasp. You open your eyes. + +It's just Ophelia. Just Ophelia. She's holding her wrist in her other hand. + +"I..." Your mouth closes. This is it. This is all happening too fast, too fast, too much. You didn't mean to hit her but the world is just spinning now. + +"I'm sorry. It's been so long since any of us have seen someone new to The Court, let alone to this world. Most people -- well, besides you, everyone -- come to this realm through the slums and move up. I'm afraid you'll have to forgive them. This place changes people... Some for the better, like the Tailor. Or at least he would say so. Most... Well, you'll see soon. Please, just calm down, and I'll answer all your questions. Zaren will forgive us this." + +"I'm sorry... I didn't mean---" + +"I know. Just hold on a moment. We'll get you some clothes and then I'll take you to your rooms. I'll explain there. Just hold on." + +You take a deep breath. You're under control now. Those walls... They play with your mind. But you're back now. + +The Tailor walks back through the wall. + +"Now sir, please take a look around the room. The mannequins have some samples, the carpets others, although you probably would like to stay away from them now. Small changes can be made quite easily to the design, or even after if you are disappointed with my work, although I doubt that will happen. Anything custom will have to come later I'm afraid. You have much work to do my friend." +> The black outfit +You point out the tapestry in the corner, the one with Zaren in his shining black clothes. There's something about it that intrigues you. Something that just draws you in. + + +Ophelia and the Tailor give each other a look. + + +"I'm... I'm afraid you'll have to choose another my friend. I don't believe Zaren would be... happy. Wait. I think I have something in a similar style. Take a look at this. You may request changes if you wish." The Tailor pulls out a tapestry and peels it apart. You did not notice before, but they're made of different layers stuck together. Each layer contains one piece of the outfit. + + +The pants are the same thin fit, but looser at the ankles. The belt has two buckles of polished gold and beautiful leather. "The tanner can make you such a belt. It is only cloth that I may create." The Tailor buzzes. A tight but long shirt with slightly ruffled sleeves is next. It's tight around the torso and hugs the waist with large shoulders. Over that comes a waist coat with shining gold buttons. + + +"It is designed with a similar cloth in mind and the same colours. Colour, that is. The shirt is long sleeved and with a waist coat, but I will keep your wishes in mind. You may take these rags for now. It will be completed soon. I suggest you visit the barber, cobbler, and tanner. Oh, and all gentlemen of The Court are expected to have their own sword. Something about duels. I never saw the point of it, but it's been a long time since I was... different. That reminds me. You should have been here before. The style now is very fond of vibrant colours, not this... Monotone thing you have chosen. That must have been at least decades ago... Off, now." + + +You don't particularly feel like hanging around, so you accept his choice and the Tailor fills you hands with fine shirts and breeches, simple but elegant. Only he would call them rags. He then turns you around and pushes you along and out. You nearly panic when he shoves you into the wall, only to remember that it is in fact a door. + + +Ophelia walks down the hall. "Coming?" +> Follow her +"One second." You call out. + + +You'd prefer to be clothed at this point. + + +You slip on a pair of pants and a shirt before running, trying to catch up to her without dropping any of the things you're carrying. + + +She looks at you. You feel self conscious suddenly, despite your newly clothed appearance. You look straight ahead, trying to keep even steps and the same pace as Ophelia, who walks fast. + + +"Zaren didn't tell me where you'd stay. I suppose the guest quarters -- no, that's no good. They're too far, for one, and I don't believe Zaren considers you a guest. He is very fond of order and organization. Or at least the order and organization of others. We'll drop these off in my room for now. We have others to visit. Please wait just a little bit longer." + + +You and Ophelia walk in silence. The stoned passage gives way into large rooms with bustling people. Ophelia leads you past a great fountain spitting out clear water and up stairs. Putting on pants was probably a good decision. + + +On the second level people jostle and bump into your and it takes great skill not to drop anything. + + +After a few minutes of twisting turns Ophelia stops in the middle of a hall. "This is my humble abode. Please just dump those off on my desk." Ophelia then pulls you through the wall. You doubt you'll ever.... get.... used.... to that? +> Ophelia's room +This isn't a room. It's a damn mansion. This is just one room and it's huge. + +Expensive carpets cover over parts of the floor. The high quality marble shows through in other parts. The walls are the same stones from the halls, but large paintings with golden frames cover parts of it. A giant golden chandelier hangs from the ceiling. Giant golden stairs are placed on both sides of the room. + +Before the stairs stands a bronze statue of... Something. It looks like a regular man, naked but for a cloth that hangs from one shoulder, but something feels off about it. His face is turned down and his eyes closed, one mouth corner lifted in a sneer. He's kneeling almost in a pleading position, as if he dare not look up. + +"Zaren's work. I suppose he thinks it a gift and why he's right of course. It's very lovely. Every so often when one disagrees with him death is not always the suitable punishment. I'm sure Tunc agrees with me, though he may not express it well." Ophelia grabs your hand and leads you quickly to a small, bare room behind the statue. Her face is ashen. + +"Check the walls!" She hisses at you, then brushes her fingers along the walls. You follow her example, even if you cannot fathom why. She and you check the whole wall and she takes a deep breath. + +"Zaren has a habit of popping up when he isn't wanted. We can never be sure we are safe, but vigilance is the only option if we wish to survive. We must go soon, but if you have any questions that must be answered, ask now. We must be very careful what we say outside this room, even inside it." +> Tunc +"Oh... Tunc. Yes. Tunc was a friend of mine... A very, very long time ago." Ophelia leans against a wall. "You can drop those clothes off right here." She gestures towards the spotless floor. "Tunc. He... Disagreed with Zaren a very long time ago. Zaren is unpredictable at best, and the king of chaos at worst. The power he wields is not a good combination with his nature. Tunc took a great risk. He thought he could challenge Zaren's rule. He... Failed. Listen closely. I don't care to relive the experience, so I will not be sharing any details, and I'd doubt you'd really want to hear them once you understand his fate." Ophelia looks down, unsure. "I tried to warn him...." She pauses and closes her eyes. + + +The memory is obviously a painful one for her. You are unsure of what to do, so you just stand there, dumbly. + + +She takes a few seconds to collect her thoughts and then continues in a monotone voice. + + +"Zaren is a creative.... Man. He didn't kill Tunc, exactly. He decided to create an example of him. He was feeling particularly... Well, something. It's hard to tell what goes on in his mind, though it gets easier after time. That's what scares me the most, I suppose. Anyway, Zaren is a powerful man. He has abilities that the rest of us cannot comprehend. He's kept Tunc alive even as he is now." She looks straight up at you. "I suppose there's no easy way about this. That statue out there is Tunc. Zaren did something with him. I used to cry, talk to him, anything, but there's a time when you just have to let go. Especially here. I'm not even sure if it was meant to be a punishment, reward, or just some twisted form of art. Zaren is confusing, misleading, childish, and any other number of unpleasant things." + + +"You said Zaren keeps him alive... Does that mean?" You ask, afraid of the answer. + + +"Yes. He moves, ever so slowly. Once in a very great while he cries. That's where the "art" comes in." She sighs. "Do you have any other questions?" +> Zaren +"Zaren? You mean besides his seeming complete and utter insanity? Well, I told you. He's a god here. The god here. There's not much else to him. I could tell you about all the things he's done over the years. All the times I nearly laughed at him. All the times others did laugh at him, and paid for it. All the times he laughed along with them. He's unpredictable. Don't forget it, ever. If you remember nothing else, remember that. I've seen him kill people for following his instructions to the word. He's done things... Things that are worse than death. Tunc's fate is far from the worst." + + +"Then why? Why do you let him do it? Why not do something about it? Surely he couldn't stop you all?" + + +"Look at Tunc. As bad as things are, they could be worse. Zaren's powerful in ways even the strongest of us can't imagine. Tunc used to say that reality is Zaren's bitch. He was frank like that. Everyone here has at least the smallest ability for magic, and some are very talented, but Zaren's in a class of his own. Besides, most have adapted. They've learned to live with it. It doesn't matter how awful something is. If you live with something for a long time it becomes the norm. You can only be in sheer terror for so long before it bores you." + + +You can see it in her eyes. The fear that has long given way to numbness. + + +She attempts to smile. "Better the devil you know." +> Where am I +"Now that's a good question. The short answer is: I don't know. Nobody does as far as I know. Except, perhaps, for Zaren, but I don't think he's likely to share that information, do you? You really never went through the slums?" Ophelia narrows her eyes suspiciously. + + +"I don't know what you mean." You answer truthfully. + + +"The slums are what they are. A broken down place infested with poverty and suffering. Everyone, nobility and peasants alike, appears in the slums. People don't really have children here. Pregnancy is extremely rare among the population, even over large periods of time. Most women will go their whole life without a child. Most pregnancies will end in miscarriages. Almost all of those carried to term will be stillborn. Of the handful of people over our whole history to be born here... I've never met one. I've heard that they turn out strangely, even compared to the average citizen. Nothing specific, just strange. There are rumours that Zaren is one, but I doubt a thing like him was even born, even in another place. To my knowledge there is no one older than Zaren alive today so I guess we'll never know. Anyway, people will simply "arrive" here instead. From somewhere else. Always... Well, you're the exception, but always in the slums. They're not a pleasant place. The slums are filled with screams and the raving of the mad. The "upper ranks" to which you now belong are comprised of the completely sane, or at least the sanest. Zaren... I don't think he's insane. I've known him too long. No, I think he just likes to watch us suffer in our own filth." + + +"So you can't tell me anything about where I am." + + +"No, I can tell you much about where we are. I just don't know where where we are is. I can't tell you anything about where any of us came from. Most people don't remember anything and even if they do it's after a long time of searching. But it just tears them apart. It's best to forget if you start remembering." + + +"But I... I remember.... Something." You're not sure. It's that faint form of memory, but vivid in strange places. More like a story that you've visualized. + + +"Forget it. Or if you can't forget it, ignore it. At the very least leave it alone. Do not go any further into that abyss." + + +But this memory is to real to forget. Ophelia looks at you, rolls her eyes, and sighs. "Okay. Tell me about it, but then that's it. Don't ever think you can make it farther into your own mind. It won't end well." + + +"I remember. I remember... " Words roll of your tongue as you look through the past towards the only memory you can find. +> White +It's white. Some of it is powder and some is thicker and clear. Some of it sticks together. + +Snow. It's snow. And it's falling. + +You look up. The sky is dark with little flecks coming into existance as they get close enough for you to see them. + +Snow crunchs under you. + +You open your mouth and catch a flake on your tongue and then laugh. You look at one closely. It's pretty with its twirls and patterns and designs. + +You dance, dance in the snow, falling, rolling, screaming with laughter and fun. + +Each flake unique but nothing without its friends. + +Then it's gone. You have it here in your head now, fixed and alive, something you'll remember. There's more... + +But that's gone, at least for now. +> Memories +Ophelia is speechless for a minute."Wow. That's a lot, well, compared to me. You, you like... Liked nature, didn't you?" + + +"I don't know. Maybe. It's all I remember anyw--" + + +"No. No. I'm sure you have more in there. Don't try to remember... But if you do... I don't know if we come from the same place, but maybe, just maybe, we do. If you remember enough it might trigger my memories too." Ophelia looks hopeful. Happy. You don't think she'll ever remember if she hasn't by now, but it's not in your heart to crush her new found hope. She smiles for a brief moment, caught up in a memory that isn't hers yet is still her only link to her potential past, even if it's faint at best. + + +Then she remembers where she is right now and shakes her head to rid her of her folly. "Anymore questions? We don't have much time." +> Doors +"Oh yes. I told you about the "fight" Zaren had. He got rid of all the doors in The Court, except for the large front doors to the palace. Apparently they "took his side". Without doors we lacked privacy, but Zaren didn't care. Probably didn't eve occur to him. But after a few years he had his brilliant idea; fake walls. No one had any idea he could do something like that, but I don't think it surprised anyone. That's why we check the walls. He can build them anywhere he wants, so we must be vigilant, vigilant always. It's tiring at first but you build up a habit eventually." + +"Doesn't it... Freak you out?" + +"At first it was a little strange, but after a year or two you don't even think about it anymore. You start to forget what doors look like." +> The Court +"This is The Court. It's part of this realm. It, the slums, the markets, and a few other districts make up about half of it, with wildness making up the other half. Zaren keeps meticulous records of nearly everything, including maps. I'm not sure why, he's a very chaotic person, but I guess even chaos is ordered from time to time -- otherwise it would have an order to it. We should visit his libraries some time. Just one of them would take a very long time to read through. Every so often he'll change the realm so much that previous records need to be updated, so he purges almost everything and everyone starts again. He always keeps a very accurate record of the books he's had though, even the purged ones. There are rumours he keeps copies of them somewhere after he destroys the others. I wouldn't put it past him, but there are many things only Zaren knows, and this is one of them. But that doesn't really answer your question, does it? + + +"Tell me about The Court." You ask. + + +"Well, it's composed of servants, guards, and merchants and the like that look after us from the upper ranks. You've met the Tailor and seen a few of the guards and servants. You'll also meet the Tanner, the Shoemaker, the Barber, the Blacksmith, the Jeweler, and various teachers and instructors. Probably a few more I'm forgetting. Almost all necessities and wants are provided for us. We are the only sane ones left in this forsaken realm. We are basically Zaren's playthings. Let's see, what else...." + + +She stops to think for a moment. + + +"We're in the west wing right now. It's devoted mostly to private residences. Zaren will assign you one soon. For the most part he'll let you decorate it as you wish -- oh, that reminds me, the Framer, the Painter, the Carpenter, the Mason, and a few others. Anyway, he may give you some "gifts", akin to housewarming gifts. He would be "offended" if you did not accept them. He's given me things: paintings, statues, furniture. A lot of it is weird and out of style, but surprising none of the chairs will break... or strangle you, or something else Zaren would find funny. Let's see... There's the south wing which houses the servants quarters and the kitchens and other such things, and the south tower, which is primarily for the craftsmen. What is literally called The Court is in the northern end and is filled with Zaren's gardens, libraries, mess halls, and other areas for social gatherings. Oh, the gymnasium as well. The east wing holds more craftsman and merchants. Some of the market district blends in with this area. The west wing also includes the entrance to this palace and the long hall, as we call it. Zaren's throne room really, but he also has thrones in other rooms." +> Events +"We also have many events, like the dance you saw. The Tailor mentioned duels; all the men learn how to fight, as well as quite a few of the women. Zaren finds it amusing, although he doesn't allow anyone to die. Most of the time. We have feasts every few days and a hunt the next day. Lets see. There's contests and tournaments. You must participate in at least one event. That's where those teachers and instructors are useful. What else... I think that's all. If not, well, you'll figure out the rest as you go. You seem like you already know how to dance, so that's one less thing." + + +"But I don't." + + +"Then what was that back in the dance hall?" + + +"Didn't you hear the music? It was so loud." + + +Ophelia's eyes narrow. "What music?" + + +Curious. +> It's time +"It's time. No more questions. That reminds me; one more thing you should know. Time functions strangely here. Nothing grows or changes unless Zaren wills it. Every so often he'll change The Court - usually not to a noticeable extent but once in a while there are some great changes. But back to the point; time is strange. We don't quite... Age. But that's a discussion for later. We still have to visit the Shoemaker, the Blacksmith, the Tanner, the Jeweler..." + + +The list feels nearly endless, though it's actually short. Ophelia goes through them as she leads out of the empty room, back into the halls, and towards the south tower, leading you through winding halls, large decorative rooms, up and down stairs, out onto a blooming courtyard and finally in front of the south tower. + + +"We didn't go this way before." You ask, curious. + + +"You were naked before. I didn't think you'd want to." + + + "Fair enough." + + +The tower itself is huge, made of tiny white stones grinded and polished to create a perfect cylinder. The entrance is a pair of huge and heavy stone slab doors that are currently open. The tower is a hub and dozens of people are walking in and out at any one moment, mostly guards, servants, and nobles. You and Ophelia are out of place in your plain clothing as the guards are wearing armour, the servants the uniforms of their specific job, and the nobles in outlandish outfits. + + +"We have much to do and little time to do it. After the formal dances Zaren will do "realm maintenance". I mentioned it before; this is when he plays around with the fabric of reality. That's why it's so busy. Everyone wants to get their work done before Zaren changes anything. It will be busy after too. The tower is frequently full, especially at these times, but I have seen it nearly empty a few times." +> The lift +"Follow me." Ophelia walks past the guards and weaves through the throng of people with grace. You follow carefully, not wanting the heavy armoured feet of the guard to crush yours. She leads you up a spiraling staircase to a small platform reaching over the center. As soon as you step on it floats upwards. Ophelia grabs your arm to keep you from falling or freaking out. + + +"Be calm. If you stand still it is surprisingly safe. The Tailor's rooms are on the third floor, so it was unnecessary to take the lift. The others reside near the top though, so unless you would like to go up all those stairs we're taking the lift." Ophelia holds your arm tightly. + + +You force yourself to take a breath and try not to look down. Ophelia senses this is not the time to talk and so you just stand there, jaw clenched. Finally Ophelia takes a breath and talks. + + +"Who shall we visit first? As a new member of our lovely "family" you have priority, so don't fret about lines or some such nonsense. After we visit them all we should go back to the Tailor and pick up the beginning of what will, trust me, become a very large wardrobe ." +> The Blacksmith (this will continue the story) +Ophelia smiles. "He's a friend of mine. Please don't let his appearence frighten you, he is at heart a gentle man, but he can be a bit sensitive. I mentioned... Changes. Some, like the Tailor, are happy with their new existence. The Blacksmith is good at his job and enjoys it, but I believe he misses some things about his previous life." + +The lift slows down and moves towards a space that it then attaches to. Ophelia walks straight off. "Come on. Don't hesitate. It gets better with practice." + + You step off the lift. It leaves your feet and lowers again, leaving you with a nearly falling sensation. Your heart pounds and you don't care to look down, even though you're on a stable floor now. Ophelia holds your arm and pulls you forward, not even looking back at that horrible open space. + +"It's a little way from here." Ophelia walks beside you, much more steady than you could be. With perfect posture and graceful movements she looks almost regal. "Do you have any combat experience? The Blacksmith will have to make you many weapons of all kinds, especially if you are fan of the dueling, so you should be familar with them all and with more than one style." + +"No... Well, I don't really remember." You can smell the fires and you know you are close. + +"Oh... Yes. My apologies. We're getting closer. Zaren created these spaces to minimize the smells. They're particularly bad at the tanery; though we are beyond many of the more unhygenic and barbaric practices, it smells nearly as foul as it would if we used the original "recipes. Here we are." Ophelia stops and pulls you into a searing steam filled room. +> Meeting the Blacksmith +The steam that flies in your face and shocks you quickly dissapates. Beyond it there is a large forge filled to the brim with tools that line shelves and walls, with all kinds of hammers, chisels, tongs, and other things you don't recognize of all different sizes; and works, both completed weapons that are displayed and those still to be finished. There is a regular anvil as well as other large metal pieces for shaping metal. There are buckets of water, ingots of different metals, and even polishing materials thrown around the large yet somehow still full room. + +There the sound of a hammer striking metal, a steady, heavy ting ting ting. A man grunts with each sound. He turns around and you gasp. That is not a man. + +He's tall, easily another half of a man. Horns curve out of his large furred head and a bull's nose move as he smells the steam; above those large and surprisingly deep blue eyes. His neck is thick and his arms bulge with muscles as he grips the hammer. He wears a thick leather apron to keep his skin safe, but still litle burn marks line his arms. As he steps forward you hear the clip clop of his hooves. He turns to look at Ophelia and his scowl turns into a smile. "Ophelia! So nice to see you. It's been too long since you visiting me in Tartarus. I almost thought Hades had got you." His voice is baritone, regular but higher than one would expect, and softer. "And this is?" + +"He's new. He... Doesn't have a name yet. That reminds me, we must discuss that as well. Anyway, he requires some weapons." Ophelia smiles at the Blacksmith and goes forward to hug him. + +"Always business with you. Does he have any experience? Preferences? You will definitely need a polearm, sword, and dagger, but anything else will be your choice. You look like you can handle the heavier weapons. What would you prefer for a sword, first of all? One or two handed? Any specific type? We have something of almost everything. Take a look along the walls. Pick out anything you like. Feel free to try it." He speaks so fast you can't respond before he starts onto something else. + +You look at the wall the Blacksmith points to, scanning the swords, but something catches your eye. It's in the corner up higher than the rest. You walk over and look over it. It's an arming sword of a regular length, with a plain black covered hilt and pommel. The cross guard is a thin long diamond shape and the blade is double edged but dull. + +"This one. This is the one." You barely hear yourself say it. Yoo careful pick the blade off of the wall and hold it; it's perfectly balanced and its weight compliments you well. + +"Now that's an old one. Before my time even. It doesn't look much like my predecessor's work either. It's amazing it's lasted this long. Alright, hand it over to me. I'll make you one." The Blacksmith walks over to you. + +"Can't I have this one?" There's something about it. Something about the way your hand fits on it, something about the cool feeling of the leather over the hilt, something about the plain ridge in the middle that just draws you into it. + +"I don't see why, but I don't see why not. Are you sure you'd not rather have a new one? I won't sharpen or polish it - that's not my job. Oh well. You must still pick out a dagger and polearm. Other weapons will come later. The Court is a game of time." +> The polearm and the dagger +"You can use the grindstone and I'll give you some whetstones and polishing cloth. Still, you will need a dagger and a polearm of some kind. You look like you would fancy a heavier weapon. Take a look at the wall. I've got a poleaxe that I've recently finished; it's the perfect length for you. Let me get it." + +You stare at the walls again, this time at one filled with pole weapons, some leaning against the wall, some packed on shelves, some in actual weapon holders. There are the long pikes that take down calvary lined on shelves at the top. Other weapons have spikes, tongs, flat ends for hammering, large and small points, curved blades, and any combination thereof. The choice between weapon types is dizzying, and even among the individual types there are more variables; weight, length, thickness, curve, even the way the shaft and tip are joined. + +You carefully pick up a weapon or two and try them out, a swing, a thrust, a step and a turn. They are unsurprisingly heavy, much heavier than your smaller sword. You place them back, making sure they are not going to fall and cause an avalanche of weapons. You look around a bit. You manage to pick out a few weapons that look good. + +The Blacksmith walks back in carrying one of the heavy weapons in one hand like it's nothing and places it on a weapon rack. + +Including the weapon the Blacksmith just brought in you've narrowed it down to three: a halberd about your height, with an end that has a long spike at the tip, a small axe on one side and a hook on the opposite, all mounted on a thick and sturdy wood pole; a slightly smaller warhammer with small but brutal looking spike on one side and the flat end for crushing, all on a mix of metal of wood; and the Blacksmith's weapon, a longer glaive, with a long curved blade on the tip and a small hook, on heavy dark wood. +> Halberd +You pick up the halberd and inspect it. It's heavy of course, but you're strong enough for it. The blade is engraved with long intricate lines and designs that circle around the point, connecting to rays from the ax blade and a hatching pattern on the hook. + + +"The halberd? A good weapon. It looks well suited to you as well, just the right height." The Blacksmith stands beside you, picks up the weapon he brought in, and places it in a rack. "It's a complicated pattern, but a beautiful weapon." +> The dagger +You place your weapons on a table and stare at yet another wall. Again, there's a wide selection but you're getting better at scanning them. The shorter weapons are packed in much tighter in than the others, nearly making you dizzy. You feel a few; the short weapons are light and nimble with sharp edges and points. Though there are many different kinds and variations between all those you decide to narrow it down to just a few of different kinds. + + +You look along the choices and pick out three again; a cinquedea about a foot long, with a very wide blade that is decorative and an even longer cross guard with a short handle and pommel; a stiletto at the opposite end of the spectrum, with a very thin blade and handle that can easily pierce or find a way through armour; and a baselard, with a thicker blade, thin handle, and no cross guard or pommel to speak of. + + + +> The cinquedea +You reach out and lightly touch the blade of the cinquedea, running your hand over the tip to the fullers and the cross-guard. It softly nips your fingers when you run them over the sharp blade, drawing the tiniest drop of blood. You wipe your hand on your shirt and pick up the dagger. It's light and strangely balanced because of the abnormally wide blade where it connects to the hilt, but already you're getting used to it. You give it a practice thrust, twist it, and pull back. + + +"That one?" asks the Blacksmith. "Very well. You have great taste, I can tell. It seems just the right one for you. Well, we're done here for now. Armour will wait until later, because we'll have to measure you for each piece, and even then it'll take a while to make. Still, you're set up enough for now. It was nice seeing you Ophelia, and nice to meet you as well." +> Back to the lift +Well that's everything done so far. Not much really. + + +Overall I'm not very happy with this in any way that counts. The story and characters aren't great so far, there's little to no real choices, and it sort of jumps from one part to another. The only reason I'm submitting it is because it's the most work I've ever done on a story, and I guess that's something to be proud of at least. At the best it's... rambling I guess. + + +Please tell me what you think.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You place your weapons on a table and stare at yet another wall. Again, there's a wide selection but you're getting better at scanning them. The shorter weapons are packed in much tighter in than the others, nearly making you dizzy. You feel a few; the short weapons are light and nimble with sharp edges and points. Though there are many different kinds and variations between all those you decide to narrow it down to just a few of different kinds. + + +You look along the choices and pick out three again; a cinquedea about a foot long, with a very wide blade that is decorative and an even longer cross guard with a short handle and pommel; a stiletto at the opposite end of the spectrum, with a very thin blade and handle that can easily pierce or find a way through armour; and a baselard, with a thicker blade, thin handle, and no cross guard or pommel to speak of. + + + +> The baselard +"That one?" asks the Blacksmith. "Very well. It seems you have good taste, though all my weapons are high quality. It seems just the right one for you though. Well, we're done here for now. Armour will wait until later, because we'll have to measure you for each piece, and even then it'll take a while to make. Still, you're set up enough for now. It was nice seeing you Ophelia, and nice to meet you as well." + + +With your right hand you hold out your arm to press against the baselard. The cool metal cuts your skin lightly, drawing less than even an entire drop of blood on your finger tip. You pick up the blade, smearing that crimson speck on the hilt. It's light as a feather in your grasp, perhaps too light after holding other weapons. With a practice slash from high and then to the left you sense the way the dagger reacts to force, gaining an understanding of its balance. + + +"Interesting choice." remarks the Blacksmith. "Okay then. All done here I suppose. Armour will come later -- we've little enough time now, and it requires much measuring. But you've got everything you need for the moment. I'll be seeing you Ophelia, and you as well I suppose."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You place your weapons on a table and stare at yet another wall. Again, there's a wide selection but you're getting better at scanning them. The shorter weapons are packed in much tighter in than the others, nearly making you dizzy. You feel a few; the short weapons are light and nimble with sharp edges and points. Though there are many different kinds and variations between all those you decide to narrow it down to just a few of different kinds. + + +You look along the choices and pick out three again; a cinquedea about a foot long, with a very wide blade that is decorative and an even longer cross guard with a short handle and pommel; a stiletto at the opposite end of the spectrum, with a very thin blade and handle that can easily pierce or find a way through armour; and a baselard, with a thicker blade, thin handle, and no cross guard or pommel to speak of. + + + +> The stiletto +You pick up the blade by its handle and feel the guard over to the tip, where the sharp edge bites into your finger and draws a small drop of blood. You wipe the blood off your hand and hold the knife in the light to look over it. Light as any knife or dagger is, it glides though the air easy, almost requiring no effort. You sweep at and the air, listening to it cry out in that distinctive whistle. + + +The Blacksmith looks over you and the blade before speaking "You choose that one? Good. Well I suppose that's everything. You'll need armour as well, but you'll need to be measured before and then it'll take a while for me to make all of it. But regardless, we're done here for now. Good to see you Ophelia. Wealth and health to you both.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"You can use the grindstone and I'll give you some whetstones and polishing cloth. Still, you will need a dagger and a polearm of some kind. You look like you would fancy a heavier weapon. Take a look at the wall. I've got a poleaxe that I've recently finished; it's the perfect length for you. Let me get it." + +You stare at the walls again, this time at one filled with pole weapons, some leaning against the wall, some packed on shelves, some in actual weapon holders. There are the long pikes that take down calvary lined on shelves at the top. Other weapons have spikes, tongs, flat ends for hammering, large and small points, curved blades, and any combination thereof. The choice between weapon types is dizzying, and even among the individual types there are more variables; weight, length, thickness, curve, even the way the shaft and tip are joined. + +You carefully pick up a weapon or two and try them out, a swing, a thrust, a step and a turn. They are unsurprisingly heavy, much heavier than your smaller sword. You place them back, making sure they are not going to fall and cause an avalanche of weapons. You look around a bit. You manage to pick out a few weapons that look good. + +The Blacksmith walks back in carrying one of the heavy weapons in one hand like it's nothing and places it on a weapon rack. + +Including the weapon the Blacksmith just brought in you've narrowed it down to three: a halberd about your height, with an end that has a long spike at the tip, a small axe on one side and a hook on the opposite, all mounted on a thick and sturdy wood pole; a slightly smaller warhammer with small but brutal looking spike on one side and the flat end for crushing, all on a mix of metal of wood; and the Blacksmith's weapon, a longer glaive, with a long curved blade on the tip and a small hook, on heavy dark wood. +> Warhammer +You hold the war hammer in your holds and turn it over. Heavy, but that's the point. The hammer itself is completely flat and even, smaller than you'd imagine, but that only concentrates the damage you'd guess. There's a metal grip on it, with a pattern to make it easier to hold. + +"Ah, the hammer. Brutal thing, that is. Just around the right size for you though." After placing the glaive he brought in on a rack the Blacksmith points to the hammer. "It doesn't matter if someone's wearing armour. With this, a single whack and it'll smash through a helmet, and even if it doesn't, it can still break bones, cause concussions, and at the very least give a very nasty bruise. The hook can rip through armour too, though usually a good set of platemail can block it. It's good for taking down calvary. The hook can tear at the legs of a horse, get the man off his mount, and the hammer can crush the horse's legs."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"You can use the grindstone and I'll give you some whetstones and polishing cloth. Still, you will need a dagger and a polearm of some kind. You look like you would fancy a heavier weapon. Take a look at the wall. I've got a poleaxe that I've recently finished; it's the perfect length for you. Let me get it." + +You stare at the walls again, this time at one filled with pole weapons, some leaning against the wall, some packed on shelves, some in actual weapon holders. There are the long pikes that take down calvary lined on shelves at the top. Other weapons have spikes, tongs, flat ends for hammering, large and small points, curved blades, and any combination thereof. The choice between weapon types is dizzying, and even among the individual types there are more variables; weight, length, thickness, curve, even the way the shaft and tip are joined. + +You carefully pick up a weapon or two and try them out, a swing, a thrust, a step and a turn. They are unsurprisingly heavy, much heavier than your smaller sword. You place them back, making sure they are not going to fall and cause an avalanche of weapons. You look around a bit. You manage to pick out a few weapons that look good. + +The Blacksmith walks back in carrying one of the heavy weapons in one hand like it's nothing and places it on a weapon rack. + +Including the weapon the Blacksmith just brought in you've narrowed it down to three: a halberd about your height, with an end that has a long spike at the tip, a small axe on one side and a hook on the opposite, all mounted on a thick and sturdy wood pole; a slightly smaller warhammer with small but brutal looking spike on one side and the flat end for crushing, all on a mix of metal of wood; and the Blacksmith's weapon, a longer glaive, with a long curved blade on the tip and a small hook, on heavy dark wood. +> Glaive +You look at the glaive that the Blacksmith brought in. The wood is smooth, balanced and strong, and the blade looks like it craves blood. You pick it up and its just as heavy as you expected. It's simple compared to the other weapons; no intricate patterns or designs, but it's lovely nonetheless. + +"The glaive? Ah, a good choice. I knew it'd be the weapon for you, just the right size." The Blacksmith stands beside you. "It may seem simple, but I made it with the care all my weapons deserve. Of course, the wood work isn't mine, but all metal has been forged by my hands."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Follow me." Ophelia walks past the guards and weaves through the throng of people with grace. You follow carefully, not wanting the heavy armoured feet of the guard to crush yours. She leads you up a spiraling staircase to a small platform reaching over the center. As soon as you step on it floats upwards. Ophelia grabs your arm to keep you from falling or freaking out. + + +"Be calm. If you stand still it is surprisingly safe. The Tailor's rooms are on the third floor, so it was unnecessary to take the lift. The others reside near the top though, so unless you would like to go up all those stairs we're taking the lift." Ophelia holds your arm tightly. + + +You force yourself to take a breath and try not to look down. Ophelia senses this is not the time to talk and so you just stand there, jaw clenched. Finally Ophelia takes a breath and talks. + + +"Who shall we visit first? As a new member of our lovely "family" you have priority, so don't fret about lines or some such nonsense. After we visit them all we should go back to the Tailor and pick up the beginning of what will, trust me, become a very large wardrobe ." +> The Tanner +"I see. Get the worst out of the way first? I must say, the stench is worst I've ever smelled. He's not a... Nice man. Not mean, but wild. Feral, even. I've heard talk that he was born here, but he's one of the oldest I know of, so again, another thing we never may know. As you know, Zaren plays around with... the world. So don't let his appearence frighten you. If anything is terrifying, it's the stink. He's harmless really." + +You slow your upward motion and the lift reachs another floor, where it attaches to a opening. Ophelia walks off. "Don't let the height scare you. It's quite safe as long as you don't linger." + +One foot off and it feels stable enough. But as soon as your other leg leaves the platfrom descends. You go falling forward as your body compensates for the motion. Ophelia catches you and steadies you. "Let's go. The walk is long, to keep the smell from the lift." + +Ophelia leads you through a maze of halls and small rooms, as the smell gradually builds up and pains throb in your head. Just as you're about to pass out she pulls you into the tannery. There's a look of digust on her face. "Let us meet the Tanner." +> Meeting the Tanner +The smell hits your face; fresh rather than the stagnant air outside, but just as bad. Your eyes water and you blink again and again just to see. You nose and mouth curls up in disgust. There are furs everywhere, not just pelts but entire animals. "He prefers to skin them himself." Ophelia simply says. Tools for skinning and shaping litter the ground and little buckets of what you hope is water but is more foul smelling are sprinkled about the room. Larger vats are filled with the same foul odorous liquid, some of them colourless, but more black, brown, gray, or other dull colours. There are piles of furs, rags, and leather everywhere, some drying, being shaped, or otherwise in progress to becoming whatever they will be. + + +A particularly large and dirty pile moves and -- oh dear, that's not a pile. It's a wereanimal, foul and feral, loudly poking around in dog corpse, picking out internal organs and placing them aside, sorting them. He pulls out bones and bits, and is covered in blood. Every so often he licks clawed hands with a slurping sound. He starts to peel off the skin with tools and surprising care when he lifts his head up and sniffs at the head. Turning around, he spots you and his mouth turns into a disgusting smile. "Ophelia? Why hellos! Goodness, goodness, I ams filthy." Emphasizing and adding an S to some words he speaks to you. He grabs a rag and attempts to clean his hands, then wipes drool and blood from his face with them. He's covered in spotted, dirty, clumped fur, especially along his legs and shoulders, with a longer patch on top of his leading down his back on his spine. The hair is shorter on his face and snout, except for a few long whiskers that poke out of his lips and along his chin. The shaggy fur recedes along his hands, leaving nearly thin fingers for precision in his trade. He wears only a pair of shorts and bones on a string on his thick and long neck. His ears are pierced, the left is tattered and they flap about independent of his head. His eyes are large and green and watch Ophelia with a sense of sincerity. He seems more like a dog than anything else. + + + Then, as if suddenly seeing you, "I knows you! The Tailors said you were coming. Yesh, yesh. I have here somewhere... I cuts and cures it long time ago, ready for yous. Just waits, waits." He walks around in circles on his large paws and sniffs at the air. "Yesh, yesh, I see its!" He stretches up and pulls something off a shelf. "They gives me nice shiny buckles for belts. I use the yellow ones this time. People like the yellow ones." He sounds like a child, a filthy terrifying child. "You reminds me. You reminds me of hims. You gots the smell. He goods man, you know. Others they think he crazy, but he nice, he nice to mes. Used to be hads to thinks. All the times. Hard. Now I just do these things and I gets all I wants. He nice man. Waits, first I gots to cleans." He dips the belt in some sort of oily liquid and then hands it to you. "He says to use the oils because somes don't like the smell. But yous get used to it. I thinks it smells good now. Also these. The Tailors said yous might like." He hands you a pair of leather arm bands. +> Back to the lift +You take the black belt and bands out of his hands and try to hold as little of them as possible, with a forced smile. The Tanner smiles back at you, oblivious of your disgust. + + +Ophelia takes your arm. "We have to go now." + + +The Tanner smiles at you. "Come backs to visit. And if yous wants armours, I cans make it. But laters." His tail wags and he waves at Ophelia. + + +Ophelia pulls you out of the room and walks off quickly, then runs after reaching the corner. + + +"I'm sorry. I just can't stand it. He's just so pitiful. I want to hate him, I really do, but I also feel an overwhelming sense of sorrow for him." Her face is white and her hold is gripping your arm so hard it hurts. Her face says not to talk about it anymore, but you have a feeling there's something that she's not telling you. + + +The smell diminishes as you get farther from the tannery. Once you reach the lift again you put on the belt and bracers, if just to buy some time before you have to step back on it. To your surprise the solution that the Tanner used actually seems to have worked. In fact, they have a slight leather smell, but otherwise are devoid of any discernible smell. + + +You're about to step back on the lift. If you want to ask Ophelia about the Tanner, now is the time. +> Ask Ophelia about the Tanner + + +For a second, you're not sure she heard your question. She just holds your arm and pulls you onto the lift. Just when you're about to ask again she answers in a quiet voice, holding her necklace in a tight fist. + + +"The Tanner is an animal. A nice, good-natured, even gentle thing, despite his appearance and the whispers of some, but an animal nonetheless. He isn't a man -- or maybe isn't one anymore. He can't make the decision to lie or even mislead. If you ask him a question he will answer to the best of his ability. He said you were like Zaren." She trails off. + + +You want to know why this scares her so much. Maybe you smell like Zaren or something. Ophelia seems to be afraid of him, but why would this bother her so much? You're about to ask when her nails dig into your arm deep enough to cause marks, but not blood. + + +"I don't want to talk about it. At least not now. Please." And that's all she'll say for now. A forced smile covers her anxious face. "Where to now?" She says, deftly changing the topic. "We've still got things to do yet." She lets go of your arm and lightly touches the mark. "I... Sorry." + + +The discussion seems to be over. You doubt she'll even respond if you ask again, so you respect the silence, though you are still confused. + + +The lift starts to move. "So, what's our next destination?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You take the black belt and bands out of his hands and try to hold as little of them as possible, with a forced smile. The Tanner smiles back at you, oblivious of your disgust. + + +Ophelia takes your arm. "We have to go now." + + +The Tanner smiles at you. "Come backs to visit. And if yous wants armours, I cans make it. But laters." His tail wags and he waves at Ophelia. + + +Ophelia pulls you out of the room and walks off quickly, then runs after reaching the corner. + + +"I'm sorry. I just can't stand it. He's just so pitiful. I want to hate him, I really do, but I also feel an overwhelming sense of sorrow for him." Her face is white and her hold is gripping your arm so hard it hurts. Her face says not to talk about it anymore, but you have a feeling there's something that she's not telling you. + + +The smell diminishes as you get farther from the tannery. Once you reach the lift again you put on the belt and bracers, if just to buy some time before you have to step back on it. To your surprise the solution that the Tanner used actually seems to have worked. In fact, they have a slight leather smell, but otherwise are devoid of any discernible smell. + + +You're about to step back on the lift. If you want to ask Ophelia about the Tanner, now is the time. +> Keep quiet +You close your mouth. She obviously doesn't want to talk about it and you still have things to do before Zaren... Does whatever Zaren does. + + +You play with the folds of your belt and you and Ophelia stand in silence for a moment. + + +"Thank you... I just... I'll explain it later. We've things to do now. I understand that things must be confusing for you -- it was for me, and even I had some experience with The Court before I joined it. It just... I've never done this before." Ophelia is quiet with this last sentence. "Zaren has people for this. I don't understand why he told me to help you. Then again, I don't understand why he does anything he does." + + +The lift starts to move again. + + +"Where to next?" + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Oh yes. I told you about the "fight" Zaren had. He got rid of all the doors in The Court, except for the large front doors to the palace. Apparently they "took his side". Without doors we lacked privacy, but Zaren didn't care. Probably didn't eve occur to him. But after a few years he had his brilliant idea; fake walls. No one had any idea he could do something like that, but I don't think it surprised anyone. That's why we check the walls. He can build them anywhere he wants, so we must be vigilant, vigilant always. It's tiring at first but you build up a habit eventually." + +"Doesn't it... Freak you out?" + +"At first it was a little strange, but after a year or two you don't even think about it anymore. You start to forget what doors look like." +> Tailor +"The Tailor? He's been here a very long time, longer than me, longer than most.... He used to be like us. I just barely remember it. He had another name too, but it's so far off I don't have an inkling what it could have been. Anyway he always had a talent for clothing, but he's had a lot of time to perfect his craft as well. Zaren decided he wanted to change The Court to something more like what you see now. He made the Tailor into what he is now so that he could... Well, so that he could be the Tailor. Zaren rubs off on people. He places the seeds of madness in our minds. The Tailor's soul was more fertile than most, but he still retained the appearance of reason. So he gladly accepted his changes and new role. He's happy with it, I think. One of few, but he has a long history here, and a possibly longer future." + + +"What... Is he?" + + +"Oh... That's your question. He's a silk worm. Part silk worm at least. At least he used to be a silk worm. I guess he's a moth now." + + +You don't really want to think about him anymore.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Now that's a good question. The short answer is: I don't know. Nobody does as far as I know. Except, perhaps, for Zaren, but I don't think he's likely to share that information, do you? You really never went through the slums?" Ophelia narrows her eyes suspiciously. + + +"I don't know what you mean." You answer truthfully. + + +"The slums are what they are. A broken down place infested with poverty and suffering. Everyone, nobility and peasants alike, appears in the slums. People don't really have children here. Pregnancy is extremely rare among the population, even over large periods of time. Most women will go their whole life without a child. Most pregnancies will end in miscarriages. Almost all of those carried to term will be stillborn. Of the handful of people over our whole history to be born here... I've never met one. I've heard that they turn out strangely, even compared to the average citizen. Nothing specific, just strange. There are rumours that Zaren is one, but I doubt a thing like him was even born, even in another place. To my knowledge there is no one older than Zaren alive today so I guess we'll never know. Anyway, people will simply "arrive" here instead. From somewhere else. Always... Well, you're the exception, but always in the slums. They're not a pleasant place. The slums are filled with screams and the raving of the mad. The "upper ranks" to which you now belong are comprised of the completely sane, or at least the sanest. Zaren... I don't think he's insane. I've known him too long. No, I think he just likes to watch us suffer in our own filth." + + +"So you can't tell me anything about where I am." + + +"No, I can tell you much about where we are. I just don't know where where we are is. I can't tell you anything about where any of us came from. Most people don't remember anything and even if they do it's after a long time of searching. But it just tears them apart. It's best to forget if you start remembering." + + +"But I... I remember.... Something." You're not sure. It's that faint form of memory, but vivid in strange places. More like a story that you've visualized. + + +"Forget it. Or if you can't forget it, ignore it. At the very least leave it alone. Do not go any further into that abyss." + + +But this memory is to real to forget. Ophelia looks at you, rolls her eyes, and sighs. "Okay. Tell me about it, but then that's it. Don't ever think you can make it farther into your own mind. It won't end well." + + +"I remember. I remember... " Words roll of your tongue as you look through the past towards the only memory you can find. +> Gray +It's soft. It's got pieces branching off of it. It's small and blandly coloured. The colours continue along tiny pieces, like somebody just cut some of it out. This one is small, but you know there are bigger ones. + +It's a feather. + +You hold it close and peer at it. It looked solid at first, but now you see the little bits of fluff. + +The sky is blue and clear and you can see all the birds flying through the skies. Ravens flap in the wind and caw far off. Little songbirds sit on tree branches and tweet songs. Rabbit bolt through every so often. + +It's an orchestra of the wild. + +There's a slight breeze and the smell of trees. Green is everywhere. Long pieces of grass feel soft under your feet. Leaves and flower buds cover trees. This is it. This is life. + +Then it's gone. You have it here in your head now, fixed and alive, something you'll remember. There's more... + +But that's gone, at least for now.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Now that's a good question. The short answer is: I don't know. Nobody does as far as I know. Except, perhaps, for Zaren, but I don't think he's likely to share that information, do you? You really never went through the slums?" Ophelia narrows her eyes suspiciously. + + +"I don't know what you mean." You answer truthfully. + + +"The slums are what they are. A broken down place infested with poverty and suffering. Everyone, nobility and peasants alike, appears in the slums. People don't really have children here. Pregnancy is extremely rare among the population, even over large periods of time. Most women will go their whole life without a child. Most pregnancies will end in miscarriages. Almost all of those carried to term will be stillborn. Of the handful of people over our whole history to be born here... I've never met one. I've heard that they turn out strangely, even compared to the average citizen. Nothing specific, just strange. There are rumours that Zaren is one, but I doubt a thing like him was even born, even in another place. To my knowledge there is no one older than Zaren alive today so I guess we'll never know. Anyway, people will simply "arrive" here instead. From somewhere else. Always... Well, you're the exception, but always in the slums. They're not a pleasant place. The slums are filled with screams and the raving of the mad. The "upper ranks" to which you now belong are comprised of the completely sane, or at least the sanest. Zaren... I don't think he's insane. I've known him too long. No, I think he just likes to watch us suffer in our own filth." + + +"So you can't tell me anything about where I am." + + +"No, I can tell you much about where we are. I just don't know where where we are is. I can't tell you anything about where any of us came from. Most people don't remember anything and even if they do it's after a long time of searching. But it just tears them apart. It's best to forget if you start remembering." + + +"But I... I remember.... Something." You're not sure. It's that faint form of memory, but vivid in strange places. More like a story that you've visualized. + + +"Forget it. Or if you can't forget it, ignore it. At the very least leave it alone. Do not go any further into that abyss." + + +But this memory is to real to forget. Ophelia looks at you, rolls her eyes, and sighs. "Okay. Tell me about it, but then that's it. Don't ever think you can make it farther into your own mind. It won't end well." + + +"I remember. I remember... " Words roll of your tongue as you look through the past towards the only memory you can find. +> Black +They're big, much bigger than you. The big thing in the middle has pieces coming, and more off of those pieces. They're black. + +They're trees. Dead trees. + +You smell the air. Cold. Ashy. Fire, savage fire, has destroyed this haven of nature. But it's nature's way. + +You feel sad. + +You sit on a fallen tree. The fire is gone. Even the ground is cold now. + +You look up and see the sky. Gray. Ready to rain its tears on this dead place and put out any of the remaining flames. Little drops already dot the the air. A few fall on your head, as if nature is reassuring you. + +They mix with your tears, clearing paths through the soot on your face. + +This place is special. You loved something here. What? + +Then it's gone. You have it here in your head now, fixed and alive, something you'll remember. There's more... + +But that's gone, at least for now.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The heavy blade is laying on the ground. + +Your heart beats. + +You survey the fight. + +It's a giant mass of men screaming in a variety of different emotions. Joy here, fear there. You can see spectres spectating, watchers watching, and shadows spectating as well, because what else would they do? Be serious. + +With all the chaos, if you crouched you could conceivably have more cover. A lower center of gravity would also be a benefit. A quick roll would provide more cover and speed, but lack the same control. The ground, while littered with weapons and bodies, has a clear path to your weapon. You could try to crawl there. This would provide the most cover, but you risk being stepped on, and what you gain in cover you give up in speed. + +Beat. + +Move now, or risk danger for another look around. +> Crawl +The muscles holding you up loosen and you fall down. + +Beat. + +Your knees hit the sand and throw up little flecks. You hear a whistling sound. + +Beat. + +The rest of you falls forward, hands moving in position to cushion your fall. + +Beat. + +An arrow, bright and deadly, glides over you. + +Beat. + +You catch the ground and embrace it, pushing forward with your legs. + +Beat. Beat. + +The battle rages. Hand and elbow crawl forward as you make your way slowly to your weapon. Someone steps backwards into your path. You punch their leg and they fall out of the way. There is no mercy in this moment. Someone else tries to step backwards, but trips over you and falls. Almost there. Your hand is on your weapon now. + +Beat. Beat. Beat. + +You jump up and swing the blade around. You catch someone just barely on the back of their arm; you run them through and cleanly pull out the blade. In this small space no one can respect the length of the sword, so you kick a few people to clear a space. Something catches you in the side of your head and you fall down and... is that.... bloood.....<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The heavy blade is laying on the ground. + +Your heart beats. + +You survey the fight. + +It's a giant mass of men screaming in a variety of different emotions. Joy here, fear there. You can see spectres spectating, watchers watching, and shadows spectating as well, because what else would they do? Be serious. + +With all the chaos, if you crouched you could conceivably have more cover. A lower center of gravity would also be a benefit. A quick roll would provide more cover and speed, but lack the same control. The ground, while littered with weapons and bodies, has a clear path to your weapon. You could try to crawl there. This would provide the most cover, but you risk being stepped on, and what you gain in cover you give up in speed. + +Beat. + +Move now, or risk danger for another look around. +> Roll +Your arms start the long journey up. Your head lowers to meet them. + +Beat. + +An arrow shines between the blood and the laughter, then disappears. + +One leg contracts to bring your body in and the other pushes to give you your momentum. Your heel leaves the sand, then just your toes make contact with the ground, then you're in the air.. + +Beat. + +Your arms cover your head and you bring up one leg. The other pushes as you lean forward and bring your body low and ready for contact with the ground. + +Beat. + +Something rips through the skin in your left arm, leaving a relatively shallow wound. + + +Beat. + +Beat. Beat. + +Your body falls and hits the ground, and with a little effort, the roll is completed. + +Beat. Beat. Beat. + +You reach the sword and grab it as your legs push you up. You bring the sword up and around to stand between you and the man in front of you. + +Another man with a smaller blade tries to stab your side. Your larger blade leaves little time to parry it and even less to regain balance, so you side step instead and let your movement swing the heavy sword around in his direction. He jumps back and knocks your blade just enough to leave him unscathed. Now that you're out of his range, you thrust foward and neatly catch his arm as he tries to avoid the attack. You push foward further and to the right, catching his torso. As you pull back the blade, he collaspes, eyes shut in pain at first, then open as he roars in laughter. + +All around you people are dying. Bodies litter the ground and few are left. Such a waste of life. The violent ones are dead, leaving the survivors to look across at each other in both suspicision and dread. + +Silence comes across the arena. + +The shades gather at the edges and stare at you. One sits alone, on a throne of burning night. It opens its mouth.... + +"NO! NO! NO NO NO NO! Please, stop! I beg of you!" You plead and cover your ears, but that doesn't alleviate the shattering misery the shade spouts. + +You writhe, you writhe, on the ground, tears streaming and blood leaking from your nose and the shades scream and scream and it hurts your heart so close to bursting you thrash and cry and pray but the anthem continues as others join in and they file into the sands as you see through blurry bloody eyes and surround you and rip you apart rip you apart rip you apart fingers and limbs and organs and blood so much blood and the shadows the shadows they scream and scream and scream and...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The heavy blade is laying on the ground. + +Your heart beats. + +You survey the fight. + +It's a giant mass of men screaming in a variety of different emotions. Joy here, fear there. You can see spectres spectating, watchers watching, and shadows spectating as well, because what else would they do? Be serious. + +With all the chaos, if you crouched you could conceivably have more cover. A lower center of gravity would also be a benefit. A quick roll would provide more cover and speed, but lack the same control. The ground, while littered with weapons and bodies, has a clear path to your weapon. You could try to crawl there. This would provide the most cover, but you risk being stepped on, and what you gain in cover you give up in speed. + +Beat. + +Move now, or risk danger for another look around. +> Look + +Your eyes flicker and see everything on the battlefield. + +Beat. Beat. + +Recognition flashes for but a brief moment, as you see the sun shining on the arrow that procedes to catch your throat and rip through flesh to find sweet death. Blood spurts out and you drift into blackness. It feels like an eternity but some part of you knows it's only a beat or two before you die. + +Beat. Beat. + +Now death is all that is left in your eyes as all traces of you meld into the sands and you are swept away from existence.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your heart beats. + +You stand in an great amphitheatre, on shifting sands. It's quiet for but a moment, and then the clashes of weapons rings out in great echoes, with cheery yells of murder providing a bass quality. Smiles flash all around as people hack or are hacked about and nothing but snorts of laughter without the barest hint of pain accompany the carnage. + +Sprays of blood float on the air. Spilled guts and limbs sink deep into the sands. Heads laughing are choking on sand and sweet blood spills out of their lifeless bodies. + +You smell gore in the air and it clouds your thoughts. Little droplets rain down in your vision. You count each as they pass. Some spray in the corner of your eye hits your cheek and you can taste the liquid life. + +Liquid life. + +Life. + +You're alive. + +Where is your weapon? +> An axe in the hands of the man to your left +The man next to you screams and whacks a corpse on the ground with your simple battle axe. He smiles and pulls himself up to grip the weapon with two hands and bring it down over the head of another distracted man. + +Your heart beats. + +You spare a quick glance over the rest of the battlefield. + +Men fight all around you, clanging metal and shrieking warriors ringing in your ears. There's laughter, joy, fear, and hatred in those screams. Shadows stand all around the raised edge of the arena, perfectly still. + +You need a weapon in your hands, something to defend yourself against this writhing mass of life and death. You need your axe; it's yours. It fits perfectly in your hand and bites at the flesh of your enemies like a loyal dog. There is no question: you must get it back. + +Beat. + +The man is chopping here and there and everywhere. He's not even holding your axe right. + +Beat. + +Attack him now and rely on your skills, or sneak up behind him? +> Attack now! +You rush, hoping to catch him unaware. He swings the axe around to his right and slashes another man. + +Beat. + +Your feet both push you forward and you put your hands into the perfect position to attack himand grab the handle of the axe. Both feet leave the ground and propel you into the man. + +Beat. + +Your right hand curls to give him a brutal punch with all your weight in his throat. Your left hand opens to grab the axe before he can swing it around to you. + +Beat. + +Beat. Beat. + +Beat. Beat. Beat. + +Your fist makes contact with him and he falls back a bit, his face twisting in pain. You grab the handle of the axe and wrench it from his grasp as he's weak. Your fist only glances his neck and he recovers quickly to tug back at the axe and kick your shins. You quickly push him off and bring the axe down while he's still weak, but he blocks his face with one arm. There's a sickening thud as you bury it into his shoulder. He tries to pull it out and push you away as adrenaline covers his pain, but you elbow him in the face and kick him to the ground as you pull out the axe. + +Laughter takes him and he thrashes about on the ground. You sink the axe into his back and he stops moving, but that laughter continues. You're just about to end his pathetic life when an arrow catches your leg and tears open a huge gash. You collapse onto one knee and drop the axe as someone stabs you with a sword. The end sticks out of your left side and blood flows as the sword is pulled back. You lie on the ground and something bubbles inside of you. + +Well now, isn't that funny. You didn't get it before , but now... + +It's too much and you giggle until you can't breathe, but even when you try to stop and take a breath all you can feel is that hole in your torso. The other man grabs your hand and lets out a shriek, squeezes, and then his smile is stuck on his dead face. You can't help it. You smile too. And laugh. And laugh and laugh until a sword somehow finds its way into your eye. Woopsy daisy. How'd that get in there?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The man next to you screams and whacks a corpse on the ground with your simple battle axe. He smiles and pulls himself up to grip the weapon with two hands and bring it down over the head of another distracted man. + +Your heart beats. + +You spare a quick glance over the rest of the battlefield. + +Men fight all around you, clanging metal and shrieking warriors ringing in your ears. There's laughter, joy, fear, and hatred in those screams. Shadows stand all around the raised edge of the arena, perfectly still. + +You need a weapon in your hands, something to defend yourself against this writhing mass of life and death. You need your axe; it's yours. It fits perfectly in your hand and bites at the flesh of your enemies like a loyal dog. There is no question: you must get it back. + +Beat. + +The man is chopping here and there and everywhere. He's not even holding your axe right. + +Beat. + +Attack him now and rely on your skills, or sneak up behind him? +> Sneak up on him +You quickly move around a few fights and dodge a few weak attacks, making your way to the man. + +Beat. + +He's still whacking into a corpse, though a different one now. His back is to you... It's the perfect time to strike. + +Beat. + +You lift your hands and go flying into his body, slamming him forward. + +Beat. Beat. Beat. + +Before he can respond your arms are wrapped around his neck from behind. The fool drops your axe on his foot so he can claw at your arms. Chokes and screams are stuck in his throat and there's a wheezing sound; the only air he can get out, and none of it goes back in. You give another squeeze. He beats against your body with one hand, but lacks to strength to do any damage, already fading. + +Suddenly, something hits you in the leg. You collaspe onto the man and look to it. An arrow is sprouting from your leg like a plant in the dirt. At the sudden shock of it you let go of the man and he tries to turn around. Before either of you realize what's happening your hand is on the axe and the axe flying to towards his head... And then his head is flying off by itself. The warm blood hits you like a geyser. You roll around and sit up. + +Another arrow grows in your shoulder. You aren't sure when that happened. You can barely feel it now, barely feel anything. A gurgle and a giggle are swallowed by blood in your mouth, when you realize there's another arrow there. You fall back, trying to laugh and just barely managed to make a sound. You're drowning now... Drowning in your own blood... And losing to much of it... And... + +It's... Funny. Funny. Haha funny. And then it's nothing, nothing but black.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Colourful fine carpets cover all the walls, some more rugs hanging over them in turn. + +The carpets are like a dark, dull rainbow. The carpet itself is black, with colours seeming floating over it like a reflection in water. The colours swirl and mix and seperate so slowly you have to careful look before you see the emerging patterns of dancing colours.. You watch a batch of a grey blue twirl around with concentrated yellow and green drops, absorbing them. + +The rugs draped over them like curtains over imaginary windows are stationary pictures of outfits, each in a different pose. They continue from down the walls onto the floor and a few hang from the ceiling. You recognize a few outfits, but what really catches your eye is the one hidden on the far left, the one that looks just like Zaren's black finery. It's the only one with a person in the clothes. + +Zaren's in it, posed elegantly in his black and gold coat. His arms are raised as if to greet you, but his face perfectly shows his comtempt at your very existance. All but his eyes, which are laughing. You do not know if the contempt is the joke. + +There is a man behind that insanity, you are sure of it. Whether the insanity is a cover or not, you do not know. + +You look back at the swirling patterns. They are starting to resemble pictures now, just barely, but the proper shades are coming in... +> A library +Hundreds of volumes of large tomes cover shelves that reach up to the very high ceiling. You are in narrow crack between two long shelves. You walk through the space between the shelves, trailing your hands on the book. The shelves are so close you can't help but bump into a book here and there. The shelves are so large and heavy they don't make even the slighest movement when you fall against one accidently. + +You've tripped over a ladder. It's laid along the ground, edges from shelf to shelf, the same kind as there is in every other row. They were used to reach the books once, but no one reads these records anymore. Now they just keep the space between the shelves uniform. Those maps hate being in the same place as the other non fiction and always try to push the shelves apart. + + +The books are all a dull green, faded from dust and time. They are larger than usual. Each one is about as wide as your palm and the same length as your arms. They are stuffed in very tightly, leaving not one inch of space. You wouldn't want to have the job of putting them into the shelves. + +You reach one end of the row. There's next to no room between the wall and the shelf, but you manage to squeeze through. The rows of shelves seem to go on forever in this direction. You use the next row to turn around and face the other way. The shelves end a few rows up, so you head that direction. You come out into a small space between a shelf and the grey stone wall. + +There's a door here you could try it but it's locked. Oh. There's also another small shelf here at the end of the row. You look at the small selection it has. Most are records of the books in this library. They include just a topic and a number. There are too many books to even list the names in this tiny shelf. + +Three books that are not records draw your attention. +> Pick up the small brown book +You pick up the small brown book. Its wretched condition is something compared to even the oldest and worst kept tomes you've seen.You take out a sheet of paper to record its name. + +The ratty cover nearly comes off when you lift it to turn to the first page. There's no title or author listed, just a strange star design in the center of the page. You copy onto another piece of paper with your fountain pen the design as best you can and place it beside you so you can request another copy of whatever this book is. + +You turn the page as carefully as you can. The thin paper seems almost as if to look at it would shred it. + +It's another design. With your vast experience what? in many different languages and the writing of many different authors, in the books prior to the invention of the printing press of course, you can easily see that the symbols were of the same hand. You turn the pages, seeing nothing but strange symbols belonging to no language you can recognize. Even then, it should have repeated characters, but each design is different, leading you to believe it is no language, simply meaningless symbols. + +The next page is torn in the center where the symbol would be. Through the hole you can the next page is blank. + +You check the torn page; it's a violent rip but does not look in danger of growing and the rest of the page is blank anyway. + +But there's something about that blank page... + +You look at it carefully. There! A shape! A rip! A tear! That wasn't you, you're careful. You haven't ripped a page in... Well, it's been so long you've forgotten. + +That's not a rip though... It's growing, like a burn. You set the book down away from the others to keep the fire from spreading but... It's not hot. It's not smoking. Still, the pages burn through. + +Fiery shapes grow... Why, it's almost moving... It's beautiful. You can't.... You can't look away. + +The ash blows up through the windless air and the sparks bloom into flowers of fire. It's an inferno bubble around you. Your skin burns and blackens and crackles. You can see through the fire now.... In the fire now... It's...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Hundreds of volumes of large tomes cover shelves that reach up to the very high ceiling. You are in narrow crack between two long shelves. You walk through the space between the shelves, trailing your hands on the book. The shelves are so close you can't help but bump into a book here and there. The shelves are so large and heavy they don't make even the slighest movement when you fall against one accidently. + +You've tripped over a ladder. It's laid along the ground, edges from shelf to shelf, the same kind as there is in every other row. They were used to reach the books once, but no one reads these records anymore. Now they just keep the space between the shelves uniform. Those maps hate being in the same place as the other non fiction and always try to push the shelves apart. + + +The books are all a dull green, faded from dust and time. They are larger than usual. Each one is about as wide as your palm and the same length as your arms. They are stuffed in very tightly, leaving not one inch of space. You wouldn't want to have the job of putting them into the shelves. + +You reach one end of the row. There's next to no room between the wall and the shelf, but you manage to squeeze through. The rows of shelves seem to go on forever in this direction. You use the next row to turn around and face the other way. The shelves end a few rows up, so you head that direction. You come out into a small space between a shelf and the grey stone wall. + +There's a door here you could try it but it's locked. Oh. There's also another small shelf here at the end of the row. You look at the small selection it has. Most are records of the books in this library. They include just a topic and a number. There are too many books to even list the names in this tiny shelf. + +Three books that are not records draw your attention. +> Pick up the grey book +You pick up the grey book. With just that slight movement a huge cloud appears. As you discover through the huge dust cloud and your tears, it's actually a very old blue book, not grey. + +You walk through the cloud, past the door, and sit down where the air is clearer. You open up the blue book to the first page. In large flowery letters the title is written, "The Journals of Pip: Volume 8". Below that, "His Search For the History of the Colour Blue". + +You turn the page to read tiny block letters. + +"In his first year of journal writing, three years before his first published novel, "Theories on the Disappearance of Gravity During the Great Regression" (since which it has been discovered that spontaneously reverting the universe to a previous state may cause gravity to turn into small quantities of gravy, one of the outlined theories connecting the disappearance with the large increase in gravy mining during the years affected), Pip completed a few journals. One of these was a detailed plan and record of his three month long search for the nature and history of the colour blue. In the following pages you will see his journey as he discovers blue." + +"I have tracked it to a cave near the Grinning Stones. At first their wide mouths and the little giggles unnerved me, but I have grown used to their strange habits now. It has been nearly a week since I have seen it enter the cave, but I know it is in there. I hear the little snores before I sleep, "blu-o-o-o-o-o-o-o.... blu-o-o-o-o-o-o-o..." it calls. At dawn it will wake me up with a "Cocklebluedoblue!" + +You close the book. You just can't read through this radical nonsense. You've read through Pip's research; it's very good. But the man obviously has some trouble telling reality from fiction in his everyday life. You've been to the Grinning Stones; there are no caves anywhere near that region. It's too bad, he was a smart man. A little jerky and obsessive, but smart nonetheless. + +But you have to admit, those stones are creepy, especially at night. + +You pick it up and start on the... long, long journey, to row J786.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Hundreds of volumes of large tomes cover shelves that reach up to the very high ceiling. You are in narrow crack between two long shelves. You walk through the space between the shelves, trailing your hands on the book. The shelves are so close you can't help but bump into a book here and there. The shelves are so large and heavy they don't make even the slighest movement when you fall against one accidently. + +You've tripped over a ladder. It's laid along the ground, edges from shelf to shelf, the same kind as there is in every other row. They were used to reach the books once, but no one reads these records anymore. Now they just keep the space between the shelves uniform. Those maps hate being in the same place as the other non fiction and always try to push the shelves apart. + + +The books are all a dull green, faded from dust and time. They are larger than usual. Each one is about as wide as your palm and the same length as your arms. They are stuffed in very tightly, leaving not one inch of space. You wouldn't want to have the job of putting them into the shelves. + +You reach one end of the row. There's next to no room between the wall and the shelf, but you manage to squeeze through. The rows of shelves seem to go on forever in this direction. You use the next row to turn around and face the other way. The shelves end a few rows up, so you head that direction. You come out into a small space between a shelf and the grey stone wall. + +There's a door here you could try it but it's locked. Oh. There's also another small shelf here at the end of the row. You look at the small selection it has. Most are records of the books in this library. They include just a topic and a number. There are too many books to even list the names in this tiny shelf. + +Three books that are not records draw your attention. +> Pick up the gigantic green and gold book +You place your hands over the gigantic book. It has a smooth and soft cover. Hands on the sides of it you strain to lift the thing, but settle for sliding it out instead. You sit down by the door so you can place the thing on your lap + + +You turn it around and lift the cover. Inside is written I can't understand this language "Sinful Lake" in large, golden letters on a black page. It's written in the formal language of birds that are red. You'd think that birds, even just red birds, would only need a single language to communicate, but you must admit, you like the formal language over the everyday filth they will typically squak in. It's a good thing both languages are part of their education system. + + +You turn the page. There is a diagram of a regular looking oak tree in white and more golden writing. + + +"Quercus miaxia, also known as the Sinful Oak, is a species of oak tree that exists solely in the region of Sinful Lake. It is the only thing that will grow anywhere within a mile of the stagnant, murky waters. They often grow much denser and taller than other oak trees, but besides that, their diet, and their peculiar taste in soil, they are nearly indistinguishable from Quercus prinus. The Sinful Line is the tree line beyond which they cannot survive. It creates a very noticable change between thick forestation and bare plains. + + +Boring + + +You flip ahead a few pages. + + +However, there has been some controversy over their diet. They have been known to trap smaller prey with the use of a sap that first traps them and with an oxydizing process begins to digest in a very slow manner. The tree will then grow around the trapped prey, which is often still alive through most of the process. After the prey is absorbed the tree will shrink down around the space the prey has left, with only the bones of the prey remaining. Certain logs found with the bones of what is agreed to be a extinct canine species with a bone structure remarkably similar to humans in the center is the cause of some very unfortunate rumours for us who study these awe inspiring trees. + + +These rumours that they can trap and eat humans are completely unfounded. The numerous expeditions that into the Sinful Lake region that have disappeared are agreed to have traveled through the Lake into a little known bed and breakfast that exists on the other side. Numerous letters and records are listed in volume 2 and 3 of this series to prove this. + + +You flip back to the beginning. "Sinful Lake". Under that in very tiny letters it reads "A study by Quercus miaxia Bob". + + +You pick up the book with some effort and make your way to row A139 to replace it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Oh my. Now that is a very good question. But here comes the Tailor." She turns around and curtsies towards the door. + + +"What -" You stand there speechless. + + +A man walks into the room and bows, a spotless fine black coat shimmering around his white furry torso, four furry little limbs poking out of the coat. They are end in three long, delicate fingers with little hairs at the base and bare human-like tips. His hairy legs have the same pattern, with his feet looking almost normal. Large wings are folded at his back, trailing on the floor. + + +His large black eyes poke out from his white fur and his human jaw opens to speak in a slightly buzzing voice. + + +"Hello, good lord. I am the tailor. I must say, your eyes are a wonderful colour. Such a light but intense brown. They will be a challenge to match correctly, but I will enjoy creating your outfits for you." + + +"What..." You take a step back, bumping into a mannequin and accidently knocking it over. + + +"You will have to work on your coordination if you plan to be part of The Court. Dancing is quite popular here. But even if you fall or some such thing, you will look wonderful. Still, that is not my job. Now come over here, I must measure you. Take a look around at the outfits. You may find one you like." + + + Ophelia stares at you and gestures. You timidly take a few steps forward. + + +The tailor places his finger tips on your arms, mummering to himself. "Don't you need measuring tape for this?" You ask. + + +"Measuring tape? Bah, I am better then the tailors you have known. A true master can look at a man for a second and make him a god within minutes." + + +"I've never known any tailors." + + +"Well then trust me, I am the best. Now lift your arms please?" As he slides his hands around your arms and chest you look away, uncomfortable. +> Look at Ophelia + +She's watching the Tailor as he measures your body. You look at her stunning eyes, bright but deep, as they follow the Tailor's hands. They are framed by thin eyebrows, bunched forward as if in intense thought. Her light cheekbones are high in her face and her cheeks thin. Her strong chin leads into weak jaw lines, disappearing in the thick black hair that caves over her thin shoulders and covers the neck of her grey dress. + +Her dress is long, covering everything from her wrists to her ankles, but tight around her torso, while loose at her legs. It's not meant to be a showy thing, but the way it fits against her skin reveals her beauty better than the poofy gold decorations that she carries under her right arm now. + + The Tailor starts feeling the width of your legs from the calves down and you resist the urge to squirm in... it's?... grasp. + +Ophelia looks back at you. +> Smile +You smile at her, not a large, joyful smile, but a small smile of thanks. You would have never thought you'd enjoy having a woman stare at your naked body in such a circumstance, but without her here you would probably freak out at the furry hands that are measuring your thighs and climbing higher. You take a deep breath. Just calm down.... + +The tailor reachs up to your hips and you let out a low squeak against your will. + +Ophelia laughs so quietly you almost doubt she did. But her smirk confirms your hearing. + + +> All Finished +You relax as the Tailor stops his rubbing and moves back. "You are quite a splendid fit for many of my discarded outfits! Now wait here. I will bring some of them out for you to try on, and we'll see what you like and what looks best on you." + + +You feel a little cold with your skin bare against the frigid air, and definitely a little awkward about standing naked in some castle's hallway. + + +Ophelia asks you something, but you're deep in thought. + + +"What?" + + +"Before you ask me anything you should know that most of the inhabitants will tell the king if you insult him or his system in anyway. I can answer some of your questions later, once I show you to your quarters, but if you need to know anything right now, ask before the Tailor returns. I've never known him to be a 'loyal' subject, but considering self preservation... He enjoys his life here, unlike much of the other nobility. So do you have any questions about this place?" +> The Tailor +Before you have time to ask any questions the Tailor waddles back in, carrying all kinds of clothing of many materials and colours. + + +"These are what you can wear for now, while I create your outfit. Please, sir, while I sort these take a look around. Find something you like. Samples are on the mannequins and the carpets. Changes can be made easily if you wish. Pick one thing please. After it is completed you will likely need to see the others, so a proper wardobe can wait until you return to pick up your clothing." + + +You look around the room, noticing the colourful tapestries hanging from the walls and the ceiling. They are pictures of different outfits of many different styles. You recognize a few outfits from your brief dance, but the one you really see is hidden on the far left. It looks just like Zaren's black clothing. It's the only one with a person in the clothes. + + +He's in it, posed elegantly in his black and gold coat. His arms are raised as if to hug you and his eyes smile and laugh as if at a joke, but the rest of his face shows nothing but disdain.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> +She's watching the Tailor as he measures your body. You look at her stunning eyes, bright but deep, as they follow the Tailor's hands. They are framed by thin eyebrows, bunched forward as if in intense thought. Her light cheekbones are high in her face and her cheeks thin. Her strong chin leads into weak jaw lines, disappearing in the thick black hair that caves over her thin shoulders and covers the neck of her grey dress. + +Her dress is long, covering everything from her wrists to her ankles, but tight around her torso, while loose at her legs. It's not meant to be a showy thing, but the way it fits against her skin reveals her beauty better than the poofy gold decorations that she carries under her right arm now. + + The Tailor starts feeling the width of your legs from the calves down and you resist the urge to squirm in... it's?... grasp. + +Ophelia looks back at you. +> Turn away +You turn away. You're not exactly at your most confident while you're naked and some... moth thing is poking you all over. You can't build up the nerve to look at the Tailor either, so you just stare into space while he plies his trade. + +A slight buzzing comes from the Tailor's... lips? He turns his head and looks at you from different angles. + +"Hold your arm up. Yes. Please. Okay. Good... I think I have an idea now. Hmm. Something red would look wonderful on you... What do you think? What is your favourite colour? Style? We're in a lull in proper style currently." He speaks fast and leaves no space to answer his questions. "Good for creative expressions, it looks rather silly I think, but Zaren..." The Tailor's face falls. "Nevermind."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Are you sure we should be doing this?” the nervous voice of your best friend, Harlan, asks. + +“Of course. I can do whatever I want," you reply. + +“What if the King finds out?” + +“Ha! So what? I’ll deal with him. There’s not much he can do to me that he hasn't tried before.” + +"It’s not you I’m worried about...” + +Though you wouldn’t admit it out loud, you know Harlan is right. Being the second-born prince of the Brelia Kingdom had its benefits. Unfortunately for Harlan, he wasn't afforded the same privilege and would likely be punished much more severely. + +You both sat at the bar in one of the city’s shadiest taverns, The Dancing Goat. Lately, you've become somewhat of a regular. You always wore rugged attire, but its patrons somehow assumed you were nobility, probably because you never argued on price like most everyone else. Once a week, The Goat held fights and it wasn't uncommon for the matches to end in death. After weeks of being thoroughly entertained in the crowd, you were ready to test yourself in the ring. + +“Hey, pretty boy. Are you ready to pop your cherry?” the announcer’s ragged voice resonates over the bar noise. + +You empty your cups contents. + +“If you have anyone skilled enough to challenge me.” + +"The brash ignorance of youth!" the announcer replies. "You're not the first soft face to wander in here. Most don't leave as pretty as they come in." + +"I intend to stay this good-looking for awhile, old man," you reply. + +A burly hand grabs your arm and drags you into the circle of a screaming mob. Looking around, you see the drunken faces of screaming gamblers. Standing your opposite and a full head higher, you instantly recognize your opponent. That’s the fucking champion, you think to yourself. His heavily muscled frame is marked with numerous scars. His eyes meet yours and upon sizing you up, the corner of his lip curls into a grin. + +"Ladies and gentlemen! Our very own nobleman has finally grown a pair. I just hope he remembered to clean his fingernails for the occasion (the crowd laughs). Who will welcome him to the pit? A man that needs no introduction. A man that has never been defeated. The champion, Carthus!" + +At the mention of his name, Carthus lets loose a primal scream and beats his chest in pride. The crowd roars into a frenzy at the sight of the monstrous champion. + +“Fight!” + +Carthus rushes at you like a crazed bull. You're unsuprised by his tactics and quickly get a feel for the man's combat prowess. An untrained man of his size, he depends upon superior strength to compensate for lack of technique. You easily side step his mad charge, tagging him with a right hook on the way past. Angered by the blow, Carthus turns to you and starts a second charge. + +You stand still until he’s almost upon you. Just before he reaches you, your arm underhooks his shoulder and you use his momentum to swing onto his back. You throw hard elbows to the back of his head to soften him up a bit. Dazed by your blows, you slip your arm underneath his chin and lock the choke with both arms. He bucks and grabs at you with both hands in attempt to throw you off. Holding with all your strength, you press your body into his and wrap your legs around his massive frame to keep your center of gravity even with his. + +“Arghh!” you yell as Carthus bucks and flails around the ring. + +After a few moments, the lack of air gets to him and you feel his body begin to go limp. His body falls to the ground with an earth-shaking thud. You're careful not to be squished by the falling giant. + +“Victory! Nobleman!” + +“Pour me another drink and bring on the next challenger!” you shout to the cheering crowd. +> The Next Morning +You feel the events of last night as you wake up. The massive bed, filled with pillows and silk sheets, offers little relief to your pulsing headache. Natalie sure as hell enjoys it though. You didn’t exactly plan for things with the house-servant to escalate this far. The two of you were childhood friends ever since her mother became a handmaiden to your mother, Queen Laurine. + +“Nat,” you gently nudge her awake. “Think you could scoot over a bit to give me more blanket?” + +With a soft moan she shifts her weight, loosening slack on the covers. She finishes the movement by pressing her bare skin against yours. Overwhelmed by her soft skin and aroma, you briefly forget about your headache and parched throat. Just as you make your move, someone knocks on the door. You ignore it, but another knock echoes in the room. Cursing, you grab a robe from the floor and make your way to the bedroom door. The morning coolness stings your bare feet on the marble floor. Sunlight shining through the sheer, satin drapes reminds you again of the headache. Creaking the door open, you see one of the house servants. + +“Samuel, what are you doing here?” you ask. + +“Prince, you are required in the court,” he replies. + +“What do they want? They rarely ask for me.” + +“Not sure, prince. It sounds important though. All the upper nobility are there including Baron Reginald and Duke Kane.” + +“Fine. Inform them I'll be there shortly.” + +With a nod, Samuel turns and walks down the hall. You slam the door shut, completely waking Natalie up in the process. + +“What — you’re already leaving me?” she playfully whines. + +“Sorry, Nat. It's a shame their precious first-born, Urijah, is away otherwise they’d summon him instead. It must be important if they’re not willing to wait for his return.” + +“Well don’t take too long. You and I have unfinished business here.” + +Fully exposing herself, she slides out from beneath the covers. Her hair length is almost enough to conceal her chest. You smile, thankful it wasn't grown out more. + +“You must be on guard when approaching the court.” she warns gliding closer towards you. “Dangerous people seek to occupy places of power.” + +With her final word she reaches for a dagger on the nightstand. The blade makes a shrill sound as its razor sharp edge is revealed. In a quick motion, she thrusts the point towards your throat. Despite your poor condition, instinct takes over. Ducking from the thrust, you grab her hand around the hilt and twist backwards, forcing the dagger from her hand and pinning her against the wall. + +“Dangerous people are everywhere,” you whisper from behind. +> The Royal Court +A little later you make your way to the throne room. Hopefully Nat's distraction didn't make you too late. You swing open the heavy double doors and instantly see Queen Laurine's scowl upon your tardiness. Figuring it would be better to draw less attention, you take the first open seat at the back of the room. + +King Orson and Queen Laurine sit upon their thrones in front of rows of extravagantly-dressed noblemen and women. In the front row you eye the backs of Duke Kane and Baron Reginald. Both held incredible military might and seemingly endless wealth. It's no surprise they have the best seats as both were instrumental in the growth and defense of the kingdom. + +Duke Kane's Order of Knights were the best trained warriors in Brelia. More than a few times, King Orson called upon them to protect the kingdom. As far as you knew, the Duke was loyal to the throne. His son, Garrick, was highly regarded for his weapon mastery and dueling ability. + +Baron Reginald was more of a loose cannon. His background in politics and trade meant he relied upon his guile rather than raw physical strength. The Baron was a well-informed man. Nothing stayed a secret from him long. For that reason, you’ve always kept a safe distance away from his daughter, Caitlyn. + +“...they have grown too bold. We must show them the military might of Brelia!” the baron's voice rings out over the crowd. + +“Nonsense Reginald," Duke Kane interjects. "Moving soldiers near to the border would look like an invasion force on Rath. We have been at peace for a decade now. We don’t need to give them cause for another war. Besides, Prince Urijah is on a diplomatic mission in Rath. We risk losing the heir to the throne if we assemble soldiers near the border.” + +“We can’t just allow our villages to burn! My King, we must act!” the Baron replies heated. + +King Orson holds a hand up, silencing the crowd from growing louder. He stands from the throne and paces a few times back and forth as if in an internal debate. His fingers find his lengthy beard in thought. After a few moments, he looks up and addresses the court. + +“We must not act in a way that would appear aggressive to the Nation of Rath," he speaks. "Many of our countrymen died in the war and I would not dare compromise their sacrifice—” + +“—but my King!” Baron Reginald interjects. + +Orson silences him with another wave of his hand. + +“Your King is speaking. You would remember your place, Baron,” the king icily spoke, “I will not forsake our citizens to invaders, bandits, slavers, or anyone else. I will send a small company of soldiers led by my own son to discover the threat at our borders. I will not put the heir in danger by sending a full battalion. My second born will scout and report back. Then we will decide the best course of action. If Rath has betrayed our peace treaty, then they will face the full might of Brelia. My son, step forward.” + +Shaken by the King’s command, you rise from your chair and walk towards the front of the room. At this point, every eye in the room is fixed upon you. + +“My son. You have heard the trial placed before you. Along with a few of my elite soldiers, you will travel to the western border and discover the source of these attacks. I am taking a risk sending the second born while the heir is on a diplomatic mission, but there is no one I trust greater to accomplish this task. I will not be the only parent taking such a risk. Garrick, son of Kane, and Caitlyn, daughter of the Baron, step forward. You will accompany the prince. The court understands the threat of our border is something that cannot be ignored. You will depart at first light.” +> Journey to the western border +A small company of a dozen well-armed soldiers ride behind you in two rows of six. You ride in the lead with Garrick to your right and Caitlyn to your left. You do your best, unsuccessfully, to ignore the way she gracefully rides. Her blonde hair flows behind her as if soft waves rippling on the shore. The morning chill makes the journey’s start less enjoyable. Even more so when you imagine the warmth of Natalie in your bed. The soldiers ride stoic and alert, not telling jokes or sharing stories. Talking is kept at a minimum to limit distraction from potential threats. + +The soldiers, donned with light leather armor, carry a variety of weapons between them. Each has a melee and ranged weapon. Some have bows strung over their shoulder with small bucklers on their back. Others carry throwing spears to compliment their battle axes. Though deadly, you were confident your combat skills surpassed theirs. Your father ensured you started training from the moment you could walk. There isn't much you remember of your childhood beyond the endless hours training with the weapon masters. They made sure you mastered every weapon, to always be deadly and effective no matter the circumstance. Complimentary to the physical training, your father brought in sages to teach history and battle tactics to train the mind as well as the body. + +You have a long journey ahead of you. It might be beneficial to get to know Garrick and Caitlyn before arriving at the western border, although you always have the choice to ride in silence. +> Get to know Garrick +You ride up beside Garrick, noticing his perfect posture and stoic demeanor. + +“Your father really did a number on you, huh?” you ask. + +“What’s that supposed to mean?” + +Realizing that's probably not the best way to start a conversation, you reply, “I mean, I know all about growing up with a strict father. Hell, when your father’s the King, he doesn’t want his children to embarrass him, but you act like you never enjoy yourself at all.” + +“I have fun,” he answers. + +“Yeah? Like what?” + +“Sometimes after daily training, Hector and I will practice the lute.” + +“I always figured you for a softy. That rough exterior just screams compensation. Who’s Hector?” + +“Fuck you, man.” + +“Hey, I’m just trying to be friendly here. We have a long road ahead of us. Might as well make the most of it. I won’t tell the Duke you’re queer.” + +Your comment makes Caitlyn snicker in the background. + +“I’m not queer, you weaselly piece of shit.” + +“Now that’s no way to treat your prince…” + +Garrick stops moving and turns towards you. + +“You know as well as I that you can’t do anything to me. So why the fuck would you try to pull rank like that? The King knows that you aren’t interested in leading our people. Your consistent belligerent actions speak for themselves. You’ve never experienced discipline or tested your willpower like I have. Since I could walk, my father trained me personally and recruited the best instructors in the kingdom to mold me into the knight that I am today. I have never been bested in a duel and the King knows my worth. Surely, he knows that I am more valuable to the kingdom than your sorry ass.” + +“Those are bold words coming from an esteemed musician such as yourself. I’ll let it slide this time because I was having fun with you, but if you ever threaten me again you’ll have to rethink your title of 'Undefeated Duelist'. You think just because I don’t act uptight and walk around with a stick up my ass my life was any easier? Maybe my light demeanor and tendency to drink is because I understand life is more than training and stern lectures. Say what you want, but at least I’ll enjoy myself.” + +Caitlyn, overhearing your conversation, approaches the two of you. + +“Now boys, break it up.” She clicks her lips in a disapproving manner. “We wouldn’t want to make Hector jealous now, would we? Here take this and stop bickering like a couple of newly weds.” + +She tosses a bottle of rum which you catch with one hand. + +“Sorry, Garrick. I hate to disappoint, but your company really doesn’t compare to a good drink.” You pop the cork and take a swig. “Looks like you’ll have to ‘play your own lute’ tonight’.” + +Before he has a chance to reply, you ride back up to the front of the group leaving Garrick by himself. + +“Fucking princes,” he mutters under his breath.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A small company of a dozen well-armed soldiers ride behind you in two rows of six. You ride in the lead with Garrick to your right and Caitlyn to your left. You do your best, unsuccessfully, to ignore the way she gracefully rides. Her blonde hair flows behind her as if soft waves rippling on the shore. The morning chill makes the journey’s start less enjoyable. Even more so when you imagine the warmth of Natalie in your bed. The soldiers ride stoic and alert, not telling jokes or sharing stories. Talking is kept at a minimum to limit distraction from potential threats. + +The soldiers, donned with light leather armor, carry a variety of weapons between them. Each has a melee and ranged weapon. Some have bows strung over their shoulder with small bucklers on their back. Others carry throwing spears to compliment their battle axes. Though deadly, you were confident your combat skills surpassed theirs. Your father ensured you started training from the moment you could walk. There isn't much you remember of your childhood beyond the endless hours training with the weapon masters. They made sure you mastered every weapon, to always be deadly and effective no matter the circumstance. Complimentary to the physical training, your father brought in sages to teach history and battle tactics to train the mind as well as the body. + +You have a long journey ahead of you. It might be beneficial to get to know Garrick and Caitlyn before arriving at the western border, although you always have the choice to ride in silence. +> Get to know Caitlyn +Later that evening, you see Caitlyn sitting alone near the fire. You walk over and grab a seat next to her. The light emanating from the flames illuminate her bright blue eyes. She looks off into the night sky deep in thought. + +“Don't even think about it. I know what you want and I can assure you, you won’t get it,” she says. + +“What are you talking about?” you reply. + +“Oh come on, it’s been obvious since we were teenagers. Every time I would visit the palace, you’d stand there all googly-eyed. If you weren’t a prince, and not halfway decent looking, I’d already have my father deal with you. The last horny fool who stared too long at my ass got sold to a Naji Privateer.” + +“Don’t think too highly of yourself, Cait. I can tell it’s been some time for you, but I wouldn’t want my one night with you to ruin your experience with all men in the future. Once you have the best—” + +She cuts you off before you can finish your sentence. + +“Oh don’t think too highly of myself, Prince? You should listen to yourself. I’ve heard the rumors about you and trust me, I am NOT interested.” + +“What sort of rumors would those be?" you ask. + +“It’s a sad tale, really more cliche than anything. A second-born prince trying to earn the affection of his father, so he gets into as many skirts and trouble as possible. All for the attention of his dear wittle daddy." + +“Well you're definitely of strong opinion. What’s your story?” + +“My story?” she asks, surprised. + +“Yeah… like why are you this way? I mean, you used to visit the palace sometimes in our youth, but it’s been some time since we’ve talked. In fact, we haven’t even talked since our early teen years.” + +A flash of steel catches your eye. You notice that Caitlyn is dexterously flipping a throwing knife through her hand using different spinning techniques. + +“And that’s certainly a new skill you didn’t have when we were kids,” you comment. + +“Perhaps you’ll think twice before making a move,” she replies. + +“Ah, more of a challenge if you ask me! The higher the risk, the higher the reward.” + +“Are you never serious, Prince?” + +“Only on the rarest of occasions. Life is more than discussing war, politics, and economy. I rather enjoy myself than be weighed down by such meaningless things.” + +“Is a prince even allowed to do that?” + +“No. But I do it anyway. Besides, everyone is much happier to have my brother, Urijah, be the heir. I’m sure the kingdom will do just fine under his rule. Me, I’d rather enjoy the simple things: a pretty woman, strong drink, and a good fight.” + +“Can’t argue with that. I’m the same way minus the woman part.” + +“You sure about that?” + +“Ask me again in a few drinks. It’s getting late, Prince, and we have a long journey to ride. Get some sleep. I’m sure you have lots to dream about.” + +Caitlyn gets up from her seat. Her hand gives your shoulder a light squeeze and a gentle touch to your cheek as she walks off into the darkness.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A small company of a dozen well-armed soldiers ride behind you in two rows of six. You ride in the lead with Garrick to your right and Caitlyn to your left. You do your best, unsuccessfully, to ignore the way she gracefully rides. Her blonde hair flows behind her as if soft waves rippling on the shore. The morning chill makes the journey’s start less enjoyable. Even more so when you imagine the warmth of Natalie in your bed. The soldiers ride stoic and alert, not telling jokes or sharing stories. Talking is kept at a minimum to limit distraction from potential threats. + +The soldiers, donned with light leather armor, carry a variety of weapons between them. Each has a melee and ranged weapon. Some have bows strung over their shoulder with small bucklers on their back. Others carry throwing spears to compliment their battle axes. Though deadly, you were confident your combat skills surpassed theirs. Your father ensured you started training from the moment you could walk. There isn't much you remember of your childhood beyond the endless hours training with the weapon masters. They made sure you mastered every weapon, to always be deadly and effective no matter the circumstance. Complimentary to the physical training, your father brought in sages to teach history and battle tactics to train the mind as well as the body. + +You have a long journey ahead of you. It might be beneficial to get to know Garrick and Caitlyn before arriving at the western border, although you always have the choice to ride in silence. +> Resupply at Moorstead +A few days later, you arrive at the small village of Moorstead to resupply. While the rest of the company heads to the General Store, you visit the local tavern for a drink. Swinging open the door, you see the place is fairly deserted, save for a few figures huddled quietly in the corner. + +“Barkeep! you shout flipping a coin on the counter. “Give me a round of your finest." + +The man behind the bar nervously eyes the corner and looks back to you saying, “I’m sorry, Milord, but our stores have run dry. We're all out.” + +“Run dry? Then what are those fellows over there drinking?” you question pointing to the figures in the corner. + +Drawing their attention, the largest of group stands and walks menacingly toward you. Judging by his size, he wasn’t someone many people disagreed with. + +“Didn’t you hear the man?" he spits. "He said 'run dry'. Now why don't you run along before things get ugly." + +"Before things get ugly?" you reply putting strong emphasis on "before". "I think that ship sailed the moment you walked over here." + +“Boss, look how well-dressed this one is. Maybe we should ask him for a 'charitable donation'?” one of the thugs in the corner suggests. “He looks alone too...” + +“Gentlemen, please," you reply trying to diffuse the situation. "Can’t we just enjoy our drinks in peace? I’m a bit weary from my journey and would much rather prefer to relax, rather than make you look like fools. Well, even greater fools I should say.” + +“Empty your pockets, noble shit, and you can leave unharmed. We’ll even give you a drink for the road since we are such ‘gentlemen’ as you put it,” the ringleader threatens. + +“(Sigh) Can’t I go anywhere without attracting the locals? And why does everyone assume I’m a nobleman?” you muse to yourself. “Alright, calm down. Let me see how much I have on me.” + +You reach into your cloak pretending to look for your coin purse and pull your hand out with your middle finger raised. “Here’s my donation, fuck face!” + +In the back corner, the gang kick down their chairs rushing towards you. The brute closest to you winds up his meaty fist and fires it towards your head. Sensing the blow, you slip underneath the punch and drive his face into the bar. Splinters fly in the air as you turn your attention towards the approaching mob. The first thug is met with a side kick to the gut, tripping the thug behind him. With three disposed, you take the offensive with a flurry of punches and elbows dazing the remaining attackers. Distracted by your sudden offensive attack, the thugs are hardly able to launch one of their own. You pick each one apart, exploiting the holes in their defense. + +“Who... are you?” the brute utters coughing and spitting blood. + +“I’m just a man who needs a goddamn drink,” you answer swinging over the bar to search the bottles. + +Light bursts into the room as the door flies open. Garrick and Caitlyn enter leading a group of soldiers with their weapons drawn. + +“What the fuck happened here?" Garrick inquires. “You risk our entire mission pulling stunts like this." + +“I wouldn’t say that. It looks like the Prince can handle himself in a fight, though you’d never know by looking at him.” Caitlyn says with a wink. “I just wish you would include me during your little scuffles. It’s rather selfish not to share the fun.” + +One of the soldiers steps forward twiddling his well groomed mustache. “My Prince, we best not tarry. Clearly you needed no help here, but I’m afraid we can’t afford to delay our mission. We are under a strict command from the King.” + +“Will is right. We already loaded the supplies. Let’s get moving,” Garrick says. +> Back to the road +You find yourself liking the road more than you would have thought. You didn’t mind the long riding days, food rationing, and sleeping outside. You’d been on small missions before, but nothing to this extent. Despite Garrick’s stoic personality, you caught glimpses of him laughing and telling stories with the soldiers. Caitlyn was by far your preferred companion. You and her had several inside jokes that got on the nerves of everyone else, which only added to your enjoyment. + +In two days time you would arrive at Nastela. The fortress city was located on the western border of Brelia. The Governor of Nastela, Lucius, should be able to aid the mission.You look up from your bedroll to view the clear night sky. There are worse things to fall asleep to, you think before sleep overtakes you. + +Two days later... + +You arrive at Nastela. For years, Nastela has been the gateway in and out of the Kingdom of Brelia. The city, more fortress, has the only road across the western border. A massive wall lines the rest of the shared borderline. Due to its nature, security is always tight and people are refused entry at the slightest hint or suspicion. The war with Rath still registers fresh in citizen’s minds and the strong security is seen as a comfort. Recognizing your royal seal, the guards let you in without a problem. + +“Perhaps we should stick to business first,” the leader of your soldier escort, Will, suggests. He adds with a smile, “Afterward I’ll grab the first round.” + +Making your way to the governor’s office, you notice that the city looks on edge. Iron-clad soldiers hustle about and your arrival doesn’t attract a large amount of attention. You realize that your company isn’t dressed in ceremonial armor, but in your experience citizens are always in a hurry to see your arrival. Even if they don’t recognize royalty initially, a guard escort usually attracts attention. By your perception, the people of Nastela look scared. + +The Nastelian escort leads you into to the governor’s office. Inside, paper-pushers and scribes silently work while politicians clamor in heated debates. The arguments of frail old men lead to the death of young men, you think to yourself. Eventually you reach a set of sturdy double doors with poleaxe wielding guardsmen lining the interior. Each stands large and quietly confident. A lone man stands behind a massive mahogany desk. His skinny arms hold a scroll in one hand and a goblet in the other. His elegant crimson robe flows behind him like a waterfall. + +“Ah yes, the prince is here. The guards at the gate sent word you would be arriving soon. How can I help you?” he addresses you quickly and turns his attention back to his reading. + +“For starters, you can stop reading when we’re talking. Secondly, you can pour me whatever you’re having,” you answer. + +Behind you Caitlyn holds up two fingers. + +“Shit, this stuff is good. What is it? I’ve never had something like it before,” you comment, downing the cup. + +Governor Lucius answers, “This, Prince, is the finest brandy from Rath. Despite the risk, there are benefits to being close to another nation. Namely, trade. We import a large number of goods from Rath as I’m sure your aware. Although these may be strenuous times, being the war and all, I find that trading and dealing is how you create ally from enemy. If you prove that you can work together with a simple transaction, you create the opportunity for more mutually beneficial deals.” + +“It certainly has a unique flavor… leaves quite a burning sensation.” + +“Say what you will about the Rathan people, they embrace the hard parts about life.” + +Garrick steps forward to speak, “Governor Lucius, I was unaware you hired outside security.” Eyeing the poleaxes he adds, “Wasn’t it only last summer that the King ordered a large number of my father’s knights to increase the defense of Nastela? I am unfamiliar with your personal guard. Where did the knights go?” + +“Garrick, son of Kane. You do possess the Duke’s direct questioning. Straight to the matter at hand then… I’m sure you’ve heard about the recent raids that have been targeting small villages along the border? Of course you have, that’s why you’re here. Well I can assure you, no Rathan raiders are making it through my city. Not a single person comes or goes without my knowledge, certainly not entire raiding parties.” + +“That did not answer my question, Governor,” Garrick answers narrowing his eyes. + +“I suppose we were going to find ourselves here one way or another,” Lucius muses. “Now!” + +At his signal, the guardsmen in unison move into battle position. The clanking of armor echoes throughout the room as the heavily armed soldiers encircle your company. + +“Treasonous bastard!” Garrick shouts and charges the governor. + +Lucius’ attention goes back to the scroll as he murmurs the remaining incantation of the spell. With his final word, Lucius vanishes and a blast of energy fills the room knocking Garrick off his feet. Papers fly aimlessly as the occupants of the room try to reorient themselves. Will and his fellow soldiers engage the governor’s guard. Their light leather armor offers little protection against the sheer might and brutality of the heavy poleaxes. They fight expertly, but circumstances are against them. Into the fray you join as more guards pour into the room. You begin to notice your sword hand growing heavy, each parry becoming more sluggish. Your eye catches a goblet on the floor. Drugged, you surmise. In the corner of your eye, you see Caitlyn has come to the same conclusion. She nimbly dodges several attacks before getting tagged by an iron gauntlet to the mouth. One by one, each of your soldiers are cut down. This is not how I imagined the end would come, you think just before your world turns black. +> Awaken +Your vision is a blur as you slip in and out of consciousness. They are transporting you somewhere, but your mind is too hazy to comprehend where exactly. You hear waves. The clasp of iron is heard distinctly through the background noise of bodies shuffling and a man yelling orders. You feel the the ground beneath you unsteady. They are transporting you by sea. You are unsure how many days it’s been since the encounter at Nastela. Your head is throbbing and you don’t know whether anyone from your company is still alive. A black hood is placed over your head preventing you from seeing your surroundings. Yep, definitely not how I thought that day would go, you think. You take some comfort in remembering that Cait was knocked out instead of killed. Maybe she’s on the ship with you. + +“Caitlyn!” you shout and promptly get backhanded. + +“Prince?” You hear the soft spoken voice of a female somewhere to your right. Then another smack fills the air. + +“No talking,” a grizzly voice bellows. + +Hours later, the ship makes port. You feel the tug of your chains lead you from the boat into the back of a caravan. The hood is still over your head, but you can feel the hot, dry air of the environment. The ground beneath you is too loose to be dirt. It’s sand. Traveling over what you guess are cobblestones, the bumpy caravan takes you into a city. + +“Out,” the same voice commands. + +Waiting for the man chained in front, you climb out and stand in line at your captor’s direction. The hood is pulled from your head blinding your eyes in the sudden sunlight. Once you finally adjust to the light, you see a large dark skinned man standing in front of you. He’s holding a whip in his right hand and a wicked-looking scimitar in the other. + +“You are property of Lady Myrr. Whatever she wishes, you will do. If you disobey her, you will be punished. If you insult her name, you will be punished. If you even fucking look at her wrong—” + +“You’ll be punished?” + +Chained a few bodies down from you, Caitlyn speaks out of turn. + +The dark skinned man, Darius, walks up to her glaring into her eyes in evaluation. + +“It is unwise to speak over the man who holds your life in his hand.” + +“I thought Lady Myrr owns me. Not you,” Caitlyn retorts. + +Despite the truth of her words, she is met with a punch to the gut and doubles over in pain. + +“Lady Myrr owns your miserable lives and I am the instrument in which she commands! I am the one who will ensure you serve the Lady. Trouble makers and insurrectionists will meet unimaginable pain before leaving this world. Now walk.” + +For emphasis, Darius cracks the whip at the ground close to where Caitlyn is kneeling. He leads the group of chained prisoners through a courtyard, down several staircases, and into the dungeon. Torches hanging upon the dimly lit hallways are the only source of light. The prisoners are divided three into a cell. Unfortunately, you aren’t placed with Caitlyn. You wonder what happened to Garrick. You didn’t see him among the others. You aren’t even sure if he’s alive. Out of the two other prisoners in your cell, only one looks like a fighter. His long unkempt hair hangs to his mid back and his beard is just as long. Several tribal tattoos line his thick arms. The other prisoner looks as if he spent more time in the library than the training grounds. +> Talk to them +“Well, we seem to have found ourselves in a shitty situation,” you break the silence. “Any idea how to escape this hell hole?” + +“Friend, you’re better off accepting your new life. Lady Myrr is the most powerful person in all of Miranna. And in Miranna, the powerful dictate the law,” the Librarian, Harold, answers. + +“What about you, big guy? Any ideas?” you address the hairy man. + +The man stares off in the distance before responding, “There is no escape. Only suffering.” + +“Quite the couple of optimistic cellmates they put me with. For once I’m regretting not paying enough attention during history lessons. Care to inform me on Miranna?” you ask. + +“You’ve never heard of Miranna? It’s only the most notorious pirate island in the Daen Sea! There has never been an established government on this island because the pirate lords have always overthrown whoever tried colonizing it. Doesn’t matter which major superpower tries: Rath, The Jeika Dominion, even the Kingdom of Brelia hasn’t been able to control Miranna. Her land promises fortune and her seas bring destruction! Lady Myrr has the most influence and no one wants to be on her bad side. The last house that opposed her vanished in the night... The occupants did at least. The building is still there,” you see the excitement in Harold’s face as he gets to share his life study. + +“So let me get this straight, the island is run by pirates, but somehow the most powerful person is this ‘Lady Myrr’? Why hasn’t some bad mother fucker with a giant hat and peg leg taken charge?” you question. + +“Ah you mean Captain Myrr. Yeah, he used to be in charge. Before the Lady slit his throat in front of his crew, that is. She may be pretty looking and lady-like, but she’s bat-shit crazy. Don’t let her polite manners fool you. She’s a devil. She was royalty in some faraway land before getting kidnapped and sold by her usurping uncle. She spent years as a slave doing god knows what before catching the attention of a certain pirate lord. She’s a dangerous mix of noble intelligence and slave ruthlessness.” + +“She does sound the intriguing character.” you say. “I think I’d very much like to meet the Lady.” + +“Your funeral.” +> Sleep +You awaken to the splash of cold water hitting your face. + +“Fuck!” you shout. + +“Rise and shine, scum,” Darius answers with a cruel grin. + +Several armed guards pull you from your cell and march you and the other prisoners from the dungeon. They lead you into an open, sandy area surrounded by a massive wall. Guards with spears and bows patrol the top of the wall limiting any sort of escape. You notice a balcony overhanging part of the area filled with well-dressed and fair skinned people. + +“On your knees. Lady Myrr, your newest recruits,” Darius addresses towards the balcony while ‘helping’ the prisoners that are slow to kneel. + +“Any potential?” A clear, articulate voice rings out from above. You instantly recognize Lady Myrr. Her raven colored dress hugs tightly against her, leaving no wonder to the curve of her body. Her pure black hair would be lost in the silky shadow of her dress if not for the exposed back. + +“Just the usual shit,” Darius replies. “Perhaps we should give them the opportunity to show their value. Does the Lady desire a demonstration?” + +“Let them prove their worth.” + +“You heard the Lady. Swords!” Darius shouts. + +While slaves rushed to follow Darius’ orders, guards carefully unchained the prisoners and warned against any revolt upon penalty of death. Expecting wooden training swords, you were surprised when real steel was placed in your hand. At random you were separated into two lines facing one another. Luckily, you are on the same side as Caitlyn. One line was given red ribbons to wear signifying which "team" they’re on. + +“I can imagine you dumb goat fuckers need instructions, even though it should be fairly obvious!” Darius yells. “Last team standing wins. By any means necessary.” + +“What do we win?” you can’t help but ask. + +Angry that he’s interrupted, Darius gives you a look and continues, “Prove your worth to Lady Myrr! Oh and the winner will receive a full wine skin courtesy of the generous Lady Myrr.” + +Darius cracks his whip signaling to start. The two groups of slaves rush towards each other clashing with the ring of steel and barbaric screams. Men cry out in anguish as blades find their way into unprotected flesh. The white sand is dyed red as each man falls. You almost feel bad about cutting down the ill-trained slaves, but you remind yourself that they’d kill you if they could. Each swing of your blade causes destruction. The strength and quickness of your strikes easily passes through the feeble defenses you encounter. Only a few manage a single parry before you rip them apart. Your group wins easily, only losing a couple of lives in the process. + +“Give them their wine. Bring that one up to me,” Lady Myrr commands from the balcony motioning towards you. + +After giving Darius a wink, you follow the guards into the manor. +> Meeting Lady Myrr +The guards lead you through the manor passing by countless house slaves scrambling to fulfill their duties. Most of the female slaves are topless. + +"Can’t say I disagree with the dress code," you comment. + +A forceful push in your back is your only reply. + +“Yeah like you aren’t staring too,” you utter softly. + +You arrive at a lavish doorway draped with fine beads, silk, and an assortment of decorations. Entering into the room, Lady Myrr gracefully rises from her chair and strides in your direction. + +“Now what am I to think when I see one of my prisoners cut down multiple men without breaking a sweat?” Lady Myrr asks pouring two glasses of wine from a jewel-covered pitcher. "Guards, leave us." + +“Tempt a man with a good drink and the company of a beautiful woman and he’ll accomplish anything,” you respond. + +“Heh, I don’t remember ever offering to meet with the victors of that fun little game.” + +“ Let's just say I had a feeling you'd want to meet the one who distinguished themselves above the rest. From what I hear, you’re a lady who appreciates someone who can get things done.” + +“I can’t say I don’t admire your confidence. By your showing on the sand, it’s obvious that you are skilled with a blade. Skills such as yours don’t just magically appear. Tell me, how did you come across such training?” + +“I had a very strict father.” + +“Son of a military man perhaps?” + +“Something like that.” + +Lady Myrr waves her hand as if swatting away an idea. + +“Your background matters not. As long as you serve your lady without question. In any capacity I see fit. Do you have a woman?” + +She takes a sip from her cup and places her hand against your chest. + +“Sort of,” you answer with a slight hesitation. + +“If you had one, you’d know. Come, I desire instruction.” + +“Of what, my Lady?” + +“You’ll find out.” +> Agree +“Do you notice my hip position as I thrust like this? That’s where your power comes from. If you don’t wind up, you’ll be more efficient with your energy too.” + +For a few months, you have been teaching your sword techniques to Lady Myrr. She had been given some training as a girl, but nothing extensive. She was not unskilled, simply lacked proper refinement. Her determination to perfectly perform drills surprised you. You imagined someone with her status would only order people around. Lady Myrr takes a more hands on approach. On more than one occasion, she would not continue the lesson until the specific form was mastered. Luckily, she didn’t pry deeper into your past. You aren’t quite sure what would happen if she found out who you are and you really didn’t want to find out. No, you felt it was best to hide your identity. + +“Fucking hell! I always drop my guard when attempting that feint.” Myrr shouts in frustration. + +“That’s because you’re overcompensating with your leg power. It should be quick, without effort. Like this.” + +You perform the technique to perfection as you’ve done countless times. + +“Show off. Alright that’s enough for today. I need you for something,” Lady Myrr says. + +“Something else than training?” you question. + +“Yes. Darius should be here any moment. Ah here he is.” + +“My Lady Myrr,” Darius bows. “Slave,” he mentions with obvious distaste in your direction. + +“Speak freely,” Lady Myrr commands. + +“Our contacts have reported Captain Kano is plotting with the Rathans against you," Darius says. "They will aid him with firepower as long as he remains loyal to Rath.” + +“Are these contacts to be trusted?” Lady Myrr asks. + +“I trust them with my life, my Lady. We should strike Kano before he has the chance to grow in strength. Before he has the support of Rath.” + +“What do you think?” Lady Myrr turns to you. + +“My Lady, he is a slave! You would ask his advice when your entire manor is threatened?” Darius interjects. + +Before Darius could think to react, Lady Myrr grabs his throat and trips him to the ground. Her vise-like grip prevents any air from his breath, her knee holding his body in place on the ground. Judging by his size, you don’t doubt that Darius could overpower the Lady off him if he really wanted to, but he continues to lay in obedience. You stand ready just in case. + +“YOU will fucking listen to ME. If I ask your opinion, I want to hear it. Don’t presume that I want to hear it all the time. Do you understand me?” + +Darius (coughing) does his best to nod and Lady Myrr lets him back to his feet. + +“So what do you think?” +> Attack Kano +“If you want to stay on top, you have to eliminate your competition. If people learn you have a rival, they'll assume you are equals. You must end it before it gets to that point,” you answer. + +“That’s what I like to hear. We’ll organize a small force and attack in two days. Darius, ready the men.” + +With a swift nod, Darius leaves the two of you alone. + +“You have been in my manor for many weeks now. You have been granted the privilege of walking freely within my walls because you have shown you’re not a common slave. I have spent enough time with you to know you’re not stupid enough to attempt escape. This will be different. You will be beyond these walls, armed, and without guards. You have served me faithfully, even being enjoyable company. Before you get any ideas, know that should you betray me or this mission, you will be executed. You have spent enough time around here to know that would not be a quick process. I may value you, but the smallest hint of disobedience will be punished severely.” + +“Lady, I like my limbs attached and throat un-slit. You have nothing to worry about,” you reply. The thought pops into your mind, Although if I were to escape, this does sound like my best opportunity. + +“Good.” + +Later that night... + +You fall back in your bed exhausted. Lady Myrr does the same beside you. It wasn’t the first time it happened during your months of training. Still, it complicated things a bit. You figured you didn’t have a choice in the matter. Lady Myrr always gets her way and this wasn’t exactly a difficult order to follow. The refusal of her advances would cause more problems, and even possibly your life. You felt a pang of guilt each time for Natalie’s sake, but you couldn’t help wanting more. She curls up next to you and gently runs her hand over your bare skin. + +“You know many men would kill for the position you have now,” she breaks the silence. + +“I doubt anyone would kill to put themselves into slavery.” + +“Besides that. You know what I mean.” + +“I know and I can’t blame them. You’re beautiful. Everyone at their very core desires someone to be intimate with. Someone who they can share their inner secrets to without fear of judgment or rejection. The luckiest people are the ones who find that early in their lifetime.” + +“Since you’ve arrived here, I’ve never heard you speak in such a way. Perhaps there is more to you than base animal instinct.” + +“Um, thanks?” + +“Take it as a good thing. There is more to life than drinking and fucking.” + +“That’s ironic,” you say, pouring another cup of wine. + +“People in my position don’t last long. The power hungry always desire to move up. It’s their nature. Every captain on this fucking island wants my head. Captain Kano is just the one foolish enough to try.” + +“It’d be foolish to try on his own at least, but he partnered with a strong ally. He’s not as foolish as you think.” + +“Fuck Captain Kano. He’s a soft cocked puppet. Tomorrow I’ll slit his throat myself and put his head on a pike to welcome his Rathan allies.” + +“You’re joining the raid personally?” + +“Of course! On this island, respect is earned. Fear works the same way. Either by respect or fear, they’ll all fall in line.” + +“Whatever it takes, I guess. Might I make a request?” + +“Not this again… some girls may find pleasure there, but I don’t.” + +“No, not that. Although we can revisit that conversation another time. I was talking about the raid. There is a prisoner that was transported with me. Caitlyn. She is deadly with a pair of daggers. Our success chances would greatly increase if she were accompany us. We were childhood friends. I’m sure you remember her from the ‘game’ we played.” + +“Yes… her. She was quite skilled. If she were any better, she might be the one laying next to me.” + +“You know, that’s not a bad idea…” + +“Don’t push your luck," Lady Myrr says. "Very well, I’ll order Darius to bring her. Any attempt to escape by either of you will have fatal consequences. If even one of you runs, I’ll kill the other without hesitation. I don’t care that we’ve shared the same bed. Your fate will be the same as any disobedient slave.” + +“I do love your dirty talk,” you reply. + +“Prove it to me.” +> The Raid +You creep quietly among the outskirts of Captain Kano’s villa. From your vantage point, you see several patrol units on the perimeter. From a few open windows, it doesn’t look to be that heavily guarded on the inside. To the east of the villa you see his sloop, The Boar, docked with members of his crew playing dice and drinking outside. Lady Myrr leads the raid group. There were only ten of you total, way less numbers than you expected. When you brought it up she simply said, We will create more fear if Kano disappears during the night. The others will not sleep as easy. + +Lady Myrr whispers her commands, “We’ll split into two groups. Darius’ will strike near The Boar cutting off reinforcements and my group will sneak into the villa, find Kano, and end his life. Once you see the building burning, we’ll meet back at the manor. Kill anyone who gets in your way.” + +Everyone nods in agreement. Unsurprisingly, Myrr puts you in her group. You are a little disappointed when Caitlyn is put in the other, especially since Darius was in charge. At first you’re afraid his hatred of you will cause problems for Caitlyn, but then you remember he hates her too. Myrr silently leads the way towards the villa. Staying in the high grass, you use the cover of night to sneak past the patrols undetected. One unlucky pirate chooses a spot near you to relieve himself. Lady Myrr takes advantage of his vulnerable position and greets him with knife to the throat. + +Your group reaches the villa with no other encounters. The inside is filled with mahogany furniture and oil paintings. You move stealthily through the hallways. Internally you comment on the decor, Captain Kano sure is a lavish man. Hmm, I would have assumed a pirate captain’s villa to be, well, more rambunctious, you think. It’s quiet. Too quiet… A whirling sound fills the air. Led by your acute senses, your blade automatically moves into a defensive position blocking the projectile that was aimed at your heart. + +“Ambush!” you yell. + +Several doors in the hallway swing open and men rush out with their scimitars and sabres raised high. You meet the first attacker, parrying his blade before countering with a deadly blow to the gut. The second doesn’t even get a chance to swing before your lighting thrust drops him. The narrow corridor allows your group to fight a few at a time, but each kill is replaced with another fresh body. + +Fighting with her back to yours, Lady Myrr shouts, “Show yourself, coward! I know you’re here!” + +“Halt your advance!” a voice cries amidst the fighting. + +The pirates halt their attack and stand aside for their captain. Kano, you presume, strides forward. His tall frame overshadows his men. His mouth twists into a crooked smile as he takes the pipe from his mouth to speak. + +“Well, well. What do we have here? A pirate queen out in the open? So unprotected. So exposed.” Turning to you he adds, “Ah, the prince that I’ve heard so much about. You’re a little more baby-faced than I was expecting. The tales of your swordsmanship made me think you were a seasoned man.” + +“Prince?” Lady Myrr asks. + +Ignoring her and putting the facts together, you reply to Kano. + +“I take it you and Governor Lucius have been talking. You are fools if you think aligning with Rath is in your best interest. They’ll turn on you in a second. You think Rath will just let you rule here without oversight? No, they’ll use you for their own gain and toss you aside once they have what they need.” + +“You’re a prince?” Lady Myrr asks again. Captain Kano also ignores her. + +“Ha-ha-ha! How dumb do you think I am? Miranna will survive as it always has. Rath is only a means to an end. There isn’t a nation that can rule Miranna. Miranna belongs to the free. If Rath decides to dishonor their agreement, they will meet the same end as every invading nation. Our ships will sink any attack force. Neither Rath nor Brelia has a navy that can defeat us. But that is none of your concern. I’m afraid your time is at an end. I would have preferred to ransom you to Orson, but Darius was very adamant about this part of the deal. He even refused a majority share in your would-be ransom. Can you believe that?” + +“Actually, I can. That guy hates me,” you respond. + +“Darius would never—” + +Lady Myrr starts to speak before Darius enters with a bloodied Caitlyn bound and gagged. He pushes her to the ground in front of you. She looks up to you, eyes watering as if to apologize for getting captured. + +“I’m sorry, my Lady. I believed in you, I really did, but this prince has corrupted your mind and your ideals. I don’t know why you took so much interest in him. It should have been me at your side and yet you cast me aside for what? For an irresponsible fling? I’ve known you long enough to see the way you look at him. Why couldn’t it have been me? I’ve always done everything you’ve asked! Yet you treat me like one of your common slaves. I am more than that. We could have been more than that! Miranna deserves a strong ruler. I’m sorry it had to come to this," Darius confesses. + +“I’m sorry too,” Lady Myrr speaks softly. Louder she adds, “Sorry that I trusted a miscreant like you! The deepest levels of Hell belong to fucking traitors like you. You’re betraying me because I didn’t fuck you? I doubt your small cock would even get close to satisfying me. You’re despicable, you’re a bitch, and I will fucking kill you for this. One by one, I’ll remove your fingernails and then move to the fingers themselves next. I’ll break every bone in your fucking body. Then I'll show you your reflection in the mirror before ripping out your eyes, so the last thing you’ll see will be your fucked up, mutilated body.” + +Visibly hurt by her words, Darius replies to you and Lady Myrr. + +“I will miss that passion once you’re gone. This is all your fault, Prince. Everything was fine before you arrived, although I guess you didn’t really have a choice in that matter. Captain Kano filled me in. Perhaps you both were meant for each other having the whole betrayed thing in common. Before I kill you, I want to make you suffer so I’ll give you a choice. You can save one of your precious ladies here… you’ll just need to kill the other. You have my word, I’ll spare the one who you don’t execute. You’ll still die, of course, but at least you can save one of them. My final gift to you. So, Prince, who will it be?” +> Kill Lady Myrr +Although you did care for her, Lady Myrr was ultimately the one keeping you prisoner. Caitlyn was part of Brelia, part of your home. You are a prince of Brelia, and you will always choose the life of its noble citizens over a pirate. You are given a choice and you make what you believe to be the right decision. Before she can react, you drive your sword through Lady Myrr’s heart, catching her as she falls to the ground. Her eyes flash in anger for a brief moment before resolving in a visionless, peaceful gaze. You cradle her head as she lies dying in your arms. Tears wet your face as you try to comfort her during her last moment. Her hand reaches to touch your cheek before falling limp to the ground. You gently kiss her forehead and close her eyelids. + +“Ahh, interesting. That just lost me a handful of coins. I wagered you’d save Lady Myrr ughh—” Captain Kano starts to speak before the tip of a sword bursts through his chest, covering Darius in blood splatter. Standing over his corpse is a member of his crew. + +“Well, Little Brother, are you just going to sit there crying or are you going to help me escape?” a very unrecognizable Prince Urijah speaks. + +In a rage, the rest of the crew attack in a vengeful manner. You grab a dagger from a fallen body and cut the bindings on Caitlyn. She immediately plucks the dagger from your hand and turns on Darius, striking with a frenzy of cuts too fast for him to block. Red streaks of blood start to appear at his arms, face, and chest. Seeing blood, Caitlyn attacks quicker and deeper. In a matter of seconds, Darius’ body is a mangled mess of open wounds. He doesn’t even get a chance to curse before choking on his blood. You join the battle alongside your brother, Urijah. The two of you work in unison, attacking while the other is defending and vice versa. You were taught by the same weapon masters and the similarity of your movement is proof. You know what the other is planning and how he will strike. + +“Cover me, Brother!” + +Urijah shouts and pulls at the amulet around his neck. Whispering an incantation, he finishes the final word of power. The entire hallway fills with a blinding light for a moment and then suddenly, the light vanishes, shooting into his floating body. Ripples of magic appear at his skin as he runs past you engaging the dazed pirates. Imbued by magic, Urijah’s sword cuts through blade and bone alike. Those quick enough to attempt a parry meet the same fate as those who didn’t. In a matter of seconds, the hallway is filled with the corpses of Captain Kano’s crew. + +“Urijah, how the fuck did you get here? And why didn’t you do that earlier?” you ask. + +“It’s good to see you too, bro. As always, it looks like you’re caught up in some weird love triangle.” + +“You could have saved Lady Myrr.” + +“Why would I risk saving her? She’s a pirate queen with no allegiance to Brelia. I’ve got to say, you did have me worried you might choose to save Myrr. That might have ruined my plan.” + +“I wasn’t worried. Thanks Prince,” Caitlyn chimes in hugging you. “But yeah seriously, how the hell did you end up here, Urijah?” + +“As you know, the King sent me to Rath. My task was to meet with their leaders and discuss how we might continue our peace treaty. I never made it that far. When I reached Nastela, I discovered that Governor Lucius was conspiring with the Rathans to overthrow the kingdom. Along with the knights provided by Duke Kane, we attempted to overthrow Lucius. We failed. He hired too many mercs for us to handle. Most of knights were killed and the rest of us were sold to slavers in Miranna. During the slave auction, I happened to spot an assassination attempt on Captain Kano, saving his life. In gratitude, he purchased and gave me the opportunity to work on his ship to pay off the amount he bought me for. I never told them who I was because I figured it’d make things worse, so I’ve just been here, biding my time waiting for a chance to escape. Then I overheard Kano talking about the unsuspecting prince in Lady Myyr’s employ. Knew that had to be you. Luckily, Darius was infatuated with the Lady and I used his jealousy to turn him against her. You really can’t go anywhere without causing drama, huh? There are a few knights left on Miranna, Garrick among them. I figure we have enough to crew The Boar. Come on, let’s go home.” +> Epilogue: The Disillusioned Prince +News of Nastela’s betrayal spread throughout the Brelia Kingdom. The entire army, led by King Orson himself, marched to Nastela. The city was no match for the full strength of Brelia. Rath dishonored their alignment with Nastela and didn’t offer any support in the purge. Governor Lucius took his own life before the city was taken. + +Miranna was left without a sole ruler. Many captains attempted to sieze control, but none with enough power to keep it for very long. Without a strong voice to keep order amidst the chaos, the island fell into a state even more lawless than before. Realizing this put Miranna at the mercy of an invading force, the pirate crews voted 5 captains to rule. ‘The Black Hand’ unified the pirate crews into one fleet terrorizing any ships that strayed too near. + +Brelia welcomed you home with a large parade. Citizens lined the streets and cheered for the return of their two princes; the future of their nation. Riding through the cobble streets of Brelia was surreal. Peasants, merchants, and nobility alike greeted you as heroes. King Orson was so overjoyed in having his two sons back that he threw a feast for the entire city. You tried to enjoy the abundance of food and drink, but something was different. Before your mission, you would have eaten and drank throughout the night. You think back to the words Lady Myrr spoke, There is more to life than drinking and fucking. You sat alone, sipping at your wine. + +“This is a rare sight. The Prince sitting alone drinking in melancholy. I thought you would be enjoying your reunion with Natalie.” + +You look up to see Caitlyn. Her blonde hair, though tied back, has a few strands loose near her eyes. Despite most noble women wearing fine dresses, she wears light leather armor. + +“During our journey, her and Harlan got… involved. I’m not in the mood to discuss it. How’re you holding up?” you ask. + +“Me? I’m fine. I’m more concerned about you. It’s not like you to not enjoy a party. Did the death of that pirate queen really mess you up? Listen, I never did thank you for saving my life. I know the mission didn’t exactly go as planned, but it all worked out in the end. Brelia is safe and we have you to thank for it.” + +“It doesn’t feel as if I did anything special. At least nothing more than anyone else would have done in my position,” you reply. + +“But you did something. You didn’t let fear of failure bring you to inaction. I know you haven’t been the most responsible prince, but when faced with tragedy you determined what you thought was the right thing to do. That’s the best any of us can ever do.” + +“I suppose you’re right. I just can’t shake the feeling that there’s more to life than what I’m experiencing. I have everything I should want, but it still doesn’t feel like enough. I just feel like there’s more out there.” + +Caitlyn sits next to you and takes your hand. + +“I think you’re exactly where you need to be.” + +She pulls near and kisses you. The restlessness inside you quiets for a brief moment as you lose yourself in the embrace. + +“Sorrow doesn’t look good on you, Prince. You can’t sit and wonder about the things you don’t have. Enjoy what you have or go chase what you desire. You can’t live a passive life. The choice is up to you.” + +She gets up and leaves you alone. You pour another drink.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You creep quietly among the outskirts of Captain Kano’s villa. From your vantage point, you see several patrol units on the perimeter. From a few open windows, it doesn’t look to be that heavily guarded on the inside. To the east of the villa you see his sloop, The Boar, docked with members of his crew playing dice and drinking outside. Lady Myrr leads the raid group. There were only ten of you total, way less numbers than you expected. When you brought it up she simply said, We will create more fear if Kano disappears during the night. The others will not sleep as easy. + +Lady Myrr whispers her commands, “We’ll split into two groups. Darius’ will strike near The Boar cutting off reinforcements and my group will sneak into the villa, find Kano, and end his life. Once you see the building burning, we’ll meet back at the manor. Kill anyone who gets in your way.” + +Everyone nods in agreement. Unsurprisingly, Myrr puts you in her group. You are a little disappointed when Caitlyn is put in the other, especially since Darius was in charge. At first you’re afraid his hatred of you will cause problems for Caitlyn, but then you remember he hates her too. Myrr silently leads the way towards the villa. Staying in the high grass, you use the cover of night to sneak past the patrols undetected. One unlucky pirate chooses a spot near you to relieve himself. Lady Myrr takes advantage of his vulnerable position and greets him with knife to the throat. + +Your group reaches the villa with no other encounters. The inside is filled with mahogany furniture and oil paintings. You move stealthily through the hallways. Internally you comment on the decor, Captain Kano sure is a lavish man. Hmm, I would have assumed a pirate captain’s villa to be, well, more rambunctious, you think. It’s quiet. Too quiet… A whirling sound fills the air. Led by your acute senses, your blade automatically moves into a defensive position blocking the projectile that was aimed at your heart. + +“Ambush!” you yell. + +Several doors in the hallway swing open and men rush out with their scimitars and sabres raised high. You meet the first attacker, parrying his blade before countering with a deadly blow to the gut. The second doesn’t even get a chance to swing before your lighting thrust drops him. The narrow corridor allows your group to fight a few at a time, but each kill is replaced with another fresh body. + +Fighting with her back to yours, Lady Myrr shouts, “Show yourself, coward! I know you’re here!” + +“Halt your advance!” a voice cries amidst the fighting. + +The pirates halt their attack and stand aside for their captain. Kano, you presume, strides forward. His tall frame overshadows his men. His mouth twists into a crooked smile as he takes the pipe from his mouth to speak. + +“Well, well. What do we have here? A pirate queen out in the open? So unprotected. So exposed.” Turning to you he adds, “Ah, the prince that I’ve heard so much about. You’re a little more baby-faced than I was expecting. The tales of your swordsmanship made me think you were a seasoned man.” + +“Prince?” Lady Myrr asks. + +Ignoring her and putting the facts together, you reply to Kano. + +“I take it you and Governor Lucius have been talking. You are fools if you think aligning with Rath is in your best interest. They’ll turn on you in a second. You think Rath will just let you rule here without oversight? No, they’ll use you for their own gain and toss you aside once they have what they need.” + +“You’re a prince?” Lady Myrr asks again. Captain Kano also ignores her. + +“Ha-ha-ha! How dumb do you think I am? Miranna will survive as it always has. Rath is only a means to an end. There isn’t a nation that can rule Miranna. Miranna belongs to the free. If Rath decides to dishonor their agreement, they will meet the same end as every invading nation. Our ships will sink any attack force. Neither Rath nor Brelia has a navy that can defeat us. But that is none of your concern. I’m afraid your time is at an end. I would have preferred to ransom you to Orson, but Darius was very adamant about this part of the deal. He even refused a majority share in your would-be ransom. Can you believe that?” + +“Actually, I can. That guy hates me,” you respond. + +“Darius would never—” + +Lady Myrr starts to speak before Darius enters with a bloodied Caitlyn bound and gagged. He pushes her to the ground in front of you. She looks up to you, eyes watering as if to apologize for getting captured. + +“I’m sorry, my Lady. I believed in you, I really did, but this prince has corrupted your mind and your ideals. I don’t know why you took so much interest in him. It should have been me at your side and yet you cast me aside for what? For an irresponsible fling? I’ve known you long enough to see the way you look at him. Why couldn’t it have been me? I’ve always done everything you’ve asked! Yet you treat me like one of your common slaves. I am more than that. We could have been more than that! Miranna deserves a strong ruler. I’m sorry it had to come to this," Darius confesses. + +“I’m sorry too,” Lady Myrr speaks softly. Louder she adds, “Sorry that I trusted a miscreant like you! The deepest levels of Hell belong to fucking traitors like you. You’re betraying me because I didn’t fuck you? I doubt your small cock would even get close to satisfying me. You’re despicable, you’re a bitch, and I will fucking kill you for this. One by one, I’ll remove your fingernails and then move to the fingers themselves next. I’ll break every bone in your fucking body. Then I'll show you your reflection in the mirror before ripping out your eyes, so the last thing you’ll see will be your fucked up, mutilated body.” + +Visibly hurt by her words, Darius replies to you and Lady Myrr. + +“I will miss that passion once you’re gone. This is all your fault, Prince. Everything was fine before you arrived, although I guess you didn’t really have a choice in that matter. Captain Kano filled me in. Perhaps you both were meant for each other having the whole betrayed thing in common. Before I kill you, I want to make you suffer so I’ll give you a choice. You can save one of your precious ladies here… you’ll just need to kill the other. You have my word, I’ll spare the one who you don’t execute. You’ll still die, of course, but at least you can save one of them. My final gift to you. So, Prince, who will it be?” +> Kill Caitlyn +Lady Myrr gave you her trust. There is no way you were going to betray that. She’s the one that rescued you. She’s the one who you owed your new life to. Taking a deep breath, you know there’s no going back after this. Even if you somehow managed not to get executed, you wouldn’t be able to face Brelia after this.Without hesitation, you draw your sword back with both hands towards Caitlyn’s kneeling body. The blade cuts through the base of her neck with ease. Her headless body falls limply to the floor. Try as you might, you can’t avoid seeing Caitlyn’s face as her head rolls to the floor. It’s a look of sadness as if disappointed her prince would choose an outlaw over her. Your boots are stained with blood. Her blood. The blood of your nation. + +“An unexpected choice. Again your actions fuck me,” Darius comments as he tosses a coin purse to Captain Kano. + +“Ha! Of course the Prince would side with the woman currently fucking him,” Kano points out. + +“You got what you wanted. Now kill me and let Lady Myrr go,” you say. + +“I suppose this is the end… for you,” Darius speaks as he drives his dagger into the unsuspecting Kano. + +“Wha— (gurgle) the fuck!” Kano cries out through his blood in surprise. + +Lady Myrr briefly brings her hand to her mouth and whispers incoherent words into one of the rings on her finger. A piercing screech echoes within the hallway causing all it’s inhabitants to drop their weapons in order to cover their ears. As quickly as it came, the screech subsided. Disoriented, but still reflexive, you grab your sword from the floor, sticking it through Darius’ gut and slicing it wide open. You move on to the next target, while he doubles over in attempt to keep his organs inside. Frenzied by the madness of the situation, you lose yourself in a bloodlust cutting down man after man. The few cuts you receive in your reckless assault are disregarded. You only want more blood. You only want to end more lives. Lady Myrr and her remaining allies join the massacre. Only two members of Kano’s crew manage to escape with their lives. + +“Let them go. They will tell the island of our victory. No one will dare challenge me after this,” Lady Myrr says. “Thank you, Prince, for choosing me. You saved my life and that is a debt I mean to repay. You’re free. I mean it. If you want to leave, go ahead. I won’t stop you.” + +“How can you just expect me leave after this? I chose you over my own country. I would have nothing without you,” you say. + +“Then let’s go celebrate your decision.” + +She takes you by the hand, but you pull yours away. You answer her quizzical look as she orders the raid team to disperse. + +“I’m not a fucking fool, Myrr. I know what you planned here. You played Kano by planting Darius in his midst. Darius is a piece of shit, but I’ve been around him long enough to know he’s not the traitorous type. You arranged this whole encounter. For what? Out of sheer jealousy and pettiness. When he stuck his dagger into Kano it all made sense. You gave him the fucking idea for the ultimatum because you wanted Caitlyn dead. You knew you couldn’t execute her with me around, so you schemed up this entire thing. You know what the worse part is? I had no fucking choice. I’m enslaved to you, whether you own me or not.” + +“My, my aren’t you the clever one, Prince? It’s time you forget your heritage. It’s holding you back from reaching your full potential. I knew who you were the moment you arrived here. You don’t belong in elegant castles wearing frilly clothing. You belong with me. The things you’ve told me about your past, though not the entire truth, made it clear that you aren’t suited for the throne. That’s Urijah’s responsibility, is it not? You may have hidden the full story from me, but I know you. Your heart longs for the freedom of Miranna. Forget Brelia. You and I will rule this island together. Only Caitlyn’s death would convince me of your undying loyalty. When you insisted she join the raid, I knew what had to be done.” + +“You manipulating bitch,” you curse grabbing Lady Myrr by the throat and throwing her to the ground. She rises to all fours to stand up to her feet. Your foot meets her gut, collapsing her back down to the ground. She rolls over, drawing her sword and lunges towards you. You easily parry her attacks. With ease, you block her advance, taking pleasure in her struggling, futile maneuvers. Lady Myrr thrusts forward into your trap. You slide back just out of range, taking her off balance in her attack. With too much weight in her front foot, you grab at her wrist holding the sword and twist it from her grasp. At the same time your foot finds the underneath of her knee, taking the weight out from under her. She lies at your feet. At your mercy. +> Kill her +Your mind wanders inside the prison cell to the words you first heard about Lady Myrr. She’s a devil. Her actions ruined your life. Her mad infatuation with you would only mean further manipulation. If she were willing to maneuver you to execute a childhood friend, there is no telling how far she would go to keep you under her spell. With an anguishing cry, you thrust your blade forward. It tears through her upper thigh and lodges deep within the wooden floor. + +“I… can’t,” you utter shaking with the realization. The sword drops from your hand. + +Lady Myrr rises from the floor, “I know. We are destined for one another. Our fates are now intertwined. Killing me would be as if killing yourself.” + +She picks up your fallen sword and places the hilt within your hand. Her fingers traverse the flat of the blade, staining them red. Then she lightly touches your face marking it with streaks of her blood. + +“You and I will rule together.” + +Her hand glides to your chest. + +“You will have everything you ever want.” + +Her hand drops lower. + +“That which is not freely offered, you take by force.” + +Her hand reaches the intended area causing a slight gasp to escape your lips. + +“Are you with me, King of Miranna?” + +Lost in madness and overtaken by the moment, you answer her with with a grunt, grabbing her forcefully and throwing her back to the floor. Only this time, you join her. Covered in blood, surrounded by the freshly slain bodies of Kano’s crew, you consummate your commitment to Myrr. +> Epilogue: The Mad Pirate King +For years you prey upon ships in the Daen Sea. Word had spread throughout Kria of the ‘Mad Pirate King’ uninterested in treasure. Only blood. It didn't matter if the ship flew Rathan or Brelian colors. They all sank. Your piracy disrupted the flow of trade into Brelia. In order to prevent economic collapse, King Urijah surrendered Brelia to a new rising empire across the eastern sea. His surrender was conditional upon the destruction of Miranna. Their joint fleet littered the Daen with nimble schooners and heavily cannoned galleons. Only a small portion of captains remained loyal to you. The ones you didn’t execute turned to privateering. Upon the deck of your brigantine, The Lady’s Reaper, the armada sailed before you. + +“Captain! There are too many of them. Shall we turn course?” your first mate, Scully, shouts from the helm. + +“What good would that do?” you answer. “The entire Daen is filled with their ships. I will not run like a frightened child. I will end this on my own terms.” + +“But Captain, it’s suicide!” + +Suddenly, a pistol shot rings out over the deck. The bullet slams into Scully catapulting him backwards. + +“Anyone else have reservations about following orders? Good,” Lady Myrr speaks while casually reloading her flintlock pistol. + +With the smell of gunpowder in the air, you address the crew. + +“For years you have served me faithfully. We have made both Rath and Brelia terrified of the seas. Terrified of you. I have given you wealth, freedom, and a life unrestricted by society’s rules. I ask now that you join me one last time. My fate will not be the gallows. I’m glad they sent an armada. Hunting is easier when the prey gathers before you. Let loose the sails! Bring me more ships to sink!” + +The crew cheers and frantically run to their stations. The deck is organized chaos as crewman rush to ready their positions. A heavy wind lies at your back propelling the brigantine to top speed. You take the helm, Lady Myrr alongside you. + +“This is not how I imagined things would go when you were first brought to me,” she speaks staring at the multitude of ships before you. + +You answer taking a swig of rum, “Urijah is a fool. He surrendered Brelia to an outside ruler. It’s despicable. He would clasp the shackles at his own wrists. For what? To defeat one man? Only a weak man surrenders. The strong man fights until he is physically unable. The body is harder to break than the mind. My brother, The King of Slaves, will learn that the hard way.” + +Myrr grabs the bottle from your hand and takes a long drink. Wiping her mouth she answers, “I only hope to take as many of these fucking cunts down. They will experience true pain with my blade at their throat. The last thing they’ll see before I send them to Hell will be my smiling face and their blood on my sword. The skills you taught me years ago will take many lives this day. How naive I use to be. I only regret we didn’t have more time to fuck and drink. The Brelians have robbed us of that and they will be punished for it.” + +Cannon blasts echo across the sea. The front line of the armada fire their forward cannons as they move to engage The Lady’s Reaper. All but one miss, knocking an unfortunate crewman overboard with the impact. One of the galleons flies a family crest you recognize: Kane. Spinning the wheel hard to the left, you direct the brigantine towards The Paragon. The ram at your ship’s bow rips through the galleon's hull with a deadening crunch. Before your crew, or even Myrr react, you jump from the helm across to The Paragon. + +“Kane! You cock-sucking leech. Where are you?” you scream as your blade sweeps through the poor defense of sailors. Each kill increases your vigor as the blood frenzy continues. A pistol shot slams into your shoulder, only furthering your longing for blood. More enemy crewman gather around you. More lives for you to take. + +“I had heard tales of your madness and lust for blood, but seeing it with my own eyes is another thing.” + +An older version of Garrick emerges from below deck. You recognize him instantly despite his finely trimmed goatee and grown out shoulder length hair. + +“It’s a tale of misfortune. A former prince, swayed by pussy, turned his back on his people. You caused the downfall of Brelia. You are a disgrace. I was there the night of Caitlyn’s death, did you know that? Your brother and I infiltrated Kano’s crew in attempt to rescue you and escape back to Brelia. But you killed her. You fucking killed Caitlyn, you piece of shit. I don’t understand how the royal family of Orson and Urijah could bear a decadent failure like yourself. Your life has been a whirlwind of chaos and it ends now,” he boldly says. + +Suppressing fire shoots from the deck of The Lady’s Reaper causing Garrick’s crew to scramble for cover. Lady Myrr lands next you, throwing the rope back to your ship. She gives you a wink, tosses a bottle of rum your way, and ignites the fuse of a grenade. The shrapnel finds unlucky sailors in it’s way. Through the smoke’s cover, you rush towards Garrick. Your sword is a blur as you feint and attack from unconventional angles. You didn’t forget the reputation of Garrick’s dueling ability, which is why you used untraditional sword forms. His defense is a wall. Not even your expertly disguised feints throw him off. His parries send entire shocks through your arm. By honor, mercy, or perhaps a little of both he does not toy with you. His counter-attack is swift, deflecting your sword aside and taking advantage of the opening. Garrick’s broadsword pierces through your chest, driving straight through the back. Dropping to your knees, you see the fallen body of Lady Myrr bleeding out on the deck. You don’t even try crawling her way. Garrick stands above you, resolute, a tinge of sadness at his face. His sword arcs high in the air. You meet his eyes. Finally, you think. Peace.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Lady Myrr gave you her trust. There is no way you were going to betray that. She’s the one that rescued you. She’s the one who you owed your new life to. Taking a deep breath, you know there’s no going back after this. Even if you somehow managed not to get executed, you wouldn’t be able to face Brelia after this.Without hesitation, you draw your sword back with both hands towards Caitlyn’s kneeling body. The blade cuts through the base of her neck with ease. Her headless body falls limply to the floor. Try as you might, you can’t avoid seeing Caitlyn’s face as her head rolls to the floor. It’s a look of sadness as if disappointed her prince would choose an outlaw over her. Your boots are stained with blood. Her blood. The blood of your nation. + +“An unexpected choice. Again your actions fuck me,” Darius comments as he tosses a coin purse to Captain Kano. + +“Ha! Of course the Prince would side with the woman currently fucking him,” Kano points out. + +“You got what you wanted. Now kill me and let Lady Myrr go,” you say. + +“I suppose this is the end… for you,” Darius speaks as he drives his dagger into the unsuspecting Kano. + +“Wha— (gurgle) the fuck!” Kano cries out through his blood in surprise. + +Lady Myrr briefly brings her hand to her mouth and whispers incoherent words into one of the rings on her finger. A piercing screech echoes within the hallway causing all it’s inhabitants to drop their weapons in order to cover their ears. As quickly as it came, the screech subsided. Disoriented, but still reflexive, you grab your sword from the floor, sticking it through Darius’ gut and slicing it wide open. You move on to the next target, while he doubles over in attempt to keep his organs inside. Frenzied by the madness of the situation, you lose yourself in a bloodlust cutting down man after man. The few cuts you receive in your reckless assault are disregarded. You only want more blood. You only want to end more lives. Lady Myrr and her remaining allies join the massacre. Only two members of Kano’s crew manage to escape with their lives. + +“Let them go. They will tell the island of our victory. No one will dare challenge me after this,” Lady Myrr says. “Thank you, Prince, for choosing me. You saved my life and that is a debt I mean to repay. You’re free. I mean it. If you want to leave, go ahead. I won’t stop you.” + +“How can you just expect me leave after this? I chose you over my own country. I would have nothing without you,” you say. + +“Then let’s go celebrate your decision.” + +She takes you by the hand, but you pull yours away. You answer her quizzical look as she orders the raid team to disperse. + +“I’m not a fucking fool, Myrr. I know what you planned here. You played Kano by planting Darius in his midst. Darius is a piece of shit, but I’ve been around him long enough to know he’s not the traitorous type. You arranged this whole encounter. For what? Out of sheer jealousy and pettiness. When he stuck his dagger into Kano it all made sense. You gave him the fucking idea for the ultimatum because you wanted Caitlyn dead. You knew you couldn’t execute her with me around, so you schemed up this entire thing. You know what the worse part is? I had no fucking choice. I’m enslaved to you, whether you own me or not.” + +“My, my aren’t you the clever one, Prince? It’s time you forget your heritage. It’s holding you back from reaching your full potential. I knew who you were the moment you arrived here. You don’t belong in elegant castles wearing frilly clothing. You belong with me. The things you’ve told me about your past, though not the entire truth, made it clear that you aren’t suited for the throne. That’s Urijah’s responsibility, is it not? You may have hidden the full story from me, but I know you. Your heart longs for the freedom of Miranna. Forget Brelia. You and I will rule this island together. Only Caitlyn’s death would convince me of your undying loyalty. When you insisted she join the raid, I knew what had to be done.” + +“You manipulating bitch,” you curse grabbing Lady Myrr by the throat and throwing her to the ground. She rises to all fours to stand up to her feet. Your foot meets her gut, collapsing her back down to the ground. She rolls over, drawing her sword and lunges towards you. You easily parry her attacks. With ease, you block her advance, taking pleasure in her struggling, futile maneuvers. Lady Myrr thrusts forward into your trap. You slide back just out of range, taking her off balance in her attack. With too much weight in her front foot, you grab at her wrist holding the sword and twist it from her grasp. At the same time your foot finds the underneath of her knee, taking the weight out from under her. She lies at your feet. At your mercy. +> Don't kill her +You just killed Caitlyn instead of Lady Myrr. Killing her now would mean Caitlyn died for nothing. + +“I’m sorry,” you mumble and offer a hand to help her up. + +She grabs your hand and allows you to pull her up. + +“So this is what you’ve become? An apologizing, weak shell of a man. I thought we were fit to rule Miranna together. We were going to rule the seas! But I guess I was wrong. The ruler of Miranna apologizes to no one,” Lady Myrr replies. + +Her hidden blade pierces your stomach. + +“You may be deadly with a sword, but it takes more than that to rule here. You have to be cunning. You have to be smart. You must be willing to do whatever it takes with no remorse. You obviously are not fit for this life. It’s a shame really. You have taught me many things in the past few weeks. Think of this as my lesson to you.” + +Overtaken by grief and surprise, you don’t even fight back. Lady Myrr pierces the blade deeper before ripping it out. She departs, leaving you bleeding out on the floor. The last thing you see before you die is Caitlyn’s body on the floor. You feel disgusted by your actions before finally feeling nothing.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You creep quietly among the outskirts of Captain Kano’s villa. From your vantage point, you see several patrol units on the perimeter. From a few open windows, it doesn’t look to be that heavily guarded on the inside. To the east of the villa you see his sloop, The Boar, docked with members of his crew playing dice and drinking outside. Lady Myrr leads the raid group. There were only ten of you total, way less numbers than you expected. When you brought it up she simply said, We will create more fear if Kano disappears during the night. The others will not sleep as easy. + +Lady Myrr whispers her commands, “We’ll split into two groups. Darius’ will strike near The Boar cutting off reinforcements and my group will sneak into the villa, find Kano, and end his life. Once you see the building burning, we’ll meet back at the manor. Kill anyone who gets in your way.” + +Everyone nods in agreement. Unsurprisingly, Myrr puts you in her group. You are a little disappointed when Caitlyn is put in the other, especially since Darius was in charge. At first you’re afraid his hatred of you will cause problems for Caitlyn, but then you remember he hates her too. Myrr silently leads the way towards the villa. Staying in the high grass, you use the cover of night to sneak past the patrols undetected. One unlucky pirate chooses a spot near you to relieve himself. Lady Myrr takes advantage of his vulnerable position and greets him with knife to the throat. + +Your group reaches the villa with no other encounters. The inside is filled with mahogany furniture and oil paintings. You move stealthily through the hallways. Internally you comment on the decor, Captain Kano sure is a lavish man. Hmm, I would have assumed a pirate captain’s villa to be, well, more rambunctious, you think. It’s quiet. Too quiet… A whirling sound fills the air. Led by your acute senses, your blade automatically moves into a defensive position blocking the projectile that was aimed at your heart. + +“Ambush!” you yell. + +Several doors in the hallway swing open and men rush out with their scimitars and sabres raised high. You meet the first attacker, parrying his blade before countering with a deadly blow to the gut. The second doesn’t even get a chance to swing before your lighting thrust drops him. The narrow corridor allows your group to fight a few at a time, but each kill is replaced with another fresh body. + +Fighting with her back to yours, Lady Myrr shouts, “Show yourself, coward! I know you’re here!” + +“Halt your advance!” a voice cries amidst the fighting. + +The pirates halt their attack and stand aside for their captain. Kano, you presume, strides forward. His tall frame overshadows his men. His mouth twists into a crooked smile as he takes the pipe from his mouth to speak. + +“Well, well. What do we have here? A pirate queen out in the open? So unprotected. So exposed.” Turning to you he adds, “Ah, the prince that I’ve heard so much about. You’re a little more baby-faced than I was expecting. The tales of your swordsmanship made me think you were a seasoned man.” + +“Prince?” Lady Myrr asks. + +Ignoring her and putting the facts together, you reply to Kano. + +“I take it you and Governor Lucius have been talking. You are fools if you think aligning with Rath is in your best interest. They’ll turn on you in a second. You think Rath will just let you rule here without oversight? No, they’ll use you for their own gain and toss you aside once they have what they need.” + +“You’re a prince?” Lady Myrr asks again. Captain Kano also ignores her. + +“Ha-ha-ha! How dumb do you think I am? Miranna will survive as it always has. Rath is only a means to an end. There isn’t a nation that can rule Miranna. Miranna belongs to the free. If Rath decides to dishonor their agreement, they will meet the same end as every invading nation. Our ships will sink any attack force. Neither Rath nor Brelia has a navy that can defeat us. But that is none of your concern. I’m afraid your time is at an end. I would have preferred to ransom you to Orson, but Darius was very adamant about this part of the deal. He even refused a majority share in your would-be ransom. Can you believe that?” + +“Actually, I can. That guy hates me,” you respond. + +“Darius would never—” + +Lady Myrr starts to speak before Darius enters with a bloodied Caitlyn bound and gagged. He pushes her to the ground in front of you. She looks up to you, eyes watering as if to apologize for getting captured. + +“I’m sorry, my Lady. I believed in you, I really did, but this prince has corrupted your mind and your ideals. I don’t know why you took so much interest in him. It should have been me at your side and yet you cast me aside for what? For an irresponsible fling? I’ve known you long enough to see the way you look at him. Why couldn’t it have been me? I’ve always done everything you’ve asked! Yet you treat me like one of your common slaves. I am more than that. We could have been more than that! Miranna deserves a strong ruler. I’m sorry it had to come to this," Darius confesses. + +“I’m sorry too,” Lady Myrr speaks softly. Louder she adds, “Sorry that I trusted a miscreant like you! The deepest levels of Hell belong to fucking traitors like you. You’re betraying me because I didn’t fuck you? I doubt your small cock would even get close to satisfying me. You’re despicable, you’re a bitch, and I will fucking kill you for this. One by one, I’ll remove your fingernails and then move to the fingers themselves next. I’ll break every bone in your fucking body. Then I'll show you your reflection in the mirror before ripping out your eyes, so the last thing you’ll see will be your fucked up, mutilated body.” + +Visibly hurt by her words, Darius replies to you and Lady Myrr. + +“I will miss that passion once you’re gone. This is all your fault, Prince. Everything was fine before you arrived, although I guess you didn’t really have a choice in that matter. Captain Kano filled me in. Perhaps you both were meant for each other having the whole betrayed thing in common. Before I kill you, I want to make you suffer so I’ll give you a choice. You can save one of your precious ladies here… you’ll just need to kill the other. You have my word, I’ll spare the one who you don’t execute. You’ll still die, of course, but at least you can save one of them. My final gift to you. So, Prince, who will it be?” +> Don't kill either +You will not take part in his ultimatum. Two options are placed before you, but that does not mean you have to take either. You care immensely for both Lady Myrr and Caitlyn. Each is a part of you. Caitlyn is testament to your heritage and Myrr is your future. With a cry, you take the offensive. Whirling your blade around, you scoop a dagger off the ground and flip it to Cait who catches it with her bound hands. As she works on cutting the rope, you attack Darius with a series of upper cuts and low sweeps. He is able to block a few of your attacks before you catch him with a deep cut to his side. He clutches the wound and with his defenses lowered, you crumple him with a knee to the temple. Captain Kano and the rest of his crew resume their charge. Caitlyn finally gets his hands unbound and joins you armed with the dagger. With the rest of the crew engaged, your assault is brought to a halt. Again, you are forced to fighting back to back to survive. + +“We can’t hold them much longer! Got any ideas?” Lady Myrr shouts as she parries and incoming blade. + +“I’m a little too busy to think of one now!” you shout back. + +A round object catches your eye on an incoming pirate. At his waist hangs a grenade. You quickly disperse the pirate in front of you and move towards it. Suddenly, Captain Kano blocks your way. He takes another puff at his pipe before swinging his cutlass at your head. Easily dodging the attack, you front roll forward and stab the pirate behind him in the gut. As he drops, you pull the grenade at his belt and turn just in time to block another attack from Kano. You parry a few more before directing his cutlass out of position. With Kano exposed, you bury your sword in his shoulder and rip the pipe from his mouth pulling a few teeth out in the process. Igniting the grenade with the pipe, you toss it into the mix of Kano’s crew. The blast knocks you from your feet. Blinded by the smoke, a hand grabs your arm and pulls you through the dark mist and outside the villa. + +“Holy shit! Did you see that?” you exclaim to Caitlyn whose hand just led you out. + +“Saw. And felt,” she replies. You notice a sizable wound at her side. The result of the grenade shrapnel. + +“Fuck, that looks deep. We need to get you medical attention.” + +She waves you off. + +“I’ll be fine. Just need to find somewhere to rest for awhile. This whole place is in an uproar. More crew from The Boar is probably on their way. We need to move.” + +“Where’s Lady Myrr?” you ask. + +“Don’t know. Didn’t see her escape. She could be dead for all I care. Does she really fuck that good? Why didn’t you just kill her?” Caitlyn asks. + +“Now’s not the time, Cait. For all I know, he would have just killed everyone anyway. You can’t trust the word of someone who just betrayed their master.” + +“Fair point. Let’s get out of here.” + +You aren’t sure where Lady Myrr is. She could be captured by Captain Kano. Going back and looking for her could mean your death, although she was very clear that attempted escape would be punished by death. You don’t think this would count as an attempted escape, but Lady Myrr has a vicious temper and you really don’t want to be on the bad end of it. +> Go back for her +There is a reason why you didn’t choose to kill Lady Myrr. Leaving her to die, or worse, would be going back on that decision. No, you had to save her. + +“Cait, I’m going back,” you say. + +“What? Why?” + +“I need to make sure Lady Myrr is ok. She could be Kano’s prisoner. I don’t even want to imagine what that sick fuck would do to her.” + +“Who cares? She’s the one holding us here. We’re free! Once I’m healed, we could earn enough money to charter a trip back to Brelia,” Caitlyn says. + +“I need to know she’s not dead.” + +“You know, Prince, I’ve never thought you were the smartest guy, but this is fucking dumb. After all we’ve been through, you’re just going to throw your life away for the bitch that’s holding your leash? Fine. Go ahead. Don’t expect any rescue on my part. If I even make it.” + +Caitlyn storms off into the darkness leaving you alone. The grenade in the villa caused a lot of damage. Part of the building is still on fire and you can see crew members rushing around with buckets of water. At least they’ll be distracted. Besides, they won’t expect the person who blew a hole in the wall to sneak back in, you reason. You make it past the scrambling fire fighters and make it to the villa. The inside of the building is a mess. Debris is scattered everywhere. The paintings that you first admired are torn and littered on the floor. Turning the corner, you see a bloodied Lady Myrr strapped to a chair in front of Captain Kano and his crew members. + +“Heh, bet you didn’t think your plan would turn out this way. Your attempt failed and your new toy of prince left you here to die. You have nothing left except your life. Which I intend to take shortly,” Kano finishes his taunt with a slap to Lady Myrr’s cheek. + +“Finish the deed then, swine,” she spits. + +“Oh, I’m about to. But it’d be a shame not to take advantage of such a beautiful creature before,” Kano’s says running his hand down the side of her face. + +You burst into the room with a string of curses. Fueled by hate, you draw your sword to run Kano through. You never make it that far. A pistol shot tags your leg collapsing you to the ground. As you’re getting up, another shot hits you in the chest. A wounded Darius emerges from the shadows holding two smoking flintlock pistols. You lay in a pool of your own blood. The last thing you see is a cruel smile upon his face as he walks towards Lady Myrr.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You will not take part in his ultimatum. Two options are placed before you, but that does not mean you have to take either. You care immensely for both Lady Myrr and Caitlyn. Each is a part of you. Caitlyn is testament to your heritage and Myrr is your future. With a cry, you take the offensive. Whirling your blade around, you scoop a dagger off the ground and flip it to Cait who catches it with her bound hands. As she works on cutting the rope, you attack Darius with a series of upper cuts and low sweeps. He is able to block a few of your attacks before you catch him with a deep cut to his side. He clutches the wound and with his defenses lowered, you crumple him with a knee to the temple. Captain Kano and the rest of his crew resume their charge. Caitlyn finally gets his hands unbound and joins you armed with the dagger. With the rest of the crew engaged, your assault is brought to a halt. Again, you are forced to fighting back to back to survive. + +“We can’t hold them much longer! Got any ideas?” Lady Myrr shouts as she parries and incoming blade. + +“I’m a little too busy to think of one now!” you shout back. + +A round object catches your eye on an incoming pirate. At his waist hangs a grenade. You quickly disperse the pirate in front of you and move towards it. Suddenly, Captain Kano blocks your way. He takes another puff at his pipe before swinging his cutlass at your head. Easily dodging the attack, you front roll forward and stab the pirate behind him in the gut. As he drops, you pull the grenade at his belt and turn just in time to block another attack from Kano. You parry a few more before directing his cutlass out of position. With Kano exposed, you bury your sword in his shoulder and rip the pipe from his mouth pulling a few teeth out in the process. Igniting the grenade with the pipe, you toss it into the mix of Kano’s crew. The blast knocks you from your feet. Blinded by the smoke, a hand grabs your arm and pulls you through the dark mist and outside the villa. + +“Holy shit! Did you see that?” you exclaim to Caitlyn whose hand just led you out. + +“Saw. And felt,” she replies. You notice a sizable wound at her side. The result of the grenade shrapnel. + +“Fuck, that looks deep. We need to get you medical attention.” + +She waves you off. + +“I’ll be fine. Just need to find somewhere to rest for awhile. This whole place is in an uproar. More crew from The Boar is probably on their way. We need to move.” + +“Where’s Lady Myrr?” you ask. + +“Don’t know. Didn’t see her escape. She could be dead for all I care. Does she really fuck that good? Why didn’t you just kill her?” Caitlyn asks. + +“Now’s not the time, Cait. For all I know, he would have just killed everyone anyway. You can’t trust the word of someone who just betrayed their master.” + +“Fair point. Let’s get out of here.” + +You aren’t sure where Lady Myrr is. She could be captured by Captain Kano. Going back and looking for her could mean your death, although she was very clear that attempted escape would be punished by death. You don’t think this would count as an attempted escape, but Lady Myrr has a vicious temper and you really don’t want to be on the bad end of it. +> Escape with Caitlyn +There is no point in going back for Lady Myrr. You doubt she escaped the blast. Hell, you were lucky to even make it out. You and Caitlyn travel off the road to the center hub of Miranna. With an island full of fugitives and outlaws you figure it wouldn’t be that difficult to lay low. Even though it’s night, the place is still alive. The taverns almost never close. You and Caitlyn meander through the streets looking for a place to rest. Her skills must be remarkable because Caitlyn is even able to swipe a few coins from a passing by drunk to pay for the room. On the outskirts of the hub, you find a place: The Cove Inn. The place isn’t rowdy like the others you passed by. A few depressed-looking sailors sit at the bar milking their drinks. You pay for a room, not having to say much to the Innkeeper. The service providers on Miranna didn’t question wounded patrons. As long as they had coin. You help lay Caitlyn down on the bed and take a spot next to her. + +The next morning… + +You awaken with pain everywhere. The adrenaline from the night before had finally worn off. With a grunt you sit up to see how Caitlyn’s doing. Her face is white and the wound at her side looks to be infected. + +“Shit, Cait. Your side…” your voice trails off. + +She barely manages to speak, “I’m sorry, Prince. I let Darius capture me and it’s all my fault. Thank you for saving me. I know you grew close to Lady Myrr.” + +“Don’t say that. It’s my fault. You’ll be fine. Just need to rest up a bit. I’ll go find us more money to pay for another night,” you say. + +“Ever the fool, Prince. Will you tell my father I fought bravely?” + +“Of course, Cait,” you say tears welling up in your eyes. + +“Thank you, Prince. I love—” her words cut before she can finish the sentence. + +You press your forehead to hers feeling the weight of your actions. If you hadn’t grown so attached to Lady Myrr, you could have killed her and possibly escaped to Brelia with Caitlyn. Suddenly, you hear heavy footsteps coming from downstairs. You can’t fully hear the conversation with the Innkeeper, but you clearly hear one word in particular: 'Upstairs'. Not taking any chances, you hurriedly put on your sword belt and grab your things. You hesitate, wondering if you shouldn’t leave Caitlyn’s body on the bed. What does it matter at this point? She’s dead and you’ve lost everything. Every move stings as your bruises and open wounds remind you of the night before. It’s not as bad as Cait got, you think. You escape through the window and make your way through the back alley to avoid whoever is downstairs. Out of nowhere, two street thugs appear in front and another two to your back. + +“What do we have here? A lost nobleman?” the ugly one to your left says. To be fair, they're both ugly. + +“What? No, why does everyone call me that… I’m really not in the mood for this,” you reply. + +You try to push past them, but they stop you. Angry at your circumstance, you take it out on the street thugs. Turning on the two behind you first, you whirl around pulling your sword from your belt in one decisive movement. Your sword drives into the gut of one and your fist meets the other’s face. As he’s dazed, you rip your sword out and slice in an upward manner through his throat. You sense the others drawing near and turn to face them. Hindered by your injuries, you parry a few blows before being overtaken by their fury. As you bleed out in the alley, you think of home. You think of Cait.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Do you notice my hip position as I thrust like this? That’s where your power comes from. If you don’t wind up, you’ll be more efficient with your energy too.” + +For a few months, you have been teaching your sword techniques to Lady Myrr. She had been given some training as a girl, but nothing extensive. She was not unskilled, simply lacked proper refinement. Her determination to perfectly perform drills surprised you. You imagined someone with her status would only order people around. Lady Myrr takes a more hands on approach. On more than one occasion, she would not continue the lesson until the specific form was mastered. Luckily, she didn’t pry deeper into your past. You aren’t quite sure what would happen if she found out who you are and you really didn’t want to find out. No, you felt it was best to hide your identity. + +“Fucking hell! I always drop my guard when attempting that feint.” Myrr shouts in frustration. + +“That’s because you’re overcompensating with your leg power. It should be quick, without effort. Like this.” + +You perform the technique to perfection as you’ve done countless times. + +“Show off. Alright that’s enough for today. I need you for something,” Lady Myrr says. + +“Something else than training?” you question. + +“Yes. Darius should be here any moment. Ah here he is.” + +“My Lady Myrr,” Darius bows. “Slave,” he mentions with obvious distaste in your direction. + +“Speak freely,” Lady Myrr commands. + +“Our contacts have reported Captain Kano is plotting with the Rathans against you," Darius says. "They will aid him with firepower as long as he remains loyal to Rath.” + +“Are these contacts to be trusted?” Lady Myrr asks. + +“I trust them with my life, my Lady. We should strike Kano before he has the chance to grow in strength. Before he has the support of Rath.” + +“What do you think?” Lady Myrr turns to you. + +“My Lady, he is a slave! You would ask his advice when your entire manor is threatened?” Darius interjects. + +Before Darius could think to react, Lady Myrr grabs his throat and trips him to the ground. Her vise-like grip prevents any air from his breath, her knee holding his body in place on the ground. Judging by his size, you don’t doubt that Darius could overpower the Lady off him if he really wanted to, but he continues to lay in obedience. You stand ready just in case. + +“YOU will fucking listen to ME. If I ask your opinion, I want to hear it. Don’t presume that I want to hear it all the time. Do you understand me?” + +Darius (coughing) does his best to nod and Lady Myrr lets him back to his feet. + +“So what do you think?” +> Wait for more intel +“It would be foolish to act from just one report. I suggest you gather more information.” + +“My thoughts exactly. Darius, find out more. You have until the end of the week,” Lady Myrr replies. + +With a bow, Darius exits and leaves you alone with Lady Myrr. + +“If Kano is plotting with the Rathans, he will have tremendous power backing him. I can’t believe no one’s tried to rule Miranna with help from a major nation. Seems like a good idea,” you say. + +“Oh they’ve tried. The partnership always falls through. It’s hard to keep a solid ally without trust. Ironically, one always ends up betraying the other out of fear of being betrayed,” Lady Myrr answers. + +“Has anyone tried to overthrow you since taking power?” you ask. + +“Two or three. It was one after the other as soon as my late husband died. They thought since I was a woman, I would be easy to assassinate. They were small time crews trying to seize an opportunity to gain real power. By the time I was done with them, no one dared oppose me,” Myrr speaks recalling the past. + +“No one until now.” + +“And it’ll be a while until the next fool tries. Kano's destruction will be a warning to them all. Enough war talk. I need you to fine tune my sword skills before we act,” Myrr says, unsheathing her blade. + +Later that week… + +You fall back in your bed exhausted. Lady Myrr does the same beside you. It wasn’t the first time it happened during your months of training. Still, it complicated things a bit. You figured you didn’t have a choice in the matter. Lady Myrr always gets her way and this wasn’t exactly a difficult order to follow. The refusal of her advances would cause more problems, and even possibly your life. You felt a pang of guilt each time for Natalie’s sake, but you couldn’t help wanting more. She curls up next to you and gently runs her hand over your bare skin. + +“That was… exhilarating,” you break the silence. + +“Maybe for you,” Myrr replies. + +“You sure know how to hurt a guy’s feelings.” + +“I know how to hurt more than just feelings. Another performance like that and you’ll find out,” Myrr says, holding a straight face. + +You stare in her eyes sensing if she’s messing with you. Finally, she breaks and grins, letting you know she’s joking with a playful grab under the covers. Suddenly, she recoils and clutches at her throat. Her body convulses, and her cough covers you in blood. You look up to see a masked figure dressed in black. You reach for the knife on the nightstand, but you’re too slow. The figure’s broadsword pierces your gut. You stumble out of the bed, tripping and clutching your wound. Naked and unarmed you attempt a feeble punch at the assassin before collapsing. Before your vision completely fades, you recognize the family crest on the broadsword. It’s Brelian.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The guards lead you through the manor passing by countless house slaves scrambling to fulfill their duties. Most of the female slaves are topless. + +"Can’t say I disagree with the dress code," you comment. + +A forceful push in your back is your only reply. + +“Yeah like you aren’t staring too,” you utter softly. + +You arrive at a lavish doorway draped with fine beads, silk, and an assortment of decorations. Entering into the room, Lady Myrr gracefully rises from her chair and strides in your direction. + +“Now what am I to think when I see one of my prisoners cut down multiple men without breaking a sweat?” Lady Myrr asks pouring two glasses of wine from a jewel-covered pitcher. "Guards, leave us." + +“Tempt a man with a good drink and the company of a beautiful woman and he’ll accomplish anything,” you respond. + +“Heh, I don’t remember ever offering to meet with the victors of that fun little game.” + +“ Let's just say I had a feeling you'd want to meet the one who distinguished themselves above the rest. From what I hear, you’re a lady who appreciates someone who can get things done.” + +“I can’t say I don’t admire your confidence. By your showing on the sand, it’s obvious that you are skilled with a blade. Skills such as yours don’t just magically appear. Tell me, how did you come across such training?” + +“I had a very strict father.” + +“Son of a military man perhaps?” + +“Something like that.” + +Lady Myrr waves her hand as if swatting away an idea. + +“Your background matters not. As long as you serve your lady without question. In any capacity I see fit. Do you have a woman?” + +She takes a sip from her cup and places her hand against your chest. + +“Sort of,” you answer with a slight hesitation. + +“If you had one, you’d know. Come, I desire instruction.” + +“Of what, my Lady?” + +“You’ll find out.” +> Refuse +“No.” + +“Did you just tell me ‘no’, slave? I don’t care how good your swordsman skills are, no one refuses me, especially not one of my slaves. Guards, dispose this stubborn animal. I will not waste my time on lost causes.” + +The sudden crack of a whip distracts you long enough for several crossbow bolts to pierce your chest. The impact drives you back a few feet, but you remain standing. Darius’ whip tears the skin from your body as you struggle to find a weapon to defend yourself with. Not finding anything you desperately reach for Lady Myrr to use as a shield against the attacks. She easily dodges out of your way, cutting your arm in the attempt with a hidden blade pulled from her dress. Bleeding from several wounds, you finally collapse to the ground. Lady Myrr grabs your hair and pulls your head back exposing your throat. + +“Not so confident now, are you?” she taunts while bringing the blade to your throat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You feel the events of last night as you wake up. The massive bed, filled with pillows and silk sheets, offers little relief to your pulsing headache. Natalie sure as hell enjoys it though. You didn’t exactly plan for things with the house-servant to escalate this far. The two of you were childhood friends ever since her mother became a handmaiden to your mother, Queen Laurine. + +“Nat,” you gently nudge her awake. “Think you could scoot over a bit to give me more blanket?” + +With a soft moan she shifts her weight, loosening slack on the covers. She finishes the movement by pressing her bare skin against yours. Overwhelmed by her soft skin and aroma, you briefly forget about your headache and parched throat. Just as you make your move, someone knocks on the door. You ignore it, but another knock echoes in the room. Cursing, you grab a robe from the floor and make your way to the bedroom door. The morning coolness stings your bare feet on the marble floor. Sunlight shining through the sheer, satin drapes reminds you again of the headache. Creaking the door open, you see one of the house servants. + +“Samuel, what are you doing here?” you ask. + +“Prince, you are required in the court,” he replies. + +“What do they want? They rarely ask for me.” + +“Not sure, prince. It sounds important though. All the upper nobility are there including Baron Reginald and Duke Kane.” + +“Fine. Inform them I'll be there shortly.” + +With a nod, Samuel turns and walks down the hall. You slam the door shut, completely waking Natalie up in the process. + +“What — you’re already leaving me?” she playfully whines. + +“Sorry, Nat. It's a shame their precious first-born, Urijah, is away otherwise they’d summon him instead. It must be important if they’re not willing to wait for his return.” + +“Well don’t take too long. You and I have unfinished business here.” + +Fully exposing herself, she slides out from beneath the covers. Her hair length is almost enough to conceal her chest. You smile, thankful it wasn't grown out more. + +“You must be on guard when approaching the court.” she warns gliding closer towards you. “Dangerous people seek to occupy places of power.” + +With her final word she reaches for a dagger on the nightstand. The blade makes a shrill sound as its razor sharp edge is revealed. In a quick motion, she thrusts the point towards your throat. Despite your poor condition, instinct takes over. Ducking from the thrust, you grab her hand around the hilt and twist backwards, forcing the dagger from her hand and pinning her against the wall. + +“Dangerous people are everywhere,” you whisper from behind. +> A Childhood Friend +Eleven years ago... + +It’s that girl again. Lately you’ve seen her everywhere. Who is she? She has pretty hair. + +“My son, come here,” Queen Laurine calls from across the great hall. “This is Mary and her daughter, Natalie. You two look about the same age. How old are you Natalie?” + +The girl shyly hides her face within her waist length auburn hair. Apparently that wasn’t enough because she moves behind her mother. + +“She’s seven, Your Grace,” her mother answers with a smile + +“Really? She looks older,” you interject. + +“Ha-ha Prince!" your mother laughs. "That’s not very nice. One day you’ll learn not to call ladies older than they actually are. Now why don’t the both of you learn to play together?” + +Nodding, you move past Mary and grab Natalie’s hand. Leading her through the hallway, you head to the Queen's garden. + +“I like this place. There’s lots of colors and different smells,” you comment. + +“It’s pretty,” Natalie replies. + +“You know you don’t need to be afraid right? My mother is harsh sometimes, but she won’t hurt you.” + +Natalie nods. + +“You have pretty hair. It reminds me of this place… smelly,” you say with a smile. + +“That’s not very nice,” Natalie replies not catching your playful tone. + +“Sorry. I didn’t mean it like that.” + +“It’s ok. My mother warned me boys aren’t very smart.” + +It's your turn to be offended. You start to correct her, but then see the grin appear on her face. You match it with one of your own. + +“Tag, you’re it,” Natalie hits your shoulder and take off down the garden path. + +You admire her hair flowing behind her like waves as she runs. Then you take off after her.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>“Are you sure we should be doing this?” the nervous voice of your best friend, Harlan, asks. + +“Of course. I can do whatever I want," you reply. + +“What if the King finds out?” + +“Ha! So what? I’ll deal with him. There’s not much he can do to me that he hasn't tried before.” + +"It’s not you I’m worried about...” + +Though you wouldn’t admit it out loud, you know Harlan is right. Being the second-born prince of the Brelia Kingdom had its benefits. Unfortunately for Harlan, he wasn't afforded the same privilege and would likely be punished much more severely. + +You both sat at the bar in one of the city’s shadiest taverns, The Dancing Goat. Lately, you've become somewhat of a regular. You always wore rugged attire, but its patrons somehow assumed you were nobility, probably because you never argued on price like most everyone else. Once a week, The Goat held fights and it wasn't uncommon for the matches to end in death. After weeks of being thoroughly entertained in the crowd, you were ready to test yourself in the ring. + +“Hey, pretty boy. Are you ready to pop your cherry?” the announcer’s ragged voice resonates over the bar noise. + +You empty your cups contents. + +“If you have anyone skilled enough to challenge me.” + +"The brash ignorance of youth!" the announcer replies. "You're not the first soft face to wander in here. Most don't leave as pretty as they come in." + +"I intend to stay this good-looking for awhile, old man," you reply. + +A burly hand grabs your arm and drags you into the circle of a screaming mob. Looking around, you see the drunken faces of screaming gamblers. Standing your opposite and a full head higher, you instantly recognize your opponent. That’s the fucking champion, you think to yourself. His heavily muscled frame is marked with numerous scars. His eyes meet yours and upon sizing you up, the corner of his lip curls into a grin. + +"Ladies and gentlemen! Our very own nobleman has finally grown a pair. I just hope he remembered to clean his fingernails for the occasion (the crowd laughs). Who will welcome him to the pit? A man that needs no introduction. A man that has never been defeated. The champion, Carthus!" + +At the mention of his name, Carthus lets loose a primal scream and beats his chest in pride. The crowd roars into a frenzy at the sight of the monstrous champion. + +“Fight!” + +Carthus rushes at you like a crazed bull. You're unsuprised by his tactics and quickly get a feel for the man's combat prowess. An untrained man of his size, he depends upon superior strength to compensate for lack of technique. You easily side step his mad charge, tagging him with a right hook on the way past. Angered by the blow, Carthus turns to you and starts a second charge. + +You stand still until he’s almost upon you. Just before he reaches you, your arm underhooks his shoulder and you use his momentum to swing onto his back. You throw hard elbows to the back of his head to soften him up a bit. Dazed by your blows, you slip your arm underneath his chin and lock the choke with both arms. He bucks and grabs at you with both hands in attempt to throw you off. Holding with all your strength, you press your body into his and wrap your legs around his massive frame to keep your center of gravity even with his. + +“Arghh!” you yell as Carthus bucks and flails around the ring. + +After a few moments, the lack of air gets to him and you feel his body begin to go limp. His body falls to the ground with an earth-shaking thud. You're careful not to be squished by the falling giant. + +“Victory! Nobleman!” + +“Pour me another drink and bring on the next challenger!” you shout to the cheering crowd. +> A History Lesson +Twelve years ago... + +“Why do I have to read this history book? It’s so boring,” the child, your younger self, questions. + +“It’s important, Prince. One day you may find yourself in a place where this knowledge could save your life,” the elderly Sage answers. + +“I thought that’s what the Weapon Masters are supposed to teach me.” + +“Knowledge is a powerful ally. People fear what they do not understand. Understanding is only gained after knowledge. With knowledge, you will know no fear.” + +Not a rare occurrence, the Sage assigned as your teacher struggles to keep your attention during the lesson. This time, however, his words found the mark. You pick up the history book and start reading A Journeyman’s Notes On Kria: + +The Kria Providence is made up of three nations: The Brelia Kingdom, Rath, and the island of Miranna. Brelia and Rath have fought numerous wars since their founding. The two nations occupy most of the land mass in Kria and each is always trying distinguish themselves from the other. The last war, which ended 10 years ago, resulted in a massive wall built by Brelia. The wall stretches across the entire western border to protect against Rathan raiders. The King of Brelia, Orson, decided to build the wall in order to establish peace. The cyclical nature of the Rathan/Brelian wars needed to end, and the only solution in King Orson’s mind was to take preventative measures against rogue raiding parties. Orson has made it his life mission to keep the peace with Rath. + +The people of Brelia view Rath as uncivilized barbarians. Although Rath doesn't possess the technology or engineering of Brelia, the Rathan people are sturdy. The average Rathan stands almost a head taller than the average Brelian. Dust storms and tornadoes plague Rath causing its people to adapt to the harsh environment. For that reason, Rath doesn't have the enormous cities and buildings that Brelia possess. + +Miranna is an island of cutthroats, lawlessness, and pirates. The island is north of both Rath and Brelia across the Cutter’s Channel. Many nations have tried to colonize Miranna and establish their rule. All have failed. Miranna is a place of organized chaos where the law is dictated by the strong. Whoever has the most power is in charge. It's not uncommon for the ruling pirate lord to be assassinated in the night by a rival. Merchant and naval ships know to navigate well away from Miranna. Ships that stray too near are pillaged. The crew is either killed or sold. It’s no secret there is tremendous wealth to be earned in Miranna. The opportunities are seemingly endless. If you can survive its anarchy. +> End Flashback +“Are you sure we should be doing this?” the nervous voice of your best friend, Harlan, asks. + +“Of course. I can do whatever I want," you reply. + +“What if the King finds out?” + +“Ha! So what? I’ll deal with him. There’s not much he can do to me that he hasn't tried before.” + +"It’s not you I’m worried about...” + +Though you wouldn’t admit it out loud, you know Harlan is right. Being the second-born prince of the Brelia Kingdom had its benefits. Unfortunately for Harlan, he wasn't afforded the same privilege and would likely be punished much more severely. + +You both sat at the bar in one of the city’s shadiest taverns, The Dancing Goat. Lately, you've become somewhat of a regular. You always wore rugged attire, but its patrons somehow assumed you were nobility, probably because you never argued on price like most everyone else. Once a week, The Goat held fights and it wasn't uncommon for the matches to end in death. After weeks of being thoroughly entertained in the crowd, you were ready to test yourself in the ring. + +“Hey, pretty boy. Are you ready to pop your cherry?” the announcer’s ragged voice resonates over the bar noise. + +You empty your cups contents. + +“If you have anyone skilled enough to challenge me.” + +"The brash ignorance of youth!" the announcer replies. "You're not the first soft face to wander in here. Most don't leave as pretty as they come in." + +"I intend to stay this good-looking for awhile, old man," you reply. + +A burly hand grabs your arm and drags you into the circle of a screaming mob. Looking around, you see the drunken faces of screaming gamblers. Standing your opposite and a full head higher, you instantly recognize your opponent. That’s the fucking champion, you think to yourself. His heavily muscled frame is marked with numerous scars. His eyes meet yours and upon sizing you up, the corner of his lip curls into a grin. + +"Ladies and gentlemen! Our very own nobleman has finally grown a pair. I just hope he remembered to clean his fingernails for the occasion (the crowd laughs). Who will welcome him to the pit? A man that needs no introduction. A man that has never been defeated. The champion, Carthus!" + +At the mention of his name, Carthus lets loose a primal scream and beats his chest in pride. The crowd roars into a frenzy at the sight of the monstrous champion. + +“Fight!” + +Carthus rushes at you like a crazed bull. You're unsuprised by his tactics and quickly get a feel for the man's combat prowess. An untrained man of his size, he depends upon superior strength to compensate for lack of technique. You easily side step his mad charge, tagging him with a right hook on the way past. Angered by the blow, Carthus turns to you and starts a second charge. + +You stand still until he’s almost upon you. Just before he reaches you, your arm underhooks his shoulder and you use his momentum to swing onto his back. You throw hard elbows to the back of his head to soften him up a bit. Dazed by your blows, you slip your arm underneath his chin and lock the choke with both arms. He bucks and grabs at you with both hands in attempt to throw you off. Holding with all your strength, you press your body into his and wrap your legs around his massive frame to keep your center of gravity even with his. + +“Arghh!” you yell as Carthus bucks and flails around the ring. + +After a few moments, the lack of air gets to him and you feel his body begin to go limp. His body falls to the ground with an earth-shaking thud. You're careful not to be squished by the falling giant. + +“Victory! Nobleman!” + +“Pour me another drink and bring on the next challenger!” you shout to the cheering crowd.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Twelve years ago... + +“Why do I have to read this history book? It’s so boring,” the child, your younger self, questions. + +“It’s important, Prince. One day you may find yourself in a place where this knowledge could save your life,” the elderly Sage answers. + +“I thought that’s what the Weapon Masters are supposed to teach me.” + +“Knowledge is a powerful ally. People fear what they do not understand. Understanding is only gained after knowledge. With knowledge, you will know no fear.” + +Not a rare occurrence, the Sage assigned as your teacher struggles to keep your attention during the lesson. This time, however, his words found the mark. You pick up the history book and start reading A Journeyman’s Notes On Kria: + +The Kria Providence is made up of three nations: The Brelia Kingdom, Rath, and the island of Miranna. Brelia and Rath have fought numerous wars since their founding. The two nations occupy most of the land mass in Kria and each is always trying distinguish themselves from the other. The last war, which ended 10 years ago, resulted in a massive wall built by Brelia. The wall stretches across the entire western border to protect against Rathan raiders. The King of Brelia, Orson, decided to build the wall in order to establish peace. The cyclical nature of the Rathan/Brelian wars needed to end, and the only solution in King Orson’s mind was to take preventative measures against rogue raiding parties. Orson has made it his life mission to keep the peace with Rath. + +The people of Brelia view Rath as uncivilized barbarians. Although Rath doesn't possess the technology or engineering of Brelia, the Rathan people are sturdy. The average Rathan stands almost a head taller than the average Brelian. Dust storms and tornadoes plague Rath causing its people to adapt to the harsh environment. For that reason, Rath doesn't have the enormous cities and buildings that Brelia possess. + +Miranna is an island of cutthroats, lawlessness, and pirates. The island is north of both Rath and Brelia across the Cutter’s Channel. Many nations have tried to colonize Miranna and establish their rule. All have failed. Miranna is a place of organized chaos where the law is dictated by the strong. Whoever has the most power is in charge. It's not uncommon for the ruling pirate lord to be assassinated in the night by a rival. Merchant and naval ships know to navigate well away from Miranna. Ships that stray too near are pillaged. The crew is either killed or sold. It’s no secret there is tremendous wealth to be earned in Miranna. The opportunities are seemingly endless. If you can survive its anarchy. +> View Map +<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your name is Leo Trapa and your achievements as Commodore of your ship Adventurer have already made you one of the most famous sailors in your world of Magellan. The Adventurer is a tough little ship and veteran of several battles, large enough to hold a Crew of 30 Sailors and 30 days worth of Supplies for them. Although you are only twenty-one years old you have already received the rank of Commodore from your Queen in recognition of your superb ability and seamanship. + + +The World of Magellan on which you live is mostly ocean occupied by a scattering of islands: twenty-five have already been discovered and there are almost certainly many more waiting out there. The people of your homeland, the Kingdom of the Three Islands, have a rich naval tradition and are technologically advanced: the Adventurer carries four cannons and all of your crew are armed with muskets, though these are slow to load making the sword your secondary weapon. A dozen Colonies have been established beyond the Great Reef which rings your three home islands but these range from thriving settlements to tiny outposts of civilization. + + +Your biggest problem on long voyages is that your ship can only carry enough Supplies for 30 days which will make finding and obtaining fresh sources of Supplies your top priority. If you ever run out of Supplies (your Supply number falls to 0) then you and your Crew will starve to death and die. You will almost certainly lose Crew members during your voyage and you must be careful that your Crew number never falls to 0 either: that will mean that you and all your Crew are dead. + + +Frequently there is a time element involved during your voyages and you will want to complete them in the smallest number of Days possible. Successfully completing a Voyage ahead of your Competitors will result in a Score Point which will show if you leave a Comment after the game that you have completed this story with a very high degree of skill. As in previous adventures you will find it useful to make a map of the waters you sail as you may return this way again and the information may benefit you... + + +So good luck reader, make wise and strategically sound choices and with a little luck, a good course and a fair wind you might live to see your homeland again! +> Click here to begin your adventure (remember to pick up the List of Noted Sailors first) +You stand in the familiar anteroom of the Royal Palace in Golden Sands, the Capital of The Three Islands, your homeland. Either side of you stand your fellow officers Naomi Swift and Eva Freer, both as experienced on the high seas as you are yourself. Pale and slender with long fair hair Naomi's delicate appearance hides a spirit of iron and determination. Eva on the other hand looks every bit as tough as she is with tomboyish short purple-black hair from beneath which her eyes seem to glare in a challenging way at everything she sees. They are your two best friends for different reasons: for Eva you feel something approaching devotion while at the same time awkwardly aware you inspire similar feelings in Naomi. + + +The Throne Room's doors open and Richard Quarrel, a slimy snake of a man whose marriage to your Queen has done little to improve his popularity with anyone, smiles at you all. + + +"The Queen will see you now," he announces. + + +Going inside you find more familiar faces waiting for you. Queen Anne-Marie, cold and imperious sits on her Throne while at her side sits the young foreigner Prince Al-Balu who as always looks completely baffled by what is going on around him. On his other side sits Ann Lovett, his fair-haired interpreter who gives you all a quick smile as you enter. On Anne-Marie's other side is a lady you don't recognize, an attractive dark-haired woman with a mocking smile that gives off the disconcerting impression that she knows something the rest of you don't. As you halt Anne-Marie speaks. + + +"I have summoned you three here because I have need of your services once more," she declares. "I know recently you have been extremely loud in voicing your criticisms of my rule. I also cannot forget that at the moment the Lapau War was approaching it's climactic battle you all rebelled and refused to follow my orders... However in my great and gracious mercy I will forgive you three as I have a task for you to perform. As you are aware neither Commodore Cuthrew or Finch have returned from their voyage of exploration beyond the Western Passage and it has been nearly three months since they left. Obviously the disapearrences of such experienced officers is troubling to say the least... Commodore Trapa. I want you to lead an expedition to find our lost countrymen and see what has befallen them. This is a difficult challenge but it's success will only increase your already great reputation and lead to generous rewards." + + +Anne-Marie flickers her eyes over your companions and her expressions darkens as she meets Eva's defiant stare. "Commodores Freer and Swift will accompany you with their own vessels and will be under your command, you may consider Commodore Swift your deputy. I have arranged for fresh supplies to be cached at the Western Passage and after a suitable interval I will send my friend Captain Dancer through the Eastern Passage with fresh supplies to assist you upon your return." + + +You glance at Captain Dancer's whose smile widens as she meets your eyes. If you didn't know better you could be sure she is trying to tell you something... you cast your gaze across to Quarrel, who is also smiling at you in a way you don't like, and onto Al-Balu and Lovett who are politely listening to Anne-Marie speak and are not looking at you. Anne-Marie is watching you intently and you promise her you will do all you can to find the missing sailors. + + +"Oh Commodore Trapa," Anne-Marie says as you turn to leave and you glance back. "I expect you to return with Commodores Cuthrew and Finch or not at all. Have a safe voyage." + + +There is something about the way she says those last four words that chills you. + + +"Do you get the feeling there's something that bitch isn't telling us?" Eva whispers to you as the three of you leave the Palace and descend down to the quay to prepare your ships for your next voyage. +> Beginning your journey +The next morning you and your companions sail your ships out of Golden Sands with the rising sun at your backs. Anne-Marie hasn't notified the people of your voyage so there are no cheering crowds to see you off as on previous voyages which feels oddly unsettling. As always you glance back at your homeland and wonder if you'll ever see her beautiful shores again.Your first objective is the Western Passage which lies about a week's voyage to the west through waters you know well. You can either sail straight there or you can swing Northwest to visit Amethyst, the heavily forested island where your people's ships are built. +> Swing Northwest to visit Amethyst +After a short voyage you reach Amethyst to witness another troubling sight.Queen Anne-Marie's enormous flagship Monarch of the Sea is anchored in the harbor and as you watch you can see several new cannons are being loaded aboard to fill the deck with guns. The ship was already heavily armed but now it looks like it contains around twenty cannons, with more being loaded. Deeply unnerved by the sight and puzzled as to why Anne-Marie is so heavily arming her ship you don't land but instead guide your companions away Southwest towards the Western Passage. +> The Western Passage +After six days at sea the Western Passage comes into sight, visible from a long way off as looking like a tear in the endless line that is the Great Reef. You have never sailed this way before but both Naomi and Eva have and their ships lead the way, guiding your Adventurer through the narrow Passage. As at all Passages a small camp has been established to keep watch on all ships traveling in and out of the Passage. Both Naomi and Eva strongly below you should stop here for a day and pick up the supplies Anne-Marie has promised she has cached here. +> Stop to take on fresh supplies +Knowing it makes sense you order your fellow Captains to drop anchor in the Western Passage and row ashore to meet the men garrisoning the towers. There are two: a young man and an old man and they are happy to help you load some of their spare crates of fish onto your ships. While the old man is showing your sailors where the crates are located you ask the younger man what ships he has seen pass through the Western Passage in recent months. + + +"Not many since the Second Race to tell you the truth," he says scratching his head. "I suppose the first ship we saw since then was Captain Dancer's Shadow come in from the west with just a dozen sailors on board. She stopped here, picked up supplies and then sailed on to Golden Sands." + + +That is news to you and you frown. "How long after that did Cuthrew and Finch sail through?" + + +"Oh the Sea Ghost and the Royal Escort sailed through about a month after that but it wasn't just them," the talkative youth tells you. "The Shadow and the Indefatigable were with them. They were all gone out west about one month and then the Shadow and the Indefatigable sailed back through from the west without stopping. There was no sign of the Sea Ghost or Royal Escort, I suppose they must have traveled on." + + +You are astounded but before you can ask any more questions the older of the two guards rejoins you. + + +"Not talking about anything you shouldn't are you?" he asks looking at his young companion in an unfriendly way. Taking the hint the young man agrees he'd better get on with his duties. That evening after the fresh supplies are loaded aboard your three ships you report the conversation to Naomi and Eva and the three of you agree it looks suspicious. + + +"Why didn't Anne-Marie tell us that Quarrel and Dancer were with Cuthrew and Finch?" Naomi asks you. "And why did they come back without them?" + + +"Both of you were in the Second Race," you tell Naomi and Eva. "When you sailed from east to west around Magellan did you see anything suspicious?" + + +"I didn't but me and my cousin stuck to the Northwest as much as possible and rarely landed," Naomi admits. "It wasn't just me and Eva who made that voyage either: Finch and Quarrel did as well." + + +"Well I stuck to the Southwest and didn't land much either..." Eva says frowning. "Do you reckon someone else found something in these waters?" + + +You all glance uncertainly at each other and with a lot on your mind resume your voyage to the west. +> An Unexpected Encounter +After sailing through the Western Passage and entering the unknown you order the Adventurer, Explorer and Esme's Joy to hold a steady westerly heading for now. The Great Reef fades from sight behind you but a wholly unexpected object is sighted to the west: a ship! You have soon approached nearer and find the ship is a similar size but a wholly different design to your own, sitting lower in the water and with black sails instead of white. The ship's name, emblazoned across the prow is Morning Glory. As you sail by you are astounded to see men in strange clothes shouting in your own language for you to come aboard! +> Order your fleet to drop anchor and meet with this strange visitation +Cautiously you sail towards the strange ship and anchoring the Adventurer alongside you go aboard the Morning Glory with Eva and Naomi who have also anchored their ships nearby. The sailors aboard this strange ship have colorful clothes which are emblazoned with animals and they look at you with as much interest as you look at them. Their commander is a big, strong man with a long grey beard who looks oddly unhappy to see you. He walks forward and greets you in your own language, though with a strong and unusual accent. + + +"My name is Azai and I am Captain of this ship," he tells you. "What are your names?" + + +"I am Commodore Leo Trapa and these are my companions Commodores Eva Freer and Naomi Swift," you tell him. Azai looks surprised. + + +"Indeed?" he asks thoughtfully. "It may surprise you to learn that we know of your kingdom already Commodore Trapa though I do not think you know of ours. You are now entering the waters of the Elixi nation. Until recently we were ruled by our Queen Renewal but she... died a few months ago and her son Shingen now rules as King. I and six of my fellow Captains refuse to serve Shingen and his brothers Kenshin and Ieyasu and now we sail under pain of death, outlawed by our own countrymen. If you sail on to the west you will come to the island of Revel, the Capital of our nation. There you will meet with Shingen and his brothers but I would suggest that you be on your guard." + + +Having shared these sentiments Captain Azai refuses to answer any of your further questions and shows absolutely no interest in your homeland. "We know of your Three Islands already," he tells you. "My people call you the Navar, the Barrier-Folk.I think it is now time we part ways." Azai seems keen to be on his way so feeling completely baffled you and your companions return to your ships and weigh anchor. The Morning Glory swiftly sails away to the Southwest and pondering your odd encounter you and your expedition continue west. +> The Land of the Elixi +Keeping to your westward course you soon come upon a land unlike any you have seen before: it is a thriving port-island similar in size to Golden Sands but unlike it in every way with vastly different architecture and ships. People in fantastically-dressed clothes soon throng the quays and as you approach the harbor an unexpected sight makes you freeze: the Sea Ghost is riding gently at anchor in the harbor. There is no sign of Finch's ship, the Royal Escort. + + +Entering the harbor cautiously you, Eva and Naomi all anchor your ships alongside the quay and leading your sailors ashore armed and ready you meet with these people. The crowd draws back as you approach but three tall and strong-looking men who are so alike they can only be brothers stride forward to meet you. Their leader is a handsome man with flowing black hair bound in ringlets and a jovial air. "Hello, hello," he cries out taking your hand and pumping it in a massive fist. He speaks your own language with a strange accent. + + +"My name is Shingen and I am King of the Elixi Nation! This is our Capital Island which we call Revel. These are my brothers, Kenshin and Ieyasu." Kenshin is a broad man who smells strongly of alcohol as he shakes your hand with a yellow-toothed grin. Ieyasu looks the youngest and is also the slimmest, dressed simply in black. He doesn't smile at you as you shake hands but instead surveys you with narrow snake-like eyes. + + +"As you can see we have already been visited by your countrymen," Shingen goes on, gesturing at the Sea Ghost. "Hence how we know your language. Your great Captains Thomas Finch and Tobias Cuthrew landed here some months ago. I am afraid I have sad news for you. Your great sailor Tobias Cuthrew was very ill when he landed and his sickness grew worse. I am sorry to say he has since died and is buried here in our town's cemetery. After his death his companion Captain Finch sailed away. That was two months ago and we have not heard news of him since." + + +You, Eva and Naomi exchange horrified glances. The news that the greatest sailor of your kingdom is dead shakes you all to the core. + + +"What about Cuthrew's crew?" Eva demands. "What became of them?" + + +"Many of them went on with Commodore Finch," Shingen says cheerfully. "Many still reside in this town and have become good friends of my people. For some reason none felt an urge to return to the kingdom ruled by your Queen Anne-Marie... now I have an interest in forming an alliance with your Queen so me and my people will give you all the assistance you require. I assume you intend to journey on to find your missing comrade Finch? If you return here tomorrow I will arrange for enough Supplies to re-provision your ships to be assembled on the quay and we will also provide you with a map of our islands to help you safely navigate them." + + +"We must also visit Commodore Cuthrew's grave," you tell King Shingen who nods sympathetically. + + +"Tomorrow, tomorrow," he tells you. "Return tomorrow morning." + + +You, Eva and Naomi return aboard the Adventurer where you hastily confer. Eva is suspicious. + + +"I saw Cuthrew before he left on his voyage," she tells you both. "He was ill but he wasn't that ill. I don't trust any of those three." + + +"If we sail away they'll be after us in the Sea Ghost and those other little ships in the harbor," Naomi points out. "I think for the time being it's better that we work with these people. Tomorrow we can go ashore and see if Cuthrew really is buried on the island." + + +"I agree," you tell her. "Tomorrow we'll go ashore as planned. + + +This turns out to be the worst decision of your life. +> A Fateful Day +The next morning you, Naomi and Eva lead your sailors ashore onto the quay of Revel. As before there is an expectant crowd waiting for you but the crowd is oddly silent today and looks tense. Glancing round them you notice something strange: there is a ship approaching the island rapidly from the South. Squinting at it you recognize it with a start: it is Thomas Finch's Royal Escort! Eva and Naomi recognize it too and freeze halfway down the quay, your sailors all stop behind you as well. Eva grips your arm, sending a thrill of excitement through you. + + +"I don't like this," she says quietly and for the first time in all the time you have known her she sounds scared. + + +The crowd parts in Shingen, Kenshin and Ieyasu come striding towards you. Unlike yesterday they are armed: Shingen and Kenshin are carrying drawn swords in their hands while Ieyasu is holding an extremely short-barreled musket which is more like a pistol. As they advance within a few feet of you the crowd behind them edges forward and more weapons appear. With a feeling of horror you realize that you have led your whole expedition into a trap. + + +"Eva! Naomi! Get back!" you shout. + + +Shingen lunges towards you with his sword but you spring back just in time, drawing your own sword as you do. At the same moment Kenshin gives a mighty sweep of his sword that cuts through both of Naomi Swift's eyes, with a scream she clutches her bleeding face. Ieyasu steps forward, cocks his pistol with a click, raises it and shoots Eva point blank in the chest. She is thrown backwards, landing on her back on the jetty where she lies staring open-eyed at the sky, her face still wearing a last expression of surprise. + + +With a roar of rage you slash your sword wildly at Shingen, forcing him back. Steel grates as swords clang against each other and muskets bang on both sides. A musket ball whistles past your head and as Shingen retreats you grab the blinded Naomi wand holding her body close to yours with your free arm you drag her back to safety. Your ninety sailors are trapped at the end of the quay facing a crowd several times their own number and death seems inevitable. + + +Your countrymen sell their lives dearly. While you drag Naomi back across the gangplank leading to the Adventurer, musket balls flying so thickly all about you that it seems a miracle you are not hit, your sailors fight the crowd on the quay. They are cut down and butchered mercilessly, a few dozen manage to flee across the gangplank to the Adventurer but most are cut down. You manage to get the Adventurer's anchor raised, the sails raised and manage to steer away from the quay, forced to abandon both the Explorer and Esme's Joy, not to mention the bodies of your countrymen including Eva. + + +Even as the Adventurer moves out into the harbor with the surviving sailors from all three ships on board, about thirty altogether while twice that amount lie dead on Revel's jetties, the Sea Ghost explodes into life, firing a row of six cannons. One of the shot decapitates two of your sailors and another hits a third sailor plumb in the chest, blasting him into several pieces. Gathering speed the Sea Ghost moves forward to cut off your escape. + + +Help is finally at hand however. The approaching Royal Escort fires two cannons and a volley of musket shots, forcing the Sea Ghost to veer away. This gives you a chance to slip the Adventurer out of the harbor and you sail straight towards the Royal Escort, unaware of who is in command but only knowing that they are on your side. As the Royal Escort turns back towards the South you follow her, putting as much space between you and the murderous tyrants of Revel as possible. +> Shock +Eva Freer is dead. It seems impossible but it is true. + + +Naomi Swift has been blinded and will never see again. You carry her into your cabin where your ship's surgeon attends to her injuries night and day. So many have died: altogether you have lost more than sixty sailors and two of your expedition's ships: only the Adventurer and her small Crew remains. For three days you follow the Royal Escort, unaware of where you are going and not particularly caring until you come to a small rocky island. Seven ships, similar in size to the Adventurer but of a different design are anchored offshore. Sailing in among them you meet your new allies. + + +Seven Elixi Captains come aboard the Adventurer. Their leader is Azai, a grey-bearded old man with a permanently worried look who you may have met before. His six companions are Amako, a tall and cold-natured man who stands in sharp contrast to his brother Ryuzoji, a young cheerful man dressed in clothes of bright red. Miura is a big man with a long flowing black beard while his brother Rokkaku is a bit of a dandy, elegantly dressed in fine clothes. Sanada is a tall and handsome man while his companion Sogo has dark skin and unlike the others drinks tea in your cabin while the others accept wine from you. You find all their names a little difficult to remember and in your depressed state can't raise the interest to care much about any of them. Your thoughts are dwelling on Eva and you are only half-listening as Azai talks. + + +"You are not the first to come to our land, the first visitors were two of your Captains called Finch and Quarrel who came to Revel from the west some six months ago," Azau tells you. "Later a woman called Sapphira Dancer also visited from the west. This was when Renewel was still Queen and kept her evil sons Shingen, Kenshin and Ieyasu in check. A few months after Dancer came four more ships, this time from the east. Dancer, Quarrel, Finch and Tobias Cuthrew were their four Captains." + + +"They stayed at Revel for several weeks. By day your countrymen spoke to Queen Renewel but by night they plotted with Shingen and his brothers in the darkness. One night there was a bloody coup: Shingen cut his mother's throat while she slept and his supporters took control of the Palace. During the coup Cuthrew and Finch tried to intervene on the Queen's side. Cuthrew was shot and killed in the fighting while Finch was stabbed through the chest. He and a few of his sailors managed to get back to their ship and escape." + + +"Me and my six fellow Captains are loyal supporters of Queen Renewel. When Shingen took power and named himself King we fled here with our ships and Commodore Finch. We did our best to help him but Finch's wound was mortal. Knowing he was dying he told us the names of you and your companions as people who could be trusted. After he died we buried him at sea. Since then we have been patrolling the waters between the Western Passage and Revel in hope of meeting you. I saw your ship a week ago and rushed here to alert the other Captains. We sent Finch's remaining Crew aboard the Royal Escort to Revel to meet you. We guessed you would not trust us but you would not doubt the word of your own countrymen... we never expected Shingen would try to murder you all before we could get there. According to Finch, Quarrel and Dancer told him Shingen and Anne-Marie have formed an alliance and together they would kill all who criticized or spoke out against their tyrranical rule..." + + +"We are grateful for your help," you say wearily and lying in her sickbed in your cabin Naomi nods sightlessly. "But what can we do now? Eva is dead. Naomi cannot see. We have lost the Explorer and Esme's Joy and most of our Crews. You have seven ships and a few hundred sailors here but there are thousands of armed men in Revel and many more in Golden Sands under Anne-Marie's control... what can we do?" you stare at the table while the Elixi Captains glance among themselves. + + +"We have an idea," Azai says finally. +> A slim chance +"There appear to be three great nations on this world your people call Magellan," Azai tells you. "There are my people, the Elixi, there are your people who we call the Navar, the Barrier Folk and there are also the Lapau, the spear-armed canoe-warriors who we have learned your people fought a War against. We know that Anne-Marie and Shingen have formed an alliance. Finch told us that Quarrel had claimed to him that the purpose of this alliance was to attack the Lapau on two fronts and crush them as your people failed to do alone. The slaughtered Lapau's lands would be divided between Anne-Marie and Shingen. Me and my companions believe the Lapau are our only possible allies." + + +"King Al-Capu agreed to a peace treaty with Queen Anne-Marie," you tell Azai. "His son is a hostage in Queen Anne-Marie's court. Even if we sail to Matan and even if he believes us, which is unlikely, what can the Lapau do against the combined navies of my people and yours? The Navar as you call us nearly destroyed the Lapau in our War with them, they certainly don't have a chance against both the Navar and Elixi." + + +"We must try," Azai insists. "With your people the Navar and my people the Elixi deceived into this evil alliance by their rulers the Lapau are our only chance for help." + + +"Matan is on the other side of the world," you remind Azai. "To get there we either have to sail through territory ruled by Queen Anne-Marie or territory ruled by your Shingen or through completely uncharted waters. Shingen now has the Sea Ghost, Explorer and Esme's Joy. I am pretty sure that he and his brothers will come after us with everything they've got. You've got a strong little navy here but I don't think it will be a match for the full might of Anne-Marie and Shingen. + + +"We have thought of that," Azai tells you. "We will all sail to Matan in four different directions. I will go Northeast, skirting the Great Reef and traveling through your kingdom's colonies to reach Matan. Amako and Ryuzoji will sail Southeast, skirting the Great Reef and also pass through your kingdom's colonies to Matan. Miura and Rokkaku will sail Southwest through uncharted waters to Matan and finally Sanada and Sogo will sail Northwest through the islands of the Elixi to Matan. You must choose which of us you think has the best chance of getting through." + + +Your mind is still full of memories of Eva's expression of surprise when she was killed. With a deep sigh you cross to where Naomi is lying in her sickbed with a bloodied bandage over her eyes and take her hand in yours. You lower your head and shut your eyes tight and after a few moments of silence you hear the seven Elixi Captains quietly stand up and go outside to prepare their ships for their voyages and await your decision. +> Reluctant Decisions +That night while you sit with your agony-ridden companion wondering how your world could possibly have got turned so upside down so quickly the Elixi Captains begin to put their plans into action. The Royal Escort is abandoned and sunk and it's remaining Crew distributed among the other ships: Azai in the Morning Glory, Amako in the Relentless, Ryuzoji in the Lady Luck, Miura in the Royal Avenger, Rokkaku in the Warrior, Sanada in the Charmer, Sogo in the Fortune and of course you and Naomi in the Adventurer. To help you keep track of your new friends Azai thoughtfully provides you with a List of Loyal Elixi Captains. + + +When Naomi finally slips into a troubled sleep you go up onto deck for a breath of fresh air and to think about things. The sun is just rising pink in the east and reveals three ships approaching from the north: the Sea Ghost, Esme's Joy and Explorer. With your telescope you can see all three ship's decks are absolutely packed with cannons and sailors. You hear a quiet cough behind you and turn to see Azai standing nearby. + + +"It is Shingen, Kenshin and Ieyasu," he says pointing at the three distant ships. "They mean to destroy us once and for all I think. We're not strong enough to defeat all three wwith the two hundred sailors we have here so we must leave at once to seek help from the Lapau. I have had your ship resupplied and re-manned but now you must choose which of the four routes to Matan you take. You have sailed much further around Magellan than I have and must use your own knowledge and maps to choose your route. We must move quickly though: once Shingen and Anne-Marie know what they are doing they and their Captains will try to get to Matan ahead of us to warn King Al-Capu not to listen to us! We must be swift." + + +Promising to tell Azai your decision within an hour you go down to your cabin to find Naomi has woken up. + + +"We are going to sail to Matan then?" she asks you weakly and you tell her that it looks like you'll have to. Naomi hesitates and then slowly tears trickle down from the bloodied bandage around her eyes. "I want to thank you for what you did for me back there... I know you loved Eva and now she is gone all you have left is me and what help am I now? Nothing but a burden." + + +"You will never be that," you assure Naomi. "If we are to survive this voyage I will need all your help and advice." + + +Holding Naomi in a painful hug you mull over which route to take. + + +(Please Pick up and use the List of Loyal Elixi Captains to help you make this important decision).<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The next morning you and your companions sail your ships out of Golden Sands with the rising sun at your backs. Anne-Marie hasn't notified the people of your voyage so there are no cheering crowds to see you off as on previous voyages which feels oddly unsettling. As always you glance back at your homeland and wonder if you'll ever see her beautiful shores again.Your first objective is the Western Passage which lies about a week's voyage to the west through waters you know well. You can either sail straight there or you can swing Northwest to visit Amethyst, the heavily forested island where your people's ships are built. +> Sail Due West across the open sea towards the Western Passage +You sail the Adventurer across the rolling waves, the Explorer and Esme's Joy easily keeping speed with you. You are glad to have your two friends either side of you and can think of no one you'd rather sail with. Every evening Naomi and Eva come aboard for dinner and most evening you speculate on what could have happened to Cuthrew and Finch. + + +"Cuthrew was the best sailor we've got and Finch was no fool," Eva opinions one evening. "Whatever happened to them it must have been something neither of them have ever encountered before or even suspected they would encounter..." + + +"We must be careful Leo," Naomi tells you. "Keep a close eye out for any dangers." + + +You nod, uncomfortably aware that the lives of your fellow officers and the ninety sailors under your command rest on your decisions.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This story takes place long ago, in the kingdom of Mystigar. + + +The King has recently passed, leaving his daughter, the beautiful winged-princess Marmalade, as the only heir. The Princess is not yet of age, so she is left under the guardianship of the the unscrupulous Marques Jacques Pierre. Unsatisfied with being a mere Marques, he has conspired to marry her and seize the throne. + + +It is declared that a great fair and a tournament of archery shall be held in Marmalade's name. The victor will win her hand in marriage. The tourney is open to all, but the game is fixed, for everyone knows that the Marques is the greatest archer in the land. + + +The day of the fair is upon us! You play the part of a humble baker's apprentice who, unbeknown to all, is destined to be king! +> Act I + + +Act I: + + +The Fair +> The baker's apprentice +Today is the day of the fair! + + +The sun is not even fully up, but already your chores are done. The oven is lit, the dough kneaded, the bread pricked, the floor swept, and the pots scrubbed. You even had a chance to chop a little morning-wood, if you know what I mean. Surely now your master will let you spend the rest of the day at the fair. You have thought of nothing else since it was first announced. + + +You are busy day dreaming about Princess Marmalade, again, when a shout comes down from the loft; "Boy!" Your cantankerous master is finally awake. The ladder strains under his bulk as he climbs down to the kitchen. "Get off your ass, boy, and warm the ovens," he says. + + +"Master, the ovens are already warm. All of my chores are done. I thought perhaps I could go to the fair?" you reply. + + +A meaty hand strikes your face. "The fair! The fair's for minstrels and dandies. Which one are you, boy? Or did you fancy you'd win the tourney and marry the Princess?" he says, doubling over with laughter. "Long live King Baker's Boy! Forget that lot and go fetch me some milk." + + +He hands you a copper and sends you out the door with another smack. + + +"And if I find out you've gone to the fair, boy, I'll chain your face to the oven!" + + +"Bastard," you curse under your breath while rubbing your swollen lip. One of these days you will chain his fat face to the oven. You head towards the Milkman's stand. He always has a bottle of spirits to share with the young apprentice boys, and his daughter Bessa has the biggest milk jugs you've ever seen. + + +You reach his stand but no one's there. + + + +> Go to the Milkman's house + "Hello?" you call as you knock on the Milkman's door. There is no reply but the door is open, so you step inside. + + +"Great Gods put out that light and stop all this hollerrin'. Can't a man rest his achin' head?" the Milkman says from his bed. He pulls the covers over his head, spilling several clays jars to the floor. He has had a long night of drinking with the thatcher's boys. "If you want milk you'll have to get it yourself. Bessa's gone to the fair and I sure as hell ain't doing it in my condition." Just your luck, both the spirits and Bessa are gone. + + +You can hear the cow lowing from the shed, begging to be milked. You grab a pail and sit down on the milking bench. +> Milk the cow +You milk the cow while dreaming of Bessa's heaving udders. You are in the shed for much longer than it takes to milk a cow. + + +You heft the pail and walk back to the house. The Milkman has slipped back into his stupor. You can hear him mumble something about the thatcher's boy and soft hands. There is really no need to pay him. He probably won't even remember you've been here. Screw the Milkman and screw the Baker! It's the day of the fair, you have a copper in your pocket, and you're going to enjoy yourself! You drink deep from the milk bucket before casting it away. You are the master of your own destiny! + + +-- + + +The fair is everything you had hoped. Highborn ladies and goodly knights recite poetry outside of colorful silk pavilions. Naked urchins chase each other about playing tag and brown-fingers, while drunken minstrels belt green sleeves at the top of their lungs. Vendors call their wares from various carts and stands. + + +A fat pastry chef with a pox-marked face yells "Hot pies! Two coppers!" while a dwarf cries her ale. You are hungry but cannot afford a pie. The Dwarf, however, will let you drink yourself stupid for a copper. + + +You look around the crowd hoping to catch a glimpse of the Princess. You spy her in the royal box above the tourney field, framed by a pair of guards who look more jailor than escorts. For one moment your eyes meet and she smiles. + + +A herald cries out below her. "Gather all yee who would compete in the tourney of archery" he proclaims. "To the winner shall be awarded a golden bow and the hand of the beautiful Princess Marmalade. Any man of Mystigar may enter for a single copper." + + +A copper for a chance to marry the Princess? What luck! +> Enter the tourney +"Each of ye shall havith three arrows" says the herald. "If one of these touchith the bulls eye, you shall advancith to the next round." Only one? Piece of cake. + + +A trumpet blows, signaling the start of the round. You nock your arrow, take careful aim, and release. The arrow soars into the air well above the target. Undismayed, you nock your second arrow. This one buries itself in the dirt halfway to the target. Archery is harder than it looks. + + +This is your one chance to be more than a baker's apprentice. Everything rides on this last arrow. You close your eyes, and imagine your life with the Princess. You see yourself perched between her magnificent wings, your face hidden amongst her golden locks as you soar above the castle. You fly higher and higher, throwing rocks down upon the screaming peasants below. You release the arrow. + + +A perfect bulls eye! + + +Round after round your arrows strike the mark as other contestants are eliminated. The Princess takes notice of your success. Eventually, only you and a single opponent are left; The Marques Jacques Pierre. + + +"My hat is off to you, good sir" he says cordially between rounds. "Tell me, who are you and where did you learn to shoot so well?" + + +"I'm just a baker's boy," You mumble to him. + + +"Surely you jest. Never have I heard of a baker's boy with such skill, a true prodigy. You must come hunting with me sometime, I fear the beasts won't stand a chance! But lo, look at this string! it is worn thin and ready to snap. Please change it out for one of mine. it is of the finest make. I won't have it said I took advantage of a poor baker's boy." + + +What a fine fellow is the Marques. You change out your string and promise to take him up on his hunting offer. + + +You are summoned to the Princess's private box. "Baker's boy, you have given me hope for the first time since my father passed," the Princess says. "Defeat the Marques and you will have my heart as well as my hand." Wow, no pressure there. + + +The trumpet sounds to signal the final round. "For the last and final round, each man shall shootith a single arrow, and the better mark shall win the hand of Princess Marmalade!" announces the herald. The targets are moved back one hundred feet. + + +The Marques offers to shoot first. He makes a good shot with his golden arrow just touching the edge of the bulls eye. You approach the mark and prepare to draw, conscious that the Princess is watching you. +> Draw your bow +Snap! The new string breaks under the strain, slashing open your cheek. Your arrow does a lazy summersault before landing at your feet. + + +"The Marques is the winner!" declares the herald. + + +That filthy cad, he tricked you! He knew the string would break. You brandish your bow like a club and charge the Marques, but by now the tourney field is overrun with spectators and you cannot reach him through the press. For a moment your eyes catch those of the Princess and she gives you a plaintive look before her and the Marques are carried away. + + +Some hours later you sit at the Dwarf's stall, attempting to drink away your sorrows. You rub the fresh scar on your face, swearing revenge. + + +There is a tap on your shoulder. You turn to find a mysterious hooded figure behind you. "A gift," she says, "from the Princess, for her true champion. Please help her before she is forced to marry." She hands you a bundle, and disappears into the night. Could it be true? Does the Princess really need your help? + + +A small bone harp without any strings is wrapped with in the bundle. What the hell are you supposed to do with this? Sing your sorrows? You ask the dwarf how much beer the harp will buy, hopefully enough to give you alcohol poisoning. + + +"You drunk fool! That's no ordinary harp," she shouts, "it's the Harp of Dreams! If you string this harp with the mane of a unicorn and sing the Song of Wishes your greatest wish will come true." + + +That makes sense. + + +"Take this seed" says the dwarf, handing you a small pearl. "The tree which grows from it is the Unicorn's favorite food. Plant it in the Enchanted Forest and he will come to feast upon it." +> Travel to the Enchanted Forest + + +Act II: + + +The Song of Wishes +> Now things start to get weird... +The story resumes with you hopelessly lost in the enchanted forest. + + +Hungry and tired, you sit on a log to rest and get your bearings. A delicious looking mushroom is growing from the end of the log. You recognize its shiny white cap and blue spots as an edible Dwarf's Finger, then again, it could be a clown egg for all you know, you're not a doctor. +> Eat the mushroom +Delicious! A single bite and you feel completely refreshed. You set off through the Enchanted Forest with an extra swing in your step. + + +Some while later you come upon a dappled glen. A waterfall throws a thin cloud of mist across the clearing and fireflies dance among the rich green leaves. This spot looks as good as any to plant the magic seed. You dig a shallow hole and gently cover the seed with rich brown earth. + + +A magnificent tree shoots forth from the soil. Higher and higher it twists, growing upward. Hundreds of white flowers sprout from its tender shoots, filling the air with their nubile fragrance. Somewhere off in the distance, you hear a horse's neigh. +> The unicorn appears +A majestic white stead gallops out of the mist in slow motion, and stops at your side. You reach for its opalescent mane when your sphincter suddenly loosens. The unmistakable smell of diarrhea fills the air. Your back arches in agony, and your stomach fills with fire. The unicorn screams and runs back into the mist, while blood and puss pours from your belly button... + + +-- + + +The clown looks down at your shredded body for a moment before slithering after the unicorn. I guess it was a clown egg after all. + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The story resumes with you hopelessly lost in the enchanted forest. + + +Hungry and tired, you sit on a log to rest and get your bearings. A delicious looking mushroom is growing from the end of the log. You recognize its shiny white cap and blue spots as an edible Dwarf's Finger, then again, it could be a clown egg for all you know, you're not a doctor. +> No way, that's obviously going to kill me +You sensibly leave the mushroom alone. Better to be hungry than dead, you always say. + + +Some while later you come upon a dappled glen. A waterfall throws a thin cloud of mist across the clearing, and fireflies dance among the rich green leaves. This spot looks as good as any to plant the magic seed. You dig a shallow hole and gently cover the seed with rich brown earth. + + +An enormous tree shoots forth from the soil. Higher and higher it twists, growing upward. Hundreds of white flowers sprout from its tender shoots, filling the air with their nubile fragrance. A magnificent opalescent unicorn gallops out of the mist and kneels at your feet. + + +"Long ago it was foretold that the true king of Mystigar would plant the sacred tree of the unicorn in this glade," says the unicorn. "Take the hair of my mane as a token of-" A golden arrow sprouts from his neck before he can finish his sentence. + + +"Capital shot sir!" comes a shout from behind you. The Marques and his lackey, Wendell, come riding across the glade, bows in hand. + + +"Great gods, if it isn't the baker's boy. I thought I had seen the last of you," says the Marques. "Now stand aside. That unicorn's horn will make the perfect wedding gift for the Princess." +> Run and hide +You run blindly into the forest, tears streaming down your face and urine streaming down your leg. What a fool you were to think you could help the Princess. + + +Hours pass and you are hopelessly lost. You notice a melodic humming in the distance, like the muffled song of a beautiful maiden. Perhaps it will lead you to safety. The song enchants you, and you follow it deeper into the forest. + + +Eventually you find the song's source. The humming emanates from a small clay jar perched upon a toadstool. The melody changes, as if to say "open me," and you are unable to resist. You raise the lid and hundreds of angry siren wasps swarm from the jar. Their relentless stings paralyze you, and you lie helplessly while they lay their eggs in your swollen tongue. + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sensibly leave the mushroom alone. Better to be hungry than dead, you always say. + + +Some while later you come upon a dappled glen. A waterfall throws a thin cloud of mist across the clearing, and fireflies dance among the rich green leaves. This spot looks as good as any to plant the magic seed. You dig a shallow hole and gently cover the seed with rich brown earth. + + +An enormous tree shoots forth from the soil. Higher and higher it twists, growing upward. Hundreds of white flowers sprout from its tender shoots, filling the air with their nubile fragrance. A magnificent opalescent unicorn gallops out of the mist and kneels at your feet. + + +"Long ago it was foretold that the true king of Mystigar would plant the sacred tree of the unicorn in this glade," says the unicorn. "Take the hair of my mane as a token of-" A golden arrow sprouts from his neck before he can finish his sentence. + + +"Capital shot sir!" comes a shout from behind you. The Marques and his lackey, Wendell, come riding across the glade, bows in hand. + + +"Great gods, if it isn't the baker's boy. I thought I had seen the last of you," says the Marques. "Now stand aside. That unicorn's horn will make the perfect wedding gift for the Princess." +> Stand and fight +You plant yourself in front of the unicorn, fists bared. You've had enough of this pompous Marques. The Marques shrugs and then draws his golden sword. He charges. You duck the blow and kick his horse squarely in the taint. The horse reels, throwing the Marques to the ground. + + +The Marques is quickly back on his feet and after you again. Defenseless, you are driven backwards. You stumble and the Marques's sword bites deep into your side. + + +"Sorry it kneads to end like this, baker's boy" he laughs. He raises his sword for the final blow. + + +The unicorn, seeing your peril, summons his last bit of strength. A magnificent light radiates from his horn. Blinded, the Marques drops his sword and falls to his knees. You seize the moment and grab the sword. The time has come for your revenge. + + +The light goes out. + + +Wendell stands over the dying unicorn, triumphantly holding the severed horn. Blood loss overcomes you. The sword slips from you hands and you collapse. + + +"It seems your plan has gone a-rye, baker's boy," the Marques quips. He retrieves his sword and picks up the harp. "Look, Wendell, I'm a little baking minstrel singing songs about pastries on my ugly little harp," he sings, capering around you before tossing the harp away derisively. "Too bad you won't have time to compose a song for my wedding. Come, Wendell, we must get back in time to pick out invitations." + + +You catch one last piece of their conversation as they ride off: "Explain how this works again, Wendell. Where do I strap the horn?" + + +"Your Majesty," the unicorn says softly. You crawl to his side as the life flows from your body. "You must drink of my blood, it is the only way to heal your wounds." There is probably another way, maybe a bandage or some salve. Not one to argue with a mythical being, you cup a handful of turquoise blood and bring it to your lips. It tastes like rainbows and dreams. The blood courses through your body, healing you. + + +"You are the true king of Mystigar. Take the hair of my mane and string the harp. Now, you must go to the crossroads and seek the wise sage. Only he can teach you the Song of Wishes." The unicorn begins to fade. "Don't let the harp fall into the wrong hands. Its powers can be used for great good, or great evil. I must depart from this world, but do not fret for you and I are now one. My spirit will always watch over you. Always..." The unicorn disappears. From that day on you get the uncomfortable feeling he's watching you whenever you go to the bathroom. + + +You resume your journey with a heavy heart. +> The journey continues... +The forest path eventually leads you to a quaint cottage. A centaur stands out front, raking leaves. The centaur stops raking as you approach. "Good morning traveler, will you help me tend my garden?" asks the centaur. "In exchange I shall give you my daughter's hand in marriage." + + +A deal like that is too good to pass up, but how would that even work, you wonder. Perhaps there a special stool or something. You are struggling for a polite way to ask when his daughter trots from the cottage. Her beauty rivals that of Princes Marmalade. She bashfully plays with her long golden braid, and paws the ground playfully with her silver hoof. + + +It would be impolite to turn down his offer, but you are on a quest. The centaur knows much about quests and the Enchanted Forest, perhaps he can help with your journey. + + + +> Tend the centaur's garden +That night you find yourself in the cottage, alone with the centaur's daughter. She throws you to the ground with incredible centaur strength. She tears off her leather vest, and towers over you in a dominating fashion. + + +"Tickle my udders, human!" + + +You fall hopelessly in love and are married at once. You spend your days raking the centaur's garden and your evenings serenading the centaur's daughter with your harp. At night you lie in her stall, curled up as little spoon, wondering how many legs your children will have. + + + + +The End + + +Sure, things worked out fine for you, but how could you abandon the Princess? And seriously, how does that work? + + +You've found an N. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The forest path eventually leads you to a quaint cottage. A centaur stands out front, raking leaves. The centaur stops raking as you approach. "Good morning traveler, will you help me tend my garden?" asks the centaur. "In exchange I shall give you my daughter's hand in marriage." + + +A deal like that is too good to pass up, but how would that even work, you wonder. Perhaps there a special stool or something. You are struggling for a polite way to ask when his daughter trots from the cottage. Her beauty rivals that of Princes Marmalade. She bashfully plays with her long golden braid, and paws the ground playfully with her silver hoof. + + +It would be impolite to turn down his offer, but you are on a quest. The centaur knows much about quests and the Enchanted Forest, perhaps he can help with your journey. + + + +> Ask about the sage +"They say the sage is a thousand years old and can see another thousand years into the future. Of course, they also say us centaurs can't wipe our own asses," the centaur says. "Anyway, no one has ever seen the sage, or if they have, they didn't live long enough to talk about it. Travel east across the river to the Crossroads. A spirit guide will appear there and guide you to the sage." + + +"But beware of the Haunted Castle!" he cautions. "It is ruled by an evil demon and she is not to be trusted." + + +You take one last look at the centaur's daughter before heading east down the forest path. The centaur calls after you: "It's not true you know! We can wipe our asses just fine!" + + +-- + + +The sun is high overhead when you reach the river. + + +The river is too wide and too strong to ford. If you had a wagon, you might be able to caulk it and float across. The Haunted Castle stands ominously on the river's edge, guarding the only bridge across. It exudes an evil aura. Luckily, there is also a ferry docked on the near shore. +> Take the ferry +The ferry is manned by an old leper, draped in shapeless brown rags. His skin is hard and gray, giving him a reptilian appearance. The right side of his body is a misshapen mess of boils and warts. He seems friendly, despite his appearance. + + +You climb aboard and he begins to pole you across. "What soft, pink skin you have," the ferryman says. "I bet your worm wiggles like a fish on a string when you walk around. My poor gray balls look like a blueberry stuck to a grapefruit. I can't hardly fit them in my britches, let alone a woman." + + +A scaly hand shoots from the water and grabs your arm, interrupting the leper's graphic description of his genitals. The ferryman smacks the arm away with his pole before it can drag you from the boat. Hundreds more rise from the depths. They grab at the boat, churning the river water in a feeding frenzy. + + +"The River Hags are hungry today." The ferryman says. He rises and corners you in the bow of the boat. "Now, hand over that harp or I will toss you overboard." +> Give him the harp +The ferryman rips the Harp from your grasp. + + +"Long ago I foresaw this day. How patiently I have waited here for you!" he exclaims. "Now all the world shall know my suffering." + + +He strums the Harp and sings the Song of Wishes. His leprous boils fade as he sings, and his skin becomes supple and pink. Your skin erupts with gray boils as his curse is transferred to you. Your foreskin twists up like a balloon animal and warts fill your throat. You start to choke... + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The ferry is manned by an old leper, draped in shapeless brown rags. His skin is hard and gray, giving him a reptilian appearance. The right side of his body is a misshapen mess of boils and warts. He seems friendly, despite his appearance. + + +You climb aboard and he begins to pole you across. "What soft, pink skin you have," the ferryman says. "I bet your worm wiggles like a fish on a string when you walk around. My poor gray balls look like a blueberry stuck to a grapefruit. I can't hardly fit them in my britches, let alone a woman." + + +A scaly hand shoots from the water and grabs your arm, interrupting the leper's graphic description of his genitals. The ferryman smacks the arm away with his pole before it can drag you from the boat. Hundreds more rise from the depths. They grab at the boat, churning the river water in a feeding frenzy. + + +"The River Hags are hungry today." The ferryman says. He rises and corners you in the bow of the boat. "Now, hand over that harp or I will toss you overboard." +> Leap from the boat +Your leap causes the small boat to capsize and the ferryman is thrown into the water with you. + + +The leper has been working this river since before you were a stain on your mother's thigh, and the River Hags have been waiting patiently to get their hands on him. They converge upon him and you are momentarily forgotten while they satiate their blood lust. His gargled screams are barely audible over the sound of tearing flesh. + + +You quickly swim to shore while they are distracted and resume your journey. + + +-- + + +The forest path gradually becomes a lane, and the lane becomes a road. Eventually, it leads you to your destination. A stone pillar rises phallicly from the Crossroads, marking the spot were a dozen paths meet like spokes on a wheel. Three animals step from behind the pillar: a frog, a raven, and a fox. + + +"Welcome your majesty," says the fox. + + +"We are the spirit guides," says the frog. + + +"We have waited long for you," says the crow. + + +You can tell this is going to get annoying really quickly. + + +"I am the regrets of man," says the frog. + + +"And I am the sorrows of man," says the raven. + + +"And I am the wiles of man," says the fox. + + +You have no idea what they're talking about. All you care about is which one can lead you to the sage. + + +"Maybe all of us" says the crow. + + +"Maybe none of us," says the frog. + + +"You'll have to trust your heart," says the fox. +> Follow the Fox +You follow the fox for some distance through the forest when he stumbles. "Ah I've stubbed my toe. You're going to have to carry me," says the fox. "Please, it really, really, hurts. Carry me and I can tell you where to go. Pretty please." His toe looks fine, but you reluctantly pick up the spirit fox. "Oh you have such strong arms," he says. + + +You travel many miles and the forest becomes dark and ominous. The trees are decorated with shrunken heads and human bones which dangle from their branches like wind chimes. You enter a rocky clearing and deep voice booms from the forest, "Who dares seek the great sage?" + + +"That's my cue," says the terrified fox. He hops from your arms and quickly scampers away. It seems his toe has been miraculous healed. + + +A massive lion leaps onto the rocky outcrop ahead of you. He is so large a horse could ride down his gullet. Skulls and bones are tied in his mane like trophies. "If you wish to see the sage you must answer my riddle. Answer wrong, and I will add you to my decorations + + +"What rises tall and hard in the morning, showers its golden rays down upon the children, and then, exhausted, hangs its head between the stones?" +> The sun +"Hmm that's not what I was thinking, but now that you mention it, it could be the sun. You have proven your worth. You may enter." The lion opens his enormous mouth and beckons you inside. + + +Inside the lion is quite spacious. His ribs form an elegant vaulted ceiling. Goblin skulls, troll bladders, and other magical odds and ends line the wall. A unicorn horn lies discarded next to a pile of furs which serve as the sage's bed. + + +The sage is a bent old man cloaked in a rat-skin robe. He is balding and barefoot, and a single tooth protrudes from his bottom jaw. "I've been waiting for you," he says. "You are the chosen one who will learn the Song of Wishes. But first you must be cleansed by a bath in witch's blood." + + +You undress and climb into a large stone tube. The sage pours buckets of thick witch's blood over your head. It runs down your face and into your mouth. "Hard to believe that witch fills one of these buckets every month. Now about that song. Close your eyes." The sage sheds his robe and slips into the tub with you. His tooth cuts sharply into your nipple. A melody fills your mind as he sucks away your life force. It is the Song of Wishes. + + +"Well that's the song," the sage says, wiping his lip. "You can only sing it once, so use it wisely. Now enough business, lets play tub fountains!" You leap from the tub and hastily dress. "Suit yourself, I'll play a solo match. If you're gonna leave you'll have to use the backdoor. Should put you just outside of town." + + +As you crawl out through the lion's colon, your thoughts turn to the Princess. +> You return to town +The town is quiet now, the pomp of the fair forgotten. You swagger down the empty street like a cockerel. You found the unicorn, fought the Marques, met the wise sage, learned The Song of Wishes, and you still have time before the wedding. But what are you waiting for? You could sing the song right now and be probing the Princess by nightfall. + + +You pluck the silky strings of the harp and clear your throat. Before the words can leave your lips a meaty hand falls on your shoulder. + + +"Hello boy." + + +It's the Baker! He grabs the harp from your hands and gives it a derisive pluck before throwing it over his shoulder. "I knew you'd run away and become a dandy minstrel. But you're still my apprentice, boy, and I warned you what would happen if you went to the fair..." +> Act III +Act III: + + +The Wedding + + + +> Meanwhile back at the castle... +Wendell walks down the muddy street with a list of errands in his hand. He stops in front of the florist's shop when a small bone harp lands at his feet. There is a commotion out in the street; the town baker has just thrown a portly little boy over his shoulder. + + +"The baker's boy is still alive," Wendell says to no one in particular. "I must warn the Marques!" He tucks the harp under his arm and races back to the castle. + + +-- + + +The Marques slams closed the tower door. A red, hand-shaped welt mars his face. The Princess hasn't taken the news well. + + +"The Princess and I are to be married immediately," he tells Wendell. "See that everything is ready. Arrange a special welcome for the Baker's Boy in case he decides to join us. Come to my chambers when you've finished. I need to be fluffed for my wedding night," the Marques says, loosening his belt. + + +-- + + +Inside the tower cell the Princess weeps. She runs to the window, as if to throw her self from the tower, but iron bars prevent her. + + +A small white dove comes to rest on the sill. "My faithful servant," sobs the Princess. "The Marques has the harp and now I fear the Baker's Boy shan't save me in time. Please, you must find him. I will die before I marry that wicked Marques!" + + +The dove flies away with the Princess's last hopes. +> The denouement +The Baker makes good on his threat and chains your face to the oven. "I'm going to the castle to delivery some pastries for the wedding. You'll be nice and crispy by the time a get back." The door slams as he leaves. The oven is already warm against your skin. + + +Your face grows hotter every second. Sweat rolls down your body, basting your coin purse in your own grease. You struggle to escape, but the chains are too tight. You cry out for help, but the only one around to hear you is a tiny white dove perched on the window sill. + + +In response to your cry, the dove transformers into a beautiful cloaked woman. You recognize her as the mysterious woman from the fair, though now her belly is swollen with pregnancy. "Come Baker's Boy, you must hurry, the wedding is taking place as we speak," she says. Lightning bolts fly from her fingertips, shattering the chains. + + +"But what can I do without the harp? How can I even get into the castle in the first place?" you ask. + + +"The castle is expecting food delivered for the wedding," she says. "You can bake a cake and hide inside. The guards will wheel you right up to the chapel." What a clever idea. You roll up your sleeves and start to bake. + + +When the cake is finished, you hollow it out and climb inside. + + +"I have a final gift for you," the cloaked woman says. She spreads her legs wide and squats down. An egg falls heavily to the floor. "This egg contains the last of my power. Cracking it shall grant you immense strength." Bloody afterbirth trickles down her leg. She begins to fade. + + +"My dearest Marmalade," she says softly. "How I will miss the sweet taste of your nectar." There is a flutter of wings and the woman is gone. + + +Surrounded by confection, you realize you haven't eaten anything in a while and this cake looks almost as tasty as that mushroom back in the forest. Surely a tiny taste won't hurt. +> Try a tiny bite +The cake is delicious, perhaps the best you've ever made, but it is too rich for your empty stomach. Your bowels turn, rejecting the sweet frosting. Clench as you might, you cannot prevent the inevitable and your bowels release like a spouting whale. The stench is overwhelming in the confines of the cake. You are both proud and disgusted. + + +Arrangements had been made for the thatcher's boys to deliver the cake to the castle. There, a portly guard runs his greasy finger through the frosting to sample the cake. "What the hell?" he shouts, spitting out the cake. "What'd you put in this? It tastes like sewage. Take it away." + + +You and the cake are unceremoniously thrown onto the garbage heap. The foul, garbage-air is refreshing after hotboxing in your own stink. + + +Your arrival has startled a filthy beggar picking through the refuse. He squints at you with one good eye before cracking open a pigeon bone and sucking out the marrow. + + +The heap offers you a commanding view of the castle. The chapel bells are tolling across the courtyard, but the chapel door is heavily guarded. How will you get in? + + + +> Change clothes with the beggar and sneak in +The beggar is happy to take your clean clothes in exchange for his rags, even if your pants are a bit crusty. + + +The guard stops you as you approach the chapel. "What do we have here? A dirty scrounger at the royal wedding?" laughs the guard. "Wait a minute, I recognize you. You're that thrice-damned Baker's Boy!" he shouts, drawing his sword. "Wait, no, my mistake. He's a chubby, pimply fella' who smells like onions. You smell like sewage and garbage. Go on inside." + + +You are about to step inside when he grabs your collar. "I recognize you now. You're One-Eyed Dan. You're that rascal who broke into the smithy and stole the blacksmith's shoes. And then you set fire to the orphanage and raped all those innocent children while they burned alive." + + +The laws of Mystigar take shoe thievery very seriously. The guards seize you, and drag you to the dungeon. + + +-- + + +Rows of cells line the dungeon walls. They are all empty except for one. In the last cell a diminutive man sits hunched over a pale, eating greedily. He turns to you as the guards march you passed. Excrement stains his face like brown clown makeup. He is clearly mad. + + +The guards escort you to the torture chamber at the end of the hall for execution, but it seems you will have to wait your turn. + + +A screaming prisoner is strapped upright on a board with a funnel in his mouth. A powerful lodestone hangs before him. The gaoler stands on a stool with his back to you, pouring nails down the funnel. He then pulls the lodestone close to the prisoner's stomach. The iron nails are drawn upwards by the stone's attractive power. The prisoner screams. + + +The gaoler is none other than Wendell, the Marques's lackey! You must pay him back for what he did to the unicorn. + + +You slap your apron pocket, breaking the magic egg within. The cool yolk runs down your thigh. A tingle of electric energy races across your skin, standing all of your hairs on end while your scrotum fills with arcane energy. The power is overwhelming. Lightning flies from your fingers, striking the guards. Their armor glows red hot, cooking them alive inside. + + +Wendell is no match for your powers. He tries to run but the bolts catch him. His skin sizzles and cracks like a hot dog too long on the fire. You strike him with bolt after bolt until their is nothing left but ash. + + +The spell fades and your scrotum retreats into your body like a scared snail. You pull the funnel from the prisoner's mouth. "Thank the gods! I am Sebastian, Prince of Cecum, betrothed of Princess Marmalade," he says. "I know a way into the chapel, release me and together we shall save the Princess." +> Free Prince Sebastian +"Thank you. I'm not looking forward to using the privy tonight, that's for sure," Sebastian says. + + +The Prince presses on a false stone in the dungeon wall, revealing a hidden passage. "They brought me in this way. The tunnels are like a maze. Stay close so you don't get lost," he says. + + +He leads you through a tunnel carved in the back of the dungeon. Your path twists and turns through the maze-like tunnels. "The Princess and I have been promised since birth. When the king passed, I received a letter from the Marques inviting me to the castle to choose wedding invitations, but it was a trap. He had me locked away so I couldn't interfere with his plans." + + +You come to a fork in the tunnel. The sound of distant music fills the left-hand tunnel, a septic odor emanates from the right-hand one. "Say chap, why exactly do you want to save Princess Marmalade?" +> "Because I love her, and I'm going to marry her!" +The right-hand path leads deep below the dungeons. You move cautiously through the darkness with Sebastian following close behind. The tunnel ends abruptly at the edge of a wide chasm and Sebastian maliciously shoves you over the edge. + + +You land waste deep in the castle septic pit. The chasm is one hundred feet across and hundreds deep. Pipes stick out from the walls at various angels, delivering waste from all over the castle. A thin film of urine and peanuts coat the pit's surface. It smells awful. + + +"Sorry chap, but that slut Marmalade drips like a sink, and I won't be a cuckold king," Sebastian shouts down to you. The echoes of his parting words are interrupted by the pitter-patter of fresh feces falling into the pit. + + +Something stirs in the depths. The filth bubbles as the segmented body of a giant tapeworm rises before you. "A thousand yearsss I have waited here for you, baker'sss boy," the tapeworm hisses. "Once I have consumed you, the curssse will be broken and I shall be free of thisss pit." + + +The parasite's square maw distends impossibly wide. The last thing you see is a kernel of corn stuck between its pointed teeth. + + + + +You've Died + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Thank you. I'm not looking forward to using the privy tonight, that's for sure," Sebastian says. + + +The Prince presses on a false stone in the dungeon wall, revealing a hidden passage. "They brought me in this way. The tunnels are like a maze. Stay close so you don't get lost," he says. + + +He leads you through a tunnel carved in the back of the dungeon. Your path twists and turns through the maze-like tunnels. "The Princess and I have been promised since birth. When the king passed, I received a letter from the Marques inviting me to the castle to choose wedding invitations, but it was a trap. He had me locked away so I couldn't interfere with his plans." + + +You come to a fork in the tunnel. The sound of distant music fills the left-hand tunnel, a septic odor emanates from the right-hand one. "Say chap, why exactly do you want to save Princess Marmalade?" +> "I don't know, some chick gave me a magic harp." +You and Sebastian rush up the left-hand tunnel, and soon burst out into the light of the chapel. Princess Marmalade stands upon the altar, her hands and wings tightly bound. + + +"Jacques Pierre! You have Marmalade's hand," shouts Sebastian. "I will die before that day comes!" He snatches a decorative sword from the wall and charges the Marques. + + +The Marques draws his golden sword. "Then we duel," he says. + + +They rush together and the sound of clashing steel fills the chapel. You untie the Princess while your betters are preoccupied. "I knew you would save me," she cries, throwing her arms around you. "You're such a good friend." + + +Sebastian delivers the Marques a fatal blow and then struts up and grabs the Princess about the waist. They kiss furiously, while the Marques bleeds out. When Sebastian finally dislodges his tongue from Marmalades' throat, he slaps her ass and gives you a knowing wink. + + +They are married immediately and the Princess names you both royal baker and maid of honor. + + + + +The End + + +If you're a really, really good friend it could eventually turn into something more, right? You're pathetic. + + +You've found an O. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The beggar is happy to take your clean clothes in exchange for his rags, even if your pants are a bit crusty. + + +The guard stops you as you approach the chapel. "What do we have here? A dirty scrounger at the royal wedding?" laughs the guard. "Wait a minute, I recognize you. You're that thrice-damned Baker's Boy!" he shouts, drawing his sword. "Wait, no, my mistake. He's a chubby, pimply fella' who smells like onions. You smell like sewage and garbage. Go on inside." + + +You are about to step inside when he grabs your collar. "I recognize you now. You're One-Eyed Dan. You're that rascal who broke into the smithy and stole the blacksmith's shoes. And then you set fire to the orphanage and raped all those innocent children while they burned alive." + + +The laws of Mystigar take shoe thievery very seriously. The guards seize you, and drag you to the dungeon. + + +-- + + +Rows of cells line the dungeon walls. They are all empty except for one. In the last cell a diminutive man sits hunched over a pale, eating greedily. He turns to you as the guards march you passed. Excrement stains his face like brown clown makeup. He is clearly mad. + + +The guards escort you to the torture chamber at the end of the hall for execution, but it seems you will have to wait your turn. + + +A screaming prisoner is strapped upright on a board with a funnel in his mouth. A powerful lodestone hangs before him. The gaoler stands on a stool with his back to you, pouring nails down the funnel. He then pulls the lodestone close to the prisoner's stomach. The iron nails are drawn upwards by the stone's attractive power. The prisoner screams. + + +The gaoler is none other than Wendell, the Marques's lackey! You must pay him back for what he did to the unicorn. + + +You slap your apron pocket, breaking the magic egg within. The cool yolk runs down your thigh. A tingle of electric energy races across your skin, standing all of your hairs on end while your scrotum fills with arcane energy. The power is overwhelming. Lightning flies from your fingers, striking the guards. Their armor glows red hot, cooking them alive inside. + + +Wendell is no match for your powers. He tries to run but the bolts catch him. His skin sizzles and cracks like a hot dog too long on the fire. You strike him with bolt after bolt until their is nothing left but ash. + + +The spell fades and your scrotum retreats into your body like a scared snail. You pull the funnel from the prisoner's mouth. "Thank the gods! I am Sebastian, Prince of Cecum, betrothed of Princess Marmalade," he says. "I know a way into the chapel, release me and together we shall save the Princess." +> Screw him, he's your rival +A faint sound catches your ear. It is the muffled, but unmistakable sound of organ music coming through the walls. There must be a hidden passage. You search the dungeon walls, looking for the source of the sound. The Prince, afraid of losing his only leverage, sings at the top of his lungs. + + +"There's no room here for you, the Innkeeper said, but I know the Innkeeper's daughter, and there's always room in her bed!" + + +His efforts are in vain. Your search uncovers a false stone in the wall, and pressing it reveals a hidden tunnel. You can follow the music all the way to the chapel. Looks like you will not be needing the Prince's help after all. + + +"Wait! You can't just leave me like this," the Prince pleads. + + +He's right. You casually kick the lodestone to him. Its attractive force tears the nails through his bloated stomach. His corpse reminds you of a blowfish on its period. You race down the tunnel towards the wedding chapel. + + +-- + + +A magnificent stained glass window bathes the chapel in rainbow light. Guests fill every pew and more stand in the balcony above. Gifts are piled high on a table in the center of the room. Among them is the gold bow the Marques won at the fair. + + +The Princess and the Marques stand on an altar with their backs to you. He is about to place a ring on her finger. You shout Marmalade's name and are immediately surrounded by guards. Crossbowmen emerge from the balcony. The organist stops playing. It is an ambush. + + +"Well well, the guest of honor has finally arrived," says the Marques, laughing. He reveals the harp of dreams from beneath his cloak. "I want to play you a tune our mutual friend, the Sage, taught me." He plays the Song of Wishes more deftly than you ever could. Your heart sinks when he reaches the final line: + + +"Harp of Dreams, punish this knave. Turn the Princess into my slave." + + +The harp shatters and the Princess falls to her knees screaming. When she stands again she has changed; she has lifeless eyes, black eyes, like a doll's eyes. + + +"Give me a kiss, darling," the Marques commands. She gives him a long, passionate kiss. "Now, kill the baker's boy." + + +The Princess takes flight with a piercing shriek. She circles the chapel once and then dives down and attacks. The guards and guests scatter in fear. You dash under the gift table, narrowly avoiding her wrath. The Princess circles again, building up speed for a second dive. You grab the golden bow, knowing you will only have one shot. You nock an arrow, close your eyes, and draw the bow. +> Shoot the Princess +Snap! The string breaks and your arrow falls impotently to the floor. The Marques doubles over with laughter. You have fallen for the same trick twice. + + +The Princess swoops down and seizes you in a raptorial embrace. Slowly she climbs, struggling to lift your bulk. She will drop you to your death once she gains enough altitude. That magic egg sure would have been handy right about now. There must be another way out. It cannot end like this. + + +True love. + + +Of course! The Harps's curse can be broken by true love's kiss. You plant a big wet one on the Princess's pulsating cold soar. She bites through your lip in reciprocation and spits it out to the floor below. Blood fills your mouth. + + +Or not. + + +The Princess reaches the ceiling and releases her grip... + + + + +You've Died + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A faint sound catches your ear. It is the muffled, but unmistakable sound of organ music coming through the walls. There must be a hidden passage. You search the dungeon walls, looking for the source of the sound. The Prince, afraid of losing his only leverage, sings at the top of his lungs. + + +"There's no room here for you, the Innkeeper said, but I know the Innkeeper's daughter, and there's always room in her bed!" + + +His efforts are in vain. Your search uncovers a false stone in the wall, and pressing it reveals a hidden tunnel. You can follow the music all the way to the chapel. Looks like you will not be needing the Prince's help after all. + + +"Wait! You can't just leave me like this," the Prince pleads. + + +He's right. You casually kick the lodestone to him. Its attractive force tears the nails through his bloated stomach. His corpse reminds you of a blowfish on its period. You race down the tunnel towards the wedding chapel. + + +-- + + +A magnificent stained glass window bathes the chapel in rainbow light. Guests fill every pew and more stand in the balcony above. Gifts are piled high on a table in the center of the room. Among them is the gold bow the Marques won at the fair. + + +The Princess and the Marques stand on an altar with their backs to you. He is about to place a ring on her finger. You shout Marmalade's name and are immediately surrounded by guards. Crossbowmen emerge from the balcony. The organist stops playing. It is an ambush. + + +"Well well, the guest of honor has finally arrived," says the Marques, laughing. He reveals the harp of dreams from beneath his cloak. "I want to play you a tune our mutual friend, the Sage, taught me." He plays the Song of Wishes more deftly than you ever could. Your heart sinks when he reaches the final line: + + +"Harp of Dreams, punish this knave. Turn the Princess into my slave." + + +The harp shatters and the Princess falls to her knees screaming. When she stands again she has changed; she has lifeless eyes, black eyes, like a doll's eyes. + + +"Give me a kiss, darling," the Marques commands. She gives him a long, passionate kiss. "Now, kill the baker's boy." + + +The Princess takes flight with a piercing shriek. She circles the chapel once and then dives down and attacks. The guards and guests scatter in fear. You dash under the gift table, narrowly avoiding her wrath. The Princess circles again, building up speed for a second dive. You grab the golden bow, knowing you will only have one shot. You nock an arrow, close your eyes, and draw the bow. +> Shoot the Marques +The arrow strikes the Marques in the heart. He stumbles once, like a roofied school girl, and then falls from the altar. The spell controlling the Princess is broken with his death. She drops from the sky like a bird striking a plate glass window. + + +"What have I done!" she exclaims. "I have attacked my own subjects whom I am sworn to protect. I am not fit to be Queen, so I must leave Mystigar tonight in penance. You will rule in my stead baker's boy." + + +-- + + +Your reign is consumed by a single thought: the Baker. He disappeared on the day of the wedding, and was never seen again. + + +You pour all of the resources of Mystigar into searching for him but the trail is cold. You are unyielding. Bakeries are destroyed, bakers hanged, and ovens outlawed. All other duties are forgotten and the kingdom withers, bankrupted by your single-minded quest. + + +Paranoia eats away at you. You know he is out there somewhere, plotting against you. You will find him. + + + + +The End + + +You really went off the deep end there. Who knew you were so high strung? Better try again, but this time don't leave any loose ends. + + +You've found a G. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle. + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The beggar is happy to take your clean clothes in exchange for his rags, even if your pants are a bit crusty. + + +The guard stops you as you approach the chapel. "What do we have here? A dirty scrounger at the royal wedding?" laughs the guard. "Wait a minute, I recognize you. You're that thrice-damned Baker's Boy!" he shouts, drawing his sword. "Wait, no, my mistake. He's a chubby, pimply fella' who smells like onions. You smell like sewage and garbage. Go on inside." + + +You are about to step inside when he grabs your collar. "I recognize you now. You're One-Eyed Dan. You're that rascal who broke into the smithy and stole the blacksmith's shoes. And then you set fire to the orphanage and raped all those innocent children while they burned alive." + + +The laws of Mystigar take shoe thievery very seriously. The guards seize you, and drag you to the dungeon. + + +-- + + +Rows of cells line the dungeon walls. They are all empty except for one. In the last cell a diminutive man sits hunched over a pale, eating greedily. He turns to you as the guards march you passed. Excrement stains his face like brown clown makeup. He is clearly mad. + + +The guards escort you to the torture chamber at the end of the hall for execution, but it seems you will have to wait your turn. + + +A screaming prisoner is strapped upright on a board with a funnel in his mouth. A powerful lodestone hangs before him. The gaoler stands on a stool with his back to you, pouring nails down the funnel. He then pulls the lodestone close to the prisoner's stomach. The iron nails are drawn upwards by the stone's attractive power. The prisoner screams. + + +The gaoler is none other than Wendell, the Marques's lackey! You must pay him back for what he did to the unicorn. + + +You slap your apron pocket, breaking the magic egg within. The cool yolk runs down your thigh. A tingle of electric energy races across your skin, standing all of your hairs on end while your scrotum fills with arcane energy. The power is overwhelming. Lightning flies from your fingers, striking the guards. Their armor glows red hot, cooking them alive inside. + + +Wendell is no match for your powers. He tries to run but the bolts catch him. His skin sizzles and cracks like a hot dog too long on the fire. You strike him with bolt after bolt until their is nothing left but ash. + + +The spell fades and your scrotum retreats into your body like a scared snail. You pull the funnel from the prisoner's mouth. "Thank the gods! I am Sebastian, Prince of Cecum, betrothed of Princess Marmalade," he says. "I know a way into the chapel, release me and together we shall save the Princess." +> Free the mad man instead +You open the prisoner's cell. "Thanks mate," the mad man says. He shoves a bone shank between your ribs when your back is turned. "You have such pretty skin my sweet angel, and plenty of it too. I think I'll sew it into a new raincoat, perhaps a hat and a nice pair of slippers too. But first, I need to finish my lunch." + + + + +You've Died + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The cake is delicious, perhaps the best you've ever made, but it is too rich for your empty stomach. Your bowels turn, rejecting the sweet frosting. Clench as you might, you cannot prevent the inevitable and your bowels release like a spouting whale. The stench is overwhelming in the confines of the cake. You are both proud and disgusted. + + +Arrangements had been made for the thatcher's boys to deliver the cake to the castle. There, a portly guard runs his greasy finger through the frosting to sample the cake. "What the hell?" he shouts, spitting out the cake. "What'd you put in this? It tastes like sewage. Take it away." + + +You and the cake are unceremoniously thrown onto the garbage heap. The foul, garbage-air is refreshing after hotboxing in your own stink. + + +Your arrival has startled a filthy beggar picking through the refuse. He squints at you with one good eye before cracking open a pigeon bone and sucking out the marrow. + + +The heap offers you a commanding view of the castle. The chapel bells are tolling across the courtyard, but the chapel door is heavily guarded. How will you get in? + + + +> Use the egg and storm the gates +You draw the magic egg from your pocket and crack it over your head. Power surges through your limbs. Your manhood swells to thrice its size and curly black hair sprouts from your chest. The guards are no match for your immense strength. You crash through the chapel door in a shower of splinters. + + +A magnificent stained glass window bathes the chapel in rainbow light. Guests fill every pew and more stand in the balcony above. The Princess and the Marques stand on an altar at the head of the chapel with their backs to you. He is about to place a ring on her finger. You shout Marmalade's name and are immediately surrounded by guards. Crossbowmen emerge from the balcony. It is an ambush. + + +The guards take one look at your pendulous manhood and flee screaming. The Marques, equally impressed, grabs the Princess by her shoulders and throws her through the stained glass window and then runs for the exit. You chase him up a twisting staircase and onto the chapel roof. + + +Cornered at the edge of the roof, the cowering Marques cries out for mercy, but you have none. You raise a gargantuan fist and... the power suddenly fades. Your manhood shrivels back to its normal size. The Marques is quick to capitalize. He draws his golden swords and takes the offensive. "The tables have turned, baker's boy. Too bad you couldn't rise to the occasion," he quips. + + +He drives you back to edge of the roof. Your foot slips and you tumble down the angle of the roof. You catch the gutter, and dangle between the buttresses like the last anal bead. The ground is a long ways below. Your sweaty hand cannot hold on for long. You lose your grip and fall. + + +-- + + +The Marques sheaths his sword and turns away. "Perhaps I was a bit hasty with the Princess. I can't marry her now if her face is all cut up." + + +The sound of wings fills the air and you rise above the roof, riding on Princess Marmalade's back, triumphantly hold the Harp of Dreams. + + +"Impossible!" the Marques shouts in surprise. + + +Harp strings resonate with energy as you play the Song of Wishes. "Jacques Pierre shall reap what he's sown. Harp of Dreams, turn him to stone!" you sing. + + +The Marques tries to run but, but no one can out run magic. The spell catches him at the edge of the roof, where he still stands today, a gargoyle frozen in mid stride. They say you can hear him cry out on stormy nights when the rain runs from his mouth. + + +-- + + +You and the Princess are married at once, and at long last you find yourselves alone in bed. Your stare into her disfigured face, trembling, searching for the right words. She breaks the silence first. "Say, could you do that thing were your grow huge again?" she asks. "Pretty please?" + + + + +The End + + +Boy is she going to be disappointed. You did well for a mere baker's apprentice, but some of the bad guys got away. + + +You've found an S. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Baker makes good on his threat and chains your face to the oven. "I'm going to the castle to delivery some pastries for the wedding. You'll be nice and crispy by the time a get back." The door slams as he leaves. The oven is already warm against your skin. + + +Your face grows hotter every second. Sweat rolls down your body, basting your coin purse in your own grease. You struggle to escape, but the chains are too tight. You cry out for help, but the only one around to hear you is a tiny white dove perched on the window sill. + + +In response to your cry, the dove transformers into a beautiful cloaked woman. You recognize her as the mysterious woman from the fair, though now her belly is swollen with pregnancy. "Come Baker's Boy, you must hurry, the wedding is taking place as we speak," she says. Lightning bolts fly from her fingertips, shattering the chains. + + +"But what can I do without the harp? How can I even get into the castle in the first place?" you ask. + + +"The castle is expecting food delivered for the wedding," she says. "You can bake a cake and hide inside. The guards will wheel you right up to the chapel." What a clever idea. You roll up your sleeves and start to bake. + + +When the cake is finished, you hollow it out and climb inside. + + +"I have a final gift for you," the cloaked woman says. She spreads her legs wide and squats down. An egg falls heavily to the floor. "This egg contains the last of my power. Cracking it shall grant you immense strength." Bloody afterbirth trickles down her leg. She begins to fade. + + +"My dearest Marmalade," she says softly. "How I will miss the sweet taste of your nectar." There is a flutter of wings and the woman is gone. + + +Surrounded by confection, you realize you haven't eaten anything in a while and this cake looks almost as tasty as that mushroom back in the forest. Surely a tiny taste won't hurt. +> Stop trying to get me killed! +You wisely decide not to eat your disguise. + + +Arrangements had been made for the thatcher's boys to deliver the cake to the castle. There, a portly guard runs his greasy finger through the frosting to sample the cake. "Delicious!" he exclaims. "Take it to the kitchens at once." + + +You are deposited in the kitchen where you hear a familiar voice: "Careful with those pastries, boy! Drop one and you'll feel the back of my hand." Even though the voice is muffled by the cake, there is no mistaking the Baker. + + +The urge for revenge is almost as strong as your desire to save the Princess. You fondle the magic egg in your apron pocket. +> Kill the Baker +You crack the egg over your head. Power surges through your limbs. Your manhood swells to thrice its size and curly black hair sprouts from your chest and back. You explode from the cake and smash a giant fist into the Baker's face, shattering bone and rupturing white heads. The spit boys and scullery maids run screaming. + + +You ram the Baker's broken face into the side of the oven again and again, searing his flesh. When there is nothing left but the empty rind, you fold him in half and stuff him into the oven. The magic fades and with it your blood lust. You run for the chapel. + + +A magnificent stained glass window bathes the chapel in rainbow light. Guests fill every pew and more stand in the balcony above. Gifts are piled high on a table in the center of the room. Among them is the opalescent horn of the unicorn. + + +The Princess and the Marques stand on an altar at the head of the chapel with their backs to you. He is about to place a ring on her finger. You shout Marmalade's name and are immediately surrounded by guards. Crossbowmen emerge from the balcony. It is an ambush. + + +"Well well, the guest of honor has finally arrived," says the Marques, laughing. He reveals the harp of dreams from beneath his cloak. "Your meddling has gotten stale baker's boy. It ends here." He strums the strings and a tremor runs through the hall. The power of the harp should not be taken lightly. + + +The room shakes violently. Columns crack and the floor twists beneath your feet. The guests panic and stampede for the exit. In the confusion you are able to break free from the guards. + + +The Marques must be stopped before he brings down the entire chapel. You dash towards the alter but Wendell blocks your way. The stained glass window explodes, showering the hall with colorful razors. You must act quickly. + + +Wendell draws his sword. You back pedal, narrowly avoiding his thrusts, until you hit the gift pile and can retreat no more. You desperately grope for a weapon and your hand finds the unicorn horn. You drive the horn upward, penetrating Wendell like a tavern-whore. His expression changes from triumph to bewilderment. The sword falls from his grasp and he collapses. You hear the unicorn's voice whisper "my spirit will always watch over you." + + +The Marques, sensing defeat, leaps through the window to his steed below. You rush to the Princess and throw your arms around her. "There is no time!" she shouts. "We must retrieve the harp before it brings down the whole castle. Climb on." You climb onto her back. She spreads her wings and flies through the window in pursuit. +> The chase is on +Flying with the Princess is every bit as thrilling as you had imagined. You cannot conceal your excitement. "Quit poking me, I'm trying to fly," she complains. + + +The fairgrounds appear below you. They are empty and quiet now. You chase the Marques to the archery grounds. The Princess folds her wings and begins her attack dive. "Hold on we're-" + + +A golden arrow sprouts from her throat. The Marques has retrieved his bow and arrows from the tourney and loosed a fateful shaft. The Princess cartwheels uncontrollably and you tumble form the sky. + + +You barrel into the Marques, breaking your fall. He is knocked out cold. You crawl to the Princess and cradle her lifeless body. Tears stream from you eyes. + + +How could this happen? Everything has been in vain. She loved you, she needed you, and you failed her. A ragged scream tears from your throat, and then you see the harp. Of course! The power of the harp can revive her. You play like you have never played before. You put everything you have into the song. You reach the last line: + + +"Powers of magic, hear my cry. Harp of Dreams..." +> Don't let the Princess die! +The Princess is revived by the power of the harp. The harp shatters, its purpose fulfilled. The Marques is quickly apprehended and thrown into the dungeons for treason. + + +You and the Princess are married at once. Your coronation follows all of the boring traditions and ceremonies like the vigil, the rites, and the human sacrifice. + + +At long last the moment you have been waiting for arrives; you find yourself alone with the Princess. She sits naked upon the bed, her delicate wings covering everything but her blushing face. Her violet eyes say everything her mouth is afraid to. +> Kiss her +After a brief and dutiful consummation you lie in bed with your arms around the Princess. You tell yourself "it happens to every man" but you know it's a lie. + + +"I can't wait to spend the rest of our lives together, but will you still love me when I'm old?" The Princess asks. + + +"Of course," you reply. + + +"Would you still love me if I was fat? Would you love me if I went bald? Would you love me if I was in a wheelchair? Would you still love me if all of my skin fell off and my bones had chickenpox..." + + +Great gods, what have you done? + + +The End + + +Such womanly nonsense. Quickly, go back and tickle her udders! + + +You've found a D. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle. + + + + + <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Princess is revived by the power of the harp. The harp shatters, its purpose fulfilled. The Marques is quickly apprehended and thrown into the dungeons for treason. + + +You and the Princess are married at once. Your coronation follows all of the boring traditions and ceremonies like the vigil, the rites, and the human sacrifice. + + +At long last the moment you have been waiting for arrives; you find yourself alone with the Princess. She sits naked upon the bed, her delicate wings covering everything but her blushing face. Her violet eyes say everything her mouth is afraid to. +> Tickle her udders +The sun is high in the sky when you awake. The Princess still sleeps beside you amidst the satin sheets, bowlegged with a fresh black eye purpling her pretty features. You rise and fill the basin on your nightstand and wash the urine from your hair. What a night! A Princess for your first time, where do you go from here? + + +All hail the king of Mystigar! + + +Congratulations! You win! My favorite part was when you rode the minotaur-hydra. What was yours? + + +You've found a U. Can you solve the Legendary Riddle: "What did the baker's boy give the Princess on their wedding night?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Flying with the Princess is every bit as thrilling as you had imagined. You cannot conceal your excitement. "Quit poking me, I'm trying to fly," she complains. + + +The fairgrounds appear below you. They are empty and quiet now. You chase the Marques to the archery grounds. The Princess folds her wings and begins her attack dive. "Hold on we're-" + + +A golden arrow sprouts from her throat. The Marques has retrieved his bow and arrows from the tourney and loosed a fateful shaft. The Princess cartwheels uncontrollably and you tumble form the sky. + + +You barrel into the Marques, breaking your fall. He is knocked out cold. You crawl to the Princess and cradle her lifeless body. Tears stream from you eyes. + + +How could this happen? Everything has been in vain. She loved you, she needed you, and you failed her. A ragged scream tears from your throat, and then you see the harp. Of course! The power of the harp can revive her. You play like you have never played before. You put everything you have into the song. You reach the last line: + + +"Powers of magic, hear my cry. Harp of Dreams..." +> Kiss the Marques good bye! +The harp transforms into a wickedly twisted knife; its power fills you with unimaginable strength. + + +With one hand you lift the broken Marques by his blonde locks. His eyes are filled with fear. He whispers "please," but there is no mercy left in your heart. You drive the blade into his eye socket so hard the hilt breaks his nose and the tip protrudes from the back of his skull. You hurl his dead body into the gutter where the rats and the hobos can take turns defiling it. + + +-- + + +The rain pours down as you turn to take one last look at the castle. The people of Mystigar had begged you to stay and be their king, but only sorrow remains for you there. With a heavy heart you leave Mystigar behind and head into the unknown. Someday, you will have your own kingdom, your own queen. But that is another story... + + + + +The End? + + +Killing the Marques won't bring Princess Marmalade back, but it sure felt good, didn't it? + + +You've found an H. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Flying with the Princess is every bit as thrilling as you had imagined. You cannot conceal your excitement. "Quit poking me, I'm trying to fly," she complains. + + +The fairgrounds appear below you. They are empty and quiet now. You chase the Marques to the archery grounds. The Princess folds her wings and begins her attack dive. "Hold on we're-" + + +A golden arrow sprouts from her throat. The Marques has retrieved his bow and arrows from the tourney and loosed a fateful shaft. The Princess cartwheels uncontrollably and you tumble form the sky. + + +You barrel into the Marques, breaking your fall. He is knocked out cold. You crawl to the Princess and cradle her lifeless body. Tears stream from you eyes. + + +How could this happen? Everything has been in vain. She loved you, she needed you, and you failed her. A ragged scream tears from your throat, and then you see the harp. Of course! The power of the harp can revive her. You play like you have never played before. You put everything you have into the song. You reach the last line: + + +"Powers of magic, hear my cry. Harp of Dreams..." +> Send me a delicious pie! +The pie is delicious. + + + + +The End + + +There is nothing like a freshly baked pie. + + +You've found a T. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wisely decide not to eat your disguise. + + +Arrangements had been made for the thatcher's boys to deliver the cake to the castle. There, a portly guard runs his greasy finger through the frosting to sample the cake. "Delicious!" he exclaims. "Take it to the kitchens at once." + + +You are deposited in the kitchen where you hear a familiar voice: "Careful with those pastries, boy! Drop one and you'll feel the back of my hand." Even though the voice is muffled by the cake, there is no mistaking the Baker. + + +The urge for revenge is almost as strong as your desire to save the Princess. You fondle the magic egg in your apron pocket. +> Stay hidden and wait for the ceremony +Inside the cake is dark, and stiflingly hot. The thick confection muffles all sound from the outside world. It only takes a few minutes for you to fall asleep. + + +The wedding ceremony concludes and the guests gather around the Marques and his crying bride. He draws his golden sword and slices the cake into pieces with a flurry of swordsmanship. The guests gorge themselves, remarking on the cake's delicious filling. Even the Princess smiles as she takes a bite. "This is the best cake I've ever had," she says. + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You follow the fox for some distance through the forest when he stumbles. "Ah I've stubbed my toe. You're going to have to carry me," says the fox. "Please, it really, really, hurts. Carry me and I can tell you where to go. Pretty please." His toe looks fine, but you reluctantly pick up the spirit fox. "Oh you have such strong arms," he says. + + +You travel many miles and the forest becomes dark and ominous. The trees are decorated with shrunken heads and human bones which dangle from their branches like wind chimes. You enter a rocky clearing and deep voice booms from the forest, "Who dares seek the great sage?" + + +"That's my cue," says the terrified fox. He hops from your arms and quickly scampers away. It seems his toe has been miraculous healed. + + +A massive lion leaps onto the rocky outcrop ahead of you. He is so large a horse could ride down his gullet. Skulls and bones are tied in his mane like trophies. "If you wish to see the sage you must answer my riddle. Answer wrong, and I will add you to my decorations + + +"What rises tall and hard in the morning, showers its golden rays down upon the children, and then, exhausted, hangs its head between the stones?" +> It's your, um you know, manhood... +"I don't understand," the lion says. + + +You know, the ole sword and stones. Your little wizard. Your widow-splitter. Ham-weasel. Stink-diver. Turkey neck? + + +"Enough! You are not worthy, so you must perish," roars the lion. You try to run, but you are a fat little apprentice boy and he's a one hundred foot magic lion. + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your leap causes the small boat to capsize and the ferryman is thrown into the water with you. + + +The leper has been working this river since before you were a stain on your mother's thigh, and the River Hags have been waiting patiently to get their hands on him. They converge upon him and you are momentarily forgotten while they satiate their blood lust. His gargled screams are barely audible over the sound of tearing flesh. + + +You quickly swim to shore while they are distracted and resume your journey. + + +-- + + +The forest path gradually becomes a lane, and the lane becomes a road. Eventually, it leads you to your destination. A stone pillar rises phallicly from the Crossroads, marking the spot were a dozen paths meet like spokes on a wheel. Three animals step from behind the pillar: a frog, a raven, and a fox. + + +"Welcome your majesty," says the fox. + + +"We are the spirit guides," says the frog. + + +"We have waited long for you," says the crow. + + +You can tell this is going to get annoying really quickly. + + +"I am the regrets of man," says the frog. + + +"And I am the sorrows of man," says the raven. + + +"And I am the wiles of man," says the fox. + + +You have no idea what they're talking about. All you care about is which one can lead you to the sage. + + +"Maybe all of us" says the crow. + + +"Maybe none of us," says the frog. + + +"You'll have to trust your heart," says the fox. +> Follow the Crow +The crow leads you to a land of mountains and fire. A single round hill lies amongst the jagged peaks. Thousands of clamorous birds flock around its crown. It is to there that you must climb. The crow leaves you to join the flock. + + +When you finally crest the hill you find it is not a hill at all. You have mounted the belly of an enormous cyclops. Her horned head towers five hundred feet above you, where the birds nest as if she was a seaside cliff. They take turns diving down into the crevices of her nether regions to fill their gullet before returning to feed their young. Her ancient breasts roll listlessly from her belly, resting on the ground one thousand feet below. + + +"What gift have you brought me in exchange for my knowledge?" the cyclops booms. + + +No one told you anything about a gift. You have nothing with you except your clothes and the harp. The harp! What a brilliant idea you could serenade her. Then again, honesty is the best policy. + + + +> I have brought you the gift of music +You clear your throat and strum the harp to find the key. + + +"Oh I know the innkeeper's daughter..." + + +Your song is interrupted by a tremor running through the Cyclops's gut. Geysers of sulfur erupt from beneath her prodigious bulk, scattering the flock of screaming birds. + + +"Enough!" the cyclops thunders. "You are not worthy of my knowledge!" + + +Her belly fat ripples and ungulates, tossing you about like waves on the ocean. You lose your footing and slide down the curvature of her belly towards certain death. At the last moment you grab hold of a pubic hair as thick as a ship's cable, but it is slick with sweat. Her huge crevice gapes open below you, waiting to swallow you whole. The hair slides from your hand and you fall into the darkness. + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The crow leads you to a land of mountains and fire. A single round hill lies amongst the jagged peaks. Thousands of clamorous birds flock around its crown. It is to there that you must climb. The crow leaves you to join the flock. + + +When you finally crest the hill you find it is not a hill at all. You have mounted the belly of an enormous cyclops. Her horned head towers five hundred feet above you, where the birds nest as if she was a seaside cliff. They take turns diving down into the crevices of her nether regions to fill their gullet before returning to feed their young. Her ancient breasts roll listlessly from her belly, resting on the ground one thousand feet below. + + +"What gift have you brought me in exchange for my knowledge?" the cyclops booms. + + +No one told you anything about a gift. You have nothing with you except your clothes and the harp. The harp! What a brilliant idea you could serenade her. Then again, honesty is the best policy. + + + +> I have no gift +"Nothing!" Booms the cyclops. She fixes her gaze on you, but her eye drifts lazily down and to the left. "Then you must do something for me." Several birds separate from the flock carrying a fluffy pink dress... + + +-- + + +"Dance prettier! 1 2 3, 1 2 3, and turn. Yes!" the cyclops giggles. Her clapping hands sound like thunder. "Now tell me who's a precious little baker's girl? Uh oh, I see something poking out from under that skirt." + + +Enough is enough. You stop dancing and cross your arms defiantly. It's time you learned the song. + + +"Very well." + + +One by one screeching birds descend from the flock. They peck and claw at the cyclops's nipple, tearing it to bloody ribbons. Her single eye rolls back in her head as a quiver of ecstasy runs through her flesh. The birds draw an ancient scroll from the ruin of her nipple. The scroll is made from tanned griffin foreskin and covered in mysterious runes. A song fills your mind as you read it. + + +"Now you know the Song of Wishes. The song can only be sung once, so sing it wisely, my pretty girl." A sudden wave of exhaustion overcomes you. You curl up in the cyclops's naval and fall asleep. + + +You awake alone, on the road just outside of town.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your leap causes the small boat to capsize and the ferryman is thrown into the water with you. + + +The leper has been working this river since before you were a stain on your mother's thigh, and the River Hags have been waiting patiently to get their hands on him. They converge upon him and you are momentarily forgotten while they satiate their blood lust. His gargled screams are barely audible over the sound of tearing flesh. + + +You quickly swim to shore while they are distracted and resume your journey. + + +-- + + +The forest path gradually becomes a lane, and the lane becomes a road. Eventually, it leads you to your destination. A stone pillar rises phallicly from the Crossroads, marking the spot were a dozen paths meet like spokes on a wheel. Three animals step from behind the pillar: a frog, a raven, and a fox. + + +"Welcome your majesty," says the fox. + + +"We are the spirit guides," says the frog. + + +"We have waited long for you," says the crow. + + +You can tell this is going to get annoying really quickly. + + +"I am the regrets of man," says the frog. + + +"And I am the sorrows of man," says the raven. + + +"And I am the wiles of man," says the fox. + + +You have no idea what they're talking about. All you care about is which one can lead you to the sage. + + +"Maybe all of us" says the crow. + + +"Maybe none of us," says the frog. + + +"You'll have to trust your heart," says the fox. +> Follow the Frog +For a day and a night you follow the frog. At long last you come to the edge of a vast morass. The water is filled with a churning mass of thick, red eels. This is the swamp of the ancient sage. + + +You wade for miles, waste deep in eels, before reaching a reed hut hidden in the mist. After a prolonged farewell, the frog dives beneath the eels and disappears. You timidly knock on the hut door. "Come in!" comes the reply from within. + + +The sage sits in the center of the hut, her prodigious bulk resting on a nest of reeds. Her skin is blue and hairless. A pair of tiny flippers twitch with delight as dragonfly servants drop spotted mushrooms down her enormous gullet. An endless stream of red eels pours from her backside, falling through a hole in the floor, to the swamp below. + + +"I have been expecting you, baker's boy," she says. "You have come to learn the Song of Wishes. I will teach it to you in exchange for a kiss." +> No thank you +You politely decline. The sage makes a face of such hideous dejection you almost feel sorry. Almost. "Very well. Give me the harp and I shall teach you the song." + + +Her fins move deftly along the strings as she plays. The song is oddly soothing until she reaches the final line. "This song was merely a ploy, to receive a kiss from the tender baker's boy." + + +A strange desire takes hold of you. You're lips are drawn to her slimy skin. "I will have my kiss one way or another, baker's boy," she laughs. + + +You kiss her turgid lips, her smooth scalp, the dark place beneath her flippers. Eels slither down your throat as you give her the most sensual kiss of all. If you still had a gag reflex, you might have been saved. Instead, the eels fill your lungs and you slip into darkness. + + +"Kissy kissy!" squeals the sage. + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>For a day and a night you follow the frog. At long last you come to the edge of a vast morass. The water is filled with a churning mass of thick, red eels. This is the swamp of the ancient sage. + + +You wade for miles, waste deep in eels, before reaching a reed hut hidden in the mist. After a prolonged farewell, the frog dives beneath the eels and disappears. You timidly knock on the hut door. "Come in!" comes the reply from within. + + +The sage sits in the center of the hut, her prodigious bulk resting on a nest of reeds. Her skin is blue and hairless. A pair of tiny flippers twitch with delight as dragonfly servants drop spotted mushrooms down her enormous gullet. An endless stream of red eels pours from her backside, falling through a hole in the floor, to the swamp below. + + +"I have been expecting you, baker's boy," she says. "You have come to learn the Song of Wishes. I will teach it to you in exchange for a kiss." +> Kiss the sage +You close your eyes and plant an openmouthed kiss on her turgid lips. Her tongue tastes like violation. "Mmmm choke me," coos the sage. It takes two hands to squeeze her blubbery throat. "Ahhh, now I will teach you the song you desire." + + +"Slaves! bring me the box," she shouts. A dragonfly delivers her a small, intricately carved box. She raises the lid and a tiny beetle flies out. It lands on your shoulder and crawls into your ear. You feel a wriggle, a pinch, and then an electric shock. A song grows in your mind like the threads of a chrysalis. + + +"Now you know the Song of Dreams, but be warned, the song can only be sung once, so sing it wisely. And don't worry about the beetle, he'll find his way out eventually," says the sage. "The path north of this hut leads back to town. Now, they say a parting kiss is sweetest." + + +You quickly thank the sage and head down the path before she can kiss you again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"They say the sage is a thousand years old and can see another thousand years into the future. Of course, they also say us centaurs can't wipe our own asses," the centaur says. "Anyway, no one has ever seen the sage, or if they have, they didn't live long enough to talk about it. Travel east across the river to the Crossroads. A spirit guide will appear there and guide you to the sage." + + +"But beware of the Haunted Castle!" he cautions. "It is ruled by an evil demon and she is not to be trusted." + + +You take one last look at the centaur's daughter before heading east down the forest path. The centaur calls after you: "It's not true you know! We can wipe our asses just fine!" + + +-- + + +The sun is high overhead when you reach the river. + + +The river is too wide and too strong to ford. If you had a wagon, you might be able to caulk it and float across. The Haunted Castle stands ominously on the river's edge, guarding the only bridge across. It exudes an evil aura. Luckily, there is also a ferry docked on the near shore. +> Take the bridge +The castle door swings open before you can knock. + + +An old woman greets you. Her skin is wrinkled like that of a dried apple. Her curled blue hair is tucked up under a bonnet, and her time-ravaged breasts are tucked into the belt of a robe. She squints at you through thick spectacles. "Oh a visitor! How exciting. Come in. Come in," she says. "You smell like a centaur's stable. I never cared for centaurs. Lying sluts." + + +Inside the castle is unremarkable, except for the pervasive old person smell and the abundance of decorative plates. You feel none of the evil presence you experienced before. + + +"You youngsters are always in such a rush. I insist you stay and rest for the night. It gets so lonely here. I would appreciate the company. Would you care to join me for dinner before turning in?" + + + +> Join her for dinner +A long table spread with wondrous food and drink fills the dining room. The old woman takes a seat at the head of the table, and you saddle up at the far end, fill your goblet with wine, and slice off a thick piece of foot-meat from the nearest roast. + + +"Everyone, I would like you to meet our guest, the Baker's Boy," the old woman says. You look around, but the remaining seats are all empty. "Gerald, sit up straight. Isabelle dear, don't smell your fingers at the table. Its rude," she says to no one. "I'm sorry. Ghosts have the worst table manners. Tell me, what are you doing way out here?" + + +You excitedly tell her and the ghosts all about your adventures so far. + + +"Oh, my poor child," the old woman says. "That strumpet has already forgotten all about you." She draws a crystal ball from beneath the table and waves her hand over it. A picture forms inside. You see the Princess in bed with the Marques and the Baker. Impossible! She would never... Would she? + + +"I've always wanted a son like you. Why don't you forget about that tart Marmalade and stay here with me?" +> Stay and be her son +"You are mine now," the old woman says. + + +Your body starts to tingle and your vision changes. The room grows darker and one by one the ghosts come in to view. Isabelle waves her sticky fingers at you in greeting. Hundreds of ghosts fill the hall, each a weary traveler like yourself. + + +You can see the old woman's true form now. She is a benevolent demon with blue skin and four arms. "Come feed, my children," she beckons, opening her robe and revealing a dozen swollen teats. You nestle in beside Gerald and fill yourself with mother's love. + + +You are home. + + + + +The End + + +The bottled stuff just doesn't compare to the real thing. + + +You've found an I. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A long table spread with wondrous food and drink fills the dining room. The old woman takes a seat at the head of the table, and you saddle up at the far end, fill your goblet with wine, and slice off a thick piece of foot-meat from the nearest roast. + + +"Everyone, I would like you to meet our guest, the Baker's Boy," the old woman says. You look around, but the remaining seats are all empty. "Gerald, sit up straight. Isabelle dear, don't smell your fingers at the table. Its rude," she says to no one. "I'm sorry. Ghosts have the worst table manners. Tell me, what are you doing way out here?" + + +You excitedly tell her and the ghosts all about your adventures so far. + + +"Oh, my poor child," the old woman says. "That strumpet has already forgotten all about you." She draws a crystal ball from beneath the table and waves her hand over it. A picture forms inside. You see the Princess in bed with the Marques and the Baker. Impossible! She would never... Would she? + + +"I've always wanted a son like you. Why don't you forget about that tart Marmalade and stay here with me?" +> Decline her offer +"How dare you refuse me!" the old woman screams. + + +Her skin sloughs away revealing a matte of dirty black fur, a long naked tail, and a pointed snout with curving incisors. Her true form is that of a rat-succubus which feeds on the souls of lost travelers. Black blood pours from his beady, red eyes. "I will have you one way or another!" + + +You run from the table, one step ahead of the demon. Angry ghosts follow her like wisps of smoke. She is almost upon you when you step out onto the bridge and she slams into a magical barrier like a bird hitting a picture window. Ghosts and demons are unable to leave the castle. + + +The demon's frustration is palpable as she paces the barrier, staring at you and salivating. She hurls herself against it repeatedly, checking it for weaknesses. You hurriedly resume your journey before she can break through. + + +-- + + +The forest path gradually becomes a lane, and the lane becomes a road. Eventually, it leads you to your destination. A stone pillar rises phallicly from the Crossroads, marking the spot were a dozen paths meet like spokes on a wheel. Three animals step from behind the pillar: a frog, a raven, and a fox. + + +"Welcome your majesty," says the fox. + + +"We are the spirit guides," says the frog. + + +"We have waited long for you," says the crow. + + +You can tell this is going to get annoying really quickly. + + +"I am the regrets of man," says the frog. + + +"And I am the sorrows of man," says the raven. + + +"And I am the wiles of man," says the fox. + + +You have no idea what they're talking about. All you care about is which one can lead you to the sage. + + +"Maybe all of us" says the crow. + + +"Maybe none of us," says the frog. + + +"You'll have to trust your heart," says the fox.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The castle door swings open before you can knock. + + +An old woman greets you. Her skin is wrinkled like that of a dried apple. Her curled blue hair is tucked up under a bonnet, and her time-ravaged breasts are tucked into the belt of a robe. She squints at you through thick spectacles. "Oh a visitor! How exciting. Come in. Come in," she says. "You smell like a centaur's stable. I never cared for centaurs. Lying sluts." + + +Inside the castle is unremarkable, except for the pervasive old person smell and the abundance of decorative plates. You feel none of the evil presence you experienced before. + + +"You youngsters are always in such a rush. I insist you stay and rest for the night. It gets so lonely here. I would appreciate the company. Would you care to join me for dinner before turning in?" + + + +> Go to bed early +The old woman leads you to a small tower bedroom, helps you out of your apron, and tucks you into bed. + + +There is a strange black candle on your nightstand. "The castle can be a spooky place at night," the old woman says. "This candle will keep the ghosts away, but be careful it doesn't go out." + + +She kisses you on the forehead and takes her leave. No sooner has she closed the door, than you hear the ghosts. Terrifying wailing and moaning fill the hall outside your room. There must be hundreds haunting the castle. + + +It is impossible to sleep with a ghost orgy going on in the next room, so you slip under the covers for some fun of your own. You are so deep in your geriatric fantasies, that you fail to notice a small draft extinguish the candle. + + +The bedroom door bursts open. You throw off the covers expecting a ghost, but it is only the kind old woman. "I warned you not to let it go out," she cackles. Her mouth opens wide, and then wider, and wider still, like a snake deep-throating a rat. Smoke like apparitions crawl from her gullet and float towards you. They envelop you and drag you towards her waiting jaws... + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The forest path eventually leads you to a quaint cottage. A centaur stands out front, raking leaves. The centaur stops raking as you approach. "Good morning traveler, will you help me tend my garden?" asks the centaur. "In exchange I shall give you my daughter's hand in marriage." + + +A deal like that is too good to pass up, but how would that even work, you wonder. Perhaps there a special stool or something. You are struggling for a polite way to ask when his daughter trots from the cottage. Her beauty rivals that of Princes Marmalade. She bashfully plays with her long golden braid, and paws the ground playfully with her silver hoof. + + +It would be impolite to turn down his offer, but you are on a quest. The centaur knows much about quests and the Enchanted Forest, perhaps he can help with your journey. + + + +> Ask about unicorn blood +"Gross! I can't believe you drank that!" laughs the centaur. "Classic Unicorn. A joker until the end. That reminds me of the time he and I snuck into the waterfall and stole the mermaids' Swallow Stone. We said we wouldn't give it back until they had each... well this isn't a story to tell in front of my daughter. You should probably go brush your teeth. Any other questions?"<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Snap! The new string breaks under the strain, slashing open your cheek. Your arrow does a lazy summersault before landing at your feet. + + +"The Marques is the winner!" declares the herald. + + +That filthy cad, he tricked you! He knew the string would break. You brandish your bow like a club and charge the Marques, but by now the tourney field is overrun with spectators and you cannot reach him through the press. For a moment your eyes catch those of the Princess and she gives you a plaintive look before her and the Marques are carried away. + + +Some hours later you sit at the Dwarf's stall, attempting to drink away your sorrows. You rub the fresh scar on your face, swearing revenge. + + +There is a tap on your shoulder. You turn to find a mysterious hooded figure behind you. "A gift," she says, "from the Princess, for her true champion. Please help her before she is forced to marry." She hands you a bundle, and disappears into the night. Could it be true? Does the Princess really need your help? + + +A small bone harp without any strings is wrapped with in the bundle. What the hell are you supposed to do with this? Sing your sorrows? You ask the dwarf how much beer the harp will buy, hopefully enough to give you alcohol poisoning. + + +"You drunk fool! That's no ordinary harp," she shouts, "it's the Harp of Dreams! If you string this harp with the mane of a unicorn and sing the Song of Wishes your greatest wish will come true." + + +That makes sense. + + +"Take this seed" says the dwarf, handing you a small pearl. "The tree which grows from it is the Unicorn's favorite food. Plant it in the Enchanted Forest and he will come to feast upon it." +> I said give me more ale! +You awaken in a pool of vomit on the floor of a dark cave. Your head hurts so badly that even the faint light is unbearable. Where are you? What did you do last night? Why is it so cold? + + +You search yourself and your surroundings for clues. You find a severed horse leg tied around your neck, your apron pocket is stuffed with birdseed, your pants are missing and you might be wearing lipstick, but you can't be sure. If you ever find your way out of this cave you're going to find that dwarf and shake her hand, she makes damn good beer. + + +Your thoughts are interrupted by a voice echoing from the far reaches of the cave: "Finger puppets. Finger puppets." Although it is faint, it is clearly not human. + + +"Finger puppets. Finger puppets!" + + +The voice grows louder. Something is coming and you need to escape. + + +"Finger puppets!" + + +In the distance you can see a dim light. + + +"Finger puppets!" +> Run for the light +The light grows as you run towards it. Behind you the shouts have become a frantic wale; "Finger puppets! Finger puppets!" It is not just a light at the end of the tunnel, it's a hole! You can see the sky beyond, but the voice is right behind you now. + + +You leap for the opening, but it is too small, and you get stuck halfway through. Something grabs you. You kick and struggle but you feel yourself slipping backwards... + + +"FINGER PUPPETS!" + + +The ground gives way beneath you and you tumble out into the open sky. You land with a splash in a bog. High above, a giant hand retracts into the gaping cave mouth, holding the severed horse leg. + + +The world around you is not the one you left. You are at the base of a mountain surrounded by an endless jungle. Bone spires reach thousands of feet into a blood red sky. You have come to the land of dragons. Just how much did you drink last night? + + + + +The End + + +I'm sorry, did you want to battle dragons? When I was a kid I wanted a puppy, but I didn't get it. Life is disappointment. Learn to handle your ale. + + +You've found an H. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You awaken in a pool of vomit on the floor of a dark cave. Your head hurts so badly that even the faint light is unbearable. Where are you? What did you do last night? Why is it so cold? + + +You search yourself and your surroundings for clues. You find a severed horse leg tied around your neck, your apron pocket is stuffed with birdseed, your pants are missing and you might be wearing lipstick, but you can't be sure. If you ever find your way out of this cave you're going to find that dwarf and shake her hand, she makes damn good beer. + + +Your thoughts are interrupted by a voice echoing from the far reaches of the cave: "Finger puppets. Finger puppets." Although it is faint, it is clearly not human. + + +"Finger puppets. Finger puppets!" + + +The voice grows louder. Something is coming and you need to escape. + + +"Finger puppets!" + + +In the distance you can see a dim light. + + +"Finger puppets!" +> Stand and fight +Bravely you brandish the severed horse leg. "Finger puppets!" The voice is so close now that you can hear the shuffling of giant feet. A shadow falls across you... + + +A hideous giant stands in the mouth of the tunnel. Its shrunken, rotting, head scrapes the ceiling high above you. Its immense belly drags along the floor between his legs like a field plow. Most terrifying of all, a corpse covers each of its grotesquely long fingers; every finger but one. The corpse arms dances about as it reaches for you... + + +"FINGER PUPPETS!" + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You milk the cow while dreaming of Bessa's heaving udders. You are in the shed for much longer than it takes to milk a cow. + + +You heft the pail and walk back to the house. The Milkman has slipped back into his stupor. You can hear him mumble something about the thatcher's boy and soft hands. There is really no need to pay him. He probably won't even remember you've been here. Screw the Milkman and screw the Baker! It's the day of the fair, you have a copper in your pocket, and you're going to enjoy yourself! You drink deep from the milk bucket before casting it away. You are the master of your own destiny! + + +-- + + +The fair is everything you had hoped. Highborn ladies and goodly knights recite poetry outside of colorful silk pavilions. Naked urchins chase each other about playing tag and brown-fingers, while drunken minstrels belt green sleeves at the top of their lungs. Vendors call their wares from various carts and stands. + + +A fat pastry chef with a pox-marked face yells "Hot pies! Two coppers!" while a dwarf cries her ale. You are hungry but cannot afford a pie. The Dwarf, however, will let you drink yourself stupid for a copper. + + +You look around the crowd hoping to catch a glimpse of the Princess. You spy her in the royal box above the tourney field, framed by a pair of guards who look more jailor than escorts. For one moment your eyes meet and she smiles. + + +A herald cries out below her. "Gather all yee who would compete in the tourney of archery" he proclaims. "To the winner shall be awarded a golden bow and the hand of the beautiful Princess Marmalade. Any man of Mystigar may enter for a single copper." + + +A copper for a chance to marry the Princess? What luck! +> Steal a pie +The pie is delicious.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> "Hello?" you call as you knock on the Milkman's door. There is no reply but the door is open, so you step inside. + + +"Great Gods put out that light and stop all this hollerrin'. Can't a man rest his achin' head?" the Milkman says from his bed. He pulls the covers over his head, spilling several clays jars to the floor. He has had a long night of drinking with the thatcher's boys. "If you want milk you'll have to get it yourself. Bessa's gone to the fair and I sure as hell ain't doing it in my condition." Just your luck, both the spirits and Bessa are gone. + + +You can hear the cow lowing from the shed, begging to be milked. You grab a pail and sit down on the milking bench. +> Tickle her udder +The cow is not amused. The last thing you ever see is cloven hoof flying towards your face with surprising speed. Bessa eventually finds your broken body sprawled in a heap of cow dung. Never tickle the udder. + + + + +You've Died... + + +Hold on! Wait a minute. Mystigar is a dangerous place. You need to be more careful. You can't go around grabbing whatever you please. This is your only warning. Now, go be a good boy and milk the cow.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Today is the day of the fair! + + +The sun is not even fully up, but already your chores are done. The oven is lit, the dough kneaded, the bread pricked, the floor swept, and the pots scrubbed. You even had a chance to chop a little morning-wood, if you know what I mean. Surely now your master will let you spend the rest of the day at the fair. You have thought of nothing else since it was first announced. + + +You are busy day dreaming about Princess Marmalade, again, when a shout comes down from the loft; "Boy!" Your cantankerous master is finally awake. The ladder strains under his bulk as he climbs down to the kitchen. "Get off your ass, boy, and warm the ovens," he says. + + +"Master, the ovens are already warm. All of my chores are done. I thought perhaps I could go to the fair?" you reply. + + +A meaty hand strikes your face. "The fair! The fair's for minstrels and dandies. Which one are you, boy? Or did you fancy you'd win the tourney and marry the Princess?" he says, doubling over with laughter. "Long live King Baker's Boy! Forget that lot and go fetch me some milk." + + +He hands you a copper and sends you out the door with another smack. + + +"And if I find out you've gone to the fair, boy, I'll chain your face to the oven!" + + +"Bastard," you curse under your breath while rubbing your swollen lip. One of these days you will chain his fat face to the oven. You head towards the Milkman's stand. He always has a bottle of spirits to share with the young apprentice boys, and his daughter Bessa has the biggest milk jugs you've ever seen. + + +You reach his stand but no one's there. + + + +> Screw this, go to the fair +Screw the Milkman and screw the Baker! It's the day of the fair. You have a copper in your pocket, and you're going to enjoy yourself! You head off down the street with a jump in your step. + + +Main Street is unusually crowded this morning. It seems you were not the only one who got an early start. You push your way into the throng and fall in step behind three farmers, who appear well past drunk despite the hour. They sing ribald songs like "Two Old Dogs" and "The Wobbly Widow" as they stumble down the street together. + + +You are about to join in on the chorus of "The Innkeeper's Daughter" when a sign catches your eye. It reads: "The Broken Bodice." A woman with a generous supply of cleavage calls to you from the doorway. "Hey there baker's boy, got time for a tumble?" +> Go to the brothel +The inside of The Broken Bodice is dim and moist. The decor is a garish mixture of red velvet, gold tassels, and over sized pillows. An overwhelming aura of perfume chokes your nostrils, but it cannot cover the stench of wet crackers. Beautiful women lounge about the room in various stages of undress, doting on eager patrons. Most of the patrons are wealthy old men, some so ancient they probably jizz dust. + + +The woman with the rolling hills stuffed into her corset is the madame of this fine establishment. "Oooh I bet this is your first time" she coos. "Leave it to my girls to make a man of a baker's boy." + + +You hand her your copper and ask for one of the pretty girls. She tucks the penny into her cleavage and scoffs. "A copper ain't gonna buy you no princess, but I think we can find some dough for you to prick." +> Sleep with Grizzela +The madame escorts you to a dark room in the farthest recesses of the brothel. "Good luck" she says, closing the door behind you. You hear a bolt slam down. + + +A baritone voice calls to you from the shadows, "Ooo I love me a young one." + + +A light stubble covers Grizzela's square jaw, and a velvet scarf hides the lump in 'her' neck. "Don't be scared sugar. I'm gonna show you things you've only dreamed of." + + +Her embrace is like iron. +> Tickle her udder +You grab something that looks like an udder and tug with all your might. Grizzela's bald spot glows bright red as she lets out a guttural moan. Your efforts are rewarded by a serving of heavy cream. + + +She collapses on the straw, gasping for breath. In her fifty-five years as a whore no one has ever given her so much pleasure. + + +When the madame finds out what you've done, she hands you a bag of silver and insists that you work for her. You try to decline, but Grizzela's iron grip brooks no arguments. It's not the life you imagined, but the money is good. Men travel from the far corners of the kingdom to lie with the supple Baker's Boy. + + + + +The End + + +This is not what I had in mind. When I said you were destined to be a king, I didn't mean king of the whores. Perhaps you should try again... + + +You've found a U. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The madame escorts you to a dark room in the farthest recesses of the brothel. "Good luck" she says, closing the door behind you. You hear a bolt slam down. + + +A baritone voice calls to you from the shadows, "Ooo I love me a young one." + + +A light stubble covers Grizzela's square jaw, and a velvet scarf hides the lump in 'her' neck. "Don't be scared sugar. I'm gonna show you things you've only dreamed of." + + +Her embrace is like iron. +> Let her try something called the "Iron Unicorn" +With trepid anticipation you give yourself up to her. At first the iron is cold, and the leather chafes your skin, but soon you are overcome with unbridled pleasure. You cry out in delight, but the ecstasy of your first prostate orgasm is cut short by an awful tearing sound. + + +"Not again," Grizella says in despair, "I just can't stand the sight of so much blood." + + + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The inside of The Broken Bodice is dim and moist. The decor is a garish mixture of red velvet, gold tassels, and over sized pillows. An overwhelming aura of perfume chokes your nostrils, but it cannot cover the stench of wet crackers. Beautiful women lounge about the room in various stages of undress, doting on eager patrons. Most of the patrons are wealthy old men, some so ancient they probably jizz dust. + + +The woman with the rolling hills stuffed into her corset is the madame of this fine establishment. "Oooh I bet this is your first time" she coos. "Leave it to my girls to make a man of a baker's boy." + + +You hand her your copper and ask for one of the pretty girls. She tucks the penny into her cleavage and scoffs. "A copper ain't gonna buy you no princess, but I think we can find some dough for you to prick." +> Sleep with Satin Jane +The madame escorts you to a dark room filled with scented candles. "Have fun," she says before closing the door. + + +You find Satin Jane laying seductively on a straw mattress, wrapped in a red blanket. Her skin is like the palest milk and her hair is a brilliant cinnamon. She spreads her chalk white legs revealing that the rushes match the tapestries. Her beautifully wide face spreads in a gap tooth smile. The Princess and Bessa are forgotten. You burry your face in her pillowy breasts and knead her like the bread dough. + + +Three minutes later you're back on the street, grinning like a fool. Huzzah! A copper well spent. + + +You step into an alley to relieve yourself, but a horrible burning sensation tears across your shriveled member. Black spots spread from your crotch and crawl up your chest. The pain is blinding and you collapse into the filthy gutter. If only you had put a helm on your soldier! + + +You've Died<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The inside of The Broken Bodice is dim and moist. The decor is a garish mixture of red velvet, gold tassels, and over sized pillows. An overwhelming aura of perfume chokes your nostrils, but it cannot cover the stench of wet crackers. Beautiful women lounge about the room in various stages of undress, doting on eager patrons. Most of the patrons are wealthy old men, some so ancient they probably jizz dust. + + +The woman with the rolling hills stuffed into her corset is the madame of this fine establishment. "Oooh I bet this is your first time" she coos. "Leave it to my girls to make a man of a baker's boy." + + +You hand her your copper and ask for one of the pretty girls. She tucks the penny into her cleavage and scoffs. "A copper ain't gonna buy you no princess, but I think we can find some dough for you to prick." +> Sleep with Bessa +You excitedly follow her down the back hall and out into the yard behind the building. Could it really be Bessa, the Milkman's daughter? The same Bessa you have spent years drooling over at the market each morning? Bessa with the thunderous skin bags, so wondrous the gods cried they day they made them? + + +"No refunds," the Madame says as she closes the door and locks it behind you. + + +There, chained in the middle of the yard, stands Bessa. This Bessa is not the Milkman's daughter, but an old she goat who looks a little worse for ware. The goat wiggles her backside at you and flexes her mutton-button flirtatiously. You are tempted, but no. There is a line even you will not cross. + + +That dirty old swamp-donkey swindled you out of your copper, but you have an idea to pay the Madame back. A talented goat like this is worth a pretty penny and you know just where to sell her. You untie Bessa and lead her through the gate and out of the yard. + + +-- + + +The wharf is bustling with crusty old sailors loading cargo onto a galley. Bessa bleats to the men and excitedly dribbles a few drops of milk. You find the ship's steward and offer to sell him the goat. "Isn't she a site t' raise your mizzenmast," he says. "She'll keep the men happy on a long voyage. I'll give ya one copper for her." +> Take the copper and go to the fair +The fair is everything you had hoped. Highborn ladies and goodly knights recite poetry outside of colorful silk pavilions. Naked urchins chase each other about, playing tag and brown-fingers, while drunken minstrels belt green sleeves at the top of their lungs. + + +Vendors call their wares from various carts and stands. A fat pastry chef with a pox-marked face yells "Hot pies! Two coppers!" while a dwarf cries her ale. You are hungry, but cannot afford a pie. The dwarf, however, will let you drink yourself stupid for a copper. + + +You spy the princess in the royal box above the tourney field. She is framed by a pair of guards who look more jailor than escorts. For one moment your eyes meet and she smiles. + + +Below her a herald speaks. "Gather all yee who would compete in the tourney of archery" he proclaims. "To the winner shall be awarded a golden bow and the hand of the beautiful Princess Marmalade. Any man of Mystigar may enter for a single copper." + + +A copper for a chance to marry the princess? What luck!<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You excitedly follow her down the back hall and out into the yard behind the building. Could it really be Bessa, the Milkman's daughter? The same Bessa you have spent years drooling over at the market each morning? Bessa with the thunderous skin bags, so wondrous the gods cried they day they made them? + + +"No refunds," the Madame says as she closes the door and locks it behind you. + + +There, chained in the middle of the yard, stands Bessa. This Bessa is not the Milkman's daughter, but an old she goat who looks a little worse for ware. The goat wiggles her backside at you and flexes her mutton-button flirtatiously. You are tempted, but no. There is a line even you will not cross. + + +That dirty old swamp-donkey swindled you out of your copper, but you have an idea to pay the Madame back. A talented goat like this is worth a pretty penny and you know just where to sell her. You untie Bessa and lead her through the gate and out of the yard. + + +-- + + +The wharf is bustling with crusty old sailors loading cargo onto a galley. Bessa bleats to the men and excitedly dribbles a few drops of milk. You find the ship's steward and offer to sell him the goat. "Isn't she a site t' raise your mizzenmast," he says. "She'll keep the men happy on a long voyage. I'll give ya one copper for her." +> Demand more money +"Ya drive a hard bargain, but a gal like that is worth more'n a copper. Climb aboard and I'll fetch ya a silver piece," the Steward says. You turn to mount the gangplank when something heavy strikes the back of your head and the world goes dark. + + +-- + + +You awaken in the depths of the galley, far out to sea. You are chained to an oar between two large, swarthy galley slaves. They have been here a long time. "Middle seat is bad luck, little boy. You row twice as much," the slave to your left laughs in broken English. The slave to you right smiles and spits in your hair. Drums pound and you begin to row. + + +All day you pull the galley oar without rest, and all night you row your bench mates while they take turns spitting on you. In the brief moments before dawn when you are allowed to sleep, you dream of storms and shipwrecks. + + + + +The End + + +It seems it is the Steward who drives a hard bargain. Throw your back into it, land lubber, or you'll end up with the goat. + + +You've found an S. Discover more letters to solve the Legendary Riddle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> The Elken’s massive hoof slams into the snow-coated ground. The tired beast lets out a massive snort. You lean forward in the saddle and scratch just behind its antlers. + + + “Good beast,” you murmur. You give it a kiss, right in its furry mane. “Not too further boy, promise.” + + + The beast comes to a stop. It stands on the edge of the snowy, switchback trail that you’d been following for weeks. Beyond mountain, lies nothing but thick, snow-covered forest. You let out a sigh of relief. You’ve found the spring hunting grounds. + + + You’ve ridden ahead of the rest of the tribe, searching for this very forest. While they make the difficult trek over the mountain (exacerbated by the presence of women, children, and the elderly), you’ve ridden ahead in search for a camp sight for the tribe. + + + You drive your heels into its sides, and the beast begins to carefully plod down the mountainside. It stops only once, to leave a steaming pile of manure in the snow. + + + You wince as you hop out of the saddle, and the drop to the ground sends a jolt through your body. Taking a moment, you briefly insure that your spear and satchel of provisions are still on your back. Satisfied, you drop the reigns over the Elken’s head, and lead him into the forest… + + +*** + + + The clearing is in the same spot it's in every year. You know from experience that it can easily house the entire tribe and their huts; the Gods certainly know that this unusually harsh winter has not grown the tribe. + + + It takes a hours to find dry wood for the signal pyre. Eventually, you assemble a pyramid of dead wood and dry brush and set it ablaze with your flint and knife. The flames lick greedily at the cold winter air, and a thick, black plume of smoke reaches up in to the sky. +> The tribe arrives + On the fifth day, the tribe arrives. Being the advance scout, you have the honour of setting your tent up first. You unrolled the furs that you stored on the Elken’s back, and strung them over a framework of thick branches. The tent will be able to house five or six of your tribe, easily. You leave a hole at the top to let the smoke from the life-saving fire out. + + + You’re standing in the middle of the clearing, cleaning the Elken with a coarse horsehair brush when the rest of your tribe approaches. + + + Some are walking, some are riding Elken. Mothers clutch their babes to their breasts, while fathers look cautiously to the woods; Fell Bears and wolf-packs have been known to hunt these woods. Disturbingly, gangs of legionnaires have also been stalking the woods. Those taken are presumably fed to whatever foreign gods lord over the Marble City. + + + Caelan, the most elderly man of the tribe, and the chieftain since before you were born, spots you immediately. A youthful grin splits open his aged face. He shivers in the cold, and lets out a cloud of smoke from his mouth, which rapidly dissipates in the frigid winter air. The old man wraps his fur cloak around him. + + + “You’ve done well by the tribe,” he says, as he approaches, “Your father would be proud.” + + + You dip your head in gratitude. + + + He presses his middle, index, and ring fingers into your forehead. “I release you from your duties as Torchbearer.” + + + “It’s good to see you, Caelan.” you say as you press your forehead into his — a salute as old as time. + + + “You as well, my boy.” + + + “How was the journey?” + + + “It was hard. The old paths were snowier than usual, there were some who thought you’d died, and we wouldn’t have a camp-sight to come to.” + + + “Still alive,” you say with a smile. + + + “And I’m glad to see it. Still, I shouldn’t complain too much about the journey. We only lost one, this year.” + + + “Who was that?” + + + “Waiola. Tacitus’ newborn daughter. The cold was too much for her.” + + + “That’s a shame. His first child, yeah?” + + + He nods, and gives you a wan smile. “He’s been taking it hard. When you see him around, be kind to him and his wife.” + + + You fall silent for a moment. Before you can speak, another approaches. Wrapped in furs with a bow strung across her back. She’s missing her left ear, and there are scars running from the tips of her mouth up her cheek by a few inches. Even still, she’s wearing a broad smile across her face. + + + “You’re the Torchbearer?” she asks jovially. + + + You glance at Caelan in confusion. + + + “This is Enya. She’s a tribe-less we picked up on the journey; didn’t feel right to abandon her.” + + + “It wouldn’t have been,” you agree, before turning back to Enya and extending your hand. She takes it; her grip is firm. + + + She purses her lips and nods as you shake hands. “I’m glad you feel that way.” + + + You snort. + + + “I’m fucking tired,” Caelan says frankly, “we should see to setting up those tents.” + + + And so you do, for the rest of the day. All of the tribe works together erecting the massive tents that will be their home for the coming months. Thick frameworks are nailed in place, and cured hides are set on the floor so as to avoid sleeping on the snow. Furs are strung from the oak frameworks to trap in heat and act as walls. Firepits in the centres are also constructed, for cooking and boiling water. You work with remarkable efficiency; at the end of the day, your campground resembles a tiny, bustling village. +> A morning hunt + It’s before dawn. Tired of the rations brought by the tribe, you’ve decided to bring down the first hunt of the season. You grab your bow, arrows, spear, and satchel, and step outside the warmth and pressed-together bodies of the communal tent. + + + You see Enya outside the tent. She’s sitting cross-legged on a large rock, scraping a piece of flint over a bone knife. + + + “Morning,” you say. You eye her with a slight amount of caution. + + + She returns the greeting, not looking up from the knife. + + + “Planning on going out for a hunt?” you ask. + + + “Aye. Gonna bring down the first buck of the season, I’d reckon.” + + + You raise your eyebrows. “I think you should reckon something else, because I’m about to bring down the first buck of the season.” + + + She snorts, and stands up. “Sounds like we have a competition on our hands, then.” +> Hunt alone + “And a one-sided competition, at that,” you say with a sneer as you lift your weapons off the ground and set off into the forest. You privately savour the look of frustration on the newcomer’s face as you stalk off into the woods. + + + All thoughts of competition are lost once you enter the woods, however. You become one with the forest, once more; a spectre, silently moving over roots, branches and patches of grass. A finder of secret paths and animal tracks. + + + Perhaps you’re there for minutes. Perhaps you’re there for hours, days, or weeks. Time is ephemeral and meaningless when you’re in the forest. Soon, you find a handsome buck; skittish, along with all of its kind. + + + Over hours, you learn the animal’s personality. He’s cautious and smart, and will be a challenge to bring down. You don’t even knock an arrow until your second encounter with him. Finally, on the fourth meeting, you manage to creep up on him unawares. + + + You see his hot breath evaporating in the winter air. You become aware of his place relative to yours on the food chain. You are hunter, and he is prey; this is the way things ought to be. + + + You let go of the bowstring. + + + The arrow flies true, and the bolt tears right through the deer’s vitals. It stumbles for a few paces, before falling face-first into the snow. A crimson puddle seeps out from under him as he breathes his last. + + + You feel a twinge of guilt as you approach him. You slit the deer’s throat for good measure, causing it to leak even more blood out onto the snow. You tie a thick rope around its neck and antlers, and then begin the difficult task of dragging it back to camp… +> Return to camp + You smell smoke long before you reach the camp. Without thinking of it, you drop the deer in the snow; if this is a false alarm, you can come back for it later. Then, you sprint off towards the camp. + + + Your intuition is correct. The camp is in ruins. Three out of the four communal tents have been razed to the ground, and the fourth is smouldering. Bodies litter the ground; killed indiscriminately. Women, children, infants, and a few men all lie in puddles of their own blood. + + + You see Tacitus lying spread-eagled in the snow. It would appear someone has taken pity on his recent misfortunes, and has taken it upon themselves to give him a bright-red smile, just below the chin. + + + Without thinking, you draw your bow and loose an arrow. The arrow embeds itself in the tower-shield of a legionnaire. + + + He shouts something in a language unbeknownst to you, summoning three of his comrades out from the burning tent; one is dragging a half-naked woman along with him. + + + He draws his shortsword and begins to charge towards you. You drop your bow in the sand, and withdraw your spear. + + + Your first thrust is deflected by the shortsword; he retaliates by pushing forward with his oversized shield, sending you scrambling through the snow. You narrowly dodge an overhead swipe from his blade. + + + Seizing an apparent opportunity, you leap to the left, and stab wildly at him with your spear; the blow strikes true, but your stone spear tip uselessly slides off his plated chest armour. You look on his face and see a cruel sneer. + + + With breathtaking speed, he dashes forward and kicks you square in the chest. The blow sends you reeling, and knocks the air clean out of your lungs. You try to regain your footing as he drops his shield and charges at you. + + + The two of you tumble to the snow. You fling your spear aside as you fall. He grabs your neck in one of his gauntleted hands, and begins to crush your throat in an iron grip. + + + Panic grips your world as you frantically look around for options. Your hand closes around your hunting knife. As black spots dance across your vision, you notice something; his armour only extends halfway up his arm, and the rest is covered merely by fur. You seize the initiative and shove the dagger into his exposed forearm. He curses as blood gushes out from the wound, and releases your neck. + + + You greedily inhale as much air as you can. The legionnaire punches you in the face, and his metal knuckles easily break your nose. Blood pours down your face and into your mouth. He punches you again, knocking a tooth down your mouth. + + + Time slows to a halt. His fists glance off your face, mangling it into a bloody ruin. You see your own clouds of hot breath seeping out into the air like a gushing wound. The legionnaires eyes narrow inside his helmet, and a cruel smile splits his face from end to end. + + + Before you’re submerged in darkness, he speaks two words in your language: + + + “Elf scum.” +> Taken as a slave + You can’t stop throwing up. Even the nutrition-less gruel they serve the slaves is too much for you to handle. As the procession of soldiers and slaves travels South, you leave pools of vomit as a trail. + + + The conditions are harsh. Every day at dawn, you’re loaded into a wagon with a few dozen other slaves. You ride this way for fourteen hours, before a guard distributes furs to wrap yourselves in for the night. You’re given six hours to sleep. When you’re woken, you are let out to relieve yourself and collect water for an hour; then, it’s back to the cart. + + + This is exacerbated by the fact that you are having a hard time remembering your own name. There are other elves on the cart, some of whom you feel like you should recognize; but you find yourself unable to respond to their feeble attempts at conversation. Nothing more than a mewl escapes. You feel heavy and trapped in your own body. + + + On the fourth day of your imprisonment, a legionnaire takes notice and notifies the Centurion. You dimly remember him as the man who broke your head open and let your memories spill out. + + + He approaches. This time, his helmet’s off. If you squint against the painful light, you can see his square jaw, his scowling features, and the scar running the length of his right cheek. + + + “Walk, can this one?” his mastery of your tongue leaves something to be desired. + + + You finish vomiting, and wipe your cheeks. You stagger backwards, and shake your head. He looks disgusted. You barely have time to flinch before he kicks you in the chest, bowling you over in the snow. + + + “Get up.” + + + You comply. He shoves you. The force of the blow sends you sprawling again. You moan feebly. + + + “Get up.” + + + You stagger to your feet once more. He kicks your leg out from under you, laughing as he does it. You feel a forest-fire raging just beneath your skin. + + + “Get up.” +> Give up + He exchanges a fast salvo of words with another soldier, who nods affirmatively. The Centurion withdraws his shortsword, and slits your throat. A slurred plea for mercy dies in your throat, as your lifeblood seeps out into the snow, and steam rises from your wound.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> You can’t stop throwing up. Even the nutrition-less gruel they serve the slaves is too much for you to handle. As the procession of soldiers and slaves travels South, you leave pools of vomit as a trail. + + + The conditions are harsh. Every day at dawn, you’re loaded into a wagon with a few dozen other slaves. You ride this way for fourteen hours, before a guard distributes furs to wrap yourselves in for the night. You’re given six hours to sleep. When you’re woken, you are let out to relieve yourself and collect water for an hour; then, it’s back to the cart. + + + This is exacerbated by the fact that you are having a hard time remembering your own name. There are other elves on the cart, some of whom you feel like you should recognize; but you find yourself unable to respond to their feeble attempts at conversation. Nothing more than a mewl escapes. You feel heavy and trapped in your own body. + + + On the fourth day of your imprisonment, a legionnaire takes notice and notifies the Centurion. You dimly remember him as the man who broke your head open and let your memories spill out. + + + He approaches. This time, his helmet’s off. If you squint against the painful light, you can see his square jaw, his scowling features, and the scar running the length of his right cheek. + + + “Walk, can this one?” his mastery of your tongue leaves something to be desired. + + + You finish vomiting, and wipe your cheeks. You stagger backwards, and shake your head. He looks disgusted. You barely have time to flinch before he kicks you in the chest, bowling you over in the snow. + + + “Get up.” + + + You comply. He shoves you. The force of the blow sends you sprawling again. You moan feebly. + + + “Get up.” + + + You stagger to your feet once more. He kicks your leg out from under you, laughing as he does it. You feel a forest-fire raging just beneath your skin. + + + “Get up.” +> Stand up + He gives you an almost imperceptible nod. You stagger back to the cart, and climb on. Your arms nearly give out as you do so. Later that night, as you moan softly in an agonized haze, the cart rolls to a halt. The other prisoners look about in confusion, and you wince as the stop causes a spike of pain behind your right eye. + + + A soldier steps on, and roughly grabs you by the arm. He leads you out of the cart. By the soldier’s torches, you can see into the woods aways. This is farther South than anyone you know has ever been; you’re not even sure what tribes have the right to hunt here. + + + You fall to your knees, and begin to retch loudly. At this point, there’s no more food or water for you to regurgitate. The legionnaire waits for you to finish, before dragging you back to your feet. + + + You are half-guided, half-dragged to a clearing in the woods. In the centre of the clearing is a massive stump, where a colossal oak might once have stood. A moonbeam illuminates the stump. + + + Standing next to the stump are the Centurion, and someone you’ve never seen before. He’s older than anyone else in the procession, and dressed in civilian’s clothes. He’s holding a satchel with tools poking out of it; a bottle of something mysterious, a few hammers, a saw, and a wickedly sharp-looking knife. + + + Him and the Centurion have a brief, conversation. The old man sounds irritating. + + + The Centurion clears his throat. “I beat… too hard. Doctor fix this. You fight.” + + + You nod, and find that the gesture causes a dagger-sharp pain in your head and spine. + + + The doctor pulls the bottle out of his flask, and passes it to you. + + + “Two sips,” the Centurion says tersely, “or it kill.” + + + You take the allotted two sips. A few minutes pass, and you feel whatever medicine is inside the flask begin to take effect. A sudden, irresistible drowsiness comes over you, and you slump forward. You’re only dimly aware of the doctor putting your head on the stump, and withdrawing a small hammer from his belt… +> Recovery + You’re dreaming a dark dream, full of clawed things and concealed blades. You can smell smoke nearby. You can hear a beast growling in a foreign tongue, inches behind you. You find that you cannot move. The beast’s tongue slithers into your head, worming past your skull and into your grey matter with ease. You can feel its tongue re-arranging your mind, twisting your memories and thoughts. You let out a silent scream as its tongue splits in twain, and begins to worm out your eyeballs… + + + + + *** + + + You awaken on a remarkably comfortable bed, wrapped in an actual blanket; a luxury you’ve never known. You open your eyes, and wince as light pours into them. For the first time in a few days, you remember your own name. You also realize what is going to happen to you. + + + You’re to be taken as a slave, and fed to the Foreign Gods. You’ve heard tales of them whispered around the campfire; bloodthirsty war gods and hedonistic fiends, that can only be satisfied when the blood of innocents are shed on their altars, which stretch all the way up into the heavens. Sometimes, the Foreign Gods even make men fight one another for their sick amusement. + + + Your cry of alarm dies in your throat. You find that you’re still quite weak. Your feeble hands strain against the shackles around your arms — that’s new. You don’t recall being shackled. + + + You take a moment to collect yourself, and take in your surroundings. You are in a covered cart, which is a nice change from the prisoner’s wagon that you found yourself in earlier. You are now in a covered cabin, which you assume is trailing behind one of the teams of horses. + + + There’s a piece of fabric hanging on the wall with a draft coming through it. Through it, comes the eternally-glowering face of the Centurion. Behind him is an elf with one ear and a scarred mouth. + + + “This one teach,” the Centurion declares. + + + “Teach what?” you speak the first words since your capture. + + + “Language.” + + + “I’m going to teach you their language. It’s important, for what comes next,” she adds. + + + “And what does come next?” you groggily wipe the sleep-crust from your eyes. + + + “The rest of the journey, first of all. Then, you’re going to fight.” + + + “Who am I going to fight?” + + + “Whoever you’re told. He’s going to claim you as his personal slave, and put you to work in the fighting pits.” + + + “Fuck.” + + + Enya laughs darkly. +> Arrival at the city + On the fourth week of your journey, the city of Florentia Augusta appears on the horizon. It’s marble structures and statues stretch into the sky; compared to the meagre tents and wooden cabins of your people, it’s an impossibility; a living, breathing paradox, that challenges your worldview purely by virtue of its existence. + + + Enya, meanwhile, has partially immersed you into the esoteric world of the Imperial tongue. In a month, you’ve learned more tenses, verb conjugations, and gendered nouns (of which there are three) than you’d ever care to learn. It feels like a brutal tongue, with harsh, almost mathematical requirements that dictate the laws of speech. + + + You’ve grown familiar with a few of the soldiers. Titus wants to marry a baker’s daughter on his return to the Marble City. Magnus looks forward to returning to his family’s ancestral home, to help with the planting season, now that the bitter winter has finally ended. + + + You sit in the cramped, but more comfortable cart that you first awoke in after your surgery. By virtue of being your tutor, Enya has also been given the privilege of staying in the cart, along with a pile of dusty grammatical scrolls. + + + The procession of slaves and soldiers travels through rows upon rows of wealthy farmers’ land, moving forward on the viae publicae; the famously well-constructed system of public roads that connect the Imperium from end to end, from the frozen North, all the way down to the never-ending forest of the Frontier. + + + Surprisingly, the procession of carts and infantry makes a left-turn, instead of heading directly to the city. + + + “Why are we turning?” you ask of Enya, cautiously trying your new language. + + + “We’re rejoining the Legion.” she says darkly. + + + “You are concerned by this.” a flat statement, but meant as a question. Your linguistic skills will improve, with time. + + + “I am. The last time I joined a Legion, I lost an ear, and my smile got bigger than it ought to be.” + + + You dip your head in understanding. “I think we’ve had enough language lessons for the day, yeah?” you say after a moment of contemplation. + + + “You’re not going to be doing much talking.” + + + *** + + + Enya leans into you to peer out the small, barred window on your side of the cart. She smells like sweat and fear. + + + “Fuck,” she breathes. + + + “What are you seeing out there?” + + + “We’ve rejoined the legion. There are so many…” + + + “So many what?” + + + “So many slaves. Thousands of carts, looks like.” + + + You try not to think about what kind of life all these people are heading into. “Mostly elves?” + + + “Some. Northmen, too. A couple of orcs, too; by the gods, I didn’t even think that orcs still existed.” + + + “What’s an orc?” You don’t realize it, but you’ve both lapsed back into your mother tongue. + + + “I’ll tell you later.” + + + She leans back from the window, apparently satisfied with her surveillance. Suddenly, the cart rolls to a halt. You look out the window, and see an impromptu military camp; tents being rapidly erected, carts being parked, and hundreds of men wearing the red-and-purple of the legion. Coloured banners with eagles, bulls and thunderbolts dot the horizon. + + + You lean back, and press your head against the wall. You close your eyes, for a moment. Your head still throbs. + + + “What happens now?” you ask, groaning as another wave of pain washes over your head. + + + “I expect we’ll be separated, now.” + + + “Why’s that?” + + + “They’re not going to have women fighting in the arena. That would be uncivilized.” + + + You chortle. Enya smiles. “Hey, thanks for teaching me some of this fucked up language.” + + + Her smile becomes a grin, albeit one tinged with sadness. Her scars stretch aways up her cheeks. “It’s been my pleasure.” + + + You reach forward in a handshake. She pushes your hand aside, and pulls you into a surprisingly strong hug. You pull back after a moment. You open your mouth for a second, and then close it; does anything really need to be said? + + + The cart rocks with the force of someone pounding on it with a gauntleted fist. + + + “Out!” declares the Centurion. You climb out first, and Enya follows behind you. You find yourselves in a grassy field, in the middle of a now-sprawling military encampment. “Have you taught him the language?” + + + “I have, sir,” Enya says, dipping her head down and sinking down low. + + + “Good,” he says, a small smile stretching across his face. He withdraws his sword and points to a line of slaves, off in the distance. “you’re no good as a brothel-girl… go join the labourers.” + + + She marches off without a protest. Enya throws a worried glance over her shoulder at you, before shuffling into the line and vanishing completely. + + + “She’ll be a servus publicus; but I’ve something special in mind for you.” + + + “And what might that be, sir?” + + + “She really did teach you.” the Centurion says with a bitter and humourless snort. + + + “All that could be taught in a month’s time.” the thought occurs to you that he could beat you to death at any time, and none would give you anything more than a passing glance. + + + “Shut your mouth unless you’re answering a question, or I’ll cut your fucking tongue out.” + + + You open your mouth in stunned silence. He narrows his eyes. You close your mouth. + + + “You’ll be my personal slave. Now, I saw you fight, elf; and you were fast. I like that. I’ve had a long and venerable career, and I’m thinking it’s time I retire and get rich. How would you like to make me rich?” + + + You frown. + + + “You’re allowed to answer that one.” + + + “I would like that very much, sir.” + + + “If you ever say something that sycophantic and pathetic again, I’ll nail you to a cross and let the eagles rip out your guts.” + + + A crestfallen look falls across your face. The Centurion laughs, then extends a hand. You tentatively shake it. + + + “My name is Regulus, and we’re going to make each other rich.” +> A gladiator + You bounce the training blade off the slave-boy’s skull. He falls into the sand like a marionette with its strings cut. You scramble into the sand to avoid a heavy wooden club, that buries itself in the ground where you were standing. + + + You snatch the shield from the boy’s unconscious fingers, and use it to ward off the next blow from the shield. You quickly look up at the burly man with the club, just in time to register his next overhand swing. You scramble to the left, and let him over-swing. While his momentum carries him forward, you slam the wooden sword into his kneecap. He screams in pain and falls forward. You drop the shield, and grip the wooden sword two-handed. You drive the point into the base of his skull, where his helmet doesn’t cover. You feel a satisfying crack as it drives into his spine. He sighs softly, and falls to the ground. + + + Bloody, wild-eyed and victorious, you toss the now-bloody training blade into the sand, laughing like a man possessed. + + + A beast of a man emerges from the wooden doors at the far side of the arena. He’s the largest man you’ve ever seen, easily; a dark-skinned giant, who could have stepped out of the sagas of your youth. You would expect a man like that to carry a sword, but he only carries a particularly large tablet. He’s always scratching something into it; from time to time, you wonder what it is he could be writing. + + + “The elf never fails to surprise me!” he declares to no one in particular. His voice is jovial and booming. + + + “I do my best, Horatius,” you say. A wave of exhaustion sweeps over you, as the adrenaline begins to seep away. + + + “I think you killed that one!” he says cheerfully, pointing to the club-wielder. He’s right; blood is pooling from the man’s eyes and mouth, and his eyes are rolled over into his head. + + + “I didn’t mean to —“ you begin quickly. He silences you with a wave of his colossal hand. + + + “He was weak. If he couldn’t see a strike that obvious coming, he deserved to die.” + + + You nod noncommittally. + + + “I need to talk to you about something, boy.” + + + “Aye?” + + + “You haven’t fought in any games yet, have you?” + + + “I haven’t.” + + + “I’d like to change that. How would you like to fight in the Fisherman’s Games?” + + + “Aren’t those for…” you search around for the right word. The mastery of this foreign tongue still eludes you, sometimes. “experienced fighters?” + + + “They’re for good fighters,” he says with a mischievous smile, “and you, my friend are definitely one of them.” + + + “This is an offer?” + + + He shakes his head. “Only in the polite sense of the word.” + + + “Then I guess I’ll do it.” +> A bath and a conversation + You enter your chambers. It’s a familiar room, by now. Twelve bedrolls to a row, four rows. You sit down in your designated bedroll, and let out a sigh of exhaustion. + + + “I hope you wash yourself before you fall asleep,” a familiar voice chides. + + + You turn to look at the voice, as its owner’s name eludes you temporarily. You look on the childish, perpetually-frightened face of Buchanan. “I’d expect that if I didn’t, you’d knife me in my sleep.” + + + “Why would I knife you, when you’ve got knives on your ears, friend?” he says with a wicked grin.” + + + “Fuck off,” you say with a snort. You pull off your sandals. Your tunic slides off after the sandals, carrying with it a flimsy set of scale armour that barely covers your chest. + + + “Maybe I will. But we’ve gotta chat, first.” + + + “What about?” undressed, you stand up and collect your armour. You jerk your head to the door. + + + He follows you out of the chamber and into the courtyard. For a slave pen, it’s fairly spacious. A marble bath occupies the centre of it. There’s a weapon rack on one of the walls. In one corner, there’s a small stall, accompanied by a pile of armour, attended by a one-armed slave. + + + “Someone told me you’re fighting in the Fisherman’s Games, friend.” Buchanan says with a wry smile. You deposit your clothing on the pile, and nod to the attendant. + + + “Who told you that?” you say as you walk to the centre of the courtyard. + + + “A reliable source. + + + “Was that as you were sucking his cock?” you ask, as you ease yourself into the bubbling, volcanic waters of the bath. You sigh contentedly. + + + “Laugh if you must, friend. But life has gotten far easier since Tibur and I came to our arrangement.” + + + You motion for Buchanan to join you in the bath. + + + “Don’t need it.” + + + “When did you last train? You reek.” + + + “Piss off,” he says as he undresses. + + + The two of you sit in silence for a moment. The hot water feels like it’s seeping into your overtired muscles, washing the exhaustion out. “So, who else has been selected for the games?” + + + “You, for sure. The orc, I think — what’s his name?” + + + “Boris.” + + + “Aye, him too. Masters’ aren’t sure who the third’s going to be.” + + + “Who else is good enough?” + + + “Well, it won’t be me, that’s for goddamn sure.” + + + “Tibur see to that as well?” + + + “You know it,” he says with a wry smile. + + + You lean back, pressing the back of your shaved head against the marble lip of the bath. You close your eyes appreciatively. + + + “So what’s your story, anyway?” he asks. + + + “My story?” + + + “How the fuck you got here.” + + + “How else? The institution of slavery.” + + + “Oh, you’re a funny fucker. Seriously, though.” + + + “I got taken as a prisoner of war by some Centurion. Wound up getting sold to here for a fraction of the cost, but he gets some of the profits.” + + + “What profits?” + + + “Well, that’s what confuses me. He beat my head in so bad that his man had to dig through my brain to let the pressure out.” + + + “Wait, really?” + + + “Swear on any gods you want me to. He’s gone to a lot of trouble to make sure I survive long enough to get into the Games.” + + + “Odd,” Buchanan says, as he begins to wash his hair in the bathwater. + + + A third man joins the bath. You recognize him as Boris, the green orc that you discussed earlier. He grunts as he eases himself in. + + + “Afternoon,” he grumbles. + + + “Well isn’t this just a gathering of the races?” Buchanan remarks. + + + “How’d practice treat you, Boris?” you ask. + + + “Short.” + + + “That’s how we like ‘em,” Buchanan declares jovially. + + + “Who’d you fight?” you ask of Boris. + + + “Some man.” + + + “This man still with us?” + + + “Aye. But I heard you took a life today,” Boris intones. In your few interactions with him, you’ve noticed something: rare is the day that he speaks in anything other than a slow, ponderous monotone. + + + “Who’d you kill? You sick bastard!” Buchanan jokes, “I’ve never heard of a gladiator school with a killer in it!” + + + “I’m afraid to disappoint you, mate, but it wasn’t intentional. Hit him weird, and it must have jolted his spine too hard.” + + + Boris grunts, and leans back in the bath. You notice a scarred-over burn on his chest. + + + Buchanan notices it, then turns to you with a cocked eyebrow. +> Ask about the scar + “Someone in the arena give you that?” you ask, motioning to the scar with one finger. + + + “Different arena,” he responds. + + + “How so?” Buchanan chimes in. + + + Boris exhales through his flat nose. “My people’s laws are… different. We don’t practice slavery, and we don’t have prisons. If you do something wrong, you’re paying in pain.” + + + “What did you do wrong?” you ask, curiosity piqued. + + + “I bashed someone’s head, after they were… unchivalrous to my sister,” he smiles slightly. + + + “And they give you that for a fight?” + + + “No,” he grumbles, as his smile begins to spread across his face, “they gave me that for a murder.” + + + “Gods, how brutal are you people?” Buchanan asks in mock-horror. + + + “Hopefully you never find out.” +> New Page + Before you can speak any further, Horatius enters the courtyard, wearing his usual disarming grin. “Rejoice, my brothers! Three of you are about to have a great honour! The three men heading to the Fisherman’s Games have been decided.” + + + You look up from your conversation, as does Boris and Buchanan. The rest of the gladiators, and the slave attending the armour-pile all look at the big man in anticipation. + + + “Our three lucky, lucky souls, are going to be Buchanan, that wiry bastard I’m sure you all know and love.” + + + Buchanan punches the ground. "That son of a whore let me blow him, then he fucking lied to me!" + + + “That’s not all, however! We’re also going to be bringing along our favourite elf, and our… cherished orc friend.” + + + You feel the collective relief of everyone not selected. Strangely, no one finds the prospect of being cut open for the amusement of screaming peasants and horrified aristocrats particularly appealing. + + + “If you’re one of our lucky contestants, come talk to me. Immediately. That’s all, go back to your duties.” + + + You climb out of the bath, and approach Horatius. The water drips down from your body to the tiled floor. He looks you up and down, as Buchanan and the orc climb out behind you. + + + “So, are you fine folks ready to put on a good show?” + + + “Always.” Boris grumbles, robbing you of the chance to speak. + + + “That’s what I like to here. You lot are dining with me and the Masters tonight; go talk to him over there,” Horatius jerks a thumb to the one-armed slave, “and get some decent clothes to where, why don’t you?” + + + + +*** + + + That night, you dine in fine fashion. + + + You, along with Boris and Buchanan, lay on long couches with purple fabrics draped over them. There’s a table of food in front of you, with richer food than you’ve ever tasted; grapes, nuts, pieces of sugarcane, thin-sliced beef and pork, along with goblets of wine, perpetually refilled by slaves. + + + “How would you like to eat like this every day?” Argos asks of you. One of the two owners of the gladiator school, he hails from the senatorial class. You can tell he’s no stranger to the corridors of power, just from how calculated his mannerisms are. He’s a shrewd old man with features like an eagle, and the predatory instincts of one, too. + + + “I could get used to it,” Buchanan says cheerfully, stuffing his face full of spiced pork. + + + “As well you should,” the other Master responds. You know little of him, save for his apparent dislike of interacting with others, and the fact that he bears the name “Gavrill”. You’ve never seen him around the ludus; and this is the first word you’ve heard him speak. “If you fight well, you could earn a handsome fortune.” + + + “There’s something else to be gained, as well,” Argos says meaningfully, “If you fight well, and you continue to fight well… you have your freedom to win.” + + + “What if I just like fighting?” Boris asks, uttering his first words of the evening. + + + “Then you’re in the right place,” Argos says with a smile. He snaps his fingers, and a slave steps forward; a girl, human, and no older than fifteen. She proceeds to wash his hands, and wash Gavrill’s hands as well. When she finishes, she washes yours. + + + “Everyone leave, save for the elf,” Gavrill says bluntly. There is no refusal, of course; he snaps his fingers, and the meal is over. Even the slave-girl leaves. Alone in the dining hall with Gavrill and Argos, you feel their eyes burrowing into your soul, ripping your intentions and thoughts apart, like an eagle would a piece of meat. + + + Argos clears his throat. “An elf gladiator stands to be very profitable, as I’m sure you know.” + + + “The Centurion understood this,” says Gavrill. + + + “As do we. If you win these Games, it will be an upset like never before. Men and orcs fight, but elves are something else entirely. The crowds will snap it up like hungry dogs,” Argos drops his voice and looks around, “But I’m sure you already know this. What you don’t know, is that the Emperor, in his infinite wisdom, has seen fit to modify the game’s this year. Not only will they be to the death, they will also be to the last man. That is, you’ll be fighting your teammates, should they survive as long as you.” + + + The weight of this presses down on your back. You’re not sure how you feel about murdering your allies. + + + “We tell you this, of course, in absolute secrecy,” Gavrill says, narrowing his eyes, “because it would be in everyone’s interest if you won these Games, and we feel that you can.” +> Time passes + The night before the Fishermen’s Games, you rest uneasily. You and your team were carted off to a slave-pen on the other side of the city, closer to the forum where the Fishermen’s Games will be held. + + + It doesn’t feel like a slave-pen, however. It feels like a luxurious room. You and your teammates have been provided with a room separate from the other contestants; bought and paid for by the seemingly-infinite coin of Gavrill and Argos. The Masters have also paid for an armed guard (an ex-gladiator, himself) to be posted outside the room, to avoid any last-minute “roster changes”. + + + You wonder if it would be best to tell your teammates. After all, full transparency might make them more likely to watch your back. If they don’t know the true nature of the Games, you might be at a tactical advantage, however. + + + +> Tell them the true nature of the Games + Guilt wracks your mind as you lay awake. “Lads, they’re not being straight with us.” + + + “When are they straight with us?” Buchanan asks amusedly. + + + “They’re rarely as crooked as this. We’re supposed to be a team, right?” + + + “Right,” Boris rumbles, revealing that no one in the room is asleep. + + + “But if we survive the initial slaughter, they’re going to pit us against each-other like dogs.” + + + “What?” Buchan asks, sitting up from his bed. + + + “Aye. This is the kind of bout where only one man gets to walk away, I’m afraid.” + + + “Those sons of whores!” Buchanan curses. He punches an expensive pillow. + + + “Unsurprising,” Boris murmurs, “but shitty.” + + + “So what’s the plan, then?” + + + “We fight like devils,” Buchanan says flatly. + + + “And then? Are we willing to kill each other for their amusement?” + + + “We already do,” says Boris. + + + “I told you this because I didn’t want to stab you in the back, lads. It’s wrong to turn on your allies like this.” + + + “You could have just kept that information to yourself, it’s true,” Buchanan admits. Boris rumbles affirmatively. + + + “We shouldn't fight each other, should we survive. We throw down our arms and tell them all to get fucked.” you continue. + + + “I’m all for defiance, but I’d rather not get killed in the process,” Buchanan argues. + + + “If they kill the winners of a bout, they’ll have a riot on their hands. No way they can kill us, not without it costing them.” + + + “So what now, then?” Boris asks. + + + “I say we try and get some sleep. We’ve still got to survive this fucking thing.” +> Fighting side-by-side + You, Boris and Buchanan stand shackled to each other by the ankles, at the far end of a marble forum. All that separates you from the crowd calling for your blood is a line of private guards (likely slaves themselves), paid for by the Censor arranging the games. + + + There are seven other teams of three, shackled similarly to you and your team. They are equally spaced along the rectangular perimeter of the forum. At the end of the forum opposite to you is an ornate ivory chair, upraised on a wooden platform. Upon which sits the Censor, who has organized these games and paid for them out of pocket. He nods to the crowd, upon which several men begin to distribute loaves of bread, which are quickly torn apart. A fervour begins to rise. + + + He raises a hand for silence. “In the name of the most gracious gods, who preside over us all. And in the name of the Emperor, whose infinite wisdom leads the Imperium into greater prosperity each year. On this most festive and holy of days, I demand that you fight!” + + + The forum descends into chaos. + + + You stick close to Boris and Buchanan as you move into the throng of bodies. Hot blood sprays across your face as you shove your spear into a man’s neck. Someone screams to the right of you; you turn, and see Boris flinging the broken body of a man like a discarded toy. + + + You sidestep a heavy-looking sword, and riposte with a quick thrust into a man’s bare chest. You rip open a gash in his soft, exposed flesh. He staggers backwards, and someone finishes him off with a trident to the neck. + + + Your arms grow weary. You begin to back out of the throng. A vicious-looking barbarian, painted in blue, notices you. + + + “Your head is mine, elf!” he screams, charging at you. He leaps into the air and swings an axe at your neck. He moves with breathtaking speed, but the chain around his ankle quickly grows taught. He falls to the ground, and you quickly bury your spear in his side. He lets out a soft moan as his lifeblood spills out onto your sandals. + + + You hear Buchanan scream in pain. You turn, and see that he’s been knocked to the ground. A burly orc is strangling him, and his struggles are weakening by the second. You stab the orc in the shoulder, but it only enrages the thing, which looks more like a monster than a man. It lets Buchanan fall to the ground, but picks up its bloodstained axe off the ground, and squeals at you. + + + Boris slams his club into the side of its head, killing it instantly. The force of the blow warps its skull, and causes its head to forcibly rotate into an unnatural position. As it falls to the ground, you look around the makeshift arena, and realize that only one opponent remains. He’s frantically trying to free himself from his shackles by chopping the feet off his dead teammates with a hatchet. + + + You turn to the crowd in a grand gesture, relishing their applause. Then, you throw your spear like a javelin. It tears through his side, and he screams in agony and drops his hatchet. You watch as he pulls the blade out from his torso, only to invite a fresh torrent of blood. He bleeds to death while futilely trying to stem the bleeding with his fingers. +> A shocking victory + The crowd erupts into a clamour. They praise you like the gods themselves. The Censor raises his hand for silence. “Fair citizens, are these games not to the death?” he asks. + + + The implication is obvious. A stunned silence falls over the crowd. Buchanan smiles grimly, and turns to you. “We’re really doing this?” + + + “Aye,” Boris rumbles, before throwing his club across the forum. The crowd gasps. + + + You realize that you’re unarmed, and raise your arms in an exaggerated shrug. The crowd laughs uproariously. + + + Buchanan eyes you both suspiciously. “You’re a couple of madmen,” he declares, before he, too, throws his blade away. + + + This act of defiance is met with screams and applause. The uproar grows again, and a wave of joyous celebration ripples through the crowd. The Censor raises his hands for silence, but he’s ignored amid the cheers; the people are drunk on celebration. + + + “Kill them!” he screams. Only two of his slave-soldiers hear, but they gladly comply; they break formation and begin to march towards you with terrible intent. + + + The celebration turns to rage. The crowd throw themselves against the shields of the guards, screaming profanity and curses at the Censor. Fists and rocks are thrown at the guards, who struggle to keep the crowd at bay with beatings. + + + “Stop!” he bellows. The two soldiers halt in their tracks. “It would appear, the people have spoken!’ + + + The guards manage to shove the crowd back. For now. + + + “… And the Fisherman’s Games shall have three winners!” +> A victor's reward + “That was an impressive show you put on,” Argos says with surprising humour. Both his hands are folded underneath his toga, but you can imagine that they’re clenched fists. “I had hoped it would unfold differently, but alas… one cannot always predict these things.” + + + The meeting-room, where you shared a dinner with Gavrill and Argos, is now bare. It looks like a dungeon cell. The thought strikes you that it would be a good place for a murder. + + + The door swings open. Gavrill enters. His face is flushed red, and he looks positively less civil than Argos. Argos raises cautionary hand to him. “Calm yourself, brother.” he advises. + + + Gavrill sighs. “You three must understand that insulting the Censor reflects quite poorly on us.” + + + “They’re not idiots. You do understand this, correct? You know what it looks like when two wealthy men cannot control their slaves?” Argos turns his pointed gaze to you. + + + “I — we, understand.” you say, nodding submissively. + + + “And yet, we would be idiots to punish you for this act.” Argos continues. Gavrill looks like he’s been struck. “For you have earned us a tremendous amount of coin, you just don’t know it yet.” + + + “And how is that?” Gavrill asks cholerically. You’re beginning to understand why Argos insists on managing their affairs himself. + + + “This display of loyalty is… it’s downright chivalrous!” Argos declares, laughing. “The people love it. A team of fighters, but also a team of best friends. It’s a novelty, even moreso than a team with only one human on it. The people will love it…” + + + “And the Editors of the Games will pay for them to appear,” Gavrill concedes. + + + “Precisely, my dear brother. The question shouldn't be ‘how do we punish these men?’. The question should be ‘how do we reward these brave, profitable souls’.”. + + + Argos turns his shrewd gaze to you once more. “What do you want, dear elf? If it’s within reason, I can make it so.” +> Ask for women and wine + You ask for women and wine, of course. + + + A small villa is constructed next to the ludis. Slaves are purchased for your enjoyment. Some pour wine, but most just sleep with you when you request it. In exchange for shedding blood and thrilling the people, Argos and Gavrill fulfill your every bodily need. Men, women, elves, orcs. It doesn’t particularly matter. For the rest of your days, wine is given out as freely as lovemaking. + + + You’re still a gladiator, but you’re a comfortable one. When you return from a particularly brutal training bout, you simply have your servants drag a seat into the sun and fill you a cup of wine, and you watch the clouds drift lazily by… + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> “That was an impressive show you put on,” Argos says with surprising humour. Both his hands are folded underneath his toga, but you can imagine that they’re clenched fists. “I had hoped it would unfold differently, but alas… one cannot always predict these things.” + + + The meeting-room, where you shared a dinner with Gavrill and Argos, is now bare. It looks like a dungeon cell. The thought strikes you that it would be a good place for a murder. + + + The door swings open. Gavrill enters. His face is flushed red, and he looks positively less civil than Argos. Argos raises cautionary hand to him. “Calm yourself, brother.” he advises. + + + Gavrill sighs. “You three must understand that insulting the Censor reflects quite poorly on us.” + + + “They’re not idiots. You do understand this, correct? You know what it looks like when two wealthy men cannot control their slaves?” Argos turns his pointed gaze to you. + + + “I — we, understand.” you say, nodding submissively. + + + “And yet, we would be idiots to punish you for this act.” Argos continues. Gavrill looks like he’s been struck. “For you have earned us a tremendous amount of coin, you just don’t know it yet.” + + + “And how is that?” Gavrill asks cholerically. You’re beginning to understand why Argos insists on managing their affairs himself. + + + “This display of loyalty is… it’s downright chivalrous!” Argos declares, laughing. “The people love it. A team of fighters, but also a team of best friends. It’s a novelty, even moreso than a team with only one human on it. The people will love it…” + + + “And the Editors of the Games will pay for them to appear,” Gavrill concedes. + + + “Precisely, my dear brother. The question shouldn't be ‘how do we punish these men?’. The question should be ‘how do we reward these brave, profitable souls’.”. + + + Argos turns his shrewd gaze to you once more. “What do you want, dear elf? If it’s within reason, I can make it so.” +> Ask to be the best fighter on the Continent + Your request is simple. You ask to be the best. + + + Tutors are brought in from across the known world. In time, you develop your own unique school of fighting, centred around the defensive use of the spear, along with weaponizing every part of your body. + + + As your prowess grows, Argos and Gavrill eventually see fit to recall you from the Games entirely. You live comfortably, teaching the new slaves how to survive in the arena, and put on a damn good show doing it. + + + Being an elf, you naturally outlive Gavrill and Argos. At the end of his life, however, Argos sees fit to give you one last gift; your freedom. He buys you out from Reuglus, and makes you your own man. + + + You leave the ludi soon after, and depart the city. You live out the rest of your days teaching the newly-formed Science of the Spear to anyone who can pay your exorbitant fees. You train gladiators, auxiliaries, and the sons (and one daughter) of the wealthy. + + + You live out the rest of your days on your own villa in the country, with dozens of slaves and hundreds of acres of land to your name, the first elf in the Imperium to do achieve wealth of this kind. + + + When you finally die, you do so rich, and content. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> “That was an impressive show you put on,” Argos says with surprising humour. Both his hands are folded underneath his toga, but you can imagine that they’re clenched fists. “I had hoped it would unfold differently, but alas… one cannot always predict these things.” + + + The meeting-room, where you shared a dinner with Gavrill and Argos, is now bare. It looks like a dungeon cell. The thought strikes you that it would be a good place for a murder. + + + The door swings open. Gavrill enters. His face is flushed red, and he looks positively less civil than Argos. Argos raises cautionary hand to him. “Calm yourself, brother.” he advises. + + + Gavrill sighs. “You three must understand that insulting the Censor reflects quite poorly on us.” + + + “They’re not idiots. You do understand this, correct? You know what it looks like when two wealthy men cannot control their slaves?” Argos turns his pointed gaze to you. + + + “I — we, understand.” you say, nodding submissively. + + + “And yet, we would be idiots to punish you for this act.” Argos continues. Gavrill looks like he’s been struck. “For you have earned us a tremendous amount of coin, you just don’t know it yet.” + + + “And how is that?” Gavrill asks cholerically. You’re beginning to understand why Argos insists on managing their affairs himself. + + + “This display of loyalty is… it’s downright chivalrous!” Argos declares, laughing. “The people love it. A team of fighters, but also a team of best friends. It’s a novelty, even moreso than a team with only one human on it. The people will love it…” + + + “And the Editors of the Games will pay for them to appear,” Gavrill concedes. + + + “Precisely, my dear brother. The question shouldn't be ‘how do we punish these men?’. The question should be ‘how do we reward these brave, profitable souls’.”. + + + Argos turns his shrewd gaze to you once more. “What do you want, dear elf? If it’s within reason, I can make it so.” +> Ask for vengeance + Your request confuses Gavrill and Argos, at first. You ask for the elves of your tribe to be brought to the gladiatorial school. They comply; the women are brought on as servants, and the men are taught to fight. + + + This proves to be their undoing. + + + They fail to notice the conversations in Elfin that end when they walk by. They fail to notice the growing resentment in their slaves. They fail to notice how you’ve taken a special interest in molding your people into effective killers. They fail to notice that you've even trained the women how to fight. + + + When Regulus arrives, you give the signal. The Centurion, now a much older man, has come to survey his investment (and perhaps purchase a few fitting men as mercenaries). You give the centuries-old hunting cry of your people, and you all seize arms from the armoury. + + + The confused guards die in seconds, their throats gashed by the lightning-quick ambushes of enraged elves. + + + Regulus tries to run. You stab him in the back of the heel, crippling him. You beat his head with the butt of your spear, like he beat you, so many years ago. He’s coughing blood, and his tongue has been severed by his own teeth by the time you finally slit his throat. + + + You have the immense pleasure of cornering Gavrill and Argos. For all they’re benevolence, they still own you, and they still made you fight. You kill Gavrill first, by gashing his throat open. Argos lunges forward with a knife produced from his toga, but you trip him onto the floor, and plunge the spear into his heart. His last look is one of intense surprise. + + + You wish that Boris and Buchanan were there, in the end. But while you voluntarily stayed, they took their freedom. + + + A warning bell is rung. The survivors of the massacre all gather round you. Some clutch swords, others axes. Some fight with their bare hands, or a piece of discarded wood. Some are holding training weapons. + + + Even as the legionnaires kick down the door, you know one thing to be true. + + + You have spilled the blood of those who wronged you. You are vindicated. + + +THE END.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> The night before the Fishermen’s Games, you rest uneasily. You and your team were carted off to a slave-pen on the other side of the city, closer to the forum where the Fishermen’s Games will be held. + + + It doesn’t feel like a slave-pen, however. It feels like a luxurious room. You and your teammates have been provided with a room separate from the other contestants; bought and paid for by the seemingly-infinite coin of Gavrill and Argos. The Masters have also paid for an armed guard (an ex-gladiator, himself) to be posted outside the room, to avoid any last-minute “roster changes”. + + + You wonder if it would be best to tell your teammates. After all, full transparency might make them more likely to watch your back. If they don’t know the true nature of the Games, you might be at a tactical advantage, however. + + + +> Keep it a secret + The marble forum is empty, save for the eight teams of combatants. Each team consists of three men, who are lashed together by the feet to discourage cowardice. + + + The crowd is bigger than you could have imagined. It feels as if every working-class freeman, citizen, and slave has gathered around to watch the slaughter that is sure to unfold. + + + An upraised seat on one end of the arena has been erected for the Censor overseeing the games. He’s an austere-looking man with grey hair and a large belly, and a flowing toga. + + + He raises a hand. + + + You glance at your compatriots. Boris looks disturbingly at ease, nearly nude, save for his roughly-hewn breechcloth. He holds a thick club of oak over his shoulder like a farm-slave might hold a plow. Buchanan’s expression is imperceptible underneath his bronze helmet. You can see the gooseflesh on his bare chest, and you can see that his fingers are white from how tight they clutch his sword and shield. + + + You try to steady the shaking of your hands as you clutch your spear like a protective charm. You were allowed to paint yourself blue, in the custom of your people; a screaming, painted barbarian is good for the crowds, after all. + + + “In the name of the most gracious gods, who preside over us all. And in the name of the Emperor, whose infinite wisdom leads the Imperium into greater prosperity each year. On this most festive and holy of days, I demand that you fight!” The Censor’s voice booms out across the forum, and over the crowd. + + + For a brief second, there is silence. + + + The scream of the crowd and the scream of the gladiators’ charge nearly deafens you. Twenty four men collide in the centre of the forum. You enter a trance. You are dimly aware of the screams of dying men, and the sound of flesh tearing. You hear the rattling of chains, and the collision of armour. + + + You jam your spear into a man’s throat, turning his jugular into a red geyser. You’re blue and red, now. + + + You shove the butt of your weapon into someone’s nose, stunning him just enough that Boris’ gargantuan club can crush their head like a discarded piece of fruit, sending juice spraying all over you. + + + Someone scraps your forehead open with a knife. You turn, just quickly enough to see a spear-tip pierce their cheek, rip through their tongue, and punch out the other side. + + + The fighting ends in a few minutes. You stand amid a slew of ruined corpses; some of them gasp for air, unaware that they’re already dead. Weapons and discarded shields litter the forum. A stunned silence falls over the crowd. + + + And then they scream. + + + And then you scream. You let out a blood-curdling war cry that frightens and excites you. You look around the arena for something else to kill. + + + Your eyes fall on Buchanan. He’s alive and well, but breathing heavily, and he has a gash running down his side. He looks sadly at the corpse of Boris, who has a short-sword still lodged in his jugular. + + +You grab your spear and raise it, and then you remember; the charade of teamwork is still in place. You quickly shove the point into a wounded man’s jugular, pretending that the coup-de-gras was your intention all along. + + + You bask in the chants of the crowd. + + + “Blood-elf! Blood-elf! Blood-elf!” they chant, throwing their fists in the air. + + + You look down, and realize it’s true. You’re covered in a thick, sticky layer of blood, so much so that it nearly covers the paint you wore into battle. + + + The Censor raises his hand in a pacifying gesture. The crowd falls into silence. “Fair citizens, are these games not to the death?” + + + Buchanan stares at you. You don’t make eye contact, and instead look at the chain connecting your leg to his. + + + “There are two contestants remaining! My friends, we have one more fight to watch!” the Censor continues, “So, gladiators! Put on a good final show, why don’t you?” + + + You swing your spear like a club, aimed at Buchanan’s head. When he steps back to avoid the blow, you kick your leg back, tugging on the chain. He loses his footing, and slips backward. He dashes his head against the marble, rattling his helmet. + + + You easily parry his half-hearted sword swing, and run his arm through, right at the joint. He screams in pain and drops the sword. You pull the spear-tip out, and toss the weapon aside. You pull his helmet off, and pick up his blood-stained sword off the ground. Raising one hand to the crowd and the Censor, you hold the sword to his throat. + + + “Death! Death! Death!” the crowd chants. They throw their fists in the air, thumbs upraised. + + + You turn to the Censor. He nods. + + + “Sorry, mate,” you say to Buchanan, before hacking into his throat with the edge of the blade. He gurgles, and uselessly paws at your legs. You withdraw the blade, then hack at his neck again; this time, you slice his head clean off. + + + His bloodied head lands with a schlick as it hits the blood-stained marble face-first. + + + “Blood-elf! Blood-elf! Blood-elf!” +> A champion's story + You awaken, covered in sweat. Across from you, naked, and in a tangle of sheets and covers, is a woman whose name you can’t quite place. You take a moment to admire her features; a smattering of freckles across her cheeks, short blonde hair, and a small nose. Some aristocrat, who’d paid well for the privilege. + + + You step out of bed. Already you can feel your nerves building. You drop yourself to the floor, and do a few dozen push-ups to calm your nerves. You’re sweating, now. You step outside your chamber, leaving the woman to sleep. You didn’t touch a drop of anything except for water last night, but you expect that she will be wrestling with a hangover all day. + + + You leave your house, and step out into the yard of your villa. You dip yourself into your hot-water bath for a few moments, washing the sweat off. Eventually, you step outside and let yourself dry off. + + + You look to the gate in your yard. Chained, but from the outside. You’ve always found that amusing. + + + Someone will be around in your chariot, with your weapons and armour. You sit on a marble bench until such time, watching the clouds. They don’t take long. Soon, the gate opens, and a nervous-looking freeman enters, carrying your belongings. You put on the leather armour, and don your shield and sword. You loop your belt through your helmet’s eye-socket for now. + + + As you leave, he stops. + + + “You have a client?” he asks. + + + “Yeah, but she’ll be asleep for hours yet. This won’t take long.” + + + He nods, and you both step onto your chariot. The man drives you through the streets of the Capital. You whip the crowd into the frenzy, blowing kisses and slapping hands as you’re driven by. + + + Soon, you arrive at the Coliseum. The grandest arena on the Continent by far, it’s a massive amphitheatre that forms the centre of culture for the entire city. When there aren’t gladiatorial games, it regularly hosts dramas and sporting matches of a less lethal variety. + + + The bouts before yours are all boring. Only one man is killed, and it’s an anticlimactic death; he bleeds to death after sustaining several minor injuries. When you step out into the sands of the arena, twirling your sword, you can feel the hunger of the crowd. + + + Your opponent steps out. His casualness is unnerving. He carries his trident like a walking stick. The weighted net in his off-hand, he twirls. + + + “Good morning, sir!” you say jovially. The crowd laughs. + + + “And good morning to you!” he responds. + + + You both stop, halfway across the arena, and salute the Emperor. After your salute, you sweep the tip of your blade across the crowd, whipping them up into a maddened state. + + + “Blood-elf! Blood-elf! Blood-elf!” + + + You flash your opponent a charming smile, before donning your helmet. When the helmet hits your head, the crowd falls silent; most have seen you work before. They know that the blood is soon to follow. + + + You bound across the arena and leap at him, plunging your sword towards his neck like a swooping eagle’s talon. He dodges with the grace of a bullfighter. The crowd gasps. + + + You twist, and avoid his thrust to your abdomen. You lash out at his neck, but he steps back, just in time for your blade to sail harmlessly through the air. He reaches out, and beckons you forward. Your blood begins to boil. + + + With a scream, you charge forward, keeping your shield in front of your chest. You shield absorbs his blow, and you stab outward at his exposed chest. He twists, but not fast enough; you scrape his chest open. His blood trickles down to the sand. + + + “Nice shot,” he bellows. The crowd laughs. You don’t respond. + + + He thrusts at your neck, but you scramble out of the way. Your riposte scrapes across his armoured forearm. + + + You swing your shield at his head. He ducks low underneath the swing, and stabs at your gut. You dash to the side, only to find that there’s a net blocking your path. + + + You fall into the dirt, wrestling with the net; you find that it’s impossibly heavy, and the harder you struggle, the more you become tangled. + + + “Let’s hope they’re in a giving mood,” he says, as he stomps on your right hand. It breaks two of your fingers, and forces you to drop your sword. He places a foot on your chest, and slowly lowers the trident to your neck. + + + Much to your horror, the crowd is more than happy to accept a new champion. + + + “Death!” cries a lone voice. The cry is taken up. “Death! Death! Death!” + + + Your opponent looks to the Emperor, in his high up seat. The Emperor extends his fist, and sticks his thumb into the air. + + + “Sorry, mate,” he says as he pulls off your helmet. You struggle like an animal in a trap, but he stomps on your chest, knocking the wind out of your lungs. As you gasp for air, he shoves the trident into your throat. You gurgle, spit, and ineffectually claw at the net. + + + Your head lolls to the side. You’re dimly aware of your blood spilling out onto the sand, and your killer waving his arms to his adoring audience.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> It’s before dawn. Tired of the rations brought by the tribe, you’ve decided to bring down the first hunt of the season. You grab your bow, arrows, spear, and satchel, and step outside the warmth and pressed-together bodies of the communal tent. + + + You see Enya outside the tent. She’s sitting cross-legged on a large rock, scraping a piece of flint over a bone knife. + + + “Morning,” you say. You eye her with a slight amount of caution. + + + She returns the greeting, not looking up from the knife. + + + “Planning on going out for a hunt?” you ask. + + + “Aye. Gonna bring down the first buck of the season, I’d reckon.” + + + You raise your eyebrows. “I think you should reckon something else, because I’m about to bring down the first buck of the season.” + + + She snorts, and stands up. “Sounds like we have a competition on our hands, then.” +> Hunt together + You regard the defiant, scarred elf for a moment. “Not necessarily.” + + + “How so?” + + + “We’d probably catch more if we worked together, yeah?” + + + “Don’t think that’s how it works,” she says with a scoff. + + + You think on this, for a moment. “Yeah, you’re probably right,” you say, before turning to depart into the forest. + + + She pulls on your arm. “Doesn’t mean we can’t go together, though.” + + + + +*** + + + + + Your arrow pierces the rabbit’s throat, killing it instantly, and pinning it to the ground. You break from your hiding place in the snow to retrieve the arrow, and tie the rabbit to a piece of rope that holds three other rabbits. + + + “Nice shot,” Enya says, motioning to the rabbit with her thumb, “right in the neck.” + + + “What can I say? I have a gift.” you say, grinning. You wipe the blood off the tip of your arrow, and stuff it back into your quiver. + + + She looks into the sky, and measures the sun’s progress against her fingers. “It’s nearly midday. Should probably head back, yeah?” + + + “Haven’t shot anything big yet, though.” your mouth still waters at the thought of a piece of venison. + + + She grinds her foot into the snow. “Think it might be best for us to head back.” +> Head back to camp with Enya + “Aye, you’re right,” you say, frowning slightly. + + + “Ah, cheer up. We’ll bring down an elk or something tomorrow. Besides, I would have kicked your ass anyway.” she unstrings her bow, and you do the same. You rest the bow over your shoulder, along with your spear and three rabbits. + + + “I seem to notice that I’ve three rabbits, and you have two.” you say mockingly, as you begin to head back to camp. + + + “Maybe so, but I caught a squirrel.” + + + “No way a squirrel’s worth a rabbit. It’s half the size.” + + + “But it’s harder to hit.” + + + “I’m sure all the hungry children back at camp will be pleased to note that your measly little squirrel was hard to hit.” + + + “I’m sure they will appreciate my expert marksmanship, thank you very much.” + + + “I’ll believe it when I see it.” + + + + +*** + + + + + As you approach the camp, you take a deep breath of the crisp winter air. It’s tinged with far more smoke than usual; something is terribly wrong. + + + You drop your kills into the snow, and immediately begin to string your longbow again. + + + “What’s wrong?” Enya hisses, dropping down into a crouch. + + + “Smells like a wildfire down there.” + + + “Maybe they lost control of a cooking fire?” + + + “Or maybe it’s a fucking raiding party.” + + + Her eyes widen, and she, too, begins to string her bow. Soon, the two of you ghost through the snow-covered forest until you reach the clearing. Your suspicions are immediately confirmed. One of the tents is on fire. A couple dozen tribespeople are kneeling in the snow, and heavy iron manacles are being placed on them by stern-faced legionnaires with short-swords and tower shields. + + + “They’re being taken,” you whisper. + + + “I can see that.” + + + “We’ve got to stop them!” you knock an arrow. + + + “We cannot fight them! There are a bunch of them, and two of us. If you give away our position, we die. We need to leave, and we need to do it now." +> Fight the legionnaires + You loose the arrow. It strikes true, hitting a legionnaire in the throat. He sinks to the ground, clutching uselessly at his ruined neck. The rest of the soldiers move with frightening efficiency, even as you and Enya begin to fire arrows at them. + + + You manage to fell another, and strike one man in the exposed forearm before they assemble into a formation. Three huge, interlocking shields form an impenetrable barrier to your arrows. Four men in the back cover the heads of the two rows, so that they form a formidable shell of iron. + + + Then, with a slow and terrible deliberateness, they begin to march forwards. You see the wild-eyed terror in Enya’s eyes. + + + “Run.” +> Fight to the death + “I’m not running,” you mutter as you drop your bow to the ground, and grip your spear two-handed in front of you. You leap over the snowbank, ready to fight the foreign interlopers who dare to invade your lands and shackle your people. + + + The iron turtle approaches, muttering its arcane, guttural marching-chants. Blades reach out from behind shields like sharp teeth. + + + You shove your spear through one of the gaps in the shield-wall. It bounces off a breastplate. Two shields slam shut, trapping your spear. You pull, but it’s hopelessly stuck. + + + Meanwhile, two men leave the back of the formation and begin to flank you. You drop the spear and draw your knife. You look to all sides like a wounded predator, as the phalanx circles in. + + + You scream as a white-hot blade buries itself in your thigh. You fall to the ground, and lash out at your assailant with your hunting knife. It scores across his exposed cheek, and he screams in pain. The blade remains stuck in your leg. + + + You try to stand as another soldier circles in. He easily catches your forearm as you stab at him. He holds it aloft in a crushing grip. + + + “Submit.” + + + You shake your head. He nods, and there’s a glimmer of respect in his eyes. He slits your throat, and drops your gurgling carcass to the snow. The last thing you see is a crimson pool forming around you, before you drown in your own blood and fear. + + +THE END<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|> “Aye, you’re right,” you say, frowning slightly. + + + “Ah, cheer up. We’ll bring down an elk or something tomorrow. Besides, I would have kicked your ass anyway.” she unstrings her bow, and you do the same. You rest the bow over your shoulder, along with your spear and three rabbits. + + + “I seem to notice that I’ve three rabbits, and you have two.” you say mockingly, as you begin to head back to camp. + + + “Maybe so, but I caught a squirrel.” + + + “No way a squirrel’s worth a rabbit. It’s half the size.” + + + “But it’s harder to hit.” + + + “I’m sure all the hungry children back at camp will be pleased to note that your measly little squirrel was hard to hit.” + + + “I’m sure they will appreciate my expert marksmanship, thank you very much.” + + + “I’ll believe it when I see it.” + + + + +*** + + + + + As you approach the camp, you take a deep breath of the crisp winter air. It’s tinged with far more smoke than usual; something is terribly wrong. + + + You drop your kills into the snow, and immediately begin to string your longbow again. + + + “What’s wrong?” Enya hisses, dropping down into a crouch. + + + “Smells like a wildfire down there.” + + + “Maybe they lost control of a cooking fire?” + + + “Or maybe it’s a fucking raiding party.” + + + Her eyes widen, and she, too, begins to string her bow. Soon, the two of you ghost through the snow-covered forest until you reach the clearing. Your suspicions are immediately confirmed. One of the tents is on fire. A couple dozen tribespeople are kneeling in the snow, and heavy iron manacles are being placed on them by stern-faced legionnaires with short-swords and tower shields. + + + “They’re being taken,” you whisper. + + + “I can see that.” + + + “We’ve got to stop them!” you knock an arrow. + + + “We cannot fight them! There are a bunch of them, and two of us. If you give away our position, we die. We need to leave, and we need to do it now." +> Run + You do as she says. + + + You turn tail and run into the woods, as fast as your legs can carry you. You leave the burning camp in your midst, leaving your people to whatever fate the legionnaires have in store for them. + + + Eventually, your legs can carry you no further, and you collapse into a snowbank, panting like an exhausted dog. You close your eyes and lean back into the snow, letting the cold seep in. You close your eyes… + + + + +*** + + + + + You awake to a boot on your stomach. You quickly open your eyes, expecting the worst. Thankfully, it’s Enya. She scowls at you. Her eyes are red and puffy, and you can see red lines on her cheeks. + + + “We need to leave.” she says tersely. + + + You climb out from the snow, shivering. The two of you leave the burning camp behind, until the smell of smoke is gone, and you can no longer hear the sound of women being ravaged by legionnaires in front of their husbands and children. + + + You and Enya share a painful memory, and find it easy to part ways after a few weeks. Eventually, you depart the lands entirely, in search of a new tribe. + + + In time, the Imperium grows ever northward in its search for slaves and land. As its numbers swell, the trees are eventually stripped away, and the entire North succumbs to the might of the Eagle. + + + + +THE END.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The Kingdom of Vinia is a beautiful, prosperous country that lies on the southwestern coast of the continent Belacia. While many of the surrounding countries frequently go to war with each other, Vinia has been neutral in all conflicts for centuries. Because of this, many refugees and other citizens flee to Vinia to find peace, creating a rich, diverse, and multicultural population. Vinia's captial city of Dialla is also home to the largest, most prestigious college in all of Belacia. + + +Because of Vinia's prosperity, some other kingdoms have grown envious and show distaste towards Vinia and its people. The most notable of these enemies is the Kingdom of Niravia, Vinia's less affluent neighbor. However, while the relationship between these two countries has always been tense, it has always been been peaceful. + + +You are Prince Alexander of Vinia, the only child of King Arien and Queen Lianne. + + +You have grown up in the royal palace in Dialla, Vinia's seaside capital. Your parents believed it important for you to be humble, so they allowed you to go into the city and play with the common children. As a young boy, you often found yourself on the beach with the other children, calling out to the fishermen in the distance and trying to find seashells. As you got older, you and your friends often spent time in the marketplace helping merchants and listening to members of the Royal Guard tell extravagant stories. Occasionally, you would help the students at the college collect materials for their studies. You had a happy childhood. + + +When you were of age, your parents asked you what you wanted to be as an adult. You chose to be a soldier. As a soldier, you will join the Royal Guard, where you will be trained in the art of physical combat. You will become strong of body and mind, and those traits coupled with your unmatched sword skills will make you a difficult foe to defeat. +> The Story Begins +You are in your bedchamber, fast asleep. You are exhausted from your training, but when a large thump is heard outside your door, you awake. + + +What do you do? +> Call out +You sit up, annoyed at having been woken up, and call out, "Who's there?" + + +The only response is an eerie silence that fills the air around you. You're beginning to wonder if you had imagined the sound when the door handle begins to turn ever so slowly. + + +Do you... +> Grab your sword +You have a bad feeling about what's going on, so you grab your sword from its place next to your bed. You quietly get out of bed and get into a fighting stance, mentally preparing for what may come at you. + + +The door handle turns completely, accentuated with a small click. Then, the door is pushed open. It gives way to nothing but a pitch black hallway. + + +You begin to step cautiously toward the door, sword at the ready, when a small dart flies from the darkness and lands in your arm. Another follows, hitting you in the neck. You cry out as your body begins to become numb and your vision blurs. The last thing you remember is falling to the floor. +> Wake up +When you come to, you find yourself in the back of what appears to be a wooden cart with a large piece of cloth placed over top of you. You can hear the sound of the wooden wheels moving through the grass and dirt, the clop of a horse's hooves, and the melodious sounds of a forest. You try to move but find that your hands and feet are tied tightly with rope. There's a piece of cloth shoved in your mouth and another tied around your head (so as to prevent you from spitting out the piece in your mouth). + + +At first you can't recall why exactly you're in the back of a wooden cart, bound and gagged, but then it all comes rushing back to you; waking up in the middle of the night, being attacked by an unknown intruder. + + +Your mind is reeling, and you can't think of a reason why you would have been attacked in the first place. You don't think you've ever made any enemies, and your kingdom has never been hostile towards another kingdom. You think that maybe someone wanted ransom money, and thought kidnapping you would be the way to get it. That wouldn't be too far fetched. Vinia is arguably the most affluent country in Belacia, after all. + + +Just when you think you're beginning to make sense of what's happened to you, you hear the unmistakable sound of an arrow being shot and a shout from where you presume the driver of the cart would be. There is the thud of a large object falling on the ground, and then the cart suddenly lifts on one side as the wheels of the cart run over the object--presumably the body of your kidnapper. + + +"Clean work, boys, now let's get that cart!" you hear a gruff, booming voice yell somewhere not far from you. Was your cart being hijacked? + + +You hear multiple voices saying calming things to the horse pulling the cart and it slowly comes to a halt. The same voice as before, closer now, says, "Alright, let's see what this poor sod had with him." + + +Your cart had definitely just been hijacked. + + +The cloth that is covering you is abruptly pulled off of your body, and you wince at your eyes' sudden reintroduction to sunlight. When your eyes adjust, you see a group of five or so men standing over you. They all look thuggish and dirty. They look down at you in confusion. + + +"What's this?" the same voice as before, most likely the leader of the group, says. The man is the largest and dirtiest of all present. "Who are you?" he asks you. + + +You... +> Try to talk +You attempt to say something, but the cloth in your mouth prevents you from making any intelligible sounds. + + +"Oh, right," the leader says, as if he's just noticing the fact that you're gagged and can't answer his question. He grabs the cloth covering your mouth, allowing you to spit out the cloth in your mouth. Your mouth is dry, your throat sore from thirst. "Now then, who are you?" he asks. + + + + + +> Lie +"My name is Alexander, I'm a knight in training from Vinia," you tell them. You don't think it would be smart to tell them who you really are. Just in case. + + +"Well, Alexander," the leader says, "how'd you find yourself in the back of some guy's cart? Got a debt you forgot to pay?" + + +"No, I have no idea what's going on. He just attacked me!" You tell them. Some of the men nod in understanding. + + +The leader seems to feel sorry for you. "Well, why don't you come with us back to ou camp? We can get you fed and watered." + + +You... +> Go with them +"I think I'll take you up on that offer," you tell the leader. "By the way, what's your name?" + + +"The name's Jarven," he tells you, puffing up his chest in an attempt to look more grand. + + +"No title?" you ask. + + +"Nope, just Jarven," he confirms. "My boys and I roam this forest and take what we need to survive." + + +When Jarven and "his boys" begin to walk back into the forest, you follow. You figure it isn't such a bad idea to get some food and water, and then you can try to figure out where you are and why you're there. + + +The camp doesn't end up being that far of a walk, which you're thankful for. It's situated in a decently sized clearing, with about ten tents surrounding the perimeter--one of which looks larger and nicer than all the others--and has a large bonfire in the middle. There are about ten other men scattered around the camp when you arrive, a few of them playing a card game and the others polishing some swords. It's not the standards that you're used to, but it'll do. + + +"Everybody," Jarven announces,"this"--he motions to you--"is Alexander. He'll be joining us for a little bit. Play nice." The men acknowledge their leader's words with a few noncommittal grunt and nods, but for the most part they ignore your presence. Jarven claps you on the shoulder and says, "Now, let's get you some food and drink, boy." + + +Jarven leads you to the largest tent, which, although nicer than the others, is still pretty shabby. The inside has a large carpet covering the ground, a cot on the far left side, a small table next to the bed, and a circular dining table to the right. There's a large chest at the end of the bed. "Go on, have a seat," Jarven tells you, waving in the direction of the table. You do as he says. "I'll be right back." + + +You are then left alone in Jarven's tent. + + +You... +> Look around +With Jarven gone, you figure it'd be a good time to snoop around a little and get up from the table. + + +You walk towards the chest at the end of the cot and try to open it, but it's locked. Upon further examination, you see a few things on the bedside table. There's a rolled up piece of paper, a few gold coins, a candle, and an empty cup. + + +You're about to inspect these things further when you hear someone approaching the tent, so you quickly return to your seat at the table. + + +When Jarven returns, he does so with a loud, "Food's ready!" and places a bowl of stew and a cup of something that might be water in front of you. It smells good, so you dig in right away. + + +"So, Alexander," Jarven says, taking a seat across from you, "you really from Vinia?" + + +You finish chewing your food before answering. "Yes," you tell him, "I live in Dialla." + + +"Hm. Then why are you here?" He asks. + + +"I told you before, the person driving the cart just kidnapped me one night. I don't even know where I am." + + +Jarven laughs a big, bellowing belly laugh. "Well you're not in Vinia, I can tell you that much." + + +You sigh, getting somewhat annoyed at the fact you're not getting a straight answer. "So then where am I?" + + +"You're in Niravia." + + +You're taken aback. "Niravia?" you ask. You feel slightly sick; Niravia is known for it depravity and poverty, and many of the knights back in Dialla have told you of the things they've experience in the country. + + +"The one and only." Jarven chuckles when he sees the expression on your face. "Aw, come on, boy, it's not that bad. I'm sure it's not as nice as Vinia, but--" + + +"How far are we from the border?" you cut him off. + + +He has to think for a moment, but he finally tells you, "Twenty kilometers, about." + + +You sigh in relief. That's not far enough too far. And Vinia is relatively small country, stretching maybe one hundred kilometers across. It's not an impossible distance to travel on foot, should you choose to do so. + + +"I wouldn't get my hopes up if I were you, boy," Jarven says. "The journey to the border isn't an easy one. You'd probably die." +> Stay with the bandits +"I think you may be right," you tell Jarven. He looks pleased at your answer. "I think I'll stay here for a little while, build up my strength some more before I try to travel home." + + +Those were your plans, but you never make it back to Dialla. After about a month of living with the bandits, the group is attacked by some military scouts. In the chaos, you manage to escape death by the sword, but you run into a pack of feral wolves not far from the fighting. This is where you meet your end. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>With Jarven gone, you figure it'd be a good time to snoop around a little and get up from the table. + + +You walk towards the chest at the end of the cot and try to open it, but it's locked. Upon further examination, you see a few things on the bedside table. There's a rolled up piece of paper, a few gold coins, a candle, and an empty cup. + + +You're about to inspect these things further when you hear someone approaching the tent, so you quickly return to your seat at the table. + + +When Jarven returns, he does so with a loud, "Food's ready!" and places a bowl of stew and a cup of something that might be water in front of you. It smells good, so you dig in right away. + + +"So, Alexander," Jarven says, taking a seat across from you, "you really from Vinia?" + + +You finish chewing your food before answering. "Yes," you tell him, "I live in Dialla." + + +"Hm. Then why are you here?" He asks. + + +"I told you before, the person driving the cart just kidnapped me one night. I don't even know where I am." + + +Jarven laughs a big, bellowing belly laugh. "Well you're not in Vinia, I can tell you that much." + + +You sigh, getting somewhat annoyed at the fact you're not getting a straight answer. "So then where am I?" + + +"You're in Niravia." + + +You're taken aback. "Niravia?" you ask. You feel slightly sick; Niravia is known for it depravity and poverty, and many of the knights back in Dialla have told you of the things they've experience in the country. + + +"The one and only." Jarven chuckles when he sees the expression on your face. "Aw, come on, boy, it's not that bad. I'm sure it's not as nice as Vinia, but--" + + +"How far are we from the border?" you cut him off. + + +He has to think for a moment, but he finally tells you, "Twenty kilometers, about." + + +You sigh in relief. That's not far enough too far. And Vinia is relatively small country, stretching maybe one hundred kilometers across. It's not an impossible distance to travel on foot, should you choose to do so. + + +"I wouldn't get my hopes up if I were you, boy," Jarven says. "The journey to the border isn't an easy one. You'd probably die." +> Travel to the border +"That's a risk I'm going to have to take," you tell Jarven. He sighs. + + +"I guess I should have expected that, there's no reason for you to stay here with us. Have to say I was hoping you would, though, you look like you're a good fighter. Probably could've used you." + + +"Thank you for everything you've done for me," you say as you finish up your stew. "I have no clue what would have happened if you and your men hadn't killed the person driving that cart I was in." + + +"You'd probably be dead!" He laughs. You don't really know why he finds the prospect of your death so funny. Jarven then gets up and walks over to the chest at the end of his cot. "You haven't caused any trouble, so I'll give you some things to take with you. Hopefully they'll help." He then pulls a key out of his pocket and unlocks the chest. You get up and walk over, standing next to him. + + +"Let's see..." he says to himself. "You'll need...a sword...and a canteen...and a map...and some money...and a knapsack...that should be enough." As he says each word, he pulls the corresponding item out of the chest. You're shocked by the man's generosity, but you don't question it. He stands up, holding the canteen, and turns to walk out of the tent. "I'll go grab you some food and fill this up with some water." + + +You pick up the things Jarven had laid out for you and begin packing your knapsack. He returns with what he promised and gives the food and canteen to you. + + +"All set?" he asks as you secure the sword to your belt. It's not as nice as the ones you have in Dialla, but it'll work if you need to defend yourself. You nod at him and he leads you out of the tent. He pulls a crumpled up piece of paper from his pocket and unfolds it, showing that it's a map. + + +"The map you have is an exact replica of this one," he tells you. "This," he says as he points at a small triangular marking about a third of the way from the left edge of the page, "is this camp. You need to go west to reach Vinia's border. Depending on how you go, you might hit Sirra"--he points at a house marking in between the camp and the edge of the page--"where you can stay at the inn. It's kinda run down, but it's better than spending the night in the woods." + + +"And how exactly do I reach Sirra?" you ask. + + +"There's a path that goes straight to the border--I'll bring you there, don't worry--but it forks a little while down. If you go on the more northern route then you'll reach Sirra. The other one's a little faster, but there's no guarantee you'll find someplace to sleep. There're some houses along that way, though. Maybe someone will be feelin' hospitable." + + +It's a lot to take in, and you hope you'll remember all the information. + + +"Now then, let's get you to the road," Jarven says jovially, clapping you on the shoulder. He then takes you out of the camp, leading you back the way you had walked earlier. You emerge on a road, the cobblestones worn down by years of use. It was mostly just grass, really, but it was still a clear path that you could easily follow, and for that you were thankful. Jarven grabs your shoulders and turns you so you're facing one way on the path. + + +"West," he says, and gives you a small push. You take the hint and begin walking. As you leave him behind, you hear Jarven shout, "Don't die out there, kid!" You don't intend on doing so, but at least it makes you laugh. You wave at him without turning around, your mind set on one thing: getting back to Vinia. + + + + +You've only been walking for a couple of hours when the sun starts to set. You're starting to get hungry again and there's a dull ache in your feet; the rough terrain was doing you no favors. + + +But you push forward for another fifteen minutes or so, at which point you can see the fork in the road Jarven had told you about. As you approach, you see what looks to be a sign indicating what lies in each direction, but as you get closer you see that the paint is too faded to make out. + + +You take a swig of water from your canteen and think. The sun is setting quickly, as it always does this time of year, and the forest is quickly coming alive with foreign noises. You need to find someplace to stay for the night--the sooner the better. + + +Do you go to the left or right? +> Left +You go with your gut and take the left path. + + +Within half an hour, the forest is completely dark. The only light is that coming from the full moon overhead. As you walk, you look up at the sky and see it's littered with hundreds of stars, twinkling like small diamonds. You can't see as many stars in Dialla, what with all of the lights in the city. As beautiful as the sight is, you know you'll enjoy it more when you're safe. + + +However, this does not happen. Having taken the left path, you have unintentionally avoided the town of Sirra, and are now stranded in the forest overnight. You grow uneasy as you push forward, the strange sounds of the forest growing louder and louder with every step you take. + + +You think you're saved when you spot a small house along the road, and you eagerly knock on the door. An older woman opens it, and looks quite concerned by your situation, so she invites you in. She gives you a hot meal and drink, which you happily accept, but it will be your last meal. Unbeknownst to you, the woman was only interested in the supplied you carried and so put poison in your drink. The last thing you see before your vision fades is the fresh, hot meal before you. + + +This is where you meet your end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"That's a risk I'm going to have to take," you tell Jarven. He sighs. + + +"I guess I should have expected that, there's no reason for you to stay here with us. Have to say I was hoping you would, though, you look like you're a good fighter. Probably could've used you." + + +"Thank you for everything you've done for me," you say as you finish up your stew. "I have no clue what would have happened if you and your men hadn't killed the person driving that cart I was in." + + +"You'd probably be dead!" He laughs. You don't really know why he finds the prospect of your death so funny. Jarven then gets up and walks over to the chest at the end of his cot. "You haven't caused any trouble, so I'll give you some things to take with you. Hopefully they'll help." He then pulls a key out of his pocket and unlocks the chest. You get up and walk over, standing next to him. + + +"Let's see..." he says to himself. "You'll need...a sword...and a canteen...and a map...and some money...and a knapsack...that should be enough." As he says each word, he pulls the corresponding item out of the chest. You're shocked by the man's generosity, but you don't question it. He stands up, holding the canteen, and turns to walk out of the tent. "I'll go grab you some food and fill this up with some water." + + +You pick up the things Jarven had laid out for you and begin packing your knapsack. He returns with what he promised and gives the food and canteen to you. + + +"All set?" he asks as you secure the sword to your belt. It's not as nice as the ones you have in Dialla, but it'll work if you need to defend yourself. You nod at him and he leads you out of the tent. He pulls a crumpled up piece of paper from his pocket and unfolds it, showing that it's a map. + + +"The map you have is an exact replica of this one," he tells you. "This," he says as he points at a small triangular marking about a third of the way from the left edge of the page, "is this camp. You need to go west to reach Vinia's border. Depending on how you go, you might hit Sirra"--he points at a house marking in between the camp and the edge of the page--"where you can stay at the inn. It's kinda run down, but it's better than spending the night in the woods." + + +"And how exactly do I reach Sirra?" you ask. + + +"There's a path that goes straight to the border--I'll bring you there, don't worry--but it forks a little while down. If you go on the more northern route then you'll reach Sirra. The other one's a little faster, but there's no guarantee you'll find someplace to sleep. There're some houses along that way, though. Maybe someone will be feelin' hospitable." + + +It's a lot to take in, and you hope you'll remember all the information. + + +"Now then, let's get you to the road," Jarven says jovially, clapping you on the shoulder. He then takes you out of the camp, leading you back the way you had walked earlier. You emerge on a road, the cobblestones worn down by years of use. It was mostly just grass, really, but it was still a clear path that you could easily follow, and for that you were thankful. Jarven grabs your shoulders and turns you so you're facing one way on the path. + + +"West," he says, and gives you a small push. You take the hint and begin walking. As you leave him behind, you hear Jarven shout, "Don't die out there, kid!" You don't intend on doing so, but at least it makes you laugh. You wave at him without turning around, your mind set on one thing: getting back to Vinia. + + + + +You've only been walking for a couple of hours when the sun starts to set. You're starting to get hungry again and there's a dull ache in your feet; the rough terrain was doing you no favors. + + +But you push forward for another fifteen minutes or so, at which point you can see the fork in the road Jarven had told you about. As you approach, you see what looks to be a sign indicating what lies in each direction, but as you get closer you see that the paint is too faded to make out. + + +You take a swig of water from your canteen and think. The sun is setting quickly, as it always does this time of year, and the forest is quickly coming alive with foreign noises. You need to find someplace to stay for the night--the sooner the better. + + +Do you go to the left or right? +> Right +You decide to take the path to the right. + + +Within half an hour, the forest is completely dark. The only light is that coming from the full moon overhead. As you walk, you look up at the sky and see it's littered with hundreds of stars, twinkling like small diamonds. You can't see as many stars in Dialla, what with all of the lights in the city. As beautiful as the sight is, you know you'll enjoy it more when you're safe. + + +Your perseverance pays off, because a few minutes later you can see the lights of a town in the distance. You begin running down the path, eager to reach a place where you can relax a little. + + +The town--Sirra, you presume--isn't large, but it's big enough to have a few shops and an inn. There are a decent amount of people still walking the streets, and you think that Sirra must get a lot of people passing through it since it's so close to the border. + + +You find the inn easily enough--it's by far the largest building in the town, and most of the people on the streets are going to or coming from it. + + +You walk in and are met with an environment far different than that found in the inns in Dialla. The room is dark and smoky with a bard at the end playing a low tune. The room is filled with people, but the conversation isn't loud and boisterous, it's almost like a quiet hum. There's a bar to the right that spans the entire side of the building, and stairs directly to your left, most likely leading to the rooms upstairs. + + +You walk over to the bar and sit down at one of the stools. After a moment one of the workers--a stout, middle aged man with a large beard--comes over to you. + + +"What'd you like?" he asks. He's cleaning some glasses and doesn't seem particularly interested in you. You think he might be the barkeep. + + +"A meal and a room, please," you tell him. He laughs. + + +"Not from around here?" + + +"Excuse me?" You don't think you did anything that would shout to the world that you're not from the area, but this stranger obviously thinks otherwise. + + +"You're too polite to be from Sirra," he chuckles. "But never mind that--tonight there's either rabbit stew or meat pie. What do you want?" + + +You had stew earlier, so you go with the meat pie. The barkeep goes through a door at the far end of the bar--the kitchen, most likely--and comes back a moment later with your food. + + +You... +> Eat in silence +You dig into your food eagerly. The barkeep seems to catch on that you're not in the mood for talking and leaves, going to tend to another customer. + + +The food is good, and it fills you up quickly. When you're finished you wave the barkeep back over and hand him a few coins. + + +"How much for the room?" you ask. + + +"Fifteen," he tells you. You hand over the money. He counts it, looking satisfied. "You get room twenty-four. Second floor on the left." With that he leaves and goes into the kitchen. You put your remaining money back in your pocket and make for the stairs. Before you can reach them, however, a large, brutish man steps in front of you and looks down at you menacingly. You're not exactly a small person, and yet this man towers over you. + + +"Can I help you?" you ask. You really just want to get to your room and go to sleep, not be bothered by some giant. + + +"I don't like your face," he grunts. You're taken aback a little, because no one's ever insulted you like that before. + + +You... +> Fight him +You don't take kindly to insults, so you throw the first punch, landing a solid blow to the brute's neck. + + +He's stunned momentarily, but his fist soon slams into your jaw. You're knocked back by the force of his blow, and you crash into one of the tables behind you, your head colliding with a now-shattered plate. You feel the shards cut into your face, but pay it no mind. You get up and try to ready yourself for the fight, but the barkeep is suddenly in front of you and there are a few men holding back your attacker. + + +"Get him out of here!" the barkeep yells. The men comply, dragging the struggling brute out of the inn. The barkeep turns to you and asks, "Are you alright?" + + +"Yeah, I'm fine," you tell him, but the entire side of your face is throbbing. You know you'll be fine, though; you've had worse injuries than a bruised jaw before. + + +"Head on up to your room, I'll have one of the staff bring up some water and a washcloth so you can clean those cuts." + + +You nod and head up the stairs, the old wood creaking with every step you take. You go up to the second floor and take the second door on the left, just like the barkeep had told you. The room is small, with a bed and a side table, a small dresser in the corner, and a mirror hung on the wall above that dresser. A dim light comes from the candle on the bedside table. You place your bag on the bed and then look at yourself in the mirror. The side of your face is already starting to swell, and there are cuts on your temple and cheek from the plate you fell on. Your nose is bleeding, but you don't think it's broken. + + +A knock on the door pulls you away from the mirror. You open it and a man is standing there, a large bowl of steaming water in his hands and a washcloth hung over his arm. He's probably around your age, with close-cut dark hair and equally dark eyes. He's smiling, but it doesn't quite look genuine. + + +"For you," he says, extending the bowl out to you. + + +"Thank you," you respond, taking the bowl from him. You walk it over to the dresser and put it down. When you turn around, you see he's standing right behind you, although you never heard him enter. He holds out the cloth to you. He's got the same empty smile as before, and up close you notice how hollow his eyes look as well. You begin to feel uneasy and want him to leave. Luckily, when you take the cloth from him he turns and leaves your room, closing the door behind him. + + +Weird. + + +You take your time washing your wounds, wanting to make sure they don't get infected, before collapsing on your bed. All at once, your fatigue and the stress of your situation hit you. You've been kidnapped, rescued by bandits, and walked god knows how long--all in one day. You're grateful for the adrenaline that must have kept you going, but now that it's worn off your limbs feel achy and tired, your eyelids heavy. Whether you wanted to or not, you slowly drift off to sleep... +> Wake up +You're awakened by a knock on your door. You're disoriented, having woken up suddenly, and you struggle to clear your mind of sleepiness. The room is dark, the candle on the bedside table had extinguished on its own. There's another knock, a little more urgent this time, so you stand, stretch, and walk towards the door. + + +When you open the door, you find the same man who had delivered your water the night before. You immediately feel uncomfortable in his presence. + + +"Sorry to wake you, but I have an urgent question," he says. + + +"Do you have any idea what time it is?" you demand. You were still exhausted, your body weary, and you wanted to go back to sleep. + + +The man smiled. The expression looked out of place on his face. "Don't worry, it'll take but a moment." + + +You're about to ask what he has to ask you when he suddenly pushes you back into your room with far more force than you thought a man as scrawny as he would be able to muster. You stumble back away from the man while he closes and locks the door to your room. + + +"What are you doing?" you shout. The man doesn't answer you, he simply pulls out a knife. You groan; is he an assassin too? + + +You... +> Try to talk to him +"Hold on--" you're cut off by the dagger that now finds itself in your throat. You fall to your knees, bleeding out quickly as your vision begins to fade. + + +This is where you meet your end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You're awakened by a knock on your door. You're disoriented, having woken up suddenly, and you struggle to clear your mind of sleepiness. The room is dark, the candle on the bedside table had extinguished on its own. There's another knock, a little more urgent this time, so you stand, stretch, and walk towards the door. + + +When you open the door, you find the same man who had delivered your water the night before. You immediately feel uncomfortable in his presence. + + +"Sorry to wake you, but I have an urgent question," he says. + + +"Do you have any idea what time it is?" you demand. You were still exhausted, your body weary, and you wanted to go back to sleep. + + +The man smiled. The expression looked out of place on his face. "Don't worry, it'll take but a moment." + + +You're about to ask what he has to ask you when he suddenly pushes you back into your room with far more force than you thought a man as scrawny as he would be able to muster. You stumble back away from the man while he closes and locks the door to your room. + + +"What are you doing?" you shout. The man doesn't answer you, he simply pulls out a knife. You groan; is he an assassin too? + + +You... +> Fight back +Recognizing the danger in front of you--and remembering what happened during your last encounter with an assassin--you get into a fighting stance. You see your sword in your periphery and wonder if it would be smart to try to grab it, or if you should just try to use your hands. + + +You... +> Grab your sword +You figure you'll have a better chance of surviving if you have your sword, so you dash across the room towards where it lies with the rest of your supplies. However, the assassin sees what you're trying to do and jumps at you. You move to the side barely in time and make it to the dresser, where you pick up your sword. + + +You turn to face your attacker, who is recovering from his fall. + + +You... +> Charge +You want to kill this man and get it over with, so you charge at him, sword raised. + + +You swing down powerfully where the assassin is, but at the last second he moves out of the way and you hit the floor. You pull your sword up and prepare for another attack, but it's too late. You've left your side and back completely open and the assassin takes advantage, stabbing you once in the side and again in the back. + + +You fall to the ground as you cry out in pain. The last thing you see before you die is the assassin's empty smile.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You figure you'll have a better chance of surviving if you have your sword, so you dash across the room towards where it lies with the rest of your supplies. However, the assassin sees what you're trying to do and jumps at you. You move to the side barely in time and make it to the dresser, where you pick up your sword. + + +You turn to face your attacker, who is recovering from his fall. + + +You... +> Take a defensive stance +Knowing assassins are the masters of dishonest fighting, you get into a defensive stance and wait for the man to attack you. You had been trained how to properly defend yourself back in Dialla, so you're feeling quite good about your chances, even if you don't know how the enemy fights. + + +The assassin regains his footing and prepares to attack, but you're ready for whatever he can throw at you. When he stabs at you you move out of the way and try to counter his attack, but he's fast and is able to move out of the way as well. The two of you do this dance until you are both exhausted, each getting a few good hits in on the other. + + +You're thinking you've reached a stalemate when the assassin suddenly jumps at you again, knife in the air. You muster up all of your energy and jump out of the way, and then you use your momentum to swing the hilt of your sword down on the assassin's head, knocking him out momentarily and making him fall to the floor. You kick the man's dagger away from his body and stand over him. + + +You... +> Interrogate him +"Who are you? Why are you trying to kill me?" You shout at the assassin. You've bested him, so now it's +time to get some answers. He looks up at you, his face vaguely angry, and remains silent. "Answer me!" you demand. + + +"Silence in life, silence in death," the assassin spits at you. + + +"Who do you work for?" + + +"Silence in life, silence in death." + + +You sigh; the guy's not going to give you anything. + + +You... +> Incapacitate him +Despite your frustration, you see no need to kill the assassin. He looks up at you, and furiously says, "Silence in life, silence in death." When you hear this, you find it funny. + + +"You're not dying today," you say. You kick him in the head, hard enough to make him pass out, but not hard enough to kill him. + + +It's then that you hear a furious knocking on the door. You walk over and unlock it before opening it, revealing the barkeep and a few other workers standing in the hallway, all with worried looks on their faces. + + +"What the devil is going on in there?!" the barkeep shouts. When he looks behind you and sees the man lying on the floor, the color drains out of his face. + + +"He tried to kill me," you tell him, and he drags his eyes away from the body to inspect your face. He looks as though he is unsure whether to trust you or not. "All of you, go back to your rooms," he tells the people behind you. As they wonder off, you wonder how long they've all been standing out there. The barkeep comes into your room and closes the door. + + +"What happened?" he asks. + + +"I think he's an assassin, he came to my door and ambushed me," you reply. + + +The barkeep rubs his face, obviously overwhelmed by what's happening. "He was a strange one, I wouldn't be that surprised if he was a shady character." + + +"Unfortunately I couldn't get any information out of him. All he said was 'silence in life, silence in death.'" At these words, the barkeep froze. + + +"He said that?" he asked, looking panicked. + + +"Yes?" + + +The barkeep sat on the edge of the bed, looking like he very much wanted all of this not to be happening. "That's the motto of the Niravian Crows." + + +"What does that mean? What are the Niravian Crows?" You asked. + + +"The assassins that cater to the crown." + + +"Oh." You couldn't make sense of this. Why would the king of Niravia target you? There had been no recent disagreement between Vinia and Niravia, nothing that would prompt an attempt to take your life. "Why would they want to kill me?" you say allowed to no one in particular. + + +"Well who are you? You someone important?" the barkeep asks. You're contemplating how to answer when he continues, "It doesn't matter. You need to get out of here, though." + + +You look out the sole window in the room and see that the sky is getting brighter. "Is there any way I can travel to the border? Fast?" you ask. + + +The barkeep thinks for a moment before responding, "There might be a merchant or someone with a cart, or a horse. That'd get you there quick." + + +"I'll look for someone then. Thank you." + + +"Don't mention it." The barkeep waves you off and stands up. "If you want, have some breakfast before you go. But I'd get out of here as soon as possible if I were you. Just make sure to tell me when you go so I can get someone to clean up the body." With that, he leaves. + + +You... +> Have breakfast +You figure you should have some food before heading out--you don't really know when your next chance to have good food is--so you gather up your things and head downstairs. There are a few people passed out around the room, but for the most part the place is empty. You think it looks different during the day, the open windows bringing in the early morning light, making the room look larger and more open. Some of the staff are cleaning off tables and preparing for the day, and the barkeep is behind the bar, cleaning dishes. + + +You go up to the bar and take a seat. "What's for breakfast?" you ask. + + +"Eggs and bread," he replies. + + +"I'll have that, then." The barkeep walks back to the kitchen and emerges a few minutes later with your food. Upon smelling the delicious food you realize how much the fight with the assassin took out of you, so you dig in. + + +"Listen," the barkeep whispers, leaning in, "there's a farmer waiting for you by the edge of the town. He's got a large cart that you can ride in. He's not going all the way to the border, but he'll get you there faster than if you were just walking." + + +You nod. "Okay. Thank you." + + +"Don't mention it," he says. "He wants to leave soon, though, so hurry up and eat." + + +"Wait," you say, "Could you tell me more about the Niravian Crows?" + + +The barkeep sighs. "There's not much more to say about them. They're assassins, hired by the crown. They do whatever they're told, even if it means they'll die." He looks at you for a moment, thinking. "You don't have assassins in Vinia?" + + +"We don't really have a need for them," you say. + + +The barkeep chuckles. "I doubt that, but if you say so." You're about to ask what he means when he says, "You should head out now, don't want that farmer to leave without you." + + +"Oh, alright. Thank you for everything, really." You finish up the last of your food and stand, picking up your bag and slinging it over your shoulder. You don't know how you've gotten so lucky, really, first with Jarven and his bandits and now with the barkeep. You thought Niravia was some depraved place, but the people you've encountered have been kind, generally. + + +You wave a final goodbye to the barkeep before leaving the inn. +> Head out + You leave the inn and are thrown back into the world that is Niravia. Sirra looks much different in the daylight. There are mothers and children running around the streets, some merchants set up along the sidewalk trying to sell their wares. People walk to their work, chatting with each other jovially. The sun, although just having risen, illuminates the streets. Despite the fact the town looks nothing like Dialla, it reminds you of your beloved city. The energy of the town lifts your spirits and encourages you to move toward the edge of the town. + + +As the buildings get more and more spaced out and the people become more sparse you see a man leaning against a cart with two bulls hitched to it. When you get closer, the man calls out, "Are you the kid I'm supposed to be drivin'?" + + +"Yessir," you tell him. The man is older, with a weathered look about him. + + +"Alright, hop in front," he tells you, climbing onto the seat on the front of the cart. He grabs the reigns in his hands and waits until you're settled next to him to leave. The bulls aren't fast creatures, but you know they're faster than you. Plus, you won't get tired from walking. + + +"I'm only following the main road for so long," the farmer tells you. While the path leading to Sirra had been shrouded in trees, the path was now winding through farmlands, flat and spreading for as far as the eye could see. You occasionally spot workers in some of the fields. "I'm going north, to Terrid--it's a small town on the way to the capital--so you're gonna have to walk the little bit back to the border. It's not too far, though. You can make it before sunset." + + +"Okay." + + +The farmer looks at you. "So tell me about yourself, boy. Got any reason for going to Vinia? Or maybe just visitin'?" + + +"I live in Dialla," you tell him. "I'm training to be a soldier. Some...unfortunate circumstances lead me to Niravia." + + +The farmer laughed. "I can tell ya don't wanna talk about it, it's alright, boy. But a soldier? That's excitin'!" + + +"It is," you give a small laugh yourself, "we're trained in defending ourselves and the people, and we get to patrol the city. I've met many colorful characters." + + +"I've always wanted to go to Dialla," the farmer confesses. "My wife went when she was little, once--said it was amazing. I've never even seen the sea." + + +"Doesn't Niravia touch the sea? In the south?" + + +"Yeah, but everyone says the beach there is rocky and ugly, nothin' compared to Dialla, I'm sure." + + +"Not many places can compare to Dialla, I'm afraid," you say. "You should visit sometime, we love having guests in the city." + + +The farmer smiled. "Maybe in the winter, when I don't have to care for the farm. I'd have to find someone to watch the animals, though. I won't ask my neighbor, that's for sure. He's a prick." + + +You laugh. "I'm sure you'll be able to find someone." + + +The rest of your ride with the farmer continues in the same fashion, simply talking about whatever crossed your minds. When you reach the small fork in the path, the farmer brings the cart to a stop. + + +"Well, this is where we part ways," he says. "Go ahead and take a few vegetables for your travels. Wouldn't want ya to starve, would we?" he chuckles. + + +"I couldn't--" + + +"Go ahead, boy. You can repay me when I come to Dialla. What's your name? I'll ask for ya at the guards' barracks." + + +"Just ask for Alexander," you tell him, going around to the back of the cart where the farmer's wares are. All of the fruits and vegetables look delicious, but you don't want to take too much, so you just grab a nice green apple and a ripe tomato. + + +"Alright, Alexander, you'll be seein' me in the future!" the farmer yells as he takes off down the north road. You wave before continuing on the main road. The sun is high in the sky, so you figure it must be around noon. + + +You walk down the seemingly endless path, the sun beating down on you with every step you take. Not long into the journey you become hungry and stop for some food, sitting on the side of the path as you munch contently on the food you received from the farmer. When you've finished, you stand up and continue on your way. + + +You feel like you've been walking for years--your feet ache and your mind is weary with doubt--before you see your goal: the border. The border of Vinia is marked very clearly by a ten meter high stone wall. All the fatigue you had suddenly left your body and you began running for the gate at the end of the road, giddy as a child running to play. + + +When you reach the large gates, the three guards stationed there look concerned at your happiness. + + +"Can we help you?" one of them asks. He's the shortest of the three. + + +"Yes," you say, catching your breath, "I would like to pass through to Vinia, please." Upon hearing you speak, the guards seem to lighten up a little. + + +"You're from Dialla, aren't you?" one of them--the youngest--asks. You smile and nod, knowing they must have picked up on the slight accent all native Diallans have. You're shocked by how happy you are to be around your own countrymen again. + + +"Open the gate!" the last guard--a woman--shouts, and a moment later the large gate leading into Vinia is lifted, granting you access back to your beloved land. + + +"Lucky for you, there's a group of guards heading back to Dialla tonight. I'm sure they'd be happy to take you along," the short one tells you, pointing you towards the barracks located along the stone wall. There's a large carriage next to it, the horses not yet hitched. You sigh in relief. + + +"Thank you," you tell the guards. + + +The guards lead you to the barracks, where you are given a fresh meal and new clothes before being loaded on the carriage back to Dialla. You chat with the other soldiers on the ride before letting yourself drift off to sleep, dreaming of the beautiful land you have been returned to. Before you know it, you are back in Dialla. +> Fast forward +You have been back in Dialla for about a week, and your parents have not let you out of their sight since your return. With your help, they plan to take action in some form against Niravia. + + +What do you do? +> Send spies to investigate +You decide to be cautious and utilize the spies you have at your disposal. + + +You dispatch multiple agents to Niravia--some working in the royal palace, some living in the capital city--and wait for their feedback. It only takes a few weeks for a report to be sent to you. It claims that spies have found documents sent by the King of Niravia ordering the kidnapping and subsequent public execution of you. + + +You and your parents barely have time to process this information when it is discovered that one of your spies has been discovered and Niravia's army marches towards the border. Now knowing that the Niravian crown planned on assassinating you to deplete your country's morale, your soldiers and citizens are filled with a passionate desire to crush this threat. All who can help in any way they are able to, so your army is well supplied and strong when it meets Niravia's. + + +Vinia easily prospers over Niravia. The battles are violent, but the Vinian army spares as many lives as possible--it's simply their nature. When the royal family is captured, however, the king is executed and the rest of the family banished. You personally take control of Niravia and all of its assets, and with the guidance of your parents you help make the country prosperous and peaceful, although it still has its rustic charm. + + +The end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have been back in Dialla for about a week, and your parents have not let you out of their sight since your return. With your help, they plan to take action in some form against Niravia. + + +What do you do? +> Send a letter to the Niravian royalty +You decide to take the diplomatic route and send a polite inquiry to the Niravian crown. + + +Within a few weeks, you receive your reply--in the form of an army marching towards Vinia. While they didn't actually tell you they planned on killing you, you think this is a pretty clear implication of their intentions, so you rally your own troops. Now knowing that the Niravian crown planned on assassinating you to deplete your country's morale, your soldiers and citizens are filled with a passionate desire to crush this threat. All who can help in any way they are able to, so your army is well supplied and strong when it meets Niravia's. + + +Vinia easily prospers over Niravia. The battles are violent, but the Vinian army spares as many lives as possible--it's simply their nature. When the royal family is captured, however, the king is executed and the rest of the family banished. You personally take control of Niravia and all of its assets, and with the guidance of your parents you help make the country prosperous and peaceful, although it still has its rustic charm. + + +The end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have been back in Dialla for about a week, and your parents have not let you out of their sight since your return. With your help, they plan to take action in some form against Niravia. + + +What do you do? +> Send an army to seize control of Niravia +You throw caution to the wind and order troops to seize control of Niravia. + + +Vinia easily prospers over Niravia, having taken them by surprise. Vinia hasn't taken part in any battle in centuries, after all. Most of the Niravians don't even put up a fight, and so many innocent lives are spared. When the royal family is captured, the king is executed and the rest of the family is banished. You personally take control of Niravia and all of its assets, and with the guidance of your parents you help make the country prosperous and peaceful, although it still has its rustic charm. + + +The end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have been back in Dialla for about a week, and your parents have not let you out of their sight since your return. With your help, they plan to take action in some form against Niravia. + + +What do you do? +> Lead your troops into battle +You throw caution to the wind and lead troops to into Niravia. + + +Both countries are largely unprepared for battle, causing this new war to last for months. Many lives are lost on both sides. Unfortunately, this includes yours. You're leading your troops into the capital of Niravia when an arrow land square in your chest, knocking you off your horse and causing you to be trampled by your troops. In the end, Vinia does prosper and seizes control of Niravia. Your parents get rid of Niravia completely, opting to simply make it part of Vinia, and proceed to reform the lawless lands. Soon after your death they adopt a baby boy and name it Alexander in your honor. + + +The end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have been back in Dialla for about a week, and your parents have not let you out of their sight since your return. With your help, they plan to take action in some form against Niravia. + + +What do you do? +> Forgive and forget +Much to the dismay of your parents, you decide not to hold a grudge about this whole thing. You made it back safely, after all. + + +A few weeks later, however, you discover that Niravia's army marches towards the border. Your troops are completely unprepared for the invasion, and so Niravia easily overpowers Vinia with its brutality. You and your parents are devastated by the loss of many innocent lives, so you decide together to sacrifice yourself so that this war might end. You are beheaded by the King of Niravia's own sword. Vinia is then plunged into a state of despair, and falls into ruin when the Niravian royalty does not know how to properly run the country. + + +The end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You have been back in Dialla for about a week, and your parents have not let you out of their sight since your return. With your help, they plan to take action in some form against Niravia. + + +What do you do? +> Assassinate the King of Niravia +You decide to get even with the King of Niravia. + + +Despite the fact you have no royal assassins like the Niravian Crows, you know you can be deceptive if you want to be. You send a letter to Niravia inviting the royals and nobles to a large peace-making ball in Dialla under the guise that you and your parents want to improve relationships with Niravia and forget all that's happened in the past. + + +Luckily the bait is taken, and you have a spy poison the King of Niravia's wine at the end of the night, and he is found dead the next morning. You then banish the rest of the royal family and you personally take control of Niravia and all of its assets. With the guidance of your parents, you help make the country prosperous and peaceful, although it still has its rustic charm. + + +The end.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"Who are you? Why are you trying to kill me?" You shout at the assassin. You've bested him, so now it's +time to get some answers. He looks up at you, his face vaguely angry, and remains silent. "Answer me!" you demand. + + +"Silence in life, silence in death," the assassin spits at you. + + +"Who do you work for?" + + +"Silence in life, silence in death." + + +You sigh; the guy's not going to give you anything. + + +You... +> Kill him +You have no patience or mercy for the man on the floor in front of you, and you know that if you do not kill him now he will most certainly come after you. With little hesitation, you bury your sword in the assassin's chest, and after you do so, he lets out a weak "Silence in life, silence in death," before the life leaves his body. + + +It's then that you hear a furious knocking on the door. You walk over and unlock it before opening it, revealing the barkeep and a few other workers standing in the hallway, all with worried looks on their faces. + + +"What the devil is going on in there?!" the barkeep shouts. When he looks behind you and sees the man lying dead on the floor, the color drains out of his face. + + +"He tried to kill me," you tell him, and he drags his eyes away from the body to inspect your face. He looks as though he is unsure whether to trust you or not. "All of you, go back to your rooms," he tells the people behind you. As they wonder off, you wonder how long they've all been standing out there. The barkeep comes into your room and closes the door. + + +"What happened?" he asks. + + +"I think he's an assassin, he came to my door and ambushed me," you reply. + + +The barkeep rubs his face, obviously overwhelmed by what's happening. "He was a strange one, I wouldn't be that surprised if he was a shady character." + + +"Unfortunately I couldn't get any information out of him. All he said was 'silence in life, silence in death.'" At these words, the barkeep froze. + + +"He said that?" he asked, looking panicked. + + +"Yes?" + + +The barkeep sat on the edge of the bed, looking like he very much wanted all of this not to be happening. "That's the motto of the Niravian Crows." + + +"What does that mean? What are the Niravian Crows?" You asked. + + +"The assassins that cater to the crown." + + +"Oh." You couldn't make sense of this. Why would the king of Niravia target you? There had been no recent disagreement between Vinia and Niravia, nothing that would prompt an attempt to take your life. "Why would they want to kill me?" you say allowed to no one in particular. + + +"Well who are you? You someone important?" the barkeep asks. You're contemplating how to answer when he continues, "It doesn't matter. You need to get out of here, though." + + +You look out the sole window in the room and see that the sky is getting brighter. "Is there any way I can travel to the border? Fast?" you ask. + + +The barkeep thinks for a moment before responding, "There might be a merchant or someone with a cart, or a horse. That'd get you there quick." + + +"I'll look for someone then. Thank you." + + +"Don't mention it." The barkeep waves you off and stands up. "If you want, have some breakfast before you go. But I'd get out of here as soon as possible if I were you. Just make sure to tell me when you go so I can get someone to clean up the body." With that, he leaves. + + +You...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Recognizing the danger in front of you--and remembering what happened during your last encounter with an assassin--you get into a fighting stance. You see your sword in your periphery and wonder if it would be smart to try to grab it, or if you should just try to use your hands. + + +You... +> Fight with your fists +You don't have time to grab a weapon, so you ready yourself for the assassin's attack, your fists raised. However, fists don't do much against a dagger. + + +The assassin charges, having a significant upper hand because of his weapon. You're able to get a few good hits in, but the assassin manages to stab you in the chest with his dagger. Stunned, you stumble back and fall to the ground as you slowly lose consciousness. + + +This is where you meet your end. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You dig into your food eagerly. The barkeep seems to catch on that you're not in the mood for talking and leaves, going to tend to another customer. + + +The food is good, and it fills you up quickly. When you're finished you wave the barkeep back over and hand him a few coins. + + +"How much for the room?" you ask. + + +"Fifteen," he tells you. You hand over the money. He counts it, looking satisfied. "You get room twenty-four. Second floor on the left." With that he leaves and goes into the kitchen. You put your remaining money back in your pocket and make for the stairs. Before you can reach them, however, a large, brutish man steps in front of you and looks down at you menacingly. You're not exactly a small person, and yet this man towers over you. + + +"Can I help you?" you ask. You really just want to get to your room and go to sleep, not be bothered by some giant. + + +"I don't like your face," he grunts. You're taken aback a little, because no one's ever insulted you like that before. + + +You... +> Ignore him +You don't want to cause any trouble, so you shrug off the boor's comment and try to walk around him. + + +"Are you ignoring me?" he shouted, enraged. You sigh. + + +"Listen, I really don--" + + +You're cut off when his fist slams into your jaw. You're knocked back by the force of his blow, and you crash into one of the tables behind you, your head colliding with a now-shattered plate. You feel the shards cut into your face, but pay it no mind. You get up and try to ready yourself for the fight, but the barkeep is suddenly in front of you and there are a few men holding back your attacker. + + +"Get him out of here!" the barkeep yells. The men comply, dragging the struggling brute out of the inn. The barkeep turns to you and asks, "Are you alright?" + + +"Yeah, I'm fine," you tell him, but the entire side of your face is throbbing. You know you'll be fine, though; you've had worse injuries than a bruised jaw before. + + +"Head on up to your room, I'll have one of the staff bring up some water and a washcloth so you can clean those cuts." + + +You nod and head up the stairs, the old wood creaking with every step you take. You go up to the second floor and take the second door on the left, just like the barkeep had told you. The room is small, with a bed and a side table, a small dresser in the corner, and a mirror hung on the wall above that dresser. A dim light comes from the candle on the bedside table. You place your bag on the bed and then look at yourself in the mirror. The side of your face is already starting to swell, and there are cuts on your temple and cheek from the plate you fell on. Your nose is bleeding, but you don't think it's broken. + + +A knock on the door pulls you away from the mirror. You open it and a man is standing there, a large bowl of steaming water in his hands and a washcloth hung over his arm. He's probably around your age, with close-cut dark hair and equally dark eyes. He's smiling, but it doesn't quite look genuine. + + +"For you," he says, extending the bowl out to you. + + +"Thank you," you respond, taking the bowl from him. You walk it over to the dresser and put it down. When you turn around, you see he's standing right behind you, although you never heard him enter. He holds out the cloth to you. He's got the same empty smile as before, and up close you notice how hollow his eyes look as well. You begin to feel uneasy and want him to leave. Luckily, when you take the cloth from him he turns and leaves your room, closing the door behind him. + + +Weird. + + +You take your time washing your wounds, wanting to make sure they don't get infected, before collapsing on your bed. All at once, your fatigue and the stress of your situation hit you. You've been kidnapped, rescued by bandits, and walked god knows how long--all in one day. You're grateful for the adrenaline that must have kept you going, but now that it's worn off your limbs feel achy and tired, your eyelids heavy. Whether you wanted to or not, you slowly drift off to sleep...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You decide to take the path to the right. + + +Within half an hour, the forest is completely dark. The only light is that coming from the full moon overhead. As you walk, you look up at the sky and see it's littered with hundreds of stars, twinkling like small diamonds. You can't see as many stars in Dialla, what with all of the lights in the city. As beautiful as the sight is, you know you'll enjoy it more when you're safe. + + +Your perseverance pays off, because a few minutes later you can see the lights of a town in the distance. You begin running down the path, eager to reach a place where you can relax a little. + + +The town--Sirra, you presume--isn't large, but it's big enough to have a few shops and an inn. There are a decent amount of people still walking the streets, and you think that Sirra must get a lot of people passing through it since it's so close to the border. + + +You find the inn easily enough--it's by far the largest building in the town, and most of the people on the streets are going to or coming from it. + + +You walk in and are met with an environment far different than that found in the inns in Dialla. The room is dark and smoky with a bard at the end playing a low tune. The room is filled with people, but the conversation isn't loud and boisterous, it's almost like a quiet hum. There's a bar to the right that spans the entire side of the building, and stairs directly to your left, most likely leading to the rooms upstairs. + + +You walk over to the bar and sit down at one of the stools. After a moment one of the workers--a stout, middle aged man with a large beard--comes over to you. + + +"What'd you like?" he asks. He's cleaning some glasses and doesn't seem particularly interested in you. You think he might be the barkeep. + + +"A meal and a room, please," you tell him. He laughs. + + +"Not from around here?" + + +"Excuse me?" You don't think you did anything that would shout to the world that you're not from the area, but this stranger obviously thinks otherwise. + + +"You're too polite to be from Sirra," he chuckles. "But never mind that--tonight there's either rabbit stew or meat pie. What do you want?" + + +You had stew earlier, so you go with the meat pie. The barkeep goes through a door at the far end of the bar--the kitchen, most likely--and comes back a moment later with your food. + + +You... +> Strike up a conversation +"So what's there to do in Sirra?" you ask the barkeep. + + +"Not much, really. Some people go hunting in the forest, and there are a few farms to the north. It's mostly travelers that pass through, so the people who actually live here live pretty ordinary lives. Not much different than anywhere else." + + +"It's pretty different than where I'm from." + + +"Oh? And where's that?" he asks. + + +"Dialla." + + +He laughs. "I knew you were too polite to be from here. So you're a city boy?" + + +"Yeah, part of the Royal Guard," you tell him proudly. When you say this you realize just how homesick you are. You miss your friends and your parents. But you know you're not far, so you don't let yourself get too upset. + + +"Then how'd you find yourself here?" the barkeep says, and he actually seems somewhat interested in what you have to say. + + +"It's a big mess," you tell him. You don't think you should just go telling people who you truly are. "I'm just trying to get back now." + + +"Well lucky for you, Sirra's not too far from the border. If you head out early I'm sure you could make it there by noon." + + +"I think I will, thank you." By now you've finished your meal, so you hand the barkeep a few coins. + + +"How much for the room?" you ask. + + +"Fifteen," he tells you. You hand over the money. He counts it, looking satisfied. "You get room twenty-four. Second floor on the left." With that he leaves and goes into the kitchen. You put your remaining money back in your pocket and make for the stairs. Before you can reach them, however, a large, brutish man steps in front of you and looks down at you menacingly. You're not exactly a small person, and yet this man towers over you. + + +"Can I help you?" you ask. You really just want to get to your room and go to sleep, not be bothered by some giant. + + +"I don't like your smug face," he grunts. You're taken aback a little, because no one's ever insulted you like that before. + + +You...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"I think I'll take you up on that offer," you tell the leader. "By the way, what's your name?" + + +"The name's Jarven," he tells you, puffing up his chest in an attempt to look more grand. + + +"No title?" you ask. + + +"Nope, just Jarven," he confirms. "My boys and I roam this forest and take what we need to survive." + + +When Jarven and "his boys" begin to walk back into the forest, you follow. You figure it isn't such a bad idea to get some food and water, and then you can try to figure out where you are and why you're there. + + +The camp doesn't end up being that far of a walk, which you're thankful for. It's situated in a decently sized clearing, with about ten tents surrounding the perimeter--one of which looks larger and nicer than all the others--and has a large bonfire in the middle. There are about ten other men scattered around the camp when you arrive, a few of them playing a card game and the others polishing some swords. It's not the standards that you're used to, but it'll do. + + +"Everybody," Jarven announces,"this"--he motions to you--"is Alexander. He'll be joining us for a little bit. Play nice." The men acknowledge their leader's words with a few noncommittal grunt and nods, but for the most part they ignore your presence. Jarven claps you on the shoulder and says, "Now, let's get you some food and drink, boy." + + +Jarven leads you to the largest tent, which, although nicer than the others, is still pretty shabby. The inside has a large carpet covering the ground, a cot on the far left side, a small table next to the bed, and a circular dining table to the right. There's a large chest at the end of the bed. "Go on, have a seat," Jarven tells you, waving in the direction of the table. You do as he says. "I'll be right back." + + +You are then left alone in Jarven's tent. + + +You... +> Sit and wait for him to return +While part of you would like to take a look around, you know it would be rude. You simply sit at the table, twiddling your thumbs, for a few minutes. When Jarven returns, he does so with a loud, "Food's ready!" and places a bowl of stew and a cup of something that might be water in front of you. It smells good, so you dig in right away. + + +"So, Alexander," Jarven says, taking a seat across from you, "you really from Vinia?" + + +You finish chewing your food before answering. "Yes," you tell him, "I live in Dialla." + + +"Hm. Then why are you here?" He asks. + + +"I told you before, the person driving the cart just kidnapped me one night. I don't even know where I am." + + +Jarven laughs a big, bellowing belly laugh. "Well you're not in Vinia, I can tell you that much." + + +You sigh, getting somewhat annoyed at the fact you're not getting a straight answer. "So then where am I?" + + +"You're in Niravia." + + +You're taken aback. "Niravia?" you ask. You feel slightly sick; Niravia is known for it depravity and poverty, and many of the knights back in Dialla have told you of the things they've experience in the country. + + +"The one and only." Jarven chuckles when he sees the expression on your face. "Aw, come on, boy, it's not that bad. I'm sure it's not as nice as Vinia, but--" + + +"How far are we from the border?" you cut him off. + + +He has to think for a moment, but he finally tells you, "Twenty kilometers, about." + + +You sigh in relief. That's not far enough too far. And Vinia is relatively small country, stretching maybe one hundred kilometers across. It's not an impossible distance to travel, should you choose to do so. + + +"I wouldn't get my hopes up if I were you, boy," Jarven says. "The journey to the border isn't an easy one. You'd probably die." + + +Do you...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>"My name is Alexander, I'm a knight in training from Vinia," you tell them. You don't think it would be smart to tell them who you really are. Just in case. + + +"Well, Alexander," the leader says, "how'd you find yourself in the back of some guy's cart? Got a debt you forgot to pay?" + + +"No, I have no idea what's going on. He just attacked me!" You tell them. Some of the men nod in understanding. + + +The leader seems to feel sorry for you. "Well, why don't you come with us back to ou camp? We can get you fed and watered." + + +You... +> Run away +"I...think I'll take you up on that offer," you lie, thinking it might be better for you to get away from these people as soon as possible. You have no idea what they might actually be planning on doing with you. "By the way, what's your name?" + + +"The name's Jarven," the leader tells you, puffing up his chest in an attempt to look more grand. + + +"No title?" you ask. + + +"Nope, just Jarven," he confirms. "My boys and I roam this forest and take what we need to survive." + + +When Jarven and "his boys" begin to walk back into the forest, you get up and follow for a few steps before suddenly turning and sprinting as fast as you can in the opposite direction. + + +You hear them calling after you, but you don't look back. You sprint through this unfamiliar forest, tripping on roots and rocks, for what feels like ages, and you eventually you have to stop to take a rest. You're lungs and throat burn and your legs are numb from running. You lean against a tree and look at your surroundings, but all you see is the emerald see of trees extending for as far as you can see. + + +Because of your gasping for air, you fail to hear the pack of feral wolves that creep up on you from all sides. When you see the first one you know there's something wrong with it; in its eyes is a bloodlust you've never seen in any animal before. When you try to back away from it slowly, you hear the warning growls of the other wolves behind you. + + +This is where you meet your end. <|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You attempt to say something, but the cloth in your mouth prevents you from making any intelligible sounds. + + +"Oh, right," the leader says, as if he's just noticing the fact that you're gagged and can't answer his question. He grabs the cloth covering your mouth, allowing you to spit out the cloth in your mouth. Your mouth is dry, your throat sore from thirst. "Now then, who are you?" he asks. + + + + + +> Tell the truth +"I am Prince Alexander of Vinia," you say. You see all of the men's eyes widen before they all burst out laughing. "What's so funny? Do you think I'm lying?" You demand. + + +"You're no more the Prince of Vinia than I am the the Queen!" The leader howls with laughter. When the laughter finally dies down, he says, "I like you, Alexander. Would you like to come with us back to our camp? We can get you fed and watered." + + +You...<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When you come to, you find yourself in the back of what appears to be a wooden cart with a large piece of cloth placed over top of you. You can hear the sound of the wooden wheels moving through the grass and dirt, the clop of a horse's hooves, and the melodious sounds of a forest. You try to move but find that your hands and feet are tied tightly with rope. There's a piece of cloth shoved in your mouth and another tied around your head (so as to prevent you from spitting out the piece in your mouth). + + +At first you can't recall why exactly you're in the back of a wooden cart, bound and gagged, but then it all comes rushing back to you; waking up in the middle of the night, being attacked by an unknown intruder. + + +Your mind is reeling, and you can't think of a reason why you would have been attacked in the first place. You don't think you've ever made any enemies, and your kingdom has never been hostile towards another kingdom. You think that maybe someone wanted ransom money, and thought kidnapping you would be the way to get it. That wouldn't be too far fetched. Vinia is arguably the most affluent country in Belacia, after all. + + +Just when you think you're beginning to make sense of what's happened to you, you hear the unmistakable sound of an arrow being shot and a shout from where you presume the driver of the cart would be. There is the thud of a large object falling on the ground, and then the cart suddenly lifts on one side as the wheels of the cart run over the object--presumably the body of your kidnapper. + + +"Clean work, boys, now let's get that cart!" you hear a gruff, booming voice yell somewhere not far from you. Was your cart being hijacked? + + +You hear multiple voices saying calming things to the horse pulling the cart and it slowly comes to a halt. The same voice as before, closer now, says, "Alright, let's see what this poor sod had with him." + + +Your cart had definitely just been hijacked. + + +The cloth that is covering you is abruptly pulled off of your body, and you wince at your eyes' sudden reintroduction to sunlight. When your eyes adjust, you see a group of five or so men standing over you. They all look thuggish and dirty. They look down at you in confusion. + + +"What's this?" the same voice as before, most likely the leader of the group, says. The man is the largest and dirtiest of all present. "Who are you?" he asks you. + + +You... +> Glare +You glare at the man. Does he not notice the gag in your mouth? + + +The leader chuckles. "Now now, no need for the nasty look. Lemme get that cloth for you." He grabs the cloth covering your mouth, allowing you to spit out the cloth in your mouth. Your mouth is dry, your throat sore from thirst. "Now then, who are you?" he asks.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit up, annoyed at having been woken up, and call out, "Who's there?" + + +The only response is an eerie silence that fills the air around you. You're beginning to wonder if you had imagined the sound when the door handle begins to turn ever so slowly. + + +Do you... +> Hide +You have a bad feeling about what's going on, so you quietly get out of your bed and make your way to the large wardrobe in the corner of your room. You open its door and get inside of it. It's a bit of a tight squeeze, but you manage to close the door. + + +You hear the small click of the door handle being turned completely followed by the slow creak of the door being opened. Now knowing that something isn't right, you cover your mouth with your hand in an attempt to quiet your breathing and stay as still as possible. + + +Everything is silent for a few moment when the wardrobe door is suddenly flung open. An unknown intruder grabs you by the hair and slams your head into the thick wooden frame of the wardrobe. You barely register the pain before you pass out.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You sit up, annoyed at having been woken up, and call out, "Who's there?" + + +The only response is an eerie silence that fills the air around you. You're beginning to wonder if you had imagined the sound when the door handle begins to turn ever so slowly. + + +Do you... +> Stay in bed +You have a bad feeling about what's going on, but you decide to remain in your bed. It could be nothing, right? + + +The door handle is turned completely, accentuated with a small click. The creaking sound the door makes as it is gently pushed open sends shivers down your spine. You begin to think that you should have hidden or grabbed your weapon, just in case. + + +That's when a dart flies from the darkness, landing directly in your neck. You pull it out, but it's too late; your vision begins to fade and you lose control of your body, slumping forward onto your blankets. The last thing you see before passing out is a figure emerging from the dark hallway, walking towards your bed.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are in your bedchamber, fast asleep. You are exhausted from your training, but when a large thump is heard outside your door, you awake. + + +What do you do? +> Stay in bed +You feel a little wary of what's going on, but you're too exhausted to really care. You roll over so your back is to your door and are content to go back to sleep. + + +As you drift off to sleep, you hear the distant click of the door handle being turned. Subconsciously you know you should care, but your sleep addled mind pushes it to the side. + + +Suddenly you are hit over the head with a large, blunt object. You have no chance to react or fight back before everything goes black.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are in your bedchamber, fast asleep. You are exhausted from your training, but when a large thump is heard outside your door, you awake. + + +What do you do? +> Open the door +You get out of bed and walk toward the door. It's best to confront whatever's happening head on, right? + + +However, just as you begin to reach for the door handle, it turns and the door is swung forward, straight into your face. You're shocked but still conscious as you fall back, now alert to the danger you may be in. You stand up and get into a fighting stance. + + +A figure, clothed in all black, emerges from the darkness beyond your door. They have the look of an assassin about them. + + +You charge forward, trying to catch the intruder off guard, but despite the fact you are superior to them in physical strength, they are faster than you and easily dodge your attack. As they do so, they stab you in the side with a small dart. You push them away and pull the dart from your side, but you can already begin to feel its affect--your side is beginning to numb and your head is getting foggy. + + +You are a soldier, though, stubborn and a fighter by nature, so you charge your assailant once again. However, they take advantage of your disoriented state and easily stab you with two more darts. It doesn't take long for you to collapse.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are standing outside an old rundown gas station at the edge of town. There are old broken cars surrounding the gas station and on the road. You are extremely hungry and haven't eaten in a few days. +> look in the gas station for food. +You search the gas station for food, but find nothing you can eat. +> search the cars for food. +You search the cars for food, you search three without success, but in the glove compartment of the fourth you find a box of crackers. +> eat the crackers. +They remind you of when you needed to eat a bland diet after your operation. You pat yourself on where you remember the incision was made. The scar healed long ago, but the brain remembers. The crackers weren't very nutritious, but some fuel in the tank is better than none. +> Continue to look for food in the building up ahead. +You find a moldy sandwich and some peppered beef jerky in an old lunchbox. +> Snack on the jerky while searching for more food. +The jerky is so hard your tooth falls out. +> look for a mirror to assess the damage +Blood is pouring from your mouth and the pain is unbearable. +> Press your tongue into the abscess to stop the bleeding. +A foul odor rushing into your nostrils and the pain becomes even worse.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Blood is pouring from your mouth and the pain is unbearable. +> Look for cloth or paper towel to stuff the gaping wound with. +You find a cloth on the floor. It looks like a used bandage, and is crusted with dried blood.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The jerky is so hard your tooth falls out. +> use pliers to pull the rest of the tooth +Passes out from the pain. Falls to the floor +> Check your things for alcohol or antiseptic. +You find a bottle of alcohol in your bag. You take a swig from the bottle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Passes out from the pain. Falls to the floor +> Search the area for medical supplies. +You find a bottle of Tylenol and struggle to open it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a moldy sandwich and some peppered beef jerky in an old lunchbox. +> Scrape the mold from the sandwich, taste a bite to see if it is edible. +The sandwich is stale. You throw it away and hope you don't get sick. +> Look for more food. +There is no more food around, but there's two bottles of beer. +> Drink one beer. +You drink the beer, but it tastes funny. You hope you don't get sick later.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no more food around, but there's two bottles of beer. +> Put the beer in your bag and walk towards the next store. +You grab the beer, leaving the building and heading toward the next store. You are hungry.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The sandwich is stale. You throw it away and hope you don't get sick. +> Take some medicine you saved. +It wasn't enought, you are food poisoned. +> take more medicine +The medicine does little to improve your upset stomach.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It wasn't enought, you are food poisoned. +> ride out the food poisoning +I try to drink some milk.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a moldy sandwich and some peppered beef jerky in an old lunchbox. +> Eat the peppered beef and throw the sandwich to the side +You discovered the peppered beef had gone bad when you developed cramps and diarrhea just hours after eating it. Fortunately, the food poisoning will pass and you will be all right. +> Look for water. +You find a dirty puddle. You know it is likely contaminated but you are so thirsty you bend down and lap it up. +> It tastes horrible and within a half hour your stomach begins having awful pains. +You feel nauseous and begin to vomit loudly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a dirty puddle. You know it is likely contaminated but you are so thirsty you bend down and lap it up. +> You change your mind and make yourself throw up the water. You gather the dirty water in a container and search for a way to boil or purify it. +You see something that looks like a lighter sticking out of a fanny pack caught on a tree, but it looks like you'll need help to get it down.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a dirty puddle. You know it is likely contaminated but you are so thirsty you bend down and lap it up. +> Get on your feet and keep walking. +You walk on. Hopefully, you can come across more water and food.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a dirty puddle. You know it is likely contaminated but you are so thirsty you bend down and lap it up. +> Consider the new lows you're hitting, lapping from a dirty puddle. +You decide it would be better to boil the water before drinking. You fill a container and proceed to start a fire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You discovered the peppered beef had gone bad when you developed cramps and diarrhea just hours after eating it. Fortunately, the food poisoning will pass and you will be all right. +> Look for more food. +You find some rotten vegetables, and nothing more. +> Throw the rotten vegetables against the wall, in anger. +Slime from the rotten vegetables bounces back, and some gets in your mouth.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find some rotten vegetables, and nothing more. +> Exit the room. +Locate new room.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a moldy sandwich and some peppered beef jerky in an old lunchbox. +> Continue to search for food +There is no more food around, and you start feeling hungry. +> Fast, its good for you +You fall down on the ground. You close your eyes. +> Wake up and forage for mushroom and berries, and hope that they're not toxic. +You eat one of the berries and immediately feel a wave of nausea.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You fall down on the ground. You close your eyes. +> Wake up and construct a trap for catching any rodents or animals that come through. +The trap manages to catch a large rat. You grimace looking at it, but it is meat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no more food around, and you start feeling hungry. +> Yell and hope someone is around +The silence from the darkness is deafening. +> Start crying. +You hear a noise. This causes you to stop crying. You are scared.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The silence from the darkness is deafening. +> Sit down and consider the options. +You sit and think about what to do. You wish there were someone to talk to.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>They remind you of when you needed to eat a bland diet after your operation. You pat yourself on where you remember the incision was made. The scar healed long ago, but the brain remembers. The crackers weren't very nutritious, but some fuel in the tank is better than none. +> Look for water for hydration and to fool the stomach until ore food can be found. +No water can be found in the cars, and suddenly you regret eating salted crackers: you can feel your tongue swelling up, begging for some hydration. +> Look for a different water source in the vicinity. +You hear running water nearby. You walk around the area and find a small creek. +> Drink the water. +finally found water, should take some water next time +> Look for a container to hold water. +You find a canteen on the shelf. You reach up and take it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>finally found water, should take some water next time +> Pee in the creek. +It feels good to pee. You let it all out and take off again.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You hear running water nearby. You walk around the area and find a small creek. +> Take a bath in the creek. +Swimming in the creek feels amazing. It is the first time in days that you don't feel like you are on fire. +> Create a fishing pole with nearby materials and catch some lunch. +You search for other people in the river.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Swimming in the creek feels amazing. It is the first time in days that you don't feel like you are on fire. +> Wash clothes and supplies in the fresh water. +You notice small specks in the water darting from left to right. The small specks you realize are actually biting insect that have created a rash on your legs and forearms.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No water can be found in the cars, and suddenly you regret eating salted crackers: you can feel your tongue swelling up, begging for some hydration. +> Keep walking to see if you can find a supermarket anywhere. +You see a building in the distance. You continue walking and see a sign in front of it. Luckily it is a supermarket. You hope that you will find something to drink there. +> Go inside. +The entire supermarket is ransacked, scavenged by wild dogs and other creatures. +> Go back outside. +Feeling disappointed by the carnage inside the ruined market your head hangs low with dispair. Then you think to yourself, "I must keep searching."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The entire supermarket is ransacked, scavenged by wild dogs and other creatures. +> Look for locked doors. +You check each door. Most of them are locked.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You see a building in the distance. You continue walking and see a sign in front of it. Luckily it is a supermarket. You hope that you will find something to drink there. +> Look around to see if anyone's watching. +As you head towards the building you check for others with the same idea. At this point, competition might become violent, but your quick, thirst-distracted search shows no one. +> Enter the supermarket through the main entrance. +The supermarket is very dark. You take out a flashlight to see inside.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you head towards the building you check for others with the same idea. At this point, competition might become violent, but your quick, thirst-distracted search shows no one. +> Go to the back of the supermarket. +You notice some unopened bottles of water, and begin to head towards them<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No water can be found in the cars, and suddenly you regret eating salted crackers: you can feel your tongue swelling up, begging for some hydration. +> Calm the mind to extend search for hydration. +You know it recently rained. You look outside to see if there are any containers that might have rainwater in them. +> drink from an old bucket +The water has a nasty oily flavor to it, but helps to assauge your thirst. But you need more water, and soon. +> Pour some water from the bucket into your water bottle. +You try to pour the water into your bottle, but it spills out. Now you need water more than ever.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The water has a nasty oily flavor to it, but helps to assauge your thirst. But you need more water, and soon. +> Take two empty buckets to the river to fill them with fresh water. +You fill the buckets. You know that river water is often dangerous to drink, the risk of illness is very high. But perhaps you can do something about the collected water later.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know it recently rained. You look outside to see if there are any containers that might have rainwater in them. +> find water in a gutter +You notice a house with leaves overflowing its gutter. After the recent rain, you know water should still be up there, so you start to climb up the nearby tree. +> Clear the gutter of leaves after placing a container under the gutter to collect water. +The container quickly fills up with water.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You notice a house with leaves overflowing its gutter. After the recent rain, you know water should still be up there, so you start to climb up the nearby tree. +> Drink water straight from the gutter. +The water tastes like dirt and is full of leafy pulp, but it is still refreshing. Then you notice the dead bird mixed in with the leaves in the gutter, and your stomach does a flip-flop.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No water can be found in the cars, and suddenly you regret eating salted crackers: you can feel your tongue swelling up, begging for some hydration. +> Look for puddles of water around the area. +You walk around trying to find pools of water. Eventually, you find a small puddle of water. You kneel next to it and take a sip. +> Fill your canteen. +The water tastes horrible, and you feel like throwing up. +> light a fire to sterilize contaminated canteen +The water sizzles and a small black smoke oozes from the canteen.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The water tastes horrible, and you feel like throwing up. +> see a canteen and hope it is clean. +You look into the canteen and take a drink. It tastes delicious.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk around trying to find pools of water. Eventually, you find a small puddle of water. You kneel next to it and take a sip. +> Wash your body. +Your skin begins to burn and you realize the water was contaminated. +> Throw up the water you drank a minute ago +Walk further away to find other pools of water that might not be contaminated.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your skin begins to burn and you realize the water was contaminated. +> Use what you can from your clothes and wipe off as much of the water as you can off your body +Your tongue begins to swell, and your quickly reach for some supplies to help numb the swelling.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>They remind you of when you needed to eat a bland diet after your operation. You pat yourself on where you remember the incision was made. The scar healed long ago, but the brain remembers. The crackers weren't very nutritious, but some fuel in the tank is better than none. +> Search the cars for clothing. +There is no clothing in the car. +> Search the car for water. +You find there is a bottle under the seat, but it is not a water bottle. It is Jack Daniels and is only half full. +> take a swig of Jack Daniels +After drinking the rest of the bottle, still in pain, I decide to rest to continue the journey. +> Start daydreaming while you walk. +While you're walking you stumble over some bricks on the road, as you are not paying attention to what is around you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After drinking the rest of the bottle, still in pain, I decide to rest to continue the journey. +> Go to your local Alcohol Anonymous meetings. +you become free from your gripping alcohol addiction, and gain a new addiction, candy.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find there is a bottle under the seat, but it is not a water bottle. It is Jack Daniels and is only half full. +> save the alcohol for a future antiseptic +I nick my knee on a metal post and disinfect it with the saved alcohol. +> Find something to wrap your wound with. +You find a medipack on the shelf. You open it, but there are no bandages in it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>I nick my knee on a metal post and disinfect it with the saved alcohol. +> Put the rest of the Jack Daniels back in your bag. +As the sun rises, it starts getting very hot inside<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no clothing in the car. +> Look for a store that has clothing. +There is a moldy coffee cup below the register and money in the till. +> Leave the money and look for clothing +money has no value in this situation +> Keep the money as fire fodder. +Continue to search for clothing, as the money is kept away for later use.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>money has no value in this situation +> Throw the coffee cup against the wall in anger. +The cup breaks as it hits the wall. You begin to cry.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is a moldy coffee cup below the register and money in the till. +> Try on different clothing and shoes +new clothes but still a lot to discover +> stay and explore +You find a half eten chocolate bar in the trash.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>new clothes but still a lot to discover +> be satisfied with what was has been found and leave +As you walk, you notice something in the toe of one of the shoes that looks like a gold nugget, but you wonder if gold has any worth in this new world.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no clothing in the car. +> See if the car runs for temporary transportation and shelter. +The engine starts with a roar: the car is still working! +> Drive the car +a tire bursts +> Pull over and inspect the burst tire. +You pop the trunk and start to get the spare from it. When you pause for a moment, you hear the distant rev of another car engine.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>a tire bursts +> Check the trunk for a spare tire. +You open the trunk and gag as a stench so thick it is almost tangible hits your face. The trunk is filled with several corpses in various states of decay. Some of the bodies are partially butchered. This was a cannibal's ride, and you just stole it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The engine starts with a roar: the car is still working! +> Check the fuel level of the car +In the summer of last year, I was driving towards Paris and it seemed I was distracted because I did not sleep enough and at one moment I found myself in a serious traffic accident. The car overturned and rolled several times. I had several fractures in my legs and my hands are good. Myself surrounded by my wife and children, despite all that hit me I was grateful that I am still alive +> Pay attention to the road ahead. +I pull in near a rest stop to decide on how to move forward.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>In the summer of last year, I was driving towards Paris and it seemed I was distracted because I did not sleep enough and at one moment I found myself in a serious traffic accident. The car overturned and rolled several times. I had several fractures in my legs and my hands are good. Myself surrounded by my wife and children, despite all that hit me I was grateful that I am still alive +> Look for a road map. +You find a road map on the sidewalk near where the car was totaled.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no clothing in the car. +> Cut the fabric cloth from the seats to create clothing or blankets. +You start feeling warmer with that makeshift blanket: that might do, for the night. +> Check for gas +The car still has half a tank, enough to turn on the heating for the night to further warm you up. +> Decide to conserve the gas and only turn on the heat if it becomes too cold to survive with just the blanket. +You check outside one last time before trying to get some sleep before another day. At least with the car you might be able to get a bit further tomorrow.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The car still has half a tank, enough to turn on the heating for the night to further warm you up. +> Use the car to drive to another location that may offer more shelter or ways to keep warm. +You find a shelter. There are others there. You are offered a bed and food to eat.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You start feeling warmer with that makeshift blanket: that might do, for the night. +> Lock car and sleep to regain strength +Feeling more secure and warm, you nestle into the hole in the cushion of the car seat you stripped, and start to dream of your old life. +> Wake up and check your surroundings. +You realize you are now in a location that is not the same as the one you were in when you fell asleep. Your heart starts racing and you feel very faint.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Feeling more secure and warm, you nestle into the hole in the cushion of the car seat you stripped, and start to dream of your old life. +> Wake up in the night to ensure you're alone and safe. +After looking around and checking the locks, you are able to fall back asleep in only a few minutes.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>They remind you of when you needed to eat a bland diet after your operation. You pat yourself on where you remember the incision was made. The scar healed long ago, but the brain remembers. The crackers weren't very nutritious, but some fuel in the tank is better than none. +> Begin to walk towards the nearest town. +You arrive and, despite the state of things, many store lights seem to be functioning. The first store you encounter is a gun shop. You decide to step inside. +> Take a gun and some ammo. +You are now protected against anyone who would try and do you harm, you step out into the street to search the supermarket next door +> Look around to see if anyone is watching +You see eyes in the window across the street. You lift your gun higher to hopefully scare them off before entering the supermarket. You don't want competition. +> Enter the supermarket. +There is nothing left in the supermarket. Looters must have hit it earlier.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You see eyes in the window across the street. You lift your gun higher to hopefully scare them off before entering the supermarket. You don't want competition. +> Fire off a warning shot. +Suddenly, a flock of birds disperse off of the roof of the supermarket, startling you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are now protected against anyone who would try and do you harm, you step out into the street to search the supermarket next door +> Make sure gun is loaded +Search the supermarket for supplies. clear the store of any threats. +> Search for a safe place to hideout. +You find an abandoned vehicle that should provide cover and keep you safe from others who would do you harm.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Search the supermarket for supplies. clear the store of any threats. +> Search the liquor store next door in case of future injuries. +You put some liquor in your bag and proceed onward with your day.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You arrive and, despite the state of things, many store lights seem to be functioning. The first store you encounter is a gun shop. You decide to step inside. +> Go into a different store to look for food. +Too your luck, you find a store a couple blocks away that has non perishable items in it. +> go into store and pack as many cans as you can +Lucky you, you find Bottled Water Packages, way too many of them. +> Take what you can and come back later. +You stay hydrated.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Lucky you, you find Bottled Water Packages, way too many of them. +> Drink as much water as you can. +You feel very refreshed and satisfied.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Too your luck, you find a store a couple blocks away that has non perishable items in it. +> Search fro something to carry back food +You find 5 can of BBQ beans. Beans have always been your favorite ever since your mom made them for you as a child. +> there are also cans of fruit +You take the cans of fruit. You can never be too prepared and you don't want to starve.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find 5 can of BBQ beans. Beans have always been your favorite ever since your mom made them for you as a child. +> no room in backpack for more. +You look in the store for a larger backpack so you can carry more supplies.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You arrive and, despite the state of things, many store lights seem to be functioning. The first store you encounter is a gun shop. You decide to step inside. +> Look for a weapon to hunt any animals with. +You bypass the firearms thinking of possible ammo shortages later on. Instead you choose a crossbow. +> Go inside store and see if there are bows and arrows +Towards the back, you see a picture of a crossbow on the wall. Full of hope you head towards the aisle you think might have bows and arrows. +> there are arrows on the floor but do not pick them up +You leave the arrows where they are. You walk past them, careful not to touch them.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Towards the back, you see a picture of a crossbow on the wall. Full of hope you head towards the aisle you think might have bows and arrows. +> pick up the arrows that are scattered all around the store. +You pick up the arrows and put them into your bag. They may come in handy later.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Towards the back, you see a picture of a crossbow on the wall. Full of hope you head towards the aisle you think might have bows and arrows. +> scan aisle to find crossbow +Locate crossbow at the end of the aisle.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Towards the back, you see a picture of a crossbow on the wall. Full of hope you head towards the aisle you think might have bows and arrows. +> walk quietly toward aisle without making noise +The aisle does indeed contain bows and arrows but they are behind glass.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You bypass the firearms thinking of possible ammo shortages later on. Instead you choose a crossbow. +> Go inside store, grab crossbow and try hunting +You search for something to kill for food but there is no sign of life. +> Pull out some of your precious food to use as bait. +You hide in a nearby tree, watching your precious bait, hoping to lure another starving creature to it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You search for something to kill for food but there is no sign of life. +> Eat your rations you found earlier. +You curb your hunger for now, but barely. You are very thirsty.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You arrive and, despite the state of things, many store lights seem to be functioning. The first store you encounter is a gun shop. You decide to step inside. +> See if theres any extra food anywhere stored in the shop. +You open a desk drawer and find snacks stored away. Hopefully they aren't stale. You take them with you in case you find nothing else. +> Hold on to the snacks +You put the snacks in your backpack and close it. +> close the drawer +With the drawer closed you turn turn to the cupboards to search for additional supplies.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You put the snacks in your backpack and close it. +> see what else is in the drawer +You try to find a knive to cut the meet.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You open a desk drawer and find snacks stored away. Hopefully they aren't stale. You take them with you in case you find nothing else. +> Grab some guns and ammo to kill food +After getting weapons and groceries, I'm looking for a car or something to look for more survivors. +> Find a run down car in the next field over. +The car has been used recently, somebody kept it running condition. The girl slides in under the dashboard and starts fiddling with wires. The engine cranks once, twice, three times. On the fourth crank it catches and fires up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>After getting weapons and groceries, I'm looking for a car or something to look for more survivors. +> Begin walking further out of town to look for a car. +You find one broken down a little ways down the road.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a car with the keys in the ignition and try to start it. Nothing happens. You keep looking and find another car that looks like it might work. You manage to get the engine started. +> drive around looking for any people or stores that might have supplies. +You drive around the town and see many boarded up buildings, but no people. Eventually you find a store that you think might have supplies. +> go inside the store and see if there are any supplies. +It looks like the store has been ransacked and all the shelves are empty. You manage to find a package of granola bars and a flashlight behind the counter. +> eat a granola bar. +It tastes just like a granola bar you enjoyed when you were younger. In an instant, you are transported to a school hiking trip. Your mind is awash by the mountain air and the bundles of sticks and leaves that formed the trail. Those days seem so long ago now... +> Look for other doors inside the store. +You find the store manager's door, with a set of keys hanging off the lock. The door, though, seems to be blocked from the inside. +> Push the door to uncover what is blocking it from the inside +You hear a scream from the inside: "Go away! I have a gun!" +> Continue to push the door. +You yell: "So do I!" and feel the door give a bit more. +> kick the door +You try to scape jumping off the window.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You yell: "So do I!" and feel the door give a bit more. +> continue to push the door +The door doesn't give. You look around to find something to ram against the door.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You hear a scream from the inside: "Go away! I have a gun!" +> Try to talk down the person behind the door. +explains that he is a good person, and tries to approach slowly +> Put your hands up to show you are not armed. +You put your hands up, but your tattered, duct-taped Remington 870 shotgun is still within reach. Good thing too, as the man reaches behind his back and pulls out a rusty, long blade. You side step, grabbing the shotgun, as the man thrusts out with the knife.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>explains that he is a good person, and tries to approach slowly +> Take your crossbow out and keep moving forward. +You arm yourself with the crossbow. You cannot be too cautious.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find the store manager's door, with a set of keys hanging off the lock. The door, though, seems to be blocked from the inside. +> Knock on the door, while being prepared for what is inside. +You swing the door open and find nothing there. You let out an audible sigh of relief. The door was only jammed. +> Search the manager's desk. +You find a note that was written by the last owner. You open up the note. +> the note is worthless so you throw it away +You notice that the managers desk has two drawers. One is empty, however the other is locked.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a note that was written by the last owner. You open up the note. +> the note has a cryptic message on it, but you keep it in case someone else can decode it +You move on from room to room looking for useful supplies.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You swing the door open and find nothing there. You let out an audible sigh of relief. The door was only jammed. +> Look at the coat rack by the door. +You find a hat, which will help a little when it gets cold at night, but not the warm coat you were hoping for. +> start looking for more things +There is no coat here but there is a worn rucksack hung over a chair.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a hat, which will help a little when it gets cold at night, but not the warm coat you were hoping for. +> go out to look for more places +You find two suitable places that may have clothing to scavenge.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find the store manager's door, with a set of keys hanging off the lock. The door, though, seems to be blocked from the inside. +> Attempt to break down the door with something heavy. +You look around and find a piece of wood. You take the wood and ram it against the door. Eventually, it starts to give. +> Keep ramming. +need to enter that room +> Hit the hinges and see if you can knock them loose. +Suddenly the door falls over, and you can now enter the room.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>need to enter that room +> Take a running start and ram the door as hard as you can. +The door opens, and you can't believe what you see inside.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look around and find a piece of wood. You take the wood and ram it against the door. Eventually, it starts to give. +> Take a break. +Sitting in the quiet, suddenly you hear a scratching noise coming from the other side of the manager's office door. +> Listen and try to identify if there is an animal. +The scratching intensifies. You notice the door begin to shake against the weight of the creature behind it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Sitting in the quiet, suddenly you hear a scratching noise coming from the other side of the manager's office door. +> Run away into the woods to find weapons. +You find a sharp rock and a stick. You begin to fasten a weapon.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find the store manager's door, with a set of keys hanging off the lock. The door, though, seems to be blocked from the inside. +> Use the keys to try to unlock a different door. +The storage room door opens up, and it's filled with shelves stacked with canned food. +> Find can opener +You open a can of tuna and notice it has a rancid smell. +> Open another can. +The next can you opened smells less foul but makes you gag as you think of eating it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You open a can of tuna and notice it has a rancid smell. +> Throw the opened can of tuna against the wall. +The tuna falls over the ground and the air is consumed with the rancid odor.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The storage room door opens up, and it's filled with shelves stacked with canned food. +> Move food to other area to prevent others from taking it +This is a huge treasure trove. You have enough to eat and plenty to trade as well. But you have to get it out of here first, and that means finding a vehicle. Just then, you hear the engines approaching. Raiders! +> Grab what you can carry and run. +You load up your hands and take off running. You hear footsteps behind you and pick up the pace.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>This is a huge treasure trove. You have enough to eat and plenty to trade as well. But you have to get it out of here first, and that means finding a vehicle. Just then, you hear the engines approaching. Raiders! +> Convince the raiders to let you join them. +The raiders are uncertain whether or not they should let you in, and begin to discuss amongst themselves.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It tastes just like a granola bar you enjoyed when you were younger. In an instant, you are transported to a school hiking trip. Your mind is awash by the mountain air and the bundles of sticks and leaves that formed the trail. Those days seem so long ago now... +> Check to see if there are any batteries in the flashlight. +There are batteries in the flashlight but they are dead. +> Shake the flashlight and see if the batteries might begin to work. +The flashlight flickers for a second, but then it dies again. At least you know it's working, you only need fresh batteries... +> Look for batteries. +batteries or batteries here is a new purpose now the night will come soon and we need light +> Try another building. +You find the ruins of a hardware store and dig frantically through the rubble.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>batteries or batteries here is a new purpose now the night will come soon and we need light +> Head all the way back to camp to see if you can barter for some. +You get back to camp and look for someone to trade with. However, you can't find a soul. Where is everyone?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The flashlight flickers for a second, but then it dies again. At least you know it's working, you only need fresh batteries... +> Throw it away - it's dead weight. +But you realize, fresh batteries will be a hard thing to come across. You hide the flashlight under a shelf for now. If you do happen upon batteries, you can come back for it when it's worth carrying. +> search in the ruins for batteries +You find one battery.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>But you realize, fresh batteries will be a hard thing to come across. You hide the flashlight under a shelf for now. If you do happen upon batteries, you can come back for it when it's worth carrying. +> continue on looking for food or other people who survived +You run your hand over a mountain of candy bar wrappers, but find them empty. Someone got to them before you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There are batteries in the flashlight but they are dead. +> Look through the rubble and see if you can find any new batteries for the flashlight. +You look through the rubble, but there is nothing but papers and trash. You trudge on, disappointed. +> Bend down when you see something glinting in the rubble ahead. +It is a large knife. You take it with you because you are sure it will come in handy. +> keep on walking +You walk for a mile or so and you need to take a break. You are sitting down to rest when you hear a noise.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It is a large knife. You take it with you because you are sure it will come in handy. +> use the knife to open the can that was next to it. +Push down as hard as you can to penetrate the can.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look through the rubble, but there is nothing but papers and trash. You trudge on, disappointed. +> Take a right turn. +There's a dim light at the end of the corridor. +> the light gives way to a city in ruins with buildings crumbling in dismay. Search for a stable path. +You find a worn footpath that leads toward the city.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's a dim light at the end of the corridor. +> The sound of voices echo through corridor, hide before the source of light arrives. +There is pulsating and rumbling bellowing through the corridor, run before it is too late.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There are batteries in the flashlight but they are dead. +> Tuck the flashlight into your pocket. +The flashlight some how turns on by itself. You take it out of your pocket +> Explore the surroundings with the flashlight. +You come across a book. You open the book. +> Skim the book for anything useful. +You find in the book a description of events that lead to the war. You also find some handwritten notes in the margins of the book.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You come across a book. You open the book. +> Throw the book in your bag to use for kindling later. +Your bag is getting heavier. You wonder if you might have to unload it at some point.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The flashlight some how turns on by itself. You take it out of your pocket +> Turn off the flashlight immediately. +Instead of shutting off, the flashlight begins to vibrate, and projects an image onto the ground. +> Watch in amazement as the image starts moving by itself. +You stand mesmerized, and feel yourself go into a trance.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Instead of shutting off, the flashlight begins to vibrate, and projects an image onto the ground. +> Drop the flashlight by mistake. +It shatters into pieces, and you somehow feel you've made a big mistake as a sense of dread creeps over you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There are batteries in the flashlight but they are dead. +> Look around for fresh batteries. +You can't find any more batteries, but you find a box of matches in a drawer. +> Light a match +who has no dog hunting with cat, but little by little I see the environment +> Give up on hunting for now. +You decide to eat from your rations rather than expend energy on hunting<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>who has no dog hunting with cat, but little by little I see the environment +> Store the matches in your bunker. +You feel hungry and notice you haven't eaten in a while<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You can't find any more batteries, but you find a box of matches in a drawer. +> Look around for something to use as a torch +Matches will only last so long, so you break off some wood and from a nearby chair to use as a torch. +> Look for oil or other fire accelerant. +You notice that there a propane tank that looks dented.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Matches will only last so long, so you break off some wood and from a nearby chair to use as a torch. +> Wrap some cloth around the wood. +The wood is now protected around the dampness of the air, as you start to look for other supplies.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It tastes just like a granola bar you enjoyed when you were younger. In an instant, you are transported to a school hiking trip. Your mind is awash by the mountain air and the bundles of sticks and leaves that formed the trail. Those days seem so long ago now... +> Check to see if the flashlight works. +You push the soft, mushy rubber button and a faint light emerges. You are familiar with this brand of torch and consider keeping it in case you find a better battery. +> put in jacket pocket +The battery doesn't fit in your pocket. You have to carry it around. You wish you had some kind of bag to carry it in. +> Take off jacket and wrap it around you like a sling and put the battery in it. +The battery is leaking, and acid soaks into your skin. +> Run as fast as you can to the nearest source of water. +You wash off the battery acid and try to get it off your jacket, but it has already eaten holes into its fabric. Another wasted effort, damn.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The battery is leaking, and acid soaks into your skin. +> Find the first aid kit in your bag as quickly as possible. +By the time you remove the acid, you now have an open wound on your right hand.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The battery is leaking, and acid soaks into your skin. +> clean skin +Your skin is stinging and you have nothing to soothe it with.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The battery is leaking, and acid soaks into your skin. +> a slight burn remains where the acid landed +The battery is heavy and cold against your skin<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The battery doesn't fit in your pocket. You have to carry it around. You wish you had some kind of bag to carry it in. +> Put the battery to your arm or leg and wrap your jacket around it to hold it in place. +The battery slips out of your improvised bag fashioned out of a jacket and falls to the ground. +> Leave it there, it's too big. +You decide that there might be a better solution to haul the battery around. A little while later you find an old grocery cart, perfect. You return to the battery and put it into the old cart.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The battery slips out of your improvised bag fashioned out of a jacket and falls to the ground. +> Put your jacket back on and take off your pants to try using them instead. +You place the battery in one of the pants legs, and wrap the pants around your waist.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You push the soft, mushy rubber button and a faint light emerges. You are familiar with this brand of torch and consider keeping it in case you find a better battery. +> look for dry twigs and kindling +Gather the kindling into a pile and light it up for a cozy fire +> Search for blanket material +You are able to find a old table cloth +> Sit close to the fire to warm up. +You feed the fire throughout the night and think about the day ahead.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are able to find a old table cloth +> Look for some meat to cook on the fire. +There is no meat available. You find some old cans of food.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Gather the kindling into a pile and light it up for a cozy fire +> Take off boots and dry out feet +You notice when you remove your boots that your feet are blistered and the heat of the fire makes the blisters more painful. +> put boots back on. +The boots hurt as you slide them on your feet. You wince in pain and try not to cry.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You notice when you remove your boots that your feet are blistered and the heat of the fire makes the blisters more painful. +> wrap feet in bandages. +Your feet, now bandaged, feel more comfortable. However you are concerned about tomorrow, with your feet injured you won't make it very far.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You push the soft, mushy rubber button and a faint light emerges. You are familiar with this brand of torch and consider keeping it in case you find a better battery. +> Turn off the light to conserve what battery it has. +You walk out of the store and back to the car. Looking around in the low light there is a column of smoke to the west. No sound but the wind playing with some leaves. +> Head towards the smoke. +You come across a campfire. You see a woman around the fire. +> Ask someone about the cause of the smoke. +You find out from the woman that there is a small settlement of nomads who are taking refuge<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You come across a campfire. You see a woman around the fire. +> Drive far away from the smoke. +As you drive away, the woman starts running towards your direction.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk out of the store and back to the car. Looking around in the low light there is a column of smoke to the west. No sound but the wind playing with some leaves. +> Go in the opposite direction. +You begin to wonder whether you made the right decision. It is lonely out here and the smoke indicated a sign of life. You stop in your tracks and consider turning back around. +> Turn back and go towards the smoke. +You walk, following the smoke. You get to a large fire. You yell out for help.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You begin to wonder whether you made the right decision. It is lonely out here and the smoke indicated a sign of life. You stop in your tracks and consider turning back around. +> Keep moving farther from the smoke. +As you move closer to the smoke you see the faint glow of a burning fire, it is unclear if their is anyone nearby the fire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You push the soft, mushy rubber button and a faint light emerges. You are familiar with this brand of torch and consider keeping it in case you find a better battery. +> Search for more batteries and flashlights. +You find 2 more flashlights in a drawer in a back room, there is also another pack of batteries there. +> Check operation of new flashlights +The first flashlight is dead, but the second flickers, then projects an eerie greenish glow onto the floor. +> Stow the flashlight in your backpack and continue to search. +You find some more water and canned food. You decide to start a fire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The first flashlight is dead, but the second flickers, then projects an eerie greenish glow onto the floor. +> Use the flashlight to look closer around the room. +With the additional light from the flashlight you see that this room was once an office. Spreadsheets of forgotten financial information lay on the floor.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find 2 more flashlights in a drawer in a back room, there is also another pack of batteries there. +> Take batteries and put them in pocket +Look for anything else to aid in your survival and find a first aid kit. +> Open all of the cabinets in the next room. +The cabinet doors are all open. Unfortunately, there is nothing to be seen in them.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Look for anything else to aid in your survival and find a first aid kit. +> Make signs advertising your items for sale. +The signs draw attention of travelers on the path. They come to see you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It tastes just like a granola bar you enjoyed when you were younger. In an instant, you are transported to a school hiking trip. Your mind is awash by the mountain air and the bundles of sticks and leaves that formed the trail. Those days seem so long ago now... +> Check the storage rooms for tools and supplies. +It's clear that whoever ransacked the store, was someone really organized and with a means of transport: even the storage rooms are completely empty. +> Look in every corner for any possible tools and supplies. +There is nothing left: the only use for the storage room is as a safe place to sleep in. +> Leave the storage room. +You continue on and head outside. Down the road you see another building and decide to check it out. +> Find materials to build a bed to sleep on. +You find some soft hay and a few wooden planks.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You continue on and head outside. Down the road you see another building and decide to check it out. +> Climb up the side of the building. +You see a ladder on the side of the building and begin to walk up to a window.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is nothing left: the only use for the storage room is as a safe place to sleep in. +> Lay down for a nap. +just as your about to fall a sleep you hear a sound of voices in the background. You know you need to get out before the men find you. You frantically look around for another exit, but there isn't one except for a narrow ventilation shaft. You hear the men begin to enter the store and rummage around. you pop open the shaft even and begin your tight escape to the unknown +> Turn on your flashlight and begin to crawl, knowing you'll make noise. +You slowly crawl across the floor. Thankfully, the men don't hear you. When you get close enough, you stop to listen to what they are saying.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>just as your about to fall a sleep you hear a sound of voices in the background. You know you need to get out before the men find you. You frantically look around for another exit, but there isn't one except for a narrow ventilation shaft. You hear the men begin to enter the store and rummage around. you pop open the shaft even and begin your tight escape to the unknown +> Close the shaft behind you and sit and wait in the darkness. +You narrowly escape being caught.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It's clear that whoever ransacked the store, was someone really organized and with a means of transport: even the storage rooms are completely empty. +> Look underneath all large items for tools and supplies. +Hidden away under a shelf you find a hammer, screw driver, and a first aid kit. +> take the tools and hide them in your bag +You tend to your cuts and bruises with the first aid kit and using the hammer, screwdriver and scraps from the ruins begin to construct a shelter. +> Go back in the building to see if there are any supplies you missed. +You go back into the building and look around. You see a saw and nails under the shelf.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You tend to your cuts and bruises with the first aid kit and using the hammer, screwdriver and scraps from the ruins begin to construct a shelter. +> Push on your shelter to see if it is sturdy. +The shelter holds firm and seems very secure.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Hidden away under a shelf you find a hammer, screw driver, and a first aid kit. +> leave the tools incase someone else needs them more +The tools are heavy, and you don't have any use for them right now, so you grab a few bandaids from the first aid kit and move on. +> Go left down the hallway to find a locked door. +You look for the key to the door. You do not have the key.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The tools are heavy, and you don't have any use for them right now, so you grab a few bandaids from the first aid kit and move on. +> Go right down the hallway to keep searching. +You walk down the hallway. It is dark and lonely here.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It's clear that whoever ransacked the store, was someone really organized and with a means of transport: even the storage rooms are completely empty. +> Keep travelling to find a different storage room. +You walk to a different door and try to get in but it is locked. You look around to see if you can find the key. +> Check the under the mat for key +There is a key there. You use it to open the door and the room is fill with supplies. +> Find something to load supplies into. +You find a cart, and start to throw supplies into it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is a key there. You use it to open the door and the room is fill with supplies. +> Choose which supplies are most valuable and leave the rest. +You take the canned food and leave the rest. Then you head out the door.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk to a different door and try to get in but it is locked. You look around to see if you can find the key. +> Make noises to see if someone is inside +Just in case, you bang on the door loudly before listening for any rustling behind it, to see if someone might be waiting for you. +> Get out your knife and bust down the door. +The door splinters and falls into the room with a loud bang. As your eyes adjust to the darkness you hear the sound of footsteps approaching rapidly.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Just in case, you bang on the door loudly before listening for any rustling behind it, to see if someone might be waiting for you. +> Pick the lock. +The lock won't give, and you get a large cut on your hand in the process.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It's clear that whoever ransacked the store, was someone really organized and with a means of transport: even the storage rooms are completely empty. +> Look for the person who cleaned out the storage room. +You look around, but see no one. You try calling out, but no one responds. +> Leave the store, see if you can spot tire tracks +You see tire tracks leading over the hill, towards the ruins where you've seen strange lights at night. +> go to the light at night +You approach and hear two voices one male another female.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You see tire tracks leading over the hill, towards the ruins where you've seen strange lights at night. +> I decide to stay still +You start a fire and prepare your last can of food.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look around, but see no one. You try calling out, but no one responds. +> Make as much noise as possible +A person comes running out. She scares you to death. +> Tell her that you mean her no harm. +She gives you a bewildered look and starts to shriek<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A person comes running out. She scares you to death. +> Put your hands up to signify that you're harmless. +She understands your gesture, but slowly starts to back away from you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you leave the store you notice movement out behind your car. A man steps out with a hungry look in his eyes. His clothes are in tatters and he is carrying a crowbar. +> run at the man and attack him. +You run forward to attack the man. His crowbar crashes into your chest and you fall to the ground. He kicks you a few times and then grabs your granola bars and runs off. +> go after him. +You go after him. As you try and stand up though you realize you're in extreme pain. You think one of your ribs is broken. You manage to get yourself on your feet, but realize catching him is impossible. +> look for something to wrap your chest with. +There's nothing around, so you resort to taking off your pants and wrapping it around your chest. There's a mild draft right now... +> Check for other injuries. +There are some superficial cuts on the arms, but nothing else seems to be broken. +> Search for clothes or blankets for warmth. +There are boxes on shelves on the wall. You check them for supplies and eventually come across a tote full of blankets. You take one of the blankets out of the tote. +> Wrap it around yourself. +You are starting to feel warm again. You can feel your fingers. +> Count your fingers just for fun. +You warm up for a bit before collecting more supplies.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are starting to feel warm again. You can feel your fingers. +> Turn the boxes into shoes. +You remove the boxes from the shelves, placing two on your feet as makeshift shoes. Your feet begin to warm up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There are boxes on shelves on the wall. You check them for supplies and eventually come across a tote full of blankets. You take one of the blankets out of the tote. +> Stuff it in your bag. +Your bag is now too full to hold anything else so you remove the other contents so all you are carrying is the blanket. You look around for something to use as a second bag. +> Make a rucksack out of a dirty blanket. +The blanket has too many holes, and will not hold anything.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your bag is now too full to hold anything else so you remove the other contents so all you are carrying is the blanket. You look around for something to use as a second bag. +> Create a backpack out of the cardboard box. +While the cardboard box is uncomfortable, it serves its purpose to carry your supplies.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There are some superficial cuts on the arms, but nothing else seems to be broken. +> Find water and rinse the exposed limbs to help clean cuts. +The water is freezing cold, but at least it helps you recover from the shock of being so brutally attacked. +> Dry off and build a fire. +The fire comforts you for a brief moment. +> Watch as the fire comes to life and begins to chase you. +You decide to go look for food and water after regaining strength.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The fire comforts you for a brief moment. +> Fall asleep by the fire. +You stay warm throughout the night and wake up to begin the day. Hunting for food and water is on your agenda.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The fire comforts you for a brief moment. +> i go to the store +I am unable to find anything valuable to scavange.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The fire comforts you for a brief moment. +> go to the store +You reach the long abandoned store hoping that you might find food or other supplies still left inside. The windows are shattered, probably from previous scavangers.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The water is freezing cold, but at least it helps you recover from the shock of being so brutally attacked. +> Dry off and keep moving. +It is starting to get dark. You must find shelter soon. As you come up over the hill you see a cave. Looks like a good place for shelter. +> Walk into the cave. +You walk into the cave and quickly look around to make sure that the cave is safe.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It is starting to get dark. You must find shelter soon. As you come up over the hill you see a cave. Looks like a good place for shelter. +> Keep walking, leave the cave behind. +You end up sleeping outside unprotected.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There are some superficial cuts on the arms, but nothing else seems to be broken. +> Look around you +There's a small river on your left, running along the road. On your right you can see a huge building a couple of miles away. +> Stop to take a closer look at the river bank. +There must be animals near the river, looking for water, so you sit quietly near the bank in the hopes of fresh meat. +> Find something to use as a weapon. +You look around for a weapon. You pick up a large stick from the ground.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There must be animals near the river, looking for water, so you sit quietly near the bank in the hopes of fresh meat. +> Refill your water bottle from the river. +You bring the bottle to your mouth. The water is muddy, but it's refreshing.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's a small river on your left, running along the road. On your right you can see a huge building a couple of miles away. +> Pass by the river and head for the huge building. +You need water, but the river is probably contaminated. You decide to search for bottled water in what looks like an office building ahead. +> Stand outside the building with raised hands. +Nothing is accomplished by raising your hands. You put them back down and look around.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You need water, but the river is probably contaminated. You decide to search for bottled water in what looks like an office building ahead. +> Stand outside the building and yell "Is anyone in there?" +You don't hear any response, so you cautiously approach the building entrance.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There are some superficial cuts on the arms, but nothing else seems to be broken. +> Lie down and groan +There is no response and no sound except the sound of the wind blowing. +> Try and get back up. +You manage to get up, but you feel faint. +> Feel the back of your head to see if you're bleeding. +AS you look at your hand there is only a glimpse of fresh blood.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You manage to get up, but you feel faint. +> Look around to see what attacked you. +You see no-one but you feel distinctly uneasy. You get up and tentatively walk a few steps.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no response and no sound except the sound of the wind blowing. +> Start crying. +A dirty and emaciated dog appears in answer to your cries. +> Scratch behind it ears. +The dog seems to like that. You decide to keep him. You'll name him Mr. Fluffy.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A dirty and emaciated dog appears in answer to your cries. +> Follow the dog to water and food. +The dog shows you where the food and water is. You collect as much as you can in your bag.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's nothing around, so you resort to taking off your pants and wrapping it around your chest. There's a mild draft right now... +> Look around for ways to make the room warmer. +At that moment Someone runs in yielding a blanket and lantern. +> grab gun +You take the gun and aim it. You recognize the person that is walking in, so you put the gun down. +> Ask what their business is +You tell them that this is your place, and there isn't much to share. You ask if they plan to stay, while glancing at your gun. +> Wait for their answer. +They tell you they are hungry and ask if you have any food to spare.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You tell them that this is your place, and there isn't much to share. You ask if they plan to stay, while glancing at your gun. +> Put the gun back into the holster. +The other person brandishes a knife, and lunges at you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You take the gun and aim it. You recognize the person that is walking in, so you put the gun down. +> Ask what supplies they have +The grizzled trader does not have much to offer. Except, he says, with a wily smile, for an old map that you might be interested in. Not just any map, but one that might lead to a major survival cache, if you survive the trip. +> Ask how much the map is +The man tells you the map is not for sell. You will have to find something else to trade for it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The grizzled trader does not have much to offer. Except, he says, with a wily smile, for an old map that you might be interested in. Not just any map, but one that might lead to a major survival cache, if you survive the trip. +> Take out your gun and threaten the trader +The man raises his hands in alarm. He gives you the map and runs away.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>At that moment Someone runs in yielding a blanket and lantern. +> yell "who's there" +You listen, but no one answers. You look around to see if there is a place for you to hide. +> Hide and wait to see what the person does. +The person finds you, runs up to you and hits you on the head with the lantern. +> Pass out. +You awaken in the dark. Your vision is blurry, but you make out the shapes of two human-like figures illuminated by candelight.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The person finds you, runs up to you and hits you on the head with the lantern. +> Scream in anger and fight back. +You wreste a few moments and see your opening for an attack.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You listen, but no one answers. You look around to see if there is a place for you to hide. +> yell "I'm armed! Don't come any closer!" +You chamber one the precious 5.56 rounds into your scarred but reliable rifle. You don't want to shoot if you don't have to, and try one more time to get a response. +> yell again aiming the shotgun where the noise came from +The shotgun blasts through the air. You hear someone yell.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You chamber one the precious 5.56 rounds into your scarred but reliable rifle. You don't want to shoot if you don't have to, and try one more time to get a response. +> shoot up +Find an animal that I can now eat for dinner.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>At that moment Someone runs in yielding a blanket and lantern. +> Take the blanket and lantern from person +You feel a lot warmer, the light from the lantern glints against a piece of metal in the corner of the ruins. You pick it up to find a can of tinned tuna. +> Eat the tuna. +look for more stuff +> Check the expiration date on the tuna. +The tuna expired 11 years ago. God, how the world has moved on.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>look for more stuff +> Put your matches in the old tuna tin. +Take off your shoes and try to relax.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>look for more stuff +> You find some evaporated milk +look for people<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>look for more stuff +> You find a torn piece of paper +You try to read what is written but it appears to be in a foreign language. You put it in your pocket in hopes someone else can understand it.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You feel a lot warmer, the light from the lantern glints against a piece of metal in the corner of the ruins. You pick it up to find a can of tinned tuna. +> Put the can in the backpack. +Your stomach begins to grumble as you think about the tuna in your bag but you have no can opener. +> look for a something sharp to cut the can open. +You find a rock that you could use to smash the can open.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Your stomach begins to grumble as you think about the tuna in your bag but you have no can opener. +> Continue walking looking for more food. +You come across an abandoned backpack and reach inside to find a box of crackers<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>At that moment Someone runs in yielding a blanket and lantern. +> Ask to use the blanket and lantern the person has +The newcomer looks shocked to find you there, and runs back out, screaming for help. +> Follow them and explain I am not a threat +right now everyone is afraid but they need help +> Jump behind some bushes to determine if there is danger. +You watch from the bush. You are able to see everything that is going on.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>right now everyone is afraid but they need help +> Throw hands in the area to signify that there is no threat. +You slowly approach into the camp, talking in a pleasant, reassuring voice, your empty hands up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The newcomer looks shocked to find you there, and runs back out, screaming for help. +> Sit and wait +Suddenly, six more newcomers arrive. They look angry. +> Pull out the gun. +The six newcomers stop and eye you cautiously.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Suddenly, six more newcomers arrive. They look angry. +> Smile and pull up your open hands. +One of the men walk up to you and take your bag. You die a little inside, but want to stay on their good side.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's nothing around, so you resort to taking off your pants and wrapping it around your chest. There's a mild draft right now... +> Check for other injuries. +You're severely bleeding from the right calf: taking off the pants exposed the deep cut, and the blood is pouring down into the shoe. Moving around won't be easy, nor pleasurable. +> Try to find a kit to stop the bleeding. +You open the kit and try to find bandages. You find the bandages and open the package and begin wrapping it around your wound. +> Eat some food to regain strength. +The food leaves you feeling more energized and the wounds do not hurt quite as much. +> Search the area for firewood. +You obtain firewood and begin to set up camp for the night<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The food leaves you feeling more energized and the wounds do not hurt quite as much. +> Search the area for a comfortable place to rest for the night. +You find a place nestled in the trees. You'd rather stay in a building, but the trees will offer enough shelter.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You open the kit and try to find bandages. You find the bandages and open the package and begin wrapping it around your wound. +> Take a nap to regain strength. +You wake up hours later, feeling much better. +> Reach for the first aid kit. +You open the kit. There is nothing in there that you can use.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wake up hours later, feeling much better. +> Unwrap your wound to take a look. +You tenderly remove your wound coverings to see how your wound is healing. You gasp from the pain.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You're severely bleeding from the right calf: taking off the pants exposed the deep cut, and the blood is pouring down into the shoe. Moving around won't be easy, nor pleasurable. +> Bandage your calf with your pants and keep moving. +Every single step sends painful shockwaves through your body, but you need to get off the road immediately. +> Find Pain Med's +crawl to survive and find destiny +> Lay on the ground, waiting for the end. +You wake up hours later covered in your own vomit. You look around wondering how you are still alive.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>crawl to survive and find destiny +> Slap yourself to avoid fainting. +Ouch! That hurt. At least you are awake now.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Every single step sends painful shockwaves through your body, but you need to get off the road immediately. +> Look for survivors that possibly have medical experience +There is no one around, and you feel worse and worse. +> Find the closest area that will provide shelter for you to rest and gain some strength to look for medical supplies. +You begin your search the next day to look for food, medicine and water.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no one around, and you feel worse and worse. +> Start searching for anything that can aid you in providing first aid to your injury before expending the little energy you have left. +Exhausted from the search, you fall over and gasp for air.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You're severely bleeding from the right calf: taking off the pants exposed the deep cut, and the blood is pouring down into the shoe. Moving around won't be easy, nor pleasurable. +> Find materials to make a tourniquet to stop the bleeding. +You look around and see a medical kit. You open it up and find bandages. You use those to wrap around the wound. +> look for more supplies that can be used to further wrap the wound +Next to the medical kit is a stack of towels. You try to tear them into strips to wrap your wound further. +> Put some extra towels in your bag. +Gather belongings and stand up. Head out to search for food.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Next to the medical kit is a stack of towels. You try to tear them into strips to wrap your wound further. +> Use the other towels as a pillow and lie down to rest your wound. +You wrap up the other towels into a makeshift pillow. You put your head down to rest.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look around and see a medical kit. You open it up and find bandages. You use those to wrap around the wound. +> take a nap and rest +Rest to recover, but you haven't eaten anything yet and you're kinda weak +> Chop off your leg for something to eat. +Arrrrrgh! The pain is unbelievable. You hack a piece of meat off of your leg and try to eat it. Unfortunately, you vomit and are in a worse predicament.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Rest to recover, but you haven't eaten anything yet and you're kinda weak +> Set up a snare to catch an animal. +It worked! You have a rabbit in the net. You think it will make a fine meal.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You're severely bleeding from the right calf: taking off the pants exposed the deep cut, and the blood is pouring down into the shoe. Moving around won't be easy, nor pleasurable. +> Clean and dress the wound with items available. +The wound feels better. You wrap some material around your leg to protect it even more. +> continue to search for supplies +There's some pieces of hard wood that could be used to splint the leg. +> Creat a makeshift crutch. +It's easier to walk using the crutch. You try to keep the weight off of your leg.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's some pieces of hard wood that could be used to splint the leg. +> Pick up the wood. +You pick up the wood. It feels brittle to your touch.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's some pieces of hard wood that could be used to splint the leg. +> Instead of using the wood for a splint it is better used as a fire to keep warm for the night so you begin trying to gather anything around that will help keep the fire going. +Your leg feels even sorer the next morning.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's some pieces of hard wood that could be used to splint the leg. +> The wound feels better so you skip the leg splint and keep searching for other supplies- you find a lighter and a few canned goods. +You decide to start a fire and cook some of the food you found.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The wound feels better. You wrap some material around your leg to protect it even more. +> lay down and rest +You do not want to get up because your calf is throbbing so you decide to stay put until morning. +> sleep peacefully +When you awake there is a loud bang outside.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You do not want to get up because your calf is throbbing so you decide to stay put until morning. +> stay alert all night +You manage to stay up all night. However, now you feel more tired than ever.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's nothing around, so you resort to taking off your pants and wrapping it around your chest. There's a mild draft right now... +> Look around for ways to make the room warmer. +You look around but you're starting to get faint and light headed. Your last thought in the split second before you pass out was to wonder if you'll have enough air by the time you hopefully wake up. +> Stay calm to not waste oxygen. +You wake up and are in another room. You have been saved by a girl. +> it should be saved my batchmate +My batchmate and I join forces. +> Develop a plan for survival together. +You begin to scout locations for a stronghold and divide remaining supplies to be shared equally.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>My batchmate and I join forces. +> Spy on the girl to make sure that she is trustworthy. +You see that she is making a deal with your sworn enemy.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wake up and are in another room. You have been saved by a girl. +> thee must be last surivor so she helped me +You team up with this girl to increase chance of surviving. +> Ask your new partner if she has any special skills. +The girl explains to you that her father was locksmith before the bombs fell, and he taught her everything he knew. She can pick or bypass almost any lock. She can even hotwire cars, if you should be so lucky to find one that still has a working battery.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You team up with this girl to increase chance of surviving. +> Tell her that you are grateful that she saved your life. +She gives you a knapsack filled with survival supplies.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look around but you're starting to get faint and light headed. Your last thought in the split second before you pass out was to wonder if you'll have enough air by the time you hopefully wake up. +> Look for an escape route while simultaneously looking for clothing. +There's a room with a light on a few yards away and it looks warm. You try to find the strength to pull yourself up. +> Go into the room with the light +You see a candle burning on a small table. You walk over to the table. +> Look around the room. +There are many items in the room. You look at them carefully.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You see a candle burning on a small table. You walk over to the table. +> Pick up the candle. +The candle breaks in your hands. You drop it back down to the floor.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's a room with a light on a few yards away and it looks warm. You try to find the strength to pull yourself up. +> Pass out somewhere where you can hide +Vivimos en un mundo maravilloso que está lleno de belleza, encanto y aventura. No hay fin a las aventuras que podemos tener, si sólo las buscamos con los ojos abiertos +> Knock on your skull and question why you suddenly know spanish. +You have faint memories of a childhood long forgotten. Your mother knew spanish, at least you think that is correct, your memories are a bit hazy. Perhaps you should try to trigger these memories.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Vivimos en un mundo maravilloso que está lleno de belleza, encanto y aventura. No hay fin a las aventuras que podemos tener, si sólo las buscamos con los ojos abiertos +> Search for the power source of the light. +You walk toward the light. As you get closer, the light gets brighter.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look around but you're starting to get faint and light headed. Your last thought in the split second before you pass out was to wonder if you'll have enough air by the time you hopefully wake up. +> Quickly find a place where you can get fresh air. +You crawl towards the door and manage to prise it open using the little strength that is still available, you reach fresh air just before you suffocate. +> Take the deepest breath ever +You are overcome with relief and feel a surge of energy after breathing the air in. +> Sit there breathing in oxygen for a short while. +You feel better after you take in the air. You slowly get back up.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are overcome with relief and feel a surge of energy after breathing the air in. +> Head back into the suffocating building to keep looking. +You go back down into the building's basement, and your old Maglite flashlight catches a faint reflection on the wall. It is an old sign, coated with years of dust. It reads "Fallout Shelter."<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You crawl towards the door and manage to prise it open using the little strength that is still available, you reach fresh air just before you suffocate. +> Use flashlight to hold door open to regain strength +You are able to get all the way out the door. You see a guy walking toward you. +> keep head down and hope you are not seen +You keep walking, but the guy introduces himself. He seem friendly and you have a conversation about what to do next.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You are able to get all the way out the door. You see a guy walking toward you. +> raise head and ask for help +You call for help but the man looks away. You yell louder to get his attention.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look around but you're starting to get faint and light headed. Your last thought in the split second before you pass out was to wonder if you'll have enough air by the time you hopefully wake up. +> Find a cool washcloth and some water to help you from fainting +You put the washcloth on your neck. It's cool and it perks you up right away. +> Stand up and keep moving. +You move through the corridor, desperately looking for a way out. You come to an intersection. +> turn right at the intersection. +Their is no clear sign of what direction you should be going. You know you are lost. You come to a second intersection.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You move through the corridor, desperately looking for a way out. You come to an intersection. +> turn left at the intersection. +You notice a number of doors lining this hall of the corridor. One hangs partially open.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You put the washcloth on your neck. It's cool and it perks you up right away. +> Take a break and catch your breath. +A light gust of wind hits your face, coming from the North. +> Pump your fist in the air and head off into the wilderness to find some food. he +When you get into the woods, you find a berry bush. You try one hoping that it isn't poisonous.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A light gust of wind hits your face, coming from the North. +> The smell of smoke lingers in the air, go investigate its source. +You discover the remains of a recently extinguished campfire.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You walk for two hours and take a break. You've left the town you were in and are now in a more rural area. There's a farmhouse to your right and a forest on your left. +> go in the farmhouse and look for food. +You try to open the farmhouse front door, but it's locked. There's a broken window on the right and a shed behind the house. +> go through the window into the farmhouse. +You break the rest of the glass in the window and try to carefully crawl through. You cut yourself on the edges as you're climbing in, but you make it inside. +> search the farmhouse for food. +You find meat in the fridge that looks like it's gone bad. You also find a can of peas in the bottom of the pantry. +> Search the farmhouse for tools and utencils. +You find a broom in the closet and a wooden spoon in the cupboard. +> Open the van of peas and use the wooden spoon to eat. +You get the can of peas open and use the wooden spoon to take a bite of them. They taste horrible, but you are so hungry that you hardly notice. +> Keep eating the peas. +As you finish the peas, you feel your stomach begin to turn, and know you are in trouble. You quickly look around for medicine. +> Force yourself to vomit out the peas. +You turn to the nearest bush and release the contents of your stomach, the pain subsides but the hunger returns.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you finish the peas, you feel your stomach begin to turn, and know you are in trouble. You quickly look around for medicine. +> Try to find a place to lie down. +You lie down in a chair in the corner. It's uncomfortable, but you still fall asleep.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You get the can of peas open and use the wooden spoon to take a bite of them. They taste horrible, but you are so hungry that you hardly notice. +> Spit the peas onto the ground and stop eating them. +You begin to feel nauseous and vomit. +> realize this is from eating after a long time of not eating and force down the peas +You fight through the nausea and keep the food down.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You begin to feel nauseous and vomit. +> throw the can and it bounces off a case of vegetables you hurriedly rush over to. +Looking over the vegetables you feel they are by far uneatable.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a broom in the closet and a wooden spoon in the cupboard. +> Sharpen the broom handle into a weapon for protection and use the broom head as a fire starter. +You put the broom into your bag and carry it around in case you need to protect yourself. +> Move to bedroom to find more stuff +As you enter the bedroom, you lead with the sharpened broom handle. Luckily it is empty, and you quickly pack up a blanket and jacket you find in the closet. +> there are thermals to wear in the drawers +It's warm. You are glad that you found the jacket.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you enter the bedroom, you lead with the sharpened broom handle. Luckily it is empty, and you quickly pack up a blanket and jacket you find in the closet. +> there are arrows to pick up on the ground +You walk outside. There is a deadly silence in the air.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you enter the bedroom, you lead with the sharpened broom handle. Luckily it is empty, and you quickly pack up a blanket and jacket you find in the closet. +> Try to fit some shoes in your bag that is quickly filling up. +You open the bag. find some shoe which is Ok for the time being. You wear it<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As you enter the bedroom, you lead with the sharpened broom handle. Luckily it is empty, and you quickly pack up a blanket and jacket you find in the closet. +> Turn around to pick up your broom. +You then hear a loud crashing sound coming from nearbye.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You put the broom into your bag and carry it around in case you need to protect yourself. +> Check that doors are locked +You find one door is unlocked, leading you to a dark staircase. +> go down the stairs +You walk down the dark staircase, cobwebs choking you as you struggle to see.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find one door is unlocked, leading you to a dark staircase. +> close the door without going through the doorway +You continue walking through the building. You hear a noise and pull out your broom.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a broom in the closet and a wooden spoon in the cupboard. +> take the spoon and the broom +A man appears from another room in the house. +> Confront him - maybe he has things you can steal. +You pull out your gun and ask the man what he is doing there. You notice his bag, and tell him to empty it. +> Knock the man unconscious. +You tie the man up to a chair and wait for him to awaken. You ask him questions about supplies and other information that may be valuable.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You pull out your gun and ask the man what he is doing there. You notice his bag, and tell him to empty it. +> Browse through the stuff the man pulled out of the bag. +You find nothing of particular value, just the essentials to survive in this wasteland. You notice the man seems almost afraid.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>A man appears from another room in the house. +> Run away. +You burst through the front door of the house, knowing the man won't take kindly to you stealing the few things he had left. +> Look behind yourself to see if he's chasing you. +You check behind you, but no one is there. You are able to slow down.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You burst through the front door of the house, knowing the man won't take kindly to you stealing the few things he had left. +> Run as fast as you can towards the nearest suitable hiding place. +You come across another home some distance away. You hope you can stay for at least awhile as from the looks of it no one else has been here.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a broom in the closet and a wooden spoon in the cupboard. +> examine the spoon +There's a name carved in the wood: Paolo. +> Take the broom as a weapon +As I round the corner there is a man standing there. I can only assume it is Paolo. +> Ask Paolo to join you in your quest for survival. +Paolo asks what his reward will be.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>As I round the corner there is a man standing there. I can only assume it is Paolo. +> Hit Paolo in the head with the broom, knocking him unconscious, then leave a note thanking him for the gift. +As you leave the feeling of guilt hits you like a bullet. It also passes as quickly as it came along. Fuck Paolo.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There's a name carved in the wood: Paolo. +> Try to find Paolo to be not alone anymore +Seeing signs of another person gives you hope someone may be out there, even if it is just a sign they were there in the past. You call out for Paolo, and listen in anticipation. +> Check another building. +There are no signs of Paolo, or anyone else in the building.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Seeing signs of another person gives you hope someone may be out there, even if it is just a sign they were there in the past. You call out for Paolo, and listen in anticipation. +> Give up as Paolo probably died a long time ago. +You start to get despondent, but quickly realize that you need to continue.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find meat in the fridge that looks like it's gone bad. You also find a can of peas in the bottom of the pantry. +> Search the farmhouse for other usable supplies. +You find a medikit, and a flashlight with no batteries. +> Examine medikit. +The medikit is very basic. Still it can come in handy. You decide to take it with you. +> Put the medikit into your bag and move on +You come across a girl lying on the ground. You walk over to her. +> Check if she is sleeping. +As you approach you see she is indeed sleeping.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You come across a girl lying on the ground. You walk over to her. +> Yell out "Hey get up!" +You stand over the girl and pour water on her.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The medikit is very basic. Still it can come in handy. You decide to take it with you. +> Examine flashlight +It's a large flashlight, if it had batteries it would probably light up a whole room. +> use the flashlight to look for other supplies +You search the other rooms using your flashlight. You come across some bottles of water and put them in your bag.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It's a large flashlight, if it had batteries it would probably light up a whole room. +> use the flashlight to make signals to find other people +You blink the flashlight off and on. Eventually, someone calls out to you. "Who's there?" you ask.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a medikit, and a flashlight with no batteries. +> Take flashlight. +You go back outside, and you notice the sun is setting: it's a bit darker already. +> Look in bag for batteries +You find some batteries and put them into the flashlight and switch in on. +> Search for shelter for the night. +You notice a pile of rubble with some large boards, a coutch and a fallen tree. You are able to move some of the debris and create a crevis inside the wrekage. This looks like it could be a safe place for you to sleep tonight.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find some batteries and put them into the flashlight and switch in on. +> Use flashlight to look around for anything you might have missed due to darkness. +You find an old doll with one missing eye.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You go back outside, and you notice the sun is setting: it's a bit darker already. +> Return inside for the night +It is dark in here so you switch the flashlight on and scan your surroundings looking for a good spot to lie down and sleep. +> Go to a corner and sleep on the floor. +You try sleeping, but the floor is too hard. You look around to see if there is a better place to sleep.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>It is dark in here so you switch the flashlight on and scan your surroundings looking for a good spot to lie down and sleep. +> Look for something comfortable to lay on. +You don't find anything right away, so you lie down in the corner.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a medikit, and a flashlight with no batteries. +> Take the medkit. +You put the medkit in your bag. You know you will probably need it. +> Keep walking. +with things in the backpack is getting prepared for the unusual situations +> Search for any signs of other survivors. +You see footprints leading off to the west.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>with things in the backpack is getting prepared for the unusual situations +> Look for a vehicle that still has fuel. +You find a collection of rusted vehicles, none of which look too promising.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You put the medkit in your bag. You know you will probably need it. +> Take a break to get more energy. +needs rest because things can complicate +> Get back on the road. +A pack of wild crows decends upson you tearing at your flesh. They are hungry, ravenous for blood.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>needs rest because things can complicate +> Try and get some sleep. +will become energertic<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a medikit, and a flashlight with no batteries. +> Take the flashlight and keep looking for batteries. +You find batteries in an old rusty box, but they are the wrong size. +> Look for more batteries. +While you are looking for more batteries, a voice behind you says "Looking for something?" +> Raise your hands slowly. +The voice tells you to lower your hands. "I'm friendly. . It's alright," he says.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>While you are looking for more batteries, a voice behind you says "Looking for something?" +> Turn around in shock. +You see a pretty, though terrified, woman with her gun drawn and pointed at you.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find batteries in an old rusty box, but they are the wrong size. +> Take these batteries and plan to barter them later. +You store the batteries in your bag next to the still useless flashlight. Maybe someone will need them and have the size you're looking for. +> Look for further useful things. +You dig around in the area and find a map and a canteen. You put these in your bag.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You store the batteries in your bag next to the still useless flashlight. Maybe someone will need them and have the size you're looking for. +> Make an inventory of what you have in the bag. +After collecting inventory, you make your way back outside.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find meat in the fridge that looks like it's gone bad. You also find a can of peas in the bottom of the pantry. +> eat meat +Nausea sets in immediately. +> Try shoving fingers down throat to force vomiting. +You throw up the rotten meat on the floor. You feel awful and are more dehydrated and hungry than before. +> start searching for some liquid to drink +You spy a flash of red beneath a collapsed wall. It is a precious can of Coca-Cola. It is worth a good bit in trade, but you guzzle it down nonetheless. +> Continue to search through the rubble of the collapsed wall. +You find a plethora of boxes of macaroni and cheese. It's the kind of macaroni and cheese that you only need to add water to.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You spy a flash of red beneath a collapsed wall. It is a precious can of Coca-Cola. It is worth a good bit in trade, but you guzzle it down nonetheless. +> Put the empty can in your backpack. +You intend on using the empty can for scrap metal later on.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You throw up the rotten meat on the floor. You feel awful and are more dehydrated and hungry than before. +> try calling out for help +No one answers from the darkness. +> there are potions everywhere that are not marked +You open the largest bottle to see what is inside, sniffing cautiously.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No one answers from the darkness. +> there is a response from far away +You shout again, hoping to hear more.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No one answers from the darkness. +> Set the meat outside as bait. +You here someone Call out to you<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>No one answers from the darkness. +> Scream out in agony and defeat. +You pass out. The pain is too much to bear.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Nausea sets in immediately. +> Find a good place to rest until the nausea passes, or sickness worsens. +You lay down on the floor and fall asleep +> Rest until I feel better +When you awaken the sun is bright. It is morning. +> Head for the forest and find something to forage. +While hunting for berries and fruit you stumble upon a pond. You decide to make a fishing rod.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When you awaken the sun is bright. It is morning. +> Head towards the decaying city to scavenge for the last scraps of food and supplies. +You discover some canned goods below some rubble.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You lay down on the floor and fall asleep +> Panic and look for people +There is no one to be found. You take a few deep breaths and try to calm yourself. +> Yell out as loud as you can "Anybody out there??" +You don't hear anyone right away.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>There is no one to be found. You take a few deep breaths and try to calm yourself. +> Come to terms with your loneliness. +You realize that if you are to live on your own, you need to find a way to survive and gather the necessities of life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Nausea sets in immediately. +> Expel the rotten meat from your body. +You put the can of peas in your backpack, right now you're feeling too sick to eat them. +> pretend death by starving, eat the rotten meat +The rotten meat sets off another wave of nausea, but you keep it down this time. The apocalypse has done wonders for fortifying your guts. +> Walk out of the room. +You leave the room and head outside. There is a cool breeze and it feels much better there.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The rotten meat sets off another wave of nausea, but you keep it down this time. The apocalypse has done wonders for fortifying your guts. +> Burp loudly. +You begin to vomit uncontrollably<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You put the can of peas in your backpack, right now you're feeling too sick to eat them. +> Eat the peas later +You wait until the nausea subsides and for your hunger to return before prying open your can of peas to eat them as you continue to look for supplies. +> Throw up because you hate peas. +You wipe the vomit away from your mouth and begin to feel dizzy.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You wait until the nausea subsides and for your hunger to return before prying open your can of peas to eat them as you continue to look for supplies. +> Use the can to store your powerstones you find. +You find gauze and bandages in a medicine cabinet along with some acetaminophen. It's expired, but you put it in your pack anyways.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Nausea sets in immediately. +> Try to eat the peas to alleviate the nausea. +You take a bite of the peas, but your stomach turns. You look away as you empty your stomach out on the ground. +> Find more food. +You quickly rush to the other side of the store to see if anything else remained. You see a box of crackers under a shelf, and eat them, now hungrier than ever, despite the nausea. +> Check the store storage room to see if there are any items. +You feel a little stronger and walk over to the storage room to search for essentials, including medicine.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You quickly rush to the other side of the store to see if anything else remained. You see a box of crackers under a shelf, and eat them, now hungrier than ever, despite the nausea. +> Walk to the next store and search it. +You look over all the shelves at the next store. You manage to find a ton of food there. You laugh, knowing that you found the jackpot.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You take a bite of the peas, but your stomach turns. You look away as you empty your stomach out on the ground. +> Go to sleep. +When you wake up, your stomach still hurts, but you feel more energetic. +> Lick the food off of the ground. +After eating, you feel nauseous.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>When you wake up, your stomach still hurts, but you feel more energetic. +> Use the can as a hat. +The can makes a poor hat, but you re-use it to collect some berries growing along the side of the road.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find meat in the fridge that looks like it's gone bad. You also find a can of peas in the bottom of the pantry. +> eat peas +The peas were delicious. +> Consider eating the meat too. +You do not eat the meat because you don't want to get sick and not be able to scavenge. +> Use the meat as bait to catch prey. +You figure animals might have stronger stomachs, and with your bow and arrow in hand, you leave the meat near the edge of the woods, and hide behind the nearest shed. +> a friendly dog comes to sniff the meat and becomes a companion +You realize that there is a apple tree right there.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You figure animals might have stronger stomachs, and with your bow and arrow in hand, you leave the meat near the edge of the woods, and hide behind the nearest shed. +> a mean and growling dog sniffs at the meat +You back away from the dog. He might need the meat more than you do.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You figure animals might have stronger stomachs, and with your bow and arrow in hand, you leave the meat near the edge of the woods, and hide behind the nearest shed. +> Fire at the first animal that comes, no matter what. +You hear a rustle. You shoot at the shadowy figure. A person yells out. What have you done?<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You figure animals might have stronger stomachs, and with your bow and arrow in hand, you leave the meat near the edge of the woods, and hide behind the nearest shed. +> Take a nap while you wait. +You are awoken by the sounds of broken twigs close by.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You do not eat the meat because you don't want to get sick and not be able to scavenge. +> Look for something else to eat. +You find a can of peaches in a abandoned building. You open it. +> Eat one slice of peach to see if it's still good. +You wait 10 minutes. You feel fine. You eat the rest of the peaches like they are candy from heaven.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You find a can of peaches in a abandoned building. You open it. +> Smell the peaches. +The peaches smell okay. You look around for a utinsil to eat them with.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The peas were delicious. +> Leave the meat and look for food elsewhere. +You know the meat was probably bad, but your stomach still rumbles. You hope that you can find some more food elsewhere. +> Search for fire making material +Inside a partially collapsed building, you find furniture, lots of it. It must have been a furniture store. To think, people paid good money for this stuff. Now money no longer matters, and all this fancy furniture is good for is burning. +> Note the location of the furniture store in your notebook, it's a good place to sleep. +You continue down the abandoned street, looking for signs of life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>Inside a partially collapsed building, you find furniture, lots of it. It must have been a furniture store. To think, people paid good money for this stuff. Now money no longer matters, and all this fancy furniture is good for is burning. +> Find dining chairs to break into firewood. +The chairs break easily and you find yourself highly ammused for the first time in days smashing the chairs into pieces.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know the meat was probably bad, but your stomach still rumbles. You hope that you can find some more food elsewhere. +> Wrap meat and put in knapsack for future cooking +as a result of not finding any other food i done it and it was prepared nice +> Try to cook the meat over a fire. +You cook the meat thouroughly and enjoy your meal.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>as a result of not finding any other food i done it and it was prepared nice +> Smell the meat to see how bad it is. +The meat smells sulfur, like rotten eggs.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The peas were delicious. +> Examine meat. +The meat is smelling bad, but you decide not to throw it away: it may be useful as bait, or for something else. +> put the meat in your backpack +The scent of the meat attracts insects and they swarm around your head. +> decide to cook it and light a fire +The fire is lit. You put the meat on a twig and cook it over the fire. You take a bite and spit it out. It's horrible.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The scent of the meat attracts insects and they swarm around your head. +> throw it down disgusted. +You abandon the meat, it isn't worth the risk.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The meat is smelling bad, but you decide not to throw it away: it may be useful as bait, or for something else. +> cook the meat immediately so it doesnt spoil anymore +You store the meat away and venture to the nearest trader. You exchange part of the meat for the new universal currency, 5.56 rounds, of which you receive 10. That's 10 more than you had for your battered AR rifle. +> Ask the trader what they have for sale. +The trader shows you what they have. You look over the items.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You store the meat away and venture to the nearest trader. You exchange part of the meat for the new universal currency, 5.56 rounds, of which you receive 10. That's 10 more than you had for your battered AR rifle. +> Try to start a business deal with the trader where you provide goods in exchange for food. +Trader wants to see more food before agreeing to trade.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>The peas were delicious. +> Look behind fridge. +You look behind the fridge and find several other cans. You wonder if the cans may have fallen behind the fridge. You stuff them into your bag. +> continue searching for more food +You dare to open the fridge, but only encounter a horrible smell. You close the door and continue the search. +> try to move the fridge +It's too heavy. You begin to look around for a dolly to move it with.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You dare to open the fridge, but only encounter a horrible smell. You close the door and continue the search. +> The fridge door pops open and rotten food falls out. +You can hear the quick approach of wild animals who have been drawn by the smell of rotting food.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You look behind the fridge and find several other cans. You wonder if the cans may have fallen behind the fridge. You stuff them into your bag. +> go outside and open a can of peas +You know you should ration, but the peas were so delicious, you decide to have another can. With enough food in your bag, now, you head outside to enjoy some sun as you continue your lunch. Luckily, these peas look as appetizing as the last can. +> Look for water. +Take a moment to reflect upon life.<|endoftext|> +<|startoftext|>You know you should ration, but the peas were so delicious, you decide to have another can. With enough food in your bag, now, you head outside to enjoy some sun as you continue your lunch. Luckily, these peas look as appetizing as the last can. +> Take some time to enjoy the moment. +It's a nice day. Too bad you have work to do.<|endoftext|>